JP2024071589A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can improve the throwing of a gaming ball. [Solution] A guide means H820 for throwing a gaming ball has a recess H821a1 formed in a back portion H821a that forms a wall portion on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the launch path of the gaming ball. If the thrown gaming ball moves wildly, the reaction force in the opposite direction to the abutment direction can be weakened by making the gaming ball abut against the recess H821a1. This makes it possible to prevent the gaming ball being thrown through the guide means H820 from continuing to be thrown in a wild state. As a result, the gaming ball can be stably thrown to the playing area of the gaming board H13. [Selected Figure] Figure 1901

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine is known that includes a ball-throwing means configured to be able to throw a gaming ball, and a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball-throwing means (Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-221847 A

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine left room for improvement in terms of throwing the gaming ball.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the throwing of gaming balls.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is provided with a ball-throwing means configured to be capable of throwing a gaming ball, a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball-throwing means, and a suppression means configured to be capable of suppressing a reaction force acting in the contact direction on a gaming ball that has come into contact with the inner surface of the flow path means.

The gaming machine described in claim 2 is the gaming machine described in claim 1, in which the suppression means is configured as a recess recessed into at least a portion of the inner surface of the flow passage means.

The gaming machine described in claim 3 is the gaming machine described in claim 2, in which the recess is recessed in at least a part of the inner surface on one side of the flow passage means and at least a part of the inner surface on the other side of the flow passage means.

The gaming machine described in claim 1 can improve the throwing of the gaming ball.

The gaming machine described in claim 2 can improve the throwing of the game ball in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in claim 1.

The gaming machine described in claim 3 can improve the throwing of the gaming ball in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in claim 2.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. A front oblique view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. 13A and 13B are front oblique views of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded rear oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear oblique view of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and winnings for normal patterns. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; A front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. A rear view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. A rear view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the first operating unit in the extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotating member; 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 4A and 4B are front views of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). 1A to 1C are front views of the performance device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in a time series. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. FIG. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. A cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member, and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the inner member of the sorting device. 1 is a top view of the middle member, the state switching device, the sliding displacement member and the lower member. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. 13A and 13B are side views of the slide displacement member and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion. 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13 is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. FIG. A front oblique view of the first decorative rotating member and the second decorative rotating member. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 1 is a schematic front view showing the guide slot, the rectangular box portion, and the protruding decorative portion. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. FIG. 13 is a front view of the second operating unit in the extended state. A cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94. FIG. 4 is a front view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 1A is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a third operating unit, illustrating the displacement of a metal bar and an intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 4A is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15 . 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views of the sorting device according to the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the third flow path component, the probability change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member, which are schematic views showing the configuration downstream of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of a sorting device according to a fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . A cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a sorting device according to a seventh embodiment. A cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device provided in the front-view area of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in a first control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a reach is achieved during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the execution of a normal pattern fluctuation during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a chance zone is set during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is temporarily stopped during a special variation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted during a special variation performance executed while the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device has been acquired in the first control example. This figure shows an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted in a special variable performance that is executed when the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example has not been acquired. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the game state indication effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and a normal state is set, during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period); (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period) in the first control example, the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device, the normal state is set internally, and a (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a first special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a second special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot in the first control example, (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot in the first control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of a big win game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the content of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters in the first control example. 4A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 1 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of a normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for special bonuses and time reductions set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the normal special chart 2 performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special bonus performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the continuous warning execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the V notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the probability change state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on in a first control example. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A in the first control example, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram illustrating rear surfaces B to D in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the general map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in the second control example and the display screen, and (b) and (c) are figures showing an example of a display presentation executed when the display of the main pattern image layer is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern image layer is set to on in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main sea pattern used when a sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main mountain image used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set in the second control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the sub-pattern pre-stored in the character memory area in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main variable pattern in the second control example. A timing chart showing a schematic flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern, sub-pattern) in the second control example. (a) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the change pattern used in the performance example in the second control example, (b) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the normal performance in the second control example, (c) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the reach line preview performance in the second control example, and (d) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the preview performance in which the direction of change of the sub-pattern in the second control example is different from normal. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in a modified example of the second control example and the display screen, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure near a specific winning port of the variable winning device of the gaming board of a pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the specific winning port in the third control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that enters a specific winning port in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a V round process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the update process during a jackpot executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall-related processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A figure showing an example of a display presentation in the second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the game board of a pachinko machine. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the ending screen of a jackpot game in the fifth control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during chance time in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen at the end of chance time in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed at the start of the pull-back zone in the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed when a time-saving win is won during the pull-back zone in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the extended time executed when a long time reduction is set in the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed during the long time reduction in the fifth control example reaches 9,900. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen for preparation time that is executed during the time-saving state after the chance time ends in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed in the pull-back zone in the fifth control example and the content indicated by each background, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of suggestion aspects during the pull-back mode in the fifth control example and the suggestion content indicated by each suggestion aspect. A diagram showing a game flow in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in a fifth control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the 1st win random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the 2nd win random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time-saving win random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 5 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 5 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the fifth control example. 5A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the five tables for selecting a variation pattern set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the five tables for normal and second special variation in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the five tables for special rate and time reduction in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the five tables for time reduction type selection set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a pullback mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a suggested mode selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing a status command receiving process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing a pullback mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the second special probability state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a variable display screen when the result of the special pattern 1 lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving win in the normal state in the first modified example of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the result of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) is a time-saving win in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for ordinary patterns) in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the time-saving state when the variable time of special chart 1 is set to 30 seconds in the normal state in the first variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the time-saving state in the first variant of the fifth control example has ended. A figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is won with special chart 2 reserved during the promotion chance zone in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving random number 5a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving type selection 5a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 5a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 5a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the chance time acquisition effect executed when a jackpot that grants the first time-saving state is won in the special chart 1 drawing during the normal state in the second variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the chance time acquisition effect executed when a time-saving state that grants the second time-saving state is won in the special chart 1 drawing during the normal state in the second variant of the fifth control example. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation pattern when a jackpot is won and a fluctuation pattern when a time-saving win is won in the second variant of the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 5b table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot 5b table in the second modified example of the fifth control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving type selection 5b table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when time reduction A is set in the sixth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when time reduction B is set in the sixth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state in the sixth control example, and the remaining number of time-saving wins increases, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state in the sixth control example, and the remaining number of time-saving wins decreases. A diagram showing the game flow in the sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 6 random number tables per time reduction set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 6 time reduction type selection tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the six tables for the jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the mode-specific performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving B performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A partially enlarged view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A front oblique view of the V winning device in the seventh control example. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the seventh control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the seventh control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example when the opening and closing door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example when it is open. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving lottery result suggestion display is executed during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is suggested during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when indicating that the time-saving feature has not been won during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when a duplicate win has been won in the seventh control example. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when both the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery are won in the seventh control example, (b) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is won or the jackpot is not won in the seventh control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is not won but the jackpot is won in the seventh control example. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the seventh control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the first special pattern random number 7 table in the seventh control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the second special pattern random number 7 table in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving grant 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table 7 set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the variation pattern 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variable pattern table 7 in the seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example, and (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the lottery result notification mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A diagram showing the game flow in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win time-saving update process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. This is a flowchart showing the small win control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing special chart 1 performance mode setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a modified configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. 13A to 13B are diagrams showing a schematic diagram of the internal structure of a sorting unit 1064 of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when special pattern 2 reserve is consecutively obtained by overflow winning during an unfavorable time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during a normal pattern long win game displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when suggesting the end of an unfavorable time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the ending of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the eighth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot type selection 8 table in the eighth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a time-saving random number 8 table in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 8 tables for special rate and time reduction in the 8th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 8 tables for time reduction type selection in the 8th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the pre-reading hold mode selection table in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the start winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an eighth control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing ending processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the advance winning detection process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 9th control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal winning game when the normal winning opening pattern A is set in the 9th control example. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal winning game when the normal winning opening pattern B is set in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a game flow indicating the transition of the game state in the ninth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a time-saving pattern is won in the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during heaven mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the ninth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during space mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during challenge mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 9th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st win random number 9 table in the 9th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 9 table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal map type selection 9 table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the ninth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the expectation level selection table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status update process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. A flowchart showing a time-saving related process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A flowchart showing a non-powered status management process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a time-saving presentation screen after a special jackpot on special chart 1 during normal play, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during a special jackpot on special chart 2, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a final change screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when the special pattern 2 reserve accumulates to MAX during the super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a treasure chest opening presentation screen during super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a final change screen during super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. A schematic diagram showing a game flow indicating the transition of the game state in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 10 table, which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 10 table, which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 10 in the 10th control example. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time-saving granting table in a tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final change performance selection table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notification target selection table in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. A flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in an eleventh control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a demo screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 11th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a screen during normal right-hit play displayed on the third pattern display device in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the twelfth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 12th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the time-saving winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the small winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the 12th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot 12 table, which is part of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the 12th control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 2 Jackpot 12 Table, which is part of the Jackpot Type Selection 12 Table in the 12th control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 12 in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern table, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern table, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for time-saving winning fluctuation state, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the game status update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation execution process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 12 of FIG. 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the small prize lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation execution process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 12 of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 small win stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. 13(a) and 13(b) are figures showing an example of a ceiling reaching suggestion display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a ceiling reaching variation performance screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a ceiling mid-performance screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example. A figure showing an example of a ceiling add-on performance screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example. A transition diagram showing the flow of transitions between each game state in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving winning random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 13 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the time-saving type selection table 13 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving winning table 13 in the 13th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the ceiling table 13 in the 13th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the ceiling-reaching performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the time-saving lottery process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 13 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a thirteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a status command receiving process 13 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 13th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a game status suggestion display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 13th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen after it has been notified that the first time-saving state has been set in the game status suggestion display in the first variant of the 13th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 13a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the 13th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving winning 13a table in the first variant of the 13th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 13th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the game status indication performance selection 13a table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first modified example of the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 13a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 13a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 13th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example when entering the ceiling activation mode, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a performance screen during the ceiling activation mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example when entering the super ceiling activation mode, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example when entering the time-saving mode during the ceiling activation mode. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 14th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 14th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 14 time-saving random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 14th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the ceiling 14 table in the 14th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 14th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourteenth control example. A flowchart showing a status command receiving process 14 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a heart-pounding zone entry screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 14th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a notification screen indicating that a time-saving mode will be entered immediately after entering the heart-pounding zone, displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 14th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 14th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the provisions of the time-saving winning table 14a in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 14th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 14th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the exciting zone performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first modified example of the 14th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 14a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the 14th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a ceiling determination process 14a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 14a executed by the MPU in the main control device in a first modified example of the fourteenth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 14th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 14a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 14th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen at the end of the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during special pattern 2 change in the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a special pattern 2 change screen during the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the 2nd win random number 15 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving win random number 15 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 15 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the 15 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the 15th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the 15 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the 15th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving type selection table 15 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the keep zone performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example. 15 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. 15 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. A flowchart showing the second special probability state presentation setting process 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 15th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 15th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 15th control example. 17A is a diagram illustrating the appearance of the island equipment when multiple pachinko machines connected to a data display device in the 16th embodiment are lined up in a hall, and FIG. 17B is a diagram showing an example of the display of various data on the data display unit of the data display device in the 16th embodiment. (a) is a figure showing the viewing state of the data display device during a jackpot game state in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the viewing state of the data display device when the game transitions to a time-saving state for normal patterns after the jackpot ends in the 16th control example. A figure showing the visual appearance of the data display device during the third time-saving state, which is set based on reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws in the 16th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a provocative effect of a data display device linked effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation form of a jackpot notification effect linked to the data display device displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a small win or a special big win is won in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the variable display mode executed at the ceiling lottery number in the 16th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode of a time-saving activation prompting effect in the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode of a time-saving activation effect linked to the data display device displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example. 16(a) is a diagram showing a list of hold change modes in the 16th control example, and FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing conditions under which the hold change presentation is suppressed in the 16th control example. A diagram showing a method of transitioning between each game state in the 16th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a data display device and a hall computer electrically connected to the pachinko machine in the 16th control example via an external output terminal board. A diagram showing the types of external output signals output from the external output terminal board in the sixteenth control example. A figure showing an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board during normal play in the 16th control example. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when power is turned on in the sixteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variable pattern selection 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal 16 table in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. A diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the hold mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving suggestion performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 16(a) is a flowchart showing the outer end output setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error signal processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing out ball detection signal processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing start port signal processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the open signal processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a start-up signal output process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 16 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 16th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a status command receiving process 16 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 16th control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing small win related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the general map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the data display device in the sixteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a display device signal receiving process executed by an MPU in the data display device in the sixteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a signal reception process executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the comparison process upon power recovery executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode during time-saving state B, which is set when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached in the 17th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when transitioning from time-saving state B to time-saving state A in the 17th control example. A figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a jackpot is won during time-saving state B in the 17th control example. A diagram showing a method of transitioning between each game state in the 17th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the 17 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the 17th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the 17 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the second winning random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variable pattern 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first time-saving table in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small win random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small win type selection 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the time-saving type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the small prize lottery process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. This is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 off-axis stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 off-axis stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. A partially enlarged view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. A front oblique view of the V winning device in the 18th control example. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the 18th control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 18th control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 18th control example when the opening and closing door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 18th control example when the V winning opening is open. (a) is a figure showing an example of a V icon acquisition presentation screen executed during the ending period of a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a battle presentation screen when the V reservation is consumed on the fourth change of the special chart after the end of a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a V icon is activated during a battle presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen for a battle presentation when a V reservation is present among the reservations displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the 1st winning random number 18 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the 18th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special pattern 1 random number 18 table in the 18th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special pattern 2 random number 18 table in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 18 table in the 18th control example, (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 18 table in the 18th control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving granting 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table 18 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal variation pattern 18 table in the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variable pattern table 18 in the 18th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving type selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the presentation mode selection 18 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the time-saving presentation mode setting A table in the 18th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the time-saving presentation mode setting B table in the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic representation of the specified contents of the V icon acquisition performance setting table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. A diagram showing the game flow in the 18th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. This is a flowchart showing the small win time-saving update process 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 18 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an 18th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the V icon acquisition performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the ending processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode selection process 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a V icon acquisition display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a V icon is activated during the special pattern change of a small win A displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 18th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a V icon is activated during the special pattern change of a small win B winning displayed on the third pattern display device in the first modified example of the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a V icon activation cancellation presentation screen when a new V reserve is acquired during the special pattern change of a small win B winning displayed on the third pattern display device in the first modified example of the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 18th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the V icon display mode setting table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 18th control example. A flowchart showing a V icon acquisition performance setting process a executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 18th control example. A flowchart showing an ending process a executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving performance mode setting process a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 18th control example. This is a front view of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the 16th control example, in which the upper gimmick is positioned in an extended position. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation is executed in a modified example of the 16th control example, and a jackpot is initiated with the upper role positioned in the extended position, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation is executed in a modified example of the 16th control example, and the timing arrives when a jackpot is actually notified. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 15th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen at the end of the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a state transition variation discarding process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example. A flowchart showing the second special probability state presentation setting process 15a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a variable display mode executed by the third pattern display device when the lottery result during normal play in the 19th control example corresponds to a time-saving pattern winning special pattern drawing. (a) is a figure showing an example of an additional effect executed in the third pattern display device during chance time in the 19th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of an end waiting effect executed when the remaining number of chance times in the 19th control example is less than 10. A figure showing an example of a chance time end presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 19th control example. This figure shows the transition of the presentation pattern when a special pattern lottery performed 25 times before the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached in the 19th control example, and a time-saving pattern for 50 times of time-saving is won. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a variable display mode for showing the result of the first special pattern drawing performed after the ceiling number of drawing attempts is reached in the 19th control example. 17A and 17B are figures showing an example of a ceiling-raising effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 19th control example. A figure showing an example of a ceiling-teasing effect that is executed after the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws has ended at least once in the 19th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example. 19(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the ceiling tilt table in the 19th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the ceiling reaching table in the 19th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the time-saving type selection 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 19 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 19th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 19th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the setting value control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the ceiling-related performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the variable display mode when the result of the special chart lottery executed for the first time after power-on accompanied by a RAM clear operation in the 20th control example is a small win. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 20th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 20th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario 20 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 20th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the post-win table in the 20th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for use after a small win in the 20th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for reaching the ceiling in the 20th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 off-axis stop processing 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device in the 21st control example between the end of the chance time and the consumption of all reserved balls of the second special pattern that were reserved at the end of the chance time, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device in the 21st control example while the number of special pattern drawing rounds is within 20 after the end of the chance time. A figure showing an example of a presentation mode when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached during a special mode in the 21st control example. A figure showing the transition of the presentation style after the end of the chance time in the 21st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 21st control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 21st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 21 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 21st control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for notifying the end of time-saving in the 21st control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for after the end of time-saving in the 21st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 21st control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the table for use after a win in the 21st control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the table for use after reaching the ceiling in the 21st control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for after the time reduction ends in the 21st control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 21 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example. A flowchart showing the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example. A front view of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A rear view of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. 23A is a front view of the effect button of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example, and FIG. 23B is a front view of the selection button of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the decorative movable part of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example is in a stored state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the decorative movable part of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example is in a movable state. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the 22nd control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 22nd control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during special pattern change when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is stored, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display screen 1 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is movable and the reserved color is changed. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 2 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is movable and the reserved color is changed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 3 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is movable and the reserved color is changed. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is changed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display screen 1 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is moved and part of the reserved color is transferred to the adjacent reserved color. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display screen 2 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example moves and part of the reserved color moves to the adjacent reserved area, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display screen when the reel is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is changed. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example moves and the reserved pattern changes independently, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example changes independently. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the relationship between the color of the reserved pattern and the expected probability of winning a jackpot in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the variable pattern of the color of the reserved pattern in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a demo screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a light intensity adjustment screen (with reel) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of an adjustment end screen when the decision button displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is operated, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when special pattern variation is started during light intensity adjustment displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. A figure showing an example of a light intensity adjustment screen during a prohibited role play displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example when the shutter closing reach begins, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example when the shutter closing reach continues. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the sixth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a capsule is obtained at the third stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a capsule obtained at the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is released. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a branching effect is executed during a reach effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen at the end of a special movie when a button operation is performed during a branching effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. A figure showing an example of a display screen at the end of a special movie if no button is operated during the branching performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. 11 is a timing chart showing a schematic relationship between the special movie presentation time and the special chart change time in the 22nd control example, where (a) is a timing chart when no button operation is performed during the branching presentation in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a timing chart when a button operation is performed during the branching presentation in the 22nd control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the twenty-second control example. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 22nd control example. FIG. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table in the 22nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table in the 22nd control example, (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (normal) variation pattern table in the 22nd control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (high probability, time-saving) variation pattern table in the 22nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the reserve change performance lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the reserve color selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the hold change scenario selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the shutter closing reach selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the operation scenario table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. This is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a notification process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the above process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing command determination processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the status command receiving process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the hold display setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the stop command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the ending process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the hold performance execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the decision button operation process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the performance button operation processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a change operation to chance up mode is performed during the second half of the variable performance period when normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example is set, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a change operation to chance up mode is performed during the first half of the variable performance period when normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is set. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a mode is selected during a miss fluctuation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a mode is selected during a jackpot fluctuation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the presentation mode selection area during a miss fluctuation in the 23rd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the presentation mode selection area during a jackpot fluctuation in the 22nd control example. This figure shows an example of a presentation when the decision button for switching to chance up mode is operated during the latter half of the variation presentation period in the jackpot variation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel moves during the change of the special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display screen 1 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example is completely closed. A figure showing an example of the display screen 2 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example is completely closed. This is a timing chart showing the flow of setting the changing performance during the special chart change when the performance custom selection operation is not performed during the special chart change in the 23rd control example. This is a timing chart showing the relationship between the performance custom selection operation and the flow for setting the changing performance during the special chart change when a performance custom selection operation is executed during the special chart change in the 23rd control example and the performance mode is changed during the special chart change. This is a timing chart showing the relationship between the performance custom selection operation and the flow for setting the changing performance during the special chart change when executing a performance custom selection operation during the special chart change and switching from the next change in the 23rd control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the performance custom information table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the second half preview performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the hold performance execution process 23 at the start of fluctuation, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the performance custom selection process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the decision button operation process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the performance customization execution process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance update process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A rear view of the pachinko machine in the 24th control example. 24. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for changing settings in the 24th control example, and (e) to (g) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for confirming settings in the 24th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a character corresponding to the previous stopped symbol converses when the special symbol starts to change in the 24th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation in which the next change starts after symbols stop in a special combination (7 reach miss) in the 24th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a character corresponding to a stopped pattern is talking during a demo performance executed in the 24th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a character is talking while the voice is fixed during a demo performance executed in the 24th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a reserve color change precursor display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example, (b) is a figure showing an example of a reserve color change precursor display screen (when a special pattern stops) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example, (c) is a figure showing an example of a reserve shift chance performance display screen 1 (jump) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example, and (d) is a figure showing an example of a reserve shift chance performance display screen 2 (high speed) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the audio output device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the special pattern jackpot random number table set in the ROM of the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the voice command selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the pending action selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within the audio output device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio output device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a startup process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the setting value control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the start-up process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the standby processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol type setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a stop command process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the hold effect execution process 24 at the start of fluctuation, which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the pending action determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-fourth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an audio setting process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in a 24th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a pattern stock reach starts, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when pattern stock is completed, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example disappears from the screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reach pattern is switched to the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the liquid crystal display of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the auxiliary image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the sub-image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example is normally displayed and the transmittance of the auxiliary image layer is 100%, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example is displayed at scale A and the transmittance of the auxiliary image layer is 0%. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 25th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the pattern stock reach selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 25th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration within the display control device of a pachinko machine in the 25th control example. A figure showing a schematic diagram of an example of a drawing list in the 25th control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation mode determination process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 25th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 25 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the 25th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a processing command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the 25th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a drawing process 25 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a pattern stock reach starts, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when pattern stock is completed, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example moves, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a new reach line is formed from the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a gaming machine in a movable state of the great sword feature in a modified example of the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when special pattern variation is started during adjustment of the light intensity displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a modified example of the shutter closing reach is developed and displayed on the third display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a modified example of the shutter closing reach is developed and displayed on the third pattern display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a branching performance of a shutter closing reach is performed, which is displayed on the third display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the shutter is completely opened, which is displayed on the third pattern display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a battle performance start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a preemptive attack screen for the battle performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a battle effect button press instruction screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a battle effect button repeated pressing screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example. A figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the third pattern display device when the battle effect button is pressed and held in the 26th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the flow of gauge reduction when the button displayed on the third pattern display device is repeatedly pressed in the 26th control example. (a) to (d) are figures showing an example of the flow of gauge reduction when a button displayed on the third pattern display device is pressed and held in the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen at the start of the subjugation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the first start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a first attack screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a second start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the second attack screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the third start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example. A figure showing an example of the third attack screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example. A figure showing an example of a chance-up presentation screen during normal fluctuations displayed on the third pattern display device in the 26th control example. A figure showing the number of times the special pattern changes and the content of the chance-up performance executed in the 26th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the long press performance scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the final HP selection table when a miss is set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the entry lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the provisions of the release lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the additional reduction value selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the chance announcement lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the chance mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the special probability state presentation mode determination process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation mode determination process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the defeat reach presentation decision process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the chance-up performance determination process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the performance button operation processing 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the long press performance setting process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the long press processing 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 27th control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a jackpot opening presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 27th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot opening presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 27th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device during the time-saving state in the 27th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when a remaining time addition effect is executed during the time-saving state in the 27th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when a continuation rate increase effect is executed during the time-saving state in the 27th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when the final judgment performance is executed after the end of the time-saving state in the 27th control example. A figure showing the change over time in the presentation mode after winning the jackpot in the 27th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 27th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 27th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first win random number 27 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the 27th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second win random number 27 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the 27th control example, (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the small win random number 27 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the 27th control example, and (d) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the direct win table in the 27th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the V hit table in the 27th control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 27 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 27th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the S rank table in the 27th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for A rank in the 27th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for one change after the end of time reduction in the 27th control example. 27(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 27th control example, and FIG. 27(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the rush performance for each rank. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 27th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 27th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the rank-up performance table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 27th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the rank-up discrimination table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 game status update processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the small prize lottery process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 game status update processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 off-axis stop processing 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing processing during the final judgment performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 27th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 28th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device during the special probability state in the 28th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when a special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation is started during the special probability state in the 28th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when, in the 28th control example, a special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation is started during a special variable state and the fluctuation time of the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation has elapsed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when, in the 28th control example, a special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation is started during a special variable state and the fluctuation time of the special chart 2 small jackpot fluctuation has elapsed before the fluctuation time of the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation has elapsed. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 28th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 28th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the first win random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the big win type selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small win random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the table for special rate and time reduction in the 28th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the update process at the start of fluctuation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. 23A and 23B are diagrams showing the timing of subtraction of the number of time-saving times in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the update process when fluctuations stop, executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 28th control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 28th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when the special rate super-UP zone is set in the special rate super-UP zone in the 29th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when a pinch effect is executed when a special rate small win variation or a special rate miss variation is executed during the special rate super-UP zone in the 29th control example. This figure shows an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device at the end of a pinch effect executed based on the execution of a special chart 2 small win variation during the special rate super UP zone in the 29th control example. 29(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 29th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 29th control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 29 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 29th control example. 29. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern 29 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 29th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the zone table in the 29th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special rate/time-saving table in the 29th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 29th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 29th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 29 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 29th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 29 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 29th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 29 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 29th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 29 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 29th control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 29 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 29th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device during a special probability state in the 30th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device during a time-saving state in the 30th control example. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 30th control example, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 30th control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 30 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 30th control example. 30A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 30 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 30th control example, FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving table in the 30th control example, and FIG. 30C is a diagram showing the typical contents of the guaranteed variation table in the 30th control example. A flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 30th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the update process 30 at the start of fluctuation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 30th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the update process 30 at the time of fluctuation stoppage executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 30th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 30 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 30th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a status command receiving process 30 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 30th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device in a time-saving state that is set based on the occurrence of a time-saving pattern winning during a normal state in the first variant of the 27th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device in a time-saving state that is reset based on the occurrence of a time-saving pattern winning during a time-saving state in the first variant of the 27th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when a time-saving pattern is won during the time-saving state in the second variant of the 27th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when a rank notification effect is executed during a time-saving state that is reset based on the occurrence of a time-saving pattern winning during the time-saving state in the second variant of the 27th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in a second variant of the 27th control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting processing 27A executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second variant of the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the concealed performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second variant of the 27th control example. A flowchart showing the non-confidential performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second variant of the 27th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a battle presentation start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the first presentation variant of the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a preemptive attack screen for the battle presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the first presentation variant of the 26th control example. 23(a) to (d) are figures showing examples of the display of the long button in the first performance variant of the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first presentation variant of the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of an additional performance start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the second performance variant of the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a screen showing the performance result of the additional performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the second performance variant of the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a pseudo MAX jackpot presentation start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the second presentation variant of the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a pseudo MAX jackpot presentation in progress screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the second presentation variant of the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a pseudo-hold consecutive performance start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the second performance variant of the 26th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a pseudo-hold consecutive performance in-progress screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the second performance variant of the 26th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the second presentation variant of the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 26a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second performance variant of the 26th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 26a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second presentation variant of the 26th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during a special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 31st control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot presentation screen during a special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the 31 table of probability variable fluctuation patterns held in the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 31st control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 31st control example. 31 is a flowchart showing the process 31 for determining the probability of a special state presentation mode executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 31st control example. A front view of a pachinko machine of the 32nd control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine of the 32nd control example. A partially enlarged view of the game board of a pachinko machine of the 32nd control example. A front oblique view of the V winning device of the 32nd control example. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device of the 32nd control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device of the 32nd control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 32nd control example when the opening and closing door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 32nd control example when the V winning opening is open. 13A is a front view of the effect button of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example, and FIG. 13B is a front view of the selection button of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example. A rear view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 32nd control example. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen in the 32nd control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot presentation screen after a normal state jackpot is won, which is displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of an enemy defeat presentation screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a screen during the interval after the end of the second round displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a successful defeat screen during the 6th round (final round) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the third round presentation screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display screen when a button is pressed on Figure 936(a) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. 936(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the button is not pressed in FIG. 936(a) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and FIG. 936(b) is a diagram showing an example of a successful revival presentation screen during the 6th round (final round) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen in the time-saving state (during a rush) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a winning screen in the time-saving state (during a rush) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a small win game screen in the time-saving state (during rush) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a V is won during the initial Aim for V performance period displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. This figure shows an example of a display screen after the initial "Aim for V" performance period has elapsed, following Figure 939 (b) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the final change (miss) in the time-saving state (during a rush) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a pull-back performance screen after the time-saving state ends displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a pull-back performance end screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a rush result display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a NEXT performance screen (second round of a jackpot during a rush) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a NEXT performance result screen (consecutive pending wins, no round promotion) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a NEXT performance result screen (with round promotion) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a NEXT performance result screen (with pending consecutive wins) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a small win game screen during a pending consecutive state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a NEXT performance screen (with pending consecutive states) during a pending consecutive state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. A figure showing an example of a display screen when the number of displayed rounds in a continuous pending sequence displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example exceeds MAX (9 rounds). (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during standby state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a performance mode selection screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a stage transition performance screen during special pattern change displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a stage fixing operation screen during special pattern change displayed on the third pattern display device in the 32nd control example. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the 32nd control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 32nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the thirty-second control example. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special pattern 1 random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special pattern 2 random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example, and FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of a normal variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the special time-saving variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time-saving final variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the defeat number selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the defeat performance mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the additional decrement value selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the performance stage data table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the game environment data table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the small win start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. 33 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the small win time reduction update processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 32nd control example. 33 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. 33 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. 33 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing V passing processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. 13 is a flowchart showing NMI processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. 33 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. 33 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the small win control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing a command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing on-hold information related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the in-round performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the first jackpot related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the subjugation performance mode determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the presentation processing during the first jackpot round executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the first interval performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing small win related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the performance update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the update processing during small win play executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing a fixed mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. A flowchart showing the performance button operation processing performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a small win game screen for reserved players displayed on the third pattern display device in the 33rd control example (when there are no special 2 reserved players), and (b) is a figure showing an example of a small win game screen for reserved players displayed on the third pattern display device in the 33rd control example (when special 2 reserved players are obtained). 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 33rd control example. This is a flowchart showing small win control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 33rd control example. A flowchart showing the small win time reduction update process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 33rd control example. A flowchart showing on-hold information related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 33rd control example. A flowchart showing the hold acquisition processing during a small win executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 33rd control example. A flowchart showing small win related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 33rd control example. A flowchart showing the small win guidance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 33rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the third special chart reserved is acquired during the change of special chart 1 displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen in which the action of only the third special chart reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device is shifted in the 34th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a special pattern 1 stop display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a special pattern 1 first change start screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a hold change action display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example, (b) is a figure showing an example of a hold change time display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example, and (c) is a figure showing an example of a hold shift time display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen before the stage is changed when the pending pattern action is synchronized and displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen after the stage is changed during the pending pattern action is synchronized and displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen before the stage is changed when the pending pattern action is asynchronous, displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example; (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the stage change when the pending pattern action is asynchronous, displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example; and (c) is a figure showing an example of a display screen after the stage is changed when the pending pattern action is asynchronous, displayed on the third pattern display device in the 34th control example. A block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the pending action data table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 34th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing command judgment processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing winning command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing the hold mode determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing the hold performance update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing the changing stage transition processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A flowchart showing a special mode determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 34th control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 35th control example. A partially enlarged view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 35th control example. A front oblique view of the V winning device in the 35th control example. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the 35th control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 35th control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 35th control example when the opening and closing door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 35th control example when the V winning opening is open. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the decorative movable part in the stored position in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the decorative movable part in the 35th control example at its lower limit. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the right middle fallen state of the decorative movable part in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the right middle fallen state and the left falling state of the decorative movable part in the 35th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of a decorative movable part in the 35th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the decorative movable part in the 35th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the bar accessory in the 35th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the bar part in the 35th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the rotating body device in the 35th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the rotating body device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the third pattern row in the 35th control example, and (b) to (e) are diagrams showing schematic diagrams of the stopping pattern of the rotating body device in the 35th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a rescue chance presentation is started and displayed on the third pattern display device in the 35th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a successful rescue chance presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a failed rescue chance presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 35th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 35th control example. 35(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the normal variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the special time-saving variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving final variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the operation scenario selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario A (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario A (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario B (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario B (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario C (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario C (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario D (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario D (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario E (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario E (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario F (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario F (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario G (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario G (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario H (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of operation scenario H (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing command judgment processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing pattern confirmation command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing the rescue chance presentation start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing processing during special scenario execution performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. A flowchart showing the processing during rescue chance presentation executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen at the start of the rescue chance presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 35th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen at the time when the rescue chance presentation is successful displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 35th control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 36th control example. A front view of the decorative movable object operation unit in the 36th control example. 36(a) is a schematic diagram of the operating unit of the logo role object in the 36th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the operating unit of the A role object in the 36th control example. FIG. A schematic diagram of the operating unit of the shutter feature in the 36th control example. A figure showing the state in which the logo character is at its lowering limit in the 36th control example. A figure showing the right middle part of the logo character falling off in the 36th control example. This figure shows the state in which the logo character falls to the middle right and to the left in the 36th control example. This is a diagram showing the state in which the A role is at the upper limit in the 36th control example. A figure showing the closed state of the shutter mechanism in the 36th control example. This figure shows the case where all decorative movable parts are in a movable state in the 36th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the logo device in the 36th control example. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the logo character in the 36th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the bar part in the 36th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the bar part in the 36th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the rotating device in the 36th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the rotating device in the 36th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the operating unit of the A role-playing device in the 36th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the operating unit of the A role-playing device in the 36th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the rising device in the 36th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the rising device in the 36th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the operating unit of the shutter role in the 36th control example. This is an exploded front oblique view of the shutter mechanism in the 36th control example. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the shutter mechanism in the 36th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 3 seconds after the start of a composite presentation of a normal pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 5 seconds after the start of a composite presentation of a normal pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 7 seconds after the start of a composite performance of a normal pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 3 seconds after the start of a performance when a composite performance starts during a reach performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 5 seconds after the start of the composite presentation of alternative pattern 1 displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 7 seconds after the start of the composite presentation of alternative pattern 1 displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 3 seconds after the start of the composite presentation of alternative pattern 2 displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 5 seconds after the start of the composite presentation of alternative pattern 2 displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example. A figure showing an example of a display screen 7 seconds after the start of the composite performance of alternative pattern 2 displayed on the third pattern display device in the 36th control example. This is a timing chart when a composite performance is executed during the pre-reach performance period in the 36th control example. This is a timing chart when a composite presentation of alternative pattern 1 is executed during the reach presentation period in the 36th control example. This is a timing chart when a composite presentation of alternative pattern 2 is executed during the reach presentation period in the 36th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 36th control example. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 36th control example, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 36th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the normal variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the special time-saving variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time-saving final variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the composite performance operation scenario table (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the composite performance operation scenario table (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the composite performance operation scenario table (up and down drive of A role object) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the composite performance operation scenario table (left and right drive of shutter role object) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative operation scenario table (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative operation scenario table (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. 36(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative performance operation scenario table (up and down drive of A reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative operation scenario table (left and right drive of shutter reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second alternative operation scenario table (up and down drive of bar reel) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the second alternative operation scenario table (left and right drive of rotating body reel, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. 36(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second alternative performance operation scenario table (up and down drive of A role object) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the second alternative operation scenario table (left and right drive of shutter role object) set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the composite performance start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the first operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the second operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. A flowchart showing the processing during movement of the reels executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a combined effect of a Gekiatsu effect and a character role executed by the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 36th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during execution of the Gekiatsu effect displayed by the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 36th control example. 1A is a diagram showing the case where the character reel in the first variant of the 36th control example is in motion, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the case where the character reel in the first variant of the 36th control example is in motion. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a composite presentation when a character role is placed in front of the Ki role displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 36th control example, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a composite presentation when a character role is placed behind the Ki role displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 36th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 37th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal variation pattern 1 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal variation pattern 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of table 1 of time-saving variation pattern set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of table 2 of time-saving variation pattern set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variable pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 1 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of State Transition 4 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of State Transition 5 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of State Transition 6 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot transition setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 37th control example. A flowchart showing special winning pattern fluctuation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 37th control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation count subtraction process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 37th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 9 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 38th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal main variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 38th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the main fluctuation pattern table for time reduction set in the ROM of the main control device in the 38th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the additive fluctuation pattern table for normal use set in the ROM of the main control device in the 38th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 38th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a variable time counter set in the RAM of the main control device in the 38th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 38th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change pattern selection process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 38th control example. A flowchart showing the variable time update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 38th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the third pattern change displayed on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen at the start of a delayed performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of an unfolding performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a horizontal rotation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example. A block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the 39th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the chance mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 39th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 39th control example. A flowchart showing the normal performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 39th control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 39th control example. An explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the box pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example. 13A is a diagram showing the correspondence between box patterns and number patterns in the thirty-ninth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a number pattern string display pattern in the thirty-ninth control example. 16(a) to 16(b) are diagrams showing an example of pattern data set in a numeric pattern string in the 39th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a losing pattern stops on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen for a horizontal rotation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example. A figure showing an example of an ending screen of a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the 39th control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine of the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when a time-saving symbol is won in the normal state in the 40th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode of the chance time waiting presentation executed during the period from the transition to the second time-saving state in the 40th control example until the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode when 10 time-saving times are announced during the chance time waiting performance of the 40th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode when a jackpot is won with a reserved ball of the first special pattern during the execution period of the chance time waiting performance of the 40th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode of the variable display presentation when a normal winning symbol B is won during the chance time in the 40th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode of the first suggestion presentation executed during a normal winning game when a normal winning symbol B is won during the chance time in the 40th control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the presentation form of the variable display presentation corresponding to the second special pattern in the 40th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode of the second suggestive presentation executed during a small win game of the second special pattern in the 40th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode set during a rush state in the 40th control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the presentation mode when passing through the through gate during a rush state in the 40th control example. A figure showing the change in presentation style before and after chance time in the 40th control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the correspondence between the state of special patterns and the state of normal patterns during chance time in the 40th control example. A diagram showing the transition method between each game state in the 40th control example. 40(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 40th control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the special pattern 1 random number table in the 40th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the 40th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the normal table in the 40th control example. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving table in the 40th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving granting table in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small win type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the regular win type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 40th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 40th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the waiting performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 40th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern determination process 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. 40 is a flowchart showing the disconnection process 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the failure type determination process 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. This is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. 1A is a flowchart showing the normal hit processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the third end condition determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. 40 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 40 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 40th control example. 40 is a flowchart showing a state command process 40 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 40th control example. A flowchart showing the standby performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 40 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example. A flowchart showing the small win related processing 40 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example. A flowchart showing the general command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 40 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example. A flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 40 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine of the 41st control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when transitioning to time-saving state A after the first win in control example 41, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when the first variable display of the second special pattern begins in time-saving state A. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when, after the first win and transition to time-saving state A in the 41st control example, a specified number of reserved balls of the second special pattern are accumulated and the time-saving end condition is met, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode during the variable display of the second special pattern executed for the first time after time-saving state B is set in the 41st control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when the MAX bonus is won in the 41st control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode of the pseudo-interval presentation executed during the time-saving state C in the 41st control example. A figure showing the correspondence between the transition of the presentation pattern after the first win in the 41st control example and the state of the second special pattern. A figure showing the transition of the presentation pattern from the transition to the MAX bonus mode in the 41st control example until the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the transition to normal mode B. A diagram showing the transition method between each game state in the 41st control example. 4(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 41st control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 41st control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special pattern 1 random number table in the 41st control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the 41st control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 41st control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 41st control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the normal table in the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving table in the 41st control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the MAX bonus table in the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving granting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 41st control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 41st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 41st control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the attack icon selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 41st control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 41st control example. 41 is a flowchart showing the special pattern determination process 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. 41 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the small win time reduction update process 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the reserved ball number determination process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 41st control example. This is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. 41 is a flowchart showing a V passing process 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the processing 41 at the end of a jackpot executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing a command determination process 41 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 41st control example. A flowchart showing the winning information command processing 41 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 41 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the ending command processing 41 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 41 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 41st control example. A figure showing a method of transitioning between each game state in the first variant of the 41st control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first variant of the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the first modified example of the 41st control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first modified example of the 41st control example. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving granting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first modified example of the 41st control example. FIG. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the presentation mode when transitioning to time-saving state A after the first win in the second variant of the 41st control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when transitioning to the time-saving mode or the pull-back mode in the second variant of the 41st control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode of the winning variation presentation in the time-saving state C just before reaching the time-saving limit number of times after transitioning to the MAX bonus mode in the second variant of the 41st control example. A figure showing the correspondence between the changing display of ordinary patterns, winning games of ordinary patterns, and the changing display of special patterns during the time-saving state in the second modified example of the 41st control example. A figure showing a method of transitioning between each game state in the second variant of the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the second modified example of the 41st control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal table in the second modified example of the forty-first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving table in the second variant of the 41st control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the MAX bonus table in the second variant of the 41st control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving granting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second variant of the 41st control example. A flowchart showing special pattern change processing 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example. A flowchart showing a special pattern determination process 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example. 41 is a flowchart showing a disconnection process 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in a second modified example of the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern change pattern selection process 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example. 41 is a flowchart showing a failure type determination process 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in a second modified example of the 41st control example. A flowchart showing normal pattern change processing 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example. A flowchart showing a variable performance setting process 41B executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second variant of the 41st control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 41B executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second variant of the 41st control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of the presentation form of the remaining life stock presentation executed in a jackpot game other than the first jackpot in the 42nd control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode at the time when a rush starts in the 42nd control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when a reach occurs during a rush in the 42nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when a non-V small win is won during a rush in the 42nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when the remaining lives corresponding to all non-V small wins become 0 during a rush in the 42nd control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the presentation form of a remaining life recovery presentation executed when a remaining life increase condition is met during a rush in the 42nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode while the remaining reserve of special chart 2 is being consumed after the end of the rush in control example 42, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when a winning reserve has been acquired after the start of the final time-saving fluctuation in control example 42. A figure showing an example of the presentation mode during invincible mode in the 42nd control example. A diagram showing the transition method between each game state in the 42nd control example. 4(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 42nd control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 42nd control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the 42nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 42nd control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 42nd control example, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal table in the 42nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the time-saving table in the 42nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the time-saving final variation table in the 42nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving grant table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 42nd control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 42nd control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 42nd control example. 42 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 42nd control example. 42 is a flowchart showing the time-saving update process 42 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 42nd control example. 42 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 42 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 42nd control example. A flowchart showing the small win time reduction update process 42 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 42nd control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 42 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 42nd control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving performance setting process 42 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 42nd control example. A flowchart showing the non-V small hit processing performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 42nd control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine of the 43rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during advantageous mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during disadvantageous mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when time-saving A (10 small time-savings) is won during normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when time-saving A (10 small time-savings) is won during advantageous mode (30 remaining time-savings) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when time-saving B (time-saving) is won during normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when time-saving B (time-saving) is won during advantageous mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a presentation during the remaining reserved consumption period after the time-saving pattern stops displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the time-saving period displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a small jackpot is won during the time-saving period displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the ceiling reaching fluctuation during normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the ceiling reaching fluctuation during advantageous mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 43rd control example. A diagram showing the transition method between each game state in the 43rd control example. 4(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 43rd control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 43 table in the 43rd control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 43 table in the 43rd control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 43 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 43rd control example. 4A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 43 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 43rd control example, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal use 43 table in the 43rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving table 43 in the 43rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving granting table 43 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 43rd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection 43 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving type selection 43 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 43rd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 43rd control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 43rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic of the specified contents of the background mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 43rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the performance pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 43rd control example. 43 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 43 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 43rd control example. 43 is a flowchart showing the special pattern determination process 43 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 43rd control example. 43 is a flowchart showing the disconnection process 43 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern change pattern selection process 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 43rd control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the failure type determination process 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 43rd control example. 43 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process 43 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 43rd control example. 43 is a flowchart showing the ceiling update process 43 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing a command determination process 43 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the state command processing 43 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the standby performance setting process 43 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 43 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the process of setting the effect when the time-saving pattern is won, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the process of determining a time-saving pattern for performance, executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 43 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 43rd control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine of the 44th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a win fluctuation screen during time-saving when the time-saving limit has not been reached, displayed on the third pattern display device in the 44th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a win fluctuation screen during time-saving when the time-saving limit has been reached, displayed on the third pattern display device in the 44th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during pseudo left-hand hit (special pattern 2 hit changing) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 44th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen indicating that the time-saving state has ended during pseudo left-hand hit displayed on the third pattern display device in the 44th control example. A block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the main control device in the 44th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 44th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 44 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 44th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern table 44 in the 44th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 44 table in the 44th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 44th control example. 44 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the game status update process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation execution process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 44 of FIG. 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. 44 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. 44 is a flowchart showing the small prize lottery process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation execution process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 44 of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 small win stop processing 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. 44 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process 44 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 44 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 44th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 44th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when time-saving A1 (one small time-saving) is won during normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 45th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen (when time-saving A2 is won) during high-probability mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 45th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when the time-saving group A is won during the high-probability mode, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 45th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when the high-probability mode ends (20 times remaining in the internal second time-saving mode), as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 45th control example. A figure showing an example of a high probability mode transition screen when a miss occurs during normal mode, displayed on the third pattern display device in the 45th control example. 13(a) to 13(h) are diagrams showing the flow of game play and the flow of presentation in the 45th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 45th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 45th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the second performance pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 45th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the ceiling information selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 45th control example. A flowchart showing a command determination process 45 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 45th control example. A flowchart showing the confirmation command processing 45 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 45th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 45 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 45th control example. A flowchart showing the second performance pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 45th control example. 45 is a flowchart showing a ceiling information notification setting process 45 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 45th control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine of the 46th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the chance zone displayed on the third pattern display device in the 46th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a left hit is made through during the chance zone displayed on the third pattern display device in the 46th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 46th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the remaining time reduction number notification selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 46th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 46th control example. A flowchart showing a command determination process 46 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example. A flowchart showing the on-hold information related processing 46 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example. A flowchart showing the confirmation command processing 46 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example. A flowchart showing the through passing processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 46 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example. A flowchart showing the non-time-saving limit performance setting process 46 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 46 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the background mode selection 43a table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant example of the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43b executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second variant of the 43rd control example. A flowchart showing a ceiling state determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second variant of the 43rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the start screen of the final countdown performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 47th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display screen (normal state, time-saving pattern B is won) when the time-saving pattern is won during the final countdown performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 47th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a small jackpot winning screen during the final countdown performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 47th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a final countdown performance end screen (18 remaining time reductions) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 47th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the start screen of the additional performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 47th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display screen (first time-saving state, time-saving pattern A won) when the time-saving pattern is won during the final countdown performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 47th control example. 11A to 11D are diagrams showing the flow of the game state and the flow of the executed presentation in the 47th control example. A diagram showing the transition contents of each game state in the 47th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 47 table in the 47th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 47 table in the 47th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection 47 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 47th control example. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal table 47 in the 47th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving granting table 47 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 47th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table 47 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 47th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving type selection table 47 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 47th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the state command processing 47 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the second time-saving state transition processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 47 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 47 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process 47 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a long battle presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 47th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a combination battle presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 47th control example. A figure showing an example of a display screen of a background change performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 47th control example. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal table 47a in the first modified example of the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 47th control example. A flowchart showing a special background setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 47th control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process 47a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 47th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen for a super reach effect in an additional example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen for a time-saving suggestion effect in an additional example. A figure showing an example of a display screen when switching the presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device in an additional example. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing presentation patterns in additional examples. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board and the operating unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational motion unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational motion unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the rotational motion unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the rotational motion unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a second operating unit. FIG. 13 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a second operating unit; FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational motion unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational motion unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the rotational motion unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the rotational motion unit. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is a rear perspective view of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third operating unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the opening and closing operation unit. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the opening/closing operation unit of the third operation unit. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the opening/closing operation unit of the third operation unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light guide plate unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light guide plate unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. 1415A is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit taken along line MCDXVIa-MCDXVIa in FIG. 1415, and FIG. 1415B is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit taken along line MCDXVIb-MCDXVIb in FIG. 5A to 5F are schematic front views of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. A cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit taken along line MCDXXIII-MCDXXIII in Figure 1422. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a downstream guide member. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the downstream guide member. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a visual recognition appearance changing sheet. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing how the downstream guide member appears when viewed from different directions. FIG. 23 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic rear view of the first operating unit in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic rear view of the first operating unit. 13(a) and 13(b) are cross-sectional views of a ball guide unit in a thirteenth embodiment. 23A and 23B are rear views of the rotational motion unit according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of a flow path front component in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1439(a) is a rear view of the substrate box, and (b) is a side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDXXXIXb in FIG. 1439(a). 1A is a partial front perspective view of a board box, and FIG. 1B is a partial rear perspective view of the board box. 1A and 1B are partial front views of the board box, and 1C and 1D are partial rear views of the board box. 1441(b), (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIIa-MCDXLIIa in FIG. 1441(b), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1441(b). 1A is a partial front view of the board box, and FIG. 1B is a partial rear view of the board box. This is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIV-MCDXLIV in Figure 1443(b). 1A is a partial front view of the board box, and FIG. 1B is a partial rear view of the board box. 14(a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 17th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along line MCDXLVIb-MCDXLVIb in FIG. 1446 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover in the 18th embodiment. (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 19th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLVIIb-MCDXLVIIb in Figure 1447(a), (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLVIIc-MCDXLVIIc in Figure 1447(a), and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLVIId-MCDXLVIId in Figure 1447(a). 14(a) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of a substrate box in the 20th embodiment, corresponding to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in FIG. 1441 (b), and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box in the 21st embodiment. 1449(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the twenty-second embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDXLIXb-MCDXLIXb in FIG. 1449(a). 1450(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box in the 23rd embodiment, (b) is a partial rear view of a substrate box in the 24th embodiment, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along line MCDLc-MCDLc in FIG. 1450(b). 1451(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box in the 25th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along line MCDLIb-MCDLIb in FIG. 1451(a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box. 1452(a) is a front view of the protective cover of the substrate box in the 26th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIIb in FIG. 1452(a), and (c) is a rear view of the protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIIc in FIG. 1452(b). 1453(a) is a rear view of the substrate box, (b) is a side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIIIb in FIG. 1453(a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along line MCDLIIIc-MCDLIIIc in FIG. 1453(b). 1441(a) is a side view of a protective cover of a board box in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1441(b). 1455(a) is a front view of the protective cover of the substrate box in the 28th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLVb in FIG. 1455(a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1441(b). 1441(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1441(b); FIG. 1441(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDLVId in FIG. 1456(c); and FIG. 1456(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDLVId in FIG. 1456(c). 1457(a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover in the 31st embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover along line MCDLVIIb-MCDLVIIb in FIG. 1457(a), and (c) is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 32nd embodiment. 1458(b) is a side view of the protective cover of the substrate box in the 33rd embodiment, FIG. 1458(b) is a side view of the substrate box, and FIG. 1458(c) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLVIIIc-MCDLVIIIc in FIG. 1458(b). 1459(a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the thirty-fourth embodiment, (b) is a partial side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIXb in FIG. 1459(a), and (c) is a rear view of the protective cover. (a) and (c) are rear views of the substrate box in the MCDLXa portion of Figure 1459 (a), (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the MCDLXb-MCDLXb line of Figure 1460 (a), and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the MCDLXd-MCDLXd line of Figure 1460 (c). 1461(a) is a rear view of the board box in the MCDLXa portion of FIG. 1459(a), and FIG. 1461(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box along the line MCDLXIb-MCDLXIb of FIG. 1461(a). (a) is a partial front view of a substrate box in the 35th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb in Figure 1462 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc in Figure 1462 (a). 1462(a) and (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb in FIG. 1462(a), and (b) and (d) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc in FIG. 1462(a). 1464(a), (b) is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 36th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb in FIG. 1464(a), (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc in FIG. 1464(a), (d) is a rear view of the protective cover, and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the protective cover taken along line XCVIe-XCVIe in FIG. 1464(d). (a) is a rear view of the substrate box in the MCDLXVa portion of Figure 1464 (a), (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb line of Figure 1464 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc line of Figure 1464 (a). 1466(a) is a partial front view of the board box in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXVIb-MCDLXVIb in FIG. 1466(a). 1467(a) is a partial front view of the substrate box in the 38th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLXVIIb in FIG. 1467(a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along line MCDLXVIIc-MCDLXVIIc in FIG. 1467(a). 1468(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXVIIIb-MCDLXVIIIb in FIG. 1468(a). A rear view of the protective cover in the fortieth embodiment. 1470(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXXb-MCDLXXb in FIG. 1470(a). 42(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box in the forty-second embodiment, and FIG. 42(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box in the forty-third embodiment. 1472(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the 44th embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXXIIb-MCDLXXIIb in FIG. 1472(a). A partial rear view of the substrate box in the 45th embodiment. 1474(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the 46th embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXXIVb-MCDLXXIVb in FIG. 1474(a). 1A is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box in the 47th embodiment, FIG. 1B is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box in the 48th embodiment, and FIG. 1C is a partial rear view of a protective cover of the substrate box in the 49th embodiment. A front view of a pachinko machine in the 50th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the path configuration device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the path configuration device. 14(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the path configuration device taken along line MCDLXXXIIa-MCDLXXXIIa in FIG. 1481. 14(a) and (b) are partial front views of a path configuration device in the range MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1481. 14(a) and (b) are partial front views of a path configuration device in the range MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1481. 14(a) and (b) are partial front views of a path configuration device in the range MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1481. 14(a) and (b) are partial front views of a path configuration device in the range MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1481. FIG. 1477 is a partial front view of the game board in the range MCDLXXXVII. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and winnings for normal patterns. 11A to 11D are diagrams showing an example of detection of the passage of a ball through a normal winning opening (through gate) and a time-counted change in the state of an electric device. FIG. 51 is an exploded front oblique view of the game board in the 51st embodiment. 1A is a front view of the front unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the sorting unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the sorting unit. 1495(a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line MCDXCVa-MCDXCVa in FIG. 1494(a), and FIG. 1495(b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line MCDXCVb-MCDXCVb in FIG. 1495(a). 149 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit taken along line MCDXCVb-MCDXCVb in FIG. 1495 (a). 11A to 11D are diagrams showing an example of detection of the passage of a ball in a detection device and a change in the state of a wing member over time. This is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line MCDXCVIII-MCDXCVIII in Figure 1491 (a). 1498(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning port unit and the ball throwing unit taken along line MCDXCIXa-MCDXCIXa in FIG. 1498. A partial front view of the game board in the 52nd embodiment. A partial front view of the game board in the 53rd embodiment. A front view of a pachinko machine in the 54th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. (a) is a front view of the winning unit, (b) is a side view of the winning unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MDXVIb in Figure 1516(a), and (c) is a top view of the winning unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MDXVIc in Figure 1516(a). 15(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXVIIa-MDXVIIa in FIG. 1516(c). This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXVIII-MDXVIII in Figure 1516 (c). This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516 (c). This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit along line MDXX-MDXX in Figure 1516 (c). This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXVIII-MDXVIII in Figure 1516 (c). This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516 (c). This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit along line MDXX-MDXX in Figure 1516 (c). 15(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXXIVa-MDXXIVa in FIG. 1516(c). 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. 13A and 13B are front perspective views of the winning unit. 15(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in FIG. 1516(b). 15(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in FIG. 1516(b). 11A to 11C are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of an electric device over time. A diagram explaining the relationship between hold type, game status, special pattern type, and variable time. A cross-sectional view of the slide member, tilt member, and transmission member taken along line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV in Figure 1524 (a). A cross-sectional view of the slide member, tilt member, and transmission member taken along line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV in Figure 1524 (a). A cross-sectional view of the slide member, tilt member, and transmission member taken along line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV in Figure 1524 (a). A cross-sectional view of the plate member, base plate, slide member, tilt member and transmission member taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516 (c). 15(a) and (b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in the range MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1503. 15(a) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in the range MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1503. 15(a) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in the range MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1503. 15(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the movable top cover member and the movable floor member taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in FIG. 1538(a). 15(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the movable top cover member and the movable floor member taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in FIG. 1538(a). (a) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the first special operation pattern, (b) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the second special operation pattern, and (c) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the third special operation pattern. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter and the judgment value in the special pattern 1 random number table, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter and the judgment value in the special pattern 2 random number table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter in the first winning type selection table and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter in the second winning random number table and the winning type for normal patterns. A top view of the front frame and outer frame. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a jackpot presentation, (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of an ending presentation, and (c), (d) and (e) are diagrams illustrating display screens of ending display presentations that are displayed in an ending presentation that is part of a jackpot presentation. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for a company name display effect displayed during the ending performance, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed during the ending performance. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed during the ending effect, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen immediately after the ending effect has ended. This is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the ending performance and the jackpot type for special patterns. This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit in the 55th embodiment taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516 (c). This is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516 (c). 13A is a schematic diagram showing a winning unit in the fifty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing another example of the winning unit. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing the winning unit in the 57th embodiment. 15(a) and (b) are front views of the upper variable winning device in the 58th embodiment in the range MDXXXVIIIa of Figure 1503. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 59th embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 60th embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 61st embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. FIG. A figure showing an example of the change over time in the frame button display during the card forgetting prevention display performance, the change over time in the validity of the frame button operation, and the frame button operation. A front view of the game board in the 62nd embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1571 , (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXIIIa in FIG. 1571 , and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXIIIb in FIG. 1571 . This is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in Figure 1570. This is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in Figure 1570. This is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXVI-MDLXXVI in Figure 1571. 1570A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame at part MDLXXVIIa in FIG. 1574, and FIG. 1570B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame at line MDLXXVIIb-MDLXXVIIb in FIG. 1570. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in Figure 1570. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in Figure 1570. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in Figure 1570. FIG. 63 is a front oblique view of the lower frame in the 63rd embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1586 , (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1586 , and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 1586 . This is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in Figure 1585. This is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in Figure 1585. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDXCI-MDXCI in Figure 1587. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII in Figure 1587. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in Figure 1585. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in Figure 1585. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in Figure 1585. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDXCVI-MDXCVI in Figure 1595(b). A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 64th embodiment. FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 64th embodiment. FIG. 1601(a) is a top view of the dish member in the 65th embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member taken along line MDCIb-MDCIb in FIG. 1601(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member taken along line MDCIc-MDCIc in FIG. 1601(a). 1587, (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 66th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDXCII-MDXCII in FIG. 1587, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 67th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDXCII-MDXCII in FIG. 1587. A front view of the game board in the 68th embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1609 , (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXIa in FIG. 1609 , and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXIb in FIG. 1609 . 16A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1608, and FIG. 16B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 16A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1608, and FIG. 16B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 16A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1608, and FIG. 16B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 1608, (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXVa-MDCXVa in FIG. 1608, (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXVb-MDCXVb in FIG. 1608, and (c) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG. 1612. 15(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lower frame in the 69th embodiment. 13A and 13B are enlarged cross-sectional views of a portion of the lower frame in the seventieth embodiment. 71(a) and 71(b) are enlarged partial rear views of the lower frame in the 71st embodiment. A partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame in the 72nd embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front oblique view of the lower frame in the 73rd embodiment. FIG. FIG. 16(a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame, where (a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1608, and (b) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG. 1612. 74(a) to 74(c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame in the 74th embodiment. 75(a) and 75(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame in the 75th embodiment. 1625(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXXVIa-MDCXXVIa in FIG. 1625(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXXVIb-MDCXXVIb in FIG. 1625(b). 16 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG. 1612. A front view of the game board in the 76th embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1634 , (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXXXVIa in FIG. 1634 , (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXXXVIb in FIG. 1634 , and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXXXVIc-MDCXXXVIc in FIG. 1634 . (a) is a front view of the lower frame with the front member omitted, (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame with the rear cover member omitted, and (c) is a top view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in Figure 1637(c), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXXXVIIIb-MDCXXXVIIIb in Figure 1638(a), and (c) is a partially enlarged underside view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame with the front member omitted, (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame with the rear cover member omitted, and (c) is a top view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in Figure 1639(c), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXLb-MDCXLb in Figure 1640(a), and (c) is a partially enlarged underside view of the lower frame. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 77th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in Figure 1637. 1642(a) is a front oblique view of the sorting passage, (b) is a front view of the sorting passage as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXLIIb in FIG. 1642(a), (c) is a bottom view of the sorting passage as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXLIIc in FIG. 1642(b), and (d) is a side view of the sorting passage as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXLIId in FIG. 1642(b). A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 78th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in Figure 1637 (c). 13A is a front view of the lower frame in the 79th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the lower frame. 13A is a front view of the lower frame in the 79th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the lower frame. 80(a) is a front view of the lower frame in the 80th embodiment, and FIG. 80(b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 80(a) is a front view of the lower frame in the 80th embodiment, and FIG. 80(b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 1639(c) , (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 82nd embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. 1639(c), and (c) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 83rd embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. 1639(c). 8(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame in the 84th embodiment, and (b) is a partial top view of the lower frame in the 85th embodiment. FIG. 1639(c) is a view of the sorting passage in the 88th embodiment, viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage; (d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage in the 89th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in Figure 1639(c); and (e) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage in the 90th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in Figure 1639(c). 9(a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the 91st embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the 92nd embodiment. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board in the 93rd embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of a fixed passage, and FIG. 1B is an exploded front perspective view of a drive means. 1A is an exploded rear perspective view of a determination passage, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of a drive means. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1662, (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIVb in FIG. 1662, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCLXIVc-MDCLXIVc in FIG. 1662. 4A is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 4A is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 1669(a) is a rear view of the lower frame, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIXb in FIG. 1669(a). FIG. 1671(a) is a rear view of the lower frame, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXIb in FIG. 1671(a). 94th embodiment, (a) and (c) are partially enlarged front views of the lower frame, and (b) and (d) are partially enlarged top views of the lower frame. 95(a) and (b) are enlarged partial rear views of the lower frame in the 95th embodiment. 96th embodiment, FIG. 11A is a top view of the lower frame, and FIG. 11B is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. 4A is a top view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. A front view of the game board in the 97th embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1684, (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXXVIb in FIG. 1684, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCLXXXVIc-MDCLXXXVIc in FIG. 1684. 4A is a front view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the lower frame. 4A is a front view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the lower frame. 4A is a front view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 13 is a partial top view of the left displacement member. A front view of the game board in the 98th embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1699 , (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCCIa in FIG. 1699 , (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCCIb in FIG. 1699 , and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCCIc-MDCCIc in FIG. 1699 . 17A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCCIIa-MDCCIIa in FIG. 1701(c), and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 17A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCCIIa-MDCCIIa in FIG. 1701(c), and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 99th embodiment, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and FIG. 10B is a rear view of the lower frame. 4A is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the lower frame. 1A, 1B, and 1C are schematic top views of the fourth passage portion of the 15th passage member, the rolling surface of the intermediate passage member, the displacement passage member of the sorting means, and the second displacement passage portion of the second displacement passage; and FIG. 1B, 1B, and 1C are schematic front views of the fourth passage portion of the 6th passage member, the rolling surface of the intermediate passage member, the displacement passage member of the sorting means, and the second displacement passage portion of the second displacement passage. A partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the 100th embodiment. 10A is a partially enlarged top view of a lower frame in the 101st embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. 4A is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. 102(a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the 102nd embodiment, and FIG. 102(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. FIG. 103 is a rear oblique view of the lower frame in the 103rd embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame. A front view of a pachinko machine in the 104th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the state (deployed) in which the inner frame is open relative to the outer frame and the back pack is open relative to the inner frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame closed against the outer frame and the front frame open (deployed). This is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the game board and inner frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. A front view of a pachinko machine in the 105th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operating unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. A partially enlarged front view of the game board at the MDCCXXXI portion of Figure 1726. This is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line MDCCXXXII-MDCCXXXII in Figure 1731. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the first movable device; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first movable device; FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4A and 4B are partially enlarged front views of a front layer side movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. FIG. 4 is a partial enlarged rear view of the first movable device; FIG. 4 is a partial enlarged rear view of the first movable device; 13A, 13B, 13C and 13D are partial front views of a first movable device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the second movable device; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second movable device; 13A and 13B are front views of a second movable device; 13A and 13B are front views of a second movable device; 13A and 13B are front views of a second movable device; 4A, 4B and 4C are schematic front views of the vertical sliding member, the followable member and the interlocking member. FIG. FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the third movable device; FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third movable device; 13A, 13B, and 13C are front views of the upper rear cover member, the extended rotation member, the base end slide member, and the pinion. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of the rear layer side movable device. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1A to 1F are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1E are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. A rear view of the base plate and the light irradiation device in the 106th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the base plate and the light irradiation device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate and the light irradiation device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate and the light irradiation device. A partial cross-sectional view of the base plate and the light irradiation device taken along line MDCCXC-MDCCXC in Figure 1786. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. 107th embodiment, an exploded rear oblique view of the base plate and the light irradiation device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate and the light irradiation device. A partial cross-sectional view of the base plate and the light irradiation device taken along a line corresponding to the MDCCXC-MDCCXC line in FIG. 1786. FIG. 108 is a front view of the operating unit in the 108th embodiment. 1A to 1D are front views of the moving device. FIG. 2 is a partial rear view of a first movable device of the front layer side movable device. FIG. 2 is a partial rear view of a first movable device of the front layer side movable device. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. 1A and 1B are partial front views of a pachinko machine. A partially enlarged front view of the game board in the area corresponding to the MDCCXXXI part of Figure 1726. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 13A and 13B are front views of a second movable device; FIG. 4 is a front view of the second movable device. 13 is a schematic front view showing the plate-shaped portion of the rear opening/closing member, the plate-shaped portion of the middle opening/closing member, and the plate-shaped portion of the front opening/closing member of the rear layer side movable device. FIG. (a) is a front view of the display area of the third pattern display device, and (b) is a front view of the plate-shaped portion arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device shown in Figure 1814 (a). (a) is a front view of the display area of the third pattern display device, and (b) is a front view of the plate-shaped portion arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device shown in Figure 1815 (a). 13 is a schematic front view showing the plate-shaped portion of the rear opening/closing member, the plate-shaped portion of the middle opening/closing member, and the plate-shaped portion of the front opening/closing member of the rear layer side movable device. FIG. (a) to (c) are top views of the plate-shaped parts of the third pattern display device and the rear layer movable device. 1799(a) to (i) are partially enlarged front views of a pachinko machine in the MDCCCXVIII portion of FIG. 1799(a). 1799(a) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of a pachinko machine in the MDCCCXVIII portion of FIG. 1799(a). 1A and 1B are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1A and 1B are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine in the 109th embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line MDCCCXXVI-MDCCXXVI in Figure 1825. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. A front view of the game board in the 110th embodiment. 1832(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in the MDCCCXXXIIa portion of FIG. 1831, and FIG. 1832(b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 1832(a). FIG. 111 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the 111th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the state (deployed) in which the inner frame is open relative to the outer frame and the back pack is open relative to the inner frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame closed against the outer frame and the front frame open (deployed). This is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the game board and inner frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An exploded front oblique view of the upper decorative unit. An exploded rear oblique view of the upper decorative unit. FIG. FIG. A front view of the upper decorative unit. A front view of the upper decorative unit and the right side decorative unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit taken along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit taken along line MDCCCXLIXb in Figure 1848. 1A is a front view of the right-side decorative unit, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the right-side decorative unit. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of a right-side decorative unit, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the right-side decorative unit. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the weight plate unit, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the weight plate unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the left weight plate unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the right weight plate unit. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, and FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the front frame. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional diagram of the right side decorative unit and upper decorative unit along the line MDCCCLVIIa shown in Figure 1850(b), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional diagram of the right side decorative unit and upper decorative unit along the line MDCCCLVIIb shown in Figure 1850(b). A front view of the upper and lower tray units. This is an exploded front oblique view of the upper and lower tray units. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the upper and lower plate units. 4A is a front view of the base member and the upper tray forming member, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the base member and the upper tray forming member. 1861(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member taken along line MDCCCLXIIa in FIG. 1861(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base member taken along line MDCCCLXIIb in FIG. 1861(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member taken along line MDCCCLXIIc in FIG. 1861(a). 4A is a front view of the lower dish forming member, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the lower dish forming member. FIG. FIG. 1866(b) is a bottom view of the connecting portion, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the connecting portion taken along line MDCCCLXVIc in FIG. 1866(b). An exploded oblique view of the upper and lower tray units. 18(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the upper and lower tray units with the lower tray forming member removed from the base member, and correspond to the cross section of the upper and lower tray units taken along line MDCCCLXVIII in FIG. 1858. 1858(a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit taken along line MDCCCLXVIII in FIG. 1858, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit taken along line MDCCCLXIXb in FIG. 1869(a). (a) is a bottom view of the upper and lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower protective plate. 4A is a perspective front view of a lower protective plate, and FIG. 4B is a perspective rear view of the lower protective plate. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit taken along line MDCCCLXXIIa in Figure 1870 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit taken along line MDCCCLXXIIb in Figure 1870 (a). 13A and 13B are side views of the front frame. (a) is a bottom view of the front frame, and (b) is a side view of the front frame. 1875(a) is a front view of the upper protective plate, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper protective plate taken along line MDCCCLXXVb in FIG. 1875(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the upper protective plate taken along line MDCCCLXXVc in FIG. 1875(a). 1858, (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit taken along line MDCCCLXXVIa in FIG. 1858, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit taken along line MDCCCLXXVIb in FIG. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the upper and lower tray units with the upper protective plate disassembled from the first decorative plate. FIG. 2A is a front perspective view of the operation unit, and FIG. 2B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 18(a) is a front view of the driving means, and (b) is a side view of the driving means taken along line MDCCCLXXXIb in FIG. 1881(a). FIG. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of a transmission shaft rod, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the transmission shaft rod. 1882, (a) is a side view of the right disc cam in the direction of arrow MDCCCLXXXIVa in FIG. 1882, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam in the direction of arrow MDCCCLXXXIVb in FIG. 1882, (c) is a side view of the left disc cam in the direction of arrow MDCCCLXXXIVc in FIG. 1882, and (d) is a side view of the left disc cam in the direction of arrow MDCCCLXXXIVd in FIG. 1882. 18(a) and (b) are side views of the release member and the rotating claw member as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCCLXXXVa in FIG. 1882. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Figure 1858. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Figure 1858. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Figure 1858. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Figure 1858. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Figure 1858. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Figure 1858. 1892(a) is a top view of the oscillating device, and (b) is a side view of the oscillating device as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCCCXCIIb in FIG. 1892(a). 1892(a) is a cross-sectional view of the oscillating device taken along line MDCCCXCIIIa in FIG. 1892(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the oscillating device taken along line MDCCCXCIIIb in FIG. 1892(a). 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking device, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the rocking device. FIG. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of a base means, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the base means. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the driving means, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the driving means. 1898(a) is a top view of the base means and the driving means, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the driving means taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in FIG. 1898(a). 1899(a) is a top view of the base means and the driving means, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the driving means taken along line MDCCCXCIXb in FIG. 1899(a). 18(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the oscillating device, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCIII in FIG. 1892(b). FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the ball launching unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the launch position throwing unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the ball launching unit and the launch position throwing unit taken along line MCMVa in Figure 1901, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the ball launching unit and the launch position throwing unit taken along line MCMVb in Figure 1901. 1A is a front view of the firing means in the retracted position, FIG. 1B is a front view of the firing means in the initial position, and FIG. 1C is a front view of the firing means in the firing position. 19(a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the ball launching unit and launch position sending unit in the MCMVII portion of FIG. 1905(b). 19(a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the ball launching unit and launch position sending unit in the MCMVII portion of FIG. 1905(b). A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ball launching unit and launch position throwing unit in the MCMIX section of Figure 1905(a). FIG. FIG. FIG. (a) is a front view of the directing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the directing operation unit. This is a disassembled front oblique view of the petal movement device side of the performance movement unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the petal operation device side of the performance operation unit. This is a disassembled front oblique view of the ring forming unit side of the performance operation unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the ring forming unit side of the performance operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the performance operation unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal movement device. FIG. (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit along line MCMXXIb in Figure 1921 (a). This is an exploded front oblique view of the flower rotation unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the flower rotation unit. (a) is a side view of the first decorative unit as viewed in the MCMXXIV direction of Figure 1921 (a), and (b) is an exploded front oblique view of the first decorative unit. (a) to (c) are side views of the first decorative unit, corresponding to the side view in the MCMXXIV direction of Figure 1921(a). (a) to (d) are side views of the first decorative unit when the displacement unit is positioned in the tilt reference position, and correspond to the side view of (a) as viewed in the MCMXXVI direction. (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit along line MCMXXVIIb in Figure 1927 (a). (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit taken along line MCMXXVIIIb in Figure 1928(a). (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit, (b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXIXb in Figure 1929(a), and (c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXIXc in Figure 1929(a). (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit, (b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXXb in Figure 1930(a), and (c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXXc in Figure 1930(a). (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit, (b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXXIb in Figure 1931 (a), and (c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXXIc in Figure 1931 (a). (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit, (b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXXIIb in Figure 1932(a), and (c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMXXXIIc in Figure 1932(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the flower rotation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the flower rotation unit. 6A to 6D are rear views of the driven gear and the detection sensor. 1A to 1C are schematic diagrams showing the flower rotation unit viewed from the front. This is a schematic diagram of the flower rotation unit in the 112th embodiment viewed from the front. 1A to 1C are schematic diagrams showing the flower rotation unit viewed from the front. 11(a) and (b) are front views of the flower rotation unit in the 113th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit in the 114th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit along line MCMXLb in Figure 1940 (a). 11(a) and (b) are front views of the flower rotation unit in the 115th embodiment. (a) is a side view of the first decorative unit in the 116th embodiment, corresponding to the side view in the MCMXXVI direction of Figure 1921 (a), and (b) is an exploded front oblique view of the first decorative unit. 13A and 13B are side views of the first decorative unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit in the 117th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit in the 118th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848. A disassembled rear oblique view of the upper decorative unit in the 119th embodiment. 13A and 13B are front views of the upper decorative unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit taken along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit taken along line MCMXLVIIb in Figure 1946(b). 120. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the 120th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side decorative unit and the upper decorative unit. FIG. 13A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right-side decorative unit and upper decorative unit in the 121st embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right-side decorative unit and upper decorative unit in the 122nd embodiment. 12(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the right-side decorative unit and upper decorative unit in the 123rd embodiment. A disassembled front oblique view of the upper and lower tray units in the 124th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the upper and lower tray units. 1952(a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit at MCMLIIIa in FIG. 1952(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit at line MCMLIIIb in FIG. 1952(b). 19(a) to (d) are cross-sectional views of the upper and lower tray units in the 125th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MCMLIIIa in Figure 1952(a). 12(a) and (b) are schematic front views of the front frame in the 126th embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit taken along line MCMLVIa in Figure 1955(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit taken along line MCMLVIb in Figure 1955(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray units in the 127th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray units in the 128th embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray units in the 129th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray units in the 130th embodiment. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the oscillating device in the 131st embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in FIG. 1898A, and FIG. 18B is an exploded front perspective view of a drive motor and abutment means. 18(a) to (d) are cross-sectional views of the oscillating device, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in FIG. 1898(a). 18A is a cross-sectional view of the oscillating device in the 132nd embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in FIG. 1898A, and FIG. 18B is an exploded front perspective view of a drive motor and a displacement means. 18(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the oscillating device, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in FIG. 1898(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position throwing unit and ball launching unit in the 133rd embodiment, corresponding to the cross-sectional view along line MCMVa in Figure 1901, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position throwing unit and ball launching unit, corresponding to the cross-sectional view along line MCMVb in Figure 1901. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position throwing unit and ball launching unit in the 134th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross-sectional view along line MCMVa in Figure 1901, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position throwing unit and ball launching unit in the 135th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross-sectional view along line MCMVa in Figure 1901. A front view of the inner frame in the 136th embodiment. 1966(a) is a rear view of the path changing member, (b) is a side view of the path changing member as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMLXVIb in FIG. 1966(a), (c) is a cross-sectional view of the path changing member along line MCMLXVIc in FIG. 1966(b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the path changing member along line MCMLXVId in FIG. 1966(a). 13A is a front view of the inner frame in the 137th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a front view of the inner frame in the 138th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit in the 139th embodiment, (b) is a front view of the ball launching unit in the 140th embodiment, and (c) is a front view of the ball launching unit in the 141st embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the ball launching unit and the launch position throwing unit in the 142nd embodiment, corresponding to the cross-sectional view along line MCMVb in Figure 1901, (b) is a front view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the MCMLXIXb direction in Figure 1969(a), (c) is a front view of the ball launching unit in the 143rd embodiment, corresponding to the front view as viewed in the MCMLXIXb direction in Figure 1969(a), and (d) is a front view of the ball launching unit in the 144th embodiment, corresponding to the front view as viewed in the MCMLXIXb direction in Figure 1969(a). (a) and (b) are front schematic views of the front frame H35014 in the 145th embodiment. 13A and 13B are schematic rear views of the inner frame H12 in the 146th embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit in the 147th embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIb in Figure 1946(b). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit in the 148th embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIb in Figure 1946(b). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit in the 149th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit, corresponding to the cross section along line MCMXLVIIb in Figure 1946(b). (a) to (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the upper decorative unit in the 150th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946 (a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit in the 151st embodiment, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848, and (b) is a schematic top view of the upper decorative unit as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMLXXVIb in Figure 1976 (a). (a) and (c) are front schematic views of the oscillating device in the 152nd embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device taken along line MCMLXXVIIb in Figure 1977(a), and (d) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device taken along line MCMLXXVIId in Figure 1977(c). 1978(a) is a schematic front view of the oscillating device in the 153rd embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device taken along line MCMLXXVIIIb in FIG. 1978(a). (a) and (c) are front schematic views of the oscillating device in the 153rd embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device taken along line MCMLXXIXb in Figure 1979(a), and (d) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device taken along line MCMLXXIXd in Figure 1979(c). 1980(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit in the 154th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit along line MCMLXXXb in FIG. 1980(a). 15(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the operation unit in the 155th embodiment. 15(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the operation unit in the 156th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 71, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Figure 2, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends out to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that a reach is being reached just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area) and a windmill (not shown) on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield various structures arranged on the outside of the center frame 86 from its front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 4R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and the probability of a hit of the second pattern described below increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability fluctuation, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability fluctuation. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second pattern increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later during the first round of a jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuations. Note that if it is not determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 140a (electric device) associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 140a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the electric device 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened to the rear case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the rear case 510 described below, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window portion of the base plate 60. In other words, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged separately in the front and rear.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4) to display, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gates 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates 67 installed is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. The installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, but may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning port 140 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 11) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 6(a) and FIG. 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6(a) illustrates the closed state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is closed to restrict the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 6(b) illustrates the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is open to allow the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of FIG. 5 and FIG. 6.

The variable winning device 65 is formed so that when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the rear side so that it can receive a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b and guide it to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric device 140a is located above the center of the opening and closing plate 65b (see Figure 2), the balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are limited to balls that stray from the electric device 140a and flow down. In other words, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b in the center, but mainly in the parts on the outside of the electric device 140a. In other words, the placement of balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the outside of the opening and closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the placement of the ball after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b. In other words, depending on how the ball flows after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, it may end up being placed closer to the center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric prop 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening and closing plate 65b side (it is curved so that it juts out downward from the lower front end that faces the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side), so that the degree to which a ball that bounces near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b collides with the front design member 141 and loses momentum can be reduced. This increases the likelihood that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either forward or backward. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is formed to be located at the lower front, making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening and closing plate 65b side. In addition, the front design member 141 is shaped so that the left and right width becomes smaller as it moves downward at the left and right ends, making it easier to secure space between the opening and closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state, balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided almost without exception to the specific winning opening 65a. In front of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at an upper and lower position that can guide the ball into the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that a ball rolling to the left and right outside by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b outside the left and right of this inclined flow lower surface 163a1, a guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is shifted rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b abuts against the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be guided with little resistance to the inclined flow-down surface 163a1. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts to close with a ball on it, even if the ball is positioned to the left or right outside the inclined flow-down surface 163a1, the degree to which the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b is hindered can be reduced.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctions such as, for example, poor ball flow causing delays in closing the opening/closing plate 65b, or balls being swept backwards by the closing action of the opening/closing plate 65b bouncing off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and striking the opening/closing plate 65b again, applying a load in the direction (forward) that causes the opening/closing plate 65b to open, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to open unintentionally.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the opening and closing plate 65b closes by rising up. In other words, a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the movement of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the ball does not move to the left or right of the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b, and almost all of the balls resting on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b is on the outer left or right side, or if there are a large number of balls, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are designed in such a way that the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a is not stagnated, and the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be kept prompt.

In addition, instead of modifying the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rests in the open state is formed in a flat surface (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b first flows backward, and then flows left and right due to the effect of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, making it easier to avoid ball collisions on the opening/closing plate 65b.

In other words, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will first move backward in parallel, preventing the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to when the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped with a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface 163a, which creates a left-right flow in the rolling balls, the possibility of the balls moving irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced, making it possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surfaces 163a3 that abut against the pivot tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby improving the reproducibility of the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b. The abutment surfaces 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right, and are designed to match the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact. This makes it easier to stabilize the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b, and by receiving the load at the time of abutment on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, improving durability.

In addition, an auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is formed on the underside of the abutment surface 163a3, and is formed in a surface shape that is approximately parallel to the opposing opening and closing plate 65b with a small gap between them. The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the abutment between the abutment surface 163a3 and the opening and closing plate 65b becomes poor for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed in front of the contact surface 163a3, and is configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-to-rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b come into surface contact with the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, thereby maintaining the stability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b. This improves the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal, there may be a disadvantage that loads are easily accumulated. However, since the area over which the load is distributed can be increased, the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to contact with the opening and closing plate 65b can be reduced.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

In other words, if the ball comes into contact with the lower shape of the front design member 141 while being received (for example, while it is being sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific winning opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball can be guided by the curved shape to flow down into the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it easier to prevent the ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b from falling down the front side of the third flow path component 336, making it easier to ensure visibility into the third flow path component 336.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b, so the placement of balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state is limited to the outside on the left and right of the electric prop 140a.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the placement of the balls that flow down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to positions on the left and right outer side of the electric role device 140a. This ensures visibility below the electric role device 140a at positions on the left and right inner side of the left and right ends of the electric role device 140a.

Next, the configuration downstream of the specific winning port 65a (the side where the balls flow after passing through the specific winning port 65a) will be described. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65.

As shown in FIG. 8, a collecting gutter 150 is provided at the rear of the variable winning device 65 on the rear side of the base plate 60, forming a path for directing balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a grooved portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the grooved portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge passage is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are positioned in the left-right center of the play area when viewed from the front, the flow of balls that enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is directed from the left-right center to the left-right outer side by the collecting gutter 150. This allows a space to be created below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and this space can be used to position the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described below.

Figure 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300, and Figure 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. Note that in Figures 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and other parts are omitted, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. Also, for ease of explanation, Figure 9 shows the center frame 86 assembled to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 at the top that is fastened to the variable winning device 65, and an insertion hole 331 at the left and right that is fastened to the collecting gutter 150. In other words, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as is whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not. This allows the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 to be used in common regardless of whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a, an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is applied.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensional, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary 161a, a specific winning opening 65a and an extended support plate 161b are formed, which are configured as a pair of roughly T-shaped supports on the left and right, and include a horizontally elongated plate-like portion that extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a vertically elongated plate-like portion that extends downward midway through the horizontally elongated plate-like portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support portion 161c protruding from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support portion 161d protruding from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, and the protruding support portion 161e protruding from the upper surface of the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a function as parts that support the sorting device 300, and will be described in detail later.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f, which is protruded symmetrically below the center of the specific winning opening 65a inside the boundary 161a, has the function of contacting the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the balls as they flow down.

Multiple through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. Multiple fastened portions 161h having female threads for inserting the fastening screws that are inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

The fastening portion 161i, which has a female thread for threading the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is positioned outside the boundary portion 161a at the gap (center position from left to right) of the boundary portion 161a. In other words, the fastening portion 161i is disposed at the connection portion (see FIG. 9) between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric role object 140a among the through holes formed in the base plate 60.

The front design component 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape to ensure a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). The balls are allowed to flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design component 162 and the front side of the fixed component 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a number of fastening portions 162a that are arranged in positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads that allow the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g to be screwed in, and a number of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend to the rear side in a shape that covers the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extensions 162b and 162c prevent the balls flowing between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened portion 162a.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the path of the balls flowing down. That is, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) that are extended near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outside, it is possible to prevent balls on the extensions 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, after the balls on the extensions 162b fall downward on the left and right outsides of the extensions 162b, they flow down along the inner rail 61 (see Figure 2) toward the outlet 71.

In addition, by forming the upper surfaces of the extension parts 162c (two parts on both the left and right ends) that extend to both the left and right ends as inclined surfaces that slope downwards toward the inside of the left and right sides, the flow path of the balls flowing on the extension parts 162c can be unified with the flow path of the balls on the extension parts 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the area in which the flowing balls are arranged compared to the number of balls flowing down (the ball arrangement density can be increased), and to secure areas where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (space where no flow path is formed).

Note that the front design component 162 shown in FIG. 11 is blank and has good visibility on the back side, but the front design component 162 does not have to be blank. For example, the front side of the front design component 162 may be decorated by attaching a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or grooves may be dug in the front design component 162 with a geometric pattern, and the geometric pattern may be made visible by shining light into the grooves. In addition, the front design component 162 may be blank or may be decorated as described above, and then configured to be opaque.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a horizontally elongated frame (or box) shape with the front side open, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, the lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, the ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position matching the fastening portion 161h of the fixed member 161 and through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening portion 161h are inserted from the back side, a pair of fastening portions 163d arranged on the left and right central sides as female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e having female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outward from the left and right central portions as apexes, and is provided with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward to the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces, so that a ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that engages with the back side of the receiving member 163. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intermediate member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is disposed, a pair of fastening portions 164d formed at both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a with female threaded portions capable of receiving fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 161i of the fixed member 161.

The light-emitting board 164c is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces diagonally upward and forward, and in the assembled state, is positioned directly above the specific winning hole 65a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 6) and directly below the second winning hole 140. With this arrangement, the light from the light-emitting board 164c easily enters the field of vision of a player who is hoping for the ball to land in the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and is gazing diagonally downward and backward at these locations.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light-emitting board 164c to light up when a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a, the player can easily know whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This allows the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to be more firmly fixed than when the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened to each other. In addition, the arrangement of the sorting device 300, which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164, can be stabilized, so that the relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws are inserted into the fastening part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, a lower case part 165b formed in a deep box shape with a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation and an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, a sliding part 165d that engages with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c and slides together with the plunger, a rotating part 165e that is rotatably supported by the lower case part 165b in such an arrangement that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case part 165b and rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding part 165d, and an upper cover part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c that protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b fits into this recess and engages with it. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

Figures 13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. Figure 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and Figure 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted therethrough, a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough, a substrate 350 that is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side, and a substrate 350 that is connected to the middle member 330 and the upper member 310. It is equipped with a state switching device 360 that is housed in a position between the member 310 and is configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied, a sliding displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state switching device 360 switches states, and a lower member 380 that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 and has an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough that can insert a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each part, we will provide an overview of the function of the sorting device 300. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow.

The balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b flow down through the interior of the upper member 310, the flow path configurations 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the interior of the lower member 380, and the balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into the ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player, and depending on the way they flow down, it is not just a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also has an effect related to the gaming profits, such as bringing about changes in the profits that the player can obtain.

Differences in the flow patterns of balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

As a result, the player's gaze will naturally tend to be focused on the location where the ball flows from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (where the slide displacement member 370 is located, as described below), so this embodiment is designed to accommodate this focus.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to be able to receive balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as markers, a pair of upper surface portions 314 that extend from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube portions 315 in which through holes are formed through which fastening screws that are screwed into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening portion 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, and the upper member 310. 10 from the underside, a pair of long front-rear projections 317 arranged side by side, a pair of inner left-right projections 318 arranged between the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, and a storage recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that receives balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and its upper front edge is shaped as if it had been cut with an inclined surface so that it is flush with the back surface of the plate of the inclined detection sensor SE1 (see Figure 12). This allows the upper front edge of the opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed with an opening size that does not allow the ball to enter the inside of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and becoming brightly visible, but details will be given later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the path that the ball takes below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a, which is located on the front side of the opening 312, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the front side, and the second upper surface portion 314b, which is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and is located on the left and right inside, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the left and right inside. The left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right distance between them is longer toward the front, thereby ensuring the player's visibility when viewing the ball through the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface to receive the head of the fastening screw. Therefore, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is easy to prevent the player from seeing the head of the fastening screw.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to match the fastening portion 332d having a female thread formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is positioned with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, while the fastening portion 316 is positioned at the front, the screw head is not easily noticeable to a player viewing from diagonally above. This makes it possible to securely fasten the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 together while avoiding the fastening screw spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastening portion 316 is only formed on the right side is that since the insertion tube portion 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and although the screw head is facing downward and is not very noticeable, omitting it if unnecessary will improve the appearance of the sorting device 300. Note that the arrangement of the fastening portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side, or it may be arranged in a pair on the left and right.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down and to minimize any loss in appearance of the sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

The undersides of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319, which form each pair, are formed as curved surfaces that use the same point as a reference point and become lower the further away from that point. The curved surfaces of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the rear side, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the front side, a pair of first flow path components 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path components 335 connected to the front end of the first flow path components 334 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed in front of the front frame portion 333, and a pair of third flow path components 336 connected to the left and right inner ends of the second flow path components 335 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

The middle member 330 also includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and penetrates the lower base at the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and functions as a discharge path for the balls; a partition plate portion 338 that is elongated in the front-rear direction and divides the discharge hole 337 and the third flow path component 336 into left and right parts; and a pair of alignment protrusions 339 that protrude from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 as elongated rectangular protrusions.

Unlike the front part which forms a path for the balls to flow down, the rear frame part 332 does not form a path for the balls to flow down, but is mainly configured as a part supporting the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame part 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed in the front end of the left-right center part in the vertical direction and configured to be able to arrange the slide displacement member 370, a guide hole 332b formed in the lower bottom part as a long through hole in the left-right direction and guiding the slide displacement of the guided part 362c of the state switching device 360, a plurality of fastened parts 332c having a female threaded part formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed in, and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female threaded part at the upper tip into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed in.

The front frame portion 333 has a light diffusion treatment applied to the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom, which reduces visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a frame shape that is roughly square when viewed from above, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a countersunk hole through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., but details will be given later.

The open portion 335a, which is open on the front side at the connection position between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, is a gap that allows the symmetrical protrusion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned to enter the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so that it can abut against the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are divided by a partition plate 338 and are configured as a pair on the left and right, and are formed with a size that allows the ball to be discharged in at least two ways. In other words, the left and right length is at least twice the diameter of the ball. In this embodiment, multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 located below the discharge holes 337, so the shape of the discharge holes 337 can be designed to match the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1.

The partition plate portion 338 not only separates the third flow path component 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, as will be described in detail later. The alignment protrusion portion 339 is fitted into the protrusion portion 383a of the lower member 380 to prevent misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, as will be described in detail later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape with the lower portion 353 being longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and has a recessed portion 354 for positioning at the lower end on the left side of the lower portion 353.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the left-right direction, the left-right long lower portion 353 is supported by being sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the front-rear direction, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling out upwards, thereby fixing the arrangement; details of the arrangement, together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351, will be described later.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361, a sliding portion 362 that engages with the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 for linear displacement in the left-right direction and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is supported rotatably by being inserted through the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so that the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be received from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes to the right from the right side surface, and a guided portion 362c that protrudes downward from the center of the front and rear of the lower side surface and is formed with an oval cross section that is long in the left-right direction.

The disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above due to the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, so that the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the position of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the inner member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, it is formed long in the left-right direction, so that the position of the sliding portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c with the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, circular or rectangular.

The rotating part 363 is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from above, and includes a support tube part 363a formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape at the connection part of the L-shape and having a through hole large enough to insert the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330, an upper cylindrical part 363b protruding upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b, and a lower cylindrical part 363c protruding downward from the long end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the recessed part 378 of the sliding displacement member 370.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the rotating part 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder part 363a as a central axis. The displacement of this rotating part 363 occurs due to a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger slides and the slide part 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by passing electricity through the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical part 363b inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical part 363c is displaced accordingly, resulting in the displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and includes a thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, upper protrusions 376 protruding upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion protruding upward in the left-right center rearward of the upper protrusions 376 and formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 is provided with a pair of supported holes 371a formed on the left and right sides in the rear half, a recessed portion 372 recessed from the front end in the left and right center portion to a long length in the front-to-rear direction with a left-to-right width shorter than the spacing of the upper protrusions 376, a pair of lower protrusions 373 protruding downward in a protruding shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, a plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both the up and down directions in a protruding shape along the left and right edges of the rear half, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the long guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are intended to slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged above and below, and are protrusions for reducing the contact area with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 compared to flat contact. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the sliding displacement member 370 can be reduced, and therefore the displacement speed of the sliding displacement member 370 can be prevented from slowing down.

The upper protrusion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view, and is positioned so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332. The width length of the gap on the left and right inner sides of the upper protrusion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion 376.

In other words, the upper protrusion 376 is arranged in the gap on the left and right inside to sandwich the partition plate 338, and is configured so that misalignment in the left and right direction is suppressed by abutting against the partition plate 338. This allows the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 to be well guided, and the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding portion in which the recess 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332, so that the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 can be easily inserted into the recess 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is designed as a through hole whose shape includes the entire area in which the upper protruding portion 376, which is intended to be inserted, and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed, are placed.

The lower member 380 includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long, thin plate shape on the left and right, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape below the plate-like portion 382 that allows multiple detection sensors SE1 (four in this embodiment) to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame 389 is formed in a frame shape with openings on the rear side where the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and on the top and bottom sides through which the ball passes through the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, and the other parts are closed.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, just as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole formed in the up-down direction. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a protrusion portion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the two detection sensors SE1 on the left and right inside, a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions rearward of the protrusion portion 383 and are fitted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370. It is equipped with a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude in an insertable position, a pair of guide protrusions 385 that are formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions outside the guide protrusions 384, a long guide hole 386 that extends in the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above, a curved surface portion 387 that is formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed through so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the inner member 330 can be inserted.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left-right thickness that is slightly shorter than the left-right gap width of the recess 372 of the sliding displacement member 370, and the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged so that the recess 372 sandwiches the protrusion 383. In other words, the protrusion 383 functions as a guide that guides the forward/rearward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are in the same position as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in abutting engagement, so that the left and right position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380. At the same time, the back side of the front frame part of the lower member 380 (the part connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at the front end side) is abutted against the front side of the alignment protrusions 339, so that the front and rear position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path configuration portion 336, which is a component of the middle member 330, and the detection sensor SE1, which is a component of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long from side to side, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

This prevents the sliding displacement member 370 from colliding with the protruding portion 383, and therefore improves the durability of the protruding portion 383 compared to a configuration in which the forward displacement end is determined at the position where the sliding displacement member 370 collides with the protruding portion 383. As a result, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be maintained for a long period of time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, while the guide protrusion 384 is usually designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period (e.g., three years) without being broken, the strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of the use in a state in which the protrusion 383 and the slide displacement member 370 collide after the guide protrusion 384 is broken. In other words, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than the set period (e.g., two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in the shape can be improved.

The guide ribs 385 are arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, and are formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left-right inner side of the guide ribs 385. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction with little misalignment in the left-right direction.

The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a width large enough to allow the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the sliding displacement member 370 to pass through. The direction of displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide slot 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is an abutment surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the inner member 330. In this embodiment, it guides the ball that enters the outlet 71, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. The insertion hole 388 is also positioned on the left and right outer side and on the rear side of the area in which the multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the sliding displacement member 370 is guided by a number of parts, namely the guide ridge 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the protrusion 383 for the recessed portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and displaces in the front-rear direction. This allows the load during guiding to be shared among a number of positions, preventing the load from being applied locally and avoiding damage to the sliding displacement member 370 and the guiding portion that guides the sliding displacement member 370.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protrusions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protrusion portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are poorly assembled and there is a large misalignment, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 will be hindered. Here, since the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are parts that continuously configure the ball's flow path, it is preferable to keep the misalignment small, and by making the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 good, it is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 will not be performed properly, and by detecting that the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is poor, it is possible to control the system to issue an error notification because there is a possibility that the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor.

This prevents the player from continuing to play with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in a poor relative positioning, reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. Here, the configuration related to the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration entering the flow path of the balls will be mainly described.

Figure 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15, Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15.

In the figures from Fig. 15 to Fig. 18, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state in which it is disposed in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b rolls on the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b. The ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the subsequent second flow path component 335, and the subsequent third flow path component 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed into a spiral shape that forms an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-to-rear direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in a left-to-right direction rotated 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-to-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path into a spiral shape with a right-angled bend, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the ball increases as it moves downstream. In more detail, the ball flows down the first flow path component 334 accelerating toward the front side, but the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-to-rear component, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the first flow path component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the ball flows backward, which is the opposite of the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the front-to-rear direction is suppressed.

Therefore, unlike a flow pattern in which the ball flows consistently in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the ball's flow speed from becoming excessively fast downstream. In other words, it is easier to make the ball's flow speed uniform throughout the entire flow path, which has the effect of keeping the player's attention on the ball high and making it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball.

For example, it is also possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but forming the second flow path component 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging and backflow of the balls. If the second flow path component 335 is not formed (if the left-right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, if the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the balls by 180 degrees from the flow toward the front to the flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the balls is large, and in particular the speed direction needs to be reversed back and forth, making it difficult to make the balls flow smoothly, and the balls are likely to become stuck, clogged, or backflow, which may cause malfunctions.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, if the flow direction switching angle is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), the ball's speed direction does not reverse, so the ball can flow smoothly, making it easier to avoid the ball becoming stuck, clogging, or flowing back.

The flow path shape at the connection end of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protrusion 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed so that the portion located downstream of the ball is further back from the path of the ball than the portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the width of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f is longer than the width of the adjacent partition plate portions 338. In addition, the rear ends of the left and right ends of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

This prevents the ball from being excessively decelerated or from flowing backwards when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the first flow path component 334, the side wall portion 334a is curved at the front left and right ends of the central member 330 and is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball by bending the flow direction of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved protrusion 334b is formed that protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334 with a curved surface shape (see Figure 16) that descends toward the front side, and is formed as a part that guides the downstream flow of the ball in a manner that bends the downstream direction of the ball.

That is, the ball that passes through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path forming part 334, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the side wall part 334a, changing the flow direction, flows down the second flow path forming part 335, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion part 161f, changing the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligned. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported by being sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and misalignment in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below. With regard to the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Regarding length, each flow path component 334-336 is formed so that the front frame portion 333, which is formed with a square outer shape when viewed from above, forms the inner side, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame portion 333 forms the outer side. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around the perimeter.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm total on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Of the parts constituting the ends of each flow path component 334-336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square-shaped front frame portion 333, only the curved protrusion 334b constituting the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is arranged inside (on the front side) the apex of the square, so the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are approximately the same length (33 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres), and this length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component 334 (22 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres).

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334-336 described above explain that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 is not constant. In other words, the time it takes for a ball to pass through the first flow path component 334, which has the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length, is shorter than the time it takes for a ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have a gentler inclination angle and a path length 1.5 times longer.

In this embodiment, by configuring it in this manner, the ball can be displaced to the front side early on when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and the ball's visibility can be reduced by being partially hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1, switching the state to one where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. This makes it easier to avoid situations where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, the speed at which the ball flows down can be slowed down, eliminating the need for the player to quickly move their gaze toward the ball, reducing the gaming burden on the player who is focusing on the ball (eye strain caused by eye movement).

When focusing on a ball flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have thus increased visibility, the amount of displacement of the ball in a front-to-back direction when viewed from the front is smaller when the ball flows down the third flow path component 336 compared to when the ball flows down the second flow path component 335 in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the playing burden on the player focusing on the ball can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 are equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is different, the apparent flow speed of the ball (the displacement speed of the ball when viewed from the front) is slower for the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 than for the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The only place where the ball's flow path changes is at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and the player's attention is easily drawn to the ball, and in other areas the ball's flow path is the same for each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, the player's line of sight is naturally likely to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who focuses their gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), which makes it possible to prevent the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of shaped portions is omitted above and below it. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the top and bottom, and space is secured above and below it (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to when the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with thickness on the top and bottom, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 will be obstructed by the symmetrical protrusion 161f, and visibility can be improved.

The third flow path component 336 is also configured so that balls that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, balls that enter the outlet 71 flow downward below the third flow path component 336, come into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and are discharged downward.

Assuming that the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 are viewed from the diagonally upward front, the balls entering the outlet 71 will flow down the back side of the third flow path component 336. As a result, the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the balls entering the outlet 71 will be viewed overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls entering the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will be increased.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, the ball will enter a field of view that draws attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are directed toward the specific winning port 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails set into the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning ports 63, 64, 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, visibility has been improved in positions closer to the front side, but in this embodiment, visibility in positions closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

For example, a light diffusion surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330 in a shape similar to a prism to cause light diffusion. In FIG. 17, the area that appears sawtooth-like is the light diffusion surface 333b, which is formed on almost the entire inner circumference of the inner surface, from top to bottom.

When light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, and while it is possible to make the surface appear to be shining brilliantly, the light blocks the view, making the visibility of the area behind it poor. According to this embodiment, visibility is poor when light is irradiated from the light-emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not irradiated, visibility can be improved at least compared to when light is irradiated.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be seen as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Surfaces similar to the light diffusion surface 333b are also formed in other areas. For example, light diffusion surface 319a is formed on the rear side of the left and right external protrusions 319, and light diffusion surface 332e is formed on the rear side of the front part of the rear frame portion 332 (see FIG. 17).

Examples of processed surfaces formed in a similar shape include the light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the plate-like portion extending to the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, which is a portion that covers the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion of the middle member 330 that is forward of the rear frame portion 332.

In this embodiment, due to these configurations, the flow paths formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have light diffusing surfaces formed on the back side, bottom side, inner surface of the spiral, and upper surface of the spiral, achieving the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

When no light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface, from the player's perspective looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side, the ball that has changed direction left or right from the third flow path component 336 is hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it immediately difficult to see.

Furthermore, even if a player tries to see the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held in the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight when viewed from diagonally above, the line of sight passes through the light diffusion surface 340, and light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen.

In this embodiment, as described below, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it becomes necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which can further improve attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot. In this way, by switching between the presence and absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the ball, and a situation in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed near each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but are consistently formed on the side that does not come into contact with the spheres flowing down the flow paths formed by each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

This prevents the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusion effect can be maintained.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, which would hinder the ball's flow downward or slow it down. In addition, by ensuring visibility inside the flow path, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball from decreasing even while it is flowing down the flow path formed by each flow path component 334 to 336.

The light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to create both the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330, the formation of the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and there is a possibility that visibility will remain high without measures. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fastening screw is used to reduce visibility.

That is, the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, so that it can be used to conceal areas where it would be difficult to form the light diffusion surface 333b. When light is irradiated onto the front frame portion 333, the light diffusion surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side, including areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusing surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334-336, and in addition to providing a brilliant glow, the purpose of this is to provide a function of concealing the board 350 and the state switching device 360 that are disposed on the back side. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a manner that it is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, but is positioned with a gap between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332 at the center from left to right, and the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in that gap (see FIG. 18). In other words, the substrate 350 is positioned so that the sliding displacement member 370 is sandwiched between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332.

In more detail, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 has a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, a gap is created due to the absence of this thick portion, and the sliding displacement member 370 can be placed in this gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the storage recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is positioned opposite the light diffusion surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front-to-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light diffusing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can have a brilliantly shining effect, and further, the visibility of the area on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion surface 164f, and since the light diffusion surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape imitating a prism formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it can be made to appear as if light is being emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the view and will not be clearly visible. Therefore, if it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the balls flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, referring to Figures 19 and 20, we will explain the switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 and its significance. In the explanation of Figures 19 and 20, Figures 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, when shown, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state disposed in a rear position.

Here, we will explain the four detection sensors SE1 on the left and right sides supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the balls to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically in two sets, and include a special chance detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which share the same function. The special chance detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outside in the left-right direction.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered a specific winning opening 65a is detected as having entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 for each detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 does not function as a detection sensor that pays out prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects balls entering the machine and changes the game state after the big win game ends.

As described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to a high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next jackpot will be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position (see Figures 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is positioned so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, preventing the ball from passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 is guided by the upper protrusion portion 376 of the slide displacement member to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can flow smoothly toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figures 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In other words, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the position (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11 during a jackpot game, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the special probability state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, and it has only passed through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or time-saving state).

As described above, in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are prepared: a guaranteed jackpot and a normal jackpot. To achieve this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared for the sliding displacement member 370 for each type of jackpot.

In other words, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11 and makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12; details of this control will be described later.

In this way, the placement of the sliding displacement members 370 is directly related to the profits that the player can obtain, and so the placement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, there have been quite a few instances of fraudulent attempts to illegally switch the placement of the sliding displacement members 370, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. In other words, when no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are positioned on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the portion inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced toward the rear side, thereby maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the rear position. This is the normal operating mode, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

A person committing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the distribution device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see Figure 1), and press the thin metal wire against the sliding displacement member 370, pushing the sliding displacement member 370 toward the back, thereby fraudulently creating a state in which a ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the sliding displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 is curved to release the load to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if the thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released to the left and right sides, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the sliding displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path taken to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the sliding displacement member 370 itself is located far away (approximately 10 cm) from the front side to the rear side of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), making it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the position of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically devising (displacement regulation) the mechanism that transmits the driving force, and in such cases the configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be increased.

In addition, when a pressure load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the flow of the ball down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit a player can obtain varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so it is desirable to avoid erroneous balls as much as possible.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable parts are provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls that flow down passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the probability change state after the big win is ensured. Based on this idea, in this embodiment, by omitting the placement of the movable parts that open and close the normal detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce material costs and reduce product costs. Furthermore, as a result of not placing movable parts, there is the positive effect that maintenance associated with failure or malfunction of the movable parts is not necessary, and the number of years of use of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the lifespan of the movable parts.

On the other hand, as a measure separate from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 have been devised to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1. In other words, the shape of the parts fixedly positioned inside the flow path (i.e., the protrusions 317, 318, 319) is used to realize a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position. This will be explained below.

First, the design of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) in the short direction (see FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same angle and direction as the longitudinal inclination of the second flow path component 335, so that it is possible to reduce the bouncing of the ball (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338) when the ball flows from the second flow path component 335 to the third flow path component 336.

This inclination in the short direction allows the positioning of the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 to be closer to the partition plate portion 338. Therefore, as the balls flow from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side, they can be positioned closer to the partition plate portion 338, reducing the possibility of the balls accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 positioned away from the partition plate portion 338) when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the short side of the lower bottom surface 336a, the flow paths formed by each flow path component 334-336 have a left-right path formed only by the second flow path component 335, and the inclination direction is toward the left-right center (toward the partition plate portion 338), so the left-right velocity occurs inward to the left and right. This also reduces the possibility of the ball erroneously passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be described. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the first to be positioned adjacent to the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, 319, but are positioned closer to the front than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, so that they come into contact without fail with the ball that passes the rear end of the third flow path component 336 while sliding against the partition plate 338.

The protruding end surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is formed to extend outward and downward to the left and right than the front end side of the protrusion, so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, a ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abuts against the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of a left and right outward component and a downward component, and flows downward.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are small, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or outward, but rather functions solely as a momentum imparting force. Furthermore, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are positioned upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the momentum imparted to the ball occurs regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after it comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained in different cases. When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while coming into contact with the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see Figure 18), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protrusion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guideline, the upper protrusion 376 forms a curved surface that starts on the inner left and right sides and ends at a position rearward of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17), while the long front-rear protrusion 317 forms a curved surface that starts on the ceiling surface of the flow path and ends at a position close to the end position (rear end position) of the front side 376a at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and uses that momentum to flow down in the outward left and right direction, allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, left and right external protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing outward to the left and right, and ball bouncing is suppressed, allowing the ball to flow smoothly down the ball. Since the purpose of left and right external protrusions 319 is to suppress ball bouncing, rather than to change the direction the ball flows down, its shape is significantly different from front and rear long protrusions 317, and its protruding end is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above the special rate detection sensor SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), so when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be disposed rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right external protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, which makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the front.

These configurations make it easier to prevent balls from clogging or flowing backwards when multiple balls are flowing downstream.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion portion 376 are retracted rearward of the long front-rear protrusion portion 317, so the ball abuts against the long front-rear protrusion portion 317 and flows.

The surface shape of the protruding end (curved surface) of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped so that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of the thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so it is easy to apply a load to the ball that it comes into contact with that has a suppressed left-right component. This load functions as a load that flows the ball diagonally downward and forward, because the protruding tip of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped like a concave curved surface (see Figure 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusions 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path component 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear and the ball flows toward the special rate detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced outward to the left and right due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318, just as it is when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. The use of this will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. If the slide displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, a forward load may be applied to the ball, and a load may be applied in a direction (forward) that causes the ball to flow backward through the third flow path component 336.

To prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, thereby reducing the possibility of the ball flowing back.

In addition, by forming the front surface of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and by positioning the left and right inner protrusions 318 so that they collide with all balls, it is possible to create an action of guiding the balls that reach the rear end of the third flow path component 336 outward to the left and right. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow back.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball, so even if the movement is performed when the ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is not thought to make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the top surface of the sliding displacement member 370 (still in the early stages of flowing outward to the left or right), the opening action of the sliding displacement member 370 applies a load to the ball in a direction that suppresses the rotation (in the direction that causes the ball to roll backwards), so the rotation of the ball can be stopped, the flow of the ball can be halted, and it becomes easier to move into free fall.

As a result, when the sliding displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is easier to prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its previous rolling, and it is easier to guide the ball to the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the present embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's point of view. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a player may play the game with his or her head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight that is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22), or he or she may play the game by bringing his or her head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details within that field of view.

Figure 21 is shown as a reference, and the following explanation will be mainly made by comparing Figures 22 and 23. For convenience, Figures 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown in imaginary lines. Note that the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), but only the left half is shown to facilitate understanding. The function of the light emitting means 351 located at the top has been described above, so here we will explain the three light emitting means 351 in the left half located in the lower portion 353.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light towards the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed in a red transparent color, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can increase the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path configuration section 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path configuration section 336.

The light diffusion surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). This prevents the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion surface 332e, and allows the light to be concentrated around the sealing member 313.

Although there are no limitations to the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the light emitting means 351 is controlled so that when the ball enters the special chance detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 emits light, whereas when the ball enters the normal detection sensor SE12, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 emits light, thereby notifying the player of the location where the ball has passed.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 319a (see FIG. 17). The light diffusion surfaces 319a and 332e are formed across the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position at which the light from the light emitting means 351 is visible is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (visualized as a strip of light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in Figures 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 (5 degrees) is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, making it more difficult to confirm the change in the flow pattern of the balls at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 compared to the view in Figure 22. However, in this field of view, it is easier to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 332a for placement of the inner member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, so that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play, and flow down each of the flow path components 334-336 in order. When multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back will be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, when multiple spheres are placed in the third flow path configuration portion 336, the spheres are placed in the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the sphere in the front hides the sphere in the back.

In addition, when a ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12, it flows outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. After it leaves the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion surface 333b of the front frame portion 333, so it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball in the process of leaving the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. However, if there is a ball (a ball that is slightly shifted left-right from the third flow path component 336) that flows from the downstream end position of the second flow path component 335 (position of ball P1) to the upstream end position of the third flow path component 336 (position of ball P2), the ball will hide the ball in the process of leaving the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the line of sight, it is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be impossible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in terms of their vertical arrangement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the upstream spheres are obscured. On the other hand, because the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible in the direction is smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 flows diagonally downward to the right regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370, and then the flow path switches between the direction toward the special bonus detection sensor SE11 and the direction toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right.

Other possible switching modes include cases where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path switches between flowing straight down and to the right. For example, if the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows straight down from the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, the switching position will be at least a position behind the center line of the third flow path configuration part 336.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336, the ball falls below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 (falls by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), and in addition to the effect of part of the ball being hidden by the third flow path component 336 itself, the ball is displaced to the left and right outward from the range visible through the third flow path component 336, so that part of the ball is hidden by the front frame portion 333.

As a result, the area visible from the player's point of view of the ball that has passed the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which path the ball has flowed down. This further increases the attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

In this way, according to this embodiment, advantages and disadvantages are set for each of the multiple directional views (see Figures 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flow direction of the balls flowing down the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336. As a result, even when it comes to the way the sorting device 300 is viewed, the player is not required to play in a one-sided manner, but can be allowed to adjust and select the viewing method he or she prefers, and a variety of play styles can be provided, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's visibility can be achieved in various ways, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, it is possible to create a state in which the roof portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is removed, making it easier to see the third flow path forming portion 336.

The following describes the visibility in the direction of view in Figures 22 and 23 on the front side of the sorting device 300. Although not shown in Figures 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see Figure 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the visibility is obstructed because the light transmitted is reduced due to the thickness of the members.

Because the area obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of Figure 23 than when viewed in the direction of Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above and are configured to reduce the refraction of light (see FIG. 12). This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being impaired.

Even in areas that cannot be made flat for functional reasons, they are formed to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support sections 161c-161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are positioned outside the line of sight of the player looking at the flow path configuration sections 334-336 (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right downwards) so as not to block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downwards.

For example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the center height of the ball and is thin-walled to the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned between the ball and the player's eyes, ensuring visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path configurations 334-336.

Balls that miss the specific winning hole 65a flow down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flow down toward the outlet 71. The effect on visibility of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 will be explained below.

Figures 22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening and closing plate 65b is open. When the opening and closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening and closing plate 65b land on the opening and closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning port 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 are balls that deviate to the left or right of the opening and closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extension parts 162b and 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the outlet 71.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the position of the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 is lower than each of the flow path components 334-336, making it easier to avoid a reduction in visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336 due to the balls flowing on the inner rail 61.

On the other hand, the balls flowing down the inner rail 61 flow toward the left-right center of the play area at a gentle angle, just like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, so like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, it has the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the left-right center of the play area. This effect guides the player's gaze to the outlet 71 as well as to the third flow path component 336. In other words, because the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are in the same left-right position (left-right center position), the player can move their gaze up and down to guide their gaze to a state where both the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are visible.

Therefore, regardless of whether the balls shot toward the play area tend to enter the specific winning port 65a efficiently (meaning fewer wasted balls during a jackpot game) or whether balls frequently stray and flow down between the extensions 162b and 162c (meaning frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the flowing balls can have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In other words, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, and if the ball misses the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the inner rail 61.

Balls heading toward the outlet 71 are usually wasted balls and have no effect on the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, balls heading toward the outlet 71 can have the role of guiding the player's gaze toward the third flow path configuration section 336.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball may flow along the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path component 335, potentially reducing the visibility of the second flow path component 335.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment in which the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are arranged above the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a can prevent the balls from flowing down, so it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path component 336 and the area around its rear end is reduced due to balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the length of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 ensures the time it takes for a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370, but this avoids the problem of increasing the amount of space required for placement. That is, as shown in Figures 22 and 23, the placement distance between the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370, which serves as a guide for the placement of the third flow path configuration part 336, is made short from the player's line of sight.

Moreover, since the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), when the player's line of sight is directed diagonally downward and rearward, which is a frequent line of sight as shown in FIG. 23, it appears as if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so close that its outline is embedded into the outline of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a, which is configured to be long from left to right, and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 located at both left and right ends is collected below the center of the specific winning opening 65a via each of the symmetrical flow path components 334-336. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows left and right down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the structure required for the ball's flow path can be made to have a shorter left and right length the further down it is, making it easier to place it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design concept is to position the specific winning opening 65a close to the outlet 71, and instead of a structure that causes the balls to flow directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335, a structure is adopted in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335 through the third flow path component 336, making it possible to form the outlet 71 (an opening disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) directly below the second flow path component 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71.

In this way, by shortening the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 at the player's line of sight, the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 can be shortened in the design of a play area where the size when viewed from the front is limited to a certain standard, thereby improving the design freedom of the play area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operation pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, a ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in that order (see Figures 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that the ball passes through each of the flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

In other words, after the ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is configured not to reach the detection sensor SE1 located at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, so the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball entering the prize by mistake.

For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the need for control (which involves unnatural operation of the opening and closing plate) that briefly opens the opening and closing plate at the start of a round R in order to prevent erroneous winning into the V winning sensor, as is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V-type probability attacker. This makes the operation of the opening and closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning port a natural operation, providing an environment in which players can enjoy playing with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-type attacker in the above example, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened is likely to result in an erroneous winning entry, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as described below, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened can have a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball), making it unnecessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened.

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.), etc.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special pattern, and FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal pattern.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 1 (drawing based on the ball entering first winning slot 64), the value of first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot A1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 19" is associated with the big winning type A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is associated with the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 49" is associated with the big winning type B2 (see 202b4 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B2 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79" is associated with the big winning type C1 (see 202b5 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot C1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot C2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering first winning slot 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in either case. Therefore, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected compared to when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, a four-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a fifteen-round jackpot game, so balls can be shot earlier in an attempt to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 140), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot a is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 2 (a lottery based on a ball entering second winning port 140), 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected in either case. Therefore, a player who wins a jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 2 can obtain a larger number of prize balls to be paid out compared to a player who wins a jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 1, and this can increase the player's motivation to play the game to win the lottery for special pattern 2 (a game in which a ball is fired to enter second winning port 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged significantly even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern that has the disadvantage of slightly worsening the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 but the advantage of making it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 2 to the third operation pattern, the impact of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game can be highlighted.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery for special pattern 2 will be drawn out, making it possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (good time efficiency in paying out prize balls).

The setting of the jackpot type for special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type for special symbol 2 may be set in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced and controlled by the operation pattern Y. This jackpot type may also be set at a small rate (for example, about 20%).

This can increase the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, preventing the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually confirm the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370, and the timing of the displacement movement can make the player happy or sad, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, during the special symbol probability change, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric device 140a when the normal symbol wins becomes longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it is easier to get the ball into the second winning slot 140, so it is easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol probability change state is reached, it is easier to get a special symbol jackpot, and the special symbol probability change state, which is more likely to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when a jackpot is reached, is more likely to be repeated, making it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play while strongly expecting to move to the special symbol probability change state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is stipulated for each display mode.

Figure 25 shows the time-based changes in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines that a jackpot has been awarded in the special winning determination process, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special winning display (pattern changing presentation) has ended. Below, we will explain the operation control of the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the sliding displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be explained below.

In the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 0.2 second opening time in the first operating pattern is set to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one on either side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to prevent multiple balls from entering the specific winning opening 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering"), and is not intended to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one. In other words, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball will reach each side of the specific winning opening 65a, and that all balls will enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time.

In the case of a big win A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of a big win A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and a time longer than the time it takes for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

In other words, according to this embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 in approximately 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning opening 65a, so even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the 0.2 second opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball placed in the third flow path configuration part 336 regardless of the timing of the ball's entry (see FIG. 22). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and increases the attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration part 334-336 as a ball entering the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path configuration portion 336, so there is little possibility that the ball will block the line of sight, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, because the second flow path forming portion 335 is disposed close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and disposed further forward than the sliding displacement member 370, the player's gaze is likely to be drawn to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In other words, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (for example, by displaying "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to easily avoid the player seeing the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

In this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center from the left to the right, so if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a on one side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be seen without being blocked by the balls flowing down by focusing on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to that ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of a jackpot B1 or B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 1.0 second opening time in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which multiple balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a on either the left or right side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to allow multiple balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a in succession on either the left or right side (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from when they were launched, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, because the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or two (or more). When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the opening and closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long period of time up to the first operating time T1.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this control example, the opening and closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, so a situation may arise where multiple balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession on either the left or right side. On the other hand, the opening interval of the opening and closing plate 65b is not limited, so unlike the second operating pattern, it is possible that the next ball will enter each of the flow path components 334-336 before two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336. Therefore, compared to the second operating pattern, the third operating pattern is more likely to cause a situation in which the visibility of a ball placed downstream of each of the flow path components 334-336 is reduced by a ball placed upstream.

In the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is set to keep the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but because the time it takes for the ball to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the sliding displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting caught can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or whether there are two balls. When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the third operating pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of play R, so compared to the second operating pattern, the arrangement of the balls in each flow path component 334-336 is more likely to become disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is more likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which balls can enter the specific winning port 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be carried out early. In other words, it is easier to quickly meet the round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the entry of a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) pachinko balls), and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being drawn out.

In particular, when a jackpot of special symbol 2 is hit, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in operation pattern X with a 100% probability, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it is guaranteed that the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the sliding displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, but priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game from being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round of round play R ends, the timer means controls the operation of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and starts the second round of round play R after the first interval time Int1 has elapsed.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from a closed state to an open state to open the specific winning opening 65a, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the sliding displacement member 370 is constantly maintained in the front position, so that the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see Figure 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls have won) is met in the second round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening and closing plate 65b moves between the closed state and the open state to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

When the final round R of play ends, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed, and the big win game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be performed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (e.g., the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening and closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first to third operating patterns) of the opening and closing plate 65b, and the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of each of the flow path configurations 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration 336 can be changed. This can motivate a player who pays attention to the ball passing the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of the third flow path configuration 336 to devise a way to launch the ball.

For example, a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when multiple balls are placed simultaneously in each of the flow path components 334-336, so the decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be suppressed by intentionally increasing the interval between ball launches as necessary (for example, in the jackpot type of the second or third operation pattern). Note that in the first operation pattern, balls entering the specific winning hole 65a are restricted, so that a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the launch mode.

On the other hand, if the interval between ball launches is increased, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, which may result in prolonged round game R. In other words, the player can select how to play round game R between a game mode that prioritizes visibility of detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolonged round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a short period (e.g., 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass after the start of the round game R, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is placed in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of operation pattern Y), and therefore it is possible to avoid the displacement action of the slide displacement member 370 being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if there is a delay before the balls are released, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning port 65a will be extended, which may result in the round game R being prolonged. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, according to this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 and slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and balls can be inserted through the specific winning hole 65a from either the left or right side.

In other words, for example, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved by maintaining the above-mentioned launch pattern that widens the interval between ball launches or the launch pattern that allows a delay before the ball is launched when the ball lands on the left side, and launching the ball in any launch pattern when the ball lands on the right side.

Specifically, the balls aimed at the specific winning port 65a can be shot to the left and right in a shooting pattern in which at least the first ball is shot to the right, some balls (for example, the second ball) are shot to the left, and the remaining balls are shot to the right.

In this case, by focusing on the balls flowing down the left flow path rather than on the balls flowing down the right flow path of each flow path component 334-336, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the balls flowing down the left flow path pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding having your line of sight blocked by other balls. In addition, in this case, since balls are constantly being shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid an extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, and it is possible to avoid the round game R becoming protracted.

The purpose of shooting the balls left and right is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds it takes for a certain ball to pass through the left flow path, and during the rest of the time, it is sufficient to shoot the balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths at will.

This makes it possible to prevent balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a from colliding with each other and spilling to the outside of the specific winning opening 65a to the left or right, even in cases where the open width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, when the ball's entry path is limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric device 140a or the nail arrangement (see Figure 2)). Note that although the nail arrangement in Figure 2 is asymmetrical, it may also be symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 that is fastened to the rear side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened to the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

Figure 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Figure 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in Figure 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown as being visible through the opening 511a. Also, Figure 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 26 and 27.

The operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case 510 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall 512 along the rear surface of the game board 13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate portion 513 that provides surface support for the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a number of insertion holes 513b that are drilled so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted through them.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the mating recess of the base plate 60 (circular or oval in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the mating gap in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the inner shape of the mating recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 comprises a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the inside right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the inside lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. In addition, on the inside left part of the rear case 510, a substrate having light emitting means such as LEDs, and a diffusion decorative plate LB1 disposed to cover the substrate from the front side, formed of a light-transmitting material, and having a light diffusion processing formed over the entire surface are disposed.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is disposed above the opening 511a, all of which are disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of the operating unit 500 will be described.

Figures 28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500, showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. Figure 28 illustrates each operating unit 600-800 in a performance standby state, Figure 29 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state, and Figure 30 illustrates the state in which the second operating unit 700 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state.

Note that in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface facing the front of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

In Figures 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is shown in phantom lines. Inside, the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side can be clearly seen, but outside the center frame 86, even though the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin material, the view is likely to be obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67 (see Figure 2). Therefore, for example, when arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in Figure 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front is likely to be reduced.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 differs from that shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, but its role is the same. In addition, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operating unit 800, but it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, but a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed on the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front. Therefore, the role of rolling a ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper frame part (upper outer frame part) of the actual center frame 86 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

Figures 31 and 32 show the state in which the third operating unit 800 has changed from the standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state. In Figure 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward, showing the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800, while in Figure 32, the second decorative member 880 faces forward, showing the combined state of the third operating unit 800.

The displacement that switches between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in a performance standby state, the surrounding decorative members will collide with the decorative members 870 and 880, causing a malfunction, so it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to an extent sufficient to avoid a collision between the decorative members 870, 880) and is in a state in which the displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is permitted in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), and is then controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

Figure 33 shows the third operating unit 800 in an extended state and the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state displaced slightly lower than the extended state, Figure 34 shows the state in which the first operating unit 600 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to the intermediate performance state, and Figure 35 shows the state in which the third operating unit 800 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to a performance standby state and the first operating unit 600 has displaced to the extended state.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the standby state, thereby making it possible to prevent the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 from overlapping when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (it is possible to allow the front-to-back positions to overlap).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the position of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state is set to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), thereby preventing the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, the function of the second operating unit 700 as a performance device is improved by configuring multiple viewing states of the second operating unit 700, including a state in which it is viewed in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which it is viewed in a state in which it is slightly receding from the opening 511a but positioned close to the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the first operating unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first performance surface 661a that faces diagonally left in a performance standby state, a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the first performance surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c that is adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, letters, etc.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for presentation, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, in a location where visibility from the front side is likely to be reduced due to the positioning of the center frame 86. However, the first presentation surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with arrow F-B as the reference), so that visibility of the first presentation surface 661a at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, in a diagonal direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81, can be improved.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends in front of the third pattern display device 81, facing directly toward the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the second presentation surface 661b faces directly ahead, improving the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b at the player's line of sight viewing the second decorative rotating member 660.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the presentation surfaces 661a-661c that are visible to the player depending on its position, and is also configured to be able to switch its posture depending on its position in order to improve the visibility of each presentation surface 661a-661c that is visible to the player.

In other words, it is not limited to a planar change in posture parallel to the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), but is designed to have an angle change that is intentional in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be in the front-to-back direction and to be directly facing the display surface, so visibility can be improved by having the display surface facing forward (in the direction of arrow F), but on the other hand, the closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be at an angle, so visibility can be improved by making the display surface at an angle to be directly facing the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front of the board, and is positioned in the upper right corner of the rear case 510 and hidden from view by the player when the first operating unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see Figure 28) and intermediate performance state (see Figure 34).

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 from the front when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the right edge of the exterior shape of the protruding decorative portion 652b is located to the right of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front side of the board of the protruding decorative portion 652b, a display effect can be created that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

In more detail, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right end RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

In contrast, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so that it extends beyond the right end RE1 of the area to the right. Therefore, by relating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the decoration on the front of the board of the protruding decorative part 652b, the player can visually perceive as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area. This makes it possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying polka dots on the third pattern display device 81 and decorating the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b with a similar polka dot pattern, or writing a certain number on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b in the same font as the number displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the number to notify the winner of a lottery).

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of a fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

The presentation mode of the overhang decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by arranging a small liquid crystal device with a display surface on the front side instead of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, thereby avoiding restrictions on the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the display area is expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area.

The object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the second operating unit 700 (e.g., covering member 787), or the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

Figure 36 is a front perspective view of the first action unit 600, and Figure 37 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit 600. The first action unit 600 is configured in a complex displacement manner in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the protruding decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is displaced relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually see the different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in Figures 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, a drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported on the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged on the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixing means 610 includes a base member 611 arranged facing the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 from the front to the rear, and a front cover member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened to the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 on the inside of the fixing portion 614, and a guide long hole 616 formed as a long hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that is a mixture of straight and curved sections, the details and function of which will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and fitted and supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610, a transmission long hole 623 formed in the middle of the main body 621 as a long hole extending in a linear direction, a circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in the drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured so that one arm abuts against the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm abuts against a protruding piece of the front cover member 612, and is configured to generate a biasing force in a direction that raises the rotating member 620 (clockwise when viewed from the front).

When the cylindrical portion 622 is supported, the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622, and a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615. This allows the rotating member 620 to be supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in detail later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam 634 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633.

When the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are axially supported on the front cover member 612 so that they cannot fall off.

The front cover member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d that penetrates along an arc centered on the tubular portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes cylindrically from the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and its front side is inserted into the transmission slot 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the width length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623 is designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This makes it possible to reduce the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1, which is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to grasp the position of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tube with a perforated bottom on the rear side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

The above-mentioned configuration allows for the transmission of driving force through meshing between the gear teeth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 in response to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

When the cylindrical parts 642, 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported on the main body part 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has a rear side of the bottom disposed close to the front edge of the front cover member 612, and is provided with an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so that the intermediate gear 644 can mesh with the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 on the front side of the bottom, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circle centered on the tubular center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms an orthogonal rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an electric decoration board 653 that is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side, a wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is supported on the outside of the cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a that extends cylindrically from the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female threads 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip, and has a notch portion 651c that is cut out so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane that passes through the female threads 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening to secure an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, through the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by threading a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are supported coaxially on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are configured to be displaceable along the guide elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in part of its circumference, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is positioned opposite the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, forming a path for electrical wiring.

Some of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, where the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. The remaining wiring passes through the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side opposite the semi-cylindrical portion 655a on the top and bottom sides that face the main body member 651), and is guided to the back of the protruding decorative portion 652b, where the terminals are connected to the connector on the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end, and these gear teeth 654a are formed so that they can mesh with the intermediate gear 644. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in a position sufficient for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative part 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the protruding decorative part 652b, and light from a light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653 can be used to light up or flash the protruding decorative part 652b.

The front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, so that the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate together.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported on a circular cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and has gear teeth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, but the details of their operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fastened to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip of the semi-cylindrical portion 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 662 also undergoes a rotational displacement in conjunction with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described below. This may cause the electrical wiring passing between the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a to become twisted or disorganized when being guided into the connector of the illumination board 662. However, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663, which has a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring, is to prevent the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized.

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is unavoidable that the electrical wiring will become twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it is possible to avoid excessive strain on the electrical wiring or the electrical wiring becoming twisted and broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) that is parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. The second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from coming off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness-wise side of the illuminated board 662, the first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and the third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction.

In this way, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c, but since the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b), when the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c (the surface facing upwards) is illuminated in a state in which the second performance surface 661b is positioned on the front side (the extended state of the first operating unit 600), the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light that travels at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

In other words, unlike when LEDs are placed behind the illumination board 662, the light can be prevented from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so the light illuminating the third performance surface 661c can also illuminate the second performance surface 661b. This makes it possible to increase the variety of performance patterns that illuminate the second performance surface 661b, and improve the brightness of the second performance surface 661b during a light-emitting performance.

The decorative fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has decorative letters and figures formed thereon so that they can be seen by the player, and is equipped with an illuminated board 671 that shines light diagonally forward and to the left from its back side. The decorative fixing member 670 is fixedly positioned on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player's line of sight towards the decorative fixing member 670 is always tilted diagonally to the right. In other words, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illuminated board 671 to the left, the light can be illuminated on the side where the player's eyes are likely to be located.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge and a right edge that are raised toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge and the left edge and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 passes when tilting and displacing.

Figure 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, Figure 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, and Figure 42 is a side view of the first operating unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in Figure 40. Note that the base member 611 (see Figure 38) and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

In the standby state for performance, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (e.g. parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to displace while sliding along the transmission long hole 623. In other words, when the displacement starts, there is no assistance from inertia compared to during the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large, but by configuring to reduce the displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the displacement starts.

The same is also true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission long hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position for the performance waiting state and the position for the extended state) is along (e.g., parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with each other from both sides of the intermediate gear 644. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to be the same length, so the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 relative to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 relative to the intermediate gear 644 are the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 mesh with the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660, which is perpendicular to the rotation axis.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. In other words, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the standby state will be explained in chronological order. Figure 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate operating state, and Figure 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate operating state. Figure 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and Figure 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the narrow third performance surface 661c faces the front. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 has a straight portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape).

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the straight section 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight section 616a and the curved section 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the curved section 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of axis O1 between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state is a linear displacement along the straight line portion 616a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate performance state and the extended state is a curved displacement along the curved line portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving a driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, without any countermeasures, the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 may cause a large displacement resistance between the guide slot 616 and the rotating member 620. However, in this embodiment, this is suppressed by configuring the guide slot 616 so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the displacement direction of the rotating member 620.

For example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state (Figure 41) is a displacement in which it tilts downward, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Also, for example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see Figure 46) is a displacement in which it rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that displaces inside the guide slot 616.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 48(a) and FIG. 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values are shown as positive downward displacement amounts and negative upward displacement amounts, and in FIG. 48(b), the values in FIG. 48(a) are shown as bar graphs.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 as the rotating member 620 rotates is illustrated at 10 degree intervals as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the rotating member 620 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in solid lines.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 is explained below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the sum of the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, the supported member 640 is in a vertical position, and the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the position of the rotating arm is within a range of 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction to be small are met in two ways.

In the extended state, both of these are reversed, and the conditions for large vertical displacement are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is prone to a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state (a midway position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

In this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is shaped so that a curved section 616b is combined below a straight section 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced down the straight section 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved section 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling too fast beyond the position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the right of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the left of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces back and forth in the vertical direction.

This allows the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 to be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the linear portion 616a, the supported member 640 appears to the player as if it is rotating around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, a sliding displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up caused by the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to when the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide in the left-right direction from the start of the displacement. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts to operate can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured in association with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 based on the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moving back and forth (returning), and allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be a forceful displacement.

Even in a situation where the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward), so the load required to start displacing the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

The action caused by the curved portion 616b will now be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angle width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG. 48.

First, as a premise, there is no need to use curved portions in the guide slot 616. In other words, the guide slot 616 may be configured with only straight portions, regardless of whether or not it uses any bending portions to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state as described above.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616b is deliberately used to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This is explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 displaces downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces downward.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (rightward) opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640, and the curved portion 616b is formed in the lower half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (leftward) that follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (at the start of tilting), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, ensuring a high displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to a terminal position, if the time required for displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the up and down direction will be the same, so if the displacement starts slowly, the displacement speed will increase towards the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, and reaches a maximum at the displacement end (displacement bottom end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide long hole 616 during the period when the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement bottom end, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis line OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, which may adversely affect the performance of the first operating unit 600 if the performance is to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby making the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 uniform.

In this case, uniformity does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes limiting the range of speed. In particular, in this embodiment, during tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start of entry into the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after entry into the lower half of the curved portion 616b begins.

In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved section 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up), can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described with reference to Figure 49. Figure 49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth 652a and the gear tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are both set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ and the rotation angle with the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, and therefore the change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and 90 degrees from the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

When in the standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a position where the first performance surface 661a is tilted 45 degrees to the left (the third performance surface 661c is tilted 45 degrees to the right), so that as the angle θ changes and the state is switched between the intermediate performance state and the extended state in sequence, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third performance surface 661c faces the front (see Figure 43), and then the second performance surface 661b faces the front (see Figure 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the guide elongated hole 616 to determine the position of the supported member 640. In other words, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the position of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if the detection sensor KS1 is only a sensor that detects the position of the rotating member 620, as in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

In other words, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. This also makes it possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 being constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be explained below.

The change in angle θ is roughly the same as the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state is roughly larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved section 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved section 616b, and eventually becomes lower than the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (reduced to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the angle θ relative to the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle to vary, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be similarly configured to vary. That is, in a range where the value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easier to maintain its posture, while in a range where the value of the angle θ is large, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be large, making it easier to quickly change the surface facing the player (presentation surfaces 661a to 661c).

The above-mentioned configuration allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be accelerated or accelerated. As described above, the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 simultaneously involves a change in position and posture associated with the displacement of the supported member 640, and a rotational displacement about the rotation axis formed at the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a becomes noticeably large when the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight portion 616a of the guide slot 616 into the curved portion 616b.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front side (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotational direction is clearly visible. In other words, the player can visually see that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantly rotating and displaced.

In this embodiment, since the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the front side at the rotation end (lower displacement end) of the rotating member 620 and is viewed as a single unit when positioned closely adjacent to the decorative fixing member 670 (see Figure 28), it is desirable to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing back upward when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform, so that it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (e.g., the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unruly due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660, which are supported on the rotation tip side of the rotating member 620, and stabilizes the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In addition, the lower half of the curved section 616b is configured to suitably impede displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in the direction of bouncing back (upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. That is, the lower half of the curved section 616b has a short side direction that slopes upward and left, and since it is possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in response to the displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 is different from the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driving side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of its displacement.

If there was no guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620); however, in this embodiment, by being guided by the long guide hole 616, it is slightly deflected left and right in the direction along the long guide hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular orbit centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the displacement direction is not along the guide elongated hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide elongated hole 616. This makes it possible to suppress the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 and prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The following describes the characteristics of the displacement of the pivoting member 620 in the rising direction. When the first operating unit 600 changes state from the extended state to the performance standby state, the pivoting member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (i.e., the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly used to raise and displace the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 arranged on the supported member 640, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the less load is required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is designed to be at a minimum value when the rotating member 620 starts to rotate from the extended state of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, which is centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position that is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing in the vertical direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotating member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand this load with only slight localized elastic displacement by distributing it in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to when the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 breaks. In addition, excessive elastic deformation of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 can be configured to withstand loads that the rotating member 620 cannot withstand by elastically deforming, thereby preventing damage to the rotating member 620.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates and displaces around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from a performance standby state to an overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the protruding state is approximately 135 degrees, and the protruding decorative part 652b rotates approximately 45 degrees. Here, when the protruding decorative part 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it feels like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see Figure 28). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which is the basis for the rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b, itself changes its posture in a manner that rotates clockwise, so it is possible to avoid collision with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the protruding decorative portion 652b to be displaceable based on the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative part 652b is a part that is fixedly positioned based on the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the overhanging state, when the supported member 640 changes from its overhanging state position to its performance standby state position, the overhanging decorative part 652b may overhang to the upper left of the supported member 640, potentially causing a negative effect on the performance, such as colliding with another operating unit 800 or partially obscuring the overhang display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative part 652b rotates and displaces in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the driving side of the supported member 640, based on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that when the supported member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, it protrudes in tandem, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side retreating from the third pattern display device 81, it retracts in tandem. Therefore, the position of the protruding decorative part 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be calculated from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640. In other words, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between the change in angle θ of approximately 135 degrees and the change in posture angle of the supported member 640 of approximately 90 degrees.

In this embodiment, the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1, a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1, b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between the angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced at a constant angular velocity, the angular velocity of rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant, even though the displacement speed of the supported member 640 is not constant.

This allows the player to visually perceive the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means other than the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

By configuring it in this way, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 can be made to appear, from the player's point of view, as if there were sections of sliding movement and sections of rotational movement, and the displacement mode of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode, as if it were not mechanical.

This effect can be achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into separate sections where the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, and sections where the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. In other words, the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b is influenced by the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in sections where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a rotational displacement, and in sections where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a sliding displacement.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated to form a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and although a case has been described in which it is displaced from one displacement end point to the other displacement end point, the drive direction may be switched so that it is displaced in the opposite direction at a midpoint in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the rotation to return to the performance standby state. In this case, since the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway down, it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to ensure an accurate stopping position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. As described above, the magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotating member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, automatically suppressing the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, making it easier to stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and its states are mainly switched between a performance standby state (see FIG. 28) in which it retreats below the opening 511a to ensure the field of view of the player looking at the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28), a protruding state (see FIG. 30) in which it is positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81 and attracts attention, and an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 35) that is a state between the two.

Figure 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and Figure 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In Figures 50 and 51, the peripheral components of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and which is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered. The lifting/lowering plate member 740 is provided with a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side thereof, a set of front support members 760 that are configured as a left-right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, a blind decorative member 768 that is fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702, and a lifting/lowering reversal performance device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner that combines lifting/lowering displacement and forward/rearward displacement on the lifting/lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support part 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming part 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) that are arranged to detect the position of the detection part 735 of the drive transmission device 730, a front upper inclined part 714 that is inclined in a manner that the further it goes upward at the front side of the left side and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder part 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening parts 718 that form female threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart so that the detection grooves are positioned at positions where the detectable parts 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged to match the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operating unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700 from the output result.

The pivot arm member 720 is supported by a cylindrical protrusion 511b that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side, and is formed as a long plate in a L-shape when viewed from the front. The support tube 722 protrudes cylindrically backward from the bent part of the main body 721, and has an inner peripheral shape formed to a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion 511b to be inserted therethrough. The long hole 723 is formed in the long hole shape at the right end of the main body 721, and the left end of the main body 721 is formed in the long hole shape. It is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 724 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front (in a direction parallel to the protruding direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, a cylindrical fastening portion 725 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastening portion 724 and the support tube portion 722 and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and a torsion spring SP2 that is wrapped around the support tube portion 722 and applies a biasing force to the main body portion 721 in an upward direction (a direction lifting the left side) between the rear case 510.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that it is shifted toward the front side compared to the base end side of the support tube 722, and the support plate 701 is disposed in the gap formed on the rear side by the step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened to the bottom wall part 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole part 701a that is drilled so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastening part 725. A fastening screw is inserted through the long hole part 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, and is screwed into the cylindrical fastening part 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported on the support plate 701 via the cylindrical fastening part 725 so as not to fall off.

The support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the left side of the pivot arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. This prevents the pivot arm member 720 from being displaced toward the front side due to a load applied to the left side of the pivot arm member 720, so that the displacement of the pivot arm member 720 can be stably supported.

The right side of the main body 721 is disposed in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. In other words, the forward/rearward displacement of the right side of the main body 721 is restricted by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line passing through the center of the width and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support tube portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotation direction of the pivot arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the long hole portion 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed from the front side to the right front plate member 710, a drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are each supported by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusions 711a, and fastening screws that are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are supported by the cylindrical protrusions 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support part 711 includes the cylindrical protrusion 711a described above and an arc-shaped hole 711b that is drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 includes a detectable portion 735 that protrudes toward the front side in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be insertable into the arc hole 711b, an extension portion 736 that extends to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and is configured as a part that enables the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to detect the position of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed so that it can be inserted into the long hole 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the pivot arm member 720 via the long hole 723.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. When this fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, the pivot arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a in an undetachable manner.

The lift plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down in response to the rotation of the pivot arm member 720, and is equipped with a guided member 741 that is arranged on the left end side and guided in the up and down direction, and a horizontally elongated member 742 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741 and is long in the left and right directions.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted therethrough, allowing for vertical displacement along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the position of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontal member 742 includes a long hole 743 that is drilled in the shape of a long oval with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 to be inserted, a cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 that are disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant to the left and right of the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw, which is inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, is screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion tube portion 773 of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is inserted, and which supports the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in a state in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward. In other words, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is not fixed to the lifting/reversing plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the lifting/reversing plate member 740 in a manner in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward based on the lifting/reversing plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tube portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that pulls the lift plate member 740 and the lift reversal performance device 770 apart.

The guide portion 745 is made up of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a long plate portion 745a extending from front to back, and a rotating cylinder portion 745b rotatably supported on a pair of front and rear shaft portions that protrude outwardly to the left and right from the plate portion 745a.

The rotating cylinder section 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting/reversing performance device 770 moves forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the forward and backward movement, but details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, has a front upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in a manner that the further upward it approaches the front side, and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a number of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The concealing decorative member 768 comprises a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate is disposed on the rear side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a to which an LED is fixed on the front side, so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front support members 760 each include a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving inclined portion 762 arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and inclined toward the front side as the back surface of the plate moves upward.

The fixing plate 761 is a plate that is fastened to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted from the front side into the insertion hole and threaded into the corresponding female thread portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclination portion 762 is positioned in front of the front upper inclination portions 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclination portion 762 and the front upper inclination portions 714, 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is configured to lift and lower while displacing in the front-to-rear direction. This lifting and lowering displacement is explained below.

Figure 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in Figure 28, and Figure 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in Figure 28. Figures 52(a) and 52(b) show the second operation unit 700 in a standby state for performance.

Figure 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in Figure 33, and Figure 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in Figure 33. Figures 53(a) and 53(b) show intermediate performance states of the second operating unit 700.

Figure 54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in Figure 30, and Figure 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in Figure 30. Figures 54(a) and 54(b) show the extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Figures 28, 30, and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

When the drive force transmission starts from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, so that the displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts to rotate can be suppressed. The same thing is also true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, so that the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the pivot arm member 720 is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is arranged on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-to-rear direction as it is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is reduced by a configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and by a configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting and reversing plate member 740.

In other words, the pair of rotating cylinder sections 774e are designed to be aligned parallel to the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is located on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, see FIG. 56), which are arranged symmetrically. By the rotating cylinder section 774e rolling around the center of the cylindrical section 774d, the displacement resistance of the main body member 771, which displaces along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotating cylinder parts 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder part 745b is designed to be positioned slightly upward, which helps to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder part 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined part 762 and the front upper inclined parts 714, 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the performance device 780 is designed so that its center of gravity (position of the axis of rotation) is located slightly forward of the front-to-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is constantly biased in a forward tilt direction by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b descends is disposed slightly upward, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c ascends is disposed slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b because there is a gap between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b because there is a gap between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lift-up/down reversing device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the forward/backward displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lift-up/down reversing device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, which is divided into vertical displacement and front-to-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but in this case, the forward-to-rear displacement can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the driving force required to lift the lifting and reversing performance device 770 from becoming excessive.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it is its natural length in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 53) of the second operating unit 700. In other words, when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned lower than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that assists the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 731, whereas when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned higher than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the position of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the intermediate performance state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 and then controlled to be stopped so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, even if the stopping timing is slightly earlier than ideal, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second operating unit 700 so as to move it closer to the intermediate performance state.

For example, when the stop control is performed in a similar manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operating unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and this descent due to its own weight will be suppressed by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state and maintained in its position.

In addition, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operating unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stopped to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, if the lifting and reversing performance device 770 passes the intermediate performance state downward, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, making it easier to prevent a large downward displacement beyond the intermediate performance state. And even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state.

Here, we will explain the effect of the lift-and-reverse effect device 770, which is displaced forward and backward in response to lift-and-reverse displacement. As a premise, a movable device is known that can be switched between a state in which it attracts the player's attention by displacing in and out of a frame bounded by a center frame 86, and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of these movable gadgets are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 has been increased, and the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the play area) at the edge of the field of vision when passing through the inside of the center frame 86 and looking at the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, if the appearance of the movable props retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 is poor, it may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also on the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and top and bottom sides (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and second secondary decorative surface 787b2 in FIG. 52), and the displacement direction of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is set to a line that starts from the player side (front side) as it approaches the back side (sloping downward as it approaches the rear), that is, along the direction of the player's line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, so that each decorative surface can easily fit within the player's field of vision.

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be comfortably within the player's field of vision. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the decorations (figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 54) that is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54) and the upper side (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, first sub-decorative surface 787a2 in FIG. 52) that is visible to the player in the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) are formed as decorations that are related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first minor decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second minor decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other, and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations that are different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so it is easily visible when the player moves their gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "Chance" or "Big Win") that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state can be visible to the player through the upper surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state.

This allows the third pattern display device 81 to be displaced to a standby state for easier viewing, while the covering member 787, which is positioned so as not to be conspicuous, can continue to attract the player's attention.

In addition, as described below, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, so that the content of the decorative surface visible to the player in the extended state can be different.

For example, if the lifting and reversing display device 770 is placed in a display standby state before the player can see the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (because the player misses it or the operating speed is too fast), and the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the front side, most of the front side will be hidden by the game board 13 in the display standby state, and the player will be forced to focus on the liquid crystal display displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, reducing his or her ability to focus on the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be seen from the top side, as in this embodiment, the player can visually check the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the performance standby state and understand the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state.

As a result, for players who miss the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. This makes it possible to maintain high attention to the covering member 787 regardless of the state, such as the performance standby state or the extended state.

In this embodiment, the forward/rearward displacement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured as a displacement from a state in which it is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the front of the covering member 787 faces the back of the plate of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 has a flow path forming portion 86a formed to protrude toward the covering member 787.

The flow path forming portion 86a is a portion that forms the rear portion of the guide flow path for guiding the ball that has flown down the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 after reaching the lower edge of the center frame 86, to the first winning opening 64 disposed in the play area by swinging the ball backward once and then forward again (see FIG. 9). In other words, the flow path forming portion 86a positions the rear end surface BE1 of the play area rearward of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Because a ball that flows down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning port 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86, the flow path forming portion 86a is likely to attract the player's attention. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, making it easy to configure a state in which the performance device 780 in the performance standby state comes into the player's field of vision.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

In other words, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front so as to enter a front-to-rear position that is the same as the front-to-rear position of the play area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, are aligned, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, the longitudinal position of the performance device 780 is lowered further back in the intermediate performance state and the performance standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member 661 of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 can be easily viewed separately (independently) compared to the extended state.

The lifting and reversing performance device 770 includes a main body member 771 that is connected and supported by the lifting plate member 740, and a performance device 780 that is configured to be displaceable based on the main body member 771. Next, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

Figure 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770, and Figure 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. Note that Figures 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 55 and 56.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 formed long in the left-right direction, a cylindrical insertion tube portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, a pair of guide extension portions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, an upper long portion 775 that is formed integrally with the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 and formed long in the left-right direction by a connecting portion that extends up and down, a plurality of guide portions 776 that are arranged on both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 toward the back side and are configured to be able to guide the linear plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left-right center of the upper long portion 775 and can support the drive transmission device, and a light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened and fixed to the front sides of the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775.

The insertion tube portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744 of the lifting plate member 740, and is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide on the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744, and the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction by the sliding. In other words, by inserting the insertion tube portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lifting plate member 740.

The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a whose width faces the left-right direction, a second horizontal plate 774c connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b whose width faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), a pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d protruding outward from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a, and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so that it extends more inwardly to the left and right than the widthwise ends of the first horizontal plate 774b. This widthwise extension is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740 in the assembled state, and the mutual abutment suppresses the tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward. In other words, by ensuring a width such that the second horizontal plate 774c is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward based on the lifting plate member 740.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not aligned vertically, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). In other words, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be simultaneously abutted against the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. This allows the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e to roll stably, making it easier to avoid localized loads.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically aligned pair and having female threads formed on the inner circumference, and a plurality of anti-disengagement plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The fall prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the multiple cylindrical portions 776a, and is fastened to the cylindrical portion 776a by inserting fastening screws into the insertion holes from the rear side and screwing them into the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a part for preventing the linear plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical protrusion portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically from the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d drilled at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a wiring fastener member 777e that is fastened and fixed to the back side.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and when the fastening screw is screwed into it while it is inserted into the transmission gear 781b, it supports the up-down inversion member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The through hole 777d is designed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a part that holds and secures the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between it and the transmission device retaining plate 777, but by forming it into a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device retaining plate 777, it is also possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device retaining plate 777.

The light-emitting means 778 is equipped with two elongated plate-shaped electric lighting boards 778a, one above the other, on the left and right sides of which light-emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-diffusing member 778b, which is a plate member made of a light-transmitting resin material arranged on the front side of the electric lighting boards 778a and on which a light-diffusing process is performed.

The upper illumination board 778a is equipped with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side, one above the other. The detection sensors 778d are photocoupler type detection devices, and are configured to be able to detect the position of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging an arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove, as described in detail below.

The lower light diffusion member 778b has multiple fastening portions formed on the back side, and fastening screws are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions to the fastening portions, thereby fastening and fixing the fastening screws so that they are not noticeable.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has through holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws are inserted into the through holes 778c from the front side and screwed into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and may be noticeable without any countermeasures. However, in this embodiment, as described below, the covering member 787 is positioned to always cover the front side of the insertion hole 778c, so that the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the design freedom of the insertion direction of the fastening screw.

The performance device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-down inversion member 781 pivotally supported on the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777, a drive motor 782 having a drive gear 782a fixed to a drive shaft that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up-down inversion member 781, a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose one end is pivotally supported on each of the two longitudinal ends of the up-down inversion member 781, and a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose other end is pivotally supported and whose displacement in the left-right direction is guided by the guide portion 776. It comprises a pair of linear motion plate members 784, a pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged between the linear motion plate members 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) on a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, a pair of axial support members 786 that axially support the axial rotation members 785 together with the linear motion plate members 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the axial rotation members 785 with the phase fixed so that they cannot fall off, and covering members 787 arranged in front of and behind the end plate members 785d and formed with left and right lengths that cover the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b that protrudes in a gear-like shape from the rear side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends of the main body plate portion 781a in the long direction toward the rear side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b and protrudes from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole in the center that extends in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the up-down inversion member 781 is axially supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down inversion member 781. In other words, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one-side support hole 783a is formed displaces in accordance with the cylindrical protrusion 781c, which displaces as the up-down inversion member 781 rotates.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light-emitting performance means 778. In other words, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can be placed in either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the position of the upside-down member 781 can be determined between two positions in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a position in between (a position in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape) and includes a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b formed with its inner periphery penetrating at the other end opposite the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c formed as an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

A female screw is formed on the inner circumference of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is inserted into the female screw and passed through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side. This allows the intermediate arm member 783 to be pivotally supported by the upside-down member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protrusion portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of long hole portions 784c that are drilled in an elliptical shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel to each other in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged ... It is equipped with a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protruding portions extending in the front-rear direction on the opposing sides, a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens on the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side, a placement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the pivot member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a square box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the pivot member 786.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b, and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference. That is, a fastening screw inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 784a so that it cannot fall off.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face each other radially in the assembled state, limiting the tilt displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b relative to the rotation axis. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, so that the linear plate member 784 is supported on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In this supported state (assembled state), the linear plate member 784 is slidably displaceable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. In other words, the linear plate member 784 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for determining the left-right arrangement of the metal rod 785a, but details will be described later.

The placement hole 784g is an opening to avoid interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785, but details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged in a pair on the left and right and supported by the linear plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed in an approximately cylindrical shape from a metal material, a recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 785a, a bevel tooth member 785c arranged on the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, in which bevel teeth (bevel gears) that mesh with the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 are formed, an end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, a ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a of the end plate member 785d in a manner that it is raised from the end plate member 785d, and a rotational position stabilization portion 785f that is a portion protruding from the left and right inner parts of the end plate member 785d and in which a metal screw is screwed and fixed to a female screw portion formed inside.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured with a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep part of the groove of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the part where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

This allows the metal rod 785a to be supported on the back side of the linear plate member 784 in a manner that allows it to rotate about its axis and prevents it from displacing in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is positioned so that it enters the placement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. When the bevel tooth member 785c is partially inserted into the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and its displacement toward the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner circumferential shape that corresponds to the non-circular shape (e.g., D-shaped cross section) of the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner circumferential shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed with a dimensional relationship that allows for an interference fit, thereby being fixed in place.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fastening using an adhesive or the like, or a method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female thread at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female thread, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784. By holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e and configuring the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a to be in sliding contact with the inner periphery of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, it is possible to make the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and to reduce the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a part that attracts the metal screw to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a drilled to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f to be inserted therethrough, a ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784, and a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape capable of holding a magnet Mg between the magnet holding half 784i of the linear plate member 784.

When the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the metal rod 785a is prevented from falling off the plate portion of the pivot member 786 to the back side, the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right components formed in a box shape with openings on the inside left and right sides, fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the axial rotation member 785, and decorations consisting of figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc. that can be interpreted in different ways are formed on the opposite sides.

That is, the covering member 787 comprises a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the protruding state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the reverse side thereof, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52), and a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 formed on the reverse side thereof. Note that the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed from two front and rear members fastened to the end plate member 785d, and formed in an approximately box-like shape with the left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It has multiple extension parts 787c extending toward each of the left and right members, and recessed parts 787d recessed between the extension parts 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides.

The extensions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are disposed close to each other when the covering members 787 are disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26). This allows the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be visually recognized as a single unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion at the upper center of the left and right of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 is formed so that its state can be switched between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see Figures 29 and 52), and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see Figure 30) in response to the operation of the performance device 780. First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. In FIG. 57(a), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a vertical arrangement state (also called an upright vertical arrangement state) in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and in FIG. 57(b), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a state in which it has rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusions 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIG. 57(a) and FIG. 57(b), the end plate member 785d of the left axial rotation member 785 and the right axial rotation member 785 are omitted from the illustration in order to make it easier to understand.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In the inverted vertical arrangement state where the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

In other words, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position or an inverted vertical position, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the performance device 780 from the output of the detection sensor 778d.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), when the upside-down member 781 is rotated, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the axial rotation member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the amount of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 and the axial rotation member 785.

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, to give an overview, the up-down inversion member 781, intermediate arm member 783, and linear plate member 784 are configured as a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down inversion member 781 rotates around the cylindrical protrusion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is journaled on the cylindrical protrusion 781c of the up-down inversion member 781, moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 that passes through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed from the front, so that the displacement direction of the linear plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is restricted. The pair of left and right linear plate members 784 simultaneously move in opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 until it rotates approximately 24 degrees from the vertical position shown in FIG. 57(a). Length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width ends).

In addition, due to the change in state from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the change in posture around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, which is less than half the 15 degrees that is the angle between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Because the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of load (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs at opposing positions in the front-to-rear direction, i.e., on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

Figure 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and Figure 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 (displaced upward in FIG. 58(b)). Note that in FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown as overlapping, and this overlap width is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, causing the axial rotation member 785 to rotate and displace. While the up-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction.

When the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees accordingly. In other words, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

The amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to pressure caused by displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and is not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In other words, it is less than the amount of displacement until the abutting representative tooth rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (the amount of displacement required for a 30 degree rotation, since the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanied by the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and the orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotational direction is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and bevel tooth member 785c occurs when the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the up-down inversion member 781 is opposed by the attractive force generated by the magnet Mg on the rotational position stabilization portion 785f (see FIG. 54) of the shaft rotation member 785.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f so as to restrict the right-side shaft rotating member 785 from rotating backward, and the right-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force from the magnet Mg in the forward rotation direction. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the right-side shaft rotating member 785 to the rotational displacement.

For the left-side axial rotation member 785, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is disposed in front of the end plate member 785d, as on the right side, while the magnet Mg is disposed on the upper side, the opposite of the right side (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilization portion 785f, and the left-side axial rotation member 785 receives a backward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left-side axial rotation member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a).

As a result, elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). If the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c will rotate beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg will be separated from the metal screw of the rotational position stabilization portion 785f, causing an extreme decrease in magnetic force. The intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg, will undergo rotational displacement while elastically recovering.

As a result, when rotation starts, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the axial rotation member 785 in the rotational direction, and the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotation speed occurs not only in the axial rotation member 785, but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the axial rotation member 785.

This allows the movement of the covering member 787 to be adjusted without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, improving the performance effect of the covering member 787 while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate.

The rotational position stabilization parts 785f that receive the attractive force of the magnet Mg are configured as a pair, one above the other; when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, one of the rotational position stabilization parts 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, the other (see FIG. 52(b), the upper) rotational position stabilization part 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force.

In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

In other words, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down inversion member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and so the same action occurs. That is, near the vertical position, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down inversion member 781 is tilted closer to the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller and the amount of rotation becomes larger. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 becomes smaller and the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the upside-down member 781, which starts from a vertically disposed state and ends in a vertically disposed state, first the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and again the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases.

By generating linear displacement and rotational displacement in this order, it is possible to prevent the extension portion 787c of the covering member 787 from colliding with the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Next, the change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) show the inversion operation of the lift-and-lower inversion performance device 770 in chronological order. Figure 59(a) shows the performance device 780 in an upright vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an upright position, Figure 59(b) shows the performance device 780 when the upside-down member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertical position, and Figure 59(c) shows the performance device 780 in an inverted vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an inverted position.

The upside-down member 781 changes its state from the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) to the inverted vertical position by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical position, the orientation of the covering member 787 is inverted 180 degrees based on the upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)). This switches the decorative surface visible to the player (see FIG. 59(c)).

The upside-down vertical position is returned to the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) by rotating the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Therefore, the inversion operation can repeatedly switch between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. 59(c) each time the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven while reversing the direction so as to rotate the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees.

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the axial rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. Here, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward direction. In other words, the pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front, and the left covering member 787 faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front (see FIG. 59(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have misaligned content on the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize, so the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

This reduces the player's focus on the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. In addition, when the rotational displacement stops, the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), which has the effect of making it easier for the player to maintain their line of sight on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see Figure 54), but when this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), the performance device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 30), and in this state it is unlikely that attention will be drawn to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operating unit 700, the view of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) will be blocked by the third operating unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for presentation (see FIG. 52) and the presentation device 780 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and prevented from facing the player, so that it does not draw attention to itself, but is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state.

This allows the appearance of the second operation unit 700 to change depending on the placement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the performance is excessively poor compared to the cost of placing the second operation unit 700 (occupying space, the burden of hiding it well).

After the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotated and displaced, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the position of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

In this embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, which reduces material costs and improves maintainability compared to designing a dedicated metal member.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, so the arrangement of the performance device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), performing the rotational displacement causes the decorative members such as the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof, to collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see FIG. 30), space is secured in the left-right direction, making it possible to perform rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is controlled so as to be executable on the premise that it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. This allows the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 to be caused normally.

The extensions 787c are arranged close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in the vertical position, and in this position, are arranged facing the front and rear of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotated from this position about a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, the extensions 787c collide with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extensions 787c are arranged close to each other creates the effect of allowing the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be viewed as one, and as this is a configuration necessary for the presentation, it is preferable that it can be maintained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 in advance before rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). The linear displacement of length L1 allows the extension 787c to be retracted from the front-rear position of the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the problem of collision between the extension 787c and the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

In addition, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, no rotational displacement occurs (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2, so that the amount of left-right displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

This makes it possible to keep the attention of the covering member 787 low and to make the rotational displacement less noticeable compared to when the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, and therefore allows the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 to be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same, but by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a stronger attractive force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in this embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary lines in Figure 59, the insertion hole 778c is positioned so that it is always hidden by the covering member 787. This prevents the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and prevents the fastening screw from reducing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787, so the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to match the left and right decorations.

In other words, since the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 778c, it becomes impossible to place an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see Figure 55). Also, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easy to see it as being dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to position the insertion holes 778c in the decorations on the left and right, avoiding areas that need to be brightly lit and conspicuous, and as a result, the placement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the design of the illumination board 778a can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is displaced linearly left and right during the inversion operation of the lift-down inversion performance device 770, and even when the vicinity of the center of the light diffusion member 778b is not surrounded by the extension portion 787c, the mechanical parts such as the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visible.

In other words, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b located at the front, and the vertical width of the linear plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 located at the front. In addition, the up-down inversion member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 located at the front, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement trajectory fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b.

This allows the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the performance device 780 to be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the appearance of the performance device 780 during the reversal operation.

Returning to FIG. 26 for further explanation, the third operating unit 800 is a unit that is positioned above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the performance standby state, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510, and is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the vertical direction.

Figure 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and Figure 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that Figures 60 and 61 show the portion that constitutes the displacement of the third operating unit 800, and omit the illustration of the decorative members 870, 880 that serve as decorative parts arranged on the outside.

60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 comprises a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a tube fixing portion 812 recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, with insertion holes for inserting fastening screws for fixing and through holes for inserting electrical wiring, a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 which holds the drive motor 861, a number of cylindrical protrusions 815 protruding from the front side as a cylindrical portion which axially supports the transmission gear 863 so that it cannot fall off, and a number of double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding from the front side as a double cylindrical portion which axially supports the load response gear 865 so that it cannot fall off.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from its inner peripheral edge when viewed from the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 comprises the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed on the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate-shaped illumination board 823 fastened to the circular plate portion 822 and having light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a light-transmitting decorative member 824 made of a light-transmitting resin material and shaped like an umbrella (or bowl) so as to be able to cover the illumination board 823 from the front side, and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be able to slide with the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fastening and fixing the fixed cylindrical member 820 to the held member 810 so that it cannot rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with an axial through hole on the inner circumference side, and the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the tube fixing portion 812 is routed through this through hole to the front side and connected to a connector arranged behind the illumination board 823.

The illumination board 823 is equipped with LEDs consisting of inner light-emitting parts 823a that are placed at the vertices of a pentagon and at a central position equidistant from those vertices, and outer light-emitting parts 823b that are placed at 15 equally spaced locations on the circumference. The inner light-emitting parts 823a are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces the front (forward), and the outer light-emitting parts 823b are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting unit 823b is irradiated onto the plated parts 871a of the first decorative members 870, which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle as an axis, but since the outer light-emitting unit 823b and the first decorative member 870 are arranged at equal intervals on the same axis of the circle, light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) can always be irradiated onto each first decorative member 870, regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while its outer diameter side can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side and a cylindrical portion that protrudes rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion, but the outer diameter of this cylindrical portion is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable around it is prevented. In addition, by disposing the sliding member 825 on the side that has the advantage in terms of strength, that is, the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load generated during sliding or when sliding is poor (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 831 with their long lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linear motion members 833 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable while being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at the radially outer portions of the linear motion members 833.

The main body 831 comprises the circular flange portion 831a described above, a number of sliding ridges 831b extending rearward in a ridge-like manner from the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between adjacent metal bars 832, and a number of recesses 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion 831b is configured to be slidable along the inner curved surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and the protruding tip is formed in a semicircular cross section to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and thus reduce contact friction.

As described above, the sliding ridge 831b is positioned at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal bars 832, or in other words, on the opposite side of the metal bar 832 (a position shifted by 180 degrees) with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840.

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation described below and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces it radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion portion 831b, so the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be maintained low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted. By arranging the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, the relative rotation between them is disabled, and the rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be made to match.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are spaced apart from each other in the linear motion direction and that protrude cylindrically toward the rear, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 based on the cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed in the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is located on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction by slidingly fitting the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 onto the outside, as will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 has a bevel gear-shaped bevel tooth portion 834a and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude cylindrically parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed around the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protrusion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumference, and functions to fasten the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834 by screwing in the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, as will be described in detail below.

The outer rotating member 840 comprises a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extension arms 842 extending radially outward at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 841, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer periphery along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a detection target 844 extending radially outward from the main body 841 in a position that allows it to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

The extension arm 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a that extends parallel to the central axis of the main body 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 842a. When a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread while the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the base end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported on the extension arm 842 so that it cannot fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, as will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member and includes a base end rod portion 851 whose one end is supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, a thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the other end of the base end rod portion 851, a tip end rod portion 853 which extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base end rod portion 851 from the front end of the thickened portion 852, and a rotation transmission portion 854 which is formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip end rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that links with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows the cylindrical protrusion 833a to rotate with respect to each other when inserted therethrough, a guide hole 854b that is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and that guides the cylindrical protrusion 833b when inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear part 854c that is formed in a bevel gear shape with the supported hole 854a as the central axis and that forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel gear part 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 supported on the cylindrical protrusion portion 815 so as not to fall off and meshed to be able to transmit a driving force via the drive gear 862, a central ring gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, a pair of load response gears 865 positioned forward of the central ring gear 864 and supported on the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 so as not to fall off, and a torque limiter 866 supported on the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865 and whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central ring gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into its inner periphery. The central ring gear 864 is provided with a transmission protrusion 864a that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a position and shape that corresponds to the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830 so that the central ring gear 864 can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c, and a support ring portion 864b that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a coaxial double ring shape that is disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a.

In the assembled state, with the transmission projection 864a inserted into the recess 831c, the rear end of the body 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is fitted into the gap between the support annular portions 864b with a dimensional relationship of intermediate fit or a dimensional relationship of interference fit. This allows the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 to rotate integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmission protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or they may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are spaced equally, they can be assembled by matching the arrangement of the transmission projections 864a and the recesses 831c without having to consider the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, which allows for quick assembly. In the present embodiment, where the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72 degree intervals), it is considered that there is little impact from the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 shifting during assembly, so it is effective to have them spaced equally.

If the intervals are unequal, the assembly process requires an additional step of aligning the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 before assembly; however, the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. A torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that the load response gear 865 can be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is restricted (limited) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotating member 840.

In other words, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device that transmits driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a pair with the transmission direction reversed, and the torque limiter 866 is configured to switch the driving force transmission in both directions with good responsiveness.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800, and Figure 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800. Note that Figures 62 and 63 show decorative parts of the third action unit 800, and omit the illustration of parts that configure the displacement.

As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 comprises the inner rotating member 830 described above, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 comprises a first skeletal portion 871 that is formed so as to be fastened to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that is formed so as to cover one side of the first skeletal portion 871.

The first skeletal portion 871 is entirely plated and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered portion 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and its surface is decorated with figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc."), and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875 has an independent pattern or the like drawn on it. Therefore, by changing the first covered portion 875 that emits strong light through the light emission control of the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered portions 875, it is possible to vary the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to perform a display presentation that draws the player's attention to which first covered portion 875 will stop on the third pattern display device 81 side, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covered portion 875 on the third pattern display device 81 side can be continuously changed in accordance with the rotation, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the first covered portion 875 for the period until the rotation stops.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeletal portion 881 that is formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 that is formed to cover the other side of the second skeletal portion 881.

The second skeleton portion 881 has a retaining piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into the second covering part 885 at a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering part 885 acts, and the magnet Mg2 is attracted to this metal screw, thereby ensuring the integrity of the second covering part 885 in the combined state (particularly the combined state, see Figure 32).

The second covered portion 885 has a figure, pattern, or character design (hereinafter also referred to as "design, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the design, etc. is visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the multiple (in this embodiment, five) second covering portions 885 are configured so that the multiple (at least two and up to five) second covering portions 885 are grouped together, and each second covering portion 885 is decorated to form part of a circular body so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front.

The pattern drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the pattern is designed so that the content that can be grasped from the second covering portion 885 in a united state does not change significantly even if the arrangement of the second decorative member 880 in the rotation direction is different. In other words, the pattern does not have clear top, bottom, left, or right, and is designed to have an inconspicuous change in external shape even when rotated (in this embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, if the second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, the presentation performance can be improved when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covering portions 885 are firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side can be improved.

In addition, in each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed front to back by the switching rotation operation described below, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw that each magnet Mg2 attracts is simply replaced with a metal screw that is screwed into the adjacent second covering portion 885 on the opposite side, and since the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in a circular ring shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. This makes the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side slightly weaker, but this is done to avoid any deterioration in the presentation performance.

In other words, because the first covering portions 875 are each painted with an independent pattern, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the positioning of the first decorative member 870 shifts slightly, there is no possibility that the player will not be able to recognize the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance of the effects that utilize the patterns painted on the first covering portions 875.

Furthermore, because the strength of the integration on the first covering part 875 side is weakened, the arrangement of the combined first covering parts 875 can be shifted due to vibrations that occur with the lifting and lowering displacement (and then stopping) and vibrations that occur with the rotational displacement (and then stopping) as an integral rotation operation or a switching rotation operation. This makes it possible to displace the first covering part 875 in a displacement manner that was not possible with conventional machines in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but is composed of a single circular member, thereby improving the presentation effect of the presentation provided by the first covering part 875.

In view of the above, in the combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the united state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the diagrams are illustrated in chronological order from rear and front views, showing how the inner rotating member 830 rotates 45 degrees at a time from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)).

In addition, in Figures 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. In addition, the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (Figures 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in Figures 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual combined state when viewed from the front (see Figure 66) (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "switching rotational movement"), the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is permitted, and therefore the inner rotating member 830 is permitted to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840. In this embodiment, the position of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see Figure 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in Figures 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the configuration between the above-mentioned components, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, a change in the position of the supported hole 854a corresponds to a change in the position of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the rotation transmission part 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time, so the rotating member 834 supported by the rotation transmission part 854 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear moving member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to a case where the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700), the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level.

In contrast, in the above-mentioned reversal operation of the second operating unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration is generated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), thereby weakening the impression that the position of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the linear direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is fixed.

In other words, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased, and even in a situation where a period in which the change in left-right position is small continues at the end of the left-right outward displacement (a period near the dead point of the slider crank), the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high dramatic effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is possible that radial loads will be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, causing the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 to shift. However, in this embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are generated equally at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (expansion/contraction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by a circumferential rotation. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so that it can be executed when the output of the detection sensor that determines the posture of the lifting arm member 801 indicates that the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In addition, with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened to the rotating member 834 are also displaced radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

When the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel teeth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel teeth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate around the metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32, which is the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 based on the imaginary position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation is set to the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F, since the angle θ32 increases as it moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60).

When rotating together, the rotating member 834 is in a position where either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, so that when the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as the maximum value of the angle θ31 due to the rotation of the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 rotates half a circle (180 degrees).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) does not produce an action that retards the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

In other words, the magnet Mg2 generates an adhesive force between itself and the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the adhesive force can be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 begins, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and there is no effect of slowing down the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the drive motor 861.

Furthermore, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and ended early, so that the player's attention to the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 so that it is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, if the rotation angle of the imaginary position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is in a contracted position and can rotate together is 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and if the imaginary position line 832F rotates a further 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)).

In other words, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which the two can rotate together than during the rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, turn the intermediate arm member 850, and rotate the decorative members 870, 880. However, due to the above-described configuration, the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which they can rotate together, so that it is possible to avoid placing an excessively large burden on the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

In addition, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, so the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during the rotational displacement can be kept low. This reduces the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible, and improves the design freedom of the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880.

When performing the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. It also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which it is supported is disposed. Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by positioning the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 rearward of the base side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the base side rod portion 851 and the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap front to back, thereby avoiding collisions during the switching rotation operation.

In addition, by arranging the base end rod portion 851 in front of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 in rear of the extended arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842 during the switching rotation operation, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67 show a case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction that allows the intermediate arm member 850 to rotate (counterclockwise as viewed from the front in the individual combined state, see FIG. 66). In this case, the gear teeth 843 engage with the load response gear 865, which generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, and resistance is received, limiting the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the reverse direction described above (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state), or if the rotation in the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state) continues even after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted (for example, it reaches a combined state from an individual combined state), a load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the position maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, regardless of the direction of rotation, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "integral rotational movement").

The integral rotation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are combined and positioned close to each other.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation action in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the integral rotation action can be performed in the performance standby state of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation action is controlled so that it can be performed regardless of the position of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) can perform a switching rotation operation accompanied by radially expanding displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, and a unitary rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radially expanding displacement. Either operation can be performed in either drive direction, but the operations have priority, and any operation cannot be instantly performed in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and an integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation in this state. Also, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, but an integral rotation operation cannot be performed immediately by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In addition, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted, and then the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse) as viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and it is not possible to immediately perform the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

In this manner, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to be able to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 is described below.

Figure 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving state of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in a chronological order. As shown in Figure 68, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) controls the third operation unit 800 to alternate between normal and reversed performances.

When performing a flip performance, an action that includes a switching rotation action is performed, and when performing a normal performance, an action that does not include a switching rotation action is performed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation action.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and after the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

The drive directions of the drive motor 861 are shown as forward rotation and reverse rotation. Forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a united rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))), and reverse rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, we will explain the drive control during normal performance before the reversal performance. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotational motion of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always a united rotational motion.

Since no switching rotational movement occurs, no collisions with surrounding decorative members occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being raised and lowered by the up and down movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be controlled to rotate together at the same time as the lifting and lowering movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 stop rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 has a forward rotation direction only, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, the drive control during the reversal performance will be described. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving in reverse rotation, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotation direction, a united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 begin to rotate together. After the start of the united rotation, the outer rotating member 840 also begins to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have begun to rotate together due to the switch in the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has begun, the drive motor 861 stops or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time.

Since the drive motor 861 can only drive in reverse, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from a reverse performance to a normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is put into an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the reverse direction until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward direction. When the drive is in the forward direction, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 starts to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to move away from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 to be switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation starts, the performance transitions back to normal. The restrictions on drive control during this normal performance are the same as those described for the normal performance that preceded the above-mentioned reverse performance.

In this way, according to this embodiment, a single detection sensor 813 can be used to determine the switching of the rotation mode of the third operating unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the reference rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. Therefore, the number of detection sensors 813 required can be reduced compared to when individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from a state in which the integral rotation operation continues or a state in which the rotation is stopped. In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the united combined state.

Therefore, when controlling the action presentation to switch to a united state at the timing of a jackpot announcement, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot has been announced based on the position of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration in the one combined state is designed so that what is perceived by the player does not vary significantly depending on the arrangement of the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. In other words, even if the arrangement of the rotation direction of the decorative members 870, 880 is different at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content that is perceived by the player as the one combined state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike when the patterns in the united state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation action for adjusting the position after reaching the united state can be omitted, so the drive control until the jackpot announcement can be the same regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state.

In this way, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both the forward and reverse rotation directions of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. As shown in Figure 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end, where the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is located, to the front end, where the illumination board 823 is located, and electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, with terminals connected to a connector disposed on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, allowing the LEDs disposed on the illumination board 823 to be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side at the center side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a part that is visible to the player at the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged in the front, and acts to illuminate the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is positioned at the front, and a combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is positioned at the front, so that the light LD1 can be switched between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeletal portion 871, and the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when the light LD1 is emitted can be improved.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly positioned, and the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to rotate around it, so the relationship between the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 can change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without measures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and it may be difficult to perform a performance in which the decorative members 870, 880 rotate together while emitting light at a constant brightness.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shape of the plated portion 871a, which is configured to be able to reflect the light LD1, is concave, the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination substrate 823, and the center of the concave shape is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

The light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is positioned. As a result, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of the radius of curvature, illuminating the vicinity of the center of each of the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b, the multiple lights LD1 can be reflected to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be irradiated stably near the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be viewed with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Furthermore, the first framework portion 871 is a portion that is plated in the same manner as the plating process on the plating portion 871a, and has an outer plating portion 871b that is disposed outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating portion 871b in the same manner as the plating portion 871a, but since the outer plating portion 871b is disposed further back than the plating portion 871a, the degree of light intensity of the outer plating portion 871b can be weakened.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the light perceived outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875.

The illuminated board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely blocked, so not all of the light from the outer light-emitting part 823b is irradiated to the inside.

First, between the member edge 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering portion 885 arranged opposite the member edge 875a, a gap VA1 is formed to the extent that the internal structure can be seen in FIG. 69. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes through this gap VA1 to the outside of the frame of the first covering portion 875, the light LD1 that passes through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

In addition, a large gap VA2 is formed between the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875, which is arranged opposite the metal rod 832, and the outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, the gap exceeding the area required to avoid interference with the metal rod 832.

The gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of, first, avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring that the length of the metal rod 832 is sufficient, and ensuring that the metal rod 832 can guide the linear displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834.

Secondly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for the fastening screw that is inserted into the skeletal parts 871, 881 and screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the rotating member 834 to fasten and fix the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834.

Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that passes through the transparent parts of the framework 871, 881. Because the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light that passes through the gap VA and travels outward is visually recognized as light that passes through equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotational operation of the decorative members 870, 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner. This makes it possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the light radiating radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 is visible in a rotating light-emitting state, without the need to control the lighting state of the light from the outer light-emitting portion 823b (for example, by keeping all the lights on).

In the combined state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeletal portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, which suppresses the reflection of light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, only the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is far from the optical axis is irradiated within the frame of the second covering portion 885, so the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, so the intensity of the light radiating out radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged around the circumference of the frame of the second covering portion 885, with light diffusion processing formed on the inside. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light that is incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light that is viewed through the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, creating the effect that each of the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c of the five second decorative members 880 is viewed as a single unit by the player.

As mentioned above, the more firmly the second covering portions 885 can be integrated together, the better the presentation performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. This integration can be achieved by making the light-diffusing decorative portion 885c visually appear as if it is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. This therefore improves the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end face 885b1 that is adjacent to (contacts) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 based on the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the united state (see FIG. 32), the degree to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the rear side comes into the player's field of vision can be reduced, thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

This makes it easier to prevent the color of the first covering part 875 from coming into view when the frame of the first covering part 875 and the frame of the second covering part 885 are colored in different colors and the second covering part 885 is positioned in front.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state by itself in a combined state (see FIG. 32), there are more gaps around the third operating unit 800 than when the other operating units 600, 700 are both in an extended state (see FIG. 33, F9), making it easier for the line of sight to pass through when viewing the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, without any measures, the side of the third operating unit 800 is visible, which can easily reduce the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, in the united state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is positioned rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface, so that even if the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is visible when viewed from an oblique direction, most of the side surface can be seen as part of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visible can be reduced. As a result, in the united state, the second covering portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first covering portion 875, improving the presentation effect.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, causing the inner rotating member 830 to rotate, while the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped by the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the sliding ridge 831b is used to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will be large, and the allowable load transmission value of the torque limiter 866 will have to be increased, which tends to hinder miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

For this reason, it is preferable to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830. To this end, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the only support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central ring gear 864, and a gap is provided in other areas. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, making it easier to reduce the displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central ring gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress forward displacement based on the central ring gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. In other words, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and the protrusion portion 822b is formed in a circular shape at its outermost diameter portion, protruding from the back side with a semicircular cross section.

This protrusion 822b abuts against the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, so the contact area can be reduced compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. This reduces the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

In addition, since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected if the weight of the fastening screws were to increase.

The following describes how the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are fixed to the rotating member 834. When explaining this fixing, refer to Figures 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeletal member 871 into the female thread of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875 to fasten and fix the first covering portion 875 to the first skeletal member 871, and then inserting the protruding portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeletal member 871 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal member 881 into the female thread of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885 to fasten the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal member 881, and then inserting the protruding portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeletal member 881 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to undergo linear or rotational displacement in response to linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834.

During the fixing process, the projections 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby defining the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832), and preventing the skeletal parts 871, 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

The skeletal parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, so that the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 (the position of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction) is similarly defined, and it is possible to prevent the rotating member 834 from falling off the linear moving member 833.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear moving member 833, the portion that determines the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834, and therefore, unlike when the portion that determines the position on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the labor hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

In other words, for example, when disassembling, by removing the fastening screws fastening the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the restrictions on the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871 and 881 on the linear moving member 833 be released, but also the restrictions on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 can be released. This can improve work efficiency.

The combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to Figs. 70 and 71. Figs. 70(a) to 70(d) and Figs. 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 that chronologically explain examples of combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800. In the explanation of Figs. 70 and 71, Figs. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

In Figures 70 and 71, the decorations on each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operating unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operating unit 700, and each of the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated in a schematic manner so as to be identifiable using letters or the like.

That is, the word "Normal" is displayed vertically on the first presentation surface 661a, the word "Activate" is displayed horizontally on the second presentation surface 661b, and the symbol "!" is displayed along the longitudinal direction on the third presentation surface 661c.

The first main decorative surface 787a1 is illustrated with the words "Start of war," the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 with the words "A crisis is an opportunity," the second main decorative surface 787b1 with the words "Attack," and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 with the words "Patience!?".

In addition, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covered portion 875, and five "circle" symbols are illustrated together in the second covered portion 885.

In Figure 70(a), each of the operating units 600 to 800 is placed in a standby state for performance (see Figure 28). Note that above the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In addition, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By executing the integral rotational motion of the third operating unit 800, the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged adjacent to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state while the integral rotational motion continues or after it has stopped, the third performance surface 661c can be protruded inside the center frame 86, making the movements of the operating units 600 to 800 more lively.

For example, when the third presentation surface 661c is visible, the presentation can be controlled to increase the likelihood of winning the lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the player who sees the operation of the first operation unit 600.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

This can increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 that is placed close to the second operation unit 700, and by starting a display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operation unit 800 to a standby state for effect, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 to be drawn to is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light-emitting unit 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870 by turning on the LED that irradiates light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be drawn to and turning off the other LEDs.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the LED lighting pattern in accordance with the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be switched sequentially in the rotational direction, allowing the player to visually recognize that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotating and displacing along a coaxial circle. Alternatively, the LEDs to be lit may be fixed, and the first decorative member 870 to be irradiated with light may be switched by utilizing the fact that each first decorative member 870 reaches the position where the light is irradiated from that LED in sequence by the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 both have vertically elongated decorations, allowing them to be viewed as a single unit. In particular, the front side of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, enhancing the effect of being viewed as a single unit.

On the other hand, when the state shown in Figure 71 (a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the intermediate process shown in Figure 70 (b), the second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, so that the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and now it can be visually recognized as being integrated with the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700, which also has a horizontally elongated decoration.

Figure 35 shows the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, but if the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state as shown in Figure 71 (a), the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be further reduced, enhancing the effect of them being visually perceived as a single unit.

At this time, the protruding decorative portion 652b protrudes to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be expanding further to the right than the right end RE1 of the area prevents the player from feeling cramped even if the second presentation surface 661b is positioned closer to the right edge.

This also allows the player to see that the second performance surface 661b is positioned toward the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second performance surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second performance surface 661b and the protruding decorative portion 652b being visually perceived as a single unit can be enhanced.

In Figures 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversal operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in Figure 70(d), but since the second decorative rotating member 660 is not positioned on the left or right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the reversal operation of the covering member 787 (see Figure 59) can be performed even when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped over, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content discernible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 70(d), the player can discern the meaning of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the driving of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second action unit 700, thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second action unit 700.

For example, when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is a loss, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. 70(c), and when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is still not to be notified or that the lottery result is a big win, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to continue to be inverted to the state shown in FIG. 71(a), thereby drawing the player's attention to the second operating unit 700.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second performance surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written horizontally, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content has a series of meanings, including "attack activated," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first performance surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written vertically, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content of the characters is related to "normal time," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

In this way, in this embodiment, each presentation surface 661a, 661b of the first operating unit 600 is configured to be viewed as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). This can improve the presentation effect.

In Figures 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in a standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in Figure 71(b) and the state shown in Figure 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the third operating unit 800 performing a unitary rotation action. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation action is performed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same united state (see Figure 71(d)).

In other words, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set to notify the player of a jackpot by executing a switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the patterns are changing, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be notified from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display performance (whether it is in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not they will win the jackpot can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600-800 can be formed so that the decoration is either visible alone or in combination with other units. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600-800 is not complete for each operation unit 600-800 alone, but is designed as a decoration that is related to each of the operation units 600-800.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operational units 600-800 can be performed is affected by the positioning of the other units. In other words, if the drive of each of the operational units 600-800 is performed at an inappropriate time, the component operations may collide and cause a malfunction, so drive control is performed only after determining the positioning of the components of the other units.

For example, the first operating unit 600 is controlled to change to the extended state when the second operating unit 700 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the second operation unit 700 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The second operating unit 700 is controlled to change to the extended state when the first operating unit 600 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the first operation unit 600 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and rotation is not performed or only a unitary rotational movement occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control by which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As mentioned above, the drive control of each operating unit 600 to 800 is not possible at any time, but is controlled so that it is executed after determining the arrangement of the components of the other units.

Next, the details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In describing the details of the sorting device 300, reference will be made as appropriate to Figures 1 to 25. First, an example of the decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

Figure 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 72 and Figure 5 above is that the front design member 162 has a light-transmitting window 162d.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design component 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front panel formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and a window portion 162d is formed in the central area of the front panel as an area with higher light transmittance than the peripheral area.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting seal member SL1, the central area of which is cut out to match the shape of the window portion 162d, is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front-to-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-to-rear thickness of the area around it where the seal member SL1 is attached, and since it is possible to vary the degree to which light transmits through the front design member 162, it is possible to increase the light transmittance of the window portion 162d.

The window portion 162d is formed with the primary objective of improving the visibility of the sorting device 300, taking into consideration that when a player looks at the sorting device 300, his or her line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162, and the secondary objective is to eliminate the dissatisfaction expressed by players that they are unable to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300. In other words, the window portion 162d is formed with a shape and size that takes into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300.

The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be placed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or multiple groove patterns may be formed to perform the same function as a light guide plate, so that the appearance of the front design member 162 changes for each light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as LEDs, or a pattern or design may be drawn directly on the front design member 162, or the area corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening.

The shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or it may be a shape that omits the part extending outward left and right so that the horizontal width is equal to the horizontal width of the range that protrudes upward (a pentagonal shape like home base), or it may be a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

Although the window portion 162d is formed as a single area, this is not limiting and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the highly light-transmitting area may be formed by a combination of multiple locations separated by lattice-like or ladder-like sections, the area may be partitioned by multiple aligned small windows, or the area may be partitioned by a disorderly arrangement of window portions. The shape of the window portion may also be variable.

The surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a surface shape formed with many projections and recesses, such as a surface shape formed by embossing, or the surface may have many grooves or protrusions, or it may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but any shape that ensures higher light transmittance than the surrounding area (corresponding to the formation area of the sealing member SL1) may be used, and various shapes may be adopted in addition to shapes similar to the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 described above.

Figure 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 73 and the content shown in Figure 21 above is that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape and includes a main window portion 162d1 that is short vertically and long horizontally, and a sub-window portion 162d2 that is formed above the central portion horizontally of the main window portion 162d1.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub-window portion 162d2 are formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each portion is described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed so that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure visibility of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the spherical passages of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, and is formed into a V-shape that slopes upward toward the left and right outside in accordance with the inclination of the second flow path component 335.

This allows the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 to be contained inside the main window portion 162d1 when viewed from the front, thereby improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17), which is formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. In other words, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 is not visible through the main window portion 162d1, and in particular, the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is reduced.

This allows for greater freedom in designing the shape of the side wall 334a compared to when a design is required that will be visible to players, such as when an attractive shape is required.

The outer edge shape of the secondary window portion 162d2 in a front view is designed to be sufficient to ensure visibility of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape that covers the sealing member 313.

This not only improves the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, but also makes it easy for the player to grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light-emitting means 351, whose lighting timing is controlled based on the manner in which the ball flows down, providing the player with a comfortable gameplay experience.

Figure 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16, and Figure 75 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. Figures 74 and 75 differ from the contents shown in Figures 23 and 18 above in that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from above (at an angle), a portion of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 located at the front position is visible below the opening/closing plate 65b.

In contrast, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening and closing plate 65b when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. 74. Therefore, as long as the upper protrusion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336 will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The field of view toward the upper protrusion 376 is also well ensured by the fact that the inner surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right as it approaches the front side.

In other words, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 from bouncing up, while the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to avoid unnecessary obstruction of the view to the upper protrusion portion 376.

The fact that the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of the upper surface 314 being configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front. When the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface 314 when viewed from above (angled direction) as shown in FIG. 74 can be increased, which has the advantage of making it easier to improve the presentation effect of the presentation in which light is visible through the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface 314. However, there is a disadvantage in that the larger projected area of the upper surface 314 may increase the area over which balls flowing below it are hidden from the player's view.

In other words, while the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front, this is advantageous for the light effects, but may be detrimental to the visibility of the balls as they flow down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right, thereby reducing the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 at the point where the ball enters the third flow path portion 336 from the second flow path portion 335, thereby improving the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from below (at an angle), the sealing member 313 cannot be seen from inside the secondary window 162d2. Therefore, without any measures, the player will be forced to adjust the position of their eyes or the angle of their line of sight so that the sealing member 313 is visible in order to visually check its condition, which may hinder a comfortable gameplay experience.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the straight line LL1, which serves as the optical axis of the light-emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2, and therefore a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the sealing member 313. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the light-emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit or not by looking at the sub-window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not light-diffusing, it has a weak effect of stopping the progression of light from the light-emitting means 351, allowing the light to reach the sub-window 162d2 sufficiently. As a result, when the light-emitting means 351 is turned on, the red light of the sealing member 313 reaches the sub-window 162d2, causing the sub-window 162d2 to glow red.

This makes it easier to see the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the secondary window 162d2 before the light reaches it, making it easier for the player to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit or not. The sealing member 313 (or the wall portion on which the sealing member 313 is arranged) may be provided with a light diffusion treatment. In this case, it is easier to make the sealing member 313 emit light evenly.

As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is positioned (at a height position) so as not to overlap with the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned above the range in which the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336 can be positioned.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is positioned so as not to overlap with the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a rests.

Furthermore, as described above, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the flow of the ball is hindered by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so the flow range of the ball is shifted to the left and right outside the left and right width of the front design member 141. Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping with the straight line LL1.

Therefore, by arranging balls flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (e.g., the play area), balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a, and balls flowing down the sorting device 300 (e.g., the third flow path component 336) on the straight line LL1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is reflected and refracted by the balls. This allows the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 to stably reach the secondary window portion 162d2 regardless of the manner in which the balls flow down.

The placement of the sealing member 313 in this embodiment may be to the player's advantage if the sealing member 313 remains difficult to see unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration where the sealing member 313 is always within the field of view, light enters the player's eyes every time the light emitting means 351 emits light, which may be dazzling to some players. However, by positioning the light emitting means 351 so that it is difficult to see, as in this embodiment, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range where it intersects with the straight line LL1, the fixed member 161 may be provided with a light diffusion treatment to prevent the light from reaching the sub-window portion 162d2.

In this case, it can be configured so that it is difficult to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313 unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 to look directly at the seal member 313. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a gaming preference, the purpose can be achieved by maintaining the line of sight shown in FIG. 74, and the gaming burden on such a player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed from a smooth surface shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub-window portion 162d2 may be formed so that at least one of the front and back surfaces is subjected to light diffusion processing, or a bubble portion is provided inside to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, the light that reaches the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light that is visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the sub-window 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, we have explained the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that direct light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1. Next, we will explain the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that are arranged in four locations on the left and right at the bottom row.

Figure 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380, and detection sensor SE1 of the sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. In Figure 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines.

In the following explanation, the LEDs arranged on the inner left and right sides of the bottom row of the light-emitting means 351 will be referred to as inner light-emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the outer left and right sides of the bottom row will be referred to as outer light-emitting means 351d.

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light-emitting means 351c is positioned inside the light diffusion surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351c, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surface 332e formed over a range extending to the left and right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed on the rear side of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the inner light-emitting means 351c is lit and the ball flows through the branch point BP1, the location where the ball is positioned in front of the light-diffusing surface 332e, which emits light in a range from left to right, is visible as a shadow, and the player can easily understand how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light-emitting means 351c passes through the long front-rear protrusion 317 (see FIG. 75). The optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, but the arrangement allows light near the optical axis to pass through, and the protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are curved when viewed in the front-rear and up-down directions.

As a result, a portion of the light emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shape of the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-to-right inner protrusion 318, and travels diagonally downward toward the front, and this light can reach the light-diffusing surface 340 (see Figure 75).

Since the light diffusion surface 340 is formed over the entire area of the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be reduced by allowing light to reach the light diffusion surface 340. This makes it easier to distinguish between a sphere flowing down the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and an out sphere that passes through the outlet 71 (see FIG. 75) and flows down the underside of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light-emitting means 351d is located outside (above) the light diffusion surface 332e and inside the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the outer light-emitting means 351d, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed above and in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is lit and a ball passes through the branch point BP1, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b above and in front of the ball will emit light, and the ball passing through the branch point BP1 will be hidden by the light diffusion surface 333b (see Figure 17), making it difficult for the player to understand how the ball passed through the branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and the light diffusion surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed above it (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to making the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from the front to back, the light emitted by the light diffusion surface 314c can also make the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from above at an angle looking into the light diffusion surface 333b (see FIG. 74).

The light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and light diffusion surface 340 is disposed below it, and this light diffusion surface 340 is formed on the lower back surface of the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the effect of making it difficult to see the branch point BP1 when viewed from the front to back, the lower surface of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, and as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, a shadow is created by the ball blocking the light (light diffused by light diffusion surface 340), making it easier for the player to understand that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion surface 333b is disposed in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figures 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 333b, a situation may occur in which the light is obscured by the sphere. In this embodiment, however, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is disposed outside (above) the range in which the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see Figure 76), so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere disposed at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, regardless of the flow pattern of the balls inside the sorting device 300, the light diffusion surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by illuminating the outer light emitting means 351d. When the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 17) located in front of it block the light, creating a shadow, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, a structure is used to smooth the flow of the balls downward as a measure to prevent the light from being blocked by the balls placed at the branch point BP1. This structure will be explained.

When the ball reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down, if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see FIG. 20), it flows straight down and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11, and if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right sides along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows down with the sliding displacement member 370 positioned in the front position, the through-hole edge 382a of the plate-shaped part 382 supporting the left and right outer ends of the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged to connect the left and right outer edges of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside. Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a is configured to easily flow down to the left and right outside.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball, which starts to flow down the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b to the left and right, from flowing back to the left and right inward or bouncing after being bridged to the through-hole edge portion 382a, and allows the ball to flow down smoothly.

The light diffusion surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which a sphere is placed on the rear side of the light diffusion surface 319a cannot occur, so the situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere is unlikely to occur regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 319a.

In this way, the inner light-emitting means 351c and the outer light-emitting means 351d are not simply arranged offset to the left and right, but are designed with an intentional difference in the positional relationship between the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged in different front-to-back positions in front of them and the optical axes of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d. By making the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b that the light from the light-emitting means 351c, 351d reaches different positions, the front-to-back positions at which the light reaches, is diffused, and is visible can be made different.

In the above explanation, the case where the inner light-emitting means 351c is illuminated and the case where the outer light-emitting means 351d is illuminated are explained separately, and the explanation was given on the assumption that the light-emitting means 351c, 351d on the opposite side are turned off. However, in actuality, the light emission control of each of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d is not performed one by one, and control modes such as both being turned on or both being turned off may also occur. Below, the light emission control patterns and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 appears at that time are explained.

Figures 77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the inner member 330 of the sorting device 300. In Figures 77(a) to 77(d), in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the lines of the light diffusing surface is omitted, and different combinations of the light emitting means 351c and 351d being turned on and off are illustrated, and the areas that are brightly lit by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d are illustrated with a crosshatched pattern.

That is, FIG. 77(a) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, FIG. 77(b) illustrates an inner light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned off, FIG. 77(c) illustrates an outer light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, and FIG. 77(d) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned on.

As shown in Figure 77(a), when both lights are off, the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and although visibility is ensured on the rear side, the player is given a dull impression. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and the out balls flowing down the rear (lower) side of the third flow path component 336.

When the inside is lit, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the light diffusion surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, thereby maintaining high visibility of the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and reducing visibility of the out balls flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, because the light diffusion surface 332e is illuminated on the rear side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the balls at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b arranged in front of the light diffusion surface 332e are kept in an unilluminated state, so that the branch point BP1 can be prevented from being blinded by light.

In other words, when the inside is lit, the area from the third flow path configuration portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 also passes through the front frame portion 333, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls at the branch point BP1. Also, because the light is lit on the points that require attention in grasping the flow pattern of the balls, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the points of interest, and it is possible to reduce the stress of the player while playing the game.

A light-diffusing surface 333b is formed over the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame portion 333 to see behind them.

When looking through the front frame portion 333 to see behind, when looking in the front-to-back direction, you see through two side surfaces of the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 that are arranged opposite each other at the front and rear, so since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

The same can be said for a player who tries to see through to the back of the front frame portion 333 with a line of sight that is inclined from the inside left and right to the outside left and right (a line of sight that is inclined from the center position on the front left and right toward the normal detection sensor SE12).

In other words, in this embodiment, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed along the inside of the rectangular tube shape, and the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) are located on this inclined line of sight. Therefore, since there are many plates through which it is necessary to see through, it is even more difficult to see the rear side.

In this way, the front frame portion 333 makes it difficult to see through to the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only when viewed from the front-to-rear direction, but also when viewed from an oblique direction.

When the outside light is on, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the branch point BP1 are hidden by the light, reducing the visibility of the flowing balls.

On the other hand, the light diffusion surface 340 formed on the rear (lower) side of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. In other words, when the external lighting is on, improving the visibility of the balls flowing on the front side has the effect of increasing the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is reduced.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are illuminated over a wide area. The situation in which light is lit is a combination of the inside lighting state and the outside lighting state, and the effects of both can be produced, but they do not always complement each other with advantageous effects.

For example, because the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the spheres flowing to the left and right outside the branch point BP1 are hidden by light is inherited from the external lighting state. Therefore, in order to increase the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the internal lighting state.

Various control modes for turning on and off the light emitting means 351c, 351d are exemplified. For example, in a round game where there is a possibility that a ball will enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76) during a jackpot game, control may be performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily notice the branch point BP1, and in other round games, control may be performed to configure an outer lighting state or both lighting states to make the overall light brighter.

Also, for example, the control may be such that both lights are switched on and both lights are switched off, regardless of the type of round of play.

The timing of lighting the light emitting means 351c, 351d is not limited to round play, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up after the reach is upright during the pattern change, or the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up when it is detected that a ball has entered the winning hole 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67.

Returning to Figure 75 from Figure 73, the configuration for optimizing the flow of balls near the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in Figure 73, the upper surface of the extension portion 162b located on the left and right outer sides of the opening and closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open or closed state, balls that have deviated to the left or right outside of the opening/closing plate 65b and landed on the upper surface of the extension part 162b can be diverted to the left or right outside (the side opposite the side where the opening/closing plate 65b is located), so it is possible to prevent balls on the extension part 162b from flowing down past the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, the majority of the balls flowing down to the outlet 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, which makes it possible to prevent the balls from bouncing up (bouncing high) near the outlet 71. This makes it possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path component 336 located behind it from being obscured by the bouncing up balls, thereby reducing visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open/closed state is formed as a flat surface extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center (the partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path component 335, making it easier to distinguish between a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and a ball flowing from the second flow path component 335 toward the third flow path component 336.

As shown in Figure 74, the opening and closing plate 65b is shaped to funnel all balls placed on the upper surface into the specific winning opening 65a without any leakage, but various design features have been implemented to prevent the flow of balls from being delayed.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the ball flowing rearward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b, and guides the ball inward to the left and right. The guide plate portion 163a2 is not a plate-shaped portion that extends horizontally, but is formed as a plate-shaped portion that extends in a direction that slopes downward to the left and right inward in accordance with the vertical displacement of the ball flowing from the opening and closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

In other words, the front end of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned further back as it moves inward on the left and right, and extends in a slanted direction so that the left and right inner parts where the ball that is handed over to the receiving member 163, which has a lower floor than the opening and closing plate 65b, comes into contact are positioned lower than the left and right outer ends where the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b comes into contact.

This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height over the entire length of the ball), and to guide the ball smoothly. In this embodiment, the position of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed in relation to the opening/closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the ball can contact the guide plate portion 163a2 at the center height over the entire length of the ball.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper side of the opening/closing plate 65b (the base end side of the rotation) and the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed midway. That is, at the center position in the left-right direction where the height position of the lower surface 163a is the highest, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface 163a slopes downward toward the left and right, and is configured to be reversed up and down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside in the left-right width direction.

In this embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of being a position that switches the flow pattern of the balls between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and is designed to be a position on the same plane as the left and right inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) (directly above the front frame portion 333 in Figure 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the ball's rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the upper and lower positions of the ball's rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball bounces backward near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b, collides with the receiving member 163 (on its inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, the ball can be prevented from climbing up from the opening/closing plate 65b onto the receiving member 163 after the ball stops bouncing and begins to roll.

The ball that rolls from the opening/closing plate 65b towards the receiving member 163 does not ride up onto the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts to come into contact with the lower surface 163a, the ball is swept outward to the left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface 163a.

The ball is unlikely to fall near the center of the left and right sides of the opening and closing plate 65b because the front design member 141 (see Figure 7) prevents the ball from falling, so it can be said that the ball is also unlikely to bounce. However, balls may bounce due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer range of switching position EP1 (the range outside the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 to the left and right (the side where ball passage hole 163b is located)), the ball is restricted from rolling from the receiving member 163 to the opening and closing plate 65b due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the ball rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the opening and closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 with little resistance. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface 163a is accelerated forward due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the gaming machine, the ball can be prevented from flowing back toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, which prevents the ball from flowing back near the ball passage hole 163b and allows the ball to flow smoothly downward, thereby preventing the ball from becoming stuck.

In addition, the ball's backward rolling from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 does not begin to flow backward and then switch to a left-right flow, but rather rolls along a diagonal straight line connecting the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, instead of flowing along paths that intersect at right angles, such as in the front-to-back and left-to-right directions, the balls can flow along the hypotenuse that connects the ends of a front-to-back line and a left-to-right line, one end of which is located in the same position, thereby shortening the path along which the balls roll (this is equivalent to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides of a right triangle).

Furthermore, compared to when balls tend to flow backwards between the left and right positions of the opening and closing plate 65b, this embodiment is configured so that balls tend to flow forwards in the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, making it easier to avoid the flow of balls becoming stagnant even when multiple balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the ranges on the left and right outside of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), but has an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate shape that slopes upward to leave a space in front of the range on the left and right center side of the pair of switching positions EP1.

The upper surface portion 163f is a device designed to lower the possibility of balls becoming stuck in the area between the pair of switching positions EP1 by raising the position of the lower surface portion 163a, and the upper surface portion 163f ensures that the vertical width of the space in which the balls are placed is sufficient.

This makes it possible to prevent ball jamming in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and to avoid the ball becoming caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f extends left and right in a direction that follows the inclination angle of the second flow path component 335 (a direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal), and is disposed at a position that abuts the ball at the center height position of the entire length of the ball rolling on the second flow path component 335 (a position 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path component 335).

As a result, when the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is minimized to ensure the visibility of the branch point BP1, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion 161f at a position that is off the center height of the ball, allowing the ball to roll more smoothly compared to when a load in the direction of lifting the ball or pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

If reduced visibility of branch point BP1 is acceptable, the thickness of symmetrical protrusion 161f can be made approximately the full length of the sphere to prevent the symmetrical protrusion 161f from contacting the sphere at a position that is off center height.

Next, the sliding displacement member 370 and its surrounding structure will be described in detail. Figure 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, state switching device 360, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380. In Figure 78, to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is shown as transparent with imaginary lines, and the sliding displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 can be seen through.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member that slides and displaces in the forward and backward directions at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side of the discharge hole 337 that it faces even in the front position (see Figure 78), and a gap is maintained. The gap is formed to be short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

This achieves the goal of preventing the ball from entering the chance change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding the front end of the slide displacement member 370 being scraped or deformed by contact with the side of the discharge hole 337.

In addition, the front end of the sliding displacement member 370, i.e., the front end of the thin plate portion 371, is inclined so that the position shifts rearward as it moves outward to the left and right. This makes it easier to prevent the ball from being pinched and stuck between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337.

In other words, even if a ball is caught between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so the load acting on the ball has a directional component toward the left and right outside, and the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

Next, referring to Figure 79, we will explain the innovations in guiding the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. Because the player's profits can change depending on the positioning of the sliding displacement member 370, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 must be reproducible (stable) and smooth.

Figure 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, Figure 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and Figure 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. In the explanation of Figure 79, Figures 13 and 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protrusion portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned lower toward the left and right outer sides, and the balls can flow along this inclination. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the balls rolling along this inclined surface, it is configured to suppress changes in the posture of the slide displacement member 370 that would change the inclination of the inclined surface.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370 is supported not only at both the left and right ends, but also at the lower protrusion portion 373 against the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380. This allows each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b, which are divided into left and right portions by the recessed portion 372, to be supported from below on both the left and right sides (supported by both ends), thereby suppressing changes in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

In other words, even if the load applied by the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide sections 371b is different (even if an unbalanced number of balls are placed on the balls), each ball guide section 371b is supported at both the left and right ends, so that tilting to the left and right of the ball guide sections 371b and the sliding displacement member 370 (displacement in the rotational direction around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction) can be suppressed.

In addition, the partition plate 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recessed portion 372, so that the upward displacement is restricted. In other words, the lifting movement of the sliding displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilt direction can be suppressed.

This makes it easier to maintain the proper posture of the sliding displacement member 370, suppresses the resistance to displacement in the forward and backward directions, and prevents malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion formed on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the protrusion portion 383 is configured to be point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of semi-spherical protrusions 372a protrude from the recessed portion 372 toward the protrusion portion 383, and when the gap is filled, the semi-spherical protrusions 372a and the protrusion portion 383 are configured to be in point contact.

As described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, on which the ball can roll, is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the left-right direction, so that the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is resolved into an up-down component and a left-right component, and the left-right component can displace the sliding displacement member 370 in the left-right direction (a direction that intersects with the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370).

At this time, while it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 of the sliding displacement member 370 and the protruding portion 383, as this makes it easier to stabilize the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b, it also makes it easier for contact friction to occur, which may result in functional problems.

For example, when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward/backward direction while the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b, excessively large contact friction may result in poor forward/backward displacement (e.g., no displacement may occur).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the semispherical protrusion 372a and the ridge 383 are configured to make point contact, so the area over which frictional force occurs can be reduced, and contact friction can be kept small. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be smoothly displaced in the forward and backward directions even when the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In particular, the forward/backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 when a ball is placed on the ball guide portion 371b is a displacement operation that switches the state from one in which the ball cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 to one in which the ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11, so by executing this displacement operation well, it is possible to avoid the player suffering any disadvantages.

Furthermore, by setting the displacement speed of this displacement operation to a high speed, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the rotation of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward and backward directions.

Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. Figure 80(a) illustrates a state in which the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370 in the front position, and Figure 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 has been displaced to the rear position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), an example of the rotation direction of the ball is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the ball rolls backward and reaches the slide displacement member 370 with the ball rotating in a forward direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced forward or backward to the rear position while the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 acts to reverse the ball's rotation direction (guiding direction) (backward direction).

This makes it possible to suppress the rotation of the ball, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, making it easier for the ball to fall straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven with a ball resting on it, it is possible to create a configuration in which the ball can easily flow down to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

The long front-rear projection 317 has the function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the long front-rear projection 317 does not only have the function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, but is configured as a shape that can appropriately guide the ball regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370 that is placed upstream of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear position, the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, the curve at the end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is made into an approximately arc shape with a long front-rear width longer than the up-down width (see Figure 18), so the abutting ball is subjected to a load whose downward component is greater than the forward component. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 from bouncing back in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow path configuration part 336.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position, the direction in which the ball flows down is left to the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward to the left and right, so the ball is guided outward to the left and right along this curve.

When the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the forward position, if a ball moving forward and backward collides with the sliding displacement member 370 with its momentum, the sliding displacement member 370 may be pushed backwards by the load of the collision, and the state may switch to one in which the ball can pass to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball abuts against the front-rear long protrusion 317 before colliding with the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, correcting the ball's speed direction downward. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, making it easier to avoid the sliding displacement member 370 being pushed backward.

In addition, because the load applied by the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 rearward is reduced, the biasing force (the biasing force of the return spring of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against that biasing force can be reduced. As a result, the design freedom of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

Even if the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while a ball is placed at the branch point BP1, it is easy to prevent the ball from flowing back.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 come into contact with the ball forward of the front displacement end position of the upper protrusion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed downward outward to the left and right. Furthermore, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-to-rear long protrusions 317. This reduces the forward and rearward speed of the ball, stabilizing the position due to inertia caused by its own weight, and making it difficult for the ball to flow back under the load applied by the sliding displacement member 370.

Furthermore, the ball comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 when it is lower than the height position at which it comes into contact with the front-rear long protrusion 317. However, when the ball is lowered enough to come into contact with the upper protrusion 376 (see FIG. 80(a)), the point at which the ball comes into contact is the ball guide 371b, which is located at a lower position than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced forward due to a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protrusion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to get from the upper side of the ball guide 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a, so the degree of backflow of the ball can be reduced.

The front end of the upper protrusion 376 on the partition plate 338 side is formed at an acute angle, so the flat surface does not collide head-on with the ball in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 78). In other words, the load applied to the ball from the upper protrusion 376 is large in the left-to-right direction and small in the front-to-rear direction.

This allows the ball that comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 to flow smoothly outward to the left and right, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball gets caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front side of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction, when the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace from the rear position to the front position with a ball placed at the branch point BP1.

Referring back to Figures 78, 79(b), and 79(c), the explanation will be given below. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 may be displaced in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion formed rearward of the upper protrusion 376, i.e., the portion formed on both the left and right sides with the upper and lower protrusions 374 extending from front to rear, has a sufficient front-to-rear width and is configured to be able to abut against the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 over that front-to-rear width. This makes it possible to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from tilting forward.

In addition, because the upper and lower protrusions 374 are long in the front-to-rear direction, when a load is applied to tilt the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 can be prevented from concentrating at one point. This makes it possible to suppress deformation of the sliding displacement member 370 (increasing rigidity).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at a front position where the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side of the protrusion portion (hereinafter also referred to as protrusion portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed abuts against the rear side of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front position of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a position where the front side of the protrusion 378a abuts against the rear side of the partition plate 338. For this purpose, the rear side of the partition plate 338 does not have a light diffusion surface, and the surfaces that are arranged opposite the protrusion 378a at the front and rear and can abut against each other are formed as flat surfaces. This makes it possible to stabilize the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the front position.

The lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, so that the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted via the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the front flesh portion of the protruding portion 378a.

In this way, since the driving force is transmitted to the center of the left and right of the sliding displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the sliding displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. In other words, it is easy to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from shifting in the rotational direction about the vertical axis when displacing in the forward and backward directions.

Furthermore, the front side of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear side of the partition plate 338, making it easier to correct the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the rotational direction around the vertical axis.

Here, when maintaining or returning the position of the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate portion 338 with the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a is small, so the load is applied locally, which may deteriorate the durability of the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, even if the slide displacement member 370 has a rotational positional deviation about the vertical axis before the front surface of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate 338, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 as the front surface of the protrusion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the partition plate 338, and the slide displacement member 370 can be corrected to the correct position.

The partition plate portion 338 against the protrusion portion 378a serves the purpose of aligning the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting against it when it is displaced in the forward and backward directions, and also functions as a portion that bears the load applied to the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, if a load is generated in a direction that changes the posture of the sliding displacement member 370 in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b, when the protruding portion 378a begins to displace (displace in a forward tilt direction) within the allowable gap of the sliding displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, resistance is applied in the opposite direction from the rear side of the partition plate portion 338 to the protruding portion 378a, suppressing the displacement of the protruding portion 378a, thereby suppressing the change in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

Next, we will explain the details of each operating unit 600, 700, and 800 that were not explained in detail. First, we will explain the rotating member 620 as a detailed explanation of the first operating unit 600.

Figure 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, Figure 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and Figure 81(c) is a side view of the rotating member 620 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in Figure 81(a).

Furthermore, FIG. 82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. In FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which displaces along the guide elongated hole 616, is shown positioned at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in Figures 81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetric shape in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing an operation. Details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 are described below.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 has a first side 621a, a second side 621b, and a third side 621c as flat sides that receive a load when stopped. The first side 621a, the second side 621b, and the third side 621c are formed in order from closest to the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the base end protrusion 617a that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the base end protrusion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base end protrusion 617a, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the tip side protrusion 617b that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the tip side protrusion 617b). The displacement of the second side surface 621b is restricted by the tip side protrusion 617b, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that allows it to come into contact with the rectangular box portion 618, which is formed in a roughly rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612 (its shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of its displaceable range).

In this way, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, each side surface 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abuts against a corresponding portion of the front cover member 612, restricting the displacement. In particular, multiple abutment points are formed at the displacement end of the rising side of the rotating member 620.

The purpose of forming multiple contact points in this way is to distribute the rotational load received at the time of contact among multiple points, and to suppress deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-to-rear direction by distributing the front-to-rear load that may occur on the rotating member 620 among multiple points.

Examples of loads in the forward and backward directions that may occur on the rotating member 620 include a load in the forward direction caused by the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and a torsional load caused by inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating (a load in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis of the rotating member 620).

In particular, since the load in the forward falling direction is a load in the forward tilt direction with the tubular portion 622 as the fulcrum, by taking the force moment into consideration, the load generated at the abutment position where the load is received becomes smaller as the abutment position is farther away from the tubular portion 622. With the aim of reducing the load generated at the abutment position, the second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the tubular portion 622.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d formed in a direction retracting from the driving motor 631 to avoid interference with the driving motor 631, and a thickened portion 621e formed by increasing the thickness to include the range that includes the recessed portion 621d and that abuts against the base end protrusion 617a as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622.

The base end of the rotating member 620 is narrowed by the recess 621d, so there is a possibility that it may break due to an impact load without any countermeasures. However, the thickened portion 621e offsets the effect of the recess 621d on the strength. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620.

Furthermore, the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range that includes a portion that can come into contact with the base end protrusion 617a, thereby improving the durability of the rotating member 620 against impact loads that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the base end protrusion 617a.

Figure 84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 85 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. Figures 84 and 85 show the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension portion 634b is formed with a width (circumferential length) that is three or more times longer than the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, making the width of the extension portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of using it for detection.

In other words, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640. Therefore, a load can be applied to the rotating member 620 in the forward falling direction. If no countermeasure is taken, the rotating member 620 may bend and deform in the front-to-rear direction, which may cause malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the extension 634b, which is disposed opposite the back surface of the fixed means 610, is formed in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620. This allows the load applied from the extension 634b to the fixed means 610 via the cylindrical portion 634a in the forward tilt direction of the rotating member 620 to be received over a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (a large area over which the load is generated can be ensured). This reduces the load received per unit area, making it possible to prevent damage to the extension 634b while suppressing the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620.

In this embodiment, while a structural advantage can be achieved by ensuring a long width of the extension portion 634b, the structure is designed so that even in a control mode in which the drive of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 reaches the terminal position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia.

For example, first, the inertial force of each component is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 rotated clockwise around the axis O1 as viewed from behind is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side (a direction that rotates the rotating member 620 counterclockwise as viewed from behind).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (which in this embodiment is the same as the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b) that is arranged to operate integrally with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a that constitute the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644 is positioned at a position away from the vertical position of the axis O1 that serves as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a to the left and right.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that rotates the gear teeth 654a. In this embodiment, the gear teeth 654a are subjected to a load in a direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind due to the weight of the front rotating member 652.

This load is transmitted in sequence to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth portion 625, and a load in the direction of rotation counterclockwise in rear view is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear teeth portion 625. In other words, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load acting on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, a load that rotates the rotating member 620 is generated even after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, even if the drive motor 631 is controlled to be de-energized when the extension portion 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not yet reached the displacement end position, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 continues due to the above-mentioned load, and the rotating member 620 can be caused to reach the displacement end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40).

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 are rear views of the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1 and the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634.

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 show in chronological order the rotational movement of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600.

Note that Figure 86(a) corresponds to the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 85, Figure 87(a) corresponds to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 83, and Figure 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

The arrangement of the electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will now be described. The electrical wiring 618d, the end of which is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a board housed in the rectangular box portion 618, is arranged to pass through the opening C2a and enter the second decorative rotating member 660.

The electrical wiring 618d is arranged to bypass the underside of the partition 619 that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electrical wiring 618b is configured with a length that takes into account the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped cover portion C2 that has the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so that it bends under its own weight.

The partition 619 has pillars 619a formed at both the top and bottom ends, and a plate-like portion 619b that protrudes in a long plate shape to connect the pillars 619a. The pillars 619a and the plate portion 619b abut against the front side of the base member 611.

A female screw is formed on the inside of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw is screwed through an opening drilled in the base member 611 in an arrangement corresponding to the columnar portion 619a, thereby fastening and fixing the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. In other words, the partition portion 619 not only serves to restrict the position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also ensures the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described, with particular attention paid to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the description will focus on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 86(a). The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is downwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88.

When moving from the performance standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state where the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the vertical arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 does not change significantly, but the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

This allows the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a to be moved away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 begins to move downward in earnest, thereby preventing the electrical wiring 618d from becoming pinched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition 619 during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In particular, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a is oriented so as to face the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being pinched between the partition 619, so even if the dish-shaped lid C2 is designed to be positioned close to the partition 619, it is possible to avoid problems such as the electrical wiring 618d being broken.

As shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the position of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and is intentionally configured so that downward slack occurs in the electrical wiring 618d. This makes it possible to ensure the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself while avoiding unnecessary slack in the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slack in the front-to-rear direction).

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough so that it does not come into contact with the extension portion 634b during operation of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d comes into contact with the extension portion 634b and receives a load, even without providing a partition between the extension portion 634b and the electrical wiring 618d.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see Figure 88), the extension portion 634b is positioned away from the connector 618c (positioned on the opposite side of the connector 618c with respect to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as the reference), so a large area can be secured for positioning the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension portion 634b, thereby improving the design freedom of the length of the electrical wiring 618d.

Next, the following description focuses on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 88. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is upwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figure 88, Figure 87(b), Figure 87(a), Figure 86(b), and Figure 86(a).

When the dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced upward, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 from the lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid C2 is closest to the partition 619, but faces downward. This allows the dish-shaped lid C2 to be displaced upward while ensuring downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 passes the lower end of the partition portion 619, the opening C2a rotates gradually while still maintaining its downward facing state (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is aligned along the longitudinal direction of the partition portion 619) (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a position facing the partition portion 619 (see Figures 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is positioned so as to enter (be housed) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being broken by sandwiching it between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and also reduces the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In other words, the position of the opening C2a is changed in accordance with the relative position of the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, thereby restricting the position of the electrical wiring 618d and preventing the electrical wiring 618d from being positioned between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 when the gap between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 becomes narrow, thereby suppressing the load on the electrical wiring 618d.

As a result, compared to when the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be arranged close to each other, improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In addition, the restriction on the placement of the electrical wiring 618d is achieved not by using a separate member such as a cable tie, but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used to fasten and fix the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, but it is also used to restrict the placement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a cable tie to bundle the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike cable ties, the orientation of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be placed on the appropriate side corresponding to the placement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, making it easier to avoid situations where the electrical wiring 618d becomes taut or bent.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a sector-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 110. Because the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, the degree of freedom in the shape adopted for the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d that passes through the opening C2a can be improved.

Next, we will explain the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d, which is arranged on the front side of the opening C2a. Figure 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

In Figure 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are shown, and the other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the electric decoration board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown with solid lines, and to facilitate understanding, the box-shaped member 661 is shown with imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen.

In addition, Fig. 89 shows an example of the arrangement of electrical wiring 618d, and shows the dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electrical wiring 618d is shown branching between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 into a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 653 (see Fig. 41) and a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 662.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and includes a wiring insertion slot 663a that is drilled in the shape of a long hole through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted, and a pair of insertion holes 663b that are drilled on both sides of the insertion slot 663a as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, so that the wiring retaining plate 663 can prevent the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) from falling off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both the function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and the function of fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a together. In addition, the wiring retaining plate 663 has the function of temporarily retaining the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electrical wiring 618d passes through the inside of the long wiring insertion hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in a manner that suppresses displacement by being clamped. In this embodiment, the rotational movement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not an operation of one or more rotations, but an operation of less than half a rotation (a rotational movement of about 135 degrees) performed in a reciprocating direction, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to rotate multiple times and not cause a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d is twisted off.

The load (torsional load) applied to the electrical wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates is thought to be large near the wiring insertion slot 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in this embodiment, the wiring insertion slot 663a is formed in a long hole shape, and the electrical wiring 618d is temporarily held by being clamped in the wiring insertion slot 663a, so displacement of the electrical wiring 618d within the long hole shape is permitted.

Therefore, even if an overload in the torsional direction occurs in the electrical wiring 618d, the load can be released by displacing the electrical wiring 618d within the long wiring insertion hole 663a. This improves the durability of the electrical wiring 618d.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotational movement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted in the rotational direction of the main body member 651. In other words, a counterclockwise twist occurs when viewed from behind as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces in the tilting direction.

As the pivoting member 620 is pivoted in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also pivoted counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, thereby reducing the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by twisting (improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while being displaced vertically along the guide slot 616. Here, in the time series from Figure 86(a) to Figure 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which there is a large amount of slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 to a state in which there is a small amount of slack.

Correspondingly, the rotation of the illumination board 662 is configured as an operation that changes the state of the electrical wiring 618d from a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side of the electrical wiring 618d is located on the rear side (main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89) to a state in which the terminal is located on the front side (wire receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state of the electrical wiring 618d can be changed in a manner that pulls it toward the front side.

That is, in the time sequence from Figure 86 (a) to Figure 88, the state of the electrical wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 changes from a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is largely loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the rear side) to a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is little loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the relationship between the amount of slack is reversed (balanced) between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d as the first operating unit 600 operates.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed inside the main body member 651 and the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be explained.

In the time sequence of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 twists counterclockwise when viewed from behind, while the portion of the electrical wiring 618d arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 twists in the rotational direction of the illumination board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In other words, they twist in opposite directions.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be twisted to a minimum when the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state, and twisted to a maximum when the electrical wiring 618d is in an extended state.

As a result, in a state where a large amount of slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is unlikely to cause problems (standby state, see FIG. 86(a)), the electrical wiring 618d is deliberately left slack to reduce the load on the electrical wiring 618d, while in a state where it is preferable to reduce the slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extended state, see FIG. 88), the twisting caused by the rotational movement of the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the illumination board 662 is maximized to suppress slack in the electrical wiring 618d (suppress the displacement of the electrical wiring 618d).

In this way, as a means of improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, it is configured to switch between a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which twisting reduces slack and avoids contact between the surrounding components (e.g., extension portion 634b) and the electrical wiring 618d.

As another embodiment, in the time series of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 may be configured in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational operation of the illumination board 662 are the same, so the twisting deformation of the electrical wiring 618d can be offset.

Next, the characteristics of the protruding decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operating unit 600 will be described. Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 are schematic front views showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

In Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92, the outer shapes of the guide slot 616 and rectangular box section 618 are illustrated diagrammatically, and the displacement of the protruding decorative section 652b from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order, with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 omitted for ease of understanding.

Figure 90(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 40), Figure 90(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 84), Figure 91(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate operating state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 43), Figure 91(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is positioned at the right end of the displacement range (see Figure 82), and Figure 92 illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 45).

In the performance standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned to the right so that it overlaps with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above. This allows the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be positioned outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the performance standby state, which reduces the visibility of the overhanging decorative portion 652b since the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73.

On the other hand, if the overhang decorative portion 652b is displaced downward while being positioned to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above, the overhang decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 will collide, causing a malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b is changed prior to or in conjunction with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b (see Figures 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in a direction away from the rectangular box part 618 (diagonally upward and left when viewed from the front, a rotational direction about the axis O1), making it easier to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In this embodiment, this change in posture causes the protruding decorative portion 652b to retreat from the upper position of the rectangular box portion 618 (see Figure 91 (a)), after which the full downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the protruding decorative portion 652b begins.

The downward displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b occurs in conjunction with the downward displacement of the axis O1. During the downward displacement, the axis O1 is displaced in a direction (to the right) approaching the rectangular box part 618 along the shape of the guide long hole 616 (see Figure 91 (b)), and therefore there is a possibility that the protruding decorative part 652b may collide with the rectangular box part 618.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 has a recessed portion 618a formed on the left side surface that is recessed along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed at the location where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end portion of the guide elongated hole 616. In this way, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is considered with one objective in mind, which is to avoid collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Furthermore, as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b continues to change, so that the overhanging decorative part 652b can be displaced in a direction retracting from the rectangular box part 618. In this embodiment, when displacing from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the overhanging decorative part 652b is designed so that its leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) is equal to or greater than the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. This makes it possible to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In the state shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in opposite directions and cancel each other out, so the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b is kept small.

In contrast, in the states shown in Figures 91(b) to 92, the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in the same direction on the left and right, so that the displacements are superimposed, resulting in a larger amount of left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b.

As a result, even though the posture change of the protruding decorative part 652b always involves a rotational movement around the axis O1, it appears to the player that the protruding decorative part 652b is being guided to displace up and down with a small left-right displacement (narrow displacement trajectory) from Figure 90(a) to Figure 91(b), and to make a large left-right displacement from Figure 91(b) to Figure 92.

Therefore, it is possible to create a difference between the structure (component shape) that guides the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure that is expected from the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b as seen by the player. This makes it possible to create a surprising effect.

In other words, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be made to appear to the player as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in an area that is narrow and where left-right displacement would be insufficient, such as the left and right sides of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), the player can be made to see an unexpected displacement popping out to the left and right, thereby increasing the attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For convenience, the left-right displacement of axis O1 is compared with the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, axis O1 is a rotation axis that is part of the configuration of the first operating unit 600, so the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which is configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis, has the same meaning as the left-right displacement of axis O1. Therefore, the above explanation may be understood as a comparison between the left-right displacement of dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Figure 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. Figure 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane passing through axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644. As shown in Figure 93, the rear rotating member 654 is disposed in the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is disposed in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh at the location where the opening 645a is formed and communicates.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663, so that the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663.

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is disposed with a small gap between the step formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a at the axial base end side (upper side in FIG. 93) and the wire retaining plate 663. This prevents the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and stabilizes the positioning of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 in the central axial direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

As shown in Figure 93, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned rearward compared to the second decorative rotating member 660, and is therefore positioned closer to the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) in the front-to-rear direction compared to the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, it is positioned closer to the opening 511a (see Figure 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is positioned in the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, compared to when the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b are positioned at a distance, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so as to overlap the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right to the player.

In particular, when the protruding decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed simultaneously (see, for example, FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned away from the third pattern display device 81 toward the front and is easily viewed independently of the display of the third pattern display device. This, in turn, accentuates the effect of making the protruding decorative portion 652b, which is positioned close to the third pattern display device 81 from the front side, appear to the player as part of the display (creating the illusion).

In other words, by providing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the degree of distinction of the other components (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b) is reduced. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is made from hard resin and its shape cannot be changed during construction. However, the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling the light emission mode (color, brightness, etc.) of the light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653.

Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653 to match the video displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so as to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right for the player.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described in detail. Figure 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the extended state, and Figure 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94.

As described above, the second operating unit 700 is configured so that the vertical displacement and the forward/backward displacement occur synchronously during the sliding displacement (sliding displacement in the forward/backward direction at an angle), and is designed so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the forward/backward displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operating unit 700, the obliquely tilted displacement in the forward and backward directions is not composed of a single displacement, but is composed of a combination of a displacement in the up-down direction and a displacement in the forward and backward directions.

That is, first, the lifting plate member 740 connected to the pivot arm member 720 is guided by the metal bar 702 at the left end so as to move up and down in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, the left side rear plate member 750 and the blind decorative member 768 are also arranged in front and behind the lifting plate member 740, preventing the lifting plate member 740 from freely moving in the front and back direction. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up and down direction.

The right side of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the pivot arm member 720. The right end of the lifting plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly supported by a fixed member (upper front inclined portions 714, 751 and receiving inclined portion 762) via the performance device 780 (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end of the lifting plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-to-rear direction, and limits the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up-down direction.

The performance device 780 supported by the lifting plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-to-rear direction. In this way, to achieve a diagonally inclined sliding displacement in the front-to-rear direction, the guidance of the displacement of the lifting plate member 740 and performance device 780 as components is configured separately for the direction of gravity and the horizontal direction.

This makes it easier to configure the system to maintain low displacement resistance compared to a configuration that guides the system in the forward and backward directions at an angle.

The extension state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in Figures 94 and 95 is a state in which it is possible to control the second operating unit 700 to perform a displacement (see Figure 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787. That is, in this embodiment, in other extension states (for example, the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 28) or the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 33)), the second operating unit 700 is controlled so as not to perform a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787.

By controlling in this manner, even if the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750 are configured to be disposed at positions that overlap with the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right side front plate member 710 or the left side rear plate member 750. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750.

The following describes the ingenuity of the configuration of the performance device 780 in relation to the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787. First, the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates the driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left-right center position of the performance device 780 (a position where the center is located directly above the center of the insertion tube portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744).

This not only prevents the attitude of the performance device 780 from tilting left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also stabilizes the left-right balance of the driving force generated by the drive motor 782.

Furthermore, in the extended state (see FIG. 95) of the second operating unit 700 capable of performing a displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the left-right position of the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 supporting the lifting plate member 740 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to the right side.

In this way, while the support for the right side of the lifting plate member 740 is provided only by the pivoting arm member 720, which allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as a support position to be displaced in the left-right direction, when it is expected that the position or posture of the performance device 780 is likely to change, that is, when a displacement is made to switch the state of the covering member 787, the position of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to a position to the right, thereby stabilizing the position or posture of the performance device 780.

Note that the control to execute the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 has been switched, it is possible to control the state of the second operating unit 700 to change to a performance standby state or an intermediate performance state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the standby state of the second operating unit 700 and to place the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is first placed in an extended state, a displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, and then the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward to change to the intermediate performance state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusion member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction so that it overlaps with the inner ends of a pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-to-rear direction. This makes it possible to hide the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support members 760 from being seen by the player, thereby preventing the player from understanding that the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by understanding the position and shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e.

Furthermore, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusion member 778b is seen overlapping in a left-right line with the fixedly positioned three-dimensional decorative portion 768a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, across the left-right length of the lower edge.

A board with an LED fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, and the light emitted from the corresponding LED can be used to create a light-emitting effect of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. This light-emitting effect can make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be separated by light, or make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be brightened by light.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusion member 778b can be configured to function both as a member that hides the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and as a member that performs a light-emitting effect in conjunction with the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontal member 742 is provided with a covering cover 742a that is provided behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and covers the area (left side area) away from the rear of the light diffusion member 778b with a space on the front side.

The covering cover 742a is a member for concealment formed across the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742. That is, the electrical wiring for supplying electricity to the performance device 780 is guided from the rear of the concealing decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742 to the performance device 780 side, and is connected to the drive motor 782, the illumination board 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), etc.

At this time, in front of the electrical wiring, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a are arranged overlapping each other, which is a configuration that easily blocks the player's line of sight and makes it easier to prevent the electrical wiring from being visible to the player.

In other words, by placing the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, in front of the path of the electrical wiring to function as a screen for the electrical wiring, the size of the covering cover 742a required to screen the electrical wiring can be kept to a minimum.

In addition, since the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed in position, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the front-to-back direction when in the standby state (see FIG. 31) or in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), and therefore cannot be used to conceal electrical wiring.

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the formation range of the horizontal member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to conceal the electrical wiring with the horizontal member 742 and the light diffusion member 778, so that the electrical wiring can be prevented from being seen by the player regardless of the state of the second operating unit 700 (standby state, intermediate state, extended state).

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. FIG. 96 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in a horizontal arrangement state in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. 97 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but have curved portions 783d that are curved upward from the lower surface when the inverted member 781 is horizontally disposed. The curved portions 783d are curved so as to protrude in a direction retracting from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm members 783 and the drive gear 782a when the inverted member 781 is vertically disposed.

Figure 98 is a front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. In Figure 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is shown in imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is placed near both the left and right ends of the pair of covering members 787, rather than on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are placed close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act to directly combine the covering members 787 together, but acts independently on each of the pair of covering members 787.

This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a malfunction of one covering member 787 from causing the other covering member 787 to malfunction as well.

In addition, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 start to move apart in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction to the left-right displacement. In other words, when the up-down inversion member 781 starts to rotate from the upright vertical position, it is possible to delay the timing at which the magnetic force acts.

This makes it possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnets Mg when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, so that it is easier to avoid situations in which the covering members 787 vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force or the displacement becomes unstable, causing malfunctions, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, compared to when it is necessary to remove the magnet's adhesion when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides in the left and right directions, and the effect of this will be explained below. The rotational position stabilization parts 785f, to which the metal screws that come into contact with the magnets Mg and are loaded with magnetic force are fixed, are arranged on the same side in the front-to-back direction (the front side when the up-down inversion member 781 is in the upright vertical position, see Figure 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg in relation to the metal screws is the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides.

In more detail, for example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates in the forward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates in the backward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

For example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates backwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates forwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is configured to be the same on both the left and right sides.

Here, when a load is generated in the opposite front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides (for example, when the magnet Mg on the left side is placed in a lower position, so that the magnets Mg on both the left and right sides are placed in a lower position, and the design is changed so that the rotational position stabilization portion 785f of the left axial rotation member 785 is placed on the rear side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical position), the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state becomes a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 rotates on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction. In particular, in a configuration like this embodiment, in which the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) elastically deforms in the process of removing the magnet Mg from its attraction, and the covering member 787 is vigorously rotated using the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c after the magnet Mg is removed from its attraction, it is expected that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it may become difficult to release the load from the lifting/reversing performance device 770, which may result in damage to the lifting/reversing performance device 770 or a decrease in the durability of the lifting/reversing performance device 770. Therefore, measures are considered necessary to stabilize the displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 over the long term.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state, the direction of the load generated between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining their posture is configured to be the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides, so that the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state can be a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-back direction.

This can be easily offset by the displacement of the lifting and reversing device 770 (displacement having a forward and backward component), and damage to the lifting and reversing device 770 caused by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state can be avoided.

In the second operating unit 700, the direction of the sliding displacement of the performance device 780 (a direction having a vertical component and a front-to-rear component, i.e., a direction in a plane perpendicular to the left-to-right direction) is perpendicular to the direction in which the displacement starts (left-to-right direction) from a state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other (a vertical arrangement state of the upside-down members 781).

This makes it easier to avoid one displacement occurring due to the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when a sliding displacement of the performance device 780 is performed, it makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 unintentionally start to displace from a state in which they are positioned close to each other (displacement in a direction away from each other).

Next, the details of the third operating unit 800 will be described again. First, the details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. Figure 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion changes at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and includes a base end reinforcing portion 852a disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853, and a recessed portion 852b formed by hollowing out the front side along the axial direction.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small, and it is designed to have a large deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the tip rod portion 853, which is formed on the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852. This ensures the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 and improves the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

A curved portion 852c is formed on both short side surfaces of the thickened portion 852. The curved portion 852c is formed from a shape that can smoothly receive the curved portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end of the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when adjacent intermediate arm members 850 rotate to be positioned close to each other is reversed between the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a)) and the combined state, so which of the short side surfaces of the intermediate arm members 850 is positioned close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both sides, it can smoothly accept the curved portion 854d in any combined state. This allows for a smooth transition to the combined state.

In addition, by designing the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d so that they can come into surface contact with each other, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The third operating unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down by the lifting arm member 801, but the direction of the lifting and lowering displacement is not necessarily perpendicular to the direction in which the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 start to move from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the imaginary position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set in a different direction at 72 degree intervals, so that the displacement start direction of all the rotating members 834 cannot be perpendicular to the direction of the upward and downward displacement.

Therefore, due to the load and inertia that occur when the third operating unit 800 is raised and lowered, there is a possibility that an unintended rotational motion (integral rotational motion or switching rotational motion) may occur. We will explain the measures taken to prevent this malfunction.

Figure 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operating unit 800, which shows the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIG. 100, the imaginary position line 832F of the metal rod 832 is shown to include the imaginary position line 832F that extends downward in the individual combined state, and the imaginary position line 832F that has rotated counterclockwise in front view until the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 changes by 0.5 degrees.

In other words, in Figure 100, the angle θ51 is shown as 45 degrees, and the angle θ52 is shown as 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to allow the rotating member 834 to slide along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotation movement.

The change in angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 refers to the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 relative to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which meshing rotation of the bevel tooth portions 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs.

Here, backlash (gap) is essential to keep the gear teeth meshing upright, and the rotational responsiveness changes depending on how large or small this gap is set. There are various options for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set to 0.5 degrees.

In other words, before the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is filled and meshing rotation does not begin. Meanwhile, the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operating unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

In other words, when the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individually combined state) begins, the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and mainly sliding movement occurs along the metal rod 832.

Figure 101 is a schematic front view of the third operating unit 800. In explaining Figure 101, Figure 100 is referred to as appropriate. Figure 101 illustrates the third operating unit 800 in an integrated state, and illustrates the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance force against the displacement of the third operating unit 800.

Here, the rotating member 834 is configured not to rotate even if the inner rotating member 830 rotates slightly relative to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, a rotation of about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)).

As a result, even in a configuration in which magnet Mg2 is used to maintain the combined state of multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 as in this embodiment, and an attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear displacement, making it easier to maintain the combination due to the magnetic force of magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force, and therefore the magnetic force is likely to disappear. In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 at the start of displacement from the combined state is only along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (displacement in the sliding direction along the metal rod 832), and therefore the combined state due to the magnetic force is easily maintained.

This makes it easier to maintain the combined state of the multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (e.g., rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load or the like.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, the connection is cut and a switching rotation DR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin), and when the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when the torque limiter 866 is configured in the reverse direction, an idling rotation AR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin). The torque limiter 866 is configured with a pair of opposite forward and reverse rotations.

In more detail, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 is configured to generate a switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until the applied load reaches an allowable value when the allowable value is exceeded, and to generate an idling rotation AR1 in which the load is idling when the left torque limiter 866 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front.

The right-side torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, while it generates resistance in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front until the applied load reaches an allowable value, and generates a switching rotation DR1 in the idling direction when the allowable value is exceeded.

In this way, a set of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, making it possible to perform switch rotation operations in both directions as described above.

Furthermore, when no load in the rotational direction that exceeds the allowable value is applied, resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) attached to the torque limiter 866, so that the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to unintended loads (the inertial force of vertical displacement or the impact force when the door is opened or closed) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by a set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and is arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are combined into a ring shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between itself and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the adjacent second covering portion 885 arranged in close proximity.

By configuring in this manner, compared to when magnets Mg2 are disposed on both sides of a specific second covering portion 885 in the width direction (i.e., when both second covering portions 885 disposed adjacent to a specific second covering portion 885 on both sides receive a biasing force from magnets Mg2 in a direction toward the specific second covering portion 885), it is possible to prevent the gaps between the second covering portions 885 in the combined state from becoming larger at positions away from the specific second covering portion 885, and to make the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

As described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a sliding movement radially outward, and by the time the rotational movement around the metal rod 832 begins, the two members have moved apart to such an extent that the combination caused by the magnetic force is released (see FIG. 100). Since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction that shortens the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (in a direction toward the center of the concentric circle), it becomes a resistance force to the sliding movement radially outward of the second decorative member 880.

In addition, because this resistance force is generated with equal magnitude from each direction dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load that the third operating unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. In other words, it is easier to stabilize the positioning of the third operating unit 800 compared to when the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

The shape of all five second decorative members 880 is the same, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so the front-to-back positions of each magnet Mg2 are the same. This makes it possible to prevent the magnetic force of the magnets Mg2 from applying a load having a front-to-back component to the second decorative members 880, making it easier to avoid a situation in which a magnetic force is generated in the front-to-back direction when starting to move from the combined state or just before reaching the combined state, causing the second decorative members 880 to vibrate in the front-to-back direction.

Figure 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In Figure 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individual combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is illustrated, and for ease of understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member 840 arranged on the rear side can be seen.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to have at least one portion that restricts rotation in one direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 102), and in most cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted in two portions. The configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described below.

First, there is the abutment protrusion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The abutment protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at the intermediate angular position between the adjacent extension arms 842, and the inside is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body 841.

This abutment protrusion 845 is positioned opposite the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotational direction of the intermediate arm member 850 and is positioned so as to be able to abut against the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The thickened portion 852 has a reduced deformation resistance to elastic deformation due to the recessed portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the abutting protrusion 845 is hollowed out. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutting protrusion 845, the load generated at that time can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852, so that damage to the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The abutment protrusion 845 is not disposed at all intermediate angular positions of the extension arm 842, but is omitted at the angular positions where the detectable portion 844 is formed. This shifts the positions of the abutment protrusion 845 and the detectable portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, and the removal direction of the molding die for the outer rotating member 840 can be set to the axial direction of the main body 841. This simplifies the design of the molding die.

Thus, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted in exchange for simplification of the design of the molding die, but in this embodiment, a base end side reinforcement portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852 as a second configuration for restricting the rotation of the rotating arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is arranged opposite the tip end rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotational direction of the adjacent pivot member 850 and is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the tip end rod portion 853 when it over-rotates, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small and designed to increase deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to come into surface contact with the curved portion 854d, which can prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portions 852c and 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

In this way, when the abutment protrusions 845 are arranged opposite each other, the displacement of the pivot arm member 850 is restricted from over-rotating by a configuration that allows the curved shaped portion 852c of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the curved shaped portion 854d and the base end reinforcement portion 852a of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the tip end rod portion 853 in addition to abutting against the abutment protrusions 845.

On the other hand, even if the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, or the base end reinforcement portion 852a and the tip end rod portion 853 of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, thereby preventing over-rotation of the rotating arm members 850.

These abutment configurations are configured so that the five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (arranged in a circular manner). Therefore, at first glance, it may seem as if the load at the time of abutment is concentrated because the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 in one location is omitted and there is little configuration that restricts rotation only for the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to that omitted location, but in reality, the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850 allows the load at the time of abutment to be distributed.

This makes it possible to prevent the durability of a single pivot arm member 850 (the pivot arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted) from decreasing drastically.

Furthermore, the formation of the annular plate portion 846, which extends in an annular plate shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on a single plane along the rear end of the abutting protrusion portion 845, is omitted in the area that overlaps with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, similar to the abutting protrusion portion 845.

The omission of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as a trade-off for making the design of the molding die easier, as with the omission of the abutment protrusion portion 845 described above, but the effect of the annular plate portion 846 is realized by the adjacent pivot arm member 850 (the structure supporting it) even in the area where the annular plate portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as the correction of the misalignment of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850. That is, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is unintentionally misaligned front-rear when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward (see FIG. 65(a)) from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) and returns to the combined state, the rear side surface of the base end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is arranged opposite the annular plate portion 846 and is capable of abutting against it, so that the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the abutment.

This effect cannot be achieved if the annular plate portion 846 is omitted, since there is no contact with the annular plate portion 846. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842. Therefore, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is shifted forward or backward, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 and can abut against it, so that the forward or backward position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by this abutment.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same effect as the annular plate portion 846. This allows the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 to be produced for all of the rotating arm members 850, even while omitting the formation of part of the annular plate portion 846.

Figure 103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. Figures 103(a) and 103(b) show the relative positions of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in a combined state.

The state shown in FIG. 103(a) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed), and the state shown in FIG. 103(b) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 67(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed).

When comparing the combined state with the individual combined state (see Fig. 64(a) and Fig. 66(a)), there are differences such as the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 close to the outer rotating member 840 being reversed, so that the curved portion 852c that abuts against the abutment protrusion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c that abuts against the curved portion 854d is reversed.

To accommodate this difference, the abutment protrusion 845 is linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d are linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the longitudinal line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the pivot base end and the supported hole 854a).

Furthermore, the curved shape of the abutment protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved shape portion 854d are designed to be similarly curved to match the shape of the curved shape portion 852c. This allows the combination state to be configured with the same engagement relationship whether in the individual combined state or in the combined state.

In addition, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured in a positional relationship in which it is sandwiched from both sides between the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved portion 854d. This makes it possible to prevent the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 from being displaced in either rotation direction, making it easier to maintain the state of the intermediate arm member 850 and easier to maintain the combined state.

Figures 104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. Figure 104 illustrates a state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (a state intermediate between the individual combined state and the united state), and Figure 105 illustrates the united state.

Figure 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105, and Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. As a configuration of the third operating unit 800, the front-to-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player will be able to see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, which reduces the visibility of the metal bar 832. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 106 and 107, the metal bar 832 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. This makes it possible to prevent the intermediate arm member 850, which is a functional member rather than a decorative member, from standing out, and improves the appearance of the third operating unit 800.

When exposed (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a performance member that reflects light due to the gloss of its surface, improving the performance effect of the light emitted from the outer light-emitting part 823b (see FIG. 107). In other words, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective member for light performance.

If the intermediate arm member 850 were placed on the front side of the metal bar 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 would block the light entering the player's eyes. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is placed on the back side of the metal bar 832, so it is possible to avoid the intermediate arm member 850 blocking the light and causing an unsightly appearance.

In this way, in this embodiment, the range in which the light effects are performed can be expanded by configuring the metal rod 832 to reflect light in the mid-switching rotation operation in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see Figures 104 and 107). That is, the reflected light can be made visible to the player not only in the range behind the translucent decorative member 824 where the illumination board 823 (see Figure 60) is arranged, but also in the range ER1 (see Figure 104) where the metal rod 832, which is arranged to protrude radially outward from the translucent decorative member 824 when viewed from the front, is exposed and visible.

As a light receiving portion, the bulge 824a has a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see Figures 106 and 107) on its inner circumferential surface, in which a light diffusion shape is formed in a circular ring shape. The light irradiated from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be irradiated onto the light diffusion shape portion 824b, and the light diffusion shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in a circular ring shape.

As a result, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is visible as a bright ring not only when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 is released, making it easier to maintain the dramatic effect that utilizes the circular shape of the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 has not only a bulge 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extension 824c that extends radially outward from the bulge 824a when viewed from the front.

When the extension 824c is in the combined state, it is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880, and therefore does not function as a decorative part, but it does have the effect of concealing the mechanism during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. 104.

That is, as shown in Figures 104 and 107, the extension portion 824c is formed to be large enough to cover and conceal parts of the mechanism that are difficult to use for presentation, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extension arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see Figure 61).

And because the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulge 824a but also to the front side of the extension 824c, the decorative pattern can be seen in the area where the mechanism is hidden and concealed, improving the presentation effect.

An example of drive control of the third operating unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the lifting and lowering displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the lifting and lowering arm member 801 being driven and controlled, and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the drive motor 861 being driven and controlled will be described.

According to this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is configured to be able to perform the vertical displacement and rotational displacement independently. However, for example, due to the inertial load generated when the third operating unit 800 is vertically displaced, a rotational displacement may occur in the third operating unit 800 in conjunction with the vertical displacement. In this case, the third operating unit 800 may change its posture or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 may be released (the decorative members 870, 880 may be displaced radially outward against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2), which may reduce the presentation effect.

To avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 (particularly, the integral rotational movement) may be controlled to be performed simultaneously.

This allows the player to see the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 as it moves up and down as a dramatic action, preventing a decline in the dramatic effect. Furthermore, while the integral rotational action continues, a load continues to be applied in a direction that displaces the decorative members 870, 880 radially inward (see FIG. 101), so it is possible to prevent the combined state of the third operating unit 800 from being released.

In addition, even if control is not performed to simultaneously perform the lifting and lowering displacement and the rotational displacement, the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to adjust the orientation of the third operating unit 800 in advance in the rotational direction so that the orientation of the third operating unit 800 is such that the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by the lifting and lowering displacement.

In this embodiment, a change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that the rotation mode of the inner rotating member 830 is being performed as a unitary rotation operation. Therefore, based on this premise, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operating unit 800 will be designed in association with each other.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state where the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid any state where this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby maintaining the position of the outer rotating member 840.

Therefore, for example, when the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the operating resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases, if the resistance exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may work together, making it impossible to properly perform the switching rotation operation.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to reduce resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850.

For example, the direction of displacement of the rotating tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. In other words, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to make it difficult for resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832 to occur, and it is possible to keep the resistance generated between the metal rod 832 and the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 small.

When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at their radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (e.g., the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is aligned with the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, so that it is easy to create a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation is not performed properly.

In contrast, this embodiment employs a control mode in which, once the switching rotation operation has begun, driving continues at a sufficient speed until the combined state is reached. When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at the outer radial end positions (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to inertia such that they rotate around the metal rod 832.

Due to the effect of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the bevel teeth portion 834a and the bevel teeth portion 854c rotate in mesh with each other, so that the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 passes through the radially outer end position and rotates radially inward (see Figures 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of its radially outer end position, the tip of the intermediate arm member 850 is more likely to move in a direction along the metal rod 832, making it easier to reduce resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832.

In this way, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained and the position of the detected part 844 does not change, so the end timing of the switching rotation operation cannot be determined by a change in the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached can be achieved by setting a drive time necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation in advance and controlling the drive to stop at that drive time; however, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same, and the drive may stop before the combined state is reached. In this case, the presentation effect may be reduced.

In response to this, instead of a control mode that stops the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached, a control may be adopted in which it is determined that the switching rotation operation has ended and the integral rotation operation has begun when the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813 has changed (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 is stopped after this determination. This control makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped when the decorative members 870, 880 have not yet reached the combined state after the switching rotation operation has been performed.

As described above, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operating unit 800 as drive control, but the integral rotation operation can be performed regardless of the state of the third operating unit 800.

Since the switching rotation operation can be performed regardless of the position of the rotation direction of the third operating unit 800 as a drive control, as described above in FIG. 68, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be announced. In other words, the switching rotation operation can be performed not only from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66(a)), but also from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

However, unlike when the switching rotation operation is performed while the detectable portion 844 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change from the end of the switching rotation operation until the detectable portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, the switching rotation operation may be performed for a drive period that is preset as a drive period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, or the drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to a united rotation operation, and the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that it can be determined that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative members 870, 880 are in a combined state.

On the other hand, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change even though the drive motor 861 has been driven for a time sufficient to transition from a switching rotation operation to a unitary rotation operation and for the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that a malfunction has occurred in the third operating unit 800 based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, a switching rotation operation is performed from any rotational position of the third operating unit 800, and while the united state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, driving continues until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

As described above, when the third operating unit 800 is in a united assembly state, the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the united assembly state, it is easy to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, when controlling to return from the reverse performance shown in FIG. 68 to the normal performance, the detectable portion 844 is already positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so the period until the output of the detection sensor 813 changes after the switch rotation operation is completed can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period is sufficient for the detectable portion 844, which is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, to retreat from the detection groove, so the length required for control to return from the reverse performance to the normal performance can be minimized.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotational arrangement of the third operating unit 800, which initiates the switching rotation action to switch from a normal performance to a reverse performance, is improved, and while the return action may normally be prolonged, the switching rotation action from a reverse performance as a return action to a normal performance is shortened.

In other words, by performing part of the return operation to correct the difference in the rotational position of the third operating unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detected part 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) in a united state in which the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational position is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of the third operating unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the time required for the remaining return operation, which is the switching rotation operation.

A comprehensive explanation will be given of the configurations that are commonly adopted by multiple operating units 600, 700, and 800, including the reasons for the differences in how they are adopted.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, we will review the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly used in each of the operating units 600, 700, and 800, and explain the reasons for the differences in their adoption (number of sensors, shape of the detected piece, etc.).

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operating unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the position of the first operating unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The first operating unit 600 is equipped with only one detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 41). The multiple displacement members, namely the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, are configured so that the position and position of the other displacement members are determined when the position of the rotating member 620 is determined, so that the position and position of the multiple displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of the single detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection devices.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operating unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second operating unit 700, and the detection target portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which respectively correspond to the performance standby state, intermediate performance state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the standby state is required to determine whether the device has returned to its initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the extension state is required to determine whether the device has reached the end position of the upward displacement, as well as to determine whether the device has performed a reversal operation of the lift-down reversal device 770 and whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate state is required to determine whether the device has reached the up or down position in the intermediate state, as well as to determine whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The reversal operation and the influence of unintended loads will be explained in order below.

First, the inversion operation will be described. The second operation unit 700 is configured to enable not only the up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 that occurs in conjunction with the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, but also the inversion operation of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since the reversal operation may cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the performance operation may not be performed properly.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 that corresponds to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction by performing an inversion operation of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in the extended state, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (to the extended state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

In this embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of the operation), so that the positional deviation during the reversing operation can be easily corrected by simply rotating the gear cam member 734 towards the end of the operation.

Next, the effect of unintended load will be described. In the second operating unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 740 that occurs in conjunction with the pivoting arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotational movement of the gear cam member 734, there is also a vertical displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 based on the lifting plate member 740 to displace to a forward/backward position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting plate member 740 (see Figures 52 to 54).

As a result, as the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by the load applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the up-down positions of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 and the lifting plate member 740 fluctuate, which may cause the attitude of the gear cam member 734 to change. Examples of loads applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine include impact loads when a player hits the gaming machine, and loads when opening and closing the front frame 14.

Since the load in the front-to-rear width direction may cause the lifting/reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the lifting/reversing performance device 770 may not be able to be maintained in the correct position.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-to-rear width direction is applied to the gaming machine in the intermediate state, and the vertical positions of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 and the lifting/reversing plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the load, so that it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the posture of the gear cam member 734 (to the intermediate state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

When the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is positioned on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, and it is determined that the detected portion 735 has come off the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load, in this embodiment, although it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 has come off, the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven in a direction that first displaces the performance device 780 downward. This makes it possible to prevent a collision between the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800.

In this embodiment, if this drive causes the detectable part 735 to again enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable part 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of upward displacement of the performance device 780, and if the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

Furthermore, if this drive causes the detectable portion 735 to enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable portion 735 due to the unintended load has occurred on the side that displaces the performance device 780 downward. If the drive is continued so as to displace it upward again and the drive is stopped when the detectable portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

The detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the gear cam member 734.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the second operating unit 700, and the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56), which correspond to the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781, respectively.

The second operating unit 700 is in a combined state in which the pair of covering members 787 arranged on the left and right sides are close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) or in an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)).

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the upright vertical arrangement state of the upright inverted member 781) is employed, the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state can be determined, and it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state cannot be determined, even if the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state changes due to an unintended load or poor control, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the combined state will continue to be released, which is not desirable from the perspective of presentation.

In contrast to this, according to this embodiment, a detection sensor 778d is provided that corresponds to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781. Therefore, regardless of whether the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state is present, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the combined state has occurred, and the driving motor 782 is driven and controlled to return the covering member 787 to the combined state based on the determination result. This can improve the presentation effect of the second operating unit 700.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. This improves the resolution for detecting the position of the upside-down member 781.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operating unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operating unit 800, and the detection groove allows the detected part 844 to enter (see FIG. 60). The third operating unit 800 has one detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detection device is used (shared) to determine the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 when the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 has stopped (switching rotation operation).

The detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840.

The detection sensor 813 is arranged for the purpose of detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840, and there is only one of them, so it is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs that releases the combined state when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a position in which the detection target portion 844 is not positioned on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 cannot determine this.

For this reason, rather than determining whether there has been a deviation from the combined state and then controlling the return to the combined state, it is considered preferable to control the drive motor 861 to rotate for a fixed time (e.g., a short time) at fixed time intervals in a direction that returns the decorative members 870, 880 to the combined state (a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state (see Figure 66 (a)), and a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the united state (see Figure 103 (b))).

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals, so that it is possible to prevent the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 from being maintained in a released state for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the function of magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As mentioned above, in the second operating unit 700, magnet Mg functions to maintain the position of covering member 787, and in the third operating unit 800, magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of decorative members 870 and 880. Similar technologies are used, but the design concepts for the direction of the load generated by magnets Mg and Mg2 are different, which will be explained here.

The second operating unit 700 is designed so that the direction of the magnetic force generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides is aligned in the front-to-back direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to a plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a that serves as the axis of rotation of the rotating operation of the covering member 787.

In this case, compared to when the magnetic force of the magnets Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rods 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 moving toward and away from each other can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the operating resistance of the covering members 787 when they start to operate.

On the other hand, the third operating unit 800 is designed so that the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 arranged in the decorative member 880 is arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the five metal rods 832, which serve as the rotation axis of the rotational movement of the decorative member 880, are arranged (a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, the degree to which the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 applies a load in the direction of rotation to the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced, making it easier to avoid malfunctions that would otherwise occur when the decorative members 870, 880 wobble in the direction of rotation due to magnetic force.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, we will explain the presentation that allows the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the operating units 600, 700, and 800 to be viewed as a single unit.

In the first operating unit 600, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it appears to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the protruding decorative portion 652b near the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the protruding decorative portion 652b easier to see as a unified display performance.

In the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is positioned at the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (see Figures 26 and 52). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 easier to view as a unified display performance.

In the third operating unit 800, each first covered portion 875 that is visible to the player in the individual combined state is decorated differently, and in the extended state, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is positioned to surround it when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covered portion 875 is positioned in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to view the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display performance.

In addition, if the third operating unit 800 is driven and controlled to rotate as a unit, it becomes possible to execute a roulette-like operation in which each first covered portion 875 rotates. Even in this case, for example, by moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covered portion 875 in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display effect.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. In the first embodiment, the internal shapes of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are fixed, but the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment is equipped with a first flow path configuration part 2334 whose internal shape is variable. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

When describing the first flow path component 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path component 334 in the first embodiment, the configuration disposed on the right side is illustrated and described, but the configuration disposed on the left side can also be the first flow path component 2334. In addition, the configurations may be different between the left and right sides, such that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path component 2334 and the other is the first flow path component 334.

Figure 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 drilled in the front-rear direction at the bottom of the curved protrusion 334b, a slide member 2420 guided along the through hole 2410 so as to be able to slide back and forth, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to be able to generate a driving force for sliding the slide member 2420.

In FIG. 108, the front position FP of the slide member 2420 when the solenoid 2430 is in a non-energized state is shown by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 causes the slide member 2420 to slide to the rear position RP.

In this embodiment, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the balls can roll, and in the rear arrangement RP, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured not to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, in the front position FP of the slide member 2420, the ball abuts against the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear position RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not abut.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the effect on the flow of the ball can be kept small.

The downward flow direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is diagonally downward toward the front, and the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-to-back direction, so the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is along the downward flow direction of the ball. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 affects the strength of the ball's rotation.

The ball rolls on bottom surface 2334c facing forward, so that it rotates in a forward rolling direction in the direction of travel (forward). When solenoid 2430 is de-energized (see FIG. 108), and current is applied to solenoid 2430, causing slide member 2420 to slide from front arrangement FP to rear arrangement RP, a rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the upper surface of slide member 2420. This accelerates the forward rolling rotation of the ball, increasing the degree of rotation of the ball and increasing the rolling speed of the ball.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from an energized state to a non-energized state (see FIG. 108), causing the slide member 2420 to slide from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, a forward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334b via the upper side surface of the slide member 2420. As a result, the forward rotation of the ball is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be decelerated.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, a load is generated in a direction that pushes the ball upward. Therefore, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the flow speed of the ball can be decelerated.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by executing control to cause a sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, it is possible to change the flow speed of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b until it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74).

In this embodiment, the slide member 2420 is positioned behind the second flow path component 335, making it difficult for the player to understand the state in which the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420.

In other words, the ball comes into contact with the slide member 2420 before it is introduced into the second flow path component 335, which is easily visible to the player and likely to attract attention, making it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball is being given rotation or displaced vertically. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player as he or she watches the ball flow down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced while a ball is positioned above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, whereas a ball passing above the bottom surface 2334c before or after the displacement of the slide member 2420 (when stopped) is not subjected to a contact load with the slide member 2420.

Therefore, the flow pattern (rotation, change in rotation, flow speed, change in flow speed, etc.) can be made different between the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is in operation and the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the first embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 3300 of the third embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 is moved to the rear of the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

As an example of a change in the position of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, the explanation will be given to the right of the center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be designed as desired. For example, on the left side, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 can be arranged side by side as in the first embodiment, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are different on the left and right of the sorting device 3300, or on the left side, they can be arranged side by side, as described in detail below, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are symmetrical on the left and right of the sorting device 3300.

Figures 109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 109(a) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, and Figure 109(b) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the third flow path component 336 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the middle member 3330 of the distribution device 3300 has a rear frame portion 3332 that defines the ball guide path to the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, and is configured in a shape that is open so that balls can be received from the left side.

The sliding displacement member 3370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the sliding displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is set as a position where the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 and the rear inner surface of the opening 3332g formed in the rear frame portion 3332 as the entrance of the path that guides the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11 are aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this manner, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12; on the other hand, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In other words, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the special chance detection sensor SE11 are both configured as flow paths that flow to the right after passing through the third flow path configuration section 336. The only difference is the forward and backward position where the ball flows to the right.

As a result, it is difficult for a player looking at the third flow path configuration portion 336 from the front to determine whether the ball has flowed to the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side in a rod shape, an upper front protrusion portion 3376b formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376, and an upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376.

The upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed in a pair on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. It penetrates the front side of the discharge hole 337 and is configured so that it can be stored on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path component 336.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is positioned on the underside of the third flow path component 336 and does not come into contact with the ball, and when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed across the front-to-rear gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this manner, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the lower left and right parts of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the ball can be bridged to the sliding displacement member 3370.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball from flowing down toward the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to prevent the ball from being erroneously guided down.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is positioned on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, which is formed flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, thereby making it possible to avoid a frontal collision between the ball and the ball guide portion 371b in the front-to-rear direction. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b, causing the ball to flow backward forward, or a situation in which the ball gets caught between the front surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front surface of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction.

The upper front protrusion 3376b is a shaped portion that is similar to the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper protrusion 376 in the same relative position as the relative position at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

The upper lateral protrusion 3376c is a shaped portion that is similar to the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper front protrusion 3376b in the same relative position as the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

As a result, the action of the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper side protrusion 3376c on the ball they come into contact with occurs as an action on the ball flowing down near the upper protrusion 376, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

In other words, unlike when the front-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-right inner protrusion 318 (see FIG. 18) are fixed in position, when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the protrusions 3376b and 3376c can eliminate the effect of urging a ball that has reached the forward position of the upper protrusion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the position of the normal detection sensor SE12 is moved to the rear of the special probability detection sensor SE11, so that the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 110(a) and 110(b) are schematic top views of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370, which show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path component 336 in the fourth embodiment.

Figure 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and Figure 111(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). In Figure 111(b), the upper abutment portion 4373 is omitted for ease of understanding.

The sliding displacement member 4370 is configured to block either the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass through. It is equipped with a front sliding member 4371 that slides left and right above the special rate detection sensor SE11, and a rear sliding member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when changing from the front open state shown in FIG. 110(a) and FIG. 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIG. 110(b) and FIG. 111(b), the front slide member 4371 slides to the left and the rear slide member 4375 slides to the right.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 that is arranged to cover the upper part of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper abutment part 4373 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper abutment part 4373 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed the lower bottom surface 336a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4373 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward (to the lower right).

Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and is configured to change state so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

The rear slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 that is arranged so as to cover the upper part of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper abutment part 4377 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the front-rear long protrusion part 317 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper abutment part 4377 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed from a shape that is the opposite of the upper surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper surface 4376a allows the ball placed on the upper surface 4376a to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4377 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward.

Therefore, the rear slide member 4375 is configured so that when the front open state and the rear open state change, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and changes state to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible that a ball that has passed backwards above the probability change detection sensor SE11 may return above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, thereby improving attention to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

As an example of how the ball returns to above the probability change detection sensor SE11, a solenoid may be driven to change state from the rear open state to the front open state when the ball passes backwards over the upper surface 4372a. In this case, the ball will run onto the upper surface 4376a before passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, and will flow backward along the slope of the upper surface 4376a, returning to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, when the timing of the ball passing through the third flow path component 336 coincides with the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven, the ball is configured to return to the side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, compared to gaming machines configured so that a ball that passes above the probability change detection sensor SE11 downstream does not pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11, attention to the ball after passing through the third flow path component 336 and the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven can be improved.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the first embodiment, the flow path of the balls is common up to the third flow path component 336, and the branch point BP1 is located behind the third flow path component 336. However, in the sorting device 5300 of the fifth embodiment, a slide displacement member 5370 is disposed upstream of the third flow path component 336, and the flow path of the balls changes upstream of the third flow path component 336. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 112(a) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the right side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the special detection sensor SE11, while Figure 112(b) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the left side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in Figures 112(a) and 112(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the first flow path component 334 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The sliding displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and includes a thin plate portion 5371 that forms the rolling surface of the ball, and an upper protruding portion 5376 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed thin enough that the ball that has passed through the first flow path component 334 can ride up on it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protrusion portion 5376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can be smoothly guided backward.

In this embodiment, as with the sorting device 5300, the path along which the balls flow is long from front to back, and a configuration is adopted in which the visibility of balls flowing down the front side is higher than that of balls flowing down the rear side, while the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the front side where the visibility of the balls is higher, making it easier for the player to distinguish the manner in which the balls flow down (path along which the balls flow down)

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is positioned at the right side, the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure allows balls to enter. On the other hand, balls flowing downstream on the upstream side of the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flow toward the front side while flowing downstream through the first flow path configuration portion 334.

As a result, immediately after passing through the first flow path configuration portion 334, a velocity in the opposite direction, namely backward, is unlikely to occur, making it difficult for the ball to enter the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in this embodiment, a component for blocking the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11 is omitted, thereby reducing material costs.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the first embodiment, the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338, and the flow paths do not merge. However, in the sorting device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, a merged flow path 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the curved protrusion 334b on the left is connected to the third flow path forming portion 336 on the right. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from flow path components 334 to 336, similar to the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the left flow path of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends in a straight line to the right from a point on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b with a space for one ball, and this merging flow path 6341 is connected to the third flow path component 336 as the right flow path. Therefore, in this embodiment, the balls flowing down the right flow path and the balls flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, and the balls may collide with each other.

The merging flow path 6341 has a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. This allows a difference in height between the balls flowing from the merging flow path 6341 to the connection point JP1 and the balls flowing down the right flow path and into the third flow path component 336, thereby reducing the degree of backflow that occurs when the balls collide with each other.

The contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 can delay the flow of the balls compared to when the balls do not contact each other. This makes it possible to change the time it takes for a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 16) to reach the branch point BP1 depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

The operation timing of the sliding displacement member 370 is set to a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b, regardless of the ball's entry state, so by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1, it is possible to make the ball reach the branch point BP1 when the sliding displacement member 370 is in a different position.

The premise for balls to come into contact with each other is that the balls merge and that there are balls flowing down the merging flow path 6341. If the player wants to make contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter each of the pair of ball passing holes 163b on the left and right (see Figure 74). If the player wants to avoid contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (the right side).

According to this embodiment, adjusting the ball launch strength is related to whether or not the ball makes contact at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the time the ball reaches the branch point BP1, so it directly affects the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

In addition, according to this embodiment, contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a series of balls. In other words, two balls that come into contact at the connection point JP1 can be made to flow down to the branch point BP1 while being placed close to each other.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case was described where the flow path to the branch point BP1 was only the flow path formed by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, but the sorting device 7300 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that the balls can flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 114 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and Figure 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball passing hole 7163b formed in an opening at approximately the center in the left-right direction in addition to the ball passing hole 163b as a path through which balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a can pass.

The ball passage hole 7163b is formed as a ball passage opening for the detection sensor SE71, which has the same function as the detection sensor SE1, which is used to detect balls entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing to change the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state when a specified number of balls have entered.

A cylindrical flow path 7164 is disposed downstream of the ball passing hole 7163b, and extends with a rectangular cylindrical cross section in a direction that slopes downward toward the rear. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow balls to flow down inside, and its end portion extends to the upper front side of the branch point BP1. In other words, the ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b is configured to flow down inside the cylindrical flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the ball to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the ball to pass through the flow path components 334-336, and is set to be equal to the length of time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path component 334.

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled with the above-mentioned operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b and passes through the flow path configuration parts 334-336 can only reach the branch point BP1 after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to its front position, whereas a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b and flows down the cylindrical flow path 7164 may reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In particular, a ball that passes through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes to the open state is likely to reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In other words, even if the driving control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or not depending on whether the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. This can improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, the cylindrical flow path 7164 is positioned to prevent the cylindrical flow path 7164 from reducing the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sliding displacement member 370, and the flow path components 334-336 when viewed from a general viewing direction during play.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the visibility of the branch point BP1 is maintained high, while the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, which increases the variety of the length of time it takes for the ball to reach the branch point BP1, thereby improving the player's attention to the specific winning port 65a.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 of the first operating unit 600 connects the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one location, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the axis O1. In the first operating unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the long guide hole 8616 is connected at multiple locations (two locations), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the displacement direction O1. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 116, the guide elongated hole 8616 is bent twice to the left and right below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide slot 8616 includes a straight portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape), and a second curved portion 8616c connected to the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape) whose center of curvature radius is opposite to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the straight portion 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In addition, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b, i.e., at the connection between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In this way, since it is possible to configure multiple intermediate positions at which it is easy to stop the axis O1, it is possible to increase the variety (variations) of stopping postures of the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figure 43) that is stopped midway by stopping the axis O1 midway.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operating unit 600 is configured with a single path. However, in the first operating unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 has a first path configured with a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 117 is a front schematic diagram showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Figure 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 has a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b like the guide elongated hole 616 in the first embodiment, and also has an angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends obliquely to the right from the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and a connection portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a midpoint of the curved portion 616b.

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while maintaining the angle θ when the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction from a state in which the axis O1 is disposed at the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see Figures 43 and 44).

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced through the angle maintaining portion 9616c, so the rotational orientation of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is maintained in such a manner that the third performance surface 661c faces forward (see Figure 43).

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the rotational mode of the box-shaped member 661, which rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, is such that the third performance surface 661c can maintain a position facing forward over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 is displaced at the connecting portion 9616d, the change in angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is permitted, so the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

On the other hand, even if the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the curved portion 616b is different from the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the connecting portion 9616d. Therefore, by making the path along which the axis O1 is displaced different between the left and right, it is possible to make the intermediate posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is linked to the rotation of the rotating member 620 different.

In addition, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 moves is to the left or right, there is only one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the upper end of the range of possible displacement, and one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the lower end, so the position of the box-shaped member 661 can be maintained when the axis O1 is located at the upper or lower end of the range of possible displacement (see Figures 40 and 45).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned between the ends (midway position) of the displaceable range, it is possible to generate multiple types of arrangements of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figures 43 and 44) related to the arrangement of the axis O1, and multiple types of displacement speeds of the supported member 640 and rotation speeds of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1.

The guide slot 9616 is merely configured with multiple paths and does not have a mechanism for limiting the path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions caused by a malfunction of the path limiting mechanism and to reduce product costs by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be explained below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced in the tilting direction will be explained.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (straight line portion 616a and curved line portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is controlled so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop midway.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction), and displaces to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (angle maintaining portion 9616c and connecting portion 9616d), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is driven and controlled to stop or decelerate the rotating member 620 when the axis O1 is positioned at the connecting point of the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and then the drive motor 631 is driven and controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction) is reduced, so the choice of whether the axis O1 will displace along the left path or the right path is made based on the side with less displacement resistance.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, so there is no need to transmit the driving force to the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620, or to a member downstream of the intermediate gear 644 in the transmission of the driving force. In other words, because there is less displacement resistance, the axis O1 can enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

In this way, in this embodiment, in drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the drive motor 631 can be controlled to stop midway or not, allowing the path along which the axis O1 is displaced to be selected.

When the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in the diagonal upper right direction, so that the axis O1 is unlikely to be displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d, and the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at a midpoint of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is formed as a surface that slopes upward and to the left and is located to the upper right of the axis O1, which is located at the bottom end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from displacing upward (bouncing back) along a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the balls are first caused to flow toward the front by the sorting device 300, and then flow backwards, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downward by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that decelerates the balls, without forming a portion that causes the balls to flow toward the front.

In the above first embodiment, the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is described as being curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape can be used as long as it can block the flow of balls by contact. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed with many small protrusions protruding from a flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the above first embodiment, a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a flows down the sorting device 300 primarily through the flow path components 334 to 336 in order, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, an opening penetrating downwards may be formed in the center of the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, allowing the ball to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one at a time, they do not pass through the opening, but when multiple balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may be configured to pass through the opening. In this case, the time it takes for the balls to reach the sliding displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a pass through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. In other words, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left and right directions, or the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front and back directions (flowing down toward the front side).

In the first embodiment, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path component 334-336 were described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the flow path direction and inclination may be designed taking into account the "laying down" that is performed on a daily basis.

"Laying down" refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 in a tilted position in the front-to-rear direction, rather than in a vertical position. Normally, pachinko machines are installed in a position (laying down) tilted backwards by about 1 degree (four-five rin). Compared to the explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (not laying down) above, when considering an installation angle of about 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 336, which have a tilt in the front-to-rear direction, changes.

In other words, as described above, the sorting device 300 alone is designed so that the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front, and the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear, but when the installation angle is considered, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 form flow paths that are inclined downward by 6 degrees. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, so it is less affected by the installation angle and can be considered to be inclined at about 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the balls flowing down through the sorting device 300 is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. This allows the speed at which the balls flow down in the left and right directions to be slowed down, making it easier for the player to see the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. Also, since the first flow path component 334 remains shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than they pass through the third flow path component 336.

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the laying of the pachinko machine 10 because it has flow paths in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the laying angle (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the balls in the flow path components 334, 336 will change (reverse) depending on the quality of the laying (angle setting), so the inclination angle needs to be set to an angle larger than the laying angle.

In addition, if the flow path inside the sorting device 300 is configured to allow the balls to flow in the forward and backward directions and is visible, it may be possible to determine the degree of tilt of the pachinko machine 10 from slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the path. If it is desired to allow the degree of tilt to be determined, the sorting device 300 should be configured so that the flow path is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the degree of "rest" from being understood from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334-336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion surface 340 is arranged to reduce visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336 is made poor except at the player's normal line of sight (a range of 0 degrees to approximately 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "rest" of the pachinko machine 10 being understood by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the relationship of the inclinations may be reversed, or the inclinations may be the same.

In addition, each of the flow path configuration sections 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path that is bent to form a spiral flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape, or may have a flow path that is bent in a staircase shape.

In addition, the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of each flow path configuration section 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow paths may be bent at acute angles or obtuse angles at the connection points. Also, a crane may be used as each of the flow path configuration sections 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the third flow path component 336 is designed so that the time required for a ball to pass through it is 0.3 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the third flow path component 336 may be designed so that the time required for the ball to pass through it is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). This allows the balls flowing upstream down the third flow path component 336 to function as a screen for the balls flowing downstream down the third flow path component 336, even if the balls enter the sorting device 300 while maintaining the launch interval (0.6 seconds).

In the first embodiment, the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path components 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to provide long, alternating ridges that protrude from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction that intersects with the flow direction of the game ball, and to configure the ball to decelerate by colliding with these ridges. This makes it possible to ensure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly arranged over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335, and forming ridges only on the third flow path component 336, the balls can be made to quickly reach the third flow path component 336 while flowing slowly down the third flow path component 336.

The protrusions may be provided in a direction such that they protrude alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the path along the ball's flow path, or they may be provided in a direction that protrudes upward from the bottom at a specified interval.

When protruding from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the placement so that this load does not erroneously guide the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12. For example, at the position closest to the sliding displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner portions, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 but toward the partition plate portion 338, making it easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

When protruding from below to above, the protrusion itself may function as a screen for the sliding displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position taking into account the player's line of sight.

The protrusions may be formed so that they can move in and out. In this case, they may be able to block the flow of the ball when in the protruding state, and resume the flow of the ball when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the slide displacement member 370 is covered by the balls flowing down the front side is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be covered by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

In addition, the case where the ball provides a screen is not limited to the case where the ball is placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is placed on the back side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the screen function can be achieved by placing the ball between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the balls that reach the slide displacement member 370 are concealed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be positioned behind the play area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be concealed, or the other general winning openings 63 may be concealed.

In the above first embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are described as being formed from linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as meandering flow paths, or flow paths that branch into multiple paths, or they may be configured to have different flow path widths, with balls more likely to remain in the areas where the flow path width is large.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a blindfolding effect is created by the balls heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect at the front side), and the slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged on the discharge path.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which balls that enter the specific winning port 65a flow exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (the near side), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes balls may be disposed downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism may select balls that flow to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device to perform a certain operation from the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be controlled to operate in a certain pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine.

When controlling the drive, for example, the balls may be controlled to flow to the second flow path component 335 side when the type of winning ball changes. For example, when a ball enters a specific winning port 65a and the number of balls that enter exceeds the count number (10 balls/round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335 side. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing on the second flow path configuration section 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or it may be configured to perform a different action depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning openings 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Furthermore, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, if it takes a long time for the balls to flow down from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370, the long ball discharge time may result in the game being drawn out. For this reason, for example, the above-mentioned distribution mechanism may be used to cause the first certain balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to flow down the second flow path configuration part 335, and subsequent balls may be discharged without passing through the second flow path configuration part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the count number of balls to finish flowing down the flow path configuration parts 334-336, and therefore the length between rounds can be set to be short.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is disposed below the third pattern display device 81, and the balls are directed toward the front near the bottom end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the specific winning port 65a may be disposed above the bottom edge of the third pattern display device 81, and the flow path components 334-336 of the distribution device 300 may be disposed adjacent to the third pattern display device 81 or toward the front of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be directed toward the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, by associating the amount of profit the player can obtain from the flow of the balls down the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the LCD display, the player can easily know whether the profit he or she has obtained is large or small by checking the display.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 are seen in a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured in an arrangement relationship such that they are seen overlapping, without being shifted up or down in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300, but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the above first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as switching the slide displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that reaches the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds have passed can be made to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the forward flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed will enter the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

If the trailing ball is positioned to blind the forward flow ball, the player will not be able to see when the forward flow ball's flow changes (downward) toward the special chance detection sensor SE11, because the trailing ball will hide it. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player is likely to believe that the ball has not entered the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, which improves the presentation effect of the display in gaming machines that maintain the player's sense of anticipation by displaying the time-saving state and the probability variation state in the same way.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow to the normal detection sensor SE12 side due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path upstream of the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball before being guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, by arranging a crane or widening the path width to increase the freedom of the ball's flow direction), and it can be configured so that the ball can be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone depending on the difference in the speed and rotation of the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 and each of the protruding portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may protrude from the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as operation pattern Y, which takes into account the possibility of being hidden by the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light-emitting means 351 to emit light when it is hidden by the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width length of the guide slot 616 to form an external phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is configured to have a shape that is bent at an intermediate position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slot may be configured to have a shape that is bent multiple times. In this case, multiple positions can be formed where the resistance to the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

The shape of the guide slot 616 may also be designed for the purpose of varying the magnitude of the change in angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 may be formed through which the axis O1 can move, and the guide slot 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which the first performance surface 661a faces diagonally forward and left when the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and right when positioned to the left of the third pattern display device 81, or the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and upward (downward) when positioned below (upper) the third pattern display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged at the base end of the displacement, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a linearly displaceable member may be arranged at the base end of the displacement. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 instead of a linearly displaceable member functions favorably in ensuring the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angles that affect the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are limited to angles above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). In contrast, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only angles above the horizontal but also angles below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Regardless of this advantageous effect, a linearly sliding member may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and each side may be configured to be controlled to stop in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at a right angle, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-to-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to make it easier to maintain the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an adhesive force between itself and a magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, so that this adhesive force is easily generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

In addition, for example, the inclined portions 751, 762 may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape, rather than being formed linearly. In addition, when using the coil spring CS2, the spring is not limited to a spring that generates a biasing force only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and may be configured to generate a biasing force in response to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the above first embodiment, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed to maintain the position of the shaft rotating member 785 until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support tube that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may protrude forward by downward displacement. In this case, it may go beyond the upper edge of the center frame 86 from below to the front, or it may protrude forward from above the play area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction, so that the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 are not visible together, thereby reducing the distinguishing ability, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may rotate facing outward to the left and right, rather than facing the front side. Also, even if they rotate in the same direction, they may be configured to rotate at different rotation angles.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed with the detectable portion 844 not arranged on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are configured to differ in places, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be disposed on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing a torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. Note that in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to be generated at all times regardless of switching of the operating mode, so a torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operating mode is switched to the integral rotation operation, making it easier to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the first embodiment described above, the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inward, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path component 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left and right direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward to the left and right inward. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path component 335 than the latter.

In addition, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path component 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) in the front-to-rear direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path component 336 than the latter.

In addition, although the third flow path component 336 has been described as having a rolling surface (bottom surface) that slopes downward inward in the left-right direction, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path component 336 may be configured to be non-sloping in the left-right direction (parallel to the horizontal plane). In this case, the degree to which the balls are biased toward the partition plate portion 338 decreases, so the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collisions and friction with the balls can be kept low.

In the first embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point (by lowering the arrangement position). In this case, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, the ball passing through the branching point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d, so that the light can be configured to be reflected to the back side, and a state in which the light does not reach the light diffusion surface 333b (dark state) can be achieved.

In other words, the outer light-emitting means 351d remains lit, and the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point can be correlated with the brightness of the light diffusion surface 333b (and the light diffusion surfaces 314c and 340 illuminated by the light diffused from the light diffusion surface 333b). Since each of the light diffusion surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) at the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point.

In the above first embodiment, the timing for controlling the illumination of the light emitting means 351 was described as during a jackpot game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination may be controlled due to the detection of a win in the winning slots 63, 64, 140, etc., or due to an input operation of the frame button 22, or due to the occurrence of a win exceeding a prescribed number (the number of winning balls that determines the end of a round of play in a jackpot game, the maximum number of pending changes based on balls entering the winning slots 64, 140).

In the above first embodiment, if the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, and therefore, by checking the operation of the sliding displacement member 370, the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined during the manufacturing stage. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the sliding displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 becomes misaligned due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, even if this does not appear during the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the misalignment can be determined by the malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the direction of the ball flow at the branch point BP1 is a linear displacement in the forward and backward directions, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rotational movement (e.g., a roulette type), or a shape that makes the ball flow irregularly (e.g., a funnel-shaped crane) may be provided so that the ball can flow in multiple directions.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is used as a device for switching whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning port (winning port 64, 140), or as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning port 65a, or as a device for guiding the ball to other winning ports or winning areas.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is placed in the lower corner of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 300 may be placed in the upper corner of the play area (e.g., above the center frame 86), or in the left or right corner (outside the left or right edges of the center frame 86), or in the center of the play area. For example, when placed in the upper corner of the play area, the line of sight of the player looking at the sorting device 300 is inclined diagonally upward from the horizontal plane, so the downstream balls can be configured to hide the upstream balls in the flow path portion that slopes downward toward the front side.

In addition, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the above first embodiment, the shape of the window portion 162d is described as being designed based on the shape of the flow path configuration portions 335, 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be such that (only) the slide displacement member 370 is visible from the player's line of sight (viewed diagonally downward), or the shape may be such that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Also, the shape may be such that the slide displacement member 370 is visible from either the front or rear position and not visible from the other.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path components 334 to 336 are configured as a pair on the left and right sides so that they do not merge, which reduces the number of balls that enter one flow path (disperses the balls), making it easier to avoid ball clogging, while allowing the sliding displacement member 370 to switch the paths of any of the balls that have passed through each flow path.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d may be such that only one of the pair of left and right components of the slide displacement member 370 (e.g., ball guide portion 371b, upper protrusion portion 376) is visible and the other is not. In this case, the player can predict the path of the ball on the side that is not visible, which increases the player's interest.

In the above first embodiment, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can land on the ball guiding portion 371b is set to the backward direction (the forward direction of the ball's travel direction flowing down the third flow path component 336), and the sliding suppresses the ball's forward rotation, thereby suppressing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from a state in which the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be a forward direction (the opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336).

That is, the ball guide portion 371b is displaced forward, and the ball guide portion 371b enters the lower side of the third flow path component 336, thereby enabling the probability change detection sensor SE11 to be opened. The upper protrusion portion 376 is constructed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is positioned so that it protrudes toward the branch point BP1 side when the ball can land on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where the ball cannot land on it, the upper protrusion portion 376 displaces in the opposite direction at the same time as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, ensuring a passage for the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this case, the ball's forward rotation can be accelerated by the sliding of the ball guide portion 371b against the ball as it slides, increasing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball has fallen instantly (smoothly).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotating member 620 is controlled in such a way that the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off when the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, taking into consideration the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 may be reduced and the drive motor 631 may be rotated weakly for a short period of time before being stopped. This allows the rotating member 620 to reliably reach the displacement end position (the position for the performance standby state).

In the above first embodiment, the grooves of the front-upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operating unit 700 are described as being made up of straight inclined grooves, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the grooves have a partial curve, such as curving forward at the lower end, the displacement of the performance device 780 can be a displacement mode that combines up-down sliding displacement, forward-backward sliding displacement, and forward-backward posture displacement.

The grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 may have various shapes. For example, they may be V-shaped (or inverted V-shaped) when viewed from the left and right, or may be curved in an S-shape.

In the above first embodiment, the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is described as being performed by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation using magnetic force, thereby displacing the members to avoid collision between each other (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member 787), but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used that avoids collision between the components by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785.

In the above first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is described as being in an extended state at the upper end position, with the tip of the pivot arm member 720 positioned at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the performance device 780, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by positioning the tip of the pivot arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the performance device 780, a long support position distance can be ensured between the metal bar 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the pivot arm member 720 supporting the right side of the lifting plate member 740. This allows the lifting plate member 740 to be stably supported.

In the above third operating unit 800, the bulge 824a is configured as a part that remains unchanged in shape and is visible to the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870, 880 are in an individual combined state or a combined state, and in both the individual combined state and the combined state, the bulge 824a is visible to the player as a part (central part). This explains the case where the bulge 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are designed to have shapes that minimize discomfort with each other, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be disposed in a positional relationship in which the display unit is disposed in front of the bulge portion 824a. In this case, unlike when the visibility of the bulge portion 824a is changed by changing the irradiation mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light-emitting portion 823a, the object visible in the bulge portion 824a can be changed by switching the display mode of the display unit, thereby improving the freedom of presentation.

Also, for example, the shape of the covering portion 875, 885 of either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 may be redesigned to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state, and the extended portion may be configured to cover the bulge portion 824a. In this case, in either the individual combined state or the combined state, the bulge portion 824a can be hidden so that it is not visible to the player, thereby reducing the degree of restriction on the design freedom of the bulge portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885.

In the first embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is described as having multiple decorative members 870, 880 that are attracted to each other by magnetic force, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the combined state may be maintained by a load caused by a concave-convex engagement, or the combined state may be maintained by the biasing force of a spring member.

In the above first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operating unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting an operating mode that creates momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or greater than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an example of an operation mode that creates momentum, rotation control in the reverse direction may be used as a preparatory operation (preparatory movement). In this case, a reaction force can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880, and a load can be generated in a direction that throws the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the position in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the magnetic attraction.

In the first embodiment, as a measure to suppress wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, a case was described in which the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to cause radial displacement before the reversing operation, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is configured to be arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be written on the plane on which the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, even if the reversing operation occurs before the radial displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state, the magnetic force generated between the multiple (five) decorative members 870, 880 occurs on the same plane, so that wobbling generated in the third operating unit 800 during the switching rotation operation can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is configured in such a way that the decorative members 870, 880 are rotated 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be combined again with a 120-degree rotation operation. In this case, it is possible to perform an action presentation in which the side visible when viewed from the front of the decorative members 870, 880 is the same before and after the switching rotation operation, but the angle at which the covering portions 875, 885 are visible is different (for example, 60 degrees to the right before the operation and 60 degrees to the left after the operation).

In addition, the structure of the multiple intermediate arm members 850 may be configured so that, for example, the lengths are not common, or the formation range or shape of the bevel tooth portion 854c is not common, so that decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 180-degree inversion operation and decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 120-degree inversion operation coexist in the switching rotation operation. For example, of the five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 120 degrees in the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decorative members 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 180 degrees in the switching rotation operation.

The angle of the reversal operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It can be 180 degrees or 120 degrees as mentioned above, or it can be set to 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle between 0 degrees and 360 degrees.

In the first embodiment, the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a pair, one on the left and one on the right, in asymmetric positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, they may be arranged in symmetric positions, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left, right or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or they may be arranged on opposing sides (directly opposite sides) across the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which multiple (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured with a common shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shapes of the supported holes 854a and guide holes 854b in which the linear motion members 833 that slide along the metal rod 832 are disposed may be made different, so that the start timing of the sliding displacement along the metal rod 832 differs between the linear motion members 833.

For example, by mixing an intermediate arm member 850 in which the design has been modified to form the supported hole 854a as a long hole or a hole with a large diameter, and the shape of the guide hole 854b has been correspondingly modified, it is possible to provide a difference in the timing at which the linear member 833 starts to move during the switching rotation operation.

This allows the decorative members 870, 880, which are fastened to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear member 833, to have a difference in the timing of their radial outward displacement from the combined state, so that the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load required to remove the suction can be reduced, so the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the positioning of the third operating unit 800 can be stabilized.

It is not necessary that the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 occurs every time. For example, the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction may be configured to occur when a switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward path), but not to occur when the combined state is reached by the switching rotation operation (return path).

For example, by configuring the design of the intermediate arm member 850 so that the displacement mode is different between the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates from the combined state (the state in which the rotating tip is located on the rotating shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position, and the state in which the intermediate arm part i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position to the combined state, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that generates a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 for each operation unit 600, 700, 800 is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, multiple detection sensors KS1 may be configured to be arranged at positions where they can detect the extension portion 634b, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two or less or four or more detection sensors 713 may be used. Note that an example of the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1 is a position where it can detect the extension portion 634b in the intermediate performance state or the extended state of the first operation unit 600.

Also, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be used, or instead of one detection sensor 813, multiple detection sensors 813 may be arranged in positions that can detect the detected portion 844. For example, five detection sensors 813 may be arranged at equal intervals on the circumference to determine the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800 in five different ways (five different patterns depending on the direction of rotation).

In the second embodiment above, a case was described in which the ball continues to roll regardless of the position of the slide member 2420, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front position FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be the same length as the diameter of the ball. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front position FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, which enhances the deceleration effect of the ball and makes it easier for the ball to become stuck.

In the second embodiment described above, there is no description of forming a protrusion on the inside of the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 may be configured to have a protrusion for decelerating the ball. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be set to a height that abuts either the ball resting on the slide member 2420 in the front position FP or the ball resting on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position BP, but does not abut the other. In this case, the deceleration effect of the protrusion can be generated when the slide member 2420 is in either the front position FP state or the rear position BP state.

In the above third embodiment, the sliding displacement member 3370 is described as being formed integrally with the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, which are separate members, may appear and disappear in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is positioned at the front position and the rear position, thereby forming a state in which the ball is abutted and a state in which it is not abutted.

The front-to-rear arrangement of the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited in any way, but placing the special chance detection sensor SE11 at the rear, as in this embodiment, makes it easier to avoid erroneous winning into the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the fourth embodiment, the sliding plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373, and the sliding plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, these may be configured as separate members and configured to operate synchronously (linked) by matching the timing. In addition, they may be configured to slide in the forward and backward directions.

In the above fourth embodiment, when the slide members 4371, 4375 slide and displace when the ball passes rearward over the upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front due to the inclination of the upper surface 4376a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, it can be configured so that only the ball that was on the slide plate 4372 when the state changed from the rear open state to the front open state is guided to the additional ball entry detection sensor. The greater the benefit that the player can obtain by the ball entering the additional ball entry detection sensor (for example, the acquisition of multiple jackpots or the acquisition of the right to move to a higher probability state, which is greater than the right obtained by the ball entering the probability change detection sensor SE11), the greater the attention paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In the sixth embodiment, the flow path from the raised floor 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a curved flow path with the connection point JP1 side facing backward near the raised floor 6342. This allows both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path configuration part 335 to have a backward velocity component, and it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring due to collision between them.

The connection point JP1 may be configured to be located at the center of the left and right of the sorting device 6300. The flow path components 334-336 may also be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and normal detection sensor SE12 may be configured to be located near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is easier for the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the front, improving the attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the above ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is configured as a branched elongated hole, and the way in which the axis O1 passes through the guide elongated hole 9616 is changed depending on how a load is applied to the axis O1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide elongated hole 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the straight portion 616a is always configured as a long hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d may be configured to alternate between being configured as a long hole and being blocked. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an incorrect path, and therefore to prevent the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, the long guide hole 9616 having a branch may be configured to include a switching valve that limits the displacement path of the axis O1 by blocking one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the long guide hole 9616 is fixed, the switching valve can limit the displacement path of the axis O1, preventing the axis O1 from displacing along an incorrect path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from displacing in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Hereinafter, a control example of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 118 to Fig. 87, a control example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first control example. Fig. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, Fig. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 120 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device 65 provided in the front view area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 118, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having numerous ball entry ports 63, 64, 640 through which numerous nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that launches balls into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. The details of the numerous ball entry ports provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 21). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 119) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 119) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operation handle 51 includes a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the period of pressing, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the rotation amount, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, so that the ball is shot into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off. In other words, in this control example, the control device has a launching means for launching the ball into the game area formed on the game board 13, and a launch strength varying means for varying the launch strength based on the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51. This allows the player to perform both the act of firing a ball using the firing means and the act of varying the firing strength of the ball, simply by operating the operating handle 51. Therefore, the act of firing a ball toward a specific play area among the play areas formed on the game board 13 can be performed with one hand, allowing the player to play the game without imposing an excessive burden on the player.

In this control example, the firing strength is varied based on the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a firing strength selection button may be provided that allows the player to select the firing strength, and the firing means may fire the ball at a firing strength that corresponds to the operation result (selection result) of the firing strength selection button.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a normal pattern starter gate (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 118) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 119.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 118) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 119) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. This first pattern display device 37 is arranged so that it is covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the play area) of the game board 13, which is made of transparent resin (e.g., ABS), and is configured so that the launched ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37.

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs and a seven-segment display as light-emitting means. The first pattern display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be operable when a ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is a display means for showing the results of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used, so the results of the two types of special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one type of special symbol (first special symbol), a display area corresponding to one type of special symbol can be provided on the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is unfavorable to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light-emitting colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the light-emitting colors. In this control example, various game states are indicated by a combination of light emission colors from the light-emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice. For example, various game states may be indicated by varying the length of the period when the light-emitting means is on and off (blinking pattern).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). Then, in the lottery for the special symbols, a judgment is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery). Here, based on the judgment that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by entering the specific winning port 65a. This jackpot game is played (if) after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed as a stop (confirmed display), and the jackpot game period is set to include an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set so that it is difficult for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special pattern indicating a jackpot win is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing when the specific winning port 65a opens during the jackpot game, making it possible to play the jackpot game smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, making it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being held immediately after the last round of play ends, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth switch between games.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, multiple types of jackpot games can be executed, and the number of rounds played during the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not a jackpot has been won by drawing special patterns, but also in the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning.

The length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win and the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content executed after the jackpot game ends is set to a different game content than the game content at the time of the jackpot win, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a performance can be configured to be executed that informs the player in advance of the game content executed after the jackpot game ends during that ending period. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, if a player wins a jackpot where the game content at the time of the jackpot win and the game content executed after the jackpot play end are the same, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be predefined based on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time the jackpot is won, and the ending period of each jackpot game can be predefined according to the predefined content.

A specific explanation will be given later, but the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states by combining two states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols) and two states with different probabilities of winning the lottery for normal symbols (high probability state for normal symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) which will be described later. Specifically, it is configured to be able to set a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are configured so that it is easier to win in a high probability state than in a low probability state, so of the multiple game states that can be set on the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the high probability state is the game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in other game states, and the high probability state and the time-saving state are the game states in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the normal symbol lottery than in other game states.

In addition, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a winning game (normal symbol winning game) is executed in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. Specifically, the electric role 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, and a normal symbol winning game is executed in which a state in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 is provided. Therefore, when the probability change state and the time-saving state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol, is set, it becomes a game state in which it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery than other game states. Furthermore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is configured so that a shorter period is more likely to be set as the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (dynamic display period) than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, when the probability change state and the time-saving state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol, is set, it becomes a game state in which it is easier to execute a new special symbol lottery because the special symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter period than other game states.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and a high probability state of a special pattern can be set after the jackpot game ends only if the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game. Then, depending on the type of jackpot won, a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (unfavorable jackpot game) can be executed. Hereinafter, an advantageous jackpot game, i.e., a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, will be referred to as a variable jackpot game, and a jackpot in which a variable jackpot game is executed will be referred to as a variable jackpot. Also, an unfavorable jackpot game, i.e., a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, will be referred to as a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which a normal jackpot game is executed will be referred to as a normal jackpot.

In this control example, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot, it is determined to be a miss and no special prize is awarded to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize game may be executed in which the player is given fewer special prizes than the jackpot described above (for example, a special prize to open the variable winning device 65 for only one round). The first symbol display device 37 not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the play area formed on the surface of the playboard 13, there are arranged a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display of a special pattern executed by the first pattern display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a normal pattern (second pattern) triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start gate (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed, one above, one in the middle, and one below (see FIG. 230(a)). The third patterns (decorative patterns that change in response to the changing display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are each composed of 10 main patterns with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9". These third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of this control example displays decoratively in response to the display of the first pattern display device 37, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) is performed by the first pattern display device 37. Instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main pattern sz is formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information that resembles a number. In this way, by using characters that correspond to each identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special pattern, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main patterns are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot game occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows, Z1, Z2, and Z3, at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling left and right periodically for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to scroll from right to left to change the display, while the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left to change the display. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) fz that do not indicate the lottery results of the special patterns are also formed between the main patterns sz. In Figure 122 (b), the blank patterns (sub-patterns) fz are displayed using patterns that resemble triangles.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1-L3 formed in the vertical direction, and two active lines L4, L5 formed in the diagonal direction. When each of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 is stopped and displayed, if the third pattern (main pattern sz) stops on the active line in a combination of jackpot patterns (in this control example, a combination of the same main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), in this control example, each pay line (L1-L5) is formed to include the pattern display positions of each of the pattern columns Z1-Z3, so that the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern can be difficult to understand until all of the pattern columns Z1-Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the changing display of the third pattern executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last pattern column (middle pattern column V2 in this control example) is stopped and displayed.

In this control example, among the three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3) described above, a specific symbol row (symbol row Z2), i.e., the symbol row among the multiple symbol rows in which the variable display is stopped last, is configured to have a greater number of main symbols than the other symbol rows. Specifically, the number of main symbols with a specific number (e.g., the number "4") is made greater than the other symbol rows. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in a reach state, the number of jackpot symbols (identification information imitating a specific number) passing on the pay line can be increased compared to when the other identification information is in a reach state, allowing the player to visually predict that there is a high chance of winning the jackpot.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(b). As shown in FIG. 122(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 2) to indicate the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

The small display area Dm2 is an area where identification information is displayed to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether the lottery is in progress (changing) or not, and the lottery result), and the fourth symbol (normal symbol fourth symbol) to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol can be notified to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 122(b)) to indicate the state in which the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a stationary manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm2 in FIG. 122(b)) to indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode using a number as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed in a stationary manner to indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, a fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the special symbol is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and a regular fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which the regular fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the regular symbol is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the area in which the variable presentation is performed from being restricted by the fourth pattern display area or the regular fourth pattern display area, which would reduce the presentation effect. In this case, it is also possible to remove the fourth pattern display area or the regular fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure it so that the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using a light-emitting means (such as an LED) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved patterns corresponding to the number of acquired rights (reserved memory) for the special pattern lottery. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the first pattern display device 37 is performing a variable display or a winning game is being performed, that is, in a state in which a new special pattern lottery cannot be performed, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each ball entrance. The reserved patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls stored for balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to four, so a maximum of eight reserved patterns are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The standby area Ds1b is an area for displaying reserved patterns in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special patterns, and eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored (8 balls) are displayed in order from the left. Then, when a reserved ball of a special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the lowest-numbered pedestal among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 that does not display a reserved pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 122(b), four reserved balls of the first special pattern are reserved and stored, and in the waiting area Ds1b, four reserved patterns (hz1 to hz4) in display modes (white circles) corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern (reserved ball of special pattern 1) are displayed on the first base hr1 to the fourth base hr4.

The active area Ds1a is a display area in which the reserved symbol that was displayed in response to the currently active special symbol change is shifted and displayed, and the active reserved symbol hz0 is displayed on the active base hr0. In other words, when a new special symbol change is started, the reserved symbol hz1 that was displayed on the base hr1 of the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the base hr0 of the active area Ds1a and displayed. By configuring it in this way, for example, when a preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol) that indicates the expectation of a jackpot win for the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b is performed, the player can easily tell that a special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the preview performance was performed is being performed.

In addition, by making it possible to display the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved pattern can also be performed on the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change, so that the player can play the game while expecting the display mode of the reserved pattern to be changed for a longer period of time than if the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change is not displayed.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds allows the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) or a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved pattern), with the special pattern 1 reserved pattern being displayed as a white circle (see FIG. 122(b)) and the special pattern 2 reserved pattern being displayed as a black circle (see FIG. 124(a)). This allows the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern, making it easier for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 based on the display content of the reserved pattern.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), this control example is configured to display reserved patterns in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special pattern, and to execute a special pattern lottery using reserved balls corresponding to the reserved patterns displayed on the lower numbered pedestal (the lowest numbered pedestal is pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved patterns are displayed in the order in which they are used in the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the reserved patterns may be displayed in the order in which the reserved balls were acquired, and consumption order information may be attached to each reserved pattern to indicate the order in which they are used in the special pattern lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player of which reserved pattern the reserved ball acquired at which time corresponds to which reserved pattern.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a maximum of eight reserved patterns can be displayed side-by-side, but this is not limited to this, and the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 and the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, for example, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 is set, the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 may be displayed more prominently than the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2, and when a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to obtain the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 is set, the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 may be displayed more prominently than the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1.

In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical, and the same game result is awarded when playing right-handed and when playing left-handed, so it is not displayed. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a game method in which right-handed play is more advantageous than left-handed play and a game method in which left-handed play is more advantageous than right-handed play according to the set game state, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a guide display mode to guide the player in the direction to shoot the ball (game direction). By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

To explain in more detail, the guidance display area may be configured to display a "right hit" display mode for instructing the player to play right-handed games, and a "left hit" display mode for instructing the player to play left-handed games. The "right hit" display mode may be displayed during a game state in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, such as a probability change state, a time-saving state, and during a jackpot game, and the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. In addition, when it is detected that right-handed games are being played during a game state in which left-handed games are advantageous to the player, that is, during a normal state, the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds). In addition, the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in each of the above control examples may be appropriately displayed.

<About the performance content of the first control example>
Next, referring to Figs. 123 to 131, characteristic performance contents among various performance contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 123(a), a display screen when a reach is established in a normal state will be described. Fig. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a reach state is reached in a normal state (normal state). In this control example, the third symbols to be displayed variably are displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see Fig. 122(a)), the reach state is reached, and the effective line on which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win is set as the reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed variably. After the ready state is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to variably display each identification information (third symbol) at a slow speed that allows the player to view it (the speed at which it takes about 0.5 seconds for one main symbol (third symbol resembling a number) to move).

As described above, in this control example, the middle pattern row has 10 main patterns (one each of the main patterns numbered "1" to "3" and "5" to "9", and two main patterns numbered "4"), so when the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner, it takes 5 seconds (0.5 x 10) to complete one revolution. The middle pattern row Z2, which is displayed in a slow-moving manner, is then displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 123(a), even if the reach state is reached with any third pattern (in FIG. 123(a), the identification information imitating the number "9" (the third pattern imitating a crab)), the slow-speed variable display is executed so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third pattern imitating an octopus) is first visible in the middle pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)) that is displayed in a variable manner during the reach state.

In addition, in this control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is configured to be variable depending on the variation mode of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach state is reached, and is configured to be able to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when, for example, the middle pattern row Z2 completes one revolution after the reach state is reached (5 seconds after the slow variation display is executed) or when it completes two revolutions (10 seconds after the slow variation display is executed). Therefore, as in this control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible after the reach state is reached, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand at what point in time the presentation mode (reach mode) will be changed.

In this control example, the timing of changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is set to the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution or two revolutions after the reach state is reached, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the identification information (identical information identical to the identification information in the reach stop) that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line after the reach state is reached, or when the identification information shifted by one from the identification information that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line. In this way, by configuring to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the specific identification information corresponding to the type of identification information in the reach stop passing the reach effective line, it is possible to provide a relationship for the player between the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a combination that is a jackpot and the timing when it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode). Specifically, if the system is configured so that identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached (identical information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when it passes the reach effective line, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped in a combination that results in a jackpot and the timing at which it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) can overlap for the player, allowing the player to pay close attention to the changing presentation with great anticipation when the identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot (identical information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) approaches the reach effective line.

As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to vary at a slow speed so that a specific identification state (a third symbol that resembles the number "1") is first visible no matter which third symbol is used to reach the reach state. Therefore, for example, if the final combination of third symbols to be stopped and displayed is a combination that is shifted by one type from the combination of third symbols that results in a jackpot (one frame off reach) (if the final stop display mode is determined in advance), a new problem occurs in that the period from when the reach state is reached until all of the third symbols are stopped and displayed (until the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed) differs depending on the type of third symbol that results in the reach state.

Specifically, when the third symbol imitating the number "1" is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 5.5 seconds (first lap) or 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode, and when the third symbol imitating the number "6" is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 8 seconds (first lap) or 13 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode.

Therefore, in order to achieve a reach state with different types of third symbols in a fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation time is set, it was necessary to execute a process that calculates backwards from the timing when the third symbol stops and displays to set the timing when the reach state will occur. In other words, there was a problem in that a reach effect was reduced because the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reaching state was changed depending on the type of third symbol that was in the reach state, resulting in an inconsistent reach effect.

In contrast, in this control example, the main control unit 110 determines the variation time of the first pattern to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery when the special pattern lottery is executed, and notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the determined variation time by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control unit 113 selects a variation display performance of a performance period that matches the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, and executes the variation display performance of the third pattern in synchronization with the variation display of the first pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an added time command indicating the variation time to be added, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern that is in a reach state based on the length of the variation time included in the added time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the added time. On the other hand, if a fluctuation pattern of a 37-second fluctuation time is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the base time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the added time. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify that the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer than the base time based on the notified content of the added time command. This makes it possible to set the type of third pattern that will be in a reach state simply by checking the content of the added time command.

Next, referring to FIG. 123(b) to FIG. 126, the performance contents related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 123(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123(b), when the normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the second ball entrance 640 including the electric role 640a that is opened in the normal symbol winning game is displayed therein, and a highlight display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to notify the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. In addition, since the situation shown in FIG. 123(b) is during the execution of the normal pattern variation in which a winning symbol has been generated, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is in a display mode that imitates the second ball entrance 640 including the closed electric role 640a. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict that the normal symbol winning game will be executed soon, which can increase the interest of the game.

In FIG. 123(b), an example is given of a normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is being played, but the small display area Dm3 is formed during a part of the normal symbol variation in which the lottery result is a loss (for example, a 1/100 probability of a loss variation), and an effect (fake effect) is executed in which an icon resembling the second ball entrance 640 including the electric device 640a is displayed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being performed stops and is displayed. By configuring in this way, an effect display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed even when the normal symbol lottery result is not a winning symbol, so that the player can play the game while expecting that a normal symbol winning game will be executed. Also, in FIG. 123(b), an example of a presentation suggesting the start of a normal winning game is shown by displaying an icon resembling the second ball entrance 640 including the electric device 640a in the small display area Dm3, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to display a comment suggesting the start of a normal winning game in a part of the sub-display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

Also, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of a normal symbol winning game. In this case, only when the special symbol variation is being executed while the normal symbol variation is being executed, the performance suggesting that the normal symbol winning game will be executed will be executed, so for example, the ball will pass through the through gate 67, which is easier to enter than the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for the execution of the special symbol lottery, and the result of the normal symbol lottery will not be suggested in advance to a player who is only executing the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, a special privilege (execution of a performance suggesting the result of the normal symbol lottery in advance) can be given to a player who is playing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the performance using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example may be set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is being executed, or that the game of launching the ball is being executed continuously.

In addition, the expectation level of the suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game may be varied depending on the game being played. For example, when playing normally, if a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed, the normal winning game is executed almost 100% of the time, and when playing a game in which only a normal pattern lottery is executed without executing a special pattern lottery (stop-hit game), that is, when playing normally, the normal winning game is executed only about 10% of the time even if a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing a stop-hit game to grasp the start timing of a normal winning game based on the suggested effect that is executed, and a penalty can be imposed.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal symbol reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination can be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a suggestive performance that suggests that a normal symbol winning game will be played soon can be executed before the normal symbol variation that has been won is executed, that is, from the stage where a normal symbol reservation that has been acquired as a pre-determination result is a winning one. In this case, it is preferable to configure the suggestive performance to be executed in a performance mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive performance shown in FIG. 123 (b). For example, the suggestive performance can be executed in the same performance mode as the performance that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol variation, or the pre-determination result for the acquired special symbol reservation, and the executed suggestive performance can be configured to only inform the player that a situation favorable to the player will soon come.

In this way, the greater the divergence between the timing of the actual execution of a normal winning game and the timing of the execution of the suggestive effect, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand the presentation mode of the suggestive effect intended to indicate that a normal winning game will be executed, and by extension, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is a normal winning game, thereby increasing the interest of the game when the suggestive effect is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 124(a), the contents of the presentation when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the presentation displayed when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during normal time (in the normal state). In this control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed in the low probability state of the normal pattern is designed to be 10 seconds. And, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, it is configured so that about 1/2 of the balls shot pass through the through gate 67 in both the case of right-hand play and the case of left-hand play. In addition, it is configured so that a maximum of four lottery rights for normal patterns (normal pattern reservation) can be stored.

In other words, while playing in the normal state, the normal pattern lottery is continuously executed, and the normal pattern winning is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when a normal pattern winning is won in the normal state, a normal pattern winning game (long opening winning) is executed in which the electric role 640a is opened for 5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 119, since the electric role 640a is provided below the first ball entrance 64, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game during a low probability state of a normal pattern that occurs with a low probability.

When a winning symbol is selected in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 124(a), the identification information (symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm2 in a combination (two circles in the figure) that indicates that the result of the normal symbol selection is a winning symbol, and the normal symbol winning game is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chute" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the open electric chute (the second ball entrance 640 including the electric device 640a) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Note that the normal symbol selection and the special symbol selection are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapped), so the display of the third symbol change that is executed in response to the special symbol change and the display of the fourth symbol change that is executed in the small display area Dm1 continue to be executed during the normal symbol winning game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds, the special symbol 2 reserved pattern (shown as a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved balls) acquired based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is displayed (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b) in priority to the special symbol 1 reserved pattern (shown as a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved balls) acquired. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 124(a) shows the state after four or more balls have entered the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and the state after the maximum number of four special symbol 2 reserved balls has been acquired.

In this control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, so the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball acquired later is executed with priority over the special symbol 1 reserved ball acquired earlier. By configuring it in this way, when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state and multiple special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired, it becomes possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol consecutively with priority, so that a period during which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed can be set as an advantageous period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player, and a dedicated presentation can be executed, providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

In this control example, the waiting area Ds1b is configured to display the acquired special reserved ball 1 and special reserved ball 2 side by side (up to 8 balls are displayed). For example, if a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 1 and a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 2 are used, if a reserved ball of the second special pattern for which the special pattern lottery is executed first is not acquired, the special reserved ball display area is displayed to be more prominent than the special reserved ball display area, and if a reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, the display is switched to make the special reserved ball display area more prominent than the special reserved ball display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player whether the lottery for the first special pattern or the lottery for the second special pattern will be executed next.

The display screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the normal winning game in the normal state or the start of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. In other words, even during a normal winning game, if the second special symbol variation starts, the chance zone presentation described later with reference to FIG. 124(b) is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol variation does not start even when the end of the normal winning game is reached, for example, if a normal winning game (5 seconds) is executed while a first special symbol variation with a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is being executed, the words "Chance Zone Waiting" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and when the currently executed first special symbol variation ends, a waiting screen is displayed to inform the player that the second special symbol variation will start.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), when a normal symbol winning game is executed during the first special symbol variation, the third symbol variation effect (indicated by three arrows in the figure) executed in the main display area Dm in response to the first special symbol variation being executed is continuously displayed, while a part of the main display area Dm (small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right in the figure) is notified that a normal symbol winning game is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the size of the display area used to display that a normal symbol winning game has been executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed to be variable. For example, if the first special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot winning, it is preferable to form the small display area Dm3 smaller than the example shown in FIG. 124(a) or to configure it so that the small display area Dm3 is not formed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the reduction in visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating a jackpot winning due to the formation of the small display area Dm3. In addition, when a normal winning game is started without the small display area Dm3 being formed, the player can be notified that the special pattern change (first special pattern change) being executed is a big win change, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the operating status of the electric role 640a even in a state where the small display area Dm3 has not notified that a normal winning game has been executed. When using such a configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that the same presentation mode as a big win change is executed even in some cases where the special pattern change being executed is not a big win change (it is a miss change).

On the other hand, if the special pattern change (first special pattern change) being executed is a miss change, or if no special pattern change is being executed, the small display area Dm3 may be formed larger than the example shown in FIG. 124(a), or the entire main display area Dm may be used to display that a regular winning game has been executed.

In other words, when multiple pieces of information (lottery results and winning game status) need to be displayed overlappingly within the limited display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is sufficient to configure the display so that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed preferentially, and various display modes may be displayed based on the technical concept. In this case, the information that is advantageous to the player may differ. For example, some players consider information indicating that they have won a jackpot in a special symbol lottery to be advantageous, while other players consider a performance with a lower appearance rate to be advantageous rather than the result of the special symbol lottery to be advantageous. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an operation means that the player can operate, and an advantage degree selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage degree of various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means, and to configure the display mode corresponding to the various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to be set based on the advantage degree selected by the advantage degree selection means. This allows various pieces of information to be displayed in a display mode that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player.

Next, the performance contents in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to Fig. 124(b) to Fig. 126. Fig. 124(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in Fig. 124(b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the comment "Entering the chance zone" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set for the period until all the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the current advantageous period is in progress.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, if a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the text "High probability of winning a chance" is displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the chance state can be acquired with a high probability. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, but the system is configured so that the chance state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the chance zone period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed is a period in which it is easier to win a jackpot that results in a chance state than periods other than the chance zone in the normal state, so that the text "High probability of winning a chance state" is displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the chance state can be acquired with a high probability, as shown in FIG. 124(b).

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-change performance is executed to make it look like multiple special symbol changes have been executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change). Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124(a)) showing the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is hidden, and the reserved number of special symbols 1 (in the figure, "2" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is two) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the reserved number of special symbols 2 (in the figure, "3" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 2 is three) is displayed in the small display area Ds12.

As shown in FIG. 124(b), the display mode displayed in the small display area Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to see than the display mode displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 124(a)) of the sub-display area Ds, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols during the chance zone. Therefore, when a pseudo-variable performance is executed during the chance zone, it is possible to make the player think that multiple special symbol lotteries (variations) have actually been executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect. In this control example, the number of reserved special symbols is displayed using a part of the main display area Dm (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the number of reserved special symbols not to be notified to the player during the chance zone, or to configure the number of reserved special symbols to be notified in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is sufficient to configure the number of reserved special figures to be difficult for the player to distinguish, for example, it is possible to switch from a display mode using numbers that allows the player to easily distinguish the number of reserved special figures to a display mode that changes color to correspond to each reserved special figure number. In this case, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current reserved special figure number from being easily distinguished, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as this control example.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, indicating that the second special symbol is currently fluctuating. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlap), so the period during which the normal symbol winning game is executed may overlap with the first special symbol fluctuating period (see FIG. 124(a)) or may not overlap. If the normal symbol winning game is executed during the fluctuating period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first special symbol fluctuating period is over, and if it does not overlap with the fluctuating period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game (during the normal symbol winning game). In other words, the timing of the second special symbol lottery will differ depending on the state of the first special symbol when a normal winning game is executed, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the currently executed special symbol change is the first special symbol change or the second special symbol change.

In contrast, in this control example, when the second special pattern change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special pattern change is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Next, referring to Fig. 125(a) and Fig. 126, the contents of the pseudo-variable performance (special variable performance) among the variable performances executed during the chance zone will be explained. Fig. 125(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during a special variable performance, Fig. 125(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variable performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved ball has been acquired, and Fig. 126 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variable performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved ball has not been acquired.

Here, the contents of the special variation presentation (pseudo variation presentation) will be explained. This special variation presentation is a variation presentation in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation presentation that makes the player think that multiple special symbol variations have been performed. First, a reach presentation is performed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation presentation, and at the end of the first half period, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the third symbol is temporarily stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line) in a combination indicating a miss (displayed as "353" in the figure). At this timing, that is, at the end of the first half period of the special variation presentation, the word "unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, and the player is configured to think that the second special symbol lottery performed during the chance zone was a miss. In other words, during the first half of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the reach performance that gives hope for a big win is stopped (provisionally stopped) with a performance result indicating a miss.

After that, in the latter half of the special variation performance (about 30 seconds), a variation performance (special latter half performance) that restarts the temporarily stopped third pattern is executed. This special latter half performance is configured to change its performance mode depending on the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired. For example, when the reserved special symbol 2 ball is secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone as shown in FIG. 125 (b), and when the reserved special symbol 2 ball is not secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed after the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. 126. In other words, in this control example, as a special variation performance, the type of special symbol variation executed after the second special symbol variation being executed ends is determined based on the reserved special symbol number, and the performance mode of the special latter half performance is set in a performance mode corresponding to the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that multiple special symbol variations have been executed during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special pattern change in the chance zone (see FIG. 125(b)), the number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the latter half period is configured to be different according to the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have already been acquired. Although detailed explanations are omitted, when the special variation performance is executed, if neither the reserved special pattern 2 ball nor the reserved special pattern 1 ball is secured, the temporary stop display of the third pattern shown in FIG. 125(a) is not executed, and one variation performance (a variation performance in which the third pattern is not temporarily stopped even once) is executed using the entire variation period of the second special pattern change. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed only when the reserved special pattern number is secured, so that it is more likely that multiple special pattern changes have been executed during one second special pattern change.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a performance mode is set in which the number of provisional stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols already acquired. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol is provisionally stopped five or more times, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won the jackpot. As described above, in this control example, since it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a case in which the third symbol is provisionally stopped and a case in which it is stopped, it is difficult to accurately determine the number of provisional stops. Therefore, it is possible to mix the number of provisional stop displays and the number of stop displays to make the player think that the provisional stop display has been performed five or more times, or to make the player think that some of the provisional stop displays are stopped displays, and that the number of provisional stop displays has not reached five even though the provisional stop display has actually been performed five or more times, thereby providing the player with the fun of predicting the performance result.

Note that other configurations may be used as the presentation mode of the special variation presentation. For example, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation, or at least a part of the presentation mode of the special variation presentation (e.g., background color, third pattern effect, etc.) may be gradually changed depending on the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Also, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped (e.g., 1st time, 2nd time) may be temporarily displayed at the timing when the temporarily stopped third pattern is redisplayed.

As shown in FIG. 126, if the special variation effect is executed without securing the reserved ball for special symbol 2, the words "Chance Zone Ended" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and the variation display of the third symbol executed in the primary display area Dm becomes a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (a variation display in which the third symbol varies horizontally) as a special latter half effect. Therefore, after making the player believe that the chance zone has ended, the result of the special variation effect, i.e., the lottery result for the second special symbol, is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, the above-mentioned special variation effect is executed in some of the second special symbol variations during the normal state, and in the rest, one variation effect is executed for one second special symbol variation. Therefore, when multiple (up to four) special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired during a normal symbol win game, it is possible to prevent the special variation effect from being executed for an unnecessarily long time.

Next, referring to FIG. 127, the contents of the presentation executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game, FIG. 127(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, and FIG. 127(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game.

In this control example, if the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won during a normal state is a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is easily set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is not easily set. Specifically, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds for a high probability jackpot game, and 15 seconds for a normal jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner during the ending period (before the high probability state is set) that the game content will change significantly through the jackpot game (transition from the normal state to the high probability state). In addition, the content of the game to be executed after the jackpot game can be notified to the player by using a long ending period.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, even if a special jackpot game is being played, the special jackpot state is not set unless the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 is allowed to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120). Therefore, if the ball cannot be allowed to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during a special jackpot game, the special jackpot state is not set after the special jackpot game ends, and the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, just like in a normal jackpot game.

In this case, if a notification effect indicating that a probability variable state will be set is executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game, the content of the notification effect will differ from the actual game state that will be set, causing dissatisfaction for the player. Furthermore, if the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game (15 seconds), the length of the actual ending period and the length of the presentation period of the notification effect will differ, resulting in a notification effect that feels strange to the player.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. The presentation mode of the notification presentation executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when a normal jackpot game is executed, the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period is to display the words "Chance mode 100 times" for the first half period (8 seconds) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set (see FIG. 127(a)), and then, for the second half period (7 seconds), if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state (if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery), a notification effect is executed in which the words "Win and super chance get during chance mode" are displayed as a game guide mode to indicate that a probability variable state is likely to be set (see FIG. 127(c)).

On the other hand, when a sure-win game is being played, the notification effect executed during the sure-win ending period is to display the words "Super Chance Mode 100 Times" in the first half (10 seconds) to indicate that a sure-win state will be set (see FIG. 127(b)), and then, in the second half (7 seconds), a notification effect is executed in which the words "Be careful not to forget to take your card" are displayed as a warning that is not directly related to the game content (see FIG. 127(d)).

In this control example, the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. This eliminates the need to execute the process to determine the presentation mode of the notification effect every time during the jackpot game, when various control processes are executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the control processes executed during the jackpot game.

Here, we will explain the case where, even though a guaranteed jackpot game has been played, the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. 127(b), a process is executed to make the word "Super" invisible, and a process is executed to switch the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the normal jackpot game ending period (see FIG. 127(c)).

More specifically, the display mode shown in FIG. 127(a) is different between the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed and the display layer on which the word "100 chance modes" is displayed, and the display instruction for the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed can be switched based on the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game by simple control processing. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the latter half of the jackpot ending period, which is set to the same length, the presentation mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In this control example, the latter half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period of the same length for all jackpot types, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In addition, if there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all of the jackpot types. For example, the first half of the jackpot period for jackpot type A and jackpot type B may be the same length, and the second half of the jackpot period for jackpot type B and jackpot type C may be the same length.

In addition, in this control example, the ending period is set to a different length depending on the type of jackpot won, but the invention is not limited to this and the length of the ending period may be changed depending on the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the effects executed during the chance mode will be described with reference to Figures 128 to 130. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special pattern is set 50 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, it is configured so that it can be set to execute a V notification effect that notifies the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and to not execute a V notification effect.

If the V notification effect is executed during a jackpot game, a presentation mode (special chance mode) is set to notify the player that a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) has been set after the jackpot game ends, and if the V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game, that is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, or if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v but the V notification effect is not executed, a presentation mode (chance mode) is set in which it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a high probability state has been set after the jackpot game ends.

When the chance mode is set as the presentation mode, the words "Chance mode in progress" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and a remaining period notification mode is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds to indicate the period until the high probability state of the normal pattern ends (see FIG. 128(a)). The example shown in FIG. 128(a) shows a state in which the 20th special pattern variation has been performed since the chance mode was set, and the words "80 times" are displayed as the remaining period notification mode, indicating that the chance mode will end if 80 more special pattern variations are performed.

In this way, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state from the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can play while hoping that the current game state is a game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player.

Also, only if the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the chance mode can be set as the presentation mode even if the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This prevents the player from being confused by the chance mode being set after the jackpot game ends, even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, i.e., the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the V notification effect is executed to notify that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the super chance mode is set as the presentation mode to indicate that the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed, the chance mode is set as the display mode after the jackpot game ends. However, without being limited to this, the present invention may be configured to set the super chance mode in some cases where the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game), it is preferable to determine whether the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game and whether the V notification effect was executed, and in some cases (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery) where the determination result indicates that the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the determination result indicates that the V notification effect was not executed, a display mode (FIG. 127(b) and FIG. 127(d)) indicating that a special probability state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game is displayed, and the super chance mode is set as the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, even if the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the possibility of the Super Chance Mode being set remains, so the player can continue playing with a sense of anticipation until the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode to be set after the end of a big win game, the game state may be set to either the time-saving state or the probability variable state. Regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern will continue is displayed. In other words, the gaming machine is configured to be able to set a first advantageous gaming state (high probability state) and a second advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) as advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state as gaming states that are set after the end of a jackpot game, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times), and the second advantageous gaming state continues for a second period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times) that is longer than the above-mentioned first period, and is configured to set the second advantageous gaming state until the second period has elapsed after the first advantageous gaming state is set after the end of a jackpot game when the first period has elapsed, and is configured to set the normal state when the second period has elapsed, and is configured to be able to execute a remaining period notification to indicate the remaining period until the advantageous gaming state ends (second period) regardless of whether the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player of the period during which a favorable game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will continue. Furthermore, in this control example, when the remaining period of the second period (remaining period of the chance mode) is set, a game state indication effect for informing the player whether the current game state is a probability bonus state or a time-saving state can be executed using the remaining period notification notification mode (display mode).

Here, referring to FIG. 128(b), the contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 128(b), when a chance mode is set in a state where a certain notification condition is met, a game state suggestion effect (displayed in a white display mode in FIG. 128(b)) in which the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed is executed. Then, the comment "Big win expectation UP" is displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which game state is set among the advantageous game states while notifying the player of the period until the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 128(b) can be displayed when the currently executing special pattern change is a jackpot change, or when the acquired reserved ball for special pattern 2 contains information about winning a jackpot, during the period in the chance mode when a high probability state can be set (within the period after the end of the jackpot game until 50 special pattern changes have been executed).

By configuring it in this way, during the chance mode, which indicates the period during which a favorable game state advantageous to the player will continue, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that a high probability state has been set, information regarding a jackpot win) can be displayed using the same display format, providing an easy-to-understand presentation for the player. Also, even if a time-saving state is actually set, a display format that is likely to be displayed when a high probability state has been set based on a jackpot win can be displayed, making the player believe that a high probability state has been set at a rate higher than the design value, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

Note that the configuration may be such that the effects during the chance mode are executed using a different technical concept from the technical concept of the present control example described above. For example, when the chance mode is set during the high probability state, if a jackpot is won, or if the acquired reserved ball for special chart 2 contains information about winning a jackpot, a suggestive effect may be executed to suggest that the currently set game state is a time-saving state (for example, an effect in which the display mode of the remaining time notification is displayed in a different display mode (kanji numeral display mode) from that shown in Fig. 128(a) and (b). This allows the player to think that he or she has won a jackpot during a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the high probability state in an advantageous game state, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. In addition, the percentage of times the high probability state has been set in the game history can be made to appear lower than it actually is, allowing the player to play while having a higher expectation that the high probability state will be set in the next jackpot game.

As described above with reference to Figs. 128(a) and (b), in this first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the duration (remaining period) of the chance mode is changed to suggest the currently set game state to the player, so that a player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode can easily understand the game state suggestion effect that suggests the currently set game state. However, the game state suggestion effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode. For example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a first display mode (e.g., the word "chance") that is more likely to be displayed when the probability variable state is set than when the time-saving state is set, or a second display mode (e.g., the word "pinch") that is more likely to be displayed when the time-saving state is set than when the probability variable state is set, or the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be changed to execute the game state suggestion effect.

In this first control example, both the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern are configured to end when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, so as shown in Figures 128 (a) and (b), the display mode of the remaining period notification that notifies the remaining period for which the chance mode will continue (the remaining period for which the high probability state of the special pattern or the high probability state of the normal pattern may continue) is used to suggest the current game state. However, for example, the above-mentioned chance mode configuration may also be used in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that the high probability state of the special pattern will continue until the next jackpot game is executed. In this case, when a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the duration of the chance mode, the remaining period until the high probability state of the normal symbols ends (the period until the time-saving state ends) is notified by a remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has elapsed, if the time-saving state is set, a presentation is executed to notify that the normal state has been transitioned to, and if a probability variable state is set, a presentation can be executed in which the word "Congratulations" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special symbols will continue until the next big win is played, that is, a display mode indicating that the remaining period for which the probability variable state will continue is the period until the next big win, and the word "Congratulations" may be displayed if a predetermined notification condition is met during the period in which the chance mode is set.

In other words, instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128(a)) that is updated from time to time in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode, which is updated each time a special symbol lottery is executed, a display mode that only indicates that the remaining period of the chance mode exists, that is, a remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the remaining number of times that the special symbol can be drawn during the chance mode, such as the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. 128(a), may be used, or a remaining period notification mode that can roughly notify the remaining period of the chance mode by varying the display mode (for example, varying the display color) in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode may be used. Furthermore, a configuration may be made in which multiple remaining period notification modes can be displayed, and the display modes of the multiple displayed remaining period notification modes can be combined to allow the player to grasp the remaining period of the chance mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the contents of the effects executed when the player operates the operation means during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the operation contents and operation timing. Although detailed explanations are omitted, the operation effects are configured to execute an operation effect that changes the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, an instruction notification is executed to have the player operate the frame button 22 as part of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and when the player operates the frame button 22, an operation effect that executes an effect in a different mode from when the player does not operate the frame button 22, and an operation effect for livening up the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, etc. are executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play games other than the action of firing balls, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

Here, among the above-mentioned operation effects, the contents of various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be explained. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, when a favorable game state (time-saving state, probability change state) is set, a different change time can be selected according to the number of special symbol changes since the favorable game state was set. Specifically, the period from the first to the twentieth time that the number of special symbol changes since the favorable game state was set is the first period (high-speed change period) in which a short change time (e.g., 5 seconds) is likely to be selected, the period from the 21st to the 49th time is the second period in which a change time longer than the first period (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set, and only the 50th time is the specific period in which a specific change time (e.g., 20 seconds) is set, and the period from the 51st to the 100th time is the third period in which a change time similar to that of the second period (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set.

In other words, during the specified period (first period) after the chance mode is set, i.e., during the specified period after the end of a jackpot game, special symbol variations are likely to be performed in a short variation time, so if a jackpot is won during this first period, it is possible to make it easier to play multiple jackpot games at short intervals. This makes it possible for the player to think that the next jackpot game was played as part of the previous jackpot game, which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the second and third periods described above, it is configured so that special symbol fluctuations with shorter fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and special symbol fluctuations with longer fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than in the first period. This makes it possible to ensure a period during the chance mode during one special symbol fluctuation during which a suggestive effect is executed to suggest whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a high probability state. Also, in the specific period (the 50th special symbol fluctuation after the advantageous game state is set), a special symbol fluctuation of a specific fluctuation time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a suggestive effect of 20 seconds is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the high probability state has been set (is set).

In this way, by allowing the selection of different change times depending on the number of times the special pattern changes are performed, it is possible to execute the performance for each change number using an appropriate period of time.

Figure 129(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (normal fluctuation period) when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode and the normal state is set internally, and Figure 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the presentation mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display presentation shown in Figure 129(a). In this control example, during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and by the player pressing (operating) the frame button 22, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are displayed alternately.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a framed button 22 is displayed at the bottom right of the main display area Dm in a display mode indicating that it is operable (in the figure, an arrow is displayed pointing in the direction of button depression), and the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds displays the words "sea mode", indicating that sea mode is currently set. When the player operates the framed button 22 in this state, the display switches from "sea mode" to "mountain mode", as shown in FIG. 129(b).

Next, referring to FIG. 130, the contents of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be explained. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the time-saving state and the probability change state are set to when the 20th special pattern fluctuation ends), the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time for one special pattern fluctuation, if the background image is switched, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 will change frequently, making it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). However, if all the player's operations on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play will decrease.

Therefore, in this control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, a different effect is executed instead of switching the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the words "Special Mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the player is notified that the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period. During this "Special Mode", regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery, a special pattern fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the third pattern fluctuation effect is also executed in a "Special Mode"-only fluctuation effect. Also, during the "Special Mode", the icon HR10 is displayed in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, a game state suggestion effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining time notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed, as shown in FIG. 130(b).

In this way, even if the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed can be varied depending on the timing of the operation, which can motivate the player to play by operating the frame button 22 at various times. Also, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a) or FIG. 130(a), the same guide display (icon HR10) is used to guide the player to operate (press) the frame button 22, and when the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed is varied depending on the timing of the operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know what kind of operation effect will be executed until the player actually operates (presses) the frame button 22, which can motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 more.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, multiple operation effects can be executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the rate at which each operation effect is selected varies depending on the set game state. In other words, it is possible to predict whether the currently set game state is a sure-win state or a time-saving state based on the appearance rate of each operation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is executed repeatedly during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image is switched when the frame button 22 is pressed only if a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the reserved ball (special pattern 2 reserved ball) of the second special pattern acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period contains information on winning a jackpot, a special variation effect is executed using the variation time of the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning a jackpot and the special pattern change executed before the special pattern change (the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball acquired before the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning a jackpot). When the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the conditions for executing the special variation effect are satisfied, the background image is switched from the currently displayed background image (e.g., sea mode) to a dedicated special background image (e.g., space mode). In other words, when the background image is switched based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of winning a jackpot increases, and the player can be made to actively press the frame button 22.

In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image can be switched by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22. This special operation (long press) is determined to have been performed when the player presses the frame button 22 continuously for two seconds, and the period until the operation is determined to have been performed is longer than that of a normal operation (press) on the frame button 22. Therefore, since this operation is difficult to perform frequently compared to a normal operation (press), even if the background image switching display is configured to be executable, it is possible to suppress the background image from being switched frequently. Note that in this control example, a long press operation is used as a special operation with a longer operation time than a normal operation, but this is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the frame button 22, an operation means having multiple operation units (e.g., a cross key) may be provided as the operation means, and a special operation performed by operating the multiple operation units in a predetermined order may be specified.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, the effects executed during the "Super Chance Mode" in which the player is notified that a special probability state has been set will be described. FIG. 131(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed when a first special symbol variation is executed during the "Super Chance Mode", and FIG. 131(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed when a second special symbol variation is executed during the "Super Chance Mode".

In this control example, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state is set with a high probability (a high probability jackpot game that can easily cause the ball to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game is always executed). The high probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the high probability state is set, as long as a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery before the specified number of special pattern lotteries (50 times) have been performed (the jackpot probability in the high probability state for special patterns is 1/50), the high probability state can be looped with high probability. This makes it possible for a player playing during the high probability state to play with enthusiasm in the hope of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery as soon as possible.

On the other hand, even if the probability variable state is set, for example, if a probability variable jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, if the special pattern 2 reserved ball is not acquired and the special pattern 1 reserved ball is acquired in the state in which the probability variable state is set, the first special pattern lottery is executed. In this control example, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 100% of the time, whereas when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 50% of the time, and the normal jackpot game is executed the remaining 50% of the time. In other words, even if the probability variable state is set, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, it may not be possible to loop the probability variable state.

In this way, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the high probability state, and the player quickly determines that the jackpot is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) for which a normal jackpot game is executed, the player's motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the high probability state, a double reach effect is easily executed, which is a variation effect in which the third symbol (identification information with an odd number) corresponding to the high probability jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state. More specifically, if a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is always executed (see FIG. 131(a)).

This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a reach effect in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in reach when a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the special symbol fluctuation period, and to prevent players from predicting in advance that they will win a normal jackpot during the period in which the special symbols are fluctuating.

Also, as shown in FIG. 131(a), in this control example, during "Super Chance Mode", small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same way as during the above-mentioned "Chance Mode", making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols. And, the words "Super Chance Mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm as a display mode to inform the player that they are currently in a special chance state.

Here, in the super chance mode, when the double reach shown in FIG. 131(a) (a variable presentation in which the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to a sure jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to a normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state) is executed, there is a risk that the player will easily understand that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change, so in this control example, the double reach presentation shown in FIG. 131(a) can also be executed in the variable presentation executed in response to the second special symbol change. In other words, the double reach presentation using the third symbol corresponding to a normal win can be executed in the variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which a sure jackpot game is always executed when a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, even if the double reach effect shown in Figure 127 (a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily distinguish whether the special pattern change being executed is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the selection of the second special symbol, an effect is executed in which the type of third symbol that is in a reach state when the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is changed to the third symbol (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) corresponding to a special jackpot, as shown in FIG. 131(b) (promotion effect to a special double reach).

By configuring it in this way, if the currently running special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the player can be notified in advance that a guaranteed jackpot game will be played. Also, even if a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player can be made to play while expecting that it will be upgraded to a guaranteed double reach midway through.

In this control example, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the ongoing double reach effect to a sure-win double reach effect, a variable condition is set that is established when the change pattern of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined pattern (one lap has passed). However, without being limited to this, for example, a variable condition may be set that is established when the third symbol corresponding to the reach state (the third symbol that is the combination that results in a jackpot) as the third symbol displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the reach effective line, or a variable condition may be set that is established when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is a specific operation result.

In addition, in this control example, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131(a), the blank symbols (shown as triangles in the figure) may be erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed from the left as the upper symbol row Z1, and "1.2.3" is displayed from the left as the lower symbol row Z3, in order to execute a triple reach effect. Even in this case, the triple reach effect can increase the number of reaches of the third symbol corresponding to the special jackpot compared to the double reach effect, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of winning the special jackpot in this special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical concept may be applied to the variable presentation executed during the normal state. For example, when a variable condition is established during a normal single reach presentation in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number attached) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in the reach state, the type of third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of third symbol corresponding to a sure-variable jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. This allows the player to play while expecting a more favorable presentation result to be provided until the variable presentation ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the relationship between the special symbol variation pattern selected in this control example and the performance mode to be executed will be explained. FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol, and FIG. 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 25, but in this control example, a fluctuation pattern that combines a basic time and an added time is defined as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. The period that corresponds to the basic time is configured as a common fluctuation pattern, and the period that corresponds to the added time is configured as a specific fluctuation pattern.

In other words, in this control example, the third pattern change presentation executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to show the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to vary the period from when the reach state is displayed until the third pattern is stopped and displayed depending on the type of third pattern that will be in the reach state. The third pattern that corresponds to the time set as the added time is set as the third pattern that will be in the reach state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the third pattern change presentation (the third pattern change presentation that is executed in accordance with the basic time) that is executed during the specified period from when the third pattern starts to change.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the case of a non-reach variation presentation, since no additional time is set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper pattern row Z1 is displayed stationary when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the third pattern variation presentation (for example, when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later the lower pattern row Z3 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which a reach state does not occur on the active line, and two seconds later the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which the lottery result is a miss. After that, after a one-second display period (determination time), the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is displayed as a definite result.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), when a reach variation presentation is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until 5 seconds have elapsed is set as the common variation pattern for 30 seconds. In other words, the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the presentation mode (reach pattern, stopping symbol) according to the added time is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the presentation mode of the ending presentation executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 133(a) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot, and FIG. 133(b) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot, and FIG. 133(c) shows the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different for normal jackpots and special jackpots, with the ED period set to 15 seconds for normal jackpots and 17 seconds for special jackpots. The ending performance is then divided into a first half period and a second half period (see Figure 127).

In this control example, the presentation mode for the ending period is set at the start of the jackpot game, and whether or not a V has been won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined at the start of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the result of this determination.

First, referring to FIG. 133(a), the content of the presentation during the ending period of a jackpot game when a normal jackpot game is played will be described. In this control example, in order to prevent the various processes executed during a jackpot game from becoming complicated and the processing load during the jackpot game from increasing, the presentation mode of the presentation (ending display presentation) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined before the round game (game in which prize balls can be obtained) during the jackpot game is executed (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game).

When a normal jackpot game is played, the display mode of the ending performance (see Figs. 127(a) and (c)) is set to indicate to the player that a "chance mode" will be set (a time-saving state will be set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. In a normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a pre-set ending performance is executed as the ending performance of the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 133(b) and FIG. 133(c), the contents of the presentation during the ending period of the jackpot game when the probability variable jackpot game is executed will be explained. When the probability variable jackpot game is executed, a judgment is made as to whether or not to execute the V notification presentation during the jackpot game before the opening period of the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the ending presentation is determined based on the judgment result. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, a judgment is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification presentation in which a guide announcement that guides the player to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a V passing announcement that informs the player that the ball has actually passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v are executed, and if it is determined that the V notification presentation is executed, a display mode (see FIG. 127(b) and (d)) is set to indicate to the player that the "super chance mode" will be set (the probability variable state is set) after the end of the jackpot game as the ending presentation. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V notification effect will not be executed, a display mode is set as the ending effect to inform the player that a "Chance Mode" will be set after the big win game ends (a display mode in which the "Super" display is deleted from the display mode in FIG. 127(b) and FIG. 127(c)).

When the V notification performance is executed, a guide notification is executed in which the comment "Aim for V" and a schematic diagram showing the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in time with the start of the V round (first round) game. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V passing notification is executed in which the comment "V acquired!!" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) despite the execution of the guide notification, an emphasis guide notification is executed to more emphasize the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v to the player. Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the V round game ends, the above-mentioned V passing notification is executed, and if the V round game ends without the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the words "Too bad you didn't get a V!" are displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, a judgment is made as to whether or not to replace the display mode of the ending performance that has been set in advance, based on the actual game results of the V round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined that the V notification performance is to be executed at the start of the jackpot game, a display mode indicating that the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the ending performance (see Fig. 127 (b) and (d)) is set in advance, so if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending performance is executed without switching the display mode of the ending performance. On the other hand, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, so a process (replacement process) is executed to switch the display mode of the ending performance to a display mode indicating that the "Chance Mode" is set, and the ending performance is executed in the display mode after the replacement (the display mode in Fig. 127 (b) with the display of "Super" deleted, see Fig. 127 (c)).

In addition, if the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, as in the normal jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed in which it is not possible to know from the various effects displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 that the V round game is being executed and that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, regardless of whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. This makes it possible to provide a state in which a "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, even though a probability variable state is actually set.

Furthermore, when the "chance mode" is set while the probability variable state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the probability variable jackpot game), so that it is difficult to know in advance that the probability variable state will be set by the effect during the jackpot game. In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the jackpot game where the V notification effect is not executed, the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends, even though the probability variable state is actually set. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v while the V notification effect is being executed, the V passing notification may not be executed at a predetermined rate, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game ends if the V passing notification is not executed. In this case, it is also preferable to configure the V notification effect to be executable even when the normal jackpot game is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily create an event in which the V-pass notification is not executed even though the V notification effect has been executed, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the "chance mode" being set after the end of a jackpot game in which the V notification effect has been executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, after the end of the jackpot game, a high probability state of the normal pattern is set for a predetermined first specific period (the period until the special pattern variation is executed 100 times). Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a high probability state of the special pattern is set for a predetermined second specific period (the period until the special pattern variation is executed 50 times) after the end of the jackpot game. Then, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time-saving state (low probability state of the special pattern, high probability state of the normal pattern), the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see FIG. 134(b)). In addition, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the presentation content during the jackpot game (depending on the presence or absence of a V notification presentation). As shown in FIG. 134(a), if it is notified that a high probability state will be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, if the display mode of entering the "Super Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(b)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display a in FIG. 134(a)). If it is not notified that a high probability state will be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, if the display mode of entering the "Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(a)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display b in FIG. 134(a)).

As shown in display a in Figure 134(a), when "Super Chance Mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, the "Super Chance Mode" will continue until the high probability state ends, and when the game state transitions from the high probability state to a time-saving state, the display will switch to "Chance Mode". In this case, while the "Super Chance Mode" is set, as shown in Figure 131(a), the period until the high probability state ends (up to 50 times) is displayed as the remaining period in the small display area Ds2. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the period during which the game state most advantageous to him will continue. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131(a), a pre-notification effect may be configured to be executed to notify the player in advance that the time-saving state will be set 50 times after the high probability state ends. For example, when the remaining period mode (in FIG. 131(a), "49 times" is displayed in white) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state displayed in the small display area Ds2 becomes less than a predetermined period (for example, "10 times" or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time-saving state will continue to be set later may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, "50 times" is displayed in black) from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the high probability state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that a game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state will be set even after the high probability state ends.

Also, when the "Super Chance Mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be displayed, and each time a special symbol variation is executed, each remaining period mode may be subtracted by 1. Alternatively, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state and the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state that is set after the high probability state ends may be displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the high probability state may be subtracted first, and when the remaining period of the high probability state becomes 0 and the time-saving state is entered, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be subtracted. Even in this configuration, it is possible to notify a player playing during the high probability state in advance that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be set after the high probability state ends.

Next, the effects during the chance mode will be explained using display b in FIG. 134(a) and FIG. 134(b). In this control example, the chance mode is set as the effect mode in some cases when the high probability state is set and when the time-saving state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 128, a game state suggestion effect is executed that changes the notification mode of the remaining time notification. This game state suggestion effect is set so that it appears more frequently in the chance mode during the high probability state than in the chance mode during the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In this control example, the presentation mode of the operation presentation (the presentation performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) during the chance mode is configured to be variable according to the operation timing and operation method of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(a), during the chance mode when the time-saving state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, during the high-speed change period until the special pattern change is executed 20 times, the operation presentation of "reach suggestion" which suggests whether the change presentation being executed will be in a reach state during the third pattern change, or "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state is configured to be executable, and thereafter (after the number of times the special pattern changes 21 times or later), the operation presentation of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode is configured to be executable. In addition, as an operation method, when a button is pressed and held for a long time, "long press", during the high-speed change period until the 20th special pattern change is performed, a "background mode transition" operation effect that changes the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 special pattern changes (second period), a "state suggestion" operation effect that suggests the currently set game state can be executed, and thereafter (after the 51st special pattern change), a "past state suggestion" operation effect can be executed to suggest the game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)).

As shown in FIG. 135(b), during the chance mode when the probability bonus state is set, if the button push "normal push" is executed as an operation method, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation effect of "reach suggestion" that suggests whether the fluctuation effect being executed will be in a reach state during the third symbol fluctuation, "state suggestion" that suggests the currently set game state, or "background mode transition" that transitions the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 times of the special symbol fluctuation (second period), the operation effect of "background mode transition" or "state suggestion" can be executed, and thereafter (after the special symbol fluctuation is 51 times or later), the operation effect of "background mode transition" can be executed. In addition, if the button is pressed and held "long press" as an operation method, the operation effect of "background mode transition" that transitions the background mode can be executed regardless of the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation.

As explained above, in this control example, when the time-saving state is set or when the probability bonus state is set, a "chance mode" can be set as the presentation mode, and the duration of the chance mode (100 time-savings) is divided into multiple periods according to the number of special pattern variations executed during the chance mode, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) is configured to differ for each set game state and period. As a result, when the chance mode is set, it becomes possible to have the player predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation presentation executed by the operation presentation, and therefore it is possible to execute a game that motivates the player to operate the operation means.

As explained above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if a "normal press" operation is performed on the frame button 22, the operation presentation of "transition to background mode" is less likely to be executed than in other periods. However, the high-speed fluctuation period (the period during which transition to background mode is less likely to occur) may be set at other times. For example, the period until the end of one special pattern fluctuation executed after the end of a jackpot game may be set as the normal time-saving fluctuation period, and the period from the execution of the second special pattern fluctuation after the end of a jackpot game to the execution of the twentieth special pattern fluctuation may be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.

By configuring it in this way, for example, during the first special pattern changing period after the end of a jackpot game, a comment such as "You won't be able to change the background mode from the next change! Choose your desired background now" can be displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notice mode to notify the player that a high-speed changing period will be set, preventing the player from suddenly entering a period during which the background mode cannot be changed (high-speed changing period), preventing the player from playing in the desired background mode, and reducing their motivation to play. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the device to display comments such as "Chance mode may be in a high-speed state! Don't give up!" and "When the display mode of the remaining number of times changes, it's your chance!" as a guide mode to explain the game content of the "chance mode" to the player during the one special pattern changing period after the end of a jackpot game.

In addition, in the case where the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special pattern fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, as in this first control example, the background mode during the "chance mode" can be selected during the playing period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), and when the "chance mode" is set, the player can be notified that the background mode cannot be changed for a specified period (high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will continue. The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this control example, a "circle" symbol), a winning game (normal winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change (regular symbol change time) is different depending on the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the normal symbol that is set. When the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is set, the regular symbol change time is set to 10 seconds, and when the high probability state (probability change state, time-saving state) of the normal symbol is set, the regular symbol change time is set to 3 seconds. This makes it possible to greatly deviate the frequency with which the regular symbol winning game is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol from the frequency with which the regular symbol winning game is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In other words, the regular symbol changing time can be shortened in the high probability state of the normal symbol compared to the low probability state of the normal symbol, thereby increasing the number of regular symbol lotteries (regular symbol lotteries) that can be executed per unit time, and further making it easier to win in the executed regular symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a regular symbol winning game when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, while making it easy to execute a regular symbol winning game when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

In this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time and winning probability are set to be more favorable to the player in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol, but this is not limited to this, and only one of them may be configured to be more favorable to the player. For example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the same normal symbol fluctuation time (e.g., 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. This prevents, for example, a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time it takes for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to play a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state for normal symbols (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) is difficult to play to the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game is easy to play, from transitioning to the time-saving state during the execution of a long period of normal symbol variation (normal symbol winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) during the normal state, resulting in a long period during which a normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state being set, despite the time-saving state being set.

As described above with reference to Figure 2, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has various devices arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is configured so that there is no difference (is unlikely to be any difference) in the game value obtained by the player whether a game is played in which the ball flows down to the left area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (left-hand play) or a game in which the ball flows down to the right-hand area (right-hand play). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to the perpendicular line at the center of the game board 13. In the lower area of the variable display unit 80, there are a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter and trigger a lottery for a first special symbol, a second ball entrance 640 located below the first ball entrance 64 and through which a ball can enter and trigger a lottery for a second special symbol, an electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a normal winning game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, and a variable winning device 65 located below the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery.

A ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left side area and half of the balls pass through the through gate 67 provided in the left side area. Both balls that pass through the through gate 67 and balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area by nails planted in the game board 13. Here, balls that flow straight down between the nails enter one of the two general ball entrances 63. In this control example, it is configured so that about 1/50 of the balls that flow down the left side area enter one of the two general ball entrances 63, and if a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (bonus) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 at a rate of 1 in 15 balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 644, four balls are paid out as prize balls. The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that when the electric device 640a is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640, and when the electric device 640a is open (shown in black in FIG. 2), one ball enters the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about 1 in 2 balls that are launched in left-handed play and flow down the left side area, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 644, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. The variable winning device 65 is configured so that almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640 when a jackpot game is not being played, and when a jackpot game is being played, two balls enter the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about 2 in 3 balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 644, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, we will explain the variable winning device 65. This variable winning device 65 is a variable ball entry means that is opened during a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and is configured so that a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game passes through a specific area (V-gate) provided in the internal area of the variable winning device 65, thereby setting a high probability state for the special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

Depending on the type of jackpot won, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 easily passes through the specific area (V gate) (high probability jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass through (normal jackpot game). In this control example, a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 easily passes through the specific area (V gate), i.e., a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific area (V gate) if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a high probability jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 has difficulty passing through the specific gate, i.e., a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate) even if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if a guaranteed jackpot game is played, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, the high probability state (guaranteed state) of the special pattern will not be set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this control example, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is not determined at the time when the jackpot game is played. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the round game (V round game) that is the easiest to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) is played in the round game played in the first round of the jackpot game. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until this V round game ends. In this way, by configuring the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can play to win various benefits (prize balls, high probability state of special patterns) in the jackpot game, which can increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when using the above-mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set in advance (for example, at the start of the jackpot game) the presentation mode of the notification effect for notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends (for example, the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period), and the presentation mode of the notification effect must be set during the jackpot game, when control processing related to ball output and control processing related to display are executed closely, resulting in a problem that the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this control example, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), and if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is executed, and only if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate), the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched. In this way, when normal play is performed during a jackpot game, the presentation mode of the notification effect is set in advance assuming a game state that is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched only if it is determined that an unexpected game state will be set, thereby reducing the frequency with which control processing is executed to set the presentation mode of the notification effect during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the special jackpot game, which is advantageous to the player, is configured to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game) before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if the special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot game ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is configured to be shorter.

In this way, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of the normal jackpot game would result in a problem that an unnatural notification presentation would be executed during the ending period because the lengths of the ending periods are different. Also, if a dedicated presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the special jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode must be stored in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in advance, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, and the length of the second half is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot (high probability jackpot, normal jackpot), and if the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V-gate) during a high probability jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V-gate) during a high probability jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a common length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play so that there is no large discrepancy between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area can be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 can be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to both the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 and the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the through gate 67 in the left side area is configured to allow 1/2 of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 to pass through. The through gate 67 in the right side area is configured to allow 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After this winning lottery for the second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the above-mentioned second symbol reserved lamp 84. There is one second symbol reserved lamp 84 for the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one time, but may be set to two or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right of the variable display device unit 80. In addition, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 when played from the left are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only some of the balls pass through the through gate 67.

Returning to FIG. 2 for further explanation, a variable winning device 65 with an opening width of approximately 50 mm is disposed below the variable display unit 80 (below the electric device 640a) so that both balls launched by left-handed play and flowing down the left side area, and balls launched by right-handed play and flowing down the right side area, can win. In this way, by providing a variable winning device 65 with a wide opening width, both balls that flow down the left side of the electric device 640a when played from the left and balls that flow down the right side of the electric device 640a when played from the right can win in the variable winning device 65.

Now, referring to FIG. 120, the specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 120(a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball that has flowed down over the open/close door 65b and won in the specific winning port 65a is configured to flow down in the left and right directions.

Specifically, a ball that flows down the left area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the first opening 65a1. Furthermore, a ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2.

Below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, a ball detection sensor (65s1, 65s2) is provided to detect a ball that has won the variable winning device 65. When the ball detection sensor detects a ball, a payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this way, by providing an opening (first opening 65a1) through which a ball that has flowed down the left area and won the variable winning device 65 can pass, and an opening (second opening 65b1) through which a ball that has flowed down the right area and won the variable winning device 65 can pass, and by providing a ball detection sensor for each opening, it is possible to play the game without any difference whether the player plays left-handed or right-handed during a jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 120(b), the flow of the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the ball that passes through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1, flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e, and then flows down either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

The downstream end of the third flow path 65e3 is provided with an outlet 65h1, and the balls that flow down the third flow path 65e3 enter the outlet 65h and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which the balls that enter the outlet 65h1 flow down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that enter the outlet 65h1.

A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and an outlet 65h2 is provided at the downstream end through which balls that have passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v enter. The specific area (V gate) is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the passing ball, and if it is detected that a ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a specified period during a jackpot game, the detection result is stored, and when the jackpot game ends, the stored result is referenced to set the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Here, the operation of the switching valve 65y during a jackpot game will be explained. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V solenoid 209a (see FIG. 137), not shown, and is configured to maintain a closed state (see FIG. 120(b)) for allowing balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the third flow path 65e3 when the V solenoid 209a is not energized (off state), and to maintain an open state for allowing balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the fourth flow path 65e4 when the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state).

This V solenoid 209a is normally in an OFF state, and is controlled to be ON only for a predetermined period during a jackpot game. Specifically, it is controlled to be ON when a specific round game (first round game) among the multiple round games executed during a jackpot game is started, and to be OFF when the specific round game (first round game) ends, or when the play time of the specific round game has elapsed a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds). In other words, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during a jackpot game.

This configuration allows the ball to enter the variable winning device 65 only when a jackpot game is being played (when jackpot control is being played), and also allows the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v. In addition, the bonus (setting of a high probability state for a special symbol) that is awarded based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v is configured to be awarded at the end of the jackpot game (processing executed at the end of the jackpot game), so that even if fraudulent activity is committed by passing a ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v at any time other than during a jackpot game, the bonus will not be awarded to the player.

In this control example, the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game is configured to execute a switching control for switching the switching valve 65y according to a predetermined rule based on the timing when a specific round game is started, but the switching control may be configured to be executed based on other triggers. For example, the switching control may be executed when the jackpot game starts, or when the opening period of the jackpot game ends, or when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game is measured and the measurement result becomes a specific number. In addition, when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 becomes a specific number, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game may be the discrimination target, or the number of balls in each round game may be the discrimination target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game a state in which it is easy to pass the balls to the specific area (V gate) is set.

Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when a jackpot game is executed and the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 65b may be configured to differ for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if the same switching control is executed on the switching valve 65y regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to reach the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the period in which a state in which it is easy for the ball to pass through to the specific area (V-gate) and a jackpot game in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 121, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 21). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 137). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 136, the flow of the game in this control example will be described. Fig. 136 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in Fig. 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states as game states: a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and is configured to set the normal state in the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, or the state after the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 operated (pressed)).

During the normal state, a game is played that mainly involves the selection of a first special symbol, which is executed by inserting a ball into the first ball entrance 64. In the normal state, in which a low probability state for the special symbol is set, the probability of winning a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/200, and when a jackpot is won, either "jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2) or "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected as the jackpot type. When "jackpot A" is selected, a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which it is easy to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is played, and when "jackpot B" is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is played.

If the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This high probability state ends when the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable) has been performed reaches 50 times, or when a jackpot is won, and the game state transitions to another game state. Specifically, if the number of times the special symbol lottery has been performed reaches 50 times while the high probability state is set, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a time-saving state before the 51st special symbol lottery is performed. In this control example, the process of transitioning the gaming state from the probability variable state to the time-saving state is configured to be executed when the special pattern variation corresponding to the 50th special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, but the 51st special pattern lottery need not be executed in a state in which a high probability state for the special pattern is set. For example, the gaming state may be transitioned immediately after the 50th special pattern lottery is executed (at the start of the 50th special pattern variation), or immediately before the 51st special pattern lottery is executed (at a timing when the execution conditions for the 51st special pattern lottery are met but the special pattern lottery has not been executed).

The special probability state is a high probability state for normal symbols, so the electric device 640a is more likely to open when a normal symbol is hit than in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the game is centered on the second special symbol lottery. In the special probability state, where a high probability state for special symbols is set, the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/50, and if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, one of the following jackpot types will be selected: "jackpot C" (selection rate 3/10), "jackpot D" (selection rate 4/10), or "jackpot E" (selection rate 3/10).

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which 4 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played, "Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which 7 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played, and "Jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, probability variable jackpot play will always be played. Therefore, in terms of the probability of playing probability variable jackpot play, the second special pattern lottery is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery.

In addition, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but in this control example, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 7 rounds of play are always executed, and if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, an average of 8.8 rounds of play (4 rounds is 30%, 7 rounds is 40%, and 16 rounds is 30%) are executed. Therefore, in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery. Note that, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, there is a possibility that 4 rounds of play will be executed, so the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game will be the smallest when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the first special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery.

Next, the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be explained. If the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state wins "jackpot B", if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state exceeds 50, or if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the high probability jackpot game, the time-saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100, or if a jackpot is won before reaching 100. In other words, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game (if jackpot B is won), the time-saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of 100 special symbol variations (the number of time-saving times is set to 100). On the other hand, if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state exceeds 50, the number of time-saving times is set to 50 after the high probability state ends.

During this time-saving state, the game state is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, similar to the above-mentioned probability state, so the electric device 640a is more likely to open, and the game state is one in which the second special symbol lottery is primarily executed. Also, the lottery probability for the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. In other words, in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower probability of winning than in the high probability state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the high probability state. In other words, in terms of the probability of winning the jackpot through the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is a game state that is less favorable to the player than the high probability state. Note that in this control example, the high probability state and the time-saving state are configured so that the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same, but this is not limited to this. For example, the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state and the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state may be different, and for example, the special symbol change may be executed in a shorter change time during the high probability state than during the normal state.

<Electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 138, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the following: the first winning type counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbols, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (conditions for changing) are met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, which contain information about the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed, are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern change based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery results for the special symbols are configured to be either a big win or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery results in a miss, the player may be able to win a small win that can grant a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, an opportunity can be provided for the player to be awarded a bonus, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, a small win type counter can be provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the small win type counter obtained can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbols is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a jackpot for the special pattern is determined when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a.

Now, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 140(a). FIG. 140(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first win random number table 202a specifies different values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 140(a), for a game state in which the special symbol has a low probability of winning (normal state, time-saving state), the first win random number counter C1 has a value of "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, and the other values ("5 to 999") are specified as the loss determination value. Also, for a game state in which the special symbol has a high probability of winning (high probability state), the first win random number counter C1 has a value of "0 to 19" as the jackpot determination value, and the other values ("20 to 999") are specified as the loss determination value. In other words, since the update range of the first winning random number table 202a is 1000 numbers from "0 to 999," the probability of a jackpot being determined in a low probability state for special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000), and the probability of a jackpot being determined in a high probability state for special symbols is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "big win" and "loss", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a third lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a shorter period (one round) than the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when a "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. Also, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202c to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 141.

Figure 141 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in Figure 141 (a), this jackpot type selection table 202d has a special jackpot 1 table 202d1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and a special jackpot 2 table 202d2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 141(b). FIG. 141(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, the special 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is set to "0-49" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(b), a "jackpot B" is defined as a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a normal jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot B", it is defined that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "15 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but differ in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot play, and are configured so that a jackpot play is executed in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot play with "jackpot A" than with "jackpot B." Therefore, "jackpot A" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot B."

Next, the contents stipulated in the special 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 241(c). FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special 2 jackpot table 202d2. This special 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 in this first control example specifies three jackpot types for the second special symbol (special symbol 2): "jackpot C" to "jackpot E."

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the special jackpot type counter C2 is set to a value in the range of "0 to 29" and "jackpot C" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 4, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "30 to 69" as the jackpot type "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot D", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 40% (40/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "70 to 99" and "jackpot E" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16, a certain jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the certain jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the certain jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the certain jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot E" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

In other words, the three jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game differs, with "jackpot E," which results in the most rounds of game, being the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and "jackpot A" being the least advantageous jackpot type for the player.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game will be played, making it a more advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state set after the jackpot game ends, compared to the first special pattern lottery, which has a 50% chance of playing a guaranteed jackpot game. Also, in terms of the number of rounds played during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery has a higher maximum number that can be won, and the second special pattern lottery has a lower minimum number that can be won. Also, the second special pattern lottery has a higher average number of prize balls that can be won.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, and in other respects, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous. Note that, in this control example, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are specified, but this is not limited to this, and various jackpot types may be set based on the same technical ideas as the jackpot types that can be set in each of the control examples described above.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the same number of rounds of jackpot play is executed for all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to allow a different number of rounds of play to be executed depending on the jackpot type selected. In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, the time-saving state is set for the same period (100 times of time-saving) after the jackpot play ends for all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the time-saving state is not set for some jackpot wins (some of the jackpot types that are set), or the number of time-saving times (time-saving end conditions) is different depending on the jackpot type. Furthermore, depending on the jackpot type selected, there may be a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is set at the end of the jackpot play, and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set.

Returning to FIG. 138, the explanation continues. The dynamic type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The dynamic type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the dynamic type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 167) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b defines a normal table 202b1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a special probability/time-saving table 202b2 used when the special probability state or time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected can be different depending on the game state.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to Fig. 142(b) and Fig. 143. Fig. 142(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table that is referenced when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are defined depending on the type of special symbol drawn and the result of the special symbol lottery that was executed.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202b1. In the normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the added time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds depending on the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the added time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the added time is "3.5 seconds", when it is "2", the added time is "4 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "4.5 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "5 seconds", when it is "4", when it is "5.5 seconds", when it is "5", when it is "6 seconds", when it is "6". When it is "6", the added time is "6.5 seconds". , if the number is "7", the additional time is "7 seconds", if the number is "8", the additional time is "7.5 seconds", if the number is "9-11", the additional time is "8 seconds", if the number is "12", the additional time is "8.5 seconds", if the number is "13", the additional time is "9 seconds", if the number is "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds", if the number is "15", the additional time is "10 seconds", if the number is "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds", if the number is "17", the additional time is "11 seconds", if the number is "18", the additional time is "11.5 seconds", and if the number is "19", the additional time is "12 seconds".

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the addition time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information contained in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) is set based on the information contained in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible to the player when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third pattern (a third pattern with the number 1 in this control example), a reach performance can be executed with various types of third patterns without varying the period from when the variation performance is executed to when the reach state is reached.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a Super (Reach) with a variation time of 43 to 52 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this Super is decided, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of either 13 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second increments depending on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and as the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the reach presentation can be changed according to the information (number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, if the number of seconds included in the addition command is between 3 and 12 seconds, a normal reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around one revolution and then stops) is executed, whereas if the number of seconds is between 13 and 22 seconds, a super reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around two revolutions and then stops) is executed.

By configuring in this manner, for example, in a case where a variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during an initial specified period, and then a variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, it is possible to set the period during which the same performance mode is executed based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time), and set the variable performance after the branching based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an added time). Therefore, for example, even if the overall variable time is the same, different variable performances can be easily set on the audio lamp control device 113 side by simply changing the proportion of the variable time that is accounted for by the basic time and the proportion indicated by the added time.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when a normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when a super reach is executed are the same, and the presentation style of the reach presentation is changed according to the length of the variable time set as the added time, but without being limited to this, the basic time for a normal reach may be set to 30 seconds and the basic time for a super reach to 40 seconds, and the added time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" just to determine the type of third pattern.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an added time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when SP is determined, a performance is executed in which the variation performance of the third pattern that has once reached the reach state is switched to another variation performance, so even if the type of the third pattern in the middle pattern column Z2 that is first visible to the player when the reach state is reached is always configured to be a specific third pattern (in this control example, the third pattern with the number 1 added), the display order of the third pattern in the middle pattern column Z2 can be changed in the middle of the variation to correspond to the third pattern that will finally stop without giving the player a sense of incongruity, so there is no need to set the type of the third pattern that will reach the reach state by changing the added time, as in the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this miss is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 8 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Here, if a miss is determined, a fluctuation performance of the third symbol is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss without entering a reach state. Therefore, there is no need to set the added time.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a variation pattern of a reach-miss with a variation time of 33 to 52 seconds is specified. When this reach-miss is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second units according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, so a detailed description is omitted. In other words, even if the lottery result is a miss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. In addition, when the lottery result is a miss, it is necessary to set the type of the third pattern to be stopped and displayed so that the third pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is a combination other than that of a jackpot, so that the voice lamp control device 113 performs a correction process so that the third pattern is set to a third pattern that is shifted by one from the setting content of the third pattern type based on the addition command referenced when a win is obtained. This makes it easy to set a presentation mode in which, when a reach miss presentation is executed, the third symbol is displayed stopped near the third symbol that is the jackpot combination (miss stop display).

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, as described above with reference to Fig. 124(b) to Fig. 126, the variation performance in the chance zone is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating a basic time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating an additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in the normal state, the performance mode of the special variation performance in which the third symbol varies vertically is set as shown in Fig. 124(b). Then, the performance mode in which the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stop display) at the timing when the basic time has elapsed is set as shown in Fig. 125(a). Then, when an addition command indicating an additional time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special miss), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the variation performance is ended.

On the other hand, if an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (if the fluctuation pattern is a special reach), a fluctuation effect is set in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted, as shown in Figure 125 (b) and Figure 126.

Next, the contents of the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2. This probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variable state or time-saving state is set, and each variation pattern is stipulated so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this control example, a high probability state (high probability state or time-saving state) for normal symbols is always set after the end of a jackpot game. The high probability state for normal symbols that has been set is configured to continue until a time-saving end condition is met. In this control example, the time-saving end conditions are a first time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times that special symbol variations have been executed since the high probability state for normal symbols was set reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition that is met when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed when the high probability state for normal symbols is set. When either of the time-saving end conditions is met, a transition is made from the high probability state for normal symbols to the low probability state for normal symbols.

During this high probability state of normal symbols (high probability state, time-saving state), it is set up so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state). This makes it possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time, providing players with an efficient game (lottery game for special symbols).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period in which the number of times the special symbol changes from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to "1 to 20 times", regardless of the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the acquired change type counter CS1, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is selected. In other words, the predetermined period from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol changes 20 times) becomes a high-speed change period (first period) in which the special symbol lottery is executed with a change time shorter than other periods. By setting this high-speed change period, it is possible to make the next jackpot game easier to execute in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player can think that the next jackpot game has been executed in relation to the first jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, during this high-speed change period, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" is always selected, so it is possible to easily set the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special symbol lotteries.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols), it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) will not have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is likely to be executed using the reserved ball for the first special symbol that has already been acquired (special symbol 1 reserved ball), and if a jackpot is won in the normal state where a probability bonus state or time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the special symbol 2 will have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is likely to be executed using the reserved ball for the special symbol 2.

In this way, immediately after the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, a special pattern lottery for any pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern) can be executed, so as shown in FIG. 143, the same variation pattern is selected regardless of the pattern type for a predetermined period of time after the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (the period until 20 special pattern variations have been executed). This allows the same special pattern variation to be executed regardless of which pattern type a special pattern lottery is executed, making it easier to set the performance period for a performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special pattern lotteries.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, this control example is configured so that when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, both the balls shot by left-handed play and the balls shot by right-handed play reach the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one in two balls, so that the special pattern lottery can be executed without interruption just by continuing to execute the game of shooting balls during the high probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the period until the high-speed fluctuation period ends, that is, 100 seconds, which is the period until the 20th special pattern fluctuation ends (5 seconds x 20 times), is set in advance as the high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous performance of 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous performance spanning 20 special pattern lotteries. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, a switching process for switching the performance mode of the continuous performance already set can be executed, and the process for executing the performance during the high-speed fluctuation period can be simplified.

In addition, a determination means may be provided to determine whether or not to temporarily stop the 100-second continuous performance set during the high-speed fluctuation period, and if it is determined that the period from when the currently executing special pattern fluctuation is stopped and the next special pattern fluctuation is executed is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), that is, if it is determined that the special pattern fluctuation has been interrupted, a process to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the continuous performance from progressing ahead even if the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period. In addition, an operation means (e.g., frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided, and if a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, a process to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance may be executed.

In this control example, the same fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected during the high-speed fluctuation period, but this is not limited to this, and a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time other than 5 seconds is set may be selected. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to set a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from when the presentation mode of the previously set 100-second continuous presentation is switched to when the special pattern indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, so that the jackpot win can be announced in a presentation mode that allows the player to fully understand the lottery results, improving the presentation effect.

In addition, instead of setting the continuous performance mode all at once for the time (100 seconds) expected as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) can be divided into multiple periods, and, for example, the first continuous performance to be executed during the first high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and the second continuous performance to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a performance mode (the performance mode for the latter half of the continuous performance period) that is not executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to execute the continuous performance for the entire high-speed fluctuation period, and the continuous performance may be executed only during a specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, the period from the 10th to the 20th fluctuation of the special pattern fluctuations (total of 20) executed during the high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation continues. If the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the big win game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern (win) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and if the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern (short miss) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

In this control example, when a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set, the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and during the second period in which 21 or more special pattern variations have been executed since the high probability state of a normal pattern was set, the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed as long as the game is continued. However, as described above in FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a game board 13 structure that allows balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 regardless of whether the game is played from the left or right, so that, for example, if the game is interrupted during the high probability state or time-saving state, the first special pattern lottery may be executed after the game is resumed.

As described above, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, unlike when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility (50% chance of winning) that a normal jackpot game will be played, and when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly played, the lottery result will be unfavorable to the player among the jackpot wins. In addition, in this control example, in the variable performance (variable performance using the third symbol) performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the presence or absence of a jackpot win, the type of jackpot can also be suggested to the player. For example, when the main symbol sz with an odd number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win, it suggests a jackpot win in which a high probability jackpot game will be played, and when the main symbol sz with an even number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win, it suggests a jackpot win in which a normal jackpot game will be played.

Therefore, in the case where a reach state (a state in which a part of the main pattern sz, which is a combination indicating a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is played, is displayed as a stopped state and the remaining pattern row is displayed as a moving state) is created with the even-numbered main pattern sz in the variable performance executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, the player is made to think that he/she won an unfavorable jackpot from the point before the special pattern change is displayed as a stopped state, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. Therefore, in this control example, in the case where a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is played is won in the first special pattern lottery in the game state (probability change state, time-saving state) in which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, a variable performance (double reach performance) is always executed in which both the main pattern sz with an odd number and the main pattern sz with an even number are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a). This prevents the player from thinking that they have won an unfavorable jackpot before the special symbol variation stops and is displayed.

To execute this double reach effect, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected. If the above-mentioned double reach effect, which is a variation effect executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, were executed only when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the player would know that the first special symbol has won the jackpot at the time the double reach effect was executed. Therefore, in this control example, a variation pattern (30-second variation time) for executing the double reach effect is selected for some cases (approximately 80%) where the first special symbol lottery is a miss, some cases (approximately 25%) where the second special symbol lottery is a miss, and some cases (approximately 5%) where the second special symbol lottery is a miss.

By configuring it in this way, when a double reach effect is executed during a sure chance state or a time-saving state, it becomes difficult to tell whether the corresponding special symbol drawing is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and it also becomes difficult to tell whether the drawing result is a jackpot or not, allowing the player to play with a sense of anticipation until the result of the double reach effect is displayed.

Furthermore, because the double reach effect is also configured to be executed for the second special symbol lottery, which always results in a guaranteed jackpot game being executed if a jackpot is won, it is easier to create an effect indicating that a jackpot has been won for which a guaranteed jackpot game is executed for the entire double reach effect (an effect in which the main symbols sz with odd numbers stop in a combination indicating a jackpot win) compared to when the double reach effect is executed only for the first special symbol lottery. This increases the expectation for a guaranteed jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation will continue. When the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol will fluctuate after the end of the big win game) is "50 times (specific period)", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game, a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. As the conditions for ending the high probability state of the special pattern, a first high probability end condition is established when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches 50 times, and a second high probability end condition is established when a jackpot with a special pattern is won while the high probability state of the special pattern is set. When either of the high probability end conditions is established, the game is configured to transition from the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state of the special pattern.

In other words, depending on the game results during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, a guaranteed bonus state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50, and then a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50, or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 after the jackpot game ends.

The display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a game state indication effect to indicate to the player the currently set game state. For example, when a V notification effect is executed to notify the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a notification effect (super chance mode effect) is executed to notify the player that the current game state is in a special probability state, and when the presentation mode during a jackpot game is set so that a V notification effect is not executed even if the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a common effect (chance mode effect) is executed to make it difficult to tell whether the current game state is in a special probability state.

When the Super Chance Mode effect is being executed, the special symbol fluctuation 50 times (specific period) will end the special symbol fluctuation state, so an effect is executed that indicates that the special symbol fluctuation state will end and that the chance mode (time-saving) will then be set, using the "20-second" fluctuation time set for the 50th special symbol fluctuation. Also, when the chance mode is being executed, an effect is executed that indicates whether or not the special symbol fluctuation state was set during the specific period.

In this way, when executing an information notification effect that notifies the player of information other than the lottery result of the special pattern (information to inform the player that the game state is changing or information to suggest the game state that was previously set) using the special pattern change period to show the lottery result of the special pattern during a specific period, by fixing the change time of the selected special pattern change, it is possible to reduce the variation in the presentation style (including the presentation time) of the information notification effect to notify the player of information other than the lottery result of the special pattern.

In this control example, the execution period of the special pattern change (the 50th special pattern change after the end of a jackpot) that ends the high probability state is set as the specific period, and the change time of the special pattern change is fixed at "20 seconds", but it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special pattern changes after the end of a jackpot as the specific period (the period during which a fixed change time is selected) including before and after the special pattern change that ends the high probability state, and to configure it so that the information notification performance can be executed using the change time of the special pattern change executed during that specific period.

The presentation mode of the information notification effect may be changed depending on the result of the special pattern lottery carried out during the specific period described above. For example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the presentation mode may be changed to one that does not notify information indicating that the special probability state is ending, or, regardless of the game state that is actually set, the presentation mode may be changed to one that indicates that the game state previously set (the game state set after the end of the previous jackpot game) is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state).

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period may be varied depending on the results of the special symbol lottery. For example, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the timing of the execution of the information notification effect may be delayed compared to when a jackpot is not won. This makes it possible to interest players not only in the content of the information notification effect, but also in the execution timing, thereby enhancing the effect of the presentation.

Also, as in the above example, if the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period is varied depending on the result of a special pattern lottery, the information notification effect may be set to be executed at a specific timing in advance, and if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (e.g., a jackpot), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may be varied from the specific timing described above, or the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may not be set in advance, and one execution timing may be determined from among multiple execution timings depending on the result of a special pattern lottery executed during a specific period.

Next, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern (win) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and when the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern (second super fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "60 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

This third period is a period during which the game state is in a time-saving state. In other words, even if a probability-changing state is set after the end of a jackpot game, this is a period during which the probability-changing end condition is met and the time-saving state is set. During this third period, as with the above-mentioned second period, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method executed. Since executing the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than executing the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery executed during this third period is configured to be more likely to select a variation pattern with a long variation time. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time-saving state, the first special symbol variation is executed with a variation pattern with a long variation time, making it easier to obtain reserved balls for the second special symbol during that time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the first special symbol lottery from being executed frequently during the time-saving state.

In addition, during this third period, the double reach effect (see Figure 131) is executed in the same way as during the second period described above, so that the variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected in the case of a jackpot win in the first special pattern lottery, some of the miss wins, and some of the jackpot wins and miss wins in the second special pattern lottery.

Next, we will explain the content of the various variation patterns stipulated for the second special symbol lottery when the special bonus state or time-saving state is set.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the number of changes (the number of times the special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot game) is "1 to 20 times (first period)", a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the acquired value of the change type counter CS1. In other words, during the first period, the same change pattern (5-second change) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, if the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198". If the lottery result is "lose", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198".

During the second period, which is a high probability state (probability state, time-saving state) of normal symbols in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, a variation pattern with a "10 second" variation time is selected, except for the variation pattern in which the above-mentioned double reach performance is executed (a variation pattern with a 30 second variation time). In other words, the second special symbol variation is configured to end in a short period of time when the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is executed efficiently. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 when the special symbol 2 reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit, allowing the player to play in a comfortable manner.

In this control example, the short-term fluctuation time is set to "10 seconds," but this fluctuation time may be set to be even shorter. In this case, it is preferable to set a time (e.g., 3 seconds) longer than the interval (approximately 1.2 seconds) that it takes for a ball fired into the game board 13 to reach the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 decreases even though the player is continuously firing balls, resulting in the first special symbol lottery, which is set as a lower priority than the second special symbol lottery, being executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)", regardless of the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected. The fluctuation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the fluctuation pattern selected in response to the first special symbol lottery described above, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted.

Next, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the big win game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198", and if the lottery result is "lose", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" (short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198".

As explained above, in this first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal table 202b1 and a special chance/time-saving table 202b2, and is configured so that the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern varies depending on the set game state. This makes it possible to vary the type of variation pattern selected depending on the set game state, and to show the player the results of the special pattern lottery in a variety of variation patterns, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the same data table (probability change/time-saving table 202b2) is referenced to select the variation pattern when the game state is set to the probability change state and when the time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the "chance mode" is set, which is a presentation mode that makes it difficult for the player to know whether the time-saving state or the probability change state is set, the type of variation pattern selected in response to the special pattern lottery executed can be used to prevent the player from understanding the set game state. Note that in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern during the probability change state and the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern during the time-saving state are the same, but this is not limited to the above, and different data tables may be referenced.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a data table for high probability variation, which is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the high probability variation state, and a data table for time-saving variation, which is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state, and provide a specific variation pattern that is specified only in one of the data tables as a type of variation pattern that is selected with a small probability (for example, 5%). This allows the player to grasp the currently set game state based on the type of variation pattern selected only when a specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the probability of each variation pattern being selected may be different between the data table for the probability variation mode and the data table for the time-saving mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the currently set game state by analyzing the bias in the variation patterns selected for the special symbol lottery performed during the "chance mode."

As described above, in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern is different depending on the game state that is set. However, the data table referenced may be selected based on conditions other than the game state. For example, when a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game ends, the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the same time-saving state may be different based on the game state that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special pattern) that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and whether or not the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game (whether or not a V was won).

In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is advisable to configure it so that a command containing information indicating the type of referenced data table (variation pattern selection table) is set. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving a variation pattern command, to determine the circumstances under which the current game state was set, in addition to the type of variation pattern currently set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, it can determine that, for example, even though a guaranteed jackpot game was executed, the ball was not able to enter the V and a time-saving state was set, and a dedicated presentation mode (for example, a "regret mode") can be set.

Returning to FIG. 138 for further explanation, the second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol (second symbol), it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is a winning symbol. This second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types: one for low probability of winning normal symbols, and one for high probability of winning normal symbols, which is higher than the low probability, and each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between low probability of winning normal symbols and high probability of winning normal symbols.

The contents stipulated in this second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 140(b). FIG. 140(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is a value of "0 to 2", and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 149".

In other words, in this control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed play) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol win during the normal state, making it difficult for a normal symbol win game to be executed during the normal state and for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a normal symbol win game based on a win of a normal symbol during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this control example, different lengths of fluctuation time are set as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation to indicate the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the set game state, and a longer fluctuation time (e.g., 10 seconds) is set when a low probability state of the normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation depending on the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to win the normal pattern lottery and enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this control example, if a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set is won, a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the electric role 640a is opened in an operating mode (long opening) that allows multiple balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that no matter what game state is set, the possibility of the second special symbol lottery being executed can be left open for the player, improving the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 167).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to Fig. 137, the explanation will continue. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 138. Now, with reference to Fig. 139(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. Fig. 139(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first win random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a big win type selection table 202d. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, and the big win type selection table 202d have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 138, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 137, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 138, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 139(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a special chance counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, a special chance setting flag 203m, a special chance passing counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a special chance active flag 203r, a special chance active timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the first ball entry port 64 (initial winning), up to the upper limit number (four in this control example).

The second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to the upper limit number (four in this control example).

The special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory area in which various counter values for starting the display of the special symbol variation are stored, and when the special symbol stops varying, if various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority to the first special symbol lottery, if various counter values are stored in both the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area and stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the start winning. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3, and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when it detects that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3, and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the special pattern variation (lottery), in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81, the data corresponding to one of the start winnings (counter values C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b described above is shifted to this special pattern reserved ball execution area. Note that in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area in which the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) is stored when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (start winning). When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer and stores it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (counter C4 value) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. The data of the reserved balls is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c in the order in which they passed through the through gate 67 (start winning), starting from the reserved areas with empty data that are consumed first.

In addition, when the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display performance based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and this is a memory for storing data (counter C4 value) to be referenced in processing such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the setting of the display (variable pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal pattern variable display performance, it shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c to this normal pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery and the display settings of the second pattern display device 83. In this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the counter up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a first special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning). The first special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one.

The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the counter up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a second special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning). The second special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special pattern jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), and performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first pattern display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special pattern variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation display performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second pattern display device 83 up to one time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a variable display of a normal pattern is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game status storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game status, and stores the game status corresponding to the game status (setting status of the time-saving counter 203h, setting status of the special probability counter 203i) that will be set after the end of the big win game. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, the normal status is stored; when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, the time-saving status is stored; and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is greater than 0, the special probability status is stored.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is being played, a winning game state (jackpot state) indicating that a jackpot game is being played and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played are also stored. In addition, regular jackpot game in progress information indicating that a regular jackpot game is being played is also stored.

Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

The information stored in this game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is configured to set a status command corresponding to the information stored in the game status storage area 203g during the start-up process (see FIG. 166) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

This allows the audio and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and is set to a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set. After the end of a jackpot game, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot that was won is set in this time-saving counter 203h (see S2103 in FIG. 170). When a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state for normal symbols is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted based on the special pattern lottery (variation). When the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends and a transition to a low probability state of the normal pattern occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be configured to continue until the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the normal pattern and the condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the number of times the special pattern is drawn (varied). However, without being limited to this, for example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be decremented when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control unit 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be decremented when the lottery result of each pattern lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special normal win win).

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by one, but the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented multiple times (for example, by 2) in a lump depending on the type of termination condition that has been met, or the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time-saving counter 203h. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (jackpot type). This allows players to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot game that has been played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The probability change counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set is set. A value is set in this probability change counter 203i after the end of a jackpot game based on the ball passing through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (see S2102 in FIG. 170). If a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state of a special symbol is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability counter 203i is set, and the value of the probability counter 203i is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the probability counter 203i becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol ends and a transition to a low probability state of the special symbol occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to continue until the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the probability counter 203i may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol and the condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol is drawn (varied), but this is not limited thereto. For example, the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special normal win win).

Furthermore, the value set in the probability change counter 203i may be different based on the type of jackpot that was won and the passing status of the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v. Similarly to the above-mentioned subtraction of the value of the time-saving counter 203h, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be subtracted based on conditions other than the number of times the special pattern changes. When the subtraction conditions for subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203i are met, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be subtracted multiple times at once. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the high probability state of the special pattern will continue, so that the player can keep an eye on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed during the high probability state of the special pattern without getting bored.

In addition, in this control example, the condition for terminating the probability change state, that is, the condition for decrementing the value of the probability change counter 203i, is set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability change counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win), the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented, or the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented based on the ball entering a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the special probability counter 203i is decremented by one, but it may be configured to decrement multiple values of the special probability counter 203i at once (for example, 2) depending on the type of end condition that is met, or it may be configured to decrement the value of the special probability counter 203i so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the special probability counter 203i. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the special probability state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the special probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the high probability state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the high probability state (jackpot type). This allows the player to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game that was played, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203j is set on when it is time to end the variable display that indicates a jackpot. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203j is set off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203k is on, it means that a jackpot game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot game is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203k is set to on when a jackpot game (special game state) starts after a special symbol is selected as a jackpot (see S1903 in FIG. 168). It is also set to off when the jackpot game (special game state) ends (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 157), the jackpot flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The probability change setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a ball has entered (flowed down) into a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that a ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific area (V gate) 65v (passing through the probability change switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the probability change setting flag 203m is set to ON (see S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203m is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). In addition, this probability change setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned back on (when the power is turned on). It is also set to off when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

If the special chance setting flag 203m is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance setting flag 203m was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203m was passed, the special chance setting flag 203m may be set to on and the game may be restored. In this case, whether the special chance setting flag was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203n, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203m to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the game establishment.

The special chance passing counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the special chance switch (flowed down a specific area) during one round during a jackpot game (one round of a jackpot in this embodiment). The sum of the special chance passing counter 203n and the discharge number counter 203t described later can be used to determine whether all balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. The special chance passing counter 203n is updated by adding one each time a ball passes through the special chance switch (flows down a specific area). After executing a process to determine whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls discharged, the counter is reset to the initial value "0". The special chance passing counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, the counter is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game, and is updated by incrementing by one when a win in the specific winning port 65a is detected. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is reset to the initial value "0" after determining whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203o) matches the number of balls dispensed (the total value of the dispense number counter 203t and the special chance passing counter 203n). The value of this winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball discharge period after one round has ended and the specific winning port 65a has closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, it means that it is the ball discharge period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning port 65a was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining whether the time required for the winning balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when a preset round ends and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q in advance. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are stuck in the variable winning device 65.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203m may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability state from being improperly granted.

The high probability valid flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (entry) of a game ball that passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is valid after the switching valve 65y has been switched to a configuration that does not allow balls to be allocated to the specific area (V gate) 65v. When this high probability valid flag 203r is set to on, it indicates that it is a normal period for game balls to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

The special chance valid timer 203s is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203r described above is set to ON. This special chance valid timer 203s makes it possible to determine the period required for a game ball to pass through the special chance switch normally after the switching valve 65y is switched to a configuration in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (V gate) 65v. In this embodiment, the time required for a game ball that has reached the switching valve 65y to pass through the special chance switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as illegally putting a gaming ball into a specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passing through the special probability switch, or using a piano wire or the like to push the gaming ball up from below the special probability switch and pass it through, or using radio waves or the like to cause the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the ball has passed through.

The dispensed ball counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls dispensed from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This dispensed ball counter 203t is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dispensed balls.

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for playing the game, counters, flags, etc.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 144(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal special chart 2 performance selection table 222b, a special chance performance selection table 222c, a continuous preview execution selection table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation performance selection table 222f.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In this control example, a variation effect (see FIG. 123) is executed in which the third pattern is displayed by scrolling horizontally on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the special pattern variation being executed. In this variation effect, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/loss determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play (special pattern game) while predicting whether the current special pattern variation will result in a jackpot win by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third pattern display device 81.

The normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the effect mode of the third symbol when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different effect modes (effect contents) are specified according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose determination result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

In this control example, when the normal state is set and a win is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric device 640a opens for 5 seconds to play a normal symbol winning game. The system is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be played by inserting a ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game. In other words, in a game state (normal state) in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to play, if a predetermined execution condition is met (if a normal symbol winning game is won), it is configured so that it is easier to obtain the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved ball) (easier to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640) for a predetermined period (during the normal symbol winning game period).

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), a variation pattern with a variation time of "10 seconds" and a variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" can be selected, and when the second special symbol lottery in which the variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" is set is executed, the presentation mode of the variation presentation is set by referring to the normal special symbol 2 presentation selection table 222b.

Now, referring to FIG. 145, the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b will be explained. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b. This normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the third symbol variation performance when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are specified according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, a common miss reach effect is executed in correspondence with the base time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 125(a)), and then, a pseudo-variation effect (see FIGS. 125(b) to 126) is executed during the added time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected by referring to the normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 79" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3 effect" and a range of "80 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 89" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 1 effect" and a range of "90 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 4 effect."

In addition, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, a "special end effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 1 to 4, and a "pseudo none effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 0.

If the lottery result is a miss, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 3 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 2 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 1 effect", and if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, "no pseudo effect" is specified.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when setting the presentation mode of the pseudo-variable presentation of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the reserved number of special symbols 2 and the reserved number of special symbols 1 is determined, and the pseudo-variable presentation is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to think that the pseudo-variable presentation executed during one special symbol variation period is a variation presentation corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Furthermore, since the number of pseudo fluctuations (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) executed in the pseudo fluctuation performance is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special symbols 2 already acquired, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state have been used. Therefore, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a jackpot is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that he or she has won a jackpot as a result of acquiring many reserved special symbols 2 during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state. Also, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a miss is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 have been used up, and then a fluctuation performance using the reserved special symbols 2 is executed (as the chance zone continues), so it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

In addition, this control example has pseudo-variation effects (special pseudo 2 effect, pseudo 4 effect) that are set only when a jackpot is won, so players can be interested in the number of pseudo-variations executed in the pseudo-variation effects and the number of reserved special charts 2.

Next, the contents of the special probability variation performance selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special probability variation performance selection table 222c. This special probability variation performance selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced when setting a variation performance when a variation pattern with a base time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the special probability variation state (time-saving state), i.e., during the high probability state of the normal symbol. This special probability variation performance selection table 222c is referenced when setting the presentation mode of the variation performance for the special symbol variation to be executed, and is set in the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies the player that the special probability variation state is in progress (S5005: Yes in FIG. 183) in the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern to be executed this time is "30 seconds". It is referenced when the time period for the currently executed variation pattern (basic variation time) is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes) (S5112 in FIG. 184: Yes) and the variation time (basic variation time) is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes) during the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182).

In this control example, when the first special pattern lottery is executed in a high probability state for normal patterns, in order to prevent a situation from occurring in which the player realizes that he or she has won a jackpot that can only be won in the first special pattern lottery (a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played) before the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a double reach effect is executed in which both the third pattern (third pattern with an even number) indicating a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played, and the third pattern (third pattern with an odd number) indicating a jackpot that results in a special jackpot game being played, are in a reach state.

Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to know that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery when the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed in the probability variable state or the time-saving state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is also executed in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, which always executes the probability variable jackpot game when a jackpot is won. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are both configured to be able to select a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds", and the double reach effect is executed when this "30 seconds" variation pattern is selected. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same variation time (30 seconds) is set and the double reach effect, which is the same variation effect, is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of the special symbol variation being executed by the variable effect being executed, and by sharing the performance data used for the variable effect, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the performance data used for various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 146, the special chance performance selection table 222c specifies different performance modes depending on the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (the result of the special symbol lottery), and the value of the performance counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a special chance jackpot (jackpot A), a "special chance single reach" is specified for the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49" and a "double reach" is specified for the range of "50 to 99." When it is a normal jackpot (jackpot B), a "double reach" is specified, and when it is a miss, a "non-reach" is specified.

In addition, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a jackpot, a "special double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 49" on the performance counter 223f, and a "double reach" is set in the range of "50 to 99". If the result is a miss, a "double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 4" on the performance counter 223f, a "double reach" is set in the range of "5 to 10", and a "non-reach" is set in the range of "11 to 99".

By configuring it in this way, whether the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability bonus state or the second special symbol lottery is executed, a "double reach" (a reach effect in which two or more third symbols, including the third symbol corresponding to a normal win, are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a)) will be executed, making it difficult for the player to tell which third symbol change effect is being executed corresponding to which special symbol lottery when a "double reach" is executed.

When "special double reach" is set, the presentation mode of "double reach" is set first, and then a reach presentation is executed in which the presentation mode changes to "probable double reach" as shown in FIG. 131(b). Therefore, even if "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, the player can play the game while expecting it to be upgraded to "probable double reach" midway through. Note that in this "special double reach", the timing at which the presentation mode of the reach presentation changes is when the middle symbol row Z2 has completed one or two revolutions, but this is not limited to this, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 22.

When the second special symbol change is executed during normal operation, if a change pattern (special miss) with a change time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, the miss reach effect shown in FIG. 125(a) is executed, and then the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a miss. On the other hand, if a change pattern (special win) with a change time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, then after the symbol changes for 10 seconds, the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a jackpot win (for example, "777").

In this way, by providing a special variation pattern that executes pseudo-multiple variation effects during one special pattern variation period, and a normal variation pattern that executes one variation effect during one special pattern variation period, as variation effects corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the normal state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell when a new second special pattern variation has been executed, allowing the player to play while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In addition, the more variable effects (including simulated effects) that are executed during the chance zone, the higher the chance of winning the jackpot, so players can play while hoping that the chance zone will continue for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, the normal variation pattern variation time (10 seconds) is set to be the same as the pseudo variation time (10 seconds) of one execution of the special variation pattern that executes multiple pseudo variation effects during one special pattern variation period. For example, when a second special pattern variation executed in the normal variation pattern is executed after a second special pattern variation executed in the special variation pattern, a 10-second variation effect is repeatedly executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether a pseudo variation effect is being repeatedly executed as a special variation pattern or whether a special variation pattern and a normal variation pattern are being executed consecutively. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing a new second special pattern variation is executed, so that the player can play while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation during the normal state, the variation performance of the special variation pattern is executed. However, without being limited to this, a variation time other than "40 seconds" may be selected as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state. Also, in this control example, the pseudo variation time, which is part of the variation performance of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and when the expectation of a jackpot is high, the pseudo variation performance is more likely to be executed for a length other than 10 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player play while expecting that the execution period of one variation performance will be longer.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), we will continue the explanation. The continuous preview execution selection table 222d is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to establish the execution conditions for a continuous preview performance that is executed across multiple periods of special pattern variation, based on the winning information (whether or not a jackpot has been won) contained in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. When the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are established here, a special effective time is set that determines whether operation on the frame button 22 is valid. Then, if the frame button 22 is operated within the special effective time, the continuous preview performance is executed.

When this continuous preview performance is executed, the background mode changes to a different background mode (sky mode) from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a continuous performance is executed using the period until the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied is displayed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, during the high speed fluctuation period (the period from when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to when the 20th special pattern fluctuation is executed), the background mode is configured to be less likely to change based on the operation of the frame button 22 compared to other periods. Even during such a high speed fluctuation period, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

Also, unlike normal background mode transitions, it is possible to execute a background mode transition that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, during high-speed variation periods, the variation time of the special symbol variation is likely to be shorter than in other periods, so if the background mode is transitioned as in other periods, there is a risk of missing the results of the crucial special symbol lottery, and so the system is configured to make it difficult to transition to background mode. However, when transitioning to background mode based on the execution of continuous preview performances, continuous preview performances are executed using the variation time of multiple special symbol variations, so the results of the continuous preview performances are not displayed immediately after the background mode transition. Therefore, even if a background mode transition is executed, a performance that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, an effect (operation effect) other than the background mode transition can be executed, and the configuration is such that the player is encouraged to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby preventing early boredom with the game. Among these, the background mode transition is executed based on the establishment of the execution conditions for the continuous preview effect, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player, increasing the interest of the game.

Now, referring to FIG. 147(a), the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d will be described. FIG. 147(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147(a), the continuous preview execution selection table 222d specifies whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met in correspondence with the lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern) included in the received winning information, the number of reserved special patterns 2 (the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern), and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a "jackpot", the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79", "continuous preview available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, and in the range of "80 to 198", "continuous preview not available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are not met. Also, when the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "continuous preview available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, and in the range of "150 to 198", "continuous preview not available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are not met.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss", the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 194", "no consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are not met, and in the range of "195 to 198", "consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are met. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "no consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are not met, and in the range of "190 to 198", "consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are met.

As described above, in this control example, the more the number of reserved special symbols 2, the easier it is to meet the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance, and further, the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are more likely to be met when the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot than when it is a miss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player eager to play (a game in which the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640) in order to execute the continuous preview performance, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, it is configured so that the more the number of reserved special symbols 2, the higher the expectation of a jackpot when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous preview performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, it is possible to make the player eager to play (a game in which the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640), and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this control example, when a winning information command (winning information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110, the continuous preview execution selection table 222d is referenced to determine (determine) only whether the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are met. Even if the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are met, the continuous preview performance is not executed at that point, and is executed when the frame button 22 is operated within a specific period after the execution conditions are met. As a result, when multiple balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during one special symbol variation period and multiple winning information commands are received, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the winning information that is the subject of the execution conditions being met. Therefore, when a continuous preview performance is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous preview performance will continue, and it is possible to prevent the content of the continuous preview performance from becoming monotonous.

As described above, this control example is configured not to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met, but this is not limited to this and it may be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) performance to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for execution have been met. For example, it may be configured to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met by displaying the word "Waiting" in the secondary display area Ds. By configuring it in this way, when a notification (suggestion) performance is executed, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the consecutive preview performance, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), an icon HR10 resembling a frame button 22 is displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm as a valid period notification mode capable of notifying the player that a valid period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 by the player has been set (that the valid period is in progress), but it is configured so that it is not possible (or difficult) to determine from the display mode of the icon HR10 whether a special valid time has been set, which is set when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, or whether a normal valid time has been set. With this configuration, the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the continuous preview performance, since he or she will not know whether the continuous preview performance or the normal operation performance will be executed until he or she operates the frame button 22.

Unlike the configuration of this control example, the display mode of the icon HR10 may be configured to allow the player to determine whether the currently set effective period is the special effective period or the normal effective period, or the timing at which the icon HR10 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to allow the player to determine whether the currently set effective period is the special effective period or the normal effective period. In addition, the period during which the special effective period is set may be different from the period during which the normal effective period is set (for example, 3 seconds after the special pattern variation begins), and the player may not be notified (suggested) that the special effective period has been set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated to execute the continuous notice performance, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. Similarly, in the case where the display mode is configured not to notify (suggest) that the special effective period is set, only the performance that notifies (suggests) that the execution conditions for the continuous notice performance have been established (for example, displaying the characters "Waiting" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executable. This makes it possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being operated unnecessarily when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are not met. In addition, when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met and the frame button 22 is operated outside of the special effective time, a notification display may be displayed to inform the player that the special effective time is currently outside (for example, a display of "Not now" in the secondary display area Ds), or a guide display may be displayed to inform the player of the special effective time (for example, a display of "Please press again in 2 seconds" in the secondary display area Ds).

In addition, in this control example, when a winning information command containing winning information for the second special symbol is received, processing is performed to establish the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance by referring to the consecutive preview performance table 222d, but this is not limited to this, and the consecutive preview performance may also be configured to be established when a winning information command containing winning information for the first special symbol is received.

Returning to FIG. 144, the explanation will be given. The V notification execution selection table 222e is a data table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a high probability state (probability state) of a special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed, a jackpot game in which the ball is more likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (probability jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (normal jackpot game) are executable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and depending on the position of the switching valve 65y, the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is allocated to a third flow path 65e3 that is impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v, and a fourth flow path 65e4 that can pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v. This switching valve 65y is controlled so that it is switched to a position that allows the ball to be allocated to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round of play when a guaranteed big win game is executed.

The V notification effect is an effect that can execute the following for a player playing a jackpot game: a V guidance effect that informs a player playing a jackpot game of the period (V period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the game method for aiming at the specific area (V gate) 65v; a V period effect that informs the player that the current time is a V period; a V success effect that informs the player that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period; and a V failure effect that informs the player that the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. By executing this V notification effect, when a high probability jackpot game is played, the player can easily play a game to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and since the player is informed that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this control example, after a normal jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state is set, a "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see FIG. 134). Furthermore, the "chance mode" is also set in some cases where a probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game. This allows the player to play while expecting a probability variable state, since the possibility of a probability variable state being set internally can be left even when a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game. However, if a V notification presentation is executed during a jackpot game, it is easy to know whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and as a result, if the "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, even if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player may have a mistrust that the probability variable state has disappeared. In particular, in a pachinko machine 10 like this control example, where the condition for ending the special variable state is met when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, the special variable state ends without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, so there is a strong risk that the player will think that the special variable state was not set even though the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

In this control example, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game, and the presence or absence of a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined based on the result of the process. Then, during a jackpot game in which a V notification effect is not executed, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v (if a special probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to determine whether a special probability state is set internally, so that a player playing the "chance mode" can play in the hope that a special probability state has been set, without causing distrust to the player.

Now, referring to FIG. 147(b), the contents of the V notification execution selection table 222e will be explained. FIG. 147(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the V notification execution selection table 222e. This V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a V notification presentation during the current jackpot game (S4704 in FIG. 180) when it is determined that it is time to start a special jackpot game (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes) in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), the V notification execution selection table 222e specifies whether or not a V notification is to be executed (the judgment result of whether or not a V notification effect is to be executed) in accordance with the jackpot type (the jackpot type that won the jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed this time and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "V notification yes" indicating that a V notification effect is to be executed is specified, and when the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "150 to 198", "V notification no" indicating that a V notification effect is not to be executed is specified. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C, D, E", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "V notification yes" is specified, and when the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "190 to 198", "V notification no" is specified.

When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, in which a special jackpot game is executed, the V notification effect is executed about 75% of the time. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 50% of the time it will be a special jackpot game ("jackpot A"), and the remaining 50% of the time it will be a normal jackpot game ("jackpot B"). Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game in about 37.5% of cases, and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game in about 62.5% of cases. Also, it is configured so that the probability of a special jackpot game being executed among the cases where the V notification effect is not executed is about 20%.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot C, D, E" is set, in which a jackpot game with a high probability of being played is set, the V notification effect is executed about 90% of the time. Here, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, it is configured to always be a jackpot game with a high probability of being played ("jackpot C, D, E"). Therefore, in reality, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a jackpot game without a V notification effect is executed about 10% of the time. In this way, by providing a case where the V notification effect is not executed even for a jackpot win in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes a jackpot game with a high probability of being played, the percentage of times when the game state is in a high probability state can be increased when the V notification effect is not executed, that is, when the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, the ratio of V notification effects being executed is different between winning a jackpot ("jackpot A") in which a special jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery and winning a jackpot ("jackpot C, D, E") in which a special jackpot game is executed in the second special symbol lottery. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery, which makes it difficult to execute a special jackpot game, is configured to make it more difficult to execute a V notification effect when a special jackpot game is executed, compared to the second special symbol lottery, which makes it easier to execute a special jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the frequency with which a V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game can be increased, making it easier for the player to have a sense of expectation even when a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game based on the first special symbol lottery, in which a normal jackpot game can be executed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147(b), the execution rate of the V notification effect is varied depending on the type of jackpot, but the execution rate of the V notification effect may also be varied depending on other factors. For example, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the number of times a jackpot is won without transitioning to the normal state (the so-called number of consecutive wins), or the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22. By varying the execution rate of the V notification effect depending on various conditions in this way, multiple apparent probability rates (the rate at which the V notification effect is executed in all jackpot wins) can be set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this control example, the above-mentioned V notification effect is configured to be executable only when a guaranteed jackpot game is executed, that is, when a jackpot game in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, but it is not limited to this, and the V notification effect may also be configured to be executable when a normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, the V notification effect is executed in accordance with the timing when the V period (the period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the guaranteed jackpot game (the timing when the round game of the first round is executed), and finally, a V failure effect is executed to notify that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Furthermore, if the V failure effect is executed despite normal play during the jackpot game, for example, a V failure effect may be executed even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the guaranteed jackpot game, and a "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, a pattern can be set in which the V notification effect is not executed during the guaranteed jackpot game whether the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the V notification effect is always executed when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes the guaranteed jackpot game when a jackpot is won.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the explanation will be continued. The button operation time effect selection table 222f is a data table that is referenced when determining the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operating means, when the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, and is referenced (see S5315 in FIG. 186) when it is determined that a valid operation has been executed on the frame button 22 during the chance mode in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113. In this way, by varying the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the player operates the frame button 22 by referring to the button operation time effect selection table 222f, it is possible to provide the player with a wide variety of operation effects.

Now, with reference to FIG. 148(a), the contents of the button operation effect selection table 222f will be explained. FIG. 148(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 148(a), the button operation effect selection table 222f defines a time-saving state selection table 222f1 that is referenced when the time-saving state is set, and a special probability state selection table 223f2 that is referenced when the special probability state is set.

In this control example, the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode when the time-saving state is set and in some cases when the probability variable state is set. A common variation presentation is executed during the "chance mode" regardless of the set game state. Furthermore, the same variation pattern table (probability variable/time-saving table 202b2) is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when the probability variable state is set and when the time-saving state is set. This makes it difficult to know whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time-saving state from the special pattern variation executed during the "chance mode" and the variation presentation of the third pattern executed in response to the special pattern variation, so that the player can play while expecting that the current game state is the probability variable state.

However, if a player playing the "Chance mode" is not provided with information suggesting the currently set game state, there is a problem that the player will quickly become bored with playing in the "Chance mode". Therefore, in this control example, multiple types of operation effects are configured to be executable during the "Chance mode", and the execution rate of each operation effect is configured to vary depending on the set game state. In other words, the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, but by varying the rate at which each operation effect is selected, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the multiple operation effects that are actually executed. This provides the player with the fun of predicting the game state.

The presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the normal state is set, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies that a special state is set, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed as part of the variable presentation are also configured to determine and execute one of multiple types of presentation modes, but detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. This time-saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set, and defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(b), when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "none" indicates that the operation effect will not be executed, in the range of "150 to 189", "reach suggestion" indicates an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicates an effect to suggest the currently set game state. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned to the range of "0 to 198" is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

In this control example, multiple operation methods are set that the player can execute with the frame button 22, including a "normal press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for less than two seconds, and a "long press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for two seconds or more. Different operation effects are executed depending on the operation method used by the player. This allows the player to execute various operation effects by selecting the operation method of their choice. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In this control example, the above-mentioned two types of operation methods are used as the operation methods that the player can operate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an operation means other than the frame button 22 (e.g., a second frame button) and a different operation presentation may be selected depending on the type of frame button pressed by the player. Alternatively, a plurality of operation methods may be set in accordance with the order of operations performed on a plurality of operation means within a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a "normal press" is determined when the player presses the frame button 22, and then, if the pressed state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds), an additional determination is made that it is a "long press," thereby executing an operation presentation dedicated to a "long press."

Furthermore, as operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that the player can press, operation means consisting of a lever member that the player can tilt up, down, left, right, and the like, or a rotating member that the player can rotate may be provided. Also, instead of the player directly operating a member, an operation means (such as a touch sensor) may be provided that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed by providing a proximity sensor with a predetermined detection area and having the proximity sensor detect a hand that has entered the detection area, and any operation means that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation at will and allows the player to select different operation methods depending on the content of the operation may be provided.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described, but this is not limited to this, and three or more types of operation methods may be provided, or only one type of operation method may be provided. Here, if only one type of operation method is provided, it may be configured so that different operation presentations are executed depending on the interval at which the operation is executed. This makes it possible to allow the player to select from a variety of operation presentations, even if there is only one type of operation method itself.

Returning to FIG. 148(b), we will continue to explain the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. When the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating a presentation to suggest the currently set game state is specified.

If the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variation period (third period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be transitioned is specified. Also, if the operation method is "long press", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state that was set in the past (at the time when "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 198".

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation time effect selection table 222f will be explained. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2. This probability variable state selection table 223f2 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the probability variable state is set, and it defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 119", "none" indicates that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "120 to 139", "reach suggestion" indicates an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation, in the range of "140 to 189", "state suggestion" indicates an effect to suggest the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned. Also, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned.

In addition, when the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified, and in the range of "170 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified.

If the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, if the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state that was set in the past (at the time when "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 198".

As explained above, when the "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode after the end of a big win game, the presentation mode of the operation presentation is selected by referring to different data tables for the time-saving state and the probability bonus state, and the ratio at which each presentation mode is selected varies depending on the set game state. This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation to be executed, which makes it possible for the player to be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, among multiple game states (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode at a specific operation timing, a presentation mode (advantageous presentation mode) that is likely to be executed when a favorable game state (probability bonus state) that is advantageous to the player is set is provided, for example, with a "state suggestion" operation presentation executed by a "normal press" during the "first period." This allows the player to play while building up a sense of expectation that a favorable game state has been set when the "state suggestion" operation presentation is executed by a "normal press" during the "first period."

Furthermore, since the operation effect can be executed multiple times during the "first period", the more times the operation effect is executed in the advantageous performance mode described above during the "first period", the higher the expectation that an advantageous game state will be set, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among multiple game states (probable bonus state, time-saving state) in which the "chance mode" can be set as the presentation mode, a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode) is executed only when an advantageous game state (probable bonus state) that is advantageous to the player is set. For example, an operation presentation of "background mode transition" executed by "normal press" during the "first period" is set as a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode), so that when the operation presentation of "background mode transition" is executed by "normal press" during the "first period", it is possible to know that an advantageous game state has been set.

In addition, as the advantageous presentation mode and the confirmed presentation mode described above, presentation modes that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal press" during the "second period") are used. In more detail, the "state suggestion" presentation mode is configured so that when it is executed by "normal press" during the "first period", the expectation that a special state is set is high, and when it is executed by "normal press" during the "second period", the expectation that a time-saving state is set is high. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of playing while analyzing which presentation mode was used to execute the operation presentation during which period when the "chance mode" is set.

Above, with reference to Figures 148 and 149, the contents of the presentation modes of the operation presentation that can be selected when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), and the contents of the data table (button operation presentation selection table 222f) that is referenced when making the selection have been explained. In this first control example, however, different data tables are referenced depending on the set game state. In each data table, the same presentation mode is specified with a different selection ratio. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state from the presentation mode of the executed operation presentation alone, and by executing multiple operation presentations, it is possible to grasp the current game state by grasping the selection ratio of each presentation mode. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play by executing the operation presentation multiple times.

In this control example, different data tables are referenced depending on the set game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to reference different data tables and select the presentation mode of the operation presentation based on the currently set game state and the currently set presentation mode. In this way, when a probability variable state is set, different operation presentations can be executed when the presentation mode is set to "super chance mode" and when it is set to "chance mode."

Here, when "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode, for example, there is no need to execute a "State Suggestion" presentation mode that suggests that the current game state has been set. Instead, it is better to specify a "Reach Suggestion" presentation mode or a "Preview Suggestion" presentation mode that suggests whether or not the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains information indicating a specific lottery result (a big win or a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of more than a predetermined time is set). This makes it possible to motivate the player to execute the operation presentation even when "Super Chance Mode" is set.

Furthermore, the type of data table (button operation time effect selection table 222f) for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect may be configured to differ depending on the game state when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special pattern), the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, or the presence or absence of a V win during the jackpot game.

In this case, for example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state and the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "chance mode" can be made different between the case where the "chance mode" is set after the end of a normal jackpot game and the case where the ball cannot enter the V during a special jackpot game and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set after the special jackpot game ends, it is preferable to specify a presentation mode of "past jackpot type suggestion" that suggests that the previous jackpot game was a special jackpot game. This makes it possible to make the player think that a special jackpot state is set even though the time-saving state is actually set. In addition, it is also possible to specify a presentation mode of "past game history notification" that notifies the player that a V was not entered even though the previous jackpot game was a special jackpot game. This makes it easier to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Next, referring to FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a subordinate state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h, a special performance in progress flag 223i, a V winning flag 223j, a V performance execution flag 223k, a V notification flag 223m, a time reduction counter 223n, a special continuous notice flag 223o, a performance mode memory area 223p, a continuous notice in progress flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operation counter 223t, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The command memory area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for those commands is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 223a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and executes processing according to that command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and the winning information contained in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 is stored in each of these areas, starting from the first area. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the lottery results for the reserved balls, etc. to be determined by the audio lamp control device 113 before the balls start to change.

In this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls of the first special pattern and a maximum of four reserved balls of the second special pattern can be reserved and stored, so that four reserved areas for the first special pattern and four reserved areas for the second special pattern are formed in the winning information storage area 223b. In this control example, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern are not performed simultaneously, and when a new special pattern drawing is performed while there are reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved balls of the second special pattern, the oldest stored winning information (the winning information stored in the first area) in the reserved area of the second special pattern is moved to the execution area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is shifted to the reserved area with the next lower number. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the drawing of the second special pattern is performed with priority over the drawing of the first special pattern.

...

The special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the reserved ball number command sent from the main control unit 110, and has a first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c1 for counting the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls for each special pattern based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is decreased in the main control unit 110 to perform a new lottery for the first special pattern, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command (reserved ball number command for special pattern 1) indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113. Also, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is increased by a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is decreased in the main control unit 110 to perform a new lottery for the second special pattern, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command (reserved ball number command for special pattern 2) indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command (special pattern 1 reserved ball number command, special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command and stores it in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c (first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c1, second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is used to display the reserved patterns. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number equal to the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 122 (b)) of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223d is changed in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the execution of the special pattern lottery is pending.

The special pattern change start flag 223d is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special pattern change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is received to notify the change pattern of the special pattern. On the other hand, it is turned off when the change display setting is made in the third pattern display device 81. The special pattern change start flag 223d has a first special pattern change start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second special pattern change start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special pattern, and is set to on or off according to the type of special pattern indicated by the special pattern change pattern command sent from the main control unit 110.

The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to on when a stop type command that notifies the special symbol variable stop type output from the main control unit 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81. The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e has a first special symbol stop type selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and is set to on or off according to the type of special symbol included in the stop type command (special symbol stop type command) sent from the main control unit 110.

The performance counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various performances, etc., and is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198". It is updated by adding 1 each time the main process is executed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this performance counter 223f is composed of multiple counters, each of which is specified to have a different update rule. Each counter is configured to perform a counter update process each time the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. When multiple types of variation pattern selection or various performance selection processes are executed within the execution interval of the main process, the performance counter 223f is configured to obtain different counter values and execute the process. This makes it possible to suppress the selection of various performances using the same value of the performance counter 223f, even if a process using the value of the performance counter 223f is executed multiple times at the same timing (within the same cycle of the main process).

In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the master control device 110 is set. The current game state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 by the data set in the slave state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the master control device 110 when the power is turned on, and the backed-up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the slave state setting area 223g has a current game state storage area that stores the currently set game state, and a past game state storage area that stores the game state that was set before the current game state was set, and is configured to be able to calculate the process through which the current game state was set. As a result, for example, when a time-saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving state was set after the end of a jackpot game, or whether a probability variable state was set after the end of a jackpot game and then the time-saving state was set when the probability variable end condition was established, and to execute a performance based on the determination result (a past state suggestion performance to suggest the past game state to the player). In addition, the secondary state setting area 223g is configured to store game states such as the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-saving state, as well as the jackpot game state and the normal jackpot game state.

The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the normal symbol reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, and its value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f for counting the number of reserved balls of normal symbols stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Note that the details are omitted here because the only difference between the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c described above is that the target has been changed from special symbols to normal symbols, and the rest is the same.

The special effect flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the second special symbol change during the normal state are met. Specifically, it is set to ON when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, or when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired while the first special symbol change is being executed. And, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol change is executed while the special effect flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol 2 reservation is 0. In this control example, a "chance zone" effect (see FIG. 124(b)) is executed to indicate the period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to ON.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Specifically, when a V winning command is set in the main control device 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that a V winning command has been received (S4407: Yes in FIG. 177) in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, the V winning flag 223j is set to ON.

This V winning flag 112j is referenced (S4801 in FIG. 181) in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and it is determined whether the ball passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v (won a V win) during the current jackpot game. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) (S4801 in FIG. 181: Yes), it is set to OFF.

In this control example, a V notification effect can be executed as an effect for passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a jackpot game, and the effect mode executed at the time of V winning (at the end of a V round) and at the end of a jackpot game can be changed depending on whether or not a V winning has occurred. Furthermore, the effect mode at the time of V winning and the effect mode at the end of a jackpot game can be changed depending on whether or not a V notification effect has been executed. In this way, in order to enable the effect that is variably set based on the presence or absence of a V winning to be executed at a timing (at the end) different from the time of a V winning, the presence or absence of a V winning can be determined based on the setting status of the V winning flag 112j.

The V performance execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that a V notification performance will be executed during jackpot play, and is set to ON when it is determined that a V notification performance will be executed during jackpot play. Specifically, in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes) and the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (S4703 in FIG. 180: No), the V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V notification performance. Then, if it is determined that a V notification performance will be executed (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if the V winning flag 112j is not set on, i.e., if no V winning occurs during jackpot play, it is referenced (S4802 in FIG. 181), and if it is determined that it is set on (S4802 in FIG. 181: Yes), a process is executed to switch the presentation mode of the ending presentation (S4804 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification effect during the jackpot game, and when a decision is made to execute a V notification effect, a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) is set as the presentation mode during the ending period at that time to indicate that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set. In other words, when a V notification effect is executed during a guaranteed jackpot game, the player is notified of this when a V wins, so a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) is set to indicate to the player that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set even in the ending presentation executed during the ending period. Therefore, if a V win is not achieved during a jackpot game, a process is executed to switch the presentation mode of the ending presentation to a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(a) and (c)) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set.

On the other hand, if the V notification effect is not executed during a guaranteed jackpot game, even if a V is won, the player is not notified of this fact, and the effect mode for the ending effect is preset to indicate that a time-saving state will be set (see Figures 127 (a) and (c)). Therefore, even if a V is not won during a jackpot game, there is no need to execute a process to switch the effect mode for the ending effect.

The time-saving counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value ("100" in this control example) when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a jackpot game). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223n becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has occurred to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the system is configured to determine the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols based on the value of the time-saving counter 223n.

The special consecutive preview flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the "chance mode" is set as the performance mode, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met. When this special consecutive preview flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period is set in which operations on the operating means can be effectively identified, and if a specific operation is performed on the operating means during that special effective period, the consecutive preview performance is executed.

Specifically, in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177), which is part of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, when a special symbol winning information command (a winning information command corresponding to a special symbol) is received, the special symbol winning information command process (see S4406 in FIG. 178) is executed. If it is determined that the current period is a high-speed fluctuation period (the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75) (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), and if it is determined that a continuous preview performance is to be executed by referring to the continuous preview execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is set to on (S4507 in FIG. 178).

Then, in the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the variation presentation corresponding to the second special symbol variation, the chance mode presentation setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185) which is executed when "chance mode" is set, references the setting status of the special consecutive notice flag 223o (S5210 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to on, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special effective time timer 223s as the special effective period during which operation on the frame button 22 can be effectively determined (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off.

In this way, a special effective period is set in which operations on the operating means are determined to be valid only when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met, and the consecutive preview performance can be executed only when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means within the special effective period, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play in order to execute the consecutive preview performance. In addition, by varying the notification mode of the notification performance that notifies the player of multiple pieces of information for executing the consecutive preview performance (information indicating whether the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met, information indicating the period during which the special effective period is set (the set period), and information indicating the operation content performed on the operating means to execute the consecutive preview performance), the difficulty of executing the consecutive preview performance can be easily variably adjusted.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are more likely to be met when (or when) a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. This can motivate the player to play the game and execute the continuous preview performance. In addition, when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met and the player executes a specific operation on the operating means outside of the special effective period, it is preferable to configure the system so that a notification effect is executed to inform the player of the timing when the special effective period will be set. This can motivate the player to operate the operating means, and can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

The performance mode memory area 223p is a memory area in which various performance modes set during the high probability state of normal symbols are stored, and different performance modes are stored according to the value of the time-saving counter 223n. When determining the current performance mode, the stored performance mode is read out. Specifically, in the chance mode performance setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read out (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the performance mode (high-speed period (high-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) corresponding to the read value is set and stored. When the high probability state of normal symbols transitions to a low probability state, the stored information is cleared.

The continuous preview in progress flag 223q is a flag for indicating that a continuous preview performance is set as the variable performance of the third pattern, and is set to ON when the continuous preview performance is being executed. Then, in the chance mode performance setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to ON (S5208 in FIG. 185: Yes), the performance mode corresponding to the continuous preview performance is determined. Then, when the continuous preview performance has ended, it is set to OFF. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a different performance mode that does not correspond to the continuous preview performance from being set in a new variable performance executed during the continuous preview performance.

The SW valid time timer 223r is a timer for measuring the valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the variable display period of the third pattern, and is configured so that when the valid operation period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the valid operation period is set, and the value is subtracted as time passes. Then, if the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to 0. In this way, by setting the valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent excessive execution of the effects (operation effects) that are executed when the operating means (frame button 22) is operated.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as the operation means that the player can operate. However, if multiple operation means, such as a second operation means, are provided in addition to the frame button 22 (first operation means), different operation valid periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing a SW valid time timer 223r for each operation means, it is possible to set overlapping operation valid periods for each operation means.

The special effective time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the operation effective period (special operation effective period) for validly determining an operation on the frame button 22, which is set only when the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed with the special continuous notice flag 223o set to ON. When the special operation effective time is set, a value corresponding to the length of the special operation effective time is set, and the value is subtracted as time passes. Then, in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not it is within the special operation effective period (S5306 in FIG. 186), and if it is determined that it is within the effective time (S5306 in FIG. 186: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as valid. In this control example, different operation effects are executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the normal operation effective period (the period when the value of the SW effective time timer 223r is greater than 0) and when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period (the period when the value of the special effective time timer 223s is greater than 0). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period, a continuous preview effect spanning a plurality of special pattern change periods from the next special pattern change to the end of the target special pattern change is executed. When the continuous preview effect is executed, the background mode is configured to transition to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period when the background mode transition is suppressed by the normal operation of the frame button 22, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning the jackpot just by executing the background mode transition.

The operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and the counter value is updated over time while the player is measuring and pressing the frame button 22. Based on the value measured by this operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 137 for further explanation, the display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 150 to Fig. 155. Fig. 150 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

Below, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory generally has the problem of slow read speed, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. Thus, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, the reason why not all of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 187) is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 155) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (start address of the source storage) and the end address (end address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the end address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

Now, referring to Figure 151, the image that changes when the power is turned on will be described. Figure 151 is an explanatory diagram that explains the image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 151(a) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start the change, the display control device 114 alternately displays a power-on change image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 151(b), and a power-on change image with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern, as shown in FIG. 151(c), during the change period. Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is determined from the display pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "jackpot for the special pattern", the image shown in FIG. 151(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops, and if it is a "miss for the special pattern", the image shown in FIG. 151(c) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

In addition, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entrance 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 151 (b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 152, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be explained. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 152(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "town stage" and FIG. 152(b) showing rears B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage", and "sky stage".

As shown in FIG. 152, the back images corresponding to each of the backs A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are all longer horizontally than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") are all configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on rear side E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... over time. Specifically, on rear side E, an image of a mountain towering over the island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "Island Stage", an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of back E. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually turns from black to white, and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, a repeating back image returning to the back image indicating a morning glow is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the entire range of rear image A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "city stage," is displayed, so by keeping all image data of rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, for back side B, which corresponds to the "forest stage", back side C, which corresponds to the "river stage", and back side D, which corresponds to the "sky stage", only a portion of the back side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as shown in FIG. 152(b). Also, image data corresponding to back side E, which corresponds to the island stage, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on, and remains resident.

To instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but doing so would require a very large capacity RAM to be used for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a', and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by lottery at the start of the change, the initial position of the backs B to D can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be made to scroll or change color over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the backs B to D, the increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

The range of positions a to b for the backs B to D is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. This allows the image data from position b' to position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, so that after the range from position a to position b is scrolled using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 to display it on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear surface E, the range of image data is set so that after the image in the initial position is displayed, the image data for the remaining image can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while the image is being displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235. This allows image data corresponding to the remaining image to be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 sequentially over time using image data corresponding to the rear surface image stored in normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, for rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 150) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

In addition, in the rear side B to D, the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear side image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after a ball has entered the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to main patterns that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as main patterns consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, and main patterns consisting of a rear pattern and additional patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main pattern without a number from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern is configured to be displayed in a different display manner depending on the background mode (back image) that is set. Therefore, each time the background mode is switched, the display image data of the third pattern corresponding to the background mode after the switch is stored in the third pattern area 235d. This eliminates the need to store image data for all third patterns corresponding to all background modes in the third pattern area 235d, thereby reducing memory capacity.

In this control example, the player can switch the background mode by operating the operation means (frame button 22), so there are cases where the background mode is changed multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the previous background mode is not erased from the third pattern area 235d for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the background mode is switched. This makes it possible to prevent the process of storing image data in the third pattern area 235d from being cumbersomely executed, even if an event occurs in which the background mode is frequently switched. Also, the third pattern storage area 235d may be configured to store image data of multiple third patterns corresponding to multiple background modes in advance.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", an "old man", and a "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of a DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, opening presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is intended to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will transition to a special game state and that the large opening, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect is intended to inform the player of the number of rounds that will be played. The ending effect is intended to inform the player that the special game state has ended.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 153, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 153 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which is specified for each address: one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display one of rears A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "forest stage," "river stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A to E. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A to E is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among back faces A to E as the drawing target, and also determines the range of back face images to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot be aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 153) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, and this may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of the sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 154 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 154).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As with the display data table, the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 154) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 154, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin thereafter, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 151 (a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 187) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in Figure 187). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in Figure 199 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7501 in FIG. 199(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 199(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) is executed to transfer the image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) that describes the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described below that specifies the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a specified sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 189(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, referring to FIG. 155, the details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 155, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage status, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, of whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

When the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7714 in FIG. 200) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If this rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195(a)). In addition, this rear image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). This makes it possible to display a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag that indicates the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x that corresponds to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S7002 in FIG. 195(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. This rear image discrimination flag 233x makes it easy to identify the currently set rear image type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag that indicates whether or not a demo is being performed. When the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo is being performed, and when it is off, it means that a demo is not being performed. In the display setting process (see FIG. 196), the demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). The demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo is currently being performed.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmation display effect is being performed. Here, the confirmation display effect indicates an effect in which the stopped pattern is displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variable pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set on when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether or not a confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 156 to 172. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

As described above, in this first control example, when both the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. In addition, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, as an end condition for terminating the probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition that is established when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, an end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is set.

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, and 999, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed in response to the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 157 to 162.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (S106), is executed, and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 163 and FIG. 164. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the special symbol based on each acquired counter value, controls the first symbol display device 37 to be able to display the variable display in the variable display mode determined by a predetermined control, sets various commands to execute the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and controls to stop and display in a display mode that shows the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). Below, the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) are obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process described below executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and then the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 is greater than 0 (S210).

In the process of S210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted in the same manner as the process of S207 (S213), and the process proceeds to the process of S208. In the process of S208, which is executed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), and then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209), after which the process ends. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 and FIG. 159.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214). If the change time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S215, the value of the change time counter for measuring the change time of the special pattern is updated, and the display of the first pattern display device 81 is updated corresponding to the value of the change time counter after the update. In this change time counter, a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209) is set at the start timing of the special pattern change, and thereafter, it is updated (decremented) each time the process of S215 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the change time has elapsed (S214: Yes), that is, if the value of the change time counter updated in the process of S215 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been awarded is determined based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if a special symbol jackpot has been awarded, one of the jackpots A to E is determined based on the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, in the case of jackpot A, the blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37, in the case of jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, in the case of jackpot C, the green LED is turned on, and in the case of jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, in the case of a miss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that the LEDs are turned off when the next fluctuation display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), the time reduction counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S218, if the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 113) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process branches to S1901: Yes and an opening command is set (S1902). As a result, the jackpot performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S217, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, and an update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the game status contained in the status command. This allows the status grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to match the actual status of the pachinko machine 10. In the processing of S220, a special chart confirmation command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 158, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S301). Then, based on the first jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 140(a)), it is determined whether the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S302).

After completing the process of S302, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S303), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a jackpot (S304), and the jackpot special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the win type counter C2 (S305), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S303: No), a losing special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S306), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 159, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S401).

If it is determined in the process of S401 that a jackpot with a special symbol is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see Figs. 141(a)-(c)) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, high probability state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 (S406). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (see S1801 in FIG. 167).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S407), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S408), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of the stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, referring to FIG. 160, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be explained. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S221). This update process (S221) is a process that is executed when the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed (when the change stops), and processes are executed to update the remaining period of the period during which the high probability change state is set to continue and to update the remaining period of the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process (S221) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state of a special pattern (S501). If it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203i is greater than 0 (S501: Yes), the value of the probability counter 203i is decremented by 1 (updated) (S502). Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the probability counter 203i is 0 (S503). If it is determined that it is 0 (S503: Yes), a time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Also, if it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S501 (S501: No), the current state is not a high probability state of a special pattern, so the process skips the above-mentioned processes of S502 to S504 for updating the value of the probability counter 203i and proceeds to the process of S505.

In addition, in the process of S503, if the value of the special chance counter 203i is not 0, i.e., the value of the special chance counter 203i is greater than 0 and the special chance state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (S503: No), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, i.e., if the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S505: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the decrement is 0 (S507). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 in the process of S507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), and the value of the probability change counter 203i, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the current game state are set (S509), and this process ends. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S505: No), or if it is determined in the process of S507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S507: No), the process proceeds directly to S509.

Next, referring to FIG. 161, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) is a process that determines whether a ball has entered either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640).

In addition, when the counter values acquired based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) will be explained below.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, which is the first starting port (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is obtained (S602), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not yet reached the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one (S604), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special symbol) (S605).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

In addition, if the process of S601 determines that a ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or if the process of S603 determines that the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently at the upper limit (S603: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is skipped and the process proceeds to S607.

Next, the processes from S607 to S612 differ only in that the processes performed for the entry of a ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64) in the processes from S601 to S606 are the same as those performed for the entry of a ball into the second ball entry hole 640, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After executing steps S601 to S612, the pre-reading process is executed (S613) and this process ends.

This pre-reading process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. In this control example, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, when the right to draw a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is added, the pre-reading process (S613) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is determined to be the upper limit number (4) in the process of S603 (S603: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process (S613) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 162, we will explain the look-ahead process (S613), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161). FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S613).

In the pre-read process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, various counter values, such as the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area that has the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S704), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S703 is that it is not a jackpot (S703: No), a winning command is set that includes information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern based on the various counter values that have been read (S705), and then this process ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S704 or S705 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the normal symbol change process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role 640a, and is a process for executing various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (process for executing the normal symbol change, process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, process for updating the normal symbol change being executed, process for stopping the normal symbol change, and process for determining the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a win (when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric roler 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S801: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is displaying a changing pattern (S802). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not displaying a changing pattern, that is, if it is determined that a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be executed (S802: No), then the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f is obtained (S803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804).

If it is determined in the process of S804 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S805). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S804 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203h is on, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols (S808). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is set to on (S808: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) for high probability (S809), and processing proceeds to S811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) for low probability (S810), and processing proceeds to S811.

In the process of S811, it is determined whether the current normal pattern change (lottery) is a win (S811), and if it is determined to be a win (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S811 that the current normal pattern change (lottery) is not a win (a loss), the display mode of "×", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (S813), and the process proceeds to S814.

In the process of S814, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S814). If it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S815) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds (S816) and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, the normal pattern fluctuation time is varied depending on the probability state of the normal pattern that is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to always set the fluctuation time to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state switches, specifically at the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches from the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern) where a long fluctuation time is generally likely to be set to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) where a short fluctuation time is likely to be set, a normal pattern fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the normal pattern lottery is not executed during the time-saving state even though the time-saving state is set.

The method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be varied according to the game state, the number of reserved normal symbol balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (number of reserved normal symbols). Furthermore, the ease of ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable depending on the length of time the normal pattern is set to change, the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be easily changed depending on the game status, creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S802 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (S802: No), it is determined whether the time for changing the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S817), and if it is determined that the time for changing has not elapsed (S817: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S817 that the variation time has elapsed (S817: Yes), the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a stopped display (S818). In the process of S818, if the current normal pattern lottery is a winning combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a "○" pattern stopped (illuminated). On the other hand, if the normal pattern lottery is a losing combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a "X" pattern stopped (illuminated). In other words, a setting is made to display the display mode set in the process of S812 or S813 described above stopped.

When the stop display is set by processing S818, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S812 or processing S813.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (S819: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S820), and if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) (S820: Yes), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric roler 640a for 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S820 that the game is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S820: No), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric device 640a for 5 seconds x 1 time (opening operation) (S821), and the process proceeds to S822.

In the process of S822, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823 (S822), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a in this control example will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is made (the timing when the processing of S808 to S811 is performed), and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the processing of S817).

That is, in this control example, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, depending on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol that is executed in parallel while the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of the normal pattern hit/fail judgment, there is a problem that the electric role 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In this control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, only when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern, the electric role 640a may be configured to open long, or the opening pattern of the electric role 640a may be configured to be set based on the game state set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, various information (result of the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern change time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal pattern change process (see S106 in FIG. 108) is set as a command indicating the content of each information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (S107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, it is a process for acquiring the lottery result (winning/losing judgment result) in advance using the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 before the actual winning/losing judgment is executed (before the winning/losing judgment (see S811) is executed in the normal pattern variation process (see S106 in FIG. 163)).

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is obtained (S902), and it is then determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls for normal patterns has reached the upper limit) (S903).

In the process of S903, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is greater than 4 (the upper limit value of 4) (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f (S904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), the lottery result is obtained in advance based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) (S906), a winning information command for normal patterns including the normal winning judgment result (preliminary judgment result obtained in the process of S906) is set (S907), and this process ends.

The winning information command for the normal symbol set in the process of S907 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each of the control examples described above. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right for the normal symbol that is reserved and to execute a performance based on the preliminary determination result.

Specifically, in a state where the chance zone is set, that is, in a state where the second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the execution of a normal symbol winning game during the normal state, if the received normal symbol winning information command contains information indicating a win of the normal symbol, it is possible to execute an effect that continues the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed. In this case, even if all the second special symbol lotteries are completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal symbol winning game is executed, it is preferable to configure the variable effect executed in response to the first special symbol lottery to be set to a performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 124(b)), rather than a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 122(b)). By configuring in this way, when multiple normal symbol winning games are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the chance zone does not end despite the second special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player can understand that the next regular winning game will be executed soon, so the player can be interested in the number of second special symbol lotteries executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example, a pseudo-variable effect is executed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped multiple times as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone is in an extended period.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 166, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 166), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S1712. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on and RAM data is to be initialized, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Similarly, if power failure occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (S1713, S1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization processing (S1713, S1714), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (S1714). After execution of RAM 203 initialization processing, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power outage information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power was cut off (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 167, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 157) or the start winning process (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (changing effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process (see FIG. 158) are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processes are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a command is set to execute a jackpot performance in the sound lamp control device 113, and jackpot control processing is executed to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 168 to 172, but in this jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter referred to as the winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a). Then, when either of these conditions is met, the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of this winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S822 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the end of the period set by the processes of S821 and S823 in the normal pattern change process.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (S1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (illuminated) in a stopped state in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159).

Furthermore, in this control example, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (S1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S815 and S816 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the second pattern display device starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device in a display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163).

After that, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1809), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and each process from S1801 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812) until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S1811 (S1812). Note that in this processing of S1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second win random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special and normal patterns, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1809 (S1809: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1815), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S1809 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (FIG. 166, S1701), so that the processing can be started from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be explained with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is on or not (S1901). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901: Yes), the opening command for the jackpot is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on (S1903), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is off in the process of S1901 (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the special pattern jackpot is currently in progress (i.e., whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is on) (S1904). If it is determined that the jackpot is not currently in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is off) in the process of S1904 (S1904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is on) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1905).

If it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds (S1906), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1907: Yes), an ending command is set (S1908) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, an ending performance indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third pattern display device 81.

In this first control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a process is executed to determine the type of jackpot using the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)) (S402 in FIG. 159), and an ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the process of S1908, a display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Note that, instead of setting the length of the ending period when a jackpot is won as in this first control example, the length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined depending on whether or not a V win occurs during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V)).

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the ending period has started (the final round has ended), it is determined whether a V has been won during this jackpot game (whether the special probability setting flag 203m is set on), and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is set on, it sets the ending period of the jackpot game to 17 seconds in order to display a 17-second ending (see FIG. 127(b) and (d)) indicating that a special probability state has been set, and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is not set on, it sets the ending period of the jackpot game to 15 seconds in order to display a 15-second ending (see FIG. 127(a) and (c)) indicating that a time-saving state has been set.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can vary the game state set after the end of a jackpot game depending on the game results during the jackpot game, it is possible to set an ending period that corresponds to the game state that is actually set.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is made different depending on the game result during the jackpot game, the ending period of the jackpot game can be determined at any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example, after the first round of round play ends (after the round play in which the ball can enter a specific area (V gate 65V) ends), it may be determined whether or not a V has been entered, and based on the result of this determination, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set during the period in which the round games from the second round to the final round are being played.

In addition, in the above example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not a V is won during the jackpot game. Alternatively, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game can be set in advance based on the type of jackpot that is won, as in this first control example. Specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when a special jackpot is won, and 15 seconds is set in advance when a normal jackpot is won. If it becomes necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the game results during the jackpot game, that is, if a special jackpot game is played but a V cannot be won during the jackpot game, the length of the preset ending period can be changed. By configuring in this way, the frequency with which the length of the ending period is set during the jackpot game can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1907 that the timing is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1909 that the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S1910), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: No), a winning process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning port 65a is executed (S1911), an abnormality process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally is executed (S1912), and then this process ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot operation setting process (S1906) is executed during the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, it is first determined whether it is time to start one round (S2001). If it is determined in the process of S2001 that it is time to start one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the opening pattern of the specific winning port 65a corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S2003).

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this control example, among the round games executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (first round) is made different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (variable jackpot), a round game is executed as the first round of round game in which the switching valve 65y is operated to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only during a specific period of time during a jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, so that the player can play during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In this control example, when the first round of the high probability jackpot game is executed, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed as a notification mode to inform the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player of a specific period during the long-term jackpot game in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification mode to inform the player that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the conditions for setting the high probability state after the jackpot game is completed are met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be varied depending on whether a condition is met. For example, the color of the text "Aim for V" may be varied based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific gate, or the remaining time, or the size of the display area may be varied, or the text may be changed to something more emphatic (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not fire the ball in a situation in which it is likely to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, in this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-type device for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be changed to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific gate. However, without being limited to this, for example, the switching valve 65y may be configured to operate with a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning port 65a is opened may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, so that a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set. This makes it possible to standardize the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, so that even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is understood, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, since the operation content of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and the failure of the V-type device (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processes of S2002 and S2003 are skipped, the opening of the normal specific winning port 65a is set (S2004), and the process proceeds to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S2005), and the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to update the display content of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), the specific winning port 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set to allow the ball to pass through in the first round. As a result, in jackpots A, C to E, the player can simply shoot the ball in the first round and the ball will almost certainly pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), so a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S1910), first it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203m is on (S2101). If it is determined in the process of S2101 that the special chance setting flag 203m is on (S2101: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the special chance counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102) and the process moves to S2103. On the other hand, if the special chance setting flag 203m is off in the process of S2101 (S2101: No), the process of S2102 is skipped and the process moves to S2103.

In the process of S2103, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2103), and then a state command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203i (S2104). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it updates the slave state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203k and the probability change setting flag 203m are set to OFF (S2105), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 170), the game state after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1911). This winning process (S1911) is executed as part of the big win control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for carrying out control in response to a win at a specific winning port 65a.

In this winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the valid round period (S2201). Here, the valid round period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning port 65a is opened until the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if the current time is not the valid round period (S2201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the current time is the valid round period (S2201: Yes), it is then determined whether a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S2202), and if a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S2202: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203o is updated by adding 1 (S2203), a winning command indicating that a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected is set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2202 that a win at the specific winning port 65a has not been detected (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205), and if the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and if the round time has elapsed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In the process of S2206, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round of play for the current jackpot. In this control example, the end conditions for the round game are met by the same round time elapse and number of winnings regardless of the type of jackpot or number of rounds, but this is not limited to the above, and the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the type of jackpot, or the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the number of rounds played.

In the process of S2207, the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S2207), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning port 65a has been set to be closed is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is due to the end of one round (S2209), and if it is determined that the current closing is due to the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is due to the end of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), since the flow path solenoid (probable win solenoid) 2665k is not set to ON, the process of S2210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the special chance active flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. Also, if the value of the winning number counter 203o is determined to be 9 or less in the process of S2205 (S2205: No), and if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), the processes of S2207 to S2211 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2212: Yes), it is then determined whether the special chance active flag 203r is on (S2217). In the process of S2217, if the special chance active flag 203r is off (S2217: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the special chance valid flag 203r is on (S2217: No), 1 is added to the value of the special chance valid timer 203s (S2218), and then it is determined whether the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is the upper limit (S2219). If the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is not the upper limit (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, where the ball passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is monitored and the special chance setting flag 203m is updated. As a result, if the special chance valid timer 203s is not the upper limit, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V), so the special chance state can be set taking into account the time it takes for the ball to clear. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the special chance state from being granted by illegally passing the ball through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, if the value of the special chance active timer 203s is the upper limit (S2219: Yes), the special chance active flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2220), the value of the special chance active timer 203s is reset (S2221), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213), and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance passing counter 203n (S2214), the special chance setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215), a V winning command is set (S2216), and this process ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormality processing (S1912) is a process executed during the big win control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality processing (S1912), it is first determined whether the current time is the valid period for the round (S2301), and if it is not the valid period for the round (S2301: No), the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the valid period for the round (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302). In the processing of S2302, it is determined whether the ball discharge port switch (not shown), which can detect balls that have passed through the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 120(b)), has detected the passage of the ball.

If it is determined in the process of S2302 that the ball has passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203t is incremented by 1 (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the ball has not passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: No), the process skips S2303 and proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), since it is the ball removal period, the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 (S2305). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is not the upper limit value (S2306: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit (S2306: Yes), it then determines whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the value of the special chance passing counter 203n and the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203t) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203o) (S2307).

If it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308) and the process proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the voice and lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, the text "Number of winning balls does not match" is displayed) and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent behavior in which balls are illegally allowed to flow into the fourth flow path 65e and pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during the period when the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120(b)) is closed (the period when the switching valve 65y is closed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203o, the dispensed number counter 203t, and the special chance passing counter 203n are each reset (S2311), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 172), it is possible to detect and notify early on of malfunctions that may cause balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a to be unable to be discharged normally, such as due to ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 173 to Fig. 186, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 173, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 174) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of a power outage from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), it executes the power-off processing of S4117. Before the execution of such a power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S4003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S4117 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No) and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S4117 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 119). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, so the process of S4008 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if the power-off flag is off and S4008 is reached, the process goes from S4004 to S4006 and reaches S4008 because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or the process was started because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up process is started, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the start of the main processing or since the processing of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). If 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S4101: No), the processing of S4102 to S4111 is not performed and the processing proceeds to S4112. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S4101 is that, while S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4112 and the variable display setting processing of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is a process for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a process for updating the display of the number of reserved balls is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the settings are sent as commands to the display control device 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S4109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the performance update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process moves to S4112. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After processing of S4111, a command determination process (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 175.

In the processing of S4113, in order to display a variable display performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

After the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power outage processing is executed (S4117). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 175, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. The command determination process (S4112) will be described in detail below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4201), and if it is determined that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), a status command reception process (S4202) is executed and this process is terminated. This status command reception process (S4202) receives a status command indicating the current game state, sets a mode presentation mode corresponding to the game state, and sets a display command for displaying the corresponding presentation mode (for example, a back image) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when a status command indicating a probability change state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and when a status command indicating a time-saving state is received, a display command corresponding to the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 is set. Details of the game state that is actually set and the switching control of the presentation mode in the executed mode presentation will be described later. Details of this status command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 176.

If it is determined in the processing of S4201 that a status command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203). If it is determined that a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special chart fluctuation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special chart fluctuation pattern command is set to on (S4204), and the fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that a special chart change pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is then determined whether a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206). If it is determined that a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (first special chart stop type flag 223e1, second special chart stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special chart stop type command is set to on (S4207), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4206 that the special symbol stop type command has not been received (S4206: No), then it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (S4209: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, when a reserved ball number command for a special symbol is received, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the reserved ball number of the special symbol variable display) are extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

In addition, when a reserved ball count command for a normal pattern is received, the value of the reserved ball count counter 203f for normal patterns in the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable display of normal patterns) is extracted, and the value of the reserved ball count counter 223h for normal patterns provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated to match the extracted counter value.

The reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the various ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640, through gate 67) (initial entry) and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are incremented, or when various variable start processes are executed and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are decremented. Therefore, at the time of initial entry or each time the variable display is set, the values of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f of the main control unit 110 by the processing of S4210.

Therefore, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes misaligned with the values of the various reserved ball counters 203d, 203e, 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., if a reserved ball number command is notified at the time of initial winning or when the variable display is set, that is, when the various reserved ball numbers are changed, the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the values of the various reserved ball counters of the main control device 110, the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4212) and this process is terminated. This winning command process (S4212) analyzes the pattern type (special pattern, normal pattern) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command, stores (stores) the analysis result in the corresponding memory area (winning information storage area 223b in RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113), and performs a process to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) based on the received winning information. The details of the winning command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has not been received (S4211: No), it is then determined whether a pattern determination command has been received (S4213). If it is determined that a pattern determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), the stop display of the third pattern is set (S4214), and this process ends. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S4213: No), it is then determined whether a normal map-related command has been received (S4215). If it is determined that a normal map-related command has been received (S4215: Yes), normal map-related processing is executed (S4216), and then this process ends. Note that a detailed explanation of executing normal map-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

If it is determined in the processing of S4215 that a normal game-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S4218), and then this processing is terminated. Note that a detailed explanation of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be given later with reference to FIG. 180. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 176, the status command receiving process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing this status command receiving process (S4202). This status command receiving process (S4202) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. Details of the status command receiving process (S4202) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4202) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set game status will be changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether the game status set in the slave status setting area 223g differs from the game status indicated by the currently received status command. In the process of S4301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game status (S4301: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a change in the game status (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed game status is normal (S4302).

If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the game state after the change is normal (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), a display command indicating normal mode is set (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the currently received state command is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time-shortened state (S4306), and if it is determined that the game state is the time-shortened state (if the currently received state command is a command indicating the time-shortened state) (S4306: Yes), the value of the time-shortened counter 223n is set to 100 (S4307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.

If it is determined in the processing of S4306 that the game state is not in a time-saving state (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309). If the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the processing proceeds to S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to off (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the processing proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4304, the game state set in the current state area of the slave state setting area 223g is set in the past state area (S4304), the game state corresponding to the information indicated by the received state command is set in the current state area of the slave state setting area 223g (S4305), and this process is terminated.

Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the commands set in the processing of S4308 and S4311, and the variable performance display during the normal state is executed. Thus, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and to output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to, for example, eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable performance display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, when the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by combining multiple commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting to the voice lamp control device 113, and a discrimination means is provided to discriminate whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate. If the discrimination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simplified display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are rewritten to the simplified display data.

By configuring in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set simplified display data showing appropriate information and display a variable performance display based on the simplified display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a variable performance display with content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special pattern) from being executed, which reduces the player's motivation to play. In addition, as the above-mentioned simplified display data, for example, display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any game state (for example, a mode with a black background) or display data that executes a variable display of the fourth pattern, which has a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable performance display, can be used.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 177, the contents of the winning command processing (see S4212) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S4212). This winning command processing (S4212) is processing executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from the main control device 110 when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a regular symbol winning information command is set when the right to draw a regular symbol is acquired, or a V winning command is received when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (high probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401), and it is determined whether the currently received command is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402). If it is determined that it is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the received command contains winning information (winning information for a normal symbol) (S4403). If it is determined that there is winning information (S4403: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state for a normal symbol (S4404).

If it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state for normal symbols, that is, the normal state (S4404: No), the player has acquired the right to draw a normal symbol lottery that will win a normal symbol during the normal state, and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, so a display command is set to suggest the long opening of the electric chute (S4405) and the process proceeds to S4406. When the display command is set in the process of S4405, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control content as the various display commands set in the control process of the other sound lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect is executed (for example, an effect that teases whether or not a small display area Dm3 will be formed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that suggests that a normal symbol hit game will be played during the normal state and the electric role 640a will be long-opened (opened for 5 seconds).

In this control example, the above-mentioned suggestive effects are executed only when the player has acquired the right to draw a normal pattern lottery that will result in a normal winning combination during normal play. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also preferable to execute the above-mentioned suggestive effects when it is determined that the normal winning information command contains winning information indicating a specific losing win. This makes it possible to set whether a normal winning combination will be executed when the suggestive effect is executed, or not, allowing the player to play while predicting the game content that will be executed in the future.

In addition, in this control example, the suggestive effect is executed when the player acquires the right to draw a normal pattern lottery that will win a normal pattern during the normal state. In addition to this configuration, a pre-game state process may be executed to determine whether the game state is normal or not at the time when the game actually plays a normal pattern, that is, the time when the game corresponding to the normal pattern winning information command indicating a normal pattern win is executed (the time when the game plays a normal pattern), based on the pre-determination result of the special pattern lottery being executed or the special pattern lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and if it is determined to be normal, the suggestive effect described above is executed. This makes it possible to more accurately indicate that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 177 for further explanation, if it is determined in the process of S4402 that a winning information command for normal maps has not been received (S4402: No), if it is determined in the process of S4403 that there is no winning information (S4403: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4404: Yes), the process also moves to the process of S4406.

In the process of S4406, the special prize information command process is executed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. Details of this special prize information command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

In the processing of S4407, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2216) that is set when the ball flows down to the sure win switch (specific gate) during the winning processing (see S1911 in FIG. 171)) (S4407), and if it is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to on (S4408) and processing proceeds to S4409. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4407 that a V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), processing proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4409). If the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4409: Yes), the V performance execution flag 223k is set to off (S4410), a display command for notifying a V winning is set (S4411), the V notification flag 223m is set to on (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Also, in the process of S4409, if the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the processing of S4413, other processing is executed (S4413), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 178, the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406) executed in the prize command processing (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406).

When the special winning information command process (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), it is then determined whether the special consecutive notice flag 223o is on (S4503). If it is determined that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the consecutive notice execution selection table 222d (Fig. 147 (a)) is used to select the presence or absence of consecutive notice (S4504), and then it is determined whether consecutive notices are being executed (S4505). If it is determined that consecutive notices are being executed (S4505: Yes), the special consecutive notice flag 223o is set to on (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), if it is determined in the process of S4503 that the special consecutive announcement flag 223o is on (S4503: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4505 that a consecutive announcement has not been executed (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4507.

In the process of S4507, a display command is set based on the information contained in the received special prize information command (S4507), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 179, the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216). This normal symbol related processing (S4216) is processing that is executed when a normal symbol variation pattern command indicating that a normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a normal symbol win start command indicating that a normal symbol win game has started, or a normal symbol win end command indicating that a normal symbol win game has ended is received.

When the normal map related process (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether a normal map variation pattern command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4601: Yes), a display normal map variation start command is set (S4602), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0, i.e., whether the normal pattern is in a high probability state (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), it is determined whether the normal map variation pattern command received this time is a normal map variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has won the normal map (S4604), and if it is determined that the normal map has not won (S4604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a normal winning has been won (S4604: Yes), since this is a normal winning variation that results in a long opening winning, a display command indicating that a long opening is waiting is set (S4605), and this process ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set soon.

In this control example, a process is used to display the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) (the display mode that forms the small display area Dm3) based on whether or not the normal pattern variation is a winning variation. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to display the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) (the display mode that forms the small display area Dm3) for a specific normal pattern miss variation (for example, a part of a normal pattern miss variation in which the same variation time as a normal pattern winning variation is set).

The size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied depending on the content of the variation effect (third pattern variation effect) corresponding to the currently executed special pattern variation. For example, when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is being executed in the third pattern variation effect, the display content may be varied so that the display area of the small display area Dm3 is smaller than when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is not being executed. In this way, by variably controlling the display content by providing a relationship between the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by being provided with too much game information, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 179, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the normal pattern variation command has not been received (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern win start command has been received (S466). If it is determined that the normal pattern win start command has been received (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607). If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607: No), a display command indicating that a long opening is in progress is set (S4608), and this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that a long opening win is being executed. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that a normal winning start command has not been received (S4606: No), it is determined whether a normal winning end command has been received (S4609). If it is determined that a normal winning end command has been received (S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4610). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), it is then determined whether the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h is 1 or greater (S4611). If it is determined that it is 1 or greater (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in progress flag 223i is set on (S4612). If it is determined that it is not set on (S4612: No), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S4613), the special effect in progress flag 223i is set off (S4614), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the process of S4610 to S4612 determines that the determination result is other than the above-mentioned determination result, the process ends.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4218). The jackpot-related process (S4218) performs processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute a presentation display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4701). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4702). The jackpot start command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), an ending display mode indicating that a chance mode has been entered (time-saving state is set) is set (S4708), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined to be a sure-win jackpot, the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 147(b)) is used to select whether or not to execute a V notification effect (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). If it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), an ending display mode indicating that a super chance mode has been entered (sure-win state is set) is set (S4707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4705 that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the processing proceeds to the processing of S4708 described above.

In other words, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, different lengths of ending periods are set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game starts. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information indicating the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information indicating the number of rounds being played) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls won into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, so the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol when it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, or may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game period when there is little control processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4709). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4710), and it is determined whether the current round number is 1 round (V round) (S4711). If it is determined that there is 1 round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4712). If it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4712: Yes), a display command is set to notify of a V win (S4713), and this processing ends. Furthermore, if the process of S4711 determines that the current round number is not 1 round (V round), i.e., that a round of play other than the first round will begin (S4711: No), or if the process of S4712 determines that the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this process is also terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4709 that the number of rounds command has not been received (S4709: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4714: Yes), ending processing is executed (S4715) and this processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and executes processing to finally determine the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4804), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and if it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is OFF (S4802: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S4804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4802: Yes), a display switching command is set to switch the display mode for the latter half (7 seconds) of the ending period (S4803), and the processing proceeds to S4804.

When the display switching command is set in the processing of S4803, the display control device 114 is notified, and processing is executed to switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending period, which was previously set in response to the setting of the high probability state (see FIG. 236(d)), to the display mode corresponding to the setting of the time-saving state (see FIG. 236(c)). In this control example, the display period for the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 1827 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variable display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4901). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4901: No), since the variable pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), and then the special chart 1 performance mode setting process is executed to generate a display variable pattern command based on the acquired variable pattern type for notifying the display control device 114 (S4903), and the data corresponding to the first special pattern in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905. Details of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG. 183.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4905). If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4905: No), the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), and then the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process is executed (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special pattern among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. Details of the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

In the process of S4909, it is determined whether the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4909: No), since the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 that is set to on is set to off (S4910), and then the display special chart 1 or special chart 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) will be explained with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903). This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5002), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5004.

In the process of S5004, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If it is determined that it is the super chance mode (S5005: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5007). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the probability variation selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5009), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the processing proceeds to the processing of S5009 described above. If it is determined in the processing of S5010 that the mode is the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the processing proceeds to the processing of S5009, where the performance setting processing during the chance mode is executed (S5012). Details of the performance setting processing during the chance mode (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) will be explained with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S5101), and if it is determined to be normal (S5101: Yes), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S5102), then the special presentation in progress flag 223i is set to on (S5103), the presentation mode is determined based on the normal special chart 2 presentation selection table 222b (see FIG. 145) (S5104), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the state is not normal (S5101: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5107), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109. If it is determined in the process of S5106 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the process of S5109, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5110). If it is determined that it is the super chance mode (S5110: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and it is determined whether or not the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5112). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the probability variation selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), the above-mentioned process of S5105 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5110 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the chance mode performance setting processing is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to S5115. Details of the chance mode performance setting processing (S5114 (S5012)) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

In the process of S5115, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the process of S5105 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 185, the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed in the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184).

In the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n read is 99 or not (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high-speed period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n read is 79 or not (S5204). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), a normal first period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n that was read is 49 (S5206). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5206, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is on (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is on (S5208: Yes), the continuous performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variable pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5208, if it is determined that the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the special effective time timer (S5211), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to off (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213. Even if it is determined in the processing of S5210 that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the processing proceeds to S5213.

In the process of S5213, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5214), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 186, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute a presentation (operation presentation) according to the player's operation to enhance the presentation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, the frame button 22 can be operated by a player in a plurality of operation methods. Specifically, the frame button 22 can be distinguished between a "normal press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a short time (less than 2 seconds) and a "long press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (more than 2 seconds). Different operation effects can be executed according to the distinguished operation content. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 in a variety of operation methods to execute various operation effects, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as distinguishable operation methods, but this is not limited to this, and one type of operation method or three or more types may be provided. In this control example, the operation means that the player can operate is one type of the frame button 22, but this is not limited to this, and multiple operation means that the player can operate may be provided. The distinguishable operation methods may be determined not only by operations on individual operation means, but also by a combination of operation contents executed on multiple operation means. In addition, when multiple operating means are provided (for example, a first operating means and a second operating means), the system may be configured to determine that the same operation has been performed (the same operation method) when a first operation is performed on the first operating means and when a second operation is performed on the second operating means. By configuring in this way, for example, when the position of the first operating means and the position of the second operating means are separated, the player can select the operating means that is easy to operate and enjoy operating the game.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is greater than 0, i.e., whether the SW effective time is set (whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is greater than 0) (S5301). Note that this SW effective time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when a variation pattern performance using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S5301: Yes), a value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223r (S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5303.

In the process of S5303, it is determined whether the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special effective time timer is subtracted (S5304) and the process proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

In the process of S5305, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether it is within the valid time (S5306). If it is determined that it is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the value of the operation counter 223t (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that it is not within the valid time in the process of S5306 (S5306: No) or if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the process of S5307 (S5307: No), the process of S5308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value of the operating counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is decremented (S5312), and it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313). If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the processing proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the processing proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the processing proceeds to S5314.

In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current state is chance mode (S5314). If it is determined that the current state is chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309.

If it is determined in the process of S5314 that the current mode is not the chance mode (S5314: No), a button effect corresponding to the current operation method and the effect being executed is set (S5316), and the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, other button processing (such as changing the background) is executed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/performance process (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. 186, in this control example, the SW effective time and special effective time are configured so that the remaining period becomes 0 at the time when operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. In other words, the number of times that the operation performance is executed during the period in which each effective time is set is configured to be one. This makes it possible to prevent the operation performance from being executed excessively.

The processing of the SW effective time and the remaining special effective time is not limited to this, and for example, if a valid time of 10 seconds is set, and operation of the frame button 22 is accepted within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) after the valid time is set, a new valid time may be set during the special pattern change period (S5310: No, S5313: Yes in FIG. 186). By configuring in this way, the number of operation effects executed during one special pattern change period can be varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 187 to Fig. 201. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 187, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in NOR ROM 234d. Since NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in first program storage area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d in buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, since MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H", main processing can be started in MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs, but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) to be executed after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex performances using the auxiliary performance unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 187. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 199(a)) (see S7502 in FIG. 199(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 189(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 189(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 189(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 189(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 189(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 190 to 195.

In the display setting process (S6303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 196 to 198.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 199 and 200.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 155 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to cause the power-on image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figs. 190 to 195. First, Fig. 190 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 190, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6402) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 191(a). FIG. 191(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S6502 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (one of big win A-G, small win A-C, reach miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. The image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that the main control device 110 always judges the start of fluctuations at least a few seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss as in this control example, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for display (S6408: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S6409) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 192(a). FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and if there is a round number command for display (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 192(b). FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing executes processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the number of rounds command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6413), and processing returns to S6401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 193, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and if there is a fluctuation stop command for display (S6414: Yes), fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the processing returns to S6401.

Now, referring to FIG. 194(a), the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 194(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This display fluctuation stop command indicates a display stop command (normal stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 182), i.e., at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special pattern in the main control device 110 (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command).

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6416: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the notification command processing (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 194(b). FIG. 194(b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command output to the display control device 114 from among the various notification commands that are set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands to indicate various abnormal conditions set by the main control device 110.

In notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to receive related commands other than display commands, such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and role-driving commands, and output the related commands to the corresponding control device with the addition of information indicating the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a rear image change command (S6418: Yes), rear image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the on state, is set to on (S7001). Then, of the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S7002), after which the rear image change command process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is on, the changed rear image type is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the processing returns to S6401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 195(b), the error command processing (S6421) will be described in detail. FIG. 195(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag is set to ON, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 191(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 191(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figs. 196 to 198. Fig. 196 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 196, in this display setting process, first it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 to S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Now, with reference to FIG. 197, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified based on this expanded warning image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 196. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). If the data is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 196, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S7215 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less as the confirmation display performance ends, and therefore, after a certain time has elapsed since the end of the confirmation display performance, processing is performed to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance.

First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed when it is on, is set to on (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

Next, with reference to Figs. 199 and 200, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 199(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, referring to FIG. 199(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 199(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In this process of S7602, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Also, if the result of processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605) and this processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)), the command determination processing (see FIG. 190 to FIG. 195) and the display setting processing (see FIG. 196 to FIG. 198) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 200, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the processing of S7706, after setting an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the processing of S7705 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No), the processing proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is identified, and this image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it sends a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this control example, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 201, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated (S7801) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites that should be placed furthest behind the sprites that should be placed in the foreground in one frame of image, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the rearranged sprite order, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprites are stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprites as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. Also, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7802). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously displayed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image displayed in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being displayed, an image displayed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

As explained above, in this first control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in overlap (parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. And, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed in which the lottery for the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the ease of executing the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to vary depending on the set game state. Specifically, in order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability-changing state) than when a low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state), the lottery right for the second special symbol is configured to be obtained when a ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) accompanied by an electric device 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) executed when a normal symbol is hit. In other words, when playing in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to be executed more easily than the lottery for the second special symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set upon winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to differ greatly depending on the game state that is set, so that the player can be motivated to play in the hope that a game state that is highly advantageous to the player will be set.

In addition, if a normal symbol lottery, which is executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, is won, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric device 640a is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a period during which it is easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery even in the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, so that a player playing in the normal state can execute a game aiming to win the special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win the normal symbol lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early on.

Furthermore, in this control example, the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights for the stored second special symbol, that is, the number of special symbol 2 reserved. Specifically, as the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-miss variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a miss is executed in the first half of the variable performance, and a pseudo-win variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot is executed by restarting the third symbol stopped (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-miss variable performance in the second half of the variable performance, and the number of times that the third symbol temporarily stops (provisionally stops) in the pseudo-win variable performance is configured to be variable in response to the number of special symbol 2 reserved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped multiple times until the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that they have won the jackpot after multiple second special symbol drawings.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won with the special symbol 2 reserve used in the first second special symbol lottery among multiple special symbol 2 reserves acquired during normal symbol play, the player can be made to believe that the jackpot was won because multiple special symbol 2 reserves were acquired during normal symbol play, which makes it possible for the player to play with more enthusiasm to acquire the special symbol 2 reserve during normal symbol play.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance is configured to execute a variation performance that imitates the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special symbol 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol 2 variation performance from being repeated in a pseudo manner when the reserved special symbol 2 has not been acquired, making it difficult for the player to recognize that a pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variation performance that imitates the special symbol 1 variation performance is executed, the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination that indicates that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so it is possible to execute a variation performance that is unexpected for the player.

In this control example, when a special jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to a specific gate, and if the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is played, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different for a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, and a special jackpot that is more advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than a normal jackpot. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot play ends before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if a special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot play ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is made shorter.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game causes a problem that an unnatural notification presentation is executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. Also, if a special presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game is prepared in advance, it is necessary to store image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in advance, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, and if the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation that is executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

This V winning device 2650 is configured in the same manner as the V winning device 2650 of the eighth control example described above (see Figures 194 to 196), and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which balls that flow down the right area enter the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the left area described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. As described above, in this control example, regardless of the set game state, and therefore regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played or not, the same privilege is awarded whether the player plays a right-handed game or a left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play in any game method that suits his mood.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play so that there is no large discrepancy between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area can be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 can be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

In the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits the reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 every time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated (i.e., when it increases or decreases), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the first ball entrance 64 is set to a maximum of four entries, and the through gate 67 is set to a maximum of one passage, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37 to notify the number of reserved balls.

As shown in the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern is moved vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern to indicate the lottery result of the normal pattern may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. However, the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 may be executed in the normal state, and a right-hand hit game that targets the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. Also, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or whether a jackpot game is set, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute a right-hand hit game when a time-saving state is set or during a jackpot game, and execute a left-hand hit game only during a normal state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand whether or not the state is favorable to the player depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand hit game, left-hand hit game).

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player, and when the player presses it, it is determined that the operating means has been operated; however, other configurations may also be used, such as an operating means configured in the shape of a lever that can determine when the player tilts it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operating means that can determine when the player has operated it by contacting or approaching it, or a wireless type operating means that can determine when it has been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, when a favorable game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, a high-speed fluctuation period during which a short fluctuation time is selected can be set for a predetermined period (until 20 special symbol fluctuations have been performed), and during that high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition effect is not (is unlikely to be) executed when the frame button 22 is operated. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect during a period during which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected, making it difficult for the player to grasp the stopped display mode of the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, from occurring.

In addition, in the first control example, when the first operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, i.e., when the normal state is set, an operation that executes a background mode transition effect ("normal press") is performed, an operation effect with a different presentation mode from the background mode transition effect is executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this first control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, a background mode transition effect can be executed by executing a second operation ("long press") other than the first operation ("normal press") described above. With this configuration, a background mode transition effect can be provided to a player who attempts to execute a background mode transition effect while knowing that the stopped display mode of the third pattern will become difficult to grasp. In this first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been executed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been executed. This reduces the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, thereby preventing the stopped display mode of the third pattern from becoming excessively difficult to grasp.

In addition, as in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is not met, the first operation process is executed by performing a first operation on the operating means, but when a predetermined condition is met, the first operation process is not executed (is difficult to execute) even if the first operation is performed on the operating means. This technical idea may be used in other technologies. For example, a volume adjustment process that adjusts the volume of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment process that adjusts the brightness of a liquid crystal display when a liquid crystal display is used as the third pattern display device 81, may be applied as the above-mentioned first operation process, and the first operation process may be made executable when a predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a special pattern variation is not being executed), and made difficult to execute when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a special pattern variation is being executed).

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions may be configured to be not only the presence or absence of special pattern changes, but also conditions that are met when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or conditions that are met during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if a predetermined condition is met and the above-mentioned first operation is executed, it is preferable to configure the machine to execute a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, a process to notify the player that the first operation process will not be executed). This allows the player to easily understand that the first operation process will not be executed. However, without being limited to this, the machine may also be configured to execute a different operation presentation that is not related to the first operation process.

In addition, even if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned first operation processing to be executed by executing a second operation different from the first operation, as in this control example. Also, in this first control example, the first operation and the second operation are configured to be executable by differentiating the operation method for one operation means (frame button 22), but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the pachinko machine 10 to have multiple operation means, to make the first operation executable by operating the first operation means (for example, the frame button 22), and to make the second operation executable by operating the second operation means (for example, a frame button provided other than the frame button 22). Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the second operation to be more difficult to execute than the first operation, for example, to arrange the first operation means on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 where the player can always operate it, and arrange the second operation means on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 121) where the player has difficulty operating it.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned first operating means and second operating means are provided, the first valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the first operating means is valid and the second valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the second operating means is valid may be set to the same period, or different periods may be set. When the valid operation determination periods are set to the same period, the process of determining the valid periods can be simplified. When different periods are set, the period for determining whether an operation is valid differs depending on the type of operating means to be operated, so that the player can be motivated to play by operating various operating means at various times.

The first control example described above is configured to be able to set a normal state and multiple advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and when one of the advantageous game states is set, the player is notified of the period (remaining period) until the next time the normal state is set, rather than the period until the set game state ends.

Here, conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a sure-win state or a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period during which that favorable game state will continue (the number of times the special pattern will change). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the favorable game state will continue, and subtract 1 from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special pattern lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the currently set favorable game state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines allow players to set multiple types of advantageous game states that are advantageous to them, and some allow players to set advantageous game states to normal advantageous game states (e.g., time-saving state) and the most advantageous game state (e.g., special state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when the game state transitions from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player is notified of the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the most advantageous game state will continue, and then, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the normal advantageous game state will continue.

In other words, when the most advantageous game state is set, it is possible to allow the player to understand the period (remaining period) for which the most advantageous game state will continue, but the player cannot understand what type of game state will be set after the most advantageous game state ends, or how long the game state set after the most advantageous game state ends will continue.

As a result, when the most advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) will be set, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to know what they should aim for while playing in the most advantageous gaming state.

In contrast, as described above, in this control example, when multiple types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous game state remaining period display mode is displayed for the period until the multiple types of advantageous game states end, that is, the period until the normal state is next set. By configuring it in this way, when different types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed to straddle the advantageous game states that are set in succession, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (high probability game state, time-saving game state) is being notified, a presentation can be executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the currently set game state is a high probability game state or a time-saving game state. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the game state that is set during the advantageous game state period, the player can play while hoping that a more advantageous game state has been set.

In this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) is notified, a suggestive effect that can suggest the currently set game state or a game state that was previously set can be executed. This makes it possible to interest the player in the content of the suggestive effect executed during the game state period.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the operation presentation can be executed in multiple presentation modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each presentation mode is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, the player can predict the current game state based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the advantageous game state period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Also, since the selection ratio of each presentation mode is simply varied according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved as the number of operation presentations executed during the advantageous game state period is increased. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (frame button 22). In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 149, when the frame button 22 is operated during the "chance mode" and "reach suggestion" is selected as the presentation mode of the operation presentation, a "reach suggestion" presentation is executed to suggest to the player whether the special pattern change being executed will be in a reach state, and if so, the reach line or reach pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to determine whether there is winning information that will be in a reach state among the winning information related to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and to notify the player that a second special pattern change that will be in a reach state will be executed based on the determination result before the second special pattern change is executed. In this way, the presentation effect can be further enhanced by expanding the presentation target of the operation presentation to not only the special pattern change being executed but also to the reserved special pattern change (special pattern change to be executed in the future).

In the first control example described above, the player operates the frame button 22 to switch to the background mode or to execute a presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery. However, as a function that can be executed by the player operating the operating means, for example, a volume adjustment function that adjusts the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment function that adjusts the brightness on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 formed by a liquid crystal display may be used. As with the background mode transition described above, the volume adjustment function and brightness adjustment function may also be configured to be less likely to be executed when a predetermined condition is met, specifically, when a period (high-speed change period) in which a short change time is likely to be selected as the change time for the special symbol change is set, than when other periods are set.

In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even while the high-speed fluctuation period is set, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that the background mode transition is not executed at all. Also, in the first control example described above, a first period is provided in which a specific presentation mode (background mode transition) is likely to be executed as an operation presentation executed by operating the operating means, and a second period is provided in which the operation presentation is less likely to be executed than the first period, but it may be configured so that three or more periods can be set in which the ratio at which the operation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode differs.

<Second control example>
Next, the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 202 to Fig. 210. The second control example is different from the first control example described above in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the control contents are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

In the first control example described above, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described above with reference to FIG. 122(b) was configured to be displayed on one image layer. In contrast, the second control example differs in that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that make up each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be displayed on different image layers. And, by controlling the display of the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz displayed on different image layers in synchronization, it is possible to variably display each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the same way as the first control example described above.

Here, conventionally, there have been machines that change the display of a third symbol as identification information to show the result of the special symbol lottery. Also, there have been machines that execute various effects (changing effects) while the third symbol is being changed, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while hoping for a jackpot win.

Some common gaming machines execute a pattern change display using multiple (e.g., three) pattern rows formed by multiple tertiary symbols (e.g., tertiary symbols numbered 1 to 9), and execute an effect that increases the likelihood of a big win (e.g., a reach effect) when a predetermined tertiary symbol is stopped and displayed in the remaining pattern rows except for the first pattern row. However, in conventional gaming machines, a change display is executed in which only the change speed of the change display is changed, without changing the order of the symbols that form the pattern row. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible to enhance the effect of the change display using the change display of the pattern row.

It has also been proposed to increase the variety of the variable display by placing identification information (sub-patterns) other than identification information (main pattern) for showing the results of the special pattern lottery in one pattern row. However, even with this configuration, there is a problem in that the effect of the variable display cannot be improved by simply varying the variable display speed of the pattern row formed by the main pattern and sub-pattern.

Furthermore, some machines prepare multiple pattern rows with different arrangements and types of main and sub-patterns in advance, and when a specific variable performance is executed, the pattern row itself is changed to enhance the effect of the variable performance. However, since it is necessary to execute control to change and display different pattern rows according to the variable performance executed, there is a problem that the display control becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this control example, the pattern string display is configured to be executed using multiple image layers. Specifically, the main and sub-patterns that make up the pattern string are configured to be displayed on separate image layers. Then, during normal times, the main and sub-patterns are synchronized and displayed in a variable manner, so that the various patterns that make up the pattern string are displayed in a specific arrangement (see FIG. 122(b)), while the variable display contents of the main and sub-patterns are made different, so that the pattern string can be displayed in a manner other than the specific pattern arrangement.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily display the third symbols in a variable manner other than the specific pattern arrangement while using image data of the third symbols (main and sub-symbols) that form a specific symbol row, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Now, referring to FIG. 202, the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layers formed in the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example and the display screen, FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the main symbol image layer sr is set to off and the display of the sub-symbol image layer fr is set to on, and FIG. 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the result of the display effect of FIG. 202(b).

As shown in FIG. 202(a), in this second control example, the main pattern image layer sr, on which the main pattern sz is displayed, and the sub-pattern image layer fr, on which the sub-pattern fz is displayed, are formed to overlap, and the main pattern image layer sr is configured to be positioned in front of the sub-pattern image layer fr (closer to the player's line of sight). Note that in FIG. 202(a), only the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz are shown, but in reality, each image layer (layer) that displays various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to Figure 155, each image layer is formed corresponding to each sprite, such as the background image used in one frame of image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). In addition, in areas where display images overlap, the display image displayed on the image layer in the foreground is given priority for visibility.

In this second control example configured in this manner, when the main pattern sz displayed on the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr are both displayed in a variable manner, the main pattern sz is displayed in priority to the sub-pattern fz, so that the identification information (main pattern sz) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is hidden by the identification information (sub-pattern fz) that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery, making it difficult for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery. In addition, since there is no need to control the variable display so that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz do not overlap in order to make it easier for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery, the variable display control can be simplified and the variable display of the main pattern sz can be executed by making maximum use of the limited display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), the main pattern layer sr is arranged in front of the sub-pattern layer fr, and the main pattern sz is displayed in priority over the sub-pattern fz. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-pattern layer fr may be arranged in front of the main pattern layer sr, so that the sub-pattern fz is displayed in priority over the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the display state of the main pattern sz while each pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery until the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed in a stopped manner, so that a variable performance of the third pattern that keeps players excited until the end can be executed.

Next, referring to Figures 202(b) and 202(c), the variable presentation executed by the display control for each pattern image layer will be explained. As described above, in this control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that make up the pattern row can be displayed independently. Furthermore, the display image set for each image layer can be set to be displayed or not. In other words, while internally executing the display control for each image layer, the display or non-display (on, off) can be set for the image layer itself.

Figure 202 (b) shows an example of a display screen when the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-pattern layer fr is set to ON, and only the sub-pattern fz of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary in the sub-display area Ds, and the words "Reach line notice start" are displayed, indicating that a reach line notice performance has been performed to notify the player of the reach line that will be effective in this third pattern change, by stopping and displaying the sub-pattern fz before the main pattern sz is displayed. After that, the performance result according to the stopping position of the sub-pattern fz is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 202(c), the sub-symbol fz is displayed as a diamond shape, and the words "Double Reach Confirmed" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a presentation result indicating that the winning state will be reached on the winning lines L4 and L5 (see FIG. 122). Then, when this reach line notice presentation ends, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to ON, and a variable presentation is performed to suggest to the player what type of main symbol sz will be that will be reached on the winning lines L4 and L5 (see FIG. 122), and then a double reach presentation (see FIG. 131) is performed.

In this way, in this second control example, it is possible to execute the variable display of the main pattern sz and the variable display of the sub-pattern fz differently, so that the sub-pattern fz is first variable displayed to inform the player of the location where the main pattern sz is stopped, and then the main pattern sz is variable displayed to inform the type of main pattern sz that will be in a reach state. Therefore, the performance results of the third pattern variable performance, which shows the result of the special pattern lottery, can be shown to the player in stages, providing an easy-to-understand performance.

In the reach line preview performance described with reference to Figs. 202(b) and (c), only the stop display position of the main pattern sz is notified to the player in advance by the stop display position of the sub-pattern fz. In addition to this, for example, the arrangement of the stopped and displayed sub-pattern fz may be configured to indicate the type of the stopped and displayed main pattern sz, that is, the result of the special pattern lottery. Specifically, for example, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in all areas other than the area that forms the pay line L2 (see Fig. 122(a)) as the result of the reach line preview performance, it is preferable to configure it so that a specific combination of main patterns sz (for example, the combination "3.4.1" from the top) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L2 (see Fig. 122(a)).

Here, when a specific combination of main symbols sz is displayed in a stopped state, it is preferable to configure the display of the third symbols to restart and execute a change effect that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot (a so-called pseudo consecutive change effect), or to execute a winning game (a jackpot game or a small jackpot game) as is. By configuring it in this way, when a reach line advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to make the player more interested in the result of the effect.

Furthermore, in the case where a reach line preview performance in which only the sub-pattern fz is displayed first is executed, in order to make it easy for the player to understand whether the current reach line preview performance is a performance that notifies the player in advance of only the stop display position of the main pattern sz or also the type of the main pattern sz that will be stopped and displayed, for example, after the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202(c)), the performance result of the current reach line preview performance can be notified by the type of display form (for example, a graphic display that connects each of the sub-patterns fz with a line) formed using each of the stopped and displayed sub-patterns fz. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 202(c) (a state in which the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a diamond shape), if a diamond shape is displayed, the performance result of the current reach line preview performance indicates in advance the stop position of the main pattern sz, and if a heart shape that connects the four sub-patterns fz is displayed, the player can be notified that the performance indicates in advance that a specific main pattern sz will be stopped and displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect (advance notification of the effect result) using the sub-pattern fz that is stopped and displayed between the time when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and the time when the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, the result of the variable effect (variable effect using the third pattern) for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be shown to the player in a more gradual manner, so that the player can continue to be interested in the variable effect being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 203, the contents of the various designs pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, similar to the first control example described above, a back image for an ocean background and a back image for a mountain background can be set as the back image. Specifically, when a background mode transition is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, the currently set back image (e.g., an ocean background) is switched to a back image that is not currently set (e.g., a mountain background).

Furthermore, this second control example is configured to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz) depending on the type of rear image that is set (displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display the main pattern sz in a display mode that depends on the type of rear image, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the rear image is switched.

Here, the contents of the image data of the main pattern sz displayed corresponding to the back image will be explained with reference to Fig. 203(a) and Fig. 203(b). Fig. 203(a) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main pattern for the sea used when the sea image (sea background) is set, and Fig. 203(b) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main image for the mountain used when the mountain image (mountain background) is set. Each of these image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed, the corresponding image data is read out from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern area 235d or the third pattern row area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. The process of reading out image data corresponding to each symbol and storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 is the same as in the first control example described above, so a detailed description of this will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), the image data corresponding to the marine main pattern sz stores image data (D1-D9) showing main patterns with numbers "1-9" added to nine types of patterns (octopus, porcupine fish, turtle, shark, shrimp, anglerfish, dugong, angelfish, crab). This main pattern image data D1-D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which it is actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read out the image data in order starting from D1 and store it in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, in this second control example, the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed in a stopped state when the reel state is reached, are formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), while the pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed in a variable manner during the reel state, is configured to be formed of ten main patterns. Specifically, the pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main patterns, which are the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form the above-mentioned pattern row Z1, plus a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) with the number 4 added to the shark pattern. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a variable manner so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 added passes, followed by the main pattern sz with the number 4 added, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 added passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, a main pattern with the number 4) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so that if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that is the combination for a jackpot will be stopped and displayed on the winning line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203(b), image data corresponding to the mountain main pattern sz stores image data (D1-D9) showing main patterns with numbers "1-9" added to nine types of pattern patterns (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, peacock, bear, wild boar, mouse, snake). This main pattern image data D1-D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which it is actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read out the image data in order starting from image data D1 and store it in the third pattern area 235d.

As in the case where the sea background is displayed, the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is stopped and displayed when the game is in a reach state, are formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), whereas the pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed variably during the reach state, is configured to be formed of ten main patterns. Specifically, the pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main patterns, which are the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form the above-mentioned pattern row Z1, plus a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) with the number 4 added to the rhinoceros pattern. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed variably so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, followed by the main pattern sz with the number 4, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, a main pattern with the number 4) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so that if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that is the combination for a jackpot will be stopped and displayed on the winning line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data corresponding to the main pattern sz described above is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern row area 235g as pattern row data for displaying the pattern row. In other words, the main pattern row image data (image data in which each main pattern sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display position of the sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the main pattern among the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is generated for each pattern row and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, the main pattern sz is variably displayed on the main pattern image layer sr using this main pattern row image data. By configuring in this way, the amount of image data used for display control can be reduced compared to variably displaying image data for each pattern unit, thereby reducing the processing load of the display control.

As described above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz of each pattern forming the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be able to be displayed in a variable manner independently. Therefore, even if the multiple main patterns sz of each pattern row are formed from a single image data (main pattern row image data) and displayed in a variable manner, various variable displays can be executed by varying the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz. Therefore, even if the number of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being reduced.

Furthermore, for the main pattern sz, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern among the third patterns forming each pattern row, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis using the main pattern row image data, and for the sub-pattern fz, which is identification information that does not indicate the lottery result of the special pattern, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis. Therefore, various variable performances can be performed by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz without changing the content of the variable display of the main pattern sz, which indicates the lottery result of the special pattern. In other words, in diversifying the variable display performance of the third pattern, the main pattern sz, whose display mode of the stop display is predetermined, can perform various variable performances by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz while executing a predetermined variable display. Therefore, the variable display performance of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern can be easily and reliably made to have a wide variety of contents.

In this second control example, all the main patterns sz that form the pattern row are configured to have one image data (main pattern row image data), but this is not limited to this. Of all the main patterns sz (main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9), normal main pattern row image data that generates only the pattern rows of some of the main patterns sz (for example, normal main patterns sz numbered with even numbers) and special probability main pattern row image data that generates only the pattern rows of the remaining main patterns sz (for example, special probability main patterns sz numbered with odd numbers) may be stored in the third pattern row area 235g, and the stored image data may be used to variably display the main patterns sz on the main pattern image layer sr.

In this case, for example, when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, that is, when a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using odd-numbered main patterns sz, it is possible to vary the content of the variable display using normal main pattern row image data while only the variable display using the variable main pattern row image data is executed as a predetermined variable display. Specifically, the variable display using normal main pattern row image data may be executed faster than the variable display using the variable main pattern row image data, so that the player can only see the odd-numbered main pattern sz. This makes it possible to notify the player that the third pattern change this time is a state in which only the variable main pattern sz is displayed, and only the variable main pattern sz is displayed, that is, the normal pattern (main pattern with an even number) is not displayed, and the player cannot win a normal jackpot.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the image data forming the main pattern sz is generated separately into normal main pattern row image data and special probability main pattern row image data, the normal main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the normal main pattern using the normal main pattern row image data and the special probability main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the special probability main pattern using the special probability main pattern row image data may be configured to be different, and depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to display the main pattern sz displayed on the normal main pattern image layer or the special probability main pattern layer (whether or not to enable (turn on) the display of each image layer). Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, it may be configured to execute variable display control using image data for each pattern unit without generating pattern row image data that forms the pattern row.

Next, the contents of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be described with reference to FIG. 203(c). FIG. 203(c) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the sub-symbol fz pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2. This image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed, the corresponding image data is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. Note that the contents of the process of reading image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the first control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(c), the character memory area 234a2 of this second control example stores at least image data SD1 of a normal sub-pattern fz (see FIG. 122(b)) imitating a triangular mark, image data SD2 of a sub-pattern fz for a preview performance imitating bubbles, and image data SD3 of a special sub-pattern fz imitating the number 16 as image data of the sub-pattern fz. Note that, although omitted in FIG. 202(c), the sub-pattern fz for the preview performance is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the sub-pattern fz for the preview performance imitating bubbles shown in FIG. 202(c) is the sub-pattern fz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also stores image data (not shown) of a sub-pattern fz for a preview performance imitating leaves (not shown) as a sub-pattern fz used when the mountain background is set.

Here, in this second control example, among the third patterns variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, only the sub-pattern fz that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr, and the sub-pattern fz can be displayed variably on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 independently of the main pattern sz variably displayed in a predetermined variability pattern (variability time, stop display position) on the main pattern image layer sr. Therefore, various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz can be easily executed without changing the variability display content of the main pattern sz. In addition, when various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz are executed, even if a part of it is displayed overlapping with the main pattern sz, the main pattern image layer sr is arranged to be displayed preferentially over the sub-pattern image layer fr, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult for the player to see the main pattern sz.

In this second control example, in addition to the reach line preview effect described with reference to Fig. 202(b) and Fig. 202(c), various other preview effects can be executed as a variation effect using the sub-pattern fz. For example, a preview effect at the start of variation in which the sub-pattern fz is switched to a display mode for a preview effect using image data SD2 and the main pattern sz is displayed to change in the opposite direction (rightward) to the direction of change (for example, leftward) of the main pattern sz when the third pattern starts to change can be executed, and a jackpot type suggestion effect can be executed in which a part of the sub-pattern fz is switched to a special display mode using image data SD3 and a jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests a jackpot type can be executed according to the number and arrangement of the sub-pattern fz (sub-pattern fz that resembles the number 16) of the special display mode that is stopped and displayed when the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stops changing.

In this way, by making it possible to execute various variable effects using identification information (sub-pattern fz) that is different from the identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery and that can be variably displayed during the period in which the identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is being variably displayed, it is possible to have the player pay attention to the variably displayed sub-pattern fz as well.

In addition, in this second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main pattern sz, the variable display control of the sub-pattern fz is configured to be executed on a pattern-by-pattern basis, so it is easy to execute control to switch the display mode of only some of the multiple sub-patterns fz formed in each pattern row Z1 to Z3 (for example, only the vicinity of the main pattern sz that is finally stopped and displayed) to a display mode for variable performance. Also, normally, it is possible to display two or more sub-patterns fz displayed between the main patterns sz, or to prevent only some of the sub-patterns fz from being displayed.

The timing for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be the timing when the special symbol variation starts, or the timing when the special symbol indicating a big win is displayed in a stopped state.

Finally, referring to FIG. 203(d), the contents of each image data used for the variable main pattern in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 203(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the variable main pattern. This variable main pattern refers to the 10th main pattern provided in pattern row Z2, i.e., the pattern row that is variably displayed during a reach state, and is the main pattern for which image data DA is used among the main pattern display data stored in the character memory area 234a2.

Conventionally, there are machines that display a variable representation (third symbol) to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery, and when a specific symbol is displayed in a static form, indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In this case, a variable performance is executed to induce the player to wonder whether the statically displayed symbol will be the specific symbol. Generally, a variable performance is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple types of symbol are formed in a specific order. Specifically, a variable performance is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple symbol pieces (for example, main symbol sz) with the numbers 1 to 9 are formed in a specific order.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, in order to enhance the presentation effect of the third pattern variation, a variation presentation is executed in which the display mode of the third pattern during the variation display is varied; however, when varying the identification information (third pattern) during the variation display, if the numbers 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, i.e., the specific information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, are changed, for example, even if the variation display is executed using nine third patterns each having the numbers 1 to 9, if the third pattern having the number 5 attached is switched to the third pattern having the number 6 attached during the variation, the third pattern having the number 6 attached will disappear, and there is a risk that the player will become suspicious that the result of the special pattern lottery has been changed during the variation display of the third pattern.

For example, if a variable display is performed using nine third symbols numbered 1 to 9, and then a new third symbol numbered 6 is added midway, switching to a variable display using a total of ten third symbols, it is necessary to execute display control to deal with the increase in the number of third symbols being displayed midway, which could make the control content more difficult.

In contrast, in this control example, pattern row Z2 is formed by 10 main patterns, including each main pattern numbered 1 to 9 and a change main pattern. This makes it possible to change the display mode of the main patterns without changing the number of main patterns that form the pattern row, while leaving the various patterns numbered 1 to 9. Furthermore, even if the display mode of the change main patterns is changed to various display modes, the number of main patterns that form pattern row Z2 does not change, so display control of pattern row Z2 can be easily executed.

203(d), the character memory area 234a2 of this second control example stores at least image data DA1 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 4, image data DA2 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 7, image data DA3 of a V main pattern sz imitating the letter V, image data DA4 of a special main pattern sz imitating the number 16, and image data DA4 of a regrettable main pattern sz imitating a cross, as image data of the change main pattern. Although omitted in FIG. 202(d), the normal main pattern sz is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "shark" and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "dugong" shown in FIG. 202(d) are main patterns sz used when the ocean background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also stores in advance image data (not shown) of a normal main pattern sz (not shown) that resembles a "rhino" or a "wild boar" as the normal main pattern sz used when a mountain background is set.

Here, in the variable display performance of the third pattern under normal circumstances, the change main pattern using image data DA1 is configured to be displayed in pattern row Z2, and in some cases when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or in a very small number of cases when a losing win is won in the special pattern lottery, the change main pattern using image data DA2 is configured to be displayed in pattern row Z2. That is, during normal play, the altered main pattern sz resembling a "shark" with the number 4 attached is displayed in a variable manner, so that five main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) suggesting a normal jackpot win and five main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a guaranteed jackpot win are displayed, for a total of 10 main patterns to form the pattern row Z2. However, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or in a very small number of cases where a jackpot is won but not won in the special pattern lottery, the altered main pattern sz resembling a "dugong" with the number 7 attached is displayed in a variable manner, so that four main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) suggesting a normal jackpot win and six main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a guaranteed jackpot win are displayed, for a total of 10 main patterns to form the pattern row Z2.

This makes the player feel hopeful that he or she may have won a jackpot (high probability jackpot) that is favorable to the player in the currently running special pattern lottery. The condition for using the main pattern sz for changing the pattern, which resembles a dugong with the number 7, should be that it is more likely to be established when the special pattern lottery results in a jackpot than when it is otherwise (a miss), and it may be configured so that it is not used when the special pattern lottery results in a miss. It may also be configured so that, among the jackpot wins in the special pattern lottery, it is more likely to be used when a high probability jackpot is won than when a normal jackpot is won. This makes it possible to associate the apparent number of each type of main pattern (even and odd numbers) with the probability of winning a high probability jackpot, providing an easy-to-understand game.

The V main pattern sz shown in image data DA3 is a display mode that is not displayed under normal circumstances, and is displayed as a change main pattern when a special condition is met during the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern). This V main pattern sz is used as a general-purpose main pattern that becomes a combination indicating a jackpot win when it is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reach state, regardless of the type of main pattern sz that becomes the reach state. By using the general-purpose main pattern in this way, for example, even if the main pattern that becomes a combination that will result in a jackpot win passes over the effective line of the reach state, it can be expected that the third pattern (main pattern) will be stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win without waiting for the pattern row Z2 to go around again.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the third symbol variable display performance, when a double reach state is reached with the normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and the probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number), if the V main symbol is displayed stationary on the effective line of each overlapping reach state, it is preferable to configure it so that the main symbol that is advantageous to the player indicates that a jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful even if the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner when a double reach state is reached. Furthermore, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as a general-purpose main symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using the V main symbol, the V main symbol may be used as a symbol indicating a duplicate jackpot, indicating that in addition to the jackpot game being executed this time, the right to execute at least one more jackpot game has already been acquired (there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserved special symbol that is stored), or the V main symbol may be configured to indicate that the right to execute multiple jackpot games has already been acquired simply by displaying it in a variable manner. By configuring it in this way, when the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player can play the game with a greater sense of expectation.

Next, the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 and the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third pattern, but are used in the promotion effect that can be executed after the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win. Here, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, an advantageous jackpot game (probable jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot game are configured to be executable. For example, when a probable jackpot is won, in a part (or all) of the cases where a jackpot is won in a combination using a normal main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an even number) that suggests that a normal jackpot game will be played, a promotion effect is configured to be executable to change the type of the stopped and displayed main pattern sz to a probable main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number).

During this promotion effect, the main pattern sz is not used to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot, miss), but is used to indicate whether the currently won jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 indicating a guaranteed jackpot, or the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 indicating a normal jackpot, is set as the change main pattern. In this way, by changing the display mode of the change main pattern in accordance with the timing at which the content to be notified to the player changes using the main pattern sz, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is easy to understand.

In this second control example, the type of main pattern sz displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win by the promotion effect is promoted from the normal main pattern sz to the guaranteed bonus main pattern sz. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of rounds (number of rounds) played during a jackpot game may be promoted from a main pattern indicating a small number of rounds to a main pattern indicating a larger number of rounds. In this case, multiple image data may be prepared as the change main pattern in a display mode that suggests the number of rounds that may be played, and the display mode of the change main pattern may be determined using the corresponding image data according to the type of jackpot that has actually been won.

In addition, in this control example, the main pattern column image data of the pattern column Z2 is generated using nine main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-mentioned change main pattern sz, and stored in the third pattern column area 235g. However, this is not limited to this, and the change main pattern sz may be stored in the third pattern column area 235d without being included in the main pattern column image data, and variable display control may be performed on a pattern basis in the same way as the sub-pattern fz. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the change main pattern sz in the pattern column Z2 that has been set once can be easily changed.

Also, a change main pattern image layer sr1 on which the change main pattern sz is displayed may be arranged separately from the main pattern image layer sr on which the main pattern sz is displayed, and the change main pattern image layer sr1 may be used to display the change main pattern sz. In this case, since the change main pattern sz is displayed only in the pattern row Z2, it is preferable to arrange the change main pattern image layer sr1 so that the display area of the pattern row Z2 is the only display area, and the change main pattern image layer sr1 is arranged in a position where it is displayed with lower priority than the main pattern image layer sr and with higher priority than the sub-pattern image layer fr. This prevents the change main pattern sz from being hidden by the sub-pattern fz, and allows the change main pattern sz to be displayed without interfering with the display of the main pattern sz.

The image data described above with reference to Figures 203(a) to (d) is part of the image data showing the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stored in the character memory area 234a2, and in fact other image data is also stored. For example, each of the image data stored as main pattern display data stores image data corresponding to a display mode showing a different action (e.g., a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or happy), and when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., a jackpot), the display mode of the stopped and displayed third pattern (main pattern sz) can be changed by replacing the image data.

Specifically, when the third symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state (when the "Dugong" with the number 7 is displayed in a normal display state), the display is switched to a special display state in which the "Dugong" with the number 7 has a surprised expression. This makes it possible to inform the player that he or she has won the jackpot by the display state of the third symbol. In addition, the image data corresponding to this special display state may be configured to be used for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) after the third symbol variation begins, and an effect may be executed to suggest to the player that he or she has won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery immediately after the third symbol variation begins.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, the flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 204 is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the variable display performance of the third pattern and the display contents of the pattern row displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In FIG. 204, a variable pattern with a variable time of 60 seconds, which indicates a jackpot win, is used as an example of the third pattern variable performance.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command indicating the start of special pattern variation, it determines the variation display mode of the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz based on the currently received variation pattern (command). Specifically, in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, it determines whether or not there will be a preview performance, whether or not there will be a reach performance, and the stop pattern, and sets the corresponding display command. After that, in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, it sends the set display command to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the display control device 114 executes a command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 190) in a variable pattern command process 2 (see S6455 in FIG. 209) to analyze the received display command (variable pattern command), determine a variable display table based on the analysis result, read image data (main pattern row image data) of the main pattern row using the main pattern sz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern row area 235g, read image data corresponding to the sub-pattern fz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern row area 235g, generate a display image, and display it on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

The normal variation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation performance is executed. This normal variation period is the period during which all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a varying manner, and is set as the period during which the player can execute a background mode transition by operating the frame button 22. If a background mode transition is executed during this normal variation period, control is executed such that each of the main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz symbols displayed in a display mode corresponding to the background mode is switched to a display mode corresponding to the post-transition background mode.

After that, when the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 are displayed in a stopped state and reach is reached, a reach variation period of 40 seconds is set, and a reach performance is executed that suggests (tells) whether the lottery result of the special pattern this time is a jackpot. During this reach variation period, the background mode transition is not executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, a decorative performance is executed in which the light emission state of various decorative LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 is changed. In addition, in a part of the reach performance, an operation performance is executed in which an effective period (SW effective period) that effectively determines the operation of the frame button 22 is set, and when the frame button 22 is operated within the set effective period, a performance that is not executed when the frame button 22 is not operated is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, a definite notification that notifies the player that the special pattern lottery this time has been a jackpot win, and a suggestive notification that indicates that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot win are executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate a player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special pattern to operate the frame button 22. In addition, because there are effects that cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effects, players who want to see a variety of effects are motivated to operate the frame button 22.

As described above, the background mode transition is not executed during the reach fluctuation period, so that the background mode is not switched during the reach effect that suggests (teasing) that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, which can prevent the reach effect from being difficult for the player to understand. In addition, since the operation effect is executed during the reach fluctuation period when the background mode transition is not executed, it is possible to make the player actively operate the frame button 22, even if it is configured to be possible to set a fluctuation effect (so-called hidden operation effect) that does not notify the player of the SW valid period set in the operation effect.

In this case, it is advisable to set a notification mode on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to notify the player that a period in which background mode transition is not being executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "The background mode will not change even if you press the button during a reach"), or to set a notification mode to notify the player that a hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "If you press the button at any point during a reach, a special effect will be executed"). This allows the player to execute the operation effect with peace of mind.

Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, among the combinations of main patterns sz that indicate a jackpot win, the third pattern is stopped and displayed with a combination of normal main patterns sz (main patterns sz with even numbers), and then a promotion effect is executed to promote the normal main patterns sz that have won the jackpot to a probability variable main pattern (main patterns sz with odd numbers). When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether the current jackpot win is a probability variable jackpot or not, and based on the result of the determination, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz and the display mode of the change main pattern sz among the main patterns sz are determined. Then, the promotion effect using the pattern row for the promotion effect is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, as the pattern sequence for the promotion effect, for example, if the display mode of the change main pattern sz is a display mode using image data DA4 (see FIG. 203(d)) and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is a display mode using image data SD3 (see FIG. 203(c)), in addition to the normal high probability main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number), many patterns indicating that the player has won an advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be displayed, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of being promoted to a high probability jackpot with this promotion effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, the content of the variable performance executed in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 205 shows an example of the variable performance of the third pattern executed for the same variable pattern command, where FIG. 202(a) is a diagram that shows the flow of the variable pattern used in the example, FIG. 202(b) is a diagram that shows the flow of the normal performance, FIG. 202(c) is a diagram that shows the flow of the reach line notice performance (see FIG. 202(b)), and FIG. 202(d) is a diagram that shows the flow of the notice performance in which the variable direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from normal.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), when the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command for executing a reach performance. Furthermore, various advance notice performances using the sub-pattern fz are executed using the period until the reach performance is executed. As described above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that form each pattern row are configured to be independently variable and displayable, so that various variation performances (advance notice performances) can be executed by varying only the variation pattern of the sub-pattern fz while displaying the main pattern sz in a specific variation pattern according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the performance A shown in FIG. 205(b), similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, a third pattern change display (see FIG. 202(a)) is executed in which the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are synchronized, showing the normal pattern in which a reach state is reached. In this way, by controlling the display to synchronize the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz, which are displayed in a changing manner independently, it is possible to give the appearance that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a changing manner as one pattern row.

Next, in the performance B shown in FIG. 205(c), the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to off (set to hidden) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the third pattern change, during which a reach line notice performance is executed that stops the display of the change of the sub-pattern fz. In other words, the same display control as in 205(a) described above is executed for the main pattern sz, but since the main pattern layer sr is set to hidden during the first half of the normal change period (15 seconds), the player cannot see the change display of the main pattern sz.

Then, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner during the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) (see FIG. 202(b)), and the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a static manner at the end of the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), thereby displaying the position where the main pattern sz is displayed in a static manner in the current third pattern fluctuation display (see FIG. 202(c)). After that, when the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) begins, the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to on (set to display), and the main pattern sz is displayed in a variable manner during the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), and the reach state is reached 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts, just like in FIG. 205(b).

In other words, when the effect B shown in FIG. 205(c) is executed, that is, when the reach line notice effect is executed, the position where the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed can be notified to the player before the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, so it becomes possible to know in advance (15 seconds after the start of the third pattern change) whether the current third pattern change display will be a double reach, a single reach, or not a reach. Therefore, compared to the normal pattern (see FIG. 205(b)) in which it takes 30 seconds to know whether it will be a reach or not, if the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a position where the main pattern sz cannot be in a reach state, the period during which the player has excessive expectations can be shortened.

In addition, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, the player can enjoy the remaining variation time while anticipating which main pattern sz will be in a reach state. Note that in this second control example, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, it is configured to always be in a reach state, so the player can easily determine whether or not the current third pattern variation will be in a reach state based on the timing of the stop display of the sub-pattern fz.

Finally, in the performance C shown in FIG. 205(d), a normal display is executed for the main pattern sz as in the performance A described above, and a different performance from performance A is executed for the sub-pattern fz only for a predetermined period (3 seconds) from the start of the change. Specifically, a display mode using image data SD2 (see FIG. 203(c)) is set as the display mode for the sub-pattern fz displayed at the start of the change, and a sub-pattern reverse change display is executed to change the sub-pattern fz in the opposite direction (rightward) to the change display direction of the main pattern (leftward), and then a change display using the normal sub-pattern fz is executed in synchronization with the change display of the main pattern sz.

As shown in the presentation pattern C, by making the direction of change display of the main pattern sz and the direction of change display of the sub-pattern fz different at the timing when the third pattern change display starts, a surprising presentation can be presented to the player; in other words, for a player who recognizes that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are formed in the same pattern row and only change and display in the same direction, the sub-pattern fz is displayed changeably in an unexpected manner, providing a surprising presentation.

As explained above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are configured to be independently variable and can be displayed, the variable display mode of the main pattern sz is set in response to a variable pattern command that is set based on the lottery result of the special pattern, and various variable performances can be executed by varying only the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz without varying the variable display mode of the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the variable display result of the main pattern sz differs from the lottery result of the special pattern.

In addition, when the sub-pattern fz is displayed first, for example, the sub-pattern fz may be enlarged and displayed so that the sub-pattern fz covers the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and during that time, the display position of the main pattern sz and the pattern type may be changed.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 206 to Fig. 208. Fig. 206 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the contents of the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 have been changed, and a third pattern row area 235g has been added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same components are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As described above with reference to FIG. 203, the character storage area 234a2 of this second control example differs from the character storage area 234a2 of the first control example in that the image data D1-D9 of the main pattern display data corresponding to each background mode, the image data SD1-SD3 of the sub-pattern display data, and the image data DA1-DA5 of the change main pattern display data are stored in the character storage area 234a2, but the other image data stored therein are the same. Note that the details of the image data newly stored in this second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 203, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern column area 235g is a storage area for reading out multiple image data of the main pattern sz stored in the character memory area 234a2, generating one image data (main pattern column image data) as a pattern column in advance, and storing the generated main pattern column image data. When the main pattern sz is to be displayed variably on the main pattern image layer sr, the main pattern column image data stored in this third pattern column area 235g is read out, and the main pattern sz is variably displayed by variably setting the display position coordinates based on the drawing contents specified in the display data table. By configuring in this way, the number of image data used when displaying the main pattern sz variably can be reduced compared to when image data generated on a main pattern sz basis is used, thereby reducing the processing load of the display control.

Next, referring to FIG. 207, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of this second control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time in correspondence with an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the display data table in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 153) in that the drawing contents for the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) are different, but otherwise is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the drawing contents of the display data table specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display either rear A or B corresponding to the background mode selected by the player (either "sea mode" or "mountain mode"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A and B. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A and B is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that either back face A or B is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery out of back faces A and B as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

Next, the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. First, the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, ...) are set with display position coordinates indicating the stop position of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance. This allows the variable performance to start from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance. As shown in FIG. 202(a), unlike the main symbol sz, the sub-symbol fz does not have a unique number, and all sub-symbols fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, by simply setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance, the variable performance can be easily started from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance.

...

In the former case, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in the display mode to be used in the current variable performance before the variable performance starts, i.e., when the sub-pattern fz is stopped, so the player can understand the content of the variable performance to be executed in advance, enhancing the performance effect. In addition, in the latter case, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz can be changed at a timing that is difficult for the player to notice, so the display mode of the sub-pattern fz can be changed smoothly without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, among the types of sprites for displaying the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the third pattern display device 81, the sprite for displaying the main pattern sz will be described. The main pattern columns (main pattern column 1, main pattern column 2, ...) store pattern column type offset information as pattern column type information for specifying the main pattern sz of the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference in the numbers attached to each main pattern sz. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the main pattern sz is that the display of the main pattern sz in the variable performance changes depending on the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopped pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has passed describes the offset information from the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopped pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

Since each main pattern sz is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number assigned to the main pattern sz. Also, by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each main pattern sz, the main pattern sz to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly varying manner. While the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly varying manner, the main pattern sz is not visible to the player. During that time, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers of the main pattern sz is interrupted, the player can be prevented from noticing the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data of each main pattern sz displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main pattern row image data) for each pattern row. For example, for each main pattern sz with the numbers 1 to 9 attached that are variably displayed in the pattern row Z1, the main pattern sz with the number 3 attached is the head of the image data, and then the main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order of "3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4" and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, by varying the display position coordinates of the main pattern row image data based on the passage of time, an image in which only the main patterns sz that form the pattern row Z1 are variably displayed is displayed on the main pattern image layer sr. The size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main pattern layer sr is set to a size that does not allow all images contained in the main pattern column image data to be displayed, and is set to a size that allows a maximum of three main patterns sz to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 202(a).

Therefore, based on the offset information included in the pattern row type offset information, the type of main pattern sz to be displayed on the main pattern image layer sr is specified, the display range of the main pattern row image data is determined corresponding to the position where the specified main pattern sz should be displayed, and the display of each main pattern sz is executed in that display range. In this way, when executing a variable display without changing the arrangement relationship of the main pattern sz, as in the first control example described above, image data is provided for each main pattern sz, and the pattern type of each main pattern sz to be displayed when starting the current variable performance is specified based on the offset information of the stop pattern of the main pattern sz in the previous variable performance, and then, depending on the content of the variable performance to be executed, the display control process is more easily reduced when a pattern row image data in which multiple main patterns sz are specified in a predetermined order and with a predetermined interval is generated, and the variable performance is executed using the pattern row image data, rather than setting the display position (display position coordinates) of the image data of each main pattern sz synchronously while variably setting them.

When the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to change the arrangement of the main patterns sz or to change the spacing between the main patterns sz. In that case, it is better to execute display control to variably display each main pattern sz using image data corresponding to each main pattern sz as in the first control example described above. In addition, the configuration of the first control example described above and the configuration of the second control example may be combined to use image data in units of patterns only for a specific main pattern sz, and to use main pattern row image data for multiple main patterns other than the specific main pattern. In this case, it is easy to execute control to change the image data used for a specific main pattern or to change the degree of change in the display position (variable display speed), and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control when variably displaying multiple main patterns sz for multiple main patterns sz that are always displayed with synchronized variable display content without executing special display control.

In this second control example, in which one image data (main pattern row image data) is generated for each pattern row, different drawing contents are set for each of pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (for each pattern row), and for pattern row Z2, for each main pattern sz with the variably displayed numbers 1 to 9, the main pattern sz with the number 4 attached is at the beginning of the image data, and then main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order "4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → 3", and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. In addition, for the pattern row Z3, for each main pattern sz with the variably displayed numbers 1 to 9, the main pattern sz with the number 1 is at the beginning of the image data, and then the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9", so that main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) and stored in the third pattern row area 235g.

By controlling the display so that all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably to the left using the main pattern column image data corresponding to each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 configured in this way, only the main pattern sz displayed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed variably on the main pattern image layer sr. As described above, the type of main pattern sz located at the beginning of the main pattern column image data is different for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (initial state), the main patterns sz numbered "3.4.1" are displayed stationary from the top at the center position of the third pattern display device 81, i.e., on the pay line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)). In other words, by configuring the numbers attached to the main patterns sz at the beginning of each main pattern string image data to be different, in the initial state where no variable pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display combinations of main patterns sz that are different from the combination that will result in a jackpot simply by setting the initial display so that the beginning of the main pattern string image data forming each of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 is on the active line L2, simplifying the display control in the initial state.

Next, the contents of the drawing list in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list differs from the drawing list of the first control example described above (see FIG. 155) in that the type of sprite for displaying the third pattern has been changed, but is otherwise the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 208, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the background image, sub-pattern (sub-pattern 1, sub-pattern 2, ...), main pattern row (main pattern row 1, main pattern row 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern) used in one frame's image. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, as well as its address. The image controller 237 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address.

In other words, the drawing instruction contents for the image of the sub-pattern fz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for the current drawing instruction from among the multiple image data SD1 to SD3 (see FIG. 203 (c)) corresponding to the sub-pattern fz stored in the third pattern area 235d. Also, the drawing instruction contents for the image of the main pattern sz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for the current drawing instruction from among the multiple image data (main pattern row image data) corresponding to the main pattern row stored in the third pattern row area 235g.

<Regarding the control process in the second control example>
Next, the control process contents in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 209 and Fig. 210. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the control process contents executed by the display control device 114 are different. In addition, the type contents of the performance mode of the variable performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 are also different. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In this second control example, the content of the variable performance mode of the third pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113 is different, and specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 205, it is configured to be possible to set a display command for executing various variable performances only for the sub-pattern fz of the third pattern. However, the method of setting the display command corresponding to the variable performance is the same as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and only the specific setting content is different, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the content of the various variable performances executed for the sub-pattern fz executed in this second control example has been described above with reference to FIG. 205, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the control process executed by the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command process 2 (S6455). This variable pattern command process 2 (S6455) executes a process corresponding to the display variable pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and differs from the variable pattern command process executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see S6405 in FIG. 191) in that a process is added to determine the type of the change main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz used during the current variable performance and store them in various storage areas of the resident video RAM 235. Since the other process contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used for the same process contents and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the variable pattern command process 2 (S6455), first, the selected variable pattern command (display variable pattern command) is analyzed (S6501), and it is determined whether the current variable pattern command is a variable pattern command for indicating a big win (a variable pattern command selected when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110) (S6551). If it is determined that the current variable pattern command is a big win (S6551: Yes), it is then determined whether the current variable pattern command for display contains information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance (S6552), and if it is determined that the information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance is contained (S6552: Yes), a change main pattern corresponding to the command is determined as the change main pattern of the promotion-only pattern row, and stored in the third pattern row area, and the process proceeds to S6554. Also, if in the process of S6551 it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a big win fluctuation, or if in the process of S6552 it is determined that the promotion effect will not be executed, then the process proceeds to S6554, where based on the information analyzed in the process of S6501 it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation pattern contains information for executing a preview effect (see FIG. 205) using the sub-pattern fz, and if it is determined that the preview effect of the sub-pattern fz will be executed (S6554 in FIG. 209: Yes), the display mode of the sub-pattern fz to be used in the current sub-pattern preview effect is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined display mode is read from the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

Then, a variation display data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined, a display variation pattern for 0 is set, and the process of S6502 to S6505 is executed, which is the same as the variation pattern command process (see S6405 in FIG. 191) executed by the display control device 114 in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command process 2. This rear image change command process 2 (S6469) differs from the above-mentioned rear image change command process (see S6419 in FIG. 195(a)) in that when the rear image change flag 233w is set to on, a process is added to determine the type of third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) and store it in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used for the same processes and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the rear image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g (S7002). After that, the rear image discrimination flag 223x corresponding to the changed rear image type is set to ON (S7051), and this process is terminated.

<Modification of the second control example>
Next, a modified example of the second control example described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 211. In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz constituting the third pattern is displayed (drawn) on the main pattern image layer sr, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub-pattern image layer fr. By synchronizing the display contents of the main pattern image layer sr and the display contents of the sub-pattern image layer fr, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a regular, variable manner while remaining in a specific order. Furthermore, by variably setting only the display control contents for the sub-pattern fz, various variable performances can be performed without varying the variable display contents for the main pattern sz for showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn) on one image layer, as in the first control example described above, and further, it differs in that it is configured to provide multiple (two) image layers for displaying (drawing) the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). And it differs in that it is configured to be able to execute a special variable performance by varying the display control content of the third pattern displayed on the two image layers (third pattern image A, third pattern image B). The rest of the content is the same as the second control example described above, and a detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

Figure 211(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of this second control example and the display screen, Figure 211(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance, and Figure 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), in a modified example of the second control example, the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B are overlapped as the image layers on which the third pattern is displayed, and the third pattern image layer A is configured to be positioned in front of the third pattern image layer B (closer from the player's line of sight). Note that while only the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B are labeled in FIG. 211(a), in reality, each image layer (layer) displaying various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Then, by synchronizing the variable display of the third pattern for the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B, it is possible to execute a variable display that appears to be identical to the variable display of the third pattern shown with reference to Figure 125 (b) in the first control example described above.

In this modified example configured in this manner, as in the second control example described above, the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B can be independently controlled for variable display, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B is in a single reach for "9", it is possible to continue the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A. In this state, depending on the result of the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A, the number of third patterns in a reach state increases, and the words "Reach! Promotion Chance" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 211(c), when a double reach of "1" and "9" is achieved in the third pattern displayed on the third pattern layer A, it appears as a "triple reach" where three third patterns are in a reach state. In this way, by displaying the third patterns in overlapping and variable form using multiple layers, it is possible to easily execute a variable presentation that requires display control to change the order of the pattern rows of each third pattern when displaying the third patterns in a variable form on one layer, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this way, when the variable display of the third pattern is made different for multiple third pattern layers, for example, the third pattern displayed on the layer on the side displayed with priority (third pattern layer A) is set as the true third pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, and the third pattern displayed on the non-priority side layer (third pattern layer B) is set as the decorative third pattern, and the variable pattern of the third pattern on the third pattern layer A is determined based on the variable pattern set based on the lottery result of the special pattern (variation pattern set by the main control device 110), and the voice lamp control device 113 determines the variable performance content of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern layer B based on the determined variable pattern of the third pattern on the third pattern layer A (based on the presence or absence of a jackpot win or the type of reach). And, it is preferable to configure so that different variable display control is executed between the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B when a jackpot win is won in the special pattern lottery than when it is not.

In addition, in this modified example, a change presentation in which the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B are completely different has been described, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to execute a change presentation in which the change start timing is shifted by 0.2 seconds, and then during the high speed change of the third pattern, a change presentation in which the change display content is synchronized is executed. In this way, by making the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B different for only a part of the change presentation, a slight sense of discomfort can be given to the player, allowing the player to make a better selection of the change display.

As explained above, in the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, various display controls are performed on each of the third patterns (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, which are composed of patterns including a main pattern sz having identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. However, patterns other than the patterns (third patterns) of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be provided as long as they are dynamically displayed so that the display areas overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

For example, during the execution of the third pattern change, a special pattern not included in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in a display area that overlaps with the display area of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Also, the above-mentioned special pattern may be dynamically displayed during the period in which the third pattern change is being executed, and may be configured to start dynamically displaying the special pattern during the execution of the third pattern change, or to stop displaying or hide the special pattern during the execution of the third pattern change.

Even in this configuration, the variable display mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz can be determined based on the results of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to set a variation pattern for the special symbol for presentation, similar to the sub-symbol fz described above. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned special symbol is not a symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, unlike the sub-symbol fz, the player will not feel uncomfortable even if it is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start or stop timing of the third symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of variation patterns that can be set more than the sub-symbol fz, and the presentation effect can be further improved.

The dynamic display mode of the special pattern may be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third pattern described above. For example, if the dynamic display direction of the third pattern is to the left (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), the dynamic display direction of the special pattern may be configured to be a different direction from the dynamic display direction of the third pattern (for example, to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)). This makes it possible to easily notify the player that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed, even if the special pattern is dynamically displayed in a display area overlapping with the display area of the third pattern variable display during the period in which the third pattern variable display is being executed.

In the above example, the dynamic display direction of the special pattern is the exact opposite direction to the dynamic display direction of the third pattern, but it is sufficient if the dynamic display direction is different. For example, instead of the left-right direction, it may be an up-down direction (a direction moving up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), a front-back direction (a direction moving from the back side to the front side, or from the front side to the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), or a diagonal direction (a direction moving diagonally with an angle of less than 90 degrees shifted from the movement line indicating the movement direction). Furthermore, in the above example, a pattern in which the dynamic display direction of the third pattern and the dynamic display direction of the special pattern are different has been described in order to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change by making the size of the dynamically displayed third pattern and the size of the special pattern different. Furthermore, it may be configured to dynamically display the special symbol before the third symbol change is executed, or to dynamically display the special symbol after the third symbol change is statically displayed (including a display state in which the symbol is swaying to an extent that is difficult for the player to distinguish).

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the above example, the dynamic display direction and size of each pattern (third pattern, special pattern) may be configured to be the same in order to notify in an unnoticeable manner that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change. By configuring it in this way, it is not possible to know that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed unless the player pays close attention to the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that players who want to know that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed can continue to be interested in the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

As mentioned above, unlike the third symbol, the special symbol does not have to be displayed all the time, and therefore does not indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol according to the display mode when it is stopped like the third symbol. For example, the dynamic display of the special symbol may be started to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot. In this way, by varying the timing at which information indicating the result of the lottery for the special symbol is provided (dynamic display start timing, stopped display timing) according to the type of dynamically displayed symbol, the timing at which the player should pay attention can be varied according to the various dynamically displayed symbols, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, when a special pattern is used that indicates a high possibility of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery by starting the dynamic display in this way, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display at least a part of the special pattern as a standby display mode that suggests that the dynamic display will be executed. For example, when a special pattern in a display mode in which multiple fish are in a school is used as the special pattern, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display only the fish displayed near the front of the special pattern in the moving direction side. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play while hoping that the dynamic display of the special pattern will start. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display not all of the display mode indicating the special pattern, but a part of it. This makes it possible to suppress the misconception that the special pattern is already being dynamically displayed when the special pattern is displayed as a standby display mode.

In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz forming the third pattern are configured to be displayed on different image layers, and the display control contents executed for each image layer are made different to make the variable display mode of the main pattern sz and the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz different. In addition to this, for example, a first sub-pattern image layer and a second sub-pattern image layer may be provided as image layers capable of displaying the sub-pattern fz, and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the first sub-pattern image layer and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the second sub-pattern image layer may be configured to be displayed overlapping each other, or only one of them may be displayed. In addition, the display control may be performed so that the stop display positions of the sub-pattern fz displayed on multiple display layers are made different, and then the reach line notice performance shown in FIG. 202(b) is executed to further limit the position where the main pattern sz is stopped.

In the second control example described above, the display image layers for displaying one pattern (main pattern sz) and the other patterns (sub-pattern fz) that make up each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are different, and display control can be performed on each display image layer, making it possible to perform various variable effects. However, as long as different display controls can be performed for each type of pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that forms the pattern row of the third pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, they may be displayed on the same display image layer. In this case, when the display objects displayed as a result of each display control overlap, it is necessary to specify in advance which display object is to be displayed, which makes the display control process more complicated, but it is possible to achieve the same effect as each of the effects described in the second control example above.

In addition, even when a configuration is used in which the results of multiple display controls are displayed on the same display layer, the various display control processes described in the above-mentioned second control example may be executed for various patterns including patterns other than the multiple pattern types (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that make up pattern row Z1 to Z3, i.e., patterns other than the third pattern that are dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in response to the display of the changing special pattern (for example, decorative patterns that are dynamically displayed for a specified period during the special pattern change to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is highly likely to be a specific result (a jackpot win)).

In the second control example described above, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the display mode of the main pattern sz is switched to a display mode corresponding to the switched background mode. However, when a background mode transition effect is executed, not only the display mode of the main pattern sz but also the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched. In this case, image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as image data of the sub-pattern fz stored in the character memory area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, image data corresponding to the switched background mode is read out and stored in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the result of the ongoing special symbol lottery may be determined, and the type of sub-symbol fz to be displayed after the background mode is switched may be determined based on the determination result. Specifically, a display mode imitating the number 16 or a display mode imitating a "V" may be provided as a type of sub-symbol fz that is more likely to be determined when the ongoing special symbol lottery results in a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring in this way, the result of the special symbol lottery can be easily predicted by executing the background mode transition effect and switching the background mode before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be encouraged to actively execute the operation effect.

Furthermore, the possibility that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a jackpot winning may be varied depending on the combination of the background mode that is set and the type of sub-pattern fz that is displayed. For example, when the type of sub-pattern fz (display mode for sea mode) that is normally used in the first presentation mode (sea mode) is used in the second presentation mode (mountain mode), it may be configured to indicate that there is a high possibility that the special pattern lottery being held will be a jackpot winning. In this way, by executing a presentation that combines the background mode and the type of sub-pattern fz, a variety of presentations can be executed without increasing the number of types of sub-pattern fz.

In addition, in this control example, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, a process is executed to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). In addition, the number and positions of the valid lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122(a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may also be changed.

Furthermore, when the reach line preview effect shown in Figs. 202(a) and (b) is executed and the sub-pattern fz is displayed frozen (see Fig. 202(b)), the stopped display position of the main pattern sz notified in the reach line preview effect may be changed. In this case, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be changed more easily when the result of the ongoing special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when it is not a jackpot win, or conversely, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be changed more easily when it is not a jackpot win than when it is a jackpot win.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 212 to Fig. 222. In the above-mentioned first control example, a specific area (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big win game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during a big win game, a high probability state is set after the big win game ends.

As shown in Figure 120, balls that enter the wide (opening width 50 mm) large prize opening 65a are collected in one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and are then allowed to flow down the second flow path 65e2, allowing them to reach the V-gate 65v. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above, the timing at which a ball can reach the V-gate 65 differs from the timing at which a ball enters the variable winning device 65 from the timing at which the ball can enter the variable winning device 65 in the case where a ball that has entered from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the first flow path 65e1), i.e., a ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left area and then enters the variable winning device 65, and the timing at which a ball can reach the V-gate 65 in the case where a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 in the case where a ball shot by right-handed play flows down the right area and then enters the variable winning device 65, so that when a sure-variable jackpot game is played, whether left-handed play or right-handed play is performed, the switching valve 65y needs to be positioned for a long period of time in a state in which the ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 so that the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can reach the V-gate 65v. Furthermore, by lengthening the period during which a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v, it is also necessary to lengthen the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether the ball has passed through the V gate 65v (specific area), which creates the problem that it becomes difficult to detect fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of passing the ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example is configured so that the time it takes for a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 to pass through the specific area is approximately the same in cases where a ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left area and then enters the variable winning device 65, and in cases where a ball shot by right-handed play flows down the right area and then enters the variable winning device 65. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the length of the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether a ball has passed through the specific area, making it easier to discover fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of passing a ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

As described above, this third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration within the variable winning device 65 has been changed and the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided within the variable winning device 65 has been changed, but the rest of the content is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example. As shown in Fig. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see Fig. 119) in that the arrangement of the nail members planted in the lower area of the electric role 640a is different. Specifically, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, nails are planted so that balls that have flowed down the left area or the right area can win evenly in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, whereas in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example, multiple nail members are planted in a V-shape below the electric device 640a so that balls that have flowed down the left area can easily win on the left side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and balls that have flowed down the right area can easily win on the right side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In other words, in this third control example, a variable winning device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a with a wide opening width so that both balls that flow down the left side area when played from the left and balls that flow down the right side area when played from the right can win, and an electric device 640a is provided above the center of the variable winning device 65 as a winning prevention member to prevent balls from winning near the center of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction, and multiple nail members are planted in a V-shape as guide members to guide balls to win near both ends of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction.

This configuration can promote ball entry near both ends of the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, regardless of whether right-handed play or left-handed play is performed during a jackpot game. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 213, but the variable winning device 65 of this third control example is configured so that its internal structure is symmetrical (symmetrical when the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a is viewed left and right), and by making the entry position of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a a symmetrical position, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of errors in the time it takes for a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through each area (e.g., a specific area) within the variable winning device 65.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 near the specific winning hole 65a, and FIG. 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of the ball that wins the specific winning hole 65a.

The variable winning device 65 of this third control example is also configured in the same way as the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 120), so that the balls received by the opening and closing door 65b, which is in the open state during the big win game state, are guided by the guide member 65d to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 provided on both ends of the specific winning port 65a. Then, the balls that flow down the first opening 65a1 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213 (b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, the balls that flow down the second opening 65a2 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see FIG. 213 (b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in this third control example, the ball is configured to be less likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a from near the center, so that the balls received by the open opening door 65b can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. This prevents the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 from increasing, which can lead to ball clogging, and also prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a winning ball is not paid out despite having entered the specific winning opening 65a (the ball does not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2).

As shown in Figure 213 (b), the variable winning device 65 of this third control example is significantly different from the variable winning device 65 used in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 120 (b)) in that the path along which a ball that enters a specific winning port 65a (a ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2) is guided to the discharge port 65 is configured symmetrically.

First, the ball that passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes to block the flow path in which it is arranged), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. The time (ta) required for the ball to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be about 2 seconds. Similarly, the ball that passed through the ball detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes to block the flow path in which it is arranged), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the second discharge port 65h2. The time (tb) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be approximately 2 seconds, the same as the time ta mentioned above.

In other words, in this third control example, a ball that enters near the left end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the left and passes through the first opening 65a1, and a ball that enters near the right end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the right and passes through the second opening 65a2, are configured to flow down through the same position over a period of time before reaching the switching valve 65y.

When the switching valve 65y is closed (submerged so that the ball can pass through the flow path in which the V-gate 65V is disposed), as shown in FIG. 214, the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 65r1 passes through the submerged switching valve 65y (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 214), passes through the first V-gate 65v1, and flows into the third outlet 65h3. The ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65r2 also passes through the submerged switching valve 65y, passes through the second V-gate 65V2, and flows into the fourth outlet 65h4.

In this third control example, when the number of balls entering the variable winning device 65 (the cumulative number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y is switched from a closed state (see FIG. 213(b)) to an open state (see FIG. 214). The time required for the number of balls entering the variable winning device 65 to reach a predetermined number and for the switching valve 65y to open (about 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the time required for the predetermined number of balls to pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2 and reach the switching valve 65y (about 2 seconds). Therefore, the above-mentioned predetermined number of balls are configured to be able to pass through the V-gate 65V as is. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is in the open state, the balls can be reliably allowed to flow down to a specific area (V-gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is the same as the structure of the sorting device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, but for ease of explanation, it is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214. Therefore, the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is of course the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 215 and Fig. 216. The third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the contents of the big win control executed during the big win game are different, and the various processing contents based on the difference are different, but the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted. Specifically, the difference is that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, but the rest of the configuration is the same.

Now, with reference to FIG. 215, the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(b)) in that a V period timer 203ca has been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V period timer 203ca is for measuring the period during which the switching valve 65y is in the open state so that the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v), and is set to a predetermined time (5 seconds) when the conditions for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) are met. The value of the V period timer 203ca is updated in the jackpot update process (see S1954 in FIG. 220) executed in the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, and the switching valve 65y is switched to the closed state when the V period has elapsed (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0).

In this third control example, when it is determined that the number of balls entering the specific winning port 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2) is a predetermined number (2) during a specific round play (the first round play) during a guaranteed jackpot play, the V condition that allows the balls to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65v) is met, and the switching valve 65y is switched to an open state for a predetermined period (5 seconds).

In other words, the switching valve 65y is not controlled based on the time that has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game, but is controlled based on the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the open state period of the switching valve 65y ends during a period in which the balls were not able to enter the variable winning device 65 despite the jackpot game being played normally, and the balls cannot pass through to the specific area (V-gate 65v).

Furthermore, in this third control example, the period (approximately 0.5 seconds) required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state after the V condition is satisfied is shorter than the period (approximately 2 seconds) required for a ball that satisfies the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, i.e., the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 for the specified number (2nd ball) to reach the switching valve 65y, and at least a ball that satisfies the V condition is configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably pass the ball into the specific area (V gate 65v) when the V condition is satisfied.

In this control example, the V condition is satisfied and the state in which the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state is continued for a predetermined period (5 seconds). That is, the end condition for terminating the open state of the switching valve 65y is only the period lapse end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period has passed, but it is not limited to this. For example, a V passage end condition that is satisfied when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) may be set, or a round end condition that is satisfied when the end condition of the V round game (first round round game) is satisfied, or when a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds required for a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 during the V round to reach any of the outlets 65h) has passed since the end condition of the V round game is satisfied may be set. In this way, various end conditions may be set, and the open state of the switching valve 65y may be switched to the closed state when any of the end conditions is satisfied first. This makes it possible to minimize the period during which the switching valve 65y is open, thereby preventing the ball from passing through the specific area (V-gate 65v) unnecessarily. This reduces the possibility that the ball will collide with the ball detection sensor installed in the V-gate 65v and physically destroy the ball detection sensor.

Next, referring to FIG. 216, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 216, the RAM 223 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(b)) in that a V timer 223ca has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V timer 223ca is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) (period during which a V win is possible) is set, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V period command set by the main control device 110 when the period during which a V win is possible, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. The value of the V timer 223ca continues to be updated (decremented) until the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when the predetermined period has passed), an emphasized guidance announcement is issued that emphasizes the guidance for a V win.

In other words, the period during which a V win is possible is set to a maximum of 5 seconds, and the emphasized notification is configured to be executed when 3 seconds have passed since the period during which a V win is possible is set. Here, as described above, normally, the ball that has satisfied the V condition is configured to directly enter the V win, and the time required for the ball that has satisfied the V condition to enter the V win is configured to be approximately 2 seconds. In other words, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is considered that the ball that has satisfied the V condition has not entered the V win. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for a V win using an additional ball, the emphasized notification is configured to be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a V win cannot be achieved due to the game content of the player, even though the period during which a V win is possible has been set.

In this control example, the emphasis guide notification is executed based on the time elapsed since the V condition was satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the emphasis guide standby notification may be executed when it is detected that the ball that satisfied the V condition has passed through an area that does not have a specific area (V gate 65v) (for example, a flow path having an outlet 65h1 (see FIG. 213(b))). In addition, in this control example, the emphasis guide notification is executed as described above when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65v). Alternatively, the emphasis guide notification may be executed to notify the outside that an abnormality (for example, a ball jam) has occurred in the flow path inside the variable winning device 65.

In addition, in this control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the entry of a predetermined number of balls (the second ball), the switching control is executed to immediately switch the switching valve 65y to the open state. In this case, the ball (the first winning ball) that entered the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) may be guided to the switching valve 65y in the open state and pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Therefore, when the entry of the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) is detected, a waiting time (about 1.5 seconds) may be set taking into account the time (about 2 seconds) until the second winning ball reaches the switching valve 65y, and the switching valve 65y may be controlled to switch to the open state after the waiting time has elapsed. This makes it easier to pass only the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state to the specific area (V gate 65V).

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) during one jackpot play, setting a high probability state for the special symbol after the jackpot play ends, and the bonus given to the player (provision of a high probability state for the special symbol) does not change even if multiple balls pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot play. In addition, for example, when using a pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the bonus given to the player varies depending on the number of balls that pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot play, it is possible to prevent excessive balls from passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) by setting the above-mentioned waiting time.

When using a pachinko machine 10 in which the contents of the bonus given to the player are varied according to the number of balls that pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game, for example, the number of winning balls (V winning condition) that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state may be varied according to the type of jackpot won, the waiting time from when the winning number of balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state enters the variable winning device 65 until the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state may be varied, or the condition for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state (V ending condition) may be varied.

Specifically, in order to make it easier for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, it is preferable to set a small number of balls as the V winning condition, so that the period from when the jackpot game is executed until the V winning condition is established can be shortened, so that a long jackpot game can be executed while the V winning condition is established, and it is easier to pass multiple balls through the specific area (V gate 65V). The waiting time may also be shortened. This allows balls that entered the variable winning device 65 before the ball that established the V winning condition (balls flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, the V ending condition may be configured to be established based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, when a big win that gives the player an advantage is executed, the player can play with enthusiasm, trying to get as many balls as possible to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, for jackpot games that are disadvantageous to the player, in order to make it difficult for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, it is advisable to set a large number of balls as the V entry condition, set a long waiting time, or set the V end condition to be met when one ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V), or to be met after a period of time has elapsed that makes it difficult for a ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) (for example, 0.1 seconds have elapsed).

By configuring in this way, the expectation that the ball will pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game can be greatly varied depending on the type of jackpot game being played. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a normal flow path and a special flow path that can cause the ball to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period of time than the normal flow path as ball flow paths within the variable winning device 65. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a delaying means (e.g., a crane) in the special flow path that delays the flow of the balls, so that the balls discharged from the special flow path are more likely to be discharged in a chain than the balls discharged from the normal flow path.

In this case, if the timing when the switching valve 65y opens coincides with the timing when the balls are discharged from the special flow path, it is possible to make it easier for many balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player can select whether the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the normal flow path or the special flow path. For example, when a left-handed game is played, it is preferable to configure the system so that the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the normal flow path than the special flow path, and when a right-handed game is played, it is preferable to configure the system so that the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the special flow path than the normal flow path. In this case, during the jackpot game, a game guide display may be executed using the display surface of the third symbol display device to inform the player that the left-hand hit game is a stable game in which it is easy to pass one ball into the specific area (V gate 65V), and that the right-hand hit game is a challenge game in which it is difficult to pass a ball into the specific area (V gate 65V), but if the timing is right, a large number of balls can pass into the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, a storage means may be provided to store whether the left-hand hit game or the right-hand hit game was executed in the past jackpot game, specifically, to determine which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detected more balls during the jackpot game, and to determine the game method during the jackpot game based on the determination result and store the result, and a history display may be executed to display the game method stored in the storage means and the game result during the jackpot game (the number of balls passing into the specific area (V gate 65V)) as a past history.

This allows the player to enjoy the fun of selecting the game method to be executed during the big win game. In the above control example, the bonus granted when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is a high probability state of a special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the right to a lottery that is likely to result in a lottery that is advantageous to the player may be granted, or a second big win game different from the big win game may be granted. In this case, it is preferable to provide a grant right storage means that can store the rights to which the above-mentioned bonus is granted up to a predetermined number. This makes it possible to reliably grant bonuses under the condition of a predetermined number, even if multiple grant rights are acquired in a short period of time. In addition, in this control example, the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the big win game is described, but this is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result is other than a big win in the lottery of a special pattern, a small win that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time may be set, and the above-mentioned configuration may be used for the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the small win game that is executed when the small win is won. In addition, the above-mentioned configuration may be used for a variable ball entry means (e.g., electric device 640a) that allows a ball to enter a winning game that is executed when a winning normal symbol is drawn.

In addition, in this control example, all balls that pass through the switching valve 65y in the open state are configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), but this is not limited thereto, and a distribution member may be provided so that some of the balls that pass through the switching valve 65y in the open state can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, in this control example, the switching valve 65y that switches the flow path through which the balls flow down among the multiple flow paths is used as a variable means that can be changed between a first state in which it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a second state in which it is difficult to pass the ball, but the configuration of the variable means is not limited thereto, and for example, a variable means that can be changed between a retention position in which the ball is retained for a predetermined period and an open position in which the ball is not retained, and that retains the ball for a predetermined period to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) within a period that effectively determines the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) may be provided. In addition, multiple variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 217 to Fig. 220, the control process contents of the main control device in this third control example will be described. In this third control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the big win control process (see S1804 in Fig. 168) is replaced with the big win control process 3 (see S1854 in Fig. 217), and the winning process (see S1911 in Fig. 171) is replaced with the winning process 3 (see S1953 in Fig. 218), but otherwise it is the same. The same control process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of jackpot control process 3 (S1854) will be explained with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control process 3 (S1854). This jackpot control process 3 (S1854) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in that the control contents executed at the start of a jackpot and the control contents executed when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game have been changed, and further, a control content that updates the value of the V period timer 203ca during a jackpot game has been added. The rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1854) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1901: Yes), then an opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON (S1903), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is currently being played (whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not being played (S1904: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that a jackpot is being played (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1905). If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the specific winning port 65a is set to open (S1951), a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1952), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is not the time to start a new round (S1905: No), the process of S1907 to S1910 is executed, which is the same as the jackpot control process of the first control example described above (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1909: No), then the winning process 3 is executed (S1953), and then the abnormality process is executed (S1912), and then the jackpot update process is executed (S1954), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of prize winning process 3 (S1953) executed in jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be explained with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of prize winning process 3 (S1953). This prize winning process 3 (S1953) differs from the prize winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171) in that the control process contents during the V round (one round) in which the switching valve 65y can be in the open state are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations of the contents will be omitted.

When the winning process 3 (S1953) is executed, first, the processes S2201 to S2204 are executed, which are the same as the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171). If the process of S2204 is completed, or if the process of S2202 determines that the ball has not entered the specific winning hole 65a (S2202: No), then the V round process is executed (S2251). Details of this V round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but when the first round of round play (V round play) is executed, a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the switching valve 65y.

After the V round processing (S2251) is completed, the processing of S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221 is executed, which are the same as the winning processing described above (see S1911 in FIG. 171), and then this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the V round processing (S2251) executed in the winning processing 3 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) will be explained with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V round processing (S2251).

When the V round process (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is one round (V round) (S2401), and if it is determined that the current time is not one round (S2401: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is one round (S2401: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is "2", that is, whether the number of winning balls into the variable winning device 65 during the first round of round play is "2" (S2402), and if it is determined that it is "2" (S2402: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S2403), a V period command indicating the period during which a V winning is possible (the period during which a ball can be guided to a specific area (V gate 65V)) is set (S2404), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the V period timer 203ca (S2405), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2402 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this processing ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during a specific round of play executed during a jackpot game meets a predetermined condition (when the number of winning balls becomes two), a control process is executed to switch the switching valve 65y to an open state so that the balls can easily pass through the specific area (V-gate 65v). This makes it possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from switching to an open state when no balls have entered the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game.

In this control example, only a specific round (first round) during a jackpot game is configured to be a V round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to an open state, but this is not limited to this, and multiple rounds may be configured to be set as V rounds in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to an open state. In this case, in the V round process (S2251), the number of rounds of a newly executed round game is determined, and it is determined whether the round game of the determined number of rounds is a V round.

Then, when a V round is determined, the state of the switching valve 65y can be controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during that V round. In this case, the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) can be different for each of the multiple V rounds.

In addition, when a V-round game is being played, a notification means may be provided that notifies the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game content until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met. For example, when a V-round game is started, a V-round notification indicating that the current round game is a V-round and a required number of wins notification indicating the number of wins required until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met may be executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play by trying to get the ball to pass through a specific area.

Next, the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flow chart that shows a schematic of the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954). In this jackpot update process (S1954), processing is executed to update the value of the V period timer 203ca that is set during jackpot play.

When the jackpot update process (S1954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, i.e., whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1961: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1961 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), then the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not the time to turn off the solenoid 209a, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1963 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S1964), a command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1965), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 221 and Fig. 222, the control process contents of the voice lamp control device in this third control example will be described. In this third control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the big win related process 3 (see S4258 in Fig. 221) is executed instead of the big win related process (see S4218 in Fig. 180), and the performance update process 3 (see S4151 in Fig. 222) is executed instead of the performance update process (see S4111 in Fig. 174), but otherwise it is the same. The same control process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 221, the contents of jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) will be explained. This jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4218) of the first control example described above in that it adds control process contents that are executed when a V period command is received from the main control unit 110, but is otherwise the same. Identical contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as those of the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, in the process of S4709, if it is determined that the round count command has not been received (S4709: No), it is next determined whether a V period command has been received (S4751). If it is determined that a V period command has been received (S4752: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the V timer 223ca, and this process is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4751 that a V period command has not been received (S4751: No), the processing of S4714 to S1715, which is the same as the jackpot-related processing described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180), is then executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 3. This effect update process 3 is configured to be able to execute a process for updating the value of the V timer 223ca set during a jackpot game, and a process for setting the effect mode when the value of the V timer 223ca becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 222, when performance update process 3 is executed, first it is determined whether the value of V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), then the value of V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the updated value of V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), it is then determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404). In other words, if a V notification performance is being executed during the currently executing jackpot game, a display command is set to highlight the V winning notification (S5405), and the number of updates for various other counters and timers is executed, and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this third control example, the variable winning device 65 is placed at a location where a win is possible whether playing with a right-hand or left-hand shot, and further, regardless of which playing method is used to shoot the ball, the system is configured so that there is no significant difference in the time from when the ball wins to when it reaches the switching valve 65y. Therefore, during a jackpot game, the period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate 65v) is not set unnecessarily long, and the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Also, by shortening the V effective period, it is easier to monitor the act of passing the ball into a specific area through fraudulent play.

In addition, since the switching control of the switching valve 65y is configured to be executed based on the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from being opened in a state where the balls cannot win the variable winning device 65 due to ball clogging that occurs during a jackpot game. In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured on a round-by-round basis, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is configured to be opened for a predetermined period within the round game period. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute control to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state when the cumulative value of the number of winnings since the start of a jackpot game, the cumulative value of the number of winnings since a predetermined measurement condition is established during a jackpot game, or the cumulative value of the number of winnings in multiple jackpot games reaches a predetermined measurement result.

In addition, the maximum length of time that the switching valve 65y is open does not need to be limited to the period until the end of a round of play, but may be configured so that the switching valve 65y remains open, for example, spanning over to the next round of play to be executed.

In addition, in this third control example, as shown in FIG. 213(b), one switching valve 65y is configured to block both the first V gate 65v1 and the second V gate 65V2, but this is not limited to this. Two switching valves 65y may be provided to block each V gate, and for example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the first V gate 65V1 may be opened, and when the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the second V gate 65V2 may be opened. This makes it possible to reduce the range of switching valves that are open, thereby preventing balls from passing through the V gate 65V unnecessarily.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223 to Fig. 231. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Also, the fourth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, after the end of a jackpot game, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set as an advantageous game state favorable to the player. If the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the end of the jackpot game reaches 100. On the other hand, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state is configured to continue until 100 special symbols have been performed.

In other words, in the first control example described above, no matter which advantageous game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the advantageous game state is configured to continue until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times, unless a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. Then, when an advantageous game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player is notified of the period until the advantageous game state ends, that is, the period until the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is set (see FIG. 128(a)).

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, it is possible to make the player aware of the period until an unfavorable game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, rather than the period until the currently set advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) ends. Therefore, compared to a case in which the player is notified of the period until the currently set advantageous game state (e.g., high probability state) ends, that is, the period until the high probability state ends and the time-saving state ends, it is possible to make the player aware in advance of the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player will continue, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, the period during which the more favorable of the multiple favorable game states (high probability state, time-saving state) continues is predetermined to be the period during which 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, and during the period from the end of the jackpot game until 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, a suggestion effect can be executed that can suggest to the player whether the currently set game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state (see FIG. 128(b)). As a result, in a pachinko machine 10 that notifies the player of the period until the next unfavorable game state is set when a favorable game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which of the multiple favorable game states the currently set game state is.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game ends, a lottery (so-called fall lottery) can be executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbols to a low probability state, and when the fall lottery is won, the game state is transitioned from the high probability state to a time-saving state. In other words, in the above-mentioned first control example, when a high probability state is set, the high probability state is configured to continue until 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, but in this fourth control example, if the fall lottery is won before 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, the high probability state is configured to end at that point.

By configuring it in this way, even if the player understands that a special probability state has been set by the suggestive effects executed during the period when a favorable game state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the special probability state will continue, so that the player can pay more attention to the content of the suggestive effects that are executed.

In addition, in this fourth control example, the suggestive effects executed during the period in which the advantageous game state is set are configured to suggest not only the currently set game state, but also the timing when the special state ends due to winning the drop lottery.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223 to Fig. 226. The fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state can be executed, and is different in that a configuration for executing the falling lottery is added.

First, referring to FIG. 223, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 in this fourth control example differs from the ROM 202 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(a)) in that part of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d has been changed and a new drop lottery table 202da has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described, focusing mainly on the differences from the first control example. In this fourth control example, the contents of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) are different from those in the first control example described above. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224(a), but the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type selected, that is, the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. This makes it possible to vary the length of the period during which the advantageous game state (probability change state or time-saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game continues. Therefore, when the advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period during which the advantageous game state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the notification performance for notifying the player of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the remaining period until the disadvantageous game state is set).

Now, referring to FIG. 224(a), the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd, which is referenced to select the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) in this control example, will be explained. FIG. 224(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2 specifies jackpot types that have different values for the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends, depending on the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter c2 and the game state at the time of the win. In other words, the length of time that the advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) that is set after the jackpot game ends varies depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won.

Specifically, for the jackpot type, when the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 value is in the range of "0 to 29", if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50", and when the game state is high probability, the time-saving counter 203i is set to "100". For the jackpot type, when the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 value is in the range of "30 to 69", if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50", and when the game state is high probability, the time-saving counter 203i is set to "100". However, if the probability of winning is high, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "90" and the probability of winning counter 203i is set to "50" as a "jackpot D." If the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99," the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" if the game state at the time of winning is normal or the time-saving state, and if the probability of winning is high, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the probability of winning counter 203i is set to "50."

The details of the round game that is executed in response to each jackpot type, the value set in the probability change counter 203i defined in the special chart 2 jackpot table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) are the same as those in the special chart 2 jackpot table 202d2 described above, so a detailed description of them will be omitted.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, the duration of the time-saving state is varied depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot was won and the game state when the jackpot was won. For example, when jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, if the jackpot was won in the time-saving state, "100" is set in the time-saving counter 203h, and if the jackpot was won in the probability variable state, "90" is set. Therefore, after the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot D is selected ends, the player can know whether the game state at the time of the previous jackpot win was in the probability variable state or the time-saving state depending on the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

By configuring it in this way, the pachinko machine 10 has multiple types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and in the pachinko machine 10 that executes a notification effect that can notify the player only that an advantageous game state has been set, without specifically notifying the player of the currently set game state, if the player wins a jackpot during an advantageous game state, the player can subsequently ascertain in which game state the jackpot was won. This allows the player to predict future games based on past game results, making the game more interesting.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the player can predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot based on the display content of the remaining time notification mode (mode of notifying the remaining time until the end of the favorable game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if a different value is set in the time-saving counter 203h, the display mode of the remaining time notification mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game may be made common (for example, displaying "70"), and when the number of times that the special pattern lottery is executed during the favorable game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining time notification mode may be variably displayed in accordance with the actual value of the time-saving counter 203h.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to allow the player to grasp the game state that was set when the previous jackpot was won after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, during an advantageous game state, the player can be made to simultaneously play a game aiming to win a jackpot and a game to grasp the game state that was set in the past, and this makes it possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the advantageous game state.

In addition, in this control example, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, and the display content of the remaining time notification mode (mode of notifying the remaining time until the end of the advantageous game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game allows the player to predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. However, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be suggested at other times as long as the timing allows the player to grasp the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot after the fact. For example, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be notified to the player by a jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. In this case, a presentation may be executed that directly notifies the player of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, or a presentation may be executed that suggests the duration of the advantageous game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 223, the explanation will continue. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table in which the judgment value of the fall lottery counter Cd1, which will be described later, is stored. If the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of initial winning) matches any of the judgment values specified in the fall lottery table 202da, it is set to transition to a low probability state of the special pattern (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be explained with reference to FIG. 224(b). FIG. 224(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224(b), the fall lottery table 202da specifies two judgment values, "0, 1", as judgment values that are judged as a fall in the special symbol's high probability state. Here, the fall lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, there are two judgment values that are judged as a fall, so the probability of falling (transitioning to a low probability state of the special symbol) in the special symbol's high probability state is 1/500.

In addition, in the fall lottery table 202da in this control example, only the judgment value for judging whether or not a fall will occur in the special symbol's high probability state (judgment value for the special symbol's high probability state) is specified, and no judgment value for the special symbol's low probability state is specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to judge whether or not to transition to the special symbol's low probability state when the special symbol's low probability state is already in effect.

In this control example, the drop lottery table 202da is compared with the drop lottery counter Cd1, which is updated periodically, to determine whether or not to transition (drop) from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state. In other words, the timing of transition from the high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is the most advantageous state for the player among the advantageous game states, to the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is one of the advantageous game states but is more disadvantageous to the player than the high probability state, can be made random. This allows the player to play while expecting the high probability state to continue as long as possible.

In this control example, after the jackpot game ends, the maximum duration (50 times) of the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by the value of the probability change counter 203i, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to continue for a period longer than the maximum duration (50 times). In other words, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, no matter when the high probability state of the special symbol transitions (falls) to a low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the game state transitions from the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) to the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), so the player does not know the timing of winning the fall lottery based on the frequency of playing the normal symbol win game.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, during a favorable game state (high probability state of normal symbols), it is difficult for the player to know whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state, so it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the content of the suggestive effects that retroactively suggest the game state that was set at the time of winning the jackpot.

In this control example, whether or not there will be a transition (fall) from a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state of a special pattern was determined by lottery (determination), but a transition to another state may also be determined by lottery (determination). For example, whether or not there will be a transition from a high probability state of a normal pattern to a low probability state of a normal pattern may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. This makes it possible to randomize how long the advantageous game state will continue, so that players can play in the hope that the advantageous game state will continue for each change. Also, for example, it may be possible to configure it so that it is possible to determine by lottery whether or not there will be a transition from a low probability state of a special pattern to a high probability state of a special pattern.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned falling lottery is configured to be executed every time a special pattern lottery is performed, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the ease of executing the falling lottery may be varied depending on the type of special pattern for which the special pattern lottery is executed. For example, the falling lottery may be configured to be executed more easily when a second special pattern lottery, which is mainly executed during a high probability state of normal patterns, is performed than when a first special pattern lottery is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a high probability state of special patterns transitions to a low probability state due to a falling lottery executed based on the first special pattern lottery being performed, making it difficult for the player to play advantageously.

In addition, a number of times determination means for determining the number of times the fall lottery is executed at the execution timing of the fall lottery may be provided, and the number of times the fall lottery is executed when the execution trigger of the fall lottery is established may be configured to be different. In this case, it is preferable to design the range of the number of times determined by the number of times determination means to be "0 to 5", and the average value to be 1 time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to separate the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed from the number of times the fall lottery is executed, so that it is more difficult to understand at what timing the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state. In this case, it is preferable to provide a suggestion means capable of suggesting the number of times determined by the number of times determination means (the number of times the fall lottery is executed), and to suggest to the player a period in which it is easy to fall (a period in which multiple times are determined by the number of times determination means) and a period in which it is difficult to fall (a period in which 0 times are determined by the number of times determination means). In this way, it is possible to play while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the contents of the suggestion by the suggestion means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the execution of the special pattern lottery is used as the trigger for executing the fall lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, the fall lottery may be configured to be executed when the normal pattern lottery is executed, or the fall lottery may be configured to be executed when the ball enters a specific winning hole (for example, the general ball entry hole 63) provided on the game board 13.

Next, referring to FIG. 225, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. As described above, this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it has a fall lottery function. It also differs in that the various performance contents set by the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to be able to execute performances based on the results of the fall lottery. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Figure 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and Figure 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 225(a). As shown in FIG. 2254(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it provides button operation performance selection 2 table 222df instead of button operation performance selection table 222f (see FIG. 148), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(a). FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. As shown in FIG. 226(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the data table referenced when the special probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game has been changed from the special probability state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) to the special probability state selection 2 table 222df2, but otherwise is the same.

Here, the contents stipulated in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(b). FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2. This probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2, like the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, is a data table that is referenced when selecting the presentation mode to be executed as the operation presentation when the probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game, and differs from the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) in that the lottery result of the fall lottery has been added to the factors for selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation, that a presentation mode that can suggest information based on the lottery result of the fall lottery can be selected, and that the selection ratio of each presentation mode has been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2, as in the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, the timing and operation method when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), the acquired value of the performance counter 223f, and the setting status of the short fall flag 223da, which is set based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, are specified as the performance mode to be executed as an operation performance. The details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later, but it is a flag that indicates that the duration of the probability change state is a predetermined period (for example, the number of special pattern lotteries is 20 or less) due to winning the fall lottery, and is set to ON if the probability change state ends in a short period of time.

The area in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2 that is referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to off has the same contents as those in the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Here, we will specifically explain the contents of the areas that are referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to on.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to on, during the first period (period when the number of special pattern changes is 1 to 20) in which the operation timing is a high-speed change period, the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "none" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "150 to 189", "reach suggestion" indicating an effect that suggests whether the active change effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern change, in the range of "140 to 189", "state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the currently set game state. In addition, when the operation method is "long push", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is transitioned is specified.

In addition, when the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified.

And, when the operation timing is in a specific period (during the 50th special pattern change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is in the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to, and in the range of "190 to 198", "early fall notification" indicating an effect to notify that the probability change state was set after the previous big win game ended, but the fall lottery was won early and the game was switched to the time-saving state, is specified. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the big win game ended)) is specified in the range of "0 to 198" of the acquired effect counter 223f.

As with the first control example described above, the various operation effects in this fourth control example may be based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, rather than on the lottery results for the special pattern variation executed this time. For example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b may be used to determine in advance the timing of winning the drop lottery, and the operation effects may be configured to be executable based on the determination results. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read in the order in which the special pattern lottery is executed, and it is determined whether the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information indicates a value that wins the drop lottery. In this case, information corresponding to the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 that wins the drop lottery may be stored in advance in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination may be performed based on the stored information and the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in the winning information.

In this control example, where the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b has the winning order of the special symbol lottery decided, that is, the second special symbol lottery is executed in priority to the first special symbol lottery, if there is no winning information for the second special symbol lottery that will win the drop lottery, a process is executed to calculate the remaining change time of the currently running special symbol change and the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to each of the winning information of the second special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and the period during which the drop lottery cannot be won, that is, the period during which the probability change state continues (the most advantageous period), is determined. Then, a most advantageous period suggestion presentation mode that notifies the player of the determined most advantageous period can be executed as an operation presentation.

By configuring in this way, the period during which the player will not win the drop lottery can be suggested (informed) to the player, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. In addition, the display mode of this most advantageous period suggestion can be configured to display at least a portion of the total time of each variable time resulting as the most advantageous period. This allows the player to understand at least the duration of the most advantageous period. In addition, by displaying the most advantageous period as a time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period, so that even in a pachinko machine 10 in which a variation pattern with a longer variation time is set to have a higher possibility of winning the jackpot, a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player is made to expect that a short variation time will be set as the variation pattern of the special pattern variation.

As described above, when the operation performance is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation performance may be executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), or the operation performance may be executed at the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) and the special pattern variation is newly started in the state where the performance mode of the operation performance is determined. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been accepted, and a notification means for notifying that a waiting period until the operation performance is executed is in progress. This can prevent the player from feeling suspicious about the fact that the operation performance is not executed despite the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, in the performance that notifies the player of the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may be displayed not in time as described above, but in the number of times that the special pattern variation is executed. In addition, if it is determined that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating that the drop-out lottery will be won, the system may be configured to calculate the period until the drop-out lottery is won and the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state, and to execute a presentation suggesting that the drop-out lottery will be won or a presentation suggesting the remaining period until the high probability state of the special pattern ends.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 227 to Fig. 229, the control process contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example that are different from the first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that it has a falling lottery function as described above and that the duration of the game state set after the end of the big win game has been changed, and the control contents relating to these differences are different. Specifically, the control contents of the main control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above are different in that the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in FIG. 227) is executed instead of the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158), the pre-reading process 4 (see S653 in FIG. 228) is executed instead of the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162), and the jackpot end process 4 (see S1960 in FIG. 229) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170), but are otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258). When this special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) is executed, the same process of S301 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0 (S351). Here, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203i is not greater than 0, that is, the special symbol is not in a high probability state (S351: No), the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, if it is determined that the value of the probability bonus counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., that there is a high probability of a special symbol (S351: Yes), then the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is compared with the value specified in the fall lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S353).

If it is determined that the drop lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), a drop command is set to indicate that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to a low probability state (S355), and the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the low probability state of the special symbol set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S353 that the drop lottery has not been won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the high probability state of the special symbol set.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, when the conditions for executing the special pattern lottery are met (when special pattern jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in Figure 227) has been executed), the drop-out lottery is executed before the special pattern lottery is actually executed. By configuring it in this way, the special pattern lottery can be executed immediately in response to the result of the drop-out lottery, providing players with a fair game.

The timing of the fall lottery and the timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from that of this control example. For example, the fall lottery may be configured to be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fall lottery is executed immediately thereafter. Therefore, by the time the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (by the time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), an event occurs in which the fall lottery is won and the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When such a state occurs, for example, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to execute a fall notification effect to indicate that the currently executed special symbol variation is the last variation in which the special symbol lottery was executed in the high probability state, and that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the result of the special symbol variation being executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the drop lottery is won, a process is executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state before the next special symbol lottery is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the drop lottery is won, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues may be subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability change counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the remaining number of times that the special symbol lottery may be executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set to a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). Even in such a case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the most advantageous game state (probability change state) will continue due to winning the drop lottery, so that the player can play with a sense of tension.

In this control example, if the drop-out lottery is not won, i.e., if the high probability state of the special pattern continues, no effect is executed to suggest or inform the player of this, making it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues (the period during which it continues); however, without being limited to this, the system may be configured to inform the player of some cases in which the drop-out lottery is not won. In this case, for example, the fall lottery table 202da may be configured to specify not only the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that is determined to be a win (fall), but also a value that is determined to be a specific miss (for example, 998, 999), and when the value is determined to be such, a command indicating a specific miss may be set to execute an effect to indicate to the player that the result of the fall lottery is a specific miss. Alternatively, a command may be set to indicate that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to execute an effect indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and if it is determined that an effect should be executed based on the lottery, a miss effect may be executed.

Next, the contents of pre-reading process 4 (S653) in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of pre-reading process 4 (S653). This pre-reading process 4 (S653) differs from the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the first control example described above in that the types of counters read out in the process of reading out the various counters stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage areas (first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) are different, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When pre-reading process 4 (S653) is executed, the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, fall selection counter Cd1, and change type counter CS1 newly stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area (first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) are read (S751), and then the same processes of S702 to S705 as those executed in the pre-reading process executed in the first control example described above (see S613 in FIG. 162) are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161), when a new lottery right for a special pattern (special pattern reserved) is acquired (when new winning information is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area), the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is also read out in the pre-read process 4 (S653) that is executed, and a winning command including the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is set and can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether the acquired special pattern reserved balls contain information indicating the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that will win the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests the period until the fall lottery is won.

Next, the contents of jackpot end process 4 (S1960) will be explained with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end process 4 (S1960). This jackpot end process 4 (S1960) differs from the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) in that the processing contents for setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h are different, but the rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

When jackpot end process 4 (S1960) is executed, first, the same processes of S2101 and S2102 as those of the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) are executed, then the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and a value corresponding to the jackpot type are set in the time-saving counter 203h (S2153), a state command is set based on the currently set value of the special probability counter 203i and the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S2104), the jackpot in progress flag 203k and the special probability setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this process ends.

The processing content of S2153 will now be described in detail. In this control example, the game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to temporarily store the current game status, the game status set at the time of the previous jackpot win, and the jackpot type to be selected in the event of a jackpot win. When the processing of S2153 is executed, the game status at the time of the jackpot win and the jackpot type stored in the game status storage area 203g are read out, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is set in the time-saving counter 203h.

In this control example, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h is determined when the jackpot end process 4 is executed, i.e., when all rounds of play during the jackpot game are completed. By configuring it in this way, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h can be varied depending on whether or not a setting condition that can be satisfied during a round of play in a jackpot game, for example, a setting condition that is satisfied when a specific area (V gate 65V) is passed during a round game (V round game), is satisfied.

Regardless of the configuration used in this control example, for example, when the jackpot game starts or when the type of jackpot that has been won is selected, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and a value according to the determined content may be set in the jackpot end process 4 (see S1960). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to hold information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot during the jackpot game period, so that the memory capacity can be reduced.

Next, referring to Figures 230 and 231, the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example are described below with respect to those executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. This fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a fall lottery is executed, and the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also differ in that processing related to the fall lottery is executed.

Specifically, the difference is that command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4162). As shown in FIG. 230, in this command determination process 4 (S4162), when it is determined that a big win-related command has not been received (S4217: No), it is then determined whether a fall command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4251), and when it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), the fall-related process (S4252) is executed. Note that, when it is determined that a fall command has not been received in the process of S4251 (S4251: No), or after the fall-related process (S4252) has been executed, the same process of S4219 as the command determination process (S4112) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 231, the contents of the fall-related process (S4252) executed in command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall-related process (S4252). This fall-related process (S4252) is a process executed when a fall command (see S355 in FIG. 227) is received, which is set when it is determined that the fall lottery executed by the main control device 110 (see S352, S353 in FIG. 227) has been won, and is intended to execute a process for determining the timing at which the fall command was received (the timing at which the high probability state of the special pattern ended).

When the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502). The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game, and is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed. For example, if the number of time-saving times is set to 100 after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won before the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 20. In other words, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won early despite the high probability state of special symbols being set.

If it is determined in the process of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), the time-saving state is set in the slave state setting area 223g (S5504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process ends.

By setting the short fall flag 223da on in the processing of S5503, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186) determines that the frame button 22 has been operated during chance mode, and when selecting the presentation mode by referring to the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 (FIG. 226(b)), a different data table than when the short fall flag 223da is set off is referenced to select the presentation mode. This allows the player to know the result of the fall lottery after the fact based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<Example of the second control>
Next, referring to Fig. 232, among the third pattern variation performances executed in the above-mentioned second control example, the reverse variation display performance (see Fig. 205(d)) which is a performance in which the variation direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from the variation direction of the main pattern sz will be described. Fig. 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the reverse variation display performance.

As described above, in the second control example, the main pattern sz, which includes identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, and the sub-pattern fz, which is different from the main pattern sz, are configured to be independently displayable and controllable. For example, as shown in FIG. 202(b), the sub-pattern fz is displayed before the main pattern sz is displayed, and then the sub-pattern fz is displayed before the main pattern sz is displayed stationary, thereby enabling a reach line notice effect to be executed that notifies the player of only the stationary display position of the main pattern sz. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205(d), a reverse display effect is configured to be executed in which the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the direction of the main pattern sz in accordance with the start timing of the special pattern change.

The contents of this reverse variable display effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 232. First, a variable pattern command for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is sent from the main control device 110. Then, when the variable pattern command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, a process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182)) is executed to determine the performance mode (variable pattern) for the main pattern sz. This makes it possible to reliably set the performance mode of the main pattern sz, which is the identification information (identification pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, based on the result of the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main pattern sz for indicating a lottery result different from the result of the special pattern lottery actually executed from being stopped and displayed.

After that, a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz based on the presentation mode of the main pattern sz determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a presentation mode that results in a reach state has been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, and if it is determined that a presentation mode that results in a reach state has been set, a process is executed to select the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz. Note that, if a presentation mode that results in a reach state has not been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, a variation pattern corresponding to the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz. This allows the sub-pattern fz to be displayed in a variably synchronized manner with the main pattern sz, which is displayed in a variably manner in a presentation mode (variable pattern) set based on the lottery result of the special pattern. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a variably manner as if they were a pattern row arranged in a specific order.

In the above example, the process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed when the presentation mode for the main pattern sz is in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed when a presentation mode that is a specific reach state (e.g., a super reach state) is set among the reach states, or the process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed even in some cases where the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is in a non-reach state. In other words, it is sufficient to configure the process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz to be easily executed when the presentation mode of the main pattern sz is set in a presentation mode that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is likely to be a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot just by setting (executing) a presentation mode different from the normal presentation mode (a presentation mode synchronized with the presentation mode of the main pattern sz) as the sub-pattern fz.

In the above example, when the process of selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is not executed, the presentation mode (synchronous presentation mode) corresponding to the presentation mode of the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz, and the presentation is configured to be synchronized with the presentation of the main pattern sz. As a result, the sub-pattern fz is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to follow the display of the main pattern sz, so that the same display as the display of the third pattern in the first control example described above (see FIG. 122(b)) is executed. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the multiple main patterns sz and the multiple sub-patterns fz are displayed as a pattern sequence in a predetermined order (1 (main pattern sz) → triangle mark (sub-pattern fz) → 2 (main pattern sz) → ...) as shown in FIG. 122(b).

Therefore, when the presentation mode of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz are set differently, a presentation that is unexpected for the player can be provided, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, since the process for setting the presentation mode for the main pattern sz and the process for setting the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz are set differently, the process for displaying the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz in a non-synchronized pattern can be easily executed. In other words, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to set the presentation mode (variation pattern) for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz) as in the first control example described above, when setting a presentation mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied, it is necessary to set a presentation mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz); however, by configuring the presentation mode for the main symbol sz and the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz to be independently configurable as in the second control example, it is only necessary to variably set the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz, and the processing for setting the presentation mode for the tertiary symbols can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 232, the explanation will be continued. When the process of selecting the presentation mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win or not, and the presentation mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected by referring to the determination result using a sub-symbol presentation selection table (not shown). Here, the sub-symbol presentation selection table (not shown) specifies the presentation mode of the sub-symbol fz at a predetermined ratio in correspondence with the result of the special symbol lottery and the presentation mode set for the main symbol sz. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a "big win" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, it is specified that "reach line notice presentation" is selected 60% of the time, "reverse variable display presentation" is selected 20% of the time, and "no sub-symbol presentation" is selected 20% of the time.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" and "single reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, there is a 20% chance that a "reach line notice presentation" will be selected, a 20% chance that a "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected, and a 60% chance that "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected.

Furthermore, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "miss" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, then it is stipulated that "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected 40% of the time, and "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected 60% of the time, and if "single reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, then it is stipulated that "reach line notice presentation" will be selected 5% of the time, "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected 5% of the time, and "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected 90% of the time.

When the "reverse variable display effect" is selected using the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown) thus defined, a display mode selection process is then executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz. In this display mode selection process, a process is executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz to be used in the current third symbol variable effect (the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz), and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz that can be selected here is the display mode stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which was described with reference to FIG. 203(c) in the second control example described above.

In other words, in the display mode selection process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display sub-pattern mode command (display command) for specifying the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set, and when the display control device 114 receives the set display sub-pattern mode command (display command), a process is executed to read out the corresponding image data from the character memory area 234a2.

In the display mode selection process, as shown in FIG. 203(c), for example, one of the display modes SD1 of the "triangle mark" which is the normal display mode of the sub-symbol fz, the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" which indicates a high probability of winning, and the display mode SD3 imitating the "number 16" which indicates that a favorable jackpot game (16 rounds) advantageous to the player will be played if the jackpot is won is selected. The display mode SD2 is easier to select when the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when the result is not a jackpot (miss). Furthermore, the display mode SD3 is easier to select when a favorable jackpot game is played based on the result of the current special symbol lottery than when a favorable jackpot game is not played (when a jackpot is not won, or when a jackpot is won but a jackpot game other than the favorable jackpot game is played).

This configuration has the effect of making the player interested in both the presentation mode set for the sub-pattern fz and the display mode set for the sub-pattern fz, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 232 shows a state in which the "reverse variable display effect" is executed as the effect mode of the sub-pattern fz, and the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" is set as the display mode of the sub-pattern fz, and the "reverse variable display effect" is executed in which the main pattern sz is displayed to vary leftward from the viewpoint of Figure 232, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary rightward from the viewpoint of Figure 232. In this way, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed to vary in opposite directions as the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that a surprising variable effect can be provided to the player. Furthermore, as an effect mode using the sub-pattern fz, the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main pattern sz, so that the player can be easily informed that the effect mode of the sub-pattern fz is different from the normal effect mode.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 that imitates a "bubble" selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process, but this is not limited to this, and only the display mode of one of the multiple sub-symbols fz may be changed. In this case, it may be configured so that only the display mode of the sub-symbol fz arranged near the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed can be easily changed to the display mode selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process. This makes it easier to predict the stopped display mode of the main symbol sz based on the display mode of the sub-symbol fz.

In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 232 shows an example in which all sub-patterns fz displayed on the display surface are the same size, but the size (magnification ratio), rotation angle, translucency value, etc. of the sub-patterns fz may be set to be different. In this case, it is sufficient to change the values specified in the display data table (see FIG. 207) for displaying each sub-pattern fz.

In addition, FIG. 232 shows an example in which the display mode of the sub-pattern fz switches from the normal "triangle mark" display mode SD1 to a display mode imitating a "bubble" SD2 at the timing when the third pattern change starts, and a reverse change display performance is executed, but this is not limited to the above. The display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped and displayed until the current third pattern change starts, as a timing before the third pattern change starts, or the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the current third pattern change starts until it stops.

When the process of switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped to when the current third pattern change is started, for example, it may be configured to analyze whether it is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by a pre-reading process, and to change the display mode of the sub-pattern fz that is stopped when the next special pattern lottery (change) to be executed results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big win). In this case, the display mode used for the variation performance of the sub-pattern fz to be executed next is determined before the performance mode of the main pattern sz to indicate the lottery result of the next special pattern lottery (change) to be executed is set. In this way, by using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of notifying the player of each mode used for the performance mode of the third pattern change to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery can be made different, so that the player can be interested in the third pattern change performance to be executed.

In addition, when a process for switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the current third pattern change starts to when it stops, the sub-pattern fz may be displayed in the display mode before the switch at the time when the third pattern change starts, or the sub-pattern fz may be configured to be displayed after the process for switching the display mode is executed.

<Switching control of the switching valve executed during a big win game>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as explained using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219), when it is determined that a specific round game (V round game) has started, the control process for the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 120(b) or FIG. 213(b)) is executed. In other words, the specific round game (V round game) is executed only when the jackpot game to be executed is a sure-variable jackpot game, and the specific round (V round game) is not executed when the jackpot game is a normal jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it was possible to suppress the ball from entering the V (passing through to the specific area (V gate 65V)) during the normal jackpot game, but since it is necessary to change the content of the control process for the switching valve 65y depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed, there was a problem that the processing load during the jackpot game was increased.

Therefore, a control process other than the control process contents for the switching valve 65y used in each of the above control examples may be used. For example, a V-round game is also executed in a normal jackpot game, but the conditions for ending the V-round game may be different from those in a guaranteed jackpot game, so that balls cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. In addition, as in the fourth control example in which the above-mentioned V-round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is executed, when the switching valve 65y is controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is executed, the number of winning balls for controlling the switching valve 65y in a normal jackpot game may be set to a number greater than the number of winning balls for ending the V-round game (for example, 10 balls), so that the switching control of the switching valve 65y is not executed.

The control contents (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y may be set to be the same for both the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and even if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V) during the normal jackpot game, the ball may not be processed effectively. In other words, even if the ball passes through a specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, regardless of the type of jackpot game, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game (since the opening period of the jackpot game has been set), switching control is executed so that the switching valve 65y is in an open state for a predetermined period of time, and the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65b during the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot game, thereby making it possible to configure the probability of winning a V prize different for each type of jackpot game.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, both the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the sub-pattern fz are configured to be set (selected) by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the presentation mode (variation pattern) may be configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that only the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set by the display control device 114.

The second control example and a modified example of the second control example have been explained above, but when setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation that dynamically displays various patterns executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is sufficient that the presentation mode is set independently for each type of dynamically displayed pattern and the display control is executed independently, and a configuration other than that shown in the above-mentioned control example may be used.

For example, multiple display layers for displaying the sub-pattern fz may be provided, and the sub-pattern fz may be overlapped and variably displayed, as in the modified example of the second control example described above with reference to FIG. 211.

In addition, multiple display layers are provided, and display priorities are set for each layer. When the display modes displayed on the display layers overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the display mode displayed on the layer with the highest priority is displayed so that it is visible to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a display layer without a priority may be provided, and the display modes displayed on multiple display layers may be displayed overlappingly on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, for example, when executing the "reverse variable display performance" referred to in FIG. 232, the display may be controlled (semi-transparency value and magnification rate of each sub-pattern are set) so that an overlapping sub-pattern is displayed in which a sub-pattern fz imitating a "bubble" is displayed within the sub-pattern fz of a "triangle mark", and the display may be displayed in a display mode that suggests in advance that the display mode of the sub-pattern fz will change from a "triangle mark" to a "bubble".

As explained above, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and two types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set to a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Furthermore, the time-saving state is set after the special probability state ends.

When an advantageous game state is set, the system is configured to notify the player of the period until the next normal state is set; for example, when a high probability state is set, the period until the time-saving state that is set after the high probability state ends and the normal state is set, is the duration of the advantageous game state. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of the period until the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player ends, rather than the period until the currently set game state ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In addition, when a period during which multiple advantageous game states continue in succession is notified as the duration of one advantageous game state, the content and frequency of the various effects executed by the third pattern display device 81 are configured to allow the player to grasp the detailed game state that is currently set. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict the current game state while being aware of the period until the normal state is set, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, of the multiple advantageous game states, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set; however, any configuration is acceptable as long as multiple advantageous game states can be set in succession, and for example, in addition to the normal state, high probability state, and time-saving state, a potential state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is also set as game states, and in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the potential state is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the game states (high probability state, time-saving state, potential state) in which the special pattern or normal pattern is in a high probability state become advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player. The value of the probability-change counter 203i, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues, is configured to be set to be greater than the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

In the pachinko machine 10 thus configured, for example, by configuring the value of the probability change counter 203i to be "100" and the value of the time-saving counter 203h to be "50" as a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change state is set as the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot game, and then the potential probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, it is preferable to notify the period during which multiple advantageous game states continue in succession, that is, the period until the potential probability state set after the probability change state ends, as the duration of one advantageous game state. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing a transition suggestion performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the currently set game state may transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state. This allows the player to understand only that there is a possibility of transitioning to another game state during the advantageous game state, and therefore provides the player with the fun of predicting the content of the game to be executed during the advantageous game state. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the currently set game state will transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state, the system may be configured to execute an advantageous transition suggestion display that can suggest whether the game state after the transition will be more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute a suggestion display that suggests the timing at which the game state will transition during the advantageous game state. By configuring the system in this way, the player can enjoy playing during the period until the normal state is set while still knowing the period.

In the first and fourth control examples described above, the advantageous game state is ended when a jackpot is won during an advantageous game state. However, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first among the multiple advantageous game states, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set. Therefore, winning a jackpot during an advantageous game state is not disadvantageous to the player. However, in a pachinko machine 10 configured such that the normal advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first among the multiple advantageous game states, and then the most advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal advantageous game state (high probability state) is set, it may be more advantageous for the player to have the most advantageous game state set without winning a jackpot than to have a jackpot win during the normal advantageous game state.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the system so that a period effect is executed that allows the player to distinguish between periods in which winning a jackpot as a result of the special pattern lottery executed during the advantageous game state is advantageous to the player and periods in which it is disadvantageous to the player. This allows the player to pay close attention to the results of the special pattern lottery based on the contents identified by the period effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during a normal advantageous game state and a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player even if set during a normal advantageous game state as the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot is advantageous to the player based on the contents of the period effect and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won. This allows the player to be interested not only in the game of aiming to win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, but also in the timing of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won.

In the first control example described above, one of multiple (two) types of advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player play in the hope that an advantageous game state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the first control example described above, a presentation mode (super chance mode) that notifies the player that a high probability state has been set after the end of the jackpot game, and a presentation mode (chance mode) that notifies the player that a favorable game state (high probability state or time-saving state) that is more favorable to the player than the normal state has been set after the end of the jackpot game are set according to the presentation result of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless presentations from being executed in which a chance mode is set after the end of the jackpot game, despite the notification that a high probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot game being displayed in the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game.

For the technology of the first control example configured in this way, for example, a presentation mode selection means is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and by making any presentation mode selectable in advance by the presentation mode selection means, the presentation mode of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game and the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game may be set in accordance with the content selected by the presentation mode selection means. Specifically, the presentation mode selection means is configured to select between a "full notification mode" that notifies the game state to be actually set and a "chance notification mode" that notifies only that a favorable game state has been set as the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and the player can select either presentation mode by operating the operation means (frame button 22) during the period when the special symbol lottery is not being executed on the pachinko machine 10.

A storage means is provided for temporarily storing the presentation mode selected by the player, and information for identifying the presentation mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (e.g., the sub-display area Ds), so that the currently set presentation mode is always identifiable by the player. Then, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read out. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, a V notification effect is executed as a jackpot game effect to inform the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during the jackpot game, and when the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(b) and 127(d)). When the ball does not pass through the specific area, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(a) and 127(c)). When a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" (see Fig. 131(a)) indicating that the current game state is a high probability state is set, and when a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "chance mode" (see Fig. 128(a)) indicating that the current game state is a time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can be reliably notified of the game state that will be set, and whether or not a V win has occurred, which is the trigger for determining the game state.

On the other hand, if the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the V notification effect described above is not executed as a jackpot game effect, and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state to be set. By configuring in this way, the player can play without being notified of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of a V win, which is the trigger for determining the game state. If the presentation mode selection means has not selected a presentation mode, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means, as in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and as in the first control example described above, whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined by lottery, a jackpot game effect based on the lottery result is executed, and the presentation mode after the jackpot game ends is set based on the presentation result of the jackpot game effect.

This configuration allows players to seamlessly choose the presentation mode they desire, preventing them from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Furthermore, as a means for selecting various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10, a performance frequency selection means may be provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the selection ratio of various performance modes (see FIG. 148) that are selected for the operation effects executed when the chance mode is selected. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a performance frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio of various performance modes selected when the probability bonus state is set and when the time-saving state is set can be greatly deviated or the difference in the selection ratio can be made small. Even when such a configuration is used, any performance mode desired by the player can be provided without any sense of discomfort, preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the above-described first to fourth control examples, a pachinko machine 10 has been described that is configured so that a high probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In this way, as a configuration that can provide a player with a special game different from the bonus game based on the ball passing through a specific area while a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is being executed, For example, if a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, which is a lottery result different from the big prize, a second bonus game (small prize game) different from the bonus game (jackpot game) can be played, and a specific area can be provided through which a ball can pass that enters the variable ball entry means (which may be variable entry device 65, or another entry device may be provided separately) that opens during the second bonus game, and if the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, a bonus game (jackpot game) can be played after the second bonus game (small prize game) has ended.

As a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-mentioned control examples, as shown in FIG. 233, regardless of which game state is set, a game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64, which can trigger the execution of a first special pattern lottery, by performing a left-handed play, and a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640, which can trigger the execution of a second special pattern lottery, by performing a right-handed play.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 234 to Fig. 270. The fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. Also, the fifth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or a probability-change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a low probability state to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game described above and when other end conditions (for example, an end condition that is met when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times) are met, the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In other words, unless a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the probability state of each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is not triggered to shift from a low probability state to a high probability state. In the first control example configured in this way, the jackpot game that can award many prize balls to the player and the setting of a high probability state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) in which a lottery advantageous to the player is likely to be executed are both executed based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, so that a variety of benefits can be awarded to players who win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, and players can be motivated to play with the aim of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery.

However, in the first control example described above, the probability state of each symbol can be shifted to a high probability state only when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. This causes a problem in that players who have not won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery are not given the bonus, and players who have not won a jackpot for a long period of time lose their motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in this fifth control example, a trigger other than a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the system is configured so that a trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some lottery results (misses) in which the result of the special pattern lottery is different from a jackpot win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus that is different from the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, the ease with which a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established varies depending on the game state that is set. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, it is configured to be possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win (whether or not a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established) in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, it is configured to be possible to determine only whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the normal state is set, the triggers for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern are set to be the triggers that can be established when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and the triggers that can be established when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and in game states other than the normal state, the triggers for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern are set to be the triggers that can be established when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. In other words, the normal state, where it is possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win has been won, is configured to have more triggers set for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern than game states other than the normal state.

As a result, the normal state, in which each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is set to a low probability state and which is the game state in which it is most difficult to win in each symbol lottery (a game state that is disadvantageous to the player), makes it easier to set a high probability state for the normal symbol than other game states, and can increase the motivation of players playing in the normal state.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the game state (normal state, second high probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is configured to be memorizable (reserved and memorizable) up to a predetermined number (4). And, the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving lottery in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state transitions from any game state (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state (when the game state transitions from an advantageous to an unfavorable game state for the player), the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving state if a second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state after the transition based on the execution right for the second special symbol lottery that was reserved and stored during the high probability state for normal symbols before the transition.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game state has shifted from favorable to unfavorable to the player, the player can be made to execute a special symbol lottery for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier for the player to return to a favorable game state, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly when the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, is set. Also, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, it is possible to motivate the player to play to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, in order to end the high probability state of the normal symbol when the upper limit (4) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2) has been acquired.

In the first control example described above, the high probability state of the normal symbol was set only based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) or a time-saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) can be set as an advantageous game state favorable to the player. If the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries are performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries are performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the jackpot game ends reaches 100. On the other hand, if the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving state is configured to continue until 100 special symbols are performed.

In contrast to this, as described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and the ease of establishing the end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is differentiated between the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) that is set based on winning a jackpot and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) that is set based on winning the time-saving win.

Specifically, the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the second time-saving is configured to be greater than the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the first time-saving. In this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, it is possible to set a high probability state for a normal pattern with a different degree of advantage depending on the setting trigger (the trigger for setting the high probability state for a normal pattern). This makes it possible to interest the player not only in whether or not a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, but also in the game process of what trigger sets the high probability state for a normal pattern, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In this fifth control example, the ease of achieving the time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) is varied in order to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player in the high probability state of normal patterns, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to vary the ease of obtaining the reserved memory for the second special pattern lottery (opening pattern of the electric role 640a) between when the first time-saving is set and when the second time-saving is set, or to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during jackpot play or the type of game state set after the jackpot play ends).

First, referring to FIG. 234, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 234, the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is significantly different from the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 119) in that the through gate 67 provided in the left area of the game board 13 (the area to the left of the variable display unit 80) has been removed, and the second ball entrance 640 to which the electric device 640a is attached and the variable winning device 65 that allows the game ball to win at least when a jackpot game is executed are arranged in different positions. Also, it is different in that the internal configuration of the variable winning device 65 has been changed. The rest of the contents are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the through gate 67, which is the ball entry port for establishing the chance to draw a lottery for a normal symbol, is arranged only in the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to draw a lottery for a normal symbol while playing a left-handed game in which the game ball is shot toward the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and the game ball enters the first ball entry port (winning port) 64.

The first ball entrance 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is disposed so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into left and right, with a left flow path (left area) through which game balls can flow formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a right flow path (right area) through which game balls can flow formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Game balls that flow down the left flow path (area) do not flow down the right flow path (area), and game balls that flow down the right flow path (area) do not flow down the left flow path (area).

Below the variable display unit 80, a lower area (common area) is formed in which both the game balls that have flowed down the left flow path (area) and the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path (area) can flow down, and an outlet 66 is provided at the bottom of the lower area (the bottom of the game board 13). The first ball entrance 64 is located at a position where both the game balls that have flowed down the left flow path and the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path can enter. In addition, it is possible to configure it so that only the game balls that flow down the left flow path can enter the first ball entrance 64, different from the configuration of the fifth control example. By configuring it in this way, when a right-hand hit game is performed in which the game ball flows down to the right area, for example, when a game is performed in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 by a right-hand hit game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special pattern lottery is executed.

The second ball entrance 640 is located at a position where game balls that have flowed down the right flow path can enter more easily than game balls that have flowed down the left flow path. The second ball entrance 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, a flow path through which game balls can flow down, and a photosensor that detects game balls that have entered the opening is provided. An electric device 640a is provided on the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate that can close the opening, and an opening solenoid (not shown) is provided to drive the opening and closing to the front side with the opening and closing plate as an axis. The opening of the second ball entrance 640 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric device 640a downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter the opening of the second ball entrance 640, and the device operates to repeat this open state and the normal closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is held when a winning ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the special symbol lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery) and whether or not a time-saving win has been won to set a high probability state for normal symbols (time-saving lottery), and is configured to determine the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won (if a jackpot has been won), and to determine the type of time-saving win if a time-saving win has been won.

In this fifth control example, different jackpot types are defined for the first special symbol that triggers a lottery when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second special symbol that triggers a lottery when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and a 16R sure-win jackpot (jackpot A5) and a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot B5) are defined for the first special symbol. Also, a 16R sure-win jackpot (jackpot A5), a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot C5), and a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot D5) are defined for the second special symbol. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only show whether the lottery result is a jackpot as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also show a symbol according to the jackpot type if it is a jackpot.

Here, "16R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot A5)" refers to a jackpot type in which a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot A5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops.

In other words, for the jackpot A5, the same conditions (60th special symbol change stop) are stipulated for the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to A5, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special symbol change is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, both the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end and the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. By configuring it in this way, the game state transitions directly from the game state in which the high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state, making it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery based on the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols in the normal state.

"6R Probable Jackpot (Jackpot B5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. The end condition for this jackpot B5 to end the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period is the same as that of the above-mentioned jackpot A5 (the condition that is met when the 60th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed). In other words, jackpot B5 is a jackpot type that differs from jackpot A5 only in the number of rounds (number of rounds) played during the jackpot play.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in the normal state, which is a state in which the probability of a normal symbol is low, it is configured so that it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640, so that a left-handed play is performed in the normal state to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 and to execute the first special symbol lottery. Then, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, either jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed in the normal state, a jackpot game with a different number of rounds according to the set jackpot type is executed, and a probability variable state with the same end condition is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, regardless of which jackpot type is set, the player can play under the same conditions after the jackpot game ends. In the fifth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot type that differs only in the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be set, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the type of game state that is set after the jackpot game ends to be different depending on the jackpot type that is set, or to configure the end conditions for the same game state to be different. In addition, it is also possible to configure the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds, etc.) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends (game state type, end conditions) to be different.

In this case, the types of the first benefit (a jackpot game) and the second benefit (a high probability state of a normal symbol) that are granted to a player based on a jackpot win of a special symbol may be predefined from a jackpot type corresponding to a combination in which the first and second benefits are most advantageous to the player to a jackpot type corresponding to a combination in which the first and second benefits are most disadvantageous to the player, and one of the jackpot types may be set when a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the benefit that can be granted after winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery can be made to differ greatly based on the jackpot type that is set, so that the player can be interested in the jackpot types that are set. In order to prevent a large difference in the advantageous degree of the bonus given based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, for example, a jackpot type that combines a first bonus with a low advantageous degree and a second bonus with a high advantageous degree, or a jackpot type that combines a first bonus with a high advantageous degree and a second bonus with a low advantageous degree, that is, a jackpot type other than the jackpot type in which the advantageous degrees of the first bonus and the second bonus defined for the jackpot type are both high or low, may be predefined, and one of the multiple defined jackpot types may be set.

"6R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot C5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot C5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 56 times until the 56th special symbol change stops.

In other words, the jackpot C5 specifies different end conditions for ending the special high probability period (high probability end condition) and the normal high probability period (time-saving end condition), and is configured so that the time-saving end condition is met before the high probability end condition is met. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to jackpot C5, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 56th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, the normal high probability period ends before the special high probability period, and the second high probability state (high probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern) is set. Then, when the fourth special pattern variation is stopped and displayed after the second high probability state is set (a total of 60 times after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving end condition is met, and the game state transitions to set the normal state.

Here, the period when the probability variable state is set is a game state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) because a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and is a game period during which the player is made to play with a right hand, whereas the period when the second probability variable state is set is a game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special pattern 2 reserved, as in the normal state, because a low probability state of normal patterns is set. Therefore, it is a game period during which the player is made to play with a left hand. In other words, when the probability variable state transitions to the second probability variable state, the second special pattern lottery based on the special pattern 2 reserved acquired during the probability variable state will be executed during the second probability variable state. In this fifth control example, the second special symbol drawing is executed with priority over the first special symbol drawing, and a maximum of four reserved special symbols 2 can be stored. Therefore, even if the player transitions from the special symbol state to the second special symbol state after the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired, four second special symbol drawing will be executed until the second special symbol state ends (until the high probability of special symbol period ends), and the number of reserved special symbols 2 stored at the time the game state transitions from the second special symbol state to the normal state will be zero.

In other words, when jackpot C is set as the jackpot type, a normal pattern high probability period (probability change state) is set after the jackpot game ends, during which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, but a game is executed in which it is difficult to execute the second special pattern lottery based on the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the normal pattern high probability period in the normal state. Therefore, compared to jackpot B, which is the same jackpot type in that the same jackpot game is executed and a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, this is a jackpot type that is less favorable than jackpot B in terms of the ease of executing the second special pattern lottery when the special pattern high probability period and normal pattern high probability period end and the normal state is set.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this fifth control example, the same presentation mode (pullback mode) is set when the high probability state ends and the second high probability state is set, and when the high probability state ends and the normal state is set. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the second high probability state or the normal state is set after the high probability state ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the second special pattern lottery executed after the normal high probability period ends was executed during the normal state or the second high probability state, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the executed second special pattern lottery can win the time-saving lottery (whether the time-saving lottery is being executed).

Therefore, even if the second probability change state is set, players can play while hoping for a time-saving win.

In addition, in this fifth control example, after the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the normal symbol high probability period (period during which the high probability state of normal symbols continues) ends before the special symbol high probability period (period during which the high probability state of special symbols continues), and the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is entered. Specifically, the special symbol 2 reserved in the probability variable state is entered into the second probability variable state. The period from the end of the normal high probability period to the end of the special high probability period (period during which the second probability variable state continues) is set to the period during which the special pattern variation is executed four times so that all of the special pattern variations are consumed during the period (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state in which the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) based on the acquired reserved special pattern 2 is executed is different depending on the game state (normal state, second probability variable state, etc.) that is set after the probability variable state. In other words, a configuration that can vary the number of times the special pattern lottery that can be executed in a favorable game state (normal state) that is advantageous to the player can be used as the game state in which the special pattern lottery is executed based on the acquired reserved special pattern.

For example, a jackpot type may be set in which the end condition for the normal high probability period is 58 special pattern changes and the end condition for the normal high probability period is 60 special pattern changes, so that a part of the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the high probability state is consumed during the second high probability state (high probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern) and the remaining reserved special pattern 2 is consumed during the normal state. In this case, if the high probability period ends with the maximum number of reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the high probability state and the second high probability state is entered, two reserved special pattern 2 will be consumed during the second high probability state, and the second special pattern lottery based on the remaining two reserved special pattern 2 can be executed in the normal state. In this way, when each end condition is specified so that the high probability period ends before the high probability period when the high probability state is set, the number of times the second special pattern lottery can be executed in the normal state can be changed simply by changing the difference between each end condition.

In addition, in this fifth control example, when there is both a reserved memory of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and a reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved), the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, as described above, the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the probability change state is executed in priority regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol 1 reserved (whether or not there is a special symbol 1 reserved acquired before the special symbol 2 reserved). When the game state in which it is easy to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved (high probability state of normal symbols) ends, that is, immediately after the game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved (low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the number of special symbols 2 reserved decreases, but this is not limited to this. The first special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 1 reserved and the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reserved may be configured to be executed according to the order in which each special symbol reserved was acquired.

"6R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot D5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot D5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 65 times until the 65th special symbol change stops.

In other words, the jackpot D5 specifies different end conditions for ending the special high probability period (high probability end condition) and the normal high probability period (time-saving end condition), and is configured so that the high probability end condition is met before the time-saving end condition is met. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to jackpot D5, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, the special high probability period ends before the normal high probability period, and the time-saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set. Then, when the 5th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed after the time-saving state is set (a total of 65 times after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving end condition is met, and the game state transitions to set the normal state.

The period during which the time-saving state is set is a high probability state for normal symbols, just like the probability state, so it is a game state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation), and is a game period during which the player is made to play with a right hand. In other words, when the probability state transitions to the time-saving state, the player is made to continue to play with a right hand and play a game to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation. And, in this fifth control example, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and since the system is configured to be able to store up to four special symbol 2 reservations, the number of special symbol 2 reservations stored at the time of transition from the time-saving state to the normal state after the maximum number of special symbol 2 reservations (four) have been acquired will be four.

In other words, when jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, a normal symbol high probability period (probability change state) is set after the jackpot game ends, during which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and a game that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state based on the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the normal symbol high probability period is executed, just like jackpot B5. Therefore, the same jackpot game is executed, and the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the special symbol high probability period and normal symbol high probability period end, and in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery in the normal state set, it is as advantageous as jackpot B5.

In the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to a lower probability (1/300) compared to the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, so the time-saving state is a game state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in the probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, in the jackpot B5 that transitions from the probability of winning a jackpot to the normal state, during the final period of the special symbol change that is executed during the probability of winning a jackpot, a performance (change performance) to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won in the change and a notification (notification performance) to encourage players to acquire the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 during the probability of winning a jackpot must be executed in duplicate, and there is a problem in that performances with different purposes are executed in duplicate, resulting in the execution of a performance that is difficult for players to understand.

In contrast, if the end conditions of the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are specified so that the probability state transitions to the time-saving state and then transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, as in the case of the jackpot D5, only the effect (change effect) for indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won in the change can be executed during the final change period of the special pattern executed during the probability state, so that the player can easily focus on the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability state of the special pattern (special pattern high probability period), that is, the change effect for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Then, by executing a guide notification (notification effect) to encourage the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit during the final change of the time-saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the period during which the change effect for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery with a high expectation of winning the jackpot to be executed and the period during which the notification effect for encouraging the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit to overlap during the normal pattern high probability period.

Therefore, the jackpot D5 is an advantageous jackpot type compared to the jackpot B5 in terms of the clarity of the effects that are executed.

During the high probability state of the normal symbol (normal symbol high probability period), not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the time-saving state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is held can be increased.

In the time-saving state, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be increased compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the second pattern may not be changed, and at least one of the time the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be changed. In the time-saving state, the time the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be increased compared to the normal state.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes (ball entry holes) 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entry 640 is activated (released) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the second symbol to change is set to be shorter during the time-saving mode than during the normal game mode. As a result, during the time-saving mode, the second symbol changes and is displayed in a short time, so that the winning lottery (the number of times the second symbol changes and is displayed) can be held more than during the normal game mode. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric device 640a of the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls to the upper tray 17, so that it is easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. This allows the player to play while suppressing the reduction in the number of balls he or she has, and allows the lottery for special symbols to be held during the time-saving mode while suppressing the investment for lending additional balls.

Note that if the state is made such that it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during time-saving by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during time-saving than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board in the area of the right flow path of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the left side of the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second symbol reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left of the variable display unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 is provided below the variable display unit 80, through which a ball can enter. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first prize entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67, no prize ball is paid out, but the invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls, such as one ball.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also prize entrances through which four balls are paid out when a ball enters the prize entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, the electric device 640a opens, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the time-saving mode, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving mode, the time that the electric device 640a is open is longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during normal play.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, in the second special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a time-saving state can be granted as a bonus other than winning the jackpot in a specific game state (normal state). In other words, in some cases where the result of the second special symbol lottery is other than winning the jackpot (miss), a bonus of setting the time-saving state can be granted after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executes a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

In other words, the player can play the game while hoping that a high probability state of normal symbols will be set, which will make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to Figures 235 to 239, the content of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example will be explained. This fifth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that, in addition to winning the jackpot, a time-saving win is also provided as a result of the special pattern lottery, and here, the effects related to the time-saving win will be mainly explained. Note that a detailed explanation of the elements (display modes) that are the same as those in the first control example described above will be omitted.

235(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 235(a), when a jackpot game is executed, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed to congratulate the player on the award (jackpot game). During a jackpot game, the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won is continuously displayed as a stopped symbol in the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and in the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the third symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the display mode of "777". This small display area Dm1 is an area in which the third symbol that is displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special symbol is displayed, and while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Also, to the left of the main display area Dm1, there are formed a small display area Dm4 in which a guide notification mode is displayed to guide the player on how to play during a jackpot game, a small display area Dm5 in which a round number notification mode is displayed to notify the player of the current round number (number of rounds played), and a small display area Dm6 in which acquisition information is displayed to show a value corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in games that are continuously played without going through the normal state. In the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the small display area Dm4 displays the words "Right Hit", the small display area Dm5 displays "2 Rounds", and the small display area Dm6 displays "140P".

In other words, the display guides the player to play right-hand during a jackpot play, notifies the player that the second round of the jackpot play is currently being played, and shows that the number of prize balls won in this jackpot play is 140. In this way, by configuring the display to display information about a jackpot play, the playing method during the jackpot play, and information about the prizes won, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game experience.

Then, when all the rounds during the jackpot game are over and the ending period of the jackpot game is set, an ending screen is displayed to suggest to the player in advance the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 235(b). FIG. 235(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. The example shown in FIG. 235(b) shows a display screen that notifies the player that a performance corresponding to a probability change state (chance time) will be set after the jackpot game ends, and that the period of the chance time will be 56 times (56 special pattern changes). Then, in the center of the main display area Dm1, a display mode in which the character 801 continues to run from left to right is displayed as a display mode to notify the player in advance of the performance content executed during the chance time.

In this way, by using a portion of the period before the high probability state is actually set (during the jackpot play) to inform the player that the high probability state will be set after the jackpot play ends, the duration of the set high probability state, and an explanation of the performance content that will be executed during the high probability state, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy for the player to understand, as it is possible to allow the player to understand in advance the content of the game that will be executed in the future.

Next, the contents of the chance time effect executed during the probability change state will be explained with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during chance time, and FIG. 236(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the final change of chance time. During chance time, the character 801 continues to run in the main display area Dm1, and an effect is executed in which a big win is announced by catching the V icon 801v displayed on the screen. As described above, during the probability change state, a high probability state of normal patterns is set, so a game in which a right-hand hit game is used to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 and a second special pattern lottery is executed (right-hand hit game), which is an advantageous game method for the player.

Therefore, "Right Hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide players to play with a right hit. A remaining period notification mode is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to indicate the period until the chance time ends. In FIG. 236(a), the words "50 remaining" are displayed as a display mode to indicate that there are 50 remaining special pattern variations that can be performed before the chance time ends.

Here, Chance Time is an effect that is executed in response to the probability variable state, and the timing at which Chance Time ends is the timing at which the probability variable state ends. Here, in this fifth control example, depending on the type of probability variable jackpot in which the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, after the probability variable state ends, there are cases where a normal state is set (jackpot A5, B5), a second probability variable state is set (jackpot C5), or a time-saving state is set (jackpot D5). Regardless of which type of jackpot is set, the effect screen at the end of Chance Time shown in FIG. 236(b) is displayed during the special pattern change that ends the probability variable state (final special pattern change in the probability variable state).

The example shown in FIG. 236(b) shows an example of a presentation screen at the end of the chance time when the second probability state or normal state, that is, the high probability state of the normal pattern transitions to a low probability state with the end of the probability state, is entered after the probability state ends. In the main display area Dm1, a comment "Enter pullback mode after the chance time ends" is displayed to indicate that the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. Then, as a game guidance mode encouraging the player to acquire the maximum number of reserved special pattern 2 during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues, that is, during the period in which it is easy to acquire reserved special pattern 2, a comment "Hit to the right to accumulate reserved numbers" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a small display area Dm9 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to show the number of reserved special pattern 2 that has already been acquired.

In the small display area Dm9, reserved icons that can inform the player of the upper limit of the special chart 2 reserved that can be acquired and the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired are displayed, and the first reserved icon h1 is displayed corresponding to the first reserved special chart 2, the second reserved icon h2 is displayed corresponding to the second reserved special chart 2, the third reserved icon h3 is displayed corresponding to the third reserved special chart 2, and the fourth reserved icon h4 is displayed corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. In FIG. 236(b), since three reserved special charts 2 have been acquired, the first reserved icon h1, the second reserved icon h2, and the third reserved icon h3 are displayed in a display mode (black in the figure) to indicate that they have been acquired, and the fourth reserved icon h4 is displayed in a display mode (white in the figure) to indicate that they have not been acquired. This makes it possible to easily inform the player whether or not the upper limit of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, when all four reserved icons displayed in the small display area Dm9 have been acquired, that is, when the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired during the final variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state, no new reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired even if the player continues playing right-handed, and since this is the final variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state, the reserved special symbols 2 are not consumed during the probability variation state. Therefore, even if the player continues playing right-handed, no special benefits that would be advantageous to the player can be granted. Therefore, the small display area Dm9 displays a display mode (e.g., "MAX") to indicate that the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired, and the text "Right hit" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a different display mode from the display mode before the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 was acquired, and a display mode (e.g., the text size is reduced) that indicates that right-handed play is less necessary is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to continue playing right-handed in vain.

The pull-back mode is an effect that is set in response to the period during which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a low probability state for normal symbols (normal state, second probability state). In this fifth control example, it is configured so that the time-saving win can be achieved in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In other words, during the pull-back mode, not only the jackpot win but also the special symbol lottery with the possibility of winning the time-saving win is executed, thereby increasing the possibility of the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) being set.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, the content of the effects executed during the pullback mode will be explained. FIG. 237(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the pullback mode starts, and FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a time-saving win occurs during the pullback mode.

When the pull-back mode is set, as shown in FIG. 237(a), treasure chests 810a to 810d are displayed in a number corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired, and an effect is executed in which the treasure chests are opened in accordance with the change in the second special symbol. Then, an effect is executed in which a display mode showing the lottery result of the corresponding second special symbol appears from within the treasure chest.

When the pull-back mode begins, the secondary display area Ds displays the following comments to explain the effects during the pull-back mode: "If 'V' comes out of the treasure chest, you win the jackpot; if 'Time' comes out, you get a time-saving bonus" and "Open the treasure chest."

In the fifth control example, the change time of the second special symbol change executed during the pull-back mode is configured to be determined regardless of the number of second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode, and an effect of opening one treasure chest is executed for the change period of one second special symbol change, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure it so that an effect of opening one treasure chest can be executed using the change times of all second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode, and if the lottery result of even one of the second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode is a jackpot or time-saving win, an effect to show the lottery result can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of changes of the second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the pull-back mode is set when either the normal state in which the time-saving lottery is actually executed, or the second special probability state in which the time-saving lottery is not executed is set, that is, when the game state transitions from the special probability state to a game state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state, second special probability state). In other words, in the pull-back mode when the second special probability state is set, a performance in which "time" does not appear from the treasure chest is executed as a performance result.

In this way, by configuring the game to execute the same presentation (pull-back mode) in a game state in which a time-saving lottery can be executed and in a game state in which a time-saving lottery cannot be executed (is difficult), it is possible to set in advance a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is likely to be displayed and a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is unlikely to be displayed as the presentation result of the pull-back mode. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player whether the pull-back mode currently set is a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is likely to be displayed (advantageous pull-back mode) or a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is unlikely to be displayed (unfavorable pull-back mode).

In this fifth control example, the type of background displayed during the pull-back mode can be used to suggest to the player whether the pull-back mode being executed this time is an advantageous pull-back mode or not, and the display screen shown in FIG. 237(a) displays a background image that resembles "heaven" as the background type to suggest that the advantageous pull-back mode is highly likely.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the background type of the pull-back mode can be determined according to the set game state without reading ahead (pre-determining) the results of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that has already been acquired. By configuring it in this way, no matter what background type of background image is displayed, it is possible to make it easier to keep the possibility of winning the time-saving win or the jackpot, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

If the time-saving bonus is won during the pull-back mode, the effect shown in FIG. 237(b) is executed. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the time-saving bonus is won in the third second special symbol drawing during the pull-back mode, where a treasure box 810a and a treasure box 810b are displayed with a cross mark as a history display mode to indicate that the second special symbol variation has already been performed twice, and an effect is executed in which a display mode appears from a treasure box 810c indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being performed (the third second special symbol variation) is a time-saving bonus, and "Time" x 10000" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a time-saving bonus and the number of time-saving bonuses granted is "10000 times", that is, in effect, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) will be granted until the next big win is won. Additionally, the bottom right side of the main display area Dm can clearly display the remaining number of second special pattern lotteries that can be performed during the pullback mode, including the second special pattern variation that is currently being performed.

Next, the content of the performance that is executed when the time-saving win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pull-back mode will be explained. In this fifth control example, the system is configured so that the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) is more likely to be set longer (the normal symbol high probability period is less likely to end) when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery compared to when the probability variable state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, in some cases of winning the time-saving win, the system is configured to be able to set a time-saving state (long time-saving) in which the normal symbol high probability period continues until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation has been executed reaches 10,000 without winning a jackpot.

Then, if the time-saving is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pull-back mode and the long time-saving is set, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 238(a) is displayed. FIG. 238(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the extended time executed when the long time-saving is set. When the long time-saving is set, the jackpot is almost always won in the special symbol lottery before the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is executed reaches 10,000 times, so as shown in FIG. 238(a), when the long time-saving is set, "infinite (shown as a symbol in the figure)" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal symbol high probability period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

This configuration allows the player to play during the time-saving state without worrying about the remaining period of the normal high probability period, and it also eliminates the need to provide an area in the small display area Dm7 capable of displaying a five-digit number, allowing the small display area Dm7 to be made smaller, allowing the display area of the main display area Dm to be effectively used for other effects. In addition, the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "Keep hitting to the right until the next jackpot" as a notification to inform the player that the time-saving state (normal high probability period) will continue until the next jackpot is won.

When a long time-saving feature is set, the time-saving state will almost always continue until the next big win, based on probability. However, if the number of special symbol changes exceeds 10,000 times without a big win after the long time-saving feature is set, the high probability period of normal symbols will end, and the content displayed on the display screen will differ from the actual gameplay, causing distrust among players. Therefore, if the number of special symbol changes executed after the long time-saving feature is set exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 9,850 times), the display screen during the long time-saving feature is configured to be different.

Figure 238 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of times that special pattern variations have been performed during the long time reduction has reached 9900 times. As shown in Figure 238 (b), when the number of times that special pattern variations have been performed since the long time reduction was set exceeds a predetermined number of times, "100 times remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal high probability period, and a performance mode in which the character 801 runs with a tired expression is displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, even if a normal high probability period in which the time reduction state can actually continue until the next big win is set, if a situation occurs in which the normal high probability period may actually end, the specific remaining period can be notified to the player, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 239, the contents of the presentation when the time-saving state is set after the chance time ends will be explained. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen of the preparation time executed during the time-saving state after the chance time ends. As described above, when the type of the special jackpot is set to jackpot D5, the special jackpot state transitions to the time-saving state, and the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state. Then, during the time-saving state, the preparation time presentation is executed. This preparation time is a presentation executed during the period when the time-saving state is set, and during the period of the final change of the special pattern in the time-saving state, a mode is displayed that encourages the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit, similar to the final change of the special pattern in the special jackpot state shown in FIG. 236 (b) described above.

Next, the content of the background types displayed during the pull back mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 240(a). FIG. 240(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed during the pull back mode and the content indicated by each background.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), in this fifth control example, four background types (heaven, night, evening, day) can be displayed as background types during the pull-back mode. And, depending on the type of background displayed, the player can be suggested the expectation of a special prize (jackpot, time-saving win) during this pull-back mode.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 250, but in this fifth control example, when setting the pull-back mode (when transitioning from the special probability state to the second special probability state or to the normal state), one of four mode types can be determined based on the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired, the type of game state after the transition, and whether or not a jackpot or time-saving win has been won in the reserved state, and the background type corresponding to the determined mode type can be displayed as the background during the pull-back mode.

The mode types during the pullback mode are defined so that the expectation of the bonus is different, and there are four mode types from mode A, which is the most advantageous to the player, to mode D, which is the least advantageous to the player. "Mode A" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode is extremely high, and "heaven" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background imitating heaven is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a high possibility that some bonus will be granted by the time the pullback mode ends. Next, "Mode B" is a mode in which there is the second highest possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode, and "night" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background imitating night is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a second highest possibility of winning some bonus by the time the pullback mode ends. "Mode C" is a mode in which there is the third highest possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode, and "evening" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background simulating evening is displayed as the background during the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that there is a slightly higher possibility that some kind of bonus will be awarded before the pull-back mode ends. Finally, "Mode D" is a mode in which there is a low possibility of winning the jackpot or time-saving win during the pull-back mode, and "daytime" is specified as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background simulating daytime is displayed as the background during the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that there is a low possibility that some kind of bonus will be awarded before the pull-back mode ends.

In addition, in this fifth control example, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of entering the pull-back mode is not the upper limit, the high mode mode type is not selected. Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of entering the pull-back mode is not the upper limit, the mode type is determined without determining whether or not a time-saving lottery is executed in the second special pattern lottery executed during the pull-back mode. In other words, in order to make it easier to predict the mode type of the pull-back mode, it is necessary to transition to the pull-back mode when the upper limit number of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired.

By configuring it this way, players can be motivated to play in an attempt to obtain up to the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 when in a special bonus state or a time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 240(b), the suggestion modes for indicating the lottery results of the second special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode will be described. FIG. 240(b) is a diagram showing the types of suggestion modes during the pull-back mode and the relationship between the suggestion contents indicated by each suggestion mode. As shown in FIG. 240(b), as the suggestion modes during the pull-back mode, suggestion modes (Suggestion A to Suggestion D) that change the display mode of the treasure chest (see FIG. 237) or change the display mode of the character 801 until the treasure chest is opened are set with reference to the suggestion mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) described later.

Specifically, the suggestion types can be set to "Suggestion A" or "Suggestion B" depending on the expected probability of winning the jackpot or time-saving bonus during the corresponding fluctuation, and the suggestion types can be set to "Suggestion C" or "Suggestion D" depending on the set game state.

When "Suggestion A" is selected, a treasure chest of a different color (gold) than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure chest 810c displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a gold treasure chest corresponding to this "Suggestion A" is displayed, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won the jackpot or time-saving feature during the corresponding variation. When "Suggestion B" is selected, a larger treasure chest than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure chest 810c displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a gold treasure chest corresponding to this "Suggestion B" is displayed, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won the jackpot or time-saving feature during the corresponding variation. Note that the configuration is such that there is a higher possibility of winning the jackpot or time-saving feature when "Suggestion A" is selected than when "Suggestion B" is selected.

When "Suggestion C" and "Suggestion D" are selected, the character 801 displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)) is displayed with an ornament, and the character 801 is displayed in a different manner from normal. The currently set game state is suggested to the player according to the type of ornament displayed.

When "Suggestion C" is selected, as shown in FIG. 237(b), an ornament 801w resembling an angel's halo is displayed on the character 801, suggesting to the player that the currently set game state is likely to be normal, and when "Suggestion D" is selected, an icon resembling the word "chance" is displayed above the character 801's head, suggesting to the player that the game state is likely to be normal. Note that the system is configured so that the normal state is more likely to be set when "Suggestion C" is selected than when "Suggestion D" is selected.

In this way, in this fifth control example, the mode type of the pull-back mode is determined according to the game situation at the time the pull-back mode is set, and the suggestive mode for the special pattern variation executed during the pull-back mode is determined. By determining the mode type and the suggestive mode type in a combined manner, it becomes possible for the player to more accurately predict the current game situation. This makes it possible to arouse interest in the various presentation modes being executed for the player.

<Game flow in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 241, the game flow in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the game flow in the fifth control example, that is, the flow of transition of the game state. As shown in FIG. 241, in the fifth control example, the game state can be set to the normal state (special pattern 1 normal, special pattern 2 normal), time-saving state (first time-saving, second time-saving), probability variable state, and second probability variable state, and various game states can be set according to the result of the jackpot judgment in the special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning judgment.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 242 to Fig. 251. Fig. 242 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, among the electrical configuration in this fifth control example, the description of the same contents as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned first control example (see Fig. 137) will be omitted.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display in the first symbol display device 37, setting the display in the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display in the third symbol display device 81. Various counters for controlling these processes are provided in the RAM 203. Here, referring to FIG. 243, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display in the first symbol display device 37, set the display in the second symbol display device 83, and set the display in the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and the settings for the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 use the first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the jackpot type for the special symbols, the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type for a losing special symbol, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 used to select the time-saving type when the time-saving win is won.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (variation conditions) are met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b that contain information about the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern variation based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In the fifth control example, the jackpot winning judgment value and the time-saving winning judgment value are different so that the time-saving winning can be achieved when the jackpot is not won as a result of the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot winning judgment value and the time-saving winning judgment value may be configured to overlap at least in part. By configuring in this way, the lottery results of only winning the jackpot, only winning the time-saving winning, and overlapping winning of both the jackpot winning and the time-saving winning can be provided to the player depending on the acquired judgment value (the value of the first win random number counter C1). In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that a more advantageous benefit is given to the player in the case of overlapping winning than in the case of winning only one of the two, and for example, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state set based on overlapping winning to be more difficult to end than the time-saving state set based on the other winning.

By configuring it in this way, players can play in the hope of winning multiple times.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the lottery results of the special symbol being a big win or a miss, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, it is configured to be possible to set a time-saving state (a state with a high probability of a normal symbol) without executing a winning game. However, without being limited to this, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, it may be possible to win a small prize that can be awarded to the player with a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to award a bonus to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. In this case, a small prize type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired small prize type counter can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbol is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition can be varied depending on the type of win (big win, small win), so it is possible to provide a wide variety of games. In addition, it may be configured so that one special pattern lottery can have four possible results: a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, and a miss, and the bonus that can be won in the special pattern lottery may be different depending on the type of special pattern.

In this case, for example, a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be specified as the bonuses that can be awarded when a first special pattern lottery is executed, and a jackpot win and a small bonus win can be specified as the bonuses that can be awarded when a second special pattern lottery is executed. In addition, when the same game state is set, the player can select the type of special pattern lottery to be executed by selecting the direction in which the game ball is fired (by selecting left-handed play or right-handed play). By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select the type of bonus (additional bonus) other than a jackpot win.

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 243. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 899) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 899 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 899). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da, a jackpot for the special pattern is determined. In addition, the value of the random number that will result in a time-saving win in the special pattern lottery is set by the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and if the value of the first win random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that will result in a time-saving win set by the time-saving win random number 5 table 202da, it is determined that a time-saving win has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 245(a), the first winning random number 5 table 202da will be described. FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 5 table 202da. This first winning random number 5 table 202da is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first hit random number 5 table 202da specifies different judgment values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the low probability state of the special symbol as the game state (normal state, time-saving state), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified as "0 to 2" as the jackpot judgment value, and the other values ("3 to 899") are specified as the miss judgment value. Also, for the high probability state of the special symbol as the game state (probability state), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified as "0 to 14" as the jackpot judgment value, and the other values ("15 to 899") are specified as the miss judgment value. In other words, the update range of the 1st Win Random Number 5 table 202da is 900 numbers from "0 to 899", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/300 (3 out of 900), and in the high probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/60 (15 out of 900).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the two types of lottery results of "jackpot" and "miss", a "time-saving win" is also determined as a result of the lottery for the special symbols. Here, the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de will be explained with reference to FIG. 245(c). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de. This time-saving win random number 5 table 202de is a table that stipulates the random number value (determination value) that is used to determine a time-saving win in the lottery for the special symbols.

Specifically, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de specifies different judgment values for determining a time-saving win depending on the special symbol type and the game state. As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the first special symbol as a special symbol type, no judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to a time-saving win is specified. Also, for the second special symbol as a special symbol type, a judgment value corresponding to a time-saving win is specified only when the game state is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and no judgment value corresponding to a time-saving win is specified in other game states (high probability state, second high probability state, time-saving state).

For the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set as the game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1, "51-200", is specified as the time-saving winning judgment value, and the other values ("3-50, 201-899") are specified as the loss judgment value. Note that, as will be described in detail later, this time-saving winning random number 5 table 202de is referenced when the result of the jackpot judgment executed with reference to the first winning random number 5 table 202da is "loss", so it is referenced when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a value other than the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ("0-2") that is determined to be a jackpot.

Therefore, the update range of the 1st Winning Random Number 5 table 202da is 900 numbers from "0 to 899", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of being determined as a jackpot is 1/300 (3 out of 900), and the probability of being determined as a time-saving win is 1/6 (150 out of 900).

In other words, the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state has a 3/900 chance of winning the jackpot, a 150/900 chance of winning the time-saving feature, and a 747/900 chance of losing, making it a special symbol lottery that is less likely to result in a loss (more likely to award a special prize) compared to the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (897/900 chance of losing).

In this control example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made is made only in a specific game state (normal state) and in a special pattern lottery of a specific special pattern type (second special pattern), but this is not limited to this and the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made for any special pattern type. Furthermore, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made even when a game state other than the normal state is set, and for example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made in the second special pattern lottery that is executed in a state in which a low probability state (second special state) for normal patterns is set. By configuring in this way, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) can always be made in the second special pattern lottery that is executed during the pull-back mode (see FIG. 237).

In this case, it is a good idea to set different probabilities of winning the time-saving lottery performed during the normal state and the time-saving lottery performed during the second special probability state, and configure it so that it is easier to win the time-saving lottery when the normal state is set than when the second special probability state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns) where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is lower than in the second special probability state (high probability state for special patterns), and therefore to prevent players from playing games that are excessively disadvantageous to them.

In addition, without being limited to this, the second probability variable state may be configured to have a higher probability of winning the time-saving feature than the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning the time-saving feature can also be increased in a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is set to a high probability (high probability state of special patterns), so the special pattern lottery performed during the second probability variable state can have a higher probability of resulting in a lottery result that grants some kind of special benefit (jackpot, time-saving feature) (probability of not winning a losing feature) than a special pattern lottery performed during the probability variable state.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only when a specific game state is in effect and a specific special symbol lottery is executed, so the probability of winning the time-saving lottery is always fixed. However, if the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed under different conditions (special symbol type, game state), the probability of winning the time-saving lottery may be configured to differ according to the trigger for the time-saving lottery.

In addition to the trigger for the time-saving lottery, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery may be increased, for example, when the number of times that the special pattern changes without changing the game state exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In addition, the third lottery result may be determined as a "small win" as a type of "loss". When the "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win 5". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. When the "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

In addition, in this control example, three types of lottery results, "big win", "loss" and "time-saving win", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a fourth lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when a "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. Also, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, by referring to the first win type selection 5 table 202dc. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd will be explained with reference to FIG. 246(a).

Figure 246 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd. As shown in Figure 246 (a), this jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd has a special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and a special 2 jackpot 5 table 202dd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 246(b). FIG. 246(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1. As described above, the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2. The detailed contents defined in each data table have been described above and will be omitted here.

Returning to FIG. 243, the explanation will continue. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 167) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247), which stores random number values that determine one of the variation times of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db. As shown in FIG. 247(a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db defines the normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1, which is used when the normal state or the second probability variation state is set as the game state, and the probability variation/time-saving 5 table 202db2, which is used when the probability variation state or the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Next, the detailed contents of each table stipulated in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 247(b) and FIG. 248(a). FIG. 247(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1. This normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1 is a data table referenced when the game state is set to the normal state or the second probability change state, that is, the low probability state of the normal pattern, and is stipulated so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are stipulated according to the type of special pattern for which the lottery was executed and the result of the special pattern lottery executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a time-saving win (part of a miss), it is stipulated so that the same variation time as when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss (other than a time-saving win).

First, referring to FIG. 247(b), the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1 will be described. FIG. 247(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1. In the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1, various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a big hit, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Furthermore, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", a fluctuation pattern of SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified. In other words, even if the fluctuation time is the same as 30 seconds, different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. In this way, by configuring the main control device 110 to be able to select different fluctuation patterns for the same fluctuation time, it is possible to simplify the process for determining the fluctuation presentation on the voice lamp control device 113 side that receives the command indicating the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, an additional time may be added in addition to the basic time. In the case where an additional time is added, the total time obtained by adding the basic time and the additional time is set as the variation time, and a command indicating the basic time and a command indicating the additional time are output. In this case, when determining the additional time to be added, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 may be used, or the value of a dedicated counter used to select the additional time may be obtained. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (e.g., 30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) may be set based on the information included in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) may be set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that becomes visible to the player first when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third symbol (in this control example, a third symbol with the number 1), the reach state can be executed with various types of third symbols without varying the period from when the variable effect is executed to when the reach state is reached.

Similarly, if the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the win/loss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 149", a Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this Super is determined, a command indicating a base time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "150 to 198", a SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (time-saving), that is, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a time-saving win and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 169", a Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this Super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", a SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a reach miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 198", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

Next, the contents of the 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(a). FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2. The 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when a special probability state or time saving state is set, and each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the set game state, the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this fifth control example, a high probability state (probability change state) of normal symbols is always set after the end of a jackpot game. The high probability state of normal symbols that has been set is configured to continue until a time-saving end condition is met. In this fifth control example, the time-saving end conditions are a first time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times that special symbol variations have been executed since the high probability state of normal symbols was set reaches a predetermined number, and a second time-saving end condition that is met when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed while the high probability state of normal symbols is set. When either of the time-saving end conditions is met, a transition is made from the high probability state of normal symbols to the low probability state of normal symbols.

The number of times the special pattern variation is executed (time-saving times), which is set as the first time-saving end condition, is varied depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if jackpot A5 or B5 is set as the type of jackpot, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches 60 (time-saving times 60), if jackpot C5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches 56 (time-saving times 56), and if jackpot D5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches 65 (time-saving times 65).

In addition, in this fifth control example, in some cases where the special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot (miss), a time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) can be set (time-saving winning is possible), and the first time-saving end condition is made different depending on the time-saving type that is set when the time-saving win is won. For example, when time-saving type A is set, the first time-saving end condition is met (time-saving number of times 10,000) when the special pattern fluctuation has been performed 10,000 times, and when time-saving type B is set, the first time-saving end condition is met (time-saving number of times 100) when the special pattern fluctuation has been performed 100 times.

Even when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, different variation patterns are selected depending on the game state and time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute a variation presentation that corresponds to the set game state and time-saving type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), when the time-saving type is "time-saving after jackpot", that is, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set based on winning a jackpot, during the period when the number of special symbol variations is "1 to 60", regardless of the type of special symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time of "15 seconds" (middle variation) is selected for a winning lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1. Also, for a losing lottery result (win/lose judgment result), a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" (short variation) is specified for the range of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 value of "0 to 189", and a variation pattern with a variation time of "15 seconds" (middle variation) is specified for the range of "190 to 198".

In addition, during the period when the number of special symbol changes is between 61 and 65, a change pattern (special change) with a change time of "5 seconds" is specified, regardless of the type of special symbol, the lottery result, or the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1.

Here, the period when the number of times the special symbol changes is "61 to 65 times" is referenced when the jackpot type is set to jackpot D5, that is, when a 5-spin time-saving state is set after the high probability state ends. During this time-saving state, the preparation time (see Figure 239) is performed, and a constant variable time (5 seconds) is always set regardless of the win/loss judgment result. Therefore, since the entire preparation time period can be fixed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the remaining time until the pull-back mode is set.

The display screen during preparation time has been described above with reference to FIG. 239, but in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 239, it may be configured to be able to notify the remaining period (number of seconds) of preparation time. For example, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired meets the conditions for ending preparation time (time-saving state), it is good to configure it so that the display screen displays the remaining number of times that special symbols can be changed during the time-saving state plus 5 seconds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner when preparation time ends and the pull-back mode is set.

Furthermore, if the remaining preparation time is configured to be notifiable, it may be configured to execute an effect that can suggest to the player in advance the period of the notified remaining time that corresponds to the final change of the special symbol during the time-saving state, that is, the period during which it is confirmed that the acquired reserved special symbol 2 will not be consumed again during the time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the period during which the final change of the special symbol will be executed during the preparation time.

On the other hand, when the set time-saving type is "Time-saving A" and the pattern type (special pattern type) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern), regardless of the number of changes (number of special pattern changes), the lottery result (special pattern lottery result), and the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1, a change pattern with a change time of "20 seconds" (long change) is specified. When the pattern type is special pattern 2 (second special pattern), during the period when the number of special pattern changes is "1 to 99 times", a change pattern with a change time of "15 seconds" (middle change) is selected for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the change type selection counter CS1. Also, for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a loss, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is specified for the acquired change type selection counter CS1 value range of "0 to 189", and a change pattern with a change time of "15 seconds" (middle change) is specified for the range of "190 to 198". And for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "100 times", a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. Furthermore, for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "101 times to 200 times", a fluctuation pattern (ultra-short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "2 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "201 times to 10,000 times", a fluctuation pattern (special short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "0.5 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

In addition, when the set time-saving type is "Time-saving B" and the pattern type (special pattern type) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern), a "20-second" change pattern (long change) is specified regardless of the change count (special pattern change count), the lottery result (special pattern lottery result), and the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1. In addition, when the pattern type is special pattern 2 (second special pattern), during the period when the special pattern change count is "1 to 99 times," a "15-second" change pattern (middle change) is selected for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the change type selection counter CS1. In addition, for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a loss, a "5-second" change pattern (short change) is specified for the acquired change type selection counter CS1 value range of "0 to 189," and a "15-second" change pattern (middle change) is specified for the range of "190 to 198." And when the number of times the special symbol changes is "100 times," a change pattern (special change) with a change time of "10 seconds" is specified, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) or the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1.

As described above, in this fifth control example, when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery (when the time-saving state is set without playing the jackpot), the change pattern is selected with the same content until the special pattern change is executed 100 times, regardless of the type of time-saving state that is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the type of time-saving state that is set based on the change pattern of the special pattern change executed during the time-saving state. Furthermore, for the 100th special pattern change, a change pattern with a change time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. Here, in this fifth control example, when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving type can be set to time-saving A or time-saving B, and when time-saving A is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and when time-saving B is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.

When the time-saving state is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, the fluctuation period of the 100th special pattern fluctuation is used to execute a performance (continuation performance) to indicate whether the time-saving state will end (whether the time-saving type is time-saving type A or time-saving type B). In other words, no matter which type of time-saving is set and no matter what the lottery result of the fluctuation is, a fluctuation pattern of a fixed number of seconds (10 seconds) is selected, making it easier to execute the continuation performance.

When time-saving A is set, the time-saving state will continue until a maximum of 10,000 special symbol lotteries have been performed, but since a low probability state for special symbols is set during the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, in which it is easier to perform a special symbol lottery than in the normal state, there are cases where special symbol lotteries continue to be performed without winning a jackpot. In this case, during the time-saving state, it is possible to frequently enter game balls into the second ball entrance 640 by playing from the right and win prize balls, so it is unlikely that a situation will occur in which the player's balls are significantly reduced, but there is a risk that the time until the next jackpot is extended, and a player with a limited playing time will be forced to give up playing during the time-saving state.

Therefore, in this fifth control example, the more times the special pattern lotteries are executed during the time-saving state, the more likely it is that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time will be selected. This configuration can improve the time efficiency of play when many special pattern lotteries are executed during the time-saving state without winning a jackpot. In addition, since the system is configured so that the shortened variation time is less likely to be selected during the period from when the time-saving state is set until a predetermined number (100) of special pattern lotteries are executed, it can be prevented that multiple jackpot games are executed in a short period of time, resulting in an excessive number of prize balls being provided to the player in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 243, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Note that the configuration of the second winning random number table 202c is the same as that of the first control example described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving type selection counter CC1 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this control example, the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is used to select the time-saving type when a time-saving win is won, by referring to the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(b).

Figure 248 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. In this time-saving type selection 5 table 202df, different time-saving types are defined for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time-saving type "time-saving A" is defined for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range "0 to 89", and the time-saving type "time-saving B" is defined for the range "90 to 99".

Here, when "time-saving A" is set as the time-saving type, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10,000, and when "time-saving B" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100. In other words, time-saving A is a time-saving state with 10,000 time-saving times, and time-saving B is a time-saving state with 100 time-saving times.

Returning to Fig. 242, we will continue the explanation. ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 243. Here, with reference to Fig. 244(a), we will explain the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example. Fig. 244(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 244(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has at least the first win random number 5 table 202da, the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db, the second win random number 5 table 202dc, the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection table 202d, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 243, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 242, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 243, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a probability-change counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z. Note that the contents of the above-mentioned storage areas, counters, and flags are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be explained. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(a)) in that the normal special chart 2 performance selection table 222b, the special chance performance selection table 222c, the continuous notice execution selection table 222d, the V notification execution selection table 222e, and the button operation performance selection table 222f have been deleted, and the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same symbols are used for the same elements, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The pullback mode selection table 222da is a data table referenced when selecting a mode type in the pullback mode, which is a presentation mode executed in response to a game state (normal state, second special probability state) that is set when a termination condition (time-saving termination condition) that terminates the high probability state of the normal pattern is satisfied while the special probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set. Four types of mode types (backgrounds) are specified in response to the number of reserved special patterns 2 (reserved memory number of second special patterns) when the time-saving termination condition is satisfied in the special probability state, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, the presence or absence of a jackpot in the reserved pattern (in the special pattern 2 reserved pattern), the presence or absence of a time-saving win in the reserved pattern (in the special pattern 2 reserved pattern), and the value of the presentation counter 223f.

Specifically, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is "4", that is, the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 is acquired, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is "4", and the reserved jackpot is "yes", regardless of whether or not the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode A" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49", and "mode B" is specified for the range of "50 to 99". Also, if the reserved jackpot is "no" and the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "mode A" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". If the reserved jackpot has "no" and the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", "mode C" is specified for the range of "20 to 59", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "60 to 99".

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", that is, the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is "0", and there is a jackpot in the reserved lottery, "Mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 59", and "Mode C" is specified for the range of "60 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved lottery. If there is no jackpot in the reserved lottery, "Mode C" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "Mode B" is specified for the range of "80 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved lottery.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1 to 3", that is, when the upper limit number of reserved special figures 2 has not been acquired, regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db, if there is a jackpot in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", "mode C" is specified for the range of "20 to 59", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "60 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved jackpot. If there is no jackpot in the reserved jackpot, if there is a time-saving win in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "50 to 99". If there is no time-saving win in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "20 to 99".

The detailed contents have been described above with reference to FIG. 240(b), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the four types of mode types (mode A to mode D) selected with reference to the pull-back mode selection table 222da are specified so that they have different expectations of granting a bonus to the player, with mode A being the most advantageous mode type to the player (highest expectation of granting a bonus (jackpot, time-saving win) during pull-back mode), mode B being the next most advantageous mode type, followed by mode C and mode D, in that order, and the contents of the pull-back mode selection table 222da are specified so that each mode type is selected so that the expectation of granting a bonus decreases in that order.

Furthermore, the mode type selected is configured to vary greatly depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the special bonus state ends. If the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the special bonus state ends is not the upper limit number, the mode type that is most advantageous to the player (mode A) is not selected (is less likely to be selected), regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db or the results of the pre-reading of the reserved special charts 2 (whether or not there is a jackpot or time-saving win).

By configuring it in this way, the player can be encouraged to actively play from the right so that the number of reserved special symbols 2 reaches the upper limit in an attempt to predict the result of the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the pull-back mode.

The suggestion mode selection table 222db is a data table that is referenced when selecting the suggestion mode to be displayed in the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode, and different types of suggestion modes are defined corresponding to the set mode type, the lottery result of the variation, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Next, referring to FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, a special symbol change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a slave state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h, a time-saving counter 223da, a time-saving lottery count counter 223db, a mode type storage area 223dc, a long time-saving flag 223dd, an initial setting flag 223de, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The contents of the command memory area 223a, the winning information storage area 223b, the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, the special symbol change start flag 223d, the stop type selection flag 223e, the performance counter 223f, the slave state setting area 223g, and the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h are the same as those of the first control example described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving counter 223da is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a big win game, or after the display of the stopped special symbol variation that won the time-saving state). When the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223da becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has been made to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols is determined based on the value of the time-saving counter 223da.

The time-saving lottery count counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the normal state, among the second special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, second probability variable state), i.e., the number of second special symbol lotteries that can win the time-saving lottery, and its value is set based on the number of reserved special symbols 2 acquired when the probability state of the normal symbol shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state, and the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) that is set when the normal symbol shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Specifically, when a state command is received indicating a transition from a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) of a normal pattern to a normal state (S9102: No in FIG. 264), or when a state command is received indicating a transition from a high probability state to a second high probability state (S9402: Yes in FIG. 267), the number of times that the second special pattern lottery will be performed (or may be performed) during the normal state is specified based on the acquired reserved special pattern 2, and the value indicating the specified number is set as the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db. The value is then referenced when selecting the mode type of the pullback mode by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da.

In addition, when the second special pattern lottery is executed during the pull-back mode, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db is read out, and if it is determined that a value greater than 1 is set, the value is decremented by 1 each time the second special pattern lottery is executed (see S9607 in FIG. 269).

In other words, in this fifth control example, when the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed after the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same type of presentation is executed regardless of the set game state. In other words, the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is the normal state in which a special symbol lottery that may result in a time-saving win is executed, and the second probability state in which a special symbol lottery that may not result in a time-saving win is executed, so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the game state is in which a time-saving win may be displayed as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery being executed. By configuring in this way, even if the second probability state in which a special symbol lottery that may not result in a time-saving win is executed is set, the player can play while hoping for a time-saving win.

Furthermore, the number of times a special symbol lottery that may actually win the time-saving feature is executed is determined, and the mode type of the pull-back mode can be selected based on the determination result. By configuring it in this way, while the same type (pull-back mode) of presentation is executed in the normal state where a special symbol lottery that may win the time-saving feature is executed and the second probability variable state where a special symbol lottery that may not win the time-saving feature is executed, it is possible to provide an element (mode type) that allows the player to predict which game state is set, so that a player who wants to quickly determine whether the currently set game state is one that may win the time-saving feature can focus on the content of the presentation being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The mode type storage area 223dc is a storage area for storing the mode type selected by referring to the pull-back mode selection table 222da. The information (mode type) stored in this mode type storage area 223dc is read out when determining the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the pull-back mode. Then, when the pull-back mode ends, the stored information is cleared.

The long time-saving flag 223dd is a flag for indicating that a long-term (10,000 times of special pattern fluctuation) time-saving state has been set, and is set to ON when a long-term time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A") is set, and is set to OFF when the time-saving state ends. The setting status of this long time-saving flag 223dd is referenced when determining the display mode for indicating the remaining number of time-savings (remaining period of the high probability state of normal patterns). Specifically, when determining the special pattern 2 performance mode corresponding to the second special pattern fluctuation executed during the time-saving state (S9613 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269), and if the long time-saving flag 223dd is not set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269: No), a display command is set to subtract and display the remaining number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (S9614 in FIG. 269).

On the other hand, if the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to on (S9615 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269). If it is determined that the value is not less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269: No), then as shown in FIG. 238(a), "infinite" is displayed in the small display area Dm7, and the process of subtracting and displaying the remaining number of time-saving plays is skipped. If it is determined that the value is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269: Yes), the presentation mode for switching the display mode of the small display area Dm7 from "infinite" to "149" is determined (S9617 in FIG. 269).

The initial setting flag 223de is a flag for indicating that the first second special pattern drawing has been performed among the second special pattern drawing performed during the pull-back mode, and is set on after the special pattern 2 presentation mode corresponding to the first second special pattern change performed during the pull-back mode has been determined (see S9605 in FIG. 269). It is referenced when setting the special pattern 2 presentation mode corresponding to the second special pattern change performed during the pull-back mode, and if it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is set on (S9602 in FIG. 269: Yes), the process for setting the first special pattern 2 presentation mode (S9603, S9604 in FIG. 269) is skipped.

<Regarding the control process in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, the contents of various control processes in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 252 to Fig. 270. This fifth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned first control example in that a part of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed, but the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Fig. 252 to Fig. 261, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this fifth control example will be described. In this fifth control example, in comparison with the first control example described above, instead of the special symbol change process (see S104 in Fig. 157), the special symbol change process 5 (see S251 in Fig. 253) is performed instead of the special symbol big win determination process (S208 in Fig. 158), instead of the special symbol change pattern selection process (S209 in Fig. 159), the special symbol change pattern selection process 5 (S252 in Fig. 255), instead of the update process (S221 in Fig. 160), the update process 5 (S253 in Fig. 256), instead of the start winning process (S105 in Fig. 161), the start winning process 5 (S195 in Fig. 258). The difference is that pre-reading process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) is executed instead of pre-reading process (S613 in FIG. 162), jackpot control process 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) is executed instead of jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 168), and jackpot end process 5 (see S8403 in FIG. 261) is executed instead of jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170), but otherwise it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of special pattern change process 5 (S104 in FIG. 252) will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern change process 5 (S104). This special pattern change process 5 (S104) differs from the above-mentioned special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) in that part of the processing executed when starting the special pattern change and part of the processing executed when the change time for the special pattern change has elapsed have been changed.

Specifically, when special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the same processes of S201 to S207 and S210 to S213 as those of the special symbol variation process described above (see S104 in FIG. 157) are executed. Then, when the process of S207 or the process of S213 is completed, special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, and then special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) is executed, and this process ends.

If it is determined that the time for the special symbol change has elapsed (S214: Yes), the process of S216 to S220 is executed, which is the same as the special symbol change process described above (see S104 in FIG. 157), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S217: No), update process 5 is executed (S253), and then time-saving setting process 5 is executed (S254), and the process proceeds to S220.

Next, the processing contents of special pattern determination process 5 (S251) will be explained with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern determination process 5 (S251). This special pattern determination process 5 (S251) is executed in place of the special pattern jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, and in addition to determining the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, a determination of whether or not a time-saving win has occurred (time-saving lottery process 5) is executed.

When the special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, first, data on the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S8001), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 5 table 202da (S8002), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot (S8004), and the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8005), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S8003: No), the time-saving lottery process 5 is executed (S8006), and this process ends.

Here, time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is a process for executing a judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won in the current special pattern lottery. In other words, in this fifth control example, in the special pattern lottery, a judgment of whether or not the jackpot has been won is first executed (S8003), and if a jackpot has been won, the special pattern lottery is ended without executing a judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, and the judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won is executed only if a jackpot has not been won. By configuring it in this way, multiple benefits (a jackpot win for a special pattern, a time-saving lottery win) are not awarded to a player in one special pattern lottery, so it is possible to prevent the player from being given an overly advantageous game.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006). In this time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006), it is determined whether the current game situation is a game situation in which a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) can be executed, and if it is determined that it can be executed, a process is performed to execute the time-saving winning judgment.

When the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is executed, it is first determined whether the current target (lottery target) is special symbol 2 (second special symbol) (S8101). If it is determined that it is special symbol 2 (S8101; Yes), the current game status stored in the game status storage area is read (S8102), and it is determined whether the game status read is the normal status (S8103).

In the process of S8103, if it is determined that the state is normal (S8103: Yes), the lottery result (time-saving win determination result) is obtained based on the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de (S8104), and it is determined whether or not the time-saving win has occurred (S8105). If it is determined that the time-saving win has occurred (S8105: Yes), the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained win type counter (first win type counter C2) (S8106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the current target is not Special Pattern 2 (it is the first special pattern) (S8101: No), if it is determined in the process of S8103 that the current game state is not the normal state (S8103: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8105 that the time-saving win has not been won (S8105: No), the losing pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8107), and this process ends.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the execution conditions for executing a time-saving winning determination in a special pattern lottery are that the special pattern lottery has not resulted in a jackpot win, that it is the second special pattern lottery, and that the normal state is set. In this way, by setting conditions for executing a time-saving winning determination, it is possible to create cases where only a jackpot determination is executed, and cases where both a jackpot determination and a time-saving winning determination are executed, depending on the execution status of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to vary the probability that a player will be granted a special benefit (jackpot or time-saving) in one special pattern lottery depending on the situation.

In addition, in this fifth control example, a game state such as a high probability state or a time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is configured to end and transition to the normal state when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60 times). In other words, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, it is possible to make it easier to meet the execution conditions for the time-saving winning judgment. Therefore, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, it is possible to increase the probability that a player will be granted a privilege (jackpot or time-saving) in one special pattern lottery compared to before the predetermined number of times it was executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an extreme decrease in the motivation of players who have not won a jackpot for a predetermined period of time.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252). In this special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252), first, in the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253), it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether a jackpot of the special symbol is set (S8201). In the processing of S8201, if it is determined that a jackpot of the special symbol is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd and the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 (S8202). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203), and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db corresponding to the current game state (normal state, second probability variable state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S8204).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db read in the process of S8204 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stopping pattern of the special symbol is set (S8207), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of a special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S8209), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the time-saving lottery result (time-saving winning determination result) is a time-saving winning (S8209), and if it is determined that the time-saving winning is a win (S8209: Yes), the time-saving type is determined by referring to the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (S8210), and the process proceeds to S8203. Also, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that the time-saving winning is not a win (S8209: No), the process skips S8210 and proceeds to S8203.

Next, the processing contents of update process 5 (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 5 (S253). In this update process 5 (S253), the same processing as the update process described above (see S221 in FIG. 160) is executed, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 5 (S254) will be described with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 5 (S254). In this time-saving setting process 5 (S254), a process for setting the time-saving state when the time-saving winning decision is made is executed. When the time-saving setting process 5 (S254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a time-saving winning (S8351), and if it is determined that the time-saving winning is made (S8351: Yes), a value corresponding to the determined time-saving type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S8352), the time-saving state is set in the game state storage area (S8353), and a state command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the time-saving type game state (information indicating the time-saving state and information indicating the set time-saving type) is set (S8354), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8351 that the time-saving option has not been won (S8351: No), this process ends.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the time-saving state is set at different times depending on the time-saving winning trigger. If the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern stops changing, and if the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game ends, not when the special pattern stops changing.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be varied, providing players with a game that they will not tire of.

Next, the processing contents of start winning process 5 (S195) will be explained with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start winning process 5 (S195). This start winning process 5 (S195) differs from the start winning process described above (see S105 in FIG. 161) only in that the value of time-saving type selection counter CC1 is added to the types of counter values stored in each special pattern reserved ball storage area (S651, S652) and in that pre-read process 5 (S653) is executed; the processing contents are otherwise the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of pre-reading process 5 (S653) will be explained with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of pre-reading process 5 (S653). When this pre-reading process 5 (S653) is executed, first, the various counter values, namely the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S750). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-reading reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the time when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S751), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S703 is that it is not a jackpot (S703: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a time-saving win (S752), and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving win (S752: No), a winning command is set that includes information that can identify a miss win and a fluctuation pattern based on the various counter values that have been read (S705), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S752 that a time-saving win has been made (S752: Yes), it is determined whether the pending fluctuation is in a normal state (S753), and if it is determined that it is in a normal state (S753: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the time-saving win and the fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S754), and this processing ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S704, S705, or S754 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the various counter values read out by the processing of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which it changes the display mode of the reserved balls (for example, by changing the color of the reserved balls to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or it displays a preview pattern or the like before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning/losing judgment (whether or not they have won the jackpot or the time-saving winning option).

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot or time-saving win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot or time-saving win has occurred, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation of a jackpot win even with special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, the processing contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894). This jackpot control process 5 (S1894) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in that when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the process to be executed is to set the opening of a specific winning port (S8401) and set a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S8402), and when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (S1909: Yes), jackpot end process 5 (S8403) is executed. Since the rest of the process is the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) executed in the jackpot control processing 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403). When this jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) is executed, the currently executing jackpot type is identified (S8501), the value (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the special counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h (S8502), the game status corresponding to the value of the special counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h is set in the game status storage area (S8503), the value of the special counter 203i that has been set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and the state command indicating the game status are set (S8504), the jackpot flag is set to OFF (S8505), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 262 to Fig. 270, the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. In this fifth control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the command determination process (see S4112 in Fig. 175) is replaced by a command determination process 5 (S4182 in Fig. 262), the state command reception process (see S4202 in Fig. 176) is replaced by a state command reception process 5 (S4282 in Fig. 263), the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in Fig. 183) is replaced by a special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in Fig. 184), and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in Fig. 269) is executed instead of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4983 in Fig. 268), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

Figure 262 is a flowchart showing command determination process 5 (S4182 in Figure 262). As shown in Figure 262, command determination process 5 (S4182 in Figure 262) differs from the command determination process described above (see S4112 in Figure 175) in that it replaces status command reception process with status command reception process 5 (S4282), but is otherwise the same.

Figure 263 is a flowchart showing status command reception process 5 (S4282). As shown in Figure 263, in this status command reception process 5 (S4282), a process is executed to determine the newly set game state based on the status command received from the main control device 110, and to set various effects based on the determination result.

In state command reception process 5 (S4282), it is first determined whether there has been a change in the game state (S9001). If it is determined that there has been no change in the game state (S9001: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9001 that there has been a change in the game state (S9001: Yes), the information set in the slave state setting area 223g is shifted, and the game state corresponding to the command currently received from the master control device 110 is set in the slave state setting area 223g (S9002).

Next, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: Yes), a normal state presentation setting process is executed (S9004), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the normal state presentation setting process (S9004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9003 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: No), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the process of S9005, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005: Yes), the time-saving state presentation setting process is executed (S906), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005: No), the process proceeds to S9007.

In the process of S9007, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007: Yes), the second high probability state presentation setting process is executed (S9008), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9007 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007: No), the process proceeds to S9009.

In the process of S9009, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the high probability state (S9009). If it is determined that the command indicates a change to the high probability state (S9009: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203da (S9010), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9009 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the high probability state (S9009: No), this process ends as it is.

Figure 264 is a flow chart showing the normal state presentation setting process (S9004). This normal state presentation setting process (S9004) is executed when a state command indicating the normal state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Figure 263). In this normal state presentation setting process (S9004), as shown in Figure 264, different presentation modes are set depending on whether the game state before the normal state was set was the second high probability state or not. If the game state is not the second high probability state, that is, if it is determined that the game state has transitioned from the high probability state or the time-saving state to the normal state, a pull-back mode setting process is executed to set the presentation mode corresponding to the pull-back mode (pull-back zone).

In the normal state presentation setting process (S9004), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9101). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9101 is the second high probability state (S9102). If it is determined that the game state before the change is the second high probability state (S9102: Yes), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9102 that the game state before the change read is not the second high probability state (S9104: No), the pullback mode setting process is executed (S9104), and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the pullback mode setting process (S9104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 265.

Figure 265 is a flowchart showing the pull-back mode setting process (S9104). In this pull-back mode setting process (S9104), as shown in Figure 265, various processes are executed to set display commands for showing the display mode (presentation mode) related to the presentation screen shown in Figure 237.

In the pullback mode setting process (S9104), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9201). Next, it is determined whether there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol (S9202). If it is determined that there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol (S9202: Yes), the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the normal state is identified (S9203). Next, the value of the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the normal state identified in the process of S9203 is set in the time-saving lottery count counter 223db (S9204).

Next, using the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, and the reserved special symbol 2 information, the mode type is determined by referring to the pull-back mode selection table 222da (see FIG. 250) (S9205), the mode type determined in the process of S9205 is stored in the mode type storage area 223dc (S9206), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9202 that there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol (S9202: No), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9207), and this process ends.

Fig. 266 is a flow chart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006). This time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006) is executed when a state command indicating the time-saving state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Fig. 263). In this time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006), as shown in Fig. 266, if the game state before the time-saving state is set is a special state, a process is executed to set the display mode (presentation mode) corresponding to the preparation time (see Fig. 239), and if it is a normal state, a process is executed to set the display mode to indicate that the time-saving state has been entered or the display mode (presentation mode) corresponding to the extended time corresponding to the long time-saving state (see Fig. 238).

In the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006), first, the game state before the change is executed from the slave state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9301 is a high probability state (S9302). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a high probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command is set to show the corresponding presentation mode during the preparation time (S9303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change read in the processing of S9301 is not a special state (S9302: No), it is determined whether the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304). If it is determined that the game state before the change is not a normal state (S9304: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set as the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305), and it is determined whether the type of time-saving time set this time is time-saving A (S9306).

In the process of S9306, if it is determined that the time-saving type to be set this time is time-saving A (S9306: Yes), the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9307), a command is set to indicate the presentation mode corresponding to the extended time (S9308), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving type to be set this time is not time-saving A (S9306: No), this process ends.

Figure 267 is a flowchart showing the second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008). This second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008) is executed when a state command indicating the second high probability state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Figure 263). In this second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008), as shown in Figure 267, different presentation modes are set depending on whether the game state before the second high probability state is set is a high probability state or not, and if it is a high probability state, a pull-back mode setting process is executed to set a presentation mode corresponding to the pull-back mode (pull-back zone).

In the second probability variable state presentation setting process (S9008), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9401). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9401 is a probability variable state (S9402). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a probability variable state (S9402: Yes), the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 265) is executed (S9403), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9402 that the game state before the change is not a probability variable state (S9402: No), this process is terminated.

Figure 268 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983). In this special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983), a process is executed to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol variation to be executed.

In the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9502), a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S9503), and the process proceeds to S9504. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9501 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S9501: No), the processes of S9502 to S9503 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9504. In the process of S9504, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9504), and this process ends.

Figure 269 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987). In this special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987), as shown in Figure 269, processing is executed to set various presentation modes depending on the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed.

In the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987), first, it is determined whether the current game state is normal or the second special symbol state (S9601). If it is determined that the current game state is normal or the second special symbol state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the initial setting flag 223de is on (S9602). If it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is not on (S9602: No), the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the pullback zone is determined based on the value of the time-saving drawing count counter 223db (S9603), and the presentation mode corresponding to the determined number of times the second special symbol will be drawn is determined (S9604).

Next, the initial setting flag 223de is set to ON (S9605), and the process proceeds to S9606. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9602 that the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602: Yes), the process skips the processes of S9603 to S9605 and proceeds to S9606.

In the process of S9606, the suggested mode is determined by referring to the suggested mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) (S9606). Next, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is decremented by 1 (S9607), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after the decrement is 0 (S9608). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after the decrement is 0 (S9608: Yes), the presentation mode corresponding to the final fluctuation of the pullback zone is determined (S9609), and the initial setting flag 223de is set to OFF (S9610). Then, a display command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S9611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9608 that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after subtraction is not 0 (S9608: No), the processes of S9609 to S9610 are skipped, the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9601 that the game is not in the normal state or the second probability bonus state (S9601: No), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9612). Next, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S9613). If it is determined that the current game state is not in the time-saving state, that is, if it is in the probability bonus state (S9613: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S9614), a chance time performance setting process is executed (S9619), the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the chance time performance setting process (S9619) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9613 that the time-saving state is in effect (S9613: Yes), it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9615). If it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223dd is not on (S9615: No), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S9614. On the other hand, if it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9615: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616).

If it is determined in the process of S9616 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is determined (S9617), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S9614. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9616 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not less than 150 (S9616: No), a display command is set indicating that the time-saving state will continue until the next big win (S9618), and the process proceeds to the chance time presentation setting process (S9619).

Figure 270 is a flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process (S9619). This chance time performance setting process (S9619) is a process for setting the performance mode of the variable performance executed when a high probability state for normal symbols is set in the special symbol 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in Figure 269), and as shown in Figure 270, a process for updating the display mode of the remaining period display is executed.

In the chance time performance setting process (S9619), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da subtracted in the process of S9612 of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is 0 (S9701). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da after subtraction is 0 (S9701: Yes), a performance mode including a guidance mode for accumulating special chart 2 reserves is determined (S9702), and then it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9703).

If it is determined in the process of S9703 that the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9703: Yes), the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to off (S9704), the presentation mode corresponding to the variable pattern command is determined (S9705), and this process ends. On the other hand, if in the process of S9701 the value of the time-saving counter 223da after subtraction is not 0 (S9701: No), or in the process of S9703 it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223db is not on (S9703: No), the process of S9705 described above is executed, and this process ends.

<First Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Next, the first modified example of the fifth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 271 to FIG. 277. In the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning is possible only in the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. In contrast, the first modified example is different in that the time-saving winning is possible in the first special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. The other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) for normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols is executed in the normal state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set, in addition to the jackpot lottery, the time-saving lottery is also executed. This makes it possible for a player who has experienced a game during a high probability state for normal symbols (advantageous game) that is advantageous to the player to execute a game (pull-back game) that is more likely to return to advantageous game after the advantageous game ends.

However, in the fifth control example described above, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is executed, the player cannot benefit from the time-saving lottery, resulting in a problem that the player may become bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

In contrast, this first variant is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery even in the first special pattern lottery that is executed in the normal state, making it easier for players to benefit from the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special symbol lottery is configured to tend to have a longer period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period) than the high probability state (probable bonus state, time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the player is configured to be granted a privilege that makes it easier for the normal symbol high probability period to continue until the next jackpot is won.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, if a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short-term time-saving state (for example, one time of time-saving) can be set, and during the period in which this short-term time-saving state is set (normal symbol high probability period), a game can be played to acquire the right to play the second special symbol lottery. In other words, in this first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above is configured to be played without winning a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily play the second special symbol lottery in the normal state without winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery that is played in the normal state.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in this first modified example, multiple variation times can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. In this first modified example, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed frozen in a display mode (time-saving symbol) for indicating the time-saving win after a predetermined variation time has changed, and then the time-saving state (one time of time-saving) is set, and the time-saving state continues until the special symbol variation executed next is displayed frozen.

In other words, the length of time that the time-saving state lasts is determined according to the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state. Therefore, the longer the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state, the easier it is to acquire many reserved special symbols 2 during the time-saving state, making it a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

<About the performance content of the first modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to Figures 271 to 273, we will explain the characteristic presentation content executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fifth control example.

First, in the fifth control example described above, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues after the end of the jackpot game (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) are set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the 60th special symbol change stops after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has changed 60 times), and during the normal symbol high probability period, it is possible to acquire the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved). When the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end and the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, a time-saving judgment is executed only if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 lottery) executed based on the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the normal symbol high probability period is not a jackpot win, and if the time-saving state is won by the time-saving judgment, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

Note that special symbol 2 reservation means that when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is already changing, the right to select the second special symbol is reserved, and up to a maximum of four selection rights are reserved (reserved memory).

In the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, so it is more difficult to win the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) compared to the time-saving state, and it is difficult to play a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) in which the electric device 640a is in the open state, so it is configured to be difficult to get a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In the normal state, the special symbol 2 lottery is only executed if, as described above, a special symbol 2 reservation is obtained during the normal symbol high probability period set after the end of the jackpot game, and the normal state is set after the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end, and a special symbol 2 reservation exists.

Therefore, in order to set a state (e.g., time-saving state) that is more favorable than the normal state, a player must win the jackpot at least once. A player who does not win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery), which is executed when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, will end up playing in the unfavorable normal state for a long period of time, which could reduce the player's motivation to play.

In contrast, in the first variant of the fifth control example, in the normal state, a time-saving judgment is performed even if the result of the special symbol 1 lottery is not a jackpot win, and if a time-saving win is found, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period from when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes once until the special symbol stops changing), and it is possible to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 during the time-saving state; in other words, it is configured so that it is possible to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 even if the jackpot win is not won, which is different from the fifth control example.

Specifically, if the result of the special symbol 1 lottery is not a big win, a time-saving judgment is executed, and the probability of winning the time-saving in this case is set to a lower probability than the probability of winning the time-saving with the second special symbol (for example, the probability of winning the time-saving with the second special symbol is 1/6, and the probability of winning the time-saving with the first special symbol is 1/200). In addition, the number of time-saving times granted when the time-saving with the first special symbol is won (the period during which the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) continues) is set to a number less than when the time-saving with the second special symbol is won (for example, when the time-saving with the second special symbol is won, the period during which the special symbol changes 10,000 times and the 10,000th time the special symbol changes and stops, and when the time-saving with the first special symbol is won, the period during which the special symbol changes once and the special symbol changes and stops changing).

Here, if the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is, for example, 1/200, even if the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired up to the upper limit number (up to 4 in the embodiment) during the normal pattern high probability period, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery at least once in four special pattern 2 lotteries is about 2%, and when the special pattern high probability period and normal pattern high probability period end and the normal state is set, the player hardly expects that the advantageous state will be set again by winning the time-saving lottery in the special pattern 2 lottery based on the special pattern 2 reserved, so it is difficult to make the player think that the special pattern 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period, and there is a risk that the player will not play with enthusiasm to win the special pattern 2 reserved until the last moment when the normal pattern high probability period ends.

Therefore, it is desirable that the probability of winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state is set to a probability (for example, 1/6) that can be fully expected to win the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery based on the acquired special drawing 2 reserves when the maximum number of special drawing 2 reserves (up to 4 in this embodiment) are acquired during the normal drawing high probability period. By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery at least once in four special drawing 2 lotteries is about 50%, and even if the special drawing high probability period and normal drawing high probability period end and the normal state is set, it is possible to make the player expect that the advantageous state will be set again by winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery based on the special drawing 2 reserves, and by making the player think that the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period, the player can be motivated to play in order to win as many special drawing 2 reserves as possible until the last moment when the normal drawing high probability period ends.

In contrast, if the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the first special symbol drawing (special symbol 1 drawing) during the normal state is set to the same probability as the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special symbol 2 drawing during the normal state, or set to a higher probability than the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special symbol 2 drawing, there is a risk that the time-saving feature will be won frequently in the normal state, making it easier for the time-saving feature to be set, which may give an excessive advantage to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special drawing 1 during the normal state is set lower than the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special drawing 2 during the normal state.

Moreover, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the time-saving feature is selected in the special pattern 1 lottery, the time-saving feature is set to one time, i.e., the special pattern is changed once, and the time-saving feature is set for the period until the special pattern stops changing.

For example, if the time-saving number of times is granted two or more times, if the player plays correctly, it is possible to obtain the maximum number of reserved special charts 2. However, in this configuration, if the time-saving number is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the player can obtain the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 every time. Therefore, the ease of winning the time-saving number is always constant, and there is a risk that the play during the time-saving state, which is set based on winning the time-saving number in the special chart 1 lottery, will become monotonous, in which the player simply obtains the maximum number of reserved special charts 2.

In contrast, if the number of time-saving turns granted when the time-saving turn is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is 1, it is possible to vary the number of lottery rights for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) that a player can obtain during the time-saving state by combining the special symbol change time when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the normal symbol change time, or the opening pattern of the electric roler 640a that is opened as a bonus for winning the normal symbol lottery. This makes it possible to vary the ease of winning the time-saving turn without varying the probability of winning the time-saving turn depending on the number of special symbol 2 reserved turns that can be obtained, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this way, the time-saving judgment is also performed for the special symbol 1 lottery during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and if the time-saving state is won, the time-saving state in which the special symbol 2 reserved can be acquired is set, so that even if the player is unable to win a jackpot for an extended period of time, they will have the opportunity to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the normal state continuing for an extended period of time that is unfavorable to the player.

As described above, in the first variant of the fifth control example, a time-saving determination is also performed during the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state, and since the game state is changed after the time-saving win, the player's playing method also changes, so it is necessary to clearly notify the player that they have won the time-saving win.

In addition, the game content differs between the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the normal state and the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the second special pattern lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) during the normal state (in the time-saving state set by winning the time-saving win in the special symbol 1 lottery, the player acquires many special symbol 2 reserves and aims to win the time-saving win in the special symbol 2 lottery during the normal state, which is executed based on the acquired special symbol 2 reserves, while in the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol 2 lottery, the player aims to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery), so that players do not get confused. It is necessary to make the display mode during the time-saving state different so that players can easily understand which special symbol lottery the time-saving win is based on.

Based on the above, we will explain a performance example in the first variant of this fifth control example with reference to Figures 271 to 273.

Figure 271 (a) is an example of a variable display screen when the result of the special chart 1 lottery in the normal state is a jackpot win or a time-saving win. As shown in Figure 271 (a), when the result of the special chart 1 lottery in the normal state is a jackpot win or a time-saving win, a rabbit character 801 and a treasure chest 810e are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the secondary display area Ds displays "If a 'V' comes out of the treasure chest, you've won! If a 'time' comes out, you've got the time-saving win! Open the treasure chest." In other words, when Figure 271 (a) is displayed, the player is not able to tell whether they have won a jackpot or a time-saving win.

By configuring it in this way, when the treasure chest 810e is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect that he or she will win either the jackpot or the time-saving win, and by having the player predict whether he or she will win the jackpot or the time-saving win during the period until the treasure chest 810e opens, it is possible to increase the excitement of the game.

Figure 271 (b) is an example of a display screen when the result of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is a time-saving win. In the main display area Dm, the treasure chest 810e shown in Figure 271 (a) opens, and a ball tm1 with "Time x 1" written on it appears, and the secondary display area Ds displays "GET 1 time time-saving" to notify the player that they have won the time-saving win.

If the result of the special chart 1 lottery is a jackpot win, a treasure chest 810e opens in the main display area Dm in FIG. 271(b), and a ball with the letter "V" appears from inside. The secondary display area displays "Congratulations! Jackpot!" to notify the player that they have won the jackpot.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand whether the game state that is set after the changing first special symbol stops is a jackpot game state or a time-saving state (a low probability state for special symbols, a high probability state for normal symbols).

In the embodiment, the effects in Fig. 271(a) and (b) are executed when a jackpot or time-saving win is won, but the effects in Fig. 271(a) and (b) may be executed in some cases when the result of the special drawing 1 is a miss in either case, in which case a display mode indicating a miss is displayed in Fig. 271(b) (for example, the treasure chest 810e is empty and "Sorry" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds).

In this case, the display mode of the treasure chest 810e displayed in FIG. 271(a) may be changed to indicate the likelihood of winning the jackpot or the time-saving prize (for example, when a blue treasure chest 810e is displayed, it indicates a high probability of a miss win, and when a gold treasure chest 810e is displayed, it indicates a high probability of winning either of these).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the results of the special chart 1 lottery continue to be a miss in any judgment for a long period of time, and the player becomes bored with the game because the performance is not executed.

Although details will be described later, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for displaying the number of lottery rights (special chart 1 reserve) for the first special pattern that have been acquired, and in FIG. 271(b), reserves h5 and h6 are displayed in black, and reserves h7 and h8 are displayed in white, indicating that there are special chart 1 reserves corresponding to the number of reserves displayed in black (FIG. 271(b) indicates that there are two special chart 1 reserves). In other words, the embodiment is an example of a performance that is executed when a time-saving win is won in the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state when a special chart 1 reserve exists.

Here, gaming machines are generally configured such that when an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state) is set, a shorter fluctuation time is likely to be set for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. By configuring it in this way, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is primarily executed when an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state) is set, and by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the lottery result is a miss, it is possible to prevent play in an advantageous state from becoming protracted, allowing the player to play comfortably.

However, in the first variant of this fifth control example, when there is no reserved special symbol 1 and a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), when the time-saving win is notified as shown in Figure 271 (b), since the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the player begins a game (right-hand hit game) in which he fires a game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's panel, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the second special symbol begins to change. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, the second special symbol, which is likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol, will begin to fluctuate, and when the second special symbol stops fluctuating, the time-saving state will end, making it highly likely that the player will not be able to acquire the maximum number of lottery rights for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2), which puts the player at a disadvantage.

In addition, if the configuration is such that a longer variation time is likely to be set for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol in the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving win in the special symbol 1 lottery, it becomes easier to acquire the upper limit of special symbol 2 reserves by varying the second special symbol, so there is a risk that a player may engage in dishonest play by firing game balls one at a time during play in the normal state so as not to acquire the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserve).

Therefore, if the time-saving win is won in the special chart 1 lottery when there is no special chart 1 reserved, the change in the first special pattern that won the time-saving win may be stopped without announcing that the time-saving win has been won (for example, a display may be displayed indicating that the treasure chest 810e is empty), and the next time the change in the special pattern begins based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the large second ball entrance 640, a performance during the time-saving state (see FIG. 272(a)) may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the time-saving feature is won in the special chart 1 lottery when there is no special chart 1 reserved, the player will not know whether or not he or she has won the time-saving feature, and will continue playing by putting the game ball into the first ball entry port 64 (left-handed play), making it easier to execute a change due to the first special symbol during the time-saving feature state that is set based on the time-saving feature being won in the special chart 1 lottery.

In addition, in order to change the first special symbol during the time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving lottery in the special symbol 1 drawing, a starting hole that can change the first special symbol may be provided above the second ball entry hole 640 in the right area of the face of the game machine.

Referring to Figures 272(a) and (b), we will explain the effects that are executed when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state.

Details will be given later, but in the first variant of the fifth control example, if a time-saving win occurs in the special symbol 1 lottery during normal mode, the time-saving mode is set for the period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol that won the time-saving win stops until the fluctuation of the next special symbol 1 that is executed ends.

As mentioned above, when the time-saving state is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases, and compared to the normal state, it is easier to play a normal symbol winning game in which the electric device 640a is in the open state, so it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the player can obtain the special symbol 2 reservation.

The number of reserved special symbols 2 that a player can obtain during the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be varied by the combination of the change time of the special symbols, the change time of the normal symbols, and the opening pattern of the electric device 640a when a normal symbol is hit.

For example, when the time-saving state is set, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the electric device 640a opens 1 second x 2 times as a normal symbol win, so the electric device 640a will open a maximum of 12 times, allowing the player to acquire the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) up to the maximum number of reserved memorization times (4 times in this embodiment).

On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 5 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds, and the electric device 640a opens once per second for a normal symbol, the game ball can only enter the second ball entrance 640 once at most, so the player can only obtain one reserved special symbol 2.

Then, when the special symbols stop changing and the time-saving state ends, a second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is executed based on the reserved special symbol 2 that the player acquired during the time-saving state.

In the embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus for the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is higher than the probability of winning the time-saving bonus for the first special symbol (1/6 in the embodiment), and the number of time-saving bonuses granted when the time-saving bonus is won is also higher (10,000 in the embodiment).

In other words, the more reserved special symbols 2 that are acquired during the time-saving mode, the more times the player can receive the special symbol 2 lottery, so the longer the special symbol fluctuation time when the time-saving mode is set, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, when the time-saving state is set, the time for the special symbol to change, the time for the normal symbol to change, or the opening pattern of the electric device 640a when a normal symbol is hit may be set to a fixed value.

Figure 272 (a) shows the display screen during the time-saving mode when the first special symbol that won the time-saving mode in the normal mode stops, and the change time of the next first special symbol to be executed is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role device 640a is set to 1 second x 1 time.

The first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm1, and a display indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm8 makes it easy for the player to understand which special symbol is changing.

In response to the time-saving state being set, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit right" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's face, and the secondary display area Ds displays "Hit right to accumulate reserved balls!", allowing even first-time players to play in a way that suits the game state.

In the main display area Dm, the message "Collect capsules within the time limit while charging!" is displayed in the center, and an effect (charge effect) is executed in which the rabbit character 801 acquires a capsule.

The capsule is a display to notify that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the reserved symbol in the small display area Dm9 lights up in black, one capsule is displayed. Here, the small display area Dm9 is a display area to show the number of reserved special symbols 2 that the player has acquired by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640. If there is no lottery right for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2), reserved symbols h1 to h4 are displayed in white. If the player has acquired a reserved special symbol 2, the reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black order, starting from the youngest symbol, and when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit, all reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black.

The small display area Dm10 is a display area for showing the number of lottery rights (special symbol 1 reserve) for the first special symbol that the player has acquired by inserting a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. If there is no special symbol 1 reserve, reserves h5 to h8 are displayed in white. If the player acquires a special symbol 1 reserve, reserves h5 to h8 are lit in black in ascending order, starting with reserve h5. When the player acquires the maximum number of special symbol 1 reserves (four in this embodiment), all reserves h5 to h8 are lit in black.

In other words, the example shown in FIG. 272(a) shows that one reserved special symbol 1 and one reserved special symbol 2 have been acquired. This configuration makes it easier for the player to understand the upper limit of the reserved number of each special symbol and the current reserved acquisition status of the special symbols, and when the reserved number of each special symbol has been acquired up to the upper limit, the lottery right for each special symbol is not reserved even if the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, so that the player can easily decide whether or not to continue playing to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 depending on the reserved acquisition status.

When reserved balls h1 to h3 are displayed in black in the small display area Dm9 and reserved ball h4 is displayed in black due to a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, in other words, when the maximum number of reserved special balls 2, 4, is stored, the main display area Dm displays "MAX Acquisition Completed!" to inform the player that the maximum number of reserved special balls 2 has been acquired. This configuration makes it easy for the player to understand that the maximum number of reserved special balls 2 has been acquired, which reassures the player.

The small display area Dm5 displays the remaining time until the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), that is, the remaining time of the changing special symbols, and the small display area Dm11 displays "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX". The content displayed in the small display area Dm11 corresponds to the number of reserved special symbols 2 that can be acquired during the time-saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 272(a), the change time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set to 1 second x 1 time, so as described above, the reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired up to the upper limit of 4, and therefore "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX" is displayed. In contrast, if the change time of the first special symbol is set to 5 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set to 1 second x 2 times, only one reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired at most, so "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation LOW" is displayed.

This configuration allows the player to enjoy predicting the number of reserved special symbols 2 that they can obtain during the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) from the display contents of the small display area Dm11, and when a short change time is set as the change time for special symbols, it becomes possible to have the player quickly launch the game ball, preventing the player from missing out on playing in the time-saving state due to a delayed launch of the game ball even though the time-saving state has been set.

The display of the capsule upper limit expectation level may be any display that indicates whether it is high or low; for example, the expectation level may be indicated by the number of stars.

In the embodiment, when the time-saving win is won in the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), the lottery right for the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reservation) exists, and the change of the first special pattern is executed based on the special pattern 1 reservation during the time-saving state. However, if the special pattern 1 reservation does not exist at the time of the time-saving win, the charge performance starts when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 next time and the change of either the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts. The time-saving state is set when the change of the first special pattern that won the time-saving win stops, regardless of whether the special pattern 1 reservation exists or not.

Figure 272 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the special pattern stops changing and the time-saving state ends.

The first special symbol is displayed in a static manner in the small display area Dm1, and "0 seconds remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm5, indicating that the time-saving period has ended.

In the small display area Dm9, reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black, and the words "Total 4 GET" and capsules cp1 to cp4 are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, informing the player that they have acquired four lottery rights for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved). Capsules cp1 to cp4 correspond to reserved symbols 1 to 4, respectively, and for example, as a result of determining in advance the reserved symbol information for reserved symbol h2 (the second reserved symbol 2 acquired during the charge performance) (pre-reading result), if there is a high expectation of winning the time-saving feature, capsule cp2 is displayed in a different manner (black capsule) from the other capsules.

This can heighten the player's sense of anticipation that there is a reserve within the special chart 2 reserve that has a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the central part of the main display area Dm displays "Charge ended, promotion chance zone entered!", and the secondary display area Ds displays "Chance to get "Time" during promotion chance zone!", indicating that the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) will be held after the time-saving state ends.

In addition, if you do not get a capsule during the above-mentioned charge performance, i.e. if you do not get any Special Chart 2 reserved, after the charge performance ends, you will not enter the promotion chance zone and will transition to normal mode.

In the embodiment, in the small display area Dm9 and the small display area Dm10, even if there is no special pattern 1 reserve or special pattern 2 reserve, reserves h1 to h8 are displayed in white, indicating that up to four items can be reserved in each case. However, this is not limited to this, and if there is no special pattern 1 reserve or special pattern 2 reserve, nothing may be displayed in the small display area Dm9 or the small display area Dm10, and the reserved pattern may be displayed when a special pattern reserve is obtained.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to know how many lottery rights for each special symbol they can reserve, and even if they have acquired the maximum number of reserved rights, they can continue firing game balls without realizing that they have acquired the maximum number of reserved rights.

In the embodiment, the display screen of FIG. 272(b) is displayed when the variation of the special pattern that is set to the time-saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) stops, but it is not limited to this, and the display screen of FIG. 272(b) may be displayed when the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired up to the upper limit when there is remaining time left until the variation of the special pattern stops. In this case, the display mode of the capsule changes when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the probability of winning the jackpot of the special pattern 2 reserved or the probability of winning the time-saving state may be indicated.

By configuring it in this way, a player who has acquired the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 while there is still a lot of time left for the special symbols to change can be made to expect that if they put a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, the display state of the capsule may change, making it possible for the player to continue playing by putting a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 until the last moment when the special symbols stop changing.

In the embodiment, the capsules cp1 to cp4 corresponding to reserves h1 to h4 are displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one capsule may be displayed whether one or four special symbol 2 reserves are acquired. In other words, in the promotion chance zone described below, the result of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) based on reserves 1 to 4 is notified by opening one capsule. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know how many special symbol 2 reserves they have acquired during the charge performance, and the player can enjoy the promotion chance zone performance without worrying about the number of special symbol 2 reserves they have acquired.

When configured in this way, it is desirable to prevent the player from knowing that they have acquired a special reserved figure 2 during the charge performance when they have acquired a special reserved figure 2. For example, when a special reserved figure 2 is acquired, the capsule is not displayed, and the small display area Dm9 is not displayed, making it impossible for the player to know the acquisition status of the special reserved figure 2. Only when the maximum number of special reserved figures 2 has been acquired, can the main display area Dm be configured to display "MAX acquisition completed."

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the acquisition status of the reserved special chart 2, which reduces the player's dissatisfaction due to not being able to acquire the reserved special chart 2 as desired during the charge performance.

Figure 273 is an example of a display screen that is displayed when you win the time-saving special drawing lottery based on the special drawing 2 reservation during the promotion chance zone.

In the small display area Dm1, a display is displayed indicating that the first special symbol is not changing, and in the small display area Dm8, a display mode is displayed indicating that the second special symbol has won the time-saving bonus.

In addition, because the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the "Hit to the left" display is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the first ball entrance 64, preventing the player from playing in the wrong way.

In the center of the main display area Dm, there is displayed a capsule cp1 marked "Completed" indicating that it has already been opened, a diamond dy1 marked "Time x 10000" indicating that the result of the special pattern 2 lottery based on the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) was a time-saving win, an opened capsule cp2, and capsules cp3 and cp4 that have not yet been opened.

In the example of Figure 273, out of the four Special Pattern 2 reserves acquired during the charge performance, the second special pattern lottery (Special Pattern 2 lottery) based on the first Special Pattern 2 reserve acquired did not result in a jackpot or time-saving bonus, but the Special Pattern 2 lottery based on the second Special Pattern 2 reserve acquired resulted in a time-saving bonus.

The small display area Dm5 displays "3 more times", indicating that there are 3 more times the second special pattern will change based on the reserved special pattern 2, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated when the display of the changes in the second special pattern begins. For example, when the display of the changes in the second special pattern based on the first reserved special pattern 2 begins, "4 more times" is displayed, and when the display of the changes based on the second reserved special pattern 2 begins, "3 more times" is displayed.

In addition, when a new variation of the second special pattern is started based on the reserved special pattern 2, the display in the small display area Dm9 changes from black to white for the reserved display h1, and if reserved h2 is black, that is, if there is another reserved special pattern 2, the display shifts to reserved h1, which becomes black, and reserved h2 becomes white. At that time, if reserved h3 and reserved h4 are black, they are shifted to reserved h2 and reserved h3, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 273, the variation of the second special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 2 has been executed twice, so the two reserved h3 and reserved h4 are displayed in white.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand how many more times the second special pattern will change based on the reserved special pattern 2.

In addition, FIG. 273 describes an example of a presentation when a time-saving win is made in a Special Chart 2 lottery based on a Special Chart 2 reservation. However, when a jackpot is won in a Special Chart 2 lottery based on a Special Chart 2 reservation, the contents of the capsule may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a ball marked "V") to notify the player of the jackpot win, or the capsule itself may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a red capsule).

In addition, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery based on the reserved special drawing 2 is a miss in either case, the capsule may be configured to be empty when opened, or a display indicating a miss (for example, a piece of paper with the word "unfortunate" written on it) may be displayed inside the capsule.

In the embodiment, when the result of determining in advance the reserved information of the special chart 2 reserved (pre-reading result) indicates that there is a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, the capsule corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved which has a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature is displayed in a different display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if the result of pre-reading the reserved information of the third acquired Special Chart 2 reserved indicates a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, a piece of paper with "Big Chance Next Time!" written on it may appear from inside the capsule during the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired Special Chart 2 reserved, suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot or winning the time-saving feature in the Special Chart 2 drawing based on the next lottery right for the second special pattern (Special Chart 2 reserved) (i.e., the third acquired Special Chart 2 reserved); alternatively, the display mode of the capsule with "Done" written on it that is displayed after the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired Special Chart 2 reserved has ended may be a different display mode (for example, a capsule with "Big Chance Next Time" written on it).

By configuring it in this way, when a capsule with a different display mode is displayed in the promotion chance zone, it is possible to create anticipation that information regarding the next special symbol 2 reserve to be executed will be displayed in the variation of the second special symbol based on the special symbol 2 reserve executed before the special symbol 2 reserve corresponding to that capsule, and it is possible to create interest in the opening performance of a capsule displayed in the normal display mode.

In the promotion chance zone, the special symbol 2 reserves are consumed in the order they were acquired (starting from h1, starting from the youngest), and the capsules corresponding to the consumed special symbol 2 reserves are opened in order (starting from capsule CP1, starting from the youngest). However, this is not limited to this, and the consumed special symbol 2 reserves and the opened capsules may not correspond to each other. For example, if the result of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) based on the first acquired special symbol 2 reserve is a time-saving win, if capsule CP4 is selected instead of capsule CP1, it is possible to make the player interested in not only the display mode of the capsules but also the order in which the capsules are opened, further increasing the fun of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 274. In this first modified example, the difference from the above-mentioned fifth control example is that the time-saving type can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and that the time-saving type set when the time-saving type is won in the first special symbol lottery is different from the time-saving type set when the time-saving type is won in the second special symbol lottery. Also, the difference is that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state is different. The other configurations are the same, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Figure 274 (a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 5a table 202dae. As shown in Figure 274 (a), the time-saving random number 5a table 202dae differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above in that it stipulates the judgment value for the time-saving win in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) even for the first special pattern, but is otherwise the same.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol and the set game state is a low probability state (normal state) of special symbols and normal symbols, the hit determination value for the acquired first hit random number counter C1 to be in the range of "51 to 54" for the time-saving win is stipulated.

In other words, since the range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 900, the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is 4/900.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf will be explained with reference to FIG. 274(b). FIG. 274(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf. The time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf differs from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in that it adds a time-saving type that is set when a time-saving type is won in the first special pattern lottery, but is otherwise the same. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the special symbol type (special symbol type) is the first special symbol, the time-saving type "Time-saving C" is specified regardless of the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. When this time-saving C is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 1. In other words, a time-saving state in which the time-saving count is 1 is set.

<Regarding the control process in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the processing contents of the control processing in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 275 to Fig. 277. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that a part of the processing contents executed by the main control device 110 and a part of the processing contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, and the rest is the same. Here, the differences from the above-mentioned fifth control example will be described.

Figure 275 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021). In this time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021), the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) are different from those of the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above. In other words, in the fifth control example described above, the control process was executed so that the condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment can be established only when the type of the special pattern lottery being executed is the second special pattern (see S8101), whereas in this first modified example, the condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment can be established regardless of the special pattern type. In other words, it is different from the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above in that the processing of S8101 is deleted. The other processing contents are the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment even in the first special pattern lottery.

Fig. 276 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026). This time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026) differs from the time-saving state presentation setting process 5 of the above-mentioned fifth control example (see S9006 in Fig. 266) in that the processing contents (S9321, S9322) for when the time-saving type (time-saving C) that is set when the time-saving is won in the first special symbol lottery is set are added, but the rest are the same and therefore will not be described.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026) is executed, the same processes of S9301 to S9308 as the time-saving state presentation setting process 5 of the fifth control example described above (see S9006 in FIG. 266) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9306 that the time-saving type is not time-saving A (S9306: No), it is next determined whether the time-saving type is time-saving C (S9321), and if it is determined that it is time-saving C (S9321: Yes), a display command is set (S9322) to show the presentation mode corresponding to the charge time (see FIG. 272), and this process ends.

Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993). This special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993) differs from special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983 in Figure 268) in the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the process for setting the performance mode when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery is different from the process for setting the performance mode of the first special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state.

When the special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9502), the time-saving type is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9521), it is determined whether the read time-saving type is time-saving C (S9522), and if it is time-saving C, the time-saving performance mode corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of this special symbol is determined (S9523), a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9524), and this process ends.

In other words, depending on the time-saving performance mode determined in S9523, a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm5 shown in FIG. 272(a) to inform the player of the remaining time for which the time-saving state will continue, in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S9522 that the time-saving type is not C (S9522: No), this is a case where the first special pattern variation is executed with another time-saving type set, so a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after subtraction (S9525), and processing proceeds to S9524.

On the other hand, in the process of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is 0, that is, if it is determined that the current state is not the time-saving state (S9501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a time-saving winning change (S9526), and if it is determined that there is a time-saving winning change (S9526: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the time-saving winning is determined (S9527), and processing proceeds to S9524. Here, the presentation mode determined in the process of S9527 is used to execute the time-saving winning change presentation shown in FIG. 271(b).

<Second modified example of the fifth control example>
A second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 278 to Fig. 282. In the fifth control example described above, a high probability state (first time reduction) of a normal pattern can be set based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, and a high probability state (second time reduction) of a normal pattern can be set based on winning a time reduction in a special pattern lottery. This makes it possible to set a high probability state of a normal pattern with multiple triggers, and by increasing the variety of games, it is possible to improve the interest of players in the game.

In this second modified example, in order to further increase interest, the contents of the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed when a high probability state for normal patterns is set are configured to differ depending on the trigger (first time reduction or second time reduction) that set the high probability state for normal patterns. In other words, the contents of the bonus granted when the same jackpot type is set is different for when a jackpot is won during the first time reduction and when a jackpot is won during the second time reduction. By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state (time reduction state) for normal patterns is set, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger set the time reduction state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this second modified example, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short play time per round (2R jackpot) can be executed as the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the difference in the content of the game executed between when the time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving state is set without executing a jackpot game, i.e., when the second time-saving state is set.

In addition, in this second modified example, the change presentation executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the change presentation executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are configured to be executed in the same presentation mode. Specifically, the first period from when the special pattern change to indicate that a jackpot win (a 2R jackpot win) for which the first time reduction is set starts until the special pattern change is stopped and the 2R jackpot game ends, and the second period, which is the change time of the special pattern change to indicate that a time reduction win for which the second time reduction is set has been set, are set to be approximately the same period, and the presentation is executed in a common presentation mode using the periods.

By configuring it in this way, when the first time-saving state is set and when the second time-saving state is set, a common presentation style can be executed in the period from when the special pattern variation starts to when the time-saving state is set, making it difficult for the player to understand which trigger set the time-saving state.

<Regarding the content of the performance in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to Figures 278 and 279, the characteristic presentation content executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, although there is a difference between the number of time-saving times granted after the end of a jackpot game (the number of times that special pattern lotteries can be executed during a high probability state for normal patterns) and the number of time-saving times granted by winning a time-saving game, if the type of jackpot is the same, the bonus granted (for example, the number of time-saving times granted after the end of a jackpot game) is the same when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a time-saving state set based on winning a jackpot (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) and when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a time-saving state set based on winning a time-saving game.

As a result, regardless of whether the time-saving mode was set as a result of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving mode, there was no difference in the ratio of jackpot types when a jackpot was won during the time-saving mode, or in the bonuses awarded even for the same jackpot type, which could result in monotonous gameplay.

In contrast, the second variant of the fifth control example differs from the fifth control example in that the ratio of jackpot types and the bonuses awarded are different even for the same jackpot type when a jackpot is won during a time-saving state that is set based on a jackpot win and when a jackpot is won during a time-saving state that is set based on a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the proportion of jackpot types that grant advantageous benefits to players (for example, jackpots with a large number of rounds of jackpot play) depending on the trigger that sets the time-saving state, and to vary the benefits granted even for the same jackpot type, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a jackpot determination and a time-saving determination are executed in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery), and it is possible to set the first time-saving state based on winning a jackpot, and to set the second time-saving state based on winning a time-saving state. And, for example, if jackpot A is won when the first time-saving state is set, a maximum of 100 time-saving times are granted after the jackpot game ends, but if jackpot A is won when the second time-saving state is set, a maximum of 10,000 time-saving times are granted after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, the benefits given to the player when a jackpot is won differ depending on whether the game state set when a jackpot is won is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. When the second time-saving state is set, it is easier to receive advantageous benefits based on winning a jackpot (for example, a greater number of time-saving periods awarded after the end of a jackpot game) than when the first time-saving state is set, so players will play in the hope that the second time-saving state will be set rather than the first time-saving state.

As will be described later, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, there are a 16R sure-variant jackpot in which prize balls can be acquired during the jackpot game and a sure-variant state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and a 2R time-limited jackpot in which it is difficult to acquire prize balls during the jackpot game and a first time-limited state is set after the jackpot game ends.

For this reason, if the jackpot type selected upon winning the jackpot is a 2R time-saving jackpot, the player will not be able to obtain any prize balls despite winning the jackpot, and the first time-saving state, which is less favorable than the second time-saving state, will be set, which may reduce the player's motivation to play if they win the 2R jackpot.

Therefore, in the second variant of the fifth control example, the presentation that is executed when a 2R time-saving big win that sets the first time-saving state is won is the same as when a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state is won, making it difficult for the player to tell whether they have won a 2R time-saving big win or a time-saving win.

By configuring it in this way, even if a player wins a 2R time-saving jackpot, which is less favorable than a 16R guaranteed jackpot, it is possible to make the player hope that it is a time-saving jackpot, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play when winning a 2R time-saving jackpot.

Figure 278(a) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when a jackpot that grants the first time-saving state is won in the first special symbol drawing (special symbol 1 drawing) during the normal state.

Two number "2"s are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, with a symbol saying "Chance Time" between them, and the sub-display area Ds displays "GET CHANCE TIME!!", indicating that the game will move on to Chance Time.

Here, Chance Time refers to the presentation mode that is displayed during the period from when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set until the time-saving state ends. Note that regardless of whether the first or second time-saving state is set, the presentation mode displayed will be Chance Time. Therefore, the configuration is such that the player cannot tell which time-saving state is currently set from the presentation mode displayed.

The effect executed during chance time may be used to suggest the time-saving state that has been set. For example, multiple background images may be prepared to be displayed during chance time, and a specific background image may be more likely to be set when the second time-saving state is set than when the first time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player to pay attention to the display mode during chance time in order to guess the type of time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest of the game during chance time.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display mode indicating that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving big win. Here, in FIG. 278(a), the display in the small display area Dm1 is large enough for the player to see, but it is preferable to configure it so that it is not visible to the player (for example, not displaying the small display area Dm1), and configuring it so that it is not visible to the player makes it even more difficult for the player to tell whether they have won the 2R time-saving big win or the time-saving win.

Then, since the jackpot game is executed based on the first special symbol winning the 2R time-saving jackpot, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right Hit" to inform the player that the jackpot game is in progress, in which the game ball is shot toward a specific winning hole 65a in the right area of the game board of the gaming machine.

Here, if a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the opening and closing plate 65b will open and close twice at high speed during the jackpot period in the jackpot game. On the other hand, if a time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is not executed and the opening and closing plate 65b will remain closed. In other words, the player can tell whether a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot has been won by checking the operation status of the opening and closing plate 65b. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent this, the screen is brightly lit during the chance time acquisition performance, so that the player focuses on the third pattern display device 81 and does not focus on the opening and closing plate 65b.

In the embodiment, the screen is brightly illuminated to distract the player from the opening and closing panel 65b, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player is drawn to the button by implementing an effect that causes the player to operate a button, or to have a small variable winning device that operates only when a jackpot game based on a 2R time-saving jackpot is played, placed in a position that is less noticeable than the variable winning device 65.

Figure 278 (b) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the time-saving feature is won with the first special symbol in the normal state.

The difference from when you win the 2R time-saving big win is that a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm1 to indicate that you have won the time-saving big win, but the rest of the display is the same as the display screen that appears when you win the 2R time-saving big win.

In addition, even if the first special symbol that has won the time-saving feature stops changing, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit to the right." This is because the time-saving feature is set, and the display is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's panel.

In this way, by making the display format for the chance time acquisition performance when a 2R time-saving big win is won and when a time-saving big win is won the same, making it difficult for the player to tell which one they have won, it is possible to make the player expect that they have won the time-saving big win even if they win the 2R time-saving big win, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play if the result of the special pattern lottery is a 2R time-saving big win.

Here, if a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is executed during the chance time acquisition effect, but if a time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, if the special pattern stops changing at the same timing, the period from when the chance time acquisition effect is displayed to when the chance time starts will be longer for a 2R time-saving jackpot than for a time-saving jackpot, by the period during which the jackpot game is executed, and there is a risk that the player will be able to tell whether they have won a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot based on the length of time the chance time acquisition effect is displayed.

Therefore, in the second variation of the fifth control example, the period (determined period) from when the chance time acquisition effect starts to when the special symbol actually stops changing is different depending on whether a 2R time-saving jackpot is won or when a time-saving jackpot is won.

Referring to Figure 279, we will explain the change patterns of the special symbols when a jackpot is won and when a time-saving bonus is won.

As shown in Fig. 279(a) and (b), the presentation mode from the start of the special symbol variation to the end of the chance time acquisition presentation is the same. However, in Fig. 279(a), the special symbol variation stops one second after the chance time acquisition presentation starts, and a four-second jackpot game is played, whereas in Fig. 279(b), the special symbol variation stops about five seconds after the chance time acquisition presentation starts.

In this way, by setting the period (determined period) from when the chance time winning effect starts until the special pattern actually stops changing when a time-saving jackpot is won longer than when a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the display time of the chance time winning effect does not change between when a jackpot game is played while the chance time winning effect is displayed and when a jackpot game is not played while the chance time winning effect is displayed, making it difficult for a player to tell whether they have won a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot based on the length of time the chance time winning effect is displayed.

In the embodiment, different confirmation periods are set for when the 2R time-saving big win is won and when the time-saving win is won, and the display time of the chance time acquisition effect is set to the same, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, the confirmation period can be the same for winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and for winning the time-saving jackpot, and when the time-saving jackpot is won, a waiting period can be set in which the special symbols stop changing and the next special symbols do not start changing for a certain period of time, making the display time for the chance time winning effect the same.

In the embodiment, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and winning the time-saving jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol that won the time-saving jackpot is changing, if there is a lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved), and the result of a prior judgment based on the reserved information of the special symbol 1 reserved (pre-read result) is a jackpot, the display mode of the chance time acquisition effect executed on the changing special symbol may be a special display mode (for example, the "chance time" symbol is displayed in rainbow colors), suggesting to the player that he will win the jackpot after winning the time-saving jackpot.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 280 and Fig. 281. Fig. 280(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 5b table 202dbe. As shown in Fig. 280(a), the time-saving random number 5b table 202dbe is different from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above in that it sets a prescribed value that is determined to be a time-saving winning in the first special pattern lottery, and is otherwise the same.

Figure 280 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1. As shown in Figure 280 (b), the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1 specifies the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd in the fifth control example described above to be commonly referenced for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and specifies the jackpot type and the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i corresponding to each jackpot type according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

As described above, in this second modified example, a high probability state (first time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and a high probability state (second time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning the time reduction in the special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 280(b), in the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1, the number of time reductions (value set in the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of a jackpot game is different depending on whether the first time reduction is set as the type of high probability state for normal symbols or the second time reduction is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 280(b), in this second modified example, the jackpot type that is selected when a jackpot is won can be selected as jackpot B5b, which involves two rounds of jackpot play and a time-saving play state that is set after the jackpot play ends. Here, when jackpot B5b is selected as the jackpot type, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 278 and FIG. 279 are executed, that is, a specific effect that makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving play or the second time-saving play has been set.

In other words, it is possible to set the same game state (time-saving state) as when the second time-saving mode is set, and it is also possible to execute a jackpot game with a short jackpot game period. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving mode or the second time-saving mode has been set.

Figure 281 shows the contents of the time-saving type selection 5b table 202dbf. The time-saving type selection 5b table 202dbf differs from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in that the time-saving type specified in accordance with the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is different, but is otherwise the same.

As shown in FIG. 281, in this second modified example, the time-saving end condition when the second time-saving is set (the value set in the time-saving counter 203h) is configured to be the same as the time-saving end condition when the first time-saving is set (see FIG. 280(b)). Specifically, the time-saving type is configured to be selected so that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to one of "50", "200", or "10000".

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a high probability state for normal symbols is set after a specific performance is executed, and the number of times the special symbols change reaches 50 times, causing the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols to transition to a low probability state (normal state), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state was set up until that point.

<Regarding the control process in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056). In this time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056), the time-saving state presentation setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 266) in the above-mentioned fifth control example is different in that the control process contents executed when it is determined that the game state has transitioned from the normal state to the time-saving state are different. Specifically, at the time when it is determined that the time-saving state has been won, it is determined in advance whether there is a jackpot win in the special chart 2 reservation (S9352), and when it is determined that there is a special chart 2 reservation including a jackpot win, the special time-saving mode is executed.

In the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9301 is a high probability state (S9302). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a high probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command is set to show the corresponding presentation mode during the preparation time (S9303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9302, if it is determined that the game state before the change was not a special state (S9302: No), then it is determined whether the game state before the change was a normal state (S9303). If it is determined that the game state before the change was a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305). Then, it is determined whether the time-saving state set this time is a time-saving state that was set as a result of winning a time-saving win (S9351).

In the process of S9351, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set due to a time-saving winning event (S9351: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a winning jackpot among the reserved symbols of the second special pattern (S9352). If it is determined that there is a winning jackpot among the reserved symbols (S9352: Yes), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the special time-saving mode (S9353), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9351 that the time-saving mode has not been won in this lottery (S9351: No), or if it is determined in the process of S9352 that there is no winning jackpot among the reserved symbols of the second special pattern (S9352: No), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving mode (S9354), and this process ends.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 283 to Fig. 293. In the fifth control example and each modified example described above, the time-saving winning is possible in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set. In contrast, the sixth control example is significantly different in that the time-saving winning is possible in the special symbol lottery even in the state where a game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a new time-saving win occurs while the time-saving state is set, it is possible to update the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue.

In addition, when updating the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue, it is configured so that the period for which the time-saving state will continue can be updated to be longer than the current remaining period (favorable update) or shorter (unfavorable update). In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the time-saving lottery and the number of time-saving times (length of time period) that is set when the time-saving state is won, winning the time-saving state can be a favorable benefit to the player or an unfavorable benefit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide innovative gameplay that combines gameplay in which a time-saving state is expected to be won and gameplay in which a time-saving state is not expected to be won.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, the more consecutive time-saving wins without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes for the player to be set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, multiple time-saving types that differ in the degree of advantage to the player are defined, and the more time-saving wins are made during the time-saving state, the easier it becomes to set an advantageous time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, the longer the period without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes to grant a player an advantageous bonus.

In addition, when the most advantageous time-saving type for the player is set, it is configured so that it is easier for the player to transition to a time-saving type that is less advantageous than when a time-saving type that is less advantageous than the most advantageous time-saving type is set. In other words, there are multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantageousness, and time-saving types with gradually increasing degrees of advantageousness are set based on the time-saving win, so that when the highest stage of time-saving type is reached, it is easier for the player to fall down to the lowest stage of time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a time-saving type that is advantageous for the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

<About the content of the sixth control example>
Here, the characteristic performance contents in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 283 and Fig. 284. Fig. 283(a) is a diagram showing a display screen when a time-saving prize is won in a normal state and time-saving A is set as the time-saving type, and Fig. 283(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when a time-saving prize is won in a state where time-saving A is set and time-saving B is set.

Figure 284 (a) shows an example of a display screen when a time-saving option is won during the time-saving state and the number of remaining time-saving options (short period of time remaining) increases, and Figure 284 (b) shows an example of a display screen when a time-saving option is won during the time-saving state and the number of remaining time-saving options (short period of time remaining) decreases.

As shown in FIG. 283, in this sixth control example, the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is also configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning judgment, so an effect to show the result of the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (an effect in which an icon showing the lottery result appears from the bag 863) is executed. In this case, for example, the current remaining number of time-saving times during the time-saving state and the newly won type of time-saving time are distinguished, and if the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the newly won type of time-saving time is greater than the current remaining number of time-saving times (see Dm7), an effect is executed to show that the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state increases, as shown in FIG. 284(a), and if the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the newly won type of time-saving time is less than the current remaining number of time-saving times (see Dm7), an effect is executed to show that the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state decreases, as shown in FIG. 284(b).

In addition, in this sixth control example, if a time-saving win is won during the time-saving state, a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met is set more easily (more easily set than when a time-saving win is won in the normal state). And, if a time-saving win is also won while time-saving B is set, it is configured so that an advantageous time-saving state in which the time-saving state continues until the next big win is won (the number of time-saving wins is set to 10,000) is more likely to be granted.

When time-saving mode B is set, as shown in FIG. 283(b), a display mode that can inform the player that the time-saving mode is set is displayed in a different display mode from the state when time-saving mode A is set.

<Game flow in the sixth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 285, the game flow in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing the game flow in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 285, the fifth control example is different from the fifth control example in that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a game state other than the normal state, the time-saving winning probability is made different depending on the game state in which the time-saving winning judgment is executed, and a plurality of time-saving types (time-saving A, time-saving B) are provided as time-saving states, which have different degrees of advantage of the bonus when the jackpot is won.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Fig. 286(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee. As shown in Fig. 286(a), the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the above-mentioned fifth control example in that it prescribes a judgment value for determining a time-saving winning in the first special pattern lottery, prescribes a judgment value for a time-saving winning in a game state other than the normal state, and differs in the range for determining a time-saving winning (time-saving winning probability) depending on the game state.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the time-saving feature can be made to differ depending on the game state that is set and the type of special pattern lottery that is executed.

Figure 286 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving type selection 6 table 202ef. As shown in Figure 286 (b), the time-saving type selection 6 table 202ef specifies, in comparison with the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df described above, that the value of the time-saving counter 203h, i.e., the number of time-saving times, set for each time-saving type is different depending on the game state at the time of winning.

This configuration can make the player curious about which game state is set.

287 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 6 table 202ed. As shown in FIG. 287, the jackpot 6 table 202ed specifies that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set for each time-saving type, i.e., the number of time-saving times, is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, compared to the jackpot 5 table 202dd described above. Specifically, the number of time-saving times set after the jackpot game ends is different between the case where the time-saving B, which is the same game state (time-saving state), is set and the case where the time-saving A is set, and it is configured so that the time-saving state with a larger number of time-saving times is more likely to be set when the time-saving B is set, that is, when a time-saving state that is likely to be set when a time-saving win is won during a time-saving state is set. In this sixth control example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h set for each time-saving type, i.e., the number of time-saving times, is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, but this is not limited to this, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed may be configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Figure 288 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. As shown in Figure 288, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a time-saving mode storage area 223ea has been added, but is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

The time-saving mode storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the set time-saving mode, and stores the time-saving mode set in the time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (see S9076 in FIG. 290) (S9372 in FIG. 290). This is then referenced when setting the presentation mode of the special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state, and the variation presentation is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the read-out time-saving mode.

<Regarding the control process in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 289 to Fig. 293. Fig. 289 is a flow chart showing the process contents of the time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056). This time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056) is different from the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (S8016) in that the process for determining whether the execution condition of the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is established or not is changed. In other words, as shown in Fig. 289, the time-saving winning or losing is executed in most of the special pattern lotteries executed.

In the time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056), first, the lottery result is obtained based on the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee (see FIG. 286(a)) (S8154). Next, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a time-saving win (S8105). If it is determined that the obtained lottery result is a time-saving win (S8105: Yes), the time-saving special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the time-saving type counter CC1 (S8106), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8105 that the obtained lottery result is not a time-saving win (S8105: No), the special losing pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S8107), and this process ends.

Next, FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (S9076). This time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (S9076) differs from time-saving state presentation setting process 5 (S9056 in FIG. 282) in the fifth control example described above in that a process is executed to store the time-saving type included in the currently received state command in the time-saving mode storage area 223ea, but is otherwise the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 6 (S4997). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 6 (S4997) is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol variation, and differs from the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) in the fifth control example described above in that it executes a mode-specific presentation setting process (S9651) for determining the presentation mode during the time-saving state, but is otherwise the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651) will be explained with reference to FIG. 292. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651). In this mode-specific performance setting process (S9651), processing is executed to determine the performance aspects of the various performances described above with reference to FIG. 283 and FIG. 284.

In the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651), first, the current time-saving mode is read from the time-saving mode storage area 223ea (S9801). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving mode read from the time-saving mode storage area 223ea is time-saving A (S9802). If it is determined that the current time-saving mode is time-saving A (S9802: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery is a lottery for winning the time-saving mode (S9803).

If it is determined that the lottery is for a win in the time-saving option (S9803: Yes), a difference is calculated based on the number of time-saving options awarded based on this lottery and the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9804). Next, it is determined whether the remaining number of time-saving options will decrease based on the calculated difference (S9805). If it is determined that the number of time-saving options will not decrease, i.e., that the number of time-saving options will increase (S9805: No), a display command is set to indicate that the remaining number of time-saving options will increase (S9806), and the process proceeds to S9809.

On the other hand, in the process of S9805, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving options will be reduced based on the difference (S9805: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the remaining number of time-saving options will be reduced (S9807), and the process proceeds to S9809. On the other hand, in the process of S9803, if it is determined that the current lottery is not a lottery for winning the time-saving option (S9803: No), the processes of S9804 to S9807 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9802 that the current time-saving mode read out is not time-saving mode A (S9802: No), the process for setting the effect during time-saving mode B is executed (S9808). A detailed explanation of the process for setting the effect during time-saving mode B (S9808) will be described later with reference to FIG. 293. Next, a comparison is executed between the current time-saving mode read out and the game state set based on the lottery result (S9809), and it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode has been switched (S9810). If it is determined that the time-saving mode has been switched out (S9810: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the time-saving mode switch is determined (S9811), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9810 that the time-saving mode has not been switched out (S9810: No), the process of S9811 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808) will be explained with reference to FIG. 293. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808). As shown in FIG. 293, the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808) determines the type of time-saving effect that is set when a time-saving effect is won during time-saving B, and if a type other than time-saving B, i.e. time-saving A, is set, a process is executed to set the effect mode to indicate that the time-saving state will end immediately (S9853).

In the process of setting the effects during time-saving B (S9808), first, it is determined whether the current drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win (S9851). If it is determined that the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win (S9851: Yes), it is determined whether the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852). If it is determined that the drawing is not a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852: No), a presentation mode to indicate the end of the time-saving win is determined (S9853), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852: Yes), a presentation mode that corresponds to the continuation of the time-saving win until the next big win is determined (S9855), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9851 that the current lottery is not a lottery for winning the time-saving feature (S9851: No), it is determined whether the lottery is a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854). If it is determined that the lottery is a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854: Yes), the process of S9855 described above is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery is not a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854: No), this process ends as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the contents of the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 294 to Fig. 328. The seventh control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured to be able to win a small prize in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (is a miss), and it is configured to be able to play a big prize game by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game that is executed based on the small prize winning.

In addition, the fifth control example described above was configured to determine whether or not a time-saving win has occurred only if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern drawing, whereas the seventh control example is configured to allow for both a jackpot win and a time-saving win to be determined in a single special pattern drawing.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made, and if a time-saving win has been made, the time-saving state is set at the timing when the special pattern variation that has won the time-saving win is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the seventh control example, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made in the special pattern lottery, and with the time-saving state set, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is made, and the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when the special pattern variation that shows the result of the special pattern lottery is executed.

Specifically, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, the time-saving state is set for a short period including the timing when the jackpot determination is executed in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a function (time-saving period setting function) that allows the time-saving win in the special symbol lottery is set in order to play a game (a game that is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player toward the next jackpot win for a predetermined period (up to 10,000 times) without going through the jackpot game, whereas in this seventh control example, in addition to the above-mentioned time-saving period setting function, a function (special lottery function) is set that allows the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state to be executed during the game (left-handed play) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing when the jackpot determination is executed by the special symbol lottery to be in the time-saving state without making it easy to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination for the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state while making it difficult for the player to realize that they have won the time-saving special pattern lottery, so it is possible to notify the player of the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery is different between when a jackpot is won in the normal state and when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and it is configured so that a bonus that is more advantageous to the player is granted when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state (for example, a jackpot game with more rounds). In other words, in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, when a player wins both the time-saving state and the jackpot, a bonus that is more advantageous is granted than when a player wins only a jackpot.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be set to a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a time-saving win has been won, and a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In other words, by grasping the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the result of the jackpot determination executed for the currently executing special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable presentation, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a time-saving winning is configured to be different from the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a determination to grant multiple different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to grasp the suggestion mode for suggesting other judgment results while grasping (predicting) at least one judgment result.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the result of the effect (time-saving effect) including a suggestive aspect that can suggest whether or not the time-saving effect will be won is an effect result including a suggestive aspect that suggests that the time-saving effect will not be won, than when the time-saving effect is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which multiple bonuses with different awarding judgments can be awarded in one special pattern lottery, when a judgment result suggestive effect that can suggest the result of the awarding judgment for one bonus is executed, the result of the judgment result suggestive effect suggests that one bonus will not be awarded, so that the expectation of awarding another bonus is higher than when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed. This makes it possible to notify the player that a bonus is more likely to be awarded at the time the judgment result suggestive effect is executed, compared to when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example, but the same reference numerals will be used to designate the same contents as the above-mentioned control examples, and detailed descriptions will be omitted.

First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 294 to Fig. 299. Fig. 294 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, Fig. 295 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, and Figs. 296 to 299 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example.

294, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball winning port 64, a second ball winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first ball winning port 64, the second ball winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 294) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 294) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Fig. 294), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 242), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In the seventh control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time-saving or normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbols correspond to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can suggest various game modes of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if it judges that a jackpot has been won, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 15R time-saving jackpot (15R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 15 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 5R time-saving jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, and a 5R normal jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize is prepared which gives the player fewer benefits than the jackpot described above (for example, a benefit of opening the V winning device 650 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (or whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "5R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5. Also, a "5R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a normal state without transitioning to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5.

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide one of the following jackpot games when a special symbol jackpot is won: a "15R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the player with the most bonuses, a "5R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the next most bonuses, and a "5R normal jackpot" that can provide the player with the fewest bonuses of all jackpot games. This allows the player to play in the hope that, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for a special symbol, the jackpot game that provides the most bonuses will be provided out of the jackpot games that have different bonuses that can be provided.

In the seventh control example, the size of the bonus given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the size of the bonus given to the player may be defined using conditions other than those mentioned above, or the content of the jackpot game may simply be changed so that different bonuses are given without defining the size of the bonus.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is the same as in the normal state, but the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (benefit) given to the player after the jackpot ends. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the seventh control example, the change time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric device 640a that is operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit is set so that the period during which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. Note that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and only a part of the above-mentioned settings may be used, or the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state in addition to the above-mentioned contents.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the first special pattern lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, are configured to be capable of winning the time-saving feature in addition to winning the big prize and small prize described above. Specifically, the seventh control example is configured to determine whether or not a time-saving feature has been won in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) that is executed when the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is set.

Here, if the time-saving is won, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big win determination is performed in the special symbol lottery, and a process (update process 7) is executed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state at the timing when the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery starts. For example, in the case of a time-saving state where the number of time-saving times is set to 1 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1), the remaining number of time-saving times (the value of the time-saving counter 203h) is updated (decremented) in update process 7 executed at the timing when the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery in which the time-saving is won starts, and it is determined that the time-saving state is to be ended. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving state where a value of multiple times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of time-saving times, the time-saving state continues until the time-saving end condition is met based on the result of the update of the remaining number of time-saving times executed by update process 7.

In other words, by using the timing for setting the time-saving state and the timing for ending the time-saving state used in this seventh control example, it is possible to set the time-saving state only for the jackpot determination timing of the special pattern lottery (excluding the special pattern change period), or to set the time-saving state including the special pattern change period, depending on the number of time-saving times that are set.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, a different processing timing may be set. For example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special symbol variation that has won the time-saving state is stopped, and the time-saving state update process (processing to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state) may be executed before the next special symbol variation begins. Even in this case, by varying the number of time-saving times that are set, it is possible to set the time-saving state so that it includes the special symbol variation period, or to set the time-saving state so that it does not include the special symbol variation period. In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time-saving state set is stopped and the next special symbol lottery does not begin with the time-saving state set, the time-saving state will continue because the time-saving end condition cannot be met.

In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the player has acquired the right to execute the next special pattern lottery (special pattern reserve) by the time the special pattern variation that won the time-saving feature is stopped (before the time-saving feature is set), and to notify the player that the time-saving feature has been won only if it is determined that the special pattern reserve has been acquired, that is, if the next special pattern variation will start immediately after the time-saving feature is set and the time-saving feature can end. By configuring the player in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who knows that they have won the time-saving feature from playing right-handed and causing the second special pattern lottery to be executed without causing the first special pattern lottery to be executed.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the seventh control example, the condition for terminating the "time-saving state" is configured such that, for the time-saving state granted based on winning the big prize in the special symbol lottery, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state when either of the following termination conditions is met: the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed (the total number of times they have changed) reaches a first predetermined number (100 times) (first termination condition), or the number of times the small prize has been won (the small prize game has been executed) in the special symbol lottery reaches a second predetermined number (for example, 1 time) (second termination condition). In this way, by providing multiple termination conditions for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state and transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state when any of the multiple termination conditions is met, it becomes possible to set multiple timings for the time-saving state to end, and the player can play while feeling excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, multiple small prize types (e.g., small prize A, B) are prepared as small prizes that can be won in the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), and the number of times the second ending condition is met is set differently for each small prize type. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small prizes won during the time-saving state, so the player can be made to feel tense at all times while playing the time-saving game.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, when a time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, an end condition is set that is different from when a time-saving state (first time-saving state) is set based on winning the jackpot, and specifically, the number of time-saving states is set to "1." In other words, the first time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery utilizes the time-saving state as a special lottery function for executing only the jackpot determination of the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state.

In the seventh control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, and a big win (so-called two-type win) is awarded when the ball passes through the specific area during a small win game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball) (see FIG. 298). In addition, as will be described in detail later, the expectation of the ball passing through the specific area during a small win game (V winning expectation) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that is won. And, the number of times the second end condition set for each small win type is met (number of small wins) is configured to be less for the small win type in which a small win game with a high V winning expectation is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to associate the expectation of winning a V to obtain a two-type win when a small win is won during time-saving play with the anxiety that the time-saving mode may end, making the player more motivated to play.

In the seventh control example, the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change is set to the first predetermined number (100 times) as described above as the end condition (first end condition), but other end conditions may be set for the number of times the special symbols change. For example, the end condition for the time-saving state may be established when the number of times only the first special symbol changes reaches a third predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) or when the number of times only the second special symbol changes reaches a fourth predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). Also, only some of the many end conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball into the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed (see FIG. 122). Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of the seventh control example performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b.

In other words, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) during which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special pattern in correspondence with the timing at which the first pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, when the discrimination condition (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is met, discrimination is made by the discrimination means (a lottery for a special symbol is executed), and the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variably displayed) until a predetermined dynamic display period has elapsed, after which the identification information (third symbol) is displayed stationary in a display mode (combination of symbols) that indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the lottery result for the special symbol). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the special symbol by understanding the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may have a display mode corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and may be a display mode corresponding to a part of the special pattern lottery result (for example, only the result of the win/loss judgment such as a big win or a miss, or a time-saving win), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special pattern lottery result (for example, the type of big win that was won). In addition, if there are four types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, a miss, or a time-saving win) as the lottery result of the special pattern, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is one of two specific types (for example, a big win or a small win) out of the three types of lottery results described above. In addition, if a double win is won by a judgment that allows double wins (for example, a stable big win, a time-saving judgment), a display mode for indicating a double win may be used, and if the content of the game executed based on the double win is the same as the content of the game executed based only on the big win, the same display mode may be used.

In addition, instead of the display device used in the seventh control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel, or multiple display devices may be provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In this seventh control example, when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the time-saving state, the period during which the electric device 640a is operated (the period during which the electric device 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is longer than when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the normal state. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state.

The configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the second symbol, or to increase the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win. In addition, if the time-saving state is made easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operating pattern of the electric device 640a, the time it takes for the second symbol to change may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change is set shorter during the time-saving state than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the second symbol to be displayed is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a are varied, the time for displaying the second symbol to be displayed may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is started, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and the second symbol indicating a win is displayed (the winning game of the second symbol, i.e., the timing when the electric role 640a is operated). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second symbol that started to be displayed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win during the normal state, the electric role 640a can be operated with the operation pattern corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, the set game state and the operation pattern of the electric role to be executed can be more accurately associated.

The relationship between the game state, the time the second symbol changes, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be specified other than as described above. For example, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the timing when the second symbol starts changing or the timing when the electric device 640a starts operating, the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be configured to set an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during the time-saving state).

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 294, nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the first ball entry port 64 is easier to enter in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also each one of the winning holes through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the hole. In the seventh control example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the seventh control example, switches (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) that detect the ball that triggers the lottery for the special pattern (lottery trigger for the big win) are provided in the ball entrance, so that the lottery trigger for the special pattern can be obtained and prize balls can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used, for example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass may be provided, and when a switch (detection means) that detects the ball passing through the area (gate) detects the passage of the ball, the lottery trigger for the special pattern may be obtained. In this case, it is preferable to provide a ball entrance that allows at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery for the special pattern to enter, and that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) when the ball enters. By configuring in this way, the number of times the lottery trigger for the special pattern is obtained and the number of times the prize balls are obtained can be made different, so that a variety of playability can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (permitted state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the player (the player in front of the game board 13 in FIG. 294) and a waiting state (restricted state) waiting on the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not selected), the electric device 640a is in the waiting state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the ball passing through the normal symbol starter hole (through gate) 67, that is, when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the electric device 640a is in the protruding state (permitted state), making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be explained. In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the approximate center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to direct the shot ball to either the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the game is configured so that right-hand hitting is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

To prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted under the variable display unit 80, and the ball is configured to not enter the second ball entrance 640 during left-handed play. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to change the first special pattern can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to change the second special pattern can be played in right-handed play, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, a V winning device 650 is disposed in the right hitting area, the upper surface of which is inclined downward to the left (the lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 294), and the various mechanisms are disposed so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric role 640a.

When the electric device 640a is in a standby state, the ball passes through the standby electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in a protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 2). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the standby state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 arranged below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

Also, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, referring to FIG. 295, the configuration of the right-hitting area of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 295, of the balls shot by right-hitting play, those that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is arranged. To explain more specifically, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member whose upper surface allows the balls to flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 295). Then, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 flows down into area a (see FIG. 295) which is within a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding position, the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end position. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the period during which the electric device 640a operates continuously in the game state (normal symbol probability state) is different. When the electric device 640a operates in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) set as the game state, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 295). When the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is configured to be in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 295).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 295 (the range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the seventh control example). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery for the second special pattern from being drawn in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) it takes for a ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the ball that flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a, which is in the induction state (protruding state), to reach the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that reaches the electric device 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric device 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a, and the operation of the electric device 640a ends when the ball reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric device 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such a ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric device 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed play is performed during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric device 640a and the timing of the ball arriving at the electric device 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 5. Therefore, if a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be drawn, a ball entering the second winning port 640 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., a lottery for special symbol 2 and 5 prize balls) than a ball entering the general winning port 63. If a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) cannot be drawn (special symbol changing), a ball entering the general winning port 63 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) than a ball entering the second winning port 640.

This allows the ball entry port into which the player wishes to enter (the ball entry port through which many bonuses can be obtained) to be changed depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have balls enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, right-hand play must be continued, which increases the operation of the game.

In the seventh control example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the ball can be surely inserted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. In addition, for example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be set to a period (e.g., 0.9 seconds) slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the ball from being shot after the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and starting the ball from being shot again after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (so-called stop shot), so that the right-handed play can be continued during the time-saving state, improving the operation of the game.

Returning to Figure 294, we will continue with the explanation. As described above with reference to Figure 295, the ball released by right-handed play first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be explained. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and is configured to be variable to an open state in which the ball can win at a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a by operating the opening/closing door 650f1 when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "small win."

In addition, in some cases where a "big win" of a special pattern is won, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same way as when a "small win" is won as described above. This makes it difficult to know whether a "big win" or a "small win" of a special pattern has been won when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

Now, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 295 to 299. First, as shown in Fig. 295, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and a ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Fig. 295) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In the seventh control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens enters the V winning device 650. The ball that enters the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 298 (a)) while flowing down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 can be made to flow down smoothly regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the seventh control example, the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in the seventh control example, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 12 times, but any other number of times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened again (interval between openings) is set to 5 seconds after the fifth and tenth openings during a small win game, and is set to 0.5 seconds at other times. This is to make it easier for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the fifth opening operation is completed during a small win game, a game guide display that emphasizes right-hand play and encourages the player to play during the interval between openings after the fifth opening operation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set longer than usual so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 even when right-hand play is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the 10th opening operation during a small winning game.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In the seventh control example, a longer special inter-open interval period is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during a small win game. In this way, by providing multiple times for the player to display the game guide display during one small win game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play appropriately. In addition, when providing multiple times for the game guide display, it is recommended to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that a player playing normally cannot reach. That is, although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, by continuously playing right-hand during a small win game, at least one ball can enter in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Therefore, if a normal game (continuous right-hand play) is played, the number of winning balls (10 balls) that is the end condition of the small win game will be reached during the tenth opening operation, and the small win game will end.

In other words, the inter-open interval period that is executed after the 10th opening action during a small win game is a timing that cannot be reached if the player is playing normally (continuous right-hitting game). Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing for displaying the game guide display, an unnecessarily long special inter-open interval period will not be executed for a player playing normally (continuous right-hitting game), and the small win game can be played smoothly.

In addition, when the first special inter-opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that is reached even if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed as in the seventh control example, it is preferable to determine whether the V switch 650e3 detects a ball at the timing when the first special inter-opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends) or at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special inter-opening interval period (the timing when the period required for the ball that entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball, a notification effect to notify that fact is displayed during the first special inter-opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, a game guide display is displayed as described above. This allows the special inter-opening interval period set during small winning play to be used effectively according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to configure the game guide display to be displayed even if the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the small win game ends without a predetermined number (10 balls) of balls entering the V winning device 650 during the small win game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 296, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b to screw the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon to light up the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 297 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 297 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 297 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 297 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 297 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the entry of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 650e shown in Figure 297 (a).

As shown in FIG. 297(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (it is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a.

By configuring it this way, right-hand play can be continued during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 297(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 297(b). As shown in Figure 297(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 298, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 298 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 298 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 298(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball and is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small win game, the big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or the flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to pass through) the V switch 650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on, the flow path is switched so that the ball that entered the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 298(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the seventh control example is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 25, so that the balls that have won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide a state that is maintained for a long period of time, that is, a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 298(a)), thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been made in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has elapsed), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, causing a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, prize balls (10 prize balls for one winning ball in the seventh control example) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to determine whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, and it is possible to determine whether or not a jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, a small win game is executed in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for different periods and timings depending on the small win type (small win A, B) that is set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during a small win game (V winning expectation) can be made to differ depending on the content of the small win game executed when a small win is won. Therefore, the player can play while expecting not only to win a small win, but also to play a small win game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 299, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 299(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 299(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the seventh control example is configured so that a ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 294), down the left upper surface 650y2, and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 299(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 299(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 299(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first restricting member 651 and a second restricting member 652 for smoothing the flow of the balls after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a (see FIG. 294). The balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upper upstream side of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652, and then flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the ball that enters the opening and closing door 650f1 with force from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, and therefore it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) can be secured to align the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one ball, preventing balls from clogging the V winning device 650 and causing problems during play.

As explained above, in the seventh control example, the flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval between openings (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in the bonus game (small prize game) that is awarded when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery for the special symbol) is a predetermined discrimination result (small prize), so that the ball flowing down the variable member during the interval between openings (the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small prize game can be reliably made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, the number of opening operations (12) in one small win game is set to be greater than the number of winning balls (10 balls) required to end the small win game, so that a predetermined number (10 balls) can be won during a small win game even if only the balls flowing down the variable member enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short, a sufficient number of winning balls can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of balls from entering the V winning device 650 during a small win game.

<About the content of the performance in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
With reference to Figures 300 to 302, the characteristic presentation contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, if the lottery (special pattern lottery) executed when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 results in a miss in the jackpot determination (jackpot lottery), a time-saving win determination (time-saving lottery) is executed to set a high probability state for normal patterns, so that if a jackpot is won, the time-saving win will not occur.

In contrast, the seventh control example differs from the fifth control example in that the special pattern lottery is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can overlap.

Specifically, in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving lottery is executed before the jackpot lottery is executed in the first special symbol lottery, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the jackpot lottery is executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state ends when the jackpot lottery ends and the first special symbol starts to change. In other words, the period in which the time-saving state is set due to the time-saving lottery being won is only the period in which the jackpot lottery is executed.

The ratio of the jackpot type that is determined when a jackpot is won when the normal state is set is different from the ratio of the jackpot type that is determined when the time-saving state is set; for example, when a jackpot is won during a period when the normal state is set, the ratio of a 15R jackpot (a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds) being determined is 10%, whereas when a jackpot is won during a period when the time-saving state is set, the ratio of a 15R jackpot being determined is 50%. In other words, when a jackpot is won during a period when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state, the probability of a 15R jackpot being determined is higher than when a jackpot is won during a period when the normal state is set, so when a time-saving state win and a jackpot win overlap, it is advantageous for the player.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state that is set when the time-saving win is won lasts only for a short period of time from when the time-saving win is won until the first special symbol next starts to change, so the player cannot play a game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (right-hand play). However, in the time-saving state that is set based on the big win, the player can play a right-hand play.

If a player is informed that they have won the time-saving mode when they have not won the jackpot, the player may become confused as to whether the game state that is set for the player after the changing special symbol stops is the normal state or the time-saving mode, and the player may mistakenly believe that the time-saving mode is set and erroneously play with the right hand.

On the other hand, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, even if the player is confused as to whether the normal state or the time-saving state will be set after the changing special pattern stops due to the notification that the time-saving win has been won, the player can be made to recognize that a jackpot game will be executed after the special pattern stops, by being notified that a jackpot has been won.

Therefore, in the seventh control example, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap in the special pattern lottery, the player is notified or suggested to have won the time-saving win, but if a time-saving win occurs but the jackpot does not occur, the player is not notified or suggested to have won the time-saving win.

By configuring it this way, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, it becomes possible for the player to determine which game state was set when the jackpot was won. On the other hand, if a time-saving win is won but the jackpot is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game state that is set after the changing special pattern stops, which can lead to the player playing in the wrong way.

Referring to Figures 300 and 301, we will explain the display screen when the time-saving lottery result is indicated while the first special pattern is changing.

Figure 300 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when a time-saving lottery result suggestion effect (an effect to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery) is executed while the first special symbol is changing. In this embodiment, when the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery is to be notified to the player, a "fortune-telling time effect" is executed. The fortune-telling time effect is an effect that suggests to the player whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, depending on the contents of the capsule cp5 displayed in the main display area Dm. In the main display area Dm, the closed capsule cp5 is displayed with the message "Does this change mean the time-saving lottery has been won?", allowing the player to recognize that the fortune-telling time effect is an effect that suggests whether or not the first special symbol that is changing has won the time-saving lottery, depending on the contents of the capsule cp5.

Here, the fortune time effect is not executed every time the first special symbol changes, and the fortune time effect may not be executed even if the time-saving feature is won. In other words, if the fortune time effect is not executed, the player cannot tell whether the changing first special symbol has won the time-saving feature or not, but if the fortune time effect is executed, the player can tell whether the changing first special symbol has won the time-saving feature or not.

Figure 300 (b) is an example of a display screen indicating that a time-saving win has been won while the first special pattern is changing. In the main display area Dm, a capsule cp5 is opened, and an effect is executed in which a piece of paper k1 with a "circle" written on it appears from inside. The piece of paper k1 is a display mode for indicating that the first special pattern that is changing has won the time-saving win, allowing the player to recognize that they have won the time-saving win.

In addition, during the fluctuation of the first special pattern in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), the player is only suggested to have won the time-saving feature if the time-saving feature and the jackpot are both won. If the result of the jackpot lottery (the judgment of whether or not there is a jackpot executed in the special pattern lottery) is a miss, the player is not suggested to have won the time-saving feature even if there is a time-saving feature (i.e., the fortune-telling time performance is not executed). Therefore, when paper k1 is displayed during the fortune-telling time performance, indicating that the time-saving feature has been won, the player can recognize that the jackpot has been won before the third pattern, which is displayed in a manner indicating that the jackpot has been won, is displayed.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the percentage of jackpot types when a jackpot is won differs between when the normal state is set and when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set; when a jackpot is won during the normal state, the percentage of 15R jackpots (jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of 15) is determined, whereas when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the percentage of 15R jackpots is determined, is 50%.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when paper k1 is displayed during the fortune time performance, indicating that a time-saving win has been won, a "Super chance arrival performance" is executed in which the main display area Dm displays "Super chance arrival! If you win with this change, you have a great chance of winning a 15R jackpot!", suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the first special pattern that is changing will win a 15R jackpot, and making the player hopeful that he or she will win a 15R jackpot during the period from when the fortune time performance ends until the results of the jackpot lottery are announced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 301 (a) is an example of a display screen when suggesting that the time-saving feature was not won while the first special symbol was changing. Unlike when the time-saving feature was won, an effect is executed in which paper k2 with an "X" written on it appears from capsule CP5 during the fortune-telling time effect. Paper k2 is a display mode for indicating that the time-saving feature was not won by the first special symbol that is changing, and this allows the player to recognize that the time-saving feature was not won.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the player is only informed that he or she has not won the time-saving feature if the player wins jackpot A (a 15R time-saving jackpot) or if the jackpot lottery result is a miss.

Here, in this embodiment, three jackpot types are defined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 15 rounds and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 rounds and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 rounds and a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, jackpot A is the most advantageous jackpot type because it is given to the player more rounds of jackpot play than jackpots B and C, and unlike jackpot C, it is set to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot game ends.

Therefore, when paper k2 is displayed during the fortune time performance, indicating that the player has not won the time-saving feature, an "all or nothing performance" is executed in which the main display area Dm displays "All or nothing! Jackpot A? or no?", suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the most favorable jackpot A has been won, and making the player more interested in the game by making the player hopeful that he or she has won jackpot A during the period from the end of the fortune time performance to the announcement of the result of the jackpot lottery (the jackpot win or loss determination executed in the special pattern lottery).

Figure 301 (b) is an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap. In the small display area Dm1, the first special symbol is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won, and in the main display area Dm, a rabbit character 801 opens a treasure chest 810f, and an effect is executed in which a ball tm2 with the letter "V" written on it appears from inside the treasure chest 810f. The ball tm2 is a display mode for notifying the player that the first special symbol has won a jackpot, and the display of the ball tm2 allows the player to recognize that he or she has won a jackpot.

In addition, the main display area Dm continues to display the super chance arrival effect shown in FIG. 300(b), which displays "Super chance arrival! If you hit this fluctuation, you have a great chance of a 15R jackpot!" even when the result of the jackpot lottery is announced.

If the player does not win the time-saving bonus but wins jackpot B or C, the rabbit character 801 opens the treasure chest 810f and ball tm2 appears in a state where neither the Super Chance Arrival effect nor the All or Nothing effect is displayed in the main display area Dm of FIG. 301(b). On the other hand, if the player does not win the time-saving bonus but wins jackpot A and the All or Nothing effect is executed during the fortune time effect described above, the All or Nothing effect continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm on the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b), and the player can recognize that he or she has won jackpot A by seeing ball tm2.

After the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b) is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the determined jackpot type (not shown).

If the first special symbol that is changing does not win the time-saving feature and does not win the jackpot, the fortune time effect is executed, and if an all or nothing effect is executed in the fortune time effect, in which "All or nothing! Jackpot A? or Miss?" is displayed in the main display area Dm, the all or nothing effect continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 301(b). In this case, an effect is executed in which a ball with "Too bad" written on it appears from the treasure chest 810f, informing the player that the jackpot was not won.

In the embodiment, the fortune time effect is configured to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery (determining whether or not the time-saving lottery will be won in order to set a high probability state for normal symbols in the special symbol lottery), but this is not limited to this, and the player may be able to recognize the result of the time-saving lottery by displaying a specific character or background image.

In addition, for example, in the super chance arrival presentation shown in FIG. 300(a), the main display area Dm may be configured to display "Super chance arrival! If the jackpot pattern stops during the super chance display, there is a great chance of a 15R jackpot!", and if the super chance arrival presentation continues to be displayed until the jackpot winning notification screen appears, a 15R jackpot is confirmed, and if the super chance arrival presentation ends before the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, in other words, if the super chance arrival presentation is not displayed in FIG. 301(b), the player may be informed that the possibility of a 15R jackpot is low.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting the Super Chance Arrival effect to continue to be displayed during the period from when the Super Chance Arrival effect is executed to when the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, which increases the player's interest in the game and also prevents the player from feeling distrustful if a jackpot win is notified while the Super Chance Arrival effect is displayed, but the jackpot type is not a 15R jackpot.

In FIG. 301(b), the type of jackpot may be indicated by the display mode of ball tm2. For example, if the color of ball tm2 is rainbow colored, it may indicate jackpot A (15R jackpot with time reduction), and if it is blue, it may indicate jackpot C (5R jackpot without time reduction).

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the notification patterns when the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery are won will be described. FIG. 302 is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery (a determination of whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won to set a high probability state for normal symbols executed in the special symbol lottery) or the jackpot lottery (a determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won executed in the special symbol lottery) is won.

Figure 302 (a) is an example of a notification pattern when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, where during the pre-reach performance period, a fortune-telling time performance (see Figure 300 (a)) is executed, and the player is informed that they have won the time-saving win by displaying paper k1 (see Figure 300 (b)), which is a display mode for suggesting that they have won the time-saving win, and the "super chance arrival performance" (see Figure 300 (b)), which is a display mode for suggesting that they have won the time-saving win, is displayed, and after the reach performance period, a jackpot win notification screen is displayed, thereby notifying the player that they have won the jackpot. Therefore, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, the player will be able to recognize that they have won the time-saving win and the jackpot win.

Figure 302(b) is an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is won but the jackpot is not won; in this case, unlike the case of Figure 302(a), the fortune-telling time performance (see Figure 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach performance period, so the player is unable to know the results of the time-saving lottery, and the player is notified that he or she has not won the jackpot by the third symbol being displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has not been won after the reach performance. Therefore, if the time-saving lottery is won but the jackpot is not won, the player is unable to know the results of the time-saving lottery and can only recognize that he or she has not won the jackpot.

Figure 302(c) shows the notification pattern when the player does not win the time-saving feature but wins the jackpot. As mentioned above, except for some cases when jackpot A is won, the fortune time effect (Figure 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach performance period, so as with 302(b), the player is not informed of the result of the time-saving lottery, and is only notified that the player has won the jackpot when the third symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won after the reach performance. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot but does not win the time-saving feature, the player is not informed of the result of the time-saving lottery and can only recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

By configuring it this way, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, it becomes possible for the player to determine which game state was set when the jackpot was won. On the other hand, if a time-saving win is won but the jackpot is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game state that is set after the changing special pattern stops, which can lead to the player playing in the wrong way.

In the embodiment, the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature is executed during the pre-reach performance period, but this is not limited to this. For example, the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature (the effect to suggest that a win in the time-saving feature has been won) may be executed during the reach performance period, or the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature may be executed during the period when the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the time-saving winning indication effect does not occur during the pre-reach performance period, there is a possibility that the time-saving winning indication effect will be executed on the screen that notifies the player that a jackpot has been won. Therefore, even if the time-saving winning indication effect does not appear during the pre-reach performance period, the player can enjoy the changing display of the first special pattern while hoping for a time-saving winning without being disappointed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, if the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot, the player is not notified of the time-saving feature win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player may be notified of the time-saving feature win even if the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot. For example, in the embodiment, the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) is executed only when the time-saving feature win and the jackpot win overlap, so the player knows that the jackpot win has been won before the jackpot win is announced when the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) occurs. However, by executing the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) in some cases where the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot, the player is not confirmed to have won the jackpot even when the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) occurs, and the player can enjoy predicting the result of the jackpot lottery until the last moment when the result of the jackpot lottery is announced, which can improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example>
Next, the counters of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 303. Note that the counters used in the above control examples differ in that the update range of the counters is partially different, but the basic configuration is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

The first winning random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types: a first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1 for the first special pattern, and a second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2 for the second special pattern. The number of random numbers that will result in a big win is the same, but the number of random numbers that will result in a small win is set to be different (see FIG. 305). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a small win different, the player's expectation of receiving a special prize (a big win or a small win) can be made different between the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. The first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Now, referring to FIG. 305, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described. FIG. 305(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, FIG. 305(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1, and FIG. 305(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2. This first winning random number 7 table 202fa is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a big win and a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win are set in the drawing of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

Specifically, when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 305(b), the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 specifies that the values of the random number counter C1 between "0 and 4" are the jackpot determination values, and other values are specified as non-jackpot determination values (i.e., misses). Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4," it is determined to be a jackpot.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 305(c), the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 specifies that the value of the random number counter C1 is "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, "5 to 144" as the small jackpot determination value, and "145 to 999" as the other value (i.e., miss). Then, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value is any of "5 to 144", it is determined to be a small jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is reached, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the seventh control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state where the lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special symbol and during the big win game or small win game), the value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is not a random number that is determined to be a big win or small win for a special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that is determined to be a miss for a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for a special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a jackpot with a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a jackpot with a special pattern. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are stored in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 of the first winning random number 7 table 202fa as described above. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the seventh control example, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202b to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 306.

Figure 306 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in Figure 306 (a), the seventh control example has a special jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when determining the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a special jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the second special pattern (special pattern 2). As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by drawing the special pattern 1 can be made different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by drawing the special pattern 2, or the ratio at which each of the multiple types of jackpot types is selected can be made different, so that a game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and a game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) can be provided to the player with different playability, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 306(b), the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) will be explained. FIG. 306(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 306(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the jackpot type in the first jackpot type counter C2 is "jackpot A" if the random number value is any of "0 to 9", "jackpot B" if the random number value is any of "10 to 49", and "jackpot C" if the random number value is any of "50 to 99". When the time-saving state is set as the game state, if the random number value in the first winning type counter C2 is any of "0-9", the jackpot type is "jackpot D", if it is any of "10-49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and if it is any of "50-99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 10 random number values that select "Jackpot A", so the probability that "Jackpot A" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 10%.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is fewer than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 40 random number values are used to select "Jackpot B," so the probability that "Jackpot B" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a disadvantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 random number values will select "Jackpot C", so the probability that "Jackpot C" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Furthermore, compared to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state that is difficult to end. Therefore, it is a more advantageous jackpot type for the player than "Jackpot A," in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) which is set to the normal state, there is a 10% chance that a 15-round jackpot game will be selected, and a 90% chance that a 5-round jackpot game will be selected. In addition, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot will be selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends will transition to a time-saving state.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed while the time-saving state is set, 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected 50% of the time, and 5 rounds of jackpot play are selected 50% of the time. Also, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot play executed based on the winning jackpot.

In other words, winning a jackpot in the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in the normal state in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as for the game state at the time of winning a jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 306(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) will be explained. FIG. 306(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 306(c), when the random number value in the first jackpot type counter C2 is any value between "0 and 99," the jackpot type becomes "jackpot D." In other words, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type "jackpot D," which is the most advantageous for the player, is always selected.

In the seventh control example, the number of types of jackpots is four, but it is not limited to this, and it may be one type, or five or more types. Also, it may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is the same. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is hit with the second special symbol, by setting a jackpot type that is executed more rounds, it is possible to make the player more excited about a hit with the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make a hit in a high probability game state more advantageous for the player, and to improve the entertainment value of the game during the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to strongly motivate the player to move to the high probability state, and to make the player play for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation rate) of each jackpot type may be the same, and only the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be different. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of obtaining the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 by targeting a specific counter value from being carried out with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small win type counter C5 determines the type of small win when a special pattern small win occurs and determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the seventh control example), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which the lottery (change) of the special pattern can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special pattern and during the big win game or small win game).

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. If the result of the big win lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) for determining the type of small win to be executed is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the small win type selection 7 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 307. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 7 table 202ff. As shown in FIG. 307, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff stipulates that two types of small wins, A and B, are selected as the small win types of the second special pattern according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 89", the small win type is "small win A (jackpot A when V passes)", and when it is any of "90 to 99", the small win type is "small win B (jackpot B when V passes)".

Here, for each small win type (small win A, B), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during the small win game, the type of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends is set. In the case of small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win A is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times, or until the small win A is won once, or until the small win B is won three times) is set. In addition, in the case of small win B, the big win B (5R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win B is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times, or until the small win A is won once, or until the small win B is won three times) is set.

In this way, the content of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends and the game state that is set after the big win game can be changed depending on the type of small win selected. Specifically, small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (15R) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big win game ends, while small win B is set as the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and is less advantageous than the above-mentioned small win A, but a time-saving state is set after the big win game.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the seventh control example, the time-saving state can be ended with a time-saving end condition that is established based on the result of the second special pattern lottery (such as the number of times small prize A is won or the number of times small prize B is won), or a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) change. By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won with one or more reserved balls for the first special pattern and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state will not end even if the first special pattern (special pattern 1) changes after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes and a small win (small win A, small win B) that can execute a big win game is won, the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special symbol changes, and the time-saving state can be ended before the time-saving end condition is met, so that it is possible to suppress the repeated execution of a game in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through a specific area during a small win game until a favorable small win (small win A) is won during the time-saving state until the second end condition is met.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIG. 308(a). FIG. 308(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 308(a), the variation pattern 7 table 202fd defines the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and the time-saving variation pattern 7 table 202fd2 used when the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Figure 308 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 provided in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in Figure 308 (b), the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 defines the pattern type, lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with the variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "miss", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified to correspond to a short miss with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds in the range of "0 to 139", to correspond to a false miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "140 to 149", to correspond to various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the range of "150 to 179", and to correspond to a super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are associated with it, the range of "30 to 189" is associated with it, super reaches with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds are associated with it, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with it, special reaches with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds are associated with it.

Next, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and if the lottery result is a "big win or small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds.

In this way, depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, one of the change patterns with a change time between 7 seconds and 180 seconds is set, and by sending a command indicating this change pattern to the voice lamp control device 113, a change performance corresponding to the change time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.

Here, in the seventh control example, as described above, when a right-hand hit game is performed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for a first special symbol is performed, is performed. In the normal state configured in this way, a lottery for a second special symbol is performed when a player illegally enters a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. This makes it possible to suppress a situation in which a lottery for a second special symbol is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been performed during the normal state, it may be configured to notify the outside that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. In addition, if the second special symbol is drawn (varied) illegally, the system may be configured to forcibly create and display a losing drawing (variation) result as the result of the illegally drawn (varied) second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 308(b), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd1 is specified so that when the pattern type is special pattern 1 and the lottery result is a miss, the order of most likely to be selected is 7 seconds (selection rate of about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). Also, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the order of most likely to be selected is 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a correlation between the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not they will win a jackpot based on the selected fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).

In the seventh control example, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot that is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different variation pattern tables may be used when the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot A) and when the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating other jackpots is won. This allows the player to be interested in the variation time of the special symbols, since the longer the variation time set in the executed variation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to be for the player.

Also, the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a normal jackpot is won may be configured to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time more easily than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a guaranteed jackpot is won. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result when a jackpot is won with a short variation time, and keeps the player excited until the end even when a short variation time is selected.

Next, the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2 provided in the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIG. 309. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2. As shown in FIG. 309, the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2 defines the symbol type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 1-4, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short miss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short win with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a win with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range. In addition, if the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a medium miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; if the lottery result is a "small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 160," a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a range of "161 to 198," a medium and small win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; and if the lottery result is a "jackpot," a medium and large win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

Returning to FIG. 303, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). Also, when the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the seventh control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. Note that in the seventh control example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is configured to always be constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the second winning random number 7 table 202fc may be provided with two types: one for when the probability of a normal pattern is low (the period when the normal pattern is in its normal state), and one for when the probability of a normal pattern winning is higher than the low probability (the period when the normal pattern is in its time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a win can be changed between when the normal pattern has a low probability and when the normal pattern has a high probability.

When the ball passes through the normal start hole 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained and it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state. If the game state is in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for three seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for 30 seconds.

If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state, and if the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state and the time when the variable start of the second pattern is also in a time-saving state, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of times of the second ball entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the normal symbol variation time and the operation of the electric device 640a when a winning combination is selected (opening period and number of times the second ball entrance 640 is opened) are configured to be variable depending on the set game state. When the game state when the normal symbol starts to vary is in the time-saving state, the time of the variation display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to the normal state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second symbol that starts to vary during the time-saving state is a win and the time-saving state is also set at the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times) compared to other cases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A table (not shown) that stores random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In the seventh control example, the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a are set differently depending on the game state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change and the game state when the electric device 640a starts to operate based on the winning of the normal symbol. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a discrimination means may be provided that determines that the time-saving state is continuously set from the time when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change to the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means may be used to set the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a.

As described above, in the seventh control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player, the time-saving state must be set at both the start of the normal pattern change and the start of the operation of the electric role 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the normal state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the time-saving state was set, or when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the time-saving state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the normal state was set, the change of the second pattern executed based on the lottery of one second pattern and the operation of the electric role 640a span multiple game states, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of main process 7 (see Figure 325).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 304(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 304(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the big win type selection 7 table 202fb, the second win random number 7 table 202fc, the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, the release scenario 7 table 202fg, the time-saving win random number 7 table 202fh, and the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi as part of the fixed value data.

Incidentally, among the fixed value data stored in ROM 202, the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the big win type selection 7 table 202fb, the second win random number 7 table 202fc, the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, and the small win type selection 7 table 202ff have already been explained in detail, so explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is a data table that is referenced when multiple time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state are set differently for each type of jackpot that has been won. It is referenced when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 326), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 7 table 202fe will be explained with reference to FIG. 306(d). FIG. 306(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving 7 table 202fe. The seventh control example has jackpot types (jackpot A, B, D) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (a normal state is set), and as shown in FIG. 306(d), multiple time-saving end conditions are stipulated corresponding to each jackpot type.

The seventh control example has a first time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, a second time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize A is won in the special pattern lottery, and a third time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize B is won in the special pattern lottery.

As shown in FIG. 306(d), the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe specifies values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of a number of time-saving end conditions, and the value set as the first time-saving end condition described above is set in the time-saving counter 203h, the value set as the second time-saving end condition is set in the small win A counter 203fg, and the value set as the third time-saving end condition is set in the small win B counter 203fh.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot types A and B, the time-saving end condition is stipulated to be set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "1" in the small win A counter 203fg, and "3" in the small win B counter 203fh. In the case of jackpot D, the time-saving end condition is stipulated to be set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "2" in the small win A counter 203fg, and "10" in the small win B counter 203fh.

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the values to be set for the various counters described above are not specified for jackpot C in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe. In this way, by making the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific time-saving content even if the player is notified in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play with heightened motivation to play until the end (until the time-saving state ends).

In the seventh control example, the time-saving state is configured to end when a jackpot with a special symbol is won in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe. The time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the type of jackpot set, so it is omitted from the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe. However, the time-saving end condition described above (the time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot with a special symbol) may also be configured to specify a value in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving) is set even if the time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, but the time-saving end condition set for the second time-saving will be explained with reference to the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi described later. Note that in this seventh control example, the time-saving end condition for the time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set based on the time-saving prize being won is set with reference to the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi, not the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, but the invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving end condition corresponding to the second time-saving prize may be specified in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first to third time-saving end conditions is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end conditions. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the V winning device has been activated due to a small win (the sum of the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

In addition, the seventh control example uses control that ends the time-saving state when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, but it may also be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a number-of-time-saving end conditions satisfaction determination means that determines the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, and a condition-achievement determination means that determines whether the number of satisfied conditions determined by the number-of-time-saving end conditions satisfaction determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two), and to end the time-saving state (set the normal state) when it is determined by the condition-achievement determination means that the number of satisfied conditions has reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

The opening scenario 7 table 202fg is a data table that stores opening scenarios that are scenarios for the opening patterns (patterns that operate the various solenoids provided in each winning device) of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) that is executed when a jackpot or small winning is won by a lottery of special patterns, and the contents of the opening scenario are specified according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won or the small winning type set for the small winning.

In this way, by varying the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that opens depending on the winning result (big win or small win) and the type of win (big win type, small win type) and the content of the opening operation (opening scenario), the degree of advantage of the bonus game can be set in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big win or small win, the player can enjoy wondering which type of win he or she won.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202fg, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big win type, small win type), the opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of winning device that is opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), the round interval period (the period during which the winning device is closed between round games), the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special pattern variation is allowed)), and the on/off switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are respectively specified.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to jackpot A, and the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "15 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, when a jackpot type of jackpot A is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, is set, so that jackpot A is a jackpot that grants the most advantageous privilege to the player.

Next, for the winning types corresponding to jackpots B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "5 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, if a jackpot type corresponding to jackpots B and C is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the player is paid out about 1/3 of the prize balls in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A. In addition, in the case of jackpot type B, a time-saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so that jackpot B is a jackpot that is less advantageous than jackpot A and gives a more advantageous bonus than jackpot C.

The winning type corresponds to the big win D, and the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "V winning device 650" opening in the "1st round" and "variable winning device 65" opening in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round of play, the first round is "opened 12 times at 0.1 seconds with an interval of 0.5 seconds between each opening", and the 2nd to 15th rounds are "opened continuously for 29 seconds", the round interval period is "10 seconds" after the end of the 1st round and "1 second" otherwise, and the end interval period is "4 seconds".

In other words, the contents stipulated for the start interval period of the big win D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game content of the first round (opening/closing operation mode), and the inter-round interval period after the end of the first round) are configured to be the same as the contents stipulated for the small win game described below. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the winning game being executed this time is a big win game or a small win game until the timing when the first round ends (or, in the case of a small win game, until the timing when the small win game ends). This makes it possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small win and thought that a small win game is being executed.

In the seventh control example, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is set so that most of the time a small jackpot is won (see FIG. 305(c)). Therefore, a time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period when the second special symbol mainly changes, some kind of winning game starts after the special symbol changes are stopped. In this case, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the winning game starts with the same opening action, making it difficult for the player to know which win (jackpot or small jackpot) he or she has won.

In addition, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than that of winning a small jackpot, and a time-saving state is set to be granted after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D ends. Therefore, since a player who wins a jackpot will not be provided with a less favorable benefit than if they had won a small jackpot, a surprising game (a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D) can be made to be advantageous to the player, making it more exciting for the player.

When the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same presentation mode is executed as the variable display (variable presentation) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and in order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the lottery result from the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b that show the lottery result of the special pattern, the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be made different, or the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern may be synchronized, but the display mode or display area may be changed to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish the display of the third pattern at or around that stop display timing than during other periods, or the pattern for presentation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 may be switched from the third pattern to a normal pattern for presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern at the timing of the stop display of the special pattern.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b are arranged separately, and an effect display is executed on the third symbol display device 81 to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (the timing when the player is notified that he/she has won one of the winning symbols), or, as in the seventh control example, the display area of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is made smaller than that of the third symbol display device 81, so that the first symbol is more difficult to see than the third symbol. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result for this special symbol is a big win or a small win based on the stopped display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and allows the player to continue to expect that they have won a big win even during a winning game.

The contents stipulated for the win types corresponding to small win A and B include not only the small win game (1 round game), but also the opening scenario of the big win game (2 to 15 round game) that continues after the small win game ends when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during the small win game. This makes it possible to reliably match the small win game content of the selected small win type with the big win game content that can be executed after the small win game ends, so that appropriate play can be provided.

Specifically, for the small win type A, the start interval period is set to "1 second" for the small win game, the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 15th rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In addition, for the small win type B, the start interval period is set to "1 second" for the small win game, the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "second to fifth rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In other words, the big win game that can be executed after the small win game corresponding to small win B is completed is set to have fewer rounds than the big win game corresponding to small win A described above. Also, when the small win type is small win B, a time-saving state that is an advantageous game state for the player is set after the corresponding big win game is completed, so small win B is a small win that confers a less advantageous benefit than small win A.

Time-saving random number 7 table 202fh is a data table in which the value (judgment value) of the first winning random number counter C1, which is judged to be a time-saving win in the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, is specified in correspondence with the game state. Here, the contents of time-saving random number 7 table 202fh will be explained with reference to FIG. 310(a). FIG. 310(a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in time-saving random number 7 table 202fh.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol, when the game state is normal (low probability state for special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set to a range of "3, 4, 140 to 287" as the judgment value for a time-saving win, and for other game states, no judgment value for a time-saving win is set.

Here, in this seventh control example, the jackpot winning judgment and the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a single special pattern lottery. Also, the small prize winning judgment and the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a overlapping manner. Therefore, for example, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", a jackpot is judged in the jackpot judgment executed using the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)), and a time-saving winning judgment is judged in the time-saving winning judgment executed using the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)), so that a jackpot and a time-saving winning are won in a overlapping manner. Similarly, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "140 to 144," a small win is determined in the small win determination performed using the special pattern 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 (see FIG. 305(c)), and a time-saving win is determined in the time-saving win determination performed using the time-saving win random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)), resulting in a double win of both the small win and the time-saving win.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the jackpot (small jackpot) determination is performed after the time-saving winning determination is performed, so in the case of a double win, the jackpot (small jackpot) is won in the time-saving state. Therefore, a more advantageous bonus can be awarded to the player compared to winning the jackpot (small jackpot) without winning the time-saving state.

In this seventh control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in one special pattern lottery is used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is the winning determination value in either determination, a double win is possible; however, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the right to execute a special pattern lottery is acquired, the value of the random number counter for determining a big win (small win) and the value of the random number counter for determining a time-saving win may be obtained separately, and the obtained values may be used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win.

The time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in accordance with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1.

Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi will be explained with reference to FIG. 310(b). FIG. 310(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi. As shown in FIG. 310(b), the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi specifies a time-saving type corresponding to the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies a time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type.

Specifically, time-saving A is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, a time-saving end condition is specified in which "1" is set to the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A. In other words, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set when the process of updating the value of the special pattern time-saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set at the time of winning the time-saving state, and then a jackpot determination is performed in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set until the special pattern variation to show the result of the special pattern lottery begins.

In other words, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving feature only for the purpose of making the jackpot determination in the special pattern lottery during the time-saving feature (making a special lottery) during the time-saving feature. Therefore, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible for only the jackpot determination to be made during the time-saving feature without the player realizing that they have won the time-saving feature, so that if the player wins the jackpot, an unexpected bonus (the jackpot gameplay content, the time-saving feature after the jackpot game ends) can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 310(b), in this seventh control example, when a time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving prize type A is always set as the time-saving prize type, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, a time-saving prize type different from time-saving prize A may be selectable depending on the value of the acquired time-saving prize type selection counter CC1. In this case, for example, the time-saving prize type A is specified as the time-saving prize type for the range of the acquired time-saving prize type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 94", and the time-saving prize type Z different from time-saving prize A is specified as the time-saving prize type for the range of "95 to 99", and a time-saving prize end condition for setting the time-saving prize counter 203h (first time-saving prize end condition) to "100" is specified as the time-saving prize end condition corresponding to time-saving prize Z.

By configuring it in this way, in some cases where a time-saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving state for continuing to execute the second special symbol lottery, rather than a time-saving state for executing a special lottery, providing players with a more unexpected experience.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 304(b). Fig. 304(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 304(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh control example has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a big win start flag 203j, a big win in progress flag 203k, a small win type storage area 203fa, a small win start flag 203fb, a small win in progress flag 203fc, a V-pass big win type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a V-pass flag 203ff, a small win A counter 203fg, a small win B counter 203fh, and other memory areas 203z.

In other words, the difference is that a small win type storage area 203fa, a small win start flag 203fb, a small win mid-game flag 203fc, a V-pass big win type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a V-pass flag 203ff, a small win A counter 203fg, and a small win B counter 203fh have been added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 244(b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, but otherwise it is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The small win type storage area 203fa is a storage area for temporarily storing the small win type set for the small win that has been won. When it is determined that a small win has been won (S10306 in FIG. 317: Yes), the acquired small win type is temporarily stored (S10310 in FIG. 317). Then, when the number of V winning devices 650 opened during the small win game reaches a predetermined number (S11707 in FIG. 327: Yes) and it is determined that the V flag 203fe is not set to on (S11708 in FIG. 327: No), the stored small win type is referenced (S11709 in FIG. 327), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small win type is set. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the information (information for indicating the small win type) stored in the small win type storage area 203fa is configured to be cleared when the small win game ends.

The small win start flag 203fb is a flag that indicates that it is the start timing of a small win game. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). When it is determined that the small win start flag 203fb is ON and it is identified that it is the start timing of a small win game, it is set to OFF (S11703 in FIG. 327). This small win start flag 203fb is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The small win in progress flag 203fc is a flag that indicates that a small win is in progress. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end time of the small win (when it is determined that the play of the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is set to OFF (S11720 in FIG. 327). This small win in progress flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a storage area in which data is stored for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 during a small win game. When the variation of the special pattern that is determined to be a small win stops, the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the determined small win type (S10402 in FIG. 320). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is set to ON. At the end of the small win game, the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to off in the initial state, such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., if a power outage occurs.

When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during a small win game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203fe is set to ON, which corresponds to the type of big win corresponding to the type of small win game being played. At the end of the small win game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327), and if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327: Yes), the type of big win to be played is determined from the flag that is set to ON, and the start of the corresponding big win game is set (S11718 in FIG. 327). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., in the event of a power outage, etc.

The V passing flag 203ff is a flag used to determine whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON during a small win game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. In the seventh control example, most of the balls that enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and the V passing flag 203ff is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 323) corresponding to the ball that first enters the special discharge flow path 650e2 (S11207 in FIG. 323).

Then, in the V passing process (see FIG. 323), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203ff is set to on (S11201 in FIG. 323), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S11201 in FIG. 323: Yes), the process of S11202 to S11208 of the V passing process (see FIG. 323) is skipped. As a result, even if the V switch 650e3 detects multiple balls during one small win game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. This simplifies the process executed during the small win game, and prevents the V passing command from being sent multiple times to the voice lamp control device 113, which causes V passing management on the voice lamp control device 113 side to become complicated.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of times the special pattern changes until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (100) specified in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, the counter value is referred to in the update process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) executed in the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10601 in FIG. 319), and if it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (S10601 in FIG. 319: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k after the decrement is 0 (S10604 in FIG. 319: Yes), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10605 in FIG. 319). In addition, in the seventh control example, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is met (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of small wins is met), the counter value is set (reset) to 0 (S10505 in FIG. 321). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (first time-saving end condition) that references the value of the time-saving counter 203h is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win A counter 203fg is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win A set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (1) specified in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

And, when the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special symbol change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) determines that the small win type of the small win won this time is small win A (S10502 in FIG. 321: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. When the value of the small win A counter 203fg after decrement is determined to be 0 (S10504 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, in the seventh control example, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win A counter 203m is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win A counter 203m is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small win A counter 203m continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win B counter 203fh is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win B set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (3) specified in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

And, when it is determined that the type of the small win that was won this time is small win B in the small win time-saving update process (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10510 in FIG. 321: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203fh after decrement is 0 (S10512 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, in the seventh control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special pattern changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (third time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win B counter 203fh is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win B counter 203fh is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win B counter 203fh continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

Next, referring to FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of this seventh control example differs from the ROM 222 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db have been deleted and a lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa has been added. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in response to the variation time of the special pattern variation, and one mode is selected from multiple modes as a mode for suggesting (informing) the result of the special pattern lottery (the judgment result of the jackpot judgment and the judgment result of the time-saving win judgment). This lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is referenced in the special pattern 1 presentation mode setting process 7 (see S14893 in FIG. 328) for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation (special pattern 1 variable presentation) for showing the result of the first special pattern lottery (see S19502 in FIG. 328).

Now, referring to FIG. 312, the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa will be explained. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 312, the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa defines different lottery result notification modes corresponding to the game state at the time of the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination result, and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f, and the presentation mode for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is set using the selected notification mode.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the normal state, that is, when the time-saving win determination in the special symbol lottery does not result in a win in the time-saving win determination, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A (15R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 64", "time-saving non-win suggestion + jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the range of "65 to 79", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". Also, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "5 to 99". If the jackpot determination result is a "miss," a "jackpot non-winning notification" is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 98," and a "time-saving non-winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification" is specified for a value of "99."

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the time-saving state, that is, when the time-saving win is won in the time-saving win determination in the special pattern lottery, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A, D (15R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 89", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". Also, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". When the jackpot determination result is "miss", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the value of "10 to 99".

Next, referring to FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a performance counter 223e, a game status storage area 223f, a time-saving information update area 223g, a provisional win determination flag 223h, a provisional time-saving information update area 223i, a provisional time-saving end flag 223j, a time-saving lower limit flag 223k, a quasi-end condition flag 223m, a fluctuation flag before the end of the time-saving 223n, a status performance counter 223o, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation begins. When the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information based on the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is stored in this winning information storage area 223a in order from the first area. Note that the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is set when the pre-read process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) of the main control device 110 is executed, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) of the main control device 110.

Each piece of winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted one by one (the winning information stored in the second area is moved to the first area) (see S4904, S4908 in FIG. 182) each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to reliably know when the special pattern variation corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

In addition, since the winning information (special symbol pre-reading information) sent by the winning information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the special symbol change currently being executed), for example, when executing an effect (so-called pre-reading continuous effect) that uses the period from the start of the next special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command based on the reception of the winning information command, the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-mentioned pre-reading continuous effect ends.

In the seventh control example, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have the first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area, since it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64). However, if, for example, it is also configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information (winning information related to the second special pattern) that can be obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the winning information storage area 223a can be configured to have four areas (holding information areas) for the first special pattern and four areas (holding information areas) for the second special pattern in addition to the execution area.

The first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, like the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b (see S4182 in FIG. 262). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update the value in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The information contained in the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of reserved balls, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a, or information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1. When sending information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball count command, a calculation means may be provided that calculates and manages the current number of reserved balls based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command received by the voice lamp control device 113.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4204 in FIG. 262), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S4902, S4906 in FIG. 182). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4207 in FIG. 262), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4910 in FIG. 182). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (S4911 in FIG. 182).

The performance counter 223e is a counter used in a lottery to determine the performance contents of various performances executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated each time main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. In the seventh control example, the performance counter 223e has multiple loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and is configured to update the values of each counter without synchronization.

Specifically, for example, multiple counters are provided with different values that are updated each time main process 7 (see FIG. 325) is executed, and the updated values of each counter are not synchronized. Furthermore, a different value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value to be used in a lottery to determine the content of various effects.

The game status storage area 223f is an area for storing the game status corresponding to a status command when the status command regarding the game status is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game status) stored in this game status storage area 223f, the current game status can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In the seventh control example, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 erases data when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and therefore, when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the information indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 223f is also erased. However, in the seventh control example, a state command is set in the start-up process (main control device) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main control device 110 executed after the power supply is turned on (S11412 in FIG. 324), so that information indicating the game state set before the power supply is cut off is stored in the game state storage area 223f immediately after the power supply is restored. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the game state can always be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set (S10509 in FIG. 321, S10607 in FIG. 319, S11616 in FIG. 326, etc.).

The time-saving information update area 223g is a data area for storing the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times the events subject to the end conditions (for example, the change of the special pattern, the winning of a small win, or the winning of a big win) have been executed). The state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is selected based on the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223a (the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status). This time-saving information update area 223g sets the end conditions for terminating the current time-saving state when it receives a time-saving related command including time-saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, a time-saving setting information command that is determined to be the end timing of the ending performance (S11612 in FIG. 326) in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) of the main control device 110 and is set when the end conditions of the time-saving state are set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, in the time-saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), if it is determined that update information for updating the time-saving information (variation information indicating that a special pattern variation has been performed, or small win information indicating that a small win has been won) has been received (S2604 in FIG. 60: Yes, S2615 in FIG. 60: Yes), the current time-saving status is updated to correspond to the received update information.

To explain the data area in the time-saving information update area 223g in detail, the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to temporarily store information corresponding to each item that can be a condition for ending the time-saving state (for example, the number of times the first special pattern changes, the number of times the second special pattern changes, the total number of changes obtained by adding up the number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes, the number of wins for each small win type (small win A, B) (the number of times the V winning device 600 starts operating), the number of small wins (the total number of wins obtained by adding up the number of wins for each small win type), etc.), and is configured to store, for each item, time-saving setting information (the number of times the condition for ending the time-saving state is met) and update information for each item during the period in which the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it was actually executed).

In the seventh control example, the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223g is used to determine which of a plurality of termination conditions is more likely to be met than the other termination conditions, and to determine the number of remaining executions until each termination condition is met. Furthermore, the time-saving setting information and update information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g may be used to calculate, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the termination condition of each item included in the time-saving setting information, and the degree of time-saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

In the seventh control example, the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times already performed (number of variations, number of wins)), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to calculate the number of times remaining until the end condition of the time-saving state is met, and store information indicating the calculated remaining number of times in the time-saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the time-saving setting information and the update information are stored separately, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the information stored as the time-saving setting information may be directly updated. By configuring in this way, the capacity of the time-saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

The provisional win determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (winning information stored in reserve) before the lottery (variation) of the special pattern is executed includes winning information for winning the jackpot, and by being set to on, it indicates that the winning information stored in reserve includes winning information for winning the jackpot. This provisional win determination flag 223h is set to on when it is determined that the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control unit 110 contains winning information in the winning information related process executed when the winning information command acquired in the pre-reading process 5 of the main control unit 110 is received by the voice lamp control unit 113. Then, it is configured to be referenced in the winning information related process, and if it is determined that it is set to on, various determination processes for the winning information command received thereafter are skipped. It is also referenced in the performance setting process executed in the variable display setting process, and if it is determined that it is set to on, it is configured to skip the process for setting the display status display command indicating the status display mode.

As explained above, if the winning information contained in the received winning information command or the winning information reserved and stored at the end of the jackpot includes winning information for a jackpot, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information included in the winning information command newly received thereafter includes winning information for a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to a jackpot win, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

In the seventh control example, the system is configured to execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information when a new winning information command is received and when the big win game ends. However, at other times, for example, after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power outage or the like, the start-up process (main control device) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main control device 110 may be configured to set a return time winning information command to indicate each piece of winning information stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, and send all of them to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the return time winning information command, it may execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information described above.

In the seventh control example, when a new winning information command is received or when the jackpot game ends, the process of determining the contents of the winning information is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the winning information may not be determined when a predetermined prohibition condition is met. In this case, the predetermined prohibition condition may be, for example, a performance mode prohibition condition that is met when the pachinko machine 10 has multiple performance modes and one of the performance modes is set, a stuck-in prohibition condition that is met when a non-jackpot (miss) is consecutively obtained a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) as a result of the special pattern lottery, a continuous performance prohibition condition that is met while a continuous performance that is executed across multiple special pattern variations based on the jackpot lottery result (win/lose judgment result) included in the winning information is being executed, or a multiple-occurrence prohibition condition that is met during a predetermined period after the continuous performance ends (for example, the period until the special pattern variation is executed twice).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set periods during which an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) according to the contents determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and periods during which it cannot be executed, so that the player can maintain their sense of anticipation of a big win even if the look-ahead effect is not executed. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is reduced when the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met, and to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is increased rather than necessarily determining the contents of the winning information when the prohibition conditions are not met. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player cannot know whether the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met or not.

The provisional time-saving information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing time-saving information (provisional time-saving information) that has been updated in advance in accordance with the winning information included in the winning information command. In the seventh control example, the provisional time-saving information stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i is referenced to make it possible to determine in advance the timing at which the time-saving state will end.

As explained above, when the time-saving end condition is met based on the winning information contained in the received winning information command, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information contained in the winning information command newly received thereafter contains winning information for winning a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, when it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on the winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

The time-saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of times the special pattern changes has reached a predetermined number, for an end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes, and by being set to on, indicates that the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number.

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON depending on the progress until the time-saving end condition is met, and configuring the presentation style to vary depending on the setting status of the flag, it becomes possible for the player to predict the timing when the time-saving end condition will be met. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the presentation that suggests the timing when the time-saving state will end.

In the seventh control example, the progress until the time-saving end condition is met is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) that can identify the state every time the special pattern is changed 10 times while the time-saving state is set is provided, and the presentation mode can be changed according to the flag (counter).

The semi-end condition flag 223m is a flag that indicates that the number of times the special pattern has changed has reached a predetermined number, for the end condition that is established based on winning a small prize by drawing a special pattern, and by being set to on, indicates that the number of times the special pattern has changed during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number.

The fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is a flag for indicating that a fluctuation before the time-saving state ends (the time-saving end condition is satisfied) will be executed, and by being set to on, it indicates that the fluctuation immediately before the time-saving state ends will be executed. Specifically, it is set to on when there is only one period (number of fluctuations) remaining until the time-saving end condition, which is set based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is satisfied among the multiple time-saving state end conditions that are set. By executing the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 182) while this fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is set to on, it becomes possible to determine that the fluctuation is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, and a performance corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time-saving state can be executed.

In the seventh control example, the time-saving end before change flag 223n is set to determine whether the change before the time-saving end is completed (executed). In addition, for example, a configuration is provided that can reserve and store the winning information of the second special pattern, and a pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 259) is executed for the reserved and stored winning information, a winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading process is received, and the winning information of the second special pattern that wins the small prize is determined in advance based on the winning command received. Then, based on the result of the pre-determination, a configuration may be added in which the time-saving end before change flag 223n is turned on when a change before the special pattern change that wins the small prize that establishes the end condition of the time-saving state is executed. This makes it possible to reliably determine the special pattern change that is one before the time-saving end condition is established in a gaming machine that has multiple time-saving end conditions.

The status effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries that are used when setting the effect modes of various effects executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The status effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. Note that detailed configuration is omitted as it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above.

In this way, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (win/lose determination result, setting status of various flags), the display mode selected based on a randomly updated value (value of state presentation counter 223o) can be further divided into more detailed categories, thereby diversifying the display modes and preventing the player from easily understanding the current game state (update status of the time-saving state) based on the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, referring to FIG. 313, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 313, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, as described above, in the normal state (normal state), a left-handed game is played and a special 1 (special pattern 1) game is played aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Here, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special pattern lottery is executed, a judgment is first made as to whether or not the time-saving win has been made. Then, if it is judged that the time-saving win has not been made in the judgment of the time-saving win, a jackpot judgment is made for the first special pattern lottery while the game state remains in the normal state. Then, when a jackpot of the first special pattern is won in the normal state, a different game state is entered after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot that has been won.

Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state will be set again after the jackpot ends, and if the type of jackpot won is jackpot A or jackpot B, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, and if a jackpot is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 295, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured so that a ball does not (is difficult to) enter the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-hand hit game is performed during the normal state (normal game), so the act of executing the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state is considered as a fraudulent act, and this is a measure to prevent a player who has committed a fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. As will be described later, in the seventh control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to allow a player to play a lottery (game) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol during the time-saving state, so there was a risk of a player committing a fraudulent act and drawing the second special symbol. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to draw the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the seventh control example does not have a configuration for retaining and storing winning information for the second special symbol (winning information obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640), so, for example, during the time-saving state (when the electric device 640a is likely to be operated to the protruding position), the winning information for the second special symbol is not retained and stored, and a lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is not executed during the normal state based on the retained winning information. This makes it possible to reliably prevent a lottery (variation) for the second special symbol from being executed when the normal state is set as the game state during normal play.

On the other hand, if the time-saving feature is selected in the first special symbol lottery that is executed while the normal state is set (if the time-saving feature is selected as the result of the time-saving feature selection judgment), the jackpot determination is executed in the time-saving feature. If the jackpot is selected in the jackpot determination executed in this state, the time-saving feature is set at 100% after the jackpot play ends. Also, if the time-saving feature is selected as the result of the time-saving feature selection executed in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving feature ends when the first special symbol variation that indicates the result of the first special symbol lottery begins, and the normal state is set, so play in the normal state (left-handed play) continues.

When the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set so that it continues for the period during which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by the opening (protruding) action of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, so that a right-hand hit game is played and a special 2 game is executed, aiming for the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the second special symbol is selected to win a small prize (140/1000 chance of winning), the V winning device 650 is opened for the small prize game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), starting the big prize game. In the seventh control example, if a big prize game is set (executed) via a small prize game, the game state is always set to a time-saving state after the big prize game ends. This configuration makes it possible to eliminate discomfort for players who win a big prize via a small prize game.

In the seventh control example, the small prize type (small prize A, B) that is set when a small prize is won by drawing the second special pattern is set so that a small prize game is executed in which the probability that the ball will pass through a specific area during the small prize game (the probability that the V switch 650e3 will detect the ball) differs.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the end conditions (time-saving end conditions) for terminating the time-saving state set based on winning the big prize are set as follows: a fluctuation count end condition (first time-saving end condition) that is met when the number of fluctuations (number of draws) of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) reaches a specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and an operation count end condition (second time-saving end condition) that is met when the number of wins of the small prize (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on winning the small prize) as a result of the drawing of the special pattern (second special pattern) reaches a specified number of operations.

The second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the type of small win (the small win game to be executed) that is set when a small win is won.

In addition, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if a player wins a jackpot lottery for a special symbol (wins a single type) or wins a small jackpot in a special symbol lottery and, during a small jackpot game (small jackpot game according to the type of small jackpot) corresponding to the small jackpot won, the ball passes through a specific area and a jackpot is won (wins a double type) before the first time-saving end condition or the second time-saving end condition described above is met, the time-saving state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if either the first time-saving end condition (end condition according to the number of times the special pattern changes) or the second time-saving end condition (end condition according to winning a small prize (operation of the V winning device 650)) described above is met before winning one type or two types of prizes, the game state will transition (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example configured in this way can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time-saving state (possibility of the second time-saving end condition being met) and the possibility of winning a double prize, if a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed when the time-saving state is set. This can increase the player's interest in the game that is executed during the time-saving state (the lottery for the second special symbol), and improve the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 313, when the time-saving state is set and a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a result that is disadvantageous to the player in the "first special symbol fluctuation (lottery) during the time-saving state" that can be executed when the normal state is set as the game state, that is, when left-handed play is being performed and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) for the first special symbol is the upper limit (4), a jackpot is won, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot is won.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 314 to Fig. 327. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process 7 that is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in the seventh control example), and an NMI interrupt process that is started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the start-up process (main control device) 7 and the main process 7 will be explained. Note that, among the control processes executed by the main control device 110 in this seventh control example, the same process contents as those of the fifth control process described above will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Figure 314 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S10101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S10102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the values (not shown) of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, the small win type counter C5, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 are updated (S10103). Specifically, the values (not shown) of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, the small win type counter C5, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively, in the seventh control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CC1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, the special pattern change process 7 is executed (S10104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, the start winning process associated with a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S10105). Details of the special pattern change process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal pattern change process, which is a process for displaying on the second pattern display device 83, is executed (S10106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S10107). The details of the start winning process (S10105), the normal pattern change process (S10106), and the through gate passing process (S10107) are the same as the start winning process, the normal pattern change process, and the through gate passing process in the fifth control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted. After the through gate passing process (S10107), the V entrance passing process associated with the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S10108). Then, the V passing process associated with the entry into the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S10109). Details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 322 and 323.

Then, the launch control process is executed (S10110), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S10111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 315, the special pattern change process 7 (S10104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process 7 (S10104). This special pattern change process 7 (S10104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 7 (S10104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S10201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and includes the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during which the jackpot game is in progress (round game period), and the grace period (ending period) until the round game period ends and the next lottery (variation) of a new special symbol begins.

To determine whether or not a jackpot is currently being won, specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. If it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol is currently being won (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot, i.e., if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to on (set to off) (S10201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S10202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S10202: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S10206). After the special pattern 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), then since there are currently no reserved balls of the second special pattern that would initiate the fluctuation (lottery), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), this process for executing the special pattern variation is terminated since there are currently no reserved balls of the first special pattern that would initiate the variation (lottery).

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10213). After the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, the processes of the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S10202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b has elapsed (S10211). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S10215: No), that is, if the current time is during the change period of the special pattern, the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the change time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10215: Yes), a display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10252) described later with reference to FIG. 318. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the seventh control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first pattern display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stopped pattern for a predetermined period in this way, unlike when the changing pattern is displayed for an instant, the player can be sure to recognize the content of the first pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In the seventh control example, the predetermined period (fixed period) during which the stopped state of the first symbol is displayed is set to 0.5 seconds, but other configurations may be used. For example, if a flashing display is performed in which the lit state and the off state are repeated to indicate that the first symbol is changing, then the fixed period can be set to a period longer than the period of one lit display when the flashing display is performed (for example, 0.2 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is changing or stopped (fixed).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol (the current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot in progress flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special symbol determination command is set (S10221), and the process ends.

In other words, in the seventh control example, as explained in the process of S10220, when a special symbol is won as a jackpot, the time-saving state is configured to end at a timing between the end of the variation of the special symbol (the end of the final display of the first symbol) and the start of the jackpot game. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of a special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the seventh control example described above, the time-saving state may end at the start of the variation of the special symbol that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special symbol is displayed stationary (the timing when the final display starts). In addition, the time-saving state may end at the start of the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot, or a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the start of the round game when the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning a jackpot with a special symbol (the timing for establishing the time-saving end condition that is established when a jackpot with a special symbol is won) may be configured to be preset to only one of the multiple timings mentioned above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at a different timing depending on the type of jackpot won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol starts to change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state has ended (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state has been set, or whether the time-saving state has ended because a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation display (changing display) of the third symbol that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed when the time-saving state ends, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by setting different times for the time-saving end conditions to be met for each of the multiple jackpot types (time to end the time-saving state when a jackpot is won), it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol based on the time-saving state end timing. Note that, as part of the times for the time-saving end conditions to be met that are set for each of the multiple jackpot types, a time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be set that notifies the player that the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol this time is a jackpot when the player identifies the time when the time-saving state has ended, in other words, the time-saving state ends only when the time-saving end condition that is met due to winning a jackpot is met.

By configuring it in this way, you can know when the time-saving state ends and quickly find out that you've won the jackpot, lengthening the period during which you can feel superior. To further enhance this effect, it's a good idea to configure the end of the time-saving state for the jackpot described above to be in the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special pattern fluctuation is executed to when the special pattern fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10218 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). If it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is a small win (S10222: Yes), the small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.

As explained above, the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) of the seventh control example is configured to determine whether the selection (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met (processing of S10204 in FIG. 315) in priority over whether the selection (variation) conditions for the first special symbol are met. This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, is variable (easy to vary) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is non-variable (hard to vary) when the normal state is set, making it a special symbol that is more difficult to vary (draw) than the first special symbol.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the conditions for selecting (changing) the first special pattern and the conditions for selecting (changing) the second special pattern are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control unit 110), the first special pattern will begin to change in preference to the second special pattern, which is more difficult to change (draw), causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is favorable to the player (to make it easier to win a small prize) than the lottery (variation) for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the lottery (variation) conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control device 110), the first special symbol will start to change in preference to the second special symbol, which is less likely to change (draw), causing a problem of greater discomfort.

In contrast, in the seventh control example, when executing the process to start the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selection (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the seventh control example) that has a higher added value for the player (the probability of winning a small prize is higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is difficult to actually execute the selection (variation)) are determined with priority (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be prevented.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208). As shown in FIG. 316, time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) differs from time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in the fifth control example described above in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery and the data table referenced when determining the lottery result of the time-saving lottery (whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won) are different, but otherwise it is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S18103), and if it is determined that it is not normal (time-saving state) (S18103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is normal (S18103: Yes), the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (S18104), and it is determined whether the time-saving win has been won (S18105). If it is determined that the time-saving win has been won (S18105: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 1 based on the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi (S18106), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that the time-saving win has not been won in the process of S18105 (S18105: No), this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this seventh control example, the condition for executing the time-saving winning judgment is that the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, regardless of the type of special pattern. The pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example is configured to be able to set two game states: the normal state and the time-saving state. In other words, in the seventh control example, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is executed in all special pattern lotteries that are executed when the time-saving state is not set. This allows the player to play while always having the possibility of the time-saving state being set.

As mentioned above, in this seventh control example, if a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state that is set based on the time-saving win is set only during the period in which the jackpot determination is performed in the special pattern lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not they have won the time-saving win unless they win the jackpot.

Next, the processing contents of special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 317. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol determination process 7 (S10209). Special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is a process executed after time-saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) is executed in the above-mentioned special symbol change process 7 (see S10104 in FIG. 315), and a process for determining a big win (small win) in the special symbol lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 317, this special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) differs from special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) in the fifth control example described above in that it adds a process that is executed when a small win is determined, but is otherwise identical. Detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted. Note that in FIG. 317, for ease of explanation, different symbols are used for the same processing content as the special symbol determination process 5 described above (see S251 in FIG. 253), but the processing content is the same for processes with the same description.

When the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is executed, first, data on the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S10301), the lottery result (jackpot (small jackpot) determination result) is obtained based on the first winning random number 7 table 202fh (S10302), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot win (S10303). If it is determined that it is a jackpot win (S10303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot win (S10304), and the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S10305), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10303 that the big prize has not been won (S10303: No), then it is determined whether a small prize has been won (S10306). If it is determined that a small prize has been won (S10306: Yes), the result of the special pattern lottery is set to a small prize (S10307), and the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired prize type counter (first prize type counter C2) (S10308), and this process ends.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the process of S10305 and the process of S10308 are configured to set different winning patterns depending on whether or not the time-saving feature has been won in the special pattern lottery. In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be able to set a display mode that combines the presence or absence of a time-saving feature win and a winning feature (a big win or a small win) as the display mode of the special pattern to show the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 318, the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210). As shown in FIG. 318, the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is configured to execute the update process 7 (S8253) before setting the start of the special pattern change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the special pattern change starts.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, update process 7 (S8253) is configured to be executed between the selection of the special pattern variation pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery and the actual start of the special pattern variation. Therefore, since the special pattern variation pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery can be selected in accordance with the game state at the time the special pattern lottery is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the current game state based on the executed special pattern variation pattern, even if the game state changes as a result of execution of update process 7 (S8253).

In addition, even if a special pattern change is executed after the time-saving state ends, if a special pattern lottery corresponding to that special pattern change is executed during the time-saving state, the change pattern of the special pattern change can be determined using a data table referenced during the time-saving state. Therefore, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a bonus that can only be granted based on a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, a special effect to indicate that the bonus will be granted can be smoothly executed simply by defining a special effect corresponding to the change pattern of the special pattern change selected during the time-saving state.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to execute update process 7 (S8253) before the process of S8252 in FIG. 318 is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns for the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent a determination as to whether or not a jackpot determination for a special symbol lottery has been executed during the time-saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is executed, it is first determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201). If it is determined in the process of S8201 that a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 306(a)) (S8251), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win, i.e., whether or not a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209). If it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209: Yes), the type of small win is determined by referring to the small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) (S8254), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win of the special symbol is not set, that is, a miss of the special symbol is set (S8209), the process of S8254 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

In the process of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203). Next, the current game state (normal state, time-saving state) is identified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the identified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the data table contained in the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308(a)) read in the process of S8252 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S8207), and update process 7 is executed (S8253). A detailed explanation of update process 7 (S8253) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319. Then, the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of the stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 319, the processing contents of update process 7 (S8253) executed in special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see S10210 in FIG. 318) will be explained. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 7 (S8253). In this update process 7 (S8253), similar to update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a process for updating information relating to the termination condition for terminating the gaming state (time-saving state), a process for determining whether the updated information satisfies the termination condition, and a process for terminating the gaming state (time-saving state) when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied are executed.

As shown in FIG. 319, in this seventh control example, the game state can be set to either a normal state or a time-saving state, so in update process 7 (S8253), information relating to the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is updated, and processing based on the updated information is executed. In other words, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving end condition has been met, and a process is executed to end the time-saving state based on the determination result (a process to clear the values of various counters referenced when determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met).

This update process 7 (S8253) is executed within the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for updating the number of time-saving cycles and setting the game status to the normal status.

When update process 7 (S8253) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving period is currently in progress (S10601). In the process of S10601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving period is not in progress (S10601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving period is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, a remaining time-saving count command is set indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1) (S10603). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) described later.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh are set to 0 (S10606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S10607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special pattern change processing 7 (see FIG. 315).

As explained above, in the seventh control example, the existence of the time-saving end condition (change count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern changes is determined by the update process 7 (see FIG. 319), and the existence of the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern has been small won is determined by the small win time-saving update process 7 (see FIG. 321). In any of the processes, if any of the multiple time-saving end conditions set in the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions are all set to a value (0) for indicating the state in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of which time-saving end condition is satisfied, the processing contents for terminating the time-saving state can be unified.

In the seventh control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition, various counters are set to values indicating each time-saving end condition when the time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition is determined, the values of the various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time-saving end condition is established. However, it is also possible to set the values of various counters to 0 when the time-saving state is set, and when the corresponding time-saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that the counter value after the increment is a value indicating the time-saving end condition, the time-saving state is terminated. In other words, it is sufficient to provide a configuration that includes a means for determining whether the time-saving end condition is established and an update means for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition (such as the number of times the special pattern changes or the number of times a small jackpot is won) when the time-saving state is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 320, the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process 7 (S10223). This small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is a process executed within the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and sets the start of the small win game based on the small win type (small win A, B), and executes a process for updating the time-saving information according to the small win that has been won (update process for the win count end condition).

When the small win game starts, this pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state where a ball can (easily) win a prize, and when the ball that wins the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big win game is executed (set) after the small win game ends.

In other words, the game state in which the small win game is executed is configured to be an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and an advantageous state in which the possibility of executing a big win game is higher than in the normal game state. Note that, as will be described in detail later, in the seventh control example, a different small win game is executed according to the small win type (small win A, B) that is set when a small win is won, and the possibility of the ball passing through a specific area during a small win game differs depending on each small win type.

By configuring it in this way, the possibility (expectation) of a big win game (two types of win) being played (set) can be changed depending on the small win game that is played, so players can be interested not only in whether or not they will win a small win, but also in the type of small win they win, which can increase the excitement of the game.

When the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small win type is set (S10401). After that, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10402). More specifically, based on the small win type and the small win type selection table 202ff, the V-passing jackpot type (a jackpot game that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game) is determined. As described above, if the small win type is A, it is determined to be a jackpot A (a jackpot with 15 rounds of time reduction), and if the small win type is B, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot with 5 rounds of time reduction) (see FIG. 307). In other words, in the seventh control example, the content of the jackpot (two types) that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small jackpot game and the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot (one type) is won by drawing a special pattern are the same, so that when a two types jackpot is won (when the ball passes through a specific area), the jackpot type (jackpot A or B) that is set for the one type jackpot is set according to the type of small jackpot that was executed.

In this way, when a 2-kind win is obtained, a jackpot type is set and a process is executed to start the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type. This makes it possible to standardize the process related to the jackpot game when a 1-kind win is obtained and when a 2-kind win is obtained, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 110.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the seventh control example, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when a 1-type jackpot is won, or only when a 2-type jackpot is won, or it may be configured to execute different jackpot game processes for a 1-type jackpot and a 2-type jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 320, the explanation will be continued. After the process of S10402 is completed, the start of the small win is set based on the small win type (S10403), and the small win start flag 203fb and the small win in progress flag 203fc are set to ON (S10404). After that, the small win time-saving update process 7 is executed (S10405), and this process ends. This small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) is for executing a process for updating the time-saving information corresponding to the winning count end condition, which is the end condition of the time-saving state that can be established when a small win is won, and a process for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the winning count end condition is established by updating the time-saving information, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 321.

Now, referring to FIG. 321, we will explain the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405). This small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) is a process executed in the small win start setting process 7 (see FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process that updates the time-saving information based on the small win that has been won, and updates the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the time-saving end condition is met.

In the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time-saving state. In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S10501: No), since the small win has been won in a game state other than the time-saving state, this process is skipped in its entirety to update the time-saving information, and this process is terminated. In addition, since the seventh control example is configured so that the small win cannot be won (the lottery (variation) of the second special pattern is not executed) except in a state in which the time-saving state is set, if it is determined in the process of S10501 that the time-saving state is not set, an error command for executing an error notification (abnormal notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S10501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, that the time-saving state is set (S10501: Yes), it is next determined whether the small win type of the small win that has been won this time is "small win A" (S10502). Here, in the process of S10502, the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203fa in the process of S10310 of the special pattern determination process 7 (see FIG. 317) is read out and determined.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that the type of the current small win is "small win A" (S10502: Yes), the value of the small win A counter 203fg is decremented by 1 (S10503), and it is determined whether the value of the small win A counter 203fg after the decrement is 0 (S10504). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S10504: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to small win A) has been met with the current small win, so the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which measured the period until the variable count end condition is met, is set to 0 (S10505), and the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh, which measured the various win count end conditions, are each set to 0 (S10506), and the game state is set to the normal state (S10507).

By executing the above-mentioned processes of S10505 to S10507, when one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of the counters for measuring the period until the other time-saving end conditions are satisfied can be set to values indicating that the time-saving end conditions have been satisfied. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the execution of processes for updating the time-saving information (processes for updating the values of the small win A counter 203fg, the small win B counter 203fh, and the time-saving counter 203h) after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state). This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary processes from being executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

In the seventh control example, when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the multiple time-saving end conditions are simply set to 0 (a value indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied). Therefore, after the time-saving state ends, it is not possible to determine which time-saving end condition was satisfied to end the previous time-saving state. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the satisfied time-saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time-saving end condition satisfied in the past and the number of times it was satisfied may be determined.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to determine the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of times it is met, and to suggest (notify) the player of the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the determined content. Furthermore, it is possible to configure it so that the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to other time-saving end conditions when one time-saving end condition is met (for example, the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh at the time when the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to meet, that is, the time-saving end condition that has the largest value of time-saving information at the time when one time-saving end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions, can be determined.

After completing the processing of S10507, a remaining time-saving count command corresponding to the subtracted value of each small win counter is set (S10508), a status command indicating the current game status is set (S10509), and this processing ends. Here, the commands set in S10508 and S10509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) described below. The voice lamp control device 113 manages time-saving information based on the received remaining time-saving count command, and sets a status display mode to indicate (indicate) the time-saving status (the period until the time-saving status ends). It also grasps the current game status based on the received status command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10504 that the value of the small win A counter 203fg is not 0 (S10504: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508.

Returning to the above-mentioned process of S10502, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that the type of the small prize won this time is not "small prize A" (it is "small prize B") (S10502: No), it is then determined whether the type of the small prize won this time is "small prize B" (S10510). If it is determined that it is "small prize B" (S10510: Yes), the value of the small prize B counter 203fh is decremented by 1 (S10511), and then it is determined whether the decremented value of the small prize B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512).

If it is determined in the process of S10512 that the value of the small win B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to the small win B) has been met with the current small win, so the process proceeds to the process of S10505 described above, and the process for ending the time-saving state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10512 that the value of the small win B counter 203fh is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S10512: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508.

In the process of S10510, if the type of the small win that has been won this time is not "small win B" (S10510: No), the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508, since the time-saving state will not end due to the small win this time.

As explained above, in the seventh control example, when the variation time of the special symbol that won the small win has elapsed, the counter value corresponding to the small win is subtracted, and it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) that is established based on the small win is established. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to end the time-saving state based on the win count end condition before the small win game is played. Therefore, regardless of whether the time-saving end condition, the variation count end condition or the win count end condition, is established, it is possible to prevent a large difference in the timing to end the time-saving state.

Specifically, in the seventh control example, if the fluctuation count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is met, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the final display of the special pattern (first pattern) ends, and if the winning count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition based on the number of times a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, is met, the time-saving state is configured to end at the set start timing of the small prize game after the final display of the special pattern (first pattern).

In other words, regardless of which time-saving end condition is met, the time-saving state ends immediately after the corresponding special symbol stops changing. This makes it difficult for the player to tell which time-saving end condition was met to end the currently set time-saving state. In order for the player to determine whether the time-saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the normal symbol (second symbol) change time and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a. However, by setting the time-saving state to end when the small win start is set (just before the small win game starts) as in the seventh control example, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time-saving state has ended immediately after the small win game starts.

In the seventh control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at approximately the same timing (a concept including a time difference that is difficult for a player to distinguish) when either the variable count end condition or the winning count end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the time-saving state may be ended immediately after the special pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed when the variable count end condition is met, and the time-saving state may be ended after the small win game that is executed after the special pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed when the winning count end condition is met. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state can be set for the period during which the small win game is being played.

Therefore, during the small win game, the player cannot determine whether the time-saving state has ended due to the current small win win, and it is difficult to know whether the time-saving state has ended until the small win game ends (until the game result of whether or not a 2-type win has been won is announced). Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 having a gameplay that allows a 2-type win to be won during a small win game, as in the 7th control example, by configuring the machine to notify the player whether or not the time-saving state has ended after the small win game ends, the player will play while predicting whether the current small win game is based on a small win that ends the time-saving state, and this makes it possible to always aim for a 2-type win in the small win game that is executed during the time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 322, the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V entrance passage process (S10108), first it is determined whether the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S11101). If it is determined in the process of S11101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is not on (S11101: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is on (S11101: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning entrance 650a is in an open period (S11102).

If it is determined in the process of S11102 that the V winning port 650a is open (S11102: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S11103) and this process is terminated. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V entrance passage. This makes it possible to execute a performance during a small win game based on a ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 313).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S11102: No), this means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small win game, so an error command is set (S11104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S11105), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 323, the V passing process (S10109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S10109). This V passing process (S10109) is a process executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203ff is on (S11201). If it is determined in the process of S11201 that the V passing flag 203ff is on (S11201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that the V passing flag 203ff is not on (S11201: No), it is determined whether or not there has been a V passing (S11202). In other words, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. If it is determined in the process of S11202 that there has been no V passing (S11202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S11202 that a V pass has occurred (S11202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V pass valid period is in progress (S11203). If it is determined that the V pass valid period is in progress (S11203: Yes), the V pass jackpot type value stored in the V pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is obtained (S11204), and the V flag 203fe indicating the obtained V pass jackpot type is set to on (S11205). Then, a V pass command is set (S11206).

Next, the V passing flag 203ff is set to ON (S11207). After that, the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S11208), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11203 that the V-pass valid period is not in progress (S11203: No), an error command is set (S11209) and this processing is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V-entry switch (V switch) 650e3 when the V-pass valid period is not in progress, this is considered to be an instance where the ball has illegally entered the V-entry switch 650e3. In this case, an error command is set in the processing of S11209, and an error output is executed, making it possible to discover any illegal activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 324, the start-up process (main control device) 7 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing this start-up process (main control device) 7. This start-up process (main control device) 7 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial settings associated with power-on are executed (S11401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in the seventh control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S11402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S11403).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S11404), and if it is turned on (S11404: Yes), processing proceeds to S11415. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405), and if it is not stored (S11405: No), there is a possibility that processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, and in this case too, processing proceeds to S11415.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S11405: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S11406). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S11407: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, processing also proceeds to S11415. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S11515 in FIG. 325, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 has been saved correctly.

In the processing of S11415, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S11415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S11416, S11417).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S11416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S11417). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S11410.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), power outage information is stored (S11405: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S11407: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S11408) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S11409), and processing proceeds to S11410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S11410, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S11411), and a state command based on the read value is set (S11412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S11413). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S11414), and the process proceeds to main process 7, which will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 325, we will explain main processing 7, which is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing (main control device) 7. FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing this main processing 7. In this main processing 7, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S11501 to S11508 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S11511 and S11512 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S11501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S10101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) or the start winning process (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S11501), a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command (S11602), the number of rounds command (S11607), and the ending command set in the big win control process 7 (Fig. 326, S11504) are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 (S11611). In addition, when a ball is to be launched, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S11502). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

After updating the variable type counter CS1 (S11502), the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S11503), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a jackpot control process is executed to execute a jackpot performance and to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S11504). In the jackpot control process 7 (S11504), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650). Then, when any of these conditions is met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in the seventh control example, the big win control process 7 (S11504) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, when the special symbol is in the small win state, various effects according to the small win are executed, and the small win control process 7 is executed to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S11505). In the small win control process 7 (S11505), the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have entered the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650). When any of these conditions are met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the seventh control example, the small win control process 7 (S11505) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S11506). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S822 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S821 or the process of S823 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) (S11507). In the first pattern display update process (S11507), when a change pattern is set by the process of S8206 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b. In the seventh control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that main process 7 (see Figure 325) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process (S11507), when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the process of S8206 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) has ended, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (see FIG. 294) is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b in the display mode set by the process of S10305 or S10308 of the special pattern determination process 7 (see FIG. 317).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S11508). In the second pattern display update process (S11508), when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S815 or S816 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), a change display is started in the second pattern display device 83. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which a "○" pattern and an "X" pattern are alternately lit as the second pattern. In addition, in the second pattern display update process (S11508), when a stopped display is set on the second pattern display device 83 by the process of S818 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the change display being performed on the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (illuminated display) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S11509). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S11509: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process 7 has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the seventh control example) has elapsed since the start of this main process 7 (S11510). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S11510: Yes), the process proceeds to S11501, and each process from S11501 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process 7 (S11510: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time has elapsed, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 7 (S11511, S11512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S11511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value (999, 239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S11502 (S11512).

Here, the execution time of each process from S11501 to S11508 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next execution timing of main process 7 is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time (S11511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S11509 (S11509: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S11513 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S11513), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S11514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S11515), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S11516), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S11509 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S11501 to S11508, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S11511 and S11512 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from a power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S11501 after the start-up processing (main control unit) 7 is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S11501, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing (main control unit) 7. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (S11401), so that the processing can be started from S11501. This reduces the control burden on the main control device 110 and allows the main control device 110 to perform accurate control without malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 326, the jackpot control process 7 (S11504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S11504). This jackpot control process 7 (S11504) is executed within the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 7 (Fig. 326, S11504), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start a jackpot with a special symbol (S11601). Specifically, this is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203j. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S10216) when the start of a jackpot is set by the processing of S10215 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see Fig. 315). In the processing of S11601, if it is determined that it is the timing to start a jackpot (if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON) (S11601: Yes), an opening command is set (S11602), and then the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF (S11603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11601 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF) (S11601: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is in progress (S11604). The special symbol jackpot includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the period during which the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON after the special symbol jackpot game ends, and corresponds to this period. If it is determined in the process of S11604 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is OFF) (S11604: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11604 that a special symbol jackpot is occurring (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S11604: Yes), a determination process (S11605 to S11612) is executed to determine whether it is time to execute various processes that are executed at multiple times during the jackpot.

If it is determined in the process of S11604 that a jackpot is currently being played (S11604: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S11605). In this process of S11605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. If it is determined in the process of S11605 that it is time to start a new round (S11605: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg (S11606), and a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S11607). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sends a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round presentation is started in the third pattern display device 81.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special pattern variations (number of lotteries) between the execution of multiple jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during a period in which a time-saving state is set repeatedly between jackpot games), the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot games that are continuously executed. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 has a period setting means for setting a period (consecutive win period) during which it is determined that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command or variation pattern command sent from the main control device 110, a round number accumulation means for adding the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the new jackpot game to the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the previously executed jackpot game when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, and a round number accumulation display control means for transmitting a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated round number accumulated by the round number accumulation means to the display control device 114 and displaying it on the third pattern display device 81 during the jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, which increases the player's interest.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S11605: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) has been met (S11608). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition has been met when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) was opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls in total) have entered the variable winning device 65 or V winning device 650.

In the process of S11608, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is met (S11608: Yes), the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is closed (S11609), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is not met (S11608: No), it is next determined whether the current timing is the start timing of the ending performance (S11610). The timing to start the ending performance is determined when 15 rounds (the final round of play that is preset for this jackpot game) have ended, the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the seventh control example), which is the ball discharge time, has elapsed.

If it is determined in the processing of S11610 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11610: Yes), an ending command is set (S11611) and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11610 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S11610: No), then in the process of S11612, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S11612). If it is determined in the process of S11612 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S11612: No), then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S11612 that it is time for the ending presentation to end (S11612: Yes), it is then determined whether the jackpot type currently being executed is jackpot A to jackpot D (S11613). In the process of S11613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores the jackpot type to be set is read out.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, the time-saving end condition is set using the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe (S11614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R time-saving jackpot) or jackpot B (5R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, the small jackpot A counter 203fg is set to 1, and the small jackpot B counter 203fh is set to 3. Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, the small jackpot A counter 203fg is set to 2, and the small jackpot B counter 203fh is set to 10.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R non-time-saving jackpot), the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the time-saving counter 203h, small win A counter 203fg, and small win B counter 203fh are not set to any value (time-saving end condition). After the above-mentioned processing of S11614 is completed, a time-saving setting information command is set to indicate information corresponding to the values of the various counters indicating the time-saving end condition set in the processing of S11614 (S11615).

The time-saving setting information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time-saving setting information command, it sets time-saving information indicating the time-saving end conditions of the current time-saving state in the time-saving information update area 223g and the temporary time-saving information update area 223i. Based on the time-saving information set here and the update information of the time-saving state that is updated based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the special pattern, it determines the remaining number of times (remaining conditions) of the time-saving state, and various performance modes are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the remaining number of times.

After completing the processing of S11615, the system next sets a state command corresponding to the game state that will be set after the jackpot (S11616), sets the end of the jackpot (S11617), sets the jackpot in progress flag 203k to off (S11618), and ends this processing.

As explained above, the seventh control example is configured so that the end conditions for the time-saving state can be set differently depending on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won. Furthermore, the seventh control example is configured so that a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established as the end condition for the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) is set when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the second special symbol compared to when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide added value to the player when they win one type instead of two types during right-handed play while the time-saving state is set.

In the seventh control example, the same time-saving end condition is set for the jackpot type (jackpot A, B) that is set when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special pattern, but this is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to set a time-saving end condition that is more difficult to achieve when the jackpot type is jackpot A. Also, some of the multiple time-saving end conditions may be set to be more easily achieved when the jackpot is A, and the others may be set to be more easily achieved when the jackpot is B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 306(d), in the seventh control example, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is configured to set a fluctuation count end condition related to the number of times the special pattern fluctuates (an end condition based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h) and a winning count end condition related to the number of times a small prize has been won as a result of the special pattern lottery (an end condition based on the value of each small prize counter).

In addition, the system is configured so that the winning count end conditions are set to end conditions corresponding to multiple small win types that are set when a small win is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which small win type the small win game will be played and how much time is left until the time-saving state ends before the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (100 times).

In the seventh control example, only the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) change is set to "100 times" as the change count end condition, but a different change count end condition may be set depending on the type of big win. In addition, as the change count end condition, a first special symbol change measurement means may be provided that measures only the number of times the first special symbol changes, and a first special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result, or a second special symbol change measurement means may be provided that measures only the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a second special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the second special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result may be set.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the end condition is set based on the measurement results of the counters (small win A counter 203fg, small win B counter 203fh) corresponding to each small win type as the winning count end condition, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving end condition may be set based simply on the total number of times a small win has been won, or a means may be provided that totals and measures the number of times a small win game with a predetermined number (two) of small win types set out of multiple (three or more) small win types has been played, and the end condition may be set based on the measurement results of that means.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the time-saving end condition is set for all small win types that can be set when a small win is won, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to set small win type Z as a small win type for which the time-saving end condition cannot be met no matter how many times it is set when a small win is won. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching its end due to the current small win, even if the player knows that he or she has won a small win during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the above-mentioned small win type Z is set, it is preferable to configure it so that a small win game with the same content as the small win game for which the winning count end condition is set is executed. By configuring it in this way, even if the game content of the small win game executed during the time-saving state is identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching the end due to the current small win game.

In this way, by determining that a small prize has been won, or by determining the game content of the small prize game that is executed based on the small prize being won, in other words, by determining the game content of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make the player very interested in the presentation that suggests (informs) the progress of the time-saving state (whether it is approaching the end or not), by making it difficult to grasp the progress. Note that the control content of the presentation executed by the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh control example will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

Next, the small win control process 7 (S11505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 327. FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing this small win control process 7 (S11505). This small win control process 7 (S11505) is executed within the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and is a process for executing various effects according to the small win and opening or closing the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special pattern.

In the small win control process 7 (Fig. 327, S11505), first, it is determined whether a small win of a special pattern will start (S11701). Specifically, if the small win start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10404 of the small win start setting process 7 (see Fig. 320), it is determined that a small win of a special pattern will start. In the process of S11701, if a small win of a special pattern will start (S11701: Yes), an opening command is set (S11702). Then, the small win start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S11703), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11701, if a small win of a special pattern has not started (S11701: No), it is determined whether or not a small win of a special pattern is in progress (S11704). The period during which a small win of a special pattern is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 display a small win of a special pattern (including during play of a small win of a special pattern) and during a specified time after play of a small win of a special pattern ends. The determination in S11704 is made by analyzing whether the small win flag 303fc is set to on. In the process of S11704, if it is determined that a small win of a special pattern is not in progress (S11704: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11704 that a small win of a special symbol is occurring (S11704: Yes), the process of S11705 is executed. In the process of S11705, it is determined whether it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S11705). If it is determined in the process of S11705 that it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S11705: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg (S11706), and it is determined whether this is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S11707).

If it is determined in the process of S11707 that this is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11707 that this is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: Yes), then in the process of S11708, it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S11708), and if it is determined that it is not ON (OFF) (S11708: No), the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203fa is read (S11709), and then an instruction command corresponding to the read small win type is set (S11710).

The instruction command set in the processing of S11710 is, for example, an instruction command for changing the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the type of small win, that is, a small win in which the ball is likely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win A) and a small win in which the ball is unlikely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win B).

Returning to FIG. 327, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S11705, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the V winning opening 650a (S11705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the V winning opening 650a has been met, i.e., whether it is the time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711). If it is determined that it is the time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711: Yes), the V winning opening 650a is closed (S11712), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11711 that the current timing is not the closing timing of the V winning port 650a (S11711: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11713). If it is determined in the process of S11713 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11713: Yes), an ending command is set (S11714) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11713 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S11713: No), then in the process of S11715, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S11715). If it is determined in the process of S11715 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S11715: No), then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S11715, if it is determined that it is the timing for the ending presentation to end (S11715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set on (S11716), and if it is determined that it is set on (S11716: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S11717), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot mid-flag 203k are set on (S11718), the V flag 203fe is set off (S11719), the V pass flag 203ff is set off (S11720), the small jackpot mid-flag 203fc is set off (S11721), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983). In this special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983), a process is executed (see S19502) that uses the performance mode determined by referring to the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa in order to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S19501). If it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (S19501: Yes), the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa (see FIG. 312) is referenced to determine the notification mode (S19502). Then, a display variation pattern command indicating the performance mode determined in the process of S19502 is set (S19503), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S19501 that the current game state is not in the time-saving state (S19501: No), the process of S19502 is skipped, the process of S19503 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this seventh control example, in one special pattern drawing, it is possible to judge whether a jackpot has been won and whether the time-saving feature has been won, and in the event that both a jackpot and a time-saving feature are won, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player can be granted. In this respect, the seventh control example has a different technical concept from the other control examples, but the technical concept unique to this seventh control example may also be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples. In addition, it may also be possible to judge whether a time-saving feature has been won even when a game state other than the normal state is set.

In addition, in this seventh control example, when processing related to the special pattern lottery is executed, a process for determining whether a time-saving win has been won can be executed before the process for determining whether a jackpot has been won, and when a time-saving win has been won, the time-saving state is set before the determination of whether a jackpot has been won is executed, and the time-saving state is terminated between the determination of whether a jackpot has been won and the start of the special pattern variation to show the result of that determination. In other words, the time-saving state can be set only for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of whether a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the time-saving state can be used for purposes other than those set for the purpose of making it easier to execute special symbol lotteries, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines 10, and a variety of games can be offered to players.

In addition, as a configuration that allows the time-saving state to be set solely for the purpose of changing the game state when the jackpot winning judgment is made in the special pattern lottery, a configuration other than that described in this seventh control example may be used. For example, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special pattern fluctuation that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and the time-saving state may be ended after the jackpot winning judgment is made in the next special pattern lottery.

In this case, if the right to execute the special pattern lottery (special pattern reserved) has been acquired, the period during which the time-saving state is set will be instantaneous, so similar to the seventh control example, it will be possible to set the time-saving state for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is made. On the other hand, if the special pattern reserved has not been acquired, the time-saving state will continue until the next special pattern lottery is executed, so it will be possible to set a period during which it is easy to execute the special pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to execute the next special pattern lottery only for players who are unable to execute the special pattern lottery smoothly.

In addition, in this seventh control example, it is configured so that a jackpot and a time-saving win can be won in a single special pattern drawing, and if a double win occurs, a bonus that is more advantageous to the player can be given than if there were no double wins. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure so that if a double win occurs, a bonus that is less advantageous to the player can be given than if there were no double wins.

In addition, as a judgment for the possibility of multiple wins, not only a judgment for a jackpot win or a judgment for a time-saving win, but also a judgment for the establishment of a time-saving end condition or a judgment for a drop-out lottery win may be used. In other words, multiple types of judgments can be made executable based on the establishment of a specific execution trigger, and when the combination of the results of the multiple types of judgments becomes a predetermined combination, a different bonus can be awarded than when the combination becomes a different combination.

<Modification of the game board configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, a modified example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 329. In the fifth to seventh control examples described above, the game board 13 has a left-handed play for making the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and a right-handed play for making the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640, which is easier to enter when the time-saving state is set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has been described that has a playability of switching between a game for making the first special symbol lottery and a game for making the second special symbol lottery depending on the game state.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 329, in the normal state, a left-hand hit game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, making it possible to execute a first special pattern lottery, and a right-hand hit game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 1641, making it possible to execute a second special pattern lottery. With this configuration, when the same game state is set, the player can select a game method (left-hand hit game, right-hand hit game) (by adjusting the firing strength by operating the operating handle 21) to execute a special pattern lottery for any special pattern type, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game.

Next, we will explain the innovative gameplay that uses the game board 13 shown in Figure 329.

<Gameplay 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 having the playability used in the seventh control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to select the jackpot at the same selection rate, and in addition, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be capable of determining whether or not a time-saving win has been won in addition to a jackpot win, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be capable of determining whether or not a small win has been won in addition to a jackpot win. When a time-saving state is set based on a time-saving win, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640, and a right-hitting game is executed, and a game in which a small win leads to a jackpot game is executed is configured to be executable.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal state, it becomes possible for the player to select between a game (first game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the first special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a small jackpot with the second special symbol, by playing with the right hand.

In this case, for example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won is configured to make it easier for the time-saving end condition to be met, and in about 50% of cases when the second time-saving state is set, a big win game is played via a small win during the second time-saving state, and the probability of winning the time-saving state in the first special pattern lottery is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the small win in the second special pattern lottery.

By configuring it in this way, the player can select whether to play the first game or the second game according to his/her preference in order to execute a game process in which a jackpot game is executed via winning a small jackpot in the second special pattern lottery. In this case, it is advisable to specify the rate at which game balls enter each ball entry port, the probability of winning the time-saving feature, the probability of winning a small jackpot, and the probability of executing a jackpot game when a small jackpot is won, so that the ratio of the number of winning prize balls when a specified number of game balls are fired is equal when playing left-handed game in a normal state and when playing right-handed game. This makes it possible to provide a fair game to the player regardless of which game is played.

Furthermore, in this case, it is advisable to configure the time required for the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained when a specified number of game balls are released to become equal between the first game and the second game, or to configure the deviation of the number of winning balls obtained to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that suits the tastes of the player.

<Other gameplay features: Depending on the type of time-saving feature, you can set a time-saving state that is more unfavorable than the normal state or a time-saving state that is more favorable>
As in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving state (first time-saving) that is set via winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, and a time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set via winning a time-saving state (second time-saving) can be set, and when the second time-saving state is won, a second time-saving state A that is advantageous to the player and a second time-saving state B that is disadvantageous to the player can be set as the type of time-saving state that is set.

When the second time-saving A is set, as in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving state is set in which the electric device 640a opens so that the special symbol lottery is more likely to be performed than in the normal state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving B is set, the electric device 640a is controlled to open so that game balls can only enter the second ball entrance 640 at the same ball entrance rate as in the normal state.

When the second time-saving B is set, that is, in a game state other than the normal state, the time-saving winning judgment is not executed. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, a game is played in which a jackpot winning judgment and a time-saving winning judgment are executed in the special pattern lottery, and when the second time-saving B is set, a game is played in which only a jackpot winning judgment is executed in the special pattern lottery. In other words, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed in the normal state, the game is played in a way that is disadvantageous to the player in the second time-saving B.

Then, a different number of times to select special symbols (for example, 10 times, 50 times, 100 times) can be set as a time-saving end condition for the second time-saving B.

Furthermore, the selection ratios of the lottery results in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state are set to a 1/200 probability of winning the jackpot and a 199/200 probability of winning the time-saving option. If the time-saving option is won, the ratio of the second time-saving option A being selected is set to 10%, and the ratio of the second time-saving option B being selected is set to 90%. In other words, when the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, if the lottery result is anything other than a jackpot, the time-saving option will always be selected.

By configuring it in this way, the timing for the special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state is when the conditions for ending the second time-saving B are met after the big win and the normal state is set, i.e., the special symbol lottery executed in a specific cycle. This makes it possible to execute a special symbol lottery (a special symbol lottery in the normal state) that is advantageous to the player periodically (each time the conditions for ending the second time-saving B are met).

In addition, by configuring the second time-saving B to end under different conditions, the number of times that the special symbol selections are to be performed can be set, and the period during which the special symbol selections that are advantageous to the player are performed can be varied, providing the player with an element of surprise.

In this case, when using a pachinko machine 10 that can execute both the first and second special pattern lotteries in the normal state, such as the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to Figure 329, it is advisable to configure the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery in the normal state so that the probability of winning the time-saving feature is different, the selection ratio of the time-saving feature type that is set when the time-saving feature is won is different, or the content of the time-saving feature end condition when the second time-saving feature B is set is different.

By configuring it in this way, the probability that the second time-saving A advantageous to the player will be set can be varied depending on which type of special pattern is used in the periodically executed special pattern lottery advantageous to the player (special pattern lottery in the normal state).

In addition, the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving B may be set to be established when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific judgment result (for example, a small win) rather than based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, so that the result of the special pattern lottery can be a small win that is different from a big win or a time-saving win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which, when the second time-saving B is set, the second time-saving B is ended as soon as possible so that the special pattern lottery can be executed in the normal state, aiming to win a small win.

<Gameplay 2: Combination of simultaneous fluctuation gaming machine and time-saving winning>
In a gaming machine configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw a first special pattern and draw a second special pattern, and when both special patterns win a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined display of special pattern), and at the point where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined display of special pattern), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, the machine is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the first special pattern drawing and the second special pattern drawing.

Then, similar to the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed before each special symbol variation starts, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state is set when the special symbol variation stops. In this case, if the time-saving lottery is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving state that becomes the first benefit is set, and if the time-saving lottery is won in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state that becomes the second benefit different from the first benefit is set.

Furthermore, in the case where the second special symbol drawing is executed while the first special symbol is changing and the time-saving feature is winning, a time-saving state can be set in which a third benefit that is more advantageous than the first and second benefits is awarded if the time-saving feature is won. By configuring in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), it is possible to set a time-saving state in which different benefits are awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving feature being won in each special symbol drawing.

The bonus that is awarded may be, for example, a third bonus in which the time-saving end condition is more difficult to achieve than the first or second bonus, or a third bonus in which the special pattern lottery is easier to execute than the first or second bonus.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time-saving state of the third bonus is set may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped among the special pattern changes being executed in parallel, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. Also, regardless of whether it is before or after the timing of the stop display, it may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. It may also be the timing at which a specific special pattern type is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously (parallelly) draw multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in each of the special symbol draws and is simultaneously awarded excessive bonuses (jackpot games).

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, it is possible for the player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery by the time the winning result is frozen (confirmed) display. In this case, it is advisable to execute a variable presentation that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, using the variable time until the special pattern lottery result is frozen and displayed. This makes the player think that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, which can motivate the player to execute the other special pattern lottery during that variable time.

In addition, the reel may be configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. This allows a favorable win to be won in the lottery for the other special symbol while one of the special symbols that has won an unfavorable win is fluctuating, and the winning result can be displayed as a stop (confirmed display) before the winning result of the unfavorable win.

<About gaming machines that can set the number of time-saving times (the number of times that the special symbol lottery can be executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol) to infinite>
In the first to fourth control examples described above, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a high probability state for normal patterns (time-saving state) can be set for the period until 100 special pattern lotteries have been executed after the end of the jackpot game. However, the period for which the time-saving state continues is not limited to until 100 special pattern lotteries have been executed, but may be until 100 or more special pattern lotteries have been executed, or may be indefinite (until the next jackpot is won).

For example, in the first control example described above, the special pattern change count is set as the end condition for ending the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, and one special pattern change count can be set from a plurality of change counts including at least a first change count and a second change count different from the first change count, with the first change count being 100, the second change count being 200, the third change count being 300, the fourth change count being 500, and the fifth change count being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

The presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is that "100 times remaining" is displayed regardless of which ending condition is set at the time the time-saving state is set, and if a number of fluctuations of 100 or more (e.g., the fourth number of fluctuations) is set, a presentation is executed in which a predetermined number is added to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (e.g., "+30 times").

By configuring it in this way, even if the super chance mode (a limited-time special symbol high probability state (probability change state) until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed) is not set after the end of the jackpot game, if the period until 10,000 special symbol variations are performed is set as the period for which the time-saving state will continue, the state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640 will continue for a longer period of time than if the probability change state was set. Although the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is low, it is possible to perform more jackpot lotteries for special symbols while maintaining the number of game balls acquired, and the possibility of winning a jackpot will increase. Therefore, even if the chance mode (time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play by making the player expect a long-term time-saving state to be set, and it is possible to make the player interested in how long the time-saving state will continue, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot game, a special probability state is set, and if the ball does not pass through a specific area, a time-saving state is set. This allows the player to choose whether to play in a special probability state in which the time-saving count is 100 times, during which a high probability state for special symbols is set but the high probability state for normal symbols continues, or in a time-saving state in which a low probability state for special symbols is set but the high probability state for normal symbols continues, with the possibility of a maximum of 10,000 time-saving counts being awarded.

<Regarding gaming machines with a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a high probability state (high probability state) of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game until the end condition is met>
In a gaming machine configured such that when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a special probability state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of times the special patterns change after the special probability state is set reaches a specific number (for example, 100 times), the end condition for the special probability state is met (so-called ST specification), multiple end conditions may be specified and one of them may be set.

For example, the special pattern change count that is set as the end condition for ending the special variable state that is set after the end of a jackpot game can be set to one of a plurality of change counts that includes at least a first change count and a second change count that is different from the first change count, with the first change count being 100, the second change count being 200, the third change count being 300, the fourth change count being 500, and the fifth change count being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

Then, the presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is that "100 times remaining" is displayed regardless of which end condition is set at the time the special state is set, and if the number of fluctuations is set to 100 or more (for example, the fourth number of fluctuations) as the end condition, a presentation is executed in which a predetermined number is added to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, "+30 times").

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know how long the special state will continue, so even if the remaining time (remaining number of changes of the special pattern) until the displayed special state ends is short, it is possible to make the player expect an additional effect to occur, and the player can play while feeling a sense of expectation that the special state may continue until the very last moment when it ends.

The above-mentioned configuration may also be applied to gaming machines (so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed machines) that award a jackpot when a special pattern is selected as a jackpot or when a gaming ball enters a specific area.

<Regarding gaming machines with a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit on the period during which high probability states can be set consecutively>
In addition, the above-mentioned configuration that allows the setting of an infinite number of time-saving times may also be applied to a gaming machine that has a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit on the period during which a high probability state can be set continuously.

The limit function here refers to a threshold value that executes a process to set a low probability state (low probability state) of a special or normal symbol after the end of a jackpot game, even if a jackpot of a type in which a high probability state (high probability state) of a special or normal symbol can be set after the end of a jackpot game is won.

For example, if a player wins a type of jackpot (high probability jackpot) that sets a high probability state (high probability state) for a special symbol after the end of a jackpot game in a low probability state, and the high probability limit is set to three times, if the player wins high probability jackpots three times in a row after the high probability state is set, the high probability limit will be reached with the third high probability jackpot win, and a low probability state for the special symbol will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

The probability variable limit count is a value that is set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state for a special symbol, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game played based on that jackpot ends. In the probability variable state, a jackpot that sets the probability variable state is won after the jackpot game ends, and the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game played based on that jackpot, and the updated value is used to determine whether the probability variable limit has been reached.

In a conventional gaming machine with a special symbol limit, for example, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the distribution of jackpot types is 90% for special symbol jackpots and 10% for normal jackpots, and the special symbol limit is set to three times, if a special symbol jackpot is won in a low probability state, and the special symbol state is set after the jackpot play ends, and then three consecutive special symbol jackpots are won, the special symbol limit is reached with the third special symbol jackpot, and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been performed) after the third jackpot play ends, and if the predetermined period has passed without a special symbol jackpot being won, the state transitions to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

In addition, even if a regular jackpot is won before the special jackpot limit is reached, a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set for a predetermined period of time after the jackpot play ends (for example, until 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed), and if the predetermined period has passed without a special symbol being won, the state will transition to the normal state. Note that if a special jackpot is won in the time-saving state, a new special jackpot limit of 3 times is set.

In other words, in conventional gaming machines with a special chance limit, if a player wins a normal jackpot, the special chance limit is released, but if the player does not win a special chance within a limited period of time (for example, the period until 100 special chance lottery draws have been performed), the game will return to the normal state. Therefore, from the player's perspective, a normal jackpot is a less favorable jackpot than a special chance jackpot, and if there are two consecutive special chance jackpots after the special chance state is set, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the same regardless of whether the next jackpot is a special chance jackpot or a normal jackpot. This could lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play in the special chance state when there is only one chance remaining until the special chance limit is reached.

In response to this, by setting a normal jackpot that grants an infinite number of time-saving attempts (until the next jackpot is won), a low probability state of a special pattern is set in which the special jackpot limit is released when a normal jackpot is won after the special jackpot state is set, but since the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot, in a special jackpot state where there is only one attempt left until the special jackpot limit is reached, it is more advantageous for the player to win a normal jackpot than a special jackpot, and by making the player hope for a normal jackpot even in a special jackpot state where there is only one attempt left until the special jackpot limit is reached, a decrease in motivation to play can be prevented and interest in the game can be increased.

When a normal jackpot that grants an infinite number of time-saving plays is won is won, a special effect different from that when a special jackpot is won (for example, an effect in which the number of remaining plays until the displayed special limit is reached is rewound) may be executed.

<About the configuration capable of executing a double jackpot loop in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (so-called simultaneous variable method)>
In gaming machines that do not have a configuration capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing a variable display based on the drawing of a first special pattern and a variable display based on the drawing of a second special pattern (so-called simultaneous variation method), gaming machines that have two types of jackpots (so-called variable probability loop machines) are commonly known: a variable probability jackpot in which a high probability state (variable probability state) for special and normal patterns is set after the end of a jackpot game until the next jackpot is won, and a normal jackpot in which a low probability state for special patterns and a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal patterns is set for a predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game (for example, until the special pattern drawing is performed 100 times).

In conventional probability loop machines, if a probability jackpot is won, the probability jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends, and one more jackpot is guaranteed. However, if a normal jackpot is won after a probability jackpot is won, the normal state is set unless a jackpot is won during the time-saving state that is set for a specified period, so it is not possible to guarantee two more jackpot wins without changing the probability jackpot rate.

However, by configuring the game so that the aforementioned number of time-saving times can be set to an infinite number (until the next jackpot is won), it is possible to guarantee two more jackpot wins if a jackpot with a special jackpot is won without changing the probability of winning a special jackpot.

Specifically, if a regular jackpot is won while the special state is set, a time-saving state with an infinite number of times (until the next jackpot is won) is set, and if a regular jackpot is won while the normal state or time-saving state is set, a time-saving state with a period shorter than the infinite number of times (for example, until the special pattern lottery is performed 20 times) is set.

By configuring it in this way, if the probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, one more jackpot is guaranteed regardless of the type of jackpot the next jackpot won, so winning one probability variable jackpot guarantees two more jackpots. Therefore, winning a probability variable jackpot allows the player to obtain many prize balls, which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of winning a probability variable jackpot.

<About the configuration that does not reset the time-saving state even if you win the jackpot when the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set>
In conventional gaming machines, a typical configuration is to set a time-saving state for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 100 special pattern lotteries have been performed) after a jackpot game ends, and if a jackpot game starts based on a jackpot being won during the time-saving state, the set time-saving state ends, and a new time-saving state for a predetermined period of time is set after the jackpot game ends (the time-saving state is reset).

To further increase interest in gaming machines with this configuration, if the time-saving mode is set, the time-saving mode is not reset even if a jackpot is won. This allows players to enjoy seeing how many jackpots they can win within a specified period of time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won (first win) in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of special symbol changes set as the end condition for ending the time-saving state is configured to be able to set one of a number of change numbers including at least a first change number and a second change number different from the first change number, with the first change number being 100, the second change number being 300, the third change number being 500, and the fourth change number being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

For example, if the third number of changes is set as the end condition, and a jackpot is won with the special pattern change executed for the 20th time, the time-saving state will not end (will not be reset) when the jackpot play begins, so the number of remaining changes until the end condition for the time-saving state is met after the jackpot play ends will be 480.

In this way, the time-saving state set based on the first win does not end when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, and the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first win continues even after the newly executed jackpot game ends. This makes it possible to vary the number of jackpot wins that a player can obtain during the time-saving state depending on the number of fluctuations, which is the end condition of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first win, and provides an innovative gameplay.

The conditions for terminating the time-saving state include when the number of fluctuations set as the termination condition becomes 0 (i.e., when a specified number of special pattern fluctuations are executed during the time-saving state) and when the number of jackpot wins during the time-saving state reaches a specific number. For example, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game and a third jackpot is won after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state may be terminated at the start of a jackpot game and a new time-saving state may be set after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which players aim for consecutive wins in order to maintain a state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state), further increasing the interest of the game.

<Regarding gaming machines with a configuration in which the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)>
At least four game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), a first special probability state, and a second special probability state.In a gaming machine configured such that the second special probability state is at least more advantageous to the player than the first special probability state in terms of the degree of advantage to the player in each game state, a time-saving lottery (a determination as to whether or not to set a time-saving state in the special symbol lottery) may be executed in the above-mentioned special symbol lottery.

Specifically, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the low probability state and the high probability state of the special pattern is set small (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability state of the special pattern is 1/50.1, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state is 1/50), and when a jackpot is won with the first special pattern, the probability of the first special jackpot (a type of jackpot in which the first special jackpot state is set after the jackpot play ends) is set to 95%, and the probability of the time-saving jackpot (a type of jackpot in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends) is set to 5%, and prize balls cannot be obtained during the jackpot play.

The first special symbol drawing is primarily performed in the normal state, time-saving state, and first special probability state, and the second special symbol drawing is performed only in the second special probability state.

Then, only if the big jackpot is not won in the second special pattern lottery, a small jackpot lottery (determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery) is held, and if a small jackpot is won, the player can win prize balls through the small jackpot game that is held.

If the special symbol lottery does not result in a big win in the normal state, a time-saving lottery will be held, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state will be set for a specified period of time (for example, the period until the special symbol variation is performed 20 times).

In addition, if the first special jackpot is won in the normal state, the first special jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends. Here, in the first special jackpot state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state when the end condition is met, and the number of special symbol changes set as the end condition is configured to be able to set one of multiple change numbers including at least the first change number and a second change number different from the first change number, for example, the first change number is 1, the second change number is 50, the third change number is 100, the fourth change number is 200, and the fifth change number is 300.

By configuring it in this way, if the conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols are met in the first high probability state, a high probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, in other words, a second high probability state that is advantageous to the player, is set, so that the player can be offered an innovative game in which the aim is for the high probability state of normal symbols to end without winning a jackpot in the first high probability state.

When a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the probability of a second special jackpot (a jackpot in which the second special jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends) is 95%, and the probability of a time-saving jackpot is 5%.

If the time-saving state is set and the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the second probability bonus state will be set 100%.

It is also possible to set an upper limit to the period during which the high probability state of normal symbols can be set consecutively (time-saving limit). For example, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times, and by winning the first special jackpot 10 times, the second special jackpot state is set after the end of the 10th jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a more advantageous game state is set by winning consecutive jackpots, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

The first special symbol lottery may also be configured to execute a small prize lottery, and when a small prize is won, the small prize type may be determined from among a number of small prize types, including a small prize type in which the second probability variable state is set at least after the end of the small prize game. By configuring it in this way, the opportunities to transition to the second probability variable state increase, further increasing the interest of the game.

When the first probability variable state is set, a presentation may be executed that indicates to the player the number of times the special symbol will remain to change until the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol that has been set is met. For example, when the fifth number of changes (300 changes) is set as the end condition, the third symbol display device 81 may display "Collect 300 points," and one point may be accumulated for each change of the special symbol, and when 300 points have been accumulated, the second probability variable state may be set. In this case, if a jackpot is won in the first probability variable state, the points acquired are reset (i.e., returned to 0).

In addition, even if the first number of changes (one change) is set as the end condition, the third pattern display device 81 may display "Collect 300 points" and 300 points may be acquired when one change of the special pattern is completed, or the number of points awarded for one change of the special pattern may be varied depending on the number of changes of the end condition that is set.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which number of changes is set as the end condition for the high probability state of the normal pattern, so the player can have fun predicting which number of changes is set from the number of points awarded, which increases the interest of the game.

<Summary of technical concepts>
Next, each technical idea described in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be briefly explained. First, regarding the technical idea that the probability of obtaining an advantageous privilege by the special drawing lottery increases when the number of times the special drawing lottery using the special drawing lottery reserved acquired during the time reduction exceeds a predetermined number of times, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the pachinko machine 10 has a means for acquiring the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information) and has a means for reserving and storing the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, based on the reserved and stored right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) (discrimination means capable of executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means), a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery being a jackpot win (first discrimination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, continues until the end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. In addition, in the second special pattern lottery, a time-saving winning judgment can be executed separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that the time-saving winning has been won in the time-saving winning judgment (if it is determined that the second judgment result is true), the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern can be set without executing the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a plurality of game states are configured to be set, but among them, the time-saving winning judgment can be executed only in the state in which the normal state (specific period) is set.

By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the end of the jackpot game, not when the special pattern variation stops, and when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a time-saving game in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the stop of the special pattern variation. Thus, the timing at which the high probability state for a normal pattern is set can be made to differ depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed (period during which the normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be performed (period during which the normal state is not set), it is possible to make the player interested in the period during which the special pattern lottery is performed. Note that in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is performed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed and a period during which it is not performed. For example, it is also possible to configure so that the time-saving winning judgment can be performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set (normal state, second probability state), and not to perform the time-saving winning judgment in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability state).

Furthermore, rather than switching whether or not to execute the time-saving win judgment depending on the set game state, the probability of winning the time-saving win judgment may be made to differ depending on the game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the time-saving win judgment has a 1/6 probability of winning the time-saving win, and in other game states, the probability of winning the time-saving win may be configured to be 1/200. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set game states in which it is easy to win the time-saving win and game states in which it is difficult to win the time-saving win, so that, similar to the technical idea described above, it is possible to get the player interested in the effect, i.e., the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a first ball entry port 64 (a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a first special symbol lottery is provided, and a second ball entry port 640 (a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is configured to be possible only in the second special symbol lottery.

In other words, in the first special pattern lottery, no time-saving winning judgment is performed regardless of the game state set, and in the second special pattern lottery, the time-saving winning judgment can be performed during a specific period (normal state). By configuring it in this way, the amount of value that is later granted to the player can be significantly different between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and further between the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning judgment, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment during a specific period (normal state). However, without being limited to this, for example, the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the second special symbol lottery during the first specific period (normal state), and the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the first special symbol lottery during a second specific period (second probability change state) different from the first specific period. By configuring in this way, depending on the set period, it is possible to create a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eager to play a game in which a more advantageous value is more likely to be given.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 329, it is advisable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the rate at which game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 is similar to the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, regardless of which game state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can select which ball entrance to enter the game ball at his/her discretion, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving state by the time-saving state winning judgment (first time-saving state) is more likely to be set as a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, i.e., a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be established, than the time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot. In other words, the system is configured to vary the degree of advantage of the set time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state. This makes it possible to vary the period (time-saving end condition) during which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determined judgment result (setting trigger), which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a case where the second time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state, depending on the game state before the time-saving state is set, and a case where the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the situation under which the time-saving state is set.

More specifically, for example, the system may be configured so that a more advantageous time-saving state is more likely to occur when the number of times special symbol lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of times they have been stuck) exceeds a predetermined number, compared to when this number has not been exceeded.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be won in one special pattern lottery (see FIG. 315). This allows a jackpot win (first discrimination result) and a time-saving win (second discrimination result) to be discriminated in a overlapping manner, so that various lottery results can be expected in one special pattern lottery, such as a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or both a jackpot win and a time-saving win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when there are no overlapping wins (see FIG. 306(b)). Therefore, since it is easy to execute a specific type of game that is advantageous to the player by discriminating in overlapping, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by granting the player a bonus corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, a configuration other than that of the seventh control example described above may be used to provide a more advantageous benefit to the player in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins. For example, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be configured so that a more advantageous game state (e.g., a special bonus state, a time-saving state, etc.) can be set in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after a time-saving winning judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the second judgment result) is made, a jackpot judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the first judgment result) is made, and if a time-saving winning is made in one special pattern lottery, the jackpot judgment in that special pattern lottery can be made in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is a double win different from the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is no double win.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the type of bonus (the number of time-saving times granted after the end of the jackpot game) granted to the player when the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) set based on winning the time-saving in the special pattern lottery is different (see FIG. 280 (b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio (the content of the jackpot game and the number of time-saving times granted) in the type of bonus game is variable according to the setting type (first time-saving, second time-saving), the bonus granted to the player can be different even in the high probability state of the same normal pattern (second game state), and there is an effect that the game can be diversified without setting many game states, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the number of time-saving periods granted differs depending on the setting type (first time-saving period and second time-saving period), but this is not limited to this, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of rounds played) may be configured to differ.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, when the second time reduction is set rather than the first time reduction, that is, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without a jackpot game being played, it is configured so that the high probability state for normal symbols, in which the end condition is less likely to be established, is more likely to be set. In other words, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without winning a prize ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the second time reduction, which provides fewer benefits before the high probability state for normal symbols is set than the first time reduction, can prolong the high probability state for normal symbols, which has the effect of allowing benefits to be awarded fairly to players.

Furthermore, in the second variant of the fifth control example described above, similar to the fifth control example and the first variant of the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning judgment (determination of the second discrimination result) is configured to be executable only in the normal state. In other words, the execution of the time-saving winning judgment is restricted in states other than the normal state. Therefore, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect of making the player more interested in the game state that has been set, and making the player look forward to the game state being set in which the second discrimination result can be determined.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a presentation mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first or second time reduction has been set (see Figs. 278 and 279). In other words, when the first time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(a)) is executed for the first period which is the sum of the special symbol change time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol change time (including the fixed time).

More specifically, the variable time and the jackpot game period are predefined in accordance with each special symbol lottery result so that the first period and the second period described above are approximately the same, and the performance periods of the specific effects are the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a performance indicating a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed after a specific effect with the same performance period and performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is watching the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to determine which setting trigger set the high probability state of a normal symbol.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed even during the time-saving state (second game state), and if a time-saving winning occurs during the time-saving state (second game state), it is possible to set a time-saving state (second game state) of a time-saving type in which the time-saving ending condition is unlikely to be met (the number of time-saving events is large or the probability of winning the time-saving event is high).

As a result, the longer the period for which the time-saving state is set, the more likely it is that a time-saving state of a type for which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met will be set, making it easier to play bonus games.

In the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the set game state, but the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to the same. In addition, although the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the game state, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may also be different depending on the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game was played. In this case, it is preferable to configure the probability of winning the time-saving bonus to be higher when the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game is played exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grant a special bonus of winning the time-saving bonus, which is different from the big win game, to a player who has not won a big win in a special pattern draw for a long time. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

The gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 329 includes a first discrimination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing a first discrimination, a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit (a big win game) based on the result of the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means being a first discrimination result (a big win), and a second benefit (a high probability state of a normal symbol) based on the result of the first discrimination being a second discrimination result (a time-saving win) different from the first discrimination result, a second discrimination means (second special symbol lottery) capable of executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and and a second benefit granting means for granting a first benefit based on the result of the second discrimination performed by the first discrimination means being a third discrimination result (winning a big win), and a third benefit (playing a small win) different from the first benefit and the second benefit based on the result of the second discrimination being a fourth discrimination result (winning a small win) different from the third discrimination result, so that the third benefit is not granted based on the first discrimination performed by the first discrimination means, and the second benefit is not granted based on the second discrimination performed by the second discrimination means.

As a result, different benefits can be awarded when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine relating to the above-mentioned <Gameplayability 2>, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side whose special pattern variation stopped first (determined display of special pattern), and at the point when the special pattern variation stops first (determined display of special pattern), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. Then, between the time when the first discrimination means determines that the first condition is met (a time-saving win has been won) and the time when the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state (a time-saving state for the first benefit), a third advantageous state (a time-saving state for the third benefit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be set based on the fact that the second discrimination means determines that the second condition is met (a time-saving win has been won). Thus, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to simultaneously (concurrently) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which a different benefit is awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving win in each special symbol draw.

In the above-mentioned <Other game characteristics>, in a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means determines whether or not the result of discrimination by the discrimination means (special symbol lottery) executed in a state in which the first game state (normal state) is set is the first discrimination result. A second game state (second time-saving B) can be set based on a second discrimination result (winning second time-saving B) different from the first game state, a first game state can be set based on an end condition (time-saving end condition) being established in a state in which the second game state is set, and a third game state (second time-saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set based on a result of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third discrimination result (winning second time-saving A) different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Also, the discrimination means can execute discrimination so that the probability of the discrimination result being the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability of the discrimination result being the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%).

Furthermore, as the termination condition (second time-saving termination condition of second time-saving B), at least a first termination condition can be set that can be established based on the number of determinations (number of special symbol selections) made by the determination means when the second game state is set reaching a predetermined number. In addition, a second termination condition can be set that can be established based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a specific determination result (a small jackpot win).

In this case, the type setting means is capable of setting at least a first setting (normal time-saving state) that can set the second game state after the bonus game execution means ends, and a second setting that can set the second game state (time-saving state) without executing the bonus game based on the result of the judgment executed by the judgment means being a second judgment result (winning second time-saving B) that is different from the first judgment result, as the setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, and the game state setting means is capable of setting an advantageous second game state (normal time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state) and an unfavorable second game state (second time-saving B) that is less advantageous than the first game state, according to the setting type (time-saving type) set by the type setting means.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330 to FIG. 335. The fifth control example described above was configured to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern, and to make it easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance means 640 during a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern. Furthermore, it was configured to execute a judgment of a time-saving winning (time-saving lottery) in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state. In addition, it was configured to be possible to store (reserve) the lottery right of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reservation) up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) as an upper limit.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured in this manner, when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends while the reserved special symbol 2 is stored in the reserved memory, and a low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 stored in the reserved memory is executed in the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols, and if the time-saving state is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during that normal state, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is set again.

In other words, by configuring the period from when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends and the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set until a predetermined period (the period during which the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 is being executed) has elapsed as a period (pull-back period) during which the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is likely to be set, it is possible to encourage players to play with enthusiasm even after the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols has ended.

In contrast, the eighth control example is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, is configured to have a high probability of winning the time-saving lottery (most of the time-saving winnings are negative), and differs in that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on the time-saving winning is configured to be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the game board 13 is configured to make it easier for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be executed alternately, and the end condition for the second time reduction described above is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed consecutively.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example configured in this way, if the special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set does not result in a jackpot win (jackpot probability 1/300), the second time-saving period is set by winning the time-saving period with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time-saving period until the condition for ending the second time-saving period is met.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be set as a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of special pattern lotteries executed during the second time-saving period reaches a specific number (100 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the special pattern lotteries are executed in a predetermined order, and the second time-saving end condition is configured to be established before the first time-saving end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time-saving period is set, the player can be motivated to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition in order to end the second time-saving period as soon as possible.

In addition, the degree of advantage given to the player is varied depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, so that it is easier to set an advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot game if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state than if the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of special pattern lottery that will be held after the second time-saving period ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 331, the configuration of sorting unit 1064 will be described. Figures 331(a)-(b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of sorting unit 1064. In reality, a cover body is placed on the front side of this, and this cover body is made of a material whose interior is visible, and the surface of the spiral pattern is colored in a way that makes it difficult or impossible to see inside, making it difficult to see inside.

At the top of the distribution unit 1064, a pass-through opening 1064b through which game balls can enter is provided, and a transparent ball entry sensor 1064a is disposed to detect when a game ball has passed through the pass-through opening 1064b. Game balls that pass through the pass-through opening 1064b are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry opening 64a and the second ball entry opening 1641 disposed below.

The sorting member 900 receives the game ball that has entered the passage opening in the storage section 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When the game ball is received in the storage section 900a, the weight of the game ball causes the sorting member 900 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 331(a)), and guides the game ball to the first ball entrance opening 64a. Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be able to rotate approximately 90 degrees left and right, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b.

A base-side magnet 901 is disposed on the base body provided on the rear side of the sorting unit 1064 at a position on the center line of the passage opening where the magnet 901b of the sorting member 900 passes. The magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have mutually repelling polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (south pole or north pole) is generated at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip faces the sorting member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that its tip faces the base-side magnet 901. When the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b is directly above (on the center line of the gap between the passage openings that allows approximately one game ball to enter), the base-side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (with their tips facing each other). Here, the magnets are arranged so that they have the same polarity (for example, north and north poles), so they repel each other and the sorting member 900 does not stop in a position where the boundary wall faces directly above, but rather remains in a position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, causing the sorting member 900 to rotate to the left or right, so that either the storage section 900a or the storage section 900b faces the side that receives the game balls entering the sorting unit 640 (the upper side of the gaming machine). This prevents the entering game ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b, causing ball clogging.

In addition, the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 can prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the storage unit 900a facing upward) after the storage unit 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a. As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, the storage unit 900b faces upward, and the next game ball that enters the sorting unit 640 is received by the storage unit 900b, and the sorting member 900 rotates about 90 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second ball entrance 1641. In this way, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game ball that enters the sorting unit 640 to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641. Therefore, game balls can be evenly distributed between the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641, and a lottery game resulting from a win through the first ball entrance 64a (hereinafter, the first lottery game) and a lottery game resulting from a win through the second ball entrance 1641 (hereinafter, the second lottery game), which will be described later, can be efficiently executed.

The right-side second ball entrance 1640 is an entrance that, like the second ball entrance 1641, starts the lottery for the second special symbol when a game ball enters it. The second special symbol has four reserved balls in total between the second ball entrance 1641 and the right-side second ball entrance 1640.

The passing opening 1064b (large enough for one game ball to pass through) of the sorting unit 1064 can accept game balls that have passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 as well as game balls that have passed through the left side, while the second right-side ball entrance 1640 is configured to only accept game balls that have passed through the right side.

Here, FIG. 331(a) shows a case where the sorting member 900 is rotated to a position where the storage section 900a faces upward and is stopped. In this case, when a game ball passes through the passage opening 1064b, the game ball is stored in the storage section 900a, and the weight of the game ball rotates the sorting member 900 counterclockwise, and the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64a while being guided to the guide section 900z1.

After the game balls are distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entrance 64a, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the storage section 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 331(b). After that, when the game ball passes through the passage opening 1064b, it is stored in the storage section 900c and the game ball is distributed to the second ball entrance 1641. Thus, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 331(b), among the game balls that enter through the passage port 1061b of the sorting unit 1064, those that cannot be properly guided by the sorting member 900 to the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 1641 flow down the ball discharge path formed between the outer wall portion of the sorting unit 1064 and each ball inlet, and are discharged to the outside of the sorting unit 1064.

By configuring it in this manner, even if, for example, a game ball that flows forcefully into the passage port 1061b of the sorting unit 1064 collides with the sorting member 900 and flows down inside the sorting unit 1064 without being guided by the guiding sections 900z1 and 900z2, it is possible to prevent balls from becoming clogged inside the sorting unit 1064.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the position (rotational state) of the sorting member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor (not shown). Specifically, a rotation sensor capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft 900d of the sorting member 900 is provided, and the position of the sorting member 900 can be identified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor. Based on the position of the sorting member 900 identified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor, it is then possible to determine which ball entry port (first ball entry port 64a, second ball entry port 1061) the game ball that enters the passage port 1061b will be guided to next.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute notification effects to inform the player whether or not it is possible to consecutively acquire the same type of reserved special chart, and guidance effects to allow the player to consecutively acquire the same type of reserved special chart, making it easy for the player to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition.

In the fifth control example, the position of the sorting member 900 is determined using a rotation sensor, but the position of the sorting member 900 may be determined each time based on the ball-entering port through which the ball entered. Specifically, the sorting member 900 is determined to have the storage section 900c facing upwards based on the ball entering the first ball-entering port 64a, and the sorting member 900 is determined to have the storage section 900a facing upwards based on the ball entering the second ball-entering port 1641. By configuring in this way, the position of the sorting member 900 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time a ball enters the ball-entering port.

As described above with reference to FIG. 331, in the fifth control example, under normal circumstances, the game balls that flow into the distribution unit 1064 are alternately guided to the first ball inlet 64a and the second ball inlet 1641. When a new special chart reservation cannot be obtained based on the game balls entering each inlet, the same type of special chart reservation can be continuously obtained by changing the position of the distribution member 900 without obtaining a special chart reservation by having the game ball enter the distribution unit 1064. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, some of the game balls that flow into the distribution unit 1064 may be configured to enter the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 2164 without being accommodated in the distribution member 900.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to acquire the special symbol reserve (special symbol 1 reserve) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserve) alternately using the sorting member 900, and to acquire the special symbol reserve without using the sorting member 900, and to acquire the special symbol reserve in an irregular order using the special symbol reserve and the special symbol reserve. This makes it easier to establish the second time-saving end condition.

Returning to FIG. 330, the explanation will continue. In the right area of the game board 13, there is provided a right second ball entrance 1640 and an electric device 1640a as a variable means that can be changed between an open state where a game ball can be inserted into the right second ball entrance 1640 and a closed state where it is more difficult to insert the game ball than in the open state.

This electric device 1640a, like the electric device 640a in the fifth control example described above, is configured to be variable from a closed state to an open state according to a predetermined variable pattern by a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed when a winning symbol is obtained in a normal symbol lottery that is executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67. Note that the technology related to the normal symbol lottery and the content of the control process for the electric device 1640a that is executed based on a winning symbol in the normal symbol lottery are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example used in the fifth control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In other words, in this eighth control example, similar to the first control example described above, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game (long opening winning game) in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, and a normal symbol winning game (normal opening winning game) in which it is more difficult to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 than the long opening winning game, can be executed. In both the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the long opening winning game can be executed.

By configuring it in this way, when an unfavorable time-saving state that is unfavorable to the player is set as the game state among the time-saving states, a normal symbol lottery is won and a long opening winning game is executed, making it possible to cause multiple game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 1640. As a result, in this eighth embodiment in which a special symbol lottery is executed according to the order in which the game balls enter, it becomes possible to execute the same type of special symbol (second special symbol) consecutively, making it easier to establish the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for ending the unfavorable time-saving state.

Therefore, by winning the normal pattern lottery and playing the long opening winning game, the player can be given the privilege of efficiently executing the special game pattern lottery, as well as the privilege of ending the disadvantageous time-saving state, which makes it possible for the player to become interested in the results of the normal pattern lottery.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this eighth control example, the time-saving state is configured to be executable in two states: a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (advantageous time-saving state), and a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (unfavorable time-saving state). In terms of the efficiency of execution of the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time-saving state is configured to be executed more efficiently than the unfavorable time-saving state. More specifically, when the unfavorable time-saving state is set, the expectation of being able to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 during a normal winning game that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery is configured to be about the same as in the normal state.

Furthermore, in terms of the bonuses granted in the event of a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery (the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends), the system is configured so that a bonus more favorable to the player is granted (is more likely to be granted) in the advantageous time-saving state than in the unfavorable time-saving state. More specifically, the bonus granted in the event of a jackpot win during an unfavorable time-saving state is configured so that a bonus more unfavorable to the player is granted (is more likely to be granted) than in the event of a jackpot win during the normal state.

Therefore, of the three game states, the normal state, the advantageous time-saving state, and the unfavorable time-saving state, the advantageous time-saving state is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, followed by the normal state, which is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, and the unfavorable time-saving state which is the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the contents of the time-saving end condition for ending the advantageous time-saving state (advantageous time-saving end condition) are different from the contents of the time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving end condition). Specifically, for both the advantageous time-saving end condition and the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a first time-saving end condition is specified that is established based on the number of special pattern lotteries executed after the time-saving state is set, and for the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a second time-saving end condition is specified that is established based on the execution order of the special pattern lotteries executed during the time-saving state.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the allocation unit 1064 is configured to make it easier for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 alternately, so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are normally performed alternately. Here, for example, if a long opening winning game is performed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, a game is performed by hitting the right side to cause the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, so that it is possible to create an event in which the second special symbol lottery is performed consecutively.

In the eighth control example, the second time-saving end condition that is established based on the execution order of the special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state can be set to a second time-saving end condition that is established based on the same type of special symbol lottery being executed consecutively. Therefore, a player in an unfavorable time-saving state can be made to play in the hope of executing a long opening winning game in order to establish the second time-saving end condition.

In addition, in order to continuously draw the same type of special symbol, it is possible to play a game in which game balls flow into the allocation unit 1064 without playing a long opening winning game, for example, in a state in which new reserved special symbols cannot be acquired, that is, in a state in which the upper limit of reserved special symbols has been reserved and stored. For example, it is possible to play a game in which the position of the allocation member 900 is changed by further flowing game balls into the allocation unit 1064 in a state in which it is difficult to execute a new special symbol change, for example, in a state in which a left-hand hit game is played during a big winning game and the upper limit of reserved special symbols 1 and 2 has been acquired.

In the eighth control example, during a jackpot game, the position of the sorting member 900 is identified, and a guide effect (see FIG. 333(b)) can be executed to create a state in which special reserved symbols corresponding to the same type of special symbol can be consecutively acquired based on the acquisition status (acquisition order) of the reserved special symbols 1 and 2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which, during a jackpot game in which a right-hand play is executed, a left-hand play can be executed based on the content of the guide effect that is executed, allowing the player to execute an advantageous game.

<About the performance content in the eighth control example>
Here, with reference to Figures 332 to 333, the content of the presentation executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example will be described.

In this eighth control example, the game states can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a chance state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).Furthermore, the time-saving states can be set to an advantageous time-saving state (a time-saving state set after the end of a jackpot game, and a time-saving state set with a low probability when a time-saving win is won) and an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state set with a high probability when a time-saving win is won).

The unfavorable time-saving state is actually a state of high probability of normal symbols, but is configured to make it more difficult for game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 compared to the favorable time-saving state, and is a time-saving state in which game balls can only enter the right second ball entrance 1640 to the same extent as in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, even if a time-saving state is set, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, it is configured so that a game in which game balls flow into the distribution unit 1064 by playing left-handed, rather than playing right-handed to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, as in the case of the normal state.

When a special symbol jackpot is won in the normal state, a more advantageous bonus (for example, more rounds of jackpot play) is awarded than when a special symbol jackpot is won in the unfavorable time-saving state. Therefore, the unfavorable time-saving state is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. On the other hand, the favorable time-saving state is configured so that a normal symbol jackpot game is executed so that it is relatively easy to get the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, and right-hitting play is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the game states that are most advantageous to the player are the unfavorable time-saving state, the normal state, and the favorable time-saving state, in that order.

Although details will be described later, the disadvantageous time-saving state is a game state that can be set after the variable display ends when the time-saving lottery executed in the special pattern lottery wins the time-saving lottery, and in this eighth control example, the time-saving lottery is configured to win with a high probability (299/300). The condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state differs depending on the type of special pattern that won the disadvantageous time-saving lottery, and when the disadvantageous time-saving lottery is won with the first special pattern, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed once (i.e., when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed consecutively), or when the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are executed a total of 100 times. On the other hand, if the disadvantageous time-saving effect is won with the second special symbol, the disadvantageous time-saving effect is ended when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once (i.e., when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed consecutively), or when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a total of 100 times.

As described above, in the gaming machine 13 in this control example, the game ball that enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330) is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) located below it, and if the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and if the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls entered the corresponding ball entrances. For example, if the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and then the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) are won in that order, the first special symbol drawing will be performed, followed by the second special symbol drawing. In this way, it is configured so that it is difficult for either the variable display for showing the drawing result of the first special symbol or the variable display for showing the drawing result of the second special symbol to be performed consecutively.

Here, an example of a case where the variable display of any special symbol type is executed consecutively in this control example will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine 13, the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the gaming balls to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331), and up to four pieces of winning information for each special symbol are reserved. And, when the number of reserved special symbols has reached the upper limit (four in this control example), if a gaming ball newly enters the corresponding ball entrance, the winning information is not reserved (hereinafter referred to as an overflow winning). Then, when the number of reserved special symbols for both symbols reaches the upper limit (in this control example, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are 8 in total), if a game ball enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330), the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the game ball to an entrance different from the entrance corresponding to the special symbol type of the 8th reserved symbol, but the winning information is not reserved because it is an overflow winning. Note that the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) changes its position by distributing the game ball, so it is possible to distribute the game ball that enters the next distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 331) to the entrance corresponding to the special symbol type of the 8th reserved symbol, and it is possible to continuously execute the variable display of the same special symbol type as the 8th reserved symbol, thereby ending the disadvantageous time-saving state. This configuration can motivate players to shoot game balls in order to accumulate reserves in order to end the unfavorable time-saving state.

In this control example, the winning information of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is configured to reserve up to four balls, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or less (e.g., two) or five or more reserved balls (e.g., eight). Also, instead of displaying the reserved patterns in the small display area Dm19, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as numbers in part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.

Figure 332 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the second special symbol reservation is consecutively obtained by overflow winning in the disadvantageous time-saving state. When the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the number of remaining changes until the chance change is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and is updated by subtracting one each time the change display of each special symbol is executed. Note that the chance change in this control example refers to the change display of the special symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. In this way, the configuration allows the player to determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the disadvantageous time-saving state, making it easier for the player to decide whether to continue playing or not depending on the number of remaining changes until the chance change.

The first special symbol is displayed stationary in the small display area Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in a changing state in the small display area Dm2, allowing the player to easily tell which special symbol is changing.

The reserved special symbols are displayed in the small display area Dm19, with a circle filled with diagonal lines indicating the reserved first special symbol and a circle filled with black indicating the reserved second special symbol. The display screen shown in FIG. 332(a) indicates that the reserved number of first special symbols is three and the reserved number of second special symbols is four, and reserved symbols hr6 and hr7 are reserved symbols indicating the winning information of the second special symbol, so the variable display of the second special symbol is executed continuously. As described above, when the variable display of one special symbol is executed continuously, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends, and the disadvantageous time-saving state ends due to the stop of the variation of the special symbol based on reserved symbol hr7, and after the variation of the special symbol based on reserved symbol hr7 stops, the variable display of the special symbol executed next is a chance variation.

Here, if the display shown in the small display area Dm12 is subtracted by 1 each time a special pattern change display is executed, when a special pattern change display based on the reserved pattern hr7 is executed, "73 more chance changes" will be displayed, and the number of remaining changes until the chance change is actually executed will not match the number of remaining changes displayed in the small display area Dm12, which may cause the player to distrust the game information.

In this control example, the system predicts that the conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state as shown in FIG. 332(a) will be met, and when the number of remaining changes until the chance change displayed in the small display area Dm12 does not match the number of remaining changes until the chance change is executed (i.e., the normal state is set), a presentation is executed in the small display area Dm17 that shortens the number of remaining changes until the chance change displayed in the small display area Dm12, thereby matching the number of remaining changes until the chance change is actually executed with the number of remaining changes displayed in the small display area Dm12, and providing correct game information.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 332(a), the word "Lucky" is displayed above the reserved symbols hr6 and hr7 to give the player advance notice that the conditions for ending the unfavorable time-saving state will be met. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize which reserved symbols will cause a chance fluctuation, making it easier for the player to understand which fluctuations they should pay attention to.

In this control example, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and is subtracted by one each time a special pattern variation display is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration in which points are accumulated and a chance variation is executed when a specific number of points (e.g., 100 points) is accumulated may be used. In this case, one point is added each time a special pattern variation display is executed, and if the same type of special pattern variation display is executed consecutively, the points can be accumulated up to the MAX, creating a presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In this control example, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends after the variable display of the same special pattern is executed consecutively, and the variable display of the next special pattern executed is a chance change, but this is not limited to this. When the variable display of the same special pattern is executed consecutively, the disadvantageous time-saving state may end at the start of the variable display of the next special pattern executed, and a chance change may be executed.

Figure 332 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when a normal symbol is won and the electric device 1640a (see Figure 330) associated with the right-side second ball entrance 1640 (see Figure 330) is long open for the normal symbol winning game. The small display area Dm11 displays a display mode indicating that a normal symbol has been won, and when the normal symbol winning game is executed, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit right" to guide the player on how to play the normal symbol winning game, the small display area dm18 displays a display indicating that the electric device 1640a (see Figure 330) associated with the right-side second ball entrance 1640 (see Figure 330) is open, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Hit right and aim for the electric chute." This allows the player to easily understand that the game involves firing the game ball toward the second ball entrance 1640 on the right side (see FIG. 330), and allows the player to play in a way that suits the game situation.

Here, when the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved. In the case of FIG. 332(b), the last reserved symbol hr5 displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, so when the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed continuously, and the disadvantageous time-saving state can be ended. Therefore, in order to inform the player that it is advantageous to have the game ball enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), "Chance to get chance variation" is displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it is possible to strongly encourage the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), and it is possible to make the player eager to play.

In addition, if three reserved second special symbols are already stored and the last reserved symbol displayed in the small display area Dm19 (for example, reserved symbol hr6) is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol, even if multiple game balls enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), only one winning information of the second special symbol is reserved, so the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be executed continuously. Therefore, if the end condition of the disadvantageous time-saving state cannot be established even if a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), a different display mode (for example, a display such as "Chance to save reserved symbols") may be displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide appropriate game information to the player, and the reliability of the game information can be increased.

Figure 333 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when suggesting that the disadvantageous time-saving state will end. The main display area Dm12 displays "3 more chances until chance change", indicating that the first special pattern and the second special pattern have been displayed a total of 98 times since the disadvantageous time-saving state was set. In other words, when the display of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr2 ends, the display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern will be displayed a total of 100 times, and the condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is met. In this case, the drawing of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 will be performed in the normal state, so in order to suggest that the drawing of the special pattern will be performed in the normal state, the reserved pattern hr3 is displayed in a different display mode (a reserved pattern with a star pattern displayed in a white circle) from the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the first special pattern and the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the second special pattern, and "Attention" is displayed above the reserved pattern hr3. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 is a chance variation, and the player's anticipation for the variable display of the special pattern executed based on the reserved pattern hr3 can be increased during the period until the variable display based on the reserved pattern hr3 is executed.

The main display area Dm also displays "This chance variation may be a lucky variation," which suggests the result of a pre-read of the winning information for reserved pattern hr3, and in this case suggests that there is a high possibility that the lottery result for the special pattern based on reserved pattern hr3 will be a big win. This can further heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the variation display of the special pattern executed based on reserved pattern hr3.

In this control example, the main display area Dm indicates the results of the foreseeing of the reserved pattern hr3, and the display mode of the reserved pattern hr3 displayed in the small display area Dm19 indicates that a lottery for a special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 will be executed in the normal state, but this is not limited to the above. The display mode of the reserved pattern hr3 may also indicate the results of the foreseeing, and for example, the color of the reserved pattern may be changed to notify the likelihood of winning the jackpot.

Figure 333 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed during the ending period of a jackpot game based on winning a regular jackpot. A display mode indicating that a regular jackpot has been won is displayed in the small display area Dm, and the word "Ending" is displayed in the small display area Dm5 to inform the player that the jackpot game is in the ending period.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, it is configured so that winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the second special symbol. Then, when the jackpot game following a normal jackpot win ends, the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game ends is executed in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying "Lucky, normal variation starts with special symbol 1" in the sub-display area Ds, the player is notified in advance that the first special symbol lottery to be executed after the jackpot game ends will be executed with the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and the player can also be interested in the display of the special symbol variation after the jackpot game ends. Note that if the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game ends is executed with the second special symbol, a different display mode (for example, a display mode that does not display "Lucky") is displayed.

During a jackpot game, the display of special symbols is not changed, so it is a period during which players can easily accumulate reserved balls. As described above, when the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit and a game ball enters the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information is not reserved, but the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be changed. In this control example, the position of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown). Therefore, in this control example, the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol hr8 and the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) are identified, and the player is notified of whether it would be advantageous to change the position of the distribution member due to an overflow winning.

Specifically, when the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special symbol type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is not available for reservation, that is, if the winning information of the same special symbol type can be made available for reservation by changing the position of the distribution member 900 due to an overflow winning, as shown in FIG. 333(b), "Get a big chance if you put one ball in the navel before the big win ends" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a schematic diagram corresponding to the current position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is displayed in the small display area Dm18, thereby executing an effect that encourages the player to put a game ball into the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330). By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls are fired even during the ending period of the big win.

When the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is available for reservation, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) will change due to the overflow winning, and the winning information of the same special pattern type will no longer be available for reservation, so the message "Get a big chance if you land a ball in the center before the big win ends" will not be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm.

When the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is available for reservation, a display mode that notifies the player that an overflow winning is unfavorable may be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. This configuration makes it easier for the player to determine whether an overflow winning is favorable or unfavorable.

In this control example, the rotation sensor 990 is used to determine the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331), but the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) may be determined each time based on the ball-entering opening through which the ball enters. Specifically, the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) is determined to be in a state in which the storage section 900c (see FIG. 331) faces upwards based on the ball entering the first ball-entering opening 64a (see FIG. 331). By configuring in this way, the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time a ball enters the ball-entering opening.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the contents of the electrical configuration in this eighth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 334 to Fig. 338. This eighth control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those in the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 334(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example differs from the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned fifth control example (see FIG. 244(a)) in that it has a fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gb instead of the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db, a jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, a time-saving random number 8 table 202ge instead of the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and a time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf instead of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df.

The jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is a data table that is referenced when selecting the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, similar to the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd described above. In the above-mentioned fifth control example, there was the special pattern 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, and the special pattern 2 jackpot 5 table 202dd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. However, in this eighth control example, the jackpot type is selected with the same allocation content regardless of the special pattern type, so the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be explained with reference to FIG. 335(a). FIG. 335(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 335(a), the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd specifies the jackpot type (jackpot A8, jackpot B8) in association with the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (regular state), "jackpot A8" is defined for the range of the acquired first win type counter C2 value of "0 to 94", and "jackpot B8" is defined for the range of "95 to 99". Also, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than normal (regular state), that is, in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, "jackpot A8" is defined for the range of the acquired first win type counter C2 value of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B8" is defined for the range of "50 to 99".

The jackpot type "jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "60" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "60" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot A8" is 95 (0-94) in the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that "jackpot A8" will be determined is 95% (95/100). On the other hand, the number is 50 (0-49) in other than the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that "jackpot A8" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

The jackpot type "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 6, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "60" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "60" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot B8" is 5 (95-99) in the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that "jackpot B8" will be determined is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the number is 50 (50-99) in other than the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that "jackpot B8" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, in this eighth control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the selection ratio of the jackpot type set according to the set game state is varied, and it is configured so that when a jackpot is won during a normal state, the jackpot type (jackpot A8) that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than when a jackpot is won outside the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, players can play in the hope that many special symbol lotteries will be executed during the normal state.

Next, the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge will be explained. This time-saving random number 8 table 202ge is a data table that is referenced in the time-saving judgment that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a jackpot win (miss), and is used to determine whether or not a time-saving win has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 335(b), the contents of the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge will be explained. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge. As shown in FIG. 335(b), the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge stipulates the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a time-saving win in correspondence with the special symbol type (special symbol type) and the game state.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 value of "3 to 899" is specified as the judgment value of the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state, the judgment value of the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure). Similarly, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 value of "3 to 899" is specified as the judgment value of the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state, the judgment value of the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure).

Here, in this eighth control example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made in the special pattern lottery (time-saving lottery) is made to be executed if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery, i.e., if the jackpot has been won but not won in the jackpot lottery, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is determined to have won a jackpot in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, is set to a range of "0 to 2" (see first winning random number 5 table 202da), the system is configured to always win the time-saving win if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

As described above, in this eighth control example, the contents of the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge are regulated so that if a loser wins in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, a time-saving win is always won. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the range of the judgment value for the time-saving win to be regulated so that it is part of the loser wins in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the special pattern lotteries continuously without winning the time-saving win.

In addition, in this eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 335(b), the judgment value for winning the time-saving mode is the same regardless of the special pattern type, but this is not limited to this, and different judgment values may be specified depending on the special pattern type. For example, it may be configured so that it is more difficult to win the time-saving mode when the first special pattern lottery is executed during the normal state than when the second special pattern lottery is executed. In this way, by making the probability of winning the time-saving mode different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, it is possible to easily make the number of special pattern lotteries executed consecutively during the normal state different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed, so that the player can be interested in which special pattern type of special pattern lottery was executed (will be executed) during the normal state.

When the probability of winning the time-saving feature is made different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, it is preferable to configure the special pattern type (for example, the first special pattern) for which a special pattern lottery advantageous to the player is executed during the normal state (which is more likely to grant a beneficial bonus to the player when a jackpot is won) to be less likely to win the time-saving feature among multiple special pattern types. By configuring it in this way, the first special pattern lottery is executed during the normal state, so that if the lottery result is a jackpot, a beneficial bonus to the player is more likely to be granted, and if the result is not a jackpot, it is easier to execute the special pattern lottery again in the normal state, making it possible to select a special pattern type that is more advantageous to the player.

In addition, as in the eighth control example, when the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are basically configured to be easily executed alternately, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, it may be configured so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to make it easier to execute the first special symbol lottery while continuing the normal state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is ended and the normal state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by setting the disadvantageous time-saving state again just by executing the second special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player once.

Also, as shown in FIG. 335(b), in this eighth control example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) is performed only when the normal state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) may be performed even when another game state is set.

For example, it is possible to configure the system so that even when an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state that is set when a time-saving win is won for a specific type of time-saving win) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, the system can be configured so that a time-saving win judgment (time-saving lottery) can be executed, and when a time-saving win is won during an unfavorable time-saving state, a shortened time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is immediately met can be set. By configuring the system in this way, a player playing during an unfavorable time-saving state can be made to play in parallel with a game that aims to meet the time-saving end condition and a game that aims to win a time-saving win in order to end the unfavorable time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving win is won during an unfavorable time-saving state, the game may be configured to transition to a time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) that is set after the end of a big win game, or the game may be configured to be able to determine whether a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) during a favorable time-saving state, and to transition to an unfavorable time-saving state if a time-saving win is won during a favorable time-saving state.

In this way, by configuring it so that it is possible to judge whether a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) when a time-saving state has already been set, and by configuring it so that if a time-saving win has been made, it is possible to transition to a time-saving state with a different degree of advantage from the set time-saving state, it is possible to set a period during which it is better to win a time-saving win (a period during which an unfavorable time-saving state is set) and a period during which it is better not to win a time-saving win (a period during which an advantageous time-saving state is set). Note that in this eighth control example, since it is configured so that winning a time-saving win during a normal state makes it easier to set an unfavorable time-saving state than an advantageous time-saving state, the period during which the normal state is set is a period during which it is better not to win a time-saving win.

In this case, for example, the content of the presentation to suggest to the player the result of the time-saving winning can be configured to differ depending on the set game state in addition to the result of the time-saving winning; if the time-saving winning occurs during a period in which it is better to win the time-saving winning (a period in which an unfavorable time-saving winning state is set), a presentation mode that congratulates the player can be set, and if the time-saving winning occurs during a period in which it is better not to win the time-saving winning state (a period in which an advantageous time-saving winning state is set), a presentation mode that disappoints the player can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the presentation in a presentation mode that corresponds to the degree of advantage of the player for the same time-saving winning result, and it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Returning to Fig. 334(a), the explanation will continue. The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb is a data table in which the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed to show the result of the special symbol lottery is specified, similar to the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the fifth control example described above, and differs in that the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb for special symbol variation and time-saving 8 (see Fig. 336(a)) is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db2 for special symbol variation and time-saving 8 (see Fig. 248(a)) as the data table to be referenced when the special symbol variation or time-saving mode is set as the gaming mode, but is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the detailed contents of the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving will be explained with reference to FIG. 336(a). FIG. 336(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving differ in that different patterns of fluctuation of the fluctuation time are stipulated according to the number of reserved special charts (number of reserved special charts 1, number of reserved special charts 2).

As shown in FIG. 336(a), in this eighth control example, as in each of the control examples described above, different fluctuation patterns of fluctuation time are defined according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, but the illustration of the fluctuation patterns defined for each range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is omitted.

Specifically, when the time-saving type is "time-saving after jackpot (high probability state of normal symbols set after jackpot play ends)," various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved number (0-4), the special symbol 2 reserved number (0-4), and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the special symbol variation is executed with a variation time of "5-90 seconds" according to the selected variation pattern. Although detailed explanations are omitted, as with each of the control examples described above, various variation patterns are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that a variation pattern corresponding to a longer variation time (90 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is not a jackpot win.

In addition, various fluctuation patterns are defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the value of the number of reserved special drawings so that a fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a shorter fluctuation time (e.g., 5 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved special drawings is large than when the number is small.

Next, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving A8", if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "0-2" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0-2", various fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-90 seconds" are specified, and if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "0-2" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-60 seconds" are specified. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0-2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-60 seconds" are specified, and if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is specified.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved special charts 1 is "4" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are specified, and when the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is specified.

Here, in this eighth control example, the special pattern lottery is executed in accordance with the order in which the game balls enter the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1641, and the right second ball entrance 1640 (winning order), and the variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 that have been acquired, so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved special charts is large than when the number is small. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to execute the special pattern lottery with a short variation time when a large number of reserved special charts have been acquired, making it less likely that a situation will occur in which the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 both reach their upper limit.

By configuring it in this way, game balls are allowed to flow into the distribution unit 1064 when both the number of reserved special charts 1 and the number of reserved special charts 2 have reached their upper limit, and by varying the position of the distribution member 900, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the same type of reserved special chart is obtained consecutively.

In addition, even if the number of reserved special charts is close to the upper limit, a variation pattern with a low probability (e.g., 1/100) and a relatively long variation time may be selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a period during which it is easy for game balls to flow into the allocation unit 1064 when the number of reserved special charts has temporarily reached the upper limit.

Next, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving B8", various fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the values of the number of reserved special symbols 1 (0-4), the number of reserved special symbols 2 (0-4), and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the special symbol fluctuation is executed with a fluctuation time of "5-60 seconds" according to the selected fluctuation pattern. Although detailed explanations are omitted, as with each of the control examples described above, various short fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a longer fluctuation time (90 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is not a jackpot win.

The time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of time-saving to be set when a time-saving prize is awarded, and is provided in place of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (see FIG. 248(b)) in the fifth control example described above.

Here, the detailed contents of the time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf will be explained with reference to FIG. 336(b). FIG. 336(b) shows the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf.

As shown in Figure 336 (b), this eighth control example is configured so that the time-saving option can be won in either the first or second special pattern lottery (see Figure 335 (a)), and the selection ratio for the time-saving option type is configured to be different when the time-saving option is won in the first special pattern lottery and when the time-saving option is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the pattern type is "Special pattern 1 (first special pattern)," the time-saving type "Time-saving A8a" is specified for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 95," and the time-saving type "Time-saving B8" is specified for the range of "96 to 99." When the pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)," the time-saving type "Time-saving A8b" is specified for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 98," and the time-saving type "Time-saving B8" is specified for the value of "99."

Here, in this eighth control example, when "time-saving A8 (time-saving A8a, time-saving A8b)" is set as the time-saving type, an unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state is set, and when "time-saving B8" is set, an advantageous time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. Note that the various control contents in the unfavorable time-saving state, that is, the control contents for executing the game in the high probability state of the normal pattern so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, will not be described in detail because the various technologies described in each control example above are adopted. For example, the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is higher than in the normal state, but the opening pattern of the normal pattern winning game to be executed is executed in an opening pattern that makes it difficult to ball the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, or the normal pattern fluctuation time is configured to be longer than in the normal state.

In addition, the definition of an unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state includes not only the technical idea of making the special symbol lottery more difficult to execute than the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player, but also the technical idea of making the bonus granted based on the executed special symbol lottery disadvantageous to the player, even if the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same or even if it is slightly more difficult in the normal state.

When "Time-saving A8a" is set, that is, 95% of the time when the time-saving is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, an unfavorable time-saving state is set. Then, as the end conditions of the unfavorable time-saving state, a first time-saving end condition is set that is met when the number of special pattern drawings executed during the time-saving state reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition is set that is met when the special pattern drawing executed after the time-saving state is set is a special drawing 1 lottery. In other words, it is configured so that the second time-saving end condition is met when two special drawing 1 reservations are obtained in succession, that is, when the special drawing 1 lottery is executed in succession.

By configuring it in this way, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern 1 drawing and an unfavorable time-saving state is set, if the type of special pattern drawing to be executed after the special pattern 1 drawing that won the time-saving feature is the special pattern 1 drawing, the unfavorable time-saving state can be ended by the first special pattern drawing executed during the unfavorable time-saving state, and the normal state can be set. Therefore, the player can play with the aim of achieving the second time-saving end condition before the first time-saving end condition is achieved.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be met depending on the type of the first special symbol lottery executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state, but other contents may be specified as the second time-saving end condition as long as they can be met depending on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed before the first time-saving end condition is met.

For example, a second time-saving end condition may be specified that is met when multiple special symbol draws are executed according to a predetermined rule during the disadvantageous time-saving state, or a second time-saving end condition may be specified that is met when the results of multiple consecutive special symbol draws or each variation pattern of special symbol variations showing the results of multiple consecutive special symbol draws meet a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second time-saving end condition is met and the disadvantageous time-saving state ends.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 336(b), in this eighth control example, it is configured so that if the time-saving effect is won in the lottery for special symbol 1 (first special symbol), it is easier to set a favorable time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (it is easier to select time-saving effect B8) than if the time-saving effect is won in the lottery for special symbol 2 (second special symbol). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the types of special symbol lotteries that are executed in the normal state.

Figure 334(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example. As shown in Figure 334(b), it differs from the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see Figure 244(b)) in that a change execution flag 203ga, a change order storage area 203gb, and a time-saving reduction flag 203gc have been added. Everything else is the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The change execution flag 203ga is a flag that indicates whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed with priority. This flag is an area that is backed up even in the event of a power outage, and in the initial state after the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is set with priority.

The variable order storage area 203gb is an area that stores the winning order for each reserved data (reserved patterns) stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight memory areas are set in this variable order storage area 203gb, and the order is stored in the previous memory area in the order in which they were won. The memory areas are also shifted based on the start of the special pattern variation.

The time-saving reduction flag 203gc is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which it is possible to shorten an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is set), which is a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, and is set to ON when it is a period in which it is possible to shorten an unfavorable time-saving state. While this time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON, processing is executed to determine whether or not a condition for shortening the unfavorable time-saving state (a second time-saving end condition) is met.

Next, referring to Figures 337 and 338, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 337(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. FIG. 337(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 337(a), the ROM 222 in this eighth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a read-ahead hold mode selection table 222ga has been added.

The look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga is a data table that is referenced when selecting the display mode of the reserved pattern in the look-ahead reserved performance (see FIG. 333(a)) that is executed as a performance (look-ahead performance) to show the look-ahead result for the acquired special reserved pattern. In this eighth control example, by executing the look-ahead process, it is configured to be possible to identify the special reserved pattern that corresponds to the special pattern lottery that is executed during the normal state, and it is configured to be possible to execute the look-ahead reserved performance for that special reserved pattern.

Here, the detailed contents of the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 338. FIG. 338 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 338, the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga defines parameters so that the display mode of the reserved pattern is determined based on the special pattern type corresponding to the special pattern reservation that is the target of the pre-reading reserved performance, the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) corresponding to that special pattern reservation, and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the pre-read result is "Big win", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 79" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "3 stars" for the range of "80 to 99". If the pre-read result is "Time-saving B8", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 49" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "1 star" for the range of "50 to 99". If the pre-read result is "Time-saving A8a" or "Miss", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "1 star" for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f.

In other words, the display mode of the reserved symbols that are the subject of the look-ahead reserved effect is configured so that the more stars are displayed, the more likely it is that a look-ahead reserved effect will be executed that suggests to the player that a special symbol lottery that will be advantageous to the player will be executed in the normal state.

In the eighth control example, the display command is set so that the display mode selected using the look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga becomes the display mode of the reserved pattern to be read as is, and the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode showing the performance result of the look-ahead reserved performance. However, without being limited to this, the display mode selected with reference to FIG. 338 may be temporarily stored as the final performance result of the look-ahead reserved performance, and the look-ahead reserved performance may be configured to gradually change the display mode of the special reserved pattern to be read as the final performance result stored as the look-ahead reserved performance. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the special reserved pattern to be read as the ...

This configuration makes it possible to motivate players to always play in an attempt to acquire as many reserved special figures as possible. In addition, since it is possible to easily vary the results of the pre-reading reserved performance based on the number of reserved special figures that have been acquired at the time the pre-reading reserved performance is executed, it is possible to easily execute a wide variety of pre-reading reserved performances without, for example, determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading reserved performance depending on the number of reserved special figures that have been acquired, or varying the content of the performance results of the pre-reading reserved performance.

When the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the pre-read result is "Big win", "2 stars" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f, when the pre-read result is "Time-saving B8", "2 stars" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 29" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "1 star" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "30 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and when the pre-read result is "Time-saving A8b" or "Miss", "1 star" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f.

In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 335(a) and 336(b), of the special pattern lotteries executed in the normal state, the first special pattern lottery is configured to be a special pattern lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery, and as shown in Figure 338, the pre-reading reserved performance is also configured to be more likely to result in a performance result that is more advantageous to the player (a display mode with a larger number of stars) when the target special pattern reserve is special pattern 1 reserve than when it is special pattern 2 reserve.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to predict the results of the pre-reading hold performance in more detail by referring to the performance results of the pre-reading hold performance and the type of special reserved drawing that is the target of the performance.

In the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 333, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserve and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserve are displayed in different display modes so that the player can understand the type of the reserved special pattern that has been acquired. However, without being limited to this, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserve and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserve may be displayed in the same display mode, or in a display mode with a difference that is difficult for the player to see. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the second time-saving end condition will be established, and to make it difficult for the player to predict the result of the pre-reading based on the display mode of the pre-reading reserve performance. Therefore, the player can continue to be interested in the game until the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern that is the target of the pre-reading reserve performance is actually executed.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the pre-reading hold effect can be executed only for the special reserved symbol corresponding to the special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to execute an effect equivalent to the pre-reading hold effect (pseudo pre-reading hold effect) for the special reserved symbol corresponding to the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state).

When this pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed, the display mode is determined for a specific reserved pattern in the same way as the preview reserved performance, and as shown in FIG. 333(a), a pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific reserved pattern is changed. Then, when a special pattern lottery corresponding to the specific reserved pattern that is the target of the pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed, it is preferable to configure it so that the performance result of the pseudo-preview reserved performance is displayed as the performance executed during the special pattern change period to inform the player that the pseudo-preview reserved performance has been executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the disadvantageous time-saving state continues for a long time, it is possible to provide the player with an enjoyable game by executing a pseudo look-ahead hold effect equivalent to the look-ahead hold effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that the reserved pattern corresponding to the special reserved pattern whose look-ahead result is a jackpot win is more likely to be the target of the pseudo look-ahead hold effect than the reserved pattern corresponding to the special reserved pattern whose look-ahead result is not a jackpot win. This increases the possibility of winning the jackpot even when the result of the pseudo look-ahead hold effect is displayed to notify the player that the pseudo look-ahead hold effect has been executed, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 337(b). FIG. 337(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(b)) in that an allocation status storage area 223ga, a reserved status storage area 223gb, and an unfavorable time-saving flag 223gc have been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The distribution state storage area 223ga is a storage area that stores information indicating the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 provided in the distribution unit 1064. This distribution state storage area 223ga stores information for specifying whether the next game ball that flows into the distribution unit 1064 will enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1641.

In this eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 331(a), a ball entry sensor 1064a is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through the passage opening 1064b of the distribution unit 1064, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to distinguish the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a. Then, based on the winning command output from the main control device 110 and the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 is configured to be able to be identified, and an image icon corresponding to the identification result is configured to be able to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see display area Dm18 in FIG. 333(b)).

This makes it easier for the player to understand which ball inlet (first ball inlet 64, second ball inlet 1641) the game ball will be guided to the next time it flows into the distribution unit 1064.

Therefore, for example, by executing a left-handed play during a jackpot game to cause multiple game balls to flow into the distribution unit 1064, and determining which ball entry port (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 1641) the game ball that next flows into the distribution unit 1064 will enter from the state of the image icon displayed according to the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900, it is possible to easily create a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to a ball entry port that can acquire the right to draw for the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the last special pattern reservation that has already been acquired (the special pattern reservation whose winning information is stored in the eighth memory area of the winning information storage area 223b).

In this eighth control example, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 can be determined based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a and the information included in the winning command, but this is not limited to this, and a detection means can be provided that can directly detect the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900.

The reserved status storage area 223gb is a storage area for temporarily storing the reserved status set by the pre-read reserved performance, and the reserved status (display status) selected by referring to the pre-read reserved status selection table 222ga is stored together with information for identifying the corresponding special reserved status. The stored information is then read out in the reserved number display update process (see S4106 in FIG. 346) executed in the main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the system is configured to restrict the execution of new pre-reading reserved effects during the period when information is stored in the reserved state storage area 223gb. In other words, during the period when the pre-reading reserved effect is being executed, the time-saving state will end and the normal state will be set before all the acquired reserved special figures are consumed. Therefore, if it is predicted that the game state will change based on the special figure lottery to be executed thereafter, the pre-reading result and the actual game state change will likely differ, making it difficult to execute a highly reliable performance for the player. Therefore, during the execution of the pre-reading reserved effect, the system is configured not to execute the process of identifying the transition content of the game state based on the pre-reading result of the reserved special figures after the reserved special figure that is the target of the pre-reading reserved effect being executed. This reduces the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

The disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is a flag for indicating that an unfavorable time-saving state is set among the time-saving states, and is set to ON when the time-saving type "time-saving A8a" or "time-saving A8b" is set. Then, in the winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351), when a winning information command for normal figures indicating that a long-opening winning game is to be executed is received, the setting status of the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is determined (S4451 in FIG. 351), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451 in FIG. 351: Yes), a display command corresponding to the performance for suggesting that a normal long-opening winning game (electric chute long opening) will be executed is set (S4405 in FIG. 351). As a result, as shown in FIG. 332, it is possible to easily inform the player that the second time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be established. Then, if it is determined that a state command indicating that the disadvantageous time-saving state has ended has been received (S9051 in FIG. 348: Yes), it is set to OFF (S9052 in FIG. 348).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 339 to Fig. 345, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example will be described, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned fifth control example. The pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example in the contents of the process that determines the execution order of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the process that judges whether or not the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established, and the process that is executed when the game ball starts winning.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339) is executed instead of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), and start winning process 8 (see S10195 in FIG. 344) is executed instead of start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258). All other processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of special pattern change process 8 (S10154) will be explained with reference to FIG. 339. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern change process 8 (S10154). As shown in FIG. 339, special pattern change process 8 (S10154) differs from the above-mentioned special pattern change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) in that the processing contents executed to start a new special pattern change are different from the processing contents executed when an ongoing special pattern change is stopped, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When special symbol change process 8 (S10154) is executed, first, the same processes S201 to S203 as those of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) described above are executed. Then, change execution determination process 8 (S10251) is executed. Details of this change execution determination process 8 (S10251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, but a process is executed to determine the type of special symbol change to be newly executed.

After completing the processing of S10251, it is next determined whether the type of special pattern change to be newly executed is special pattern 2 (second special pattern) (S10252), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 2 (S10252: Yes), the same processing of S205 to S207, S251, and S252 as in the above-mentioned special pattern change processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10252 that it is not special pattern 2 (S10252: No), then it is determined whether the type of the newly executed special pattern change is special pattern 1 (first special pattern) (S10253), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 1 (S10253: Yes), the same processes of S211 to S213, S251, S252 as those of the above-mentioned special pattern change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) are executed, and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S10253 that it is not special pattern 1 (S10253: No), this process ends as it is.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S202 that the pattern is changing (S202: Yes), the processing is the same as the special pattern change processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) described above, but instead of update processing 5 (S253 in FIG. 252), update processing 8 (S10254) is executed, and instead of time-saving setting processing 5 (S254 in FIG. 252), time-saving setting processing 8 (S10255) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 340, a detailed explanation will be given of the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) executed in the special pattern change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339). FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the change execution determination process 8 (S10251). This change execution determination process 8 (S10251) is a process for determining whether the special pattern change performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 is to be executed based on the values of various counters stored in either the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the change execution determination process 8 (S10251), first, the change execution flag 203ga is set to 0 to perform initialization (S10271), and data in the change order storage area 203gb is obtained (S10272). After that, the data in the change order storage area 203gb is shifted (S10273). In the process of S310273, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203gb is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → reserved third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → fifth area, seventh area → reserved sixth area, eighth area → reserved seventh area, and so on. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (1) (S10274).

If it is determined in the processing of S10274 that the data in the execution area is special pattern 1 (1) (S10274: Yes), the change execution flag 203ga is set to change execution (1) in special pattern 1 (S10275), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern change processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special pattern 1 (1) (S10274: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special pattern 2 (2) (S10276). If it is determined in the processing of S10276 that the data in the execution area is special pattern 2 (2) (S10276: Yes), the change execution flag 203gb is set to change execution in special pattern 2 (S10277), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern change processing.

If it is determined in the processing of S10276 that the data in the execution area is not special symbol 2 (2) (S10276: No), since there are no reserved balls to execute the change, the change execution flag 203gb remains in the initial state, this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

As described above, by executing the change execution determination process 8 (S10251), the various reserved memories (special reserved patterns) stored in the change order storage area 203gb can be changed to special patterns in the order in which they were stored.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) will be explained with reference to FIG. 341. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076). This time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed in place of time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) executed in special pattern determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) of special pattern change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339), and differs in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are changed to correspond to the game specifications.

Specifically, when time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed, regardless of the type of special pattern change executed this time (without executing the process of S8101 for determining the type of special pattern change executed in time-saving lottery process 5 (see FIG. 254)), the same processes of S8103 to S8106 as those of the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8101 in FIG. 254) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In other words, as described above with reference to FIG. 335(b), this eighth control example is configured to execute a time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win has been made) when the normal state is set, regardless of the type of special pattern, so in time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076), regardless of the type of special pattern variation that is newly executed, only the game state at the time of the newly executed special pattern variation is determined to determine whether or not to execute a time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win has been made).

In this way, time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is configured to execute a process for determining whether the execution conditions (time-saving lottery execution conditions) for the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are met, and a process for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) if the time-saving lottery execution conditions are met. However, the content of the process for determining whether the time-saving lottery execution conditions are met can be changed as appropriate depending on the gaming specifications of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed not only in the normal state but also when a specific gaming state (such as an unfavorable time-saving state) is set, a process for determining whether the unfavorable time-saving flag 223gc is set to on can be added to the process of S8103.

Next, the processing contents of update process 8 (S273) will be explained with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 8 (S273). This update process 8 (S273) differs from update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the fifth control example described above in that a new process has been added as a process for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met.

Specifically, when update process 8 (S273) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351), and if it is determined that the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351: Yes), the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to OFF (S8352), and then it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met (S8353), and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met (S8353: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S8354), and a command indicating time-saving reduction is determined (S8355), and then the same processes of S8301 to S8306 as those of update process 5 described above (see S253 in FIG. 342) are executed, and the values of the special probability counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h, the game state after updating the various values, and a state command indicating whether or not time-saving reduction is performed are set (S8356), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if the time-saving flag 203gc is not set to on in the process of S8351 (S8351: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8353 that the time-saving end condition is not met (S8353: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S8301, and the processes of S8301 to S8306, which are the same as the above-mentioned update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 342), are executed, and the values of the special chance counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h, the game status after updating the various values, and a status command indicating whether or not the time-saving has been shortened are set (S8356), and this process ends.

As shown in update process 8 (S273), in this eighth control example, when the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to on, that is, when an unfavorable time-saving state in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is set is set, a special time-saving end condition can be satisfied only for a predetermined period of time after the unfavorable time-saving state is set, and it is possible to determine whether or not a time-saving end condition that can be satisfied within that limited period of time has been satisfied.

Specifically, when a time-saving lottery is won and an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition is met when a special pattern variation of the same type as the special pattern type that won the time-saving lottery is executed as the first special pattern variation since the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) was set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to shorten and end the unfavorable time-saving state, which makes it more motivating for the player to play.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving setting process 8 (S10255) will be explained with reference to FIG. 343. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving setting process 8 (S10255). This time-saving setting process 8 (S10255) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in that a process (S8371) of setting the time-saving flag 203gc to ON when a time-saving lottery is won is added, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

Specifically, after executing the processes of S8351 and S8352, which are the same as the time-saving setting process 5 described above (see S254 in FIG. 257), the time-saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8371), and then the processes of S8353 and S8354 are executed, and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, the time-saving flag 203gc is set to on only when the time-saving state is set and only when the player wins the time-saving lottery (only when the player wins the time-saving lottery), so it is possible to prevent the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for shortening the time-saving state in update process 8 (see S273 in FIG. 342) has been met (which is executed during the time-saving state (play time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot and in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is not set).

As shown in FIG. 343, in this eighth control example, the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is always set to ON when a time-saving selection is made, but this is not limited thereto, and the time-saving reduction flag 203gc may be set to ON when it is determined that an unfavorable time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set and an unfavorable time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set.

Next, the processing contents of start entry process 8 (S10195) will be explained with reference to FIG. 344. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start entry process 8 (S10195). This start entry process 8 (S10195) differs from the above-mentioned start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) in that a process for storing information in the variable order storage area 203gb has been added, and the processing contents of the look-ahead process have been changed. All other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations will be omitted.

Specifically, when the start winning process 8 (S10195) is executed, the same processes as S601 to S651 as those of the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) described above are executed, and after the process of S651 is completed, the special symbol 1 (1) is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203gb (S671), and the process proceeds to S607. In addition, in the process of S671, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referenced, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set as the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in this change order storage area 203gb using the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of changes at the start port, one that changes the first special pattern and one that changes the second special pattern, as in this eighth control example, the changes can be started in the order in which the winning symbols enter the start port.

Next, the same processes of S607 to S652 as those of the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) are executed. After the process of S652 is completed, the special symbol 2 (2) is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203gb (S672), the pre-reading process 8 is executed (S673), and this process is terminated. In the process of S672, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referenced, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set as the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in this change order storage area 203gb using the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of changes at the start port, one that changes the first special pattern and one that changes the second special pattern, as in this eighth control example, the changes can be started in the order in which the winning symbols enter the start port.

Next, the processing contents of pre-reading process 8 (S673) will be explained with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of pre-reading process 8 (S673). This pre-reading process 8 (S673) differs from pre-reading process 5 (see S653 in FIG. 259) in the fifth control example described above in that it is configured to identify the game state when a special pattern lottery corresponding to the pre-read winning information is executed, and to set a winning command including the identified information (information indicating the game state at the time of the pending change); otherwise, it is the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to Figs. 346 to 355, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. This eighth control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the processes executed in the main processing (see Fig. 346) of the voice lamp control device 113 are LCD performance execution management processing 8 (S4181 in Fig. 354), advance winning detection processing 8 (S4182 in Fig. 355), command determination processing 8 (S4183 in Fig. 347), and variable display setting processing 8. The rest of the processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 346, the processing contents of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be explained. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the main processing. As shown in FIG. 346, in this tenth control example, processing is executed that is different from the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned fifth control example in that liquid crystal performance execution management processing 8 (S4181 in FIG. 354), advance winning detection processing 8 (S4182 in FIG. 355), command determination processing 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347), and variable display setting processing 8 are executed. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, the processing contents of command determination process 8 (S4183) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 8 (S4183). In this command determination process 8 (S4183), the command determination process 5 (see S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example described above is different in that state command reception process 8 (see S4291 in FIG. 348) is executed instead of state command reception process 5 (S4282), winning command process 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) is executed instead of winning command process (S4212), and big win related process 8 (S4293) is executed instead of big win related process (S4218), but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291) will be described with reference to FIG. 348. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291). As shown in FIG. 348, the status command reception process 8 (S4291) differs from the status command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above in that the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state based on the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9003: Yes) are different from the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time-shortened state based on the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9005: Yes). The other processing contents are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the state command receiving process 8 (S4291) is executed, the same processes as the state command receiving process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above are executed from S9001 to S9003. Then, in the process of S9003, if it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state (S9003: Yes), it is next determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to on (S9051), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S9051: Yes), the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to off (S9052), the normal state presentation setting process 8 is executed (S9053), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9051, if it is determined that the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is not set to on (S9051: No), the process of S9052 is skipped and this process is terminated. The details of normal state presentation setting process 8 (S9053) will be described later with reference to FIG. 349.

If it is determined in the process of S9003 that the game state has not been changed to the normal state (S9003: No), then it is determined whether the game state has been changed to the time-saving state (S9005). If it is determined that the game state has not been changed (S9005: No), the process of S9007 to S9010 is executed, which is the same as the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the state has been changed to the time-saving state, the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 is executed (S9054), and then this process ends. The contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 (S9054) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350.

Next, referring to FIG. 349, the processing contents of normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053) executed in state command receiving processing 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be explained. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053). This normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053) differs from the above-mentioned normal state presentation setting processing (S9004 in FIG. 264) in that processing contents for when a disadvantageous time-saving state is transitioned to the normal state are added, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. Identical processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state presentation setting process 8 (S9053) is executed, first, the game state set before the currently set game state (the game state before the change) is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9101), and it is determined whether the game state before the change is an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151). If it is determined in the process of S9151 that it is an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151: Yes), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the chance variation is set (S9152), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9151 that it is not an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151: No), the same processes of S9102 to S9104 as those in the normal state presentation setting process described above (see S9004 in FIG. 264) are executed, and this process is terminated.

By setting a display command for the presentation mode in the processing of S9152, the background image of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the normal state has been set based on the fact that the conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state have been met. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the next special pattern change to be executed is a special pattern change (lottery) executed in the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 350, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054) executed in the state command receiving processing 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be explained. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054). This time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting processing (see S900 in FIG. 266) in that the processing contents when transitioning from the normal state to the time-saving state are changed, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 (S9054) is executed, first, the same processes of S9301 to S9304 as the time-saving state presentation setting process (see S900 in FIG. 266) are executed. Then, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the command received this time is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305), and then it is determined whether the time-saving type of the time-saving state set this time is time-saving A8 (S9381), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A8 (S9381: Yes), the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S9382), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the disadvantageous time-saving state (S9383), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9381 that the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is not time-saving A8 (S9382: Yes), the processes of S9382 and S9383 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the processing contents of winning command processing 8 (S4292) will be explained with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning command processing 8 (S4292). This winning command processing 8 (S4292) differs from the above-mentioned winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) in that the processing contents when a regular winning information command is received and the processing contents when a special winning information command is received have been changed. The processing contents other than that are the same, and a detailed explanation of the contents will be omitted.

When the winning command process 8 (S4292) is executed, first, the processes S4401 to S4403 are executed, which are the same as the winning command process described above (see S4212 in FIG. 177). Then, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the winning information command for normal symbols received this time contains winning information indicating that a winning will occur in the normal symbol lottery (S4403; Yes), it is next determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4451), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the opening of the long electric chute (S4405).

In other words, in this eighth control example, if the winning information for normal symbols acquired while the disadvantageous time-saving state is set includes information indicating that a normal long-open winning game will be played (specific normal winning information), a presentation is executed to suggest to the player that a normal long-open winning game (long electric chute opening) will occur. By configuring in this way, a player playing in the disadvantageous time-saving state can be notified of the arrival of an opportunity to play consecutive games in which it is possible to play the same type of special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) before the normal long-open winning game is actually played, so that the player can play while hoping that the disadvantageous time-saving state will end (be shortened).

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured to differentiate between the game method (left-hand play) executed when an unfavorable time-saving state is set and the game method (right-hand play) executed during a normal long-open hit game, as in the eighth control example, it is possible to notify the player that a normal long-open hit game will be executed before the normal long-open hit game is actually executed, thereby setting a grace period for the player to change the game method, making it easier for the player to execute a game corresponding to the normal long-open hit game.

In addition, in this eighth control example, a performance is executed to suggest a normal long opening win (long electric chute opening) based on receiving a winning information command related to a normal pattern. In other words, it is configured to be possible to suggest to the player that a normal long opening win game will be executed before the normal pattern lottery that will win the normal long opening win is executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it to be possible to suggest to the player that a normal long opening win game will be executed by using the period from when the normal pattern lottery that will win the normal long opening win is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (normal winning period).

Furthermore, each time a winning information command for a normal symbol is received, it is determined whether the command contains information indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played. If it is determined that the command contains information indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played, a calculation means capable of calculating the period until the normal long opening win game is played may be provided, and the period during which a performance is played to indicate to the player that a normal long opening win game will be played may be determined based on the period calculated by the calculation means. In this case, for example, if the normal winning period is shorter than a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds), the performance may be configured to be executable from a stage before the normal winning variation is played, for example, from the stage at which a winning information command for a normal symbol indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played is received.

Next, referring to FIG. 352, the processing contents of special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451) executed in winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) will be described. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451). This special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451) is processing that is executed when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received, and based on information included in the winning information command, for example information indicating a win, processing is executed to set the presentation mode of a presentation (pre-reading presentation) that suggests to the player the information included in the winning information command before the special symbol lottery corresponding to that winning information is executed.

In this eighth control example, by executing this special symbol winning information command process 8 (S4451), it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved symbol in response to information for indicating a win, which is included in the winning information command, or to change the display mode of the reserved symbol in response to information for indicating the type of special symbol, which is included in the winning information command.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, in order to enable the player to know which special reserved symbol corresponds to the special symbol lottery executed in a specific game state (normal state), when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received, the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the received winning information command is executed can be determined in advance.

By configuring it in this way, the player can check the display mode of the reserved special symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and predict the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved special symbol is executed.

Specifically, when special winning information command processing 8 (S4451) is executed, first, the current game status is extracted (identified) based on the information set in the slave status setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551: Yes), it is then determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4552). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S4552: Yes), that is, if the currently received winning information command is a winning information command received during an disadvantageous time-saving state, it predicts whether the time-saving end condition for terminating the disadvantageous time-saving state is met (S4553), and based on the result of whether the time-saving end condition is met predicted in the processing of S4553, it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met (whether the special pattern lottery corresponding to the currently received winning information command is a special pattern lottery executed in a normal state) (S4554).

If it is determined in the process of S4554 that the special symbol lottery is to be executed in the normal state (S4554: Yes), the display mode (number of stars) of the corresponding reserved symbol is determined by referring to the pre-read reserved symbol selection table 222ga (S4555), and information for indicating the determined reserved symbol (display mode of the reserved symbol) is stored in the reserved symbol storage area 223gb (S4556). Then, a display command (including a display command for indicating the display mode determined in the process of S4555) is set based on the information contained in the received special symbol winning information command (S4507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4551 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S4551: No), if it is determined in the process of S4552 that the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is not set to on (S4552: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4554 that the time-saving end condition is not met (S4554: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S4507.

Next, the jackpot-related process 8 (S4293) executed in the command determination process 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347) will be described. This jackpot-related process 8 (S4293) differs from the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) in that ending process 8 (S4293) is executed instead of the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 180) that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4714: Yes in FIG. 180); otherwise, the same process is executed. Here, the process contents executed in ending process 8 (S4293) will be described with reference to FIG. 353. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the process contents of ending process 8 (S4293).

Ending process 8 (S4293) differs from the above-mentioned ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) in that a process is added to set the presentation mode of the next variable special symbol type notification presentation to notify the player of the type of special symbol lottery to be executed for the first time after the end of the big win game (after the end of the small win game).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 353, when Ending Process 8 (S4293) is executed, the same processes of S4801 to S4803 as those of the Ending Process described above (see S4715 in FIG. 181) are executed, and then the special symbol type (special pattern type) for the next variation is read out based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4851), and a display command is set to show the read out special symbol type (S4852). Then, the execution of the ending display is set (S4804), and this process ends.

By setting a display command for indicating the special symbol type read out in the process of S4852, it is possible to display a display mode for indicating to the player the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 333(b). Also, if it is determined in the process of S4851 that no information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, that is, if no special symbol reserve has been obtained, the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game cannot be notified to the player based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so the process for displaying the display mode for indicating to the player the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game on the ending screen is skipped.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to predict the special symbol type of the next special symbol lottery to be executed based on the processing result of advance winning detection process 8 (see S4182 in FIG. 355) described later, and set a display command to display the display mode based on the prediction result.

Next, the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) will be explained with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181). In this LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181), a process is executed to update the value of a variable time counter (not shown) in which a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110 is set, and a process is executed to determine the performance mode corresponding to the updated value.

When LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S55401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S55401: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5402), the performance mode corresponding to the updated counter value is set (determined) (S55402), other update processes related to the performance are executed (S5407), a display command is set to show the performance mode based on the update result (S5408), and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect to inform the player of the current game state) when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern change has been executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the trigger for executing the suggestive effect so that it can be set regardless of the currently set change time of the special pattern change, and to configure the suggestive effect to be executed only if the currently set change time of the special pattern change is longer than the elapsed time that triggers the execution of the suggestive effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not a suggestive effect will be executed depending on the change pattern that has been set.

Furthermore, the display area in which the suggestive effect is executed may be configured to overlap with the display area in which the variable effect is executed, so that a situation in which the content of the suggestive effect is visible to the player and a situation in which it is difficult to see (not visible) can be created depending on the presentation mode of the variable effect being executed at the time when the trigger for executing the suggestive effect is established and the suggestive effect is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to determine whether or not a suggestive effect visible to the player will be executed depending on the change time of the special pattern change being executed and the content of the variable effect being executed.

In addition, FIG. 354 shows the processing contents of the LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) as updating the value of the fluctuation time counter set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, and setting (determining) the performance mode corresponding to the updated value, but it is also possible to provide a counter that can be set to a value corresponding to the passage of time other than the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, and to configure it so that the performance mode corresponding to the updated content of the counter can be set (determined).

For example, a process may be executed to update the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time since the start of a jackpot game, or a process to update the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time since a specific presentation is executed, and a process may be executed to set (determine) the presentation mode corresponding to the update result. Also, the LCD presentation execution management process 8 (S4181) may be configured to update the values of various counters, determine whether the update result satisfies the execution conditions, and execute only the process of setting a flag to ON to indicate that the execution conditions have been met if the execution conditions have been met, and to be able to execute a process to execute a specific presentation in other processes (for example, a variable display setting process) on the condition that the flag to indicate that the execution conditions have been met is set to ON.

Next, referring to FIG. 355, the processing contents of the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182) will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182). This advance winning detection process 8 (S4182) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, when a ball is detected by the ball sensor 1064a, a process is executed to predict whether the ball entrance into which the detected game ball can enter is the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641, and a process is executed to identify the state (position) of the distribution member 900 to indicate which ball entrance the game ball that will enter the distribution device 1064 next can enter if the ball actually enters either ball entrance.

In the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182), first, the ball entrance sensor 1064a determines whether the ball has entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901: Yes), it predicts whether the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902). As a method of predicting the ball entrance destination, a sensor (not shown) that detects the inclination mounted on the axis of the distribution member 900 is used to calculate the direction of the distribution member 900 from the inclination. Note that the detection of the direction of the distribution member 900 for predicting the ball entrance destination does not have to be done by a sensor that detects the inclination, and may be done by using, for example, a magnet and a hall sensor. In addition, as described above, since the orientation of the sorting member 900 alternates between left and right, the prize destination can be predicted based on the number of prizes won, in which case a sensor may not be required.

Next, it is determined whether the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 by the processing of S9902 (S9903), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: No), the processing proceeds to S9905. On the other hand, if the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: Yes), second ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball that enters the allocation device 1064 may (is highly likely to) enter the second ball entrance 1641 is stored in the allocation status storage area 223ga (S9904), and the processing proceeds to S9905.

In the process of S9905, it is determined whether or not the process of S9902 predicted that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9905), and if it predicted that the ball would not enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9905: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it predicted that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902: Yes), first ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball that enters the allocation device 1064 may (is highly likely to) enter the first ball entrance 64 is stored in the allocation status storage area 223ga (S9906), and this process ends.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state determines whether or not a time-saving win will occur, and is configured to provide a high probability of winning the time-saving win. This provides a novel gameplay experience in which the special symbol lottery is less likely to be executed in the normal state.

In addition, when the time-saving win is determined, either an unfavorable time-saving state that is less favorable than the normal state or a favorable time-saving state that is more favorable than the normal state is set. When an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the special symbol lottery for the normal state is not executed until the time-saving end condition is met. The time-saving end condition can be set to a time-saving end condition that is met when the special symbol lottery is executed in a specific order, and a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the more special pattern lotteries are executed, the easier it becomes for the time-saving end conditions to be met, making it easier for players playing during an unfavorable time-saving state to continue playing.

In this eighth control example, the variable count end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed reaches 100 times can be set as the time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (time-saving number of times) that is set as the variable count end condition can be configured to differ depending on the type of time-saving that is set.

In this case, for example, the time-saving type can be set to time-saving AA8, time-saving BB8, or time-saving CC8, and the time-saving number of times "100 times" can be set as the variable count end condition for time-saving AA8, and the time-saving number of times "200 times" can be set as the variable count end condition for time-saving BB8. It is better to set the time-saving number of times "300 times" as the variable count end condition for time-saving CC8. By configuring in this way, the duration of the disadvantageous time-saving state can be made different depending on the time-saving type that is set.

In this case, the remaining number of time-saving times displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be configured to initially display the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving times set to "100," and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times can be increased according to the progress of play in the disadvantageous time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the disadvantageous time-saving state will end.

In this eighth control example, if an unfavorable time-saving effect is won in the second special pattern lottery, a special pattern lottery that is less favorable than the normal state is executed in the first special pattern lottery until the unfavorable time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured so that a penalty can be imposed on other special pattern lotteries depending on the result of one special pattern lottery.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 356 to 375. The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, like the fifth control example described above, is configured to execute a jackpot game when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, and to set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends by a game ball entering (passing) a specific area (V-gate) provided in a game area (an area in a variable winning device (attacker) 3650 that is opened during a jackpot game). Also, like the fifth control example described above, it is configured to be able to execute a judgment of a winning time-saving symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a miss.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state, the most advantageous game state for the player (second time-saving state) is set. By configuring in this way, a game in which a player playing in the normal state wins a jackpot in the special pattern lottery and aims to transition to a probability-changing state that is more advantageous than the normal state while winning prize balls from the jackpot game, and a game in which a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state and aims to set the most advantageous game state for the player (second time-saving state) can be executed in parallel, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the trigger for transitioning to the game state that is most advantageous to the player (the second time-saving state) is set only when the player wins the time-saving state, and the determination of whether or not a time-saving state has been won (the time-saving lottery) is performed only in the normal state. Therefore, if a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set, the game state cannot be transitioned from the special state to the second time-saving state.

In addition, in this ninth control example, in order to make the second time-saving state a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the high probability state, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state is configured to be different from the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the time-saving state.

Specifically, during the probability variation state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Also, during the time-saving state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. And, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed as a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the high probability state and the time-saving state as game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and furthermore, it is possible to set a second time-saving state as a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state.

The pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 has been changed, that part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed, and that the content of various control processes has been changed. Note that a description of the same content as in the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to Figures 356 to 361. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is significantly different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that various non-electrically operated ports are provided inside the normal electric role 3071 (the game area where the game ball can flow down (it is easy to flow down) when the normal electric role 3071 is in the open state), and that various non-electric roles that are operated by the game ball that entered the various non-electrically operated ports are provided, and that a ball entry port that allows the ball to enter by the operation of various non-electric roles is provided.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 356, but the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example is provided with a non-electric device (non-electric special symbol 1 device 3064a) associated with the ball entry means (first ball entry port 3064 on the right) that can acquire the right to play the first special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 1), and a non-electric device (non-electric device 3065a) associated with the ball entry means (second ball entry port 3065) that can acquire the right to play the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2), and each non-electric device is configured to operate when a game ball enters the corresponding non-electric operating port (non-electric special symbol 1 port 3073a, non-electric special symbol 2 port 3073b) provided inside the normal electric device 3071.

Then, depending on the type of normal winning game that is likely to be executed when the game state is set to a high probability state (time-saving state, probability-changing state) for normal patterns, it is possible to execute a first normal winning game in which the game ball that flows into the inside of the normal electric device 3071 during a normal winning game is likely to enter the special pattern 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, and a second normal winning game in which the game ball is likely to enter the special pattern 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, it is configured so that when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is easier to execute a normal symbol winning game (it is easier to get the game ball to enter the inside of the normal electric device 3071 during a normal symbol winning game) than when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and as a normal symbol winning game to be executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, a time-saving state (first time-saving state) in which a first normal symbol winning game is more likely to be executed than a second normal symbol winning game, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state) in which a second normal symbol winning game is more likely to be executed than a first normal symbol winning game can be determined according to the game state set when a normal symbol winning game is won.

By configuring it in this way, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state of the normal pattern can be made different depending on the type of game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the lottery is configured so that when the second special pattern lottery is executed, the lottery is more advantageous to the player than when the first special pattern lottery is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute games with different degrees of advantage for the player depending on the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, but also in the type of game state that has been set.

In addition, in this ninth control example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed, and when the probability variable state is set, the first special pattern lottery is likely to be executed. In addition, in some cases in which the time-saving state is set (when the second time-saving state is set), a condition that is difficult to achieve (time-saving count 10,000 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the second time-saving state. In other words, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is essentially configured to continue until the next jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, which is likely to be executed during the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is configured to be set with a high probability (90%) after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, even in the time-saving state where the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is lower than in the high probability state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play aiming for the next jackpot without ending the current game state, and it is also possible to make the bonus awarded to the player when a jackpot is won more advantageously than in the high probability state.

Now, with reference to FIG. 356, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 356 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 356, the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 234) in that the configuration of the lower area and the right side area of the game board 13 are different. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 356, the lower area of the game board 13 formed below the variable display unit 80 is provided with a first ball entrance 64 through which the right to play the first special symbol lottery can be acquired. The right area of the game board 13 formed to the right of the variable display unit 80 is provided with an operating device 3070, a non-electric special symbol 1 device 3064a, a non-electric special symbol 2 device 3065a, and a through gate 67.

The operating device 3070 has a flow path formed therein through which game balls can flow down, and has a special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a and a special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b through which game balls that have flowed down the flow path can enter. A normal electric device 3071 is attached to the opening for allowing game balls to flow into the inside of the operating device 3070.

The normal electric device 3071 is opened by a normal winning game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery (a lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67) is won. Note that the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric device 3071 based on the normal symbol lottery and the normal winning game are the same as the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric device 640a in the fifth control example described above, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The non-electrically operated opening 3073a is connected to the non-electrically operated device 3064a by an operating mechanism (not shown). When a game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening 3073a while the non-electrically operated device 3064a is closed, the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism, and the non-electrically operated device 3064a is mechanically opened. In other words, the non-electrically operated opening 3073a is a means for opening the non-electrically operated device 3064a.

Similarly, the non-electrically operated opening 3073b is connected to the non-electrically operated device 3065a by an operating mechanism (not shown). When a game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening 3073b while the non-electrically operated device 3065a is closed, the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism, and the non-electrically operated device 3065a is mechanically opened. In other words, the non-electrically operated opening 3073b is a means for opening the non-electrically operated device 3065a.

A detailed explanation of the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a and special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, which can be operated based on the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, will be given later with reference to Figures 357 to 359.

As mentioned above, the non-electrical parts (special figure 1 non-electrical part 3064a and special figure 2 non-electrical part 3065a) are configured to open and close by mechanical action based on the weight of the game ball, not by electrical control. Therefore, unlike electrical parts that are electrically controlled to open and close (for example, normal electrical part 3071 and opening and closing door 3650f of variable winning device 3650), the opening and closing control is not performed by main control device 110 of pachinko machine 10, and the opening and closing status is not managed by main control device 110, etc.

Therefore, in this ninth control example, a detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the actual operating status of each non-electrical device (non-electrical device 3064a in special drawing 1, non-electrical device 3065a in special drawing 2), and the operating status (open/closed status) of each non-electrical device (non-electrical device 3064a in special drawing 1, non-electrical device 3065a in special drawing 2) is configured to be detectable.

Then, based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the player is notified by the special figure 1 non-electrical notification lamp 3064b or the special figure 2 non-electrical notification lamp 3065b that the special figure 1 non-electrical device 3064a is operating (open) or that the special figure 2 non-electrical device 3065a is operating (open). This makes it possible to notify the player of the operating status of each non-electrical device in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the ninth control example, the special pattern 1 non-electrical notification lamp 3064b and the special pattern 2 non-electrical notification lamp 3065b are configured to notify the player whether the corresponding non-electric role is operating (open), but notification means capable of notifying other situations may be provided, for example, notification means capable of notifying (suggesting) the player whether the situation is such that the special pattern 1 non-electrical role 3064a or the special pattern 2 non-electrical role 3065a is likely to operate. In this case, for example, based on the normal pattern winning type set when a winning normal pattern lottery is won, it is good to provide a notification means for notifying (suggesting) the player which non-electric role is likely to be activated (which non-electrical operating hole is likely to receive the game ball) in the normal pattern winning game to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the type of non-electric device to be activated (released) at a timing before the special non-electric device is actually activated, for example, during the first period from when the normal pattern lottery is executed to when the result of the normal winning lottery is stopped and displayed, the second period from when the result of the normal winning lottery is stopped and displayed to when the normal winning game is executed, the third period from when the normal winning game is executed to when the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, the fourth period from when the normal winning game is executed to when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port, the fifth period from when the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 to when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port, and the sixth period from when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port to when the non-electric device is activated, or during a combined period in which multiple periods are selected and combined. Therefore, based on the content suggested by the notification means, the player can understand (predict) the content of the game to be executed later, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when an alert is issued by the alert means during any period (corresponding to the first, second, or third period described above) from when the winning lottery is executed until the game balls flow into the operating device 3070, the player can choose whether or not to allow the game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 based on the content of the alert from the alert means. In other words, when a favorable game state (e.g., time-saving state) that makes it easy to open a non-electric role is set, if a game ball is inserted into a ball-entry means (e.g., the right first ball-entry opening 3064) that allows ball entry when any one of the non-electric roles (e.g., the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) is in operation (when the first special pattern lottery is executed), the favorable game state ends, but if a game ball is inserted into a ball-entry means (the second ball-entry opening 3065) that allows ball entry when another non-electric role (e.g., the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a) is in operation (when the second special pattern lottery is executed), the favorable game state does not end, and by configuring the above-mentioned notification means to be able to notify, it becomes possible to allow the player to select whether or not to continue the favorable game state. In other words, by allowing the player to select a game method (whether or not to launch a game ball), the result of the game that is executed later can be greatly different. This can increase players' motivation to play in order to achieve more advantageous gameplay.

Furthermore, in this case, when the game ball enters one ball entry means, a game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when the game ball enters another ball entry means, but it becomes easier to end the advantageous game state, and when the game ball enters another ball entry means, a game that is less advantageous to the player is executed than when the game ball enters one ball entry means, but it becomes harder to end the advantageous game state. It is advisable to predetermine the contents of the privilege (e.g., a special pattern lottery) that is granted when the game ball enters each ball entry means and the conditions for ending the advantageous game state.

Here, a specific explanation of the detection sensors for detecting the operating status of each non-electric device is given. Detection means (proximity sensors) are provided at locations where it can detect that the operating mechanism (operating mechanism for Special Figure 1 3074, operating mechanism for Special Figure 2 3075), which is activated when a game ball enters the non-electric operating port (non-electric operating port for Special Figure 1 3073a, non-electric operating port for Special Figure 2 3073b) and comes into contact with it, is in the operating position (the position where the non-electric device is activated (released)). When the detection means detects that the operating mechanism is in the operating position (when the discrimination means discriminates based on the detection signal output from the detection means), it is possible to identify that the non-electric device is released.

In addition, as a method for managing the operating status of each non-electric role, a method other than the method of detecting the operating status of the actual non-electric role 3065a as described above may be used. For example, a detection means for detecting the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game may be provided, and based on the detection result by the detection means and the normal winning type, it may be determined which non-electric operating port (special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b) the game ball entered, and the operating status of each non-electric role may be specified based on the determination result. In this case, it is preferable to configure the device to specify the operating status of each non-electric role by determining whether the closing condition of each non-electric role is established based on the specified operating status of the non-electric role and the acquired winning information. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to provide a dedicated detection means just for managing the operating status of the non-electric role, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a management process that detects the entry of a game ball into a ball entry means that is different in ease of entry when the non-electric device is operating and when it is not, compares the detection result with the contents specified as the operating status of the non-electric device, and determines whether the specified contents are normal or not.

Next, with reference to Figures 357 to 359, the detailed contents of the various components formed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example will be described. Figure 357 (a) is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board 13 shown in Figure 356. As shown in Figure 357 (a), a game ball flow path is formed in the vertical direction in the right area of the game board 13, and game balls launched toward the right area (game balls launched by right-handed play) flow down the game ball flow path and ultimately into the outlet 66.

A number of nails are planted vertically (up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 357) in this game ball flow path, and these planted nails divide the game ball flow path into a left side flow path (a flow path formed between the nails and the variable display unit 80) and a right side flow path (a flow path formed to the right of the nails).

As shown in FIG. 357(a), the nails dividing the ball flow path into a left flow path and a right flow path are planted to form a passing area through which the ball can pass, so that the ball flowing down the left flow path can flow into the right flow path, and the ball flowing down the right flow path can flow into the left flow path.

The actuator 3070 is provided on the left side of the game ball flow path, i.e., at a position where game balls flowing down the left side flow path are easier to flow into than game balls flowing down the right side flow path, and the non-electric device 3064a of special figure 1 and the non-electric device 3065a of special figure 2 are provided on the right side of the game ball flow path, i.e., at a position where game balls flowing down the right side flow path are easier to flow into than game balls flowing down the left side flow path.

By forming a left flow path and a right flow path in this way, multiple paths can be created for the game balls launched by right-handed play to flow down. For example, when multiple devices (operating device 3070, special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, etc.) installed in the right area are in a state where balls can enter (open state), game balls will only enter the devices installed upstream of the right area, making it difficult for game balls to enter the devices installed downstream, thereby preventing a situation in which game progress is delayed.

Here, the detailed configuration of the operating device 3070 will be explained. When a normal symbol lottery is won (when a normal symbol winning game is executed), the operating device 3070 becomes ready for a game ball to enter (i.e., the normal electric device 3071 is opened), and when a game ball enters one of the two non-electric operating ports (special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b) provided inside the operating device 3070, the corresponding non-electric device (special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a, special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a) opens.

The game ball that flows into the inside of the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070a and reaches the movable piece 3072. This movable piece 3072 is variably controlled in a predetermined opening and closing pattern when a normal winning game is being played, and is configured to be variable between an open position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 3070a can flow into the second flow path 3070b, and a closed position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 300a can be received and flowed down toward the third flow path 3070c. Note that when a normal winning game is not being played (non-normal winning game state), the movable piece 3072 is configured to be in the closed position.

In other words, this movable piece 3072 is a means for allowing the inflow of game balls into the second flow path 3070b when a predetermined condition is met (when a normal winning game is executed). In this ninth control example, the opening operation content of the normal electric device 3071 in the normal winning game executed when a winning normal symbol lottery is won is configured to be different depending on the type of normal winning symbol. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from when the normal winning game is executed to when the normal electric device 3071 is opened is made different. Meanwhile, the movable piece 3072 is configured to be variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern after the normal winning game is executed, regardless of the type of normal winning symbol.

The length of the opening period is varied depending on the type of normal winning, and the length of time required from when a normal winning game is executed until the game ball reaches the movable piece 3072 is varied, making it possible to play a normal winning game in which the game ball that reaches the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the second flow path 3070b, and a normal winning game in which the game ball that reaches the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the third flow path 3070c.

The second flow path 8070b is provided downstream with a special non-electrically operated port 3073a, and all game balls that flow down the second flow path 8070b enter the special non-electrically operated port 3073a. The special non-electrically operated port 3073a is connected to the special non-electrically operated device 3064a via a special non-electrically operated mechanism 3074, and when a game ball enters the special non-electrically operated port 3073a, the game ball comes into contact with the operating mechanism 3074, and the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism 3074, changing the special non-electrically operated device 3064a from the closed state to the open state.

When the non-electric special feature 3064a is in the open state, the operating mechanism 3074 is operated in the open state, so that the game ball that enters the non-electric special feature 3064a does not come into contact with the operating mechanism 3074. In other words, the non-electric special feature 3064a is a means for changing the non-electric special feature 3064a from the closed state to the open state, and is a means for changing the non-electric special feature 3064a without using an electrical drive source.

The special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is a non-electric device attached to the right first ball entrance 3064, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be inserted into the right first ball entrance 3064, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to insert a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the operating mechanism 3074 based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two game balls into the right first ball entrance 3064.

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that enters the right first ball entrance 3064 is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064, and when two game balls are held in the holding means, the held game balls flow out due to their own weight into a discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, and a closing mechanism (not shown) is provided so that the game balls discharged into the discharge path come into contact with it.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the non-electric device 3064a in the special drawing 1, which was in the open state, is changed to the closed state.

As explained above, the non-electric device 3064a in Special Figure 1 is configured to change mechanically using the weight of the game balls flowing downstream, without using electrical control, whether it is changed from a closed state to an open state or from an open state to a closed state.

A special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b is provided downstream of the third flow path 3070c, and all game balls that flow down the third flow path 8070c are configured to enter the special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b. The special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a via the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and when a game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, the game ball that entered contacts the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the weight of the game ball activates the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, changing the special figure 2 non-electrically operated device 3065a, which is in a closed state, to an open state.

When the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state, the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operating in the open state, so that the game ball that enters the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b does not come into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is a means for changing the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, which is in the closed state, to the open state, and is a means for changing the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a without using an electrical drive source.

The special figure 2 non-electric device 3064b is a non-electric device attached to the second ball entrance 3065, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be inserted into the second ball entrance 3065, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to insert a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is changed from the closed state to the open state by the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 being operated based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric operation port 3073b. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two game balls into the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding balls that enter the second ball entrance 3065 is provided inside the second ball entrance 3065, and when two game balls are held in the holding means, the held game balls flow out due to their own weight into a discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, and a closing mechanism (not shown) is provided so that the game balls discharged into the discharge path come into contact with the discharge path.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the non-electric special device 3065a in the open state is changed to a closed state.

As explained above, the non-electric device 3065a in Special Figure 2 is configured to change mechanically using the weight of the game balls flowing downstream, without using electrical control, whether it is changed from a closed state to an open state or from an open state to a closed state.

Next, referring to FIG. 357(b), the flow of the game ball during a normal winning game will be explained. FIG. 357(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game ball when the game ball enters the special game 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a during a normal winning game.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), when a normal winning game is executed, the normal electric device 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric device 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the open normal electric device 3071 (see FIG. 357(b)) passes through the movable piece 3072 located in the open position and enters the special device 1 non-electric operation port 3073a. When the game ball enters the special device 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special device 1 operation mechanism 3074 is activated, and the special device 1 non-electric device 3064a becomes open (see the solid line in FIG. 357(b)).

When the special non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the special non-electric device 3064a is changed to a position that blocks the right-side flow path, so that most of the game balls that are launched by right-handed play and flow down the right-side flow path 3060 enter the right first ball entrance 3064.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric device 3071 is provided on the left flow path, and the special 1 non-electric device 3064a is provided on the right flow path. Furthermore, since the normal electric device 3071 is provided upstream of the special 1 non-electric device 3064a, the rate at which game balls flow into the normal electric device 3071 does not change depending on the variable state of the special 1 non-electric device 3064a. Therefore, by changing the special 1 non-electric device 3064a to the open state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which game balls during a normal hit cannot flow into the operating device 3070 and the game cannot proceed smoothly.

In addition, even if a normal winning game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is executed while the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be reliably entered into the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b because the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a does not restrict the game ball from entering the operating device 3070.

In addition, in this ninth control example, since the game balls flowing down the right area 3060 are configured to flow down two paths (left path and right path), even if the normal electric device 3071 installed upstream is in an open state, the game balls flowing down the right path can be easily made to reach the special electric device 3064a installed downstream. In other words, when both the normal electric device 3071 and the special electric device 3064a are in an open state, the game balls flowing down the right area 3060 can be easily made to reach either device for a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which the game balls flow down one path.

When two game balls enter the non-electric device 3064a of Special Figure 1, which is in the open state, the closing condition of the non-electric device 3064a is met, as shown in Figure 358 (a), and the non-electric device 3064a is changed from the open state to the closed state.

As described above, in the ninth control example, even when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state, the game ball can be inserted into the operating device 3070. For example, a game ball may enter the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state. In this case, even if a game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a continues to be in an open state because the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 is not activated by the entered game ball. In addition, the value of the number of balls that is the closing condition of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state also continues as it is. In other words, even if a new game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state, no special privilege is given to the player.

By configuring it in this way, when the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the player can be motivated to try to get a specified number of game balls (2 balls) into the right first ball entry port 3064 to which the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is attached until the next game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operation port 3073a.

As described above, in the ninth control example, when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be inserted into the operating device 3070. However, without being limited to this, for example, the operating device 3070 (normal electric role 3071) may be arranged downstream of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and in a position that is more difficult to reach when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that enter the operating device 3070 during the period when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state compared to the period when it is not in the open state.

Next, referring to FIG. 358(a), the ball flow of the game ball launched by right-hand play when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state will be explained. FIG. 358(a) is a diagram that shows the flow when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state. As shown in FIG. 358(a), when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed (operated) to the open state, the game ball is easily entered into the right first ball entrance 3064, and when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 3064, a closing mechanism (not shown) connected to the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is activated, and the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed (operated) to the closed state.

Next, referring to FIG. 358(b), the operation of the various mechanisms when a game ball enters the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b will be explained. FIG. 358(b) is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when a game ball enters the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b during a normal winning game.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), when a normal winning game is executed, the normal electric device 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric device 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the open normal electric device 3071 (see FIG. 358(b)) flows down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position, flows down the third flow path 3070c, and enters the special device 2 non-electric operation port 3073b. When the game ball enters the special device 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special device 2 operation mechanism 3075 is activated, and the special device 2 non-electric device 3065a becomes open (see solid line in FIG. 358(b)).

When the special non-electric device 3065a is changed to the open state, the special non-electric device 3065a is changed to a position that blocks the right-side flow path, so that most of the game balls that are launched by right-handed play and flow down the right-side area 3060 flow down the right-side flow path enter the second ball entrance 3065.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric device 3071 is provided on the left flow path, and the special 2 non-electric device 3065a is provided on the right flow path. Furthermore, since the normal electric device 3071 is provided upstream of the special 2 non-electric device 3065a, the rate at which game balls flow into the normal electric device 3071 does not change depending on the variable state of the special 2 non-electric device 3065a. Therefore, by changing the special 2 non-electric device 3065a to the open state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which game balls during a normal hit cannot flow into the operating device 3070 and the game cannot proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is disposed above the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, so that, for example, when the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state and the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed (activated) to the open state, the game ball released by right-handed play is preferentially introduced into the right first ball entrance 3064 rather than the second ball entrance 3065.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of the second special pattern lottery, in which a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery is executed, that is, excessive entry of game balls into the second ball entrance 3065. Furthermore, as long as the right first ball entrance 3064 is in an open state, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 3065, so that the open state of the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a can be easily continued for a long period of time. For example, when the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a is changed (activated) to an open state just before the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a is in an open state before the game ball enters the second ball entrance 3065, and the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed (activated) to an open state, so that the open state of the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a can be maintained even after the time-saving state ends.

This allows the player to play with enthusiasm in order to make the game situation (the opening and closing status of the non-electric device 3065a in Special Figure 2) favorable to the player when the time-saving state ends.

Next, the game content of the normal winning game in this ninth control example will be explained with reference to Fig. 360 and Fig. 361. Fig. 360 is a diagram showing the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern A (an opening pattern that is likely to be set during the first time-saving state) is set, and Fig. 361 is a diagram showing the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern B (an opening pattern that is likely to be set during the second time-saving state) is set.

In this ninth control example, the operation content of the normal symbol winning game is changed according to the normal symbol winning type (game state at the time of winning) that is set when the normal symbol lottery is won, so that the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 during the normal symbol winning game is changed. Then, according to the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070, a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game with a normal symbol winning opening pattern A set) in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is more likely to enter the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a than the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game with a normal symbol winning opening pattern B set) in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is more likely to enter the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b than the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a are configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the normal winning type can be set to a time-saving type (first time-saving state) in which normal winning opening pattern A is more likely to be set than normal winning opening pattern B, and a time-saving type (second time-saving state) in which normal winning opening pattern B is more likely to be set than normal winning opening pattern A.

By configuring in this way, when a time-saving state is set that can make it easier for the game ball to enter the operating device 3070 than in the normal state (the period during which the normal electric device 3071 is in the open state during normal play per unit time can be made longer than in the normal state), it is possible to set a first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and a second time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery.

The normal winning game is composed of the period from when the normal winning game is executed until the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), the period when the normal electric role 3071 is in the open state (opening period), and the period when the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric role 3071 is met and the normal winning game is ended after changing from the open state to the closed state (ending period). A predetermined time (predetermined condition) is determined and specified for each period, and the opening operation of the normal electric role 3071 is executed according to the specified content. Furthermore, the movable control is executed to move the movable piece 3072 (see FIG. 780) provided in the operating device 3070 in a predetermined moving pattern.

First, referring to FIG. 360, the flow of the normal map winning game that is executed when normal map winning opening pattern A is set will be explained. Specifically, in the normal map winning game that is executed when normal map winning opening pattern A is set, as shown in FIG. 360, a normal map winning game with an opening period (OP period) of 3 seconds, an opening period of 2.5 seconds, and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second is executed as the normal map winning game. Then, for the movable piece 3072, after the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in an open state has elapsed for 0.5 seconds, a movable control is executed in which the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state for 1.5 seconds.

In other words, in a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern A, the opening period of the normal electric device 3071 is set after a period (a period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal winning game is executed) during which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state) has elapsed. Therefore, when a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern A is executed, all (almost all) of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 during the opening period in which the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state will pass through the open movable piece 3072 and enter the special winning 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. When a game ball enters the special symbol 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a operates to the open state, so the normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern A becomes a normal symbol winning game that makes it easy to execute the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as a termination condition for terminating the open state of the normal electric role 3071, in addition to the time termination condition that is established when a predetermined time (2.5 seconds) has elapsed, a ball entry termination condition that is established when the number of game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 (game balls that have passed through the normal electric role 3071 in the open state) exceeds two is also set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent many game balls from flowing into the operating device 3070 during one normal game, so that it is possible to prevent, for example, game balls from clogging the operating device 3070 or the movable piece 3072 from becoming more susceptible to malfunction (breakage) due to an increase in the number of game balls that collide with the movable piece 3072.

Furthermore, when game balls are continuously shot, a maximum of 100 game balls can be shot in 60 seconds. Therefore, by continuously playing right-hand shots during normal winning games, the ball entry end condition is more likely to be met before the time end condition. Therefore, when right-hand shots that continuously shoot game balls are played, it is possible to end the normal winning game earlier. Therefore, for example, in a time-saving state in which a time-saving type (time-saving B) that is more likely to be executed in a normal winning game with normal winning opening pattern A than in a normal winning game with normal winning opening pattern B described later, more normal pattern lotteries are executed before the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state is met, and game balls can be continuously shot to the player in order to execute the second special pattern lottery as many times as possible, thereby improving the operation of the game.

In addition, if the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a is activated to the open state immediately before the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery after the time-saving end condition is met and the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, so that the player can play until just before the time-saving end condition is met in the hope that a normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern B will be executed, which makes it possible to enter the game ball into the second non-electric operating port 3073b in order to activate the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a to the open state.

Next, the flow of the normal map winning game that is executed when the normal map winning opening pattern B is set will be explained. Specifically, in the normal map winning game that is executed when the normal map winning opening pattern B is set, as shown in FIG. 361, a normal map winning game is executed with an opening period (OP period) of 0.5 seconds, an opening period of 2.5 seconds, and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second. Then, for the movable piece 3072, after the opening period in which the movable piece 3072 is in an open state has elapsed for 0.5 seconds, a movable control is executed in which the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state for 1.5 seconds.

In other words, in a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern B, the opening period of the normal electric device 3071 is set during the period (the period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal winning game is executed) during which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state). Therefore, when a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern B is executed and the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state, all (almost all) of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 during the opening period flow down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the closed state and enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. When a game ball enters the special symbol 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a operates to the open state, so the normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern B becomes a normal symbol winning game that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, the length of the opening period in a normal winning game is varied according to the type of normal winning game, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game can enter (is easy to enter) is varied. In this case, even if the content of the normal winning game other than the length of the opening period of the normal winning game is made common to the type of normal winning game, it is possible to reliably vary the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game can enter (is easy to enter), so that when a time-saving state is set, it is possible to easily execute a lottery for different types of special patterns, and this novel gameplay can be achieved while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

The configuration for realizing the innovative gameplay of making it easier to execute different types of special pattern lotteries when the time-saving state is set is not limited to this. For example, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3071 in a normal winning game can be changed depending on the type of normal winning, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 can enter (is easy to enter) can be changed, or the moving pattern of the movable piece 3072 can be changed depending on the type of normal winning, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 can enter (is easy to enter) can be changed.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 are configured to enter one of the special non-electric operating ports, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a discharge port may be provided to discharge the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 back into the game area, or a prize opening may be provided from which a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out when a game ball enters the operating device 3070, and some of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 enter the prize opening without entering the special non-electric operating port.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a pattern in which none of the special non-electric devices are activated to the open state even if a game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given a certain relationship in which any of the special non-electric devices are activated to the open state when a normal winning game is played, and therefore prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

As mentioned above, due to the nature of the non-electric device, there is no effect if a game ball enters the non-electric special device when the non-electric special device is in the open state. This may cause players to lose interest in playing the normal winning game when the non-electric special device is in the open state. However, by providing the above-mentioned winning port and a flow path that can allow game balls to enter the winning port inside the operating device 3070, the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 not only operates (changes) the non-electric special device to the open state, but also has the potential to award prize balls, so that players can become interested in playing the normal winning game when the non-electric special device is in the open state.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the special non-electric device so that the game ball that can enter the corresponding special non-electric operating port can easily enter the above-mentioned winning port when the special non-electric device is in the open state, compared to when the special non-electric device is in the closed state. For example, the special non-electric operating port can be configured so that the game ball can pass through (for example, a gear configuration), and when the special non-electric device is in the closed state, the game ball that entered the special non-electric operating port can abut against the operating mechanism, activating the operating mechanism, and the game ball can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and when the special non-electric device is in the open state, the game ball that entered the special non-electric operating port can flow down toward the winning port without abutting against the operating mechanism. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily win more prize balls during a normal game when the special non-electric device is in the open state than when the special non-electric device is in the closed state.

As a result, the normal winning game when the special non-electric device is open can be made an advantageous game for the player in terms of winning balls, so that the player can play in the hope that the normal winning game will be executed regardless of the open/closed state of the special non-electric device, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

First, the contents of normal winning opening pattern A will be explained with reference to FIG. 360. As shown in FIG. 360, when a normal winning game is executed, measurement of the opening period begins and the scenario for variably controlling the movable piece 3072 is updated.

The variable control of the movable piece 3072 is always constant regardless of the type of normal win, and a scenario is specified in which the movable piece 3072 is positioned in the closed position for 1.5 seconds after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal win game. In other words, the scenario is specified so that the 1.5-second closed period is set to a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds after the normal win game is executed) each time a normal win game is executed.

And for the normal map winning opening pattern A, the period from when the normal map winning game is executed until the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period) is 3 seconds, then the period during which the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period) is 2.5 seconds, and the period from when the opening period has elapsed until the normal map winning game ends (ending period) is 1 second. In other words, when the normal map winning opening pattern A is set, the scenario for the normal map winning game is specified so that the game period for the normal map winning game is a maximum of 6.5 seconds.

The above-mentioned open period (2.5 seconds) in the normal game is configured to be able to end under conditions other than the passage of time. Specifically, when the number of game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 during the open period reaches a predetermined number (2 balls) (when the winning number ending condition is met), the open period is configured to end without waiting for the time of the open period to elapse. In other words, when a normal game is played, the number of game balls flowing into the area (inside the operating device 3070) where game balls are more likely to enter than when a normal game is not played (the number of balls entering) reaches a predetermined number, so that the normal game can be ended. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an upper limit on the amount of bonuses that can be given to a player for one normal game, and it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being given to a player.

In addition, by ending the normal symbol game by satisfying the winning number ending condition, the game period of the normal symbol game can be made shorter than when the normal symbol game is ended based on the passage of time, and as a result, it is possible to increase the number of times that the normal symbol is drawn per unit time. Therefore, for example, in a time-saving state in which the normal symbol opening pattern A that allows the game ball to enter the special symbol 1 non-electric operation port 3073a is likely to be set, the player can continue playing with the aim of executing the second special symbol lottery as many times as possible (executing a normal symbol game that allows the game ball to enter the special symbol 2 non-electric operation port 3073b) before the time-saving state ends, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the game.

In particular, in the time-saving state where the normal winning opening pattern A is likely to be set, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1) has reached the upper limit (4), that is, when no more game balls are inserted into the right first ball entrance 3064, a new reserved special symbol 1 cannot be acquired (stored), so that no more game balls are wasted. In this state, however, the action of temporarily interrupting the game of firing game balls (right-hitting game) is generally performed in order to prevent the firing of unnecessary game balls, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example, the player can be made to select the action of continuing to play in order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). Therefore, a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player can select between a game in which game balls are not used wastefully and a game in which game balls are used wastefully in order to be granted an advantageous privilege.

As shown in FIG. 360, when the normal winning opening pattern A is set, the opening period is set to 3 seconds, so the closing period of the movable piece 3072 ends before the opening period has elapsed. Therefore, when a normal winning game with the normal winning opening pattern A set is played, the normal electric device 3071 is opened, and the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070a and the second flow path 3070b and enters the special 1 non-electric operating port 3073a (see FIG. 357(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 361, the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern B is set will be explained. In this ninth control example, the only thing that differs between normal winning opening pattern A and normal winning opening pattern B is the length of the opening period of the normal winning game, and otherwise the same normal winning game is played. A detailed explanation of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 361, the normal winning opening pattern B has a 0.5 second opening period for the normal winning game, so that the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during the period when the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position can reach the movable piece 3072.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, the lottery is configured to be executed so that the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, and the non-electrically operated opening (non-electrically operated opening for special pattern 1 3073a, non-electrically operated opening for special pattern 2 3073b) into which the game ball is more likely to enter during a normal winning game is configured to be different depending on the normal winning type that is set when a normal winning game is won.

The game is configured so that the play period of the regular winning game (regular winning game in which regular winning opening pattern B is set) in which the game ball can enter the special winning 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, which is the execution machine for the second special pattern lottery advantageous to the player, is shorter.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state type B, which is a time-saving state type that makes it easier to get the game ball into the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, is set as the type of time-saving state, it is possible to efficiently play a regular winning game, allowing the player to smoothly play during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the type of time-saving state is set to time-saving A, which makes it easier to play a normal winning game (a normal winning game in which a normal winning opening pattern A is set) in which the game ball can enter the special winning game 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, which is the execution machine for the first special pattern lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, the opening period of the normal winning game becomes longer, and the period required for one normal winning game becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of times that a normal winning game is played (the number of times that a normal pattern lottery is played) during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the normal winning opening pattern A is set, the normal winning electric device 3071 is configured to open after the period during which the game ball can enter the special winning opening 3073b has elapsed, so that it is possible to prevent a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game with the normal winning opening pattern A from entering the special winning opening 3073b.

In other words, by varying the degree of overlap between the period during which game balls can flow into the operating device 3070 (open period of the normal electric device 3071) and the period during which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position (closed period of the movable piece 3072) according to the set normal winning opening pattern, a method is possible to set a normal winning game (advantageous normal winning game) in which it is possible to get the game ball to enter the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal winning game (unfavorable normal winning game) in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. In addition to the method used in the ninth control example, that is, the method of varying the length of the opening period of a normal winning game depending on the type of normal winning game, with a normal winning game with a short opening period set being a favorable normal winning game and a normal winning game with a long opening period set being an unfavorable normal winning game, it may be configured so that a normal winning game with a short opening period set is an unfavorable normal winning game and a normal winning game with a long opening period set is an advantageous normal winning game.

However, in this case, the movable piece 3072 will be positioned in the closed position at a timing chronologically later than the timing at which game balls flow into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure. For example, if a game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a win on the non-favourable figure remains in the play area within the operating device 3070, there is a risk that the game ball will reach the movable piece 3072 after it has been positioned in the closed position.

In contrast, in the method used in the ninth control example, the closed period during which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position ends before the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure, so even if the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure remains in the play area within the operating device 3070, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to carry out fraudulent acts such as intentionally causing game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure to remain in the operating device 3070.

As described above with reference to Figures 360 and 361, in this ninth control example, a normal winning opening pattern A in which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game cannot reliably enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal winning opening pattern B in which the game ball reliably enters the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b can be set. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the same normal winning opening pattern is set, the game ball can or cannot enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b depending on the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 and the time it takes for the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 to reach the movable piece 3072.

In this case, for example, when a game ball is caused to flow into the operating device 3070 during a part of the opening period (2.5 seconds) of the normal electric role 3071 during a normal winning game (the first 0.5 seconds or the last 0.5 seconds), the game ball can be configured to reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position. By configuring it in this way, whether or not the game ball enters the special game 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is determined depending on the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070, so the player can be interested in the timing at which the game ball will enter the operating device 3070.

In addition, as another configuration, for example, a plurality of flow paths through which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can flow down may be formed inside the operating device 3070, and the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 may be varied depending on the flow path through which the game ball flows down, so that the game ball can reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 after flowing into the operating device 3070 is within a predetermined period, or the game ball can reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 after flowing into the operating device 3070 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072.

As described above, in this ninth control example, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed is configured to differ depending on the type of game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. However, without being limited to this, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed may be configured to differ depending on the type of normal symbol win that is set when a normal symbol win occurs during the high probability state of the normal symbol (time-saving state).

In addition, in this ninth control example, the type of non-electrically operated opening into which the game ball can enter is determined in accordance with the opening pattern of the normal winning game being executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the type of non-electrically operated opening into which the game ball can easily enter to be different depending on the opening pattern of the normal winning game being executed. In other words, it is possible to configure it so that the game ball can enter any non-electrically operated opening regardless of the opening pattern in which the normal winning game is executed, and to configure the ease of entry into each non-electrically operated opening to be variable in accordance with the opening pattern of the normal winning game.

<Regarding transition of game state in the ninth control example>
Next, the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 362. Fig. 362 is a game flow showing the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example.

In this ninth control example, three game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).Furthermore, depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state (time-saving setting trigger), a first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively easy to be met, and a second time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively difficult to be met can be set.Specifically, the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, is more likely to be set when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the time-saving state winning judgment (time-saving lottery) than when the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

This allows players to be interested not only in whether or not the time-saving state is set, but also in what time-saving setting trigger the time-saving state is set based on.

First, the game content in the normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 362, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example has a first ball entrance 64 provided in a position where a game ball that has flowed down the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the game area (left hitting area) where a game ball launched by left hitting game can flow down, and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery is executed. On the other hand, even if a right hitting game is performed in the normal state, in the normal state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is low (1/240), and it is difficult to cause the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070, so it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, in the normal state, left hitting game is an advantageous game for the player.

In the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot lottery (jackpot winning judgment) is executed with a probability of winning the jackpot at 27/8192, and a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed with a probability of winning the time-saving lottery at 1/8192. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, and when jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, a special state (space mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, a first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the probability change state (space mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so it is easy to play a game in which the game ball flows into the actuator 3070 by playing from the right, and the game ball enters one of the non-electrically operated ports, resulting in the game being entered into the right first ball entry port 3064 or the second ball entry port 3065. Therefore, during the probability change state (space mode), playing from the right is an advantageous game for the player.

During the high probability state (space mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, so the first special pattern lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, as described above, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot B, so if jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, the high probability state (space mode) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and if jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so similar to the special probability state described above, it becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 by playing from the right, and the game ball enters one of the non-electric operating ports, thereby entering the right first ball entry port 3064 or the second ball entry port 3065. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), right-hitting play is an advantageous game for the player.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, so the second special symbol lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot C, and if jackpot A (selection rate 10%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if jackpot C (selection rate 90%) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, similar to the first time-saving state (challenge mode) described above, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240). As a result, similar to the above-mentioned probability-changing state, it becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 by right-hand hitting and enters one of the non-electric operating ports, thereby entering the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), right-hand hitting is an advantageous game for the player.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, so the second special symbol lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot C, and if jackpot A (selection rate 10%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if jackpot C (selection rate 90%) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this ninth control example, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are configured to differ in the ease with which the time-saving end condition is met, and the first time-saving state is configured to be more easily met than the second time-saving state. Specifically, the first time-saving state is configured to have a time-saving end condition that is met when the total number of lotteries, which is the sum of the number of times the first special pattern lottery is performed and the number of times the second special pattern lottery is performed, reaches 10, as the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state, and if the time-saving end condition is met without a jackpot game being performed, the game state transitions to the normal state.

On the other hand, the second time-saving state has a time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of draws, which is the sum of the number of times the first special pattern draw is performed and the number of times the second special pattern draw is performed, reaches 10,000, and if the time-saving end condition is established without a jackpot game being played, the game state transitions to the normal state. In this eighth control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern draw is configured to be approximately 27/8192, so when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state will essentially continue until the next jackpot is won.

<About the performance content in the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 363 and Fig. 364, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this ninth control example, characteristic effects will be described. Specifically, the contents of the time-saving winning effect for indicating the time-saving winning during the normal state and the contents of the effect mode screen corresponding to each game state will be described. Note that the same elements as those in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 363(a), the content of the presentation when the time-saving symbol is hit (time-saving win) in the normal state will be explained. FIG. 363(a) is a diagram showing an example of what is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving symbol is hit (time-saving win) in the normal state.

In this ninth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only during the normal state. Specifically, if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the normal state is not a jackpot (is a miss), it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, and the time-saving lottery is won with a low probability of 1/8192 when the special pattern lottery is executed. If the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set after the special pattern fluctuation is stopped to show the result of the target special pattern lottery. Here, in this ninth control example, the second time-saving state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, so that a player playing during the normal state can aim to win the time-saving lottery while also aiming to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery.

If the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, an image of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 going black is displayed, as shown in FIG. 363(a). In this eighth control example, as in each of the control examples described above, the presence or absence of a time-saving feature win is not taken into consideration when determining (selecting) the variation pattern of the special pattern variation. Specifically, the variation pattern is determined so that the result of the special pattern lottery corresponds to a miss, regardless of whether or not the time-saving feature is won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to predict whether or not they will win the time-saving feature based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is executed. Also, as with each of the control examples described above, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the normal state is a miss, a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, so that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that wins the time-saving feature will also be set to a different variation time.

Furthermore, as in this ninth control example, by configuring the display to continue to display a specific image (blackout image) as a variation effect corresponding to the special pattern variation indicating that a time-saving win has been won until a command to stop the special pattern is received, even if a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to the time-saving win as the variation effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In this ninth control example, the display screen shown in FIG. 363(a) is always displayed as the variable effect corresponding to the time-saving win (the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the special pattern is changing), thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, for example, as the variable effect corresponding to the time-saving win, a variable effect (variable effect to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss) based on a variable pattern command (variable pattern command indicating a miss win) output from the main control device 110 may be set, and a blackout image may be displayed from a specific timing during the execution period of the set variable effect (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the variable effect was executed, the timing when the performance mode of the variable effect progresses (reach display timing), or the timing when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss).

By configuring it in this way, while the variable presentation is being executed to indicate that the special pattern lottery result is a miss, that is, during the period when the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, the player can be notified that he or she will be granted the most advantageous benefit (a time-saving win). This makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing even while the variable presentation is being executed, which is likely to result in a miss in the special pattern lottery result.

In addition, as a method of inserting an effect indicating a time-saving win during the execution of a normal variable effect, other than the method of inserting an effect indicating a time-saving win at a specific, predetermined timing as described above, for example, when an operation effect is executed that has the player operate the frame button 22, an effect indicating a time-saving win may be inserted as part of the result of that operation effect. By configuring it in this way, an effect can be executed to notify the player of whether or not a time-saving win has been won based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), making it possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means.

Next, the content of the presentation during the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 363(b). FIG. 363(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second time-saving state (heaven mode).

As shown in FIG. 363(b), when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set, a background image of heaven is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area Dm31, the words "Continuation rate 90%" are displayed as a guide to indicate the probability (continuation rate) that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will be set again if a jackpot is won. Then, in the sub-display area, the comment "Even if it ends, you'll end up in space" is displayed as a guide to explain the game content if the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is not set (does not continue) after a jackpot is won.

In addition, in the small display area Dm32 formed to the left of the main display area Dm, the presentation modes (heaven, space, normal) corresponding to each game state are displayed in an order corresponding to the degree of advantage to the player. In this ninth control example, the more advantageous the game state is to the player, the farther from the ground (higher altitude) the background of the presentation mode is configured to be, and the heaven mode is configured to be set for the most advantageous game state to the player (second time-saving state), and the space mode is configured to be set for the next most advantageous game state to the player (high probability state).

In this way, by associating the appearance of multiple presentation modes with the degree of advantage to the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine whether the presentation mode displayed to the player is advantageous or not. In addition, the guidance appearance displayed in the small display area Dm32 makes it easier for the player to visually grasp the full range of presentation modes that can be set (switched to), the currently set presentation mode, and the degree of advantage of each presentation mode, so that the player can easily determine whether it is better to continue with the currently set presentation mode or to switch to a more advantageous presentation mode, making it easier to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

As shown in FIG. 363(b), during the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and in reality, the condition for ending the time-saving time is met when 10,000 special pattern lotteries have been performed without a jackpot being won in the special pattern lottery, and the game is configured to transition to the normal state. However, since the rate at which 10,000 special pattern lotteries are performed without a jackpot being won in the special pattern lottery is very small, the number of times special pattern lotteries will be performed (remaining number of time-saving times) until the condition for ending the time-saving time is met is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to believe that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will continue until the next big win is won. Furthermore, in the unlikely event that the number of remaining time-saving times in the second time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to configure it so that a warning effect is executed that displays a warning image to inform the player that there is a risk that the second time-saving state will end, and the number of remaining time-saving times. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state from ending without any warning, causing confusion to the player.

Next, the contents of the display screen during the high probability state (space mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 364(a). FIG. 364(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen during the high probability state (space mode). As shown in FIG. 364(a), during the high probability state, the system is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is easily executed by right-hitting play, and therefore a display mode (shown by three arrows in the figure) is displayed in the small display area Dm1 to indicate that the first special symbol variation is being executed. A background image that imitates space is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm, and the words "space mode" are displayed as a guide mode to indicate the current presentation mode.

Then, in the small display area Dm31, the characters "Continuation rate 70%" are displayed as a guide mode to indicate the probability (continuation rate) that the probability of the special symbol lottery being set again after the big win game ends. In addition, in the small display area Dm32, a display mode is displayed to inform the player that the current game state is a probability of the special symbol lottery in an easy-to-understand manner. The game state in which the space mode is set, that is, the probability of the special symbol lottery being set, is configured so that the probability of the special symbol lottery being set is high (1/60), and the probability of the special symbol lottery being set continues until the next big win is won. In other words, when the probability of the special symbol lottery being set (space mode) is set, a game advantageous to the player (a game in which it is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) will continue to be executed until the next big win game is executed, as in the case where the second time-saving state (heaven mode) described above is set, so that the game state is advantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 364(b), the content of the presentation executed when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set will be described. FIG. 364(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first time-saving state (challenge mode). As shown in FIG. 364(b), when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set, a presentation is executed to gradually increase the altitude (altitude) using the rocket 1851. Then, a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm8 to indicate the remaining number of times for the second special symbol lottery (10 times) executed during the first time-saving state, and the comment "Deliver it to heaven" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a presentation corresponding to a game aimed at winning a jackpot is executed by the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state.

In other words, during the first time-saving state, a variation effect is executed in which the degree of ascent of the rocket 1851 is varied based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, and if a jackpot is won, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 reaches heaven. Then, if the lottery result of the second special symbol variation that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state of the first time-saving state, i.e., the final time-saving variation, is a miss, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 breaks down and falls to the normal background (for example, the ground), and the player is informed that the normal state will be set after the first time-saving state ends.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing executed during the first time-saving state, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 wanders through space and transitions to space mode. By configuring it in this way, during challenge mode, the effect can be continuously executed for a period spanning the period in which multiple special symbol drawing are executed, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 365 to Fig. 375. The ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine of the fifth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Figs. 365 to 367. Fig. 365(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example. As shown in Fig. 365(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth control example described above (see Fig. 244(a)) in that the first win random number 9 table 202ha is provided instead of the first win random number 5 table 202da, the big win type selection 9 table 202hb is provided instead of the first win type selection 5 table 202db, and the normal win type selection 9 table 202hf and the time-saving win random number table 202he are added.

The normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referenced to determine the normal winning type when a winning (normal winning) occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(b), but when a winning occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol, this normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is referenced to determine the game state at the time of the winning and the normal winning type that corresponds to the value of the acquired normal winning type counter C6. The contents specified in this normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf will be described later with reference to FIG. 367.

Here, the regular winning type counter C6 is a counter whose value is periodically updated by the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, just like other counters (such as the first winning random number counter C1). Specifically, each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the value of the regular winning type counter C6 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to the minimum value of 0. In other words, the value of the regular winning type counter C6 is updated while looping through the range of "0 to 99". The updated value is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. When a regular winning is won, the regular winning type counter C6 stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203 is read out and referenced when determining the regular winning type.

Next, the first win random number 9 table 202ha in this ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 365(b). FIG. 365(b) shows the contents of the first win random number 9 table 202ha in this ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), the first win random number 9 table 202ha differs from the above-mentioned first win random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)) in that the range of values of the first win random number counter C1 that are determined to be a jackpot win is different. In addition, in this ninth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different. Specifically, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is specified as 900 values from "0 to 899", but in this ninth control example, it is specified as 8192 values from "0 to 8191". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to specify a lower probability of judgment result in various judgments that are determined by referring to the value of the first win random number counter C1. In this ninth control example, only the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different, and the process for updating the value of the first win random number counter C1 and the configuration for storing the updated value are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 26," and as "miss" for the range of "27 to 8191." When the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 136," and as "miss" for the range of "137 to 8191."

In other words, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability," the first random win counter C1 has 8192 possible values, of which 27 are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 27/8192 (approximately 1/300). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability," the first random win counter C1 has 8192 possible values, of which 137 are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 137/8192 (approximately 1/60).

Next, referring to FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 366(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb has two types of jackpot types, A9 and B9, corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and two types of jackpot types, A9 and C9, corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the type of special symbol, Special Symbol 1 (first special symbol), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 69" is associated with "jackpot A9", which is specified. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round winning jackpot) with 9 rounds and a winning state set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 70 are "jackpot A9", so the probability of "jackpot A9" being determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 70% (70/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from 70 to 99 is specified as corresponding to "jackpot B9". This "jackpot B9" is a jackpot type (9-round first time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the first time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot B9", so the probability that "jackpot B9" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 30% (30/100).

In addition, for the special pattern type, special pattern 2 (second special pattern), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with "jackpot A9", which is specified. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round guaranteed jackpot) with 9 rounds and a guaranteed jackpot state set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that are "jackpot A9", so the probability that "jackpot A9" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the second special symbol, the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 10 to 99 is associated with "jackpot C9", which is stipulated. This "jackpot C9" is a jackpot type (9-round second time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the second time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 90 are "jackpot C9", so the probability that "jackpot C9" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the second special symbol is 90% (90/100).

Next, the detailed contents of the time-saving random number 9 table 202he will be explained with reference to FIG. 366(b). FIG. 366(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 9 table 202he. This time-saving random number 9 table 202he differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202ge in the fifth control example described above in that it has a different value for the first winning random number counter C1 that can win the time-saving prize, and it stipulates a value for the first winning random number counter C1 that can also win the time-saving prize in the second special pattern lottery, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the normal state is set, a judgment value is specified for judging a time-saving win when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "8192" in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery. In other words, in this ninth control example, the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state is configured to have a probability of 1/8192 for a time-saving win. Note that when a time-saving win is won, the second time-saving type (time-saving B) is always set, so after a time-saving win is won, the state transitions to the second time-saving state (heaven mode).

Next, the details of the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf will be explained with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf. This normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referenced when determining the normal winning type that is set when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, and different normal winning types (normal winning A, normal winning B) are defined in correspondence with the set game state and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367, when the game state is "high probability" or "first time reduction" and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", "normal winning type A" is determined as the normal winning type, and when the game state is "second time reduction" and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", "normal winning type B" is determined as the normal winning type.

Now, the details of the normal winning type will be explained. In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3071 in a normal winning game is different when a low probability state of a normal pattern is set and when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, and the period during which the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state in one normal winning game is shorter when a low probability state of a normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set. This makes it easier to get a game ball into the operating device 3070 in a high probability state of a normal pattern than in a low probability state of a normal pattern.

As described above, the inside of the operating device 3070 is provided with the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a for operating the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a associated with the right first ball entrance 3064 from a closed state to an open state, and the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b for operating the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a associated with the second ball entrance 3065 from a closed state to an open state. Therefore, a state in which it is easy for game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 (high probability state of normal symbols) is a game state in which it is easier to execute the lottery for special symbols than a state in which it is difficult for game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 (low probability state of normal symbols), resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, in the time-saving state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, different time-saving types can be set, and the selection ratio of the normal symbol winning type, which is determined when a normal symbol lottery is won, is configured to differ depending on the time-saving type that has been set. In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367(b), "Normal symbol winning A" and "Normal symbol winning B" are selectable as normal symbol winning types.

The length of the period (opening period) from when a normal winning game is executed to when the normal electric device 3071 opens is made different between when "normal winning A" is determined as the normal winning type and when "normal winning B" is determined. This is done without changing the length of the period during which the normal electric device 3071 opens during one normal winning game. In other words, regardless of which normal winning type is determined, a normal winning game that is more likely to cause game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 than a normal winning game that is executed in a normal state (a state with a low probability of a normal pattern) is executed, but the timing of the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 is configured to be different depending on the determined normal winning type. By varying the inflow timing, it is possible to execute a normal winning game in which the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 are more likely to enter the special pattern 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, and a normal winning game in which the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 are more likely to enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b.

Specifically, when "normal hit A" is set as the normal hit type, the opening period of the normal hit game is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in an open state during the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072, and when "normal hit B" is set, the opening period of the normal hit game is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in a closed state during the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 360 and 361, as a normal winning game, a normal winning game (normal winning game of normal winning A) in which a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special chart 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, and a normal winning game (normal winning game of normal winning B) in which a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b are configured to be executable, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a normal winning game During the opening period in which the normal electric device 3071 is in the open state, if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during the first period, the game ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during a second period different from the first period, the game ball can enter the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. A normal winning game (for example, a normal winning type "normal winning C") may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, the non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b) into which the game ball can enter is not determined according to the set normal winning type, but rather the non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b) into which the game ball can enter is determined according to the flow-down situation of the game ball (the timing of the game ball entering the operating device 3070, the flow-down speed and flow-down path within the operating device 3070, etc.), making it difficult for the player to understand which special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) is more likely to be executed until the game ball enters which non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b).

In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367, the contents of the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf are stipulated so that the normal winning type is reliably different depending on the set game state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the normal winning type B to be selectable even when the second time-saving state is not set, to the extent that the normal winning type B is more likely to be selected when the second time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second special pattern lottery is suddenly executed in a high probability state of normal patterns in which the first special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 368 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 244(b)) in that a special chart 2 variation count counter 203pa has been added. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a memory area for temporarily storing data indicating the type of jackpot that has been won when a jackpot has been won. When a jackpot is won by drawing a special pattern, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in this jackpot type storage area 203eb. The data stored in this jackpot type storage area 203eb is retained until the end of the jackpot that was won, and is used to set the game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. Note that the detailed contents of the jackpot type storage area 203eb are the same as those described above in the ninth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 369(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above only in that an expectation selection table 222pa is added. This expectation selection table 222pa is a data table referenced to determine the presentation mode (expectation suggested by the presentation) of the mode type suggestion presentation (see FIG. 791(b)) for suggesting to the player whether the "time-saving A1" in which the second special symbol selection is relatively difficult to perform or the "time-saving A2" in which the second special symbol selection is relatively easy to perform is set in the time-saving type "time-saving A", that is, in the state in which the time-saving state in which the first special symbol selection is mainly performed is set.

As described above, in this ninth control example, "time-saving A" can be set as a time-saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, as "time-saving A", either "time-saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to execute, or "time-saving A2" in which it is relatively easy to execute, can be set. When "time-saving A" is set, a common mode presentation (time-saving A mode) is executed regardless of which time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a player who has had the time-saving A mode presentation executed with the fun of predicting whether the set time-saving type is "time-saving A1" or "time-saving A2." In addition, because the mode suggestion presentation is configured to be executable while the time-saving A mode presentation is being executed, it is possible to provide the player with an element for predicting the time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) that is actually set while the time-saving A mode presentation is being executed.

Here, the details of the expectation selection table 222pa will be described with reference to FIG. 369(b). FIG. 369(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the expectation selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 369(b), the expectation selection table 222pa specifies the type of expectation (the expectation for which the time-saving type A2 is set) and the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223ea in correspondence with each other for each time-saving type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 369(b), for the time-saving type "time-saving A1" (a time-saving type among time-saving A with a relatively low probability of executing the second special symbol selection), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is specified in the range of "0 to 4" in correspondence with a performance mode for high expectation, in the range of "5 to 49" in correspondence with a performance mode for medium expectation, and in the range of "50 to 99" in correspondence with a performance mode for low expectation.

The performance selection counter 223ea can take 100 values from 0 to 99, so when the time-saving type is A1, the probability that the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation are determined is 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 369(b), for the time-saving type "Time-saving A2" (a time-saving type among time-saving A types with a relatively high probability of executing the second special symbol lottery), a high expectation level presentation mode is defined in association with the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 19", a medium expectation level presentation mode (not shown) is defined in association with the range of "20 to 79", and a low expectation level presentation mode is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99".

The performance selection counter 223eka can take 100 values from "0 to 99", so the percentages at which the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation are determined when the time-saving A2 is selected are 20% (20/100), 60% (60/100), and 20% (20/100), respectively. From these provisions, it can be said that the performance modes for high expectation are more likely to be selected when the time-saving A2 is set, but are more difficult to select when the time-saving A1 is set. In addition, the performance modes for medium expectation are selected at a relatively high rate when either the time-saving A1 or the time-saving A2 is set, and the performance modes for low expectation are less likely to be selected when the time-saving A2 is set, but are more likely to be selected when the time-saving A1 is selected. Therefore, when a high expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type is likely to be time-saving A2, while when a low expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type is likely to be time-saving A1. Also, when a medium expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type may be either time-saving A1 or time-saving A2. This allows the player to predict the expectation of the second special symbol lottery being executed during the time-saving state according to the expectation level suggested by the performance mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 370, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 370 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 370, the RAM 223 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth control example described above in that a performance selection counter 223ha, a remaining time reduction counter 223hb, a special chart 1 non-electrical open flag 223hc, a special chart 2 non-electrical open flag 223hd, and an initial fluctuation standby flag 223he have been added.

The performance selection counter 223ha is a counter used to select one performance mode (expectation level type) from the expectation level selection table 222pa described above. The value of this performance selection counter 223ha is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting a performance mode (expectation level type) for a special small win performance, a random number value (counter value) specified in the expectation level selection table 222pa is compared with the value of this performance selection counter 223ha, and one corresponding performance mode (expectation level type) is selected. This performance selection counter 223ha is updated every 1 ms, for example, in the main process 17 (see FIG. 807).

The remaining time-saving count counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of remaining time-saving times during the time-saving state.

The special chart 1 non-electric open flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in operation. It is a flag that is set to on when the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in the open state (operating), and is set to off when the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in the closed state (not operating).

The special chart 2 non-electric open flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in operation. It is a flag that is set to on when the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state (operating) and is set to off when the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the closed state (not operating).

The initial change waiting flag 223he is a flag for indicating the period from the end of the jackpot game until the first special pattern change is executed, and is set to ON when the jackpot game ends. Then, it is set to OFF when the first special pattern change is executed after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is a flag that is set to ON from the end of the jackpot game until the first special pattern change is executed.

This initial change waiting flag 223he is referenced when determining the period for which the game instruction screen displayed at the end of a jackpot game will continue to be displayed.

In this control example, the initial change standby flag 223he is set to OFF when the first special pattern lottery is executed after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the type of special pattern executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the time-saving type of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is "time-saving A", the period during which the initial change standby flag 223he is set to ON may be set to the period until the first first special pattern change is executed, and if the time-saving type is "time-saving B", the period during which the initial change standby flag 223he is set to ON may be set to the period until the first second special pattern change is executed. In other words, the special pattern change type for setting the initial change standby flag 223he to OFF may be configured to be different depending on the time-saving type of the time-saving state to be set, and the initial change standby flag 223he may be configured to be set to ON until the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern type mainly executed depending on the time-saving type to be set is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 371 to Fig. 375, characteristic contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. Note that detailed description of the same contents as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above will be omitted. Also, among the control processing that is the same as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above, some control processing is given different symbols for convenience of explanation, but detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 371 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 9 (S54112). This command determination process 9 (S54112) differs from the command determination process described above in that if it is determined that a status command has been received (S4309: Yes), then status command process 9 is executed (S54301), and if it is determined that a time-saving related command has been received (54303: Yes), then time-saving related process 9 is executed (S54304). All other aspects are the same.

Now, the contents of status command processing 9 (S54301) will be explained with reference to FIG. 372. FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command processing 9 (S54301). This status command processing 9 (S54301) is processing that is executed when a status command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110, and it executes processing for setting the presentation mode based on the game state set by the main control device 110, and processing for setting the remaining number of time-saving operations (time-saving end conditions) when a time-saving state is set.

When the state command process 9 (S54301) is executed, first, it is determined whether a command indicating the game state has been received (S54351), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54351: Yes), the game state update process 9 is executed (S54352), and the process proceeds to S54353. Also, if it is determined that it has not been received (S54351: No), it is next determined whether a command indicating the setting of the number of time-saving times has been received (S54353), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54353: Yes), the time-saving type stored in the game state storage area 223i is read (S54354), and it is determined whether the read time-saving type is "time-saving A" (S54355), and if it is determined that it is "time-saving A" (S54355: Yes), the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223pa is set to "10000", and the process proceeds to S54358. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction is not "time reduction A" (it is "time reduction B") (S54355: No), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is set to 10 (S54357), and the process proceeds to S54358.

In other words, the remaining number of time-saving times (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the time-saving type is set in the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb (S54356, S54357). Here, the set value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb is displayed as the remaining number of time-saving times in the small area Dm6 displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when the time-saving state is set. Note that in this ninth control example, the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb is configured to be set to a value of "10000" as the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving state. In other words, the time-saving end condition is configured to be set when no jackpot is won in 10,000 special pattern lotteries.

In this case, the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state has a probability of 27/8192 for winning the jackpot, so in effect, the jackpot will almost certainly be won before the time-saving end condition is met. Therefore, when the second time-saving state is set, the process of updating and displaying the remaining number of time-saving times on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is not executed until the value of the remaining time-saving times counter 223hb reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100), and instead the character "∞" is continuously displayed.

By configuring it in this way, during periods when the player is not interested in the number of remaining time-saving times in the time-saving state (periods when many time-saving times remain), it is possible to eliminate the need to execute a process to update the display mode indicating the number of remaining time-saving times each time a special pattern lottery is executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

In this case, after a jackpot is won, the number of times the special symbol lottery was performed in the current second time-saving state may be displayed to the player as part of the result display. This configuration makes it easier for the player to analyze the game they actually performed.

In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can set a high probability state for normal symbols by varying the type of special symbol lottery that is mainly executed, by configuring the element for achieving the time-saving end condition that is mainly likely to be achieved to be set to the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb, the process for updating and displaying the remaining number of times of time-saving can be performed based on the update content for the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb, and the process for updating the display mode indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving can be simplified.

In the processing of S54358, processing corresponding to other information contained in the status command is executed (S54358), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of game status update process 9 (S54352) will be explained with reference to FIG. 373. FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing the contents of game status update process 9 (S54352). This game status update process 9 (S54352) is executed when a command indicating a game status is received in state command process 9 (see S54301 in FIG. 372), and processing is executed based on the game status before the transition and the game status after the transition.

When game status update process 9 (S54352) is executed, first, information indicating the current game status is stored in the game status storage area 223i based on the currently received status command (S4401), and it is determined whether a transition to the normal status has occurred (S54401). In the process of S54401, if it is determined that a transition to the normal status has occurred, i.e., if it is determined that the currently received status command contains a command indicating the normal status (S54401: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is cleared to 0 (S54402).

Next, it is determined whether there is a reserved special pattern 2 (reserved memory of the second special pattern) (S54404), and if it is determined that there is no reserved special pattern 2 (S54404: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S54404 that there is a reserved special chart 2 (S54404: Yes), a display command is set to show the number of pullback effects corresponding to the number of reserved special charts 2 (S54405), and this processing ends.

In other words, in the processing from S54404 to S54405, if special symbol 2 reservation has been acquired at the end of "Time-saving A (Time-saving A mode)", in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, processing is executed to execute a special effect (pull-back effect) for the second special symbol lottery, which is executed with priority after the transition to the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a special state is occurring while the pull-back effect is being performed.

If it is determined in the process of S54401 that the transition is not to the normal state (S54401: No), then it is determined whether the transition is to the time-saving state (S54406), and if it is determined that the transition is not to the time-saving state (S54406: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the transition is to a time-saving state (S54406: Yes), the initial fluctuation waiting flag 223he is set to on (S54407), a display command corresponding to the time-saving type is set (S54408), and this process ends.

In other words, in the above-mentioned processing of S54407 and S54408, when the jackpot game ends and the time-saving state is set, processing is executed to continue displaying the game explanation screen that was displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game even after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the contents of time-saving related process 9 (S54304) will be explained with reference to FIG. 374. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the contents of time-saving related process 9 (S54304). In this time-saving related process 9 (S54304), a process is executed to determine the presentation mode based on a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state.

When time-saving related process 9 (S54304) is executed, first, the current time-saving type is read from the game status storage area 223i (S54601). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is "Time-saving A" (S54602), and if it is determined that the current time-saving type is "Time-saving A" (S54602: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is a command related to special pattern 2 variation (related to the execution of the second special pattern variation) (S54603).

If it is determined in the process of S54603 that the change is related to the special chart 2 change (S54603: Yes), then the value of the subordinate special chart 2 change count counter 223pb is incremented by 1 (S54604), and it is determined whether the value of the subordinate special chart 2 change count counter 203pb after the increment is greater than 5 (S54605). If it is determined in the process of S54505 that the value is greater than 5 (S545605: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the number of special chart 2 changes has exceeded the upper limit (S54606), and the process proceeds to S54609.

When a display command is set in the processing of S54606, a display mode is set to celebrate the fact that more second special pattern lotteries have been performed in a time-saving state in which time-saving A, in which it is difficult to perform a second special pattern lottery, has been set than the time-saving end condition set for time-saving B, which is "five times the second special pattern lottery has been performed."

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S54602 that the time-saving type read this time is not "Time-saving A" (S54602: No), this process ends.

In the process of S54609, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is updated based on the received information (S54609), a display command is set to show the updated value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb (S54610), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the non-electric status management process (S54102) will be explained with reference to FIG. 375. FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing the contents of the non-electric status management process (S54102). In this non-electric status management process (S54102), a process is executed to manage the operating status of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a based on a detection signal output from a detection means provided in the pachinko machine 10.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine that is provided with a ball entry means that can execute a lottery (for example, a special symbol lottery) when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and a variable means (for example, a normal electric device) that can be changed between a first position (open state) where the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a second position (closed state) where it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first position, and that is configured to execute a game of entering the ball into the ball entry means by varying the variable means in response to a winning game (for example, a normal symbol winning game that is executed when a winning game is won in the normal symbol lottery).

Furthermore, there are pachinko machines that are configured to be able to set advantageous game states in which a winning game is likely to be executed or the period during which the variable means is likely to be positioned at the first position during one winning game is likely to be long, that is, advantageous game states (e.g., time-saving states) that make it easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means.

In conventional pachinko machines configured in this way, when a favorable game state is set, it is easier to get the game ball to enter the ball entry means compared to when a game state other than the favorable game state (for example, the normal state) is set, so the player can be motivated to play while hoping that a favorable game state will be set.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the ball entry means, only one type of lottery is executed. If the contents of the lottery are excessively advantageous to the player, the player will be provided with an excessively advantageous game when an advantageous game state is set. On the other hand, if the contents of the lottery are not very advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of setting an advantageous game state.

It is also possible to set the lottery content to be more advantageous to the player and to use specifications that lower the frequency with which an advantageous game state is set, i.e., the frequency with which a game state is set that allows the player to easily get the game ball into the ball entry means, but in this case, the playing period required until the advantageous game state is set becomes longer, and there is a problem that players who are playing in a game state other than the advantageous game state become bored with the game before the advantageous game state is set.

In contrast to this, the ninth control example is configured so that multiple types of lotteries are more likely to be executed when a game ball enters a ball entry means that has become easier for the game ball to enter due to the setting of an advantageous game state. The degree of advantage to the player is differentiated for the multiple types of lotteries that are more likely to be executed.

More specifically, it is configured so that depending on the behavior (flow result) of the game ball that entered the ball entry means, it is possible to execute (make it easier to execute) a first special pattern lottery with a low degree of advantage, or a second special pattern lottery with a high degree of advantage. By configuring it in this way, a favorable game state (time-saving state) is set to provide a player with a predetermined period of time during which it is easier to execute a special pattern lottery, but by switching the type of special pattern lottery that is executed (made easier to execute) during that period, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus granted to the player during the favorable game state (time-saving state), and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an overly advantageous game.

Furthermore, as described above in detail with reference to FIG. 356, in this ninth control example, within an area (within the operating device 3070) where game balls are likely to enter during a normal winning game that is executed when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, there are provided a special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a which triggers the operation of the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a, and a special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b which triggers the operation of the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a, and the game ball is configured to be distributed to either the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a or the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b according to the operation pattern of the normal winning game.

When the game ball enters the special pattern 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a is activated, making it easier for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 3064, which is the trigger for the execution of the first special pattern lottery, and when the game ball enters the special pattern 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a is activated, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 3065, which is the trigger for the execution of the second special pattern lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, and it is configured so that when both the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a and the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a are activated, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, the non-electric special device 3064a in operation is configured to block the flow path through which the game ball can reach the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, when the non-electric special device 3064a in operation and the non-electric special device 3065a in operation, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 3064 than the second ball entrance 3065.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, a termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state is set to be satisfied when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous gaming state.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a are arranged in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, so that, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to launch a game ball toward the through gate 67 and the normal electric device 3071 without the game ball reaching each non-electric device. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game by preventing the game ball from entering the right first ball entrance 3064 until a state is reached in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 3065 where a lottery advantageous to the player is executed (a state in which the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is operating).

In other words, when a game ball is shot toward any of the devices among the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special device 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special device 2 non-electric device 3065a, the game ball can enter the other devices. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a game in which the game ball enters only a specific device.

In this ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special 2 non-electric device 3065a are all located in the right area of the game board 13, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that at least a plurality of the above-mentioned various devices are arranged in a position where the game ball that has flowed down the same flow path can enter.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 376 to Fig. 395. The tenth control example, like the seventh control example described above, is configured to allow a small prize to be won in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (miss), and has a gameplay (so-called one-type two-type) in which a big prize game can be played by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game that is executed based on the small prize winning. And, when a time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which it is easy to acquire a reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2) and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire the reserved memory are configured to be set.

The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that it is configured to be able to store a predetermined number (four) of reserved special charts 2 up to an upper limit, and in that the game state that is set after a jackpot game is executed based on a jackpot win in each game state, or after a jackpot game is executed based on a small jackpot win, is different. It also differs in that the content of the presentation executed during the time-saving state is changed. Below, the differences between this tenth control example and the seventh control example described above will be mainly explained. Note that detailed explanations of the same content as the seventh control example described above will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example (including each of the modified examples) described above is configured to be able to set at least the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as game states, and is configured to open the electric role 640a by the normal symbol winning game (winning game executed when a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery) executed during the time-saving state, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640.

If the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port (winning port) 640, results in a lottery result other than a big win (for example, a small win), a small win game is executed, and if the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game (if information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area is stored at the end of the small win game), a big win game is executed. In addition, by configuring the chance of selecting the second special symbol to be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), the chance of selecting the second special symbol is reserved and stored during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed even after the high probability state of normal symbols ends (even after transition to the low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, for example, even when the time-saving state ends and the game state transitions to the normal state, it is possible to allow the player to play in the normal state (the normal state in which the chance of selecting the second special symbol is reserved and stored), which is more advantageous than normal. Therefore, for a player whose time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, has ended, a state in which the possibility of executing a jackpot game can be increased more than usual can be maintained, and a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in each of the control examples described above, in order to end the time-saving state for a player who is playing normally during the time-saving state with the player having acquired a chance to select the second special symbol, the probability of winning a normal symbol during the time-saving state is increased and a game with a normal symbol is played with a longer period during which the variable means is opened. Therefore, when the time-saving state ends, the number of chances to select the second special symbol that have already been acquired (number of reserved special symbols 2) always remains the same, which creates a problem in that it is not possible to provide the player with an element of surprise in the game.

In addition, in cases where the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is always the same when the time-saving state ends, in order to prevent the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, it is necessary to pre-set the rate at which the time-saving state is set low, including the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed after the time-saving state ends, or to pre-set the probability of winning a small jackpot in the second special symbol lottery low. This makes it difficult for players to play during the time-saving state, which causes a problem of players losing their motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state can be set to a time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special chart 2 (advantageous time-saving state), and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special chart 2 (unfavorable time-saving state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the time-saving state ends depending on the type of the set time-saving state. Therefore, even if the rate at which the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively advantageous game, making it easier for the player to play during the time-saving state, and increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, if a jackpot game is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, an unfavorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if a jackpot game is executed based on winning a small jackpot in a special pattern lottery, an advantageous time-saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state that is set after the end of a jackpot game is set to differ depending on the trigger for the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which trigger caused the jackpot game to be executed.

In the tenth control example, as described above, the setting ratio between the advantageous time-saving state and the disadvantageous time-saving state is configured to be different depending on the effective trigger of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, the setting ratio between the advantageous time-saving state and the disadvantageous time-saving state may be configured to be different depending on the game state at the time when the jackpot game is executed (the game state at the time of winning the jackpot). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure so that the ratio of the advantageous time-saving state being set is higher when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the time-saving state is set than when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. As a result, in the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player, even if the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be set, so the time-saving state is likely to end. However, if the jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is set again, the advantageous time-saving state is likely to be set, so it is possible to make it easier to loop the time-saving state through the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, the player can be allowed to play games with different degrees of advantage in stages, so that the player can be motivated to play the game with the highest degree of advantage. In the tenth control example, as in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the second special pattern lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, so that the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is acquired is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired. However, without being limited to this, for example, the first special pattern lottery may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned control examples, the number of special symbol variations that ends the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, can be set to a different number depending on the type of jackpot, making it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue. This allows the player to play while hoping that the time-saving state will continue for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned control examples, the time-saving state is terminated at the timing when the special pattern change (the special pattern change that satisfies the time-saving end condition) stops during the special pattern change that ends the time-saving state.

In contrast, in the tenth control example, when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the corresponding special pattern change. Furthermore, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied by executing the second special pattern change once can be set. In other words, when the time-saving end condition that is satisfied by executing the second special pattern change once is set, the time-saving state continues until the first second special pattern change is executed during the time-saving state, and when the first second special pattern change is executed, for example, when the time-saving state is set in a state where the player does not have the right to draw the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved), the time-saving state is ended when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state and the second special pattern lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to reliably execute the second special symbol lottery, and to shorten the period for acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 during the time-saving state. In other words, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is set to be established by executing the second special symbol variation once becomes an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this tenth control example, a time-saving end condition that is established by the second special symbol variation being executed twice can also be set as a time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state. In this case, it is possible to continue the time-saving state until the second second special symbol variation is started, so the period during which the first second special symbol variation occurs is a period in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In other words, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state in which a time-saving end condition that is established by the second special symbol variation being executed twice is set becomes an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the time-saving end condition that can be satisfied at the first special pattern change during the time-saving state is set, making it possible to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation (unfavorable time-saving state). However, without being limited to this, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time-saving state at the stop timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, as in each of the control examples described above, a short change pattern in which a short change time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set and a long change pattern in which a long change time (e.g., 60 seconds) is set may be selected as the change pattern of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the same time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition of the time-saving state, the ease of acquiring the special chart 2 reservation can be varied depending on the set fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, in this case, different types of time-saving states can be set according to the game state at the time of winning the big win (or small win), and the selection ratio between the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern and long fluctuation pattern can be varied depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, or a period during which the short fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected and a period during which the long fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected can be set based on the number of special pattern lotteries that have been executed since the end of the previous big win game.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state during the period from when one time-saving state is set until the time-saving state ends, so that the player can play while expecting to play in the advantageous time-saving state until the very last moment when the time-saving state ends.

In addition, by combining the technology of this tenth control example with the technology of each of the control examples described above, it may be possible to configure it so that it is possible to end the time-saving state at various times, such as the start timing or stop timing of the special pattern variation executed in the time-saving state. In this way, by configuring it so that the timing of actually ending the time-saving state can be varied when the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the time-saving state will end, thereby providing an element of surprise in the game.

<Configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth control example>
First, referring to Figures 376 to 380, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example (see Figure 294) in the above-mentioned seventh control example in that the position and structure of the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small winning game have been changed, the positions of the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 have been changed, the structure of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 has been changed, and the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 has been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 376, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill for guiding balls, as well as rails 61, 62, a general ball entry port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (wins). In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is a display means for displaying the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The first pattern display device 37 is also configured to operate when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (wins). In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is also a display means for displaying the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 with two types of special symbols is used, but this is not limited to this, and a pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol may also be used.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, etc.) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a win that is advantageous to the player, a symbol corresponding to a win that is unfavorable to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the light emission colors. In this embodiment, the light emitting means (7-segment display device) is configured to indicate various game states by combining light emitting colors, but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice. For example, the light emitting means may be configured to indicate various game states by varying the length of the period when it is lit and the period when it is off (blinking pattern).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for a special symbol) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). In the lottery for the special symbol, a win/lose determination is made as to whether or not a small prize has been won (a winning lottery). If it is determined that a small prize has been won, a small prize game, which is a special game advantageous to the player, is executed.

During the small win game, the V winning device 650 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), providing a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the V winning device 650. If a ball that entered the V winning device 650 during this small win game enters a specific area (V winning port 1650) described below, the big win game is executed after the small win game ends. During this big win game, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), providing a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65.

In this control example, the system is configured so that the total number of prize balls that a player can acquire during a jackpot game is greater than that during a small jackpot game. In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls acquired by the player, a jackpot game is a bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than a small jackpot game. Note that the system may also be configured so that the total number of prize balls that a player can acquire during a small jackpot game is greater than that during a jackpot game. In this way, by configuring the system so that bonuses with different degrees of advantage can be awarded depending on the bonus game being executed, the player can enjoy playing the game while wondering which bonus game will be executed.

In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot game is executed, a game state (e.g., a normal state) different from the game state before the jackpot game is executed is set, and after the jackpot game ends, a new game state can be set based on information related to the executed jackpot game (e.g., the small win type (jackpot type) and the game state at the time of winning (small win)). On the other hand, when a small win game is executed, the game state before the small win game is executed continues during the small win game and continues after the small win game ends. In other words, during a jackpot game that is highly advantageous to the player (large number of winning balls), the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, is set to prevent the player from receiving excessive benefits during the jackpot game, whereas when a small win game that is less advantageous than the jackpot game is executed, the game state is not changed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game state from being changed when a small win game with a low degree of advantage is executed. Note that, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set during a small win game, as in the case of a big win game, or to determine the game state after the end of a small win game based on the type of small win won. Also, the game state to be set after the winning game is completed may be determined based on the game results during the winning game (during the big win game, during the small win game). In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 (variable ball entry means), which makes it easier to enter the ball during the winning game (bonus game), passed through a specific area provided in the variable ball entry means, and to vary the type of game state to be set after the winning game is completed based on the result of the determination. For example, it is preferable to set a game state that is more advantageous to the player when the ball passes through a specific area than when the ball does not pass through the specific area, or to set a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player when the ball passes through a specific area than when the ball does not pass through the specific area. This makes it possible to play during the winning game with the aim of setting a favorable game state after the winning game is completed, and to allow the player to play with enthusiasm.

In addition, if a winning game is executed in a state where a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and an event in which a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set continues a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) after the winning game ends, a game state disadvantageous to the player (normal state) may be forcibly set after the winning game ends. This can prevent a situation in which a game state advantageous to the player continues excessively.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state, making it easy for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by entering the specific winning port 65a. This jackpot game is played (if) after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed (confirmed) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds), and a jackpot game period is set consisting of an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set to make it difficult for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period to coincide with the start of the jackpot game, preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing at which the specific winning port 65a opens during the jackpot game, allowing the jackpot game to be played smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

In addition, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being held immediately after the last round of play ends, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth switch between games.

In this control example, a jackpot game can be executed after a small win game ends based on the ball entering a specific area (V winning port 1650) during the small win game. Therefore, by setting an ending period as the final period of the small win game, a preparation period can be set to switch from the game executed during the small win game (left-hand hit game) to the game executed during the jackpot game (right-hand hit game), allowing the player to smoothly switch games.

The length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of the special symbol lottery (when a small jackpot is won), the timing when the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the start of the small jackpot game, the end of the small jackpot game, the start of the jackpot game, or the end of the jackpot game, or the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content (play method) to be executed after the jackpot game ends is set to a different game content (play method) from the game content (play method) before the jackpot game, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a performance can be configured to be executed in which the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends is notified to the player during the ending period in advance. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed in which the game content (play method) before the start of the jackpot game is the same as the game content (play method) executed after the jackpot game ends, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content (play method) before the jackpot game and the game content (play method) executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be predefined based on the type of jackpot game that is executed (small jackpot type) and the game state that is set before the jackpot game, and the length of the ending period of each jackpot game can be set according to the predefined content.

In this tenth control example, the game state is configured to be set to either the "normal state" or the "time-saving state." The normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is a game state in which the jackpot probability for special symbols is set to (30/1000) and the hit probability for normal symbols is set to a low probability (3/300), while the time-saving state is a game state in which the jackpot probability for special symbols is set to (30/1000) and the hit probability for normal symbols is set to a high probability (150/300).

In this control example, after the time-saving state is set, if a specific end condition (time-saving end condition) is met, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the number of time-saving times described above indicates the time-saving end condition. In other words, one time of time-saving indicates that the time-saving end condition is met when a special pattern lottery is executed once without a jackpot game being executed after the time-saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, it is configured to be possible to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met at the timing when the special pattern variation starts. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine how long the time-saving state will continue.

In this embodiment, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set as a condition related to the number of times the special pattern is drawn during the time-saving state (time-saving count). However, other configurations may be used as the time-saving end condition. For example, a time-saving end condition may be set that is met when the number of times the special pattern draw results in a specific draw result (specific miss) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3 times), that is met when a predetermined time (e.g., 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time-saving state was set, or that is met when the number of balls that enter a specific ball entry port (e.g., general ball entry port 63a) during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 balls).

The timing for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met may be different from the timing for terminating the time-saving state. For example, at the timing for starting the special pattern variation, it may be determined whether the time-saving end condition has been met by the current special pattern variation, and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition has been met, the time-saving state may be terminated before the special pattern variation begins, or the time-saving state may be terminated at a predetermined timing within the period from when the special pattern variation begins to when it stops (including the timing when the special pattern variation stops), depending on whether a specific condition is met. This makes it possible to unify the timing for executing the process for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met, thereby simplifying the control process for terminating the time-saving state.

The above-mentioned specific condition (factor for determining the timing to end the time-saving state when the time-saving end condition is met) can be set based on the type of game state (normal state or time-saving state) set at the time when the special pattern lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (the special pattern lottery that won the small jackpot) was executed, the set small jackpot type, or the type of jackpot game. For example, even if the same small jackpot type (jackpot type) is set when the game state at the time of the small jackpot win is the normal state and when it is the time-saving state, and the same time-saving end condition is set, the timing to end the time-saving state can be configured to be different.

The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, is configured so that when the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle" symbol), a winning game (a normal symbol winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the normal electric winning device 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed (regular symbol change time) is set to different lengths depending on the probability state of the regular symbol (low probability state, high probability state), and is configured so that in the low probability state of the regular symbol, a regular symbol change time of 10 seconds is set, and in the high probability state of the regular symbol, a regular symbol change time of 1 second is set. This makes it possible to prevent regular symbol winning games from being played frequently during the low probability state of the regular symbol (normal state).

Note that a configuration different from the tenth control example may be used, and for example, the same normal symbol variation time (for example, 1 second) may always be set regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol. By configuring in this way, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time required for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol (a winning game of the normal symbol) is difficult to execute to the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol is easy to execute, it is possible to prevent the transition to the time-saving state during the execution of a long-term normal symbol variation (a winning game of the normal symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) executed during the normal state, and the period during which the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state being set for a long time, even though the time-saving state is set.

In this case, since the normal symbol lottery will be executed at most once per second during the low probability state of normal symbols, it will be easier to win a normal symbol during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state), so the probability of winning a normal symbol during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state) can be set low.

In this control example, the game content (opening operation pattern of the electric device 640a) of the normal winning game is configured to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. In other words, the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state is configured to be a more advantageous game for the player, that is, to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, than the normal winning game executed during the normal state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, a normal winning game (normal normal winning game) with a 0.1 second opening period is executed after a 4.1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a), and when the time-saving state is set, a normal winning game (time-saving normal winning game) with a 3 second opening period is executed after a 1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a).

Next, the configuration of the electric role 640a will be described with reference to FIG. 376. The electric role 640a in this tenth control example is configured to be able to be displaced between an embedded state (restricted state) where it is embedded in the game board 13, and a protruding state (guiding state) where it protrudes from the game board 13, and is configured to be in the embedded state (closed state) when a normal winning game is not being played. Then, when a normal winning game is played, it is displaced to the protruding state (guiding state) for a predetermined period (maximum of 3 seconds) based on a predetermined variable pattern.

Here, we will explain the terminology used to refer to the displacement state of the electric device 640a. The closed state of the electric device 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the flow path (flow path formed on the electric device 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is closed, i.e., the electric device 640a is embedded in the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term restricted state (a state in which the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 is restricted) may also be used.

The open state of the electric device 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric device 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is open, i.e., the electric device 640a protrudes from the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term "guiding state" (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640) is sometimes used.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the electric device 640a is in the guided state, the electric device 640a is arranged so that most of the balls launched by left-handed play flow into the flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric device 640a in the guided state. The flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric device 640a has a ball flow lower surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entrance 640, and balls that reach the upper surface of the electric device 640a flow down to the second ball entrance 640.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the game with a normal ball is ended when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a normal ball game. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one normal ball game is one.

As described above with reference to FIG. 376, this control example is configured so that the playing method that is advantageous to the player is the same (left-hand play) whether the game state is set to the normal state or the time-saving state. In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the lottery trigger for the normal symbol is established even in the normal state (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning win, the electric device 640a installed in the playing area that the ball shot by the left-hand play can reach is controlled to open, so there is a risk that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of the normal winning game.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that even if a normal winning game is executed during the normal state, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal winning game. Specifically, it is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, while the period during which the electric device 640a is in an induction state due to a normal winning game during the normal state is configured so that it is 0.2 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration in which the game is played in the same way in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), that is, in a pachinko machine 10 in which it is possible to win a normal symbol game even in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the area to the left (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow most (approximately 100%) of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the left area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. After this lottery to determine whether the second symbol will win, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp 84 described above. There is one second symbol reserved lamp 84 for each of the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 376, the explanation will continue. To the left of the variable display unit 80 (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 376), a V winning device 650 is provided so that a ball shot by left-handed play and flowing down the left area can win a prize. Here, referring to FIG. 377 to FIG. 380, the specific configuration of the V winning device 650 and the flow of balls that win in the V winning device 650 will be explained. In this control example, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, a small prize game is executed in which the V winning device 650 is opened. Then, a big prize game (V big prize game) is executed by a ball winning the V winning port 1650 provided in the V winning device 650.

This control example is configured so that a jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing (winning) a specific area (V winning port 1650) during a small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot is won without winning a jackpot through the special pattern lottery. In this way, by gradually achieving the first condition (winning a small jackpot) and the second condition (passing through the specific area), a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is executed, providing the player with a game that they will never tire of.

In addition, the system may be configured so that a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol. In this case, in addition to the trigger for playing a jackpot game (special symbol jackpot game) that occurs when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, there will be a trigger for playing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that occurs when a ball enters a specific winning hole (V winning hole 1650). In this way, by providing multiple triggers for playing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide players with a game that they will never tire of.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 377. The V winning device 650 is provided with an opening/closing door 650a that can be changed between an open state in which it is easier for a ball to win inside the V winning device 650, and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a ball to win than in the open state. This opening/closing door 650a is provided in a position (see FIG. 376) that can be reached by a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13, and is changed to the open state when a small win game is executed.

In the V winning device 650, a first flow path 650b through which the ball that has passed through the open/close door 650a flows down is formed in the space between the first partition 650k1 and the second partition 650k2, and a storage valve 660a is provided at a position where the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650b (flow period 0.5 seconds) reaches. A storage section capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of this storage valve 660a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 650 during a small win game is temporarily stored in the storage section. In addition, a storage sensor 650s is provided above the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be able to detect that a ball is stored in the storage section. Furthermore, a ball detection sensor 650s2 for detecting balls that have entered the V winning device 650 is provided upstream of the first flow path 650b, and based on the detection of a ball by the ball detection sensor 650s2, the number of balls that have entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 650s2 at a position where the ball that entered the V winning device 650 flows down immediately after it enters, it is possible to prevent a situation in which more than the specified number of balls enter the V winning device 650, and to immediately award prize balls during the small win game to the player.

In addition, a second flow path 650c is formed to communicate with the first flow path 650b, and a first outlet 1163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 650c. As shown in FIG. 377, the second flow path 650c is configured so that the balls that flow down the first flow path 650b do not flow directly into the second flow path 650c, but rather, when the balls are stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a, the subsequent balls that flow down the first flow path 650b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a and are guided to the second flow path 650c. The first outlet 1163a, located downstream of the second flow path 650c, is a ball inlet for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The ball flows down the second flow path 650c (flow period 0.1 seconds), and the ball that enters the first outlet 1163a flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be variably operated between a storage state in which balls can be stored and a release state in which it is more difficult to store balls than in the storage state, depending on the progress of the small win game (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the small win game is executed). When this storage valve 660a is in the release state, the first flow path 650b and the third flow path 650d are connected, and balls that have flowed down the first flow path 650b or balls that have been stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flow down the third flow path 650d. This third flow path 650d is a flow path formed in a straight line in the vertical direction with a width of about 15 mm, formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition wall 650k1 and the third partition wall 650k3.

A first movable valve 660b is disposed at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 650d. This first movable valve 660b is configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 between a guide position (protruding position) where it can receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d and a passing position (submerged position) where it cannot receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d. Specifically, it is configured to be movable in response to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and is driven and controlled by the main control device 110. When the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on (when electricity is applied), the first movable valve 660b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) in which it retreats from within the V winning device 650, and when the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 660b moves to a guide position (a position protruding from the game board 13) in which it protrudes into the V winning device 650.

The first movable valve 660b located in the induction position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. 377, the downstream end side of the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b is configured to be inclined downward toward the fourth flow path 650e. Therefore, when the first movable valve 660b is located in the induction position (protruding position), a ball that flows down the third flow path 65d (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) flows down the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b toward the fourth flow path 650e. A second outlet 1163b is provided downstream of the fourth flow path 650e, and the ball that flows down the fourth flow path 650e (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) enters the second outlet 1163b. This second outlet 1163b, like the first outlet 1163a described above, is a ball inlet for discharging balls that enter the slot to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and balls that enter the second outlet 1163b flow down a ball discharge path (not shown) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position, the third flow path 650d and the fifth flow path 650f are connected, and the ball that flows down the third flow path 650d (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) flows into the fifth flow path 650f (flowing down period 0.1 seconds). And, the V winning hole 1650 is provided downstream of the fifth flow path 650f. The V winning hole 1650 is a winning hole that can be a trigger for executing a jackpot game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 1650 while a jackpot game is not being executed, the winning information is stored (the right to execute the jackpot game is acquired), and the jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game being executed ends.

As shown in FIG. 377, the first outlet 1163a and the second outlet 1163b are provided in the V winning device 650. By configuring in this manner, when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, the ball that has won the V winning device 650 can be reliably prevented from flowing into the flow paths (the third flow path 650d, the fourth flow path 650e, and the fifth flow path 650f) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 660a is in a release state. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, the first outlet 1163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 650c and the fourth flow path 650e may be connected, and the storage valve 660a may be in a storage state, and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650c may enter the second outlet 1163b. In this case, the third partition 650k3, which is provided vertically in a straight line in Fig. 377, can be tilted downward and to the right as viewed from the perspective of Fig. 377 from the upper end side to the lower end side, that is, the extension line of the partition 650k3 toward the lower end side is to the right of the fourth partition 650k4 (the right side as viewed from the perspective of Fig. 377). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the balls that flow down the second flow path 650c from flowing into the fifth flow path 650f.

In this way, in this control example, a jackpot game is executed when the ball enters the V winning port 1650 during a small jackpot game. Hereinafter, when explaining jackpot games by dividing the execution triggers, the jackpot game executed when the ball enters the V winning port 1650 is also referred to as a V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 650 of this control example is configured so that when a small jackpot game is played, it becomes an open state in which a ball can win a prize, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d, and whether or not the ball will win in the V winning port 1650 is determined depending on the operating status of the first movable valve 660b when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b.

In the tenth control example, the first movable valve 660b is configured to operate so that the game ball can reliably enter the V entry port 1650 by entering the V entry device 650 during a small win game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The movable content of the first movable valve 660b may be specified so that when a game ball is entered into the V entry device 650 during a small win game, the game ball may enter the V entry port 1650 in some cases and may not enter the V entry port 1650 in other cases. For example, the first movable valve 660b may be configured to be constantly movable in a movable pattern in which the time at the induction position (the time when the ball cannot enter the V entry port 1650) is 6 seconds, and the time at the passing position (the time when the ball can enter the V entry port 1650) is 1 second. As a result, the ratio of balls that flow down the third flow path 650d entering the V entry port 1650 can be approximately 1/6.

Next, referring to FIG. 378 to FIG. 380, the contents of the ball flow that has won the V winning device 650 during the execution of the small winning game in the modified example that is configured to be able to execute a small winning game in which the game ball can enter the V winning port 1650 and a small winning game in which the game ball cannot enter the V winning port 1650, unlike the present tenth control example, will be explained. In the following explanation, even if multiple balls are entered into the V winning device 650 in one small winning game, the operation of the storage valve 660a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d is one. First, referring to FIG. 378, the ball flow during the first half period of the small winning game (the period when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state) will be explained. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device 650 when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state during the small winning game. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be controlled so that it is in a storage state from the time the small win game is executed until the V winning device 650 is closed. Then, when multiple balls enter the V winning device 650 while the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in a storage section formed in the storage valve 660a, and the next winning ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 660a, flows down the second flow path 650c, and enters the outlet 1163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, all winning balls (e.g., ball P2) other than ball P1 stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a are configured to enter the outlet 1163a, so multiple balls do not remain inside the V winning device 650. Also, the storage state of the storage valve 660a is released after the V opening and closing door 650a of the V winning device 650 is closed (after operational control is executed to close the door), so it is possible to ensure that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d during one play per device is limited to one.

By configuring it in this way, the ease with which the ball can enter the V winning port 1650 does not change depending on the timing of the ball entering the V winning device 650 during small win play or the number of wins, so fair play can be provided to all players.

However, without being limited to this, the ease of balls entering the V winning port 1650 may be variable depending on the number of winning balls entering the V winning device 650 during small prize play. For example, six storage sections capable of storing balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are provided, and a distribution member (such as a crane) is provided that distributes the balls that have entered the V winning device 650 to one of the six storage sections. Then, of the six storage sections, only balls stored in a specific storage section are allowed to enter the V winning port 1650 when the storage state of the storage section is released, and balls stored in storage sections other than the specific storage section (up to five balls) are configured to enter the second outlet 1163b when the storage state of each storage section is released. In addition, when the next ball is sorted by the sorting member toward a storage section in which balls are already stored, a flow path is provided that connects each storage section so that the next ball collides with the ball already stored there and is stored in another adjacent storage section.

By configuring it in this way, the winning ratio into the V winning port 1650 can be varied depending on the number of winning balls that enter the V winning device 650 during small win play, which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm.

Even with this configuration, the actual winning ratio for the V winning port 1650 can be varied by varying the number of times the storage state of the storage section that allows the balls to flow down to the outlet during one small win game is released depending on the type of small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 379, the ball flow (later period of the game with a winning combination) when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state during a small winning game. As shown in FIG. 379, after the V opening and closing door 650a is closed and a new ball cannot enter the V winning device 650, when the storage valve 660a transitions to the release state (shown by a dotted line in the figure), the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. In the state shown in FIG. 379, the first movable valve 660b is in the induction position, so the ball P1 rolls down the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b, flows down the fourth flow path 650e, and enters the second outlet 1163b.

On the other hand, the ball flow when the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d and reaches the first movable valve 660b, and the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position, will be explained with reference to FIG. 380. FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state during a small winning game. As shown in FIG. 380, if the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b, the ball flows down the fifth flow path 660f and enters the V winning hole 1650.

In addition, in this tenth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 376 to 380, the player is configured to play left-handed games both in the game for getting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state and in the game for getting the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the time-saving state, and further, the player is configured to play left-handed games even during small win games and to play right-handed games only during big win games, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the player to play in different ways in the normal state and the time-saving state, as in each of the control examples described above.

<About the performance content in the 10th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 381 to Fig. 383, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired during the time-saving state reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the number of times that the player can play a jackpot game (a jackpot game based on a small jackpot win) can be notified to the player based on the information indicating the result of the pre-reading for the reserved special figures 2.

Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is stipulated that a big win or a small win will always be won, and it is configured so that the game ball can be passed reliably into the specific area by playing normally during the small win game that is executed based on the small win being won.

In other words, in this tenth control example, a game that acquires the right to play a jackpot game is executed for the number of reserved special figures 2 that have already been acquired. For example, if four reserved special figures 2 have been acquired, four more jackpot games can be played. In addition, in this tenth control example, the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game can be set to a normal state or a time-saving state, and further, the time-saving state can be set to an unfavorable time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire reserved special figures 2, and an advantageous time-saving state in which it is easier to acquire reserved special figures 2 than in the unfavorable time-saving state.

When a predetermined condition (the number of reserved special symbols 2 reaches the upper limit) is met during the time-saving state, the system determines whether or not a favorable time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game based on the results of a look-ahead of the reserved special symbols 2 that have already been acquired, and is configured to notify the player of the number of rights available to play the jackpot game based on the results of this determination.

In this way, by predicting the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery that corresponds to the acquired special pattern 2 reserve in addition to the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have been acquired, and configuring it so that the number of times that a jackpot game can be executed (number of possible jackpots) can be notified, it becomes possible to notify the number of possible jackpots that is greater than the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have been acquired.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, the number of times that the player is notified as the number of times a jackpot can be executed is configured to vary based on the game state at the time when the special chart 2 reserve reaches the upper limit and the results of the look-ahead. In other words, it is possible to notify the player of a number of times other than the maximum number as the number of times a jackpot can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from completely understanding the content of the game that will be executed later based on the notified number of times a jackpot can be executed, which can reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this tenth control example, during the final fluctuation period of the time-saving state in which the special chart 2 reserve can be acquired, even if the maximum number of special chart 2 reserves has not been acquired, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation for acquiring the special chart 2 reserve can be changed based on the lottery results of the final fluctuation and the results of the advance reading of the special chart 2 reserves that have already been acquired, and a presentation different from the guidance presentation can be executed.

Here, among conventional pachinko machines 10, there are pachinko machines 10 that have the same gameplay as the tenth control example, in the final variation period of the special pattern in the time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (final variation period of the time-saving state), a guide effect is executed to guide the player to obtain the upper limit of the reserved special symbol 2, thereby allowing the player to play in a way that makes the most of the benefit given to the player during the time-saving state (a benefit that makes it easier to obtain the reserved special symbol 2).

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, for example, the guidance presentation is executed regardless of the result of the lottery for the final time-saving fluctuation or the result of the second special pattern lottery executed after the final time-saving fluctuation (the second special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 executed during the normal state). Therefore, even if the number of reserved special patterns 2 is not acquired up to the upper limit during this final time-saving fluctuation period, a time-saving state in which the reserved special pattern 2 can be acquired again may be set based on the result of the second special pattern lottery executed thereafter. In such a case, the player is forced to play a game that unnecessarily fires game balls, and the player is not guided to the appropriate game.

In contrast to this, in the tenth control example, when determining the presentation mode to be executed during the final time-saving fluctuation period, a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving state in which the reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired again after the final time-saving fluctuation period has elapsed is made based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving fluctuation period and the pre-reading result corresponding to the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired, and whether or not a guidance presentation is executed is determined based on the result of this determination.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to implement guidance presentations that prevent players from playing games that unnecessarily reach the upper limit for the number of reserved special charts 2.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation is configured to be variable depending on the content of the game that can be executed after the time-saving final variation period has elapsed (the difficulty of acquiring the reserved special chart 2). For example, when the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small prize win and the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small prize win, the guidance presentation is configured to emphasize the guidance mode for acquiring the reserved special chart 2 to the player, rather than when the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small prize win and the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small prize win in which it is difficult to acquire the reserved special chart 2.

In this way, by configuring the guidance display to vary in strength during the final time-saving fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player if the player does not obtain the reserved special chart 2 during a period in which it would be disadvantageous to the player if the reserved special chart 2 were not obtained, and the period ends without the player obtaining the reserved special chart 2, compared to when a monotonous guidance display is always executed.

In this tenth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (unfavorable time-saving state), or a time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (favorable time-saving state).

Specifically, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the first second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state starts, and when a favorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the second second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state starts. By configuring in this way, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, a time-saving state is set in which the second special symbol lottery is executed only once without obtaining the special symbol 2 reservation, and when a favorable time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which the maximum number of special symbol 2 reservations can be obtained is set.

First, referring to FIG. 381(a), the content of the presentation when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 381(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first second special pattern change in the time-saving state (first win state) that is set after winning a jackpot in the special pattern 1 lottery. As shown in FIG. 381(a), a time-saving presentation is executed to show whether the lottery result of the second special pattern change being executed is a lottery result in which an unfavorable time-saving state is set (unfavorable lottery result) or a lottery result in which an advantageous time-saving state is set (favorable lottery result).

In the example shown in FIG. 381(a), icon 1800a imitating a "V" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to an unfavorable lottery result, and icon 1800b imitating "V x 5" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to a favorable lottery result. When icon 1800b is selected, "Super Chance Mode" is displayed as a notification mode to notify the player that they will move to the Super Chance Mode, and the comment "5 consecutive wins for V x 5" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notification mode to notify the player that they will acquire five jackpot play rights (5 consecutive wins possible) when icon 1800b is selected.

Next, the content of the presentation during a jackpot game that is executed based on the results of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state will be explained with reference to FIG. 381(b). FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a special symbol 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 381(b), a notification presentation is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game to notify the player in advance of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 382(a), the contents of the presentation during the advantageous time-saving state will be explained. FIG. 382(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the super chance mode, which indicates that the advantageous time-saving state is in place. As shown in FIG. 382(a), the super chance mode is configured so that the time-saving state continues until multiple second special symbol variations are executed, and so that the special symbol 2 reservation can be acquired during the variation period of the second special symbol variation. Therefore, the secondary display area Ds displays a comment saying "Hit to the right to collect Vs" to indicate that the current situation is such that the special symbol 2 reservation can be easily acquired, and to encourage the player to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation.

Then, in the small display area Dm9, V icons are displayed that increase or decrease according to the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired. These V icons are configured to be able to display up to the same number as the reserved special charts 2, and each time a reserved special chart 2 is acquired, the first V icon hr1 to the fourth V icon hr4 are displayed in that order. In the example shown in FIG. 382(a), two reserved special charts 2 have been acquired, so the first V icon hr1 and the second V icon hr2 are displayed.

After that, when the player acquires the maximum number of reserved special charts 2, as shown in FIG. 382(b), an icon hx resembling "MAX" is displayed in the information in the small display area Dm9 as an upper limit notification mode to indicate that the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, and an effect in which a treasure chest 1810 appears in the center of the main display area Dm is executed, and the words "Treasure chest appears" are displayed. Then, the words "What's inside?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide mode to explain to the player the progress of the effect currently being executed. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that an effect in which a treasure chest 1810 is opened will be executed next.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383(a), when the treasure chest 1810 is opened, an effect is executed in which contents 1810a appear from within the treasure chest 1810, and the display manner of the contents 1810a indicates the number of rights to play a jackpot game that the player has currently acquired. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 383(a), the result of the pre-reading of the fourth special symbol 2 reservation is a small jackpot win in which a favorable time-saving state is set, so the contents 1810a are displayed in the display mode "V x 10" to notify that the right to play 10 jackpot games has been acquired, including a jackpot game (1 time) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery currently being executed, a jackpot game (4 times) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special symbol 2 reservation, a jackpot game (1 time) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the fourth special symbol 2 reservation, and a jackpot game (4 times) corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation that can be acquired during the fluctuation.

By configuring in this manner, in this tenth control example, it is possible to predict not only the number of jackpot play rights that have already been acquired, but also the game content after the end of the jackpot play that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot play rights, and then notify the player of information regarding the jackpot play rights that can be acquired, so it is possible to notify the player in advance of the number of jackpot play rights that are greater than the number of reserved special chart 2s (4) that can be reserved and stored at one time. This makes it difficult for the player to predict how the right to play a jackpot game will arise (whether it can be acquired), and provides an exciting game.

In addition, in this tenth control example, if a proper play (right-hand play) is performed during a small win game, it is possible to execute a jackpot game, so it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot games as the number of jackpot play rights notified to the player in advance. However, if, for example, a proper play (right-hand play) is not performed during a small win game, and the game ball cannot enter a specific area during the small win game, and a jackpot game is not executed, it is preferable to configure the system to execute an effect that reduces the number of jackpot play rights notified in advance.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player that the number of jackpot games to be played has been reduced depending on the content of the game played. In this case, it is advisable to configure it so that information can be notified to allow the player to understand how the number of rights to play jackpot games has been reduced (the rights to play have been lost). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the number of rights to play jackpot games is reduced again when there are still rights to play jackpot games remaining.

In this tenth control example, if a proper play (right-hit play) is performed during a small win game, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in almost all cases, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot play rights as the number of jackpot play rights notified to the player in advance. Therefore, the system is configured to notify the player in advance of all of the calculated number of jackpot play rights, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to predict not only the number of jackpot play rights already acquired, but also the game content after the end of the jackpot game that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot play rights, and then calculate the number of jackpot play rights that the player can acquire, and notify the player in advance of part of the calculation result.

As a result, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that a jackpot game is executed with approximately half the probability of a small jackpot game being executed, if the machine is configured to notify the player in advance of half the number calculated as the number of jackpot game execution rights that the player may obtain, it is possible to execute an update process to increase or decrease the pre-notified number of jackpot game execution rights based on the number of small jackpot games and the number of jackpot games actually executed, making it easier for the player to predict the number of jackpot games that may be executed and increasing the reliability of the information used in the prediction.

Returning to FIG. 383(b), the explanation will be continued. FIG. 383(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the final variation period of the second special pattern in the super chance mode, which indicates that the advantageous time-saving state is in effect. In this tenth control example, the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is set is configured to make it easier to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 than the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is not set. During the second special pattern variation period (final variation period) in which the end condition of the advantageous time-saving state is established, as shown in FIG. 382(a), a guide announcement is configured to be executable to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. However, when the special pattern variation that is the final variation period is executed, if there is a special pattern 2 reservation corresponding to a winning that sets the advantageous time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game among the special pattern 2 reservations that have already been acquired, the above-mentioned guide announcement is not executed, and a performance mode for congratulating the player is set as shown in FIG. 383(b).

In other words, during the special pattern variation period when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is met, if the specific condition is met even if the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols has not been acquired, a notification to encourage the player to acquire the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing games that are unnecessarily aimed at acquiring the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols.

<Regarding transition of game state in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 384, the transition contents of the game state in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 384 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 384, in this tenth control example, as in the seventh control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and even if any game state is set, the player can execute a left-handed game.

The initial state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a normal state (first normal state) in which neither the reserved special symbol 1 nor the reserved special symbol 2 has been acquired. In this first normal state, a game is played by hitting the ball from the left to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64. In this first normal state, a low probability state for the special symbol is set, so a first special symbol lottery is executed, which has a probability of winning the jackpot of 30/1000.

If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot A." After the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set ends, a time-saving state is set.

In the tenth control example, the time-saving state can be set to provide different degrees of play for the player, and a second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) can be set. More specifically, the degree of play in the time-saving state is varied by varying the ease of acquiring the special chart 2 reservation during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and when the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is configured to be easy to insert multiple game balls into the second ball entrance 640 during that short period. On the other hand, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set, it is configured to be difficult to insert multiple game balls into the second ball entrance 640 during that short period.

In other words, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set and when the second time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) is set, the ease of acquiring the reserved balls in the special chart 2 during the time-saving state is set is changed to change the degree of advantage to the player.

The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set the game state to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Since the normal state is set to a low probability state for normal symbols, it is difficult to win a normal symbol, and even if a normal symbol is won, the operation period of the electric role 640a is short, making it difficult (or impossible) to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the game is mainly played by hitting the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting it from the left and executing the first special symbol lottery.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is executed, which has a probability of winning a jackpot at 30/1000. If a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A, and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this tenth control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 384, this control example is configured so that a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state can be set as the time-saving state. Here, the difference between the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state will be explained. Both the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are time-saving states in which a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, and the probability of winning the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are the same. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery is also the same.

The only difference is the timing at which the time-saving state ends (transitions to the normal state); in the first time-saving state, if the second special pattern lottery is performed once, the time-saving state ends at the start of the second special pattern variation, and in the second time-saving state, if the second special pattern lottery is performed twice, the time-saving state ends at the start of the second special pattern variation.

In other words, the second time-saving state can be set longer by the period of the second special symbol fluctuation than the first time-saving state, so it can be said to be a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this control example, the number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one play per normal symbol is configured to be one, and the time-saving end condition is established when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed once. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is more likely to end without acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues during the period of the second special symbol fluctuation, so it is more likely to end with the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). In other words, even in terms of the acquisition status of reserved special symbol 2 at the time when the time-saving state ends, the second time-saving state can be said to be a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state.

The details will be described later, but if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state, a small prize game that can set the second time-saving state at a rate of 5% is selected. That is, in the normal state, it is easier to transition to the first time-saving state than the second time-saving state, and in the first time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the second time-saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, for a player playing in the normal state, it is possible to gradually transition between game states (normal state, first time-saving state) with different transition rates to the second time-saving state that are most advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time-saving state is set. In addition, when a game state that is easier to transition to the second time-saving state than the normal state is transitioned to, it is difficult to stop playing, so it is easy to improve the operation of the game.

In the first time-saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by left-handed play, a normal pattern lottery is executed, and a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game is executed. Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special pattern lottery is executed, which wins a small prize with a probability of 970/1000 and a big prize with a probability of 30/1000. During this first time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is established based on the second special pattern lottery being executed once, and the time-saving state is configured to end at the start of the special pattern change (second special pattern change) to show the result of the second special pattern lottery in which the time-saving end condition is established. As a result, it becomes easier for the time-saving state to end without acquiring the special pattern 2 reservation, so after the time-saving state is set, the game state becomes one in which the second special pattern lottery can be executed only once.

In this tenth control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, it is configured to always result in a big win or a small win, and when a small win game is executed, if the game is executed normally, it is possible to reliably acquire the right to play a big win game (entry of a game ball into the V winning port 1650). In other words, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the big win game is executed can be the same. Therefore, the game is played with the aim of setting the second time-saving state in which it is possible to acquire a special symbol 2 reservation rather than the first time-saving state.

When a small prize is won in the special chart 2 lottery during the time-saving state, the small prize types that are set have different selection rates, with the selection rate of small prize A, which sets the first time-saving state after the big win game ends, being 80%, the selection rate of small prize B, which sets the normal state after the big win game ends, being 15%, and the selection rate of small prize C, which sets the second time-saving state after the big win game ends, being 5%.

In other words, when the first time-saving state is set, the game that executes the second special symbol lottery can be continued until the small win B, which sets the normal state after the big win game ends, is selected.

In addition, if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state, a small prize game that can set the second time-saving state with a probability of 5% is selected. In other words, in the normal state, it is easier to transition to the first time-saving state than the second time-saving state, and in the first time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the second time-saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, for a player playing in the normal state, it is possible to gradually transition between game states (normal state, first time-saving state) with different transition rates to the second time-saving state that are most advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time-saving state is set. In addition, when a game state that is easier to transition to the second time-saving state than the normal state is transitioned to, it is difficult to stop playing, so it is easy to improve the operation of the game.

During the second time-saving state, when the second lottery for the second special symbol is executed for the first time-saving state described above, the time-saving end condition is met, and the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol change when the time-saving end condition is met. In other words, since the time-saving state can be set during the period of the second special symbol change until the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation during that period of change, and it is possible to easily end the time-saving state when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired. Therefore, the second time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state.

The game state transition based on the results of the second special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state is the same as the first time-saving state described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Then, when the second time-saving state ends, that is, when the second special symbol variation is stopped and the time-saving end condition is met, if the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired, the game state will transition to the first normal state, just like when the first time-saving state described above ends.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol variation is stopped and the time-saving end condition is met, and special symbol 2 is reserved, the game will transition to a second normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed while the normal state is set as the game state. In this second normal state, the Super Chance mode will continue to be set.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, a special symbol lottery is executed with the same probability (970/1000) of winning a small prize as during the time-saving state. The small prize type is selected at the same selection rate as the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state. In other words, if many special symbol 2 reserves have been acquired, it is possible to easily return to the time-saving state with a high probability, even if the normal state is set after the end of the big win game.

In the tenth control example, the selection ratio of the small win type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small win type in the time-saving state are set to be the same, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a small win type that is more advantageous to the player is more easily selected in one game state than in the other game state. For example, it is preferable to configure so that a small win type (small win C) that is more advantageous to the player is more easily selected when the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the second special pattern lottery performed during the normal state more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery performed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of ending the time-saving state when the special pattern 2 reservation is obtained, and it is possible to easily increase the difference in the degree of advantage between the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 385 to Fig. 390. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and part of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and part of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, but otherwise are the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 385, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 385(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385(a), the ROM 202 of this control example differs from the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) in that the first win random number 10 table 202ia is provided instead of the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the small win type selection 10 table 202if is provided instead of the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, the time-saving grant 10 table 202ie is provided instead of the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, and the small win scenario 10 table 202ii is newly added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. For ease of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted from FIG. 385(a), except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first random winning number 10 table 202ia differs from the first random winning number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) described above in that the specified value for determining a big win and the specified value for determining a small win are different, but otherwise they are the same. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the first winning random number 10 table 202ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 386(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 386(a), the first winning random number 10 table 202ia has a special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 that is referenced when drawing a winning lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 that is referenced when drawing a winning lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

Next, the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 386(b). FIG. 386(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 386(b), a "jackpot" is defined for the range of "0 to 29" out of the possible range of "0 to 999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1. That is, in this tenth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 3/100 (30/1000).

Next, the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 386(c). FIG. 386(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 386(c), out of the possible range of "0-999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1, a "big win" is defined for the range "0-29", and a "small win" is defined for the value "30-999". That is, in this tenth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for special pattern 2 is approximately 3/100 (30/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 97/100 (970/1000).

In this tenth control example, the type and number of judgment values that are judged to be a small prize winner are fixed regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a high probability state (high probability state of special pattern) in which the probability of winning a small prize is high and a low probability state (low probability state of special pattern) in which the probability is low are set according to the game state. Also, in this tenth control example, it is configured so that only the second special pattern lottery can be judged to be a small prize winner, but the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 can be specified so that the first special pattern lottery can also be a small prize winner, and in this case, the probability of winning a small prize in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery can be the same or different.

The small prize type selection 10 table 202if is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of small prize that will be set if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). This small prize type selection 10 table 202if differs from the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the content of the small prize type that is specified has been changed, but is otherwise the same. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 387, the small win type selection 10 table 202if will be explained. FIG. 387 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 10 table 202if. In this tenth control example, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state after the end of a big win game that is executed based on the establishment of an execution condition during a small win game is varied depending on the small win type that is set. More specifically, it is configured so that an advantageous time-saving state or an unfavorable time-saving state can be set depending on the small win type that is set.

Specifically, the small win type of the first special symbol is set to be selected from the three types of small win A, small win B, and small win C described above depending on the value of the small win type counter C5, and for the acquired small win type counter C5 value range of "0 to 79", "small win A (5R jackpot A when V passes)" is specified, for the range of "80 to 94", "small win B (5R jackpot B when V passes)" is specified, and for the range of "95 to 99", "small win C (5R jackpot C without time reduction when V passes)" is specified.

Here, for each small win type, a type of big win game (big win type) is set that will be executed after the game ball enters the V winning port 1650 during the small win game. For "small win A", "big win A" is set as the big win type, for "small win B", "big win B" is set, and for "small win C", "big win C" is set.

In this tenth control example, regardless of whether any of the jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" is set, a jackpot game (five rounds) is executed in which five rounds of play in which the variable winning device 65 is opened are executed as the jackpot game, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 388, but the system is configured so that different time-saving end conditions are set as the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state depending on the jackpot type that is set.

In other words, it is configured to provide bonus games (jackpot games, games during the time-saving state) with different conditions for ending the time-saving mode depending on the type of small jackpot that is set when a small jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of jackpot based on the content of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of a small jackpot, and thus preventing the player from predicting in advance whether the time-saving state that will be set later will be a favorable or unfavorable time-saving state.

In this tenth control example, the content of the jackpot game executed based on a small jackpot win is configured to be the same (5 round (R) jackpot game) regardless of the small jackpot type, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be possible to execute a jackpot game with different content depending on the small jackpot type. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that a jackpot game with the same jackpot game content is executed for at least some of the jackpot types in which an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set and for at least some of the jackpot types in which an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends is a favorable time-saving state or an unfavorable time-saving state while the jackpot game is being played, and a jackpot game that makes it easy for the player to determine while the jackpot game is being played that the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends is a favorable time-saving state (a jackpot game that can only be executed for a jackpot type in which a favorable time-saving state is set), which makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in what kind of jackpot game will be played.

The time-saving 10 table 202ie is a data table in which the end conditions (time-saving end conditions) of the time-saving state to be set at the end of a jackpot game are predefined, and the time-saving grant contents (time-saving end conditions) corresponding to each jackpot type are defined. This time-saving 10 table 202ie is a data table referenced when setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, and is referenced when a jackpot game ends (the ending period of a jackpot game ends), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the jackpot type.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 10 table 202ie will be explained with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving 10 table 202ie. In this control example, it is possible to set a first time-saving end condition (a value set in the time-saving counter 203h) that is established based on the combined number of first and second special pattern variations, and a second time-saving end condition (a value set in the special pattern 2 variation count counter) that is established based on the number of second special pattern variations.

Specifically, for "Big Win A" which is set when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery or when the small win type "small win A" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition, and the value of the special pattern 2 change count counter 203ia is set to "1" as the second time-saving end condition. In other words, when the time-saving state corresponding to "Big Win A" is set, the first time-saving end condition is established when the total number of times the first special pattern change is performed and the second special pattern change is performed reaches 10 times, and the time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is established is set when the number of times the second special pattern change is performed reaches 1 time. As described above, in this tenth control example, since the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change at which the time-saving end condition is established, when the time-saving state corresponding to "Big Win A" is set, the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the first second special pattern change after the time-saving state is set. This results in an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, a second time-saving end condition that can be satisfied first when playing normally during the time-saving state, and a first time-saving end condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the second time-saving end condition are set. The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition. This value of "10" is specified to be a value greater than the upper limit of the special pattern 1 reservation "4". Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set with the upper limit of the special pattern 1 reservation stored, and all the special pattern 1 reservations are consumed before the second special pattern variation is performed, the time-saving state will not end. In addition, if an action of only performing the first special pattern lottery is performed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state can be ended when the number of times of the first special pattern variation reaches 10, so that it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of abnormal play. In this control example, the same value is set as the first time-saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time-saving state is set, but this is not limited to this and different values may be set.

For the "Big Win B" that is set when the small win type "Small Win B" is set, the first time-saving end condition is set to "0" in the time-saving counter 203h, and the second time-saving end condition is set to "0" in the special symbol 2 variation counter 203ia. In other words, when "Big Win B" is set, the normal state is set after the big win game ends. As mentioned above, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state is set to make it easier for the player to play a game (second special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set, so "Big Win B" is the big win type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

For the "big win C" that is set when the small win type "small win C" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition, and the value of the special pattern 2 variation counter 203ia is set to "2" as the second time-saving end condition. In other words, when the time-saving state corresponding to "big win C" is set, the first time-saving end condition is established when the total number of times the first special pattern variation is executed and the second special pattern variation is executed reaches 10 times, and the time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is established is set when the number of times the second special pattern variation is executed reaches 2 times. As described above, in this tenth control example, since the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern variation that establishes the time-saving end condition, when the time-saving state corresponding to "big win C" is set, the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the second special pattern variation after the time-saving state is set. In other words, the time-saving state continues for the duration of the first second special symbol change after the time-saving state is set, and this is a period in which it becomes easier to get the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 by hitting a normal symbol. This creates an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first time-saving end condition and second time-saving end condition is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end condition. For example, a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the first special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the second special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is met when a small jackpot is won and the number of times the V winning device 650 is activated reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

Furthermore, the time-saving end condition may be configured to be established when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are established. In this case, it is preferable to provide a number-of-established determination means for determining the number of established time-saving end conditions, and a condition-attainment determination means for determining whether the number of established conditions determined by the number-of-established determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two), and to end the time-saving state (set to the normal state) when it is determined by the condition-attainment determination means that the number of established conditions has reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

Returning to FIG. 385(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be explained. FIG. 385(b) is a diagram that shows the contents defined in the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385(b), this tenth control example differs from the RAM 203 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(b)) in that a special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The game status storage area 203g is a memory area in which information indicating the game status contained in the status command received from the main control device 110 is stored, as in each of the control examples described above, and is configured to be able to determine not only the set game status (normal status, time-saving status) based on the information stored in the game status storage area 203g, but also the type of game status (unfavorable time-saving status (first time-saving status), favorable time-saving status (second time-saving status)).

The special pattern 2 variation counter 203ia is a counter that is referenced when determining whether the number of variations of the second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state satisfies the second time-saving end condition, and a value corresponding to the second time-saving end condition is set when the time-saving state is set. Then, each time a control process is executed to start the second special pattern variation during the time-saving state, the value is subtracted, and it is determined whether the value after subtraction satisfies the second time-saving end condition (is 0).

By configuring it in this way, even if the content of the second time-saving end condition is made different depending on the type of time-saving state to be set, it is only necessary to change the content of the value to be set in the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia when setting the time-saving state, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 389(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 389(a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(a)) in that the lottery result notification mode selection table 202fa has been deleted and that a final variable performance selection table 222ia and a notification target selection table 222ib have been provided. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The final variation effect selection table 222ia is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variation effect (final variation effect) that is executed during the final variation of the second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state (special pattern 2 time-saving final variation), and is referenced when determining the variation effect pattern of the special pattern 2 variation that is one before the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is met.

As described above, in this tenth control example, the timing for ending the time-saving state is the timing for starting the special pattern change, so the period of special pattern change just before the time-saving end condition is met is the player's last chance to acquire the reserved special pattern 2. Therefore, in this tenth control example, the period of special pattern change just before the time-saving end condition is met is the final time-saving change period, and the final change performance is executed during that final time-saving change period.

Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia are updated by the update process 10 (see FIG. 393) executed by the main control unit 110, and a remaining time-saving count command indicating the updated value of the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia is set (see S10603 in FIG. 393). The remaining time-saving count command output from the main control unit 110 is then received by the voice lamp control unit 113, so that the remaining information (remaining time-saving count) until the time-saving end condition is met for the time-saving state currently set on the voice lamp control unit 113 side can be specified.

Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is 1, that is, that the time-saving end condition will be met by the special pattern change that is executed next to the special pattern change that corresponds to the currently received remaining time-saving number command, specifically, if information indicating "1" is received as the remaining time-saving number command as the value of the time-saving counter 203h or the value of the special pattern 2 change number counter 203ia, the change period of the corresponding special pattern change (final time-saving change) is identified as the final time-saving change period, and the presentation mode of the final time-saving change presentation is determined for that final time-saving change period.

By configuring it in this way, even if the process to end the time-saving state is executed at the start of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, it is easier to ensure a period of time to execute an effect (reservation acquisition effect) that encourages the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, during the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the game state (normal state) is entered in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation. Therefore, the time-saving final change presentation is executed during the special pattern change period immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. However, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 in which the stop timing of the special pattern change is specified as the timing for ending the time-saving state, the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied is specified as the time-saving final change period, and the presentation mode of the time-saving final change presentation can be determined for that period of the special pattern change.

The presentation period of the time-saving final change presentation only needs to overlap with at least a portion of the period corresponding to the above-mentioned time-saving final change period. The time-saving final change presentation may be configured to have a presentation period that is only a portion of the time-saving final change period, or the time-saving final change presentation may be configured to span a portion of the time-saving final change period and a period that is different from the time-saving final change period.

Here, the contents stipulated in the final variation performance selection table 222ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 390. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the final variation performance selection table 222ia. In this tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 382(a) or FIG. 383(b), a performance mode that can give different information to the player as the time-saving final variation performance is configurable. For example, during the period when the time-saving final variation performance is being executed, a performance mode corresponding to a reserved acquisition performance (see FIG. 382(a)) that encourages the acquisition of a special chart 2 reserved, and a performance mode corresponding to a congratulatory performance (see FIG. 383(b)) that notifies the player that the acquired special chart 2 reserved contains information that can give the player an advantageous privilege are configurable.

As shown in FIG. 390(a), in this final variation effect selection table 222ia, the performance mode of the final variation effect is specified in correspondence with the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation effect, the number of reserved special patterns 2 (the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b1 for special pattern 2) when determining the variation effect of the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation effect, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223e.

Specifically, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is a "big win" or a "small win C," and the special pattern 2 reserved number (the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change performance that executes the time-saving final change performance is "1 to 3," the value of the acquired performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 69," and the performance mode is "goal" (see FIG. 383 (b)) in the range of "70 to 99." "Save Weak" (see FIG. 382(a)) is specified as the mode, and when the special symbol 2 reserved number (value of special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b1) is "0" when determining the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation performance is executed, "Save Weak" (see FIG. 382(a)) is specified as the performance mode for the acquired performance counter 223e value in the range of "0 to 69", and "Goal" (see FIG. 383(b)) is specified as the performance mode for the range of "70 to 99".

In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "small win A" and the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change performance that executes the time-saving final change performance is "0 to 3", the performance mode is specified as "weak save" (see Figure 382 (a)) for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 69", and as "strong save" for the range of "70 to 99".

Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "small win B" and the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "1 to 3", the performance mode is "Strong Save" for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 69", and the performance mode is "Weak Save" for the range of "70 to 99" (see FIG. 382(a)). If the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "0", the performance mode is "Strong Save" for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 99".

Here, in this tenth control example, when "small win C" is set as the small win type, the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) is set after the end of the big win game that is executed based on the small win. In other words, when "small win C" is won, a time-saving state having a period during which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired is set later. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation, a presentation mode corresponding to a congratulatory presentation ("goal") that does not prompt the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation during the presentation period of the time-saving final variation presentation can be set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from being encouraged to unnecessarily fire game balls in an attempt to acquire a reserved special chart 2 during the final time-saving fluctuation period, which indicates the end of the time-saving state. Furthermore, the ratio at which the presentation mode corresponding to the congratulatory presentation ("goal") is set is varied according to the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired, so that the presentation mode corresponding to the congratulatory presentation ("goal") is more likely to be set when the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired is large than when it is small.

In other words, when a game ball is released to acquire a reserved special chart 2 during the final variation performance period, the player is configured to be less likely to receive the reserved award when there are fewer bonuses available to the player (when there are fewer reserved special charts 2 that can be newly acquired). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further prevent players from being encouraged to play games that involve unnecessary release of game balls in order to acquire reserved special charts 2.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, even if there is a high possibility that the advantageous time-saving state will be set again (a state in which small win C has been won), the reserved acquisition effect is executed with a low probability, so it is possible to prevent the player from reliably understanding the future game content due to the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation effect.

On the other hand, in this tenth control example, when "small win B" is set as the small win type, the time-saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the end of the big win game that is executed based on the small win. In other words, when "small win B" is won, a period in which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired later is not set. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation, a presentation mode that encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation during the presentation period of the time-saving final variation presentation can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to reliably acquire the special 2 reserved figure during the last period in which the special 2 reserved figure can be acquired. In addition, in this tenth control example, as the presentation mode of the reserved acquisition presentation to encourage the player to acquire the special 2 reserved figure, a weak presentation mode ("Weak Save") that encourages the acquisition of the special 2 reserved figure and a strong presentation mode ("Strong Save") that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special 2 reserved figure more than the weak presentation mode can be set, and the proportion of the strong presentation mode set as the presentation mode of the reserved acquisition presentation is configured to differ between when an unfavorable time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when a small prize A is won) and when a normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when a small prize B is won).

In other words, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, it is difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2, but for example, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set without acquiring any reserved special symbol 2, a new second special symbol lottery can be executed once. In other words, when the normal state is set after the end of a big win game, and when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, both are game states in which it is difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2, but the unfavorable time-saving state is a game state in which it is easier to execute a new second special symbol lottery. And since a new second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a possibility that a favorable time-saving state will be set based on the lottery result, and therefore, the "small win C" in which the unfavorable time-saving state is set is more likely to later be set as a favorable time-saving state than the "small win B" in which the normal state is set.

Therefore, in this tenth control example, the configuration is such that it is easier to set a presentation mode (Strong Save) that strongly encourages the player to acquire the reserved special chart 2 when small prize B is won than when small prize A is won.

Here, in conventional pachinko machines 10, in the final period during which it is possible to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 in the time-saving state (final time-saving fluctuation period), a performance (reservation acquisition performance) is executed that unconditionally encourages the player to acquire the reserved special symbol 2. However, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving fluctuation period, there are cases where there is no merit to acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 during the final time-saving fluctuation period, and only the demerit of needlessly firing game balls occurs.

The same reserved symbol acquisition effect is executed in both situations where it would be better to actually acquire the reserved special symbol 2 (for example, the time-saving state ends as it is, making it impossible to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2) and situations where there is little benefit to acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 (for example, a situation where the ongoing special symbol lottery results in a big jackpot (or a small jackpot), and after the big jackpot game based on the lottery result ends, a time-saving state is set in which it is easy to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 again). This could lead to a problem whereby players' motivation to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2 gradually decreases when the reserved symbol acquisition effect is executed.

In response to this, in the tenth control example, the presentation mode for the reserve acquisition presentation can be set to different presentation modes that vary the degree to which the player is encouraged to acquire the special chart 2 reserve, and is configured so that in situations where it would be better to actually acquire the special chart 2 reserve (for example, a situation where the time-saving state ends as it is and it becomes impossible to acquire a new special chart 2 reserve), it is easy to set a presentation mode that strongly encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reserve (Strong Save).

By configuring it in this way, players who see the reserved acquisition performance, which is performed in a different presentation mode from the normally executed reserved acquisition performance and in a presentation mode that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special reserved chart 2, can be motivated to play in order to acquire the special reserved chart 2.

As an example of a presentation mode that strongly encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation, the display area of the small display area Dm4 may be enlarged to display the word "Hit left" in a larger size, or the comment displayed in the secondary display area Ds may be changed from "Hit left to collect V" to "Make sure to hit left" to strongly encourage the player to release the game ball. In other words, the display mode of the information provided to the player in the normal reserve acquisition presentation may be changed to strongly encourage the player to release the game ball. Alternatively, a presentation mode may be set in which new information that is not provided to the player on the display screen shown in FIG. 382(a) (the display screen for the normal reserve acquisition presentation) (for example, information indicating that when the current special chart variation period ends, no period will be set in which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired) can be provided to the player. In addition, the game may be configured to clearly inform the player that it would be better to actually acquire the special chart 2 reservation (for example, the time-saving state will end and the player will not be able to newly acquire the special chart 2 reservation) by executing additional effects using sounds output from the pachinko machine 10 or light-emitting means (LEDs, etc.) provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 390(a), the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation is determined based on the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation presentation and the number of special pattern 2 reserved that has been acquired, but the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation may be determined based on other information, for example, the presentation mode may be determined based on information regarding the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the special pattern 2 reserved that has been acquired.

In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not a favorable time-saving state will be set later based on the result of the special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result) and the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired, and to determine the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation based on the judgment result. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a time-saving final variation presentation with higher accuracy.

The notification target selection table 222ib is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode (number of notifications) of the notification effect (see FIG. 383(a)) for notifying the player of the number of jackpot play rights that have been acquired (including the number of jackpot play rights that will be acquired), and is referenced when the conditions for executing the notification effect are met and information for determining the presentation mode of the notification effect is identified (see S20108 in FIG. 394).

Here, the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be explained with reference to FIG. 390(b). FIG. 390(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 390(b), the notification target selection table 222ib specifies different reserved memory information to be the target of the notification performance (notification target) based on the result of reading the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (the position (memory area) where the reserved memory information corresponding to the small win type "small win C" for which an advantageous time-saving state is set is stored, and the number of reserved memory information corresponding to "small win C").

As described above, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for the special symbols, and each of these areas is configured to store the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 as reserved memory information in order starting from the first area. In other words, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to store reserved memory information in the order in which the second special symbol lottery is executed as reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol.

Therefore, by reading out the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is possible to determine the number of reserved memory information that will win the small prize C and the order in which the lottery for the second special pattern based on the reserved memory information that will win the small prize C will be executed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the first area (area 1) of the winning information storage area 223a stores reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol lottery to be executed next, followed by the second area (area 2), the third area (area 3), and the fourth area (area 4) in that order. In this tenth control example, the special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in the order in which the winning information was acquired, so that the reserved memory information stored in the first area (area 1) is the first reserved memory information stored, and the reserved memory information stored in the fourth area (area 2) is the last reserved memory information stored.

As shown in FIG. 390(b), the notification target selection table 222ib is configured to determine the small win C reservation to be notified in association with the final small win C reservation storage position and the number of small win C reservations in the reservation. The final small win C reservation storage position is determined by identifying the reservation memory information that wins the small win C among the reservation memory information corresponding to the multiple second special patterns stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and indicating the reservation area (first area to fourth area) in which the reservation memory information that was stored most recently among the identified reservation memory information is stored.

In other words, when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "1", it indicates that reserved memory information (small prize C reserved) for winning the small prize C is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "2", it indicates that the area in which the small prize C reserved was last stored is the second area (area 2) of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a. Note that the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small prize C reserved stored, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "2", there are cases where the small prize C reserved is stored in the first area (area 1) and cases where it is not stored.

Similarly, when the final small win C reserved storage position is "3", it indicates that the area in the winning information storage area 223a where the small win C reserved was last stored is the third area (area 3). Note that the final small win C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small win C reserved stored, and when the final small win C reserved storage position is "3", there are cases where the small win C reserved is stored in the first area (area 1) or the second area (area 2), and cases where it is not stored.

In addition, when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "4", it indicates that the area in which the small prize C reserved was last stored among the reserved areas in the winning information storage area 223a is the fourth area (area 4). Note that the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small prize C reserved stored, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "4", there are cases where a small prize C reserved is stored in each of the first area (area 1), second area (area 2), and third area (area 3), and cases where it is not stored.

As described above, the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small prize C reserved, and does not specify the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired (the total number of reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a). Therefore, whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is "1" or "4," if the small prize C reserved is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the reserved area, the final small prize C reserved storage position is specified as "1."

The reserved small prize C number indicates the number of reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C (reserved memory information that wins the small prize C) among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "1", there is one reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "2", there are two reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "3", there are three reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "4", there are four reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 390(b), the contents stipulated in the notification target selection table 222ib will be specifically explained. As shown in FIG. 390(b), when the final small win C reserve storage position is "1", "area 1 (first area)" is stipulated as the small win C reserve to be notified without specifying the number of small win C reserves in the reserve. In other words, when the final small win C reserve storage position is "1", since there are no other small win C reserves, the small win C reserve stored in "area 1 (first area)" is determined to be the one to be notified by the notification performance.

In addition, when the final small win C reserved storage location is "2" and the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "1", that is, when the small win C reserve is stored only in the "second area (area 2)" of the reserve areas, "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small win C reserve to be notified. In this case, since no small win C reserve is stored in "area 1 (first area)", the number of rights to play a big win game calculated based on the reserved memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" is determined as the number of notifications for the notification effect, rather than the number of rights to play a big win game that is based on the assumption that a small win C will be won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a notification effect that deviates between the number of rights to play a jackpot game notified by the notification effect and the number of rights to play a jackpot game that has actually been acquired (including the number of rights to play a jackpot game that is expected to be acquired), providing the player with an unexpected effect.

When the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "2", "Area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small win C to be notified. In this case, since the reserved small win Cs are stored in "Area 2 (second area)", it is possible to set the maximum number of rights to play the current big win game as the number to be notified in the notification effect.

Next, for a final small win C reserved storage location of "3", if the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "1", i.e., if the small win C reserve is stored only in the "third area (area 3)" of the reserve areas, "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small win C reserve to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small win C reserve is stored in "area 3 (third area)", it is possible to set the current maximum number of rights to play big win games as the announcement number for the announcement effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small prize C is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" and cases where a reserved small prize C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small prize C storage position is "3", it is confirmed that a reserved small prize C is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", the reserved small prize C is stored in either "area 2 (second area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 3 (third area)" or "area 1 (first area)".

Here, when the small win C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)" that is the target of the notification, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 2 (second area)" (the notification number including the number of rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, when the small win C reservation is stored in "area 1 (first area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" that is the target of the notification, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "3", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". To explain in detail, since the final reserved small prize C storage position is "3", it is confirmed that the reserved small prize C is stored in "area 3 (third area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "3", only the state where two reserved small prize Cs are stored in "area 2 (second area)" or "area 1 (first area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 3 (third area)" applies, so the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". In this case, since the small win C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. In this case, the small win C reservation is stored in an area after "area 1 (first area)", and the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 3 (third area)" is the maximum number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be notified by the notification effect at the current time. In this way, by configuring the notification effect to be able to notify a number different from the maximum number that can be notified as the number of execution rights of the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of jackpot games that will actually be executed (the number of consecutive wins).

Similarly, when the last small win C reserved storage location is "4" and the number of reserved small win Cs is "1", that is, when small win C reserveds are stored only in the "fourth area (area 4)" of the reserved areas, "area 4 (fourth area)" is specified as the small win C reserved to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small win C reserved is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)", it is possible to set the current maximum number of rights to play big win games as the notification number for the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small prize C is not stored in "area 3 (third area)" and cases where a reserved small prize C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small prize C storage position is "4", it is determined that a reserved small prize C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", the reserved small prize C is stored in either "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)", or "area 1 (first area)", which has reserved memory information stored before "area 4 (fourth area)".

Here, if the small win C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 3 (third area)" (the notification number including the number of rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small win C reservation is stored in "area 1 (first area)" or "area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "area 3 (third area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

When the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "3", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small win C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small win C is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" and cases where a reserved small win C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small win C storage position is "4", it is determined that a reserved small win C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "3", it means that a reserved small win C is stored in two areas out of "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)" and "area 1 (first area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)".

Here, if the small win C reservation is at least stored in "Area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 2 (second area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "Area 2 (second area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 1 (first area)" and "Area 3 (third area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "Area 2 (second area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "Area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "4", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". To explain in detail, since the final reserved small prize C storage position is "4", it is confirmed that the reserved small prize C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "4", only the state where three reserved small prize Cs are stored in "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)", and "area 1 (first area)", which have reserved memory information stored before "area 4 (fourth area)", applies, so the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". In this case, since the small win C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. In this case, the small win C reservation is stored in an area after "area 1 (first area)", and the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" is the maximum number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be notified by the notification effect at the current time. In this way, by configuring the notification effect to be able to notify a number different from the maximum number that can be notified as the number of execution rights of the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of jackpot games that will actually be executed (the number of consecutive wins).

Next, referring to FIG. 389(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 389(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(b)) in that it is provided with a status storage area 223ia, a time-saving final fluctuation flag 223ib, and an execution flag 223ic. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and their description will be omitted.

The tenth control example is also different from the seventh control example in that the types of information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are increased. Specifically, the tenth control example is configured to be able to execute a notification effect for notifying the player of at least a portion of the number of rights to play a jackpot game that has already been acquired, and is configured to notify the number of rights to play a jackpot game based on reserved memory information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia. The winning information storage area 223a is configured to store information indicating that the reserved memory information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia is the subject of notification.

By configuring it in this way, even if the second special pattern lottery is executed and the storage area of the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a shifts, it is possible to easily determine which reserved memory information is the subject of notification.

In this tenth control example, when a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the number of rights to play a jackpot game, a new notification effect is not executed until a special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that is the subject of the notification effect is executed, so that the player believes that all of the rights to play a jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those to be acquired) have been notified by the notification effect.

In this way, in order to control so that a new notification effect is not executed until a special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that is the target of the notification effect is executed, the system is configured to determine whether the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a contains information indicating the target of the notification effect. This makes it easy to determine the end timing of the notification effect.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the system is configured to restrict the execution of a new notification effect during the execution period of the notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to allow a new notification effect to be executed. In this case, for example, when the number of execution rights for a jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those to be acquired) and that have not been notified by a notification effect exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), it is determined that an additional execution condition has been met, and a new notification effect can be executed regardless of whether a notification effect is being executed or not.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the number of execution rights for jackpot games that are not notified by the notification effect from increasing, which can cause the player to lose interest in the notification effect and reduce the effect of the presentation. In addition to the condition that is met based on the number of execution rights for jackpot games that have been acquired (including those to be acquired) that have not been notified by the notification effect, the additional execution condition may be, for example, a condition that is met when it is determined that the information contained in the reserved memory information contains a predetermined number (e.g., two pieces) of specific information (e.g., information indicating that a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be executed, or information indicating that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game will be a game state advantageous to the player).

Furthermore, the notification mode for notifying the player of the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) through the notification effect can be selected by the player. For example, when the player selects the first notification mode, all of the rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) are notified to the player. When the player selects the second notification mode, as in the tenth control example, a portion of the number of rights to play is randomly selected and notified to the player. When the player selects the third notification mode, only the minimum number of rights to play, that is, the result of whether or not the player has the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired), may be notified to the player. In this case, when the first notification mode is selected, a new notification effect is executed so that the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) that is notified through the notification effect increases by acquiring a new special chart 2 reservation.

The state storage area 223ia is a storage area for temporarily storing information included in the state command output from the main control device 110. By reading out the information stored in this information storage area 223a, the currently set game state and its type (advantageous time-saving state, unfavorable time-saving state) can be specified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Furthermore, the information storage area 223a is provided with a storage area capable of storing information on the currently set game state and a past storage area capable of storing information on game states previously set. The past storage area has a storage area (first past storage area to third past storage area) capable of storing information on up to three previous game states, and when a state command indicating a change in the game state is received from the main control device 110, information corresponding to the received state command is stored in the storage area, information previously stored in the storage area is shifted to the first past storage area, information stored in the first past storage area is shifted to the second past storage area, information stored in the second past storage area is shifted to the third past storage area, and information stored in the third past storage area is erased.

In this way, by configuring the game state that was previously set to be temporarily stored, it is possible to execute effects that correspond to the transitions between game states multiple times, or effects that correspond to game states that were previously set, so a wide variety of effects can be provided to the player.

The time-saving final change flag 223ib is a flag for indicating the special pattern change period for executing the time-saving final change performance, and is set to on when a special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern change period for executing the time-saving final change performance is executed.

In this tenth control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, so during the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, the game state (normal state) is one in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation, so the time-saving final change flag 223ib is set to ON when the special pattern change immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met is executed, and is set to OFF when the special pattern change immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met is stopped and displayed.

The executed flag 223ic is a flag to indicate that a notification effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the notification effect is executed. It is set to OFF when a special pattern change corresponding to the pending memory information that is the subject of the notification effect is executed (when a corresponding special pattern change change effect is set). In this tenth control example, it is configured so that a new notification effect is not executed while the executed flag 223ic is set to ON.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 391 to FIG. 393, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) is replaced with a special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 391), the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) is replaced with a special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (see FIG. 392), and the update process 7 (see FIG. 319) is replaced with an update process 10 (see FIG. 393), but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. Note that, for the parts where detailed description of the same elements as those described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment is omitted, the contents described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are applied. Furthermore, the technical ideas described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and in each embodiment naturally apply to this tenth control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and in each embodiment naturally apply to this tenth control example.

First, referring to FIG. 391, the special pattern change process 10 (S10154) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process 10 (S10154). This special pattern change process 10 (S10154) is executed during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 10 (S10154), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S10201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and includes the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during which the jackpot game is in progress (round game period), and the grace period (ending period) until the round game period ends and the next lottery (variation) of a new special symbol begins.

To determine whether or not a jackpot is currently being won, specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. If it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol is currently being won (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot, i.e., if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to on (set to off) (S10201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S10202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S10202: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S10206). After the special pattern 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), then since there are currently no reserved balls of the second special pattern that would initiate the fluctuation (lottery), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), this process for executing the special pattern variation is terminated since there are currently no reserved balls of the first special pattern that would initiate the variation (lottery).

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10213). After the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, the process of the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) and the process of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S10202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b has elapsed (S10211). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S10215: No), that is, if the current time is during the change period of the special pattern, the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the change time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10215: Yes), a display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10252) described later with reference to FIG. 392. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the tenth control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first pattern display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stopped pattern for a predetermined period in this way, unlike when the changing pattern is displayed for an instant, the player can be sure to recognize the content of the first pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In the tenth control example, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (fixed period) during which the stopped state of the first pattern described above is displayed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if a flashing display is performed in which the lit state and the off state are repeated to indicate that the first pattern is changing, then a period longer than the period of one lit display when the flashing display is performed (for example, 0.2 seconds) can be set as the fixed period described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily determine whether the first pattern is changing or stopped (fixed).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol (the current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot in progress flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special symbol determination command is set (S10221), and the process ends.

In other words, in the tenth control example, as explained in the process of S10220, when a special symbol is won as a jackpot, the time-saving state is configured to end at a timing between the end of the variation of the special symbol (the end of the final display of the first symbol) and the start of the jackpot game. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of a special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the tenth control example described above, the time-saving state may end at the start of the variation of the special symbol that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special symbol is displayed stationary (the timing when the final display starts). In addition, the time-saving state may end at the start of the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot, or a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the start of the round game when the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning a jackpot with a special symbol (the timing for establishing the time-saving end condition that is established when a jackpot with a special symbol is won) may be configured to be preset to only one of the multiple timings mentioned above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at a different timing depending on the type of jackpot won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol starts to change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state has ended (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state has been set, or whether the time-saving state has ended because a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation display (changing display) of the third symbol that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed when the time-saving state ends, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by setting different times for the time-saving end conditions to be met for each of the multiple jackpot types (time to end the time-saving state when a jackpot is won), it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol based on the time-saving state end timing. Note that, as part of the times for the time-saving end conditions to be met that are set for each of the multiple jackpot types, a time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be set that notifies the player that the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol this time is a jackpot when the player identifies the time when the time-saving state has ended, in other words, the time-saving state ends only when the time-saving end condition that is met due to winning a jackpot is met.

By configuring it in this way, you can know when the time-saving state ends and quickly find out that you've won the jackpot, lengthening the period during which you can feel superior. To further enhance this effect, it's a good idea to configure the end of the time-saving state for the jackpot described above to be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special pattern fluctuation is executed to when the special pattern fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10218 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). If it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is a small win (S10222: Yes), the small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.

As explained above, the special symbol variation process 10 (S10104 in FIG. 391) of the tenth control example is configured to determine whether the selection (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met (processing of S10204 in FIG. 391) in priority over whether the selection (variation) conditions for the first special symbol are met. This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, is variable (easy to vary) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is non-variable (hard to vary) when the normal state is set, making the second special symbol more difficult to vary (draw) than the first special symbol.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the conditions for selecting (changing) the first special pattern and the conditions for selecting (changing) the second special pattern are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control unit 110), the first special pattern will begin to change in preference to the second special pattern, which is more difficult to change (select), causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is favorable to the player (to make it easier to win a small prize) than the lottery (variation) for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the lottery (variation) conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control device 110), the first special symbol begins to vary in preference to the second special symbol, which is less likely to vary (draw), causing a problem of greater discomfort.

In contrast, in the tenth control example, when executing the process to start the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selection (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the tenth control example) that has a higher added value for the player (the probability of winning a small prize is higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is difficult to actually execute the selection (variation)) are determined with priority (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 392, the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251). As shown in FIG. 392, the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is configured to execute the update process 10 (S8272) before setting the start of the special symbol change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the special symbol change starts.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is executed, it is first determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201). If it is determined in the process of S8201 that a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A (S8271), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win, i.e., whether a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209). If it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209: Yes), the type of small win is determined by referring to the small win type selection 10 table 202if (see FIG. 387) (S8273), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win of the special pattern is not set, i.e., a miss of the special pattern is set (S8209: No), the process of S8273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

In the process of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203). Next, the current game state is identified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the identified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the data table contained in the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308(a)) read in the process of S8252 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S8207), and update process 10 is executed (S8272). A detailed explanation of update process 10 (S8272) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393. Then, the start of the special symbol change is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of the stop pattern indicating the result of this special symbol change, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to execute update process 10 (S8272) before the process of S8252 in FIG. 392 is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns for the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent a determination as to whether or not a jackpot determination for a special symbol lottery has been executed during the time-saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

Figure 319 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 10 (S8272). In this update process 10 (S8272), as shown in Figure 319, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving end condition has been met, and a process is executed to end the time-saving state based on the determination result (a process to clear the values of various counters referenced when determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met).

When update process 10 (S8272) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving period is currently in progress (S10601). In the process of S10601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving period is not in progress (S10601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving period is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, a remaining time-saving count command is set (S10603) indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game status is set to the normal status (S10605), and then a status command indicating that the current game status is the normal status is set (S10607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (see FIG. 392).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 10th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 394 to FIG. 395, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. This tenth control example is different from the seventh control example described above in that the reserved ball number command process 10 (see FIG. 394) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (see FIG. 395) are executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. In addition, for the parts where the detailed description of the same elements as those described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment is omitted, the contents described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are applied. In addition, the technical ideas described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are naturally applied to this tenth control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are also naturally applied to this tenth control example.

First, referring to FIG. 394, the reserved ball number command process 10 (S20101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number command process 10 (S20101).

When the reserved ball count command process 10 (S20101) is executed, it is first determined whether the executed flag 223ic is on (S20102). If it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is on (S20102: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is not on (S20102: No), the reserved information is extracted from the command currently received from the main control device 110, and the corresponding value is stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b or special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203b1) (S20103).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104). If it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is not 4 (S20104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104: Yes), the reserved memory information of the second special pattern is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S20105). Then, it is determined whether the reserved memory information read out contains reserved memory information corresponding to the small win C (S20106). If it is determined that the reserved memory information read out does not contain information corresponding to the small win C (S20106: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S20106, if it is determined that there is information corresponding to a small win C from the reserved memory information read in the process of S20105 (S20106: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the second time-saving state (S20107). If it is determined that the current game state is in the second time-saving state (S20107: Yes), the reserved small win C to be notified is determined from the notification target selection table 222ib (see FIG. 390(b)) (S20108), and the process proceeds to S20109. On the other hand, in the process of S20107, if it is determined that the current game state is not in the second probability change state (S20107: No), the last obtained reserved small win C is determined to be the target for notification (S20112), and the process proceeds to S20109.

In the process of S20109, the display mode showing the consecutive win count corresponding to the storage position of the reserved small win C determined in the process of S20108 or S20112 is determined (S20109), and the notification target information is added to the winning information storage area 223a (S20110). Then, the execution completion flag 223ic is set to ON (S20111), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 395, the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (S14994) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (S14994).

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 10 (S14994) is executed, it is first determined whether the game state is in the time-saving state (S19551). If it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving state (S19551: No), the processes of S19552 to S19555 are skipped and the process moves to S19556. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving state (S19551: Yes), it is determined whether the current change is the final change in the time-saving state (S19552). If it is determined that the current change is not the final change in the time-saving state (S19552: No), the processes of S19553 to S19555 are skipped and the process moves to S19556.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S19552 that the current change is the final change of the time-saving state (S19552: Yes), the time-saving state is read from the state storage area 223ia (S19554). Then, it is determined whether the read time-saving state is the second time-saving state (S19554). The effect mode is determined by referring to the read final change effect selection table (see FIG. 390(a)) (S19555), and the processing proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read game state is not the second time-saving state (S19554: No), the processing of S19555 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S19556.

Next, it is determined whether the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556). If it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556: Yes), it is determined whether the current target variation is subject to notification (S19557). If it is determined that the current target variation is subject to notification (S19557: Yes), the executed flag 223ic is set to off (S19558), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S19559), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S19556 that the execution flag 223ic is not on (S19556: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S19557 that the current target change is not subject to notification (S19557: No), the processing of S19559 described above is executed and this processing ends.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 396 to Fig. 405. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured to be able to win a small prize in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (is a miss), as in the above-mentioned seventh control example, and has a playability (so-called one-type two-type) in which a big prize game can be executed by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game executed based on the small prize winning.

The pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that the player is allowed to choose between a game (left-hand play) for executing a first special symbol lottery and a game (right-hand play) for executing a second special symbol lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and that the playability of the time-saving state is different between when the time-saving state is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery and when the time-saving state is set based on the result of the second special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery during the normal state, so that the left-handed play aiming to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous play method for the player during the normal state. When the time-saving state is set, the game board 13 is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, so that the right-handed play aiming to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous play method for the player.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above is configured so that a game method that is advantageous to the player is predefined according to the set game state, and the player plays in accordance with that game method. This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game, but there is a problem in that the player becomes bored with the game because the player is forced to play in a predefined game method.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is configured so that, when the normal state is set, the player can select between a game aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery (left-hand play) and a game aiming to execute the second special symbol lottery (right-hand play). By configuring it in this way, the player can be allowed to select the game method, making it possible to play in a variety of game methods. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, when a left-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a first special symbol lottery to be executed, and when a right-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a second special symbol lottery to be executed, the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired is approximately the same, but the process of acquiring the number of game balls (number of prize balls) equal to that expected value is different. To put it simply, when a left-handed play is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once a time-saving state is set, it becomes easier for that time-saving state to continue, and when a right-handed play is executed, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state and harder for that time-saving state to continue than when a left-handed play is executed.

This configuration allows the player to choose the game that suits his/her convenience, which helps prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

First, referring to FIG. 396, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 396 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 396, the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 294) in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 (the area to the right of the variable display unit 80 where the game ball launched by right-hand play flows down) is different, and an indicator (display mode) for showing the player the game method is attached to the upper side of the game area formed on the game board 13. Note that the same components as those in the seventh control example described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 396, the upper area (above the variable display unit 80) of the game area (area through which the launched game ball can pass) formed on the game board 13 is marked with a turtle-like pattern k1 and a shark-like pattern k2, which correspond to the game methods (left-hand play and right-hand play). Pattern k1 corresponds to left-hand play, and is marked in the upper left position of the variable display unit 80, which allows the player to play left-hand play by launching the game ball aiming at pattern k1.

On the other hand, mode k2 corresponds to right-hand play, and is located in the upper right corner of the variable display unit 80, which allows the player to play right-hand play by shooting the game ball aiming at mode k2. This configuration allows the player to adjust the playing method by following the trajectory of the actual game ball that is shot, rather than by the operation content (amount of rotation) of the operating handle 22, and therefore provides the player with an easy-to-understand game.

It is also possible to use other methods for informing the player of the game method being played. For example, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the left side area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) of the game areas formed on the game board 13, where a game ball launched by a left-handed game can flow down, and a notification means may be provided that notifies the player that a left-handed game is being played based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Alternatively, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the right side area (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) where a game ball launched by a right-handed game can flow down, and a notification means may be provided that notifies the player that a right-handed game is being played based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.

Next, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 396. In this eleventh control example, a second ball entry port 1640 and a right second ball entry port 1641 are provided in the right area of the game board 13 as ball entry ports (starting ball entry ports) for executing the second special symbol lottery.

The second ball entrance 1640 is provided with an electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, and is configured to be able to create a state where it is easy to enter the game ball (high probability state of normal symbol) and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball (low probability state of normal symbol) depending on the set game state. Note that the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery are the same as the contents of the electric device control explained in each control example above, so detailed explanations are omitted.

On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that game balls shot by right-handed play can enter at a constant rate regardless of the set game state, and in this eleventh control example, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that the rate at which game balls shot by left-handed play enter the first ball entrance 64 is approximately the same. By configuring it in this way, the first special pattern lottery performed by left-handed play in the normal state and the second special pattern lottery performed by right-handed play can be performed at approximately the same frequency, so that no matter which game method the player selects, the player can play without feeling uncomfortable.

When the time-saving state is set, right-hand play is used to make it easier to get the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 by playing right-hand, and a normal symbol lottery based on the high probability state of the normal symbol and a normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric device 1640a are executed, so that right-hand play is an advantageous playing method for the player during the time-saving state. Note that the details of the normal symbol lottery based on the high probability state of the normal symbol and the normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric device 1640a are the same as those in the seventh control example described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, in the lower right area of the game board 13, there are disposed a V winning device 1650 which opens during a small win game, and a variable winning device 1065 which opens during a big win game. This V winning device 1650 has the same contents as the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and the variable winning device 1650 has the same contents as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to Figures 398 to 401. The pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and part of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and part of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, but otherwise is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 398, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 398(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 395(a), the ROM 202 of this control example differs from the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) in that the 1st win random number 7 table 202fa is replaced by the 1st win random number 11 table 202ja, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff is replaced by the small win type selection 11 table 202jf, the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh is replaced by the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh, and the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi is replaced by the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ii, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. For ease of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted in FIG. 385(a), but the illustration is omitted except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first winning random number 11 table 202ja differs from the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) described above in that it has a special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 instead of the special pattern 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 that is referenced when the second special pattern is selected, but is otherwise identical. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 399(a). FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 is a data table that is referenced when a winning lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is performed.

Specifically, of the possible range of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 999", a "big win" is defined for the range "0 to 4", and a "small win" is defined for the value "5 to 54". In other words, in this 11th control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for special chart 2 is approximately 1/200 (5/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 1/20 (50/1000).

The small prize type selection 11 table 202jf is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of small prize that will be set if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). This small prize type selection 11 table 202jf differs from the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the selection ratio of the specified small prize type has been changed, but is otherwise the same. A detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 399(b), the small win type selection 11 table 202jf will be explained. FIG. 399(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 11 table 202jf. For the acquired small win type counter C5 value in the range of "0 to 4", "small win A (jackpot A when V passes)" is specified, and for the range of "5 to 99", "small win B (jackpot B when V passes)" is specified.

Time-saving random number 11 table 202jh is a data table referenced in the time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) executed in the special pattern lottery, and differs from the above-mentioned time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)) in that the judgment value corresponding to the time-saving winning is different, but otherwise it is the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh will be explained with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh stipulates the judgment value for the time-saving winning judgment only for the normal game state (low probability state of special and normal patterns), and the judgment value for the time-saving winning is stipulated for the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 from "900 to 949". In other words, since the number of judgment values that are judged to be time-saving winnings is 50 for the 1000 possible values of the first winning random number counter C1, the probability of winning the time-saving winning during the normal state is 1/20 (50/1000). Note that, as shown in FIG. 400(a), time-saving winning is not possible in game states other than the normal state. However, without being limited to this, the game may be configured so that the time-saving feature can be won with a low probability (for example, 1/1000) even in game states other than the normal state.

The time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state that is set when the time-saving is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in correspondence with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. In this 11th control example, it is configured so that different time-saving types are selected when the time-saving is won in the first special pattern lottery and when the time-saving is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji will be explained with reference to FIG. 400(b). FIG. 400(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji. As shown in FIG. 400(b), the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji specifies the type of special pattern that won the time-saving and the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies the time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type, and whether or not a time-saving limit is set.

Specifically, if the time-saving type is won in the first special symbol lottery, time-saving A11 is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A, the time-saving end condition is specified in which the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time-saving limit is set to "none." In other words, the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time-saving counter 203h has been executed 200 times.

On the other hand, if the time-saving type is won in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving B11 is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving B, a time-saving end condition is specified in which the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time-saving limit is set to "Yes." In other words, the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time-saving counter 203h is executed 200 times, and when the number of times the time-saving state is set consecutively reaches a predetermined number (10 times), the time-saving limit is reached and the normal state is set.

Therefore, if the time-saving lottery is won in the special pattern lottery, the first special pattern lottery, which does not have a time-saving limit set, is configured to be able to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to choose between playing left-handed to execute a jackpot lottery and a time-saving lottery that is advantageous to the player, or playing right-handed to execute a jackpot lottery, a small jackpot lottery, and a time-saving lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, providing the player with the fun of choosing a play method.

Returning to FIG. 398(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example will be explained. FIG. 398(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents defined in the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 398(b), this eleventh control example is the same as the RAM 203 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(b)) except that a time-saving limit count counter 203ja has been added. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving limit counter 203ja is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is configured to be able to measure the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession (the number of normal consecutive settings) without setting the low probability state of the normal pattern except during a jackpot game, and is configured to be able to execute a process (time-saving limit process) that forcibly sets the low probability state of the normal pattern even if the condition for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established when the number of normal consecutive settings reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time-saving limit is reached), thereby suppressing the excessive consecutive setting of a game state (first probability change state) that is advantageous to the player.

When the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is selected by the second special pattern lottery while the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the initial value is set to "10" (see S18182 in FIG. 402). The counter value is decremented each time the normal consecutive count is updated (see S13104 in FIG. 405), and the counter value after decrement is referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (see S13107 in FIG. 405). When the time-saving limit is reached or the type of jackpot currently being executed is one that sets the low probability state of the normal pattern, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is cleared to 0.

The information indicating the value of this time-saving limit counter 203ja is set as a status command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 during the jackpot end process.

As described above, in this eleventh control example, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja for measuring the number of normal consecutive settings is set to the number of normal consecutive settings until the time-saving limit is reached, and the counter value is subtracted each time the normal consecutive setting number is subtracted. However, without being limited to this, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja may be set to "1" when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and thereafter, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja may be incremented by 1 each time the normal consecutive setting number is updated, and it may be determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja after the increment is a value indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached (for example, 10), and if the result of this determination indicates that the time-saving limit has been reached, the time-saving limit process may be executed.

When configured in this way, for example, even if the condition for establishing (reaching) the time-saving limit is changed when a second special condition (e.g., winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period during which a high probability state of a special pattern is continuously set, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving limit has been reached simply by comparing the established condition (reaching condition) after the change with the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja.

When the special condition in the above example is established, the condition for the time-saving limit may be changed to be more difficult to establish than before the change, or may be changed to be easier to establish than before the change. In addition, when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, it may be configured to immediately determine whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit. Even if the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, it may be configured to determine whether the condition for the time-saving limit count counter 203ja satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the normal pattern is prevented from immediately ending when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, and the special pattern lottery is guaranteed to win the jackpot at least once during the period when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing.

In this eleventh control example, as the trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, a trigger for setting a value in the time-saving limit count counter 203ja (a trigger for setting the time-saving limit) and a trigger for not setting it (a trigger for not setting the time-saving limit) are provided. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger sets the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, even if a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is updated (decremented) or not updated (decremented) depending on the trigger of the jackpot game. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not updated even if a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game played based on the jackpot win, and when a small jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is updated (decremented) when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game played based on the small jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it more disadvantageous to the player when an opportunity that is difficult to achieve as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) is more disadvantageous to the player than an opportunity that is easy to achieve (winning a small jackpot). This makes it possible to make the player eager to play while aiming to win a jackpot during the time-saving state in which a small jackpot is more likely to be won. It is also possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay experience in which the player aims to achieve an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is difficult to achieve during the period until an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is easy to achieve has been executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), and ultimately hopes that an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is easy to achieve will not be achieved.

In this eleventh control example, a bonus is given in the event that an unlikely opportunity for triggering a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) occurs, in which the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an unlikely opportunity for triggering a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) occurs, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja may be increased or reset to its initial value.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 401, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example differs from the RAM 223 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311 (b)) in that it is provided with a remaining time reduction counter 223ja and a time reduction limit flag 223jb. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The remaining time-saving count counter 223ja is a counter that is set to a value corresponding to the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja set in the main control device 110, and is intended to indicate the period until the time-saving limit is reached (the remaining number of times that the normal high probability state can be set consecutively).

This remaining time reduction counter 223ja is set to a value (10) corresponding to a command that includes information about the type of time reduction that sets the time reduction limit in the limit information update process that is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process executed in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the already set value is decremented by 1 when a time reduction limit count command is received.

The value of this remaining time reduction counter 223ja is referenced when executing the process to determine the presentation mode for each game state. Then, in the state command process of the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined that a command indicating that a low probability state for normal patterns has been set has been received in the game state update process executed when a game state command is received, the value is cleared (set) to 0.

The time-saving limit flag 223jb is a flag for indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached, and is set to on when a time-saving limit reached command is received in the limit information update process, which is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process executed in the command determination process, to indicate that the time-saving limit has been reached.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 402 to Fig. 405. This eleventh control example is significantly different from the seventh control example described above in that it is configured to be able to set an upper limit to the period during which a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player continues across big win games.

First, the contents of time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288) will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288). As shown in FIG. 402, time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288) adds a process to time-saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) described above, in which if it is determined that a time-saving win has been made (S18105: Yes), it determines whether the current time-saving win is a time-saving win in the second special pattern lottery (S18181), and if it is determined that the time-saving win is a time-saving win in the second special pattern lottery (S18181: Yes), it sets the value of time-saving limit count counter 203ja to "10" (S18182).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the time-saving limit only when the time-saving lottery is won in the normal state and the special pattern type that wins the time-saving lottery is the second special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 403, the processing contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574) will be explained. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574). This jackpot control process 11 (S11574) differs from the jackpot control process in each of the control examples described above in that jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed at the end timing of the ending performance, but otherwise is the same, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 404, the processing contents of jackpot end process 11 (S11651) will be explained. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of jackpot end process 11 (S11651). This jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed when the jackpot game ends, and executes processing for updating the time-saving limit, and processing for determining the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends and setting the game state according to the determined contents.

When the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed, first, the time-saving limit update process is executed (S13001). The details of this time-saving limit update process (S13001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 405. Next, information indicating the game state to be set after the jackpot end is stored in the game state storage area (S13002), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed is determined (S13003), the determined number of time-saving times is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S13004), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (S13005), a state command corresponding to the game state after the jackpot and the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203ja is set (S13006), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the time-saving limit update process (S13001), which is one process within the jackpot end 11 process (see S11651 in FIG. 404), will be described. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process (S13001). In this time-saving limit update process (S13001), a process is executed to set a high probability state for normal symbols based on the type of jackpot or time-saving type that has been won, and a process is executed to set an upper limit value for which a high probability state for normal symbols can be set consecutively, and to update the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value.

In the time-saving limit update process (S13001), first, the jackpot type of the currently active special symbol is read (S13101). Next, it is determined whether the currently active jackpot type read in the process of S13101 is a jackpot type in which a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S13102). If it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S13102: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game based on a small jackpot win (S13103).

In the process of S13103, the trigger for executing a jackpot game is determined by information based on the past game status stored in the game status storage area 203g. If the process of S13103 determines that the jackpot game is based on a small jackpot win (S13103: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104). If the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of the jackpot win is a low probability state (S13104: No), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203 is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13104, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is decremented by 1 (S13106), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is 0 or not (S13107). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is 0 (S13107: Yes), the upper limit value that can be set for the high probability state of consecutive normal patterns has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag is set to ON (S13108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S13107, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is not 0 (S13107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As explained above, in this eleventh control example, when the normal state is set, the player is allowed to select between a game aiming to execute a first special symbol lottery (left-hand play) and a game aiming to execute a second special symbol lottery (right-hand play). By configuring in this way, the player can be allowed to select the game method, making it possible to play in a variety of game methods. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, when a left-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a first special symbol lottery to be executed, and when a right-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a second special symbol lottery to be executed, the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired is approximately the same, but the process of acquiring the number of game balls (number of prize balls) equal to that expected value is different. To put it simply, when a left-handed play is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once a time-saving state is set, it becomes easier for that time-saving state to continue, and when a right-handed play is executed, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state and harder for that time-saving state to continue than when a left-handed play is executed.

This configuration allows the player to choose the game that suits his/her convenience, which helps prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, when left-hand play is performed in the normal state, the player is allowed to play a game aiming to win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery and a game aiming to win the time-saving feature, and when right-hand play is performed, the player is allowed to play a game aiming to win a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving feature in the special pattern lottery. In other words, in terms of ease of playing a jackpot game, right-hand play is configured to make it easier for the player to play a jackpot game than left-hand play. On the other hand, it is configured to be possible to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the time-saving feature is won in the first special pattern lottery performed by left-hand play than when the time-saving feature is won in the second special pattern lottery performed by right-hand play. By configuring in this way, the player can be provided with the fun of choosing a play method.

In this eleventh control example, an upper limit (time-saving limit) can be set on the number of times the high probability state of normal symbols is set in succession. This makes it possible to prevent excessive succession of game states advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, a determination is made as to whether or not to set a time-saving limit depending on the trigger for setting the high probability state of normal symbols. In other words, it is possible to create cases where a time-saving limit is set and cases where it is not set, depending on the trigger for setting the high probability state of normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play in the hope that a time-saving state will be set without a time-saving limit being set.

In addition, even when the time-saving limit is set, it is possible to create cases where the number of times the high probability state of normal symbols is set consecutively is updated or not updated depending on the trigger for executing a jackpot game. This allows the player to play in the hope that a jackpot game will be executed without updating the number of times remaining until the time-saving limit is reached.

In this eleventh control example, a configuration is used that allows an upper limit (time-saving limit) to be set on the number of times that a high probability state of a normal pattern is set consecutively, but a different configuration may be used as a function to prevent a game state advantageous to the player from being set consecutively. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a high probability state of a special pattern, it may be configured to allow an upper limit (probability limit) to be set on the number of times that a high probability state of a special pattern is set consecutively.

Furthermore, the upper limit for the number of times the "high probability state of special symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) and the upper limit for the number of times the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive regular symbol settings) may be configured to be updated and managed separately. For example, in a state in which it has been decided that the "first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" which is a game state advantageous to the player will be set, if the number of consecutive special symbol settings reaches the upper limit (if the probability limit is reached), a "time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of special symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of special symbols" may be set, and if the number of consecutive regular symbol settings reaches the upper limit (if the time-saving limit is reached), a "second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of normal symbols" may be set.

Furthermore, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set consecutively (number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) is configured to be greater than the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set consecutively (number of times of consecutive normal symbol settings). In addition, during the special symbol high probability period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, the system may be configured so that more prize balls can be awarded to the player in the first period during which the first probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set than in the second period during which the second probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set and the first probability state is set, the first period will first be set until the time-saving limit is reached, and then the second period will be set.

As a result, it is possible to execute a first game, which can award many prize balls to a player, for a first period, and then execute a second game, which is difficult to award prize balls to, for a second period. This makes it possible to prevent the first game from being executed excessively in succession, resulting in an excessive number of prize balls being awarded to a player.

Furthermore, the length of the first period during which the first game can be played can be the period from when the first probability variable state is set until the time-saving limit is reached (until the second probability variable state is set) (10 jackpot wins), and the length of the second period during which the second game can be played can be the period from when the second probability variable state is set until the probability variable limit is reached (30 jackpot wins). In this way, by configuring the lengths of the first period and second period set within the special probability period to be configurable based on the number of jackpot wins, it becomes possible to manage the length of the period during which the special probability period is set.

More specifically, during the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, and the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds) executed when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period may be configured not to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed or the content of the jackpot game executed.

By configuring it in this way, the first period can be set to a length that corresponds to the period until 10 jackpot wins (number of times the special pattern changes) occur in a state with a high probability of a special pattern (jackpot probability of 30/1000).

In addition, during the second period in which the second probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery that is primarily executed is always constant (0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, and the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds played) that is executed when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (2 rounds). In other words, the length of the second period may be configured not to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation that is executed or the content of the jackpot game that is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the second period to a length corresponding to the period until 30 jackpot wins (number of times the special pattern changes) occur when the special pattern has a high probability of occurring (jackpot probability of 30/1000).

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the number of balls dispensed is increased by allowing a player to be awarded many prize balls during a first period, which is a portion of the special high probability period, and the number of balls dispensed is reduced during a second period, which is the other period of the special high probability period, thereby suppressing the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed.

By configuring in this way, even if the appropriate increase in ball output that can be awarded during the specific period in which the special chart high probability period is set is configured to be biased toward the first period, in other words, even if an excessively large number of balls are awarded to the player when only the first period is considered, the increase in ball output during the entire special chart high probability period can be considered to be an appropriate increase in ball output, so that it is possible to perform a surprising ball output increase game for the player while preventing excessive balls from being awarded to the player as a result.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), the first probability state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends than if a jackpot is won in the second probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In other words, it may be possible to set a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, but which is likely to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won, and a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot, but which is unlikely to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, the game objectives that the player is expected to aim for can be varied depending on the game state that is set, which makes it easier to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

When the first probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be configured to be different depending on whether the probability limit is reached first, the time-saving limit is reached first, or the probability limit and time-saving limit are reached simultaneously.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same type of jackpot (for example, a first special jackpot that sets the first special state) is won, different game states can be set depending on the status of each limit being reached, making it easier to provide players with a variety of games.

In addition, by using the above-mentioned configuration, even if the rate at which the same game state (e.g., the first special probability state) is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased (will always be set) when none of the limits have been reached, it is possible to prevent a game state with a high set rate (e.g., the first special probability state) from being set continuously for a long period of time, making the game monotonous and reducing motivation to play.

Furthermore, it may be configured so that a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player can be set when the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached simultaneously. In other words, in the first probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, if the normal state is set based on the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit being reached simultaneously, a normal state (special normal state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, even if a trigger (each limit) that forcibly shifts the probability state of each symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state is established, if a special condition is established, it is possible to transition to a game state advantageous to the player.

This allows the player to simultaneously play a game in which the player hopes that the probability-changing limit or time-saving limit will not be reached and a game in which the player hopes that the limit will be reached at the same time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, when there are elements (limits) other than the jackpot type that was won that determine the game state (game situation) that will be set after the jackpot game ends, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to know in advance which of the various game states will be set after the jackpot game ends after the jackpot game of the same jackpot type is played.

In response to this, the presentation may be configured to differ based on the set game state, the number of remaining turns (remaining number of jackpots) until the special limit is reached, and the number of remaining turns (remaining number of jackpots) until the time-saving limit is reached.

This configuration makes it possible to predict future gameplay based on the content of the effects being executed, making it easier to provide players with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

In addition, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed when the second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the first probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot play ends, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that if a jackpot is won when the second probability variable state is set, the second probability variable state is always set after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, if the second probability variable state is set during the special pattern high probability period when the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set, that is, if a jackpot type is set in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot play ends when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or if the time-saving limit is reached due to the first probability variable state being set consecutively and the second probability variable state is forcibly set after the jackpot play ends (if the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing), the second probability variable state can be reliably set for the period until the probability variable limit is reached. Therefore, after a favorable play state (first probability variable state) that is favorable to the player is set, it is possible to easily and reliably set an unfavorable play state (second probability variable state) for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, in this case, the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won during the second high probability state may be configured to differ depending on the trigger for setting the second high probability state. For example, it may be configured so that when the second high probability state is set by high probability limit processing, it is easier to set a jackpot type that sets the second high probability state after the jackpot game ends than when the second high probability state is set based on the jackpot type.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, and a high probability state for special symbols is set after the jackpot play ends, the first probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is an advantageous play state that is advantageous to the player, will not be set until the probability limit is reached, and an excessively disadvantageous play to the player can be prevented from being played.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a high probability state for the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and a low probability state for the special symbol may be set in some cases when a jackpot is won. Also, in this first embodiment, a plurality of game states are settable, and games with different degrees of advantage can be played depending on the set game state. Specifically, the game states are configured so that the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, followed by the normal state in which a special state (special mode) is set (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and the normal state. However, this is not limited to this, and the game content executed in each game state may be different to vary the degree of advantage given to the player in each game state.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 406 to Fig. 438. In the above-mentioned 11th control example, during the period when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. In contrast, the 12th control example is different in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the given time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

In addition, in the 11th control example described above, the time-saving lottery was executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in this 12th control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and the player is granted a more advantageous benefit if one of the special symbols wins the time-saving lottery during the period from when the time-saving lottery is won for the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the variable display of that special symbol stops, compared to when only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time-saving lottery.

Details will be given later, but in this twelfth control example, if the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, the time-saving A state is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, a long (300 seconds) fluctuation time is set (time-saving winning fluctuation state), and if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus within the period until the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends (i.e., until the first special symbol, which indicates a time-saving bonus, is displayed stationary), the time-saving B state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, is set.

By configuring it in this way, if one special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the other special symbol will also win the time-saving feature, giving the player a special advantage. Therefore, when one special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the special symbol changes to indicate that a time-saving feature has been won, the player will be made to want to win the other special symbol as well, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type that can set a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends, the system is configured to execute a process to set the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage by continuing a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player's gambling spirit from increasing.

In addition, in a gaming machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a jackpot (or small jackpot) is won in one of the special symbol lotteries, the specification is generally such that only one of the following is executed: the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted); however, in this twelfth control example, the configuration is such that whether the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped is determined depending on the jackpot type (or small jackpot type). In other words, a jackpot type that forcibly stops (discards) the variable display of the other special symbol and a jackpot type that temporarily stops (interrupts) the variable display of the other special symbol are specified.

By configuring it in this way, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, and a game state disadvantageous to the player may be set by the stopped display of one special symbol, it is possible to prevent the setting of an unfavorable game state when a jackpot of a jackpot type that allows the variation of the other special symbols to be discarded, but if a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, the situation in which an unfavorable game state may be set continues. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols could be discarded, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Here, an overview of the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described. The probability of a big win for the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example is 1/50, which is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of winning the time-saving mode is also 1/50, which is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of a small win is also 1/50, but the small win lottery is only held for the second special symbol.

The details will be described later, but the jackpot type determined when a jackpot is won is determined by different tables (see Figures 410 and 411) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol, a 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is determined regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined according to the game state, as shown in Figure 411. As shown in Figure 411, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the normal state, a 100% jackpot A is set. In other words, in the normal state, the jackpot type determined when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same.

In addition, a small prize lottery is also held for the second special symbol, and if the small prize is won and the game ball enters the specific area 1650 during the small prize game, it will result in a big prize B or C, which are more advantageous than a big prize A, so it can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the change time of the first special symbol and the change time of the second special symbol are different in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbol) and the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol), and in the normal state, the change time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the change time of the second special symbol, so the first special symbol is more likely to stop first. In the time-saving state, the change time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the change time of the first special symbol, so the second special symbol is more likely to stop first.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal state, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed is reduced, preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage, and in the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from stopping before the second special symbol, which would put the player in a relatively disadvantageous gaming state, making it possible to provide a well-balanced game experience.

In addition, in the normal state, the change time of the second special symbol may be set to be shorter than the change time of the first special symbol, and in the time-saving state, the change time of the first special symbol may be set to be shorter than the change time of the second special symbol.

Here, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described. In this twelfth control example, a normal state (a state with a low probability of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (a state with a high probability of normal symbols) can be set as game states. There are two types of time-saving states: a time-saving state A, which ends when the special symbols have changed five times since the time-saving state was set, and a time-saving state B, which ends when the special symbols have changed 10,000 times since the time-saving state was set. When the time-saving state A is set, the probability of winning a big win (probability of winning a big win: 1/50) or a small win (probability of winning a small win: 1/50) in five special symbol lotteries is low at about 18%, while when the time-saving state B is set, the chance of winning a big win or a small win is almost 100%, so the time-saving state B is a more advantageous type of time-saving state for players than the time-saving state A.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the jackpot in the normal state, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends is only the time-saving A state. Also, when only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol wins the time-saving, the game state that is set is only the time-saving A state, and the time-saving B state is not set.

In this twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 414, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving winning state in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (300 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 416, during the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol (time-saving winning fluctuation state), an extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to execute the second special symbol lottery more frequently in the time-saving winning fluctuation state compared to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 411, if the second special symbol wins the jackpot during the time-saving winning variable state, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is determined, and the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving winning variable state, the time-saving B state is set.

By configuring it in this way, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, as many second special symbol lotteries as possible are executed within the period until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, making it possible to motivate the player to play in order to set the time-saving B state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the time-saving winning variable state, if the time-saving B state is set due to a big win (or small win) of the second special symbol or a time-saving winning, the variable display of the first special symbol that won the time-saving will continue, and if the first special symbol is displayed stationary, the set time-saving B state will be discarded and a new time-saving A state will be set. In other words, the time-saving B state will only continue for the period until the first special symbol is displayed stationary.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol that won the time-saving mode can be discarded, it becomes possible to play in the time-saving mode B until the time-saving limit described below is reached, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Note that the time-saving limit refers to a threshold value that causes the execution of a process to set a non-time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type that can set a time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends is won.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, even in the same time-saving B state, it is possible to provide the player with different gameplay aspects, namely a game aiming to discard the first special symbol and a game aiming to win a large number of prize balls by making consecutive wins until the time-saving limit is reached, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving winning change state is set when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, but this is not limited to the above, and the time-saving winning change state may also be set when the second special symbol wins the time-saving win. In this case, by configuring the time-saving winning change to vary depending on the type of special symbol, it is possible to provide a relatively advantageous time-saving winning change state and a relatively disadvantageous time-saving winning change state for the player depending on the type of special symbol, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the type of time-saving state that is set when only one of the first and second special symbols wins the time-saving feature is the time-saving A state, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set different types of time-saving states when only the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature and when only the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature. For example, when the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature, it is also possible to set the time-saving C state (for example, the number of time-saving times is 100), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state but less advantageous to the player than the time-saving B state.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 406. FIG. 406 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 406, the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example has the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned eleventh control example (see FIG. 396), and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twelfth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 407 to Fig. 416. This twelfth control example differs from the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is changed. The rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 407, the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in this 12th control example is different from the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the 1st win random number 11 table 202ja is replaced with the 1st win random number 12 table 202ka, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb, the 2nd win random number 7 table 202fc is replaced with the 2nd win random number 12 table 202kc, and the 2nd win random number 12 table 202kc is replaced with the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. The difference is that the round number 12 table 202kd is replaced with the small prize type selection 11 table 202jf, the small prize type selection 12 table 202kf is replaced with the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh, the time-saving star random number 12 table 202kh is replaced with the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji and the time-saving type selection 12 table 202ki is used, the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe and the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji have been deleted, and the small prize random number 12 table 202ke has been added, but otherwise it is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. It differs from the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that it adds a special chart 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka, a special chart 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb, a special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc, a special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd, a special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, a special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf, a time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg, and a time-saving limit reached flag 203kh. The rest of the configuration is the same as the above-mentioned eleventh control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 1 change time timer 203ka and the special symbol 2 change time timer 203kb are timers for timing the change time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When the change pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern is set. Whether or not the change time of each special symbol has ended is determined based on the timing results of the special symbol 1 change time timer 203ka and the special symbol 2 change time timer 203kb (see Y701 in FIG. 424 and Y901 in FIG. 433).

The special chart 1 temporary stop flag 2030kc is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of special chart 1 is stopped. When it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when it is set from the on state to the off state, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the variation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) whose lottery result is a jackpot other than the jackpot D is stopped (Y903 in FIG. 433), and is referred to in the first special pattern variation execution process 12 (see FIG. 235) and the first special pattern variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 424, Y708). If it is set to ON as a result of the reference, a process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device corresponding to the special pattern 1 in the same way as during variation. In other words, while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first pattern display device is in a state where the variation display is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the variation of the special pattern 1 has not been forcibly stopped by setting the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the first special symbol variation execution process 12 (see FIG. 423) (Y2801 in FIG. 423: Yes), the flag is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 423). Although detailed explanations and illustrations are omitted, the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON by executing the same process as in the case of a big win even when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a small win.

The special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special chart 2 is stopped. When it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when it is set from the on state to the off state, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the variation of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) that is the winning lottery result is stopped (Y703 in FIG. 424), and is referenced in the second special pattern variation in progress process 12 (see FIG. 432) and the second special pattern variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 43). Note that the contents referenced in this process are the same as the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special pattern variation in progress process 12 (see FIG. 432) (Y2901 in FIG. 432: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 432).

The special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol that is changing. This special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is set to ON when the change of the big win D or small win B is stopped for the second special symbol (see Y905 in FIG. 433 and Y932 in FIG. 435). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is ON while the first special symbol is changing, it is set to OFF (see Y722 in FIG. 425). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the first special symbol in accordance with the timing when the change of the big win D or small win B of the second special symbol stops first.

The special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is a flag that indicates that it is time to forcibly stop the second special pattern that is changing. This special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to ON when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature and the change display starts (Y405 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is ON while the second special pattern is changing (Y632 in FIG. 434). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the second special pattern in line with the timing when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature and the change starts.

The time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (i.e., the time-saving winning fluctuation state is in a fluctuating manner). This time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a time-saving winning mode (see Y403 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is displayed in a stopped manner and the time-saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 426), or when the second special symbol wins the big win D or small win B and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is canceled (see Y726 in FIG. 425). This allows the time-saving winning fluctuation state to be set in the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving winning mode to when the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends.

The time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is a flag for indicating that the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern has been set consecutively (number of consecutive normal pattern settings) has reached an upper limit, and is set to on when the number of consecutive normal pattern settings has reached an upper limit and the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to a low probability state.

Next, the contents stipulated in the 1st winning random number 12 table 202ka will be explained with reference to FIG. 409(a). FIG. 409(a) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents stipulated in the 1st winning random number 12 table 202ka. In this 12th control example, as shown in FIG. 409(a), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 18/900 (i.e., 1/50).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is not variable in any game state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set a high probability state of a special pattern (so-called high probability state) after the jackpot game ends when a specific jackpot type is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 409(b), the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc defined in the ROM 202 will be described. FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc in a schematic manner. The second winning random number 12 table 202kc is a data table in which the winning judgment value of the normal pattern is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal pattern, "0 to 2" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal pattern. Also, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, "0 to 149" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number 12 table 202kc are referenced to determine whether or not the normal pattern is a winning pattern.

Now, referring to FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, the electric device 1640a arranged in the right area of the game board 13 opens, allowing the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640.

Therefore, when the high probability state (time-saving state) of the normal pattern is set, the electric device 1640a opens more easily, and the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 more easily, so the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

Next, the contents of the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh will be explained with reference to FIG. 409(c). FIG. 409(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh. As shown in FIG. 409(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of winning the time-saving lottery for each special symbol is the same, and is 18/900 (1/50). Note that the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, and is configured not to be executed in the time-saving state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have the same probability of winning the time-saving feature, but this is not limited to this, and the second special symbol may be configured to have a higher or lower probability of winning the time-saving feature than the first special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, but this is not limited thereto, and the time-saving lottery may be executed even in the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the small prize random number 12 table 202ke will be described with reference to 409(d). Fig. 409(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the small prize random number 12 table 202ke. As shown in Fig. 409(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, the small prize lottery is executed only for the second special symbol. The probability of winning the small prize is 18/900 (1/50).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example is configured to execute a small prize lottery for the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the small prize lottery may also be executed for the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of winning the time-saving mode, and the probability of winning the small jackpot are all 1/50, but this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of winning the time-saving mode, and the probability of winning the small jackpot may all be configured to be different probabilities. For example, the probability of winning the jackpot may be 1/300, the probability of winning the time-saving mode 1/30, and the probability of winning the small jackpot 1/100.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb will be explained with reference to FIG. 410(a). FIG. 410(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. The jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb specifies the 12 table 202kb1 for special chart 1 jackpots and the 12 table 202kb2 for special chart 2 jackpots.

Figure 410(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. As shown in Figure 410(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot, 100% jackpot A is selected. Jackpot A is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot play are executed and the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot play ends. After the jackpot play of jackpot A ends, the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 5 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot type for the first special symbol is one type, but this is not limited to this, and multiple types of jackpot types may be set. Also, the jackpot type selected may be different depending on the game state.

Figure 411 is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. When a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the jackpot type is selected according to the game state set at the time of the jackpot win, the number of times the second special symbol has changed since the game state was changed, and the value of the first jackpot type counter CS2. The count of the number of changes is also reset, for example, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving B state and the time-saving B state is set again after the jackpot play ends.

First, when the game state is in the normal state, there are a non-time-saving winning change state and a time-saving winning change state. The non-time-saving winning change state is a state in which the time-saving winning change state flag 20kg is off, that is, the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is not displayed. The time-saving winning change state is a state in which the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on, that is, the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is being displayed. In the normal non-time-saving winning change state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, a 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is selected, and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 5 after the jackpot game ends. In the normal time-saving winning change state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is selected, and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10000 after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, in the normal state, the bonus given to the player differs depending on whether the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is on when the jackpot is won, preventing players who play games that only involve the second special symbol lottery from gaining an excessive advantage.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, in the normal state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, the jackpot A (or jackpot B) is selected 100%. However, this is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be selected from among multiple jackpot types according to the number of times the jackpot changes. For example, in the normal state, non-time-saving winning change state, either jackpot A or jackpot B may be selected, and from the 0th to 50th spins, jackpot A is more likely to be selected than jackpot B, and from the 51st spin onwards, jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot A. By configuring in this way, even if a losing win continues in the normal state, the jackpot type advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected, so that a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

Also, the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected during a specific period may be variable, such as jackpot A being more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 0 to 50 spins, jackpot B being more likely to be selected than jackpot A from 51 to 100 spins, and jackpot A being more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 101 to 150 spins. By configuring it in this way, periods that are advantageous to the player are periodically created, making it possible for the player to be interested in the number of times the second special symbol changes, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, there are time-saving states A and B, and in time-saving state A, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, there is a 50% chance that jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and a 50% chance that jackpot C (5R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected. In time-saving state B, the type of jackpot selected varies depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes, and from spin 0 to spin 50, a 100% chance that a jackpot (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and from spin 51 onwards, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and a 50% chance that a jackpot D (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected. Both jackpot B and jackpot D are types of jackpots that involve 10 rounds of jackpot play and a time-saving B state after the jackpot play ends, but they are different jackpot types in that if jackpot B is won, a process is executed to temporarily stop (interrupt) the first special symbol that is changing, and if jackpot D is won, a process is executed to forcibly stop (discard) the first special symbol that is changing. In other words, if the second special symbol is won a certain number of times, it becomes easier to discard the changing display of the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, even if the second special symbol continues to win but not win while the first special symbol that has been selected for the time-saving feature is being displayed in a changing state and there is little time left for the first special symbol to change, it becomes more likely that the change in the first special symbol can be discarded, which can increase the player's motivation to play when the second special symbol continues to win but not win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the type of jackpot likely to be selected is variable depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes only in the time-saving B state, but this is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot likely to be selected may also be variable depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes in the time-saving A state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot B is selected 100% of the time from 0 to 50 spins, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that different jackpot types can be won even from 0 to 50 spins. For example, the jackpot B may be selected 80% of the time and the jackpot D may be selected 20% of the time. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting that he or she may win the jackpot D and cancel the variable display of the first special pattern even during the period when the time-saving B state has just been set, and the fun of playing the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected is switched between "0 to 50 spins" and "51 spins and after." However, this is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected in a specific period may be changed, such as, for example, jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot D from 0 to 50 spins, jackpot D is more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 51 to 100 spins, and jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot D from 101 to 150 spins. By configuring in this way, periods that are advantageous to the player are periodically generated, making it possible for the player to be interested in the number of times the second special symbol changes, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the contents of the small win type selection 12 table 202kf will be explained with reference to FIG. 412. FIG. 412 is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 12 table 202kf. As shown in FIG. 412, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, two types of small win types are specified. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the small win lottery is executed only for the second special pattern.

Small win A is a type of small win that is selected 80% of the time when a small win is won, and if the specific area 1650a is passed (V passing) during a small win game, a big win C (5R time-saving B big win) is awarded. Details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, depending on the type of small win, the display of the first special symbol changes during execution may be forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted), and when a small win A is executed, a process of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the display of the first special symbol changes during execution is performed.

On the other hand, small win B is a type of small win that is selected 20% of the time when a small win is won, and if a V is passed during a small win game, a big win B (10R time-saving B big win) is awarded. When small win B is executed, a process is executed to forcibly stop (discard) the fluctuation of the first special pattern that is being executed. Note that, although there are two types of small wins in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, this is not limited to this, and three or more types of small wins may be provided.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd will be explained with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd. The fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd specifies a fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd1 for normal state, a fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2 for time-saving state, and a fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 for time-saving winning fluctuation state, and each fluctuation pattern table is referenced according to the game state.

Figure 414 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, which is defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, the variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, for a pattern type of "first special pattern," if the win/loss judgment result is "miss," a "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds (7,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139," a "false miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "140 to 149," "various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds (40,000 milliseconds) are specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 179," and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "180 to 189." In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "win", a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds (40,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "0 to 29" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "30 to 189" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds (140,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "190 to 198" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "time-saving win", a "long time-saving win" with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, for the "second special pattern" symbol type, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "miss", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0-198" and a "long miss" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds), if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "time-saving win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0-198" and a "time-saving win" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds), and if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "big win, small win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0-198" and a "long win" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example is configured so that in the normal state, a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. This is because the small prize lottery is executed only for the second special symbol, and when a small prize is won, the time-saving B state, which is the most advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the game efficiency is reduced, and it is prevented that players who play in a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed are excessively advantageous.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a "time-saving win", a "long time-saving win" is set. During the long time-saving win fluctuation, the time-saving win fluctuation state is reached, and until the first special symbol for which the long time-saving win is set is stopped (or discarded), the time-saving win fluctuation state pattern table 202kd3 is referenced, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds), so multiple second special symbol lotteries can be executed. Note that even if a big win (or a small win) is won during the long time-saving win fluctuation (during the time-saving win fluctuation state), and the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, the time-saving win fluctuation state pattern table 202kd3 is referenced for the period during which the long time-saving win fluctuation continues.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, a 100% "long time-saving win" is set, but this is not limited to the above, and a selection may be made from a number of variation patterns based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. For example, a "long time-saving win" with a variation time of 300 seconds may be selected at 50%, a "short time-saving win" with a variation time of 200 seconds may be selected at 30%, and a "super time-saving win" with a variation time of 500 seconds may be selected at 20%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the time-saving win variation state depending on the variation time of the selected first special symbol, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving winning variable state is set only when the first special symbol is selected for the time-saving win, but this is not limited to the above, and the time-saving winning variable state may also be set when the second special symbol is selected for the time-saving win. In this case, by configuring the variable time when the time-saving win is selected to differ depending on the type of special symbol (for example, the variable time is 300 seconds for the first special symbol and 600 seconds for the second special symbol), it becomes possible to set a time-saving winning variable state that is favorable to the player and a time-saving winning variable state that is relatively unfavorable to the player depending on which special symbol is selected for the time-saving win, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Figure 415 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, which is defined in the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the fluctuation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2 is a fluctuation pattern 12 table that is referenced when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is common to the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state. As described above, when a long time-saving winning fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the time-saving winning fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referenced, not the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2.

As shown in FIG. 415, in the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the first special symbol is a long fluctuation (600 seconds), and the second special symbol is a short fluctuation (3 to 5 seconds). As described above, if the first special symbol wins a jackpot while the time-saving state B is set, the time-saving state A, which is less favorable to the player than the time-saving state B, is set. Therefore, by configuring the fluctuation of the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed first, it is made easier to continuously set the time-saving state B, which is more favorable to the player.

Figure 416 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving winning variable state 12 variable pattern table 202kd3, which is defined in the variable pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time-saving winning variable state 12 variable pattern table 202kd3, the variable pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variable type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the time-saving winning variation state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds) is set regardless of the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. In the time-saving winning variation state, the game ends when the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, in order to increase the game efficiency in the time-saving winning variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and it is configured to be possible to execute many lotteries for the second special symbol.

In addition, in the time-saving winning change state, the first special symbol is already changing, and when the change of the first special symbol ends, the time-saving winning change state also ends, so the change pattern of the first special symbol is not set in the time-saving winning change state. Therefore, the time-saving winning change state change pattern 12 table 202kd3 is configured to select only the change pattern of the second special symbol.

As mentioned above, even if the game state is normal or time-saving, when the first special symbol is in a long time-saving winning fluctuation state (when the time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to on), the time-saving winning fluctuation state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referenced when selecting a fluctuation pattern.

<Regarding control process of main control device in twelfth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 12th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 416 to 437. The control process of the main control device 110 in this 12th control example differs from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned 5th control example in that the special symbol variation process 5 (see Fig. 252) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 12 (see Fig. 416), the game state update process 12 (see Fig. 422) is replaced with the update process 5 (see Fig. 256), and the big win control process 5 (see Fig. 260) is replaced with the big win control process 12 (see Fig. 435), and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, the twelfth control example is significantly different from the fifth control example described above in that the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 1) and the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 2) are configured to be able to be changed simultaneously (in parallel).

First, referring to FIG. 417, the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) in this 12th control example will be described. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231). If it is determined that the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231: Yes), it is next determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y232). In this Y232 process, it is determined whether the subtraction of the special symbol variation time of the other special symbol that is currently varying is suspended due to one special symbol being stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win. In the process of Y232, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y232: Yes), the display of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special pattern is updated (Y233), that is, a process is executed to continue the change display of the first pattern display device 37 for the special pattern for which the subtraction of the change time has been interrupted, and this process is terminated. This makes it possible to inform the player that the special pattern change has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of Y231, if it is determined that a big win or a small win is currently occurring (Y231: No), it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 1 is changing) (Y234), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y234: No), the same process as the first special pattern change start process 12 (Y237) is executed, and then it proceeds to Y238, which executes change processing related to the special pattern 2.

If it is determined in the process of Y234 that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed. This first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) executes the process during the special pattern 1 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 422.

When the first special symbol change in progress process 12 (Y235) is completed, the first special symbol change stop process 12 (Y236) is then executed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.

In the processing of Y238 to Y241, the same processing as Y234 to Y237 executed for special pattern 1 is executed. When the processing of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 2 is changing) (Y238), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special pattern change start processing 12 (Y239) is executed, and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) is executed. This second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) executes the process during the special pattern 2 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 431.

After the second special symbol change execution process 12 (Y240) is completed, the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) is then executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 418, we will explain the first special symbol change start process 12 (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol change process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process 12 (Y237).

In the first special symbol variation start process 12 (Fig. 417, Y237), it is first determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on (Y301). In the process of Y301, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag is on (Y301: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y301, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag is not on (Y301: No), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (Y302), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter is greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Y304), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (Y305).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control device 110.

When the process of Y305 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

After the process of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol determination process 12 is then executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 418, Y307) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and based on the set game state. Note that the game state update process 12 (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring it in this way, the special symbol lottery will be executed after the game state is updated.

When the process of Y307 is completed, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 is then executed (Fig. 420, Y308). Details will be described later, but this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) is completed, the game status update process 12 is then executed (Y309). This game status update process 12 (Fig. 421, Y309), the details of which will be described later, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time-saving counter 203h) that indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of Y309 is completed, the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and a special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is on (Y311), and if it is determined that it is on (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y311: No), the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), a special symbol 1 standby command indicating on is set (Y313), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) will be explained with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253) of the fifth control example described above, and in addition to determining the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a determination of whether or not a time-saving win has occurred (special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12) is executed.

When the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (Y8001), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8002), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8005), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8003: No), the special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8007), and this process is terminated.

Here, the special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is a process for executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made in the current special symbol lottery. In other words, in this 12th control example, in the first special symbol lottery, a judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been won is first executed (Y8003), and if a jackpot has been won, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made, and the judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made is executed only if a jackpot has not been won. By configuring it in this way, multiple benefits (a jackpot win for a special symbol, a time-saving win) are not given to the player in one special symbol lottery, so it is possible to prevent the player from being given an overly advantageous game.

Next, referring to FIG. 420, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (FIG. 418, Y237), will be described. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Fig. 420, Y308), first, in the first special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 419, Y307), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (Y501).

If it is determined in the process of Y501 that a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (Y501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (Y502) from the special symbol 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb (see FIG. 410(b)) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of Y8005 in the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419), and the process proceeds to Y503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y501 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y503.

In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see Figs. 413 to 416) according to the game status is read (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then a special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y506).

When the process of Y506 is completed, a special pattern 1 stop type command indicating the stop pattern is set (Y507). Next, the start of the variation of the first special pattern is set in the first pattern display device 37 (Y508), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) will be explained with reference to FIG. 421. FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007).

When the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh (Y401), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has been won (Y402). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has been won (Y402: Yes), the time-saving winning fluctuation status flag 203kg is set to on (Y403), time-saving A is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y404), the special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag kf is set to on (Y8105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y402 that the time-saving win has not been made (Y402: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y406), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of game status update process 12 (Y309) will be explained with reference to FIG. 422. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of game status update process 12 (Y309).

When the game status update process 12 (Y309) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (Y602), and a remaining time-saving count command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (Y604: Yes), the time-saving game is not granted (i.e., the normal state), so a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 423, the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) executed in the special pattern change process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be explained. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235). In this first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235), a process for resuming the subtraction of the change time of special pattern 1 if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process for subtracting the change time are executed.

When the first special symbol change execution process 12 (Y235) is executed, it is first determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y2801). Here, we will briefly explain the case where this process is executed with the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc set to on. The special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on when the special symbol 1 is changing and the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific win (big win A to C, or small win A). Then, when the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set on during the process, so the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and the next time the special pattern change process 12 (Fig. 417) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set on), it is determined that a jackpot is in progress in the process of Y231, so the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is not executed. Then, the jackpot game (or small jackpot game) ends, and the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed because it is determined that a jackpot is not in progress (or a small jackpot) in the process of Y231. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the first special pattern variation in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON is configured to be the timing when the big win (or small win) game ends and the deduction of the variation time of the special pattern variation, which had been suspended, is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 423, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y2801: Yes), then the special chart 1 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2802), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to off (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2801: No), the processing of Y2802 and Y2803 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2804.

In the processing of Y2804, the special pattern 1 variable time timer 203ka is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 424, we will explain the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y236).

In the first special symbol change stop process 12 (Fig. 424, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether a jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set (Y702). If it is determined that a jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y703). Although not shown in the figure, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special symbol 2 change stop command is set, indicating that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203kd has been turned on.

After completing the process of Y703, a special symbol 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol (Y706). Then, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 (Y707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether or not a time-saving win of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, if it is determined that a time-saving win is set (Y710: Yes), the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time-saving setting process 12 (Y711), a process is executed for setting the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving type that has been won. The time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 426.

On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the first special pattern being executed has not arrived (Y701: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708). In the process of Y708, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is off (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y708 that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708: Yes), this means that the second special symbol has stopped due to a big win or a small win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the first special symbol that is currently being executed, the special symbol 1 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y709). Details of this special symbol 1 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 425.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop process 12 (Y236), when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), a process (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) is executed to stop the change display with the symbol indicating the judgment result of the first lottery game. Also, when the second special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) and a big win game (or a small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), a process (Y709) is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol during the change display. Note that when the first special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) (Y702: Yes), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped).

Next, referring to FIG. 425, we will explain the special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Y709), which is one process of the first special symbol change stop process 12 (FIG. 424, Y236). FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Y709).

In the special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Fig. 425, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is on (Y721). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is on (Y721: Yes), the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is set to off (Y722), and then a special symbol 1 change stop command indicating that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is off is set (Y723). Then, the change type of the first special symbol is set to miss (Y724), and it is determined whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on (Y725). Although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss symbol, and a special symbol 1 confirmation command for the first special symbol is set.

In the process of Y725, if it is determined that the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern lottery is a time-saving winning) (Y725: Yes), the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is set to off (Y726), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, if the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is not on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern lottery is not a time-saving winning) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped, and this process is terminated.

...

On the other hand, in the processing of Y721, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 change time flag 203ke is not on (Y721: No), this means that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the change of the first special pattern is set (Y729), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, when the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is turned on (the timing when the change that results in a big win or small win with the second special symbol stops), the change is forcibly interrupted even if the change time of the first special symbol has not yet elapsed, or is forcibly stopped as a result of a miss determination. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a changing manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a small win or big win for only one of the lottery results, which reduces the gambling nature of the game. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, depending on the type of big win or small win of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be forcibly stopped as a miss or temporarily stopped (interrupted).

As described above, in this twelfth control example, time-saving A and time-saving B can be set as types of time-saving states. Time-saving A has a time-saving count of 5 times (see FIG. 411), and the probability that the second special symbol will win a big win (1/50 chance of winning) or a small win (1/50 chance of winning) with 5 time-saving times is a low probability of about 18%, so winning a big win or a small win with the second special symbol during time-saving A state is almost impossible. On the other hand, time-saving B has a time-saving count of 10,000 times (see FIG. 411), so when time-saving B is set, there is a high probability of winning the next big win or a small win. Therefore, it can be said that time-saving B state is a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than time-saving A state.

Here, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus and the time-saving bonus B state is set due to the second special symbol winning a big jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving bonus during the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped (i.e., when the time-saving bonus winning variable state is set), if the first special symbol cannot be forcibly stopped as a miss symbol and the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped, the set time-saving bonus B state is discarded and a new time-saving bonus A state is set. In other words, in this case, the time-saving bonus B state will only continue until the variable time of the first special symbol that won the time-saving bonus (300 seconds in this twelfth control example) has elapsed, and there is a high possibility that the time-saving bonus state will end before the time-saving bonus limit is reached.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the time-saving B state is set because the second special symbol wins a big win, a small win, or a time-saving feature during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving feature has been won (i.e., when the time-saving feature change state is set), if a specific big win (big win D) or small win (small win B) is won and the change in the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a missing pattern, it is possible to continue the time-saving B state until the time-saving feature limit is reached, and the player can win a large number of prize balls.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, if the second special symbol wins a big jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving win during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is stopped and displayed (i.e., when a time-saving win variable state is set) when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, and time-saving B state is set, the first special symbol that is being displayed as a variable can be forcibly stopped (discarded) as a miss, providing the player with new gameplay that allows the player to continue the advantageous time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 426, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be described. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711). In this time-saving setting process 12 (Y711), a process for setting the time-saving state when the time-saving winning decision is made is executed. When the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is time-saving A (Y8351), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A (Y8351: Yes), the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y8352), a value corresponding to the determined time-saving type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (Y8353), the time-saving state is set in the game state storage area (Y8354), the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the time-saving type game state (information indicating the time-saving state and information indicating the set time-saving type) are set (Y8355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8351 that the time-saving type is not A (i.e., if the time-saving type is B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. Although not shown, in the process of Y8353, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is cleared and a new value corresponding to the determined type of time-saving type is set. Therefore, when the time-saving type A state is set based on winning the time-saving type, if the time-saving counter 203h already has a value corresponding to time-saving type B (e.g., 10,000 times), the value corresponding to time-saving type B is discarded and the value corresponding to time-saving type A (5 times) is set.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the time-saving state is set at different times depending on the time-saving winning trigger. If the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern stops changing, and if the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game ends, not when the special pattern stops changing.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be varied, providing players with a game that they will not tire of.

Next, referring to FIG. 427, we will explain the second special symbol change start process 12 (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol change process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change start process 12 (Y239).

In the second special symbol variation start process 12 (Fig. 427, Y239), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on (Y831). In the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not on (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is obtained (Y832), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Y834), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (Y835).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110.

When the process of Y835 is completed, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is then shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 -> execution area, reserved area 2 -> reserved area 1, reserved area 3 -> reserved area 2, reserved area 4 -> reserved area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y836 is completed, the second special symbol determination process 12 is then executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 428, Y837) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and based on the set game state.

When the process of Y837 is completed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 is then executed (Fig. 431, Y838). Details will be described later, but this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) is completed, the game status update process 12 is then executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game status update process 12 (Fig. 421, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed for the first special symbol, and the details are explained with reference to Fig. 422, so detailed explanations are omitted. When the process of Y839 is completed, the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. Note that the game status update process 12 (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game status is updated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 2 standby flag is on (Y841), and if it is determined that it is on (Y841: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y841: No), the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to on (Y842), a special symbol 2 standby command indicating on is set (Y843), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 428, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) will be explained. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837). Unlike the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307 in FIG. 419), in this second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837), when a miss is determined in the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, a determination of whether a small jackpot has been won (small jackpot lottery process 12) is made in addition to a determination of whether a time-saving win has been won (special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 12).

When the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (Y8101), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8102), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8103: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8104), the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8105), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8107), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8103: No), the special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8106), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, if the big win lottery for the second special symbol does not result in a big win, a time-saving lottery and a small win lottery are executed, so there are more opportunities set for a state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player compared to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol can be said to be a more advantageous special symbol than the first special symbol. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long period (600 seconds), so that the playing efficiency of a player who tries to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is reduced.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8106), unlike the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007 in FIG. 421), when a time-saving win is won, the type of time-saving to be set is determined depending on whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on or not. Specifically, the time-saving B state is set only when the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on. In other words, the time-saving B state is set only when the second special pattern wins the time-saving during the change display of the first special pattern indicating that a time-saving win has been won, and the time-saving A state is set in other cases. By configuring in this way, even if the second special pattern wins the time-saving win when there is no time-saving winning change state, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set, so that it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special pattern lottery without changing the first special pattern from being excessively advantageous.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107).

When the special pattern 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving winning random number 12 table 202kh (Y8201), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203). If it is determined that the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203: Yes), time-saving B is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8205), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y8202 that the time-saving win has not been obtained (Y8202: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8206), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Y8203 that the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is off (Y8203: No), time-saving A is set as the time-saving special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8204), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the time-saving B state is set when the second special symbol wins the time-saving mode only when the time-saving winning variable state flag kg is on (i.e., when the first special symbol wins the time-saving mode and the variable display of the first special symbol indicating the time-saving winning mode is being executed). By configuring in this way, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set even if the second special symbol wins the time-saving mode when the time-saving winning variable state is not in effect, so it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special symbol lottery without varying the first special symbol from being excessively advantageous. In addition, a new gameplay feature of aiming to win the time-saving mode with the second special symbol within the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving mode and until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving mode win is stopped and displayed can be provided to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 430, we will explain the small prize lottery process 12 (Y8108), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y837). FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing this small prize lottery process 12 (Y8108).

In the small prize lottery process 12 (Fig. 430, Y8108), first, it is determined whether the lottery result for the second special pattern is determined to be a time-saving win, that is, whether a time-saving win for the second special pattern is set (Y8301).

If it is determined in the processing of Y8301 that the time-saving win for the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this processing ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the time-saving winning of the second special pattern is not set (Y8301: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small prize random number 12 table (Y8302), and if it is determined that a small prize has been won (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small prize type counter C5 is obtained, a small prize type is selected from the small prize type selection 12 table 202kf, and the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device is set (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, if it is determined that a small prize has not been won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the jackpot, time-saving prize, and small prize winnings are not overlapped in one second special pattern drawing, preventing the player from being awarded multiple benefits and preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

It is also possible for a jackpot or small jackpot to overlap with a time-saving win. In this case, for example, if a jackpot and a time-saving win overlap, a more favorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends than if only a jackpot was won. This makes it possible to provide variety to the game state after the jackpot game ends depending on whether or not a time-saving win was won, even if two jackpots of the same type are won, and increases the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 431, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (FIG. 427, Y239). FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Fig. 431, Y838), first, in the second special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 428, Y8103), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (Y921).

If it is determined in the processing of Y921 that a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (Y921: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (Y922) from the special symbol 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 (see FIG. 411) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the processing of Y8105 in the above-mentioned second special symbol determination processing 12 (see FIG. 428), and the processing proceeds to Y923.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y921 that the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y923.

In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, a variation pattern table (see Figs. 413-416) corresponding to the game status is read (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then a special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y926).

When the process of Y926 is completed, a special symbol 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the second special symbol (Y928), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 432, the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) executed in the special pattern change process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be described. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240). In this second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240), a process is executed to resume the subtraction of the second special pattern change time if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process to subtract the change time.

When the second special pattern change execution process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y2901). Here, a brief explanation will be given of the case where this process is executed with the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd set to on. As described above, the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on when the special pattern 1 is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special pattern 2 is changing. Then, when the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on within that process, so that the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and when the special pattern change process 12 (Fig. 417, Y104) is executed next time (2 milliseconds after the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on), it is determined that the jackpot is being won in the process of Y231, so the second special pattern change execution process 12 (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined in the process of Y231 that the jackpot is not in progress, the second special symbol variation execution process 12 (Y240) is executed. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation execution process 12 (Y240) is executed with the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd set to on is configured to be the timing when the jackpot game ends and the subtraction of the special symbol variation time that was suspended is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 432, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y2901: Yes), then the special chart 2 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2902), the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to off (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2901: No), the processing of Y2902 and Y2903 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2904.

In the processing of Y2904, the special pattern 2 variable time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (Y2905), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) will be described with reference to FIG. 433. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241). This second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) executes processing when stopping the change of special symbol 2, and differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 424) in that, in addition to a configuration for interrupting the change of special symbol 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the change time) when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a jackpot, a configuration for forcibly stopping the change of special symbol 1 is provided when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot D), and a process to be executed when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a small jackpot is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y241) is executed, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended (Y901). Whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether the counter value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0 or not.

If it is determined in the process of Y901 that the fluctuation time has ended (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the drawing of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is a big win (Y902), and if it is determined that it is not a big win (a miss) (Y902: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a small win (Y912). If it is determined in the process of Y910 that it is not a small win (Y912: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a time-saving win (Y914). If it is determined that it is not a time-saving win, a confirmation command for the second special pattern is set (Y908), the fluctuation of the second special pattern on the first pattern display device is stopped (Y909), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y914 that the time-saving winning has occurred (Y914: Yes), the time-saving setting process 12 is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is executed. Note that the time-saving setting process 12 is the same process as the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) executed as one process of the first special pattern variation stop process 12 (Fig. 424, Y236) described above, and therefore a detailed explanation is omitted.

If it is determined in the process of Y912 that a small win has been won (Y912: Yes), the special chart 2 small win stop process 12 is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is executed. The special chart 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913) executes a process to set whether to forcibly stop (discard) or temporarily stop (interrupt) the variable display of the first special pattern depending on the type of small win of the won small win, and a detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 435.

In the process of Y902, if it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot D (Y903), and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y904), the special chart 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y906), the jackpot scenario is set (Y907), and then the processes of Y908 and Y909 are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y903 that it is a jackpot D, the special chart 1 variation stop flag ke is set to on (Y905), and the processing of Y906 to Y909 is executed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot D, the special pattern 1 variation stop flag ke is set to ON, and when the jackpot type is other than this, the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON, so that it is possible to vary the variation of the first special pattern between being forcibly stopped (discarded) and being temporarily stopped (interrupted) depending on the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 411, the type of jackpot determined when the second special symbol is a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the second special symbol is changed, and jackpot D is configured to be more likely to be determined when a jackpot is won on or after the 51st spin. By configuring it in this way, even if the player fails to win a jackpot with the second special symbol and continues to win misses (a so-called "stuck"), a jackpot type that is favorable to the player is more likely to be determined, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play when they are stuck.

If it is determined in the process of Y901 that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the second special pattern being executed has not arrived (Y901: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y910). If it is determined in the process of Y910 that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is off (Y910: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y910 that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y910: Yes), this means that the first special symbol has stopped due to a jackpot or a time-saving win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the change based on the second special symbol that is currently being executed, the special symbol 2 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y911). Details of this special symbol 2 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 434.

In this way, in the second special symbol stop process 12 (Y241), when the specified change time of the second special symbol being changed has elapsed (Y901: Yes), a process is executed to stop the change display at the symbol that indicates the result of the second special symbol lottery game. Also, when the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol that indicates a jackpot and a jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win change state is set (Y910: Yes), a process is executed (Y911) to forcibly stop the second special symbol being changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 434, we will explain the special symbol 2 forced stop process 12 (Y911), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process 12 (FIG. 433, Y241). FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 forced stop process 12 (Y911).

In the special pattern 2 forced stop process 12 (Fig. 434, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y631). If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y631: Yes), the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to off (Y632), and then a special pattern 2 change stop command indicating that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is off is set (Y633). Then, the change type of the second special pattern is set to miss (Y634). Although not shown, after the processing of Y634, the second special pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss pattern, and a special pattern 2 confirmation command for the second special pattern is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203kf is not on (Y631: No), this means that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the variation of the second special pattern is set (Y635), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, when the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is turned on (the timing when the fluctuation that results in a jackpot with the first special symbol stops), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly interrupted and stopped even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has not yet elapsed. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a fluctuating manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a jackpot game for only one of the lottery results, which makes it possible to suppress gambling. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be increased.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, when the first special symbol starts to change when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, the second special symbol change stop flag kf is turned on. As described above, in this twelfth control example, in the normal state, the change time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds). Therefore, if the change display of the second special symbol has already started when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win and the change display of the second special symbol continues, the set time-saving win change state will end before the stop display of the second special symbol that is changing, and a malfunction may occur in which the player cannot execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving win change state.

Here, by configuring the stop flag kf for the second special pattern to be turned on when the first special pattern starts to change when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature, when the change of the first special pattern that won the time-saving feature starts, the change of the second special pattern that is currently changing is discarded, so that a new drawing for the second special pattern can be held in the time-saving feature winning change state, and a problem in which the player cannot draw for the second special pattern in the time-saving feature winning change state can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 435, we will explain the special pattern 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913), which is one process of the second special pattern change stop process 12 (FIG. 433, y241). FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913).

In the special chart 2 small win stop process 12 (Fig. 435, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small win type is small win B (Y931), and if it is determined to be small win B (Y931: Yes), the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to on (Y932), and a special chart 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on is set (Y933). Then, a small win scenario corresponding to the selected small win type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y931 that the win is not a small win B (Y931: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is set to on (Y937), a special chart 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is on is set (Y938), and processing of Y934 is performed.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, it is configured to be possible to discard the first special symbol that is changing not only for a specific big win type, but also for a specific small win type. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the small win type as well, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the special symbol 1 change stop flag is set to ON when the second special symbol indicating a small win B win stops changing, but this is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 change stop flag may be set to ON when the second special symbol that won the small win B starts changing. Also, the first special symbol may be discarded at the start of the small win game, or at the end of the small win game.

Next, referring to FIG. 436, the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) executed in the main process will be explained. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004). This jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) differs only in that it executes jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) instead of jackpot end process 11 (S11651) of the jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 403) in the 11th control example described above, and the other processes are the same as those in the 11th control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 437, the contents of the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613). When the jackpot end process 12 is executed, the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) is executed first. A detailed explanation of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. 438, but it executes processing to set the upper limit value at which a high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set in the time-saving limit count counter 203ja, and to update (subtract) the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja that has already been set.

Now, referring to FIG. 438, we will explain the details of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), which is one process within the jackpot end process 12 (see Y11613 in FIG. 437). FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701). In this time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), a process is executed to set an upper limit value for which a high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set, and to update the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value.

In the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is set to 10 (Y3005) and the time-saving flag is set to ON (Y3006). Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (Y3002), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is 0 or not (Y3003). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is 0 (Y3003: Yes), the upper limit value at which the high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag 203kh is set to ON (Y3004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y3004, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is not 0 (Y3004: No), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times, but this is not limited to this and may be set to one of multiple settings, such as 20 times or 30 times.

Returning to FIG. 437, the explanation will be continued. After executing the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), it is determined whether the time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is on (Y2702), and if it is determined that the time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is on (Y2702: Yes), information indicating the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set (Y2707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, if it is determined that the time-saving limit reaching flag 203kh is not on (Y2702: No), information indicating a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2704), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is set as the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb shown in Figures 410 and 411 (Y2705), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (Y2706), and the process of Y2707 is performed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set consecutively after the end of a jackpot game, and the number of times that a state advantageous to the player can be set consecutively is limited, thereby preventing the player from getting excessive prize balls and encouraging his or her gambling urge.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the configuration is such that the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern is not set after the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Although not shown, the content of the presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described below. In conventional pachinko machines, the corresponding game state is generally set when a special symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) for indicating a specific result is displayed in a stopped state. For example, when a special symbol wins a jackpot, the player predicts that a jackpot has been won due to the presentation during the variable display of the special symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won, and the player can recognize that a jackpot has been won by the display of the special symbol and the display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won. In this case, the player can predict in advance that a different game state will be set after the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and can smoothly respond to the change in game state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, as described above, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win and the variation of the first special symbol starts, the time-saving win variation state is set. As shown in FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for starting the first special symbol lottery, is located at a position where the ball can enter whether the game ball flows down the left area or the right area of the board, but the second ball entrance 1641, which is the trigger for starting the second special symbol, is located at a position where the ball can enter only when the game ball flows down the right area of the board.

As a result, for example, if a player who is playing a game in which the game ball flows down the left area of the board and enters the first ball entrance 64 (so-called left-hand play) wins the time-saving win, if the player continues to play left-hand play even though the time-saving win change state has been set, a malfunction may occur in which the time-saving win change state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the time-saving feature win occurs before the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and a presentation is executed to notify the player that the time-saving feature is in a changing state.

Specifically, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 10 seconds have elapsed), the pseudo symbol stops and a display mode is displayed indicating that the time-saving feature change state has been set (e.g., "Entering the time-saving feature change zone"), and "hit right" is displayed to prompt the player to aim the game ball at the second ball entrance 1641 and fire it.

By displaying in this manner, the player recognizes that the time-saving winning variable state has been set, and can play in a manner appropriate to the game state. Additionally, it is advisable to display a notice to the player that the time-saving B state will be set if the second special symbol wins a big win (or small win) or a time-saving win during the time-saving winning variable state.

In addition, when it is determined by pre-reading the winning information that there is winning information for a time-saving winning among the winning information for the first special pattern reserved in the normal state (reserved special pattern 1), a configuration may be added in which a notification is made that a time-saving winning change state is set in the next change of the first special pattern on the stopped display screen of the first special pattern executed immediately before the change of the first special pattern that wins the time-saving winning. In other words, when there is a reserved special pattern 1, a notification is made that the next change is a time-saving winning change state in the change of the first special pattern immediately before the time-saving winning change state is set, and when there is no reserved special pattern 1, a notification is made that a time-saving winning change state is set after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the first special pattern in which the time-saving winning change state is set.

In this way, when there is no reserved special chart 1, there is a loss of time from when the time-saving winning change starts until it is announced that the time-saving winning change state is in effect. However, when there is a reserved special chart 1, it is announced in advance that the time-saving winning change state will be set, so there is no loss of time from when the time-saving winning change starts until it is announced that the time-saving winning change state is in effect. Therefore, by making the player want to keep the reserved state saved at all times in order to eliminate the loss of time during the time-saving winning change state, it is possible to motivate the player to play.

The player may also be informed of the time it takes for the first special symbol to change during the time-saving winning change state in an easily understandable manner.

As explained above, this twelfth control example is configured to be able to execute the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, execute a jackpot game based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side whose special pattern variation stopped first (determined special pattern display), and at the point when the special pattern variation stops first (determined special pattern display), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, and is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern.

As in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed before the start of each special symbol variation, and if the time-saving winning is selected, the time-saving state is set when the special symbol variation stops. In this case, if only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is selected, the time-saving state that will be the first benefit is set. Note that if the time-saving winning is selected in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving state (time-saving state A) that will be the first benefit is set, and if the time-saving winning is selected in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state (time-saving state C) that will be the second benefit different from the first benefit is set.

Furthermore, in the case where the time-saving feature is won in the second special symbol drawing executed during the first special symbol variation in which the time-saving feature is won, it is possible to set a time-saving state (time-saving state B) in which a third benefit that is more advantageous than the first and second benefits is awarded. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which different benefits are awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving feature win in each special symbol drawing.

The bonus that is awarded may be, for example, a third bonus in which the time-saving end condition is more difficult to achieve than the first or second bonus, or a third bonus in which the special pattern lottery is easier to execute than the first or second bonus.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time-saving state of the third bonus is set may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped among the special pattern changes being executed in parallel, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. Also, regardless of whether it is before or after the timing of the stop display, it may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. It may also be the timing at which a specific special pattern type is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously (parallelly) draw multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in each of the special symbol draws and is simultaneously awarded excessive bonuses (jackpot games).

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, it is possible for the player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery by the time the winning result is frozen (confirmed) display. In this case, it is advisable to execute a variable presentation that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, using the variable time until the special pattern lottery result is frozen and displayed. This makes the player think that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, which can motivate the player to execute the other special pattern lottery during that variable time.

In addition, the reel may be configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. This allows a favorable win to be won in the lottery for the other special symbol while one of the special symbols that has won an unfavorable win is fluctuating, and the winning result can be displayed as a stop (confirmed display) before the winning result of the unfavorable win.

In this twelfth control example, the special symbol that wins the time-saving win is changed for a long time, and the time-saving win change state is set, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the special symbol that wins the jackpot is changed for a long time, and the jackpot win change state is set, and during the jackpot win change state, the other special symbol is changed for a short time, making it possible to win prize balls through small win play.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 439 to Fig. 463. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. Also, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or a second probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a low probability state to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, which is executed based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game described above and when other end conditions (for example, an end condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times) are established, the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a trigger other than a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the system is configured so that a trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some of the lottery results (misses) in which the result of the special pattern lottery is different from a jackpot win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus in which a high probability state for normal patterns is set. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which a jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which a time-saving state (high probability state for normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to players.

However, even in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, because the nature of the system is that bonuses are awarded based on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed, a situation may continue for a long time in which no bonuses are awarded, even though the special pattern lottery has been executed multiple times, and depending on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed, this can cause a problem in that it can reduce the player's motivation to play.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to award a special bonus to a player when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed (number of special symbol lotteries) meets a predetermined condition. By configuring it in this way, a bonus can be awarded to a player who has played a game involving the execution of a special symbol lottery for a long period of time, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The bonus (ceiling bonus) that is awarded when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (number of special pattern lotteries) meets a predetermined condition is a bonus that is awarded when a special pattern lottery that results in a lottery result other than a jackpot (a miss) is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 500 times) in succession, and is configured to set a game state (third time-saving state) that makes it relatively easy to execute a special pattern lottery.

In other words, in the special symbol lottery in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), if a jackpot is not won 500 times in a row (if the player is stuck at 500 times), a ceiling bonus is awarded and a game state (third time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players who have been playing for a long time without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery to continue playing, and to make it easier to improve game operation.

In addition, even if a pachinko machine 10 has had a large number of special symbol lottery draws executed since the end of the previous jackpot game (a so-called stuck machine), new players who aim to be awarded the ceiling bonus can play the game, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the game. In particular, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set multiple setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities, even a pachinko machine 10 with a relatively low setting value for the jackpot winning probability (low setting) can be played by players who aim to be awarded the ceiling bonus, so it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10 by installing a pachinko machine 10 with a low setting.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the game is configured to be played in substantially the same content when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set and when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, specifically, when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving lottery (first time-saving state), making it difficult for the player to know whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.

The contents of the benefit granted as the ceiling benefit are varied depending on the game state at the time when the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit (the third time-saving state is set) are met (the game state at the time when the number of stuck plays reaches 500). Specifically, the system is configured so that a benefit that is more advantageous to the player (the third time-saving state, which is difficult to end) is granted when the ceiling benefit is granted when the first time-saving state is set, rather than when the ceiling benefit is granted when the normal state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the game state that will be set.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to have a high probability (1/2) of winning the time-saving feature when a special pattern lottery is executed, and is configured to set the first time-saving feature state for a short period of time (one special pattern change) in most cases when the time-saving feature is won. By configuring it in this way, the game state will frequently switch between the normal state and the first time-saving feature state until the ceiling bonus is awarded. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the game state at the time the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example, when a special symbol lottery is executed, a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries until a ceiling bonus is awarded is updated (valid game state) and a game state in which the number is not updated (invalid game state) can be set.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to set a second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and when the second probability variable state is set, a game similar to the normal state and the first time-saving state (left-hand play) is executed. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the set game state is the normal state, the first time-saving state, or the second probability variable state.

Then, when the state in which the second probability variable state is set becomes an invalid play state, and a special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability variable state, the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is awarded is not updated.

This configuration makes it difficult for players playing left-handed games (players playing in the normal state, the first time-saving state, or the second probability variable state) to determine whether they are currently in a valid or invalid game state, making it difficult for players to predict the number of special symbol draws required until the ceiling privilege is granted. In addition, the number of special symbol draws that satisfy the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (the number of special symbol draws executed after the end of the previous big win game) can be varied depending on the length of the period in which the second probability variable state is set, so that even if only the same number of special symbol draws (for example, 500 times) is specified as the number of special symbol draws that will grant the ceiling privilege, the ceiling privilege can be granted at various times, providing players who are aiming to be granted the ceiling privilege with the fun of predicting the number of special symbol draws required until the ceiling privilege is granted.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, a game in which a special symbol lottery is relatively likely to be executed (right-hand play) can be executed by shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from a low-probability state to a high-probability state, but in this thirteenth control example, in addition to the configuration used in the fifth control example described above, a game in which a special symbol lottery is relatively likely to be executed (right-hand play) can be executed without shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from a low-probability state to a high-probability state.

Specifically, in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus, the low probability state of normal symbols is set, and only the normal symbol variation time is varied, making it possible to play a game in which the special symbol lottery is relatively likely to be executed (right-hand play). In other words, in this thirteenth control example, it is possible to set a game state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set (second time-saving state) and a game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set (third time-saving state) as game states in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, even in a situation where the trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal patterns from a low probability state to a high probability state (e.g., winning a jackpot) has not occurred, it is possible to vary the ease with which the special pattern lottery is executed (transitioning from a state in which it is relatively difficult to execute the special pattern lottery to a state in which it is relatively easy to execute the special pattern lottery), so it is possible to provide the player with a game in which the ease with which the special pattern lottery is executed varies at various times.

In the fifth control example described above, only the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability-changing state) can be set as the game state in which the special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than when the normal state (low probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) is set, so the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is called the game state in which the special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed (time-saving state, right-hit game state). However, in the thirteenth control example, as described above, in a part of the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (first time-saving state), the ease of executing the special pattern lottery is configured to be the same as in the normal state, and in a part of the game state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set (second time-saving state), it is configured to be easier to execute the special pattern lottery than in the normal state.

Therefore, rather than explaining the probability state of each symbol that is actually set, when simply explaining the ease of executing the special symbol lottery, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbols, the game state (first time-saving state, second probability variable state) in which the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same (similar) as the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) will be referred to as the normal state or left-hand play state, and the game state (second time-saving state, third time-saving state) in which the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) will be referred to as the time-saving state or right-hand play state.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, a benefit similar to the ceiling benefit can be granted based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state, second probability change state). Specifically, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, a second time-saving state can be set in which the period during which the jackpot game is played (number of rounds played) is shorter than other jackpot wins, and the same time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) as the third time-saving state that can be granted as a ceiling benefit is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in some cases where a time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, the second time-saving state can be set, and when the second time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, the same time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) as the third time-saving state that can be granted as a ceiling benefit can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to grant a bonus equivalent to the ceiling bonus to a player playing left-handed before the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, making it difficult for the player to understand the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus. Also, since it is possible to make the player believe that an event in which the second time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving state in a special symbol drawing means that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met and the third time-saving state is set, a player who believes that a small number of special symbol drawing times may be set as the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus can be motivated to play in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus, even if the number of special symbol drawing times performed since the end of the previous jackpot game is different from the number of special symbol drawing times that meet the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this thirteenth control example, during left-hand play, a suggestion effect (ceiling reach suggestion effect) can be executed to suggest to the player the remaining time (remaining number of special symbol draws) until the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player predict whether or not the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are likely to be met (will be met soon) based on the results of the ceiling reach suggestion effect, making it easier for the player to play for long periods of time in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus.

When determining the presentation mode of this ceiling-reaching suggestion presentation, in addition to information up until the ceiling bonus granting condition is established, information regarding whether or not the condition for setting a second time-saving state similar to the third time-saving state that can be granted as the above-mentioned ceiling bonus is established is also taken into consideration to determine the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, when the condition for setting a second time-saving state similar to the third time-saving state that can be granted as the ceiling bonus is satisfied, the same presentation mode as in the case where the ceiling-reaching suggestion presentation is highly likely to be established is determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily believe that the ceiling bonus granting condition has been established and the third time-saving state has been set in the event that the second time-saving state similar to the ceiling bonus is set based on winning a jackpot or time-saving state in the special pattern lottery.

<About the performance content of the 13th control example>
First, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Figures 439 to 441. The pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to set a game state (right-hitting game state) advantageous to the player based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, in comparison with the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above.

Specifically, when it is determined that the number of times the special pattern lottery has been performed has reached a predetermined number (500 times), the special pattern variation to show the lottery result of that special pattern lottery (500th special pattern lottery) is stopped and displayed, and then a ceiling bonus can be awarded as a rescue measure. In this thirteenth control example, the ceiling bonus is awarded by setting a right-hand play state (third time-saving state) that makes it easier to execute a special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) than a left-hand play state.

When a special symbol drawing is executed during a left-hand play state (for example, normal state or first time-saving state), a ceiling reach suggestion effect can be executed as an effect for allowing the player to predict the period (number of special symbol drawing) until the ceiling privilege is granted. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the period (number of special symbol drawing) until the ceiling privilege is granted by grasping the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect.

In addition, because the player can be made aware that the ceiling bonus will soon be awarded (or that there is a high possibility that the bonus will be awarded) before the ceiling bonus is actually awarded, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ceiling bonus is awarded without any warning, making it difficult for the player to enjoy the benefits of the ceiling bonus.

In this thirteenth control example, as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation, at least a "strong suggestion" presentation mode with a high expectation of the ceiling privilege being awarded and a "weak suggestion" presentation mode with a lower expectation of the ceiling privilege being awarded than the "strong suggestion" presentation mode can be set, and the presentation mode is configured to be selected using a ceiling reach suggestion presentation selection table 222la (see FIG. 448) described later. A specific explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 448, but in this thirteenth control example, when selecting the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation, the presentation mode is selected based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big win game, that is, the number of times that special symbol lotteries with lottery results other than a big win (miss) were executed consecutively (the number of times of getting stuck), and the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the variable presentation in which the ceiling reach suggestion presentation is executed.

In this way, by configuring the presentation mode to be selected based on the number of times a player has been stuck, the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation can be selected based on the actual period until the ceiling bonus is awarded (the number of times remaining), so that a presentation with high reliability can be executed for the player. Also, in this thirteenth control example, a bonus similar to the ceiling bonus can be awarded based on the result of the special pattern lottery (based on the result of the jackpot lottery or the time-saving lottery), and even when the result of the special pattern lottery that is the subject of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation has the possibility of awarding a bonus similar to the ceiling bonus, the presentation mode of "strong suggestion" which has a high expectation of awarding the ceiling bonus is likely to be selected.

By configuring it in this way, even when a bonus similar to a ceiling bonus is awarded based on the results of a special pattern drawing (based on the results of a jackpot drawing or time-saving drawing), it is possible to make the player more likely to believe that the ceiling bonus has been awarded. This makes it possible to make the player play while expecting that the ceiling bonus will be awarded at more times than when the predetermined ceiling bonus awarding conditions (number of times the special pattern drawing is performed) are met, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

As shown in FIG. 439, the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is configured to execute an effect in which the character that is displayed in the effect mode after the ceiling is reached (mid-ceiling mode) is displayed on the display screen. FIG. 439(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is set to "weak suggestion," which is an effect that is more likely to be selected when the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is long than when it is short. FIG. 439(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is set to "strong suggestion," which is an effect that is more likely to be selected when the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is short than when it is long.

When a ceiling reaching suggestion effect with the "weak suggestion" effect mode is executed, an effect is executed in which an angel-like character 809 crosses the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, as shown in FIG. 439(a). Then, the comment "Angel found! Ceiling?..." is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode to inform the player that a ceiling reaching suggestion effect has been executed.

As described above, the "weak suggestion" presentation mode shown in FIG. 439(a) is a presentation mode set as a ceiling reach suggestion presentation with a low expectation of reaching the ceiling, but in this thirteenth control example, the frequency with which the ceiling reach suggestion presentation is executed is configured to be higher as the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded (until the ceiling is reached) becomes shorter. Therefore, even with the "weak suggestion" presentation mode shown in FIG. 439(a), the mere execution of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation can allow the player to play while expecting that the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is short.

The display screen shown in FIG. 439(a) is a display screen during which the special symbol is changing to show the result of the 250th special symbol drawing since the end of the previous big win game, and "250 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a stuck number notification mode to show the number of special symbol drawings that have been performed since the end of the previous big win game. In other words, in this thirteenth control example, a display mode showing the stuck number is configured to be able to be displayed to make it easier for the player to grasp the cumulative number of special symbol drawing times (stuck number) during the period in which the left-hand hit game state continues.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded (the period until the ceiling is reached) based on the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation being executed and the number of stuck wins displayed in the small display area Dm7.

As shown in FIG. 439(a), in the left-hand play state, the reserved icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the reserved memory (special symbol 1 reserved) of the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed are configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm9. In the example shown in FIG. 439(a), three reserved special symbols 1 have been acquired (see small display area Dm1a), so three reserved icons hr1 to hr3 are displayed in the small display area Dm9.

On the other hand, when "strong suggestion" is set as the presentation type of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation, as shown in FIG. 439(b), a presentation is executed to indicate to the player that there is a higher expectation that the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation will be executed than with the "weak suggestion presentation."

Figure 439 (b) shows a display screen during special pattern fluctuation to show the result of the special pattern lottery in which the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game is the 499th, and "499 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a stuck number notification mode to show the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game. Then, as a display mode to show that the ceiling reach suggestion effect currently being executed is "strong suggestion", a more luxurious character 809z is displayed than the "weak suggestion" character 809 (see Figure 439 (a)). In this way, by configuring the performance mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect, the performance mode "strong suggestion" which is likely to be set when the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (the period until it is short) to display a more luxurious character than the other performance mode "weak suggestion", it is possible to visually determine whether or not the situation is one in which the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (the period until it is short) based on the mode of the character displayed when the ceiling reach suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "It's the Archangel! We're almost at the ceiling" as a notification to inform the player that the ceiling reaching suggestion effect executed this time is a "strong suggestion." By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine whether or not the situation is such that the ceiling bonus is likely to be awarded (the time until it is awarded is short).

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 439(b), two special chart 1 reservations have been acquired (see small display area Dm1a), so two reservation icons hr1 and hr2 are displayed in small display area Dm9.

In addition, the approach of the time when the ceiling bonus will be awarded may be indicated by changing the display mode of the reserved icon displayed in the small display area Dm9, rather than by a ceiling reaching indication effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen. For example, a specifying means may be provided to specify the range of the special chart 1 reserved that will be consumed during the left-hand play state among the special chart 1 reserved that has been acquired, and the display mode of the reserved icon may be different between the range specified by the specifying means and the other range, or the size of the displayed reserved icon may be different, or the displayed area may be different.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect executed using the reserved icon, a display mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot may be configured to be different when the reserved icon for the special pattern 1 reserved corresponding to the first special pattern drawing executed before the ceiling bonus is awarded, and when the reserved icon for the special pattern 1 reserved corresponding to the first special pattern drawing executed after the ceiling bonus is awarded is set.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide different bonuses based on winning a jackpot between winning a jackpot before the ceiling bonus is awarded and winning a jackpot after the ceiling bonus is awarded, it may be configured to display the reserved icon in a display manner that suggests the bonuses that will be awarded based on winning a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information that combines the probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of receiving the ceiling bonus through a look-ahead performance using the reserved icon.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect, a first suggestion mode for indicating the timing when the ceiling bonus will be awarded, a second suggestion mode for indicating a jackpot win, and a third suggestion mode for indicating a time-saving win through a time-saving lottery can each be set as a display mode of the reserved icon, and it is preferable to be able to display a combination display mode that combines two or more of the suggestion modes mentioned above as the display mode of one reserved icon. Also, in this case, it is preferable to be able to set the same display mode (a concept that includes differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing) as the combination display mode corresponding to different combinations.

This configuration allows the player to enjoy predicting the future game situation based on the display mode of the reserved icon displayed as a look-ahead effect. In addition, by determining the game situation in a comprehensive manner, including various information displayed on other display screens (e.g., the number of starts, etc.), it is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the future game situation indicated by the display mode of the reserved icon displayed as a look-ahead effect.

Next, the content of the effects that are executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded will be explained. Figure 440(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a special pattern change (ceiling reached change) in which a ceiling bonus (right-hand play state) is set after the ongoing special pattern change is stopped and displayed, and Figure 440(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a right-hand play state (ceiling mode) in which a ceiling bonus is awarded.

Here, in this thirteenth control example, a ceiling bonus (right-hand play state) can be set if the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 500 times) without winning a jackpot during the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state). In addition, when a ceiling bonus is set, the content of the ceiling bonus (degree of advantage to the player) is configured to differ depending on the set play state (normal state or first time-saving state).

The system is configured so that at least a part of the content of the ceiling bonus that will be awarded is notified to the player by the presentation mode of the ceiling reach variable presentation for notifying that a ceiling bonus will be awarded. By configuring it in this way, not only is the player notified that a ceiling bonus will be awarded when the ceiling bonus is awarded, but the content of the bonus can also be informed, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 440(a), when the ceiling reach variation effect is executed, a heavenly background corresponding to the ceiling mid-mode is displayed as the background image in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the characters "Ceiling!?" are displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a display mode to indicate that the ceiling has been reached (will be reached). Then, the ceiling reach variation effect is executed in a display mode in which the character 809 displayed in the ceiling reach suggestion effect celebrates the granting of the ceiling bonus. In addition, the contents 810a of the treasure chest 810 are displayed in a display mode including the information "100" to notify the contents of the current ceiling bonus.

Furthermore, the comment "Hit to the right" is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm as a guide to guide the player on how to play after the right-hit play state (third time-saving state) is set as the ceiling bonus. The comment "Ceiling reached!! Get 100 time-savings!!" is displayed on the sub-display area Ds as a notification to suggest that the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

As shown in FIG. 440(a), in the ceiling reach variation effect executed during the variation period of the special pattern variation in which the ceiling privilege granting condition is satisfied, the small display area Dm7 is configured not to display information indicating the number of times the special pattern has been drawn since the end of the previous big win game (information displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 439(a)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily determine the number of times the special pattern has been drawn in which the ceiling reach variation effect has been executed. Therefore, in order to know the number of times the special pattern has been drawn in which the condition for the ceiling privilege to be granted can be satisfied, it is necessary to always know the number of times the special pattern has been drawn before the ceiling reach variation effect is executed, and it is possible to make the player always interested in the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 even during left-hand play.

The above-mentioned ceiling reaching variable presentation is configured to be executed not only when the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed since the end of the previous jackpot game reaches the number of times (500 times) that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, but also when a jackpot is won that grants the same bonus as the ceiling bonus (right-hand play state) or when a specific time-saving feature is won that grants the same bonus as the ceiling bonus (right-hand play state).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the benefit currently being awarded is a ceiling benefit or not. If it is difficult for the player to determine the type of benefit that will actually be awarded by executing the ceiling reach variation presentation shown in FIG. 440(a) in multiple benefit awarding processes, it is preferable to configure the system so that at least a portion of the presentation mode of the ceiling reach variation presentation executed according to the type of benefit is changed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for only players who can distinguish slight differences in the presentation mode of the ceiling reach variation presentation executed to be able to determine the type of benefit currently being awarded.

In addition, the performance period during which the ceiling reach variation performance is executed, i.e., the variation time of the special pattern variation during which the ceiling reach variation performance is executed, may be configured to be different without changing the performance mode of the ceiling reach variation performance to be executed. For example, if the variation time of the special pattern variation for which a ceiling privilege is granted (the variation time of the special pattern variation for a non-winning win) is set to a basic time (e.g., 10 seconds), the variation time of the special pattern variation when the ceiling reach variation performance is executed based on a jackpot win (the variation time of the special pattern variation corresponding to a specific jackpot win) may be 11 seconds, and the variation time of the special pattern when the ceiling reach variation performance is executed based on a time-saving win (the variation time of the special pattern variation corresponding to a specific time-saving win) may be 12 seconds. By configuring in this way, the performance period of the ceiling reach variation performance can be made different depending on the type of privilege to be granted while executing the ceiling reach variation performance in the same performance mode. This makes it possible to execute different types of ceiling reach fluctuation effects depending on the type of bonus being awarded, while suppressing the increase in the amount of performance data required to execute the ceiling reach fluctuation effects. This makes it possible to determine the type of bonus being awarded only to players who can distinguish slight differences in the ceiling reach fluctuation effects being executed (differences in performance periods).

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this thirteenth control example, the ceiling reach variation effect shown in FIG. 440(a) can be executed even if the ceiling bonus is not awarded. In the ceiling reach variation effect (fake ceiling reach effect) executed in this case, the background image (heaven image) of the ceiling mode is displayed, similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 440(a), and an effect is executed in which a character 809 appears and attempts to open a treasure chest 810, and then a display mode indicating that a ceiling bonus will not be awarded (contents 810a with the word "unfortunate" written on it) is displayed from within the treasure chest 810, and then an effect is executed in which the background image switches to a normal background image.

During the execution period of this false ceiling reached effect, while the effect is being executed using the same effect as the ceiling bonus effect executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded, the comment "Ceiling reached?!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a mode indicating that the ceiling bonus is likely to be awarded, and when an effect indicating the result of the false ceiling reached effect is executed, the comment "Too bad!!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a mode indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded.

In this way, by configuring the false ceiling reach effect to be executable in a situation where the ceiling perk will not actually be awarded, when an effect result indicating that the ceiling perk will not be awarded is temporarily displayed as the effect result of the ceiling reach effect, and then an effect mode (revival effect) in which an effect in which the ceiling perk is not awarded is executed is executed, it is possible to easily make the player believe that the ceiling reach effect being executed is a false ceiling reach effect indicating that the ceiling perk will not actually be awarded.

As described above, in this thirteenth control example, even if a ceiling reach effect (including a false ceiling reach effect) is executed, it does not notify the player that a ceiling benefit will be awarded, but only indicates to the player that a ceiling benefit may be awarded. Therefore, the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 shown in FIG. 440(a) displays a display mode of "Ceiling!?", that is, a display mode indicating that a ceiling benefit may be awarded. In other words, the character "!?" of the characters "Ceiling!?" displayed in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 shown in FIG. 440(a) is a display mode indicating that it is not a definite notification that a ceiling benefit will be awarded. In this control example and other control examples, when "!?" is displayed as a character displayed on the display screen, it is used to indicate that the target to which the character is attached is not in a definite state.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, as shown in Figures 439(a) and 439(b), during the left-hand play state, the number of special pattern changes (number of starts) executed since the end of the previous big win game is displayed, and the number of special pattern changes (remaining number of changes) required until the ceiling bonus is awarded (until the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met) is not displayed, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be able to notify the number of remaining changes until the ceiling bonus is awarded. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to choose whether or not to continue playing after understanding the number of special pattern changes required until the ceiling bonus is awarded.

In addition, when the device is configured to be able to notify the player of information (e.g., the remaining number of times) corresponding to the number of special pattern changes (remaining number of changes) required until the ceiling bonus is awarded, the device may be configured to display presentation information (e.g., a number greater than the remaining number of times) corresponding to a value different from the actual remaining number of changes on the display screen, and the presentation information displayed on the display screen at the time the ceiling bonus is actually awarded may be presentation information indicating that the remaining number of changes required until the ceiling bonus is awarded is 0.

In this case, for example, if the number of remaining variations until the ceiling bonus is awarded is 200, the display mode of "300 remaining" is displayed as the presentation information displayed on the display screen. In other words, a remaining number greater than the actual number of remaining variations is displayed as the presentation information. Then, it is preferable to configure the value indicated by the presentation information displayed on the display screen to be updated (subtracted) to approach the actual number of remaining variations based on the establishment of an update condition, such as when the variation time of the executed special pattern variation is long, when a variation presentation is executed in a presentation mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, or when an operation presentation in which the player can operate the operation means is executed and the player operates the operation means during the operation presentation.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to subtract a larger number of remaining times displayed as the performance information than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, so it is possible to make the player believe that the performance result of the executed performance makes it easier for the ceiling bonus to be awarded (the number of remaining changes until the ceiling bonus is awarded has been shortened), thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, by configuring the remaining number of times displayed as the performance information to be able to be subtracted by a larger amount than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, if the result of the special pattern lottery before the ceiling privilege is awarded is a lottery result that can award a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) (a big win C13, or a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state), it is possible to easily execute a performance in which the remaining number of times displayed as the performance information is significantly updated (subtracted) to performance information indicating that the remaining number of changes required until the ceiling privilege is awarded is 0 by the time the special pattern for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the presentation executed when a benefit equivalent to the ceiling benefit (second time-saving state) is awarded from diverging from the content of the presentation executed when the ceiling benefit is awarded, making it difficult for the player to understand which benefit has been awarded. This makes it possible to make the player believe that the ceiling benefit will be awarded at various times (number of times of addiction), motivating them to play.

Next, in the ceiling mode, which indicates the period during which the ceiling bonus (right-hit game state in which the third time-saving state is set) has been granted, as shown in FIG. 440(b), a rabbit-like character 801 flies around heaven in the main display area Dm, and the words "Ceiling" are displayed to indicate that the mode is currently in the ceiling mode. Then, the words "Right-hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 as a guide display mode to guide the player on how to play, and the words "Last 90 times" are displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period display mode to notify the player of the remaining period until the ceiling bonus ends.

The display screen shown in Figure 440(b) is the display screen at the time when the special pattern lottery has been executed 10 times after "100" was displayed (see Figure 440(a)) as the content of the ceiling bonus in the ceiling reaching variable performance, indicating that 100 times of time reduction will be granted, so the value of "100", indicating the content of the ceiling bonus notified to the player when the ceiling bonus was granted, is subtracted each time a special pattern lottery is executed, and "90" is displayed.

In this way, by notifying the player of the period until the ceiling bonus ends (period during which the ceiling mode continues), it is possible to prevent the ceiling bonus from ending suddenly. Also, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured so that when a right-hit play state is set, it is easier for a player to be granted an advantageous bonus that is advantageous to the player as a bonus (jackpot play content or play state set after the jackpot play ends) granted to the player when a jackpot is won when the right-hit play state is set than when the left-hit play state is set. Therefore, the comment "Good things will happen if you hit the jackpot now!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this thirteenth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is the same (5/1000) in the left-hand play state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, and in the right-hand play state in which the third time-saving state is set, and in the left-hand play state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, if 500 consecutive special symbol lotteries that do not win a jackpot are performed, the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, and the third time-saving state (right-hand play state) is set as the ceiling bonus. And, it is configured so that it is easier to grant a bonus that is advantageous to the player when a jackpot is won in the right-hand play state than in the left-hand play state.

In other words, in the above-mentioned right-hand play state, when the remaining period (remaining number of special symbol lotteries) until the ceiling privilege is granted becomes short, the player does not expect to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, but plays the game hoping that he will not win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and hopes to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery after the right-hand play state is set, providing a novel gameplay. Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, although there are some that vary the degree of advantage for the privilege granted based on the jackpot winning according to the set play state, regardless of which play state is set, the player is configured to be more advantageous in terms of the privilege being granted in the case of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in the case of not winning the jackpot, so that regardless of which play state is set, the game has a monotonous gameplay in which the player aims to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to award bonuses based on the number of times the special symbol lottery has been drawn, rather than on the results of the lottery. Specifically, it is configured to set a right-hand play state (third time-saving state) if the special symbol lottery has been drawn 500 times without winning a jackpot during a left-hand play state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set. It is also configured so that a jackpot game with a larger number of play rounds is more likely to be played if a jackpot is won when the third time-saving state is set, than when the normal state or the first time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay experience in which, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the normal state or the left-hand play state in which the first time-saving state is set approaches 500, the player can hope that the special symbol lottery executed does not result in a jackpot win. In other words, it is configured so that a part of the play period during which the special symbol lottery is executed can be set as a special period in which a jackpot win is not expected.

Therefore, the player can be provided with a play period during which he or she hopes to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, and a play period (special period) during which he or she hopes not to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery (a losing win), which makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game earlier than with conventional pachinko machines 10 that always aim to win the jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 441, the effect (addition effect) when the remaining period of the ceiling mode is added will be explained. FIG. 441 shows an example of a display screen that is displayed during the addition effect in which information (remaining number of times) display showing the remaining period of the ceiling mode is added (added).

In this thirteenth control example, the ceiling reach fluctuation presentation (see FIG. 440(a)) that is executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded is configured to be able to notify the player of the content of the bonus (number of times the time is reduced), but the content of the bonus (number of times the time is reduced) notified in the ceiling reach fluctuation presentation is configured to be determined by referring to a dedicated selection table (ceiling reach presentation selection table 222lb), with the number of times the time is reduced set internally as the upper limit.

If a difference occurs between the content of the bonus (number of time-saving times) notified in the ceiling-reaching variation effect and the number of time-saving times set internally, an additional effect is executed during the ceiling-reaching mode to increase (add) the remaining period of the ceiling-reaching mode (the remaining number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 440(b)). By configuring in this way, a player for whom the ceiling-reaching mode has been set can play with peace of mind knowing the minimum period that the ceiling-reaching mode will continue, and can play while hoping that the period that the ceiling-reaching mode will continue will be extended.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, the content of the benefit granted as the ceiling benefit is varied depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling benefit is granted. Specifically, if the game state set at the time when the process for determining whether to grant the ceiling benefit is executed at the start of the special pattern fluctuation is the normal state, a right-hitting game state (third time-saving state) with 100 time-saving plays is set as the ceiling benefit, and if the game state set at the time when the process for determining whether to grant the ceiling benefit is executed at the start of the special pattern fluctuation is the first time-saving state, a right-hitting game state (third time-saving state) with 300 time-saving plays is set as the ceiling benefit.

In other words, the system is configured so that a ceiling bonus that is more advantageous to the player is awarded when the ceiling bonus is awarded in the first time-saving state, rather than when the ceiling bonus is awarded in the normal state. The system is also configured so that when a ceiling bonus of 300 time-saving times is awarded as the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) to be notified in the ceiling-reaching variable presentation, it is possible to notify the content of a ceiling bonus that is disadvantageous to the player (100 time-saving times).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the ceiling bonus given this time is a ceiling bonus advantageous to the player (300 times of time reduction) or disadvantageous to the player (100 times of time reduction) at the time when the ceiling reach fluctuation effect is executed. Note that in the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example, the content of the ceiling bonus notified in the ceiling reach fluctuation effect is configured to be within the range of the content of the ceiling bonus that is actually set, making it possible for the player to play with peace of mind in accordance with the notified content, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to execute a subtraction effect in which the content of the ceiling bonus (the number of times of time reduction) notified in the ceiling reach fluctuation effect is subtracted during the period in which the ceiling mode is set.

For example, if a ceiling privilege (100 time-saving times) unfavorable to the player is set, the ceiling reach variation effect may be configured to notify the player of the fact that a ceiling privilege (300 time-saving times) favorable to the player has been granted (displaying "300 times" in the small display area Dm7), and the information displayed in the small display area Dm7 in the ceiling mode (remaining number of time-saving times) may be deducted by a number greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to understand that a ceiling privilege (300 time-saving times) favorable to the player may have been set in the ceiling reach variation effect regardless of which ceiling privilege is granted, and the player can play in the hope that the favorable ceiling privilege has actually been granted.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured so that the same game (left-hand play) is executed when the normal state is set and when the first time-saving state is set, and the same variable presentation is executed during the left-hand play state in which the left-hand play is executed. In other words, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the game state that is set during the left-hand play state. Therefore, when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met during the left-hand play state, it is possible to make the player difficult to understand which bonus (number of time-savings) will be granted as the ceiling bonus, and therefore it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the ceiling bonus notified in the ceiling reach variable presentation.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to execute a time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) if the jackpot is not won in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state and when the first time-saving state is set, and if the result of the time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) is a win, the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) can be set without playing the jackpot after the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery that won the time-saving state.

When the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery, a time-saving end condition that is established when a special pattern change is performed once is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured so that the game state frequently switches between the normal state and the first time-saving state during the left-hand play state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily vary the game state set at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 special pattern lotteries) is met, making it difficult for players to understand the content of the bonus granted as the ceiling bonus (the number of time-saving bonuses).

The display screen shown in FIG. 441 shows a display mode indicating the content of the benefit corresponding to the ceiling benefit (100 times of time reduction) disadvantageous to the player in the ceiling reach variable presentation when the ceiling benefit (300 times of time reduction) is set as the ceiling benefit (see FIG. 440(a)), and this is the display screen at the time when 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed in the ceiling mode (the remaining number of time reductions displayed in the small display area Dm7 is 1 (last)), and "last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to indicate that this is the final period of the ceiling mode. Then, as an additional presentation to add to the remaining period of the ceiling mode, an additional presentation is executed in which an additional presentation mode 809a is displayed so that the character 809 extends the remaining period of the ceiling mode.

In FIG. 441, "+200" is displayed as the added feature 809a to indicate that the remaining period of the ceiling mode will be extended by 200 special symbol draws. Then, the added feature 809a moves toward the small display area Dm7, and an added effect is executed in which the remaining period displayed in the small display area Dm7 is changed to "Last 200 times". Then, the sub-display area Ds displays a guidance mode informing the player that the ceiling mode will be extended, and the words "Ceiling extension!! Plus 200 times!!" are displayed as a guidance mode indicating the details of the extension.

In the example shown in FIG. 441, a display screen is shown when an additional effect is executed during the final period of the ceiling mode (the special pattern change period when "Last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7), but the additional effect may be executed at a time other than the final period of the ceiling mode. For example, the additional effect may be executed when information indicating a predetermined period (for example, 90 remaining time reductions) is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as the remaining period of the ceiling mode (see FIG. 440(b)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the additional effect will be executed, thereby maintaining an interest in the effects executed during the ceiling mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 441, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to execute a dedicated effect as an added effect, but some of the effect modes of the added effect may be configured to be the same as the effect modes of other effects. For example, when the result of the special pattern lottery that is the target of the variable effect for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, a display mode including information indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and that the remaining period of the ceiling mode will be extended may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave open the possibility that the various effects (variable effects, etc.) executed during the ceiling mode will display a performance result indicating that the remaining period of the ceiling mode will be extended, so that the player can be interested in the various effects executed during the ceiling mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example, the additional effect is executed during the ceiling mode to extend the remaining period of the ceiling mode, but it may be configured to execute a revival effect in which the ceiling mode is set again after the display mode indicating the end of the ceiling mode is displayed. In this case, for example, instead of executing the additional effect in the final variable effect of the ceiling mode shown in FIG. 441, a termination screen indicating the end of the ceiling mode is displayed once, and an effect suggesting that the left-hand play state is set (for example, a part of the effect executed when the guide notification "Please return to left-hand play" is set) is executed, and then an effect indicating that the ceiling mode has not ended (a performance including a guide notification "Entering the ceiling mode!! Please continue playing with the right hand") is executed, and "200 times remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a display mode for indicating the remaining period of the ceiling mode.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that the ceiling mode has not simply continued, but that a new ceiling mode has been set after one ceiling mode has ended, making it difficult for the player to understand the conditions under which the ceiling mode is set (the conditions for granting the third time-saving state). Therefore, a player playing in a left-hand play state can continue playing while hoping that the third time-saving state (right-hand play state) will be set.

<Regarding transition of game state in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the transition of the game state in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 442. Fig. 442 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in Figure 442, the pachinko machine 10 in this 13th control example is configured to be able to set a left-hit game state in which a left-hit game is an advantageous game method for the player, in which a left-hit game is performed by firing a game ball toward the left side area (to the left of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 with the aim of having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 (see Figure 234), which triggers the execution of the first special pattern lottery, and a right-hit game state in which a right-hit game is performed by firing a game ball toward the right side area (to the right of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 with the aim of having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 (see Figure 234), which triggers the execution of the second special pattern lottery.

More specifically, if the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), the first time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or the second probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, the game state will be a left-handed play state, and if the second time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or the third time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the game state will be a right-handed play state.

Here, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are both game states in which a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, but the game is configured so that different lengths of normal symbol change time are set as the change time for normal symbol change (normal symbol change time). When the first time-saving state is set, the player has a higher probability of winning the normal symbol lottery than when the low probability state for normal symbols is set, but the normal symbol change time is specified so that the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game that is executed based on the winning win. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, even though the high probability state for normal symbols is set, left-handed play is a more advantageous game method for the player than right-handed play.

The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state for special symbols and a low probability state for normal symbols are set, but by configuring it so that a dedicated change time can be set as the change time for normal symbol change, it is a game state in which the rate at which game balls shot by right-handed play enter the second ball entrance 640 is higher than the rate at which game balls shot by left-handed play enter the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, when the third time-saving state is set, even though a low probability state for normal symbols is set, right-handed play is a more advantageous game method for the player than left-handed play.

First, the game content during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) will be explained. The normal state is a game state in which a game (special symbol 1 game) is played in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed by causing the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing from the left. When the first special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, a special symbol lottery is executed with a 1/200 probability of winning a jackpot, and if the jackpot is not won, a 1/2 probability of winning a time-saving lottery is executed.

When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state, one of the four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13) is set, and the selection rates for the jackpot types are set to 20% for jackpot A13, 30% for jackpot B13, 30% for jackpot C13, and 20% for jackpot D13.

When jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, jackpot play with 10 rounds (R) is played, and the normal state is set after the jackpot play ends. When jackpot B13 is set, jackpot play with 10 rounds (R) is played, and the second time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. When jackpot C13 is set, jackpot play with 2 rounds (R) is played, and the second time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. When jackpot D13 is set, jackpot play with 10 rounds (R) is played, and the second special state is set after the jackpot play ends.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state does not result in a jackpot win but instead wins the time-saving state, the special symbol fluctuation to show the result of the first special symbol lottery is stopped and then the time-saving state is set. In this thirteenth control example, if the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, one of two types of time-saving state is set, and the selection rate of the time-saving state in which the first time-saving state is set is 99%, and the selection rate of the time-saving state in which the second time-saving state is set is 1%. Note that the diagram shown in FIG. 442 shows the main transition flow of the game state, and therefore only shows the flow of transition to the first time-saving state when the time-saving state is won, but in reality, there is a 1% chance of transitioning to the second time-saving state when the time-saving state is won.

Next, we will explain the first time-saving state that is set when the time-saving prize is won. As described above, the first time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state for special symbol selection and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, but a time-saving (variable) state is set in which the time-saving period for normal symbols is set to a shorter time (0.1 seconds) than the second time-saving state described below, making it difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 even when playing with a right-handed ball. Therefore, like the normal state, left-handed play is more advantageous to the player than right-handed play.

In this thirteenth control example, since this is a game state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the term indicating the game state is called the first time-saving state, but since this is actually a game state in which the same game is executed as in the normal state, the normal state may be referred to as the first normal mode, and the first time-saving state may be referred to as the second normal mode, as terms indicating the game content.

This first time-saving state is a game state that is set only when the time-saving effect is won in the special pattern lottery, and when the first time-saving state is set by winning the time-saving effect, "one time of time-saving effect" is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state. Note that even if the special pattern lottery is executed during the first time-saving state, the same time-saving effect lottery (determination of whether the time-saving effect has been won) as in the normal state is executed, and even if the time-saving effect is won during the first time-saving state, the time-saving effect type is selected with the same selection ratio and the same content as in the normal state described above.

In other words, if the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state is neither a jackpot nor a time-saving win, the special pattern fluctuation to indicate the lottery result is stopped and then the time-saving end condition is met and the normal state is set. On the other hand, if the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state is a time-saving win, a new first time-saving state is set at the timing when the special pattern fluctuation is stopped and the first time-saving state is set repeatedly. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, the special pattern lottery in the first time-saving state continues as long as the time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and if the time-saving win is not won in the special pattern lottery, the special pattern lottery in the normal state is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to frequently switch between the normal state and the first time-saving state during left-hand play. Also, in the normal state (first normal mode) in which left-hand play is performed, and in the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the variable presentation executed using the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be set to the same presentation mode. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether the normal state or the first time-saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, when the number of consecutive special symbol lotteries that result in a miss in the normal state or the first time-saving state (the number of times of getting stuck) reaches 500, the third time-saving state is set as a ceiling privilege. As will be described in detail later, when the third time-saving state is set, the right-hand hitting state is set in which a right-hand hitting game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is more advantageous to the player than a left-hand hitting game in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, just like the second time-saving state described above.

In addition, the content of the ceiling bonus is configured to differ depending on the game state set at the time when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the left-hand play state (number of stuck times) reaches the number of times at which the ceiling bonus is awarded, and the ceiling bonus is awarded to a player who is more advantageous when the first time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example, the normal state and the first time-saving state are frequently switched during the left-hand play state, and the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to know whether the normal state or the first time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the third time-saving state is set as the ceiling bonus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which play state (normal state, first time-saving state) the player has transitioned from to the third time-saving state.

Returning to FIG. 442, we will continue the explanation. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the first time-saving state, one of the four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13) that are the same as when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state described above is set. Each jackpot type is selected at a different selection rate than when a jackpot is won in the normal state, and the selection rates for the jackpot types are set to 50% for jackpot A13, 20% for jackpot B13, 10% for jackpot C13, and 20% for jackpot D13.

The pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured so that the game state set when a jackpot is won and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are different depending on the set jackpot type. If a jackpot is won during the first time-saving state and jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. If jackpot B13 or jackpot C13 is set, the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. If jackpot D13 is set, the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the first time-saving state, there is a 50% chance that the normal state will be set after the jackpot play ends, a 30% chance that the first time-saving state will be set after the jackpot play ends, and a 20% chance that the second special state will be set after the jackpot play ends. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the first time-saving state, the player will be granted a less favorable privilege in terms of the play state that will be set after the jackpot play ends compared to if the jackpot is won in the normal state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example, when the number of times that the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state is set reaches a specific number (500 times), the right-hand play state (third time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state) can be set as a ceiling privilege, and when the play state set when the ceiling privilege is granted is the first time-saving state, a ceiling privilege (third time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be established) that is more advantageous to the player can be set. On the other hand, as a privilege (jackpot privilege) granted when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, the privilege (jackpot privilege) that is more advantageous to the player (a privilege in which the right-hand play state is more likely to be set after the jackpot play ends) is more likely to be granted when the normal state is set than when the first time-saving state is set.

Therefore, as game states that are set during the left-hand play state, a period in which the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state (the period until the number of times of getting stuck that the ceiling privilege is granted is reached) and a period in which the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (the period after the number of times of getting stuck that the ceiling privilege is granted is reached) are created. Therefore, compared to a case in which the player is simply made to play in the hope that one of the game states will be set, the type of game state that is expected to be set can be varied depending on the game situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state and either jackpot B13 or C13 is set as the jackpot type, the second time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. In this second time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, second probability state, etc.), similar to the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) set in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, and the normal symbol fluctuation time is set so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning play when the right-hand play is continuously executed.

This second time-saving state is a game state that is set in some (1%) cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and a specific jackpot type (jackpot B13, C13) is set, or where a time-saving lottery is won (not shown in FIG. 442). Note that in this thirteenth control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed when the second time-saving state is set. This makes it possible to prevent a time-saving lottery executed during the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, from being won and setting the first time-saving state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state.

In this thirteenth control example, the time-saving end condition for terminating the second time-saving state can be set differently depending on the trigger for setting the second time-saving state, and when jackpot B13 is set as a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving end condition is set to 100 times the time-saving state, and when jackpot C13 is set, the time-saving end condition is set to 300 times the time-saving state. Also, when the second time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving end condition is set to 300 times the time-saving state.

In this way, by varying the content of the time-saving end condition for terminating the second time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the second time-saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the second time-saving state will continue when the second time-saving state is set.

When the number of times that the special symbol lottery is executed in succession with a losing special symbol lottery, which is executed in the normal state or when the first time-saving state is set, reaches a specific number (500 times), the third time-saving state is set. The third time-saving state is a game state set as a ceiling privilege, and is a special game state that is not set based on the results of the special symbol lottery.

The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol are set, but the ball entry rate into the second ball entrance 640 in the case of right-hand play is configured to be the same as in the second time-saving state described above. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example is only slightly lower in the probability of winning in the low probability state of a normal symbol than in the high probability state of a normal symbol, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the opening operation pattern of the electric role performed during the normal symbol winning game are set to be the same in the state in which the third time-saving state is set and the state in which the second time-saving state is set. Therefore, the same game (right-hand play) is performed for the player when the second time-saving state is set and when the third time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing right-hand to understand whether the currently set game state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state.

As described above, in this thirteenth control example, when the number of consecutive times (stuck times) that a jackpot has not been won in a special pattern lottery executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state reaches a specified number (500 times), a special benefit (ceiling benefit) can be granted in which the third time-saving state (right-hand play state) is set.

Furthermore, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state (a jackpot where jackpot C13 is set), a jackpot game with fewer rounds (two-round jackpot) is executed compared to other jackpot wins, and after the jackpot game ends, a second time-saving state (right-hitting game state) is set in which the player plays the same game (right-hitting game) as in the third time-saving state. Furthermore, in some cases where a time-saving game is won in a special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state (a time-saving game where the second time-saving state is set), a special symbol variation is stopped to indicate that a time-saving game has been won, and then a second time-saving state (right-hitting game state) is set in which the player plays the same game (right-hitting game) as in the third time-saving state.

In other words, if the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the left-hand play state (the number of times it gets stuck) meets the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, or if the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state (whether or not a jackpot is won, whether or not a time-saving win is won) is a specific lottery result, it is possible to set a right-hand play state that is advantageous to the player. And, as an effect to indicate that the right-hand play state is being set, the same effect is executed regardless of which of the above-mentioned triggers is met, making it difficult for the player to understand the trigger that sets the right-hand play state.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set right-hit game states with different degrees of advantage depending on the trigger for setting the right-hit game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in advance whether the right-hit game state that is set is an advantageous game state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 443 to Fig. 449. This thirteenth example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 443 to Fig. 446. Fig. 443(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 443(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 13th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 5th control example (see FIG. 244(a)) in that the 1st win random number 13 table 202la is provided instead of the 1st win random number 5 table 202da, the 2nd win random number 13 table 202lc is provided instead of the 2nd win random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, the time-saving random number 13 table 202le is provided instead of the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf is provided instead of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. All other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 13th control example, some of the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) defined in the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db are different from those in the above-mentioned 5th control example, and instead of the normal/2nd probability 5 table 202db1 in the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the 5th control example, a left-hand play state 13 table (not shown) is provided. And, in the left-hand play state 13 table, a fluctuation pattern is defined so that a special fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds can be selected in any of the cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or neither a jackpot win nor a time-saving win.

In other words, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the same variation time (15 seconds) variation pattern is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the result of the special symbol lottery by identifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is set before the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this thirteenth control example, a special fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time 15 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command including information for indicating the selected fluctuation pattern, a ceiling reaching suggestion performance with a performance period of 15 seconds is executed. In other words, the ceiling reaching suggestion performance is an effect that is executed when a special fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation.

By making it possible to execute a variable effect (ceiling reach suggestion effect) corresponding to the type of variable pattern output from the main control device 110 in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing required for determining a variable effect corresponding to the received variable pattern on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In addition, since the variable time of the special pattern variation in which the ceiling reach suggestion effect is executed can be fixed to 15 seconds, the performance period of the ceiling reach suggestion effect can be fixed to 15 seconds regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. This makes it easier to reduce the amount of performance data corresponding to the performance mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect.

Next, the first winning random number 13 table 202la in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 444(a). FIG. 444(a) shows the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 13 table 202la in this thirteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 444(a), the first win random number 13 table 202la differs from the first win random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)) described above in that the range of values of the first win random number counter C1 that are determined to be a jackpot win is different. In addition, in this ninth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different. Specifically, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is specified as 900 values from "0 to 899", but in this thirteenth control example, it is specified as 1000 values from "0 to 999". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to specify a lower probability of judgment results in various judgments that are determined by referring to the value of the first win random number counter C1. In this thirteenth control example, only the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different, and the process for updating the value of the first win random number counter C1 and the configuration for storing the updated value are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is a "low probability state," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 4," and as "miss" for the range of "5 to 999." When the probability state is a "high probability state," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 19," and as "miss" for the range of "20 to 999."

In other words, when the probability state of the special symbol is a "low probability state," there are 1000 possible values that the first random number counter C1 can take, and 5 values that are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 5/1000 (1/200). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is a "high probability state," there are 1000 possible values that the first random number counter C1 can take, and 20 values that are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 20/1000 (1/50).

Next, referring to FIG. 444(b), the second winning random number 13 table 2021c in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 444(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 13 table 2021c. Like the second winning random number table 202c described above, this second winning random number 13 table 2021c is a data table that is referenced when determining the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and specifies the value that is determined to be a winning for each probability state of the normal pattern within the range of possible values of the second winning random number counter C4 (0 to 299).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 444(b), when the probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state," the lottery result is defined as "win" for the value of the second win random number counter C4 in the range of "0 to 298," and as "miss" for a value of "299." When the probability state is a "high probability state," the lottery result is defined as "win" for the value of the second win random number counter C4 in the range of "0 to 299," i.e., the entire range.

In other words, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured so that when a normal pattern lottery is executed, a winning combination will occur in most cases, regardless of the probability state of the normal pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the currently set probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state" or a "high probability state" depending on the result of the normal pattern lottery (depending on whether or not a normal winning game, which is executed when a winning combination is won in the normal pattern lottery).

In this thirteenth control example, the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is set high regardless of the probability state of the normal pattern, making it difficult to distinguish whether the currently set probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state" or a "high probability state." However, without being limited to this, it is sufficient to specify that the range of values of the second winning random number counter C4 that is determined to be a win is approximately the same for the "low probability state" and the "high probability state" of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, as shown in FIG. 444(b), in this thirteenth control example, when the "high probability state" of the normal pattern is set, there is no losing win in the normal pattern lottery, and when the "low probability state" of the normal pattern is set, there is a low probability (1/300) of losing win in the normal pattern lottery. Therefore, by knowing that there is a losing win in the normal pattern lottery, it is possible to know that the "low probability state" of the normal pattern is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery will be a losing one.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the normal symbol variation pattern so that the variation pattern set when the normal symbol lottery result is a miss is more likely to have a longer variation time (normal symbol variation time) than the variation pattern set when the normal symbol lottery result is a win. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the normal symbol winning game, which is executed when the normal symbol lottery result is a win, the higher the possibility that a low probability state for the normal symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to make players who are trying to understand the probability state of the normal symbol interested in the frequency of playing the normal symbol winning game.

Next, referring to FIG. 444(c), the time-saving random number 13 table 202le will be explained. This time-saving random number 13 table 202le is a data table referenced in the time-saving judgment (time-saving lottery) that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a jackpot win (miss), and differs from the above-mentioned time-saving random number 5 table 202de (see FIG. 245(c)) in that the conditions (special pattern type, game state) that stipulate the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is judged to be a time-saving win are different.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is "common" and the game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state, the range of the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 "500 to 999" is specified as the judgment value for the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state or the first time-saving state, the judgment value for the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure).

Here, in this thirteenth control example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won in the special pattern lottery (time-saving lottery) is configured to be executed when the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the jackpot lottery has been won but not won, and when the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state, the time-saving lottery has a probability of 1/2. In other words, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured to be possible to win the time-saving lottery in some game states among the game states (normal state, first time-saving state, second time-saving state, third time-saving state) in which the probability state of the special pattern is set to a low probability state. Also, it is configured to be possible to win the time-saving lottery in some game states among the game states (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) in which the probability state of the normal pattern is set to a high probability state.

In this way, whether or not a time-saving win can be obtained in the time-saving lottery is determined based on the set game state, rather than determining whether or not a time-saving win can be obtained in the time-saving lottery based on the probability state set for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). This makes it difficult for players to tell whether or not a special symbol lottery that can result in a time-saving win is being held.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, among the left-hand play states (normal state, first time-saving state, second special probability state) in which the main play is to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-hand play, it is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery in some of the left-hand play states (normal state, first time-saving state). And, when the second special probability state is set in the left-hand play state, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine the game state that is actually set when the left-hand play state is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily make a player who is playing in the left-hand play state believe that the time-saving lottery is always being executed.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this thirteenth control example, if a game state other than a game state in which a time-saving win can be obtained in the time-saving lottery is set, the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win can be obtained) is not executed, thereby ensuring that a time-saving win cannot be obtained. However, without being limited to this, the time-saving lottery can be executed regardless of the game state being executed, and a determination value that determines a time-saving win as a result of the time-saving lottery is not set for a game state in which a time-saving win cannot be obtained.

Next, referring to FIG. 445, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 445 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld. As shown in FIG. 445, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld specifies a common jackpot type for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, whether the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is selected by referring to a common data table.

In this thirteenth control example, five types of jackpot types are set when a jackpot is won: jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13, and jackpot E13. The selection rate for each jackpot type is varied depending on the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the type of time-saving state when the same jackpot type is set are varied depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 445, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "normal state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 19" is specified to correspond to "jackpot A13." This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that are "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing special symbols in the normal state is 20% (20/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "normal state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 49" is associated with "jackpot B13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state is 30% (30/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 50 to 79 is also associated with a "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (2-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 2 and the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the normal state is 30% (30/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "normal state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" is associated with "jackpot D13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second special state (30 special states) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 are "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state is 20% (20/100).

In other words, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that the left-hand play state (normal state, second probability variable state) will be set after the jackpot play ends is 40%, and the probability that the right-hand play state (second time-saving state) will be set is 60%. Also, for the jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot D13) in which the left-hand play state is set after the jackpot play ends, the same jackpot play (10-round jackpot play) is executed in both cases, so when the left-hand play state is set after the jackpot play ends, it is difficult to tell whether the normal state or the second probability variable state has been set.

In addition, when jackpot C13 is determined, a jackpot game with fewer rounds (2 rounds) is played than jackpot games corresponding to other jackpot types, making it difficult for the player to understand that a jackpot game is being played (is being played). Although detailed explanations are omitted, when a jackpot with jackpot C13 is won, a variable presentation is executed in a presentation mode that makes it difficult for the player to understand that a jackpot has been won, compared to when a jackpot with another jackpot type is won. Specifically, a ceiling reaching suggestion presentation that is executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded is executed.

By configuring it in this way, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, that is, when a jackpot type is set to jackpot C13, it is possible to make the player think that the game situation is such that a ceiling privilege is awarded, rather than that a jackpot has been won. Therefore, by winning a jackpot with jackpot C13 set, a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (300 times of time reduction) can be awarded to the player without meeting the predetermined ceiling privilege award condition (500 times of stuck play), making it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the ceiling privilege will be awarded. This makes it possible to make the player think that a different number of stuck play times may be set as the award condition for the ceiling privilege during a left-hand play state, and allows the player to continue playing while expecting the ceiling privilege to be awarded.

In addition, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving lottery is not executed until the second probability variable state ends and transitions to the normal state (until the value of the probability variable counter 203i reaches 0), and even if a special symbol lottery is executed, the number of times of getting stuck to award the ceiling bonus is not added. In other words, when the second probability variable state is set, the number of times of getting stuck reaches 500 when 530 special symbol lotteries are executed after the end of a jackpot game, and the ceiling bonus is awarded, so from the perspective of awarding the ceiling bonus, it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game.

In addition, during the period when the second special state is set, the judgment of whether or not the time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) is not executed, and therefore, compared to the period when the normal state is set in which the time-saving lottery is executed, in some cases (0.1%) when the time-saving win is made, the gameplay aiming to set the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is not executed, which makes the game state disadvantageous to the player from the viewpoint of setting the second time-saving state.

On the other hand, during the second probability change state, a high probability state for the special symbol is set, so the special symbol lottery executed during the second probability change state has a probability of 1/50 of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the period during which the second probability change state is set is a game state that is more advantageous for the player in terms of aiming to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than when the normal state is set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 445, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "first time-saving state (second normal mode)," the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49" is associated with "jackpot A13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing special symbols in the first time-saving state is 50% (50/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "first time-saving state (second normal mode)," the range of the value of the first win type counter C2 from "50 to 69" is specified to correspond to "jackpot B13." This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the first time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state is 20% (20/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 70 to 79 is also associated with a "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the first time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode) is 10% (10/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "first time-saving state (second normal mode)," the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" is specified to correspond to "jackpot D13." This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second special state (30 special times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode) is 20% (20/100).

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery during the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the probability that the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state, second special probability state) will be set after the jackpot play ends will be 100%. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won during the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the right-hand play state, which makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the left-hand play state, will not be set after the jackpot play ends, resulting in a play state that is less favorable to the player than the normal state.

As described above, in the normal state, if a jackpot that sets jackpot C13 is won, the second time-saving state is set, so even if the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are not met, a bonus equivalent to the ceiling bonus (the second time-saving state with 300 times of time saving) can be granted to the player. However, in the first time-saving state, even if a jackpot that sets jackpot C13 is won, the first time-saving state is set instead of the second time-saving state, so a bonus equivalent to the ceiling bonus (the second time-saving state with 300 times of time saving) cannot be granted to the player based on winning a jackpot.

Next, for the game state when a jackpot is won being the "second time-saving state (time-saving mode)," the range of values of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 9" is specified to correspond to "jackpot A13." This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the normal state. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery for special symbols in the second time-saving state is 10% (10/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second time-saving state (time-saving mode)," the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 59" is associated with "jackpot B13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving state is 50% (50/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "60 to 79" is also associated with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (2-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 2 and the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving state (time-saving mode) is 20% (20/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second time-saving state (time-saving mode)," the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" is specified to correspond to "jackpot D13." This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second special state (30 special times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving state (time-saving mode) is 20% (20/100).

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state, the probability that the left-hand play state (normal state, second probability variable state) will be set after the jackpot play ends is 30%, and the probability that the right-hand play state (second time-saving state) will be set is 70%. Also, if a high probability state for normal symbols (time-saving state) is set after the jackpot play ends, the second time-saving state (time-saving state in which the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal state) is always set, not the first time-saving state (time-saving state in which the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same as the normal state).

Therefore, the second time-saving state is a game state in which the player is more likely to receive advantageous benefits if he or she wins a jackpot in the special pattern lottery than the normal state and the first time-saving state described above.

Next, for the game state when a jackpot is won being the "second probability variable state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 29" is specified to correspond to "jackpot A13." This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the normal state. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing special symbols in the second probability variable state is 30% (30/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second probability variable state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "30 to 49" is specified to correspond to "jackpot B13." This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 20% (20/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 50 to 79 is also associated with a "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 30% (30/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second probability variable state," the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 89" is specified to correspond to "jackpot D13." This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second probability variable state (30 probability variable times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 10% (10/100).

Furthermore, for the game state when a jackpot is won being the "second probability variable state", the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "90 to 99" is specified to correspond to "jackpot E13". This "jackpot E13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second probability variable state (100 probability variable times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot E13", so the probability that "jackpot E13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 10% (10/100).

As described above, if a jackpot is won while the second probability variable state is set, multiple jackpot types for which the second probability variable state will be set after the jackpot play ends can be selected, and the number of probability variable times (the length of time that the second probability variable state will continue) is varied depending on the jackpot type selected. As described above, the number of special symbol draws performed during the second probability variable state is not added to the number of times a player gets stuck for granting the ceiling bonus, so the period from the end of the previous jackpot play until the ceiling bonus is awarded (the number of special symbol draws) can be varied depending on the length of time that the second probability variable state continues. This makes it difficult for players to easily grasp the remaining period of special symbol draws until the ceiling bonus is awarded.

As shown in FIG. 445, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured so that only when the second special state is set can a jackpot (jackpot D13, jackpot E13) be won that sets the second special state with a different number of special states (value set in special state counter 203i). However, without being limited to this, it may be configured so that even when a jackpot is won while another game state is set, a jackpot type that sets a different number of special states can be set.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed during the second high probability state is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck play for granting the ceiling privilege, but it is also possible to configure other game states to be set as game states in which the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed is not added to the value of the number of times of stuck play for granting the ceiling privilege, and for example, it is also possible to configure the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed during the first time-saving state not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck play.

By configuring in this way, the more times the time-saving win is won in multiple special symbol draws executed without winning the jackpot and the first time-saving state is set, the more difficult it becomes to establish the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the number of special symbol draws executed during the game state (second probability variable state) set after the end of the jackpot game is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck for granting the ceiling bonus, so it is possible to delay the timing of granting the ceiling bonus for the period during which the second probability variable state continues (the period until the value of the probability variable counter 203i becomes 0), but since the timing of granting the ceiling bonus can only be delayed for the predetermined period (the period during which the second probability variable state continues), there is a problem that the timing of granting the ceiling bonus is easily predicted for players who play the pachinko machine 10 for a long time.

In contrast to this, if the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the first time-saving state is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck play, the length of the period during which the first time-saving state is set can be varied between the end of the jackpot game and the number of times of stuck play at which the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, depending on the result of the time-saving lottery executed during the normal state or the first time-saving state. This makes it possible for the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed that is not updated to the value of the number of times of stuck play to be variable depending on the result of the time-saving lottery, rather than being a predetermined number. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ceiling privilege will be granted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf will be explained with reference to FIG. 446(a). FIG. 446(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf. This time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf is a data table referenced when determining the type of time-saving state (first to third time-saving states) to be set when the time-saving state is set without being based on a jackpot win, specifically, when the time-saving state is won in a time-saving lottery or when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, and stipulates the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1 and the ceiling 13 table 202lf2, which are referenced when determining the type of time-saving state when the time-saving state is won.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1, which is referred to when the time-saving winning is won, will be explained with reference to FIG. 446(b). FIG. 446(b) is a diagram for showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1. As shown in FIG. 446(b), the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1 stipulates different time-saving types for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time-saving type "first time-saving" is stipulated for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 998", and the time-saving type "second time-saving" is stipulated for the range of "999". Then, when "first time-saving" is selected, the first time-saving state is set, and as the time-saving end condition of the first time-saving state, a time-saving end condition is stipulated in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1". Furthermore, when "second time-saving" is selected, the second time-saving state is set, and the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving state is set to "300" as the value of the time-saving counter 203h.

In other words, the ratio of the first time-saving state being set when the time-saving win is won is 99.9%, and the ratio of the second time-saving state being set when the time-saving win is won is 0.1%. When the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, the time-saving end condition is established when the special pattern lottery is executed once. Here, in this thirteenth control example, since the time-saving lottery can be executed even during the first time-saving state, if the time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery executed in the state in which the first time-saving state is set, a new time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state and the time-saving type is set to "first time-saving", the first time-saving state is set after the special pattern variation is stopped, and the special pattern lottery is executed continuously in the first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is set to one time (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "1").

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state does not result in a winning combination, the first time-saving state ends when the special symbol fluctuation stops and the normal state is set. Therefore, the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, during the left-hand play period (stuck period) when special symbol lotteries are executed consecutively without winning the jackpot, the player can play by frequently switching between the normal state and the first time-saving state. In addition, since the game state in which the special symbol lottery is executed is configured to switch depending on the results of not only one time-saving lottery but multiple (2) time-saving lotteries executed consecutively, it is possible to make the multiple special symbol lotteries executed consecutively interesting.

Next, referring to FIG. 446(c), the contents of the ceiling table 13 202lf2 that is referenced when determining the time-saving type when the ceiling privilege is granted (when the third time-saving state is set) will be explained. FIG. 446(c) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the ceiling table 13 202lf2. This ceiling table 13 202lf2 is a data table possessed by the time-saving type selection table 13 202lf, and is referenced to determine the type of time-saving (number of time-savings) that is currently set when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met.

As shown in FIG. 446(c), the ceiling 13 table 202lf2 has different ceiling bonuses (number of time-saving times) that vary depending on the game state when the ceiling is reached (when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met). Specifically, if the game state when the ceiling is reached is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", and if the game state when the ceiling is reached is the first time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "300". When the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, the third time-saving state is set, in which the high probability state of normal symbols is not set and the game state becomes a right-hit game state while the low probability state of normal symbols is set.

In other words, when setting a right-hand play state that makes it easier for the player to execute a special pattern lottery based on the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed compared to a left-hand play state, the right-hand play state can be set without varying the probability state of the various patterns (special patterns, normal patterns). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing a process that varies the probability state of the various patterns (special patterns, normal patterns) without being based on the results of the special pattern lottery (the results of the jackpot lottery, the results of the time-saving lottery).

As described above, in this thirteenth control example, when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, the bonus can be granted to the player without changing the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). However, without being limited to this, the configuration may be such that a bonus is granted by changing the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) based on the fact that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met (changing the probability state from one unfavorable to the player to one favorable to the player).

In this case, it is advisable to configure the system so that when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, the second time-saving state is set instead of the third time-saving state. This allows the game state that is set during the right-hitting game state to be the second time-saving state only, simplifying the process for managing the game state.

Next, referring to FIG. 443(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 443(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 443(b), it differs from the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 244(b)) in that a special drawing lottery counter 203la, a first ceiling wait flag 203lb, and a second ceiling wait flag 203lc have been added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

The special symbol lottery counter 203la is a counter for measuring the number of times that special symbol lotteries are executed during a low probability state of a special symbol (number of times that they are stuck), and the counter value is referenced when determining whether the number of times that the ceiling bonus special symbol lottery has been executed meets the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus.

Specifically, when it is determined that a low probability state of the special pattern is set in the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) executed in the special pattern determination process 13 (see S30251 in FIG. 451) of the special pattern change process 13 (see S30104 in FIG. 450) (S38102 in FIG. 452: Yes), that is, when a special pattern lottery (special pattern change) is started during a low probability state of the special pattern, the value of the counter is incremented by 1 (S38103 in FIG. 452). Then, when the special pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win (S217 in FIG. 450: Yes), or when a ceiling privilege is awarded (S38351 in FIG. 455: Yes, or S38358 in FIG. 455: Yes), the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0.

In this thirteenth control example, when determining whether the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the special symbol (the number of stuck times) is referenced, and the ceiling privilege is granted when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the special symbol (the number of stuck times) reaches 500. As described above, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is not synchronized with the number of special symbol lotteries executed, but is configured so that the counter value is incremented in synchronization with the number of stuck times.

In this thirteenth control example, the number of times that special pattern lotteries are executed during a low probability state for the special pattern is added as the number of times that a player has been stuck; however, the conditions for adding the number of times that a player has been stuck, which are set as the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, may be different. For example, the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la may be added (the number of times that a player has been stuck) only when a special pattern lottery is executed for a specific special pattern type (first special pattern) out of multiple special pattern types (first special pattern, second special pattern), or the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la (the number of times that a player has been stuck) added based on the execution of one special pattern lottery may be greater when a special pattern lottery is executed when a specific game state (e.g., normal state) is set than when a special pattern lottery is executed when another game state (e.g., first time-saving state) is set. This configuration makes it difficult for players to grasp the remaining number of times the special symbol lottery must be executed (remaining number of winning streaks) before the ceiling bonus is awarded.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, only the conditions for incrementing the value of the special drawing counter 203la are stipulated, and when a jackpot is won (when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are cleared), the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared to 0 when the ceiling privilege is granted. Therefore, when the number of times of getting stuck reaches 500 times and the third time-saving state (100 times or 300 times of time-saving) is set as the ceiling privilege, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is incremented each time a special pattern lottery is executed in the third time-saving state. Therefore, when the number of times of getting stuck reaches 500 times again after the third time-saving state is set as the ceiling privilege, that is, when the number of times of getting stuck since the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 1000 times, the second ceiling privilege is granted.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to grant the ceiling privilege again to a player who did not win the jackpot even during the period when the third time-saving state granted as the ceiling privilege is set. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the value of the special pattern selection counter 203la is cleared to 0 at the timing when the ceiling privilege is granted. Therefore, when the third time-saving state with 100 time-saving times is set, the value of the special pattern selection counter 203la becomes 100 when the third time-saving state ends, and when the third time-saving state with 300 time-saving times is set, the value of the special pattern selection counter 203la becomes 300 when the third time-saving state ends. Therefore, when playing a game aiming for the second ceiling privilege, it is easier to reduce the number of special pattern selections to be performed in the left-hand play state than when playing a game aiming for the first ceiling privilege.

In this thirteenth control example, the number of consecutive hits before the ceiling bonus is awarded is set to 500, and the condition for awarding the ceiling bonus is met for the second and subsequent ceiling bonuses when the number of consecutive hits reaches 500. However, without being limited to this, the first ceiling bonus may be awarded when the number of consecutive hits reaches 500, and then the second ceiling bonus may be awarded when the number of consecutive hits since the first ceiling bonus was awarded reaches 300, i.e., when the number of consecutive hits since the end of the previous big win game reaches 800.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the third time-saving state with 300 time-savings is set as the first ceiling bonus, it becomes possible to award the second ceiling bonus immediately after the end condition of the third time-saving state (300 special pattern draws) is met, and the third time-saving state can be set continuously, making it easier for players to continue playing.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, when a special symbol lottery is executed, a process is executed to increment or decrement the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la depending on the set game state. In addition, the process may be configured to decrement the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la when the special symbol lottery that is executed satisfies certain conditions.

The first ceiling wait flag 203lb is a flag for indicating that the ceiling privilege granting condition is met when the normal state is set, and is set to ON when the ceiling privilege granting condition is met (when the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la reaches 500). Then, in the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254 in FIG. 455) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is determined (S38351 in FIG. 455), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S38351 in FIG. 455: Yes), the privilege (time saving 100 times) corresponding to the case where the game state at the time when the ceiling privilege granting condition is met is normal is granted as the content of the ceiling privilege (S38352 in FIG. 455), and then the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is set to OFF.

The second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is a flag for indicating that the ceiling awarding condition is met when the first time-saving state is set, and is set to ON when the ceiling awarding condition is met (when the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la reaches 500). Then, in the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254 in FIG. 455) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is determined (S38358 in FIG. 455). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S38358 in FIG. 455: Yes), the ceiling award is given as the content of the award (time saving 300 times) corresponding to the case where the game state at the time when the ceiling awarding condition is met is the first time-saving state (S38359 in FIG. 455), and then the second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is set to OFF.

In this thirteenth control example, the process of determining whether the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met (ceiling determination process) is executed at the start of the special symbol variation, and the process of actually granting the ceiling bonus (time-saving setting process) is executed at the stop of the special symbol variation. The result of the ceiling determination process executed at the start of the special symbol variation is determined by the time-saving setting process executed at the stop of the special symbol variation, based on the setting status of the first ceiling wait flag 203lb or the second ceiling wait flag 203lc.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to award appropriate ceiling benefits even when using a pachinko machine 10 with gameplay in which the game state changes during the execution of a special pattern change, a pachinko machine 10 with gameplay in which the game state changes between the execution of a ceiling determination process and the start of a special pattern change, or a pachinko machine 10 with gameplay in which the game state changes between the display of a stopped special pattern change and the execution of a time-saving setting process.

Next, with reference to Figs. 447 to 449, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 447(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 447(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 447(a), the ROM 222 in this thirteenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la and a ceiling reach performance selection table 222lb have been added.

The ceiling reach suggestion effect selection table 222la is a data table that is referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect when the ceiling reach suggestion effect is executed as a variation effect corresponding to a special pattern variation during a left-hand play state. In this thirteenth control example, during the period until the number of stuck hits at which the ceiling bonus is awarded is reached, a ceiling reach suggestion effect is configured to be executable to suggest to the player the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded.

By executing the ceiling reaching suggestion effect in this way, it is possible for a player playing left-handed to predict the remaining time until the ceiling privilege is granted, and to play while expecting the ceiling privilege to be granted. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is configured to suggest not only the remaining time until the ceiling privilege is granted, but also that a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) will be set based on the result of the special pattern lottery. This allows for the execution of a ceiling reaching suggestion effect that indicates a high possibility of the ceiling privilege being granted at a timing that is unexpected for the player (for example, a timing when the number of special pattern lotteries executed after the end of a jackpot game is about 20), and a surprising game can be provided in which the second time-saving state is set after the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the number of times of getting stuck that the ceiling privilege is granted may be set to a small number, and it is possible to motivate the player to play left-handed. Furthermore, since the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state) is granted (set) based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, it is easy to determine the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, whereas the privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) is granted (set) based on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, and therefore the timing of granting the privilege tends to be more random than the third time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the state will transition to the right-handed play state in which the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state) or the privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) is set, and it is possible to make the player interested in the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation that is executed in order to quickly grasp the timing of the transition to the right-handed play state.

Here, the detailed contents of the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la will be explained with reference to FIG. 448. FIG. 448 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la. As shown in FIG. 448, the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la defines two types of performance modes as the performance modes of the ceiling reach suggestion performance, corresponding to the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc, the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) corresponding to the acquired special symbol reservation (reserved memory of special symbol), and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, if the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is "0 to 200" and the pre-reading result includes information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13", then "ceiling suggestion (strong)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation for the range of the acquired presentation counter 223f from "0 to 79", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation for the range of "80 to 99", and if the pre-reading result does not include information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13" (otherwise), then "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation for the entire range of the acquired presentation counter 223f from "0 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is "201 to 460" and the pre-reading result includes information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13", the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 79", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the range of "80 to 99", as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation. When the pre-reading result includes information indicating a "time-saving win", the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 19". " is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation when the value of the presentation counter 223f obtained is in the range of "0 to 4", "suggestion mode (weak)" is specified for the range of "20 to 39", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified for the range of "40 to 99". If the pre-read result does not include information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13" or a "time-saving win" (otherwise), "ceiling suggestion (weak)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation when the value of the presentation counter 223f obtained is in the range of "0 to 4", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified for the range of "5 to 99".

Furthermore, if the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is "461 to 495" and the pre-reading result includes information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13", then the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 19", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the range of "20 to 99", as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation, and if the pre-reading result includes information indicating a "time-saving win", then the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 39", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the range of "20 to 99". "Ceiling Suggestion (Weak)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation, and "Suggestion Mode (Strong)" is specified for the range of "40 to 99", and "Ceiling Reaching Suggestion" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation when the obtained presentation counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 49", "Ceiling Suggestion (Strong)" is specified for the range of "50 to 69", and "No Suggestion Mode (shown as "-" in the figure) ... for the range of "70 to 99".

Finally, when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is "496 to 500", regardless of the result of the advance reading, the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation is specified as "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 9", "ceiling suggestion (weak)" for the range of "10 to 39", and "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "40 to 99".

In other words, the contents of the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la are stipulated so that the shorter the remaining time until the number of stuck times at which the ceiling privilege is granted is, that is, the larger the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c, the easier it is to set the ceiling suggestion mode, and the easier it is to set the "ceiling suggestion (strong)" as the suggestion mode to emphasize and suggest that the remaining time is short. In addition, when there is a special symbol reserved that wins "jackpot C13", in which a benefit equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) is set, the "ceiling suggestion (strong)" is stipulated to be selected easily regardless of the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c. Therefore, even if the right-hit play state (second time-saving state) is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to suggest that to the player before the special symbol change that wins the jackpot is executed.

Furthermore, when the pre-reading result includes information indicating a time-saving win, there remains a slight possibility that the second time-saving state will be set based on the time-saving win, so the ceiling suggestion mode is configured to be set more easily than when the pre-reading result does not include information indicating a time-saving win. Note that in this thirteenth control example, the second time-saving state (right-hit play state) can be set in a portion (0.01%) of the time-saving wins in the time-saving lottery. And, the information used when selecting the presentation mode of the ceiling-reach suggestion presentation is not information on whether or not a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state has been won by the time-saving lottery, but simply information on whether or not a time-saving win has been used.

By configuring it in this way, when a time-saving mode that does not set the second time-saving state (right-hit play state) is won and when a time-saving mode that sets the second time-saving state (right-hit play state) is won, the presentation mode (suggestion mode) of the ceiling-reached suggestion presentation is selected at the same selection rate. Therefore, even when the right-hit play state is not set, it is possible to execute a ceiling-reached suggestion presentation (so-called false presentation) that includes a ceiling suggestion mode at an appropriate rate.

In addition, without being limited to the contents of this thirteenth control example, for example, when there is a pre-reading result indicating that the time-saving state in which the second time-saving state is set will be selected, the ceiling suggestion state may be configured to be set more easily than when there is no pre-reading result indicating that the time-saving state in which the second time-saving state is set will be selected.

The ceiling reaching effect selection table 222lb is a data table that is referenced when determining the effect mode of the ceiling reaching effect executed by the special pattern change when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, and different effect modes are defined based on the content of the ceiling privilege that is currently being granted (number of time-saving cycles), the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot, miss) indicated by the special pattern change when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f.

When the ceiling-reaching performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 440(a), the ceiling-reaching performance is executed in a performance mode including a mode indicating that the ceiling bonus will be awarded and a mode indicating the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times). This allows the player to know that the ceiling bonus will be awarded (the third time-saving state will be set) before the ceiling bonus is actually awarded.

In addition, if a jackpot is won with a special pattern change that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, i.e., if the jackpot game starts without the ceiling bonus being awarded, the presentation mode for the ceiling reaching presentation is set to a presentation mode that indicates that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being played without playing right immediately after it is notified that the ceiling bonus (for example, 300 times of time reduction) will be awarded, which can cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the thirteenth control example, the ceiling reaching effect is executed when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc satisfies the ceiling bonus awarding condition (when it reaches 500), but the present invention is not limited to this. The ceiling reaching effect may be executed when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc reaches a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 100), and when the ceiling bonus awarding condition is not actually met, a performance mode is set to indicate that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded. By configuring in this way, when the ceiling reaching effect is executed in a performance mode indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded, the possibility of winning the jackpot can be left open, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Now, referring to FIG. 449, the contents stipulated in the ceiling-reaching effect selection table 222lb will be explained. FIG. 449 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the ceiling-reaching effect selection table 222lb. As shown in FIG. 449, the ceiling-reaching effect selection table 222lb stipulates the effect modes (effects A to C) in association with the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times), the result of the target special symbol lottery, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and stipulates the value to be set in the ceiling time-saving counter 223la and the setting contents of the later-addition flag 223lb in association with each effect mode.

Specifically, when the content of the ceiling bonus to be awarded is "time reduction 100", that is, when the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met during normal play and the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the performance mode "Performance A" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99". In this case, the ceiling unreached mode, which indicates that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded as the performance when the ceiling is reached, is set. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time reduction counter 223la, and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off (not set to on).

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is a counter for measuring a value related to the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) that has been notified to the player in advance, and the value is set when the presentation mode for the ceiling-reaching presentation is set. Then, the value is subtracted each time a special pattern change is executed, and when the value after subtraction becomes 0, the remaining number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as the ceiling bonus is determined, and if there are remaining time-saving times, a presentation corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (additional presentation) is executed.

The later-addition flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling-reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus, and is set to on when a value other than the value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus (a value corresponding to a number less than the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la.

In other words, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot," it is not possible to play in the third time-saving state that is granted as a ceiling bonus. Therefore, the performance mode for the performance when the ceiling is reached is set to "Performance A," which indicates that no ceiling bonus will be granted, and the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is not set, and the later-addition flag 223lb remains off.

On the other hand, if the ceiling bonus is "time reduction 100" and the result of the special symbol lottery is "miss", the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to the range of "0 to 19" and the effect mode "effect A" is set, the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "1", and the later addition flag 223lb is set to ON.

In this case, the third time-saving state (100 times of time-saving) is actually granted as the ceiling bonus, but an effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted is executed as the ceiling-reaching effect, and after the ceiling-reaching effect ends, an additional effect (see FIG. 441) is executed to notify the player of the additional 100 times of time-saving. In this way, even when the ceiling bonus is actually granted, by configuring the ceiling-reaching effect to be able to set the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted, it is possible to execute the ceiling-reaching effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted even when the result of the special pattern lottery in which the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met is not a result in which the ceiling bonus will no longer be granted (a big win), and therefore the frequency of the ceiling-reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set can be increased.

In addition, for the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f from "20 to 99", the effect mode "effect B" is set. This effect mode "effect B" is an effect mode in which an effect including an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus will be awarded as an effect when the ceiling is reached, and an effect indicating that the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus is "100 times of time reduction". In this case, the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus (100 times of time reduction) matches the content of the bonus notified to the player in the effect when the ceiling is reached (100 times of time reduction), so an additional effect is not executed, and therefore the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "101", and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off.

Next, if the content of the ceiling bonus to be awarded is "time reduction 300", that is, if the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met during the first time-saving state and the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the performance mode "Performance A" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99". In this case, a ceiling unreached mode is set as the performance when the ceiling is reached, indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time-saving counter 223la, and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off (not set to on).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "miss," the presentation mode "Presentation A" is set for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 19," the ceiling time-saving counter 223la value is set to "1," and the later-mounting flag 223lb is set to ON.

In this case, the third time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is actually granted as the ceiling bonus, but an effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted is executed as the ceiling-reaching effect, and after the ceiling-reaching effect ends, an additional effect (see FIG. 441) is executed to notify the addition of 300 times of time-saving. In this way, even when the ceiling bonus is actually granted, by configuring the ceiling-reaching effect to be able to set the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted, it is possible to execute the ceiling-reaching effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted even when the result of the special pattern lottery in which the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met is not a result in which the ceiling bonus will no longer be granted (a big win), and therefore the frequency of the ceiling-reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set can be increased.

In addition, the effect mode "effect B" is set for the range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "20 to 49". This effect mode "effect B" is an effect mode in which an effect including an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus is granted as the ceiling reaching effect, and an effect indicating that the content of the bonus granted as the ceiling bonus is "100 times of time reduction". In this case, the content of the bonus granted as the ceiling bonus (300 times of time reduction) does not match the content of the bonus notified to the player in the ceiling reaching effect (100 times of time reduction), and at the end of the ceiling mid-mode effect (see FIG. 440(b)) corresponding to the short time period notified in the ceiling reaching effect, an additional effect that adds 200 times of time reduction is executed, so the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "101" and the later addition flag 223lb is set to ON.

Furthermore, for the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "50 to 99", the effect mode "effect C" is set. This effect mode "effect C" is an effect mode in which an effect including an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus will be awarded as an effect when the ceiling is reached, and an effect indicating that the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus is "300 times of time reduction". In this case, since the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus (300 times of time reduction) and the content of the bonus notified to the player in the effect when the ceiling is reached (300 times of time reduction) match, no additional effect is executed, so the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "301" and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 447(b). FIG. 447(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 447(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(b)) in that a ceiling time-saving counter 223la, a later-loading flag 223lb, and a special drawing count counter 223lc have been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The ceiling time-saving counter 223la is a counter for measuring a value related to the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) that has been notified to the player in advance, and the value is set when the presentation mode for the ceiling-reaching presentation is set. The value is then subtracted each time a special pattern change is executed, and when the value after subtraction becomes 1, the number of remaining time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as the ceiling bonus is determined, and if there are remaining time-saving times, a presentation corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (additional presentation) is executed.

The ceiling time-saving counter 223la is set when the ceiling reaching effect (the effect corresponding to the special symbol change just before the third time-saving state is set) is executed, so that the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state is set to a value that is one plus the value notified in the ceiling reaching effect (see S34503 in FIG. 463), and the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is subtracted by one each time a change effect corresponding to a special symbol change is set while the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is set (see S34408 in FIG. 462). This makes it possible to determine the timing at which a special symbol change change effect is set, in which the remaining number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state notified to the player in the ceiling reaching effect is one (last), using the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la (see S34410 in FIG. 462).

The later-addition flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling-reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus, and is set to on when a value other than the value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus (a value corresponding to a number less than the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la.

This later-loading flag 223lb is set to on in accordance with the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) that is actually set and the presentation style of the ceiling-reaching presentation (S34504 in FIG. 463), and when the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la becomes 1 (S34410 in FIG. 462: Yes), the setting status of the flag is determined (S34411 in FIG. 462). This makes it possible to determine whether the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state (value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la) notified to the player in the ceiling-reaching presentation matches the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state that is actually set, and if they do not match (if the later-loading flag 223lb is set to on), an additional presentation is executed.

The special symbol lottery count counter 223lc is a counter for measuring the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times it gets stuck) to satisfy the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, and when a command is received to indicate the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la measured by the main control unit 110 (S9093 in FIG. 459: Yes), the value indicated by the received command is set (see S9094 in FIG. 459). This is then referenced when determining the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation (see S34508 in FIG. 463).

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example>
Next, referring to Figures 450 to 457, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in the 13th control example will be described, focusing on the points that differ from the above-mentioned 5th control example. The pachinko machine 10 of the 13th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 5th control example in that a process for determining whether or not to grant a ceiling bonus based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed and a process for granting the ceiling bonus are added, the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is changed, and the contents of the process based on the normal symbol lottery are described in detail.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol change process 13 (see S30104 in FIG. 450) and normal symbol change process 13 (see S30106 in FIG. 456) and start-up process (see FIG. 457) are illustrated instead of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252). The rest of the processing content is the same, and detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol change process 13 (S30104) will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol change process 13 (S30104). As shown in FIG. 450, the special symbol change process 13 (S30104) differs from the above-mentioned special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) in that the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 252) is replaced with the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251), the special symbol change pattern selection process 5 (see S252 in FIG. 252) is replaced with the special symbol change pattern selection process 13 (S30252), and the time-saving setting process 5 (S254 in FIG. 252) is replaced with the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251) will be described with reference to FIG. 451. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251). As shown in FIG. 451, when the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S8001), the lottery result (jackpot) determination result) is obtained based on the first winning random number 13 table 202la (S8002), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot win (S8003). If it is determined that it is a jackpot win (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot (S8004), and the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8005), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8003 that the jackpot has not been won (S8003: No), then ceiling determination processing 13 is executed (S38051), and then time-saving lottery processing 13 is executed (S38006), and this processing ends. In other words, the special symbol determination processing 13 (S30251) executed in this thirteenth control example differs from the special symbol determination processing 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) executed in the fifth control example described above in that ceiling determination processing 13 (S38051) is added, and time-saving lottery processing 5 (S8006 in FIG. 253) is replaced with time-saving lottery processing 13 (S38006). The rest of the processing content is the same, and the explanation of the same processing content will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) will be described with reference to FIG. 452. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051). In this ceiling determination process 13 (S38051), a process is executed to determine whether the special symbol lottery executed this time is a special symbol lottery that can update the awarding condition (number of times of streaks) for awarding a ceiling privilege, and to update the awarding condition (number of times of streaks) based on the determination result, a process to determine whether the awarding condition of the ceiling privilege has been met based on the updated number of times of streaks, and a process to hold information indicating that the awarding condition of the ceiling privilege has been met until the setting condition of the ceiling privilege is met.

When the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102). If it is determined that the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la (S38103), and it is determined whether the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la after the addition has reached 500 (S38104).

If it is determined in the process of S38104 that the value of the special drawing counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), a status command including information indicating the current value of the special drawing counter 203la is set (S38105), and this process ends. The status command set by the process of S38105 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other status commands set in the fifth control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a status command indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la is received, the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc is updated. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to determine the value of the special drawing counter 203la, i.e., the number of times it has been stuck.

On the other hand, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is 500, i.e., if it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met (S38104: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game state, i.e., the game state at the time when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, is a normal state (S38106), and if it is determined that it is a normal state (S38106: Yes), the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to on (S38107), and a state command including information indicating that the player is waiting for the ceiling and information indicating the ceiling type (first ceiling) is set (S38108), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S38106 that the current state is not the normal state, i.e., that the current state is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state (S38106: No), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to ON (S38109), and the process proceeds to S38108. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S38102 that the current state is not a low probability state for the special symbol, i.e., that the condition for updating the number of times of stuck hits is not met (S38102: No), the process ends as it is.

As explained above, in this thirteenth control example, when the number of times that special pattern lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of stuck times) reaches a specified value (500 times), the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are established, and the number of stuck times is not updated (incremented) in accordance with every special pattern lottery that is executed, but rather, when a special pattern lottery that satisfies the update condition for the number of stuck times is executed (corresponding to S38102: Yes in Figure 452), the number of stuck times (value of special pattern lottery count counter 2231c) is updated (incremented).

By configuring it in this way, the number of special symbol draws performed after the end of a jackpot game can be made different from the number of stuck times, so even if a specific number (500 times) is specified as the number of stuck times at which the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, it is possible to make the number of special symbol draws performed before the number of stuck times reaches the specific number different. This makes it difficult for players to predict at what point (number of special symbol draws) the ceiling privilege will be granted.

In the thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 452, when a special symbol lottery is executed during a low probability state of a special symbol, the number of times of the stuck is updated, and when a special symbol lottery is executed during a high probability state of a special symbol, the number of times of the stuck is not updated. In other words, the low probability state of a special symbol is set as the update condition for the number of times of the stuck, but the update condition for the number of times of the stuck is not limited to this. For example, when a specific game state (first time-saving state) is set, the update condition for the number of times of the stuck may be configured not to be established, when a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) is executed, the update condition for the number of times of the stuck may be configured not to be established, or when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result, the update condition for the number of times of the stuck may be configured not to be established for a predetermined period thereafter (the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the number of times of the stuck becomes a specific number. This makes it difficult for players to predict when (how many times the special symbol will be drawn) the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 452, when the condition for updating the number of stuck games is met, the number of stuck games is updated (added) once each time a special pattern lottery is executed, but without being limited to this, the number of stuck games may be updated two or more times or less than one time (0.5 times) for one special pattern lottery, or the number of stuck games may be subtracted for one special pattern lottery. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict at what point (number of special pattern lotteries) the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) will be explained with reference to FIG. 453. FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006). This time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) is executed instead of time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) executed in the fifth control example described above, and differs in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are changed to correspond to the game specifications.

Specifically, when the time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) is executed, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S8102), and it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state (S38151). If it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state (S38151: Yes), the execution condition for the time-saving lottery is met, so the lottery result of the time-saving lottery is obtained based on the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (S38152), and then the same processes of S8105 and S8106 as those of the time-saving lottery process 5 described above (see S8101 in FIG. 254) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the processing of S38151 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal state or the first time-saving state, that is, the gaming state is one in which the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery have not been met (S38151: No), this processing ends without executing the time-saving lottery.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252) will be explained with reference to Figure 454. Figure 454 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252). This special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 13 (S30252) differs from the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 5 (see S252 in FIG. 255) executed in the fifth control example described above in that the data table referred to in determining the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won is changed from the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd (see FIG. 246) to the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld (S38251), the data table referred to in determining the type of time-saving when a time-saving win is won is changed from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (see FIG. 248(b)) to the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf (S38253), and the data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuation is changed from the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247) to the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202db (see S38252), but is otherwise the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same symbols and their explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254) will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254). This time-saving setting process 13 (S30254) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in that a process is added to set the time-saving state (third time-saving state) when information indicating that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met is set in the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) (when the first ceiling standby flag 203lb or the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to on).

Furthermore, when the satisfaction of the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege by the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) and the winning of the time-saving lottery based on the execution of the special pattern lottery in 1 overlap, the setting of the time-saving state based on the satisfaction of the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege is processed as a priority, and a process is executed to discard information related to the winning of the time-saving state, which is a difference in that a priority order is set in advance for the settings of multiple time-saving states.

When the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S38351: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38352), the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to OFF (S38353), the third time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a status command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving draws is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S38351, if it is determined that the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is not set to on (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to on (S38358). If it is determined that it is set to on (S38358: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38359), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to off (S38360), the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), information related to this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process ends.

Then, in the process of S38358, if it is determined that the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are not met based on the special pattern lottery executed this time (S38358: No), the process of S8351 to S8354 is executed, which is the same as the time-saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in the fifth control example described above, and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this thirteenth control example, the control process (time-saving setting process 13 (S30254)) executed when the special pattern variation is stopped is configured to determine whether the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met (whether the lottery result allows the time-saving state to be set, or whether any of the various ceiling waiting flags are set to on), and to set the time-saving state if it is determined that the setting conditions are met; however, a different timing may be adopted for setting the time-saving state; for example, it may be configured to determine whether the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met at the timing when the special pattern variation starts (the timing when the process for starting the special pattern variation is executed), and to set the time-saving state if it is determined that the setting conditions are met.

In addition, the time-saving state may be set between the establishment of the setting conditions for the time-saving state and the execution of the next special pattern lottery. For example, when the setting conditions for the time-saving state are established, a predetermined value may be set in a measuring means (timer) capable of measuring the passage of time, and the time-saving state may be set when the time corresponding to the value set in the measuring means has elapsed. Alternatively, when the setting conditions for the time-saving state are established (when any of the various ceiling waiting flags is set to on), a setting lottery (for example, a lottery executed in the main processing executed periodically by the main control device 110) may be executed periodically, and the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the setting lottery is won. In this way, by configuring the time-saving state to be set at various times within the range of the period from the establishment of the setting conditions for the time-saving state to the execution of the next special pattern lottery, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time-saving state is set.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, multiple time-saving setting conditions for setting the time-saving state can be set, and multiple time-saving setting conditions can overlap and be established based on one special pattern drawing. Specifically, it is possible to set a lottery result time-saving setting condition that is established based on the result of the special pattern drawing, and a lottery count time-saving setting condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern drawing is performed.

The system is configured to be able to determine whether or not a time-saving setting condition (lottery count time-saving setting condition) that is likely to set a time-saving state (right-hand play state) that is advantageous to the player is met, and when it is determined that the lottery count time-saving setting condition is met, it is possible to set a time-saving state based on the lottery count time-saving setting condition being met, regardless of whether or not a lottery result time-saving setting condition that is unlikely to set a time-saving state (right-hand play state) that is advantageous to the player is met.

By configuring it in this way, even if multiple time-saving setting conditions are met at the same time, it is possible to prioritize and easily set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, thereby preventing the player from easily engaging in unfavorable play.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that multiple time-saving setting conditions can be established simultaneously, a method of setting the time-saving state different from the thirteenth control example described above may be adopted. For example, the system may be configured to be able to determine whether or not a time-saving setting condition (lottery result time-saving setting condition) that is difficult to set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (right-hand play state) is established with priority, and when it is determined that the lottery result time-saving setting condition is not established, it may be configured to determine whether or not a lottery number time-saving setting condition that is easy to set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (right-hand play state) is established, and when it is determined that the lottery number time-saving setting condition is established, it may be configured to set a time-saving state based on the establishment of the lottery number time-saving setting condition.

In other words, when multiple time-saving setting conditions are met at the same time, a time-saving state is set based on the fulfillment of a time-saving setting condition (lottery result time-saving setting condition) that makes it difficult to set a time-saving state (right-hit play state) that is advantageous to the player, and when only a time-saving setting condition (lottery number of time-saving setting condition) that makes it easy to set a time-saving state (right-hit play state) that is advantageous to the player is met, a time-saving state is set based on the fulfillment of a time-saving setting condition (lottery number of time-saving setting condition) that makes it easy to set a time-saving state (right-hit play state) that is advantageous to the player.

By configuring it in this way, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player when only a specific time-saving setting condition is met, rather than when multiple time-saving setting conditions are met at the same time. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay experience in which the player is made to hope that other time-saving setting conditions will not be met based on the special pattern lottery that will result in the meeting of a specific time-saving setting condition.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to make the presentation mode different for indicating whether or not the other time-saving setting conditions (lottery result time-saving setting conditions) are satisfied (for example, whether or not the time-saving lottery is won) between the variable presentation (ceiling reach presentation) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery where a specific time-saving setting condition (lottery number of times time-saving setting condition) is satisfied, and the variable presentation (normal presentation) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery where a specific time-saving setting condition (lottery number of times time-saving setting condition) is not satisfied. In the ceiling reach presentation, since it is easier to set a favorable time-saving state when the time-saving lottery is not won than when the time-saving lottery is won, it is easier to set a presentation mode that congratulates the player when the time-saving lottery is won rather than when the time-saving lottery is won, and in the normal presentation, it is easier to set a time-saving state when the time-saving lottery is won rather than when the time-saving lottery is not won, so it is preferable to configure it so that it is easier to set a presentation mode that congratulates the player when the time-saving lottery is won rather than when the time-saving lottery is won.

By configuring it in this way, players can easily understand whether or not a game situation that is favorable to them is likely to be set by understanding the content of the effects being executed, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

The system may also be configured so that a special time-saving state (fourth time-saving condition) can be set only when multiple time-saving setting conditions are met in an overlapping manner.

Next, the contents of normal pattern change processing 13 (S30106) will be explained with reference to FIG. 456. FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal pattern change processing 13 (S30106). This normal pattern change processing 13 (S30106) illustrates the processing contents that were omitted from the illustration in each of the control examples described above.

In each control example, including this thirteenth control example, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal winning game (the second time-saving state in this control example), and a game state in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal winning game (the first time-saving state in this control example).

Specifically, the normal symbol variation time is set to a different length for a high probability state for normal symbols (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving lottery, and a high probability state for normal symbols (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot.

When the first time-saving state is set, as shown in S30807 of FIG. 456, a very short normal symbol variation time (0.1 seconds) is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the winning game of the normal symbol (normal symbol winning game) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, until the game ball reaches the electric role device 640a, and a time-saving state is created in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 456, a short period (1 second) of normal symbol variation time is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and then reaches the electric device 640a during a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game), resulting in a time-saving state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, a third time-saving state can be set, which allows game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 to the same extent as in the second time-saving state described above. Specifically, when the third time-saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 456, a short period (1 second) of normal pattern variation time is set. And, the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery is set to a low probability state of the normal pattern (299/300) or a high probability state of the normal pattern (299/300).

Therefore, even if a low probability state for normal symbols is set, by setting the normal symbol fluctuation time to the same length as the second time-saving state, it is possible to set a game state (right-hand hit game state) in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In the normal state and the second probability state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, as shown in S30808 of FIG. 456, a longer fluctuation time (60 seconds) is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time than in other game states, making it difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and it becomes a game state (left-hand play state) in which it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery by getting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing from the left.

Also, as shown in S30809 and S30810 in FIG. 456, the time during which the electric device 640a is in the open state during a normal winning game is longer when a high probability state for normal symbols is set than when a low probability state for normal symbols is set. In either case, however, when one second is set as the normal symbol change time, game balls can enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the same number of game balls can enter the second ball entrance 640 in the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 457, the start-up process of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the start-up process of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 457, the start-up process of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example differs from the start-up process in each of the above control examples in that, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has started up normally (S1707: Yes), the start-up process of the main control device 110 executes a process (S31701) of sending a status command including information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la to the voice lamp control device 113, and a process (S31702) of sending a status command including information stored in the game status storage area 203g to the voice lamp control device 113. The rest is the same.

By configuring it in this way, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, it is possible to transmit information indicating the game status of the pachinko machine 10 to the audio and lamp control device 113 when the power supply is restored. This makes it easier to appropriately set the performance that is executed based on the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 13th control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 458 to Fig. 463. This thirteenth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that it executes a command determination process 13 (see S34182 in Fig. 458) and a variable display setting process 13 (see S34113 in Fig. 461). The rest of the process contents are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same process contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of command determination process 13 (S34182) will be described with reference to FIG. 458. FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 13 (S34182). This command determination process 13 (S34182) differs from command determination process 5 (see S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example described above in that state command reception process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) is executed instead of state command reception process 5 (S4282), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 459, the processing contents of the status command reception process 13 (S34251) will be explained. FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the status command reception process 13 (S34251). As shown in FIG. 459, the status command reception process 13 (S34251) differs from the status command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263) in the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to a time-saving state based on the information contained in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9005: Yes) have been changed, and processing has been added when a status command containing information indicating the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is received. The other processing contents are the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the status command reception process 13 (S34251) is executed, the processes of S9001 and S9002 are executed, which are the same as those of the status command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above. Thereafter, the process of S9005 is executed, and if it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time-saving state (S9005: Yes), the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 is executed (S9091), and then the process proceeds to S9093. The contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (S9091) will be described later with reference to FIG. 460.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S9005 that the time-saving state has not been changed (S9005: No), a display back image change command is set to indicate the back type corresponding to the changed game state (S9092), and the processing proceeds to S9093.

In the process of S9093, it is determined whether the currently received status command contains information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la, i.e., information indicating the number of times of getting stuck (S9093), and if it is determined that it does contain information (S9093: Yes), a value corresponding to the received value is set as the value of the special drawing counter 203la (S9094), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9093, if it is determined that the currently received status command does not contain information indicating the number of times of getting stuck (S9093: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 460, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (S9091) executed in the state command receiving processing 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) will be described. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (S9091). This time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (S9091) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting processing (see S9006 in FIG. 266) in that the processing contents when transitioning from the normal state to the time-saving state are changed, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (S9091) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S34301), and it is determined whether the game state before the change is a normal state (S34302). In the process of S34302, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S34302: Yes), it is determined whether the information indicating the time-saving type included in the currently received command is information indicating the first time-saving state (S34303). If it is determined that it is not in the first time-saving state (S34303: No), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S34304). Thereafter, it is determined whether the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is the third time-saving state (S34305). If it is determined that it is in the third time-saving state (S34305: Yes), a display back image change command is set to indicate the back type (see FIG. 440(b)) corresponding to the ceiling mode (S34306), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is not the third time-saving state (S34305: No), it is then determined whether the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307), and if it is determined that it is the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307: Yes), the process of S34306 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S34307 that the state is not the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307: No), then it is determined whether the state is the second time-saving state set after winning the time-saving prize (S34308), and if it is determined that the state is the second time-saving state set after winning the time-saving prize (S34308: Yes), the process of S34306 described above is executed and this process ends. Then, if it is determined in the process of S34308 that the state is not the second time-saving state set after winning the time-saving prize (S34308: No), a display back image change command is set to indicate the back type corresponding to the set time-saving type (S34309), and this process ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display the back image of the ceiling mode executed when the ceiling privilege is granted and the third time-saving state is set, even when the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type "jackpot C13" and the second time-saving state set in a portion (0.1%) of the time-saving winning lottery are set. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege have been met, even when the above-mentioned second time-saving state, which is set without the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege being met, is set, allowing the player to play while hoping that the ceiling privilege will be granted at various times.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S34113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 461. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S34113). This variable display setting process 13 (S34113) differs from the variable display setting process described above (see S4113 in FIG. 182) in that, in order to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation, presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991 in FIG. 461) is executed instead of the special chart 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903 in FIG. 182) and the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907 in FIG. 182), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this 13th control example, the process for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation of the first special pattern and the process for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation of the second special pattern are the same process, so presentation mode setting process 13 (see S4991 in FIG. 461) is executed when setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation of either special pattern.

Next, the contents of the presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991) will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991). This presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991) executes processing for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation, and executes processing for setting various presentation modes according to the result of the special pattern lottery for which the presentation mode is set and the set game state. Also, when a display mode for indicating the number of times the special pattern lottery has been performed or a display mode for indicating the remaining period (remaining number of time-saving times) that a specific game state (for example, the third time-saving state) can continue is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, processing is executed for updating the value indicated by the display mode.

When the performance mode setting process 13 (S4991) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state (S34401). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), the performance setting process 13 for normal mode is executed (S34402), and then a display variable pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S34407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S34403), and then it is determined whether the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404). If it is determined that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is not greater than 0, that is, that the game is in a right-hand play state (second time-saving state) in which the ceiling mode is not set (S34404: No), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S34405), and the presentation mode corresponding to the various counter values is determined (S34406), and the process proceeds to the process of S34407 described above, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S34404 that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404: Yes), the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is decremented by 1 (S34408), a display command is set to show the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la after the decrement (S34409), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la after the decrement is 1 (S34410).

In the processing of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is not 1, i.e., that this is not the final change in the ceiling mode (S34410: No), the processing of S34406 and S34407 described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is 1 (i.e., the final change in the ceiling mode) (S34410: Yes), it is then determined whether the later-addition flag 223lb is set to on (S34411), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S34411: Yes), the later-addition flag 223lb is set to off (S34412), a value corresponding to the value of the time-saving counter 223da is added to the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la (S34413), the presentation mode of the later-addition presentation (top-up presentation) in which the remaining time-saving count display increases is determined (S34414), the process of S34407 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S34411 that the later-loading flag 223lb is not set to on (S34411: No), the third time-saving state in which the ceiling mode is set and the special pattern change that ends the second time-saving state will be the variable presentation, so the presentation mode indicating the end of the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is determined (S34415), the processing of S34407 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the normal mode presentation setting process 13 (S34402) will be described with reference to FIG. 463. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode presentation setting process 13 (S34402). In this normal mode presentation setting process 13 (S34402), when a special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching presentation to indicate that the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is set, and a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation that can indicate to the player the remaining time until the ceiling privilege is awarded as a variation presentation executed in response to the special symbol variation executed when the left-hand play state is set.

When the normal mode performance setting process 13 (S34402) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol selection counter 223lc is 500, i.e., whether the ceiling bonus awarding condition is met by the special symbol selection executed this time (S34501). In the process of S34501, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol selection counter 223lc is 500 (S34501: Yes), the performance mode of the ceiling reaching performance is determined by referring to the ceiling reaching performance selection table 222lb (S34502), the value corresponding to the determined performance mode is set as the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la (S34503), the setting status of the back-loading flag 223lb corresponding to the determined performance mode is determined (S34504), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S34501, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is not 500, i.e., the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is not met (S34501: No), then it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a special pattern change that will win the jackpot C13 (S34505), and if it is determined that the special pattern change is a special pattern change that will win the jackpot C13 (S34505: Yes), a second time-saving state that becomes a pseudo-ceiling mode (mid-ceiling mode) after the special pattern change is stopped is set, and the processes of S34502 to S34504 described above are executed, and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S34505 that the special pattern change is not a winning combination for the jackpot C13 (S34505: No), then it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a time-saving winning change for which a second time-saving state is set (S34506). If it is determined that the current special pattern change is a time-saving winning change for which a second time-saving state is set (S34506: Yes), the second time-saving state, which becomes a pseudo-ceiling mode (ceiling mode) after the special pattern change has stopped, is set, and the processes of S34502 to S34504 described above are executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S34506, if it is determined that the time-saving winning change is not one that sets the second time-saving state, that is, if it is determined that the special pattern change this time is a special pattern change that does not set the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) after the special pattern change this time is stopped and displayed (S34506: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern change this time is a special change (15-second change) (S34507), and if it is determined that it is a special change (15-second change) (S34507: Yes), the ceiling reach suggestion effect selection table 222la is referenced to determine the performance mode of the suggestion effect (S34508), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that the special change is not a special change (15-second change) in the process of S34507 (S34507: No), the performance mode corresponding to the received change pattern is determined (S34509), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the first modified example in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above will be described with reference to Fig. 464 to Fig. 470. In the thirteenth control example described above, the time-saving lottery is configured to be executable when the game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state, and when the time-saving lottery is won and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state with one time of time-saving is set. Then, while the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, the special pattern lottery is executed 500 times without winning the jackpot, so that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established, and the third time-saving state is set as the ceiling privilege.

In addition, the contents of the benefit granted as the ceiling benefit are configured to differ depending on the game state that is set when the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit are met. If the normal state is set and the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit are met, the third time-saving state with 100 times of time reduction is set, and if the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit are met when the first time-saving state is set, the third time-saving state with 300 times of time reduction is set.

In other words, in the thirteenth control example described above, in addition to the conventional gameplay of aiming to win a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, if a long period of time continues without winning a jackpot, the player can be allowed to play a game in which they aim to win a ceiling bonus that is awarded based on the number of times the special symbol drawing is performed.

Furthermore, by frequently switching between the normal state and the first time-saving state based on the results of the time-saving lottery, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the content of the benefit (the number of time-saving times) granted as the ceiling benefit will be an advantageous benefit (300 time-saving times) that is favorable to the player, or an unfavorable benefit (100 time-saving times) that is less favorable than the advantageous benefit.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), the time-saving lottery can be executed only in the normal state, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the first time-saving state is set with the number of time-saving times greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (the number of times it gets stuck), which is the condition for granting the ceiling bonus.

In other words, in this first modified example, when the time-saving lottery is won in the normal state and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state continues until the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, unless a jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, an advantageous bonus is granted as a ceiling bonus as an added value for winning the time-saving lottery, so that the player is motivated to play with the aim of winning the ceiling bonus.

Furthermore, in this first modified example, during the period when the left-hand play state is being executed, a game state suggestion display can be executed to allow the player to predict whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing in the left-hand play state for a long time without winning a jackpot to predict the currently set play state, and to make the player choose whether or not to continue playing in consideration of the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met and the current play state. Also, even in a situation where the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met is long, if a play state suggestion effect is executed in a presentation mode that indicates that the first time-saving state is likely to be set, it is possible to make the player play with the aim of obtaining an advantageous bonus, and therefore it is easier to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10 compared to a case where a presentation to suggest the currently set play state is not executed during the period when the left-hand play state is being executed.

<Regarding the content of the performance executed in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
First, referring to Fig. 464, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example is configured such that, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example described above, the time-saving lottery is not executed while the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the left-hand play state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 1000 times, which is more than the number of times (500 times) at which the ceiling privilege is granted as the first time-saving state.

Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set based on the results of the time-saving lottery performed in the left-hand play state, it is determined that the advantageous benefit (the third time-saving state with 300 times of time saving) will be set as the ceiling benefit at that point.

Therefore, in this first modified example, a game state suggestion effect is executable during left-hand play to allow the player to predict whether or not the first time-saving state has been set. Figure 464(a) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen for the game state suggestion effect, and Figure 464(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a suggestion effect to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state has been set during left-hand play.

As shown in FIG. 464(a), when the game state suggestion effect is executed, a roulette 861 with multiple regions formed in the center of the main display area Dm is displayed in rotation, and the game state suggestion effect is executed in which the region that stops at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 becomes the effect result. The roulette 861 is formed with four regions with different occupancy ranges: a first region 862a displaying the display mode of "preparation" indicating that the first time-saving state is set, a second region 862b displaying the display mode of "chance" indicating the possibility that the first time-saving state is set, a third region 862c displaying the display mode of "V" indicating a jackpot win, and a fourth region 862d displaying the display mode of "?" which does not suggest any information.

The main display area Dm displays the words "Status Suggestion Chance" to indicate that a game status suggestion effect is being executed, and the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "Where will it stop? If it stops on "Preparation", it will go to "Ceiling Preparation", and if it stops on "V", it will be "Big Win!" as an explanatory format to explain the content of the game status suggestion effect to the player.

In this first variant, the frequency with which the game status suggestion effect is executed and the presentation style are varied based on the length of time remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded and the results of the special symbol lottery that is executed. The shorter the time remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded or the more specific number of special symbol lotteries (e.g., a multiple of 50), the easier it is to grasp the actual game status that is set when the game status suggestion effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players who want to understand the set game state to play until the next specific number of special pattern lotteries are executed, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10. Also, as shown in FIG. 464(a), the small display area Dm7 formed in the main display area Dm is configured to display the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game, and the diagram shown in FIG. 464(a) shows the period during which the special pattern is changing to show the result of the 250th special pattern lottery.

When the first area 862a is stopped and displayed at a position corresponding to the indicator 863 in the game state suggestion effect, the ceiling preparation mode is set as shown in FIG. 464(b). This ceiling preparation mode is an effect mode for indicating that the first time-saving state is set, and the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the ceiling privilege is granted is displayed in the small display area Dm7, instead of the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game, and the character 809 that appears during the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is displayed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "If you get stuck 90 more times, you will get 300 time-savings" as an explanatory mode for explaining the effect content of the ceiling preparation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to not only suggest the currently set game state to the player in the game state suggestion effect, but also to notify the player of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, so that a player aiming for the grant of the ceiling privilege can play with enthusiasm.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 465 to Fig. 467. In this first modified example of the thirteenth control example, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 is different from that of the thirteenth control example described above in that the winning probability of the time-saving lottery is changed to a low probability and the number of time-saving times set when the time-saving lottery is won is changed, and the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 is different in that a data table for determining the presentation mode of the game state suggestion presentation is added and a flag for indicating the state in which the ceiling preparation mode is set is added. The other elements are the same, and the explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the time-saving random number 13a table 202lae will be explained with reference to FIG. 465(a). FIG. 465(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 13a table 202lae. This time-saving random number 13a table 202lae differs from the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444(c)) described above in that the number of judgment values that will win in the time-saving lottery is different.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is "common" and the game state is normal, the range of "998,999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is set as the judgment value for the time-saving win. Also, when the game state is other than normal, the judgment value for the time-saving win is not set (shown as "-" in the figure).

By configuring it in this way, the game state in which a time-saving lottery winner can win the time-saving lottery is limited to the normal state, and it is also possible to make it more difficult to win the time-saving lottery. Therefore, even if the game is configured to be able to grant a beneficial bonus (a third time-saving state with 300 time-savings) to the player as added value for winning the time-saving lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from being granted an excessive beneficial bonus.

Next, the contents of the time-saving winning 13a table 202laf1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 465(b). FIG. 465(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving winning 13a table 202laf1. As shown in FIG. 465(b), the time-saving winning 13a table 202laf1 is the same as the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1 of the 13th control example described above, except that the number of time-saving times (values set in the time-saving counter 203h) set for each time-saving type is different. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the first time-saving state is set as the time-saving type, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000 times." By configuring it in this way, when a time-saving win is won and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state can be set continuously until the number of times of stuck wins is exceeded.

Next, referring to FIG. 466(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example will be described. The ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example differs from the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned thirteenth control example (see FIG. 447(a)) in that a game state suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa is provided instead of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation selection table 222laa, but is otherwise identical.

The game status indication effect selection 13a table 222laa is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the game status indication effect, and is referenced when the special variation (15-second variation) variation pattern is selected during normal mode (normal state, first time-saving state, second special state) (see S34532 in FIG. 470).

Now, referring to FIG. 467, the contents stipulated in the game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa will be explained. FIG. 467 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa. As shown in FIG. 467, the game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa stipulates different suggestion modes (presentation modes) corresponding to the value of the special symbol drawing count counter 223lc, the set game status, the result of the special symbol drawing corresponding to the change, and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f.

The presentation mode of the game status suggestion presentation is determined by referring to this game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa, that is, the game status suggestion presentation described with reference to FIG. 464(a), and the areas 862a to 862d that are stopped and displayed corresponding to the indicator 863 are finally determined.

Specifically, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "other than a multiple of 50 between 1 and 200," the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is a "jackpot," the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 79," and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "80 to 99." When the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than a jackpot," the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 89," and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "90 to 99."

In addition, if the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "other than a multiple of 50 between 1 and 200", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 79", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "80 to 99", and if the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 49", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "50 to 99".

Next, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "50, 100, 150, 200", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 39", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of "40 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "50, 100, 150, 200", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 19", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "20 to 99".

When the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 between 201 and 490", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 89", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". When the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 69", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "70 to 99".

In addition, if the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "other than a multiple of 50 between 201 and 490", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 89", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". In the case where the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 19", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "20 to 99".

Next, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 49", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "50 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 49", and the performance mode "preparation" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "50 to 99".

When the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "491 to 500", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 69", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of "70 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "chance" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "491-500", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0-79", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "80-99". When the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "Preparation" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0-98", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the value "99".

Here, if the presentation mode "V" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862c in which V is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a). If the presentation mode "Chance" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862b in which Chance is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a). If the presentation mode "?" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862d in which "?" is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a). If the presentation mode "Preparation" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862a in which Preparation is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a).

As explained above, the game state suggestion presentation is configured so that the larger the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc, that is, the shorter the remaining time until the ceiling bonus is awarded, the more likely it is that a suggestion mode corresponding to the currently set game state will be set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to gradually improve the prediction accuracy of the currently set game state for players who have been playing in the left-hand play state for a long time, making it easier for them to continue playing.

In addition, when the conditions for executing the game state suggestion effect are met when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc reaches a specific value (a multiple of 50), an effect that makes it easier to grasp the currently set game state is executed, compared to when the game state suggestion effect is executed at other times. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is trying to grasp the currently set game state to continue playing in order to execute a special symbol lottery until the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc reaches a specific value.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 466(b). The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned thirteenth control example (see FIG. 447(b)), in that a notification completion flag 223laa has been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The already-notified flag 223laa is a flag for indicating that a notification indicating that the first time-saving state has been set has been executed in the game state suggestion effect, and is set to on when the ceiling preparation mode (see FIG. 464(b)) is set as the effect result of the game state suggestion effect (see S34534 in FIG. 470). The setting status of the already-notified flag 223laa is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a game state suggestion effect (see S34531 in FIG. 470), and when the already-notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34531 in FIG. 470: Yes), a new game state suggestion effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of a game state suggestion effect when it has already been notified that the first time-saving state has been set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 468. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned thirteenth control example in that the execution conditions of the time-saving lottery are different, but is otherwise the same. Detailed descriptions of the same processing contents will be omitted.

Now, the contents of the time-saving lottery process 13a (S38006a) will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 13a (S38006a) in this first modified example. As shown in FIG. 468, the time-saving lottery process 13a (S38006a) differs from the time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) of the thirteenth control example described above in that the execution condition for the time-saving lottery is met only when the game state is in the normal state (S38151a: Yes) and that the data table referenced during the time-saving lottery is the time-saving random number 13a table 222iae (S38152a), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 469 and Fig. 470. In this first modified example, the difference from the above-mentioned thirteenth control example is that instead of the time-saving state performance setting process 13 (see S9091 in Fig. 460), the time-saving state performance setting process 13a (see S9091a in Fig. 469) is executed, and instead of the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see S34402 in Fig. 463), the normal mode performance setting process 13a (see S34402a in Fig. 470) is executed. Since the rest are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a (S9091a) will be described with reference to FIG. 469. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a (S9091a). As shown in FIG. 469, when the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a (S9091a) is executed, the same processing of S34301 to S34304 as the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) is executed.

Then, if the processing of S34305 determines that the state is the third time-saving state (S34305: Yes), if the processing of S34307 determines that the state is the second time-saving state after the big win C13 (S34307: Yes), or if the processing of S34307 determines that the state is the second time-saving state after winning the time-saving win (S34308: Yes), it determines whether the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34331), and if it determines that the flag is set to on (S34331: Yes), it sets the notified flag 223laa to off (S34332), and executes the processing of S34306, which is the same as the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460), and ends this processing.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S34331 that the notified flag 223laa is not set to ON (S34331: No), the process of S34332 is skipped, and the process of S34306, which is the same as the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) described above, is executed, and this process ends. By configuring in this manner, the notified flag 223laa can be reliably set to OFF.

Next, the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a) will be described with reference to FIG. 470. FIG. 470 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a). This normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a) differs from the normal mode performance setting process 13 in the thirteenth control example described above (see S34402 in FIG. 463) in that the processing contents for setting the performance mode when a special variation (15-second variation) is executed in normal mode are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

When normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a) is executed, first, the same processes of S34501 to S34507 as normal mode performance setting process 13 in the thirteenth control example described above (see S34402 in FIG. 463) are executed, and if the process of S34507 determines that there is a 15-second fluctuation (special fluctuation) (S34507: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34531).

In the processing of S34531, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is not set to on (S34531: No), since the ceiling preparation mode for notifying the player that the first time-saving state is set has not been set, the game state suggestion effect selection 13a table 222laa is referenced to determine the presentation mode of the suggestion effect (game state suggestion effect) (S34532), and then it is determined whether the presentation mode determined this time is the ceiling preparation mode (S34533). If it is determined that it is the ceiling preparation mode (S34533: Yes), the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34534).

Then, the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is read (S34535), the number of times remaining until the read value reaches 500, i.e., the number of times remaining until the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, is calculated (S34536), a display command is set to show the calculated remaining number of times (S34537), and this process ends. By receiving the display command set by the process of S34537 on the display control device 114 side, the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached is displayed in the small display area Dm7 on the display screen shown in FIG. 464(b).

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the remaining number calculated by the processing of S34536 is set in a dedicated counter (remaining number counter), and each time a special pattern lottery is executed, the set value is subtracted by 1, and a display command to show the value after subtraction is output to the display control device 114. As a result, when the ceiling preparation mode is set, the value indicating the remaining number of times until the ceiling is gradually subtracted each time a special pattern lottery is executed, making it easy for the player to know that the time when the ceiling bonus will be awarded is approaching.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S34531 that the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34531: Yes), the ceiling preparation mode has already been set, so the processing for executing the game state indication presentation is skipped and the processing proceeds to S34535.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S34533 that a presentation mode other than the ceiling preparation mode has been determined (S34533: No), since a new game state suggestion presentation can be executed, the processing of S34534 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S34535.

As explained above, in the first variant of the thirteenth control example, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), the time-saving lottery can be executed only in the normal state, and if the time-saving lottery is won, a first time-saving state is set with a number of time-saving times greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (number of times it gets stuck), which is the condition for granting the ceiling bonus, and if the time-saving lottery is won in the normal state and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state will continue until the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, unless a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, players are given advantageous bonuses in the ceiling bonus as an added value for winning the time-saving lottery, which makes it possible for players to enthusiastically play with the aim of winning the ceiling bonus.

In the first modified example of the thirteenth control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed during the first time-saving state, but the time-saving lottery can be executed during the first time-saving state. If the time-saving lottery is won during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is newly set with a number of time-saving times greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (the number of times it gets stuck), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. The content of the privilege granted as the ceiling privilege (the number of time-saving times) may be different depending on the number of time-saving wins until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met. In this case, it is preferable to configure the number of time-saving times granted as the ceiling privilege to be greater the more the number of time-saving wins. By configuring in this way, the added value of winning the time-saving lottery can be further increased. It is also possible to configure the number of time-saving times granted as the ceiling privilege to be smaller.

Furthermore, in the first variant of this thirteenth control example, as in the thirteenth control example described above, the number of times of getting stuck is configured to be continuously updated (incremented) even when the normal state switches to the first time-saving state, but without being limited to this, the number of times of getting stuck may be configured to be reset when the game state switches from the normal state to the first time-saving state, or when the game state switches from the first time-saving state to the normal state.

Even when configured in this way, in the first variant of this thirteenth control example, when a time-saving win occurs in the normal state, the first time-saving state is set to a number of time-saving times greater than the number of special symbol draws (500 stuck wins) at which the ceiling bonus is awarded, so that the ceiling bonus can be awarded reliably.

In the first variant of this thirteenth control example, when a time-saving win occurs in the normal state, a first time-saving state is set with a number of time-saving times greater than the number of times a special symbol is drawn that will grant the ceiling privilege (500 times of stuck play). However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to set a first time-saving state with a number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times, 150 times, etc.) smaller than the number of times a special symbol is drawn that will grant the ceiling privilege (500 times of stuck play) in some cases when a time-saving win occurs in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is confirmed that the ceiling privilege will be granted during the first time-saving state at the time when the first time-saving state is set, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the normal state (the number of times the player gets stuck when the time-saving state is won) and the type of time-saving state that is set based on the time-saving state win. In this case, it is preferable to configure the following as the effects executed in the normal state: a suggestion effect that can suggest the expectation that the first time-saving state that is set when the time-saving state is won will continue until the ceiling is reached, based on the selection ratio of each time-saving state type in which the first time-saving state is set when the time-saving state is won, and a suggestion effect that can suggest the expectation that the first time-saving state that is currently set will continue until the ceiling is reached, when the time-saving state is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player play while predicting whether the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the normal state will be advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this first modified example, during the period when the left-hand play state is being executed, a game state suggestion display can be executed to allow the player to predict whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing in the left-hand play state for a long time without winning a jackpot to predict the currently set play state, and to make the player choose whether or not to continue playing in consideration of the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met and the current play state. Also, even in a situation where the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met is long, if a play state suggestion effect is executed in a presentation mode indicating that the first time-saving state is likely to be set, it is possible to make the player play with the aim of obtaining an advantageous bonus, and therefore it is easier to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10 compared to a case where a presentation to suggest the currently set play state is not executed during the period in which the left-hand play state is being executed.

<Regarding the modified effect in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, a modified example of the effect executed in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described with reference to Fig. 464 (a) will be described. In the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above, in the left-hand hitting game state, a game state suggestion effect for suggesting to the player whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state was configured to be executable.

Then, as a game state suggestion effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 464(a) is displayed. As described above, in the game state suggestion effect executed in the first modified example of the 13th control example, the game state suggestion effect is executed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to understand the currently set game state as the number of special symbol draws (number of stuck times) that is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege approaches, which makes it easier for the player to continue playing. However, when the number of special symbol draws (number of stuck times) that is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is far away, the game state suggestion effect tends to result in an effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which game state is set (an effect in which the area 862d with a "?" mark at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 stops), which reduces the effect of the effect.

In addition, even when a game state suggestion effect that results in a performance result that makes it difficult for the player to understand which game state has been set (a performance result in which area 862d with a "?" mark at the position corresponding to indicator 863 stops) is executed multiple times in succession, the same performance is simply executed repeatedly, resulting in a problem that the executed performance becomes monotonous.

In contrast, in this modified presentation, part of the presentation mode of the game state suggestion presentation (the mode of the roulette 861) is made different from that in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above. Specifically, in this modified presentation, an "indicator" is provided in place of the area 862d marked with a "?" in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above. This indicator has ten scale marks, and is configured so that the display mode can be changed so that the value increases in units of one scale, starting from one end of area 862d (the side adjacent to area 862c).

When "?" is selected as the presentation result of the game status indication presentation, if area 862d with "indicator" attached is located (displayed) at a position corresponding to indicator 863, the "indicator" attached to area 862d rises by one notch, and if the display state after the change of the "indicator" rises to the maximum value set on the other end side of area 862d (the side adjacent to area 862d), the presentation result is the same as when area 862a with "preparation" attached is located (displayed) at a position corresponding to indicator 863.

In other words, a storage means is provided that stores the number of times a specific effect (a performance result in which a "?" is displayed) has been achieved as a result of a specific effect (a performance result in which a "?" is displayed) that has been executed during a specific period (the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded), and the performance mode of the specific effect (a performance result in which a "?" has been displayed) is made variable based on the information stored in the storage means (the number of times a specific performance result has been achieved). This makes it possible to prevent the same performance mode from being executed repeatedly, which would result in a decrease in the performance effect.

Furthermore, when the number of times stored in the storage means reaches a predetermined number, the display area for showing the specific presentation result can be changed to a display area for showing another presentation result ("preparation") that is more advantageous to the player than the specific presentation result. Therefore, the more game state suggestion presentations that result in a specific presentation result are executed in succession, the more frequently game state suggestion presentations that result in other presentation results can be executed, and the player can be made to look forward to the game state suggestion presentations being executed repeatedly.

In this modified presentation, the presentation result of the game status suggestion presentation indicated by the area 862d marked with the "indicator" is changed when the "indicator" rises to its maximum value. However, without being limited to this, for example, the range of the area marked with the "indicator" where the value has already risen may be displayed as an area for showing other presentation results. In this case, the area showing other presentation results gradually expands each time the value indicated by the "indicator" rises, so the player can expect the game status suggestion presentation to be executed repeatedly.

In addition, in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above and this modified presentation, one type of display mode (see FIG. 464(a)) is shown as the display mode of the roulette 961 that is first displayed during the game status suggestion presentation, but without being limited to this, the display mode of the roulette 961 that is first displayed during the game status suggestion presentation may be changed based on the number of times the game is stuck (the number of times the special symbol changes remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded) at the time the game status suggestion presentation is first executed. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to allow the player to predict the remaining time until the ceiling bonus is awarded based on the display mode of the roulette 961 that is displayed before the presentation result of the game status suggestion presentation is displayed.

<Regarding another technical idea related to the 13th control example>
In the above-mentioned thirteenth control example and the first variant of the thirteenth control example, a third time-saving state with a different number of time-saving times can be set as a different ceiling privilege depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, but a different privilege may be granted as the content of the ceiling privilege granted to the player, and for example, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the time-saving state may be configured to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. For example, when a ceiling privilege is granted in a normal state, a time-saving state is set in which the first special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special pattern lottery, and when a ceiling privilege is granted in the first time-saving state, a time-saving state is set in which the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special pattern lottery.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the results of the special symbol lottery executed during the period when the ceiling bonus is granted, rather than varying the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the period when the ceiling bonus is granted, depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling bonus is granted.

As another ceiling privilege, the length of the period during which the electric device 1640 is open may be configured to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. In this case, for example, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state may be set to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation during the time-saving state may be set to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, or the length of the period during which the electric device 1640 is in the open state during a normal symbol winning game during the time-saving state may be set to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. By configuring in this way, the number of prize balls paid out during the ceiling privilege can be made different depending on the content of the ceiling privilege. Furthermore, in this case, a time-saving state in which the number of prize balls paid out during the ceiling privilege is greater than the number of game balls shot during the ceiling privilege may be set as part of the privilege granted as the ceiling privilege.

In addition, if a time-saving state in which the number of winning balls paid out during a ceiling bonus is greater than the number of balls fired during the ceiling bonus is configured to be able to be awarded as a ceiling bonus, the rate at which the number of balls increases can be determined according to the number of times the player is stuck before the ceiling bonus is awarded. Since the more times the player is stuck before the ceiling bonus is awarded, the more balls are used before the ceiling bonus is awarded, it is good to configure the system so that during the ceiling bonus, about 30% of the balls used before the ceiling bonus is awarded can be increased as balls in hand. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players to play with the aim of winning the ceiling bonus.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 13th control example and the first modified example of the 13th control example, a different ceiling privilege is granted depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, and a privilege that changes the control processing content of the main control device 110 (a privilege that sets a different number of time-saving times) can be granted. However, without being limited to this, a privilege that can be granted within the control processing range of the sound lamp control device 113 may be set as the ceiling privilege. For example, as a variable performance executed to show the result of the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to make it easier to execute a premium performance that appears less frequently when a ceiling privilege is granted than when it is not granted, and in a pachinko machine 10 having a setting function that can set different jackpot probabilities in multiple stages, it may be configured to make it easier to execute a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the set setting value to the player when a ceiling privilege is granted than when it is not granted. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to motivate players to play a pachinko machine 10 to which a ceiling privilege is granted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 13th control example, the normal state and the first time-saving state are frequently switched until the ceiling privilege is awarded, so that, as in the first modified example of the above-mentioned 13th control example, a presentation (game state suggestion presentation) capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the set game state is not executed during the period until the ceiling privilege is awarded. However, without being limited to this, a presentation (game state suggestion presentation) capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the set game state may be executed. In this case, if it is determined that the same game state has been set continuously for a predetermined period of time, it is preferable to configure it so that the fact can be notified. By configuring it in this way, for example, it is possible to easily identify a player who is playing illegally so as not to end the first time-saving state in which a privilege advantageous to the player is awarded as a ceiling privilege.

<Regarding the 14th control example>
Next, the present 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 471 to Fig. 480. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 13th control example is configured to be able to give a special benefit to a player when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed) meets a predetermined condition. By configuring in this way, a special benefit can be given to a player who has played a game in which a special symbol lottery is executed for a long time, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

However, when the number of times (the number of times of losing) that special symbol lotteries are executed consecutively and the lottery result is not a jackpot (a miss), reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 500 times), the ceiling bonus is awarded. This means that it is easy for players to predict when the ceiling bonus will be awarded, and there is a problem that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 decreases during the period when the ceiling bonus is unlikely to be awarded.

In contrast, the 14th control example is configured to grant the ceiling bonus when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, and then the time-saving lottery has a high probability (900/1000) of winning, and the second condition is met (a losing win). This allows for irregularity in the timing at which the ceiling bonus is granted, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met until the second condition is met exceeds a predetermined period (200 special chart fluctuations), a bonus that is more advantageous to the player (second ceiling bonus) can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met until the second condition is met becomes long, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<About the performance content in the 14th control example>
First, referring to Fig. 471 and Fig. 472, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 14th control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 14th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 13th control example in that a ceiling activation period is set as the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of stuck time) is satisfied to when the second condition (missing the time-saving lottery) is satisfied, and during the ceiling activation period, an effect (ceiling activation mode) is executable that indicates that winning the time-saving lottery by failing will be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player.

Figure 471 (a) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when a ceiling activation period is set, and Figure 471 (b) shows an example of a display screen for the ceiling activation mode that is executed during the ceiling activation period.

As shown in FIG. 471(a), when the number of special symbol lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win reaches 500 and the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met (when the 500th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), the main display area Dm displays the text "Entering ceiling activation mode! Significantly increased probability of time-saving symbol stopping" to notify the player that the ceiling activation mode will be set from the next special symbol variation (the 501st special symbol variation). In addition, the small display area Dm4 formed at the bottom right of the main display area Dm displays the text "Continue hitting with the left hand" as a guide to inform the player that the playing method during the ceiling activation mode is left hitting.

Here, conventional pachinko machines 10 are known to execute a game that causes the player to switch the game method (for example, a game that causes the player to switch from left-handed play to right-handed play) in accordance with the timing of the switch in the presentation mode (the content of the presentation to be executed). In this case, a method is used in which a notification is issued to inform the player that the game method will be switched, thereby allowing the player to easily understand the switch in game method.

In the current situation where such pachinko machines 10 have become mainstream, if the presentation mode (the content of the presentation to be executed) is switched without switching the game method, there is a problem that even if a notification to inform the player that the game method is switching is not executed, the player may switch the game method and end up playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In response to this, in the present thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 471(a), a notification mode is configured to notify the player that the same game method will continue. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being forced to play a game that is disadvantageous to him or her.

The secondary display area Ds displays the comment "When the time-saving symbols line up, the time-saving mode will begin!!" to guide the player on how to play in the ceiling activation mode, and the comment "If you get more than 700 starts...a big chance!?" to suggest the existence of additional bonuses that may be awarded in the ceiling activation mode.

When the ceiling activation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 471(b), when three cards are displayed in a specific combination on the active line LZ, a variable presentation is executed to indicate that the corresponding bonus (jackpot, time-saving) will be awarded. In this control example, multiple card rows are formed on each of the left line LL, middle line CL, and right line RL, including at least losing cards (LL3, CL3, RL3) corresponding to a "miss," V cards (LL1, CL1, RL1) corresponding to a "jackpot," and time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to a "ceiling bonus," and a variable presentation is executed in which each card row is displayed from top to bottom.

When three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each symbol row are stopped and displayed on the valid line LZ, it is possible to notify that a time-saving state will be granted as a ceiling bonus, and when three V cards (LL1, CL1, RL1) displayed in each symbol row are stopped and displayed on the valid line LZ, it is possible to notify that a bonus based on winning a jackpot will be granted.

As mentioned above, the condition for the ceiling privilege to be awarded during the ceiling activation mode is that the time-saving lottery does not win (a miss wins), so if the result of the special pattern lottery is a complete miss (no win in either the jackpot or the time-saving), an effect will be executed in which the time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each pattern row are stopped and displayed three times on the active line LZ.

Figure 472(a) shows an example of a display screen during super ceiling activation mode, which indicates that the length of the ceiling activation period has exceeded a predetermined period (200 special chart changes) and that the second ceiling bonus can be awarded, and Figure 472(b) shows an example of a display screen when the player loses the time-saving lottery in the ceiling activation mode but wins.

As shown in FIG. 472(a), when the ceiling activation mode is set and a special symbol lottery is executed for a predetermined period, if the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, the super heaven activation mode is displayed to indicate that the player will be granted the second ceiling privilege, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal ceiling privilege. Then, the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "The time-saving mode is powered up to super time-saving mode" to indicate that the third time-saving mode, which has a greater number of time-saving times, will be set as the ceiling privilege, and the time-saving card (LL2, CL2, RL2) is displayed in a display mode with the character "super" added.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the conditions for granting the second ceiling bonus have been met.

If the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the ceiling activation mode is a complete miss (see small display area Dm1 in FIG. 472(b)), as shown in FIG. 472(b), the time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each symbol row are displayed stopped in three on the active line LZ, and a performance is executed in which character 809, which is displayed when the ceiling privilege is granted, congratulates the player on the granting of the ceiling privilege.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 14th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the present 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 473 to Fig. 475. The pachinko machine 10 in the present 14th control example is different from the above-mentioned 13th control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is provided with a time-saving random number 14 table 202me instead of the time-saving random number 13 table 202le, and a time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf instead of the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf, but is otherwise the same.

The configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 differs in that a third ceiling standby flag 203ma has been newly added as shown in FIG. 473(b), but is otherwise the same. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 differs in that a ceiling activation mode flag 223ma has been newly added as shown in FIG. 475. The configuration is otherwise the same, and so a description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 474(a), the time-saving random number 14 table 202me differs from the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444(c)) in that it changes the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the time-saving lottery. Specifically, out of the possible range of "0-999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1, the judgment value for winning the time-saving lottery is set for the range "100-999". In other words, this 14th control example is configured so that when the time-saving lottery is executed, there is a high probability (probability of 900/1000) of winning the time-saving lottery.

The time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf also differs from the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf (see FIG. 446(a)) in that it has a ceiling 14 table 202mf2 instead of the ceiling 13 table 202lf2. Here, the contents of the ceiling 14 table 202mf2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 474(b). FIG. 474(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the ceiling 14 table 202mf2.

As shown in FIG. 474(b), in the ceiling 14 table 202mf2, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h varies depending on the number of times the player has been stuck at the time the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set. It is stipulated that when the number of times the player has been stuck is up to 700, the second time-saving state (time-saving count 300 times) is set as the ceiling bonus (first ceiling bonus), and when the number of times the player has been stuck is more than 700, the second time-saving state (time-saving count 1000 times) is set as the ceiling bonus (second ceiling bonus).

In this way, the longer the period until the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set, the more advantageous bonuses are awarded to the player. This prevents a significant decrease in motivation for players who have not won a jackpot for a long time.

The third ceiling wait flag 203ma is a flag for indicating that the number of times a player has been stuck on a jackpot has exceeded 700 times, and is set to ON when the number of times the player has been stuck on a jackpot has exceeded 700 times. When setting the ceiling bonus, the setting status of the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is determined, and if it is determined that the flag is set to ON, a ceiling bonus (second ceiling bonus) corresponding to the number of times the player has been stuck on a jackpot of 700 times is set. When the ceiling bonus is awarded or when a jackpot is won, the flag is set to OFF.

The ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is a flag for indicating that the ceiling activation mode is in progress, and is set to on when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met. The presentation style in the normal mode is set according to the setting status of the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma (see S34571 in FIG. 480).

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in the 14th control example>
Next, the contents of the control process of the main control device 110 executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 476 and Fig. 477. In the 14th control example, the process for determining whether the ceiling award condition is met and the process for setting the third time-saving state that is set based on the fact that the ceiling award condition is met are different from the above-mentioned 13th control process. Specifically, the difference is that the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in Fig. 476) is executed instead of the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in Fig. 452), and the time-saving setting process 14 (see S30274 in Fig. 477) is executed instead of the time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in Fig. 455).

In this 14th control example, the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are different from those in the 13th control example described above. Specifically, the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set when both the first condition (number of times of stuck wins) and the second condition (no win in the time-saving win) are met. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to randomly set the timing for granting the ceiling bonus, compared to when the ceiling bonus is granted based on the number of times (number of times of stuck wins) that a special pattern lottery has been executed and a winning result has reached a predetermined number (500 times).

Furthermore, the system is configured so that the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege can be set to a normal first condition (500 times stuck) and a special first condition (700 times stuck) that is set after the normal first condition, and if the special first condition is fulfilled without granting the ceiling privilege based on the special pattern lottery that is executed when the normal first condition is fulfilled, the system is configured so that the second ceiling privilege (third time-saving state (1000 times time-saving)) can be granted, which is more advantageous to the player than the case where the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state (300 times time-saving)) is granted when only the normal first condition is fulfilled.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a player who has been playing for a long time without winning the time-saving lottery that is normally executed when the first condition is met, i.e., playing without the ceiling bonus being awarded, to continue playing without losing motivation to play.

In the fourteenth control example, a ceiling award (second ceiling award) that is more advantageous to the player is granted when the special first condition is met, compared to when the ceiling award is granted when only the normal first condition is met. However, without being limited to this, a ceiling award (second ceiling award) that is more advantageous to the player may be granted when the ceiling award is granted when only the normal first condition is met, compared to when the ceiling award is granted when the special first condition is met. By configuring in this way, the player can be more motivated to play in the hope of being granted a ceiling award during the period from when the normal first condition is met to when the special first condition is met.

It may also be possible to configure the period during which only the normal first condition is met and the period during which the special first condition is met to be alternately set; for example, it may be configured so that when the last digit of the number of times of stuck spins is between "1 and 5", only the normal first condition is met, and when it is between "6 and 0", the special first condition is met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to keep the player interested in when the second condition will be met (whether the time-saving lottery will result in a loss) after the number of times of stuck spins exceeds 500, at which point the normal first condition is first met.

Furthermore, in this fourteenth control example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving feature has been won is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery for updating the number of times the player has been stuck. In other words, the special symbol lottery is executed, and the element related to the first condition (the number of times the player has been stuck) is updated, and the establishment or non-establishment of the second condition (the result of the time-saving lottery) is determined. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to execute a game for establishing the second condition without updating the element related to the first condition (the number of times the player has been stuck), so that it is possible to prevent only the determination of the second condition from being repeatedly executed in a situation in which a ceiling privilege advantageous to the player is granted (a situation in which the special first condition is established). Also, it is possible to prevent only the determination of the second condition from being repeatedly executed in a situation in which a ceiling privilege disadvantageous to the player is granted (a situation in which only the normal first condition is established), and thus prevent a ceiling privilege disadvantageous to the player from being granted with a high probability.

First, the processing contents of ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) will be explained with reference to FIG. 476. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of ceiling determination process 14 (S38071). Ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) differs from the above-mentioned ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) in that it determines whether the special first condition (700 times stuck) has been met, and in that the processing contents when the special first condition is met are different. The processing contents are otherwise the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) is executed, the processes of S38101 to S38109 are executed, which are the same as the above-mentioned ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452). Then, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol selection count counter 2231c is not 500 (not the special symbol selection for the 500th time of the combination) (S38104: No), it is next determined whether the value of the special symbol selection count counter 2231c is 700 (is it the special symbol selection for the 700th time of the combination) (S38171).

If it is determined in the process of S38171 that the number is not 700 (S38171: No), the process proceeds to S38105 and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is 700, the special first condition is met (S38171: Yes), so the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to on (S38172), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to off (S38173), the process proceeds to S38108 and ends this process.

When the second ceiling wait flag 203lc or the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to on, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the time-saving type (number of time-saving times) according to the type of ceiling wait flag that is set to on is set as the time-saving state. In other words, in this fourteenth control example, different types of ceiling wait flags are set to on depending on the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc, so that different types of time-saving states are set as the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, different time-saving states can be set depending on the number of times the player gets stuck, so it is possible to provide a game in which the player does not quickly become bored with the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, if a player wins a special pattern lottery a predetermined number of times in a row (if the lottery results are unfavorable to the player in a row), the ceiling bonus can be awarded (the ceiling wait flag is set to ON). However, this is not limited to this, and the ceiling wait flag (special ceiling wait flag) may be set to ON, for example, after the end of a jackpot game or for a predetermined period of time after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

By configuring it in this way, when a special period (special ceiling wait flag) is set as the play period of the pachinko machine 10, a period can be set in which the ceiling bonus is more likely to be awarded, making it easier to provide players with a more advantageous play experience than when other periods are set.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14 (S30274) will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14 (S30274). This time-saving setting process 14 (S30274) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455) in that the ceiling bonus is not awarded if the time-saving win is won in the target special pattern lottery, that processing for the case where the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to on has been added, and that the content of the bonus awarded when the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is set to on has been changed, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

When time-saving setting process 14 (S30274) is executed, first it is determined whether the result of this lottery is a time-saving winning (S8351), and if it is determined that the result is a time-saving winning (S8351: Yes), the same processes of S8352 to S8354 as those of time-saving setting process 13 described above (see S30254 in FIG. 455) are executed, and this process ends.

In other words, in the time-saving setting process 13 of the thirteenth control example described above (see S30254 in FIG. 455), priority is given to the ceiling bonus award, which is more likely to award a bonus advantageous to the player, than the result of the time-saving lottery, whereas in this fourteenth control example, if the result of the time-saving lottery is a time-saving win, priority is given to processing based on the time-saving win over the ceiling bonus award.

By configuring it in this way, even if a ceiling privilege can be granted (a state in which various ceiling standby flags are set on), as long as the lottery results of the special pattern lottery continue to be time-saving winning, the ceiling privilege will not be granted (it will be difficult to grant). Therefore, since the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted can be made random even after a state in which a ceiling privilege can be granted (a state in which various ceiling standby flags are set on) is established, it is possible to have the player continue to play for a long time in the hope of being granted the ceiling privilege.

In the fourteenth control example, when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, the ceiling bonus is always not awarded, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a specific time-saving type is set as the time-saving type to be set when a time-saving win is won, the process for awarding the ceiling bonus may be executed with priority over the process for setting the time-saving state based on the time-saving win. By configuring in this way, the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus can be made more complex, and the timing from when a state in which the ceiling bonus can be awarded (a state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to on) is set to when the ceiling bonus is awarded can be made more random.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute a process that combines the results of the time-saving lottery and the granting of a ceiling bonus. For example, if a specific time-saving type is set as the type of time-saving type that is set when the time-saving lottery is won, a more favorable ceiling bonus may be set than the ceiling bonus that is set when the time-saving lottery is not won. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a gameplay that combines the results of the time-saving lottery and the granting of a ceiling bonus.

Returning to FIG. 477, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8351, if it is determined that the time-saving has not been won (S8351: No), it is determined whether the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S38351: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38374), the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to OFF (S38353), the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-savings is set (S38356), the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S38351, if it is determined that the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is not set to on (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to on (S38358), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S38358: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38359), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to off (S38360), the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process is terminated.

Then, in the processing of S38358, if it is determined that the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is not set on (S38358: No), then it is determined whether the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set on (S38371), and if it is determined that it is set on (S38371: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10,000 (S38372), the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to off (S38373), the third time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a status command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this processing is terminated. Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S38371 that the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is not set to ON (S38371: No), that is, if it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are not met based on the special pattern lottery executed this time, this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to Figs. 478 to 480, the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 14th control example will be described. The control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 14th control example differs from the 13th control example described above in the processing related to the period presentation (ceiling activation mode) for notifying the player of the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met to when the ceiling bonus is actually granted (until the second condition, which is met without winning the time-saving bonus, is met), and the processing related to the suggestion presentation for suggesting to the player the results of the time-saving bonus lottery during the ceiling activation mode.

Specifically, the difference is that instead of the status command reception process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459), a status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, and instead of the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463), a normal mode performance setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) is executed. The rest of the processing is the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) will be explained with reference to FIG. 478. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478). In this state command receiving process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478), the state command receiving process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) executed in the above-mentioned 13th control example is different in that, as the process executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time-saving state, the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) is executed instead of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (S9091 in FIG. 460) as the process executed, and in that the process is configured to be able to execute a process of determining whether the second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is set to ON or the third ceiling waiting flag 203ma is set to ON in order to execute a period presentation (ceiling activation mode) for notifying the player of the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times stuck) is established until the ceiling bonus is actually granted (until the second condition that is established without winning the time-saving bonus is established). Otherwise, it is the same, and the description of the same processing contents will be omitted.

When the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, the same processes of S9001 to S9094 as the status command reception process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) executed in the thirteenth control example described above are executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the time-saving state has been changed (S9005: Yes), the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 is executed (S39091) and the process proceeds to S9093. The contents of this time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) will be described later with reference to FIG. 479.

In addition, in the processing of S9093, if it is determined that there is no information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la (S9093: No), or if it is determined that there is information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la (S9093: Yes) in the processing of S9093, and the value corresponding to the received value is set as the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc (S9094), that is, when the processing for synchronizing the value of the special drawing counter 203la measured by the main control unit 110 with the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc is completed, it is next determined whether the received status command has information indicating the second ceiling standby or the third ceiling standby (information indicating that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc, or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to on) (S9095), and if it is determined that it does have such information (S9095: Yes), the ceiling activation mode in progress flag 223ma is set to on (S9096), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9095 that the received status command does not contain information indicating second ceiling standby or third ceiling standby (information indicating that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to on) (S9095: No), the process of S9096 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, it is determined whether the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met (the number of stuck times is 500 or more) based on the information contained in the status command output from the main control unit 110, and if the first condition is met, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON.

When the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on, a special presentation is executed to notify the player that the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is currently met (the number of stuck times is 500 or more). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the ceiling bonus is likely to be granted (a state in which it is more likely to be granted than when the first condition is not met), and this makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus.

Next, referring to FIG. 479, the control process of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) executed in the state command receiving process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) will be described. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091). This time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) differs from the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) executed in the thirteenth control example described above in that when a ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is awarded (set), a process is added to set the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma to off to indicate that the first condition for awarding the ceiling bonus is met. Other than that, it is the same, and the description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 479, when the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) is executed, the same processes of S34301 to S34309 as the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) executed in the above-mentioned thirteenth control example are executed. Then, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the third time-saving state has been set (a ceiling bonus has been granted) (S34305: Yes), it is determined whether the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on (S34371), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S34371: Yes), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to off (S34372), and the process proceeds to S34306. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S34371 that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to on (S34371: No), the process of S34372 is skipped and the process proceeds to S34306.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma remains set to on even though a ceiling bonus has been awarded, resulting in the execution of an effect indicating that the ceiling activation mode is in progress (see FIG. 471(b)), which is difficult for the player to understand.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as in the above-mentioned 13th control example, a right-hitting game state (third time-saving state) for a predetermined period of time can be granted as a ceiling privilege, and a privilege in which the degree of advantage granted to the player is the same as the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state in which the right-hitting game state is set) can be granted based on the results of a special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the right-hitting game state before the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (number of times of getting stuck) is met, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the right-hitting game state (ceiling privilege) will be granted.

In this fourteenth control example, when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on, making it possible to execute a period effect (ceiling activation mode effect) during which there is a high possibility of granting the ceiling privilege. However, when the right-hit game state is set by another trigger (winning the jackpot C13, or winning the time-saving state which sets the second time-saving state), the ceiling activation mode effect is not executed, so there is a problem that when the right-hit game state is set, the trigger is predicted by the player depending on whether the ceiling activation mode effect is executed or not.

To solve this problem, for example, when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON. By configuring in this way, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, the player can easily understand that the right-hit game state has been set because the ceiling privilege has been granted. However, even when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, it is possible to prevent the ceiling activation mode effect from being executed, so that it is more difficult for the player to predict the trigger when the right-hit game state is set than in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 14th control example.

In addition, the information (lottery information) contained in the reserved and stored lottery right for the special pattern lottery (special pattern reservation) may be configured to be able to be determined in advance (read ahead) before the special pattern lottery is executed, and if the result of that pre-determination contains information indicating the special pattern lottery result for which a right-hand play state is set, the ceiling activation mode presentation may be executed using a presentation period that includes at least a portion of the period until the special pattern lottery is executed, which contains information indicating the special pattern lottery result for which the right-hand play state is set.

By configuring it in this way, even if the right-hit game state is set by a trigger other than the awarding of the ceiling bonus (winning the jackpot C13, or winning the time-saving mode that sets the second time-saving state), it is possible to execute the ceiling activation mode presentation, making it more difficult for the player to predict the trigger when the right-hit game state is set than in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example described above.

In addition, in this case, when the right-hand play state is set by a trigger other than the awarding of the ceiling privilege (winning the jackpot C13, or winning the time-saving state that sets the second time-saving state), the rate at which the ceiling activation mode effect is executed can be varied based on the number of times the special pattern has been drawn (the number of times it has stuck) since the end of the previous jackpot play. For example, when the last digit of the number of times the special pattern has been drawn (the number of times it has stuck) is "0" or when the last two digits are "00", i.e., when the number of times it stuck is a round number, it can be configured so that the ceiling activation mode effect is more likely to be executed than in other cases.

By configuring it in this way, when a right-hit gaming state (second gaming state) is set based on the results of a special symbol lottery, a ceiling activation mode presentation is executed if the number of stuck spins is good, and the right-hit gaming state can be easily set through a presentation process similar to that when a ceiling bonus is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first condition for awarding a ceiling bonus has been met or whether the ceiling activation mode presentation has been executed as a result of a prior determination.

Next, referring to FIG. 480, the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) will be described. FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480). This normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) differs from the above-mentioned normal mode effect setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463) in that it executes processing to set the effect to be executed when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times stuck) is met (when the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON). All other aspects are the same, and the same processing contents will not be described.

When normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) is executed, the same processes of S34501 to S34506 as normal mode effect setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463) of the thirteenth control example described above are executed, and if it is determined in the process of S34506 that the time-saving winning change that sets the second time-saving (second time-saving state) is not occurring (S34506: No), it is then determined whether the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571).

In the process of S34571, if it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S34572), and if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S34572: No), it is then determined whether the current lottery result is a time-saving win (S34573). If it is determined that the time-saving win is not a win, that is, if the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON and the normal state is set (S34578: No), the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set after the special symbol variation stops, so the performance mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to the time-saving as the ceiling activation mode performance is determined (S34578), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34579), and this process is terminated.

When a variable presentation based on the presentation mode determined in the processing of S34578 is executed, as shown in FIG. 472(b), a variable presentation is executed in which the "time-saving" decorative patterns (LL2, CL2, RL2) are displayed as stopped to indicate that a ceiling bonus will be awarded. In this way, in this 14th control example, even if the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss (complete miss) that does not result in a jackpot win or a time-saving win, if a specific presentation state is set, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped in a display mode that indicates that a bonus that is advantageous to the player will be awarded.

By configuring it in this way, in the variable presentation to show the result of the special pattern lottery, instead of stopping and displaying decorative patterns in a combination that corresponds to the result of the special pattern lottery, it is possible to stop and display decorative patterns that indicate the content of the benefit that will be granted based on the result of the special pattern lottery that was executed, making it possible to execute a variable presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

In this fourteenth control example, there are two states in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss (complete miss) that does not result in a jackpot win or a time-saving win, and which is advantageous to the player (a state in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on) and unfavorable to the player (a state in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to on). Depending on the state that is set, the display mode of the decorative pattern that stops to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a complete miss is changed, but without being limited to this, the same display mode may be set as the display mode of the decorative pattern that stops to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a complete miss, regardless of the state that is set.

In this case, it is sufficient to execute a notification effect to indicate that a beneficial bonus (ceiling bonus) will be awarded to the player based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a complete miss, without using the stop display mode of the decorative pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to omit the process of determining different stop display modes of the decorative patterns based on the result of the special pattern lottery and the set state.

As shown in FIG. 472(b), if the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern is configured to inform the player of the contents of the benefit that will be granted later based on the result of the special pattern lottery, rather than the result of the special pattern lottery, it is preferable to display the stopped display mode of a second decorative pattern (fourth pattern) that is different from the decorative pattern in a stopped display mode that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery ("342" in FIG. 472(b)). This makes it possible to inform the player of information showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 472(b), in this fourteenth control example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern larger than the stopped display mode of the second decorative pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is easier for the player to grasp the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern than the stopped display mode of the second decorative pattern, so even if the decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to be displayable, it is possible to execute a variable presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

Returning to FIG. 480, the explanation will continue. In the process of S34573, if it is determined that the time-saving feature has been won (S34573: Yes), it is determined whether the first time-saving feature will be set based on the time-saving feature win (S34574). If it is determined that the first time-saving feature will be set (S34574: Yes), a presentation mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to a "miss" is determined (S34575). Next, it is determined whether the value of the lottery count counter 2231c is 700 (S34576). If it is determined that the value is 700 (S34576: Yes), a presentation mode for indicating the super ceiling activation mode is determined (S34577), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S34572 that a jackpot has been won (S34572: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S34574 that a time-saving state other than the first time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set (S34574: No), that is, if the ceiling activation mode effect ends without granting a ceiling bonus, the ceiling activation mode in progress flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34580), the process of S34509 is executed, and this process ends. In this case, for example, if a jackpot has been won, a performance mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to "V" is determined, and the ceiling activation mode effect ends when the third symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won, and if the second time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, a performance mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to "time-saving" is determined, and the ceiling activation mode effect ends after executing a variable performance as if a ceiling bonus had been granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the termination condition for terminating the ceiling activation mode is met during the ceiling activation mode presentation before the ceiling bonus is awarded, the ceiling activation mode presentation can be terminated without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

As explained above, this 14th control example is configured so that after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, the ceiling bonus can be granted if the second condition is met (a miss win) in a time-saving lottery that has a high probability (900/1000) of winning the time-saving lottery. This allows for irregularity in the timing at which the ceiling bonus is granted, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met until the second condition is met exceeds a predetermined period (200 special chart fluctuations), a bonus that is more advantageous to the player (second ceiling bonus) can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met until the second condition is met becomes long, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In this fourteenth control example, the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 consecutive hits) is predefined, but without being limited thereto, the number of consecutive hits that is the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege may be determined based on the result of a special lottery that is executed when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 consecutive hits) is met, and the number of consecutive hits may be determined to be 700 if the result of the special lottery is the first result, 501 if the result is the second result that is different from the first result, and 800 if the result is the third result that is different from the first result and the second result.

In this way, rather than prescribing the conditions for granting the second ceiling bonus, the conditions are made determinable during the period in which the number of stuck times is being updated, and the conditions for granting the second ceiling bonus that are determined can be set to grant conditions that are easy to achieve (low number of stuck times) and grant conditions that are difficult to achieve (high number of stuck times). This makes it possible to play games in which the second ceiling bonus is likely to be granted and games in which the second ceiling bonus is unlikely to be granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as described above with reference to Figures 471 and 472, during the ceiling activation mode, which indicates that the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 consecutive hits) is met, the time-saving card (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "ceiling privilege" is displayed, and during the super ceiling activation mode, which indicates that the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 consecutive hits) is met, the super time-saving card (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "second ceiling privilege" is displayed, so that the player is informed of the current game situation in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition to this, during the ceiling activation mode, a suggestion mode that can suggest the remaining time until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 consecutive hits) is met may be displayed.

For example, the period from when the ceiling activation mode is set to when the super ceiling activation mode is set (the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 consecutive wins) is met to when the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 consecutive wins) is met) can be divided into a plurality of periods (first to third periods) corresponding to the length of the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met, and in the first period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met is the longest, the effect shown in FIG. 471(b) is executed, in the second period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met is shorter than the first period, the effect in which the super time-saving card RL2 is added to the right line RL is executed, and in the third period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met is shorter than the second period, the effect in which the super time-saving cards RL2 and CL2 are added to the right line RL and the middle line CL is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the card types (ultra-time-saving cards) that can be stopped and displayed in a specified combination (three-match) during the ultra-ceiling activation mode as various patterns (cards) that are variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode, making the player believe that the ultra-ceiling activation mode will be activated soon. In this case, if each pattern row that is variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode has multiple time-saving cards, it is also possible to configure it so that some of the time-saving cards that are already variably displayed are switched to super-time-saving cards. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display super-time-saving cards without increasing the number of cards that each pattern row has.

In this case, a combination in which three time-saving cards or three super time-saving cards are stopped can be set as a combination of symbols that indicates that a ceiling bonus will be awarded during the ceiling activation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that the super ceiling activation mode will be activated soon by simply executing a process that switches the display mode of the time-saving cards to that of the super time-saving cards, without changing the variable display control of various cards during the ceiling activation mode.

<Regarding the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
Next, a first modified example of the present fourteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 481 to Fig. 490. The above-mentioned fourteenth control example is configured to grant a ceiling award when a second condition is satisfied (a miss win) in a time-saving lottery that has a high probability (900/1000) of winning the time-saving lottery after a first condition (500 times of stuck wins) for granting the ceiling award is satisfied, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game by providing irregularity to the timing at which the ceiling award is granted.

However, after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, the period until the second condition is met can be long, which can cause a problem in which the player is unable to be granted the ceiling bonus.

In contrast to this, in the first variant of this 14th control example, when a player wins the time-saving lottery in the normal state, a first time-saving state with a different number of time-saving times can be set, and after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met, the set first time-saving state ends, thereby fulfilling the second condition and granting the ceiling bonus.

In other words, the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met can be diversified by the number of time-saving events set as the first time-saving state and the timing at which the first time-saving state is set, and it is also possible to set an upper limit on the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide irregularity in the timing at which the ceiling bonus is awarded, increasing the player's interest in the game, while at the same time preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing by setting an upper limit on the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met.

In addition, in this first modified example, the timing when the second condition is met can be determined in advance before the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met. Specifically, when the remaining period (remaining number of fluctuations) until the timing when the first condition is met (until the number of stuck times reaches 500) is 50 times and the remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state is 100 times, it is possible to determine in advance that the period from the meeting of the first condition to the meeting of the second condition will be 50 special pattern fluctuations.

This makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect for indicating the timing at which the ceiling bonus will be granted before the first condition is met. Furthermore, before the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, it is also possible to notify the player of whether the number of time-saving times to be set as the first time-saving state in a state in which the first time-saving state can be newly set, i.e., in the normal state, will be a number of time-saving times that will lengthen the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met, or a number of time-saving times that will be relatively short.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play while predicting the timing when the ceiling prize will be awarded, even when none of the multiple conditions for awarding the ceiling prize have been met.

<Regarding the content of the performance in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
First, referring to Fig. 481, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the present 14th control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the present 14th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that the time-saving lottery is not executed while the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the left-hand play state, and a different number of time-saving times can be set as the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state.

In other words, after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, the set first time-saving state ends, and the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, and the ceiling bonus is granted.

By configuring it in this way, the remaining number of times the first time-saving state is set at the time the first condition is met is preset as the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded, making it less likely that a situation will occur in which the second condition is not met for a long period of time despite the first condition being met, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example described above.

Furthermore, similar to the 14th control example described above, a period effect (ceiling activation mode effect) is configured to be executable to indicate that the first condition (500 consecutive wins) for which a ceiling bonus can be awarded has been met, and in the ceiling activation mode effect, an effect based on the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is configured to be executable.

Here, in the first modified example of this fourteenth control example, the length of the period during which the ceiling activation mode effect is executed is the remaining time (remaining number of time-saving times) in the first time-saving state, so it is possible to determine this length in advance. The system is configured to be able to execute an effect according to the length of the period set as the effect period for the ceiling activation mode effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the period until the ceiling bonus is granted, making it easier for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing.

In addition, in the first variant of the fourteenth control example, if the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met is within a predetermined period (e.g., four special pattern draws), a special presentation mode different from the normal one can be set as a notification mode for notifying the player that the first condition has been met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the timing at which the second condition is met is advantageous to the player (the timing immediately after the first condition is met).

In addition, in the first variant of the fourteenth control example, in cases where the right-hit game state is set without the second condition being met after the first condition is met (where the second time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot or time-saving win), the presentation mode that is set when the second condition is met can be set for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the trigger that sets the right-hit game state.

In the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 481 is executed. FIG. 481(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in the ceiling activation mode effect to indicate that the first condition has been met, and FIG. 481(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when it has been determined that the second condition will be met at the time the first condition is met.

Therefore, in this first modified example, a game state suggestion effect is executable during left-hand play to allow the player to predict whether or not the first time-saving state has been set. Figure 481(a) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen for the game state suggestion effect, and Figure 481(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a suggestion effect to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state has been set during left-hand play.

As shown in FIG. 481(a), when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, a heart-pounding zone is set as a ceiling activation mode effect. During this heart-pounding zone, a door 871 appears in the main display area Dm, and each time a special symbol lottery is performed, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 uses a key to open the door 871.

In the secondary display area Ds, a comment such as "Use the key to open the door. When the door opens, the time-saving feature will begin" is displayed as a way of explaining the content of the performance during the Doki Doki Zone, informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a bonus will be awarded if the door 871 opens.

The small display area Dm9 formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm is configured to be able to display the reserved icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the lottery right for the first special pattern lottery that has already been acquired (Special pattern 1 reserved), and in the diagram shown in Figure 481 (a), four reserved icons hr1 to hr4 are displayed corresponding to the fact that four Special pattern 1 reserved have been acquired.

The reserved icons hr1 to hr4 are configured to display a number corresponding to the acquired special chart 1 reservations, with the first reserved icon hr1 corresponding to the first special chart 1 reservation (first special chart 1 reservation), the second reserved icon hr2 corresponding to the second special chart 1 reservation (second special chart 1 reservation), the third reserved icon hr3 corresponding to the third special chart 1 reservation (third special chart 1 reservation), and the fourth reserved icon hr4 corresponding to the fourth special chart 1 reservation (fourth special chart 1 reservation).

When a new special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is performed during the Doki Doki Zone, the key displayed as the first reserved icon hr1 is used to open the door 871, and the key displayed as the second reserved icon hr2 shifts to the first reserved icon hr1, and then the key displayed as the third reserved icon hr3 shifts to the second reserved icon hr2, and the key displayed as the fourth reserved icon hr4 shifts to the third reserved icon hr3, and the display screen becomes one in which the fourth reserved icon hr4 is not displayed. In this case, if a new special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, the fourth reserved icon hr4 is displayed.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 481, only the fourth hold icon hr4 is displayed in a different display mode from the other hold icons (the first hold icon hr1 to the third hold icon hr3), and the first hold icon hr1 to the third hold icon hr3 are displayed in a display mode indicating a normal key, while the fourth hold icon hr4 is displayed in a display mode indicating a special key.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the display mode of the first reserve icon hr1 to the fourth reserve icon hr4 is usually configured to be set to a display mode showing a normal key, and is configured so that the display mode showing a special key is more likely to be set for special reserves corresponding to special pattern changes where the second condition is met, or special reserves that result in a jackpot win (time-saving win). Furthermore, in a change presentation using a reserve icon displayed in a display mode showing a special key, a change presentation that results in the opening of door 871 is more likely to be executed than in a change presentation using a reserve icon displayed in a display mode showing a normal key. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the display mode of the reserve icons.

In addition, if the second condition is met immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met and the thrill zone is set, the special effect shown in FIG. 481(b) can be executed, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 481(a) (opening the door with a key).

In the special effect shown in FIG. 481(b), an automatic door 871 is displayed instead of the door 871 (see FIG. 481(a)) that is displayed in the normal effect during the Doki Doki Zone. The comment "You're so lucky! Just get close and the door will open" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a notification to inform the player that the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) will soon be awarded.

During the special effect, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 approaches the automatic door 871 until a special pattern change that satisfies the second condition is displayed, and the automatic door 871 opens when the special pattern change that satisfies the second condition is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the player is notified that a ceiling bonus will be awarded. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine the length of time remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded, depending on the type of door that is displayed when the thrill zone is set.

In addition, by configuring the system to be able to execute a special effect in which an automatic door 871 is displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, for example, a normal effect (see FIG. 481(a)) is executed when the second condition is met by executing a special pattern change for the 501st stuck time, i.e., the door 871 opens with the first key before the player has time to understand the content of the normal effect, thereby reducing the effect of the effect.

As explained above, in the first variant of the fourteenth control example, the remaining period until the second condition is met can be determined when the first condition for granting a ceiling bonus is met, so it is possible to execute an effect (ceiling activation mode effect) according to the length of the remaining period from when the first condition is met until when the second condition is met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the content of the ceiling activation mode effect.

In the first variant of the fourteenth control example, when the number of times the player gets stuck reaches a specified number (500 times), a ceiling activation mode effect is executed, and the effect mode is set according to the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect (the remaining period from when the first condition is met until the second condition is met). When the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect is within a specified period (for example, within four special pattern lotteries), a ceiling activation mode effect (see FIG. 481(b)) in which a special effect mode is set can be executed, thereby making it possible to keep the player interested in which effect mode will be set when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed.

However, in the first variant of this 14th control example, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the number of times the player gets stuck reaches a specified number (500 times), so the special effect mode can be set when the second condition is met with a special pattern change where the number of times the player gets stuck is between 501 and 504 times, which creates the problem that it is difficult to set the special effect mode.

To solve this problem, for example, the timing to execute the ceiling activation mode effect may be configured to be determined based on the timing of the establishment of the second condition. For example, even if the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is established, the ceiling activation mode effect may not be executed, and the ceiling activation mode effect may be executed when the remaining time until the second condition is established is within a predetermined period (for example, within four special symbol draws). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily set a special effect mode as the ceiling activation mode effect. Also, by making the period for the first condition to be established different from the performance period of the ceiling activation mode effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the content of the game that will be executed later.

In the first variant of the fourteenth control example, when the number of times the player has been stuck reaches a specified number (500 times), a ceiling activation mode presentation is executed, and the presentation mode is set according to the presentation period of the ceiling activation mode presentation (the remaining period from when the first condition is met until the second condition is met), so that a presentation that allows the player to predict the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded can be executed. However, various presentations that allow the player to predict the remaining period until the second condition is met during the period before the first condition is met may also be executed.

For example, when a time-saving lottery is executed in the normal state, it may be possible to determine whether the first time-saving state set this time will end after the first condition is met based on the number of time-saving times for the first time-saving state set this time and the number of times remaining until the first condition is met, and to execute an effect (time-saving winning effect) corresponding to the length of the period from the first condition being met to the end of the first time-saving state if it is determined that the first time-saving state will end after the first condition is met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether the game situation is such that the ceiling bonus is likely to be awarded (the period from the first condition being met to the second condition being met is short) before the first condition is met.

In addition, if it is determined that the first time-saving state currently set will end before the first condition is satisfied, the remaining period from the end of the first time-saving state currently set until the first condition is satisfied is identified, and it is determined whether the length of the identified remaining period is longer than the smallest number of time-saving times that can be set as the first time-saving state. If it is determined that the length of the remaining period from the end of the first time-saving state currently set until the first condition is satisfied is shorter than the smallest number of time-saving times that can be set as the first time-saving state, or if it is longer, different types of presentation (presentation when the time-saving state is won) may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of information regarding the timing when the next set first time-saving state will end and the timing when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus will be met, making it possible for the player to predict whether or not the game situation is such that the ceiling bonus is likely to be granted (the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met is short).

For example, it would be good to configure the device to be able to execute a presentation that can inform the player of periods that are likely to be advantageous to the player and periods that are likely to be disadvantageous to the player if the time-saving win is won, based on the number of times the player gets stuck measured in the normal state and the number of times the time-saving win is set in the first time-saving state if the time-saving win is won.

Specifically, in this 14th control example, as shown in FIG. 483, when the first time-saving state is set, the number of time-saving times can be set in the range of "100" to "300", and most of them are set in units of about 100 (100 times, 200 times, 300 times). The number of times of stuck play is set to 500 times as the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege. Therefore, the period in which the number of times of stuck play measured in the normal state is around 200 times, around 300 times, and around 400 times is the period in which the first time-saving state that ends immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established (advantageous period) can be set. On the other hand, in the period in which the number of times of stuck play measured in the normal state is 450 times to 499 times, the period from the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established to the end of the first time-saving state is long (unfavorable period).

Therefore, periods in which the number of times a player is stuck in a normal state is between 201 and 220, 301 and 320, and 401 and 420 are set as advantageous periods, and an effect is executed to indicate to the player that this is an advantageous period that is likely to be advantageous to the player if the player wins the time-saving feature. More specifically, "Advantageous Zone" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guide mode to indicate that the player is currently in an advantageous period, and if a special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous zone, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 hits a golf ball. Then, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a complete miss (no win for either the jackpot or the time-saving feature), "One more time" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the player hits the ball again in an effect corresponding to the next special symbol lottery.

If the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or if the time-saving win sets the second time-saving state, a hole-in-one effect is executed in which the golf ball hit by rabbit 801 goes into the cup, and if the icon on the ball taken out of the cup is a "V," a jackpot win is announced, and if it is "time-saving," the setting of the second time-saving state based on the time-saving win is announced.

In addition, when the time-saving is won in the special pattern lottery, the difference between the number of times the time-saving state is set by this time-saving winning and the number of times the remaining number of times the ball is stuck until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met is calculated, and when the calculated difference is such that the first time-saving state ends within five special pattern fluctuations executed after the first condition is met, that is, when the optimal first time-saving state is set for the set advantageous zone, a near-pin effect is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, in which the golf ball hit near the cup is positioned and the words "Nice shot! Near-pin award won" are displayed. When this near-pin effect is executed, the near-pin award trophy is configured to continue to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling privilege is granted or until a jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is a game status in which the ceiling privilege is granted immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is granted (within five special pattern fluctuations).

In addition, if the calculated difference (the difference between the number of times the first time-saving state set by the current time-saving winning and the number of times the remaining stuck state is until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established) ends within 20 special pattern variations executed after the first condition is established, that is, if an appropriate first time-saving state is set for the set advantageous zone, a green-on effect is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, in which the golf ball is positioned on the green and the words "Nice shot!!" are displayed. When this green-on effect is executed, unlike the near-pin award effect, a specific mode (trophy, etc.) is not continuously displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling privilege is granted or until a big win game is executed. By configuring in this way, only the player who has experienced the green-on effect can easily inform the player that the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is a game status in which the ceiling privilege is granted immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established (within 20 special pattern variations).

On the other hand, if the calculated difference (the difference between the number of times the first time-saving state is set by the current time-saving winning and the number of times the remaining stuck state is reached until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met) is such that the first time-saving state does not end within 20 special pattern fluctuations that are executed after the first condition is met, that is, if an appropriate first time-saving state is not set for the set advantageous zone, and the length of the period from the first condition being met to the setting of the first time-saving state is longer than 20 special pattern fluctuations, an OB effect is executed in which the golf ball hit by the character 801 becomes an OB, and then the advantageous zone ends. When this OB effect is executed, it is an effect that indicates that the period from the first condition being met to the end of the first time-saving state is long, as the playing status of the pachinko machine 10, so that a player who has confirmed that the OB effect has been executed can easily decide on a future playing strategy, including moving to another pachinko machine 10.

By configuring the game so that the fact that this OB effect was executed is not displayed as history, it is possible to provide information that only players who are actually playing the game can know (whether or not an OB effect was executed), making it possible to provide players who are actually playing with more advantageous information than players who are not playing the game. It is also possible to configure the game so that the fact that an OB effect was executed can be displayed as history, allowing players to check later whether or not an OB effect was executed.

In addition, if the first time-saving state ends before the first condition is met, the golf ball is positioned on the fairway, a first shot effect is executed in which the words "Next Approach Challenge" are displayed, and the advantageous zone ends.

In this case, a storage means is provided that can store information indicating that the first hit effect has been executed, and when the next advantageous zone is set, if the storage means stores that the first hit effect has been executed, an approach effect is executed. Then, if a new time-saving win occurs in that advantageous zone and the first time-saving state is set, each effect is determined using the same method as the above-mentioned method for determining the effects, and the determined effect is executed.

By executing the effects described above, it is possible to execute different effects before the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met and after the first condition is met as suggestive effects that can suggest to the player when the ceiling bonus will be granted, making it easier for the player to continue playing without losing motivation to play.

In addition, the various effects executed can suggest the timing at which the ceiling bonus will be awarded to the player at a disadvantage (the timing at which the period from when the first condition for awarding the ceiling bonus is met to when the ceiling bonus is awarded will be long), so that the player playing the pachinko machine 10 can decide at various times whether or not to continue playing in order to award the ceiling bonus. This makes it easier for players with different criteria for deciding whether or not to continue playing in order to award the ceiling bonus to alternate between playing the pachinko machine 10, making it easier to increase the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the present 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 482 to Fig. 485. The first modified example of the present 14th control example differs from the above-mentioned 14th control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. The other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 482, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modified example of this 14th control example will be described. FIG. 482 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modified example of this 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 482, the first modified example of this 14th control example is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned 14th control example (see FIG. 473(a)) in that a time-saving type selection 14a table 202maf is provided instead of the time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf.

The time-saving type selection 14a table 202maf differs from the time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf of the above-mentioned 14th control example in that it has a time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 instead of the time-saving 13 table 202lf1 that is referenced when determining the time-saving type when a time-saving lottery is won. This time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 specifies five types of time-saving types as the types of time-saving types for which the first time-saving state is set, and is configured so that a different number of time-saving times is set depending on the type of time-saving type that is set.

Now, referring to FIG. 483, the contents of the time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 in the time-saving type selection 14a table 202maf will be explained. FIG. 483 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1. As shown in FIG. 483, the time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 defines a total of six types of time-saving types, with five types of time-saving types for which the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning, and one type of time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set.

The selection ratio and the number of time-saving times set for the time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set are the same as those in the 14th control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted. On the other hand, the number of types of time-saving types for which the first time-saving state is set is increased, and the number of time-saving times is set to a maximum of 300 and a minimum of 100, depending on the type of time-saving time set.

Specifically, within the range of "0 to 999" that the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 can take, in the range of "0 to 99," the time-saving number is 100 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100), and the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is selected; in the range of "100 to 199," the time-saving number is 101 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 101), and the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is selected; in the range of "200 to 299," the time-saving number is 102 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 102), and the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is selected; In the range of "300 to 599", the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is 200 times the time-saving count (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 200), in the range of "600 to 899", the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is 300 times the time-saving count (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300), in the range of "900 to 999", the time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set is 300 times the time-saving count (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300).

As shown in FIG. 483, in the first modified example of this 14th control example, multiple types of time-saving types are specified as the number of time-saving times set in the first time-saving state, with only a slight difference in the value of the last digit. As described above, in the first modified example of this 14th control example, when the first condition for which the ceiling bonus can be awarded (500 stuck times) is met, the remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state that is set becomes 0 and the normal state is set, the ceiling bonus can be awarded.

In other words, the timing at which the ceiling bonus is awarded varies depending on the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving state at the time the first condition is met. In this case, if the value that can be set as the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state is set to vary at a predetermined interval (for example, 50 times), when the number of special symbol draws near the end of a specific number of time-saving times has ended, the next time the time-saving state can end will be about 50 special symbol draws later, which creates the problem that it is difficult to allow players to continue playing in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, it is possible to set a time-saving type with a slightly different number of times the time-saving is performed, making it easier for players to continue playing in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus. Furthermore, in this first modified example, similar to the above-mentioned 14th control example, it is possible to set the first time-saving state when the time-saving is won in the special pattern lottery, and the probability of winning the time-saving in the time-saving lottery executed in the special pattern lottery is 990/1000, so there is also about a 1% chance that the time-saving will not be won in the first special pattern lottery after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, after the end of a jackpot game, the measurement of the number of times the player is stuck starts anew, but the timing at which the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving state becomes 0 can be made to differ depending on the timing at which the first time-saving state is set and the type of time-saving time in the first time-saving state that is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to make different the value of the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving state when the number of times the player is stuck meets the first condition (500 times), making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the second condition will be met.

The number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state can be set to a maximum of 300 times. This number of time-saving times, 300, is set to a value greater than the number of times the special symbol is drawn that is required from the establishment of the normal first condition (500 times of stuck play) until the establishment of the special first condition (700 times of stuck play).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second ceiling bonus is likely to be set (a situation in which the first time-saving state cannot (is difficult to) end between the establishment of the normal first condition and the establishment of the special first condition) depending on the timing at which the new first time-saving condition is set before the first condition (500 stuck times) is met and the type of time-saving state that is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second ceiling bonus in the above-mentioned 14th control example.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example will be described with reference to Figures 484 and 485. Figure 484 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example. As shown in Figure 484 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that it has a heart-pounding zone performance selection table 222maa. Other than that, they are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The heart-pounding zone presentation selection table 222maa is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode when a heart-pounding zone is set.

Here, we will explain the contents defined in the Doki Doki Zone Presentation Selection Table 222maa with reference to FIG. 485. FIG. 485 shows the contents defined in the Doki Doki Zone Presentation Selection Table 222maa.

As shown in FIG. 485, the Doki Doki Zone effect selection table 222maa specifies different effect modes corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state) at the time when the Doki Doki Zone is set, the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the special chart reservation that has already been acquired (special chart 1 reservation), and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "1", that is, when the second condition is met in the next variation following the special pattern variation in which the first condition is met and the ceiling bonus is awarded, "automatic door" is specified as the presentation mode regardless of the results of the look-ahead and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f. Here, when the presentation mode "automatic door" is determined, the special presentation shown in FIG. 481(b) is executed.

Next, if the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "2" and the pre-read result is "all misses", that is, if it is determined that the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the special reserved pattern (special reserved pattern 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set does not contain information indicating a jackpot win or information indicating a time-saving win that will set the second time-saving state, then the performance mode is specified as "Hold 2 Strong Key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 49", "Normal" for the range of "50 to 89", and "Automatic Door" for the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when the presentation mode of "Hold 2 Strong Key" is determined, the display mode of a special key different from a normal key (corresponding to the display mode of the fourth hold icon hr4 in FIG. 481(a)) is displayed for the second hold icon hr2.

On the other hand, if the pre-read result is "win", that is, if the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the reserved special chart (reserved special chart 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set is determined to contain information indicating a jackpot win, or information indicating a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state, then "automatic door" is specified as the performance mode for the range of "0 to 49" for the acquired performance counter 223f value, and "hold 2 strong key" is specified as the performance mode for the range of "50 to 99".

Here, even if the pre-read result is "a win," the "strong key" is determined for the reserved icon corresponding to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. In this case, if a special pattern lottery that results in a "win" is executed before the second condition is met, an effect is executed in which the door 871 opens using the normal key indicated by the reserved icon corresponding to that special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute an effect in which the door 871 opens even when a normal key is used.

In addition, if the special symbol lottery for the "winning" prize is held after the second condition is met (after the ceiling bonus is awarded), the special symbol lottery for the winning prize is held after the Doki Doki Zone ends, so there is no sense of incongruity in the presentation during the Doki Doki Zone.

In addition, if the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "3" and the pre-read result is "all misses", that is, if it is determined that the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the special reserved pattern (special reserved pattern 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set does not contain information indicating a jackpot win or information indicating a time-saving win that will set the second time-saving state, then the performance mode is specified as "Hold 3 strong key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 49", "Automatic door" for the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal" for the range of "90 to 99".

On the other hand, if the pre-read result is "win", that is, if the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the reserved special chart (reserved special chart 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set is determined to contain information indicating a jackpot win, or information indicating a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state, then "automatic door" is specified as the performance mode for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 89", and "normal" is specified for the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, if the remaining number counter 223maa value is "4" and the look-ahead result is "all misses", then the performance mode is specified as "Keep 4 strong key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value range of "0 to 49", and "Automatic door" for the range of "50 to 99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "Hit", then the performance mode is specified as "Keep 4 strong key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value range of "0 to 49", "Automatic door" for the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal" for the range of "90 to 99".

Furthermore, if the remaining number counter 223maa value is "5-20" and the look-ahead result is "all misses", then "Chance" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0-89", and "Random Strong Key" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "Hit", that is, if the Doki Doki Zone ends with a special symbol lottery that wins before the second condition is met (before the first time-saving state ends), then "Normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0-49", "Strong Key to Win" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "50-89", and "Automatic Door" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99".

When "Chance" is set as the presentation mode, the display mode of the door 871 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set to a display mode showing a door (chance door) that is slightly more luxurious than a normal door (see FIG. 481(a)). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine that the situation is such that the door is more likely to open (the second condition is more likely to be met) than when a normal door 871 is displayed.

In addition, when "random strong key" is set as the presentation mode, the display mode of "strong key" is set for one randomly selected reserved icon among the reserved icons displayed corresponding to acquired reserved special charts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a presentation in which the door 871 does not open when a special key is used (failed presentation).

When the remaining number counter 223maa value is "21-100" and the pre-reading result is "all misses", "Chance" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "0-49", and "Normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "50-99". On the other hand, when the pre-reading result is "win", that is, when the Doki Doki Zone ends with a special symbol lottery that wins before the second condition is met (before the first time-saving state ends), "Strong Key to Win" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "0-49", "Automatic Door" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "50-89", and "Normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "90-99".

When the remaining number counter 223maa value is "101-300" and the pre-reading result is "all misses", "normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0-89", and "chance" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99". On the other hand, when the pre-reading result is "win", that is, when the Doki Doki Zone ends with a special symbol lottery that wins before the second condition is met (before the first time-saving state ends), "automatic door" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0-49", "strong key to win" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "50-89", and "normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99".

Returning to FIG. 484(b), the explanation will continue. FIG. 484(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example differs from the 14th control example described above in that a remaining number counter 223maa and a heart-pounding flag 223mab have been added, but otherwise is the same. Explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

The remaining number counter 223maa is a counter for measuring the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state, and is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times to be set when a state command indicating that the first time-saving state has been set is received. The value is updated (decremented) each time a special symbol lottery is executed during the first time-saving state. The value of this remaining number counter 223maa is referenced when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met, and the remaining period until the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus (end of the first time-saving state) is met is calculated based on the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. The value is cleared to 0 when the first time-saving state ends.

The pounding flag 223mab is a flag for indicating that the presentation mode of the pounding zone has been decided and that the period in which the presentation of the pounding zone is being executed is being held, and is set to ON when the presentation mode of the pounding zone has been decided. While the pounding flag 223mab is set to ON, no new processing for deciding the presentation mode of the pounding zone is executed. By holding the flag in this manner, it is possible to execute a presentation that is easy for the player to understand. The flag is then held to OFF when the presentation period of the pounding zone has ended.

<Regarding control processing in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
Next, the control process in the first modified example of the present fourteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 486 to Fig. 490. The first modified example of the present fourteenth control example differs from the above-mentioned fourteenth control example in that the control process executed by the main control device 110 is different in the process content for executing the time-saving lottery, the process content for granting the ceiling award, and the process content for setting the time-saving state, and in that the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is different in the process content for setting the variable presentation executed in the normal state and the time-saving state.

Specifically, the processing executed by the main control unit 110 differs in that, instead of the time-saving lottery processing 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example, a time-saving lottery processing 14a (S38056a in FIG. 486) is executed, instead of the ceiling determination processing 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476), and instead of the ceiling determination processing 14a (S38071a in FIG. 487), a time-saving setting processing 14 (see S30274 in FIG. 477) is executed, instead of the time-saving setting processing 14a (S30274a in FIG. 488). Also, the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 differs in that instead of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example, a time-saving state presentation setting processing 14a (see S39091a in FIG. 489) is executed, and instead of the normal mode presentation setting processing 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480), a normal mode presentation setting processing 14a (see S34472a in FIG. 490) is executed. The rest of the processing content is the same, and the description of the same processing content will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) will be described with reference to FIG. 486. FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a). This time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) differs from the time-saving lottery process 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that the type of game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is different, and the data table referenced when determining whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won is different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 486, when the time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) is executed, first, information indicating the currently set game state stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S8102), and it is determined whether the currently set game state is normal (S38151a). If it is determined that it is normal (S38151a: Yes), the lottery result (determination result of time-saving winning) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 14 table 202me (S38152a), and the same processes of S8105 and S8106 as those of the time-saving lottery process 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not normal in the process of S38151a (S38151a: No), this process is terminated without executing the time-saving lottery.

In other words, in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, only the normal state is specified as the gaming state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed, and if a gaming state other than the normal state is set, the time-saving lottery is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide an opportunity (time-saving lottery) that can grant a special benefit (second time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player only in the normal state, which was the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player, and therefore it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation of a player playing in the normal state.

In addition, unlike the above-mentioned 14th control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed when the first time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving lottery, the normal state can be reliably set by consuming the number of time-saving times corresponding to the set first time-saving state. Therefore, since the maximum period during which the first time-saving state continues can be preset at the time when the first time-saving state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from playing in the first time-saving state for an unnecessarily long period of time. In addition, it is possible to execute a performance (excitement zone) that suggests to the player the length of the period until the first time-saving state ends, based on the length of the maximum period during which the first time-saving state continues that is preset at the time when the first time-saving state is set.

Next, the processing contents of the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) will be described with reference to FIG. 487. FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a). This ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) differs from the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that the condition for updating the information (number of times of sticking) related to the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (number of times of sticking 500 times) is different, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 487, when the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) is executed, a control process is executed in which the process of S38102 is deleted from the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example. Specifically, after the process of S38101 is executed, the process moves to the process of S38103 without executing the process of S38102.

In other words, the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) is configured so that the number of times a player is stuck is incremented each time a special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of the set game state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily fix the timing at which the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times of stuck bonuses) is met, and therefore it is possible to easily get the player interested in the timing at which the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus (end of the first time-saving state) is met.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 488. FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a). This time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a) differs from the time-saving setting process 14 (see S30274 in FIG. 477) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that a new time-saving state can be set only when the normal state is set as the game state. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 488, when the time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a) is executed, it is determined whether the current state is normal (S38571), and if it is determined that the current state is not normal (S38571: No), various processes for setting the time-saving state are skipped and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is normal (S38571: Yes), the same processes of S8351 to S38357 as those of the time-saving setting process 14 described above (see S30274 in FIG. 477) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, the process for setting a new time-saving state is configured to be executable only when a specific game state (normal state) is set, and by first determining whether a specific game state (normal state) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for unnecessary processes to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 488, in the first modified example of the 14th control example, when the normal state is set, the setting of the time-saving state based on the result of the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the setting of the time-saving state based on the ceiling privilege. However, without being limited to this, the setting of the time-saving state based on the ceiling privilege may be configured to be executed in priority over the setting of the time-saving state based on the result of the time-saving lottery. In this case, similar to the time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455) executed in the above-mentioned 13th control example, the process of determining the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (setting status of various ceiling standby flags) is executed first, and if the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are not met (if none of the various ceiling standby flags are set to on), the process of setting the time-saving state based on the result of the time-saving lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met and the first time-saving state that has already been set ends, the ceiling bonus can be granted without fail.

Furthermore, in the first variant of this fourteenth control example, except when the normal state is set, even if the conditions for setting a new time-saving state are met (when any of the various ceiling waiting flags are set to on), a new time-saving state is not set, and the right to set a new time-saving state is carried over until the normal state is set (a time-saving carryover function is provided).

This time-saving carryover function may be applied to other purposes. For example, when a right-hitting game state such as the second time-saving state or the probability bonus state is set, if the conditions for granting a ceiling bonus are met, a right-hitting game state based on the ceiling bonus may be set after the right-hitting game state based on the currently set game state ends. By configuring it in this way, the period during which the right-hitting game state that is advantageous to the player continues can be extended, making it easier to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, regardless of when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met during right-hand play, the same bonus (awarding of the ceiling bonus after the right-hand play ends) can be provided, so it is possible to prevent the contents of the ceiling bonus granted to the player from being excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

Furthermore, the time-saving lottery may be configured to be executable even during right-hand play mode, and if a time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set is selected in the time-saving lottery, the second time-saving state based on the time-saving winning may be set after the right-hand play mode ends. In this case, as in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to set a time-saving type (advantageous time-saving) for which the second time-saving state is set during a part of the time-saving winning, the time-saving lottery may be configured to be executable repeatedly until the advantageous time-saving type is won (even if a time-saving type other than the advantageous time-saving type is won), and the time-saving lottery may not be executed on the condition that the advantageous time-saving type is won.

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that multiple winning results of the time-saving feature can be carried over. For example, if five time-saving features are won in a time-saving feature lottery executed during right-hand play, the system may be configured to set the time-saving feature state in sequence based on those five time-saving features.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 489. FIG. 489 is a diagram showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a). This time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) in that a process for measuring the number of time-saving times that is set when the first time-saving state is set is added, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 489, when the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a) is executed, the same processes of S34301 to S34303 as those of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 described above (see S39091 in FIG. 479) are executed, and if it is determined in the process of S34303 that the first time-saving state has been set (S34303: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa (S34391), and then the same processes of S34305 to S34309 as those of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 described above (see S39091 in FIG. 479) are executed to end this process.

In this way, in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, the remaining time period of the first time-saving state can be determined by measuring the remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state using the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. This makes it possible to determine the period until the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus (end of the first time-saving state) is met, and to execute a performance based on the determination result.

Next, the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 14a (see S34472a) will be described with reference to FIG. 490. FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 14a (see S34472a). This normal mode performance setting process 14a (see S34472a) differs from the above-mentioned normal mode performance setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) in that the content of the control processing executed when the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on, that is, when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met, is different, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 490, when normal mode effect setting process 14a (see S34472a) is executed, first, the same processes S34501 to S34571 as those in normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) described above are executed.

If it is determined in the processing of S34571 that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on (S34571: Yes), the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is updated (S34591), the Doki Doki Zone performance selection table 222maa is referenced to determine the performance mode of the Doki Doki Zone (S34592), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to off (S34593), the Doki Doki flag 223mab is set to on (S34594), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S34571 that the ceiling activation mode in progress flag 223ma is not set to on (S34571: No), then it is determined whether the pounding flag 223mab is set to on (S34595), and if it is set to on, i.e., if it is determined that the pounding zone has already been set (S34595: Yes), it is decided to update the presentation mode of the pounding zone (S34596), and this processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S34595 that the pounding flag 223mab is not set to on (S34595: No), the presentation mode corresponding to the currently received fluctuation pattern is decided (S34509), and this processing is terminated.

As explained above, in the first variant of this 14th control example, when a time-saving lottery is won, the first time-saving state can be set a predetermined number of times (100 to 300 times of the first time-saving state), and when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times of stuck play) is met, the second condition is met when the first time-saving state ends (when the remaining number of time-saving times becomes 0), and the ceiling bonus can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the ceiling bonus is awarded can be made different depending on when the first time-saving state ends, making it difficult for the player to understand when the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

In the first modified example of this fourteenth control example, the first time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state is set to be established based on the number of times the special pattern changes, but without being limited to this, a second time-saving end condition that can be established based on the result of the special pattern lottery before the first time-saving end condition is established may be set. For example, when the number of times that the result of the special pattern lottery becomes a specific lottery result (a specific lottery result other than winning the jackpot) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the second time-saving end condition may be established and the first time-saving state may be ended.

By configuring it in this way, the first time-saving state can be ended before the number of special pattern changes (time-saving count) that meets the first time-saving end condition is executed, making it difficult for the player to understand when the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

Furthermore, in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed when the first time-saving state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The time-saving lottery may be executed even when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving lottery executed when the first time-saving state is set is won, the number of time-saving times of the newly won first time-saving state may be set (set to the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to determine whether the number of time-saving times of the newly won first time-saving state is less than the remaining number of time-saving times of the already-set first time-saving state, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined based on the determination result. In this case, for example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined to correspond to the value that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of applying to the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, after the first condition is established, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined to correspond to the number of time-saving times that results in the smaller value of the time-saving counter 203h. This configuration can prevent the frequent occurrence of an unnecessarily long period of time between the satisfaction of the first condition and the satisfaction of the second condition.

As explained above, in the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example, the first condition (500 stuck times) and the second condition (end of the first time-saving state) are set as the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, and the ceiling bonus is granted when both conditions are met. Therefore, it is possible to easily differentiate between the timing when the number of special pattern draws (stuck times) set as the first condition is reached and the timing when the ceiling bonus is actually granted.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set different numbers as the number of times that a winning combination will result in the ceiling bonus being awarded, and when the set conditions are met, the ceiling bonus can be awarded at various times (number of times the special symbol is drawn) without having to perform complex processing such as determining one winning combination from among the different winning combinations.

In the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example, the first time-saving state can be set based on the result of the special symbol drawing (the result of the time-saving drawing) regardless of the number of times the special symbol is drawn. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the normal state is set at the time when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, the first time-saving state may be set without fail.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example, the third time-saving state is not set as a ceiling bonus when the first time-saving state is set. In other words, the first time-saving state can be considered a delay state that delays the timing when the third time-saving state is set. It can also be considered a restrictive state that restricts the setting of the third time-saving state.

The first time-saving state is configured to end when the special symbol lottery has been executed a preset number of times for time-saving. In other words, the means for ending the first time-saving state can also be considered a release means for releasing the restricted state (restriction period) in which the setting of the third time-saving state is restricted.

As a method for canceling the first time-saving state (delay state, restricted state), the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example are configured to cancel the first time-saving state (delay state, restricted state) when a condition based on the number of times a special pattern is drawn is satisfied. However, without being limited to this, the time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state used in each of the above-mentioned control examples may be applied as appropriate.

<Regarding the 15th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 15th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 491 to Fig. 503. The pachinko machine 10 in the 15th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 5th control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, a trigger other than a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and a time-saving lottery can be executed in some lottery results (misses) in which the result of the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) for a specific special pattern (second special pattern) is different from a jackpot win, so that a trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this fifteenth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time-saving lottery is configured to be executable only in the second special symbol lottery, and is configured to be executable at least in the normal state and the second special state.

When the time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set, it is configured to make it easier to insert a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and the first special symbol lottery is executed in preference to the second special symbol lottery. In addition, in this fifteenth control example, it is configured to set a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after the end of a jackpot game, and it is configured so that the length of the period during which the high probability state for special symbols continues (probability variable period) and the length of the period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (time-saving period) can be set to be different.

Specifically, the system is configured so that the probability variable state can be set after the end of a jackpot game so that the duration of the probability variable period is longer than the duration of the short time period. In this case, the game state after the end of a jackpot game is configured to transition in the following order as the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed increases: probability variable state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), second probability variable state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns).

Furthermore, the system is configured so that a time-saving lottery that is more advantageous to the player is executed when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state, rather than when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a second special probability state.

By configuring it in this way, during the special probability state (during a right-hand play state in which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the reserved memory of the acquired second special pattern (reserved special pattern 2) is not executed during the second special probability state, and the game ball is allowed to enter the first ball entrance 64 during the second special probability state, so that the reserved memory of the first special pattern (reserved special pattern 1) is not interrupted, providing the player with a novel gameplay experience.

<Configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 15th control example>
First, referring to FIG. 491, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above had a game board 13 (see FIG. 234) capable of executing a left-handed game to cause a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 in a normal state, and executing a right-handed game to cause a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, which becomes easier to enter when a time-saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 234, the game area (right side area) in which the game ball launched by the right-handed game can flow down does not have a ball entrance means capable of acquiring the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reservation) by the game ball entering, and is configured to be in a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a new special pattern 1 reservation during the right-handed game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th control example is configured to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation by performing right-hand play during the high probability state, and to grant a beneficial bonus to the player if the special symbol 2 reservation is not consumed by executing the first special symbol lottery, which is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, during the period from the end of the high probability state until a predetermined period has elapsed. And, even if right-hand play is performed during the high probability state in which it is easy to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation, the game board 13 is configured so that a new special symbol 1 reservation can be acquired. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily end the high probability state while acquiring the special symbol 1 reservation.

Figure 491 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this fifteenth control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above (see Figure 234) in that the configuration of the various devices arranged in the right area of the play area formed on the game board 13 is different, and it is configured so that the special chart 1 reservation can be obtained even during right-hand play. Note that the configuration other than the right-hand area is the same, and the same configuration is assigned the same symbol and its description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 491, in this fifteenth control example, as the ball entry means by which the game ball can enter and acquire the right to execute the first special pattern lottery, there are a first ball entry port 64 through which a game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the game board 13 can enter more easily than a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13, and a right first ball entry port 64b through which a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13 can enter more easily than a game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the game board 13, and the first ball entry port 64 is arranged in the lower area of the game board 13 (the game area formed below the variable display unit 80), and the right first ball entry port 64b is arranged in the right side area of the game board 13.

The first ball entrance 64 and the right first ball entrance 64b are both configured so that four prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters them, and when playing left-handed, the first ball entrance 64 is arranged so that approximately 20 game balls can be entered into the first ball entrance 64 before all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out along the way).

On the other hand, when playing right-hand, the right first ball entrance 64b is arranged so that approximately 15 game balls can be inserted into the right first ball entrance 64b before all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out during the game).

Here, the left side area is provided with a general ball entry port 63 through which 10 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters any port other than the first ball entry port 64, and prize balls are paid out even if a game ball that cannot enter the first ball entry port 64 enters the general ball entry port 63 among the game balls flowing down the left side area. Therefore, when a certain number of game balls are shot, it is easier to win more prize balls based on game balls entering the entry ports (general ball entry port 63, first ball entry port 64, right first ball entry port 64b) through which game balls can always enter when playing left-handed games than when playing right-handed games.

Therefore, in the normal state where the high probability state of normal symbols that makes it easier to get the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is not set (the low probability state of normal symbols is set), playing left-handed is more advantageous to the player than playing right-handed.

As shown in FIG. 491, the right area of the game board 13 is provided with a second ball entrance 1640, which is an entrance (starting ball entrance) for executing the second special symbol lottery, an electric device 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640, a through gate 67 through which the right to execute the normal symbol lottery can be acquired by the game ball passing through (entering), a right first ball entrance 64b, which is an entrance (starting ball entrance) for executing the first special symbol lottery, and a variable winning device 1065 that allows the game ball to enter (win) when a jackpot game is executed.

The second ball entrance 1640 is provided with an electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, and is configured to be able to create a state where it is easy to enter the game ball (high probability state of normal symbol) and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball (low probability state of normal symbol) depending on the set game state. Note that the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery are the same as the contents of the electric device control explained in each control example above, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, the flow of the game ball launched by right-handed play will be explained. As shown in FIG. 491, the game ball launched by right-handed play flows down while changing its flow direction due to multiple nails planted in the right area of the game board 13. Then, the ball is distributed in a ratio of approximately 9 to 1 to the first flow path in which the second ball entrance 1640 is located, or the second flow path in which the through gate 67 and the right first ball entrance 64b are located, and then flows further downstream.

The inlet to the second flow path is formed by the gap su1 between the two nails, and is configured so that of the game balls that flow down the right-hand region, those that do not pass through the gap su1 flow down the first flow path. The opening width of the gap su1 expands and contracts depending on the position of the nails that form the gap su1, so for example, if the position of the nails that form the gap su1 moves in a direction that narrows the opening width of the gap su1, the game balls that flow down the right-hand region will have difficulty flowing down the second flow path and will be more likely to flow down the first flow path. On the other hand, if the position of the nails that form the gap su1 moves in a direction that widens the opening width of the gap su1, the game balls that flow down the right-hand region will have difficulty flowing down the second flow path and will be more likely to flow down the first flow path.

The game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the second ball entrance 1640 to which the electric device 1640a is attached, and if the electric device 1640a is operating to the open state due to a normal winning game, the game ball is guided to the second ball entrance 1640 by the electric device 1640a protruding from the game board 13 and enters the second ball entrance 1640. Also, if a normal winning game is not being played (the electric device 1640a is in a closed state) at the time when the game ball reaches the second ball entrance 1640, the electric device 1640a is buried in the game board 13, so the game ball passes through the electric device 1640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 1065.

The game balls flowing down the second flow path are distributed by nails planted in the second flow path to the third flow path with the through gate 67 and the fourth flow path with the right first ball inlet 64b in a ratio of about 1:1. The inlet to the fourth flow path is formed by the gap su2 between the two nails, and the game balls flowing down the second flow path that do not pass through the gap su2 flow down the third flow path. The opening width of the gap su2 is expanded or contracted depending on the position of the nails that form the gap su2. For example, if the position of the nails that form the gap su2 is moved in a direction that narrows the opening width of the gap su2, the game balls that flow down the second flow path will have difficulty flowing down the fourth flow path and will be easier to flow down the third flow path. On the other hand, if the position of the nails that form the gap su2 is moved in a direction that widens the opening width of the gap su2, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path will be more likely to flow down the fourth flow path and less likely to flow down the third flow path.

Then, the game balls flowing down the third flow path pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the variable winning device 1065, and most of the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Note that the fourth flow path is provided with an outlet so that some of the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path can flow down toward the variable winning device 1065 without entering the right first ball entrance 64b. By configuring it in this way, even if game balls are stuck near the opening of the right first ball entrance 64b (ball clogging occurs), it is possible to allow the game balls that flow into the fourth flow path to flow down.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of this 15th control example is configured so that game balls flowing down the right area can enter the second ball entrance 1640, the through gate 67, and the right first ball entrance 64b at a predetermined rate. When 100 game balls flow down the right area, 90 of them flow down the first flow path where the second ball entrance 1640 is located, and 10 of them flow down the second flow path. Then, of the 10 game balls flowing down the second flow path, 5 flow down the third flow path and pass through the through gate 67. The remaining 5 flow down the fourth flow path and enter the first ball entrance 64b.

When the normal state is set, even if a winning normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game in which the period during which the electric device 1640a is open is short (0.1 seconds)) in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 1640 is executed, so if a right-hand hit game is executed in the normal state and the game ball flows down to the right side area, only the prize balls (4 balls) that would be paid out if the game ball entered the right first ball entrance 64b are paid out.

When playing right-handed games under normal conditions, the machine is designed so that approximately 5% of the game balls that are shot can enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Therefore, when all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out during the game), it is possible to have approximately 15 game balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

By adjusting the positioning of the various nails so that the opening width of gap su1 or gap su2 becomes narrower, it is possible to adjust the rate at which game balls shot by right-handed play enter the right first ball entrance 64b, but when the positioning of the various nails is adjusted in this way, the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 1640 or the through gate 67 is increased.

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this fifteenth control example, when a normal symbol lottery is won in the second special state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 than when a normal symbol lottery is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

In other words, if the position of the various nails is adjusted so that it is difficult to acquire a special chart 1 reservation by playing from the right, in order to make it difficult to end the special chart 2 reservation in the special probability state, it becomes easier to make the game ball enter (pass) the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640 by playing from the right, so it becomes easier to acquire a new special chart 2 reservation by playing from the right during the second special probability state.

In addition, in order to make it difficult to obtain a new reserved special chart 2 during the second probability change state, when the position of the various nails is adjusted to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640 by playing from the right, it is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th control example is configured so that when left-handed play is performed, it is not possible (it is difficult) to obtain the special chart 2 reservation, and is basically configured so that when left-handed play is performed, it is easier to obtain the special chart 1 reservation than when right-handed play is performed. Therefore, when the special chart 2 reservation is obtained and the special chart 2 reservation ends, the player can play left-handed play during the second special chart state that is set after the special chart state ends, in order to obtain a new special chart 1 reservation and to hold the special chart 2 reservation until the second special chart state ends. However, depending on the results of the right-handed play performed during the special chart state, it is possible to allow the player to play a wide variety of games during the second special chart state.

For example, if the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is such that the positions of the various nails are adjusted so that the game ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b more easily than usual, during the second probability change state, the player can choose between playing left-handed to aim to obtain the reserved special chart 1, or playing right-handed to aim to obtain the reserved special chart 1 while aiming to obtain a new reserved special chart 2, although this has a low probability.

In addition, in the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, if the positions of the various nails are adjusted so that it is more difficult than usual for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b, if the player has a special chart 2 reserved at the end of the special probability state, the player can play left-handed games that make it easier to acquire a special chart 1 reserved during the second special probability state, and if the player does not have a special chart 2 reserved at the end of the special probability state, the player can play right-handed games that make it more difficult to acquire a special chart 1 reserved during the second special probability state than left-handed games, but can acquire a new special chart 2 reserved.

This configuration allows players to play through a trial and error process of various gameplay methods, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In this case, a game method that is advantageous to the player may be determined as a game method in the second special probability state that is set after the special probability state ends, based on the number of reserved special figures 1 and 2 that have been acquired at the time the special probability state ends, and information indicating the determined game method may be notified to the player.

Specifically, if it is determined that the reserved special chart 2 has not been acquired at the end of the special probability state, right-hand play, which allows for a new reserved special chart 2, is announced as the playing method during the second special probability state, and if it is determined that the reserved special chart 2 has been acquired at the end of the special probability state, left-hand play, which makes it easier to acquire the reserved special chart 1, is announced as the playing method during the second special probability state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game that is disadvantageous to him or her during the second special probability state.

As explained above, in this 15th control example, by using the game board 13 shown in FIG. 491, it is possible to acquire the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved) even during right-hand play that is performed in a game state (high probability state) in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved).

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the first special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to easily end the special symbol state when both the special symbol 1 reserve and the special symbol 2 reserve have been acquired. Therefore, even after the special symbol state ends and a game state (second special symbol state) in which it is more difficult to acquire a new special symbol 2 reserve than in the special symbol state is set, it is possible to easily continue the first special symbol lottery, which is executed with priority, and to easily continue playing in a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a new special symbol 2 reserve without using up the special symbol 2 reserve that has already been acquired.

In addition, instead of using a configuration that allows the reserved special symbol 1 to be acquired by playing with the right hand as in the 15th control example, a different configuration may be used to create a similar playability to the 15th control example. For example, when using the game board 13 (Fig. 234) of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 5th control example, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed by playing with the right hand during the high probability state, and a long period of time (for example, 180 seconds) is set as the change time of the last special symbol change (final special symbol change) executed in the high probability state. During the final special symbol change, a first performance (right hand performance) that notifies the acquisition of the reserved special symbol 2 up to the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be stored (1 in the 15th control example) and a second performance (left hand performance) that notifies the acquisition of the reserved special symbol 1 up to the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be stored (4 in the 15th control example) may be executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 491, a variable winning device 1065 that opens during a big win is provided below the right-hand area of the game board 13. This variable winning device 1065 has the same content as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the content of the performance in the 15th control example>
Next, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 492 and Fig. 493. The pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth control example is configured such that the probability variable period is longer than the time short period so that the second probability variable state is set after the probability variable state ends, as compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above.

The reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special probability state is not consumed during the second special probability state, and is instead held until the normal state that is set after the second special probability state ends, making it possible to execute a second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player.

Here, the content of the keep zone effect that is executed when the second probability change state is set while the special chart 2 is reserved will be explained with reference to FIG. 492. FIG. 492(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during the keep zone effect, and FIG. 492(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed as the end screen of the keep zone effect when a success effect is executed indicating that the second probability change state has ended while the special chart 2 is reserved.

As shown in FIG. 492(a), when the second probability variation state is set while holding the reserved special chart 2 acquired during the probability variation state, a keep zone effect is executed. When the keep zone effect is executed, a conveyor 10802 is displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed in which bait icons hr1 to hr5, which resemble multiple baits placed on the top surface of the conveyor 10802, move from right to left in conjunction with the movement of the conveyor 10802. Then, a fish 10801 is displayed on the left side of the conveyor 10802, waiting for bait to be discharged from the conveyor 10802, and an effect is executed in which the fish eats the bait discharged from the conveyor 10802.

Here, the multiple baits placed on the top surface of the conveyor 10802 are configured to be displayed corresponding to the special chart 1 reserve and the special chart 2 reserve, and in the display screen shown in FIG. 492(a), as shown in the small area Dm1a, two special chart 1 reserves have been acquired, so two baits (bait icons hr1, hr2) corresponding to the special chart 1 reserve are displayed. And, as shown in the small area Dm8a, one special chart 2 reserve has been acquired, so one bait (bait with the letters SP) corresponding to the special chart 2 reserve is displayed (bait icon hr5).

And, as shown in the small area Dm1, because the first special pattern variation is in progress, an effect is being executed in which the bait icon hr0 (bait in a display mode corresponding to the first special pattern) for indicating the type of special pattern in progress is being eaten by the fish 10801.

In this fifteenth control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, so that each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and a new special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, the rabbit 801 throws food onto the top surface of the conveyor 10802 so that new food icons hr1 to hr4 are added downstream of the conveyor 10802 (closer to the fish 10801) than the food icon hr5 corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation.

Then, the word "Keep Zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm to indicate that the keep zone effect is being performed, and the words "Feed the fish until they're full!!" are displayed as a guide to guide the player on the gameplay during the keep zone effect. In addition, the comment "Save up your special chart 1 reserve so the SP food doesn't get eaten" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guide to show more detailed gameplay instructions.

In addition, a traffic light 10803 is displayed above the conveyor 10802 to inform the player of the operating status of the conveyor 10802. This traffic light 10803 has a display area for "GO" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is operating, and a display area for "STOP" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is not operating (stopped), and either display area is lit up according to the operating status of the conveyor 10802.

Furthermore, "left hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 as a guidance display area to guide the player on the game method (left hit game, right hit game). In this fifteenth control example, basically, during left hit game, no notification is given to guide the player on the game method, and when right hit game is advantageous to the player, the display of "right hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4. However, during the keep zone performance, when the game ball is not launched, it becomes easier for the player to play a game that is disadvantageous to the player than when left hit game is executed, so the display of "left hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4.

In the keep zone effect described above, each time one special pattern change ends and the next special pattern change begins, an effect is executed in which new bait (bait icon hr1 in the figure) is eaten by the fish 10801. In other words, the bait icon hr0 being eaten by the fish 10801 becomes a mode showing information about the special pattern change that is currently in progress (pending in progress), and the bait icon hr1 showing the bait closest to the fish 10801 among the baits moving on the conveyor 10802 becomes a mode showing information about the next special pattern change that will be executed (pending first special pattern).

The operation of the conveyor 10802 is configured to be determined based on the change time of the first special pattern change being performed and the change time of the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired. For example, if the change time of the first special pattern change being performed and the change time of the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired are short, that is, if the reserved special pattern 2 can be consumed in a short time, the operation speed of the conveyor 10802 is increased, and if the change time of the first special pattern change being performed and the change time of the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired are long, that is, if there is sufficient time until the reserved special pattern 2 can be consumed, the operation speed of the conveyor 10802 is reduced or the conveyor 10802 is temporarily stopped.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the period until the reserved special chart 2 is consumed (the reserved special chart hr5 is eaten by the fish 10801) based not only on the number of remaining baits (the number of displayed bait icons hr1 to hr4), but also on the operating status of the conveyor 10802, and the player can execute a left-handed play to acquire a new reserved special chart 1 based on the prediction result.

Although we will not go into detail here, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone performance, a special probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, making it difficult to maintain the already acquired reserved special symbol 2 until the normal state. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone performance, an end performance is executed to end the keep zone performance.

Specifically, the display mode of the bait icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the reserved special chart 1 can be set to poisoned bait, and when the fish 10801 eats the poisoned bait, an effect is executed in which the fish runs away far away. In addition, the bait icon imitating poisoned bait is configured to be displayed with a low probability even when the jackpot has not been won, and when a display mode imitating poisoned bait is set as the display mode of the bait corresponding to the reserved special chart 1 that does not have information indicating a jackpot win, an effect is executed in which the fish 10801 avoids the poisoned bait.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the keep zone performance, it is possible to end the keep zone performance without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Also, since it is possible to set the display mode that is set when a jackpot is won (display mode showing poisoned bait) for reserved special symbol 1 that has not actually won a jackpot, it is possible to display the bait icon in the display mode that shows poisoned bait without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

If it is determined that the second probability variable state will end with the reserved special symbol 2 acquired, that is, if the number of reserved memories (reserved special symbol 1) for the first special symbol lottery, which is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, exceeds the number of special symbol lotteries required until the second probability variable state ends, and if the reserved special symbol 1 that has already been acquired does not contain information indicating a jackpot win, then as shown in FIG. 492(b), the performance in which the fish 10801 gets full and goes home satisfied ends, the conveyor 10802 is displayed as stopped, and the traffic light 10803 displays the display area "STOP" to indicate that the conveyor 10802 has stopped.

Then, in the small display area Dm4, "Break!?" is displayed as a guide display mode to encourage the player to temporarily stop shooting the game ball. This prevents the first special symbol lottery from being executed (continuing to acquire new reserved special symbols 1) by continuing to play left-handed even after the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set in which the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is executed, thereby preventing a long period during which the second special symbol lottery is not executed.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 492(b), a display mode that does not have the force to prohibit the player from firing game balls is displayed in the small display area Dm4, but the display mode is not limited to this and may be configured to display a display mode that directly prohibits the player from firing game balls (for example, a display saying "Please stop firing game balls until the SP bait runs out").

As shown in FIG. 492(b), if the keep zone effect is successful, the comment "Great success! Let's eat the remaining SP bait" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide to inform the player of the next game content. If the launch of the game ball is interrupted from the state shown in FIG. 492(b) and a second special pattern lottery is executed without acquiring a new reserved special pattern, the effect shown in FIG. 493(a) is executed.

Figure 493 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a second special symbol change is executed in the normal state. As shown in Figure 492 (b), when the ceiling mode effect ends with the food icon hr5 corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved remaining, the normal state is set and then an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 eats the food corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved. Here, when the rabbit 801 has eaten all of the food, an effect is set that indicates that the time-saving state has been won as a result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state.

On the other hand, if a new special symbol 1 reservation cannot be acquired during the keep zone performance, the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed, and the second special symbol change is executed during the second probability change state, the end performance shown in FIG. 493(b) is executed. FIG. 493(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the second special symbol change is executed during the second probability change state. As shown in FIG. 493(b), the small display area Dm8 displays a display mode (shown by an arrow in the figure) to indicate that the second special symbol change is being executed, and the small display area Dm8a displays "0" indicating that the number of special symbol 2 reservations acquired is 0. Then, in the main display area Dm, a performance is executed in which a hungry fish 10801 attacks the rabbit 801 while angrily saying "there is not enough food," and the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "Keep Zone Ended," indicating that the keep zone performance has ended.

In addition, in this fifteenth control example, the duration of the second high probability state can be varied depending on the type of jackpot, and the duration of the second high probability state can be a maximum of 40 special drawing rounds and a minimum of one special drawing round. Therefore, the display screen shown in FIG. 492(a) is configured not to notify the duration of the second high probability state (the remaining duration of the second high probability state) so that the player does not know the duration of the keep zone effect (the period until the fish 10801 becomes full).

In addition, in the keep zone effect executed in this fifteenth control example, the presentation mode of the keep zone effect (for example, the display mode of the fish 10801, the speed of the conveyor 10802, etc.) is varied to make it possible to suggest the remaining period of the second probability change state.

By configuring it in this way, the duration of the keep zone presentation can be clearly notified to the player, which makes the player eager to keep the reserved special chart 2 until the second special state ends. Also, instead of displaying a dedicated display mode to indicate the remaining period of the second special state, for example, the remaining period of the second special state may be suggested to the player by making the form of the fish 10801 different and settable. In this case, the form of the fish 10801 may be configured to be set to a light eater form and a big eater form, and the light eater form may be configured to be more likely to be set when the remaining period of the second special state is short.

In addition, different from the keep zone presentation of this fifteenth control example, it may be configured to be possible to display information (remaining number of chances of winning) until the second chance state ends during the keep zone presentation, and the remaining number of chances of winning may be counted down and displayed each time a special pattern lottery is executed during the second chance state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the number of times the special pattern lottery will be executed until the second chance state ends.

In this case, the device may be configured to display information (pseudo remaining number of times of probability change) that is different from the remaining information (number of times of remaining probability change) until the second probability change ending condition for ending the second probability change state is met, and may be configured to execute a pseudo remaining number of times of probability change update effect that updates the pseudo remaining number of times of probability change in a manner different from the update content of the information indicating the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the second probability change state.

Specifically, when the number of remaining chances of a chance change until the end of the second chance change state is 40 times, information corresponding to the number of pseudo remaining chance changes "50 times" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as information until the end of the second chance change state, and when the second chance change state actually ends, the information indicated by the number of pseudo remaining chance changes is displayed in a display mode indicating the end of the second chance change state (for example, a display mode of "last"). Then, when a change time longer than a predetermined period (30 seconds) is set as the special symbol change time for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the second chance change state, a pseudo remaining chance change number subtraction performance is executed during the special symbol change period, which updates (subtracts) the number of pseudo remaining chance changes by at least 2 or more.

By configuring it in this way, when the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 becomes "last (0)," the second chance state actually ends, but in the initial stage when the second chance state is set, it is possible to display a pseudo remaining number of chances of winning that is greater than the actual number of chances of winning, making it difficult for the player to understand the length of time that the second chance state will continue.

In addition, because it is possible to subtract two or more from the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning based on the execution of one special pattern lottery, the player can continue playing in the second chance state where the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning is displayed, hoping that the second chance state will end quickly (the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning will be significantly subtracted).

In this case, if it is determined that a jackpot will be won in the first special pattern drawing during the second special chance state based on the results of the advance judgment of the reserved special pattern 1, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing a pseudo remaining special chance count subtraction effect so that the pseudo remaining special chance count displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 becomes "last (0)" during the period until the lottery result of the first special pattern drawing that will result in the jackpot (lottery result indicating a jackpot win) is stopped and displayed.

By configuring it in this way, no matter what triggers the end of the second probability change state (the consumption of the probability change count or winning a jackpot), the second probability change state can be ended after displaying "Last (0)" as the pseudo remaining probability change count, providing a presentation that feels natural to the player. In addition, since the pseudo remaining probability change count can be set to a number greater than the actual remaining probability change count, and the value of the pseudo remaining probability change count can be updated (decremented) by 2 or more when a special pattern lottery is executed once, it is possible to decrement the pseudo remaining probability change count significantly even in cases other than when a jackpot is won during the second probability change state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 15th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the present fifteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 494 to Fig. 498. The present fifteenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Figs. 494 to 496. Fig. 494(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 15th control example. As shown in Fig. 494(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 15th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 5th control example (see Fig. 244(a)) in that the 2nd win random number table 202c is replaced with the 2nd win random number 15 table 202nc, the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd is replaced with the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de is replaced with the time-saving random number 15 table 202ne, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df is replaced with the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf. All other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 494(b), the second winning random number 15 table 202nc in this fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 494(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc. Like the second winning random number table 202c described above, this second winning random number 15 table 202nc is a data table that is referenced when determining the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and specifies the value that is determined to be a winning for each probability state of the normal pattern within the range of possible values of the second winning random number counter C4 (0 to 299).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 494(b), when the probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state", no judgment value is specified for the lottery result of "win" for the entire range of the value of the second win random number counter C4, and the lottery result of "miss" is specified for the entire range, whereas when it is a "high probability state", the lottery result of "win" is specified for the value range of the second win random number counter C4 from "0 to 149".

In other words, in this fifteenth control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, a win is not made in the normal symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of an event in which a normal symbol winning game is executed when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

In this 15th control example, the contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc are specified so that a winning is not obtained in the normal pattern lottery that is executed when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, but it is sufficient to suppress the frequent execution of normal pattern winning games in the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc may be specified so that a winning is possible with a low probability.

In addition, even when a normal winning game is being played, the technical idea used in any of the control examples described above, that is, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, may of course be used.

Next, the time-saving random number 15 table 202ne will be explained with reference to FIG. 494(c). This time-saving random number 15 table 202ne is a data table referenced in the time-saving judgment (time-saving lottery) that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a big win (miss), and differs from the above-mentioned time-saving random number 5 table 202de (see FIG. 245(c)) in that the conditions (special pattern type, game state) that stipulate the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is judged to be a time-saving win are different.

Specifically, if the special symbol type is the "second special symbol," the range of "3 to 899" of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is set as the judgment value for winning the time-saving mode, regardless of the game state. In addition, if the special symbol type is the "first special symbol," no judgment value for winning the time-saving mode is set (shown as "-" in the diagram).

Next, referring to FIG. 495, the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd in this 15th control example will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd. As shown in FIG. 495(a), the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd has a special 1 jackpot 15 table 202nd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, and a special 2 jackpot 15 table 202nd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, and the jackpot type is determined by referring to the data table corresponding to the special pattern type that won the jackpot.

First, the contents of the 15 table 202nd1 for special 1 jackpot will be explained with reference to FIG. 495(b). FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the 15 table 202nd1 for special 1 jackpot. As described above, the 15 table 202nd1 for special 1 jackpot is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A15", when it is in the range of "50 to 89", the jackpot type is "jackpot B15", and when it is in the range of "90 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C15".

"Jackpot A15" is a type of jackpot in which 6 rounds (R) of jackpot play are played, and a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends, and the value of the high probability state counter 203i for indicating the high probability period is set to 100, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h for indicating the time-saving period is set to 60. In other words, when a jackpot play based on jackpot A15 is played, a high probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries played during the high probability state reaches 60, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a second high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

"Jackpot B15" is a jackpot type in which a 6-round (R) jackpot game is played, and a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the high probability state counter 203i for indicating the high probability state period is set to 80, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h for indicating the time-saving state period is set to 60. In other words, when a jackpot game based on jackpot B15 is played, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries played during the high probability state reaches 20, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a second high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

"Jackpot C15" is a jackpot type in which a 6-round (R) jackpot game is played, and a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the high probability state counter 203i for indicating the high probability period is set to 61, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h for indicating the time-saving period is set to 60. In other words, when a jackpot game based on jackpot C15 is played, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries played during the high probability state reaches 1, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a second high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

Next, the contents of the 15 table 202nd2 for special jackpot 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 495(c). FIG. 495(c) is a flowchart showing the contents defined in the 15 table 202nd2 for special jackpot 2. This 15 table 202nd2 for special jackpot 2 differs from the 15 table 202nd1 for special jackpot 1 described above in that the type of special pattern for which the jackpot type is set has been changed and the various parameters defined for each jackpot type are different, but a detailed description of the detailed settings will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf will be explained with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 496, the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf stipulates different types of time-saving and the number of times of time-saving corresponding to the game state at the time when the time-saving is won.

Specifically, if the game state when the time-saving bonus is won is the "normal state," the time-saving bonus type is set to "second time-saving" for the entire range of the acquired value of the time-saving bonus type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 99," and the value of the time-saving bonus counter 203h is set to "500." Also, if the game state when the time-saving bonus is won is the "second special bonus state," the time-saving bonus type is set to "first time-saving" for the entire range of the acquired value of the time-saving bonus type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 99," and the value of the time-saving bonus counter 203h is set to "10000."

In other words, the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special bonus state is held until the normal state is set, and if the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, there is a high probability of winning the time-saving bonus (see FIG. 494(b)), and the time-saving type is set to the second time-saving state, which is a right-hand play state (a time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 by playing with a right hand, rather than by having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing with a left hand), with the time-saving count set to 500.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability bonus state, there is a high probability of winning the time-saving bonus (see FIG. 494(b)), and the time-saving type is set to the first time-saving state, which is a left-handed play state (a time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently by having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing from the left than by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 by playing from the right), with the time-saving count set to 10,000.

By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be greatly varied depending on the game state in which the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special probability state is executed. In addition, since a low probability state of normal symbols is set in which it is difficult to acquire new reserved memories (reserved special symbol 2) for the second special symbol lottery during both the second special probability state and the normal state, and since it is not possible to acquire new reserved special symbol 2 after the special probability state ends, it is possible to motivate the player to play in an attempt to acquire as many reserved memories (reserved special symbol 1) for the first special symbol lottery, which is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, so that the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special probability state is not consumed.

Next, referring to Figures 497 and 498, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifteenth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 497(a). FIG. 497(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 497(a), the ROM 222 in this fifteenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a keep zone performance selection table 222na has been added.

The keep zone effect selection table 222na is a data table that is referenced when determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect that is set in response to the first first special pattern change in the second probability change state, which is executed when the special pattern 2 is reserved.

Now, referring to FIG. 498, the contents of the keep zone performance selection table 222na will be explained. FIG. 498 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the keep zone performance selection table 222na. As shown in FIG. 498, the keep zone performance selection table 222na defines different performance modes (suggested modes) in association with the length of time that the second probability variable state continues, the length of time that the first special symbol variation is performed when determining the performance mode of the keep zone performance, and the acquired performance counter 223f, and the keep zone performance is executed based on the performance mode determined by referring to the keep zone performance selection table 222na.

Specifically, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "40", that is, when the jackpot A15 is won, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state, if the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "short (within 60 seconds)", a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "big eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the big eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "0 to 79", and a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "small eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the small eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of "80 to 99".

When the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "long (longer than 60 seconds)," a "slow" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves slowly and a "small appetite" suggestion mode 2 in which a small appetite fish 10801 is displayed are specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99."

In addition, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "20", that is, when the jackpot B15 is won, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state, if the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "short (within 60 seconds)", a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "big eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the big eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "0 to 39", and a "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "small eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the small eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of "40 to 99".

When the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "long (longer than 60 seconds)," a "slow" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves slowly and a "small appetite" suggestion mode 2 in which a small appetite fish 10801 is displayed are specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99."

Finally, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "1", that is, when the jackpot C15 is won, the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state is set. Regardless of the time period for the first special symbol change to be executed and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, a "slow" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at a slow speed and a "premium" suggestion mode 2 in which a special golden fish 10801 is displayed are specified.

In other words, the more difficult it is for the end condition to end the second probability change state to be met (the longer the remaining period of the second probability change state is set), the more likely it is that a fish 10801 that eats a lot of food will be displayed, and the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol selection executed during the second probability change state is, in other words, the shorter the period for acquiring a new reserved special symbol 1, the more likely it is that the conveyor 10802 will move at high speed.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to understand the difficulty of holding the reserved special chart 2 in the currently set second probability change state based on the content of the keep zone effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 497(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example will be explained. The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(b)) in that a second probability change counter 223na, a keep zone performance flag 223nb, and a keep confirmation flag 223nc have been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The second special chance counter 223na is a counter for measuring the duration of the second special chance state, and when it is determined in the second special chance state presentation setting process 15 (see S9058 in FIG. 501) that the game state has transitioned from the special chance state to the second special chance state (S9402 in FIG. 501: Yes), a value corresponding to the special chance counter 203i is set (see S9451 in FIG. 501). Then, the value is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol lottery is executed (see S9566 in FIG. 502), and is referenced when determining that the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired will not be consumed during the second special chance state (see S9573 in FIG. 502).

The keep zone performance flag 223nb is a flag for indicating that the performance mode of the keep zone performance has been set and that the keep zone performance is being executed, and is set to ON when the performance mode of the keep zone performance has been determined in correspondence with the first first special symbol drawing after the transition to the second probability variable state. By setting the keep zone performance flag 223nb to ON, the process of determining the performance mode of a new keep zone performance is prevented from being executed when setting a variable performance corresponding to the second or subsequent first special symbol drawing during the second probability variable state.

The keep confirmation flag 223nc is a flag for indicating that it has been determined that the special chart 2 reservation will not be consumed during the second probability variable state (the special chart 2 reservation can be held until the state transitions to the normal state) during the keep zone performance, and is set to on when it has been determined that the special chart 2 reservation will not be consumed during the second probability variable state (the special chart 2 reservation can be held until the state transitions to the normal state). By setting this keep confirmation flag to on, a keep confirmation performance is executed to indicate that the special chart 2 reservation will not be consumed during the second probability variable state.

Here, as a keep confirmation effect, for example, the bait (bait icon hr5 marked with SP) corresponding to the reserved special chart 2 displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 492(a) rises from the conveyor and does not approach the fish 10801, and an effect is executed in which the words "SP bait stocking successful" are displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a situation has been reached where the SP bait will not be eaten by the fish 10801.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in the 15th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 499 and Fig. 500, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in this 15th control example will be described, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned 5th control example. The pachinko machine 10 of this 15th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 5th control example in that the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, and in that the execution conditions of the time-saving lottery are different.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol variation process 15 (see S15104 in FIG. 499) is executed instead of special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252). The rest of the processing is the same, and detailed explanations of the same processing will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S15104) will be described with reference to FIG. 499. FIG. 499 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S15104). As shown in FIG. 499, the special symbol variation process 15 (S15104) is configured to, after completing the processing of S203 in the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), determine whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S15204), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S15205), and execute the processing of S206 to S207 to execute the first special symbol lottery.

In the process of S15204, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S15204: No), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S15210), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15210: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S15211), and the processes of S212 to S213 for executing the second special pattern lottery are executed. The other process contents are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example, compared to the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to maintain the state in which the special symbol 2 reservation has been obtained by continuing the state in which the special symbol 1 reservation has been obtained.

Next, the contents of the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086) will be explained with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086). As shown in FIG. 500, the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in that the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is different, and that the data table referenced in determining whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won is different.

Specifically, when the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086) is executed, first, the process of S8101 to S8102, which is the same as the time-saving lottery process 5 described above (see S8006 in FIG. 254), is executed. Then, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variable state (S8183), and if it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variable state (S8183: Yes), it refers to the time-saving random number 15 table 222ne to determine whether or not the time-saving win has been made (S8184). After that, the process of S8105 and S8106, which is the same as the time-saving lottery process 5 described above (see S8006 in FIG. 254), is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this fifteenth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed not only in the normal state but also in the second special probability state. And, as mentioned above, the time-saving lottery executed in the normal state is configured to give the player a more advantageous bonus when the time-saving lottery is won than when the time-saving lottery is executed in the second special probability state. In this way, by configuring the time-saving lottery to be executable in multiple game states and varying the bonus granted when the time-saving lottery is won depending on the game state in which the time-saving lottery is executed, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in at what timing (game state) the time-saving lottery will be executed.

In the fifteenth control example, the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the high probability state is held until the end of the second high probability state, making it possible to provide a novel gameplay that aims to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed by granting a beneficial benefit to the player. In order to provide a novel gameplay that aims to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed, the time-saving lottery is executed in the normal state to grant a beneficial benefit to the player when the time-saving lottery is won, compared to when the time-saving lottery is executed in the second high probability state. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second high probability state, the time-saving lottery may not be executed. In this case, the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the high probability state is held until the end of the second high probability state, making it possible to grant the player the added value of executing the time-saving lottery.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 15th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 501 to Fig. 503, among the control processes executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 15th control example, the characteristic contents different from the above-mentioned 5th control example will be explained. In the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 15th control example, it is configured to execute a control process different from the above-mentioned 5th control example in that it executes various processes for determining the performance mode of the keep zone performance executed during the second probability variable state.

First, the contents of the second probability variable state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) will be explained with reference to FIG. 501. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second probability variable state presentation setting process 15 (S9058). In this second probability variable state presentation setting process 15 (S9058), when the second probability variable state is set, processing is executed to determine the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation.

When the second probability change state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9401), and it is determined whether the read game state is a probability change state (S9402). If it is determined in the process of S9402 that it is a probability change state (S9402: Yes), the probability change state is set after the end of the big win game, the time period ends before the probability change period, and the second probability change state is set, so the value corresponding to the remaining number of probability changes (the value of the probability change counter 203i) is set to the value of the second probability change counter 223na (S9451), and then it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol selection counter 203e is greater than 0, i.e., whether the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired (S9452).

If it is determined in the processing of S9452 that N2 is greater than 0 (S9452: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is read (S9453), the keep zone performance selection table 222na is referenced to determine the performance mode (S9454), the keep performance in progress flag 223nb is set to ON (S9455), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9452 that N2 is not greater than 0 (S9452: No), this means that the game has transitioned to the second special bonus state without acquiring the reserved special chart 2 during the special bonus state, so the game determines the presentation mode corresponding to the transition to the normal state without executing the keep zone presentation (S9456), and ends this process.

Next, the contents of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483) will be explained with reference to FIG. 502. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483). This special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483) executes a process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol change, and in particular, the contents of the process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol change during the second probability change state differ from those of the fifth control example described above. Note that in cases where the process contents are the same as the process corresponding to the special chart 1 performance mode setting process in the fifth control example described above, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the process of S9502 to S9504, which is the same as the fifth control example described above, is executed as it is, and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S9501, if the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0, that is, it is neither the high probability state nor the second time-saving state (S9501: No), next, it is determined whether the value of the second high probability counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565), and if it is determined that the value of the second high probability counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565: Yes), the value of the second high probability counter 223na is decremented by 1 (S9566). Next, it is determined whether the keep zone effect flag 223nb is on (S9571), and if it is set to on (S9571: Yes), it is then determined whether the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9572).

In the processing of S9572, if it is determined that the keep confirmation flag 223nc is not set on (S9572: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is equal to or greater than the value of the second special probability variation counter 223na (S9573). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is equal to or greater than the value of the second special probability variation counter 223na (S9573: Yes), it is then determined whether the acquired reserved special pattern 1 contains information indicating a jackpot win (S9574). If it is determined that this is not the case (S9574: No), a presentation mode indicating that the keep zone presentation will be completed is determined (S9575), the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9576), and the processing proceeds to S9578. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9573 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is less than the value of the second special symbol counter 223na (S9573: No), and if it is determined in the process of S9574 that the acquired reserved special symbol 1 contains information indicating a jackpot win (S9574: Yes), the presentation mode of the corresponding keep zone presentation is determined (S9577) and the process proceeds to S9578. Also, if it is determined in the process of S9572 that the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9572: Yes), the process of S9573 to S9577 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9578.

In the process of S9578, it is determined whether the updated value of the second probability variation counter 223na has reached 0 (S9578), and if it is determined that it has reached 0 (S9578: Yes), the keep zone performance flag 223nb is set to OFF (S9579), a display pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9504), and this process ends. In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S9565 that the value of the second probability variation counter 223na is 0 (S9565: No), and if it is determined in the process of S9571 that the keep zone performance flag 223nb is OFF (S9565: No), the process of S9572 to S9579 is skipped and the process proceeds directly to S9504.

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 15 (S15487) will be explained with reference to FIG. 503. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 15 (S15487). This special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 15 (S15487) differs from the above-mentioned special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) in that the processing contents for determining the presentation mode corresponding to the variable presentation executed during the normal state or the second probability change state are different.

Specifically, when the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 15 (S15487) is executed, the process of S9601 is executed, which is the same as the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 described above (see S4987 in FIG. 269). If the process of S9601 determines that the normal state or the second probability bonus state is not in effect (S9601: No), the process of S9611 to S9619 is executed, which is the same as the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 described above (see S4987 in FIG. 269), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9601, if it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the second probability bonus state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the keep effect in progress flag 223nb is set to on (S9651). If it is determined that the keep effect in progress flag 223nb is not set to on (S9651: No), it is next determined whether the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9652). If it is determined that it is set to on (S9652: Yes), the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to off (S9653), a presentation mode suggesting the granting of a time reduction is determined (S9654), the process of S9611 is executed, and this process ends.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S9652 that the keep confirmation flag 223nc is not set to on (S9652: No), the processing of S9653 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9654.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9651 that the keep performance in progress flag 223nb is set to on (S9651: Yes), the processing proceeds to S9611, where the performance mode corresponding to the end of the keep performance is determined (S9655), the keep performance in progress flag 223nb is set to off (S9656), and the processing proceeds to S9611. In other words, if the second special symbol lottery is executed while the keep performance is being executed, the performance mode corresponding to the end of the keep performance is determined, and the end performance including the display screen shown in FIG. 492(b) is executed.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this fifteenth control example is configured to be able to execute winning lotteries using multiple symbol types, to be able to execute winning lotteries using one symbol type in priority over winning lotteries using other symbol types, and to be able to set a first game state in which it is easier to acquire the lottery right to execute a winning lottery for another symbol type, and a second game state in which it is more difficult to acquire the lottery right than the first game state.

A storage means is provided that can store a predetermined number of acquired lottery rights (e.g., one) up to an upper limit, and the lottery rights for other symbol types stored in the storage means during the first gaming state are kept stored until a predetermined period (e.g., 40 winning lotteries) has elapsed since the second gaming state is set, and a winning lottery for the other symbol type is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed, making it easier for the player to be granted a favorable privilege than if a winning lottery for the other symbol type were executed before the predetermined period had elapsed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a new and innovative gameplay that makes it easier to obtain advantageous benefits by not executing a winning lottery using lottery rights already stored in the storage means for a specified period of time.

In the fifteenth control example, a maximum of four drawing rights for one symbol type can be stored in the storage means, and the number of drawing rights for other symbol types that can be stored in the storage means is configured to be less than the number of drawing rights for one symbol type (only one can be stored). Therefore, if a winning drawing for another symbol type is executed even once after the first game state ends, the right to acquire an advantageous benefit is lost, so the player can play with a sense of tension. In addition, since multiple drawing rights for one symbol type can be stored, it is possible to make it easier to continue playing a game to acquire a drawing right for one symbol type after the second game state is set, and by storing multiple drawing rights for one symbol type, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute a winning drawing for another symbol type.

In this fifteenth control example, the storage means is configured to store only one lottery right for another pattern type, but the present invention is not limited to this and multiple lottery rights may be stored.

Furthermore, the system is configured so that different lengths of change time can be set as the pattern change time for indicating the result of the winning lottery for one pattern type executed in the second game state. Therefore, when a pattern change with a longer change time is executed, the period until all lottery rights for one pattern type stored in the storage means are used can be made longer, making it easier to store a new lottery right for one pattern type in the storage means. Therefore, the player can play while hoping that a pattern change with a long change time will be executed.

In addition, the fifteenth control is configured to be able to vary the period from when the first game state ends and the second game state is set until when a player is more likely to be granted a special benefit. Specifically, the first game state is set after the end of a winning game that is executed when a winning lottery is won, and the length of time that the first game state continues and the length of time that the second game state is set until when a player is more likely to be granted a special benefit can be set differently depending on the type of winning that is set when a winning lottery is won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand the period until advantageous benefits are awarded to them, making it easier to provide players with an enjoyable game experience.

The gameplay used in this fifteenth control example may also be the gameplay used in the fourteenth control example described above, that is, a gameplay in which a special bonus (ceiling bonus) is awarded to a player when a winning lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without a winning prize being won.

In this case, for example, when the number of consecutive losses in the winning lottery held during the second game state (the number of times of losing) reaches a predetermined number, the first game state can be set, and by storing the lottery right for another symbol type in the storage means during the first game state, it is possible to replay a game in which the lottery right for the other symbol type is held until it becomes easier for the player to be awarded a special benefit.

In addition, a third gaming state can be set as a ceiling bonus by executing a winning lottery for one symbol type a predetermined number of times while holding the right to draw for other symbol types, and a winning lottery for another symbol type can be executed during the third gaming state, making it easier for the player to be awarded a bonus that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this fifteenth control example, the second special pattern lottery is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second special probability state ends and the normal state is set) since the second gaming state (a gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a special pattern 2 reservation) is set, making it easier for the player to be granted a privilege (second time-saving state). However, if the player has obtained the special pattern 2 reservation at the time when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second special probability state ends and the normal state is set) since the second gaming state (a gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a special pattern 2 reservation) is set, that is, if the player has obtained the special pattern 2 reservation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second gaming state was set, the second special pattern lottery is executed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second gaming state was set. If the player has obtained the right to execute the different symbol lottery, the player may be given a special bonus. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that can set multiple settings that vary the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, if a special symbol 2 reservation is acquired after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second probability change state ends and the normal state is set) since the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a special symbol 2 reservation) has been set, the display mode of the reserved symbols to show the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired may be switched to a display mode that corresponds to the set value.

In the 15th control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first game state (a game state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) ends and the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) is set, and a predetermined period of time has passed (until the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set). This makes it easier for the player to receive a special benefit (second time-saving state) than when the second special symbol lottery is executed before the predetermined period has passed (during the second probability variable state). However, without being limited to this, it may also be configured so that the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first game state (a game state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) ends and the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) is set, and a special benefit (second time-saving state) is granted to the player more easily than when the second special symbol lottery is executed when the first game state is set.

In addition, in this fifteenth control example, the first game state (a game state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) can be set to a special variable state, and the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) can be set to a second special variable state or a normal state. However, this is not limited to this, and the various game states set in each of the above control examples can be appropriately set so that it is relatively easier to obtain a reserved special symbol for a specific special symbol type in the second game state than in the first game state. For example, it is also possible to set a time-saving state (second time-saving state) as the first game state, and the first time-saving state or the normal state as the second game state.

In addition, in this fifteenth control example, a maximum of one reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired, but multiple reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired. In this case, the remaining period until the end of the second special variable state (number of times the special symbol changes) is compared with the total number of reserved special symbols 1 and 2 that have been acquired, and it is possible to determine whether the situation is such that the second special symbol lottery can be executed after the end of the second special variable state. If it is determined that the situation is such that the second special symbol lottery can be executed after the end of the second special variable state, the above-mentioned keep confirmation performance can be executed (the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on).

By configuring it in this way, multiple SP baits (bait icons corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation) can be displayed in the keep zone presentation, enhancing the presentation effect.

<Regarding the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, a modified example of the game characteristics used in the 15th control example will be described when applied to a pachinko machine 10 with a different game specification. The first modified example of the 15th control example is different from the above-mentioned 15th control example in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the given time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

The configuration that allows the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous change specification) is the same as the twelfth control example described above, so a detailed explanation of this will be omitted.

<Regarding the content of the performance executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 616, we will explain the effects executed in the first variant of this fifteenth control example, which differ from those in the fifteenth control example described above.

First, we will explain the characteristic gameplay that occurs when the gameplay used in the above-mentioned 15th control example is combined with a configuration that makes it possible to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

In the above-mentioned 15th control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, and further, the second special symbol lottery is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set) since the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a special symbol 2 reservation) is set, so that the player is more likely to be granted a special privilege (second time-saving state). In the first modified example of this 15th control example, the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game state to be set. The time for the first special symbol to indicate the result of the selection and the time for the second special symbol to indicate the result of the second special symbol lottery are configured to differ depending on the game state to be set, and in a game state (first game state) in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2, a shorter time for the second special symbol to change is likely to be set than for the first special symbol, and in a game state (second game state) in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved special symbol 2, a shorter time for the first special symbol to change is likely to be set than for the second special symbol.

In addition, in the first variant of this 15th control example, a maximum of four special chart 2 reservations can be stored.

Then, before the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the first gaming state (high probability state) are all consumed during the second gaming state (second high probability state), the number of special symbol draws executed during the second gaming state (second high probability state) reaches a predetermined number (remaining number of high probability state draws), so that a second special symbol draw that is advantageous to the player can be executed after the second high probability state ends.

In the first variant of the fifteenth control example configured in this way, as a keep zone effect, a performance is executed in which a bait icon corresponding to the special symbol 1 reservation and a bait icon corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation are given to the fish 10801 in overlapping fashion in accordance with the type of special symbol lottery being executed. Then, a performance is executed in which the aim is to fill the stomach of the fish 10801 with the bait icon corresponding to the special symbol 1 reservation until all of the bait icons corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation that have been acquired are consumed.

As described above, in the first variant of the fifteenth control example, the first special symbol drawing and the second special symbol drawing are configured to be executed in parallel, so even if the game is played without interrupting the reserved special symbol 1 as in the fifteenth control example described above, if the time period during which the second special symbol changes to show the result of the second special symbol drawing is short or the time period during which the first special symbol changes to show the result of the first special symbol drawing is long, there is a risk that all reserved special symbol 2 will be consumed during the second special symbol state.

Therefore, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the player will be interested in the time it takes for the special symbol to change for each special symbol type. Therefore, in the keep zone presentation executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the presentation mode of the bait icon is configured to be able to determine more types of presentation modes based on the time it takes for the corresponding special symbol to change, compared to the fifteenth control example described above.

Figure 616 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen executed during the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example. As shown in Figure 616 (a), the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example differs from the keep zone effect executed in the fifteenth control example described above in that an effect is executed in which fish 10801 simultaneously preys on multiple bait icons (hr0, hr0a), the number of bait icons displayed corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation is increased, and the display mode of each bait icon is different, but otherwise it is the same. Explanation of the same display modes is omitted.

The first modified example of the fifteenth control example is configured to allow the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change to be executed in an overlapping manner, so that the fish 10801 eats the bait icon hr0 corresponding to the first special symbol change being executed and the bait icon hr0a corresponding to the second special symbol change being executed together. Then, on the conveyor 10802, the bait icon hr1 and the bait icon hr2 corresponding to the special symbol 1 reservation, and the bait icon hr1a and the bait icon hr2a corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation are displayed.

In the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the display mode of the corresponding bait icon is configured to differ depending on the length of the special pattern change time corresponding to each special pattern reservation. Specifically, as the bait icon corresponding to the special pattern change, if the change time is less than 10 seconds, a display mode imitating small bait (see bait icon hr1) is displayed, and if the change time is 180 seconds or more, a display mode imitating hard bait is displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the change time of the special pattern change by understanding the display mode of the bait icon that is displayed.

As described above, in this first modified example, when a short change time is set as the first special pattern change during the second probability change state, the first special pattern change is more advantageous to the player, so when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles small bait is displayed, the game situation is more advantageous to the player than when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles small bait is not displayed.

On the other hand, as the bait icon corresponding to the second special pattern change, if the change time is less than 30 seconds, a display mode imitating small bait is displayed, and if the change time is 300 seconds or more, a display mode imitating hard bait (see bait icon hr1a) is displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the change time of the second special pattern change by grasping the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the displayed second special pattern change.

As mentioned above, in this first modified example, when a longer change time is set as the second special pattern change during the second probability change state, the second special pattern change is more advantageous to the player, so when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles hard bait is displayed, the game situation is more advantageous to the player than when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles hard bait is not displayed.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the total time of the second special pattern change corresponding to the acquired reserved special pattern 2 symbols excluding the last reserved special pattern 2 symbol to be consumed, and the remaining time of the second special pattern change being executed, exceeds a predetermined time (the period during which the second special pattern lottery can end the second special pattern state if playing normally), a special effect is executed to show that there is a high possibility that the reserved special pattern 2 will be acquired at the time the second special pattern state ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 616(a), the bait icon hr2a corresponding to the latest reserved special chart 2 floats in the air, and the display position does not move even when the conveyor 10802 is in operation. By configuring it in this way, the player can play with peace of mind when a special effect is executed.

In addition, while this special effect is being executed, compared to the normal keep zone effect, an emphasis notification is executed to emphasize to the player that they should continue playing to obtain the reserved special symbol 1. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which all reserved special symbols 2 are consumed during the second probability change state due to a period in which the game is temporarily interrupted while the special effect is being executed and the first special symbol lottery is not executed.

In the above example, the total time of the change time of the second special symbol change corresponding to the acquired special symbol 2 reserves excluding the last one to be consumed, and the remaining change time of the second special symbol change being executed are calculated. However, it is sufficient to be configured to be able to determine that there is a high possibility that the special symbol 2 reserve will be acquired at the time the second special symbol change state ends. For example, it may be configured to determine only whether the remaining change time of the second special symbol change being executed is longer than the period that would make it possible to end the second special symbol change state by the first special symbol lottery if playing normally, or to determine whether the acquired special symbol 2 reserves excluding the last one to be consumed contain information corresponding to a change time longer than the period that would make it possible to end the second special symbol change state by the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the first variant of the fifteenth control example, if it is determined that a period during the keep zone presentation during which the first special symbol variation (lottery) is not performed continues for a predetermined period of time, a guidance presentation can be executed to encourage the player to play a game that will obtain the reserved special symbol 1.

Here, the display content that is displayed when the first special symbol change is not executed during the keep zone performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 616(b). FIG. 616(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 616(a) and the first special symbol change is not executed during the keep zone performance.

As shown in FIG. 616(b), if the special symbol 1 reserve runs out during the keep zone presentation and only the second special symbol variation is being executed, a display mode that emphasizes the presentation that guides the player on how to play displayed in the small display area Dm4 (displayed in a double frame in the figure) is displayed in order to emphasize guidance for the player on how to acquire the special symbol 1 reserve, and an emphasized guidance announcement is executed in the secondary display area Ds, displaying the text "There is no special symbol 1 reserve! Hurry and save up the special symbol 1 reserve."

In addition, to indicate that only the second special symbol variation is in progress on the conveyor 10802, an effect is executed in which the bait icon hr1a corresponding to the reserved special symbol 2 approaches the fish 10801, as shown in FIG. 616(a). Note that the bait icon hr2a is displayed in the same position as in FIG. 616(a) because a special effect is being executed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a situation in which all reserved special symbols 2 are consumed during the second probability variation state due to a period in which play is temporarily interrupted while the special effect is being executed and the first special symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, if the state shown in FIG. 616(b) continues without acquiring a new reserved special symbol 1, and the second special symbol state cannot end before the second special symbol change corresponding to the bait icon hr2a is executed, that is, if it is determined that the number of first special symbol draws that can be executed within the remaining time until the second special symbol change corresponding to the bait icon hr2a is executed (the remaining period until the second special symbol change corresponding to the bait icon hr1a ends) cannot reach the remaining number of special symbol draws required to end the second special symbol state, the special performance will end and the display will switch to a normal display in which the bait icon hr2a moves as the conveyor 10802 operates.

In the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, multiple reserved special symbols 2 can be stored, and even if a situation occurs where reserved special symbols 1 have not been acquired, a new second special symbol change using the reserved special symbols 2 that have already been acquired is not executed until the currently executing second special symbol change is stopped and displayed. In other words, during the second special symbol change state, in order to end the second special symbol change state, a first special symbol change with a shorter change time is executed, and in order to make it difficult for all reserved special symbols 2 to be consumed during the second special symbol change state, a second special symbol change with a longer change time is executed, which is the most advantageous game content for the player.

Therefore, in the keep zone presentation, an icon type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set for the first special pattern change with a short change time. Also, an icon type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set for the second special pattern change with a long change time.

By configuring it in this way, players can be motivated to play in an attempt to win as many reserved special charts 1 as possible during the keep zone performance.

Here, we will explain the variation time that can be determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the second high probability variable state in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example. Although not shown, in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example, a dedicated variation pattern table is referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the second high probability variable state.

Although not shown in the figure, the second probability variable state referenced pattern table has an advantageous table where a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as the first special symbol variation and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected as the second special symbol variation, and an unfavorable table where a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is unlikely to be selected as the first special symbol variation and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is unlikely to be selected as the second special symbol variation, and is configured so that either table is determined based on the setting trigger for the second probability variable state (jackpot type) and the result of a lottery to determine the variation pattern table to be referenced.

The advantage table specifies that a variation pattern for the first special symbol variation can be selected from a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 to 60 seconds, and a variation pattern for the second special symbol variation can be selected from a variation pattern with a variation time of 100 to 300 seconds. A different variation pattern is selected depending on the number of stored first special symbol lottery execution rights (special symbol 1 reserved number) and the acquired value of the variation pattern type counter CS1.

More specifically, the more reserved special pattern 1 is, the more likely it is that a pattern with a short change time will be selected as the change pattern for the first special pattern change, and the more likely it is that a pattern with a long change time will be selected as the change pattern for the second special pattern change.

The disadvantage table specifies that a variation pattern of 1 to 45 seconds can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern of 30 to 300 seconds can be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. A different variation pattern is selected according to the number of stored rights to draw the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1 number) and the acquired value of the variation pattern type counter CS1.

More specifically, the more reserved special pattern 1 is, the more likely it is that a pattern with a short change time will be selected as the change pattern for the first special pattern change, and the more likely it is that a pattern with a long change time will be selected as the change pattern for the second special pattern change.

As explained above, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the variation pattern of the various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variable state is configured to be able to switch between a state in which a variation pattern advantageous to the player is likely to be selected and a state in which a variation pattern advantageous to the player is unlikely to be selected, depending on the type of variation pattern table referenced. By configuring it in this way, the success rate of the keep zone presentation can be made to differ depending on the type of variation pattern table referenced.

In the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the type of variation pattern table to be referenced is determined according to the game situation (jackpot type) when the second high probability variable state is set, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the scenario may be configured so that the type of variation pattern table to be referenced is switched according to the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the second high probability variable state.

In addition, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, a variation pattern table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are specified is referenced, but without being limited to this, a variation pattern table in which only the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is specified and a variation pattern table in which only the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are specified may be provided, and tables with different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided for each variation pattern table, and different types of variation pattern tables may be referenced for each special symbol type depending on the game situation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the combinations of variation patterns of various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variable state more diverse, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 617, the characteristic processing contents of the control processing of the main control device 110 executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example will be described. The first modified example of the fifteenth control example is different from the fifteenth control example described above in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

In addition, when the game state is switched, specifically when the second special probability state ends based on the execution of a special pattern lottery, a process is executed to discard the ongoing special pattern variation, which differs from the above-mentioned twelfth and fifteenth control examples. By configuring in this way, even if the normal state is set while a long-term second special pattern variation is being executed, it is possible to discard the long-term second special pattern variation midway, making it easier to execute a new second special pattern lottery in the normal state.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) display the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example (so-called simultaneous change specification), the special symbol change that is being executed may be discarded when the ceiling bonus is awarded or when a time-saving lottery is won, or the special symbol change that is being executed may be continued without being discarded.

Note that, among the differences between the first modified example of this 15th control example and the 15th control example described above, the explanation of the parts where the various control processing contents described in the 12th control example described above can be reused will be omitted. In other words, here, with reference to FIG. 617, the process of discarding the ongoing special symbol fluctuation (fluctuation discarding process at state transition) when the game state described above is switched, specifically, when the second probability variable state ends based on the execution of a special symbol lottery, will be explained.

Figure 617 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the state transition variation discarding process (YS101). This state transition variation discarding process (YS101) is a process executed by the timer interrupt process (see Figure 156) executed by the MPU 101 of the main control device 110, and if a specific condition is met when the game state transitions, processing is executed to discard the special pattern variation that is being executed.

When the state transition variation discard process (YS101) is executed, first it is determined whether there has been a change in the game state (YS201), and if it is determined that there has been no change in the game state (YS201: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of YS201 that there has been a change in the game state (YS201: Yes), it is next determined whether there has been a change from the second high probability state to the normal state (YS202), and if it is determined that there has not been a change from the second high probability state to the normal state (YS202: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of YS202, if it is determined that the second probability change state has been changed to the normal state (YS202: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern is currently changing (YS203), and if it is determined that the special pattern is not changing (YS203: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of YS203, if it is determined that the special pattern is currently changing (YS203: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern change being executed is a jackpot change (YS204), and if it is determined that the jackpot change is not happening (YS204: No), the change stop flag (special pattern 1 change stop flag 203ke, special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf) corresponding to the special pattern type during the special pattern change is set to on (YS205), and this process is terminated.

By executing the processing of YS205, in the special pattern change processing 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) that is executed next, the special pattern change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of YS204 that a jackpot fluctuation is occurring (YS204: Yes), a special continuation command is set (YS206) and this process is terminated. By receiving the special continuation command set in the process of YS206 on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a congratulatory effect is executed to inform the player that a jackpot fluctuation is occurring at the timing of transition from the second probability fluctuation state to the normal state.

As explained above, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, it is possible to discard the special pattern variation being executed when the game state transitions. Therefore, a special pattern type (e.g., the second special pattern) that has executed a long-term special pattern variation in the game state before the transition is more likely to execute a short-term special pattern variation in the game state after the transition. In a pachinko machine 10 that can vary the gameplay based on the transition of the game state, it is possible to easily execute a new special pattern variation as the game state transitions, making it easier to provide an appropriate game that is in line with the gameplay.

Also, as in the twelfth control example described above, the special pattern change in progress is not discarded based on the start or stop of the special pattern change, but is configured to be discarded based on the transition of the game state. Therefore, for example, even if the game state transitions regardless of the start or stop of the special pattern change (if the game state transitions 5 seconds after the change starts or the game state transitions based on the results of the normal pattern lottery), the special pattern change in progress can be discarded in accordance with the timing of the transition of the game state. In addition, even if multiple types of special patterns are undergoing special pattern changes at the time the game state transitions, the special pattern changes can be discarded for all special pattern types that are undergoing special pattern changes.

In the first variant of the fifteenth control example, when the game state switches from the second special probability state to the normal state, a process for discarding the special pattern change in progress can be executed, but the process for discarding the special pattern change in progress based on the transition of the game state may be diverted to other uses. For example, as in the thirteenth and fourteenth control examples described above, the process for discarding the special pattern change in progress based on the awarding of a ceiling bonus may be executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 618, the characteristic processing contents of the processing for determining the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation executed in the first modified example of the present fifteenth control example will be described. The first modified example of the present fifteenth control example is different from the above-mentioned fifteenth control example in that the game method for not consuming all the reserved special figures 2 during the state in which the keep zone presentation is executed (the second probability variable state) is different.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned 15th control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, so that as long as the first special symbol lottery continues to be executed during the keep zone performance (as long as the special symbol 1 reservation is not interrupted), the special symbol 2 reservation is not consumed (the second special symbol lottery is not executed) until the keep zone performance ends (until the second special symbol state ends). In contrast, in the first modified example of this 15th control example, the first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), so even if the special symbol 1 reservation is always held, if the change time of the first special symbol change executed is long and the change time of the second special symbol change executed is short, there is a risk that the special symbol 2 reservation will be consumed in its entirety before the second special symbol state ends.

Therefore, in this fifteenth control example, the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation (display mode of the bait icon) is configured to differ based on the change time of the currently executing special pattern change (first special pattern change, second special pattern change) and the change time of the special pattern change (first special pattern change, second special pattern change) corresponding to the acquired special pattern reserve (special pattern 1 reserve, special pattern 2 reserve).

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict the difficulty of ending the keep zone performance while retaining the reserved special chart 2, based on the performance mode of the keep zone performance being executed.

Figure 618 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second high probability state presentation setting process 15a (YS9058). As shown in Figure 618, the second high probability state presentation setting process 15a (YS9058) differs from the second high probability state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) executed in the above-mentioned 15th control example in that a process for determining the display mode of the bait icon is added, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

When the second probability bonus state presentation setting process 15a (YS9058) is executed, first, the same processes of S9401 to S9456 as the second probability bonus state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) executed in the 15th control example described above are executed. Then, when the process of S9455 is completed, next, information stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the information stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b other than the latest special pattern 2 reserved (the last special pattern 2 reserved stored) is read (YS9001), and the display mode of each bait icon is determined according to the fluctuation time included in each of the read information (YS9002).

By processing YS9002, it becomes possible to display different display styles (small bait icon, hard bait icon) for each bait icon, as shown in FIG. 616(a).

Next, the total fluctuation time included in the information read from the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (information stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b other than the latest special pattern 2 reservation (the last special pattern 2 reservation stored)) is calculated (YS9003), and the calculated fluctuation time is added up to the remaining time of the special pattern 2 fluctuation being executed (YS9004). In other words, in the process of YS9004, the remaining time until the last special pattern 2 reservation among the acquired special pattern 2 reservations is consumed (the special pattern fluctuation is executed) is calculated.

Then, the reference time corresponding to the value of the second probability variation counter 223na (remaining period of the second probability variation state) is read (YS9005), and it is determined whether the total time calculated in the process of YS9004 is longer than the reference time read in the process of YS9005 (YS9006). If it is determined to be longer, that is, if the game is played normally, it is determined that the second probability variation state is likely to end before the last reserved special chart 2 is consumed (YS9006: Yes), a special mode is determined as the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the latest reserved special chart 2 (the reserved special chart 2 to be consumed last) (YS9007). By determining the special mode in the process of YS9007, the display mode of the bait icon hr2a shown in FIG. 616(a) (special performance floating above the conveyor 10802) is executed. When the process of YS9007 is completed, a display command is set to show the display mode (performance mode) determined in this process (YS9009), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of YS9006, if it is determined that the total time calculated in the process of YS9004 is shorter than the reference time read in the process of YS9005, that is, if it is determined that there is a high possibility that the second probability of the special bonus state ending before the last reserved special chart 2 is consumed if the game is played normally (YS9006: No), the normal mode is determined as the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the latest reserved special chart 2 (the reserved special chart 2 to be consumed last) (YS9008), a display command is set to show the display mode (presentation mode) determined in this process (YS9009), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the first variant of the fifteenth control example, the special reserved symbols stored at the time the second probability variable state (keep zone presentation) is set and the change time for the special symbol change being executed are predicted, and it is determined whether or not at least one of the acquired special reserved symbols 2 is in a state that is likely to be consumed (execution of special symbol lottery) after the second probability variable state ends, and the keep zone presentation is configured to be executed in a display mode based on the result of that determination.

This configuration allows the player to predict whether the keep zone effect being executed this time is likely to be successful, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In addition, in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example, a reference time corresponding to the remaining period of the second special probability state (the value of the second special probability state counter 223na) is used as a method of determining whether or not the state is likely to be consumed (execution of a special pattern lottery) after the end of the second special probability state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to determine whether or not there is a special pattern reservation that includes information of a specific fluctuation time or more in the special pattern 2 reservation, and based on the result of this determination, determine whether or not the state is likely to be consumed (execution of a special pattern lottery) after the end of the second special probability state.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, during the second probability variable state, periodically (when a new reserved special symbol is acquired, when a new special pattern variation is executed, when a predetermined time has passed) a process is executed to update (correct) the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation based on the value of the second probability variable counter 223na and new information related to the variation time (variation time information included in the acquired reserved special symbol, or information indicating the difference between the variation time determined when a special pattern variation is actually executed and the variation time read out during the look-ahead (pre-determination)).

By executing this process, for example, when a special effect (special mode) is being executed, if a player stops playing and a period occurs during which the first special symbol variation is not executed, or if a variation time that is unfavorable to the player and that may be set with a low probability as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, it becomes possible to correct the presentation mode of the keep zone effect. This makes it easier to execute a presentation that is appropriate for the game state at the end of the second probability variation state that may actually occur.

<16th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 504 to Fig. 547. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example, similarly to the above-mentioned 13th control example, when a lottery result other than a big win is obtained (miss) in a predetermined number of consecutive special symbol lotteries (for example, 500 times), a game state (third time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and an output method of an external signal to various devices (data display device 262, hall computer 263, etc.) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In addition, in this 16th control example, a specific presentation is configured to be executable in a presentation mode that is linked to the visual state of a predetermined device (e.g., data display device 262) electrically connected to pachinko machine 10. More specifically, in pachinko machine 10 of this 16th control example, as a type of presentation for informing a player that a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot or time-saving state) has been reached, the fact that the player has entered a favorable state is concealed for a predetermined period of time, and after the transition to the favorable state, a display device-linked presentation is configured to be executable in a presentation mode that prompts the player to view a predetermined device (e.g., data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity. Most of the data display devices 262 currently in general circulation, which display various data related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 (number of draws between jackpots, number of jackpots, total number of draws, etc.) based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, are configured to notify the player of an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability game state, time-saving game state, etc.) by lighting up characters or decorative lamps, etc., when an advantageous state is set. Therefore, by executing a display device linked performance, it is possible to realize an extremely innovative performance mode in which the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are performing the performance in conjunction with each other. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 16th control example, as a lottery result of the first special pattern that is mainly executed in the normal game state, a jackpot (special jackpot) is provided in which almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning port 65a in each round is also short). Since the game state after the jackpot ends in the normal game state, this special jackpot basically plays a role of resetting the number of lotteries (the number of remaining times until the bonus related to reaching the ceiling number of lotteries is awarded) until the third time-saving state is set. Furthermore, in this 16th control example, as a part of the miss of the special pattern, a small prize lottery result is provided that is accompanied by the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a, and that the opening and closing operation is common to the opening and closing operation (specific opening and closing operation) set at the time of the special jackpot. In other words, a lottery result that is difficult to distinguish from a special jackpot from the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a, and a lottery result in which the number of lotteries until the third time-saving state is set is not reset is provided. As a result, each time the specific winning port 65a is opened or closed with the specific opening/closing action, the player can be made aware that the number of draws until the third time-saving state is granted may have been reset, making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of draws remaining until the third time-saving state is granted (the number of draws remaining until the bonus related to reaching the ceiling number of draws is granted), thus providing gameplay that allows the player to predict the number of remaining draws.

Furthermore, in this 16th control example, the time for which the special symbols change at the ceiling number of lottery draws is fixed to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, making it difficult to tell whether the game will move to the third time-saving state or whether the jackpot has been won at the ceiling number of lottery draws. By configuring it in this way, the player's sense of anticipation for the move to the third time-saving state can be maintained for a longer period of time, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 13th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 504, the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 504(a) is a diagram illustrating the appearance of the island equipment in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 to which the data display device 262 is connected are installed side by side in a hall. As illustrated in FIG. 504(a), when the pachinko machines 10 are installed in a hall, the data display device 262 is basically installed directly above each pachinko machine 10. This data display device 262 is at least composed of, for example, a data display unit 276 for displaying various data related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10, an illumination unit 278 composed of a light-emitting device such as an LED and performing a predetermined notification by emitting light, and an input device 277 capable of receiving input operations by the player to switch the display contents of the data display unit 276. The various data displayed on the data display device 262 can provide a criterion for a player to select a pachinko machine 10 to play on, or to decide whether to continue playing on a pachinko machine 10 that is currently being played. The pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to be able to output various signals to a predetermined device such as the data display device 262, such as a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a time-saving state for normal symbols has been entered after the jackpot has ended, and a jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state has been entered. The data display device 262 is configured to monitor and collect the jackpot winning status, game status, and other game status information using external output signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, and to display some of the data on the data display unit 276.

Next, referring to FIG. 504(b), an example of display of various data displayed on the data display unit 276 of the data display device 262 will be described. As shown in FIG. 504(b), the data display unit 276 of the data display device 262 is divided into a right display area 276R and a left display area 276L, and the left display area 276L displays, for example, the number of first wins on the day (the number of times the jackpot was won in the normal state or the third time-saving state). In the example of FIG. 504(b), a case is illustrated in which 12 first wins have occurred and the words "12 first wins" are displayed on the left display area 276L. In addition, the right display area 276R displays, for example, the current number of draws (the number of changes since the end of the previous jackpot), the number of draws when the first win was won up to the 5th time ago, and the number of jackpots won from the first win until the transition to the normal state (the so-called consecutive wins), etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 504(b), the characters "Current", "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5" are displayed at the bottom of the right display area 276R. Above these characters, a bar graph showing the number of times the special symbol has been drawn and a number showing the number of times are displayed. The bar graph and number displayed above the character "Current" show the number of times the special symbol has been drawn since the end of the previous jackpot, and the bar graphs and numbers displayed above the characters "1" to "5" show the number of times the special symbol has been drawn when the first jackpot (a jackpot in the normal state or the third time-saving state) was won one to five times ago. Additionally, the characters displayed above the characters "1" to "5" and below the bar graphs (the characters "4 times", "1 time", "1 time", "6 times", and "1 time") show the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive wins) won between the first jackpots one to five times ago and the transition to the normal state. In other words, it shows the number of times that a jackpot has been won without interruption in the game state (first probability variable state, second time-saving state) that is set to the normal pattern time-saving state. These display contents allow the player to easily grasp the trends of the pachinko machine 10 (trends in the number of lotteries that have won jackpots, trends in the number of consecutive wins, etc.), and provide the player with criteria for deciding whether to select a pachinko machine 10 to play on or whether to continue playing on the pachinko machine 10. This improves the convenience of the player. In the following explanation, for simplicity, the display contents displayed in the right display area 276R will be referred to as the game history.

The display contents of the data display section 276 can be changed by input operations on the input device 277. Here, the input device 277 is composed of at least a left input section 277a, a display switching input section 277b, a cancel input section 277c, and a right input section 277d, and the display range of the game history displayed in the right display area 276R can be changed by pressing (input operations) the left input section 277a and the right input section 277d. Specifically, every time the right input section 277d is pressed, an older history (a combination of a display indicating the number of lotteries at the time of the first winning and a character indicating the number of consecutive wins) is displayed. That is, every time the right input section 277d is pressed in the state of FIG. 504(a), each history is shifted one by one to the left. Accordingly, the older history is displayed at the right end, and the display of the history displayed at the left end is erased. Conversely, each time the left input section 277a is pressed, each history is shifted one by one to the right, and the more recent history is displayed on the left end while the history displayed on the right end is erased. The game history is configured to store up to 10 previous history entries.

The display switching input section 277b is an input section that can switch the display contents of the data display section 276 to history for another day by pressing (input operation). Each time the display switching input section 277b is pressed, the display contents of the data display section 276 are updated to the first hit count data and game history data from one day ago, the first hit count data and game history data from two days ago, the first hit count data and game history data from three days ago, and so on. In addition, by pressing the cancel input section 277c, it is possible to return to a state in which the first hit count data and game history data for the current day are displayed. These functions make it possible to provide the player with more information about the pachinko machine 10, thereby further improving the convenience for the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 505 and FIG. 506, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 (the display appearance of the data display unit 276 and the light emission appearance of the illumination unit 262) when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a specific state will be described. First, FIG. 505(a) is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a jackpot game state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins a jackpot, a jackpot 1 signal is output from the pachinko machine 10 to indicate that the jackpot has been won. Upon receiving this jackpot 1 signal, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 is set to the visual appearance for the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 505(a). Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display unit 276 is erased, and the word "jackpot!" is displayed across the entire data display unit 276. In addition, the right illumination section 278R and the left illumination section 278L that make up the illumination section 278 appear to be lit up more brightly than in normal times (when the game history is displayed on the data display section 276). These visual confirmation modes (jackpot visual confirmation modes) allow the player to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to a jackpot game state. The jackpot 1 signal is configured to continue to be output until the jackpot game state is terminated. The data display device 262 is configured to continue the jackpot visual confirmation mode until the output of the jackpot 1 signal is terminated.

Next, the visual state of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a normal symbol time-saving state after the jackpot is ended will be described. FIG. 505(b) is a diagram showing an example of the visual state of the data display device 262 when a normal symbol time-saving state (either the first probability change state or the second time-saving state) is set after the jackpot is ended. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 transitions to a normal symbol time-saving state after the jackpot is ended, the pachinko machine 10 starts to output a jackpot 2 signal to indicate the transition to the normal symbol time-saving state. This jackpot 2 signal continues to be output until the normal symbol time-saving state ends (i.e., until a jackpot is won or the time-saving count has elapsed and the state transitions to the normal game state). When the output of the jackpot 1 signal ends and the output of the jackpot 2 signal starts, the visual state of the data display device 262 is set to the visual state for the time-saving state as shown in FIG. 505(b). Specifically, for example, the visual indication for the big win displayed on the data display unit 276 is erased, and the words "Chain streak!" are displayed across the entire data display unit 276. In addition, the right illumination unit 278R and the left illumination unit 278L that constitute the illumination unit 278 appear to be lit up more brightly than in normal times (when the game history is displayed on the data display unit 276). These visual indications (visual indications for the time-saving state) make it easy to understand that the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to a time-saving state for normal symbols after the end of the big win.

Next, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches the ceiling number of times (500 times) and the state transitions to the third time-saving state will be described. FIG. 506 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 after the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the third time-saving state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins the third time-saving state, the pachinko machine 10 starts outputting a jackpot 2 signal indicating that the state transitions to the normal symbol time-saving state. In addition, a jackpot 3 signal is output for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) to indicate that the state transitions to the time-saving state related to the reaching of the ceiling number of times. By the combination of these signal outputs, the data display device 262 can easily determine the transition to the third time-saving state related to the ceiling number of times, so the visual appearance of the data display device 262 is set to the visual appearance for the third time-saving state. Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display unit 276 is erased, and the words "Rescue Activated" are displayed across the entire data display unit 276. In addition, the right illumination unit 278R and the left illumination unit 278L that make up the illumination unit 278 appear to be lit up more brightly than in normal times (when the game history is displayed on the data display unit 276). These visual aspects (visual aspects for the third time-saving state) make it easy to understand that the pachinko machine 10 has reached the ceiling number of lottery draws and has transitioned to the third time-saving state.

In this way, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 can be linked to the state of the pachinko machine 10 and changed, so the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be more easily notified to the player. This improves the convenience for the player.

Next, referring to Fig. 507 to Fig. 509, a characteristic presentation mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 507, a data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation will be described. This data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation is a presentation mode that draws attention to the data display device 262 after the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing combination in the variable display presentation. If a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, a jackpot 1 signal is output to the data display device 262, and the data display device 262 is set to the jackpot visual mode, allowing the player to understand that a jackpot has been won. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, a jackpot 1 signal is not output to the data display device 262, and the data display device 262 is not set to the jackpot visual mode (the game history remains displayed), allowing the player to understand that a jackpot has not been won.

Figure 507 (a) shows the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of a performance (a teasing performance of a data display device linked performance) that suggests to the player that a data display device linked jackpot notification performance may be executed. This teasing performance of a data display device linked performance is a performance that can be executed as part of a variable display mode that corresponds to a variable type other than a complete miss (SP reach hit, SP reach miss, super reach hit, super reach miss, normal reach hit, normal reach miss), and is an effect that is executed 5 seconds before the variable time has elapsed (the special symbol is displayed as confirmed).

As shown in FIG. 507(a), when the teasing effect of the data display device linked effect is executed, an effect is executed in which an angel-like character 809 appears in the upper right of the main display area, and then a light 809L is emitted from the stick held by the character 809 toward the upper part of the main display area Dm. In addition, a speech bubble image 809F consisting of a vertically elongated oval shape and containing the words "Shine!" is displayed to the left of the character 809 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the words "If the data lamp lights up, the bonus is confirmed!?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents make the player believe that the angel-like character 809 is about to emit light 809L toward the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby causing the illumination part 278 of the data display device (data lamp) 262 to light up. In addition, when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 illuminates the illumination unit 278, the player can easily understand that a big win game is being played (a bonus is confirmed).

Figure 507 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a jackpot is actually announced after the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is executed (when a data display device linked jackpot announcement performance is executed). As shown in Figure 507 (b), in the data display device linked jackpot announcement performance, first, at the jackpot start timing (the start of the opening period of the jackpot), a signal indicating the start of the jackpot (jackpot 1 signal) is output to a predetermined device (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), and the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 that received the jackpot 1 signal is set to the visual recognition mode for the jackpot. In other words, the illumination part 278 of the data display device 262 appears to be illuminated as suggested by the character 809, etc. in the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 507(b), from above the third symbol that was stopped and displayed in a manner that was out of reach, the third symbol that is the same as the symbol that was in reach descends, and the stopped and displayed middle symbol and the descending third symbol are replaced (the stopped and displayed middle symbol are pushed aside). That is, an effect is executed as if the third symbol that is a winning symbol is released downward from the data display device 262, and the third symbol is replaced with the middle symbol. In addition, a balloon image 809F with the characters "Yay!" is displayed on the upper left of the angel-like character 809, and a display mode is set as if light is leaking out from above the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the characters "Bonus confirmed!" are displayed on the sub-display area Ds. These display modes can realize a novel performance mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 are linked to form one performance mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel presentation in which it is as if the lottery result has been rewritten to a jackpot by the data display device 262. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Currently, various devices with different specifications are in widespread use as the data display device 262, and the display contents of the game history and the visual confirmation modes such as the visual confirmation mode for the jackpot vary from device to device. Therefore, even if the same data display device-linked jackpot notification performance is executed, if the type of data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 on which the data display device-linked jackpot notification performance is executed is different, the visual confirmation mode for the jackpot will also be different, making it possible to give the player a completely different impression. Therefore, even if the performance modes of the data display device-linked jackpot notification performance are not increased, the performance modes can be diversified by the number of types of data display device 262, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved while saving the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 508(a), the small bonus presentation in this 16th control example will be described. Here, in this 16th control example, as described above, there are lottery results for special jackpots in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed with a specific opening and closing action that hardly gives any prize balls even if the player hits from the right, and for small jackpots. In this control example, these lottery results that are difficult for players to distinguish from the appearance of the opening and closing action of the specific winning opening 65a are collectively referred to as "small bonuses." In contrast, jackpots (jackpots A17 to E16) that can give a relatively large number of prize balls other than special jackpots are referred to as "normal bonuses."

Figure 508 (a) is a diagram showing the display mode at the end of the variable display performance corresponding to the small bonus (when the third symbol stops). As shown in Figure 508 (a), in this 16th control example, when a small bonus (special big win, small win) is won, the third symbol imitating the same even number is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row of the main display area dm. The example of Figure 508 (a) illustrates a case where the third symbol imitating the number "2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row. In addition, a small display area Dm4 with the characters "Right hit" is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 508 (a), the characters "Small bonus" are displayed in the small display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the lottery result is a small bonus.

In contrast, although not shown in the figures, if a bonus (any of the jackpots A16 to E16) is won, a third symbol that resembles the same odd number is stopped and displayed in the right, middle, and left symbol rows. This makes it easy to determine the type of bonus from the type of third symbol that is stopped and displayed, improving convenience for the player.

As mentioned above, if a special jackpot is won during normal gameplay, the normal gameplay state will be set even after the special jackpot has ended, and the value of the special drawing counter 203la will be cleared to 0. However, if a small jackpot is won, the value of the special drawing counter 203la will be maintained. Therefore, winning a small jackpot is more advantageous for the player than winning a special jackpot, since the number of draws until the transition to the third time-saving state is not reset.

In this 16th control example, in the normal state, the small display area Dm7 of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the number of draws after the last bonus has ended as the number of "between bonuses", rather than the number of draws for the special pattern after the end of a jackpot. In other words, the displayed number of draws is reset not only when a jackpot is won, but also when a small jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a special jackpot and a small jackpot, and therefore it is possible to add a game element of predicting the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number of draws. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 508(b), the presentation mode set in the variable display performance executed at the ceiling drawing count (500th time) will be described. FIG. 508(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the variable display performance of the ceiling drawing count (500th time) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 508(b), in the variable display performance of the ceiling drawing count (500th time), a reach performance occurs. Here, in this 16th control example, in order to ensure that a reach performance occurs in the variable display performance of the ceiling drawing count (500th time), when a lottery of a special pattern for the ceiling drawing count (500th time) is executed, a 30-second change time corresponding to the super reach variation is set regardless of the lottery result. This makes it possible to reliably secure the presentation time of the reach performance. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the reach performance may notify the transition to the third time-saving state related to the reaching of the ceiling drawing count. If the special symbol is not drawn after the ceiling number of draws (500), the same third symbol combination (see FIG. 278) as when the time-saving symbol is won is displayed as a static display to notify the transition to the time-saving state. In other words, after a reach effect occurs, a symbol with the word "Chance Time" written on it is displayed as a static display in the middle symbol row to notify the transition to the time-saving state. This allows the player to easily understand that the transition to the third time-saving state has occurred based on the ceiling number of draws being reached (it is not a transition to the time-saving state triggered by a jackpot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 508(b), a small display area Dm7 with the characters "Ceiling!?" is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the characters "Right hit strictly prohibited! Left hit!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The display content of this sub-display area Ds can prevent a player who predicts that the game will transition to the third time-saving state from starting a right hit before the game transitions to the third time-saving state (normal game state). Here, if a right hit is started before the game transitions to the third time-saving state (normal game state), there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the through gate 67 during the normal game state and the variable display of the normal pattern will start. In this 16th control example, the normal pattern variable time in the normal state (normal game state) of the normal pattern is set to 30 seconds. For this reason, for example, if the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (the normal symbol starts to change) just before the change stops (just before the transition to the third time-saving state), the normal symbol cannot be a winning symbol for about 30 seconds after the transition to the third time-saving state. This is because the change time of the normal symbol once set is not changed even if the game state changes during the change. For this reason, even if the transition to the third time-saving state is notified, it is possible that the normal electric device 640a is set in an unfavorable situation in which it is not opened for a relatively long period of time, and the player may feel dissatisfied because he or she cannot enjoy the benefits of the third time-saving state. In contrast, in this 16th control example, in the change display performance of the ceiling lottery number (500 times), a display can be made in the sub-display area Ds to urge the player not to hit the right, so that it is possible to suppress the player from hitting the right before the transition to the third time-saving state. This prevents the normal symbol variation display from starting before the transition to the third time-saving state, preventing the player from enjoying the benefits of the third time-saving state (whereby a game ball hit to the right becomes more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640) for the relatively long period of time until the variation display ends.

In addition, in this 16th control example, in addition to the variable display effect for the ceiling number of draws (500th time), a variable display effect of a presentation mode (see FIG. 508 (b)) suggesting that the ceiling number of draws has been reached may be executed. More specifically, this is the case when one or more small bonuses have been won after a bonus, at least one small bonus is a special big win, and the number of draws after the last bonus won has reached 500, and when the number of draws after the end of a small bonus won after the last bonus won has reached 500. In other words, from the player's perspective (a perspective where it is not possible to determine whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win), the ceiling number of draws may have been reached. In other words, if a special jackpot is won after a bonus, the player cannot distinguish between the special jackpot and a small jackpot. Therefore, even if the value of the special drawing counter 203la is actually reset at the time of the special jackpot, it is difficult for the player to be certain that it has been reset. Therefore, when the number of drawings after the end of the bonus won before the special jackpot reaches 500, the player can be made to expect that the ceiling number of drawings will be reached. Therefore, by setting a performance mode (see FIG. 508(b)) that suggests that the ceiling number of drawings will be reached at this timing, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the ceiling number of drawings to be reached for a longer period of time.

Similarly, if the number of draws after a bonus exceeds 500, it is confirmed that one of the small bonuses won during those 500 draws was the special jackpot, but if multiple small bonuses have been won, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which small bonus was the special jackpot. Therefore, until a bonus is won or the ceiling number of draws is reached, each time the number of draws since the winning of each small bonus reaches 500, a presentation mode (see FIG. 508(b)) is executed to suggest that the ceiling number of draws has been reached. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to keep the player's sense of anticipation for reaching the ceiling number of draws for a longer period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 509, a data display device-linked time-saving activation presentation, which is one of the characteristic presentation modes in the 16th control example, will be described. This data display device-linked time-saving activation presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that a transition to a time-saving state will occur without a jackpot (based on winning a time-saving symbol or reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws) in a normal game state, and is a presentation in a presentation mode as if the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 are performing a presentation linked to each other, similar to the data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation (see FIG. 507 (b)) described above. First, referring to FIG. 509 (a), a diagram showing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of a presentation (a teasing presentation of a data display device-linked presentation) that suggests to the player that a data display device-linked time-saving activation presentation may be executed. This teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is a performance that can be executed as part of the variable display mode corresponding to the SP reach miss or the Super reach miss, and is a performance to suggest the possibility of transitioning to a time-saving state based on the winning of the time-saving pattern or the reaching of the ceiling lottery number. This teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is a performance that is executed 5 seconds before the variable time elapses (the special pattern is displayed for confirmation), similar to the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance that suggests a big win (see FIG. 507 (a)). Note that, similar to the thirteenth control example described above, the lottery result of a miss also includes the winning of the time-saving pattern. Also, as described above, the variation pattern related to the lottery of the special pattern of the ceiling lottery number (500 times) is always selected as the 30-second Super reach variation, so the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance may also be executed as the variable display performance of the ceiling lottery number (500 times).

As shown in FIG. 509(a), when the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is executed, an angel-like character 809 appears in the upper right corner of the main display area, and then a light 809L is emitted from the stick held by the character 809 toward the upper part of the main display area Dm. Also, a balloon image 809F, which is configured in a vertically elongated oval shape and has the words "Shine!", is displayed to the left of the character 809 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the words "If the data lamp lights up, you get a chance time!?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make the player believe that the angel-like character 809 is about to emit light 809L toward the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby causing the illumination part 278 of the data display device (data lamp) 262 to light up. In addition, when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 causes the illumination unit 278 to emit light, the player can easily understand that the game is moving to a time-saving state (a chance time is coming).

Figure 509 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the transition to the time-saving state is actually notified after the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is executed (when the data display device linked time-saving activation performance is executed). As shown in Figure 509 (b), in the data display device linked time-saving activation performance, first, at the timing of the transition to the time-saving state, a signal indicating that the time-saving state is in progress (jackpot 2 signal) and a signal indicating that the time-saving state has been transitioned to without a jackpot (jackpot 3 signal) are output to a predetermined device (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), and the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 that has received the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal is set to the visual recognition mode for the time-saving state. In other words, as suggested by the character 809, etc. in the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance, the illumination part 278 of the data display device 262 appears to be illuminated. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 509(b), the third symbol with "Chance Time" written on it descends from above the third symbol that was temporarily stopped in the form of a missed reach, and the stopped and displayed middle symbol is replaced with the descending third symbol (the stopped and displayed middle symbol is pushed aside). That is, an effect is executed as if the third symbol with "Chance Time" written on it was released downward from the data display device 262, and the third symbol was replaced with the middle symbol. Also, a balloon image 809F with the words "Yay!" is displayed on the upper right of the angel-like character 809, and a display mode is set as if light is leaking out from above the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the words "Chance Time GET!" are displayed on the sub-display area Ds. These display modes can realize a novel performance mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 are linked to form one performance mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode that makes it seem as if the data display device 262 has caused the game to transition to a time-saving state. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 510, the reserved ball number change presentation in this 16th control example will be described. Here, the reserved ball number change presentation is a presentation in which the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern displayed in the small display area Dm9 is changed according to the pre-reading result. As shown in FIG. 510(a), in this 16th control example, at least six types of display modes are provided as the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 510(a), there are six types of display modes: a normal (default) display mode (normal reserve) consisting of a black circle pattern; a display mode (change 1 reserve) consisting of a pattern of a white circle with an x inside, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot and the expectation of a time-saving state are relatively low; a display mode (change 2 reserve) consisting of a pattern imitating a white circle, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is medium but the expectation of a time-saving state is low; a display mode (change 3 reserve) consisting of a figure imitating a double circle, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high but the expectation of a time-saving state is low; a display mode (change 4 reserve) consisting of a figure imitating a cross inside a white circle, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is low but the expectation of a time-saving state is high; and a display mode (change 5 reserve) consisting of a pattern imitating a star inside a white circle, which can be displayed only when the result of the pre-reading is either a jackpot or a time-saving state.

In this 16th control example, when a start winning of the first special symbol is detected in the normal state, the lottery result is predicted from various counter values (random number values) obtained based on the start winning, and the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol indicating the reserved balls increased based on the start winning is determined with a lottery probability according to the predicted result. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation of a jackpot or a time-saving state even before the lottery for the special symbol actually begins, further increasing the player's interest in the game. The selection ratio of each display mode for each lottery result (variation type) will be described later with reference to FIG. 521.

Next, referring to FIG. 510(b), the conditions under which the reserved ball change presentation is suppressed in this 16th control example will be described. Here, as described above, in this 16th control example, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after the end of a jackpot, if the lottery result (a miss lottery result including a time-saving symbol winning and a small jackpot winning) that is different from the jackpot is consecutively obtained over a predetermined ceiling lottery number (500 times), the configuration is such that the state transitions to the third time-saving state after the end of the variable display of the ceiling lottery number (500 times). In other words, before and after the ceiling lottery number, the normal game state in which the game progresses by mainly executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting left is switched to the third time-saving state in which the game progresses by mainly executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right. In this 16th control example, the configuration is such that the reserved ball number pattern (change 1 to change 5) of a display mode other than the normal reserved ball number pattern (change 1 to change 5) is suppressed from continuing to be displayed across the switching of this game state.

Here, in this 16th control example, it is configured so that, particularly for the first special symbol, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot during the time-saving state than to win the jackpot after the time-saving state ends. More specifically, if a special jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal game state, the normal game state is set even after the jackpot ends, but if a special jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set even after the jackpot ends. In addition, in this 16th control example, as in the 13th control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. In other words, in a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are both reserved and a new lottery condition for a special symbol is established (when the variable display ends, when the jackpot ends, etc.), the lottery for the special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is executed with priority. For this reason, in a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern and one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern are reserved in the time-saving state, the player can adjust to some extent the timing of the lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special pattern. For this reason, if the reserved ball number pattern of the display mode of change 3 or change 5, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, is displayed as the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern and the transition to the third time-saving state is made in a state where the player may think that he or she wants to check the lottery result based on the reserved balls with a high expectation of a jackpot without executing the lottery for the second special pattern. In other words, in the lottery for the first special pattern, where it is more advantageous to win a jackpot during the time-saving state, the player may think that the lottery based on the reserved balls with a high expectation of a jackpot should be executed before the end of the third time-saving state. In other words, if the reserved change is continuously displayed before and after the transition to the third time-saving state, there is a risk that it will be excessively advantageous for the player.

Therefore, in this 16th control example, in order to prevent the reserved ball number pattern (change 1 to change 5) in a display mode other than normal reserved from continuing to be displayed across the timing of switching to the third time-saving state (and the reserved change display of the first special pattern from being executed during the time-saving state), a reserved change display prohibition state (special pattern 1 pre-reading display prohibition state) is set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 510(b), a start winning corresponding to the drawing of the special pattern at the ceiling drawing count (500th drawing) is detected, and the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern based on the start winning is determined, and a special pattern 1 pre-reading display prohibition state is set from the time until the third time-saving state set based on the reaching of the ceiling drawing count (500th drawing) ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure it so that a gaming method in which the interval between launching game balls is intentionally adjusted so that the timing of the lottery execution of the reserved ball of the first special pattern, which is reserved before the ceiling number of lotteries is reached and is used to draw the special pattern after the ceiling number of lotteries is reached (after transition to the third time-saving state), is during the third time-saving state, or conversely, the interval between launching game balls is intentionally adjusted so that the timing of the lottery execution of the reserved ball of the first special pattern is not during the third time-saving state, is not valid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous.

Next, referring to FIG. 511, the method of transition between each game state in this 16th control example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 511, in this 16th control example, four game states are provided as game states: normal state, first probability variable state, second time-saving state, and third time-saving state. As in the 13th control example, the normal state is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is not activated. In other words, it is configured as a game state that is disadvantageous to a player who needs to progress in the game by executing a lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage, by hitting left.

The first probability change state is set to a high probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is activated, and is configured as the most advantageous game state for the player, in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high and the advantageous second special symbol can be drawn frequently by hitting to the right. The second time-saving state is set to a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is activated, and is configured as a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low, making it less advantageous than the first probability change state, but is more advantageous than the normal state, in which the second special symbol is drawn frequently by hitting to the right.

Furthermore, the third time-saving state is configured as a game state in which the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol low probability state are set, and the normal symbol variable shortening function (variable shortening) is activated. In other words, the third time-saving state is configured as a game state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the normal state because the probability of winning the normal symbol is lower than that of the second time-saving state. Here, in this 16th control example, as in the 13th control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are judged to be winning for the normal symbol differs by only one. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (the degree of advantage of the third time-saving state is lower than that of the second time-saving state). Therefore, when the third time-saving state is entered, the player can be made to feel as if he or she has obtained the same value as when the second time-saving state is entered, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 511, a method of transition from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 511, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving pattern is won, and when the ceiling number of lottery attempts is reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 511, when a jackpot A16, which is determined with a probability of 80% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state, which is the most advantageous state for the player. Also, when a jackpot B16, which is determined with a probability of 10% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second probability variable state, which is less advantageous than the first probability variable state. Also, when a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state, it is similarly set to the second time-saving state. Furthermore, when the ceiling number of lottery attempts is reached in the normal state, it is set to the third time-saving state. On the other hand, if a special jackpot, which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set back to the normal state (looping the normal state). Therefore, in the normal state, the gameplay is basically in the hope of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol and transitioning to the first probability variable state. Also, if a certain number of lotteries have passed without winning a jackpot (so-called a "stuck" has occurred), the player can play in the hope of reaching the ceiling number of lotteries.

Next, referring to the left center of FIG. 511, a method of transition from the first variable probability state to another game state will be described. As shown in the left center of FIG. 511, there is a possibility of transition from the first variable probability state to another game state when a jackpot is won or when the number of variable probability times set after the end of the previous jackpot has elapsed (the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes 0). More specifically, as shown in the left center of FIG. 511, when a jackpot E16, which is determined at a rate of 20% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the first variable probability state, is won, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state. Also, when the number of variable probability times elapses in the first variable probability state (the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes 0), the game state is set to the normal state. On the other hand, if the player wins either the jackpot C16 or D16, which is determined with an 80% probability when the player wins a jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol in the first probability variable state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state again (the first probability variable state is looped). Therefore, in the first probability variable state, the player is expected to win a jackpot before the probability variable count has elapsed, and to win the jackpot C16 or D16.

In addition, the system is configured so that the first special symbol can be drawn by hitting the left hand even in the second probability variable state. If the first special symbol draws a jackpot B16 or a special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state. On the other hand, if the first special symbol draws a jackpot A16, the first probability variable state is looped. In addition, if the time-saving symbol is drawn in the first special symbol draw, the game state does not change because the time-saving state of the normal symbol has already been set. Strictly speaking, when the time-saving symbol is drawn, the time-saving count is reset to 100 (the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100), while the time-saving symbol wins the probability variable count (the value of the probability variable counter 203i) does not change, so in this case, an event occurs in which the probability variable count and the time-saving count are not equal. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, only when this irregular event occurs will the situation occur in which the number of chance bonuses has elapsed in the first chance bonus state but there are still time-saving bonuses remaining, and the game will transition to the second time-saving bonus state.

Next, referring to the right side of the first probability variable state in FIG. 511, the method of transition from the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state to other game states will be described. The method of transition to other game states is almost the same for the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state, so they will be described collectively as the time-saving state here. As shown in the center right part of FIG. 511, there is a possibility of transition from the time-saving state to other game states when a jackpot is won or the number of time-saving times has elapsed (the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0). More specifically, as shown in the center right part of FIG. 511, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state when either the jackpot C16 or D16, which is determined with a probability of 80%, is obtained. In addition, if the player wins the jackpot E16, which is determined with a 20% probability when the player wins the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state again (if the time-saving state at the time of the jackpot win was the second time-saving state, the game state will loop to the second time-saving state, and if it was the third time-saving state, the game state will transition to the second time-saving state). In addition, if the number of time-saving times has elapsed, the game state will transition directly to the normal state. Although not shown in the figure, if the player hits the left hand in the third time-saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and the time-saving symbol is won, the game state will transition to the second time-saving state.

In this way, in this 16th control example, the game state is changed by various triggers, such as when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving symbol is won, and when the ceiling number of draws is reached. Therefore, since a transition to a game state with a high degree of advantage can be expected at more times, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

<Electrical configuration in 16th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 512. FIG. 512 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 512, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example differs from the electrical configuration (see FIG. 137) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) described above only in that the external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The other configurations are the same as the electrical configuration (see FIG. 137) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example, information indicating the start winning, information indicating the number of winning balls, information according to the game situation such as whether or not a jackpot game is being played, etc. can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the external output terminal board 261. The externally output data is received by the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263, which are electrically connected to the external output terminal board 261. The data display device 262 is configured to be able to collect information output from one pachinko machine 10 to which it is electrically connected, and to display the collected data on the data display unit 276 as a game history. In addition, the hall computer 263 is electrically connected to multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, and is configured to be able to collect information output from each pachinko machine 10 individually. More specifically, the hard disk 289 (see FIG. 513) of the hall computer 263 has a data storage area corresponding to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall, and each time data is received from the external output terminal board 261, the contents of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that output the data are updated. Based on the contents stored in this data storage area, it is configured to be able to grasp the game history of each pachinko machine 10 (number of jackpots and number of fluctuations per day, the ball entry port of the lottery device 700 into which the game ball entered during each jackpot, etc.), the payout rate, operation rate, the presence or absence of fraudulent activities or abnormalities, etc.

The external output terminal board 261 is configured with eleven output channels CN1 to CN11. Each of these eleven channels is configured to be capable of outputting either an H output signal (e.g., a 5-volt output) or an L output signal (e.g., a 0-volt output). Each of these channels is provided with a ground pin in addition to a pin for outputting game information such as the game state and game situation. That is, each channel is a set of two pins. The ground pin is connected to a common ground of the external output terminal board 261, and is configured to always output 0 volts. The data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 can easily determine whether the state of the pin for outputting information is an H output state or an L output state by comparing the 0-volt reference voltage output from this ground pin with the voltage output from the pin for outputting information. It is not necessary to provide a ground pin for each channel. For example, a dedicated channel for outputting a 0-volt reference voltage may be provided. This allows the number of pins for each channel to be reduced by one, which in turn reduces the number of harnesses and connectors, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 513, the configuration of the gaming system consisting of the pachinko machine 10, data display device 262, and hall computer 263 in this 16th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 513, the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is electrically connected to the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263. That is, signal lines leading to the external output terminal board 261 are connected to the input/output port 275 of the data display device 262 and the input/output port of the hall computer 263.

As shown in FIG. 513, the data display device 262 is equipped with an MPU 271 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 271, a RAM 273 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 272, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The input/output port 275 of the data display device 262 is connected to at least a data display unit 276 that is configured to display data such as a game history and is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display, an input device 277 that can accept input operations to switch the display content of the data display unit 276, and an illumination unit 278 that is composed of light-emitting members such as LEDs. The MPU 271 controls the display content of the data display unit 276 based on the data stored in the ROM 272 and the RAM 273, monitors whether or not there is an input operation to the input device 277, and switches the display content of the data display unit 276 when an input operation is detected. It also monitors various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 to update the information on the game history stored in the RAM 273, update the display mode of the data display unit 276, and update the light emission mode of the illumination unit 278. This allows the game history of the pachinko machine 10 to be displayed on the data display unit 276 without any time lag, improving convenience for the player.

As shown in FIG. 513, the hall computer 263 is equipped with an MPU 281 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 281 includes a ROM 282 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 281, a RAM 283 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 282, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. At least a speaker 286 capable of outputting a predetermined sound, a display 287 composed of a liquid crystal display or the like and configured to display data such as a game history, and an input device 288 composed of a keyboard or the like and capable of receiving input operations such as switching the display contents for the display 287 are connected to the input/output port 285 of the hall computer 263. Furthermore, the hall computer 263 includes a hard disk 289 for individually tallying up the game history of multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall. The MPU 281 controls the display contents of the display 287 based on data stored in the ROM 282, RAM 283, and hard disk 289, and also monitors whether or not there is an input operation to the input device 288, and switches the display contents of the data display section 287 when an input operation is detected. It also monitors various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 to update the information on the game history stored in the hard disk 289, update the display mode of the display 287, and control the sound output from the speaker 286. As a result, the game history and game status of multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall can be displayed on the display 287 without any time lag, improving the convenience of the hall computer operator (mainly the hall staff, etc.).

Next, the details of the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 514. As shown in FIG. 514, the external output terminal board 261 has 11 channels, CN1 to CN11, and each channel outputs a signal according to the game situation. Specifically, a payout signal indicating that the number of prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 has reached 10 is output from CN1. This payout signal is configured to continue as an H output for 0.2 seconds each time the number of prize balls paid out reaches 10 (see S2906 in FIG. 58). The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls paid out from each pachinko machine 10 based on this payout signal. This makes it possible to calculate the ball payout rate of each pachinko machine 10 and the sales of the hall.

An inner frame open signal indicating whether the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is open or not is output from CN2 of the external output terminal board 261. This inner frame open signal has its output set to H while the inner frame 12 is open, and its output is set to L while the inner frame 12 is closed. Based on this inner frame open signal, the hall computer 263 can determine whether the inner frame 12 of each pachinko machine 10 has been opened by a fraudulent player, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

A door open signal indicating whether the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is open or not is output from CN3 of the external output terminal board 261. The output of this door open signal is set to H while the front frame 14 is open, and the output of this door open signal is set to L while the front frame 14 is closed. Based on this door open signal, the hall computer 263 can determine whether the front frame 14 of each pachinko machine 10 has been opened by a fraudulent player, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

A pattern stop signal indicating that the variation of the special pattern has stopped is output from CN4 of the external output terminal board 261. This pattern stop signal is set to an H output state for one second based on the fact that the variation of the special pattern has stopped (see S212 in FIG. 31). The hall computer 262 can grasp the number of times the special pattern has changed for each pachinko machine 10 based on the pattern stop signal.

From CN5 of the external output terminal board 261, a start winning signal is output, which is a signal indicating that a start winning has been detected for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. This start winning signal is set to an H output each time a start winning is detected. The H output is configured to continue for 0.2 seconds. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the start winning of each pachinko machine 10 based on this start winning signal.

From CN6 of the external output terminal board 261, an out ball detection signal is output that becomes H (high output) every time 10 game balls enter the out port 66. This out ball detection signal is kept in an H output state for 0.2 seconds each time 10 out balls are detected, and then set to an L output state. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of out balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on this out ball detection signal.

A jackpot 1 signal is output from CN7 of the external output terminal board 261, which indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state. The output of this jackpot 1 signal is set to H during a jackpot of a special symbol, and is set to L when the machine is not in a jackpot state. Based on this jackpot 1 signal, the hall computer 263 can determine the number of jackpots of each pachinko machine 10 and whether or not there is any fraudulent activity. Specifically, when this jackpot 1 signal is set to an H output state, the hall computer 263 is configured to add 1 to the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 10, and to grasp the number of jackpots in real time. Based on this number of jackpots, if an abnormal number of jackpots have occurred, it can determine that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraudulent activity, and report the abnormality.

CN8 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a jackpot 2 signal indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-saving state. The output of this jackpot 2 signal is set to H while the normal symbol time-saving state is set, and the output is set to L when the normal symbol time-saving state is not set. The hall computer 263 can determine the number of consecutive wins of each pachinko machine 10 and whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on this jackpot 2 signal. Specifically, when a jackpot is won while this jackpot 2 signal is in the H output state and a jackpot 1 signal is output, the hall computer 263 is configured to add 1 to the number of consecutive wins of the pachinko machine 10 and grasp the number of consecutive jackpots in real time. If an abnormal number of consecutive jackpots have occurred based on this number of consecutive jackpots, it can determine that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraudulent activity and report the abnormality.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state, CN9 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a jackpot 3 signal indicating the start and end of the third time-saving state. Like the jackpot 1 signal, the output of this jackpot 3 signal is set to H while a jackpot game is being played, and in addition, the output of this jackpot 3 signal is set to H for 0.2 seconds when the ceiling number of draws is reached and the third time-saving state begins, and when the third time-saving state ends. This jackpot 3 signal makes it possible to output information indicating a jackpot game state, information indicating that the third time-saving state related to the ceiling number of draws has begun, and information indicating that the third time-saving state has ended, by varying the signal output mode on only one channel.

As with the jackpot 1 signal, by setting CN9 to the H output state even during the execution of the jackpot game, the information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the specified device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263) electrically connected via the external output terminal board 261. In other words, the function of transitioning to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, which is installed in this pachinko machine 10, is a very special function that transitions to a favorable game state without going through a jackpot, and depending on the specifications of the specified device, there is a risk that the transition to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating the time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it may be determined that the transition to the time-saving state has been made illegally without going through a jackpot, or that the output is invalid because an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the sixteenth control example, by providing a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of the jackpot game but also when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached as the jackpot 3 signal, the time-saving state to which the state is shifted based on the fact that the ceiling number of lotteries is reached can be treated as normal regardless of the specifications of a predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261. In other words, even if a specification is such that a signal indicating a time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it is possible to realize a signal output mode that pseudo-sounds as if the state was shifted to the time-saving state after the jackpot has been obtained, even when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, by inputting the jackpot 3 signal as a signal indicating a jackpot. In other words, since the jackpot 3 signal indicating a jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds and the jackpot 2 signal indicating the shift to the time-saving state is set to the H output state, it can be determined that the shift to the legitimate time-saving state has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state set based on the fact that the ceiling number of lotteries is reached from being determined as illegal or abnormal. In addition, in the case of a specified device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws, by determining the output period of the jackpot 3 signal, it is possible to distinguish whether the H output is based on reaching the ceiling number of draws or based on winning the jackpot. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the specified device, the transition to the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws can be treated as valid.

A winning detection signal is output from CN10 of the external output terminal board 261, indicating that the number of prize balls to be paid out has reached 10, based on the fact that game balls have entered various winning ports. This winning detection signal is configured so that an H output continues for 0.2 seconds each time the number of prize balls to be paid out reaches 10. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on this winning detection signal.

Various security-related signals are output from CN11 of the external output terminal board 261. More specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the output of CN11 is set to H for 0.2 seconds (power-on signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which CN11 is at H output, and if the period of H output is 0.2 seconds, it can determine that the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on. Also, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the output of CN11 is set to H for 0.4 seconds (power-off signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which CN11 is at H output, and if the period of H output is 0.4 seconds, it can determine that the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off. In the 16th control example, the hall computer 263 stores the game state when the power is cut off, and when power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, it compares the stored game state when the power is cut off with the game state when the power is turned on to see if they match. In other words, it is configured to determine whether or not there is a possibility that the game state has been changed to a more advantageous state by some fraudulent method when the power is turned on, and to report an abnormality if the game states do not match. This configuration makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts that fraudulently change the game state of the pachinko machine 10 to a more advantageous game state (jackpot game state or first probability change state).

If the power is cut off during a jackpot state (while the jackpot 1 signal is outputting H) and then turned on again, the jackpot 1 signal (CN7), which was set to off (outputting L) while the power was cut off, will again be in the H output state. In this case, if the hall computer 263 adds up the number of jackpots, the actual number of jackpots and the number of jackpots grasped by the hall computer 263 will differ. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example, if it is determined that the game state at the time of power-on and the game state at the time of the previous power-off are both jackpot states, it is determined that the jackpot state continues from before the power-off, and the number of jackpots is not added up when the power is turned on. This allows the hall computer 263 to accurately grasp the number of jackpots.

In addition, CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 is also set to the H output state when any type of abnormality (magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, switch abnormality, abnormal winning, etc.) is detected in the pachinko machine 10. When any type of abnormality is detected, the output remains set to H until the abnormality is resolved. If the H output state of CN11 continues for more than 0.4 seconds, the hall computer 263 can determine that an abnormality has occurred, and can quickly notify the operator of the abnormality via the speaker 286 or display 287. This allows any abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 to be quickly resolved.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to output signals according to the game situation from each of the 11 channels CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261, so that a predetermined device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263) installed outside the pachinko machine 10 can grasp the game situation. The data display device 262 can grasp the game situation based on various signals output from the connected pachinko machine 10, update the display of the game history, and visually notify that a favorable game state has been entered. The hall computer 263 can grasp the game situation based on various signals output from each pachinko machine 10, grasp the ball payout rate of each pachinko machine 10, and determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity against each pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 515, an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board 261 during normal play will be described. In FIG. 515, the signal output mode of CN4 and CN7 to CN9 will be described. As shown in FIG. 515, until a jackpot is reached, CN4 is set to the H output state for one second each time the timing for the special symbol to stop fluctuating is reached. This output mode of CN4 allows the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 to count the number of times the special symbol fluctuates. During this time, CN7 to CN9 maintain the L output state. Then, as shown in FIG. 515, when a jackpot is reached by drawing a special symbol, and the timing for the jackpot fluctuating to stop based on the jackpot is reached and CN4 is set to the H output state for one second, the timing for the jackpot game to start is reached. CN4 is set to the L output state and CN7 and CN9 are set to the H output state. This H output state continues until the timing for the jackpot to end. Based on the outputs of CN7 and CN9, the data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can determine that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state.

Then, when the jackpot ends (the timing for setting the time-saving state of the normal symbol after the jackpot), CN7 and CN9 are set to the L output state, and CN8 is set to the H output state. This H output state of CN8 is maintained until the jackpot state is entered or the game state is entered in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. In other words, if the game state after the jackpot ends is the first probability variable state, the H output state is maintained until the jackpot is won during the first probability variable state and the jackpot game is started, or until the number of probability variable times has passed in the first probability variable state and the game state is entered in the normal game state. Also, if the game state after the jackpot ends is the second time-saving state, the H output state is maintained until the jackpot is won during the second time-saving state and the jackpot game is started, or until the number of time-saving times has passed in the second time-saving state and the game state is entered in the normal game state. Due to the balance between the output state of CN8 and the output states of CN7 and CN9, the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 can accurately grasp the so-called consecutive win number. In other words, if CN8 goes into an L output state and CN7 and CN9 switch to an H output state at the same time, it can be determined that a winning streak has occurred during a game state in which the time-saving state for normal symbols is set, and 1 can be added to the number of winning streaks, whereas if CN7 and CN9 remain in the L output state, it can be determined that the winning streak has ended. Therefore, the game history of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately determined.

Furthermore, if the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached during normal play, CN8 is set to the H output state at the timing of transition to the third time-saving state, and CN9 is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds. In other words, by outputting an H output signal of a length (significantly shorter than the opening period of a jackpot) that cannot be output when transitioning from CN9 to the jackpot state, it is possible to make the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 understand that the current H output is not a signal output triggered by a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to make the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 understand that the transition to the time-saving state has occurred without a jackpot (the transition to the third time-saving state has occurred due to the ceiling number of lottery draws being reached).

Next, referring to FIG. 516, an example of a signal output mode when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 516 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when the power is turned on during the third time-saving state (the time-saving state transitioned to based on the ceiling lottery number being reached). As shown in FIG. 516, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, the security signal (CN11) is set to an H output state for 0.2 seconds to indicate the power-on. Also, when the game state when the power is turned on is the third time-saving state, the output of the jackpot 2 signal (CN8) for indicating that the time-saving state is in progress rises to H, and the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for indicating that the third time-saving state is in progress is set to an H output state for 0.2 seconds. These signal output modes allow the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 to be accurately notified that the game state when the power is turned on is the time-saving state (the third time-saving state) transitioned to based on the ceiling lottery number being reached. In other words, when the state when the power is turned on is a game state set to a time-saving state for normal symbols, it is possible to distinguish and notify whether the time-saving state set after the end of a big win game (either the first probability change state or the second time-saving state) is in place, or whether the time-saving state is in place based on the number of lottery draws reaching the ceiling (the third time-saving state). Therefore, the hall computer 263 can more accurately determine whether or not the game state may have been changed by fraudulent behavior while the power was cut off, which can help to prevent fraudulent behavior.

Next, referring to FIG. 517(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 517(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 517(a), the ROM 202 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 443(a)) in that the 1st win random number 13 table 202la is replaced by the 1st win random number 16 table 202pa, the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db is replaced by the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld is replaced by the jackpot type selection table 202pd, and the time-reduction random number 13 table 202le is replaced by the time-reduction random number 16 table 202pe. Another difference is that the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf has been deleted. The rest of the configuration is the same as the ROM 202 in the 13th control example described above, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 518(a), the details of the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 518(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 518(a), in the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in this 16th control example, in addition to the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a big win, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win is also specified. Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is specified in the range of "20 to 44" in common to the low probability state and high probability state of the special pattern, and the lottery result of the small win is associated with it. Of the 1000 possible counter values (random numbers) of "0-999" of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of counter values (random numbers) determined to be small winnings is 25, "20-44", so the probability of being determined to be a small winning in the lottery of the special symbol is 1/40. This small winning is a type of miss lottery result, and as described above, it is a lottery result in which a special big win special difficult opening and closing action (special opening and closing action) is set for the specific winning port 65a. By providing this special big win special difficult small winning lottery result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many times are left until the ceiling lottery number. In other words, when a specific opening/closing operation is performed (a small bonus is won), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether a special big win has occurred and the value of the special drawing counter 203la has been reset (the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws has been reset to 500) or whether a small win has occurred and the value of the special drawing counter 203la has been incremented by 1 (the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws has been decremented by 1), so that it is possible to add a game feature that allows the player to predict the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws. This can increase the player's interest in the game. The counter value (random number value) that is determined to be a big win is the same as in the thirteenth control example described above, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted here.

Next, referring to FIG. 518(b), the details of the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 518(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 518(b), the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in this 16th control example is composed of at least a normal 16 table 202pb1 for selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of a special symbol when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a normal state, and a probability variable/time-saving 16 table 202pb2 for selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of a special symbol when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in any of the first probability variable state, the second time-saving state, and the third time-saving state.

Referring to FIG. 518(c), the details of the normal 16 table 202pb1 will be described. FIG. 518(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal 16 table 202pb1. As shown in FIG. 518(c), various change patterns are specified in the normal 16 table 202pb1 in accordance with the change count and the lottery result of the special pattern, and the value range of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each of the change patterns. Specifically, when the change count (the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la) is 500 (i.e., when the ceiling lottery count is reached), regardless of the lottery result, a super reach change with a change time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) that the value of the change type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, when the ceiling lottery count is reached, a change time of 30 seconds is always set, so that the performance period for the performance to indicate whether the ceiling lottery count has been reached can be reliably secured.

In addition, for the number of fluctuations other than the ceiling number of draws, if the result of the special symbol draw is a jackpot, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 19" is associated with a normal (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "20 to 169" is associated with a super (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "170 to 198" is associated with a SP (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special win or a small win (i.e., a small bonus), the entire range (0 to 198) that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take is associated with a normal (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. For this reason, when a small bonus is won, the fluctuation time is always set to 15 seconds. This prevents a long fluctuation time (30 seconds or 55 seconds) from being set for a small bonus with a low degree of advantage, which can lead to expectations of a bonus or a transition to the first probability change state, and allows the winning of a small bonus to be announced relatively quickly, preventing players from having excessive expectations.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol (win/lose judgment result) is a miss (time-saving), that is, if the win/lose judgment result is a time-saving win, a Super (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 169", and a SP (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "170 to 198". Therefore, since a relatively long fluctuation time can be set when transitioning to the advantageous second time-saving state, it is possible to further increase the player's anticipation for a jackpot or transition to the time-saving state when a fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time is executed.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special pattern (win/lose determination result) is a miss, a short miss with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", a long miss with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189", a normal miss with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "190 to 196", a super miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "197", and a super miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "198". Therefore, if the lottery result is simply a miss, the selection rate for a short miss or long miss with a short fluctuation time will be extremely high, so if a fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time is executed, the expectation for a jackpot or a time-saving win can be increased.

Although not shown in the figures, the 16-table 202pb2 for special chance/time-saving is configured to have a higher selection rate for short misses and long misses when the lottery result for the special symbols is a miss than the 16-table 202pb1 for normal use. This makes it possible to shorten the average fluctuation time in the first special chance state, the second time-saving state, and the third time-saving state, thereby improving the gaming efficiency in the gaming state in which the advantageous time-saving state for normal symbols is set. This makes it possible to further increase the degree of advantage in the gaming state in which the time-saving state for normal symbols is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 519(a), the details of the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd described above will be explained. This jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd is a data table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, similar to the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld (see FIG. 445) in the 13th control example. As shown in FIG. 519(a), the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd in this 16th control example specifies three types of jackpot types for the first special symbol: jackpot A16, jackpot B16, and special jackpot. In addition, three types of jackpot types for the second special symbol: jackpot C16 to E16.

As shown in FIG. 519(a), as the content of the provision for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "0 to 79" and "jackpot A16" is set to correspond to the range of "0 to 79" for the first winning type counter C2. This "jackpot A16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first winning type with 80 winning times. That is, it is a jackpot type in which the counter value 80 is set for both the time-saving counter 203h and the winning type counter 203i at the end of the jackpot. In this 16th control example, since the first winning type is configured as the most advantageous game state, the jackpot A16 is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. In terms of the number of rounds, it is the jackpot type with the most rounds (advantageous in terms of the prize ball surface) among the jackpot types of the first special symbol, but it is the jackpot type with the fewest rounds (disadvantageous in terms of the prize ball surface) compared to each jackpot of the second special symbol. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot A16" is 80, or "0-79." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 80% (80/100).

As shown in FIG. 519(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "80 to 89" and "jackpot B16" is associated with it. This "jackpot B16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state with 100 time-saving times. In other words, it is a jackpot type in which the counter value 100 is set for the time-saving counter 203h at the end of the jackpot. In this 16th control example, the probability of a special pattern jackpot is lower in the second time-saving state than in the first probability variable state (the jackpot probability in the first probability variable state is 1/50, while the jackpot probability in the second time-saving state is 1/200), so even if the number of time-saving times is 20 times more, "jackpot B16" is a jackpot type that is less advantageous (less advantageous) than "jackpot A16" in terms of the game state after the jackpot is ended. In terms of the number of rounds, this jackpot type is the one with the most rounds (advantageous in terms of prize balls) among the jackpot types of the first special symbols, along with "jackpot A16", but compared to each jackpot of the second special symbols, this jackpot type has fewer rounds (disadvantageous in terms of prize balls). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot B16" is 10, from "80-89", so the probability that "jackpot B16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 519(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "90 to 99" and a "special jackpot" is associated with it. This "special jackpot" is a jackpot type in which a specific opening and closing action (opening and closing action that hardly gives any prize balls) common to the small winning game is set as the opening and closing action of the specific winning port 65a, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. For this reason, the "special jackpot" is configured as the jackpot type that is least advantageous to the player in terms of both the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot. In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a game state other than the normal state (a game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set), the game state after the special jackpot is set to the second time-saving state. This is intended to remedy the problem that may be excessively disadvantageous to the player if the game transitions to a game state in which the time-saving state for normal symbols is set when there is one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, and then transitions to the normal state when a special jackpot is obtained by drawing a lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special symbol. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with a "special jackpot" is 10 from "90 to 99", so the probability that a "special jackpot" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).

On the other hand, as a provision for the second special symbol, "jackpot C16" is defined to correspond to the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". This "jackpot C16" is a jackpot type with 10 rounds, and like "jackpot A16", the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first special state with 80 special states. This "jackpot C16" has the greatest number of rounds out of all jackpot types, and is also set to the most advantageous first special state after the jackpot ends, making it the most advantageous jackpot type of all jackpots. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot C16" is 50, or "0-49." Therefore, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 50% (50/100).

In addition, a "jackpot D16" is defined to correspond to the range of values of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79". This "jackpot D16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 6, and like "jackpot A16" and "jackpot C16", the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first special probability state with 80 special probability states. This "jackpot D16" has the second most rounds after "jackpot C16", and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous first special probability state, making it the second most advantageous jackpot type after "jackpot C16". Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot D16" is 30, or "50-79." Therefore, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot D16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 30% (30/100).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "80 to 99" and a "jackpot E16" is specified to correspond to this range. This "jackpot E16" has 6 rounds, and like "jackpot B16", the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state with 100 time-saving rounds. Like "jackpot D16", this "jackpot E16" is the jackpot type with the second highest number of rounds after "jackpot C16", but like "jackpot B16", it is a jackpot type with a relatively low degree of advantage in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 519(b), the above-mentioned time-saving random number 16 table 202pe will be described in detail. This time-saving random number 16 table 202pe is a data table in which the judgment value (random number value) that is judged as a time-saving win in the lottery of the special pattern is specified, similar to the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444(c)) in the above-mentioned 13th control example. As shown in FIG. 519(b), in this 16th control example, two random number values (counter values) of "998, 999" are correspondingly specified as the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is judged as a time-saving win in the lottery of the first special pattern. Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of "0-999" for the first winning random number counter C1, there are two random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be time-saving winnings, so the probability of determining that a time-saving winning has occurred when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the 16th control example is 1/500 (2/1000). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 519(b), a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a time-saving winning is not associated with the second special symbol, so the possibility of determining that a time-saving winning has occurred in the lottery for the second special symbol is 0.

Next, referring to FIG. 517(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 517(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 517(b), the RAM 203 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 443(b)) in that a ceiling time reduction flag 203pa and an out ball counter 203pb have been added. It also differs in that the first ceiling wait flag 203lb and the second ceiling wait flag 203lc have been deleted. The other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 13th control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is a flag for indicating whether the current game state is in a time-saving state (third time-saving state) that is set based on reaching the ceiling number of draws. If this ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on, it means that it is in the third time-saving state, and if it is off, it means that the current game state is not in the third time-saving state. This ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is initially set to off, and is set to on when the ceiling number of draws is reached and the third time-saving state is set (see S38116A in FIG. 526). In addition, it is set to off when a jackpot is won, and when the number of time-saving times (100 times) has passed during the third game state without winning a jackpot (see S8312A in FIG. 525). Depending on the state of this ceiling time-saving flag 203pa, it is easy to distinguish whether the game is in the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state. In the second time-saving state, a lottery for a normal symbol can be executed with a lottery probability corresponding to a high probability state of the normal symbol, while in the third time-saving state, a lottery for a normal symbol can be executed with a lottery probability corresponding to a low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, a lottery for an appropriate normal symbol can be executed for each game state.

The out ball counter 203pb is a counter for counting the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered the out hole 66. The initial value of this out ball counter 203pb is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time an out ball is detected (S142A in FIG. 529). In addition, when the value of the out ball counter 203pb is updated to 10 (10 out balls are detected), the value is cleared to 0 (S144A in FIG. 529). Every time the value of this out ball counter 203pb becomes 10, an out ball detection signal (CN6) can be output from the external output terminal board 261, so that a predetermined device connected to the pachinko machine 10, such as the hall computer 263, can accurately grasp the number of out balls in the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 520(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 520(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 520(a), the ROM 222 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 447(a)) in that a hold mode selection table 222pa and a time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb have been added. It also differs in that the ceiling reach suggestion effect selection table 222la and the ceiling reach effect selection table 222lb have been deleted.

First, referring to FIG. 521, the details of the reserved ball number selection table 222pa will be described. This reserved ball number selection table 222pa is a data table that is referenced when a new start winning is detected to select the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern showing the reserved balls increased by the start winning according to the pre-reading results of various counter values acquired based on the start winning. FIG. 521 is a diagram showing the contents of the reserved ball number selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 521, the reserved ball number selection table 222pa specifies the range of the judgment value (value of the performance counter 223f) that is determined to select each of the six types of display modes (see FIG. 510(a)) that can be set as the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern for each pre-reading result (variation type) based on various counter values (random number value) acquired based on the new start winning.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "SP Reach Hit" are as follows: when the value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 4", the display mode of "Normal Hold" (default display mode) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", the display mode of "Change 1" (a display mode suggesting that both the expectation of a jackpot and the expectation of time-saving are low) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", and the display mode of "Change 2" (a display mode suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is medium and the expectation of time-saving is low) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "20 to 44". A display mode of "change 3" (a display mode suggesting a high expectation of a big win and a low expectation of a time-saving state) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "45 to 84", a display mode of "change 4" (a display mode suggesting a low expectation of a big win and a high expectation of a time-saving state) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "85 to 89", and a display mode of "change 5" (a display mode in which either a big win or a transition to a time-saving state is determined) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "90 to 99". Since the performance counter 223f can take 100 values from "0 to 99", the ratio of each display mode being set when the pre-read result is "SP reach hit" is 5% for "normal hold", 15% for "change 1", 25% for "change 2", 40% for "change 3", 5% for "change 4", and 10% for "change 5". In other words, when a start winning corresponding to an "SP Reach Hit" is detected, the probability that "Change 2" or "Change 3" will be selected will be relatively high, while the probability that "Normal Hold" or "Change 4" will be selected will be relatively low.

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "Super Reach Hit" are such that the display mode of "Normal Hold" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 9", the display mode of "Change 1" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "10 to 29", the display mode of "Change 2" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "30 to 59", the display mode of "Change 3" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "60 to 89", the display mode of "Change 4" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "90 to 93", and the display mode of "Change 5" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "94 to 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is a "Super Reach Hit", the percentage of each display mode that is set is 10% for "Normal Hold", 20% for "Change 1", 30% for "Change 2", 30% for "Change 3", 4% for "Change 4", and 6% for "Change 5". In other words, when a start winning corresponding to a "Super Reach Hit" is detected, the percentage of "Change 1", "Change 2", and "Change 3" that are selected is relatively high, while the percentage of "Change 4" that is selected is relatively low. Also, the percentage of "Normal Hold" and "Change 1" that are selected is higher than for an "SP Reach Hit".

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, as the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "normal reach hit", the display mode of "normal hold" is prescribed in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 19", the display mode of "change 1" is prescribed in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f of "20 to 44", the display mode of "change 2" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "45 to 79", the display mode of "change 3" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "80 to 96", the display mode of "change 4" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "97", and the display mode of "change 5" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "98, 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is a "normal reach hit," the percentages at which each display mode is set are "normal hold" 20%, "change 1" 25%, "change 2" 35%, "change 3" 17%, "change 4" 1%, and "change 5" 2%. In other words, when a start winning corresponding to a "normal reach hit" is detected, the selection percentages of "normal hold," "change 1," and "change 2" are higher, and the selection percentages of "change 3," "change 4," and "change 5" are lower, compared to "SP reach hit" and "super reach hit."

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) "SP reach time reduction" are such that the display mode of "normal hold" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 4", the display mode of "change 1" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "5 to 19", the display mode of "change 2" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "20 to 44", the display mode of "change 3" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "45 to 64", the display mode of "change 4" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "65 to 89", and the display mode of "change 5" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "90 to 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is "SP Reach Time-saving", the rate at which each display mode is set is "Normal Hold" 5%, "Change 1" 15%, "Change 2" 25%, "Change 3" 20%, "Change 4" 25%, and "Change 5" 10%. In other words, when a start winning corresponding to "SP Reach Time-saving" is detected, the selection rate for "Change 4" is significantly higher than when a start winning corresponding to a winning fluctuation is detected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) "Super Reach Time Reduction" are such that the display mode of "Normal Hold" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 9", the display mode of "Change 1" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "10 to 29", the display mode of "Change 2" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "30 to 64", the display mode of "Change 3" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "65 to 79", the display mode of "Change 4" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "80 to 93", and the display mode of "Change 5" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "94 to 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is "Super Reach Time-saving", the rate at which each display mode is set is 10% for "Normal Hold", 20% for "Change 1", 35% for "Change 2", 15% for "Change 3", 14% for "Change 4", and 6% for "Change 5". In other words, even when a start winning corresponding to a "Super Reach Time-saving" is detected, the selection rate for "Change 4" is higher than when a start winning corresponding to a winning fluctuation is detected.

As shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "SP reach miss" are as follows: the display mode of "normal hold" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0-9", the display mode of "change 1" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "10-39", the display mode of "change 2" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "40-79", the display mode of "change 3" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "80-98", and the display mode of "change 4" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f of "99". On the other hand, the value of the performance counter 223f is not associated with the display mode of "change 5". Therefore, when the pre-read result is "SP Reach Miss", the rate at which each display mode is set is 10% for "Normal Reserve", 30% for "Change 1", 40% for "Change 2", 19% for "Change 3", 1% for "Change 4", and 0% for "Change 5". In other words, when a start winning corresponding to "SP Reach Miss" is detected, the selection rate of "Change 3" is lower and the selection rate of "Normal Reserve" and "Change 1" is higher than when a start winning corresponding to SP Reach Hit or SP Reach Time Short is detected. Also, "Change 5" is not selected. Therefore, when it develops to SP Reach, if the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern is "Normal Reserve" or "Change 1", the expectation of a hit is relatively low, while the expectation of a hit is relatively high if it is "Change 3". Also, if it is "Change 5", either a big win or a time short pattern is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 521, the display mode of "normal hold" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0-19", the display mode of "change 1" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "20-74", the display mode of "change 2" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "75-98", and the display mode of "change 3" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f of "99". On the other hand, the value of the performance counter 223f is not specified in association with the display modes of "change 4" and "change 5". Therefore, the percentage of times each display mode is set when the result of the pre-reading is "super reach miss" is 20% for "normal hold", 55% for "change 1", 24% for "change 2", 1% for "change 3", and 0% for "change 4" and "change 5". In other words, if a start winning corresponding to a "Super Reach Miss" is detected, the selection rate for "Change 3" will be lower and the selection rate for "Normal Hold" or "Change 1" will be higher than when a start winning corresponding to a Super Reach Hit or Super Reach Time Saving is detected. Also, "Change 4" and "Change 5" will not be selected. Therefore, if it progresses to a Super Reach, if the display mode of the reserved ball count pattern is "Normal Hold" or "Change 1," the expectation of a hit will be relatively low, while if it is "Change 3," the expectation of a hit will be relatively high. Also, if it is "Change 5," either a jackpot or a time saving pattern is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation types (pre-read results) of "normal reach miss" and "normal reach small win" are as follows: the display mode of "normal hold" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0-49", the display mode of "change 1" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "50-94", and the display mode of "change 2" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "95-99". On the other hand, the values of the performance counter 223f are not associated with the display modes of "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5". Therefore, the proportions at which each display mode is set when the pre-read results are "normal reach miss" and "normal reach small win" are 50% for "normal hold", 45% for "change 1", 5% for "change 2", and 0% for "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5". In other words, if a start winning corresponding to a "normal reach miss" or "normal reach small win" is detected, the selection rate for "normal hold" or "change 1" will be higher than if a start winning corresponding to a super reach win or super reach time reduction is detected. Also, "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5" will not be selected. Therefore, if the small bonus is announced as a result of changing from "change 3" to "change 5", it is confirmed that the small bonus was a special big win.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 521, as the prescribed contents for the "Super Reach Miss" when the variation type (pre-read result) is the ceiling number of lottery draws reached, the display mode of "Normal Hold" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 39", the display mode of "Change 1" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "40 to 49", the display mode of "Change 2" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "50 to 53", the display mode of "Change 3" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "54", the display mode of "Change 4" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "55 to 84", and the display mode of "Change 5" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "85 to 99". If the result of the special symbol lottery at the ceiling lottery number is a miss (a transition to the third time-saving state) the selection rates of "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5" are significantly higher than if the result is a win (a transition to the third time-saving state) (i.e., if a start winning corresponding to the variable type of the super reach hit is detected). Therefore, players who expect a transition to the third time-saving state can expect that the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery at the ceiling lottery number will be one of "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5".

In this way, in this 16th control example, the display mode of the reserved ball count symbol is determined according to the results of the pre-read based on the start winning, making it possible to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot or time-saving expectation, so that the player can play while paying attention to the display mode of the reserved ball count symbol. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 522. This time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb is a data table that specifies the execution rate of suggestion effects (see FIG. 439 (a) and (b)) that suggest a transition to a time-saving state for each of various conditions. As shown in FIG. 522, when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is 496 to 500, the suggestion mode of "time-saving suggestion (strong)" is associated with the range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 59", regardless of the winning status of the small bonus, and the suggestion mode of "time-saving suggestion (weak)" is associated with the range of the effect counter 223f of "60 to 89". On the other hand, no suggestion mode is associated with the range of the effect counter 223f of "90 to 99". Therefore, in each variable display effect from four draws before the ceiling draw number is reached to the ceiling draw number, there is a 60% chance that a "time-saving suggestion (strong)" (see FIG. 429(b)) will occur, and a 30% chance that a "time-saving suggestion (weak)" (see FIG. 429(a)) will occur.

In addition, when the value of the special symbol drawing count counter 223lc is a value other than 496 to 500 (a situation in which the number of fluctuations until the ceiling number of drawing counts is reached is 5 or more), the selection ratio of the suggestive mode varies depending on the number of drawings after the previous bonus and the number of drawings after the end of the small bonus whose execution timing was the oldest among the most recent 500 special symbol drawings. Specifically, when either the number of drawings after the previous bonus or the number of drawings after the end of the small bonus whose execution timing was the oldest among the most recent 500 special symbol drawings is within the range of 496 to 500 (i.e., a situation in which the number of fluctuations until the ceiling number of drawing counts is reached from the player's perspective is likely to be 4 or less), the suggestive mode of "time-saving suggestion (weak)" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f of "0 to 4" for the special symbol drawing result "probable win" or "time-saving win", and no suggestive mode is associated with "5 to 99". In other words, if you win the bonus, there is a 5% chance that a "Time-saving hint (weak)" will occur.

For the special symbol lottery result "time-saving win", the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "0-49" as "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "50-74" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "75-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a time-saving win, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 50% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 25% of the time. In addition, for the other lottery results (small bonus or loss), the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "5-49" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "50-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a small bonus or loss, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 5% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 45% of the time.

In contrast, if neither the number of draws after the previous bonus nor the number of draws after the end of the small bonus that was the oldest of the most recent 500 draws of special symbols is within the range of 496 to 500 (i.e., in a situation where the number of fluctuations until the ceiling number of draws is reached is unlikely to be within 4 from the player's perspective), then for the special symbol draw result of "certain bonus hit" or "time-saving hit", the suggestion mode of "time-saving suggestion (weak)" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f of "0 to 4", and no suggestion mode is associated with "5 to 99". In other words, when a bonus is won, there is a 5% chance that a "time-saving suggestion (weak)" will occur.

For the special symbol lottery result "time-saving win", the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "0-24" as "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "25-49" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "50-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a time-saving win, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 25% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 25% of the time. In addition, for the other lottery results (small bonus or loss), the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "1-4" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "5-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a small bonus or loss, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 1% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 4% of the time.

In this way, in this 16th control example, even if the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is 5 or more, the selection rate of the suggestive mode during misses and small bonuses is significantly different between a situation where, from the player's perspective, there is a possibility that the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is 4 or less and a situation where there is no possibility of 4 or less. In other words, the system is configured so that the suggestive mode is more likely to occur in a situation where, from the player's perspective, there is a possibility that the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is 4 or less. By configuring it in this way, even if there are actually 5 or more draws until the ceiling number of draws, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for reaching the ceiling number of draws, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 520(b), the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 520(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 520(b), the RAM 223 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 447(b)) in that a bonus interval counter 223pa, a bonus history storage area 223pb, a look-ahead suppression flag 223pc, a normal map fluctuation time timer 223pd, and a linked performance flag 223pe have been added.

The bonus interval counter 223pa is a counter that counts the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the bonus (any big win or small win) has ended. The bonus interval counter 223pa is updated by adding 1 to its value each time the main control device 110 notifies the player of the special symbol drawing counter 203la (see S9015A in FIG. 537), and is cleared to 0 when a big win or small win is won (see S4724A in FIG. 539 and S4753A in FIG. 540). The displayed number of draws between bonuses in the normal state is updated in synchronization with the bonus interval counter 223pa. This makes it difficult to know the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws, and adds a game feature of predicting the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

The bonus history storage area 223pb is a memory area for storing information indicating the winning history of bonuses (normal bonuses and small bonuses) within the range of the most recent 500 special symbol lotteries. This bonus history storage area 223pb stores information on the winning bonus each time a big win or small win (bonus) is won (see S4726A, S4727A in FIG. 539 and S4754A in FIG. 540). In addition, each time the main control device 110 is notified by command that the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la has been updated, the data is updated according to the updated counter value (see S9015A in FIG. 537). In the normal state, the number of draws after the end of the normal bonus or small bonus can be determined from the data in this bonus history storage area 223pb, and when the number of draws that may be close to the ceiling number of draws from the player's perspective (close to 500 draws after the normal bonus and close to 500 draws after the small bonus in a situation where a special jackpot has been won at least once after the normal bonus), a presentation can be executed that suggests the possibility of the ceiling number of draws being close. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

The look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is a flag that indicates whether or not to suppress the execution of look-ahead effects such as reserve change effects when the start winning of the first special pattern is detected. If this look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on, it means that the state is such that look-ahead effects should be prohibited, and if it is off, it means that the state is such that look-ahead effects are permitted. This look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set on when it is determined that the ceiling number of lottery draws has been reached (the transition to the third time-saving state has been confirmed) by look-ahead (see S4428A in FIG. 538), and is set off when a jackpot is won and when the third time-saving state ends (see S9013A in FIG. 537). By prohibiting the pre-reading performance of the first special symbol when the transition to the third time-saving state is confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to obtain information on whether it is better to refrain from hitting to the right after the transition to the third time-saving state and instead have the lottery for the first special symbol be executed, or to refrain from executing the lottery for the first special symbol and start the lottery for the second special symbol, thereby preventing a large difference in the degree of advantage that arises depending on the playing method between a knowledgeable player and a knowledgeable player.

The normal pattern change time timer 223pd is a timer for counting the change time in the normal pattern change display executed in the main control unit 110. When a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the normal pattern change pattern determined according to the lottery result is notified by the normal pattern change pattern command, this normal pattern change time timer 223pd is set to a timer value indicating the change time corresponding to the notified normal pattern change pattern (see S4252A in FIG. 541). During the execution of the change display of the ceiling lottery count (500 times), it is determined whether or not to change (rewrite) the performance mode of the change display performance being executed according to the remaining change time indicated by the timer value of this normal pattern change time timer 223pd. That is, the value of the normal symbol fluctuation time timer 223pd is referenced at a specific timing during the fluctuation (for example, 5 seconds before the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed), and if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation display will continue for a relatively long period of time (for example, 5 seconds or more) after the special symbol fluctuation has ended, the timing of notifying the transition to the third time-saving state is delayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right during the normal symbol fluctuation display when the normal electric role 640a cannot be opened, and thus wasting game balls.

The linked performance flag 223pe is a flag that indicates whether or not a data display device linked performance is set. If this linked performance flag 223pe is on, it means that a data display device linked performance (jackpot notification, time-saving activation performance) is set, and if it is off, it indicates that a data display device linked performance is not set. Each time a variable pattern command is received from the main control device 110 and the variable display mode is determined in accordance with the variable display mode, the state of this linked performance flag 223pe is updated in accordance with the determined variable display mode (see S34520A in FIG. 542). In other words, if a data display device linked variable display mode is determined, the flag is set to on, and if not, the flag is set to off.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 16th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this 16th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 523 to 533. Specifically, this 16th control example differs from the 13th control example (first control example) in that the contents of the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 523) and the start-up process (see Fig. 532) have been changed. The other configurations are the same as those in the 13th control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 523, the timer interruption process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 523 is a flow chart showing the contents of this timer interruption process. The timer interruption process in the 16th control example (see FIG. 523) differs from the timer interruption process in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) (see FIG. 156) in that the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 451) is changed to the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 524), and that the outer end output setting process (S112A) is executed after the through gate passing process (S107) is completed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 528 to FIG. 531, but the outer end output setting process (S112A) is a process for controlling the output of a signal to be output from the external output terminal board 261 to a predetermined device (such as the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10. The other processing is the same as the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example), so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 524, we will explain the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 523) in this 16th control example. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 16 (S111A). In the special symbol variation process 16, each of the processes S201 to S207, S210 to S218, S220, and S30219 is the same as each of the processes S201 to S207, S210 to S218, S220, and S30219 in the special symbol variation process 13 in the 13th control example (see FIG. 450).

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation process 16 (S111A) in this 16th control example, when the process of S207 or S213 is completed, instead of the special symbol determination logic 13 (see S30251 in FIG. 450) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 13 (see S30252 in FIG. 450) in the 13th control example, the special symbol determination process 16 (S231A) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 16 (S232A) are executed. Although not shown in the figure, the special symbol determination process 16 (S231A) in this 16th control example differs from the special symbol determination process 13 (see FIG. 451) in the above-mentioned 13th control example only in that the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) has been deleted. In this 16th control example, the ceiling determination process 16 corresponding to the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) in the 13th control example is configured to be executed in the update process 16 (S233A) described later. In addition, although not shown, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S232A) in this 16th control example is different from the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454) in the 13th control example described above in that various data tables referred to in the process are replaced with data tables for this 16th control example. In other words, it is different in that the big win type selection 13 table 202ld is replaced by the big win type selection 16 table 202pd, and the variation pattern selection 13 table 202lb is replaced by the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb. Another difference is that in this 16th control example, there is only one type of time-saving type (a time-saving symbol that reduces the time by 100 times), and therefore the processes of S8209 and S38253 have been deleted.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S217 that the current special symbol lottery result is not a jackpot (S217: No), instead of the update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 450) and the time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 450) in the 13th control example, the update process 16 (S233A) and the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A) are executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of this update process 16 (S233A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 525 and FIG. 526. Details of the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 527.

In addition, in the special symbol change process 16 (S111A) of this control example, after executing the process of S220, a symbol stop signal is set to be output from CN4 of the external output terminal board 261 for 1 second (the output of CN4 becomes H output for 1 second) (S235A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 525, we will explain the update process 16 (S233A), which is one process in the special pattern change process 16 (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 16th control example. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing the contents of this update process 16 (S233A).

In this update process 16 (S233A), in each of the processes S8301 to S8307, the same process as each of the processes S8301 to S8307 in the update process 5 (see FIG. 256) in the 13th control example (and the 5th control example) is executed. In addition, in the update process 16 (S233A) in this 16th control example, after executing the process of S8306, it is determined whether the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on (S8311A), and if it is determined that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on (S8311A: Yes), the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is set to off (S8312A), and then the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S8313A), and the process proceeds to S8307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8311A that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is not on (i.e., it is off) (S8311A: No), the processing of S8312A and S8313A is skipped and the processing proceeds directly to S8307.

In addition, in the update process 16 (see FIG. 525) in this 16th control example, after the process of S8307 is completed, the ceiling determination process 16 is executed (S8314A) and this process is terminated. This ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A), like the ceiling determination process 13 (see FIG. 452) in the above-mentioned 13th control example, is a process for updating the value of the special drawing counter 203la and setting the third time-saving state when the counter value (drawing count) corresponding to the ceiling drawing count is reached. This ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A) will be explained with reference to FIG. 526. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A).

Of this ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A), each of the processes S38101 to S38105 executes the same process as each of the processes S38101 to S38105 of the ceiling determination process 13 (see FIG. 452) in the 13th control example. In addition, in the ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S38104 that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38111A), data indicating the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38112A), information regarding the current time-saving lottery is cleared (S38113A), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-savings is set (S38114A), and the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38115A). After the process of S38115A, the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is turned on (S38116A), and the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S38117A), and this process is terminated.

In other words, in the 13th control example described above, it was configured to determine whether the ceiling number of draws had been reached when the fluctuation started, and if the ceiling number of draws had been reached, to execute a process to set the third time-saving state when the fluctuation stopped, but in this 16th control example, it is configured to execute the ceiling determination process 16 (see FIG. 526) when the fluctuation stopped, to determine whether the ceiling number of draws had been reached, and to set the third time-saving state all at once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the control process.

Next, referring to FIG. 527, we will explain the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A), which is one process of the special pattern variation process 16 (FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 16th control example. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving setting process 16 (S234A).

In this time-saving setting process 16 (S234A), in each of the processes of S8351 to S8354, the same process as each of the processes of S8351 to S8354 in the time-saving setting process 13 in the thirteenth control example (see FIG. 455) is executed. In addition, in the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A) in this sixteenth control example, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 100 or not (S8361A). In the process of S8361A, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 100 (S8361A: Yes), it means that the third time-saving state was set based on the fact that the ceiling lottery count was reached in the ceiling determination process 16 (see FIG. 526) executed before this time-saving setting process 16 (see FIG. 527), so in order to avoid the time-saving state being set redundantly due to the time-saving winning, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8361A that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 100 (S8361A: No), the processing proceeds to S8351.

Next, referring to FIG. 528(a), the outer end output setting process (S112A), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 523) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 16th control example, will be described. FIG. 528(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this outer end output setting process (S112A). In this outer end output setting process (S112A), first, it is determined whether various abnormalities have occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and if an abnormality has occurred, an error signal process is executed (S121A) for outputting a signal indicating an abnormality (error) from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside, and then, an out ball detection signal process is executed (S122A) for monitoring the number of detected out balls and outputting an out ball detection signal from the external output terminal board 261 for each specific number. When the out ball detection signal processing (S122A) is completed, the start winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is monitored, and if a start winning is detected, a start entrance signal is executed (S123A) to output a start entrance signal from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside, and then the open/closed state of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is monitored, and an open signal processing is executed to output a signal indicating the open/closed state from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside (S124A), and this processing ends. A detailed explanation of each processing will be described later with reference to Figure 528 (b) and Figures 529 to 531.

Next, referring to FIG. 528(b), the error signal processing (S121A), which is one process of the outer end output setting process (see FIG. 528), will be described. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing the error signal processing (S121A). In this error signal processing (S121A), first, it is determined whether various errors (magnetic anomaly, radio wave anomaly, switch anomaly, abnormal winning, etc.) have been detected (S131A). If various errors have been detected (S131A: Yes), then the output of a security signal (CN11) is started (S132A) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if various errors have not been detected in the process of S131A (S131A: No), this process is terminated as it is. If various errors have been detected, the security signal continues to be output without a time limit, so that the hall computer 263 can continue to notify the occurrence of an error. Therefore, the occurrence of various errors can be reliably recognized by the hall staff, and various errors can be quickly eliminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 529, we will explain the out ball detection signal processing (S122A), which is one process of the outer end output setting process (see FIG. 528). FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the out ball detection signal processing (S122A). This out ball detection signal processing (S122A) is a process for monitoring the number of detected out balls and setting the output of the out ball detection signal (CN2) each time a specific number of out balls are detected.

In this out ball detection signal processing (S122A), first, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out hole 66 (S141A), and if it is determined that there is an out ball (S141A: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the out ball counter 203pb (S142A). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the out ball counter 203pb after the increment is 10 (S143A), and if it is determined that it is 10 (S143A: Yes), the value of the out ball counter 203pb is set to 0 to initialize the out ball counter 203pb (S144A), and it is determined whether or not the out ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A).

In the process of S145A, if it is determined that the out ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A: Yes), the H output period of the currently output out ball detection signal (CN6) ends, and a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has elapsed, and then processing is performed to set the output of the out ball detection signal corresponding to the 10th out ball detected this time. Specifically, the remaining period until the out ball detection signal (CN6) currently set to the H output state becomes the L output state is obtained (S147A). Then, based on the obtained remaining period, a delay time is set for the out ball detection signal to be output corresponding to the 10th out ball detected this time (S148A), and this process is terminated. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the out ball detection signal (CN6) in the H output becomes the L output state is 0.1 seconds, the delay time until the next time the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state is set to 0.3 seconds (the remaining period of the H output state of 0.1 seconds + the L output period of 0.2 seconds). In this way, by setting the L period to 0.2 seconds, even if out balls are detected continuously within a short period of time, a specified device (such as the hall computer 263) can accurately determine the number of times the out ball detection signal (CN2) is set to the H output state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S145A that the out ball detection signal (CN6) is not in the H output state (i.e., in the L output state) (S145A: No), the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds (S146A), and this process is terminated. Note that even if the out ball detection signal (CN6) is in the L output state (S145A: No), if it is within 0.2 seconds since it was set to the L output state, the L output state is continued for 0.2 seconds and then set to the H output state. In this way, by ensuring an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if out balls are detected continuously in a short period of time, a predetermined device electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10, such as the hall computer 263, can accurately grasp the number of times the out ball detection signal (CN6) has been set to the H output state.

If an out ball is not detected in the process of S141A (S141A: No), and if the value of the out ball counter 203pb is less than 10 in the process of S143A (S143A: No), the process proceeds to S149A. In this process of S149A, it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that is delaying the setting of the H output state (S149A).

If it is determined that there is no detection result that is delaying the H output setting (S149A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that is delaying the H output setting (S149A: Yes), it is determined whether the set delay period has elapsed (S150A), and if it is determined that the delay period has not elapsed (S150A: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S150A that the delay period has elapsed (S150A: Yes), the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state (S151A), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 530, the start port signal processing (S123A), which is one process of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)), will be described. FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing the start port signal processing (S123A). This start port signal processing (S123A) is a process for monitoring start winnings at each start port (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640) and setting the output of the start port signal (CN5) each time a start winning is detected.

In this start port signal processing (S123A), first, it is determined whether or not a winning entry (start winning entry) into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been detected (S161A). Specifically, the detection information of various switches saved in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 523) is read, and it is determined whether or not detection information indicating a winning entry into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been stored.

In the process of S161A, if it is determined that a winning entry into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been detected (S161A: Yes), then it is determined whether the state of the start port signal (CN5) is in the H output state (S162A). If it is determined that the state is in the H output state (S162A: Yes), the H output period of the currently output start port signal (CN5) ends, and after a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has elapsed, a process is performed to set the output of the start port signal corresponding to the start winning detected this time. Specifically, the remaining period until the start port signal (CN5) currently set to the H output state becomes the L output state is obtained (S164A). Then, based on the obtained remaining period, a delay time is set for the start port signal to be output in response to the start winning detected this time (S165A), and this process is terminated. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the start port signal (CN5) becomes an L output state during an H output is 0.1 seconds, the delay time until the start port signal (CN5) is next set to an H output state is set to 0.3 seconds (0.1 seconds remaining period of the H output state + 0.2 seconds L output period). In this way, by setting the L period to 0.2 seconds, even if start winning is detected consecutively within a short period of time, a predetermined device electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10, such as the hall computer 263, can accurately grasp the number of times the start port signal (CN5) has been set to an H output state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S162A that the start port signal (CN5) is not in the H output state (i.e., in the L output state) (S162A: No), the start port signal (CN5) is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds (S163A), and this process is terminated. Note that even if the start port signal (CN5) is in the L output state (S162A: No), if it has been within 0.2 seconds since it was set to the L output state, the L output state is continued for 0.2 seconds and then the H output state is set. In this way, by ensuring an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, the external device can accurately grasp the number of times the start port signal (CN5) has been set to the H output state, even if start winnings are detected consecutively in a short period of time.

In the process of S161A, if a start winning is not detected (S161A: No), it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S166A). Then, if it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has elapsed (S167A), and if it is determined that the delay period has not elapsed (S167A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S167A, if it is determined that the delay period has elapsed (S167A: Yes), the start port signal (CN5) is set to the H output state (S168A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 531, the open signal processing (S124A), which is one process of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)), will be described. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the open signal processing (S124A). As described above, this open signal processing (S124A) is a process for setting the output of the inner frame open signal (CN2), which indicates the open/closed state of the inner frame 12 and front frame 14, and the door open signal (CN3).

In this open signal process (S124A), first, it is determined whether the inner frame 12 is open (S171A), and if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open (S171A: Yes), the inner frame open signal (CN2) is set to the H output state (S172A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is open in the process of S171A (S171A: No), it is next determined whether it is detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A), and if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: Yes), the inner frame open signal (CN2), which is set to the H output state, is set to the L output state (S174A), and this process ends.

In the process of S173A, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: No), it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is open (S175A). If it is determined that the front frame 14 is open as a result of the process of S175A (S175A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3) is set to the H output state (S176A) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the front frame 14 is open (S175A: No), it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A), and if it is determined that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3) that is set to the H output state is set to the L output state (S178A) and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S177A, if it is not detected that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 16th control example, the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)) is executed every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 523), and information according to the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to a specified device such as a hall computer 263. Based on the information output from the external output terminal board 261, the specified device such as the hall computer 263 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 in real time. This makes it possible to accurately manage the ball payout rate and operating status of each pachinko machine 10, as well as the presence or absence of abnormalities or fraudulent activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 532, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the contents of this start-up process.

Of this startup process, the processes S1701 to S1714, S31701, and S31702 are the same as the processes S1701 to S1714, S31701, and S31702 in the startup process in the thirteenth control example (see FIG. 457). In addition, in the startup process of this control example, after the process of S1709 is executed, a startup signal output process is executed (S1721A) to output various data indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on (startup) from the external output terminal board 261 to a specified device, and the process moves to S31701. Details of this startup signal output process (S1721A) will be described with reference to FIG. 533. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the startup signal output process (S1721A).

In this startup signal output process (S1721A), first, the security signal (CN11) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S1731A), and then it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is on or not (S1732A). If it is determined in the process of S1732A that the jackpot flag 203k is on (S1732A: Yes), this means that a jackpot game is currently being played, so the output of the jackpot 1 signal (CN7) and the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is started to notify a specified device that a jackpot game is currently being played (S1733A), and the process proceeds to S1734A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1732A that the jackpot flag 203k is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1732A: No), this means that the jackpot game is not being played (normal game is being played), so the processing of S1733A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1734A.

In the process of S1734A, it is determined whether the value of the probability counter 203i is 1 or more (S1734A), and if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S1734A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203i is not 1 or more (i.e., 0) in the process of S1734A (S1734A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S1735A), and if it is determined that it is not 1 or more (i.e., 0) (S1735A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more in the process of S1735A (S1735A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. In the process of S1736A, which is executed when it is determined that the value of either the probability variation counter 203i or the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more (i.e., the game state is set to the time-saving state of the normal pattern), the output of the big win 2 signal (CN8) is started (S1736A). When the process of S1736A is completed, it is next determined whether the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on or not (S1737A), and if it is determined that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on (i.e., the current state is the third time-saving state set based on the ceiling lottery number reaching) (S1737A: Yes), it is set to output the big win 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S1738A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1737A, if it is determined that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1737A: No), the process of S1738A is skipped and this process is terminated. By configuring the S1738A process to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds only when the third time-saving state is reached, it is possible to easily allow a specified device to determine whether the game state when the power is turned on (started up) is the normal pattern time-saving state set after the jackpot ends, or the normal pattern time-saving state set based on the ceiling number of draws being reached.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 534 to Fig. 542, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described. In this 16th control example, the main process has been changed, and the normal mode performance setting process 16, which is one process of the performance setting process 13 (see Fig. 462), has been changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Note that, for the parts where detailed descriptions of the same elements as those in the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are omitted, the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are applied. In addition, the technical ideas described in each control example and each control example are naturally applied to this 16th control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each control example and each control example are naturally applied to this 16th control example.

First, referring to FIG. 534, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing. The main processing in this 16th control example (see FIG. 534) differs from the main processing (see FIG. 174) in the 13th control example (and the first control example) only in that the performance update processing 16 (S4121A) is executed instead of the performance update processing (see FIG. 174), and that the command judgment processing 16 (S4122A) is executed instead of the command judgment processing (see FIG. 174). The other processing is the same as in the 13th control example (and the first control example), so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 535, the effect update process 16 (S4121A), which is one process in the main process, will be described. FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing this effect update process 16 (S4121A). In this effect update process 16 (S4121A), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display effect of the special pattern is being executed (S4151A), and if it is determined that the variable display effect is not being executed (S4151A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display effect is being executed (S4151A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is 500 (S4152A), and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is not 500 (S4152A: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special pattern notified in the currently executed variable display effect is a time-saving pattern (S4153A). In the process of S4153A, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a time-saving symbol (S4153A: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4153, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display effect being executed is a time-saving pattern (S4153A: Yes), and in the process of S4152A, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern lottery count counter 2231c is 500 (S4152A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special pattern is a lottery result corresponding to a jackpot (S4154A). In the process of S4154A, if it is determined that the lottery result is a lottery result corresponding to a jackpot (S4154A: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4154A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a lottery result corresponding to a jackpot (S4154A: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining variable time of the variable display effect being executed is 5 seconds (S4155A), and if it is determined that the remaining variable time of the special pattern is not 5 seconds (S4155A: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In contrast, in the processing of S4155A, if it is determined that the remaining change time of the ongoing change display performance is 5 seconds (S4155A: Yes), it determines whether the remaining change time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds or more by referring to the value of the normal pattern change time timer 223pd (S4156A), and if it is determined that the remaining change time of the normal pattern is not 10 seconds or more (S4156A: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4156A, if it is determined that the remaining change time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds or more (S4156A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the currently executed change display performance is a change display mode with a display device linked performance (S4157A), and if it is determined that it is not a change display mode with a display device linked performance (S4157A: No), the change display mode is rewritten to a display device linked time-saving activation performance (S4158A), the performance period of the time-saving activation teasing performance is set to the remaining change time of the normal pattern (S4159A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4157A, if it is determined that the currently executed change display performance is a change display mode with a display device linked performance (S4157A: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, in this 16th control example, if it is determined 5 seconds before the end of the fluctuation that the normal pattern will continue to fluctuate for a relatively long period of time, 5 seconds or more, after the transition to the time-saving state (a relatively long period in which the game ball cannot be placed into the second ball entrance 640 even by hitting with the right), the timing of the notification of the transition to the time-saving state is delayed. In other words, the time-saving activation effect is executed only after the player is in a state in which the benefit of the time-saving state can actually be obtained (after it becomes possible to place the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting with the right). This makes it possible to prevent the player from making unnecessary right hits while the normal pattern is fluctuating.

Next, referring to FIG. 536, we will explain command determination process 16 (S4122A), which is one process of the main process. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 16 (S4122A). In this command determination process 16 (S4122A), S4201, S4203 to S4211, S4213, S4214, S4217, and S4219, the same processes as S4201, S4203 to S4211, S4213, S4214, S4217, and S4219 of command determination process 13 in the 13th control example (see FIG. 458) are executed. Furthermore, in the command determination process 16 (S4122A) of this control example, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), status command reception process 16 is executed (S4221A) instead of status command reception process 13 (see FIG. 459) in the 13th control example, and this process ends. Details of this status command reception process 16 (S4221A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 537.

In addition, in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process 16 is executed (S4222A) instead of the winning command process (see FIG. 177) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4217 that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217: Yes), the jackpot-related process 16 is executed (S4223A) instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 180) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) described above, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4217 that a command related to a jackpot has not been received (S4217: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the lottery for normal symbols has been received (S4224A). If it is determined in the process of S4224A that a command related to the lottery for normal symbols has been received (S4224A: Yes), a normal symbol-related process is executed to execute control according to the type of the command related to the lottery for normal symbols (S4225A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4224A that a command related to the lottery for normal symbols has not been received (S4224A: No), the process proceeds to S4219. Details of the winning command process 16 (S4222A), the jackpot-related process 16 (S4223A), and the normal symbol-related process (S4225A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538, FIG. 539, and FIG. 541.

Next, referring to FIG. 537, we will explain the status command reception process 16 (S4221A), which is one process in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing this status command reception process 16 (S4221A).

In this status command reception process 16 (S4221A), the processes of S9001, S9002, S9092, and S9093 are the same as the processes of S9001, S9002, S9092, and S9093 of the status command reception process 13 (see FIG. 459) in the 13th control example described above. In addition, in the status command reception process 16 (S4221A) in this 16th control example, when the process of S9092 ends, it is then determined whether or not the received status command has notified the user of a change to the normal state (S9011A).

If it is determined in the processing of S9011A that a change to the normal state has been notified (S9011A: Yes), it is determined whether the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on (S9012A), and if it is determined that the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on (S9012A: Yes), the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set to off (S9013A) and the processing proceeds to S9093. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9011A that a change to the normal state has not been notified (S9011A: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S9012A that the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is not on (i.e., it is off) (S9012A: No), the processing proceeds to S9093.

In addition, in the state command reception process 16 (see FIG. 537) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S9093 that there is information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la (S9093: Yes), a value corresponding to the received value is set as the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc (S9014A), the data of the bonus interval counter 223pa and the bonus history storage area 223pb are updated (S9015A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9093 that information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la has not been notified (S9093: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 538, we will explain the winning command process 16 (S4222A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing this winning command process 16 (S4222A).

In the winning command processing 16 (S4222A), the processing of S4401 and S4413 is the same as the processing of S4401 and S4413 in the winning command processing (see FIG. 177) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example). In the winning command processing 16 (S4222A) in the 16th control example, after executing the processing of S4401, it is determined whether the winning information notified by the winning information command this time is winning information of the first special pattern (S4421A), and if it is determined that it is winning information of the first special pattern (S4421A: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is on (S4422A), and if it is determined that the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is on (S4422A: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the processing of S4421A determines that the information is not about a winning prize for Special Chart 1 (S4421A: No), and if the processing of S4422A determines that the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4422A: No), the processing proceeds to S4423A.

In the process of S4423A, the reserved ball count selection table 222pa (see FIG. 521) is read (S4423A), then the display mode of the reserved ball count pattern corresponding to the current winning information is identified according to the variation type indicated by the winning information of the lottery target (S4424A), the display of the reserved ball count pattern of the identified display mode is set (S4425A), and it is determined whether the sum of the value of the special pattern lottery count counter 223lc and the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is 500 or not (S4426A).

In the process of S4426A, if it is determined that the sum of the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c and the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is not 500 (S4426A: No), the process proceeds to S4413. On the other hand, in the process of S4426A, if it is determined that the sum of the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c and the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is 500 (S4426A: Yes), it is determined whether there is winning information corresponding to a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A), and if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: No), this means that the ceiling number of drawing times has been reached and the third time-saving state is set, so the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is set to ON (S4428A) and the process proceeds to S4413.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4427A that winning information corresponding to a jackpot is present in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: Yes), this means that a jackpot game will be played without setting the third time-saving state, so the processing of S4428A is skipped and the process moves to S4413.

By executing this winning command process 16 (see FIG. 538), the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc can be turned on at the point in time when a reserved ball corresponding to a losing result for which a lottery is executed at the ceiling lottery count is acquired, so that even if a reserved ball of the first special pattern is acquired thereafter, the look-ahead effect (reserved change effect) can be suppressed from being executed. This makes it possible to suppress irregular playing methods that adjust whether or not a lottery corresponding to a reserved ball of the first special pattern is executed during the third time-saving state depending on the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern that is consumed after the transition to the third time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 539, we will explain the jackpot-related process 16 (S4223A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related process 16 (S4223A).

Of this jackpot-related processing 16 (S4223A), the processes S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714 and S4715 execute the same processes as the processes S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714 and S4715 of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 180) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example). In addition, in the jackpot-related process 16 (S4223A) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the linked performance flag 223pe is on (S4721A), and if it is determined that the linked performance flag 223pe is not on (i.e., off) (S4721A: No), a display opening command indicating an opening performance according to the jackpot type is set (S4722A), and the process proceeds to S4724A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4721A that the linked performance flag 223pe is on (S4721A: Yes), a display opening command indicating a data display device linked jackpot notification performance is set (S4723A), and the process proceeds to S4724.

In the process of S4724A, which is executed after the process of S4722A or S4723A, the value of the bonus interval counter 223pa is reset (S4723A), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot that is about to start this time is a special jackpot (S4725A). If it is determined that it is a special jackpot (S4725A: Yes), the winning information of this special jackpot is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4726A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a special jackpot (S4725A: No), the winning information of the normal bonus is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4727A), and this process ends.

In addition, the processes of S4711 to S4713 in the big win-related process (see FIG. 180) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example) are deleted in this control example. In the process of S4714, if it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S4714: No), it is determined whether a small win-related command has been received (S4728A). If it is determined that a small win-related command has been received (S4728A: Yes), small win-related process is executed to perform control according to the type of various small win-related commands (S4729A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win-related command has not been received (S4728A: No), this process ends. Details of the small win-related process (S4729A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 540.

Next, referring to FIG. 540, we will explain the small win related process (S4729A), which is one process of the big win related process 16 (see FIG. 539). FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing this small win related process (S4729A).

In this small win related process (S4729A), first it is determined whether or not a small win start command has been received (S4751A). If it is determined that a small win start command has been received (S4751A: Yes), a display small win start command indicating the opening performance of the small win is set (S4752A), the value of the bonus interval counter 223pa is reset (S4753A), the winning information of this small win is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4754A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4751A that the small win start command has not been received (S4751A: No), it is then determined whether a small win ending command has been received (S4755A), and if it is determined that a small win ending command has not been received (S4755A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win ending command has been received (S4755A: Yes), a display small win ending command indicating the ending performance of the small win is set (S4756A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 541, we will explain the general map related process (S4225A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the general map related process (S4225A).

In this map-related process (S4225A), first, it is determined whether or not a map fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4251A). If it is determined that a map fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4251A: Yes), the fluctuation time corresponding to the notified map fluctuation pattern is set in the map fluctuation time timer 223pd (S4252A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4251A that a map fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4251A: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4253A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 542, we will explain the normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A) that is executed in place of the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see FIG. 463) in the 13th control example in the performance setting process 13 (see FIG. 462). FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing this normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A).

This normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A) is a process executed to determine the variable display mode in normal mode, similar to the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see FIG. 463) in the 13th control example. In this normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A) in the 16th control example, first, the time-saving suggestion performance selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), the performance mode of the suggestion performance corresponding to the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c and the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is determined (S34512A), and it is determined whether the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is 500 or not (S34513A). If it is determined that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and it is determined whether the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is 500 or not (S34515A). If it is determined that the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is 500 or not (S34516A), and if it is determined that the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the history of the oldest small bonus is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517A), and then a display mode is set to prompt not to hit the right (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34519A.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S34513A that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is 500 (S34513A: Yes), and if it is determined in the process of S34515A that the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is 500 (S34515A: Yes), the process proceeds to S34518A. Also, if it is determined in the process of S34516A that the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is not 500 (S34516A: No), the processes of S34517A and S34518A are skipped, and the process proceeds to S34519A.

After executing the process of S34518A, the presentation mode corresponding to the received variation pattern is determined (S34519A), the linked presentation flag 223pe is updated according to the determined presentation mode (S34520A), and this process ends. By executing this normal mode presentation setting process 16 (see FIG. 542), a presentation can be executed that notifies the player not to hit to the right in a variation display presentation where the ceiling number of draws may have been reached from the player's perspective, so that the player can play in the hope that the ceiling number of draws has been reached, even if the ceiling number of draws has not actually been reached. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding control process of data display device in 16th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 in this control example will be described with reference to Fig. 543 to 544. First, main processing executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 will be described with reference to Fig. 543. Fig. 543 is a flow chart showing this main processing. This main processing is a process for updating data (data corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10) displayed on the data display unit 276 based on various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 electrically connected to the data display device 262, and for executing control to vary the visual recognition mode according to the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101D). Next, a display device signal receiving process is executed (S102D). Next, a display update process is executed to update the display contents of the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 (S103D). Then, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an input operation on the input device 277, and if an input operation has been performed, an operation means input monitoring process is executed to execute a process corresponding to that operation (S104D).

Next, it is determined whether there is information about a power outage (S105D), and if there is information about a power outage (S105D: Yes), power outage processing is executed (S107D), and an infinite loop is continued thereafter until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

If it is determined in the process of S105D that no information about the occurrence of a power outage has been stored (S105D: No), then it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed since the end of the process of S101H or the start of the previous process of S102H (S106D), and if it is determined that 1 ms has not elapsed (S106D: No), the process returns to S106D. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S106D that 1 ms has elapsed (S106D: Yes), the process returns to S102D, and the processes of S102D to S104D are repeatedly executed.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 544, the display device signal reception process (S102D), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 543), will be explained. In this display device signal reception process (S102D), processing is performed according to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10.

In the display device signal reception process (S102D), first, it is determined whether or not an external output signal (various signals in the H output state) has been received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10 (S201D), and if an external output signal has not been received (S201D: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 543).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S201D that an external output signal has been received (S201D: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a power-on signal has been received as an external output signal (i.e., CN11 has entered an H output state for 0.2 seconds) (S202D). Then, if it is determined that a power-on signal has been received (S202D: Yes), then the current state is identified from the outputs of CN7 to CN9 (S203D), and the state of the data display unit 276 and the illumination unit 277 is updated according to the identified state (S204D), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S202D that a power-on signal has not been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.2 has not been received from CN11) (S202D: No), various data counter values are updated in response to a signal other than a power-on signal (S205D), and the display content of the data display unit 276 is updated in response to the received signal (S206D), and this processing ends.

<Regarding hall computer control process in the 16th control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 545 to 547, various control processes executed by the MPU 281 of the hall computer 263 in this control example will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 545, the main processing executed by the MPU 283 of the hall computer 263 will be described. FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing, based on various signals received from the pachinko machines 10, data corresponding to the game status of each pachinko machine 10 is updated, and each pachinko machine 10 is judged for abnormalities or fraudulent activity.

In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101H). Next, a signal reception process is executed to execute a process according to a signal received from each pachinko machine 10 (S102H), and then a display update process is executed to update the display on the display 287 provided in the hall computer 263 (S103H). Then, an operation means input monitoring process is executed to determine whether or not the operator of the hall computer 263 has performed an input operation on the input device 288 of the hall computer 263, and if an input operation has been performed, a process according to that operation is executed (S104H).

Next, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a comparison process is executed at power recovery to compare the game state at the time of the previous power outage with the game state at the time of the current power-on and determine whether or not there is an abnormality (S105H). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information about a power outage (S106H), and if there is information about a power outage (S106H: Yes), the power outage process is executed (S108H), and thereafter, an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process can no longer be executed.

If it is determined in the process of S106H that the power interruption occurrence information is not stored (S106H: No), then it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed (S107H), and if it is determined that 1 ms has not elapsed (S107H: No), the process returns to S107H. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S107H that 1 ms has elapsed (S107H: Yes), the process returns to S102H, and the processes of S102H to S105H are repeatedly executed.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 546, the signal reception process (S102H), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 545), will be explained. In this signal reception process (S102H), processing is performed in response to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10.

In the signal reception process (S102H), first, it is determined whether or not an external output signal (various signals in the H output state) has been received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of any of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263 (S201H). If an external output signal has not been received (S201H: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 545).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S201H that an external output signal has been received (S201H: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a power-on signal has been received from the pachinko machine 10 from which the external output signal was output (i.e., an H output signal of 0.2 s has been received from CN11) (S202H). If it is determined that a power-on signal has not been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.2 s has not been received from CN11) (S202H: No), then it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.4 s has been received from CN11) (S203H). If it is determined in the process of S203H that a power-off signal has been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.4 s has been received from CN11) (S203H: Yes), then information corresponding to the current (at the time of power interruption) game state is stored in the power interruption information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine that output the signal (S204H), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S203H that the power off signal has not been received (i.e., the 0.4 s H output signal has not been received from CN11) (S203H: No), the information in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine that output the signal is updated (S204H), and this process is terminated. For example, if it is determined that the jackpot 1 signal (CN7) of the first pachinko machine 10 (machine number 1) installed in the hall is in the H output state and the other external output signals are in the L output state, information indicating that a jackpot is being won is stored in the data storage area corresponding to the first pachinko machine 10 (machine number 1). The type (machine number) of the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is identified by the type of connection terminal to the hall computer 263 (the position of the terminal that received the external output signal).

If it is determined in the process of S202H that a power-on signal has been received (i.e., a 0.2 s H output signal has been received from CN11) (S202H: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the startup flag (a flag indicating whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 10 is starting up upon power-on) in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that output the external output signal is on (S206H). If it is determined as a result of the determination in the process of S206H that the startup flag is off (S206H: No), the information in the power recovery information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is updated (S207H), the display content of the display 287 is updated (S208H), the startup flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is set to on (S209H), and this process ends.

Next, the comparison process at power recovery (S105H) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 547. This comparison process at power recovery (S105H) is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 281, and when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, it compares the game state at the time of the previous power outage with the game state at the time of this power on, and determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

In this power recovery comparison process (S105H), first, it is determined whether the start-up flag is on or not (S301H), and if it is determined that the start-up flag is not on (i.e., it is off) (S301H: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S301H that the start-up flag is on (S301H: Yes), then the information in the power interruption information storage area is compared with the information in the power recovery information storage area (S302H), and it is determined whether the compared information matches (S303H).

If it is determined in the process of S303H that the compared information does not match (S303H: No), an abnormality notification is set (S304H) and the process proceeds to S305H. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303H that the compared information matches (S303H: Yes), the process of S304H is skipped and the process proceeds to S305H. In the process of S305H, the start-up flag is set to off (S305H), and the process ends.

By executing this comparison process at power recovery (see FIG. 547), when a power-on signal is output to the hall computer 263 as a result of power being turned on to any of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263, the data showing the game state when the power was turned off for that pachinko machine 10 can be compared with the data showing the game state when the power was turned on this time. Therefore, if an abnormal situation occurs in which the game state has changed, the hall computer 263 can grasp this immediately after powering on. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior such as rewriting the game state while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (for example, fraudulently setting it to a jackpot state).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to be able to execute a specific presentation (data display device linked presentation) in a presentation mode that is linked to the visual appearance of a specific device (e.g., data display device 262) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to be able to execute a display device linked presentation in a presentation mode that keeps the transition to an advantageous state concealed for a predetermined period of time as a type of presentation for informing the player that a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot or time-saving state) has been reached, and encourages the player to view a specific device (e.g., data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity after the transition to the advantageous state. Most of the data display devices 262 currently in general circulation, which display various data related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 (number of draws between jackpots, number of jackpots, total number of draws, etc.) based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, are configured to notify the player of an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability game state, time-saving game state, etc.) by lighting up characters or decorative lamps, etc., when an advantageous state is set. Therefore, by executing a display device linked performance, it is possible to realize an extremely innovative performance mode in which the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are performing the performance in conjunction with each other. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the 16th control example, as the lottery result of the first special pattern that is mainly executed in the normal game state, a jackpot (special jackpot) from which almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning port 65a in each round is also short) and a small jackpot in which the opening pattern (specific opening and closing operation) of the specific winning port 65a common to the special jackpot is set are provided, so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a special jackpot or a small jackpot. These lottery results can make the player recognize that the number of lotteries until the ceiling lottery number is reached (the third time-saving state is granted) may have been reset by winning the special jackpot each time the specific winning port 65a is opened and closed by the specific opening and closing operation, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of lotteries until the third time-saving state is granted (the remaining number of lotteries until the award related to the ceiling lottery number is reached) can be granted. Therefore, it is possible to impart a gameplay that allows the player to predict the remaining number of lotteries.

In addition, in this 16th control example, the time for which the special symbols change at the ceiling number of lottery draws is fixed to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, making it difficult to tell whether the game will move to the third time-saving state or whether the jackpot has been won at the ceiling number of lottery draws. By configuring it in this way, the player's sense of anticipation for the move to the third time-saving state can be maintained for a longer period of time, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 16th control example, the configuration is such that the execution of the reserved ball change effect is suppressed for reserved balls that are reserved before the ceiling number of draws is reached and are consumed in the third time-saving state that is set after the ceiling number of draws is reached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress irregular playing methods that try to increase the degree of advantage by deliberately consuming the reserved balls of the first special pattern that are consumed after the transition to the third time-saving state during the third time-saving state by not causing the start winning of the second special pattern, or conversely, by quickly acquiring the reserved balls of the second special pattern and then playing so as not to run out of the reserved balls of the second special pattern, deliberately consuming the reserved balls of the first special pattern after the third time-saving state ends, thereby increasing the degree of advantage.

In addition, in the 16th control example, when the game is shifted to the jackpot game state and when the game is shifted to the third time-saving state, a signal is output from the common signal output channel (CN9) in the external output terminal board 261 in different output modes. This allows the number of signal output channels to be reduced, and therefore the increase in the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed. Here, in the 16th control example, as with the jackpot 1 signal, by setting CN9 to the H output state even during the execution of the jackpot game, the information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the specified device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263) electrically connected via the external output terminal board 261. In other words, the function of shifting to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, which is installed in the pachinko machine 10, is a very special function that shifts to a favorable game state without going through a jackpot, and depending on the specifications of the specified device, there is a risk that the shift to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating a time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it may be determined that the state has been shifted to the time-saving state due to fraud without going through a jackpot, or that the output is invalid due to an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the present 16th control example, by providing a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of a jackpot game but also when the ceiling lottery number is reached as the jackpot 3 signal, the time-saving state to which the state is shifted based on the ceiling lottery number being reached can be treated as normal regardless of the specifications of the predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261. In other words, even if a specification is such that a signal indicating a time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, and is determined to be fraudulent or abnormal, if the jackpot 3 signal is input as a signal indicating a jackpot, a signal output mode that pseudo-shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot is achieved can be realized even when the ceiling lottery number is reached. In other words, the jackpot 3 signal indicating a jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds, and the jackpot 2 signal indicating a shift to the time-saving state is set to the H output state, so that the shift to the legitimate time-saving state can be determined. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving state set based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws from being judged as fraudulent or abnormal. In the case of a specified device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws, it is possible to distinguish whether the H output is based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws or the winning of the jackpot by determining the output period of the jackpot 3 signal. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the specified device, the transition to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws can be treated as legitimate.

In the 16th control example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a signal indicating the game state is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside. In addition to this, when the power is turned on in the normal state, the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la may be output to the outside. In this case, the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la may be output as a signal indicating 9-bit data from one signal output channel (e.g., CN9). More specifically, for example, in a situation where neither the jackpot 1 signal nor the jackpot 2 signal is output (neither the jackpot game state nor the time-saving state), the jackpot 3 signal is set to H output for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.4 seconds), thereby notifying a predetermined device that the jackpot 3 signal output from CN9 thereafter is data indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la. Then, the data of the 1st bit to the 9th bit of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is output in sequence in 0.2-second intervals. More specifically, if the bit of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is 1, the output of CN9 is set to H output for 0.2 seconds, and if it is 0, the output of CN9 is set to L output for 0.2 seconds. After the output is completed, an H output signal with an output period different from 0.2 seconds or 0.4 seconds (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be output to notify a specified device that the output of data indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la has been completed. By configuring in this way, the number of draws at the time of power-on can be easily grasped by simply monitoring the output of the external output terminal board 261 on the specified device (such as the hall computer 263).

Furthermore, in this case, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the value of the special drawing counter 203la may be notified in a similar manner. By configuring in this way, the value of the special drawing counter 203la can be output to the specified device when the power supply is cut off and when the power supply is turned on, so that if a fraudulent act of illegally rewriting the value of the special drawing counter 203la while the power supply is cut off is performed, it is possible to configure it so that it is easy to detect on the specified device side. In other words, by installing a function in a specified device such as the hall computer 263 that compares the value of the special drawing counter 203la at the time of power cut and the value of the special drawing counter 203la at the time of the next power-on, the discrepancy of the special drawing counter 203la can be easily detected on the specified device side, so that the presence or absence of fraudulent acts can be determined when the power supply is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

In this 16th control example, a jackpot 3 signal is provided in addition to the jackpot 1 signal, but the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal may be output from one signal output channel (CN7). By configuring in this way, the number of signal output channels can be reduced.

In the 16th control example, the degree of advantage is made different depending on whether the special jackpot is won in the normal game state before the ceiling number of draws is reached, or in the third time-saving state after the ceiling number of draws is reached, so that the degree of advantage is higher in total if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol after the ceiling number of draws has passed, but the method of making the degree of advantage different when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the rate of a special jackpot is higher (it is easier to transition to the second special jackpot state) if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the third time-saving state set after the ceiling number of draws is reached than if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player more excited about the game because it is more likely to reach the ceiling number of draws.

In the 16th control example, the small bonus is provided to make it difficult to know the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws, but the method of making it difficult to know the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is not limited to this. For example, the number of ceiling draws after the end of the jackpot may be made different depending on the type of jackpot, making it difficult to know how many is set as the ceiling number of draws. In addition, whether the small bonus is a special jackpot or a small win can be understood by visually checking the type of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37. Therefore, for example, at the timing when the stop pattern corresponding to the small bonus is stopped and displayed on the first pattern display device 37, the display of the first pattern display device 37 may be erased, a common pattern may be temporarily displayed, or a predetermined movable role may be moved in front of the first pattern display device 37 to hide the first pattern display device 37. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to know whether the small bonus is a special jackpot or a small win, so that the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws can be made more difficult to know. Also, the same control may be performed during the period from when the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started. Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed) when the power is turned on, the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are also cleared, whereas if the pachinko machine 10 is not initialized when the power is turned on, the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are usually restored to the display contents at the time of power off. In this case, if a hall staff member or the like initializes the pachinko machine 10 outside the business hours of the hall, the player can easily determine on the next business day whether the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries has been reset or has been maintained as it was at the end of the business on the previous day simply by visually checking the first symbol display device 37. In other words, if the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are cleared, it may be determined that the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries has been reset, and the player may avoid starting a game on the pachinko machine 10. To avoid such a situation from occurring, when the power is turned on, the display of the first pattern display device 37 may be erased regardless of whether initialization has been performed, a common pattern may be temporarily displayed regardless of whether initialization has been performed, or a predetermined movable device may be moved in front of the first pattern display device 37 to hide the first pattern display device 37 until the first variable display of the special pattern begins. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized, and therefore it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the initialized pachinko machine 10.

In the 16th control example, as shown in FIG. 509(a), the character 809 emits light 809 above the third symbol display device 81, indirectly drawing attention to the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 and drawing attention (visualization) to the data display device 262, which is generally installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, and the lottery result (whether or not the player will move to an advantageous state) is notified to the player depending on the visual state of the data display device 262, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a performance that encourages attention to the data display device 262 in a more direct manner (for example, a performance in which the words "Look at the top of the table!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81) may be executed. By configuring in this way, the data display device 262 can be more reliably viewed by the player, and the performance effect of the data display device-linked performance can be further improved.

In the 16th control example, the execution of the reserved ball notice performance for reserved balls (reserved balls that cross the ceiling number of draws) that are acquired (the start winning is detected) before the ceiling number of draws is reached and are used to draw special symbols after the big win ends is suppressed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, as the reserved ball notice performance, in a state where there are multiple reserved balls and a display mode different from that of the normal reserved is set for at least one reserved ball number pattern, a performance may be provided in which the display mode of one reserved ball number pattern set to a display mode different from that of the normal reserved is switched with the display mode of one reserved ball number pattern set to the display mode of the normal reserved. In other words, the reserved ball number pattern determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern may be temporarily set to a reserved ball number pattern different from the reserved ball number pattern determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern, and a display mode may be exchanged with the reserved ball number pattern temporarily set to a display mode different from the normal reserved at a predetermined timing after the reserved ball number pattern is executed (for example, at the start of the next change, during the change display based on the reserved ball determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern), so that the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern is set to a display mode different from the normal reserved. In this case, the reserved balls that cross the ceiling lottery number may be configured to be allowed to execute the reserved ball number pattern, and the display mode may be exchanged with the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball used in the lottery for the ceiling lottery number by the time the change display for the ceiling lottery number is completed. In other words, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved balls consumed at the ceiling lottery number is basically set to the display mode of normal reservation, and if the reserved balls of the first special pattern increase thereafter, a lottery for whether or not to execute the reserved ball change effect is executed as in normal times, and if a reserved ball change effect of a display mode other than normal reservation is executed, an effect for switching the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern is executed, so that the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern consumed after the ceiling lottery number is reached can be unified to the display mode of normal reservation. By configuring in this way, as with the 16th control example described above, the third time-saving state can be started without any information to determine whether it is better to consume the reserved balls of the first special pattern during the third time-saving state.

In this 16th control example, the second time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot or based on winning a time-saving symbol, and the third time-saving state is set based on reaching the ceiling number of draws. The third time-saving state is slightly less advantageous, but the difference in the advantageous degree is kept to a small difference that is difficult for the player to feel, but this is not limited to this. For example, the third time-saving state may be configured to have a clearly lower advantageous degree. Specifically, for example, the probability of winning a normal symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal game state, third time-saving state) may be configured to be significantly lower (for example, 1/100) than the high probability state of a normal symbol (second probability state, second time-saving state). In other words, in both the normal state and the third time-saving state, the game may be configured to proceed by executing the lottery for the first special symbol by hitting from the left, by configuring the lottery for the normal symbol to be almost unwinnable. Even if configured in this way, if the degree of advantage in the case of a jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol is configured to be higher in the third time-saving state, it is possible to maintain the gameplay that makes one expect the ceiling number of draws to be reached. In addition, by configuring the game to maintain the disadvantageous left-handed play even after the ceiling number of draws is reached, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from changing significantly before and after the ceiling number of draws is reached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the existence of the third time-saving state from excessively improving the ball-out performance of the pachinko machine 10, which becomes excessively advantageous for the player, or from trying to cover the payout rate in the third time-saving state with other elements (for example, the probability of a jackpot, the number of prize balls paid out for each ball entering each winning slot, the number of rounds of a jackpot, the probability of a probability change, etc.), which ends up being excessively disadvantageous for the player.

<Modification of the 16th control example>
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 614 and FIG. 615. In the above-mentioned 16th control example, a configuration is adopted in which a performance is executed to encourage the player to view the data display device 262 as a performance for notifying a jackpot and a performance for notifying a time-saving state. In addition, in this modified example, a configuration is adopted in which an upper part UY capable of appearing and disappearing to a position where the data display device 262 can be physically concealed is mounted on the upper part of the pachinko machine 10, and the upper part UY conceals the visual state of the data display device 262, making it more difficult for the player to know whether a data display device-linked performance is being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 614, in this modified example, a configuration is adopted in which an upper part UY capable of appearing and disappearing is provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 as a part of an interesting performance associated with a variable display performance. This upper role UY is normally maintained in a state (origin position) stored inside the pachinko machine 10, and mainly when the "SP reach" variable pattern, which has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, is selected, it performs an upward movement in the latter half of the variable display performance, and stops at a position (projecting position) that covers the front of the data display device 262. This state in which the upper role UY is stopped in front of the data display device 262 is basically maintained until the variable display performance is completely finished.

In this modified example, as a kind of big win performance, the upper part UY is maintained in the protruding position until the opening period of the big win game, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed in a miss combination (see FIG. 615(a)). Then, after performing a performance that draws attention to the data display device 262 (see FIG. 507(a)), the upper part UY descends to the origin position, exposing the front of the data display device 262, and a performance is performed in which the big win visual confirmation mode set in the data display device 262 becomes visible. Based on the big win visual confirmation mode becoming visible, the pachinko machine 10 also notifies the big win, as in the data display linked type performance in the 16th control example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm the visual confirmation mode of the data display device 262, so that even if the timing of notifying the big win or transition to the time-saving state on the pachinko machine 10 side is delayed, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to notice that the big win or transition to the time-saving state has occurred. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effects of the data display device-linked performance and to provide greater freedom in the timing of notifications.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its variant, the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 displays a display mode that suggests to the player to pay attention to (visually recognize) a specified device (such as the data display device 262) that is electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 via the external output terminal board 261, and a data display device-linked presentation is executed to notify the player of whether or not a specified advantageous state has been reached depending on whether or not the specified device is set to a specified visual recognition mode (visual recognition mode for jackpot, visual recognition mode for time-saving state) to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a specified advantageous state (jackpot state, time-saving state for normal patterns), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display mode that prompts the player to pay attention to (visually recognize) a predetermined device that can be set to a visual recognition mode indicating a predetermined advantageous state when the pachinko machine 10 receives a predetermined signal that indicates a predetermined advantageous state, separate from the data display device 261 (for example, a display device that is set to a predetermined display mode when a predetermined signal indicating a predetermined advantageous state is received, a light-emitting device that is set to a predetermined light-emitting mode, a displacement device that is displaced (moved) in a predetermined displacement mode, etc.) may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, thereby allowing a linked performance to be performed between the predetermined device and the third pattern display device 81. This configuration allows for greater freedom in the installation position compared to the data display device 262, which is mostly installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, and therefore allows for a greater variety in the performance modes.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, the bonus interval number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reset even when a small win in which the remaining number of times until the ceiling number of times is not reset is won. However, in a pachinko machine 10 to which a predetermined device capable of displaying the game history such as the above-mentioned data display device 262 is connected, the number of times of the special symbol drawn after the previous big win is completed can be grasped by visually checking the game history displayed on the data display device 262. In other words, by visually checking the data display device 262, the remaining number of times of the lottery until the ceiling number of times of the lottery is reached can be grasped. In response to this, the upper role UY in the modified example of the above-mentioned 16th control example may be provided, and the initial position (origin position) of the upper role 262 may be set to the position shown in FIG. 614 (the front of the data display device 262 is blocked by the upper role UY, making it difficult to visually check the data display device 262), so that it is physically difficult to grasp the remaining number of times of the lottery until the ceiling number of times of the lottery by visually checking the data display device 262. By configuring it in this way, the player can determine the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is reached based only on the number of bonus intervals displayed on the third pattern display device 81, making the game more enjoyable by allowing the player to predict the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is reached.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, the through gate 67 is provided only in a position where the game ball cannot enter unless it is hit to the right (a position where it is difficult to enter), and the normal pattern variable display does not start during the variable display of the ceiling lottery number unless the right hit is intentionally started during the variable display performance of the ceiling lottery number, but this is not limited to this. For example, the through gate 67 or the second ball entrance 640 may be provided in a position where both the game ball hit to the left and the game ball hit to the right can enter. In this case, it is easy for a situation to occur where the variable display of the normal pattern continues before and after the variable display of the special pattern stops, but as in the above-mentioned 16th control example, the occurrence of wasted balls can be suppressed by shifting (delaying) the timing of notifying the transition to the time-saving state according to the remaining variable time of the normal pattern.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, when the time-saving symbol is won during the third time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set, and when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached in the second time-saving state, the third time-saving state is set (the time-saving state is overwritten). However, it is not necessary to overwrite the time-saving type. For example, when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached in the second time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is high (the probability of winning a normal symbol is high), it may be configured to update only the number of time-saving times to the number of time-saving times (100 times) corresponding to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of lotteries while maintaining the second time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming lower than the game state before the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, regardless of the game state at the time when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, so that the player can be pleased regardless of the timing of reaching the ceiling number of lotteries.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, when the time-saving pattern is won during the third time-saving state and the state transitions to the second time-saving state (as a result, the number of time-saving times increases to 100), or when the ceiling lottery number is reached during the second time-saving state and the state transitions to the third time-saving state (as a result, the number of time-saving times increases to 100), a special performance mode may be executed to indicate that the number of time-saving times has increased. Specifically, for example, in a variable display performance corresponding to the winning of a time-saving pattern during the time-saving state or a variable display performance of the ceiling lottery number during the time-saving state, a performance in which the number indicating the remaining number of times until the time-saving state ends, displayed in the display area Dm7, increases to 100 (the number of time-saving times is restored) may be executed, or a display mode such as a so-called rewind playback may be set to execute a content performance as if time had gone back to the start of the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, a more diverse range of performance modes can be realized, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game. In this case, the configuration may be such that the fewer the remaining times of the time-saving count, the more likely it is that a more extravagant (flashy) presentation mode will be set when the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met. If the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met when the number of times of the time-saving count is low and the number of times of the time-saving state is reset to 100, the player can be made to feel as if he or she has obtained more advantageous time-saving states, and therefore, by executing a more extravagant presentation in this case, the player can be made to feel even greater joy and satisfaction.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, a state in which pre-reading effects such as reserved change effects are prohibited is set based on the acquisition of reserved balls used to draw special symbols at the ceiling drawing count, but the conditions for setting the state in which pre-reading effects are prohibited are not limited to this. For example, a state in which pre-reading effects are prohibited may be set based on the reserved ball corresponding to a time-saving symbol winning being reserved, or a state in which pre-reading effects are prohibited may be set based on the reserved ball corresponding to a jackpot other than a special jackpot being reserved (i.e., a reserved jackpot of a type that transitions to a game state in which a time-saving state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot has ended is reserved). By configuring in this way, in the same way as when the third time-saving state is set based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, when the time-saving state is entered in a state in which one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern are held, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the reserved balls of the first special pattern will be a jackpot or not, so that it is possible to suppress irregular playing methods in which the reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed during the time-saving state only when it is predicted that a jackpot will be generated, and when it is predicted that a jackpot will not be generated, a lottery for the second special pattern is executed. In addition, a configuration may be made in which a state in which the pre-reading performance is prohibited may be set in cases other than when entering the time-saving state. More specifically, for example, a state in which the pre-reading performance is prohibited may be set from the time when the reserved change performance set to a display mode other than the normal reserved (any of changes 1 to 5) is determined until the variable display performance based on the reserved balls of the display mode other than the normal reserved is completed. This configuration prevents multiple reserved ball count patterns with display modes other than normal reserved from being displayed, which can lead to the player being confused about which reserved ball-based variable display presentation to focus on, making it difficult for the player to concentrate on the variable display presentation based on each reserved ball.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, when the reserved balls used for the lottery of the special pattern are reserved at the ceiling lottery number, the display mode other than the normal reservation is suppressed for the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern acquired after that, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern that is consumed after the transition to the third time-saving state may be configured to be set to a specific display mode different from the normal reservation and any of the changes 1 to 5. Even in this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether it is advantageous to consume it during the time-saving state, so that the reserved ball of the first special pattern is consumed during the time-saving state only when it is predicted that a jackpot is likely to be obtained, and the lottery of the second special pattern is executed when it is predicted that a jackpot is not likely to be obtained. In addition, contrary to the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, the reserved ball change presentation may be permitted in the same way as in normal times. In this case, in addition to display modes that suggest the possibility of a jackpot or a time-saving symbol winning, a display mode that suggests a high probability of a jackpot type (special jackpot) that is advantageous if won during the time-saving state (i.e., that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher if consumed during the time-saving state) or that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher if consumed after the time-saving state ends rather than during the time-saving state may be provided. By configuring in this way, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be consumed at the most advantageous timing for the player.

<17th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 548 to Fig. 575. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 12th control example, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the time-saving winning judgment is configured to be executed in both the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. In addition, in the above-mentioned 12th control example, a plurality of time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) with different advantageous degrees (time-saving times) are provided as the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the player.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example is configured to provide two time-saving states: a time-saving state (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which a lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage, is likely to be executed, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage, is likely to be executed. When the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached, the third time-saving state B is set first, while when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the time-saving state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A, which has a low degree of advantage, with a high probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play with a stronger expectation of reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws than of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this 17th control example, when a time-saving symbol is drawn during the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the drawn time-saving symbol is added. In addition, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a higher probability (for example, 90%) than in the drawing of the first special symbol. In addition, when the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B is entered, a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) of special symbol drawings are drawn, and the state is entered into the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A. In other words, during the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a high probability each time the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, and the number of time-saving times is added, so that an innovative gameplay is realized in which the number of times of continuation of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A, which is entered after the drawing of the special symbol has passed a specific number of times, can be changed.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example described above in that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example. In the following, elements that are the same as those in the twelfth control example will be given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations of those elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 548, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 548 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 548, the game board 13 in this 17th control example is different from the game board 13 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 406) in that a small win variable winning device 2650 is provided directly below the first ball entrance 64. The upper part of this small win variable winning device 2650 is blocked by the first ball entrance 64 and a nail, and is positioned so that the game ball has difficulty entering. This small win variable winning device 2650 is a variable winning device that is opened when the lottery for the first special pattern results in a small win. In other words, even if the lottery result for the first special symbol is a small win, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the small win variable winning device 2650, so the small win for the first special symbol in this 17th control example has almost the same value as a miss in a general gaming machine. The significance of providing a small win for the first special symbol in this 17th control example is the function of forcibly stopping the long fluctuation of the second special symbol at a miss.

Here, in the seventeenth control example, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel, and if one of the special symbols becomes a big win or a small win while both special symbols are changing, the display of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped at a missing symbol. And, the first special symbol is configured to win a small win with a high probability (49/50). By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol is drawn by hitting the right side in a normal state and a long fluctuation for 600 seconds is set, the long fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped at a missing symbol by drawing the first special symbol without waiting for 600 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of the second special symbol being drawn endlessly.

The game board 13 in this 17th control example also differs from the game board 13 in the 12th control example in that the variable winning device 1065 has been removed, and the V winning device 1650 also serves the role of the variable winning device 1065 (as a big winning port that is opened for a predetermined period of time in each round of a big win). This allows the board configuration of the game board 13 to be simplified.

Furthermore, the game board 13 in this 17th control example differs from the 12th control example in that, instead of the right-side second ball entrance 1640 and the electric device 1640a that opens and closes the right-side second ball entrance 1640, the game board 13 in this 17th control example is provided with the right-side first ball entrance 64r and the electric device 64ra that opens and closes the right-side first ball entrance 64r. This right-side first ball entrance 64r is configured as a type of starting winning hole that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol, just like the first ball entrance 64. In addition, when a winning normal symbol is drawn, the electric device 64ra is controlled to open and close in an opening pattern that corresponds to the game status.

Next, referring to FIG. 549 and FIG. 550, the characteristic presentation mode in this 17th control example will be described. Here, as described above, in this 17th control example, there are two types of time-saving states: time-saving state A (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which a lottery is executed for the first special pattern with a low degree of advantage (almost no time-saving pattern is won), and time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery is executed for the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage (high probability of winning the time-saving pattern, and essentially a big win is also confirmed if a small win is won). And, in this 17th control example, when a time-saving pattern is won in the time-saving state, a control is adopted to add the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern that has been won, and a configuration is adopted in which a lottery for a specific number of times (for example, 11 times) of special patterns is drawn in the time-saving state B, thereby transitioning to the time-saving state A. In other words, the more times the time-saving state B, where it is easy to win the time-saving symbol, is increased by winning the time-saving symbol, the more times the time-saving state A to which it subsequently transitions (after a specific number of times has elapsed) will transition, resulting in a highly unique and innovative gameplay configuration. In other words, the time-saving state B is not only an extremely advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of actually winning a jackpot (even if a small jackpot is won, a jackpot is essentially guaranteed), but it is also a state for determining the number of times the time-saving state A to which it subsequently transitions will continue.

The presentation mode in this time-saving state B will be described with reference to Fig. 549 and Fig. 550. Fig. 549(a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device 81 after the lottery result is different from the big win (i.e., a miss including a small win) over the ceiling number of lottery draws (150 times in this 17th control example) and the transition to the third time-saving state. As described above, when the transition to the third time-saving state is made, first, the third time-saving state B is set in which the lottery for the second special pattern is mainly executed, and the third time-saving state B transitions to the third time-saving state A by executing the variable display of the special pattern a specific number of times. Fig. 549(a) is a diagram showing the display mode during the third time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 549(a), in the third time-saving state B, the words "-Add-on RUSH-" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and each time a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, an effect is executed in which a rabbit-like character 801 is granted a bonus contained in a treasure chest 810 by an angel-like character 809. FIG. 549(a) illustrates an example in which contents 810a including a symbol with the number "5" attached thereto is granted to character 801 from treasure chest 810, indicating that five time-saving times have been added (the time-saving symbol with five time-saving times has been selected). Also, as shown in FIG. 549(a), a small display area Dm4 with the words "Right Hit" is formed in the upper left corner of the main display area Dm, and below the small display area Dm4, a small display area Dm7 with the words "Last 8 Hits" is formed, and below the small display area Dm7, a small display area Dm13 with the words "Stock 50 + 10 Hits" is formed.

The small display area Dm7 displays the remaining number of times the second special symbol will be drawn until the time-saving state B ends (transition to time-saving state A), and the value is subtracted by one each time the second special symbol is drawn in time-saving state B. The small display area Dm13 displays the number of times the time-saving state has been reduced after the time-saving state A has been reached, and the left side displays the number of times the time-saving state has been determined at the time of transition to time-saving state B, and the right side displays the number of times the time-saving state has been acquired (added) by winning the time-saving symbol in time-saving state B. In other words, in the example of FIG. 549(a), when the ceiling number of times of drawing is reached (transition to the third time-saving state B), 50 times of time-saving state A are guaranteed, and furthermore, a situation is illustrated in which 10 times of time-saving have been successfully acquired (added) by winning the time-saving symbol in the drawing of the second special symbol. In this 17th control example, the number of times of time-saving in the third time-saving state related to the reaching of the ceiling number of times of drawing is set to 61 times. Of these, 11 will be set to the third time-saving state B, and 50 will be set to the third time-saving state A.

In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Increase the number of chance times!" These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the number of time-saving times in the chance time (time-saving state A) is added (stocked) each time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In the present 17th control example, in the time-saving state, the game ball is frequently entered into both the first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting from the right. For this reason, when hitting from the right after transitioning to the third time-saving state B, not only the lottery for the second special symbol but also the lottery for the first special symbol is almost certainly executed. Here, in the present 17th control example, a simultaneous change specification is adopted that allows the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and both the start of the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol are permitted. Also, in time-saving state B, a relatively long variation time (for example, 120 seconds) is set for the first special symbol. Therefore, while the variation display of the first special symbol is executed once, the lottery game with the second special symbol can be executed the remaining number of times until the transition to time-saving state A is made. The reason why the number of times that time-saving state B continues is an odd number of 11 times is that one lottery for the first special symbol and ten lottery for the second special symbol are added together. This makes it possible to set the number of lottery draws for the second special symbol before the transition to time-saving state A to a convenient round number of 10 times.

Figure 549 (b) is a diagram showing the presentation mode after the 11th variable display is completed in the third time-saving state B in this 17th control example. When the 11th variable display is completed in the third time-saving state B, a presentation is executed to notify the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state A to be transitioned thereafter. Specifically, as shown in Figure 549 (b), characters indicating the number of time-saving times are displayed in the center part of the main display area Dm. In the example of Figure 549 (b), a case where the characters "TOTAL 110 times" are displayed is illustrated, and in addition to the 50 times of time-saving times that were determined from the start of the time-saving state B, a situation where 60 times of time-saving times are added during the time-saving state B is illustrated. In addition, the characters "Chance time entry" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state A.

Next, referring to FIG. 550, the performance mode when a big win or a small win is won during the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) will be described. In this 17th control example, if a big win is won during the time-saving state B, or if a V entry occurs after a small win and a big win is won, the game state after the big win is set to the second time-saving state. In this second time-saving state, as in the third time-saving state based on the ceiling lottery number of times reached, the game state after the big win is set to the second time-saving state. Therefore, from the player's point of view, if a big win is won during the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH), the game state moves as if the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) is started again after the big win. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving times after the big win of the second special pattern is configured to be set to 86 times, excluding the 11 times consumed in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B is resumed from the beginning with a time-saving state A to which the game is transitioned after the time-saving state B being guaranteed to have 75 times of time-saving times. Therefore, the number of time-saving times is set to be greater than the third time-saving state that occurs when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached, so players can expect to win the jackpot during time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 550, if a big win or small win is won during time-saving state B, contents 810a containing a pattern with the word "RUSH" appear from a treasure chest 810, and an effect is executed in which the contents are awarded to the character 801. Also, the display showing the number of time-saving times displayed in the small display area Dm13 is changed to display "75 times stocked". Furthermore, the words "Add-on RUSH reset confirmed!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that after acquiring 75 time-saving times, the add-on RUSH can be restarted from the beginning. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 551, a method of transition between game states in this 17th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 551, in this 17th control example, five game states are provided: a normal state, a second time-saving state A, a second time-saving state B, a third time-saving state A, and a third time-saving state B. The normal state is set to a low probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is not activated. In other words, it is configured as a game state that is disadvantageous to a player who needs to progress in the game by executing a lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage, by hitting left.

The second time-saving state A is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated, so that game balls frequently enter both the right-side first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting from the right, but since an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the right-side first ball entrance 64r is executed. The second time-saving state B is set to a high probability state for normal symbols like the second time-saving state A, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated, but unlike the second time-saving state A, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly shorter, so it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1641 is executed. Here, because the drawing of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the drawing of the first special symbol, the second time-saving state B is a more advantageous gaming state than the second time-saving state A.

The third time-saving state A is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol variation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated. As with the second time-saving state A, game balls frequently enter the right-side first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting from the right, but since an extremely long variation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol, it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the right-side first ball entrance 64r is executed. In other words, compared to the second time-saving state A, the probability of winning the normal symbol is low, so the degree of advantage is lower, but the degree of advantage is higher than in the normal state. Here, in this 17th control example, as with the 16th control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a win for the normal symbol is configured to differ by only one. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (the degree of advantage of the third time-saving state A being lower than that of the second time-saving state A). Therefore, when the player transitions to the third time-saving state A, the player can be made to feel as if he or she has obtained the same value as when the player transitions to the second time-saving state A, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the third time-saving state B is set to a low probability state of normal symbols like the third time-saving state A, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated; however, unlike the third time-saving state A, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly shorter, so that it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1641 is executed. Therefore, the third time-saving state B is a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the third time-saving state A.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another game state when a jackpot is won, and when the ceiling number of draws is reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 551, when a jackpot A17, which is determined with a 90% probability when a jackpot is won in a drawing of the first special pattern, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-shortening state A. Also, when a jackpot B17, which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won in a drawing of the first special pattern in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-shortening state B, which is more advantageous than the second time-shortening state A. Furthermore, when the ceiling number of draws (150 times) is reached without winning a jackpot in the normal state, the game state is set to the third time-shortening state B. The second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B have roughly the same degree of advantage, and the second time-saving state A is configured as a game state that is clearly less advantageous than the second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can play with a stronger hope of reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws without winning a jackpot, rather than winning a jackpot, which has a higher chance of transitioning to the second time-saving state A, which has a lower degree of advantage. In other words, a novel gameplay in which the player plays while more strongly hoping not to win a jackpot can be realized, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the left middle section of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the second time-saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown in the left middle section of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the second time-saving state A to another game state when a jackpot is won, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed without winning a jackpot, and when the ceiling number of lottery times has been reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 551, when the jackpot B17, which is determined at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the second time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state B. Also, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed in the second time-saving state A, the game state is set to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, when the ceiling number of lottery times (150 times) is reached without winning a jackpot in the second time-saving state A, the game state is set to the second time-saving state B. In order to reach the ceiling number of draws while remaining in the time-saving state A, it is necessary to first transition to the second time-saving state B, and then transition to the time-saving state A in the state where the number of time-saving draws is added in the second time-saving state B by the number of draws that exceeds the ceiling number of draws, and then reach the ceiling number of draws without winning a jackpot. When transitioning to the second time-saving state B, the number of time-saving draws granted at the end of the jackpot is 61 or 86, so in order to add a number of time-saving draws that exceeds the ceiling number of draws, it is necessary to add at least 64 or more during the second time-saving state B. However, 80% of the time-saving draws that are added in the draw of the second special pattern 1 are 5, and the rate of adding 10 or more time-saving draws is only 20%, so it is difficult to add a number of time-saving draws that exceeds the ceiling number of draws in the first place. Furthermore, since the event of reaching the ceiling number of draws without winning a jackpot is relatively unlikely to occur in the first place, it can be said that it is extremely rare to reach the ceiling number of draws (150 draws after the end of the jackpot) while maintaining the second time-saving state A.

In contrast to this, if jackpot A17, which has a 90% chance of being determined if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the second time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A again (loops through the second time-saving state A). Therefore, in the second time-saving state A, the gameplay is such that the player basically plays the game in the hope of winning a jackpot and of determining jackpot B17, which has a low chance of being determined (10%) if a jackpot is won.

Next, referring to the lower left of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the second time-saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown in the lower left of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the second time-saving state B to another game state only when a specific number of (6 or 11) special symbol drawings are performed without winning either a jackpot or a small jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 551, when a specific number of (6 or 11) special symbol drawings are completed in the second time-saving state B, the game state transitions to the second time-saving state A, which is less advantageous than the second time-saving state B. In contrast, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol before a specific number of special symbol drawings are performed in the second time-saving state B, or if a small jackpot that essentially guarantees a jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the second time-saving state B again (looping through the most advantageous second time-saving state B). Therefore, in the second time-saving state B, the game is played in the hope of winning a big win or a small win before the drawing of the specific number of special symbols is completed. The probability of winning either a big win or a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol is 1/10, and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn before the drawing of the specific number of special symbols is completed is basically 5 or 10, so the possibility of looping the second time-saving state B is about 41% when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 5, and about 65% when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 10. As mentioned above, even if neither the big win nor the small win is won during the second time-saving state B, there is a high probability that the number of time-saving times can be acquired (added) five or more times for each drawing of the second special symbol in the second time-saving state B, so the degree of advantage (number of continuations) of the second time-saving state A that is set after the drawing of a specific number of special symbols has been completed can be made higher than normal (the second time-saving state A that is set based on winning the big win A17). This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the middle right of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the third time-saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown in the middle right of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the third game state B to another game state when a big win or a small win is won, and when a specific number of times (11 times) of special symbol lotteries are executed without winning either a big win or a small win. Specifically, as shown in the middle right of FIG. 551, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the third time-saving state B, or when a small win that essentially determines a big win is won, the game state after the big win is set to the second time-saving state B. Also, when a specific number of times (11 times) of special symbol lotteries are finished in the third time-saving state B, the game state transitions to the third time-saving state A, which is less advantageous than the third time-saving state B. Therefore, in the third time-saving state B, the player can play with the strong expectation of winning either a big win or a small win in the drawing of the special symbol within a specific number of times (11 times). As with the second time-saving state B described above, in the third time-saving state B, there is a high probability of winning (adding) five or more time-saving times for each drawing of the second special symbol, so the degree of advantage (number of continuations) of the third time-saving state A, which is set after the drawing of the special symbol has been completed a specific number of times, can be improved. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the lower right side of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the third time-saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown in the lower right side of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the third time-saving state A to another game state when a jackpot is won, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed without winning a jackpot, and when the ceiling number of lottery times has been reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 551, when the jackpot A17, which is determined with a 90% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the third time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A. Also, when the jackpot B17, which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the third time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state B. Also, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed in the third time-saving state A, the game state is set to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, if the ceiling number of draws (150) is reached in the third time-saving state A without winning a jackpot, the state is set to the third time-saving state B. As with the second time-saving state A, reaching the ceiling number of draws in the third time-saving state A is an extremely rare case (an event that cannot occur unless the number of draws reaches the ceiling number after an additional 65 or more time-savings have been generated in the third time-saving state B). For this reason, in the third time-saving state A, as with the second time-saving state A, the gameplay is such that the player basically plays in the hope of winning a jackpot and of winning the jackpot B17, which is determined at a low rate (10%) if a jackpot is won.

In this way, in this 17th control example, the gameplay can be switched between five different game states, and even in the same time-saving state, the degree of advantage and gameplay can be significantly different between time-saving state A (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) and time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B), so that the game can be made more interesting. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in 17th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 552, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 17th control example will be described. FIG. 552 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 552, the ROM 202 in the 17th control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 12th control example described above (see FIG. 407) in that the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb, the 2nd random number 12 table 202kc is replaced with the 2nd random number 17 table 202qc, and the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd is replaced with the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd. 12. The ROM 202 is configured to receive the random number 17 of the small prizes instead of the random number 12 of the small prizes, the table 202qe is provided for the random number 17 of the small prizes instead of the table 202kf for the selection of the small prize type, the table 202qh is provided for the random number 12 of the time-saving prize instead of the table 202kh for the selection of the random number 17 of the time-saving prize, the table 202qi is added, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj is added. The other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 554(a), the details of the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 554(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 554(a), the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in this 17th control example is composed of at least a special jackpot 17 table 202qb1 for special jackpot 1, which is referenced to select the jackpot type of the first special symbol, and a special jackpot 2 17 table 202qb2 for special jackpot 2, which is referenced to select the jackpot type of the second special symbol.

Figure 554 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1. As shown in Figure 554 (b), in the special chart 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1 in this 17th control example, two types of jackpot types for the first special pattern are specified: "jackpot A17" and "jackpot B17". That is, in the special chart 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 89" is specified as the jackpot type "jackpot A17", and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99" is specified as the jackpot type "jackpot B17".

"Jackpot A17" is a type of jackpot where the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state A (the time-saving state where the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly executed) with 51 time-saving times. Also, "jackpot B17" is a type of jackpot where the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state B (the time-saving state where the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed) with 56 time-saving times. Note that when the lottery for the special symbol is executed 11 times in the second time-saving state B, it transitions to the second time-saving state A, and thereafter, the second time-saving state A is basically maintained until the time-saving times elapse (end) or until the jackpot is won. As mentioned above, the second time-saving state B is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state A, so "jackpot B17" is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than "jackpot A17". In addition, 90 random numbers out of 100 possible random numbers (counter values) for the value of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with "jackpot A17," while 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B17." Therefore, when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol, there is a 90% chance that it will be a "jackpot A17" and a 10% chance that it will be a "jackpot B17."

Next, referring to FIG. 554(c), the details of the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2 will be described. FIG. 554(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2. As shown in FIG. 554(c), the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2 in this 17th control example specifies three types of jackpot types for the second special pattern: "jackpot C17", "jackpot D17", and "jackpot E17". That is, in the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 84" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot C17", the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 89" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot D17", and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot E17".

As shown in FIG. 554(c), "jackpot C17," "jackpot D17," and "jackpot E17" have different numbers of jackpot rounds, 15 rounds, 8 rounds, and 4 rounds, respectively, but the game state after the jackpot ends is commonly set to the second time-saving state B with 86 time-saving rounds. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the second time-saving state B, which has a high degree of advantage, is set at a 100% rate, making the lottery for the second special symbol more advantageous than the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, 85 random number values (counter values) out of 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with the "jackpot C17", 5 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D17", and 10 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E17", so that if a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, there is an 85% chance that it will be a "jackpot C17", a 5% chance that it will be a "jackpot D17", and a 10% chance that it will be a "jackpot E17".

In this way, in this 17th control example, even if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, there is only a 10% chance of transitioning to the advantageous second time-saving state B, whereas if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the second special symbol, the advantageous second time-saving state B is always set, so that when the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, players can have a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot. This can add variety to the game, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 555(a), the second winning random number 17 table 202qc in this 17th control example will be described in detail. This second winning random number 17 table 202qc, like the second winning random number 12 table 202kc in the 12th control example described above, is a data table that is referenced when drawing a lottery for a normal symbol, and that specifies the random number value (counter value of the second winning random number counter C2) that results in a winning normal symbol.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 555(a), 299 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 298" are specified as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a winning normal pattern in the low probability state of the normal pattern, while 300 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 299" are specified as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a winning normal pattern in the high probability state of the normal pattern. Since the second winning random number counter C4 can take a value in the range of "0 to 299", the probability of a winning normal pattern in the low probability state of the normal pattern is 299/300, and the probability of a winning normal pattern in the high probability state of the normal pattern is 1 (300/300). In other words, in this 17th control example, even in the low probability state of the normal pattern, it is configured to be determined to be a winning normal pattern in almost every lottery. This is for the purpose of almost eliminating the difference in the degree of advantage between the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage when the ceiling number of draws is reached and the game transitions to the third time-saving state can be made almost equal to that of the second time-saving state, allowing players to play with a stronger expectation of reaching the ceiling number of draws.

Even in normal conditions, hitting from the right will pass through the through gate 67 and a lottery for a normal pattern will be executed, resulting in a high probability of winning a normal pattern. However, in normal conditions, the normal pattern variation shortening function does not operate, and the opening period of the electric device 64ra is also short (for example, 0.1 seconds), so even if you continue hitting from the right, it is almost impossible to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64r on the right side. In other words, since the game efficiency is lower than continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting from the left, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting from the right in normal conditions.

Next, referring to FIG. 555(b), the details of the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd in this 17th control example will be described. This fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd, like the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202kd in the 12th control example described above, is a data table that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is held. FIG. 555(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd in this 17th control example.

As shown in FIG. 555 (b), the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd in this 17th control example is composed of at least a normal table 202qd1 which is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the normal state, a special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 which is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the time-saving state A (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which the lottery for the first special pattern is mainly executed, and a special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 which is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which the lottery for the second special pattern is mainly executed. Here, the normal table 202qd1 has the same regulation contents as the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1 (see FIG. 414) in the 12th control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted here. Note that the 17th control example differs from the 12th control example in that there is no possibility of winning the time-saving pattern in the lottery for the first special pattern, and in that there is a high probability of a miss with a small win in the lottery for the special pattern. For this reason, the regulation contents related to the small win of the first special pattern in the normal table 202qd1 of the 17th control example are the same as the regulation contents related to the miss of the first special pattern in the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1 of the 12th control example.

Next, referring to FIG. 555(c), the details of the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 constituting the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd will be described. FIG. 555(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2. As shown in FIG. 555(c), for the first special symbol lottery result being a miss (small win), a short miss with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated and specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Also, for the first special symbol lottery result being a big win, a short win with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is associated and specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 555(c), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a time-saving winning, a long miss with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Also, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, a long win with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, in the second time-saving state A and the third time-saving state A, in which the special 1 time-saving table 202qd1 is referenced, a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less is set each time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by hitting the right, while an extremely long fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that a game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed can be formed. As described above, in this 17th control example, when a right hit is performed in the time-saving state, game balls frequently enter both the first ball entrance 64r on the right side and the second ball entrance 1641, and the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, so that in the time-saving state A, the first special symbol can be drawn multiple times while the second special symbol is long-changing. In other words, it is configured as a game state in which the game progresses mainly by drawing the first special symbol.

The special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 differs from the time-saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2 (see FIG. 415) of the above-mentioned 12th control example in that the variation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds regardless of the lottery result, so a detailed explanation is omitted here. In the game state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) where this special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, the second special symbol can be continuously varied for 5 seconds or less while the first special symbol is being long-varied (120 seconds), so a game state in which the game progresses mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol is formed. The change time of the first special symbol is changed from 600 seconds in the 12th control example to 120 seconds in order to avoid a long period during which the drawing of the first special symbol cannot be executed, when the time-saving state B does not win and the state transitions to time-saving state A. On the other hand, if the drawing time of the first special symbol is made too short, the drawing of the first special symbol may be executed multiple times in the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B, which may reduce the number of times the second special symbol is drawn, so a relatively long period of 120 seconds is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 556(a), the details of the small prize random number 17 table 202qe will be described. This small prize random number 17 table 202qe is a data table in which the random number value (counter value of the first prize random number counter C1) that is determined to be a small prize in the drawing of the special symbol is prescribed, similar to the small prize random number 12 table 202ke (see FIG. 409(d)) in the above-mentioned 12th control example. FIG. 556(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small prize random number 17 table 202qe in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 556(a), in this 17th control example, the random number value (counter value of the first prize random number counter C1) associated with the first special symbol is made different from that of the second special symbol. In other words, the probability of winning a small prize is made different between the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 556(a), the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the first special symbol is set to "18-899," while the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol is set to "18-89." Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, ranging from "0-899," the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are 882 and 72, respectively, so the probability of a small win in the drawing of the first special symbol is 49/50 (882/900), and the probability of a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol is 2/25 (72/900). Considering that the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol is 1/50, the lottery of the first special symbol will win either a jackpot or a small jackpot. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol will win a jackpot or a small jackpot with a probability of 1/10 (2/25 + 1/10). Here, as will be described in detail later, the small jackpot of the first special symbol is substantially the same as a miss in other control examples because only unfavorable small jackpot types that cannot win a jackpot (V winning cannot occur) are selected. On the other hand, the small jackpot of the second special symbol is substantially the same as a miss in other control examples because only favorable small jackpot types that almost certainly win a jackpot by hitting the right during a small jackpot game and cause a V winning are selected. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/50 because it is not affected by the small jackpot, whereas the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is substantially the combined probability of the jackpot and the small jackpot, so it is 1/10. Therefore, the player has an advantage over the player who wins the lottery for the second special symbol over the lottery for the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 556(b), the details of the small win type selection 17 table 202qf in this 17th control example will be described. This small win type selection 17 table 202qf is a data table that is referenced to determine the type of small win when a small win is won in the lottery of a special pattern, similar to the small win type selection 12 table 202kf in the 12th control example described above. FIG. 556(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 17 table 202qf. As shown in FIG. 556(b), the small win type selection 17 table 202qf in this 17th control example specifies only one type, "small win A17", as the small win type of the first special pattern, while three types, "small win B17" to "small win D17", are specified as the small win types of the second special pattern.

"Small Win A17" is a small win in which the small win winning device 2650 is opened and closed. In other words, since the V winning device 1650, which is provided with the specific area 1650a that is the winning opportunity for the big win, is not opened, it is a small win type that has no possibility of winning the big win (V winning occurs). In addition, "Small Win B17" to "Small Win D17" are all small wins in which the V winning device 1650 is opened, and since the game ball can be easily entered into the specific area 1650a by hitting right, they are small win types in which the big win is essentially confirmed. In addition, "Big Win B17" executes big win C17 (15 round special chart 2-hour short big win) when a V win occurs, "Big Win C17" executes big win D17 (8 round special chart 2-hour short big win) when a V win occurs, and "Big Win D17" executes big win E17 (4 round special chart 2-hour short big win) when a V win occurs. For this reason, among the small wins of the second special pattern, "small win B17" has the highest degree of advantage, and "small win D17" has the lowest degree of advantage.

As shown in FIG. 556(b), the "small win A17" is associated with the full range (0-99) of values that the small win type counter C5 can take. Therefore, if a small win is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the "small win A17" is always determined, which does not allow for a V win. Therefore, the small win for the first special symbol is essentially the same lottery result as a miss in other control examples.

As shown in FIG. 556(b), the contents of the regulations for the second special symbol are such that "small win B17" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0-49", "small win C17" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "50-69", and "small win D17" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "70-99". Therefore, when a small win is obtained in the drawing of the second special symbol, the probability that "small win B17" is determined is 50%, the probability that "small win C17" is determined is 20%, and the probability that "small win D17" is determined is 30%. Considering that the allocation of the most favorable "jackpot A17" was set to 85% when the second special symbol was selected for the jackpot (see FIG. 554(c)), it can be said that the setting is such that the degree of favorability is higher when the second special symbol is selected for the jackpot than when a small jackpot is won and a V prize is generated. Therefore, in the time-saving state B, the player can play with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot with a low probability (1/50) than a small jackpot with a high probability (2/25), which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 556(c), the details of the time-saving random number 17 table 202qh in this 17th control example will be described. This time-saving random number 17 table 202qh is a data table in which the random number value (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a time-saving pattern winning in the lottery of the special pattern is specified, similar to the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh in the 12th control example described above. FIG. 566(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 17 table 202qh. As shown in FIG. 556(c), in this 17th control example, 810 random number values (counter values) from "90 to 899" are associated and specified as the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a time-saving winning in the lottery of the second special pattern. Of the 900 possible random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 899 for the first winning random number counter C1, there are 810 random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be time-saving winnings, so the probability of a time-saving winning being determined when a lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the 17th control example is 9/10 (810/900). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 556(c), a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a time-saving winning is not associated with the first special symbol, so the possibility of a time-saving winning being determined in the lottery for the first special symbol is 0.

In this way, in this 17th control example, when a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (probability of 9/10) of winning the time-saving symbol. By configuring it in this way, in time-saving state B, where the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed, it is possible to win the time-saving symbol almost every time the lottery is executed in a limited number of times, thereby increasing the number of time-saving times. Therefore, it is possible to realize an extremely unique and innovative gameplay in which the degree of advantage in time-saving state A can be determined according to the lottery content in time-saving state B, which is set before time-saving state A, and it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 557(a), the time-saving winning type selection table 202qi added to the ROM 202 in this 17th control example will be described in detail. This time-saving winning type selection table 202qi is a data table that is referenced to select the type of time-saving pattern when a time-saving pattern is won. As shown in FIG. 557(a), this time-saving winning type selection table 202qi specifies the type of time-saving pattern (time-saving winning type) in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 557(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0" and the "time-saving pattern A" with 50 time-saving times is associated with the time-saving winning type, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "1 to 19" and the "time-saving pattern B" with 10 time-saving times is associated with the time-saving winning type, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99" and the "time-saving pattern C" with 5 time-saving times is associated with the time-saving winning type.

Among the random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random number values (counter values) associated with "time-saving pattern A", "time-saving pattern B", and "time-saving pattern C" are 1, 19, and 80, respectively, so that when the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the second special pattern, the probability that "time-saving pattern A" is determined is 1%, the probability that "time-saving pattern B" is determined is 19%, and the probability that "time-saving pattern C" is determined is 80%. Therefore, in the time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which the lottery for the second special pattern is executed, when the time-saving pattern is won, the number of time-saving times is increased by 50 times at a rate of 1% (time-saving pattern A is determined), the number of time-saving times is increased by 10 times at a rate of 19% (time-saving pattern B is determined), and the number of time-saving times is increased by 5 times at a rate of 80% (time-saving pattern C is determined). This allows for variation in the number of time-saving turns added during time-saving state B (when an additional rush is in progress), further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 557(b), the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj added to the ROM 202 in this 17th control example will be described. This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced (either normal table 202qd1, special 1 time-saving table 202qd2, or special 2 time-saving table 202qd3) is specified according to the previous jackpot type, the currently set game state, and the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the jackpot ends. When a special symbol is drawn, the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined using this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj, and the fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the determined fluctuation pattern table.

Figure 557 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj. As shown in Figure 557 (b), this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj specifies the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced for each combination of the previous jackpot type, the currently set game state, and the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the jackpot ends (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa).

Specifically, in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is normal, the normal table 202qd1 is associated with the range of 52 to 150 and the range of 212 to 300 for the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time). On the other hand, no variation pattern table is associated with the other ranges. This is because the range of 1 to 51 times after the end of the jackpot A17 is always set to the second time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 51 at the end of the jackpot A17), and the range of 151 to 211 times after the end of the jackpot A17 is always set to the third time-saving state based on the ceiling number of times drawn, so there is no possibility of a special symbol being drawn in normal mode.

In addition, in this 17th control example, when the value of the special drawing counter 203qa reaches 300 (when the number of times the special pattern is drawn reaches 300 without winning), the value of the special drawing counter 203qa is updated to 150. In other words, even if the ceiling number of draws is reached one or more times after the ceiling number of draws is reached, the third time-saving state B can be set each time the ceiling number of draws is reached. Therefore, even if a so-called big hit occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged. In addition, since it is no longer necessary to specify a scenario for the number of times the special pattern is drawn that exceeds 300 times in the variation pattern scenario table 202qj, the amount of data in the variation pattern scenario table 202qj can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 557(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 1 to 51 and in the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, for the number of drawings within 51 or less times after the end of the jackpot A17, and for the number of drawings 163 or more times, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (time-saving counts remain), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, after the end of the jackpot A17, the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced for the 151st to 162nd lottery draws, creating a time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot B17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 52 to 150 and 212 to 300 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select the variation pattern (variation time). In contrast, in a situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 7 to 150 and the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 1 to 6 and the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, in the number of times of drawing 7 to 150 times and the number of times of drawing 163 or more times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, for the 1st to 6th and 151st to 162nd lottery draws after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming the time-saving state B. Therefore, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed. Note that, unlike the "jackpot A17", the time-saving state may continue even if the lottery draws are in the range of 52 to 150, because there is a possibility that the number of time-saving draws may exceed the ceiling number of draws depending on the number of time-saving draws added in the second time-saving state B immediately after the end of the jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), when the previous jackpot type was any of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" or "jackpot B17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 52 to 150 and 212 to 300 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select the variation pattern (variation time). In contrast, when the jackpot type is any of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 12 to 150 and the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 1 to 11 and the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 12 to 150 times and the number of times of drawing 163 or more times after the end of the jackpot C17 to the jackpot E17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, after the end of jackpot C17 to jackpot E17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced for the 1st to 11th draws and the 151st to 162nd draws, forming the time-saving state B. Therefore, an extremely favorable state is formed in which the draws for the second special symbol are mainly executed. Note that, as with "jackpot B17," "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" also set the second time-saving state B immediately after the end of the jackpot, so depending on the number of time-saving times added in the second time-saving state B, there is a possibility that the number of time-saving times may exceed the ceiling number of draws.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in a situation where a jackpot has not been won (a jackpot has not been won even once since the pachinko machine 10 was initialized) and the current game state is normal, the normal table 202qd1 is specified in correspondence with the number of times a special symbol has been drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) ranging from 1 to 150 and from 212 to 300. Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). On the other hand, in a situation where the jackpot has not been won and the current game state is a time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 163 or more times after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming a time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Also, for the number of times of drawing 151 to 162 times after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming a time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily executed.

In this way, in this 17th control example, the variation pattern scenario is defined by the variation pattern scenario table 202qj, and a variation pattern table is selected according to the previous jackpot type, the current game state, and the number of times the special symbol has been drawn, so a relatively complex game state transition method can be realized. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 553, the RAM 203 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 553 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 553, the RAM 203 in this 17th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 12th control example (see FIG. 408) in that a special drawing lottery counter 203qa, a big win flag 203qb, a special drawing 1 small win flag 203qc, and a special drawing 2 small win flag 203qd have been added. It also differs in that the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh have been deleted.

The special symbol selection counter 203qa is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is selected after a jackpot has ended (or after the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized). This special symbol selection counter 203qa is updated by incrementing its value by one at the timing when the start of the variable display of the special symbol is set (see S38103 in FIG. 564). By referring to the value of this special symbol selection counter 203qa, it is possible to determine whether the ceiling number of selections has been reached, and a process of selecting a variation pattern table corresponding to the number of selections from the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is executed.

The jackpot flag 203qb is a flag that is set to ON when a jackpot is obtained by drawing a special symbol (see Y8011 in FIG. 561 and Y8111 in FIG. 568). This jackpot flag 203qb is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see Y727 in FIG. 565 and Y925 in FIG. 571). This jackpot flag 203qb is provided with a jackpot flag for the first special symbol and a jackpot flag for the second special symbol, and when the jackpot flag for the first special symbol is ON and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol with a miss symbol (see Y726 in FIG. 565). In addition, when the jackpot flag for the second special symbol is on and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, if the variable display time of the second special symbol ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol with a miss symbol (see Y924 in FIG. 571). This prevents a malfunction in which a jackpot and a jackpot or a jackpot and a small jackpot start at the same time when one of the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot and the other is a jackpot or a small jackpot.

The special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is a flag that is set to ON when the drawing of the first special pattern results in a small win (see Y8055 in FIG. 562). This special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the small win of the first special pattern (see Y759 in FIG. 566). When the special chart 1 small win flag 203qd is ON and the variable display of the second special pattern is being executed, if the variable display time of the first special pattern ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special pattern with a miss pattern (see Y753 in FIG. 566). This makes it possible to prevent a malfunction in which a small win and a big win, or a small win and a small win, start in an overlapping manner when one of the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern results in a small win and the other results in a big win or small win.

The special pattern 2 small win flag 203qd is a flag that is set to ON when the drawing of the second special pattern results in a small win (see Y8055 in FIG. 562). This special pattern 2 small win flag 203qd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the small win of the second special pattern (see Y759 in FIG. 566). When the special pattern 1 small win flag 203qd is ON and the variable display of the second special pattern is being executed, if the variable display time of the first special pattern ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special pattern with a miss pattern (see Y959 in FIG. 573). This makes it possible to prevent a malfunction in which a small win and a big win, or a small win and a small win, start in an overlapping manner when one of the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern results in a small win and the other results in a big win or small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 558, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 558 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 558, the RAM 223 in this 17th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 12th control example (and the 5th control example) (see FIG. 249 (b)) in that a special drawing number counter 223lc, an additional RUSH counter 223qa, a base number counter 223qb, and an additional number counter 223qc have been added. It also differs in that the time-saving drawing number counter 223db, the mode type storage area 223dc, the long time-saving flag 223dd, and the initial setting flag 223de have been deleted.

The special symbol selection counter 223lc is a counter that has the same function as the special symbol selection counter 223lc in the thirteenth control example described above. That is, it is a counter that is updated in synchronization with the value of the special symbol selection counter 203qa provided in the RAM 223 in the main control device 110, and the value is updated every time the value of the special symbol selection counter 203qa is notified by the main control device 110 via a status command. This special symbol selection counter 223lc can always match the number of times the special symbol is selected after the end of the jackpot as determined by the main control device 110 and the number of times the special symbol is selected after the end of the jackpot as determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

The counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH is a counter that indicates the number of remaining times until the end of the add-on RUSH (time-saving state B). The initial value of the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH is set to 0, and when time-saving state B (either the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state) is set, a counter value according to the setting trigger (a value according to the number of times the special pattern is drawn before transitioning to time-saving state A) is set. That is, in the case of transition to time-saving state B based on reaching the ceiling number of draws (150 times), or transition to time-saving state B based on winning the jackpot C17 to E17, the number of draws for time-saving state B is set to 11, so 11 is set for the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH (see S9314A in FIG. 574). Furthermore, in the case of a transition to time-saving state B based on winning the jackpot B17, the number of draws in time-saving state B is set to 6, so the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH is set to 6 (see S9317A in FIG. 574). Also, each time a draw for a special symbol is performed in the add-on RUSH, the value is updated by subtracting 1. The display of the number of remaining draws until the end of the add-on RUSH is set according to the value of the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH.

The base number counter 223qb is a counter that indicates the number of time-saving times (base number of time-saving times) that have already been determined (guaranteed) at the time of entering the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) among the number of time-saving times of the time-saving state A to which the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) is transitioned after the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) ends. The initial value of this base number counter 223qb is set to 0, and when transitioning to the time-saving state B, a value is set that is the number of time-saving times set with the transition minus the number of times of drawing special patterns during the time-saving state B. More specifically, when the time-saving state B is set based on winning any of the jackpots C17 to E17, 75 is set for this base number counter 223qb (see S9316A in FIG. 574). Also, when the time-saving state B is set based on winning the jackpot B17, and when the time-saving state B is set based on reaching the ceiling number of draws, 50 is set for this base number counter 223qb (see S9318A in FIG. 574). The value set in this base count counter 223qb continues to be displayed on the left side of the small display area Dm13 during time-saving state B (add-on RUSH).

The add-on count counter 223qc is a counter for counting the number of time-saving times added in the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH). The initial value of this add-on count counter 223qc is set to 0, and each time a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the second special pattern in the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) and the number of time-saving times is added (the number of time-saving times corresponding to the won time-saving pattern is added to the time-saving counter 203h), the counter value corresponding to the number of time-saving times added is added and updated (see S9629A in FIG. 575). The value set in this add-on count counter 223qc continues to be displayed on the right side of the small display area Dm13 during the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH).

<Regarding control process of main control device in 17th control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 17th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 559 to 573. Specifically, the 17th control example differs in that the special symbol variable process 17 (see Fig. 559) is executed instead of the special symbol variable process 12 (see Fig. 417) in the 12th control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the 12th control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. The change from the special symbol variable process 12 (see Fig. 417) to the special symbol variable process 17 (see Fig. 559) is mainly due to a change to a specification in which, when one special symbol is displayed as a big win or small win while the other special symbol is displayed as a big win or small win, the one special symbol being displayed as a big win or small win is stopped and forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss symbol.

First, referring to FIG. 559, the special symbol variation process 17 (Y111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 559 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 17 (Y111). In this special symbol variation process 17 (Y111), the processes Y231, Y234, and Y238 are the same as the processes Y231, Y234, and Y238 of the special symbol variation process 12 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 417).

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (Y111) of this control example, if it is determined in the process of Y234 that the special symbol 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (Y234: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 is executed (Y251) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the 12th control example, and the process moves to Y238. Details of this first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 560.

On the other hand, in the process of Y234, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is updated by subtraction (Y252), the display of the first special pattern on the first pattern display device is updated (Y253), and then the first special pattern change stop process 17 is executed (Y254) instead of the first special pattern change stop process 12 (see FIG. 424) in the 12th control example described above, and the process proceeds to Y238. Details of this first special pattern change stop process 17 (Y254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (see FIG. 559) in this 17th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y238 that the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 is executed (Y255) instead of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 427) in the above-mentioned 12th control example, and this process is terminated. Details of this second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y255) will be described later with reference to FIG. 567.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting it (Y256), the display of the second special pattern on the first pattern display device is updated (Y257), and the second special pattern change stop process 17 is executed (Y258) instead of the second special pattern change stop process 12 (see FIG. 433) in the twelfth control example described above, and this process is terminated. Details of the second special pattern change stop process 17 (Y258) will be described later with reference to FIG. 571.

Next, referring to FIG. 560, the first special symbol change start process 17 (Y251), which is one process of the special symbol change process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example, will be described. FIG. 560 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol change start process 17 (Y251).

In this first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y251), the processes Y302 to Y306 and Y309 are the same as the processes Y302 to Y306 and Y309 in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the 12th control example. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y251) in this 17th control example, the process Y301 in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the 12th control example has been deleted. In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example, after executing the process of Y306, the first special symbol determination process 17 is executed (Y321) instead of the first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419) in the 12th control example, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 is executed (Y322) instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 420) in the 12th control example, and the process moves to Y309. Furthermore, in the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example, when the process of Y309 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the ceiling lottery count has been reached, and if the ceiling lottery count has been reached, the ceiling determination process 17 for setting the third time-saving state is executed (Y323), and this process is terminated. Details of the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), and the ceiling determination process 17 (Y323) will be described later with reference to Figures 561, 563, and 564.

Next, referring to FIG. 561, we will explain the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321).

In this first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), in each of the processes Y8001 to Y8006, the same process as each of the processes Y8001 to Y8006 in the first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321) of this control example, if it is determined in Y8003 that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON (Y8011), and the process proceeds to Y8004. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8003: No), the small jackpot lottery process 17 is executed (Y8012), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 562, we will explain the small prize lottery process 17 (Y8012), which is one process of the first special symbol determination process 17 (FIG. 561) in this 17th control example. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small prize lottery process 17 (Y8012).

In this small prize lottery process 17 (Y8012), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result for this special pattern is a time-saving win (Y8051). In the process of Y8051, if it is determined that the lottery result is a time-saving win (Y8051: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving win is not a win (Y8051: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small prize random number 17 table 202qe (Y8052), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small prize win (Y8053). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small prize win (Y8053: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small prize win (Y8053: Yes), a small prize type is selected from the small prize type selection 17 table 202qf based on the acquired value of the small prize type counter C5, the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device is set (Y8054), the small prize flag corresponding to the special pattern that has won the small prize this time is set to ON (Y8055), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small prize win in the process of Y5053 (Y8053: No), the processes of Y8054 and Y8055 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 563, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example, will be described. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322).

In this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), in each of the processes Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the same processes as the respective processes Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 420) in the 12th control example are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322) of this control example, after executing the process Y503, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj is referenced to identify the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the current value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa (Y511), the identified fluctuation pattern selection table is read (Y512), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Next, referring to FIG. 564, we will explain the ceiling determination process 17 (Y323), which is one process of the first special pattern variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process 17 (Y323).

In this ceiling determination process 17 (Y323), first, 1 is added to the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa (S38103), and it is determined whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is 300 or not (S38121A). If it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is 300 (S38121A: Yes), the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is updated to 150 (S38122A), a status command including information indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is set (S38105), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S38121A, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is not 300 (S38121A: No), it is then determined whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is 151 (S38123A), and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is not 151 (S38123A: No), the processing proceeds to S38105.

In contrast, if the processing of S38123A determines that the value of the special drawing counter 203qa is 151 (S38123A: Yes), this means that the ceiling number of draws has been reached, so the third time-saving state is set by adding 61 to the time-saving counter 203h (S38124A), and information indicating the third time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S38112A). Next, information regarding this time-saving drawing is cleared (S38113A), and a status command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving draws is set (S38114A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 565, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example, will be described. FIG. 565 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254).

In this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254), in each of the processes Y701 and Y704 to Y707, the same process as each of the processes Y701 and Y704 to Y707 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (see FIG. 424) in the 12th control example is executed. Also, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254) of this control example, if it is determined in the process of Y701 that the fluctuation time has not ended (Y701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has ended (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol's big win flag 203qb is on or not (Y721), and if it is determined that the first special symbol's big win flag 203qb is not on (Y721: No), this means that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a big win, so the special symbol 1 miss stop process is executed (Y722) and this process is terminated. Details of the special chart 1 miss stop process (Y722) will be described later with reference to FIG. 566.

On the other hand, in the process of Y721, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb of the first special pattern is on (Y721: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y723), and if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (i.e., the second special pattern is being displayed) (Y723: Yes), the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to on (Y724), a special pattern 2 change stop command indicating the stop of the change of the special pattern 2 is set (Y725), the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is displayed as a stopped pattern (Y726), and the process proceeds to Y727.

On the other hand, in the process of Y723, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation time timer 203kb is 0 (i.e., the second special symbol is not being displayed), (Y723: No), the processes of Y724 to Y726 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y727. Next, the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is set to off (Y727), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, referring to FIG. 566, we will explain the special pattern 1 miss stop process (Y722), which is one process of the first special pattern variation stop process 17 (FIG. 565) in this 17th control example. FIG. 566 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special pattern 1 miss stop process (Y722).

In this special chart 1 miss stop processing (Y722), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is on or not (Y751), and if it is determined that the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is on (Y751: Yes), a special chart 2 change stop command is set (Y752), the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a miss pattern (Y753), and a small win scenario is set (Y754). Next, the small win start flag 203fb is set to on (Y755), the small win in progress flag 203fc is set to on (Y756), and the special chart 1 determination command is set (Y757). Next, the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a small win pattern (Y758), the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is set to off (Y759), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y751, if it is determined that the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y751: No), the special chart 1 confirmation command is set (Y760), the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped from changing to the missing pattern (Y761), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 567, we will explain the second special symbol variation start process 17 (Y255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example. FIG. 567 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation start process 17 (Y255).

In this second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y255), in each process of Y832 to Y836 and Y839 (Y309), the same process as each process of Y832 to Y836 and Y839 (Y309) in the second special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 427) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y255) of this control example, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on or not (Y851), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y851: Yes), the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to off (Y852), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y851: No), the process is shifted to Y832.

After executing the process of Y836, the second special symbol determination process 17 is executed (Y853), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 is executed (Y854), and then Y839 (Y309) is executed, the ceiling determination process 17 is executed (Y855 (Y323)), and this process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854) will be described later with reference to Figures 568 and 570. Also, the ceiling determination process 17 (Y855 (Y323)) is the same as that of Figure 564 described above, so its description will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 568, we will explain the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process 17 (FIG. 567) in this 17th control example. FIG. 568 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853).

In this second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853), in each of the processes Y8101 to Y8106, the same process as each of the processes Y8101 to Y8106 in the second special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 428) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853) of this control example, if the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the process of Y8103 (Y8103: Yes), the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is set to on (Y8111), and the process proceeds to Y8104. On the other hand, in the process of Y8103, if the lottery result is determined to be not a jackpot (Y8103: No), the special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 17 is executed (Y8112), the small jackpot lottery process 17 is executed (Y8113 (Y8012)), and this process is terminated. Details of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 569. Also, the small win lottery process 17 (Y8113 (Y8012)) is the same as that in FIG. 562 described above, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 569, we will explain the special pattern 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112), which is one process of the second special pattern determination process 17 (FIG. 568) in this 17th control example. FIG. 569 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special pattern 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112).

In this special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112), the processes of Y8202 and Y8206 are the same as the processes of Y8202 and Y8206 in the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (see FIG. 429) in the 12th control example. In the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112) in this control example, the lottery result is first obtained based on the time-saving random number 17 table 202qh (Y8211), and the process moves to Y8202. In the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 in this 17th control example (see FIG. 569), if the lottery result is determined to be a time-saving win in the process of Y8202 (Y8202: Yes), the time-saving pattern is set as the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device (Y8212), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 570, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y854), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (FIG. 567) in this 17th control example. FIG. 570 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y854).

In this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854), in each of the processes Y921 to Y928, the same process as each of the processes Y921 to Y928 in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 431) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854) in this control example, after executing the process Y923, the variation pattern scenario table 202qj (see FIG. 557(b)) is referenced to identify a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current value of the special symbol selection counter 203qa, the current game state, and the previous jackpot type (Y931), the identified variation pattern selection table is read (Y932), and the process proceeds to Y924.

Next, referring to FIG. 571, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example. FIG. 571 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528), in each of the processes Y901, Y906 to Y909, and Y914, the same process as each of the processes Y901, Y906 to Y909, and Y914 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (see FIG. 433) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528) in this 17th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y901 that it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y921), and if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y921: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the special symbol 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is a value greater than 0 (Y922). If it is determined that the special pattern 1 variation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y922: Yes), this means that the timing for the stop display of the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern has come during the display of the variation of the first special pattern, so in order to stop the display of the variation of the first special pattern being executed, a special pattern 1 variation stop command indicating the stop of the variation of the special pattern 1 is set (Y923), the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a miss pattern (Y924), and then the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special pattern is set to off (Y925), and the process moves to Y906. On the other hand, in the process of Y922, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 variation time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (i.e., 0) (Y922: No), the processes of Y923 and Y924 are skipped and the process moves to Y925.

On the other hand, in the process of Y921, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y921: No), the process of Y914 is executed, and in the process of Y914, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a time-saving symbol winning (Y914: Yes), the time-saving setting process 17 is executed (Y926) instead of the time-saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the 12th control example, and the process proceeds to Y908. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a time-saving symbol winning (Y914: No), the special symbol 2 miss stop process is executed (Y927), and this process is terminated. Details of the time-saving setting process 17 (Y926) and the special symbol 2 miss stop process (Y927) will be described later with reference to FIG. 572 and FIG. 573.

Next, referring to FIG. 572, we will explain the time-saving setting process 17 (Y926), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (FIG. 571) in this 17th control example. FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving setting process 17 (Y926).

This time-saving setting process 17 (Y926), like the time-saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the 12th control example described above, is a process for setting the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving pattern when the time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery. In the time-saving setting process 17 (see FIG. 572) in the 17th control example, the same processes as the Y8354 and Y8455 processes of the time-saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the 12th control example are executed. In the time-saving setting process 17 (see FIG. 572) in the 17th control example, first, a value corresponding to the time-saving pattern that has been won this time is added to the time-saving counter 203h (Y8361), and the process moves to Y8354.

In this way, in this 17th control example, each time a time-saving pattern is won, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern can be added to the time-saving counter 203h, so that an innovative gameplay can be realized in which the number of time-saving times is added almost every time a lottery for the second special pattern is executed in the time-saving state B, where a lottery for the second special pattern, which has a 90% chance of winning the time-saving pattern, is executed. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 573, we will explain the special symbol 2 miss stop processing (Y927), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop processing 17 (FIG. 571) in this 17th control example. This special symbol 2 miss stop processing (Y927) is a process for setting the stop display of a miss (including a small win) pattern of the second special symbol. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol 2 miss stop processing (Y927).

In this special chart 2 miss stop processing (Y927), first, it is determined whether the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is on or not (Y951). If it is determined that the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is on (Y951: Yes), a special chart 1 change stop command is set (Y952), the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a miss pattern (Y953), and a small win scenario is set (Y954). Next, the small win start flag 203fb is set to on (Y955), the small win in progress flag 203fc is set to on (Y956), and a special chart 2 confirmation command is set (Y957). Then, the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a small win pattern (Y958), the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is set to off (Y959), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y951, if it is determined that the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y951: No), the special chart 2 confirmation command is set (Y960), the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped from changing to a missing pattern (Y961), and this process is terminated.

By executing this special symbol 2 miss stop process (see Fig. 573), when a small win is won in the drawing of the second special symbol and the small win symbol based on the small win is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed as a miss symbol. This makes it possible to prevent a big win and a small win, or a small win and a small win, from being executed at the same time when the drawing result of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 574 to FIG. 575, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. In this 17th control example, the difference from the above-mentioned 12th control example (and the 5th control example) is that the contents of the time-saving state performance setting process 5 (S9011A), which is one process of the state command receiving process 5 (see FIG. 263), have been changed, and the contents of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 269) have been changed, and the rest are the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted. Note that, for the parts where the detailed explanations of the same elements as those described in the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are omitted, the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are applied. In addition, the technical ideas described in the above-mentioned control examples and each control example are naturally applied to this 17th control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in the above-mentioned control examples and each control example are naturally applied to this 17th control example.

First, referring to FIG. 574, the time-saving state presentation setting process 17 (S9011A) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving state presentation setting process 17 (S9011A). In this time-saving state presentation setting process 17 (S9011A), first, the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9311A), then it is determined whether or not the time-saving state has been changed to B (S9312A), and if it is determined that the time-saving state has not been changed to B (S9312A: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9312A, if it is determined that the time-saving state has been changed to B (S9312A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A). If it is determined that the time-saving state is not triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A: No), the additional RUSH counter 223qa is set to 11 (S9314A) and it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A). If it is determined that the time-saving state is not triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: No), the base number counter 223qb is set to 75 (S9316A) and the process proceeds to S9319A.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S9313A that the time-saving state is triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A: Yes), the add-on RUSH counter 223qa is set to 6 (S9317A), the base number counter 223qb is set to 50 (S9318A), and processing proceeds to S9319A. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S9315A that the time-saving state is triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: Yes), processing proceeds to S9318A. Next, the display of the remaining number of add-on RUSHes and the initial stock number is set according to each counter value (S9319A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 575, the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 17 (S4991A) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 17 (S4991A).

In the process of S9611 of this special chart 2 performance mode setting process 17 (S4991A), the same process as the process of S9611 of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 269) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 17 (S4991A) of this control example, first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is in effect (S9621A), and if it is determined that the time-saving state is not in effect (S9621A: No), the performance mode corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is determined (S6922A), the process of S9611 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is reduced (S9621A: Yes), it is determined whether it is in the time-reduction state A or not (S9623A), and if it is determined that the time is reduced (S9623A: Yes), it is determined whether it is the first special chart 2 change after the end of the add-on rush (S9624A), and if it is determined that it is the first special chart 2 change after the end of the add-on rush (S9624A: Yes), a chance time entry display (see FIG. 549 (b)) is set which continues until the end of the remaining change time of special chart 1 (S9625A), and the display of the value obtained by adding the value of the base number counter 223qb and the value of the add-on number counter 223qc is set as the TOTAL number of times (S9626A), and processing transitions to S9622A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9624A that this is not the first change in special chart 2 since the end of the added RUSH (S9624A: No), the processing of S9625A and S9626A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9622A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9623A, if it is determined that the time-saving state A is not reached (S9623A: No), it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for this special pattern is a time-saving pattern winning (S9627A), and if it is determined that the time-saving pattern winning (S9627A: Yes), a variable display mode (see FIG. 549(a)) that notifies the number of times that the time-saving pattern has been won is determined (S9628A), the number of times that the time-saving pattern corresponding to the winning time-saving pattern has been added to the time-saving counter 223da and the number of times that the time-saving pattern has been won counter 223qc (S9629A), and the processing transitions to S9611. On the other hand, if the processing of S9627A determines that the win is not a time-saving win (i.e., a big win or a minor win that essentially guarantees a big win) (S9627A: No), the variable display mode (see FIG. 550) that notifies the reset of the top-up RUSH is determined (S9630A), the value of the top-up count counter 223qc is cleared to 0 (S9631A), and processing transitions to S9611.

By executing this special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 17 (see FIG. 575), the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B, and each time the time-saving symbol is won, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol is added can be announced. This makes it possible to realize an extremely innovative presentation mode in which the time-saving symbol is added almost every time it changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example is configured to provide two time-saving states: a time-saving state (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which a lottery for a first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery for a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is likely to be executed. When the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached, the third time-saving state B is set first, while when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the time-saving state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A with a low degree of advantage with a high probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play with a stronger expectation of reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws than of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this 17th control example, when a time-saving symbol is drawn during the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the drawn time-saving symbol is added. In addition, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a higher probability (for example, 90%) than the drawing of the first special symbol. In addition, when the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B is entered, the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A is entered by drawing a specific number of special symbols (for example, 10 times). In other words, during the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a high probability each time the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, and the number of time-saving times is added, so that the number of times of continuation of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A, which is entered after the drawing of the special symbol has passed a specific number of times, can be changed according to the result of the drawing of the special symbol executed during the time-saving state B, realizing an innovative gameplay.

In the seventeenth control example, only the "small win A17" in which a V win cannot occur is provided as a small win of the first special pattern, but it may be configured so that some of the small wins of the first special pattern can also result in a V win. If there is a lottery result of a small win of the first special pattern in which a V win can occur near the ceiling (for example, within 5 lotteries remaining until the ceiling lottery number is reached), a configuration may be made in which a performance is executed to encourage the player not to win a V win in the small win. In other words, in particular, when a small win of the type that wins the "big win A17" in which the second time-saving state A is set by generating a V win, it is more likely to be advantageous to reach the ceiling lottery number and transition to the third time-saving state B than to generate a V win and transition to the second time-saving state A, so in such a case, a novel performance may be executed to encourage the player to avoid a V win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the seventeenth control example, in the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH), each time a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the second special pattern, an effect is executed to add the number of time-saving times corresponding to the winning time-saving pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the time-saving state B, the number of times the time-saving times have been added may be kept secret without being notified until halfway (for example, until the lottery for the ninth second special pattern is executed), and the number of times the time-saving times have been added may be notified at once at a predetermined notification timing (for example, a variable display effect related to the variable display of the last second special pattern in the time-saving state B). By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to predict how many times the time-saving times have been added until the predetermined notification timing, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, in this case, each time a lottery for a special pattern is executed, an effect suggesting the number of time-saving times added may be executed, or a configuration may be used in which no information regarding the number of time-saving times is suggested at all. In the former case, it is easier to predict how the number of time-saving times will be increased, and in the latter case, players can focus on whether the second special symbol will result in a jackpot or not until the notification timing is reached.

In the 17th control example, the lottery for the second special symbol has a 1/10 probability of winning a big win or small win, and a 9/10 probability of winning the time-saving symbol, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured to win the time-saving symbol with a predetermined probability (for example, a 1/2 probability). In other words, in the 17th control example, there was no lottery result that was simply a loss, but it may be configured to include a loss. With this configuration, the player can be pleased just by winning the time-saving symbol in time-saving state B, and the player's interest in playing in time-saving state B can be increased.

In the thirteenth to seventeenth control examples described above, a transition to the third time-saving state occurs when the ceiling number of draws is reached, but the game state set when the ceiling number of draws is reached is not limited to the third time-saving state, and can be set to any game state. Specifically, for example, a transition to the second time-saving state, which is more advantageous than the third time-saving state, or a transition to the more advantageous second probability variable state may occur. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage when the ceiling number of draws is reached can be varied, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

In the above-mentioned thirteenth to seventeenth control examples, when a fixed ceiling lottery number is reached, the game state is shifted to an advantageous state (third time-saving state), but the ceiling lottery number does not have to be fixed. For example, a configuration may be made in which a plurality of numbers (e.g., 50 times, 300 times, 500 times, 1000 times, etc.) that can be set as the ceiling lottery number are provided, and the ceiling lottery number is determined by lottery when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on) or when the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to add a playability that allows the player to play in the hope that a small number of lotteries will be selected as the ceiling lottery number, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In this case, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, during the first variable display performance after initialization) or when the jackpot ends (for example, during the ending performance or the first variable display performance after the end), a performance suggesting the ceiling lottery number may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further add a game feature of predicting the ceiling lottery number from the performance suggesting the ceiling lottery number, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition, for example, the ceiling lottery number after the end of the jackpot may be different for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play the game by paying more attention to the type of jackpot, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In this case, it is also possible to provide a jackpot type in which the number of rounds and the game state after the end of the jackpot are the same, but the ceiling lottery number after the end of the jackpot is different. Specifically, for example, a type with a ceiling lottery number of 100 times and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 1000 times may be provided as a 4-round time-saving jackpot, and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 400 times and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 600 times may be provided as an 8-round time-saving jackpot. By configuring in this way, in the case of a 4-round time-saving jackpot, the ceiling lottery number may be small, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, if an 8-round time-saving jackpot occurs, there is no possibility that the ceiling number of draws, which is an extremely large number of 1,000, will be set, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In the above-mentioned thirteenth to seventeenth control examples, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the RAM 203 is also initialized, and the value of the special drawing counter 203la is reset, but this is not limited to the above. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the special drawing counter 203la may not be reset. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress players from avoiding playing with the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to have been initialized (for example, when the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed closes during a jackpot or second probability change state), and therefore it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the possibility of initialization.

<18th control example>
Next, the contents of the 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 576 to Fig. 606. This 18th control example is different from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that it has a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, if the special symbol is already being displayed in a variable manner, a predetermined number of winning information of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) can be stored (reserved memory) (up to an upper limit of 4 in this 18th control example).

In addition, in this 18th control example, during the execution of a big win game, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (pre-read) and a reserve that is a small win (V reserve) is found, a display for notifying the player that a V reserve exists is configured to be executable, which is different from the above.

Specifically, when a big win game is started, if a V reserve is found to exist as a result of pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbol 2 reserve stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, an effect is executed in which a "V icon" is acquired (V icon acquisition effect), which is a notification mode indicating the existence of a V reserve. The acquired V icon is displayed in a reduced size in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the start of the display of the special symbol changes based on the V reserve, and is enlarged while the special symbol changes based on the V reserve are being displayed (hereinafter referred to as the activation of the V icon), thereby notifying the player that this change will result in a small win.

By configuring it in this way, the player is notified in advance that they will win a small prize in the special symbol lottery that is held after the big win game ends, so the player's anxiety that the set number of fluctuations will be reached and the time-saving mode will end without winning a small prize after the big win game ends can be reduced.

Here, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved stored (reserved reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b during the execution of the jackpot game is read in advance, and if a V reserved is present, then the V icon acquisition effect is always executed. If the V icon acquisition effect is not executed, it becomes clear that there are no V reserved symbols among the special symbol 2 reserved symbols stored (reserved reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (i.e., they are all misses), which may disappoint the player.

For this reason, in this 18th control example, during the execution of a jackpot game, the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is read in advance, and in some cases where a V reserved ball exists, a V icon acquisition effect is executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during the execution of the big win game, the player can have hope that he or she may win a small win until the display of the changing special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 2 stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b ends.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when the display of a special pattern based on a V reservation begins, it is possible to determine whether or not to activate a V icon in the display of the special pattern.

Specifically, when starting to display the changing special pattern based on a V reserve (a reserve that will win a small jackpot), it is determined whether there is another V reserve among the special pattern 2 reserves stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserve ball storage area 203b, and if a V reserve is present, it is configured to continue displaying a reduced version of the V icon until the display starts to change the special pattern based on the V reserve that will be consumed later, without activating the V icon (enlarging the V icon and announcing that a small jackpot has been won).

By configuring it in this way, even if the V icon is acquired and the V icon is not activated during the changing display of the special pattern, there is a possibility of winning a small prize, so even if the V icon is not activated until the changing display of the special pattern ends, the player can have hope that he or she may win a small prize.

In addition, by configuring in this way, for example, if there was only one V reservation during the jackpot game, but a new V reservation is stored (reserved) in the second special pattern reservation ball storage area 203b during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation, it is possible to switch the target for activating the V icon to the new V reservation. As a result, even if the last reservation of the special pattern 2 reservations that is read ahead at the time the V icon acquisition performance is executed is a V reservation, the V icon is not necessarily activated during the variable display of the special pattern based on that V reservation, and since the fact that the V icon is not activated determines that a consecutive win (continuous small wins) will occur, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player hope that the V icon will not be activated.

In the 18th control example, when a plurality of V reserves are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b and the V icon is displayed, whether the V reserve that is consumed first or the V reserve that is consumed later is the target for activating the V icon is determined when the display of the special pattern change based on the V reserve that is consumed first is started. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that the player can select in advance by button operation whether the setting is such that the V reserve that is consumed first is likely to activate the V icon, or the setting is such that the V reserve that is consumed later is likely to activate the V icon, according to the player's preference.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed varies depending on the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls stored (reserved) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b and the position of the V reserved ball.

Specifically, when the first special symbol 2 reserved (first reserved) of the special symbol 2 reserved stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a V reserved, the fewer the number of special symbol 2 reserved stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is to be executed. Also, when four special symbol 2 reserved are stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is higher when the special symbol 2 reserved consumed later is a V reserved than when the special symbol 2 reserved consumed first is a V reserved.

By configuring it this way, when the V icon is activated, there will likely be many reserved special charts 2 that have not been read ahead at the time the V icon acquisition performance is executed, making it difficult to predict the lottery results for the reserved special charts 2 that remain after the V icon is activated.

In the 18th control example, when the first reserve is a V reserve (a reserve that wins a small jackpot), the fewer the number of special symbol 2 reserves stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is to be executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the more the number of special symbol 2 reserves is, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is to be executed.

In the 18th control example, when four special symbol 2 reserved balls are stored (reserved) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is higher when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed later is a V reservation than when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed earlier is a V reservation, but this is not limited to this, and the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed may be higher when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed earlier is a V reservation than when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed later is a V reservation.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the more V reserves stored (reserved) in the second special pattern reserve ball storage area 203b, the easier it is to execute the V icon acquisition effect.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when multiple V reserves are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, whether or not to activate the V icon for the V reserve that is consumed first is determined according to the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, when multiple V reserves are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, if a specific variation pattern is not set in the V reserve that is consumed first, the V icon is activated, and a specific performance mode setting table with a different setting ratio of the specific performance mode is referenced from the performance mode setting table referenced when the V icon is not activated. Note that a specific performance mode refers to, for example, a performance that is executed only when a big win or small win is won (so-called premium performance), or a performance that changes to a display mode indicating a big win or small win after displaying a display mode indicating a miss in the lottery result (so-called revival performance).

This configuration makes it easier for players to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated based on the type of performance being executed, making it possible to get players interested in the performance being executed and preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In the eighteenth control example, when the V icon is activated, the configuration is such that the premium effect or the revival effect is difficult to execute, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the premium effect or the revival effect is easy to execute. In addition, for example, in some cases where a plurality of V reserves (reservations that win small prizes) are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, the period during which the activation of the V icon is prohibited may be set until the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reserve that is consumed later begins. In this case, a display mode (for example, a display mode in which a chain is wrapped around the V icon to lock it) to indicate that the activation of the V icon is prohibited may be displayed. By configuring in this way, when a performance with a high expectation of winning a small prize is executed during a period during which the activation of the V icon is prohibited, the expectation of winning a small prize in which the activation of the V icon is not executed can be increased, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the performance during the period during which the activation of the V icon is prohibited.

In addition, during the variable display of one special pattern, the configuration may have times when the V icon is likely to be activated and times when the V icon is unlikely to be activated. For example, when a reach effect is executed during the variable display of a special pattern, the configuration may be such that the V icon is more likely to be activated in the period from the start of the variable display of the special pattern to the start of the reach effect than in the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop display of the special pattern. If the V icon is not activated before the reach effect starts, the player can have hope for a consecutive win. Therefore, even if the V icon is not activated immediately after the variable display of the special pattern starts, the player can be interested in whether or not a reach will occur.

In the 18th control example, whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect during a jackpot game is determined based on whether or not a V reservation exists as a result of pre-reading the reserved special pattern 2 reservation, but this is not limited to the above. Whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect during a jackpot game may be determined based on the pre-reading result of the reserved special pattern 1 reservation (winning information of the first special pattern) or based on the pre-reading results of both the special pattern 2 reservation and the special pattern 1 reservation. Also, the display mode of the V icon displayed when a V reservation exists in the special pattern 2 reservation and when a V reservation exists in the special pattern 1 reservation may be different.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of this 18th control example, but the same reference numerals will be used to designate the same contents as the above-mentioned control examples, and detailed descriptions will be omitted.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example>
First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 576 to Fig. 581. Fig. 576 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example, Fig. 577 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example as viewed from the front, and Figs. 578 to 581 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example.

As shown in Fig. 576, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball winning port 64, a second ball winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the periphery of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Fig. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first ball winning port 64, the second ball winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 576.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 576) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 576) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Fig. 576), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 242), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In the eighteenth control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time-saving or normal mode, whether the display is variable, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the game mode is set as the normal mode after the jackpot game ends) or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game modes of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 16R time-saving jackpot (16R time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 10R time-saving jackpot (10R time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 7R time-saving jackpot (7R time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 7 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, and a 7R normal jackpot (7R no time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 7 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize is prepared which gives the player fewer benefits than the jackpot described above (for example, a benefit of opening the V winning device 650 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (or whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopped pattern after the variable display ends, but also shows a pattern according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot.

Here, a "16R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16, a "10R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, and a "7R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7. Also, a "7R jackpot without time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to the normal state without transitioning to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7.

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide, as a jackpot game when a special pattern jackpot is won, one of the following jackpot games is provided: a "16R jackpot with time reduction" that can provide the player with the most bonuses, a "10R jackpot with time reduction" that can provide the next most bonuses, a "7R jackpot with time reduction" that can provide the next most bonuses, and a "7R no time reduction jackpot" that can provide the player with the fewest bonuses of all jackpot games. This allows the player to play in the hope that, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for a special pattern, the jackpot game that provides the most bonuses will be provided out of the jackpot games that have different bonuses that can be provided.

In the 18th control example, the size of the bonus given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be won during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the size of the bonus given to the player may be defined using conditions other than those mentioned above, or the content of the jackpot game may simply be changed so that different bonuses are given without defining the size of the bonus.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is the same as in the normal state, but the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (benefit) given to the player after the jackpot ends. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the 18th control example, the change time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric role 640a that is operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit is set so that the period during which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. Note that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and only a part of the above-mentioned settings may be used, or the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state in addition to the above-mentioned contents.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the first special symbol lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, are configured to be capable of winning the time-saving feature in addition to winning the big prize and small prize described above. Specifically, the system is configured so that the determination of whether or not a time-saving feature has been won is performed in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) that is performed when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set.

Here, if the time-saving is won, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big win determination is performed in the special symbol lottery, and a process (update process 18) is executed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state when the variable display of the special symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery begins. For example, in the case of a time-saving state set to 1 time-saving count (value of time-saving counter 203h is 1), the remaining time-saving count (value of time-saving counter 203h) is updated (decremented) in update process 18, which is executed when the variable display of the special symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery in which the time-saving has been won begins, and it is determined that the time-saving state is to be ended. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving state in which a value of multiple times (e.g., 100 times) is set as the time-saving count, the time-saving state continues until the time-saving end condition is met based on the result of the update of the remaining time-saving count executed by update process 18.

In other words, by using the timing for setting the time-saving state and the timing for ending the time-saving state used in this 18th control example, it is possible to set the time-saving state only for the timing of determining the jackpot for the special pattern lottery (excluding the special pattern change period), or to set the time-saving state including the special pattern change period, depending on the number of time-saving times that are set.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, a different processing timing may be set. For example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special symbol variation that has won the time-saving state is stopped, and the time-saving state update process (processing to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state) may be executed before the next special symbol variation begins. Even in this case, by varying the number of time-saving times that are set, it is possible to set the time-saving state so that the special symbol variation period is included, or to set the time-saving state so that the special symbol variation period is not included. In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time-saving state set is stopped and the next special symbol lottery does not begin with the time-saving state set, the time-saving state will continue because the time-saving end condition cannot be met.

In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the player has acquired the right to execute the next special pattern lottery (special pattern reserve) by the time the special pattern variation that won the time-saving feature is stopped (before the time-saving feature is set), and to notify the player that the time-saving feature has been won only if it is determined that the special pattern reserve has been acquired, that is, if the next special pattern variation will start immediately after the time-saving feature is set and the time-saving feature can end. By configuring the player in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who knows that they have won the time-saving feature from playing right-handed and causing the second special pattern lottery to be executed without causing the first special pattern lottery to be executed.

In addition, as described in detail later, in the 18th control example, the condition for terminating the "time-saving state" is configured such that, for the time-saving state granted based on winning the big prize in the special symbol lottery, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state when either of the following termination conditions is met: the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed (the total number of times they have changed) reaches a first predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) (first termination condition), or the number of times the small prize has been won (the small prize game has been executed) in the special symbol lottery reaches a second predetermined number (e.g., 1 time) (second termination condition). In this way, by providing multiple termination conditions for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state and transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state when any of the multiple termination conditions is met, it is possible to set multiple timings for the time-saving state to end, and the player can play while feeling excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue.

Furthermore, in the 18th control example, multiple small prize types (e.g., small prizes A, B, C) are prepared as small prizes that can be won in the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), and the number of times the second ending condition is met is set differently for each small prize type. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small prizes won during the time-saving state, so the player can be made to feel a constant sense of tension while playing the time-saving game.

On the other hand, in this 18th control example, when a time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, an end condition is set that is different from when a time-saving state (first time-saving state) is set based on winning the jackpot, and specifically, the number of time-saving states is set to "1." In other words, the first time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery utilizes the time-saving state as a special lottery function for executing only the jackpot determination of the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state.

In the 18th control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, and a big win (so-called two-type win) is determined when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball) (see FIG. 580). In addition, as will be described in detail later, the expectation of the ball passing through the specific area during a small win game (V winning expectation) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that is won. And, the number of times the second end condition set for each small win type is met (number of small wins) is configured to be less for the small win type in which a small win game with a high V winning expectation is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to associate the expectation of winning a V to obtain a two-type win when a small win is won during time-saving play with the anxiety that the time-saving mode may end, making the player more motivated to play.

In the 18th control example, the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change is set to the first predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) as described above as the end condition (first end condition), but other end conditions may be set for the number of times the special symbols change. For example, the end condition for the time-saving state may be established when the number of times only the first special symbol changes reaches a third predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) or when the number of times only the second special symbol changes reaches a fourth predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). Also, only some of the many end conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball into the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three pattern rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed (see FIG. 122). Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of the 18th control example performs a decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b, while the display of the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b.

In other words, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) during which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is displayed stationary in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special pattern on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the timing at which the first pattern is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, when the discrimination condition (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is met, the discrimination means discriminates (a lottery for a special symbol is executed), and the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variably displayed) until a predetermined dynamic display period has elapsed, after which the identification information (third symbol) is displayed stationary in a display mode (combination of symbols) that indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the lottery result for the special symbol). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the special symbol by understanding the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may have a display mode corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and may be a display mode corresponding to a part of the special pattern lottery result (for example, only the result of the win/loss judgment such as a big win or a miss, or a time-saving win), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special pattern lottery result (for example, the type of big win that was won). In addition, if there are four types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, a miss, and a time-saving win) as the lottery result of the special pattern, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is one of two specific types (for example, a big win or a small win) out of the three types of lottery results described above. In addition, if a double win is won in a judgment that allows double wins (for example, a big win judgment, a time-saving judgment), a display mode for indicating a double win may be used, and if the content of the game executed based on the double win is the same as the content of the game executed based only on the big win, the same display mode may be used.

In addition, instead of the display device used in the 18th control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel, or multiple display devices may be provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In this 18th control example, when the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit during the time-saving state, the period during which the electric device 640a is operated (the period during which the electric device 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is longer than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit during the normal state. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state.

The configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the second symbol, or to increase the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win. In addition, if the time-saving state is made easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operating pattern of the electric device 640a, the time it takes for the second symbol to change may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change is set shorter during the time-saving state than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the second symbol to be displayed is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a are varied, the time for displaying the second symbol to be displayed may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is started, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and the second symbol indicating a win is displayed (the winning game of the second symbol, i.e., the timing when the electric role 640a is operated). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second symbol that started to be displayed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win during the normal state, the electric role 640a can be operated with the operation pattern corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, the set game state and the operation pattern of the electric role to be executed can be more accurately associated.

The relationship between the game state, the time the second symbol changes, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be specified other than as described above. For example, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the timing when the second symbol starts changing or the timing when the electric device 640a starts operating, the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be configured to set an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during the time-saving state).

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 576, nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the first ball entry port 64 is easier to enter in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also each one of the winning holes through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the hole. In the 18th control example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the 18th control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) that detects a ball that triggers the lottery for a special pattern (lottery trigger for a big win) is provided in the ball entrance, so that the lottery trigger for a special pattern can be obtained and prize balls can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which a ball can pass may be provided, and when a switch (detection means) that detects a ball passing through the area (gate) detects the passage of a ball, the lottery trigger for a special pattern may be obtained. In this case, it is preferable to provide a ball entrance that allows at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery for a special pattern to enter, and that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) when a ball enters. By configuring in this way, the number of times the lottery trigger for a special pattern is obtained and the number of times the prize balls are obtained can be made different, so that a variety of playability can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (permitted state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the player (the player in front of the game board 13 in FIG. 576) and a waiting state (restricted state) waiting on the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not selected), the electric device 640a is in the waiting state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the ball passing through the normal symbol starter hole (through gate) 67, that is, when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the electric device 640a is in the protruding state (permitted state), making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be explained. In the 18th control example, as shown in FIG. 576, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the approximate center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to direct the shot ball to either the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

In the 18th control example, as shown in FIG. 576, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the game is configured so that right-hand hitting is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

To prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted under the variable display unit 80, and the ball is configured to not enter the second ball entrance 640 during left-handed play. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to change the first special pattern can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to change the second special pattern can be played in right-handed play, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, as shown in FIG. 576, a V winning device 650 is disposed in the right hitting area, the upper surface of which slopes downward to the lower left (the lower left direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 576), and the various mechanisms are disposed so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric role 640a.

When the electric device 640a is in the standby state, the ball passes through the standby electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in the protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 576). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the standby state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 arranged below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

In addition, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, with reference to FIG. 577, the configuration of the right-hitting area of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 577, of the balls shot by right-hitting play, those that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is arranged. To explain more specifically, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member whose upper surface allows the balls to flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 577). Then, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 flows down into area a (see FIG. 577) which is within a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding position, the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end position. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the period during which the electric device 640a operates continuously in the game state (normal symbol probability state) is configured to be different, and when the electric device 640a operates in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) set as the game state, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 577), and when the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is configured to be in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 577).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in a protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 577 (the range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the 18th control example). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery for the second special pattern from being drawn in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) it takes for a ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the ball that flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a, which is in the induction state (protruding state), to reach the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric device 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a, and the operation of the electric device 640a ends when the ball reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric device 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 577, such a ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric device 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed play is performed during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric device 640a and the timing of the ball arriving at the electric device 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 5. Therefore, if a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be drawn, a ball entering the second winning port 640 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., a lottery for special symbol 2 and 5 prize balls) than a ball entering the general winning port 63. If a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) cannot be drawn (special symbol changing), a ball entering the general winning port 63 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) than a ball entering the second winning port 640.

This allows the ball entry port into which the player wishes the ball to enter (the ball entry port through which many bonuses can be obtained) to be changed depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have the ball enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, it is necessary to continue right-hand play, which increases the operation of the game.

In the 18th control example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the ball can be surely inserted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. In addition, for example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be configured to be a period (e.g., 0.9 seconds) slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the ball from being shot after the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and starting the ball from being shot again after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (so-called stop shot), so that the right-handed play can be continued during the time-saving state, improving the operation of the game.

Returning to Figure 576, we will continue with the explanation. As described above with reference to Figure 577, the ball released by right-handed play first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, we will explain the configuration of the V winning device 650. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and is configured to be variable to an open state in which the ball can win at a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a by operating the opening/closing door 650f1 when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "small win."

In addition, in some cases where a "big win" of a special pattern is won, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same way as when a "small win" is won as described above. This makes it difficult to know whether a "big win" or a "small win" of a special pattern has been won when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

Now, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 577 to 578. First, as shown in Fig. 577, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and a ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Fig. 577) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In the 18th control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens enters the V winning device 650. The ball that enters the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 580 (a)) while flowing down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. By configuring in this way, the ball can be made to flow down smoothly regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the 18th control example, the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in the 18th control example, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 12 times, but any other number of times may be set.

As with the seventh control example described above, in the eighteenth control example, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened again (interval period between openings) is set to 5 seconds after the fifth and tenth opening operations during a small win game, and is set to 0.5 seconds at other times. This is to make it easier for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the fifth opening operation is completed during a small win game, a game guide display that emphasizes right-hand play and encourages the player to play during the interval period between openings after the fifth opening operation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set longer than usual so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 even when right-hand play is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the 10th opening operation during a small winning game.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In the 18th control example, as in the 7th control example described above, a longer special inter-open interval period is set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during a small win game. In this way, by providing multiple times for the timing of displaying the game guide display to the player during one small win game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play appropriately. In addition, when providing multiple times for displaying the game guide display, it is preferable to set the notification timing for at least the second transition to a timing that a player playing normally cannot reach. That is, as in the 7th control example described above, in the 18th control example, by continuously playing right-hand during a small win game, at least one ball can enter in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Therefore, if a normal game (continuous right-hand play) is played, the number of winning balls (10 balls) that is the end condition of the small win game will be reached during the 10th opening operation, and the small win game will end.

In other words, the inter-open interval period that is executed after the 10th opening action during a small win game is a timing that cannot be reached if the player is playing normally (continuous right-hitting game). Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing for displaying the game guide display, an unnecessarily long special inter-open interval period will not be executed for a player playing normally (continuous right-hitting game), and the small win game can be played smoothly.

In addition, when the first special inter-opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that is reached even if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed as in the 18th control example, it is preferable to determine whether the V switch 650e3 detects a ball at the timing when the first special inter-opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends) or at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special inter-opening interval period (the timing when the period required for the ball that entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball, a notification effect to notify that effect is displayed during the first special inter-opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, a game guide display is displayed as described above. This allows the special inter-opening interval period set during small winning play to be used effectively according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to configure the game guide display to be displayed even if the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the small win game ends without a predetermined number (10 balls) of balls entering the V winning device 650 during the small win game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 578. FIG. 578 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 578, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b to screw the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon to light up the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 579 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 579 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 579 (b) is an Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 579 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 579 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the entry of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 650e shown in FIG. 579(a).

As shown in FIG. 579(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (it is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a.

By configuring it this way, right-hand play can be continued during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 579(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 579(b). As shown in Figure 579(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 580, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 580 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 580 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 580(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball and is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example, as in the above-mentioned 7th control example, a game ball passes through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during a small win game, and a big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 during a small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to pass through) the V switch 650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on, the flow path is switched so that the ball that has entered the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 580(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the 18th control example is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents specified in the above-mentioned opening scenario table 202g, and the balls that have won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide a state that is maintained for a long period of time, that is, a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 580(a)), thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been made in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has elapsed), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, causing a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, prize balls (10 prize balls for one winning ball in the 18th control example) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after detection, it can be configured to be able to determine whether it passes through the V switch 650e3 or not, so it can be determined whether a big win game is executed after the small win game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port (specific area) for awarding a big win game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in the 18th control example, a small win game is executed in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for different periods and timings depending on the small win type (small win A, B, C) that is set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during a small win game (V winning expectation) can be made to differ depending on the content of the small win game executed when a small win is won. Therefore, the player can play while expecting not only to win a small win, but also to play a small win game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 581, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 581(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 581(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the 18th control example is configured so that a ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 576), down the left upper surface 650y2, and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 581(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 581(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 581(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 581(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first restricting member 651 and a second restricting member 652 for smoothing the flow of the balls after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a (see FIG. 576). The balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upper upstream side of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652, and then flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the ball that enters the opening and closing door 650f1 with force from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, and therefore it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) can be secured to align the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one ball, preventing balls from clogging the V winning device 650 and causing problems during play.

As explained above, in the 18th control example, the flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval between openings (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in the bonus game (small prize game) that is awarded when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery for the special symbol) is a predetermined discrimination result (small prize), so that the ball flowing down the variable member during the interval between openings (the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small prize game can be reliably made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, the number of opening operations (12) in one small win game is set to be greater than the number of winning balls (10 balls) required to end the small win game, so that a predetermined number (10 balls) can be won during a small win game even if only the balls flowing down the variable member enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short, a sufficient number of winning balls can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of balls from entering the V winning device 650 during a small win game.

<About the content of the performance in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example>
With reference to Figures 582 to 583, the characteristic presentation content executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be described.

In the seventh control example described above, the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not reserved and stored. In contrast, the eighteenth control example is configured to be able to reserve and store the winning information of the second special symbol (hereinafter, special symbol 2 reserve), and is different from the seventh control example in that it is configured to be able to determine (pre-read) the lottery result of the special symbol 2 reserve that is reserved and stored before the start of the jackpot game, and if there is a reserve that will win a small jackpot (V reserve), it is possible to execute a performance to notify the player that there is a V reserve during the jackpot game.

Specifically, in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), a predetermined number of reserved special symbols 2 (up to 4 in this 18th control example) can be reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and when a jackpot game is started based on the special symbol winning a jackpot or a small jackpot, the lottery results of the reserved and stored special symbol 2 are read in advance, and if a V reserved exists among them, a performance is executed in which a V icon indicating the presence of a V reserved is acquired (V icon acquisition performance). The acquired V icon is displayed in a reduced size in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the V reserved is consumed, and the V icon is enlarged during the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reserved (hereinafter referred to as the activation of the V icon), thereby informing the player that the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner has won a small jackpot before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, while the V icon is displayed in a reduced size, it is guaranteed that a small jackpot will be won on one of the reserved special charts 2, and the time-saving state will not end when the set number of fluctuations is reached without winning a big jackpot or small jackpot, so the player can enjoy playing in the time-saving state with peace of mind.

Here, an overview of the effects executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) in this 18th control example will be described. In this 18th control example, when the time-saving state is set, an effect is executed in which character 802, modeled after a hero, advances through a dungeon, and when character 802 encounters enemy character 804, modeled after a dinosaur, a reach is reached and a battle effect begins. In this battle effect, if character 802 triumphs over enemy character 804, it is announced that a big win or small win has been won.

With reference to FIG. 582(a), the display screen of the V icon acquisition effect executed during jackpot play in this 18th control example will be described. FIG. 582(a) is an example of a display screen when a V icon acquisition effect is executed during jackpot play. In this 18th control example, when execution of a V icon acquisition effect is set, a V icon acquisition effect is executed in place of the normal ending effect during the ending period of the jackpot play. By executing a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the period between the end of the final round of jackpot play and the start of the variable display of the first special pattern is drawn out.

The small display area Dm8 shows a display mode indicating that a special symbol has won the jackpot, allowing the player to recognize that they have won the jackpot with the special symbol. In addition, the small display area Dm4 shows "Hit right", providing the player with easy-to-understand guidance on how to play in the jackpot game.

In the small display area Dm14, the number of jackpot wins from the last jackpot win in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) to the present is displayed, so the more consecutive jackpot wins (consecutive jackpot wins) there are, the more the number of jackpot wins is displayed, giving the player a sense of superiority.

The small display area Dm15 displays the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently in progress. In FIG. 582(a), "ED" is displayed to indicate that the game is in the ending period, informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game is in the ending period.

In the small display area Dm9, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 (winning information of the second special pattern) reserved and stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is displayed. In FIG. 582(a), the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2, and the third reserved pattern hr3 are displayed as white reserved patterns, and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is displayed as a black reserved pattern. In this 18th control example, the configuration is such that the black reserved pattern is more likely to have won a big prize or a small prize than the white reserved pattern. Therefore, FIG. 582(a) shows a state in which the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is more likely to have won a big prize or a small prize than the first reserved pattern hr1 to the third reserved pattern hr3.

When the display of the changing special symbols starts after the big win game ends, the reserved symbols are consumed in order from the first reserved symbol hr1 to the youngest, and when the first reserved symbol hr1 is consumed, the second reserved symbol hr2 is shifted to the position of the first reserved symbol hr1 and displayed, and the third reserved symbol hr3 is shifted and displayed in the space vacated by the shift of the second reserved symbol hr2. Similarly, the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is also shifted and displayed in the space vacated by the third reserved symbol hr3. The space vacated by the shift of the fourth reserved symbol hr4 will be blank until a new reserved special symbol 2 is stored, and when a new reserved special symbol 2 is stored, the corresponding reserved symbol will be displayed.

When the V icon acquisition effect is set, an effect is started in the main display area Dm during the ending period of the big win game in which the character 802 discovers a treasure chest 810, and an effect is executed in which a V sword 803 with a "V" displayed appears from inside the treasure chest 810. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays "V icon acquisition" to clearly inform the player that the V icon acquisition effect has been executed. This V sword 803 is a V icon to inform the player that there is a V reservation (reservation for winning a small win) among the reserved special pattern 2 reservations (winning information of the second special pattern) stored in the reservation, and is also displayed in reduced size in the main display area Dm during the period in which the variable display of the special pattern after the end of the big win game is executed.

In the eighteenth control example, the treasure chest 810 shown in FIG. 582(a) is found only when the V icon acquisition effect is set, but this is not limited to this, and the treasure chest 810 may also be found in the normal ending effect. In this case, a sword not marked with a V may appear from the treasure chest 810. The sword may also be displayed in a manner that indicates the expected probability of winning a jackpot or a small jackpot in the reserved state. In the eighteenth control example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and the V icon acquisition effect may be executed during the opening period of the jackpot game or during a specific round of the jackpot game. In this way, by configuring the V icon acquisition effect to be executed at multiple times, it is possible to prevent the game during the jackpot game period from becoming monotonous.

It is also possible to configure the game so that in a specific round of a jackpot game, the character 802 shown in FIG. 582(a) finds a treasure chest 810. In this case, it is also possible to provide a pattern in which a V sword 803 appears from the treasure chest 810, and a pattern in which a display mode indicating that more rounds will be added (for example, a ball showing the number of rounds to be added) appears. By configuring it in this way, even if the conditions for executing the V icon acquisition effect are not met, the effect of finding the treasure chest 810 is executed, making it possible to make the player hopeful of acquiring a V icon, and since more rounds are added if the V icon is not acquired, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Next, referring to FIG. 582(b), this is an example of a display screen for a battle presentation when a V reserve (a reserve that will win a small prize) is consumed by the fourth change in the display of a special pattern after the end of a big prize game.

In the small display area Dm6, a reduced version of the V sword 803 acquired in the V icon acquisition performance is displayed, and the message "V acquired" is displayed to inform the player that a V reserve exists among the reserved special chart 2 reserves stored in the reserve memory.

In the main display area Dm, a battle scene begins in which the character 802 encounters an enemy character 804, and the sub-display area Ds displays "If you defeat the enemy, you win the big prize?", allowing the player to easily recognize that if the character 802 wins against the enemy character 804, he or she will win the big prize or the small prize.

Figure 583 (a) is an example of a display screen when the V icon is activated during a battle presentation. In this 18th control example, when the V icon is activated, the V sword 803 that was displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6 is enlarged in the main display area Dm, and a presentation is executed in which the character 802 uses the V sword 803 to defeat the enemy character 804. In this case, "V icon activated" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V icon has been activated.

In this way, when the V icon is activated (the V sword 803 is enlarged), the special symbol is always displayed frozen in a display mode that indicates a small win. Therefore, when the V icon is activated, the player can recognize that the changing display of the special symbol indicates a small win before the special symbol is frozen.

Figure 583 (b) is an example of a display screen for a battle effect when the display of the special symbol based on the V reservation starts and there is another V reservation among the remaining special symbol 2 reservations. In this case, unlike Figure 583 (a), a revival effect is executed in which character 802 is defeated by enemy character 804 once, and then revives and wins. When the revival effect is executed, as shown in Figure 583 (b), character 802 defeats character 804 using a normal sword 805, which is different from V sword 803. Therefore, V sword 803 continues to be displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6, and continues to be displayed in a reduced size even after the end of the big win game that is executed based on this special symbol winning the small win.

In this way, when a V reserve (a reserve that will win a small prize) is consumed, if there is another V reserve among the remaining Special Symbol 2 reserves (winning information for the second special symbol), the V icon will not be activated, thereby informing the player that there will be a consecutive win (consecutive small prize wins) with the remaining Special Symbol 2 reserves.

Also, as shown in FIG. 582(a), if only the last Special Chart 2 Reserve (the fourth reserved pattern hr4 in FIG. 582(a)) stored in the reserved memory at the time the V icon acquisition effect is executed is a V reserve, the V icon is not activated until the display of the special pattern of the Special Chart 2 Reserve corresponding to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 begins to change, so it is clear to the player that the small prize will be won with the Special Chart 2 Reserve corresponding to the fourth reserved pattern hr4, and no matter what effect is executed in the display of the special pattern change, the small prize will still be won, so the player will not be able to decide whether to win the small prize or not. There is a risk that the player's interest will wane, but as in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation begins, if there is a V reservation among the reserved special pattern 2 reservations stored in the reservation memory, it is possible to configure it so that the V icon is not activated, and by switching the target for activating the V icon to the special pattern 2 reservation that did not exist at the time the V icon acquisition performance was executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the V icon will not be activated during the display of the special pattern of the fourth reserved pattern hr4, and it is possible to get the player interested in the performance executed in the display of the change.

In the 18th control example, even if there are multiple V reservations among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, only one V icon is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and multiple V icons corresponding to the number of V reservations may be displayed.

Alternatively, when there are multiple V reserved, the V icon may be activated in the display of the special pattern based on the V reserved that is consumed first, and then the V icon may be displayed again in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6. Alternatively, in FIG. 583(a), when a V reserved exists in the reserved special pattern 2 reserved that is stored, the character 802 may continue to hold the V sword 803 for a period until the reserved V reserved is consumed.

In this way, by configuring the V icon activated based on the consumption of one V reservation to continue to be displayed until the next V reservation is consumed, even if a new V icon acquisition performance is not executed during a jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation that activated the V icon, it is possible to make the player expect that the activated V icon will continue to be displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The type of weapon used by character 802 (swords with different colors and shapes) or the type of enemy character (enemy characters with different numbers and sizes of horns) may indicate the likelihood of the V icon being activated. This configuration makes it easier for the player to predict whether the V icon will be activated, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this 18th control example, a V icon resembling a sword is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and any display mode that allows the player to recognize that there is a V reserve within the reserve may be used.

The display mode of the V sword 803 and treasure chest 810 displayed in the V icon acquisition performance may be different depending on whether there is only one V reserve in the reserve or multiple V reserves. Alternatively, the performance mode may be determined from multiple types of V icon acquisition performance performance modes based on the number of V reserves in the reserve. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the V icon acquisition performance from becoming monotonous.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example>
Next, the counters of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of this 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 584. Note that, although this example differs from the counters used in the above-mentioned control examples in that the update range of the counters is partially different, the basic configuration is the same, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the 18th control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 18 table 202ra stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 18 table 202ra, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

The first winning random number 18 table 202ra has two types: a special pattern 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 for the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 for the second special pattern. The number of random numbers that will result in a big win is the same, but the number of random numbers that will result in a small win is set to be different (see FIG. 586). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a small win different, the player's expectation of receiving a special prize (a big win or a small win) can be made different between the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. The special pattern 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 and the special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Now, referring to FIG. 586, the first winning random number 18 table 202ra will be described. FIG. 586(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 18 table 202ra, FIG. 586(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 18 table 202ra1, and FIG. 586(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2. This first winning random number 18 table 202ra is a table in which a random number value (determination value) that is determined to be a big win and a random number value (determination value) that is determined to be a small win are set in the drawing of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

Specifically, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 586(b), the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 specifies that the values of the random number counter C1 between "0 and 4" are the jackpot determination values, and other values are specified as the determination values for non-jackpots (i.e., misses). Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4," it is determined to be a jackpot.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 586(c), the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 specifies that the value of the random number counter C1 is "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, "5 to 144" as the small jackpot determination value, and "145 to 999" as the other value (i.e., miss). Then, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value is any of "5 to 144", it is determined to be a small jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is reached, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the 18th control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state where the lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special symbol and during the big win game or small win game), the value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is not a random number that is determined to be a big win or small win for a special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that is determined to be a miss for a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for a special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a jackpot with a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a jackpot with a special pattern. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are stored in the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 and the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 of the first winning random number 18 table 202ra, as described above. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the 18th control example, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb will be explained with reference to FIG. 587.

Figure 587 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb. As shown in Figure 587 (a), the 18th control example has a special pattern 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1 used to determine the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is drawn, and a special pattern 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2 used to determine the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is drawn. This allows the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the drawing of special symbol 1 to be different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the drawing of special symbol 2, or allows the ratio at which each of the multiple jackpot types is selected to be different, providing players with different playability between a game using the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and a game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 587(b), the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) will be explained. FIG. 587(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1. As shown in FIG. 587(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the jackpot type in the first jackpot type counter C2 is "jackpot A" if the random number value is any of "0 to 9", "jackpot B" if the random number value is any of "10 to 49", and "jackpot C" if the random number value is any of "50 to 99". When the time-saving state is set as the game state, if the random number value in the first winning type counter C2 is any of "0-9", the jackpot type is "jackpot D", if it is any of "10-49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and if it is any of "50-99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 10 random number values that select "Jackpot A", so the probability that "Jackpot A" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 10%.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 7, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is fewer than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 40 random number values are used to select "Jackpot B," so the probability that "Jackpot B" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 7, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a disadvantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 random number values will select "Jackpot C", so the probability that "Jackpot C" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Furthermore, compared to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state that is difficult to end. Therefore, it is a more advantageous jackpot type for the player than "Jackpot A," in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) which is set to the normal state, there is a 10% chance that a 16-round jackpot game will be selected, and a 90% chance that a 7-round jackpot game will be selected. In addition, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot will be selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends will transition to a time-saving state.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed while the time-saving state is set, 16 rounds of jackpot play is selected 50% of the time, and 7 rounds of jackpot play is selected 50% of the time. Also, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot play executed based on the winning jackpot.

In other words, winning a jackpot in the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in the normal state in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as for the game state at the time of winning a jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 587(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) will be described. FIG. 587(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2. As shown in FIG. 587(c), when the random number value is any of "0 to 99" in the first jackpot type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot E". "Jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is less than the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "jackpot E" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type "jackpot E," which is advantageous to the player, is always selected.

In the eighteenth control example, the number of types of jackpots is five, but it is not limited to this, and it may be four or less, or six or more. Also, it may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is the same. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is hit with the second special symbol, by setting a jackpot type that is executed more rounds, it is possible to make the player more excited about a hit with the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make a hit in a high probability game state more advantageous for the player, and to improve the entertainment value of the game during the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to strongly motivate the player to move to the high probability state, and to make the player play for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation rate) of each jackpot type may be the same, and only the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be different. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of obtaining the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 by targeting a specific counter value from being carried out with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small win type counter C5 determines the type of small win when a special pattern small win occurs and determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the 18th control example), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which the lottery (change) of the special pattern can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special pattern and during the big win game or small win game).

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. If the result of the big win lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection 18 table 202rf (see FIG. 588) for determining the type of small win to be executed is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the small win type selection 18 table 202rf will be explained with reference to FIG. 588. FIG. 588 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 18 table 202rf. As shown in FIG. 588, the small win type selection 18 table 202rf stipulates that three types of small wins A, B, and C are selected as the small win type of the second special pattern according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 49", the small win type is "small win A (V passing big win A)", when it is either "50 to 79", the small win type is "small win B (V passing big win B)", and when it is either "80 to 99", the small win type is "small win C (V passing big win E)".

Here, for each small win type (small win A, B, C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during the small win game, the type of the big win game to be executed after the small win game ends is set. In the case of small win A, the big win A (16R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win A is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 16R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 7 times, or the small win A is won twice, the small win B is won 5 times, or the small win C is won 3 times) is set. In addition, in the case of small win B, the big win B (7R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win B is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 7 times, or the small win A is won twice, the small win B is won 5 times, or the small win C is won 3 times) is set. In addition, in the case of a small win C, a big win E (a big win with 10R time reduction) is set, and after the small win C is executed, a big win is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to a 10R open state, and then a time reduction state (a period in which the special pattern changes 7 times, or until the small win A is won twice, the small win B is won 5 times, or the small win C is won 3 times) is set.

In this way, the content of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends can be changed depending on the type of small win selected. Specifically, small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (16R), while small win B is set as less advantageous than the above-mentioned small win A because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (7R).

In the 18th control example, the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state that is set after the end of the big win game via the small win game are the same for each small win type, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state that is set may be different depending on the small win type.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the 18th control example, the time-saving state can be ended with a time-saving end condition that is established based on the result of the second special pattern lottery (such as the number of times small win A is won, the number of times small win B is won, or the number of times small win C is won), or a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) change. By configuring in this way, if a jackpot is won with one or more reserved balls for the first special pattern and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state will not end even if the first special pattern (special pattern 1) changes after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes and a small prize (small prize A, small prize B, small prize C) that can execute a big prize game is won, the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special symbol changes, and the time-saving state can be ended before the time-saving end condition is met, so that it is possible to suppress the repeated execution of a game in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through a specific area during a small prize game until a favorable small prize (small prize A) is won during the time-saving state until the second end condition is met.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd will be explained with reference to FIG. 589(a). FIG. 589(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd. As shown in FIG. 589(a), the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd defines the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and the time-saving variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 used when the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in the 18th control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Figure 589 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 provided in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd. As shown in Figure 589 (b), the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 defines the pattern type, lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with the variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 589(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "miss", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified to correspond to a short miss with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds in the range of "0 to 139", to correspond to a false miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "140 to 149", to correspond to various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the range of "150 to 179", and to correspond to a super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are associated with it, the range of "30 to 189" is associated with it, super reaches with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds are associated with it, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with it, special reaches with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds are associated with it.

Next, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is specified for the entire range, and if the lottery result is a "big win or small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., a long win with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is specified for the entire range.

In this way, depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, one of the change patterns with a change time between 7 seconds and 180 seconds is set, and by sending a command indicating this change pattern to the voice lamp control device 113, a change performance corresponding to the change time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 589(b), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 is specified so that when the pattern type is special pattern 1 and the lottery result is a miss, the order of most likely to be selected is 7 seconds (selection rate of about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). Also, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the order of most likely to be selected is 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a correlation between the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not they will win a jackpot based on the selected fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).

In the eighteenth control example, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot that is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different variation pattern tables may be used when the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot A) and when the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating other jackpots is won. This allows the player to be interested in the variation time of the special symbol, since the longer the variation time set in the executed variation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to be for the player.

Also, the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a normal jackpot is won may be configured to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time more easily than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a guaranteed jackpot is won. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result when a jackpot is won with a short variation time, and keeps the player excited until the end even when a short variation time is selected.

Next, the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 provided in the fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd will be explained with reference to FIG. 590. FIG. 590 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2. As shown in FIG. 590, the time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 defines the pattern type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 590, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 1-4, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short miss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short big win with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a miss with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the entire range. In addition, if the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a miss with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds; if the lottery result is a "small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 160," a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a range of "161 to 198," a long and small win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; and if the lottery result is a "jackpot," a long and big win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

Returning to FIG. 584, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). Also, when the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the 18th control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the second winning random number 18 table 202rc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is set by the second winning random number 18 table 202rc, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. Note that, in the 18th control example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is configured to always be constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the second winning random number 18 table 202rc may be provided with two types: one for a low probability of a normal pattern (period when the normal pattern is in its normal state), and one for a high probability of a normal pattern winning that is higher than the low probability (period when the normal pattern is in its time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a win can be changed between the low probability of a normal pattern and the high probability of a normal pattern.

When the ball passes through the normal start hole 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained and it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state. If the game state is in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for three seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for 30 seconds.

If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state, and if the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state and the time when the variable start of the second pattern is also in a time-saving state, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of times of the second ball entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the normal symbol variation time and the operation of the electric device 640a when a winning combination is selected (opening period and number of times the second ball entrance 640 is opened) are configured to be variable depending on the set game state. When the game state when the normal symbol starts to vary is in the time-saving state, the time of the variation display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to the normal state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second symbol that starts to vary during the time-saving state is a win and the time-saving state is also set at the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times) compared to other cases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A table (not shown) that stores random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In the 18th control example, the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a are set differently depending on the game state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change and the game state when the electric device 640a starts to operate based on the winning of the normal symbol. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a discrimination means may be provided that determines that the time-saving state is continuously set from the time when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change to the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means may be used to set the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a.

As described above, in the 18th control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player, the time-saving state must be set at both the start of the normal pattern change and the start of the operation of the electric role 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the normal state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the time-saving state was set, or when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the time-saving state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the normal state was set, the change of the second pattern and the operation of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player are executed based on the lottery of one second pattern when they span multiple game states. It is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of main process 7 (see Figure 325).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 585(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 585(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least the first win random number 18 table 202ra, the big win type selection 18 table 202rb, the second win random number 18 table 202rc, the variable pattern selection 18 table 202rd, the time-saving grant 18 table 202re, the small win type selection 18 table 202rf, the opening scenario 7 table 202fg, the time-saving win random number 18 table 202rh, and the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri as part of the fixed value data.

Incidentally, among the fixed value data stored in ROM 202, the first win random number 18 table 202ra, the big win type selection 18 table 202rb, the second win random number 18 table 202rc, the variable pattern selection 18 table 202rd, and the small win type selection 18 table 202rf have already been explained in detail, so their explanation will be omitted.

The time-saving granting 18 table 202re is a data table that is referenced when multiple time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state are set differently for each type of jackpot won, and is referenced when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 326), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re will be explained with reference to FIG. 587(d). FIG. 587(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. The 18th control example has jackpot types (jackpots A, B, D, E) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and jackpot types (jackpot C) in which a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (a normal state is set), and as shown in FIG. 587(d), multiple time-saving end conditions are stipulated corresponding to each jackpot type.

The 18th control example has a first time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, a second time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize A is won in the special pattern drawing, a third time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize B is won in the special pattern drawing, and a fourth time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize C is won in the special pattern drawing.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot types A, B, and E, the time-saving end condition is set to "7" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "2" in the small win A counter 203fg, "5" in the small win B counter 203fh, and "3" in the small win C counter 203ra. In the case of jackpot D, the time-saving end condition is set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "4" in the small win A counter 203fg, "10" in the small win B counter 203fh, and "7" in the small win C counter 203ra.

As described above, in the 18th control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the values to be set for the various counters described above are not specified for jackpot C in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. In this way, by making the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific time-saving content even if the player is notified in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play with heightened motivation to play until the end (until the time-saving state ends).

In the 18th control example, the time-saving state is configured to end when a jackpot with a special symbol is won in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. However, since the time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the type of jackpot set, it is omitted from the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. However, the time-saving end condition described above (the time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot with a special symbol) may also be configured to specify a value in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re.

Furthermore, in this 18th control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving) is set even when the time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, but the time-saving end condition set for the second time-saving prize will be explained with reference to the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri, which will be described later. Note that in this 18th control example, the time-saving end condition for the time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set based on the time-saving prize being won is set with reference to the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri, not the time-saving granting 18 table 202re, but without being limited to this, the time-saving end condition corresponding to the second time-saving prize may be specified in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re.

In the 18th control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first to fourth time-saving end conditions is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end conditions. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the small prize is won and the V prize winning device is activated (the total number of times the values of the small prize A counter 203fg, the small prize B counter 203fh, and the small prize C counter 203ra are added together) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

In addition, in the 18th control example, a control is used in which the time-saving state is terminated when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a configuration in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are satisfied may also be used. In this case, a number-of-time-saving end conditions determining means for determining the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions and a condition-attainment determining means for determining whether the number of satisfied conditions determined by the number-of-time-saving end conditions determining means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two) may be provided, and the time-saving state may be terminated (a normal state may be set) when the number of satisfied conditions is determined by the condition-attainment determining means to have reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

Open scenario 7 table 202fg is the same as open scenario 7 table 202fg in the seventh control example described above, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

The time-saving random number 18 table 202rh is a data table in which the value (judgment value) of the first winning random number counter C1, which is judged to be a time-saving win in the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, is specified in correspondence with the game state. Here, the contents of the time-saving random number 18 table 202rh will be explained with reference to FIG. 591(a). FIG. 591(a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving random number 18 table 202rh.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol, when the game state is normal (low probability state for special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set to a range of "3, 4, 140 to 287" as the judgment value for a time-saving win, and for other game states, no judgment value for a time-saving win is set.

Here, in this 18th control example, the judgment of the big win and the judgment of the time-saving win can be executed in a single special pattern lottery. Also, the judgment of the small win and the time-saving win can be executed in a overlapping manner. Therefore, for example, if the acquired value of the first win random number counter C1 is "3, 4", it is judged as a big win in the big win judgment executed using the first win random number 18 table 202ra (see FIG. 586 (a)), and it is judged as a time-saving win in the time-saving win judgment executed using the time-saving win random number 18 table 202rh (see FIG. 591 (a)), so that both the big win and the time-saving win are won. Similarly, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "140 to 144," a small win is determined in the small win determination performed using the special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 (see FIG. 586 (c)), and a time-saving win is determined in the time-saving win determination performed using the time-saving win random number 18 table 202rh (see FIG. 591 (a)), resulting in a double win in both the small win and the time-saving win.

As described above, in this 18th control example, the jackpot (small jackpot) determination is performed after the time-saving winning determination is performed, so in the case of a double win, the jackpot (small jackpot) is won in the time-saving state. Therefore, a more advantageous bonus can be awarded to the player compared to winning the jackpot (small jackpot) without winning the time-saving state.

In this 18th control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in one special pattern lottery is used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is the winning determination value in either determination, a double win is possible; however, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the right to execute a special pattern lottery is acquired, the value of the random number counter for determining a big win (small win) and the value of the random number counter for determining a time-saving win may be obtained separately, and the obtained values may be used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win.

The time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in accordance with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1.

Now, with reference to FIG. 591(b), the contents of the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri will be explained. FIG. 591(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri. As shown in FIG. 591(b), the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri specifies a time-saving type corresponding to the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies a time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type.

Specifically, time-saving A is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, a time-saving end condition is specified in which "1" is set to the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A. In other words, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set when the process of updating the value of the time-saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set at the time of the time-saving win, and then a jackpot determination is made in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set until the special pattern variation starts to show the result of the special pattern lottery.

In other words, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving feature only for the purpose of making the jackpot determination in the special pattern lottery during the time-saving feature (making a special lottery) during the time-saving feature. Therefore, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible for only the jackpot determination to be made during the time-saving feature without the player realizing that they have won the time-saving feature, so that if the player wins the jackpot, an unexpected bonus (the jackpot gameplay content, the time-saving feature after the jackpot game ends) can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 591(b), in this 18th control example, when the time-saving type is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving type A is always set as the time-saving type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a time-saving type different from time-saving type A may be selectable depending on the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. In this case, for example, the time-saving type A is specified as the time-saving type for the range of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 94", and the time-saving type Z different from time-saving type A is specified as the time-saving type for the range of "95 to 99", and a time-saving end condition in which "100" is set to the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is specified as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving type Z.

By configuring it in this way, in some cases where a time-saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving state for continuing to execute the second special symbol lottery, rather than a time-saving state for executing a special lottery, providing players with a more unexpected experience.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 18th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 585(b). FIG. 585(b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 585(b), the RAM 203 in this 18th control example differs from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that a small win C counter 203ra is added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The small win C counter 203ra is a counter for counting the number of times a small win with small win C set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (1) specified in the time-saving grant 18 table 202re is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, in the small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405 in FIG. 597) executed in place of the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315), if it is determined that the small win type of the small win won this time is not small win B (S40510 in FIG. 597: No), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 203ra after the decrement is 0 (S40514 in FIG. 597: Yes), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S40507 in FIG. 597). In the 18th control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of times of special pattern fluctuation is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S40606 in FIG. 596). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition that refers to the value of the small win C counter 203ra (the fourth time-saving end condition) among the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the value of the small win C counter 203fra is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small win C counter 203ra is continued even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

Next, referring to FIG. 592(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 18th control example will be described. FIG. 592(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 592(a), the ROM 222 of this 18th control example differs from the ROM 222 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(a)) in that a performance mode selection 18 table 222ra and a V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb have been added. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 593(a), the contents stipulated in the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra will be explained. FIG. 593(a) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents stipulated in the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 593(a), the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra stipulates a normal performance mode setting table 222ra1, a time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2, and a time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3.

The normal performance mode setting 222ra1 (not shown) is a table that is referenced when a special symbol variable display is executed in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). It sets the performance mode based on the type of variable pattern set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Figure 593 (b) shows the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2. The time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 is a table that is referenced when a special symbol variable display is executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The performance mode is set based on the variable pattern type set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Figure 593 (c) shows the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3. The time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3 is a table that is referenced when a special symbol variable display is executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The performance mode is set based on the variable pattern type set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Details will be described later, but in this 18th control example, in the time-saving state, when the activation of the above-mentioned V icon (the V icon notifying the player that a small jackpot has been won in the changing display of the special pattern being executed is notified by enlarging the display, notifying the player that a small jackpot has been won in the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3) is executed, and in other cases, the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 is referenced.

For example, in the time-saving state, when "long/small win" is set as the fluctuation pattern type, in the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra3, the probability that "win" will be selected is 150/199 (approximately 75%), the probability that "revival win" will be selected is 40/199 (approximately 20%), and the probability that "premium performance" will be selected is 9/199 (approximately 5%). On the other hand, in the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3, the probability that "win" will be selected is 190/199 (approximately 95%), the probability that "revival win" will be selected is 9/199 (approximately 5%), and the premium performance will not be selected.

This configuration makes it easier for players to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated depending on the presentation mode, making it possible to create interest in the presentation mode.

In the 18th control example, the ratio of the presentation modes selected when the V icon is activated is different from the ratio of the presentation modes selected when the V icon is not activated, but this is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to provide a presentation mode that can be selected only when the V icon is activated.

Next, the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb will be described with reference to FIG. 594. The V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period of a jackpot game when a jackpot game is started and a reserve (V reserve) that will win a small jackpot is present among the reserved special pattern 2 reserves (winning information of the second special pattern) that are reserved and stored.

As shown in FIG. 594, whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect is determined based on the position of the V reserve, the number of reserves, and the value of the effect counter CS1. The position of the V reserve is determined by which of the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a the V reserve is stored in. For example, if the special chart 2 reserve stored in the fourth area is a V reserve, the reserve 4 column is referenced.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is most likely to be executed when the V reserve is stored in the fourth area, followed by the third area, the second area, and the first area, in that order.

By configuring it in this way, a period of time can be given to the player to acquire a new Special Chart 2 Reserve before the V Reserve is consumed, so that when the V Icon is activated, it is easier to leave behind many Special Chart 2 Reserves that have not been read ahead at the time the V Icon acquisition performance that acquired the V Icon is executed, making it difficult for the player to predict the lottery results for the Special Chart 2 Reserve after the V Icon is activated.

In addition, when V reserves are stored in the first area, the ease with which the V icon acquisition effect is executed varies depending on the number of reserves, and it is configured so that the V icon acquisition effect is more likely to be executed when the number of reserves is 1 than when the number of reserves is 4.

By configuring it in this way, when a V icon acquired by a V icon acquisition performance is activated during the variable display of special symbols after the end of a jackpot game, it becomes easier to leave many of the Special Chart 2 Reserves remaining at the time the V icon is activated that have not been read ahead at the time the V icon acquisition performance that acquired the V icon is executed, making it difficult for players to predict the lottery results for the Special Chart 2 Reserves after the V icon is activated.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the V icon acquisition effect may be most easily executed when the V reserve is stored in the first area, followed by the second area, the third area, and the fourth area in that order. Also, when the V reserve is stored in the first area, the V icon acquisition effect may be less easily executed when the reserve number is 1 than when the reserve number is 4.

Next, referring to FIG. 592(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 592(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 18th control example differs from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223ra, a V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb, and a V icon display flag 223rc have been added. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set on in the V icon acquisition performance setting process (see FIG. 602) and is set off in the ending process (see FIG. 603), details of which will be described later.

The V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON when the V icon acquisition effect is executed in the ending process (see FIG. 603), and while it is set to ON, the V icon is displayed in a reduced size even after the jackpot game has ended, and is set to OFF when the V icon is activated in the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 606).

Next, referring to FIG. 595, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example will be described. FIG. 595 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 595, the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example is configured to reserve and store the winning information of the second special symbol in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, compared to the above-mentioned 7th control example. Therefore, when the time-saving end condition is established in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved (winning information of the second special symbol) is acquired in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol), it becomes possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot with the special symbol 2 reserved in the normal game state (low probability state of normal symbol). Therefore, in such a case, it differs from the 7th control example in that the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends and that the small jackpot C is added, and the other game flows are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the 18th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 596 to Fig. 606. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those of the control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned seventh control example will be omitted. Also, among the control processes that are the same as those of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the main control device 113 in the above-mentioned seventh control example, some control processes are given different reference numerals for convenience of description, but detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 596, update process 18 (S48253) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing this update process 18 (S48253). This update process 18 (S48253) is a process executed in place of update process 7 (S8253) executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210 in FIG. 318) of the seventh control example described above, and differs from update process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) in that a configuration related to the small win C has been added, but the other processes are the same.

Specifically, after executing the process of S40605 in FIG. 596 (corresponding to the process of S10605 in FIG. 319 in the seventh control example), a configuration has been added in which the small win A counter, small win B counter, and small win C counter are set to 0 (S40606).

Next, referring to FIG. 597, the small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing this small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405). This small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405) is a process executed in place of the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the seventh control example described above, and differs from the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) in that a process related to small win C has been added, but the other processes are the same.

Specifically, after executing the process of S40505 (corresponding to the process of S10505 in FIG. 321 in the seventh control example), a configuration has been added in which the small win A counter, small win B counter, and small win C counter are set to 0 (S40506).

In addition, in the process of S40510 (corresponding to the process of S10510 in FIG. 321 in the seventh control example), if it is determined that the small win is not a B (S40510: No), the value of the small win C counter 203ra is decremented by 1 (S40513), and it is determined whether the small win C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514). In the process of S40514, if it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514: Yes), the process proceeds to S40505, and if it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203ra is not 0 (S40514: No), the process proceeds to S40508.

Next, the processing contents of the start winning process 18 (S40105) will be explained with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the start winning process 18 (S40105). In this start winning process 18 (S40105), the only difference from the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) described above is that when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value of the small win type counter C5 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S40712), and pre-reading process 18 (S40713) is executed instead of pre-reading process 5 (S653). Since the processing contents are otherwise the same, detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the pre-reading process 18 (S40713) will be explained with reference to FIG. 599. FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-reading process 18 (S40713). When this pre-reading process 18 (S40713) is executed, first, the various counter values, namely the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small win type counter C5, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S40801). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-reading reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (S40802).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the time when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S40803). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S40803: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S40804), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S40803 is that it is not a big win (S40803: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small win (S40805), and if it is determined that it is not a small win (S40805: No), a winning command including information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S40807), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40805 that a small prize has been won (S40805: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the type of small prize and the variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S40806), and this processing ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S40804, S40806, or S40807 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the various counter values read out by the processing of S40801 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S11501) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 325).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which it changes the display mode of the reserved balls (for example, by changing the color of the reserved balls to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or it displays a preview pattern or the like before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning/losing judgment (whether or not they have won a big prize or a small prize).

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot or time-saving win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot or time-saving win has occurred, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation of a jackpot win even with special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, with reference to Figs. 600 to 606, the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 18th control example will be explained. This 18th control example differs from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that it adds a command determination process 18 (see Fig. 600), a jackpot-related process 18 (see Fig. 601), and a variable display setting process 18 (see Fig. 604), but is otherwise the same. The same process contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 600, the command determination process 18 (S44112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 600 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 18 (S44112). This command determination process 18 (S44112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110, as described above.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S44301). In the process of S44301, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S44301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S44302), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S44303), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S44301 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S44301: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S44304). Then, if a stop type command has been received (S44304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to on (S44305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S44306), and this processing ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S44304, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S44304: No), then it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S44307). Then, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S44307: Yes), the value contained in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 (the reserved number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special pattern) or the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203ra (the reserved number of times N2 of the variable display based on the second special pattern) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223d or the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223e of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S44308). In addition, in the process of S44308, a display reserved ball count command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223ra. After the process of S44308 ends, this process ends.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial entry), or when a lottery for a special pattern is held, so that each time a initial entry is detected or a lottery for a special pattern is held, the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 by processing S44308. Therefore, even if the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223ra of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223ra of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected at the time of detecting the start winning or drawing the special pattern, and can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Note that when the process of S44308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223ra. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S44307 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S44307: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S44311). If it is determined in the process of S44311 that a winning information command has been received (S44311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of ball entry port where the new initial winning was detected, and information indicating the lottery result) is stored in the corresponding memory area of the winning information storage area 223a (S44312), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S44311 that a winning information command has not been received (S44311: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to a jackpot (any of a jackpot start command, a round number command, or an ending command) has been received (S44313). Then, if it is determined that a command related to a jackpot has been received (S44313: Yes), jackpot-related process 18 is executed to execute control corresponding to the type of command related to the jackpot (S44314), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot-related process 18 (S44314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 601.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S44313 that a command related to a jackpot has not been received (S44313: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S44315), and this processing is terminated. In the processing of S44315, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114.

Next, referring to FIG. 601, we will explain the jackpot-related process 18 (S44314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing this jackpot-related process 18 (S44314).

In the jackpot-related process 18, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S42101), and if a jackpot start command has been received (S42101: Yes), a display opening command for starting an opening performance is set (S42106). The display opening command set in the process of S42106 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4112) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts an opening performance in the third pattern display device 81 to notify the start of a jackpot.

After processing S42106, it is determined whether the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107: Yes), processing S42108 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation (reservation that wins a small prize) starts, if there is a V reservation among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations, the small prize can be notified without activating the acquired V icon. Therefore, when the V icon display flag 223rc is on at the start of the big prize game, it means that a V icon was acquired in a previously executed big prize game, and the small prize was won without the V icon being activated. Since the player already knows that a consecutive win (continuous small prize wins) will occur because the V icon was not activated, when the V icon display flag 223rc is on, the V icon acquisition performance (see FIG. 582(a)) is not executed.

In the 18th control example, if a V icon is already displayed at the start of a jackpot game, the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during that jackpot game, but this is not limited to the above, and the V icon acquisition effect (see FIG. 582(a)) may be executed even if a V icon is already displayed at the start of a jackpot game. For example, if a V icon is already displayed at the start of a jackpot game and there are multiple V reservations among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations (winning information for the second special pattern), a new V icon acquisition effect may be executed and a V icon may be added.

If it is determined in the processing of S42107 that the V icon display flag 223rc is not on (S42107: No), the V icon acquisition effect setting processing is executed (S42108). Details of the V icon acquisition effect setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 602.

On the other hand, in the process of S42101, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S42101: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S42102). Then, if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S42102: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S42104). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts a new round performance in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S42104, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42102 that the round count command has not been received (S42102: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S42103). Then, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S42103: Yes), an ending process is executed to set the presentation mode of the ending presentation (S42105), and this process ends. Details of the ending process (S42105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 603.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42103 that an ending command has not been received (S42103: No), this processing is terminated. By executing this jackpot-related processing 18 (see FIG. 601), appropriate control can be executed in response to various commands related to the jackpot.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is executed when a jackpot game start command is received, but this is not limited to the above, and it may be executed when a round number command is received, or when an ending command is received. By configuring it in this way, it is also possible to read in advance the lottery results for the special chart 2 reserve acquired during the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 602, the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 602 is a flowchart showing the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108). This V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is a process executed in the jackpot-related process 18 (see FIG. 601), and is a process for determining whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the V icon acquisition performance setting process is executed, first, the winning information of the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a is obtained (S42201). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation begins. When the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information based on the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is stored in this winning information storage area 223a in order from the first area. The winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is set when the main control device 110's pre-reading process 18 (S40713 in FIG. 599) is executed, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) of the main control device 110.

The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for the reserved balls, etc., before the change begins. Each time the voice lamp control device 113 executes the change display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of this winning information storage area 223a is shifted one by one (the winning information stored in the second area is moved to the first area) (see S4904, S4908 in FIG. 182). This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to reliably determine when the special pattern change corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

When the winning information is acquired in S42201, it is next determined whether the winning information (reserved 4) stored in the fourth area is a small prize winning (S42202). If reserved 4 is not a small prize winning, or if there is no reserved 4 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the fourth area) (S42202: No), it is determined whether the winning information (reserved 3) stored in the third area is a small prize winning (S42206). If reserved 3 is not a small prize winning, or if there is no reserved 3 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the third area) (S42206: No), it is determined whether the winning information (reserved 2) stored in the second area is a small prize winning (S42207). If Reserve 2 is not a small prize winning entry, or if there is no Reserve 2 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the second area) (S42207: No), it is determined whether the winning information (Reserve 1) stored in the first area is a small prize winning entry (S42208). If Reserve 1 is not a small prize winning entry, or if there is no Reserve 1 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the first area) (S42208: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S42202, if it is determined that reserved 4 is a small jackpot winning (S42202: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition performance during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 4 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 4 column in the V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition performance based on the value of the performance counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the process of S42206, if it is determined that reserved 3 is a small jackpot winning (S42206: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 3 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 3 column in the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect based on the value of the effect counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the process of S42207, if it is determined that reserved 2 is a small jackpot winning (S42207: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 3 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 2 column of the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect based on the value of the effect counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the processing of S42208, if it is determined that reserved 1 is a small jackpot winning (S42208: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 1 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 1 column of the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect based on the value of the effect counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In this way, in this 18th control example, the lottery results are determined in advance (pre-read) starting with the special symbol 2 reserve (winning information of the second special symbol) that is consumed last after the big win game ends, and if there is a V reserve, it is decided at that point whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect. For example, if there are V reserves in reserves 2 and 4, it is decided whether or not to set the V icon acquisition effect when it is determined that reserve 4 is a small win. In this case, if it is decided not to execute the V icon acquisition effect, even if reserve 2 is a V reserve, the configuration is such that no decision is made as to whether or not to execute a new V icon acquisition effect.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation starts to change, it is determined whether or not to activate the acquired V icon. Therefore, for example, even if the V icon acquisition performance is executed based on reservation 4 being a V reservation, it is possible to activate the V icon when the V reservation of reservation 2 is consumed.

In the 18th control example, the lottery results are determined starting from the special symbol 2 reserve (winning information of the second special symbol) that is consumed last after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the lottery results may be determined starting from the special symbol 2 reserve that is consumed first after the jackpot game ends. Also, if there is even one V reserve, the lottery results for the subsequent special symbol 2 reserves are not determined, but they may be determined.

When the process of S42203 ends, the process of S42204 is executed. In the process of S42204, it is determined whether or not the performance mode to be executed during the ending period determined in the process of S42203 includes a V icon acquisition performance, and if the V icon acquisition performance is not included (S42204: No), the process of S42205 is skipped and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42204 that a V icon acquisition performance is to be performed (S42204: Yes), the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set to on (S42205), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 603, the ending process (S42105) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice and lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing the ending process (S42105). This ending process (S42105) is a process executed in the jackpot-related process 18 (see FIG. 601), and is a process for executing the presentation during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the ending process (S42105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is on or not (S42301). If it is determined that the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is not on (S42301: No), a normal display ending performance execution command is set (S42305), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42301 that the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is on (S42301: Yes), a display V icon acquisition performance execution command is set (S42302), the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set to off (S42303), the V icon display flag 223rc is set to on (S42304), and this processing ends.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the big win game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 580(a)) during a small win game, or may be executed during a period other than the ending period of the big win game. Alternatively, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern. In addition, multiple execution timings of the V icon acquisition effect may be set, and the timing at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed may be set randomly. With this configuration, the player cannot predict the timing at which the V icon acquisition effect will be executed, which prevents the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, referring to FIG. 604, the variable display setting process 18 (S44113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 18 (S44113). This variable display setting process 18 (S44113) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 174), and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process 18, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S42401). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (i.e., it is off) (S42401: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S42407. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S42401 that the variation start flag 223c is on (S42401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S42402), and then, in the process of S44303 of the command determination process 18 (see FIG. 600), the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S42403).

Then, a performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) is executed to set the performance mode of the performance executed in the third pattern display device 81. Details of this performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) will be described later with reference to FIG. 605.

Then, based on the presentation mode set in S42404, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S42405). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation presentation so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Then, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S42406), and the process proceeds to S42407. In the process of S42406, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, etc.

In the process of S42406, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on or not (S42407). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S42407: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S42407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S42408), and then in the processing of S44306 of the command determination processing 18 (see FIG. 600), the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S42409). Next, based on the stop type obtained in the processing of S42409, a display stop type command is set (S42410), and this processing is terminated. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 is controlled so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern stop with the stop type indicated by this display stop type command.

Next, referring to FIG. 605, the performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 605 is a flowchart showing the performance mode selection process 18 (S42404). This performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604), and is a process for setting the performance mode of the performance executed in the third pattern display device 81.

When the performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) is executed, first, it is determined whether the game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (S42501). The current game state is determined based on the information stored in the game state storage area 223f, and if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving state (i.e., the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols)) (S42501: No), the performance mode is set by referring to the normal performance mode setting table 222ra1 (not shown) specified in the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of S42501 determines that the time-saving state is in effect (S42501: Yes), the process executes the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) and ends this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 606, the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 606 is a flowchart showing the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502). This time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) is a process executed in the performance mode selection process 18 (see FIG. 605), and is a process for setting the performance mode of the performance executed in the third pattern display device 81 when the time-saving state is set.

When the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) is executed, first, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery that is about to start is a small win or not (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small win (S42601: No), the performance mode is determined from the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) and the value of the performance counter CS1 (S42609), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42601 that it is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not on (i.e., it is off), the processing proceeds to S42609. Note that a state in which the V icon display flag 223rc is off means that the V icon has not been acquired.

In the process of S42602, if it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602: Yes), the winning information is obtained from the winning information storage area 223a (S42603), and it is determined whether or not there is a reserve (V reserve) that will win a small prize in the obtained winning information (S42604). If there is no V reserve (S42604: No), the execution of the V icon activation performance (see FIG. 583(a)) is set (S42605), the V icon display flag 223rc is set to off (S42606), and the performance mode is determined from the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3 based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) and the value of the performance counter CS1 (S42607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42604 that there is a V reservation (S42604: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is a fluctuation pattern for a long/small win (S42608), and if it is not a fluctuation pattern for a long/small win (S42608: No), the process proceeds to S42605. If it is determined in the processing of S42608 that it is a fluctuation pattern for a long/small win (S42608: Yes), the process proceeds to S42609.

In this way, in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern change based on the V reservation starts, it is determined whether or not there is a V reservation among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations, and if there is a V reservation, it is determined whether the change pattern of the special pattern change that will be executed from now on is a specific change pattern, and it is configured to refer to different performance mode setting tables when the V icon is activated and when the V icon is not activated.

In this way, when a V icon has been acquired and the display of a special pattern based on a V reserve begins, it is possible to determine whether or not to activate the V icon, so it is possible to activate the V icon using the special pattern 2 reserve (winning information for the second special pattern), which did not exist at the time the V icon acquisition performance was executed when the V icon was acquired.

Here, for example, if the Special 2 reserve that is to be consumed last among the Special 2 reserves that are predicted at the time when the V icon acquisition effect is executed is the only V reserve (e.g., reserve 4), the V icon will not be activated until that Special 2 reserve is consumed. Therefore, even if the V icon is not activated, at the time when the special pattern based on the Special 2 reserve of reserve 4 starts to change, the player will recognize that this change is a small win, and since it will remain a small win no matter what effect is executed, there is a risk that the player will not be interested in the effects executed during the change.

However, as in the 18th control example, by configuring the special symbol 2 reserve that did not exist at the time when the V icon acquisition effect in which the V icon was acquired is executed to be the target for activating the V icon, even in the special symbol change display when it is clear that a small jackpot has been won regardless of whether the V icon is activated as described above, if the V icon is not activated, it is clear that a V reserve exists among the remaining newly acquired special symbol 2 reserves (i.e., it is confirmed that there will be consecutive wins (successive small jackpot wins)), so it is possible to get the player interested in whether the V icon will be activated or not, and to draw attention to the effect executed during the change.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the performance mode setting table referenced when the V icon is activated is different from the performance mode setting table referenced when the V icon is not activated. Specifically, in the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3 referenced when the V icon is activated, the proportion of revival performances selected in long and short wins is set low compared to the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 referenced when the V icon is not activated, and a premium win is not selected.

This configuration makes it easier for players to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated based on the presentation mode that has been executed, and by making the player interested in the presentation that is executed during the variable display of the special pattern even when the V icon has been acquired, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

As explained above, in this 18th control example, during the execution of a jackpot game, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserve (winning information of the second special symbol) stored (stored) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (pre-read), and if a reserve that is a small jackpot win (V reserve) exists, a presentation to notify the player that a V reserve exists is possible, and this technical concept unique to this 18th control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of pre-reading the lottery result of the reserved special pattern 2, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the V icon acquisition effect based on the result of pre-reading the winning information of the reserved first special pattern (reserved special pattern 1), or to set the V icon acquisition effect based on the result of pre-reading both reserved special pattern 1 and reserved special pattern 2.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed during a period other than when a jackpot game is being played. For example, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed during the variable display of a special pattern. By configuring in this way, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of a special pattern to indicate that the lottery result is a miss, even if the special pattern to indicate a miss is displayed stationary, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play. The V icon acquisition effect may also be executed during a period when a small win game is being played.

In the 18th control example, the V reservation is a reservation that will win a small prize, but this is not limited to this, and a reservation that will win a big prize may be a V reservation. Or, the V reservation may be a reservation that will win a time-saving prize.

In this 18th control example, a "V icon" is displayed as a notification mode to indicate that a V reservation exists among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, but this is not limited to this, and a notification may be made using a character, or by changing the background, and any display mode that can notify the player that a V reservation exists will suffice.

In this first variant, when there is a V reservation among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, the V icon is displayed, that is, a notification mode for notifying the player of advantageous information is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may also be such that a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information is displayed. For example, in a gaming machine (so-called V-variable machine) in which the second special symbol is consumed with priority over the first special symbol and the probability of a jackpot winning with the first special symbol and a jackpot winning with the second special symbol being set to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variable state (high probability state of the special symbol)) is different, when a probability variable jackpot (a jackpot type in which a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends) with the first special symbol is won in a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol), if there is a reserved first special symbol that will win a normal jackpot (a jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends) among the reserved first special symbols, a notification mode (for example, an icon displayed as "danger") for notifying the player that there is a reserved symbol that will win a normal jackpot may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player aware that consuming the reserved first special symbol will put him at a disadvantage, and the player can play without interrupting the reserved second special symbol.

Also, the system may be configured to display a notification mode that notifies the player in advance that any of the second to fourth time-saving end conditions will be met within the reserved ball. By configuring the system in this way, if there is any special symbol 2 reserved (winning information for the second special symbol) remaining after the time-saving end conditions are met, the player can expect to win a small prize with the remaining reserved ball. By allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time-saving end conditions will be met within the reserved ball, the player can be encouraged to try to accumulate the special symbol 2 reserved balls up to the upper limit before the variable display of the special symbol that meets the time-saving end conditions ends.

In a gaming machine that provides a player with a special privilege (for example, a time-saving state is set) when a predetermined number of consecutive misses are won in the special pattern lottery (so-called ceiling), an icon (for example, a time-saving icon) may be displayed to notify the player that the special privilege will be provided before the predetermined number of times the ceiling is reached. In this case, if a time-saving state is won before the ceiling is reached and a time-saving state equivalent to the time-saving state provided by the ceiling being reached is set, the time-saving state may be set without activating the time-saving icon, and the time-saving state that activates the time-saving icon may be set after the time-saving state provided by the time-saving win ends. In a gaming machine that resets the ceiling count when a time-saving win is won, the time-saving icon displayed based on the fact that the predetermined number of times before the ceiling is reached may be activated in the variable display of the special pattern when the time-saving win is won.

The introductory part of the V icon acquisition effect (the effect in which the character 802 discovers the treasure chest 810 as shown in FIG. 582(a)) and the introductory part of the round number addition effect may be the same effect, and an effect that can branch into a V icon acquisition effect and a round number addition effect (for example, an effect in which either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appears from the contents of the treasure chest 810) may be executed. By configuring in this way, even if there is no V reserved in the reserve, the player can be made to expect the acquisition of a V icon, and even if the V icon is not acquired, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is added, so that a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. The introductory part of the V icon acquisition effect (the effect in which the character 802 discovers the treasure chest 810 as shown in FIG. 582(a)) and the round number addition effect may be the same effect, and a branching effect into a V icon acquisition effect and a round number addition effect (for example, an effect in which either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appears from the contents of the treasure chest 810) may be executed. This configuration makes it possible to make the player expect the acquisition of a V icon even if there is no V reserved in the reserve, and to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play because the number of rounds of the jackpot game is added even if the V icon is not acquired. It is also possible to set an effect pattern in which both a V icon and an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appear from the treasure chest.

The introductory portion described above is not limited to this, and may be configured, for example, to prompt the player to press a button, and when the player presses the button, the player may obtain either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of additional rounds.

<First Modification of the Eighteenth Control Example>
Next, the first modified example of the 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 607 to Fig. 613. In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the configuration was such that, as a result of determining (pre-reading) the lottery result of the winning information (special symbol 2 reservation) of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during a big win game, if there is a reservation (V reservation) that wins a small win, the V icon acquisition performance is executed.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, the special symbol 2 reserve stored in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is read ahead during a jackpot game, and if a V reserve is found to exist and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on that V reserve is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds (16 rounds in this first modified example), then a V icon acquisition effect is executed.

Specifically, as a result of pre-reading the reserved special chart 2 during the jackpot game, if there is at least one V reserved that will win the small prize A (when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 580) (V passing), it will win the jackpot A (16R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), a V icon acquisition effect is executed. Also, even if there is no V reserved that will win the small prize A, if there is a V reserved that will win the small prize B (V passing to win the jackpot B (7R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), and there is also a V reserved that will win the small prize C (V passing to win the jackpot E (10R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), a V icon acquisition effect is executed. In other words, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed, the execution of at least 16 rounds of the jackpot game is guaranteed in the reserved special chart 2.

By configuring it in this way, if the result of the V reserve lottery that activates the V icon is not the small jackpot A win that is most advantageous for the player, a consecutive win (consecutive small jackpot wins) is guaranteed, and the execution of at least 17 rounds of big jackpot play is confirmed, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged and suppress a decline in their motivation to play.

<About the performance content of the first modified example of the 18th control example>
The characteristic effects executed in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 607 to Fig. 608. Fig. 607(a) is an example of a display screen of the V icon acquisition effect executed in this first modified example. Unlike the V icon acquisition effect in the above-mentioned 18th control example, an effect is executed in which a rabbit-like character 801 acquires a flower 806, which is a V icon that resembles a flower. In the small display area Dm9, a black first reserved pattern hr1 and white second reserved pattern hr2, third reserved pattern hr3, and fourth reserved pattern hr4 are displayed.

As described above, in this first modified example, when a V reservation is found as a result of pre-reading the special symbol 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during a jackpot game, and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds (16 rounds in this first modified example), a V icon acquisition performance is executed. Figure 607(a) shows a case where the first reserved symbol hr1 is a V reservation that wins small prize A, and the other reservations are misses. Note that, for the sake of convenience in explanation, in Figure 607(a), the reserved symbols are displayed in different ways according to the lottery result of the special symbol 2 reservation and the type of small prize, but this is not limited to this.

Here, we will explain the V icon in this first modified example. The V icon in this first modified example has a display form imitating a flower, and is configured in a display form in which a flower 806 is surrounded by four petals 806a to 806d. When a variable display of a special pattern is executed based on V reservation, these four petals 806a to 806d are consumed in accordance with the type of small win that has been won, and when all the petals have been consumed, the flower 806 itself disappears (i.e., there is no guarantee of consecutive wins).

With reference to FIG. 607(b), the specific flow of activating the V icon will be described. FIG. 607(b) is an example of a display screen when the V icon is activated during the variable display of the special pattern when the small win A (V-passing big win A (16R time-saving big win), see FIG. 588) is won. In FIG. 607(b), in order to win the small win A, an effect is executed in which all of the petals 806a to 806d attached to the flower 806 are consumed (scattered). In other words, in this first modified example, the player is notified that the V icon has been activated by the accompanying petals 806a to 806d being consumed (scattered), rather than the flower 806 itself, which is the V icon.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 608(a), if the type of small win won by the V reservation is small win B (large win B when V passes (large win with 7R time reduction), see FIG. 588), only petal 806a is consumed, and petals 806b to 806d continue to be attached to flower 806. In this case, at the time when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation of the small win B starts, it is guaranteed that there will be other V reservations among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations.

The display mode of the second reserved symbol hr2 displayed in the small display area Dm9 in Fig. 608(a) indicates a V reservation for winning a small win C (a big win E when V passes (a big win with 10R time reduction), see Fig. 588), and the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is displayed to indicate that there is no special symbol 2 reservation. Therefore, in the case of Fig. 608(a), during the period in which the flower 806 is displayed, a 7-round big win and a 10-round big win are executed, resulting in a total of 17 rounds. In other words, since the total number of executed rounds is greater than when the big win A, which is most advantageous to the player, is executed, when the flower 806 is displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of small win that will be won.

Figure 608(b) is an example of a display screen when an effect is executed to cancel the activation of a V icon after the V icon is activated. Details will be described later, but similar to Figure 608(a), when the petal 806a is consumed during the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation, if a V reservation exists among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations and the total number of rounds of the V reservation is 16 rounds or more, an effect is executed in which the petal 806a returns to the flower 806 (rewind effect).

This makes it possible for the player to expect a rewind effect to occur even if the V icon is activated immediately after the display of the changing special pattern based on the V reserve has begun, and to focus on the effect until the display of the changing special pattern has finished.

In this first variant, the V icon is displayed as a flower, but this is not limited to this and any display mode that can inform the player of the guaranteed number of rounds may be used, for example, an indicator may be used.

In addition, in this first modified example, if a V reservation exists among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation is 16 or more, a rewind effect is executed, but this is not limited to this, and the V icon may not be activated. Also, for example, if a new V reservation is acquired, a new petal may be added.

In the 18th control example, the petals 806a-806d are consumed only during the period when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation is being executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the petals may be consumed during a jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation being consumed, and if all the petals are not consumed during the jackpot game, a consecutive win is confirmed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player play the jackpot game while hoping that the petals will not be consumed, and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming monotonous.

In the eighteenth control example, the presence of a V reserve in the reserve is notified by a V icon, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration that notifies that there is a high expectation of a V reserve in the reserve may be used. For example, a flower that displays "V?" is displayed, and if a reach effect is executed while the flower is displayed, a small win is confirmed, and an effect is executed in which the petals attached to the flower are consumed at a predetermined timing (for example, when a display mode indicating a miss is displayed), and the flower is also consumed when all the attached petals are consumed. This makes it possible to make the player expect a reach effect to occur while the flower is displayed, and to generate interest in the variable display of special symbols based on reserves that are not V reserves.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the first modified example of the 18th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 609 to Fig. 610. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned 18th control example in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, but the rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 609, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example will be described. FIG. 609(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 609(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example differs from the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 18th control example in that the performance mode selection 18a table 222rd is provided instead of the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra, the V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb is deleted, and the V icon display mode setting table 222rc is added, and otherwise it is the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance mode selection 18a table 222rd (not shown) is a table that is referenced when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The performance mode is set based on the type of variable pattern set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Figure 610 is a diagram simulating the contents stipulated in the V icon display mode setting table 222rc. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to Figure 613, but when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation (reservation for winning a small prize) starts, this is a table that is referenced to change the display mode of the V icon based on the value of the V icon display end counter described later and the type of small prize won in the variable display. For example, after the end of a big prize game in which a V icon acquisition performance is executed, if the V reservation for the small prize B winning is consumed, 7, which is a value corresponding to the number of rounds executed, is subtracted from the V icon display end counter value (maximum 16 in this first modified example), and the V icon display end counter value becomes 9. Therefore, in this case, the performance in which one petal is consumed is executed as the display mode of the V icon.

When the V icon display end counter value reaches 0, all petals 806a to 806d remaining on the displayed flower 806 (see FIG. 607(a)) will be consumed, and the flower 806 will also be hidden.

Next, referring to FIG. 609(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 609(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 609(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 18th control example in that a V icon display end counter 223rd has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V icon display end counter 223rd is set to a counter value when the V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON in the ending process a (see FIG. 612), and the counter value is updated when a small win is won based on the V reservation in the time-saving performance mode setting process a (see FIG. 613). When the counter value becomes 0, the V icon display flag 223rc is set to OFF.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the 18th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 611 to Fig. 613, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this first modified example will be described. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned 18th control example in that a V icon acquisition effect setting process a (see Fig. 611) is executed instead of the V icon acquisition effect setting process, an ending process a (see Fig. 612) is executed instead of the ending process, and a time-saving effect mode setting process a (see Fig. 613) is executed instead of the time-saving effect mode setting process, but the other processes are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 611, the V icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 611 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110). The V icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110) is a process executed in place of the V icon acquisition effect setting process (see S42108 in FIG. 602) in the above-mentioned 18th control example, and as a result of determining (pre-reading) in advance the winning information of the reserved second special pattern (special pattern 2 reservation) during a jackpot game, if there is a reservation (V reservation) that wins a small jackpot, and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds, a process is executed to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the V icon acquisition performance setting process a (S42110) is executed, first, the winning information of the second special pattern in the winning information storage area 223a is obtained (S43601). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation starts. Each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information stored in the first area to the fourth area of this winning information storage area 223a is shifted by one (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904, S4908 in FIG. 182). This allows the voice and lamp control device 113 to reliably determine when the special pattern change corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

After obtaining the winning information in the process of S43601, it is determined whether or not there is a reserve (V reserve) that will win a small prize in the winning information (S43602). If it is determined that there is no V reserve (S43602: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a V reserve (S43602: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a V reserve that will win small prize A among the V reserves (S43603). If it is determined that there is a V reserve that will win small prize A (S43603: Yes), the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set to on (S43607), and this process ends.

As mentioned above, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 is 16 or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. Therefore, if the small jackpot A is won, the jackpot A (16R time-saving jackpot, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing through the V (the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 580)) during the small jackpot game, so if there is a V reservation that wins the small jackpot A, the V icon acquisition effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S43603 that there is no V reservation that will win small prize A (S43603: No), it is determined whether there is a V reservation that will win small prize C (S43604). If it is determined that there is a V reservation that will win small prize C (S43604: Yes), it is determined whether there are at least two V reservations (S43606). If it is determined that there are two or more V reservations (S43606: Yes), the processing proceeds to S43607.

As described above, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 is 16 or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. If a small jackpot C is won, a jackpot E (10R time-saving jackpot, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing through the V during the small jackpot game, and in this first modified example, even for the jackpot type with the fewest number of rounds of jackpot game, 7 rounds of jackpot game are executed, so if there are two or more V reservations, including the V reservation for the small jackpot C win, the total number of rounds will be 16 or more.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S43604 that there is no V reservation for winning the small win C (S43604: No), only V reservations for winning the small win B (V passing big win B (7R time-saving big win), see FIG. 588) exist, so it is determined whether there are at least three V reservations (S43605). If it is determined that there are three or more V reservations (S43605: Yes), the processing of S43607 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of V reservations is not three or more (i.e., it is less than three) (S43605: No), this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 is 16 or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. If the small jackpot B is won, the jackpot B (7R time-saving jackpot, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing through the V during the small jackpot game, so if there are three or more V reservations for the small jackpot B win, the total number of rounds will be 16 or more.

In this way, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of jackpot play executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 reservation stored in the reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. This guarantees the player a minimum of 16 rounds of jackpot play on the reserved special chart 2 when the V icon acquisition effect is executed.

For example, if the first V reserve consumed after the end of a big win game is a V reserve that will win small win A, 16 rounds of big win game will be played based on the consumption of that V reserve, so consecutive wins (consecutive small wins) are not guaranteed.

On the other hand, if the first V reservation consumed after the end of the big win game is a V reservation that will win small win C, even if 10 rounds of big win game are played based on the consumption of that V reservation, 16 rounds will not be reached, so consecutive wins are guaranteed. In this case, even if the next V reservation is a V reservation that will win small win B, which is relatively unfavorable for the player, the total number of rounds will be 17 rounds, and more big win game rounds will be played than if the player won small win A, which is the most favorable for the player.

Furthermore, if the first V reservation consumed after the end of a big win game is a V reservation that will win a small win B, even if seven rounds of big win game are played based on the consumption of that V reservation, the total number of rounds will not reach 16 rounds, so consecutive wins are guaranteed, and if the next V reservation also wins a small win B, even if seven rounds of big win game are played based on the consumption of that V reservation, the total number of rounds will not reach 16 rounds, so further consecutive wins are guaranteed. In this case, even if a small win B is won three times in a row, the total number of rounds will be 21 rounds.

In this way, in this first modified example, the expectation of consecutive wins is higher when a relatively unfavorable small win type is won than when the most favorable small win type is won when the V icon is displayed, which can increase the interest of the game.

In this first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed when the total number of rounds is 16 or more, but this is not limited to the above, and the total number of rounds may be set to 15 or less, or 17 or more. Alternatively, when a specific combination of small win types is achieved, for example, when there is one V reserve for small win A, one V reserve for small win B, and one V reserve for small win C, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed.

In this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation present in the special pattern 2 reservation is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds, the V icon acquisition effect is always executed, but this is not limited to this, and if the total number of rounds is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect, and in some cases where the total number of rounds is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds, the V icon acquisition effect may not be executed. By configuring it in this way, even if the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the player can have hope of winning the small jackpot A when the special pattern changes and is displayed after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 612, the ending process a (S42109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process a (S42109). Ending process a (S42109) differs from the ending process in the 18th control example described above (see S42105 in FIG. 603) in that it sets the value of the V icon display end counter when the V icon display flag 223rc is set to on. As the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the ending process a (S42109), after the process of S42304 is completed, the V icon display end counter 223rd is set to "16" (S42306). This "16" is a value corresponding to the minimum number of rounds guaranteed, and when the V reservation is consumed in the game after the end of the big win game, the counter value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted, and when the counter value becomes "0" or less, the display of the V icon (in this first modified example, the flower 806 (see FIG. 607(a))) ends.

In the first modified example, the counter value initially set in the V icon display end counter 223rd in the ending process a is fixed at "16", but this is not limited to this, and a value corresponding to the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reserves present in the special chart 2 reserves may be set. For example, if there is one V reserve that wins small win C (when V passes, jackpot E (10R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588) and one V reserve that wins small win B (when V passes, jackpot B (17R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), the counter value may be set to "17".

Next, referring to FIG. 613, the time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 613 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504). This time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504) is a process executed in place of the time-saving performance mode setting process (see FIG. 606) in the above-mentioned 18th control example. In the above-mentioned 18th control example, the activation of the V icon was configured to be executed only once during the period in which the V icon was displayed. In contrast, in this first modified example, the activation of the V icon is configured to be executable multiple times until the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd becomes "0" or less.

When the time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery that is about to start is a small win or not (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small win (S42601: No), the performance mode selection 18a table is referenced and the performance mode corresponding to the variation pattern type obtained in S42403 of the variation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is set (S42610).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42601 that it is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON (S42602). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not ON (S42602: No), the processing proceeds to S42610.

In the process of S42602, if it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a small win A (S42611). If it is determined that it is a small win A (S42611: Yes), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted by 16 (S42612). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd after subtraction is 0 or more (S42613), and if it is determined that it is not 0 or more (S42613: No), the V icon display flag 223rc is set to off (S42614), and the V icon display mode setting table 222rc (see FIG. 610) is referred to, and the display mode of the V icon corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is set (S42615). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42613 that the value is greater than or equal to 0 (S42613: Yes), the processing of S42614 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S42615.

If it is determined in the processing of S42611 that the small win A is not obtained (S42611: No), the winning information is obtained from the winning information storage area 223a (S42616), and it is determined whether the total number of rounds in the remaining reserved special chart 2 is 16 rounds or more (S42617). If it is determined that the total number of rounds is 16 rounds or more (S42617: Yes), the rewind performance mode of the V icon is set (S42621), and the processing proceeds to S42610.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42617 that there are not 16 rounds or more (S42617: No), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery that will start from now is a small win B or not (S42618). If it is determined to be a small win B (S42618: Yes), 7 is subtracted from the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd (S42620), and the processing proceeds to S42613.

If it is determined in the processing of S42618 that the small prize B has not been won (i.e., the small prize C has been won) (S42618: No), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is decremented by 10 (S42619), and the processing proceeds to S42613.

In this way, in this first modified example, when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation starts, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted depending on the type of small win that is won, and the variable display mode of the V icon is set to correspond to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd after the subtraction.

In addition, in this first modified example, if small win A is won, the V icon rewind effect is not executed, but if small win B or C is won, the V icon rewind effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, when the player wins small win A, which is the most advantageous for the player, after acquiring the V icon, the display of the V icon can be terminated without fail. On the other hand, when the player wins small win B or small win C, which are relatively disadvantageous for the player, after acquiring the V icon, the period during which the V icon is continuously displayed can be made longer than when small win A is won. This makes it possible to set a small win type that guarantees only one small win by the V icon and a small win type that guarantees multiple small wins, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this first modified example, if the type of small win that is won is small win A, the rewind effect is not executed, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to execute the processes of S42616 and S42617 before the process of S42611, and execute the rewind effect of the V icon.

In the first modified example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation starts, if the execution conditions for the V icon acquisition effect are met in the remaining special pattern 2 reservations, the V icon rewind effect is always executed, but this is not limited to this, and the V icon rewind effect may be executed in some cases when the execution conditions for the V icon acquisition effect are met in the remaining special pattern 2 reservations. In addition, the ratio at which the V icon rewind effect is executed may be changed depending on the small win type of the special pattern that will be displayed in the future. For example, it may be easier to set the V icon rewind effect when the special pattern display is executed based on the V reservation of the small win B win than when the special pattern display is executed based on the V reservation of the small win A win.

In addition, in this first modified example, the V icon rewind effect is set at the time when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation begins, but this is not limited to this. For example, after the V icon activation effect is executed during the variable display of the special pattern, if a new V reservation is acquired and the conditions for executing the V icon rewind effect are met before the variable display stops, the V icon rewind effect can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to save reservations even during the variable display of the special pattern that has been activated by the V icon, thereby improving gaming efficiency.

In addition, in this first modified example, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is not incremented even if a new V reservation is acquired while a V icon is already acquired, but this is not limited thereto, and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd may be incremented when a new V reservation is acquired. For example, when the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is "9", if a new V reservation is acquired as a result of winning small prize B, "7" may be added to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd to make it "16". In this case, the configuration may be such that an effect (for example, an effect of adding petals) is executed in which the display mode of the displayed V icon is changed to the display mode of the V icon corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter after the increment.

In addition, in the process of S42617, if there is a difference between the value of the counter corresponding to the display mode of the displayed V icon and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd, a rewind effect may be set. For example, when three petals are consumed as the display mode of the displayed V icon (when the small win B is won twice and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is "2"), "7" is added to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd based on the acquisition of a new V reservation that wins the small win B, and the value of the display end counter 223rd becomes "9", a rewind effect of the V icon may be set in the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation that is consumed first. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the activation effect of the V icon is not executed in the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation that is consumed first.

As explained above, in the first variant of the 18th control example, when a jackpot game is being played, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball stored (memorized) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (pre-read), and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game played based on the small prize winning reserved ball (V reserved ball) in the reserved ball is a specific number of rounds, the player is notified that the specific number of rounds of the jackpot game is guaranteed. This technical concept differs from other control examples, but the technical concept unique to the first variant of the 18th control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples.

In this first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of pre-reading the lottery result of the reserved special pattern 2, but this is not limited to this, and the V icon acquisition effect may be set based on the result of pre-reading the winning information of the reserved first special pattern (reserved special pattern 1). Also, the V icon acquisition effect may be set based on the result of pre-reading both reserved special pattern 1 and reserved special pattern 2.

In this first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during a jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and it may be executed during a period other than when a jackpot game is being played. For example, it may be configured to execute the V icon acquisition effect while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. By configuring it in this way, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of the special pattern to indicate that the lottery result is a miss, even if the special pattern to indicate that it is a miss is displayed stationary, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In this first modified example, the V reserve is a reserve that will win a small prize, but this is not limited to this, and a reserve that will win a big prize may be a V reserve. Or, the V reserve may be a reserve that will win a time-saving prize.

In this first modified example, a "V icon" is displayed as a notification to indicate that a V reservation exists among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, but this is not limited to this, and a character may be used instead of the V icon to notify, or the background may be variable, and any display mode that allows the player to recognize the minimum guaranteed number of jackpot rounds will suffice.

In addition, in this first modified example, if there is a V reserved in the reserved special chart 2 stored, the V icon is displayed, that is, a notification mode for notifying the player of advantageous information is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information may be displayed. For example, in this first modified example, if small prize A is won twice during the time-saving state, or if small prize C is won three times, the time-saving state ends, so if there are two V reserved that will win small prize A in the reserved, or three V reserved that will win small prize C, an icon (for example, a skull icon) that notifies the player that the time-saving end condition is met in the reserved may be displayed.

By configuring it this way, if there is any reserved special symbol 2 (winning information for the second special symbol) remaining after the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to expect a small win with that remaining reserved symbol. Therefore, by allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time-saving end condition will be met within the reserved symbol, the player can be encouraged to try to accumulate the reserved special symbol 2 symbol up to the upper limit before the variable display of the special symbol that meets the time-saving end condition ends.

The display mode of the V icon may be different depending on the type of small win of the V reservation present in the reservation. For example, the number of petals attached to the flower 806 may be more likely to be greater when there is a V reservation for a small win B or C than when there is a V reservation for a small win A. Alternatively, the color of the petals may indicate the likelihood of consecutive wins (successive small wins).

<19th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 619 to Fig. 636. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example described above, when the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot for a specified number of times (for example, 500 times) in a row, and when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving game state is set directly (without going through a jackpot game).

The pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example has the following differences 1 to 3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example. That is, as difference 1, during the execution of the variable display effect based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, a performance is executed to notify (suggest) the number of time-saving times as one type of variable display mode. Then, when the time-saving symbol is won and the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is directly set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol (the number of times that the special symbol changes, which ends the time-saving state if the jackpot is not won) is greater than the number of remaining lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number (the ceiling lottery number is reached within the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol), a special performance control is executed in which the number of time-saving times that is notified (suggested) is greater than the number of time-saving times that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol. More specifically, assuming that no jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the apparent number of times the time-saving number is reported is taken into account by the number of times the special symbol is drawn from the time-saving symbol winning until the time-saving state actually ends (transitions to the normal state) (in other words, if the ceiling number of draws is reached during the time-saving state based on the time-saving symbol winning, the number of draws until the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws ends). By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate cases where a number of times the time-saving number is reported that is greater than the number of times the time-saving number is set based on the time-saving symbol winning, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

As a difference 2 from the above-mentioned 16th control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries is suppressed from being cleared, and the counter value data for switching and setting the variation pattern group (variation pattern selection table) is also held (the progress status of the variation pattern scenario is held). By configuring in this way, even if a process such as RAM clear is executed, it is possible to set a time-saving state when the variation of the special pattern is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling number of lotteries is reached), and it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling number of lotteries, regardless of whether or not a RAM clear operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game that gradually increases the sense of expectation until the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, regardless of whether or not a RAM clear operation is performed. Furthermore, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the number of remaining draws up to the ceiling number of draws will not increase, so it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing on a pachinko machine 10 where it is highly likely that a RAM clear operation has been performed (for example, when the hall was in a favorable state other than the normal state when it closed the previous day).

Furthermore, as a difference 3 from the above-mentioned 16th control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, the number of times the special symbols change reaches a specified number (ceiling lottery number) without a jackpot being determined, and the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) is set without going through a jackpot game every time the next special symbol change display stops, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is reset when the ceiling lottery number is reached. In other words, after the ceiling lottery number is reached, a lottery for the special symbols is further executed for the ceiling lottery number, so that the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) is set again. As a result, even if the player is unable to win a jackpot during the time-saving game state set based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number and transitions (falls) to the normal state, the player can be made to aim to reach the ceiling lottery number again (activating the ceiling again), so that a gameplay in which the player's motivation for playing is unlikely to decrease can be realized. In addition, in accordance with this, in the 19th control example, the variation pattern scenario is reset based on the fact that the ceiling number of draws has been reached. In other words, based on the fact that the ceiling number of draws has been reached, the correspondence between each variation number until the next ceiling number of draws is reached and the variation pattern selection table to be referenced is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has not been reached or the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more and the time-saving state has been skipped, a special variation pattern can be selected when the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws becomes a specific number (150, 100, and 50 remaining). In other words, since the ceiling teasing performance can be executed when the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws becomes a specific number, it is possible to realize a game that gradually increases the player's sense of expectation until the ceiling number of draws is reached, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 16th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

<About the performance in the 19th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 619 to Fig. 622, the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the difference 1 described above will be described. Before describing the main configuration of this control example in detail, the main configuration of this control example will be briefly described. When the special symbol variation is performed a prescribed number of times without a jackpot game being performed (the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches the ceiling number of times), the variation for the prescribed number of times ends, and at the timing of the next time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) in which the frequency of opening the electric role 640a is high and the opening period is set long, resulting in a game state in which the probability of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 is set high, is set continuously until the variation of the special symbol is performed up to 100 times. In addition to the ceiling game state, in this control example, a sudden time-saving game state, which is set by winning the lottery executed every time the variation of the special symbol starts on the time-saving winning symbol, is configured to be set even without the execution of a jackpot game.

Below, we will explain the presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling game state shown in Figure 622 is set, and the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device 81 shown in Figures 619 to 621.

Figure 622 is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode when the set number of times (ceiling number of draws) is reached during the time-saving state based on winning the time-saving pattern, and the time-saving state is set overlappingly. Figure 622 shows an example of a case where a time-saving pattern with a time-saving count of 50 times is won when the remaining number of draws for the special pattern until the ceiling number of draws is reached is 25, and shows the correspondence between the presentation mode and the number of draws for the special pattern.

In the lottery at the start of the 475th variation (the number of variations without the execution of the jackpot game) when there are 25 variations remaining until the specified number of variations (500 in this control example), the time-saving pattern is won, and the time-saving pattern winning performance shown in FIG. 619(a) is executed while the special pattern is being displayed (during dynamic display). FIG. 619(a) is a performance mode diagram showing an example of the time-saving pattern winning performance. When the time-saving pattern is won, the special pattern begins to vary, and the variable display area Dm1 of the special pattern (third pattern) is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right. In the display area (display area larger than the variable display area Dm1) where the special pattern was displayed, a rabbit character 801 is displayed, and above it, the modes 811a to 811d suggesting the number of variations of the time-saving game state (the number of variations of the special pattern) to be granted are displayed in a multiple rotation. Further above that, the message "~Chance Time Waiting~" is displayed to indicate that the time-saving symbol has been selected, making it easy for the player to tell that they have won the time-saving symbol.

When a time-saving symbol is won and a time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set, a number of multiple fluctuations is determined by lottery to be 1, and the time-saving game state is set to continue until the special symbol corresponding to that number of fluctuations is executed. Note that if a jackpot is won before the set number of fluctuations is executed, the game state selected by the jackpot lottery is set after the jackpot game, so it is possible that the time-saving game state will end before the set number of fluctuations is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 619(a), the small display area Dm4 in the upper left area of the third symbol display device 81 displays the word "Right Hit", and displays a notification mode suggesting that the player shoot the game ball so that it passes through the right side (right hit area) of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the right hit notification is made from the change of the special symbol that has won the time-saving symbol, making it easier for the player to understand that the time-saving symbol has been won. However, it is not limited to this, and the right hit notification may be configured to be made from the start of the change of the special symbol in the next change (476th time) in which the sudden time-saving game state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a more advantageous notification to the player. Also, as shown in FIG. 619(a), the display of the reserved symbol is hidden in the sub-display area Ds (below the display area), and a character display is displayed to suggest that the mode for suggesting the number of changes in which the sudden time-saving game state will continue, such as "Decide the number of chance times!", is determined from among the candidates.

Here, when the presentation mode of FIG. 619(a) is being executed, immediately before the time for the special pattern to change (the timing when the time for the change ends) elapses (e.g., 5 seconds before the change stops), one of the candidates 811a to 811d for the number of changes for which the sudden time-saving game state displayed as shown in FIG. 619(b) will continue is determined. In the example of FIG. 619(b), 100 changes are notified as the number of changes to continue. In this control example, the number of changes notified to the player is configured to be notified as the number of changes in the presentation that is less than the number of changes that has actually been determined (the actual number of changes until the sudden time-saving game state continues). By configuring in this way, even if the number of changes in the presentation becomes 0, it is possible to make the player expect that the time-saving game state will continue, and the presentation mode can be diversified. When the number of changes in the presentation for which the time-saving game state will continue is determined, a mode (the text display "100 times GET!!") is displayed in the sub-display area Dm4 to indicate that the number of changes in the presentation has been determined. In addition, the special symbols are displayed in a static combination in small area Dm1, indicating a miss.

As shown in FIG. 619(b), when the variation number candidates 811a-811d for the sudden time-saving game state are displayed in a rotating manner, the rabbit 801 jumps upwards and punches, hitting and determining one variation number mode for the performance, and that variation number mode (variation number pattern) is enlarged and displayed. The other variation number modes are scattered while shrinking in the direction outside the display area, making it easy to see the determined variation number mode.

In this embodiment, the number of fluctuations is automatically determined in accordance with the time that the special symbols change, but the invention is not limited to this. When the player presses the frame button 22 or the effective time of the frame button 22 has elapsed (the timing when the effective time has ended), one of the candidates 811a to 811d for the number of fluctuations that will continue the sudden time-saving game state displayed as shown in FIG. 619(b) may be determined.

As shown in FIG. 622, the number of times the special symbol changes during which the sudden time-saving game state that was actually won with the time-saving winning symbol continues is 50 times in the example shown here, but 100 times is determined as the number of changes in the presentation. This is because 26 times pass before the ceiling game state is set before the 50 times of special symbol changes that are actually decided, and the remaining number is updated to 100 times when the time-saving game state has passed 26 times as the ceiling game state, so the behavior is that the time-saving state actually continues from when the time-saving symbol is won until the display of the 126 times of special symbol changes ends, so even if 100 times, which is less than 126 times, is decided, no inconsistency in presentation occurs.

By configuring in this way, even if the actual number of fluctuations for which the sudden time-saving game state will continue is 50, it is possible to determine a candidate number of fluctuations exceeding 50 in the presentation that determines the number of fluctuations in the presentation, allowing a more advantageous notification to be given to the player, and further increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in the presentation described below, even if the actual number of fluctuations is 50 and 100 is notified, the total number of fluctuations from the start of the sudden time-saving game state to the end of the ceiling game state is a maximum of 126, which is more than the 100 in the presentation that was notified, and it is possible to use a maximum of 26 fluctuations as an added presentation as an intermediate presentation. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of fluctuations for which the actual time-saving game state (sudden time-saving game state or ceiling game state) will continue, and creates a sense of expectation that the remaining number of fluctuations will be added indefinitely.

Next, we will explain the chance time effect, which is an effect executed during the sudden time-saving game state, which is executed when the number of fluctuations in Figure 622 is 476 (the remaining number of time-savings (the remaining number of fluctuations of the special pattern for which the sudden time-saving game state will continue) is 50). Figure 620 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the form of this chance time effect. During chance time (the period during which the sudden time-saving game state is set), the remaining number of time-savings in the effect is displayed in small area Ds7 below small area Dm4 where the right-hit notification of the display area is executed. Figure 620 (a) shows the form of the timing when the variable display of the special pattern stops when the remaining number of time-savings in the effect becomes 0 (the timing when the special pattern (second special pattern) displayed in small area Ds1 stops). A rabbit character 801 and an angel character 809 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is performed to see whether or not a treasure chest 810 will be opened to add to the remaining number of time-saving times. When the treasure chest 810 is opened, smoke and an addition mode 810a showing "10", which indicates the remaining number of time-saving times to be added, are displayed from inside. The words "Chance time added!", which is an effect indicating that the remaining number of time-saving times has been added, are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

After the addition mode 810a in which the remaining number of time-saving times is added is displayed, the number (10) indicating the number of time-saving times of the addition mode 810a is moved to the small area Ds7, and then the remaining number of time-saving times in the small area Ds7 is updated to 10 times. By performing this kind of performance, it is possible to easily inform the player that the displayed addition mode 810a was a performance that increases the remaining number of time-saving times. In addition, as a performance during the chance time, a performance in which the rabbit character 801 dashes is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a performance of searching for a treasure box 810 is executed during the variation of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, in the sudden time-saving game state, the variation of the second special pattern is mainly executed, and the variation time is made to be shorter than that in the normal game state, but a consistent and easy-to-understand performance can be performed by utilizing the variation times of multiple special patterns. In addition, if the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot, the letter "V" is displayed from the treasure box 810, and a mode for indicating a jackpot is displayed. After that, the special symbol stops and the big win game begins.

In addition, if the time-saving symbol is won during the chance time (a lottery result in which the big win game is not executed and the time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set when the special symbol stops changing), the newly determined number of times to continue time-saving (the number of times the special symbol changes to continue the ceiling game state) from the treasure chest 810 or information on the number of times to continue time-saving and the number of times to continue time-saving with the ceiling game state set thereafter is determined and notified, and the mode of addition is decided.

In this control example, the time-saving symbol is selected during the chance time, but the invention is not limited to this. In the event that the time-saving game state suddenly occurs (during the chance time), the game may be controlled so that the time-saving symbol is not selected until the time-saving game state suddenly ends. In this case, the lottery for the time-saving symbol does not need to be executed, and control may be executed so that if the lottery for the time-saving symbol is selected, it is invalid.

In the chance time performance, the performance in which the treasure chest 810 is displayed is configured to be executed when a performance lottery is executed on the condition that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is not being executed at the timing when the special pattern starts to change, and it is determined that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is to be executed. In this case, the larger the difference between the number of remaining time reductions in the performance and the actual number of remaining time reductions, the higher the probability that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is determined to be executed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is to be executed, the content of the performance mode to be executed when the treasure chest 810 is open is determined based on the difference in the number of remaining time reductions and the result of the pre-reading of the reserved balls. In this case, when it is determined that there is no performance mode, it is configured to execute a performance in which the treasure chest 810 is not opened. Although it is configured that the treasure chest 810 is not opened when it is determined that there is no performance mode, it may be configured to be configured so that only smoke is notified when it is open. In addition, when it is determined that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is to be executed, it may be configured to determine whether the treasure chest 810 is opened or not with a predetermined probability.

Next, the ceiling game state (100 times of continuous time-saving play) is set at the timing when the 501st fluctuation of the special symbol in FIG. 622 stops. Here, the game suddenly transitions from the time-saving game state to the ceiling game state, but the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 continues to be the performance during the chance time described above.

Next, an example is shown in which the performance mode of FIG. 620(a) described above is executed as an additional performance when the number of times the special symbol changes in FIG. 622 is 575. Here, a lottery is drawn when the special symbol changes 575 times to determine that the treasure chest performance is to be executed, and 10 times is determined as the additional performance mode, so that the additional performance mode showing the number of times of addition 10 is executed as shown in FIG. 620(a). After that, from the 576th time when the special symbol changes, the performance during the chance time is executed continuously. After that, the end waiting performance is executed when the special symbol changes 595 times (the remaining number of time-saving times in the ceiling game state is 6 times). In this 19th control example, since it is configured to add a number of times that is a multiple of 10 as an additional performance, when the number of time-saving times displayed becomes 0, there is a possibility that a fractional number of times less than 10 will be generated in the remaining number of times in the actual time-saving state. Therefore, while this fractional number of time-saving times is consumed, a display mode is set in which the remaining number of time-saving times is not notified as an end waiting performance. This creates a sense of excitement for players as they don't know how long the time-saving state will last.

Figure 620 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this end waiting presentation. In the end waiting presentation, after the remaining time-saving number of times is updated to 0 times in the small display area Dm7 below the small display area Dm4, "Last ??? times" is displayed, in which the remaining time-saving number of times in the presentation cannot be identified. Also, in the main display area Dm, a hole 812 is opened in a part of the cloud through which the rabbit 801 dashes, and when it falls, a presentation is executed indicating that the ceiling game state (time-saving game state) will end. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character mode of "~End waiting~" is displayed, indicating that the remaining time-saving number of times in the presentation is less than 0 times and the mode indicating the remaining number of times is unidentifiable. In the small display area Dm1, the second special symbol is displayed in a reduced size and changed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the character "End waiting zone" is displayed, indicating that the period is one in which the ceiling game state may end every time the change display of the special symbol stops. By configuring it in this way, the player can feel a sense of crisis that the ceiling game state will end every time the special pattern stops changing, even if the remaining number of time-saving turns reaches 0, and it will continue even when the next special pattern changes, making it difficult to distinguish the remaining number of time-saving turns. This gives the player a sense of crisis that the ceiling game state will end every time the special pattern stops changing, and allows the player to enjoy the contrast with the sense of relief that comes when the state does not end, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 622, when the number of times the special symbol changes becomes 600 (the number of times of time reduction remaining in the ceiling game state is 1), the change stops, the ceiling game state ends, and the game is switched to the normal game state, and the end performance is executed during the change of the special symbol. FIG. 621 is a diagram showing an example of the content of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this end performance. In the end performance mode, the rabbit 801 dashes on a cloud with a hole in it, as in the end waiting performance described above, from the start of the change of the special symbol, and a performance is executed in which the rabbit falls from the hole 812 as shown in FIG. 621 5 seconds before the change of the special symbol stops. In addition, the small display area Dm7 displays a mode in which the number of times of time reduction remaining in the performance is difficult to distinguish, such as "Last ??? times", and the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped and is waiting for the change time to pass (see small display area Dm1). In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Chance time ended!", which indicate that the chance time (ceiling game state (time reduction game state)) has ended. Additionally, the words "End" are displayed at the top of the main display area Dm to indicate the end of the chance time.

In this way, when the configuration of difference 1 described above results in the remaining number of times being less than the number of times that the time-saving symbol is selected and the time-saving game state is suddenly set to continue, the number of times that the time-saving symbol is selected is taken into account and the number of times that the ceiling game state is set to continue is set as the settable number of time-saving times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of a remaining number of time-saving times that is greater than the number actually granted at a timing based on the time-saving symbol being selected, and it is also possible to execute an additional effect so that the remaining number of time-saving times is greater than the actual number, making it difficult for the player to guess the actual number of times. In addition, since the remaining number of time-saving times that the player does not expect is notified, a fresh effect can be provided to the player.

<About the production in differences 2 and 3>
Next, referring to Fig. 623 to Fig. 625, an example of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the above-mentioned differences 2 and 3 will be described. In the above-mentioned difference 2, even if the RAM clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, the value of the counter for counting the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set is not initialized, and the count value is held, so that the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) for displaying the special symbol is switched based on the value of the count value. Also, in the above-mentioned difference 3, after the ceiling game state is set and the set number of time reductions are executed, the variation of the special symbol is executed again the specified number of times and the game transitions to the ceiling game state, the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) is switched each time the game transitions to the ceiling game state, so that a specific variation pattern is easily selected.

Figures 623 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the variation pattern executed in the next first variation after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for the specified number of times. Based on the variation of the special symbol being stopped and displayed for the specified number of times, the variation pattern group for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is set to be selected from the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached (see Figure 628 (c)). The variation pattern selected from the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached (variation pattern group) is displayed in a reduced form in the small display area Ds1 at the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in Figure 623 (a), a rabbit character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an angel character 809 is displayed to the upper right of the rabbit 801 with a board on which text information is displayed. The board displays text information "Trajectory to the ceiling" to indicate the game state until the ceiling game state is reached, and further displays the number of small win games executed before the ceiling game state is set (small bonus: 2 times displayed in text) and the number of times the special symbol has changed (number of starts: 500 times displayed in text). In addition, the small display area Dm7 displays text information indicating that the special symbol has changed a specified number of times, saying "Ceiling!?" In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays text information indicating that the special symbol has changed a specified number of times, saying "Ceiling reached!! Chance time GET!"

After the mode shown in FIG. 623(a) is displayed (dynamic display) for 10 seconds, the performance mode shown in FIG. 623(b) is displayed. In the performance mode shown in FIG. 623(b) that is displayed after the performance mode in FIG. 623(a) is displayed, the special symbol changes and is displayed continuously in the small display area Dm1, the rabbit character 801 continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm, the board held by the angel character 809 is hidden, and a comment display from the angel 809 saying "If you hit during chance time, it's a big chance!?" is displayed in a speech bubble, and when a jackpot is drawn in the ceiling play state, the player is notified of the mode that suggests that it will be more advantageous than in the normal play state.

In this control example, if a jackpot occurs during the ceiling game state, the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set to be more likely to be selected than if it occurs during a jackpot in the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase interest when a jackpot occurs during the ceiling game state by implementing a presentation that encourages the player to think that it will be advantageous if a jackpot occurs during the 100 times that the special symbols that set the ceiling game state are drawn. Furthermore, since the player can be made to look forward to transitioning to the ceiling game state, the player can be made to play for a long period of time, aiming to continuously execute the special symbol fluctuations up to the specified number of times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 623(b), the small display area Dm4 displays the text "Right Hit" and a notification is executed to suggest that a right hit game should be executed in order to transition to the ceiling game state. Also, the small display area Dm7 displays the text "Last 100 Hits" and a notification is executed regarding the number of remaining time-saving times. Also, the sub-display area Ds displays text information indicating that the special pattern has changed a specified number of times, saying "Ceiling Reached!! Chance Time GET!".

By configuring it in this way, when the specified number of times (500 times in this control example) for setting the ceiling game state has elapsed and it reaches the 501st time, the fluctuation pattern table is switched so that a dedicated fluctuation pattern can be executed for the 501st fluctuation, and advance notification of the transition to the ceiling game state can be given, and the method of playing in the ceiling game state can be clearly notified.

With reference to Figures 624(a) and (b), we will explain the presentation for suggesting the number of times remaining until the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state, which is executed by switching the variation pattern table based on the number of times the special symbol changes in the above-mentioned differences 2 and 3 in this control example. Figure 624(a) is a diagram showing an example of a weak promotion presentation mode that is executed when there is a low expectation of reaching the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state.

As shown in FIG. 624(a), in the small display area Dm1 located in the upper right of the display area, the special symbol is displayed in a reduced size and changed, and in the main display area Dm, a large special symbol is displayed in a changed size. In the lower right of the main display area Dm, reserved symbols hr1 and hr2 (black circle symbols) are displayed, and it is notified that there are two reserved balls. In the main display area Dm, an angel character 809 is displayed, and a comment display of "Approaching...?" is displayed, which indicates the degree of expectation for the remaining number of times until the specified number of times. In the small display area Dm7, a display of "350 times between bonuses" is displayed, which indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the big win game was executed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "Angel appears!" is displayed, and a text display is displayed to indicate that a preview mode in which a notification is given up to the specified number of times is being executed.

In this way, after a jackpot is hit, which is not initialized even if RAM clearing is executed, the number of times the special symbol changes is determined based on the count value in the change pattern table, and a preview effect is executed that indicates the expectation of reaching the specified number of times with a specified number of changes, allowing the player to predict from the preview effect the number of times remaining until the specified number of times is reached and play the game accordingly, giving the player the fun of deciding whether or not to continue playing.

Next, referring to FIG. 624(b), an example of a strong stimulating performance mode in which there is a high expectation of reaching the specified number of times will be described. In the strong stimulating performance mode, a text display of "450 times between bonuses" is displayed in the small display area Dm7, suggesting that the number of times the special pattern has changed since the big win game was executed is 450 times. In addition to the display of the special pattern changes, the main display area Dm displays an archangel character 809z, which is different from the angel character 809, and a comment display of "Approaching closely!!" is displayed to suggest that there is a high expectation of only a few times remaining until the specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the variation pattern table is switched and set based on the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la for counting the number of variations of the special pattern between big win games that are not reset even when the RAM clear is executed. In this control example, as specified in the variation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj of FIG. 629 (b), the ceiling agitation table 202sb3 is configured to be set every 50 times, such as the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la being 350, 400, 450, etc. In the ceiling agitation table, the variation pattern is assigned to be set by lottery, and the closer the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is to the specified number of times (500 times, 1000 times, etc.), the higher the rate at which the strong agitation performance mode described above is determined is set. By configuring in this way, when the strong agitation performance mode is executed, it is possible to expect that the remaining number of times is small, and the player can continue playing. Also, like the 16th control example described above, the 19th control example is also equipped with a small bonus (special big win and small win), and is configured so that the displayed number of draws (number of draws between bonuses) is reset when the small bonus is won. In other words, even in the case of a small win where the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number is not reset, the apparent number of draws (number of draws between bonuses) is reset to 0, so that it is configured so that it is difficult to completely determine the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number from the displayed number of draws. Under such circumstances, by configuring a ceiling-inducing effect in which the archangel character 809z is displayed as the ceiling number of draws approaches, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to predict the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number from the performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 625, after a transition to the ceiling game state once, the special symbol variation is executed up to the number of times of continuation, and after transition to the normal game state, the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes 850 times, with 150 remaining times until the specified number of times without a jackpot game being executed again, the ceiling agitation table 202sb3 is set, and an example of the performance mode executed by the selected variation pattern is shown. As shown in FIG. 625, in addition to the display of the variation of the special symbol in the main display area Dm, an angel character 809 is displayed, and a comment such as "Approaching again...?" is displayed as a character to suggest the remaining number of the specified number of times at which the second ceiling game state is set. In this way, when a jackpot game is not executed and the ceiling game state is set continuously, a performance mode different from the performance mode of the first ceiling agitation is executed, so that the player can play while recognizing that it is the expectation that the ceiling game state will be set again, and the player can determine the probability of the jackpot game being executed and decide whether to continue playing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 19th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 19th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 626 to Fig. 630. Note that only the points that differ from the 16th control example will be described, and illustrations and descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 626 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this 19th control example. In this 19th control example, the contents of the first win random number 19 table 202sa, the fluctuation pattern selection 19 table 202sb, the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si, and the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj have been changed.

Figure 627 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 19 table 202sa. The first winning random number 19 table 202sa is set with information for executing a winning/losing judgment (discrimination) of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In the case of a low probability state in which the judgment probability of a jackpot is set to a low probability as the normal game state or the time-saving game state (including the sudden time-saving game state and the ceiling game state) as the game state, and in the case of a high probability state in which the judgment probability of a jackpot is set to a higher probability state as the probability change game state (latent probability change game state), a setting value (judgment value) for judging a jackpot is set for each of the settings from 1 to 6. As shown in FIG. 627, in the low probability state, the judgment values are set as 0 to 4 for setting 1, 0 to 5 for setting 2, 0 to 6 for setting 3, 0 to 7 for setting 4, 0 to 8 for setting 5, and 0 to 9 for setting 6. In addition, in the high probability state, the judgment values are set as 0 to 19 for setting 1, 0 to 23 for setting 2, 0 to 27 for setting 3, 0 to 31 for setting 4, 0 to 36 for setting 5, and 0 to 39 for setting 6. In addition, the judgment values are set so that each value of 40 to 64 on the first winning random number counter C1 is judged to be a small winning.

Next, referring to FIG. 628, the variation pattern selection 10 table 202sb will be described. The variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb is a selection table for determining a variation pattern table (variation pattern group) for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of the variation of the acquired special pattern, the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern, and the current number of reserved balls. The variation pattern table to be selected is determined based on the type of game state currently set (normal game state, time-saving game state, sudden time-saving game state, ceiling game state, probability change game state) and the number of times the special pattern changes, etc. In this control example, the variation pattern table is selected as described above, but it is not limited to this. A predetermined lottery may be executed to determine the type of variation pattern table, or the selection may be based on the timing of the end of a big win game, the result of a selection lottery in which one variation pattern table is executed with a predetermined selection probability after a small win game is executed, the game state, the number of times the special pattern has changed, the number of big wins and small wins, the number of remaining changes until the ceiling game state, the number of times the game has transitioned to the ceiling game state, or a combination of some of these information.

Figure 628 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb. The variation pattern selection 10 table 202sb has a normal 19 table 202sb1, a sure-win/time-saving 19 table 202sb2, a ceiling boost table 202sb3, and a ceiling reaching table 202sb4.

The normal 19 table 202sb1 and the special/time-saving 19 table 202sb2 are not shown in the figures, but to briefly explain, the normal 19 table 202sb1 is a table that is set as a table from which a variation pattern is selected when the normal game state is set. Multiple variation patterns are set in accordance with the result of the big win judgment (win, miss, small win), the current number of reserved balls, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. Since the variation time of the special pattern (execution period of the variation pattern) is set in advance for each variation pattern, the selection of the variation pattern can also be said to be the selection of the variation period (dynamic display period). By configuring in this way, the period until the result of the win/loss judgment is displayed can be set in the design, so that it is possible to limit the number of times the lottery is drawn per hour, and the gambling nature of the game can be adjusted and designed.

The 19 table 202sb2 for special probability and time saving is selected as a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern when in special probability play state or time saving play state, and multiple variation patterns are set corresponding to the win/lose judgment result, the current number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each of the special probability play state and time saving play state. Note that the variation patterns set in the 19 table 202sb2 for special probability and time saving are set to have shorter variation times than the variation patterns set in the 19 table for normal play, making it possible to execute many lotteries in a short period of time.

Next, the ceiling agitation table 202sb3 will be described with reference to FIG. 628(b). FIG. 628(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ceiling agitation table 202sb3. The ceiling agitation table 202sb3 is a table that is selected when the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot game is played (the number of times the special symbol changes from the start of play in a gaming machine where a jackpot game is not played) is 350, 400, or 450. The number of changes to be selected is determined based on the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la.

The ceiling boost table 202sb3 is assigned a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (hit, special hit, small hit, miss (when the time-saving symbol is hit), miss), and multiple fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Each fluctuation pattern selected in the ceiling boost table 202sb3 is configured to execute the ceiling boost performance (Figs. 624 and 625) described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 628(b), the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached will be described. FIG. 628(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached. The table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is a variation pattern table that is selected when the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches the specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set, and the next variation of the special symbol is executed (i.e., the 501st time).

The table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is assigned a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (win, special hit, win and non-special hit), and multiple fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Each fluctuation pattern selected in the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is configured to execute the performance for when the ceiling is reached (Fig. 623) described above.

Next, the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si will be described with reference to FIG. 629(a). FIG. 629(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si. This time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si is a data table (lottery table) for selecting the number of times the special pattern will fluctuate (time-saving number of times) at which the ceiling time-saving game state will be set to continue if the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for winning or losing. The types of time-saving patterns are set corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained at the time of the start winning.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 629(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is 0, the time-saving pattern A (time-saving number of times 100) is selected, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is 1 to 19, the time-saving pattern B (time-saving number of times 50) is selected, and when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is 20 to 99, the time-saving pattern C (time-saving number of times 30) is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 629(b), the variation pattern scenario 19 table sj will be described. FIG. 629(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario 19 table sj. This variation pattern scenario 19 table sj is a data table in which data is specified for selecting a variation pattern table based on the number of times the special pattern changes after the big win game is executed (the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la). When the ceiling game state has not been reached, this scenario table stores a scenario table corresponding to the ceiling not being reached in the scenario storage area 203sb described later, and a variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la. On the other hand, when the ceiling game state is reached and the set time-saving game state (ceiling game state) has ended, a scenario table corresponding to the ceiling being reached is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb, and a variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la.

As shown in FIG. 629(b), the scenario when the ceiling has not been reached is set for the normal state (normal game state) and for other than the normal state. In the normal state, if the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the big win game) is 1 to 349, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 350, the ceiling tilt (ceiling tilt table 203sb3) is selected, if it is 351 to 399, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 400, the ceiling tilt (ceiling tilt table 203sb3) is selected, if it is 401 to 449, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 450, the ceiling tilt (ceiling tilt table 203sb3) is selected, and if it is 451 to 500, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected. In addition, when it is not in the normal state, the 19 table 202sb2 for special bonuses and time reduction is always selected.

On the other hand, there are different scenarios set for when the ceiling is reached in the normal state (normal gameplay state) and in other than the normal state. In the normal state, when the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la (the number of times the special symbol changes after the big win game) is 1, the use for when the ceiling is reached (table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached) is selected, when it is 2 to 349, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected, when it is 350, the use for ceiling tilt (table 203sb3 for ceiling tilt) is selected, when it is 351 to 399, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected, when it is 400, the use for ceiling tilt (table 203sb3 for ceiling tilt) is selected, when it is 401 to 449, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected, when it is 450, the use for ceiling tilt (table 203sb3 for ceiling tilt) is selected, and when it is 451 to 500, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected. In addition, when it is not in the normal state, the 19 table 202sb2 for special bonus/time-saving is always selected.

By configuring it in this way, the next fluctuation pattern can be a fluctuation pattern dedicated to when the ceiling is reached each time the ceiling is reached (every time the special symbol fluctuation count is executed 500 times after playing a jackpot), and the player can be clearly notified that they are moving to a ceiling gaming state, and the discomfort of suddenly switching to a gaming state without even playing a jackpot can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 629, both the variation pattern scenario for when the ceiling has not been reached and the variation pattern scenario for when the ceiling has been reached are configured as a set of two scenarios, one for the normal state and one for a game state other than the normal state. In other words, when setting a variation pattern scenario (storing in the scenario storage area 223sb), a set of two scenarios is set, one for the normal state and one for a game state other than the normal state, and during the normal state, the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times the special symbol is drawn is identified by referring to the scenario for the normal state from the set of scenarios, while during a game state other than the normal state (probable bonus state or time-saving state), the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times the special symbol is drawn is identified by referring to the scenario for the other than the normal state from the set of scenarios. In other words, even if the game state is changed midway (for example, if the time-saving symbol is won in the normal state and the state is changed to the time-saving state), the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of variations) when the variation pattern scenario is referred to is not reset, and the variation pattern selection table can be specified by referring to the scenario for the corresponding game state from the set of scenarios. Therefore, even if the normal state continues without transitioning to another game state, or even if the normal state is set by transitioning to the time-saving state one or more times, while staying in the normal state, the correspondence between the number of times the special symbol is drawn since the end of the previous big win and the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common. Therefore, regardless of the circumstances under which the normal state was set, when the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a variation pattern for ceiling agitation can be selected, and a performance for ceiling agitation can be executed. Therefore, the performance mode in the normal state can be set appropriately.

Next, referring to FIG. 626(b), the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this 19th control example will be described. The RAM 203 in this 19th control example differs from the 16th control example in that a ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa and a scenario storage area 203sb have been added to the store. Explanations of the same configuration will be omitted.

The special drawing lottery counter 203la is configured so that it is not reset even when a normal RAM clear is performed, and the backed up value is retained. This special drawing lottery counter 203la is configured so that it is reset by performing a special RAM clear, clearing the RAM, turning on the power, turning off the power, and then clearing the RAM again within 5 seconds and turning on the power.

The ceiling wait flag 203sa is a flag that indicates that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set. It is set to ON when the specified number of times has been reached, and is set to OFF when the game transitions to the ceiling game state.

The scenario storage area 203pb is an area for storing a scenario for when the ceiling has not been reached or a scenario for when the ceiling has been reached, obtained from the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table. Even if the RAM is cleared, this area keeps the information backed up and stored until a special RAM clear is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 630, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 19th control example will be described. FIG. 630 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 630, the RAM 223 in this 19th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 16th control example (see FIG. 520(b)) in that a time-saving display count counter 223sa and a ceiling-reached flag 223sb have been added.

The time-saving display count counter 223sa is a counter that indicates the remaining number of draws on the display of the time-saving state, and when the time-saving state is set, a counter value corresponding to the number of time-saving draws of the time-saving state to be set is set. Also, exceptionally, if there is a possibility that the ceiling number of draws will be reached during the time-saving state set based on the winning of the time-saving pattern (if no winning is won, the ceiling number of draws will be reached within the time-saving number of draws), a counter value corresponding to the number of determinations from the start of the time-saving state based on the winning of the time-saving pattern to the end of the time-saving state set based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws is set (see S34558A, S34559A in FIG. 636). While the time-saving state continues, the number of time-saving draws corresponding to the counter value of this time-saving display count counter 223sa is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the remaining number of time-saving draws.

The ceiling reached flag 223sb is a flag indicating whether or not the game has transitioned to a time-saving state (ceiling game state) based on the number of ceiling draws reached at least once after the end of the previous big win. If the ceiling reached flag 223sb is on, it means that the game has transitioned to the ceiling game state, and if it is off, it means that the ceiling game state has not been set. The ceiling reached flag 223sb is initially set to off, and is set to on when the number of ceiling draws is reached (see S34521A in FIG. 635). When a fluctuation pattern for ceiling arousal is notified by a fluctuation pattern command, the state of the ceiling reached flag 223sb is referred to to switch between setting a performance mode for when the ceiling has not been reached (see FIGS. 624(a) and (b)) as a performance for ceiling arousal (see FIG. 625) or setting a performance mode for when the ceiling game state has been completed at least once (see FIG. 625) (see S34573A in FIG. 637).

<Regarding control process of main control device in 19th control example>
Next, the control processing executed by main control device 110 in this 19th control example will be described with reference to Figures 631 to 633. Note that illustration and description of the same contents as those in the 16th control example will be omitted.

Figure 631 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the ceiling determination process 19 (S8321A) executed by the main control device 110 in the 19th control example. This ceiling determination process 19 determines whether the special symbol selection counter 203la (the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot game) has reached a specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set, and if so, a process is executed to set the ceiling game state.

When the ceiling determination process 19 is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102). If it is determined that the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la (S38103), and it is determined whether the ceiling time reduction waiting flag 203sa is on (S38121A). This ceiling time reduction waiting flag 203sa is a flag that is set on when the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la reaches 500, which is the specified number of times, and indicates that the special symbol has been changed up to the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state (if it is on). If the ceiling time reduction waiting flag 203sa is off (S38121A: No), it is determined whether the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la after the addition has reached 500 (S38104).

If it is determined in the process of S38104 that the value of the special drawing counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), a status command including information indicating the current value of the special drawing counter 203la is set (S38105), and this process ends. The status command set by the process of S38105 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other status commands set in the fifth control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a status command indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la is received, the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc is updated. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to determine the value of the special drawing counter 203la, i.e., the number of times it has been stuck.

On the other hand, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), data indicating the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38112A), a process is executed to clear the information based on the current time-saving drawing lottery (S38113A), and a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times (100 times) is set (S38114A). The value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is updated by adding 1 (S38124A), the ceiling time-saving waiting flag 203sa is set to ON (S38125A), and a scenario for after reaching the ceiling is selected from the variation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj and set in the scenario storage area 203sb (S38126A). It is set to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S3817A). Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S38121A that the ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa is on (S38121A: Yes), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38122A), the ceiling standby flag 203sa and the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa are set to on (S38123A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 632, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 in this 19th control example will be described. FIG. 632 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. Note that some parts overlap with the contents explained with reference to FIG. 166, but they will be explained again for ease of understanding.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 632), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the setting key has been turned to the ON position (S1751A). If the setting key is in the ON position, the setting value control process (S1752A) is executed, and then the process is terminated. The setting value control process (S1752A) will be described in detail later, but if the RAM clear operation has been performed, the initialization process is performed, and then the process related to the settings of the gaming machine (1 to 6) is executed. On the other hand, if the setting key is in the OFF position, the process of S1704 is executed. In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply unit 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not on (S1704: No), the system further determines whether or not information about the power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705). If not (S1705: No), this may indicate that the processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, and in this case too, the process proceeds to S1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S1712. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it executes an initialization process for the RAM 203, and initializes (clears) the areas of the RAM area other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb (S1753A). After that, the areas of the RAM 222 other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb are initialized, and initial data is set (S1754A).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM 203 is initialized, and an initialization (clear) process (S1753A) is executed for the areas of the RAM area in use other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb. After that, the areas of the RAM 222 other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb are set as initial settings, and the initial data is set (S1754A). After that, the process of S1710 is executed.

Similarly, if the power failure occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process proceeds to S1710 after executing S1712, S1753A, and S1754A.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command at power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1721A. In the process of S1721A, a start-up signal output process (S1721A) is executed. This start-up signal output process (S1721A) is the same process as the process of FIG. 533 in the 16th control example described above, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

After the start-up signal output process (S1721A) is executed, a process (S31701) is executed to send a status command including information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la to the voice lamp control device 113, and a process (S31702) is executed to send a status command including information stored in the game status storage area 203g to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 633, the setting value control process (S1752A), which is one process within the start-up process (FIG. 632) executed by the main control device 110 in this tenth control example, will be described. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the control contents of this setting value control process (S1752A). In the setting value control process (S1752A), processing is mainly executed to change and confirm the settings of the gaming machine.

First, in the setting value control process (S1752A), it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 is on (operated) (S1761A). If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 122 is on (S1761A: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712), and an initialization process for the RAM 203 is performed to initialize (clear) the areas of the RAM area other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb (S1763A). After that, the areas of the RAM 222 other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb are set as initial settings, and initial data is set (S1764A).

After that, a state command is set to indicate the setting change state to show that the setting change is being executed (S1765A). It is determined whether the setting switch is on (S1766A). If it is determined that the setting switch is on (S1766A: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area is updated to the set setting type (S1767A). It is determined whether the setting key is in the off position (S1768A), and if it is determined that the setting key is in the off position (S1768A: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key is in the on position (S1768: No), the processes of S1766A, S1767A and S1768A are repeatedly executed until the setting key is in the off position.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1761A that the RAM erase switch is off (S1761A: No), a payout restoration command at power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cut (S1769A), data is read from the setting value storage area (S1770A), the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting display device (S1771A), a status command indicating the setting confirmation status is set (S1772A), and it is determined whether the setting key is off (S1773A). If it is determined that the setting key is in the off position (S1773A: Yes), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the setting key is in the on position (S1773A: No), the process of S1773A is repeatedly executed until the setting key is in the on position.

Next, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 19th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 634 to 637. Note that illustrations and descriptions of the same contents as in the 16th control example will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 634, the performance mode setting process 19 (S5001A) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of this performance mode setting process 19 (S5001A).

This presentation mode setting process 19 (S5001) executes processing to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation, and executes processing to set various presentation modes depending on the results of the special pattern lottery for which the presentation mode is set and the currently set game state.

When the performance mode setting process 19 (S5001A) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state (S34401). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), the performance setting process 19 for normal mode is executed (S34431A), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the special pattern lottery (determination result) is a jackpot (S34432A), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S34432A: Yes), a presentation mode indicating a jackpot is set (S3433A), and after executing the process of S34407, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S34432A, if it is determined that the lottery result is other than a jackpot (S34432: No), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S34403), it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern for when the ceiling is reached is set (S34434A), and if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern for when the ceiling is reached is set (S34434A: Yes), the presentation mode for when the ceiling is reached is set based on the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34435A), and after executing the process of S34407, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not for when the ceiling is reached (S34434A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving display count counter is greater than 0, i.e., whether the number of remaining time-saving times in the presentation is greater than 0 (S34436A). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving display count counter is 0 or less (S34436A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 0 (S34437: Yes), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S34437A: Yes), it determines the presentation mode indicating that the chance time (time-saving game state) has ended (S34438A), and after executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S34437A that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not 0 (S34437A: No), a presentation mode that avoids the end of the chance time (such as a presentation mode in which the rabbit character does not fall into the hole in the cloud (see FIG. 620(b))) is determined (S34439A), and after the processing of S34407 is executed, this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of S34436A, if it is determined that the hit of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is a value greater than 0 (S34436A: Yes), the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is subtracted by 1, and a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa after subtraction (S34441A). After that, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is 0 (S34442A), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is 0 (S34442: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is a value greater than 10 (S34444A), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is a value greater than 10 (S34444A: Yes), a performance mode in which the maximum value of the multiples of 10 less than or equal to the value of the time-saving counter is added as the time-saving count is determined (S34448A). Then, the process of S34407 is executed, and the process ends. In the process of S34407, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S34442A, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is not 0 (S34442A: No), the presentation mode for the chance time according to the received fluctuation pattern is determined (S34443A), and then the process of S34407 is executed, and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S34444A, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 10 or less (S34444A: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 0 (S34445A), and if it is 0 (S34445A: Yes), the presentation mode indicating that the chance time (time-saving game state) is ending is determined (S34447A). Then, the process of S34407 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S34445A that the time-saving counter 223da is not 0 (S3445A: No), the presentation mode indicating a transition to the end waiting zone (see FIG. 620(b)) is determined (S3446A). After that, the process of S34407 is executed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 635, the normal mode presentation setting process (S34431A), which is one process within the previously explained presentation mode setting process 19 (S5001: FIG. 634), will be described. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of this normal mode presentation setting process (S34431A). In this normal mode presentation setting process (S34431A), processing is executed to set the presentation mode that will be executed until the ceiling game state is set.

In the normal mode effect setting process 19 (S34431A), first, the time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), and the effect mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc and the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is determined (S34512A). It is determined whether the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc is 500, which indicates the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state (S3413A). If the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A: Yes), the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached the specified number for setting the ceiling game state, so the ceiling reached flag 223sb is set to ON to indicate that the game will transition to the ceiling game state, and the process proceeds to S34518A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S34513A, if the value of the special drawing counter 223lc is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data of the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and it is determined whether the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is 500 (S34515A). If it is determined that the number of drawings is 500 (S34515A: Yes), the processing proceeds to S34518A. On the other hand, in the processing of S34515A, if it is determined that the number of drawings is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A). If it is determined that the number of drawings is not 500 (S34516A: No), the processing proceeds to S34522. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of draws is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the oldest small bonus history is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517), and the process proceeds to S34518.

In the process of S34518A, a display mode is set to encourage the player not to play with a right-handed hit (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34522A. In S34522A, a variable pattern setting process is executed (S34522A). After that, the linked performance flag 223pe is updated according to the determined performance mode (S34520A), and this process ends. Details of the variable pattern setting process (S34522A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 636.

Next, referring to FIG. 636, we will explain the variation pattern setting process (S34522), which is one process within the normal performance setting process 19 (S34431: FIG. 635) described above. FIG. 636 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of this variation pattern setting process (S34522A).

In the variable pattern setting process (S34522A), first, the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is judged to be whether the time-saving pattern is a hit (S34551A). If it is judged that the hit/miss judgment result is a time-saving pattern hit (S34551A: Yes), it is judged whether the time-saving number of times corresponding to this time-saving pattern is equal to or greater than the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number (the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set) (S34553A). If it is judged to be equal to or greater than the remaining number of times (S34553A: Yes), a value indicating the number of times the special pattern will be lottery until the ceiling time-saving (ceiling game state) ends is set in the time-saving number counter (S34556A). It is judged whether the value of the time-saving number counter is less than 150 (S34557A). If it is judged that the value of the time-saving number counter is less than 150 (S34557A: Yes), a performance mode in which 150 times of time-saving is announced is determined (S34559A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S34557A determines that the value of the time-saving counter is not less than 150 (S34557A: No), the presentation mode in which the time-saving count of 100 is notified is determined (S34558A), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S34553A, if it is determined that the number of time-saving times corresponding to the current time-saving pattern is not equal to or greater than the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number (the specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set) (S34553A: No), the presentation mode in which the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern is announced is determined (S34554A), and the value of the number of time-saving times corresponding to one of the selected time-saving patterns A to C is set in the time-saving times counter (S34555A). After that, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S34551A that the time-saving symbol has not been won (S34551A: No), the ceiling-related effect setting processing is executed (S34552A).

Figure 637 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ceiling-related performance setting process (S34552A) executed by the audio lamp control device 113. In this ceiling-related performance setting process (S34552A), if the received fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation, the ceiling reached flag is used to determine whether or not the game has already transitioned to the ceiling gaming state, and settings are made to execute the corresponding performance mode.

First, in the ceiling-related performance setting process (S34552), it is determined whether the received fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation (S34571A). If it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation (S34571A: Yes), it is determined whether the ceiling reached flag 223sb, which indicates whether or not a transition to a ceiling gaming state has occurred, is on (S34574A). If it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is on (S34573A: Yes), the performance mode for ceiling stimulation corresponding to the next ceiling is determined by lottery. Here, the performance mode as shown in FIG. 625 is determined. Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the process of S34571A determines that the fluctuation pattern is not for ceiling tilt (S34571A: No), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is selected and this process ends. If the process of S34573A determines that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is off (S34573A: No), the performance mode for ceiling tilt (see FIG. 624) corresponding to the initial ceiling is determined (S34575A), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot for a specified number of times (for example, 500 times) in succession, and if the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving game state is set directly (without going through a jackpot game), and during the execution of the variable display effect based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, a display is executed to notify (suggest) the number of time-saving times as one type of variable display mode. Then, if the time-saving symbol is won and the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is directly set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol (the number of times the special symbol changes at which the time-saving state ends if a jackpot is not won) is greater than the number of remaining lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries (the ceiling number of lotteries is reached within the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol), a special display control is executed in which the number of time-saving times that is notified (suggested) is greater than the number of time-saving times that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol. More specifically, assuming that no jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the apparent number of times the time-saving number is reported is taken into account by the number of times the special symbol is drawn from the time-saving symbol winning until the time-saving state actually ends (transitions to the normal state) (in other words, if the ceiling number of draws is reached during the time-saving state based on the time-saving symbol winning, the number of draws until the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws ends). By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate cases where a number of times the time-saving number is reported that is greater than the number of times the time-saving number is set based on the time-saving symbol winning, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries is suppressed from being cleared, and the counter value data for switching and setting the variation pattern group (variation pattern selection table) is also held (the progress status of the variation pattern scenario is held). By configuring in this way, even if a process such as RAM clear is executed, it is possible to set a time-saving state when the variation of the special pattern is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling number of lotteries is reached), and it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling number of lotteries, regardless of whether a RAM clear operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay that gradually increases the sense of expectation until the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, regardless of whether a RAM clear operation is performed. In addition, since the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries does not increase even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, it is possible to suppress players from avoiding playing in a pachinko machine 10 where a RAM clear operation is likely to have been performed (for example, when the hall was in a favorable state other than the normal state when the hall closed the previous day).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, when a jackpot ends and a new variation pattern scenario is set, the counter value of a specific counter (special pattern lottery counter 203la) for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario (number of times the special pattern is drawn (varied)) is updated each time a specific update condition (condition for executing the lottery for the special pattern) is satisfied, and when the value of the specific counter is updated to a counter value (first counter value) corresponding to a predetermined specified number (ceiling lottery number), a control (specific control) for setting a new variation pattern scenario is executed and the value of the specific counter is updated to a second counter value (for example, 0) that is less than the first counter value. More specifically, the value of the specific counter is cleared to 0 each time a jackpot is won, and a new variation pattern scenario is set, and the value of the specific counter is updated by adding 1 each time a lottery for a special pattern is executed, and the value of the specific counter is cleared to 0 and the specific control is executed based on the fact that the value of the specific counter has been updated to 500 corresponding to the ceiling lottery number. More specifically, the number of times the special symbols change is not judged as a jackpot, the number of times is reached as specified (the number of times of ceiling lotteries), and the time-saving game state (the ceiling game state) is set without going through the jackpot game every time the next display of the special symbols stops. The number of times remaining until the number of times of ceiling lotteries is reset when the number of times of ceiling lotteries is reached. In other words, after the number of times of ceiling lotteries is reached, the number of times of special symbols is further drawn for the number of times of ceiling lotteries, so that the time-saving game state (the ceiling game state) is set again. As a result, even if the player does not win a jackpot during the time-saving game state set based on the number of times of ceiling lotteries and transitions (falls) to the normal state, the player can aim to reach the number of times of ceiling lotteries again (the ceiling is activated again), so that the player's motivation for playing is not likely to decrease. In addition, in this 19th control example, the variation pattern scenario is reset based on the number of times of ceiling lotteries being reached. That is, based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws, the correspondence between each of the number of variations until the next ceiling number of draws is reached and the variation pattern selection table to be referenced is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has not been reached or the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more and the time-saving state has been skipped, a special variation pattern can be selected when the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number (150, 100, and 50 remaining). In other words, since the ceiling teasing performance can be executed when the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number, it is possible to realize a gameplay that gradually increases the player's sense of expectation until the ceiling number of draws is reached, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, a variation pattern scenario (a data table that specifies the correspondence between the type of variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern and the number of times a special pattern is drawn) is set as a set (stored in the scenario storage area 223sb) of a scenario for a normal state and a scenario for a game state other than the normal state, and during the normal state, the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times a special pattern is drawn is identified by referring to a scenario for the normal state from the set of scenarios that has been set, while during a game state other than the normal state (a special bonus state or a time-saving state), the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times a special pattern is drawn is identified by referring to a scenario for the other than the normal state from the set of scenarios that has been set. That is, even if the game state is changed midway (for example, when the time-saving symbol is won in the normal state and the state is changed to the time-saving state), the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of variations) when the variation pattern scenario is referred to is not reset, and the variation pattern selection table can be specified by referring to the scenario for the corresponding game state from the set scenarios. Therefore, even if the normal state continues without transitioning to another game state, or even if the normal state is set after transitioning to the time-saving state one or more times, the correspondence between the number of times the special symbol is drawn since the end of the previous big win and the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common while staying in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of the circumstances under which the normal state is set, when the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), the variation pattern for the ceiling agitation can be selected, and the performance for the ceiling agitation can be executed. In other words, in the 19th control example, in a state (normal state) where control for specifying a variation pattern selection table by referring to a variation pattern scenario for the normal state is executed for each variation, when a change condition for the game state is satisfied, control for specifying a variation pattern selection table by referring to a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after the change is executed for each variation, and when an end condition for the game state after the change is satisfied and the game state returns to the normal state again, the specification of the variation pattern selection table is resumed from the number of times of drawing of the special symbol that takes into account the number of times of drawing of the special symbol executed while the game state was changed in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state. In other words, regardless of the timing and number of times of drawing set to other game states, if the normal state is set and the number of times of drawing of the special symbol after the previous big win (or reaching the ceiling number of times of drawing) is common, the same variation pattern selection table is referenced to select the variation pattern. As a result, regardless of the circumstances under which the normal state was set, when the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times of drawing becomes a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a variation pattern for ceiling agitation can be selected, and a performance for ceiling agitation can be executed. This allows you to set the presentation in the normal state in an optimal way.

In the 19th control example, the time-saving state set when the ceiling number of draws is reached for the first time without winning the jackpot after the jackpot is ended and the time-saving state set when the ceiling number of draws is reached for the second or subsequent time are configured to have the same degree of advantage, but this is not limited to the above, and the degree of advantage may be different. More specifically, the degree of advantage may be different by making the number of time-savings different between the first ceiling game state and the second or subsequent ceiling game states, or, for example, as in the 17th control example described above, a time-saving state A (a time-saving state in which a lottery for the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is mainly executed) and a time-saving state B (a time-saving state in which a lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is mainly executed) may be provided, and the type of time-saving state set between the first ceiling game state and the second or subsequent ceiling game states may be different, thereby making the degree of advantage different. In this case, the second and subsequent ceiling game states may be more advantageous than the first ceiling game state, or the first ceiling game state may be more advantageous. By configuring the second and subsequent ceiling game states to be more advantageous, even if the player does not win a jackpot in the first ceiling game state and transitions to the normal game state, the player can aim for the second, more advantageous ceiling game state, so that the player's motivation for playing can be maintained. Also, by configuring the first ceiling game state to be more advantageous, the player can be restrained from choosing a playing method in which the next ceiling lottery number is a mental support and he or she does not quit playing until he or she wins a jackpot after skipping the ceiling game state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively addicted to playing.

In the 19th control example, regardless of whether the setting has been changed, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is maintained as it was when the power was turned off, and the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws does not increase. In other words, the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws after power is turned on is common between power on without a RAM clear operation and power on with a RAM clear operation, but elements other than the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws may also be common. Specifically, for example, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 at the time of power on may be common. More specifically, for example, the display of the first pattern display device 37 may be erased, a common pattern may be temporarily displayed, or a predetermined movable role may be moved in front of the first pattern display device 37 to hide the first pattern display device 37 from the time the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the power is simply turned on or the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. In this case, even if the power supply is cut off under the condition that the variable display is being executed and the power supply is simply turned on (i.e., the RAM clear operation is not performed), the above-mentioned control (the control of erasing the display of the first symbol display device 37 or temporarily displaying a common symbol) may be executed without restarting the variable display. Conversely, the information indicating the state of the special symbol at the time of the power supply cut off (for example, whether or not the variable display is being executed) may be held so as not to be cleared even if the power supply is turned on with the RAM clear operation, and if it is determined that the variable display was being executed at the time of the previous power supply cut off, even if the power supply is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the display mode may be set so that the variable display is pseudo-resumed at the time of power supply on the first symbol display device 37. Also, if it is determined that the time of the previous power supply cut off was a jackpot game state, the display mode may be set so that the first symbol display device 37 is pseudo-indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the power supply was turned on with the RAM clear operation or without the RAM clear operation, so that the player can predict whether the RAM clear operation was performed or not. This can further increase players' interest in the game.

In the 19th control example, when the ceiling number of draws is reached, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared to 0 to reset the variation pattern scenario up to the next ceiling number of draws and reset the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number of draws, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a separate counter may be provided to manage the progress of the variation pattern scenario, and when the ceiling number of draws is reached, the counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario may be returned to a specific value (for example, 250, which is half the ceiling number of draws) rather than being cleared to 0. By configuring in this way, a variation pattern scenario that is significantly different from the scenario up to the first ceiling number of draws is achieved, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In this 19th control example, when a jackpot ends and a new fluctuation pattern scenario is set, the counter value of a specific counter (special pattern lottery counter 203la) is updated each time a specific update condition (condition for executing a lottery for a special pattern) is met, and when the value of the specific counter is updated to a counter value (first counter value) corresponding to a predetermined specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times), control (specific control) is executed to set a new fluctuation pattern scenario and the value of the specific counter is updated to a second counter value (e.g., 0) that is less than the first counter value. However, the specific counter is not limited to a counter for managing the progress of the fluctuation pattern scenario, and the specific control is not limited to control for setting a fluctuation pattern scenario, and the control of this 19th control example may be diverted to other counters and controls installed in the pachinko machine 10. For example, the first winning random number counter C1 for executing the lottery for the special pattern may be used as the specific counter, the fluctuation type counter CS1 for selecting the fluctuation pattern may be used as the specific counter, or the voice lamp control device 113 may be used as the counter for selecting the presentation mode. Also, the control process for executing the winning game may be used as the specific control, the process for selecting the fluctuation pattern may be used as the specific control, the control for determining the presentation mode according to the fluctuation type notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command may be used as the specific control, or the control for determining the presentation mode according to the pre-reading result notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command may be used as the specific control.

In the 19th control example, in a state (normal state) where control for identifying a variation pattern selection table is executed by referring to a variation pattern scenario for the normal state for each variation, when a change condition for the game state is satisfied, control for identifying a variation pattern selection table is executed by referring to a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after the change for each variation, and when the end condition for the game state after the change is satisfied and the game state returns to the normal state again, the identification of the variation pattern selection table is resumed from the number of times that the special symbol was drawn, taking into account the number of times that the special symbol was drawn while the game state was changed in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state. However, this control is not limited to the control for identifying a variation pattern selection table from a variation pattern scenario. If a situation arises where a condition for executing a third control with a higher priority is satisfied while the first control and the second control are executed in a predetermined order, the third control is executed with priority over the first control and the second control, it can be adopted. For example, if a playback condition for a high-priority audio is met while control is being executed to play audio such as music, the originally played music may be played at zero volume while the high-priority audio is being played, and when playback of the high-priority audio ends, the volume of the originally played music may be returned to normal volume, so that control allows playback of the originally played audio to continue from where it left off, taking into account the output period of the high-priority audio.

<20th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 638 to FIG. 649. In the above-mentioned 17th control example, a configuration was adopted in which a scenario covering the number of times of drawing special symbols in a range up to the number of times that the ceiling number of drawing is reached twice (i.e., 300 times) was predefined as a variation pattern scenario, and when the second ceiling number of drawing is reached without winning a jackpot, the counter value of the special drawing counter 203qa was updated to the counter value corresponding to the first ceiling number of drawing (i.e., 150). In other words, after the ceiling number of drawing is reached once, the variation pattern scenario was configured to repeat a scenario in which the number of times of drawing special symbols is in the range of 150 to 300 times (the range of the number of drawing times from when the time-saving state based on the ceiling number of drawing is reached to when the next ceiling number of drawing is reached), thereby making it possible to omit a variation pattern scenario in the range in which the number of times of drawing special symbols exceeds 300 times, and reducing the storage capacity of the ROM 202. In addition, by configuring the device to use a special symbol drawing counter 203qa for determining whether or not the ceiling number of drawing attempts has been reached as a counter for determining the number of times a special symbol has been drawn when identifying a variation pattern from a variation pattern scenario, the number of times the special symbol has changed and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are always consistent regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation (i.e., an operation of turning on the RAM clear switch 122).

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th control example, a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is drawn (special symbol drawing counter 203qa) and a counter for determining the number of times a special symbol is drawn when a variation pattern is specified from a variation pattern scenario (scenario counter 203tb) are separately provided, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on, only the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is held. In other words, the progress of the variation pattern scenario is held from the state at the time of power off, and only the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of draws is reset. In addition, in the 20th control example, the variation pattern scenario is set for the number of draws up to the ceiling number of draws based on the fact that the first specific drawing result (for example, a drawing result corresponding to a small win) different from the big win is obtained in the drawing of a special symbol after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on. In addition, in the 20th control example, in order to reliably set the variation pattern scenario triggered by the first drawing of the special symbol after the power is turned on, the specification is adopted in which the drawing of the first special symbol is either a big win or a small win, as in the 17th control example described above. More specifically, as in the 17th control example, the specification of a so-called one-type two-type mixed machine is adopted, and when the drawing of the first special symbol is executed, there is a 1/50 (18/900) probability of winning a big win, and there is a 1/49 (872/900) probability of winning a small win type in which it is difficult (impossible) to obtain a prize ball and to generate a V prize. By configuring in this way, the variation pattern scenario can be reset by drawing the first special symbol once after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on, so that the variation pattern performance can be preferably executed up to the ceiling number of draws.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 20th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 17th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 638, the characteristic presentation mode in the 20th control example will be described. As described above, in the 20th control example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times is reset, while the progress of the variation pattern scenario is maintained, and the variation pattern scenario is set up to the ceiling number of times based on the first small win after the power is turned on. Also, as described above, in the 20th control example, when the lottery for the first special pattern is executed, either a big win or a small win is always won. As a result, if the lottery for the first special pattern after the power is turned on is a big win, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times is reset as in the other control examples, and the variation pattern scenario according to the reset remaining number can be reset, while even if the lottery for the first special pattern is a lottery result other than a big win (i.e., a small win), the variation pattern scenario can be set up to the number of times of lottery up to the ceiling number of times. Figure 638 shows the presentation mode when the initial drawing of the first special symbol results in a specific drawing result (i.e., a small win) that is different from a big win, and the conditions for setting a new variation pattern scenario are met.

Figure 638 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the variable display mode when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on and the result of the first lottery for the first special symbol is a small win. As shown in Figure 638 (a), when the result of the first lottery for the first special symbol after the power is turned on is a small win, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and at the bottom of the main display area Dm, a futon 852, a character 801 resembling a rabbit sleeping in the futon 852, and an alarm clock 851 sounding an alarm are displayed. In addition, the words "Waiting to wake up..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that something will happen when the rabbit character 801 wakes up.

Figure 638 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of stopping the variation among the variable display modes when the first lottery result of the first special pattern is a small win. As shown in Figure 638 (b), when the timing of stopping the variable display corresponding to a small win of the first special pattern (i.e., a lottery result substantially equivalent to a miss in other control examples) comes, the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a miss combination in the main display area Dm, and a display mode in which the rabbit character 801 pushes off the futon 852 is displayed. In addition, a speech bubble image FD imitating a speech bubble is displayed to the left of the rabbit character 801, and the word "Let's go!" is displayed on the speech bubble image FD. Furthermore, the word "Wake up completed!" is displayed on the sub-display area Ds. These display contents can suggest to the player that some preparations have been made internally in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, a special performance mode is generated in the variable display mode based on the first drawing of the special symbol, so that the player can easily determine whether the RAM clear has been performed. In other words, since it is possible to determine whether the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times of drawing has been cleared by the first drawing of the first special symbol, the player can be made to want to try drawing the special symbol at least once after turning on the power. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall can be improved. Also, as in the above-mentioned 19th control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a specification that allows the setting to be changed to multiple stages, the player can be made to determine whether the setting is possible or not by configuring a performance mode that confirms that the RAM clear has been performed. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall can be further improved.

In the 20th control example, the rabbit-like character 801 wakes up without making it clear what has been set inside the pachinko machine 10, but the presentation mode may make it clear that a variation pattern scenario has been set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that they have moved into some advantageous state.

<Electrical configuration in 20th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 639, the details of the ROM 202 in the 20th control example will be described. FIG. 639 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 20th control example. As shown in FIG. 639, the ROM 202 in the 20th control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th control example described above (see FIG. 552) in that a fluctuation pattern scenario 20 table 202tj is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern scenario 17 table 202qj. In addition, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd have also been partially changed. The other configurations are the same as those in the 17th control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here. Details of the fluctuation pattern scenario 20 table 202tj will be described with reference to FIG. 641 and FIG. 642.

Figure 641 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj in this 20th control example. This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj is a data table in which the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is associated with each number of times the special pattern is drawn, similar to the fluctuation pattern scenario 17 table 202qj in the above-mentioned 17th control example. As shown in Figure 641 (a), the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj in this 20th control example is at least composed of a post-win table 202tj1 that specifies the correspondence between the number of times the special pattern is drawn after the big win and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to, a post-small win table 202tj2 that specifies the correspondence between the number of times the special pattern is drawn after the first small win of the first special pattern after the RAM is cleared and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to, and a ceiling reach table 202tj3 that specifies the correspondence between the number of times the special pattern is drawn after the ceiling number of times is reached and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to. First, we will explain the details of the post-win table 202tj1 described above with reference to FIG. 641(b).

Figure 641 (b) shows the contents of the post-win table 202tj1. As shown in Figure 641 (b), the post-win table 202tj1 in this 20th control example is specified by associating the type of variation pattern table corresponding to the combination of the number of times the special symbol was drawn (scenario counter) and the current game state for each type of jackpot game executed last time.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 641(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is normal, the normal table 202qd1 is associated with the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). On the other hand, the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is associated with the ranges of 100 and 140 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn. This ceiling fanning table 202sb3 is the same data table as the ceiling fanning table 202sb3 provided in the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb in the 19th control example described above, and although not shown, it is also added to the variation pattern 17 table 202qd in the 20th control example. As described above, the small win of the first special symbol in the 20th control example is a lottery result equivalent to a miss in other control examples, so when the small win of the first special symbol occurs in the 20th control example, the variation pattern is selected by allocation corresponding to the miss lottery result. In other words, it is configured so that either a normal reach miss with a variation time of 15 seconds or a super reach miss with a variation time of 30 seconds is always selected. Therefore, when a variation display performance with a variation time of 15 seconds or 30 seconds is set, it is possible to make the player think that the ceiling lottery number is close, and therefore it is possible to improve the player's expectation of reaching the ceiling lottery number. In addition, in this 20th control example, when the ceiling number of draws is reached, the fluctuation pattern scenario switches to a scenario that references the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached, so only scenarios up to the ceiling number of draws are specified in the table 202tj1 for after winning.

Also, as shown in FIG. 641(b), when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated and specified regardless of the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). Therefore, from the end of the jackpot A17 until the ceiling number of draws is reached, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving draws remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed.

As shown in FIG. 641(b), when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot B17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb), and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is defined in association with the number of times the special symbol has been drawn, 100 and 140. In contrast, in a situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 7 to 150, and the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 1 to 6. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 7 to 150 times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming a time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Also, for the number of times of drawing 1 to 6 times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming a time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily executed.

As shown in FIG. 641(b), when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot C17-E17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" or "jackpot B17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 1-99, 101-139, and 141-150 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb), and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is defined in association with the number of times the special symbol has been drawn, 100 and 140. In contrast, in a situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot C17-E17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the number of times of drawing the special symbol (value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 12-150, and the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the number of times of drawing the special symbol (value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 1-11. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 12-150 times after the end of the jackpot C17-E17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (time-saving number remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Also, for the number of times of drawing 1-11 times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming the time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 642(a), the details of the table 202tj2 for after the small win, which is one of the data tables constituting the above-mentioned variation pattern scenario table 202tj, will be described. As described above, the table 202tj2 for after the small win is a data table that specifies the variation pattern scenario that is set when the first special symbol is won in the small win after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 642(a), in a situation where the current game state is the normal state, the normal table 202qd1 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150, and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the ranges of 100 and 140. On the other hand, in a situation where the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is specified in correspondence with the entire range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) from 1 to 150. Therefore, if the time-saving state is transitioned to after 150 times (the number of times of drawing less than the ceiling number of times of drawing) after power-on with RAM clear operation, the time-saving state A with a relatively low degree of advantage is formed. Note that this 20th control example is based on the 17th control example, and since there is no allocation of the time-saving symbol winning in the drawing of the first special symbol, the only case in which the time-saving state is transitioned to within 150 times after power-on with RAM clear operation is when the time-saving symbol is won in the drawing of the second special symbol. In other words, this is a case in which an irregular game method is performed in which the drawing of the second special symbol is executed by hitting the right hand even though the time-saving state is not in effect, so this case does not generally occur.

Next, referring to FIG. 642(b), the details of the ceiling reaching table 202tj3, which is one of the data tables constituting the above-mentioned variation pattern scenario table 202tj, will be described. As described above, the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is a data table that specifies the variation pattern scenario that is set when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches the ceiling number of times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 642(b), in a situation where the current game state is the normal state, the normal table 202qd1 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150, and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn, which is 100 and 140. On the other hand, in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the ceiling-reaching table 202sb4 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) being 1, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) being in the range of 2 to 12, and the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) being in the range of 13 to 150. Therefore, if the first special symbol drawing is not a winning combination after the ceiling drawing number is reached, a super reach variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is always set. In other words, a sufficient presentation period can be secured to perform various notifications such as a presentation mode that celebrates the reaching of the ceiling drawing number, and therefore the presentation mode can be set appropriately. In addition, after the ceiling number of draws is reached, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced for the number of draws from 2 to 12, forming the time-saving state B. Therefore, the extremely advantageous time-saving state B in which the second special symbol is mainly drawn is formed. In addition, for the number of draws from 13 onwards, as long as there are still time-saving counts remaining, the relatively less advantageous time-saving state A in which the first special symbol is mainly drawn is formed. Furthermore, when the number of time-saving counts becomes 0, the normal state scenario is referenced, so if the 100th or 140th special symbol draw after the ceiling is reached is not a winning combination, a ceiling-teasing performance can be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to expect the ceiling number of draws to be reached again.

In this way, in this 20th control example, the number of times the special symbol is drawn when the variation pattern scenario is referenced is determined by the value of the scenario counter 203tb, and the scenario counter 203tb is configured to retain its value even when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. Then, when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation and the first drawing of the first special symbol is a small win, the table 202tj2 for after the small win is set as the variation pattern scenario. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably reset the variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling number of draws without initializing the scenario counter 203tb by a RAM clear operation. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, it is possible to suitably set the performance mode up to the ceiling number of draws.

Next, referring to FIG. 640, the RAM 203 in this 20th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 640 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 20th control example. As shown in FIG. 640, the RAM 203 in this 20th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 17th control example (see FIG. 553) in that a ceiling time reduction waiting flag 203sa, a scenario storage area 203sb, an initial small win flag 203ta, and a scenario counter 203tb have been added. The other configurations are the same as those in the above-mentioned 17th control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

The ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa is the same as the ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa added to the RAM 203 in the 19th control example described above, and is a flag for waiting for the occurrence of the time-saving state until the end of the variable display executed for the first time after the variable display for the ceiling lottery number ends, when the setting condition for the time-saving state is established based on the fact that the ceiling lottery number has been reached. Also, the scenario storage area 203sb is the same as the scenario storage area 203sb added to the RAM 203 in the 19th control example described above, and is a memory area for storing data indicating the currently set variable pattern scenario.

The first small win flag 203ta is a flag indicating whether or not a small win of the first special symbol has occurred at least once after the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on (after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation). If the first small win flag 203ta is on, it means that a small win has been won at least once, and if it is off, it means that a small win has not been won at all. The initial value of this first small win flag 203ta is set to off, and it is set to on when a small win is won in the drawing of the first special symbol (see Y773 in FIG. 646). If a small win is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, the state of this first small win flag 203ta is referenced to determine whether or not it is the first small win after the RAM is cleared. If it is the first small win, the variation pattern scenario in the range up to the ceiling number of draws (150 times) is overwritten.

The scenario counter 203tb is a counter for determining the current number of times the special symbol is drawn when selecting a variation pattern table according to the variation pattern scenario. This scenario counter 203tb is set to a value of 1 when the first special symbol wins a small win after the RAM is cleared and a variation pattern scenario for after the small win (table 202tj2 for after the small win) is set (see Y773 in FIG. 646). In addition, when the big win ends or the ceiling number of draws is reached, the corresponding variation pattern scenario is set and the value is reset to 0 (see S38133A in FIG. 645 and Y2712 in FIG. 648). In addition, 1 is added to the value when the special symbol starts to vary (see Y521 in FIG. 644). By configuring the scenario counter 203tb to manage the number of draws for the special symbol, a variation pattern can be set to indicate that the ceiling number of draws is approaching 50 times or 10 times before the ceiling number of draws is reached. This can effectively increase players' sense of anticipation until the ceiling number of draws is reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 643, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 20th control example will be described. FIG. 643 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 20th control example. As shown in FIG. 643, the RAM 223 in this 20th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 17th control example (see FIG. 558) only in that a scenario set flag 223ta has been added. This scenario set flag 223ta is a flag indicating whether or not a fluctuation pattern scenario has been set once or more after the power has been turned on with a RAM clear operation for the pachinko machine 10, and if it is on, it means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has been set once or more, and if it is off, it means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has not been set. The initial value of this scenario set flag 223ta is set to off, and it is set to on when the power is turned on without a RAM clear operation or when the fluctuation pattern scenario is set for the first time after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation (see S9114A in FIG. 649 and S9515A in FIG. 650). If a small win is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the scenario set flag 223ta is referenced. If the scenario set flag 223ta is off, this means that the variable pattern scenario will be reset due to the small win, so by executing the wake-up completion performance (see FIG. 638(b)), it is possible to suggest to the player that some setting has been completed as part of the internal control of the pachinko machine 10. This allows the player to understand to some extent the internal state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 20th control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 644 to Fig. 648. First, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (Y331) in this 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 644. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (Y331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see Fig. 564) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and is a process executed to select a variation pattern when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, similar to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see Fig. 564).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644) in this 20th control example, the same processes as the Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y512 processes of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) in the 17th control example described above are executed in each of the Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y512 processes. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644) in this 20th control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is updated by adding 1 (Y521), and the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the updated value of the scenario counter 203tb is identified from the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 203sb (Y522), and the process proceeds to Y512.

By executing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644), the scenario counter 203tb is updated independently of the special symbol selection counter 203qa, and the corresponding variation pattern selection table can be accurately identified from the variation pattern scenario according to the value of the independently updated special symbol selection counter 203qa.

Next, referring to FIG. 645, the details of the ceiling determination process 20 (Y332) in this 20th control example will be described. This ceiling determination process 20 (Y332) is a process executed in place of the ceiling determination process 17 (see FIG. 564) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and, like the ceiling determination process 17 (see FIG. 564), is a process for determining whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached depending on the value of the special drawing counter 203qa. FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing this ceiling determination process 20 (Y332).

Of the ceiling determination process 20 in this 20th control example (see FIG. 645), the processes of S38103, S38105, S38112A-S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A are the same as the processes of S38103, S38105, S38112A-S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A of the ceiling determination process 17 in the 17th control example (see FIG. 564). Also, in this 20th control example, the processes of S38121A and S38122A have been deleted.

In addition, in the ceiling determination process 20 (see FIG. 645) in this 20th control example, if it is determined in the process of S38123A that the value of the special drawing counter 203qa has been updated to 151 (S38123A: Yes), the value of the special drawing counter 203qa is updated to 1 (S38131A), and a fluctuation pattern scenario that references the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is set by storing data indicating the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 in the scenario storage area 203sb (S38132A). Next, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is cleared to 0 (S38133A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 646, the details of the special symbol 1 miss stop process 20 (Y731) in this 20th control example will be described. This special symbol 1 miss stop process 20 (Y731) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 1 miss stop process 17 (see FIG. 566) in the 17th control example described above, and like the special symbol 1 miss stop process 17 (see FIG. 566) in the 17th control example, it is a process for setting the stop display of the miss pattern when the change time of the change display corresponding to the miss of the first special symbol has elapsed.

In the special chart 1 miss stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646) in this 20th control example, the same processing as each of the Y751 to Y761 processes of the special chart 1 miss stop processing 17 (see FIG. 566) in the 17th control example described above is executed in each of the Y751 to Y761 processes. In addition, in the special chart 1 miss stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646) in this 20th control example, when the processing of S759 is completed, it is determined whether the first small win flag 203ta is on (Y771), and if it is determined that the first small win flag 203ta is on (Y771: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y771, if it is determined that the first small win flag 203ta is off (Y771: No), this means that the variable display corresponding to the first small win of the first special pattern has ended after the power was turned on with the RAM clear operation, so a variable pattern scenario that references the table 202tj2 for after the small win is set by storing data indicating the table 202tj2 for after the small win in the scenario storage area 203sb (Y772), the first small win flag 203ta is set to on, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is set to 1 (Y773), and this process ends.

By executing this special symbol 1 miss stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646), when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the first special symbol is drawn once, so that it is possible to reliably set a fluctuation pattern scenario up to the ceiling number of draws. Also, in the processing of Y771, if the first small win flag 203ta is on and a small win of the first special symbol is won under the circumstances where the fluctuation pattern scenario has already been set, it is possible to suppress resetting of the fluctuation pattern scenario, so that the timing of setting the fluctuation pattern scenario can be standardized (at the time of the first draw after the RAM clear operation).

Next, referring to FIG. 647, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 20th control example will be described in detail. This start-up process is executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, similar to the start-up process (see FIG. 166) in the 17th control example (and the first control example) described above.

In the startup process 20 in this 20th control example (see FIG. 647), each of the steps S1701 to S1712 is the same as each of the steps S1701 to S1712 in the startup process in the 17th control example (and the 1st control example). In addition, in the startup process in this 20th control example (see FIG. 647), when the process of S1712 is completed, the memory area in the used RAM area other than the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb is cleared (S1761A), and the memory area in RAM 203 other than the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb is set to initial values (S1762A), and the process proceeds to S1710.

By executing the startup process (see FIG. 647) in this 20th control example, when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, it is possible to initialize other data in RAM 203 while retaining the information on the set variation pattern scenario (data in scenario storage area 203sb) and the progress of the variation pattern scenario (value of scenario counter 203tb) in the state they were in when power was turned off.

Next, referring to FIG. 648, the details of the jackpot end process 20 (Y11621) in this 20th control example will be described. This jackpot end process 20 (Y11621) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process 12 (see FIG. 437) in the above-mentioned 17th control example (and the 12th control example), and, like the jackpot end process 12 (see FIG. 437), is a process for making various settings based on the end of the jackpot.

In the jackpot end process 20 (see FIG. 648) in this 20th control example, the same processes as those in the jackpot end process 20 (see FIG. 437) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example) in the 27th control example (see FIG. 437) in the Y2704 to Y2707 processes are executed. In addition, in the jackpot end process 20 (see FIG. 648) in this 20th control example, when the process in Y2707 is completed, data indicating the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb (Y2711), the scenario counter 203tb is reset to 0 (Y2712), and this process is terminated.

<Control process of voice lamp control device in 20th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 649 and Fig. 650. First, details of the normal state presentation setting process 20 (S9011A) in the 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 649. This normal state presentation setting process 20 (S9011A) is a process executed in place of the normal state presentation setting process (see Fig. 264) in the above-mentioned 17th control example (and the 5th control example), and is a process for setting the presentation mode when the normal state is notified by a state command as the game state, similar to the normal state presentation setting process (see Fig. 264).

When this normal state presentation setting process 20 (see FIG. 649) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal state was notified as the game state when the power was turned on for the pachinko machine 10 (S9111A). If it is determined that the normal state was notified based on the power being turned on (S9111A: No), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the normal state is set (S9112A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9111A that the normal state was notified based on the power being turned on (S9111A: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the normal state was set by powering on with a RAM clear operation (S9113A). If it is determined that the power was turned on without a RAM clear operation (S9113A: No), the scenario set flag 223ta is set to ON (S9114A), and the process proceeds to S9112A.

In contrast, if the processing of S9113A determines that the power-on is accompanied by a RAM clear operation (S9113A: Yes), a display command for the wake-up waiting mode is set so that the wake-up waiting performance (see FIG. 638(a)) is executed when a special symbol is selected (see S9115A), and this processing ends. By executing this normal state performance setting processing 20 (see FIG. 649), it is possible to set the performance mode for the wake-up waiting mode while leaving the scenario set flag 223ta in the off state when the power-on is accompanied by a RAM clear operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 650, the details of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (S4991A) in this 20th control example will be described. This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (S4991A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 268) in the 17th control example (and the 5th control example), and is a process for setting the variable display mode of the first special symbol, similar to the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 2689). FIG. 650 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (S4991A).

In the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650) in this 20th control example, in each process of S9501 to S9504, the same process as each process of S9501 to S9504 of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 268) in the 17th control example (and the 5th control example) is executed. In addition, in the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650) in this 20th control example, when each process of S9501 to S9503 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the scenario set flag 223ta is on (S9511A), and if the scenario set flag 223ta is on (S9511A: Yes), the variable display mode according to the variable pattern type notified by the variable pattern command is determined (S9512A), and the process proceeds to s9504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9511A that the scenario set flag 223ta is off (S9511A: No), then it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a small win (S9513A), and if it is determined that it is not a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a small win (i.e., it is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a big win) (S9513A: No), the processing proceeds to S9512A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9513A that it is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a small win (S9513A: Yes), a fluctuation display mode accompanied by a wake-up completion performance (see FIG. 638(b)) is determined (S9514A), the scenario set flag 223ta is set to on (S9515A), and the processing proceeds to S9504.

By executing this special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650), if a small win occurs in the first drawing of the first special symbol after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a wake-up completion presentation can be executed, suggesting to the player that some setting has been made in the internal control of the pachinko machine 10.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 20th control example is configured to execute a predetermined specific control (setting of a new variation pattern scenario) based on the establishment of the first condition (winning a small jackpot with the first special symbol), which occurs relatively frequently during normal play, and to be able to avoid (suppress) the execution of the specific control even if the first condition is established once the specific control has been executed. In other words, the specific control is permitted to be executed only when the first condition is established in a situation where the specific condition is not established, and is configured to perform a characteristic control that avoids the execution of the specific control even if the first condition is established in a situation where the specific condition is established. More specifically, in the twentieth control example, the first condition is met when the first drawing of a special symbol after the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on (after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation) results in a drawing different from the big win (for example, a drawing result corresponding to a small win), and the variation pattern scenario is set for the number of drawing times up to the ceiling number of drawing times. On the other hand, in a situation where a small win has already been won at least once after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation (a situation where a specific condition is met), the setting of the variation pattern scenario is avoided even if a small win is won. In other words, when a big win is won in the first drawing of a special symbol after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, a variation pattern scenario according to the big win type is set at the end of the big win, while a variation pattern scenario is set for the number of drawing times up to the ceiling number of drawing times even if a drawing result different from the big win (small win) occurs. In addition, once the variation pattern scenario is set, the variation pattern scenario is restricted from being overwritten. As a result, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the first special symbol is drawn, so that the variation pattern scenario can be set almost reliably. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the variation pattern scenario can be set up to the ceiling number of draws. In addition, in this 20th control example, a counter (special symbol drawing counter 203qa) for counting the number of draws of the special symbol and a counter (scenario counter 203tb) for determining the number of draws of the special symbol when identifying the variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario are separately provided, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on, only the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is maintained.

In addition, in the 20th control example, when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a first presentation mode (wake-up waiting mode) is set, which suggests that some setting is waiting, and when a lottery for a first special symbol is executed during execution of the first presentation mode, a second presentation mode (wake-up presentation) is executed, which can suggest to the player that some setting has been executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether or not power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not a RAM clear operation has been performed, it is possible to make the player think that at least one special symbol lottery will be executed in a pachinko machine 10 that has not executed the first special symbol lottery since the opening of the hall, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the first lottery for the first special symbol is executed and the variation pattern scenario is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, assuming that there are multiple ceiling lottery numbers that can be set when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the second performance mode (wake-up performance) may be executed as a performance that suggests to the player that the ceiling lottery number has been reset. By configuring in this way, the second performance mode can be configured as a performance that indicates that the setting content that directly affects the player's advantage has been set. In this case, the second performance mode may be configured to execute a performance that suggests which value has been set as the ceiling lottery number. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to want to check the second performance mode more strongly, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall can be further improved. Also, for example, in a specification in which the setting can be changed to one of multiple settings, such as in the 19th control example, the second presentation mode may be executed if the setting is changed when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. In this case, the player can know that the setting has been changed by the second presentation mode being executed, thereby improving the convenience for the player.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, a variation pattern scenario is set to specify the variation pattern selection table by referring to the table 202tj2 for after the small win, based on the first small win of the first special pattern (the first condition is met), and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is reset (specific control), while the execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed) when the second or subsequent small win is won. However, the conditions for the execution and avoidance of the specific control are not limited to this. For example, the specific control may be configured to be executed when the small win of the first special pattern is won consecutively for two or more specific times (for example, 10 times). In addition, as the execution condition of the specific control (first condition), instead of a small win, for example, a simple miss may be adopted, a specific variation type (for example, a short miss or a normal reach miss, etc.) may be adopted, or a jackpot win of a specified jackpot type may be adopted. By allowing various controls and conditions as the specific control and the first condition in this way, the freedom of development can be improved.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a fluctuation pattern scenario is set to identify the fluctuation pattern selection table by referring to the table 202tj2 for after the small win, and control (specific control) is executed to reset the value of the scenario counter 203tb based on the first small win of the first special pattern (the first condition is met), while the execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed) when a small win is won for the second or subsequent times. However, a state is initially set in which the setting of a new fluctuation pattern scenario (execution of specific control) is avoided (the fluctuation pattern scenario and the progress of the scenario at the time of power off are carried over), and a state in which the execution of specific control is permitted is created when a specified release condition is met (for example, after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a specific number of draws (for example, 100 draws) of special patterns that are less than the ceiling number of draws have been performed). In this configuration, the number of remaining draws up to the ceiling number of draws is reset when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, but until 100 special symbol draws are performed, the tendency to select a variation pattern is the same whether the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation or not, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether a RAM clear operation has been performed or not. In this case, it is sufficient to prepare a variation pattern scenario set as a specific control that spans from the number of draws of the special symbol for the specific number of draws to the number of draws of the special symbol for the ceiling number of draws, which has the secondary effect of reducing the storage capacity of ROM 202.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the first special symbol becomes a small win (the first condition is satisfied), and based on this, a variation pattern scenario is set to specify the variation pattern selection table by referring to the table 202tj2 for after the small win and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is reset (specific control), while when the second or subsequent small win is won, the execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed), but the first condition, specific control, and avoidance condition are not limited to these. Other conditions that can be satisfied in the pachinko machine 10 may be adopted as the first condition or the avoidance condition, or other installed control may be adopted as the specific control. For example, it may be adopted for the performance control on the voice lamp control device 113 side. More specifically, for example, the setting of the reserved change performance in the above-mentioned 16th control example may be adopted as the specific control, and the first condition may be adopted as the reception of a winning information command based on a new start winning. In this case, the avoidance condition may be set, for example, to a state during which the reserved change performance is already set, or during the execution of a big win game. By configuring it in this way, you can conveniently set the timing for when the hold change effect will be executed.

<21st control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 21st control example will be described with reference to FIG. 651 to FIG. 664. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example described above, the counter value of the counter (special symbol lottery counter 203la) for counting the number of lotteries after the end of the big win is used to determine whether the ceiling lottery number has been reached, and the number of variations (number of lotteries for special symbols) when identifying the variation pattern selection table from the variation pattern scenario is determined. And, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is configured to be held without being cleared. In other words, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or a RAM clear operation is performed, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are configured to be held without being cleared. In the 19th control example, the variation pattern scenario is configured to set a variation pattern scenario for the normal state and a variation pattern scenario for a game state other than the normal state as a set at the end of the jackpot or when the ceiling lottery number is reached, and if the game state is the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified by referring to the regulation content for the normal state among the set variation pattern scenarios, while if the game state is other than the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified by referring to the regulation content for the non-normal state. In other words, by unifying the setting timing of the variation pattern scenario to the timing when the ceiling lottery number is reset, it is possible to make the variation pattern scenario common up to the ceiling lottery number when the game state is shifted to the normal state, regardless of the game state after the jackpot. In other words, it is configured so that when the remaining lottery number until the ceiling lottery number in the normal state is 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times, the special variation pattern for the ceiling fanning is always likely to be selected.

In contrast, in the 21st control example, the variation pattern scenario is switched when the time-saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number or the time-saving state set based on winning the time-saving symbol ends, and the selection ratio of the variation pattern is made different from the normal one over the predetermined number of special symbol lotteries after the end of these time-saving states. In other words, the relationship between the lottery result and the selection ratio of each variation pattern is made different from the normal one to make the tendency of the variation time different, and the variation display mode set according to the variation time is also made different, thereby forming a special presentation mode. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a jackpot ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special presentation mode is formed to alleviate the player's disappointment and to make the player want to continue playing until the special presentation mode ends. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the time-saving state ends.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 21st control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 19th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 651 and FIG. 652, the characteristic performance mode in this 21st control example will be described. Here, in this 21st control example, the variable pattern scenario is reset based on the end of either the time-saving state activated based on winning the time-saving pattern or the time-saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. More specifically, based on the end of the time-saving state, a special state in which various variable patterns are selected at a selection ratio different from normal is formed for a predetermined period (until 20 special pattern lotteries are completed) in order to form a special performance mode. First, referring to FIG. 651 (a), the performance mode after the end of either the time-saving state activated based on winning the time-saving pattern in this 21st control example or the time-saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number will be described. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the time-saving state activated based on winning the time-saving pattern and the time-saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number (the time-saving state to which the state transitions directly without going through a jackpot) are collectively referred to as the normal time-saving state. In this 20th control example, when there is one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern at the time when the normal time-saving state ends, the system is configured to execute a performance mode indicating the end of the normal time-saving state by utilizing the period until the reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed in the normal state after the normal time-saving state ends. In the normal time-saving state, by continuing to hit the right, the reserved balls of the second special pattern will be accumulated to the upper limit number (4 balls) at the time when the normal time-saving state ends. Figure 651 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode (ending performance for the normal time-saving state) indicating the end of this normal time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 651(a), when the normal time-saving state ends, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm with its head down and tears streaming down its face until the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed, and the words "~END~" are displayed above the character 801. Furthermore, the words "Chance time ended..." are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the normal time-saving state has completely ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 651(a), during the ending performance for the normal time-saving state, the second special symbol is displayed in a relatively narrow range (a range that is difficult for the player to see) in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, changing.

Although not shown in the figure, if a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol during the execution of the ending performance for the normal time-saving state (normal time-saving end performance), an angel-like character 809 appears in the jackpot variation and notifies the rabbit character 801 of the jackpot, and a relatively short performance time is executed. Also, if there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the normal time-saving state and only reserved balls of the first special symbol are present, the ending performance for the normal time-saving state is controlled to be executed using the variable display period based on the reserved ball of the first first special symbol. Furthermore, if there are no reserved balls of the first special symbol or reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the normal time-saving state, the normal time-saving end performance is started at the end of the normal time-saving state, and the ending performance for the normal time-saving state (normal time-saving end performance) is terminated at the point when a new special symbol is drawn. This allows the ending performance for the normal time-saving state (normal time-saving end performance) to be executed regardless of the number of reserved balls at the end of the normal time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 651(b), the performance mode after the normal time-saving ends until the 20th drawing of the special symbol is completed (and after the normal time-saving end performance is completed) will be described. FIG. 651(b) is a diagram showing the performance mode after the normal time-saving ends until the 20th drawing of the special symbol is completed (and after the normal time-saving end performance is completed). Here, although details will be described later, in this 21st control example, the variation pattern scenario is configured so that the rate at which a short variation time (for example, 5 seconds) is selected as the variation time in the case of a miss of the first special symbol between the end of the normal time-saving and the end of the 20th drawing of the special symbol is significantly increased (the rate at which a variation time of 15 seconds or more is selected is significantly decreased). In other words, the configuration is such that, by making it difficult to select a long variation time in the case of a miss, the expectation of a jackpot or winning a time-saving symbol increases relatively in the case of a long variation time. While this special variation pattern scenario is set (until the end of the normal time-saving feature and the end of the 20 special symbol lotteries), as shown in FIG. 651(b), a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm in an effect of climbing a rocky mountain, and the words "Training Zone" are displayed above the character 801. Additionally, the words "Big chance with reach?!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a special variation pattern scenario has been set (a special effect mode has been set), and that the probability of winning is higher than usual when a long variation time is set (a variation type that generates a reach is selected).

Figure 652 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when the transition condition to the normal time-saving state is met again (the ceiling number of draws is reached or the time-saving pattern is won) while the special presentation mode (training zone presentation) is set. Figure 652 illustrates a case where the ceiling number of draws is reached and 100 time-saving times are granted. As shown in Figure 652, when the transition condition to the normal time-saving state is met in the special presentation mode (training zone presentation), a presentation is executed in the main display area Dm in which the character 801 climbs the rocky mountain and reaches the top of the rocky mountain. In addition, the display mode is set to a state in which the same clouds as the rabbit-like character 801 stays around the top of the rocky mountain spread all over the area, as in the presentation during the chance time. Furthermore, the words "Get 100 chance times!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the normal time-saving state will be entered.

Next, referring to FIG. 653, the transition of the presentation mode before and after the end of the normal time-saving state will be described using the example of the case where the time-saving state ends with the end of the 250th variable display of the special symbol after the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 653, when the normal time-saving state ends with the 250th drawing of the special symbol after the jackpot, as the presentation mode in the 250th (i.e., the last in the normal time-saving state) variable display presentation, a variable display presentation with a presentation mode (see FIG. 621) indicating the end of the chance time (time-saving state) is executed, as in the above-mentioned 19th control example. In addition, when the last variable display presentation in the normal time-saving state ends and the game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed by hitting the right hand ends, the ending presentation of the normal time-saving state (see FIG. 651(a)) is executed using the period until all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol reserved during the normal time-saving state end. This makes it possible to further emphasize that the normal time-saving state has ended. Details will be given later, but the variation pattern scenario after the normal time-saving feature has ended is configured so that when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the time-saving feature has ended is between 1 and 4, the variation time for the second special symbol to miss is fixed at 1 second. Therefore, if the reserved ball for the second special symbol is a miss, the ending performance of the normal time-saving feature will be executed for a performance period of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol x 1 second, so the ending performance of the normal time-saving feature will be a maximum of 4 seconds (when 4 reserved balls have been accumulated).

Also, as shown in FIG. 653, when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed and the ending performance of the normal time-saving state ends, a training zone performance indicating a special performance mode is executed. This training zone performance continues until the 20 special symbol lotteries are completed after the normal time-saving state ends. During the 20 fluctuation times during which this training zone performance is executed, the rate at which a fluctuation type with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or more (the fluctuation time during which a reach performance occurs) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is missed becomes significantly lower than usual. In other words, since the expectation of a jackpot when a reach performance occurs becomes significantly higher than usual, the player can be made to expect the reach performance to occur more strongly. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the gameplay is different from usual (the expectation of the reach performance is significantly increased), the player can feel a sense of novelty and can be made to want to continue playing while the training zone performance is being executed. This prevents players from quitting the game immediately after the normal time-saving mode ends, improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. After 20 special symbol draws have been completed and the training zone presentation has ended, the machine transitions to a state in which the presentation for the normal mode is executed.

In this way, in this 21st control example, by setting a dedicated variation pattern scenario (a scenario that identifies a variation pattern selection table by referring to table 202uj3 for after time-saving end (see FIG. 657) described later) when the normal time-saving state ends, it is possible to ensure a period for executing the ending presentation of the normal time-saving state after the normal time-saving state ends and transitions to the normal state, or to transition to a special presentation mode (a playability mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot increases when a reach presentation occurs) after the reserved balls of the second special pattern have been consumed. This can further increase the player's interest in the game after the normal time-saving state ends.

In this case, since the configuration is such that a dedicated fluctuation pattern scenario is set simply based on the end of the normal time-saving state without taking into account the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws, a drawback is that, as in the 19th control example described above, it becomes difficult to select a special fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation when the number of draws after the end of the jackpot (or after power-on with RAM clear operation) is a specific number (350, 400, and 450). The developer can choose which control to prioritize.

<Electrical configuration in 21st control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 654(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 21st control example will be described. FIG. 654(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 654(a), the ROM 202 in the 21st control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 19th control example described above (see FIG. 626(a)) only in that the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb, and the variation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj. The other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the 19th control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 655(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example will be described. FIG. 655(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 655(a), the fluctuation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example differs from the fluctuation pattern selection 19 table 202sb (see FIG. 628(a)) in the 19th control example described above in that a time-saving end notification table 202ub5 and a time-saving end table 202ub6 are added. The other configurations are the same as the fluctuation pattern selection 19 table 202sb in the 19th control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 655(b), the time-saving end notification table 202ub5, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example, will be described in detail. This time-saving end notification table 202ub5 is a variation pattern selection table referenced when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the normal time-saving state is within a range of four or less, and is a data table for fixing the variation time to one second when a miss occurs when using up the reserved balls for the second special symbol that were accumulated at the end of the normal time-saving state.

Figure 655 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving end notification table 202ub5. As shown in Figure 655 (b), in the time-saving end notification table 202ub5, the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to various fluctuation patterns is associated with each type of special symbol and each lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, when the type of special symbol is the first special symbol, a normal reach hit with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 149 for the lottery result of the special symbol "big win", and a super reach hit with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from 150 to 198. In addition, for the lottery results of the first special symbol being "special win" and "small win", a normal reach hit with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, for the special pattern lottery result "time-saving pattern win", a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified in correspondence with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Furthermore, for the first special pattern lottery result "miss", a short miss with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of 0 to 196, and a normal reach miss with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified in correspondence with the range of 197, 198. Therefore, when the first special pattern lottery is executed under a situation where the time-saving end notification table 202ub5 is referenced, the rate at which a fluctuation type with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or more is selected in the case of a miss is extremely low (2/199). Therefore, when the first special pattern lottery is executed, the expectation of a big win can be greatly increased just by the occurrence of a reach performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 655(b), when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, the lottery result "jackpot" of the special symbol is specified to correspond to a short win with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, the lottery result "miss" of the second special symbol is specified to correspond to an "ultra-short miss" with a fluctuation time of 1 second for the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol is executed with the second special symbol within 4 times after the end of the normal time-saving state, the fluctuation time is always set to 5 seconds when the lottery result is a jackpot, and the fluctuation time is always set to 1 second when the lottery result is a miss. This makes it possible to fix the consumption time when consuming the reserved balls of the second special symbol that were accumulated at the end of the normal time-saving state, and therefore it is possible to secure the presentation period of the ending presentation after the end of the normal time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 655(c), the details of the time-saving end table 202ub6, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example, will be described. This time-saving end table 202ub6 is a variation pattern selection table referenced when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the normal time-saving state ends is in the range of 5 to 20 times, and is a data table referenced to form a special presentation mode in which the probability of winning when a reach presentation occurs is significantly higher than usual. As shown in FIG. 655(c), in this time-saving end table 202ub, the prescribed content corresponding to the first special symbol in the time-saving end notification table 202ub5 (see FIG. 655(b)) is set as the prescribed content common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, when this time-saving end table 202ub6 is referenced, the rate at which a variation type with a variation time of 15 seconds or more is selected when the special symbol is not selected becomes extremely low (2/199). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn, the occurrence of a reach effect alone can greatly increase the expectation of a big win, resulting in an innovative gaming experience. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing even after the normal time-saving state has ended, until at least 20 special symbol drawings have been performed, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 656(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in this 21st control example will be described. FIG. 656(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 656(a), the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in this 21st control example is composed of at least the following: a post-win table 202uj1, which is a data table that specifies the fluctuation pattern scenario set with the end of the jackpot; a post-ceiling table 202uj2, which is a data table that specifies the fluctuation pattern scenario set with the end of the ceiling lottery; and a post-time-reduction table 202uj3, which is a data table that specifies the fluctuation pattern scenario set with the end of the normal time-reduction state (time-reduction state based on the time-reduction pattern winning and time-reduction state based on the ceiling lottery reaching). First, referring to FIG. 656(b), the details of the post-win table 202uj1 will be described. Figure 656(b) is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of this post-win table 202uj1.

As shown in FIG. 656(b), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the normal 19 table 202sb1 is defined in correspondence with the ranges of 1 to 349, 351 to 399, 401 to 449, and 451 to 500 for the number of times that the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua), and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is defined in correspondence with the number of times that the special symbol is drawn for 350, 400, and 450. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal state, the special 19 table 202sb2 is defined in correspondence with the entire range of 1 to 500 for the number of times that the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua). Therefore, after the big win, if the game state is normal, a special variation pattern for ceiling agitation is selected each time the number of remaining draws to the ceiling number of draws reaches 150, 100, and 50, and a ceiling agitation effect (see Figures 624 and 625) can be executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling will be described with reference to FIG. 656(c). FIG. 656(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling. As shown in FIG. 656(c), only scenarios for game states other than the normal state are associated with the table 202j2 for after reaching the ceiling. In other words, only scenarios for states until the normal time-saving state ends with the number of time-saving times set based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, or until the normal time-saving state ends when the time-saving pattern is won during the normal time-saving state. This is because, as described above, at the timing when the normal time-saving state ends (i.e., the timing of transition to the normal state), the normal time-saving state is switched to a fluctuation pattern scenario for the end of the normal time-saving state (a fluctuation pattern scenario that references the table 202uj3 for after the time-saving state ends), so there is no possibility of referring to the table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 656(c), when the current game state is a game state other than the normal state, the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) being 1, and the 19 table 202sb2 for sure-variable/time-saving is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the range of 2 to 500. Therefore, as with the 19th control example, after the ceiling number of times is reached and the time-saving state is set, the fluctuation time for the first variable display can be fixed to 30 seconds in the case of a miss, so that a sufficient presentation period can be secured for various notifications to be executed based on the entry into the time-saving state.

Next, the details of the time-saving end table 202uj3 will be described with reference to FIG. 657. FIG. 657 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving end table 202uj3. As shown in FIG. 657, when the current game state is the normal state, the time-saving end notification table 202ub5 (see FIG. 655(b)) is described in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) in the range of 1 to 4, the time-saving end table 202ub6 (see FIG. 655(c)) is described in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) in the range of 5 to 20, and the normal 19 table 202sb1 is described in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the range of 21 or more. In contrast, when the current game state is other than the normal state, the 19 table 202sb2 for special bonus/time-saving is associated and specified, regardless of the number of times the special symbol has been drawn.

By configuring the configuration so that a variation pattern scenario is set that references the time-saving end table 202uj3 after the normal time-saving state ends, the ending performance of the normal time-saving state can be executed in the period from when the normal time-saving state ends until all reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed. Also, a special mode can be created that significantly increases the likelihood of a jackpot when a reach performance occurs from when the normal time-saving state ends until the drawing of 20 special symbols is completed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player want to continue playing at least until the drawing of 20 special symbols is completed after the normal time-saving state ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 654(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 21st control example will be described in detail. FIG. 654(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 654(b), the RAM 203 in this 21st control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 19th control example only in that a scenario counter 203ua and a normal time-saving flag 203ub have been added.

The scenario counter 203ua is a counter for determining the current number of times the special symbol has been drawn when selecting a variation pattern table according to the variation pattern scenario, similar to the scenario counter 203tb in the 20th control example described above. In other words, in this 21st control example, similar to the 20th control example described above, the special symbol drawing counter 203la and the scenario counter 203tb are separately provided, and control for updating them separately is adopted. Specifically, the scenario counter 203tb in this 21st control example is reset to 0 when various variation pattern scenarios are set (see S8323A in FIG. 660 and S38131A in FIG. 661), and is updated by adding 1 each time a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected (S38263 in FIG. 659). The scenario counter 203ua is referred to to identify the corresponding variation pattern selection table from the currently set variation pattern scenario.

The normal time-saving flag 203ub is a flag indicating whether the time-saving state is the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot or the normal time-saving state (the time-saving state based on the winning of the time-saving pattern, or the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number). If this normal time-saving flag 203ub is on, it means that it is the normal time-saving state, and if it is off, it means that it is the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot. This normal time-saving flag 203ub is initially set to off, and is set to on when transitioning to the normal time-saving state (see S38132A in FIG. 661). Also, it is set to off when the normal time-saving state ends (see S8322A in FIG. 660). If the time-saving state ends while this normal time-saving flag 203ub is on, it is determined that the normal time-saving state has ended, and the fluctuation pattern table is reset. That is, since it is possible to set a fluctuation pattern scenario that can realize the ending performance of the normal time-saving state, a performance mode in which the reach performance has a high expectation, etc., it is possible to configure it so that the player is unlikely to want to quit playing after the end of the normal time-saving state. This can improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 658, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 21st control example will be described in detail. FIG. 658 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 658, the RAM 223 in this 21st control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 19th control example (see FIG. 630) only in that a performance mode flag 223ua has been added. As the other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 19th control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The presentation mode flag 223ua is a flag that indicates the current presentation mode. When determining the variable display mode according to this variable pattern command, the variable display mode according to the presentation mode indicated by this presentation mode flag 223ua is selected.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 21st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 21st control example will be described with reference to FIG. 659 to FIG. 662. First, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A) in this 21st control example will be described with reference to FIG. 659. This special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454) in the above-mentioned 19th control example (and the 13th control example), and is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454). FIG. 659 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, the same processes as S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209 in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 19 (see FIG. 454) in the 19th control example are executed in S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot in the process of S8201 (S8201: Yes), the current jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd (S38261A), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that the lottery result corresponds to a time-saving symbol win (S8209: Yes), the type of time-saving win is identified (S38262A) by referring to the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si (see FIG. 629(a)), and the process proceeds to S8203.

Furthermore, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, when the process of S8203 is completed, the value of the scenario counter 203ua is updated by adding 1 (S38263A), and then the currently set variation pattern scenario is read based on the data in the scenario storage area 203sb (S38264A). When the process of S38264A is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state, the special symbol lottery result, and the value of the scenario counter 203ua is identified based on the read variation pattern scenario (S38265A), and the process proceeds to S8205.

Next, referring to FIG. 660, update process 21 (S241A) in this 21st control example will be described. This update process 21 (S241A) is a process executed in place of update process 16 (see FIG. 525) in the 19th control example (and the 16th control example) described above, and, like update process 16 (see FIG. 525), is a process for updating the game state when the special symbol stops varying.

In the update process 21 in this 21st control example (see FIG. 660), the same processes as those in S8301 to S8307 and S8313 in the update process 16 in the 19th control example (and the 16th control example) (see FIG. 525) are executed. In addition, in the update process 21 in this 21st control example (see FIG. 660), when the process of S8306 is completed, it is determined whether the normal time-saving flag 203ub is on (S8321), and if it is determined to be on (S8321: Yes), data indicating a scenario that specifies a variation pattern selection table by referring to the time-saving end table 202uj3 is then stored in the scenario storage area 203sb (S8322A). When the processing of S8322A ends, the normal time-saving flag 203ub is set to OFF (S8323), the value of the scenario counter 203sa is reset to 0 (S8324A), and the processing proceeds to S8313. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8321A that the normal time-saving flag 203ub is OFF, the processing proceeds to S8307.

In addition, in the update process 21 (see FIG. 660) in this 21st control example, when the process of S8307 is completed, the ceiling determination process 21 is executed (S8325) instead of the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the above-mentioned 19th control example, and this process is terminated. Details of this ceiling determination process 21 (S8325) will be described later with reference to FIG. 661.

By executing this update process 21 (see FIG. 660), when the normal time-saving state ends, a variation pattern scenario can be set for when the time-saving state ends, so that a special mode can be created that increases the expectation when the normal time-saving state develops into an ending performance or a reach performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 661, the above-mentioned ceiling determination process 21 (S8325A) will be described in detail. As described above, this ceiling determination process 21 (S8325A) is a process executed in place of the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the 19th control example, and like the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631), it is a process for determining whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached from the number of draws of the special pattern, and for generating a time-saving state when the ceiling number of draws has been reached.

In the ceiling determination process 21 (see FIG. 661) in this 21st control example, the processes of S38101 to S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38117A, S38121A to S38123A, and S38126A are the same as the processes of S38101 to S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38117A, S38121A to S38123A, and S38126A in the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the 19th control example described above.

In addition, in the ceiling determination process 21 (see FIG. 661) in this 21st control example, when the processing of S38114A is completed, the value of the special drawing counter 203la and the value of the scenario counter 203ua are cleared to 0 (S38131), the ceiling time-saving waiting flag 203sa and the normal time-saving flag 203ub are set to on (S38132), and the processing transitions to S38126A.

Next, the start-up process in this 21st control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 662. This start-up process is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, similar to the start-up process in the 19th control example described above. FIG. 662 is a flowchart showing the start-up process in this 21st control example.

Of the startup processes in this 21st control example, steps S1701 to S1712, S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A, and S31702A are identical to steps S1701 to S1712, S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A, and S31702A of the startup process in the 19th control example (see FIG. 632).

In addition, in the start-up process (see FIG. 662) in this 21st control example, when the process of S1712 is completed, the memory areas of the RAM 203 used are cleared other than the special drawing counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb (S1761A), and the memory areas of the RAM 203 other than the special drawing counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb are set to initial values (S1762A), and the process proceeds to S1710. This makes it possible to maintain the number of remaining draws up to the ceiling number of draws and the progress of the variation pattern scenario, even when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 21st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 663 and Fig. 664. First, the performance mode setting process 21 (S5011A) in this 21st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 663. This performance mode setting process 21 (S5011A) is a process executed in place of the performance mode setting process 19 (see Fig. 634) in the 19th control example described above, and is a process for setting a variable display mode according to the variation type notified by the received variation pattern command when a variation pattern command is received, similar to the performance mode setting process 19 (see Fig. 634) in the 19th control example.

In the performance mode setting process 21 (see FIG. 663) in this 21st control example, the same processes as S34401, S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A in the performance mode setting process 19 (see FIG. 634) in the 19th control example are executed in each of the steps S34401, S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A. In addition, in the performance mode setting process 21 (see FIG. 663) in this 21st control example, when the process of S34447A is completed, the performance mode flag 223ua is updated to the value for the ending performance in the normal time-saving state (S34451A), and the process proceeds to S34407.

Next, referring to FIG. 664, the details of the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (S34561A) in this 21st control example will be described. This ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (S34561A) is a process executed in place of the ceiling-related performance setting process (see FIG. 637) in the 19th control example described above, and is a process for setting the performance mode related to the ceiling, similar to the ceiling-related performance setting process (see FIG. 637) in the 19th control example.

In the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (see FIG. 664) in this 21st control example, the same processing as S34571A and S34573A to S34575A of the ceiling-related performance setting process (see FIG. 664) in the 19th control example described above is executed in S34571A and S34573A to S34575A. In addition, in the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (see FIG. 664) in this 21st control example, if it is determined in the processing of S34571A that the current fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern for ceiling tilt (S34571A: No), a performance mode is determined according to the received fluctuation pattern and the performance mode indicated by the performance mode flag 223ua (S34581A), and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to switch the performance mode (S34582A). Specifically, the presentation mode is a mode for the ending presentation after the normal time-saving state ends, and if the reserved balls for the second special symbol reach 0, it updates to a state showing the training zone, and if the number of times the special symbol has been drawn after the normal time-saving state ends reaches 20, it updates to a state showing the normal presentation mode.

If it is determined in the processing of S34582A that it is time to switch presentation modes (S34582A: Yes), the presentation mode flag 223ua is updated to a state corresponding to the presentation mode after the switch (S34583A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S34582A that it is not time to switch presentation modes (S34582A: No), the processing of S34583A is skipped and this processing ends as is.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 21st control example is configured to switch the variation pattern scenario upon the end of the time-saving state set based on reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws or the time-saving state set based on winning the time-saving symbol (normal time-saving state), and is configured to form a special presentation mode by varying the variation display mode set according to the variation time. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a jackpot ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special presentation mode is formed, thereby mitigating the player's disappointment and making it possible to make the player want to continue playing until the special presentation mode ends. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the time-saving state ends.

In the 21st control example, the variation pattern scenario is reset when the jackpot ends, when the ceiling lottery count is reached, and when the normal time-saving state ends, but this is not limited to this. The variation pattern scenario may also be reset when the time-saving state set after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, a special presentation mode can be formed even when the time-saving state set after the jackpot ends, so that it is easy to make the player want to continue playing while the special presentation mode is set. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since the timing of the end of the time-saving state set after the jackpot ends is fixed (it ends 100 times after the jackpot ends), the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery count at the time when the time-saving state or the probability change state ends is the same every time (400 times). Therefore, in the variation pattern scenario that is set when the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot ends, by configuring the number of lottery draws after the scenario is set to 250, 300, and 350, and referring to the variation pattern table for ceiling agitation (ceiling agitation table 202sb3), it is possible to execute the ceiling agitation effect when the number of remaining lottery draws until the ceiling number of draws is 150, 100, and 50. In other words, it is possible to realize the same behavior as the 19th and 21st control examples described above.

In the above-mentioned 19th to 21st control examples, when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a configuration is made to avoid initialization of some data in the RAM 203. In this case, the address at which the data to be avoided from being initialized is stored may be fixed. In other words, the scenario storage area 203sb and the special drawing lottery counter 203la, which are avoided from being initialized in the 19th control example, the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb, which are avoided from being initialized in the 20th control example, and the special drawing lottery counter 203la, the scenario storage area 203sb, and the scenario counter 203ua, which are avoided from being initialized in the 21st control example, may be stored in a fixed address range of the RAM 203. When configured in this way, it is possible to easily divert the program when developing a pachinko machine 10 of another specification based on at least one of the specifications of the 19th to 21st control examples. In other words, when rewriting the program corresponding to the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see Figs. 637, 647, and 662) to match the specifications of the destination device, the address range in which initialization is avoided when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation can be made common, eliminating the need to change this part of the program and reducing the work of the program developer. Also, by eliminating the need to change the program, it is possible to prevent addresses in the program development stage from being rewritten to incorrect addresses as addresses in which initialization is avoided, thereby preventing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 10.

<22nd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 665 to Fig. 734, the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example will be described. Conventionally, there are some pachinko machines with a light amount adjustment function that allows the player to adjust the light amount (LED brightness and LCD backlight brightness) of the pachinko machine 10 by operating a selection button (operation means). By using this light amount adjustment function, the player can adjust the brightness of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, the jackpot game presentation during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and the status presentation for showing the set game state (the brightness of the decorative LED and the brightness of the LCD backlight used as the third pattern display device 81) to any brightness, so that it is possible to provide a comfortable presentation desired by the player. However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, it was common for the light intensity to be adjustable during the waiting period (the period when the special pattern lottery is not being held and no winning games are being played), and the light intensity was adjusted to the desired level by visually checking the brightness of the decorative LEDs that were emitting light at the time the light intensity was adjusted using the light intensity adjustment function, and the degree of variability in the brightness of the backlight of the LCD display on which the waiting screen was being displayed.

Here, in recent years, some pachinko machines aim to save energy by reducing the amount of light emitted by the entire pachinko machine 10 while a standby screen (demo screen) is displayed when the player is not playing. In addition, some pachinko machines are configured to vary the amount of light emitted by the entire pachinko machine 10 in response to the expectation of a jackpot for the performance being executed, even while the player is playing, thereby enabling the execution of a performance that is more striking for the player, and to increase the amount of light emitted by the entire pachinko machine 10 at times when the player should be directed to the content of the performance being executed (for example, when the player is notified of the presence or absence of a jackpot win or when the content of a winning game is announced), thereby preventing the player from missing the performance.

In a conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the light intensity adjustment operation is performed based on the light intensity of the pachinko machine 10 during the standby screen, i.e., the light intensity during play is different (set lower than during play), so when actually playing, there is a problem in that the player realizes that the desired light intensity differs from the set light intensity, and is forced to adjust the light intensity again.

In contrast to this, in the present 22nd control example, when a light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the standby screen, the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) equipped with a relatively high brightness LED is moved to the light intensity adjustment position, and the light intensity can be adjusted while the LED of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is illuminated. In other words, even when no game is being played, the light intensity can be adjusted using the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) used for the variable presentation. This configuration makes it easier to appropriately adjust the light intensity to the player's desired level.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the state in which the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is changed to a variable position (a position that covers the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) that is changed in the actual variable performance is set as the environment adjustment position, and the light emitting means (LED) provided on the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) that is located in the environment adjustment position is configured to emit light.

In conventional pachinko machines 10, the presentation mode of the variable presentation to show the result of the special symbol lottery includes moving decorative movable parts at the timing to notify the player of the presence or absence of a jackpot win or the timing to notify the player of the presence or absence of a change in the content of the variable presentation to a presentation mode with a high expectation of a jackpot win, thereby making the player pay attention to the variable presentation being performed. In this case, it is common to also perform a light-emitting presentation with increased light output from decorative light-emitting means (LEDs) provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, according to this 22nd control example, a state similar to the state in which the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3) is moved in an actual variable performance is simulated, and the light intensity adjustment operation can be performed in that state. By configuring it in this way, in order to prevent a performance that is too dazzling from being performed, the light intensity adjustment operation is performed, and for a player who wishes to lower the light intensity, it is possible to adjust the light intensity based on a performance with a relatively high light intensity, making it easier to appropriately adjust the light intensity to the player's desire.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the light intensity adjustment operation can be performed not only during the standby screen, but also while a special pattern variation is being performed or while a jackpot game is being performed, i.e., during the game period in which the player is playing the game, and when the light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the game period, the light intensity adjustment is performed without moving the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) to the environment adjustment position. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) from being moved based on the light intensity adjustment operation performed during the game period, and to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) has been moved as part of the variation performance.

Here, when the player is performing a light intensity adjustment operation while the standby screen is displayed, that is, when the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, and the player operates the operating handle 21 to cause a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, the first special pattern variation will start during the light intensity adjustment operation, and an event will occur in which a variation performance corresponding to the first special pattern variation that was executed is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

In this case, if the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is kept in the environment adjustment position until the light adjustment operation is completed, the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) in the environment adjustment position will overlap with the variable performance being performed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, which can cause a problem in that the player will find the performance difficult to understand. In addition, because the environmental adjustment position is the position where the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) can move as part of the variable performance, the player may mistakenly believe that the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) in the environment adjustment position based on the light adjustment operation is moving as part of the variable performance.

Therefore, in this 22nd control example, when the special pattern variation is started (a game is executed) while the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is located in the environment adjustment position, the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) while the light intensity adjustment operation continues.

By configuring it in this way, even if a special pattern change starts while a light intensity adjustment operation is being performed during a standby screen, a natural presentation can be provided to the player.

To explain more specifically, when the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) based on the execution of a special pattern change, before the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved, a light-off control is executed to turn off the light-emitting means (LEDs) of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) that was emitting light to check the amount of light, and when all LEDs are turned off, a movement control is executed to move the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) to the initial position.

By configuring it in this way, the light emitting means (LED) of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) can be kept unlit while the decorative movable part is being moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, so that the player can easily understand that the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is not moving as part of the variable performance.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, when the light intensity adjustment operation is completed while the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, and the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is stored in the initial position (storage position), a period of 10 seconds during which the sword part Ym3 is not movable can be set.

Specifically, if the light adjustment operation is performed again immediately after the light adjustment operation on the standby screen is completed, the light adjustment operation is performed in a mode in which the light adjustment operation screen is displayed without moving the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3). Also, if the special pattern variation is started (a game is executed) with the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) located in the environment adjustment position, a variation effect corresponding to the special pattern variation is determined to be a variation effect in which the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is not moved.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent movement control of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) from being executed in a short period of time, and therefore to prevent the sword part Ym3 from moving too frequently and breaking down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movement control of the next sword part Ym3 from being executed before the sword part Ym3 becomes movable, which causes a discrepancy in the movement period of the sword part Ym3 or prevents normal movement from being executed.

Next, in each of the control examples described above, the reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls acquired is displayed on the LCD screen, and the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball is changed based on the result of the pre-reading (pre-determination) of the lottery result for the reserved ball, thereby informing the player of the result of the pre-reading (reserved change presentation) using only the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example, when this reserved symbol change performance is executed, the device is used to cover up reserved symbols other than the reserved symbol to be changed, which are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it clear to the player which reserved symbol is the one to be changed.

To explain more specifically, in the reserved pattern change presentation in this 22nd control example, two decorative movable parts (left change part Ym1 and right change part Ym2, see FIG. 672(b)) are configured to be able to cover and conceal the display area in which the reserved patterns are displayed on the display device, and by changing the positions of these decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2), it is possible to divide the display area of the reserved patterns into parts that are visible to the player and parts that are difficult to see. This makes it possible for only the display area in which the reserved pattern to be changed is displayed to be visible to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the reserved pattern to be changed.

Here, conventionally, there are reserved change effects that use flashy effects to draw the player's attention to the reserved change effect. For example, the reserved pattern to be changed is brightly lit and then the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed. In such a reserved change effect, if a reserved pattern other than the reserved pattern to be changed is displayed, the reserved change effect is displayed overlapping the reserved pattern displayed adjacent to the reserved pattern to be changed, which may cause the player to mistake the reserved pattern to be the reserved pattern to be changed. If it is desirable for the player that the reserved pattern adjacent to the reserved pattern to be changed among the multiple reserved patterns displayed (for example, the reserved pattern to be changed is a white reserved pattern (normal reserved pattern) and the adjacent reserved pattern is a green reserved pattern (a reserved pattern that becomes a red reserved pattern with the highest probability of winning when it changes)), such a mistake may cause the player to be overjoyed and may lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 of the present 22nd control example is configured to use the change devices Ym1 and Ym2 in the reserved change presentation to cover reserved patterns other than the one to be changed that are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, making it clear to the player which reserved pattern is the one to be changed, and preventing the player from mistaking the reserved pattern to be changed.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) are set to an initial position (see FIG. 669(a)) where they do not overlap with the third pattern display device 81 until the hold change performance is started, and when the hold change performance is started, the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) move from the initial position to an operating position according to the operating scenario.

Specifically, the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) do not directly change from the initial position to a state in which the display area in which the reserved patterns other than the change target are displayed is difficult to see, but are configured to gradually narrow the number of reserved patterns that can be seen from four to two, and then from two to one.

This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of gradually predicting which reserved symbols will change in the period from the start of the reserved symbol change presentation to the end of the reserved symbol change presentation, and by getting the player interested in how the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) move, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, when multiple reserved patterns are displayed, the display mode of the adjacent reserved patterns is reflected in the display mode of the reserved pattern to be changed.

More specifically, in this 22nd control example, one of the seven colors (white, blue, yellow, purple, green, red, rainbow) is assigned to one reserved pattern, and the assigned color becomes the reserved color of the reserved pattern. In the reserved change performance in this 22nd control example, the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be changed can be changed by transplanting it from the reserved color of the adjacent reserved pattern. For example, if the reserved pattern to be changed is "blue" and the reserved pattern displayed one before is "yellow", the reserved pattern to be changed to "green" by transplanting "yellow" from the previous reserved pattern to the reserved pattern to be changed, and the reserved pattern one before is changed to "white". In this case, the reserved color "green" is a reserved color that is more likely to be displayed when the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the reserved colors "blue" and "white", so "green" is a reserved color with a higher rank than "blue" and "white".

On the other hand, if the reserved pattern to be changed is "blue" and the previous reserved pattern is "white", the reserved color cannot be transferred to a higher reserved color, but if the reserved color of the reserved pattern displayed next to the reserved pattern to be changed is "yellow", the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be changed can be transferred from the next reserved pattern to the reserved pattern to be changed, making it possible to change the reserved pattern to "green".

By configuring it in this way, even if the reserved color of the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved color with a low expectation of winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that he or she may be able to change the reserved color to a higher reserved color by acquiring a new reserved pattern, which makes the player eager to play in order to acquire the reserved pattern.

<Configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example>
Figure 665 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example, Figure 666 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 667 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 665, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 665), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 666) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 687) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 665) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 665), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a performance button 22 (see Figure 668 (a)) and a selection switch 600 (see Figure 668 (b)) are provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This performance button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the performance or background displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 666) described below.

As shown in FIG. 668(b), the selection switch 600 is composed of a decision switch 600a for deciding the selection of a performance, etc., an up switch 600b for instructing the selection of an up direction, a right switch 600c for instructing the selection of a right direction, a down switch 600d for instructing the selection of a down direction, and a left switch 600e for instructing the selection of a left direction.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 665) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 666) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 666, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill (movable member 310 is shown, others are not shown) and rails 61, 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), a normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 665). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 665) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 666.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 665) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Fig. 687) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of Fig. 666) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of Fig. 666) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 666), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 687), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this 22nd control example, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "10R sure-win jackpot" is a sure-win jackpot that transitions to a high probability state with a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, and a "3R sure-win jackpot" is a sure-win jackpot that transitions to a high probability state with a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum of 3 rounds. Also, a "3R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state with a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum of 3 rounds, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), in other words, a state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability change) includes a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than when the probability change is in progress. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a jackpot increases, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, which is neither a probability change nor a time-saving state (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of a jackpot for the second symbol is increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (start winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 687), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device 640a of the second winning slot 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 640 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second symbol reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the twenty-second control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left of the variable display device unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, to the right of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, there is a second winning hole 640 into which a ball can enter. When a ball enters this second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the winning port. In the twenty-second control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal pattern starting opening (through gate) 67, the electric device 640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 640a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 640 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot being won when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot to be won when a jackpot is reached is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning slot 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning slot 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning slot 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the special bonus or time-saving mode, the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is likely to open when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, making it easier to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning slot 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning slot 640 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example can allow the player to change the way the ball is shot to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This allows the player to have more fun playing the game by providing variation in the way the ball is shot.

The first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the first variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate to the front side, with the lower edge of the opening plate as an axis. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate to the lower front side, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easier for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

In the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, there is a space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 (see Figure 665) in the front frame 14.

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first outlet 71 is disposed below the first winning hole 64.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged on it. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as the movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 666.

As shown in FIG. 667, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 687). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 687). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 669, the decorative movable parts in this 22nd control example will be described. In this 22nd control example, the decorative movable parts are a left change part Ym1, a right change part Ym2, and a sword part Ym3. The change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are decorative movable parts used in the reserved change performance in this 22nd control example, and are in a stored state when the reserved change performance is not being performed. As shown in FIG. 669(a), they are stored below the third pattern display device 81 (initial position), making it easy for the player to see the change performance performed on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, when the reserved change performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 669(b), the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 partially overlap with the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In this 22nd control example, by partially overlapping the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to cover up the reserved patterns displayed in the overlapping display area, making them difficult to see. The detailed operation patterns of the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 697.

The sword device Ym3 is not only used as part of the special pattern change performance, but is also movable as an adjustment device when the player adjusts the light intensity during the demo performance, and is otherwise in a stored state. When in the stored state, it is stored to the right of the third pattern display device 81 (initial position) as shown in FIG. 669(a), making it easy for the player to see the change performance being executed on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, when the sword role object Ym3 becomes movable, as shown in FIG. 669(b), it appears from its initial position to a position (environment adjustment position) where it partially overlaps with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and the player can see the sword role object Ym3, but it becomes difficult to see the display area of the third pattern display device 81 where the sword role object Ym3 overlaps. Note that the variable presentation mode using the sword role object Ym3 in this 22nd control example is configured to be easily set when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win, and by the sword role object Ym3 becoming movable during the variable presentation, it is possible to provide a more impressive presentation than the presentation executed only by the third pattern display device 81, which can increase the interest in the game.

Figure 670 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. Figure 670 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and Figure 670 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in Figure 670 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a first specific winning port 65a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The first specific winning port 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward and left so that a game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 670 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in Figure 671 (b).

As shown in FIG. 670(b), the opening of the first specific winning port 65a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 65f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retreated from within the first specific winning port 65a by retreating to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

By configuring it in this way, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the top surface of the first variable winning device 65 and is guided toward the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, even during time-saving play (including during special play), it is possible to have the game ball enter the second starting port 640 while still in the right-handed state, reducing the effort of immediately changing the playing method to left-handed play after a jackpot play. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the first specific winning port 65a. This shortens the time required for a big win game, and improves the efficiency of the game.

Figure 670(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 670(b). As shown in Figure 670(a), the detection switch 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 65e.

Referring to FIG. 671, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided into the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 65e are distributed to the normal discharge port 65e1 and the special discharge port 65e2 described below.

Figure 671 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 65e showing the state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special outlet 65e2. As shown in Figure 671 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 that guides the game balls, and is rotatably supported on the flow path cover body 65g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 65h2 can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g.

As shown in FIG. 671(a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the special variable switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided at the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability game state (probability change game state). In other words, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning slot for granting the probability change game state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to allocate the game state after the jackpot game to either a low probability game state (normal game state ST1) or a probability change game state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the first specific winning port 65a during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the jackpot game. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of jackpot. In this 22nd control example, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, or jackpot D is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Also, when the jackpot B or jackpot E is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, the game ball that enters the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the case of jackpot B, it is configured not to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability change award rate can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it can be configured to prevent excessive advantages and disadvantages from occurring.

Referring to FIG. 671(b), we will explain the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e1. FIG. 671(b) is a diagram showing the state where the flow path solenoid 65k is not activated and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special outlet 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of this normal discharge port 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether all game balls that entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the special chance switch 65e3. This prevents a problem in which a game ball that won 14 rounds ago wins in the 14th round without being discharged, and the special chance switch 65e3 wins even if it is a jackpot B.

In this way, a game ball that has entered the first specific winning port 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection switch 65c1, and based on that, prize balls (15 prize balls for each winning ball in this embodiment) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, and configuring it so that it can be allocated whether or not it passes through the probability change switch 65e3, a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to grant a probability change game state. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port for granting a probability change game state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

<About the performance content in the 22nd control example>
Here, referring to FIG. 672 to FIG. 686, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example, characteristic effects will be described. First, referring to FIG. 672 to FIG. 677, the contents of the reserved change effect using the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) will be described. As described above, in this 22nd control example, when the reserved change effect is executed, the reserved patterns other than the reserved pattern to be changed are hidden by the change parts Ym1, Ym2, making it easy for the player to understand which reserved pattern is the change target. Then, in the reserved change effect, the change parts Ym1, Ym2 operate to gradually hide the reserved patterns other than the change target, so that the player can enjoy predicting which reserved pattern is the change target. Below, the specific contents of the reserved change effect executed in this 22nd control example will be described.

Figure 672 (a) is an example of a display screen during special pattern change with the change gimmicks Ym1 and Ym2 stored. As shown in Figure 672 (a), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth pattern) is displayed to show the lottery status of the special pattern (whether or not it is being selected (changing) and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth pattern (special pattern 1 fourth pattern) to show the lottery status of the special pattern (special pattern) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display area Dm1 in this way, the player can be informed of the lottery status of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and the situation in which the special symbol is changing is indicated by displaying the fourth symbol in the small display area Dm1 in a variable manner (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 672(a)), and the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by displaying the fourth symbol in a stationary manner in the small display area Dm1 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 678(a)). However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross as the fourth symbol, or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed in a stationary manner to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 672(a), this 22nd control example shows an example in which a fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which a fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the special symbol is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth pattern display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed, thereby preventing the performance effect from being reduced. In this case, the small display area Dm1 may be removed from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

In addition, a small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper left side of the main display area Dm, in which a guide notification mode is displayed to guide the player on how to play in the currently set game state. In the example shown in FIG. 672(a), since the set game state is the normal game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the words "left hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide the player to a game (left hit game) for executing the first special symbol lottery. In this way, by configuring it so that the game method during the normal game state can be displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

When the player is in a sure-win game state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or in a time-saving game state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the word "right hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide the player to a game (right hit game) for executing the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, the third symbol, which is a decorative display corresponding to the variable display of the fourth symbol, is displayed in a variable manner in the upper center of the main display area Dm. By displaying the third symbol in the upper center of the main display area Dm in this way, the player can play the game while simultaneously viewing the variable presentation being executed in the main display area Dm and the lottery status of the special symbol indicated by the third symbol, without looking at the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1.

Next, the center bottom of the main display area Dm is formed with a display area HR1, which is an area where the reserved pattern corresponding to the currently active special pattern is displayed. The word "NOW" is displayed in the display area HR1, indicating that this is an area where the currently active reserved pattern is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that the display area HR1 is an area where the currently active reserved pattern is displayed. In addition, by displaying the currently active reserved pattern hr0, the player can easily predict the lottery result of the currently active special pattern from the display state of the currently active reserved pattern hr0, and when the currently active reserved pattern hr0 is not displayed, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the special pattern lottery game is not being executed.

In this 22nd control example, the pending pattern hr0 and the other pending patterns are displayed in different display areas, but any configuration is acceptable as long as the player can distinguish the pending pattern h0. For example, they may be displayed in the same display area, and the pending pattern hr0 and the other pending patterns may be different sizes so that the player can distinguish them.

Below display area HR1 is display area HR2, which displays the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls currently acquired. In display area HR2, the numbers 1 to 4 are displayed from left to right, allowing the player to easily see which reserved symbols will be consumed in order.

The display area HR2 displays the first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4, each of which is given a different color. The first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 correspond to the reserved balls stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special reserved ball storage area 203va (second special reserved ball storage area vb), and when a player acquires a reserved ball, the reserved patterns are displayed in ascending order from the first reserved pattern hr1, and when the number of reserved balls decreases (when the reserved balls are consumed), the display position of the reserved pattern changes accordingly. Specifically, when the special pattern change corresponding to the active reserved pattern hr0 ends, the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the first reserved pattern hr1 shifts to the position where the active reserved pattern hr0 was displayed, and the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the second reserved pattern hr2 shifts to the position where the first reserved pattern hr1 was displayed. Then, the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the third reserved pattern hr3 shifts to the position where the second reserved pattern hr2 was displayed, and the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 shifts to the position where the third reserved pattern hr3 was displayed.

Now, referring to FIG. 677(a), the display mode of the reserved pattern in this 22nd control example will be described. FIG. 677(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the color of the reserved pattern and the expected probability of winning a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 677(a), "rainbow" has the highest expectation of winning a jackpot, followed by "red" and "green", and then "white", "blue", "yellow", and "purple" have similar expectations. Note that if it is decided not to execute the reserve change performance in the reserve performance setting process 22 (see FIG. 722, F2504) described later, the reserve color "white" is set, and the reserve color "white" is the standard reserve color.

Figure 677 (b) shows an example of a variable color pattern of reserved symbols. As shown in Figure 677 (b), the reserved color "rainbow" is a reserved color that can be changed by combining elements of three or more different reserved colors excluding "white". The reserved color "red" is a reserved color that can be changed by transplanting "blue", one of the elements that make up "purple", from "purple" to another reserved symbol. The reserved color "green" is a reserved color that can be changed by combining an element of the reserved color "blue" with an element of "yellow". In this way, by combining the colors of multiple reserved symbols to make them variable to a higher display mode (color), even if all of the currently displayed reserved symbols have a low expectation of winning a jackpot, the player can expect that the elements that make up them will be combined to change to a higher reserved symbol, so that the player can predict the display mode of the variable reserved symbol from the display mode of the displayed reserved symbol, which can increase the interest of the game.

As described above, in this 22nd control example, the color elements of adjacent reserved patterns are combined. Therefore, for example, if the first reserved pattern hr1 is "purple" and the second reserved pattern hr2 is "blue", the color of the next reserved pattern to be displayed (in this case, the third reserved pattern hr3) can be changed to "rainbow" if it is other than "white", "purple", or "blue", and if it is "yellow", it can also be changed to "green". This makes it possible to make the player interested in what color the next reserved pattern to be displayed will be, and makes the player eager to play in order to acquire reserved balls.

Returning to Fig. 672(a), we continue the explanation. As mentioned above, "white", "blue", "yellow", and "purple" have the same degree of expectation, so in the example shown in Fig. 672(a), the expected degree of winning the jackpot does not change for any of the reserved patterns. Note that in the example shown in Fig. 672(a), the first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 are each displayed in a different display mode (color), but in this 22nd control example, the display mode (color) of the reserved patterns is determined randomly based on the results of the special pattern lottery, so there may be cases where the same color appears consecutively, such as "white", "white", "white", and "white".

As shown in FIG. 672(a), the change role Ym1, Ym2 are stored below the third symbol display device 81 (initial position). The change role Ym1, Ym2 are configured to be the same size as the display area HR2 or larger than the display area HR2, and are configured so that at least the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 that overlap with the change role Ym1, Ym2 are difficult for the player to see. In this 22nd control example, the change role Ym1, Ym2 are in a movable state when a reserved change performance is executed, so that when the change role Ym1, Ym2 are in a movable state, the player can be notified that a reserved change performance will be executed. The operation patterns of the change role Ym1, Ym2 will be described with reference to FIG. 672(b) to FIG. 674(a).

Figure 672 (b) is an example of a display screen when the reserved change performance starts and the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 start moving. As shown in Figure 672 (b), the left change part Ym1 slides to the left and then moves to a position that hides the first reserved pattern hr1, and the right change part Ym2 slides to the right and then moves to a position that hides the fourth reserved pattern hr4 (first action). When the first action ends, the player will not know which of the second reserved pattern hr2 and the third reserved pattern hr3 is the reserved pattern that is to be changed. This allows the player to have fun predicting which reserved pattern is to be changed.

Figure 673 (a) is an example of a display screen when the second operation is performed after the first operation is completed. In the second operation, the right change role Ym2 slides leftward when viewed from the front, and an operation to hide the third reserved pattern hr3 is performed. Then, in the main display area Dm, in conjunction with the operation of the right change role Ym2, an effect is performed in which the reserved color "blue" of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transplanted from the display area HR2 to the second reserved pattern hr2, and as shown in Figure 673 (b), an effect is performed in which the "blue" of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transplanted to the "yellow" of the second reserved pattern hr2 and changed to "green". In this way, the reserved patterns other than the change target displayed in the display area HR2 are hidden by the change role Ym1 and Ym2, making it easier for the player to understand the reserved pattern to be changed.

Then, the left change mechanism Ym1 descends and slides to the right when viewed from the front, and the right change mechanism Ym2 continues to descend and returns to the stored state (initial position) (third action).

Figure 674 (a) is an example of the display screen when the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 return to their initial positions from the state of Figure 673 (b). Unlike the state of Figure 672 (a), the second reserved pattern hr2 displayed in the display area HR2 changes from "yellow" to "green," and the third reserved pattern hr3 changes from "blue" to "white." This allows the player to predict that, among the reserved patterns displayed in the display area HR2, the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 has a high chance of winning the jackpot.

Here, for example, if reserve change scenario 8 (see FIG. 695) is set as the reserve change scenario for the second reserved pattern hr2, and the reserve color of the first reserved pattern hr1 is displayed as "yellow," the reserve color of the second reserved pattern hr2 is displayed as "blue," and the reserve color of the third reserved pattern hr3 is displayed as "red," then if the elements that make up the reserve colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 are transplanted to the second reserved pattern hr2 and a reserve change performance is executed in which the reserve color is changed to "rainbow," and then the reserve colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 remain the same (i.e., the first reserved pattern hr1 remains "yellow" and the third reserved pattern hr3 remains "red"), then, when in reality only the second reserved pattern hr2 has won the jackpot, the player will be given the mistaken idea that there is a high expectation that the second reserved pattern hr2 and the third reserved pattern hr3 will win the jackpot. To prevent this, in this 22nd control example, when an element that makes up the color of the reserved pattern is transplanted, the color displayed changes to the color that corresponds to the transplant.

Figure 674 (b) is an example of a display screen when a part of the reserved color of the reserved pattern is transferred to the adjacent reserved pattern. When the first operation is completed, the second reserved pattern hr2 is displayed in the display area HR2 in the display mode of "purple" and the third reserved pattern hr3 is displayed in the display mode of "white". After that, when the second operation is started, the left change role Ym1 slides to the right when viewed from the front and performs an operation to hide the second reserved pattern hr2. At this time, in the main display area Dm, as shown in Figure 675 (a), a performance is executed in which "blue", one of the components that make up "purple", is transferred from the "purple" of the second reserved pattern hr2 to the third reserved pattern r3. Then, when the change role Ym1 and Ym2 return to their initial positions, the second reserved pattern hr2 is changed to "red" and the third reserved pattern hr3 is changed to "blue". Therefore, in this case, the second reserved symbol hr2, which is hidden by the change role Ym1, has a higher chance of winning the jackpot than the other reserved symbols.

In the 22nd control example, only the colors constituting the reserved pattern are transferred, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved pattern itself may be transferred. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 673(a), a performance is executed in which the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transferred to the second reserved pattern hr2, and the reserved pattern originally displayed at the position of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is displayed at the position of the third reserved pattern hr3 in the display area HR2 after the reserved change performance ends, and the position of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is left blank (a state in which no reserved pattern is displayed), and when a special pattern change based on the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 is executed, the lottery results of the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 and the lottery results of the reserved ball corresponding to the third reserved pattern hr3 may be notified together. By configuring in this way, the number of times that the player is notified that he or she has won the jackpot can be reduced, so that the player can be made to think that he or she has won the jackpot with a higher probability than the actual probability of winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 675(a), a pattern is also set in which the transplant color hr2a transplanted from the second reserved symbol hr2 is "red." In this case, the third reserved symbol hr3 becomes the reserved symbol with a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the other reserved symbols. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the movement of the change gimmicks Ym1 and Ym2, but also in the performance performed by the third symbol display device 81, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Figure 676 (a) is an example of a display screen when, even when the second action is executed from the state of Figure 674 (b), the hidden reserved symbol is not transferred, and the reserved symbol to be changed changes alone. Even though the second reserved symbol hr2 is hidden, the color is not transferred, and the third reserved symbol hr3 changes to "green." In this way, by setting a variety of patterns for the reserved symbol change, the reserved symbol change presentation does not become monotonous, and players are prevented from quickly becoming bored.

As described above, in this 22nd control example, the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are used to hide reserved patterns other than the one to be changed, thereby making it possible to clearly indicate to the player which reserved pattern is to be changed. In this way, because the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 hide a portion of the reserved pattern display area of the third pattern display device 81, when a reserved change performance using an effect such as illumination is executed on the third pattern display device 81, even if the effect for the reserved pattern to be changed overlaps with the other reserved patterns, the other reserved patterns are hidden by the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2, making it possible to clearly indicate to the player which reserved pattern is to be changed.

In this 22nd control example, the change symbols Ym1 and Ym2 are used to hide the symbols, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to hide the reserved symbols other than the symbol to be changed by displaying a shutter-like image, or the third symbol may be enlarged to hide the reserved symbols other than the symbol to be changed.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, only the pattern of transferring the color of the second reserved pattern hr2 to the third reserved pattern hr3 and the pattern of transferring the color of the third reserved pattern hr3 to the second reserved pattern hr2 have been described, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a pattern of transferring the color of the second reserved pattern hr2 to the first reserved pattern hr1 may be set, or a pattern of transferring the color of the third reserved pattern hr3 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 may be set.

In this 22nd control example, the color of the reserved pattern to be changed and the adjacent reserved pattern are combined, but this is not limited to this. For example, a pattern may be provided in which the color of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is transferred to the first reserved pattern hr1.

In the 22nd control example, the color of the reserved symbol is randomly assigned, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color may be assigned according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is two, "white" is displayed on the first reserved symbol hr1 and "purple" is displayed on the second reserved symbol hr2. When one reserved ball is consumed and the number of reserved balls becomes one, the "purple" reserved symbol displayed on the second reserved symbol hr2 changes to a "white" reserved symbol when shifting to the first reserved symbol hr1. When the number of reserved balls is four, "white" is displayed on the first reserved symbol hr1, "purple" is displayed on the second reserved symbol hr2, "yellow" is displayed on the third reserved symbol hr3, and "blue" is displayed on the fourth reserved symbol hr4. In this case, if the reserve change effect is executed at the position of the first reserved symbol hr1 and the second reserved symbol hr2, the player can expect one of the reserved symbols to change to "red", if the reserve change effect is executed at the position of the third reserved symbol hr3, the player can expect a change to "rainbow" or "green", and if the reserve change effect is executed at the position of the fourth reserved symbol hr4, the player can expect a change to "green".

In this way, by configuring the display area HR2 so that colors are assigned according to the position where each reserved pattern is usually displayed, the reserved color that changes varies depending on the position when the reserved pattern to be changed changes, making it possible for the player to take an interest in the position where the reserved pattern change performance is executed, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to Figs. 678 to 680, the light intensity adjustment function executed in this 22nd control example will be described. This 22nd control example has an environment adjustment function that allows the player to adjust the gaming environment (volume and light intensity) of the pachinko machine 10, and when light intensity adjustment is executed during the standby screen (during demo performance), the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved to the environment adjustment position (see Fig. 678 (b)), thereby pseudo-reproducing a state similar to the state in which the decorative movable part is moved in the actual variable performance, and the light intensity adjustment operation can be executed in that state.

Figure 678 (a) is an example of a demo screen (demo screen) that is displayed during a waiting period when no special symbol variation is being performed. On the lower right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a small display area Dm3 is formed in which display selection buttons Sw1 to Sw5 that imitate the selection button 600 are displayed. In this small display area Dm3, the text "Press the button to adjust" is displayed as a guidance mode to guide the player on how to adjust the gaming environment, with "+" displayed on the upper display button Sw1 and "-" displayed on the lower display button Sw3, and "Volume" displayed above the upper display button Sw1, so that the player can easily understand that the volume can be adjusted by operating the upper button 600b and the lower button 600d.

In addition, a "+" is displayed on the right display button Sw2, a "-" is displayed on the left display button Sw4, and "Light Intensity" is displayed to the right of the right display button Sw2, so that the player can easily understand that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the right button 600c and the left button 600e.

At the bottom left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a small volume gauge ga1 and a small light gauge ga2 are displayed as environmental information indicators to show the player the currently set volume and light intensity. The small volume gauge ga1 and the small light intensity gauge ga2 are configured with five levels, with "MIN" displayed on the left side of each gauge and "MAX" displayed on the right side. When the player operates the selection button 600, the environmental setting values ga1a and ga2a change in tandem, making it easy for the player to understand the difference between the gaming environment they prefer and the current gaming environment.

The secondary display area Ds formed below the primary display area Dm displays the words "Demo performance in progress", which is a game information display mode for displaying game information, to clearly inform the player that the game is currently in a waiting period in which special pattern variations are not being performed.

Figure 678(b) is an example of a light intensity adjustment screen when the player operates a button to adjust the light intensity during the standby period. The example shown in Figure 678(b) shows a state in which the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) has been changed to the environment adjustment position based on the player's operation of the left button 600e. The light intensity setting value ga2a of the small light intensity gauge ga2 decreases by one step in conjunction with the player's operation of the left button 600e. The LED setting value Ym3a of the LED associated with the sword device Ym3 is also configured to be variable in five steps, and is variable in conjunction with the small light intensity gauge ga2.

By configuring it in this way, even when no game is being played, the light intensity can be adjusted using the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) used for the variable presentation, making it easier for the player to appropriately adjust the light intensity to their desired level.

At the top right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a display area HR3 is formed which displays a notification mode for notifying the player that the sword role object Ym3 is being moved to the environment adjustment position to simulate movement for adjusting the amount of light. The display area HR3 displays the words "Moving light adjustment role object" to clearly notify the player that the movement of the sword role object Ym3 this time is not related to the variable performance, and is configured to avoid misunderstanding the player.

Figure 679 (a) is an example of an adjustment completion screen that appears when the light intensity adjustment is complete and the player operates the decision button 600a. When the player operates the decision button 600a, an environmental adjustment completion display cm1, which is a guide to indicate that the environmental adjustment is complete, is displayed above the small light intensity gauge ga2. This allows the player to recognize that the currently displayed light intensity setting value ga2a has been set.

In addition, based on the player's operation of the decision button 600a, the sword role object Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (see FIG. 669(a)).

Here, if the special symbol starts to change before the light intensity adjustment is completed, the sword symbol Ym3 will overlap with the third symbol display device 81 while the sword symbol Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, causing a problem in which it is difficult for the player to see the changing performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In contrast, in the present 22nd control example, when the special symbol starts to change during the light intensity adjustment, the light intensity adjustment is continued while the sword role object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 679(b), the sword role object Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in accordance with the start of the special symbol change, and the small light intensity gauge ga2 is switched to the large light intensity gauge ga3. By switching to the large light intensity gauge ga3 in this manner, the player can be made aware that the light intensity adjustment is continuing even if the sword role object Ym3 is changed to the initial position.

Furthermore, if the action of changing the sword role object Ym3 to its initial position is executed during a change performance, the player may be misled into thinking that the current action of the sword role object Ym3 is part of a change performance. Therefore, in this 22nd control example, when the sword role object Ym3 is changed based on the start of the change of the special pattern, unlike when the sword role object Ym3 is changed by operating the decision button 600a, the sword role object Ym3 is changed to its initial position after all the LEDs associated with it are turned off. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand that the sword role object Ym3 is not moving as part of the change performance.

Figure 680 is an example of a light intensity adjustment screen when the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted. In this 22nd control example, when the sword role object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted for a certain period (10 seconds). By configuring in this way, when a performance mode is set in which the sword role object Ym3 is moved as part of a variable performance, the performance execution timing occurs during the period when the sword role object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, which prevents the sword role object Ym3 from performing unnatural movements or being overloaded and causing a breakdown.

When the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted during the standby period, that is, when a player who has finished adjusting the light intensity performs light intensity adjustment again, a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, displaying a guide mode to indicate that the operation of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted. By displaying the words "Role object operation restricted" in the display area HR4, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the reason the sword role object Ym3 cannot be moved is not due to a malfunction.

Next, referring to Figs. 681 to 637, the content of the shutter closing reach effect, which is one of the reach effects executed in this 22nd control example, will be explained. The shutter closing reach effect is a reach effect in which one reach effect is divided into six stages, and if the final stage (the sixth stage) is reached (i.e., if the shutter opens and closes a predetermined number of times), a jackpot win is announced. The specific content of the shutter closing reach effect will be explained below.

First, we will explain the basic pattern of the shutter closing reach performance with reference to Figures 681 to 682.

Figure 681 (a) is an example of a display screen when the shutter closing reach effect starts. On the left and right sides of the main display area Dm as viewed from the front, shutters St1 and St2 are displayed to encourage the player to proceed to the next stage, and a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, in which a guide mode is displayed to notify the player of the progress of the effect. In addition, a game information notification mode is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify the player of the success conditions of the effect. The words "Continue 1/6 with shutters closed" are displayed in the display area HR4, and the words "If you can complete it, it's a jackpot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, so that the shutters St1 and St2 displayed in the main display area Dm close to advance the stage, and when the display area HR4 displays "6/6", it is possible to easily notify the player that it is a jackpot.

In addition, in the center of the main display area Dm, two "3" symbols are displayed as the third symbol, along with a downward arrow indicating that the third symbol is changing, indicating that the "3" symbol is in reach.

As shown in FIG. 681(a), in the shutter closing reach presentation, the state in which the shutters St1 and St2 are vibrating violently is a branching presentation as to whether or not to proceed to the next stage, and if it is decided to proceed to the next stage, as shown in FIG. 681(b), the shutters St1 and St2 close, and the character St1a for "continue" displayed on shutter St1 and the character St2a for "continue" displayed on shutter St2 combine to become "continue," thus informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the presentation will continue.

In addition, the progress of the performance displayed in the display area HR4 changes from "1/6" to "2/6" in accordance with the closing of the shutters St1 and St2, allowing the player to recognize that the performance has progressed to the next stage as the shutters St1 and St2 close.

On the other hand, although not shown, if the branching effect does not progress to the next stage, the shutters St1 and St2 do not close and the vibration stops, and an ending state (for example, the word "Failed") indicating the end of the effect is displayed. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified that the reach effect has ended in an easy-to-understand manner.

Figure 682 (a) is an example of a display screen when the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach performance has been reached. Unlike the state of Figure 681 (a), the "7" symbol is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm as the third symbol in a reach state, and the character "Continue" St1a displayed on the shutter St1 changes to the character "Celebration" St1b, and the character "Continue" St2a displayed on the shutter St2 changes to the character "Fortune" St2b. In this way, by changing the characters on the shutters St1 and St2 from "Continue", which indicates proceeding to the next stage, to "Celebration", which indicates a jackpot win, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the next time the shutters St1 and St2 close, a jackpot will be reached.

Here, in the shutter closing reach performance of this 22nd control example, the number of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is incremented by one each time the shutters St1 and St2 are closed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 682(a), the shutters St1 and St2 have been closed four times since the state of FIG. 681(a), so the number of the "3" pattern is incremented by four and changed to a "7" pattern. Therefore, when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed at the fifth stage, the number of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm becomes an "8" pattern, and as shown in FIG. 682(b), the shutters St1 and St2 are fully opened, and the notification mode nz1 indicating a jackpot win is displayed between the two "8" patterns, thereby notifying the jackpot win.

In this 22nd control example, the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach is determined randomly based on the result of the special symbol hit/fail judgment. For example, if the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach performance is the "2" symbol, the "7" symbol will be displayed when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached.

As will be described later, in this 22nd control example, the player can predict the type of jackpot from the number of the stopped third symbol, and the "7" symbol is the third symbol type that is displayed only when the player wins "Jackpot A," which is the jackpot type that has the most rounds of jackpot play and in which a special probability game state is set after the jackpot play ends. The other symbols indicate that the player has won "Jackpot B," which is the jackpot type that has fewer rounds of jackpot play than jackpot A, or "Jackpot C," which has fewer rounds of jackpot play than jackpot A and in which a special probability game state is not set after the jackpot play ends.

In this way, the player can predict the number of the third symbol that will be displayed when the final stage is reached from the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage, making it possible to create interest in the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The above explains the basic pattern of the shutter closing reach presentation. As mentioned above, the basic pattern of the shutter closing reach presentation is to entertain the player as to whether or not they can reach the final stage. However, simply showing whether or not shutters St1 and St2 will close in the branching presentation results in a monotonous presentation, and there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the presentation.

To address this issue, the 22nd control example adds a configuration in which the mode of the performance executed in the final stage varies depending on the mode of the performance executed in the process up to reaching the final stage. With reference to FIG. 683, an example of a special pattern of the shutter closing reach performance will be described.

Figure 683 (a) is an example of a display screen when a capsule acquisition effect occurs in the third stage of the shutter closing reach effect. After the shutters St1 and St2 close in the branching effect of the second stage of the shutter closing reach, when the third stage of the shutter closing reach begins, an effect may be executed in which a capsule Cp1 is acquired. This capsule Cp1 is displayed in such a way that its contents cannot be seen at the time of the third stage. When a capsule Cp1 is acquired, a display area HR4 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, displaying a game information notification mode to notify the number of capsules held (see Figure 683 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 683(b), in the fifth stage branching effect, the capsule Cp1 displayed in the display area HR4 is opened, and a HOLD ticket Cp1a pops out of the capsule Cp1 and sticks to the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. This HOLD ticket Cp1a prevents the number of the currently displayed symbol from being updated even when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed. In this case, if the fifth stage branching effect is successful, a jackpot win is announced in the sixth stage by the "7" symbol.

The contents of capsule Cp1 do not only contain a HOLD ticket Cp1a, but also specify a pattern in which a display form resembling a "key" can be selected. When this key is selected, shutters St1 and St2 are fully opened when the key is successfully used, and the number of the pattern displayed at that point indicates that a jackpot has been won.

Even if an item such as a HOLD ticket Cp1a appears from the capsule Cp1, there are cases where a jackpot win is not announced (i.e., a miss win occurs), so it is possible to keep the player interested in whether they will be able to win the capsule Cp1, what the contents of the capsule Cp1 are, and whether they will be successful in using the item, and this can prevent the player from becoming bored with the shutter closing reach too early.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, by adding a configuration that allows the player to obtain a capsule Cp1, which is a presentation variable aspect for varying the presentation aspect of the shutter closing reach presentation, it is possible to generate interest in the number of the pattern displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach presentation, in the presence or absence of a capsule obtaining presentation in the third stage, and in the contents of the capsule Cp1 in the fourth and fifth stages, thereby making it possible to sustain the player's attention on the presentation from the start to the end of the shutter closing reach presentation.

Next, referring to Figures 684 to 686, a movie execution reach effect, which is one of the reach effects executed in this 22nd control example, will be described. This movie execution reach effect is divided into a first half and a second half, and when the first half of the reach effect ends, a branching effect is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the second half. If this branching effect is successful, a special movie, which is the second half of the reach effect, begins. Then, when the special movie ends, it is announced that a jackpot has been won.

Figure 684 (a) shows the display screen when a branching effect of the movie execution reach effect is executed. A display effect button Sw6 that imitates the effect button 22 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and below that, a valid period gauge ga4 is displayed as a notification mode for indicating the SW valid period. This valid period gauge ga4 is composed of a remaining valid period ga4a that indicates the remaining valid period and an elapsed time ga4b that indicates the elapsed time, and is configured so that the display portion of the remaining valid period ga4a decreases and the display portion of the elapsed time ga4b increases as time passes, thereby notifying the player of the remaining period during which operation of the effect button 22 is valid.

The secondary display area Ds also displays the text "Push the button to start a special movie?", which is a guide to show the game information that is a condition for success in the movie execution reach effect. In addition to the display effect button Sw6 displayed in the center of the primary display area Dm and the downward arrow displayed above it, which is a suggestion to encourage the player to operate the effect button, the guide displayed in the secondary display area Ds clearly informs the player that operating the effect button 22 may advance the effect.

Figure 684 (b) is an example of a display screen when the special movie ends if the effect button 22 is operated during a branching effect. A display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm to display a notification mode indicating that the special movie has ended. The message "Special Movie Ended" is displayed in this display area HR4, allowing the player to easily recognize that the special movie has ended.

In this 22nd control example, a notification mode is displayed in the display area HR4 when the special movie ends, but this is not limited to this, and any mode that can let the player know that the special movie has ended can be used.

Here, the special movie of the movie execution reach effect in this 22nd control example is set to a movie playback time assuming that the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the SW valid period. By configuring in this way, a problem does not occur in which the special movie does not end within the special symbol variation time if the player does not operate the effect button 22. On the other hand, if the player operates the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, the special movie starts from the point when the player operates the effect button 22, so the special symbol variation time will not end when the special movie ends. For this reason, in this 22nd control example, if the variation of the special symbol has not ended when the special movie ends, the temporarily stopped symbol is configured to shake and wait from the end of the special movie until the special symbol variation stops.

Therefore, if the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. 685, when the special movie ends, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 also stops in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, the third symbol also stops in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, and a notification mode indicating a jackpot win is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, thereby notifying the player that a jackpot win has been won.

On the other hand, if the player operates the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. 684(b), even if the fourth symbol is changing in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol will temporarily stop in a display mode indicating a jackpot win as the special movie ends, and a notification mode to indicate a jackpot win will be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, in the movie execution reach effect, a player who operates the effect button 22 during the SW valid period is notified that a jackpot win has been won before the special symbol stops changing.

Figure 686 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the special movie presentation time and the special symbol fluctuation time. As described above, if the presentation button 22 is operated during a branching presentation, the symbol fluctuation period is set to the period from the end of the special movie to the stop of the fluctuation, and the jackpot notification is executed before the fluctuation stops.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 22nd control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 687. Fig. 687 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display in the first symbol display device 37, setting the display in the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display in the third symbol display device 81. Various counters for controlling these processes are provided in the RAM 203. Here, referring to FIG. 688, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 688 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display in the first symbol display device 37, set the display in the second symbol display device 83, and set the display in the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the following: the first winning type counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the type of big win for the special symbols, the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the type of stop for a miss in the special symbols, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 709), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (conditions for changing) are met, the information on the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed is shifted to the special pattern execution area from among the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, and the special pattern change based on the various stored values begins.

In this 22nd control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is started. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this 22nd control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the lottery result for the special symbol is configured to be only a big win or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, the player may win a small win that can be awarded a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, an opportunity to award a bonus to the player can be provided, thereby improving the interest of the game. In this case, a small win type counter can be provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired small win type counter can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbol is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of games.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of this 22nd control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal pattern start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc are shifted to the normal pattern execution area, and the normal pattern change based on the various stored values begins.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 688. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 709).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this 22nd control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202va stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202va, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 690, the first winning random number table 202va will be described. FIG. 690 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202va. This first winning random number table 202va is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first win random number table 202va specifies different judgment values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 690, for a game state in which the special symbol has a low probability of occurrence (normal state, time-saving state), the first win random number counter C1 values of "0 to 4" are specified as jackpot judgment values, and other values ("5 to 999") are specified as miss judgment values. Also, for a game state in which the special symbol has a high probability of occurrence (high probability state), the first win random number counter C1 values of "0 to 19" are specified as jackpot judgment values, and other values ("20 to 999") are specified as miss judgment values. In other words, the update range of the first winning random number table 202a is 1000 numbers from "0 to 999", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/200 (5 out of 1000), and in the high probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this 22nd control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, two types of lottery results, "big win" and "loss", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a third lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when the "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202va can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. Also, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this 22nd control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202sc to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202sb will be explained with reference to FIG. 691(a).

Figure 691 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first win type selection table 202vb. As described above, this first win type selection table 202vb is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol or the drawing of the second special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first win type counter C2.

Specifically, for the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is set to "0" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 10, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. Note that if the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

When the value of the first winning type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is in the range of "1", "jackpot B" is associated with it as the jackpot type. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 3 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "2 to 99" and is associated with a "jackpot C" as a jackpot type. This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 3 and a normal jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "100" and the value of the special probability counter 203vu is set to "0".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 98 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 98% (98/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot B, jackpot C) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but differ in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided within the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot play, and are configured so that a jackpot play is executed in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot play with "jackpot B" than with "jackpot C." Therefore, "jackpot B" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot C."

Next, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is set in the range of "0 to 24" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 10 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. Note that if the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 25 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 25% (25/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "25 to 41" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 3 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 12 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 12% (12/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "42 to 51" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is two and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 10 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot D." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot D" will be determined is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "52 to 68" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 4 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 17 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of "jackpot E" being determined is 17% (17/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "69 to 82" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot F". This "jackpot F" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 14 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot F." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot F" will be determined is 14% (14/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "83 to 90" and is associated with the "jackpot G" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot G" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 6 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 8 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot G", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that the "jackpot G" will be determined is 8% (8/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "91 to 97" and is associated with the "jackpot H" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot H" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 7 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot H", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot H" will be determined is 7% (7/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "98" and is associated with "jackpot I" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot I" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 8 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot I", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot I" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "99" as the winning type, and "jackpot J" is specified as the winning type. This "jackpot J" is a winning type in which the number of winning rounds is 9, and a special winning game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special winning counter 203vu is set to "120" after the special winning game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special winning game (non-V time), the value of the special winning counter 203vu is set to "0" after the special winning game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) that is associated with the "jackpot J", so if a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that the "jackpot J" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

In other words, the nine jackpot types that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F, jackpot G, jackpot H, jackpot I, jackpot J) all result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game differs, with "jackpot A," which results in the most rounds of game, being the most advantageous jackpot type to the player, and "jackpot D" being the least advantageous jackpot type to the player.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game will be played, so this is a more advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, compared to the first special pattern lottery, which has a 2% chance of playing a guaranteed jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 688, the explanation will continue. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 709) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, referring to FIG. 692, the fluctuation pattern table 202sc will be explained. As shown in FIG. 692(a), this fluctuation pattern table 202sc defines at least a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1 (see FIG. 692(b)), a miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202sc2 (see FIG. 692(c)), and a miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3 (see FIG. 692(d)).

First, referring to FIG. 692(b), the jackpot table 202sc1 will be described. FIG. 692(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1. The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot fluctuation patterns specified are various normal reaches (30 seconds), various super reaches (60 seconds), and special reaches (90 seconds). In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, the range of "0 to 50" as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "51 to 179" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various super reaches (60 seconds), and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various special reaches (90 seconds). When selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1.

Figure 692 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2. The miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss in a low probability state of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, as described above, the stop type is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3 from the stop type selection table (not shown) as to whether the stop type is a complete miss (non-reach) or a reach miss (common to reach) according to the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", a miss reach (front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss) is set.

Here, if the fluctuation pattern type is a complete miss, either a short miss (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long miss (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. For a short miss (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and for a long miss (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set.

For missed reaches, the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 149" is set to various missed normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "150 to 197" is set to various missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "198" is set to various missed special reaches (90 seconds).

In this way, when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss during normal game mode, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type, and selects a fluctuation pattern from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2 based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2.

Figure 692 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3. This miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is selected when the special symbol is in a high probability state and the lottery for the special symbol is a miss. In this miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that in the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2 described above.

As mentioned above, when the game state is a sure-win game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete miss is determined, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", a miss reach (front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss) is determined.

In this way, the probability of reaching a winning jackpot in the event of a miss is set lower in the high probability play state or the time-limited play state than in the normal play state. This prevents the time it takes for a miss to fluctuate during the high probability play state from becoming too long, and the time it takes to hit a jackpot from becoming too long. This prevents the game from dragging on during the high probability play state, when a jackpot is more likely to occur, making the player feel bored.

Returning to FIG. 688, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202vd stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is set by the second winning random number table 202vd, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. In addition, this second winning random number table 202vd is divided into two types, one for when the probability of a winning normal symbol is low and one for when the probability of a winning normal symbol is high, with each type containing a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a win different, the probability of a winning normal symbol is changed between when the probability of a winning normal symbol is low and when the probability of a winning normal symbol is high.

The contents stipulated in this second winning random number table 202vd will be explained with reference to FIG. 691(b). FIG. 691(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second winning random number table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 691(b), when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is a value of "0 to 2", and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 149".

In other words, in this 22nd control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed play) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol win during the normal state, making it difficult to cause a situation in which a normal symbol win game is executed during the normal state and a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a normal symbol win game based on a win of a normal symbol during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, different lengths of variation time are set as the variation time of the normal pattern variation to indicate the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the set game state, and a longer variation time (e.g., 10 seconds) is set when a low probability state of the normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the variation time of the normal pattern variation depending on the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to win the normal pattern lottery and enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, if a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set is won, a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the electric role 640a is opened in an operating mode (long opening) that allows multiple balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win a normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that no matter what game state is set, the possibility of the second special symbol lottery being executed can be left open for the player, improving the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 709).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to Fig. 687, we will continue the explanation. ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 688. Here, with reference to Fig. 689(a), we will explain the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example. Fig. 689(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example.

As shown in FIG. 689(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example has at least a first win random number table 202va, a first win type selection table 202vb, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202vc, and a second win random number table 202vd. Note that the first win random number table 202va, the first win type selection table 202vb, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202vc, and the second win random number table 202vd have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 688, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 687, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 688, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 707) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

As shown in FIG. 689(c), the RAM 203 has at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf, a special chance flag 203vg, a special chance setting flag 203vh, a special chance passing counter 203vi, a winning number counter 203vj, an operation counter 203vk, an alarm counter 203vm, a remaining ball timer flag 203vn, a remaining ball timer 203vo, a special chance active flag 203vp, a special chance active timer 203vr, a discharge number counter 203vs, a time-saving counter 203vt, a special chance active counter 203vu, and a miscellaneous memory area 203vz.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) as shown in FIG. 688, and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning in the first winning slot 64.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 (initial winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting from the area with the smallest area number. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va only in that the counter values acquired in response to winnings in the second winning slot 640 are stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb. As the rest of the configuration is the same, a detailed description will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is obtained when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start hole 67, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va. Also, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the first special pattern (first pattern) variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see F604 in FIG. 703). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a special pattern is performed (see F211 in FIG. 699).

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd (the number of reserved ball counts N for the special pattern variable display) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special pattern 1 reserved ball count command (see F212 in FIG. 699 and F605 in FIG. 703). The special pattern 1 reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern (reserved pattern) on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ve differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd in that the number of reserved balls that have won and been reserved in the second winning slot 640 is stored, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. When the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ve is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special pattern 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the normal start port 67, up to a maximum of four. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal start port 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see F904 in FIG. 706). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is decremented by one each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is executed (see F805 in FIG. 705).

When a ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, if the value of this normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf (the number of reserved normal pattern variable display M) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905 in Fig. 706). On the other hand, when a ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, if the value of this normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc (F903 in Fig. 706: No).

The probability change flag 203vg is a flag that indicates whether the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203vg is set to on, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is off, it indicates that the game state is a low probability game state (including time-saving game state). In this 22nd control example, the probability change flag 203vg is set to on when the probability change setting flag 203vh described later is set to on at the end of the jackpot game (see F1304 in FIG. 712). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game starts. Note that in the initialized state, it is set to off, and is configured so that if a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The high probability setting flag 203vh is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state is to be changed to the high probability game state after a big win game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the high probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball passes through the high probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 671(a)) during a big win game. Here, when the game ball passes through this high probability switch 65e3, the high probability setting flag 203vh is set to ON (F1242 in FIG. 714). On the other hand, this high probability setting flag 203vh is set to OFF based on the high probability setting flag 203vg being set to ON (F1306 in FIG. 712). Note that this high probability setting flag 203vh is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

If the special chance setting flag 203vh is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance setting flag 203vh was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203vh was passed, the special chance setting flag 203vh may be set to on and restored. In this case, whether the special chance setting switch 65e3 was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203vi, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203vh to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming establishment.

The probability change passing counter 203vi is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch 65e3 in one round during a jackpot game (two rounds for jackpots A, B, and D to J in this 22nd control example). It is possible to determine whether all game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by adding up the probability change passing counter 203vi and the discharge number counter 203vs described later. The probability change passing counter 203vi is updated by adding one each time it passes through the probability change switch 65e3 (F1241 in FIG. 714). In addition, after executing a process to determine whether the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, it is reset to the initial value "0" (F1271 in FIG. 715). The probability change passing counter 203vi is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203vj is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game (i.e., the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65). Specifically, it is updated by adding one to the number of game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 671) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (F1233 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203vj) and the number of balls that have been discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203vs and the probability change passing counter 203vi) match (F1267 in FIG. 715), and then it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of this winning number counter 203vj is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when initialized, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203vk is a counter for timing (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a big win A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the second round, and in the case of a big win C, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the second round. In the operation counter 203vk, in the case of a big win A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the second round, and in the case of a big win C, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set (F1202 in FIG. 711). On the other hand, the counter is updated by subtracting 1 at a time in the process of F1239 of the winning process 22 (F1115 in FIG. 714) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110. In addition, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF based on the fact that the value of this operation counter 203vk is determined to be 0 (F1243 in FIG. 714: Yes). This operation counter 203vk is backed up when the power is turned off, and when initialized, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203vk and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the type of jackpot.

The notification counter 203vm is a counter for determining the timing to output a notification effect (in this 22nd control example, the sound "Look at the LCD") to attract the player's attention. In this 22nd control example, the notification counter 203vm is set for 1 second at the end timing of the second round (10 balls enter the first variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203vm is updated by subtracting 1 by the processing of F1224 of the notification processing (FIG. 713, F1114) of the main control device 110. When the notification counter 203vm becomes 0, a notification command is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the processing to output the above-mentioned sound.

By configuring in this way, before the start of the second round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, a voice message saying "Look at the liquid crystal" is output, so the player looks at the third symbol display device 81, which corresponds to the liquid crystal. Since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated in the second round, if the player looks at the operation, the type of the jackpot being executed will be determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to make the player continue to expect that the probability variable game state will be granted until the end of the jackpot game, a notification effect is executed that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 671 (a)). However, when the second round ends, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so a notification effect is executed that notifies the player to look at the third symbol display device 81 by voice during the interval period. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention to the display content displayed after the interval performance is executed, and to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the 22nd control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by informing the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the player may be informed to hold his/her hand over the first variable winning device 65 before the start of the second round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. In addition, the player may be informed to look at the decorative lamp 34 or the like, not limited to the third symbol display device 81, so as to divert the player's attention. Furthermore, the player may be informed to display a three-dimensional code or the like during the second round and to read it with a mobile phone, so as to divert the player's attention. In the 22nd control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of the second round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends is set for the distracting effect. This can suppress the malfunction of determining whether the jackpot is A or B based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203vn is a flag indicating that the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 was closed in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to on, it indicates that the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 was set from an open state to a closed state in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203vo described below is updated by incrementing by one (see F1264 in FIG. 715). The remaining ball timer 203vo is a counter for determining the time since the opening and closing door 65f1 was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203vo is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after the end of a preset round. In this 22nd control example, the time required for the game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this 22nd control example, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203vo. Based on the fact that the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203vo (3 seconds in this 22nd control example) has been reached, a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match (F1267 in FIG. 715). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notice is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. This prevents the fraudulent practice of leaving a game ball inside the first variable winning device 65 and then causing it to reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually does by applying an impact or the like at the start of the second round, causing the game ball to pass through the guaranteed win switch 65e3 even in the event of a jackpot B.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203vh may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch 65e3. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability game state from being improperly granted.

The special chance valid flag 203vp is a flag for determining whether or not the passage of a game ball that passes through the special chance switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off is to be considered valid. When this special chance valid flag 203vp is set to on, it indicates that the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the special outlet 65e2 (see FIG. 671(a)) to pass through the special chance switch 65e3 is less than the time required for the game ball to pass through the special chance switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being on. In other words, the period during which the special chance valid flag 203vp is on indicates that it is normal for the game ball to pass through the special chance switch 65e3.

The special chance valid timer 203vr is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203vp described above is set to on. This special chance valid timer 203vr makes it possible to determine (measure) the period required for a ball to pass normally through the special chance switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In this 22nd control example, it takes one second for a game ball that has entered the special outlet 65e2 to pass through the special chance switch 65e3. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203vr is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the special chance switch 65e3 after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as illegally putting a game ball into the special outlet 65e2 without the switching member 65h guiding it to the special outlet 65e2, causing the game ball to pass through the special switch 65e3, or pushing the game ball up from below the special switch 65e3 with a piano wire or the like, or causing the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the game ball has passed through using radio waves or the like.

The discharged ball number counter 203vs is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 671(a)) in one round. This discharged ball number counter 203vs is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged have been determined (F1271 in FIG. 715).

The time-saving counter 203vt is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol changes remaining in the time-saving game state. This time-saving counter 203vt is set to 100 if the high probability setting flag is off when the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this 22nd control example, if the high probability game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a time-saving game state of 100 times.

The probability change counter 203vu is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol changes remaining in the probability change game state. This probability change counter 203vu is set to 120 if the probability change setting flag is on when the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this 22nd control example, if the probability change game state is set after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a probability change game state of 120 times.

Other memory area 203vz stores other data necessary for play, counters, flags, etc.

Returning to FIG. 687, we will continue the explanation. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (speaker 308, etc.) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (illumination section 29-33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

As shown in FIG. 687, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22A (performance button 22, selection button 600), and a group of drive motors. The group of drive motors includes a motor 771 for a sword role, motors 773 and 774 for change roles, and other motors.

Each of the motors mentioned above is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 outputs operation commands (commands that can specify the operation (rotation) speed (pps), the number of operation steps, and the operation (rotation) direction) that set the operation contents for each motor driver. The motor operation commands output from this voice lamp control device 113 are set by referring to the contents specified in the operation scenario table 222vf stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22A, and when the frame button 22A is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22A is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22A, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22A.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, we will explain the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 22nd control example. As shown in FIG. 693(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222va, a reserve change performance lottery table 222vb, a reserve color selection table 222vc, a reserve change scenario selection table 222vd, a shutter closing reach selection table 222ve, and an operation scenario table 222vf.

In the variation pattern selection table 222va, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In the variation pattern selection table 222va, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

The hold change performance selection table 222vb sets the hold change performance mode (not executed, single hold change performance, composite hold change performance) for each counter value of the first performance counter 223vf. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command for a special symbol from the main control device 110, it determines whether or not to execute a hold change performance for the hold symbol corresponding to the winning information based on this hold change performance selection table 222vb.

Here, the contents of the reserve change performance selection table 222vb will be described with reference to FIG. 694(a). FIG. 694(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserve change performance selection table 222vb. As shown in FIG. 694(a), in this 22nd control example, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a reserve change performance for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning command for the special symbol received from the main control device 110 based on the counter value of the first performance counter 223vf.

The value of the first effect counter 223vf is defined as "Do not execute hold change effect" in the range of "0 to 29", as "Single hold change effect" in the range of "30 to 89", and as "Composite hold change effect" in the range of "90 to 98".

The single reserve change effect is an effect in which, when a winning command for a special symbol is received from the main control device 110, the reserve color at the start of displaying the reserved symbol is displayed in the reserve color determined from the reserve color selection table 222vc. Note that, if the reserve change effect is not executed, the reserve color is set to "white."

The composite reserve change effect is a reserve change effect that uses multiple reserve symbols, and changes the reserve colors of the multiple reserve symbols that are displayed when the special symbol starts to change based on a preset reserve change scenario.

Returning to Figure 693 (a), we will continue the explanation. In the reserved color selection table 222vc, reserved colors are set for the counter values of the second effect counter 223vg. This reserved color selection table 222vc is a table that is referenced to determine the color of the reserved pattern that corresponds to the winning command received from the main control device 110 when a single reserved change effect is executed (see F2559 in Figure 722).

Now, with reference to FIG. 694(b), the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc will be described. FIG. 694(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc. As shown in FIG. 694(b), in this 22nd control example, the reserved color of the reserved pattern is determined based on the result of the win/lose determination and the counter value of the second performance counter 223vg.

When the result of the hit/miss judgment is "hit", the reserved color "white" is specified to correspond to the range of the second performance counter 223vg from "0 to 29", the reserved color "blue" is specified to correspond to the range of "30 to 59", the reserved color "yellow" is specified to correspond to the range of "60 to 89", the reserved color "purple" is specified to correspond to the range of "90 to 119", the reserved color "green" is specified to correspond to the range of "120 to 179", the reserved color "red" is specified to correspond to the range of "180 to 194", and the reserved color "rainbow" is specified to correspond to the range of "195 to 198". When the result of the hit/miss judgment is "hit", the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to on regardless of which reserved color is selected, and information indicating "hit reserved" is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl.

The hold effect information storage area 223vl is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and stores hold effect information for executing hold change effects for the hold pattern.

The reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new reserved performance for other reserved patterns from being set during the period when the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance is displayed. As described above, in this 22nd control example, a reserved performance is executed that combines the reserved color of the target reserved pattern with the reserved colors of the reserved patterns before and after it (see Figs. 672 to 677). In this reserved performance, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 move according to an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined reserved change scenario. For example, if a different reserved change scenario is set for the reserved pattern next to the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance, the execution timing of the reserved change performance may overlap, and there is a risk of giving incorrect game information to the player. In order to prevent this, a new reserved change performance is not executed during the period when the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is on.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is "miss", the reserve color "white" is associated with the range of the second performance counter 223vg from "0 to 49", the reserve color "blue" is associated with the range of "50 to 149", the reserve color "yellow" is associated with the range of "150 to 174", the reserve color "purple" is associated with the range of "175 to 194", the reserve color "green" is associated with the range of "195 to 197", and the reserve color "red" is associated with the range of "198". If the result of the hit/miss judgment is "miss", regardless of which reserve color is selected, the reserve performance restriction flag 223vm is set to off, and the reserve color information corresponding to the selected reserve color is stored in the reserve performance information storage area 223vl.

As shown in FIG. 694(b), when the result of the win/loss judgment is a "win," there is a greater range in which the reserved colors "green" and "red" can be selected than when the result of the win/loss judgment is a "miss," and "rainbow" can also be selected. In this way, by setting reserved colors that are likely to be selected when the result of the win/loss judgment is a "win" and when it is a "miss," the player can predict the result of the win/loss judgment based on the reserved color of the displayed reserved pattern.

In this 22nd control example, seven reserved colors are used, but this is not limited to this and six or fewer colors or eight or more colors are also acceptable.

Returning to FIG. 693(a), we will continue the explanation. The reserve change scenario selection table 222vd is a table that is referenced when a composite reserve change presentation is executed to determine the reserve presentation information, such as the reserve color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning command received from the main control device 110 and the reserve change scenario, based on the win/lose determination result, the previous reserve color, and the value of the second presentation counter 223vg.

Here, the contents of the reserved change scenario selection table 222vd will be described with reference to FIG. 695. FIG. 695 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved change scenario selection table 222vd. As shown in FIG. 695, the reserved change scenario selection table 222vd determines the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command based on the winning/losing judgment result included in the winning command received from the main control device 110, the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the previous winning command, and the value of the second performance counter 223vg, and sets whether or not to turn on the reserved change performance restriction flag 223sm and the later reserved setting flag 223vn. In addition, the reserved change scenario is set, and information for executing a performance in which the reserved color changes at a predetermined timing during the period until the fluctuation of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern begins is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl.

The later hold setting flag 223vn is provided in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a flag for forcibly determining the hold color of the hold pattern corresponding to the next received winning command when a hold change scenario of the composite hold change performance is set. It is turned on (see F2605 in FIG. 723) when a specific hold change scenario is determined in the composite hold change performance setting process 22 (see F2517 in FIG. 723), and is turned off when the hold color of the next received winning command is determined (see F2553 in FIG. 722).

Returning to FIG. 695, the explanation will continue. If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before is "white", and the value of the second performance counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 49", "purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color is "purple" and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 1" is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl. In the reserved change scenario 1, since the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before the reserved color "purple" of the target reserved pattern is "white", when the reserved pattern one before is hidden by the left change role Ym1, no color is transferred and the reserved color of the reserved pattern does not change. In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next received winning command, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains in the OFF state.

In this 22nd control example, when the "white" reserved symbol is hidden, the reserved color of the reserved symbol does not change, but this is not limited to this, and the reserved symbol to be changed may be the only one to perform the reserved change effect.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is "win" and the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before is "white", and the value of the second performance counter 223vg is in the range of "50 to 89", "purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "purple" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 2" are stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl. In the reserved change scenario 2, since the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before the reserved color "purple" of the target reserved pattern is "white", when the target reserved pattern is hidden by the right change role Ym1, "blue" is transplanted from the target reserved pattern "purple" to the reserved pattern one before, and the target reserved pattern changes to "red" and the reserved pattern one before changes to "blue". In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next received winning command, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains in the OFF state.

In this way, the reserved symbol hidden by the change device Ym1, Ym2 can be changed to a display mode that has a high probability of winning a jackpot, providing the player with an unexpected presentation.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "90 to 198", "blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "blue" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is "yellow", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 3". The reserved change scenario 3 is a scenario in which the reserved color "yellow" of the next reserved symbol is transplanted to the reserved color "blue" of the target reserved symbol, the target reserved symbol is changed to "green", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol is changed from "yellow" to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified to "yellow", the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 69", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "yellow", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "yellow" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 4" are stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. The reserved color "yellow" of the target reserved symbol is transferred to the reserved color "yellow" of the previous reserved symbol, the previous reserved symbol is changed to "white", and the reserved color of the target reserved symbol is changed from "yellow" to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is maintained in the OFF state.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "70 to 149", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "white", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is stored as "purple", and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 5" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. The reserved color "white" of the target reserved symbol is transferred from the reserved color "purple" of the next reserved symbol to "red", the target reserved symbol is changed to "red", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol is changed from "purple" to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "purple", the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "yellow", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "yellow" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is "red", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 6". In the reserved change scenario 6, the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol, "blue", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol, "red", are transplanted to the reserved color "yellow" of the target reserved symbol, the target reserved symbol is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is changed from "blue" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol is changed from "red" to "white". In this case, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "red," so the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to on.

In this way, even if a reserved pattern (red reserved pattern) with a display mode that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed, it can be transplanted to another reserved pattern to become a reserved pattern (rainbow reserved pattern) with an even higher expectation of winning a jackpot. Even if a reserved pattern with a display mode that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed first, it is not known which reserved pattern it will be transplanted to until the reserve change performance is executed, so it is possible to prevent lottery games based on reserved balls acquired before the reserved pattern with a display mode that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot from becoming a meaningless game.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "yellow" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149", "blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "blue" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 7" are stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. The reserved color "yellow" of the previous reserved symbol is transplanted to the reserved color "blue" of the target reserved symbol, the previous reserved symbol is changed to "white", and the reserved color of the target reserved symbol is changed to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is maintained in the OFF state.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198", "blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "blue" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the next winning command is "red", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 8". The reserved change scenario 8 is a scenario in which the reserved color "blue" of the target reserved pattern is transplanted with the reserved color of the next reserved pattern, "red", and the target reserved pattern is changed to "purple", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the next winning command is specified to "red", the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

As mentioned above, in this 22nd control example, the reserved color "red" is a display mode that has a higher expectation of winning a jackpot than the reserved color "purple," and there is a risk that if the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to a lower display mode and then a loss is notified, this may severely reduce the player's motivation to play. However, in this 22nd control example, the display mode can be changed to a lower display mode only in the event of a jackpot win. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the reserved symbol one before is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 99", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "white" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 9" are stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In the reserved change scenario 9, "red" is transferred from the reserved color "purple" of the reserved symbol one before to the reserved color "white" of the target reserved symbol, and the reserved color of the target reserved symbol changes to "red" and the reserved color of the reserved symbol one before changes to "blue". In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next received winning command, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "100-149", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color is stored as "white" in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, and the reserved change scenario is stored as "reserved change scenario 10". Reserve change scenario 10 is a scenario in which the reserved color "white" of the target reserved symbol is changed independently to "green". In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next received winning command, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "green" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "green" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "blue", and the value of the second performance counter 223vg is "0 to 198", "yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "yellow" is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the next winning command is "blue", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 11". In the reserved change scenario 11, the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern "red" and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern "blue" are transplanted to the reserved color "yellow" of the target reserved pattern, the target reserved pattern is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is changed from "red" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed from "blue" to "white". In this case, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "blue," so the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to on.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149", "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "blue", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "blue" as the reserved color, "yellow" as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "reserved change scenario 3" as the reserved change scenario. In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "yellow", the next reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "yellow", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "yellow" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 4" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "yellow", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "yellow" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "blue" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "blue" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 7" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 129", "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "130 to 198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "white" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 9" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is other than "white, blue, yellow, purple," and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 198," "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "white" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 8" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, the reserved symbols acquired after the reserved change scenario of the reserved change presentation is set can also be incorporated as part of the reserved change presentation, and since there are patterns in which the reserved color of the target reserved symbol changes when the next reserved symbol is acquired, the player can be made to look forward to the reserved color changing, which can encourage the player to try to acquire the reserved symbol.

Returning to FIG. 693(a), we will continue the explanation. The shutter closing reach selection table 222ve is a table that is referenced to set the presentation mode of the "shutter closing reach" that is executed as one of the variable presentations of the special pattern in this 22nd control example. The contents of the shutter closing reach are as described above.

Now, referring to FIG. 696, the contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve will be explained. FIG. 696 is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve. This shutter closing reach selection table 222ve determines the presentation mode based on the result of the win/loss determination of the special pattern during the fluctuation, the type of win, and the value of the first presentation counter 223vf.

When the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149", "closed reach 1" is determined. In closed reach 1, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by 1 each time the shutter closes. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "7" symbols are displayed in a line.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C," and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149," then "closed reach 4" is determined. In closed reach 4, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by 1 each time the shutter closes. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "8" symbols are displayed in a line.

In this 22nd control example, three "7" symbols are displayed only when the winning type is jackpot A, and three symbols other than the "7" symbols are displayed when the winning type is jackpot B or C. In this 22nd control example, since jackpot A has more rounds of jackpot play than jackpot B or C, it is more advantageous for the player to have three "7" symbols in a shutter closing reach than to have other symbols displayed. In this way, in the shutter closing reach, the player can predict the winning type based on the type of symbol set as the initial symbol, which can increase the interest of the game.

When the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", if the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "150 to 174", "closed reach 2" is determined. In closed reach 2, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "8" symbols are displayed. However, in closed reach 2, a "HOLD" capsule is given when the third stage is reached. This "HOLD" capsule is used when the fifth stage is reached as described above, and the symbol displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage (in this case, the "7" symbol) is maintained until the sixth stage is reached. Therefore, in closed reach 2, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are displayed when the final stage is reached.

In addition, if the hit/miss judgment result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 3" is determined. In closed reach 3, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "8" symbols are displayed. However, in closed reach 3, a "key" capsule is given when the third stage is reached. If this "key" capsule is given, a performance is executed in which the shutter is completely opened at the fifth stage. Therefore, the symbol (in this case, "7" symbol) displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage is displayed in a three-part state. Therefore, in closed reach 3, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are displayed.

In addition, if the hit/miss determination result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C," and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "150 to 174," then "closed reach 5" is determined. Although the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol for closed reach 5, the symbol remains unchanged at "5" from the fourth stage until the sixth stage is reached. Therefore, when the sixth stage is reached, three "5" symbols are displayed.

When the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 6" is determined. In closed reach 6, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "7" symbols are displayed in a line, but as with closed reach 3, a "key" capsule is given when the third stage is reached, and a performance is executed in which the shutter is completely opened in the fifth stage. Therefore, three symbols ("6" symbols in this case) displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage are displayed in a line. Therefore, in closed reach 6, although the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "6" symbols are displayed in a line. Note that the contents of the capsules given in closed reaches 2, 3, and 6 are not known to the player until the fifth stage is reached.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "0 to 99", "Closed Reach 7" is determined. In Closed Reach 7, the initial symbol is set to a "2" symbol or a "3" symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the second stage to the third stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "100 to 159", "Closed Reach 8" is determined. In Closed Reach 8, the initial symbol is set to a "2" symbol or a "3" symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the third stage to the fourth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. In addition, when the third stage is reached, a performance indicating capsule grant failure is executed.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "160-169", "Closed Reach 9" is determined. In Closed Reach 9, the initial symbol is set to "2" or "3", and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fourth stage to the fifth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "170-179", "Closed Reach 10" is determined. In Closed Reach 10, the initial symbol is set to "2" or "3", and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fifth stage to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "180-189", "Closed Reach 11" is determined. In Closed Reach 11, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the 5th stage to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. Also, when moving from the 4th stage to the 5th stage, the "5" symbol is not updated.

If the result of the hit/miss determination is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "190-194", then "Closed Reach 12" is determined. For Closed Reach 12, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fifth stage to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. Also, when the third stage is reached, a "HOLD" capsule is given, and although it is used in the fifth stage, the sixth stage is not reached, so the display mode announcing a jackpot win is not displayed.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "195-198", then "Closed Reach 13" is determined. For Closed Reach 13, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fifth stage to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. Also, a "key" capsule is given when the third stage is reached, and although it is used in the fifth stage, a performance in which the key does not fit is executed, and a performance in which the shutter is completely opened is not executed, so a display mode announcing a jackpot win is not displayed.

In this way, in the shutter closing reach of this 22nd control example, the player is made interested not only in whether or not he can reach the final stage, but also in the type of initial pattern when the shutter closing reach begins, whether or not a capsule will be awarded in the third stage, and whether or not the patterns will not be updated even as the stages progress, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored early on.

Returning to Figure 693 (a), we will continue the explanation. The operation scenario table 222vf is a table for setting the operation scenarios of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2. The operation scenario type is set to an operation scenario corresponding to the hold change scenario that is set when a composite hold change performance is executed in the hold performance execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation (see F3109 in Figure 730) described later.

Now, the contents of the operation scenario table 222vf will be explained with reference to FIG. 697. FIG. 697 is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the operation scenario table 222vf. In this operation scenario table 222vf, operation patterns are prescribed for each operation scenario type.

Operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario used when a reserve change performance is executed with the second reserve hr2 (see FIG. 672(a)) as the change target. As the first operation, the left change role Ym1 rises from the initial position to hide the first reserve hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth reserve hr4, and only the second reserve hr2 and the third reserve hr3 are displayed (see FIG. 672(b)). Then, as the second operation, the right change role Ym2 moves to the left to hide the third reserve hr3 (see FIG. 673(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third pattern display device 81, a performance is executed in which the reserved color of the third reserve hr3 is transplanted to the second reserve hr2 based on the reserve change scenario. Then, as the third operation, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 descend from the second operation position and return to the initial position.

Operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario used when a reserve change performance is executed with the third reserve hr3 (see FIG. 672(a)) as the change target. As the first operation, the left change role Ym1 rises from the initial position to hide the first reserve hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth reserve hr4, and only the second reserve hr2 and the third reserve hr3 are displayed (see FIG. 672(b)). Then, as the second operation, the left change role Ym1 moves to the right to hide the second reserve hr2 (see FIG. 675(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third pattern display device 81, a performance is executed in which the reserve color of the second reserve hr2 is transplanted to the third reserve hr3 based on the reserve change scenario. Then, as the third operation, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 descend from the second operation position and return to the initial position.

Operation scenario 3 is an operation scenario used when a reserve change performance is executed with the second reserve hr2 (see FIG. 672(a)) as the change target. As the first operation, the left change role Ym1 rises from the initial position, and the right change role Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth reserve hr4, and the first reserve hr1, the second reserve hr2, and the third reserve hr3 are displayed (not shown). Then, as the second operation, the left change role Ym1 moves to the right to hide the first reserve hr1, and the right change role Ym2 moves to the left to hide the third reserve hr3 (not shown). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third pattern display device 81, a performance is executed in which the reserved colors of the first reserve hr1 and the third reserve hr3 are transplanted to the second reserve hr2 based on the reserve change scenario. Then, as the third operation, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 descend from the second operation position and return to the initial position.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are moved in an operation pattern corresponding to the reserve change scenario, so that a reserve change performance can be executed in which the third pattern display device 81, the left change role Ym1, and the right change role Ym2 are linked. When the reserve change performance is executed, the reserved patterns that change depending on the operation pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 change, so it is possible to get the player interested in the operation pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2.

Next, referring to FIG. 687(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 687(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a winning information storage area 223va, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223vc, a fluctuation start flag 223vd, a stop type selection flag 223ve, a first performance counter 223vf, a second performance counter 223vg, a slave state storage area 223vh, an adjustment device in operation flag 223vi, a limit timer 223vj, an environmental information storage area 223vk, a reserved performance At least an information storage area 223vl, a pending performance limit flag 223vm, a later pending setting flag 223vn, a performance SW effective time memory area 223vp, a time-saving counter 223vq, a sure-win counter 223sr, a V performance execution flag 223vs, a V winning flag 223vt, a V notification flag 223vu, a movie in progress flag 223vv, a shaking standby flag 223vw, an adjustment period flag 223vx, an elapsed timer 223vy, and a miscellaneous memory area 223vz are provided. Details of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this 22nd control example are described below.

The winning information storage area 223va has one execution area and four areas (area 1 to area 4), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for reserved balls, etc., before the balls start to change.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display unit 37 (and the third pattern display unit 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern with the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first winning port 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb (see F2210 in FIG. 718). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the display area HR4 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203sa of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203sa of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223vc differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb only in that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special pattern is stored based on a reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110, so a detailed explanation of this will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see F2204 in FIG. 718), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see F2907 in FIG. 728). When the fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see F2207 in FIG. 718), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see F2912 in FIG. 728). When the stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The first effect counter 223vf is a counter used for preview effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown in the figure, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The second effect counter 223vg is a counter used to set the color of the reserved pattern (reserved color) in the reserved change effect of this 22nd control example. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown in the figure, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The slave state storage area 223vh has a current state area in which the game state corresponding to the information indicated by the state command sent from the master control device 110 is stored, and a previous state area in which the game state previously stored in the current state area is stored. The currently set game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the game state stored in this current state area.

The adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is turned on when the sword feature Ym3 (adjustment feature) is moved to the environment adjustment position (see F3308 in FIG. 732), and is turned off when the display of the special symbol starts (see F2903 in FIG. 728). By setting this adjustment feature movable flag 223vi to on, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the sword feature Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position. As a result, when the special symbol starts to change while the sword feature Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, a process is executed to move the sword feature Ym3 to the initial position, and it is possible to prevent the display of the special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 from being difficult to see due to the sword feature Ym3 in the environment adjustment position.

The limit timer 223vj is a timer for limiting the movement of the sword role object Ym3 for a certain period of time (10 seconds in this 22nd control example) when the sword role object Ym3 (adjustment role object) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. The timer value is set when an operation scenario for moving the sword role object Ym3 to the initial position is set (see F2906 in FIG. 727 and F3507 in FIG. 734), and the timer value is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. If the value of this limit timer 223vj is 0 seconds or more, the performance mode that operates the sword role object Ym3 is excluded from the candidates of performance modes that can be determined when setting the variable performance of the special pattern (see F3009 in FIG. 728).

In this way, when the sword role object Ym3 is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is limited for a certain period of time, thereby reducing the load caused by the sword role object Ym3 moving frequently.

The environmental information storage area 223vk is an area for storing environmental information adjusted by the player through operation of the volume control button or light control button. The environmental information stored in this environmental information storage area 223vk is updated in response to the button operation performed by the player (see F3311 in FIG. 731), making it possible to provide a gaming environment that matches the player's preferences.

The reserved performance information storage area 223vl is an area for storing information regarding the color of each reserved symbol in the reserved performance and the reserved change scenario. When a winning command is received from the main control device 110, the reserved performance information corresponding to the winning command is determined and stored in this reserved performance information storage area 223vl.

As described above, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores reserved effect information for executing reserved change effects on reserved symbols.

The reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new reserved performance for other reserved patterns from being set during the period when the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance is displayed. As described above, in this 22nd control example, a reserved performance is executed that combines the reserved color of the target reserved pattern with the reserved colors of the reserved patterns before and after it (see Figs. 672 to 677). In this reserved performance, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 move according to an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined reserved change scenario. For example, if a different reserved change scenario is set for the reserved pattern next to the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance, the execution timing of the reserved change performance may overlap, and there is a risk of giving incorrect game information to the player. In order to prevent this, a new reserved change performance is not executed during the period when the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is on.

As described above, the later hold setting flag 223vn is a flag for forcibly determining the hold color of the hold pattern corresponding to the next received winning command when a hold change scenario for the composite hold change presentation is set. It is turned on (see F2605 in FIG. 723) when a specific hold change scenario is determined in the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 (see F2517 in FIG. 723), and is turned off when the hold color of the next received winning command is determined (see F2553 in FIG. 722).

The effect SW valid time memory area 223vp is a memory area that stores the period during which the effect button 22 is determined to be valid. In this 22nd control example, when a performance mode for indicating the result of a special pattern lottery is set, setting information for the operation valid period corresponding to the performance pattern is stored in this effect SW valid time memory area 223vp (see F3106 in FIG. 729).

The time-saving counter 223vq is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value ("100" or "120" in this 22nd control example) when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a jackpot game). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223vq becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has occurred to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols is determined based on the value of the time-saving counter 223vq.

The high probability counter 223sr is a counter for measuring the duration of the high probability state, and when it is determined in the state command receiving process 22 (see F2202 in FIG. 719) that the game state has transitioned to the high probability state (F2308 in FIG. 719: Yes), the counter value is set to "120" (see F673 in FIG. 719). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the high probability counter 223sr is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the high probability counter 223sr becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has occurred to a low probability state of the special symbol. Also, the system is configured to determine the detailed period of the high probability state of the special symbol based on the value of the high probability counter 223sr.

When a jackpot start command is received from the main control device 110, the V performance execution flag 223vs is turned on if the jackpot type information included in the jackpot start command is jackpot A (see F2706 in FIG. 725), and is turned off when a V winning command is received (see F2406 in FIG. 720). When this V performance execution flag 223vs is on, a V performance is executed in a specific round (the second round in this 22nd control example) during the jackpot game. The V winning command is a command to notify that the ball has flowed down a specific area (V gate) 65v.

The V winning flag 223vt is turned on when a V winning command is received from the main control unit 110 (see F2404 in FIG. 720), and is turned off in the ending process 22 (see F2802 in FIG. 726). This V winning flag 223vt is a flag that allows the sound lamp control unit 113 to determine that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65, and can switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending performance depending on whether the game ball has passed through (V gate) 65V during the execution of the V performance or not.

The V notification flag 223vu is turned on when a V winning command is received from the main control unit 110 and a display command for notifying a V winning is set (see F2408 in FIG. 720), and is turned off when a state command for changing the game state to a special state is received from the main control unit 110 (see F2311 in FIG. 719).

The movie in progress flag 223vv is turned on when the effect button 22 is operated during the effective period of the effect SW in the movie execution reach (see F3404 in FIG. 733). If this movie in progress flag 223vv is on when the movie ends, it indicates that the special symbol fluctuation time has not yet elapsed, and in that case, the display mode at the end of the movie is set to the swinging display mode until the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (see F3512 in FIG. 734).

The shaking wait flag 223vw is turned on when a shaking display mode is set during the movie execution reach from the end of the movie until the special pattern variation time has elapsed (F3513 in FIG. 734), and is turned off when a stop command is received from the main control unit 110 (see F2653 in FIG. 724). When this shaking wait flag 223vw is on and the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a stop command from the main control unit 110, a display command is set to show a display mode indicating a jackpot win (see F2652 in FIG. 724).

The adjustment period flag 223vx is turned on when the environmental information adjustment screen is displayed (see F3304 in FIG. 731). This adjustment period flag 223vx is a flag to indicate that the player is currently adjusting the volume or light intensity.

The elapsed timer 223vy is a timer that is set to display a display mode indicating the end of the environmental adjustment when a certain time (10 seconds in this 22nd control example) has elapsed since the adjustment information adjustment screen started to be displayed. The timer value of this elapsed timer 223vy is set to a timer value corresponding to when the performance button 22 or the selection button 600 is operated, and is updated by "1" each time the performance update process 22 is executed.

Other memory area 223vz also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from main control unit 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method.

Returning to FIG. 687 for further explanation, the display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 667). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 667) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the 22nd control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 698 to Fig. 715. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, when both the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. In addition, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, as an end condition for terminating the probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, an end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

Figure 698 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (F101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (F103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, and 999, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, the special symbol change process 22 is executed (F104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. After that, the start winning process 22 is executed in response to the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (F105). Details of the special symbol change process 22 and the start winning process 22 will be described later with reference to Figs. 699 to 704.

After the start winning process 22 is executed, the normal symbol variation process 22, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (F106), and the through gate passing process 22 associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (F107). Details of the normal symbol variation process 22 and the through gate passing process 22 will be described later with reference to Figs. 705 and 706. After the through gate passing process 22 is executed, the launch control process is executed (F108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (F109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 699, the special symbol change process 22 (F104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process 22 (F104). The special symbol change process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the special symbols based on the acquired counter values, controls the first symbol display device 37 to be able to display the variable display in the variable display mode determined by a predetermined control, sets various commands to execute the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and controls to stop and display in a display mode showing the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). Below, the special symbol change process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) will be described.

In this special symbol variation process 22 (F104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently being won (a jackpot game is in progress) (F201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203vv is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is currently being won (a jackpot game is in progress) (F201: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of F201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (F201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (F202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (F202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203se (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) are obtained (F203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203se is greater than 0 (F204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se is not 0 (F204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se is decremented by 1 (F205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se changed by the calculation is set (F206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203se from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of F206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb is shifted (F207). In the process of F207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and then the process proceeds to F208.

On the other hand, in the process of F204, if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203se is 0 (F204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203sd obtained in the process of F203 is greater than 0 (F210).

In the process of F210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd is 0 (F210: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of F210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (F210: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd is subtracted by 1 (F211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd changed by the calculation is set (F212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203sd from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223sc in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of F212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa is shifted (F213) using the same method as the process of F207, and the process proceeds to the process of F208. In the process of F208, which is executed after the process of F207 or F213, the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 is executed (F208), and then the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 22 is executed (F209), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 22 (F209) will be described later with reference to Figs. 700 and 701.

In the process of F202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (F202: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (F214). If the change time has not elapsed (F214: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (F215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of F215, the value of the change time counter for measuring the change time of the special pattern is updated, and the display of the first pattern display device 81 is updated corresponding to the value of the change time counter after the update. In this change time counter, a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (F209) is set at the start timing of the special pattern change, and thereafter, it is updated (subtracted) each time the process of F215 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F214 that the change time has elapsed (F214: Yes), that is, if the value of the change time counter updated in the process of F215 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (F216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209) is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been awarded is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if a special symbol jackpot has been awarded, one of the jackpots A to E is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on, if a jackpot C occurs, the green LED is turned on, and if a jackpot D occurs, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Also, if a miss occurs, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that the LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of F216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process 22 is a special symbol jackpot (F217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (F217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON (F218), the time reduction counter 203sh and the probability change counter 203si are cleared (set to 0) (F219), and the process proceeds to F220. When the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON by the process of S220, if the jackpot control process 22 (see F1004 in FIG. 710) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process branches to F1101: Yes and an opening command is set (F1102). As a result, the jackpot performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of F217, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special pattern (F217: No), the processes of F218 and F219 are skipped, update process 22 is executed (F221), and then the process proceeds to F220.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (F1801) of the main processing executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the game status contained in the status command. This allows the status grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to match the actual status of the pachinko machine 10. In the processing of S220, a special chart confirmation command is set (F220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 700, we will explain the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 22 (F104 in FIG. 699). FIG. 700 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208 in FIG. 700), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (F301). Then, based on the first jackpot random number table 202va (see FIG. 690), it is determined whether the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in the process of F301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (F302).

After completing the process of F302, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (F303), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (F303: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a jackpot (F304), and the jackpot special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the win type counter C2 (F305), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F303 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (F303: No), a losing special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (F306), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 701, we will explain the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 22 (F104 in FIG. 699). FIG. 701 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208 in FIG. 700), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (F401).

If it is determined in the process of F401 that a jackpot with a special symbol is set (F401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202vb (see FIG. 691) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (F402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (F403), and the variation pattern selection table 202vc corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, high probability state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203sg is read (F404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of F403 and the variation pattern selection table 202vc read in the process of F404 (F405), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of F405 (F406). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see F1801 in FIG. 709).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (F407), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set in the first symbol display device 37 (F408), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (F409), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of F407 includes information indicating the type of the stopping symbol indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see F1801 in FIG. 709) of the main process (FIG. 709) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F401 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (F401: No), the process of F402 is skipped and the process proceeds to F403.

Next, referring to FIG. 702, the contents of the update process 22 (F221) executed in the special pattern change process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) will be explained. FIG. 702 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process 22 (F221). This update process 22 (F221) is a process that is executed when the change time of the special pattern change has elapsed (when the change stops), and processes are executed to update the remaining period of the period during which the high probability change state is set to continue and to update the remaining period of the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process 22 (F221) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability counter 203si is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state of a special pattern (F501). If it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203si is greater than 0 (F501: Yes), the value of the probability counter 203si is decremented by 1 (updated) (F502). Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the probability counter 203si is 0 (F503). If it is determined that it is 0 (F503: Yes), a time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203sg (F504), and the process proceeds to F505. Also, if it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203si is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of F501 (F501: No), the current state is not a high probability state of a special pattern, so the process skips the above-mentioned processes F502 to F504 for updating the value of the probability counter 203si and proceeds to the process of F505.

In addition, in the process of F503, if the value of the special probability counter 203si is not 0, that is, the value of the special probability counter 203si is greater than 0 and the special probability state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (F503: No), the process of F504 is skipped and the process proceeds to F505.

In the process of F505, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (F505: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is decremented by 1 (F506), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203sh after the decrement is 0 (F507). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is 0 in the process of F507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203sg (F508), and the value of the probability change counter 203si, the value of the time-saving counter 203sh, and a state command indicating the current game state are set (F509), and this process is terminated. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of F505 that the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is not greater than 0 (is 0) (F505: No), or if it is determined in the process of F507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is not 0 (F507: No), the process proceeds directly to F509.

Next, referring to FIG. 703, the start winning process 22 (F105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 698) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 703 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 22 (F105). The start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703) is a process that determines whether a ball has entered either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, respectively, up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640).

In addition, when the counter values acquired based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb. The start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703) will be explained below.

In the start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, which is the first starting port (start winning) (F601). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (F601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203sd is obtained (F602), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (F603).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not been stored to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (F603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203sd is incremented by one (F604), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved number at the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special pattern) (F605).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM203 (F606), and the process proceeds to F607.

In addition, if the process of F601 determines that a ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (F601: No), or if the process of F603 determines that the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 at this time is the upper limit (F603: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is skipped and the process proceeds to F607.

Next, the processes from F607 to F612 differ only in that the processes performed for the entry of a ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64) in the processes from F601 to F606 are the same as those performed for the entry of a ball into the second ball entry hole 640, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After executing each process from F601 to F612, the read-ahead process is executed (F613) and this process ends.

This pre-reading process 22 (F613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 704, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. In this control example, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, that is, when the right to draw a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203sd or the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se is added, the pre-reading process 22 (F613) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203sd is determined to be the upper limit number (4) in the process of F603 (F603: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process 22 (F613) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 704, we will explain the look-ahead process 22 (F613), which is one process of the start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 704). FIG. 704 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process 22 (F613).

In the pre-read process 22 (F613 in FIG. 704), first, the various counter values, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb (F701). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (F702).

Then, the result of the hit/miss judgment is judged based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are judged. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, so it is difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that is set at the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (F703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (F703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (F704), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of F703 is that it is not a jackpot (F703: No), a winning command including information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (F705), and then this process is terminated.

The winning command set in the processing of F704 or F705 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of F701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (F1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 709).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this 22nd control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each distinction. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, rather than varying the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the variation can be determined by determining the order of variation until the reserved balls start to vary based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/loss judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control device 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb may be set as a winning command in the read-ahead process of the main control device 110, and the winning/loss judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 705, the normal symbol change process 22 (F106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 705 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process 22 (F106). The normal symbol change process 22 (F106) is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role 640a, and is a process for executing various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (process for executing the normal symbol change, process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, process for updating the normal symbol change being executed, process for stopping the normal symbol change, and process for determining the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process 22 (F106 in FIG. 705), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (F801). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a winning indication (from when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric roler 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (F801: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (F801: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is displaying a changing pattern (F802). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not displaying a changing pattern, that is, a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be executed (F802: No), then the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is obtained (F803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (F804).

If it is determined in the process of F804 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is 0 (F804: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is greater than 0 (F804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is decremented by 1 (F805). In other words, if it is determined in the process of F804 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted (F806). In the process of F806, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (F807).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203sh is on or not, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols or not (F808). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203sh is set to on (F808: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202sc (see FIG. 691(b)) for high probability (F809), and processing proceeds to F811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203sh is off (F808: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202sc (see FIG. 691(b)) for low probability (F810), and processing proceeds to F811.

In the process of F811, it is determined whether the current normal pattern variation (lottery) is a win (F811), and if it is determined to be a win (F811: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (F812), and the process moves to F814. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F811 that the current normal pattern variation (lottery) is not a win (a loss) (F811: No), the display mode of "×", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (F813), and the process moves to F814.

In the process of F814, it is determined whether the current game state is during time-saving (high probability state of normal patterns) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203sh (F814), and if it is determined that the game state is during time-saving (high probability state of normal patterns) (F814: Yes), the normal pattern change time is set to 3 seconds (F815) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not during time-saving (high probability state of normal patterns) (F814: No), the normal pattern change time is set to 10 seconds (F816) and this process is terminated.

In the 22nd control example, as described above, the normal pattern variation time is varied depending on the probability state of the normal pattern that is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to always set the variation time to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state switches, specifically at the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches from the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern) where a long variation time is generally likely to be set to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) where a short variation time is likely to be set, a normal pattern variation with a long variation time is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the normal pattern lottery is not executed during the time-saving state even though the time-saving state is set.

The method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be varied according to the game state, the number of reserved normal symbol balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203vf (number of reserved normal symbols). Furthermore, the ease of ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable depending on the length of time the normal pattern is set to change, the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be easily changed depending on the game status, creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F802 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (F802: No), it is determined whether the time for changing the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (F817), and if it is determined that the time for changing has not elapsed (F817: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F817 that the variation time has elapsed (F817: Yes), the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a stopped display (F818). In the process of F818, if the current normal pattern lottery is a winning combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a "○" pattern. On the other hand, if the current normal pattern lottery is a losing combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a stopped display of an "X" pattern. In other words, a setting is made to display the display mode set in the process of F812 or F813 described above.

When the stop display is set by processing F818, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (illuminated display) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing F812 or F813.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (F819). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (F819: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win (F819: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203sh (F820), and if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (F820: Yes), the game content for the normal symbol win game is set to an opening time of 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) for the electric role 640a (F823), and the process proceeds to F822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F820 that the game is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (F820: No), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric roler 640a for 5 seconds x 1 time (opening operation) (F821), and the process proceeds to F822.

In the process of F822, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of F821 or F823 (F822), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a in this 22nd control example will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing when the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol is performed (the timing when the processing of F808 to F811 is performed), and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variable time has passed in the processing of F817).

In other words, in this 22nd control example, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, depending on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol that is executed in parallel while the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of the normal pattern hit/fail judgment, there is a problem that the electric role 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this 22nd control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In the 22nd control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, only when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern, the electric role 640a may be configured to open long, or the opening pattern of the electric role 640a may be configured to be set based on the game state set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, various information (result of the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern change time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal pattern change processing 22 (see F106 in FIG. 705) is set as a command indicating the content of each information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see F1801 in FIG. 709) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 709).

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process 22 (F107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 706. FIG. 706 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process 22 (see F660). This through gate passing process 22 (F107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698), and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, it is a process for acquiring the lottery result (winning/losing judgment result) in advance using the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 before the actual winning/losing judgment is executed (before the winning/losing judgment (see F811) is executed in the normal pattern fluctuation process 22 (see F106 in FIG. 705)).

In the through gate passing process 22 (F107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (F901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (F901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203vf is obtained (F902), and then it is determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203vf is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern has reached the upper limit) (F903).

If it is determined in the process of F903 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is greater than 4 (the upper limit value of 4) (F903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is not greater than 4 (F903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf (F904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 707, the NMI interrupt process will be described. FIG. 707 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (F1601), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 708, we will explain the startup process 22 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the main control unit 110 is turned on. FIG. 708 is a flowchart showing this startup process 22.

This startup process 22 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process 22 (Fig. 708), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (F1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 667) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705), and if it is not stored (F1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to F1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (F1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (F1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, too, processing transitions to F1712. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (F1713, F1714) is executed.

Similarly, if power failure occurrence information has not been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (F1713, F1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization processing (F1713, F1714), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (F1714). After execution of RAM 203 initialization processing, the process proceeds to F1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power outage information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (F1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (F1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (F1709), and processing proceeds to F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (F1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (F1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 709, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 709 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process (see FIG. 709), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (F1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 699) or the start winning process 22 (see FIG. 703) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (F1801 in FIG. 709), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (changing effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process 22 (see FIG. 710) are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processes are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (F1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this 22nd control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the updating of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (F1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special symbol is reached, a command is set to execute a jackpot performance in the sound lamp control device 113, and jackpot control processing is executed to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (F1804).

Details of the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 710 to 715, but in this jackpot control process 22 (F1804), the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter referred to as the winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a). Then, when any of these conditions is met, the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of this winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (F1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the processing of F822 in the normal pattern fluctuation processing 22 (see FIG. 705), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the end of the period set by the processing of F821 and F823 in the normal pattern fluctuation processing 22.

Next, the first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (F1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B start displaying changes according to the change pattern. In this 22nd control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (illuminated) in a stopped state in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set in F407 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (see F209 in FIG. 701).

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (F1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of F815 and F816 of the normal pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 705), the second pattern display device starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (F1808), when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the process of F818 of the normal pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 705), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the process of F812 or F813 of the normal pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 705).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (F1809), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (F1809: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has passed since the start of the current main process (F1810), and if the predetermined time has already passed (F1810: Yes), the process proceeds to F1801, and each process from F1801 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (F1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process (F1811, F1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as the processing of F1811 (F1812). Note that in this processing of F1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of F1801 to F1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated in the same way. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special patterns and normal patterns, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained.

In addition, in the process of F1809, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power outage from F1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (F1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (F1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (F1815), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (F1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of F1809 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in F1801 to F1808, or at the end of one cycle of processing of F1811 and F1812 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of F1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of F1801, just as in the case where initialization is performed in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (FIG. 708, F1701), so that the processing can be started from the processing of F1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 710, the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 710 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 22 (F1804). This jackpot control process 22 (F1804) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 709), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 22 (Fig. 710, F1804), first, it is determined whether a jackpot with a special symbol will start (F1101). Specifically, the process of F218 or F220 of the special symbol variation process 22 (see Fig. 699) is executed, and if the start of a jackpot with a special symbol is set, it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol will start. In the process of F1101, if a jackpot with a special symbol will start (F1101: Yes), an opening command is set (F1102), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203vv is set to on (F1103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a special jackpot has not started in the process of F1101 (F1101: No), it is determined whether or not a special jackpot is in progress (F1104). The period during which a special jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special jackpot (including during a special jackpot game), and the period during which a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special jackpot game. If a special jackpot is not in progress in the process of F1103 (F1104: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1104 that a jackpot with a special symbol is occurring (F1104: Yes), the process of F1105 is executed. In the process of F1105, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (F1105). If it is determined in the process of F1105 that it is time to start a new round (F1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process 22 is executed (F1106).

Now, referring to FIG. 711, the jackpot operation setting process 22 will be described (F1106). FIG. 711 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106). In the jackpot operation setting process 22 (FIG. 711, F1106), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (F1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in F1201 (F1202). The opening operation of the opening door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of F1201. After that, this process is terminated. In the process of F1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening door 65f1 for each round are set.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a malfunction such as the jackpot game ending midway.

Returning to FIG. 710, the explanation will continue. In the process of F1105, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (F1105: No), it is determined whether it is the time to operate the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k (F1107). If it is determined that it is the time to operate (F1107: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (F1108). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (F1109). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F1106, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (F1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (F1110). The timing to start the ending performance is determined as the timing to start the ending performance when the final round corresponding to the jackpot type determined in F402 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (see FIG. 701) ends, the opening and closing door 65f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) which is the ball discharge time has elapsed. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance (F1110: Yes), an ending command is set (F1111) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending presentation indicating the end of the jackpot begins on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1110 that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (F1110: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (F1112). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to when the execution period of the ending presentation has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of F1112 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (F1112: Yes), then the jackpot end process 22 for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (F1113), and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot end process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 712. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1112 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (F1112: No), then the notification process 22 is executed (F1114). Details of the notification process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 713.

When the notification process 22 (Fig. 713, F1114) is executed, the winning process 22 is executed to perform control in response to a win at the specific winning port 65a (F1115), and the abnormality process 22 is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally (F1116), after which this process ends. Details of the winning process 22 and the abnormality process 22 will be described later with reference to Figs. 714 and 715.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 711, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 711 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106). This jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process 22 (see FIG. 711) starts, first the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (F1201), the opening operation of the special probability solenoid is set (F1202), the opening operation of the large opening port 65c of the variable prize-winning device 65 is set (F1203), and this process ends. Although not shown, in the process of F1201, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to update the display content of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this control example, among the round games executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (second round) is made different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (variable jackpot), a round game is executed as the second round of round games in which the switching valve 65y is operated to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only during a specific period of time during a jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, so that the player can play during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In the 22nd control example, when the second round of the jackpot game is played in the case where the jackpot A is won, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be able to execute a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed as a notification mode to inform the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player of a specific period during the jackpot game that is played over a long period of time in which it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification mode to inform the player that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the conditions for setting the probability change state after the jackpot game is finished are met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be varied depending on whether a condition is met. For example, the color of the text "Aim for V" may be varied based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific gate, or the remaining time, or the size of the display area may be varied, or the text may be changed to something more emphatic (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not fire the ball in a situation in which it is likely to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V).

In the 22nd control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-type device for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be changed to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific gate. However, without being limited to this, for example, the switching valve 65y may be configured to operate with a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning port 65a becomes open may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, so that a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set. This makes it possible to standardize the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, so that even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is understood, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, because the operation of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V component (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 711), the specific winning port 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set to allow the ball to pass through in the second round. As a result, in jackpots A, C to E, the player can simply shoot the ball in the second round and the ball will almost certainly pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), so a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 712, the details of the jackpot end process 22 (F1113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 712 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process 22 (F1113). This jackpot end process 22 (F1113) is executed in the jackpot control process 22 (see F1804 in FIG. 710), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process 22 (F1113), first, it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203sm is on (F1301). If it is determined in the process of F1301 that the special chance setting flag 203sm is on (F1301: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the special chance counter 203vu is set to 120 (F1302), the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to 120 (F1303), the special chance flag 203vg is set to on (F1304), and the process proceeds to F1305. On the other hand, if the special chance setting flag 203sm is off in the process of F1301 (F1301: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to 100, and the process proceeds to S2105.

In the process of S2105, a status command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203vt and the value of the high probability counter 203vu (F1305). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (F1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it updates the slave status setting area 223sh according to the game status notified by the status command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203vv and the high probability setting flag 203vh are set to OFF (F1306), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process 22 (see FIG. 712), the game state after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

In the notification process 22 (F1114), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (F1222). The end timing of the second round is determined when it is detected that 10 balls have won in the second round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second round (F1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203vm. Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1222 that it is not the end timing of the second round (F1222: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter to 2 seconds in F1223, the notification counter 203vm becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball clearing time after the end of the second round, and a voice saying "Look at the LCD" is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the second round, but the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the second round, so the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified, and the player is prevented from identifying the type of big win. Therefore, the player can play until the end of the big win game in the hope of being granted a high probability game state.

In this 22nd control example, a notification counter 203vm is provided to draw attention to the LCD screen from 1 second before the end of the interval time to the second round, but this is not limited to the above and may be executed continuously from the second round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1221 that the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203vm is updated by -1 (F1224). It is determined whether the updated value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1225). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1225: Yes), a notification command is set (F1226). This process then ends. This notification command causes the voice lamp control device 113 to set the output of a voice saying "Look at the LCD".

Next, the details of the winning process 22 (F1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 714. FIG. 714 is a flowchart showing this winning process 22 (F1115). This winning process 22 (F1115) is executed within the big win control process 22 (see FIG. 710), and as described above, is a process for carrying out control in response to a win at a specific winning port 65a.

In the winning process 22 (FIG. 714, F1115), first, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid round period (F1231). The valid round period is the period during which the round play is set, that is, the period from the opening state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the valid round period (F1231: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid round period (F1231: Yes), it is determined whether it has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a. If it is determined that it has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a (F1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203vj is updated by adding 1 (F1233). Then, the process of F1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not passed the detection switch 65c1 (F1232: No), the process of F1234 is executed.

In the process of F1234, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234: Yes), the opening and closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (F1236). Then, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to ON (F1237). Then, the process of F1238 is executed. By setting this remaining ball timer flag 203vn to ON, it can be determined that the ball discharge time has begun since the opening and closing door 203n was closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (F1235). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (F1235: Yes), the process of F1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (F1235: No), the process of F1238 is executed.

In the process of F1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203vk is updated by -1 (F1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (F1240). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability change passing switch 65e3 (F1240: Yes), the value of the probability change passing counter 203vi is updated by adding 1 (F1241). The probability change setting flag 203vh is set to ON (F1242), a V winning command is set (F1243), and then the process of F1244 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1240 that the game ball has not passed the probability change switch 65e3 (F1240: No), the process of F1244 is executed. In the process of F1244, it is determined whether the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1244). If it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (F1245). The special probability activation flag 203vp is set to ON (F1246). This process then ends. Here, by setting the special probability activation flag 203vp to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the special probability switch 65e3, the special probability activation game can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of F1238, if it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1238: No), it is determined whether the special chance effective flag 203vp is on (F1247). If the special chance effective flag 203vp is off (F1247: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chance effective flag 203vp is on (F1247: Yes), the special chance effective timer 203vr is updated by adding 1 (F1248). It is determined whether the value of the special chance effective timer is the upper limit value (1.2s in this embodiment) (F1249). If it is determined that the special chance effective timer 203vr is the upper limit value (F1249: Yes), the special chance effective flag 203vp is set to off (F1250). The special chance effective timer 203vr is reset to the initial value of 0 (F1251). Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1249 that the guaranteed bonus effective timer 203vr is not at its upper limit (F1249: No), the process of F1240 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203vr is not at its upper limit, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability variable switch 65e3, so the probability variable game state can be set taking into account the time it takes for the ball to be cleared. Also, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variable game state from being granted by improperly passing the game ball through the probability variable switch 65e3.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 715, we will explain the abnormality processing 22 (F1116) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 715 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing 22 (F1116). In abnormality processing 22 (F1116), a process is executed to monitor whether the special probability switch 65e3 has been passed illegally.

In the abnormality processing 22 (Fig. 715, F1116), first, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid round period (F1261). If it is outside the valid round period (F1261: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid round period (F1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (F1263). Then, the processing of F1264 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: No), the processing of F1264 is executed.

In the process of F1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (F1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is off (F1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is on (F1264: Yes), since it is during the ball removal time period, the remaining ball timer 203vo is updated by adding 1 (F1265). It is determined whether the remaining ball timer 203vo has reached its upper limit value (3 seconds in this 22nd control example) (F1266). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (F1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit (F1266: Yes), it is determined whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the probability change passing counter 203vi and the dispensed ball number counter 203vs) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203vj) (F1267).

If it is determined that there is a match (F1267: Yes), the process of F1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no match (F1267: No), an error command is set (F1268). Then, the process of F1269 is executed. When the error command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, displaying the text "Winning number mismatch error") is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior in which a gaming ball is left in the first variable winning device 65 and passes through the guaranteed win switch 65e3 even in the event of a jackpot C.

In the process of F1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to OFF (F1269), and the remaining ball timer 203vo is reset to its initial value of 0 (F1270). After that, the winning ball counter 203vj, the paid ball counter 203vs, and the special chance passing counter 203vi are each reset to their initial values (F1271), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 716 to Fig. 734, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 716, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 716 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (F2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of F2117 (see FIG. 717) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (F2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 717, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see F2114 in FIG. 717), it executes the power-off processing of F2117. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of F2117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (F2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off processing of F2117 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (F2003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of F2006. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, but conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (F2003: Yes), the process moves to F2004 and starts initializing RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (F2003: No), the process moves to F2008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (F2003: Yes) and the process proceeds to F2004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage has occurred and the power cut process of F2117 has been completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (F2003: No) and the process proceeds to F2008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (F2002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of F2117 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (F2004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (F2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (F2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (F2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (F2007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of F2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (F2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of F2117 is executed (see F2116 in FIG. 717). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of F2117 is executed, so the process of F2008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of F2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (F2008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (F2009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (F2010), interrupt permission is set (F2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off, the process reaches F2008 because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from F2004 to F2006 and then to F2008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (F2008: No), F2009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process moves to F2010, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (F2010), interrupt permission is set (F2011), and the process moves to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of F2009 is that when the process goes from F2004 to F2006 and then to F2008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of F2004, and when the start-up process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of the voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 717, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 717 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of F2101 was executed (F2101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (F2101: No), the processing of F2102 to F2111 is not executed and the processing proceeds to F2112. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of F2101 is that F2102 to F2111 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination processing 22 of F2112 and the variable display setting processing 22 of F2113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of F2112 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of F2113 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing 22.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of F2101 (F2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of F2103 to F2113 are sent to the display control device 114 (F2102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of F2108 described later (F2103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (F2104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to F2105.

In the process of F2105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (F2106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb.

Then, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 is executed (F2107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 is a process that monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22A operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22A is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22A by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22A is set in the display control device 114. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 731.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process 22 is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (F2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (F2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing F2109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (F2110). In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of F2008 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of F2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After the LCD display performance execution management process, the performance update process 22 is executed (F2111). In the performance update process 22, processing is executed to update the values of various counters and timers in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. Details of the performance update process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 734.

After the performance update process 22, a command determination process 22 is performed (F2112) to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110. Details of this command determination process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 718.

Next, the process proceeds to F2113. In the process of F2113, the variable display setting process 22 is executed (F2113). In the variable display setting process 22, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 718.

Then, when the variable display setting process 22 is finished, it is determined whether or not power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (F2114). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control device 110. If power failure information is stored in the process of F2114 (F2114: Yes), both the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are turned on (F2116), and power failure processing is executed (F2117). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (F2118), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of F2114 (F2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (F2115). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (F2115: No), the process returns to the process of F2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like at the hall and ask for repairs to the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 718, the command determination process 22 (F2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 718 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 22 (F2112). This command determination process 22 (F2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process 22 (FIG. 718, F2112), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2201). If a status command has been received (F2201: Yes), the status command reception process 22 is executed (F2202), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This status command reception process 22 (F2202) is a process for setting a display mode corresponding to the changed game status in the third display control device 81 when the game status is changed in the main control device 110. Details of the status command reception process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 719.

In addition, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114.

On the other hand, if a status command has not been received (F2203: No), it is then determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (F2203). If a variation pattern command has been received (F2203: Yes), the variation start flag 223vd is set to on (F2204), a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (F2205), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main processing.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (F2203: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2206). If a stop type command has been received (F2206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve in the RAM 223 is set to on (F2207), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (F2208), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process 22 (see FIG. 727) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (F2206: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (F2209). If the reserved ball number command has been received (F2209: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is a special pattern 1 reserved ball number command or a special pattern 2 reserved ball number command, and the value contained in the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main control unit 110 (the number of reserved variable displays in the special pattern N1) or the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve of the main control unit 110 (the number of reserved variable displays in the special pattern N2), is extracted, and this is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc of the voice lamp control unit 113 (F2210). In addition, in the process of F2210, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc. After the process of F2210 is completed, processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command or special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (initial winning), or when a lottery for a special pattern is held. Therefore, each time a start winning is detected or each time a lottery for a special pattern is held, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223vc of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ve of the main control unit 110 by processing of F2210. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203vd or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ve of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected at the time of detecting the start winning or drawing the special symbol, and can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203vd or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ve of the main control device 110. Note that when the process of F2210 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223vc. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of F2209, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (F2209: No), it is then determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2211). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (F2211: Yes), the winning command process 22 is executed (F2212), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This winning command process 22 is executed when a winning command (winning information command) set when the lottery right for a special symbol is acquired from the main control device 110, a winning information command for normal symbols set when the lottery right for a normal symbol is acquired, or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability change switch) during a jackpot game is received. Details of the winning command process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 720.

Next, in the process of F2211, if it is determined that a winning command has not been received (F2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (F2213: Yes), the stop command process 22 is executed, processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This stop command process 22 executes various processes when a stop command is received from the main control device 110, that is, when the special symbol stops. Details of the stop command process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 724.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2213 that a stop command has not been received (F2213: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (F2215). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (F2215: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (F2216), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This jackpot-related processing is processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed. Details of the jackpot-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 725.

Next, referring to FIG. 719, the status command receiving process 22 (F2202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 719 is a flowchart showing this status command receiving process 22 (F2202). This status command receiving process 22 (F2202) is executed within the command determination process 22 (see FIG. 718) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. Details of the status command receiving process 22 (F2202) will be described below.

When the state command receiving process 22 (F2202) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set game state will be changed (F2301). Here, it is determined whether the game state set in the slave state storage area 223vh differs from the game state indicated by the currently received state command. If it is determined in the process of F2301 that there is no change in the game state (F2301: No), this process is terminated as is. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (F2301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed game state is the normal state (F2302).

If it is determined in the process of F2302 that the game state after the change is normal (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: Yes), a display command indicating normal mode is set (F2303), and the process proceeds to F2304.

In the process of F2302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the currently received state command is not a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time-shortened state (F2305), and if it is determined that the game state is the time-shortened state (if the currently received state command is a command indicating the time-shortened state) (F2305: Yes), the value of the time-shortened counter 223vq is set to 100 (F2306), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (F2307), and the process proceeds to F2304.

In the process of F2305, if it is determined that the game state is not in a time-saving state (F2305: No), it is then determined whether the changed game state is a high probability state (F2308). If it is determined that the game state is a high probability state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a high probability state) (F2308: Yes), the value of the high probability state counter 223sr is set to 120 (F2309), and it is determined whether the V notification flag 223vu is on (F2310). If the V notification flag 223vu is off (F2310: No), the process proceeds to the process of F2306 described above. If the V notification flag 223vu is on (F2310: Yes), the V notification flag 223vu is set to off (F2311), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (F2312), and the process proceeds to the process of F2304.

In the process of F2304, the game status set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223sh is set in the past status area (F2304), the game status corresponding to the information indicated by the received status command is set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223sh (F2304), and this process is terminated.

Here, the commands set in the processing of F2303, F2307, and F2312 are notified to the display control device 114, and a variable presentation display corresponding to the game status is executed. In this way, in this 22nd control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the status command output from the main control device 110, and to output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to, for example, eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable performance display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, when the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by combining multiple commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting to the voice lamp control device 113, and a discrimination means is provided to discriminate whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate. If the discrimination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simplified display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are rewritten to the simplified display data.

By configuring in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set simplified display data showing appropriate information and display a variable performance display based on the simplified display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a variable performance display with content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special pattern) from being executed, which reduces the player's motivation to play. In addition, as the above-mentioned simplified display data, for example, display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any game state (for example, a mode with a black background) or display data that executes a variable display of the fourth pattern, which has a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable performance display, can be used.

In this 22nd control example, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 720, the contents of the winning command process 22 (see F2212) executed in the command determination process 22 (see F2112 in FIG. 718) will be described. FIG. 720 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command process 22 (F2212). This winning command process 22 (F2212) is a process executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from the main control device 110 when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a regular symbol winning information command is set when the right to draw a regular symbol is acquired, or a V winning command is received when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (high probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process 22 (F2212) is executed, first, the information of the winning command (winning information command) received this time is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (F2401), and the special winning information command process is executed (F2402). Details of the special winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG. 721.

When the special winning information command processing is finished, it is then determined whether the currently received command is a V winning command (a command (see F1243) that is set when the ball flows down to the special winning switch (specific gate) in the winning processing 22 (see F1115 in FIG. 714)) (F2403). If the received command is a V winning command (F2403: Yes), the V winning flag 223vt is set to on (F2406), and it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2405). If the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2407: Yes), the V performance execution flag 223vs is set to off (F2406), and a display command for notifying the V winning is set (F2407). Then, the V notification flag 223vu is set to on (F2408), other processing is performed (F2409), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the received command is not a V-winning command in the process of F2403 (F2403: No), the processes of F2405 to F2408 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.

In addition, in the process of F2405, if the V performance execution flag 223vs is not on (F2405: No), the processes of F2406 to F2408 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.

In the processing of F2409, other processing is executed (S4413), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 721, the contents of the special prize information command processing 22 (F2402) executed in the prize command processing 22 (F2212 in FIG. 720) will be described. FIG. 721 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special prize information command processing 22 (F2402).

When the special winning information command process 22 (F2402) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning command received this time is a winning command for a special symbol (F2501). If the received command is a special winning command (F2501: Yes), the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223sh (F2502), and it is determined whether the information indicates a normal game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) (F2503). If it is a normal game state (F2503: Yes), the reserved performance setting process 22 is executed (F2504) and the process proceeds to F2505. This reserved performance setting process 22 is a process for setting the performance content of the reserved change performance described above. Details of the reserved performance setting process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 722. On the other hand, if it is not a normal game state (F2503: No), the process of F2504 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2505.

In this 22nd control example, the reserve change effect can be executed when the normal game state is set as the game state, but this is not limited to this, and the reserve effect can also be executed in the special bonus state and the time-saving state.

In the process of F2505, a display command is set based on the information contained in the received special prize information command (F2505), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 722, the contents of the reserved performance setting process 22 (F2504) executed in the special winning command process 22 (F2402 in FIG. 721) will be described. FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved performance setting process 22 (F2504).

When the reserved performance setting process 22 (F2504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F2551). As described above, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to on when the reserved change scenario of the composite reserved change performance is set and the color of the reserved pattern of the reserved ball acquired next to the reserved ball to be changed is specified. Therefore, when the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F2551: Yes), the color of the corresponding reserved pattern is determined based on the reserved performance information stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl (F2552), the later reserved flag 223sn is set to off (F2553), a display command is set to show the display mode (color) of the determined reserved pattern, and the process proceeds to F2555.

On the other hand, in the process of F2551, if the post-pending setting flag 223vn is not on (F2551: No), it is determined whether the pending performance restriction flag 223vm is on (F2556). If the pending performance restriction flag 223vm is on (F2556: Yes), since it is a period during which it is restricted to set a new pending change performance, the process related to setting the pending change performance is skipped and the process proceeds to F2555.

In the process of F2556, if the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is not on (F2556: No), the reserved performance change lottery table 222vb (see FIG. 694(a)) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the reserved performance change (F2557). Then, in the process of F2557, it is determined whether or not the execution of the single reserved performance change has been determined (F2558), and if the execution of the single reserved performance change has been determined (F2558: Yes), the reserved color selection table 222vc (see FIG. 694(b)) is referenced to determine the color of the reserved pattern corresponding to this winning command (F2559), and the determined reserved performance information is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl (F2560). After that, the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set in accordance with the determined content (F2561), and the process proceeds to F2554.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2558 that a single hold change presentation will not be executed (F2558: No), it is determined in the process of F2557 whether or not it has been decided to execute a composite hold change presentation (F2562). If it has been decided to execute a composite hold change presentation (F2562: Yes), the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 is executed (F2563), and the process proceeds to F2554.

Here, the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 will be explained with reference to FIG. 723. FIG. 723 is a flowchart showing the contents of the composite hold change presentation setting process 22.

When the composite hold change performance setting process 22 (F2517) is executed, first, the hold change scenario is determined by referring to the hold change scenario selection table 222vd (see FIG. 695) (F2601), and the color of the hold pattern corresponding to the content determined in the process of F2601 is determined (F2602). Then, the hold performance information indicating the content determined in the process of F2601 is stored in the hold performance information storage area 223vl (F2603). After that, the hold performance restriction flag 223vm is set corresponding to the content determined in the process of F2601 (F2604), the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set corresponding to the content determined in the process of F2601 (F2605), and the hold performance setting process 22 (see FIG. 722) is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 722, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of F2562 that the composite hold change effect will not be executed (F2562: No), the processing proceeds to F2555.

In the process of F2555, a display command is set based on the information contained in the currently received special prize winning information command (F2555), and after the process of F2555 is completed, the process returns to the special prize winning information command process 22.

Next, referring to FIG. 724, the contents of the stop command process 22 (F2214) executed in the command determination process 22 (see F2112 in FIG. 718) will be described. FIG. 724 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 22 (F2214). When a stop command is received from the main control device 110, that is, various processes are executed at the timing when the special pattern stops.

When the stop command process 22 (F2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether the swing wait flag 223vw is on (F2651). If the swing wait flag 223vw is on (F2652: Yes), a display command is set to show a display mode indicating a big win (in this 22nd control example, a display of "Congratulations") (F2652), the swing wait flag 223vw is set to off (F2653), and processing proceeds to F2654. On the other hand, if the swing wait flag 223vw is not on in the processing of F2651 (F2651: No), the processing of F2652 and F2653 is skipped and processing of F2654 is executed.

In the process of F2654, the reserved performance information stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl is read (F2654), and it is determined whether there is a reserved change scenario in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern being changed is the change target (F2655). If there is a reserved change scenario in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern being changed is the change target (F2655: Yes), the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to off (F2656), the stop display of the third pattern is decided (F2657), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of F2655, if there is no reserved change scenario in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern being changed is the change target (F2655: No), the process of F2656 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2657.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process 22 (F2216) will be explained with reference to FIG. 726. FIG. 726 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (F2216). The jackpot-related process (F2216) performs processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute a presentation display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process 22 (F2216), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (F2701). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (F2701: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (F2702). The jackpot start command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot C (3R time-limited jackpot) (F2703), and if it is determined to be jackpot C (F2703: Yes), an ending display mode indicating entry into chance mode is set (F2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be not jackpot C (F2703: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot A (10R variable jackpot) (F2505), and if it is determined to be not jackpot A (F2705: No), that is, if it is jackpot B (3R variable jackpot), the process proceeds to F2704.

Here, the chance mode in this 22nd control example is configured as a mode in which the player cannot distinguish whether the set game state is a high probability game state or a time-limited game state. By configuring it in this way, even if the display mode set after the end of a big win game is not the super chance mode (a display mode that is set only when a high probability game state is set), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by making the player expect that a high probability game state has been set.

However, because a V effect (an effect to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward a specific area (V gate) 65v) is executed during the jackpot play that is executed when a special jackpot is won, the player can recognize that he or she has won a special jackpot. Therefore, there was a risk that the player would realize that the chance mode that is set after the end of a jackpot play in which no V effect is executed is not a special jackpot play state.

For this reason, in this 22nd control example, if a player wins jackpot B, which is a guaranteed jackpot, the V performance is not executed during the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is made difficult for the player to tell whether the current chance mode is a guaranteed jackpot game state or a time-limited game state, and the player's desire to play can be suppressed by making the player expect that a guaranteed jackpot state has been set.

On the other hand, if the process of F2705 determines that the jackpot is A (F2705: Yes), the V performance execution flag 223vs is set to on (F2706), an ending display mode is set indicating that a super chance mode has been entered (a high probability state is set) (F2707), and this process ends.

In this way, in the 22nd control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 725, different ending display modes are set according to the set jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), and the ending display mode corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game starts. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information indicating the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information indicating the number of rounds being played) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls won into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, so the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this 22nd control example, the process for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special pattern when it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, or may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game period when there is little control processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (F2701: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (F2708). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (F2708: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (F2710), and it is determined whether the current round number is 2 rounds (V rounds) (F2710). If it is determined that there are 2 rounds (V rounds) (F2710: Yes), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2711). If it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2711: Yes), a display command is set to notify of a V win (F2712), and this process ends. Furthermore, if the process of F2710 determines that the current round number is not two (V round), i.e., that a round other than the second round will be played (F2710: No), or if the process of F2711 determines that the V performance execution flag 223vs is off (F2711: No), this process is also terminated.

If it is determined in the process of F2708 that the round count command has not been received (F2708: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (F2713), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (F2713: Yes), ending process 22 is executed (F2714) and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of F2713 that the ending command has not been received (F2713: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing of the ending process 22 (F2714) will be explained with reference to FIG. 727. FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 22 (F2714). This ending process 22 (F2714) is a process that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 22 (see F2216 in FIG. 725) described above, and executes a process for finally determining the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When the ending process 22 (F2714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223vt is set to on (F2801), and if it is determined that it is set to on (F2801: Yes), the V winning flag 223vt is set to off (F2802), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (F2805), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of F2801 that the V winning flag 223vt is not set to on (F2801: No), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2803), and if it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223vs is off (F2803: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of F2804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F2803 that the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2803: Yes), a display switching command is set to switch the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period (F2804), and the processing proceeds to F2805.

When a display switching command is set in the process of F2804, the display control device 114 is notified, and a process is executed to switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending period, which was previously set in response to the setting of the Super Chance Mode, to a display mode corresponding to the setting of the Chance Mode. In this 22nd control example, the display period for the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), so that the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 22 (F2113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 728. FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 22 (F2113). This variable display setting process 22 (F2113) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process 22 (F2113), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223vd provided in the RAM 223 is on (F2901). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223vd is not on (i.e., it is off) (F2901: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to F2911. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223vd is on (F2901: Yes), it is next determined whether the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is on (F2902). If the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is on (F2902: Yes), the adjustment feature movable feature (sword feature Ym3) is in the adjustment position (see FIG. 678(b)), so the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is set to off (F2903), and a lamp control command is set to turn off all the LEDs associated with the adjustment feature (sword feature Ym3) (F2904). After that, a feature operation scenario is set to move the adjustment feature (sword feature Ym3) to the initial position (see FIG. 669(a)) (F2905), a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set to the limit timer 223vj (F2906), and the process proceeds to F2907.

In this way, in the 22nd control example, when the player is performing light intensity adjustment using the sword role object Ym3 during a waiting period when the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a process is performed to store the sword role object Ym3 so that the player can easily see the variable performance. In addition, at this time, if the sword role object Ym3 performs an action of returning from the adjustment position to the initial position while emitting light, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the action is part of the variable performance. In order to prevent this, all LEDs associated with the sword role object Ym3 are turned off before the sword role object Ym3 performs an action of returning from the adjustment position to the initial position, making it easy for the player to understand that the current action of the sword role object Ym3 is not related to the variable performance.

If the result of the special symbol lottery that is started while the sword role object Ym3 is in the adjustment position is a big win, the LEDs associated with the sword role object Ym3 may not be turned off completely, but may instead be illuminated in rainbow colors and then returned to the initial position.

On the other hand, if the adjustment feature in operation flag 223vi is not on in the process of F2902 (F2902: No), the processes of F2903 to F2906 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2907.

In the process of F2907, the fluctuation start flag 223vd is set to OFF (F2907), and then the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of F2205 of the command determination process 22 (see F2203 in FIG. 718) is obtained (F2908). Then, the fluctuation performance setting process 22 is executed (F2909) to generate a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 based on the obtained fluctuation pattern type, and the display fluctuation pattern command is set (F2910), and the process proceeds to F2911. Details of the fluctuation performance setting process 22 (F2909) will be described later with reference to FIG. 728.

In the process of F2911, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223ve provided in the RAM 223 is on (F2911). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is not on (i.e., it is off) (F2911: No), this is a state in which a stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is on (F2911: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve that is set to on is set to off (F2912), and then the stop type extracted in the process of S2208 of the command determination process 22 (see S2112 in FIG. 718) is obtained (F2913), and the extracted stop type is set as it is (F2914). After that, a stop type command for display is set (F2915), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 728, the contents of the variable presentation setting process 22 (F2909) executed in the variable display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727) will be described. FIG. 728 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable presentation setting process 22 (F2909). This variable presentation setting process 22 (F2909) is executed when setting the variable presentation of special patterns in the variable display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the variable performance setting process 22 (F2909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 0 or more (F3001). If the value of the time-saving counter sq is not 0 or more (F3001: No), that is, if the chance mode is set as the display mode, the processes of F3002 and F3003 are skipped and the process proceeds to F3004. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 0 or more (F3001: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is decremented by 1 (F3002), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223vq after the decrement (F3003), and the process proceeds to F3004.

In the process of F3004, it is determined whether the value of the high probability counter 223sr is 0 or greater (F3004). If the value of the high probability counter 223sr is not 0 or greater (F3004: No), that is, if the high probability game state is not set, the processes of F3005 to F3007 are skipped and the process moves to F3008.

On the other hand, in the process of F3004, if the value of the probability bonus counter 223sr is 0 or more (F3004: Yes), the value of the probability bonus counter 223sr is decremented by 1 (F3005), and then it is determined whether the super chance mode is set as the display mode (F3006). If the super chance mode is set (F3006: Yes), a display command is set to show the value of the probability bonus counter 223sr after decrement. On the other hand, in the process of F3006, if the super chance mode is not set (F3006: No), the process of F3007 is skipped and the process proceeds to F3008.

In the process of F3008, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3008). If the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3008: Yes), that is, if 10 seconds have not elapsed since the sword role object Ym3 returned to the initial position from the adjustment position, it is determined to exclude the performance mode including the movement of the sword role object Ym3 from the candidates for the performance mode that can be determined (F3009). On the other hand, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not 0 or greater (F3008: No), the process of F3009 is skipped and the process proceeds to F3010.

In this way, in the 22nd control example, after the sword role object Ym3 is moved, the performance mode for moving the sword role object Ym3 is not selected until a certain period (10 seconds) has elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the movement control for the sword role object Ym3 from being executed in a short period of time, and therefore it is possible to prevent the sword role object Ym3 from moving frequently and breaking down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movement control for the next sword role object Ym3 from being executed before the sword role object Ym3 becomes movable, which causes a discrepancy in the movement period of the sword role object Ym3 or prevents normal movement from being executed.

In the process of F3010, the game state stored in the slave state storage area 223vh is read (F3010), and it is determined whether the game state is a time-saving game state (F3011). If it is a time-saving game state (F3011: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3012), and if it is 1 (F3012: Yes), the presentation mode of the time-saving end indication presentation whose presentation result is the end of the chance mode is determined (F3013), and the process proceeds to F3014. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is not 1 (F3012: No), the process skips F3013 and proceeds to F3014. In the process of F3014, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined, and the process proceeds to F3019.

In the process of F3011, if it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving game mode (F3011: No), it is determined whether the game is in the high probability game mode (F3013). If it is determined that the game is in the high probability game mode (F3015: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3016), and if it is 1 (F3016: Yes), the presentation mode of the time-saving end suggestion presentation that results in promotion to the super chance mode is determined (F3017), and the process proceeds to F3014.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, when the probability variable game state is set based on winning the jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), even if the chance mode is set after the jackpot game ends, if the special pattern variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the mode will be promoted to the super chance mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the final variation of the chance mode may promote the mode to the super chance mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play when the remaining number of chance mode times becomes 0.

If it is determined in the processing of F3015 that the game is not in the special probability game state (F3015: No), the normal game state is set, and the normal state presentation mode determination processing 22 is executed (F3018). Here, the contents of the normal state presentation mode determination processing 22 (F3018) will be explained with reference to FIG. 729. FIG. 729 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal state presentation mode determination processing 22 (F3018).

When the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 (F3018) is executed, first, based on the variation pattern acquired in the process of F2908 of the variation display setting process 22 (F2113 in FIG. 727), a variation pattern selection table (not shown) is referenced to determine the type of variation presentation (F3101). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation presentation mode is a shutter closing reach (F3102). If a shutter closing reach is determined (F3102: Yes), the presentation mode is determined (F3103) based on the result of the special pattern lottery and the value of the first presentation counter 223vf, with reference to the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve (see FIG. 696), and the process proceeds to F3108.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F3102 that the shutter closing reach is not reached (F3102: No), it is determined whether or not a movie execution reach is reached (F3104). If it is determined that a movie execution reach is reached (F3104: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is decided (F3105), setting information for the operation effective period corresponding to the presentation pattern is stored in the presentation SW effective time memory area 223vp (F3106), and the processing proceeds to F3108.

If it is determined in the process of F3104 that the movie execution reach is not reached (F3104: No), the process determines the presentation mode corresponding to the determined variable presentation type (F3107), and proceeds to the process of F3108. In the process of F3108, the process of executing the pending presentation at the start of the fluctuation 22 (F3108) is executed. The contents of the process of executing the pending presentation at the start of the fluctuation 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 730. After that, a display variable pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set, and this process ends.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, since the normal game state is configured to be able to execute a wider variety of reach effects than the high probability game state and the time-limited game state, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with playing in the normal game state, which is less favorable to the player than the high probability game state and the time-limited game state.

Next, the contents of the hold effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 730. FIG. 730 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation. This hold effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation (F3109) is a process for executing a composite hold change effect based on the hold change scenario stored in the hold effect information storage area 223vl.

When the hold effect setting process 22 (F3109) is executed at the start of the change, first the hold effect information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223vl is read (F3201), and it is determined whether there is hold change scenario information (F3202). If there is no hold change scenario (F3202: No), this process ends because a composite hold change effect has not been set. On the other hand, if there is hold change scenario information (F3202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the current special pattern is 10 seconds or more (F3203). If the change time is not 10 seconds or more (F3203: No), this process ends.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, the composite reserve change performance corresponding to the reserve change scenario is executed only when the change time is 10 seconds or more. This is because the reserve change performance executed in this 22nd control example is a performance in which the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are operated, and therefore the reserve change performance is executed, and the change of the special pattern ends during the period from when the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are moved to when they are stored, and the next change is prevented from starting while the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are still in the movable state.

In the process of F3203, if the change time is 10 seconds or more (F3203: Yes), it is determined whether the stored reserved change scenario is 1, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204). If the reserved change scenario is 1, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204: Yes), it is determined whether the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change is the third reserved pattern hr3 (see FIG. 672) (F3205), and if it is the third reserved pattern hr3 (F3205: Yes), the role operation scenario 2 (see FIG. 697) is determined (F3206), and the process proceeds to F3207. On the other hand, if the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change is not the third reserved pattern hr3, this process is terminated.

Note that reserve change scenarios 1, 4, 7, and 9 are all scenarios in which the color of the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change is transferred to the color of the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change, so the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change is hidden by the left change device Ym1.Note that reserve change scenario 2 is a special scenario in which the color of the target reserve is changed by hiding the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change with the change device Ym2.

In the process of F3204, if the reserved change scenario is not 1, 2, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204: No), it is determined whether the reserved pattern targeted for the reserved change is the second reserved pattern hr2 (see FIG. 672) (F3210). If it is not the second reserved pattern hr2 (F3210: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the second reserved pattern hr2 (F3210: Yes), it is determined whether the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F3211). If the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F3211: Yes), that is, if the state is such that the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved pattern targeted for the reserved change has not been obtained after the next reserved ball has been obtained, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to off (F3215), the reserved change scenario stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl is cleared (F3216), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the later reserve setting flag 223vn is on, the composite reserve change presentation is not executed because all reserve change scenarios other than reserve change scenarios 1, 4, 7, and 9 are scenarios in which the color of the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change is transferred to the color of the reserved pattern acquired after the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an unnatural presentation from being executed for the player.

In the process of F3211, if the later reserved setting flag 223vn is not on (F3211: No), it is next determined whether the reserved change scenario stored is either 5 or 9 (F3212). If it is determined that the reserved change scenario is not either 6 or 11 (F3212: No), role operation scenario 1 is decided (F3213) and the process moves to F3207. As described above, the reserved change scenarios 3, 5, 8, and 10 are all scenarios in which the color of the reserved pattern acquired after the reserved change target reserved pattern is transferred to the color of the reserved pattern target of the reserved change, so the right change role Ym2 performs an operation to hide the reserved pattern target of the reserved change.

On the other hand, if the process of F3212 determines that the reserved pattern is either reserved pattern 6 or 11 (F3214: Yes), then the reel operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 697) is selected (F3214) and the process proceeds to F3207. Note that both reserved pattern change scenarios 6 and 11 are scenarios in which the colors of the reserved patterns before and after the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change are transferred to the target reserved pattern, so in reel operation scenario 3, the first reserved pattern hr1 is hidden by the left change reel Ym1, and the third reserved pattern hr3 is hidden by the right change reel Ym2.

In the process of F3207, the presentation mode corresponding to the reserved change scenario stored in the reserved presentation information storage area 223vl is determined (F3207), and a display pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (F3208). Then, a reel operation command indicating the determined reel operation scenario is set (F3209), the reserved presentation restriction flag 223vm is set to off (F3217), and this process ends.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, based on a preset reserve change scenario, it is determined whether or not the reserve change presentation corresponding to the reserve change scenario can be executed in the change, and if it can be executed, the reserve change presentation is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent malfunctions that occur when the special pattern change ends while the reserve change presentation is being executed, and to prevent presentations that seem unnatural to the player being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 731, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 22 (F2107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 731 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 22 (F2107). This frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 22 (F2107) is executed within the main processing (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22A in order to execute an effect in response to the player's operation in order to enhance the presentation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process 22 (Fig. 731, F2107), it is first determined whether the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has been operated (F3301). If an operation has been performed (F3301: Yes), it is determined whether the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3302). If it is not on (F3302: No), it is determined whether the environmental information adjustment screen is to be displayed (F3303), the adjustment period flag 223vx is set to on (F3304), and the elapsed timer 223vy is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3305).

Then, it is determined whether the game is in the standby period (F3306), and if it is determined that the game is in the standby period (F3306: Yes), an operation scenario is set for moving the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) to the environment adjustment position (see FIG. 678 (b)) (F3307), and the adjustment role movable flag 223vi is set to ON (F3308). Then, the mode for indicating that the adjustment role is in motion (display of the display area HR3 in FIG. 678) is determined (F3309), and the process proceeds to F3310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3306 that the game is not in the standby period (F3306: No), that is, the special symbol is being displayed or a jackpot is being played, the process skips the processes of F3307 to F3309 and proceeds to the process of F3310. In this way, in this 22nd control example, if the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position, so that a problem does not occur in which the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) overlaps with the variable performance and the player cannot see the variable performance.

In the 22nd control example, if the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the adjustment device Ym3 may be changed to the environment adjustment position, and the special pattern variable presentation may be displayed in a reduced size at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment device (sword device Ym3).

In the process of F3302, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3302: Yes), the environmental information adjustment screen is already being displayed, so the environmental information stored in the environmental information storage area 223vk is updated to correspond to the button operation content (F3311), and the mode corresponding to the updated environmental information is determined (F3312). Then, the elapsed timer 223vy is reset to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3313), and the process proceeds to F3310.

In the process of F3301, if the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has not been operated (F3301: No), it is determined whether the decision button 600a has been operated (F3314). If the decision button 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), decision button operation process 22 (F3315) is executed, and the process proceeds to F3310. The contents of decision button operation process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 732.

On the other hand, if the decision button has not been operated in the process of F3314 (F3314: No), the effect button operation process 22 is executed (F3316), and the process of F3310 is executed. In the process of F3310, a display command corresponding to the determined mode is set (F3310), and this process ends. The contents of the effect button operation process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 733.

Next, the contents of the decision button operation process 22 (F3315) executed in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) will be described with reference to FIG. 732. FIG. 732 is a flowchart showing the contents of the decision button operation process 22.

When the decision button operation process 22 (F3315) is executed, first it is determined whether the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3351). If it is determined that the adjustment period flag 223vx is not on (F3351: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3351: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer is set to 1 (F3352), and it is determined whether the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is on (F3353). If the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is not on (F3353: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the adjustment reel movable flag 223vi is on (F3352: Yes), the adjustment reel (sword reel Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, so an operation scenario is set to move the adjustment reel (sword reel Ym3) to its initial position (F3354), and the display mode indicating the end of the environment adjustment (environment adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 679(a)) is determined (F3355). Then, the adjustment reel movable flag 223vi is set to off (F3356), the limit timer 223vj is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3357), and this process is terminated.

When the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position and the display of the special symbol begins, a process of turning off all the LEDs associated with the adjustment device Ym3 (see F2904 in FIG. 727) is executed. However, when the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in response to the operation of the enter button, the special symbol change performance has not yet been executed, and there is no risk of the player misunderstanding that the operation of the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is part of the change performance. Therefore, the LEDs associated with the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) are changed to the initial position without being turned off all.

In addition, by setting the value of the elapsed timer 223vy to 1 in the decision button operation process 22, the value of the elapsed timer 223vy can be set to 0 when the next performance update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734) is executed, so that the process of setting the flag 223vx to off during the adjustment period can be unified.

Next, referring to FIG. 733, the contents of the effect button operation process 22 (F3319) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) will be described. FIG. 733 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button operation process 22 (F3319).

When the effect button operation process 22 (F3319) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401). If the effect button 22 has not been operated (F3401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401: Yes), it is determined whether the effect SW is in an effective period (F3402). The effect SW effective period is set based on the information stored in the effect SW effective time memory area 223vp. If it is determined that the effect SW is in an effective period (F342: Yes), the movie playback mode is determined (F3403), and the movie in progress flag 223vv is set to on (F3404). Thereafter, the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the other effect buttons is determined (F3405), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of F3402 that the performance SW is not in an effective period (F3402: No), the process of F3405 is executed and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the performance update process 22 (F2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 734. FIG. 734 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance update process 22 (F2111). When the performance update process 22 (F2111) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is equal to or greater than 0 (F3501).

If the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is equal to or greater than 0 (F3501: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is updated (F3502), and it is determined whether the updated value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503). If the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not 0 (F3503: No), the process proceeds to F3510.

On the other hand, if the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503: Yes), a display mode indicating the end of the environmental adjustment (environment adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 679) is set (F3504), and the adjustment period flag 223vx is set to OFF (F3505). Then, it is determined whether the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is ON (F3506). If the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is not ON (F3506: No), the process proceeds to F3510. If the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is ON (F3506: Yes), an operation scenario for moving the adjustment reel (sword reel Ym3) to the initial position is set (F3507), the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is set to OFF (F3508), a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set to the limit timer 223vj (F3509), and the process proceeds to F3510.

In the process of F3501, if the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not equal to or greater than 0 (F3501: No), that is, if the environmental information adjustment screen is not displayed, the processes of F3502 to F3509 are skipped and the process proceeds to F3510.

In the process of F3510, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3510), and if the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3511: Yes), the value of the limit timer 223vj is updated (F3511) and the process proceeds to F3512. On the other hand, in the process of F3510, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not 0 or greater (F3510), that is, if no value is set in the limit timer 223vj, the process proceeds to F3512.

In the process of F3512, it is determined whether the movie has finished playing in the movie play reach (F3512). If the movie has not finished playing (F3512: No), the process moves to F3517. On the other hand, if the movie has finished playing (F3512: Yes), it is determined whether the movie play flag 223vv is on (F3513). If the movie play flag 223vv is not on (F3513: No), this means that the movie play reach has not been executed, so the processes of F3514 to F3516 are skipped and the process moves to F3517.

In the processing of F3513, if the movie in progress flag 223vv is on (F3513:Ye number), the shaking display mode (the display mode in which the third symbol is shaking, as shown in FIG. 684(b)) is set (F3514), the shaking standby flag 223vw is set to on (F3515), the movie in progress flag 223vv is set to off (F3516), and the processing proceeds to F3517.

In the processing of F3517, update processing of various other counters and timers is performed (F3517), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example, when a presentation (a reserved change presentation) is executed in which the display mode of the reserved patterns corresponding to the acquired reserved balls is changed, the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed are hidden by the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly show the player which reserved pattern is the one to be changed.

In addition, when the decorative movable parts (decorative movable parts Ym1, Ym2) perform the action of hiding reserved symbols other than the one to be changed, the action of hiding reserved symbols other than the one to be changed is performed in stages. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which reserved symbol will be the one to be changed during the period from the start of the reserved change performance to the end of the reserved change performance.

In the 22nd control example, the decorative movable part is used to hide the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed, but this is not limited to this. The third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a blocking mode (for example, a display mode imitating a shutter) to make the display area in which the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed are displayed invisible. Alternatively, the third pattern may be used to hide the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed.

<Modification of the 22nd control example>
Next, a modified example of the second control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 797. In the above-mentioned 22nd control example, the pachinko machine 10 has a light amount adjustment function, and when adjusting the light amount during the standby period, the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3) used in the variable performance of the special pattern is changed to an environmental adjustment position, and the light amount can be adjusted by the LED attached to the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3). In contrast, the modified example of the 22nd control example is different in that the light amount is adjusted using the large sword role Ym4 instead of the sword role Ym3.

In recent years, pachinko machines 10 have become known that are equipped with decorative movable parts that are large enough to hide most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. Some such pachinko machines 10 have the decorative movable parts moved in accordance with the demo performance that is executed during the waiting period. By configuring it in this way, the decorative movable parts are moved in the demo performance, making it easier for the player to imagine the variable performance that is executed during play, and making the player want to see the variable performance that uses this decorative movable part, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

However, with this type of pachinko machine 10, when attempting to adjust the light intensity during the execution of a demo performance, the decorative movable parts move according to the operating scenario, making it difficult to see the indicator for adjusting the light intensity displayed on the LCD display, which can be a hindrance to adjusting the light intensity. In response to this problem, a modified version of this 22nd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 797.

Figure 797 (a) is an example of a pachinko machine 10 in which the decorative movable part (large sword part Ym4) is in a movable state during a demo performance. As shown in Figure 797 (a), when the large sword part Ym4 is in a movable state, most of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see. When the player is not operating the selection button 600, this large sword part Ym4 operates according to a set operation scenario. This operation scenario is set in the customer waiting performance processing of the 22nd control example (see Figure 717, F2105).

On the other hand, when the player operates the selection button 600, the light intensity adjustment is performed according to the operation pattern of the great sword role Ym4 and the position of the great sword role Ym4 at the time of the operation. More specifically, in the process of F3306 of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see FIG. 731, F2107) of the 22nd control example, if it is determined that the standby period is in progress (F3306: Yes), it is determined whether the position of the great sword role Ym4 is in the initial position (a position in a stored state that does not overlap with the third pattern display device 81). If it is in the initial position, the great sword role Ym4 is not changed to the environment adjustment position a (the position shown in FIG. 751(a)), and a process is performed to display the large light intensity gauge ga3 (see FIG. 679(b)) in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is not in the initial position, it is determined whether the great sword part Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position a. If the great sword part Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position a, the great sword part Ym4 is stopped in the environment adjustment position, and processing is performed to adjust the light intensity using the LED associated with the great sword part Ym4.

In this modified example of the 22nd control example, when the great sword role Ym4 is not in the environment adjustment position a, since the great sword role Ym4 is in operation, the start of the light intensity adjustment is put on hold (delayed) until the great sword role Ym4 is moved to the initial position or to the environment adjustment position a, and a process is performed to display a notification mode (for example, displaying the words "Preparing for light intensity adjustment" in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 that is not overlapping with the great sword role Ym4) to notify the player that the start of the light intensity adjustment is on hold (delayed).

Next, it is determined whether the motion pattern of the great sword role Ym4 is a motion pattern (motion pattern A) in which it changes from the initial position to the environment adjustment position a. If it is motion pattern A, the great sword role Ym4 is stopped at the environment adjustment position a, a process is performed to discard (or interrupt) the set motion scenario, and a process is performed to hide the notification mode for notifying the player that it is waiting (delayed). On the other hand, if the motion pattern of the great sword role Ym4 is not motion pattern A, that is, if it is a motion pattern (motion pattern B) in which it changes from the environment adjustment position a to the initial position, the great sword role Ym4 is stopped at the initial position, a process is performed to display the light quantity gauge ga3 in the main display area Dm, and a process is performed to hide the notification mode for notifying the player that it is waiting (delayed).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to eliminate the need to reset the movement pattern of the great sword role Ym4, which moves according to a movement pattern that follows the movement scenario.

It is also possible to configure the device to determine whether to change the large sword role Ym4 to the initial position or to the environmental adjustment position a depending on the position during operation. For example, even if operation pattern A is set, if the current position of the large sword role Ym4 is closer to the initial position than the environmental adjustment position a, the period of waiting for the start of light intensity adjustment can be shortened by changing it to the initial position.

Figure 797 (b) is an example of a display screen when the special symbol starts to change during the light intensity adjustment. In the above-mentioned 22nd control example, when the decorative movable part is in the environment adjustment position and the special symbol starts to change, the decorative movable part is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. In contrast, in a modified example of the 22nd control example, as shown in Figure 797 (b), during the period until the light intensity adjustment is completed, the large sword part Ym4 is moved to the environment adjustment position b (the position in Figure 797 (b)), and the change of the special symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the display area HR7 on the left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Then, when the player operates the decision button 600a and the light intensity adjustment is completed, the large sword part Ym4 is moved to the stored state (a position that does not overlap with the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81).

When the large sword Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position b (i.e., when the light intensity adjustment is being performed during the variation of the special symbol), for example, when a variation performance mode using the large sword Ym4 with a high probability of winning a jackpot is selected as the variation performance mode of the special symbol, or when a variation pattern in which a reach performance (such as a special reach) with a high probability of winning a jackpot is selected, the large sword Ym4 may be changed to a stored state before the light intensity adjustment is completed (i.e., regardless of the player's operation of the decision button 600a), and the display area HR7 in which the variation performance of the special symbol is displayed may be enlarged. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the performance with a high probability of winning a jackpot. In addition, the operation of the large sword Ym4 during the light intensity adjustment can be made interesting, thereby improving the fun of the game.

Next, referring to Fig. 798 and Fig. 799, a modified example of the shutter closing reach performance executed in the present 22nd control example will be described. In the above-mentioned shutter closing reach performance (see Fig. 681 to Fig. 683), the shutter closes to proceed to the next stage, and when the final stage is reached, or when the shutter is completely opened by an item obtained in the middle stage, the winning of the jackpot is notified. In contrast, in the modified shutter closing reach performance, the winning of the jackpot is not necessarily notified when the final stage is reached, but is configured to be notified at any stage, which is a major difference. In addition, the color of the shutter suggests the type of pattern when the middle pattern that is changing in the reach state stops, and the number of times the shutter closes suggests the type of the third pattern that is finally stopped and displayed. More specifically, the description will be made with reference to Fig. 798 and Fig. 799.

Figure 798 (a) is an example of a display screen when a development tease of the shutter closing reach effect variation occurs when a reach state is reached. In the center of the main display area Dm, a reach state is displayed in which the third symbol "11" is displayed stopped in two of the three symbol rows, and the third symbol (final stopped symbol) is displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol row, and a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, where a guide mode is displayed to inform the player that a reach state is reached. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that a reach state is reached.

In addition, the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in a rattling, vibrating manner on the left and right ends of the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds displays the text "When the shutters close, progress to a shutter closed reach," which is a notification manner for notifying the player of game information related to the presentation. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that when the shutters St3 and St4 displayed in the main display area Dm close, the presentation will progress to a higher-level reach presentation (shutter closed reach presentation).

In the example shown in FIG. 798(a), the third symbol is displayed as "11" in the two symbol rows in the center of the main display area Dm, but in this 22nd control example, the number is set based on the results of a lottery for a special symbol from the numbers "1" to "8".

Figure 798 (b) is an example of a display screen when the performance has progressed to a shutter closing reach performance. As shown in Figure 798 (b), in the main display area Dm, a performance is executed in which the shutters St3, St4 close with the characters St3a, St4a "blue" displayed to indicate that the shutters St3, St4 are in the first display mode, and in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Shutter closing reach begins, even numbers are your chance" are displayed, which is a notification mode to notify the player of game information related to the performance.

Here, in a modified example of the shutter closing reach performance, the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is set to either a first display mode in which the word "blue" is displayed, or a second display mode in which the word "red" is displayed. When the first display mode is displayed, it is suggested that the final stop pattern will stop at an even number pattern, and when the second display mode is displayed, it is suggested that the final stop pattern will stop at an odd number pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 798(b), since the word "blue" St3a and St4a are displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (i.e., the first display mode), the notification mode "Even number pattern is chance" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. On the other hand, when the word "red" is displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (i.e., the second display mode), the notification mode "Odd number pattern is chance" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

In a modified version of the shutter closing reach effect, the final stop symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol when the shutter is completely opened. When shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, any one of the numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" is displayed as the final stop symbol, and when they are displayed in the second display mode, any one of the numbers "1, 3, 7, 9" is displayed as the final stop symbol.

In the modified shutter closing reach performance, the shutters St3 and St4 have two display modes, but this is not limited to this and three or more modes may be used. For example, a third display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 displaying the word "rainbow" may be configured to be configurable, and when the third display mode is displayed, it is announced that a jackpot has been won regardless of whether the shutters St3 and St4 are fully opened on an even or odd number of times.

In addition, the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 may be configured so that the player can distinguish which display mode they are by making the color of the shutters St3 and St4 blue (or red) instead of displaying the letters St3a and St4a "blue" (or "red").

On the other hand, if the development tease of the modified shutter closing reach performance (see FIG. 799(a)) fails, the final stopping pattern, which is a combination indicating a miss win, is displayed, and a notification mode (for example, the word "Failed") is displayed to indicate that the development to the shutter closing reach performance has failed.

Figure 799 (a) is an example of a display screen when a branching effect in a modified shutter closing reach effect is being executed from the state of Figure 798 (b). In the main display area Dm, the shutters St3 and St4 go from a closed state (see Figure 798 (b)) to a half-open state, and an effect is executed in which the shutters vibrate to tease whether or not they will close again.

In addition, in the center of the main display area Dm, a reach state is displayed in which the third symbol "22" is displayed stopped in two of the three symbol rows, and the third symbol (final stopping symbol) is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the remaining symbol row.

In addition, the display area HR4, which displays the currently reached stage and a guide to indicate the final stage, displays "Continues 2/6 when the shutter closes" at the top center of the main display area Dm. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the current stage is the second stage of the shutter closing reach performance, and that the current shutter closing reach performance can go up to a maximum of the sixth stage.

In addition, in the modified shutter closing reach performance, it is possible to set either a pattern in which the final stage is the sixth stage, or a pattern in which the final stage is the fifth stage.

Here, in the shutter closing reach performance, when the shutters St3 and St4 are closed, the game proceeds to the next stage and one is added to the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), because the shutters St3 and St4 have been closed once since the state of FIG. 798(a), one is added to the third symbol "1" that was stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm in FIG. 798(a), and it becomes "2" as shown in FIG. 799(a).

In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), the sixth stage is the final stage, so the shutters St3 and St4 are closed five times before the sixth stage is reached. Therefore, when the final stage is reached, the third symbol displayed as stopped in the center of the main display area Dm will be "66." As described above, when the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, the final stopped symbol is an even number, suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be announced when the final stage is reached.

On the other hand, when the display mode of shutters St3 and St4 is the second display mode, the final stopped symbol is an odd number, suggesting to the player that it is unlikely that a jackpot will be announced when the final stage is reached. Therefore, in this case, it suggests to the player that it is likely that a jackpot will be announced when shutters St3 and St4 are fully opened at the odd number stage before the final stage is reached.

Figure 799 (b) is an example of a display screen when the shutters are fully opened in the fourth stage. In the example shown in Figure 799 (b), the characters "4/6" are displayed in the display area HR4 as a guide mode to inform the player that the current stage is the fourth stage, and an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which the shutters St3, St4 are fully opened from the closed state (see Figure 798 (b)). Then, the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed as "444", which is a display mode to inform the player that a jackpot has been won, and the characters "jackpot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, which is a notification mode to indicate that a jackpot has been won, so that an effect is executed in which the shutters St3, St4 are fully opened in the fourth stage, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a jackpot has been won.

As described above, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a jackpot, when the shutter is fully opened, the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm will be displayed in a display mode (e.g., "454") to inform the player that it is a miss win, and the secondary display area Ds will display a display mode (e.g., the word "unfortunate") to inform the player that it is a miss win.

As explained above, in the modified shutter closing reach, by gradually displaying information on the type of third pattern that will be stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm at the start of the shutter closing reach performance, information on the type of display mode of the shutters St3 and St4, and information on the final stage pattern that will be displayed in the display area HR4, the player can be given the fun of predicting the third pattern that will be stopped and displayed by combining this information.

The display modes of shutters St3 and St4 indicate advantageous and disadvantageous stages for the player, making the player expect the shutter to fully open in advantageous stages and closing in disadvantageous stages, allowing the player to enjoy the reach variation presentation until the very end without getting bored.

In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), the display area HR4 is configured to display the currently reached stage and a guide to indicate the final stage, but this is not limited to this, and a number corresponding to the current number of times the shutter is closed and the maximum number of times it can be closed may also be displayed.

Also, the configuration may be such that the performance of acquiring the capsule Cp1 described with reference to FIG. 683 is executed. For example, when the HOLD ticket Cp1a shown in FIG. 683(b) is used, the number of the third pattern currently stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm is maintained even when proceeding to the next stage, so that the use of the HOLD ticket Cp1a increases the possibility of winning the jackpot when the third pattern corresponding to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode and the third pattern stopped and displayed is an even number). On the other hand, when the HOLD ticket Cp1a is used when the third pattern not corresponding to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode and the third pattern stopped and displayed is an odd number), the possibility of winning the jackpot decreases. In this way, the advantage and disadvantage of the player can be changed depending on the timing of use of the HOLD ticket Cp1a, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

For example, if the second display mode is set as the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 (i.e., the odd-numbered third symbol is the chance), and the third symbol "55" is displayed in the main display area Dm at the time the fifth stage is reached, the player knows that the third symbol in the reach state at the time the shutters St3 and St4 are closed is "66" and that the final stop symbol will be an odd number, so the player will know that he or she has missed and won before the shutters St3 and St4 are fully opened, and there is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will not be sustained until the end of the shutter closing reach. On the other hand, since the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 suggests the type of the final stop symbol (even or odd), if the even-numbered third symbol is displayed in the reach state as the final stop symbol when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the second display mode, the credibility of the information suggested by the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 will be lost. Therefore, if the information indicated by the display mode of shutters St3 and St4 does not correspond to the display mode for notifying the player of a jackpot win, the middle symbol nz1, which displays the word "jackpot" as shown in FIG. 682(b), is displayed as the final stopped symbol, making it possible to notify the player of the lottery result in an unexpected way without giving the player a sense of incongruity, thereby maintaining the player's sense of anticipation until the very end of the shutter closing reach.

<23rd control example>
Next, the 23rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 735 to Fig. 755. The pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example in that the player can select a presentation mode with different expectation of winning the jackpot for the variable presentation to be executed (the presentation can be customized), and that the running pending change presentation that moves the change role Ym1, Ym2 can be executed as a variable presentation to increase the expectation of the running special pattern variation winning the jackpot. The rest of the contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

There has been a pachinko machine 10 that can perform a selection operation (performance customization operation) to vary the expectation of winning a jackpot indicated by each performance mode of the executed variable performance. Here, the expectation of winning a jackpot indicates the expectation of winning a jackpot when a variable performance in which a target performance mode is set is executed, and is specified based on the percentage set as the performance mode of the variable performance (jackpot variable performance) executed when the target performance mode wins a jackpot and the percentage set as the performance mode of the variable performance (miss variable performance) executed when a miss is won. The higher the percentage set during the jackpot variable performance, or the lower the percentage set during the miss variable performance, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot. On the other hand, the lower the percentage set during the jackpot variable performance, or the higher the percentage set during the miss variable performance, the lower the expectation of winning a jackpot.

In other words, by increasing the rate at which a specific presentation mode is selected as the presentation mode for a jackpot variation presentation, or by lowering the rate at which a specific presentation mode is selected as the presentation mode for a miss variation presentation, the jackpot winning expectation for the specific presentation mode increases. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a presentation mode with a high jackpot winning expectation to be set when a jackpot has not been won. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for a presentation mode with a low jackpot winning expectation to be set when a jackpot has been won.

In this 23rd control example, as in each of the control examples described above, the probability of not winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery (probability of winning a miss) is set to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the miss variable performance is more likely to be executed when the expectation of winning the jackpot is set low than when the expectation of winning the jackpot is set high, and therefore the execution frequency can be increased.

By configuring the performance customization operation to be executable in this way, it is possible to vary the expectation of winning a jackpot when a specific performance mode (e.g., chance notice) is set depending on the set performance mode; for example, a player who wants to experience a variable performance in which a specific performance mode is set regardless of whether or not a jackpot is won can increase the frequency of variable performances in which various performance modes are set by executing a performance customization operation to lower the expectation of winning a jackpot for each performance mode. On the other hand, a player who is paying close attention to whether or not a jackpot is won can know in advance from the content of the performance that is executed that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot by executing a performance customization operation to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot for a variable performance in which a specific performance mode (e.g., chance notice) is set.

Here, in conventional pachinko machines 10, when the above-mentioned custom performance operation is performed during a special symbol change, it is common for the performance mode corresponding to the custom performance operation performed to be set after the special symbol change currently being performed has stopped and displayed. In other words, in conventional pachinko machines 10, the performance mode of the change performance to be performed during the special symbol change period is determined at the start of the special symbol change, and the change performance is executed based on the determined performance mode. Therefore, it is not possible to switch the performance mode midway through the change performance currently being executed, and it is common for the performance mode to be set to the performance mode corresponding to the set performance mode from the change performance corresponding to the next special symbol change.

In this case, there is a discrepancy between the timing at which the player executes the effect customization operation and the timing at which the effect mode is switched based on the execution of the effect customization operation, making it difficult to execute the variable effect desired by the player.

In contrast to this, in the present 23rd control example, when a custom effect operation is performed during the period in which a special symbol variation is being performed, the presentation state of the variation effect corresponding to the currently being performed special symbol variation can be made to correspond to the newly set presentation mode based on the custom effect operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the conventional problem of a discrepancy between the timing at which the player performs the custom effect operation and the timing at which the presentation mode is switched based on the execution of the custom effect operation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation custom operation is configured to vary depending on the timing at which the presentation custom operation is executed. Specifically, a special presentation mode (premium mode) is provided that is selectable when a presentation custom operation is executed during a jackpot fluctuation. This configuration makes it possible for a player to know whether or not they have won a jackpot by executing a presentation custom operation, so that players who want to know whether or not they have won a jackpot as soon as possible can be motivated to perform a presentation custom operation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, a notification effect can be executed that can notify the player that the special pattern change being executed is a jackpot change, based on the execution of a decision operation (pressing the decision button 600a) when deciding on a new presentation mode through a presentation customization operation.

In other words, in this 23rd control example, when an operation to select a presentation mode is performed using a presentation customization operation (when the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated), a first notification effect can be executed to notify the player that a jackpot is changing, and when an operation to determine a presentation mode is performed using a presentation customization operation (when the decision button 600a is pressed), a second notification effect can be executed to notify the player that a jackpot is changing.

By configuring it in this way, when the first notification effect is executed, it becomes possible to select the special effect mode (premium mode) as the effect mode for the special pattern change being executed (the special pattern change that results in a jackpot win) and allow the player to choose whether to see an effect that cannot normally be seen, or to not select the special effect mode (premium mode) and watch the normally executed change effect with peace of mind, making it easier to provide effects that suit the player's tastes.

In addition, because the second notification effect is executed based on the decision operation of the effect customization operation, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to a player who performs the decision operation to switch the effect mode.

In this 23rd control example, the first notification effect and the second notification effect can be combined and executed, so that a player who executes a custom effect operation while a special symbol is changing can be notified of whether or not a jackpot change has occurred at the stage of selecting the presentation mode, and further, even if the first notification effect indicating a jackpot change has not been executed at the stage of selecting the presentation mode, the second notification effect can be executed at the stage of deciding the presentation mode.

By configuring it in this way, custom effects can be executed while the special symbols are changing, making it possible to notify the player that a jackpot is changing at various times, enhancing the effect of the presentation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the second notification effect is configured to be executed more easily when a presentation mode (chance up mode) in which the expected probability of winning a jackpot when a specific presentation mode is set by the presentation customization operation is determined, compared to when another presentation mode (normal mode) is determined. In other words, the second notification effect is configured to be executed relatively easily when a presentation mode type desired by a player who wants to know (predict) whether or not a jackpot has been won as soon as possible is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the player's preferences more easily.

Next, in this 23rd control example, as described above, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden when the presentation pattern (reach mode) of the variable presentation currently being executed progresses (develops) into a presentation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. In other words, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden in order to clearly inform the player that the presentation being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a variable presentation to show the results of the special pattern variation currently being executed.

Then, as the presentation mode for hiding the reserved symbols, a presentation mode for moving the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 is set in the same way as when the reserved change presentation is executed in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, and it is configured so that immediately after the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 are moved, it is difficult for the player to know whether a reserved change presentation for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols has been executed or a presentation for hiding the reserved symbols has been executed.

By configuring it in this way, players can have fun predicting which effect will be the target when the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when a presentation mode is set in which the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to hide the reserved patterns as a variable presentation, if the reserved patterns are displayed in a display mode of three or more colors as the reserved pattern display and the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable presentation being executed is a jackpot win, the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are configured to be able to execute a presentation in which all reserved pattern displays are hidden and the display mode of the execution reserved pattern (execution pending pattern) corresponding to the special pattern change being executed is changed to a display mode (rainbow colors) indicating a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the effect of notifying the player of the lottery results for the special pattern change that is currently being performed in addition to the effect of simply hiding the reserved pattern display (the effect of moving the change role Ym1, Ym2), so that it is possible to execute an effect that is unexpected for the player, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

<About the content of the performance in the 23rd control example>
Here, referring to Fig. 735 to Fig. 740, characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it has an effect mode selection function (effect customization function) that can change the probability of winning a jackpot for the variable effect executed, and is configured to be able to execute an effect based on an effect customization operation for selecting the effect mode, and is configured to be able to execute an effect that hides the reserved pattern display as a variable effect corresponding to the special pattern change being executed.

First, with reference to Fig. 735 to Fig. 738, the content of the effects executed based on the effect customization operation will be described. A detailed description will be given later with reference to Fig. 737, but in this 23rd control example, four types of effect modes (normal mode, chance up mode, probability change notification mode, premium mode) can be selected as the effect modes selectable by the effect customization operation, and the effect customization operation for selecting the effect mode can be executed when the special pattern variation is not being executed or when the special pattern variation is being executed.

Figure 735 (a) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when the normal state is set as the game state and the normal mode is set as the presentation mode, and the chance up mode is selected by presentation customization operation during the latter half of the variation presentation corresponding to the special symbol variation (after a reach is achieved).

As shown in FIG. 735(a), when the normal state is set as the game state, as in the 22nd control example described above, the word "left hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 as a game method guidance mode for guiding the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player, and notifies the player that during the normal state, left hit play, that is, left hit play in which the game ball is fired toward the game area (left side area) formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (see FIG. 620), is a game method that is advantageous to the player.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this 23rd control example, regardless of the set game state or the presence or absence of a jackpot game, the small display area Dm4 in which the game method guidance mode is displayed is configured to always be formed in the same position (upper left position) on the display screen. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gameplay for players who are unfamiliar with playing pachinko machine 10, since the game method guidance can always be displayed in the same position.

In the 23rd control example, as in the 22nd control example described above, the game method guide mode (left hit, right hit) for indicating the game method (left hit game, right hit game) that is advantageous to the player is always displayed in the small display area Dm4, but this is not limited to this. For example, the execution of a left hit game is considered to be a normal game, and a state in which the game method guide mode is not displayed in the small display area Dm4 is considered to be a game state in which the normal game (left hit game) is advantageous to the player, and when a game method other than the normal game (right hit game) becomes advantageous to the player, the characters "right hit" may be displayed in the small display area Dm4. By configuring in this way, in a game state in which the normal game (left hit game) is advantageous to the player, there is no need to display the game method guide mode (left hit), so the display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be used for other purposes (for example, variable performance).

In addition, the small display area Dm4 may not be constantly displayed with the game method guidance mode, but may be configured to display the game method guidance mode in the small display area Dm4 only when the player wants to know a game method that is advantageous to the player. For example, the small display area Dm4 may be configured to display the game method guidance mode when a predetermined operation (long press) is performed on the operation means (frame button 22). By configuring in this way, for players who are unfamiliar with playing the pachinko machine 10, the game method guidance mode is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to make it easier to understand, and for experienced players, the performance effect can be enhanced by performing a powerful performance (a performance with a larger execution area than when the small display area Dm4 is formed) that also utilizes the display area in which the game method guidance mode can be displayed. In this case, the size of the small display area Dm4 may be changed rather than switching between display and non-display based on the operation of the operation means.

As shown in FIG. 735(a), below the small display area Dm4, a small display area Dm15 is formed, and the characters "Normal mode set" are displayed as a currently set mode display mode to indicate the currently set presentation mode. FIG. 735(a) shows a display screen in which the normal mode is set as the presentation mode, so the characters "Normal mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15 to indicate that the normal mode is set. When the chance up mode is set, the characters "Chance up mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15, when the probability change notification mode is set, the characters "Probability change notification mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15, and when the premium mode is set, the characters "Premium mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15. This configuration allows the player to know at a glance the currently set presentation mode.

Various aspects related to the performance customization operation are displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. In this 23rd control example, by pressing the middle button 600a when no light adjustment operation or volume adjustment operation is being performed, a performance customization state in which a performance mode can be selected and operated is set, and by pressing the right button 600c or the left button 600e in the performance customization state, a performance mode can be selected. Then, by operating (pressing) the middle button 600a when the desired performance mode is selected, the selected performance mode can be set.

When the performance customization state is set, as shown in FIG. 735(a), a display area HR6 is formed and the selected performance mode is displayed. A small display area Dm16 is formed above the display area HR6, and the text "Use the left and right buttons + middle button to switch modes" is displayed as a guide to show the operation method in the performance customization state, i.e., the operation method for selecting a performance mode.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, until the custom presentation state is set, that is, until the middle button 600a is pressed to select the presentation mode, the text "Press the middle button to display the presentation mode selection screen" is displayed below the small display area Dm15 as a guide to guide the player on the operation method for setting the custom presentation state. In other words, the operation method for changing the presentation mode is displayed near the small display area Dm15 that shows the currently set presentation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly inform a player who knows the currently set presentation mode that the device has a function for changing the presentation mode and the operation method for changing the presentation mode.

When the presentation customization state is set, a display mode is displayed in the display area HR6 to indicate the currently set presentation mode. A left arrow LY is displayed to the left of the display area HR6, and a right arrow RY is displayed to the right of the display area HR6. The left arrow LY and right arrow RY are display modes to guide the player through a switching operation to switch the presentation mode displayed in the display area HR6 to another presentation mode, and when the player operates the right button 600c, the right arrow RY is illuminated, and when the player operates the left button 600e, the left arrow LY is illuminated.

By operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e, a presentation mode different from the currently set presentation mode is displayed in the display area HR6. As shown in FIG. 735(a), in this 23rd control example, the display area HR6 is configured to display only one presentation mode, and the player is prevented from knowing which display mode will be displayed in the display area HR6 when the right button 600c is next operated.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example, when a presentation customization operation is performed to change the presentation mode during a jackpot fluctuation, a special presentation mode (premium mode) can be selected. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the types of presentation modes that can be selected in the current presentation customization operation, the next presentation mode is not displayed in the display area HR6 until the presentation mode selection operation is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to perform the presentation mode selection operation in order to grasp whether or not the special presentation mode (premium mode) is selectable.

The display contents of the display area HR6 when the performance customization state is set are not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the display mode indicating the currently selected performance mode, at least a portion of the display mode indicating the performance mode selected when the left button 600e is operated, and at least a portion of the display mode indicating the performance mode selected when the right button 600c is operated may be displayed in the display area HR6.

By configuring it in this way, players who wish to select a desired presentation mode can efficiently execute presentation customization operations.

Then, when the display mode indicating the desired presentation mode is displayed in the display area HR6 through the presentation customization operation, the middle button 600a is pressed again to complete the presentation mode switching operation.

Figure 735 (a) shows a display screen indicating that the presentation mode cannot be switched immediately when a different presentation mode has been determined by a presentation customization operation, and the words "on standby" are displayed in the auxiliary display area HR6a as a standby state indicating that the presentation mode switching operation has been normally accepted and the presentation mode has not been switched.

By displaying this waiting mode "on standby", the player can be notified that the operation to switch presentation modes has been performed normally, and this prevents the player from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 is broken when the presentation mode displayed in the small display area Dm15 does not change despite the presentation mode switching operation being performed.

In FIG. 735(a), the auxiliary display area HR6a is formed near the display area HR6 to make it easier for a player who has performed a switching operation of the presentation mode while checking the display content of the display area HR6 to understand that the game is "on standby." However, the auxiliary display area HR6a may be formed near the small display area Dm15, or may be formed so that its display position overlaps with that of the small display area Dm15. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who tries to check the display content of the small display area Dm15 to understand whether the presentation mode has been switched based on the switching operation of the presentation mode to understand that the game is "on standby."

On the other hand, if the presentation mode can be switched immediately at the timing when the presentation mode switching operation is performed, the display screen shown in FIG. 735(b) is displayed. FIG. 735(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the normal state is set as the game state and the normal mode is set as the presentation mode, and the chance up mode is decided by the presentation custom operation during the first half of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation (before the reach is established).

As shown in FIG. 735(b), when the presentation mode is immediately switched based on executing a presentation mode switching operation, the auxiliary display area HR6a displays the text "Set Complete" as a notification to indicate that the presentation mode has been switched, and the small display area Dm15 displays the text "Chance Up Mode Setting" to indicate the switched presentation mode.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this 23rd control example, when a performance customization operation is executed while a special pattern variation is being executed, the timing of switching the performance mode is varied depending on the progress of the currently executing variation performance. Also, the timing of switching the performance mode is varied depending on the type of performance mode selected. In addition, the timing of switching the performance mode is varied depending on the content of the variation performance executed later.

In this way, when a custom effect operation is performed while the special symbol is changing, the timing of the change in effect mode can be varied depending on various factors, providing the player with innovative gameplay in which the player can predict the outcome of the currently executing change in effect by combining the timing of the change in effect mode with the content of the currently executing change in effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 736, the display contents displayed during the selection operation of the presentation mode in the presentation customization state will be described. FIG. 736(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the presentation mode is selected during a miss variation to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss.

The display example shown in FIG. 736(a) shows a state in which "Chance Up Mode" is set as the presentation mode, and "Normal Mode" is selected by operating the left button 600e after "Probability Change Notification Mode" has been selected by a presentation customization operation. Therefore, in FIG. 736(a), the words "Chance Up Mode Setting" are displayed in the small display area Dm15. Then, a left arrow LY is displayed in a manner indicating that the left button 600e has been operated, and the display area HR6 displays a part of the display mode indicating "Probability Change Notification Mode" (the display of "Notification Mode" in the figure) and a part of the display mode indicating "Normal Mode" (the display of "Normal" in the figure) as a display mode indicating that the selected presentation mode has switched from "Probability Change Notification Mode" to "Normal Mode". The state shown in FIG. 736(a) shows the display state in which the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is being scrolled to the left as a result of operating the left button 600e, and the display continues to scroll until "Normal mode" is displayed in the display area HR6.

Note that FIG. 736(a) shows an example of a display in which the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is scrolled leftward by operating the left button 600e during the performance customization state, but when a performance mode is selected by operating the right button 600c, a right arrow RY is displayed in the display mode to indicate that the right button 600c has been operated, and a display is executed in which the display mode of the display area HR6 is scrolled rightward.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, as shown in FIG. 735(a), the display area HR6 is configured to display only the display mode indicating the currently selected presentation mode, and the player is configured to be unable to grasp all of the presentation modes selectable in the current presentation customization state unless he or she operates the operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) to scroll the display mode displayed in the display area HR6. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 737, but in this 23rd control example, the types of presentation modes that can be selected are varied depending on the timing at which the presentation customization state is set.

This makes it easier for players who wish to play in various presentation modes to perform operations (operations of the middle button 600a) for setting presentation customization states at various times. This makes it easier for players to actively participate in games that require them to operate the operating means.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, in some cases where a custom presentation state is set during a jackpot variation that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a dedicated presentation mode (premium mode) that cannot be selected (is difficult to select) when a jackpot variation is not being executed can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the results of the special symbol lottery before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed based on the execution of a selection operation to select the presentation mode, so that a custom presentation state can be proactively set for players who want to know the results of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, when a presentation custom state is set, the display area HR6 is configured so that display modes other than the currently selected presentation mode are not displayed. By configuring in this way, since it is not possible to know what other presentation modes can be set simply by setting the presentation custom state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform operations to select a presentation mode (operation of the right button 600c and the left button 600e) in addition to performing operations to set the presentation custom state (operation of the middle button 600a). This makes it easier for the player to actively participate in games that involve operating the operating means.

As described above, in this 23rd control example, the display area HR6 is configured to display only the display mode for indicating one presentation mode, but without being limited to this, in addition to the display mode for indicating the selected presentation mode, it may be configured to display at least a portion of the display mode corresponding to the display area HR6 so that the player can grasp the presentation mode selected when the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated before operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e. This configuration makes it easier for the player to select the desired presentation mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 736(b), the content of the presentation when a presentation custom operation is performed in a state in which the "premium mode" can be selected will be described. FIG. 736(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a presentation mode is selected during a jackpot fluctuation to indicate that the result of a special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In this 23rd control example, when a presentation custom operation is performed during a jackpot fluctuation in which a "jackpot A" type jackpot in which a probability variable state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set after the jackpot game ends, the presentation mode "premium mode," which cannot be selected except during a jackpot fluctuation, can be selected.

Therefore, when a presentation customization operation (operation of the right button 600c and left button 600e in the presentation customization state) is performed in a state in which "premium mode" is selectable, a display mode corresponding to "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6. As described above, in this twenty-third control example, since only display modes for indicating the selected presentation mode are displayed in the display area HR6, the display mode corresponding to "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6 only when the player operates the operation means (right button 600c and left button 600e) in the presentation customization state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify a player who is performing a performance customization operation simply for the purpose of changing the performance mode of the results of the special pattern variation that is currently being performed, thereby providing a surprising performance. In addition, it is possible to have a player who wants to quickly understand the results of the currently being performed special pattern variation (the result of the special pattern lottery) proactively perform a performance customization operation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the player is not able to know whether or not the "Premium Mode" is selectable simply by setting the presentation custom state. Therefore, even if, for example, the player accidentally operates the middle button 600a while playing and the presentation custom state is set unintentionally, the display mode displayed based on the presentation custom state being set (the display mode displayed in the display area HR6) can be used to prevent the player from being notified of the results of the special pattern change that is currently being performed.

In the display example shown in FIG. 736(b), the display mode corresponding to the presentation mode displayed in display area HR6 only differs in the identification information (characters indicating the presentation mode) for indicating the corresponding presentation mode, and the display mode is otherwise the same; however, without being limited to this, the display mode corresponding to a presentation mode that is advantageous to the player (e.g., "premium mode") may be a display mode that is decorated to make it easier for the player to focus on than display modes corresponding to other presentation modes. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to visually inform the player that a presentation mode that is advantageous to the player is available for selection, and it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

Now, referring to FIG. 737, the selection range of presentation modes that can be selected by presentation customization operations will be described. FIG. 737(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of the selection range of presentation modes that can be set during a miss variation that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, and FIG. 737(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of the selection range of presentation modes that can be set during a jackpot variation that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 737(a), during a miss fluctuation, a normal selection range (normal presentation mode selection area) is set in which three types of presentation modes can be selected: "normal mode," "chance up mode," and "high probability announcement mode." As shown in FIG. 737(b), during a jackpot fluctuation, a special selection range (special presentation mode selection area) can be set in which four types of presentation modes can be selected: "normal mode," "chance up mode," "high probability announcement mode," and "premium mode."

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 of this 23rd control example has a performance customization information table 222wa, which specifies performance specification information corresponding to each performance mode and information indicating the selection order of the performance modes selected when the player executes a performance customization operation. The performance mode selection area shown in FIG. 737 is a schematic representation of the selection order of the performance modes specified in this performance customization information table 222wa.

In this 23rd control example, the type of selectable presentation mode is determined based on the game situation (whether or not the jackpot is changing) at the time when the player presses the middle button (decision button) 600a and the presentation customization state is set. When the player presses the middle button (decision button) 600a and the presentation customization state is set at a time when the special pattern is changing and a jackpot that will grant the player the most advantageous bonus (jackpot A with 10 rounds of jackpot play and a game state after the jackpot play ends in a probability change state) is being won, and the lottery for determining whether or not to make the "premium mode" selectable is won, the "premium mode" can be selected as the presentation mode.

When the selectable presentation modes are determined by the presentation customization operation, the presentation modes can be selected within the selection range according to the selection order defined in the presentation customization information table 222wa. Therefore, when the right button 600c is operated as a presentation customization operation during the special pattern variation period for indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery has been lost and that the player has won, the presentation modes are selected in the order of "probability change notification mode", "chance up mode", and "normal mode". When the right button 600c is further operated in a state where "normal mode" is selected, the "probability change notification mode" is selected in a rotary manner. By configuring in this way, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the presentation customization state, all of the selectable selection modes can be reliably selected, so that even players who find it troublesome to operate multiple operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) in the presentation customization state can reliably perform the presentation customization operation.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, when the presentation custom state is set, the display mode for indicating the currently set presentation mode is configured to be displayed first in the display area HR6. Therefore, for example, if the presentation custom state is set during a miss variation in which the "chance up mode" is set, the display mode of the "chance up mode" will be displayed in the display area HR6. Then, depending on the operation content of the right button 600c and the left button 600e, a presentation mode is selected according to the order shown in FIG. 737(a), and the display mode corresponding to the selected presentation mode is displayed in the display area HR6. With this configuration, the operation for changing the presentation mode can be performed based on the display mode displayed in the display area HR6, allowing the player to perform presentation customization operations in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, when the left button 600e is operated as a performance customization operation in a state where "Premium Mode" can be selected, the performance modes are selected in the following order: "Normal Mode", "Chance Up Mode", "Probability Change Notification Mode", and "Premium Mode". When "Premium Mode" is selected and the left button 600e is further operated, "Normal Mode" is selected in a rotary fashion. By configuring in this way, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the performance customization state, all of the selectable selection modes can be reliably selected, so that even players who find it troublesome to operate multiple operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) in the performance customization state can reliably execute the performance customization operation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 737, the 23rd control example is configured to have the player select from multiple presentation modes based on a predetermined selection order, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that when an operation to select a presentation mode is performed, one presentation mode can be selected randomly (in no particular order) from multiple selectable presentation modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the types of presentation modes that are currently selectable, and therefore it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the operating means more in order to understand whether or not "premium mode" is selectable.

Next, referring to FIG. 738, the content of the effect that is executed when the effect mode switching operation (effect customization operation) is performed (when the decision button 600a is operated) will be described. FIG. 738 is a diagram showing an example in which a notification effect (second notification effect) that notifies a jackpot win is executed when the effect mode switching operation is performed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 735(a), normally, when a custom effect operation is executed during the latter half of the variable effect period, the effect mode is not switched and "Standby" is displayed in the auxiliary display area HR6a until the variable effect currently being executed ends (until the special pattern change currently being executed is displayed as stopped). However, when a custom effect operation executed during the latter half of the variable effect period meets a predetermined condition, the effect mode can be switched while the variable effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 738.

Specifically, in the latter half of the variable presentation corresponding to the jackpot variation, if the "Chance Up Mode" is selected as the presentation mode to be switched to by the presentation customization operation, a predetermined condition is met, and the presentation mode can be switched while the variable presentation is being executed. In this case, "Set Complete" is displayed in the auxiliary display area HR6a as a display mode to indicate that the presentation mode has been switched, and the sound Ke1 of "Congratulations" is output from the speaker unit 308 connected to the audio output device 226 to indicate that a jackpot has been won.

In this way, by configuring the game so that a jackpot change can be notified by a custom effect operation executed while a special symbol is changing, it is possible to grant a bonus other than switching the effect mode depending on the timing of executing the custom effect operation, making it possible for the player to execute the custom effect operation at various times.

In the 23rd control example, in the latter half of the variable presentation corresponding to the jackpot variation, when the "Chance Up Mode" is selected as the presentation mode to be switched to by the presentation customization operation, the predetermined conditions for granting a bonus to the player are met, and the player is given a bonus informing them of the jackpot win by hearing the sound "Congratulations." However, the manner in which the jackpot win is not limited to this, and for example, the operation means used in the presentation customization operation (such as the decision button 600a) may be provided with a light-emitting means (such as an LED), and the operation means may be configured to emit light in a specific manner (such as rainbow colors) when the predetermined conditions are met.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to grant a bonus other than a bonus notifying a jackpot win as a bonus that is granted when a predetermined condition is met by executing a performance custom operation. For example, the system may be configured to grant a bonus notifying the currently set game state, or, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that has a setting function that allows different jackpot probabilities to be set (for details, see the 24th control example described below), grant a bonus suggesting the currently set value.

By configuring it in this way, in this 23rd control example, the specified condition could only be met during the jackpot fluctuation, but it is now possible to meet the specified condition in other cases as well, making it possible to award bonuses based on the performance customization operation at various times.

As explained above, the 23rd control example is configured to allow the player to select from a variety of presentation modes. This configuration can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, the expectation of winning when a presentation (preview presentation) is executed in the same presentation mode is varied depending on the selected presentation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute a game according to the game content desired.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when an operation (custom performance operation) for switching the presentation mode is performed during a jackpot fluctuation, a presentation mode that cannot be selected when an operation (custom performance operation) for switching the presentation mode is performed other than during a jackpot fluctuation is made selectable. In other words, when the timing for performing the custom performance operation satisfies a predetermined condition, a presentation mode that cannot be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is made selectable.

This configuration makes it easier for players to execute custom effect operations at various times, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In this 23rd control example, information on whether or not a jackpot change is in progress is used as the predetermined condition for varying the presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation, but without being limited to this, the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation may be different between a state in which a special pattern change is being executed and a state in which a special pattern change is not being executed, the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation may be different between a state in which the number of special pattern draws executed since the end of the previous jackpot game exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 500 times) and a state in which the number of special pattern draws has not been executed, and the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation may be different depending on the set game state.

The types of selectable presentation modes may also be varied depending on the history of previously set presentation modes. In this case, for example, presentation modes A, B, and C may be configured to be selectable in the initial state, and if presentation mode A is selected in this state, presentation modes A1, A2, and A3 may be configured to be selectable as the next selectable presentation modes. By configuring in this way, the selectable presentation modes can be varied depending on the history of presentation mode selection, so that various presentation modes can be set for a player who wishes to play in all presentation modes.

Next, referring to Figures 739 and 740, the contents of the in-progress hold effect, which is a change effect corresponding to the in-progress special pattern change, in which the reserved pattern display is made invisible using the change role Ym1, Ym2 and only the in-progress hold pattern is displayed, will be explained. Figure 739(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the in-progress hold effect has started and the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to hide part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and Figure 739(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to hide the entire display area (display area HR2) of the reserved pattern as the in-progress hold effect.

As described above, in this 23rd control example, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden when the presentation pattern (reach state) of the variable presentation currently being executed progresses (develops) into a presentation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. In other words, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden in order to clearly inform the player that the presentation being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a variable presentation to show the results of the currently executing special pattern variation.

Then, as the presentation mode for hiding the reserved symbols, a presentation mode for moving the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 is set in the same way as when the reserved change presentation is executed in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, and it is configured so that immediately after the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 are moved, it is difficult for the player to know whether a reserved change presentation for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols has been executed or a presentation for hiding the reserved symbols has been executed.

By configuring it in this way, players can enjoy predicting which effect will be the target when the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when a presentation mode is set in which the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to hide the reserved patterns as a variable presentation, if the reserved patterns are displayed in a display mode of three or more colors as the reserved pattern display and the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable presentation being executed is a jackpot win, the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are configured to be able to execute a presentation in which all reserved pattern displays are hidden and the display mode of the execution reserved pattern (execution pending pattern) corresponding to the special pattern change being executed is changed to a display mode (rainbow colors) indicating a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the effect of notifying the player of the lottery results for the special pattern change that is currently being performed in addition to the effect of simply hiding the reserved pattern display (the effect of moving the change role Ym1, Ym2), so that it is possible to execute an effect that is unexpected for the player, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When the pending performance begins, a movable operation is performed in which the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 move from the stored position to a movable position that covers part of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This pending performance is executed in conjunction with the timing at which the performance mode of the variable performance being executed switches from a first performance mode (e.g., normal reach mode) with a low probability of winning a jackpot to a second performance mode (e.g., super reach mode) with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the first performance mode. In other words, the movement of the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 by the pending performance makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is changing.

In the ongoing hold effect, the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 move to cover part of the display area HR2 in which the reserved symbols are displayed, similar to the reserved change effect in the 22nd control example described above, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 739(a). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the trigger for moving the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 is the reserved change effect or the ongoing hold effect.

The movable state of the change mechanism Ym1, Ym2 can be changed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 and the display mode. The display example shown in FIG. 739(a) shows a state in which four reserved symbols are displayed in the display area HR2, and the first reserved symbol hr1 is displayed in a display mode of "yellow", the second reserved symbol hr2 is displayed in a display mode of "blue", the third reserved symbol hr3 is displayed in a display mode of "green", and the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is displayed in a display mode of "red", that is, the first reserved symbol hr1 to the third reserved symbol hr3 are displayed in three different colors, and only the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is hidden by the change mechanism Ym2.

As the in-progress hold performance progresses, as shown in FIG. 739(b), the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 perform a moving operation to move to the second movable position that covers the entire display area HR2, and a decorative display (black darkening in the figure) corresponding to the movement of the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position is performed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, a performance is performed in which additional patterns corresponding to the display elements (elements showing the color of each reserved pattern) related to the display mode of the multiple reserved patterns (first reserved pattern hr1 to third reserved pattern hr3) that are hidden by the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 moving from the movable position to the second movable position are released toward the in-progress hold hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.

Figure 739 (b) shows an example of a performance in which the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2, and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2 are released from the display area HR2 and absorbed into the active reserved pattern hr0. As shown in Figure 739 (b), the display mode of the additional pattern released from the display area HR2 based on the movement of the change role Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position may be the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 as it is, or a display mode showing only specific elements (color information) constituting the display mode of the reserved pattern may be used. As shown in Figure 739 (b), the display area HR1 in which the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed is formed above the center of the display area HR2, and is provided above the position where the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 come into contact when they are moved to the second movable position. This makes it easier for players to understand that there is a relationship between the effect in which the pending execution effect is executed and the change role Ym1, Ym2 move to the second movable position, and the effect in which the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 (first reserved symbol hr1 to fourth reserved symbol hr4) are released and absorbed into the pending execution symbol hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.

Then, the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2, and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2 are absorbed into the active reserved pattern hr0, and as shown in FIG. 740, the display mode of the active reserved pattern hr0 changes from "white" to "rainbow", and the active reserved performance ends. The display mode of the active reserved pattern hr0 changes to "rainbow", so that the player can be notified that the active special pattern variation has resulted in a jackpot win. In addition, if the performance result of the active reserved performance is favorable to the player, a decorative mode corresponding to the performance result (in FIG. 740, a star display mode) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

The pending effect in progress is executed at a point before the variable effect corresponding to the currently executing special pattern change announces the result of the effect (the timing when the effect mode of the currently executing variable effect switches from a first effect mode (e.g., normal reach mode) with a low probability of winning a jackpot to a second effect mode (e.g., super reach mode) with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the first effect mode). Therefore, in FIG. 740, regardless of the result of the currently executing pending effect, the variable effect that was set in advance continues to be executed, and the secondary display area Ds displays "SP reach," which is a display mode for announcing that the effect mode has switched from normal reach to SP reach (super reach).

In other words, when a performance result favorable to the player (a performance result in which the performance result of the currently pending symbol hr0 changes to rainbow colors) is displayed as the performance result of the currently pending performance, the player can watch the variable performance knowing in advance that the performance result of the variable performance will be a performance result indicating a big win, so the player can play with peace of mind. Also, since it is possible to know in advance that the performance result of the variable performance will be a performance result indicating a big win, a performance mode with as low a chance of a big win as possible is set as the performance mode of the variable performance, so that the player can play while hoping that a performance result that is not often experienced will be announced (displayed).

When the in-progress hold effect shown in FIG. 740 ends, the change role Ym1, Ym2 move to the initial position, and the display area HR2 becomes visible to the player. In this case, the display mode (color) of the reserved symbols (first reserved symbol hr1 to fourth reserved symbol hr4) displayed before the in-progress hold effect is executed is all displayed in the default display mode (white). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily make the player think that the display mode (color) given by the reserved change effect executed for each reserved symbol was used for the in-progress hold effect, so it is possible to easily associate the reserved change effect for each reserved symbol with the in-progress hold effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 740, when the performance result of the in-progress hold effect is a performance result indicating a jackpot win, the in-progress hold effect continues until the third symbol indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, the in-progress hold effect ends.

As a result, the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved information used in the special pattern lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game can be temporarily set to the default (white) display mode. Therefore, even if the result of the special pattern lottery changes before and after the end of the jackpot game (the probability state of the special pattern switches), the display mode set by the reserved pattern change effect executed before the jackpot game continues to be displayed even after the end of the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the execution of a preview effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to Figures 741 to 743, we will explain the timing of execution of the performance custom operation during the special pattern variation period, among the execution timings of the performance custom operation in this 23rd control example, and the flow for setting the performance mode of the variation performance corresponding to the special pattern variation for which the performance custom operation was executed.

As described above, in this 23rd control example, the custom effect operation can be executed during the special pattern changing period, and the effect mode can be switched even during the special pattern changing period depending on the timing of executing the custom effect operation. Here, we explain the difference between when the effect mode can be switched during the special pattern changing period and when it cannot be switched.

First, referring to FIG. 741, the flow for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in response to the special symbol variation period will be explained. FIG. 741 is a diagram showing the flow for setting the variable presentation during the special symbol variation. In order to explain the basic flow for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, FIG. 741 shows the flow when no presentation customization operation is performed during the special symbol variation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 741(a), the "normal mode" is always set as the presentation mode during the corresponding special pattern change period. As shown in FIG. 741(b), at the start timing of the special pattern change with a change time of 30 seconds, the overall presentation pattern (presentation A) and the type (blue) of the chance up presentation (first half notice mode) executed in the first half period (10 seconds) are determined as the presentation mode of the corresponding change presentation, and the change presentation is executed in response to the start of the special pattern change. Then, as shown in FIG. 741(c), when 6 seconds have passed since the start of the change presentation (presentation A), a 2-second first half notice is executed, and 2 seconds have passed since the end of the first half notice (the timing of the first half period), that is, at the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the special pattern change, the type (blue) of the chance up presentation (second half notice mode) executed in the second half period (20 seconds) is determined.

In other words, in this 23rd control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to one special pattern variation is configured to be determined at multiple times. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to determine the presentation mode of at least a part of the variable presentation being executed according to the requirements that are met during the variable presentation period in which one variable presentation is being executed, making it easier to determine the presentation mode corresponding to the fulfillment of the requirements without delay.

In this 23rd control example, one variable performance is divided into two performance periods, a first half period and a second half period, and the mode (preview mode) of the preview performance executed in each performance period is determined at different times, but one variable performance may also be divided into three or more performance periods. In this way, the more a variable performance is divided into multiple performance periods, the easier it is to shorten the length of one performance period, and therefore the easier it is to determine the preview mode without delay according to the requirements established during the variable performance.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, the presentation pattern (presentation mode) of the variable presentation executed throughout one variable presentation period is determined at the timing when one variable presentation is executed, and the preview presentation mode (preview mode) executed during specific periods of the variable presentation period (the first preview period, which is two seconds after six seconds have elapsed since the variable presentation started, and the second preview period, which is two seconds after 28 seconds have elapsed since the variable presentation started) can be determined at different timings. By configuring in this way, the presentation pattern (presentation mode) executed throughout one variable presentation period can be continuously executed, while the preview presentation mode (preview mode) can be set at different timings, so that a presentation that does not feel strange to the player can be executed.

In the 23rd control example, for the performance period of the variable performance executed in response to one special pattern change, the performance pattern (performance mode) to be executed throughout the entire performance period is set in advance (at the start timing of the variable performance), and the performance mode (preview mode) of the preview performance executed within a specific period of the performance period is appropriately determined at different timings. However, without being limited to this, for the performance period of the variable performance executed in response to multiple special pattern changes, the performance pattern (performance mode) to be executed throughout the entire performance period may be set in advance (at the start timing of the variable performance), and the performance mode (preview mode) of the preview performance executed within a specific period of the performance period may be appropriately determined at different timings. Also, for a performance period in which multiple special pattern changes may be executed (for example, a performance period in which a state performance to indicate the set game state is executed), the performance pattern (for example, a background performance) to be executed throughout the entire performance period may be set in advance (at the timing when the game state is set), and the performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the variable performance) of the performance executed within a specific period of the performance period may be appropriately determined at different timings.

Next, referring to FIG. 742, the flow for setting a variable performance during a special chart change and the transition of the performance mode when a performance custom operation is performed in the first half of the variable performance will be explained. FIG. 742 is a diagram showing the flow for setting a variable performance during a special chart change and the transition of the performance mode when a performance custom operation is performed in the first half of the variable performance.

Compared to FIG. 741 described above, FIG. 742 differs in that a performance customization operation is executed during the first half of the variable performance, and the performance mode is switched during the variable performance period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 742(a), the "normal mode" is set as the performance mode at the time the corresponding special pattern change is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 742(b), at the start timing of the special pattern change with a change time of 30 seconds, the overall performance pattern (performance A) and the type (blue) of the chance up performance (first half notice mode) executed in the first half period (10 seconds) are determined as the performance mode of the corresponding variable performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 742(c), when 6 seconds have passed since the start of the variable performance (performance A), a 2-second first half notice is executed.

If a performance customization operation is performed during the first half of the variable performance period and "Chance Up Mode" is selected, a process is executed to determine the preview performance (second half preview mode) to be executed in the second half period before the first half period has elapsed. Figure 742 (b) shows an example in which (red) is determined as the second half preview mode at the time when the performance customization operation is performed. Since this second half preview mode (red) is a performance mode that can be executed when "Chance Up Mode" is set, as shown in Figure 742 (a), a display mode is displayed to indicate that the performance mode has switched from "Normal Mode" to "Chance Up Mode" at the time when the performance customization operation is performed.

On the other hand, in contrast to the flow in FIG. 742, if a performance customization operation is performed during the first half of the variable performance period and "Chance Up Mode" is selected, and the process of determining the preview performance (second half preview mode) to be executed during the executed second half period determines (blue) as the second half preview mode, this second half preview mode (blue) is a performance mode that cannot be executed when "Chance Up Mode" is set, so as shown in FIG. 743(a), at the time the performance customization operation is executed, "Normal Mode" continues to be displayed, and a display mode is displayed to indicate that the next variation will switch to "Chance Up Mode".

In other words, in this 23rd control example, when a performance customization operation is performed during the period in which a variable performance is being executed, the timing of notifying that the performance mode has been switched based on the performance customization operation is varied depending on the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period. Specifically, when a performance customization operation is performed, if the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period is a performance mode that matches the changed performance mode, the timing of notifying that the performance mode has been switched is configured to notify that the performance mode has been switched after the remaining period has elapsed if the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period is a performance mode that does not match the changed performance mode, or is a performance mode that is commonly likely to be executed regardless of the set performance mode.

By configuring in this way, when a performance customization operation is executed during a variable performance, the player can be interested in the timing at which the performance mode will be switched based on the performance customization operation. Also, in this 23rd control example, the timing of notifying that the performance mode has been switched by the performance customization operation is varied depending on the performance state of the preview performance executed after the performance customization operation is executed. For example, when a "chance up mode" is set as a performance mode that can notify that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot simply by executing a preview performance by a performance customization operation, it is possible to easily make the player predict that there is a high possibility that the variable performance being executed is a performance result indicating a jackpot win simply by being notified that the performance mode has been switched during the variable performance period.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 23rd control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 744 to Fig. 747. The pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 744, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 23rd control example will be described. FIG. 744 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 744, this 23rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that a performance custom information table 222wa and a second half preview performance selection table 222wb have been added, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The performance customization information table 222wa is a data table that specifies information corresponding to each performance mode that the player can select, and is referenced when reading out information corresponding to the determined (set) performance mode when the performance mode is determined (set) by a performance customization operation. The information read out here is stored in the custom information storage area 223wb, which will be described later, and is referenced when determining the performance mode of the variable performance.

Now, with reference to FIG. 745, the contents defined in the effect customization information table 222wa will be explained. FIG. 745 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect customization information table 222wa. As shown in FIG. 745, the effect customization information table 222wa defines the selection conditions that can be selected by effect customization operations for four types of customization (effect mode types) that can be selected by the player, and the setting contents (defined contents) of the effect mode when selected.

In this 23rd control example, a maximum of four different presentation mode types (custom types) can be selected by executing a presentation customization operation, and the frequency of the presentation (preview presentation, advance notice presentation, etc.) and the expectation of winning can be varied depending on the selected presentation mode type (custom type).

More specifically, the setting conditions for the presentation mode are specified for each presentation mode type (custom type) so that the frequency of execution of the hold change presentation, the frequency of execution of the probability change notification presentation, and the frequency of execution of the second half preview presentation differ depending on the presentation mode type (custom type).

As shown in FIG. 745, for the customization type (presentation mode type) "normal mode," the selection condition is set to "always." In other words, "normal mode" is specified as a customization type (presentation mode type) that is always selectable by the presentation customization operation. In addition, the execution frequency of the hold change presentation is set to "medium," the execution frequency of the probability change notification is set to "medium," and the execution frequency of the second half preview presentation is set to "medium." In other words, when "normal mode" is selected, various presentations are configured to be executed at the normal frequency.

The selection condition for the custom type (presentation mode type) "Chance Up Mode" is set to "Always." In other words, "Chance Up Mode" is set as a custom type (presentation mode type) that is always selectable by the presentation customization operation. The execution frequency of the hold change presentation is set to "low," the execution frequency of the probability change notification is set to "medium," and the execution frequency of the second half preview presentation is set to "low." In other words, when "Chance Up Mode" is selected, the execution frequency of the hold change presentation and the second half preview presentation is set to be lower than when "Normal Mode" is selected.

In this 23rd control example, the lower the execution frequency of the various effects is set, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot when they are executed. In other words, the execution frequency of the various effects is changed by changing the selection ratio of the effect mode when a miss is won, without changing the selection ratio for selecting the effect mode when a jackpot is won. Therefore, when "Chance Up Mode" is selected over "Normal Mode", the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased when a reserve change effect or a second half preview effect is executed.

Next, for the custom type (presentation mode type) "Probability change announcement mode", "Always" is specified as the selection condition. In other words, "Probability change announcement mode" is specified as a custom type (presentation mode type) that is always selectable by the presentation customization operation. Also, the execution frequency of the hold change effect is "medium", the execution frequency of the probability change announcement is "high", and the execution frequency of the second half notice effect is "medium". In other words, when "Probability change announcement mode" is selected, the hold change effect and the second half notice effect are executed with the same frequency as "Normal mode", and the execution frequency of the probability change announcement is increased.

Finally, for the customization type (presentation mode type) "Premium Mode," the selection condition is stipulated as "part of the jackpot fluctuation." In other words, "Premium Mode" is stipulated as a customization type (presentation mode type) that can be selected when a presentation customization operation is executed during part of the jackpot fluctuation.

When this "Premium Mode" is selected, a special dedicated effect (celebratory effect) is executed using the period until the jackpot fluctuation is stopped and displayed, regardless of the remaining period of the currently executing variable effect or the content of the already set effect mode. Therefore, the hold change effect and the second half notice effect are not executed, and the execution frequency of the hold change effect is set to "-", and the execution frequency of the second half notice effect is set to "-". In addition, since the "Premium Mode" is configured to be selectable only when the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is set, which sets a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, the special dedicated effect (celebratory effect) executed when the "Premium Mode" is selected has a high probability state notification function to indicate that a high probability state is set, and therefore a "confirmed notification" is specified as the high probability state notification.

In the present 23rd control example, the above-mentioned four types of presentation modes are selectable, but five or more types of presentation modes may be selectable by the player. In this case, the selectable presentation mode may be, for example, a presentation mode (silent mode) in which a presentation (preview presentation) for suggesting the expectation of winning a jackpot is not executed (is difficult to execute). By providing such a presentation mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in advance whether or not he will win a jackpot, so that the player can play the game while always expecting to win a jackpot. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing a presentation that can gradually suggest the expectation of winning a jackpot by gradually changing the display mode of a specific identification information, it may be configured to be able to set a presentation mode (happening mode) in which the display mode for gradually indicating the expectation of winning a jackpot is switched. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a reserved change effect that can suggest to a player the likelihood of winning a jackpot by gradually changing the color of reserved symbols, while normally the likelihood of winning a jackpot increases as the colors of reserved symbols increase in the order of "blue → green → red → rainbow," it is preferable to set the above-mentioned happening mode so that the likelihood of winning a jackpot increases in the order of "rainbow → red → green → blue."

By configuring it in this way, the relationship between the display mode of the identification information and the probability of winning the jackpot can be changed depending on the presentation mode that is set, so that a presentation that would normally be more likely to result in a miss becomes a presentation that is more likely to result in a jackpot, and a presentation that would normally be more likely to result in a miss becomes a presentation that is more likely to result in a miss. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

The second half preview performance selection table 222wb is a data table referenced when determining the performance mode (preview mode) of the second half preview executed in the second half period of the variable performance, and different preview modes are defined corresponding to the performance pattern of the target variable performance. It is referenced to determine the performance mode of the second half preview performance when it is determined that the first half period of the variable performance has ended (F3902: Yes in FIG. 755) in the variable performance update process 23 (see F2161 in FIG. 754). It is also referenced to determine the performance mode of the second half preview performance when a performance customization operation is performed and the performance mode is switched during the first half period of the variable performance (F3709: Yes in FIG. 752).

Now, referring to FIG. 746, the contents stipulated in the second half preview performance selection table 222wb will be explained. FIG. 746 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second half preview performance selection table 222wb. As shown in FIG. 746, the second half preview performance selection table 222wb stipulates different performance modes (preview modes) of the second half preview performance that correspond to the currently set custom type (performance mode type), the hit/miss determination result (the lottery result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the target variable performance), the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf, and the executed performance (the performance pattern of the target variable performance).

As shown in FIG. 746, there are two presentation patterns executed as variable presentations: "Performance A" and "Performance B." The number of preview presentations executed in the latter half of the variable presentation period is varied depending on the presentation pattern of the variable presentation executed. Specifically, when "Performance A" is set as the presentation pattern, one preview presentation can be executed in the latter half of the period, and when "Performance B" is set, two preview presentations can be executed in the latter half of the period. By configuring in this way, the number of preview presentations executed in the latter half of the period can be varied depending on the presentation pattern of the variable presentation executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Specifically, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to "normal mode" or "probable change announcement mode," that is, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to a "medium" execution frequency of the second half notice presentation, and the hit/miss judgment result is "hit," if the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "presentation A," then the second half first notice "blue" is specified for the range of the acquired first presentation counter 223vf from "0 to 39," the second half first notice "green" is specified for the range of "40 to 69," and the second half first notice "red" is specified for the range of "70 to 98." If the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "presentation B," then the second half first notice "blue" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of the acquired first presentation counter 223vf from "0 to 39," the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "green" are specified for the range of "40 to 69," and the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of "70 to 98."

In addition, if the hit/miss judgment result is "miss", if the performance pattern of the variable performance being executed is "performance A", then the second half first notice "blue" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0-39", the second half first notice "green" is specified for the range of "40-69", and the second half first notice "red" is specified for the range of "70-98", and if the performance pattern of the variable performance being executed is "performance B", then the second half first notice "blue" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0-39", the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "green" are specified for the range of "40-69", and the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of "70-98".

Here, we will explain the types of preview modes defined in the second half preview performance selection table 222wb. As shown in Figure 746, in this 23rd control example, the expectation of winning a jackpot (win) varies depending on the type of preview mode, with the expectation of winning increasing in the order of "blue," "green," and "red."

Specifically, in the first second half preview when "Presentation A" is being executed as the presentation pattern, the preview pattern "blue" is selected at a rate of 40/90 when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" and 30/99 when it is a "miss", the preview pattern "green" is selected at a rate of 30/90 when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" and 9/99 when it is a "miss", and the preview pattern "red" is selected at a rate of 29/90 when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" and is not selected when it is a "miss".

In other words, by making the selection ratio of each preview pattern when a winning combination is reached significantly different from the selection ratio of each preview pattern when a losing combination is reached, the expectation of winning a combination is made different when each preview pattern is set, so that the "blue" preview pattern has the lowest expectation of winning a combination, followed by the "green" preview pattern and the "red" preview pattern.

The preview mode "red" is configured to be selected only when a winning combination is achieved, in contrast to the "blue" and "green" preview modes. By configuring it in this way, when the "normal mode" or "probability change notification mode" is set as the presentation mode type, the latter half of the preview presentation of various preview modes is easily executed regardless of whether the winning/losing judgment result is a "win" or a "miss," and a presentation can be provided that prevents the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

On the other hand, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to "Chance Up Mode", that is, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to "Low" execution frequency of the second half preview effect, and the hit/miss judgment result is "Hit", if the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "Presentation A", then for the acquired value of the first presentation counter 223vf in the range of "0-59", the second half first preview "None" is specified, and for the range of "60-98", the second half first preview "Red" is specified. If the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "Presentation B", then for the acquired value of the first presentation counter 223vf in the range of "0-59", the second half first preview "None" and the second half second preview "None" are specified, for the range of "60-79", the second half first preview "None" and the second half second preview "Red" are specified, and for the range of "80-98", the second half first preview "Red" and the second half second preview "Red" are specified.

In addition, if the hit/miss judgment result is "miss", if the performance pattern of the variable performance currently being executed is "Performance A", then for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 94", "none" for the second half first notice is specified, and for the range of "95 to 98", "red" for the second half first notice is specified, and if the performance pattern of the variable performance currently being executed is "Performance B", then for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 94", "none" for the second half first notice and "none" for the second half second notice are specified, and for the range of "95 to 98", "none" for the second half first notice and "red" for the second half second notice are specified.

In other words, when "Chance Up Mode" is set, it is more difficult for the second half preview performance to be executed (the preview mode is more difficult to set) than when "Normal Mode" or "Probable Win Announcement Mode" is set, and it is possible to increase the expectation of winning at the point when the second half preview performance is executed (the preview mode is set). This makes it easier for players to quickly predict whether or not they will win a jackpot.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 746, in the "normal mode" and "probability change announcement mode" in which the latter half announcement performance is executed in various announcement modes, the announcement mode "red" is set only when a winning combination is achieved, and in the "chance up mode" in which the latter half announcement performance is executed only in a specific announcement mode, the announcement mode "red" is set even when a winning combination is not achieved. In other words, when the "normal mode" and "probability change announcement mode" are set, the expectation of a winning combination is low just by executing the latter half announcement performance (announcement mode is set), and the expectation of a winning combination is high when a specific announcement mode "red" is set, whereas when the "chance up mode" is set, the expectation of a winning combination is high just by executing the latter half announcement performance (announcement mode is set), and the specific announcement mode "red" is set in some cases in which a losing combination is achieved.

By configuring it in this way, the focus point for the second half preview performance can be made different depending on the type of performance mode (custom type) that is set, making it easier for players to play in various types of performance modes (custom types).

Next, when "Premium Mode" is set as the custom type (presentation mode type), that is, when a jackpot is fluctuating, the notification pattern "rainbow" is always set for the second half notice effect that may be executed, regardless of whether the presentation pattern of the currently executing fluctuating presentation is "Presentation A" or "Presentation B." In other words, as described above, "Premium Mode" is a custom type (presentation mode type) that can be selected only during a jackpot fluctuating in which the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is set, in which a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and therefore, when "Premium Mode" is selected, the player is notified that a jackpot is fluctuating. Therefore, when a second half notice effect is set after "Premium Mode" is set, the special notification pattern "rainbow" is always set to indicate that a jackpot has been won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players who know that they will win a jackpot because "Premium Mode" has been set from being confused and thinking that they haven't won the jackpot because the latter half of the preview performance is executed in a preview mode (e.g., "blue" or "green") that indicates the likelihood of winning the jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 747, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 23rd control example will be described. FIG. 747 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 23rd control example. As shown in FIG. 747, this 23rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it adds a performance customization in progress flag 223wa, a custom information storage area 223wb, a mode change waiting flag 223wc, a second half preview set flag 223wd, and a second half preview information storage area 223we. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The effect customization flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that the player is performing an effect customization operation to change the effect mode type, and is set to ON while the effect customization operation is being performed. This effect customization flag 223wa is set to ON when the player operates (presses) the decision button (middle button) 600a without performing a volume adjustment operation or a light adjustment operation (environment adjustment operation) to set a state in which the effect mode type can be selected (effect customization state) (see F3806 in FIG. 753), and is set to OFF when the decision button (middle button) 600a is operated to determine the effect mode type during the effect customization state (see F3707 in FIG. 752).

In this way, by providing the effect customization flag 223wa that can determine whether the effect is in a customization state, the content of the control process when the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated can be made to differ depending on the setting status of the effect customization flag 223wa. Specifically, when the effect customization flag 223wa is set to ON, i.e., when the effect is in a customization state, a selection control that can select the type of effect mode is executed based on the operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e, and when the effect customization flag 223wa is set to OFF, i.e., when the effect is not in a customization state, a selection control that can select the light intensity level is executed based on the operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute different selection controls using the same operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e), so in a pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to execute operations to change various gaming environments (light level, volume level, presentation mode, etc.), the types of operating means can be reduced compared to when dedicated operating means are provided for each change operation. This makes it easier to secure an area for providing operating means. Also, by reducing the types of operating means provided in the same area, it becomes possible to design one operating means (push button) to be larger, making it easier to provide operating means that are easy for players to operate.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the change state (light intensity adjustment operation state, presentation customization state) for changing each gaming environment is configured to be terminated by the player operating the decision button (middle button) 600a. In other words, each change state can be terminated at the stage where the player has decided on the gaming environment of his choice. Therefore, when each change state is set, the period during which the change state is set can be shortened compared to when control is executed to terminate the change state set based on the elapsed time, making it easier to change between multiple types of gaming environments in a short period of time.

The custom information storage area 223wb is a storage area in which information indicating the type of presentation mode (custom type) selected by the presentation customization operation is temporarily stored, and each time the player operates the left and right buttons (600c, 600e) during the presentation customization state to select a play mode, information indicating the selected play mode is stored. The information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (information indicating the selected presentation mode) is referenced when determining the presentation style of the variable presentation.

The information stored in this custom information storage area 223wb is cleared when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the initial information corresponding to "normal mode" is stored by the start-up process executed when the power supply is started. Therefore, in the initial state when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, "normal mode" is set as the presentation mode type.

By configuring it in this way, players who are not interested in changing the presentation mode can play the pachinko machine 10 using a presentation mode in which various presentations are executed evenly, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

The mode change waiting flag 223wc is a flag that indicates the period from when a performance customization operation is executed during a performance customization state, when a performance mode different from the current state is determined, until a display mode indicating that the performance mode has actually been switched is displayed. It is configured to be set to on when a performance mode different from the current state is determined, and to remain on until a display mode indicating that the performance mode has actually been switched is displayed.

In this 23rd control example, when the mode change waiting flag 223wc is set to on, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a "waiting" image, which is waiting for the conditions for changing the presentation mode to be met. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand whether the presentation mode has not been switched despite the presentation customization operation being performed normally, or whether the presentation customization operation has not been performed normally at all and the presentation mode has not been switched.

The second half preview setting flag 223wd is a flag for indicating that the presentation mode of the second half preview performance to be executed in the second half of the variable performance has been determined, and is set to on when the variable performance is being executed and the presentation mode of the second half preview performance is determined based on the execution of a presentation custom operation before the first half of the variable performance has elapsed. The setting status is then determined during the first half of the variable performance, and if it is determined that it is not set to on, the presentation mode of the second half preview performance will be determined when the first half of the variable performance has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on, the process of determining the presentation mode of the second half preview performance when the first half of the variable performance has elapsed is skipped.

In the 23rd control example, the multiple performance modes set as one variable performance (the variable performance set in response to one special pattern variation) are not all determined at one timing (for example, the start timing of the variable performance), but some of the performance modes can be determined after the variable performance is executed. Specifically, the execution period of one variable performance is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the performance mode of the notice performance (second half notice performance) executed in the second half period is determined when the first half period has elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the performance mode corresponding to various events (for example, a change operation of the performance mode, acquisition of a new special pattern reservation, etc.) that occurred during the first half period of the variable performance as the performance mode of the second half notice performance, so that when various events (for example, a change operation of the performance mode, acquisition of a new special pattern reservation, etc.) occur during the variable performance, it is easier to quickly determine the performance mode corresponding to the event that occurred (during the variable performance execution period) compared to when all of the multiple performance modes set as one variable performance are determined at the start timing of the variable performance.

Furthermore, if the presentation mode is changed by executing a presentation customization operation before the first half of the variable presentation period has elapsed, the presentation mode of the second half notice presentation can be determined based on the changed presentation mode at that time. If it is determined that the presentation mode of the second half notice presentation matches the content of the changed presentation mode, a display mode ("set complete") is displayed to indicate that the presentation mode has been switched at the time the presentation customization operation is executed, and if it is determined that the presentation mode of the second half notice presentation does not match the content of the changed presentation mode, a display mode ("waiting") is displayed to indicate that the presentation mode is waiting to be switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to immediately execute the presentation mode switching display for a player who executed a presentation customization operation during the variable presentation period, without making the player wait until the variable presentation being executed ends for the presentation mode to be switched. Furthermore, immediately after the presentation mode switching display is executed, the notice presentation (second half notice presentation) is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the switched (changed) presentation mode, making it easier for the player to realize that the presentation mode has been switched.

In the 23rd control example, when a performance customization operation is performed during the first half of the variable performance period, a process is executed to determine the performance mode based on the changed performance mode for preview performances (second half preview performances) that are executed during the variable performance period and for which the performance mode (preview mode) has not been determined. However, without being limited to this, for example, at the start timing of the variable performance, the performance mode (preview mode) of various preview performances executed during the variable performance period is determined, and at the time when an operation to switch the performance mode is executed by the performance customization operation, the content of the performance mode (preview mode) that has been set for the preview performance that has not yet been executed is determined, and if the content of the determined performance mode (preview mode) matches the changed performance mode, a display for switching the performance mode is executed, and if they do not match, a standby display for switching the performance mode is executed.

In other words, it is preferable to configure the display to accept the presentation mode change only when the presentation style of the pre-set preview presentation matches the content of the presentation mode set based on the presentation customization operation. By configuring it in this way, immediately after the presentation mode switching display is executed, the preview presentation (second half preview presentation) is executed in the presentation style corresponding to the switched (changed) presentation mode, making it easier for the player to realize that the presentation mode has been switched.

The second half preview information storage area 223we is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the presentation mode of the second half preview performance determined during the first half of the variable performance period, and when a performance customization operation is executed during the first half and the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview performance is determined before the first half period has elapsed, information indicating the determined presentation mode (preview mode) is stored (see F3711 in FIG. 752). Then, when the first half of the variable performance period has elapsed and the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview performance is set, if it is determined that the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview performance has already been determined (F3903: Yes in FIG. 755), the information stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we is read out, and the presentation mode (preview mode) based on the read information is set (F3905 in FIG. 755).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 748 to Fig. 755, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 23rd control example, which differ from the above-mentioned 22nd control example, will be described. As described above, this 23rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it is configured to be able to select a plurality of performance modes with different winning expectation rates for the preview performance to be executed, and in that it is configured to be able to execute a performance in which the reserved pattern is not displayed (execution pending performance), and in that the control process related to the difference is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, it differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example.

Specifically, the difference is that the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 23 (see F3159 in FIG. 748) is executed instead of the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 22 (see F3109 in FIG. 730), the frame button input monitoring/performance process 23 (see F2137 in FIG. 750) is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731), the decision button operation process 23 (see F3332 in FIG. 751) is executed instead of the decision button operation process 22 (see F3315 in FIG. 732), and the performance update process 23 (see F2161 in FIG. 754) is executed instead of the performance update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734); otherwise, the control process contents are the same. The same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 748, the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 23 (F3159) will be described. FIG. 748 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 23 (F3159). As shown in FIG. 748, in this 23rd control example, when it is determined that there is no information indicating a pending change scenario in the pending performance information storage area 223vl (F3201: No), the execution pending change performance setting process 23 (F3251) is executed to set an execution pending change performance that changes the display mode of the execution pending pattern (execution pending hr0 displayed in the display area HR1 of FIG. 739). The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 749, the processing contents of the ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 (F3251) will be explained. FIG. 749 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 (F3251). In this ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 (F3251), processing is executed to set the presentation mode of the ongoing hold presentation.

When the ongoing pending change performance setting process 23 (F3251) is executed, it is first determined whether the performance pattern of the current variable performance is a movable performance that moves the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 (F3601). If it is determined that it is a movable performance (F3601: Yes), the information stored in the pending performance information storage area 223vl is read (F3602) and it is determined whether the read information contains information indicating a pending change scenario, that is, whether there is a pending pattern that will trigger the execution of a pending change performance among the pending patterns that have been acquired (F3603).

If it is determined in the process of F3603 that there is no information indicating a reserved change scenario (F3603: No), it is then determined whether the reserved patterns that have been acquired (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) are displayed in a display mode of three or more colors (F3604). In the process of F3604, the display mode (color) of the displayed reserved pattern is determined based on the information indicating the display mode of each reserved pattern (reserved color information) stored in the reserved information storage area 223vl.

If it is determined in the process of F3604 that three or more colors of reserved patterns are displayed (F3604: Yes), it is then determined whether the special pattern change corresponding to this change performance is a jackpot change (F3605), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot change (F3605: Yes), a display change pattern command for indicating the pending change performance in progress is set (F3606), reel operation scenario 4 is determined (F3607), a reel operation command indicating the determined reel operation scenario is set (F3608), and this process ends.

Here, in the process of F3605, it is determined whether the current variation presentation is a variation presentation corresponding to a jackpot variation based on the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. In other words, the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is set with information including at least information indicating the variation time of the special pattern variation and information indicating the result of the special pattern lottery as the variation pattern of the current special pattern variation.

In this 23rd control example, as in the 22nd control example described above, in order to prevent the player from knowing whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot based on the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, the same length of fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) can be set regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern command is configured to include information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery in addition to the information indicating the currently set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). However, without being limited to this, for example, in a case where the result of the special pattern lottery can be determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the length of the set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), that is, in a case where a different length of fluctuation time is set for a jackpot win and a miss win in the special pattern lottery, there is no need to separately set information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and it is sufficient to configure the fluctuation pattern command to include only information indicating the length of the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the special pattern fluctuation. In this case, the variable time (variation pattern) with different lengths set based on the results of the special pattern lottery can be configured so that the lengths of the various variable patterns set when a losing win are slightly different (to the extent that the player finds it difficult to tell the difference) from the various variable patterns set when a jackpot is won. For example, if the variable pattern that can be set when a jackpot is won has a variable time of 60 seconds, the variable pattern that can be set when a losing win has a variable time of 60.5 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, simply by including information in the fluctuation pattern command to indicate the set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to easily determine whether the currently set fluctuation performance is a fluctuation performance executed in response to a special pattern fluctuation that has resulted in a jackpot win, or a fluctuation performance executed in response to a special pattern fluctuation that has not resulted in a jackpot win (a miss win), and it becomes possible to make it difficult for players to notice the difference in the set fluctuation pattern (difference in fluctuation time).

In addition, since it is possible to set the fluctuation time to be approximately the same length for the big win fluctuation and the miss fluctuation, it is possible to easily execute the same fluctuation performance except for the difference in the performance results between the fluctuation performance executed during the big win fluctuation and the fluctuation performance executed during the miss fluctuation.

Here, we will explain the contents of the reel operation scenario (reel operation scenario 4) set in the pending change performance setting process 23 (F3251) explained in Fig. 749. This reel operation scenario is a scenario for operating the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 in a predetermined manner, similar to the 22nd control example described above, and is predefined in the operation scenario 23 table 222wf. In addition, in the operation scenario 23 table 222wf, in addition to the role operation scenario 1 to role operation scenario 3, which have the same contents as the 22nd control example described above, information corresponding to role operation scenario 4 that can be selected during the ongoing pending change performance is specified. When role operation scenario 4 is set, first, the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to a first specific position that hides all but three specific reserved patterns (three-color reserved patterns) among the multiple (maximum four) reserved patterns displayed in the display area HR2 (see FIG. 739(a)), and then the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to a second specific position that hides all reserved patterns (first reserved pattern to fourth reserved pattern) displayed in the display area HR2 (see FIG. 739(b)), and then the change role Ym1, Ym2 are controlled to move to the initial position (storage position).

When the pending-in-progress performance is executed, the pending patterns are hidden on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the movable state of the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 corresponding to the above-mentioned part operation scenario 4, and a performance is executed in which the display mode of the pending patterns in progress is changed (see Figures 739 and 740).

In addition, in this 23rd control example, a moving effect is executed in which the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to a position where the display area HR2 of the reserved pattern becomes difficult to see, and a performance is executed in which the display mode of the reserved pattern being executed is changed using the display mode of the reserved pattern being displayed in the display area HR2 at the timing when the reserved pattern being displayed in the display area HR2 becomes difficult to see due to the change role Ym1, Ym2.By doing so, the reserved pattern does not simply become difficult to see due to the movement of the change role Ym1, Ym2, but the player can be made to think that the change role Ym1, Ym2 have been moved to change the reserved pattern being executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Here, in the 23rd control example, the change role Ym1, Ym2 is moved to a position where the display area HR2 of the reserved pattern is difficult to see, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change role Ym1, Ym2 may be moved to the variable display position of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to indicate to the player that there is a high expectation that the currently active special pattern will be a winning combination. In this case, in addition to the display area HR2 where the reserved patterns are displayed, the display area HR1 where the currently active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed is also difficult to see due to the moved change role Ym1, Ym2, which causes a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to predict the result of the currently active special pattern lottery, including the display mode of the currently active reserved pattern.

In this case, the display position of the pending symbol (the position where the display area HR1 is formed) can be changed in response to the execution of the movable performance of the change parts Ym1 and Ym2, for example, the display area HR1 can be formed outside the movable areas of the change parts Ym1 and Ym2. This allows the pending symbol to be reliably viewed even when the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are in a movable state, making it easier for the player to predict the result of the special symbol lottery being executed.

However, when the above-mentioned configuration is used, that is, when the position of the display area HR1 in which the pending execution pattern is displayed is changed while the pending execution pattern is being displayed, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the pending pattern displayed in the changed display area HR1 is the pending execution pattern or the pending pattern before execution. In other words, when the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed in a "white" display mode and the first reserved pattern hr1 is also displayed in a "white" display mode, if the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved and the display area HR2 in which the first reserved pattern hr1 is displayed and the display area HR1 in which the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed are covered by the change parts Ym1 and Ym2, the display area HR2 is hidden and the display area HR1 is formed in a different display position (a display position that does not overlap with the moving change parts Ym1 and Ym2), and the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed in a "white" display mode, the first reserved pattern hr1 is hidden in conjunction with the movement of the change parts Ym1 and Ym2, so there is a problem in that the player cannot immediately tell whether the reserved pattern in the "white" display mode displayed is the active reserved pattern hr0 or the first reserved pattern hr1.

In this case, therefore, it is advisable to set a presentation mode indicating that the reserved patterns (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) displayed in the display area HR2 will be hidden in correspondence with the timing when the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display area HR2, and set a presentation mode indicating that the position of the display area HR1 will move in correspondence with the timing when the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display area HR1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand whether the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved pattern currently being executed or a reserved pattern before execution, even after the display position of the reserved pattern has been moved.

Next, referring to FIG. 750, the processing contents of the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 (F2137) will be described. FIG. 750 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 (F2137). As shown in FIG. 750, the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 (F2137) differs from the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) of the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that a process related to a performance custom operation (performance custom selection) for selecting a performance mode is added, and in that a decision button operation processing 23 (F3332) is executed instead of the decision button operation processing 22 (F3315) executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is pressed. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/performance process 23 (F2137) is executed, first, the performance custom selection process 23 is executed (F3331), and when the processing of F3331 is completed, the processing of F3301 to F3314, which is the same as the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731), is executed. Then, in the processing of F3314, if it is determined that the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), the decision button operation process 23 is executed (F3332), F3310 is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of F3314 that the decision button (middle button) 600a has not been operated (F3314: No), the processing of F3316 (effect button operation processing 22) is executed, which is the same as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) of the 22nd control example described above, and then the processing of F3310 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331) will be described with reference to FIG. 751. FIG. 751 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331). In this performance customization selection process 23 (F3331), processing is executed to select a performance mode based on the operation contents of the operating means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e) during the performance customization state.

When the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331) is executed, first it is determined whether the performance customization in progress flag 223wa is set to on (F3701). If it is determined that it is not set to on, i.e., if it is determined that the performance is not in a customization state (F3701: No), the entire processing of the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331) is skipped and this processing is terminated in order to execute other selection control (e.g., light intensity adjustment) rather than the selection control of the performance mode by operating the operation means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F3701 that the performance customization in progress flag 223wa is set to on (F3701: Yes), it is then determined whether the right button 600c or the left button 600e has been operated (F3702), and if it is determined that an operation has been performed (F3702: Yes), the selected performance mode is updated to correspond to the determined operation content (F3703), information indicating the updated performance mode is stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (F3704), a display command indicating the updated performance mode is set (F3705), and the processing proceeds to F3706.

The display mode (display mode for indicating the selected presentation mode) to be displayed in the display area HR6 (see FIG. 735(a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display area 81 is determined in accordance with the display command set in the processing of F3705. Note that in this state, presentation mode change candidates are simply displayed in the display area HR6, and the presentation mode after the change has not been determined by the presentation customization operation. In this state, when the player presses the determination button (middle button) 600a, a determination process is executed to determine the presentation mode corresponding to the display mode displayed in the display area HR6.

On the other hand, in the process of F3702, if it is determined that there has been no operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e (F3702: No), then it is determined whether the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated (F3706). If it is determined that the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated, that is, if an operation to determine the changed presentation mode in the presentation customization state has been performed (F3706: Yes), the presentation customization flag 223wa is set to off (F3707), and it is determined whether the special pattern is currently changing (special pattern is changing) (F3708). If it is determined that the special pattern is currently changing (F3708: Yes), it is determined whether the current period is the first half of the change period (the first half of the changing presentation period) (F3709).

If it is determined in the processing of F3709 that it is the first half of the variable period (F3709: Yes), the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation is determined by referring to the second half preview presentation selection table 222wb based on the presentation mode corresponding to the information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (the presentation mode displayed in the display area HR6) (F3710), and information indicating the determined presentation mode is stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we (F3711).

As explained with reference to FIG. 746, the second half preview performance selection table 222wb also specifies the content (shown as "none" in the figure) indicating that the second half preview performance will not be executed, and is configured so that if "none" is selected, the second half preview performance will not be executed. Therefore, in the processing of F3710, a process is performed to determine whether or not the second half preview performance will be executed, and if so, the performance mode (preview mode) if it will be executed. Then, in the processing of F3711, the processing result of F3710, i.e., information indicating whether or not the second half preview performance will be executed, and the performance mode to be set as the second half preview performance, is stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we. In other words, in the processing of F3711, information indicating that the second half preview performance will not be executed is also stored.

After completing the processing of F3711, the second half preview setting flag 223wd is set to on (F3712), and it is determined whether the presentation style of the second half preview presentation determined in the processing of F3710 matches the type of presentation mode after the update (F3713). If it is determined that they match (F3713: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the presentation mode will be changed (F3719), and this processing is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of F3713 that the mode is not compatible (F3713: No), a display command is set to indicate that the presentation mode will be changed from the next change (after the currently executing special pattern change is stopped and displayed) (F3714), the mode change standby flag 223wc is set to ON (F3715), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of F3709, if it is determined that the current period is not the first half of the fluctuation period, i.e., that the current period is the second half of the fluctuation period during the special pattern fluctuation (F3709: No), it is determined whether the special pattern fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation in which jackpot A is set (F3716), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot A fluctuation (F3716: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the presentation mode will be changed (F3717), and an audio command is set to indicate that a jackpot has been won (F3718), and this process ends.

Finally, in the process of F3706, if it is determined that the enter button (middle button) 600a has not been operated (F3706: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the process contents of the decision button operation process 23 (F3332) will be described with reference to FIG. 752. FIG. 752 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the decision button operation process 23 (F3332). This decision button operation process 23 (F3332) is a process executed based on the player operating (pressing) the decision button (middle button) 600a, and differs from the decision button operation process 22 (see F3315 in FIG. 732) described above in that a process is added that is executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is operated in a state where the adjustment period flag 223sx is not set to on, that is, when no light adjustment or volume adjustment is being performed, but otherwise it is the same. The same process contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

When the decision button operation process 23 (F3332) is executed, first it is determined whether the period adjustment in progress flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the player operated (pressed) the decision button (middle button) 600a in a state where no light intensity adjustment or volume adjustment was performed (F3351: No), the performance customization execution process 23 is executed (F3371), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3351 that the period adjustment in progress flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351; Yes), the same processes F3352 to F3357 as the decision button operation process 22 of the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see F3315 in FIG. 732) are executed, and this process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 753, the processing contents of the performance customization execution process 23 (F3371) will be explained. FIG. 753 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance customization execution process 23 (F3371). In this performance customization execution process 23 (F3371), processing is executed to set the performance customization state, that is, a state in which the selection operation of the performance mode can be executed.

When the effect customization execution process 23 (F3371) is executed, first it is determined whether or not the jackpot A is currently fluctuating (F3801), and if it is determined that the jackpot A is fluctuating (F3801: Yes), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the premium mode is selectable (F3802), and it is determined whether or not the lottery in F3802 has been won (F3803). If it is determined in the process of F3803 that the lottery has been won (F3803: Yes), the effect customization selection target "premium mode available" (see FIG. 738(b)), which is a target that can be selected by the effect customization operation, is determined (F3804), and the process proceeds to F3806.

On the other hand, if the process of F3803 determines that the player has not won (F3803: No), the effect custom selection target "normal" (see FIG. 738(a)) is determined (F3805), and the process proceeds to F3806. Note that if the process of F3801 determines that the jackpot A is not fluctuating, that is, that the conditions for making it possible to select "premium mode" as the effect mode are not met (F3801: No), the process proceeds directly to F3805, and the effect custom selection target "normal" (see FIG. 738(a)) is determined.

Next, in the process of F3806, the performance customization in progress flag 223wa is set to ON (F3806), a display command is set to indicate that performance customization is in progress (F3807), and this process ends.

Next, the processing contents of the performance update process 23 (F2161) will be explained with reference to FIG. 754. FIG. 754 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance update process 23 (F2161). This performance update process 23 (F2161) differs from the performance update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734) executed in the 22nd control example described above in that it executes an update process related to variable performance (variable performance update process 23), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the performance update process 23 (F2161) is executed, first, the processes F3501 to F3516 are executed, which are the same as the performance update process 22 described above (see F2111 in FIG. 734), then the variable performance update process 23 is executed (F3551), and then the process F3517 is executed, terminating this process.

Here, referring to FIG. 755, the processing contents of the variable performance update process 23 (F3551) will be described. FIG. 755 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable performance update process 23 (F3551). In this variable performance update process 23 (F3551), processing is performed based on the elapsed time since the variable performance was executed. In this 23rd control example, a part of the performance mode of the variable performance (the performance mode of the notice performance executed in the latter half period) is configured to be set after the variable performance is executed (at the time when the first half period has elapsed). By configuring in this way, even if a part of the determination conditions of the performance mode (the performance mode type) is changed after the variable performance is executed, it is possible to set a part of the performance mode set in the variable performance being executed to correspond to the changed determination conditions. Therefore, since the variable performance corresponding to the changed determination conditions can be executed immediately, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to change the performance mode, as it takes time to determine the performance mode corresponding to the changed performance mode despite the operation of selecting the performance mode (performance custom operation).

When the variable performance update process 23 (F3551) is executed, it is first determined whether the performance pattern of the variable performance currently being executed is "Performance A" or "Performance B" (F3901). Here, the performance patterns "Performance A" and "Performance B" are performance patterns that are predefined so that the performance mode of the preview performance in the latter half of the variable performance is determined when the first half of the period has elapsed.

If it is determined in the processing of F3901 that the presentation pattern is "Presentation A" or "Presentation B" (F3901: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the timing of the end of the first half period (F3902), and if it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the first half period (F3902: Yes), it is determined whether the second half notice setting flag 223wd is set to on (F3903).

If it is determined in the processing of F3903 that the second half preview setting flag 223wd is set to on, that is, if it is determined that an operation to change the presentation mode (performance customization operation) has been performed during the first half period and the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview presentation has already been determined at the time of execution (F3903: Yes), the second half preview setting flag 223wd is set to off (F3907), information indicating the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we is read (F3908), a display command for indicating the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation is set (F3906), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F3903, if it is determined that the second half preview setting flag 223wd is not set to on, that is, if it is determined that an operation to change the presentation mode (performance customization operation) has not been performed during the first half period (F3903: No), the current custom information (presentation mode) is identified from the custom information storage area 223wb (F3904), and based on the identified custom information (presentation mode), the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation is determined by referring to the second half preview presentation selection table 222wb (F3905), a display command is set to indicate the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation (F3906), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if the processing of F3901 determines that the presentation pattern is not "Presentation A" or "Presentation B," that is, if it determines that the presentation pattern of the variable presentation currently being executed is not one for which a new presentation mode can be determined during the variable presentation (F3901: No), or if it determines that the current timing is not the end of the first half period (F3902: No), this processing is terminated without setting the presentation mode for the second half preview presentation.

<24th control example>
Next, the 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 756 to FIG. 782. The pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example described above in that it has a setting change function that can set the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery in the same probability state (low probability state or high probability state) differently, and that the voice output device 226 is configured to store voice data corresponding to various characters displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in advance, and to be able to switch the type of voice (voice) output from the pachinko machine 10 based on the voice command output from the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, with regard to the performance to be executed, it is different in that it is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance that can suggest to the player the setting value set by the setting change function, and a reservation shift performance that can suggest whether or not the reservation information that is the target when the display position of the reserved pattern (the first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is shifted.

Traditionally, various characters have been used in pachinko machine 10 games, and some of these machines use the voice of a specific character to provide information about the game situation or output entertaining sounds to enhance the presentation effect. However, if the voice of a specific character is always output, players who play for long periods of time will become accustomed to the type of voice that is output, which reduces the presentation effect.

In addition, when the content of the output sound (lines) is the same, the meaning of the sound in relation to the game is always the same, so there is a problem that players who play for a long time will get bored of the sound content (lines), reducing the presentation effect.

In contrast to this, in the present 24th control example, when the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, different types of voices can be output based on the combination of the stopped and displayed third symbols. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to output various types of voices based on the result of the special symbol lottery, so that it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from decreasing even for players who have been playing for a long time.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, the content of the sound (lines) to be output can be determined based on the combination of the stopped third symbols. Specifically, different sound contents can be output depending on the combination of the stopped third symbols (double numbers) that are displayed when a jackpot is won, the combination of the stopped third symbols that are displayed when a reach is missed, and the combination of the stopped third symbols that are displayed without entering a reach state (variable numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the sound (lines) to be output from becoming monotonous.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (a loss), it is possible to output a voice (a line) that can grant the player a special benefit (setting suggestion). By configuring it in this way, even if the result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (a loss), it is possible to grant the player a special benefit that is advantageous to the player, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, if a presentation with a high probability of winning a jackpot (for example, a reach presentation with a specific symbol (7 symbol)) is executed but the jackpot is not won, in other words, if a presentation that gives the player a very high chance of winning a jackpot is executed but the presentation results in a miss, it is possible to grant a bonus that is more advantageous to the player (for example, a setting notification). By configuring it in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is unfavorable to the player (a miss), it is possible to grant an advantageous bonus to the player, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this 24th control example, one third pattern is formed by the identification information (number icon) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery and the character, and the combination is switchable. In other words, it is possible to vary the type of character associated with a specific number icon (e.g., 7). And, it is possible to output a line suggesting the character associated with the third pattern as the content of the line output as audio.

By configuring it in this way, even if lines suggesting the same character are output, the meaning of the lines can be made to differ greatly by changing the type of number icon associated with that character. Therefore, for players who have been playing for a long time, when lines with the same content are output, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether the character suggested by the lines is an advantageous character or not.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the voice type is determined in accordance with the stopped display mode of the third symbol, and when the voice type is determined based on a specific stopped display mode (a stopped display mode of the third symbol indicating a jackpot win), the player can select whether or not to continue audio output based on that voice type for a specific period of time. By configuring it in this way, when the third symbol with the player's favorite character is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, audio output based on the favorite character's voice type can be executed for a long period of time.

First, referring to FIG. 756, the structure of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example will be described. FIG. 756 is a rear view that shows a schematic configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 756, the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example is different from the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example described above in that the main control device 110 is provided with a setting change mechanism that is at least composed of a setting value display device 110a capable of displaying the setting value, a setting key 110b capable of switching between a state in which the setting change operation (and the setting confirmation operation) is accepted and a state in which the setting change operation is not accepted (normal game state), and a setting switch 110c capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in response to the operation of an operator (for example, a staff member of the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed) in the state in which the setting change operation is accepted (setting change state). The other configurations are the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 757, a method of changing settings using the setting change mechanism and a method of confirming settings will be described in detail. First, with reference to FIG. 757(a)-(d), a procedure for changing settings of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described. As shown in FIG. 757(a)-(d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, with the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 cut off, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise to the ON position (see FIG. 757(a)). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to first cut off the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Next, with the setting key 110b rotated to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see FIG. 757(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after power-on is set to a setting change state indicating that the settings are being changed. When the setting change state is entered, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a, which is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display makes it easy for the operator (e.g., a waiter) to understand that the setting change state has been successfully transitioned to.

When the setting is changed to the setting change state, the setting value is changed by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 757(c)). In this 24th control example, three types of setting values, 1 to 3, are provided, and the larger the value, the higher the probability of winning. That is, the setting 1 has the lowest probability of winning (for example, 1/262 in the low probability state, 1/65 in the high probability (high probability) state), and the setting 3 has the highest probability of winning (for example, 1/218 in the low probability state, 1/55 in the high probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed from 1 to 2 to 3 to 1, etc., each time the setting switch 110c is pressed. Also, when the setting switch 110c is pressed when the setting value is 3, the setting value is configured to return to 1 in a rotary manner. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. FIG. 757(c) is a diagram showing the display state when the setting value is set to "3." As shown in FIG. 757(c), when the setting value is switched to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "3," indicating a setting of 3, is displayed in the last digit on the setting value display device 110a.

After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting change state is terminated by rotating the setting key 110b counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b in the OFF position (see FIG. 757(d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped key portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. This allows the operator (e.g., a hall staff member) to insert the key portion into the keyhole portion only when performing a setting change operation, and to remove and store the key portion when the setting change operation is completed. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent players, etc. from fraudulently changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, and prevents the hall from suffering unexpected disadvantages.

Then, when the setting change operation is completed, the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is resumed. In the initial setting process after the restart, a process is executed to send to the voice lamp control device 113 a setting change completion command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed, and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation. In addition, a process is executed to send a command (initialization command) to resume the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113, which is on hold until the setting change operation is completed.

Next, the procedure for checking the settings (settings checking operation) will be described with reference to Fig. 757 (e)-(g). To check the settings, first, in the same way as in the setting change operation, the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (see Fig. 757 (e)). Then, the setting check state is set by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (i.e., leaving it in the OFF state) (see Fig. 757 (f)). When the setting check state is entered, the setting value currently set is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example in Fig. 757 (f) shows a state in which "3" is set as the setting value. When the operator has finished checking the settings, the setting check state is ended by rotating the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is entered into a state in which normal play is possible (see Fig. 757 (g)).

In the twenty-fourth control example, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the setting switch 110c may be eliminated, and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, the setting may be changed from 1 to 2 to 3 to 1 ... each time the setting key 110b is rotated 60 degrees, and the key part of the setting key 110b is pulled out of the keyhole to return to a state in which normal play is possible. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of parts can be reduced. This allows the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced.

In this 24th control example, as shown in FIG. 757, the setting change mechanism is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, in a position that cannot be seen by the player during play. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during play. In addition, when actually performing a setting change operation, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In this open state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are supported only by the opening and closing shaft, which is a relatively unstable state. In this situation, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the return operation of the decorative parts provided on the pachinko machine 10 is performed, excessive load is applied to the opening and closing shaft, etc., which may cause damage.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the reel is configured to return to its original state after the standby process in which the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 is awaited has ended. In other words, the reel is not returned to its original state during a setting change operation. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the reel from returning to its original state during a setting change operation, resulting in damage to the pachinko machine 10. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 is less likely to vibrate during a setting change operation than when the reel is returned to its original state while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c, erroneous operation of the setting switch 110c is less likely to occur.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON when a setting change operation is performed, so that, for example, a setting change operation cannot be performed while a state in which a high probability state advantageous to the player is set is maintained. In other words, the game state set after the setting change operation is performed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, for games performed after the setting change operation is performed, the game conditions other than the difference in the jackpot probability based on the setting value can be unified, making it easier to provide a fair game to players.

<About the performance content in the 24th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 758 to Fig. 760, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th control example, a voice effect is executed in which voice output is executed with different voice types based on the combination of the display modes of the multiple third patterns stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, a hold shift effect is executed that can suggest whether or not the hold information that is the target when the display position of the hold pattern (the first hold pattern hr1 to the fourth hold pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is shifted.

First, referring to FIG. 758(a), an example of the presentation at the start timing of the special pattern change will be described. FIG. 758(a) is a diagram showing the third pattern at the start timing of the special pattern change and the sound output from the speaker unit 308. As shown in FIG. 758(a), in this 24th control example, the display mode of the third pattern used in the change presentation is configured to be formed from a "number portion (number icon)" which is identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and a decorative character portion (character icon), and a basic third pattern with a different character icon corresponding to each number portion is formed as the basic pattern, and a change presentation using the basic third pattern is executed.

To explain the display mode of the basic third pattern in detail, the third pattern D1 with a character icon resembling an octopus is formed as the basic third pattern for the number icon "1", and the third pattern D4 with a character icon resembling a shark is formed as the basic third pattern for the number icon "4". The display data of the basic third pattern is stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and is configured to execute a variable presentation using the display mode of the basic third pattern unless a dedicated command is output to use a special third pattern, which is a display mode other than the basic third pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand, since it is possible to easily understand the result of the special pattern lottery just by understanding the character icon that is displayed in a variable manner.

In this 24th control example, instead of the basic third pattern, a special third pattern with a different combination of the type of number icon and the type of character icon is variably displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 758(a), a special third pattern in which a character icon resembling an octopus is attached to the number icon "3" is variably displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate an event in which the type of number icon (identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery) cannot be ascertained simply by checking the character icon attached to the variably displayed third pattern, so that a surprising variable performance result can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a sound corresponding to the type of character icon (character type) attached to the third pattern (basic third pattern, special third pattern) displayed on the display screen can be output, and the sound can be used to suggest to the player the character type attached to the third pattern that will be stopped and displayed in the next change. In addition, when a change display using a special third pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. 758(a), the display mode of the special third pattern is first notified to the player, and then the change performance is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the performance result of the suggestion performance executed by sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 758(a), when a change performance is executed in response to the start of a special pattern change, the change performance starts from a state in which the third pattern corresponding to the previous special pattern change is stopped and displayed. In this case, when a change performance using a special third pattern is executed, the change performance is executed in a state in which a special third pattern consisting of a number icon "3" with a character icon resembling a turtle is displayed, as shown in the third pattern D3. Then, the speaker unit 308 outputs the sound "I wonder if Octopus will win next time? Turtle, here we go" as a suggestion performance to suggest the stopped display mode of the third pattern to show the performance result of the change performance executed this time.

This suggestive effect suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the third symbol with an octopus character icon or a turtle character icon will be displayed as the stopped display mode of the third symbol to indicate the performance result of the variable performance currently being executed. By understanding the content of the sound output as the suggestive effect, the player can play the game while calculating (predicting) the possibility that the third symbol, which indicates a big win, will be displayed. As described above, in this 24th control example, a special third symbol is configured to be displayed, so it is possible to increase the number of stop display patterns of the third symbol that can be predicted based on the content provided to the player by the suggestive effect described above (the type of character icon that can be displayed), and the player can enjoy predicting the future game content (performance result).

Furthermore, when the special third symbol is used, as shown in FIG. 758(a), a notification effect is configured to be executable that can notify the player that the special third symbol will be used before the variable effect begins. The notification effect is configured to be capable of notifying the player of at least a portion of the display mode of the special third symbol that will actually be used. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to predict the stopping display pattern of the third symbol based on the content provided to the player by the suggestion effect (type of character icon that may be stopped and displayed), including the display mode of the special third symbol, making it easier to improve prediction accuracy.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 758(a), the display mode of the special third pattern that is actually used is configured to be able to be displayed to indicate that the special third pattern is used, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute a notification effect (for example, displaying text during character shuffle) that simply indicates that a variable effect is being executed in which a special third pattern that is a combination different from the basic third pattern is used.

In addition, while the diagram shown in FIG. 758(a) shows an example in which one type of special third pattern is displayed, two or more types of special third patterns may be used in one variable performance. In this case, the display modes of all of the special third patterns used in one variable performance may be configured to be notifiable to the player before the variable performance starts, or at least some of them may be configured to be notifiable to the player.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine whether or not to use the special third symbol, or the display mode of the special third symbol to be used, but without being limited to this, the system may be configured to allow the player to generate special third symbols in any combination.

Next, referring to FIG. 758(b), another presentation content using audio output will be described. FIG. 758(b) is a diagram showing an audio presentation executed during the next variation when the stopped display mode of the third pattern indicating the result of the previous variation presentation is a specific stopped display mode (7 reach miss). As described above, in this 24th control example, an audio presentation using audio corresponding to the character icon type (character type) attached to the third pattern stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variation presentation is configured to be executable after the previous variation presentation has ended. Furthermore, a bonus corresponding to the combination of the third patterns stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variation presentation can be granted to the player by the audio presentation.

Specifically, in FIG. 758(b), the result of the previously executed variable effect was "7 reach miss", so the character voice (7 reach character) selected by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa described below is set, and therefore while the variable effect is being executed, "Character Voice 7 Character" is displayed in the display area HR30 as a guide mode to indicate the currently set voice data (character voice). Then, the speaker unit 308 outputs the voice of the setting suggestion effect "Today's fortune is great fortune", which is a privilege given to the player as the voice effect corresponding to "7 reach miss".

By configuring it in this way, even if the stopped display mode of the third symbol that was stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance can no longer be seen due to the execution of the next variable performance, it is possible for the player to easily understand which character icon the character voice being output corresponds to.

Next, the contents of the voice performance in the state where the third pattern for indicating the performance result of the variable performance executed in response to the special pattern variation continues to be displayed in a stopped state, that is, the state where the next special pattern lottery is not executed (standby state)) will be described with reference to FIG. 759(a). FIG. 759(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the voice performance executed during the standby state (during the demo performance). As shown in FIG. 759(a), when the standby state is set in a state where the third pattern D1 with a character icon imitating an octopus attached to the number icon "1", the third pattern D4 with a character icon imitating a shark attached to the number icon "4", and the third pattern D3 with a character icon imitating a turtle attached to the number icon "3" are displayed in a stopped state as the performance result of the previous variable performance, normally, the voice performance during the standby state is executed with the character voice (voice data) corresponding to the character type attached to the third pattern D1 displayed in the left pattern row (the pattern row displayed in a stopped state first) among the three third patterns displayed in a stopped state. In this way, the voice data output during the standby state can be made different depending on the type of frozen third pattern (the frozen third pattern displayed to show the results of the previous variable presentation), making it possible to provide a variety of presentations (audio presentations) to the player, enhancing the presentation effect.

As described above, in this 24th control example, the type of voice data used in the executed sound performance can be made different depending on the character type attached to the stopped third symbol. In order to prevent the type of voice data from switching every time the third symbol is stopped, the voice data used for the sound output can be fixed until a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, the sound output using the voice data of the character type corresponding to that third symbol can be continuously executed until the next jackpot win symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, a privilege that allows the same voice data to be continuously output can be granted as a privilege different from the case when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating anything other than a jackpot win.

This configuration allows the player to play the game while hoping that the third symbol, which is associated with the player's favorite character type, will bring about a big win. It also prevents the voice data from switching every time a special symbol lottery is executed, resulting in inconsistent audio effects and a decrease in the presentation effect.

As shown in FIG. 759(b), when the voice data is fixed, "Character Voice 7 Characters" is displayed in the display area HR30 to the right of the main display area Dm as a display mode to indicate the currently set voice data, and the display area HR31 formed above it displays the display mode "Voice Fixed" to indicate that the voice data is fixed. This allows the player to easily understand that the voice data currently corresponding to "7 Characters" is fixed.

In addition, in the display area HR32, a button icon resembling the effect button 22 is displayed as a display mode for guiding the player on the game method (operation method) for releasing the fixed state of the voice data, and the text "You can release the voice lock by pressing the button" is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that it is possible to release the audio output based on the currently fixed voice data.

In the example shown in FIG. 759(b), the jackpot is won with the third symbol corresponding to character 7, and the voice data for "character 7" is fixed. Therefore, even if multiple special symbol lotteries are performed after the jackpot play ends, and a standby state is set with the third symbol D1 with a character icon resembling an octopus attached to the number icon "1", the third symbol D4 with a character icon resembling a shark attached to the number icon "4", and the third symbol D3 with a character icon resembling a turtle attached to the number icon "3" stopped and displayed as the results of the previous variable performance, an audio performance using the voice data for "character 7" is executed during the standby state.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, when a voice effect using "7 character voices" is executed, a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 can be executed as a bonus, so that a setting suggestion effect may be executed as part of the voice effect executed during the standby state. When a setting suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 759(b), a voice saying "Today's fortune is very good" is output from the speaker unit 308, as in the example shown in FIG. 758(b), to notify the player that the setting value is favorable.

In this way, in this 24th control example, not only is an audio effect performed with different voice data depending on the stopped display mode of the third symbol, but a special bonus can be awarded depending on the type of stopped display mode of the third symbol, making it possible to perform an effect according to the display mode of the stopped third symbol, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 760, the contents of the reserved shift chance performance executed when the display position of the reserved pattern shifts among the performances (pre-reading performances) using the reserved pattern in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 760(a) is a screen (reserved change precursor display screen) in which the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance is displayed in the display area HR2, and is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state in which a special pattern change is being executed; FIG. 760(b) is a screen (reserved change precursor display screen) in which the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance is displayed in the display area HR2, and is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state in which a special pattern change is not being executed (a state in which a special pattern is stopped and displayed); FIG. 760(c) is a diagram showing an example of a reserved shift chance performance executed when the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance shifts its display position; and FIG. 760(d) is a diagram showing an example of a reserved shift chance performance executed when the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance shifts its display position.

In the 22nd control example described above, the display mode of the reserved patterns was the same as that of reserved patterns that are not the target of the reserve change performance until the reserve change performance was executed, so that the player would have difficulty in identifying the reserved patterns that are the target of the reserve change performance until the reserve change performance was executed. In contrast, in the 24th control example, a dedicated display mode (premonition display mode) can be set so that the reserved patterns that are the target of the reserve change performance can be identified by the player before the reserve change performance is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 760(a), like the 22nd control example described above, normal reserved symbols are displayed in a colored display mode (first reserved symbol hr1, second reserved symbol hr2, fourth reserved symbol hr4), but reserved symbols that are the subject of a reserved change presentation are displayed in a spiral display mode (premonition display mode) as shown in the third reserved symbol hr3, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that a reserved change presentation will be executed before the reserved change presentation is executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 760(a), the premonition display mode is configured to rotate clockwise while the special pattern variation is being executed, i.e., while the display position of the reserved pattern does not shift. By dynamically displaying (rotating) the premonition display mode in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand the difference between this and the normal reserved pattern that is statically displayed (stopped display).

As shown in FIG. 760(b), when the currently executing special pattern change is stopped and a new special pattern change (special pattern change using reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the first reserved pattern hr1) is executed, an effect is executed in which the display positions of each reserved pattern are shifted (the first reserved pattern hr1 is shifted to the display area HR1 (see FIG. 672) where the currently executing reserved pattern is displayed, and then the display positions of each reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 are shifted one position to the left) in the same manner as in the 22nd control example described above.

Here, the change time of the special pattern change is configured to vary depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, so an event occurs in which the display mode of the premonition reserved pattern is different at the timing when the special pattern change is stopped. Specifically, if the premonition display mode is a repeating display mode that is dynamically displayed from the first mode through the second mode to the first mode, at the timing when the special pattern change is stopped, the premonition reserved pattern may be displayed in the first mode or in the second mode.

In this 24th control example, the premonition reserved pattern with a dynamically (rotating) displayed premonition display mode is configured to be statically (stopped) displayed at the timing of the stop display of the special pattern variation. Specifically, the dynamically displayed premonition display mode is configured to be displayed in a predetermined initial stop mode (first mode). When executing a performance in which the reserved pattern is shifted, a performance pattern can be set in which various operational performances are executed from the initial stop mode (first mode) state for the reserved pattern in the premonition display mode.

By configuring it in this way, the presentation patterns set when executing the shift presentation of the reserved symbols can be limited to presentation patterns that start from the initial stop mode, so the number of presentation patterns can be reduced compared to when presentation patterns are set in accordance with the dynamic position (operation position) of the precursor display mode when the reserved symbols shift.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this 24th control example, a chance effect during hold shift can be executed when the premonition reserved pattern shifts, and the expectation of winning the jackpot and the set value can be suggested to the player depending on the type of effect mode set as the chance effect during hold shift. In other words, the player will pay more attention to the premonition reserved pattern when the premonition reserved pattern shifts than when the dynamically displayed premonition reserved pattern is stopped. Therefore, even if the premonition reserved pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed in the initial stop mode (first mode) regardless of the mode in which the premonition reserved pattern is displayed at the time the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable.

In the 24th control example, when the special pattern variation is stopped, the premonition reserved pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed in the initial stop mode, regardless of the display mode of the premonition reserved pattern at the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, and when the premonition reserved pattern shifts, a performance pattern that starts from the initial stop mode is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, at least two types of stop modes (first initial stop mode, second initial stop mode) can be set as the initial stop mode, and one of the initial stop modes can be set based on the display mode of the premonition reserved pattern at the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, and a performance pattern that starts from the first initial stop mode and a performance pattern that starts from the second initial stop mode can be set as the performance pattern executed when the premonition reserved pattern shifts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when the premonition reserved pattern that is dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the dynamically displayed premonition reserved pattern is displayed in a first mode corresponding to the initial stop mode during the period from immediately before the special pattern variation is stopped to the premonition reserved pattern shift (for example, the fixed display period of the special pattern), the premonition reserved pattern may be fixedly displayed. In other words, the dynamic display of the premonition reserved pattern may be terminated without any sense of incongruity by shifting the timing of the stop display of the special pattern variation and the timing of the stop display of the premonition reserved pattern. In this case, it is preferable to configure the dynamic display period of the premonition reserved pattern (the period from the first mode to the dynamic display until the first mode is again displayed) to be shorter than the fixed display period of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, the premonition reserved pattern can be fixedly displayed in the first mode without any sense of incongruity during the period in which the special pattern is fixedly displayed.

760(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen near the display area HR2 when "jump" is set as the presentation mode of the chance presentation during the reserved shift. As shown in FIG. 760(c), when the chance presentation during the reserved shift is executed, only the premonition reserved pattern is shifted in a presentation mode (dynamic display mode) different from the other reserved patterns. FIG. 760(c) shows a presentation mode in which the third reserved pattern hr3, which is the premonition reserved pattern, jumps out to the top of the display area HR2 and then moves to the display position of the shift destination. In other words, it shows a presentation mode in which only the premonition reserved pattern moves a longer distance than the other reserved patterns. Therefore, when "jump" is set as the presentation mode of the chance presentation during the reserved shift, while the premonition reserved pattern is moving outside the display area HR2, the other reserved patterns complete their shift to the display position (display area) of the shift destination, and then a presentation is executed in which the premonition reserved pattern moves to the display position (display area) of the shift destination.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the shift of the display position (display area) is completed can be made different for normal reserved patterns and premonition reserved patterns, so that the player can pay closer attention to the presentation mode of the premonition reserved patterns. Also, the timing at which the shift of the display position (display area) is completed is delayed for the premonition reserved patterns compared to the normal reserved patterns. In other words, the period required for the premonition reserved patterns to shift is configured to be longer than the period required for the normal reserved patterns to shift, so the presentation period of the chance presentation when the reserve is shifted can be made longer.

Next, FIG. 760(d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen near the display area HR2 when "high speed" is set as the performance mode of the chance performance during the reserved shift. As shown in FIG. 760(d), when the chance performance during the reserved shift is executed, only the premonition reserved pattern is shifted in a performance mode (dynamic display mode) different from the other reserved patterns. FIG. 760(d) shows a performance mode in which the third reserved pattern hr3, which is the premonition reserved pattern, moves to the shift destination display position faster than the other normal reserved patterns. Therefore, when "high speed" is set as the performance mode of the chance performance during the reserved shift, the premonition reserved pattern moves to the shift destination display position (display area) before the other reserved patterns complete their shift to the shift destination display position (display area), so that multiple (two) reserved patterns (at least a part of them) are temporarily displayed at the same display position (display area). By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player and to enhance the performance effect.

The display mode of the premonition reserved pattern in the 24th control example may be applied to the 22nd control example described above. By configuring it in this way, the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this 24th control example, as in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, it is also possible to configure it so that, without using a premonition reserved pattern, at the execution timing of the shift chance presentation, the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 760(c) or FIG. 760(d) can be set as the presentation pattern at the time of shift transition only for the target reserved pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that is unexpected.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the shift-time chance effect can be executed only for the premonition reserved pattern, but without being limited to this, when the shift-time chance effect is executed for the premonition reserved pattern, the same effect mode may be used to shift other reserved patterns as well. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect mode ("jump", "high speed") different from the normal mode for the multiple reserved patterns displayed in the display area HR2, so that the player can be easily notified that the shift-time chance effect has been executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 24th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 761. FIG. 761 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 761, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example described above (see FIG. 687) in that the set value display device 110a, the setting switch 110c, and the setting key 110b are connected to the input/output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the bus line 204, and the MPU 201 executes a process of changing the set value and a process of displaying the set value based on a signal output in response to the operation of the setting key 110b or the setting switch 110c. Note that the contents of various operations using the setting key 110b or the setting switch 110c and the display contents displayed on the set value display device 110a have been described above with reference to FIG. 757, and therefore will not be described here.

Next, the electrical configuration of the sound output device 226 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 762. FIG. 762 is a block diagram showing a simplified electrical configuration of the sound output device 226. As shown in FIG. 762, the sound output device 226 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 so that data can be transmitted and received.

As shown in FIG. 762, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data (voice data) executed by the MPU 301, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 302 are executed.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When the audio output device 226 receives a command specifying audio data from the audio lamp control device 113, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305. In addition, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel of the audio synthesis unit 306 corresponding to the audio type.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs it to the amplifier unit 307 as synthetic voice data. The synthetic voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. This allows the speaker unit 308 to output various sounds specified by the voice lamp control device 113. Note that in this 24th control example, the synthetic voice data generated by the voice synthesis unit 306 is input not only to the amplifier unit 307, but also to the ADC 309, which is composed of a known AC-DC converter. This ADC 309 is configured to convert the synthetic voice data, which is analog data, into digital data and output it to the MPU 301.

More specifically, ADC 309 has at least comparators 309a1-309a15 and a decode unit 309b. Each of comparators 309a1-309a15 can determine whether the amplitude (voltage) of the received analog data is greater than the voltage corresponding to each comparator 309a1-309a15. The voltages corresponding to each of comparators 309a1-309a15 are set in increments of 1 volt within the range from 7 volts to -7 volts. Each of comparators 309a1-309a15 is configured to output L if the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is greater than the corresponding voltage value, and output H if the synthetic voice data is smaller.

The decoding unit 309b identifies the range of voltage values of the current synthetic voice data from the combination of the outputs of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15, and converts it into a 4-bit digital value. That is, it converts the range of voltages from "0000B" to "1111B" in ascending order of voltage range. Specifically, for example, if the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is greater than 7 volts, "1111B" is output as the digital value. Also, for example, if the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is greater than 3 volts and equal to or less than 4 volts, "1011B" is output as the digital value.

The MPU 301 is configured to sample the synthesized audio data output from the ADC 309 over a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and output the average value (average amplitude) to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 identifies the corresponding vibration intensity (duty ratio) from the received average amplitude. Then, an operation command is set in the motor control IC to drive the vibration motor (not shown) of the drive motors 770 connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 with the identified vibration intensity (duty ratio). This allows the vibration intensity to be varied according to the audio output from the speaker unit 308, providing a realistic presentation.

In the 24th control example, the digital value output from the ADC 309 is output to the MPU 301, but it may be output directly to the input/output port 305, so that the digital value is output directly to the voice lamp control device 113. When performing a variable effect accompanied by a vibration effect, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to calculate the average amplitude by sampling the digital value over a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds). The motor control IC may then be notified of the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the calculated average amplitude by an operation command. This reduces the processing load on the MPU 301.

In the 24th control example, the synthetic voice data is converted to an average value of the absolute amplitude, and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is determined based on the average value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the maximum absolute value during a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) during sampling may be output from the voice output device 226 to the voice lamp control device 113, or an effective value (a value obtained by dividing the maximum amplitude value by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the voice output device 226 to the voice lamp control device 113.

The type of operation command for driving the vibration motor may be variably set in response to the voice command output from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, when a voice command for specifying voice data in a high range is set, a vibration intensity corresponding to a short amplitude may be set as the operation command, and when a voice command for specifying voice data in a low range is set, a vibration intensity corresponding to a long amplitude may be set as the operation command.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a clearer difference in the audio output that is executed depending on the type of voice data.

Next, referring to FIG. 763, the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa in the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 24th control example will be explained. The ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in this 24th control example differs from the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that a different data table is referenced when determining whether or not the special symbol lottery has been won (jackpot determination), but is otherwise identical. A detailed explanation of the identical elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to Figure 763, the contents stipulated in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202xa will be explained. This special pattern jackpot random number table 202xa is a data table that is referenced when drawing a lottery for a special pattern, and the range of values of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot is stipulated for each state of the special pattern and each set value. Figure 763 shows the stipulated contents of this special pattern jackpot random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 763, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a jackpot for special symbols in a low probability state for special symbols is set to 250 values from "0 to 249" for a set value of "1", 275 values from "0 to 274" for a set value of "2", and 300 values from "0 to 299" for a set value of "3". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 763, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a jackpot for special symbols in a high probability game state (special game state) is set to 1000 values from "0 to 999" for a set value of "1", 1100 values from "0 to 1099" for a set value of "2", and 1200 values from "0 to 1199" for a set value of "3".

In this 24th control example, since the first winning random number counter can have 65,536 possible values from 0 to 65,535, when the setting is set to "1," the probability of winning the jackpot (jackpot probability) is approximately 1/262 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot probability is approximately 1/65 in the high probability state of the special pattern. When the setting is set to "2," the jackpot probability is approximately 1/238 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot probability is approximately 1/60 in the high probability state of the special pattern. When the setting is set to "3," the jackpot probability is approximately 1/218 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot probability is approximately 1/55 in the high probability state of the special pattern.

Therefore, the setting "1" is the setting value that makes it most difficult to win the jackpot (unfavorable setting value), and the setting "3" is the setting value that makes it most easy to win the jackpot (advantageous setting value). As described above, in this 24th control example, regardless of which setting value is set, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special pattern is four times higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special pattern. In other words, regardless of which setting value is set, the same bonus (bonus for making it easier to win the jackpot) is provided to the player when the special pattern moves from the low probability state to the high probability state of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set multiple setting values, the bonus granted when the probability state of the special pattern switches can be made uniform regardless of the setting value, so that excessive differences in game content depending on the setting value can be suppressed.

The bonus content granted when a special symbol moves from a low probability state to a high probability state may be different depending on the setting value. For example, the setting "3" may be configured to have a greater degree of variability in the probability of a jackpot when a special symbol moves from a low probability state to a high probability state than the setting "1". In the case of the setting "1", the probability of a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is four times that in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the case of the setting "3", the probability of a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is six times that in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the advantageous setting "3" can be made greater compared to the disadvantageous setting "1", so that players can be motivated to play on the pachinko machine 10 with the advantageous setting value set.

In this 24th control example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with three set values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set values may be provided with two or four or more (for example, six). Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a set difference is provided for the jackpot probability of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set difference may be provided for various elements that can change the degree of advantage of the game, such as the jackpot probability, the small jackpot probability, the set probability of the probability variable state, the duration of the probability variable state, and the game content of the jackpot game. Even in such a case, since it is possible to provide the player with different degrees of advantage depending on the set value, it is possible to motivate the player to play on the pachinko machine 10 with the advantageous set value.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 764. FIG. 764 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 764, the RAM 203 in this 24th control example differs from the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see FIG. 689(b)) in that a setting value storage area 203xa has been added, but is otherwise the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The set value storage area 203xa is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, if the set value storage area 203xa stores data "00H", it indicates that the set value "1" is set, if the set value storage area 203xa stores data "01H", it indicates that the set value "2" is set, and if the set value storage area 203xa stores data "02H", it indicates that the set value "3" is set. When a special symbol lottery is executed, the data of the set value storage area 203xa is read out, and a lottery (jackpot lottery) for a special symbol is executed with a lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, the lottery for a special symbol is executed by comparing the range of random numbers corresponding to the set value indicated by the data of the set value storage area 203xa in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa (see FIG. 763) with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area. The value of the setting value storage area 203xa is initially set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, the value is updated by "01H" from "01H" to "02H", and when the setting switch 110c is pressed again while the data is "02H", the data is updated to "01H". When the power is turned on by pressing the RAM clear switch 122, all data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) to the initial value. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the setting value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value "00H". In other words, even if the setting change operation is not performed and only the RAM clear operation is performed, the setting can be changed to 1. This improves the convenience of the hall.

Next, referring to FIG. 765, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 765 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 765, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 in this 24th control example differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see FIG. 693(a)) in that a voice command selection table 222xa and a reserved action selection table 222xb have been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The voice command selection table 222xa is a data table that is referenced when selecting a voice type corresponding to the character of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In this twenty-fourth control example, the type of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be a third pattern that is a combination of one of the seven number icons "1" to "7" corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery and one of seven types of characters ("1 character" to "7 character"), which is stopped and displayed.

Basically, the number icon "1" and the character "Character 1" are combined to form the "First Third Pattern", the number icon "2" and the character "Character 2" are combined to form the "Second Third Pattern", the number icon "3" and the character "Character 3" are combined to form the "Third Third Pattern", the number icon "4" and the character "Character 4" are combined to form the "Fourth Third Pattern", the number icon "5" and the character "Character 5" are combined to form the "Fifth Third Pattern", the number icon "6" and the character "Character 6" are combined to form the "Sixth Third Pattern", and the number icon "7" and the character "Character 7" are combined to form the "Seventh Third Pattern".

Furthermore, when the combination change conditions for the third pattern are met (for example, a change condition that is met when the number of special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (500 times), or a change condition that is met when the number of jackpot wins reaches a predetermined number (5 times)), a special third pattern can be formed in which a different type of character is combined with the number icon that forms the third pattern.

In this 24th control example, regardless of the type of the number icon of the stopped third pattern, voice data corresponding to the character type can be used for the sound output from the sound output device 226. By configuring it in this way, every time a special pattern lottery is executed (every time a game is played), a sound using a different type of voice data is output from the pachinko machine 10, which prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a special bonus can be awarded according to the combination of the third symbols (combination of character types) stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, when the third symbol indicating a big win is stopped and displayed, a bonus can be awarded in which the player can select whether or not to play by continuing the voice output based on the voice data corresponding to the character type associated with the third symbol, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a specific combination (for example, a reach miss), a setting suggestion bonus can be awarded in which a line that can suggest the setting value ("1" to "3") set in the pachinko machine 10 is uttered by a voice based on the voice data corresponding to the character type associated with the third symbol in the reach state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have a player who has been focusing only on the result of the special pattern lottery being a big win pay attention to the result of the special pattern lottery (the stopped display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) in the hope of receiving a special benefit other than a big win. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be a special third pattern that has a different type of number icon and character type from normal patterns. Furthermore, the device is configured to be able to output a voice message that can suggest a character associated with the third pattern that is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In other words, while the system is configured to allow the player to predict the type of third symbol that will be stopped next based on the voice output dialogue, it is also configured to allow the display of a special third symbol in which the type of number icon and the type of character are different from normal as the third symbol. For example, when a "1 character" is associated with a third symbol corresponding to the number icon "1" and a third symbol corresponding to the number icon "3", if a voice output is made suggesting that a "1 character" will be stopped, the player can enjoy predicting whether the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "1" or the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "3" will be stopped.

Now, referring to FIG. 766, we will explain the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa, which is a data table that is referenced when determining voice data in this 24th control example. FIG. 766 shows the contents defined in the voice command selection table 222xa.

The voice command selection table 222xa is referenced in the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777) that is executed when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, when determining the corresponding voice command based on the stopped display mode of the stopped and displayed third symbol (see F2672 in FIG. 777). As shown in FIG. 766, voice commands are defined for specifying voice data corresponding to each character type according to the character type associated with the stopped and displayed third symbol. In addition, a bonus is also defined according to the combination of character types associated with the stopped and displayed third symbol.

When a voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa, a voice command for audio corresponding to the determined voice command is output to the audio output device 226. The audio output device 226 then identifies the corresponding voice data based on the received voice command, and outputs a common sound for gameplay using the identified voice data. In other words, it is possible to change only the voice data of the sound content that is constantly output from the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, when the voice command received by the audio output device 226 contains information indicating the output of a specific line, the corresponding line data is read out and the received line is output using the received voice data. By configuring it in this way, not only can the voice data of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 be made different depending on the stopped display mode (character type) of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, but it is also possible to output dedicated lines, which prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In addition, in this 24th control example, lines that can suggest information that is advantageous to the player (e.g., setting value information) are included as lines that are exclusive to specific voice commands, so in addition to improving the presentation effect by outputting sound with various voice data, it is possible to grant advantageous benefits to the player, making it possible to make the player interested in the changes to the voice data.

Next, the contents defined in the voice command selection table 222xa will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 766. As shown in FIG. 766, in the voice command selection table 222xa, the types of third symbols that are stopped and displayed are broadly classified into third symbol types that indicate a big win, third symbol types that indicate a missed reach, and third symbol types that indicate a complete miss (scattered), and a different benefit can be granted for each of the broadly classified third symbol types. Then, for each of the broadly classified third symbol types, a voice corresponding to the third symbol type (character type) that is actually stopped and displayed is defined.

Specifically, when the third symbol type is "jackpot", that is, when three identical number icons are displayed side by side, the voice command "Command 1" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 1", the voice command "Command 2" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 2", the voice command "Command 3" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 3", and the voice command "Command 4" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 4". For the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 4", a voice command "Command 4" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 4", for the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 5", a voice command "Command 5" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 5", for the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 6", a voice command "Command 6" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 6", and for the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 7", a voice command "Command 7" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 7".

When the third symbol type is a "jackpot", a special bonus that allows the set voice data to be continuously set is provided as the special bonus to be granted. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, voice output for the subsequent play (play during the jackpot and play after the jackpot play ends) is executed using the voice data corresponding to the character attached to that jackpot symbol. In this twenty-fourth control example, voice output using the same voice data is configured to continue for the period until the next jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent another voice data from being immediately specified even though voice data corresponding to a favorite character has been specified.

In addition, in this 24th control example, a bonus of continuing the sound output corresponding to specific voice data can be granted in the event of a jackpot win, so that a player who wishes to have various game sounds output using voice data corresponding to their favorite character can continue playing in the hope of winning the jackpot with the third symbol associated with a specific character type.

In this 24th control example, the audio output using the voice data identified based on winning a jackpot (stopped display of a jackpot symbol) is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, but without being limited to this, the configuration may also be such that the player operates the operation means (e.g., the performance button 22) to clear the special benefit granted based on winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if a third symbol with a character identified by voice data that the player does not want is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the audio output based on that voice data from continuing for a long period of time.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, the voice output using the voice data identified based on winning a jackpot (stopped display of the jackpot symbol) is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, making it easier for the player to continue playing until the voice data corresponding to the favorite character is identified, but without being limited to this, for example, the player may be allowed to arbitrarily select the type of character to be attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when a jackpot is won based on the number of times the jackpot has been won or the playing time (number of times the special symbol is drawn). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play when the third symbol with the favorite character attached is not stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a jackpot win, even if the player has played for a long time and won the jackpot multiple times.

Next, when the third symbol type is "reach miss", that is, when some of the multiple third symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a state where they are stopped in a combination indicating a big win (reach state), and the remaining third symbols are displayed in a display mode different from the combination indicating a big win, the voice command "command 8" is prescribed for the character attached to the third symbol displayed in the reach state to be "7 character", the voice commands "command 9" to "command 11" are prescribed for the character attached to the third symbol displayed in the reach state to be "odd number characters excluding 7 (1 character, 3 characters, 5 characters)", and the voice commands "command 12" to "command 14" are prescribed for the character attached to the third symbol displayed in the reach state to be "even number characters (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)", to specify the selected voice "reach character (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)".

In addition, when the third symbol type is a "missed reach," information is specified that allows a special bonus to be given in the form of a dialogue output (conversational dialogue) that can suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10. Although detailed explanations are omitted here, in this 24th control example, the expectation of winning a jackpot is varied according to the type of third symbol that is in a reach state, and when a "7 reach" occurs in which a third symbol with the number icon "7" is in a reach state, the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than when other third symbols are in a reach state. Specifically, it is configured so that about 90% of the times when a "7 reach" occurs, a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the likelihood of winning a jackpot before all of the third symbols are stopped and displayed, depending on the type of third symbol that has reached the reach state. Furthermore, even when a variable performance (reach performance) of the same performance mode is executed, it is possible to vary the likelihood of winning a jackpot depending on the type of third symbol that has reached the reach state. Therefore, since variable performances with different expectations of winning a jackpot can be provided using the same performance mode, the amount of image data (reach video data) used for the variable performance can be reduced.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if a reach state (7 reach state) is displayed with the type of third symbol that has a high expectation of winning the jackpot, and then the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that indicates a miss win, that is, if a miss win occurs despite the execution of a variable presentation that has a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the player's motivation to play is significantly reduced.

In contrast to this, in the present 24th control example, when the third symbol is displayed in a combination of symbols that is displayed in the event of a miss win (missed 7 reach) even though the expectation of a big win is high, a special benefit (setting suggestion) different from the big win can be offered to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the type of jackpot that will be set (normal (time-saving) jackpot, special jackpot) can be suggested to the player depending on the type of the third symbol when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win, and the player is more likely to win a jackpot that is favorable to the player (special jackpot) when the type of the stopped and displayed third symbol is the number icon "odd (1, 3, 5, 7)" than when the type is the number icon "even (2, 4, 6)."

Therefore, when the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a combination that indicates a reach miss, the degree to which the player's motivation to play decreases differs depending on whether the reach state of the number icon "odd" becomes a reach miss or whether the reach state of the number icon "even" becomes a reach miss.

Here, in this 24th control example, the content of the special privilege granted when the type of the stopped third pattern displayed is a "reach miss" is configured to differ depending on the type of the third pattern that has become a "reach miss". The more the player's motivation to play decreases when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a "reach miss" display mode, that is, when a miss occurs in a reach state where the expectation of winning a jackpot is high, or when a miss occurs in a reach state with a third pattern that is likely to grant a privilege advantageous to the player when a jackpot is won, the more the special privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 766, when the target of the "missed reach" is a "7 reach", a special bonus is defined that can execute a "strong setting suggestion" voice output (see FIG. 758(b)) that clearly notifies the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, when the target of the "missed reach" is an "odd number reach other than 7", a special bonus is defined that can execute a "weak setting suggestion" voice output that can suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, and when the target of the "missed reach" is an "even number reach", a special bonus is defined that can execute a lively voice output that does not suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10.

By configuring in this way, the player can be interested not only in whether the third pattern stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a display mode indicating a jackpot win, but also in which type of third pattern is stopped and displayed, which prevents the player from getting bored of the game early. In addition, since "reach miss" is specified as the stop display mode of the third pattern that can grant a special benefit advantageous to the player, for example, in a case where a special benefit (setting suggestion) can be granted with a predetermined probability when all the third patterns are stopped and displayed regardless of the stop display mode of the third patterns, the player can be made to understand that the special benefit may be granted before the special benefit is granted (at the time when the reach state is established), which prevents the player from suddenly granting the special benefit and failing to understand the information granted as the special benefit.

In addition, because a "missed reach" is defined as the stopped display mode of the third symbol that can grant a special bonus advantageous to the player, the higher the expectation of a jackpot as a variation presentation of the third symbol, the easier it becomes to grant a special bonus when a jackpot is not won (when a miss is won). This makes it possible to prevent situations in which the player's motivation to play decreases excessively.

In this 24th control example, "reach miss" is defined as a broad classification of third pattern type, and the content of the special bonus granted varies depending on the type of third pattern that is in a reach state (reach type). In addition to this configuration, the third pattern type may be further subdivided depending on the type of final stopped third pattern in the case of a "reach miss", and the content of the special bonus granted may vary.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the system so that a player is more likely to be granted a special bonus that is advantageous to him/her when the same type of reach state (e.g., "5 reach") occurs and the final stopped third symbol is close to the third symbol "5" in the reach state (e.g., "4" or "6") than when the third symbol is not close to the third symbol "5" in the reach state (e.g., "1" or "2").

In other words, in recent pachinko machines 10, when a reach effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot (high reach effect) is executed when the third symbol being displayed changes to a reach state, the device is configured to execute an effect that makes it difficult to tell whether the third symbol combination ("555") corresponding to a jackpot will be displayed or not just before the display of the result of the effect indicating whether or not a jackpot will be won, between the third symbol "5" in the reach state and the third symbols "4" and "6" displayed before and after it, and when a reach effect with a low probability of winning a jackpot (low reach effect) is executed, the device is generally configured to make the final stopped third symbol when the reach is missed significantly different from the third symbol in the reach state in order to prevent the player from expecting a jackpot too much.

Therefore, by subdividing the "reach miss" defined as the third symbol type into "reach miss (one frame miss)" and "reach miss (other)," it becomes easier to grant a special bonus when a miss occurs despite the execution of a reach effect that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in the 24th control example, the voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa shown in FIG. 766 regardless of the set game state, but the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa may be specified so that different voice commands are determined depending on the set game state. In this case, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the probability of a reach state being established is different depending on the set game state, it may be specified so that a special benefit is more likely to be awarded in a "reach miss" when a game state in which a reach state is difficult to be established is set than when a game state in which a reach state is easy to be established is set, or it may be specified so that a special benefit is more likely to be awarded overall when the set game state is a game state advantageous to the player (e.g., a probability change state) than when the set game state is a game state disadvantageous to the player (e.g., a normal state).

Returning to FIG. 766, the explanation will be continued. When the third symbol type is "Barakeme", that is, the third symbol is displayed in a combination that indicates a miss win without the reach state being established, voice data corresponding to the character type ("octopus" in FIG. 758(a)) displayed on the left stopped symbol (see symbol D1 in FIG. 758(a)) is specified, and a voice command (command 15...) is specified for granting a special privilege in which a line corresponding to the combination of the character types of the stopped and displayed third symbols (the combination of "octopus, shark, and turtle" in FIG. 758(a)) can be output as voice. In addition, in this 24th control example, as a special privilege that can be granted when "Barakeme" is displayed as the third symbol type, a special privilege in which a line for entertainment is output as voice, and a special privilege in which a line suggesting the character type to be stopped and displayed in the next variation is output as voice can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the third pattern stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a "variety", it is possible to output audio using voice data corresponding to that stopped display mode (left stopped pattern) and audio output of dialogue corresponding to the combination of stopped display modes, preventing players from getting bored of the game early on. Furthermore, a special bonus is given in part of the dialogue output based on the "variety", suggesting the type of stopped pattern (character type of the third pattern stopped and displayed) in the next variation, so that players who want to quickly understand the results of the special pattern lottery can be interested in the content of the dialogue output.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a special third pattern can be displayed in which the number icon and character type are different from normal, so that when a special bonus is awarded to suggest the type of stopped pattern (character type of the stopped third pattern) in the variation, the fun of predicting the type of the stopped third pattern (type of number icon) based on the character type of the stopped third pattern can be provided.

The pending action selection table 222xb is a data table referenced when determining the operation pattern for moving the display mode for indicating the pending patterns displayed in the display area HR2, i.e., the number of rights to execute a special pattern lottery that have already been acquired, and is referenced when determining the operation mode (action) for shifting the display area for pending patterns based on the start of a new special pattern variation (see F4101 in FIG. 779).

Here, in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, the reserved information including the right to execute the special pattern lottery is configured to be able to store (reserved memory) up to four reserved information for each special pattern type, and the reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved information stored to the player is configured to be able to be displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, when a new special pattern lottery is executed, the special pattern lottery is executed based on the information contained in the reserved information that is reserved and stored. In other words, the reserved information is reserved and stored in a state in which the information referenced when determining whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery that is executed later (the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1) is already stored. Therefore, in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, the information contained in the reserved information (reserved information corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) for which a special pattern lottery has not been executed is determined in advance, and a reserved change performance (see Figs. 672 to 676) for suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot is executed is configured to be able to be executed.

However, the display position of the reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 shifts each time a new special pattern change is executed. Therefore, when executing a reserved change performance in which the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved while the display position of the reserved pattern is fixed as in the 22nd control example described above, the reserved change performance can be executed only when the special pattern change is executed with a change pattern of at least a predetermined period (10 seconds), that is, when the condition that the display position of the reserved pattern does not change for a predetermined period (10 seconds) is met, and when this condition is not met, the reserved change performance cannot be executed.

In response to this, for example, in order to configure the reserve change performance used in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, that is, the reserve change performance that specifies the reserved patterns that can be changed by moving the change role Ym1, Ym2, so that it can be continuously executed even when the display position of the reserved patterns shifts, it is necessary to specify the timing at which the display position of the reserved patterns shifts based on the change time of the executed special pattern change, and to control the movable positions of the change role Ym1, Ym2 according to the specified timing, which creates a problem that the control process content for executing the reserve change performance becomes enormous. In addition, when short-term special pattern changes are executed continuously, there is a problem that a special pattern lottery is executed using the reserved information corresponding to the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change performance while the reserve change performance is being executed.

In contrast, in the present 24th control example, when the execution conditions for the reserved change performance for varying the display mode of the reserved pattern are met and a short period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) is set as the change time for the special pattern change being executed (executed), a reserved action performance is executed that changes the operation pattern (action) of the operation for shifting the display position of the reserved pattern, thereby making it possible to notify the player of the expected probability of winning a jackpot for the reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserved change performance.

By configuring it in this way, even if a situation occurs in which the reserved pattern is not maintained at a specific display position for a specified period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) (a situation in which a short-term change of the special pattern is executed), the player can be notified of the preliminary determination result for the reserved information in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested based on the mode of the reserved action executed as the reserved action presentation and the result of the special pattern lottery based on the reserved information in question. Specifically, if a reserved action mode (e.g., a jump mode) with a high probability of winning a jackpot is executed but the result of the special pattern lottery based on the reserved information that is the subject of the reserved action presentation is a miss and a win, the system is configured to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a setting value that is advantageous to the player (setting "3") has been set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the reserved action mode executed when the display position of the reserved pattern shifts.

Now, referring to FIG. 767, the contents defined in the reserved action selection table 222xb will be explained. FIG. 767 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the reserved action selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 767, the reserved action selection table 222xb defines multiple types of action modes (normal, high speed, jump) as action modes executed when the reserved symbol that is the subject of the reserved action performance is shifted, in association with the target reserved pre-read result (the result of pre-determination of the target reserved information), the presence or absence of a reserved change scenario setting, the setting value, and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf.

Specifically, when the result of the pre-reading (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a big win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is set, if the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "jump" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". Also, if the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "Jump" is set for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "Fast" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "Fast" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, when the result of the pre-read (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a big win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is not set, and the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "fast" is set for the range of "90 to 98". Also, when the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is set for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "Jump" is set for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "High Speed" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "Normal" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

Furthermore, when the result of the pre-read (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a miss win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is set, if the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "normal" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". Also, when the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "fast" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "jump" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "normal" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, when the result of the pre-read (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a miss win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is not set, and the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "fast" is set for the range of "90 to 98". Also, when the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "fast" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "normal" is set for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "fast" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "jump" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

Next, referring to FIG. 768, the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 768 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 768, the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see FIG. 693 (b)) in that a setting value storage area 223xa, a setting change flag 223xb, and a voice fixed flag 223xc have been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The setting value storage area 223xa is a memory area for storing setting values based on information output from the main control unit 110 when that information is received regarding the setting values. Specifically, a status command including information regarding the setting values is set (see S1753 in FIG. 770) in the start-up process 24 of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 770), and when that status command is received, a setting value is identified based on the information included in the received status command, and information indicating the identified setting value is stored in the setting value storage area 223xa.

The information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, when a setting change operation to change the setting value is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to always require an operation of turning on the power, and a status command including information regarding the setting value is set after the setting change operation is completed. Furthermore, each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (each time the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 770) of the main control device 110 is executed), a status command including information regarding the setting value is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, even if information regarding the setting value is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only at the limited timing of power-on, the current setting value can be reliably grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Also, by minimizing the opportunities for outputting information about the setting value, it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information about the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a signal indicating the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly output to the outside, but information about the setting value is output. Therefore, even if the information is illegally acquired, it is difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the information, and it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information about the setting value. In addition, in this embodiment, information about the setting value is set using a part of the status command for indicating the game status (for example, the upper bits of the 8 bits for generating the status command that are likely to be empty), so it is more difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information than when information about the setting value is output alone, and it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information about the setting value.

Furthermore, since the setting value storage area 223xa is configured to store information indicating the setting value, rather than a value indicating the setting value, even if the information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa is illegally obtained, it is difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information, and therefore it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of information regarding the setting value.

In this control example, a dedicated memory area called the setting value storage area 223xa is provided as a memory area for storing information related to the setting value (information for indicating the setting value), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the memory area to store information for indicating the setting value using a part (free area) of another memory area, and to store an address indicating the memory area in which the information related to the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored in a specific area. In this case, it is preferable to configure the area in which the information related to the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored to be changed periodically or irregularly.

It is also advisable to configure the information about the setting values (information for indicating the setting values) to be processed according to predetermined rules in accordance with the specifications of the storage area that stores the information about the setting values. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that the setting values will be illegally obtained based on the information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The setting change in progress flag 223xb is a flag to indicate that the setting is currently being changed, and is set to ON when a change in progress command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the main control unit 110 (see F2072 in FIG. 773). Then, it is set to OFF when it is determined that a change completion command indicating that the setting change has been completed has been received (see F2074 in FIG. 773).

By providing this setting change in progress flag 223xb, it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the operation status of the setting change operation executed by the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of the standby processing (see F2051 in FIG. 773) executed until the setting change operation is completed can be switched according to the operation status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The voice fixed flag 223xc is a flag for indicating a period during which the voice data output as audio is not changed, and is set to ON when a period during which the voice data output as audio is not changed is set. In this 24th control example, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of sound output from the pachinko machine 10 can be determined using the voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the stopped and displayed third symbol. Then, when the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, the voice output can be continuously executed using the voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won until the next jackpot is won.

The voice fixed flag 223xc is set to ON (F2675 in FIG. 777) when it is determined that the third symbol to be stopped is the third symbol indicating a jackpot win (the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot win variation) in the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777) executed when a stop command for stopping the third symbol is received, and the setting status is determined each time a stop command is received (see F2671 in FIG. 777). Here, if it is determined that the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671 in FIG. 777: Yes), the process for identifying a new voice command for the current third symbol stop display is skipped. Then, it is set to OFF when setting the stop type corresponding to the jackpot win variation (see F4003 in FIG. 776).

Although a detailed description is omitted, in this 24th control example, the player can set the voice fixed flag 223xc, which is set to ON, to OFF by operating the operation means (effect button 22). By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot is won with a third symbol with a character type that is not intended by the player, it is possible to prevent audio output using voice data corresponding to the unintended character type from continuing for a long period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 769, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 769(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 302. As shown in FIG. 769(a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302xa.

The audio file storage area 302xa is a storage area that stores voice data corresponding to character types in addition to audio files (audio data) used to output music and sound effects in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from this audio file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

In addition, when a voice command for voice indicating the type of voice data is notified by the voice lamp control device 113, voice data corresponding to the voice command is read from this voice file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306.

Furthermore, the audio file storage area 302xa stores a dedicated audio file that is output when an audio voice command is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, and when an audio voice command for indicating the type of voice data is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, a dedicated audio file corresponding to the voice command is read from this audio file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the sound output device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. 769(b). FIG. 769(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 769(b), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a command memory area 303xa and a selected voice storage area 303xb.

The command memory area 303a is an area where various commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see F6002 in FIG. 781) of the voice output device 226 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 303a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and executes processing according to the command.

The selected voice storage area 303xb is a storage area for storing the type of voice data read from the voice file storage area 302xa in response to a voice command notified from the voice lamp control device 113. When a voice command is output from the voice lamp control device 113, the type of voice data corresponding to the voice command received from the voice file storage area 302xa is stored, and then, when the process of outputting new voice is executed by the voice output device 226, the voice data of the voice to be output is formed based on the information indicating the type of voice data stored in the selected voice storage area 303xb.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in 24th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 770, the start-up process 24 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 770 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (F1701). In the initial setting process (F1701), a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

Next, it is determined whether the setting key 110b is in the ON position (F1751). If it is determined in the process of F1751 that the setting key 110b is in the ON position (F1751: Yes), this means that the setting is changed or confirmed, so a setting value control process is executed to perform control corresponding to these states (F1752), and the process proceeds to F1710, which will be described later. Details of this setting value control process (F1752) will be described later with reference to FIG. 771. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1751 that the setting key 110b is not in the ON position (F1751: No), the process proceeds to F1704.

In the process of F1704, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 756) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored (F1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to F1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (F1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (F1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, too, processing transitions to F1712. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (F1713, F1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1714). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to F1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power outage information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (F1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (F1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (F1709), and processing proceeds to F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of F1710, an initialization command indicating permission for effects is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, a status command including information indicating the current game status and information regarding the current setting values is set (F1753), interrupt permission is set (F1712), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, referring to FIG. 771, the contents of the setting value control process (F1752), which is one process in the startup process 24 (see FIG. 770) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be explained. FIG. 771 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the setting value control process (F1752).

As shown in FIG. 771, in the setting value control process (F1752), first, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 756) is turned on (F1901), and if it is turned on (F1901: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1902). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes in a state where it can start the payout control of the game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (F1903, F1904). In the initialization process of RAM (F1903, F1904), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared (F1903), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (F1904). After the initialization process of RAM 203 is performed, a change command indicating that the settings are being changed is sent (F1905), and the process proceeds to F1906.

In the process of F1906, it is determined whether the setting switch 110c is on (pressed) (F1906). If it is determined in the process of F1906 that the setting switch 110c is on (pressed) (F1906: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203xa is updated by adding 1 (F1907), and the process proceeds to F1908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1906 that the setting switch is off (F1906: No), the process of F1907 is skipped and the process proceeds to F1908.

In the process of F1908, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is in the off position (F1908). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is in the off position (F1908: Yes), a change completion command indicating that the setting change is complete is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 (F1909), and this process ends. In other words, the setting change state is ended, and the process returns to the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 770). This allows the state to be transitioned to a playable state in which normal play is possible.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is not in the OFF position (F1908: No), the process returns to F1906. In other words, each of the processes of F1906 to F1908 is repeated until it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is in the OFF position.

In addition, in the process of F1901, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1901: No), first, a payout return command is sent to the payout control device 111 (F1910), and then the data in the setting value storage area 203xa is read (F1911). When the process of F1911 is completed, next, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (F1912), a state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (F1913), and it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position (F1914). In the process of F1914, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position (F1914: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. In other words, it is transitioned to a playable state. On the other hand, in the process of F1914, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not placed in the OFF position (F1914: No), the process of F1914 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting confirmation state continues until the setting key 110b is placed in the off position.

By executing this setting value control process (F1752: see FIG. 771), the setting value can be varied in the setting change state in response to the operation of the setting switch 110c. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be kept displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed in the OFF position.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 772 to Fig. 779. In the 24th control example, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example described above are different in that the start-up process 24 (see Fig. 772) is executed instead of the start-up process (see Fig. 716), the command determination process 24 (see F2172 in Fig. 774) is executed instead of the command determination process (see F2112 in Fig. 718), the state command reception process 24 (see F2271 in Fig. 775) is executed instead of the state command reception process (see F2202 in Fig. 719), and the stop symbol type setting process 24 (see F2272 in Fig. 776) is executed when a stop type command is received from the main control device 110. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the processing contents of start-up process 24 will be described with reference to FIG. 772. FIG. 772 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start-up process 24. As shown in FIG. 772, start-up process 24 differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 716) executed in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it executes a wait process (F2051) before executing the process F2010 that executes the initial value setting of the RAM, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the processing contents of the standby process (F2051) executed in the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 772) will be explained with reference to FIG. 773. FIG. 773 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the standby process (F2051). In this standby process (F2051), when a setting change operation is being executed, processing is executed to hold the progress of the start-up process 24 by the voice lamp control device 113 until the setting change operation is completed.

When the standby process (F2051) is executed, it is first determined whether a change command has been received (F2071). If it is determined that a change command has been received (F2071: Yes), the setting change flag 223xb is set to on (F2072), and then it is determined whether a change completion command has been received (F2073).

If it is determined in the process of F2073 that a change completion command has been received, i.e., that a command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed has been received (F2073: Yes), the setting change in progress flag 223xb is set to off (F2074) and the process proceeds to start-up process 24. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2073 that a change completion command has not been received, i.e., that a command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed has not been received (F2073: No), the process of F2073 is looped until a change completion command is received. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 772) of the voice lamp control device 113 from terminating during the setting change operation.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of F2071 that a change command has not been received, i.e., if a setting change operation has not been performed (F2071), the processes of F2072 to F2074 are skipped and the process moves to start-up process 24. By configuring in this way, if a setting change operation has not been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is not unnecessarily put on hold, making it easier to quickly complete the various processes (start-up processes in each control device) that are performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Next, referring to FIG. 774, the processing contents of the command determination process 24 (F2172) in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 774 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the command determination process 24 (F2172). As shown in FIG. 774, the command determination process 24 (F2172) differs from the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 718) in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that the processing executed when a state command is received is changed from the state command reception process 22 (see F2202 in FIG. 719) to the state command reception process 24 (F2271 in FIG. 775), that when a stop type command is received, the stop pattern type determination process 24 (see F2272 in FIG. 776) is executed, and that the processing executed when a stop command is received is changed from the stop command process 22 (see F2214 in FIG. 724) to the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777). The rest of the processing is the same, so the same reference numbers are used for the same processing, and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of status command reception process 24 (F2271) will be described with reference to FIG. 775. FIG. 775 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of status command reception process 24 (F2271). This status command reception process 24 (F2271) differs from the command determination process in the 22nd control example described above (see F2112 in FIG. 718) in that a process that is executed when it is determined that setting value information has been received has been added, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 718) is executed, it is first determined whether setting value information has been received (F2371). If it is determined that setting value information has been received (F2371: Yes), the setting value information included in the received command is stored in the setting value storage area 223xa (F2372), and the process proceeds to F2301.

If it is determined in the process of F2371 that the setting value information has not been received (F2371: No), or when the process of F2372 is completed, the process of F2301 to F2312 is executed, which is the same as the command determination process in the 22nd control example described above (see F2112 in FIG. 718), and this process is terminated.

As described above, by storing the setting value information in the setting value storage area 223xa through the processing of F2372, when setting a setting suggestion effect to suggest the set setting value, it is possible to reliably set the effect mode based on the currently set setting value.

Next, referring to FIG. 776, the processing contents of the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272) will be explained. FIG. 776 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272). In this stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272), a process is executed to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped this time based on the stop type command (jackpot, missed reach, or spread) received from the main control device 110.

When the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272) is executed, first the stop symbol type selection flag is set to ON (F4001), and then it is determined whether the current stop symbol type is a "jackpot" (F4002). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (F4002: Yes), the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to ON. In other words, the bonus to be awarded when a jackpot is won is set (F4003).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "jackpot A", i.e., whether it is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (F4004). If it is determined to be "jackpot A" (F4004; Yes), a lottery is held to determine the type of the third symbol, and a third symbol (odd winning symbol) with a number icon indicating an odd number is determined, and a stop type corresponding to the determined third symbol type is set (F4005), and then the process proceeds to F4010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F4004 that the jackpot type is not "jackpot A" (F4004: No), a lottery is held to determine the type of the third symbol, and a third symbol (even number winning symbol) with a number icon indicating an even number is determined, and a stop type corresponding to the determined third symbol type is set (F4005), and then the process proceeds to F4010.

In addition, in the process of F4002, if it is determined that the type of the current stopping symbol is not a "jackpot" (F4002: No), it is determined whether the received stopping symbol is a "missed reach" (F4007), and if it is determined that it is a "missed reach" (F4007: Yes), a lottery is held to determine the type of the third symbol to set the stopping symbol corresponding to the missed reach (F4008), and then the process proceeds to F4010. In the process of F4007, if it is determined that it is not a "missed reach" (F4007: No), the stopping symbol type corresponding to the variable type is set (F4009), and the process proceeds to F4010.

In other words, in this 24th control example, the odd-numbered third symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a display mode indicating a jackpot win only when "jackpot A" is won. Therefore, the multiple numbers (number icons) attached to the third symbol become identification information that can suggest the type of jackpot when a jackpot wins. And, since the odd-numbered third symbol is associated with a jackpot win that is more advantageous to the player than the even-numbered third symbol, it becomes the third symbol that is more advantageous to the player.

In the process of F4010, a character change lottery is executed (F4010), and then it is determined whether the character change lottery has been won (F4011). If it is determined that the lottery has been won (F4011: Yes), a decision is made to display a special third pattern corresponding to the winning content (F4012), a display command corresponding to the decided content is set (F4013), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won in the process of F4011 (F4011: No), this process ends as it is.

In the 24th control example, the display of the special third pattern (a third pattern in which the type of number icon and the type of character are different from those of the basic third pattern) is determined by lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to be selectable by the player. In this case, the player may be configured to be able to select whether or not to determine the display of the special third pattern, and the combination of the special third patterns (determination of the character type to be assigned to a specific number icon, or the type of number icon to be assigned to a specific character type) may also be selectable by the player. Furthermore, when the combination of the special third patterns is configured to be selectable (determined) by the player, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the special third pattern selected (determined) by the player to be displayable separately from the third pattern that is displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can freely check the display mode of the special third pattern.

Next, the processing contents of stop command processing 24 (F2273) will be explained with reference to FIG. 777. FIG. 777 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of stop command processing 24 (F2273). As shown in FIG. 777, stop command processing 24 (F2273) differs from stop command processing 22 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see F2214 in FIG. 724) in that processing related to setting voice data has been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the stop command process 24 (F2273) is executed, first, the processes F2651 to F2656 are executed, which are the same as the stop command process 22 of the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see F2214 in FIG. 724). Then, after completing the process of F2656, it is determined whether the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to on (F2671). If it is determined that it is not set to on (F2671: No), a voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa (F2672), a voice command for voice to indicate the determined voice command is set (F2673), and the process proceeds to F2674. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2671 that the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to on (F2671: Yes), there is no need to determine new voice data based on the current stop display, so the processes of F2672 and F2673 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2674.

In the process of F2674, it is determined whether the third symbol currently displayed as stopped is a jackpot stop (whether it is the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol that won the jackpot) (F2674), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot stop (F2674: Yes), the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to on (F2675), the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of F2674 that it is not a jackpot stop (F2674: No), the process of F2675 is skipped, the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 778, the processing contents of the pending performance execution process 24 (F3179) at the start of fluctuation will be explained. FIG. 778 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pending performance execution process 24 (F3179) at the start of fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 778, the pending performance execution process 24 (F3179) at the start of fluctuation differs from the pending performance execution process 22 (F3109) at the start of fluctuation in the 22nd control example described above in that it executes the pending action determination process (F3271) when it is determined that the fluctuation time is less than 10 seconds (F3203: No), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 779, the processing contents of the reserved action determination process (F3271) will be explained. FIG. 779 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reserved action determination process (F3271). In this reserved action determination process (F3271), processing is performed to set a shift chance presentation when the change time of the special symbol change to be executed is short (less than 10 seconds) and it is difficult to execute the reserved change presentation (see the 22nd control example) while maintaining the reserved symbol in the same display area.

As shown in FIG. 779, when the pending action determination process (F3271) is executed, first, the pending action is determined by referring to the pending action selection table 222xb (F4101), a display command indicating the presentation mode corresponding to the determined pending action is set (F4102), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing in the audio output device 226>
Next, with reference to Figures 780 to 782, the contents of the control processing executed by the audio output device 226 in this 24th control example will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 780(a), the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 780(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main processing of this audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command output process is executed (F6001) for transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 a synthetic audio command that is generated based on the average amplitude obtained by sampling the synthetic audio data for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) during the command determination process (F6002). Next, a command determination process is executed (F6002) for performing processing according to a command received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the ADC 309. Details of this command determination process (F6002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 781. After the processing of F6002, an audio setting process is executed (F6003) for playing audio data (audio file) according to the performance. Details of this audio setting process (F6003) will be described later with reference to FIG. 782.

When the processing of F6003 is completed, it is determined whether or not information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 303 (F6004). If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of F6004 (F6004: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (F6006), and the power outage processing is executed (F6007). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (F6008), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of F6004 (F6004: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAM 303 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 303 (F6005), and if RAM 303 has not been corrupted (F6005: No), the process returns to F6001 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 303 has been corrupted (F6005: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, referring to FIG. 780(b), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 780(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing.

This command interrupt process (see FIG. 780(b)) is executed each time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in the command buffer area provided in RAM 303 (F6501), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 781, we will explain the command determination process (F6002), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 780) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG. 781 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (F6002).

In the command determination process (F6002), first it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (F6101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (F6101: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (F6101: Yes), the new command flag indicating that a new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (F6102), and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (F6103).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (F6104). This audio variation pattern command is set at the timing when a detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected (see F2910 in FIG. 727) in the variation display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727) of the audio lamp control device 113, and also to notify the type of audio to be played and the output timing corresponding to that display mode.

If it is determined in the processing of F6104 that there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (F6104: Yes), the music and sound effects to be used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are identified (F6105), the output channel and output timing of the identified music and sound effects are set (F6106), and processing returns to F6101.

If it is determined in the process of F6104 that there is no voice variable pattern command (F6104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a voice command (voice command) among the unprocessed commands (F6107). This voice command for voice is generated in the stop command process 24 (see FIG. 777) of the voice lamp control device 113 in response to the process of determining voice data based on the character type attached to the stopped and displayed third pattern (see F2672 in FIG. 777), and is output to the voice output device 226 by the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717) of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the process of F6107, if it is determined that there is a voice command for voice among the unprocessed commands (F6107: Yes), it identifies (obtains) the voice data corresponding to the notified voice type (F6108), stores the identified voice data in the selected voice storage area 303xb (F6109), and determines whether the currently received voice command for voice contains information for granting a special bonus (F6110). If it is determined that there is a special bonus (F6110: Yes), it reads the corresponding bonus audio from the audio file storage area 302xa, sets the output timing of the bonus audio (F6111), and returns to the process of S6101.

Next, referring to FIG. 782, we will explain the details of the audio setting process (F6003), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 780) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG. 782 is a flowchart showing the contents of this audio setting process (F6003).

In the audio setting process (F6003), it is first determined whether it is time to output (play) a song (F6201). If it is determined in the process of F6201 that it is time to output a song (F6201: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current song is read (F6202), the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6203), the song output flag is set to ON (F6204), and the process moves to F6205. The channel to output the audio file is predetermined for each file; for example, the audio file of the song used in the variable performance is preset to be output to channel 1.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F6201 that it is not time to output music (F6201: No), the processes of F6202 to F6204 are skipped and the process proceeds to F6205.

In the process of F6205, it is determined whether it is the timing to output a sound effect (F6205). If it is not the timing to output a sound effect (F6205: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to output a sound effect (F6205: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current sound effect is read (F6206), the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6207), and it is determined whether it is the timing to output a bonus audio (F6208). In the process of F6208, if it is determined that it is not the timing to output a bonus audio (F6208: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the timing to output a bonus audio (F6208: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current bonus audio is read (F6209), the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6210), and this process ends.

<25th control example>
Next, the 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 783 to Fig. 794. Conventionally, a variable presentation indicating a big win by stopping and displaying a plurality (three) of third symbols in a specific combination (same symbol), in which a part of the plurality of third symbols (e.g., two of three third symbols) is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a part of a specific combination indicating a big win, and the remaining third symbols (e.g., the remaining one of three third symbols) are displayed in a variable manner (so-called reach state), and a variable presentation (reach variable presentation) is executed to provoke the player as to in what manner the remaining third symbols will be stopped and displayed.

The reach variation effect involves informing the player of the number of types of third symbols that can be stopped and displayed within a range that is more limited than the number of types of third symbols that can be variably displayed, and executing a reach variation effect in which one third symbol is stopped and displayed from among the types of third symbols that have been notified.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the type of third pattern that will be stopped and displayed before the third pattern (final stopping pattern) that is being changed during the reach-changing performance is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, if the notified content indicates that there is a high possibility that the final stopping pattern will be stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win (if the occupancy rate of the third pattern types that indicate a jackpot win is high among the third pattern types that are notified as the types of third patterns that may be stopped and displayed as the final stopping pattern), it is possible to have the player focus on the reach-changing performance while increasing their sense of anticipation for a jackpot win, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, there are also known devices that are configured to notify multiple patterns of the same type of third pattern that can be displayed during a reach-changing performance, based on the number of types of third patterns that can be displayed during the reach-changing performance. Specifically, for example, a jackpot is indicated when the third patterns are displayed as a combination of "111," and in a reach-changing state in which two third patterns are displayed as "11" and the remaining third pattern (final stopped pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, five candidates for the stop display mode of the final stopped pattern, including two "1"s indicating a jackpot win and three "2"s indicating a miss win, are indicated before the final stopped pattern is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily vary the proportion of stop display modes that indicate a win among all the stop display mode candidates for the final stop pattern, making it easier for the player to predict in advance whether the result of the variable presentation currently being performed is a result that indicates a jackpot win or a result that indicates a miss win.

However, in the above-mentioned reach-changing presentation, when the presentation result indicates a jackpot, the proportion of stop display modes indicating a jackpot in the stop display modes of the final stop patterns notified in advance is increased, thereby providing a presentation that gradually increases the player's anticipation of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the presentation result is not a jackpot, the proportion of stop display modes indicating a jackpot in the stop display modes of the final stop patterns notified in advance is decreased, resulting in a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced before the presentation result of the reach-changing presentation is displayed (the final stop pattern is displayed).

In contrast to this, in the present 25th control example, in a specific reach state, after the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern is notified, the type of the third pattern displayed as the reach state is made variable. Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 2" is notified as the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern notified during the reach state of "22", the reach state mode is made switchable from "22" to "11".

In other words, the third symbol type during a reach state is configured to be different so that the display mode of the final stop symbol indicating a miss win during a specific reach state becomes the display mode of the final stop symbol indicating a win.

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win is low at the time the candidate stop display modes for the final stop pattern are announced, it is possible to leave open the possibility that the third pattern type in the reach state will switch and the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win will increase, allowing the player to play the reach variation presentation until the very end without getting bored.

Furthermore, in this 25th control example, in a specific reach state, after the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern is notified, the type of the third pattern displayed as the reach state can be increased. Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 3" is notified as the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern notified during the reach state of "22", the reach state mode can be switched from "22" (single reach) to "11" and "22" (double reach).

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win is low at the time when the candidate stop display modes for the final stop pattern are announced, it is possible to increase the number of third pattern types that are in a reach state, leaving open the possibility of an increase in the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win, so that the reach variation presentation can be executed until the very end without the player getting bored.

There has been a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable performance in which a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol is displayed on a display screen (third symbol display device) composed of a liquid crystal display during a period in which identification information (special symbol) for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery is displayed in a variable manner. In this conventional pachinko machine 10, it is common for the player to predict whether the result of the special symbol lottery is favorable to the player (a big win) or unfavorable to the player (a losing win) depending on the content of the variable performance executed before the lottery result is announced, and it is known that a variable performance with a different performance mode can be executed based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, thereby enabling a variable performance (advantageous variable performance) that is more likely to be executed when a big win has been won than when a big win has not been won (a losing win), and a variable performance (unfavorable variable performance) that is more likely to be executed when a big win has not been won (a losing win) than when a big win has been won.

Furthermore, in pachinko machines 10, due to the nature of the game in which a player is given a special bonus in the event of a jackpot win, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is generally set lower than the probability of winning a miss. Even if a player continues playing for a long period of time in a game in which the special pattern lottery results in a miss and a win, in order to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing, some machines are configured to be able to set a wide variety of presentation modes as the presentation mode of the adverse variation presentation, preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

With a conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the more presentation modes that can be determined as the presentation modes of the variable presentation, the less likely it is that players will become bored with the game. However, as the number of presentation modes that can be set increases, the amount of display data required to execute the variable presentation also increases, resulting in an increase in manufacturing costs.

In contrast to this, in the present 25th control example, the scale of the display area can be changed without changing the display data set as the presentation mode of the variable presentation, making it possible to provide the player with different variable presentations. Specifically, by sending a scale command to the display control device 114 to change the scale of the display area, the display image that was displayed on the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be reduced and displayed on a partial area of the display screen, or the display image that was displayed on a partial area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be enlarged to occupy the entire display screen. In addition to changing the scale of the display image, it is also possible to add a twist to the display image and vary the three-dimensional balance in the depth direction.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow players to experience variable presentations in many different display formats without increasing the amount of display data for the variable presentation, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 in which players do not quickly become bored with the game.

In addition, in the 25th control example, a plurality of image layers are provided to form the display image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the scale setting of the display area described above can be set for each image layer. By configuring in this way, for example, among various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an image layer on which a display image corresponding to a variable performance being performed is displayed and an image layer on which a display image corresponding to information on the game (for example, reserved information indicating the number of reserved symbols, time-saving information indicating the number of time-saving times, etc.) is displayed can be formed differently, and the scale setting can be performed only for the image layer on which the display image corresponding to the variable performance is displayed. Therefore, while providing a novel performance to the player by changing the scale of the display image, it is possible to continuously display the display image (for example, time-saving number display, reserved symbol display) corresponding to the information to be notified to the player (game information) without scaling it, so that information on the game can be easily notified to the player while providing a variety of performances to the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this 25th control example has multiple image layers (image layers for variable display) corresponding to the variable performance, for example, a main image layer on which at least the third pattern is displayed variably, and a sub-image layer formed behind the main image layer on which the background image of the variable performance is displayed. And, when the main image layer is scaled to the normal scale, it is configured so that the display mode displayed on the sub-layer is difficult for the player to see.

When a scale setting is executed to reduce the display area for the main image layer, the display image displayed on the main image layer is displayed in an area smaller than the display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can view the display image displayed on the sub-image layer from an area (empty display area) of the display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 where the display image displayed on the reduced main image layer is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the displayed image is not simply scaled, but the player can see a new display mode (the display mode displayed on the sub-image layer), which can further enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 25th control example is configured to be able to execute a scale setting to change the scale of the display image at various times for the variable effect being executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the scale effect that reduces the scale of the display image will be executed, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, in this 25th control example, the above-mentioned scale-down effect is more likely to be executed when the variable effect being executed results in a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring it in this way, the player can play the game while expecting the scale-down effect to be executed.

In this case, when a reduced-scale effect is executed, it is advisable to configure the display mode for the sub-layer to be preset so that a display mode for informing the player that a reduced-scale effect is being executed (for example, a display of "reduced-scale effect in progress") or a display mode for indicating that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot (for example, a display of "chance") is displayed in a display area of the image layer (sub-layer) formed behind the image layer (main image layer) whose display area is being reduced that does not overlap with the reduced main image layer, i.e., a display area that the player can see when the display area of the main image layer is reduced.

By configuring it in this way, when an effect (reduced-scale effect) is executed that changes the scale of the display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has broken down. In addition, when a reduced-scale effect is executed, it is possible to provide the player with information that is advantageous to the player as information that becomes visible, so that the player can play while being more excited about the execution of the reduced-scale effect.

Here, as in the twenty-fifth control example, if a setting can be made to scale the display area in which the display image is displayed without changing the display data constituting the display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the scale of the display mode (for example, the number icon showing the third pattern) displayed in the display image will also change according to the set scale, so if the aspect ratio is made different before and after scaling, the aspect ratio of the displayed display mode will also change. In this case, if a scaling effect is executed while a number icon (third pattern) is being displayed as a variable effect to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot has been won, the number displayed as the third pattern will be distorted, causing a problem that the player will misinterpret it.

In addition, when multiple third symbols are displayed stationary in a reach state and the remaining third symbols are displayed in a variable manner, if a reduced-scale effect is executed while the remaining third symbols (the variable third symbols) are displayed in a frame-by-frame manner (where each third symbol changes while temporarily stopping on the reach line), there is a problem that the player may misidentify the type of third symbol (number type) that is temporarily stopped on the reach line.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a variable presentation in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a combination indicating a miss during the variable presentation period, and then the third symbol is displayed again in a variable presentation to execute a presentation with a high expectation of a jackpot (development presentation), if a reduced-scale presentation is executed while the third symbol is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped third symbol changes shape, causing the player to misidentify the type of the third symbol (number type).

As mentioned above, if a player misidentifies the type of third symbol (number type), even if a combination of third symbols indicating a loss is displayed, the player may mistakenly believe that the combination of third symbols indicates a jackpot win, which could lead to a sense of distrust that a jackpot game is not being played.

Specifically, when the third symbol corresponding to the number "9" is in a reach state and the remaining third symbol is a "8" that is temporarily stopped on the reach line, the display state of the transformed "9" becomes difficult to distinguish from the display state of the "8", and there is a risk that the player will be misled into thinking that the same type of third symbol is stopped and displayed on the line (the third symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win).

In response to this problem, in the present 25th control example, when a reduced-scale effect is executed in a state where all the third symbols are displayed stopped (including provisional stop displays) on the winning line, or in a state just before all the third symbols are displayed stopped (including provisional stop displays) on the winning line, display control can be executed that makes it difficult for the player to see at least the last third symbol to be displayed stopped (final third symbol).

Specifically, a reserve image layer with a transparency of 100% is always provided in front of the main image layer on which the third symbol is displayed, and when a reduced-scale effect is executed, the same scale setting can be executed for the main image layer and the reserve image layer. When a reduced-scale effect is executed, the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed on the main image layer is determined, and if it is determined that the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is an effect pattern that may cause the above-mentioned problem, the excess rate of the display area of the reserve image layer that overlaps with the display area of the final third symbol on the main layer is reduced, making it difficult for the player to see the final third symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to see the display state of the final third pattern when the reduced-scale effect is being executed, which prevents the player from mistaking the combination of the third patterns that are displayed as stopped (including provisionally stopped) on the winning line.

In this way, by configuring the display area to be scaled at the same scale for the main image layer and the auxiliary image layer, no matter what scale the scale effect is performed at, any part of the main image layer can be made invisible (hard to see) using the display mode displayed on the auxiliary image layer.

Furthermore, in this 25th control example, display control is executed in advance to display a display mode (e.g., the word "chance") to indicate to the player that there is a high probability of winning the jackpot in at least the display area of the preliminary image layer that overlaps with the display area of the final third pattern in the main image layer, and when the transmittance of a portion of the preliminary image layer is reduced based on the execution of a reduced-scale performance, the display mode (e.g., the word "chance") to indicate to the player that there is a high probability of winning the jackpot displayed on the preliminary image layer is displayed in a manner that is visible to the player.

<About the performance content in the 25th control example>
Next, the contents of the characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 783 to Fig. 787. In the 25th control example, after the reach state is displayed, a plurality of pattern icons are displayed to suggest the type of the third pattern (final stop third pattern) that is finally stopped and displayed, and a pattern stock reach effect is executed in which the third pattern corresponding to any one of the displayed plurality of pattern icons is finally stopped and displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player of candidates that may be displayed as the final third stop pattern after the reach state is established, making it easier for the player to predict the outcome of the current variable presentation.

Now, the contents of the symbol stock reach effect will be explained with reference to Fig. 783 and Fig. 784. Fig. 783(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the symbol stock reach effect is started, Fig. 783(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the time when multiple symbol icons are stocked in the symbol stock reach effect, Fig. 784(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the multiple stocked symbol icons are temporarily hidden from the display screen, and Fig. 784(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the performance result of the symbol stock reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 783(a), the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner above the main display area Dm in the display manner "2↓2" to indicate that the current state is a reach state, and the word "Reach" is displayed in the display area HR3 formed near the third symbol displayed in the display manner indicating the reach state, as a guide to indicate that the current state is a reach state. When the symbol stock reach performance is started, the comment "Stock symbols" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide to the performance content of the symbol stock reach performance, and a performance is executed below the main display area Dm in which the character 801 collects symbol icons.

The example shown in FIG. 783(a) shows a state in which one pattern icon (first pattern icon 802a) has already been acquired (accumulated). The pattern icon is provided with a display mode that allows the player to recognize the type of the corresponding third pattern, and the first pattern icon 802a shown in FIG. 783(a) is provided with the display mode "1" to indicate that it corresponds to the third pattern of "1". In this 25th control example, the pattern icon is configured to be displayable as a display mode to suggest the display mode of the final stopped third pattern, and the display mode of the pattern icon is formed in a display mode that allows the player to recognize the type of the corresponding third pattern and allows the player to recognize that the pattern icon is not the third pattern.

Specifically, the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is formed in a display mode in which a mark indicating the type (number) of the corresponding third symbol is added inside a sphere that resembles a round ball. By configuring it in this way, when the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is displayed while the third symbol is in a reach state, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is the final stopped third symbol.

Also, as shown in FIG. 783(a), the pattern icon is configured to be displayed in a location significantly different from the variable display area of the third pattern. By configuring it in this way, when one pattern icon (for example, the first pattern icon 802a) is displayed while the variable performance is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third pattern (two patterns) in the reach state and the pattern icon (one pattern) are combined to form a combination indicating a jackpot win, and the third pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

Next, in the pattern stock reach performance, when multiple pattern icons are acquired (stocked), multiple pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) are displayed as shown in FIG. 783(b). In this 25th control example, the maximum number of pattern icons that can be stocked is four, so the state shown in FIG. 783(b) is the state in which the maximum number of pattern icons are stocked. Therefore, the comment "Stock completed" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a notification mode to inform the player that the maximum number of pattern icons has been acquired (stocked).

By configuring it in this way, during the symbol stock reach performance, the player can be easily notified whether the number of stocked symbol icons is at the maximum number, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player unnecessarily expects more symbol icons to be stocked even when the number of stocked symbol icons cannot be increased any further.

Also, by positioning the character 801 between the first pattern icon 802a and the second pattern icon 802b, the three pattern icons are not displayed side by side. This configuration prevents pattern icons corresponding to the same third pattern type (e.g., "1") from being displayed side by side without any other display modes in between, which can prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third pattern indicating a jackpot win is being displayed in a stopped state.

In the example shown in FIG. 783(b), the four pattern icons are displayed in a straight line. For example, when the first pattern icon 802a and the fourth pattern icon 802d displayed to the right of the character 801 are displayed in a display mode to indicate the same third pattern type, the player may mistakenly believe that a new reach-established line has been established between the first pattern icon 802a and the fourth pattern icon 802d.

As shown in FIG. 783(b), when multiple pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) are displayed, it is advisable to determine the display position of each pattern icon so that they are not positioned on a straight line. By configuring in this way, even if multiple pattern icons are displayed on the display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that a new reach-established line has been established. In addition to this, it is also possible to configure each pattern icon to be displayed in a different manner or to have a different size. Even when using such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that a new reach-established line has been established.

After that, when the maximum number of stocks (acquisitions) is acquired in the pattern stock reach performance, as shown in FIG. 784(a), the acquired pattern icon rises and is temporarily removed from the display area. Then, the character 801 performs an action to display the acquired pattern icon on the display screen again, and a third pattern corresponding to one of the stocked pattern icons is stopped and displayed as the final stop third pattern.

In the above-mentioned pattern stock reach effect, if the effect result indicates a jackpot win, the proportion of pattern icons corresponding to the third pattern indicating a jackpot win among the types of pattern icons displayed in advance is increased, thereby providing an effect that gradually increases the player's anticipation of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, if the effect result is not a jackpot win, the proportion of pattern icons corresponding to the third pattern indicating a jackpot win among the types of pattern icons displayed in advance is decreased, resulting in a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced before the effect result of the pattern stock reach effect is displayed (the final stopped third pattern is displayed).

In contrast, in the present 25th control example, the type of the third symbol in the reach state can also be changed using the stored symbol icon. In this case, in FIG. 784(b), the reach state of "2↓2" was displayed in the state shown in FIG. 784(a), but the symbol icon switches to the reach state of "1↓1", and "1" is stopped and displayed as the final stopped third symbol, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination to indicate to the player that he has won the jackpot.

In other words, during the first half of the symbol stock reach performance, the symbol icon corresponding to the final stop third symbol, which indicates a losing win, is configured to switch to a symbol icon corresponding to the final stop third symbol, which indicates a winning win.

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win is low when all the pattern icons are displayed in the pattern stock reach performance, it is possible for the third pattern type in the reach state to switch and leave open the possibility that the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win will increase, allowing the player to play the pattern stock reach performance until the very end without getting bored.

Although not shown in the figures, in this 25th control example, it is possible to set a presentation mode in which, as a symbol stock reach presentation, after all symbol icons are displayed, the type of the third symbol displayed as a reach state is increased. Specifically, it is possible to switch the reach state from the "2↓2" reach state shown in FIG. 784(a) to "11" and "22" (double reach) using the symbol icons.

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win is low when all pattern icons that are candidates for the stop display mode of the final stop third pattern are displayed, it is possible to leave open the possibility of increasing the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win by increasing the number of third pattern types that are in a reach state, so that the player can enjoy the pattern stock reach performance until the end without getting bored.

Next, referring to Figures 785 and 786, the contents of the screen press effect in this 25th control example will be explained. In this 25th control example, after creating a display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a processing process for processing the display image can be executed. Furthermore, this processing is not performed on the entire display image, but on the various sprites displayed on the display image, which are divided into multiple image layer units and processing can be executed corresponding to each image layer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 785(a), at least a sub-image layer fr, a main image layer sr, a reserve image layer yr, and a main image layer hr are provided from the rear side as image layers that form the display image. The display image that is normally displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and is visible to the player is formed by display images generated on the main image layer sr, where the main effects such as the variable effects of the third pattern are displayed, and the main image layer hr, where the fourth pattern related to the game result is displayed.

The sub-image layer fr is configured to always be difficult for the player to see due to the display image displayed on the main image layer sr, and is only visible to the player when, for example, a processing process is performed on the main image layer sr to reduce its display area. The reserve image layer yr is normally set to a transparency of 100%, and is configured so that the display image displayed on the reserve image layer yr cannot be seen by the player. This reserve image layer yr is specified to be processed in conjunction with the main image layer sr.

In other words, when a processing process with a reduction rate of A% is performed on the main image layer sr, a processing process with a reduction rate of A% is also performed on the reserve image layer yr. Therefore, the display positions of the display image displayed on the main image layer sr and the display image displayed on the reserve image layer yr are always synchronized regardless of the processing content of the processing. And, the reserve image layer yr is configured to be processed by processing to change the transparency. By configuring in this way, for example, when a processing process to change the aspect ratio is performed on the main image layer sr, if there is a risk that the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the main image layer sr will be deformed and the player will misidentify the type of the third pattern that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to hide the deformed third pattern by lowering the transparency of the reserve image layer yr (to 0%).

Next, the display image of the preliminary image layer yr will be described with reference to FIG. 785(b). As shown in FIG. 785(b), the preliminary image layer yr is an image layer in which a display image for concealment is displayed in an area where the display position overlaps with the display area of the third pattern displayed on the main image layer sr (at least the display area in which the third pattern that is the last to be stopped is displayed among the third patterns). In this 25th control example, the display process is always executed on the preliminary image layer yr, and the transparency is set to 100%. Then, when a screen press effect in which the aspect ratio of the main image layer sr is changed is executed as a variable effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot, a processing process is performed to change the transparency from 100% to 0%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 785(b), a display image with the word "chance" is displayed as a display mode to show the player that the probability of winning a jackpot is high as a display image for concealment.

Next, the main image layer sr displays display images corresponding to the various variable effects executed in each of the control examples described above (see FIG. 785(c)). Then, as shown in FIG. 785(b), the sub-image layer fr always displays a display image corresponding to the case where a screen press effect in which the aspect ratio of the main image layer sr is changed is executed as a variable effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot. Although not shown, the main image layer hr displays game information related to the game result (information showing the result of the special pattern lottery and error display). This main image layer hr is an image layer on which no processing is performed on the display image. By configuring it in this way, important information related to the game can always be notified in the same manner, even if a processing process that changes the scale of the display image is executed.

Now, with reference to Figure 786, the contents of the screen press performance will be explained. Figure 786(a) is a diagram showing the normal display screen immediately before the start of the screen press performance, and Figure 786(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the screen press performance. The diagram shown in Figure 786(a) is in a state where no processing has been performed on any of the image layers. Therefore, the display image of the sub-image layer fr cannot be viewed, and the display image of the reserve image layer yr cannot be viewed either. Note that even in this state, display processing is being performed on the sub-image layer fr and the reserve image layer yr.

When the screen press performance is executed, the main image layer sr and the reserve image layer yr are processed with a scale A (a scale with a normal aspect ratio of 1:2 but with a scale of 1:8), and a variable performance is executed in which the display area (display image) of the main image layer sr is compressed vertically compared to normal. In this case, the third pattern "9" or "8" displayed on the main image layer sr appears to be displayed in a display mode close to "0", so if the press performance is executed with the display mode of the third pattern shown in FIG. 786(a) as it is, there is a risk that the third pattern with "0" added is mistakenly displayed in a display mode indicating a big win. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 786(b), the processing of the main image layer sr and the reserve image yr with a scale A (a scale with a normal aspect ratio of 1:2 but with a scale of 1:8) includes processing information that sets the transparency of the reserve image layer yr to 0%, and the display image of the reserve image layer yr is displayed at a position corresponding to the middle pattern "8". This prevents players from mistaking the third symbol with the "0" on it for a jackpot win.

In addition, the player is allowed to see the display image on the preliminary image layer yr with the word "chance" written on it, so it can be used not just to conceal the third symbol, but also as a display mode to indicate a high probability of winning the jackpot.

Then, in the empty display area created by processing the main image layer sr, the display image of the sub-image layer fr is displayed in a state that is visible to the player. A display image (arrow) is displayed on the sub-image layer fr to enhance the presentation effect of the main image layer sr being crushed. In addition, the words "Screen press presentation occurred" are displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 has broken down when the display area of the main image layer sr is suddenly deformed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 787, the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 25th control example will be described. FIG. 787 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 25th control example. As shown in FIG. 787, the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 25th control example is different from the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 22nd control example described above (see FIG. 693 (a)) in that a symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

The pattern stock reach selection table 222ya is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode of the pattern stock reach presentation, and is referenced when the type of presentation change is determined to be pattern stock reach (F3191 in FIG. 791: Yes) in the normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (see F3098 in FIG. 791) for setting a presentation change corresponding to a special pattern change when the normal state is set as the game state.

Here, the contents of the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya will be explained with reference to FIG. 788. FIG. 788 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya. As shown in FIG. 788, different presentation patterns are defined depending on the hit/miss judgment result and the acquired value of the second presentation counter 223vg. Here, in this 25th control example, an odd numbered symbol is configured to more easily notify the player that he or she has won a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than an even numbered symbol. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the symbol stock reach, each presentation pattern is defined so that the reach state of the odd numbered symbol "1.1" does not switch to the reach state of "2.2". By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing as the variable presentation progresses.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the 25th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 789. The display control device 114 in this 25th control example differs from the display control device 114 in the above-mentioned first control example in that an image processing data storage area 234a3 is provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and a processing information storage area 233aa is provided in the work RAM 233.

The image processing data memory area 234a3 is a memory area that stores processing information (image processing data) for changing the scale and inclination of a display image that is processed for display based on the drawing information stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list, i.e., the entire display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this 25th control example, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to execute processing based on processing information read from the image processing data memory area 234a3 on the display image generated by the image controller 237. This configuration makes it possible to easily vary the appearance of display images generated by the same drawing process. Therefore, it is possible to display display images with different display modes on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 without increasing the processing load of the drawing process.

The processing information storage area 233aa is a storage area for temporarily storing processing information read from the image processing data storage area 234a3. When the display control device 114 executes display processing, in parallel with the process of storing drawing information based on the drawing list in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, display processing is executed based on the drawing information already stored in the other frame buffer and the processing data stored in the processing information storage area 233aa.

Next, the contents of the drawing list generated by the display control device 114 in this 25th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 790. FIG. 790 is a schematic diagram showing the drawing list in this 25th control example.

As shown in FIG. 790, the 25th control example differs from the first control example described above in that it generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame's worth of image, rearranges the detailed information for each sprite, and creates a drawing list with the layer types broadly categorized. In other words, similar to the first control example described above, when the MPU 231 generates a drawing list, it is configured to rearrange the sprites in one frame's worth of image in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest to the back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, and specifies the layer type for that sprite order. It is then possible to perform image processing on a layer type basis.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 790, the layer types are defined as follows, from the back side: sub-layer fr, main layer sr, spare layer yr, and main layer hr.

<Regarding the processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th control example>
Next, the processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 25th control example will be described. The control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 25th control example is different from the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that the normal state presentation mode determination processing 25 (see F3098 in FIG. 791) is executed instead of the normal state presentation mode determination processing 22 (see F3018 in FIG. 728), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 791, the processing contents of normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098) will be explained. FIG. 791 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098). This normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098) differs in that it adds a control process to be executed when a pattern stock reach is determined as the variable presentation type, and when a processed reach is determined as the variable presentation type, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098) is executed, first, the processes F3101 to F3106 are executed, which are the same as the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 described above (see F3018 in FIG. 729). Then, if it is determined in the process of F3104 that it is not a movie execution reach (F3104: No), it is next determined whether the variable presentation type this time is a pattern stock reach (F3191), and if it is determined that it is a pattern stock reach (F3191: Yes), the presentation mode is determined by referring to the pattern stock reach selection table 222ya (F3192), and the process proceeds to F3108.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of F3191 that the pattern stock reach is not occurring (F3191: No), it is then determined whether the variable presentation type this time is a processed reach (F3193), and if it is determined that it is a processed reach (F3193: Yes), a corresponding processing command (a command including image processing information and information indicating the presentation period for processing the image) is set (F3194), and processing proceeds to F3108. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3194 that the processed reach is not occurring (F3194: No), the same processes as F3107 to F3108 as the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 described above (see F3018 in FIG. 729) are executed, and this process ends.

The processing command set in the processing of F3194 is output to the display control device 114 by a command output process (see F2102 in FIG. 717) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 717) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives a processing command, it identifies processing information for processing the display image from the information included in the received processing command and period information indicating the performance period during which the display image is processed, reads processing data corresponding to the identified processing information from the image processing data storage area, and stores the read processing data and period information in the processing information storage area 233aa.

When the display process is executed, image processing is performed on a layer type basis based on the various information stored in the processing information storage area 233aa, and the display image is displayed on the display screen. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player view the display image displayed on the sub-layer fr formed behind the main layer sr by performing reduction processing on only some of the layers (for example, the main layer sr) out of the multiple layers that form the display image.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display different display modes using display images formed using the same drawing list, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect.

Next, the contents of the control processing executed by the display control device 114 in this 25th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 792 to 794. This 25th control example differs from the control processing contents of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above in that command determination processing 25 (see F6302 in Fig. 792) is executed instead of command determination processing (S6302 in Fig. 190), and drawing processing 25 (see F6306 in Fig. 794) is executed instead of drawing processing. The rest of the processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 792, the processing contents of command determination process 25 (F6302) will be described. FIG. 792 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 25 (F6302). This command determination process 25 (F6302) is the same as the command determination process in the first control example described above (see S6302 in FIG. 190) except that a process to be executed when a processing command is received has been added. Note that in the command determination process 25 (F6302) shown in FIG. 792, for the sake of convenience, the alphabet of the reference characters given to each processing content has been changed from "S" to "F" compared to the command determination process described above (S6302 in FIG. 190), but detailed explanations of the control processes with the same numbers are omitted since they are the same.

As shown in FIG. 792, when command determination process 25 (F6302) is executed, first, the processes F6401 to F6417 are executed, which are the same as the command determination process described above (S6302 in FIG. 190). Then, if it is determined in the process of F6416 that there is no display notification command (F6416: No), it is then determined whether there is an edit command among the unprocessed commands (F6451). If it is determined that there is an edit command (F6451: Yes), edit command process is executed (F6452) and then the process proceeds to F6401.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F6451 that there is no processing command (F6451: No), the processing of F6420 to F6422 is executed, which is the same as the command determination processing described above (S6302 in FIG. 190), and then the process proceeds to F6401.

Next, the processing contents of the processing command processing (F6452) executed in the command judgment processing 25 (F6302) will be explained with reference to FIG. 793. FIG. 793 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the processing command processing (F6452). In this processing command processing (F6452), processing is executed to set the processing information used when processing the display image based on the processing command output from the voice lamp control device 113 (a command including processing information set for each image layer (sub-image layer fr, main image layer sr, spare image layer yr, main image layer hr) that forms the display image, and information indicating the performance period for processing each image layer).

When the processing command process (F6452) is executed, first, the processing information corresponding to the currently received processing command is read from the image processing data memory area 234a3 (F6901), the processing information contained in the read information and its execution period (performance period) are set in the processing information storage area 233aa (F6902), and this process ends. By executing this process, it becomes possible to perform processing (such as changing the scale, tilt, or transparency) on each image layer that forms the display image when executing the display process.

Next, referring to FIG. 794, the details of the drawing process 25 (F6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 794 is a flowchart showing this drawing process 25 (F6306). This drawing process 25 (F6306) is different from the drawing process in the first control example described above (see S6306 in FIG. 201) in that it executes display processing based on processing information, but is otherwise the same. Note that in the drawing process 25 (F6306) shown in FIG. 794, for the convenience of explanation, the alphabet of the reference characters given to each processing content is changed from "S" to "F" compared to the above-mentioned drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 201), but detailed explanations of the control processes with the same numbers are omitted because they are the same content.

When the drawing process 25 (F6306) is executed, first, the process of F7801 to F7803 is executed, which is the same as S7801 to S7803 in the drawing process in the first control example described above (see S6306 in FIG. 201). After that, it is determined whether information for processing the display image is stored in the processing information storage area 233aa (F7851), and if it is determined that there is information (F7851: Yes), the processing is executed for the image information expanded in the frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer in which the image drawing process was executed based on the drawing list in this process (F7852), and the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (F7853), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F7851 that there is no information in the processing information storage area 233aa, a display process is executed to display the image information expanded in the frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer in which the image drawing process was executed based on the drawing list in this process as it is on the third pattern display device 81 (F7854), and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display a variety of display modes on the third pattern display device 81 by executing processing based on the processing information using image information expanded in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 25th control example, the processing can be performed on a layer type (image type) basis, rather than on the entire display image. Therefore, by performing a processing process that reduces the display area for a specific image layer (main image layer sr), it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode of an image layer (sub-image layer fr) that is formed behind the specific image layer (main image layer sr). Therefore, it is possible to display images with significantly different display modes using image information expanded in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list.

Furthermore, when a processing process is performed to change the aspect ratio of the display image of the main image layer sr on which the decorative third pattern (number icon) is displayed, the aspect ratio of the third pattern (number icon) displayed on the main image layer sr is also distorted, and there is a risk that a third pattern that is difficult for the player to distinguish is displayed. However, in this 25th control example, a reserve image layer yr that is processed in the same way as the main image layer sr is provided on the entire surface side of the main image layer sr, and when a processing process to change the aspect ratio is performed on the main image layer sr, the display mode of the reserve image layer yr is used to make it difficult for the player to see the third pattern with a distorted aspect ratio. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third pattern indicating a jackpot win is displayed when the third pattern indicating a losing win is displayed.

In addition, in this 25th control example, a display mode for making the third pattern less visible is arranged in a position of the display area of the reserve image layer yr that overlaps with the display position where the third pattern (final stop third pattern) is stopped and displayed on the main image layer sr, and the transparency of the reserve image layer yr is always set to 100%, so that the player cannot normally see the display mode displayed on the reserve image layer yr, and when processing is performed on the main image layer sr to change the aspect ratio, the transparency of the reserve image layer yr is set to 0%, so that the player cannot see the deformed final stop third pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to develop in advance the display mode for hiding the deformed final stop third pattern based on the drawing list, thereby eliminating the need to generate different drawing lists based on whether processing has been performed or not.

<Regarding the first modified example of the 25th control example>
Next, the first modified example of the above-mentioned 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 795 and Fig. 796. The first modified example of the 25th control example is different in that the performance mode of the symbol stock reach performance executed in the above-mentioned 25th control example is changed. Since the other contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned 25th control example, as described above with reference to Figures 783 and 784, as a pattern stock reach presentation, a plurality of pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) which are candidates for the stop display mode of the final stop third pattern are displayed during the reach state (see Figure 783 (b)), and a presentation is executed in which the plurality of pattern icons are temporarily lifted outside the display area (see Figure 784 (a)), and then, in conjunction with the action of the character 801 (the action of swinging down a sword), a presentation is executed in which the final stop third pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode of the third pattern indicated by any one of the plurality of pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d). In addition, in conjunction with the action of the character 801 (swinging down the sword), a performance is executed in which the display mode of the third pattern, which is in a reach state, is switched using multiple pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) (see FIG. 784(b)).

In other words, in the symbol stock reach presentation in the 25th control example described above, after the player is made aware of the contents of the multiple symbol icons that have been acquired (stocked), the icons are temporarily hidden and then displayed again, and either a presentation is executed in which only the final stopped third symbol is displayed in a stopped state corresponding to one of the stocked symbol icons, or a presentation is executed in which the third symbol in the reach state is also displayed in a stopped state corresponding to one of the stocked symbol icons.

In this way, by making the player aware of all the stocked pattern icons and then temporarily hiding them, it becomes difficult for the player to understand what kind of performance result will be displayed using the pattern icons, making it easier to provide unexpected performance results.

Therefore, for example, when a symbol stock reach effect is executed and many symbol icons with a display mode corresponding to the third symbol that will be a jackpot winning symbol in the current reach state are acquired (stocked) as multiple symbol icons, the player can expect that a symbol stock reach effect will be executed in which only the final stopped third symbol will be displayed in a stopped display mode corresponding to the stocked symbol icon, and even if many symbol icons with a display mode corresponding to the third symbol that will not be a jackpot winning symbol in the current reach state are acquired, the player can expect that a symbol stock reach effect will be executed in which the stopped display mode corresponds to the stocked symbol icons, including the display mode of the third symbol that indicates the reach state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect while expecting a jackpot winning symbol until the effect result of the symbol stock reach effect is stopped and displayed.

However, in the pattern stock reach performance executed in the 25th control example described above, the timing at which only the final stopped third pattern is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the pattern icon, and the timing at which the type of the third pattern in the reach state is switched to the type (display mode) corresponding to the pattern icon, are both after the pattern icon has been temporarily hidden, so there is a problem in that it is difficult to gradually vary the probability of a jackpot as the pattern stock reach performance progresses.

In contrast to this, in the pattern stock reach presentation in the first modified example of the present 25th control example, in a presentation in which multiple pattern icons are displayed and then temporarily lifted out of the display area, some of the multiple pattern icons displayed on the display screen are left displayed on the display screen, and the remaining pattern icons are used to perform a presentation in which the type of third pattern, which indicates a reach state, is increased.

By configuring it in this way, when a pattern stock reach effect is executed, the player can first become interested in the type of pattern icon that has been acquired (stocked), then become interested in the presentation mode of the effect of lifting the pattern icon (the effect of making the displayed pattern icon invisible), and finally become interested in the presentation result of the pattern stock reach effect. Therefore, during the presentation period in which the pattern stock reach effect is executed, it is possible to set various timings for the player to focus on the presentation content, and it is possible to execute an effect that continues to interest the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the first modified example of the 25th control example, when the symbol stock reach performance is executed, the first symbol icon 802a is displayed separately from the third symbol display during the reach state, similar to the symbol stock reach performance in the 25th control example described above. In the example shown in FIG. 795, the first symbol icon 802a is displayed in the display mode "9" corresponding to the third symbol type "9". In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 795, since the type of the third symbol indicating the reach state is "1", when the third symbol corresponding to the "9" shown in the display mode of the first symbol icon 802a is stopped and displayed as the final stopped third symbol, it is a combination of third symbols indicating a miss win.

In this manner, in this modified example, when a symbol stock reach performance is executed, the type of symbol icon displayed first is configured to correspond to the type of third symbol that is a miss and wins the third symbol in the reach state. By configuring it in this manner, when the first symbol icon is stopped and displayed in the symbol stock reach performance (the state shown in FIG. 795(a)), the display mode applied to the total of three symbols, the third symbol (two symbols) in the reach state displayed on the display screen and the symbol icon (one symbol), becomes the same display mode, which prevents the player from misunderstanding that they have won the jackpot.

<26th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 800 to Fig. 827. The pachinko machine 10 in the 26th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example described above in that a new variable performance is added as a variable performance executed when the normal state is set as the game state, and a new variable performance is added as a variable performance executed when the time-saving state is set.

Here, we will briefly explain the variation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 26th control example, which differ from the 22nd control example described above.

Conventionally, there are pachinko machines 10 that can execute operation effects based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that can be operated by the player. In addition, as an example of the operation effect, there is an effect mode that reduces the vitality value of an enemy character (hereinafter, gauge reduction effect).

When this gauge reduction effect is executed as a presentation mode of the operation effect, an effect is executed in which the vitality value (HP gauge) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is gradually decreased by having the player operate the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) during a specified operation effective period, and if the result of the operation effect executed is advantageous to the player (for example, a presentation result indicating a jackpot win), an effect is executed in which the enemy character's vitality value (HP gauge) becomes 0 and the enemy character is defeated, whereas if the result of the operation effect executed is unfavorable to the player (for example, a presentation result indicating a miss win), an effect is executed in which the enemy character counterattacks with its vitality value (HP gauge) remaining.

In other words, when the above-mentioned gauge reduction effect is executed, the degree to which the HP gauge is reduced during the effective operation period is what makes the player interested. However, as mentioned above, in conventional gauge reduction effects, the amount of vitality that can ultimately be reduced is determined according to the result of the effect, so the player has to focus only on the degree to which the vitality value is reduced based on the operation of the operating means. If the reduction in vitality value stops midway during the gauge reduction effect, the player can easily predict that the result of this effect will be unfavorable to the player before the result is displayed, which creates the problem that the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

In contrast to this, in the present 26th control example, during a portion of the effective operation period during which the gauge reduction effect is being executed, a non-reduction period can be set during which the vitality value is not reduced regardless of the performance result. By configuring it in this way, even if the reduction in vitality value is stopped midway during the gauge reduction effect, it is possible to leave open the possibility of a performance result that is advantageous to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the gauge reduction effect until the very end.

Specifically, each time the vitality value is reduced based on an operation on the operating means, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-reducing period, and the non-reducing period is set if the lottery is won. If a non-reducing period is set, an effect is executed in which the vitality value is not reduced until a predetermined time has elapsed or until a cancellation lottery to cancel the non-reducing period is won. In this way, by configuring the game to add processing for varying the degree of reduction in vitality value even while the gauge reduction effect is being executed, even when the player performs the same operation on the operating means, the reduction pattern of vitality value in the gauge reduction effect can be increased more easily than when it is set based only on a predetermined presentation pattern when the gauge reduction effect is executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the probability of winning the release lottery is configured to differ based on the remaining vitality value at the time the non-decreasing period is set and the performance result of the gauge reduction effect being executed, so that the larger the remaining vitality value, the higher the probability of winning the release lottery. By configuring it in this way, if a non-decreasing period is set at the beginning of a gauge reduction effect, it is easier to win the release lottery than if a non-decreasing period is set at the end of a gauge reduction effect, so it is possible to prevent frequent occurrences where the non-decreasing period that was immediately set continues for a long time despite the gauge reduction effect being executed, making it impossible to reduce the vitality value to a value that can be reduced in the current gauge reduction effect.

Furthermore, the present invention is configured so that the probability of winning the release lottery is higher when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed is favorable than when the performance result is unfavorable. Here, in the present 26th control example, the present invention is configured so that the performance in which the stamina value is greatly reduced (the remaining stamina value is set to 0) in the gauge reduction performance is more likely to be executed when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance is favorable to the player than when the performance result is unfavorable to the player. In other words, the present invention is configured so that the greater the stamina value that can be reduced in the current gauge reduction performance, the higher the probability of winning the release lottery. By configuring in this way, when a non-reducing period is set in a gauge reduction performance in which the performance result of the gauge reduction performance is favorable, it is easier to win the release lottery than when a non-reducing period is set in a gauge reduction performance in which the performance result of the gauge reduction performance is unfavorable. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of a situation in which, even though a gauge reduction performance that can greatly reduce the stamina value is executed, the non-reducing period continues for a long time, and the stamina value cannot be reduced to the value that can be reduced in the current gauge reduction performance.

In addition, in this 26th control example, an upper limit is set for the duration of the non-decreasing period, and if the non-decreasing period reaches the upper limit without winning the cancellation lottery, the non-decreasing period is forcibly cancelled. By configuring it in this way, even if a cancellation lottery is used to randomize the timing at which the non-decreasing period is cancelled, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the non-decreasing period continues until the gauge reduction presentation ends without winning the cancellation lottery, resulting in a significant decrease in the presentation effect of the gauge reduction presentation.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, when a non-decreasing period is released and a reduction period during which the vitality value can be reduced is set, an additional reduction effect can be executed to reduce the vitality value according to the length of the non-decreasing period that was set. Specifically, when a non-decreasing period is set with a performance result of the current gauge reduction performance that is advantageous to the player, or when a non-decreasing period is set at the beginning of the gauge reduction performance, in other words, when the probability of winning the release lottery is set high and the non-decreasing period continues for a long period of time, the additional reduction effect executed when the non-decreasing period is released is configured to be able to significantly reduce the vitality value.

By configuring it in this way, even if the non-decreasing period continues for a long time, it is possible to significantly decrease the vitality value through the additional decrease effect, so that even for players who have been in a long period of non-decreasing period, it is possible to allow them to play while hoping that the result of the gauge decrease effect being executed will be an effect that is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to prevent frequent occurrences of the vitality value not being able to be decreased to a value that can be decreased with the current gauge decrease effect.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the presentation pattern for reducing the vitality value is configured to differ depending on the way the player operates the operating means during the gauge reduction presentation. Specifically, the presentation for reducing the vitality value can be performed when the player continuously presses the operating means during the effective operation period in the gauge reduction presentation (when a so-called long press operation is performed) and when the player continuously presses the operating means (when a so-called rapid-fire operation is performed). When a long press operation is performed, a presentation pattern in which the above-mentioned non-reduction period can be set is determined, and when a rapid-fire operation is performed, a presentation pattern in which the above-mentioned non-reduction period is not set (the entry lottery is not executed) is determined.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the process of the decrease in stamina value in a gauge decrease effect to show the same effect result depending on the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for players who wish to execute gauge decrease effects in various effect patterns to operate the operation means using different operation methods, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game and improving their interest in the game.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the non-decreasing period can be forcibly released by ceasing the long press operation on the operating means. In other words, during the gauge reduction presentation that prompts the player to operate (press) the operating means, the player can be provided with the option of ceasing operation on the operating means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the options for operating the operating means.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when a long press operation is performed to reduce the gauge, a performance scenario that reduces the vitality value according to the duration of the long press operation is configured to progress, and the longer the duration, the more likely it is that a performance scenario in which the vitality value decreases will be set. If the long press operation is stopped midway, the update of the press duration is interrupted, and if the long press operation is performed again, the interrupted press duration can be carried over and updated. Therefore, even if the long press operation is interrupted midway, it is possible to make it easy to continue operating the operating means.

As described above, the non-decreasing period can be forcibly released by ceasing a long press on the operating means, and if a long press is stopped midway, the update of the press duration is suspended, and if a long press is performed again, the interrupted press duration can be carried over and updated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a situation in which a player who is performing a long press during a gauge reduction presentation can greatly reduce the stamina value by interrupting the long press and then performing the long press again, compared to continuing the long press.

In addition, there has been a pachinko machine 10 that has traditionally implemented a variable presentation to show the results of a special pattern lottery in a variety of presentation formats, thereby preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early, even if the results of the special pattern lottery continue for a long period of time with results other than a jackpot win (a miss). In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, various presentation modes with different jackpot winning expectations, which indicate the ratio between the rate selected when the special pattern lottery result is a miss and the rate selected when the special pattern lottery result is a jackpot, can be determined, and the presentation mode can be determined based on the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable presentation and the presentation lottery result for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation. Therefore, even if multiple consecutive games have a special pattern lottery result other than a jackpot (a miss), various variable presentations with different jackpot winning expectations can be executed, allowing the player to play while having an appropriate sense of expectation for a jackpot.

However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, the presentation mode of the variable presentation to indicate that the special symbol selection result is a miss is determined by a lottery (presentation lottery), which can lead to the problem that, in some cases, only variable presentations with a low probability of winning a jackpot are executed for a long period of time, making the player easily bored with the game. In addition, there is a problem that a presentation mode with a selection ratio that increases the probability of winning a jackpot is selected multiple times in a short period of time, causing the player to feel distrustful.

In contrast to this, in the present 26th control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation can be determined based on information (presentation history information) on the presentation mode of previously executed variable presentations, and information on the number of times (number of consecutive misses) that variable presentations (miss variable presentations) have been executed consecutively to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss.

Specifically, a specific counter value (the value of the execution presentation counter) is added based on the increase in the number of consecutive misses, and when the value of the execution presentation counter reaches a specific value (for example, 50), a special presentation mode selection table different from the data table referenced during normal times (normal presentation mode selection table) is referenced as the data table to be referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, making it easier than normal to determine the presentation mode with a high probability of winning.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to periodically execute variable presentations with a high probability of winning a jackpot, making it less likely that only variable presentations with a low probability of winning a jackpot will be executed, causing players to become bored with the game.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the process of decrementing the value of the execution presentation counter described above is configured to be executable, and for example, when a presentation mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is determined as the presentation mode of the miss variable presentation, the value of the execution presentation counter is decremented according to the determined presentation mode. Specifically, when a presentation mode with a relatively high expectation of winning a jackpot is determined as the presentation mode of the miss variable presentation, the value of the execution presentation counter is decremented by 30.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a miss variation effect in which the performance mode is determined by referring to the special performance mode selection table from being executed immediately after a miss variation effect is executed in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to prevent miss variation effects from being executed consecutively in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, which can cause distrust among players.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the process of adding the value of the execution effect counter described above to the number of times the special pattern variation is executed or more can be executed. For example, when a performance mode that may reduce the player's desire to play is set as the performance mode of the miss variation effect, for example, a performance mode with the lowest level of expectation of winning is set as the performance mode of a chance up effect in which the expectation of winning increases step by step (when the expectation of winning is higher when the chance up effect is not executed despite the chance up effect being executed), the value of "2", which is larger than the value of "1" that is added when a normal special pattern variation is executed, is configured to be added to the execution effect counter.

By configuring it in this way, it is easier to execute a miss variation effect in a performance mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot at short intervals when a chance-up effect with a low probability of winning a jackpot (lower than when a chance-up effect is not executed) is executed than when special pattern variations continue to be executed steadily without the chance-up effect being executed.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when the presentation mode is determined by referring to the special presentation mode selection table, the type of presentation mode determined based on information about the presentation mode of the miss variable presentation executed in the past is configured to be different. Specifically, the presentation mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot determined by referring to the normal presentation mode selection table referred to during normal times is configured to be difficult to determine by referring to the special presentation mode selection table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the same presentation mode for a miss variable presentation, so that even if the presentation mode can be determined by referring to the special presentation mode selection table in which various presentation modes are defined with different contents from the normal presentation mode selection table in which the expectation of winning a normal jackpot is defined, it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the expectation of winning a jackpot for a specific presentation mode.

<About the performance content executed in the 26th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 800 to FIG. 809, the contents of the characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 800 to FIG. 806, the contents of the battle effects executed during the time-saving state will be described. This battle effect is a variation effect executed during a special pattern variation period for showing the result of a special pattern lottery of 1, in which a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is carried out, and when the vitality value (HP value) of the enemy character finally decreases to 0 (when the enemy character is defeated), the result of the performance mode (victory mode) indicating a big win is displayed, and when the vitality value (HP value) of the enemy character finally is 1 or more, the result of the performance mode (defeat mode) indicating a loss win is displayed.

This battle performance is configured to be able to execute a preemptive attack performance (first part performance) in which an ally character attacks an enemy character, and an attack performance (second part performance) in which an ally character directly attacks an enemy character. When a battle performance is executed, the above-mentioned second part performance is always executed, and whether or not the above-mentioned first part performance is executed is determined depending on the performance pattern of the determined battle performance.

The battle performance in which the first part performance is executed (a battle performance in which the first part performance and the second part performance are executed) is configured to be more likely to be selected when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery than a battle performance in which the first part performance is not executed (a battle performance in which only the second part performance is executed). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player pay attention to the battle performance while hoping that the first part performance will be executed during the battle performance.

Furthermore, when a battle performance in which the first part performance is executed is executed, the more the HP value of the enemy character is reduced in the first part performance, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. By configuring it in this way, when the first part performance is executed as the battle performance, that is, when a battle performance with a higher expectation of winning the jackpot is executed than a battle performance in which the first part performance is not executed, it is possible to make the player interested in the amount of damage inflicted on the enemy character in the first part performance (the HP value that is reduced).

Here, we will explain the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when a battle performance is executed. Figure 800(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a battle performance is started, and Figure 800(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents that are displayed when a friend of an ally character launches a preemptive attack in a battle performance (when the first part performance is executed).

As shown in FIG. 800(a), when a battle effect begins, an ally character 801a modeled after a hero is displayed in the main display area Dm formed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, followed by an enemy character 880a modeled after a monster, resulting in a display screen in which the ally character 801a and enemy character 880a face off against each other. Then, an HP gauge 890 is displayed as a display mode for indicating the vitality value (HP value) corresponding to the displayed enemy character 880a, and above the HP gauge 890, the words "Defeat the enemy!!" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the content of the battle effect. This display makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the effect being executed (battle effect) is aimed at defeating the enemy character 880a.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the main display area Dm, the text "If you reduce the enemy's HP gauge to 0, it's a big win" is displayed as a detailed guidance mode to explain the content of the battle performance in more detail. In this 26th control example, as in each of the control examples described above, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is divided into a display area (main display area Dm) where the variable performance (battle performance) is executed and a display area (sub-display area Ds) where the variable performance (battle performance) is not executed, and a detailed guidance mode that explains the content of the performance being executed in detail in text is displayed in the display area (sub-display area Ds) where the variable performance (battle performance) is not executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is easier for the player to select and focus on the execution area of the variable presentation, which is executed using moving images (animation), and the information announcement, which is executed using still images (text).

As shown in FIG. 800(a), the upper right corner of the HP gauge 890 displays "MAX," indicating the upper limit of the enemy character's 880a's HP, and the upper left corner of the HP gauge 890 displays "0," indicating the lower limit of the enemy character's 880a's HP. When no attack is being made on the enemy character 880a, the enemy character's 880a's HP is at its upper limit, and so the enemy character's 880a's remaining HP value 890a is displayed occupying the entire area of the HP gauge 890.

In this 26th control example, as shown in FIG. 800(a), only the "MAX" indicator, which indicates that the HP value is at the upper limit, and the "0" indicator, which indicates that the HP value is at the lower limit, are displayed as indicators showing the current HP value, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to display a "50%" indicator at the midpoint of the HP gauge 890 to indicate that the HP value is half the upper limit, or it may be configured to display more detailed indicators.

This configuration allows the player to more clearly grasp the HP value of the enemy character 880a that decreases during the battle performance. Also, by displaying not only the upper and lower limits of the HP value but also an indicator showing the values between them, it becomes easier to grasp the degree of decrease in the remaining HP value indicated by the HP gauge 890. Specifically, if a "50%" indicator is displayed in the middle of the HP gauge 890, indicating that the HP value is half the upper limit, it becomes easier for the player to predict that the entire area of the HP gauge 890 will decrease evenly in relation to the decreased HP value.

In this 26th control example, the enemy character 880a to be faced in the battle performance can be determined from different types, and the upper limit of the HP value is configured to differ depending on the type of enemy character 880a selected. Therefore, when a battle performance is executed, the enemy character 880a is displayed in a state where the ally character 801a, which is the same character that appeared earlier, is displayed first. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to extend the period from the start of the battle performance to the announcement of the type of enemy character 880a to be faced in this battle performance, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the performance being executed too early.

In addition, in the present 26th control example, when the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is notified using the HP gauge 890 for indicating the HP value of the enemy character 880a, the HP value is displayed as a percentage (%) with the upper limit of the HP value being 100. Therefore, even if enemy characters 880a with different upper limits of the HP value are displayed, the battle performance can be executed without changing the display mode of the HP gauge 890. However, in this case, even if different types of enemy characters 880a appear, there is a problem that the player cannot easily determine whether the enemy character 880a has a high upper limit of the HP value or a low upper limit of the HP value just by looking at the display mode of the HP gauge 890. Therefore, when an enemy character 880a with a high upper limit of the HP value is displayed as a type of enemy character 880a, it is preferable to display the characters "Strong enemy appears" near the displayed enemy character 880a as a notification mode to notify that the enemy character 880a has a higher upper limit of the HP value than the others. On the other hand, when an enemy character 880a with a lower upper limit HP value than the other enemy characters 880a is displayed, the text "Weak Appears" may be displayed near the displayed enemy character 880a as a notification mode to notify the player that the enemy character 880a has a lower upper limit HP value than the other enemy characters. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily predict the outcome of the current battle performance at the time when the enemy character 880a is displayed during the battle performance.

Furthermore, as another method for achieving the same effect, the HP gauge 890 may be configured to display a number indicating the upper limit of the HP value of the enemy character 880a that appears in addition to the "MAX" displayed on the HP gauge 890, or all types of enemy characters 880a that may appear in the battle performance may be displayed with an ease-of-defeat rank (a rank that is likely to be selected when a jackpot is won). Also, the display mode (length) of the HP gauge 890 may be configured to differ depending on the upper limit of the HP value.

When the first part of the battle performance (a performance in which a friend executes a preemptive attack on an enemy) is executed, as shown in FIG. 800(b), a performance is executed in which a friend character 801c modeled after a cat attacks an enemy character 880a, and the remaining HP value displayed on the HP gauge 890 is reduced according to the damage inflicted on the enemy character 880a by the attack of the friend character 801c. Specifically, the enemy character 880a displayed using FIG. 800 has an upper limit of HP of "100", and since friend character 801c inflicted damage of "40" by the preemptive attack, the display area occupied by the remaining HP value 890a is reduced to 60% of the entire HP gauge 890. Then, in the display area of the HP gauge 890 where the remaining HP value 890a is not displayed, the amount of damage 890b indicating the reduced HP value of the enemy character 880a is displayed. In other words, the display area of the HP gauge 890 is configured to always display either the remaining HP value 890a or the amount of damage 890b.

By configuring it in this way, the player can compare the amount of damage already inflicted on the enemy character 880a with the remaining HP value, making it easier for the player to predict the attack content (presentation content) required to completely reduce the remaining HP value.

Then, in the secondary display area Ds, the words "Preemptive attack! Damage dealt to enemy!" are displayed as a notification to inform the player that the first part of the battle has been executed in this battle.

In this 26th control example, the amount of damage 890b is continuously displayed, so that the player can easily see how much the HP value has decreased compared to when the HP value is at the upper limit when the remaining HP value has decreased. However, this is not limited to this, and the amount of damage already inflicted 890b may not be displayed. In this case, since it is only necessary to display the display mode corresponding to the remaining HP value on the display screen, the process of accumulating and managing the amount of damage already inflicted can be omitted, and the control process for displaying information related to the HP value of the enemy character 880a in the battle performance can be simplified.

In addition, in this 26th control example, as shown in FIG. 800(b), the HP value (amount of damage) of the enemy character 880a that has been reduced by attacking the enemy character 880a is not displayed numerically, but the amount of damage (remaining HP value) is notified to the player by the degree of reduction in the HP gauge 890, thereby simplifying the display control for displaying specific numerical values and the processing for calculating specific numerical values, but without being limited to this, the HP value (amount of damage) of the enemy character 880a that has been reduced by attacking the enemy character 880a may also be displayed numerically.

When the first part performance ends, the second part performance is executed in which the ally character 801a directly attacks the enemy character 880a. In this second part performance, a performance is executed in which the remaining HP value 890a of the enemy character 880a is reduced based on the player's operation of the performance button 22. Next, referring to FIG. 801 and FIG. 802, the display contents displayed during the second part performance in the battle performance will be explained. FIG. 801(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the time when the second part performance in the battle performance starts, FIG. 801(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a rapid tap operation is performed on the performance button 22 during the second part performance in the battle performance, and FIG. 802 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a long press operation is performed on the performance button 22 during the second part performance in the battle performance.

As shown in FIG. 801(a), when the second part performance is executed, a performance in which the ally character 801a directly fights the enemy character 880a is executed in the main display area Dm. Since this second part performance is executed after the first part performance described above with reference to FIG. 800 ends, the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 continues to show the value shown in FIG. 800(b).

Then, on the left side of the display area Dm, a display effect button Sw6 simulating the effect button 22 and a valid period gauge ga4 for indicating the valid period of the operation effect (valid operation period) are displayed as a suggestion mode for suggesting that an operation effect that requires the player to operate the effect button 22 will start. Furthermore, the words "Prepare for rapid tapping" are displayed as a guidance mode for informing the player of the operation content during the operation effect. In other words, by displaying the suggestion mode shown in FIG. 801(a) before the actual operation effect starts, the player can be easily informed that an operation effect that requires rapid tapping of the effect button 22 will start soon, and the player can prepare for the rapid tapping operation before the operation effect starts. This makes it possible to prevent the operation effect from starting suddenly and the player from being unable to operate the effect button 22 in the early stages of the valid period.

In addition, in this 26th control example, as shown in FIG. 801(a), a suggestion mode can be displayed to suggest that the operation presentation will start, but in addition to this, a countdown display can be executed to indicate the timing at which the operation presentation will start. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the operation presentation will start can be more clearly notified to the player.

Furthermore, it may be configured to start counting down the valid period gauge (starting the operation presentation) in a manner that includes a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) before the valid period in the operation presentation (valid operation period) is actually set. In other words, it may be configured to start the operation presentation (start counting down the valid period gauge) earlier than the timing when the valid period is actually set, by the amount of reaction time it takes for a player who immediately recognizes that the operation presentation has started to press the presentation button 22 for the first time. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player more likely to press the presentation button 22 immediately after the valid period is set, thereby maximizing the enjoyment of the operation presentation.

As shown in FIG. 801(a), the 26th control example is configured to execute an operation effect in which the effect button 22 is repeatedly tapped. Some recent pachinko machines 10 are capable of internally executing press control similar to a rapid tap operation even when the operation means (effect button 22) is pressed and held down instead of being repeatedly tapped. By configuring in this way, even for players who have difficulty executing a rapid tap operation that requires operating the operation means multiple times in a short period of time, it is possible to provide an effect similar to that of a rapid tap operation by simply continuing to press the operation means, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

However, when a long press operation is performed instead of a rapid press operation, the same press control is executed as when the player is performing a rapid press operation (e.g., pressing the effect button 22 at intervals of once every 0.5 seconds) during the period in which the long press operation continues. In this case, the number of presses (number of rapid presses) of the effect button 22 performed during a predetermined effective period (e.g., 10 seconds) gradually destroys obstacles based on the number of presses (number of rapid presses) of the effect button 22. In this case, the number of presses (number of rapid presses) increases in a short period of time compared to when a normal rapid press operation is performed, and the result of the operation performance (the final destruction mode of the obstacle in this operation performance) is likely to be displayed early, resulting in a problem that the operation performance cannot be provided using the effective period to its fullest. In addition, if the interval at which the same press control as when the effect button 22 is pressed is executed as the press control during the long press operation is extended, there is a risk of a problem occurring in which the result of the operation performance cannot be displayed within the effective period (the number of press controls required to display the final destruction mode of the obstacle in this operation performance cannot be executed).

On the other hand, if the destruction mode of the obstacle in the rapid-tap operation presentation was determined based on the contents of the press control executed when a long press operation was performed (press control during rapid rapid-tap operation), there was a risk that a problem would arise in that the presentation result of the operation presentation could not be displayed to a player performing a normal rapid-tap operation (for example, a rapid-tap operation in which the presentation button 22 is pressed at intervals of once per second) (it would be impossible to execute the press control the number of times required to display the final destruction mode of the obstacle in the current operation presentation).

In other words, in a pachinko machine 10 that is capable of executing a rapid-fire operation effect in which the effect button 22 is repeatedly tapped, and that has the function of being able to advance the rapid-fire operation effect by executing a long press of the effect button 22 in addition to the rapid tap of the effect button 22, if the same press control is executed when the effect button 22 is repeatedly tapped and when the effect button 22 is long pressed, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to provide a suitable effect (repeated tap operation effect) for both a player who repeatedly taps the effect button 22 during the rapid-fire operation effect and a player who long presses it.

In contrast to this, in the present 26th control example, when the effect button 22 is pressed and held during a rapid-fire operation effect, an effect is executed in which the effect mode (HP gauge) is varied (decreased) at predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.5 second intervals) according to the duration of the long press operation in accordance with a determined effect scenario, and a non-variable period (non-decreasing period) in which the effect mode is not varied can be set.

By configuring it in this way, when a long press operation is performed, which makes it easier to change the presentation mode in a shorter period of time than when a rapid-fire operation is performed, it is possible to provide a period during which the presentation mode does not change during the effective period (effective operation period) during which the player's operation (pressing) of the presentation button 22 can be effectively identified. Therefore, even when a long press operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the presentation result of the current operation presentation from being displayed with a large remaining period, thereby reducing the presentation effect of the operation presentation.

In this 26th control example, as shown in FIG. 801(b), when a rapid-fire operation is performed in the second part of the battle performance, an effect is executed in which the vitality value of the enemy character 880a is decreased in response to pressing of the selection button 22 (the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 gradually becomes shorter). Specifically, in this 26th control example, a valid period of 3 seconds is set as a period during which the operation (pressing) of the performance button 22 by the player during the period in which the second part performance is executed is determined to be valid, and when the valid period is set (when the player enters a period in which the performance button 22 can be operated), the word "Repeat!!" is displayed instead of "Preparing for rapid fire" (see FIG. 801(a)), which indicates that the stage prior to setting the valid period is reached.

Furthermore, the validity period gauge ga4 displayed below the display effect button Sw6 is displayed variably as time passes. As shown in FIG. 801(b), the validity period gauge ga4 uses the size (length) of the entire display area to indicate the length of the current validity period. Immediately after the validity period is set, when the remaining validity period has not decreased, the remaining validity period ga4a is displayed to occupy the entire area of the validity period gauge ga4 (see, for example, FIG. 801(a)). After that, the display mode of the validity period gauge ga4 is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining validity period ga4a gradually becomes smaller (shorter) from the right end to the left end of the validity period gauge ga4 as time passes. Then, in the display area of the validity period gauge ga4 where the remaining validity period ga4a is not displayed, the elapsed time ga4b indicating the elapsed time since the validity period was set is displayed.

In other words, the longer the time that has elapsed since the validity period was set (the shorter the remaining validity period), the smaller (shorter) the proportion of the display area of the validity period gauge ga4 that is occupied by the remaining validity period ga4a becomes, and the larger (longer) the proportion that is occupied by the elapsed time ga4b becomes.

By configuring it in this way, the player can easily grasp the remaining time of the valid period in the current operation presentation, simply by checking the display mode of the valid period ga4. Furthermore, since information corresponding to the length of the currently set valid period (display mode of the valid period gauge ga4) and information indicating the time that has already elapsed (display mode of the elapsed time ga4b) are displayed together, the player can grasp the remaining length of the valid period in more detail, based on the length of time that has elapsed since the valid period was set.

In this 26th control example, as shown in FIG. 801(b), information corresponding to the remaining length of the valid period (display mode of remaining valid period ga4a), information corresponding to the length of the valid period currently set (display mode of valid period gauge ga4), and information indicating the time that has already elapsed (display mode of elapsed time ga4b) are continuously displayed during the valid period to make it easier for the player to grasp the remaining time of the valid period, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to variably display only information indicating only the remaining time of the valid period (display mode of remaining valid period ga4a).

The process of decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 when a rapid-fire operation is performed in the second part of the battle performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 802(a).

Next, referring to FIG. 802, an example of a display screen when a long press operation is performed in the second part of the battle performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 802, when a long press operation is performed in the second part of the performance, the same performance screen is displayed as when a rapid-fire operation is performed. Note that only the display mode of the display performance button Sw6 is different from that during a rapid-fire operation; to indicate that a long press operation is currently being performed, a display mode indicating that the display performance button Sw6 is being continuously pressed is displayed, and the words "repeated press (long press)" are displayed above, indicating that a long press operation is currently being performed (a state in which a long press operation has been determined).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the long press operation has been judged to be normal in the second part performance, which is a rapid-fire operation performance. Therefore, even if the display state of the HP gauge 890 does not change for a certain period of time despite the performance button 22 being pressed and held during the second part performance, i.e., even if the player does not win consecutive lotteries that decrease the remaining HP value 890a, the player can easily understand that the long press operation has not been judged to be invalid.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, when it is determined that a long press operation is being performed, a moving image (animation) of an ally character 801a fighting an enemy character 880a is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm, regardless of the result of the lottery to reduce the remaining HP value 890a. By configuring in such a way that it is possible to notify that the player is operating the effect button 22 properly (repeatedly pressing or long pressing) during the rapid-fire operation effect, it is possible to provide a bonus video that would not be provided to a player who does not operate the effect button 22 properly, making it easier for the player to operate the operation means (effect button 22) for purposes other than reducing the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 (setting it to 0).

Therefore, for example, even if the result of the current battle is a defeat to the enemy character 880a, i.e., the remaining HP value 890a does not become 0, a bonus video can be provided by operating the operation means (effect button 22), so it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to operate the operation means from decreasing significantly.

In addition, the bonus video may be configured to provide information related to playing the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the pachinko machine has a setting function that allows the probability of winning the jackpot through a special symbol lottery to be set from a number of settings, the bonus video to be played may be configured to include information corresponding to the currently set setting. This configuration not only provides the player with valuable video, but also allows the player to obtain information that is useful for playing the game, which makes the player more eager to operate the operating means in order to watch the bonus video.

Next, referring to FIG. 803 and FIG. 804, the flow of the change in the display mode of the HP gauge 890 in the battle performance will be described. FIG. 803 shows the flow of the change in the display mode of the HP gauge 890 when the performance button 22 is repeatedly pressed. When the operation (pressing) of the performance button 22 is determined in the state shown in FIG. 803(a), a reduction lottery is executed, and if the reduction value "A" is determined as a result of the reduction lottery, a variable display is executed to reduce the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 (a display mode indicating that the remaining HP value has decreased by the reduction value "A"). Then, the amount of damage 890b is displayed in the area where the display area of the remaining HP value 890a has been reduced. By configuring in this way, the player can be notified of the amount of damage inflicted on the enemy character 880a in an easy-to-understand manner.

On the other hand, when a long press operation is performed on the effect button 22, a non-decreasing period is set as shown in FIG. 804. When a long press operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 804(a) and a decrease value "A" and a non-decreasing period are set, a variable display is executed to reduce the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 (a display mode indicating that the remaining HP value has decreased by the decrease value "A"). Then, a non-decreasing period 890c, indicating that a non-decreasing period has been set, is displayed in the reduced display area of the remaining HP value 890a (see FIG. 804(b)).

The non-decreasing period is configured to be released when one of the following termination conditions is met: winning a release lottery, the upper limit period has elapsed, or a long press operation has been canceled. An effect is executed in which the display area of the non-decreasing period 890c becomes smaller to indicate the remaining period until the non-decreasing period reaches the upper limit period (2 seconds). Then, at the timing when the non-decreasing period is released, the display area of the HP gauge 890 is displayed with the remaining HP value 890a and the amount of damage 890b.

The display area of the non-decreasing period 890c is configured to decrease evenly in accordance with the remaining period until the non-decreasing period reaches the upper limit period (2 seconds). Therefore, the player can predict the maximum remaining period that the non-decreasing period can continue based on the variable state of the display mode of the non-decreasing period 890c. Furthermore, when an ending condition other than the passage of the upper limit period is met, a clearing effect is executed in which the display area of the non-decreasing period 890c becomes invisible in 0.1 seconds, regardless of the display mode (size of the display area) of the non-decreasing period 890c, and the area where the non-decreasing period 890c was displayed is switched to the display area of the damage amount 890b. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the non-decreasing period has been released in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, if a specific end condition (winning the cancellation lottery, passing of the upper limit period) is met among the multiple end conditions for canceling the non-decreasing period, an additional decrease effect is executed to decrease the remaining HP value, without being based on the operation of the effect button 22. Here, if decrease value "B" is determined as the additional decrease effect, as shown in FIG. 804(d), the non-decreasing period 890c is hidden, and a variable display is executed to reduce the display area of the remaining HP value 890a on the HP gauge 890 (a display mode indicating that the remaining HP value has decreased by decrease value "B").

In the 26th control example, the battle presentation while the non-decreasing period 890c is displayed is configured to continue to be executed in accordance with the attack content at the timing when the non-decreasing period 890c is set, but without being limited to this, the presentation mode of the battle presentation during the non-decreasing period 890c may be determined by the presentation mode for indicating the remaining time until the non-decreasing period 890c is released or the determination result of whether or not the release condition has been met.

In other words, as a condition for releasing the non-decreasing period, if the release lottery is won, it is possible to determine the presentation mode to indicate that the release lottery was won (for example, a presentation mode in which the characters temporarily widen the distance between each other to prepare for the next attack) and the presentation mode to indicate that the release lottery was not won (for example, a presentation mode in which the characters are in a stalemate). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not the non-decreasing period is likely to end by understanding the content of the battle presentation executed in the main display area Dm.

Next, the contents of the defeat reach performance will be described with reference to Fig. 805 to Fig. 808. Fig. 805(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed at the start of the defeat reach performance, Fig. 805(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the first attack in the defeat reach performance is started, Fig. 806(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the first attack in the defeat reach performance, Fig. 806(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the second attack in the defeat reach performance is started, Fig. 807(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the second attack in the defeat reach performance, Fig. 807(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the third attack in the defeat reach performance is started, and Fig. 808 is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the third attack in the defeat reach performance.

When a subjugation reach is executed, a display area HR50 is formed in the main display area Dm, and a display mode is displayed to show the history of the three attack effects executed during the subjugation reach. Figure 805 (a) is a display screen showing a stage before the first attack effect is executed, so no display mode showing history is displayed in any of the 1st attack history HR50a, which shows the history of the 1st attack effect, the 2nd attack history HR50b, which shows the history of the 2nd attack effect, and the 3rd attack history HR50c, which shows the history of the 3rd attack effect.

In addition, in the defeat reach, an effect is executed in which three enemy characters 880a-880c are defeated, and HP gauges 881a-881c showing the strength value (HP value) of each enemy character 880a-880c are displayed close to each enemy character 880a-880c. Then, as an effect for determining the ally character that will perform the attack in this attack effect, an ally character determination effect is displayed in which the first ally character 801a and the second ally character 801b are alternately enlarged.

As a subjugation reach effect, various types of ally characters 801a attack enemy characters 880a to 880c three times.

The types of ally character 801a can be selected from a first ally character 801a modeled after a hero who is likely to inflict large damage on a single enemy character, and a second ally character 801b modeled after a rabbit who is likely to inflict damage on multiple enemy characters. By configuring the content of attacks that are likely to be performed to differ according to the type of ally character that performs the attack in this way, it is possible to vary the expectation for the type of ally character that performs the attack based on the content of attacks that have already been performed during the subjugation reach performance (the remaining HP value of each enemy character).

In other words, when the first and second attacks in the defeat reach effect are performed by the ally character 801b, each of the enemy characters 880a to 880c is likely to have a low remaining HP value, and in that case, when the type of the ally character performing the third (last) attack is the ally character 801b, it is easier to achieve a defeat reach effect in which all of the enemy characters 880a to 880c are defeated than when the ally character is the ally character 801a. Also, when the first and second attacks are performed by the ally character 801a, it is easier to achieve a defeat reach effect in which two of the enemy characters 880a to 880c have been defeated, so when the type of the ally character performing the third attack is the ally character 801a, it is easier to achieve a defeat reach effect in which all of the enemy characters 880a to 880c are defeated than when the ally character is the ally character 801b.

Figure 805(b) is a display screen in which an attack content determination presentation is being executed to determine the attack content after the first ally character has been determined as the first attack presentation. As shown in Figure 805(b), when the first ally character 801a has been determined, the attack content determination presentation is configured so that information indicating the number of attacks is displayed first, and then information indicating the amount of damage is displayed. In Figure 805(b), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped at "1", and the damage amount roulette HR51b shows a "changing" state.

When a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 805(b), the damage amount roulette HR51b is displayed frozen in a display mode (e.g., large, medium, small, etc.) that indicates the amount of damage corresponding to the attack executed in this attack performance, and the attack content performance ends.

When the attack content presentation ends, the attack presentation shown in FIG. 806(a) is then executed. In this attack presentation, an attack corresponding to the presentation result of the attack content presentation is executed near the center of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 806(a), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped at "1" and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped at "large", so an attack presentation that deals large damage to one enemy character 880a is displayed. Then, the words "Large damage to monster A" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guidance mode to inform the player of the current attack content.

When the second and third attack effects are performed, the same effect display is also performed, and FIG. 806(b) shows a state in which the second ally character 801b has been determined as the second attack effect. When the second ally character 801b has been determined, the attack content determination effect is configured so that information indicating the number of attacks is displayed later, and information indicating the amount of damage is displayed first. In other words, the order of information notified to the player in the attack content effect is changed depending on the type of ally character performing the attack. In FIG. 806(b), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is in the "changing" state, and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped and displayed at "middle".

When the second attack content presentation is completed, the attack presentation shown in FIG. 807(a) is then executed. In this attack presentation, an attack corresponding to the presentation result of the attack content presentation is executed near the center of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 807(a), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped at "3" and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped at "medium", so an attack presentation that deals medium damage to enemy characters 880a to 880c is displayed. Then, because the remaining HP value of enemy character 880a has reached 0, the words "1 defeated, 2 remaining" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, a double attack effect in which multiple allied characters attack can be executed as the third attack effect only if the character attacking the first attack and the character attacking the second attack are different.

Figure 807(b) shows the attack content presentation when a double attack presentation is executed. This double attack presentation is more likely to cause large damage to more enemy characters than other attack presentations, and is configured to be more likely to be selected when the corresponding special symbol lottery result is a big win than when it is a miss. As shown in Figure 807(b), the presentation result of the attack content presentation is displayed before the ally character determination presentation ends, and then, as shown in Figure 808, an attack is executed by multiple ally characters.

By configuring it in this way, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced because it can pique the player's interest in the order in which the information used in the attack presentation is displayed during the presentation leading up to the attack presentation (ally character selection presentation, attack content presentation)

As mentioned above, when the display order of the attack content effects is specified in accordance with the determined ally character, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that some of the effect patterns are executed in which the attack content effects are displayed in a different display order from the normal one. This configuration makes it difficult for players to predict the various effect elements (ally character type, number of attacks, amount of damage) used in the attack effects. It is also preferable to configure the effect patterns in which the attack content effects are displayed in a different display order from the normal one so that they are more likely to be selected when the corresponding special pattern lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss. This allows players who notice that the attack effect has been executed in a different presentation style from the normal one to enjoy the defeat reach effect while feeling a sense of anticipation for winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this defeat reach performance, different attacks can be executed depending on the type of ally character executing the attack, and as described above, when ally character 801a is selected, "1" is more likely to be selected than other numbers as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (number of attacks), and "large damage" is more likely to be selected than other amounts of damage (medium damage, small damage, etc.) as the amount of damage to be inflicted on the attack target. Therefore, when ally character 801a is selected as the type of ally character to execute the attack, the player will focus on the amount of damage rather than the number of attacks. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 805(b), when ally character 801a is selected, the display order of "number of attacks" and "amount of damage" is determined as the display order of suggestive modes to sequentially show the content of the current attack.

On the other hand, when ally character 801b is selected, a multiple is more likely to be selected than a single as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (number of attacks), and "medium damage" is more likely to be selected than other amounts of damage (large damage, small damage) as the amount of damage to inflict on the attack target. Therefore, when ally character 801b is selected as the type of ally character to perform an attack, the player will focus on the number of attacks rather than the amount of damage. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 806(b), when ally character 801b is selected, the display order of "damage amount" and "number of attacks" is determined as the display order of suggestive aspects to sequentially show the content of the current attack.

As described above, in the defeat reach performance executed in this 26th control example, the type of ally character that will perform the attack can be determined as the type of ally character for which different attack content is likely to be selected, and the display order of the suggestion modes for indicating the attack content is configured to differ depending on the determined type of ally character. Specifically, each of the multiple elements that determine the attack content (number of attacks, amount of damage) can be displayed as a suggestion mode, and the display order of the multiple suggestion modes is determined so that the elements that the determined type of ally character is good at are displayed after other elements.

By configuring it this way, regardless of which type of ally character has been determined, the timing at which the suggestive aspect that the player focuses on is displayed can be delayed, allowing the player to enjoy the defeat reach presentation for a long period of time.

In the 26th control example, the display order of the suggestive aspects is determined according to the type of ally character determined, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine the display order of the suggestive aspects corresponding to elements determined to be advantageous to the player among multiple elements indicating the content of attacks (number of attacks, amount of damage) so that they are displayed after other elements, or to determine the display order of the suggestive aspects corresponding to elements determined to be advantageous to the player among multiple elements indicating the content of attacks (number of attacks, amount of damage) so that they are displayed before other elements. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the content of the suggestive aspect to be displayed next based on the content of the suggestive aspect displayed previously.

Next, the contents of the chance notice performance executed in this 26th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 809. FIG. 809 is a diagram showing an example of the target aspect of the chance notice performance. This 26th control example is configured to be able to execute a chance notice performance to suggest the likelihood of winning a jackpot by varying the display aspect of the target aspect used in the variable performance to show the results of the special pattern lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 809, the system is configured to be capable of executing chance preview effects that change the display mode (comment display mode Ch1) of the comment display section HR52 where various comments are displayed, chance preview effects that change the display mode (executing pending display mode Ch2) of the pending pattern hr0 that is currently in progress, and chance preview effects that change the display mode (character display mode Ch3) of the character 801 used for the variable display.

The display mode of each target mode is configured to be variable and displayable in four stages including the initial mode (default), with the initial mode being "LV1", and the expectation of a big win increasing with each level increase to "LV2", "LV3", and "LV4". For example, the comment display mode Ch1 (see FIG. 809), which is the target mode of the chance notice performance, is configured to execute a chance notice performance in which the background color of the comment display section HR52 is variable and displayed according to the set stage level, with "LV1" displaying the background color "white", "LV2" displaying the background color "yellow", "LV3" displaying the background color "red", and "LV4" displaying the background color "rainbow".

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, if a period during which the chance preview performance is not executed continues for a predetermined period of time, the chance preview performance can be forcibly executed.

Now, with reference to Figure 810, the flow of forcibly executing the chance notice performance will be explained. Figure 810 is a diagram showing the number of times the special pattern changes and the flow of the chance up performance that is executed. Depending on the execution of the special pattern change, a lottery is held to see whether or not to execute the chance notice performance when setting the performance mode of the change performance. Then, if the lottery to execute the chance notice performance is not won, 1 is added to the performance execution counter 223aah (see Figures 810(a) and (b)). Then, if the value of the performance execution counter 223aah after the addition reaches 50, the chance notice performance is forcibly executed.

In addition, if the chance notice performance execution lottery is won and the performance mode of the determined chance notice performance is a mode with a low expectation of a big win (LV2), the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is added to the normal "1" as well as the low expectation mode "1". In other words, "2" is added to the value of the performance execution counter 223aah with one special pattern change (see FIG. 810(b)). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the update contents of the number of times the special pattern changes and the value of the performance execution counter 223aah different, making it difficult to tell whether the chance notice performance was forcibly executed or whether the chance notice performance was executed based on winning the chance notice performance lottery.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 810(c), when a chance notice performance is executed based on winning the chance notice performance lottery, and a mode (LV4) with a high probability of winning is set for the miss variation performance, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is subtracted (30 is subtracted). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a chance notice performance with an excessively high probability of winning from being executed in the miss variation performance.

In this 26th control example, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is configured to be incremented each time a special pattern lottery is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a management means for managing the set special pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be provided, and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be incremented each time the special pattern fluctuation is executed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds).

By configuring it in this way, the number of increments of the effect execution counter 223aah for one special pattern drawing can be made different depending on the content of the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern change that is executed, making it difficult to tell whether the chance notice effect has been forcibly executed or whether it has been executed based on winning the chance notice effect lottery.

In addition, regardless of the number of times the special pattern lottery is performed, the chance preview performance can be forcibly performed at a predetermined interval (a predetermined interval with respect to the play time during which the special pattern variation is being performed), which makes it possible to prevent a long period of play time during which the chance preview performance is not performed.

Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of the special pattern variation to be different depending on the set game state, for example, to make it easier to set a shorter variation time when the time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set, and by configuring it so that the chance notice performance can be forcibly executed based on the value of the performance execution counter 223aah regardless of which game state is set, the frequency with which the chance notice performance is forcibly executed can be made different depending on the set game state. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set than when a game state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to forcibly execute the chance notice performance with fewer special pattern lottery executions when a game state that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

Also, a pachinko machine 10 capable of storing the right to execute a special pattern lottery (special pattern reservation) may be configured so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when there are a small number of special pattern reservations stored than when there are a large number of reserved special patterns, and so that when many reserved special patterns have not been acquired, it is more likely that a chance notice performance will be forcibly executed with a smaller number of special pattern lotteries than when playing to acquire many reserved special patterns. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on due to the special pattern lotteries not being executed frequently.

Furthermore, the update contents of the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be made different depending on the performance contents of the variable performance executed in response to the special pattern variation. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing a pseudo-variable performance in which the third pattern, which is displayed in response to the special pattern variation, is temporarily stopped during one special pattern variation and then restarted, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be configured to be updated (added) based on the number of times the third pattern varies (including restarts) rather than the actual number of times the special pattern varies. By configuring it in this way, the frequency at which the chance notice performance is forcibly executed can be made different depending on the performance contents of the variable performance being executed.

In addition, in the 26th control example, the counter value is incremented by "1" each time a special symbol lottery is executed (each time an update condition for updating (incrementing) the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is met), but this is not limited thereto. For example, when a predetermined condition is met, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah that is updated when the update condition is met may be different from when the predetermined condition is not met. When the normal state is set, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah may be incremented by "1" when the update condition is met, and when the time-saving state is set, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah may be incremented by "2" when the update condition is met. Also, when the probability bonus state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is set, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah may be decremented by "1" when the update condition is met.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the frequency with which the chance notice performance is forcibly executed depending on the set game state. Also, when a probability variable state is set in which it is easy to win a jackpot in a short period of time, it is possible to configure it so that the chance notice performance is less likely to be forcibly executed, thereby preventing the player from unnecessarily executing the chance notice performance.

In addition, conditions other than the set game state may be set as conditions for changing the updated value when the update condition for updating the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is satisfied. For example, there may be multiple performance modes that can be switched in the same game state, and the update contents of the performance execution counter 223aah may be different when one performance mode is set and when another performance mode different from the one performance mode is set when the update condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, when a performance mode that adds a large value to the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is set, it is easier to execute the chance notice performance than when another performance mode is set. Therefore, by switching the performance mode, it is easier to change the content of the performance provided to the player, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when the update condition for updating the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is met, a predefined value is added (subtracted), but without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute a process to determine the current update content (the added value or subtracted value of the performance execution counter 223aah) when the update condition is met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the value of the performance execution counter 223aah, so that when a chance notice performance is executed, it is difficult to tell whether the chance notice performance has been executed forcibly or whether the chance notice performance has been executed based on winning the chance notice performance lottery.

On the other hand, the device may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive effect that can suggest to the player the value of the effect execution counter 223aah. In this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing any or all of the following: a first suggestive effect that suggests the current value of the effect execution counter 223aah; a second suggestive effect that suggests the number of remaining times until the execution conditions for the chance notice effect are met (the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches 50); and a third suggestive effect that suggests the remaining information until the chance notice effect is forcibly executed.

By configuring it in this manner, it becomes possible for the player to predict the timing at which the chance preview performance will be forcibly executed, so that when a chance preview performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to predict whether the chance preview performance has been forcibly executed or whether the chance preview performance has been executed based on winning the chance preview performance lottery. For example, when the chance preview performance is executed at a timing different from the timing at which it was predicted that the chance preview performance would be forcibly executed, it becomes easier to predict that the chance preview performance has been executed based on winning the chance preview performance lottery, so that the player can become interested in the timing at which the chance preview performance will be executed.

In this case, it is advisable to configure the first to third suggestion effects described above to be executed for some of the chance preview effects, rather than for all chance preview effects that are forcibly executed based on the value of the effect execution counter 223aah. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily mix chance preview effects that are easy for the player to understand as to which chance preview effect was executed and chance preview effects that are difficult to understand, thereby increasing the fun of making predictions.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 26th control example>
Next, referring to Figure 811, we will explain the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 26th control example, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 22nd control example.

The long press performance scenario table 222aaa is a data table that specifies multiple scenarios for decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 when the player performs a long press operation during the second part performance (repeated tap operation performance) of the battle performance, and is referenced to determine the decrease scenario when it is determined that a long press operation has been performed during the valid operation period during the second part performance.

In this 26th control example, the remaining HP value 890a is reduced in different ways depending on the operation of the operation means (effect button 22) by the player during the rapid-fire operation effect, and when a long press operation is performed during the rapid-fire operation effect, the remaining HP value 890a is reduced according to the length of the period during which the long press is determined. On the other hand, when a rapid-fire operation is performed during the rapid-fire operation effect, a lottery is executed each time it is determined that the operation means (effect button 22) has been pressed to determine whether or not to reduce the remaining HP value 890a, and if the lottery is won, the remaining HP value 890a is reduced.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the process leading up to the display of the result of the rapid-fire operation presentation to the player depending on the operation method used by the player to operate the operation means in the rapid-fire operation presentation. This allows players who want to enjoy a variety of processes to operate the operation means using different operation methods, preventing players from becoming bored too quickly.

Now, referring to FIG. 813, the contents defined in the long press performance scenario table 222aaa will be explained. FIG. 813 is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in the long press performance scenario table 222aaa. As shown in FIG. 813, the long press performance scenario table 222aaa defines different scenario types corresponding to the hit/miss determination result and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf.

For each scenario type, a scenario is specified that differs in the tendency for HP value to decrease depending on the duration of the long press. The amount of HP value to decrease at each timing is determined based on the remaining HP value and the final HP value.

Specifically, when the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the variable performance in which the current battle performance is executed is "win", "win scenario 1" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 19", "win scenario 2" is specified for the range of "20 to 69", and "win scenario 3" is specified for the range of "70 to 98", and when the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the variable performance in which the current battle performance is executed is "miss", "miss scenario 1" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 19", "miss scenario 2" is specified for the range of "20 to 69", and "miss scenario 3" is specified for the range of "70 to 98".

Here, we will explain the detailed contents of the various scenarios (performance scenarios) defined in the long press performance scenario table 222aaa. For "win scenario 1" and "miss scenario 1," the scenario contents (precedent type) are defined so that the remaining HP is more likely to decrease in the first half of the time during which the long press operation is being performed than in the second half. When the long press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "reduction: medium" is defined, when the long press duration reaches 1 second, "reduction: medium" is defined, when the long press duration reaches 1.5 seconds, "reduction: large" is defined, and when the long press duration reaches 2 seconds, "upper limit" is defined. In other words, even though the long press duration can be a maximum of 3 seconds during the effective operation period, when the long press duration reaches 2 seconds, the scenario contents are defined to reduce the remaining HP value to the upper limit.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to create a period in which the remaining HP value cannot be decreased even if the long press operation is continued while there is still time remaining in the effective operation period. Therefore, when the above-mentioned non-decreasing period is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether a non-decreasing period has been set or whether the remaining HP value has reached the upper limit. Therefore, even if the remaining HP value has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to operate the effect button 22 (operation means) in the hope that the remaining HP value may be decreased again.

For "Hit Scenario 2" and "Miss Scenario 2," the scenario content (balanced type) is specified to make it easier to reduce the remaining HP on average over the elapsed time that the long press operation is being performed continuously, with "Reduction: Medium" set when the long press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "Reduction: Medium" set when the long press duration reaches 1 second, "Reduction: Medium" set when the long press duration reaches 1.5 seconds, "Reduction: Medium" set when the long press duration reaches 2 seconds, "Reduction: Medium" set when the long press duration reaches 2.5 seconds, and "Upper limit" set when the long press duration reaches 3 seconds. In other words, an effect is executed in which the remaining HP value gradually decreases depending on the length of the long press duration.

By configuring it in this way, it is difficult to reduce the remaining HP value to the upper limit unless a long press operation is performed immediately after the operation valid period is set, making it difficult for the player to predict the result of the win/loss judgment.

For "win scenario 3" and "miss scenario 3," the scenario content (second half type) is specified so that the remaining HP is more likely to decrease significantly in the second half of the time that the long press operation is being performed than in the first half, and it is specified that "small decrease" occurs when the long press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "small decrease" occurs when the long press duration reaches 1 second, "small decrease" occurs when the long press duration reaches 1.5 seconds, "small decrease" occurs when the long press duration reaches 2 seconds, "large decrease" occurs when the long press duration reaches 2.5 seconds, and "upper limit" occurs when the long press duration reaches 3 seconds. In other words, an effect is executed in which the remaining HP value is gradually decreased significantly depending on the length of the long press duration.

As explained above, in this 26th control example, when a long press operation is performed within the effective operation period during a battle performance, when it is determined that a long press operation has been performed, a performance scenario is determined by referring to the long press performance scenario table 222aaa, and a performance that reduces the remaining HP value according to the duration of the long press is executed by referring to the determined scenario. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute a performance that reduces the remaining HP value in a different performance pattern than when a rapid-fire operation is performed within the effective operation period during a battle performance, making it easier to provide the player with the fun of selecting an operation method for the performance button 22 (operation means).

Returning to FIG. 811, we will continue the explanation. The miss final HP selection table 222aab is a data table that is referenced when determining the final display mode (upper limit of the HP value that can be reduced) of the enemy character 880a's HP gauge 890 as the result of the battle presentation.

As described above, the battle presentation is a presentation in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a is gradually reduced, and if the result of the corresponding special pattern drawing is a jackpot, then the presentation result in which the enemy character 880a is defeated (the HP value is reduced to 0) is determined as the winning presentation result, and if the result of the corresponding special pattern drawing is a miss, then the presentation result in which the enemy character 880a cannot be defeated (the HP value cannot be reduced to 0) is determined as the losing presentation result.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, when a failure performance result is displayed, a value of 1 can be determined from multiple values as the HP value of the enemy character 880a that can be reduced. By configuring it in this way, even when a battle performance that results in a failure performance is executed, the HP value that can be reduced can be made different.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when a long press operation is performed, a non-decrease period during which the HP value of the enemy character 880a cannot be decreased can be set for a predetermined period (maximum 2 seconds). Therefore, if a situation occurs in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a does not decrease despite the operation of the operating means during a battle performance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the performance result of the battle performance being performed is a miss and the HP value cannot be decreased any further, or whether a non-decrease period has been set and the HP value 890a cannot be decreased.

This makes it possible for the player to be motivated to operate the operating means until the end of the validity period.

Now, with reference to FIG. 814(a), the contents of the miss final HP selection table 222aab will be explained. FIG. 814(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the miss final HP selection table 222aab. As shown in FIG. 814(a), the miss final HP selection table 222aab defines various final HP values corresponding to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 4", the final HP value is set to "50", when it is in the range of "5 to 14", the final HP value is set to "30", when it is in the range of "15 to 24", the final HP value is set to "20", when it is in the range of "25 to 44", the final HP value is set to "10", and when it is in the range of "45 to 98", the final HP value is set to "5".

For example, if "50" is selected as the final HP value, the remaining HP value will not fall below 50 even if the effect button 22 is operated during the second part of the battle effect, so an effect will be executed in which the remaining HP value 890a will not change display (decrease display) from the display mode indicating 50 (a display mode occupying a position halfway between 0 and MAX). Therefore, depending on the selected final HP value, it is possible to create situations at various times (different remaining HP values) where the HP value cannot be decreased despite the effect button 22 being operated during the second part of the effect.

Therefore, when a small HP value is selected as the final HP value of the battle performance, it is possible to proceed with a performance in which the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 is made smaller (shorter) than when a large HP value is selected as the final HP value, making it easier to anticipate that the performance result of the ongoing battle performance will be a performance result corresponding to a jackpot win (a performance result in which the HP value becomes 0).

Here, even if a battle performance is executed that shows a performance result other than a big win (a miss win), i.e., a battle performance in which a final HP value other than "0" is selected, it is possible to set a different HP value that can ultimately be reduced, in order to give the expectation that a performance result corresponding to a big win (a performance result in which the HP value becomes 0) will be displayed.

In other words, by making it possible to execute a battle performance in which the HP value can be reduced to near "0" (a battle performance in which a small value (such as "5") is set as the final HP value) and a battle performance in which the HP value cannot be reduced to near "0" (a battle performance in which a large value (such as "50") is set as the final HP value) in the case where the performance result of the battle performance is a miss win, the expectation of winning the jackpot when the HP value is reduced to a predetermined HP value (such as "5") can be increased by the fact that a battle performance in which the HP value cannot be reduced to a predetermined HP value (such as "5") is executed, compared to the case where a battle performance in which the HP value can always be reduced to a constant HP value (such as "5") in the case of a miss win.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be interested not only in whether the HP value reaches "0" or not, but also in the process of the HP value decreasing, which allows the player to pay close attention to the content of the performance over the long period of time that the battle performance is being performed.

As mentioned above, if the HP value that can ultimately be reduced (final HP value) is configured to be different, it is necessary to execute a battle performance in which a larger final HP value (for example, "50") is set than the other performance results. If a battle performance in which a large final HP value is set is executed, the HP value will reach the final HP value at an earlier stage than the other battle performances, which can cause the player to quickly realize that the performance result of the battle performance being executed is a wrong performance result.

In contrast to this, in the present 26th control example, during the operation presentation period in which it is possible to decrease the HP value based on the operation of the operating means, a non-decreasing period can be set as a period in which it is not possible (it becomes difficult) to decrease the HP value, even if the operating means has been operated and the final HP value has not been reached.

By configuring the non-decreasing period to be configurable in this way, the decrease in the HP value can be stopped while the non-decreasing period is set, even if the final HP value has not been reached. Therefore, even if a situation occurs during a battle presentation where the HP value does not decrease despite operating the operating means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the final HP value has been reached or a non-decreasing period has been set. This makes it possible to make the player expect that the HP value will decrease again (the non-decreasing period will be released) during the battle presentation, enhancing the presentation effect.

As shown in FIG. 814(a), in this 26th control example, the final HP value of a battle effect (missing battle effect) which indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a win can be determined from five values: "5", "10", "20", "30", and "50". Smaller values are more likely to be selected as the final HP value than larger values, so that when a miss battle effect is executed, the final HP value of "50" is selected in approximately 5% of cases, the final HP value of "30" in approximately 10% of cases, the final HP value of "20" in approximately 20% of cases, and the final HP value of "10" in approximately 55% of cases.

Therefore, when the battle performance is executed, each time the HP value decreases to one of the values "50", "30", "20", "10", or "5", it is possible to make the player curious as to whether the decrease in the HP value will end at that stage (whether it is the final HP value or not), and it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot if the decrease in the HP value continues.

The entry lottery table 222aac is a data table that is referenced when executing an entry lottery to determine whether or not to set a non-variable period (non-decreasing period) in which the presentation mode is not changed during the effective operation period (effective period) in an operation presentation (battle presentation) in which the presentation mode can be changed (HP value can be decreased) based on the player's operation of the operation means (presentation button 22), and is referenced when it is decided to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the player's operation of the operation means during the second part presentation of the battle presentation.

If the entry lottery, which is executed by referring to the entry lottery table 222aac, is won, a non-decreasing period is set. During this non-decreasing period, even if the player operates the operating means, the HP value is not decreased based on that operation. While the non-decreasing period is set, a cancellation lottery to determine whether or not to cancel the non-decreasing period is executed at predetermined intervals (0.5 second intervals), and the non-decreasing period is cancelled if the cancellation lottery is won or if the predetermined upper limit period (3 seconds) of the non-decreasing period has elapsed.

Now, with reference to Figure 814 (b), the detailed contents of the entry lottery table 222aac will be explained. Figure 814 (b) is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents stipulated in the entry lottery table 222aac. As shown in Figure 814 (b), the entry lottery table 222aac stipulates the result of the entry lottery (win, no win) in correspondence with the win/lose determination result (special pattern lottery result), the current remaining HP value, and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf.

Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit and the remaining HP value is 100, a "no win" entry lottery is defined for the entire range of possible values of the acquired first effect counter 223vf, 0 to 98. In other words, the system is configured so that a non-decrease period is not set when the remaining HP value is 100, i.e., when the HP value of the enemy character 880a has not decreased. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to prevent a battle effect from ending without decreasing the HP value based on an operation on the operating means, even though the battle effect has been executed, and thus to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

In addition, when the remaining HP value is in the range of "99 to 70", the acquired first performance counter 223vf value is set to "non-win" for the range of "0 to 79" and "win" for the range of "80 to 98". When the remaining HP value is in the range of "69 to 40", the acquired first performance counter 223vf value is set to "non-win" for the range of "0 to 54" and "win" for the range of "55 to 98". When the remaining HP value is in the range of "39 to 20", the acquired first performance counter 223vf value is set to "non-win" for the range of "0 to 34" and "win" for the range of "35 to 98". When the remaining HP value is in the range of "19 to 1", the entry lottery "win" is set for the entire range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 98".

Similarly, if the result of the win/loss judgment is "miss" and the remaining HP value is "100", the entry lottery "non-win" is specified for the entire possible range of the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf, "0 to 98", if the remaining HP value is in the range of "99 to 70", the entry lottery "non-win" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 94", and "win" is specified for the range of "95 to 98", if the remaining HP value is in the range of "69 to 40", "No win" is defined for the range of "0-79" and "Win" is defined for the range of "80-98". When the remaining HP value is in the range of "39-20", "No win" is defined for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf in the range of "0-54" and "Win" is defined for the range of "55-98". When the remaining HP value is in the range of "19-1", "No win" is defined for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf in the range of "0-94" and "Win" is defined for the range of "95-98".

In other words, in this 26th control example, the smaller the remaining HP value, the higher the probability of winning the entry lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a non-decreasing period from being set when the HP value has not decreased significantly, even though a battle performance has been executed.

The system is also configured so that the probability of winning the entry lottery is higher if the special pattern lottery results in a jackpot win than if the special pattern lottery results in a miss win. In other words, the system is configured so that a non-decreasing period is more likely to be set when a battle performance in which the final HP value is set to "0" (a winning battle performance) is executed than when a battle performance in which the final HP value is set to a value other than "0" (a missing battle performance) is executed.

By configuring it in this way, regardless of which presentation result is set for the battle presentation, it is easy to set a period during which the HP value does not decrease (a period during which a non-decreasing period is set, a period after the final HP value is reached) at a predetermined timing before the HP value becomes "0". This makes it difficult to predict the presentation result of the battle presentation being performed at the time the period during which the HP value does not decrease is set.

Furthermore, even if a period during which the HP value will not decrease has been set, the possibility remains that a period during which the HP value will decrease again can be set, so that even after a period during which the HP value will not decrease has been set, the battle presentation can be continued (operations on the operating means can be continued) in the hope that the HP value will decrease again.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this 26th control example, the non-decreasing period can be set only once for one valid operation period (valid period). In other words, the entry lottery can be executed only during the valid operation period when no non-decreasing period has been set even once. This prevents multiple non-decreasing periods from being set within one valid operation period, and the valid operation period from passing without a period during which the HP value can be decreased being set.

The release lottery table 222aad is a data table that is referenced when a release lottery is executed to release a set non-decreasing period. The release lottery is executed at a predetermined interval (0.5 second interval) while the non-decreasing period is set, and is configured so that the longer the time that elapses during the non-decreasing period (the shorter the remaining operation valid period), the higher the probability of winning the release lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the non-decreasing period from continuing for an unnecessarily long period.

In addition, in this 26th control example, an upper limit is set for the duration of the non-decreasing period, which is shorter than the operation valid period (5 seconds), and when the non-decreasing period continues for 3 seconds, the upper limit of the non-decreasing period is reached and the non-decreasing period ends. In other words, even if a situation occurs in which the release lottery to release the non-decreasing period is not won and the release lottery is repeatedly executed, the non-decreasing period can be ended based on the passage of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the non-decreasing period from continuing for an unnecessarily long time.

The system is also configured so that the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is higher when the remaining HP value is large at the time the non-decreasing period is set than when the remaining HP value is small. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that the non-decreasing period will continue for a long period of time when the remaining HP value is large when the non-decreasing period is set.

The additional reduction value selection table 222aae is a data table referenced when determining the reduction value of the HP value to be granted when the non-reducing period is released, and is referenced when the termination conditions for ending the non-reducing period (winning the release lottery, time passing) are met. The pachinko machine 10 in this 26th control example is configured to be able to set a non-reducing period in which the HP value is not reduced based on operation of the operating means even when the remaining HP value has not reached the final HP value, and is configured to make it difficult for the player to know whether the remaining HP value has reached the final HP value even when a situation occurs in which the remaining HP value does not decrease despite operating the operating means during the effective operation period during the battle performance.

And even if a non-decrease period is set within the operation valid period, that is, even if the period during which the remaining HP value can be decreased based on an operation on the operation means is shortened, in order to make it easier for the remaining HP value to reach the final HP value within the operation valid period, an additional decrease effect that decreases the remaining HP value can be executed at the end of the non-decrease period without being based on an operation on the operation means. By configuring in this way, even if a non-decrease period is set, it is possible to make it easier for the remaining HP value to reach the final HP value during the operation valid period, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to operate the operation means, because it is not possible to decrease the remaining HP value to "0" within the operation valid period, even if a battle effect that can display an effect result in which the final HP value is set to "0", that is, a battle effect indicating a big win, has been executed.

Here, the detailed contents stipulated in the additional decrease value selection table 222aae, which is referred to when determining the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect, will be explained with reference to FIG. 816. FIG. 816 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the additional decrease value selection table 222aae. As shown in FIG. 816, the additional decrease value selection table 222aae stipulates different decrease values corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the effect of the ongoing battle effect, the differential HP value indicating the difference between the remaining HP value and the final HP value, the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab indicating the length of the non-decrease period, and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.

Specifically, if the hit/miss determination result is "hit", the differential HP value is within the range of "1 to 19", and the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 179", and a decrement value of "5" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the decrement value "0" is set for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrement value "5" is set for the range of "100 to 198". When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1501 to 2999", the decrement value "0" is set for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", the decrement value "5" is set for the range of "100 to 179", and the decrement value "all differential HP" is set for the range of "180 to 198". And when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, the upper limit, the decrement value "all differential HP" is set regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.

Here, the reduction value "all HP difference" indicates the same value as the calculated HP difference value. In other words, when "all HP difference" is selected as the HP value to be reduced in the additional reduction effect, a performance is executed in which all HP values that can be reduced in the additional reduction effect are reduced. For example, in a winning battle performance in which the final HP value is set to "0", when "all HP difference" is selected as the HP value to be reduced in the additional reduction effect, a performance is executed in which the enemy character 880a is defeated by the additional reduction effect (a performance in which the remaining HP value is reduced to 0). In this way, even if a non-reducing period in which the HP value cannot be reduced is set, depending on the performance mode of the additional reduction effect executed when the non-reducing period is released, the performance result of the battle effect can be notified to the player earlier when the non-reducing period is set than when the non-reducing period is not set, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the non-reducing period being set.

On the other hand, in a failure battle effect in which the final HP value is set to a value other than "0", if "all differential HP" is selected as the HP value to be reduced in the additional reduction effect, an effect is executed in which the remaining HP value of enemy character 880a is reduced to the final HP value by the additional reduction effect. By configuring it in this way, the HP value can be significantly reduced in the additional reduction effect, making the player think that it may be possible to reduce the remaining HP value to "0" in the remaining time, and encouraging them to operate the operating means.

In addition, when the non-decreasing period is released, an additional decrease effect is executed with "all HP difference" as the decrease value, and the remaining HP value is decreased to the final HP value, so that the period before the additional decrease effect is executed (non-decreasing period) and the period after the additional decrease effect is executed (the period after the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value) can both be periods during which the HP value cannot be decreased. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to believe that there is a possibility that an effect to decrease the HP value will interrupt the period during which the HP value cannot be decreased based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, even if the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value and the situation in which the remaining HP value cannot be decreased even by operating the operating means continues, the player can be made to focus on the battle effect while having the possibility that the remaining HP value will decrease.

In other words, in this 26th control example, if the differential HP value is within the same range, the longer the non-decreasing period, the greater the likelihood that the HP value will be decreased in the additional decrease performance that is executed when the non-decreasing period is released. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the HP value cannot be decreased to the final HP value in the battle performance due to the non-decreasing period being set to a long period.

In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab reaches its upper limit, i.e., when the upper limit of the non-decreasing period is reached without winning the cancellation lottery executed during the non-decreasing period, the system is configured to make it easier for an additional decrease effect that decreases the HP value to a greater extent than if the cancellation lottery was won midway. By configuring it in this way, when a non-decreasing period is set, the player can play either a game in which the player hopes for the non-decreasing period to be cancelled as soon as possible, or a game in which the player hopes for the non-decreasing period to continue up to the upper limit.

Returning to Figure 816, we will continue to explain the contents stipulated in the additional decrement value selection table 222aae. If the win/loss determination result is "win", the differential HP value is within the range of "20 to 69", and the value of the non-decrement period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", then a decrement value of "0" is stipulated for the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", a decrement value of "5" for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "10" for the range of "180 to 198". In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", a decrement value of "10" is specified for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "15" is specified for the range of "180 to 198".When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1501 to 2999", a decrement value of "15" is specified for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", a decrement value of "10" is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "all difference HP" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab reaches "3000", i.e., the upper limit, the decrement value "all differential HP" is set for the acquired second effect counter 223vg value in the range of "0 to 99", the decrement value "15" for the range of "100 to 179", and the decrement value "10" for the range of "180 to 198".

If the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit", the differential HP value is within the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 179", and a decrement value of "10" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", a decrement value of "15" is specified for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", a decrement value of "0" for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "10" for the range of "180 to 198".When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1501 to 2999", a decrement value of "15" is specified for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", a decrement value of "20" for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "all difference HP" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab reaches "3000", i.e., the upper limit, the decrease value of "25" is set for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", the decrease value of "all differential HP" is set for the range of "100 to 179", and the decrease value of "20" is set for the range of "180 to 198".

As explained above, the additional decrease value selection table 222aae is configured so that, when the results of the corresponding special pattern lottery (win/lose determination results) are the same and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is within the same range, the larger the differential HP value at the time when the additional decrease effect is executed, the more likely it is that a larger value will be selected as the HP value that can be decreased in the additional decrease effect. By configuring it in this way, if a non-decrease period is set with the HP value hardly decreased during the effective operation period of the battle effect, the HP value can be decreased more greatly in the additional decrease effect than if a non-decrease period was set with the HP value decreased. Therefore, even if a non-decrease period is set during the effective operation period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue operating the effect button 22 even after the non-decrease period is released without feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the differential HP value is configured to be selected more frequently as the HP value (reduction value) to be reduced in the additional reduction performance when the differential HP value is small than when it is large. By configuring it in this way, if a non-reduction period is set when the differential HP value is large, that is, when the HP value has not been reduced since the battle performance was executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the HP value to be reduced to the final HP value in the additional reduction performance that is executed when the non-reduction period is released. This makes it possible to prevent the unnecessary elimination of opportunities to reduce the HP value based on the player operating the performance button 22 during the battle performance.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss judgment is "miss", the differential HP value is within the range of "1 to 19", and the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", then regardless of the value of the acquired second performance counter 223vg, a decrement value of "0" is specified for the entire range of the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg from "0 to 198". In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the range of the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg "0 to 179", and a decrement value of "5" is specified for the range of "180 to 198".When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1501 to 2999", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the range of the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg "0 to 99", a decrement value of "5" is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "3" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab reaches "3000", i.e., the upper limit, the decrease value of "0" is set for the acquired second performance counter 223vg value in the range of "0 to 99", the decrease value of "15" is set for the range of "100 to 179", and the decrease value of "all differential HP" is set for the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, if the win/loss judgment result is "miss", the differential HP value is within the range of "20 to 69", and the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", and a decrement value of "5" is specified for the range of "100 to 198". In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the range of the acquired second performance counter 223vg's value "0 to 99", a decrement value of "10" is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "15" is specified for the range of "180 to 198".In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1501 to 2999", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the range of the acquired second performance counter 223vg's value "0 to 99", a decrement value of "15" is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "10" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab reaches "3000", i.e., the upper limit, the decrement value of "0" is set for the acquired second performance counter 223vg value in the range of "0 to 99", the decrement value of "all differential HP" is set for the range of "100 to 179", and the decrement value of "15" is set for the range of "180 to 198".

If the result of the win/loss judgment is "miss", the differential HP value is within the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 179", and a decrement value of "10" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". In addition, when the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", a decrement value of "10" is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "15" is specified for the range of "180 to 198".When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1501 to 2999", a decrement value of "0" is specified for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", a decrement value of "15" is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrement value of "all difference HP" is specified for the range of "180 to 198". When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab reaches "3000", i.e., the upper limit, the decrease value of "0" is set for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value of "all differential HP" is set for the range of "100 to 198".

As explained above, when the battle effect currently being executed is a miss battle effect, the additional decrease effect that decreases the HP value is less likely to be executed than when the battle effect is a win battle effect. By configuring it in this way, in a miss battle effect in which a value greater than that of a win battle effect is set as the final HP value, the HP value is decreased by the additional decrease effect, which prevents the player from needlessly eliminating an opportunity to decrease the HP value based on the player's operation of the effect button 22 during the battle effect.

In addition, in this 26th control example, as shown in FIG. 816, "0" can be selected as the HP value (decrease value) to be decreased in the additional decrease effect. When the decrease value "0" is selected, only the effect indicating that the non-decrease period has been released is executed, and the effect is set so that the effect of the ally character 801a decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the non-decrease period has been released, even if the decrease value "0" is selected.

In addition, a different presentation mode may be set as the presentation mode of the additional reduction presentation executed when the reduction value "0" is set. For example, a presentation mode may be set in which the ally character 801a attacks the enemy character 880a, but the enemy character 880a avoids the attack, so that the HP value does not decrease. By configuring in this way, when the additional reduction presentation is executed, a presentation in which the ally character 801a attacks the enemy character 880a is executed regardless of the selected reduction value, so that it is difficult to notice that the reduction value "0" was selected. In this case, it is preferable to configure the presentation mode in which the enemy character 880a avoids the attack of the ally character 801a to be set even in a part of the presentation in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced based on the operation of the presentation button 22. By configuring in this way, a presentation corresponding to the reduction value "0" can be executed in presentations other than the additional reduction presentation, so that even if a presentation corresponding to the reduction value "0" is executed in the additional reduction presentation, it is difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity.

The chance notice lottery table 222aaf is a data table that is referenced when deciding whether or not to execute a chance up effect to increase the likelihood of winning a jackpot in a variable effect to show the result of a special pattern lottery. In this 26th control example, as in each of the control examples described above, when a variable pattern command to show the result of a special pattern lottery is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, a process is executed in the voice lamp control device 113 to set a display variable pattern (variable effect performance pattern) that corresponds to the received variable pattern command.

The type of the display variation pattern is determined based on the information included in the variation pattern command set by the main control unit 110, and the probability of winning a jackpot varies depending on the type that is set. Specifically, in the special pattern variation pattern selection process 22 (see F209 in FIG. 701) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698) of the main control unit 110, a process (see F403 to F405 in FIG. 701) is executed to select (determine) a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set to show the selected variation pattern (see F406 in FIG. 701).

In the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692), different data tables are defined in accordance with the results of the special symbol lottery and the set game state, and different variation patterns (variation times) are selected according to each condition. More specifically, in the same game state (for example, normal state), a variation pattern with a long variation time (90 seconds) is defined to be more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win than when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss win, while a variation pattern with a short variation time (7 seconds) is defined to be more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss win than when the result of the jackpot win. In other words, the expectation of winning a jackpot is configured to differ depending on the selected variation pattern (variation time).

Here, the display variation pattern (variation presentation pattern) set by the voice lamp control device 113 when a variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) output from the main control device 110 is received is configured to set a presentation pattern that corresponds to at least the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation. In other words, when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds is received, a presentation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the presentation mode in which a 90-second variation presentation is executed is determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the determined presentation pattern is set. Therefore, the expectation of winning the jackpot differs depending on the type of variation pattern (presentation pattern) set by the voice lamp control device 113.

The chance notice lottery table 222aaf specifies that the winning probability of the chance notice lottery is different for each type of variation pattern set by the sound lamp control device 113, and is configured so that a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (a presentation pattern corresponding to a long-term special chart variation) has a higher winning probability of the chance notice lottery than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot (a presentation pattern corresponding to a short-term special chart variation). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot when a chance notice is executed, so the chance notice presentation is a presentation mode that indicates a high expectation of winning a jackpot.

Now, referring to FIG. 817(a), the detailed contents of the chance notice lottery table 222aaf will be explained. FIG. 817(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the chance notice lottery table 222aaf. As shown in FIG. 817(a), the chance notice lottery table 222aaf stipulates whether the chance notice lottery will be a success or failure based on the success or failure determination result (the lottery result of the special pattern lottery) corresponding to the current variable performance, the variable pattern type (type of performance pattern) of the current variable performance, and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf.

Specifically, when the hit/miss judgment result is "hit" and the selected fluctuation pattern type is "fluctuation pattern 1", the chance notice lottery "win" is specified for the entire range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 98". Also, when the fluctuation pattern type is "fluctuation pattern 2", the chance notice lottery "win" is specified for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value range of "0 to 94", and the chance notice lottery "non-win" is specified for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value range of "95 to 98". And, when the selected fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern type "fluctuation pattern n", the chance notice lottery "non-win" is specified for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value range of "0 to 94", and the chance notice lottery "win" is specified for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value range of "95 to 98".

On the other hand, if the win/loss judgment result is "miss" and the selected fluctuation pattern type is "fluctuation pattern 2", the chance notice lottery "win" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 94", and the chance notice lottery "non-win" is specified for the range of "95 to 98". And, if the selected fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern type "fluctuation pattern n+1", the chance notice lottery "non-win" is specified for the entire range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 98".

Here, the type of change pattern (performance pattern) selectable by the voice lamp control device 113 is determined based on the information (information indicating the change type) contained in the change pattern command output from the main control device 110, and a change performance according to the determined change pattern (performance pattern) is executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in order to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game, it has become common in recent years to provide many types of variation patterns (presentation patterns) that are determined by the voice and lamp control device 113. In this case, when a specific variation pattern command is output from the main control device 110, it is preferable to configure it so that different types of variation patterns (presentation patterns) can be selected based on the specific information included in the specific variation pattern command and the presentation random number value that is randomly updated by the voice and lamp control device 113.

By configuring it in this way, it is easier to increase the number of types of change patterns (performance patterns) set by the voice lamp control device 113 compared to the number of types of change patterns set by the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of types of change performances that are executed without increasing the number of types of change that can be selected by the main control device 110, which has limited capacity.

In the chance prediction lottery table 222aaf shown in FIG. 817(a), each variation pattern type is specified in the order of likelihood of being selected when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, compared to when the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. Specifically, "variation pattern 1" is the variation pattern that is most likely to be selected when a jackpot is won (selected only when a jackpot is won), and "variation pattern n+1" is the variation pattern that is least likely to be selected when a jackpot is won (selected only when a miss is won).

Here, in this 26th control example, the variation pattern types selected by the voice lamp control device 113 include a variation pattern (variation pattern 1) that is selected only when a jackpot is won, and a variation pattern (variation pattern n+1) that is selected only when a jackpot is not won. In other words, the variation pattern type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that results in a jackpot is selected from the range of "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern n", and the variation pattern type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that results in a loss is selected from the range of "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern n+1".

The "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern n" are the variation pattern types that can be selected regardless of whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win or a miss win, and are configured in ascending order from "variation pattern 2" onwards to increase the probability of winning the jackpot.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a variation pattern that guarantees a jackpot and a variation pattern that guarantees a miss as the variation pattern types to be selected. This means that, compared to when only variation patterns that can result in either a jackpot or a miss are provided, the allocation when selecting a variation pattern (presentation pattern) becomes biased, making it difficult for the variation presentation to be executed at a frequency different from the expected probability of winning a jackpot for the predetermined variation pattern type.

The chance mode selection table 222aag is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the chance notice to be executed when the chance notice lottery is won. In this 26th control example, multiple chance notices are executable in one variable performance, and for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 809, a chance notice performance that changes the display mode (comment display mode ch1) of the comment display section HR52 where various comments are displayed, a chance notice performance that changes the display mode (executing pending display mode) of the pending pattern hr0 that is being executed, and a chance notice performance that changes the display mode (character display mode ch3) of the character 801 used in the variable display are executable.

The chance mode selection table 222aag specifies a mode change scenario (change scenario) including information (post-change level information) indicating to what degree which display mode is to be changed, in correspondence with the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the executed change performance and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg. In addition, for a change performance for which it is determined that a chance advance notice performance is to be forcibly executed, a special change scenario is specified in correspondence with the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the executed change performance and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg.

Here, in this 26th control example, the system is configured to forcibly execute a chance notice effect depending on the number of executions of a change effect (miss change effect) corresponding to multiple special pattern changes (miss changes) that are executed without winning a jackpot, and the execution content. For example, if a miss change effect is executed 50 times in a row without winning a jackpot, and the chance notice effect has never been executed as the performance mode of the 50 miss change effects, a performance mode including a chance notice effect is forcibly selected as the performance mode of the miss change effect to be executed next.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play from occurring due to consecutive execution of miss-changing effects without executing the chance preview effect.

In addition, in the 26th control example, a storage means is provided that can store information about the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation used in the previously executed variable presentation, and the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation used in the variable presentation determined to be forcibly executed is selectable based on the information stored in the storage means. For example, when the chance notice presentation is forcibly selected in a state in which information indicating that the presentation mode (chance mode) of the chance notice presentation with a high probability of winning a jackpot (high expectation of winning a jackpot) has been selected as the presentation mode of the miss variable presentation is stored in the storage means, if the presentation result of the variable presentation in which the chance notice presentation is forcibly executed is a presentation result indicating a jackpot win (a winning variable presentation), the presentation mode included in the information stored in the storage means is selectable as the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the presentation mode (chance mode) of the chance notice presentation with a high probability of winning a jackpot (high expectation of winning a jackpot) is set as the presentation mode of consecutive miss variable presentations, causing distrust among players.

On the other hand, if the result of the variable presentation in which the chance notice presentation is forcibly executed is a presentation result indicating a miss (a miss variable presentation), a presentation mode other than the presentation mode included in the information stored in the storage means can be selected as the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a presentation mode (chance mode) of a chance notice presentation with a high probability of winning a jackpot (high expectation of a jackpot) is set as the presentation mode of consecutive miss variable presentations, causing distrust among players.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation used in the previous winning variation presentation is read based on the information stored in the storage means, and the read presentation mode can be set as the presentation mode of the losing variation presentation in which the chance notice presentation is forcibly executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent some of the presentation modes of the chance preview performance from being selected disproportionately as the presentation mode for the winning variable performance, so that the expectation of winning the jackpot for each of the multiple presentation modes that can be selected as the presentation mode for the chance preview performance can be appropriately maintained.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation set in the previous winning variation presentation can be set as the presentation mode of the losing variation presentation in which the chance notice presentation is forcibly executed, for example, when the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation set in the previous winning variation presentation is specified as selectable only for the winning variation presentation, that presentation mode may be used as a special specification for the losing variation presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variation presentation that is different from the predetermined specified content, so that the variety of the variable presentations executed can be increased. Also, when the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation set in the previous winning variation presentation is specified as selectable only for the winning variation presentation, the storage means may be configured to store multiple pieces of information in order to make it possible to set the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation set in the winning variation presentation before last as the presentation mode of the losing variation presentation in which the chance notice presentation is forcibly executed.

Here, the details of the chance mode selection table 222aag will be explained with reference to FIG. 817(b). FIG. 817(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the chance mode selection table 222aag. As shown in FIG. 817(b), when the result of the special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result) is "win (normal)" and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", "change scenario 1" is defined, when the value is in the range of "100 to 159", "change scenario 2" is defined, when the value is in the range of "160 to 189", "change scenario 3" is defined, when the value is in the range of "190 to 196", "change scenario 4" is defined, and when the value is in the range of "197, 198", "change scenario 5" is defined. In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) is "lose (normal)" and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", "change scenario 6" is specified, if it is in the range of "100 to 159", "change scenario 7" is specified, if it is in the range of "160 to 189", "change scenario 8" is specified, if it is in the range of "190 to 195", "change scenario 9" is specified, if it is in the range of "196, 197", "change scenario 10" is specified, and if it is a value of "198", "change scenario 11" is specified.

Here, the results of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) "win (normal)" and "lose (normal)" refer to the normal pattern in which the chance notice performance is executed based on winning the chance notice lottery, which is executed by referring to the chance notice lottery table 222aaf, and when selecting the performance mode of the chance notice performance in the case of winning the chance notice lottery, the performance mode is selected from the results of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) "win (normal)" and "lose (normal)".

Next, we will explain the contents of the mode change scenarios ("Change Scenario 1" to "Change Scenario 11") that are selected when the chance preview performance is executed in the normal pattern, among the mode change scenarios defined in the chance mode selection table 222aag. This mode change scenario defines at least the upper limit value of the stage level that can be changed among the information for changing the display mode (comment display mode Ch1, pending display mode Ch2, character display mode Ch3) of the target mode (comment display section HR52, pending pattern hr0 in execution, character 810) that is the target of the chance preview performance, among the multiple modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the variable performance.

In this 26th control example, the display mode of each target mode is configured to be variable and displayable in four stages including the initial mode (default), with the initial mode being "LV1", and the expectation of a big win increasing with each level increase to "LV2", "LV3", and "LV4". For example, the comment display mode Ch1 (see FIG. 809), which is the target mode of the chance notice performance, is configured to execute a chance notice performance in which the background color of the comment display section HR52 is variable and displayed according to the set stage level, with "LV1" displaying the background color "white", "LV2" displaying the background color "yellow", "LV3" displaying the background color "red", and "LV4" displaying the background color "rainbow".

The chance mode selection table 222aag shown in FIG. 817(b) lists the upper limit of the variable stage level as information included in the mode change scenario, but also includes information indicating the process for changing the initial mode "LV1" to the upper limit stage level (e.g., "LV3") (such as the process of changing directly from "LV1" to "LV3", or the process of changing in the order of "LV1", "LV2", and "LV3", or the process of displaying "LV3" without displaying the initial mode "LV1") and information indicating the timing for changing the stage level (such as immediately after the target mode is displayed, or after a predetermined period has passed since it was displayed). This allows the display mode of each target mode to be appropriately changed and displayed by referring to the set change scenario.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 817(b), the chance mode selection table 222aag has a normal data table that is referenced when the chance preview performance lottery is won, and a forced data table that is referenced when the execution conditions for forcibly executing the chance preview performance are met, and different mode change scenarios are defined according to the win/lose determination result and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg.

As shown in FIG. 817(b), the stage level "LV4" is a stage level that is determined only when a jackpot has been won, and is configured to be difficult to select compared to other stage levels. By configuring it in this way, when the chance preview performance of stage level "LV4" is executed, the player can know that he or she has won a jackpot before the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, during the special symbol variation period, among the target modes (ch1-ch3) of the chance preview performance executed in chronological order, the target mode executed later (character display mode ch3) is configured to be more likely to determine the stage level "LV4" than the target mode executed earlier (comment display mode ch1). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a chance preview performance of stage level "LV4" is executed immediately after a special symbol variation is executed, causing the player to lose interest in the variation performance being executed.

Next, the contents of the forced data table in the chance mode selection table 222aag will be explained. If the hit/miss determination result is "hit", then "special change scenario 1" is specified as the mode change scenario for the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg in the range of "0 to 198", i.e., the entire range. Also, if the hit/miss determination result is "miss" and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", then "special change scenario 2" is specified as the mode change scenario, if the range is "100 to 159", then "special change scenario 3" is specified as the mode change scenario, and if the range is "160 to 198", then "special change scenario 4" is specified as the mode change scenario.

Here, if "special change scenario 1" is set, that is, if the special pattern lottery in which the value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaches 50 is a winning combination, a change scenario is determined that specifies a high-level target mode that is the same as the previous high-level target mode that was a losing combination stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag.

In other words, in a jackpot variation in which the chance notice performance is forcibly executed, the target mode used in the chance notice performance when the hit/miss judgment result is forcibly executed, even though the stage level is a high level ("LV3"). By configuring it in this way, the higher the stage level of the chance notice performance executed by the pachinko machine 10, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes.

When "Special Change Scenario 1" is set, the information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is preferably configured to refer to the previously used high-level target mode executed in a forced chance preview performance, rather than the one executed as a result of winning the chance preview performance lottery. In other words, as described above, when the chance preview performance lottery is won, the stage level of each target mode is determined by referring to the normal data table described above, so some bias may occur, but basically, it is specified that the higher the stage level, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

However, when the chance preview performance is forcibly executed, even if the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, a high stage level is forcibly determined, which can easily upset the balance between the stage level of the target mode and the expectation of winning the jackpot throughout the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when "special change scenario 1" is set, by configuring it to adopt the target mode executed in the previous chance preview performance that was forcibly executed, the higher the stage level of the chance preview performance executed by the pachinko machine 10, the higher the likelihood of winning the jackpot.

When "Special Change Scenario 2" is set, one of "Change Scenario 8" to "Change Scenario 11," which includes the high level ("LV3") stage level, is determined by lottery. By configuring it in this way, even if the chance notice performance is forcibly executed, it is possible to execute a chance notice performance with the same content as the change scenario that is determined if the chance notice performance lottery is won, making it difficult for the player to understand the trigger for the chance notice performance to be executed.

When "special change scenario 3" is set, a change scenario is determined in which the stage level of a target mode different from the previous high-level target mode that was lost and stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is set to a high level (LV3). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a loss chance announcement performance is executed in which only the same target mode is forcibly set to a high stage level, causing a major imbalance between the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning a jackpot.

When "Special change scenario 4" is set, a change scenario is determined in which the stage level of the target mode that is the same as the previous high-level target mode stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is set to a high level (LV3). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the balance between the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning a jackpot is significantly disrupted due to the frequent execution of a win chance announcement performance that forcibly sets only the same target mode to a high stage level.

In this 26th control example, when "special change scenario 1, 3, 4" is set, the change scenario is determined by referring to the information used in the previous chance preview performance stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to refer to only the high-level target modes used in the previous chance preview performance stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag and determine the stage level for each target mode.

In addition, the chance mode information storage area 223aag may store information on multiple past chance preview performances, and the performance mode may be determined based on information on a chance preview performance executed two or more times before, rather than the last time. Alternatively, the chance mode information storage area 223aag may store game information related to the set game state and performance mode in association with each other, and the performance mode may be determined based on information on a chance preview performance executed in the past under the same game state and performance mode as the time when the special change scenario was determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily force a chance preview performance to be executed in accordance with the game state and performance mode, even if the expectation level of the chance preview performance or the type of target mode is changed depending on the game state and performance mode.

Furthermore, the history information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag may be configured to be erased when a predetermined time has passed (1 hour has passed) or when a standby screen is displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the chance preview performance from being forcibly executed in a performance mode influenced by the playing history of a different player. In this case, when a "special change scenario" is determined, the performance mode can be determined by referring to the normal data table.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when the value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value and the chance notice performance is forcibly executed, the forced data table is referenced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each time the chance notice performance lottery is won, one of multiple chance mode selection tables 222aag with different contents is selected, and the performance mode of the chance notice performance is determined by referring to the determined type of chance mode selection table 222aag, and the ratio of the data table that determines the performance mode by lottery (normal data table) and the data table that forcibly determines a specific performance mode (forced data table) may be differently specified for the multiple chance mode selection tables 222aag.

By configuring it in this way, when the chance preview performance has been executed a predetermined number of times, the performance mode of one of the chance preview performances can be determined by referring to the forced data table without using the configuration of the performance execution counter 223aah, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a chance preview performance is not executed for a long period of time in a performance mode with a high stage level.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the technical idea of periodically executing chance notice performances of performance modes with high stage levels is used, but without being limited to this, the technical idea of periodically executing chance notice performances of performance modes with low stage levels may also be applied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of times chance notice performances of performance modes with low stage levels are executed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the balance between the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning a jackpot is significantly disrupted.

Next, referring to FIG. 812, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th control example will be described. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th control example differs from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example described above in that a non-decreasing period flag 223aaa, a non-decreasing period counter 223aab, a non-decreasing period set flag 223aac, a remaining HP memory area 223aad, a long press flag 223aae, a long press counter 223aaf, and a long press scenario storage area 223i have been added to manage information for executing various effects during the battle effect, and a chance mode information storage area 223aag and an effect execution counter 223aah have been added to manage information for forcibly executing a chance notice effect. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is a flag for indicating that a non-decreasing period is set during the valid operation period in the battle presentation, and is set to ON when a non-decreasing period is set. While this non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to ON, even if the long press operation is continuously performed, a process is executed to invalidate the operation period. In other words, even during the valid operation period, the HP value of the enemy character 880a will not be subtracted based on the long press operation while the non-decreasing period is set.

The non-decreasing period is configured to end when any of the end conditions (elapse of a specified period, winning the cancellation lottery, or ceasing the long press operation) is met, and when the non-decreasing period ends, the non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to off.

The non-decreasing period counter 223aab is a counter for measuring the duration of the non-decreasing period, and when a non-decreasing period is set, the counter value is set to "1". When the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is "1" or more, "1" is added to the counter value each time the performance update process 26 (see F2171 in FIG. 826) executed in the main process (see FIG. 717) of the voice lamp control device 113, which is executed every millisecond, is executed (see F4713 in FIG. 827).

The value of this non-decreasing period counter 223aab is referenced when determining whether the duration of the non-decreasing period has reached the upper limit (3 seconds). It is also referenced when determining the HP value reduction amount in the additional reduction effect that is executed when the non-decreasing period ends (cancelled).

The non-decreasing period set flag 223aac is a flag to indicate that a non-decreasing period has already been set in one battle performance, and is set to ON when the set non-decreasing period ends (is released). It is referenced when a player performs a long press operation during the effective operation period in a battle performance to determine whether or not to execute a lottery to enter a non-decreasing period.

In this 26th control example, the non-decreasing period is not set more than once in one battle performance. In other words, when determining whether or not to execute a lottery for entering a non-decreasing period, it is determined whether the non-decreasing period set flag 223aac is set to on, and if it is determined that it is set to on, the lottery for entering is not executed (processing of F4707: No in FIG. 827).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the non-decreasing period from being set multiple times in one battle performance, reducing the opportunities to reduce the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the operation means (effect button 22), and reducing the player's motivation to operate the operation means. In addition, in this 26th control example, the non-decreasing period can be released by the player ending the long press operation (releasing the effect button 22). Therefore, when a non-decreasing period is set, it becomes possible to select a game in which the player ends the long press operation to end (cancel) the non-decreasing period early, aiming to reduce the enemy's HP value based on the operation of the operation means, or a game in which the player continues the long press operation to continue the non-decreasing period until another end condition (winning the release lottery, the lapse of the upper limit period) is met, aiming to execute an additional decrease performance.

This configuration provides a novel gameplay experience in which the player can choose whether to continue the long press operation during the operation presentation in which the long press operation is valid (during the operation valid period of the battle presentation) or to interrupt and then perform the long press operation again. Also, from the perspective of varying the presentation mode (HP value of enemy character 880a) based on the operation on the operating means, interrupting the long press operation makes it easier to end the non-decreasing period sooner, resulting in a game that is more advantageous to the player.

In the 26th control example, the upper limit of the number of times that the non-decreasing period is set in one battle performance is set to one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-decreasing period may be configured to be set two or more times. In this case, it is preferable to make the entry conditions and release conditions different between the first non-decreasing period and the second non-decreasing period, and for example, it is preferable to configure the second non-decreasing period to be set more easily when the performance result of the battle performance is advantageous to the player (performance result indicating a win) than when the performance result is unfavorable to the player (performance result indicating a miss). By configuring in this way, the player is made to expect that a period in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a does not decrease will be set multiple times during the operation effective period of the battle performance. In other words, in an operation performance in which the player would expect the performance mode (HP value) to change (decrease) more by operating the operation means in the conventional case, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the player is made to expect that the performance mode (HP value) will not decrease based on the operation of the operation means.

The remaining HP memory area 223aad is a memory area for storing the HP value of the enemy character 880a in the battle performance, and when the performance mode (enemy character type) of the battle performance is determined, information is stored to indicate the HP value (MAX value) corresponding to the determined performance mode (enemy character type) (see F4207 in FIG. 819). Furthermore, information is stored to indicate the final result of the battle performance executed, i.e., the final HP value of the enemy character that can be reduced (see F4210 in FIG. 819). In addition, information regarding the amount of HP reduction determined based on the player's operation of the operating means (repeated tapping operation, long press operation) and information regarding the amount of HP reduction determined in the additional reduction performance are also stored.

By reading out the information stored in this remaining HP memory area 223aad, it is possible to calculate the enemy character 880a's current remaining HP value and HP difference value (the difference between the remaining HP value and the final HP value).

The long press flag 223aae is a flag for indicating that a long press operation is being performed, and is set to ON when it is determined that a long press operation is being performed based on information output when a player operates the operation means (effect button 22) (such as an output signal output by a detection means capable of detecting that the effect button 22 has been pressed when it detects the press). Note that the determination of whether the player's operation of the effect button 22 is a press operation or a long press operation is configured to be determined based on the length of time that the effect button 22 is continuously pressed, and the details are omitted as they are explained in the control example described above. Note that even if a method other than the contents described in the control example described above is used, it may be configured to be able to distinguish between different operation methods using well-known publicly available technology.

The long press counter 223aaf is a counter for measuring the duration of a long press operation, and when it is determined that a long press operation is being performed (when the long press flag 223aae is set to on), the counter value is set to "1". Then, when the value of the long press counter 223aaf is "1" or more, "1" is added to the counter value (see F4703 in FIG. 827) in the performance update process 26 (see F2171 in FIG. 826) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 717) which is executed every millisecond.

The value of this long press counter 223aaf is used to update the performance scenario that reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a during the long press operation. It is then cleared to 0 when the valid operation period ends.

In this 26th control example, even if the long press flag 223aae is set to ON (a state in which the long press operation is continuing), the value of the long press counter 223aaf is not updated while the non-decreasing period is set (F4701: Yes in FIG. 827). In addition, even if the long press operation is once interrupted, the value of the long press counter 223aaf is not cleared until the operation valid period ends.

Therefore, even if the player accidentally releases the button during a long press, the effect can be continued based on the updated effect scenario by pressing and holding the effect button 22 again. In this case, it is necessary to perform a long press judgment again for the operation on the effect button 22, so the update period of the effect scenario for the entire period that the effect button 22 is pressed (the period during which the long press is judged) is slightly shorter than when the long press is never interrupted. However, this makes it easier to update the effect scenario more reliably than a specification in which the value of the long press counter 223aaf is cleared to 0 if the player accidentally releases the button during a long press.

The long press scenario storage area 223aai is a memory area for storing a presentation scenario that is determined when it is determined that the operation method of the player on the operation means during the operation valid period of the battle presentation is a long press operation. While a long press operation is being performed, a variable display of the presentation mode (HP value of the enemy character 880a) is performed based on the presentation scenario stored in this long press scenario storage area 223aai.

In this 26th control example, the presentation mode (HP value) during the long press operation is configured to be variable based on the time that has elapsed during the long press operation (the value of the long press counter 223aaf), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the presentation mode (HP value) during the long press operation may be configured to be variable using a different method.

For example, the number of times the effect button 22 is pseudo-pressed (number of pseudo presses) may be determined in accordance with the length of time during which the long press operation is being performed, and the variable mode of the effect mode (HP value) during the long press operation may be determined based on the number of pseudo presses.

The chance mode information storage area 223aag is a storage area for storing information (chance mode information) indicating the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance notice performance determined when a chance notice performance is executed as the performance mode of the variable performance, and stores chance mode information corresponding to the variable performance. This chance mode is determined by the chance up performance determination process 26 (see F3153 in FIG. 823) executed in the process for setting the performance mode of the variable performance (normal state performance mode determination process 26 (see F3053 in FIG. 821)), and is stored in the chance mode selection table 222aag.

The chance mode information stored in the chance mode selection table 222aag is read out during the execution of the variable performance, and when the timing for changing the target mode arrives, a display command is set to change the display mode of the target mode. This chance mode information storage area 223aag has a past information area that can store multiple (3) pieces of chance mode information that have been set in the past, and is configured to be able to store chance mode information corresponding to the variable performance executed in the past for a predetermined period of time in addition to the chance mode information corresponding to the variable performance being executed.

In the 26th control example, if a specific condition is met when determining the chance mode, the chance mode can be determined by referring to past information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the same chance mode from being determined consecutively, resulting in a chance preview performance with little variation being executed, thereby reducing the performance effect.

The performance execution counter 223aah is a counter that is referenced when determining whether the execution conditions for forcibly executing a chance notice performance have been met, and the counter value is incremented by "1" each time a variable performance is executed. Furthermore, an update process is performed to increment or decrement the counter value depending on the performance mode of the variable performance being executed, and when the counter value reaches "50", it is determined that the execution conditions for forcibly executing a chance notice performance have been met. Then, when the performance mode for forcibly executing a chance notice performance has been determined, the counter is cleared to "0".

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 26th control example>
Next, with reference to Fig. 818 to Fig. 827, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 26th control example will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned 22nd control example. Note that the explanation of the same process contents as the above-mentioned 22nd control example will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the variable presentation setting process 26 (F2959) will be explained with reference to FIG. 818. FIG. 818 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable presentation setting process 26 (F2959). As shown in FIG. 818, the variable presentation setting process 26 (F2959) differs from the variable presentation setting process 22 (see F2909 in FIG. 728) in the 22nd control example described above in that the processing contents (F3051 to F3053) executed in each game state are different, but otherwise it is the same.

When the variable performance setting process 26 (F2959) is executed, first, the processes F3001 to F3011 are executed, which are the same as the variable performance setting process 22 described above (see F2909 in FIG. 728). Then, in the process of F3011, if it is determined that the current game state is a time-saving state (F3011: Yes), the time-saving state performance mode determination process 26 is executed (F3051) to determine the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the time-saving state, and then a display variable pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (F3019), and this process is terminated. The details of the time-saving state performance mode determination process 26 (F3051) will be described later with reference to FIG. 819.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3011 that the game is not in the time-saving state (F3011: No), then it is determined whether the current game state is in the high probability state (F3015), and if it is determined that the game is in the high probability state (F3015: Yes), the high probability state presentation mode determination process 26 is executed (F3052) to determine the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed during the high probability state, and then the process of F3019 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the high probability state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3052) will be described later with reference to FIG. 820.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of F3015 that the game is not in a special probability state (F3015: No), the current game state is not in a time-saving state and is not in a special probability state, i.e., the normal state is set, so the normal state presentation mode determination process 26 is executed (F3053) to determine the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed during the normal state, and then the above-mentioned processing of F3019 is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of the normal state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3053) will be described later with reference to FIG. 821.

In this 26th control example, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set three types of game states: normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). In addition, in a state in which a new special symbol lottery can be executed, one of the above-mentioned three game states is always set. Therefore, in the variable performance setting process 26 (F2959) executed when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variable pattern command indicating the execution of a special symbol lottery, if it is determined that the current game state is neither the time-saving state nor the probability state (F3015: No), the normal state is set, and the normal state performance mode determination process 26 (F3053) is executed.

In place of the processing contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this 26th control example, when it is determined that the current game state is neither the time-saving state nor the high probability state (F3015: No), a process for determining whether the current game state is a normal state may be executed, and when it is determined that the current game state is a normal state, the normal state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3053) may be executed. In this case, when it is determined that the current game state is neither the time-saving state, the high probability state, nor the normal state, an error command indicating that the current game state could not be correctly determined may be set, and when the error command is set, a display mode indicating that a special pattern change is being executed and a display mode indicating that the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the special pattern change is not set may be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, if the current game state cannot be correctly determined, the presentation mode of the variable presentation that is executed in a game state different from the set game state is set, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Next, referring to FIG. 819, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3051) that is executed when setting the variable presentation when the time-saving state is set in the variable presentation setting process 26 (F2959) will be explained. FIG. 819 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3051).

This 26th control example differs from the 22nd control example described above in that a battle performance reach (see Figures 800 to 802) can be executed during the time-saving state, and as shown in Figure 819, in the time-saving state performance mode determination process 26 (F3051), a process is executed to determine the performance mode of the battle performance reach.

Specifically, when the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3051) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vp is 1 (F4201), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223vp is 1 (F4201: Yes), the presentation mode of the time-saving end suggestion presentation in which the presentation result of the variable presentation is the end of the chance mode is determined (F4202), and this process is terminated.

Here, in this 26th control example, as in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, while the time-saving state is set, the "chance mode" is set as a mode effect to suggest the set game state. This "chance mode" is also configured to be set in some cases when the probability variable state is set. And, in the change effect corresponding to the last special pattern change (final time-saving change) executed in the time-saving state (change effect corresponding to the 100th special pattern change since the time-saving state was set), a time-saving end suggestion effect is executed in a presentation mode indicating that the "chance mode" ends in response to the end of the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the "chance mode" is set as the probability variable state, a change effect corresponding to the 100th special pattern change since the probability variable state was set, that is, a time-saving end suggestion effect in a presentation mode indicating that the "chance mode" will be upgraded to the "super chance mode" is executed as a change effect corresponding to the 100th special pattern change since the probability variable state was set, that is, a change effect corresponding to the final time-saving change if the time-saving state is set.

Specifically, at the beginning of the time-saving end suggestion effect, a guidance mode (the text "Chance mode end") is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to inform the player that the "Chance mode" will end as the ongoing variable effect ends, and a suggestion mode (the text "Flip a coin. If it lands on heads, you enter Super Chance mode! If it lands on tails, unfortunately, it's normal mode" and a coin flip animation) is displayed to suggest that either a mode effect corresponding to the normal state (normal mode) or a mode effect corresponding to a special state (super chance mode) will be set as the mode effect after the "Chance mode" ends.

After that, if the time-saving state is set, an animation of the tossed coin showing tails is executed according to the presentation mode determined in F4202 of the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26 (see F3051 in FIG. 819), and a change presentation is executed to indicate a transition from "Chance Mode" to "Normal Mode". On the other hand, if the probability variable state is set, an animation of the tossed coin showing heads is executed according to the presentation mode determined in F4302 of the probability variable state presentation mode determination process 26 (see F3052 in FIG. 820), which will be described later, and a change presentation is executed to indicate a transition from "Chance Mode" to "Super Chance Mode".

By configuring it in this way, when the final variation of the time-saving feature or the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the final variation of the time-saving feature is executed, the time-saving feature end indication effect can be started in the same presentation mode, so that even if the final variation of the special symbol in the "chance mode" has started, it is difficult for the player to know whether the currently set game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state.

In the 26th control example, the time-saving end suggestion effect is executed using the period in which the final variation of the special symbol in the "chance mode" is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving end suggestion effect may be executed using multiple special symbol variation periods including at least the final variation of the special symbol. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the time-saving end suggestion effect to be executed using the variation period of the remaining three special symbol variations in the "chance mode". In other words, it is preferable to define the number of special symbol variations that is less than the upper limit number of reserved memories of the second special symbol, which mainly executes the special symbol variation during the "chance mode", as the performance period in which the time-saving end suggestion effect is executed, and to configure the time-saving end suggestion effect to be executed when it is determined that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol that has been acquired at the time when the second special symbol variation that may start the time-saving end suggestion effect is executed is greater than the number of special symbol variations required until the "chance mode" ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure the time-saving end indication effect to be executable when it is determined that the second special symbol change will be executed multiple times in succession from the start of the time-saving end indication effect until the end of the "chance mode". This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the special symbol change is not executed while the time-saving end indication effect is being executed, causing the time-saving end indication effect to become drawn out.

In addition, the presentation period of the time-saving end indication effect can be determined based on the change pattern (change time) of the special symbol change that starts the time-saving end indication effect and the change pattern (change time) of the special symbol change that is identified by reading ahead the winning information included in the acquired second special symbol reserve, so that the presentation result of the time-saving end indication effect can be easily notified to the player in correspondence with the timing at which the "chance mode" ends, i.e., the timing at which the special symbol change that ends the "chance mode" is displayed as stopped.

In addition, in the case of multiple special pattern changes including at least the special pattern change that ends the "chance mode" (for example, a special pattern change where the number of remaining times until the special pattern change that ends the chance mode is executed is 0 to 3), if the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a jackpot, the same change time (for example, 10 seconds) may be set, so that the performance period of the time-saving end indication performance can be determined without predicting the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern change that will be executed later based on the winning information included in the already acquired second special pattern reservation.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving end indication effect is a jackpot, a special presentation mode that indicates to the player that the time-saving end indication effect will transition from "chance mode" to "jackpot game" as the presentation result can be determined, and when the special presentation mode is determined, it may be configured to make it difficult for the player to know whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, or even if a probability variable state is set, it may be possible to determine a presentation mode that makes the player believe that a jackpot has been won during the time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that a jackpot has been won in a time-saving state in which a low probability state of special patterns is set.

Returning to FIG. 819, the explanation will continue. In the process of F4201, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223vp is not 1, i.e., if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223vp is greater than 1 (F4201: No), the type of variable performance is determined by referring to the variable pattern selection table 222va based on the acquired variable pattern (F4203). Note that the specific process contents executed in F4203, i.e., the process contents for determining the type of variable performance (for example, reach type, etc.) based on the variable pattern command output from the main control unit 110, are the same as those in each of the control examples described above, and therefore the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, it is determined whether the variable presentation type determined in the processing of F4203 is a battle presentation reach (F4204), and if it is determined that the variable presentation type is not a battle presentation reach (F4204: No), the presentation mode corresponding to the variable presentation type determined in the processing of F4203 is determined (F4205), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F4204 that the type of variable presentation is a battle presentation reach (F4204: Yes), the presentation mode of the battle presentation is determined by lottery (F4206). In the processing of F4206, the type of ally character 801a, the type of enemy character 880a, and the presence or absence of a first part presentation (see FIG. 800(b)) in the battle presentation are determined by lottery.

Here, the details of the presentation mode determined by the processing of F4206 will be explained. In this 26th control example, the presentation mode of the battle presentation reach is configured to be able to determine a "winning battle presentation reach" or a "missing battle presentation reach" based on the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery. When a "winning battle presentation reach" is determined, a presentation result in which the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a (see FIG. 800) becomes "0" (victory presentation) is executed as the presentation result, and when a "missing battle presentation reach" is determined, a presentation result in which the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a does not become "0" (defeat presentation) is executed as the presentation result.

Furthermore, various display modes displayed during the period from when the battle performance reach is executed to when the performance result is displayed are configured to be different and determinable according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. Specifically, the "winning battle performance reach" is configured to make it easier to select a character modeled after a hero as the ally character 801a, easier to execute the first part performance, and easier to select an enemy character 880a with a low HP value than the "missing battle performance reach". By configuring in this way, when a battle performance reach is executed, the player can predict whether the performance result this time will be a winning performance or a losing performance by understanding the performance content of the battle performance reach that is executed, so that the player can pay attention to the battle performance reach during the performance period in which the battle performance is executed, hoping that a display mode that is likely to be selected in a winning battle performance reach in which a winning performance is executed will be displayed.

In addition, in this battle performance reach, various display modes determined according to the results of the corresponding special symbol lottery are not displayed simultaneously, but are displayed with staggered display timing. Specifically, after the battle performance reach begins, ally character 801a is displayed first, followed by enemy character 880a. The first part performance is then executed. In this way, by configuring the display modes with different selection ratios of modes displayed according to the results of the special symbol lottery to be displayed with staggered timing, it is possible to keep the player interested in the performance content of the battle performance reach for a longer period of time than if they were displayed simultaneously.

In the 26th control example, for each of the display modes that can display different modes depending on the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery, a mode that is more likely to be selected in the case of a winning battle performance reach than in the case of a losing battle performance reach is specified, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the selection ratio of various display mode combinations to differ depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, and it is preferable to specify a combination that includes a type of display mode that is more likely to be selected in the case of a winning battle performance reach than in the case of a losing battle performance reach as the type of display mode (ally character 801a) that is displayed first as a combination of various display modes that is more likely to be selected in the case of a winning battle performance reach than in the case of a losing battle performance reach as a single display mode. By configuring in this way, regardless of the type of ally character 801a that is displayed first after the battle performance reach has started, it is possible to continue to expect that it is a winning battle performance reach.

Next, the specific contents of the various display modes determined by the processing of F4206 will be explained. First, the type of ally character 801a (see FIG. 800) will be explained. In a battle performance reach, either a first ally character (see FIG. 800(a)) modeled after a hero or a second ally character (not shown) modeled after a rabbit is displayed as the ally character 801a, and the first ally character is configured to be more likely to be selected as the performance mode of a successful battle performance reach than the second ally character. On the other hand, the second ally character is configured to be more likely to be selected as the performance mode of a failed battle performance reach than the first ally character. Therefore, when a battle performance reach is started, it is possible to generate interest in which character is displayed as the type of ally character 801a first.

Here, when the first ally character modeled after a hero is selected as the type of ally character 801a, it is configured to be able to reduce the HP value of the enemy character 880a to a greater extent with one attack than the second ally character modeled after a rabbit. In other words, the first ally character, which is more likely to be selected when a hit battle performance reach is reached, is configured to be more likely to execute an attack that greatly reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a. By configuring it in this way, the more the HP gauge 890 (remaining HP value 890a) of the enemy character 880a in a battle performance reach decreases, the higher the possibility of a hit battle performance reach is, so that it is easier for a player watching the battle performance reach to understand that the type of ally character 801a selected is a type that is advantageous to the player (suggesting that it is a hit battle performance reach).

In the 26th control example, both the first ally character and the second ally character are configured to be selected regardless of the type of battle performance reach (winning battle performance reach, losing battle performance reach) and the selection ratios are configured to be different. In addition to this, for example, a third ally character that can only be selected in a winning battle performance reach, or a fourth ally character that can only be selected in a losing battle performance reach, may be configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to understand the performance result (winning performance, losing performance) immediately after the battle performance reach begins, and it is possible to prevent the player from overly expecting a winning battle performance reach every time a battle performance reach is executed.

In addition, the timing at which the player understands the results of the battle performance reach being executed can be made to differ depending on the performance mode of the battle performance reach being executed, so that players who want to quickly understand the results of the battle performance reach being executed can focus more on the performance content of the battle performance reach being executed.

Next, the types of enemy characters 880a (see FIG. 800(a)) will be explained. In a battle performance reach, the enemy character 880a is configured to be displayed as either enemy character A with the lowest HP value (see FIG. 800(a)), enemy character B with a higher HP value than enemy character A (not shown), or enemy character C with the highest HP value (not shown), and is configured so that enemy character A is more likely to be selected and enemy character C is more difficult to select in a successful battle performance reach than in a missed battle performance reach.

Next, the display mode of the HP gauge 890 corresponding to the type of enemy character 880a displayed will be explained. In the battle performance reach executed in this 26th control example, as shown in FIG. 800(a), the HP value of the displayed enemy character 880a is not specifically displayed, but the HP gauge 890 is configured to display only indicators indicating the HP value "0" and the HP value "MAX". Even when enemy characters 880a with different HP values are displayed, the HP gauge 890 is displayed with the same length, and when the HP value is not decreasing ("MAX" state), the display mode (see FIG. 800(a)) in which the remaining HP value 890a occupies the entire HP gauge 890 is displayed.

In other words, for example, if enemy character A's HP value is "50" and enemy character C's HP value is "150", the HP gauge 890 will be displayed with the same length regardless of which type of enemy character 880a is displayed. Then, if ally character 801a attacks and deals "25" damage to enemy character 880a, if enemy character A is selected, the remaining HP value will be "25 (50-25)", so an effect will be executed in which the remaining HP value 890a decreases to 1/2 of the HP gauge 890, and if enemy character C is selected, the remaining HP value will be "125 (150-25)", so an effect will be executed in which the remaining HP value 890a only decreases to 5/6 of the HP gauge 890.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player experiencing a battle performance reach for the first time to notice that the HP value set differs depending on the type of enemy character 880a, and it is possible to vary the degree of decrease in the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 when the ally character 801a attacks, thereby providing the player with an unexpected performance. Also, for a player who has experienced battle performance reaches many times, it is possible to make the player understand the HP value as soon as the type of enemy character 880a is displayed, so that the player can quickly predict whether or not there is a high possibility that the current battle performance reach is a winning battle performance reach.

Next, the contents of the decision regarding the first part performance (see FIG. 800(b)) will be explained. In the process of F4206, in addition to the display mode type of the ally character 801a and the enemy character 880a described above, it is also possible to decide whether or not to execute the first part performance. Specifically, it is configured to decide whether or not to execute the first part performance based on the type of the ally character 801a and the type of the enemy character 880a determined by lottery, and the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery. For example, in the performance mode of the winning battle performance reach, when the second ally character (a type that is difficult to reduce the remaining HP value 890a of the enemy character 880a) is selected as the ally character 801a and the enemy character C (a type with a high HP value) is selected as the enemy character 880a, that is, when the combination is such that it is more difficult to reduce the HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" during the battle performance reach than other combinations, it is configured to decide to execute the first part performance.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a battle performance reach without giving the player a sense of discomfort, even if the type of ally character 801a and the type of enemy character 880a are selected individually.

More specifically, when the second ally character is selected, a performance is executed in which the HP value can be reduced by a maximum of "100" during the battle performance, and when the first ally character is selected, a performance is executed in which the HP value can be reduced by a maximum of "150" during the battle performance. In other words, when the first ally character is selected, the HP value of the enemy character 880a can be reduced to "0" regardless of which type of enemy character 880a is selected (enemy character A (HP value "50") to enemy character C (HP value "150")), and when the second ally character is selected, the HP value of the enemy character 880a can be reduced to "0" if enemy character A or enemy character B is selected as the type of enemy character 880a, and when enemy character C is selected, it is configured so that it is not possible (it is difficult) to reduce the HP value to "0" only by the attack of the second ally character.

Then, the type of ally character 801a and the type of enemy character 880a are determined, the HP value to be reduced by the attack of ally character 801a is determined (the attack mode is determined), the value of the reduced HP value (remaining HP value) is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated remaining HP value indicates a performance result (hit or miss). If it is determined that it indicates a performance result (remaining HP value "0" if it is a hit battle performance reach, or remaining HP value other than "0" if it is a miss battle performance reach), the first part performance is not executed, and if it does not indicate a performance result (the calculated remaining HP value is other than "0" even though it is a hit battle performance reach), it is configured to determine the execution of the first part performance in which the HP value of enemy character 880a is reduced so that the calculated remaining HP value becomes "0".

In addition, for example, if the calculated remaining HP value is "0" even though it is a miss battle performance reach, a recovery effect is executed to increase the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a, or a correction effect is executed to reduce the HP value decreased by the ally character 801a, so that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a does not become "0" when a miss battle performance reach is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the type of ally character 801a and the type of enemy character 880a can be determined randomly, and even if a situation occurs that does not correspond to the performance result of the battle performance reach that is executed by determining the HP value of the enemy character 880a that is reduced by the attack of the ally character 801a based on the determined types of various characters, the performance result can be notified to the player without causing any sense of discomfort.

Here, if the HP value of the enemy character 880a to be reduced by the attack of the ally character 801a is determined based on the result of the battle performance reach, it is possible to reliably notify the result of the battle performance reach only by the attack performance performed by the ally character 801a, so there is no need to execute the first part performance, recovery performance, or correction performance, and the processing for determining the performance mode can be reduced. However, in this case, since the HP value to be reduced by the attack of the ally character 801a differs depending on the performance result of the battle performance reach, the HP value to be reduced will differ even when the same attack mode is selected, making it difficult for the player to predict the HP value to be reduced by understanding the selected attack mode. This causes the player to lose interest in the performance mode (attack mode) of the battle performance reach, resulting in a problem of reduced performance effect.

In contrast to this, in the 26th control example, the attack of the ally character 801a is configured to reduce only the HP value corresponding to the selected attack mode, and if the HP value after the reduction (remaining HP value) deviates from the remaining HP value indicating the performance result, a different performance (first part performance, recovery performance) is executed. Therefore, based on the performance content (attack mode) of the battle performance reach, it is possible to easily predict the remaining HP value 890a after the reduction before the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 decreases. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to quickly detect the performance result of the battle performance reach to pay attention to the performance content of the battle performance reach that is being executed.

As explained above, in this 26th control example, the battle performance reach is configured to allow the player to predict whether or not a combination is likely to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" depending on the types of ally character 801a and enemy character 880a displayed at a point before the performance that actually reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in what combinations the battle performance reach will progress with.

As described above, in this 26th control example, the maximum HP value of the enemy character 880a that can be reduced by an attack from the ally character 801a is varied depending on the type of ally character 801a selected (hero or rabbit), and the upper limit (MAX value) of the HP value is varied depending on the type of enemy character 880a selected (enemy character A to enemy character C), allowing the player to predict whether or not a combination is likely to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" based on the type of each displayed character. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to vary the minimum HP value of the enemy character 880a that can be reduced by an attack from the ally character 801a, vary the number of attacks performed during one battle performance (the number of times the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced), or vary the degree to which the HP value is reduced (defensive power) depending on the type of enemy character 880a selected (enemy character A to enemy character C). Even when configured in this way, the game is configured to allow the player to predict whether or not a combination is likely to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" depending on the types of ally character 801a and enemy character 880a displayed at a point before the effect of actually reducing the HP value of the enemy character 880a is executed as a battle effect reach. By configuring in this way, the game can make the player interested in what combinations will progress in the battle effect reach.

In addition, if the determined character types are types that are advantageous to the player as the presentation mode of the battle presentation reach (a winning battle presentation reach is more likely to be selected than a losing battle presentation reach) or the determined combination of character types is a combination that is advantageous to the player (a winning battle presentation reach is more likely to be selected than a losing battle presentation reach), it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display the words "Chance Up" as a guide mode to indicate that an advantageous presentation mode has been determined. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the presentation mode of this battle presentation reach is an advantageous presentation mode.

The timing for displaying the guidance mode may be the same as when the presentation mode advantageous to the player is displayed, or it may be configured to display the guidance mode after the presentation mode advantageous to the player is displayed. In this case, a player who can tell that the presentation mode is advantageous just by checking the displayed presentation mode can be made aware that the currently executed presentation is advantageous to the player at an earlier stage than a player who can tell that the presentation mode is advantageous because the guidance mode is displayed.

On the other hand, the text "Chance Up", which is a guide mode for indicating that an advantageous presentation mode has been determined, may be configured to be displayed before the corresponding presentation mode is displayed. By configuring in this way, the advantageous presentation mode can be displayed while the player is aware in advance that an advantageous presentation mode will be displayed. This makes it possible to make the player interested in what presentation mode will be displayed as the advantageous presentation mode. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine multiple presentation modes with different degrees of advantage, the player can pay close attention to the presentation that progresses while hoping that a presentation mode with a higher degree of advantage will be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 819, the explanation will continue. Of the various presentation modes determined in the processing of F4206, the HP value (MAX value) corresponding to the determined type of enemy character 880a is stored in the remaining HP memory area 223aad (F4207). In other words, if "enemy character A" is determined as the type of enemy character 880a in the processing of F4206, information corresponding to an HP value of "50" is stored in the remaining HP memory area 223aad; if "enemy character B" is determined, information corresponding to an HP value of "100" is stored in the remaining HP memory area 223aad; if "enemy character C" is determined, information corresponding to an HP value of "150" is stored in the remaining HP memory area 223aad.

Next, to determine the final HP value for this battle performance, it is first determined whether the current fluctuation performance is a winning fluctuation performance (F4208), and if it is determined that it is a winning fluctuation performance (F4208: Yes), the final HP value is determined to be "0" (F4211), and the determined final HP value is stored in the remaining HP memory area 223aad (F4210).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F4208 that the current variation effect is not a winning variation effect (it is a losing variation effect) (F4208: No), the final HP value is determined by referring to the losing final HP selection table 222aad (F4209), and the process proceeds to F4210. As described above, in this 26th control example, when determining the presentation mode of the battle presentation, the upper limit (MAX value) and lower limit (final HP value) of the HP value of the enemy character 880a are configured to be determined by different lotteries. By configuring in this way, compared to when the upper limit (MAX value) and lower limit (final HP value) of the HP value of the enemy character 880a are determined by a single lottery, it is possible to combine the results of each lottery to generate a presentation pattern, and therefore it is possible to reduce the amount of data of the presentation patterns to be stored in advance when the same number of presentation patterns can be executed.

In addition, the battle presentation in this 26th control example is configured so that the presentation mode can be determined based on the differential HP value (the difference between the remaining HP value and the final HP value). For example, when enemy character 880a with the same upper HP limit is selected, even if the remaining HP is the same, if the final HP value is different, the differential HP value will also be different, and the presentation mode can be different. This makes it easier to increase the variety of presentations that are executed when the conditions appear to be the same.

After completing the process of F4210, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the performance pattern is stored in the performance SW effective time memory area 223vp (F4212), and this process ends. Here, the contents of the performance SW effective time memory area 223vp will be explained. This performance SW effective time memory area 223vp is configured to be able to store setting information for indicating the period (start timing and end timing) in which the operation effective period is set for each performance type for which the operation effective period can be set, preparation information indicating 2 seconds before the period in which the operation effective period is set, and display information regarding the display mode of the effective period gauge ga4 (see FIG. 801(a)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the display performance button Sw6 (see FIG. 801(a)).

Then, based on the preparation information stored in the performance SW effective time memory area 223vp, a preparation screen (see FIG. 801(a)) is displayed before the operation effective period is actually set. The display mode displayed on this preparation screen (see FIG. 801(a)) is set based on the display information stored in the performance SW effective time memory area 223vp.

Here, in this 26th control example, the length of the effective operation period set during the battle presentation is configured to be determinable based on the presentation result of the battle presentation, and is configured so that, for example, a longer effective operation period is more likely to be set when the presentation result of the battle presentation corresponds to a winning win (a winning battle presentation). By configuring in this way, the effective operation period can be made longer for a winning battle presentation in which "0" is set as the final HP value than for a losing battle presentation in which a value greater than "0" is set as the final HP value, making it easier to execute a presentation in which the HP value is reduced based on operation on the operating means.

In addition, in this 26th control example, it is possible to make the length of the effective operation period that is actually set different from the display mode (the display mode of the effective period gauge ga4 (see FIG. 801(a)) and the display effect button Sw6 (see FIG. 801(a))) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely determining the effect result based on the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 820, the contents of the process of the probability variable state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3052) that is executed when setting the variable presentation when the probability variable state is set in the variable presentation setting process 26 (F2959) will be explained. FIG. 820 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the probability variable state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3052).

In this 26th control example, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the end of a jackpot game. This high probability state is set to a higher probability that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot win than the normal state in which a low probability state for special symbols is set, and the time-saving state, so it is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than other game states in terms of the expectation of winning a jackpot when one special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, it is easier to execute a special symbol lottery than the normal state in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, so it is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in terms of the ease of executing a special symbol lottery. Therefore, in this 26th control example, the high probability state is the game state that is most advantageous to the player.

In this 26th control example, the high probability state is configured to end when a jackpot is won while the high probability state is set, or when a specific number (120) of special pattern selections are performed. Then, when the high probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, a "super chance mode presentation" that can suggest (inform) that a high probability state has been set, or a "chance mode presentation" that can suggest (inform) that a time-saving state or high probability state has been set, is executed as a mode presentation to indicate the set play state.

Specifically, if it is announced that a special probability variable state will be set after the jackpot play ends between the start of the special symbol change that results in a jackpot win and the end of the jackpot play, that is, if an effect is executed to let the player know that a special probability variable state will be set after the jackpot play ends (such as a special probability variable promotion effect or a stopped display of a third symbol (e.g., 777) that corresponds to a jackpot that will set a special probability variable state (special probability variable jackpot)), a "super chance mode effect" will be executed after the jackpot play ends.

On the other hand, during the period from when the special symbol variation that results in a jackpot begins until the jackpot game ends, no effect is executed to allow the player to understand that the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends is a high probability state, and in at least some cases where it is difficult for the player to understand whether the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends is a high probability state or a time-saving state, a "chance mode effect" is executed after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, if it is notified in advance that the special probability state will be set, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the currently set game state is a special probability state, allowing the player to play with peace of mind; and if it is not notified in advance that the special probability state will be set, a presentation that makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not a special probability state has been set (a time-saving state, or a presentation that notifies the player that a special probability state has been set) allows the player to play while hoping that a special probability state has been set, even if a time-saving state has been set.

Here, in this 26th control example, the maximum period for which the time-saving state continues is set to 100 special symbol changes, and the maximum period for which the high probability state continues is set to 120 special symbol changes. Therefore, when a "chance mode effect" that makes it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state or the high probability state is set is executed, a time-saving end indication effect is executed in the final period of the "chance mode effect" (the 100th special symbol change period) to inform the player that the "chance mode effect" is ending, and as a result of the time-saving end indication effect, an effect is executed indicating that the mode effect will transition (promotion) to the "super chance mode effect" corresponding to the high probability state.

In other words, in this 26th control example, the timing of notifying the player that a high probability state has been set is varied depending on the type of mode presentation that is set when the game state set after the end of a jackpot game is a high probability state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player at various times that a high probability state has been set after the end of a jackpot game, so that the player can continue playing while hoping that a high probability state has been set after the end of a jackpot game.

In the 26th control example, the timing of notifying the player that the high probability state is set is different depending on the type of mode presentation that is set after the end of the big win game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the high probability state is set and the "chance mode presentation" is being executed, a notification lottery is executed each time a special pattern lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a notification presentation to notify that the high probability state is set, and if the notification lottery is won, a notification presentation to notify that the high probability state is set is executed, or the notification presentation described above may be executed when it is determined that a specified operation has been performed on an operating means (such as the frame button 22) that the player can operate. Even in this case, it is possible to establish the execution conditions for executing a notification presentation to notify that the high probability state is set at various times.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the notification mode for notifying the player of the results of the special pattern lottery is different between the period when the remaining number of special pattern variations (number of lotteries) that can be executed during the high probability state is 20 or less, i.e., the period from when the high probability state is set until 100 special pattern variations (lotteries) are executed (second half of the high probability state period), and the period from when the high probability state is set until 100 special pattern variations (lotteries) are executed (first half of the high probability state period). In the first half of the high probability state period, a variation effect to show the results of the special pattern lottery is executed every time one special pattern lottery is executed, and in the second half of the high probability state period, a mode variation effect to show the results of multiple special pattern lotteries is executed across multiple special pattern variations.

In other words, it is configured to be possible to create a first situation in which the performance result of one variable performance is determined based on the lottery result of one special pattern lottery, and a second situation in which the performance result of one variable performance is determined based on the lottery results of multiple special pattern lotteries. By configuring in this way, in the first situation, the number of times the variable performance is performed and the number of times the special pattern lottery is performed can be synchronized, so that the player can easily grasp the number of times the special pattern lottery is performed. On the other hand, in the second situation, it is possible to perform more special pattern lotteries than the number of times the variable performance is performed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the special pattern lottery is performed. In addition, since the performance result of one variable performance can be notified of the result of the special pattern lottery multiple times, it is possible to reduce the number of times that the player is notified of the result of the special pattern lottery that is other than a jackpot (a miss) compared to the case where the result of the special pattern lottery is notified every time the special pattern lottery is performed.

As shown in FIG. 820, in the process 26 (F3052) for determining the special probability state presentation mode, when the final change in the chance mode, which is a mode presentation intended to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the player is in the time-saving state or the special probability state, is executed, that is, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 (F4301: Yes), the presentation mode of the time-saving end suggestion presentation in which the presentation result of the change presentation is promotion to the super chance mode is determined (F4302), and the process proceeds to F4311, which is the same as the process in the 22nd control example described above.

The process 26 (F3052) for determining the presentation mode during the special probability state differs from the process for determining the presentation mode during the special probability state in the 22nd control example described above in that different mode presentations are executed depending on the remaining period of the special probability state (the value of the special probability state counter 223vr).

In this 26th control example, when a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 120 times, or until a jackpot is won before the special symbol lottery is executed 120 times. Specifically, when a high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the value of the high probability counter 223vr is set to "120". Then, the value of the high probability counter 223vr is decremented by 1 based on the execution of a special symbol variation while the value of the high probability counter 223vr is "1" or more. This makes it possible to determine the remaining period of the high probability state (remaining number of high probability states) by reading the value of the high probability counter 223vr.

In this 26th control example, when the number of remaining chance variations falls below 20, a mode effect is executed in which the results of multiple special symbol lotteries are notified to the player using the results of a single period effect. This configuration makes it difficult to execute a variable effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing. In addition, because the single period effect is configured to be executable across a period in which multiple special symbol lotteries are executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the chance variation state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 820, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223vp is not "1" (F4301: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special-time counter 223vr is "20" (F4303), and if it is determined that it is "20" (F4303: Yes), the presentation mode of the first mode variation presentation is determined (F4304), and then the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (F4311), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of F4303, if it is determined that the value of the special chance counter 223vr is not "20" (F4303: No), it is then determined whether the value of the special chance counter 223vr is "14" (F4305), and if it is determined that it is "14" (F4305: Yes), the presentation style of the second mode variation presentation is determined (F4306), the process of F4311 described above is executed, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F4305 that the value of the special chance counter 223vr is not "14" (F4305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special chance counter 223vr is "7" (F4307), and if it is determined that it is "7" (F4307: Yes), the presentation style of the third mode variation presentation is determined (F4308), and then the processing of F4311 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In the process of F4307, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 223vr is not "7" (F4307: No), then it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 223vr is "1" (F4309), and if it is determined that it is "1" (F4309: Yes), the performance mode for indicating the end of the probability change is determined (F4310), and then the process of F4311 is executed to terminate this process. Also, in the process of F4309, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 223vr is not "1", that is, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 223vr is "1" or more and is not any of "1", "7", "14", and "20" (F4309: No), since it is not a situation to determine a new mode change performance (mode performance), various processes for determining the performance mode of various mode change performances are skipped, and the process of F4311 is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this 26th control example, by executing the processes of F4303 to F4310 in FIG. 820, a first mode presentation is executed as a period presentation using a special pattern change period indicating the results of six special pattern drawings when the number of remaining chance changes is between 20 and 15, a second mode presentation is executed as a period presentation using a special pattern change period indicating the results of seven special pattern drawings when the number of remaining chance changes is between 14 and 8, and a third mode presentation is executed as a period presentation using a special pattern change period indicating the results of seven special pattern drawings when the number of remaining chance changes is between 7 and 1.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the presentation mode (presentation result) of each mode presentation can be determined based on newly acquired information (reserved winning information) while the mode presentation is already being executed. More specifically, when the final variation in which the first mode presentation is executed (the special pattern variation in which the number of remaining chance changes is 15) is started, the information (reserved memory information) stored in the winning information storage area 223va is read, and the result of the special pattern lottery is determined in advance (pre-read) based on the stored reserved memory information. Then, if it is determined as a result of the advance determination that reserved memory information corresponding to a jackpot win has been acquired, the presentation result of the first mode presentation is rewritten to a presentation result indicating a jackpot win, and the first mode presentation is extended and executed until the special pattern variation that wins the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

In this way, by configuring the number of times that special symbol selections that are the subject of the first mode presentation (period presentation) can be varied based on information acquired after the first mode presentation (period presentation) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of times that special symbol selections can be executed during the probability bonus state.

In the 26th control example, the period during which one period performance is executed is variable based on the result of the look-ahead, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period may be determined randomly, or the player may select any period. The timing for executing the look-ahead (pre-determination) may not be the timing when the last special symbol variation in the target period of the predetermined mode performance starts, but may be the timing when the special symbol variation starts before that, or may be a predetermined period after the last special symbol variation starts (a specific timing before the performance result is notified to the player). Furthermore, when performing the pre-determination, all of the reserved memory information that has been acquired may be pre-determined, or pre-determination may be performed only for a specific range (for example, the two oldest ones stored in the winning information storage area 223va).

In addition, if it is determined as a result of the preliminary determination that pending memory information corresponding to a jackpot has been acquired, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to extend the period performance, and based on the result of the lottery, a decision may be made as to whether or not to rewrite the performance result of the period performance, or whether or not to extend the period performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 821, the details of the normal state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3053) for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed when the normal state is set will be described. FIG. 821 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3053). This normal state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3053) differs from the above-mentioned normal state presentation mode determination process 22 (see F3018 in FIG. 729) in that it adds a defeat reach presentation determination process 26 (F3152) that is executed when the determined variable presentation type is a defeat reach (see FIG. 805), and that it adds a chance up presentation determination process 26 (F3153) for determining the presentation mode of the chance up presentation to suggest to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When the normal state presentation mode determination process 26 (F3053) is executed, first, the processes F3101 to F3106 are executed, which are the same as the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 described above (see F3018 in FIG. 729). Then, in the process of F3104, if it is determined that the variable presentation type determined this time is not a movie execution reach (F3104: No), it is next determined whether the variable presentation type determined this time is a defeat reach (F3151), and if it is determined that it is a defeat reach (F3151: Yes), the defeat reach presentation determination process 26 is executed (F3152), and the process proceeds to F3153. The details of the defeat reach presentation determination process 26 (F3152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3151 that the variable presentation type determined this time is not a defeat reach (F3151: No), then the presentation mode corresponding to the determined variable presentation type is determined (F3107), and then the chance-up presentation determination process 26 is executed (F3153), a display variable pattern command indicating the presentation mode determined by each process is set (F3109), and this process is terminated.

The details of the chance-up effect determination process 26 (F3153) will be described later with reference to FIG. 823, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. However, the chance-up effect determination process 26 (F3153) executes a process for adding additional information to the same effect mode that is set when the same variable effect type is determined, allowing the player to predict the likelihood of winning a jackpot. For example, if the likelihood of winning a jackpot can be indicated by varying the color of one display element included in the effect mode, a process is performed to determine the type of color to be varied. Also, a process is performed to execute a chance-up effect that increases the likelihood of winning a jackpot by additionally displaying a new effect mode including additional information for the effect mode that is set corresponding to the variable effect type.

By configuring it in this way, even if a variable performance that appears to be almost the same is executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the likelihood of winning by changing only some of the multiple display elements that make up the variable performance, or by adding new display elements to the multiple display elements that make up the variable performance. This makes it possible to have the player pay close attention to the multiple display elements that make up the variable performance being executed to see if there are any changes, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the variable performance.

Next, the processing contents of the defeat reach presentation determination process 26 (F3152) will be described with reference to FIG. 822. FIG. 822 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the defeat reach presentation determination process 26 (F3152). In this defeat reach presentation determination process 26 (F3152), processing is executed to determine the presentation mode of the defeat reach presentation.

When the defeat reach presentation determination process 26 (F3152) is executed, first, based on the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern and the acquired value of the first presentation counter 223vf, the presentation mode (attacking character, attack content) for each round of the defeat reach presentation and the presentation result of the defeat reach presentation are determined (F4401), and based on the determined content (presentation mode), the display order of the suggested modes is determined (F4402), a display variable pattern command indicating the determined mode is set (F4403), and this process is terminated.

Here, we will explain in detail the contents determined by the various processes in the defeat reach effect determination process 26 (F3152). First, we will explain the various contents determined by the process of F4401. In this 26th control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 805(a), an effect is executed in which various types of ally characters 801a attack enemy characters 880a to 880c three times as a defeat reach effect.

The types of ally character 801a can be selected from ally character 801a modeled after a hero who is likely to inflict great damage on a single enemy character, and ally character 801b modeled after a rabbit who is likely to inflict damage on multiple enemy characters. By configuring the content of attacks that are likely to be performed to differ according to the type of ally character that performs the attack in this way, it is possible to vary the expectation for the type of ally character that performs the attack based on the content of attacks that have already been performed during the subjugation reach performance (the remaining HP value of each enemy character).

In other words, when the first and second attacks in the defeat reach effect are performed by the ally character 801b, each of the enemy characters 880a to 880c is likely to have a low remaining HP value, and in that case, when the type of the ally character performing the third (last) attack is the ally character 801b, it is easier to achieve a defeat reach effect in which all of the enemy characters 880a to 880c are defeated than when the ally character is the ally character 801a. Also, when the first and second attacks are performed by the ally character 801a, it is easier to achieve a defeat reach effect in which two of the enemy characters 880a to 880c have been defeated, so when the type of the ally character performing the third attack is the ally character 801a, it is easier to achieve a defeat reach effect in which all of the enemy characters 880a to 880c are defeated than when the ally character is the ally character 801b.

In addition, in this defeat reach performance, different attacks can be executed depending on the type of ally character executing the attack, and as described above, when ally character 801a is selected, "1" is more likely to be selected than other numbers as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (number of attacks), and "large damage" is more likely to be selected than other amounts of damage (medium damage, small damage, etc.) as the amount of damage to be inflicted on the attack target. Therefore, when ally character 801a is selected as the type of ally character to execute the attack, the player will focus on the amount of damage rather than the number of attacks. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 805(b), when ally character 801a is selected, the display order of "number of attacks" and "amount of damage" is determined as the display order of suggestive modes to sequentially show the content of the current attack.

On the other hand, when ally character 801b is selected, a multiple is more likely to be selected than a single as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (number of attacks), and "medium damage" is more likely to be selected than other amounts of damage (large damage, small damage) as the amount of damage to inflict on the attack target. Therefore, when ally character 801b is selected as the type of ally character to perform an attack, the player will focus on the number of attacks rather than the amount of damage. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 806(b), when ally character 801b is selected, the display order of "damage amount" and "number of attacks" is determined as the display order of suggestive aspects to sequentially show the content of the current attack.

As described above, in the defeat reach performance executed in this 26th control example, the type of ally character that will perform the attack can be determined as the type of ally character for which different attack content is likely to be selected, and the display order of the suggestion modes for indicating the attack content is configured to differ depending on the determined type of ally character. Specifically, each of the multiple elements that determine the attack content (number of attacks, amount of damage) can be displayed as a suggestion mode, and the display order of the multiple suggestion modes is determined so that the elements that the determined type of ally character is good at are displayed after other elements.

By configuring it this way, regardless of which type of ally character has been determined, the timing at which the suggestive aspect that the player focuses on is displayed can be delayed, allowing the player to enjoy the defeat reach presentation for a long period of time.

In the 26th control example, the display order of the suggestive aspects is determined according to the type of ally character determined, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine the display order of the suggestive aspects corresponding to elements determined to be advantageous to the player among multiple elements indicating the content of attacks (number of attacks, amount of damage) so that they are displayed after other elements, or to determine the display order of the suggestive aspects corresponding to elements determined to be advantageous to the player among multiple elements indicating the content of attacks (number of attacks, amount of damage) so that they are displayed before other elements. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the content of the suggestive aspect to be displayed next based on the content of the suggestive aspect displayed previously.

Next, the processing contents of the chance-up performance determination process 26 (F3153) will be explained with reference to FIG. 823. FIG. 823 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the chance-up performance determination process 26 (F3153). In this chance-up performance determination process 26 (F3153), a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a chance advance notice performance, and a process to determine the performance mode if it is executed.

When the chance up effect determination process 26 (F3153) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is "50" (F4501). If it is determined to be "50" (F4501: Yes), this means that the execution conditions for forcibly executing the chance notice effect have been met, so the effect mode of the chance notice effect is determined by referring to the forced pattern data table contained in the chance mode selection table 222aag (F4502), and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is cleared to "0" (F4503). After that, a display variable pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (F4510), and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of F4501 that the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is not "50" (F4501: No), then the chance notice lottery is executed by referring to the chance notice lottery table 222aaf (F4504), and it is determined whether the chance notice lottery executed in the process of F4504 has been won (F4505). If it is determined in the process of F4505 that the chance notice lottery has not been won (F4505: No), the chance notice performance is not executed in the variable performance to be executed, so the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is updated (added) by 1 (F4506), the process of F4510 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F4505 that the chance notice lottery has been won (F4505: Yes), the data table of normal patterns contained in the chance notice selection table 222aag is referenced to determine the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation (F4507), information indicating the determined presentation mode is stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag (F4508), the value of the presentation execution counter 223aah is updated to correspond to the determined presentation mode of the chance notice presentation (F4509), the processing of F4510 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, the processing contents executed by F4509 will be explained in detail. In this 26th control example, each time a variable performance is executed, a chance notice lottery is executed to determine whether or not a chance notice performance will be executed, and the chance notice performance can be executed when either a normal execution condition that is established when the chance notice lottery is won, or a forced execution condition that is established when the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is updated based on the performance mode of the variable performances executed in succession and the updated value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value ("50"), is established.

The value of the effect execution counter 223aah is normally configured to be incremented by "1" each time the effect mode of the variable effect is determined. In other words, the forced execution condition is established based on the number of times the variable effect is executed, and the chance notice effect is executed. However, if the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is simply incremented by "1" each time a variable effect is executed, and if the value of the effect execution counter 223aah at which the forced execution condition is established is set to "50", the chance notice effect will be forcibly executed every 50 times the variable effect is executed, which creates a problem in that the player can easily understand that the chance notice effect executed this time was forcibly executed.

In contrast to this, in the present 26th control example, the content for updating the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is configured to be different based on the content set as the performance mode of the variable performance. Specifically, when a performance mode with a low expectation of a jackpot (LV1, LV2) is set as the performance mode of the chance notice performance, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is configured to be incremented by "2," and when a performance mode with a high expectation of a jackpot (LV4) is set as the performance mode of the chance notice performance, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is configured to be decremented by "30."

In this way, by configuring the value of the performance execution counter 223aah to increase or decrease irregularly depending on the performance mode of the variable performance executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the variable performance is executed until the value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaches "50". Therefore, when a chance notice performance is executed, it is difficult for the player to know whether the execution trigger is based on winning the chance notice lottery, i.e., whether it is established based on the result of the special pattern lottery, or whether it is based on the value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaching a predetermined value, i.e., whether it is established based on the execution history of the variable performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect by making the player think that the chance notice performance was executed by winning the chance notice lottery, even if a performance mode with a high expectation of a jackpot is set as a forcibly executed chance notice performance.

In the 26th control example, when the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches "50", the forced execution condition is met and a chance notice effect is executed. However, without being limited to this, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah at which the forced execution condition is met may be made variable. For example, when the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is cleared to 0, the value at which the forced execution condition is next met may be determined from a number of values ("10", "30", "50"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the forced execution condition is met.

Also, when the value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 10), a lottery is held to determine whether or not the forced execution condition is established, and if the lottery is won, the forced execution condition is established. Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the forced execution condition is established.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the content for updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is configured to vary depending on the number of times the variable effect is executed and the performance mode of the executed chance notice effect, but the update content of the effect execution counter 223aah may be configured to vary based on other factors, for example, the update content of the effect execution counter 223aah may be configured to vary depending on the performance mode of the variable effect or the special pattern change period. Furthermore, the timing for establishing the next forced execution condition may be determined based on the elapsed time since the forced execution condition was established, rather than the number of times the variable effect is executed.

In this 26th control example, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is cleared to 0 when the forced execution condition is met, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system to be able to execute a subtraction process that subtracts a predetermined number from the value of the performance execution counter 223aah when the forced execution condition is met, and to be able to determine from among multiple values the value of the performance execution counter 223aah to be subtracted by the subtraction process. Even when using such a configuration, it is possible to easily vary the interval at which the forced execution condition is met.

Next, the processing contents of the effect button operation process 26 (F3379) will be described with reference to FIG. 824. FIG. 824 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the effect button operation process 26 (F3379). In this effect button operation process 26 (F3379), various processes are executed based on the player operating the effect button 22, and it differs from the effect button operation process 22 of the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see F3319 in FIG. 733) in that it adds processing contents that are executed when the effect button 22 is operated during the effective operation period set during the battle effect. All other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the effect button operation process 26 (F3379) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect button 22 has been operated (F3451). In this process of F3451, it is determined whether the effect button 22 is in a pressed state. In the process of F3451, if it is determined that the effect button 22 is not being operated (not pressed) (F3451: No), it is next determined whether the non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to on (F3452). If it is determined that it is set to on (F3452: Yes), the non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to off, the value of the non-decreasing period counter 223aab is cleared to "0" (F3453), and the non-decreasing period set flag 223aac is set to on (F3454). After that, the same process of F3405 as the effect button operation process 22 described above (see F3319 in FIG. 733) is executed, and this process is terminated.

The processing contents of F3452 to F3454 will now be described in detail. In this 26th control example, when the ally character 801a attacks the enemy character 880a during a battle performance reach, an operation performance is executed in which the player operates the performance button 22 (see FIG. 801(b)). During this operation performance, an effective operation period is set during which it is effectively determined that the player has operated the performance button 22, and when the effective operation period is set, the player operates the performance button 22 to execute a gauge reduction performance that reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a.

In the 26th control example, whether the player repeatedly taps the effect button 22 or presses and holds the effect button 22 during the effective operation period during the battle effect reach, a gauge reduction effect that reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a can be executed, and the performance mode of the gauge reduction effect is configured to be different based on the operation content of the effect button 22 executed during the effective operation period. Specifically, when a long press operation is executed on the effect button 22 during the effective operation period, a gauge reduction performance scenario in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreases is determined according to the elapsed time of the long press operation, and a lottery is executed each time the HP value decreases to determine whether or not to set a non-reducing period in which the decrease in the HP value is interrupted for a predetermined period. When a non-reducing period is set, the non-reducing period flag 223aaa is set to ON, and the non-reducing period ends when a predetermined period has elapsed, when a cancellation lottery for canceling the non-reducing period has been won, or when the long press operation has ended.

In the process of F3452, when the effect button 22 is not operated (F3451: No), it is determined whether the non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to ON, which means that it is determined whether the player has ended the long press operation (released the hand from the effect button 22) when the non-decreasing period is set. Therefore, when it is determined in the process of F3452 that the non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to ON, that is, when the player releases the hand from the effect button 22 when the non-decreasing period is set, a process (F3453) for canceling the non-decreasing period is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the player can choose whether to continue the long press operation when the non-decreasing period is set based on the long press operation of the effect button 22.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when the non-decreasing period is released, the non-decreasing period set flag 223aac is set to ON, so that the non-decreasing period is not set multiple times during one valid operation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the non-decreasing period is set multiple times during the valid operation period that is set during the battle performance reach, and the battle performance reach ends with almost no decrease in the HP value of the enemy character 880a for a player who performs a long press operation on the performance button 22.

In this 26th control example, a limit is placed on the number of non-decreasing periods that can be set within one effective operation period, thereby preventing the proportion of non-decreasing periods within one effective operation period from becoming excessively high. However, a different method may be used to achieve the same effect. For example, a measuring means may be provided that can measure the length of the period in which a non-decreasing period is set, and a configuration may be made in which it is possible to determine whether or not to set a non-decreasing period based on the length of the period measured by the measuring means (the length of a non-decreasing period that has already been set) in order to prevent a non-decreasing period longer than a predetermined period from being set within one effective operation period.

In addition, in this 26th control example, a first operation (long press operation) that may set a non-decreasing period during the effective operation period, and a second operation (repeated tap operation) that does not set a non-decreasing period are executable, and the HP value of the enemy character 880 can be decreased regardless of which operation is executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the probability of a non-decreasing period being set to be different when the first operation is executed and when the second operation is executed.

Furthermore, when the non-decreasing period can be set based on a rapid-fire operation, it is advisable to vary the probability that a non-decreasing period will be set based on, for example, the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed or the interval between presses during the valid operation period. By configuring in this way, when a rapid-fire operation is performed during the valid operation period, it is possible to create situations in which a non-decreasing period is likely to be set and situations in which it is unlikely to be set depending on the interval or number of times the effect button 22 is pressed, so that the player can also become interested in the operation content of the rapid-fire operation.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a notification means that can notify the player of situations in which a non-decreasing period is likely to be set or difficult to set. This configuration makes it easier for the player to execute the operation presentation desired (the presentation during the effective operation period of the battle reach).

Returning to FIG. 824, the explanation will continue. In the process of F3451, if it is determined that the effect button 22 has not been operated (F3421: No), it is then determined whether the movie effect switch is in an effective period (F3455). If it is determined that the effect button 22 has been operated while the movie effect switch is in an effective period (F3455: Yes), the playback mode of the movie is decided (F3403), and the movie in progress flag is set to on (see F3404 in FIG. 824).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3455 that the movie effect SW is not currently in an effective period (F3455: No), then it is determined whether the battle effect SW is currently in an effective period (F3456). If it is determined that the battle effect SW is currently in an effective period (F3456: Yes), then it is determined whether the long press flag 223aae is set to on (F3458). If it is determined that the long press flag 223aae is set to on (F3457: Yes), since the long press operation is still being performed, the process of F3405 is executed as is, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F3457 that the long press flag 223aae is not set to on (F3457: No), the button operation mode is determined based on information indicating the operation content performed on the effect button 22 (F3458), and then it is determined whether the button operation mode determined in the processing of F3458 is a long press operation (F3459). If it is determined that it is a long press operation (F3459: Yes), the long press effect setting processing 26 is executed to set the effect mode during the long press operation (F3463), the processing of F3405 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of F3459, if it is determined that the button operation mode is not a long press operation, that is, if it is determined that it is a repeated tap operation (F3459: No), a reduction lottery is executed to determine the HP value to be reduced by the current button press (F3460), the remaining HP value is calculated based on the result of the reduction lottery executed in the process of F3460, the calculated value is stored in the remaining HP memory area 223aad (F3461), the presentation mode corresponding to the lottery result of the reduction lottery is determined (F3462), the process of F3405 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, we will explain in detail the flow of decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a when a rapid-fire operation is performed during the SW effective period (operation effective period) set during the battle performance reach, along with the processing content to be executed. If it is determined that a rapid-fire operation has been performed during the SW effective period (operation effective period) set during the battle performance reach, that is, if it is determined that the period during which the performance button 22 is continuously pressed is shorter than the judgment period for which a long press operation is judged (F3459: No), a reduction lottery is executed to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a.

This reduction lottery involves a lottery being held to determine the HP value to be reduced (reduced HP value) from a value between "0" and "5", and the reduced HP value is determined based on a reduction value lottery table (not shown). The reduction value lottery table specifies different reduced HP values corresponding to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf, the remaining length of the SW valid period, and the remaining HP value.

Specifically, various reduced HP values are stipulated so that a larger value is more likely to be set as the reduced HP value when the remaining HP value is large than when the remaining HP value is small. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the remaining HP value by grasping the tendency of the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreasing based on the repeated tapping operation. As described above, in this 26th control example, the final HP value of the enemy character 880a in the battle performance reach is determined based on the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery, and a smaller value is determined as the final HP value when the corresponding special pattern lottery result is a win than when the special pattern lottery result is a miss. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, the remaining HP value (the difference between the current HP value and the final HP value) is more likely to be large.

In other words, by grasping the tendency of the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreasing based on the rapid-fire operation and having the player predict the remaining HP value, it is possible to predict whether or not the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery will be a jackpot. Therefore, by having the player proactively predict the remaining HP value, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the battle performance reach, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, the decrease value selection table specifies that when the remaining HP value is the same, a larger decrease HP value is more likely to be determined when the remaining SW valid period in the battle performance reach is shorter than when the remaining period is longer. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, when a player performs a rapid-fire operation during the SW valid period, the SW valid period passes without the enemy character 880a's HP value decreasing to its final HP value due to the rapid-fire operation.

In addition, the decrease value selection table specifies that a smaller value is more likely to be determined as the decreased HP value when the remaining SW validity period in the battle effect reach is longer than when the remaining period is shorter. This configuration prevents the remaining HP value of enemy character 880a from reaching the final HP value when there is still plenty of time left in the SW validity period (i.e., the remaining HP value reaches a state where it cannot be decreased any further at a relatively early stage, causing the effect encouraging the player to repeatedly press the button to be executed for a long time), which can significantly reduce the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22.

In this 26th control example, the HP decrease value determined when a rapid-fire operation is performed in a battle performance reach is determined by referring to a decrease value lottery table, but a control process other than this may be executed to determine the HP decrease value. For example, at least one predetermined index HP value (e.g., 50) between the enemy character 880a's HP value (e.g., 100) and the final HP value (e.g., 0) may be determined, and a restriction period may be set in which the remaining HP value is restricted (restricted) so as not to become smaller than the index HP value.

More specifically, when the SW valid period is set to 3 seconds, the first 2 seconds may be set as the restriction period, so that even if the player performs the rapid-fire operation vigorously after the SW valid period is set, the remaining HP value will not become smaller than the index HP value until 2 seconds have passed since the SW valid period is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the remaining HP value from reaching the final HP value with a sufficient remaining period of the SW valid period. In addition, if the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value before the restriction period has passed, the remaining HP value will not decrease until the restriction period has passed, and after the restriction period has passed, a performance is executed in which the remaining HP value is decreased from the index HP value to the final HP value. Therefore, even if the player continues to experience a period in which the remaining HP value does not decrease based on the rapid-fire operation for a predetermined period, a situation can be created in which the remaining HP value can decrease again after that. This makes it easier for the player to continue to perform rapid-fire operations.

In this case, for example, if the player stops the rapid-tap operation in a state where the remaining HP value does not decrease until the restriction period has elapsed after the index HP value has been reached, it is preferable to configure the device to execute an effect encouraging the player to perform rapid-tap operations after the restriction period has elapsed or immediately before the restriction period has elapsed. In other words, it is preferable to configure the device to be able to notify the player that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has transitioned from a state where it is no longer decreasing (where it is more difficult for the remaining HP value to decrease based on rapid-tap operations compared to the situation before the remaining HP value reached the index HP value) to a state where it is relatively easy to decrease the remaining HP value based on rapid-tap operations.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute an effect that reduces the remaining HP value toward the final HP value after the restricted period has elapsed, not only for players who continue to perform the rapid-fire operation even after the remaining HP value has reached the index HP value before the restricted period has elapsed, but also for players who discontinued the rapid-fire operation because the remaining HP value had reached the index HP value before the restricted period had elapsed.

In the above example, a value of 1 is determined as the index HP value, but this is not limiting and a value of 2 or more may be determined as the index HP value. Furthermore, if a value of 2 or more can be determined as the index HP value, it is preferable to set a different restriction period for each determined index HP value. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make it easier for a player who is eager to perform rapid tapping operations during the SW valid period to reach the final HP value by gradually decreasing the remaining HP value using the remaining range of the SW valid period.

Even if the index HP value is determined and the restriction period can be set according to the determined index HP value, if the operation speed of the player's rapid-fire operation is an operation speed (relatively slow operation speed) that does not (is difficult to) reach the index HP value during the restriction period during the SW valid period, the HP value of the enemy character 880a will be continuously reduced throughout the entire SW valid period until the remaining HP value becomes the final HP value without reaching the index HP value during the restriction period. Therefore, depending on the operation speed of the player's rapid-fire operation, whether the operation speed is an operation speed that can reach the index HP value within the restriction period (for example, a relatively fast operation speed with an operation interval of 0.5 seconds or less) or an operation speed that cannot (is difficult to reach), the transition of the HP value when the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreases can be made different, so that a gameplay that allows the player to select the preferred transition mode of the HP value depending on the operation speed can be realized. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that it can notify the player of bonus information that is advantageous to the player, such as the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery and the currently set game state, based on the determined index HP value and the length of the set restriction period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to perform a continuous tapping operation so that the remaining HP value decreases to the index HP value as soon as possible. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that it can determine the same value as the final HP value that can be determined when the corresponding special pattern lottery result is a miss, as the value of the index HP value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the current HP value is the index HP value or the final HP value when a state occurs in which the remaining HP value does not decrease (is difficult to decrease) despite the continuous tapping operation.

It may also be configured so that a longer restriction period is more likely to be set when the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is a miss win. By configuring it in this way, the longer the period from when the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value until the restriction period has elapsed, the higher the possibility that the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery is a jackpot win. Therefore, even for a player whose remaining HP value has reached the final HP value and cannot be reduced any further, it is possible to make the player believe that a long restriction period has been set, thereby preventing the player from grasping the results of the battle performance reach too early.

On the other hand, it may be configured so that a shorter restricted period is more likely to be set when the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is a miss win. By configuring it in this way, the proportion of the restricted period in the entire SW valid period of the battle performance reach can be reduced, making it easier to reduce the remaining HP value by repeated tapping operations.

In addition, in the 26th control example, when a rapid-fire operation is performed during a battle effect reach, a reduction lottery is executed at each pressing timing to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a. However, without being limited to this, a pressing count measuring means may be provided that counts the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed by the rapid-fire operation, and a reduction lottery may be executed when it is determined that the number of presses measured by the pressing count measuring means has reached a specific number (for example, a number corresponding to a multiple of 5). By configuring in this way, a first pressing operation that can reduce the remaining HP value and a second pressing operation that has difficulty reducing the remaining HP value can be provided in the rapid-fire operation, so that a player who presses the effect button 22 more times during the rapid-fire operation can more easily make the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a reach the final HP value.

Furthermore, the process of the decrease in the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a when a rapid-fire operation is performed during a battle performance reach may be determined based on a predetermined press scenario. In this case, at the timing when it is determined to execute a battle performance reach, one type of press scenario may be determined from multiple types of press scenarios, and the decreased HP value may be determined by referring to the number of presses measured by the press count measuring means according to the content specified in the determined press scenario. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the remaining HP value to reach the final HP value using the entire SW effective period. In addition, it is preferable to configure the system so that one press scenario can be determined from a plurality of press scenarios that at least include, for example, a first press scenario in which a greater HP reduction value is specified for a period in which the effect button 22 is pressed less (early in the SW effective period) than for a period in which the effect button 22 is pressed more (late in the SW effective period), and a second press scenario in which a greater HP reduction value is specified for a period in which the effect button 22 is pressed more (late in the SW effective period) than for a period in which the effect button 22 is pressed less (early in the SW effective period).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute a battle performance reach in which the process of the enemy character 880a's remaining HP value decreasing is clearly different depending on the type of pressed scenario that is determined, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the battle performance reach too early.

In the above example, as press scenarios for determining the process of decrease in the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a when the effect button 22 is pressed repeatedly during a battle effect reach, press scenarios (first press scenario, second press scenario) are provided in which the decrease HP value is defined in correspondence with the number of presses (number of consecutive presses) of the effect button 22. However, in addition to this, or instead of this, a press scenario (third press scenario) may be provided in which the decrease HP value is defined in correspondence with the remaining SW effective period of the battle effect reach.

The third pressing scenario may be configured to specify a reduced HP value in 0.05 second increments for the remaining period of the SW validity period, and determine a reduced HP value that corresponds to the remaining period of the SW validity period at the time when it is determined (pressed) that the effect button 22 has been pressed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to reduce the reduced HP value by a larger amount when it is determined that the effect button 22 has been pressed during each period for which a reduced HP value is specified, so that a player who is more eager to perform rapid pressing operations (a player who presses the effect button 22 at short intervals) can more easily reduce the remaining HP value.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to define the third press scenario so that the unit of remaining time for which each reduced HP value is defined can be shorter than the interval at which the effect button 22 can be determined to be pressed. In other words, it is preferable to configure it so that not all reduced HP values defined in the third press scenario are determined even if the effect button 22 is repeatedly pressed at the fastest speed during the SW valid period. By configuring it in this way, even if a player actively repeatedly presses the effect button 22 during a battle effect reach, different reduced HP values are determined depending on the timing of pressing the effect button 22 by the repeated pressing operation, so that the presentation mode of the battle effect reach (the process of decreasing the remaining HP value) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation mode of the battle effect reach from becoming monotonous, which reduces the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22.

Next, in the processing of F3462 in FIG. 824, in addition to the presentation mode that varies (reduces) the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 shown in FIG. 801(b), a damage presentation mode that varies the display mode of the enemy character 880a according to the remaining HP value, a large damage notification presentation mode for notifying the player that the reduced HP value determined in one reduction lottery is a value larger than normal (for example, "5"), and a jackpot notification presentation mode for indicating that the remaining HP value has become a specific value (for example, a repeat number such as "33" or "77") and that the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery is a jackpot win, etc. are set.

Specifically, the damage presentation mode can be set to a first damage presentation mode for indicating that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has fallen to 1/2 or less of the maximum value, and a second damage presentation mode for indicating that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has fallen to 1/4 or less of the maximum value. When the first damage presentation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 801(b), a "broken horn" display mode is displayed as the display mode of the enemy character 880a. Although not shown, when the second damage presentation mode is set, a "whole body injured" display mode is displayed as the display mode of the enemy character 880a.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict the remaining HP value not only from the degree of variability of the HP gauge 890, but also from the display mode of the enemy character 880a. In this case, it is preferable to configure the timing at which the display mode of the HP gauge 890 changes and the timing at which the display mode of the enemy character 880a changes due to one attack in the battle performance reach to be different, and in this case, it is preferable to configure it so that the display mode of the enemy character 880a changes before the display mode of the HP gauge 890 changes.

In other words, it is preferable to configure the game so that the player can quickly understand that the enemy character 880a's remaining HP value has reached a specific value by understanding the variable content of the display mode other than the display mode of the HP gauge 890, which is intended to clearly show the enemy character 880a's remaining HP value to the player. By configuring it in this way, a player who can understand the relationship between the display mode of the enemy character 880a and the remaining HP value and can understand the remaining HP value based on the change in the display mode of the enemy character 880a can quickly understand the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a after it has been attacked, rather than a player who can understand the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a by checking the display mode of the HP gauge 890, so that the player can focus on the performance content of the battle performance reach in order to understand the relationship between the display mode of the enemy character 880a and the remaining HP value.

In addition, as a large damage notification presentation mode, when "5" is determined as the HP reduction value by which the remaining HP value is reduced by the reduction lottery, the word "critical hit" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to indicate that a large value has been determined as the HP reduction value. By displaying the large damage notification presentation mode in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the current attack has caused more damage to the enemy character 880a than usual. Therefore, even for players playing the pachinko machine 10 for the first time, i.e., players who have only experienced a few battle presentation reaches and who have relatively little difficulty in determining the HP value of the enemy character 880a that is reduced by one attack, it is possible to clearly notify them that the current attack is special.

Next, the jackpot notification presentation mode will be explained. In this 26th control example, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is configured to be more likely to become a specific value (for example, a repeat number such as "33" or "77") when the corresponding special pattern lottery result is a jackpot win than when it is a miss. Then, when the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes a specific value, at least in some cases when the corresponding special pattern lottery result is a jackpot win, a jackpot notification presentation mode for notifying the player that a jackpot win has been won at that time is configured to be displayable on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Specifically, when the execution conditions for executing the big win notification performance mode are met, the display mode of the ally character 801a (see FIG. 801(a)) is displayed in a special mode different from the normal mode (for example, a display mode with a rainbow-colored effect), and an attack performance is executed in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0" by the ally character 801a in the special mode. In other words, when the execution conditions for the big win notification performance mode are met, it is possible to notify the fact that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a will become "0" before the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0".

By configuring it in this way, in the battle performance reach, in addition to the game of aiming for the enemy character 880a's remaining HP value to reach "0", the player can also play a game of aiming for a specific value (for example, a repeat number such as "33" or "77"), thereby enhancing the performance effect. Also, since it becomes possible to know that a jackpot has been won before the enemy character 880a's remaining HP value reaches "0", it is possible to provide the player with a more unexpected performance.

The attack of the ally character 801a that is executed from when the execution conditions for the big win notification presentation mode are met until the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced to "0" may be configured to continue to be an attack based on a reduction lottery, as in the case where the execution conditions for the big win notification presentation mode are not met. In this case, the player can continue to perform the rapid-fire operation while knowing that the final HP value of the enemy character 880a is "0", so the player can operate the presentation button 22 with confidence.

Also, when the conditions for executing the big win notification effect mode are met, the SW valid period may be canceled and a special attack may be executed regardless of the operation of the effect button 22. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a series of effects as special effects from when the conditions for executing the big win notification effect mode are met until the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced to "0", so that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

As explained above, in this 26th control example, a process is executed to determine whether a rapid-fire operation (pressing operation) or a long press operation has been performed based on the operation content of the effect button 22 during the effective operation period during the battle effect, and different processes are executed to vary the presentation mode of the battle effect based on the determination result. Here, if it is determined that a rapid-fire operation has been performed, a reduction lottery is executed each time a press is determined to be performed to determine the amount by which the HP value is reduced.

Then, the reduction value corresponding to the result of the reduction lottery is subtracted from the remaining HP value, and the subtraction result is stored in the remaining HP memory area 223aad as the remaining HP value, and a display command is set to show a presentation mode including at least a presentation mode for subtracting the HP value of the enemy character 880a and a presentation mode for varying the display mode of the HP gauge 890.

Next, referring to FIG. 825, the processing contents of the long press effect setting processing 26 (F3463) executed in the effect button operation processing 26 (see F3379 in FIG. 824) will be explained. FIG. 825 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the long press effect setting processing 26 (F3463). In this long press effect setting processing 26 (F3463), processing is executed for determining an effect scenario for reducing the HP value based on a long press operation, and various processing for measuring the long press operation period.

In this 26th control example, the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced using different controls depending on the operation method of the effect button 22 during the SW effective period of the battle effect reach. In addition, the operation method of the effect button 22 is configured to be effectively distinguishable between a rapid tap operation and a long press operation.

Specifically, when a rapid-fire operation is performed, as described above, the HP reduction value is determined based on the lottery result of the reduction lottery that is executed when the effect button 22 is pressed as a rapid-fire operation, and an effect is executed to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a according to the determined HP reduction value. On the other hand, when a long press operation is performed, if it is determined that the long press operation is performed during the SW effective period of the battle effect reach, a scenario (effect scenario) that specifies the process of reduction of the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a at the time of the long press operation is determined, and an effect is executed to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a by referring to the contents specified in the determined effect scenario while the long press operation is continuing.

In other words, by having the player select which operation method to use to operate the effect button 22 during the SW valid period of the battle effect reach, it is possible to execute a battle effect reach with a different effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute a battle effect reach with a different effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the presentation.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the presentation scenario that determines the presentation mode executed when a long press operation is performed as the presentation mode of the battle presentation reach is configured to be determined not at the timing when the battle presentation reach is executed, but at the timing when the long press operation is executed. In other words, if a rapid-fire operation is performed during a battle presentation reach, the battle presentation reach progresses without determining the presentation scenario at the time of the long press operation.

By configuring it in this way, there is no need to execute a process to pre-determine performance data (performance scenario during a long press operation) that will not be used in the actual performance, which reduces the processing load required to execute a battle performance reach.

When the long press performance setting process 26 (F3463) is executed, first, the long press performance scenario table 222aaa is referenced to determine the performance scenario for the long press (F4601), and the determined performance scenario is stored in the long press scenario storage area 223aai (F4602).

Then, the long press flag 223aae is set to on (F4603), the long press counter 223aaf is set to the value "1" (F4604), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the effect button operation process 26 (see F3379 in FIG. 824), if it is determined that a long press operation is being performed during the effective operation period (effective period of the SW for battle effect) that is set during the battle effect reach (F3459: Yes), the long press effect setting process 26 (F3463) is executed to determine the effect scenario for the long press operation (a scenario that reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a). Therefore, if the player performs a rapid-fire operation during the effective operation period during the battle effect reach, the effect scenario for the long press operation (a scenario that reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a) will not be set.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is capable of distinguishing between rapid-fire operations and long-press operations during one effective operation period and is configured to be able to execute different types of effects depending on the distinguished operation content, the performance data to be referenced when the player performs a rapid-fire operation and the performance data to be referenced when the player performs a long-press operation are determined at the timing when the effective operation period is set, regardless of the operation content actually executed by the player, and this reduces the processing load by eliminating the need to determine performance data that may be unnecessary (performance data for long-press operations).

In the 26th control example, the production scenario to be referenced when a long press operation is performed is determined not when the valid operation period is set, but when a long press operation is actually performed during the valid operation period, thereby eliminating the need to determine unnecessary production scenarios. However, without being limited to this, for example, a process for determining the production scenario to be referenced during a long press operation may be executed when the valid operation period is set, and a production scenario to be referenced when a rapid-fire operation is actually performed during the valid operation period may be determined. Also, a configuration may be made in which no production scenario is determined when the valid operation period is set, and when each operation is actually performed, a production scenario to be used for each operation performed is determined.

In addition, in this 26th control example, a process is performed to determine the performance scenario to be referenced when a long press operation is performed, and the same performance scenario is referenced even if the long press operation is interrupted midway until the operation valid period has elapsed. Furthermore, when the long press operation is interrupted, the update of the counter value for updating the performance scenario is also interrupted, and when the long press operation is performed again, the interrupted update of the counter value is resumed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the user mistakenly operates the operation means (effect button 22) and releases his/her hand, it is possible to continue the operation effect by performing a long press operation again.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, if a long press operation is performed during the SW effective period of the battle performance reach, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is being reduced by referring to the determined performance scenario, and the long press operation is interrupted and switched to a rapid-fire operation, the reduced HP value can be determined by a reduction lottery based on the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a reduced during the long press operation. Also, if a rapid-fire operation is performed during the SW effective period of the battle performance reach, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced, and then a long press operation is performed, the reduced HP value can be determined based on the content of the performance scenario determined when the long press operation was performed and the remaining HP value.

In other words, even if the player switches the operation method of the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, it is possible to continuously decrease the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a. By configuring it in this way, the player is not only allowed to select the operation method of the effect button 22 to be executed during the SW valid period, but also allowed to perform an operation to switch the operation method of the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, which makes it possible to greatly differ the presentation mode during the battle presentation reach, and therefore makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the effect button 22.

As described above, in the 26th control example, even if the operation method of the selection button 22 is changed during the SW valid period, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is configured to be continuously decreased. However, without being limited to this, when the operation method of the selection button 22 is changed during the SW valid period, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a may be restored to the MAX value, and the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a may be executed from the beginning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player operate the effect button 22 with the same operation method to make the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a "0". In addition, it is possible to make a player who is dissatisfied with the performance mode of the battle performance reach being executed redo the battle performance reach with a different performance mode. In this case, the remaining period of the SW valid period may be configured to be returned to the initial value, or may be configured to be a predetermined period longer than the remaining period at the time when the operation method is switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player enjoy the battle performance reach based on the operation method after switching more easily.

As shown in FIG. 827, in this 26th control example, one of multiple presentation scenarios can be determined as the presentation scenario to be referenced during a long press operation, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced by referring to the presentation scenario determined based on the value of the long press counter 223aaf, which is updated periodically. However, this is not limited to this, and the frequency with which the value of the long press counter 223aaf is updated may be varied.

Specifically, the frequency for updating the value of the long press counter 223aaf may be determined from a plurality of frequencies including a first frequency, which is normal, a second frequency, which updates the value faster than normal, and a third frequency, which updates the value slower than normal, and the value of the long press counter 223aaf may be updated based on the determined frequency. In this case, after the processing of F4604 in FIG. 825 is completed, a process for determining the update frequency of the long press counter 223aaf is executed, and the determined update frequency is temporarily stored in a storage means. It is preferable to configure the value added in the long press processing (see F3551 in FIG. 827) described later to be different based on the update frequency stored in the storage means. For example, if the first frequency is stored as the update frequency, the value of the long press counter 223aaf can be set to "2", if the second frequency is stored as the update frequency, the value of the long press counter 223aaf can be set to "3", and if the third frequency is stored as the update frequency, the value of the long press counter 223aaf can be set to "1".

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to update the value of the long press counter 223aaf at different frequencies simply by changing the value to be updated (added) in the process of updating (adding) the value of the long press counter 223aaf, which is executed periodically, so that even if the same presentation scenario is determined, the presentation mode of the battle presentation reach can be made different. Also, instead of executing the process of determining the presentation scenario and the process of determining the update frequency of the long press counter 223aaf separately, it is also possible to specify the update frequency of the long press counter 223aaf for each presentation scenario, and to determine the update frequency according to the determined presentation scenario.

Next, the processing contents of the performance update process 26 (F2171) will be explained with reference to FIG. 826. FIG. 826 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance update process 26 (F2171). This performance update process 26 (F2171) differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that processing related to a long press has been added.

Here, the processing contents of the during long press processing 26 (F3551) executed in the effect update processing 26 (F2171) will be explained with reference to FIG. 827. FIG. 827 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the during long press processing 26 (F3551). This during long press processing 26 (F3551) executes processing to update the period during which the long press operation is continuously executed, processing to determine whether or not to set a non-decreasing period during the long press operation, and processing to determine the presentation mode of the additional decrease presentation that is executed when the non-decreasing period ends.

As explained above, in this 26th control example, during a portion of the effective operation period during which the gauge reduction effect (battle effect) is being executed, it is possible to set a non-reduction period during which the vitality value is not reduced, regardless of the performance result. By configuring it in this way, even if the reduction in vitality value is stopped midway during the gauge reduction effect (battle effect), it is possible to leave open the possibility of a performance result that is advantageous to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the gauge reduction effect until the very end.

Specifically, each time the vitality value is reduced based on an operation on the operating means, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-reducing period, and the non-reducing period is set if the lottery is won. If a non-reducing period is set, an effect is executed in which the vitality value is not reduced until a predetermined time has elapsed or until a cancellation lottery to cancel the non-reducing period is won. In this way, by configuring the game to add processing for varying the degree of reduction in vitality value even while the gauge reduction effect is being executed, even when the player performs the same operation on the operating means, the reduction pattern of vitality value in the gauge reduction effect can be increased more easily than when it is set based only on a predetermined presentation pattern when the gauge reduction effect is executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the probability of winning the release lottery is configured to differ based on the remaining vitality value at the time the non-decreasing period is set and the performance result of the gauge reduction effect being executed, so that the larger the remaining vitality value, the higher the probability of winning the release lottery. By configuring it in this way, if a non-decreasing period is set at the beginning of a gauge reduction effect, it is easier to win the release lottery than if a non-decreasing period is set at the end of a gauge reduction effect, so it is possible to prevent frequent occurrences where the non-decreasing period that was immediately set continues for a long time despite the gauge reduction effect being executed, making it impossible to reduce the vitality value to a value that can be reduced in the current gauge reduction effect.

Furthermore, the present invention is configured so that the probability of winning the release lottery is higher when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed is favorable than when the performance result is unfavorable. Here, in the present 26th control example, the present invention is configured so that the performance in which the stamina value is greatly reduced (the remaining stamina value is set to 0) in the gauge reduction performance is more likely to be executed when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance is favorable to the player than when the performance result is unfavorable to the player. In other words, the present invention is configured so that the greater the stamina value that can be reduced in the current gauge reduction performance, the higher the probability of winning the release lottery. By configuring in this way, when a non-reducing period is set in a gauge reduction performance in which the performance result of the gauge reduction performance is favorable, it is possible to make it easier to win the release lottery than when a non-reducing period is set in a gauge reduction performance in which the performance result of the gauge reduction performance is unfavorable, and therefore it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of a situation in which the non-reducing period continues for a long time even though a gauge reduction performance that can greatly reduce the stamina value is executed, and the stamina value cannot be reduced to the value that can be reduced in the current gauge reduction performance.

In addition, in this 26th control example, an upper limit is set for the duration of the non-decreasing period, and if the non-decreasing period reaches the upper limit without winning the cancellation lottery, the non-decreasing period is forcibly cancelled. By configuring it in this way, even if a cancellation lottery is used to randomize the timing at which the non-decreasing period is cancelled, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the non-decreasing period continues until the gauge reduction presentation ends without winning the cancellation lottery, resulting in a significant decrease in the presentation effect of the gauge reduction presentation.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, when a non-decreasing period is released and a reduction period during which the vitality value can be reduced is set, an additional reduction effect can be executed to reduce the vitality value according to the length of the non-decreasing period that was set. Specifically, when a non-decreasing period is set with a performance result of the current gauge reduction performance that is advantageous to the player, or when a non-decreasing period is set at the beginning of the gauge reduction performance, in other words, when the probability of winning the release lottery is set high and the non-decreasing period continues for a long period of time, the additional reduction effect executed when the non-decreasing period is released is configured to be able to significantly reduce the vitality value.

By configuring it in this way, even if the non-decreasing period continues for a long time, it is possible to significantly decrease the vitality value through the additional decrease effect, so that even for players who have been in a long period of non-decreasing period, it is possible to allow them to play while hoping that the result of the gauge decrease effect being executed will be an effect that is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to prevent frequent occurrences of the vitality value not being able to be decreased to a value that can be decreased with the current gauge decrease effect.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the presentation pattern for reducing the vitality value is configured to differ depending on the way the player operates the operating means during the gauge reduction presentation. Specifically, the presentation for reducing the vitality value can be performed when the player continuously presses the operating means during the effective operation period in the gauge reduction presentation (when a so-called long press operation is performed) and when the player continuously presses the operating means (when a so-called rapid-fire operation is performed). When a long press operation is performed, a presentation pattern in which the above-mentioned non-reduction period can be set is determined, and when a rapid-fire operation is performed, a presentation pattern in which the above-mentioned non-reduction period is not set (the entry lottery is not executed) is determined.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the process of the decrease in stamina value in a gauge decrease effect to show the same effect result depending on the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for players who wish to execute gauge decrease effects in various effect patterns to operate the operation means using different operation methods, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game and improving their interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the result of the gauge reduction effect can be suggested depending on the length of the non-decreasing period during which the vitality value is not reduced. Specifically, during the non-decreasing period, an effect in which the ally character accumulates power (a charge effect) is executed, and the longer the non-decreasing period, the more likely it is that the power accumulated in the charge effect will increase. And the more power accumulated during the charge effect, the more likely it is that an effect in which the vitality value is reduced significantly after the non-decreasing period has elapsed.

By configuring it in this way, even if a non-decreasing period is set during the gauge decrement presentation period, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the gauge decrement presentation being performed.

In addition, in this 26th control example, in a gauge reduction effect where the performance result is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to end the gauge reduction effect without ending the charge effect. In other words, it is possible to set a performance pattern where, despite having accumulated power in the charge effect, the performance result of the gauge reduction effect is displayed without using that power to attack an enemy character. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the charge effect even when the performance result of the gauge reduction effect is disadvantageous to the player, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the non-decreasing period can be forcibly released by ceasing the long press operation on the operating means. In other words, during the gauge reduction presentation that prompts the player to operate (press) the operating means, the player can be provided with the option of ceasing operation on the operating means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the options for operating the operating means.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when a long press operation is performed to reduce the gauge, a performance scenario that reduces the vitality value according to the duration of the long press operation is configured to progress, and the longer the duration, the more likely it is that a performance scenario in which the vitality value decreases will be set. If the long press operation is stopped midway, the update of the press duration is interrupted, and if the long press operation is performed again, the interrupted press duration can be carried over and updated. Therefore, even if the long press operation is interrupted midway, it is possible to make it easy to continue operating the operating means.

As described above, the non-decreasing period can be forcibly released by ceasing a long press on the operating means, and if a long press is stopped midway, the update of the press duration is suspended, and if a long press is performed again, the interrupted press duration can be carried over and updated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a situation in which a player performing a long press during a gauge reduction presentation can greatly reduce the stamina value by interrupting the long press and then performing the long press again, compared to continuing the long press.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, during the execution period of the gauge reduction effect, a valid period (valid operation period) during which the operation of the player on the operating means is determined to be valid is displayed. The length of the displayed valid operation period is then varied. Specifically, it is configured so that a display indicating a longer valid operation period is more likely to be executed when the performance result of the gauge reduction effect is advantageous to the player than when the performance result is disadvantageous to the player.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the outcome of the current presentation before the enemy character's vitality value is reduced in the gauge reduction presentation (the point at which the display mode indicating the effective operation period is displayed). Also, in a presentation in which the enemy character's vitality value is reduced based on an operation on the operating means (a long press operation), the player is prompted to predict the presentation result by taking into consideration not only the degree of reduction in vitality value (the relationship between the elapsed time and the reduced value) but also the length of the remaining time in which the vitality value can be reduced (the remaining effective operation period). This increases the number of elements that allow the player to predict the presentation result, making it more difficult for the player to predict the presentation result, and thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation (gauge reduction presentation) that is executed.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the same presentation scenario (the reduction in vitality value according to the operation time of the operating means) can be set whether the performance result of the gauge reduction performance is advantageous to the player or disadvantageous to the player, and the vitality value that can ultimately be displayed is configured to differ depending on the length of the effective operation time that is set.

By configuring it in this way, different presentation results can be created using the same presentation scenario, so the amount of presentation data (presentation scenarios) related to the gauge reduction presentation can be reduced compared to when only a presentation scenario dedicated to a presentation result that is advantageous to the player and a presentation scenario dedicated to a presentation result that is disadvantageous to the player are used as the presentation data (presentation scenarios) used when executing the gauge reduction presentation.

In addition, there has been a pachinko machine 10 that has traditionally implemented a variable presentation to show the results of a special pattern lottery in a variety of presentation formats, thereby preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early, even if the results of the special pattern lottery continue for a long period of time with results other than a jackpot win (a miss). In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, various presentation modes with different jackpot winning expectations, which indicate the ratio between the rate selected when the special pattern lottery result is a miss and the rate selected when the special pattern lottery result is a jackpot, can be determined, and the presentation mode can be determined based on the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable presentation and the presentation lottery result for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation. Therefore, even if multiple consecutive games have a special pattern lottery result other than a jackpot (a miss), various variable presentations with different jackpot winning expectations can be executed, allowing the player to play while having an appropriate sense of expectation for a jackpot.

However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, the presentation mode of the variable presentation to indicate that the special symbol selection result is a miss is determined by a lottery (presentation lottery), which can lead to the problem that, in some cases, only variable presentations with a low probability of winning a jackpot are executed for a long period of time, making the player easily bored with the game. In addition, there is a problem that a presentation mode with a selection ratio that increases the probability of winning a jackpot is selected multiple times in a short period of time, causing the player to feel distrustful.

In contrast to this, in the present 26th control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation can be determined based on information (presentation history information) on the presentation mode of previously executed variable presentations, and information on the number of times (number of consecutive misses) that variable presentations (miss variable presentations) have been executed consecutively to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss.

Specifically, a specific counter value (value of the execution presentation counter) is added based on the increase in the number of consecutive misses, and when the value of the execution presentation counter reaches a specific value (e.g., 100), a special presentation mode selection table different from the data table referenced during normal times (normal presentation mode selection table) is referenced as the data table to be referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, making it easier than normal to determine the presentation mode with a high probability of winning.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to periodically execute variable presentations with a high probability of winning a jackpot, making it less likely that only variable presentations with a low probability of winning a jackpot will be executed, causing players to become bored with the game.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the process of decrementing the value of the execution presentation counter described above is configured to be executable, and for example, when a presentation mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is determined as the presentation mode of the miss variable presentation, the value of the execution presentation counter is decremented according to the determined presentation mode. Specifically, when a presentation mode with a relatively high expectation of winning a jackpot is determined as the presentation mode of the miss variable presentation, the value of the execution presentation counter is decremented by 30.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a miss variation effect in which the performance mode is determined by referring to the special performance mode selection table from being executed immediately after a miss variation effect is executed in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to prevent miss variation effects from being executed consecutively in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, which can cause distrust among players.

In addition, in this 26th control example, when the presentation mode is determined by referring to the special presentation mode selection table, the type of presentation mode determined based on information about the presentation mode of the miss variable presentation executed in the past is configured to be different. Specifically, the presentation mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot determined by referring to the normal presentation mode selection table referred to during normal times is configured to be difficult to determine by referring to the special presentation mode selection table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the same presentation mode for a miss variable presentation, so that even if the presentation mode can be determined by referring to the special presentation mode selection table in which various presentation modes are defined with different contents from the normal presentation mode selection table in which the expectation of winning a normal jackpot is defined, it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the expectation of winning a jackpot for a specific presentation mode.

Conventionally, there have been some notification effects that allow the player to predict the content of a later performance by sequentially notifying the player of multiple pieces of information (performance elements) to be used in a performance before the performance is executed. Specifically, when executing a battle performance in which an enemy character is attacked, there is a method of notifying the player of information indicating the type of ally character to be used in the battle performance, then executing a notification effect that notifies the player of information indicating the type of weapon the ally character will use in the battle performance, and executing a battle performance using the performance element notified in the notification effect. By configuring in this way, the content of the later battle performance can be gradually notified to the player, so that compared to a case in which a battle performance is executed without any warning, a period during which the player can predict the content of the later battle performance (notification performance period) is provided, and the period during which the player is interested in the performance to be executed can be lengthened, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, the order in which the presentation elements are notified by the notification effects is fixed. For example, if the content of the presentation element notified first is a presentation element that is more likely to be selected when it results in a presentation that is unfavorable to the player than when it results in a presentation that is favorable to the player, then at that point anticipation for the battle presentation that will be executed later is significantly reduced, and the player's motivation to play decreases early on.

In response to this, the 26th control example is configured to make it possible to change the order in which multiple pieces of information are notified to the player in the notification effect in the defeat reach effect. Specifically, of the multiple pieces of information that can be notified in the notification effect, information that makes it easier for the player to predict the performance result of the attack effect that will be executed later is configured to be notified later than information that makes it harder for the player to predict the performance result of the attack effect.

Specifically, at least a first ally character and a second ally character can be determined as types of ally characters used in attack effects, the first ally character is configured to be information that makes it easier to predict the performance result of the battle effect using the second performance element than the first performance element, and the second ally character is configured to be information that makes it easier to predict the performance result of the battle effect using the first performance element than the second performance element, and when the first ally character is determined, information about the first performance element is announced and then information about the second performance element is announced, and when the second ally character is determined, information about the second performance element is announced and then information about the first performance element is announced.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which anticipation for the battle performance that will be executed later decreases significantly during the middle of the notification performance, causing an early decline in motivation to play.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to notify the results of multiple special symbol lotteries executed during a specific period (e.g., a period during which 10 special symbol lotteries are executed) using one mode presentation, in which a first mode presentation is executed during a first specific period (e.g., the first to fifth special symbol lotteries) and a second mode presentation is executed during a second specific period (e.g., the sixth to tenth special symbol lotteries). In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, since the results of multiple special symbol lotteries can be notified by one mode presentation, if the multiple special symbol lotteries that are the subject of one mode presentation include a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (e.g., winning a jackpot), it is possible to display the presentation result that is advantageous to the player as the presentation result of the mode presentation. Therefore, compared to executing an effect to show the lottery result for each special pattern lottery that is executed, the number of times that an effect (loss effect) is executed to show a lottery result that is unfavorable to the player (e.g., a losing win) due to the result of the special pattern lottery can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the execution of too many effects (loss effects) that show a lottery result that is unfavorable to the player.

However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, the number of times special symbols are drawn, which suggests the result of the drawing, is fixed in each mode presentation, so the probability that the result of each mode presentation will be advantageous to the player is always fixed. Therefore, among the mode presentations, a mode presentation with a large number of special symbol draws that affect the presentation result is more likely to display a presentation result that is advantageous to the player than a mode presentation with a small number of special symbol draws that affect the presentation result, and there was a problem that a biased presentation was provided to players who expect a presentation result that is advantageous to the player in various mode presentations, reducing the presentation effect.

In contrast, in the 26th control example, when the number of remaining chance variations falls below 20, a mode effect is executed in which the results of multiple special symbol lotteries are notified to the player using the results of a single period effect. This configuration makes it difficult to execute a variable effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, which makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing. In addition, because the single period effect is configured to be executable across a period in which multiple special symbol lotteries are executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the chance variation state.

Specifically, in this 26th control example, by executing the processes of F4303 to F4310 in FIG. 820, a first mode presentation is executed as a period presentation using a special pattern change period indicating the results of six special pattern drawings when the number of remaining chance changes is between 20 and 15, a second mode presentation is executed as a period presentation using a special pattern change period indicating the results of seven special pattern drawings when the number of remaining chance changes is between 14 and 8, and a third mode presentation is executed as a period presentation using a special pattern change period indicating the results of seven special pattern drawings when the number of remaining chance changes is between 7 and 1.

In addition, in this 26th control example, the presentation mode (presentation result) of each mode presentation can be determined based on newly acquired information (reserved winning information) while the mode presentation is already being performed. More specifically, when the final variation in which the first mode presentation is performed (the special pattern variation in which the number of remaining chance changes is 15) is started, the information (reserved memory information) stored in the winning information storage area 223va is read, and the result of the special pattern lottery is determined in advance (pre-read) based on the stored reserved memory information. Then, if it is determined as a result of the advance determination that reserved memory information corresponding to a jackpot win has been acquired, the presentation result of the first mode presentation is rewritten to a presentation result indicating a jackpot win, and the first mode presentation is extended and executed until the special pattern variation that wins the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

In this way, by configuring the number of times that special symbol selections that are the subject of the first mode presentation (period presentation) can be varied based on information acquired after the first mode presentation (period presentation) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of times that special symbol selections can be executed during the probability bonus state.

In the 26th control example, the period during which one period performance is executed is variable based on the result of the look-ahead, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period may be determined randomly, or the player may select any period. The timing for executing the look-ahead (pre-determination) may not be the timing when the last special symbol variation in the target period of the predetermined mode performance starts, but may be the timing when the special symbol variation starts before that, or after a predetermined period has elapsed since the last special symbol variation started (a specific timing before the performance result is notified to the player). Furthermore, when performing the pre-determination, all of the reserved memory information that has been acquired may be pre-determined, or pre-determination may be performed only for a specific range (for example, the two oldest ones stored in the winning information storage area 223va).

In addition, if it is determined as a result of the preliminary determination that reserved memory information corresponding to a jackpot win has been acquired, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to extend the period performance, and based on the result of the lottery, a decision may be made as to whether or not to rewrite the performance result of the period performance, or whether or not to extend the period performance.

Conventionally, there have been devices that are configured to be able to execute an operation effect to have the player operate the operation means (effect button 22), and that are configured to be able to notify the player of the period (valid period) during which operation of the operation means is determined to be valid when the operation effect is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the remaining period of the valid period, and to predict the result of the operation effect based on the presentation mode of the operation effect and the remaining period of the valid period.

However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, the same valid period is set as the period during which operations on the operating means are determined to be valid (valid period) regardless of the presentation result of the operation presentation. Therefore, if the set valid period is notified, it becomes easier for the player to understand the remaining period of the valid period. Based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation and the remaining period of the valid period, it is determined early on that the current presentation result is disadvantageous to the player, which reduces the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

In contrast to this, the 26th control example is configured so that the length of the valid period that is set can be varied depending on the result of the operation presentation. The length of the notification period notified to the player is configured to be shorter than the valid period that is actually set.

In the 26th control example described above, the method of setting the non-decreasing period during the battle presentation is configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to determine a non-decreasing period when the condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is met, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be possible to determine whether or not to determine a non-decreasing period based on the amount of the remaining HP value that is decreased.

In this case, for example, the device may be configured so that a non-decreasing period is more easily set when a performance that reduces the remaining HP value by a large amount with one attack (strong attack performance) is determined than when a performance that reduces the remaining HP value by a small amount with one attack (weak attack performance) is determined.

As a method of setting the non-decreasing period during a battle performance, a non-decreasing period may be set each time a condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is met, and the length of the non-decreasing period that is set may be varied.

In addition, a non-decreasing period may be set to coincide with the start timing of the effective operation period, and the HP value may not decrease unless the non-decreasing period is canceled. In this case, it is preferable to configure the timing at which the non-decreasing period is canceled (the timing at which it is likely to be canceled) to vary based on the results of the corresponding special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the timing at which the remaining HP value starts to decrease.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the conditions for decreasing the remaining HP value are met, a non-decreasing period may be set for a predetermined period at a specific timing during the effective operation period. Also, the non-decreasing period may be set two or more times for one effective operation period.

<27th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 828 to Fig. 861. In the above-mentioned 17th control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification), and the type of special symbol for which the lottery is likely to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type of time-saving state. That is, in the second time-saving state A and the third time-saving state A, a time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage, is likely to be executed is formed, while in the second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B, a time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage, is likely to be executed is formed.

In contrast, in the 27th control example, the frequency of drawing the first special symbol (the tendency of the variable time to be selected) is varied according to the trigger for setting the time-saving state (the type of big win), so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn before the time-saving state ends is varied. More specifically, as the time-saving end condition, a first end condition is established when the first special symbol is drawn a first number of times (e.g., 50 times), or a second end condition is established when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn a second number of times (e.g., 100 times) that is greater than the first number in total, and the time-saving state is basically ended by the first end condition. In other words, the time-saving state is basically configured to be in a state from when the time-saving state is set until the first number of times of drawing the first special symbol ends. Furthermore, by configuring the average change time of the first special symbol during the time-saving state to differ depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state, multiple time-saving states are formed with different numbers of times that the advantageous second special symbol is drawn, and essentially multiple time-saving states with different degrees of advantage (probability of winning the jackpot during the time-saving state) are formed. As a result, when a time-saving state is set, the player can play the game while paying attention to which type of time-saving state has been set, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the 27th control example, the small prize can only be won by drawing the second special symbol, and similarly to the 17th control example described above, if a small prize is won and the player continues to hit the right during the small prize game, a V prize is generated and a big prize game can be played. In other words, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the big prize is essentially confirmed not only when the big prize is won, but also when the small prize is won. In the 27th control example, in the normal state, an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set when the drawing of the second special symbol is basically performed, so that the drawing of the second special symbol is difficult to perform, while the fluctuation time is shortened only for the drawing of the second special symbol a specific number of times after the time-saving state ends. This ensures a specific number of opportunities to draw the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends.

Here, conventionally, gaming machines that employ a control scheme in which a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol having a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) with different degrees of advantage are provided, and while the drawing of the unfavorable first special symbol is more likely to be executed during an unfavorable gaming state (the start winning of the second special symbol is less likely to occur), when the gaming state transitions to a favorable gaming state, the drawing of the favorable second special symbol is more likely to be executed (the start winning of the second special symbol is more likely to occur) is more likely. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are also those that execute a performance that prompts the start winning of the second special symbol having a higher degree of advantage during the execution of the final variable display in the favorable gaming state, thereby accumulating reserved balls for the second special symbol, and execute a performance that notifies whether or not the lottery result of the last lottery for the second special symbol in the favorable gaming state and the lottery result of the reserved balls for the second special symbol include a lottery result corresponding to a win. However, when a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) as in the 27th control example is adopted, there is a possibility that the drawing of the first special symbol will be executed multiple times while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in a favorable gaming state, or that the drawing of the first special symbol will not be executed at all while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. For example, when there is only one time left in the time-saving mode when the drawing of the second special symbol starts, even if it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol is highly likely to be the last in the favorable gaming state and an effect of saving reserved balls for the second special symbol is executed, However, the drawing of the first special pattern may not be executed during the display of the second special pattern variation, and the time-saving state may continue until the next drawing of the second special pattern. Conversely, for example, even if a performance to accumulate reserved balls is not executed because there are a relatively large number of time-saving times remaining at the start of the drawing of the second special pattern (e.g., 8 times), the first special pattern may frequently change during the display of the second special pattern variation, and the advantageous game state may end before the display of the second special pattern variation ends, which may make it difficult to execute the performance to accumulate reserved balls for the second special pattern at the appropriate time.

In contrast, in the 27th control example, the second ball entry port 640, which is the starting entry port that triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, is configured as a starting entry port that allows game balls to enter easily by simply hitting the right side regardless of the game state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is basically controlled to be set to an extremely long time in the normal state, thereby suppressing the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol in the normal state, while shortening the variation time only for the drawing of the second special symbol a specific number of times after the advantageous time-saving state ends, making it possible to execute an effect of storing reserved balls in the variable display of the second special symbol executed immediately after the time-saving state ends. By configuring in this way, the effect of storing reserved balls can be executed reliably, and a series of effects indicating whether or not there is a winning combination in the drawing of the second special symbol that is being executed and is on hold can also be executed more reliably, so that the performance mode can be set appropriately.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 27th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example described above in that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example. Below, elements that are the same as those in the 17th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 828, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th control example will be described. FIG. 828 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 27th control example. As shown in FIG. 828, the game board 13 in the 27th control example is different from the game board 13 in the 17th control example (see FIG. 548) in that the variable winning device 2650 for small wins, which was provided directly below the first ball entrance 64 in the 17th control example, has been deleted. Also, as shown in FIG. 828, in the flow path formed on the right side of the front view of the variable display unit 80, a through gate 67, which is a lottery trigger for a normal pattern, is arranged on the upstream side, and a right first ball entrance 64r, which is opened and closed by an electric role 64ra, is provided downstream of the through gate 67. This right first ball entrance 64r is configured as one of the starting winning ports, which is a lottery trigger for a first special pattern, similar to the first ball entrance 64. The electric device 64ra is normally maintained in a closed position that makes it difficult for game balls to enter the right first ball entrance 64r, and is configured to shift (change) to an open position that allows game balls to enter the right first ball entrance 64r for a specified period of time when a winning normal pattern is selected.

Therefore, in the time-saving state where the normal symbol is more likely to win (the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than in the normal state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter, and the electric role 64ra is longer when the normal symbol is won), the game ball frequently enters the right first ball entrance 64r by continuing to hit the right. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 828, a second ball entrance 640 through which the game ball can enter is provided directly below the right first ball entrance 64r. This second ball entrance 640 is configured as a starting winning hole that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol. Unlike the right first ball entrance 64r, the second ball entrance 640 has nothing to prevent the ball from entering, so even in the normal state where the electric role 64ra is difficult to open, it is possible to easily enter the ball by hitting the right. In addition, in the time-saving state, a state is created in which it is easier for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 64a on the upstream side each time a normal pattern is hit, so it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to the normal state. However, since it is designed so that about five game balls enter during the time that the second special pattern changes in the time-saving state (fixed at 10 seconds in this 27th control example), when the right hand is continuously hit in the time-saving state, the event that the reserved balls of the second special pattern become 0 almost never occurs. Therefore, in this 27th control example, game balls frequently enter both the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state, so a state is created in which the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are frequently performed.

In the 27th control example, the probability of winning a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/200, and the probability of winning a small jackpot for the second special symbol is set to 1/20. Therefore, even if a lottery is held for the first special symbol, which cannot win a small jackpot, the probability of winning a jackpot is only 1/200, whereas if a lottery is held for the second special symbol, which can win both a jackpot and a small jackpot that essentially guarantees a jackpot, in a special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is essentially 11/200. Therefore, the more lotteries for the second special symbol are held in the time-saving state, the higher the possibility of winning a jackpot. Therefore, the player can be made to expect that more lotteries for the second special symbol will be held, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 828, in this 27th control example, a variable winning device 1065 that opens during a big win is provided downstream of the V winning device 650. This variable winning device 1650 is the same as the variable winning device 1065 (see FIG. 406) provided in the 12th control example described above, and so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

Next, referring to Fig. 829 to Fig. 833, the characteristic presentation mode in this 27th control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 829 and Fig. 830(a), the presentation mode during execution of the jackpot game in this 27th control example will be described. Here, as described above, this 27th control example is configured to provide multiple time-saving states in which the average number of times the second special symbol is drawn by the end of the time-saving state is different. More specifically, the time-saving state (E-rank crash) in which the first time-saving end condition (50 draws of the first special pattern) is established about 66.8 seconds after the transition to the time-saving state because the fluctuation time of the first special pattern is set to about 1.4 seconds on average, and the time-saving state is terminated; the time-saving state (D-rank crash) in which the first time-saving end condition (50 draws of the first special pattern) is established about 99.4 seconds after the transition to the time-saving state because the fluctuation time of the first special pattern is set to about 2 seconds on average, and the time-saving state is terminated; and the time-saving state (C-rank crash) in which the first time-saving end condition (50 draws of the first special pattern) is established about 155.3 seconds after the transition to the time-saving state because the fluctuation time of the first special pattern is set to about 3.2 seconds on average, and the time-saving state is terminated; Six time-saving states (rush ranks) are provided: a time-saving state (B-rank rush) in which the first time-saving end condition (50 drawings of the first special symbol) is established about 186.2 seconds on average after the transition to the time-saving state because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to about 3.8 seconds on average, and the time-saving state is terminated; a time-saving state (A-rank rush) in which the first time-saving end condition (50 drawings of the first special symbol) is established about 302.3 seconds on average after the transition to the time-saving state because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to about 6.2 seconds on average, and the time-saving state (S-rank rush) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time-saving state is always a long fluctuation (250 seconds), and therefore the drawings of the second special symbol can be executed almost exclusively during the time-saving state. As mentioned above, in the 27th control example, the variation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 10 seconds, so the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the time-saving state increases the longer the period until the first time-saving end condition is established. In other words, the longer the period until the first time-saving end condition is established, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. In addition, when taking into account the jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the small jackpot of the second special symbol, the rate of winning a jackpot from the start of the time-saving state to the end of the time-saving state and the end of the specific number of times (5 times) of drawings of the second special symbol is about 59.8% for E rank crash, about 66.6% for D rank crash, about 75.6% for C rank crash, about 79.5% for B rank crash, about 89.4% for A rank crash, and about 99.7% for S rank crash. Therefore, it is possible to play with the aim of being given a higher-rank rush after the jackpot is ended. In this 27th control example, a performance (rank-up performance) that notifies in advance the rank of the time-saving state (rush) that will be granted after the jackpot is executed during the opening period of the jackpot.

Figure 829(a) is a diagram showing the presentation mode of the rank-up presentation executed as the opening presentation of the jackpot. When this rank-up presentation is executed, as shown in Figure 829(a), the third symbol that was stopped and displayed when notifying the current jackpot is displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm. Figure 829(a) illustrates a case where a jackpot is notified by the third symbol that resembles the number "4". In addition, the word "Right Hit", which indicates the playing method during the execution of the jackpot game, is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Furthermore, in the main display area Dm, one weak enemy character ZE appears from a cave DG inhabited by a large number of enemies, and a presentation is executed in which the weak enemy character ZE that appeared fights the adventurer character 801. Also, as shown in FIG. 829(a), if the adventurer's character 801 is able to defeat the weak enemy character ZE, an effect is executed in which the defeated weak enemy character ZE drops a rank-up image (rank-up icon) RG with the text "RANK UP" attached. Also, an image showing the number of rank-up images RG acquired so far is displayed in the display area HR3 formed in the information of the main display area Dm. FIG. 829(a) shows an example in which the defeated weak enemy character ZE acquires a second rank-up image RG by dropping the rank-up image RG. Furthermore, the text "Stock rank-ups every time you defeat an enemy!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the more weak enemy characters ZE are defeated, the more rank-up images RG can be acquired (stocked).

Figure 829 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation mode in which a presentation in which a stored rank-up image RG is consumed to increase rank, which is executed after the presentation in which a battle with a weak enemy character ZE is completed. Here, in this 27th control example, two types of ranks, bonus rank and rush rank, are provided as targets for which rank can be increased using rank-up images RG. The bonus rank is linked to the number of rounds of a jackpot, and there are four ranks, A to D. Bonus rank A corresponds to 12 rounds, B rank corresponds to 8 rounds, C rank corresponds to 6 rounds, and D rank corresponds to 4 rounds. Also, as mentioned above, there are six rush ranks, S to E.

As shown in FIG. 829(b), when the effect of increasing the rank by consuming the rank-up image RG is executed, the number of rank-up images RG displayed in the display area HR3 is decreased by one, and an effect is executed in which the rank-up image RG is split in half in the main display area Dm and an image showing the bonus rank or rush rank appears. FIG. 829(b) illustrates an example in which a bonus rank image BRG with the characters "BONUS RANK" appears from the rank-up image RG split in half. In this case, it means that the bonus rank increases by one rank (stage) or more. In addition, a display area HR33 for displaying information showing the current bonus rank and rush rank is formed on the right side of the main display area Dm. In the example of FIG. 829(b), an example is illustrated in which the bonus rank is increased (ranked up) to C rank by the bonus rank image BRG acquired this time, and the rush rank remains E rank. Furthermore, the characters "Consume stock to increase your bonus rank and rush rank!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy to understand that an effect in which either the bonus rank or rush rank increases by one rank or more will be executed for each stocked rank-up image RG.

The number of rank-ups and the rank to which each rank will be ranked up are predetermined according to the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot K28) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 and the jackpot transitions to an A-rank rush after the jackpot ends, five rank-up images are acquired in the first half of the opening performance, and in the second half, the bonus rank rises by one rank to C rank, and the rush rank rises by four ranks to A rank. However, which rank will be raised when each rank-up image RG is consumed is determined by lottery for each performance. For example, when the bonus rank and rush rank have not yet risen to the rank corresponding to the current jackpot type, a lottery is performed so that 50% of the ranks are allocated to the bonus rank and 50% are allocated to the rush rank when the performance in which the rank-up image RG is consumed is executed. In contrast, after one rank has risen to the upper limit, it is always allocated to the rank that has not yet reached the upper limit. This allows the rank-up to have a random nature, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to which rank will be raised. This can increase the player's interest in the game. Also, a player who wants to win more prize balls with one big win can play the game while hoping that more rank-up images RG will be consumed by the bonus rank rather than the rush rank, while a player who thinks it is better to have a higher chance of consecutive big wins can play the game while hoping that more rank-up images RG will be consumed by the rush rank rather than the bonus rank. This can realize a novel gameplay in which the player's expectations for rank-up are completely opposite depending on the player's preferences, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

830(a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode after all the stocked rank-up images RG are consumed. As shown in FIG. 830(a), when the rank-up images RG are consumed (the rank-up of the bonus rank and rush rank is completed), a presentation in which the adventurer character 801 raises his sword is executed in the main display area Dm, and the word "Rank-up completed" is displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays information indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot corresponding to the currently notified bonus rank and the rush continuation rate (the rate at which the jackpot will be obtained by the end of the five drawings of the second special pattern after the time-saving ends) corresponding to the rush rank. FIG. 830(a) shows an example in which a C rank corresponding to a 6-round jackpot is notified as the bonus rank, and a B rank corresponding to a continuation rate of 79.5% is notified as the rush rank, and the word "Bonus 6 rounds over, rush continuation rate over 79% confirmed!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the bonus rank and rush rank.

In the 27th control example, the bonus rank is simply a rank linked to the number of rounds of the current jackpot, but this is not limited to this. For example, if there is a jackpot in the reserved balls, the rank may be notified taking into account the number of rounds of the jackpot in the reserved balls. More specifically, for example, taking into account the current jackpot and reserved balls, if the total number of rounds is 4 rounds, E rank may be notified, if the total number of rounds is 6 rounds, D rank may be notified, if the total number of rounds is 8 rounds, C rank may be notified, if the total number of rounds is 10 rounds, B rank may be notified, if the total number of rounds is 12 rounds, A rank may be notified, and if the total number of rounds is 14 rounds or more, S rank may be notified. Also, for example, if there is a jackpot in the reserved balls, the bonus rank may be notified as S rank. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a performance mode that also takes into account the presence or absence of a jackpot in the reserved balls, so that the performance mode can be diversified. In addition, when a presentation mode that guarantees a reserved jackpot is executed, the player's interest in the game can be greatly increased, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 27th control example, one rank-up image RG is acquired each time a performance in which one minor enemy character ZE is defeated is executed, but this is not limited thereto, and a performance pattern in which multiple rank-up images RG are acquired when one minor enemy character ZE is defeated may be provided. In this case, it is also possible to provide a type of enemy that has a high probability of acquiring multiple rank-up images RG when defeated, or a type of enemy that is guaranteed to be defeated and acquire multiple rank-up images RG. By configuring in this way, the adventurer's character 801 can play the game not only by focusing on whether or not he or she can defeat the enemy, but also on the type of enemy that appears, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 830(b), FIG. 831, and FIG. 832, a characteristic presentation mode during the time-saving state (rush) in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 830(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 830(b), during the time-saving state, the word "right hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the main display area Dm, as in the case of the execution of the jackpot game. This allows the player to more reliably execute the right hit, which is an advantageous game method for the player, and therefore prevents the player from losing money during the time-saving state. In addition, in a relatively wide area (the central part of the screen) in the main display area Dm, a variable display presentation of the third pattern (right pattern RD, middle pattern CD, and left pattern LD) indicating the lottery result of the second special pattern is executed. In addition, information indicating the rank of the rush currently set is displayed in the small display area Dm3, which is a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular shape formed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. FIG. 830(b) illustrates a case where "Rank B" is set as the rush rank. In addition, a small display area Dm8a for executing the variable display performance of the third pattern showing the lottery result of the first special pattern is formed on the left side of the small display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 830(b), the small display area Dm8a is configured as a display area that is significantly smaller (harder for the player to see) than the display area for executing the variable display performance corresponding to the second special pattern. This is because it is considered that the majority of players would rather check the variable display performance corresponding to the second special pattern, which has a higher expectation (degree of advantage) of winning, than the variable display performance corresponding to the first special pattern, which has a lower expectation (degree of advantage) of winning. Although not illustrated, the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is configured to be displayed in a display area larger than the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern only when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern. More specifically, for example, one second before the first special symbol stops changing, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is enlarged and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is reduced in size, so that the first special symbol jackpot is announced in a more noticeable manner than the second special symbol. By configuring it in this way, even if the first special symbol, which has a low probability of winning, wins during the time-saving state, the player can be made to understand with certainty that a jackpot has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 830(b), the small display area Dm is divided into a small display area Ds1 for displaying the reserved pattern Dsa corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern being executed, and the reserved patterns Dsb1 to Dsb4 corresponding to the reserved balls reserved in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b2, a small display area Ds2 for displaying information about the current rush (continuation rate information), and a small display area Ds3 for displaying the reserved patterns Dsc1 to Dsc4 corresponding to the reserved balls reserved in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b1. As shown in FIG. 830(b), the small display area Ds1 is configured as a larger display area than the small display area Ds3. This is because it is believed that the majority of players would rather check the reserved symbols corresponding to the second special symbols, which have a higher probability of winning (degree of advantage), than the reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbols, which have a lower probability of winning (degree of advantage).

Furthermore, in the small display area Dm2 in the main display area Dm, information (a countdown display of seconds) showing an estimate of the time remaining until the time-saving state ends is displayed. In FIG. 830(b), the time-saving state may end when 47 seconds have passed, and the text "47:00 until Final Judgment" is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Here, the final judgment refers to an effect that is executed during the execution of the variable display effect of the second special pattern that is executed first after the time-saving state ends (and during the reserved consumption period of the second special pattern thereafter), and after encouraging the player to save reserved balls of the second special pattern by hitting the right, notifies the player whether or not the lottery result of the variable display of the second special pattern being executed and the lottery result of the reserved second special pattern include a win (big win or small win).

As described above, in this 27th control example, the time-saving end condition is basically met by drawing the first special symbol the first number of times (50 times), and the time-saving state is ended. For this reason, in this 27th control example, the shortest time (1 second) x 49 times (first number - 1 time) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 as a guide to the time remaining until the time-saving state ends (i.e., the text "49:00 until final judgement" is displayed), and the remaining time is updated and displayed as time passes. In other words, the minimum time guaranteed for the time-saving state (guaranteed time) is displayed. The deviation from the selection status of the variable time of the first special symbol to the guaranteed time (the remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm1) is measured (accumulated), and if the deviation is accumulated to a predetermined value or more, an effect that adds to the remaining time at a predetermined opportunity (remaining time addition effect) is executed. Details of this remaining time addition effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 831.

Figures 831(a) and 831(b) are diagrams showing an example of the presentation mode when the remaining time addition presentation is executed. As shown in Figure 831(a), when it is decided to execute the remaining time addition presentation, a variable display presentation mode is executed in which a special third pattern (add-on pattern) with the word "add-on" added as the middle pattern UG is stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variation stops, the word "add-on occurred" is displayed in the display area HR3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the remaining time until the time-saving state ends has been added.

After the added symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 831(b), an effect is executed in which the stopped added symbol is split in half and an image (icon) indicating the number of seconds to be added appears. The example in FIG. 831(b) illustrates the case where an added seconds icon with the letters "+20" appears to notify of the addition of 20 seconds. In addition, when the added seconds icon appears, an effect is executed in which the same number of seconds as the number of seconds indicated by the added seconds icon is added to the number of seconds remaining until the end of the time-saving state (until the final judgment) displayed in the small display area Dm1. These display contents can easily make the player understand that the remaining time until the end of the time-saving state has been added and that there are more opportunities to execute the lottery for the advantageous second special symbol. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 832, the continuation rate increase effect in this 27th control example will be described. This continuation rate increase effect is an effect that may be executed when an extremely long fluctuation time that is selected with a low probability in the lottery of the first special pattern is selected, and is configured to notify that the rank (continuation rate) of the rush will increase. Here, as described above, in this 27th control example, the continuation rate of each rank (the continuation rate displayed in the small display area Ds during the time-saving state) is set according to the average value of the fluctuation time of the first special pattern. Therefore, when a fluctuation time that is significantly longer than the average value is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special pattern, the effective continuation rate increases with respect to the continuation rate calculated from the average value. Therefore, in this 27th control example, when a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special pattern and the continuation rate corresponds to a rank higher than the continuation rate corresponding to the currently set rush type (rank), an effect that increases the rank of the rush (continuation rate increase effect) is executed. By configuring it in this way, the effective continuation rate can be updated and notified in accordance with changes in the situation during the time-saving state (rush), making it possible to provide more accurate information (continuation rate) to the player.

As shown in FIG. 832(a), when it is decided to execute the continuation rate increase effect, a variable display effect is executed in which a special third pattern (rank up pattern) with the words "RANK UP" written on it as the middle pattern UG is stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display stops, the words "Rank up has occurred" are displayed in the display area HR3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the rank of the rush has increased (the continuation rate of the rush has increased).

After the rank-up symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 832(b), an effect is executed in which the stopped rank-up symbol splits in half and an image (icon) appears indicating the rank number (number of stages) of the rank-up. The example of FIG. 832(b) illustrates the appearance of a rank-up icon RRG with the letters "+1 RANK" to notify one stage of rank-up. When the rank-up icon appears, an effect is executed in which a rank-up of the same number of stages as the number of stages indicated by the rank-up icon RRG occurs for the rush rank displayed in the small display area Dm3. These display contents can easily make the player understand that the continuation rate of the time-saving state has increased and that there is a higher possibility of another win occurring during the rush. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 27th control example, the remaining time addition effect and the continuation rate increase effect are configured to be executed in synchronization with the variable display period of the variable display effect of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, but this is not limited to this, and they may be configured to be executed in synchronization with the variable display period of the first special pattern. In this case, just as in the case where the first special pattern is selected as a winning symbol, the variable display effect of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern may be temporarily executed in a display mode (wider display area) that is more noticeable than the variable display effect corresponding to the second special pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reliably make the player aware that a remaining time addition effect has occurred.

Next, referring to FIG. 833, the details of the Final Judgment effect in this 27th control example will be described. As described above, this Final Judgment effect is an effect that is executed over a specific number of (5) variable display periods of the second special symbol that are executed after the time-saving state ends, and after executing an effect that prompts the player to hit to the right to save reserved balls of the second special symbol, it is an effect that notifies the player whether or not at least one win (big win or small win) is included in the lottery results of the second special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed and the lottery results of the second special symbol corresponding to the reserved balls of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 833(a), when the time-saving state ends (i.e., the number of seconds remaining until the final judgement displayed in the small display area Dm1 becomes 0) and the final judgement performance is performed, five display areas HR34 to HR38 are formed to the right of the adventurer's character 801. Of these five display areas, the display area HR34 is a display area in which a key image corresponding to the lottery result of the variable display of the second special pattern being performed is displayed, and the display areas HR35 to HR38 are display areas in which key images corresponding to the lottery results of the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b are displayed. FIG. 833(a) illustrates a situation in which the final judgement performance is started with two reserved balls of the second special pattern stored, and while the key images are displayed in the display areas HR34 to HR36, the key images are not displayed in the display areas HR37 and HR38 corresponding to the reserved areas 3 and 4, in which reserved data is not stored. In this Final Judge performance, each time the player hits the ball to the right and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, increasing the number of reserved balls, an additional image of a key is displayed in accordance with the reserved ball. Also, as shown in FIG. 833(a), the text "Save keys by hitting with the right!!" is displayed in the display area HR3. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that keys are saved in the display areas HR34 to HR38 by hitting with the right. As shown in FIG. 833(a), during the execution of the Final Judge performance, the small display area Dm2 in which the text "Hit right" was displayed during the time-saving state is erased. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the time-saving state has ended and the player has transitioned (fallen) into the normal state, in which the degree of advantage of hitting with the right is low.

Here, the image of the key displayed in the display areas HR34 to HR38 has a plurality of modes. In the 27th embodiment, the key mode is configured to suggest to the player the expectation of a win. More specifically, the key mode (normal mode) shown in the display areas HR34 and HR35 in FIG. 833(a) and the shining mode shown in the display area HR36 are provided. Although not shown, a mode of a key larger than the normal mode and a mode of a tattered key larger than the normal mode are also provided. The expectation of a win is configured so that the tattered mode has the lowest expectation, followed by the normal mode, the shining mode has a higher expectation than the normal mode, and the large key mode has the highest expectation. Depending on these display modes of the keys, the player can predict whether or not a win will be announced by the final judgement performance, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

When the key collecting effect ends, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 801 discovers a door TG, as shown in FIG. 833(b). In addition, the words "If you can break through the door with the stored keys, the game will definitely continue!?" are displayed in the display area HR3. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that if the door can be opened with one of the stored keys, a big win or small win will be reached and the rush will continue.

In the 27th control example, regardless of the lottery result, after the time-saving state ends, the variable time for the first drawing of the second special symbol is set to 30 seconds, and the variable time for the second to fifth drawings of the second special symbol is set to 10 seconds. Then, during the period from when the first variable display of the second special symbol begins until 10 seconds have elapsed, a performance of collecting keys is executed to allow the player to collect reserved balls of the second special symbol, and during the variable time after 10 seconds have elapsed, a performance is executed in which the player discovers the door TG and attempts to break through the door TG using the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR34). If the first lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, a performance is executed in which the first key fails to break through the door TG, and thereafter, a performance is executed in which the player attempts to break through the door TG using the corresponding key during the 10-second variable time each time a variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is executed. If any of the second special symbols are selected as a winning combination (big or small), an effect is performed in which the corresponding key is used to break through the door TG, and the winning combination is announced.

In this way, in the 27th control example, the board configuration is premised on a board configuration that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, which serves as a starting entry port that triggers the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol by hitting the right even in an unfavorable normal state, and the configuration is such that the change time of the second special symbol is basically set to an extremely long change time in the normal state, and a relatively short time (30 seconds or 10 seconds) is set as the change time of the second special symbol only for a specific number of drawings of the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends. Then, in the first 10 seconds of the first second special symbol change display performance after the time-saving state ends, a performance is executed that encourages the player to save reserved balls of the second special symbol by hitting the right, and a performance is executed to notify the player of the result of winning or losing in the second half of the first second special symbol change display performance and in the second to fifth second special symbol change display performances after the time-saving state ends. In other words, in a normal state where hitting to the right is generally disadvantageous, it is possible to execute an extremely special presentation mode that encourages hitting to the right and accumulates reserved balls of the second special symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, after the time-saving state ends, it is possible to almost certainly guarantee that the second special symbol will be drawn a specific number of times (unless the player intentionally adopts a special playing method such as not hitting to the right despite being encouraged to do so).

Here, conventionally, gaming machines that employ a control scheme in which a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol having a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) with different degrees of advantage are provided, and while the drawing of the unfavorable first special symbol is more likely to be executed during an unfavorable gaming state (the start winning of the second special symbol is less likely to occur), when the gaming state transitions to a favorable gaming state, the drawing of the favorable second special symbol is more likely to be executed (the start winning of the second special symbol is more likely to occur) is more likely. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are also those that execute a performance that prompts the start winning of the second special symbol having a higher degree of advantage during the execution of the final variable display in the favorable gaming state, thereby accumulating reserved balls for the second special symbol, and execute a performance that notifies whether or not the lottery result of the last lottery for the second special symbol in the favorable gaming state and the lottery result of the reserved balls for the second special symbol include a lottery result corresponding to a win. However, when a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) as in the 27th control example is adopted, there is a possibility that the drawing of the first special symbol will be executed multiple times while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in a favorable gaming state, or that the drawing of the first special symbol will not be executed at all while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. For example, when there is only one time left in the time-saving mode when the drawing of the second special symbol starts, even if it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol is highly likely to be the last in the favorable gaming state and an effect of saving reserved balls for the second special symbol is executed, However, the drawing of the first special pattern may not be executed during the display of the second special pattern variation, and the time-saving state may continue until the next drawing of the second special pattern. Conversely, for example, even if a performance to accumulate reserved balls is not executed because there are a relatively large number of time-saving times remaining at the start of the drawing of the second special pattern (e.g., 8 times), the first special pattern may frequently change during the display of the second special pattern variation, and the advantageous game state may end before the display of the second special pattern variation ends, which may make it difficult to execute the performance to accumulate reserved balls for the second special pattern at the appropriate time.

In contrast to this, in the present 27th control example, the variable time for the first lottery for the second special symbol is fixed after the time-saving state ends, so a period of time can be secured for the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be accumulated after the time-saving state ends. Therefore, by the player playing according to the presentation content, the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be reliably accumulated to the maximum number (four), so the Final Judge presentation can be executed optimally.

In the 27th control example, after the time-saving state ends (i.e., immediately after the transition to the normal state), the Final Judge performance is set to be executed over five periods during which the second special symbol changes, and during the first period during which the second special symbol changes, a performance is executed that suggests that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are saved by hitting the right hand, but the start timing and execution period of the Final Judge performance (the number of times the second special symbol changes) are not limited to this and can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, the Final Judge performance may be executed over a shorter period (for example, during four or two periods during which the second special symbol changes after the time-saving state ends), or the Final Judge performance may be executed over a longer period. In other words, the range (period) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is shortened may be changed arbitrarily by changing the number of times the second special symbol is drawn (changing the prescribed contents of the normal fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa) referring to the table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the time-saving state ends (see FIG. 839(b)) or the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the time-saving state ends. By shortening the period, it is possible to reduce the possibility of winning (a big win or a small win) in the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol after the time-saving state ends, and by increasing the period, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning (a big win or a small win) in the drawing of the second special symbol, so that the continuation rate for each rank of the rush (the possibility of winning a big win before the final judgement performance ends) can be adjusted.

In addition, in the 27th control example, after the end of the jackpot, during the execution of the variable display performance based on the first drawing of the second special symbol, a performance is executed that suggests to the player to save reserved balls of the second special symbol by hitting the right, but a performance that causes reserved balls of the second special symbol to be saved by hitting the right before the time-saving state ends may be executed. Specifically, for example, from the drawing of the second special symbol executed after the remaining number of drawings in the time-saving state becomes 10 or less, until the time-saving state ends, a performance that prompts the player to save reserved balls of the second special symbol in each variable display of the second special symbol (i.e., variable displays of multiple second special symbols within the number of times of time-saving) may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a performance that causes reserved balls of the second special symbol to be saved during the execution of the variable display performance of the second special symbol last executed in the time-saving state, regardless of the timing of the end of the time-saving state. Also, when executing the same type of effect that encourages the player to hit to the right over multiple changes in the display of the second special symbol as in this specific example, the effect content may be set to encourage the player to keep the reserved balls at the maximum number. By configuring it in this way, the player can be made to play while being careful to always keep the reserved balls at the maximum number (4 balls), which makes it possible to prevent the reserved balls from becoming zero in the middle of the Final Judge effect's presentation period.

Next, referring to FIG. 834, the change over time of the presentation mode from winning the jackpot to the end of the rush in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 834 is a time chart showing the change over time of the presentation mode after winning the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 834, when the opening period of the jackpot starts with the start of the jackpot game, a rank-up presentation (see FIG. 829, FIG. 830(a)) is executed as the opening presentation. When the rank-up presentation finishes announcing the bonus rank (number of rounds of the jackpot) and the rush rank (continuation rate of the time-saving state after the jackpot ends) and the opening period ends, the first round of the jackpot starts and the jackpot presentation is executed. Then, when the jackpot ends and the time-saving state starts, the jackpot presentation ends and the rush-in presentation (see FIG. 830(b)) starts. In the time-saving state (rush), depending on the selection status of the variable time of the first special pattern, a remaining time-adding presentation (see FIG. 831), a continuation rate increase presentation (see FIG. 832), etc. may occur. Then, if the time-saving state end condition (either the first end condition, which is established when the 50th drawing of the first special symbol is performed, or the second end condition, which is established when the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are performed a total of 100 times) is established without winning (big win or small win) during the time-saving state, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was being performed at the time of the establishment (or that triggered the establishment of the end condition) ends, the time-saving state ends, and the rush performance ends, and the Final Judge performance (see FIG. 833) begins. If no winning is won in the five drawings of the second special symbol performed during the performance period of the Final Judge performance, a performance is executed in which the door TG cannot be broken through even with all the keys. Then, after the time-saving state ends, when the five drawings of the second special symbol are completed and the performance period of the Final Judge performance ends, the performance mode for the normal state is switched to.

In the 27th control example, the rank-up effect that notifies the number of rounds of the jackpot (bonus rank) and the advantageous degree of the time-saving state after the jackpot end (rush rank) is configured to be executed during the opening period of the jackpot, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed during the execution of the round game of the jackpot, or during the interval period. Also, the notification of the bonus rank and the rush rank do not necessarily have to be notified together in one rank-up effect, and may be configured to be notified in separate effects. More specifically, for example, the bonus rank (number of rounds of the jackpot) may be configured to be notified at any timing up to the 4th round of the jackpot, and the rush rank (continuation rate of the time-saving state) may be configured to be notified during the ending period of the jackpot or during the variable display effect related to the drawing of the second special pattern a specific number of times (for example, the first or fifth time) after the transition to the time-saving state (rush).

In the 27th control example, the bonus rank and rush rank corresponding to the jackpot pattern are always notified by the rank-up effect, but a rank lower than the actual rank may be notified at a predetermined rate. If a rank lower than the actual rank is notified in the rank-up effect, a performance in which the rank is increased to the actual rank may be executed at a predetermined notification timing. As the predetermined notification timing, for example, if the bonus rank is notified low in the rank-up effect, a performance in which the rank is increased to the actual rank may be generated in the final round corresponding to the notified rank (8th round for B rank, 6th round for C rank, 4th round for D rank). Also, for example, if the rush rank is notified low in the rank-up effect, a performance in which the rank is increased to the actual rank may be generated during the final round of the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot, or the variable display period of the second special pattern for a specific number of times (for example, the first time) after the end of the jackpot. By configuring it this way, even if a low rank is announced in the rank-up presentation, the player can expect a further rank-up to occur in the future, which can increase the player's interest in the game and diversify the presentation format.

In the 27th control example, when the occurrence of rank up is notified in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 832), the rank up to the corresponding rank is notified in the variable display effect of one second special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, when multiple stages of rank up are notified, the rank up may be notified in stages (for example, one stage per change) across multiple variable display effects of the second special pattern. By configuring in this way, the expectation of rising to a higher rank can be continuously held across multiple variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, when notifying in stages, it is not necessary to notify the rank across multiple changes, and a configuration may be used to execute an effect of gradually increasing the rank within one change. Specifically, for example, after executing an effect in which the rank up image RG is split in half and a rank up icon RRG indicating a rank up to a rank lower than the original rank appears, an effect is executed in which the rank up icon RRG is split in half and a rank up icon RRG indicating a higher rank appears. Thereafter, until an actual rank-up is announced, a rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank higher than the rank indicated by the previously appeared rank-up icon RRG may be repeatedly displayed from among the previously appeared rank-up icons RRG, thereby gradually announcing the rank. By configuring in this way, the player can be continuously excited about rising to a higher rank, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 27th control example, in the continuation rate increase performance (see FIG. 832), the rank increase number (rank up number) is notified by the type of rank up icon RRG (written characters) that appears when the rank up image RG is split in half, but this is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, the display mode of the rank up image RG (for example, color, size, etc.), the way the rank up image RG is split, etc. may be configured to suggest the type of the rank up icon RRG that appears. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a white rank up image RG, a red rank up image, and a red rank up image larger than normal are provided as types of rank up images RG, and when a red rank up image is stopped and displayed, it is more likely that a rank up of multiple stages will be notified than when a white rank up image RG is stopped and displayed. Also, a red rank up image larger than normal may be configured to be selected only when a rank up of multiple stages is notified. Furthermore, in addition to breaking in half, the rank-up image RG may also be broken into four pieces or shattered into pieces, with the possibility of a rank-up of multiple stages being notified in the case of a break into four pieces being higher than in the case of a break in half. Also, the rank-up to A rank or higher may be confirmed in the case of a break into pieces. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the type of rank-up icon RRG but also to the presentation mode before the rank-up icon RRG appears, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in 27th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 835(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this 27th control example will be described. As shown in Fig. 835(a), the ROM 202 in this 27th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th control example described above (see Fig. 552) in that the first win random number 27 table 202aw is provided instead of the first win random number 12 table 202ka, the big win type selection table 202bw is provided instead of the big win type selection 17 table 202qb, the second win random number 27 table 202cw is provided instead of the second win random number 17 table 202qc, the small win random number 27 table 202ew is provided instead of the small win random number 17 table 202qe, and the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202qj. In addition, the small win type selection 17 table 202qf, the open scenario 7 table 202fg, the time-saving random number 17 table 202qh, and the time-saving type selection table 202qi in the 17th control example are deleted. The other configurations are the same as those in the 17th control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 836(a), the details of the first winning random number 27 table 202aw in this 27th control example will be described. This first winning random number 27 table 202aw is a data table in which a random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot when a lottery for a special pattern is executed is prescribed, similar to the first winning random number 12 table 202ka in the 17th control example described above. FIG. 836(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 27 table 202aw. As shown in FIG. 836(a), in this 27th control example, five random number values (counter values) of "0 to 4" are prescribed in correspondence with each other as the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for a special pattern, regardless of the type of special pattern. The first winning random number counter C1 in this 27th control example is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", so the probability of winning a direct jackpot when a special symbol lottery is executed in this 27th control example is 1/200 (5/1000) for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 836(b), the second winning random number 27 table 202cw in this 27th control example will be described in detail. This second winning random number 27 table 202cw is a data table that specifies the random number value (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern when a lottery for a normal pattern is executed, similar to the second winning random number 17 table 202qc in the 17th control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 836(b), the second winning random number 27 table 202cw in this 27th control example is specified with only one "0" as the random number value (counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in a low probability state of the normal pattern. Of the 300 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 299" that the second winning random number counter C4 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a winning normal pattern in a low probability state of the normal pattern is 1, so the probability of a winning normal pattern in a low probability state of the normal pattern is 1/300. Also, as shown in FIG. 836(b), 299 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 298" are specified with the random number value (counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in a high probability state of the normal pattern. Of the 300 possible random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 299" that the second winning random number counter C4 can take, 299 random numbers (counter values) are determined to be winning normal symbols in a high probability state for normal symbols, so the probability of winning normal symbols in a high probability state for normal symbols is 299/300. In this way, in this 27th control example, while in the normal state, which is set to a low probability state for normal symbols, there is almost no winning of normal symbols, in the time-saving state, which is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, there is almost always a winning of normal symbols every time a lottery for normal symbols is executed, so the advantage in the time-saving state can be increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 836(c), the details of the small win random number 27 table 202ew in this 27th control example will be described. This small win random number 27 table 202ew is a data table that specifies the random number value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is determined to be a small win when a special pattern lottery is executed, similar to the small win random number 17 table 202qe in the 17th control example described above. As shown in FIG. 836(c), in this 27th control example, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win is associated only with the second special pattern, and the range of the value is "5 to 54". Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 999 that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small winnings in the lottery for the second special symbol is 50, between 5 and 54, so the probability of winning a small winning in the lottery for the second special symbol is 1/20 (50/1000).

Next, referring to FIG. 836(d) and FIG. 837, the details of the jackpot type selection 27 table 202bw in this 27th control example will be described. Although not shown in the figures, the jackpot type selection 27 table 202bw in this 27th control example is composed of at least a direct win table 202bw1 that is referenced to identify the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a V win table 202bw2 that is referenced to identify the jackpot type when a jackpot is won due to a V win occurring during the execution of a small win game. First, referring to FIG. 836(d), the details of the direct win table 202bw1 will be described.

Figure 836 (d) is a diagram showing the contents of the direct hit table 202bw1 in this 27th control example. As shown in Figure 836 (d), in this direct hit table 202bw1, the selectable jackpot type and the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each other for each type of special pattern. More specifically, as shown in Figure 836 (d), as the jackpot type of the first special pattern, "jackpot A27" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 4", and "jackpot B27" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A27" is a jackpot (12 round continuation rate S rank jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 12 rounds and the time-saving state after the jackpot is set to an S rank time-saving state (rush). In addition, the "jackpot B27" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the time-saving state after the jackpot is set to an E-rank time-saving state (4-round continuation rate E-rank jackpot). Of the 100 random numbers "0-99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the random numbers associated with "jackpot A27" and "jackpot B27" are 5 and 95, respectively, so that when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A27" will be determined is 5% (5/100), and the probability that "jackpot B27" will be determined is 95% (95/100). In other words, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot B27) with the fewest number of rounds and the lowest continuation rate (rush rank) is determined, so the lottery for the first special symbol is a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.

As shown in FIG. 836(d), as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, "jackpot C27" is defined to correspond to the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2 (range of "0 to 99"). This "jackpot C27" is a jackpot (12-round continuation rate S-rank jackpot) in which the number of jackpot rounds is set to 12 rounds and an S-rank time-saving state (rush) is set as the time-saving state after the jackpot ends. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the jackpot type with the greatest number of rounds and the highest continuation rate is always determined, so the lottery for the second special symbol is a lottery that is highly advantageous for the player.

Next, the details of the V hit table 202bw2 described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 837. FIG. 837 is a diagram showing the contents of the V hit table 202bw. As shown in FIG. 837, the V hit table 202bw specifies the value of the first hit type counter C2 in correspondence with 13 types of jackpot types, "jackpot D27" to "jackpot P27".

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 837, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0" and a "jackpot D27" (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of S rank) is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "1 to 39", a "jackpot E27" (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of A rank) is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 42", a "jackpot F27" (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of B rank) is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 42", and the first winning type counter C2 is The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to a range of "43, 44", and a "jackpot G27" (jackpot with 12 round continuation rate of C rank) is correspondingly defined. The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to a range of "45 to 49", and a "jackpot H27" (jackpot with 12 round continuation rate of D rank) is correspondingly defined. The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to a range of "50 to 52", and a "jackpot I27" (jackpot with 8 round continuation rate of A rank) is correspondingly defined. The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to a range of "53, 54", and a "jackpot H27" (jackpot with 12 round continuation rate of D rank) is correspondingly defined. For the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "55 to 57", a "jackpot J27" (jackpot with 8 round continuation rate of B rank) is correspondingly specified, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "55 to 57", a "jackpot K27" (jackpot with 6 round continuation rate of A rank) is correspondingly specified, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "58, 59", a "jackpot L27" (jackpot with 6 round continuation rate of B rank) is correspondingly specified, and for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 64", a "jackpot M27" (jackpot with 4 round continuation rate of A rank) is correspondingly specified. A "jackpot N27" (4 round continuation rate B rank jackpot) is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 69", a "jackpot O27" (4 round continuation rate C rank jackpot) is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 79", and a "jackpot P27" (4 round continuation rate D rank jackpot) is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99".

In other words, of the 100 possible random number values of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value associated with "jackpot D27", 39 random number values associated with "jackpot E27", 3 random number values associated with "jackpot F27", 2 random number values associated with "jackpot G27", 5 random number values associated with "jackpot H27", 3 random number values associated with "jackpot I27", 2 random number values associated with "jackpot J27", 3 random number values associated with "jackpot K27", 2 random number values associated with "jackpot L27", 5 random number values associated with "jackpot M27", 5 random number values associated with "jackpot N27", 10 random number values associated with "jackpot O27", and 20 random number values associated with "jackpot P27". Therefore, when a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol and a V prize is awarded, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot D27" is 1%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot E27" is 39%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot F27" is 3%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot G27" is 2%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot H27" is 5%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot I27" is 3%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot J27" is 2%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot K27" is 3%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot L27" is 2%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot M27" is 5%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot N27" is 5%, the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot O27" is 10%, and the percentage of the jackpot type that is determined to be "jackpot P27" is 20.

In this way, in this 27th control example, 13 types of jackpot types are provided as the jackpot type that is determined when a V win occurs during a small jackpot game, and there are a wide variety of combinations of the number of rounds and the rush continuation rate, so that when a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern during the time-saving state and a V win occurs, it is difficult to predict the jackpot type that will be announced by the rank-up effect from the number of rank-up images RG obtained, etc. Therefore, each time an effect that consumes a rank-up image RG is executed, the player can play the game while paying more attention to which rank, the bonus rank or the rush rank, will increase, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern 27 table 202dw in this 27th control example will be described with reference to Figure 838 (a). Figure 838 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern 27 table 202dw in this 27th control example. As shown in FIG. 838(a), the fluctuation pattern 27 table 202dw in this 27th control example includes a normal table 202dw1 referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a normal state, an S rank table 202dw2 referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in an S rank rush (time-saving state), an A rank table 202dw3 referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in an A rank rush (time-saving state), a B rank table 202dw4 referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a B rank rush (time-saving state), and a C rank table 202dw5 referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a C rank rush (time-saving state). The table is configured with nine types of data tables: an S rank table 202dw5 to be referenced, an S rank table 202dw6 to be referenced for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a D rank rush (time-shortened state), an S rank table 202dw7 to be referenced for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in an E rank rush (time-shortened state), a 1st fluctuation time table 202dw8 after time-saving end to be referenced for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the normal state and during the period until the first drawing of the second special symbol is executed after the time-shortened state, and a 2nd to 5th fluctuation time table 202dw9 after time-saving end to be referenced for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the normal state and during the period from the end of the first drawing of the second special symbol after the time-shortened state to the fifth drawing of the second special symbol after the time-shortened state. Of these, the normal table 202dw1 has the same regulations as the normal state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd1 (see FIG. 414) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example) described above (in the drawing of the first special symbol, a fluctuation time in the range of 7 to 140 seconds is selected depending on the drawing result, while in the drawing of the second special symbol, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is always selected), so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted here.

First, the details of the S rank table 202dw2 will be described with reference to FIG. 838(b). FIG. 838(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the S rank table 202dw2. As shown in FIG. 838(b), the S rank table 202dw2 is specified in such a manner that a fixed fluctuation time is associated with the first special symbol and the second special symbol regardless of the lottery result. Specifically, for the first special symbol, whether the lottery result is a miss or a big win, a fluctuation pattern (long miss fluctuation, long win fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 250,000 ms (250 seconds) is specified in such a manner that the entire range of values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (the range of "0 to 999") is associated with the first special symbol. In addition, for the second special symbol, whether the lottery result is a miss or a big win, a fluctuation pattern (miss short fluctuation, win short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (range of "0 to 999").

Due to these provisions, in the S-rank rush (time-saving state set after the end of the jackpots A27, C27, and D27), an extremely long fluctuation time of 250 seconds is selected each time the drawing of the unfavorable (effectively low probability of winning) first special symbol is executed, while a short fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set each time the drawing of the favorable second special symbol is executed, compared to 250 seconds, so that the drawing of the favorable second special symbol (effectively high probability of winning) can be executed multiple times (around 25 times) during the long fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In other words, since the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the time-saving state can be extremely increased, a state is formed in which the probability of winning is extremely high during the time-saving state and after the time-saving state ends, until the drawing of the second special symbol is executed a specific number of times. Specifically, the rate (continuation rate) of winning (a jackpot or a small jackpot that is actually a confirmed jackpot) in the S-rank rush is 99.7%. Therefore, when an S-rank rush is selected, the next big win is almost guaranteed, so when an S-rank time-saving state is set, it can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 839(a), the details of the A rank table 202dw3 in this 27th control example will be described. As described above, the A rank table 202dw3 is a data table that is referenced when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the A rank time-saving state (rush). As shown in FIG. 839(a), the A rank table 202dw3 specifies six types of fluctuation patterns when the first special symbol is lost: loss time-saving fluctuations A to E and loss long fluctuation. Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol is lost, a loss time-saving fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 1000 ms (1 second) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 139", a loss time-saving fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "140 to 310", and a loss time-saving fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "311 to 481". A miss time-saving fluctuation D with a fluctuation time of 7000 ms (7 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "482 to 742", a miss time-saving fluctuation E with a fluctuation time of 10000 ms (10 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "743 to 998", and a miss long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 250000 ms (250 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "999". On the other hand, as a fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol wins, a hit time-saving fluctuation E with a fluctuation time of 10000 ms (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range (range of "0 to 999") that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Additionally, the time for the second special symbol to change is the same as for the S rank table 202dw2, and is set to 10 seconds regardless of the lottery results.

According to these regulations, when a lottery is run for the first special symbol in an A rank rush and the probability of winning is 199/200, there is a 14.0% (140/1000) chance that the fluctuation time is set to 1 second, a 17.1% (171/1000) chance that the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds, a 17.1% (171/1000) chance that the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds, a 26.1% (261/1000) chance that the fluctuation time is set to 7 seconds, a 25.6% (256/1000) chance that the fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds, and a 0.1% (1/10000) chance that the fluctuation time is set to 250 seconds. On the other hand, when a lottery is run for the first special symbol and the jackpot probability is 1/200, the fluctuation time is always set to 10 seconds. Adding these together, the average time for the first special symbol to change is 6.17 seconds, and the average time for the first end condition to be met (from the start of the time-saving state until the 50th drawing of the first special symbol is executed) is 302.3 seconds. Therefore, the second special symbol can be displayed to change 30.2 times on average during the time-saving state, and when the five drawings of the second special symbol for the final judge performance are also taken into account, the second special symbol can be drawn 35.2 times.

Note that, with regard to the B rank table 202dw4 to the E rank table 202dw7, the only difference from the A rank table 202dw3 is the allocation of the miss time-saving fluctuations A to E. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the regulations will be omitted and only the performance of each rank will be explained by referring to Figure 840(b), which shows the allocation of fluctuation times for each rank, the average fluctuation time of the first special pattern, the continuation rate, etc.

Figure 840(b) is a diagram showing the rush performance of each rank. As shown in Figure 840(b), in the S rank rush in which the S rank table 202dw2 is referred to, when the first special symbol is drawn, the variation time is set to 250 seconds at a rate of 100%, so that the time-saving state is basically ended by the establishment of the second end condition (the condition in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn 100 times in total). In the S rank rush, the variation time of the first special symbol is fixed at 250 seconds and the variation time of the second special symbol is fixed at 10 seconds, so the number of times each special symbol changes until the time-saving state ends (the second end condition is established) is approximately 4 times for the first special symbol and 96 times for the second special symbol. Therefore, if the five times of the second special symbol that can be drawn during the final judgement performance are also taken into account, the second special symbol can be drawn 101 times before the final judgement performance ends. Therefore, the probability of another jackpot occurring before the end of the Final Judge performance is 2.0% for the first special pattern (a 1/200 chance of winning a jackpot within four tries), and 99.7% for the second special pattern (a total of 11/200 chance of winning a jackpot or small jackpot within 101 tries), and if you combine the first and second special patterns, there is a 99.7% chance of winning some kind of jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in an A-rank rush in which the A-rank table 202dw3 is referenced, the A-rank table 202dw3 is configured so that when a lottery for the first special pattern is executed, a 1-second fluctuation time is selected 13.9% of the time, a 3-second fluctuation time is selected 17% of the time, a 5-second fluctuation time is selected 17% of the time, a 7-second fluctuation time is selected 26% of the time, a 10-second fluctuation time is selected 26% of the time, and a 250-second fluctuation time is selected 0.1% of the time, so that the average fluctuation time of the first special pattern is 6.17 seconds, and the average time until the 50th lottery for the first special pattern is executed (until the 49 fluctuation displays of the first special pattern have ended) (i.e., the average time until the first end condition is met) is 302.3 seconds (6.17 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the five draws for the second special symbol that can be performed during the Final Judge performance, an average of 35.2 draws for the second special symbol (302.3 seconds/10 seconds + 5 draws) can be performed before the Final Judge performance ends, so the probability of another jackpot occurring before the Final Judge performance ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (a 1/200 chance of winning a jackpot within 50 tries) and 86.4% for the second special symbol (a total of 11/200 chance of winning a jackpot or small jackpot within 35.2 tries), and if the first and second special symbols are combined, the probability of winning some kind of jackpot is 89.4%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in a B rank rush in which the B rank table 202dw4 is referenced, the B rank table 202dw4 is configured so that when a lottery for the first special pattern is executed, a 1 second fluctuation time is selected 53.9% of the time, a 3 second fluctuation time is selected 10% of the time, a 5 second fluctuation time is selected 10% of the time, a 7 second fluctuation time is selected 13% of the time, a 10 second fluctuation time is selected 13% of the time, and a 250 second fluctuation time is selected 0.1% of the time, so that the average fluctuation time of the first special pattern is 3.8 seconds, and the average time until the 50th lottery for the first special pattern is executed (until the 49 fluctuation displays of the first special pattern have ended) (i.e., the average time until the first end condition is met) is 186.2 seconds (3.8 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the five draws for the second special symbol that can be performed during the Final Judge performance, an average of 23.6 draws for the second special symbol (186.2 seconds/10 seconds + 5 draws) can be performed before the Final Judge performance ends, so the probability of another jackpot occurring before the Final Judge performance ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (a 1/200 chance of winning a jackpot within 50 tries) and 73.7% for the second special symbol (a total of 11/200 chance of winning a jackpot or small jackpot within 23.6 tries), and if the first and second special symbols are combined, the probability of winning some kind of jackpot is 79.5%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in C-rank Rush where C-rank table 202dw5 is referenced, C-rank table 202dw5 is configured so that when a lottery for the first special pattern is executed, a 1-second fluctuation time is selected 65.9% of the time, a 3-second fluctuation time is selected 7% of the time, a 5-second fluctuation time is selected 7% of the time, a 7-second fluctuation time is selected 10% of the time, a 10-second fluctuation time is selected 10% of the time, and a 250-second fluctuation time is selected 0.1% of the time, so that the average fluctuation time of the first special pattern is 3.17 seconds, and the average time until the 50th lottery for the first special pattern is executed (until the 49 fluctuation displays of the first special pattern have ended) (i.e., the average time until the first end condition is met) is 155.3 seconds (3.17 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the five draws for the second special symbol that can be performed during the Final Judge performance, an average of 20.5 draws for the second special symbol (155.3 seconds/10 seconds + 5 draws) can be performed before the Final Judge performance ends, so the probability of another jackpot occurring before the Final Judge performance ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (a 1/200 chance of winning a jackpot within 50 tries) and 68.7% for the second special symbol (a total of 11/200 chance of winning a jackpot or small jackpot within 20.5 tries), and if the first and second special symbols are combined, the probability of winning some kind of jackpot is 75.6%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in D-rank Rush where D-rank table 202dw6 is referenced, D-rank table 202dw6 is configured so that when a lottery for the first special pattern is executed, a 1-second fluctuation time is selected 85.9% of the time, a 3-second fluctuation time is selected 3% of the time, a 5-second fluctuation time is selected 3% of the time, a 7-second fluctuation time is selected 4% of the time, a 10-second fluctuation time is selected 4% of the time, and a 250-second fluctuation time is selected 0.1% of the time, so that the average fluctuation time of the first special pattern is 2.03 seconds, and the average time until the 50th lottery for the first special pattern is executed (until the 49 fluctuation displays of the first special pattern have ended) (i.e., the average time until the first end condition is met) is 99.4 seconds (2.03 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the five draws for the second special symbol that can be performed during the Final Judge performance, an average of 14.9 draws for the second special symbol (99.4 seconds/10 seconds + 5 draws) can be performed before the Final Judge performance ends, so the probability of another jackpot occurring before the Final Judge performance ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (a 1/200 chance of winning a jackpot within 50 tries) and 57.1% for the second special symbol (a total of 11/200 chance of winning a jackpot or small jackpot within 14.9 tries), and if the first and second special symbols are combined, the probability of some kind of win is 66.6%.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in an E rank rush in which the E rank table 202dw7 is referenced, the E rank table 202dw7 is configured so that when a lottery for the first special pattern is executed, a 1 second fluctuation time is selected with a 98.9% probability, a 3 second fluctuation time is selected with a 0.5% probability, a 5 second fluctuation time is selected with a 0.5% probability, a 7 second fluctuation time is selected with a 0.5% probability, a 10 second fluctuation time is selected with a 0.5% probability, and a 250 second fluctuation time is selected with a 0.1% probability, so that the average fluctuation time of the first special pattern is 1.36 seconds, and the average time until the 50th lottery for the first special pattern is executed (until the 49 fluctuation displays of the first special pattern have ended) (i.e., the average time until the first end condition is met) is 66.8 seconds (1.36 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the five draws for the second special symbol that can be performed during the Final Judge performance, an average of 11.7 draws for the second special symbol (66.8 seconds/10 seconds + 5 draws) can be performed before the Final Judge performance ends, so the probability of another jackpot occurring before the Final Judge performance ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (a 1/200 chance of winning a jackpot within 50 draws) and 48.4% for the second special symbol (a total of 11/200 chance of winning a jackpot or small jackpot within 11.7 draws), and if the first and second special symbols are combined, the probability of winning some kind of jackpot is 59.8%.

In this way, in this 27th control example, the variable pattern table referenced during the time-saving state is made different for each type of rush (time-saving state) (jackpot type that triggered the setting of the time-saving state), and the selection ratio of each variable time when the first special symbol is not obtained is made different, and the average time until the time-saving state ends is made different for each rush type. In other words, by making the average number of times that the second special symbol can be drawn before the end of the rush (time-saving state) different for each rush type, the ratio (rush continuation rate) of winning again some kind of win (jackpot or small win) before the end of the final judgement performance is made different for each rush type. This makes it possible to realize multiple rushes with different performances, and therefore makes it possible to make the gameplay different depending on the type of rush. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that the rate of winning some kind of prize by the end of the rush for each rank shown in FIG. 840(b) (expected probability of winning a jackpot for each rank) is based on the assumption that right-handed play continues in the time-saving state, and if left-handed play is performed, the rate drops significantly from the rate shown in FIG. 840(b). In other words, if left-handed play continues, it becomes impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter either the right first ball entrance 64r or the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the special symbol is almost always a lottery for the first special symbol based on balls entering the first ball entrance 64. For this reason, since the time-saving state ends based on the establishment of the first ending condition, the expectation of winning a jackpot is 22.2% (1/200 probability of winning a jackpot within 50 tries) regardless of rank. In other words, compared to right-handed play, this is an unfavorable playing method in which the jackpot can only be won at an extremely low rate.

Returning to FIG. 839, the explanation of the fluctuation pattern 27 table 202dw will be continued. FIG. 839(b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the table 202dw8 for one fluctuation after the time-saving end. As described above, the table 202dw8 for one fluctuation after the time-saving end is a data table that is referenced in the normal state and until the first lottery of the second special symbol is executed after the time-saving end. As shown in FIG. 839(b), when the table 202dw8 for one fluctuation after the time-saving end is referenced, the data is prescribed so that the fluctuation time is fixed to 30 seconds regardless of the type of special symbol and the lottery result. In other words, if the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a miss, the miss middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is always selected, and if the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big win, the win middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is always selected. This ensures that when the first lottery for the second special symbol is performed after the time-saving state ends, the variable time can be set to 30 seconds, ensuring that there is enough time to execute the effect of encouraging the player to hit to the right (see FIG. 833(a)), and the effect of discovering the door TG and using the first key (see FIG. 833(b)).

Although not shown in the figure, table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 changes after the end of time reduction, which is referenced to select the change pattern (change time) during the normal state from the end of the first drawing of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction until the fifth drawing of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction, specifies data such that the change time of the first special symbol is fixed for 30 seconds, and the change time of the second special symbol is fixed for 10 seconds. This ensures that each time the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed, a presentation period sufficient to reliably execute the presentation indicating whether or not the door TG can be broken through can be secured.

Next, referring to FIG. 840(a), the details of the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa in this 27th control example will be described. This normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa is a data table that specifies the variation pattern table to be referenced when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the normal state, for each number of times the second special symbol changes after the normal state is set. FIG. 840(a) shows the contents of the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa.

As shown in FIG. 840(a), in the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa, as a variation pattern scenario after any of the jackpots A27 to P27 ends and the time-saving state ends, the table 202dw8 for 1 variation after the time-saving state ends is specified in association with the period in which the number of times the second special symbol is drawn after the transition to the normal state is up to 1, the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 variations after the time-saving state ends is specified in association with the period in which the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 2 to 5, and the normal table 202dw1 is specified in association with the range in which the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 6 or more. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 840(a), in the normal state (a state in which no winning has been won) set based on the pachinko machine 10 being initialized (power-on with pressing of the RAM clear switch 122 has been performed), a scenario is set in which the normal table 202dw1 is specified in association with the number of times the symbol is drawn, regardless of the number of times the symbol is drawn.

By selecting a fluctuation pattern with reference to this normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa, the fluctuation time can be made shorter than normal (600 seconds) only for the first to fifth drawings of the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends, creating a period in which the drawing of the second special symbol is likely to be performed immediately after the time-saving state ends, and a final judgment presentation can be executed. Therefore, even if the time-saving state ends, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a high expectation, is performed multiple times, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 835(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 27th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 835(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 27th control example. As shown in FIG. 835(b), the RAM 203 in this 27th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 17th control example (see FIG. 553) in that a rush type storage area 203wa, a special chart 1 change count counter 203wb, a special chart 2 change count counter 203wc, a small win flag 203we, and a winning state storage area 203wf are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the above-mentioned 17th control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

The rush type storage area 203wa is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of rush. The initial value of this rush type storage area 203wa is set to "00H", and data indicating the rush type corresponding to the current jackpot type is stored at the end of the jackpot (when the jackpot transitions) (see Y11631 in FIG. 855). More specifically, if the current rush is an S-rank rush, "01H" is stored in this rush type storage area 203wa, if it is an A-rank rush, "02H" is stored, if it is a B-rank rush, "03H" is stored, if it is a C-rank rush, "04H" is stored, if it is a D-rank rush, "05H" is stored, and if it is an E-rank rush, "06H" is stored. On the other hand, in a state other than the rush (normal state or during the execution of a jackpot game), the stored data is set to "00H". The data stored in this rush type storage area 203wa determines the rush type (type of time-saving state), and each time the lottery conditions for the first special symbol are met during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the rush type (time-saving type) can be read out and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) can be selected. This makes it possible to reliably create multiple time-saving states with different continuation rates.

The special pattern 1 variation counter 203wb is a counter for counting the number of times the first special pattern is drawn after the normal state or the time-saving state is set, and the second variation counter 203wc is a counter for counting the number of times the first special pattern is drawn after the normal state or the time-saving state is set. In the normal state, one variation pattern table is specified from the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa by referring to the values of the special pattern 1 variation counter 203wb and the special pattern 2 variation counter 203wc.

The small win flag 203we is a flag that is set to ON when the drawing of the second special symbol results in a small win (see Y8061 in FIG. 850). This small win flag 203we is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the small win of the second special symbol (see Y971 in FIG. 854). When this small win flag 203we is ON and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, if the variable display time of the second special symbol ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol with a miss pattern (see Y958 in FIG. 854). This makes it possible to prevent a malfunction in which a small win and a big win start at the same time when the drawing of the first special symbol results in a big win and the drawing of the second special symbol results in a small win. In addition, the winning state storage area 203wf is a memory area for storing data indicating the game state at the time of winning a big win.

Next, referring to FIG. 841(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 841(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 27th control example. As shown in FIG. 841(a), the ROM 222 in this 27th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 17th control example (and the 7th control example) (see FIG. 311(a)) only in that the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is deleted and a rank-up performance table 222wa and a rank-up discrimination table 222wb are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the above-mentioned 17th control example (and the 7th control example), so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

Figure 842 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the rank-up effect table 222wa described above. This rank-up effect table 222wa is a data table that specifies the number of times an effect that acquires a rank-up image RG occurs in the rank-up effect for each type of big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 842(a), the number of times that the rank-up image RG has been acquired is 5 times and is defined to correspond to the jackpot A27 (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of S rank), the number of times that the rank-up image RG has been acquired is 0 times and is defined to correspond to the jackpot B27 (a jackpot with a 4-round continuation rate of E rank), the number of times that the rank-up image RG has been acquired is 5 times and is defined to correspond to the jackpot C27, D27 (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of S rank), the jackpot E27 (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of A rank), the jackpot F27 (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of B rank), and the jackpot G27 (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of C rank), the number of times that the rank-up image RG has been acquired is 4 times and is defined to correspond to the jackpot H27 (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of D rank), and the number of times that the rank-up image RG has been acquired is 4 times and is defined to correspond to the jackpot I27 (a jackpot with a 12-round continuation rate of D rank). A number of times of acquisition is defined as 5 times in correspondence with jackpot No. 27 (8-round continuation rate A-rank jackpot), jackpot J27 (8-round continuation rate B-rank jackpot), and jackpot K27 (6-round continuation rate A-rank jackpot), a number of times of acquisition is defined as 4 times in correspondence with jackpot L27 (6-round continuation rate B-rank jackpot) and jackpot M27 (4-round continuation rate A-rank jackpot), a number of times of acquisition is defined as 3 times in correspondence with jackpot N27 (4-round continuation rate B-rank jackpot), a number of times of acquisition is defined as 2 times in correspondence with jackpot O27 (4-round continuation rate C-rank jackpot), and a number of times of acquisition is defined as 1 time in correspondence with jackpot P27 (4-round continuation rate D-rank jackpot).

In this way, by varying the number of times the rank-up image RG can be obtained depending on the type of jackpot, the presentation can be diversified, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Also, even though there are jackpot types with more than five ranks due to the rank-up presentation (for example, jackpots A27, C27, and D27 increase by eight ranks, jackpot E27 increases by seven ranks, and jackpot F27 increases by six ranks), by limiting the number of times the rank-up image RG can be obtained to five, it is made impossible to identify the type of jackpot from the number of times the rank-up image RG is obtained, and the player can play the game while paying more attention to how high each rank will increase in the rank-up presentation. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the rank-up discrimination table 222wb will be described with reference to FIG. 842(b). This rank-up discrimination table 222wb is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not a rank-up effect (see FIG. 832) can be executed in the time-saving state (rush). FIG. 842(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the rank-up discrimination table 222wb. As shown in FIG. 842(b), the rank-up discrimination table 222wb specifies a corresponding rank for each range of values of the sum (T) of the remaining time displayed (the time indicated by the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc) and the surplus time relative to the minimum guaranteed time (the time indicated by the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 842(b), an S rank is defined to correspond to a range of T equal to or greater than 850 seconds, an A rank is defined to correspond to a range of T equal to or greater than 302.3 seconds and less than 850 seconds, a B rank is defined to correspond to a range of T equal to or greater than 186.2 seconds and less than 302.3 seconds, a C rank is defined to correspond to a range of T equal to or greater than 155.3 seconds and less than 186.2 seconds, a D rank is defined to correspond to a range of T equal to or greater than 99.4 seconds and less than 155.3 seconds, and an E rank is defined to correspond to a range of T less than 99.4 seconds.

In the 27th control example, each time the second special symbol is drawn in the time-saving state, the sum (T) of the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is calculated, and the rank corresponding to the calculated time T is identified by referring to the rank-up discrimination table 222wb. If the identified rank is higher than the currently set rank, a rank-up performance (see FIG. 832) is executed. In other words, if a long variable time is selected by luck in the drawing of the first special symbol, etc., and a surplus time corresponding to a rank higher than the rank of the actually set time-saving state occurs, a performance is executed to rank up to that higher rank. By configuring in this way, the rush rank can be updated appropriately according to the player's playing situation (the selection situation of the variable time), so that the performance mode can be set appropriately. Furthermore, even if a low rank is announced, the player can expect a rank-up effect (see FIG. 832) to occur, so even if a low rank is announced in the event of a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being excessively reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 841(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 841(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 27th control example. As shown in FIG. 841(b), the RAM 223 in this 27th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 17th control example (see FIG. 558) in that a win type storage area 223wa, a rank-up count counter 223wb, a guaranteed time timer 223wc, and a surplus time storage area 223wd have been added. It also differs in that the top-up RUSH counter 223qa, the base count counter 223qb, and the top-up count counter 223qc have been deleted.

The hit type storage area 223wa is a memory area for storing information indicating the type of big win. Various information during the big win and rush is displayed according to the data stored in this hit type storage area 223wa. For example, the ranks corresponding to the data stored in this hit type storage area 223wa are reported as the bonus rank and rush rank that are finally reported in the rank-up performance. In addition, after transitioning to the time-saving state, the rush rank corresponding to the data stored in this hit type storage area 223wa is displayed.

The rank-up count counter 223wb is a counter in which a counter value indicating the remaining number of times that rank-up will occur in the rank-up effect is set. The rank-up count counter 223wb is initially set to 0, and at the start of a jackpot, the number of rank-ups corresponding to the jackpot type is identified from the rank-up effect table 222wa, and the identified number of rank-ups is set (S4761 in FIG. 859). In addition, the value is updated by subtracting 1 each time a rank-up effect is set in the rank-up effect (see S5422 in FIG. 856). By managing the number of rank-ups using the rank-up count counter 223wb, it is possible to reliably generate the number of rank-ups corresponding to the jackpot type.

The guaranteed time timer 223wc is a timer that sets the minimum guaranteed period (displayed period) until the time-saving state ends. When the first lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the time-saving state, a timer value corresponding to 49 seconds (the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 1 second x 49 times) is set in this guaranteed time timer 223wc (see S9703A in FIG. 860), and the timer value is subtracted as time passes (see S21043 in FIG. 858). In addition, when a remaining time addition effect (see FIG. 831) is executed, a timer value corresponding to the number of seconds notified by the remaining time addition effect is added.

The surplus time storage area 223wd is a storage area for storing data indicating the deviation from the guaranteed time. Here, as described above, the guaranteed time displayed first after entering the time-saving state is set to the time (49 seconds) assuming that all the lotteries of the first special symbol are set to the shortest variable time of 1 second. Therefore, if a variable time longer than 1 second is selected as the variable time of the first special symbol, the actual end timing of the time-saving state will be shifted (extended) from the guaranteed time. In this 27th control example, each time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the deviation time from the shortest variable time of 1 second is accumulated in this surplus time storage area 223wd (see S9704A in FIG. 860), and when the deviation is accumulated to a predetermined value or more, a performance in which the remaining time is added at a predetermined opportunity (remaining time addition performance) is executed. This makes it possible to realize a novel gameplay in which it is not known how long the time-saving state will last. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 27th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 27th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 843 to Fig. 855. First, details of the first special symbol variation start process 27 (Y261) in this 27th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 843. Fig. 843 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 27 (Y261) in this 27th control example. This first special symbol variation start process 27 (Y261) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see Fig. 560) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and is a process for executing a lottery for the first special symbol and starting a variable display according to the lottery result, similar to the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see Fig. 560).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process 27 (see FIG. 843) in this 27th control example, in each of the processes Y302 to Y306, the same process as each of the processes Y302 to Y306 in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in the 17th control example is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 27 (see FIG. 843) in this 27th control example, when the process of S306 is completed, the first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341) is executed instead of the first special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 561) in the 17th control example, and then the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 is executed instead of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) in the 17th control example (Y342). Next, instead of the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example), the first special symbol game state update process is executed (Y343), and this process is terminated. Details of the first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y342), and the first special symbol game state update process (Y343) will be described later with reference to FIG. 844, FIG. 845, and FIG. 846, respectively.

Next, the details of the first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 844. FIG. 844 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341). This first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 561) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and is a process for executing a jackpot determination for the first special symbol, similar to the first special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 561).

In the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844) in this 27th control example, the same processes as the Y8001-Y8006 and Y8011 processes of the first special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 561) in the 17th control example are executed in Y8001-Y8006 and Y8011 processes, respectively. Also, in the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844) in this 27th control example, if it is determined in Y8003 that the current lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot (Y8003: No), a losing symbol of the first special symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (Y8021), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 845, the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (Y342) will be described in detail. FIG. 845 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (Y342). This first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (Y342) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and is a process for selecting the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, similar to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in this 27th control example, the same processes as the Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y512 processes of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) in the 17th control example are executed in each of the Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y512 processes. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in this 27th control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time reduction is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y531), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y531: Yes), the variation pattern table corresponding to the rush type (rush rank) indicated by the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa is specified (Y532), and the process is shifted to Y512. On the other hand, in the process of Y531, if it is determined that the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time reduction is 0 (Y531: No), the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa and the value of the special chart 1 fluctuation count counter 203wb is identified (Y533), and the process proceeds to Y512.

Next, referring to FIG. 846, the above-mentioned special chart 1 game status update process (Y343) will be described in detail. FIG. 846 is a flowchart showing this special chart 1 game status update process (Y343). This special chart 1 game status update process (Y343) is a process executed in place of game status update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example), and like game status update process 12 (see FIG. 422), it is a process for determining whether the termination condition of the time-saving state has been met, and for transitioning to the normal state if the termination condition has been met.

In this special chart 1 game state update process (see FIG. 846), first, the value of the special chart 1 change count counter 203wb is updated by adding 1 (Y611), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time reduction is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y612). In the process of Y612, if it is determined that the value of the first counter 203h1 during time reduction is 0 (Y612: No), this means that the time reduction state is not in effect (it is in the normal state), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y612, if it is determined that the value of the first time-saving counter 203h1 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y612: Yes), this means that the current state is a time-saving state, so the values of the first time-saving counter 203h1 and the second time-saving counter 203h2 are updated by subtracting 1 from each other (Y613), and a remaining time-saving count command is set that indicates the updated values of the first time-saving counter 203h1 and the second time-saving counter 203h2 (Y614).

After the process of Y614 is completed, it is then determined whether or not at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 by the process of Y613 (Y615). If it is determined that the counter values have not been updated to 0 (Y615: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 in the process of Y615 (Y615: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to the normal state is set (Y616), and all data in the first time-saving counter 203h1, the second time-saving counter 203h2, and the rush type storage area 203wa are cleared to 0 (Y617). Next, the values of the special chart 1 change count counter 203wb and the special chart 2 change count counter 203wc are reset to 1 (Y618), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 847, the details of the first special symbol change stop process 27 (Y262) in this 27th control example will be described. This first special symbol change stop process 27 (Y262) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol change stop process 17 (see FIG. 565) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and, like the first special symbol change stop process 17 (see FIG. 565), is a process for setting a stop display of the first special symbol when the change time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

In the first special symbol change stop process 27 (see FIG. 847) in this 27th control example, the same processes as the Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, and Y723 to Y726 processes of the first special symbol change stop process 17 (see FIG. 565) in the 17th control example are executed in Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, and Y723 to Y726 processes, respectively. Also, in the first special symbol change stop process 27 (see FIG. 847) in this 27th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y721 that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is not on (Y721: No), a special symbol 1 determination command is set (Y732), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing to a missing symbol (Y733), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process 27 (see FIG. 847) in this 27th control example, instead of the process of Y727, a process is executed to reset the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol, the first time-saving counter 203h1, and the second time-saving counter 203h2 to their initial values (Y731), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, referring to FIG. 848, the second special symbol change start process 27 (Y263) in this 27th control example will be described in detail. This second special symbol change start process 27 (Y263) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol change start process 17 (see FIG. 567) in the 17th control example described above, and, like the second special symbol change start process 17 (see FIG. 567), is a process for executing a lottery for the second special symbol and starting a change display according to the lottery result.

In the second special symbol fluctuation start process 27 (see FIG. 848) in this 27th control example, the same processes as the Y832-Y836, Y851, and Y852 processes of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (see FIG. 567) in the 17th control example are executed in each of the Y832-Y836, Y851, and Y852 processes. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation start process 27 (see FIG. 848) in this 27th control example, when the process of S836 is completed, the second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861) is executed instead of the second special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 568) in the 17th control example, and then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 is executed instead of the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 570) in the 17th control example (Y862). Next, instead of the game status update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example), the special symbol 2 game status update process is executed (Y863), and this process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y862), and the special symbol 2 game status update process (Y863) will be described later with reference to FIG. 849, FIG. 851, and FIG. 852, respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 849, the second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861) in this 27th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 849 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861). This second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 568) in the 17th control example described above, and is a process for executing a jackpot determination for the second special symbol, similar to the second special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 568).

In the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849) in this 27th control example, the processes Y8101 to Y8106 and Y8111 are the same as the processes Y8101 to Y8106 and Y8111 in the second special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 568) in the 17th control example. In addition, in the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849) in this 27th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y8103 that the current lottery result for the second special symbol is not a big win (Y8103: No), the small win lottery process 27 for drawing a lottery for the presence or absence of a small win is executed (Y8121), and this process ends. Details of this small win lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 850.

Figure 850 is a flowchart showing the small win lottery process 27 (Y8121) in this 27th control example. In this small win lottery process 27 (Y8121), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this second special pattern is a small win or not (Y8053), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (Y8053: Yes), the small win flag 203we is set to on (Y8061). When the processing of Y8061 is completed, next, the lottery result of the second special pattern is set to a small win (Y8062), and the small win pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (Y8063), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y8053 that the result of the current lottery for the second special pattern is not a small win (a complete miss) (Y8053: No), the losing pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (Y8064), and this processing ends.

Next, the details of the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (Y862) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 851. FIG. 851 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (Y862). This second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (Y862) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 570) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, similar to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 570).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851) in this 27th control example, the same processes as the Y921-Y923 and Y925-Y928 processes of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 570) in the 17th control example are executed in each of the Y921-Y923 and Y925-Y928 processes. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851) in this 27th control example, when the process of Y923 is completed, it is then determined whether the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time reduction is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y941), and if it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y941: Yes), the variation pattern table corresponding to the rush type (rush rank) indicated by the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa is specified (Y942), and the process proceeds to Y944. On the other hand, in the process of Y941, if it is determined that the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time reduction is 0 (Y941: No), the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa and the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation count counter 203wc is identified (Y943), and the process proceeds to Y944. In the process of Y944, the fluctuation pattern table identified in the process of Y942 or Y943 is read out (Y944), and the process proceeds to Y925.

Next, referring to FIG. 852, the above-mentioned special chart 2 game status update process (Y863) will be described in detail. FIG. 852 is a flowchart showing this special chart 2 game status update process (Y863). This special chart 2 game status update process (Y863) is a process executed in place of game status update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example), and like game status update process 12 (see FIG. 422), it is a process for determining whether the termination condition for the time-saving state has been met, and for transitioning to the normal state if the termination condition has been met.

In this special chart 2 game state update process (see FIG. 852), first, the value of the special chart 2 change count counter 203wc is updated by adding 1 (Y621), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the second counter 203h1 during time reduction is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y622). In the process of Y622, if it is determined that the value of the second counter 203h2 during time reduction is 0 (Y622: No), this means that the time reduction state is not in (it is in normal state), so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y622, if it is determined that the value of the second counter 203h2 during time reduction is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y622: Yes), this means that the current state is in the time reduction state, so next, the value of the second counter 203h2 during time reduction is updated by subtracting 1 (Y623), and a remaining time reduction count command indicating the updated value of the second counter 203h2 during time reduction is set (Y624).

After the process of Y624 is completed, it is then determined whether or not at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 by the process of Y623 (Y625). If it is determined that the counter values have not been updated to 0 (Y625: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 in the process of Y625 (Y625: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to the normal state is set (Y626), and all data in the first time-saving counter 203h1, the second time-saving counter 203h2, and the rush type storage area 203wa are cleared to 0 (Y627). Next, the values of the special chart 1 change count counter 203wb and the special chart 2 change count counter 203wc are reset to 1 (Y628), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 853, the second special symbol variation stop process 27 (Y264) in this 27th control example will be described in detail. This second special symbol variation stop process 27 (Y264) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 571) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and, like the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 571), is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed.

In the second special pattern change stop processing 27 (see FIG. 853) in this 27th control example, the processing of Y1101, Y1102, Y1104, Y1105, Y1106, Y1108, Y1109, Y1110, and Y1111 is identical to the processing of Y901, Y921, Y922, Y923, Y924, Y925, Y906, Y908, and Y909 in the second special pattern change stop processing 17 (see FIG. 571) in the 17th control example. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process 27 (see FIG. 853) in this 27th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y1102 that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is not on (Y1102: No), the special symbol 2 miss stop process 27 for stopping and displaying the miss symbol of the second special symbol is executed (Y1103), and this process is terminated. Details of this special symbol 2 miss stop process 27 (Y1103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 854.

In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process 27 (see FIG. 853) in this 27th control example, instead of the process of Y925, a process is executed to reset the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol, the first counter during time reduction 203h1, and the second counter during time reduction 203h2 to their initial values (Y1107), and the process proceeds to Y1108.

Next, referring to FIG. 854, the details of the special symbol 2 miss stop processing 27 (Y1103) in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 854 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 miss stop processing 27 (Y1103). This special symbol 2 miss stop processing 27 (Y1103) is a process for setting the stop pattern when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (complete miss or small win), similar to the special symbol 2 miss stop processing (see FIG. 573) in the 17th control example described above.

In the special chart 2 miss stop processing 27 (see FIG. 854) in this 27th control example, the same processing as the processing of Y952 to Y958, Y960, and Y961 in the special chart 2 miss stop processing (see FIG. 573) in the 17th control example is executed in each of the processing of Y952 to Y958, Y960, and Y961. In addition, when the special chart 2 miss stop processing 27 (see FIG. 854) in this 27th control example is started, first, it is determined whether the small win flag 203we is on or not (Y971), and if it is determined to be on (Y971), it proceeds to the processing of Y952, while if it is determined to be off (Y971: No), it proceeds to the processing of Y960. In addition, in the special chart 2 miss stop processing 27 (see FIG. 854) in this 27th control example, when the processing of Y958 is completed, the small win flag 203we is set to off (Y972), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 855, the details of the jackpot control process 27 (Y1011) in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 855 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 27 (Y1011) in this 27th control example. This jackpot control process 27 (Y1011) is a process for executing various controls during the execution of a jackpot game, similar to the jackpot control process 12 (see FIG. 436) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example) described above.

In the jackpot control process 27 in this 27th control example (see FIG. 855), the same processes as those in Y11601 to Y11612 in the jackpot control process 12 in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example) (see FIG. 436) are executed in each of the processes Y11601 to Y11612. In addition, in the jackpot control process 27 in this 27th control example (see FIG. 855), if it is determined in the process of Y11612 that the timing for the ending presentation has ended (Y11612: Yes), then data indicating the rush type (rush rank) corresponding to the current jackpot type is stored in the rush type storage area 203wa (Y11631). In the processing of Y11631, if the current jackpot type corresponds to an S rank crash, "01H" is stored; if the current jackpot type corresponds to an A rank crash, "02H" is stored; if the current jackpot type corresponds to a B rank crash, "03H" is stored; if the current jackpot type corresponds to a C rank crash, "04H" is stored; if the current jackpot type corresponds to a D rank crash, "05H" is stored; and if the current jackpot type corresponds to an E rank crash, "06H" is stored.

When the process of Y11631 is completed, the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time-saving is set to 50, and the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time-saving is set to 100, thereby setting the first end condition (the end condition that is established when the drawing of the first special symbol is performed 50 times) and the second end condition (the end condition that is established when the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are performed a total of 100 times) as the end conditions of the time-saving state (Y11632). Next, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (Y11633), the end of the jackpot is set (Y11634), the jackpot flag 203k is set to off (Y11635), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 27th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 27th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 856 to Fig. 861. First, details of the performance update process 27 (S4161) in this 27th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 856. This performance update process 27 (S4161) is a process executed in place of the performance update process (S4111) in the 17th control example (and the 1st control example) in the main process (see Fig. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for periodically (every execution interval of the main process) updating various performance modes that are being executed.

As shown in FIG. 856, when the performance update process 27 (FIG. 856) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the rank-up count counter 223wb is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the rank-up performance is being executed) (S5411). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (i.e., 0) (S5411: No), this means that the rank-up performance is not being executed, so it is then determined whether the current game state is in a time-saving state (S5412). In the process of S5412, if it is determined that the game state is not in a time-saving state (normal state) (S5412: No), a final judgement performance process is executed to update the performance mode when a final judgement performance is being executed (S5413), and this process is terminated. Details of this final judgement performance process (S5413) will be described later with reference to FIG. 857. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5412 that the current game state is in the time-saving state (S5412: Yes), a time-saving effect setting process is executed to update the effects during the time-saving state (S5414), and this process is terminated. Details of this time-saving effect setting process (S5414) will be described later with reference to FIG. 858.

Furthermore, in the processing of S5411, if it is determined that the counter value of the rank up count counter 223wb is greater than 0 (S5411: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to generate an effect that consumes a rank up image RG (see FIG. 829 (b)) (S5415), and if it is determined that it is not the timing to generate an effect that consumes a rank up image RG (see FIG. 829 (b)) (S5415: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5415 that it is the timing to generate an effect that consumes a rank-up image RG (see FIG. 829(b)) (S5415: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the rank-up count counter 223wb is 1 (i.e., it is the timing to consume the last stocked rank-up image RG) (S5416), and if it is determined that the value of the rank-up count counter 223wb is 1 (S5416: Yes), a performance mode that ranks up to the bonus rank and rush rank corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (S5417), and processing proceeds to S5422.

On the other hand, in the process of S5416, if it is determined that the value of the rank-up counter 223wb is not 1 (S5416: No), it is determined whether one of the bonus rank and the rush rank has already been ranked up to the upper limit corresponding to the current winning type (S5418), and if it is determined that one of the ranks has already reached the upper limit (S5418: Yes), a performance mode is set to increase the rank that has not reached the upper limit by one rank (S5419), and the process proceeds to S5422. On the other hand, in the process of S5418, if it is determined that neither the bonus rank nor the rush rank has reached the upper limit (S5418: No), it is determined by lottery whether the rank to be ranked up this time will be the bonus rank or the rush rank (S5420). This lottery is configured so that the proportion determined for the bonus rank and the proportion determined for the rush rank are both 50%. This allows randomness to be added to the type of rank that is actually increased when an effect that consumes a rank-up image RG is executed, making the player feel a sense of excitement as he or she does not know which rank will be increased. This increases the player's interest in the game. When the processing of S5420 ends, a performance mode is set that increases the rank of the type determined by the processing of S5420 by one rank (S5421), and the processing proceeds to S5422. In the processing of S5422, which is executed after the completion of any of S5417, S5419, and S5421, the value of the rank-up count counter 223wb is updated by subtracting 1 (S5422), and the processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 857, the details of the above-mentioned Final Judge performance processing (S5413) will be described. When this Final Judge performance processing (S5413) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the Final Judge performance is being executed (S21031), and if it is determined that the Final Judge performance is not being executed (S21031), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S21031, if it is determined that the Final Judge performance is being executed (S21031: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command for the second special pattern has been received (S21032), and if it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S21032: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the elapsed time since the first variable display of the second special pattern in the Final Judge performance started is less than 10 seconds (S21033). In the process of S21033, if it is determined that the time elapsed since the first change of the second special symbol began is less than 10 seconds (S21033: Yes), an effect is set to stock keys in a manner according to the pre-read result indicated by the winning information command (S21034), and this process ends. In contrast, in the process of S21033, if it is determined that the time elapsed since the first change of the second special symbol began is not less than 10 seconds (more than 10 seconds have passed) (S21033: No), the process proceeds to S21035.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S21032 that the winning information command for the second special pattern has not been received (S21032: No), then it is determined whether 10 seconds have passed since the first start of the second special pattern fluctuation (S21035). If it is determined that 10 seconds have passed (S21035: Yes), the presentation mode for the remaining fluctuation time (whether to execute a presentation that succeeds in breaking through the door TG or execute a presentation that fails) is determined based on the lottery result of the currently executing fluctuation display indicated by the data in the winning information storage area 223b (S21036), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 858, the details of the time-saving effect setting process (S5414) will be described. FIG. 858 is a flowchart showing the time-saving effect setting process (S5414). When the time-saving effect setting process (S5414) is executed, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is greater than 0 (S21041), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (i.e., 0) (S21041: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S21041, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is greater than 0 (S21041: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the first special pattern is stopped and a non-fluctuation state is formed (S21042). In the process of S21042, if it is determined that the first special pattern is in a non-fluctuation state (S21042: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S21402 that the second special symbol is not in a state of being unchanged (S21042: No), the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is updated (S21043), the remaining time display until the final judgement performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated according to the updated timer value (S21044), and it is determined whether or not the updated timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc has become 0 (S21045). If it is determined in the processing of S21045 that the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc has not become 0 (S21045: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S21045 that the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc has been updated to 0 (S21045: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd indicates a number of seconds greater than 0 (S21046). If it is determined in the processing of S21046 that data indicating a number of seconds greater than 0 is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S21046: Yes), the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wd is updated by adding the surplus time indicated by the data in the surplus time storage area 223wc (S21047), a presentation mode is set in which the added surplus time is added to the display of the remaining time until the final judgment presentation (S21048), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S21046 that the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd indicates 0 seconds (S21046: No), this means that the time-saving state is ending, so the start of the final judgment performance is set (S21049) and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 859, the details of the jackpot-related process 27 (S44321) in this 27th control example will be described. This jackpot-related process 27 (S44321) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 180) in the 17th control example (and the first control example) described above, and like the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 180), is a process for executing control according to the type of command received when a jackpot-related command is received from the main control device 110.

In the jackpot-related process 27 (see FIG. 859) in this 27th control example, the same processes as those in S4701, S4709, S4710, and S4714 in the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 180) in the 17th control example (and the 1st control example) are executed in S4701, S4709, S4710, and S4714. In addition, in the jackpot-related process 27 (see FIG. 859) in this 27th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701: Yes), then the rank-up count corresponding to the current jackpot type is identified by referring to the rank-up performance table 222wa (S4761), and the identified rank-up count is set as the value of the rank-up count counter 223wb (S4762). Next, a rank-up effect (see FIG. 829(a)) in which the number of rank-up images equal to the set counter value is acquired is set (S4763), and the timing at which the effect that consumes the rank-up image RG occurs is set to a number of times according to the counter value set in the processing of S4762 (S4764), and this processing ends.

Furthermore, in the jackpot-related process 27 in this 27th control example (see FIG. 859), if it is determined in the process of S4714 that an ending command has been received (S4714: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4765) and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 860, the details of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 27 (S5101A) in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 860 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 27 (S5101A). The special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 27 (S5101A) in this 27th control example is a process executed in place of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (see FIG. 183) in the 17th control example (and the first control example), and is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command when a variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received from the main control device 110, just like the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (see FIG. 183).

As shown in FIG. 860, when the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 860) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in the time-saving state (S9701A). If it is determined that it is in the time-saving state (S9701A: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the first time that the first special symbol is changing in the time-saving state (S9702A). If it is determined in the process of S9702A that it is the first time that the first special symbol is changing (S9702A: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 49 seconds is set for the guaranteed time timer 223wc (S9703A), and the process proceeds to S9704A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9702A that it is not the first time that the first special symbol is changing (S9702A: No), the process of S9703A is skipped and the process proceeds to S9704A.

In the process of S9704A, the time obtained by subtracting 1 second from the current variable time is added to the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd to update it (S9704A), and the process proceeds to S9705A. On the other hand, in the process of S9701A, if it is determined that the current game state is not a time-saving state (it is a normal state) (S9701A: No), the processes of S9702A to S9704A are skipped and the process proceeds to S9705A.

In the process of S9705A, the presentation mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9705A), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S9706A), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 861, the details of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 27 (S5201A) in this 27th control example will be described. FIG. 861 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 27 (S5201A). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 27 (S5201A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (see FIG. 184) in the above-mentioned 17th control example (and the first control example), and, like the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (see FIG. 184), is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command when a variation pattern command for the second special symbol is received from the main control device 110.

When this special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S9621A), and if it is determined that it is in the time-saving state (S9621A: Yes), it is then determined whether the result of the current lottery for the second special symbol is a complete miss (neither a big win nor a small win) (S9641A). If it is determined in the process of S9621A that the current game state is not in the time-saving state (it is in the normal state) (S9621A: No), and if it is determined in the process of S9641A that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is not a complete miss (it is a big win or a small win) (S9641A: No), the presentation mode according to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9622A), and the process proceeds to S9611.

On the other hand, if the process of S9641A determines that the lottery result for the second special symbol is a complete miss (S9641A: Yes), the data specified in the rank-up determination table 222wb (see FIG. 842(b)) is referenced to identify the rank corresponding to the sum (T) of the time indicated by the current timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9642A). Next, it is determined whether the rank identified in the process of S9642A is a rank higher than the currently set rank (S9643A), and if it is determined that a rank higher than the currently set rank has been identified (S9643A: Yes), a presentation mode involving a rank-up presentation to the identified rank is determined (S9644A), and the process proceeds to S9611.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S9643A that a rank equal to or lower than the current rank has been specified (S9643A: No), it is determined whether data indicating a remaining time of 10 seconds or more is stored in the remaining time storage area 223wd (S9645A). If it is determined in the processing of S9645A that data indicating a remaining time of 10 seconds or more is stored (S9645A: Yes), the time to be added by the remaining time addition performance is determined by lottery (S9646A), the performance mode according to the result of the determination is determined (S9647A), the added time is added to the guaranteed time timer 223wc and subtracted from the remaining time storage area 223wd (S9648A), and the processing proceeds to S9611. In the process of S9646A, the percentage at which it is decided not to execute the remaining time addition effect (the added time is decided to be 0 seconds) is set to 75%, and for the remaining 25%, seconds that are multiples of 10 within the range of the remaining time are evenly allocated. For example, if the remaining time is 45 seconds, the remaining time addition effect is not executed 75% of the time, 10 seconds are added 6.25% of the time, 20 seconds are added 6.25% of the time, 30 seconds are added 6.25% of the time, and 40 seconds are added 6.25% of the time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9645A that data indicating a surplus time of less than 10 seconds is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9645A: No), the processing of S9646A to S9648A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9611. In the processing of S9611, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9611), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th control example, the selection frequency (the tendency of the selected variable time) of the first special symbol is varied according to the setting trigger of the time-saving state (the type of big win), so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn before the time-saving state ends is varied. More specifically, the selection rate of each variable time when the first special symbol is not selected is varied by varying the variable pattern table referred to during the time-saving state for each type of rush (the type of big win that triggered the setting of the time-saving state), and the average time until the time-saving state ends (the first end condition is established by drawing the first special symbol 50 times) is varied for each type of rush. In other words, the average number of times the second special symbol can be drawn before the end of the rush (the time-saving state) is varied for each type of rush, so that the rate of winning some kind of win (big win or small win) again before the final judgement performance ends (rush continuation rate) is varied for each type of rush. This allows multiple rushes with different performances to be realized, and the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of rush. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the 27th control example, the small prize can only be won by drawing the second special symbol, and similarly to the 17th control example described above, if a small prize is won and the player continues to hit the right during the small prize game, a V prize is generated and a big prize game can be played. In other words, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the big prize is essentially confirmed not only when the big prize is won, but also when the small prize is won. In the 27th control example, in the normal state, an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set when the drawing of the second special symbol is basically performed, so that the drawing of the second special symbol is difficult to perform, while the fluctuation time is shortened only for the drawing of the second special symbol a specific number of times after the time-saving state ends. This ensures a specific number of opportunities to draw the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends.

Here, conventionally, gaming machines that employ a control scheme in which a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol having a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) with different degrees of advantage are provided, and while the drawing of the unfavorable first special symbol is more likely to be executed during an unfavorable gaming state (the start winning of the second special symbol is less likely to occur), when the gaming state transitions to a favorable gaming state, the drawing of the favorable second special symbol is more likely to be executed (the start winning of the second special symbol is more likely to occur) is more likely. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are also those that execute a performance that prompts the start winning of the second special symbol having a higher degree of advantage during the execution of the final variable display in the favorable gaming state, thereby accumulating reserved balls for the second special symbol, and execute a performance that notifies whether or not the lottery result of the last lottery for the second special symbol in the favorable gaming state and the lottery result of the reserved balls for the second special symbol include a lottery result corresponding to a win. However, when a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) as in the 27th control example is adopted, there is a possibility that the drawing of the first special symbol will be executed multiple times while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in a favorable gaming state, or that the drawing of the first special symbol will not be executed at all while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. For example, when there is only one time left in the time-saving mode when the drawing of the second special symbol starts, even if it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol is highly likely to be the last in the favorable gaming state and an effect of saving reserved balls for the second special symbol is executed, However, the drawing of the first special pattern may not be executed during the display of the second special pattern variation, and the time-saving state may continue until the next drawing of the second special pattern. Conversely, for example, even if a performance to accumulate reserved balls is not executed because there are a relatively large number of time-saving times remaining at the start of the drawing of the second special pattern (e.g., 8 times), the first special pattern may frequently change during the display of the second special pattern variation, and the advantageous game state may end before the display of the second special pattern variation ends, which may make it difficult to execute the performance to accumulate reserved balls for the second special pattern at the appropriate time.

In contrast, in the 27th control example, the second ball entry port 640, which is the starting entry port that triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, is configured as a starting entry port that allows the game ball to enter easily by simply hitting to the right regardless of the game state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is basically controlled to be set to an extremely long time in the normal state, thereby suppressing the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol in the normal state, while shortening the variation time only for the drawing of the second special symbol a specific number of times after the advantageous time-saving state ends, making it possible to execute an effect of storing reserved balls in the display of the variation of the second special symbol executed immediately after the time-saving state ends. By configuring in this way, the effect of storing reserved balls can be executed reliably, and a series of effects indicating whether or not there is a winning combination in the drawing of the second special symbol that is being executed and is on hold can also be executed more reliably, so that the performance mode can be set appropriately.

In addition, in this 27th control example, when a player is lucky enough to have many long variable times selected during the time-saving state, and there is a large margin of error in the average time until the end of the time-saving period corresponding to the set rush type (rank), a rank-up effect can be executed to raise the rush rank. This allows the player to play in the hope of a rank-up occurring during the rush, even if a low rush rank is announced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 27th control example, the rank-up effect that notifies the number of rounds of the jackpot (bonus rank) and the advantageous degree of the time-saving state after the jackpot end (rush rank) is configured to be executed during the opening period of the jackpot, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed during the execution of the round game of the jackpot, or during the interval period. Also, the notification of the bonus rank and the rush rank do not necessarily have to be notified together in one rank-up effect, and may be configured to be notified in separate effects. More specifically, for example, the bonus rank (number of rounds of the jackpot) may be configured to be notified at any timing up to the 4th round of the jackpot, and the rush rank (continuation rate of the time-saving state) may be configured to be notified during the ending period of the jackpot or during the variable display effect related to the drawing of the second special pattern a specific number of times (for example, the first or fifth time) after the transition to the time-saving state (rush).

In the 27th control example, the bonus rank and rush rank corresponding to the jackpot pattern are always notified by the rank-up effect, but a rank lower than the actual rank may be notified at a predetermined rate. If a rank lower than the actual rank is notified in the rank-up effect, a performance in which the rank is increased to the actual rank may be executed at a predetermined notification timing. Specifically, for example, as the predetermined notification timing, if the bonus rank is notified low in the rank-up effect, a performance in which the rank is increased to the actual rank may be generated in the final round corresponding to the notified rank (eighth round for B rank, sixth round for C rank, fourth round for D rank). Also, for example, if the rush rank is notified low in the rank-up effect, a performance in which the rank is increased to the actual rank may be generated during the final round of the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot, or the variable display period of the second special pattern for a specific number of times (for example, the first time) after the end of the jackpot. By configuring it this way, even if a low rank is announced in the rank-up presentation, the player can expect a further rank-up to occur in the future, which can increase the player's interest in the game and diversify the presentation format.

In the 27th control example, the table 202dw8 for 1 change after the time-saving end (see FIG. 839(b)) is referenced only from the time-saving end until the first drawing of the second special symbol is performed, and the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 changes after the time-saving end is referenced only from the time-saving end until the second to fifth drawings of the second special symbol are performed, but this is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition to this, the table 202dw8 for 1 change after the time-saving end (see FIG. 839(b)) and the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 changes after the time-saving end may be referenced even when a specific condition is met in the normal state. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a small prize of an operation pattern in which a V prize cannot occur with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/100) in a lottery for the first special symbol (or in which a V prize is less likely to occur than a small prize of the second special symbol) is won, and a fluctuation pattern scenario that refers to one or both of the table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the time reduction ends (see FIG. 839(b)) and the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the time reduction ends is reset to a final judgment effect or an effect similar to the final judgment effect (an effect that includes at least an effect that encourages the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right) may be executed, in other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a state in which a lottery for a favorable second special symbol can be executed a predetermined number of times when a small prize is won in a normal state is temporarily formed. By configuring in this way, in addition to winning a jackpot in the normal state, the player can play in the hope of winning a small jackpot, so that the game in the unfavorable normal state does not become monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as a specific condition, for example, based on the fact that a specific number of times (for example, 500 times) of special symbol drawings have been performed without winning a jackpot since the normal state was set, a state may be formed in which one or both of the table 202dw8 for 1 change after the time reduction ends (see FIG. 839(b)) and the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 changes after the time reduction ends are referenced, and a final judgment effect or an effect similar to the final judgment effect (an effect including at least an effect mode that encourages the player to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right) are executed. By configuring in this way, even if the number of times of drawing special symbols increases without winning a jackpot, the player can play with the aim of reaching the specific number of times, so that the player's motivation for playing can be suppressed from decreasing.

In the 27th control example, when setting a variable display effect according to the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving state, the sum (T) of the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc (the time remaining until the end of the time-saving state on the display) and the time indicated by the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd (the time indicating the deviation from the minimum guaranteed time (the time remaining until the end of the time-saving state when all the lotteries for the first special symbol are set to one second)) is calculated, and the rank corresponding to the calculated time T is identified by referring to the rank-up discrimination table 222wb, and if the identified rank (the actual rank taking into account the selection status of the variable time of the first special symbol in the time-saving state) is higher than the currently set rank, a rank-up effect is executed to increase the identified rank, but the method of identifying the rank is not limited to this. For example, the actual rank may be identified taking into account the time already consumed, and the possibility of executing the rank-up effect may be determined. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to identify a higher rank when determining the actual rank, so that the frequency of occurrence of the rank-up effect can be increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to these, the lottery result of the newly started variable display of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the reserved first and second special symbols may also be taken into consideration to determine whether or not the rank-up performance can be executed. More specifically, for example, when a jackpot is included in the lottery result corresponding to the newly started variable display of the second special symbol or the lottery result of the reserved first and second special symbols, the rank-up performance may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 1/4 rate). By configuring in this way, the run-up performance not only suggests to the player that the possibility of winning a jackpot again by the time the rush ends (the final judgement performance ends), but also makes the player expect that he or she will win a jackpot before the reserved balls are consumed, so that the player can pay more attention to the performance mode and play the game until the reserved balls are consumed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, when a rank-up effect is executed as an effect to notify that a jackpot will occur before all reserved balls are consumed, control may be performed so that a rank-up of multiple stages occurs more easily. By configuring in this way, when a rank-up of multiple stages is notified, the player can have a stronger sense of anticipation of a jackpot. Also, even if a jackpot is not achieved, the fact remains that the rank (continuation rate) has increased, so that the player is less likely to feel disappointed even if he or she does not win a jackpot.

In the 27th control example, a common number of time-saving times (50 times for drawing the first special pattern, or a total of 100 times for drawing the special pattern) is set as the number of time-saving times regardless of the type of time-saving state, but the number of time-saving times does not necessarily have to be common. A configuration may be used in which one or both of the number of times for drawing the first special pattern and the total number of times for drawing the special pattern are different types of time-saving states are provided. By increasing the number of times for drawing the first special pattern, the time until the time-saving state ends is extended even for a low rank, and the number of times for drawing the second special pattern increases, so that the possibility of a jackpot can be increased. Conversely, by decreasing the number of times for drawing the first special pattern, the possibility of a jackpot can be decreased. The same applies to the total number of times for drawing the first special pattern and the second special pattern; by increasing the number of times, the possibility of a jackpot can be increased, while by decreasing the number of times, the possibility of a jackpot can be decreased.

In the 27th control example, when the occurrence of rank up is notified in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 832), the rank up to the corresponding rank is notified in the variable display effect of one second special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, when multiple stages of rank up are notified, the rank up may be notified in stages (for example, one stage per change) across multiple variable display effects of the second special pattern. By configuring in this way, the expectation of rising to a higher rank can be continuously held across multiple variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, when notifying in stages, it is not necessary to notify the rank across multiple changes, and a configuration may be used to execute an effect of gradually increasing the rank within one change. Specifically, for example, after executing an effect in which the rank up image RG is split in half and a rank up icon RRG indicating a rank up to a rank lower than the original rank appears, an effect is executed in which the rank up icon RRG is split in half and a rank up icon RRG indicating a higher rank appears. Thereafter, until an actual rank-up is announced, a rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank higher than the rank indicated by the previously appeared rank-up icon RRG may be repeatedly displayed from among the previously appeared rank-up icons RRG, thereby gradually announcing the rank. By configuring in this way, the player can be continuously excited about rising to a higher rank, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 27th control example, in the continuation rate increase performance (see FIG. 832), the rank increase number (rank up number) is notified by the type of rank up icon RRG (written characters) that appears when the rank up image RG is split in half, but this is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, the display mode of the rank up image RG (for example, color, size, etc.), the way the rank up image RG is split, etc. may be configured to suggest the type of the rank up icon RRG that appears. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a white rank up image RG, a red rank up image, and a red rank up image larger than normal are provided as types of rank up images RG, and when a red rank up image is stopped and displayed, it is more likely that a rank up of multiple stages will be notified than when a white rank up image RG is stopped and displayed. Also, a red rank up image larger than normal may be configured to be selected only when a rank up of multiple stages is notified. Furthermore, in addition to breaking in half, the rank-up image RG may also be broken into four pieces or shattered into pieces, with the possibility of a rank-up of multiple stages being notified in the case of a break into four pieces being higher than in the case of a break in half. Also, the rank-up to A rank or higher may be confirmed in the case of a break into pieces. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the type of rank-up icon RRG but also to the presentation mode before the rank-up icon RRG appears, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 27th control example, even after the time-saving state ends and the state transitions to the normal state, during the first variable display effect of the second special symbol, the character displayed in the display area HR3 (the character "Hit to the right to collect keys!") is configured to prompt the player to make a right hit, just like in the time-saving state, but the presentation mode for making the player play the same as in the time-saving state is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, a presentation may be executed that prompts the player to make a right hit by audio, or a display that prompts the player to make a right hit may be set in the small display area Dm2, just like in the time-saving state. In addition, when a display that prompts the player to make a right hit is set in the small display area Dm2, the same display as in the time-saving state (the character "Hit to the right") may be displayed, or the display mode may be different between the time-saving state and the normal state (for example, an image that resembles an arrow pointing to the right may be displayed in the normal state).

<Modification of the 27th control example>
Next, various modified examples in which the time-saving symbol winning (a lottery result of a special symbol that gives a time-saving state without a big win) is combined with the above-mentioned 27th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 904 to Fig. 910. First, a first modified example in which only the lottery result of the time-saving symbol winning is simply added to the above-mentioned 27th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 904.

<First Modification of the Twenty-Seventh Control Example>
In the case of simply adding the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol to the 27th control example, even if the time-saving symbol is won and a right hit is performed, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the normal symbol lottery is low, so the electric accessory 64ra is hardly opened, and a state is formed in which the game ball can hardly enter the right first ball entrance 64r. In such a situation, when the time-saving state fluctuation pattern table (any of the S rank table 202dw2 to the E rank table 202dw7) is referenced and a fluctuation pattern is selected, a relatively short fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set each time the second special symbol is drawn, so that an extremely advantageous game state in which only the second special symbol is drawn by right hitting is formed. If the end condition of the time-saving state based on the winning of the time-saving symbol is set to the same end condition as the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot (the first special symbol is drawn 50 times or the special symbol is drawn 100 times), an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the rate of winning the jackpot is equal to or higher than the S-rank crash. In addition, since there are almost no winnings of normal symbols, it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the right first ball entrance 64r, and the prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64r can hardly be obtained, so the degree of advantage in terms of the number of prize balls paid out is lower than that of the time-saving state.

904(a) is a diagram showing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a time-saving symbol win occurs during the normal state in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 904(a), when a time-saving symbol win occurs during the normal state, a display mode is set in which the adventurer character 801 stands in the center of the main display area Dm with the surroundings lit up (aura-covered), and the words "Bonus preparation in progress" are displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, the words "Preparation state" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that they should hit the right and that a big win is near (they are in the preparation stage for winning a big win). As mentioned above, the probability of winning some kind of win (small win or big win) in the lottery for the second special symbol is 11/200, so there is a probability of winning a big win within the number of time-saving times based on the time-saving symbol win of over 99%.

Figure 904(b) is a diagram showing the display mode when a time-saving symbol win occurs in the time-saving state in this modified example. As shown in Figure 904(b), when a time-saving symbol win occurs, a rank-up effect occurs, and an effect of ranking up to extra rank (EX RANK) is executed. By executing this effect of ranking up to extra rank, the player can easily understand that they have moved to a time-saving state where the possibility of winning a jackpot is extremely high. In addition, by naming the extra rank differently from any of S rank to E rank, even if the electric role 64ra is hardly opened by hitting right, the player can be convinced that this is due to a transition to a special state called extra rank. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful.

<Second Modification of the Twenty-Seventh Control Example>
Next, referring to Fig. 905 to Fig. 910, a second modified example in which a time-saving symbol winning is combined with the 27th control example will be described. In the second modified example, as in the above-mentioned 17th control example, a time-saving symbol winning is combined with a time-saving symbol winning in a form including a control that makes the probability of a normal symbol winning approximately the same in the low probability state of a normal symbol and the time-saving state of a normal symbol so that the time-saving performance is approximately the same in the time-saving state set when a time-saving symbol winning occurs and the time-saving state set after the end of a big win. In this case, by configuring the time-saving symbol to be set with reference to the S rank table 202dw2 to the E rank table 202dw7 as the type of the time-saving symbol, it is possible to realize a game in which the performance of the time-saving symbol (rush rank) is switched midway in the time-saving state. Specifically, for example, if a time-saving symbol win occurs during a B-rank rush, which sets a time-saving state with reference to the A-rank table 202dw3, the rank of the time-saving state (rush) increases and the number of time-saving times is reset (the number of time-saving times related to the time-saving symbol win is reset), which is advantageous for the player. Also, for example, if a time-saving symbol win occurs during a B-rank rush, which sets a time-saving state with reference to the D-rank table 202dw5, the rank of the time-saving state (rush) decreases, but the number of time-saving times is reset, which may be advantageous for the player if the time-saving state is about to end.

First, the performance mode in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 905. FIG. 905 is a diagram showing the performance mode when a time-saving pattern win occurs in the time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 905(a), when a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state, a variable display performance is executed in which a reset pattern with the character "RESET" is stopped as a medium pattern, and the character "Reset occurred!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Then, as shown in FIG. 905(b), in the main display area Dm, the reset pattern is enlarged and the reset of the time-saving state is notified, and the remaining time until the final judgement displayed in the display area Dm is reset to 49 seconds (the state immediately after the end of the jackpot). Furthermore, the rush rank displayed in the small display area Dm3 is updated to "? RANK", and the continuation rate displayed in the small display area Ds2 is updated to the notation "continuation rate ??% over". These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time-saving state, including the rank, has been reset. Note that this state in which the rank and continuation rate are concealed by the "?" symbol will continue until the rank notification effect, which will be described later, is executed. Hereafter, for simplicity of explanation, the state in which the rank and continuation rate are concealed, which are set based on the winning time-saving symbol, will be referred to as the "concealed state."

Figure 906 is a diagram showing the presentation mode of the rank notification presentation for notifying the rank of the time-saving state set (reset) based on the winning of the time-saving pattern, which is performed when a predetermined execution lottery is won in the concealed state. As shown in Figure 906 (a), when the rank notification presentation is performed in the concealed state, first, as a variable display presentation of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the second special pattern, a variable display presentation is performed in which a rank notification pattern with the characters "? RANK" is stopped and displayed as a middle pattern. Then, as shown in Figure 906 (b), a presentation is performed in which the stopped and displayed middle pattern (rank notification pattern) is split in half, and a rank notification image (rank up icon) RRG with characters corresponding to the rank set based on the winning of the time-saving pattern appears. In addition, a presentation is performed in which the display contents of the small display area Dm3 and the small display area Ds2 are updated according to the rank notified by the rank notification image RRG. In the example of FIG. 906(b), the rank of the time-saving state that is set (reset) based on the winning of the time-saving pattern is A rank, and a notification image RRG with the letters "A RANK" appears, the rush rank displayed in the small display area Dm3 is updated to "A RANK", and the continuation rate displayed in the small display area Ds2 is updated to "continuation rate 89% over", which corresponds to an A rank rush.

The rank notification effect is configured to occur only in the secret state, which is set when the time-saving state is reset to a rank equal to or higher than the rank set when the time-saving symbol was won, and is configured to prohibit (restrict) the execution of the rank notification effect if the rank is reset to a lower rank due to the time-saving symbol being won. By configuring it in this way, if the player's rank drops to a lower rank due to the time-saving symbol being won, this fact can be kept secret from the player, preventing the player from being disappointed.

<Electrical configuration in the second modified example of the 27th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 907, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. Fig. 907 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this modification. As shown in Fig. 907, the RAM 223 in this modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 27th control example (see Fig. 841) in that a rush rank storage area 223we, a previous rank storage area 223wf, and a rank concealment flag 223wg are added.

The rush rank storage area 223we is a memory area for storing information indicating the rank of the currently set time-saving state (rush), and the previous rank storage area 223wf is a memory area for storing information indicating the rank of the time-saving state that was set before the time-saving pattern was won when a time-saving pattern was won in the time-saving state. The rank concealment flag 223wg is a flag that indicates whether or not the state is concealed and is set based on the time-saving pattern being won; if it is on, it means that the state is concealed, and if it is off, it means that the state is not concealed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second modified example of the 27th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 908 to Fig. 910. First, details of the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27A (S5201A) in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 908. This special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27A (S5201A) is a process executed in place of the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27 (see Fig. 861) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and is a process for setting a variable display mode according to the lottery result of the second special pattern, similar to the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27 (see Fig. 861). Fig. 908 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27A (S5201A).

In the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27A (see FIG. 908) in this second modified example, the same processes as the S9611, S9621A, S9622A, and S9641A processes of the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861) in the above-mentioned 27th control example are executed in the S9641A process. In addition, in the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process 27A (see FIG. 908) in this modified example, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special pattern is not a complete miss (S9641A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special pattern is a time-saving pattern win (S9671A), and if it is determined that the time-saving pattern is not a win (S9671A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.

On the other hand, in the process of S9671A, if it is determined that the current lottery result for the second special symbol is a winning time-saving symbol (S9671A: Yes), the presentation mode of the variable display presentation accompanied by the reset presentation is identified (S9672A). Next, the data in the rush rank storage area 223we is overwritten in the previous rank storage area 223wf, and data indicating the rush rank corresponding to the winning time-saving symbol is stored in the rush rank storage area 223we (S9673A), the rank concealment flag 223wg is set to ON (S9674A), and this process ends.

In addition, in the special symbol 2 performance mode setting process 27A (see FIG. 908) in this modified example, if it is determined in the process of S9641A that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a complete miss (S9641A: Yes), then it is determined whether the rank concealment flag 223wg is on or not (S9675A), and if it is determined that the rank concealment flag 223wg is on (S9675A: Yes), a concealment performance setting process for setting the variable display mode during the concealment state is executed (S9676A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9675A that the rank concealment flag 223wg is off (S9675A: No), a non-concealment performance setting process is executed (S9677A), and the process proceeds to S9611. Details of the concealed performance setting process (S9676A) and the non-concealed performance setting process (S9677A) are described with reference to Figures 909 and 910, respectively.

Next, the details of the concealed performance setting process (S9676A) will be described with reference to FIG. 909. FIG. 909 is a flowchart showing the concealed performance setting process (S9676A). In this concealed performance setting process (S9676A), first, the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is referenced to determine whether there is 10 seconds or more of surplus time (S9681A), and if it is determined that there is 10 seconds or more of surplus time (S9681A: Yes), a variable display mode with an additional performance that adds a time of the surplus time rounded down to less than 10 seconds is determined (S9682A), and this process ends.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S9681A that there is not 10 seconds or more of remaining time (S9681A: No), the data in the rush rank storage area 223we is compared with the data in the previous rank storage area 223wf to determine whether the rush rank before the time-saving state was reset (the time-saving symbol was won) was higher than the currently set rank (S9683A). If it is determined in the processing of S9683A that the rush rank before the time-saving state was reset (the time-saving symbol was won) was higher than the currently set rank (S9683A: Yes), the execution of the rank notification effect is not performed by lottery, and the performance mode according to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9684A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9683A that the rush rank before the time-saving state was reset (the time-saving symbol was won) was equal to or lower than the currently set rank (S9683A: No), a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the rank notification effect (S9685A). This lottery is configured to determine whether or not to execute the rank notification effect with a probability of 1/20. For this reason, even if the rank notification effect is not executed in multiple variable displays of the second special symbol, the player can be led to believe that this was simply because the player missed the lottery and that the player's rank has not been lowered. This makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

When the processing of S9685A is completed, it is then determined whether the lottery result corresponds to the execution of a rank notification effect (S9686A), and if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of a rank notification effect (S9686A: Yes), a variable display mode accompanied by a rank notification effect that notifies the current rank is determined (S9687A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9686A that the lottery result does not correspond to the execution of a rank notification effect (S9686A: No), processing proceeds to S9684A.

Next, referring to FIG. 910, the details of the non-hidden performance setting process (S9677A) will be described. FIG. 910 is a flowchart showing this non-hidden performance setting process (S9677A). In this non-hidden performance setting process (S9677A), first, by referring to the data specified in the rank-up determination table 222wb (see FIG. 842 (b)), a rank corresponding to the sum (T) of the time indicated by the timer value of the current guaranteed time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd is identified (S9691A). Next, it is determined whether the rank identified in the process of S9691A is a rank higher than the currently set rank (S9692A), and if it is determined that a rank higher than the currently set rank has been identified (S9692A: Yes), a performance mode with a rank-up performance to the identified rank is determined (S9697A), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9692A that a rank equal to or lower than the current rank has been specified (S9692A: No), it is determined whether data indicating a remaining time of 10 seconds or more is stored in the remaining time storage area 223wd (S9693A). If it is determined in the process of S9693A that data indicating a remaining time of 10 seconds or more is stored (S9693A: Yes), the time to be added by the remaining time addition performance is determined by lottery (S9694A), the performance mode according to the determination result is determined (S9695A), the added time is added to the guaranteed time timer 223wc and subtracted from the remaining time storage area 223wd (S9696A), and this process is terminated. In the process of S9694A, the proportion of the remaining time addition performance that is determined not to be executed (the added time is determined to be 0 seconds) is set to 75%, and the remaining 25% is evenly allocated to a multiple of 10 seconds in the range equal to or lower than the remaining time. For example, if the remaining time is 45 seconds, the remaining time addition effect is not executed 75% of the time, 10 seconds are added 6.25% of the time, 20 seconds are added 6.25% of the time, 30 seconds are added 6.25% of the time, and 40 seconds are added 6.25% of the time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9693A that data indicating a surplus time of less than 10 seconds is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9693A: No), the processing of S9694A to S9696A is skipped and this processing is terminated.

As in this second modified example, by adding the specification of a time-saving symbol winning to the star of the 27th control example, it is possible to create a situation in which the rush rank is updated in the time-saving state. Therefore, when a time-saving symbol winning occurs, it is possible to realize a more innovative gameplay that gives the player hope that the rush rank will increase.

<28th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 862 to Fig. 882. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th control example described above, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are configured to be executable simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification), and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn before the end of the time-saving state is varied by varying the lottery frequency (the tendency of the selected variable time) of the first special symbol according to the setting trigger (type of jackpot) of the time-saving state. In addition, only two types of game states, a normal state and a time-saving state, are provided, and a specification is adopted in which a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol or a small jackpot is won by a V prize.

In contrast, in the 28th control example, the simultaneous variation specification is assumed, and in addition to the normal state and the time-saving state, a probability-changing state is provided in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the drawing of a special symbol increases and the electric role 640a is more likely to be opened in the same way as in the time-saving state, and a specification is adopted in which the trigger for a jackpot is only when a jackpot is won in the drawing of a special symbol. In addition, in the above-mentioned 27th control example, while a jackpot variation of one special symbol is being executed, it was permitted to win a jackpot in the drawing of the other special symbol, but in this 28th control example, a control is adopted in which, at the time when a jackpot variation of one special symbol is won, it is prohibited (suppressed) to win a jackpot in the drawing of the other special symbol. In other words, a specification is adopted in which, during a jackpot variation of one, the drawing of the other special symbol is confirmed to be a miss (including a small win). Furthermore, in this 28th control example, the probability that the most favorable variable state will be set is low when the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot, while the probability that the most favorable variable state will be set is high when the second special symbol is selected as a jackpot. This adopts a specification that makes it possible to more strongly expect a jackpot when the second special symbol is selected as a jackpot.

Based on the above specifications, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 28th control example has a board configuration in which a game ball can enter both the starting winning hole (right first ball entry hole 64r) which is the lottery trigger for the first special symbol and the starting winning hole (second ball entry hole 640) which is the lottery trigger for the second special symbol when a right hit is made in the time-saving state or the probability of winning, and has realized a gameplay that strongly expects not to win the big prize in the lottery for the first special symbol in the probability of winning. Furthermore, in the 28th control example, it is configured so that in some cases where the lottery for the second special symbol is a miss, a small prize will be awarded. Unlike the small prize in the 27th control example, etc., this small prize is the lottery result that only opens the variable prize-winning device 1065 that is opened in the big prize game for a short time (there is no possibility of winning the big prize in the small prize game), so basically, even if it is won, it does not contribute to the player's advantage in any way. However, when a small win is won and the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, the control is executed to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol as a miss symbol, in the same way as when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed, so that it is possible to realize a game that is advantageous to the player by winning a small win during the big win fluctuation of the unfavorable first special symbol. In other words, when a normal big win that does not give the big win state is won by the drawing of the first special symbol in the big win state and a big win fluctuation is executed, an unfavorable state is formed that is likely to end the big win state. During this unfavorable big win fluctuation of the first special symbol, if a small win is won by the drawing of the second special symbol and the small win fluctuation ends first, the first special symbol being displayed during the fluctuation can be forcibly stopped as a miss symbol, and the big win of the unfavorable first special symbol can be treated as if it did not exist, and the big win state can be continued. Therefore, by winning a small jackpot that does not essentially contribute to the player's advantage under certain conditions (during the high probability state and during the high probability state of the first special symbol), it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that can avoid the occurrence of an extremely unfavorable situation for the player (a situation in which the high probability state ends), thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 27th control example, when subtracting the number of time-saving times, the subtraction process is uniformly executed at the start of the fluctuation. In contrast to this, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 28th control example, the subtraction process is basically executed when the fluctuation stops, and the subtraction process is executed at the start of the fluctuation only for the last fluctuation display in the time-saving state. In addition, in a case where one special pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning (big win or small win) pattern, and the other special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing pattern, the subtraction process of the number of time-saving times is avoided at the timing of the forced stop display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the loss of one time of the time-saving times due to a fluctuation display that is forcibly changed to a losing (i.e., equivalent to no winning) and therefore it is possible to more appropriately subtract the number of time-saving times.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 28th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th control example described above in that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 27th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the surface configuration of the game board 13 in this 28th control example will be described with reference to Figure 862. Figure 862 is a front view of the game board 13 in this 28th control example. As shown in Figure 862, the game board 13 in this 28th control example differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the above-mentioned 27th control example (see Figure 828) in that the arrangement of the right first ball inlet 64r and the second ball inlet 640 is reversed (the right first ball inlet 64r is provided downstream of the second ball inlet 640), an electric device 640a capable of opening and closing the second ball inlet 640 is provided in association with the second ball inlet 640, the electric device 64ra that was provided in association with the right first ball inlet 64r in the 27th control example has been deleted, and a retractable member 64rb is provided directly above the right first ball inlet 64, which is capable of appearing and retracting at a predetermined cycle while the power is applied to the pachinko machine 10. The retractable member 64rb prevents game balls from entering the right first ball entrance 64r by displacing to a protruding position protruding toward the front side when viewed from the front, and creates a state in which game balls can enter the right first ball entrance 64r by sinking into the game board 13. The length of the period of displacement and the period of displacement of the retractable member 64rb to the sinking position are determined so that, for example, in a game state (time-saving state or probability-changing state) in which a time-saving state of a normal pattern is set, game balls shot by right-handed hitting enter the right first ball entrance 64r at a rate of about 1 in 25. In other words, the period of displacement and the period of displacement of the retractable member 64rb to the sinking position are determined so that the frequency of drawing the first special pattern is higher when hitting left than when hitting right in the normal state, and the reserved balls of the first special pattern are less likely to become 0 in the time-saving state or probability-changing state in which a time-saving state of a normal pattern is set. This allows the first special symbol to be drawn relatively frequently in the time-saving or probability-change state while preventing irregular play methods such as hitting the right side in the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 862, the game board 13 in this 28th control example is different in that the variable winning device 1065 and the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 in the above-mentioned 27th control example are deleted, and the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 in the first control example and the like is provided. This is because, like the first control example and the like, this 28th control example adopts a specification in which a probability variable state is granted after the end of a jackpot game by a game ball entering a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in this 28th control example, if a small jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special pattern, the variable winning device 65 opens and closes for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds). For this reason, it is configured so that it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball in a small jackpot game. In addition, in a small jackpot game (and a normal jackpot), the game ball is controlled to be difficult (impossible) to pass through the specific area.

Next, referring to FIG. 863 and FIG. 864, the characteristic presentation mode in this 28th control example will be described. First, FIG. 863(a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the most advantageous probability state is entered in this 28th control example. In the probability state, as in the time-saving state in the above-mentioned 27th control example, a variable display presentation of the third pattern is executed in the main display area Dm to show the lottery result of the second special pattern, and a variable display presentation of the third pattern is executed in a relatively narrow display area (small display area Dm8a) in the lower right of the main display area Dm to show the lottery result of the first special pattern. In this 28th control example, a specification is adopted in which once the probability state is entered, the probability state does not end until the next big win occurs. For this reason, the end conditions (remaining number of lotteries, remaining time, etc.) are not displayed on the screen.

Figure 863 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variable state and the jackpot fluctuation is started. Here, in this 28th control example, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, there is a high probability (90%) of winning a normal jackpot, while if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is always a probability variable jackpot and the advantageous probability variable state continues even after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in a probability variable state where a ball can enter both the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 640 by hitting from the right, the gameplay is such that a jackpot is more strongly expected to be won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the player is more likely to be in a disadvantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 863(b), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the high probability state, an enemy character 811 appears in the main display area Dm and a performance is executed in which the enemy character 811 and the adventurer character 801 stare down each other. In addition, the characters "Defeat the enemy to continue the RUSH!!" are displayed in the display area HR3. Furthermore, information indicating the remaining time until the high probability state ends (i.e., until the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends) is displayed in the small display area Dm2 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. In the example of FIG. 863(b), a case is illustrated in which the remaining fluctuation time until the fluctuation ends is 28.05 seconds, and the characters "28:05 until the RUSH ends" are displayed in the small display area Dm1. In addition, the characters "RUSH is in danger of ending!" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the enemy character 811 is not defeated before the remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm1 has elapsed, the probability of the special state (rush) ending. As described above, in this 28th control example, even if the lottery for the other special symbol is executed after the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol has started, a winning symbol will not be drawn. In other words, since there is no possibility of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed first, making it impossible to convert the jackpot of the first special symbol into a losing symbol. On the other hand, since the small jackpot is a part of the losing symbol, it is configured to be winnable even during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot fluctuation can be forcibly stopped at the losing symbol by winning the small jackpot, and the disadvantageous jackpot of the first special symbol can be avoided and the probability of the special state can be continued.

Figure 864 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the small win is not won in the lottery of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern, and the variable time has passed. As shown in Figure 864 (a), when the variable time of the big win variable of the first special pattern has passed and the remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm becomes "00:00", an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 801 is attacked by the enemy character 811 and defeated. In addition, the word "Too bad..." is displayed in the display area HR3, and the word "RUSH ended..." is displayed in the small display area Ds2. In addition, the third pattern indicating a win of the first special pattern is displayed in the small display area Dm8a. These display contents can easily make the player understand that there is a high possibility that the probability of the variable state has ended.

864(b) shows an example of a display mode in the case where a small win is won in a lottery of the second special symbol during the display of the first special symbol, and the big win variation of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped by a losing symbol. As shown in FIG. 864(b), when a small win is won during the big win variation of the first special symbol and the small win symbol is stopped and displayed first, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 801 succeeds in defeating the enemy character 811. In addition, the word "Victory!!" is displayed in the display area HR3, and the word "RUSH Continue!!" is displayed in the small display area Ds2. In addition, a losing symbol (so-called scattered symbols) of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm8a, and a small win symbol (different odd symbols in this 28th control example) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm8b. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the probability of winning has continued.

<Electrical configuration in 28th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 865(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this 28th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 865(a), the ROM 202 in this 28th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 27th control example (see FIG. 835(a)) in that the 1st win random number 27 table 202aw is replaced by the 1st win random number 28 table 202ax, the jackpot type selection 27 table 202bw is replaced by the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx, the variation pattern 27 table 202dw is replaced by the variation pattern 28 table 202dx, and the small win random number 27 table 202ew is replaced by the small win random number 28 table 202ex. Also, it differs in that the normal variation pattern scenario table 202wa is deleted.

First, referring to FIG. 866(a), the details of the first winning random number 28 table 202ax in this 28th control example will be described. This first winning random number 28 table 202ax is a data table in which a random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot when a lottery for a special symbol is executed is prescribed, similar to the first winning random number 27 table 202aw in the above-mentioned 27th control example. FIG. 866(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 28 table 202ax. As shown in FIG. 866(a), in this 28th control example, 40 random number values (counter values) from "0 to 39" are prescribed in correspondence with each other as the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for a special symbol in a high probability state for the special symbol, regardless of the type of the special symbol. In this 28th control example, the first winning random number counter C1 is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", so the probability of winning the jackpot when a special symbol lottery is executed in a high probability state for the special symbol is 1/25 (40/1000) for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

Also, as shown in FIG. 866(a), the first winning random number 28 table 202ax in this 28th control example is specified to correspond to 10 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 9" as random numbers (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be a jackpot in a special pattern lottery in a low probability state of the special pattern, regardless of the type of special pattern. The first winning random number counter C1 in this 28th control example is configured as a loop counter that can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", so the probability of winning a jackpot when a special pattern lottery is executed in a low probability state of the special pattern is 1/100 (10/1000) for both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 866(b), the details of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx in this 28th control example will be described. FIG. 866(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx in this 28th control example. As shown in FIG. 866(b), the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx specifies the jackpot type that can be selected for each type of special pattern and the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 in correspondence with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 866(b), as the jackpot type of the first special pattern, "jackpot A28" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 9", and "jackpot B28" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 99". The "jackpot A28" is a jackpot (4-round jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous jackpot state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot is over. The "jackpot B28" is a jackpot (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the relatively less advantageous time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot is over. Of the 100 random numbers "0-99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the random numbers associated with the "jackpot A28" and the "jackpot B28" are 10 and 90, respectively, so that when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that the "jackpot A28" will be determined is 10% (10/100), and the probability that the "jackpot B28" will be determined is 90% (90/100). In other words, even if a player wins a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot B28) that is determined is one that has the fewest number of rounds and is set to a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage, so the lottery for the first special symbol is a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.

As shown in FIG. 866(b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "jackpot C28" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 24", "jackpot D28" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 34", and "jackpot E28" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". "Jackpot C28" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot has ended (10-round variable jackpot). "Jackpot D28" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds and the most advantageous variable state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot has ended (8-round variable jackpot). Furthermore, the "jackpot E28" is a jackpot (4-round jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous jackpot state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot is ended. Of the 100 random numbers "0-99" that the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the random numbers associated with "jackpot C28", "jackpot D28", and "jackpot E28" are 25, 10, and 65, respectively, so that when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C28" will be determined is 25% (25/100), the probability that "jackpot D28" will be determined is 10% (10/100), and the probability that "jackpot E28" will be determined is 65% (65/100). Therefore, if a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, the majority of the time the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds) is set, but no matter which jackpot type is selected, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a highly advantageous probability state, so the drawing of the second special symbol can be said to be a more advantageous drawing than the drawing of the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 866(c), the details of the small win random number 28 table 202ex in this 28th control example will be described. This small win random number 28 table 202ex is a data table that specifies the random number value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is determined to be a small win when a special pattern lottery is executed, similar to the small win random number 27 table 202ew in the 27th control example described above. As shown in FIG. 866(c), in this 28th control example, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win is associated only with the second special pattern, and the range of the value is "40 to 49". Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 999 that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small winnings in the lottery for the second special symbol is 10, between 40 and 49, so the probability of winning a small winning in the lottery for the second special symbol is 1/100 (10/1000).

Next, referring to FIG. 867(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern 28 table 202dx in this 28th control example will be described. FIG. 867(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern 28 table 202dx in this 28th control example. As shown in FIG. 867(a), the fluctuation pattern 28 table 202dx in this 28th control example is composed of two types of data tables: a normal table 202dx1 that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in a normal state, and a probability variable/time-saving table 202dx2 that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in a probability variable state and a time-saving state. Note that the normal table 202dx1 has the same rules as the normal table 202dw1 in the 27th control example described above (in the drawing of the first special symbol, a variable time in the range of 7 to 140 seconds is selected depending on the drawing result, while in the drawing of the second special symbol, a variable time of 600 seconds is always selected), so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Figure 867(b) shows the contents of the probability variable/time-saving table 202dx2 that constitutes the fluctuation pattern 28 table 202dx. As described above, this probability variable/time-saving table 202dx2 is a data table that is referenced when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the probability variable state and the time-saving state. As shown in Figure 867(b), the probability variable/time-saving table 202dx2 specifies a fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol is not obtained, in which a miss short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 999) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 249" is associated with the winning long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms (30 seconds), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "250 to 899" is associated with the winning long fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60,000 ms (60 seconds), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "900 to 999" is associated with the winning long fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 180,000 ms (180 seconds). Therefore, when a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected at a rate of 25% (250/1000), the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected at a rate of 65% (650/1000), and the fluctuation time of 180 seconds is selected at a rate of 10% (100/1000). The longer the fluctuation time, the easier it is to draw the second special symbol more frequently during the fluctuation, and the higher the chance of winning a small prize. Therefore, if a player wins a regular big prize, it is more advantageous for the player to select a longer fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 867(b), as the variation pattern during a guaranteed jackpot of the first special symbol, a winning super short variation with a variation time of 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range (range of "0 to 999") of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The reason for setting a short variation time when a guaranteed jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is to prevent as much as possible the situation where a small win of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed first, forcing the advantageous guaranteed jackpot to be converted into a miss. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 867(b), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time of 6000 ms (6 seconds) (miss short variation, win short variation) is associated with the entire range (range of "0 to 999") of the value of the variation type counter CS1, both in the case of a miss and in the case of a win. Therefore, in the guaranteed jackpot state, the variation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 6 seconds.

In addition, if a normal jackpot is won by the drawing of the first special symbol and the change time is set to 30 seconds, the second special symbol will be displayed up to 5 times (30 seconds/6 seconds) during the winning change, so the probability that a small win with a probability of 1/100 will convert the normal jackpot to a miss and the probability of the special win continuing is about 4.9%. Similarly, if a normal jackpot is won by the drawing of the first special symbol and the change time is set to 30 seconds, the second special symbol will be displayed up to 10 times (60 seconds/6 seconds) during the winning change, so the probability that a small win will convert the normal jackpot to a miss and the probability of the special win continuing is about 9.6%. Furthermore, if a normal jackpot is won by the drawing of the first special symbol and the change time is set to 180 seconds, the second special symbol will be displayed up to 30 times (180 seconds/6 seconds) during the winning change, so the probability that a small win will convert the normal jackpot to a miss and the probability of the special win continuing is about 26%.

In this way, in this 28th control example, when a normal jackpot is won in the probability variable state, a relatively long fluctuation time (long enough to allow the second special symbol to be drawn multiple times) is selected, so that when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol begins, the player can have a sense of expectation over multiple drawings of the second special symbol that the second special symbol will become a small win, converting the normal jackpot into a miss. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 865(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 28th control example will be described. FIG. 865(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 28th control example. As shown in FIG. 865(b), the RAM 203 in this 28th control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 27th control example (see FIG. 835(b)) in that a time-saving counter 203h is provided instead of the time-saving first counter 203h1 and the time-saving second counter 203h2. This change is due to the change to the specification of only one end condition of the time-saving state (only the end condition that is established when the total number of times the first special pattern and the second special pattern are drawn reaches a predetermined number). It also differs from the 27th control example in that it has added a special chance setting flag 203m, a special chance passing counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a special chance effective flag 203r, a special chance effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a special chance flag 203xa. The addition of these components, like the first control example, is due to a change in the specifications so that the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a special chance state when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game, and since the components other than the special chance flag 203xa are exactly the same as the components of the same name that were provided in the first control example, a detailed description of them will be omitted here.

Furthermore, it differs from the 27th control example in that the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, the V flag 203fe, and the V-passing flag 203ff have been deleted. The change to delete these configurations is due to the abolition of the specification in which a jackpot occurs when a V is won during a small jackpot game.

The probability change flag 203xa is a flag that indicates whether the current game state is a probability change state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203xa is set to on, it indicates that the game state is a probability change state, and when it is off, it indicates that the game state is a low probability game state (normal state or time-saving state). In this 28th control example, if the probability change setting flag 203m is set to on when the jackpot game ends, the probability change flag 203xa is set to on. On the other hand, when the jackpot game starts, it is set to off. Note that when the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are initialized, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

Next, referring to FIG. 868, details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 28th control example will be described. FIG. 868 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 28th control example. As shown in FIG. 868, the RAM 223 in this 28th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 27th control example (see FIG. 841) in that an end time timer 223xa has been added. It also differs in that the rank up count counter 223wb, the guaranteed time timer 223wc, and the surplus time storage area 223wd have been deleted.

The end time timer 223xa is a timer that indicates the time until the regular jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol and the special probability state is ended. The end time timer 223xa is initially set to 0, and if a regular jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol during the special probability state, a timer value corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation time of the regular jackpot is set, and the number of seconds corresponding to the timer value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the time remaining until the end (see S9714A, S9715A in FIG. 881). Also, the timer value is updated by subtracting it each time the main process is executed (see S5433 in FIG. 880).

<Regarding control process of main control device in 28th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 28th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 869 to Fig. 879. First, details of the first special symbol variation start process 28 (Y271) in this 28th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 869. Fig. 869 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 28 (Y271) in this 28th control example. This first special symbol variation start process 28 (Y271) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process 27 (see Fig. 843) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and is a process for executing a lottery for the first special symbol and starting a variable display according to the lottery result, similar to the first special symbol variation start process 27 (see Fig. 843) in the 27th control example.

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process 28 (see FIG. 869) in this 28th control example, in each process of Y302 to Y306, the same process as each process of Y302 to Y306 in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 27 (see FIG. 843) in the 27th control example is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 28 (see FIG. 869) in this 28th control example, when the process of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol determination process 28 is executed (Y351) instead of the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844) in the 27th control example, and then the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 28 is executed (Y352) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in the 27th control example. Next, the fluctuation start time update process is executed (Y353) instead of the special symbol 1 game state update process (see FIG. 846) in the 27th control example, and this process is terminated. Details of the first special symbol determination process 28 (Y351), the first special symbol change pattern selection process 28 (Y352), and the change start time update process (Y353) will be described later with reference to Figures 870, 871, and 872, respectively.

First, referring to FIG. 870, the details of the first special symbol determination process 28 (Y351) described above will be explained. This first special symbol determination process 28 (Y351) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844) in the 27th control example described above, and is a process for executing a jackpot determination for the first special symbol, similar to the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844). FIG. 870 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol determination process 28.

In the first special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 870), the same processes as those of Y8001, Y8003 to Y8006, Y8011, and Y8021 in the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844) in the 27th control example are executed in each of the processes Y8001, Y8003 to Y8006, Y8011, and Y8021. In addition, when the first special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 870) in the 28th control example is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y8031), and if it is determined that it is on (Y8031: Yes), this means that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is already in progress, so by shifting the process to Y8021, the lottery result is set to a miss regardless of the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8031 that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (Y8031: No), the processing proceeds to Y8001.

In the first special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 870) in this 28th control example, when the process of Y8001 is completed, it is next determined whether the probability variable flag 203xa is on (Y8032), and if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203xa is on (i.e., the special symbol is in a high probability state) (Y8032: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is obtained by referring to the first random number 28 table 202ax for high probability (Y8033), and the process proceeds to Y8003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203xa is off (i.e., the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y8032: No) in the process of Y8032, the lottery result of the first special symbol is obtained by referring to the first random number 28 table 202ax for low probability (Y8034), and the process proceeds to Y8003.

Next, referring to FIG. 871, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 28 (Y352) in this 28th control example will be described. This first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 28 (Y352) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and, like the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845), it is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 871 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 28 (Y352).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) in this 28th control example, the same processes as the Y501-Y503 and Y505-Y508 processes in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in the 27th control example are executed in Y501-Y503 and Y505-Y508, respectively. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) in this 28th control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, a variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is read out from two types of tables (normal table 202dx1, special chance/time-saving table 202dx2) specified in the variation pattern 28 table 202dx (see FIG. 867(a)) (Y541), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Next, referring to FIG. 872, the details of the update process (Y353) at the start of fluctuation in this 28th control example will be described. This update process (Y353) at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the game state at the start of fluctuation. FIG. 872 is a flowchart showing this update process (Y353) at the start of fluctuation. Here, in this 28th control example, the remaining time-saving number (counter value of the time-saving counter 203h) is basically updated when the fluctuation stops, and is updated at the start of fluctuation only under specific conditions (when the remaining time-saving number in the time-saving state is 1 and a lottery for a special pattern is executed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a case in which the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be delayed compared to the subtraction timing (always at the start of fluctuation) of the remaining time-saving number adopted by a general gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) equipped with a specification that can simultaneously (in parallel) execute the fluctuation display of the first special pattern and the fluctuation display of the second special pattern, so that it is possible to perform the game in the time-saving state more efficiently (without waste) with respect to a general simultaneous fluctuation machine. The difference in the timing of the time-saving end for simultaneous variable machines that employ this conventional method of subtracting the remaining number of times of time-saving will be described later with reference to FIG. 873. Also, in this 28th control example, if one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning (big win or small win) symbol while the other special symbol is changing, and the changing special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, the configuration is such that the number of times of time-saving is prevented from being subtracted by the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the loss of one time-saving number due to a changing display that is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing symbol (a changing display that is useless for the player because it cannot be a winning symbol).

Now, referring to FIG. 873, we will explain cases where the timing of the time-saving end can be delayed for a general simultaneous variable machine. As described above, in this 28th control example, the remaining number of time-saving times is basically updated (subtracted) at the timing of the end of the variation, and the remaining number of time-saving times is subtracted at the start of the variation only if a lottery for a new special pattern is executed when there is only one remaining time-saving time. Therefore, when the variable display of both special patterns is stopped and there is only one remaining time-saving time, the number of time-saving times is updated to 0 at the same timing as the conventional subtraction timing of the remaining number of time-saving times (the start timing of the final variable display within the time-saving times), and the time-saving state ends.

In contrast, as shown in Figures 873(a) and 873(b), if the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed at the start of the final variable display in the time-saving state (70 times or 30 times in this 28th control example), it is possible to prevent the time-saving count from continuing for more variable displays than the set number of time-saving counts while securing a longer period of time-saving state compared to the conventional timing for subtracting the remaining number of time-saving counts. The examples of Figures 873(a) and 873(b) show the timing of the end of the time-saving state in which the number of time-saving counts is set to 70, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed at the time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed as the variable lottery for the 70th special symbol.

First, referring to Figure 873 (a), a case will be described in which, after the time-saving state has been set (after the end of a jackpot), while the variable display of the first special pattern based on the drawing of the 69th special pattern is being executed, the drawing of the second special pattern is executed as the drawing of the 70th special pattern, and the variable display of the second special pattern based on the drawing of the 70th special pattern ends before the variable display of the first special pattern based on the drawing of the 69th special pattern. In the example of FIG. 873(a), a case will be described in which at time t1, a first special pattern is drawn as the 69th special pattern drawing, and the first special pattern is displayed as a variable. During the display of the first special pattern, at time t2, a second special pattern is drawn as the 70th special pattern drawing, and the second special pattern is displayed as a variable. Then, at time t3, the second special pattern starts to be displayed before the variable display of the first special pattern, and, after the end of the jackpot, the second special pattern is drawn as the 71st special pattern drawing at time t4.

In the example shown in Figure 873(a), in a conventional simultaneous variable play machine (a method in which the number of time-saving times is always updated at the start of the variation), the remaining number of time-saving times is subtracted at time t1 (when the first special symbol starts to vary) to leave one remaining time, and at time t2 the remaining number of time-saving times is subtracted to leave zero remaining times, thereby ending the time-saving state. In other words, the time-saving state ends when the final variation display in the time-saving state begins, so the time-saving state is effectively reduced by one time (the amount during the variation period of the final variation display).

In contrast, in this 28th control example, the number of time-saving times is basically updated when the fluctuation stops until the remaining number of time-saving times becomes 1, and the remaining number of time-saving times is updated at the start of fluctuation only when the timing for starting the fluctuation of a new special pattern is reached when the remaining number of time-saving times is 1, so the remaining number of time-saving times is not updated at time t1 (when the 69th fluctuation starts). Therefore, since the remaining number of time-saving times is also 2 at time t2 (when the 70th fluctuation starts), the remaining number of time-saving times is not updated at time t2, and the remaining number of time-saving times is updated at time t3 (when the fluctuation display started at the 70th time stops) and the remaining number of time-saving times becomes 1. As a result, in this 28th control example, the number of time-saving times becomes 0 at time t4 (when the 71st fluctuation starts) and the time-saving state ends. In other words, since the time-saving state is ended during the execution of the variable display that started at the 69th time after the end of the jackpot and before the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state can be continued longer than the conventional simultaneous variable display machine by the time (T1) of the difference between time t4 and time t2. Furthermore, since the time-saving state is ended at the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to suppress the variable display exceeding the set number of time-saving times (70 times) from being executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to play in the time-saving state without waste. In addition, in the 28th control example, when the special pattern is stopped and displayed before the variable display of the special pattern starts in a state where there is only one time of time-saving remaining, the number of time-saving times is decremented by 1 as a rule. For this reason, in FIG. 873(a), if the variable display of the first special pattern as the 71st time of the variable display of the special pattern is not started and the variable display of the second special pattern as the 69th time of the variable display of the special pattern is stopped and displayed first, the remaining number of time-saving times is updated to 0 at the timing of the stop display, and the time-saving state is ended. In this case, the time-saving state can be ended after all 70 variable display periods have ended, so the time-saving state can be continued for a longer period of time than the time-saving end timing of conventional simultaneous variable machines. This allows play in the time-saving state to be played efficiently.

Next, referring to FIG. 873(b), a case will be described in which, after the time-saving state is set (after the end of the jackpot), the first special symbol is displayed based on the 69th special symbol drawing, and then the second special symbol is drawn as the 70th special symbol drawing. The first special symbol is displayed based on the 69th special symbol drawing, and the first special symbol is drawn as the 71st special symbol drawing, and then the second special symbol is displayed based on the 70th special symbol drawing. In the example shown in FIG. 873(b), in a conventional simultaneous variable machine (which always updates the number of time-saving times at the start of the variation), the remaining number of time-saving times is subtracted at time t5 (when the first special symbol starts to vary) to one, and the remaining number of time-saving times is subtracted at time t6 to zero, thereby ending the time-saving state. In other words, the time-saving state ends when the final fluctuation display in the time-saving state begins, so the time-saving state is effectively reduced by one period (the period during which the final fluctuation display occurred).

In contrast, if the control in this 28th control example (which basically updates the number of time-saving times when the fluctuation stops until the remaining number of time-saving times becomes 1, and updates the remaining number of time-saving times when the fluctuation starts only when the timing for the new special pattern to start fluctuating when the remaining number of time-saving times is 1) is adopted, the remaining number of time-saving times is not updated at time t5 (when the 69th fluctuation starts). Therefore, since the remaining number of time-saving times is also 2 at time t6 (when the 70th fluctuation starts), the remaining number of time-saving times is not updated at time t6 either, and the remaining number of time-saving times is updated at time t7 (when the fluctuation display started for the 69th time stops) and the remaining number of time-saving times becomes 1. As a result, in this 28th control example, the number of time-saving times becomes 0 at time t8 (when the 71st fluctuation starts), and the time-saving state ends. In other words, since the time-saving state ends while the 70th variable display that started after the end of the jackpot is in progress and before the 71st variable display starts after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state can be continued longer than in a conventional simultaneous variable display machine by the time difference (T2) between time t8 and time t6. Also, since the time-saving state ends when the 71st variable display starts after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed more than the set number of times (70 times) during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to play in the time-saving state without waste.

Returning to FIG. 872, the explanation will be continued. As shown in FIG. 872, in the update process at the start of fluctuation in this 28th control example (see FIG. 872), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or not (Y631), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 1 (Y631: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (Y631: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 and updated to 0 (Y632), a state command indicating a transition to the normal state is set (Y633), and this process is terminated. By executing this update process at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 872), the number of time-saving times can be decremented at the start of fluctuation only for the lottery of the last special pattern in the time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 874, the details of the first special symbol change stop process 28 (Y272) in this 28th control example will be described. This first special symbol change stop process 28 (Y272) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol change stop process 27 (see FIG. 847) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and, like the first special symbol change stop process 27 (see FIG. 847), it is a process for setting a stop display of the first special symbol when the change of the first special symbol ends. FIG. 874 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change stop process 28 (Y272).

In the first special pattern change stop processing 28 (see FIG. 874) in this 28th control example, the processing of Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, Y723 to Y726, Y732, and Y733 is identical to the processing of Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, Y723 to Y726, Y732, and Y733 in the first special pattern change stop processing 27 (see FIG. 847) in the 27th control example. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 28 (see FIG. 874) in this 28th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y721 that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is off (i.e., the current lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss) (Y721: No), a fluctuation stop time update process is executed to update the remaining number of time reductions at the fluctuation stop timing (Y741), and the process proceeds to Y732. Details of this fluctuation stop time update process (Y741) will be described later with reference to FIG. 875.

In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 28 in this 28th control example (see FIG. 874), if the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is determined to be 0 in the process of Y723 (Y723: No) or the process of Y726 is completed, the jackpot flag 203gb, the time-saving counter 203h, and the guaranteed win flag 203xa corresponding to the first special symbol are all reset (Y742), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, referring to FIG. 875, the details of the update process (Y741) at the time of the fluctuation stop will be described. This update process (Y741) at the time of the fluctuation stop is a process for updating the number of time-saving times at the timing of the fluctuation stop when the game state is in the time-saving state. FIG. 875 is a flowchart showing the update process (Y741) at the time of the fluctuation stop. Here, as described above, in this 28th control example, the remaining time-saving times (counter value of the time-saving counter 203h) is basically updated when the fluctuation stops, and is updated only at the start of the fluctuation under a specific condition (a state in which the remaining time-saving times in the time-saving state are 1). And, when one special pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning (big win or small win) pattern during the fluctuation of one special pattern, if the special pattern being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing pattern, the configuration is such that the time-saving times are suppressed from being subtracted by the special pattern that is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing pattern. By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent the loss of one time-saving reel due to a variable display that is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing symbol (a variable display that is a waste for the player as it will never result in a win).

As shown in FIG. 875, in the update process when the fluctuation stops (see FIG. 875), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y635), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (Y635: No), this means that the current time-saving state is not in progress, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y635 that the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y635: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated by subtracting 1 (Y636), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h after the subtraction has become 0 (Y637). If it is determined in the process of Y637 that the counter value after the subtraction has become 0 (Y637: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to the normal state is set (Y638), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y637 that the counter value after subtraction is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (Y637: No), the process of Y638 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 876, the second special symbol change start process 28 (Y273) in this 28th control example will be described. This second special symbol change start process 28 (Y273) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol change start process 27 (see FIG. 848) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and, like the second special symbol change start process 27 (see FIG. 848), is a process for executing a lottery for the second special symbol and starting the variable display of the second special symbol according to the lottery result. FIG. 876 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change start process 28 (Y273).

In the second special symbol fluctuation start process 28 (see FIG. 876) in this 28th control example, the processes Y832 to Y836, Y851, and Y852 are the same as the processes Y832 to Y836, Y851, and Y852 in the second special symbol fluctuation start process 27 (see FIG. 848) in the 27th control example. In the second special symbol fluctuation start process 28 (see FIG. 876) in this 28th control example, when the process Y836 is completed, the second special symbol determination process 28 is executed (Y871) instead of the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849) in the 27th control example, and then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 28 is executed (Y872) instead of the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851) in the 27th control example. Next, the change start time update process is executed (Y873) instead of the special symbol 2 game state update process (see FIG. 852) in the 27th control example, and this process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871) will be described later with reference to FIG. 877. Note that the second special symbol change pattern selection process 28 (Y872) is the same as the first special symbol change pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871), and the only difference between the second special symbol change pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851) is that a change pattern table corresponding to the game state is read out when selecting a change pattern, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Also, the change start time update process (Y873) is exactly the same process as the change start time update process (see FIG. 872), which is one process in the first special symbol change start process 28 (see FIG. 869), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, referring to FIG. 877, the second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871) in this 28th control example will be described in detail. This second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and is a process for executing a hit determination of the second special symbol, similar to the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849). FIG. 877 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871).

In the second special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 877) in the 28th control example, the same processes as the Y8101, Y8103 to Y8106, Y8111, and Y8121 processes of the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849) in the 27th control example are executed in the Y8101, Y8103 to Y8106, Y8111, and Y8121 processes. In addition, when the second special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 877) in the 28th control example is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is on (Y8131), and if it is determined that it is on (Y8131: Yes), it means that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is already in progress, so by shifting the process to Y8121, the lottery result is prevented from becoming a jackpot regardless of the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y8131 that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (Y8031: No), the processing proceeds to Y8101.

In the second special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 877) in this 28th control example, when the process of Y8101 is completed, it is next determined whether the probability variable flag 203xa is on (Y8132). If it is determined that the probability variable flag 203xa is on (i.e., the special symbol is in a high probability state) (Y8132: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is obtained by referring to the first random number 28 table 202ax for high probability (Y8133), and the process proceeds to Y8103. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203xa is off (i.e., the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y8132: No) in the process of Y8132, the lottery result of the first special symbol is obtained by referring to the first random number 28 table 202ax for low probability (Y8134), and the process proceeds to Y8103.

Next, referring to FIG. 878, the second special symbol variation stop process 28 (Y274) in this 28th control example will be described in detail. This second special symbol variation stop process 28 (Y274) is a process for setting a stationary display of the first special symbol when the variation of the second special symbol ends, similar to the second special symbol variation stop process 27 (see FIG. 853) in the 27th control example described above. FIG. 878 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation stop process 28 (Y274).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 878) in this 28th control example, in the processing of Y1101 to Y1106 and Y1108 to Y1111, the same processing as the processing of Y1101 to Y1106 and Y1108 to Y1111 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 27 (see FIG. 853) in the 27th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 878) in this 28th control example, if it is determined in the processing of Y1102 that the big win flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (i.e., the lottery result of this second special symbol is a miss (complete miss or small win)) (Y1102: No), a fluctuation stop time update processing for updating the remaining time reduction number at the fluctuation stop timing is executed (Y1121), and the processing is shifted to Y1103. This update process when the fluctuation stops (Y1121) is exactly the same process as the update process when the fluctuation stops (see FIG. 875) executed in the first special pattern fluctuation stop process 28 (see FIG. 874).

In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 28 in this 28th control example (see FIG. 878), if the special symbol 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is determined to be 0 in the process of Y1104 (Y1104: No) or the process of Y1106 is completed, the jackpot flag 203gb, the time-saving counter 203h, and the guaranteed win flag 203xa corresponding to the second special symbol are all reset (Y1122), and the process proceeds to Y1108.

Next, referring to FIG. 879, the details of the jackpot control process 28 (Y1021) in this 28th control example will be described. The jackpot control process 28 (Y1021) in this 28th control example is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 27 (see FIG. 855) in the 27th control example described above, and, like the jackpot control process 27 (see FIG. 855), is a process for executing various controls during the execution of a jackpot game. FIG. 879 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 28 (Y1021).

In the jackpot control process 28 in the 28th control example (see FIG. 879), the same processes as those in the jackpot control process 27 in the 27th control example (see FIG. 855) are executed in the processes Y11601 to Y11612 and Y11633 to Y11635, respectively. In the jackpot control process 28 in the 28th control example (see FIG. 879), if it is determined in the process of Y11612 that it is the end timing of the ending performance (Y11612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a special jackpot (Y11641), and if it is determined that it is a special jackpot (Y11641: Yes), the special jackpot flag 203xa is set to ON to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a special jackpot state (Y11642), and the process moves to Y11633.

On the other hand, in the process of Y11641, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is not a guaranteed jackpot (it is a normal jackpot) (Y11641: No), then it is determined whether the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state or not based on the data of the winning state storage area 203wf (Y11643), and if it is determined that it is a normal state (Y11643: Yes), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 70 to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a time-saving state with the number of time-saving times being 70 (Y11644), and the process is shifted to Y11633. On the other hand, in the process of Y11643, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is not a normal state (it is a time-saving state or a guaranteed jackpot state) (Y11643: No), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 30 to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a time-saving state with the number of time-saving times being 30 (Y11645), and the process is shifted to Y11633. The reason why the number of time-saving times is changed depending on the game state is that in the normal state, when a jackpot is won, only the lottery for the first special symbol, which determines a normal jackpot with a 90% probability, is executed, so reducing the number of time-saving times would be excessively disadvantageous to the player. In contrast, the number of time-saving times is reduced when a normal jackpot is won in a state other than the normal state in order to make it less likely that an event will occur in which the player wins a jackpot again in the time-saving state after the probability variable state ends and returns to the probability variable state. In other words, the purpose is to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous once the probability variable state is entered, which would cause the hall to suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

In the jackpot control process 28 (see FIG. 879) in this 28th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y11612 that it is not the end timing of the ending presentation (Y11612: No), then a winning process is executed (S1911) to perform control according to the winning of the specific winning port 65a, and an abnormality process is executed (S1912) to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally, and then this process is terminated. These winning processes (S1911) and abnormality processes (S1912) are exactly the same processes as the winning process (see FIG. 171) and abnormality process (see FIG. 172) executed in the first control example in which the probability of a winning state is set by the game ball passing through a specific area during the execution of a jackpot game, as in this 28th control example, so a detailed description of them will be omitted here.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 28th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 28th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 880 to Fig. 882. First, the performance update process 28 (S4171) in this 28th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 880. This performance update process 28 (S4171) is a process executed in place of the performance update process 27 (see Fig. 856) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and is a process for periodically (every execution interval of the main process) updating various performance modes being executed, similar to the performance update process 27 (see Fig. 856). Fig. 880 is a flowchart showing this performance update process 28 (S4171).

When the effect update process 28 (see FIG. 880) in this 28th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is greater than 0 (S5431), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (i.e., 0) (S5431: No), this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5431 that the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is greater than 0 (S5431: Yes), this means that the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special pattern in the high probability state is being executed, so first, the value of the end time timer 223xa is updated by subtracting it (S5432), and then the remaining time display until the high probability state (RUSH) ends (i.e., until the normal jackpot starts) is updated according to the updated timer value (S5433).

When the processing of S5433 is completed, next, in the processing of S5432, it is determined whether or not the value of the end time timer 223xa has been updated to 0 (S5434), and if it is determined that it has been updated to 0 (S5434: Yes), the execution of a RUSH end presentation (see FIG. 864(a)) in which the adventurer character 801 is attacked by the enemy character 811 and is defeated is set (S5435), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5434 that the value of the end time timer 223xa has not been updated to 0 (S5434: No), the processing of S5435 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

By executing this effect update process 28 (see FIG. 880), when a normal jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol during the high probability state, the remaining time until the start of the normal jackpot can be accurately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can easily understand how much time is left in which the high probability state can be continued by winning a small jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 881, the details of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (S5111A) in this 28th control example will be described. This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (S5111A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 860) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and, like the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 860), it is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 881 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (S5111A).

As shown in FIG. 881, when the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881) in this 28th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a high probability state (S9771A), and if it is determined that it is not in a high probability state (S9771A: No), the presentation mode is determined according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 (S9712A), and the process proceeds to S9706A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9711A that the game state is in a high probability state (S9711A: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the result of the current lottery for the first special symbol is a normal jackpot (S9713A).

In the process of S9713A, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal jackpot (S9713A: Yes), the fluctuation time of this normal jackpot is set to the timer value of the end time timer 223xa (S9714A), a fluctuation display mode with an end pinch effect (see FIG. 863(b)) with the set timer value as the end time is determined (S9715A), and the process proceeds to S9706A. In contrast, in the process of S9713A, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the first special pattern is not a normal jackpot (S9713A: No), a performance mode according to the received fluctuation pattern command is determined (S9716A), and the process proceeds to S9706A. In the process of S9706A, a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9706A), and the process ends.

By executing this special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881), if a normal jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol during the high probability state, the presentation mode executed by the third symbol display device 81 can notify the player that the high probability state (RUSH) is in danger of ending, thereby providing the player with easy-to-understand gameplay.

Next, referring to FIG. 882, the details of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (S5201A) in this 28th control example will be described. This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (S5201A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861) in the above-mentioned 27th control example, and is a process executed to set the variable display mode according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, similar to the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861). FIG. 882 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (S5201A).

In the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882) in this 28th control example, the same processes as those in S9611 and S9622A of the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861) in the above-mentioned 27th control example are executed in the respective processes of S9611 and S9622A. In addition, when the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882) in this 28th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a probability variable state (S9651A), and if it is determined that it is not a probability variable state (S9651A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, in the process of S9651A, if it is determined that the game state is a sure-win state (S9651A: Yes), then it is determined whether the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is greater than 0 (i.e., the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is currently in progress) (S9652A), and if it is determined that the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is 0 (S9652A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the end time timer 223xa is greater than 0 (S9652A: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is shorter than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa (S9653A).

In the process of S9653A, if it is determined that the current variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa (S9653A: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a complete miss (S9654A), and if it is determined that it is a complete miss (S9654A: Yes), a variable display mode with a performance in which the enemy character 811 can avoid attacks is determined (S9655A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9654A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a complete miss (i.e., a small win) (S9654A: No), a variable display mode with a performance in which the adventurer character 801 defeats the enemy character 811 (see FIG. 864(b)) is determined (S9656A), and the process proceeds to S9611. In contrast, if the process of S9653A determines that the fluctuation time of the current second special symbol is longer than the time indicated by the value of end time timer 223xa (S9653A: No), this means that the fluctuation display related to the current lottery of the second special symbol will stop and display a complete miss pattern at the same time as the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, and it is determined that the high probability state cannot be continued, so each process of S9654A to S9656A is skipped and the process moves to S9611.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 28th control example, once the most advantageous high probability state is entered, unless an unfavorable normal jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, a highly advantageous state is formed in which the high probability state and the jackpot are repeated. That is, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, an unfavorable normal jackpot is won with a high probability (90%), whereas if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, an advantageous high probability jackpot is confirmed, and the high probability state is continued until the next jackpot is won. In addition, in this 28th control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable simultaneously (in parallel), and when one special symbol is being displayed as a jackpot or small jackpot while the other special symbol is being displayed as a jackpot or small jackpot, the other special symbol being displayed as a jackpot or small jackpot is forcibly displayed as a miss symbol. As a result, even if a normal jackpot is won by drawing an unfavorable first special symbol, depending on the result of drawing the second special symbol, the normal jackpot fluctuation is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol, and the advantageous variable probability state is prevented from being ended by the normal jackpot. Furthermore, in this 28th control example, it is configured so that while one special symbol is in a jackpot fluctuation, it is not possible to win a jackpot by drawing the other special symbol. As a result, if a disadvantageous normal jackpot is drawn by drawing the first special symbol in the variable probability state and a jackpot fluctuation is started, it is not possible to win a jackpot by drawing the second special symbol, so it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the only thing one wishes to do is win a small jackpot and force the normal jackpot to stop with a missing symbol.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 28th control example is basically configured to execute an update (subtract) process of a specific counter (counter value of the time-saving counter 203h) when the fluctuation stops, and is configured to execute an update (subtract) process of a specific counter (counter value of the time-saving counter 203h) when the fluctuation starts only for the last fluctuation display in the time-saving state. Also, in a case where one special pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning (big win or small win) pattern and the other special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing pattern, the configuration is such that the subtraction process of the number of time-saving times is avoided at the timing of the forced stop display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the loss of one time of the time-saving times due to a fluctuation display that is forcibly changed to a losing (i.e., equivalent to no winning) and therefore the number of time-saving times can be more suitably subtracted.

Here, conventionally, gaming machines (so-called simultaneous variation machines) equipped with a control capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol have been widely known. In such conventional gaming machines, when a game state that continues only for a specific number of variations after the end of a big win, such as a time-saving state, is set, in order to prevent the game state from continuing beyond the set number of times, it is common to adopt a control that updates a counter value indicating the number of remaining variations until the end of the game state at the start of the variation. However, when such a control is adopted, there are cases where it is not possible to specify at the start of the variation whether the variation of the other winning (small win or big win) will end first during the variation (the other winning symbol will be stopped and displayed first), and since it is uncertain whether the variation will be forcibly stopped and displayed with a losing symbol, there is a problem that the counter value indicating the number of remaining variations must be updated even if the variation display is forcibly stopped and displayed with a losing symbol (useless for the player).

In contrast to this, in the 28th control example, the timing of updating (decrementing) the specific counter (time-saving counter 203h) indicating the number of remaining variations in the time-saving state is basically set when the variation stops, so by simply executing a relatively simple process of skipping the update (decrement) process of the specific counter (time-saving counter 203h) for the variation display that is forcibly stopped and displayed with a miss pattern when the variation stops, it is possible to prevent the remaining number of variations from being decremented in vain when a useless variation display is executed for the player that is forcibly stopped and displayed with a miss pattern, and therefore it is possible to prevent the number of times that a lottery that legitimately draws a jackpot from being executed from being less than the number of remaining variations that is actually set. In addition, the specific counter (time-saving counter 203h) is updated (decremented) at the start of the variation only when a new variation display is started with only one remaining variation, so it is also possible to prevent the game state from continuing beyond the set number of remaining variations. Therefore, the specific counter (time-saving counter 203h) can be updated more suitably.

In the 28th control example, the specific counter is set to update the time-saving counter 203h when the variation stops, and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated at the start of the variation only when the remaining number of variations is one and the timing for starting the variation is reached. In addition, the update process of the time-saving counter 203h is skipped for the variation display that is forcibly stopped and displayed with a losing pattern, but the specific counter subject to this control is not limited to the time-saving counter 203h. For example, in a specification in which the probability variation state is ended by the drawing of a specific number of special patterns in the probability variation state, a counter for counting the number of times the drawing of a special pattern is performed in the probability variation state may be set as a specific counter, and a control similar to that of the 28th control example may be performed.

In the 28th control example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated (decremented) either when the fluctuation stops or when the fluctuation starts depending on the situation, but the number of time-saving times may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the timing of updating the displayed number of time-saving times may be changed depending on the situation. In this case, it may be linked to the timing of updating the time-saving counter 203h, or the update timing may be switched under another condition. Another condition may be, for example, the result of a lottery for a special pattern. More specifically, for example, it may be configured so that the display of the number of time-saving times is basically updated when the fluctuation starts, and if the update timing is delayed (updated after the fluctuation starts or updated when the fluctuation stops), the possibility of a jackpot increases. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of time-saving times displayed, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<29th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 883. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th control example described above, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, a disadvantageous normal jackpot is won with a high probability, while when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, a favorable variable jackpot is confirmed, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel). Then, when the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, when the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot or small jackpot symbol, the other special symbol being displayed during the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss symbol, and during the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol, it is configured that it is impossible to win a jackpot in the drawing of the other special symbol. By configuring it in this way, when a large jackpot fluctuation is initiated by a disadvantageous normal jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol in the probability variable state, a novel gameplay is realized in which the player only hopes to win a small jackpot in the drawing of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example, in the probability variable state 1, a state in which the drawing of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed and a state in which the drawing of the first special symbol is easy to be executed are switched. More specifically, depending on the type of jackpot, after the transition to the probability variable state, a variation pattern scenario is configured so that the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer until the drawing of the first special symbol is completed one to three times (prescribed number of times) according to the type of jackpot, and when the drawing of the first special symbol is completed the prescribed number of times, a state is formed in which the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are executed almost evenly until the jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, an advantageous gaming state is created in which the lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of winning a jackpot, is biased until the specified number of drawings for the first special symbol are completed, while after the specified number of drawings are completed, a relatively unfavorable state is created in which the drawing of the unfavorable first special symbol is more likely to be performed, so that the game can be made more interesting without changing the gaming state in the probability of winning. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 29th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 28th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 883 and FIG. 884, a characteristic performance mode in this 29th control example will be described. FIG. 883(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during which a state in which the probability variable state is set in this 29th control example and the variable time of the first special symbol is significantly longer than the variable time of the second special symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 883(a), in a state in which the variable time of the first special symbol is significantly longer than the variable time of the second special symbol is set, the characters "Probability variable rate super UP zone" are displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, information indicating the remaining time until the probability variable rate super UP zone is ended is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Here, as described above, in this 29th control example, after the transition to the probability variable state, the drawing of the first special symbol is executed one to three times (prescribed number of times), and the state transitions to a relatively low degree of advantage in which the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are executed almost equally. In other words, until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed for the specified number of times, which is determined for each type of big win, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which only the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed with emphasis. Therefore, in this 29th control example, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed within the specified number of times, the variable time of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 as the remaining time until the end of the zone. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player of how long the advantageous state in which only the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol (which determines the probability of a big win when a big win is won) will continue. Note that the remaining time until the end of the zone is configured to be displayed as the variable time of the first special symbol for one time (the remaining variable time in the variable display of the first special symbol being executed) regardless of the specified number of times. And, when the variable display of one first special symbol is completed with the specified number of times remaining, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed next, a performance indicating the continuation of the zone is executed, and the remaining time until the end of the zone is reset. This configuration allows players to feel a sense of excitement as they do not know how long the high probability zone will last, which increases the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 883(b), a pinch effect that may be executed during the probability rate super UP zone will be described. Here, in this 29th control example, as in the above-mentioned 28th control example, a small win is won with a probability of 1/100 by drawing the second special pattern. As described above, when a small win is won, if the first special pattern is being displayed while the small win is stopped, the first special pattern is also forcibly stopped as a miss pattern at the same time as the small win stop display, regardless of the remaining change time. Therefore, if a small win is won in the probability rate super UP zone, the zone will be terminated at the stop timing of the small win, regardless of the remaining time until the zone ends (i.e., the remaining change time of the first special pattern). FIG. 883(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the zone is terminated by the small win of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 883(b), if a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the super-high probability increase zone, an effect is executed in which an enemy character 811 appears directly below the small display area Dm1. Also, the text "Obstruct the enemy and avoid the zone being terminated!!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Furthermore, the text "Zone is in danger of being terminated!" is displayed in the small display area Ds2. These display contents make it easy to understand that the super-high probability increase zone will be terminated unless the enemy character 811 is obstructed.

Figure 884 is a diagram showing the display mode when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed during the probability change rate super UP zone (during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol). As shown in Figure 884, when the timing for stopping and displaying the small winning symbol comes during the probability change rate super UP zone, the adventurer character 801 fails to obstruct the enemy character 811, and the small display area Dm1 is burned up by the flames spit out by the enemy character 811. In addition, the words "Probability change rate super UP zone terminated!" are displayed in the display area HR3. Furthermore, in the small display area Dm8a, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing combination (scattered), and in the small display area Dm8b, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning combination (different odd numbers). These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the probability change rate super UP zone has ended.

The effect in which the enemy character 811 appears directly below the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 883(b)) is also executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/20 probability) if the lottery for the second special symbol during the zone results in a complete miss. In the case of a complete miss, the adventurer's character 801 attacks the enemy character 811, successfully interfering with it, and an effect is executed that prevents the remaining time display in the small display area Dm1 from being burned. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the super-high probability UP zone has continued.

<Electrical configuration in 29th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 885(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this 29th control example will be described. FIG. 885(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 29th control example. As shown in FIG. 885(a), the ROM 202 in this 29th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 28th control example (see FIG. 865(a)) in that the jackpot type selection 29 table 202by is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx, the fluctuation pattern 29 table 202dy is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern 28 table 202dx, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ya is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the above-mentioned 28th control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 886, the details of the jackpot type selection 29 table 202by in this 29th control example will be described. FIG. 886 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 29 table 202by in this 29th control example. As shown in FIG. 886, in this jackpot type selection 29 table 202by, the jackpot type that can be selected for each type of special pattern and the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 886, as the jackpot type of the first special pattern, "jackpot A29" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B29" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 of "50 to 99". "Jackpot A29" is a jackpot (4-round jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the most advantageous probability state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot is ended. In addition, "jackpot B29" is a jackpot (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively less advantageous time-saving state. Of the 100 random numbers "0-99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A29" and "jackpot B29", respectively. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A29" will be determined is 50% (50/100), and the probability that "jackpot B29" will be determined is 50% (50/100). In other words, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, half of the time-saving state is set to a less advantageous state, so the lottery for the first special symbol is a lottery with a lower degree of advantage for the player.

As shown in FIG. 886, as the jackpot type of the second special pattern, a "jackpot C29" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19", a "jackpot D29" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 23", a "jackpot E29" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "24", a "jackpot F29" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 29", and the first jackpot type counter C "Big Win G29" is defined to correspond to the value of C2 in the range of "30-33", "Big Win H29" is defined to correspond to the value of the first win type counter C2 of "34", "Big Win I29" is defined to correspond to the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "35-89", "Big Win J29" is defined to correspond to the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "90-96", and "Big Win K29" is defined to correspond to the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "97-99".

"Jackpot C29" to "Jackpot E29" are jackpots (10-round special jackpots) in which the number of rounds is set to 10 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous special state for the player. "Jackpot C29" is a jackpot with the specified number of times (number of times the first special symbol is drawn) in the special rate super-up zone set to 1, "Jackpot D29" is set to 2, and "Jackpot E29" is set to 3. Thus, while the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the special state after the jackpot is ended, "Jackpot E29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by "Jackpot D29", and "Jackpot C29" is the least advantageous.

The number of rounds for "jackpot F29" to "jackpot H29" is set to 8 rounds, and the most advantageous probability state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot is ended (8-round probability jackpot). The specified number of times (number of times the first special symbol is drawn) for the probability jackpot rate super-up zone is set to 1 for "jackpot F29", the specified number of times for "jackpot G29" is set to 2, and the specified number of times for "jackpot H29" is set to 3. Thus, while the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the probability state after the jackpot is ended, "jackpot H29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by "jackpot G29", and "jackpot F29" is the least advantageous.

Furthermore, "Jackpot I29" to "Jackpot K29" are jackpots (4-round special jackpots) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous special state for the player. "Jackpot I29" is a jackpot in which the specified number of times (number of times the first special symbol is drawn) in the special rate super-up zone is set to 1, "Jackpot J29" is set to 2, and "Jackpot K29" is set to 3. Thus, while the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the special state after the jackpot is ended, "Jackpot K29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by "Jackpot J29" and then "Jackpot I29" which is the least advantageous.

Of the 100 random number values between "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random number values associated with "jackpot C29", "jackpot D29", "jackpot E29", "jackpot F29", "jackpot G29", "jackpot H29", "jackpot I29", "jackpot J29", and "jackpot K29" are 20, 4, 1, 5, 4, 1, 55, 7, and 3, respectively. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C29" will be determined is 20% (20/100), and "jackpot D29" is 20% (20/100). The probability that "jackpot 9" will be determined is 4% (4/100), the probability that "jackpot E29" will be determined is 1% (1/100), the probability that "jackpot F29" will be determined is 5% (5/100), the probability that "jackpot G29" will be determined is 4% (4/100), the probability that "jackpot H29" will be determined is 1% (1/100), the probability that "jackpot I29" will be determined is 55% (55/100), the probability that "jackpot J29" will be determined is 7% (7/100), and the probability that "jackpot K29" will be determined is 3% (3/100).

In other words, the percentage of 10-round jackpots (jackpots C29-E29) is 25% (20% + 4% + 1%), the percentage of 8-round jackpots (jackpots F29-H29) is 10% (5% + 4% + 1%), and the percentage of 4-round jackpots (jackpots I29-K29) is 65% (55% + 7% + 3%). Also, the percentage of jackpots with a set number of times until the end of the probability rate super UP zone is 1 (jackpots C29, F29, I29) is 80% (20% + 5% + 55%), the percentage of jackpots with a set number of times is 2 (jackpots D29, G29, J29) is 15% (4% + 4% + 7%), and the percentage of jackpots with a set number of times is 3 (jackpots E29, H29, K29) is 5% (1% + 1% + 3%).

In this way, in this 29th control example, various types of jackpots are provided with different combinations of the number of jackpot rounds and the number of first special symbol selections (prescribed number of times) until the end of the probability bonus rate super-up zone in the probability bonus state that is set after the jackpot ends, so that the player can enjoy predicting the prescribed number of times and the number of rounds. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 887(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern 29 table 202dy in this 29th control example will be described. FIG. 887(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern 29 table 202dy. As shown in FIG. 887(a), the fluctuation pattern 29 table 202dy in this 29th control example is composed of at least a normal table 202dy1 that is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a normal state, a zone table 202dy2 that is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a high probability state and under a situation in which a high probability rate UP zone is set, and a high probability rate/time-saving table 202dy3 that is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a high probability state (limited to a situation in which a high probability rate UP zone is not set) and in a time-saving state. Of these, the normal table 202dy1 has the same regulation contents as the normal table 202dx1 of the fluctuation pattern 28 table 202dx in the 28th control example described above (regulation contents in which the fluctuation time ranges from 7 to 140 seconds is selected depending on the lottery result when the first special symbol is drawn, while the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is always selected when the second special symbol is drawn), so detailed explanation is omitted here.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned zone table 202dy2 will be described with reference to FIG. 887(b). FIG. 887(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the zone table 202dy2. This zone table 202dy2 is a table that is referenced in a situation where a high probability rate zone is set in a high probability rate state. Here, in the case of a probability variable state set based on winning any of the jackpots A29, C29, F29, or I29, the super-high probability zone is set to the period from when the probability variable state is started (set) until the first special symbol has been displayed once (until the second lottery for the first special symbol is executed), in the case of a probability variable state set based on winning any of the jackpots D29, G29, or J29, the super-high probability zone is set to the period from when the probability variable state is started (set) until the first special symbol has been displayed twice (until the third lottery for the first special symbol is executed), and in the case of a probability variable state set based on winning any of the jackpots E29, H29, or K29, the super-high probability zone is set to the period from when the probability variable state is started (set) until the first special symbol has been displayed three times (until the third lottery for the first special symbol is executed).

As shown in FIG. 887(b), the zone table 202dy2 specifies the fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol misses, with a long miss fluctuation time of 60,000 ms (60 seconds) corresponding to the entire range of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (range of "0 to 999"). Also, the fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol hits the jackpot, with a long win fluctuation time of 60,000 ms (60 seconds) corresponding to the entire range of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (range of "0 to 999").

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 887(b), as a fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol misses (complete miss or small win), a miss short fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 1000 ms (1 second) is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 49", a miss short fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 949", and a miss short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "950 to 999". In other words, 50 random number values (counter values) are specified in correspondence with a miss short fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 1 second, 900 random number values (counter values) are specified in correspondence with a miss short fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and 50 random number values (counter values) are specified in correspondence with a miss short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds. Since the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", when the second special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is a miss, the probability that a 1-second fluctuation time is selected is 5% (50/1000), the probability that a 3-second fluctuation time is selected is 90% (900/1000), and the probability that a 5-second fluctuation time is selected is 5% (50/1000). Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the second special symbol is missed is 3 seconds (1 second x 5% + 3 seconds x 90% + 5 seconds x 5%). Also, as shown in FIG. 887(b), a winning short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (the range of "0 to 999") as a fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol is won.

From these provisions, when the zone table 202dy2 is referenced, the fluctuation time when the first special symbol is drawn is fixed at 60 seconds, while the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is drawn is an average of 3 seconds, so that while the first special symbol is drawn once, an average of 20 second special symbol drawings can be performed. In other words, an extremely advantageous state is created in which the unfavorable first special symbol, which determines an unfavorable normal jackpot with a 50% probability when a jackpot is won, is rarely drawn, and only the favorable second special symbol, which determines a guaranteed jackpot when a jackpot is won, is drawn, so that when the zone table 202dy2 is referenced and a fluctuation pattern is selected (high probability jackpot rate super UP zone), the player can feel great joy.

Next, referring to FIG. 887(c), the details of the table 202dy3 for the probability change and time reduction described above will be explained. FIG. 887(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the table 202dy3 for the probability change and time reduction. As shown in FIG. 887(c), the table 202dy3 for the probability change and time reduction specifies the contents common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the contents are the same as the contents of the second special symbol in the table 202dy2 for the zone (see FIG. 887(b)). Therefore, when the table 202dy3 for the probability change and time reduction is referred to, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol are both 3 seconds on average. That is, a state is formed in which the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are executed almost evenly. Therefore, compared to the state where the zone table 202dy2 is referenced (ultra-high probability increase zone), the probability of winning the jackpot by drawing the unfavorable first special symbol is higher, so the degree of advantage for the player is lower.

Next, referring to FIG. 888, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ya in this 29th control example will be described. This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ya specifies the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced to select a fluctuation pattern for each combination of the type of the last big win and the number of times the special symbol changes after the big win ends. FIG. 888 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ya in this 29th control example.

As shown in Figure 888, as a fluctuation pattern scenario after the end of the jackpots A29, C29, F29, and I29, a zone table 202dy2 (see Figure 887(b)) is associated with and defined as the period from when the special probability state is reached until the first special symbol fluctuation display has been completed once, while after the first special symbol fluctuation display has been completed once (after the second drawing of the first special symbol), a special probability/time-saving table 202dy3 (see Figure 887(c)) is associated with and defined as the fluctuation pattern scenario. As shown in FIG. 888, as a fluctuation pattern scenario after the end of the jackpots D29, G29, and J29, a zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 887(b)) is associated with the period from when the high probability state is reached until the variable display of the first special pattern has been completed two times, while a high probability state/time-saving table 202dy3 (see FIG. 887(c)) is associated with the period after the variable display of the first special pattern has been completed two times (after the third drawing of the first special pattern), regardless of the number of times the display has changed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 888, as a variation pattern scenario after the end of the jackpots E29, H29, and K29, the period from when the probability variable state is reached until the first special symbol variable display has been completed three times is specified in correspondence with the zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 887(b)), while after the first special symbol variable display has been completed three times (after the fourth drawing of the first special symbol), the probability variable/time-saving table 202dy3 (see FIG. 887(c)) is specified in correspondence with the period from when the probability variable state is reached until the first special symbol variable display has been completed three times (after the fourth drawing of the first special symbol), regardless of the number of variations.

According to these regulations, when the jackpot A29, C29, F29, or I29 is won, the probability rate super UP zone (a state in which only the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol is executed) lasts for only 60 seconds, which is the period for one display of the first special symbol, while when the jackpot D29, G29, or J29 is won, the probability rate super UP zone lasts for 120 seconds, which is the period for two displays of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot E29, H29, or K29 is won, the probability rate super UP zone lasts for 180 seconds, which is the period for three displays of the first special symbol. Therefore, since the number of drawings of the second special symbol that can be executed during the probability rate super UP zone can be made different depending on the type of jackpot, even if a common game state (probability state) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, a novel gameplay in which the expectation of a probability rate jackpot is made different depending on the type of jackpot can be realized. This can further increase players' interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 888, as a variation pattern scenario after the end of jackpot B29 (a jackpot type in which the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a time-saving state), the table 202dy3 for sure-change/time-saving (see FIG. 887(c)) is associated with the number of variations until the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn reaches 100 (i.e., within the time-saving number of times), while the table 202dy1 for normal is associated with the range in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn is 101 or more. Thus, within the time-saving number of times, the drawing of the unfavorable first special symbol and the drawing of the favorable second special symbol are executed evenly, while after the time-saving number of times has elapsed and the transition to the normal state has occurred, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly longer (to 600 seconds), forming a state in which only the drawing of the first special symbol is executed with a low degree of advantage. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 888, in the normal state after the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are initialized and before a jackpot is won, regardless of the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change, the disadvantageous normal table 202dy1 is uniformly associated and specified. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly advantageous when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, and thus preventing the hall from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, referring to FIG. 889, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 29th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 889 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 29th control example. As shown in FIG. 889, the RAM 223 in this 29th control example differs from the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 28th control example in that a zone timer 223ya has been added. It also differs in that the end time timer 223xa in the 28th control example has been deleted.

The in-zone timer 223ya is a timer that indicates the period to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the remaining time until the probability rate super-UP zone ends. When the lottery for the first special symbol is executed while the probability rate super-UP zone is continuing, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (see S9725A in FIG. 893). In addition, the value is periodically subtracted and updated (each time the performance update process 29 (see FIG. 892) is executed) as time passes (see S5442 in FIG. 892). By configuring the third symbol display device 81 to display the remaining time corresponding to this in-zone counter 223ya, the time until the probability rate super-UP zone ends can be clearly shown to the player.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 29th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 29th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 890 and FIG. 891. First, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (Y361) in this 29th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 890. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (Y361) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) in the above-mentioned 28th control example, and is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871). FIG. 890 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (Y361).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in this 29th control example, the same processes as the Y501-Y503 and Y505-Y508 processes in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) in the 28th control example described above are executed in Y501-Y503 and Y505-Y508, respectively. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in this 29th control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern scenario table 202ya and the special symbol 1 variation count counter is identified (Y551), the identified variation pattern table is read out (Y552), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Although not shown in the figure, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 29 executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 28 (Y871) is also modified so that the fluctuation pattern table is read out by the same processes as the processes Y551 and Y552 of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890).

Next, referring to FIG. 891, the details of the jackpot control process 29 (Y1031) in this 29th control example will be described. This jackpot control process 29 (Y1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 28 (see FIG. 879) in the 28th control example described above, and, like the jackpot control process 28 (see FIG. 879), is a process for executing various controls during the execution of a jackpot game. FIG. 891 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 29 (Y1031).

In the jackpot control process 29 (see FIG. 891) in this 29th control example, the processes Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, Y11641, Y11642, and Y11645 are the same as the processes Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, Y11641, Y11642, and Y11645 in the jackpot control process 28 (see FIG. 879) in the 28th control example described above.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 29 (see FIG. 891) in this 29th control example, when the processing of S11642 or S11645 is completed, a fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is then identified (Y11651), information indicating the identified scenario is stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203ya (Y11652), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 29th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 29th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 892 to Fig. 894. First, details of the performance update process 29 (S4181) in this 29th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 892. This performance update process 29 (S4181) is a process executed in place of the performance update process 28 (see Fig. 880) in the above-mentioned 28th control example, and is a process for periodically (every execution interval of the main process) updating various performance modes being executed, similar to the performance update process 28 (see Fig. 880). Fig. 892 is a flowchart showing this performance update process 29 (S4181).

When this performance update process 29 (see FIG. 892) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the in-zone timer 223ya is greater than 0 (S5441), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (S5441: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5441 that the timer value of the in-zone timer 223ya is greater than 0 (S5441: Yes), this means that a high probability bonus rate super-UP zone has been set, so first, the value of the in-zone timer 223ya is updated by subtracting it (S5442), and then the remaining time display until the high probability bonus rate super-UP zone ends is updated according to the updated timer value (S5443).

When the processing of S5443 is completed, next, in the processing of S5442, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223ya in the zone has been updated to 0 (S5444), and if it is determined that it has been updated to 0 (S5444: Yes), a performance indicating the end of the super-high probability increase zone is executed (S5445), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5444, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223ya in the zone has not been updated to 0 (S5444: No), the processing of S5445 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

By executing this effect update process 29 (see FIG. 892), when a high probability zone is set during a high probability state, the remaining time until the zone ends can be accurately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand how much time remains in an advantageous state in which only the drawing of the second special symbol is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 893, the details of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 29 (S5121A) in this 29th control example will be described. This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 29 (S5121A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881) in the above-mentioned 28th control example, and, like the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881), it is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 893 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 29 (S5121A) in this 29th control example.

In the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 29 (see FIG. 893) in this 29th control example, the processes of S9706A, S9711A, and S9712A are the same as the processes of S9706A, S9711A, and S9712A in the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881) in the 28th control example. In addition, in the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 29 (see FIG. 893) in this 29th control example, if the process of S9711A determines that the current game state is a probability variable state (S9711A: Yes), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (S9721A).

In the process of S9721A, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a 60-second fluctuation pattern (S9721A: No), this means that the current situation is not in the high probability rate super-UP zone, and the process proceeds to S9712A. On the other hand, in the process of S9721A, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a 60-second fluctuation pattern (S9721A: Yes), this means that the current situation is in the high probability rate super-UP zone, and the process then proceeds to S9725A, where it is determined whether or not the first special symbol fluctuation display is the first time after the end of the jackpot (S9722A), and if the first special symbol fluctuation display is the first time (S9722A: Yes), the process determines the fluctuation display mode with a performance that notifies the player of the entry into the high probability rate super-UP zone (S9724A), and the process proceeds to S9725A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9722A that the first special symbol is not being displayed for the first time (S9722A: No), a display mode with a presentation that notifies the continuation of the high probability zone is determined (S9723A), and the process proceeds to S9725A. In the process of S9725A, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set for the timer value of the in-zone timer 223ya (S9725A), and the process proceeds to S9706.

Next, referring to FIG. 894, the details of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 29 (S5221A) in this 29th control example will be described. This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 29 (S5221A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882) in the 28th control example described above, and is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol, just like the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882).

In the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 29 (see FIG. 894) in this 29th control example, the processes S9611, S9622A, and S9651A are identical to the processes S9611, S9622A, and S9651A of the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882) in the 28th control example described above. In addition, in the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 29 (see FIG. 894) in this 29th control example, if it is determined in the process of S9651A that the current game state is a high probability state (S9651A: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the timer 223ya in the zone is greater than 0 (i.e., in the high probability rate super-up zone) (S9661A), and if it is determined that the value of the timer 223ya in the zone is 0 (i.e., not in the high probability rate super-up zone) (S9661A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9661A, if it is determined that the value of the in-zone timer 223ya is greater than 0 (i.e., in the super-high probability UP zone) (S9661A: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time period during which the second special pattern changes is shorter than the value of the in-zone timer 223ya (S9662A), and if it is determined that the current time period during which the second special pattern changes is not shorter than the value of the in-zone timer 223ya (it is longer) (S9662A: No), processing proceeds to S9622A. In contrast, in the process of S9622A, if it is determined that the time for which the second special symbol changes this time is shorter than the value of the in-zone timer 223ya (S9662A: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result is a small win or not (S9663A), and if it is determined that it is a small win (S9663A: Yes), a variable display mode accompanied by a cutoff effect of the high probability rate super-up zone (see FIG. 883(b) and FIG. 884) is determined (S9664A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9663A, if it is determined that the lottery result for the second special symbol this time is not a small win (S9663A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example, after the probability variable state is set, a favorable state (ultra-high probability variable rate UP zone) is formed in which the lottery for the highly favorable second special symbol is executed frequently (the lottery for the unfavorable first special symbol is difficult to execute) over the period until the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the unfavorable side) is completed a specific number of times (1 to 3 times) that is predetermined for each jackpot type. Specifically, a simultaneous variable specification is adopted in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be significantly longer than the variable display of the second special symbol from the time the probability variable state is set until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed at least a specific number of times (any of 1 to 3 times). In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed multiple times (around 20 times) during the execution of one variable display of the first special symbol. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set a high-advantage state (ultra-high probability increase zone) during one high-advantage state where only the highly advantageous second special symbol is drawn, and a state where the frequency of drawing the first special symbol, which has a lower advantage than the high-advantage state, is higher, so that it is possible to prevent the game during the high-advantage state from becoming monotonous. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 29th control example, the state in which the variation pattern is selected by referring to the zone table 202dy2 (extra-high probability rate UP zone) is set only between the transition to the high probability rate state and the end of the specific number of times (any of 1 to 3 times) of the variation display of the first special symbol, but the setting timing of the extra-high probability rate UP zone is not limited to this. For example, the extra-high probability rate UP zone may also be set (the variation pattern is selected by referring to the zone table 202dy2) for the period between the transition to the time-saving state and the end of the specific number of times of the variation display of the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to add variety to the game even in a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage (disadvantageous), so that it is possible to further prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, the extra-high probability rate UP zone may be configured to be set not immediately after the start of the high probability rate state, but from the middle of the high probability rate state (for example, after the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are completed a total of 50 times). This configuration makes the player think that they do not want to win the jackpot until they reach the super-high probability zone (they want to win the jackpot after they reach the super-high probability zone), so it is possible to realize innovative gameplay that makes the player hope that they will continue to lose the special symbol lottery until a certain condition is met (the number of lotteries that sets the super-high probability zone is reached) even though a favorable high probability state has been set.

In the 29th control example, the state in which the variation pattern is selected by referring to the zone table 202dy2 (extra high probability rate UP zone) is limited to the time when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed a maximum of three times in one high probability state, but the number of variations for which the extra high probability rate UP zone is set is not limited to this and can be set arbitrarily. For example, in some jackpot types, the extra high probability rate UP zone may be configured to continue until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed five or ten times. Also, a jackpot type may be set in which the extra high probability rate UP zone is always set from the start to the end of the high probability state. By configuring in this way, the variation of the extra high probability rate UP zone can be further diversified, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this 29th control example, similar to the 28th control example described above, a specification is adopted in which, when one special pattern is in the process of displaying a change corresponding to a jackpot, even if a drawing for the other special pattern is executed, the jackpot cannot be won (only a complete miss or a small win can be won), but this is not limited to this, and a specification may be adopted in which, as in the 27th control example described above, even while one special pattern is in the process of displaying a jackpot, a jackpot can be drawn for the other special pattern, and the drawing for the special pattern that was stopped and displayed first with a winning pattern (small win or jackpot pattern) becomes valid (the changing display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped with a missing pattern). By configuring it in this way, even if a jackpot with the first special symbol is won in the probability super UP zone, where the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a significantly longer time (60 seconds) than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is possible to force a jackpot with the second special symbol being drawn in a lottery afterwards and forcibly stopping the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol as a miss, thereby further improving the occurrence rate of jackpots with the advantageous second special symbol in the probability super UP zone.

In the 29th control example, in the probability variable state, whether to refer to the zone table 202dy2 or the probability variable/time-saving table 202dy3 was determined based only on the number of times the first special symbol was drawn, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether to refer to the zone table 202dy2 or the probability variable/time-saving table 202dy3 by referring to both the number of times the first special symbol was drawn and the number of times the second special symbol was drawn. More specifically, for example, in the probability variable state set after the end of the jackpot A29, C29, F29, and I29, the zone table 202dy2 may be referenced until the first special symbol is drawn once (the variable display of the first special symbol is completed once) or until the second special symbol is drawn 30 times, and after either of the conditions is established, the probability variable/time-saving table 202dy3 may be referenced. Similarly, in the probability change state set after the end of the jackpot D29, G29, or J29, the zone table 202dy2 may be referred to until the first special symbol is drawn twice (the variable display of the first special symbol is completed twice) or the second special symbol is drawn 60 times, and after either of the conditions is met, the probability change/time-saving table 202dy3 may be referred to. Furthermore, in the probability change state set after the end of the jackpot E29, H29, or K29, the zone table 202dy2 may be referred to until the first special symbol is drawn three times (the variable display of the first special symbol is completed three times) or the second special symbol is drawn 90 times, and after either of the conditions is met, the probability change/time-saving table 202dy3 may be referred to. When configured in this way, even if the game ball does not enter the right first ball entrance 64r after entering the special probability state and the game balls are biased toward the second ball entrance 640, the special probability rate super-up zone can be prevented from continuing for too long (the highly advantageous second special pattern can be drawn too frequently), and the player can be prevented from becoming overly advantageous.

<30th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 30th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 895 to FIG. 903. In the above-mentioned 29th control example, after the probability variable state is set, a lottery for the highly advantageous second special symbol is frequently executed (lottery for the unfavorable first special symbol is difficult to execute) over a period until the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the unfavorable side) is completed a predetermined number of times for each big win type. In particular, a simultaneous variable specification that can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel) is adopted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be significantly longer than the variable display of the second special symbol from the time the probability variable state is set until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed at least a specific number of times (any of 1 to 3 times). In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed multiple times (around 20 times) during the execution of one variable display of the first special symbol.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the 30th control example is configured to have different types of special symbols that are likely to be executed in the probability variable state set in the time-saving state of the normal symbol and in the time-saving state. That is, in the probability variable state, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are controlled to be executed almost equally, while in the time-saving state, a configuration is formed in which only the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, similar to the probability variable rate super UP zone in the 29th control example. In addition, in the 30th control example, a specification is adopted in which the probability variable state ends when the predetermined first number of special symbol drawings are completed in the probability variable state (so-called ST-type probability variable state), and the number of times (second number of times) from when the probability variable state is set to when the high probability probability variable state of the special symbol ends is greater than the number of times (first number of times) from when the probability variable state is set to when the high probability probability variable state of the special symbol ends. In other words, when the probability variable state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, first, the probability variable state continues until the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot reaches the first number (10 times), and the game state is set to a low probability state for the special symbol by the first number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot, and the time-saving state continues thereafter until the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot reaches the second number (50 times). Also, when 50 special symbol drawings are performed, the time-saving state for the normal symbol is also ended and the game state is set to the normal state. For this reason, in the 30th control example, when the special jackpot ends, a special jackpot state is first formed in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal (1/25), but the drawing of the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage (the rate of special jackpots), and the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage (the rate of special jackpots), are performed almost equally (half and half). When the number of times the special symbols are drawn reaches the first number (10 times), a time-saving state is formed in which the jackpot probability becomes the normal probability (1/100), but only the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol is performed. This makes it possible to set the special jackpot state and the time-saving state, which are configured with different advantages (jackpot probability, frequency of drawing the second special symbol), in order, so that a novel operation in which the playability is switched midway (advantages and disadvantages are exchanged) can be realized. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 30th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 29th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 895, a characteristic presentation mode in this 30th control example will be described. FIG. 895(a) is a diagram showing a presentation mode during the probability variable state in this 30th control example, and FIG. 895(b) is a diagram showing a presentation mode during the time-saving state in this 30th control example. Here, as described above, this 30th control example is configured to provide different benefits (advantages) for both the probability variable state and the time-saving state. Specifically, the probability variable state is configured to be more advantageous than the time-saving state in that the probability of a jackpot is higher than that of the time-saving state, while the time-saving state is configured to be more advantageous than the probability variable state in that the rate of probability variable jackpots when a jackpot is won is higher than that of the probability variable state. For this reason, it is not possible to determine in general which game state is more advantageous. Therefore, in this 30th control example, both the probability variable state and the time-saving state are unified under the name "chance time".

As shown in FIG. 895(a), in the probability bonus state in this 30th control example, a left display area DmL for executing a variable display performance of the third pattern indicating the lottery result of the first special pattern with a low degree of advantage is formed in approximately the left half of the main display area Dm, and a right display area DmR for executing a variable display performance of the third pattern indicating the lottery result of the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage is formed in approximately the right half. In the left display area DmL, an enemy character 811 is displayed to suggest that the degree of advantage is relatively low in the event of a jackpot, and in the right display area DmR, an adventurer character 801 is displayed to suggest that the degree of advantage is relatively high in the event of a jackpot. This allows the player to easily understand which display area is more advantageous in announcing a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 895(a), the characters "Chance Time A", "High chance of winning", and "Medium chance of winning" are displayed in the display area HR3 formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the currently set chance time is Chance Time A (Chance state) in which the chance of winning is high but there is a possibility of a normal jackpot. Also, information indicating the remaining number of times that the special symbol will be drawn until the chance time ends (until the chance state and the time-saving state after the chance state ends) is displayed in the display area Dm1. The example in FIG. 895(a) illustrates a state in which the fifth variable display has started in the chance state, and the characters "45 times remaining until the chance time ends" are displayed. Also, the characters "Chance time in progress" are displayed in the small display area Ds2.

Next, referring to FIG. 895(b), the presentation mode in the time-saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 895(b), in the time-saving state, as in the super-high probability UP zone (see FIG. 883(a)) in the 29th control example described above, the variable display of the third pattern, which indicates the lottery result of the highly advantageous second special pattern, is executed in most of the main display area Dm, and the variable display presentation of the third pattern, which indicates the lottery result of the first special pattern, is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous (hard to see) manner in the small display area Dm8a formed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. This allows attention to be drawn to the variable display presentation of the third pattern, which corresponds to the lottery of the highly advantageous and frequently executed second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 895(b), the characters "Chance Time B", "Low chance of winning", and "High chance of winning" are displayed in the display area HR3 formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the currently set chance time is Chance Time B (Chance state), which has a low chance of winning but an extremely high chance of winning a chance jackpot. Note that, in the same way as when the chance state (Chance Time A) is set (see FIG. 895(a)), information indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol will be drawn until the chance time ends (until the chance state and the time-saving state after the chance state ends) is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the characters "Chance Time in progress" are displayed in the small display area Ds2.

<Electrical configuration in 30th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 896(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 30th control example will be described. FIG. 896(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 30th control example. As shown in FIG. 896(a), the ROM 202 in the 30th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 29th control example described above (see FIG. 885(a)) in that the jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 29 table 202by, the fluctuation pattern 30 table 202dα is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern 29 table 202dy, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ya is deleted. The other configurations are the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 29th control example described above (see FIG. 885(a)), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 897, the details of the jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα in this 30th control example will be described. FIG. 897 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα in this 30th control example. As shown in FIG. 897, in this jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα, the jackpot type that can be selected for each type of special pattern and the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 897, as the jackpot type of the first special pattern, "jackpot A30" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B30" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 of "50 to 99". "Jackpot A30" is a jackpot (4-round variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the game state after the jackpot is set to a variable state. In addition, "jackpot B30" is a jackpot (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random number values "0-99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random number values each associated with "jackpot A30" and "jackpot B30", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A30" will be determined and the probability that "jackpot B30" will be determined are both 50% (50/100).

When a special jackpot is hit and the special jackpot state is set, 10 special jackpots and 50 time-saving jackpots are set, so the special jackpot state is set from the end of the special jackpot until 10 special symbol drawings are performed, and the time-saving jackpot state is set from 10 to 50 special symbol drawings, and the normal jackpot state is set thereafter. In contrast, when a normal jackpot is hit and the time-saving jackpot state is set, 25 time-saving jackpots are set, so the time-saving jackpot state is set from the end of the normal jackpot until 25 special symbol drawings are performed, and the normal jackpot state is then restored. In other words, when a special jackpot is hit, 10 special jackpots and 40 time-saving jackpots are set, while when a normal jackpot is hit, only 25 time-saving jackpots are set, so a special jackpot is more advantageous than a normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 897, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "jackpot C30" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 24", "jackpot D30" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 34", and "jackpot E30" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". "Jackpot C30" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot has ended (10-round variable jackpot). "Jackpot D30" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds and the most advantageous variable state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot has ended (8-round variable jackpot). Furthermore, the "jackpot E30" is a jackpot (4-round jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most favorable jackpot state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot is ended. Of the 100 random numbers "0-99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the random numbers associated with "jackpot C30", "jackpot D30", and "jackpot E30" are 25, 10, and 65, respectively, so that when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C30" will be determined is 25% (25/100), the probability that "jackpot D30" will be determined is 10% (10/100), and the probability that "jackpot E30" will be determined is 65% (65/100). Therefore, if a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, the majority of the time the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds) is set, but no matter which jackpot type is selected, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a highly advantageous probability state, so the drawing of the second special symbol can be said to be a more advantageous drawing than the drawing of the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 898(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern 30 table 202dα in this 30th control example will be described. FIG. 898(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern 30 table 202dα in this 30th control example. As shown in FIG. 898(a), the fluctuation pattern 30 table 202dα in this 30th control example is composed of at least a normal table 202dα1 that is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a normal state, a time-saving table 202dα2 that is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a time-saving state, and a probability variable table 202dα3 that is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a probability variable state. Of these, the normal table 202dα1 has the same regulation contents as the normal table 202dy1 of the fluctuation pattern 29 table 202dy in the 29th control example described above (regulation contents in which the fluctuation time ranges from 7 to 140 seconds is selected depending on the lottery result when the first special symbol is drawn, while the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is always selected when the second special symbol is drawn), so detailed explanation is omitted here.

Figure 898 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving table 202dα2 in this 30th control example. As shown in Figure 898 (b), the time-saving table 202dα2 specifies a long miss fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60,000 ms (60 seconds) in correspondence with the entire range (range "0 to 999") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take as the fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol is lost. Also, a long win fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60,000 ms (60 seconds) in correspondence with the entire range (range "0 to 999") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take as the fluctuation pattern when the first special symbol is hit is specified.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 898(b), as a fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol misses (complete miss or small win), a miss short fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 1000 ms (1 second) is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 49", a miss short fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 949", and a miss short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "950 to 999". In other words, 50 random number values (counter values) are specified in correspondence with a miss short fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 1 second, 900 random number values (counter values) are specified in correspondence with a miss short fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and 50 random number values (counter values) are specified in correspondence with a miss short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds. Since the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", when the second special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is a miss, the probability that a 1-second fluctuation time is selected is 5% (50/1000), the probability that a 3-second fluctuation time is selected is 90% (900/1000), and the probability that a 5-second fluctuation time is selected is 5% (50/1000). Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the second special symbol is missed is 3 seconds (1 second x 5% + 3 seconds x 90% + 5 seconds x 5%). Also, as shown in FIG. 898(b), a winning short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (the range of "0 to 999") as a fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol is won.

From these provisions, when the time-saving table 202dα2 is referenced, the variable time when the first special symbol is drawn is fixed at 60 seconds, while the variable time when the second special symbol is drawn is an average of 3 seconds, so that an average of 20 drawings of the second special symbol can be performed while one drawing of the first special symbol is performed. In other words, an advantageous state is created in which the drawings of the disadvantageous first special symbol, which determines an unfavorable normal jackpot with a 50% probability when a jackpot is won, are rarely performed, and only the drawings of the advantageous second special symbol, which determines a special jackpot when a jackpot is won, can be performed. Therefore, the time-saving state can be configured to be more advantageous than the special jackpot state in terms of the rate at which the special jackpot state is granted when a jackpot is won.

Next, the details of the variable probability table 202dα3 described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 898(c). FIG. 898(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the variable probability table 202dα3. As shown in FIG. 898(c), the variable probability table 202dα3 has common contents for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the contents are the same as the contents of the second special symbol in the time-saving table 202dα2 (see FIG. 898(b)). Therefore, when the variable probability table 202dα3 is referenced, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol are both 3 seconds on average. In other words, a state is formed in which the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are executed almost evenly. For this reason, compared to the time-saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is higher in the probability-changing state, so in terms of the game state that is set when a jackpot is won, the probability-changing state is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 30th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 30th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 899 to FIG. 902. First, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (Y371) in the 30th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 899. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (Y371) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in the 29th control example described above, and is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890). FIG. 899 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (Y371).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 30 (see FIG. 899) in this 30th control example, the same processes as the Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y552 processes in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in the 29th control example described above are executed in Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y552 processes in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in the 29th control example described above are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 30 (see FIG. 899) in this 30th control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the current game state is identified (Y561), and the process proceeds to Y552.

Although not shown in the figure, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 30 executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 29 is also modified so that the fluctuation pattern table is read out by a process similar to the process of Y561 in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 30 (see FIG. 899).

Next, referring to FIG. 900, the details of the start-of-fluctuation update process 30 (Y372) in this 30th control example will be described. This start-of-fluctuation update process 30 (Y372) is a process executed in place of the start-of-fluctuation update process (see FIG. 872) in the 29th control example (and the 28th control example) described above, and is a process for updating the game state at the start of fluctuation, similar to the start-of-fluctuation update process (see FIG. 872). FIG. 900 is a flowchart showing this start-of-fluctuation update process 30 (Y372).

In the process of updating 30 at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 900) in the 30th control example, the same process as each of the processes of Y631 to Y633 in the process of updating 30 at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 872) in the 29th control example (and the 28th control example) is executed in the process of updating 30 at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 872) in the 29th control example (and the 28th control example) is executed. In addition, when the process of updating 30 at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 900) in the 30th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter 203αa is 1 (Y641), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203αa is 1 (Y641: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter 203αa is decremented by 1 to update it to 0 (Y642), a state command indicating a transition to a time-saving state is set (Y643), and the process is transitioned to Y631. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y641 that the value of the probability bonus counter 203αa is not 1 (Y641: No), this means that it is not time to subtract the probability bonus count, so the processing of Y642 and Y643 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Y631.

Next, referring to FIG. 901, the details of the update process 30 (Y751) when fluctuation stops in this 30th control example will be described. This update process 30 (Y751) when fluctuation stops is a process executed in place of the update process (see FIG. 875) when fluctuation stops in the 29th control example (and the 28th control example) described above, and like the update process (see FIG. 875) when fluctuation stops, it is a process executed to update the game state when fluctuation of the special pattern stops. FIG. 901 is a flowchart showing this update process 30 (Y751) when fluctuation stops.

In the process of updating 30 at the time of the fluctuation stop (see FIG. 901) in the 30th control example, the same process as that of updating 30 at the time of the fluctuation stop (see FIG. 875) in the 29th control example (and the 28th control example) in the 29th control example (see FIG. 875) in the process of updating 30 at the time of the fluctuation stop (see Y635 to Y638) is executed. In addition, when the process of updating 30 at the time of the fluctuation stop (see FIG. 901) in the 30th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter 203αa is greater than 0 (Y645), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203αa is greater than 0 (Y645: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter 203αa is updated by subtracting 1 (Y646), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter 203αa after subtraction has become 0 (Y647). In the process of Y647, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203αa after subtraction has become 0 (Y647: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to a time-saving state is set (Y648), and the process proceeds to Y635. In contrast, in the process of Y647, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203αa after subtraction has not become 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (Y647: No), the process of Y648 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y635. In addition, in the process of Y645, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203αa is not a value greater than 0 (i.e., is 0) (Y645: No), this means that it is not the time to subtract the probability variation number, so the processes of Y646 to Y648 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y635.

Next, referring to FIG. 902, the details of the jackpot control process 30 (Y1041) in this 30th control example will be described. This jackpot control process 30 (Y1041) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 29 (see FIG. 879) in the 29th control example described above, and, like the jackpot control process 29 (see FIG. 879), is a process for executing various controls during the execution of a jackpot game. FIG. 902 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 30 (Y1041) in this 30th control example.

In the jackpot control process 30 (see FIG. 902) in this 30th control example, the same processes as those in the jackpot control process 29 (see FIG. 879) in the 29th control example described above are executed in the processes Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, and Y11641. In the jackpot control process 30 (see FIG. 902) in this 30th control example, if the process in Y11641 determines that the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (Y11641: Yes), the counter value of the guaranteed jackpot counter 203αa is set to 10 and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 50 (Y11661), and the process moves to Y11633. In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of Y11641 that the current jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot (it is a normal jackpot) (Y11641: No), the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 25 (Y11662), and processing proceeds to Y11633.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 30th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 30th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 903. Fig. 903 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process 30 in the 30th control example. This status command receiving process 30 (S4231A) is a process executed in place of the status command receiving process 5 (see Fig. 263) in the 29th control example (and the 5th control example) described above, and is a process for performing control according to information indicating the game status notified by the main control device 110 by the status command, similar to the status command processing 5 (see Fig. 263).

In the state command reception process 30 (see FIG. 903) in this 30th control example, the same processes as S9001, S9003, S9005, and S9009 in the state command reception process 5 (see FIG. 263) in the 29th control example (and the 5th control example) are executed in each of the processes S9001, S9003, S9005, and S9009. In addition, in the state command reception process 30 (see FIG. 903) in this 30th control example, if it is determined in the process of S9003 that a state command indicating a change to the normal state has been received (S9003: Yes), the presentation mode for the normal state is set (S9021A) and this process ends.

In addition, in the state command reception process 30 (see FIG. 903) in this 30th control example, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that a state command indicating that the game state has been changed to a time-saving state has been received (S9005: Yes), a presentation mode indicating entry into Chance Time B is set (S9022A), and this process ends. In addition, in the state command reception process 30 (see FIG. 903) in this 30th control example, if it is determined in the process of S9009 that a state command indicating that the game state has been changed to a probability variable state has been received (S9009: Yes), a presentation mode indicating entry into Chance Time A is set (S9023A), and this process ends.

By executing this state command reception process 30 (see FIG. 903), it is possible to set the presentation style (see FIG. 895) according to the type of chance time, allowing the player to easily understand the gameplay according to the type of chance time.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 30th control example, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed are different in the probability variable state set in the time-saving state of the normal symbol and the time-saving state, so that different benefits are given to both game states. Specifically, in the probability variable state, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are controlled to be executed almost equally, while in the time-saving state, a favorable state is formed in which only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the 30th control example, a specification is adopted in which the probability variable state ends when the lottery for the special symbol is completed a predetermined first number of times in the probability variable state (so-called ST-type probability variable state), and the number of times (second number of times) from when the probability variable state is set to when the high probability probability variable state of the special symbol ends is greater than the number of times (first number of times) from when the probability variable state is set to when the high probability probability variable state of the special symbol ends. In other words, when the probability variable state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, first, the probability variable state continues until the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot reaches the first number (10 times), and the game state is set to a low probability state for the special symbol by the first number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot, and the time-saving state continues thereafter until the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot reaches the second number (50 times). Also, when 50 special symbol drawings are performed, the time-saving state for the normal symbol is also ended and the game state is set to the normal state. For this reason, in the 30th control example, when the special jackpot ends, a special jackpot state is first formed in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal (1/25), but the drawing of the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage (the rate of special jackpots), and the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage (the rate of special jackpots), are performed almost equally (half and half). When the number of times the special symbols are drawn reaches the first number (10 times), a time-saving state is formed in which the jackpot probability becomes the normal probability (1/100), but only the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol is performed. This makes it possible to set the special jackpot state and the time-saving state, which are configured with different advantages (jackpot probability, frequency of drawing the second special symbol), in order, so that a novel operation in which the playability is switched midway (advantages and disadvantages are exchanged) can be realized. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this 30th control example, like the 28th and 29th control examples described above, a specification is adopted in which, when one special pattern is in the process of displaying a change corresponding to a jackpot, even if a lottery for the other special pattern is executed, the jackpot cannot be won (only a complete miss or a small win can be won), but this is not limited to this, and a specification may be adopted in which, like the 27th control example described above, a jackpot can be drawn for the other special pattern even while one special pattern is in the process of displaying a jackpot, and the lottery for the special pattern that was stopped and displayed first with a winning pattern (small win or jackpot pattern) becomes valid (the changing display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped with a missing pattern). By configuring it this way, even if a player wins a jackpot with the first special symbol in a time-saving state in which the change time of the first special symbol is set to a significantly longer time (60 seconds) than the change time of the second special symbol, it is possible for a subsequent lottery for the second special symbol to result in a jackpot and forcibly stop the jackpot change of the first special symbol as a miss, thereby further improving the rate of jackpots with the advantageous second special symbol in the time-saving state.

In the 30th control example, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are executed almost evenly in the high probability state, while the time-saving state is configured to make the change time of the first special symbol significantly longer than the change time of the second special symbol so that only the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage, is executed. Conversely, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol may be executed almost evenly in the time-saving state, while the change time of the first special symbol is significantly longer than the change time of the second special symbol so that only the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage, is executed. By configuring in this way, the advantage in the high probability state can be further increased, and it can be more strongly expected that a jackpot will be won during the high probability state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further increased.

In this 30th control example, the variation time of the first special symbol is made different between the high probability state and the time-saving state (the variation pattern table that is referenced is made different), thereby making the frequency of drawing the first special symbol, which has a lower degree of advantage, different, and making the possibility of winning the jackpot different in the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a higher degree of advantage, different, but this is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table that is referenced in the first half and second half of the high probability state may be made different, making the playability different between the first half and second half of the high probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent play in the high probability state from becoming monotonous.

In the 30th control example, the probability of a special symbol being drawn the first number of times (10 times) in the probability of a special symbol being drawn is changed to the time-saving state, and the probability of a special symbol being drawn the second number of times (40 times) after the time-saving state is changed to the normal state. However, the number of times the probability of a special symbol being drawn may not be fixed. For example, in the probability of a special symbol being drawn, a lottery (falling lottery) may be performed each time a lottery for a special symbol is performed to determine whether or not to fall from a high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state of the special symbol, and the first special symbol may be configured to change for a longer period of time (the frequency of drawing the first special symbol with a lower degree of advantage is reduced) when the fall lottery is won and the time-saving state is reached. By configuring in this way, when a generally unpleasant situation occurs in which the special symbol falls from a high probability state to a low probability state, the frequency of drawing the second special symbol with a higher degree of advantage is increased, thereby alleviating the player's disappointment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

<First performance modification example of 26th control example>
Next, a modified example of the battle performance (see FIG. 800) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 26th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 911 to FIG. 913. In the above-mentioned 26th control example, a battle performance (operation performance) that reduces (varies) the remaining HP value (stage information) of the enemy character 880a based on a predetermined operation (repeated tap operation or long press operation) being executed on the performance button 22 (operation means) that the player can operate is configured to be executable, and when a performance result (performance result advantageous to the player) in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0" is displayed as a performance result of the battle performance, the player is configured to be notified that a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery (a special benefit advantageous to the player is granted).

Furthermore, during the presentation period in which the battle presentation is executed, a preemptive attack presentation (see FIG. 800(b)) that reduces the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a in advance is executable during the preparation period prior to the setting of the SW effective period (effective operation period) during which the player can effectively operate the presentation button 22, and the player is made aware prior to the setting of the effective operation period that there is a high possibility that the presentation result of this battle presentation will be advantageous to the player, which encourages the player to operate the presentation button 22.

However, in the 26th control example described above, if the SW effective period is set without executing a preemptive attack effect (without reducing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a in advance), then only a battle effect is executed in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a decreases toward "0" during the same SW effective period, resulting in a problem that the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22 gradually decreases.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the length of the SW effective period set in the battle effect reach is made variable, and it is configured so that when a performance result advantageous to the player can be displayed as the performance result of the battle effect reach (when the corresponding special pattern lottery results in a jackpot), a longer SW effective period is more likely to be set than when a performance result unfavorable to the player is displayed (when the corresponding special pattern lottery results in a miss).

By configuring it in this way, even if the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has not been reduced in advance, by varying the length of the period during which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a can be reduced based on the operation of the effect button 22 (SW effective period), it is possible to allow the player to predict that the result of the current battle effect is likely to be advantageous to the player.

In addition, when a battle result that is favorable to the player (a result in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0") can be displayed, a long SW effective period is easily set, so that the period required to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" can be lengthened, making it easier for the player to enjoy operating the effect button 22 for a long period of time.

Furthermore, in this modified example, when a SW valid period (5 seconds) longer than the normal SW valid period (3 seconds) is set, multiple notification timings can be set to notify the player that a long SW valid period has been set. Specifically, a first notification timing can be set to notify the player that a long SW valid period is being set before the SW valid period is actually set, and a second notification timing can be set to notify the player that a long SW valid period is being set after the SW valid period is actually set.

By configuring it in this way, players can enjoy the battle effect reach while anticipating that a long SW validity period will be set (or will be set), thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this modified example, as a notification mode for notifying the player that a SW valid period (5 seconds) longer than the normal SW valid period (3 seconds) has been set (has been set), a display mode corresponding to the difference SW valid period (2 seconds) can be displayed after displaying a valid period gauge ga4 corresponding to the normal SW valid period (3 seconds). In other words, it is configured so that it is possible for the player to understand that a long SW valid period has been set after being led to believe that the normal SW valid period has been set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected presentation to players who are watching the battle presentation reach in the hope that a long SW effective period will be set. Also, compared to when a display mode corresponding to a long SW effective period (5 seconds) is displayed from the beginning, it is possible to visually grasp how much longer the SW effective period is set compared to normal, so it is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for players to understand.

<About the performance content in the first performance modification example of the 26th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 911, the characteristic content of the various effects executed in the first modified effect of the present 26th control example will be described. The present first modified effect differs from the above-mentioned 26th control example in that the content of the effects executed in the battle effect is different, but otherwise it is the same. Detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

In this first performance variant, as in the 26th control example described above, the battle performance is configured to be executable with a first part performance (a performance executed before the SW effective period is set) and a second part performance (a performance that reduces the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the performance button 22), and the content of the performance executed during the first part performance is made different.

Now, referring to FIG. 911, the contents of the first part performance in the battle performance reach executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this first performance modification will be described. FIG. 911(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a performance in which the ally character 801a is powered up is executed as the first part performance. As shown in FIG. 911(a), when the first part performance is executed, a display mode in which the ally character 801a and the enemy character 880a confront each other is displayed, similar to the display screen of the above-mentioned 26th control example (see FIG. 800(a)), and an HP gauge 890 for indicating the HP value of the enemy character 880a is displayed. Note that, among the various display modes displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 911(a), the same display modes as those in the above-mentioned 26th control example are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this first performance variation, in addition to a preemptive attack performance that reduces the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a, the first part performance is configured to be able to execute an attack support performance that powers up the ally character 801a, and when an attack support performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 911(a), a character 801d modeled after an angel is displayed, and a performance is executed in which the character 801d powers up the ally character 801a.

To inform the player that the ally character 801a has been powered up through the attack support effect, an aura 801a1 is displayed around the ally character 801a, and the comment "Powered up with the protection of an angel" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

By configuring it in this way, the content of the effect executed as the first part effect (attack support effect) can be clearly notified to the player. Also, when the display screen shown in FIG. 911(a) is displayed, it notifies the player that ally character 801a has been powered up by the attack support effect, but it is configured in such a way that the player cannot grasp what specific effect has been imparted. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the effect that will be imparted by the attack support effect.

Next, an example of a display screen that is displayed during the second part performance that is executed after FIG. 911(a) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 911(b). FIG. 911(b) shows an example of a display screen that notifies the user that a long SW validity period will be set during the second part performance.

As shown in FIG. 911(b), in the second part performance, the display mode of the ally character 801a (ally character 801a surrounded by aura 801a1) displayed in the first part performance executed before the second part performance is displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the second part performance is being executed according to the performance result of the first part performance. In FIG. 911(b), a display mode is displayed to notify the player that a longer SW effective period than usual is set as the length of the SW effective period set during the second part performance as the performance result of the first part performance (performance effect of the attack support performance).

Specifically, "Long button occurring!!" is displayed above the display effect button Sw6b, which indicates that the effect button 22 can be operated, and a display mode corresponding to a long SW effective period (5 seconds) is displayed as the effective period gauge ga4, which indicates the length of the SW effective period. Then, a display mode with a special effect (in the figure, a mode showing light emission) is displayed as the additional period gauge ga4c, which indicates the difference (2 seconds) from the normal SW effective period (3 seconds).

In the state shown in FIG. 911(b), the second part is being performed and the SW effective period has not yet been set, so the words "Preparation for rapid fire" are displayed above the display effect button Sw6b to indicate that the SW effective period has not yet been set (preparation period). In other words, when the display mode shown in FIG. 911(b) is displayed, the player is notified that the SW effective period being set this time is longer than normal, even before the SW effective period is actually set. This makes it easier for the player to be motivated to operate the effect button 22 in an attempt to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0".

In addition, by applying a special effect to the additional period gauge ga4c, which indicates the difference from the normal SW valid period, the player can be clearly notified that the current SW valid period is longer than normal, and the player can easily visually grasp the length of the additional period.

Next, referring to FIG. 912, various display modes for notifying the player of the length of the SW effective period in the battle effect reach of this first effect variation will be described. FIG. 911(b) above shows an example of a case where the player is notified that a long SW effective period will be set at a timing (first notification timing) prior to the timing at which the SW effective period is actually set, and a display pattern for displaying the effective period gauge ga4 indicating a long SW effective period at the first notification timing has been described.

In this way, by notifying the player that a long SW effective period will be set at the first notification timing, it is possible to notify the player that a long SW effective period will be set before the SW effective period is actually set, and this makes it possible for the player to be motivated to operate the effect button 22 while being aware that the situation is likely to result in an advantageous effect.

However, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 911(b), if the additional period gauge ga4c is not displayed at the stage when the effective period gauge ga4 indicating the length of the SW effective period is displayed, the length of the set SW effective period is confirmed to be the normal length (3 seconds), which causes a problem in that the presentation effect is reduced.

In contrast to this, in this first performance variant, as shown in FIG. 912(a), when announcing that a long SW valid period is to be set at the first notification timing, a valid period gauge ga4 indicating the normal SW valid period is first displayed, and then an additional period gauge ga4c is displayed (see FIG. 912(b)). In other words, unlike the performance mode shown in FIG. 911(b), it is configured to be able to notify at the first notification timing that a long SW valid period is to be set using a time-difference performance mode in which the timing for notifying that a SW valid period is to be set differs from the timing for notifying that a long SW valid period is to be set.

By configuring it in this way, when an effect is executed to notify that a long SW valid period will be set at the first notification timing, it is possible to make the player look forward to a long SW valid period being set for a longer period. Also, even if a long SW valid period is not set, it is possible that a long SW valid period will be set at the time when FIG. 912(a) is displayed, i.e., the additional period gauge ga4c will be displayed with a delay, so it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the battle effect reach being executed early.

Now, with reference to Figs. 912(a) and (b), the specific display contents of the time difference performance mode executed at the first notification timing will be described. Fig. 912(a) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen displayed in the first half period when the time difference performance mode is set as a long button display indicating that a long SW effective period is set, and Fig. 912(b) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen in the second half period when the time difference performance mode is set.

When a time difference presentation mode is set as the second part presentation of the battle presentation reach, as shown in FIG. 912(a), the same display mode as the display mode for notifying that a normal SW valid period is set (see FIG. 801(a)) is displayed in the first half period as the display mode for notifying that a SW valid period is set, as shown in FIG. 912(a). Note that since the display mode shown in FIG. 912(a) is the same as FIG. 801(a), which shows the display example of the battle presentation reach of the 26th control example described above, the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

Then, when the first half period has passed, as shown in FIG. 912(b), an additional period gauge ga4c is additionally displayed on the valid period gauge ga4 as a display mode to inform the player that the SW valid period set this time is a long SW valid period, and a display mode with a flame Sw6a is displayed on the display effect button Sw6b as a long button display mode indicating that a long SW valid period has been set. Then, the words "Long button generated!!" and "Period extended!!" are displayed, informing the player that the SW valid period that can be operated by repeated taps is longer than usual.

The timing at which the display screen shown in FIG. 912(b) is displayed is before the SW valid period is set, and the remaining valid period ga4a indicated using the valid period gauge ga4 has not yet decreased, so the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed to the right of the valid period gauge ga4. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining valid period ga4a has been extended by the additional period gauge ga4c.

The display mode (display color) of the additional period gauge ga4c is configured to be the same as the display mode (display color) of the remaining valid period ga4a. By configuring it in this way, when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed, the player can be notified that the remaining valid period ga4a has increased in an easily understandable manner. Note that the display mode (display color) of the additional period gauge ga4c may be displayed in a display mode (display color) different from that of the remaining valid period ga4a. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily predict how much the remaining valid period ga4a has increased in the period from when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed to when the SW valid period is actually set by comparing the length of the remaining valid period ga4a and the length of the additional period gauge ga4c.

In addition, in this first modified presentation, as in the 26th control example described above, the length of the gauge indicating the remaining valid period ga4a and the degree to which the gauge decreases are used to allow the player to grasp the remaining period of the SW valid period, but this is not limited to this and a specific numerical value may be used to display it. In this case, it is sufficient to configure it so that a numerical value corresponding to the length indicated by the additional period gauge ga4c is added to the numerical value indicating the remaining valid period ga4a.

Furthermore, if the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a is configured to be variable according to the length of the remaining valid period, for example, if the display mode is configured to be variable so that the remaining valid period ga4a is "blue" when the remaining valid period ga4a has not decreased, "yellow" when the remaining valid period ga4a has decreased by 50% or more, and "red" when the remaining valid period ga4a has decreased by 90% or more, it is preferable to display "white" as the display mode of the additional period gauge ga4c, and display "blue" when the remaining period additionally displayed in the additional period gauge ga4c has decreased (when the remaining period becomes the remaining valid period ga4a before the additional period gauge ga4c was displayed). By configuring in this way, the relationship between the remaining length of the remaining valid period ga4a and the variable mode of the display mode can be unified when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed and when it is not displayed, and therefore the process of setting the display mode for indicating the remaining valid period can be simplified.

In addition, without being limited to this, even when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed, the display mode may be changed in the order of "blue," "yellow," and "red" according to the rate at which the remaining valid period ga4a decreases. By configuring it in this way, the relationship (ratio) between the time elapsed since the SW valid period was set and the remaining valid period of the SW valid period can be notified to the player in the same display mode whether the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed or not, thereby providing the player with an easy-to-understand presentation.

As described above with reference to Figures 912(a) and (b), the presentation mode in which the length of the SW valid period is notified at the first notification timing notifies the player of the length of the SW valid period to be set before the SW valid period is actually set. This allows the player to anticipate that a long SW valid period will be set until the SW valid period is actually set. However, since the player is made aware of the length of the current SW valid period at the time the SW valid period is actually set, there is a risk that a player who understands that a short SW valid period has been set will not be eager to operate the presentation button 22 during the SW valid period.

In contrast to this, in this first performance variation, the additional period gauge ga4c is configured to be able to be displayed not only at the first notification timing described above, i.e., the timing before the SW effective period is actually set, but also at a predetermined timing (second notification timing) after the SW effective period is actually set. Here, with reference to Figures 912 (c) and (d), the display content when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed at the second notification timing will be explained.

Figure 912(c) is a diagram showing a portion of the display screen displayed in the first half of the SW valid period when the long button display is executed at the second notification timing as a long button display indicating that a long SW valid period is set, and Figure 912(d) is a diagram showing a portion of the display screen in the second half of the SW valid period when the long button display is executed at the second notification timing.

As shown in FIG. 912(c), when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed at the second notification timing, even after the SW valid period is set, that is, during the period when the player is performing the rapid-fire operation, the normal length valid period gauge ga4 continues to be displayed, and a variable display is executed in which the remaining valid period ga4a decreases according to the elapsed time. In other words, even though a long SW valid period is actually set, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 displays a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to understand that a long SW valid period has been set.

After that, when the remaining valid period ga4a falls to 50% or less, the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 912(d), the SW valid period has already been set and the elapsed time ga4b is being displayed, so unlike the first notification timing, the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed connected to the left side of the valid period gauge ga4.

By configuring it in this way, even if the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed after the SW valid period is set (even if the player is notified at the second notification timing that a long SW valid period has been set), the additional period gauge ga4c and the remaining valid period ga4a can be displayed consecutively, allowing the player to easily understand that the remaining valid period ga4a has increased.

In addition, in this first presentation variant, when the player is notified that a long SW valid period has been set at the second notification timing (the timing after the SW valid period has been set), the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed near (to the left of) the valid period gauge ga4, so that the player can easily grasp the length of the SW valid period set this time (the combined length of the initially displayed valid period gauge ga4 and the additional period gauge ga4c) when the SW valid period is set. However, other configurations may be used, and for example, the remaining valid period ga4a may be increased (in Figure 912 (c), the right end line of the remaining valid period ga4a is moved to the right) by a period corresponding to the length of the SW valid period indicated in the additional period gauge ga4c (2 seconds, which is the difference between the normal length SW valid period (3 seconds) and the long SW valid period (5 seconds)). By configuring it in this way, the remaining valid period ga4a, which decreases over time (in FIG. 912(c), the right edge line of the remaining valid period ga4a moves leftward), is displayed as increasing, allowing the player to easily understand that the remaining SW valid period has increased.

In this case, the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a may be different between the display mode before the remaining period is increased and the display mode after the increase as the remaining period of the SW valid period displayed on the display surface. For example, the display color of the remaining valid period ga4a may be "yellow" as the display mode before the remaining period is increased, and the display color of the remaining valid period ga4a may be "white" as the display mode before the remaining period is increased. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand whether the remaining valid period ga4a, which indicates the remaining period of the SW valid period, is in a state where it can be increased by understanding the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a.

In the first modified presentation, when the length of the SW valid period that is actually set is notified at the second notification timing, a configuration is described in which the display mode indicating the length of the SW valid period is additionally displayed only once, but the length of the remaining SW valid period may also be additionally displayed multiple times. By configuring in this way, even if the length of the remaining SW valid period is additionally displayed at the second notification timing, it is possible to leave open the possibility that the remaining SW valid period will be additionally displayed, making it easier for the player to play while hoping that a longer SW valid period has been set.

In addition, in this first modified performance example, the length of the SW effective period that can be set is configured to be either a normal SW effective period (3 seconds) or a long SW effective period (5 seconds), but it may also be configured to select and set one SW effective period from three or more SW effective periods of different lengths.

By configuring it in this way, if the length of an already displayed SW valid period is increased midway, i.e., if a SW valid period of length 1 is displayed and a SW valid period of length different from length 1 (longer than length 1) is displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the SW valid period of length different from length 1 differs from the SW valid period that is actually set, making it easier for the player to play while expecting a longer SW valid period to be set.

In addition, in this first presentation variant, the length of the SW valid period set for execution is different from the length of the SW valid period notified to the player (the length of the displayed valid period gauge ga4), and the length shorter than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set (the length of a period that includes at least a portion of the SW valid period that is actually set) can be notified to the player, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a period (pseudo period) longer than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set can be displayed as the length of the SW valid period.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the length of the SW valid period displayed to the player (the length of the pseudo period) is longer than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set, so that when a display mode (valid period gauge ga4) indicating the length of the SW valid period is displayed, the length of the SW valid period indicated by the valid period gauge ga4 may be longer than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set, and the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 22 before the actually set SW valid period has elapsed.

When a period (pseudo period) longer than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set can be displayed as the length of the SW valid period, it is preferable to configure it to be possible to execute a shortening display effect that shortens the length of the displayed pseudo period so that the length of the displayed pseudo period matches the length of the SW valid period that is actually set. For example, it is preferable to configure it so that the rate at which the remaining valid period ga4a in the valid period gauge ga4 displayed as the pseudo period decreases is faster than the rate at which the actual SW valid period decreases, so that at least at the stage before the remaining valid period of the actual SW valid period becomes 0, the length of the remaining valid period of the SW valid period indicated by the pseudo period matches the length of the actual SW valid period.

By configuring it in this way, when the valid period gauge ga4 is displayed as a pseudo period, the player is led to believe that the SW valid period is set to be longer than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set, assuming that the remaining valid period ga4a decreases at a normal decrease rate, and then an effect is executed in which the remaining valid period ga4a is displayed decreasing at a faster rate than normal. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the decrease rate of the remaining valid period ga4a.

In addition, as a shortened display effect, a part of the remaining valid period ga4a already displayed may be hidden (deleted) to change the valid period gauge ga4 indicating the pseudo period to a display mode corresponding to the length of the SW valid period that is actually set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the valid period gauge ga4 indicating the pseudo period to the valid period gauge ga4 indicating the SW valid period that is actually set, without changing the rate at which the remaining valid period ga4a decreases. Therefore, since there is no need to execute control to change the rate at which the remaining valid period ga4a decreases, the display control process for the remaining valid period ga4a can be simplified.

<Regarding the control processing content of the first modified performance in the 26th control example>
Next, referring to Figure 913, we will explain the control processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this first presentation variant example, which differs from the control processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th control example described above.

This first performance variation differs from the 26th control example described above in that the performance content (performance mode) of the battle performance is different, and the content of the control process for determining the performance content of the battle performance is different. Specifically, it differs from the 26th control example described above in that instead of the time-saving state performance mode determination process 26 (see F3051 in FIG. 819) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the time-saving state performance mode determination process 26a (see F3051a in FIG. 913) is executed. The other processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 913 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26a (F3051a). This time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26a (F3051a) determines the presentation mode of various variable presentations to indicate the results of the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state and the presentation mode of suggestive presentations to suggest that the time-saving state will end, and executes processing to set display commands for displaying various presentations corresponding to the determined presentation mode on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It differs from the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26 (see F3051 in Figure 819) in the 26th control example described above in that the processing contents of the process to determine the presentation mode of the battle presentation (see F4206) have been changed, and that processes (F4201a to F4203a) for determining the SW effective time (operation effective period) set during the battle presentation have been added. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26a (F3051a) is executed, first, the processes F4201 to F4211 are executed, which are the same as the time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26 in the 26th control example described above (see F3051 in FIG. 819). Then, when the process of F4210 is completed, next, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the presentation pattern is determined (F4201a), and it is determined whether the determined setting information corresponds to a long operation effective period (F4202a).

If it is determined in the process of F4202a that the setting information indicates a valid operation period that is not long, i.e., is of normal length (F4202a: No), the process of F4212 is executed as is, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the process of F4202a determines that the period is long, i.e., if it determines that the setting information indicates a valid operation period that is longer than normal (F4202a: Yes), the timing of the long button notification is determined by lottery (F4203a), the process of F4212 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this first presentation variation, the process for determining the variable presentation (time-saving state presentation mode determination process 26a (see F3051a in FIG. 913)) is configured to determine the effective operation period, but without being limited to this, for example, the configuration may be such that a process for determining whether or not to increase the effective operation period is executable based on the content of the operation performed during the effective operation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operating means so that more effective operation periods can be set.

In this case, a bonus may be provided that can be granted to the player only based on the operation of the operating means during the increased effective operation period. For example, the three performance results of the battle performance can be set to "defeat," "win," and "enemy flees." If the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, "defeat" is determined, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, "win" or "enemy flees" is determined. In addition, if "win" is determined as the detection result, not only a bonus indicating a jackpot win is given, but also a second bonus indicating that the content of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (jackpot game with a large number of rounds) and that an advantageous game state (probable bonus state) will be set to be advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends.

Then, it is preferable to configure the game so that if the operation means is operated during the increased effective operation period, a "victory" is more likely to be determined as the result of the battle performance than if the operation means was operated only during the effective operation period before the increase. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means.

In addition, the content of the jackpot game that has already been determined may be changed to content that is more advantageous to the player (for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game may be increased, or a special state may be set after the jackpot game ends) based on the operation of the operating means during the increased effective operation period.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which a variable scenario that changes the presentation mode according to the passage of operation duration during the valid operation period is predefined, a scenario in which the content that changes the presentation mode to a specific mode that indicates a jackpot win can be set in a location that is referenced only when the valid operation period is extended (scenario content corresponding to an operation duration that can be continued only when the valid operation period is extended), and whether or not to extend the valid operation period can be determined based on the result of a special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, the same scenario can be used whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot or a miss, reducing the processing load on the pachinko machine 10.

<Second performance modification example in 26th control example>
Next, referring to Figures 914 to 919, we will explain the jackpot game presentation executed during a jackpot game as the second presentation variant executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 26th control example.

In this second presentation variation, as in the 18th control example described above, the jackpot game presentation is configured to be able to execute an additional presentation that notifies the player of the number of prize balls that can be won in the jackpot game currently being played, and a consecutive reserved presentation that notifies the player that consecutive jackpot games will be played, based on the content of the jackpot game currently being played and the results of a look-ahead of the special reserved symbols (winning information used in the special symbol lottery) that have already been won.

Furthermore, in this second performance variation, when it is determined that there is a special reserved symbol that will win the jackpot as a result of the pre-reading of the special reserved symbols acquired at the time the jackpot game is started, an additional performance can be executed for the jackpot game being executed, including the content of the jackpot game to be executed next. Specifically, when the jackpot game being executed is a 4R jackpot game in which four rounds are executed, and the pre-read special reserved symbols contain winning information that is the result of the special pattern lottery in which a 6R jackpot game in which six rounds are executed is executed, a pseudo additional performance can be executed that pseudo-announces the payout number corresponding to a 10R jackpot game in which ten rounds are executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the number of jackpot games actually executed, the number of rounds of jackpot games executed in one jackpot game, and the content of the jackpot game notified to the player as a jackpot game presentation.

In addition, in this second presentation variation, as a method of differentiating the number of jackpot games actually executed, the number of jackpot game rounds executed in one jackpot game, and the content of the jackpot game notified to the player as a jackpot game presentation, a pseudo consecutive hold presentation (pseudo consecutive hold presentation) can be executed during the period when one jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, in this second presentation variation, the rate at which a game state advantageous to the player (high probability state) is set as the game state set after the jackpot game ends is varied depending on the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being played, and the number of payouts (number of rounds) announced in the pseudo-addition presentation and the latter jackpot game content (number of rounds) executed in the pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation can be determined based on the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

For example, if the system is configured so that the probability of a special state is always set after the end of a 10R jackpot game, the setting condition for the presentation mode in which the payout amount for 10 rounds is displayed as a pseudo-additional presentation is configured to be established when the probability of a special state is set after the end of a jackpot game (after the end of the second jackpot game).

In other words, when a pseudo-execution of a jackpot game presentation with contents different from the contents of the jackpot game that is actually executed is performed, the configuration is such that there is no contradiction between the contents of the pseudo-executed jackpot game presentation and the relationship with the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, even when a pseudo-execution of a jackpot game presentation with contents different from the contents of the jackpot game that is actually executed is performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable about the contents of the pseudo-executed jackpot game presentation.

<About the performance content in the second performance modification example of the 26th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 914 to Fig. 916, the contents of the big win game performance executed in this second performance modification will be described. Fig. 914(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in the top-up performance, which is a part of the big win game performance, and Fig. 914(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen on which the performance result of the top-up performance is displayed. In addition, among the display screens of the big win game performance, the display elements that are the same as the display elements displayed in the big win game performance (see Fig. 607(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 18th control example are given the same symbols and their description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 914(a), the small display area Dm8 displays a display mode indicating that a special symbol has won the jackpot, allowing the player to recognize that he or she has won the jackpot with the special symbol. In addition, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit right," providing the player with easy-to-understand guidance on how to play the jackpot game.

The small display area Dm14 displays the number of consecutive jackpot games. Note that the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed in the small display area Dm14 is not the actual number of jackpot games, but the number of times that a jackpot game presentation has been executed (number of consecutive jackpot games). By configuring it in this way, even if the number of jackpot games actually executed and the number of jackpot game presentations executed differ by executing a pseudo-addition presentation or a pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation, the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed in the small display area Dm14 can be updated to correspond to the number of jackpot game presentations executed, so that a jackpot game presentation that does not feel strange to the player can be executed.

The small display area Dm15 also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot game presentation that is currently being played. In other words, when a pseudo-additional presentation is played and a jackpot game presentation that spans multiple jackpot games is played, the small display area Dm15 is configured to display the number of rounds that corresponds to the pseudo-additional presentation. By configuring it in this way, when a pseudo-additional presentation is played across multiple jackpot games, "Round 1" will not be displayed as the round number displayed in the small display area Dm15 each time a new jackpot game is played from the second time onwards, and a jackpot game presentation that does not feel strange to the player can be played.

In addition, a display area HR60 is formed on the upper right side of the display screen. This display area HR60 is composed of a display area HR60a that displays the total number of prize balls that can be paid out during a jackpot game, and a display area HR60b that displays the number of prize balls that have already been paid out, and is configured to be able to notify the player in advance of how many prize balls can be won in the jackpot game that is currently being played.

As with the display modes displayed in the small display area Dm14 and the small display area Dm15 described above, the various values displayed in the display area HR60 are configured to display values corresponding to the jackpot game presentation being performed, rather than the content of the jackpot game that is actually being performed. In other words, when a pseudo-additional presentation is performed and a jackpot game presentation spanning multiple jackpot games is performed, the total number of prize balls that can be paid out that is notified in the pseudo-additional presentation is displayed in the display area HR60a, and the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game presentation being performed is displayed in the display area HR60b. By configuring it in this way, values corresponding to the content of the jackpot game presentation being performed can be displayed in the display area HR60, so that a jackpot game presentation that does not feel strange to the player can be performed.

Figure 914 (a) shows an example of a display screen displayed in the additional effect executed in the first round of a 10R jackpot game that is executed based on winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the word "Right Hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to inform the player that the playing method to be executed during the jackpot game is right-hit play, and "444" is displayed in the small display area Dm8 as the stop display mode (symbol combination) of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when a jackpot is won.

In addition, "Jackpot x 1" is displayed in the small display area Dm14 to indicate that this is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) based on winning a jackpot in the normal state, and the letters "Round 1" are displayed in the small display area Dm15 to indicate that the current round game (first round) is the first round game. In addition, the value "600" is displayed in the display area HR60a as the total number of prize balls that can be paid out to the player in the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds) of a jackpot game that can be executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this second performance modification, and the value "60" is displayed in the display area HR60b as the number of prize balls already won during the first round of round game currently being executed.

Here, the details are omitted as they are the same as those in the 18th control example described above, but the pachinko machine 10 in this second presentation variation is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out in response to one game ball entering a specific winning port 65a in which game balls can enter during a jackpot game, and the end condition for one round of gameplay is met when 10 game balls enter the specific winning port 65a or when 30 seconds have elapsed during the round gameplay period.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 914(a), "600P" is displayed in the display area HR60a, which corresponds to the value obtained by multiplying 40 winning balls, which are the number of winning balls that can be won into the specific winning port 65a in four rounds of round play, by 15 winning balls. Also, since this shows a state in which four game balls have won into the specific winning port 65a during the first round of round play, "60P" is displayed in the display area HR60b, which corresponds to the value obtained by multiplying 4 winning balls by 15 winning balls.

Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a display area HR61 is formed in which an add-on effect is performed to increase (add to) the total number of prize balls that can be won during the ongoing jackpot game (the value displayed in the display area HR60a), and the words "Chance to add to payout number" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds to indicate that an add-on effect has been performed.

When the top-up effect is executed, multiple pieces of numerical information including numerical information for indicating the increase in value (P) relative to the value (P) displayed in display area HR60a are dynamically displayed in display area HR61, and an effect is executed in which a value corresponding to the frozen numerical information is additionally displayed in display area HR60a.

The multiple pieces of numerical information dynamically displayed in the display area HR61 correspond to the types (number of rounds) of jackpot games that can actually be played. For example, the numerical information corresponding to a 6-round jackpot game is "300P", which corresponds to the total number of prize balls for 4 rounds divided by the total number of prize balls for 6 rounds, i.e., the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value already displayed in the display area HR60a. The numerical information corresponding to an 8-round jackpot game is "600P", which corresponds to the total number of prize balls for 4 rounds divided by the total number of prize balls for 8 rounds, i.e., the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value already displayed in the display area HR60a. The numerical information corresponding to a 6-round jackpot game is "900P", which corresponds to the total number of prize balls for 10 rounds divided by the total number of prize balls for 6 rounds, i.e., the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value already displayed in the display area HR60a. The numerical information corresponding to a 4-round jackpot game is "0P", which is dynamically displayed at a speed fast enough for the player to see.

By configuring it in this way, the total number of winning balls after the additional performance is executed (the value displayed in the display area HR60a) will be a value corresponding to each type of jackpot game, making it easier for the player to believe that the additional performance is informing them of the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being played.

Therefore, even if a pseudo-additional effect is executed across multiple jackpot games, it is easy for the player to believe that a jackpot game with a large number of rounds has been executed as a single jackpot game.

When the added effect shown in FIG. 914(a) ends and the effect result is displayed in the display area HR61, the effect result display screen shown in FIG. 914(b) is displayed. In FIG. 914(b), since the jackpot game being played is a 10-round jackpot game, "+900P" is displayed in the display area HR61 as the effect result of the added effect, and "1500P" with "900P" added is displayed as the value of the display area HR60a.

Then, to indicate that the current presentation result is the most advantageous presentation result for the player (a presentation result indicating a jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds that can be executed (MAX jackpot game)), the word "MAX" is displayed near the bottom of the display area HR61, and the words "Congratulations on the limit increase" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the current presentation result is an advantageous presentation result.

Next, referring to FIG. 915, the display contents when the condition for a reserve streak is met and a jackpot game performance (pseudo MAX jackpot performance) corresponding to a MAX jackpot game is executed by a pseudo-addition performance will be described. FIG. 915(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first jackpot game of two jackpot games executed across a pseudo MAX jackpot performance, and FIG. 915(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a special symbol variation period to show the result of a special symbol lottery that will result in the second jackpot game being executed of two jackpot games executed across a pseudo MAX jackpot performance.

As shown in Figure 915(a), if the result of the pre-reading executed at a specific timing (including the start timing) during a jackpot game indicates that a reserved symbol that may result in a jackpot has been acquired (indicated by a double circle in the figure), then an additional performance is executed based on the pre-read information.

In the example shown in FIG. 915(a), the pre-reading result is that it is a 6-round jackpot game, and it is determined that winning information has been stored for a jackpot that will set a special probability state after the jackpot game ends, so an additional effect is executed so that one jackpot game effect is executed across the jackpot game currently being played (4-round jackpot game) and the next jackpot game to be executed (6-round jackpot game).

The additional effect executed in the final round (fourth round) of the first jackpot game is displayed during the special pattern change (jackpot change) that will allow the second jackpot game to be executed after the first jackpot game ends (see Figure 915 (b)).

In this case, one jackpot game presentation is executed across the first and second jackpot games, so even if a second jackpot game is executed, the value displayed in the small display area Dm14 is not updated (it remains jackpot x 1), and the display mode showing the final round number of the first jackpot game is continuously updated (added) in the small display area Dm15.

Next, referring to FIG. 916, the contents of the pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation that uses a round play executed in one jackpot play to make it appear as if multiple jackpot plays are being played will be explained. FIG. 916(a) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in which the end of the first jackpot play is pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation, and FIG. 916(b) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in which the winning of the second jackpot is pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation.

Figures 916 (a) and (b) show a pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation screen that makes it appear as if two jackpot games (a four-round jackpot game and a six-round jackpot game) have been played during a ten-round jackpot game period.

First, the same effect as that in the display area HR61 in FIG. 914(a) is executed, and an additional effect is executed for the player. As a result, as shown in FIG. 916(a), "0P" is displayed in the display area HR61 as a result of the additional effect, indicating that there are no additional prize balls available for payout, and it is announced that the current jackpot game is a 4-round jackpot. In addition, as a result of the additional effect, "V" is displayed in the display area HR62 as a display mode indicating that there is a jackpot reserve that will win the jackpot within the reserve.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the same display mode as the presentation screen shown in FIG. 916(a) is also displayed in the consecutive hold presentation that is executed when there is a jackpot hold that will actually win the jackpot among the holds.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Congratulations on getting a V" are displayed as a notification to inform the player that a series of reserved balls will be placed on hold. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to pseudo-inform the player that the jackpot game being played is a 4-round jackpot game as a result of the added effect, and that a series of reserved balls will be placed on hold, even though a 10-round jackpot game is actually being played.

This allows for a higher frequency of consecutive hold effects, whose execution conditions are difficult to meet, and improves the presentation effect.

During the interval period set between the fourth and fifth rounds of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 916(b), a display area HR63 is formed, and the pseudo symbols are displayed in a static display mode indicating a jackpot win, pseudo-notifying the player that a new jackpot win has been won. Then, in the display area Dm14, the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive wins) is added up and "Jackpot x 2" is displayed, just as in the case of a new jackpot win. Then, when the fifth round of round play actually begins, Dm15 displays "Round 1," indicating that the first round of a new jackpot game has been played.

By configuring it in this way, all information related to the jackpot game displayed on the display screen can be displayed in correspondence with the pseudo consecutive hold presentation, so that the accuracy of the pseudo consecutive hold presentation, which makes it appear to the player that multiple jackpot games are being played, is improved by using the round play executed in one jackpot game.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the system is configured to manage information indicating that a pseudo consecutive hold performance will be executed and information indicating the number of pseudo rounds displayed in the pseudo consecutive hold performance, and to match the execution timing of various performances executed during the OP period, ED period, and round period to the content of the pseudo-executed second jackpot game. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the pseudo consecutive hold performance, which makes it appear to the player that multiple jackpot games are being executed, using the round game executed in one jackpot game.

In addition, in this second performance variation, when a 10-round jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game, the above-mentioned pseudo-reserved consecutive performance is configured to be executable, and the interval period set between the 4th and 5th rounds in a 10-round jackpot game is pre-specified to be long. Therefore, the performance shown in FIG. 916(b) can be executed reliably. In addition, in a 10-round jackpot game in which the pseudo-reserved consecutive performance is not executed, the additional performance shown in FIG. 914 is executed using the interval period set between the 4th and 5th rounds. By configuring in this way, even if the pseudo-reserved consecutive performance is not executed, the interval period set between the 4th and 5th rounds can be effectively utilized, and the play period of the jackpot game is unnecessarily extended, which can prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

As explained above, in this second presentation variation, the jackpot game presentations executed during a jackpot game can be an add-on presentation, a consecutive hold presentation, a pseudo add-on presentation, or a pseudo consecutive hold presentation, and no matter which presentation is executed, the presentation is started in the same specific presentation mode (see display area HR61 in FIG. 914(a)).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting what kind of bonus will be awarded (what kind of effect will be executed) when a specific presentation mode is displayed during a jackpot game.

In addition, because the system is configured to be able to execute pseudo-additional effects and pseudo consecutive hold effects, it is possible to allow players to easily experience effects that are the same as effects whose execution conditions are difficult to achieve, such as an added effect (MAX jackpot effect) or consecutive hold effects that indicate that a jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds is being played. This prevents a situation in which a bonus advantageous to the player (MAX jackpot, consecutive hold) is not awarded (a state in which an effect indicating that a bonus advantageous to the player will be awarded is not executed), which can lead to a decline in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this second performance variation, the various performances described above (add-on performance, consecutive reserved performance, pseudo-add-on performance, and pseudo-constant reserved performance) are configured to be executed during the execution of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the various performances described above may be configured to be executable during the jackpot fluctuation period of the special pattern (the period until the start of the jackpot round game).

In this case, regardless of which effect is executed, the player will have a bonus that notifies the player that a jackpot game will be executed, but the content of the additional bonus granted to the player can be varied depending on the type of effect executed. For example, when an add-on effect (pseudo add-on effect) is executed, the player can be notified at the time when the add-on effect (pseudo add-on effect) is executed that the jackpot game to be executed later will be a round game other than the minimum number of rounds, and an additional bonus suggesting a specific round game can be granted depending on the result of the add-on effect (pseudo add-on effect). When a consecutive hold effect (pseudo consecutive hold effect) is executed, the player can be granted an additional bonus that indicates that there is a high possibility that another jackpot game will be executed after the jackpot game to be executed later (there is a jackpot hold in the hold, or a special probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player curious as to which effect will be executed. In this case, it is also possible to configure it so that the added effect (pseudo added effect) and the consecutive reserved effect (pseudo consecutive reserved effect) can be executed during one big win fluctuation, in which case the execution timing of each effect may overlap or be executed separately.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of displaying information on the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during a favorable play period in which a game state (high probability state, time-saving state, jackpot play state) advantageous to the player continues, the additional performance may be configured to execute a performance that adds to the total number of prize balls that can be acquired during the favorable play period, rather than a performance that adds to the total number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot play.

In this case, for example, in a situation where a player has the right to play multiple jackpot games, it is possible to add a number of prize balls in one additional performance that is greater than the maximum number of prize balls that can be won in one jackpot game (1,500 balls, which corresponds to a 10-round jackpot in this second performance variant). Therefore, when an additional performance is executed, the upper limit of the bonus (number of prize balls) that can be awarded to the player as a result of the additional performance becomes larger, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modified example>
Next, referring to Fig. 917, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this second performance modification example will be described with respect to the contents that differ from the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 26th control example. Fig. 917 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this second performance modification example.

As shown in FIG. 917, this second performance variation is different from the 26th control example described above in that a pseudo-addition performance in progress flag 223aaaa has been added, but otherwise it is the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

The pseudo-addition performance in progress flag 223aaaa is a flag for indicating the state in which the pseudo-addition performance is being executed, and is set to ON when the pseudo-addition performance is being executed. It is set to OFF when it is determined that the second jackpot game included in the pseudo-addition performance has been executed. When this pseudo-addition performance in progress flag 223aaaa is set to ON, the process for determining the special pattern change performance is skipped, and the process for continuing to execute the pseudo-addition performance is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second performance modification example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second performance modification will be described with reference to Fig. 918 and Fig. 919. In this second performance modification, the difference from the above-mentioned 26th control example is that the variable performance setting process 26a (F2959a in Fig. 918) is executed instead of the variable performance setting process 26 (F2959), and the big win related process 26a (F2216a) is executed instead of the big win related process 26 (F2216), but otherwise it is the same. The description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variable presentation setting process 26a (F2959a) will be described with reference to FIG. 918. FIG. 918 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable presentation setting process 26a (F2959a). When the variable presentation setting process 26a (F2959a) is executed, it is first determined whether the pseudo-addition presentation in progress flag 223aaaa is set to ON (F3001a). If it is determined that it is set to ON, that is, if the jackpot game presentation continues until the start of the next jackpot game, it is determined to continue the pseudo-addition presentation (F3002a) and the process proceeds to F3019. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special pattern variable presentation from being executed during the pseudo-addition presentation.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process 26a (F2216a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 919. FIG. 919 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot-related process 26a (F2216a). This jackpot-related process 26a (F2216a) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot-related process 26 (F2216) in that a process for executing a pseudo-addition effect or a pseudo-reserved consecutive effect during jackpot play has been added.

When the jackpot-related process 26a (F2216a) is executed, first, the process of F2701 is executed. If it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (F2701: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo-addition performance flag 223aaaa is set to ON (F2701a). If it is determined that it is set to ON (F2701a: Yes), the pseudo-addition performance flag 223aaaa is set to OFF (F2702a), the processes of F2702 and F2703a are skipped, and the process proceeds to F2704a. In other words, when the pseudo-addition performance flag 223aaaa is set, the jackpot game performance executed in the previous jackpot game is continuing, so the process for setting the display (opening display) when a new jackpot game is executed is skipped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F2701a that the pseudo-addition performance in progress flag 223aaaa is not set to on (F2701a: No), a display jackpot start command is set (F2702), a display command indicating the payout number corresponding to the minimum number of rounds is set (F2703a), and the process proceeds to F2704a.

In the process of F2704a, the winning information is read from the winning information storage area 223va (F2704a), and then it is determined whether the winning information read includes information indicating a jackpot win (F2705a). If it is determined that there is information indicating a jackpot win (F2705a: Yes), the number of rounds of the current jackpot game and the number of rounds of the reserved jackpot game are added together (F2706a), and it is determined whether the total number of rounds is 10 (10 rounds) (F2707a).

If it is determined that the total number of rounds is 10 (F2707a: Yes), it is then determined whether the reserved jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (F2708a). If it is determined that it is a guaranteed jackpot (F2708a: Yes), the conditions for executing the pseudo-additional effect are met, so the presentation mode of the pseudo-MAX jackpot effect is determined as the pseudo-additional effect (F2709a), the pseudo-additional effect in progress flag 223aaaa is set to on (F2710a), a display command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (F2711a), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of processing F2707a or F2708a is No, the conditions for executing the pseudo-additional effect are not met, so processing F2709a to F2711a is skipped and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of F2705a that there is no information indicating a jackpot win (F2705a: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds in the current jackpot game is 10 rounds (F2712a). If it is determined that there are 10 rounds (F2712a: Yes), a lottery is run to execute a pseudo-hold consecutive performance (F2713a). If the lottery result corresponds to the execution of a pseudo-hold consecutive performance (F2713: Yes), the execution conditions for the pseudo-hold consecutive performance are met, so the performance mode of the pseudo-hold consecutive performance is determined (F2714a) and the process proceeds to F2711a.

On the other hand, if the result of processing F2712a or F2713a is No, the conditions for executing the pseudo-hold consecutive performance are not met, so processing proceeds to F2708.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the jackpot-related process 26 (F2216a), the presentation mode determined when a round number command or an ending command is received differs depending on the content of the jackpot game presentation being executed. Specifically, when a pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation is being executed, the presentation mode for each round period is determined in accordance with the presentation content of the pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation being executed.

As explained above, in this second presentation variant, like the 18th control example described above, the jackpot game presentation is configured to be able to execute an additional presentation that notifies the player of the number of prize balls that can be won in the jackpot game currently being played, based on the content of the jackpot game currently being played and the results of a look-ahead of the special pattern reserves (winning information used in the special pattern lottery) that have already been won, and a consecutive reserve presentation that notifies the player that consecutive jackpot games will be played.

Furthermore, in this second performance variation, when it is determined that there is a special reserved symbol that will win the jackpot as a result of the pre-reading of the reserved special symbols acquired at the time the jackpot game is started, an additional performance can be executed for the jackpot game being executed, including the content of the next jackpot game to be executed. Specifically, when the jackpot game being executed is a 4R jackpot game in which four rounds are executed, and the pre-read special reserved symbols contain winning information that is the result of a special pattern lottery in which a 6R jackpot game in which six rounds are executed is executed, a pseudo additional performance can be executed that pseudo-announces the payout number corresponding to a 10R jackpot game in which ten rounds are executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the number of jackpot games actually executed, the number of rounds of jackpot games executed in one jackpot game, and the content of the jackpot game notified to the player as a jackpot game presentation.

In addition, in this second presentation variation, as a method of differentiating the number of jackpot games actually executed, the number of jackpot game rounds executed in one jackpot game, and the content of the jackpot game notified to the player as a jackpot game presentation, a pseudo consecutive hold presentation (pseudo consecutive hold presentation) can be executed during the period when one jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, in this second presentation variation, the rate at which a game state advantageous to the player (high probability state) is set as the game state set after the jackpot game ends is varied depending on the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being played, and the payout number (number of rounds) notified in the pseudo-addition presentation and the latter jackpot game content (number of rounds) executed in the pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation can be determined based on the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

For example, if the system is configured so that the special probability state is always set after the end of a 10R jackpot game, the setting condition for the presentation mode in which the payout amount for 10 rounds is displayed as a pseudo-addition presentation is configured to be established when the special probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the second jackpot game).

In other words, when a pseudo jackpot game presentation with content different from the content of the jackpot game that is actually executed is executed, it is configured so that there is no contradiction between the content of the pseudo jackpot game presentation and the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, even when a pseudo jackpot game presentation with content different from the content of the jackpot game that is actually executed is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable about the content of the pseudo jackpot game presentation.

As explained above, in this second presentation variation, the jackpot game presentation executed during a jackpot game is configured to be executable with an added presentation showing the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being executed, and a reserved consecutive presentation showing whether or not there is a reserved consecutive game. Furthermore, by configuring to be executable with a pseudo added presentation and a pseudo reserved consecutive presentation, it is possible to make the number of jackpot games actually executed and the number of times the jackpot game presentation is executed differently. However, without being limited to this, for example, the technical concept of this second presentation variation may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the 18th control example above.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 18th control example is configured, like the above-mentioned 7th control example, so that in some cases where the result of the special pattern lottery is not a jackpot (pattern jackpot win) (is a miss), a small jackpot can be won, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) can be executed by causing the game ball to enter a specific area during a small jackpot game that is executed based on the small jackpot being won. When a jackpot game is played based on a winning symbol jackpot or a V jackpot game is played, a consecutive reserved effect can be executed as a jackpot game effect that is executed during the jackpot game, and the system is configured to be able to execute a consecutive reserved effect that can notify the player that the acquired special symbol reserved (special symbol reserved) contains winning information indicating a jackpot win. During the jackpot game, as a result of the pre-determining (pre-reading) of the lottery result of the special symbol 2 reserved stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, if there is a special symbol 2 reserved (V reserved) that is a pre-determined result indicating that a small jackpot in which a small jackpot game capable of playing a V jackpot game is played is won, or a special symbol 2 reserved (jackpot reserved) that wins a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, that is, when there is a right to play a new jackpot game after the jackpot game currently being played ends, a performance (consecutive reserved effect) for notifying the player that there is a V reserved or a jackpot reserved is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example configured in this way may be configured to combine the technical concept of the second performance modification described above, and to be configured to be able to execute pseudo-additional performance or pseudo-reserved consecutive performance when a V reservation exists within the acquired special pattern 2 reservation. In this case, the content of the pseudo-additional performance or pseudo-reserved consecutive performance may be determined based on the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed based on the ball entering a specific area during the small jackpot game that is executed, rather than the content of the small jackpot game that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), or the content of the pseudo-additional performance or pseudo-reserved consecutive performance may be determined by including the content of the small jackpot game and the content of the V jackpot game.

In this way, by determining the content of the pseudo-additional effects and pseudo-retained consecutive effects based on the content of the jackpot game that has been confirmed to be executed (jackpot game based on winning a symbol jackpot), as well as the content of the jackpot game that has the execution right (V jackpot game), it is possible to increase the motivation to make the game ball enter a specific area during a small jackpot game based on the content of the effect that is executed.

Furthermore, the technical concept of this second modified presentation may be applied to the first modified example of the 18th control example described above. Here, as described above with reference to Figs. 607 and 608, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the 18th control example is configured to be able to execute a V icon acquisition presentation (continuous reservation presentation) of a specific presentation mode when multiple V reservations are acquired during a jackpot game and the total number of rounds obtained by adding up the contents (number of rounds) of the multiple jackpot games executed corresponding to each of the multiple V reservations meets a predetermined condition.

The pachinko machine 10 in the first variant of the 18th control example configured in this way may be combined with the technical concept of the second variant of the presentation described above, and configured to determine the presentation content of the pseudo-addition presentation or pseudo-reservation consecutive presentation based on the content of the jackpot game being played and the multiple V-reservations included in the already acquired special chart 2 reserve, or the content of the jackpot game being played in response to the jackpot reserve.

In other words, in the second presentation variation in the 26th control example described above, a configuration was described in which the presentation content of the pseudo-addition presentation and the pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation can be determined based on the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game currently being played and the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game played in response to one jackpot reserve that has already been acquired. However, without being limited to this, the presentation content of the pseudo-addition presentation and the pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation can be determined based on the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game currently being played and the game content (number of rounds) of multiple jackpot games in which the right to play is held.

By configuring it in this way, the game content (number of rounds) of three or more jackpot games can be combined to determine the presentation mode of the pseudo-additional presentation or the presentation mode of the pseudo-reserved consecutive presentation, making it possible to execute a wider variety of presentations on the pachinko machine 10 in the second presentation variation described above.

In addition, as in the second presentation modification example of the 26th control example described above, when a jackpot game presentation (add-on presentation) corresponding to a jackpot game (MAX jackpot game) in which the number of rounds (number of rounds) executed in one jackpot game is the maximum (10 rounds) is executed as a pseudo-add-on presentation, it becomes possible to combine the game contents (number of rounds) of three or more jackpot games, making it easier to execute a pseudo-add-on presentation corresponding to a MAX jackpot game (it becomes easier to establish the execution conditions for executing a MAX jackpot presentation as a pseudo-add-on presentation).

In addition, if the content of the pseudo-additional effects or pseudo consecutive reserve effects can be determined based on the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game currently being played and the game content (number of rounds) of multiple jackpot games in which the player has the right to play, one jackpot game effect can be executed across the play period of the jackpot game currently being played and the play period of the jackpot game executed in response to multiple V reserves included in the already acquired special chart 2 reserves, or the special chart 2 reserves among the jackpot reserves for which the special pattern lottery is executed first, and the consecutive reserve effects can be executed for multiple V reserves included in the already acquired special chart 2 reserves, or the jackpot game executed in response to the special chart 2 reserves among the jackpot reserves for which the special pattern lottery is executed later, or one jackpot game effect can be executed across the play period in which three or more jackpot games that can be executed are executed.

In this case, the presentation period during which one jackpot game presentation (e.g., pseudo-top-up presentation) is executed may be configured to include at least a portion of each of the play periods during which multiple jackpot games are executed that correspond to the presentation content (number of rounds) notified to the player in the jackpot game presentation that is executed. For example, the pseudo-top-up presentation may be started in the final round of the jackpot game that is executed first, and the presentation result of the pseudo-top-up presentation may be notified in the opening period of the jackpot game that is executed later.

By configuring it in this way, even if the length of the performance period during which the pseudo-add-on performance is executed is fixed to a specific period, it is possible to easily execute the pseudo-add-on performance across a period during which multiple jackpot games are executed.

In addition, the overlapping period between the play periods of multiple jackpot games (the jackpot game executed first and the jackpot game executed later) and the performance period in which the pseudo-add-on performance is executed may be configured to differ depending on the length of the period from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, i.e., the period from the end of the jackpot game to the stop display of the special pattern lottery in which the next jackpot game can be executed (the combined period of the special pattern change period in which the lottery result is a miss and the special pattern change period in which the lottery result is a win (jackpot, small win)). Alternatively, the length of the performance period of the pseudo-add-on performance may be adjustable depending on the length of the period from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game.

<Thirty-first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 920 to Fig. 923. The pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example is a detailed description of the content of the variable presentation executed when the remaining period of the probability variable state, that is, the number of special symbol selections that can be executed during the probability variable state, reaches a predetermined number (20 times) for the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 26th control example.

In the 26th control example described above, the period during which the high probability state continues is configured to have 120 special pattern lottery executions, and when the remaining period during which the high probability state continues reaches 20 special pattern lottery executions, a series of change effects (mode change effects) are executed across the change period of multiple special pattern changes.

Specifically, when the value of the special chance counter 223vr is in the range of "20 to 15", a first mode change effect is executed, when it is in the range of "14 to 8", a second mode change effect is executed, and when it is in the range of "7 to 1", a third mode change effect is executed (see FIG. 820).

By configuring it in this way, when a favorable game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of special pattern lotteries that can be executed during that favorable game state, so that the player can play while hoping that the favorable game state will continue for a long time.

In this 31st control example, the content of the mode change presentation executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 26th control example will be explained in detail. Note that the same components as those in the above-mentioned 26th control example will be given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<About the performance content in the 31st control example>
First, referring to Figure 920, we will explain the characteristic content of the presentation executed during the mode change presentation in this 31st control example. In the 31st control example, similarly to the 26th control example described above, the special symbol lottery can be executed 120 times during the high probability state, and the lottery results of the "101" to "106" special symbol lottery during the high probability state, i.e., the special symbol lottery executed when the value of the high probability state counter 223vr is in the range of "20 to 15", are notified to the player using the performance result of the first mode fluctuation performance, the lottery results of the "107" to "113" special symbol lottery during the high probability state, i.e., the special symbol lottery executed when the value of the high probability state counter 223vr is in the range of "14 to 8", are notified to the player using the performance result of the second mode fluctuation performance, and the lottery results of the "114" to "120" special symbol lottery during the high probability state, i.e., the special symbol lottery executed when the value of the high probability state counter 223vr is in the range of "7 to 1", are notified to the player using the performance result of the third mode fluctuation performance.

Figure 920 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the special symbol lottery that can be executed during the high probability state reaches 20 spins remaining. In this 31st control example, as in the 22nd control example described above, in some cases where the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, a "chance mode" is set, which is the same presentation mode as when the time-saving state is set, and when the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times while the "chance mode" is set, that is, when the time-saving state is set and the end condition of the time-saving state is met, a "super chance mode" is set that can execute a mode change presentation to inform the player that the currently set game state is a high probability state.

When the "Chance mode" is set, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the remaining number of special pattern drawing that can be performed until the "Chance mode" ends (until the time-saving end condition can be met) (see, for example, FIG. 128(a)), and when the "Chance mode" ends and the "Super Chance mode" is set, the remaining period (remaining time) until the "Super Chance mode" ends is displayed, rather than the remaining number of special pattern drawing that can be performed until the "Super Chance mode" ends.

By configuring it in this way, even if the player is notified that the high probability state has been set while the number of special symbol selections that can be performed during the high probability state has been greatly reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to clearly grasp the remaining number of special symbol selections that can be performed before the high probability state ends. Also, by making the player understand the remaining time until the end of the "Super Chance Mode," which is a presentation mode that indicates that the high probability state has been set, the player can easily understand the remaining time until the high probability state ends, thereby preventing the high probability state from suddenly ending and causing dissatisfaction among the player.

Specifically, when the remaining number of times for the special symbol lottery to be executed during the probability change state becomes 20, that is, when the "Chance Mode" ends and the "Super Chance Mode" is set, as shown in FIG. 920(a), the display screen with the normal background is displayed as the first mode change performance, and a performance in which a rabbit-like character 801 runs around is executed. Then, as a guide display to show the performance content of the first mode change performance, the words "Find the treasure within the time limit" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Also, the words "First Stage" are displayed above the main display area Dm as a mode change performance type display mode indicating that the first mode change performance is being executed.

Here, in this 31st control example, three types of mode change presentations can be executed consecutively depending on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the "Super Chance Mode", and in the first mode change presentation that is executed first, as shown in FIG. 920(a), a "normal background (first stage)" is displayed, in the second mode change presentation that is executed next, a "space background (second stage)" is displayed, and in the third mode change presentation that is executed last, a "heavenly background (third stage)" (see FIG. 920(b)) is displayed.

In other words, if all the results of the special pattern lottery executed during the "Super Chance Mode" are losses, an effect is executed in which the rabbit-like character 801 searches for treasure in each stage in which the "Normal", "Space", and "Heaven" backgrounds are displayed, and ultimately the effect is that the treasure is not found (a result indicating that the special pattern lottery results are losses), and the "Super Chance Mode" ends.

When "Super Chance Mode" is set, the remaining time until the end of "Super Chance Mode" is displayed in display area Dm7, with the time being subtracted based on the passage of time. In this 31st control example, "60 seconds" is set as the presentation period during which all mode variation presentations are executed, and since the example shown in FIG. 920(a) shows the time immediately after "Super Chance Mode" is set, "60 seconds remaining" is displayed in display area Dm7 as a display mode indicating that the remaining time of "Super Chance Mode" is "60 seconds".

By configuring it in this way, the player can be informed of the remaining period of the "Super Chance Mode" in an easy-to-understand manner simply by visually checking the display mode in which the subtraction is displayed in the display area Dm7. Also, even if the player is informed that the high probability state has been set in a state in which the number of special pattern lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state has been greatly reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to clearly grasp the remaining number of special pattern lotteries that can be executed before the high probability state ends.

Furthermore, a display area Dm32 is formed to the right of the main display area Dm, and displays the display mode of "Normal → Space → Heaven" as a guide mode for informing the player of the number and type of mode change effects that can be executed during the "Super Chance Mode". A mark (shown as a circle in the figure) for informing the player of the type of mode change effect currently being executed is displayed in addition to the display mode indicating the type of mode change effect being executed.

By configuring it in this way, the type of mode change effect executed during "Super Chance Mode" and the transition status can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this 31st control example, when the type of mode change presentation is switched, the corresponding special symbol lottery results can be reported together, and the presentation period of each mode change presentation is configured to be "20 seconds". Specifically, if the results of the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the high probability state, that is, the special symbol lotteries executed when the value of the high probability counter 223vr is in the range of "20 to 15", are all misses, the presentation result of the mode change presentation executed for 20 seconds is displayed as a result of the presentation that the treasure cannot be found in the first stage and the presentation result of the transition to the second stage is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of any of the special symbol lotteries among the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the high probability state, that is, the special symbol lotteries executed when the value of the high probability counter 223vr is in the range of "20 to 15", is a jackpot, the presentation result of the mode change presentation executed for 20 seconds is displayed as a result of the presentation that the treasure is found in the first stage.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this 31st control example, the variation pattern (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the "Super Chance Mode" is determined differently depending on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, and even if a jackpot is won in any of the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the high probability state, the period from the start of the "101" special symbol variation (the execution of the first mode variation presentation) until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is "20 seconds". Also, even if the results of all of the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the high probability state are misses, the period from the start of the "101" special symbol variation (the execution of the first mode variation presentation) until the "106" special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is "20 seconds".

Therefore, the first mode variable presentation can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity, targeting the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the high probability state. Also, even if the results of the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the high probability state are all misses, the presentation result of the first mode variable presentation that is unfavorable to the player (a presentation result indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a miss) is displayed only once. Therefore, compared to the case where a presentation result unfavorable to the player is displayed every time a special symbol lottery is executed, the number of presentation results that are unfavorable to the player can be reduced, making it difficult to reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, even if the jackpot is won in any of the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the special probability state, the presentation result that is advantageous to the player (the presentation result indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery) is displayed at the end of the first mode variable presentation, making it difficult for the player to know which special symbol lottery led to the jackpot.

In this 31st control example, as described above, the presentation period for each mode change presentation is set to "20 seconds," and the presentation results for each mode change presentation are used to notify the player of the results of the target special symbol selection. In other words, the results of the 20 special symbol selections that are performed from when "Super Chance Mode" is set until "Super Chance Mode" ends are notified to the player in three stages. And, as shown in FIG. 920(a), the display screen is configured to display the remaining time until "Super Chance Mode" ends, rather than the remaining time until each mode change presentation ends.

In other words, by configuring it so that only the remaining time until the end of "Super Chance Mode" is displayed, rather than the remaining time until the end of each mode change presentation, even if the timing at which the lottery results of the special pattern selection referenced to determine the presentation results of each mode change presentation are displayed is slightly different, it is possible to simply execute a process to correct the end timing of each mode change presentation, making it easier to provide players with a change presentation that does not feel strange.

In addition, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the system to notify the player of the remaining time until the end of each mode change presentation, rather than the remaining time until the end of the "Super Chance Mode", or to notify the player of the remaining time until the end of the "Super Chance Mode" by counting down a numerical value as in the present 31st control example, and to allow the player to vaguely grasp the remaining time until the end of each mode change presentation from the variable status of the presentation mode (for example, the movement status of the character 801). In this way, by combining a first notification mode (such as a countdown notification or timer notification) that allows the player to clearly grasp the remaining time as a notification mode for notifying the remaining time, and a second notification mode (such as the variable status of the presentation mode) that allows the player to vaguely grasp the remaining time, the various presentations executed during the "Super Chance Mode" can be easily grasped by the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 920(b), the presentation contents indicating a jackpot win during "Super Chance Mode" will be described. FIG. 920(b) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when a jackpot win is won in a special symbol lottery in which there are two remaining special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 920(b), when there are two remaining special symbol selections that can be performed during the high probability state, the third mode change presentation is executed as the mode change presentation, and a "heavenly background" corresponding to the third mode change presentation is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm. Then, the main display area Dm displays a presentation image in which the character 801 opens a treasure chest 810 and discovers treasure 810a.

In the example shown in FIG. 920(b), the third mode change presentation results favorable to the player, so the display area Dm7 displays "?? seconds remaining" as a display mode indicating that the remaining time of the "Super Chance Mode" is 0 seconds, and the display area Dm32 displays the word "Heaven" with a mark to indicate the type of mode change presentation currently being performed (third mode change presentation), informing the player that this is the last mode change presentation to be performed during the "Super Chance Mode". In addition, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, "Third Stage" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the currently performed mode change presentation is the third (third stage) mode change presentation. And, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Congratulations on the big win" are displayed as a guide mode to inform the player that the current presentation result is favorable to the player.

In the 31st control example, as shown in FIG. 920(b), when the "Super Chance Mode" is set and the set "60 seconds" has elapsed, the "Super Chance Mode" is not immediately ended, but the display mode displayed in the display area Dm7 is variably displayed as "3 seconds remaining," "1 second remaining," or "?? seconds remaining." Then, based on the display result of the currently running mode change presentation (third mode change presentation), the display mode of the display area Dm7 is variably displayed from "?? seconds remaining" to "Ended," thereby ending the "Super Chance Mode."

By configuring it in this way, the state in which "?? seconds remaining" is displayed allows the player to easily understand that the "Super Chance Mode" could end at any time, and even if there is a slight error between the content of the remaining time display shown in display area Dm7 and the timing in which the result of the third mode variable presentation is displayed, the presentation can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, since only the length of time that "?? remaining" is continuously displayed differs.

In the present thirty-first control example, the predetermined presentation period of the "Super Chance Mode" is set to 60 seconds, and a subtraction display of 60 seconds is executed in the display area Dm7, and "?? seconds remaining" is displayed when the display mode of the subtraction display in the display area Dm7 indicates "0 seconds". However, instead of this, a period (e.g., 60 seconds) shorter than the predetermined presentation period of the "Super Chance Mode" (e.g., 61 seconds) may be displayed in the display area Dm7, and "?? seconds remaining" may be displayed when the display mode of the subtraction display in the display area Dm7 indicates "0 seconds".

By configuring it in this way, even if the end timing of the final mode change presentation (third mode change presentation) executed during "Super Chance Mode" is earlier (e.g., 60.8 seconds) than the predetermined presentation period (e.g., 61 seconds), it is possible to end "Super Chance Mode" while "?? seconds remaining" is displayed, thereby preventing "Super Chance Mode" from ending while the seconds displayed as subtracted in display area Dm7 remain, which would cause a strange feeling to the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 31st control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 921 and Fig. 922, the electrical configuration in this 31st control example will be described. In this 31st control example, the difference from the above-mentioned 26th control example is that the variable pattern selection table 202vc (see Fig. 692) in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is added with the variable pattern 31 table 202aba that is referred to during the variable state, and that the performance mode storage area 223aba is added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. Other than that, it is the same, and the description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 921, the probability variable variation pattern 31 table 202aba will be explained. FIG. 921 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probability variable variation pattern 31 table 202aba. As shown in FIG. 921, the probability variable variation pattern 31 table 202aba is configured so that different variation patterns are determined based on the number of times that special symbols have changed since the probability variable state was set.

Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol changes (number of changes) after the special probability state is set after the end of a big win game is in the range of "1 to 100", various change patterns are specified in which the change time is set to 2 to 60 seconds in accordance with the lottery result and the acquired value of the change type counter CS1.

For the number of fluctuations "101", if the lottery result is a "miss", a short miss of "2 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", a hit of "20 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For the number of fluctuations "102", if the lottery result is a "miss", a short miss of "2 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", a hit of "18 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For the number of fluctuations "103", if the lottery result is a "miss", a short miss of "2 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", a hit of "16 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For the number of fluctuations "104", if the lottery result is a "miss", a short miss of "2 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", a hit of "14 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For the number of fluctuations "105", if the lottery result is a "miss", a short miss of "2 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", a hit of "12 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For the number of fluctuations "106", if the lottery result is a "miss", a miss of "10 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", a hit of "10 seconds" is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

In other words, when the number of variations is in the range of "101" to "106", even if all the special symbol drawings are unsuccessful or if one of the special symbol drawings results in a big win, the special symbol variations are assumed to continue, and each variation pattern is specified so that the result of the drawing is announced 20 seconds after the start of the 101st special symbol variation.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier to display the results of the first mode variation presentation, which is executed for a range of variation counts from "101" to "106," at a specific timing.

In the 31st control example, as described above, even if all the special symbol lotteries are unsuccessful or if a jackpot is won in any of the special symbol lotteries, the lottery result is announced 20 seconds after the 101st special symbol variation is started, assuming that the special symbol variation continues. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to select a variation pattern with a different length of variation time as a variation pattern selected when some jackpots are won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity, for example, that the special symbol variation stops before the result of the first mode variation is displayed, or that the special symbol variation continues while the result of the first mode variation is displayed, whereas normally the special symbol variation stops when 20 seconds have passed and the result of the first mode variation is displayed.

Next, for the number of fluctuations "107, 108", if the lottery result is a "miss", the fluctuation pattern is specified as an ultra-short miss of "0.2 seconds" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range "0-99", or a miss of "2 seconds" for the range "100-198", and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is specified as an ultra-short hit of "0.2 seconds" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range "0-169", or a hit of "20 seconds" for the range "170-198".

Here, if a short fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation number "107, 108", the first mode fluctuation presentation is configured to continue to be displayed until the special pattern fluctuation is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, the number of times the special pattern is drawn, which is referenced as the performance result of the first mode performance, can be varied depending on the type of performance pattern selected.

In addition, in the range of the number of variations "109" to "111", that is, the range that is the target of the second mode variation presentation, just like each variation that is the target of the first mode variation presentation described above, even if all the special pattern lotteries are misses or if one of the special pattern lotteries is a big win, the special pattern variation is assumed to be continuously executed, and the lottery result is announced 20 seconds after the start of the 107th special pattern variation.

Similarly, for the range of the number of variations "112" to "120", as shown in FIG. 921, in the range that is the subject of the third mode variation presentation, as with each variation that is the subject of the first mode variation presentation described above, even if all the special pattern lotteries are misses or if one of the special pattern lotteries is a jackpot, the variation patterns are specified so that the lottery results are announced 20 seconds after the start of the 120th special pattern variation, assuming that the special pattern variation continues.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 31st control example will be described with reference to FIG. 922. FIG. 922 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 31st control example. As shown in FIG. 922, this 31st control example differs from the above-mentioned 26th control example in that a performance mode storage area 223aba has been added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The presentation mode storage area 223aba is a storage means for storing the type of mode change presentation currently being performed, and when a mode change presentation is determined in the probability change state presentation mode determination process 31 (see F3092 in FIG. 923), information corresponding to the determined type of mode change presentation is stored. Then, each time a special symbol change is performed, the stored type of mode change presentation is referenced, and the corresponding presentation mode is determined.

Furthermore, the presentation mode storage area 223aba is configured to be able to store an extended state that temporarily extends the mode change presentation, and is configured so that when an extended state is stored, a new type of mode change presentation is not determined. By configuring it in this way, a super short change (0.2 second change) can be selected, allowing for smooth presentation control that does not switch the type of mode change presentation.

Next, the contents of the control process in this 31st control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 923. This 31st control example differs from the above-mentioned 26th control example in that the process for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed during the high probability state is different. Specifically, it differs in that the high probability state presentation mode determination process 31 (see F3092 in FIG. 923) is executed instead of the high probability state presentation mode determination process 26 (see F3052 in FIG. 820). The other processing contents are the same, so their explanation will be omitted.

Figure 923 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the high probability state presentation mode determination process 31 (see F3092). As shown in Figure 923, the high probability state presentation mode determination process 31 (see F3092) differs from the above-mentioned high probability state presentation mode determination process 26 (see F3052 in Figure 820) in that a control process for continuing (extending) the currently running mode change presentation has been added. All other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

When the process 26 for determining the probability change state presentation mode (see F3052 in FIG. 820) is executed, first, the process F4301 to F4310 is executed, which is the same as the process 26 for determining the probability change state presentation mode (see F3052 in FIG. 820) described above. Then, after the processes F4304, F4306, and F4308 are executed, the type of mode change presentation that has been determined is stored in the mode presentation storage area 223aba (F4351), and the process proceeds to F4356.

On the other hand, after the processing of F4309 or F4310 is completed, the type stored in the mode performance storage area 223aba is read (F4352), and it is determined whether a special chart reserve for the next mode (the mode change performance to be set next) is stored based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223va. Then, if it is determined that there is a special chart reserve for the next mode (F4353: Yes), the change pattern of the special chart change executed in the target special chart reserve is pre-determined (pre-read) and it is determined whether it is an ultra-short change (0.2 second change) (F4354). If it is determined that it is an ultra-short change (F4354: Yes), it is determined to continue the current mode performance until the special chart change period related to the next mode special chart reserve, and the performance mode corresponding to the change pattern command is determined (F4355), and the processing proceeds to F4356.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F4353 that there is no special pattern reserved for the next mode (F4353: No), or if it is determined in the process of F4354 that the reserved special pattern for the next mode is not an ultra-short variation (F4354: No), the presentation mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined (F4356), and this process is terminated.

That is, for example, when determining the variation performance corresponding to the special pattern variation of the variation number "106", which is the final variation of the first mode variation performance, if the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery is a miss and a win, it is determined whether there is a special pattern reserved for the special pattern variation of the variation number "107" and "108" (F4353), and if it is determined that there is, it is determined in advance whether the special pattern variation of the variation number "107" and "108" is an ultra-short variation (F4354). Then, if it is determined in advance that it is an ultra-short variation, the lottery result of the special pattern variation that will be an ultra-short variation is determined in advance, and if the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot win, a performance result indicating a jackpot win is determined as the performance result of the first mode variation performance, and if the result of the preliminary determination is a miss, a performance result indicating a miss is determined as the performance result of the first mode variation performance, and the performance mode corresponding to the determined performance result is determined (F4356). In addition, a process is executed to continue displaying the determined presentation mode until the corresponding special pattern change (the special pattern change that is an ultra-short change among the special pattern changes that have the number of changes "107" and "108") is stopped.

The range in which the processing of F4356 is executed is only the range in which ultra-short fluctuation is set as the special pattern fluctuation for the "107th" and "108th" fluctuations. For example, if the "107th" fluctuation is an ultra-short fluctuation and the "108th" fluctuation is an ultra-short fluctuation, the range is until the "108th" special pattern fluctuation is stopped and displayed. If the "107th" fluctuation is an ultra-short fluctuation and the "108th" fluctuation is a normal fluctuation, the range is until the "107th" special pattern fluctuation is stopped and displayed. If the "107th" fluctuation is a normal fluctuation, the processing of F4356 will not be executed even if the "108th" fluctuation is an ultra-short fluctuation.

Therefore, if the 107th fluctuation is a normal fluctuation and the 108th fluctuation is an ultra-short fluctuation, the second mode fluctuation presentation will be executed in a range that includes the fluctuation time of the ultra-short fluctuation, resulting in a difference between the normal fluctuation (2 seconds) and the ultra-short fluctuation (0.2 seconds). However, in this 31st control example, as shown in FIG. 920(a), a presentation that suggests the end timing of each mode fluctuation presentation is not executed, so even if the above-mentioned difference occurs, each mode fluctuation presentation can be executed smoothly without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In this case, the timing at which the special pattern fluctuations are displayed as the second mode fluctuation effect differs between when all of the target special pattern lotteries are unsuccessful and when any of the special pattern lotteries result in a jackpot win; however, by configuring the length of the period during which the second mode fluctuation effect result is displayed as a frozen display (the performance result determination period) to be longer than the difference (1.8 seconds) mentioned above, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause discomfort to the player.

As explained above, in this 31st control example, when the remaining period of a favorable game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player meets a predetermined condition (20 times remaining), one change presentation (mode change presentation) is executed across the period during which multiple special pattern selections are executed. By configuring it in this way, when a favorable game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of special pattern selections that can be executed during that favorable game state, so that the player can play while hoping that the favorable game state will continue for a long time.

In addition, in this 31st control example, the range of the special symbol selection referenced to determine the performance result of the first mode change performance is configured to be different. Specifically, the range of the special symbol selection referenced to determine the performance result of the first mode change performance is predefined as "the value of the probability change counter 223vr is '20 to 15'", and when a short change pattern (ultra-short change) is selected as the change pattern of the multiple special symbol selections executed after the first mode change performance is completed, that is, the special symbol selection corresponding to the value of the probability change counter 223vr in the range of "14, 13", the first mode change performance is executed using the period until the special symbol change corresponding to the special symbol selection in which the ultra-short change was selected is completed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the number of times the special symbol lottery is referenced to determine the performance result of one mode change performance, and therefore it is possible to vary the possibility that a performance result that is advantageous to the player (a performance result that indicates a jackpot win) will be determined as the performance result of one mode change performance.

As described above, in this 31st control example, a configuration has been described that can increase the number of special pattern draws referenced to determine the performance result of one mode change performance from a predefined number when a specified condition is met, but it is sufficient to vary the number of special pattern draws referenced to determine the performance result of one mode change performance, and a configuration can be used that can decrease the number of special pattern draws referenced to determine the performance result of one mode change performance from a predefined number.

In this case, for example, the range of the special symbol selection referenced to determine the performance result of the first mode variation presentation may be predefined as "the value of the probability variation counter 223vr is between 20 and 15," and when a long variation pattern in which a longer variation time than normal is set is determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol selection corresponding to the value of the probability variation counter 223vr in the range of "16, 15," control may be executed to forcibly terminate the first mode variation presentation so that the range in which the first mode variation presentation is executed is up to the special symbol selection immediately before the special symbol selection in the long variation pattern is executed.

Also, as described above, when the control for forcibly terminating the first mode variation performance is executed, the performance period of the first mode variation performance is shorter than when the normal first mode variation performance is executed. Therefore, for example, as the variation pattern of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the value of the probability variation counter 223vr in the range of "16, 15", it is preferable to configure it so that the long variation pattern is more likely to be determined when the corresponding special pattern lottery result is a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the possibility that a special pattern variation that wins a jackpot will be executed after the first mode variation performance ends when the performance period is shorter than normal due to the first mode variation performance being forcibly terminated, so that the player can focus on the first mode variation performance that is executed to feel a sense of incongruity when the first mode variation performance ends (a sense of incongruity due to the first mode variation performance ending earlier than normal).

In the pachinko machine 10 in this 31st control example, the type of mode change presentation to be executed and the presentation period of the mode change presentation to be executed are determined based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, but this is not limiting and another configuration may be used. For example, the mode change presentation may be started when the remaining period of the probability change state (the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the probability change state) meets a predetermined condition (e.g., 20 times), and when a specific time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the mode change presentation was executed, the presentation result of the mode change presentation may be notified in a display mode that shows the result of the special symbol lottery being executed at that time.

In this case, the number of special pattern draws performed during a specific time period differs depending on the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern change performed during the performance period in which the mode change performance is performed, so the number of special pattern draws referenced to determine the performance result of the mode change performance can easily be varied.

Also, as mentioned above, if the presentation period of the mode change presentation is set by the elapsed time, rather than the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, there is a risk that the special symbol lottery will not be executed during the mode change presentation if the player stops playing. In this case, for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the last special symbol change was stopped and displayed with a lottery result indicating a miss, and the display conditions for displaying the standby screen of the pachinko machine 10 are met, a presentation result indicating that the special symbol lottery result was a miss is determined as the presentation result of the ongoing mode change presentation, and the mode change presentation can be ended.

<32nd control example>
Hereinafter, the 32nd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 924 to Fig. 1001. Fig. 924 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, Fig. 925 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 926 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, Fig. 927 to Fig. 930 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided in the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 931 is a diagram showing the configuration of various buttons provided in the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 932 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 924, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 924), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 925) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front (game area) of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 950) that launches game balls into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area (game area) of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 924) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, the upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a box shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into the upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward inclination to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 924), and the balls inserted into the upper tray 17 are guided to the ball launching unit 112a by this inclination. In addition, a frame button 22 that can be operated by the player and a selection button 600 (not shown) are provided on the upper surface of the upper tray 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the presentation mode of various presentations executed by the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 925) and the like, and a presentation button 22a is provided as described later in FIG. 931. In the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, an operation presentation in which the presentation mode is changed based on the player's operation of the presentation button 22a can be executed. By configuring in this way, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

The selection button 600 is operated by the player to determine the gaming environment of the pachinko machine 10, and is provided with a middle button 600a, an up button 600b, a right button 600c, a down button 600d, and a left button 600e, as described later in FIG. 931. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, the game environment of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable by the player, including the volume level of the sound output from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 950), the backlight (not shown) that illuminates the display screen displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 925), and the light level of the decorative LED attached to the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the player can select one of a plurality of presentation modes with different presentation patterns of various display presentations executed by the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, even if various players with different tastes play the pachinko machine 10, each player can select (determine) a gaming environment that suits his or her own tastes, which prevents players from becoming bored with the game too early.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example has, as operation means that can be operated by the player, a frame button 22 that is operated during an operation presentation, and a selection button 600 that is operated when selecting a gaming environment. In other words, multiple operation means with different uses are provided, but this is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 may be configured to be operable when selecting a gaming environment, or the selection button 600 may be configured to be operable as an operation presentation.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the operation means (frame button 22) operated during the operation performance is configured to have one performance button 22a, but this is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 may be configured to have two or more operation means.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, as the operation means operable by the player, a button configuration capable of determining that the operation means has been operated by detecting that the player has pressed the button is used, but a configuration other than a button configuration may be used as long as it is capable of detecting the operation by the player. For example, an operation means having a detection means capable of detecting that the player is touching it or a detection means capable of detecting that the player is performing an action other than pressing (for example, a pulling action, etc.) may be used. Also, instead of the player directly touching the operation means, a non-contact operation detection means (sensor, etc.) capable of detecting that a part of the player's body (for example, a hand, etc.) is present in a predetermined spatial area (detection range of the sensor) may be used. In this case, it is preferable to use an operation detection means that does not simply detect a part of the player's body (for example, a hand, etc.) but is capable of detecting that a part of the player's body is moving according to a predetermined rule within a predetermined spatial area. By configuring it in this way, for example, if a player leaves his/her seat to temporarily stop playing with the pachinko machine 10, even if a part of the player's body (such as the head) accidentally enters the detection range of the operation detection means, it is possible to prevent this from triggering the execution of an operation presentation.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 924) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 925) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 for operating when discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the game balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the game balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Fig. 925, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650, a normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the periphery is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Fig. 924). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entry port 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 924) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 925.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 924) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the released game balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 950) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 925), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 925) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side when viewed from the front in Fig. 925), a display device 37a corresponding to the first special symbol and a display device 37b corresponding to the second special symbol are arranged as the first symbol display device 37 equipped with a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display device as light-emitting means. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 950), and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this 32nd control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be used differently depending on whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the display device 37a is activated, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display device 37 also lights up an LED (status LED) that can indicate the game status set in the pachinko machine 10 by its lighting state, indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a time-saving jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss by its lighting state, indicates the number of reserved balls by its lighting state, and uses a 7-segment display device to display the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors. The multiple LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light emission colors can indicate various game statuses of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 6R time-saving jackpot (jackpot A), a 6R normal jackpot (jackpot B), and a 9R time-saving jackpot (jackpot C). The first symbol display device 37 not only shows whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation has ended, but also shows a symbol according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "6R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot type (jackpot A) that transitions to a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) that is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) after a jackpot play with a maximum of 6 rounds, and a "6R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot type (jackpot B) that transitions to the normal state after a jackpot play with a maximum of 6 rounds. Also, a "9R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot type (jackpot C) that transitions to the time-saving state after a jackpot play with a maximum of 9 rounds.

Here, the flow of play in the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example will be briefly explained. The pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example has a first symbol (first special symbol) for which a lottery is executed when an execution condition is met based on a game ball shot into the play area entering the first ball entrance 64, and a first symbol (second special symbol) for which a lottery is executed when an execution condition is met based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640. The lottery results for each first symbol (special symbol) are determined to be a big win, a small win, or a miss.

When a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the opening and closing door 65b (see FIG. 925) of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a jackpot game is executed that makes it easier for the game ball to win the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 925). When a game ball wins the specific winning port 65a, 11 prize balls are paid out for each winning game ball. Therefore, the player can play the pachinko machine 10 with enthusiasm, aiming to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, in order to win many prize balls.

Furthermore, if a small prize is won in the lottery for the special symbol, the opening and closing door 650f (see FIG. 925) of the second variable prize device (V prize device) 650 is opened, and a small prize game is executed that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V prize opening 650a (see FIG. 925). When the game ball enters the V prize opening 650a, 11 prize balls are paid out for each winning game ball.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when a game ball that has entered the V winning port 650a passes through a specific area (V area) 650e4 provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650, a big win game can be executed in which the opening and closing door 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is opened after the small win game ends.

In other words, in this 32nd control example, as the execution triggers for executing a jackpot game, there are a first jackpot trigger that is established when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a second jackpot trigger that is established when the game ball passes through a specific area (V area) 650e4 during a small jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game with various triggers, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game and a small jackpot game as winning games that can award prize balls to the player, and the content of each winning game is determined in advance so that more prize balls can be awarded to the player during a jackpot game (more game balls can be won) than during a small jackpot game. In other words, a jackpot game is a winning game that is more advantageous to the player in terms of the number of prize balls that the player can acquire than a small jackpot game.

In addition, when a jackpot game is played, the game state corresponding to the jackpot type can be set after the jackpot game ends, whereas after a small jackpot game ends, the game state that was set at the time the small jackpot game started is set again. In other words, for example, when a jackpot game is played in a state in which the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, a game state (time-saving state) different from the normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the jackpot type of that jackpot game, and when a small jackpot game is played in a state in which the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the small jackpot game ends.

Therefore, for a player who is playing in the hope that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the currently set game state will be set, a big win game that can set a new game state will be a more advantageous winning game than a small win game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured to be able to execute a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) in addition to the lottery for the special symbol described above (special symbol lottery), and the lottery for the normal symbol is executed when the execution condition is met based on the game ball passing (entering) the through gate 67 provided on the game board 13. Then, as a result of the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), it is configured to determine whether it is a win or a miss. If the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, the electric role 640a (see FIG. 925) is operated to execute a normal symbol winning game that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In other words, by playing a normal winning game, it is easier to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the normal winning game is not being played. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play two games: one in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64, aiming for a big win, and one in which the game ball enters (passes) the through gate 67, executing a normal symbol lottery, and then entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, executing a second special symbol lottery, aiming for a big win. This makes it possible to provide the player with a variety of games and to increase the player's interest in the games.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured so that the probability state for normal symbols can be set to a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and when the low probability state for normal symbols is set, the expectation of being able to cause a gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 based on the results of one normal symbol lottery is lower than when the high probability state for normal symbols is set.

Specifically, the "high probability state of normal symbols" means that the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is increased, and the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the high probability state of normal symbols, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is held can be increased.

In addition, as a normal winning game during a high probability state of a normal pattern, instead of lengthening the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to lengthening the opening time, a change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric role 640a opens in one normal winning game compared to a normal winning game executed during a low probability state of a normal pattern. Also, during a high probability state of a normal pattern, the winning probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) may not be changed, and at least one of the time that the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times that the electric role 640a opens in one normal winning game may be changed. Also, during the high probability state of the normal pattern, the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the electric device 640a is opened in one game that hits a normal pattern may not be changed, and only the probability of hitting the normal pattern (second pattern) may be changed to be higher than during the low probability state of the normal pattern.

As described above, in the 32nd control example, the probability state of the normal pattern is configured to be changeable between "low probability state" and "high probability state", and the probability state of the special pattern is configured not to be changeable. However, without being limited to this, the probability state of the special pattern may also be configured to be changeable between "low probability state" and "high probability state" like the probability state of the normal pattern described above. In this case, when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, it is preferable to configure it so that the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot (jackpot probability) is higher than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set. In addition, it may be configured to increase not only the jackpot probability but also the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern is a small jackpot (small jackpot probability), or it may be configured to increase both the jackpot probability and the small jackpot probability. It may also be configured so that when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss (miss probability) is lower than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set.

In the game area, a plurality of general ball entrances 63 are arranged, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a decorative third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37, triggered by the entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) triggered by the passage of a game ball into the normal pattern start gate (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 950), so that, for example, three symbol rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this 32nd control example performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37, while the display of special symbols in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 950) is performed by the first symbol display device 37. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this control example, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol (normal symbol) to change is set to be shorter in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) than in the normal game state (low probability state of normal symbol). As a result, during the time-saving state, the second symbol (normal symbol) is changed and displayed in a short time, so the number of times the normal symbol lottery is performed per unit period can be increased compared to the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of the normal symbol lottery being a winning result increase, the player can be given more opportunities for the electric device 640a of the second ball entrance 640 to be in an open state (opportunities for a normal symbol winning game to be performed). Therefore, during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol), it is possible to make it easier for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the area to the right of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the game balls that are launched onto the game board 13 and flow down the right side of the game board 13 to pass through. When a game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a lottery for a second symbol (normal symbol) is held. After the normal symbol lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the normal symbol lottery is a loser, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls (number of reserved normal symbols) is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown). There are four second symbol reservation lamps, the maximum number of reserved symbols, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present 32nd control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the game ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right (right area) of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left (left area) of the variable display device unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a game ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a game ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a special pattern is drawn by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 950), and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is shown on the display device 37a of the first pattern display device 37.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a game ball can enter is provided below the right-hand area of the game board 13. When a game ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a special pattern lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 950), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the display device 37b of the first pattern display device 37.

When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four game balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. In other words, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 serve both as start-up prize entrances for executing the special pattern lottery and as prize entrances for paying out prize balls. In the 32nd control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be the same, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be one, and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be the same.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state (buried state), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, the electric device 640a is in an open state (protruding state), making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the time-saving state, the probability of winning the second symbol (normal symbol) is higher than during the normal state, and the time it takes for the second symbol (normal symbol) to change (normal symbol change time) is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol), and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (protruding state) increases. Furthermore, during the time-saving state, the time that the electric device 640a is open is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the time-saving state, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during the normal state.

More specifically, in the normal state where the low probability state of normal symbols is set, even if a player executes a right-hand hit game in which the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game board 13 and passes the game ball through the through gate 67 to execute a normal winning game, the game ball will hardly enter the second ball entrance 640, but it is configured so that it is possible to execute more special symbol lotteries by executing a left-hand hit game in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game board 13 and enters the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the player executes a right-hand hit game in which the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game board 13, and executes a normal hit game by passing the game ball through the through gate 67, the game ball can be easily inserted into the second ball entrance 640, and more special symbol lotteries can be executed than when a left-hand hit game is executed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game board 13, and the game ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, when the normal state is set, left-handed play is more advantageous to the player from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery than right-handed play, and when the time-saving state is set, right-handed play is more advantageous to the player from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery than left-handed play. In this way, in this 32nd control example, the play method that is advantageous to the player is different depending on the set play state, so that a player who has been playing for a long time can play while changing the play method, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

Here, the first special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured so that the probability of the lottery result being a jackpot is the same (approximately 1/300). However, as the type of jackpot selected when a jackpot is won, the probability that the number of rounds played during the jackpot game will be the maximum of 9 rounds (R) is set higher for the second special symbol lottery than for the first special symbol lottery. Also, the probability that a time-saving state advantageous to the player will be set as the game state set after the jackpot game ends is set higher for the second special symbol lottery than for the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric device 640a like the second ball entrance 640, and the game ball is always in a state where it can enter.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to get a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by shooting the game ball toward the first ball entrance 64, which does not have the electric device 640a, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "left shot") and getting more opportunities to draw the first special pattern by having the ball enter the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67, making it easier to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric device 640a and aiming for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 to win the jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds) that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the machine is configured so that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is a more advantageous game state to the player than the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example can allow the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the time-saving state or the normal state). This allows the player to have fun playing the game because it allows them to change the way they hit the ball.

Now, referring to Fig. 925 and Fig. 926, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example will be explained. As shown in Fig. 925, in the 32nd control example, the variable display unit 80 is disposed at approximately the center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to hit the ball into the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot the ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots the ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

As shown in FIG. 925, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the machine is configured so that right-hand hitting play is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

To prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted under the variable display unit 80, and the ball is configured to not enter the second ball entrance 640 during left-handed play. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to execute a lottery for the first special symbol can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol can be played in right-handed play, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

As shown in FIG. 925, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example, the right-hand hitting area is provided with the through gate 67, the second variable winning device 650, the electric device 640a, and the first variable winning device 65 in that order from the upstream side, and the speed and direction of the game balls flowing down the right-hand area are irregularly changed by a number of nails planted upstream of the through gate 67 in the right-hand area, so that about 2/3 of the game balls flowing down the right-hand area pass through the through gate 67. The game balls that pass through the through gate 67 are guided upstream of the second variable winning device 650 by a number of nails planted below the through gate 67, and reach the second variable winning device 650.

On the other hand, a game ball that reaches the second variable winning device 650 without passing through the through gate 67 (by flowing down the flow path formed to the left of the through gate 67) is configured to reach the downstream side of the second variable winning device 650 more than a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67, or to reach the electric device 640a arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 650 without reaching the second variable winning device 650.

As shown in FIG. 925, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the game board 13 so that its upper surface forms a ball flow path that slopes downward toward the lower left (lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 925), and the game balls that flow down the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 (the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state) are configured to flow down toward the electric role 640a. Details will be described later, but this second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed by a small prize game that is executed when a small prize is won in a special pattern lottery, and when a small prize game is not being executed, the opening of the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is covered by the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and most of the game balls that reach the second variable winning device 650 are discharged downstream without winning into the V winning port 650a.

On the other hand, while the small win game is being played, the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 is repeatedly switched between the open state and the closed state, so that the game ball that has reached the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67) is more likely to win the V winning port 650a. In other words, in the right area, a first flow path (a flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) that makes it easier for the game ball to win the second variable winning device 650 during the small win game, and a second flow path (a flow path through which the game ball that does not pass through the through gate 67 flows down) that makes it difficult for the game ball to win the second variable winning device 650 are formed. Therefore, when the small win game is played, attention can be paid to the behavior of the game ball flowing down the right area, hoping that the ratio of the number of winning balls in the second variable winning device 650 to the number of game balls shot will be high.

As described above, in this 32nd control example, about 2/3 of the game balls launched by right-hand play pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650, and the remaining about 1/2 flow down toward the second variable winning device 650 without passing through the through gate 67. Then, while a small win game is not being played, all game balls launched by right-hand play and flowing down the right side area reach the electric device 640a without winning the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650.

When the electric device 640a is in a standby state (buried state), the game ball passes through the retracted electric device 640a and flows down toward the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in a protruding state, the game ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down the top surface of the protruding electric device 640a toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 925). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the standby state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 arranged below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

Also, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, referring to FIG. 926, the configuration of the electric device 640a provided in the right-hand hitting area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 926, among the balls shot by right-hand hitting, the game balls that flow down from the second variable winning device 650 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is arranged. To explain in detail, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and its upper surface is composed of a plate-shaped member through which the balls can flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 925). Then, the game balls that flow down from the second variable winning device 650 flow down to area a (see FIG. 926) that corresponds to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the game ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding state, the game ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the game ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 10 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the period during which the electric device 640a continues to protrude is configured to differ depending on the game state (normal symbol probability state). When the electric device 640a operates (executes a normal symbol winning game) in a normal state (normal symbol low probability state) set as the game state, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the game ball flowing down on the electric device 640a in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 926). When the time-saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is set, the electric device 640a continues to protrude for a period of time sufficient for the game ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 926).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 926 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the 32nd control example). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the game ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the game ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special pattern is suppressed from being executed in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is kept in a protruding state for a period longer than the period (0.8 seconds) it takes for the game ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the game ball that flows down the top surface of the protruding electric device 640a to reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, the game ball that reaches the electric role 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric role 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric role 640a, and the operation of the electric role 640a ends when it reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric role 640a is activated). As shown in FIG. 926, such a game ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric role 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played during the time-saving state, the game ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric role 640a and the timing of the game ball arriving at the electric role 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, it is configured to be possible to hold (reserve) up to one right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reservation). In other words, even if the execution conditions for executing a new special pattern lottery are not met, the special pattern 2 reservation can be acquired by inserting a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and when the execution conditions for executing the special pattern lottery are met while the special pattern 2 reservation is acquired, the second special pattern lottery can be executed using the special pattern 2 reservation.

Therefore, when the time-saving state is set and the execution conditions for executing the special symbol lottery are not met, for example, even if a special symbol variation is being executed, the player can be motivated to play from the right in order to obtain the reserved special symbol 2.

Furthermore, even if the maximum number (1) of special chart 2 reserved balls has already been acquired, right-hand play during the time-saving state makes it easier to place a game ball in the general winning port 63 located below the second ball entrance 640, so that players who wish to acquire many prize balls during the time-saving state can be more enthusiastic to play right-hand play.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the number of prize balls (10) paid out when a game ball enters the general prize opening 63 located below the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be greater than the number of prize balls (1) paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, so that during the time-saving state, in addition to the game of aiming to obtain a special chart 2 reservation, the player is provided with a game of aiming to obtain many prize balls. By configuring in this way, the player can play games with different objectives depending on the game situation in the time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

As described above, in this 32nd control example, during the time-saving state, a game aiming to win many prize balls can be played as a game different from the game aiming to win the special symbol 2 reserve. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to provide a bonus different from the prize ball to the player based on the game ball entering the general winning port 63, or instead of the general winning port 63, a winning port that can win the right to play the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reserve) or a winning port that can win the right to play the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol reserve) may be provided.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 1. Therefore, if the conditions for executing the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) are met, a more advantageous bonus (i.e., special symbol 2 lottery and 1 prize ball) can be awarded to the player when the game ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the game ball enters the general winning port 63. If the conditions for executing the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) are not met and the condition number of special symbol 2 reservations has been acquired, a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the game ball enters the general winning port 63 rather than the second winning port 640.

This allows the player to change the ball entry port (the one that can get many rewards) through which the ball wants to enter depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have the ball enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, it is necessary to continue right-hand play, which increases the operation of the game.

In the 32nd control example, the operating period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) that is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the game ball is reliably admitted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. However, in addition to this, for example, the operating period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be configured to be a period (e.g., 0.9 seconds) that is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the game ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the shooting of the game ball after the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and then starting the shooting of the game ball again after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (so-called stop shooting), so that right-handed play can be continued during the time-saving state, improving the operation of the game.

The first variable winning device 65 is disposed below and to the right of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the first variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10, if the result of the special pattern lottery performed due to a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37 lights up and displays the special pattern as a stationary pattern indicating the jackpot, and the third pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, thereby informing the player of the jackpot.

Then, a jackpot game is played in which the game ball is likely to enter the first variable winning device 65. In the special game state in which this jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed (during non-jackpot games), is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have entered).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after that closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to nine times (nine rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally elongated rectangular door 65b that covers the opening of the specific winning hole 65a, and a specific winning hole solenoid 209a (see FIG. 950) for driving the door 65b to open and close in the front-to-back direction (depth direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 925). The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or it is difficult to win, specifically, in a closed state in which the door 65b protrudes forward (to the near side from the viewpoint of FIG. 925), and the opening of the specific winning hole 65a is covered by the door 65b in the closed state. When the opening and closing door 65b is in the closed state, a flow path through which game balls can flow is formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65b, and when a game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state, it flows down the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65b, and flows downstream of the first variable winning device 65 without winning the specific winning port 65a, enters the outlet 66 provided below the playing area of the game board 13, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10.

When a jackpot is hit, the specific winning port solenoid 209a is driven to move the opening and closing door 65b to the rear (the rear as viewed from the perspective of FIG. 925), temporarily creating an open state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning port 65a, and the opening and closing states are alternately repeated.

The special game state (contents of the big win game) is not limited to the above configuration. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when a special pattern indicating a big win is displayed on the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as the special game state. Also, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be provided, and the location of the opening is not limited to the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 or the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

The second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 specifically includes a horizontally elongated rectangular door 650f1 that covers the opening of the V winning port 650a, and a V winning port solenoid 209b (see FIG. 950) for driving the door 650f1 to open and close in the front-to-back direction (depth direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 925). The V winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, specifically, in a closed state in which the door 650f1 protrudes to the front side (the front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 925), and the opening of the V winning port 650a is configured to be covered by the door 650f1 in the closed state. When the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the closed state, a flow path through which game balls can flow is formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1, and when a game ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state, it flows down the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1, and flows downstream of the second variable winning device 650 without winning the V winning port 650a, and flows toward the electric device 640a located downstream of the second variable winning device 650 in the right area.

When a small win is played, the V winning port solenoid 209b is driven and the opening and closing door 650f1 moves to the rear side (the rear side from the viewpoint of FIG. 925), temporarily creating an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the V winning port 650a, and the opening and closing states are alternately repeated. The detailed structure of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later with reference to FIG. 927 to FIG. 930.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 927 to Fig. 930. First, as shown in Fig. 925, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and the game ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Fig. 925) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the game ball enters the V winning device 650.

In this 32nd control example, the opening operation of the V winning device 650 during a small win game is configured to be in a closed state (opening period) of 2 seconds, followed by an opening period (round game period) in the following order: open state (0.1 second), closed state (0.4 second), open state (0.1 second), closed state (0.4 second), open state (0.1 second), closed state (0.4 second), open state (0.1 second), closed state (0.4 second), open state (0.1 second), closed state (1.5 seconds), open state (0.1 second), closed state (1.5 seconds), open state (0.2 seconds), closed state (4.8 seconds), open state (0.8 seconds), closed state (9 seconds).

Thus, the duration of one open state (open period) is set to a minimum of 0.1 seconds, but this is a sufficient period for the game ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens to win the V winning device 650. The game ball that wins the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 929(a)) while flowing down the first or second regulating member. By configuring it in this way, the ball can be made to flow down smoothly regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the 32nd control example, the minimum period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the game ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in the 32nd control example, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 8 times, but any other number of times may be set.

The details will be described later, but in this 32nd control example, the closing period (interval period between openings) of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 in a small winning game is set to be longer after the fifth opening operation than up to the fifth opening operation during the small winning game. This is to make it easier for a game ball to win the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. Specifically, if it is determined that the specific area (V switch) 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, a game guide display that emphasizes and encourages the player to play right is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set long so that the game ball can enter the V winning device 650 even if the player starts right-hand play by understanding the game guide display displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In addition, since the closing period is set short (0.4 seconds) until the fifth opening operation performed during a small win game, for a player who is playing a right-hand game immediately after a small win game is performed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to end the small win game before a long closing period is set by having a predetermined number (10) of game balls enter the V winning device 650 before the fifth opening operation is completed, thereby establishing the conditions for ending the small win game. Therefore, compared to when a long closing period is set after the end of the first opening operation performed during a small win game, it is possible to prevent the small win game period from becoming unnecessarily long, which would reduce the motivation of a player who is playing a proper game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 927. FIG. 927 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 927, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b to screw the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon to light up the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 928 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 928 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 928 (b) is an Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 928 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which the game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 928 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the entry of the game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 650e shown in Figure 929 (a).

As shown in FIG. 928(b), the opening of the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a.

This configuration allows the player to play right-handed during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes play easier.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 928(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 928(b). As shown in Figure 928(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 929, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 929(a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 929(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 929(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, the game ball passes through the V switch (specific area) 650e3 described above during the small win game, and the start of the big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch (specific area) 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win game can pass through the V switch 650e3, or the flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to) pass through the V switch 650e3, and the flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on (see FIG. 929(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the 32nd control example is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents specified in the opening scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 952, so that the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the state that is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 929(a)), is provided, thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, the downstream end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1 is provided with a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of game balls. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the total number of detections of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been won in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has been met), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing with an abnormality occurring in part of the pachinko machine 10, which would cause a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the V entry port 650a of the second variable entry device (V entry device) 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, a prize ball (one prize ball) can be paid out to the player as a bonus. In addition, by using the game ball after detection to determine whether it passes through the V switch 650e4 or not, it can be determined whether a jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated entry port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V entry device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

In the 32nd control example, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, one small prize type (small prize A to C) can be set from among multiple small prize types, and the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON so that the game ball can enter the specific area during the small prize game regardless of which small prize type is set when the small prize game is played. However, without being limited to this, the probability that the game ball that entered the V entry device 650 during the small prize game will pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3) may be changed depending on the small prize type that is set.

For example, it is possible to configure the system so that a small prize game is executed for which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for a different period or timing depending on the type of small prize (small prize A to C) that is set when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, and to configure the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during the small prize game (V winning expectation) to differ depending on the content of the small prize game executed when a small prize is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player play while expecting not only winning a small prize, but also the execution of a small prize game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 930, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 930(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 930(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the 32nd control example is configured so that the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 925), down the left upper surface 650y2, and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the game balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.4 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the game balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 930(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 930(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 930(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 930(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first restricting member 651 and a second restricting member 652 for smoothing the flow of the balls after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, and the balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upper upstream side of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652, and then flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one game ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the game ball that enters the opening and closing door 650f1 with force from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, and therefore it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) can be secured to align the game balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one game ball, preventing balls from clogging the V winning device 650 and causing problems during play.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, the flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval between openings (0.4 seconds) of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in the bonus game (small win game) that is executed when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery for the special pattern) is a predetermined discrimination result (small win), so that the game ball flowing down the variable member during the interval between openings (the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small win game can be reliably made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, the number of opening operations (8 times) in one small win game is set so that a predetermined number (10) of balls can be won during a small win game even if only the game balls flowing down the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short, a sufficient number of winning balls can be secured. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive number of balls are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game by setting one opening period long.

Returning to FIG. 924, we will continue the explanation. In the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, there is provided an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see FIG. 925).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Game balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning holes (ball entry holes) 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlet 66 is disposed below the first ball entry hole 64.

The game board 13 has numerous nails planted in it to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and is also equipped with various components (gimmicks) such as windmills. These various components function as adjustment means for varying the direction and speed at which the game balls flow down the play area.

As shown in FIG. 932, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 950). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 950). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Now, referring to FIG. 933, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described. The display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a third pattern corresponding to a special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern), and the display mode of the third pattern is configured to display a display mode including ten main patterns imitating the numbers "0" to "9". Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 described later is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main patterns are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended.

During the special pattern variation period for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, this third pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the same way as the varying special pattern, and when the special pattern is displayed in a display manner that shows the result of the special pattern lottery, it is displayed in a display manner that corresponds to the special pattern that is displayed in a static manner. In other words, the player predicts the result of the special pattern lottery while watching the variable display (variable presentation) of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and then grasps the result of the special pattern lottery by visually checking the statically displayed third pattern.

Here, the variable display content of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained. In this 32nd control example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be capable of variable display of multiple third patterns, and the result of the special pattern lottery is announced according to the display mode (combination) of the multiple third patterns displayed in a stopped state. Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, center, and right. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed stopped on the pay line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the pay line in a jackpot symbol combination (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

The manner in which the patterns are displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or character with a number may be configured as the third pattern.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm4 is configured to be able to simply display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, a case where a variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4 is, for example, a case where a display effect such as a performance in which a specific character performs an action or a performance that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display area Dm. During the execution of the display effect, a more easily understandable effect can be provided by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm. Also, by simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 during the execution of the display effect, the player can easily understand that the variable display of the third symbol is continuing.

As shown in FIG. 933(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, a reserved pattern consisting of a black circle is displayed as shown in FIG. 933(b). As described above, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the first pattern display device 37 is performing a variable display, the number of balls entering is reserved a predetermined number (four times for the first ball entrance 64, and one time for the second ball entrance 640). The reserved patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the same number as the number of reserved balls. In this control example, the maximum number of reserved balls is set to four for the first special pattern and one for the second special pattern, and the sub-display area Ds is configured to be able to display a reserved pattern (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) corresponding to the first special pattern, so a maximum of four reserved patterns (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, FIG. 933(b) shows an example in which the reserved pattern (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) is displayed in the secondary display area Ds, but the display position of the reserved pattern is not limited to this, and the reserved pattern may be displayed in a partial area of the primary display area Ds.

In addition, there is no need to display all reserved patterns stored in the reserved memory. For example, when a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern that makes it easier to get a ball into the second ball entrance 640 is set, only the reserved pattern of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved pattern) may be displayed, and when a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern is set, only the reserved pattern of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) may be displayed. The visibility of the reserved patterns corresponding to each special pattern type may be varied depending on the game state. For example, when a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set, the special pattern 2 reserved pattern may be displayed so that it is easier for the player to see than the special pattern 1 reserved pattern, and when a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern is set, the special pattern 1 reserved pattern may be displayed so that it is easier for the player to see than the special pattern 2 reserved pattern. By configuring it in this way, the type of special symbol that will be mainly executed depending on the set game state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the 32nd control example, the number of reserved patterns is varied in response to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically. In addition, the display mode of the reserved patterns may be different depending on the special pattern type so that the player can distinguish whether the displayed reserved pattern is a special pattern 1 reserved pattern or a special pattern 2 reserved pattern, or each reserved pattern may be displayed in a similar display mode (including the idea of a completely identical display mode) to make it difficult for the player to know how many reserved patterns correspond to each special pattern type.

<About the performance content in the 32nd control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 934 to 948, the various presentation contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example will be explained.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured so that the game state is set to the normal state or the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, which is executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery. The game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends is notified to the player by the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game, which is executed when the jackpot is won (first win) in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute presentations that will strongly interest the player during the jackpot game, which is a monotonous game of just winning prize balls, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In this 32nd control example, a defeat effect in which an ally character defeats a predetermined number of enemies with multiple attacks can be executed as a jackpot game effect for notifying the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. If the number of enemies becomes 0 as a result of the effect, this defeat effect notifies the player that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game currently being played ends, and if the number of enemies becomes other than 0 (for example, 12) as a result of the effect, it notifies the player that a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game currently being played ends.

Here, conventionally, there are devices that execute an effect in which a displayed predetermined value is subtracted multiple times by the player operating an operating means that the player can operate, and when the predetermined value is subtracted to a specific value, an operation subtraction effect is executed to notify the player that a beneficial bonus will be awarded.

In this conventional type of operation subtraction effect, the initial specified value and the final value are generally determined in advance, and each effect for subtracting the value within the determined range is executed multiple times. If a player operates the operation means in a short period of time, the final value is displayed immediately after the operation subtraction effect begins, and there is a long period of time during which the value is not subtracted based on the operation of the operation means, which reduces the player's motivation to operate the device.

In the defeat effect executed in this 32nd control example, the number of times an attack effect is executed in which the number of enemies is subtracted based on the operation of the effect button 22a, and the number of enemies that can be defeated (defeated) for each execution opportunity of the attack effect (number of remaining enemies) can be determined in advance. Then, while each attack effect is being executed, the player can operate the operation means to display the predetermined number of remaining enemies as the performance result of the attack effect. If the player does not operate the operation means in each attack effect, or if the player operates the operation means but a number of enemies that is greater than the predetermined number of remaining enemies is displayed, an additional attack effect can be executed in which the number of remaining enemies that is actually displayed is subtracted by an additional attack.

When an additional attack effect is executed, the system is configured to execute a first attack effect that reduces the number of enemies to a predetermined number of remaining enemies, and a second attack effect that reduces the number of enemies to a specific number of remaining enemies within the range between the number of remaining enemies actually displayed and the predetermined number of remaining enemies. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to prevent the result of the additional attack effect from always being the predetermined number of remaining enemies.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, even if all enemies are defeated (when the number of remaining enemies becomes 0), the number of remaining enemies is displayed as a specific number (for example, a repeating number such as "111") during the defeat performance, making it possible to notify the player before the defeat performance ends that a time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to quickly find out the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game to focus on the content of the defeat performance (the performance results of each attack performance), thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the specific number of remaining enemies that can be notified before the defeat performance ends that a time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be a common specific number that is common regardless of the third pattern type (type of jackpot pattern) used to indicate a jackpot win, as well as a unique specific number that corresponds to the third pattern type (type of jackpot pattern) used to indicate a jackpot win.

By configuring the unique specific number to be configurable in this way, the number of remaining enemies expected to be displayed during the defeat performance can be varied depending on the type of third symbol displayed when a jackpot is won, preventing players from becoming bored with the defeat performance too quickly.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, a specific number of remaining enemies can be determined as the presentation result of the second attack presentation described above. In other words, instead of reducing the displayed number of remaining enemies to a predetermined number in one attack presentation, the specific number of remaining enemies is displayed as the presentation result of the second attack presentation when the displayed number of remaining enemies is not reduced to the predetermined number in one attack presentation, the specific number is included in the range between the displayed number of remaining enemies and the predetermined number of remaining enemies, and the display condition for displaying the specific number of remaining enemies is met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of choosing whether or not to operate the operating means (presentation button 22a) in each attack presentation.

In addition, by grasping the number of remaining enemies displayed at the time the attack performance begins and predicting the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced in the current attack performance (a predetermined number of remaining enemies), it is possible to predict whether a specific number is included within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in the current attack performance, and based on the prediction result, the player can select whether or not to operate the operating means (performance button 22a) in each attack performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, by allowing the player to set a unique specific number in addition to a common specific number as the specific number of remaining enemies, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the specific number is included in the range of enemies that can be reduced in the current attack performance, thereby preventing the selection result of whether or not to operate the operating means (performance button 22a) in each attack performance from becoming monotonous.

In the 32nd control example, a part of the number of remaining enemies that includes at least the number attached to the third symbol for indicating a jackpot win (for example, "4" when the third symbol "444" is stopped and displayed) can be set as a unique specific number corresponding to the third symbol type (type of jackpot symbol) for indicating a jackpot win. The more numbers attached to the third symbol for indicating a jackpot win, the easier it is to set the unique specific number. Specifically, in the defeat performance during a jackpot game that is executed based on the third symbol "444" being stopped and displayed, the unique specific number is most likely to be set to "444", followed by the number of remaining enemies with the last two digits "44", the number of remaining enemies with two "4"s, and the number of remaining enemies with the last digit "4". By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which number of remaining enemies has been set as the unique specific number.

In addition, when any of the multiple types of remaining enemy numbers, including the number attached to the third symbol to indicate a big win, is displayed, the player can expect that the displayed remaining enemy number is a unique specific number, so the defeat performance can be performed without boring the player.

In the 32nd control example, the unique number can be determined by lottery, but the invention is not limited to this and the unique number can be determined in advance in correspondence with the number attached to the third symbol to indicate a big win. Also, only one unique number can be determined, or three or more unique numbers can be determined.

In addition, while the defeat effect is being executed, a unique specific number suggestion effect may be executed that includes information to help the player predict the currently set unique specific number. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from needlessly expecting that the number is a unique specific number each time the remaining enemy number is displayed, including the number attached to the third symbol to indicate a jackpot win.

First, referring to Fig. 934 to Fig. 937, the contents of the effects executed during a jackpot game will be described. Fig. 934(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a defeat effect is executed as an effect for notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Here, the defeat effect is a part of the jackpot game effect executed during a jackpot game, in which an ally character defeats a predetermined number of enemies. When the number of enemies becomes 0 as a result of the effect, the player is notified that a time-saving state advantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game currently being executed ends, and when the number of enemies becomes other than 0 (for example, 12) as a result of the effect, the player is notified that a normal state disadvantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game currently being executed ends.

Specifically, in the first round of play (first round) of the jackpot game, the number of enemies in this defeat effect is displayed, and for each subsequent round of play (second round to sixth round) that is executed until the end of the jackpot game, an attack effect to defeat an enemy is executed, and the number of enemies displayed after the final attack effect is finished is displayed as the result of this defeat effect.

934(a) is a display screen showing the first round of a jackpot game, and in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the display area Dm1 in which the third symbol for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed shows "444" as the stopped display mode of the third symbol for showing the jackpot win. In FIG. 934(a), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area Dm1 in a manner that is recognizable by the player in order to show the display screen during the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and the third symbol may be stopped and displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish, or the third symbol may not be stopped and displayed during the jackpot game. Furthermore, instead of the identification information (third symbol) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, a special symbol imitating "V" may be stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm1 as the identification information (special symbol) for showing the jackpot win.

In addition, a display area Dm4 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm, in which a guide display mode is displayed to guide the player on how to play, and the word "Right Hit" is displayed to guide the player to right-hit play as a display mode to guide the player on the play method to be performed during a jackpot play. In addition, below the display area Dm4, "Round 1" is displayed, indicating the number of rounds currently being played, as a jackpot play status display mode to inform the player of the progress of the jackpot play.

At the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm6 is formed in which a point display mode is displayed to show information corresponding to the total number of prize balls acquired during the period in which the game state advantageous to the player continues. Fig. 934(a) shows the display screen of the first round of a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot (first win) in a normal state, and the display area Dm6 displays "33P" as information corresponding to the number of prize balls already acquired during this jackpot game. In other words, in this 32nd control example, when a jackpot game is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, and 11 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65, and Fig. 934(a) shows the display screen at the time when three game balls enter the specific winning port 65a in the first round of round play and a total of 33 prize balls are paid out.

A display area HR1 is formed in the center of the main display area Dm to display the total number of enemies to be defeated in this defeat performance, and the words "500 remaining" are displayed. In other words, this indicates that the performance mode of this defeat performance is one in which 500 enemies will be defeated.

Here, in this 32nd control example, different values can be determined as the total number of enemies in the defeat performance, specifically, one of "1000", "500", or "777" is determined, and "1000" is more likely to be determined when the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends than when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and "500" is more likely to be determined when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends than when the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, the total number of enemies "777" is determined only when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, the total number of enemies displayed in the display area HR1 can be known immediately after the start of the subjugation performance (first round of the jackpot game), allowing the player to predict the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends before the result of the subjugation performance is displayed, improving the effect of the performance. Furthermore, if the total number of enemies "777" is displayed, it is possible to allow the player to understand at the time the subjugation performance starts that a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, since it is possible to notify the player that the time-saving state will be set at various times during the performance period in which the subjugation performance is being executed, a player who wants to quickly know the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends can continue to pay attention to the performance during the performance period in which the subjugation performance is being executed.

In addition, a display area Dm7 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area, in which multiple button icons Pu1 to Pu5 that resemble the effect button 22a are displayed. In this display area Dm7, multiple button icons Pu1 to Pu5 are displayed in a display mode determined based on the number of times that attack effects will be executed to reduce the total number of enemies in the current defeat effect, and information suggesting the number of enemies to be reduced in one attack effect (number of enemies defeated).

In the example shown in FIG. 934(a), the first button icon Pu1, the second button icon Pu2, the third button icon Pu3, the fourth button icon Pu4, and the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed from the left, informing the player that five attack effects using the effect button 22a will be executed in this defeat effect. In addition, the first button icon Pu1, the third button icon Pu3, the fourth button icon Pu4, and the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in a normal display mode suggesting that a normal attack effect will be executed, and the second button icon Pu2 is displayed in a strong display mode (in the figure, it is displayed in a display mode that is thicker than normal) suggesting that a strong attack effect will be executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the number of attack effects that will be executed in this defeat effect and the content of each attack effect between the execution of the defeat effect and the execution of the first attack effect, providing an easy-to-understand effect.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the attack effect corresponding to the first button icon Pu1 is executed in the first attack effect, the attack effect corresponding to the second button icon Pu2 is executed in the second attack effect, the attack effect corresponding to the third button icon Pu3 is executed in the third attack effect, the attack effect corresponding to the fourth button icon Pu4 is executed in the fourth attack effect, and the attack effect corresponding to the fifth button icon Pu5 is executed in the fifth attack effect. In other words, the multiple button icons displayed in the display area Dm7 are configured to suggest not only the number of attack effects executed in the defeat effect, but also the performance mode in each attack effect. By configuring in this way, the player can predict in advance which attack effect in the defeat effect will result in a performance result that greatly reduces the number of remaining enemies, so that the player can expect the remaining number of enemies to change to a unique specific number or a common specific number while understanding the performance results of each attack effect (number of remaining enemies) and the display mode of the remaining button icons displayed in the display area Dm7.

The sub-display area Ds also displays the text "Enter the rush when all enemies are defeated!!" as a guide display mode to inform the player of the content of the defeat effect. By configuring it in this way, when the defeat effect is executed, the player can easily understand that some kind of bonus will be granted when the number of remaining enemies displayed as 500 drops to 0, allowing the player to enjoy the process of the number of remaining enemies decreasing while the defeat effect is being executed.

When the first attack effect in the subjugation effect is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 934(b) is displayed. FIG. 934(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first attack effect in the subjugation effect. In this 32nd control example, as described above, the attack effect in the subjugation effect is configured to be executed from the second round to the sixth round of the jackpot game, and since the first attack effect is executed in the second round, as shown in FIG. 934(b), "Round 2" is displayed in the display area Dm5, indicating that the second round is being played.

The display area HR1, which was formed in the center of the main display area Dm when the defeat performance started, is reduced and formed in the upper center of the display area Dm, and instead, in the center of the main display area Dm, a first button icon Pu1 is displayed as a display mode encouraging the player to press the performance button 22a, a display mode indicating the pressing direction (shown as a downward arrow in the figure), and a time gauge ga1 is displayed as a display mode indicating the period during which the operation of the performance button 22a in the first attack performance is judged to be valid (SW valid period).

In this 32nd control example, the SW effective period corresponding to one attack performance is set to 3 seconds, and the display mode of the time gauge ga1 is formed of a remaining period display ga1a for indicating the remaining period and an elapsed period display ga1b for indicating the elapsed period, and the display mode of the time gauge ga1 is configured to change so that the proportion of the elapsed period display ga1b increases and the proportion of the remaining period display ga1a decreases each time a period elapses after the SW effective period is set. Note that the example shown in FIG. 934(b) shows the point in time when 1 second has passed since the SW effective period was set, and the state is displayed in which the elapsed period display ga1b indicates a range of 1 second and the remaining period display ga1a indicates a range of 2 seconds for the SW effective period (3 seconds) shown by the entire time gauge ga1.

This configuration allows the player to visually understand the remaining time until the SW validity period has elapsed, which prevents the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 22a during an attack effect.

Furthermore, a rabbit-like character 801a is displayed as a display mode to suggest the content of the effect to be executed in the current attack effect. In this 32nd control example, the display mode to indicate an ally character used in the effect of reducing the number of remaining enemies, which is executed based on pressing the effect button 22a during an attack effect, is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device before the player presses the effect button 22a (after the SW valid period is set).

The attack performance is configured so that the range of remaining enemy number that can be reduced varies depending on the type of ally character and the type of attack executed. Specifically, the types of ally characters that can be set are character 801a (see FIG. 934(b)) modeled after a rabbit, and character 801b (see FIG. 935(a)) modeled after a hero with higher attack power than character 801a, and each character is configured to be able to execute a normal attack and a strong attack that is more likely to reduce the number of enemies than the normal attack. Thus, a normal attack by character 801a is the attack performance combination that is least likely to reduce the number of remaining enemies, and a strong attack by character 801b is the attack performance combination that is most likely to reduce the number of remaining enemies.

In this way, by configuring at least some of the components that make up the presentation style of an attack presentation to be able to notify the player in advance of the range of remaining enemy numbers that can be reduced in one attack presentation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the presentation result of the attack presentation that will be executed this time.

In this thirty-second control example, there are two types of ally characters used in the attack performance, but there may be only one type of ally character, or three or more types. In addition, there may be three or more types of attacks that an ally character can execute, and the type of attack executed may differ depending on the type of ally character. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create more interest in which type of ally character is selected to be used in the attack performance.

The first button icon Pu1 displayed during the attack performance is configured to be displayed in the same display mode as the first button icon Pu1 displayed in the display area Dm7 when the subjugation performance begins. Specifically, when the attack performance begins, a button icon movement performance is executed in which the first button icon Pu1 displayed in the display area Dm7 expands and moves toward the center of the main display area Dm. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a performance in which an attack performance is executed using the actual button icons displayed in the display area Dm7 when the subjugation performance begins, so that the player can be interested in the display mode displayed in the display area Dm7 when the subjugation performance begins.

And because the first button icon Pu1 has been used for an attack effect, only the unused second button icon Pu2 through fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the display area Dm7, and the area where the first button icon Pu1 was previously displayed shows a display mode (shown as "-" in the figure) to indicate that it has been used for an attack effect.

By configuring it in this way, you can easily see the number of attack effects that have already been performed during the subjugation performance, and the number of attack effects that remain, by checking each button icon displayed in the display area Dm7.

When the player presses the effect button 22a in the state shown in FIG. 934(b), an effect is executed in which the character 801a attacks the enemy, and the number of remaining enemies after the attack is displayed. Next, referring to FIG. 935(a), the effect contents during the interval period after the end of the second round of round play in which the first attack effect was executed will be explained. FIG. 935(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the interval after the end of the second round. During the interval period set between the second round to the sixth round of round play, a display mode showing the effect result (number of remaining enemies) of the attack effect executed in the previous round play and a display mode showing the effect contents of the attack effect executed in the next round play are displayed.

In this 32nd control example, the interval period is set to 1.5 seconds, and if the effect button 22a is not pressed during an attack effect (SW valid period) executed in the previous round of play, the effect result (number of remaining enemies) of the attack effect executed in the previous round of play is displayed using the interval period. On the other hand, if the effect button 22a is pressed during an attack effect executed in the previous round of play (SW valid period), immediately after the effect button 22a is pressed, the effect of an ally character attacking is executed, and then the effect result of this attack effect (number of remaining enemies) is displayed while the interval period continues, and a display mode indicating the effect content of the attack effect executed in the next round of play is displayed while the effect result of the attack effect (number of remaining enemies) is displayed.

To explain in more detail, in this 32nd control example, the round play executed during the jackpot game has a first end condition that is met when 10 game balls enter the first variable winning device 65, and a second end condition that is met when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round play without the first end condition being met. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 925, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured so that right-hand play is executed during the jackpot game, and most of the game balls launched by right-hand play reach the first variable winning device 65.

This pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to launch 100 game balls in one minute (60 seconds), so if game balls are continuously launched during a jackpot game, the first end condition will be met approximately six seconds after the round game starts, and the round game will end. The round game performance executed during the round game is configured to execute an attack performance three seconds after the round game starts, with a SW effective time of three seconds.

In other words, the length of the SW effective time in the attack effect executed during a round game (3 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the length of the round game period that continues during normal play (approximately 6 seconds). By configuring it in this way, even if the game ball efficiently enters the first variable winning device 65 during a round game, it is possible to prevent the round game from ending while the SW effective time is being set, so that it is possible to prevent a player who tries to operate the effect button 22a within the SW effective time from losing their motivation to operate the effect button 22a because the round game ends before the player can operate the effect button 22a.

In the 32nd control example, the SW effective time set during round play is predefined to be shorter than the round play period (approximately 6 seconds) that can continue when normal play is being played, and the attack effect is executed so that the SW effective time elapses before the round play period (approximately 6 seconds) elapses, thereby preventing a player who attempts to operate the effect button 22a within the SW effective time from losing their motivation to operate the effect button 22a because the round play ends before the player can operate the effect button 22a. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the length of the SW effective time set during round play may be configured to be variable depending on the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 during round play.

Specifically, the SW effective time set during a round of play is set to the same length (30 seconds) as the period when the second end condition (30 seconds have elapsed) that ends the round of play based on the elapsed time is satisfied, and then, each time a game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 during a round of play, 3 seconds are subtracted from the remaining SW effective time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably end the SW effective time before the round of play ends. In addition, since a long SW effective time (up to 30 seconds) can be provided to a player who interrupts the firing of a game ball during a round of play and attempts to operate the effect button 22a, it is possible to prevent a player who attempts to operate the effect button 22a within the SW effective time from losing their motivation to operate the effect button 22a because the SW effective time has elapsed before the player operates the effect button 22a.

Returning to FIG. 935(a), the explanation will be continued. As shown in FIG. 935(a), in the interval period after the end of the second round, "385 enemies remaining" is displayed in the display area HR1 as the result of the attack effect (see FIG. 934(b)) executed in the second round. Also, as a display mode to suggest the content of the attack effect executed in the third round, a character 801b modeled after a hero is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and the second button icon Pu2 corresponding to the next attack effect is displayed in a strong display mode in the display area Dm7. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the remaining number of attack effects in the current defeat effect and the comment "4 attacks remaining!! Next is your chance to defeat a large number of enemies!!" are displayed as a display mode to inform the player that the next attack effect will be an attack effect that will greatly reduce the remaining number of enemies.

A player viewing the display screen shown in FIG. 935(a) can therefore know in advance that the number of remaining enemies will be greatly reduced in the attack performance executed in the third round, and can enjoy the attack performance in the third round while hoping that the number of remaining enemies will reach zero.

In this 32nd control example, as shown in FIG. 935(a), the content of the attack effect to be executed in the next round of play is suggested to the player by three display elements (the display mode of the display area Dm7, the display of the character 801b, and the comment in the sub-display area Ds). Each of these display elements does not have to be displayed during all interval periods, and at least one display element may be used to suggest the content of the attack effect to be executed in the next round of play.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the display so that the more of the three display elements used, the higher the likelihood that the next attack effect will be one that will greatly reduce the number of remaining enemies, or, if there is a contradiction in the attack effects suggested by the three display elements, the higher the likelihood that the next attack effect will be one that will greatly reduce the number of remaining enemies. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to keep the player interested in the various display modes displayed during the interval period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, of the three display elements described above, only display mode Dm7 is displayed in advance, and the remaining two display elements are configured to be displayed simultaneously at the timing when an interval period is set and the display mode indicating the content of the attack effect to be executed in the next round of play is displayed; however, without being limited to this, the display timing of the display mode suggesting the character to be used in the attack effect to be executed in the next round of play (first display element) and the display timing of the comment display (second display element) in the sub-display area Ds may be configured to differ.

In this case, for example, it is advisable to configure the display timing of each display element so that the display element for which the display mode advantageous to the player has been determined is displayed later. By configuring in this way, the period during which the player focuses on the display content displayed during the interval period can be extended, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

The display timing of each display element may be set so that the display element for which the display mode advantageous to the player has been determined is displayed first. By configuring in this way, if the display element displayed first has a display mode advantageous to the player, it is possible that both of the two display elements will have a display mode advantageous to the player, and therefore the player can be made to pay attention to the display element that is displayed later.

In the 32nd control example, the type of button icon (strong display mode, normal display mode) used in each attack effect is displayed to the player in advance when the defeat effect starts (see FIG. 934(a)). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the defeat effect starts, the type of only the first button icon Pu1 is determined according to the content of the first attack effect as a number of button icons corresponding to the number of attack effects executed in this defeat effect, and the remaining second button icon Pu2 to fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in a normal display mode. When the defeat effect starts, a display mode that notifies the player only of the number of attack effects executed in this defeat effect and the content of the first attack effect is displayed, and during the interval period from the second round onwards, the display mode of the second button icon Pu2 to fifth button icon Pu5 may be variably displayed according to the content of the corresponding attack effect.

When configured in this way, the process for determining the display timing of each display element displayed during the interval period may be configured to determine the display timing including the display timing of the variable display mode of the button icon (third display element) in addition to the first and second display elements described above.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the display state of the second button icon Pu2 to the fifth button icon Pu5 is changed during the interval period from the second round onwards, the content of each attack effect executed in the subjugation effect may be determined during the interval period, rather than being determined in advance before the subjugation effect starts, or the content of the attack effect that was determined in advance at the start of the subjugation effect may be changed depending on the result of the previously executed attack effect (the operation status of the effect button 22a).

In this way, even if the content of the remaining attack effects (the number of remaining enemies to be reduced) is changed while the defeat effect is being executed, the button icon can be displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the content of the attack effect after the change, preventing the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

If all enemies are defeated in the final attack performance (the sixth round attack performance) executed in the defeat performance, the display screen shown in FIG. 935(b) is displayed. FIG. 935(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when all enemies are defeated in the defeat performance.

As shown in FIG. 935(b), "0 remaining" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode indicating the remaining number of enemies, and the character 801a used in the attack effect and the effect mode in which character 801b congratulates are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the display area Dm7, five consumed icons (shown as "-" in the figure) are displayed corresponding to the number of times the attack effect has been executed, as a display mode that allows the number of attack effects executed in the current defeat effect to be understood.

In the secondary display area Ds, the text "Defeat Complete!! Rush Begins!!" is displayed as a guide display mode to inform the player that the current defeat effect is a favorable effect. By configuring it in this way, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the result of the defeat effect is a successful effect that is favorable to the player, and that a time-saving state (rush) will be set after the big win game ends.

Next, the display contents of the display screen displayed depending on whether or not the effect button 22a is operated during the attack effect executed in the above-mentioned defeat effect will be explained with reference to Fig. 936 and Fig. 937(a). Fig. 936(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the attack effect of the third round executed after the interval period displayed in Fig. 935(a) has elapsed, Fig. 936(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player operates (presses) the effect button 22a within the SW effective time of the attack effect displayed in Fig. 936(a), and Fig. 937(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player does not operate (press) the effect button 22a within the SW effective time of the attack effect displayed in Fig. 936(a).

In this 32nd control example, a presentation mode can be determined in which the number of remaining enemies becomes a common specific number (0) to indicate that the presentation result of the defeat presentation is advantageous to the player (a presentation result that notifies the player that a time-saving state will be set after the end of a jackpot game). Furthermore, by displaying a unique specific number (for example, a repeat number such as 333 or a value corresponding to a jackpot pattern) as the number of remaining enemies before the number of remaining enemies becomes the common specific number (0) in a defeat presentation that results in an advantageous presentation to the player, the presentation result of this defeat presentation can be notified to the player during the defeat presentation.

In addition, the result of each attack performance is different depending on the operation status (pressing or not) of the performance button 22a in each attack performance. For example, if the performance button 22a is pressed during an attack performance, a predetermined performance result (number of remaining enemies) of each attack performance is displayed, and if the performance button 22a is not pressed during an attack performance, a number of remaining enemies greater than the predetermined performance result (number of remaining enemies) can be displayed. In other words, the performance result of the attack performance is determined in advance, and multiple remaining enemy numbers can be displayed up to the number of remaining enemies indicated by the predetermined performance result according to the conditions that are met during the attack performance.

By configuring it in this way, the total number of enemies that can be reduced in each attack effect executed in the subjugation effect is predefined, which prevents the number of remaining enemies from being reduced unevenly during the duration of the subjugation effect and allows for variation in the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced in each attack effect.

Furthermore, if there is a specific number between the number of remaining enemies that is predetermined as the result of an attack effect and the number of remaining enemies displayed at the start of the attack effect, and the player does not operate (press) the effect button 22a during the attack effect, an additional attack effect can be executed in which the number of remaining enemies is the specific number. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of choosing whether or not to operate the effect button 22a during the attack effect.

As mentioned above, the unique number is determined according to the numbers included in the jackpot symbol, and the player is not notified of the number of remaining enemies determined as the unique number. This provides the player with the fun of predicting whether the unique number is included in the range of remaining enemies that will be reduced by the current attack each time an attack effect is executed.

In addition, by informing the player of the amount of remaining enemies that will be reduced in the next attack performance, it is possible to provide hints for predicting the amount of remaining enemies that will be reduced during the attack performance, making it easier to predict the range in which the number of remaining enemies will be reduced in the current attack performance.

As shown in FIG. 936(a), when the third round of attack performance is executed, the character 801b displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 935(b)) during the interval period after the end of the second round is displayed in the main display area Dm, the second button icon Pu2 in a strong display mode is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a time gauge ga1 is displayed to indicate the SW effective time set for this attack performance. This time gauge ga1 is displayed with a remaining period display ga1a and an elapsed period display ga1b to show the elapsed time of the 3-second SW effective time, similar to the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 934(b).

In addition, because the attack effect in the third round is executed using the second button icon Pu2, the third button icon Pu3 to the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the display area Dm7, and "385 remaining" is displayed in the display area HR1, indicating the number of remaining enemies that is the result of the attack effect in the second round. In this way, by displaying the display mode of the button icon suggesting the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced by the current attack effect and the current number of remaining enemies during the period in which the player is prompted to operate the effect button 22a (within the SW effective time of the attack effect), it is possible to make it easier for the player to decide whether or not to operate the effect button 22a for the attack effect being executed.

When the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect of the third round, the display screen shown in FIG. 936(b) is displayed. FIG. 936(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the effect button 22a is operated (pressed) during the attack effect of the third round. As shown in FIG. 936(b), when the effect button 22a is operated (pressed) during the attack effect, an effect is executed in which ally character 801b executes an attack action without waiting for the end of the round of play, and then the words "99 remaining" are displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode to show the effect result of this attack effect.

In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 936(b), a total number of enemies of "500" is determined as the presentation mode of the defeat presentation, and "99 remaining" is pre-determined as the presentation result of the attack presentation (second attack presentation) executed in the third round, and the presentation result in which the number of remaining enemies has been reduced to the pre-determined number by the second attack presentation is displayed. The display area HR1 showing the number of remaining enemies is configured so that the display mode (background) is variably set according to the number of remaining enemies displayed, and in FIG. 936(b), a display mode (cracked background) is displayed to indicate that the number of remaining enemies (remaining enemy count) is 100 or less. Then, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Almost there!!" as a guide display mode to inform the player that the number of remaining enemies is 100 or less.

In this 32nd control example, the display mode of the display area in which the number of remaining enemies is displayed is configured to be variable depending on the number of remaining enemies, but conditions other than the number of remaining enemies may be set as conditions for varying the display mode, and the condition for varying the display mode may be met when the ratio of the current number of remaining enemies to the total number of enemies in the defeat performance (the number of remaining enemies initially displayed in display area HR1) falls below a predetermined ratio (for example, in a defeat performance in which 1,000 enemies are defeated, when the number of remaining enemies falls to 100 (less than 10% of the total number of enemies)).

By configuring it in this way, the display mode of the display area HR1 can be changed depending on the degree to which the number of enemies has decreased relative to the total number of enemies in the defeat performance, rather than the number of remaining enemies, making it easier for the player to understand how many enemies have been defeated in the defeat performance.

Next, if the effect button 22a is not pressed during the attack effect of the third round, the display screen shown in FIG. 937(a) is displayed. FIG. 937(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during the interval period after the end of the third round when the third round ends without operating the effect button 22a from the state shown in FIG. 936(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 936(a) (remaining enemy count "385"), if the SW effective time elapses without operating the effect button 22a, the remaining time display ga1a of the time gauge ga1 decreases, and the SW effective time ends. When the third round of round play ends in this state, the game moves to the interval period set after the end of the third round of round play, and an additional attack effect that is executed when the effect button 22a is not operated is executed, and "333 remaining" is displayed in the display area HR1 as the result of the additional attack effect.

In other words, the diagram shown in FIG. 937(a) shows an example of a display screen when the current jackpot game is a jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and a defeat effect in which "333" is set as the unique specific number of the defeat effect in which a successful effect is executed is being executed.

The number of remaining enemies is determined to be "99" as the result of the attack effect executed in the third round, and if the player operates the effect button 22a, the effect result shown in FIG. 936(b) is displayed in which the number of remaining enemies decreases from "385" to "99". On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 22a, an additional attack effect is executed to decrease the number of remaining enemies from "385" by a specified number. If the conditions for executing this additional attack effect are met, the effect mode (effect) of the additional attack effect is determined by a special lottery.

Specifically, if the SW effective time has elapsed without operating the effect button 22a, the conditions for executing the additional attack effect are met, and it is determined whether the unique number determined in this defeat effect (e.g., "333") is included between the current number of remaining enemies (e.g., "385") and the number of remaining enemies previously determined as the effect of the attack effect (e.g., "99"), and if it is determined that the unique number is not included, a performance mode is determined in which the number of remaining enemies is reduced to the number previously determined as the effect of the attack effect (e.g., "99") at a rate of 70%, a performance mode is determined in which the number of remaining enemies is reduced to the first pseudo remaining enemy number (e.g., "104") whose last digit is the number of the jackpot symbol (e.g., "4") at a rate of 20%, and a performance mode is determined in which the number of remaining enemies is reduced to the second pseudo remaining enemy number (e.g., "144") whose last two digits are the number of the jackpot symbol (e.g., "4") at a rate of 10%.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a unique specific number is included, a presentation mode is determined in which the number of remaining enemies is reduced to a predetermined number (e.g., "99") as a presentation result of the attack presentation with a probability of 40%, a presentation mode is determined in which the number is reduced to a unique specific number (e.g., "333") with a probability of 30%, a presentation mode is determined in which the number is reduced to a first pseudo remaining enemy number (e.g., "104") whose last digit is the number of the jackpot symbol (e.g., "4") with a probability of 10%, and a presentation mode is determined in which the number is reduced to a second pseudo remaining enemy number (e.g., "144") whose last two digits are the number of the jackpot symbol (e.g., "4") with a probability of 20%.

Then, an additional attack effect is executed according to the determined effect mode. This configuration allows the effect result of one attack effect to be different depending on whether or not the effect button 22a is operated during the attack effect, thereby increasing the variety of attack effects. Furthermore, even if the unique specified number is not included in the range in which the remaining enemy number is reduced, the number of enemies is easily reduced to the remaining enemy number (pseudo remaining enemy number) related to the number included in the jackpot pattern, making it easier for the player to believe that the effect result of the additional attack effect is the unique specified number.

Furthermore, when the unique specified number is included within the range of remaining enemy count reduction, i.e., when the defeat performance being executed is a defeat performance that will result in a successful performance (a defeat performance executed during a jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set), the pseudo remaining enemy count is configured to be easier to determine than when the unique specified number is not included within the range of remaining enemy count reduction. Therefore, even if the remaining enemy count cannot be reduced to the unique specified number, the game is played so that additional attack performances are executed multiple times in one defeat performance, and the pseudo remaining enemy count is displayed multiple times, allowing the player to predict that the current defeat performance will be a defeat performance that will result in a successful performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 937(a), when a specific number of remaining enemies ("333") is displayed in display area HR1, that is, when the player is notified that a success effect (a defeat effect that notifies the player that a time-saving state will be set) will be executed before the number of remaining enemies reaches "0", the display mode of display area HR1 is displayed in a different display mode from normal (displayed in a glowing state in the figure), and the button icons (third button icon Pu3 to fifth button icon Pu5) displayed in display area Dm7 are displayed in a special display mode (displayed in a glowing state in the figure) to indicate that the remaining attack effects will be executed so that the number of remaining enemies will eventually reach "0".

In the present 32nd control example, even if a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies midway through the defeat performance, the remaining attack performance is configured to be executed according to the predetermined content. In other words, even after the unique specific number is displayed, an attack performance is executed to reduce the number of remaining enemies until the number of remaining enemies becomes zero. Therefore, even if the number of remaining enemies is once displayed as a unique specific number, as the defeat performance progresses, a number of remaining enemies different from the unique specific number will be displayed in the display area HR1. Therefore, by configuring the display mode of the button icon displayed in the display area Dm7 and the display mode of the display area HR1 to be displayable in a display mode to notify that the unique specific number has been displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue to understand that the unique specific number was displayed as the number of remaining enemies midway through the defeat performance for the remaining period of the defeat performance.

As described above, in the 32nd control example, even if a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies halfway through the defeat performance, the remaining attack performance is configured to be executed according to a predetermined content, thereby preventing the load on the control process for executing the defeat performance from increasing. In other words, when the player is already aware that a successful performance has been executed, the player is less interested in the degree of decrease in the number of remaining enemies in each attack performance, so even if a dedicated performance mode (for example, a performance mode in which the number of remaining enemies is all the same as the performance result of each attack performance) can be set as the performance mode of the attack performance executed after the unique specific number is displayed, it is difficult to effectively enhance the performance effect. Therefore, a predetermined performance mode of the attack performance is used as is, and excessive increase in the load on the control process for executing the defeat performance can be prevented.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration used in this 32nd control example, when a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies in the middle of the defeat performance, a dedicated performance mode may be executed instead of the performance mode of the attack performance that has been determined in advance. For example, when the next attack performance is executed in a state in which a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies, an attack performance in which the number of remaining enemies becomes "0" regardless of the number of remaining attack performances in the defeat performance may be executed, and then, using the remaining period (post-confirmation time) until the defeat performance ends, a congratulatory performance to congratulate the player without executing the remaining attack performance may be executed, or a second performance may be executed that can notify the player of whether or not a different benefit (for example, the presence or absence of a reserved consecutive win) will be granted using the attack performance executed during the above-mentioned post-confirmation time. By configuring in this way, when a defeat performance that is a successful performance is executed, different benefits can be granted to the player depending on the progress of the performance until the performance result is displayed (the presence or absence of the unique specific number), so that the player can be provided with the fun of choosing whether or not to press the performance button 22a during the period in which the defeat performance is executed.

It may also be possible to configure it so that a dedicated presentation mode (for example, a presentation mode in which the remaining enemy numbers all match as the presentation result of each attack presentation) can be set as the presentation mode for the attack presentation executed after the unique specific number is displayed. By configuring it in this way, the player can be easily notified that a unique specific number has been displayed simply by knowing the remaining enemy number displayed in display area HR1, so there is no need to prepare display data for displaying a dedicated display mode (for example, a glowing mode) as the display mode for display elements (for example, button icons) displayed in display areas other than display area HR1 (for example, display area Dm7).

Figure 937 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a unique specific number is displayed in the final attack performance of a defeat performance. In this 32nd control example, in a defeat performance that is a success performance, a unique specific number (e.g., "44") is displayed as the performance result of the final attack performance instead of the remaining enemy number "0", and then a revival performance can be executed in which the remaining enemy number is reduced to "0" by an additional attack performance.

In other words, once the player is made aware that the attack effect being executed this time is the final attack effect in the subjugation effect, the number of remaining enemies other than "0" is displayed as the result of that final attack effect, making the player believe that a failure effect (an effect informing the player that the time-saving state will not be set after the end of the jackpot game) has been executed, a revival effect is executed and the number of remaining enemies can be changed back to "0". By configuring it in this way, the player can have hope that a success effect will be executed until the very end when the subjugation effect ends.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 937(b), during the sixth round of play, "44 remaining" is displayed in display area HR1 as a display mode for indicating the result of the final attack effect. In the example shown in FIG. 937(b), "44" is determined as the unique specific number using the number "4" contained in the jackpot pattern, and the "44" displayed in display area HR1 becomes the unique specific number. Then, in the main display area Dm, a revival effect (additional attack effect) is executed in which character 801c corresponding to the revival effect attacks display area HR1, further decreasing the unique specific number that was once displayed.

When this revival effect ends, "0 enemies remaining" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode to indicate a successful effect, similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 935(b), informing the player that a successful effect has been executed. Although not shown, in this 32nd control example, when the result of the defeat effect is a failure effect, the number of remaining enemies other than the specific number is not randomly determined as the result of the final attack effect, but rather a pseudo number of remaining enemies is more likely to be determined using the numbers included in the jackpot symbol.

In other words, in the defeat effect when "444" is the big winner, the display area HR1 of the display screen for showing the performance result of the failed performance (the display screen showing the result of the last attack performance) is configured to easily display the number of remaining enemies marked with the number "4", which is a pseudo number of remaining enemies that is not determined as a unique specific number (for example, "14" or "4", etc.). By configuring it in this way, when the performance result of a failed performance is displayed, it is possible to display the performance result of the failed performance while leaving open the possibility of a revival performance being executed.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, the result of the subjugation effect executed during the first jackpot game is used to notify in advance that a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, by making it possible to notify the result of the subjugation effect before it is displayed (the result of the final attack effect), it is possible to make players who want to quickly find out the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends interested not only in the result of the subjugation effect, but also in the process of the subjugation effect (the result of each attack effect).

Specifically, by displaying a specific number (a common specific number, a unique specific number) as the performance result of each attack performance, it is possible to notify in advance that the performance result of the defeat performance will be a performance result (displaying the number of remaining enemies as 0) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set.

In other words, in this 32nd control example, the timing of the notification can be changed to notify the player that the same bonus will be granted when a specific number is displayed as the defeat effect and when a performance result (0 remaining enemies) is displayed to indicate that a time-saving state will be set. The content of the bonus granted to the player when a specific number is displayed and the content granted to the player when the performance result of the defeat effect is displayed can be different. For example, the bonus granted when the performance result of the defeat effect is displayed can be set to a bonus indicating that a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, and the bonus granted when a specific number is displayed can be a bonus indicating that the next jackpot game will be played immediately after the jackpot game ends (remaining on hold).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to award multiple benefits to the player through the defeat performance, making it easier for the player to focus on not only the performance result of the defeat performance, but also the performance process.

Next, referring to FIG. 938, the content of the variable presentation executed during the time-saving state (rush) will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example is configured to be able to set the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) as game states, and is configured so that the second special symbol lottery, which is advantageous to the player, is more likely to be executed when the time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set.

The second special symbol lottery is set to have a high probability (1/2 probability) of winning a small prize, and the game ball that enters the second variable prize device (V prize device) 650, which is opened during the small prize game that is executed when the small prize is won, is configured to be able to pass through a specific area, and a big prize (V big prize) game is executed based on the game ball passing through the specific area.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example is configured to be able to set a short period of time (e.g., 1 second) as the period of time for the second special pattern variation to indicate the result of the second special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and is configured to make it easier to increase the number of jackpot games executed per unit time by shortening the period from the end of one jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, as a variable presentation to show the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the variable presentation executed during the normal state, i.e., after displaying the multiple symbols included in the multiple symbol rows (e.g., the left row, middle row, right row) including at least the third symbol to show the lottery result, a reach state is created in which the third symbols included in some of the symbol rows (e.g., the left row, right row) are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win, and a variable presentation exclusive to the time-saving state is executed without executing a reach presentation that entertains the player by having them predict the stopped display mode of the third symbols displayed in the remaining symbol rows (e.g., the middle row).

In other words, the above-mentioned reach effect is a change effect that gradually increases the expectation of winning the jackpot by using the change period during which the special pattern change is being performed, and even if a long change time (e.g., 60 seconds) is set to prevent the special pattern lottery from being performed too frequently, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game. However, in a case where a special pattern change of a short change time (e.g., 1 second) is easily performed during the time-saving state, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example, even if a reach effect is performed using the change time of one special pattern change, the time spent from creating the reach state to stopping and displaying the result of the special pattern lottery is short, which creates a problem in that it provides an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, during the rush period when the time-saving state is set, a performance is mainly executed that counts down the remaining number of second special pattern variations that can be executed during the time-saving state (remaining number of special pattern 2 variations), and if the result of the second special pattern lottery is a winning combination, the display mode of the third pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery is displayed instead of the number displayed in the countdown.

By configuring it in this way, in the time-saving state where special pattern variations with short variation times are executed continuously, the period during which the time-saving state will continue can be clearly notified to the player, and also that the player has won the special pattern lottery.

Figure 938(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed while the first second special symbol change is being executed after the time-saving state (time-saving three times) is set. As shown in Figure 938(a), during rush, which is a presentation mode during the time-saving state, a presentation in which the character 801 is charging an attack is executed, and a number icon 808 is displayed in front of it as a display mode to indicate the number of remaining special symbol 2 changes. In the diagram shown in Figure 938(a), since the first second special symbol change is being executed, the number icon 808 is displayed in the display mode of "3", indicating that three second special symbol changes will be executed, including the second special symbol change currently being executed.

In addition, to the right of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm8 is formed in which a duration display is displayed to show the duration of the time-saving state (rush), and the display mode of "00:02:44" is displayed as a display mode showing the duration of the time-saving state (rush) period. This "00:02:44" indicates that two seconds have passed since the time-saving state was set.

Specifically, the duration display shown in display area Dm8 is configured to be capable of displaying a maximum period of 99 minutes and 59 seconds. The area to the right of the area where the time in seconds is displayed (the two-digit area in the middle) (the two-digit area on the right, where "44" is displayed in Fig. 938(a)) is formed as a pseudo elapsed time display area, and is configured to be capable of displaying values ranging from a minimum of "00" to a maximum of "99". The value is configured to be able to be updated from the minimum value to the maximum value within the time it takes for one second to elapse, and after the maximum value is reached, the minimum value is displayed again and the value is repeatedly updated.

In other words, the pseudo elapsed time display area is a display area that makes it appear as if the value is updated in 1/100th of a second increments. Note that if the time-saving state continues beyond the maximum duration display value (99 minutes 59 seconds) shown in display area Dm8, no further duration will be displayed, and instead a congratulatory display (for example, an "Excellent!!" display) will be displayed to indicate that the time-saving state has continued for a long period of time. This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with a special experience.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the display of the duration is updated during the period when the time-saving state continues (including the period of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game executed during the time-saving state), regardless of whether or not play is being performed. Therefore, for example, if play is interrupted for a long period during the time-saving state, the duration display is likely to reach its maximum value. Therefore, as a condition for executing the above-mentioned congratulatory display, in addition to the duration display reaching its maximum value, a condition that is met when the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period exceeds a predetermined number, or a condition that is met when the number of jackpot games executed during the rush period or the number of special pattern lotteries executed during the time-saving state exceeds a predetermined number may be satisfied.

By configuring it in this way, only players who have played many games (special pattern lotteries) during the rush period can have the congratulatory display displayed, which can increase the satisfaction of players who have seen the congratulatory display displayed. In this case, if the duration display reaches its maximum value while the execution conditions for the congratulatory display are not met, it is preferable to configure the display to continue to display the maximum duration display, and to execute the congratulatory display when the execution conditions for the congratulatory display are met while the maximum duration display is continuing.

By configuring it in this way, players who are experiencing a long rush period can be motivated to play in order to have the congratulatory display executed.

In the secondary display area Ds, the words "Destroy the screen before the countdown hits 0" are displayed as a guide display to indicate the content of the variable effects that will be executed during the rush period (time-saving state). By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand that a bonus (win) will be awarded if the character 801 attacks and destroys the screen.

If the second special symbol lottery executed during the rush period is a winning combination, the display screen shown in FIG. 938(b) is displayed. FIG. 938(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a winning special symbol variation is stopped and displayed during the rush period. When a winning second special symbol variation is executed, an attack effect is executed in which the character 801 that was charging an attack destroys the screen, the screen is destroyed, and the number icon 808 that was displayed as a countdown becomes invisible. Instead, the third symbol ("555" in the figure) is displayed in the combination indicating a winning combination in the display area HR2.

Next, referring to FIG. 939 and FIG. 940, the contents of the presentation during the small win game that is executed when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery will be explained. FIG. 939(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the small win game is started, FIG. 939(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the game ball is made to enter a specific area (V area) within 4 seconds after the small win game is started, and FIG. 940 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the game ball is made to enter a specific area (V area) within 4 seconds after the small win game is started and 4 seconds have passed since the small win game started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example shortens the time for the second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state (rush period) in order to increase the number of jackpot games executed per unit time. Furthermore, the period from when a small jackpot is won until the small jackpot game is executed, and the period from when the small jackpot game is executed until it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific area (V area) are also shortened.

Here, a pachinko machine 10 has been known in the past in which the player acquires the right to play a jackpot game by having a game ball enter a specific area (V area) during a small win game, and the jackpot game is played after the small win game ends. In this conventional pachinko machine 10, in order to have the game ball enter the specific area within the limited period during which the small win game is played, a game guide announcement is executed to notify the player in advance of the game content to be played during the small win game (for example, a display of "Hit to the right and aim for V") using the period from when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win to when the small win game starts, or the period from when the small win game starts during which the game ball can be allowed to enter the specific area.

In a conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the period from when the special pattern lottery results in a small win to when the small win game starts, or the period from when the small win game starts to when the game ball can enter a specific area, is set to a length that allows the above-mentioned game guide announcement to be repeatedly executed, so that the player can understand the game content that should be executed during the small win game.

In a conventional pachinko machine 10 in which game guide notifications are repeatedly executed until it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific area, the game guide notification is repeatedly executed even in a state in which it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific area, and the game guide notification is stopped when the game ball enters the specific area, and a display mode (e.g., "V" get) is displayed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the specific area, so that the player can easily understand that the game has been executed properly.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, the game guide notification is stopped when the game ball enters a specific area during a small win game, and a display mode (e.g., "V" get) is displayed to notify that the game ball has entered the specific area. Therefore, a period of time must be set during which the game guide notification is repeatedly executed before the state in which the game ball can enter the specific area is reached. This lengthens the period from when a small win is won until the state in which the game ball can enter the specific area is set, resulting in a problem that it is difficult to increase the number of jackpot games executed per unit time.

In addition, if the period from when the small win game starts until when it becomes possible to place the game ball in the specific area is set short, and it is configured so that the game ball can be placed in the specific area before the initial game guide notification period ends, it becomes easier to increase the number of times a big win game is executed per unit time. However, there is a problem in that the game guide notification ends before the player can understand the game content notified to the player in the game guide notification, and the player becomes confused about the game that is executed after the game ball enters the specific area.

In contrast, in the present 32nd control example, the length of the period from when the small winning game is started until it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific area is configured to be shorter than the initial game guide notification period (4 seconds), and further, if the game ball enters the specific area before the initial game guide notification period (4 seconds) has elapsed, a display mode (e.g., "V Get") is displayed to notify that the game ball has entered the specific area after the initial game guide notification has elapsed. Then, if the game ball enters the specific area during the period when the second or subsequent game guide notifications that are executed after the initial game guide notification are being executed, the game guide notification being executed is stopped, and a display mode (e.g., "V Get") is displayed to notify that the game ball has entered the specific area.

This configuration makes it easier to increase the number of jackpot games that are played per unit time, and also ensures that a notification period (initial game information notification period) is secured to inform the player of the game that will be played after the game ball enters a specific area.

As shown in FIG. 939(a), when a small win game is played, "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area Dm4 as a guide notification to guide the player to play a right-hand hit game to make the game ball enter the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 provided in the right area of the game board 13, and an image showing the vicinity of the game area where the second variable winning device 650 is arranged is displayed in the display area Dm10 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm to allow the player to easily understand the location of the second variable winning device 650. Furthermore, a first arrow 810 is displayed in the main display area Dm as a game guide notification to guide the player to enter the game ball into a specific area (V gate) provided in the second variable winning device 650 as the game content during the small win game.

This first arrow 810 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode indicating the direction (rightward) in which the second variable winning device 650 is located, and the words "Aim to the right" are attached to it. It is displayed so as to move left and right on the display surface, and the first arrow 810 is displayed so as to make two round trips left and right during one game guide notification period of four seconds. Furthermore, the words "Hit right to make V attacker win!! Get a big win with a V win!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 as a guidance mode to guide the player on how to play during a small win game.

The first arrow 810 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the audio output device 226 outputs the sound "Aim to the right" twice within four seconds. In this thirty-second control example, a game guide notification with a notification period of four seconds is executed as a game guide notification to guide the player on how to play a small win game. Then, at the time when one game guide notification ends, it is determined whether or not to continue the game guide notification, and if it is determined that it is necessary to continue, the same game guide notification can be executed multiple times repeatedly.

By configuring it in this way, when a small win game has been played, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a big win game can be played by playing right to cause the game ball to enter the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650.

Furthermore, below the first arrow 810 displayed in the main display area Dm, a second time gauge ga2 is displayed to indicate the remaining time of the period (round play period) during which the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 650 in the small win game. The display mode of this second time gauge ga2 is formed from a remaining period display ga2a to indicate the remaining period of the round play period of the small win game, and an elapsed period display ga2b to indicate the elapsed period, and the display mode of the second time gauge ga2 is configured to be variable so that the proportion of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the proportion of the remaining period display ga2a decreases with each passing time since the round play of the small win game is executed.

In the present 32nd control example, when a small win game starts, a round game of up to 20 seconds is played after a 2-second opening period has elapsed, and then a 2-second ending period is set. The opening period is a period during which the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is not opened, that is, a period during which a game ball cannot be inserted into the second variable winning device 650, and is a period for notifying a player who is playing a game aiming to win a special pattern lottery that the second variable winning device 650 will be opened based on a small win. When the opening period is set, a display mode for informing the start of the small win game (for example, "Small win game start") is displayed, and the first arrow 810 shown in FIG. 939(a) is displayed for 4 seconds as the initial game guide notification.

In other words, in this 32nd control example, the game guide announcement for informing players of the game content during the small win game is configured to be executed from a stage (opening period) before the round game is executed. By configuring it in this way, even if a player who understands the game during the small win game by grasping the content of the game guide announcement executes a right-hand hit game from the stage where he/she understands the game during the small win game, it is possible to easily make the game ball enter the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round game starts.

During a round of play in a small prize game, the opening and closing door 650f1 is variably operated between an open state in which it is possible for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 650, and a closed state in which it is more difficult (no game ball can enter) than in the open state. Specifically, the opening and closing door 650f1 is variably controlled to be in the open state (0.1 seconds), closed state (0.4 seconds), open state (0.1 seconds), closed state (0.4 seconds), open state (0.1 seconds), closed state (0.4 seconds), open state (0.1 seconds), closed state (0.4 seconds), open state (0.1 seconds), closed state (1.5 seconds), open state (0.1 seconds), closed state (1.5 seconds), open state (0.2 seconds), closed state (4.8 seconds), open state (0.8 seconds), closed state (9 seconds).

Here, the small prize game in this 32nd control example is configured so that when the above-mentioned 20-second variable control ends, or when a predetermined number (10) of game balls enter the second variable prize-winning device 650 during a round game, the end condition of the round game is met and the round game ends. The variable control content of the opening and closing door 650f1 executed during the round game is configured so that the open state period occupies a higher proportion of the first half of the round game than the second half. If right-hitting play is executed continuously during the small prize game, the number of prizes entered into the second variable prize-winning device 650 becomes 10 at the timing of the fifth open state.

In other words, if right-hitting play is continued after a small win game has been executed (after the opening period has been set), the play period of the round game is likely to be 2.1 seconds, and if right-hitting play is not continued during a round game, the play period of the round game is configured to be a maximum of 20 seconds. By configuring it in this way, players who want to increase the number of times they execute a big win game per unit time can be motivated to play right-hitting play immediately after a small win game has started.

In addition, the longer the round of play progresses, the longer the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed. Therefore, even if the round of play ends when a predetermined number (10) of game balls enter the second variable winning device 650, the length of the round of play period can be made to vary greatly depending on the timing of the entry of the 10th game ball. Therefore, since the number of times a jackpot game is executed per unit time differs depending on the game situation during the small jackpot game, it is possible to make the player interested in the game situation during the small jackpot game.

When a long-term closed state (9-second closed state) is set in the latter half of a round, that is, when a right-hand hit game is normally being played during a small win game, and a closed state that is difficult to set is set, for example, it is possible that the player is not playing a right-hand hit game without realizing that a small win game is being played. Therefore, it is configured to determine whether the game ball has already entered a specific area, and if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the specific area, an emphasis guide notification is executed to emphasize and guide the player to the right-hand hit game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the small win game from ending without acquiring the right to play a big win game, even though the small win game has been played, without the game ball entering the specific area.

In addition, during a round of play in a small win game, the opening and closing door 650f1 is repeatedly set to an open period of 0.1 seconds in the first half of the game, and in the second half of the game, the open state is set to a period (0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds) longer than the first half of the game. This configuration ensures that a player who is unable to complete the small win game in a short time, for example, a player who does not realize that a small win game has been played until halfway through, has a chance to land a game ball in the second variable winning device 650.

In this 32nd control example, variable control during round play is configured so that the period in which the gate is open is more likely to occur in the first half of the round than in the second half, making it possible to end the round play in a short time. However, the content of variable control during round play is not limited to this, and the control may be configured so that the period in which the gate is open is more likely to occur in the entire round play.

In addition, in the present 32nd control example, the opening and closing door 650f1 is variably controlled so that the time during which one open state continues is longer in the latter half of the round game than in the first half, thereby preventing the round game from ending without the game ball entering the second variable winning device 650 during the round game. However, without being limited to this, the opening and closing door 650f1 may be variably controlled so that the time during which one open state continues is longer in the first half of the round game than in the second half. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 650 during the first half of the round game, so that it is easier to end the round game in a short time. On the other hand, for a player who was unable to end the round game in the first half of the round game, a small winning game in which a short open state and a long closed state are repeated is executed, so that the round game period can be unnecessarily extended. This makes it easier for players who are playing small win games to play right-handed games in order to make the game ball enter the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round play begins.

The ending period of the small win game is the period during which the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is not opened, i.e., the period during which the game ball cannot enter the second variable winning device 650, similar to the opening period described above, and a display mode based on the game content executed during the round play of the small win game is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Specifically, if the game ball is made to enter a specific area during a round of small win game play and the right to play a jackpot game is acquired, a display mode including information indicating that the small win game has ended and information indicating that the jackpot game will be played after the small win game has ended is displayed. On the other hand, if the game ball cannot be made to enter a specific area during a round of small win game play, the jackpot game will not be played after the small win game has ended, so a display mode including information indicating that the small win game has ended and information indicating that the game will transition to the normal state after the small win game has ended is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 939(a), three seconds have passed since the small win game started, i.e., the two-second opening period has ended and one second has passed since the round game was started. The first arrow 810, which is the initial game guide notification, is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the elapsed period display ga2b shows a range of one second and the remaining period display ga2a shows a range of 19 seconds relative to the round game period (20 seconds) shown by the entire time gauge ga2.

Then, if the game ball that entered the second variable winning device 650 during the period in which the initial game guide notification is being executed passes through a specific area (V gate) (if a V wins), that is, if the game ball V wins within 2 seconds after the start of a round of play, as shown in FIG. 939(b), the initial game guide notification (first arrow 810) will continue to be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm until the end of the initial game guide notification period, and the message "Hit to the right to make the V attacker win!! Get a big win with a V win!" will also continue to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds to guide the player on how to play during the small win game.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game ball enters the V immediately after a round of small win play has started, the player can easily understand the game content that will be executed after the V is entered (the game content in which the big win game is executed).

Also, as shown in FIG. 939(b), if the game ball makes a V-winning move during the initial game guide notification period (four seconds), a V-winning icon 811 is displayed in the empty area of the main display area Dm where the initial game guide notification is being executed to indicate that a V-winning move has already been made. By configuring it in this way, the player can know whether or not the game ball has made a V-winning move during the initial game guide notification period.

In this 32nd control example, the V winning icon 811 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, allowing the player to determine whether or not a V winning has occurred even during the initial game guide notification period. However, it may also be configured to notify the player that a V winning has occurred using a device other than the third pattern display device 81, for example, it may be configured to notify the player that a V winning has occurred by illuminating a light-emitting means (such as an LED) provided on the pachinko machine 10. By configuring it in this way, the display screen during the initial game guide notification period can be unified regardless of whether or not a V winning has occurred, simplifying the display control for the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

When the initial game information notification period has elapsed while a V has been won, as shown in FIG. 940, the game information notification ends, and "V Get" is displayed using the V-winning icon 811 enlarged and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm as a V effect to indicate that a V has been won. Then, the words "Lucky Jackpot!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that a jackpot game will be played based on the V having been won.

In other words, a player who has landed a game ball in a V during the initial game information notification period will be able to understand the content of the game information notification before the initial game information notification ends, and will be able to play after the V win with the understanding that a jackpot game will be played after the V win. This makes it possible to provide players with a game that is easy to understand.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, the opening operation of the door 650f1 of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 during a small win game is specified so that the small win game does not end during the initial game guide notification period (4 seconds) executed during the small win game. However, without being limited to this, for example, in order to shorten the execution period of the small win game, the opening operation of the door 650f1 of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 during a small win game may be specified so that the small win game can end before the initial game guide notification period (4 seconds) has elapsed.

In this case, for example, the opening period of the small win game is set to 0.5 seconds, and the opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 after the small win game starts is set to open for 0.2 seconds and close for 0.3 seconds repeatedly, and the small win game end condition is established when three game balls enter the second variable winning device 650. This means that three game balls enter the second variable winning device 650 before the first game guide notification period (4 seconds) has elapsed, and the small win game ends. If the game ball that entered the second variable winning device 650 during the small win game enters a specific area (V gate), the jackpot game starts after the small win game ends. If the technical concept of this 32nd control example, which ensures that the first game guide notification is executed regardless of the progress of the game, is applied to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the first game guide notification may be executed even during the execution period of the jackpot game.

In such a case, the display timing of the various display modes may be delayed so that the various display modes executed during the jackpot game are displayed after the first game guide notification is completed, or a process may be executed to gradually reduce the deviation width by shortening the period during which the various display modes executed during the jackpot game are displayed compared to normal. For example, the game status of the jackpot game at the time the first game guide notification is completed is determined, and based on the determined game status, the difference between the timing at which a specific display mode is displayed in a normal jackpot game and the timing at which a specific display mode is displayed after a delay is calculated. Then, in order to eliminate the calculated difference, it is preferable to configure the device to be able to execute a shortening process to shorten the display period of the various display modes. By configuring in this way, even if the first game guide notification is executed for a fixed period (4 seconds) regardless of the game progress status, it is possible to easily display a display mode according to the game progress status while displaying all of the various display modes executed later.

In addition, for example, the game status of the jackpot game at the time when the first game guide notification has ended may be determined, and a process may be executed to cancel the display of a display mode with a low priority (for example, a display mode displayed during the opening period) among the various display modes that would normally be displayed, so that even if the first game guide notification is executed for a fixed period (4 seconds) regardless of the game progress status, it may be configured to easily display a display mode corresponding to the game progress status while displaying all of the various display modes that will be executed later.

As mentioned above, even if there is a discrepancy between the actual game situation and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during a jackpot game, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 so that only a portion of the display mode is displayed in accordance with the actual game situation.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, if the game ball enters a specific area (V entry) during the initial game guide notification period (4 seconds), as shown in FIG. 940, the presence or absence of a V entry is determined when the initial game guide notification period has elapsed, and if it is determined that a V entry has occurred, a V performance is executed. However, without being limited to this, if a V entry has occurred during the initial game guide notification period (4 seconds), the period until the V performance is executed can be set in a timer (for example, 4 seconds), and the V performance can be executed when it is determined by the timer that 4 seconds have elapsed. In other words, the value set in the timer can be changed depending on the timing of a V win, and if a V win occurs during the initial game information notification period, the timer can be set to a delay value (e.g., 4 seconds), and if a V win occurs after the initial game information notification period has elapsed, the timer can be set to an immediate value (e.g., 0.1 seconds), so that the length of the period from a V win to the execution of the V performance can be made to differ depending on the length of time it takes from the execution of the small win game to the V win.

By configuring it in this way, the processing content executed to execute the V performance can be unified regardless of when the V is won, simplifying the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, referring to FIG. 941(a), the content of the variation effect executed during the final variation in the time-saving state will be explained. FIG. 941(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the final second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state (during a rush) is a miss variation. In this 32nd control example, as shown in FIG. 938(a), a short variation time (1 second) is set as the variation time of the second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state, and during that variation period, a variation effect can be executed to show the remaining number of second special pattern lotteries that can be executed during the time-saving state and the result of the second special pattern lottery corresponding to that variation.

Specifically, when consecutive second special symbol lotteries are performed during the time-saving state and all the lottery results are losses, a countdown display is performed in which the display mode of the number icon 808 changes to "3," "2," and "1" at one-second intervals in accordance with the remaining number of second special symbol lotteries that can be performed during the time-saving state, and the final variation of the second special symbol variation during the time-saving state is performed. On the other hand, if a win occurs before the final variation of the second special symbol variation during the time-saving state is performed, the number icon 808 that is displayed as a countdown is destroyed and a display mode indicating a win is displayed (see FIG. 938(b)).

The final variation of the second special symbol variation during the time-saving state is configured so that a different variation time can be determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, in some cases where the lottery result is a small prize win, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is determined. When this variation pattern is determined, the presentation in which the number icon 808 is displayed counting down continues until the final variation, and a variation presentation is executed in which the number icon 808 showing "0" is destroyed and a display mode indicating a small prize win is displayed.

In addition, if the lottery result is a small prize or a big prize, a 20-second fluctuation pattern is determined. When this 20-second fluctuation pattern is determined, the number icon 808 is displayed in a countdown mode, and after the number icon 808 showing "0" is displayed, a display mode (e.g., "END") indicating that the number icon 808 was not destroyed during the countdown display is displayed until 10 seconds have passed since the start of the final fluctuation. After that, a guidance effect (pull-back guidance effect) is executed to inform the player that it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state by ending the time-saving state with the special symbol 2 reserved, and during the guidance effect, a display mode is displayed to indicate that the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed is a winning (small prize or big prize).

Finally, if the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is the final variation of the time-saving state, is a miss, a 30-second variation pattern is determined. When this 30-second variation pattern is determined, the number icon 808 is displayed in a countdown manner, similar to the 20-second variation pattern described above, and after the number icon 808 showing "0" is displayed, a display mode (e.g., "END") indicating that the number icon 808 was not destroyed during the countdown display is displayed until 10 seconds have passed since the start of the final variation. After that, a guide effect (pull-back guide effect) is executed to guide the player that the second special symbol lottery can be executed in the normal state by ending the time-saving state with the special symbol 2 reserved. Then, after the guide effect ends, a reserved ball acquisition effect (FINAL charge effect) is executed to guide the player to the acquisition of the special symbol 2 reserved.

Figure 941 (a) is a display screen displayed when the FINAL charge performance is being performed, and shows an example of a display screen displayed when the maximum number (1) of special pattern 2 reservations is acquired during the FINAL charge performance. As shown in Figure 941 (a), when the FINAL charge performance is performed, a display area HR11 is formed near the center of the main display area Dm, and "FINAL charge in progress" is displayed to indicate that the FINAL charge performance is being performed. Then, in the display area Dm10, an image that imitates the area where the second ball entrance 640 is located on the game board 13 is displayed in order to guide the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. The image displayed in this display area Dm10 is an image (illuminated display in the figure) that emphasizes that the electric role 640a is in an guiding state, so that the player can visually grasp that the current state is one in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 (high probability state of normal pattern).

In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Save up your charge within the time limit" as a guide to guide the player on how to play during the FINAL charge effect. In addition, below the display area HR10, a third time gauge ga3 is displayed to indicate the remaining time of the effect period during which the FINAL charge effect is executed. The display mode of this third time gauge ga3 is formed from a remaining period display ga3a to indicate the remaining period and an elapsed period display ga3b to indicate the elapsed period, and is configured so that the display mode of the third time gauge ga3 is variable so that the proportion of the elapsed period display ga3b increases and the proportion of the remaining period display ga3a decreases in accordance with the time that has passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 941(a), it shows the point in time when 3 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge performance was executed, and the elapsed period display ga3b shows a range of 3 seconds and the remaining period display ga3a shows a range of 4 seconds relative to the performance period (7 seconds) shown by the entire third time gauge ga3.

Then, below the main display area Dm, a status display mode is displayed to show the game status during the FINAL charge performance. The diagram shown in FIG. 941(a) shows the state where 3 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge performance was executed, and since the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 and the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, the words "Charge Complete" are displayed as the status display mode.

Here, we will explain the display contents of the status display mode displayed below the main display area Dm. This status display mode is configured so that if the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has not been acquired at the time the FINAL charge performance is executed, the words "Not charged" are displayed, making it easy for the player to understand that the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has not been acquired.

This "uncharged state" display is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed since the FINAL charge performance was executed. In other words, even if the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 has been acquired 0.5 seconds after the FINAL charge performance was executed, the "uncharged state" is displayed continuously for 1 second. After the "uncharged state" is displayed continuously for 1 second, the text "Charge complete" is displayed to indicate that the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 has been acquired. On the other hand, if the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 has not been acquired at the time 1 second has elapsed since the FINAL charge performance was executed, the "uncharged state" is displayed continuously until the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 is acquired, and when the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 has been acquired, the text "Charge complete" is displayed.

In addition, since this FINAL charge effect is executed 20 seconds or more after the start of the final fluctuation of the second special pattern fluctuation in the time-saving state, there are cases where the FINAL charge effect is executed when the maximum number of reserved special patterns 2 has already been acquired. Even in this case, the text "Not charged" is displayed until 1 second has elapsed after the FINAL charge effect is executed, and then the text "Charge completed" is displayed.

In this way, even if the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, a display mode can be configured to be displayed that simulates a transition from a state in which the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has not been acquired to a state in which the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired during the FINAL charge performance, making it possible to inform the player that the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the FINAL charge effect is executed during the final change in the time-saving state regardless of the acquisition status of the reserved special chart 2. However, without being limited to this, if the upper limit of reserved special chart 2 has already been acquired at the time of execution of the FINAL charge effect, the FINAL charge effect may be configured not to be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the FINAL charge effect from being executed in a state where it is not possible to acquire a new reserved special chart 2, which causes the player to play right-hand games unnecessarily.

The presentation mode during the FINAL charge presentation may be configured to differ depending on the acquisition status of the reserved special chart 2 at the time when the FINAL charge presentation is executed. For example, if the maximum number of reserved special chart 2 has not been acquired at the time when the FINAL charge presentation is executed, the FINAL charge presentation may be configured to be executed in a presentation mode for acquiring the maximum number of reserved special chart 2 as described above, and if the maximum number of reserved special chart 2 has been acquired at the time when the FINAL charge presentation is executed, the FINAL charge presentation may be configured to be executed in a presentation mode that can suggest to the player the results of the pre-reading of the reserved special chart 2 that has already been acquired by having a game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 during the FINAL charge presentation.

By configuring it in this way, even if the FINAL charge performance is executed in a state where a new reserved special symbol 2 cannot be acquired, the player can eagerly play by inserting the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 in an attempt to quickly detect the results of the second special symbol lottery that is executed based on the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired. This can improve the operation of the game.

In addition, even if the FINAL charge performance is configured to be executed in a performance mode for acquiring the special chart 2 reservation up to the upper limit as in the present 32nd control example, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 after the special chart 2 reservation is acquired up to the upper limit (so-called over-entry), the FINAL charge performance may be executed in a performance mode that can suggest to the player the results of the pre-reading of the acquired special chart 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, while the FINAL charge performance is being executed, the player can be made to play a game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 with enthusiasm. Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, the FINAL charge performance may be configured to be executable by overlapping the performance mode for acquiring the special chart 2 reservation up to the upper limit and the performance mode that can suggest to the player the results of the pre-reading of the acquired special chart 2 reservation. In addition, in the 32nd control example, the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 that have been acquired during the time-saving state is not displayed, making it difficult for the player to know whether the reserved special figures 2 have reached the upper limit, and the operation of the game is improved by continuing the right-hand hit game during the time-saving state, but without being limited to this, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the time-saving state may be configured to display a display mode (reserved special figure 2 pattern) for indicating the reserved special figure 2 that has been acquired, and in this case, it is preferable to display a display mode that allows the player to understand the currently acquired reserved special figure 2 number and the upper limit number of reserved special figures 2 that can be acquired. In addition, the display mode for indicating the reserved special figure 2 number may be switched between the final fluctuation in the time-saving state and other times. Also, as shown in FIG. 941(b), in this 32nd control example, when the normal state is set after the time-saving state ends, the pull-back effect is executed until the second special pattern variation based on the acquired reserved special pattern 2 ends, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to end the pull-back effect while the reserved special pattern 2 remains acquired, or it may be configured not to execute the pull-back effect when the normal state is set.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a small win, the change pattern of the final change of the second special symbol change executed during the time-saving state is configured to be able to set a change pattern with a relatively short change time (1 second) and a change pattern with a long change time (20 seconds). In other words, the change pattern of the second special symbol change executed during the time-saving state that has won a small win is configured to be able to set a longer change time for the second special symbol change that is the final change in the time-saving state, compared to the second special symbol change that is not the final change in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the number of times the jackpot game is executed per unit time can be greatly different depending on the number of changes that have won the small win.

Therefore, the player can not only aim to win a small prize in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, but also play a game aiming to win a small prize with as few fluctuations as possible in order to increase the number of times a big prize game is executed per unit time.

In the 32nd control example, the change pattern of the second special symbol change that wins a small jackpot during the time-saving state is configured to be set to a longer change time than the second special symbol change that is the final change in the time-saving state and the second special symbol change that is not the final change in the time-saving state, so that the period required from the end of the previous big jackpot game to the start of the next small jackpot game differs greatly depending on the number of second special symbol changes executed until the small jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, the same change time (for example, 1 second) may be set as the change pattern of the second special symbol change that wins a small jackpot during the time-saving state. Even in this case, the more the number of second special symbol changes executed during the time-saving state increases, the longer the period from the end of the previous big jackpot game to the start of the next small jackpot game can be, so that the player can play a game that aims to win a small jackpot with as few changes as possible in order to increase the number of big jackpot games executed per unit time.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, in some cases where the second special pattern change that is the final change in the time-saving state is a second special pattern change that has won a small prize, a change pattern is selected in which the same short change time (1 second) as the other second special pattern changes is set. By configuring in this way, a change performance (countdown display) using a change pattern with a short change time can be executed up to the final change in the time-saving state.

In addition, if a small jackpot is won in the final change of the time-saving state, the period required from the end of the previous big jackpot game to the start of the next small jackpot game can be made to differ greatly depending on the type of change pattern that is set, so that players who wish to increase the number of big jackpot games per unit time can be interested not only in the result of the second special symbol lottery that is executed in the final change of the time-saving state, but also in the change pattern.

In addition, the second special pattern change, which is the final change in the time-saving state, is configured so that a change pattern with a different change time can be selected as the change pattern that is set when a small jackpot is won, so it is possible to make it difficult for a player to know whether or not they have won a small jackpot by knowing the change time of the second special pattern change.

In other words, if only a short change time (for example, 1 second) change pattern can be set for the second special pattern change (special pattern 2 final change), which is the final change in the time-saving state, the player will know that the special pattern 2 final change being executed has not won a small prize when the change time of the special pattern 2 final change has passed 1 second, and the player's motivation to play will decrease by the time the special pattern 2 final change is stopped and displayed. However, as in this 32nd control example, by configuring a change pattern with a different change time as the change pattern of the special pattern 2 final change that has won a small prize, it is possible to provide multiple timings at which it is possible to know whether or not a small prize has been won, making it difficult for the player to know whether or not a small prize has been won.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, the change pattern set for the final change of special pattern 2 is configured to be the change pattern with the longest change time (30 seconds) that is set when a winning combination is reached. Then, the remaining 10 seconds of the change pattern (30-second change) of the final change of special pattern 2 when a winning combination is reached is used to execute an effect (FINAL charge effect) that allows the player to acquire the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved).

By configuring it in this way, if a winning game is executed after the final variation of the special chart 2 is stopped and displayed (if the final variation of the special chart 2 is a small winning variation or a big winning variation), and the time-saving state is set again after the winning game ends, that is, if a period (time-saving state) in which a new reserved special chart 2 can be acquired later is set, the FINAL charge performance is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from performing unnecessary right-hand play to acquire the reserved special chart 2.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration in this 32nd control example, for example, when the final fluctuation of special chart 2 is a winning fluctuation, it is possible to set a fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time (30 seconds) as in the case of a losing fluctuation, or a longer fluctuation time (for example, 40 seconds) than in the case of a losing fluctuation.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a winning variation to a player who is prepared for the final variation of special chart 2 to be a losing variation, thereby providing an element of surprise in the game. In this case, it is also possible to configure it so that the FINAL charge effect is executed even during a winning variation. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game when a special chart 2 reserve has been acquired, and therefore it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect (continuous reserve effect) during a jackpot game that suggests to the player the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the already acquired special chart 2 reserve.

Then, the second special symbol change, which is the final change during the time-saving state, stops and is displayed. After the normal state is set, the second special symbol change based on the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the time-saving state starts, and the pull-back effect shown in FIG. 941(b) is executed. FIG. 941(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during the pull-back effect.

The pull-back effect shown in FIG. 941(b) is a variable effect that is executed during the normal state, so the display area Dm4 in which the guidance mode for guiding the player on how to play is displayed is hidden. This makes it possible to prevent right-hitting play that was being executed during the time-saving state from continuing during the pull-back effect that is executed after the time-saving state has ended.

The second special symbol lottery corresponding to this pull-back effect (the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state) is configured to have the same probability (approximately 1/2) of winning as the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that a winning game (small win game, big win game) will be executed after the pull-back effect, which will cause the player to play right-handed, the system is configured so that a notification to switch the playing method to left-handed play based on the normal state being set is not executed.

This configuration can prevent players who change playing methods in response to notifications about the playing method being executed from losing their motivation to play by frequently switching between right-handed and left-handed play.

In this 32nd control example, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to display any information to guide the player on how to play while the pull-back effect is being executed, but this is not limited to this, and the information notification indicating "right hit" may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the "right hit" information notification executed during the time-saving state. For example, the information notification may be executed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to distinguish than the information notification executed during the time-saving state, and the player may be notified that there is a high possibility that right hit play will be executed again after the pull-back effect ends.

Furthermore, the guidance notification displayed while the pull-back effect is being executed can be configured to display a display mode that guides the player in a game method that interrupts the release of the game ball (for example, a display that says "Please stop shooting the game ball"), and can also be configured to display a display mode that can guide the player in advance in a game method that depends on the result of the pull-back effect (for example, a display that says "Play with a right hand if the pull-back is successful, play with a left hand if the pull-back is unsuccessful"). By configuring in this way, the player can be informed in advance of the game method to be executed next based on the result of the pull-back effect, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, the display mode of the notification executed during the pull-back performance may be configured to be different based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the pull-back performance. For example, if the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the pull-back performance is a winning combination, the display mode of "right hit" to guide right-hit play may be emphasized more than if the result is a losing combination. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify, based on the display mode of the notification executed during the pull-back performance, that the game situation is more advantageous if right-hit play is continued than if it is not continued, that is, that the game situation is one in which a winning game will be executed after the pull-back performance ends.

When the pull-back effect is executed, a button Pu that imitates the effect button 22a is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed to encourage the player to press the effect button 22a (in the figure, a downward arrow is displayed to encourage the player to press the button Pu). Then, below the button Pu, a time gauge ga1 is displayed to indicate the length of the effective operation period during which the player's pressing operation of the effect button 22a can be effectively determined. Note that the display mode of the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 941(b) and the variable content of the display mode are the same as the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 934(b) described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the figure shown in FIG. 941(b), the button Pu is displayed in a normal display mode, but the display mode of the pull-back effect, such as the display mode of the button Pu based on the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery that is the target of the pull-back effect, or the display mode of the effect (arrow display in the figure) that prompts the player to press the effect button 22a, may be configured to be variable. For example, it is preferable to configure the display mode in which the button Pu is displayed in a special display mode (for example, a display mode that imitates a thick button or a display mode in which the color of the button Pu is red) or the display mode of the displayed arrow is a special display mode (a display mode in which the size of the arrow is larger than normal or a display mode in which the color of the arrow is red) as a display mode that is more likely to be selected in the case of a winning combination than in the case of a losing combination.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to predict the result of the pull-back effect (the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery) before the player presses the effect button 22a during the period in which the pull-back effect is being executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, the display area Dm8 where the duration display to show the duration of the time-saving state (rush) is displayed is hidden. In this 32nd control example, if there is a special symbol 2 reserved when the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, that is, if a pull-back performance is executed, the value of the counter used to display the duration (rush period measurement counter 223m) is configured to be continuously updated without being cleared, and if the second special symbol lottery that executes the pull-back performance is won and the time-saving state is restored, the duration display is also configured to continue.

In this way, even during the period in which the value of the counter used to display the duration (rush period measuring counter 223m) is continuously updated, by configuring the duration display not to be executed while the pull-back effect is being executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the time-saving state (rush) has ended, and therefore it is easier for the player to understand that a game is being executed that enters the time-saving state (rush) again from a state in which the time-saving state (rush) has ended, compared to when the duration display continues to be executed even during the execution period of the pull-back effect. This allows the player to focus on the content of the pull-back effect.

When the player presses the effect button 22a during the pull-back effect, the effect result based on the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is displayed. Specifically, if the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a winning combination, a display mode indicating a winning combination (for example, a "V" display) is displayed immediately after the effect button 22a is pressed, and then a display screen similar to the display screen when a small winning combination is achieved during the time-saving state (see FIG. 938(b)) is displayed.

Next, the content of the presentation when the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the pull-back presentation is a miss will be described with reference to FIG. 942. FIG. 942(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a failure presentation corresponding to the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a miss as the pull-back presentation, and FIG. 942(b) is a diagram showing an example of a game result display screen that is displayed after a failure presentation is executed as the pull-back presentation.

When the player presses the effect button 22a during a pull-back effect in which the corresponding second special symbol lottery result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 942(a), a display mode indicating a win (for example, a "V" display) is not displayed, and a standing character 801 is displayed. Then, the words "Sorry! Rush is over!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide mode to indicate that the rush period (time-saving state) is ending.

The display screen shown in FIG. 942(a) is displayed, and when the failed pull-back performance ends, the game result display screen shown in FIG. 942(b) is displayed. This game result display screen displays an acquired point display k1 indicating a value corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired during the time-saving state (rush) as a result of the play performed during this time-saving state (rush), a duration display k2 indicating the period during which the time-saving state (rush) continued, a rush continuation count display k3 indicating the number of times the time-saving state (rush) was set (reset) through a jackpot play, and a jackpot count display k4 indicating the number of jackpot plays performed during one time-saving state period (rush period).

In the example shown in FIG. 942(b), "660P in total" is displayed as the acquired points display k1, "00:36:44" is displayed as the duration display k2, "1 rush" is displayed as the rush continuation count display k3, and "0 bonus" is displayed as the jackpot count display k4. In other words, the time-saving state (rush) executed this time was a one-time execution of a 6-round time-saving jackpot game executed based on winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the game result is displayed in which no jackpot game was executed even once in the time-saving state (rush) set after the jackpot game ended, and it is displayed that the time that has passed since the time-saving state was set is 36 seconds.

Then, among the display modes showing the duration of the time-saving state (rush) shown by the duration display k2, the value k2a, which is the two digits from the right, which corresponds to a unit smaller than the number of seconds, is configured to be determined based on the result of the second special pattern lottery that is the subject of the pull-back performance, regardless of the actual period that has passed, and if the lottery result is a win, the value k2a is displayed in the "matching numbers" display mode, and if the lottery result is a loss, the value k2a is displayed in the "uneven numbers" display mode.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 942(b), "44" is displayed as the value k2a displayed as the duration display k2. In other words, the display screen shown in FIG. 942(b) is displayed when the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed is a winning combination and a failure effect is set in the pull-back effect. In this way, in some cases where the result of the second special symbol lottery that is the subject of the pull-back effect is a winning combination, a failure effect is executed as the pull-back effect, and after the game result display screen is displayed, a revival effect that notifies the player that a winning combination has been achieved can be configured to be executable, allowing the player to play while keeping hopes of a winning combination even after a failure effect is displayed in the pull-back effect.

Here, in this 32nd control example, even if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol that is the target of the pull-back performance is a winning combination, the above-mentioned revival performance is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery that determines the performance mode of the variation performance executed at the timing when the second special symbol variation that is the target of the pull-back performance starts. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the condition to be established based on the timing when the player presses the performance button 22a in the pull-back performance. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the revival performance to be executed when the performance button 22a is pressed when the remaining period of the operation valid period set during the pull-back performance is longer than a predetermined period, that is, when the performance button 22a is pressed when there is a lot of remaining variation time remaining in the second special symbol variation that is being executed.

By configuring it in this way, if the performance button 22a is pressed early during the pull-back performance, it is possible to prevent the successful performance from continuing for a long period of time, which would result in a decrease in the performance effect.

The game result display screen is a display mode for indicating to the player that the time-saving state has ended, so a display area Dm4 is formed and "left hit" is displayed to guide the player to left-hand play, which is an appropriate playing method during the normal state. The sub-display area Ds then displays the words "Thank you for your hard work" as a guide mode for informing the player that the time-saving state (rush) has ended. This configuration makes the player strongly believe that the advantageous playing period has ended when the display screen shown in FIG. 942(b) is displayed, which makes it even more surprising when the revival performance is executed.

Next, referring to Fig. 943 to Fig. 946, the contents of the jackpot game effects executed during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example, during the execution period of the jackpot game (rush jackpot game) executed based on winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (rush), a jackpot game effect (promotion effect) for notifying the game contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game effect (reserved consecutive effect) for notifying that the second special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game ends will be a winning (small jackpot) are executed, and the same type of effect screen is displayed regardless of whether the promotion effect or the reserved consecutive effect is executed. By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot game presentation is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the presentation result of the currently executed jackpot game will be a presentation result indicating the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, or a presentation result indicating a state in which there is a high possibility that a jackpot game will be executed again after the jackpot game ends (a state of pending replay). Therefore, it is possible to easily generate interest in the presentation content of the executed jackpot game presentation.

In addition, in the present 32nd control example, when a reserved consecutive performance is executed as a jackpot game performance, it is configured so that the reserved consecutive performance is executed again as a jackpot game performance of a jackpot game based on the reserved special symbol that is the target of the executed reserved consecutive performance. In other words, the reserved consecutive performance is executed as a jackpot game performance when the first condition is satisfied when the reserved special symbol that has been acquired by a predetermined timing of the jackpot game (for example, the start timing of the final round game) is a reserved special symbol that wins a special symbol lottery, and the reserved consecutive performance is executed when the reserved consecutive performance is executed in the process for determining whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive performance as a jackpot game performance when the first condition is satisfied. The reserved consecutive performance is executed when the reserved consecutive performance is executed (during a jackpot game notified by the reserved consecutive performance, or during a jackpot game in which the execution right is acquired during a small jackpot game notified by the reserved consecutive performance) more easily than when the reserved consecutive performance is not executed. In other words, when the first condition is met, the system is configured to increase the likelihood that the hold consecutive performance will be executed.

With this configuration, a player who has executed a reserved consecutive performance once can play with enthusiasm, aiming to have the reserved consecutive performance executed consecutively. Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, when reserved consecutive performances are executed consecutively, information indicating the game content of the jackpot game is accumulated, and a display mode indicating the accumulated information can be displayed. Specifically, the display mode for displaying the number of rounds executed during a jackpot game is configured to be cumulatively displayed. With this configuration, when reserved consecutive performances are executed consecutively, a display mode that accumulates the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpot games is displayed as the display mode for the number of rounds. With this configuration, a player can play with enthusiasm, aiming to have a display mode corresponding to a larger number of rounds displayed as the display mode for the number of rounds.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when information about the game content of the jackpot game accumulated when consecutive reserved consecutive effects are executed satisfies a predetermined condition, a bonus effect can be executed. Specifically, when a display mode corresponding to a number of rounds greater than the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot game (e.g., 9 rounds) is displayed as the display mode of the number of rounds, a congratulatory effect can be executed to congratulate the player on the consecutive execution of reserved consecutive effects.

By configuring it in this way, not only the player currently playing, but also the players around him/her can be notified that the consecutive reserved play effects are being executed, allowing them to play with a sense of superiority.

In the 32nd control example, the number of rounds is accumulated when consecutive reserved effects are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to play music during a jackpot game, the number of times consecutive reserved effects are executed may be accumulated and the music to be played may be switched depending on the accumulated number. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to allow the player to select the music to be played during a jackpot game from among multiple songs, the number of songs that the player can select may be increased depending on the accumulated number of consecutive reserved effects. In addition, when the accumulated number of consecutive reserved effects has been executed reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times), a specific congratulatory music may be played without the player having to select it.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide music that cannot be played unless the reserved consecutive performance is executed a predetermined number of times in succession, so that players who want to play various music can be motivated to play in order to execute the reserved consecutive performance. In addition, while the above example uses music that is played during a jackpot game, this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned technical ideas may be diverted to still images and videos displayed during a jackpot game, or the above-mentioned technical ideas may be diverted to the performance mode of the reserved consecutive performance itself.

Figure 943 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when the NEXT effect is executed as a jackpot game effect, and Figure 943 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the result of the NEXT effect is a result in which no additional benefit is given to the player, and Figure 944 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the result of the NEXT effect is a result in which an additional benefit is given to indicate that the jackpot game content (number of rounds) will be increased, and Figure 944 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the result of the NEXT effect is a result in which an additional benefit is given to indicate that a reserved consecutive effect will be executed. Note that, among the display elements displayed in each figure (display elements displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during a jackpot game), those that have the same content as the display elements described in each of the control examples described above are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

When the second round of a jackpot game (3-round jackpot game or 9-round jackpot game) executed during the rush period is executed, as shown in FIG. 943(a), the word NEXT is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the NEXT effect has started, and below that word, in the display area Dm9 for displaying the effect result of the NEXT effect, the effect mode (arrow in the figure) until the effect result is displayed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the word "What additional benefit is there?" is displayed as a guidance mode to inform the player that the NEXT effect has been executed.

In this 32nd control example, among the jackpot games executed during the time-saving state, the NEXT effect is started in the round game (second round game) one round before the final round game (third round game) in a three-round jackpot game in which the minimum number of round games are executed, and the result of the NEXT effect is displayed in the round game (third round game) executed next to the round game in which the NEXT effect was executed (second round game). In other words, regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed, the number of rounds in which the NEXT effect is executed is configured to be a specific number of rounds (second round). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing (number of rounds) at which the NEXT effect is executed during the jackpot game.

Then, when the round game (third round game) in which the result of the NEXT effect is displayed is started, a display mode for showing the result of the NEXT effect is displayed. Here, if the jackpot game being played is a three-round jackpot game, and there is no special chart 2 reserve indicating a win among the special chart 2 reserves acquired at the time the third round game is started, the display condition for determining the result of the NEXT effect indicating a round promotion and the display condition for determining the result of the reserve chain are not met, so as shown in FIG. 943(b), the characters "RUSH CONTINUED" are displayed in the display area Dm9 as the result of the NEXT effect.

In this 32nd control example, after the big win game executed during the rush period ends, the time-saving state is always set (the rush is configured to continue), so as shown in FIG. 943(b), even if the display conditions for determining the presentation result indicating round promotion and the display conditions for determining the presentation result indicating consecutive reserved plays are not met, i.e., even if the player is not granted an additional benefit (round promotion, consecutive reserved plays), the display mode ("rush continues") for showing basic information advantageous to the player (the setting of the time-saving state) is displayed as the presentation result of the NEXT presentation.

By configuring it in this way, players who are not aware that the time-saving state is always set after the end of a jackpot game played during the rush period can be made to believe that they have been granted the additional benefit of the rush period continuing. Also, as shown in FIG. 943(b), when "RUSH CONTINUES" is displayed as the performance result of the NEXT performance, the words "BRING BACK THE WIN WITH RUSH" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guidance mode to guide the player to the playing method corresponding to the current performance result.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 943(b), "Final Round" is displayed in the display area Dm5, but this display is configured to be displayed after the result of the NEXT effect is displayed in the display area Dm9. Although detailed illustration is omitted, when "Rush Continue" is displayed as the result of the NEXT effect, when the third round of round play starts, "Round 3" is displayed in the display area Dm5 as a display mode to indicate that the third round of round play has started. Then, after a display mode to indicate the result of the performance ("Rush Continue") is displayed in the display area Dm9, which displays the performance mode (arrow in the figure) until the performance result is displayed, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm5 is switched from "Round 3" to "Final Round".

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding that the current jackpot game is a three-round jackpot game due to the display mode displayed in display area Dm5 before the performance result of the NEXT performance is displayed, which would reduce the performance effect of the NEXT performance. Furthermore, compared to the case where "Round 3" continues to be displayed even after the performance result of the NEXT performance is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the round game currently being played is the final round, which prevents the player from being confused by the sudden end of the jackpot game.

However, without being limited to this, it may be configured so that "Final Round" is displayed in the display area Dm5 from the start of the third round. By configuring it in this way, the player can understand that the jackpot game in progress is a three-round jackpot game before the result of the NEXT effect is displayed, so the player can predict while limiting the options for the performance results that may be displayed as the performance results of the NEXT effect in progress. Therefore, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the performance result of the NEXT effect using display elements other than the NEXT effect.

In this case, for example, as the presentation mode for displaying the presentation result of the NEXT presentation, it is preferable to display a plurality of display modes that can be the presentation result of the NEXT presentation, and configure the presentation mode to be executable so that one of the display modes is displayed as the final presentation effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a composite analysis of the contents of the bonus indicated by the plurality of display modes that can be the presentation result displayed at an intermediate stage of the NEXT presentation and the information indicating the contents of the current jackpot game (3-round jackpot game), thereby enabling the player to quickly identify the display mode that will be displayed as the presentation result of the NEXT presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, among the additional benefits shown as the result of the NEXT effect, any information regarding the benefit other than the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds played) may be configured to be notified before the result of the NEXT effect is displayed.

On the other hand, when a performance result is displayed as the result of the NEXT performance to indicate that the number of rounds in the jackpot game is other than 3 rounds (9 rounds) (when a promotion performance is executed), as shown in FIG. 944(a), "Rush Promotion" is displayed in the display area Dm9 as a performance result to indicate that the content of the jackpot game is not 3 rounds, and the words "Congratulations on your promotion to a 9 round jackpot" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guidance mode to guide the user to the game content when the performance result of "Rush Promotion" is displayed.

In this case, the third round of play, in which the result of the NEXT effect is displayed, is in the middle of the ongoing jackpot game (nine-round jackpot game), so "Round 3" continues to be displayed in the display area Dm5 even after the result of the NEXT effect is displayed.

In addition, as a result of the NEXT effect, the effect to indicate that the already acquired Special Chart 2 reserve contains a Special Chart 2 reserve to indicate a win (when a consecutive reserve effect is executed) is as shown in FIG. 944(b) in the display area Dm9, where "Bonus" is displayed as the effect to indicate consecutive reserves, and the words "Congratulations on the consecutive bonuses" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guidance mode to guide the game content when the "Bonus" effect result is displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 944(b) shows the display screen that is displayed when a reserved consecutive play is executed as a result of a NEXT play executed during a three-round jackpot game, and therefore the round game in which the result of the NEXT play is displayed is the final round game in the jackpot game currently being played. However, in this 32nd control example, when a reserved consecutive play is executed, the display mode indicating the game content of the currently being played jackpot game (the number of rounds displayed in display area Dm5) is carried over and displayed until the next jackpot game. Therefore, "Round 3" is displayed in display area Dm5, and "Final Round", which indicates that this is the final round of the currently being played jackpot game, is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, when a consecutive reserved play effect is executed, it is easy to make the player believe that the jackpot game currently being played and the next jackpot game to be executed (the jackpot game that is the subject of the consecutive reserved play effect) are a single jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 945, the content of the presentation after the reserved consecutive performance is executed will be described. FIG. 945(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a small win game that is the target of the reserved consecutive performance when the reserved consecutive performance is executed during a big win game, FIG. 945(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the reserved consecutive performance is executed again (when the reserved consecutive performance is executed consecutively) during a big win game that is the target of the reserved consecutive performance, and FIG. 946 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a special performance that is executed based on the reserved consecutive performance being executed consecutively.

When the big win game in which the reserved consecutive performance shown in FIG. 944(b) is executed ends, a second special pattern lottery is executed based on the already acquired reserved special pattern 2. In this 32nd control example, since a maximum of one reserved special pattern 2 can be stored, when the reserved consecutive performance is executed, the first second special pattern lottery after the big win game ends will result in a winning (small win, big win). The period until the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed (special pattern change period) is configured to be a short period (1 second), and during the special pattern change period, the display screen shown in FIG. 944(b) will continue to be displayed.

After the big win game ends, the first second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a small win, and when the small win game starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 945(a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 945(a), during a small win game that is the subject of the reserved consecutive performance, a different display screen is displayed from the display screen (see FIG. 939(a)) that is displayed during a normal small win game that is not the subject of the reserved consecutive performance.

Specifically, the display mode "Round 4" is displayed in the display area Dm5 to indicate the number of rounds that is one more than the number of rounds displayed in the previous jackpot game. Also, the arrow 810 with the text "Aim right" that would normally be displayed large in the center of the main display area Dm is not displayed, and instead the text "Aim for V" is displayed in the display area Dm11. Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a character 801a to indicate that the jackpot game is continuing is displayed, that is, the character 801a in the display mode that was displayed during the previous jackpot game as shown in FIG. 944(b).

In this way, by continuing to display at least some of the display modes that were displayed during the previous jackpot game, it is possible to make the player believe that one jackpot game is being played continuously, even when multiple jackpot games are being played.

Also, by making the display mode ("Aim to the right", "Aim for V") that indicates the game contents during a small win game different, it is possible to make the player think that the current game is not a small win game but a part of a big win game. Note that in this 32nd control example, the display mode ("Aim to the right", "Aim for V") that indicates the game contents during a small win game is different between the display screen (see FIG. 939(a)) that is displayed during a normal small win game that is not the subject of the reserved consecutive performance and the display screen (see FIG. 945(a)) that is displayed during a small win game that is the subject of the reserved consecutive performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, during a small win game that is the subject of the reserved consecutive performance, the arrow 810 may be configured to be displayed smaller than during other small win games.

When a big win game is executed after the small win game ends by causing the game ball to enter a specific area (V gate) 650e3 during the small win game shown in FIG. 945(a), as shown in FIG. 945(b), the display area Dm5 displays a display mode in which the number of rounds of the current big win game is accumulated to the number of rounds of the previous big win game and the previous small win game.

The display screen shown in FIG. 945(b) shows the final round (third round) of a three-round jackpot game that is executed after the end of the small jackpot game that is the target of the reserved consecutive performance. Therefore, "round 7" is displayed in the display area Dm5. And, the reserved consecutive performance is being executed as a result of the NEXT performance. When the reserved consecutive performance is executed consecutively, "round 8" is displayed in the display area Dm9 as a result of the NEXT performance, and characters 801a, 801b corresponding to the number of reserved consecutive performances executed consecutively are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 946, when the display mode of the display area Dm5 displayed during the jackpot game becomes a special display mode ("Round 10") indicating a number of rounds greater than the maximum number of rounds in one jackpot game (9 rounds), the display area Dm5 is displayed as a special area different from the normal area (shown with a double line in the figure), and the words "MAX OVER" are displayed in the display area Dm9. Then, the words "How long will this jackpot last?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the jackpot games are being executed consecutively. In the present 32nd control example, as a condition for displaying the special display mode, a condition is set that is satisfied when the cumulative number of rounds during the period when the reserved consecutive performances are executed consecutively exceeds the upper limit of the number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, a condition may be set that is satisfied when the cumulative number of rounds during the period when the reserved consecutive performances are executed consecutively reaches a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 10), when the number of times the reserved consecutive performances are executed consecutively exceeds a specific number (e.g., 5 times), or when the point display displayed in the display area Dm6 showing the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period reaches a specific number (e.g., 10,000P).

In addition, a configuration may be made in which multiple display modes can be displayed in stages as special display modes, and the conditions for displaying each display mode may be set in stages for a specific number of points displayed in the display area Dm6 indicating the cumulative number of rounds played during the period when consecutive reserved consecutive performances are being executed, a specific number of times that consecutive reserved consecutive performances are executed, or the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period, and a different display mode may be displayed in stages each time the display conditions set in stages are met.

This configuration allows players to play with more enthusiasm in order to display a wider variety of special display modes.

Next, referring to FIG. 947, the display screen displayed when setting the gaming environment in the pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example will be described. In this 32nd control example, as operations for changing the gaming environment of the pachinko machine 10, a volume level selection operation that allows the volume level of the sound output from the sound output device 226 to be selected from four levels, a light level operation that allows the light level of the decorative light-emitting LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10 and the backlight of the liquid crystal display provided in the third pattern display device 81 to be selected from four levels, and a mode type selection operation that changes the frequency at which the type of performance mode (stage type) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is switched are configured to be executable.

When the pachinko machine 10 is not being played (standby state), the display screen shown in FIG. 947(a) is displayed. FIG. 947(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the standby state. As shown in FIG. 947(a), during the standby state, the currently set stage type ("rabbit stage" in the diagram) is displayed in the display area Dm5, the currently set mode type ("normal mode" in the diagram) is displayed in the display area Dm6, and the display area Dm1 displays a display mode indicating that the game is not currently being played ("316" in the diagram) showing the result of the last special symbol lottery performed.

Below the main display area Dm, a display area HR1 for volume adjustment, a display area HR2 for light adjustment, and a display area HR3 for mode type selection are formed. In the display area HR1, a display mode showing the range of volume levels that can be selected (LV1 to LV4 (MAX)) and a display mode showing the currently set volume level (shown in black in the figure) are displayed, and below that, a right button icon Sw2 corresponding to the right button 600c and a left button icon Sw4 corresponding to the left button 600e are displayed as display modes showing the operation method for changing the volume level, to show that the volume level can be changed by operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e of the selection buttons 600.

The display area HR2 also displays a display mode indicating the range of selectable light levels (LV1 to LV4 (MAX)) and a display mode indicating the currently set light level (displayed in black in the figure), and below that, as a display mode indicating the operation method for changing the light level, an up button icon Sw5 corresponding to the up button 600b and a down button icon Sw3 corresponding to the down button 600d are displayed to indicate that the light level can be changed by operating the up button 600b or the down button 600d of the selection buttons 600.

In the display area HR3, a middle button icon Sw1 corresponding to the decision button (middle button) 600a of the selection buttons 600 is displayed as a display mode showing the operation method for displaying a selection screen (menu) for selecting a mode type.

When the display screen shown in FIG. 947(a) is displayed, the player can press the right button 600c to increase the volume level by one step, and the left button 600e to decrease the volume level by one step. In addition, the player can press the up button 600b to increase the light level by one step, and the down button 600d to decrease the light level by one step. The volume level and light level selected based on the player's operation of the selection button 600 are then stored in the game environment storage area 223u, which will be described later.

Furthermore, when the display screen shown in FIG. 947(a) is displayed and the player presses the decision button (middle button) 600a, the display screen shown in FIG. 947(b) is displayed. FIG. 947(b) is a schematic diagram of a presentation mode selection screen on which a presentation mode can be selected. As shown in FIG. 947(b), when the presentation mode selection screen is displayed, pressing the up button 600b or the down button 600d moves the arrow icon ya1 indicating the mode type to be selected in the vertical direction, and pressing the presentation button 22a displays a display mode in the display area Dm8 indicating an operation method by which the mode type indicated by the arrow icon ya1 can be determined.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, to indicate that the presentation mode selection screen is currently being displayed, the display area Dm7 displays "presentation mode selection screen," and the selectable mode types and the contents of each mode type are displayed.

Specifically, in this 32nd control example, the mode types can be selected from "normal mode," "active mode," and "fixed mode," and normal mode M1, active mode M2, and fixed mode M3 are displayed vertically as display forms indicating each mode type. Below fixed mode M3, a back icon M4 is displayed as a display form to be selected when closing the performance mode selection screen without changing the mode type. The content of each mode type will be described later.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, the game environment can be selected even when the player is not playing, so the player can start playing with the game environment set to one that suits him or her.

Note that in this 32nd control example, the stage type (rabbit stage, hero stage) is not selectable by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this and the player may be allowed to select any stage type during standby.

Next, referring to FIG. 948(b), the game environment change operations that can be performed while the special symbol is changing will be explained. FIG. 948(b) is a diagram showing the display screen when the fixed mode is set while the special symbol is changing. In this 32nd control example, the currently set stage type can be fixed by pressing the confirm button (middle button) 600a even while the special symbol is changing.

In other words, it is difficult for a player playing this pachinko machine 10 for the first time to select the fixed mode in order to prevent the stage type that suits his/her preference from switching to another stage type during standby. On the other hand, once the player has played the game and has an overview of the effects that are executed in each stage type, it becomes possible to select the stage type that suits his/her preference from among the various stage types.

In this case, if the player temporarily suspends play and enters standby mode, and then performs an operation to set the fixed mode, there is a problem that the operation rate of the game decreases. Therefore, in this 32nd control example, the player is configured to be able to switch the mode type to the fixed mode by performing a specified operation (pressing the decision button 600a) even during the special pattern change.

By configuring it in this way, the fixed mode can be set immediately after the player finds a stage type that he or she likes. In addition, the fixed mode can be set by the simple operation of pressing the decision button 600a, which is a simpler operation than the operation for setting the fixed mode during standby, so the player does not have to go through the trouble of setting the fixed mode while playing.

When fixed mode is set while the special symbol is changing, as shown in FIG. 948(b), an icon resembling a lock is displayed in display area Dm5 as a display mode to indicate that the stage type will not change. This makes it easy to understand that fixed mode has been set. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the fixed mode can be released by the player pressing the decision button 600a again when the fixed mode is set.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this 32nd control example, the stage type is configured to change every time a predetermined period of time (e.g., one minute) during which the standby state continues has elapsed. In other words, the stage type is configured to change more easily when the standby state is set than when a special pattern change is being performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily select the stage type when setting a fixed mode during the standby state.

Next, referring to FIG. 948(a), the content of the variation effect executed in this 32nd control example will be described. FIG. 948(a) is a diagram showing the effect screen when a stage transition effect is executed during the special pattern change. As shown in FIG. 948(a), in this 32nd control example, when the stage type transition condition (conditions that are established based on the number of times the special pattern changes and the special pattern lottery result) is established, a transition suggestion effect is executed in which shutters st1 and st2 covering the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are displayed, and then the shutters st1 and st2 are hidden, and a display mode according to the stage type after the transition is displayed. Furthermore, using this transition suggestion effect, a variation effect other than the stage type transition is configured to be able to be executed, and for example, when the stage type does not transition despite the transition suggestion effect being executed, a stage change effect is configured to be able to be executed in which the possibility of winning the special pattern lottery being executed increases.

When this stage change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 948(a), shutters st1 and st2 are displayed, and then guidance display areas st1a and st1b are formed on the surface of shutters st1 and st2, displaying the text "Stage change!?" as a display mode to indicate that the stage change effect is being executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "If the stage doesn't change, it's a great chance" is displayed as a guidance mode to inform the player of the contents of the stage change effect.

By configuring it in this way, the transition suggestion effect for suggesting that the stage type will transition can be used as part of the effect (stage change effect) that shows the player the probability of winning a jackpot, providing a novel gameplay experience in which the player hopes that the stage type will not transition when shutters st1 and st2 for transitioning the stage type are displayed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a stage change effect including this transition suggestion effect may be executed during fixed mode. For example, when a transition suggestion effect is executed during fixed mode, a guide of "Chance when stage changes" may be displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Here, in this 32nd control example, even when fixed mode is set, the stage type can be changed during the special pattern change that has won the jackpot. Therefore, when a stage change effect is executed during fixed mode and the stage type changes as a result of the effect, the jackpot can be notified.

The above-mentioned stage change effect may be configured to be executable not only during the period of special pattern variation, but also during the jackpot game period. In this case, for example, the jackpot game is executed with the fixed mode set, and the stage change effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Then, it is preferable to configure it so that the stage type set after the jackpot game ends is different from the stage type set before the jackpot game, to notify the player that a reserve will be continued.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know whether the stage types set before and after the big win game, i.e., the stage types displayed across the execution period of the big win game presentation, are the same or different, providing the player with the fun of predicting whether a reserved sequence will be executed after the presentation result of the stage change presentation (the stage type after shutters st1 and st2 are not displayed) is displayed.

<Regarding transition of game state in the 32nd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 949, the game contents (transition contents of each game state) in this 32nd control example will be described. FIG. 949 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 949, in this 32nd control example, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), and the game method is configured so that left-handed play is advantageous to the player in the normal state and right-handed play is advantageous to the player during the time-saving state.

The initial state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, where neither the reserved special symbol 1 nor the reserved special symbol 2 has been acquired. In this normal state, a game is played by hitting the ball from the left to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64. In this normal state, a low probability state for the special symbol is set, so a first special symbol lottery is executed, which has a probability of 208/65536 (approximately 1/300) for winning a big prize and a probability of 1/65536 for winning a small prize.

Here, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the jackpot type is set to "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B", and after the end of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is set, the time-saving state is set, and after the end of a jackpot game in which "Jackpot B" is set, the normal state is set. The ratio of jackpot types that are set when a jackpot is won is specified in advance, and if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery in the normal state, there is a 60% chance that "Jackpot A" will be set, and a 40% chance that "Jackpot B" will be set.

In addition, if a small prize is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small prize game is played in which the small prize type is set to "small prize A". This "small prize A" is a small prize game in which the game ball can enter a specific area (V prize) by playing a normal game (right-hand hit game) to make the game ball enter the second variable prize-winning device 650, which is opened during the small prize game, and if the V prize is won, a big prize game with "big prize C" set is played after the small prize game ends.

When the jackpot game of "jackpot A" or "jackpot C" ends, the time-saving state is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot game of "jackpot B" ends, or when the small jackpot game ends without a V win during the small jackpot game (non-V win), the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 949, in the 32nd control example, during the time-saving state, a low probability state of the special pattern and a high probability state of the normal pattern are set, and compared to the normal state, the game state becomes one in which it is easier to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 based on the result of the normal pattern lottery. This time-saving state is configured to end when a predetermined end condition is met, and specifically, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition is set to be met when any of the following conditions is met: the second special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) is executed three times (the third special pattern 2 change is stopped and displayed), the special pattern indicating a small win is stopped and displayed, and the total number of the first special pattern change (special pattern 1 change) and the special pattern 2 change reaches 10 times (the 10th special pattern change is stopped and displayed).

During the time-saving state, a game is executed in which the ball passes through the through gate 67 by hitting from the right, a normal symbol lottery is executed, and during the normal symbol winning game, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. When the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special symbol lottery is executed, which has a 1/2 probability of winning a small jackpot and a 208/65536 (approximately 1/300) probability of winning a big jackpot.

In other words, when the time-saving state is set, a game is played with the aim of winning a small prize or a big prize before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times. In this 32nd control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, the game is configured to win a big prize or a small prize with a higher probability than the first special symbol lottery, and when a small prize game is executed, the game is executed normally (right-hand play) during the small prize game, so that the right to play a big prize game (entering the game ball into the specific area (V gate) 650e3) can be reliably acquired.

In the time-saving state, the small win type that is set when a small win is won in the special chart 2 lottery can be set to "small win B" or "small win C." Regardless of which small win type is set, a small win game that can result in a V win is executed, and a big win game with different content is executed based on the fact that a V win has been won. Furthermore, regardless of which small win type is set, the time-saving state is set after the big win game ends.

In other words, in this 32nd control example, as long as a small jackpot, which has a 1/2 probability of being won, is won in any of the three second special symbol lotteries that can be performed during the time-saving state, the game can be played continuously during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation is stopped and the time-saving end condition is met, if the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired, the game state transitions to the normal state (pull-back game) in which the second special symbol lottery is executed with the normal state set as the game state. During this pull-back game, the pull-back performance shown in FIG. 941(b) is executed.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (pull-back play), a second special symbol lottery is executed, which has the same probability (1/2) of winning a small prize as during the time-saving state. The small prize type is selected at the same selection rate as the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state.

In the 32nd control example, the selection ratio of the small win type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small win type in the time-saving state are set to be the same, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a small win type that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected in one game state than in the other game state. For example, it may be configured so that a small win type that is more advantageous to the player (small win C) is more likely to be selected when the normal state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the second special pattern lottery performed during the normal state more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery performed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of ending the time-saving state when the special pattern 2 reservation is obtained.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 32nd control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 950. Fig. 950 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display in the first symbol display device 37, setting the display in the second symbol display device, and setting the display in the third symbol display device 81. Various counters for controlling these processes are provided in the RAM 203. Here, referring to FIG. 951, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 951 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display in the first symbol display device 37, set the display in the second symbol display device, and set the display in the third symbol display device 81.

The first win random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the first win random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, the first win type counter C2 used to select the big win type of the special symbol, the small win type counter C5 used to select the small win type of the special symbol, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first win random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 963), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 978), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball entrance 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of one reserved area (reservation area 1). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (variation conditions) are met, the information on the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed is shifted to the special pattern execution area from among the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special pattern variation (special pattern lottery) based on the various stored values is initiated.

In the 32nd control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values may be started. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, when the execution condition of the special pattern lottery (the start condition of the special pattern variation) is satisfied, the information stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is read out preferentially over the information stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a. In other words, the second special pattern lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the first special pattern lottery. Also, the second special pattern lottery is configured to be executed with a higher advantage for the player than the first special pattern lottery. By configuring in this way, even if the execution condition of the special pattern lottery is satisfied with information stored in both the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, the special pattern lottery with a higher advantage for the player can be executed with a higher advantage.

In addition, as in the 32nd control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the drawing of one of the special symbol types is not executed in preference to the drawing of the other special symbol type, but a storage order storage means capable of storing the order in which information is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b may be provided, and the special symbol drawing may be executed based on the order (winning order) stored in the storage order storage means. Furthermore, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This allows the next special symbol variation to be executed promptly when the start condition of each special symbol is established.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the lottery result for the special symbol is configured to be a big win, a small win, or a miss. Specifically, in some cases where the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, it may be configured so that the player can win a small win that can be awarded a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to be awarded a bonus even if the big win is not won, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the 32nd control example, whether a big win or a small win is won in the special pattern lottery, the normal state is set when the special pattern for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big win game, small win game) corresponding to the set winning type (big win type, small win type) is executed in the normal state. After the big win game ends, the game state corresponding to the set big win type is set, whereas after the small win game ends, the normal state continues (there is no function to set the game state according to the small win type). In other words, the big win (first bonus) and small win (second bonus) granted to the player based on the lottery result of the special pattern lottery are configured to differ not only in the content of the winning game executed, but also in the transition content of the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily provide variation in the types of bonuses granted to the player based on the results of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, methods other than those used in this 32nd control example may be used as a method for making the transition of the game state different when a jackpot is won and when a small jackpot is won. For example, when a jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. In contrast, when a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is played, and the game state is not transitioned even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of games.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of this 32nd control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter (not shown) in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 951. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 65535 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 65535). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 65535, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 65535. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 978).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process) and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, a jackpot for the special pattern is determined. In addition, the random number value that results in a small win for the special pattern is set by the first win random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and if the value of the first win random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a small win set by the first win random number table 202a, it is determined that a small win for the special pattern has occurred.

Now, referring to Figure 953, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. Figure 953(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table that defines random numbers (determination values) that are used to determine a big win or a small win in a special pattern lottery, and has a data table that defines different random numbers (determination values) depending on the type of special pattern used in the special pattern lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 953(a), the first winning random number table 202a has a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a data table that is referenced to determine the lottery result when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a data table that is referenced to determine the lottery result when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, the contents of the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 will be explained with reference to Figure 953 (b). Figure 953 (b) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1. The special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 defines a judgment value that is determined to be a big win (the value of the first win random number counter C1) and a judgment value that is determined to be a small win (the value of the first win random number counter C1).

Specifically, a jackpot determination value is defined for determining that a jackpot has been won when the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 207," and a small jackpot determination value is defined for determining that a small jackpot has been won when the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is "65535." In other words, the update range of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is "0 to 65535," and the total number of values that the first jackpot random number counter C1 can take is 65536, of which the jackpot determination value is defined as 208 and the small jackpot determination value as 1. Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of determining that a jackpot has been won is 208/65536 (approximately 1/300), and the probability of determining that a small jackpot has been won is 1/65536.

Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the probability of winning the small jackpot, so when the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed and a game is played with the aim of winning the jackpot.

Next, the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 953(c). FIG. 953(c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2. The special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 defines a judgment value that is determined to be a big win (the value of the first win random number counter C1) and a judgment value that is determined to be a small win (the value of the first win random number counter C1).

Specifically, a jackpot determination value is defined for determining a jackpot win when the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 207," and a small jackpot determination value is defined for determining a small jackpot win when the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is in the range of "32768 to 65535." In other words, the update range of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is "0 to 65535," and the total number of values that the first jackpot random number counter C1 can take is 65536, of which the jackpot determination value is defined as 208 and the small jackpot determination value as 32768. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of determining a jackpot win is 208/65536 (approximately 1/300), and the probability of determining a small jackpot win is 32768/65536 (approximately 1/2).

Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning a small prize is higher than the probability of winning a big prize, so when a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set, the second special symbol lottery is executed and a game is played with the aim of winning a small prize.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, the type of bonus (big win, small win) likely to be awarded based on the special pattern lottery is configured to differ depending on the type of special pattern. By configuring it in this way, different bonuses are likely to be awarded when the first special pattern lottery is executed and when the second special pattern lottery is executed, which prevents players from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the special pattern type for which the special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed is varied depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the first special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special pattern lottery, and when the time-saving state is set, the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special pattern lottery. Furthermore, when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are met during the small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot is won (when the game ball enters a specific area (V area)), the jackpot game can be executed after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the process for executing a jackpot game depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the player is mainly made to play a game with the aim of executing a jackpot game by establishing the execution condition (first execution condition) of the jackpot game based on winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and when the time-saving state is set, the player is mainly made to play a game with the aim of executing a jackpot game by establishing the execution condition (second execution condition) of the jackpot game by making the game ball enter a specific area (V area) during the small win game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the execution condition of the jackpot game that is easily established depending on the set game state, so that the jackpot game can be executed based on the establishment of various execution conditions, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the execution condition for executing the jackpot game is more likely to be met (the second execution condition is more likely to be met) when the second special pattern lottery is executed than when the first special pattern lottery is executed, and the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state than in the normal state. Also, the time-saving state is configured to be set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, a player playing in the normal state can first aim to win a jackpot in the first special pattern lottery, which will set a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, and then aim to win a small jackpot in the second special pattern lottery in the time-saving state; in other words, a game that is most advantageous to the player can be played in stages, so that a pachinko machine 10 can be provided that prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the 32nd control example, the jackpot determination value is configured not to vary depending on the set game state (normal state, time-saving state), but it is not limited to this and may be configured to vary the jackpot determination value depending on the game state. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure it so that a game state in which a low probability state of a special pattern is set as the game state and a game state in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set can be set as the game state, and the jackpot determination value is increased more in the high probability state of a special pattern than in the low probability state of a special pattern. In addition, it is preferable to configure the high probability state of a special pattern to be set after the end of a jackpot game when a specific jackpot type is set.

By configuring it in this way, even in a game state where the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the probability of winning the jackpot can be varied depending on the probability state of the set special symbol, making it possible to set multiple game states with different degrees of advantage to the player. Therefore, by allowing the player to play in game states with various degrees of advantage, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the small win judgment value is configured not to vary depending on the set game state (normal state, time-saving state), but it is not limited to this and may be configured to vary the small win judgment value depending on the game state. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure it so that a game state in which a low probability state of a special pattern is set as the game state and a game state in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set can be set as the game state, and to configure it so that the high probability state of a special pattern increases the small win judgment value more than the low probability state of a special pattern. Also, it is preferable to configure it so that the high probability state of a special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game when a specific jackpot type is set.

By configuring it in this way, even in a game state where the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the probability of winning a small prize can be varied according to the probability state of the set special symbol, making it possible to set multiple game states with different degrees of advantage to the player. Therefore, by allowing the player to play in game states with various degrees of advantage, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In addition, if a high probability state of the special pattern and a low probability state of the special pattern can be set as the probability state of the special pattern, the probability of winning both the big win and the small win may be higher when the high probability state of the special pattern is set than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set, or only one of them may be higher than the low probability state of the special pattern. In this case, for example, the first high probability state, the second high probability state, and the third high probability state may be set as the high probability state of the special pattern, and when the first high probability state is set, the probability of winning both the big win and the small win may be higher than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set, and when the second high probability state is set, only the probability of winning the big win is higher than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set, and when the third high probability state is set, only the probability of winning the small win is higher than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a wider variety of states as the probability state of the special symbol, which makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game. Also, it is possible to configure the probability state of the special symbol to be able to set three or more types of jackpot probabilities and small jackpot probabilities. In this case, for example, it is possible to configure the jackpot probability of the special symbol to be different for each of up to four types of game states that are set by combining the state of the special symbol with the state of the normal symbol, or it is possible to simply configure the state of the special symbol to be able to be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set a different jackpot probability or small jackpot probability for each state.

In this 32nd control example, as shown in Figures 953(b) and 953(c), the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special pattern lottery and the probability of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery are configured to be the same, but without being limited to this, the probability of winning the jackpot may be made different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery).

In addition, in this 32nd control example, as shown in Figures 953(b) and 953(c), the small win probability in the first special pattern lottery and the small win probability in the second special pattern lottery are different, but without being limited to this, the small win probability in the first special pattern lottery and the small win probability in the second special pattern lottery may be configured to be the same. Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, although the winning probabilities are different, it is configured so that a small win can be won in either the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that a special pattern lottery in which a small win can be won in only one of the special pattern types can be executed.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this 32nd control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this control example, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 954(a).

Figure 954(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202b. As shown in Figure 954(a), this jackpot type selection table 202b defines information to be referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and information to be referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

Specifically, as the jackpot type for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a "jackpot A" is specified in correspondence with the range of "0 to 59" for the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") of "0 to 99". This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6, and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is set to "3" after the jackpot game ends.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 954(b), but in the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, multiple time-saving end conditions can be set simultaneously as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is ended when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions that have been set is satisfied. The above-mentioned time-saving counter 203h, small win counter 203s, and special symbol 2 counter 203t are counters that are referenced when determining whether or not different time-saving end conditions have been satisfied, and the corresponding counter values are updated based on the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, different time-saving end conditions are met depending on the content of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, making it possible to end the time-saving state. Therefore, even if a player intentionally plays an inappropriate game (for example, a left-handed play to execute the first special symbol lottery, rather than a right-handed play to execute the second special symbol lottery) in a state in which the time-saving state is set, which is a game state advantageous to the player, the time-saving state can be ended, making it possible to prevent the time-saving state from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 60 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 60% (60/100).

As shown in FIG. 954(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "60 to 99" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6, and a normal jackpot game is played in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "0", the value of the small winning counter 203s is set to "0", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 40% (40/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but the game state that is set after the jackpot play ends is different, and "jackpot A" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot B" in that a game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot play ends.

On the other hand, as for the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type "jackpot C" is specified to correspond to the entire range of the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 99". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9 rounds, and a time-saving jackpot game is executed in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is set to "3" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 100 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 100% (30/100).

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a specific jackpot type (jackpot C) is always set, and "jackpot C" is configured to have a larger number of rounds of jackpot play than the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that are set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, the game state that is set after the jackpot play ends is also configured to be a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, just like "jackpot A."

Therefore, "Jackpot C", which is set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, is the jackpot type most favorable to the player, followed by "Jackpot A", which is set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. And then "Jackpot B" is the jackpot type least favorable to the player.

Here, in this 32nd control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is about a 1/2 probability of winning a small prize, and the conditions for playing the big prize game are more likely to be met during the small prize game that is executed based on the winning small prize, and the game in which the big prize game is executed after the small prize game ends is mainly executed. Also, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed is configured so that the time-saving end conditions are met based on a predetermined number of (1) small prize wins. In other words, to win a big prize in the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to win the big prize, which has a probability of about 1/300, without winning the small prize, which has a probability of about 1/2.

In this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game, and in order to give the player the added value of winning a jackpot that has a lower probability of winning than a small jackpot, rather than a small jackpot that has a high probability of being won, "jackpot C" is configured to be the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. By configuring it in this way, added value can be given to a player who wins a jackpot during the time-saving state, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation of a player who wins a jackpot before a small jackpot in the second special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a time-saving jackpot game will always be played, making this a more advantageous special pattern lottery in terms of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, compared to the first special pattern lottery, which has a 60% chance of playing a time-saving jackpot game. Also, in terms of the number of rounds played during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery is specified to have a higher maximum, minimum, and average number that can be won.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the same number of rounds of jackpot play are executed for all jackpots, and the jackpot play period is the same. This same jackpot play period is then used to execute a jackpot play presentation (subjugation presentation) that suggests in advance the game state that will be set after the jackpot play ends. This configuration prevents the player from understanding the game state that will be set after the jackpot play ends based on the game content of the jackpot game that is executed, and makes it easier for the player to become interested in the subjugation presentation that is executed during the jackpot play.

In addition, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a different number of rounds can be executed depending on the selected jackpot type. In this case, it is preferable to configure the performance period of the subjugation performance to correspond to the jackpot game period in which a small number of rounds are executed, and in the jackpot game in which a large number of rounds are executed, after the performance period of the subjugation performance has elapsed, to execute the jackpot game performance corresponding to the remaining number of rounds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends based on the game content of the jackpot game, at least during the performance period of the subjugation performance. Also, in this case, it is preferable to specify the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202b so that the time-saving state is more easily set after the jackpot game ends for the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game in which a small number of rounds are executed than for the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game in which a large number of rounds are executed.

By configuring in this way, the time-saving state can be set immediately after the display result (success display) indicating that the time-saving state will be set as the display result of the subjugation display is displayed, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand. Also, by reducing the number of prize balls that the player can acquire during a jackpot game in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, compared to a jackpot game in which a game state disadvantageous to the player is set, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player acquires an excessive number of prize balls. In addition, a player in which an unfavorable game state (normal state) is set after the end of a jackpot game can acquire more prize balls in one jackpot game than a player in which an advantageous game state (time-saving state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to a transition to the normal state after acquiring only a few prize balls despite having executed a jackpot game.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is set for the same period (three times the time-saving state), but this is not limited to this, and the number of times the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) may be varied depending on the type of jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 951, the explanation continues. The small win type counter C5 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this 32nd control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this control example, the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is used to refer to the small win type selection table 202f to determine the type of small win when a small win is won. Here, the contents of the small win type selection table 202f will be explained with reference to FIG. 955.

Figure 955 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the small win type selection table 202f. As shown in Figure 955, this small win type selection table 202f defines the information to be referenced when a small win is won in the drawing of the first special pattern, and the information to be referenced when a small win is won in the drawing of the second special pattern.

Specifically, for the small win type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), "small win A" is specified as corresponding to the entire range of the value (update range "0-99") of the small win type counter C5 from "0-99". This "small win A" is a small win type in which a small win game is executed that allows the game ball to easily enter a specific area (V area) during a small win game, and the big win type "big win C" is set based on the game ball entering the specific area (V area).

On the other hand, for the small win type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), "small win B" is specified as a small win type corresponding to the value (update range "0-99") of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0-79", and "small win C" is specified as a small win type corresponding to the range of "80-99". This "small win B" is a small win type in which a small win game is played that allows the game ball to easily enter a specific area (V area) during a small win game, and the jackpot type "jackpot D" is set based on the game ball entering the specific area (V area). Also, "small win C" is a small win type in which a small win game is played that allows the game ball to easily enter a specific area (V area) during a small win game, and the jackpot type "jackpot C" is set based on the game ball entering the specific area (V area).

In other words, if a small prize is won in the first special symbol lottery, the random number value (counter value) associated with "small prize A" is 100 out of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the small prize type counter C5, so the probability that "small prize A" will be determined is 100% (100/100) if a small prize is won in the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery, the random number value (counter value) associated with "small prize B" is 80 out of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the small prize type counter C5, so the probability that "small prize B" will be determined is 80% (80/100) if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery. Also, the random number value (counter value) associated with "small prize C" is 20, so the probability that "small prize C" will be determined is 20% (20/100) if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery.

Here, we will explain the type of jackpot that can be set based on the execution of each small win game. In this 32nd control example, a specific area (V area) is provided in the game ball flow path through which the game ball that has won into the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650, which is opened during the small win game, can pass, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V area) during the small win game, the execution condition (V condition) for the jackpot game is established, and the jackpot game can be executed after the small win game ends. The content of the jackpot game that is executed when the V condition is established is predetermined according to the type of small win that is set when the small win is won.

In other words, the small win type that is set when a small win is won specifies the big win type for the big win game that is executed based on the establishment of the V condition. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 955, the big win type of "big win C" is specified for "small win A" and "small win C", and the big win type of "big win D" is specified for "small win B".

Here, if "jackpot C" is set, the same jackpot game as that executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (jackpot game in which "jackpot C" is set) is executed, that is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9, and a time-saving jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends is executed. On the other hand, "jackpot D" is a jackpot type that is not set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 3, and a time-saving jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is set to "3" after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, in this 32nd control example, the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured to be able to set four types of jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D), with "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" being jackpot types that can be set only when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, "jackpot C" being a jackpot type that can be set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and when a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, and "jackpot D" being a jackpot type that can be set only when a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery.

In this way, by configuring the game so that different types of jackpot games can be played depending on which of multiple execution conditions for playing a jackpot game is met, the player can be motivated to play in an attempt to meet various execution conditions in order to play a jackpot game.

In the 32nd control example, the same jackpot game (jackpot game based on "jackpot C") can be executed in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and in some cases where a V condition is established during a small jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this and it may be configured so that a jackpot game with different contents is executed in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and in some cases where a V condition is established during a small jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple execution conditions for executing a jackpot game, it is possible to execute a jackpot game with different contents depending on the execution condition that is established.

Returning to FIG. 951, the explanation will continue. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 978) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 956(a)) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 956(a). FIG. 956(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 956(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, a time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 used when the time-saving state is set, a special time-saving variation pattern table 202d3, and a time-saving final variation pattern table 202d4. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the type of variation pattern selection table 202d to be referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined according to the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202h.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same game state is set, it is possible to determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to different types of fluctuation pattern selection tables based on the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202h.

Returning to FIG. 951, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is specified by a second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol (second symbol), it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won (a winning normal symbol). This second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types: one for low probability normal symbols and one for high probability normal symbols, which have a higher probability of winning than the low probability, and each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between low probability normal symbols and high probability normal symbols.

To explain in detail what is stipulated in this second winning random number table 202c, when the normal pattern has a low probability of occurring, a normal winning is stipulated for the acquired second winning random number counter C4 to a value between "0 and 2", and when the normal pattern has a high probability of occurring, a normal winning is stipulated for the acquired second winning random number counter C4 to a range between "0 and 149".

In other words, in this 32nd control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed play) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol win during the normal state, making it difficult to cause a situation in which a normal symbol win game is executed during the normal state and a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a normal symbol win game based on a win of a normal symbol during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, different lengths of fluctuation time are set as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation to indicate the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the set game state, and a longer fluctuation time (e.g., 10 seconds) is set when a low probability state of the normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation depending on the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (time-saving state) in which it is easy to win the normal pattern lottery and to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, when a normal symbol lottery is won when the normal symbol lottery is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a normal symbol winning game is executed in which the electric role 640a is opened in an operating mode (short opening) in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even if a normal symbol lottery is won in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640, so that when the normal state is set, it is possible to prevent a right-handed game that aims to execute the second special symbol lottery from being executed, rather than a left-handed game that aims to execute the first special symbol lottery.

In the present 32nd control example, in order to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the game state (normal state) in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the normal pattern lottery is more difficult to win during the low probability state of the normal pattern than during the high probability state of the normal pattern, and even if the normal pattern lottery is won (a normal pattern win), the electric role 640a is operated in an operating mode that makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in order to execute the normal symbol lottery even during left-hand play, the through gate 67 may be provided in a right-hand play area (a play area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) through which the game ball shot by the left-hand play can pass, and in some cases where a normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state is won, the electric device 640a may be operated in an operating mode (long opening) that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that a normal symbol winning game (long normal symbol winning game) can be executed. By configuring in this way, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the possibility of the second special symbol lottery being executed can be left for the player regardless of the game state set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, the normal symbol fluctuation time (long normal symbol fluctuation time) for indicating that a normal symbol hit game in which a long normal symbol hit game is executed is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time of other normal symbols, and during the long normal symbol hit fluctuation time, a normal symbol hit performance is executed that includes at least information for indicating to the player that a long normal symbol hit game will be executed and information for guiding the player to switch the game method to right-handed play. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing left-handed play in the normal state to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 when a long normal symbol hit game is executed.

Furthermore, the probability of winning a normal symbol during a low probability state of a normal symbol may be set to an extremely low probability (for example, 1/65536), so that if a normal symbol lottery executed during a low probability state of a normal symbol is won, a long normal symbol winning game is always executed. In this case, it is also preferable to configure the second special symbol lottery to be executed multiple times in response to one long normal symbol winning game.

Specifically, the operation pattern for a long normal winning game is determined so that the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 multiple times with an interval of the first period, and the variation time of the second special pattern variation is a second period that is shorter than the first period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute a new second special pattern variation each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a long normal winning game, and therefore it is possible to easily execute the second special pattern lottery multiple times in response to one long normal winning game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have a player playing in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) play a first game in which a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set based on the results of the special symbol lottery to aim for the second special symbol lottery to be executed, and a second game in which a long normal symbol winning game is executed based on the results of the normal symbol lottery to aim for the second special symbol lottery to be executed, in parallel, thereby preventing the player from continuing playing in a monotonous manner and becoming bored with the game early on.

In addition, in this case, the number of times that the second special symbol lottery can be executed by one long normal symbol winning game may be configured to be greater than the number of times that the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the time-saving state. In other words, it may be configured so that more second special symbol lotteries can be executed when a normal symbol lottery executed during a low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is won and a long normal symbol winning game is executed than the number of times that the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the period from when the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed is set to when the time-saving end condition of the time-saving state is met (three times in this 32nd control example).

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to make it easier to execute more second special pattern lotteries when a transition trigger that is difficult to achieve is achieved as a transition trigger to a state where the second special pattern lottery is easier to execute than when a transition trigger that is easy to achieve is achieved, so added value can be given to players who achieve a transition trigger that is difficult to achieve.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 963) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 978).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to Fig. 950, the explanation will continue. ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 951. Here, the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example will be explained with reference to Fig. 952(a). Fig. 952(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this 32nd control example.

As shown in FIG. 952(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example has at least a first win random number table 202a, a big win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a time-saving grant table 202e, a small win type selection table 202f, an opening scenario table 202g, and a fluctuation pattern scenario table 202h. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the big win type selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, and the small win type selection table 202f were described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 951, so their explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 956(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d specifies a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, a time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 used when the time-saving state is set, a special time-saving variation pattern table 202d3, and a time-saving final variation pattern table 202d4. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the type of variation pattern selection table 202d to be referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined according to the contents specified in the variation pattern scenario table 202h.

The normal variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery that is executed when the normal state is set as the gaming state. Here, the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 956(b). FIG. 956(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1.

As shown in FIG. 956(b), the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 specifies different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) corresponding to the special symbol type used in the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, it is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a different fluctuation time can be determined according to the special symbol type and the lottery result.

Specifically, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss", then for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0-139", the fluctuation pattern is "Miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds, for the range of "140-149", the fluctuation pattern is "False Miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, for the range of "150-179", the fluctuation pattern is "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and for the range of "180-198", the fluctuation pattern is "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds.

In addition, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 29", "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds for the range of "30 to 189", and "Special reach" with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds for the range of "190 to 198".

Furthermore, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is a "small win," a "long small win" with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value from "0 to 198."

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the system is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be determined when the lottery result is a miss than when the lottery result is something other than a miss (a big win or a small win), and the system is configured so that when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined, the special symbol lottery result is more likely to be a big win or a small win. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a player playing in the normal state from experiencing a long period of special symbol variation with a lottery result of a miss, which would result in an extremely small number of special symbol lotteries executed per unit time and thus a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed per unit time decreases, i.e., when the special pattern changes over a long period of time, the anticipation of winning (a big win or a small win) can be increased, which can prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, among the variation patterns that can be determined as the first special symbol variation in the normal state, a variation pattern with a variation time longer than a predetermined time (80 seconds) (90 seconds, 140 seconds) can be determined when the result of the special symbol lottery is anything other than a miss. Therefore, when a special symbol variation is executed with a variation pattern with an excessively long variation time, it is possible for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Therefore, even when a special symbol variation is executed with an excessively long variation time, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, the system is configured to be able to determine a variation pattern in which the same variation time (40 seconds, 80 seconds) is set in at least some cases where the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, and at least some cases where the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to predict the result of the special pattern lottery that corresponds to the special pattern variation being executed, even if the variation time of the special pattern variation being executed is known before the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1, a fluctuation pattern command for indicating the determined fluctuation pattern is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113 by external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 978) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 978) of the main control device 110. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the fluctuation presentation to be executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 based on the information included in the received fluctuation pattern command (lottery result, fluctuation time, etc.).

On the other hand, if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Miss", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198", and if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Big win" or "Small win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Win" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198".

In this 32nd control example, when the normal state is set, various mechanisms are arranged on the game board 13 to make it difficult (impossible) for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and even if a right-hand hit game is performed during the normal state and a normal winning game is performed, the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute. In addition, it is configured so that a maximum of one right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) can be obtained.

Therefore, the game situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state is one in which the reserved special symbol 2 is acquired during the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed easily, the game transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state while the acquired reserved special symbol 2 is held, and after the normal state is set, the game situation is one in which the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the reserved special symbol 2 that is held.

In other words, the time-saving state that allows the second special symbol lottery to be easily executed ends, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state as the final second special symbol lottery executed in response to the time-saving state. Therefore, in this 32nd control example, a variation pattern is determined in which a constant length of variation time (20 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result as the variation time of the second special symbol variation to indicate the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. This variation time is then used to execute the pull-back performance (see FIG. 941(b)) after the time-saving state ends.

In this way, when a special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) for a specific special pattern type (second special pattern) is executed in a specific game state (normal state), a variation pattern is determined in which the same length of variation time is set regardless of the lottery result, so that the presentation period of a specific presentation executed during the special pattern variation can be unified regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery.

Next, the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 957(a). FIG. 957(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2. This time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that is primarily referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and is a data table that is referenced more frequently than the other data tables referenced during the time-saving state (special time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3, time-saving final fluctuation pattern table 202d4).

Specifically, this time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation to indicate the results of the first special symbol drawing that has been performed 1 to 4 times since the time-saving state was set, or when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation to indicate the results of the second special symbol drawing that has been performed 1 or 2 times since the time-saving state was set.

In this 32nd control example, when the time-saving state is set, a normal symbol winning game (long normal symbol winning game) is executed in an operation mode that makes it easy to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 when a winning normal symbol lottery is won. Therefore, while the time-saving state is set, a game is played with the aim of executing the second special symbol lottery by playing right-hand.

Here, for example, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is executed, the time-saving state is set in a state in which the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reserved) is acquired, and the first special symbol lottery may be executed before the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is acquired. In this 32nd control example, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shorten the change time set in the second special symbol change executed during the time-saving state in order to increase the number of times jackpot games are executed per unit time, but if the first special symbol lottery is executed before the second special symbol lottery is executed in the time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed until the first special symbol change to show the result of the executed first special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, resulting in a problem that the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed per period in which the time-saving state is set is reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured to be able to store a maximum of one special symbol 2 reservation, and is configured to set a short time (1 second) as the change time of the second special symbol change executed during the time-saving state. In other words, during the time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery using the special symbol 2 reservation is frequently executed, so depending on the flow situation of the game ball released by right-hand play, a state in which the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired may occur. In such a state, if the special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, the first special symbol lottery is executed, so even if a new special symbol 2 reservation is acquired, if the first special symbol is changing at that time, the second special symbol change based on the newly acquired special symbol 2 reservation cannot be executed immediately, and as a result, there is a problem that the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed per unit time in which the time-saving state is set is reduced.

In contrast, in the present 32nd control example, a short change time can be determined as the change time of the first special symbol change executed during the time-saving state, and when the time-saving state is set in a state where the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired and only the special symbol 1 reservation has been acquired, the special symbol 1 reservation is consumed in a short time. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation while still acquiring the special symbol 1 reservation, and to prevent the efficiency of the second special symbol lottery being reduced due to the first special symbol change executed based on the special symbol 1 reservation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 957(a), if the special pattern type is "Special Pattern 1 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Miss", a "Super Short Miss" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198", if the lottery result is "Big Win", a "Short Big Win" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198", if the lottery result is "Small Win", a "Long Small Win" with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198".

On the other hand, if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Miss", a "Short miss" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198", if the lottery result is "Big win", a "Super short big win" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198", if the lottery result is "Small win", a "Super short small win" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198".

As explained above, for the first to fourth first special symbol fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern of which is determined by referring to the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2, that is, the number of fluctuations corresponding to the upper limit number (4) that can be acquired as the special symbol 1 reservation, and the number of first special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the time-saving state based on the special symbol 1 reservation acquired during the normal state, if the lottery result is a miss, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving state is set when the special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, it is possible to easily consume all of the acquired special symbol 1 reservations until the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired (until the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a normal symbol winning game based on a winning normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state).

In addition, if the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is a miss other than a win (jackpot, small win), a fluctuation time is set that allows the player to understand the lottery result, and a special effect is executed to inform the player that the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state has been won. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand how a winning game was executed before the second special symbol lottery was executed, even though the time-saving state has been set. Furthermore, if a small jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, the same fluctuation pattern (90 seconds) is determined as when a small jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state. And, during the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the small jackpot win, the same fluctuation effect is executed regardless of the game state.

In addition, in the first and second second special symbol fluctuations, in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second is determined regardless of the lottery result. During this period, a countdown effect (see FIG. 938(a)) is executed. This configuration makes it easier to match the timing at which the number icon 808 (see FIG. 938(a)) for indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is variably displayed by the countdown effect with the timing at which the number icon 808 is hidden and the third symbol indicating a win is displayed in a stopped state, so that the third symbol indicating a win can be displayed in a stopped state as part of the countdown effect, enhancing the effect of the performance.

Next, the contents of the special time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 957(b). FIG. 957(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3. This special time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table referenced when determining the fluctuation time of some of the first special symbol fluctuations executed during the time-saving state, and is referenced when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuations 5 to 10 times after the time-saving state is set.

As shown in FIG. 957(b), in the special time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3, only the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is defined as the special symbol type, and if the lottery result is a "miss", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the lottery result is a "jackpot", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the lottery result is a "small win", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198".

In this 32nd control example, the time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state include at least a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of second special pattern changes executed during the time-saving state reaches three, and a time-saving end condition that is met when the combined number of first special pattern changes and second special pattern changes executed during the time-saving state reaches ten.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has a playability in that it executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time-saving state is set, which makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery, and by winning (small win, big win) in any of the second special symbol lotteries, which has a probability of about 1/2, the time-saving state is repeated through big win play, and if no win is won in the three second special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends, and if no win is won in the second special symbol lottery (one time) using the remaining reserved special symbol 2, it transitions to the normal state (ending the consecutive win state).

Here, if the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set only to be satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state reaches three, the time-saving end condition will also be satisfied when the first special symbol lottery is executed three times, and there is a risk that the time-saving state will end without the second special symbol lottery being executed, even though the time-saving state is set. In other words, in this 32nd control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reservation) can be acquired up to four times, and if the time-saving state is set in a state where, for example, four special symbol 1 reservations and no special symbol 2 reservations have been acquired, the first special symbol variation will be executed before the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time-saving end condition will be satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time-saving state will end without exhibiting its original playability, which causes a problem of the player's desire to play to decrease.

In addition, even if four reserved special symbols 1 have been acquired when the time-saving state is set, if the time-saving end condition is established when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches seven in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time-saving state, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol variation more than three times when the time-saving state is set without the reserved special symbol 1 having been acquired, which creates the problem of providing the player with an excessively advantageous gameplay compared to the original gameplay.

Therefore, in this 32nd control example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied based only on the number of times the second special pattern change is performed, and a time-saving end condition that is satisfied based on the combined number of times the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change are set, and the time-saving state is configured to end when either of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a predetermined number of second special pattern changes regardless of the acquisition status of the reserved special pattern 1, and it is possible to reliably end the time-saving state when the predetermined number of second special pattern changes have been executed.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, the first special symbol change corresponding to the upper limit number (4) of reserved special symbols 1, that is, from the time-saving state is set until the fourth first special symbol change is executed, is configured to be set to a short time (0.5 seconds) using the time-saving change pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 957(a)), and for the first special symbol changes thereafter, a change time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even if the time-saving state is set, if a player who does not understand how to play in the time-saving state plays left-handed, if the change time of the first special symbol change executed during the time-saving state is always set to a short time (0.5 seconds), new first special symbol changes will be executed one after another, and there is a risk that the time-saving end condition that is established based on the combined number of the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes will be established.

In contrast, in the present 32nd control example, a long change time (20 seconds) is set for the first special pattern change that is executed from the fifth time onwards after the time-saving state is set, i.e., the first special pattern change that is executed only when a new special pattern 1 reservation is acquired during the time-saving state, and by lengthening the period required for one first special pattern change to end, a period is secured for the player to understand how to play during the time-saving state. In other words, it is configured to suppress the establishment of the time-saving end condition that is established based on the combined number of first special pattern changes and second special pattern changes.

Furthermore, if the first special symbol variation is executed five or more times during the time-saving state, the variation effect of the first special symbol variation is configured to include a variation effect that encourages the player to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) by playing right-hand. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players who are not familiar with the playing method that should be executed during the time-saving state to understand the correct playing method.

The fifth and subsequent first special symbol changes during the time-saving state described above are first special symbol changes that cannot occur during normal play, i.e., when playing by continuing right-hand play from a jackpot, so even if a long change time (20 seconds) is set, it will not reduce the game efficiency during the time-saving state for players playing normally.

Next, the contents of the time-saving final fluctuation pattern table 202d4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 957(c). FIG. 957(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving final fluctuation pattern table 202d4. This time-saving final fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is a data table that is referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern to be set when the second special pattern fluctuation that satisfies the time-saving end condition is satisfied, that is, when the third second special pattern fluctuation is executed after the time-saving state is set, and only the fluctuation pattern for the second special pattern is defined as the special pattern type.

Specifically, in the time-saving final fluctuation pattern table 202d4, only the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol is specified as the special symbol type, and when the lottery result is a "miss", a fluctuation pattern of "miss" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and when the lottery result is a "small win", a fluctuation pattern of "ultra-short small win" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value range of "0 to 99", and a fluctuation pattern of "small win" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the range of "100 to 198". And when the lottery result is a "jackpot", a fluctuation pattern of "jackpot" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198".

In other words, during the period of the second special symbol change, which is the final change in the time-saving state, the final result of the countdown effect executed during the time-saving state (displaying "0" in the number icon 808) is displayed, and then a charge effect (see FIG. 941(a)) is executed to encourage the acquisition of the reserved special symbol 2 until the time-saving state ends. Therefore, in order to ensure the performance period of the charge effect, a longer change time is set for the third (final) second special symbol change than for the first or second second special symbol change after the time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily end the time-saving state when the special symbol 2 reservation has been acquired. Also, even if a player wins the second special symbol drawing executed during the time-saving state, the time efficiency (the number of second special symbol drawing executed per unit time in the time-saving state) can be made to differ greatly between the first or second second special symbol drawing and the third second special symbol drawing, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the player wins the second special symbol drawing during the time-saving state, but also in which second special symbol drawing during the time-saving state the player will win.

As shown in FIG. 957(c), when a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, which is the final time-saving fluctuation (third time), two types of fluctuation time can be set. Here, when a "super short small jackpot" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is set as the fluctuation pattern, the countdown effect is performed such that the screen is destroyed while the number icon 808 "1" is displayed, and the third symbol, indicating a winning jackpot, is displayed in a stopped state, that is, a fluctuation effect indicating a small jackpot is executed using the same presentation mode as when a small jackpot is won in the first and second second special symbol lotteries.

When the fluctuation pattern is set to "small win" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, the result of the countdown effect is that the number icon 808 "1" is changed to the word "LAST" indicating that the countdown has ended, and when switching to the charge effect, the display screen is destroyed and the third symbol, indicating a winning combination, is displayed in a stopped state.

In this way, when a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery of the final time-saving variation (third time), a variation pattern that stops and displays the third symbol indicating a small prize win for a short time (1 second) and a variation pattern that stops and displays the third symbol indicating a small prize win for a long time (20 seconds) can be set. This makes it possible to notify the player that a small prize has been won in the second special symbol lottery of the final time-saving variation (third time) at various times, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the countdown presentation. Also, when a long period of variation (20 seconds) is set, a countdown presentation is executed in a presentation mode that indicates that the second special symbol lottery of the final time-saving variation (third time) was a miss, and then a presentation result indicating a small prize win is displayed, so that a presentation with an element of surprise can be provided to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 957(c), if the second special symbol lottery of the final time-saving fluctuation (third time) is a miss, that is, if the normal state is set after the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed, a longer fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is set than if the second special symbol lottery of the final time-saving fluctuation (third time) is a hit, that is, if a winning game is executed after the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed, a charge effect is executed to encourage the player to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation using the difference in fluctuation time. Therefore, it is possible to easily end the time-saving state when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired, and when there is a high possibility that the time-saving state will continue (when a big win game is executed by winning a V during a small win game and the time-saving state is set again after the big win game ends), it is possible to easily increase the number of big win games executed per unit time by eliminating the period in which the charge effect is executed even during the fluctuation period of the final time-saving fluctuation (third time).

Returning to FIG. 952(a), we will continue the explanation. The time-saving granting table 202e is a data table that is referenced when setting the game state after the end of a jackpot game, and it specifies the game state (time-saving end condition) according to the jackpot type (the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won) corresponding to the jackpot game being played.

Here, the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 954(b). FIG. 954(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving granting table 202e. As shown in FIG. 954(b), the time-saving granting table 202e defines the values of each counter that is referenced when determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is met, corresponding to each type of jackpot.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D", the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "3", and for "jackpot B", the value of the time-saving counter 203h, the value of the small jackpot counter 203s, and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t are set to "no value (shown as "-" in the figure)".

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, and the special chart 2 counter 203t, whose information is specified in the time-saving granting table 202e, all have their values updated during the time-saving state, and when the counter value is updated to a value that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is determined that the time-saving end condition has been met, and processing is executed to end the time-saving state.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter that measures the number of times that special pattern fluctuations are performed during the time-saving state, and the counter value is updated (decremented) based on whether the first special pattern fluctuation or the second special pattern fluctuation is performed during the time-saving state. In other words, the time-saving counter 203h is a counter that is used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the total number of special patterns, which is the sum of the number of first special pattern fluctuations and the number of second special pattern fluctuations performed during the time-saving state.

The small win counter 203s is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win game is executed during the time-saving state, and the counter value is updated (decremented) when the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state is a small win. In other words, the small win counter 203s is a counter used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times a small win game is executed during the time-saving state.

The special pattern 2 counter 203t is a counter that measures the number of times the second special pattern variation is executed during the time-saving state, and the counter value is updated (decremented) based on the execution of the second special pattern variation during the time-saving state. In other words, the special pattern 2 counter 203t is a counter that is used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the second special pattern variation is executed during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 954(b), when the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, when setting the game state after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is set to "3". Therefore, the time-saving state set based on the jackpot type "jackpot A" becomes a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is met when any of the following conditions is met: the total number of special variations is "10 times", the number of small jackpot wins is "1 time", and the number of second special symbol variations is "3 times".

In this 32nd control example, if the value of each of the counters described above is 1 or more, it is determined that the time-saving state is in progress. Therefore, when the jackpot type "jackpot B" is set, the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e are specified so that no numerical value is set for each counter value, and therefore, after the jackpot game ends, the normal state is set, not the time-saving state.

In the 32nd control example, the value of each counter is unified when the time-saving state is set regardless of the set jackpot type as the content specified in the time-saving granting table 202e, but it is not limited to this, and the value of each counter (particularly the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t) may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition with different content depending on the set jackpot type. In this case, for example, it is good to make the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t, which specifies the content of the time-saving end condition based on the number of times of the second special pattern change executed during the time-saving state, different depending on the jackpot type, and it is good to configure it so that the number of times of the second special pattern change that can be executed during the time-saving state can be increased when one jackpot type is set compared to when another jackpot type is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting that a more advantageous time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the values other than the special pattern 2 counter 203t may be configured to be different. For example, when a specific jackpot type is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be set to "4", which is less than "10". In this case, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern 1 reservation is acquired and the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired, so that the number of second special pattern variations that can be executed during the time-saving state is reduced (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition before the time-saving end condition is established by the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t satisfying the predetermined condition). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of second special pattern variations that can be executed during the time-saving state. Furthermore, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be set to "90", which is more than "10". In this case, even if the left-hand play is continued during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is unlikely to be met, so it is possible to have the player play a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, aiming to win the jackpot. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that a bonus that is more advantageous to the player can be granted if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state than if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, such as a bonus that increases the probability that the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends or increases the number of rounds played during the jackpot play. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of choosing between playing left-hand play, which causes the first special symbol lottery to be executed during the time-saving state, and playing right-hand play, which causes the second special symbol lottery to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 954(b), in this 32nd control example, three types of time-saving end conditions are set for any jackpot type for which the time-saving state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of time-saving end condition set may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. For example, when a special jackpot type that can provide a time-saving state advantageous to the player by drastically increasing the number of second special symbol changes that can be executed during the time-saving state compared to other jackpot types is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be set to "1000" without setting a value for the special symbol 2 counter 203t. In addition, by providing a jackpot type for which no value is set for the small jackpot counter 203s, the time-saving state may be configured to continue even if no V is won during the small jackpot game executed after the small jackpot is won during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the elements of the execution number of the special pattern change (the execution number of the second special pattern change) and the number of small wins are used as the elements for the time-saving end condition to be established, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be established using other elements. For example, a counter (special pattern 2 reserved acquisition number counter) for measuring the number of acquisitions of the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) that becomes easier to acquire during the time-saving state may be provided, and the time-saving end condition may be established when the value of the special pattern 2 reserved acquisition number counter meets a predetermined condition (for example, "4"). Alternatively, it may be configured to establish the time-saving end condition when the number of special pattern 2 reserved reaches the upper limit during the second special pattern change period for a specific number of times. Also, a time measurement means may be provided to measure the time that has elapsed since the time-saving state was set, and the time-saving end condition may be established when the elapsed time measured by the time measurement means meets a predetermined condition. Alternatively, an end lottery may be executed each time a special pattern lottery is executed to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition is established, and the time-saving end condition may be established when the end lottery is won.

In this way, by configuring it so that various time-saving end conditions can be met, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand how long the time-saving state will continue, and therefore, in order to prevent a player playing during the time-saving state from ending in a state where they have not acquired a special chart 2 reservation (a state where they have acquired a small number of special chart 2 reservations), it is possible to encourage the player to play in a motivated manner so that the number of special chart 2 reservations is always at the upper limit, making it easier to improve game operation.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t are configured to subtract a fixed number ("1") each time the second special pattern variation is executed, but for example, if the result of the second special pattern lottery is a specific miss result, the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t may not be subtracted. In other words, even if the result of the special pattern lottery executed is the same, the update contents of the values of various counters referenced to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met may be configured to be different depending on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to predict when the time-saving state will end, even if the player knows the results of the special pattern lottery that is held during the time-saving state.

The time-saving counter 203h may be configured to decrement when a termination condition that may be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established. Specifically, the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to decrement when the result of the lottery for each symbol executed in a state in which a high probability state for a normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the result of the lottery for a normal symbol is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by one, but the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented multiple times (for example, by 2) in a lump depending on the type of termination condition that has been met, or the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time-saving counter 203h. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (jackpot type). This allows players to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot game that has been played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The opening scenario table 202g is a data table that specifies the operating modes of the various mechanisms (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, electric role 640a) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110, and is referenced when setting the opening scenario corresponding to the operation control to be executed when the operating conditions for operating the various mechanisms described above are met.

The variation pattern scenario table 202h specifies the data table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special pattern variation to be executed in accordance with the game state and the number of times the special pattern varies after the end of the jackpot game.

Now, with reference to FIG. 958, the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202h will be explained. FIG. 958 is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202h in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 958, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202h specifies various fluctuation pattern tables for the number of fluctuations after the end of a jackpot game (number of fluctuations in special chart 1, number of fluctuations in special chart 2, and total number) and the game state.

By configuring it in this way, even during a time-saving state in which multiple time-saving end conditions are set, for example, regardless of the number of times that special chart 1 changes, the change pattern can be determined by referring to the change pattern table for the final time-saving change in special chart 2 change, which is the final change in the time-saving state.

Without being limited to this, it may be configured so that different fluctuation pattern tables can be determined when the same conditions exist, and for example, the fluctuation pattern scenario table to be determined may be determined by lottery.

Returning to FIG. 950, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 950, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 978) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up processing (see FIG. 977) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 976) as a processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 952(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, a small jackpot type storage area 203m, a small jackpot start flag 203n, a small jackpot in progress flag 203o, a V-pass jackpot type storage area 203p, a V flag 203q, a V-pass flag 203r, a small jackpot counter 203s, a special symbol 2 counter 203t, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) as shown in FIG. 951, and each of these areas stores winning information (values of the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, small winning type counter C5, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1) obtained based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64.

More specifically, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), the values of each counter C1 to C5 and CS1 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the older initial winning is stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 draws for special symbols, the values (winning information) of the counters C1-C5 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the lottery for the special symbols and other decisions are made based on the values of the counters C1-C5 and CS1 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this control example, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a where the starting winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4).

The second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it stores the counter values acquired for the initial winnings at the second ball entrance 640, and in that the number of reserved areas has been changed to one. As the rest of the configuration is the same, a detailed description will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when the game ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the first special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the order of the start winning is maintained and data corresponding to the winning (normal symbol winning information) is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, and so, as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a shift process is performed to move the winning information data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller. Also, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which winning information data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the first special symbol (first symbol) variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S804 in FIG. 970). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a special symbol is performed (see S212 in FIG. 964).

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a first special pattern reserved ball count command (see S213 in FIG. 964 and S805 in FIG. 970). The first special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the first special pattern reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. As a result, even if the number of reserved balls of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern (reserved pattern) on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e differs from the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls (special symbol 2 reserved) that have entered the second ball entrance 640 and been reserved is stored, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. When the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the game ball through the normal start port (through gate) 67. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is initially set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S1204 in FIG. 973). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 972).

When the game ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of reserved variable display M for normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1206 in FIG. 973). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1203 in FIG. 973: No).

The game status storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game status, and stores the game status corresponding to the game status (the setting status of the time-saving counter 203h, the setting status of the small win counter 203s, and the setting status of the special chart 2 counter 203t) that will be set after the big win game ends. Specifically, when the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, and the special chart 2 counter 203t are 0, the normal status is stored, and when the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, and the special chart 2 counter 203t are set to values greater than 0, the time-saving status is stored.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is being played, a jackpot game state (jackpot state) indicating that a jackpot game is being played and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played are also stored, and when a small jackpot game is being played, a small jackpot game state (small jackpot state) indicating that a small jackpot game is being played and type information indicating the small jackpot type corresponding to the small jackpot game being played (type information related to the corresponding jackpot type) are also stored. In addition, regular jackpot game in progress information indicating that a regular jackpot game is being played is also stored.

Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores information about the current game status in the secondary game status storage area 223g.

The information stored in this game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is configured to set a status command corresponding to the information stored in the game status storage area 203g during the start-up process (see FIG. 977) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

This allows the audio and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating the state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and a value corresponding to the state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is set. In the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 979) executed by the main control device 110, when it is determined that the ending period is ending (S1913 in FIG. 979: Yes), a value corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed is set to this time-saving counter 203h (see S1915 in FIG. 979). When the jackpot pattern is displayed as stopped (see S220 in FIG. 964), or when the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set during the jackpot game, excessive benefits can be prevented from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted based on the special pattern lottery (variation), and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends and transitions to the low probability state of the normal pattern is made. In addition, when the value of the small win counter 203s described later becomes 0 (S703: Yes in FIG. 969), when the value of the special pattern 2 counter becomes 0 (S611: Yes in FIG. 968), that is, when other time-saving end conditions are met, it is also cleared to 0. By configuring in this way, when the first time-saving end condition is met, a value greater than 0 is held as the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a malfunction in which the time-saving end condition is met even though the normal state is set can be suppressed.

In the 32nd control example, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the normal state is set before the jackpot game starts, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of normal symbols may be continued until the next jackpot game is executed (until a jackpot is won). By configuring in this way, the high probability state of normal symbols can be continued even during a jackpot game, so that a game in which a game ball is entered into the first variable winning device 65 by right-handed play and a game in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entry port 640 can be executed in parallel.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, if a small win is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, the normal state is set before the small win game starts, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that the high probability state of the normal pattern continues until the small win game ends. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern can be continued even during the small win game, so that a game in which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 650 by right-hitting play and a game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 can be executed in parallel. Therefore, even if the small win game starts before a new special pattern 2 reservation is obtained after the time-saving state is set, it is possible to obtain a new special pattern 2 reservation during the small win game.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203j is set on when it is time to end the variable display indicating a jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 964). Also, the jackpot start flag 203j is set off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1903 in FIG. 979).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203k is on, it means that a jackpot game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot game is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203k is set to on when a jackpot game (special game state) is started after a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery (see S1904 in FIG. 979). It is also set to off when the jackpot game (special game state) ends (see S1919 in FIG. 979). Then, in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 964), the jackpot flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 964).

The small win type storage area 203m is a memory area for temporarily storing the small win type set for the small win that has been won. When it is determined that a small win has been won (S409: Yes in FIG. 966), the acquired small win type is temporarily stored. Then, in the small win start setting process (see S223 in FIG. 967) executed to start the small win game, the stored small win type is read out, and an opening scenario corresponding to the read small win type is set (see S501 in FIG. 967). In addition, the big win type corresponding to the read small win type is stored in the V-pass big win type storage area 203p (see S502 in FIG. 967).

The small win start flag 203n is a flag that indicates that it is the start timing of a small win game. It is set to ON when the variation of the special pattern stops and the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win (see S504 in FIG. 967). When it is determined that the small win start flag 203n is ON and it is determined that it is the start timing of a small win game, it is set to OFF (see S2003 in FIG. 980). This small win start flag 203n is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The small win in progress flag 203o is a flag that indicates that a small win is in progress. It is set to ON when the variation of the special pattern stops, which is the result of the special pattern lottery that indicates a small win (see S504 in FIG. 967). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when it is determined that it is the end of the small win (when it is determined that the play for the set number of rounds of the small win has ended) (see S2018 in FIG. 980). This small win in progress flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state, such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be retained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203p is a storage area in which data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a game ball that has won the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is detected by a specific area (V switch 650e3) during a small winning game is stored. The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203p stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the determined small winning type when the variation of the special pattern that is the result of the special pattern lottery stops, which is a small winning win (see S502 in FIG. 967). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 and the game ball is detected by the specific area (V switch 650e3), the V flag 203q corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203p is set to ON. The data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203p is cleared at the end of the small winning game. This V-passing jackpot type storage area 203p is a flag that is set to off in the initial state, such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., if a power outage occurs.

When a game ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 during a small win game and the game ball is detected by a specific area (V switch 650e3), the V flag 203q is set to ON, which corresponds to the type of big win corresponding to the type of small win game being played. At the end of the small win game, it is determined whether this V flag 203q is ON (see S2013 in FIG. 980), and if it is determined that the V flag 203q is ON (S2013 in FIG. 980: Yes), the type of big win to be played is determined from the flag that is set to ON, and the start of the corresponding big win game is set (see S2015 in FIG. 9807). This V flag 203q is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., in the event of a power outage, etc.

The V-passing flag 203r is a flag used to determine whether the V-flag 203q is set to ON during a small win game, and is set to ON when the V-flag 203q is set to ON. In the 32nd control example, most of the game balls that enter the second variable winning device (V-winning device 650) during a small win game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and the V-passing flag 203r is set to ON in the V-passing process (see S109 in FIG. 975) corresponding to the game ball that first enters the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see S1407 in FIG. 975).

In the V passing process (see S109 in FIG. 975), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203r is set to ON (S1401 in FIG. 975), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1401 in FIG. 975: Yes), the process of S1402 to S1409 in the V passing process (see S109 in FIG. 975) is skipped. As a result, even if the specified area (V switch 650e3) detects multiple game balls during one small win game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first game ball detected is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process executed during the small win game, and it is possible to prevent the V passing command from being sent multiple times to the voice lamp control device 113, which causes the V passing management on the voice lamp control device 113 side to become complicated.

The small win counter 203s is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win has been won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and is referenced when determining whether or not the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times a small win has been won, has been established. When it is determined in the big win control process (S1804 in FIG. 979) that it is the end timing of the ending period (end timing of the big win game) (S1913 in FIG. 979: Yes), this small win counter 203s is set to a value specified in the time-saving granting table 202e (S1915 in FIG. 979).

Then, in the small win time-saving update process (see S615 in FIG. 969) executed in the time-saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 968) of the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 964), if it is determined that a small win has been won (S701: Yes in FIG. 969), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203s after the decrement is 0 (S703: Yes in FIG. 969), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S704 in FIG. 969). In addition, in the 32nd control example, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is met (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes is met), the value of the small win counter 203s is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 968). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition that references the value of the small win counter 203s is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win counter 203s is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win counter 203s continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The special symbol 2 counter 203t is a counter for measuring the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, and is referenced when determining whether or not the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times the second special symbol changes, is established. When it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 979) that it is the end timing of the ending period (end timing of the jackpot game) (S1913 in FIG. 979: Yes), the special symbol 2 counter 203t is set to a value specified in the time-saving granting table 202e (S1915 in FIG. 979).

Then, in the time-saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 968) of the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 964), if it is determined that the type of the special symbol change executed this time is the second special symbol change (S608 in FIG. 968: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t after the decrement is 0 (S611 in FIG. 968: Yes), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S612 in FIG. 968). In addition, the 32nd control example sets multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is met (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes is met), the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 968). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition that references the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for playing the game, counters, flags, etc.

Returning to FIG. 950, we will continue the explanation. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, the selection button 600, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.).

The frame button 22 connected to the sound lamp control device 113 has a performance button 22a, and the sound lamp control device 113 monitors input from the performance button 22a, and when the player operates the performance button 22a, it instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third pattern display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 according to the command sent from this sound lamp control device 113.

When the effect button 22a is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effect (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the effect button 22a, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the effect button 22a.

Furthermore, the selection button 600 connected to the voice lamp control device 113 has a middle button 600a, an up button 600b, a right button 600c, a down button 600d, and a left button 600e, as shown in FIG. 931, and the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from each button included in the selection button 600, and executes processing to change the gaming environment according to the input content, and instructs the display control device 114 on the display content for changing the gaming environment and the display content for showing the changed gaming environment.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, we will explain the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 32nd control example. As shown in FIG. 959(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a defeat number selection table 222b, a defeat performance mode selection table 222c, an additional reduction value selection table 222d, a performance stage data table 222e, and a game environment data table 222f.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

The defeat number selection table 222b is a data table referenced when determining the total number of enemies in the initial stage of the defeat performance executed during a jackpot game, and is referenced during the opening period of the jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in normal mode (see S3803 in Figure 989).

Here, the contents stipulated in the defeat number selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 960(a). FIG. 960(a) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents stipulated in the defeat number selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 960(a), the defeat number selection table 222b stipulates different defeat numbers corresponding to the jackpot type set in the jackpot game to be executed and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, jackpot C" corresponding to the time-saving jackpot, the defeat number "1000" is stipulated for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0-44", the defeat number "777" is stipulated for the range of "45-89", and the defeat number "500" is stipulated for the range of "90-99". Also, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B" corresponding to the normal jackpot, the defeat number "1000" is stipulated for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0-79", and the defeat number "500" is stipulated for the range of "80-99".

In other words, the determination ratio for each defeat number is stipulated so that it is more likely that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the big win game when the defeat number (total number of enemies) displayed when the defeat performance begins is "1000" than when it is "500". By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict the game state that will be set after the end of the big win game when the defeat performance begins.

In addition, since the contents of the defeat number selection table 222b are stipulated so that the defeat number "777" can be determined only when the jackpot type corresponding to the time-saving jackpot is set, when the performance mode of defeating "777" enemies is determined as the defeat performance, the player can be notified that the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends without waiting for the defeat performance to end. In this way, when a performance (defeat performance) is executed to notify the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends before the jackpot game ends, the timing to notify the player that the time-saving state (game state that is advantageous to the player) will be set after the jackpot game ends can be configured to arrive at various times, so that the player will always pay attention to the defeat performance executed during the jackpot game, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The subjugation performance mode selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced when determining the performance scenario in the subjugation performance, and is referenced during the opening period of the jackpot game (first jackpot game) that is executed when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in normal mode (see S3803 in FIG. 989).

Here, the contents defined in the defeat performance mode selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 960(b). FIG. 960(b) is a diagram that shows the contents defined in the defeat performance mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 960(b), the defeat performance mode selection table 222c defines different scenario types corresponding to the big win type, the number of defeats determined by referring to the defeat number selection table 222b, and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223f2. Each scenario type defines, as a defeat performance scenario, an upper limit value for the number of enemies (number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in each of the five attack performances executed during the defeat performance, and a minimum value for the number of remaining enemies that can be displayed as the performance result of the defeat performance.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, jackpot C" corresponding to the time-saving jackpot, the number of defeats is "1000", and the obtained second performance counter 223f2 value is in the range of "0 to 49", "scenario type 1" is specified as the defeat performance scenario, when it is in the range of "50 to 79", "scenario type 2" is specified as the defeat performance scenario, and when it is in the range of "80 to 99", "scenario type 3" is specified as the defeat performance scenario. Also, when the number of defeats is "777", "scenario type 4" is specified as the defeat performance scenario for the entire range of the obtained second performance counter 223f2 value of "0 to 99". And when the number of defeats is "500" and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the defeat performance scenario is specified as "scenario type 5", when it is in the range of "50 to 79", the defeat performance scenario is specified as "scenario type 6", and when it is in the range of "80 to 99", the defeat performance scenario is specified as "scenario type 7".

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B" corresponding to a normal jackpot, the number of kills is "1000", and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 59", "scenario type 8" is specified as the defeat performance scenario, when it is in the range of "60 to 89", "scenario type 9" is specified as the defeat performance scenario, and when it is in the range of "90 to 99", "scenario type 10" is specified as the defeat performance scenario. And when the number of kills is "500", the acquired value of the second performance counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 59", "scenario type 11" is specified as the defeat performance scenario, when it is in the range of "60 to 79", "scenario type 12" is specified as the defeat performance scenario, and when it is in the range of "80 to 99", "scenario type 13" is specified as the defeat performance scenario.

As described above with reference to Figs. 934 to 937, when a defeat effect is executed, five attack effects are executed, and in each attack effect, an effect for reducing the number of enemies is executed by the player pressing the effect button 22a. Also, in each attack effect, if the player does not press the effect button 22a, an additional attack effect for reducing the number of enemies can be executed during the interval period set after the end of the attack effect (after the end of the round of play).

In this 32nd control example, the upper limit of the number of enemies (number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in each attack performance executed during the subjugation performance is configured to be determined in advance based on the subjugation performance scenario, so that a subjugation performance in which the reduction in the number of enemies is biased is executed, which prevents a reduction in the presentation effect.

In addition, instead of managing the number of remaining enemies displayed after the end of each attack performance as a scenario, the system only manages the minimum number of remaining enemies that can be displayed after the end of each attack performance, allowing for a range in the number of remaining enemies that are actually displayed. This allows for the defeat performance to be performed in more performance patterns than the number of predefined scenario types, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the presentation mode for reducing the number of enemies is configured to differ depending on whether or not the player presses the presentation button 22a during the attack presentation, and the number of enemies displayed as the number of remaining enemies after the attack is configured to differ depending on the presentation mode executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of choosing whether or not to press the presentation button 22a during the attack presentation.

The additional reduction value selection table 222d is a data table that is referenced when an additional attack effect is executed during an interval without the player pressing the effect button 22a in each attack effect in the subjugation effect, and is referenced in the first interval effect processing (see S3809 in FIG. 992). The number of enemies to be reduced in the additional attack effect is determined by referring to this additional reduction value selection table 222d.

Here, the contents defined in the additional reduction value selection table 222d will be explained with reference to FIG. 961. FIG. 961 is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents defined in the additional reduction value selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 961, the additional reduction value selection table 222d defines the number of enemies (additional reduction value) to be reduced in the additional attack performance in correspondence with the scenario type determined with reference to the defeat performance mode selection table 222c, the difference between the current number of remaining enemies (value of the remaining number of enemies to be defeated counter 223j) and the number of enemies defined in the defeat performance scenario, the presence or absence of a specific number (unique specific number, common specific number) within the range of that difference, and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1.

Specifically, when the scenario type is "Scenario type 1, 8", the difference number is "401 or more", and the specific number is "present", the additional decrement value is specified as "Decrease to specific number" for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99", and when the specific number is "not present", the additional decrement value is specified as "Decrease to determined value" for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99". Also, when the difference number is "101 to 400" and the specific number is "present", the additional decrement value is specified as "Decrease to specific number" for the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 49", and the additional decrement value is specified as "Current state - 50" for the range "50 to 99". On the other hand, if the specific number is "none," then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 49," the additional decrement value is specified as "current state - 50," and for the range "50 to 99," the additional decrement value is specified as "decrement to determined value."

If the difference number is "100 or less" and the specific number is "present," then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 29," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a specific number," and for the range "30 to 99," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value." On the other hand, if the specific number is "absent," then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 29," the additional decrement value is specified as "determined value + 10," and for the range "30 to 99," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value."

If the scenario type is "Scenario type 2, 3, 9, 10", the difference number is "51 or more", and the specific number is "Yes", then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 49", the additional decrement value is specified as "Decrease to specific number", and for the range "50 to 99", the additional decrement value is specified as "Current status - 20". On the other hand, if the specific number is "No", then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 49", the additional decrement value is specified as "Current status - 20", and for the range "50 to 99", the additional decrement value is specified as "Decrease to determined value".

If the difference number is "50 or less" and the specific number is "present," then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 29," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a specific number," and for the range "30 to 99," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value." On the other hand, if the specific number is "absent," then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 29," the additional decrement value is specified as "determined value + 10," and for the range "30 to 99," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value."

If the scenario type is "Scenario type 5, 11, 12", the difference number is "21 or more", and the specific number is "Yes", then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 49", the additional decrement value is specified as "Decrease to specific number", and for the range "50 to 99", the additional decrement value is specified as "Current value - 5". On the other hand, if the specific number is "No", then for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range "0 to 49", the additional decrement value is specified as "Current value - 5", and for the range "50 to 99", the additional decrement value is specified as "Decrease to determined value".

If the difference number is "20 or less" and the specific number is "present," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value" for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99," and if the specific number is "absent," the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value" for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99."

When the scenario type is "Scenario type 6, 7, 13", if the specific number is "present", regardless of the difference number, the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a specific number" for the entire range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0 to 99", and when the specific number is "absent", the additional decrement value is specified as "no decrement" for the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0 to 19", and the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value" for the range "20 to 99". Finally, when the scenario type is "Scenario type 4", regardless of the difference number and the presence or absence of a specific number, the additional decrement value is specified as "decreased to a determined value" for the entire range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0 to 99".

The performance stage data table 222e is a data table in which information about performance stages that can be set as background types is predefined, and transition conditions for each stage type (rabbit stage, hero stage) are defined according to the mode type (normal mode, active mode, fixed mode) determined as the game environment. In this 32nd control example, it is configured to determine whether the transition condition for the stage type is met based on the game progress status and the set mode type, and to execute the stage change.

The contents stipulated in the production stage data table 222e will now be described with reference to FIG. 962(a). FIG. 962(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of the contents stipulated in the production stage data table 222e. As shown in FIG. 962(a), the production stage data table 222e stipulates the transition conditions for stage types in correspondence with the mode type and stage type, and roughly speaking, the transition conditions for the stage type are most likely to be met when the active mode is set, the transition conditions are less likely to be met when the normal mode is set than when the active mode is set, and the transition conditions are not met when the fixed mode is set.

Specifically, for the mode type "normal" and the stage type "rabbit", the transition conditions for the stage type are "50 special chart changes" or "part of the start of the jackpot change (low probability)", and for the stage type "hero", the transition conditions for the stage type are "50 special chart changes" or "part of the start of the jackpot change (low probability)". Also, for the mode type "active" and the stage type "rabbit", the transition conditions for the stage type are "20 special chart changes" or "part of the start of the jackpot change (high probability)", and "5 seconds after the start of the special chart change when the special chart transition condition is met", and for the stage type "hero", the transition conditions for the stage type are "20 special chart changes" or "part of the start of the jackpot change (high probability)". And for the mode type "fixed", no transition conditions are specified regardless of the stage type.

Here, each transition condition will be explained. "50 special symbol changes" is a transition condition (special symbol change transition condition) that is met when the number of times that special symbol changes have been executed since the stage type was set reaches 50. In other words, when the normal mode is set, a stage change performance to change the stage type is executed every time the special symbol changes are executed 50 times. In this 32nd control example, a fixed number is predefined for the set mode type as the special symbol change transition condition, but this is not limited to this. A means for determining a predetermined range of special symbol change times (for example, 10 times to 50 times) by lottery may be provided, and the special symbol change times determined by this means may be set as the special symbol change transition condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the stage change performance will be executed.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special chart changes, which is determined by lottery, to differ depending on the mode type that is set, and to configure the lottery to be performed using different data tables depending on the mode type that is set so that a greater number of times the special chart changes are more likely to be determined by lottery for a mode type in which the transition condition is less likely to be met (e.g., "normal mode") than for a mode type in which the transition condition is more likely to be met (e.g., "active mode"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the stage change performance to be executed at intervals that correspond to the mode type (frequency of execution of the stage change performance) that the player has set arbitrarily.

The "part of the start of the jackpot fluctuation", which is one of the transition conditions, is a transition condition (win fluctuation transition condition) that is established when a stage change effect is determined as the effect of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation that wins the jackpot in the fluctuation effect setting process (see S4304 in FIG. 995) for setting the fluctuation display of the third symbol that is set based on the start of the special symbol fluctuation. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this 32nd control example, the processing of S4404 in FIG. 995 is configured so that the effect of the stage change effect is determined based on the set mode type, the lottery result (jackpot winning), and the fluctuation pattern, and the mode type in which the transition condition is less likely to be established (for example, "normal mode") is configured so that the effect of the stage change effect is more difficult to determine than the mode type in which the transition condition is more likely to be established (for example, "active mode").

By configuring it in this way, even if the special symbol change transition condition is not met, the stage change effect can be executed when the win change transition condition is met, so the stage change effect can be executed at a timing that is unexpected for the player, for example, when two special symbol changes are executed in succession. Furthermore, since the win change transition condition is configured to be met only when a jackpot is won, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be increased when the stage change effect is executed at an unexpected timing.

In this 32nd control example, a predetermined number of times is set as the special chart change transition condition, so that the player can easily understand the interval at which the stage change effect is executed based on the special chart change transition condition, and can easily understand the stage change effect executed based on the establishment of the win change transition condition. Therefore, a player who wants to know when he or she has won the jackpot can play with enthusiasm in an attempt to understand the interval at which the special chart change transition condition is established.

Furthermore, one of the transition conditions, "5 seconds after the start of the special pattern change when the special pattern transition condition is met", is a transition condition (special pattern transition condition) that is met when a presentation mode that executes a stage change presentation during the special pattern change is determined as the presentation mode of the third pattern change presentation in the change presentation setting process (see S4304 in FIG. 995) for setting the change display of the third pattern that is set based on the start of the special pattern change.

In this 32nd control example, the above-mentioned three transition conditions are specified as the conditions for executing the stage change performance, but other transition conditions may be set, and the stage change performance may be executed by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22, selection button 600) while the special pattern change is being executed.

As described above, in this 32nd control example, even for the same mode type, different transition conditions are defined depending on the stage type that is set, and specifically, the transition conditions are configured to be more easily met in the "rabbit stage" than in the "hero stage." This configuration can improve the fun of predicting which transition condition will be met when a stage change performance is executed based on the stage type that is set.

The gaming environment data table 222f is a data table in which the contents of each gaming environment are predefined. When a gaming environment is selected by a player, data corresponding to the selected gaming environment is read out and stored in the gaming environment storage area 223u.

Furthermore, when the fixed mode is set, the stage change effect is executed only in some cases when the first special pattern change is initiated after the end of a jackpot game while a reserved streak is confirmed. In other words, if the stage change effect is executed even when the fixed mode is set, the player will be notified that he or she has won a jackpot. Therefore, even for players who have selected the fixed mode, i.e., players who do not wish for the stage change effect to be executed, the stage change effect can be executed on the condition that the player is granted the privilege of winning a jackpot, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance and reducing the discomfort caused by the execution of the stage change effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 959 (b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 959(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a variable start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f (first performance counter 223f1, second performance counter 223f2), a secondary game state storage area 223g, a time-saving information update area 223h, a defeat count counter 223i, a remaining defeat count counter 223j, a specific number displayed flag 223k, a rush period measurement counter 223m, a winning ball number counter 223n, a reserved consecutive flag 223o, a round number counter 223p, a SW effective time counter 223q, a right hit flag 223r, a V winning flag 223s, a performance fixed flag 223t, a game environment storage area 223u, and other memory areas 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special pattern (first area for special pattern 1 to fourth area for special pattern 1), and one area corresponding to the second special pattern (first area for special pattern 2), and each of these areas stores the winning information output from the main control unit 110. The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (winning information) allows the voice lamp control unit 113 to pre-determine (pre-read) the lottery results based on the winning information before the special pattern lottery is executed. When the command determination process (see S3113 in FIG. 983) of the voice lamp control unit 113 determines that a winning information command has been received (S3209 in FIG. 983: Yes), the winning information storage area 223a stores the winning information based on the winning information command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110 in order from the first area corresponding to the special pattern type included in the winning information. The winning information command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110 is set when the main control unit 110's pre-reading process (see S807 in FIG. 971) is executed, and is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113 by the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 978) executed in the main process (see FIG. 978) of the main control unit 110.

Each piece of winning information stored in each area of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted one by one (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) each time the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 994) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to reliably know when the special pattern variation corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

In addition, since the winning information (special symbol pre-reading information) sent by the winning information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the special symbol change currently being executed), for example, when executing an effect (so-called pre-reading continuous effect) that uses the period from the start of the next special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command based on the reception of the winning information command, the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-mentioned pre-reading continuous effect ends.

In the 32nd control example, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have the first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area, since it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information related to the first special pattern (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64). However, if it is also configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information (winning information related to the second special pattern) that can be obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, for example, the winning information storage area 223a can be configured to have four areas (holding information areas) for the first special pattern and four areas (holding information areas) for the second special pattern in addition to the execution area.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved memories of the right to execute the special pattern variation performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81). In other words, the number of reserved special patterns 1 corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern using the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved memories (special pattern 1 reserved number) for the right to execute the first special pattern lottery is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), or when the first special pattern lottery is executed in the main control unit 110 and the special pattern 1 reserved number is decreased, a reserved ball number command (special pattern 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command (special pattern 1 reserved ball count command) sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command (special pattern 1 reserved ball count command) and stores it in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b (see S3301 in FIG. 984). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is used to determine the reserved pattern (display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved number of special pattern 1 indicated by the command in the reserved ball count counter 223b for special pattern 1, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of images so that the reserved numbers of special pattern 1 indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The information contained in the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110 may be information indicating the actual number of reserved balls, i.e., the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, or information indicating that the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d has been incremented or decremented by 1. When sending information indicating that the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball count command, a calculation means may be provided that calculates and manages the current reserved ball count based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command received by the voice lamp control device 113.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b described above in that the object of counting has been changed to the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) included in the reserved ball count command, but is otherwise the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted. In this 32nd control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved special patterns 2 is set to 1, so the upper limit of the value measured by the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c is also 1.

The value measured by this special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223c is used to determine the reserved pattern (display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved number of special pattern 2 indicated by the command in the reserved ball count counter 223c for special pattern 2, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223c after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of images so that the reserved numbers of special pattern 2 indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, during the final variation period of the second special pattern in the time-saving state, a charge effect (see FIG. 941(a)) is executed to encourage the player to enter the second ball entrance 640, and while this charge effect is being executed, a display mode ("charge complete") is displayed to indicate that no new special 2 reserved balls can be acquired based on the reception of a reserved ball count command indicating the upper limit of the number of reserved special 2 balls. In other words, based on the reception of a reserved ball count command, not only is the number of reserved special 2 balls that have already been acquired displayed, but the performance mode of the currently executing performance is switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the performance mode depending on various conditions, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 983), and is set to OFF when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S4302 in FIG. 994). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned ON, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed in the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3205 in FIG. 983), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4307 in FIG. 994). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (see S4309 in FIG. 994).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used in a lottery to determine the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and although not shown, is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. In the 32nd control example, the effect counter 223f has multiple loop counters (e.g., counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99) (first effect counter 223f1, second effect counter 223f2, etc.), and is configured so that the values of each effect counter are updated without synchronization.

Specifically, for example, multiple counters are provided with different values that are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 982) is executed, and the updated values of each counter are configured not to be synchronized. Furthermore, a different value may be calculated by computing the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as the value to be used in the lottery when determining the performance content of various performances. By configuring in this way, when the performance modes of multiple performances executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are determined at the same time (within one main process), it is possible to prevent the performance modes of the multiple performances determined at the same time from being synchronized, preventing the performances from being executed in a variety of combinations.

The secondary game state storage area 223g is an area for storing the game state corresponding to a state command when the state command regarding the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in this secondary game state storage area 223g, the current game state can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In the 32nd control example, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 erases data when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and therefore, when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the information indicating the current game state stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g is also erased. However, in the 32nd control example, the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 977) of the main control device 110 executed after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see S1712 in FIG. 977), so that, immediately after the power supply is restored, the information indicating the game state set before the power supply was cut off is stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set (see S1917 in FIG. 979, etc.).

The time-saving information update area 223h is a data area for storing multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state and the progress status for each time-saving end condition (the number of times the game element subject to the time-saving end condition (for example, the special pattern change, small win, or big win) has been executed). The display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is selected based on the information (time-saving end condition and progress status) stored in this time-saving information update area 223h. When this time-saving information update area 223h receives a time-saving setting information command including information on the content of the time-saving state set by the main control device 110, that is, a time-saving setting information command that is determined to be the end timing of the ending period (S1913: Yes in FIG. 979) in the big win control process (S1804 in FIG. 979) of the main control device 110 and is set when the time-saving end condition is set (S1916 in FIG. 979), the time-saving end condition for ending the current time-saving state is set (see S3412 in FIG. 985).

Then, in the time-saving update process of the main control device 110 (see S224 in FIG. 968), a remaining time-saving count command is set to indicate update information for updating the time-saving information (variation information indicating that a special pattern variation has been performed, or small win information indicating that a small win has been won), and when it is determined that the remaining time-saving count command has been received, various information contained in the time-saving information update area 223h is updated to correspond to the update information contained in the received remaining time-saving count command. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp not only whether the current game state is in a time-saving state, but also, when a time-saving state is set, the remaining status until the remaining time-saving end condition is met for each time-saving end condition.

To explain the data area within this time-saving information update area 223h in more detail, the time-saving information update area 223h is configured to temporarily store information corresponding to each item that can be a condition for ending the time-saving state (for example, the number of times the first special pattern changes, the number of times the second special pattern changes, the combined number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes, and the number of times the small win has been won (the number of times the V winning device 600 has started to operate)), and is configured to store, for each item, time-saving setting information (the number of times the condition for ending the time-saving state is met) and update information for each item during the period in which the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it has actually been executed).

In this 32nd control example, the main presentation mode during the time-saving state is determined based on the update information stored in this time-saving information update area 223h, which is related to the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the second special symbol changes. In this 32nd control example, the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times during the time-saving state, or when the result of the executed special symbol lottery is a winning combination. Here, when the time-saving state ends based on a winning combination, a bonus is given to the player by executing a winning game, and the time-saving state is easily set again after the big win game ends. On the other hand, when the time-saving state ends based on the special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times, the normal state is set without giving a bonus to the player.

Therefore, players playing during the time-saving state would like to be provided with information on the remaining period until the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed is established, rather than the time-saving end condition that is established based on winning a prize. Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, as the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed, there is a combined time-saving end condition that is established based on the combined number of times the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change, and a special pattern 2 change time-saving end condition that is established based only on the second special pattern change. And, when a proper play (right-hand play) is performed during the time-saving state, the special pattern 2 change time-saving end condition is configured to be established more easily than the combined time-saving end condition.

In other words, if the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state does not result in a winning combination, the special symbol 2 variation time-saving end condition is most likely to be met. Therefore, while the time-saving state is set, a performance (countdown performance) is executed to indicate the remaining time until the time-saving state ends without a winning combination based on update information (information about the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t updated by the main control device 110) regarding the special symbol 2 variation time-saving end condition, thereby making it possible to clearly notify the player of the exact remaining time until the time-saving state ends (the remaining number of times the second special symbol variation can be executed during the time-saving state).

As described above, in the 32nd control example, when a proper play (right-hand play) is performed during the time-saving state, a presentation is executed to allow the player to understand the remaining time until the most likely time-saving end condition (special chart 2 variable time-saving end condition) is met. However, without being limited to this, for example, if a situation occurs in which another time-saving end condition is more likely to be met due to the game content performed during the time-saving state, the type of time-saving end condition used in the presentation to indicate the remaining time until the time-saving state ends may be switched, or a presentation may be executed that can notify the player of the remaining time until each time-saving end condition is met for each of the multiple time-saving end conditions.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, as a countdown effect showing the remaining period until the time-saving end condition (special pattern 2 change time-saving end condition) is established, a performance is configured to be executed that shows the remaining number of second special pattern changes that can be executed during the time-saving state in a numerical value, but without being limited to this, for example, the remaining number of second special pattern changes that can be executed during the time-saving state may be configured to be in a form other than a numerical value (for example, an animation that changes the form each time the remaining number of second special pattern changes that can be executed during the time-saving state is subtracted), that is, the number of second special pattern lotteries that can be executed before the time-saving state ends may be notified to the player in an abstract manner rather than specifically. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to set a time-saving state in which the number of second special pattern changes required until the special pattern 2 change time-saving end condition is established is different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of special pattern 2 changes that can be executed before the time-saving state ends.

Furthermore, by using the time-saving setting information and update information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time-saving setting information may be calculated, and the degree of time-saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

In the 32nd control example, the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times already performed (number of variations, number of wins)), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to calculate the number of times remaining until the end condition of the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) is met, and store information indicating the calculated remaining number of times in the time-saving information update area 223h.

The defeat count counter 223i is a counter for managing the number of attack effects (defeat count) set as the defeat effect executed during a jackpot game, and is set to a value of "5" in the defeat effect mode determination process (see S3803 in FIG. 990) for determining the performance mode of the defeat effect (S3907 in FIG. 990). Then, the counter value is decremented (S4009 in FIG. 991) in the first jackpot round performance process (see S3807 in FIG. 991) executed when a new round of play begins in a jackpot game in which a defeat effect is executed.

The value of this defeat count counter 223i is referenced when determining the display mode (the number of button icons displayed in the display area Dm7) for indicating the number of attack effects executed during the defeat effect. It is also referenced when determining the presentation mode of the attack effects executed in each round of play based on the defeat effect scenario that has been set.

In the 32nd control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, six rounds of jackpot play are always executed, and a subjugation effect is executed during the jackpot play. The content of the subjugation effect to be executed this time (number of remaining enemies, number of attack effects, etc.) is announced during the round play period of the first round, and an attack effect is executed during each round play period of the second to sixth rounds. In other words, when a subjugation effect is executed, a fixed number of attack effects (five times) are always executed. Therefore, the subjugation count counter 223i is configured to be set to a value of "5" as an initial value, but this is not limited to this, and the number of attack effects may be configured to be different depending on the content of the subjugation effect to be executed.

For example, a jackpot game with a different number of rounds may be configured to be executable as a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the number of attack effects executed during the subjugation effect may be configured to vary depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed. In this case, at least a standard jackpot game in which the number of rounds is a standard number (e.g., 6 rounds) and a special jackpot game in which the number of rounds is greater than that of the standard jackpot game (e.g., 8 rounds) may be configured to be executable as types of jackpot games, and the number of attack effects executed during the subjugation effect may be increased when a special jackpot game is executed compared to when a standard jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that it is easier to set the time-saving state after the end of a specific jackpot game (8-round jackpot game) than to set a standard jackpot game (6-round jackpot game). Specifically, the system is configured so that a first jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game and a second jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game can be set as jackpot types corresponding to a standard jackpot game, and a third jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game and a fourth jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game can be set as jackpot types corresponding to a specific jackpot game.

Then, it is preferable to configure the selection rate of the fourth jackpot type when a jackpot that results in a specific jackpot game is won to be higher than the selection rate of the second jackpot type when a jackpot that results in a standard jackpot game is won.

By configuring it this way, the more attack effects are executed during the subjugation performance, the easier it becomes to display a performance result that is advantageous to the player (a performance result in which the subjugation is successful) as the result of the subjugation performance, so that the player can play the game while expecting many attack effects to be executed during the subjugation performance.

In addition, the more rounds of jackpot play there are, the easier it is to increase the number of times the attack effect is executed, so when a large number of prize balls can be won during a jackpot play, it is easier to display an effect result that is advantageous to the player (an effect that results in a successful defeat), so multiple benefits can be offered to the player at once, increasing the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the number of attack effects to be executed during the subjugation performance is determined in accordance with the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game, but without being limited to this, the number of rounds executed may be set as the maximum number, and the number of attack effects to be executed during the subjugation performance may be determined by lottery.

In this case, regardless of the number of rounds set for the jackpot game, it is preferable to configure the game so that a greater number of attack effects are more likely to be determined when a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game than when a normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring the game in this way, when a subjugation effect is executed during a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the game state to be executed after the end of the jackpot game while grasping the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed and the number of attack effects to be executed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when a jackpot game in which a subjugation effect is executed is executed, an initial display mode is displayed during the play period of the first round game executed (first round round game) to inform the player of the content of the subjugation effect to be executed this time, and multiple attack effects are executed using the play period of the remaining round games. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a round game other than the first round game executed (first round round game) can be set as the round game in which the initial display mode of the subjugation effect is displayed.

Specifically, a management means for managing the number of rounds of the currently executed jackpot game and a management means for managing the number of attack effects executed during the currently executed defeat effect should be provided, and a means for determining the number of rounds for which the initial display mode of the defeat effect is displayed should be provided within a range that can secure the number of rounds for the number of attack effects executed currently. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the likelihood that more attack effects will be executed if the defeat effect starts shortly after the start of the jackpot game (if the initial display mode of the defeat effect is displayed), which can make the player interested in the timing of the execution of the defeat effect and improve the effect of the performance.

In the above described example, an example was given in which the more attack effects are executed during the subjugation effect, the easier it is to display a subjugation effect that is advantageous to the player (a successful subjugation effect) as the subjugation effect result, as a configuration capable of suggesting the result of the subjugation effect according to the number of attack effects executed during the subjugation effect. However, without being limited to this, the fewer the number of attack effects executed during the subjugation effect, or the more attack effects are executed a specific number of times (e.g., three times), the easier it is to display a subjugation effect that is advantageous to the player (a successful subjugation effect) as the subjugation effect result. Also, the configuration may be such that it is easier to set a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game when a small number of rounds is set in the jackpot game in which the subjugation effect is executed than when a large number of rounds is set.

The remaining number of enemies to be defeated counter 223j is a counter for measuring the number of enemies subtracted by the attack effects executed in the defeat effect. When the defeat effect is executed, a value corresponding to the total number of enemies is set as the initial value, and thereafter, each time an attack effect is executed, the counter is subtracted to a value corresponding to the performance result of the executed attack effect.

Specifically, when it is determined that an opening command for a jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed in a normal state has been received (S3801: Yes in FIG. 989), a value corresponding to the determined total number of enemies is set (S3902 in FIG. 990) in the defeat presentation mode determination process executed (see S3803 in FIG. 990), and when it is determined that an interval command indicating the interval period to be set after the end of a round game has been received (S3808: Yes in FIG. 989), in the first interval presentation process executed (S3809 in FIG. 992), this is referenced when determining whether the contents of the defeat presentation scenario match the value of the remaining defeat number counter 223j (S4102).

Here, in this 32nd control example, the presentation mode of the defeat presentation is managed as a scenario. Specifically, when deciding the presentation mode of the defeat presentation, a defeat presentation scenario is determined that specifies the total number of enemies to be defeated in the current defeat presentation, the number of attack presentations to be performed, and the number of enemies that can be reduced in each attack presentation (number of remaining defeats), and one defeat presentation scenario can be decided from among multiple defeat presentation scenarios that differ in the specified contents.

The SW effective time is set as a period during which the operation of the effect button 22a by the player can be effectively determined during the attack effect period (round play period), and if the player operates the effect button 22a during that SW effective time, an effect that reduces the number of enemies is executed based on the contents stipulated in the determined defeat effect scenario. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 22a during the SW effective time, an effect that reduces the number of enemies is not executed during the round play period.

In other words, the number of enemies displayed at the end of the round play period differs depending on whether or not the effect button 22a is operated during the round play. Here, in this 32nd control example, the number of enemies reduced by the attack effect is managed by the value of the remaining number to be defeated counter 223j, and it is determined whether the value of the remaining number to be defeated counter 223j at the time when the round play period ends and the interval period is set matches the content of the determined defeat effect scenario (S4102 in FIG. 992), and if it is determined that they do not match (S4102 in FIG. 992: No), an effect that reduces the number of enemies using the interval period (additional attack effect) is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily determine the degree of reduction in the number of enemies in accordance with the determined defeat performance scenario, regardless of whether or not the player operates the performance button 22a. Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, in addition to the basic performance mode in which the number of displayed enemies is reduced to the number of enemies specified in the defeat performance scenario, as the performance mode of the additional attack performance, it is configured to be possible to determine a special performance mode in which the number of enemies is reduced to a specific number in order to notify the player that the performance result of this defeat performance is advantageous to the player.

Specifically, in some cases where the number of enemies specified in the defeat performance scenario (e.g., 99) differs from the number of enemies actually displayed (e.g., 385), and a specific number (e.g., 333) is set within the range of the difference (99 to 385), a special performance mode that reduces the number of enemies to a specific number (e.g., 333) can be set as the performance mode of the additional attack performance. In other words, if the performance button 22a is operated during the round play period in which the attack performance is executed, and the number of enemies is not reduced to the number of enemies specified in the defeat performance scenario (e.g., 99), an additional attack performance using the special performance mode is executed, so that the player can be notified of the performance result of this defeat performance as soon as possible.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the result of the defeat performance can be understood can be varied depending on whether or not the performance button 22a is operated (pressed) during the attack performance executed as the defeat performance, providing the player with the fun of deciding whether or not to operate the performance button 22a.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, if the player does not operate the effect button 22a, it is possible to determine an effect mode (special effect mode) that allows the player to grasp the effect result of the defeat effect at an earlier timing than if the player operates the effect button 22a. In other words, if the operation method that should be selected in the defeat effect is not selected when the objective is to reduce the number of enemies to zero, a specific number (e.g., 333 enemies) that allows the player to grasp the effect result of the defeat effect before the number of enemies is reduced to zero is displayed. Therefore, the operation method for the effect button 22a can be selected according to the effect content that the player is aiming for, making it difficult for the operation method selected by the player to be biased.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the timing of notifying that the performance result of the ongoing defeat performance is advantageous to the player can be changed depending on the selection method selected by the player. And, when another operation method (not pressing the performance button 22a) that can notify earlier than the operation using one operation method (pressing the performance button 22a) is used as the timing of notifying that the performance result of the ongoing defeat performance is advantageous to the player, an additional attack performance in which the number of remaining enemies becomes a specific number (for example, 333) is executed as a performance mode to indicate that the performance result of the ongoing defeat performance is advantageous to the player only when the notification conditions are met based on not only the operation method but also the number of enemies displayed and the number of enemies specified in the defeat performance scenario.

In other words, if an operation that does not press the effect button 22a is performed when the notification condition cannot be met, an additional attack effect that would result in a specific number of remaining enemies (e.g., 333) will not be performed, and an additional attack effect that would result in a number of remaining enemies greater than the number of enemies specified in the defeat effect scenario may be performed. In this way, if an operation method that can quickly notify the player that the performance result of the defeat effect being performed is an advantageous performance result for the player is performed, there is a possibility that the player will not be notified that the performance result of the defeat effect being performed is an advantageous performance result for the player, allowing the player to have more fun deciding which operation method to select.

In this 32nd control example, regardless of which operation method is used to operate the effect button 22a, the content of the bonus given to the player (a bonus that notifies the player in advance that a game state (time-saving state) favorable to the player will be set after the end of the jackpot game) is the same, and only the timing of the bonus is different. However, without being limited to this, when one operation method is selected, in addition to the bonus described above, a different first bonus (for example, a bonus that notifies the player in advance whether there is a special reserve that will be won among the special reserves that have already been acquired) can be given, and when another operation method different from the first operation method is selected, in addition to the bonus described above, a second bonus different from the first bonus (for example, a bonus that notifies the player in advance of the number of remaining rounds to be played during the jackpot game) can be given.

By configuring in this way, different bonuses can be given to the player depending on the play method selected by the player, and it is therefore possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting an operation method. In addition, in the above example, an example is shown in which a second bonus (advance notification of the number of rounds played) can be given as a bonus that can be given depending on the operation method of the effect button 22a during an attack effect in a subjugation effect executed during a jackpot game. In this case, for example, as the number of rounds played during a jackpot game increases, the number of remaining rounds decreases, and therefore the merit of being given the second bonus is reduced.

This allows the player to switch the operation method selected during one defeat performance depending on the progress of the round during the jackpot game, which can enhance the performance effect for players who pay close attention to the defeat performance in the hope of receiving a more advantageous bonus.

In this 32nd control example, the player is able to select the operation method regardless of which attack effect is executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to execute an attack effect in which the player cannot select the operation method for the effect button 22a. For example, it is also possible to execute an attack effect in which the SW effective time is not set, making it impossible to select the operation method of pressing the effect button 22a, or to set an extremely short SW effective time to make it difficult to press the effect button 22a.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the player can select from two types of operation methods for the effect button 22a: pressing the effect button 22a and not pressing the effect button 22a. However, without being limited to this, the player may be able to select an operation method in which the effect button 22a is pressed multiple times (e.g., two or more times) within a predetermined period (e.g., within one second) (so-called rapid tap operation) or an operation method in which the effect button 22a is continuously pressed for a predetermined period (e.g., one second) (so-called long press operation).

In addition, when allowing the player to select from multiple operation methods in this manner, it is advisable to configure the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to display a display mode capable of informing the player of the operation methods selectable by the player and the contents of the bonus that can be awarded when each operation method is selected. By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to make it easier for the player to decide which operation method to select.

The specific number displayed flag 223k is a flag for indicating that a presentation mode showing a specific number has been displayed as the presentation mode of the defeat presentation, and is set to ON when the presentation mode showing a specific number is displayed. In this 32nd control example, when a specific condition is met, a specific number of enemies (e.g., 333) can be displayed to indicate the presentation result of the defeat presentation being performed before the presentation result of the defeat presentation is displayed, as the number of enemies to be reduced in the defeat presentation. When the specific number of enemies (e.g., 333) is displayed, the presentation result of the defeat presentation is notified by the display mode, so that a dedicated presentation (celebratory presentation) indicating that a specific number of enemies has been displayed is executed in the remaining period from when the specific number of enemies is displayed until the presentation result of the defeat presentation is displayed.

In other words, by configuring it so that it is possible to determine whether a specific number of enemies has been displayed based on the setting status of the specific number displayed flag 223k, even if an attack effect that reduces the number of enemies continues after the specific number of enemies has been displayed, it is possible to continue to execute the celebration effect based on the fact that the specific number has been displayed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, even after the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to on, the attack performance is executed based on the contents stipulated in the set defeat performance scenario. In other words, the attack performance is executed continuously regardless of whether the specific number of enemies is displayed. And, when the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to on, in addition to the attack performance, a celebration performance is executed. In other words, regardless of whether the specific number of enemies is displayed, the main performance content (the performance mode of the attack performance) in the defeat performance is common, and only when the specific number of enemies is displayed, a celebration performance is executed to indicate that the specific number of enemies is displayed using some of the display elements displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the button icon displayed in the display area Dm7 or the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the defeat effect and reduce the amount of effect data used for the defeat effect, compared to when a special effect can be executed instead of an attack effect when a specific number of enemies is displayed.

In this 32nd control example, when a defeat performance is executed, whether or not a specific number of enemies is displayed is determined according to the operation of the performance button 22a by the player in the attack performance executed during the defeat performance. Furthermore, the timing at which the specific number of enemies can be displayed is configured to differ depending on the content of the defeat performance scenario that has been set and the number of enemies that are actually displayed (number of remaining enemies).

More specifically, if the unique number determined for the current defeat performance is within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in the first attack performance executed during the second round of play, the interval period set after the end of the second round of play will be the timing when the specific number of enemies can be displayed, and if the unique number determined for the current defeat performance is within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in the third attack performance executed during the fourth round of play, the interval period set after the end of the second round of play will be the timing when the specific number of enemies can be displayed.

The unique specific number is determined each time the defeat effect is executed based on the numerical value contained in the third symbol displayed when a jackpot is won, and the unique specific number can be determined from a wide range of numbers, from a single-digit enemy number (e.g., 1 enemy) to a three-digit enemy number (e.g., 999 enemies), so the interval period during which the specific number of enemies can be displayed can be made different for each jackpot game. This configuration prevents the defeat effect from becoming monotonous, and prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

However, by making it possible to vary the timing at which the unique specific number can be displayed, and by configuring the game so that whether or not the unique specific number is displayed is determined depending on how the player operates the effect button 22a, the remaining period of the defeat effect after the unique specific number is displayed differs. If a special effect that is completely different from when the unique specific number is not displayed is executed between the time the unique specific number is displayed and the time the defeat effect ends, it is necessary to prepare special effect data according to each remaining period, which causes an increase in the capacity of the effect data.

Furthermore, even if the timing (interval period) at which the unique specific number can be displayed is specified based on the content of the presentation that is determined when the subjugation presentation is executed, whether or not the unique specific number is actually displayed depends on the operation of the presentation button 22a performed by the player. Therefore, it is not possible to set the presentation data in advance on the assumption that the unique specific number will be displayed. If a special presentation that is completely different from the case when the unique specific number is not displayed is executed between the time when the unique specific number is displayed and the time when the subjugation presentation ends, the process of setting the presentation data becomes cumbersome.

In contrast to this, in the present 32nd control example, even if the unique specific number is displayed, the attack performance is configured to continue to be executed in the same way as if the unique specific number were not displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of performance data related to the defeat performance, compared to executing a dedicated performance that is completely different from the case when the unique specific number is not displayed, between the time when the unique specific number is displayed and the time when the defeat performance ends.

In addition, even if the attack effect continues to be executed and the total number of enemies displayed falls below the specific number, a congratulatory effect is executed using a portion of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to indicate that the unique specific number has been displayed, making it easier for the player to retroactively understand that the unique specific number has been displayed.

The rush period measurement counter 223m is a counter for measuring the period during which the game state advantageous to the player continues (rush period), and the counter value is referenced when the rush period is displayed. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured so that when the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, a jackpot game is executed with a high probability, and the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, it is configured so that a short fluctuation time is easily determined as the fluctuation time of the second special pattern fluctuation executed during the time-saving state, and the period from when the small jackpot game is executed to when the game ball transitions to a state where it can win a V is also short, making it easier to increase the number of jackpot games per unit time.

The number of times jackpot games are played per unit time (number of prize balls won per unit time) is displayed together with a display format for indicating the measurement period of the rush period (see FIG. 941(a)), making it easier for the player to grasp the number of prize balls per unit time if the rush period continues. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to decide the type of game to be played during the rush period in order to increase the number of prize balls that can be won per unit time.

Specifically, when a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the value is set to "1" (see S3414 in FIG. 985). Then, in the main process (see FIG. 982) that is executed periodically (every 1 ms) in the voice lamp control device 113, when the performance update process (see S3112 in FIG. 997) is executed, the counter value is incremented (updated) by 1 (S4604 in FIG. 997). Then, a display command is set to show the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m after the increment (S4605 in FIG. 997).

The display command set in the processing of S4605 in FIG. 997, like other display commands, is output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S3102) executed every millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 982) of the voice lamp control device 113, and the presentation mode (display data, etc.) to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is determined. The time-saving state (rush period) is displayed in the presentation mode according to the determined display data.

Then, when the normal state is set as the game state and it is determined that there is no unused reserved special figure 2, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared. Specifically, when it is determined that information indicating that the normal state has been set has been received in the state command process (see S3212 in FIG. 985) (Yes in S3402 in FIG. 985), it is determined whether or not there is a reserved special figure 2 (see S3405 in FIG. 985), and when it is determined that there is no reserved special figure 2, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared (see S3406 in FIG. 985).

Here, in this 32nd control example, after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, the second special pattern lottery based on the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the time-saving state can be executed a predetermined number of times (1 time), and the period until the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed is the rush period advantageous to the player. In other words, the period during which the time-saving state advantageous to the player is set as the game state plus a part of the period during which the normal state is set is configured to be the advantageous period (rush period) during which a game advantageous to the player is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the timing when the game state changes and the timing when the advantageous period during which the game advantageous to the player is executed ends can be made different, providing the player with an element of surprise.

The prize ball counter 223n is a counter for holding at least the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period (jackpot game, time-saving state), and when prize balls are awarded during the rush period, a value corresponding to the number of awarded prize balls is added (see S3217 in FIG. 983). The counter value is referenced when determining the point display mode to be displayed in the display area Dm6 formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the rush period. When the normal state is set as the game state and it is determined that there is no unused special symbol 2 reserved, the value of the prize ball counter 223n is cleared. Specifically, when it is determined that information indicating that the normal state has been set has been received in the state command process (see S3212 in FIG. 985: Yes in S3402 in FIG. 985), the presence or absence of a special symbol 2 reserved is determined (see S3405 in FIG. 985), and when it is determined that there is no special symbol 2 reserved, the value of the prize ball counter 223n is cleared (see S3407 in FIG. 985).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accumulate only the number of winning balls acquired during the rush period (the duration including the time-saving state, the jackpot game state, and the normal state (pull-back game state) in which the reserved special chart 2 acquired during the time-saving state is consumed).

In this 32nd control example, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m for measuring the rush period is set to 1 when the time-saving state is first set, and when the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is 1 or greater, the value of the prize ball number counter 223n is incremented based on the prize ball number command received. However, without being limited to this, for example, the value of the prize ball number counter 223n may be incremented each time a jackpot game is played, and when a jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set is played, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m may be accumulated to include the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game. In this way, in a configuration capable of displaying a display mode (a duration display displayed in the display area Dm8) for indicating the duration of a specific period (rush period) and a display mode (a point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6) for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the specific period (rush period), including the number of prize balls acquired during the period prior to the specific period (the execution period of the jackpot game that triggers the setting of the specific period), the number of prize balls acquired during the specific period (rush period) can be made to appear to the player as more than the number of prize balls actually acquired during the specific period. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this case, the display mode corresponding to the number of prize balls that will actually be provided (has been provided) to the player is displayed in the display area Dm6, so there is no large error between the display mode (point display mode) displayed in the display area Dm6 and the number of prize balls actually acquired, and therefore the player does not feel uncomfortable with the point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6.

In the 32nd control example, the time elapsed since the time-saving state was first set is configured to be measurable using the rush period measurement counter 223m, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time elapsed since the start of the jackpot game may be configured to be measurable using the rush period measurement counter 223m. In this case, when a jackpot game is executed based on winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is set to 1 regardless of the type of jackpot game (jackpot type) executed, and when the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared at that point, and when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is continuously updated.

Furthermore, even during the period when the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is being updated, it is preferable to configure the system so that the elapsed time is not displayed during the period when the jackpot game is being played based on winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery that is played in the normal state (first jackpot game period). By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to prevent the elapsed time from being unnecessarily displayed when the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, i.e., when rush game is not entered.

In this way, even during the period when the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is being updated, the control of not displaying the display mode (continuation period display) indicating the elapsed period on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be used for periods other than the first big win game period described above. For example, during the rush period, during the period when the display mode indicating that a win (small win, big win) has been won is displayed, or during the period when the guidance display mode for guiding the player on how to play during a small win game is displayed, during the period when it is necessary to notify the game content (game result) using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the control of not displaying the duration display may be executed. By configuring in this way, the display area for displaying the game content (game result) to be notified to the player can be expanded, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, to achieve the same objective, instead of controlling the display mode of the duration display to be hidden, the size of the display area Dm6 in which the duration display is displayed may be reduced, or the position in which the display area Dm6 is formed may be changed, so that the display mode showing the game content (game result) to be notified to the player is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is continuously updated while the rush period is set, but this is not limited thereto. For example, during the interruption period during the rush period when the player suspends play, specifically, during the period when a demo screen is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m may not be updated, and the process of updating the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m may be resumed when play is resumed. By configuring in this way, only the period during which the player is actually playing during the rush period can be accumulated and displayed as the continuous period display, making it easier for the player to grasp the number of winning balls per unit time during the rush period.

Furthermore, during the rush period, during which the player cannot progress in the game, specifically, during the first waiting period (symbol determination period) from winning a small win until the small win game is executed, the second waiting period (opening period of the small win game) from the execution of the small win game until it becomes possible to win a V, and the third waiting period (ending period of the small win game) from winning a V until the small win game ends, the control may be configured to execute so that the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is not updated.

By configuring it in this way, the rush period measurement counter 223m can measure only the period during the rush period when the player is actively playing and when the player is actually playing, so the number of winning balls per unit time during the rush period can be provided to the player with increased accuracy.

The reserved consecutive flag 223o is a flag for indicating that a reserved consecutive effect has been executed, and is set to ON when a reserved consecutive effect is executed during a jackpot game. The reserved consecutive effect is an effect executed during a jackpot game to indicate that a special benefit advantageous to the player will be granted, and is executed as part of a part of a part that is determined to contain winning information indicating a winning prize (when it is determined that a winning special chart 2 reserve is present) by predicting whether the winning information indicating a winning prize is included among the reserved special chart 2 that has been acquired at the time the final round of the jackpot game is executed.

In other words, by executing the reserve consecutive display, the player can be notified in advance that an execution trigger (a small win) for the next jackpot game will be established during the period in which the jackpot game is being played, so the player can play with peace of mind even if the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends is short.

In the 32nd control example, when the reserved consecutive performance is executed during a jackpot game, the reserved consecutive performance is more likely to be executed in a state where there is a winning special chart 2 reserved, compared to when the reserved consecutive performance is not executed. Specifically, when the reserved consecutive flag 223o is not set to on, when it is determined that the final round of the jackpot game is to start (S3701: Yes in FIG. 988), it is determined whether there is a winning reserved (winning special chart 2 reserved) (see S3703 in FIG. 988), and when it is determined that there is a winning reserved (S3703: Yes in FIG. 988), that is, when it is determined that the right to execute the reserved consecutive performance is acquired, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive performance, and when the execution lottery is won (S3707: Yes in FIG. 988), the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to on (see S3709), and then it is determined to execute the reserved consecutive performance (see S3705 in FIG. 988).

On the other hand, if the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to ON and it is determined that the right to execute the reserved consecutive performance has been acquired (S3704 in FIG. 988: Yes), the system is configured to decide to execute the reserved consecutive performance without holding an execution lottery (see S3705 in FIG. 988).

In other words, if the reserved consecutive performance is executed, the reserved consecutive performance will always be executed after that if the right to execute the reserved consecutive performance is acquired. By configuring it in this way, players who want to execute the reserved consecutive performances continuously can be made to play right-handed during the time-saving state actively so that a jackpot game is executed when the special chart 2 reserved is acquired.

Here, in this 32nd control example, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery can be executed three times with an extremely short variable time (1 second). And, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired up to one. Furthermore, when the winning information contained in the special symbol 2 reservation acquired at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game starts is read in advance, and as a result of the read-out, it is determined that the special symbol 2 reservation contains winning information for winning (small jackpot winning, jackpot winning), it is possible to execute a reservation consecutive performance (see FIG. 944 (b)) using the final round of the jackpot game to show that the second special symbol lottery using the acquired special symbol 2 reservation will be won.

In this case, in the present 32nd control example, where the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 that can be acquired is one, the reserved consecutive performance will notify the player that a win will be won in the second special symbol lottery that is executed after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, the player will know that a small jackpot will be won one second after the end of the jackpot game. In the present 32nd control example, the normal state is set during the jackpot game, and when a special symbol indicating a small jackpot win is stopped and displayed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is met and the normal state is set, so that after the jackpot game in which the reserved consecutive performance was executed ends, the time-saving state will continue for one second. Therefore, if the normal symbol lottery is executed immediately before the end of a big win game in the normal state, time is required for the result of the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state to be displayed, and so the player predicts that it will be difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2 during the time-saving state, and there is a risk that the player will interrupt the game of firing the game ball (right-hand play) between the end of the big win game and the start of the next small win game, resulting in a decrease in game activity.

In addition, when right-hand play is performed after the big win game ends and the time-saving state is set, it takes at least a specified period (0.5 seconds) for the game ball launched by right-hand play to pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, even if a normal symbol lottery is performed during the time-saving state immediately after passing through the through gate 67, the normal state is set by the time the normal symbol win game is performed, making it difficult to obtain a new special symbol 2 reservation. As a result, there is a risk that the player will interrupt the game of launching the game ball (right-hand play) between the end of the big win game and the start of the next small win game, which will result in a decrease in game activity.

In contrast to this, as described above, in the present 32nd control example, after the execution of the reserved consecutive performance, if the right to execute the reserved consecutive performance is acquired, the reserved consecutive performance is always executed. By configuring it in this way, a player who wants to continue executing the reserved consecutive performance can be motivated to play from the right in an attempt to get the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the short time-saving state, and therefore a decrease in game operation can be suppressed.

In this 32nd control example, when the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to on and the conditions for executing the reserved consecutive performance are met (the conditions are met when the reserved special chart 2 indicating a winning combination is included in the reserved special chart 2 that has already been acquired), the reserved consecutive performance is always executed. However, without being limited to this, it is sufficient to configure the system so that the probability of executing the reserved consecutive performance is higher when the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to on than when the reserved consecutive flag 223o is not set to on.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to ON when the reserved consecutive performance is executed, but this is not limited to this, and the process of setting the reserved consecutive flag 223o to ON under other conditions may be executed. For example, the reserved consecutive flag 223o may be set to ON when the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during the rush period exceeds a specific number (e.g., 10,000 balls), or the reserved consecutive flag 223o may be set to ON during the period when a specific display mode is displayed as a display mode (display mode of the point display displayed in the display area Dm6 of FIG. 944(a)) to show the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period.

Furthermore, a configuration may be used in which the consecutive pending flag 223o is set to ON based on the length of time that the rush state continues (rush duration). In this case, the consecutive pending flag 223o may be set to ON when the rush duration exceeds a predetermined period (e.g., 100 seconds), or the consecutive pending flag 223o may be set to ON only when the rush duration is within a predetermined range.

In addition, a measuring means may be provided to measure the cumulative number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, and the reserved consecutive flag 223o may be set to ON when the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed during the rush duration period exceeds a predetermined number of times. Alternatively, when a jackpot game is executed based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the reserved consecutive flag 223o is OFF, a discrimination means may be provided that can determine how many times the second special symbol lottery (the special symbol 2 lottery that wins the small jackpot) that triggers the execution of the jackpot game has been executed since the time-saving state was set, and the reserved consecutive flag 223o may be configured to be set to ON more easily when the discrimination means determines that the second special symbol lottery is the third special symbol 2 lottery (the special symbol 2 lottery that is the final change in the time-saving state) than when the discrimination means determines that the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol 2 lottery (the special symbol 2 lottery executed first since the time-saving state was set).

In addition, in the 32nd control example, when the condition for setting the reserved consecutive flag 223o on is met, the reserved consecutive flag 223o is always set to on, but without being limited to this, a lottery means capable of determining whether or not to set the reserved consecutive flag 223o on when the condition for setting the reserved consecutive flag 223o on is met may be provided, and the reserved consecutive flag 223o may be set to on when it is determined to be set to on as a result of the lottery by the lottery means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to on based on the game situation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising game in which a small jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery based on the special pattern 2 reserved that is the target of the reserved consecutive performance, even though the reserved consecutive performance has not been executed.

The round number counter 223p is a counter for measuring the number of rounds of a jackpot game. When a new round of game is played, the counter value is updated, and a display mode showing the updated counter value is displayed in the display area Dm5. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of which round of game is currently being played.

Here, in this 32nd control example, when the above-mentioned reserved consecutive performance is executed, the number of rounds of the next jackpot game to be executed can be displayed in the display area Dm5 by inheriting the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game.

In other words, normally, the process of clearing the value of the round number counter 223p (see S3612 in FIG. 987) is executed at the end of a jackpot game, but when a reserved consecutive performance is executed (S3611 in FIG. 987: Yes), the process of clearing the value of the round number counter 223p is skipped, and when a winning game that is the subject of the reserved consecutive performance is executed, the number of rounds added to the value of the round number counter 223p measured in the previous jackpot game is displayed in the display area Dm5 as the number of rounds of the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, the more consecutive reserved consecutive performances are performed, the more the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5 increases, making it possible to provide added value to players who have consecutive reserved consecutive performances.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, if the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5 becomes greater than the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot game, a special effect (see FIG. 946) is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide more added value to a player who has consecutive reserved consecutive effects.

The SW valid time counter 223q is a counter for measuring the valid operation period during which the effect button 22a is determined to be valid. When an operation effect in which the effect mode can be changed is executed by having the player operate the effect button 22a, a presentation scenario that specifies the timing for setting the valid operation period is set, and when it is determined based on the set presentation scenario that it is the start timing of the valid operation period, a value corresponding to the length of the predetermined valid operation period is set.

The value set in the SW valid time counter 223q is subtracted (see S4607 in FIG. 997) by the performance update process (see S3112 in FIG. 997) executed in the main process (see FIG. 982) of the voice lamp control device 113, which is executed at a 1 millisecond cycle. Then, a display command is set to show the display mode corresponding to the subtracted value of the SW valid time counter 223q (see S4608 in FIG. 997). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S3102 in FIG. 982) executed in the main process (see FIG. 982) of the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the display control device 114 receiving the output display command, the time gauge ga1 (see FIG. 934(b)) for showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 with the display mode changed.

The right hit flag 223r is a flag for indicating that a game state (winning game state, time-saving state) that allows the player to play a right hit game has been set, and is set to ON when a command is output from the main control device 110 to indicate that a game state that allows right hit game to be set has been set. It is set to OFF when a state command is output to indicate that a normal state has been set. When this right hit flag 223r is set to ON, a "right hit" guide display is executed in the display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

The V winning flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the game ball has passed through a specific area (a V winning) within a predetermined period (within 4 seconds) after the start of the small win game, and is set to ON when the game ball has passed through a specific area within a predetermined period (within 4 seconds) after the start of the small win game (see S4213 in FIG. 993). Then, when it is determined that a predetermined period (4 seconds) has passed since the start of the small win game (S4701 in FIG. 998: Yes), the setting status of the V winning flag 223s is determined (see S4702 in FIG. 998), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4702 in FIG. 998: Yes), a display V performance command is set to indicate that a V winning has occurred (see S4703 in FIG. 998), and then it is set to OFF (see S4704 in FIG. 998).

In the present 32nd control example, when a small win game starts, a game guide notification can be repeatedly executed for a specific period (4 seconds) as a display mode for guiding the player on how to play during the small win game (see FIG. 939(a)). Also, during the period when the first game guide notification is being executed (the 4 seconds after the small win game starts), a V win is possible.

Specifically, an opening period is set during which the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is not opened for 2 seconds after the small win game is started, and after the opening period ends, a round game is played during which the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is opened. Then, 0.5 seconds after the round game is started, the switching member 650h is activated (see FIG. 929(a)), allowing the game ball to enter the specific area 650e3 (V winning possible).

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured to allow the game ball to enter the V-shaped hole between the start of the small win game and the end of the first game guide announcement, shortening the period from the start of the small win game to the execution of the big win game triggered by the V-shaped hole. This makes it easier to increase the number of big win games executed per unit time, and encourages players with limited playing time to play with enthusiasm.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the timing of the execution of the V performance to inform the player that the game ball has entered the V is configured to differ depending on the timing of the game ball entering the V during small win play. Specifically, if the game ball enters the V while the first game guide announcement is being executed, the V performance is executed after the first game guide announcement has ended, and if the game ball enters the V after the first game guide announcement has ended (while the second or subsequent game guide announcements are being executed), the V performance is executed in accordance with the timing of the V entry.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game ball enters a V-winning position while the first game guide announcement is being executed, it is possible to prevent the first game guide announcement from ending midway, thereby providing the player with an easy-to-understand game. Also, if the game ball enters a V-winning position after the first game guide announcement has ended, the V performance can be executed immediately, so it is possible to reliably notify the player that the game ball has entered a V-winning position during a small win game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, the play period of the small win game (the period during which the game ball can enter the V) is configured to continue longer than the timing when the first game guide notification ends. In other words, even if a right-hand hit is performed after the first game guide notification ends, the game ball can be made to enter the V. By configuring it in this way, experienced players can be made to play right-hand immediately after the start of the small win game and can play a game aiming for a V win in a short time, while novice players can be made to play right-hand after understanding the playing method during the small win game notified by the game guide notification and can also play a game aiming for a V win. Therefore, it is possible to allow players to play appropriately according to their level of skill.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example is configured so that the elapsed time when the player ends the small win game in the shortest time (shortest small win game time) is longer than the period during which the first game guide notification is executed (4 seconds). Specifically, it is configured so that the period required from the start of a round of small win game until the number of game balls (10 balls) that meets the end condition of the round game enters the second variable winning device 650 is at least 5 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, even if a situation occurs in which right-hand play is continuously performed before the small win game starts and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the small win game round starts, it is possible to prevent the small win game from ending before the first game guide notification ends, providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The fixed performance flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the fixed mode is set as the performance mode of the pachinko machine 10, and is set to on when the fixed mode is set. The game environment storage area 223u is a memory area for temporarily storing information about the game environment selected by the player, and stores information indicating the contents of each game environment selected by referring to the game environment data table 222f.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the 32nd control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 963 to 980. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

In the 32nd control example, as described above, when the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved) and the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) are both stored, the second special pattern lottery is configured to be executed preferentially. In addition, in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, in addition to the big win, it is configured to be possible to determine the small win in some of the misses as a lottery result. Then, during the small win game that is executed when the small win is won, the game ball is made to pass through the specific area (V area) 650e3 arranged in the second variable winning device 650 (V winning), and the execution condition of the big win game based on the V winning (V big win game) is established, and the big win game can be executed after the small win game ends.

The game state can be set to either a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and the time-saving state can be set as part of the jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, or after the end of a V jackpot game that is executed based on a small jackpot win.

When the time-saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than when the normal state is set, and the second special symbol lottery is stipulated to have a higher probability of winning a small prize than the first special symbol lottery, so that the second special symbol lottery makes it easier to execute a jackpot game (pattern jackpot game, V jackpot game) than the first special symbol lottery.

The system is also configured so that multiple time-saving end conditions can be set as conditions for ending the set time-saving state, preventing unnecessary execution of many first special symbol lotteries during the time-saving state, and making it easier to execute a set number of second special symbol lotteries (three times) during the time-saving state. In addition, the system is configured so that a player can acquire up to a specified number (one) of second special symbol lottery execution rights, which are more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, and so that even after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the time-saving state can be executed a specified number of times (one time).

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example configured in this way, in the normal state, which is the initial state, a left-handed play is performed to execute the first special symbol lottery, aiming to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and execute the symbol jackpot game, and if the time-saving state is set after the symbol jackpot game ends, a right-handed play is performed to execute the second special symbol lottery, aiming to execute the V jackpot game based on the small jackpot win. Even if the end condition of the time-saving state is met and the normal state (initial state) is set, right-handed play continues until just before the time-saving state ends in order to end the time-saving state with the special symbol 2 reserved.

Figure 963 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (65,536 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, and the small win type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, and the small win type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (65535, 99, 99, 299, and 99, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed (S105) in response to a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or a ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (start winning). Details of the special pattern change process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to Figures 964 to 971.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (S106), is executed, and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol change process (S106) and the through gate passing process (S107) will be described later with reference to Figs. 972 and 973. After the through gate passing process (S107) is executed, the V entrance passing process (S108) is executed, and then the V passing process (S109) is executed. Details of the V entrance passing process (S108) and the V passing process (S109) will be described later with reference to Figs. 974 and 975.

After executing the V-passing process (S109), the launch control process is executed (S110), and further other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process (S110) is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 964, the special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 964 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 964) performs various judgments (win/lose judgment) and decisions based on each acquired counter value, controls the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display in the determined variable display mode by a predetermined control, executes the set game state transition management control, sets various commands for executing the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and executes control for stopping and displaying in a display mode showing the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). Below, the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 964) will be described.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) are obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side, and the process proceeds to S209.

In this 32nd control example, the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) is configured to be obtainable up to one, so the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b only has a reserved 1 area for storing data (each counter value) related to one special pattern 2 reserved. However, if the special pattern 2 reserved is configured to be obtainable in a number greater than one (for example, four), a number of reserved areas (reserved 1 area to reserved 4 area) corresponding to the number of special pattern 2 reserved that can be obtained can be provided. In this case, the data in each area can be shifted in the following order: reserved 1 area → execution area, reserved 2 area → reserved 1 area, reserved 3 area → reserved 2 area, reserved 4 area → reserved 3 area, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 is greater than 0 (S211).

In the process of S211, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S211: No), the process is terminated because the data that can newly execute the special pattern lottery is not held. On the other hand, in the process of S211, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S211: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S212), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S213). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted in the same manner as the process of S207 (S214), and the process proceeds to the process of S209. In the process of S209, which is executed after the process of S207 or S214, a special symbol determination process is executed (S209), and then a special symbol change pattern selection process is executed (S210), and then this process is terminated. Details of this special symbol determination process (S209) and special symbol change pattern selection process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 965 and FIG. 966.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S215). If the change time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S216), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S216, the value of the change time counter for measuring the change time of the special pattern is updated, and the display of the first pattern display device 81 is updated to correspond to the updated value of the change time counter. A value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern change pattern selection process (S210) is set in this change time counter at the start timing of the special pattern change, and thereafter, it is updated (subtracted) each time the process of S216 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S215 that the change time has elapsed (S215: Yes), that is, if the value of the change time counter updated in the process of S216 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern change pattern selection process (S210). When this special pattern change pattern selection process (S210) is executed, a lottery for a special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, depending on the value of the first win random number counter C1, it is determined whether the result of this special pattern lottery is a big win, a small win, or a miss, and if the lottery result is a big win, one of the big win types A to C is determined according to the value of the first win type counter C2. Also, if the lottery result is a small win, one of the small win types A to C is determined according to the value of the small win type counter C5.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot with jackpot A set, the blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37, if the result is a jackpot with jackpot B set, the red LED is turned on, and if the result is a jackpot with jackpot C set, the green LED is turned on. Also, if the result is a small jackpot with small jackpot A set, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on in the first pattern display device 37, if the result is a small jackpot with small jackpot B set, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on in the first pattern display device 37, if the result is a small jackpot with small jackpot C set, the red LED and the green LED are turned on in the first pattern display device 37, and if the result is a miss, the red LED, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to display not only the result of the special pattern lottery (big win, small win, miss), but also different display modes according to the type of win (big win type, small win type) that is set in the event of a win (big win, small win), as a display mode for showing the result of the special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, the result of the special pattern lottery can be understood in detail by understanding the display mode displayed on the first pattern display device 37.

As described above, the 32nd control example is configured so that it is difficult for the player to associate the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the result of the special symbol lottery. In other words, the display mode (the lighting mode of each LED) displayed in any lottery result is combined to display the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, the first symbol display device 37 is configured so that while the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is being executed, each LED is simply flashed, and the suggestive mode for suggesting the result of this special symbol lottery is not displayed until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. In addition, since the display mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed (each LED is lit) at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the period during which the display mode for indicating the lottery result is displayed is shortened.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the results of the special pattern lottery based on the display mode of the first pattern display device 37, so it is easier for the player to focus on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, where the change performance based on the third pattern change that is executed in synchronization with the special pattern change is executed.

In this 32nd control example, a combination of the lighting states of LEDs having multiple light emitting colors is used as the display mode for showing the lottery result displayed on the first pattern display device 37, but this is not limited to this, and multiple LEDs that light up in the same color may be provided, and the result of the special pattern lottery executed and the type of win may be displayed by the combination of the lit LEDs.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to on (S219), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is cleared (set to 0) (S220), a special symbol determination command is set to indicate that the current special symbol variation has been stopped (S221), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S218 that the special symbol is not a jackpot (S218: No), next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a special symbol small win (S222), and if it is a small win (S222: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S223), and then a time-saving update process is executed (S224), and the above-mentioned process of S221 is executed, and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped, the time-saving update process is executed (S224), and the process proceeds to S221. The details of the small win start setting process (S223) executed in the process of S223 will be described later with reference to FIG. 968, and the details of the time-saving update process (S224) executed in the process of S224 will be described later with reference to FIG. 969.

The special symbol determination command set by the processing of S221 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing described later (see S1801 in FIG. 978) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special symbol determination command, it executes processing to stop and display the ongoing variation performance (third symbol variation). By configuring in this way, for example, after the variation performance is executed in accordance with the variation time of the special symbol variation included in the variation pattern command based on the reception of the variation pattern command, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (power outage, etc.) and the voice lamp control device 113 is no longer able to manage the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation, the special symbol determination command output after the power is restored can be received to reliably stop and display the ongoing third symbol variation.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol determination process (S209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 965. FIG. 965 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination process (S209). In this special symbol determination process (S209), a win determination (big win determination, small win determination) in the special symbol lottery is performed.

When the special pattern determination process (S209) is executed, first, data on the execution area of the special pattern reserved ball storage area is obtained (S301), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202a (S302), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), the lottery result for the special pattern is set to a jackpot (S304), and the jackpot pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S305), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big win (S303: No), it is next determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S306). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S306: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a small win (S307), and the small win pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired win type counter (first win type counter C2) (S308), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S306 that it is not a small win, that is, if the result of this special pattern lottery is a miss (S306: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 966, the special symbol change pattern selection process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 964), will be described. FIG. 966 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change pattern selection process (S210).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210), first, in the special symbol determination process (see S209 in FIG. 965), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the special symbol has been set (S401).

If it is determined in the process of S401 that a jackpot with a special symbol is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202b and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time-saving state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 (S406). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (see S1801 in FIG. 978).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (S407), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S408), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of stopping symbol indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, i.e., a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 978) of the main process (FIG. 978) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big win (S401: No), it is next determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win (S409), and if it is determined that it is a small win (S409: Yes), the small win type is determined based on the small win type selection table 202f and the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 (S410). Then, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S403. Also, if it is determined in the process of S409 that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a small win (a miss) (S409: No), the process skips S410 and proceeds to the process of S403.

Next, referring to FIG. 967, the small win start setting process (S223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 967 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process (S223). This small win start setting process (S223) is a process executed within the special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 964) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963), and sets the start of the small win game based on the small win type (small win A, B, C), and executes a process for updating the time-saving information according to the small win that has been won (update process for the win count end condition).

When the small win game starts, this pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 to an open state in which a game ball can (easily) win, and when the ball that wins the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big win game is executed (set) after the small win game ends.

In other words, the game state in which the small win game is executed is configured to be an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and an advantageous state in which the possibility of executing a big win game is higher than in the normal game state. Note that, as will be described in detail later, in this 32nd control example, a different small win game is executed according to the small win type (small win A, B, C) that is set when a small win is won, and the possibility of the ball passing through a specific area during a small win game differs depending on each small win type.

By configuring it in this way, the possibility (expectation) of a big win game (two types of win) being played (set) can be changed depending on the small win game that is played, so players can be interested not only in whether or not they will win a small win, but also in the type of small win they win, which can increase the excitement of the game.

When the small win start setting process (S223) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small win type is set (S501). After that, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203p (S502). More specifically, the V-passing jackpot type (a jackpot game that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game) is determined based on the small win type and the small win type selection table 202f. As described above, if the small win type is A, it is determined to be a jackpot A (a jackpot with 6 rounds of time reduction), and if the small win type is B, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot without 6 rounds of time reduction).

In this way, when a 2-kind win is obtained, a jackpot type is set and a process is executed to start the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type. This makes it possible to standardize the process related to the jackpot game when a 1-kind win is obtained and when a 2-kind win is obtained, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 110.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this 32nd control example, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when a 1-type jackpot is won, or only when a 2-type jackpot is won, or it may be configured to execute different jackpot game processes for a 1-type jackpot and a 2-type jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 967, the explanation will continue. After the processing of S502 is completed, the start of the small win is set based on the small win type (S503), and the small win start flag 203n and the small win middle flag 203o are set to ON (S504). After that, this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 968, the time-saving update process (S224) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 968 is a flowchart showing the time-saving update process (S224). This time-saving update process (S224) is a process executed during the special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 964) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963), and is a process for updating the number of time-saving times and setting the game state to the normal state.

In the time-saving update process (S224), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving mode is currently in effect (S601). In the process of S601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving mode is not in effect (S601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving mode is in effect (S601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603.

In the process of S603, a remaining time-saving count command is set indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1) (S603). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 978) described later.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S605), and the values of the small win counter 203s and the special chart 2 counter 203t are set to 0 (S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S604: No), it is determined whether the special pattern change executed this time is a special pattern 2 change (second special pattern change) (S608), and if it is determined that it is a special pattern 2 change (S608: Yes), the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S609), a remaining time-saving number command indicating the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t after the subtraction is set (S610), and it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t after the subtraction is 0 (S611).

If it is determined in the process of S611 that the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is 0 (S611: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S612), and the values of the time-saving counter 203h and the small win counter 203s are set to 0 (S613). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S614), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S608 that the special pattern change executed this time is not a special pattern 2 change (second special pattern change) (S608: No), or if it is determined in the process of S611 that the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (S611: No), a small win time reduction update process is executed (S615), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 969, the small win time-saving update process (S615) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 969 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win time-saving update process (S615). This small win time-saving update process (S615) is a process executed within the time-saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 968) of the special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 964) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963), and is a process for updating the time-saving information based on the small win that has been won, and updating the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the time-saving end condition is met.

In the small win time-saving update process (S615), first, it is determined whether a small win has been won (S701), and if it is determined that a small win has not been won (S701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win has been won in the process of S701 (S701: Yes), the value of the small win counter 203s is decremented by 1 (S702), and it is determined whether the value of the small win counter 203s is 0 (S703). In the process of S703, if it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203s is 0 (S703: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S704), and the values of the time-saving counter 203h and the special chart 2 counter 203t are set to 0 (S705). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S706), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S703 that the value of the small win counter 203s is not 0 (S703: No), the time-saving end condition based on the number of small wins has not been met, so this process ends without executing the processes of S704 to S706 described above.

In this 32nd control example, when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the multiple time-saving end conditions are simply set to 0 (a value indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied). Therefore, after the time-saving state ends, it is not possible to determine which time-saving end condition was satisfied to end the previous time-saving state. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the satisfied time-saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time-saving end condition satisfied in the past and the number of times it was satisfied may be determined.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to determine the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of times it is met, and to suggest (notify) the player of the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the determined content. Furthermore, it is possible to configure it so that the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to other time-saving end conditions when one time-saving end condition is met (for example, the values of the small win counter 203s and the special chart 2 counter 203t at the time when the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to meet, that is, the time-saving end condition that has the largest value of time-saving information at the time when one time-saving end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions, can be determined.

As explained above, in the 32nd control example, the time-saving end condition (change count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern changes is determined by the time-saving update process (see FIG. 968), and the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern small wins are won is determined by the small win time-saving update process (see FIG. 969). In either process, if any of the multiple time-saving end conditions set is satisfied, the values of various counters indicating the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions are all set to a value (0) indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of which time-saving end condition is satisfied, the process contents for terminating the time-saving state can be unified.

In the 32nd control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition, various counters are set to values indicating each time-saving end condition when the time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition is determined, the values of the various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time-saving end condition is established. However, it is also possible to set the values of various counters to 0 when the time-saving state is set, and when the corresponding time-saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that the counter value after the increment is a value indicating the time-saving end condition, the time-saving state is terminated. In other words, it is sufficient to provide a configuration that includes a means for determining whether the time-saving end condition is established and an update means for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition (such as the number of times the special pattern changes or the number of times a small jackpot is won) when the time-saving state is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 970, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 970 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is a process that determines whether a game ball has entered either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores each acquired counter value in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four for the first ball entrance 64, maximum of one for the second ball entrance 640).

In addition, when the counter values acquired based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 970) will be explained below.

In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, which is the first start port (start winning) (S801). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (S801: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is obtained (S802), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S803).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not been stored to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S803: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one (S804), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved number at the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special pattern) (S805).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and are respectively reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 (S806), a read-ahead process is executed (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

In addition, if the process of S801 determines that a ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S801: No), or if the process of S803 determines that the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently at the upper limit (S803: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is skipped and the process proceeds to S808.

Next, the processes from S808 to S814 differ only in that the processes performed for the entry of a ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64) in the processes from S801 to S807 are the same as those performed for the entry of a ball into the second ball entry hole 640, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The pre-reading process (S807, S814) will be described later with reference to FIG. 971, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. In this control example, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, when the right to draw a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is added, the pre-reading process (S813) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is determined to be the upper limit (4) in the process of S803 (S803: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process (S813) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 971, we will explain the look-ahead process (S807), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 970). FIG. 971 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S807).

In the pre-read process (S807), first, the various counter values, that is, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S901). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area that has the smallest winning order.

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S902). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S902: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S903), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S902 is not a big win (S902: No), it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination is a small win or not based on the various counter values read out (S904), and a winning command including information that can identify a miss win, a small win, and a variation pattern is set based on the win/loss determination result of S904 (S905, S906), after which this process ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S903, S905 or S906 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of S901 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 978).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and stored information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 972, the normal symbol change process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 972 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role 640a, and is a process for executing various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (process for executing the normal symbol change, process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, process for updating the normal symbol change being executed, process for stopping the normal symbol change, and process for determining the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S1101). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a winning indication (from when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric roler 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S1101: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S1101: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is displaying a changing pattern (S1102). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not displaying a changing pattern, that is, a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), then the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

If it is determined in the process of S1104 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is 0 (S1104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1105). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S1107).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether or not the current state is a high probability state (time-saving) for normal symbols (S1108). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S1108: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c for high probability (S1109), and processing proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1108: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c for low probability (S1110), and processing proceeds to S1111.

In the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current normal pattern change (lottery) is a win (S1111), and if it is determined to be a win (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (S1112), and processing proceeds to S1114. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that the current normal pattern change (lottery) is not a win (a loss) (S1111: No), the display mode of "×", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (S1113), and processing proceeds to S1114.

In the process of S1114, the normal pattern change time is set to 3 seconds and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, the normal pattern fluctuation time is varied depending on the probability state of the normal pattern that is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to always set the fluctuation time to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state switches, specifically at the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches from the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern) where a long fluctuation time is generally likely to be set to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) where a short fluctuation time is likely to be set, a normal pattern fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the normal pattern lottery is not executed during the time-saving state even though the time-saving state is set.

The method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be varied according to the game state, the number of reserved normal symbol balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (number of reserved normal symbols). Furthermore, the ease of ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable depending on the length of time the normal pattern is set to change, the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be easily changed depending on the game status, creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1102 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is being displayed in a changing manner (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether the time for changing the normal pattern being executed by the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S1115), and if it is determined that the time has not elapsed (S1115: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1115 that the variation time has elapsed (S1115: Yes), the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a stopped display (S1116). In the process of S1116, if the current normal pattern lottery is a winning combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a stopped display of a "○" pattern. On the other hand, if the current normal pattern lottery is a losing combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a stopped display of an "X" pattern. In other words, a setting is made to display the display mode set in the process of S1112 or S1113 described above.

When the stop display is set by processing S1116, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (illuminated display) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S1112 or processing S1113.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S1117). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (S1117: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S1118), and if it is determined that the current game state is in time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (S1118: Yes), the game content for the normal symbol win game is set to a time-saving normal symbol win scenario operation, specifically, the game content (opening operation) in which the opening time of the electric role 640a is 1 second x 2 times (S1120), and the process proceeds to S1121.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1118 that the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) is not in effect (S1118: No), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the normal normal symbol winning scenario action, specifically, the game content (opening action) of the opening time of the electric roler 640a for 5 seconds x 1 time (S1119), and the process proceeds to S1121.

In the process of S1121, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of S1119 or S1120 (S1121), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a in this control example will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol is performed (the timing when the processing of S1108 to S1111 is performed), and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the processing of S1115).

That is, in this control example, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, depending on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol that is executed in parallel while the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of the normal pattern hit/fail judgment, there is a problem that the electric role 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In this control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, only when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern, the electric role 640a may be configured to open long, or the opening pattern of the electric role 640a may be configured to be set based on the game state set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, various information determined in the normal symbol variation process (see S106) (normal symbol lottery results, normal symbol variation time, normal symbol winning scenario, etc.) is set as commands indicating the contents of each piece of information, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (S107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 973. FIG. 973 is a flowchart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. It is also a process for acquiring the lottery result (winning/losing judgment result) in advance, using the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5, before the actual winning/losing judgment is executed (before the winning/losing judgment (see S1111) is executed in the normal pattern variation process).

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is obtained (S1202), and then it is determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols has reached the upper limit) (S1203).

In the process of S1203, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (the upper limit value of 4) (S1203: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S1203: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (S1204), a normal reserved ball number command is set to indicate the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f after the addition (S1205), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c (S1206), and this process is terminated. Although detailed explanations are omitted, in this control example, in the same way as when a reserved ball with a special pattern (special pattern reserved) is acquired, when a reserved ball with a normal pattern (normal pattern reserved) is acquired, the second winning random number counter C4 included in the acquired normal pattern reserved is configured to be able to obtain the lottery result in advance by referring to the second winning random number table 202c (configured to be able to execute normal pattern pre-reading). In addition, a winning information command for normal patterns including information showing the results of the normal pattern pre-reading is configured to be able to be set.

The winning information command for the normal symbols set here is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same processing as the winning information command indicating the result of the advance determination of the special symbols set in each of the control examples described above. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine in advance the result of the normal symbol lottery that corresponds to the lottery right for the normal symbol that is reserved and to execute a performance based on the advance determination result.

Next, the contents of the V entrance passing process (S108) and the V passing process (S109) will be explained with reference to Figs. 974 and 975. The V entrance passing process (S108) and the V passing process (S109) shown in Figs. 974 and 975 are the same as the V entrance passing process and the V passing process described in the control example above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 976, the NMI interrupt process will be described. FIG. 976 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 977, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 977 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 977), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1715. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1715.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, too, the process proceeds to S1715. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1715, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1715). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1716, S1717).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1716, S1717) is executed.

Similarly, if power failure occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (S1716, S1717) is executed. In the RAM initialization processing (S1716, S1717), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1716), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (S1717). After execution of RAM 203 initialization processing, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power outage information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command that allows various performances to be executed is output to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the value of the time-saving counter is read (S1711), a state command based on the read value is set (S1712), the flow path solenoid is set to off (S1713), an interrupt is permitted (S1714), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 978, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 978 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process (see FIG. 978), first, an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 during the timer interrupt process to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls acquired is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process and the start winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1801), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (changing effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, various commands set in other control processes are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a command is set to execute a jackpot performance in the sound lamp control device 113, and jackpot control processing is executed to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIG. 979, but in this jackpot control process (S1804), a specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter referred to as a winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a). Then, when either of these conditions is met, the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of this winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a small win control process (S1805) is executed in which various operational controls related to the small win game are executed, and the process proceeds to S1806.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S1121 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 972), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the end of the period set by the processes of S1119 and S1120 in the normal pattern change process.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (S1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S210 in FIG. 966), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B start displaying changes according to the change pattern. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the special pattern change pattern selection process ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (illuminated) in a stopped state in the display mode set in S407 of the special pattern change pattern selection process in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B.

Furthermore, in this control example, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (S1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the normal pattern change process, a change display is started on the second pattern display device. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which a "○" pattern and an "X" pattern are alternately lit as the second pattern. Also, in the second pattern display update process (S1808), when a stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the normal pattern change process, the change display being executed on the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device in a stopped state in the display mode set by the normal pattern change process.

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1809). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the processes from S1801 onwards described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S1811 (S1812). Note that in this processing of S1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special patterns and normal patterns, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1809 (S1809: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 976 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1815), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S1809 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801, just as in the case where initialization is performed in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (FIG. 977, S1701), so that the processing can be started from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be explained with reference to FIG. 979. FIG. 979 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 978) of the main control device 110, and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol. Note that the detailed contents are the same as those of the control examples described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this 32nd control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a process is executed to determine the jackpot type using the jackpot type selection table 202b, and an ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the process of S1912, a display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Note that, instead of setting the length of the ending period when a jackpot is won as in this 32nd control example, the length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined depending on whether or not a V win occurs during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 650e3)).

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 979), if it is determined that the timing is the start of the ending period (the end of the final round), the game content executed during this jackpot game may be determined, and the length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined based on the result of that determination. In particular, in a pachinko machine 10 that is capable of varying the game state set after the end of a jackpot game based on the result of a game executed during a jackpot game, if the game state set after the end of a jackpot game is a game state advantageous to the player, the length of the ending period may be configured to be longer than in other cases.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can vary the game state set after the end of a jackpot game depending on the game results during the jackpot game, it is possible to set an ending period that corresponds to the game state that is actually set.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is made different depending on the game result during the jackpot game, the ending period of the jackpot game can be determined at any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period. For example, after the first round of round play ends (after the round play in which the ball can enter a specific area ends), it may be determined whether or not a V has been entered, and based on the result of this determination, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set to the period during which the second to final rounds of round play are being played.

In addition, in the above example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not a V is won during a jackpot game. Alternatively, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game can be set in advance based on the type of jackpot that has been won. Specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds can be set in advance when a special jackpot is won, and 15 seconds can be set in advance when a normal jackpot is won. If it becomes necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the results of the jackpot game, that is, if a special jackpot game has been played but a V cannot be won during the jackpot game, the length of the preset ending period can be changed. By configuring in this way, the frequency with which the length of the ending period is set during a jackpot game can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1911 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S1911: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1913). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the time when the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1913 that the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S1913: Yes), the type of jackpot being executed is read (S1914), the corresponding time-saving end condition is set using the time-saving granting table 202e based on the read jackpot type (S1915), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content set in the process of S1915 is set (S1916), a state command corresponding to the game state after the jackpot ends is set (S1917), the end of the jackpot is set (S1918), the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to OFF (S1919), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the small win control process (S1805) will be explained with reference to FIG. 980. FIG. 980 is a flowchart showing the details of the small win control process (S1805). Note that the small win control process (S1805) executed in this 32nd control example is the same as the small win control process in each of the control examples described above, and a detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 32nd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 981 to Fig. 1001, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 981, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 981 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S3118 (see FIG. 982) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 982, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of a power outage from the main control device 110 (see S3115 in FIG. 982), it executes the power-off processing of S3118. Before the execution of such a power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S3118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S3002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S3118 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S3003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S3006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S3118 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No) and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S3002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S3118 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 is executed (see S3117 in FIG. 982). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3118 is executed, so the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S3118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S3009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and S3008 is reached, the process goes from S3004 to S3006 and reaches S3008 because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or the process was started because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S3010).

The clearing process of S3009 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S3004 to S3006 and then to S3008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, and when the start-up process is initiated after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, allowing control of the voice lamp control device 113 to continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 982, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 982 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the start of the main processing or since the processing of S3101 was executed last time (S3101). If 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S3101: No), the processing of S3102 to S3112 is not performed and the processing proceeds to S3113. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S3101 is that, while S3102 to S3112 are processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S3113 and the variable display setting processing of S3114 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3113 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S3113 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3114 to the display control device 114 (S3102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S3108 described later (S3103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process is a process for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S3105.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a process for updating the display of the number of reserved balls is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the settings are sent as commands to the display control device 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors inputs to determine whether various buttons, such as the frame button 22 (effect button 22a) and the selection button 600, which are operated by the player to enhance the effect of the effect, have been pressed, and sets up corresponding effects and game environment settings when input of various buttons is confirmed. In this process, when operation of various buttons (frame button 22, selection button 600) by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that various buttons (frame button 22, selection button 600) have been operated. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S3107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 999.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S3109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S3110), and then various counter update processes are executed (S3111). After that, the performance update process is executed (S3112). After executing the process of S3112, the process moves to S3113. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing and output process of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After processing of S3112, a command determination process (S3113) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110, and the process proceeds to S3114. Details of this command determination process (S3113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 983.

In the processing of S3114, in order to display a variable display performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 994.

After the processing of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S3115 (S3115: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S3117), and the power outage processing is executed (S3118). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S3116: No), the process returns to the process of S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 983, the command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 983 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. The command determination process (S3113) will be described in detail below.

When the command determination process (S3113) is executed, it is first determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S3201). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S3203). Then, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S3201 that the special chart variation pattern command has not been received (S3201: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received (S3204). If it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the received stop type command is set to ON (S3205), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3206). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), it is next determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S3207). If it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (S3207: Yes), reserved information related processing is executed (S3208), and then this processing is terminated. In the reserved information related processing, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a process for determining the performance mode based on the acquisition of a special reserved ball is performed. A detailed explanation of the reserved information related processing (S3208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 984.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S3207 that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). If it is determined in the process of S3209 that a winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), a process is executed to store the winning information based on the received winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a (S3210), and this process is terminated. Specifically, in the process of S3210, the pattern type (special pattern, normal pattern) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command is analyzed, and the analysis result is stored (stored) in the memory area corresponding to the analysis result (winning information storage area 223a in RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113), and a process is executed to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) based on the received winning information.

If it is determined in the process of S3209 that a winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), it is then determined whether a status command has been received (S3211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S3211: Yes), status command processing is executed (S3212) and this process is terminated. This status command processing (S3212) receives a status command indicating the current game status, sets a mode presentation mode corresponding to that game status, and sets a display command for displaying the corresponding presentation mode (e.g., a back image) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Details of this status command processing (S3212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 985.

If it is determined in the processing of S3211 that a status command has not been received (S3211: No), it is then determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S3213). If it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S3213: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S3214), and then this processing is terminated. A detailed explanation of the hit-related processing (S3214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 986. On the other hand, if it is determined that a win-related command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether a prize ball number command has been received (S3215). If it is determined that a prize ball number command has been received (S3215: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is 1 or more, that is, whether the current period is the period for measuring the cumulative number of prize balls (rush period) (S3216). If it is determined that the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is 1 or more (S3216: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of prize balls included in the currently received prize ball number command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter 223n (S3217), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3216 that the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is not 1, the current period is not the rush period, so the process of S3217 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, the game is started with the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) set as the game state, and a game is played in which a first special symbol lottery is executed by making a game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed play. Then, when a winning game (big win game, small win game) that is executed when a winning game (big win game, small win game) is started in the first special symbol lottery, a right-handed play is executed to make the game ball enter a winning device (variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) that is opened during the winning game.

When the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the winning game ends, the second ball entrance 640 is arranged so that the game ball released by right-hand play can enter the ball more easily than when the normal state is set, and a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640.

The second special pattern lottery is configured to have a higher probability of winning (probability of winning a small prize) than the first special pattern lottery, and is configured so that if a prize is won in the second special pattern lottery, it is easier to set the time-saving state after the winning game ends than if a prize is won in the first special pattern lottery. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, it is configured so that it is easier to play in the time-saving state for a long period of time through multiple winning games.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example configured in this manner, in order to inform the player that the play period that includes at least the period during which right-hand play is continuously executed (the winning play period, the period during which the time-saving play state is set) is an advantageous play period in which the player is favored, a rush state is set as the play state in the presentation. In this way, by executing a common presentation (rush presentation) while the advantageous play period in which the player is favored continues, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous play period is continuing.

In the present 32nd control example, the point display mode for showing information corresponding to the total value of the benefits (number of prize balls) acquired by the player during the advantageous play period is displayed in the display area Dm6, so that the player can be notified (see display area Dm6 in FIG. 934(a)). In the process of S3216, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is referenced to determine whether the current advantageous play period is present. The value of this rush period measurement counter 223m is configured to be set to 1 when the time-saving state is set as the play state. And, when the special chart 2 reservation is not acquired in the normal state, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is configured to be cleared.

By configuring it in this way, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m can be updated (cleared) in accordance with the timing when the advantageous play period starts and ends, so that an appropriate value corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous play period can be added to the prize ball number counter 223n.

If it is determined in the process of S3215 that the prize ball number command has not been received (S3215: No), a process corresponding to the other command is executed (S3218), and this process is terminated. Here, a part of the detailed process contents executed in the process of S3218 will be explained. In the process of S3218, for example, a process based on the reception of a special pattern determination command output when the special pattern variation is stopped is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the pattern determination command has been received, and if it is determined that the pattern determination command has been received, the stop display of the third pattern is set, and this process is terminated. By executing this process, the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably determine the timing at which the main control device 110 stopped the special pattern variation. Therefore, for example, even if the power is cut off while the special pattern variation is being executed and the voice lamp control device 113 cannot determine the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation after the power is restored, the timing of the stop display of the variation performance can be determined in accordance with the timing of the stop display of the special pattern variation.

In addition, in the process of S3218, various processes related to the lottery for normal symbols are also executed. Specifically, when a reserved ball count command for normal symbols is received, the value of the reserved ball count counter 203f for normal symbols in the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable display of normal symbols) is extracted, and the value of the reserved ball count counter for normal symbols (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

The reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a game ball enters the various ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640, through gate 67) (initial entry) and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are incremented, or when various variable start processes are executed and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are decremented. Therefore, at the time of initial entry or each time the variable display is set, the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter (not shown) of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f of the main control unit 110.

Therefore, even if the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b, the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c, and the normal pattern reserved ball counter (not shown) in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the various reserved ball counters 203d, 203e, and 203f of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., if a reserved ball number command is notified at the time of start winning or when the variable display is set, that is, when the various reserved ball numbers are changed, the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b, the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c, and the normal pattern reserved ball counter (not shown) of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 984, the reserved information related process (S3208) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 984 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reserved information related process (S3208). This reserved information related process (S3208) is executed in the command determination process (see S3113 in FIG. 983) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing for managing the number of reserved balls of special patterns (number of reserved special patterns) on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the received reserved ball number command, and processing for setting the performance mode when a reserved special pattern 2 is acquired during the time-saving state. Details of the reserved information related process (S3208) will be explained below.

When the reserved information related process (S3208) is executed, first, the special symbol type and reserved ball number are extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) corresponding to the reserved ball number command received this time (S3301), and a display command corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is set (S3302). The display command set by the process of S3302 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S3302, it displays on the third pattern display device 81 a display mode for indicating the number of reserved special patterns contained in the received display command.

Next, it is determined whether the currently received reserved ball count command is a reserved ball count command for the second special symbol (a command indicating that special symbol 2 is reserved) (S3303), and if it is determined that it is not a command indicating that special symbol 2 is reserved (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3310. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3303 that it is a command indicating that special symbol 2 is reserved (S3303: Yes), the current time-saving status is read from the time-saving information update area 223h (S3304). Here, the time-saving information update area 223h is configured to store various game contents executed during the time-saving state, and is configured to store, for example, information indicating whether or not a special symbol change is being executed, and information indicating the update contents of the elements for establishing each time-saving end condition (for example, information regarding a small win or information regarding the number of times a special symbol changes).

Therefore, by reading out the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h, it is possible to determine not only whether the current state is in the time-saving state, but also whether the current state is in the period of special pattern variation, and whether the current state is the final variation. For example, even if the second special pattern variation is being executed for the second time in the time-saving state, it is possible to determine a different presentation mode depending on whether the second special pattern variation is the final variation in the time-saving state.

After completing the processing of S3304, it is next determined whether the current state is the final change in the time-saving state (the special symbol change for the number of changes at which the time-saving end condition is met) (S3305), and if it is determined that the current state is the final change (S3305: Yes), a display command to indicate that charging is complete is set (S3306), and processing proceeds to S3310. In other words, if a reserved ball number command indicating the acquisition of a special symbol 2 reservation is received during the final change in the time-saving state, it is possible to execute a second special symbol lottery based on the acquired special symbol 2 reservation after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, so a display command indicating that the time-saving state will end with the special symbol 2 reservation acquired is set by the processing of S3306. The display command set by the processing of S3306 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S3306, it displays the display mode for indicating the completion of charging included in the received display command on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 941(a)).

Here, in the 32nd control example, during the time-saving state, during the final variation of the special pattern (final variation of special pattern 2), a part of the variation period of the final variation of the losing special pattern 2, which is intended to indicate that the lottery result is a loss, is used to execute an effect (FINAL charge effect) that encourages the player to acquire the reserved special pattern 2 (Fig. 941 (a)). Then, if the reserved special pattern 2 is acquired immediately after the FINAL charge effect is executed (within 1 second), an effect (displaying "charge complete") is executed to notify the player that the reserved special pattern 2 has been acquired after 1 second of the FINAL charge effect has elapsed.

Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S3306, it determines whether the current time is the waiting period for the charge completion display (the period from the start of the FINAL charge performance until 1 second has elapsed), and if it is not the waiting period, it displays the display mode for notifying that charging is complete in a mode corresponding to the performance currently being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if it is the waiting period, it only executes the process of temporarily storing the fact that the display command indicating charge completion has been received (the process of setting a dedicated waiting flag on), and puts the display mode for notifying that charging is complete on hold. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, it determines whether the waiting flag is set on, that is, whether the display mode for notifying that charging is complete is on hold, and if it is determined that it is on hold, the display mode for indicating that charging is complete is displayed, and the waiting flag is turned off.

In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the time-saving final change is not occurring (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the special pattern is currently changing (special pattern changing) (S3307). If it is determined that the special pattern is changing (S3307: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set on (S3308). If it is determined that the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set on, that is, if the first special pattern change since the time-saving state was set is a special pattern change that results in a winning combination and is a special pattern change that corresponds to a winning combination that has already been notified in the reserved consecutive performance (S3308: Yes), a display command is set to show the performance mode suggesting the next reserved consecutive combination (S3309), and processing proceeds to S3310. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3307 that the special chart is not currently changing (S3307: No), the processes of S3308 and S3309 are skipped, the process of S3310 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 985, the status command processing (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 985 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S3212). This status command processing (S3212) is executed within the command determination processing (see FIG. 983) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. Details of the status command processing (S3212) will be described below.

When the state command process (S3212) is executed, first, information indicating the current game state contained in the state command received this time is stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g (S3401). Then, it is determined whether the game state has transitioned to the normal state (S3402), and if it is determined that the game state has transitioned to the normal state (S3402: Yes), the right hit flag 223r is set to off (S3403), and the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is cleared (S3404). Specifically, information on elements for determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or not (number of small wins, number of special pattern changes, number of second special pattern changes) is cleared. By configuring in this way, even though the normal state is set, a performance based on the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is executed, and it is possible to suppress the execution of a performance that is strange to the player. Then, it is determined whether there is a reserved memory of the second special pattern (reserved special pattern 2) (S3405), and if it is determined that there is a reserved special pattern 2 (S3405: Yes), a display command indicating that the reel is being pulled back is set (S3410), and this process is terminated. A display mode indicating that the current state is being reeled back (see FIG. 941 (b)) is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 by the display command set in the process of S3410. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3405 that there is no reserved special pattern 2, that is, if it is determined that the normal state has been set without acquiring the reserved special pattern 2 (S3405: No), the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared to 0 (S3407), a display command indicating the normal state (normal) is set (S3408), a display command indicating a left hit is set (S3409), and this process is terminated. That is, in this control example, the duration of the rush period, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is measured not only while the time-saving state is set, but also during the normal state in which the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the game period is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state set. In addition, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the game state has not transitioned to the normal state (S3402), then it is determined whether the game state has transitioned to the time-saving state (S3411), and if it is determined that the game state has transitioned to the time-saving state (value 3411 of SW effective time counter 223q: Yes), the time-saving information included in the received state command is stored in the time-saving information update area 223h (S3412), a display command indicating that a rush is in progress is set (S3413), the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is set to 1 (S3414), and this process is terminated. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S3411 that the time-saving state has not been entered (S3411: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of the win-related processing (S3214) will be explained with reference to FIG. 986. FIG. 986 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related processing (S3214). This win-related processing (S3214) is a process that is executed when a command related to a big win game or a small win game is received, and a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the presentation (win game presentation) that is executed during each win game.

When the win-related process (S3214) is executed, first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S3501), and if it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S3501: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S3502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot start command has not been received (S3501: No), it is next determined whether a jackpot-related command (opening command, interval command, ending command, etc.) has been received (S3503), and if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S3503: Yes), jackpot-related process is executed (S3504), and then this process ends.

In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the big win related command has not been received (S3503: No), it is next determined whether a small win start command has been received (S3505). If it is determined that a small win start command has been received (S3505: Yes), a display small win start command is set (S3506), and this process is terminated. In the process of S3505, if it is determined that a small win start command has not been received (S3505: No), it is next determined whether a small win related command (small win start command, small win end command, V pass command, etc.) has been received (S3507). If it is determined that a small win related command has been received (S3507: Yes), small win related processing is executed (S3508), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the process of S3507, if it is determined that a small win related command has not been received (S3507: No), this process is terminated as it is. The details of the small win related processing (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG. 993.

Next, referring to FIG. 987, the processing contents of the jackpot-related processing (S3504) will be described. FIG. 987 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot-related processing (S3504). In this jackpot-related processing (S3504), a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the jackpot presentation that differs between the jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery in the normal state and the other jackpot games. When the jackpot-related processing (S3504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot game to be executed this time is the jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery in the normal state (S3601), and if it is determined to be the first jackpot game (S3601: Yes), the first jackpot-related processing is executed (S3602), and the process proceeds to S3614. Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S3601 that this is not the first jackpot game (S3601: No), it is then determined whether an opening command has been received (S3603), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3603: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S3604), and processing proceeds to S3614.

If it is determined in the processing of S3603 that an opening command has not been received (S3603: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S3605), and if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S3605: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3606), a round number command for display is set (S3607), the value of the round number counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S3608), mid-round performance processing is executed (S3609), and processing proceeds to S3614.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3605 that the round number command has not been received (S3605: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S3610), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3610: Yes), it is determined whether the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to on (S3611), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S3611: No), the value of the round number counter is cleared (S3612), an ending command for display is set (S3613), and processing proceeds to S3614. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S3611 that the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to on (S3611: Yes), processing skips S3612 and proceeds to processing S3613.

In other words, if the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, when a jackpot game ends, the value of the round number counter that accumulates the number of rounds of the jackpot game is not cleared. Therefore, when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game that is the subject of the reserved consecutive game) is played after the reserved consecutive game performance is executed, the display showing the number of rounds of the jackpot game will continue to show the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, when the reserved consecutive game performance is executed, it becomes easier to execute a series of performances across multiple jackpot games, making it easier to provide a performance with a sense of unity.

In addition, when the reserved consecutive performances are executed consecutively, the display mode for displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game becomes a display mode corresponding to a large number of rounds, and for example, it is possible to display a display mode corresponding to a number of rounds exceeding the number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play right-handed games with the aim of executing the reserved consecutive performances in succession in order to display a larger number of rounds, and to execute the jackpot game with the special chart 2 reserved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3610 that an ending command has not been received (S3610: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S3614), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 988, the processing contents of the in-round performance processing (S3609) executed in the jackpot-related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 987) will be explained. FIG. 988 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the in-round performance processing (S3609). In this in-round performance processing (S3609), processing is executed to determine the performance mode (performance mode of the reserved consecutive performance) to be executed during a round play among the jackpot performances in the jackpot play executed other than the first jackpot play, i.e., during the rush period including the time-saving state.

When the mid-round presentation process (S3609) is executed, first it is determined whether the currently received round number command is a command indicating the final round of the jackpot game (S3701), and if it is determined that it is not a command indicating the final round (S3701: No), it executes processing according to other commands to determine the presentation mode corresponding to the received round number (S3708), and then ends this process.

In the process of S3701, if it is determined that the command indicates the final round (S3701: Yes), then the winning information of the reserved special drawing 2 stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3702), and it is determined whether the winning information read out includes winning information (reserved winning) that will result in a winning (small winning, big winning) (S3703). In the process of S3703, if it is determined that a winning reserve is included (S3703: Yes), it is determined whether the consecutive reserved flag 223o is set to ON (S3704), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3704: Yes), the presentation mode (consecutive reserved presentation) for indicating consecutive reserved is determined (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708.

In addition, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the reserved consecutive flag 223o is not set to on (S3704: No), the execution of the reserved consecutive performance is determined by lottery (S3706), and if it is determined that the reserved consecutive performance is to be executed (S3707: Yes), the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to on (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3707, if it is determined that the reserved consecutive performance is not to be executed (S3707: No), the process regarding the reserved consecutive performance is skipped and the process proceeds to S3708. On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that a winning reserved is not included (S3703: No), it is determined whether the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to on (S3710), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S3710: Yes), the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to off (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3708. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S3710 that the pending consecutive flag 223o is not set to on (S3710: No), the processing of S3712 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3708.

Next, referring to FIG. 989, the processing contents of the first jackpot related processing (S3602) executed in the jackpot related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 987) will be explained. FIG. 989 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the first jackpot related processing (S3602). In this first jackpot related processing (S3602), processing is executed to determine various presentation modes (presentation modes of the defeat presentation) of the jackpot presentation in the first jackpot game.

When the first jackpot related process (S3602) is executed, first it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S3801), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3801: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S3802), then a defeat presentation mode determination process is executed (S3803), the process of S3812 is executed, and this process ends. In the process of S3801, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (S3801: No), next it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S3804), and if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S3804: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received command (S3805), a round number command for display is set (S3806), the first jackpot round presentation process is executed (S3807), and the process proceeds to S3812.

If it is determined in the processing of S3804 that the round number command has not been received (S3804: No), it is then determined whether an interval command has been received (S3808), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3808: Yes), the first interval performance processing is executed (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S3808 that the interval command has not been received (S3808: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S3810), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3810: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S3811), and the process proceeds to S3812, and if it is determined in the processing of S3810 that the ending command has not been received (S3812: No), the process proceeds to S3812.

Next, the processing contents of the defeat presentation mode determination process (S3803) will be explained with reference to FIG. 990. FIG. 990 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the defeat presentation mode determination process (S3803). In this defeat presentation mode determination process (S3803), processing is executed to determine the presentation mode of the defeat presentation executed during the first jackpot game.

When the defeat performance mode determination process (S3803) is executed, first, the total number of enemies is determined by referring to the defeat number selection table 222b based on the currently set jackpot type and the value of the first performance counter 223f1 (S3901), and the value corresponding to the determined total number of enemies is set in the remaining defeat number counter 223j (S3902). After that, it is determined whether the determined total number of enemies (the value set in the remaining defeat number counter 223j) is "777" (S3903), and if it is determined that there are 777 enemies (S3903: Yes), the specific number display flag 223k is set to ON (S3905), a special defeat performance scenario is determined from the defeat performance mode selection table 222c (S3906), the value of the defeat count counter 223i is set to "5" (S3907), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3903 that the total number of enemies is not "777" (is "1000" or "500") (S3903: No), the defeat performance scenario is determined by referring to the defeat performance mode selection table 222c based on the determined total number of enemies, the jackpot type, and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223f2 (S3904), and the processing proceeds to S3907.

The performance scenario determined in the processing of S3904 and S3906 is temporarily stored in a memory area of the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured to be readable until the currently executed subjugation performance is completed.

Next, the processing contents of the first jackpot round performance processing (S3807) will be explained with reference to FIG. 991. FIG. 991 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the first jackpot round performance processing (S3807). In this first jackpot round performance processing (S3807), processing is executed to determine the performance mode of the attack performance executed during the round play of the first jackpot play in which the subjugation performance is executed.

When the first big win round performance process (S3807) is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently received round number command is a command indicating the first round (S4001). If it is determined that it is a command indicating the first round (S4001: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the total number of enemies corresponding to the value of the remaining defeat count counter 223j (S4002). Next, it is determined whether the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON (S4003). If it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4003: No), the display mode of the button icon is determined based on the occurrence timing of the strong attack performance specified by referring to the determined defeat performance scenario and the value of the defeat count counter 223i (S4005), a display command is set to indicate the display mode of the determined button icon (S4006), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4003 that the specific number display flag 223k is set to ON (S4003: Yes), the number of button icons to be displayed in the special display mode is determined based on the value of the defeat count counter 223i (S4004), a display command is set to indicate the display mode of the determined button icons (S4006), and this process is terminated. In other words, if the specific number display flag 223k is set to ON, the player has already been notified that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, so the special display mode is determined to notify the player that the time-saving state will be set using the display mode of the button icons without suggesting the content of the defeat effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring in the performance modes of multiple effects to suggest the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In the process of S4001, if it is determined that the command is not the first round (S4001: No), then it is determined whether a round number command indicating the second to sixth rounds has been received (S4007). If it is determined that a round number command indicating the second to sixth rounds has been received (S4007: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the defeat count counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4008). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 in the process of S4008 (S4008: Yes), the value of the defeat count counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S4009), the performance mode of the attack performance is determined based on the content of the determined defeat performance scenario (S4010), the operation effective time corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the SW effective time counter 223q (S4011), a display command corresponding to the determined performance mode is set (S4012), and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S4007 that a round number command indicating rounds 2 to 6 has not been received (S4007: No), processing according to other commands (S4013) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the processing contents of the first interval performance processing (S3809) will be explained with reference to FIG. 992. FIG. 992 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the first interval performance processing (S3809). In this first interval performance processing (S3809), when an interval period is set during a jackpot game in which a subjugation performance is executed, processing is executed to set a performance mode according to the performance result of the attack performance executed during the previous round game.

When the first interval performance process (S3809) is executed, first the value of the remaining defeat count counter 223j is read (S4101) and it is determined whether it matches the content of the set defeat performance scenario (is the same as the determined value) (S4102). If it is determined that it is the same (S4102: Yes), the normal interval performance mode during the defeat performance is determined (S4103), a display command corresponding to each determined performance mode is set (S4111), and this process ends. In other words, if the interval performance mode is determined by the process of S4103, no additional attack performance will be executed.

If it is determined in the process of S4102 that they are not the same (S4102: No), then the additional reduction value selection table 222d is referenced to determine the additional reduction value (S4104), and it is determined whether the determined additional reduction value is a specific reduction value (specific number) (S4105). If it is determined that it is not a specific reduction value (S4105: No), an interval presentation mode (additional attack presentation mode) that is the total number of enemies corresponding to the additional reduction value is determined (S4106), the value of the remaining number of kills counter 223j is updated to a value corresponding to the additional reduction value (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4111.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4105 that it is a specific reduction value (S4105: Yes), the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to on (S4108), it is decided to rewrite it to a special defeat presentation scenario (S4109), the presentation mode corresponding to the special defeat presentation scenario is decided (S4110), and the processing proceeds to S4111. Next, the processing contents of the small win related processing (S3508) will be explained with reference to FIG. 993. FIG. 993 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the small win related processing (S3508). This small win related processing (S3508) is processing executed during small win play, similar to the small win related processing (see FIG. 540) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 13th control example described above, and sets a small win start command for display (S4202) at the timing when the small win play starts (S4201: Yes), and if the right hit flag 223r is not set on (S4203: No), sets the right hit flag 223r on (S4204), and executes processing (S4205) to set a display command that guides right hit play. Also, when it is determined that the small win attention flag (a flag indicating that a V has not been won during a small win game) is set to ON at the end timing of the small win game (S4207: Yes), a display small win end command is set to indicate that a big win game will not be executed after the small win game ends (indicating that a large win game has been broken) (S4210), and when it is determined that the small win attention flag is not ON (S4207: No), a display small win end command is set to indicate that a big win game will start (S4208). Furthermore, when a V pass command is received during a small win game (S4211: Yes), it is determined whether the timing of receiving the V pass command is 4 seconds or later from the start of the small win (S4212), and when 4 seconds have passed (S4212: Yes), a display V performance command is set to inform the player that a V has been won (S4214), and processing related to the small win attention flag is executed. Furthermore, if the V-pass command is received within 4 seconds of the start of the small win, i.e., if it is determined that the initial notification in the small win game has not been completed (S4212: No), the V-winning flag 223s is set to ON (S4213) without setting a display V-performance command, and this process ends. By configuring in this way, the execution timing of the V-performance that notifies the player that the game ball has won a V-win during a small win game can be changed depending on the timing of the game ball winning a V-win.

Next, the processing contents of the variable display setting process (S3114) will be explained with reference to FIG. 994. FIG. 994 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable display setting process (S3114). As shown in FIG. 994, the variable display setting process (S3114) executes the same processing as the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) in the first control example described above, and therefore a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Next, the processing contents of the variable performance setting process (S4304) will be explained with reference to FIG. 995. FIG. 995 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable performance setting process (S4304). This variable performance setting process (S4304) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 994), and a process is executed to determine the performance mode of the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the special pattern change.

When the variation effect setting process (S4304) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the secondary game state storage area 223g (S4401), and it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S4402). If it is determined to be normal (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern variation to be executed is a second special pattern variation (special pattern 2 variation) (S4403). If it is determined to be a special pattern 2 variation (S4403: Yes), the presentation mode for the pull-back mode (for pull-back effect) is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4409), and this process ends.

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the change is not a special pattern 2 change (it is a first special pattern change) (S4403: No), it is determined whether the performance fixing flag 223t is set on (S4404), and if it is determined that it is set on (S4404: Yes), the performance mode of the change performance is determined based on the lottery result for the change and the extracted change pattern (S4405), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the fixed effect flag 223t is not set to ON, that is, the stage transition is in a state where it can be changed (S4404: No), the effect stage data table 222e is referenced to determine whether the transition condition is met (S4406), and then it is determined whether the stage transition condition is met (S4407). If it is determined that the stage transition condition is met (S4407: Yes), the effect mode for performing the stage transition is determined (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the transition condition for the stage transition is not met (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. Also, in the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (it is in the time-saving state) (S4402: No), a time-saving effect setting process (S4410) is executed to determine the effect mode of the variable effect during the time-saving state, and this process ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 996, the processing contents of the time-saving performance setting process (S4410) will be explained. FIG. 996 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving performance setting process (S4410). In this time-saving performance setting process (S4410), a process is executed to determine the performance mode of the variable performance during the time-saving state, and a process is executed to set the display mode for encouraging the acquisition of the special chart 2 reserve for the final time-saving change among the variable performances corresponding to the special chart 2 changes executed during the time-saving state.

When the time-saving performance setting process (S4410) is executed, first it is determined whether the current special chart change is special chart 2 (special chart 2 change) (S4501), and if it is determined that it is a special chart 2 change (S4501: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the final time-saving change (S4502), and if it is determined that it is the final time-saving change (S4502: Yes), it is then determined whether the lottery result was a loss (S4503).

In the process of S4503, if it is determined that the lottery result is a miss (S4503: Yes), i.e., if the current special pattern change is a miss change of the final special pattern 2 during the time-saving state, a display command is set to encourage the acquisition of the reserved special pattern 2 (S4504), the presentation mode of the change presentation is determined based on the lottery result of the change and the extracted change pattern (S4505), and this process ends. Also, if the process of S4501: No, S4502: No, or S4503: No is executed, the conditions for setting a display command to encourage the acquisition of the reserved special pattern 2 are not met, so the process proceeds directly to S4505.

Next, the processing contents of the performance update process (S3112) will be explained with reference to FIG. 997. FIG. 997 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance update process (S3112). This performance update process (S3112) is a process that is executed periodically (every 2 milliseconds), and executes processing for updating the values of various counters in the variable performance, and processing for determining the performance mode based on the updated values of various counters.

When the performance update process (S3112) is executed, first it is determined whether or not a small win is currently being played (S4601), and if it is determined that a small win is currently being played (S4601: Yes), the small win play update process is executed (S4602) and processing proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4602 that a small win is not currently being played (S4601: No), it is next determined whether the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is greater than 1, i.e., whether or not the current state is a rush state (S4603), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 1 (S4603: Yes), the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is updated (S4604), a display command is set to indicate the rush period corresponding to the updated value of the rush period measurement counter 223m (S4605), and processing proceeds to S4606.

In the process of S4606, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is greater than 1, i.e., whether the current operation is within the valid operation period (SW valid time) (S4606). If it is determined that the value is greater than 1 (S4606: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is updated (S4607), a display command is set to show the period corresponding to the updated value of the SW valid time counter 223q (S4608), and the process proceeds to S4609.

If it is determined in the processing of S4606 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is not greater than 1 (S4606: No), or if the processing of S4608 is completed, other performance update processing is executed (S4609), and this processing is terminated. Here, in the processing of S4609, processing is executed to update the values of various counters not shown in FIG. 997, and the performance mode according to the update result is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 998, the processing contents of the small win during play update processing (S4602) executed in the presentation update processing (see S3112 in FIG. 997) will be explained. FIG. 998 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the small win during play update processing (S4602). In this small win during play update processing (S4602), processing is executed to set the display mode that is displayed based on the passage of time during small win play.

When the small win game update process (S4602) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not four seconds have passed since the start of the small win game (S4701). In other words, in the process of S4701, it is determined whether or not the notification period of the initial game guide notification executed during the small win game has ended. In the process of S4701, if it is determined that four seconds have passed (S4701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V winning flag 223s is set to ON (S4702). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S4702: Yes), a V performance command for display is set (S4703), the V winning flag 223s is set to OFF (S4704), and this process ends.

In other words, in the processing of S4703, when the game ball enters a specific area (V gate) during the notification period of the first play guide notification, and the player is in a state waiting for the execution of the V performance, processing is executed to execute the V performance based on the fact that the execution conditions of the V performance are met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the V performance immediately after the notification period of the first play guide notification has elapsed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that 4 seconds have not passed (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the small win warning flag is set to ON (S4705). If it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4705: No), then it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the winning game (whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the round game in the small win game) (S4706). If it is determined that 5 seconds have passed (S4706: Yes), it is determined whether the V has been passed (whether the game ball has already entered the specific area) (S4707). If it is determined that the V has not been passed (S4707: No), the small win warning flag is set to ON (S4708), a display attention command is set to encourage the player to win the V (S4709), and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the small win warning flag is set to ON (S4705: Yes), if it is determined in the process of S4706 that 5 seconds have not elapsed (S4706: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4707 that a V has passed (the game ball has already entered the specific area) (S4707: Yes), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 999, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 999 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S3107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S3107) is executed within the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and processing is executed to generate and set display commands based on the operation of the frame buttons 22 and selection button 600 in order to execute presentations in response to the player's operation to enhance the presentation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has been operated (S4801). If it is determined that an operation has been performed (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether the game is currently in a standby state (demo screen is being displayed) (S4802). If it is determined that the game is in a standby state (S4802: Yes), the environment information corresponding to each game environment storage area 223u is updated to correspond to the button operation content (S4803), the mode corresponding to the updated environment information is determined (S4804), a display command corresponding to the determined mode is set (S4816), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the device is not in the standby state (S4802: No), it is then determined whether the device is in the mode selection state (S4805). If it is determined that the device is in the mode selection state (S4805: Yes), the display position of the selection cursor is determined in accordance with the button operation content (S4806), and the processing proceeds to S4816. This processing of S4806 switches the position of the arrow ya1 on the performance mode selection screen, which is in the mode selection state described above with reference to FIG. 947(b). If it is determined in the processing of S4805 that the device is not in the mode selection state (S4805: No), the processing proceeds directly to S4816.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S4801 that the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has not been operated (S4801: No), then it is determined whether the decision button 600a has been operated (S4807), and if it is determined that an operation has been performed (S4807: Yes), it is determined whether the device is currently in a standby state (demo screen is being displayed) (S4808), and if it is determined that the device is in a standby state (S4808: Yes), the display of the mode selection state is determined (S4809), and the processing proceeds to S4816.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4808 that the game is not in a standby state (S4808: No), then it is determined whether or not the game is in a mode selection state (S4810), and if it is determined that the game is in a mode selection state (S4810: Yes), the selected presentation mode is stored in the game environment storage area 223u (S4811), and then it is determined whether or not the selected presentation mode is a fixed mode (S4812), and if it is determined that the presentation mode is a fixed mode (S4812: Yes), a fixed mode setting process is executed (S4813), and the game proceeds to processing of S4816.

If it is determined in the process of S4812 that the mode is not fixed (S4812: No), the effect fixed flag 223t is set to OFF (S4814) and the process proceeds to S4816. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4807 that the decision button 600a has not been operated (S4807: No), the effect button operation process is executed (S4815), and then the process proceeds to S4816.

Here, referring to FIG. 1000, the process contents of the fixed mode setting process (S4813) will be explained. FIG. 1000 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the fixed mode setting process (S4813). This fixed mode setting process (S4813) is executed when the fixed mode is selected. In this 32nd control example, the fixed mode is configured to be selectable by the player at will, and when this fixed mode is set, the stage change effect is not executed. However, there are cases where an effect mode including a stage change effect is set as an effect mode of a look-ahead effect to suggest the result of a special pattern lottery to be executed later. In this case, when the fixed mode is selected while a look-ahead effect of an effect mode including a stage change effect is being executed, there is a problem that the stage change effect is executed even though the fixed mode is set.

In addition, when another presentation mode is selected in which a stage change presentation is executed when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and special 1 reserved is acquired, a look-ahead presentation accompanied by a stage change presentation may be set for the special symbol 1 reserved in which a special symbol lottery is executed after the stage change presentation is executed. Even in this case, if a fixed mode is selected in a state in which a look-ahead presentation of a presentation type including a stage change presentation is being executed, the stage change presentation will be executed despite the fixed mode being set.

In contrast, in this 32nd control example, when a fixed mode is selected while a stage-changing performance is on standby, the execution or non-execution of the stage-changing performance and the performance mode of the stage-changing performance can be variably set.

Specifically, when the fixed mode setting process (S4813) is executed, it is first determined whether the stage is waiting to be changed (S4901). If it is determined that the stage is not waiting to be changed (S4901: No), the stage change effect is not yet determined to be executed, so the effect fixed flag 223t is set to ON (S4902) and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4901 that the stage is waiting to be changed (S4901: Yes), it is then determined whether a look-ahead performance is in progress (waiting for a stage change based on the look-ahead performance) (S4903). If it is determined that a look-ahead performance is in progress (S4903: Yes), the result of the special pattern lottery for the next change (the result of the special pattern lottery that is the subject of the look-ahead performance) is determined in advance (S4904), a stage change suggestion performance (see FIG. 948(a)) is executed to suggest that a stage change performance will be executed (S4905), it is then determined whether a win has been received (S4906), and if it is determined that a win has been received (S4906: Yes), the stage change mode is decided as is (S4909), the process of S4902 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4903 that the game is not currently in a look-ahead performance, i.e., that the game is waiting for a stage change performance to be executed based on the number of times the special symbol changes (S4903: No), the performance information related to the stage change performance is cleared (S4907), and instead a performance mode in which a stage change is not executed is determined (S4908), and the game proceeds to processing of S4902. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a stage change performance executed as a performance for entertainment purposes rather than a look-ahead performance to suggest the results of the special symbol lottery in advance after the fixed mode is set, and therefore it is possible to easily provide the performance that the player desires.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4906 that the player has not won, that is, if a stage change effect has been determined as a pre-reading effect based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result), and the result of the special pattern lottery that is the subject of the pre-reading effect (pre-determination result) is a miss (S4906: No), the processes of S4907 and S4908 described above are executed, and then S4902 is executed, and this process ends.

In other words, even if a stage change effect has been determined as the look-ahead effect, if the result of that look-ahead effect (the result of the lottery for the target special symbol) is a miss, a new presentation mode is determined so that the stage change effect is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play for players who have arbitrarily selected the fixed mode due to the execution of a stage change effect.

As explained above, in this 32nd control example, even if a stage change effect has been determined as the effect mode for a later effect (pre-reading effect) at the time the player selects the fixed mode, the system is configured to be able to execute additional processing to determine the effect mode so that the stage change effect will not be executed unless the result of the pre-reading effect in which the stage change effect is executed indicates a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, if a stage change effect is executed after the player arbitrarily selects a fixed mode, that is, if an effect that contradicts the mode type selected by the player is executed, a bonus can be given to the player, so that a decrease in motivation to play due to the execution of an effect that the player does not want can be prevented.

Next, the processing contents of the effect button operation process (S4815) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1001. FIG. 1001 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the effect button operation process (S4815). In this effect button operation process (S4815), processing is executed to determine the game content at the time the effect button 22a is pressed, and to determine the effect mode according to the game content being executed.

When the effect button operation process (S4815) is executed, first it is determined whether the current time is during the effect SW valid period, i.e., the period during which pressing the effect button 22a can be effectively detected (S5001). If it is determined that the current time is during the effect SW valid period (S5001: Yes), it is then determined whether the current time is during a pull-back performance (S5002). If it is determined that the current time is during a pull-back performance (S5002: Yes), a performance mode for showing the performance result determined as the performance result of the pull-back performance is determined (S5003), and processing proceeds to S5008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5002 that the pullback effect is not in progress (S5002: No), then it is determined whether or not the defeat effect is in progress (S5004). If it is determined that the defeat effect is in progress (S5004: Yes), the number of enemies to be reduced this time is determined by lottery with the determined value as the upper limit (S5005), the effect mode corresponding to the determined number of enemies to be reduced is determined (S5006), the value of the remaining number of enemies to be reduced counter is updated to correspond to the determined number of enemies to be reduced (S5007), and the processing proceeds to S5008.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the SW for effect is not in an effective period (S5001: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5004 that the defeat effect is not in progress (S5004: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5008. In the process of S5008, various effect modes to be executed when the effect button 22a is pressed are determined, and this process ends.

By executing the processes of S5005 to S5007, the number of enemies to be reduced when the effect button 22a is pressed during an attack effect is determined. Here, prohibition processing is performed on the number of enemies to be reduced determined in the process of S5005, and during an attack effect executed during a normal jackpot game, prohibition processing is performed so that an enemy reduction number that would result in the number of remaining enemies being a value that corresponds to a specific number is not determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a specific number from being displayed as the effect result of an attack effect executed during a normal jackpot game.

<33rd control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1002 to Fig. 103. The pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example is different from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that the timing at which the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established is different. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example is configured so that when a small win is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is established at the timing when the special pattern (small win pattern) indicating the small win is stopped and displayed, and the normal state is set. In other words, the normal state is set during the execution period of the small win game.

By configuring it in this way, among the game balls shot by right-hitting play executed during a small win game, game balls that do not enter the second variable winning device 650 are prevented from entering the second ball entry port 640, and excessive prize balls can be prevented from being provided to the player during a small win game.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this 33rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that the timing at which the time-saving end condition based on a small win is established is different. Specifically, it differs in that the time-saving end condition is established when the small win game ends, not when the special pattern (small win pattern) indicating a small win is stopped and displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even during a small win game, making it easier to execute a big win game in a state where the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) has been acquired.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, the time-saving state ends when the small winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state. For example, if a small winning symbol is won in the first second special symbol drawing executed after the end of a big winning game, the time-saving state is set only for the variable time (1 second) of the second special symbol drawing in which the small winning symbol was won, and there is a problem that it is difficult to acquire a new special symbol 2 reserved during the time-saving state. In addition, if a reserved consecutive performance is executed during a big winning game, that is, a performance to indicate that winning information indicating a winning symbol (small winning symbol, big winning symbol) is included in the already acquired special symbol 2 reserved symbol, the player can understand that the next winning game (small winning symbol, big winning symbol) will be executed even if the right-hand play to acquire a new special symbol 2 reserved symbol is not executed, so there is a risk that the player will stop playing right-hand from the execution of the reserved consecutive performance to the start of the next winning game.

In this way, when right-hand play is interrupted, the special symbol 2 reservation is not acquired at the time when the jackpot play is executed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is notified in advance that a single reserved consecutive performance will result in a winning, so there is a problem that the conditions for executing multiple reserved consecutive performances are difficult to meet. Furthermore, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, in a state where the reserved consecutive performance has been executed once, the reserved consecutive performance is configured to be executed more easily when the execution conditions for the reserved consecutive performance are met (when the reserved consecutive performance is acquired for a winning) than when the reserved consecutive performance is not executed, so that the reserved consecutive performance can be executed biasedly (continuously) and the performance effect is enhanced. In this pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that the opportunity to execute the reserved consecutive performance consecutively decreases and the performance effect cannot be enhanced by executing a game in which the execution conditions for the reserved consecutive performance are difficult to meet (a game in which the player interrupts right-hand play between the execution of the reserved consecutive performance and the start of the next winning game).

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example, the time-saving state can be continued until the small win game ends, so that game balls that are shot by right-hitting play executed during a small win game and do not enter the second variable winning device 650 can be easily made to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the time-saving state can be continued for a longer period than when the time-saving state is established at the timing when the small win pattern is stopped and displayed as in the 32nd control example described above (when the time-saving end condition is established before the small win game is executed), and it is easier to execute a big win game with the special pattern 2 reserved.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above, the time-saving state can be set during the small win game period, that is, the period during which right-hand play is performed to pass the game ball to the specific area (V gate) 650e3, so even if a consecutive reserved effect is performed, the player can be sure to play right-hand play (right-hand play to pass the game ball to the specific area (V gate) 650e3 (to make a V win)) during the period during which the time-saving state is set, making it easier to obtain the reserved special chart 2.

In other words, this 33rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that it is configured so that the second benefit (special chart 2 reserved) can also be obtained during the right-hit play period to obtain the first benefit (V prize). By configuring it in this way, even if the player does not perform right-hit play with the sole purpose of obtaining the second benefit (special chart 2 reserved), the second benefit can be obtained during right-hit play with the purpose of obtaining the first benefit, allowing the player to play efficiently.

In addition, as in the thirty-third control example, when the system is configured to allow the acquisition of multiple bonuses in an overlapping manner, the period during which only one bonus can be acquired may be set to be short. For example, if the right-hand hit play to acquire the first bonus (V winning) is a right-hand hit play during a small win game, and the right-hand hit play to acquire the second bonus (special symbol 2 reserved) is a right-hand hit play during a time-saving state, and if the system is configured so that some of the game balls launched by the right-hand hit play during the small win game are more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, the system may be configured to be able to determine a short (0.5 second) change time as the change time of the special symbol that wins the small win.

In other words, even if the change time of the special symbol change resulting from a small prize win during the time-saving state (the period during which right-hand play is performed to obtain the second special prize (special symbol 2 reserved)) is set to a short period during which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the small prize play period that is performed after the special symbol (small prize symbol) indicating a small prize win is stopped and displayed (the period during which right-hand play is performed to obtain the first special prize (V entry)) is also a period during which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, making it easy to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this case, the change time of the special pattern change executed during the time-saving state (the right-hand play period to acquire the second privilege (special pattern 2 reserved)) may be set to a uniform short change time (for example, 0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the executed special pattern change, and the ease of the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 may be varied depending on the result of the special pattern lottery. In other words, when a special pattern change corresponding to a miss win is executed, the time-saving state continues for a shorter period by the execution period of the small win game than when a special pattern change corresponding to a small win is executed, so that it may be configured to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the period until the next special pattern change is started when a special pattern change resulting in a miss win is executed than when a special pattern change resulting in a small win is executed. By configuring it in this way, the ease with which a game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state can be varied depending on the result of the special pattern lottery that is executed during the time-saving state, so that the player can be interested not only in the result of the special pattern lottery as to whether or not a winning game will be executed, but also in whether or not the player can obtain the reserved special pattern 2.

The change time for the special symbol change that is executed during the time-saving state (the right-hit play period to obtain the second bonus (special symbol 2 reserved)) may be set to a different length depending on the result of the special symbol lottery that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed. In this case, for the special symbol change that corresponds to a small win in which the time-saving state continues during the small win play period (period A (e.g., 3 seconds)), the change time may be set to period B (0.5 seconds), and for the special symbol change that corresponds to a loss win, the change time may be set to period C of 3.5 seconds (A (3 seconds) + B (0.5 seconds)).

By configuring it in this way, the length of the time-saving state that can continue based on special pattern lottery 1 can be unified regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery, so it is possible to obtain special pattern 2 reserve regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery.

In the above example, the elements included in the period during which the time-saving state continues are the period during which the special symbol variation is being performed and the period during which the small win game is being performed, but in detail, the period during which the special symbol variation is displayed in a stopped state (the symbol determination period) is also included. Therefore, the above-mentioned technical concept may be applied by varying the length of the symbol determination period, rather than the variation time of the special symbol variation, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery.

<About the performance content in the 33rd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1002, among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 33rd control example, the contents of characteristic effects different from those in the above-mentioned 32nd control example will be described. This 33rd control example is different from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that the time-saving state continues even during a small win game, and the contents of the display screen displayed during a small win game (the contents of the effects executed during a small win game) are also correspondingly different.

Figure 1002(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a small win game that is the subject of a consecutive hold performance, and Figure 1002(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a special chart 2 hold is acquired while the display screen shown in Figure 1002(a) is being displayed.

The display screen in Fig. 1002(a) differs from the display screen during the small win game in the 32nd control example described above (see Fig. 939(a)) in that a display mode is displayed to indicate that the small win game notified by the hold consecutive performance is in progress, and that a game guide notification is displayed to guide the player to insert the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. The rest of the display content is the same, and the same display content is given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1002(a), if a consecutive reserved play effect was executed during the previous big win game, the words "High probability of consecutive reserved play effect" will be displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm from the end of that big win game until the next big win game is executed, as a display mode to indicate that there is a high probability of a consecutive reserved play effect being executed.

In other words, in this 33rd control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, if the reserved consecutive performance was executed during the previous jackpot game, and the special reserved 2 that has been acquired by the time the final round of the next jackpot game starts has winning information indicating a winning combination (if the execution conditions for the reserved consecutive performance are met), the reserved consecutive performance is always executed. Therefore, by displaying the words "High probability of reserved consecutive performance" on the display screen, the player can be motivated to play a game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (to acquire the special reserved 2) in order to execute the reserved consecutive performances in succession.

The time-saving state continues even during the ongoing small win game period, and in order to inform the player that it is easy to get the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, a second arrow 810a is displayed as a game guide notification, guiding the game to aim for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (obtaining the special chart 2 reservation), in addition to the first arrow 810 that guides the game to aim for a V win. Note that FIG. 1002(a) shows the display screen during a small win game when the special chart 2 reservation has not been obtained at the time the small win game starts.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that a right-hit play executed during a small win game can be used to play both a game aiming for a V win, as indicated by the first arrow 810, and a game aiming for the acquisition of a special chart 2 reservation, as indicated by the second arrow 810a.

As shown in FIG. 1002(a), when multiple game guide notifications are displayed simultaneously, the display mode is set according to the game content notified by each game guide notification. Specifically, since the V winning, which is the execution trigger for executing a jackpot game, has a higher priority as a game content than the acquisition of the special chart 2 reservation, which is necessary to continue the execution of the reservation consecutive performance (because the loss is large if it is not acquired), the first arrow 810 is displayed larger than the second arrow 810a. By configuring it in this way, even if multiple game guide notifications are executed to guide different game contents, it is sufficient to execute the game based on the game guide notification that is displayed largest, and it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In the 33rd control example, the first arrow 810 is always displayed larger than the second arrow 810a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notification mode (display mode) of each game guide notification may be configured to be variable depending on the game situation during the small win game. For example, the first arrow 810 may be displayed larger than the second arrow 810a during the period from when the small win game is played until the game ball is placed in the V-winning position, and the second arrow 810a may be displayed larger than the first arrow 810 during the period from when the game ball is placed in the V-winning position until the small win game is played, during which the special chart 2 reservation has not been acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game by the notification mode (display mode) of each game guide notification displayed on the display screen.

In addition, in this 33rd control example, the display mode (each arrow) of each game guide notification described above is displayed when a small win game is executed, but the display timing is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that a player who understands the content notified by each game guide notification can execute the game notified by each game guide notification. For example, each display mode may be displayed before the small win game starts. Also, each display mode may be displayed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the small win game was executed.

In addition, in this 33rd control example, the first arrow 810 and the second arrow 810a are configured to be displayed simultaneously, but the timing of displaying each arrow is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display only the first arrow 810 immediately after the small win game starts, and then display the second arrow 810a after a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display only the first arrow 810 immediately after the small win game starts, so that the player can easily understand the main game to be performed during the small win game (game aiming for a V win).

The second arrow 810a may be configured to be displayed before the first arrow 810. In this case, the second arrow 810a, i.e., a game guide notification to guide the player in a game aiming to obtain the reserved special chart 2, may be executed based on the setting of the time-saving state, and the second arrow 810a may be configured to continue to be displayed even after the small win game is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 1002(a), if the special chart 2 reservation is acquired before the game ball is placed in a V-winning state, the display screen shown in FIG. 1002(b) will be displayed. FIG. 1002(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content that is displayed when the special chart 2 reservation is acquired during a small win game without a V-winning state.

As shown in FIG. 1002(b), when the special 2 reserved is acquired, it is not possible to acquire any more special 2 reserved, so the second arrow 810a, which is a game guide notification for aiming to acquire the special 2 reserved, is hidden, the area near the second ball entrance 640 disappears from the image displayed in the display area Dm10, and the area near the second variable winning device 650 is enlarged. Then, based on the acquisition of the special 2 reserved, the display mode of the remaining period display ga2a of the small win time gauge ga2 for indicating the remaining period of the small win game is changed to a different display mode from the normal display mode (illumination display in the figure), and the words "Get special 2 reserved" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds while continuing to display "Hit right to make V attacker win!!".

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player that the game aimed at obtaining the special chart 2 reservation among the games executed during the small win game has been completed. Note that in FIG. 1002(b), the display screen when the special chart 2 reservation is obtained before the game ball is placed in the V-winning position is shown, but for example, if the game ball is placed in the V-winning position before the special chart 2 reservation is obtained, a different display screen is displayed depending on the timing of the game ball being placed in the V-winning position.

Specifically, if the game ball enters the V before the special chart 2 reservation is acquired and during the period when the first game guide announcement is being executed (4 seconds after the start of the small win game), the display screen shown in FIG. 1002 (a), that is, the display screen displaying the first arrow 810 and the second arrow 810a, is displayed until the first game guide announcement ends, and after the first game guide announcement ends, a V performance screen indicating that the V has been won is displayed, and a display screen displaying the second arrow 810a is displayed continuously. Also, if the game ball enters the V after the first game guide announcement ends (during the period when the second or subsequent game guide announcements are being executed), a V performance screen is displayed immediately after the V has been won, and a display screen displaying the second arrow 810a is displayed continuously.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation is acquired during the period when the first game guide notification is being executed (four seconds after the start of the small win game), the second arrow 810a is hidden and the display screen shown in FIG. 1002(b) is displayed without waiting for the timing of the end of the first game guide notification. In other words, among the multiple game guide notifications that can be displayed during the small win game, the first game guide notification for guiding the game aiming for a V win is configured to ensure a certain notification period regardless of whether or not a V win is achieved, and the second game guide notification for guiding the game aiming for the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation is configured to end at the time when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, regardless of the length of the notification period. By configuring it in this way, the content of the main game to be performed during the small win game can be easily understood by the player.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, if the special chart 2 reservation has already been acquired at the time the small win game starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 1002(b) is configured to hide the display mode (second arrow 810a) of the game guide notification for aiming to acquire the special chart 2 reservation immediately after the small win game starts, and to display a display mode indicating that the special chart 2 reservation has already been acquired. By configuring it in this way, the game content to be executed during the small win game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the case where the special chart 2 reservation has already been acquired at the time when the small win game is started, the second arrow 810a is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the small win game is started, specifically, for the period until the round game is executed in which it becomes easier to make the game ball enter the V, and when the predetermined period has elapsed, the display screen displayed in FIG. 1002 (b), that is, the display mode of the game guide notification for aiming to acquire the special chart 2 reservation (second arrow 810a) is hidden, and a display mode for indicating that the special chart 2 reservation has already been acquired may be displayed. In this way, by configuring the performance for indicating that the special chart 2 reservation has been acquired to be pseudo-executable, it is possible to notify the player that the special chart 2 reservation has been acquired more clearly than when the second arrow 810a is hidden from the beginning.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in the 33rd control example>
Next, with reference to Fig. 1003 to Fig. 1005, among the control processes executed by the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 33rd control example, the contents that are different from the control processes executed by the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 32nd control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 33rd control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that the timing of the establishment of the time-saving end condition that is established when a small jackpot is won is different, and the control process contents for updating various information related to the establishment of the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state are different.

Specifically, it differs from the 32nd control example described above in that the time-saving update process 2 (see S274 in FIG. 1003) is executed instead of the time-saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 968), and the small win control process 2 (see S1855 in FIG. 1004) is executed instead of the small win control process (see S1805 in FIG. 980). The contents of the control processes other than that are the same, and detailed explanations of the same process contents will be omitted.

Figure 1003 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving update process 2 (S274), which is part of the special symbol fluctuation processing (see S104 in Figure 964) executed within the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 963) executed every 2 milliseconds in the main control unit 110. As shown in Figure 1003, the time-saving update process 2 (S274) differs from the time-saving update process of the above-mentioned 32nd control example (see S224 in Figure 968) in that the small win time-saving update process executed when a small win is won (see S615 in Figure 968) has been deleted, but is otherwise the same.

In other words, in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, the small win time-saving update process was configured to be executed so that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the winning of a small win, is established when a special symbol (small win symbol) for indicating a small win is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the present 33rd control example, the time-saving end condition is not established when the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, but is established when the small win game ends. Therefore, in the time-saving update process 2 (S274) executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving update process based on the winning of a small win (small win time-saving update process) is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the time-saving end condition from being established based on the small win symbol being stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 1003, the time-saving update process 2 (S274) differs from the time-saving update process (S224) only in that the time-saving update process based on the winning of a small prize is not executed, and the processing timing for the establishment of other time-saving end conditions is the same. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, that is, when a small prize is won in the final variation in the time-saving state, the time-saving update process based on the winning of a small prize is not executed at the timing when the special symbol variation stops (the timing when the time-saving update process 2 is executed), but the time-saving update process based on the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, so the time-saving state ends at the timing when the special symbol variation stops. Therefore, the normal state is set during the small prize game that is executed based on the winning of a small prize in the final variation in the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 33rd control example, like the 32nd control example described above, the second special pattern change, which is the final change in the time-saving state, is configured to be more likely to have a longer change time (20 seconds to 30 seconds) than other second special pattern changes during the time-saving state. If a small win is won with the second special pattern change, which is the final change in the time-saving state, a sufficient period can be secured during the period during which the special pattern change is being executed to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even if a small win game in which the normal state is set at the start is executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the contents of small win control process 2 (S1855) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1004. FIG. 1004 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of small win control process 2 (S1855). This small win control process 2 (S1855) differs from the above-mentioned small win control process (S1805 in FIG. 980) in that a process for updating information regarding elements for establishing the time-saving end condition at the end timing of the small win game is added, but is otherwise the same. The same process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When the small win control process 2 (S1855) is executed, first, the same processes of S2001 to S2018 as those of the small win control process described above (see S1805 in FIG. 980) are executed. Then, when the process of S2018 is completed, the small win time-saving update process 2 is executed (S2051), and this process ends. In the small win time-saving update process 2 (S2051), a process is executed to subtract the value of the small win counter 203s at the timing when the small win game ends, and if the value of the small win counter 203s after subtraction becomes 0, a process is executed to end the time-saving state and set the normal state.

Now, referring to FIG. 1005, the processing contents of the small win time-saving update process 2 (S2051) will be described. FIG. 1005 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the small win time-saving update process 2 (S2051). In this small win time-saving update process 2 (S2051), a process is executed to establish the time-saving end condition based on the end of the small win game. In the above-mentioned 32nd control example, the small win time-saving update process (see S615 in FIG. 969) to establish the time-saving end condition based on the small win win is executed at the timing when the special pattern (small win pattern) for indicating the small win win is stopped and displayed, whereas in this 33rd control example, a process is executed to establish the time-saving end condition based on the small win win at the timing when the small win game ends, but the same processing contents among the executed processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

When the small win time-saving update process 2 (S2051) is executed, first, the value of the small win counter 203s is decremented by 1 (S702), and it is determined whether the value of the small win counter 203s after the decrement is 0 (S703). In the process of S703, if it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203s is 0 (S703: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S704), the values of the time-saving counter 203h and the special chart 2 counter 203t are set to 0 (S705), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S706), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203s is not 0 in the process of S703 (S703: No), various processes of S704 to S706 for terminating the time-saving state are skipped and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this 33rd control example, the time-saving end condition that is established based on winning a small win is configured to be established at the timing when the small win game ends. By configuring it in this way, if a small win is won during the time-saving state, the small win game can be played while the time-saving state is still in place. Therefore, even if the period from when the time-saving state is set to when the small win game is played is short and a new reserved special chart 2 cannot be obtained, it is possible to obtain a new reserved special chart 2 during the small win game. Therefore, it is easier to start a big win game without obtaining a reserved special chart 2, which makes it difficult to execute the consecutive reserved performance, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced.

In the present 33rd control example, as in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, the time-saving end condition is established based on winning a small prize once in the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, so that the time-saving state ends after the first small prize game during the time-saving state ends. However, without being limited to this, the time-saving end condition may be established based on winning two or more small prizes, or the time-saving end condition may be established based on winning a specific number of small prizes for which a specific small prize type is set. Furthermore, the time-saving end condition may be set by associating the number of special pattern changes executed during the time-saving state with the result of the special pattern lottery. For example, if the result of the first and second special pattern lotteries executed during the time-saving state is a specific lottery result (e.g., a small prize), the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small prize, and if the result of the third special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., a miss), the time-saving end condition may be established based on the miss win. The game may also be configured so that the time-saving end condition is met when a specific lottery result (e.g., a miss) occurs a predetermined number of times in succession (e.g., three times).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving end condition will be met. Therefore, compared to pachinko machine 10 in which the number of special pattern lotteries that can be executed before the time-saving end condition is met is fixed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the time-saving state will continue, and it is possible to prevent the game during the time-saving state from becoming monotonous and the player becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the present 33rd control example, the time-saving state is configured to end when the small win game ends, so that the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 by using the small win game period during which the right-hand hit game is executed, but a different timing can be set as the timing for ending the time-saving state to achieve the same purpose, and for example, the time-saving end condition can be established when the round game of the small win game starts. Even in this case, the time-saving state can be set during the opening period of the small win game, so that the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 more easily than when the time-saving end condition is established when the small win pattern is stopped and displayed. In particular, during the opening period of the small win game, even though the game guide announcement for aiming for a V win is being executed, the second variable winning device 650 is not yet activated to a state in which it can win, so the game ball launched by right-hand play does not win the second variable winning device 650, and it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to reach the electric role 640a installed downstream of the second variable winning device 650. This allows the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 640 efficiently, and the game ball launched by right-hand play executed prior to the start of the round game can be effectively utilized, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling suspicious about the timing of the game guide announcement for aiming for a V win.

In addition, by having the player eagerly play right-hand to get the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 before the round play starts and to win the special chart 2 reservation, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the V immediately after the round play starts, which prevents the game ball from being unable to enter the V during the round play, which would significantly reduce the player's motivation to play, and also makes it easier to increase the number of jackpot games executed per unit time.

In this 33rd control example, when the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state is a small prize winning, a small prize game in which the time-saving state continues and a small prize game in which the time-saving state does not continue can be determined according to the number of times the special pattern changes in the special pattern lottery in which the small prize winning occurs. However, without being limited to this, for example, the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied may be different depending on the type of small prize set. For example, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on a small prize winning in which a first small prize type is set, the time-saving state may be ended after the end of the small prize game, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on a small prize winning in which a second small prize type different from the first small prize type is set, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing when the small prize pattern stops being displayed (or the timing when the small prize game starts).

By configuring it in this way, when a small win game is played that ends the time-saving state, it is difficult for the player to predict whether the time-saving state will continue during the small win game. This creates a situation in which it is difficult for the game ball, which is continuously shot by right-hand play from the time when the small win pattern is stopped and displayed, to enter the second variable winning device 650 or the second ball entrance 640 in an attempt to obtain a special chart 2 reservation during the opening period of the small win game.

Therefore, if a small jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the player can have the fun of choosing whether or not to continue playing with the right hand. In this case, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 is set so that it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the round play of the small jackpot game, and it is preferable to configure the opening period of the small jackpot game during the time-saving state to be the period when it is easiest for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, if a right-hand play is performed after determining whether or not the time-saving state is continuing during a small win game, the game board 13 can be configured so that the released game ball is less likely to reach the second variable winning device 650 during the opening period. By configuring it in this way, right-hand play must be performed continuously from before the small win game begins in order to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the small win game, so that the player can be provided with the fun of predicting the future game situation and selecting a game method.

<Regarding the processing contents of the voice lamp control device in the 33rd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1006 to Fig. 1009, the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 33rd control example, which is different from the above-mentioned 32nd control example, will be described. This 33rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that the time-saving state continues even during the small win game by configuring the timing of the time-saving end condition that is established based on the small win win among the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state to be established at the end timing of the small win game. And, the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 also differs in that the content of the performance executed during the small win game is different.

Specifically, in this 33rd control example, compared to the 32nd control example described above, the difference is that pending information related processing 2 (see S3258 in FIG. 1006) is executed instead of pending information related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 984), and small win related processing 2 (see S3558 in FIG. 1008) is executed instead of small win related processing (see S3508 in FIG. 993), but otherwise it is the same. The same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1006, the processing contents of reserved information related process 2 (S3258) will be explained. FIG. 1006 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of reserved information related process 2 (S3258). This reserved information related process 2 (S3258) differs from the reserved information related process of the 32nd control example described above (S3208 in FIG. 984) in that it determines whether or not the timing when the reserved ball count command indicating the acquisition of reserved special chart 2 is received is during a small win game, and in that it executes reserved acquisition processing during a small win when a reserved ball count command indicating the acquisition of reserved special chart 2 is received during a small win game, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When the reserved information related process 2 (S3258) is executed, first, the processes S3301 to S3310 are executed, which are the same as the reserved information related process of the 32nd control example described above (S3208 in FIG. 984). Then, in the process of S3307, if it is determined that the special chart is not changing (S3307: No), it is determined whether or not a small win is currently being played (S3351). Note that in the process of S3351, the determination of whether or not a small win is currently being played is performed using the information stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g, i.e., information indicating the current game state stored based on the state command output from the main control unit 110.

If it is determined in the process of S3351 that a small win is in progress (S3351: Yes), a small win reserve acquisition process is executed to determine the presentation mode in the case where a special chart 2 reserve is acquired during a small win (S3352), and then the process proceeds to S3310. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3351 that a small win is not currently in progress (S3351: No), the process proceeds to S3310 without executing S3352.

Next, the processing contents of the reserve acquisition processing during small win (S3352) executed in the reserve information related processing 2 (see S3258 in FIG. 1006) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1007. FIG. 1007 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reserve acquisition processing during small win (S3352). In this reserve acquisition processing during small win (S3352), when a special chart 2 reserve is acquired during a small win game that is the target of the reserve consecutive performance, that is, when a small win game that is the target of the reserve consecutive performance is executed without acquiring the special chart 2 reserve and the display screen of FIG. 1002(a) is displayed, a process is executed to determine the performance mode that can be used when the special chart 2 reserve is acquired.

When the reserve acquisition process during a small win (S3352) is executed, first it is determined whether the reserve consecutive flag 223o is set to on (S5101), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S5101: Yes), a presentation mode for indicating that a special chart 2 reserve has been acquired during small win play is determined, a display command corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set (S5102), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the reserve consecutive flag 223o is not set to on (S5101: No), the process of S5102 is skipped and this process ends.

The display command set by the processing of S5102 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output processing (see S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main processing (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S5102, it displays a display mode indicating that the special pattern 2 reservation has been acquired on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1002 (b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 1008, the processing contents of small win related process 2 (S3558) will be explained. FIG. 1008 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of small win related process 2 (S3558). This small win related process 2 (S3558) differs from the small win related process in the above-mentioned 32nd control example (see S3508 in FIG. 993) in that when a small win start command is received, a small win guidance mode setting process is executed to set a game guidance notification to encourage the acquisition of special chart 2 reservation during small win play, but the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When the small win related process 2 (S3558) is executed, first, as in the small win related process of the 32nd control example described above (see S3508 in FIG. 993), it is determined whether a small win start command has been received (S4201), and if it is determined that a small win start command has been received (S4201: Yes), a display small win start command is set (S4202). The display small win start command set by the process of S4202 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display small win start command, in addition to the display mode to indicate that the small win game has started, it displays on the third pattern display device 81 a display mode (first arrow 810) to guide the player to aim for a V win as a game guide notification to guide the player on how to play during the small win game (see FIG. 1002(a)).

After completing the processing of S4202, it is next determined whether the right hit flag is set to ON (S4203), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4203: Yes), the small win guidance mode setting process is executed (S4251) to set a game guide notification to encourage the acquisition of reserved special chart 2 during small win play, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the right-hit flag is not set to on (S4203: No), the right-hit flag is set to on (S4204), a display command to guide right-hit play is set (S4205), and then the processing of S4251 is executed, and this processing is terminated. Here, in the processing of S4203, it is determined that the right-hit flag is not set to on when a small jackpot is won in a state in which the normal state is set, specifically, when a small jackpot is won (1/65536 winning probability) in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed in the normal state, and when a small jackpot is won (1/2 winning probability) in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state using the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the time-saving state.

If it is determined in the processing of S4201 that the small win start command has not been received (S4201: No), the processing of S4206 to S4216 is executed, which is the same as the small win control processing of the 32nd control example described above (see S3508 in FIG. 993), and this processing ends.

Next, the processing contents of the small win guidance mode setting processing (S4251) executed in the small win related processing 2 (see S3558 in FIG. 1008) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1009. FIG. 1009 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the small win guidance mode setting processing (S4251). In this small win guidance mode setting processing (S4251), processing is executed to determine the presentation mode when a small win game is executed without acquiring the special chart 2 reservation.

When the small win guidance mode setting process (S4251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol 2 reserved is acquired (S5201). If it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c is 0 (S5201: Yes), it is next determined whether the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S5202). In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S5202: Yes), that is, if the special symbol 2 reserved is not acquired at the time when the small win game that is the target of the reserved consecutive performance is executed, a display command is set that indicates the guidance mode for guiding the acquisition of the special symbol 2 reserved (S5204), and this process is terminated.

The display command set by the processing of S5204 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S5204, it displays a display mode (such as the second arrow 810a or an image display including the area near the second ball entrance 640 displayed in the display area Dm10) to guide the player in the game aiming to obtain the special symbol 2 reservation during the small win game on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 1002(a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5202 that the pending consecutive flag 223o is not set to ON (S5202: No), a display command is set to indicate that the time-saving state is continuing (S5203), and this processing is terminated.

The display command set by the processing of S5203 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S5203, it displays a display mode (such as an image display including the area near the second ball entrance 640 displayed in the display area Dm10) to indicate that the time-saving state is continuing during the small win game on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1002(a)).

As explained above, in this 33rd control example, the display mode during a small win game that is executed during the time-saving state is determined based on the setting status of the reserved consecutive flag 223o and the acquisition status of the reserved special chart 2. When the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to on, that is, in a situation where consecutive reserved consecutive performances are likely to be executed consecutively, it is configured to make it easier to acquire the reserved special chart 2 during a small win game than when the reserved consecutive flag 223o is not set to on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a big win game from being executed without acquiring the reserved special chart 2.

<34th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 34th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1010 to Fig. 1025. The 34th control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that the presentation mode of the reserved special symbol 1 pattern for showing the player the execution right of the first special symbol lottery that has already been acquired (reserved special symbol 1) is different. The other configurations are the same, and detailed explanations of the same configurations will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example is configured to make it easier to acquire the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reservation) in the normal state, as in the 32nd control example described above, and is configured to make it possible to acquire up to four special pattern 1 reservations. The display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the special pattern 1 reservation pattern as a display mode for allowing the player to understand the number of special pattern 1 reservations that have been acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether a new special pattern 1 reservation can be acquired (whether the number of special pattern 1 reservations that have been acquired has reached the upper limit or not), so that when a new special pattern 1 reservation can be acquired (the number of special pattern 1 reservations that have been acquired has not reached the upper limit), the player can be made to play with enthusiasm to acquire a new special pattern 1 reservation, and when a new special pattern 1 reservation cannot be acquired (the number of special pattern 1 reservations that have been acquired has reached the upper limit), the game to acquire the special pattern 1 reservation is interrupted, thereby suppressing the launch of unnecessary game balls.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example is also configured to be able to execute a reserve change presentation using the special symbol 1 reserved symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This reserve change presentation is a presentation for suggesting to the player the advance determination result (pre-reading result) of the winning information contained in the acquired special symbol 1 reserved, and is executed during the period (pre-reading period) from when the special symbol 1 reserved is acquired until when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) based on the acquired special symbol 1 reserved is executed.

In other words, if it is decided to execute a reserve change effect when the third special chart 1 reserve is acquired out of the maximum of four special chart 1 reserves that can be acquired, the special chart 1 reserve pattern corresponding to the third special chart 1 reserve is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and then a reserve change effect is executed to suggest the advance determination result (pre-reading result) of the winning information contained in the third special chart 1 reserve, spanning the remaining change time of the ongoing special pattern change and the period during which the special pattern change based on the first and second special chart 1 reserves is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier to predict the results of the special pattern lottery in advance through the reserve change presentation when playing while continuing to acquire a large number of reserved special charts 1, compared to when playing while continuing to acquire a small number of reserved special charts 1 (no reserved special charts 1). Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play in an attempt to acquire as many reserved special charts 1 as possible.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example, in order to enhance the presentation effect by displaying the special chart 1 reserved pattern, the special chart 1 reserved patterns other than the special chart 1 reserved pattern for which the reserved change presentation is performed are also configured to be displayed in a display mode accompanied by a predetermined action. Specifically, each special chart 1 reserved pattern is configured to be displayed in a display mode (standard display mode) that sways up and down within a range that does not deviate from the display area (reserved display area) in which each special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is easier for players to have hope that the reserve change effect will be executed even for the special chart 1 reserve pattern that is not the target of the reserve change effect and is displayed in the standard display mode.

As described above, if a display mode accompanied by a specified action is configured to be displayed as the standard display mode for the reserved special pattern 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to synchronize the display modes of multiple (up to four) reserved special pattern 1 patterns displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In other words, if the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the special chart 1 reserved pattern based on the acquisition of the special chart 1 reserved pattern, and the special chart 1 reserved pattern is configured to be displayed in a display mode accompanied by a specified action from the display timing, the timing at which the special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed differs depending on the timing at which the special chart 1 reserved pattern is acquired, that is, the timing at which the game ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, if the special chart 1 reserved pattern already displayed is displayed in a position different from the initial position as a specified action, and a new special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed in the initial position to execute the specified action, the action content of the two special chart 1 reserved patterns will be misaligned, and multiple special chart 1 reserved patterns will be displayed in a display mode that lacks unity, resulting in a problem of reduced presentation effect.

In response to this, the present 34th control example is configured to be capable of executing a synchronization process for synchronizing the display mode of the reserved special pattern 1 that is already being displayed. Specifically, when it is determined that it is time to execute a new performance, such as when a new special pattern variation is to start or when a stage transition is to occur, a process is executed to execute a predetermined action from the initial position for all of the reserved special pattern 1 that is being displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to synchronize the display modes of each Special Chart 1 reserved pattern, which were previously performed separately based on the timing of display, and therefore it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display modes of the Special Chart 1 reserved patterns, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, it is possible to unify the control for displaying the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern to indicate that the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern has been acquired, and the control for executing a specified action on the displayed Special Chart 1 reserved pattern, thereby simplifying the control content for displaying the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern.

In addition, in this 34th control example, the same action is executed regardless of the display timing of the special chart 1 reserved pattern, and even if the display contents (action contents) of each special chart 1 reserved pattern are misaligned, the display contents (action contents) of each special chart 1 reserved pattern are unified by a synchronization process executed later. However, without being limited to this, for example, the main control device 110 may be provided with a specification means capable of specifying the display timing for displaying the special chart 1 reserved pattern in a standard display mode, and when the special chart 1 reserved pattern is acquired, the special chart 1 reserved pattern may be displayed in the standard display mode based on the display timing specified by the specification means.

By configuring it in this way, there will be a slight difference between the timing when the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern is actually acquired and the timing when the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed, but since the display mode (action content) of multiple Special Chart 1 reserved patterns can always be displayed in sync, it is possible to omit the process of synchronizing the display mode of multiple Special Chart 1 reserved patterns that are displayed in a staggered manner.

Furthermore, when the reserved special chart 1 is acquired, a new reserved special chart 1 pattern may be displayed as a still image, and then, based on the display timing identified by the identification means, the reserved special chart 1 pattern that was displayed as a still image may be displayed in a standard display mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to immediately grasp the acquisition status of the reserved special chart 1, and it is also possible to prevent the action content of multiple reserved special chart 1 patterns from being displayed out of sync.

In addition, in this 34th control example, a number of stage types (rabbit stage, hero stage) can be determined as the type of presentation to be executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the stage can be switched when a new special pattern variation starts. By configuring it in this way, even if the special pattern lottery that results in a miss continues for a long time, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early by switching the stage type to execute a different presentation.

Furthermore, as described above, in this 34th control example, the hold change performance is configured to be executed across a period in which multiple special pattern changes are executed, so an event may occur in which the stage type changes during the execution period of the hold change performance. The presentation mode of the hold change performance is made different depending on the stage type. In other words, if the stage type changes while the hold change performance is being executed, processing is executed to switch the presentation mode of the hold change performance midway.

In the 34th control example, the special reserved symbol 1 continues to be visible to the player even when the stage type is changed, but without being limited to this, a part of the display mode of the stage switching performance executed when the stage type is changed may be displayed so that the display area in which the special reserved symbol 1 is displayed is difficult for the player to see, and the display mode (action content) of the special reserved symbol 1 executed before the stage type is changed to the display mode (action content) corresponding to the stage type after the change may be difficult for the player to see. By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the reserved change performance based on the change in stage type can be changed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example is configured to have a synchronous period in which the display contents (action contents) of the special chart 1 reserved pattern are synchronized, and an asynchronous period in which they are not synchronized, and when the stage type is switched during the synchronous period, the reserve change performance that inherits the performance contents of the reserve change performance executed before the switch is executed in accordance with the stage type after the switch. On the other hand, when the stage type is switched during the asynchronous period, a process is executed to re-determine the performance mode of the reserve change performance when the stage type is switched, and a reserve change performance corresponding to the stage type after the switch is executed based on the determined performance mode.

In other words, depending on the timing of the stage type change, the presentation mode of the reserve change presentation that was being executed before the stage type was changed can be changed to correspond to the stage type after the change. By making the stage type switchable in this way, not only can a variety of presentations be provided to the player, but the content of the information related to the game that is given to the player (the presentation results of the reserve change presentation) can be changed depending on the timing of the stage type change, so that the player can also be interested in the timing of the stage type change.

Furthermore, in this 34th control example, when a hold change presentation corresponding to a winning combination is being executed, it is more likely that a presentation mode with a high expectation of winning will be determined as the presentation mode of the hold change presentation corresponding to the stage type after the change when the stage type is switched during an asynchronous period than when the stage type is switched during a synchronous period.

<About the performance content in the 34th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1010 to Fig. 1014, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 34th control example, the details of the effect contents related to the reserved special pattern 1 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 will be described. Note that the same elements (display elements displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) as those executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example described above will be given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1010(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the right to execute the third first special pattern lottery (third special pattern 1 reserved) is acquired during the execution of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) variation. As shown in Figure 1010(a), the sub-display area Ds formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is formed with a first sub-display area Ds1, which is a reserved pattern display area for displaying the acquired right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved), and a second sub-display area Ds2, which is an active reserved pattern display area for displaying an active reserved pattern corresponding to the active special pattern lottery.

The first sub-display area Ds1 displays the first base m1, second base m2, third base m3, and fourth base m4 as reserved pattern display areas to indicate that up to four special chart 1 reserved patterns can be obtained, and when a special chart 1 reserved pattern is obtained, the special chart 1 reserved patterns are displayed in the corresponding positions, starting from the first base m1. When a new special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery) is executed, a performance is executed in which the special chart 1 reserved (first special chart 1 reserved) hr1 displayed in the position corresponding to the first base m1 in the first sub-display area Ds1 moves to the position corresponding to the 0th base m0 displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2.

In other words, the display mode displayed as the reserved special pattern 1 is configured to be visible to the player not only until the corresponding special pattern lottery is executed, but also during the period after the corresponding special pattern lottery is executed (the period until the corresponding special pattern change is stopped and displayed). By configuring it in this way, the reserved special pattern 1, whose display mode has been changed by the reserved change performance, can be displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 as a pending pattern during the execution period of the corresponding special pattern change, so that the special pattern change change performance can be determined while understanding the contents of the pre-determination result notified to the player by the reserved change performance (the performance result of the reserved change performance), and therefore it is possible to provide a performance that is easy to understand for the player.

In the present 34th control example, the pending pattern is continuously displayed until the special pattern change ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending pattern may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the special pattern change starts, and the pending pattern may not be displayed thereafter. In the present 34th control example, when the normal state is set as the game state and the first special pattern lottery is mainly executed, as shown in FIG. 1010(a), the sub-display area Ds on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be able to display up to four special pattern 1 reserved patterns to indicate the number of acquired first special pattern lottery execution rights. In addition, the 34th control example differs from the 32nd control example described above only in that the presentation mode of the reserved special symbol 1 pattern for indicating to the player the right to execute the first special symbol lottery that has already been acquired (reserved special symbol 1 pattern) is different, so when the time-saving state is set as the game state, as in the 32nd control example described above, the reserved special symbol 1 pattern is not displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 938(a)). In other words, even if the reserved special symbol 1 is acquired during the time-saving state, the value of the counting means (first special symbol reserved ball count counter) that counts the number of reserved special symbols 1 is simply updated, and the reserved special symbol 1 pattern is not displayed.

The diagram shown in FIG. 1010(a) shows a time when the rabbit stage is set as the stage type, the first special symbol change is in progress, the third reserved special symbol 1 is acquired, and the reserved third special symbol 1 symbol is displayed. In the display area Dm4, the third symbol is displayed in a display mode (three arrows are displayed in the diagram) indicating that the first special symbol change is in progress. In the display area Dm5, "Rabbit Stage" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the current stage type is the rabbit stage. In the main display area Dm, a change performance is executed during the rabbit stage in a performance mode using a rabbit-like character 801 (a performance mode dedicated to the rabbit stage).

In addition, the first sub-display area Ds1 formed in the sub-display area Ds displays the first base m1 to the fourth base m4, with the already acquired first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1 displayed at a position corresponding to the first base m1, and the second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2 displayed at a position corresponding to the second base m2. The first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1 and the second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2 are displayed in a normal display mode (shown by a circle in the figure) indicating that they are not the subject of the reserved change performance, and each reserved pattern is displayed oscillating vertically in sync on the corresponding bases m1 and m2.

Then, based on the acquisition of the third reserved special chart 1, the third reserved special chart 1 pattern hr3 is displayed in a manner that moves to a position corresponding to the third base m3. The third reserved special chart 1 pattern hr3 is the reserved special chart 1 pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance, and is displayed in a display manner that corresponds to the reserved change performance.

Here, the contents of the reserved change performance executed when the rabbit stage is set as the stage type will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example, the display mode of the corresponding special chart 1 reserved pattern can be changed to three stages by the reserved change performance, and the display mode (stage) to be finally displayed in the reserved change performance is determined based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) based on the winning information included in the special chart 1 reserved corresponding to the reserved change performance. Specifically, the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern can be determined to the first stage, second stage, and third stage, and the display mode of the third stage is more likely to be determined when the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) is a winning win than when it is not a winning win. Also, when the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) is a winning win, the display mode of the third stage is more likely to be determined than the display mode of the first stage, and the display mode of the first stage is more likely to be determined when it is not a winning win than when it is a winning win.

In other words, when the result of the hold change effect is a third stage display mode, the likelihood that the special chart 1 hold that is the target of the hold change effect contains winning information indicating a win is increased compared to when the result is a first stage display mode.

The display mode of the reserved pattern of the third special chart 1 shown in FIG. 1010(a) is the display mode of the first stage in the reserved change performance, and is displayed in a display mode imitating the silhouette of a rabbit as a display mode corresponding to the rabbit stage. In this 34th control example, a performance in which the display mode of the target reserved pattern of the first special chart is changed in stages is executed as the reserved change performance, and since the display mode shown in FIG. 1010(a) is the display mode of the first stage executed in the rabbit stage, the third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3 is marked with "1" indicating the number of stages. By configuring in this way, the number of stages displayed in the reserved performance being executed can be easily notified to the player. In this 34th control example, the current number of stages is displayed for the display mode that is variably displayed by the reserved change performance, so that an easy-to-understand performance is provided to the player, but this is not limited to this. For example, the total number of stages that can change the display mode by the reserved change performance and the current number of stages may be displayed, or the number of times the display mode has been changed by the reserved change performance may be displayed instead of the current number of stages. Note that the state shown in FIG. 1010(a) is a state in which the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) has not been acquired; however, for example, in the normal state, if the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired during the period in which the first special pattern variation to show the result of the first special pattern lottery is being executed, a notification effect may be executed to notify that the special pattern 2 reserved has been acquired, or the display mode to show the acquired special pattern 2 reserved may be configured to be displayed smaller than the special pattern 1 reserved pattern.

When the performance progresses from the state shown in FIG. 1010(a) and the third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3 is displayed at the position corresponding to the third pedestal m3, the display screen shown in FIG. 1010(b) is displayed. FIG. 1010(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the first special chart 1 reserved pattern (first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1) to the third special chart 1 reserved pattern (third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3) are displayed at the positions corresponding to each pedestal.

In this 34th control example, when the special chart 1 reserved pattern (e.g., the first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1) is positioned at a location corresponding to the display position (e.g., the first base m1), a display mode is configured to be displayed in which an action motion (a 0.5-second upward motion followed by a 0.5-second downward motion and a rocking motion to the initial position) is repeatedly performed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second). Here, the special chart 1 reserved pattern is configured to be displayed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 and a reserved ball count command indicating that a new special chart 1 reservation has been obtained is output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and the audio lamp control unit 113 receives the reserved ball count command.

In other words, regardless of the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the already acquired special chart 1 reserved pattern (whether it is ascending or descending), a new special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed to indicate that a new special chart 1 reserved pattern has been acquired. Therefore, in the second sub-display area Ds2, multiple special chart 1 reserved patterns with the same action action content but different action action start timing are displayed, and there is a problem that the effect of the presentation is reduced by continuing the inconsistent presentation.

In this 34th control example, the newly displayed reserved special pattern 1 is also configured to start an action action at its own timing, regardless of the action action timing of the reserved special pattern 1 that is already displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1010(b), the already displayed first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1 and second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2 have synchronized action operations, whereas the newly displayed third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3 starts an action operation at a different timing than the first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1 and second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2.

However, in the present 34th control example, when a new special pattern variation is started, a synchronization process is executed to synchronize the action operation for each displayed special pattern 1 reserved pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1011(a), at the timing when the ongoing special pattern variation is stopped, a process is executed to stop the action operation of each special pattern 1 reserved pattern and stop the display of each special pattern 1 reserved pattern in its initial position. Then, as shown in FIG. 1011(b), the action operation of each special pattern 1 reserved pattern is started at the same timing as the timing when a new special pattern variation is started, that is, the display timing when the display position of each special pattern 1 reserved pattern shifts.

In this way, when a predetermined synchronization condition is met (when a new special pattern change starts) for each reserved special pattern 1 that has started its action action in accordance with the display timing, the action action of each reserved special pattern 1 is synchronized. This prevents multiple reserved special patterns 1 with different action action start timings from being continuously displayed, which would reduce the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 34th control example, the action operation of each special pattern 1 reserved pattern is synchronized when a new special pattern change is executed, so that the special pattern 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserved acquired while the special pattern change 1 is being executed will execute an action operation at a different timing than the special pattern 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserved acquired before the special pattern change 1 is executed, until the special pattern change 1 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by visually checking the display mode of each special pattern 1 reserved pattern displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2, the number of special pattern 1 reserved acquired during the period when the current special pattern change (special pattern change 1) is being executed can be grasped.

Now, referring to FIG. 1012, the presentation mode of the hold change presentation executed in this 34th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 1012(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the first stage display mode is displayed in the hold change presentation, FIG. 1012(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the first stage display mode is switched to the second stage display mode in the hold change presentation, and FIG. 1012(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the second stage display mode is switched to the third stage display mode in the hold change presentation.

In this 34th control example, the reserved change effect is a display mode of the reserved special symbol 1 in up to three stages, using an effect period that includes at least the period until the special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 1 is executed (pre-reading period), in a manner that corresponds to the set stage type. Figures 1012(a) to (c) show the reserved change effect that is executed when the rabbit stage is set.

As shown in FIG. 1012(a), when the reserve change performance is executed, the special chart 1 reserved pattern (second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2) is displayed in a display mode that imitates the silhouette of a rabbit, which is a different display mode from the normal special chart 1 reserved pattern (first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1). This display mode that imitates the silhouette of a rabbit shows the display mode of the first stage in the reserve change performance of the rabbit stage. In this way, by making the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change performance different from the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is not the target of the reserve change performance, it is possible to easily inform the player which of the maximum four special chart 1 reserved patterns that can be displayed are the target of the reserve change performance.

In the 34th control example, the action operation contents are synchronized between the special 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change performance and the special 1 reserved pattern that is not the target of the reserve change performance to create a unified performance, but the display mode of the special 1 reserved pattern is made different to make it easier for the player to understand which special 1 reserved pattern is the target of the reserve change performance. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to configure the player to understand which special 1 reserved pattern is the target of the reserve change performance by making the content of the action operation different without making the display mode of the special 1 reserved pattern different.

In this case, when a new special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the action action is executed based on a unique timing as in the 34th control example, and when the synchronization condition is established, the action action is executed in a different manner for the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance in a different manner from other special chart 1 reserved patterns. By configuring in this way, the action action is executed at different timings immediately after the special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed, so that it is possible to create a sense of expectation that all special chart 1 reserved patterns will be the target of the reserved change performance. In addition, unless multiple (three or more) special chart 1 reserved patterns are displayed, it is difficult to identify the special chart 1 reserved pattern for which the action action is executed in a different manner from other special chart 1 reserved patterns, so that a player who is watching the reserved change performance can be motivated to continue playing with many special chart 1 reserved patterns displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 1012(a), the first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1 and the second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2 perform action actions in synchronization, and when the display mode of the second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2, which is the subject of the reserved change performance, switches from the first stage to the second stage, a dedicated action action is performed as shown in FIG. 1012(b). Specifically, normally, a 1-second action action (a 0.5-second upward movement followed by a 0.5-second downward movement to return to the initial position) is repeatedly performed, whereas when the display mode is changed by the reserved change performance, a 2-second dedicated action action is performed, which is a 0.5-second upward movement followed by a 0.2-second additional upward movement, a 0.6-second display mode switching display, a 0.2-second additional downward movement, and a 0.5-second downward movement.

In this way, by enlarging the area in which the special 1 reserved pattern moves compared to the normal action action, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the special 1 reserved pattern whose display mode is changed in the reserved change presentation. Also, since the length of the execution period (2 seconds) of the dedicated action action for changing the display mode in the reserved change presentation is configured to be twice the length of the execution period (1 second) of the normal action action, the action actions of the special 1 reserved pattern after the dedicated action action has ended and the other special 1 reserved patterns can continue to be synchronized, and a presentation with a sense of unity can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1012(c), the display mode can be changed during the special symbol change period, as well as when a new special symbol change starts. FIG. 1012(c) shows the display screen when the display mode is switched to the third stage when the first special symbol 1 reserved symbol hr1, which indicates the second stage display mode in the reserved symbol change performance, shifts to the active base m0, which indicates the active reserved symbol.

As shown in FIG. 1012(c), when the display position of the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 is shifted, it switches from the second stage display mode imitating a rabbit's face to the third stage display mode imitating the whole body of a rabbit and is displayed as the pending pattern hr0 in progress. After that, the pending pattern hr0 displayed in the third stage display mode is displayed at the position corresponding to the pending base m0.

By configuring it in this way, various timings can be set for when the display mode of the reserved pattern for Special Chart 1 changes due to the reserved change presentation, which prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the presentation being executed.

In this 34th control example, the operation content when the display position of the special chart 1 reserved pattern is shifted to another display position is the same for the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance and the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is not the target of the reserved change performance, but it is not limited to this, and the operation content when shifting the special chart 1 reserved pattern may be configured to allow the player to understand whether it is the target of the reserved change performance or not, for example, it is preferable to configure it so that a special operation to shift the special chart 1 reserved pattern using a period longer than the period used for normal shifting can be executed, and the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance is easier to shift by the special operation than the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is not the target of the reserved change performance.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in how the reserved pattern for special pattern 1 will shift when a new special pattern variation starts.

Next, referring to FIG. 1013, the content of the presentation when the stage type is switched while the reserve change presentation is being executed will be described in detail. The pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above, is configured to determine one stage type from among multiple stage types in order to vary the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and to display the display mode corresponding to the determined stage type (execute the stage change presentation), thereby providing the player with a variety of presentations and enhancing the presentation effect.

The stage change performance is configured to be executed based on the number of times the special pattern change is executed, or based on the player's operation of the selection button 600, and is configured to be executable regardless of whether the reserved change performance is executed or not. Furthermore, in order to enhance the performance effect, the reserved change performance is configured to differ in performance mode depending on the set stage type. In addition, if a stage change performance is executed during the execution period of the reserved change performance, the reserved change performance is configured to continue in a performance mode according to the stage type after switching while synchronizing the action operations of each special pattern 1 reserved pattern.

Figure 1013(a) shows a part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when the action operations of all special pattern 1 reserved patterns are synchronized and the rabbit stage is displayed, and Figure 1013(b) shows a part of the display screen after the stage change effect is executed and the hero stage is set while the display screen shown in Figure 1013(a) is displayed. As shown in Figure 1013(a), while the rabbit stage is set, the "rabbit stage" is displayed in the display area Dm5, and the third special pattern 1 reserved pattern hr3, which is the target of the reserved change effect, is displayed in the first stage display mode (display mode imitating the silhouette of a rabbit). And the action operations of the first special pattern 1 reserved pattern hr1 to the third special pattern 1 reserved pattern hr3 are synchronized.

In other words, the state shown in FIG. 1013(a) shows the state after the special chart 1 reserved pattern displayed as the fourth special chart 1 reserved pattern hr4 during the previously executed special pattern change period becomes the target of the reserved change performance, and then, at the timing when the next special pattern change starts, each special chart 1 reserved pattern shifts and moves, and a synchronization process is executed to synchronize the action operation. In this way, when the stage change performance is executed with the action operations of all special chart 1 reserved patterns synchronized, the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern after the switch is changed to the timing when all special chart 1 reserved patterns are positioned at their initial positions.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1013(b), a display mode imitating a sword corresponding to the Hero Stage is displayed as the display mode of the third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3 that is the target of the reserve change performance. Then, all special chart 1 reserved patterns are operated with an action action corresponding to the Hero Stage from the state in which they are located at their initial positions. In this way, when the action actions of all displayed special chart 1 reserved patterns are synchronized, by configuring all special chart 1 reserved patterns to be switched to a display mode corresponding to the stage type after the switch while located at their initial positions, the reserve change performance can be continued without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in this 34th control example, there is an asynchronous period before the action operations of the displayed special 1 reserved patterns are synchronized. In other words, from when a new special 1 reserved pattern is displayed until the next special pattern change begins, the timing at which each special 1 reserved pattern starts its action operation is not synchronized, and each special 1 reserved pattern performs its action operation at different times.

Next, referring to FIG. 1014, the contents of the presentation when a stage change presentation is performed during an asynchronous period when the action actions of the reserved symbols of each special symbol 1 are not synchronized will be described. FIG. 1014(a) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the action actions of the reserved symbols of the special symbol 1 are not synchronized and the rabbit stage is displayed, FIG. 1014(b) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen after the stage change presentation is performed and the hero stage is set while the display screen shown in FIG. 1014(a) is displayed, and FIG. 1014(c) is a diagram showing the action action of the reserved change presentation after the transition to the hero stage. As shown in FIG. 1014(a), while the rabbit stage is set, the "rabbit stage" is displayed in the display area Dm5, and the reserved symbol hr3 of the third special symbol 1, which is the target of the reserved change presentation, is displayed in the first stage display mode (display mode imitating the silhouette of a rabbit).

The action action of the first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1 and the second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2 is synchronized, and only the third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3 is executed at a different timing from the other special chart 1 reserved patterns. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 1014(a) shows a state in which only the third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3 is not synchronized, that is, the first special chart 1 reserved pattern hr1 and the second special chart 1 reserved pattern hr2 are special chart 1 reserved patterns that have been displayed before the currently executed special pattern change starts, and the synchronization process is executed at the timing when the current special pattern change starts, and the third special chart 1 reserved pattern hr3 is displayed during the currently executed special pattern change period.

When a stage change performance is executed in the state shown in FIG. 1014(a), that is, when a stage change performance is executed in a state where all of the special chart 1 reserved patterns are not synchronized, the execution of the stage change performance is triggered by a synchronization process for synchronizing the action operations of each special chart 1 reserved pattern, and an additional lottery is executed to change the presentation mode of the reserve change performance, and the reserve change performance after the stage type is switched is executed based on the result of the additional lottery.

Specifically, as part of the stage change effect, as shown in FIG. 1014(b), a display mode (a display mode imitating smoke in the figure) is displayed to make it difficult for the player to see the display mode of the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserved change effect, and an effect is executed that suggests that the stage indicated by the display mode of the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserved change effect may be promoted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 1014(c), the display mode of the reserved pattern hr3 of the third special chart 1 that is the target of the reserved change performance is a display mode that imitates a sword corresponding to the Hero stage, and a display mode of the second stage is displayed. In other words, in the figure shown in FIG. 1014(c), as a result of the additional lottery, a display mode with an increased number of stages is determined as the reserved change performance, and a display mode with a higher number of stages (second stage) is displayed than the number of stages of the display mode that was displayed before the stage change performance was executed (see FIG. 1014(a)).

In this way, when a stage change performance is executed in a state where the action action of the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserve change performance is not synchronized with the action actions of the other special chart 1 reserved patterns, the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserve change performance is temporarily made difficult to see, and the number of stages indicated by the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserve change performance can be varied (increased), thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if a process is executed to synchronize the action actions of each special chart 1 reserved pattern based on the execution of a stage change performance. In addition, in this 34th control example, the special 1 reserved pattern is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during normal play in which the first special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and when the time-saving state in which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed or the normal state is set, and the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired, the special 1 reserved pattern is configured not to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. However, it is of course possible to apply the technical idea of displaying the remaining number of time-saving times during the time-saving state in the 47th control example described later to the technology related to the display of the special 1 reserved pattern in this 34th control example, that is, a counting means is provided to count the number of memories of the special 1 reserved pattern, and a first state in which the number of memories counted by the counting means is displayed and a second state in which the number is not displayed can be set, and when a predetermined display condition is established in the second state, the first state can be set.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 34th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 34th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1015 to Fig. 1017. The pachinko machine 10 in the 34th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Other than that, the electrical configuration is the same, and the description of the same contents will be omitted.

The 34th control example differs from the 32nd control example described above in that the number of acquired rights to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved) can be displayed as a special pattern 1 reserved pattern on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. And, it differs in that the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes various data tables and various flags used to execute processing for displaying the special pattern 1 reserved pattern.

First, referring to FIG. 1015, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example will be described. FIG. 1015 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example. As shown in FIG. 1015, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example differs from the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example (see FIG. 959(a)) in that a pending action data table 222aa has been added, but the other elements are the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The reserved action data table 222aa is a data table that is referenced when displaying the special 1 reserved patterns (first special 1 reserved pattern hr1 to fourth special 1 reserved pattern hr4) in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In this 34th control example, the special 1 reserved pattern is configured to be displayed with a predetermined action (movement in the vertical direction), and when a new special 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the special 1 reserved pattern is displayed with a predetermined action from the display timing, and when a predetermined synchronization condition (for example, a condition that is established when a new special pattern variation is started) is established, the action operations of the multiple displayed special 1 reserved patterns are synchronized.

By configuring it in this way, if the synchronization condition is established when a new special pattern change is started, it becomes possible to grasp the number of reserved special pattern 1s acquired during the period when one special pattern change is being executed from the action operation contents (action operation deviation) of the multiple reserved special pattern 1s that have already been acquired. Therefore, it becomes easier for a player who is trying to acquire many reserved special pattern 1s during one special pattern change to understand the acquisition results of reserved special pattern 1s.

Here, the contents defined in the pending action data table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 1016. FIG. 1016 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the pending action data table 222aa in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 1016, the pending action data table 222aa defines an action display scenario (action content) with a cycle of 1 second or 2 seconds in correspondence with the set stage type, the type of pending pattern (pending type) that executes the action action, and the type of action action (action type) that is executed. Each special pattern 1 pending pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of the action display scenarios defined in the pending action data table 222aa.

Specifically, when the stage type is "Rabbit Stage", the reserved type is "Normal reserved", and the action type is "Normal", the action display scenario is specified as "0 to 0.5 seconds of rising display, 0.5 to 1 second of falling display". In other words, in the winning command process 3 (see S3271 in FIG. 1019), when the special chart 1 reserved pattern based on the newly received winning information command is displayed, for the special chart 1 reserved pattern for which the reserved change notice was not set, the rising display is executed for 0.5 seconds, and then the falling display is executed for 0.5 seconds, and the display mode is repeated in a 1 second cycle.

In addition, when the stage type is "rabbit stage", the reserved type is "change target reserved", and the action type is "normal", the action display scenario is "0 to 0.5 seconds of rising display, 0.5 to 1 second of falling display", and when the action type is "change time", the action display scenario is "0 to 0.5 seconds of rising display, 0.5 to 1.5 seconds of change action display, 1.5 to 2 seconds of falling display". Here, in the winning command processing 3 (see S3271 in FIG. 1019), when the special chart 1 reserved pattern based on the newly received winning information command is displayed, the timing of executing the reserved change performance (the timing when the change time action is set) is determined for the special chart 1 reserved pattern for which the reserved change notice is set, and the action display of "normal" is executed during the period when the reserved change performance is not executed, and the action display of "change time" is executed during the period when the reserved change performance is executed. In addition, for the special chart 1 reserved pattern for which a reserved change notice has been determined, a display mode different from that of the normal special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed, as shown in FIG. 1014.

As described above, when the "rabbit stage" is set, the action display during "normal times" is specified by a one-second action display scenario, and the action display during "changes" is specified by a two-second action display scenario. Therefore, by synchronizing the action operation timing of the normal special chart 1 reserved pattern and the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the change target, not only is the action display during normal times synchronized, but the action operation can also be synchronized even after the action display during "changes" is executed for the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the change target. Therefore, the action operations of the multiple special chart 1 reserved patterns displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be easily synchronized and displayed, and the performance effect can be enhanced by executing a performance with a sense of unity.

On the other hand, when the stage type is "Hero Stage", the reserved type is "Normal reserved" and the action type is "Normal", the action display scenario is specified as "0 to 1 second upward display, 1 to 2 second downward display". In other words, in the winning command process 3 (see S3271 in FIG. 1019), when the reserved pattern for special chart 1 based on the newly received winning information command is displayed, for the reserved pattern for special chart 1 for which the reserved change notice was not set, the upward display is executed for 1 second, and then the downward display is executed for 1 second, and the display mode is repeatedly displayed in a 2-second cycle.

In addition, when the stage type is "Hero Stage", the hold type is "Change target hold" and the action type is "Normal", the action display scenario is specified as "0 to 1 second rise display, 1 to 2 seconds fall display", and when the action type is "Change", the action display scenario is specified as "0 to 0.5 seconds rise display, 0.5 to 1.5 seconds change action display, 1.5 to 2 seconds fall display".

As explained above, in this 34th control example, the length of the period used for one action operation of the reserved symbol in normal times is configured to differ depending on the stage type that is set. By configuring it in this way, the action operation mode of the reserved symbol in the reserved symbol in the special chart 1 can be changed simply by switching the stage type, so the presentation effect of switching the stage type can be enhanced.

In addition, the length of time used for one action action is different between normal action actions and action actions during changes, so by paying close attention to the action action content of the Special Chart 1 reserved pattern, it is easier to predict whether a reserved change performance will be executed or not.

In addition, the length of the period used for normal action actions in the hero stage is longer than in the rabbit stage, and normal action actions are executed using the same period (2 seconds) as the period used for action actions when reserve change effects are executed in the rabbit stage. By configuring it in this way, players who are playing in the rabbit stage can play in the hope that many reserve change effects will be executed as they switch to the hero stage.

Next, referring to FIG. 1017, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example will be described. FIG. 1017 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example. As shown in FIG. 1017, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that an asynchronous flag 223aa is provided, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The asynchronous flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that among the special pattern 1 reserved patterns displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, there is a special pattern 1 reserved pattern whose action operation display is not synchronized, and is set to on when a special pattern 1 reserved pattern in which an action operation display is executed without synchronizing with other special pattern 1 reserved patterns is displayed (see S5304 in FIG. 1019). Then, when the synchronization condition for synchronizing the action operation display of the special pattern 1 reserved pattern is established, the setting status of the asynchronous flag 223aa is referenced (see S5402, S5407 in FIG. 1021), and if it is determined that it is set to on, a synchronization process for synchronizing the action operation display is executed, and then it is set to off (see S5406 in FIG. 1021).

In this 34th control example, various effects can be executed based on the action operation status of the reserved symbol 1 and the execution timing of the stage change effect. For example, when a stage change effect is executed while a reserved change effect is being executed, a process can be executed to rewrite the presentation mode of the reserved change effect so that a reserved change effect is executed that results in a presentation that is more advantageous to the player than the presentation result of the reserved change effect currently being executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay experience of paying close attention to the timing at which the stage change effect is executed.

In addition, in order to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early, the stage change effect, which had the sole purpose of switching the presentation mode of decorative effects (background display, etc.), can now be made to have the added purpose of varying the presentation results of effects (hold change effects) that give players advance indications of the game results, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect.

<Regarding control processing in the 34th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1018 to FIG. 1025, among various control processes executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 34th control example, the contents of the control processes different from those of the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the 34th control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example described above in that the special pattern 1 reserved pattern for indicating the number of acquisitions (special pattern 1 reserved number) of the execution right of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and is different in that a control process for determining the performance mode regarding the special pattern 1 reserved pattern is added. Therefore, in the 34th control example, a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the above-mentioned 32nd control example, and the other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the processing contents of command determination process 3 (S3173) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1018. FIG. 1018 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 3 (S3173). As shown in FIG. 1018, command determination process 3 (S3173) differs from the command determination process (S3113) of the 32nd control example described above in that when a winning information command is received, winning command process 3 (S3271) is executed, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of winning command processing 3 (S3271) executed in command determination processing 3 (S3173) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1019. FIG. 1019 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning command processing 3 (S3271). This winning command processing 3 (S3271) is processing that is executed based on receiving a winning information command from the main control device 110, and processing is executed to determine the display mode of the reserved pattern of special chart 1 based on the information contained in the received winning information command.

When the winning command process 3 (S3271) is executed, first, the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (S5301), and then it is determined whether there is a reserved change notice (S5302). If it is determined that there is a reserved change notice (S5302: Yes), the reserved change notice presentation mode is determined as the presentation mode of the reserved pattern 1 corresponding to the currently received winning information command (S5303), the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5304), the reserved action data table 222aa is referenced to set the start of the reserved action operation (S5305), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no reserved change notice in the process of S5302 (S5302: No), the process of S5303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5304.

Next, referring to FIG. 1020, the processing contents of variable performance setting process 3 (S4374) will be explained. FIG. 1020 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable performance setting process 3 (S4374). This variable performance setting process 3 (S4374) differs from the variable performance setting process (S4304) of the 32nd control example described above in that a process for determining the display mode of the reserved pattern of special chart 1 at the start of the fluctuation has been added. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

When Variable Performance Setting Process 3 (S4374) is executed, the same processes of S4401 to S4410 as those of the Variable Performance Setting Process (S4304) of the 32nd control example described above are executed. Then, after the process of S4408 is completed, the process does not proceed to S4405, but executes Reserve Mode Determination Process 3 (S4471), and then proceeds to S4405.

In the reserved mode determination process 3 (S4471) executed by the process of S4471, a process is executed to set the action operation of the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 after the start of the special pattern change, based on the action operation content of the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 that is being executed at the timing when the special pattern change starts.

Now, referring to FIG. 1021, the processing contents of the on-hold status determination process 3 (S4471) will be explained. FIG. 1021 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the on-hold status determination process 3 (S4471). When the on-hold status determination process 3 (S4471) is executed, it is first determined whether a on-hold change notification is currently in progress (S5401), and if it is determined that a on-hold change notification is currently in progress (S5401: Yes), it is then determined whether the asynchronous in progress flag 223aa is set to on (S5402).

If it is determined in the processing of S5402 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to on (S5402: Yes), a lottery is executed to promote the presentation mode of the reserved change notice (S5403), a new presentation mode of the reserved change notice based on the promotion lottery is determined (S5404), a synchronization process is executed for each reserved symbol to start the reserved symbol action from the initial position (S5405), the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to off (S5406), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the reserved change notice is not being issued (S5401: No), it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to on (S5407), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S5407: Yes), the process proceeds to S5405. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5402 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to on (S5402: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5407 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to on (S5407: No), there is no need to correct (synchronize) the action operation display of the reserved special pattern 1 that is already displayed at the start timing of the special pattern change, so this process ends as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 1022, the processing contents of the performance update process 3 (S3172) will be explained. FIG. 1022 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance update process 3 (S3172). This performance update process 3 (S3172) differs from the performance update process (S3112) of the 32nd control example described above in that it executes dedicated processing when it is determined that the special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed, and when it is determined that the stage transition condition is met during the execution of the special pattern change. The processing contents are otherwise the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be explained.

When the performance update process 3 (S3172) is executed, first, the same processes of S4601 to S4608 as the performance update process (S3112) of the 32nd control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4606, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is not 1 or more (S4606: No), or if the process of S4608 is completed, it is determined whether there is a reserved display (display of the reserved pattern of special chart 1) (S4671), and if it is determined that there is a reserved display (display of the reserved pattern of special chart 1) (S4671: Yes), the reserved performance update process is executed (S4672) and the process proceeds to S4673.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4671 that there is no reserved display (display of reserved pattern of special chart 1) (S4671: No), it is then determined whether the condition for transition to the changing stage is met (S4673), and if it is determined that the condition is met (S4673: Yes), the process for transition to the changing stage is executed (S4674), and then the process of S4609, which is the same as the performance update process (S3112) of the 32nd control example described above, is executed, and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4673 that the condition for transition to the changing stage is not met (S4673: No), the process of S4674 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4609, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1023, the processing contents of the reserved performance update processing (S4672) executed in the performance update processing 3 (see S3172 in FIG. 1022) will be explained. FIG. 1023 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reserved performance update processing (S4672). In this reserved performance update processing (S4672), processing is executed for determining the display mode based on the display contents determined when the special chart 1 reserved pattern is displayed for each special chart 1 reserved pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

When the reserved performance update process (S4672) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a reserved pattern for special chart 1, which is the start timing for the change performance (S5501). If it is determined that there is a reserved pattern for special chart 1, which is the start timing for the change performance (S5501: Yes), the reserved action data table 222aa is referenced for the reserved pattern for special chart 1, which is the target of the change performance, to determine the performance mode corresponding to the change content (S5502), and the process proceeds to S5503. If it is determined in the process of S5501 that there is no reserved pattern for special chart 1, which is the start timing for the change performance (S5501: No), the process skips S5502 and proceeds to S5503.

Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is on (S5503), and if it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is on (S5503: Yes), the presentation mode for the asynchronous special pattern 1 reserved pattern is determined by referring to the reserved action data table 222aa (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505. Also, in the process of S5503, if it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not on (S5503: No), the process skips S5504 and proceeds to S5505.

In the process of S5505, for other reserved special pattern 1 symbols, i.e., synchronized reserved special pattern 1 symbols for which normal action operations are executed, the presentation mode is determined by referring to the reserved action data table 222aa (S5505), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1024, the processing contents of the changing stage transition processing (S4674) executed in the performance update processing 3 (see S3172 in FIG. 1022) will be explained. FIG. 1024 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the changing stage transition processing (S4674). In this changing stage transition processing (S4674), processing is executed to determine the display mode of the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 when a stage change performance is executed while a special pattern change is being executed.

When the variable stage transition process (S4674) is executed, first, it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to on (S5601), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S5601: Yes), it is specified whether the type of the reserved pattern of the special pattern 1 during asynchronous is a normal reserved pattern or a reserved pattern to be changed (S5602). Then, it is determined whether the reserved pattern of the special pattern 1 during asynchronous is a pattern to be changed (S5603), and if it is determined that it is a pattern to be changed (S5603: Yes), a special mode determination process is executed (S5604), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5603 that the reserved pattern of special chart 1 during asynchronous operation is not subject to change (S5603: No), the presentation mode for stage transition is determined (S5605), the asynchronous operation flag 223aa is set to OFF (S5606), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5601 that the asynchronous operation flag 223aa is not set to ON (S5601: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 1025, the processing contents of the special mode determination processing (S5604) executed in the changing stage transition processing (see S4674 in FIG. 1024) of the performance update processing 3 (see S3172 in FIG. 1022) will be explained. FIG. 1025 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special mode determination processing (S5604). In this special mode determination processing (S5604), processing is executed to determine the performance mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern when a stage change performance is executed while the special chart 1 reserved pattern for which a reserved change notice has been determined is performing an action action in an asynchronous state.

When the special mode determination process (S5604) is executed, first, the operation status of the target reserved pattern 1 (a reserved pattern 1 that is subject to change and whose action operation is asynchronous) is identified (S5701), and it is determined whether the action operation status is in the initial position (S5702). If it is determined that it is in the initial position (S5702: Yes), a normal action operation is set for the other reserved patterns at a timing shifted by 0.5 seconds (S5703), the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to off (S5708), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S5702 that it is not the initial position (S5702: No), it is then determined whether it is in the state before the change performance, that is, whether the display content of the special chart 1 reserved pattern set when the reserved change notice was determined is in a state in which an action display scenario based on the action type at the time of the change has not been determined (S5704). If it is determined that it is in the state before the change performance (S5704: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stage change is displayed, and then a special performance mode for executing the change performance during the remaining period of the action operation period is determined (S5705), and processing proceeds to S5708.

In addition, in the process of S5704, if it is determined that it is not before the change performance (S5704: No), it is determined whether the change performance is in progress, that is, whether the action display scenario based on the action type at the time of the change has been determined (S5706). If it is determined that the change performance is in progress (S5706: Yes), after displaying the blindfold mode, a performance mode is determined in which the display mode corresponding to the changed stage number is displayed (S5707), and processing proceeds to S5708. In the process of S5708, the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to off, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the 34th control example, when a stage change effect is executed while the special reserved symbol 1 for which a reserve change notice has been determined is performing an action action in an asynchronous state, a different effect mode can be determined as a special mode depending on the action action status of the special reserved symbol 1 for which a reserve change notice has been determined. Specifically, when the special reserved symbol 1 for which a reserve change notice has been determined is in an asynchronous state and performing a normal action action, the action action is intentionally executed at a shifted timing after the stage change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily grasp the special reserved symbol 1 for which a reserve change notice has been determined, even after the stage change.

In addition, by simply changing the execution timing of the action action during normal times, the player can easily grasp the special 1 reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserve change notice even after the stage has been changed. Therefore, when the stage is changed while the special 1 reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserve change notice is displayed, there is no need to use display data for executing a dedicated action action, and the data capacity for displaying the special 1 reserved pattern can be reduced.

In addition, even during normal play, the action movements of each reserved pattern in the special chart 1 are configured to be delayed depending on the timing at which the winning information command is received until the synchronization process is executed, making it difficult for the player to know whether a reserved pattern in the special chart 1 that is not the subject of the reserved change notice is being displayed, or whether a reserved pattern in the special chart 1 that is the subject of the reserved change notice is being displayed.

In addition, if a stage change performance is executed before the special chart 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change notice executes a change performance, the display mode of the special chart 1 reserved pattern after the stage change is used to execute a change performance that can be displayed in the remaining time, so that even if a stage change performance is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the change performance of the special chart 1 reserved pattern. In this 34th control example, the start of a new special chart change and the start of a stage change performance are set as conditions for synchronizing the actions of each special chart 1 reserved pattern, but this is not limited to this, and a condition that is established when processing after power-on of the pachinko machine 10 is executed may be set. For example, in the start-up process that is executed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while multiple special chart 1 reserved patterns are displayed, a command related to winning information is transmitted. In other words, regardless of the timing of the start-up winning, a command related to winning information related to multiple special chart 1 reserved patterns is transmitted at the timing when the start-up process is executed. By configuring in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 receives winning information related to multiple reserved special figures 1 at the same time, so that the action operation of each reserved special figure 1 can be synchronized. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to include information indicating the execution of the reserved change performance in the command related to the winning information output in the startup process of the main control device 110, the presentation mode of the reserved change performance may be determined again in the display process of the reserved special figure 1 at the time of startup. By configuring in this way, even if the presentation information related to the display mode (presentation mode) of the reserved special figure 1 is cleared due to the power supply being temporarily cut off while the reserved special figure 1 is displayed, the presentation mode of the reserved special figure 1 can be determined again. In addition, in this 34th control example, the number of stages at which the reserved special figure 1 can be changed is the same depending on the stage type, but the number of stages at which the reserved special figure 1 can be changed may be configured to be different depending on the stage type. In this case, when the stage type is changed, it is preferable to display the reserved special figure 1 corresponding to the changed stage type at a number of stages at which the expectation level is relatively higher than before the change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the value of the display mode of the reserved pattern of special chart 1 from decreasing due to the change in the stage type. Furthermore, when the stage type is changed while the reserved pattern of special chart 1 in which the reserved change performance is executed is displayed, after the stage type is changed, the reserved pattern of special chart 1 is displayed in the display mode of the initial state once, and then the reserved change performance after the stage type is changed is executed. Furthermore, when the technical idea in the 47th control example described later is applied to the control of displaying the display mode (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) for indicating the number of times the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved) has been obtained in this 34th control example, that is, when the technical idea of varying the display timing of the special pattern 1 reserved pattern depending on whether or not the second condition is satisfied (whether or not special pattern 2 reserved has been obtained) when the first condition (setting of the normal state) is satisfied is used as the display condition for the special pattern 1 reserved pattern, the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d possessed by the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this 34th control example corresponds to the remaining time reduction counter in the 47th control example described later, and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e corresponds to the final performance counter in the 47th control example described later. Then, when the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 1, a variable performance (such as a performance during a time-saving state or a pull-back performance) related to the second special symbol lottery is executed, and when the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e becomes 0, the display control is performed so that the special symbol 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is displayed. In addition, in this 34th control example, as in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, if there is a special symbol 2 reserved at the time when the time-saving state (a game state in which the special symbol 1 reserved pattern is not displayed) ends, the special symbol 1 reserved pattern is not displayed until a predetermined period has elapsed even after the transition to the normal state (until all the second special symbol lotteries based on the special symbol 2 reserved pattern are completed), but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 reserved pattern may be displayed at the time of transition to the normal state.

<35th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1026 to Fig. 1064. The pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above in that it is equipped with a decorative movable role object used as part of the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special pattern, and a new variable performance using the decorative movable role object is added.

Conventionally, pachinko machines 10 are known that execute effects using decorative movable parts as part of the variable effects executed during the variable display of special symbols. In such pachinko machines 10, when the decorative movable part moves at a predetermined timing in the variable effect, an effect is executed that indicates a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot, and when the decorative movable part does not move, an effect is executed that indicates a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot, thereby providing the player with the fun of predicting the results of a lottery for special symbols.

However, in such a pachinko machine 10, if a performance using a decorative movable part is set in a state in which the decorative movable part does not operate normally due to a malfunction such as deterioration over time or a failure in the electrical system, there is a risk that the decorative movable part will not perform the operation specified in the operation scenario at the specified timing of the performance, and incorrect game information will be provided to the player.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 35th control example, when a performance using a decorative movable part is executed, it is determined whether the decorative movable part can execute the action specified in the action scenario, and if it is determined that the action cannot be executed, it is configured to switch to an alternative performance using a liquid crystal display that does not use a decorative movable part. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with appropriate game information.

Also, in the past, there have been pachinko machines that perform a pattern change display using multiple (e.g., three) pattern rows formed by multiple special patterns (e.g., special patterns numbered 1 to 9) in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and notify the winning/losing judgment result by the combination of special patterns stopped and displayed on the winning line set in the display area. In such pachinko machines 10, the player plays the game with interest in the special patterns stopped and displayed on the winning line set in the display area of the third pattern display device 81. However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, unless the special patterns of the two pattern rows are stopped and displayed on the winning line in a state that shows part of a specific combination indicating a winning jackpot (a so-called reach state), the player can predict that the winning jackpot has not been won before the special patterns of the remaining pattern rows are stopped and displayed, and therefore loses interest in the middle of the pattern change display.

In contrast to this, in the present 35th control example, the winning lines are formed by the board decorations applied to the game board, the decorative movable parts, and some of the special patterns displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, making it possible to notify the winning/losing determination result.

To be more specific, the special symbols in the pachinko machine 10 of this 35th control example include, in addition to the number symbols numbered "1" to "8," logo letter symbols ("sea" symbol D4, "object" symbol D7, "word" symbol D10) with letters related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1040). Details will be described later, but these logo letter symbols are configured to indicate a jackpot win for the special symbols when three identical letter symbols are displayed stopped on an active line, or when the "sea" symbol D4, "object" symbol D7, and "word" symbol D10 are displayed stopped on an active line from the left (i.e., when the string "sea story" is formed on the active line).

As shown in FIG. 1026, a logo lamp Rg1 with a built-in LED is installed at the top center of the front view of the variable display unit 80 of the game board. The surface of this logo lamp Rg1 is decorated with the character design of "sea."

The pachinko machine 10 is also equipped with a logo role object 902 as a decorative movable role object, and when it is not being used as part of the variable performance, it is stored at the top of the third pattern display device 81 as viewed from the front and at the back of the variable display device unit 80 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1032(a)). This logo role object 902 is composed of a bar role object 902a that moves up and down and a rotating body role object 902b with the character pattern "object" written on its surface (see FIG. 1032(a)). Details will be described later, but when this logo role object 902 is used as part of the variable performance, the bar role object 902a descends to its lowest point (see FIG. 1032(b)), and the rotating body role object 902b moves left and right while rotating based on the operation scenario on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 as viewed from the front, and stops at a position specified by the operation scenario.

In this 35th control example, as shown in FIG. 1041(a), after the special symbol is temporarily stopped on the active line L1 in the third symbol display device 81 in a combination indicating a miss, the logo device 902 descends to its lower limit (see FIG. 1041(b)), and the rotating device 902b stops at the position indicated by the up arrow 802. As a result, the "sea" symbol decorated on the logo lamp Rg1, the "object" symbol decorated on the rotating device 902b, and the "word" symbol in the middle-lower pattern Z2c form the character string "Sea Story" vertically, which is a mode of announcing a jackpot win (see FIG. 1042(a)).

By configuring it in this way, even if the special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 does not result in a reach state, it is possible to make the player expect that a winning line will be formed with the logo decoration Rg1, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest before the special patterns in the remaining pattern rows are stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 35th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above in that it is equipped with a decorative movable part, that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 32nd control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example>
First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1026 to Fig. 1031. Fig. 1026 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example, Fig. 1027 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example when viewed from the front, and Figs. 1028 to 1031 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example.

As shown in FIG. 1026, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball winning port 64, a second ball winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the periphery of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first ball winning port 64, the second ball winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 1026.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is formed in front of the game board 13 and is partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Fig. 1043) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of Fig. 1026) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of Fig. 1026) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Fig. 1026), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 1043), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In the thirty-fifth control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time-saving or normal mode, whether the display is variable, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the game mode is set as the normal mode after the jackpot game ends) or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game modes of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 9R time-saving jackpot (9R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 9 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 6R time-saving jackpot (6R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 6 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 3R time-saving jackpot (3R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 3 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, and a 6R normal jackpot (6R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 6 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize is prepared which gives the player fewer benefits than the jackpot described above (for example, a benefit of opening the V winning device 650 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (or whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopped pattern after the variable display ends, but also shows a pattern according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot.

Here, a "9R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum of 9 rounds, a "6R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum of 6 rounds, and a "3R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum of 3 rounds. Also, a "6R jackpot without time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to the normal state without transitioning to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum of 6 rounds.

In the 35th control example, the size of the bonus given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be won during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the size of the bonus given to the player may be defined using conditions other than those mentioned above, or the content of the jackpot game may simply be changed so that different bonuses are given without defining the size of the bonus.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is the same as in the normal state, but the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (benefit) given to the player after the jackpot ends. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the 35th control example, the change time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric device 640a that is operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit is set so that the period during which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. Note that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and only a part of the above-mentioned settings may be used, or the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state in addition to the above-mentioned contents.

In addition, in the 35th control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, and a big win (so-called two-type win) is awarded when the ball passes through the specific area during a small win game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball).

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball into the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 1043), so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed (see FIG. 1040). Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of the 35th control example performs a decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, while the display of the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1043) is performed by the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) during which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special pattern in correspondence with the timing at which the first pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, when the discrimination condition (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is met, the discrimination means discriminates (a lottery for a special symbol is executed), and the identification information (special symbol) is dynamically displayed (variably displayed) until a predetermined dynamic display period has elapsed, after which the identification information (third symbol) is displayed statically in a display mode (combination of symbols) that indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the lottery result for the special symbol). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the special symbol by understanding the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may have a display mode corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and may be a display mode corresponding to a part of the special pattern lottery result (for example, only the result of the win/loss judgment such as a big win or a miss, or a time-saving win), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special pattern lottery result (for example, the type of big win that was won). In addition, if there are four types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, a miss, and a time-saving win) as the lottery result of the special pattern, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is one of two specific types (for example, a big win or a small win) out of the three types of lottery results described above. In addition, if a double win is won in a judgment that allows double wins (for example, a big win judgment, a time-saving judgment), a display mode for indicating a double win may be used, and if the content of the game executed based on the double win is the same as the content of the game executed based only on the big win, the same display mode may be used.

In addition, instead of the display device used in the 35th control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel, or multiple display devices may be provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In this 35th control example, if the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit during the time-saving state, the period during which the electric device 640a is operated (the period during which the electric device 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is longer than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit during the normal state. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state.

The configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the second symbol, or to increase the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win. In addition, if the time-saving state is made easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operating pattern of the electric device 640a, the time it takes for the second symbol to change may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change is set shorter during the time-saving state than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the second symbol to be displayed is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a are varied, the time for displaying the second symbol to be displayed may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is started, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and the second symbol indicating a win is displayed (the winning game of the second symbol, i.e., the timing when the electric role 640a is operated). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second symbol that started to be displayed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win during the normal state, the electric role 640a can be operated with the operation pattern corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, the set game state and the operation pattern of the electric role to be executed can be more accurately associated.

The relationship between the game state, the time the second symbol changes, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be specified other than as described above. For example, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the timing when the second symbol starts changing or the timing when the electric device 640a starts operating, the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be configured to set an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during the time-saving state).

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1043), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 1026, nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the first ball entry port 64 is easier to enter in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1043), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also each one of the winning holes through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the hole. In the 35th control example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, but the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the 35th control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) that detects a ball that triggers the lottery for a special pattern (lottery for a big win) is provided in the ball entrance, so that the lottery for a special pattern can be obtained and prize balls can be obtained at the same time. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which a ball can pass may be provided, and when a switch (detection means) that detects a ball passing through the area (gate) detects the passage of a ball, the lottery for a special pattern may be obtained. In this case, it is preferable to provide a ball entrance through which at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery for a special pattern can enter, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) are paid out when a ball enters. By configuring in this way, the number of times the lottery for a special pattern is obtained and the number of times the prize balls are obtained can be made different, so that a variety of playability can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (permitted state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the player (the player in front of the game board 13 in FIG. 1026) and a waiting state (restricted state) waiting on the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not selected), the electric device 640a is in the waiting state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the ball passing through the normal symbol starter gate (through gate) 67, that is, when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the electric device 640a is in the protruding state (permitted state), making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the 35th control example will be explained. In the 35th control example, as shown in FIG. 1026, the variable display unit 80 is disposed at approximately the center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to hit the ball into either the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot the ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots the ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

In the 35th control example, as shown in FIG. 1026, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the game is configured so that right-hand hitting is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

A nail is planted under the variable display unit 80 to prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to change the first special symbol can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to change the second special symbol can be played in right-handed play, so that different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 35th control example, as shown in FIG. 1026, a V winning device 650 is disposed in the right hitting area, the upper surface of which is inclined downward to the left (the lower left direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 1026), and the various mechanisms are disposed so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric role 640a.

When the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, the ball passes through the retracted electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in the protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down toward the lower right (lower right when viewed from the front in FIG. 1026). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 located below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

Also, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, referring to FIG. 1027, the configuration of the right-hitting area of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1027, of the balls shot by right-hitting play, those that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is arranged. To explain in detail, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and its upper surface is made of a plate-like member through which the balls can flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 1027). Then, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 flows down into area a (see FIG. 1027) that corresponds to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding position, the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end position. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this 35th control example, the period during which the electric device 640a operates continuously in the game state (normal symbol probability state) is configured to be different, and when the electric device 640a operates in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) set as the game state, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a located in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 1027), and when the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is configured to be in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 1027).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 1027 (the range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the 35th control example). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery for the second special pattern from being drawn in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) it takes for a ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the ball that flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a, which is in the induction state (protruding state), to reach the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that reaches the electric device 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric device 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a, and the operation of the electric device 640a ends when the ball reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric device 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 1027, such a ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric device 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed play is performed during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric device 640a and the timing of the ball arriving at the electric device 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 5. Therefore, if a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be drawn, a ball entering the second winning port 640 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., a lottery for special symbol 2 and 5 prize balls) than a ball entering the general winning port 63. If a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) cannot be drawn (special symbol changing), a ball entering the general winning port 63 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) than a ball entering the second winning port 640.

This allows the ball entry port into which the player wishes the ball to enter (the ball entry port through which many bonuses can be obtained) to be changed depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have the ball enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, it is necessary to continue right-hand play, which increases the operation of the game.

In the 35th control example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the ball can be surely inserted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. In addition, for example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be set to a period (e.g., 0.9 seconds) slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the ball from being shot after the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and starting the ball from being shot again after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (so-called stop shot), so that the right-handed play can be continued during the time-saving state, improving the operation of the game.

Returning to FIG. 1026, we will continue with the explanation. As described above with reference to FIG. 1027, the ball shot by right-handed play first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, we will explain the configuration of the V winning device 650. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and is configured to be variable to an open state in which the ball can win at a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a by operating the opening/closing door 650f1 when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "small win."

In addition, in some cases where a "big win" of a special pattern is won, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same way as when a "small win" is won as described above. This makes it difficult to know whether a "big win" or a "small win" of a special pattern has been won when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

Now, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 1027 to 1031. First, as shown in Fig. 1027, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and a ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Fig. 1027) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In the 35th control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens enters the V winning device 650. The ball that enters the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 1030 (a)) while flowing down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 can be made to flow down smoothly regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the 35th control example, the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in the 35th control example, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 12 times, but any other number of times may be set.

In the 35th control example, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened again (interval period between openings) is set to 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings during a small win game, and is set to 0.5 seconds at other times. This is to make it easier for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the 5th opening operation is completed during a small win game, a game guide display that emphasizes right-hand play and encourages the player to play during the interval period between openings after the 5th opening operation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set longer than usual so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 even when right-hand play is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the 10th opening operation during a small winning game.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In the 35th control example, a longer special inter-open interval period is set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during a small win game. In this way, by providing multiple times for displaying the game guide display to the player during one small win game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play appropriately. In addition, when providing multiple times for displaying the game guide display, it is recommended to set at least the second and subsequent notification timings to timings that a player playing normally cannot reach. That is, as in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, the 35th control example is configured so that at least one ball can enter in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 by continuously playing right-hand during a small win game, so that if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed, the number of winning balls (10 balls) that is the end condition for the small win game will be reached during the 10th opening operation, and the small win game will end.

In other words, the inter-open interval period that is executed after the 10th opening action during a small win game is a timing that cannot be reached if the player is playing normally (continuous right-hitting game). Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing for displaying the game guide display, an unnecessarily long special inter-open interval period will not be executed for a player playing normally (continuous right-hitting game), and the small win game can be played smoothly.

In addition, when the first special inter-opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that is reached even if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed as in the 35th control example, it is preferable to determine whether the V switch 650e3 detects a ball at the timing when the first special inter-opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends) or at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special inter-opening interval period (the timing when the period required for the ball that entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball, a notification effect to notify that effect is displayed during the first special inter-opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, a game guide display is displayed as described above. This allows the special inter-opening interval period set during small winning play to be used effectively according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to configure the game guide display to be displayed even if the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the small win game ends without a predetermined number (10 balls) of balls entering the V winning device 650 during the small win game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1028. FIG. 1028 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 1028, the V winning device 650 comprises an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b for screwing the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f having a flow passage, a flow passage cover body 650g which is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow passage, a switching member 650h which protrudes into the flow passage formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow passage cover body 650g to switch the flow passage of the game ball, a link member 650i which engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j which is disposed on the back side of the flow passage cover body 650g, a flow passage solenoid 650k which is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and which operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m which covers the flow passage solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 1029 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 1029 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 1029 (b) is an Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 1029 (b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which the game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 1029 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of the game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 650e.

As shown in FIG. 1029(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a.

By configuring it this way, right-hand play can be continued during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 1029(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 1029(b). As shown in Figure 1029(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 1030, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 1030(a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 1030(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h2 can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 1030(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example, a game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during a small win game, and a big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 during a small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to) pass through the V switch 650e3, and is configured to switch the flow path so that the ball that has entered the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on (see FIG. 1030(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the 35th control example is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents specified in the above-mentioned opening scenario table 202g, and the balls that have won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide a state that is maintained for a long period of time, that is, a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 1030(a)), thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been made in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has elapsed), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, causing a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, prize balls (10 prize balls for one winning ball in the 35th control example) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to determine whether it passes through the V switch 650e3 or not, and it is possible to determine whether a jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in the 35th control example, a small win game is executed in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for different periods and timings depending on the small win type (small win A, B, C) that is set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during a small win game (V winning expectation) can be made to differ depending on the content of the small win game executed when a small win is won. Therefore, the player can play while expecting not only to win a small win, but also to play a small win game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 1031, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 1031(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 1031(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the 35th control example is configured so that a ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 1026), down the left upper surface 650y2, and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 1031(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 1031(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 1031(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 1031(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 to ensure smooth ball flow after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a (see Figure 1026), and is configured so that balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 before flowing down towards the detection port 650a1, which is a passageway width for one ball. By providing the first and second restricting members 651 and 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the ball that enters the game with force from the opening and closing door 650f1 from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, thereby suppressing the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, it is possible to ensure a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) for aligning the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one ball, thereby suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging in the V winning device 650 and the occurrence of a situation that interferes with the game.

Returning to FIG. 1026, we will continue with the explanation. The upper center side of the game board when viewed from the front is decorated with logo letters Rg2 indicating the title of the anime or drama that the pachinko machine 10 was modeled after, and a decorative structure (logo decoration Rg1) that imitates the logo mark of the anime or drama that the pachinko machine 10 was modeled after is placed at the upper center of the variable display device unit 80. This logo decoration Rg1 has an LED built in, and it is possible for it to emit light and blink in accordance with the variable performance. Note that the logo decoration Rg1 is fixed to the game board 13, and its position cannot be changed.

The position of the logo decoration Rg1 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 1026, but may be any position that can form a vertical, horizontal, or diagonal line with respect to the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. For example, the logo decoration Rg1 may be placed in the lower right area when viewed from the front outside the variable display device unit 80, or in the lower left area when viewed from the front.

<Regarding the decorative movable parts in the 35th control example>
Next, the decorative movable part (logo part 902) provided in this 35th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 1032 to 1039. Fig. 1032(a) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the logo part 902 is stored (storage position). As shown in Fig. 1032(a), this logo part 902 is composed of a bar part 902a, a rotating body part 902b, and left and right lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. Below, the configuration of the logo part 902 will be described with reference to Figs. 1034 to 1039 as appropriate.

The bar feature 902a has lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d on both the left and right ends. The lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d are symmetrically configured and have roughly the same shape. For this reason, the explanation of the right lifting mechanism 902d will be omitted for the same configuration as that explained in the left lifting mechanism 902c.

The left lifting mechanism 902c has a two-stage rack consisting of an upper rack 902c1 and a boot-shaped lower rack 902c2, and is connected to the upper rack 902c1 by a connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 1037) provided at the upper end of the lower rack 902c2. The height of this two-stage rack can be changed by changing the position of a cylindrical pin 902c3p provided on the upper drive cam 902c3 as the upper drive cam 902c3 rotates.

Here, the detailed structure of the left lifting mechanism 902c will be described with reference to Figs. 1034 to 1037. Figs. 1034 and 1036 are exploded perspective views of the lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d, and Figs. 1035 and 1037 are exploded rear perspective views of the lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. As shown in Fig. 1034, the left lifting mechanism 902c is provided with a bar role motor 902c7, which is a stepping motor for upper drive. The bar role motor 902c7 is provided with an upper drive gear 902c4 that engages with the upper drive cam 902c3. When the bar role motor 902c7 is operated, the upper drive gear 902c4 rotates, thereby rotating the upper drive cam 902c3. The upper drive cam 902c3 is provided with a cylindrical pin 902c3p, and when the upper drive cam 903c3 rotates, the position of the cylindrical pin 902c3p changes.

This cylindrical pin 902c3p protrudes toward the front when viewed from the front, and when the bar role 902a is in the storage position, the bottom of the lower rack 902c2 is supported from below by the cylindrical pin 902c3p. Then, when the cylindrical pin 902c3p moves clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right-side lift mechanism 902d) from the position in FIG. 1032(a), the cylindrical pin 902c3p comes off the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, and the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p. Note that the bar role 902a is supported by a stopper 902c5 (see FIG. 1035), and when the stopper 902c5 is in a locked state, the bar role 902a will not fall even if the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p.

This stopper 902c5 is changed between a locked state and an unlocked state by sliding the arm member 902c6 connected to the upper drive cam 902c3 as the bar role motor 902c7 rotates a predetermined number of steps (25 steps in this 35th control example), and raising and lowering the link member 902c5L connected to the arm member 902c6. When the stopper 902c5 is in the unlocked state and the cylindrical pin 902c3p is not inserted into the lower part of the lower rack 902c2, the lower rack 902c2 falls by its own weight. At this time, the connecting gear 902c8a connecting the lower rack 902c2 and the upper rack 902c1 engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c provided on the support part of the lifting mechanism 902c and rotates counterclockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with the upper protruding piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1035) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the upper rack 902c1 is lowered by rotating the connecting gear 902c8a counterclockwise. As a result, the bar role 902a falls to the lower limit.

The right midway stop solenoid 902d9 shown in Fig. 1032(a) is provided only on the right lift mechanism 902d. When this right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is ON, the valve protrudes toward the back side when viewed from the front, making it possible to stop the bar role 902a, which falls under its own weight, at the position shown in Fig. 1033(a). On the other hand, when the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is OFF, the valve retracts and the bar role 902a falls to its lowest point.

Here, in this 35th control example, two types of drop patterns can be set as the drop pattern of the bar role 902a. First, the first drop pattern is a right-side intermediate drop state (see FIG. 1033(a)) in which the left stopper 902c5 is left in a locked state and only the right stopper 902d5 is released, and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned ON, and then the left stopper 902c5 is released from the right-side intermediate drop state, and the left-side drop state (see FIG. 1033(b)) in which the left end of the bar role 902a has fallen to its lowering limit is set, and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned OFF, causing the right end of the bar role 902a to also fall to its lowering limit (the position shown in FIG. 1032(b)).

The second drop pattern is when the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released simultaneously and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned OFF, causing the bar feature 902a to fall to the lower limit in one go under its own weight.

Thus, even though the bar mechanism 902a is designed to fall under its own weight, various falling patterns can be set by varying the release timing of the right mid-stop solenoid 902d9 and the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5.

Returning to FIG. 1034, we will continue the explanation. When the bar role 902a is at the lower limit (as shown in FIG. 1032(b)), the upper drive cam 902c3 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right lifting mechanism 902d), causing the cylindrical pin 902c3p to move clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 1032(b) and enter the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, pushing up the lower rack 902c2. When the lower rack 902c2 is pushed up by the cylindrical pin 902c3p, the connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 1035) engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c (see FIG. 1035) provided on the support part of the lifting mechanism 902c, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates clockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a also engages with an upper protruding piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1035) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the upper rack 902c1 is raised by the connecting gear 902c8a rotating clockwise.

In this way, by using a two-tier rack consisting of an upper rack 902c1 and a lower rack 902c2, it is possible to drive the upper drive cam 902c3 up and down with a stroke longer than its diameter, which allows the upper drive cam 902c3 to be made lighter and the stepping motor used to drive it to be driven with reduced output. This allows the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced.

Next, the structure of the rotating body role 902b will be described with reference to Figures 1036 to 1039. Figure 1036 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body role 902b and the bar role 902a, and Figure 1037 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body role 902b and the bar role 902a. Also, Figure 1038 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body role 902b, and Figure 1039 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body role. The rotating body 902b1 is a member with a decoration on the surface, and in this 35th control example, it is decorated with the character "物" (mono) related to the subject of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figure 1032 (a)). On the back side of this rotating body 902b1, a rotating body motor 902b2, which is a stepping motor for rotational drive, and a roller slider 902b6 are provided (see Figure 1037). When the rotating body motor 902b2 is driven based on the operation data set by the voice lamp control device 113, the rotating gear 902b7 rotates, and the rotation of the rotating gear 902b7 rotates the rotating body 902b1.

The rotating body motor 902b2 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the rotation direction of the rotating body 902b1 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotating body motor 902b2.

In addition, the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the rotation speed of the rotor 902b1 can also be varied in response to the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2.

As shown in FIG. 1036, the roller slider 902b6 provided on the rotating body accessory 902b is configured so that the ball screw 902b5 can be inserted therethrough. This ball screw 902b5 is provided with a lateral drive gear 902b4 at the left end when viewed from the front, and a lateral movement motor 902b3, which is a stepping motor for lateral drive, at the left end when viewed from the front. When the lateral movement motor 902b3 is driven, the lateral drive gear 902b4 rotates, and the ball screw 902b5 rotates. When the ball screw 902b5 rotates, the roller slider 902b6 moves left and right. This allows the rotating body accessory 902b to move left and right.

Now, referring to FIG. 1032(b), the left and right range of motion of the rotating body part 902b will be explained. The rotating body part 902b is configured to be movable left and right within a range from the left range of motion limit Pt2 to the right range of motion limit Pt3 on the front side of the bar part 902a when viewed from the front. In addition, a reference position Pt1 is set halfway between the left and right range of motion limits Pt2 and Pt3, and when the bar part 902a is in the stored position, it is configured to stop at the reference position Pt1.

The lateral movement motor 902b3 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by the audio lamp control device 113. When the lateral movement motor 902b3 rotates clockwise, the rotating body part 902b moves to the right when viewed from the front, and when it rotates counterclockwise, the rotating body part 902b moves to the left when viewed from the front.

In addition, the bar device 902a is provided with sensors (not shown) at positions corresponding to the reference position Pt1, the left range of motion limit Pt2, and the right range of motion limit Pt3, and is configured to be able to detect the left and right positions of the rotating body device 902b.

In addition, the rotation speed of the horizontal movement motor 902b3 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the movement speed of the rotating device 902b can also be changed according to the rotation speed of the horizontal movement motor 902b3.

<About the performance content in the 35th control example>
With reference to Fig. 1040 to Fig. 1042, the characteristic performance contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 35th control example will be described. Fig. 1041 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the special symbol (third symbol) is temporarily stopped on the third symbol display device 81. In the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed on the left, center, and right.

Here, the configuration of the pattern row in this 35th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1040(a). FIG. 1040(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the third pattern in this 35th control example. The third pattern (decorative pattern that changes in response to the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is composed of eight types of main patterns with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "8" and three types of main patterns with identification information imitating the characters "sea," "things," and "words," which are related to the subject of the pachinko machine 10. These third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row, and the third patterns are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

When three of the same number symbols are displayed on the active line L1 (for example, the left-middle pattern Z1b, the middle-middle pattern Z2b, and the right-middle pattern Z3b each show the number 7 D9 stopped and displayed), it indicates a special jackpot win.

On the other hand, the character patterns are configured to indicate a special jackpot win when three identical character patterns are displayed on the valid line L1 (for example, the "sea" pattern D4 is displayed stopped in the left-middle pattern Z1b, the middle-middle pattern Z2b, and the right-middle pattern Z3b), or when the "sea" pattern D4 is displayed stopped in the left-middle pattern Z1b, the "object" pattern D7 is displayed in the middle-middle pattern Z2b, and the "word" pattern D10 is displayed stopped in the right-middle pattern Z3b.

Figures 1040(b) to (e) show examples of stop patterns for the rotating body device 902b. The forward rotation state shown in Figure 1040(b) is the orientation when the rotating body motor 902b2 is in the origin position. (c) to (e) show examples of cases other than the origin position.

Returning to FIG. 1041(a), the explanation will be continued. As shown in FIG. 1041(a), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth pattern) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special pattern (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth pattern (fourth pattern of special pattern 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), or the fourth pattern (fourth pattern of special pattern 2) to indicate the lottery status of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1. In the example shown in FIG. 1041(a), the fourth pattern is displayed in the small display area Dm1 in a display mode indicating that the variable display is being displayed.

In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each play, the third symbols are displayed stopped on the active line L1 in the following order: left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. If the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in a combination of jackpot symbols, a jackpot is awarded and a jackpot winning announcement is executed.

As shown in FIG. 1041(a), the third symbols in the upper and lower rows are displayed half-hidden. This indicates that no active lines are set in the upper and lower rows.

In the example shown in FIG. 1041(a), the 1 symbol D1 is displayed as the left middle symbol Z1b, the 8 symbol D11 is displayed as the middle middle symbol Z2b, and the sea symbol D4 is displayed as the right middle symbol Z3b, all of which are displayed in a swaying state. This swaying state of the main symbols means that the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, and once the special symbol change time has elapsed, the symbols will be completely stopped.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1041(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved patterns corresponding to the number of acquired special pattern lottery rights (reserved memory). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 35th control example, when a variable display is being performed on the first pattern display device 37 or a winning game is being executed, that is, in a state in which a new special pattern lottery cannot be executed, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the number of ball entrances is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each ball entrance. The reserved patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds are displayed in the same number as the reserved number of ball entrances. In this 35th control example, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is set to 4, and the maximum number of reserved balls stored for a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to 4, so a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1041(a), the sub-display area Ds is divided into a special 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1, an active area Ds2, and a special 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3. The special 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1 is an area for displaying reserved patterns in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and four pedestals m1 to m4 corresponding to the maximum number of reserved memorizable balls (4) are displayed in order from the right. Then, when a reserved ball of the first special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the lowest numbered pedestal among the four pedestals m1 to m4 that does not display a reserved pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 1041(a), two reserved balls of the first special pattern are reserved and stored, and in the special pattern 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1, two reserved patterns (hr1-hr2) in a display mode (white circle) corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved ball) are displayed on the first base m1 and the second base m2.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3 is an area for displaying a number of reserved patterns corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and four pedestals m5 to m8 corresponding to the maximum number of reserved storage (4) are displayed in order from the left. When a reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the lowest numbered pedestal among the four pedestals m5 to m8 that does not display a reserved pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 1041 (a), since no reserved balls of the second special pattern are stored in reserve, no reserved patterns are displayed in the special pattern 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3.

The in-progress area Ds2 is a display area in which the reserved symbol that was displayed in response to the currently in-progress special symbol change is shifted and displayed, and the in-progress reserved symbol hr0 is displayed on the in-progress base m0. In other words, when a new special symbol change is started, the reserved symbol hr1 that was displayed on base m1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1 is shifted to base m0 of the in-progress area Ds2 and displayed. By configuring it in this way, for example, when a preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol) that indicates the expected probability of winning a jackpot for the reserved symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1 is performed, the player can easily determine that a special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the preview performance was performed is being performed.

In addition, by making it possible to display a reserved pattern (active pattern) that corresponds to a currently active special pattern change, the effect of varying the display mode of the reserved pattern (active pattern) can also be performed on the reserved pattern (active pattern) that corresponds to the currently active special pattern change, allowing the player to play while anticipating the display mode of the reserved pattern being varied for a longer period of time than if the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently active special pattern change is not displayed.

In addition, when a reserved pattern is displayed on base m5 in the reserved ball waiting area Ds3 of the special chart 2, it is shifted to and displayed on base m0 of the active area Ds2 in priority over the reserved pattern hr1 displayed on base m1 of the reserved ball waiting area Ds1 of the special chart 1.

In this way, in the 35th control example, the display area for the special reserved pattern 1 and the display area for the special reserved pattern 2 are configured to be displayed separately, so that the player can distinguish whether the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the first special pattern (special reserved pattern 1) or a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the second special pattern (special reserved pattern 2). This allows the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern, making it easier for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 based on the display contents of the reserved pattern.

Figure 1041 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the start of the rescue chance presentation. This rescue chance presentation is a type of presentation (a so-called revival presentation) in which a display mode indicating a miss in the lottery result is displayed and then changed to a display mode indicating a big win or small win, and is a presentation in which a big win is announced when the rotating body device 902b stops in a forward rotation state (see Figure 1040 (b)) on the line connecting the logo lamp Rg1 and the "word" pattern D10 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Details of the rescue chance presentation are explained below.

When the rescue chance performance starts, the logo reel 902 starts to operate based on an operation scenario preset by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, the bar reel 902a falls to its lowest point, and the rotating body reel 902b starts to move left and right and rotate.

As shown in FIG. 1042(b), when the rescue chance effect starts, the bar device 902a is positioned in front of the third symbol that is temporarily stopped on the pay line L1, making it difficult for the player to see the third symbol on the pay line L1. This is because if the third symbol displayed entirely on the line connecting the logo lamp Rg1 and the "word" symbol D7 is visible, even if the effect is successful and the character string "Sea Story" is formed, there is a risk that the player will not be able to tell that the character string "Sea Story" has been formed because other third symbols are visible on the line. For this reason, the bar device 902a covers the third symbol on the pay line L1, and no unnecessary third symbols are present on the line connecting the logo lamp Rg1, the rotating body device 902b, and the "word" symbol D10.

A display area HR1 is formed in the upper central area of the main display area Dm, and an up arrow 802 is displayed in the lower central area of the main display area Dm to indicate the stopping position of the rotating body device 902b that will result in a successful performance. A guide mode is displayed in the display area HR1 to notify the player of the success conditions for the rescue chance performance. This configuration allows the player to easily recognize the content of the rescue chance performance.

The rotating device 902b continues to move left and right and rotate for about six seconds based on the operation scenario preset by the audio and lamp control device 113, and then stops at a stopping position to announce the winning or losing result.

Figure 1042 (a) is a diagram showing the content of the presentation when the rescue chance presentation is successful. When the operation scenario of the successful pattern of the rescue chance presentation is set (i.e., when the hit/miss judgment result is a big win), when the timing of stopping the operation scenario comes, the rotating body role 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the winning notification position (in the example shown in Figure 1042 (a), the position of the intersection of the effective line L1 and the middle pattern row Z2). When it is confirmed that the rotating body role 902b has stopped at the winning notification position, the middle pattern row Z2 moves back by half a frame, and the middle lower pattern Z2c, which was displayed in a half-hidden state, rises to the position of the rising line L2, so that the whole of the middle lower pattern Z2c is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that the middle lower pattern Z2c is a component that forms the character string "Sea Story" with the logo lamp Rg1 and the rotating body role 902b. The character string "Sea Story" is a mode that indicates that a big win has been won.

In addition, as the middle symbol row Z2 moves back half a frame, the bar device 902a also rises to a corresponding position, covering and concealing the middle-middle symbol Z2b. This ensures that there is no unnecessary third symbol on the line between the logo lamp Rg1, the rotating body device 902b, and the "word" symbol D10, making it easier for the player to understand that the "Sea Story" string has been completed.

Furthermore, when the "Sea Story" character string is completed, the LEDs built into the logo lamp Rg1 and the rotating device 902b are illuminated, emphasizing that a line is formed by the logo lamp Rg1, the rotating device 902b, and the middle-lower pattern Z2c, preventing the player from overlooking it.

In addition, the word "Congratulations" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a notification that the rescue chance presentation has been successful. This allows the player to easily recognize that the rescue chance presentation has been successful.

On the other hand, if the rescue chance performance fails (i.e., if the hit/miss determination result is a miss), the rotating device 902b stops at the miss notification position (in the example shown in FIG. 1042(b), the position of the intersection of the active line L1 and the right pattern row Z3). Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 1042(b), an example was described in which the rotating device 902b stops at the intersection of the active line L1 and the right pattern row Z3, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the position is off the line connecting the logo lamp Rg1 and the "word" pattern D10 displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1043. Fig. 1043 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example. The 35th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, and a drive motor for the logo role object 902 is added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, the output of drive control data for the logo gimmick 902, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display). The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the drive motor group 770, and the right mid-stop solenoid 775. Here, the drive motor group 770 includes drive sources (motors) for driving various decorative movable members (variable members) that can be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, and specifically includes bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7, a rotating body motor 902b2, a lateral movement motor 902b3, and other motors 771.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Now, referring to FIG. 1044(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this 35th control example will be described. FIG. 1044(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 35th control example. It differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 32nd control example described above in that a variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 222a, and a new operation scenario selection table 222xb is added.

In the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (miss, false miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in the counter value for variation pattern selection. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In the thirty-fifth control example, a variation effect is executed in which the third pattern is displayed by vertical scrolling on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the special pattern variation being executed. In this variation effect, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/loss determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play (special pattern game) while predicting whether the current special pattern variation will result in a jackpot win by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third pattern display device 81.

The operation scenario selection table 222xb is a table for setting the operation scenario of each drive motor that constitutes the logo reel 902. In the operation scenario selection table 222xb, the counter value for scenario selection is set with an operation scenario corresponding to the hit/miss judgment result. When the voice lamp control device 113 decides to execute the rescue chance performance described above as the variable mode, it selects the operation scenario for the logo reel 902 based on the hit/miss judgment result and the acquired counter value for scenario selection.

The contents of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa will now be described with reference to Figs. 1045-1046. Fig. 1045(a) is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa. As shown in Fig. 1045(a), the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa specifies a normal fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1, a time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa2, a special time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa3, and a time-saving final fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa4.

Figure 1045 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1. The normal variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1 is a table that is referenced when a special pattern variation display is executed in the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns). The display variation pattern is set based on the special pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit/miss judgment result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first performance counter CS1. As shown in Figure 1045 (b), in this 35th control example, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned rescue chance performance is specified for each display variation pattern.

Specifically, the prescribed contents for the special symbol type being "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)," the hit/miss judgment result being "Miss," and the fluctuation pattern type being "Miss," are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "Fluctuation pattern A" and no rescue chance performance are associated with each other.

Note that the rescue chance presentation is not set when the fluctuation pattern type is "miss". This is because the fluctuation time for the fluctuation pattern type "miss" is 7 seconds (see FIG. 956), whereas the presentation time for the rescue chance presentation is 12 seconds, and the rescue chance presentation does not end within the fluctuation time.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result, and the fluctuation pattern type "false miss", the first effect counter CS1 value "0-179" is associated with "fluctuation pattern B" and no rescue chance effect, and the first effect counter CS1 value "180-199" is associated with "fluctuation pattern C" and rescue chance effect. In other words, when the fluctuation pattern type is "false miss", the rescue chance effect is set at a rate of 10%.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result, and the fluctuation pattern type "Normal reach", the first performance counter CS1 value "0-179" is associated with "Fluctuation pattern D" and no rescue chance performance, and the first performance counter CS1 value "180-199" is associated with "Fluctuation pattern E" and rescue chance performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Miss" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Normal reach", the rescue chance performance is set at a rate of 10%.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result, and the fluctuation pattern type "Super Reach", the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to be "0-149" in correspondence with "Fluctuation pattern F" and no rescue chance performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to be "150-199" in correspondence with "Fluctuation pattern G" and rescue chance performance. In other words, if the hit/miss judgment result is "Miss" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Super Reach", the rescue chance performance is set at a rate of 25%.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Normal reach", the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to correspond to "Fluctuation pattern H" and no rescue chance performance when it is "0-149", and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to correspond to "Fluctuation pattern I" and rescue chance performance when it is "150-199". In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Normal reach", the rescue chance performance is set at a rate of 25%.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Super reach", the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to correspond to "Fluctuation pattern J" and no rescue chance performance when it is "0-129", and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to correspond to "Fluctuation pattern K" and rescue chance performance when it is "130-199". In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Super reach", the rescue chance performance is set with a probability of 35%.

In addition, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a "jackpot" and the variation pattern type is a "normal reach," and a rescue chance performance is executed, the rescue chance performance will start after the third symbol does not enter a reach state and temporarily stops in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a "jackpot" and the variation pattern type is "super reach," and a rescue chance effect is executed, the third symbol will enter a reach state, and after the reach effect is executed, it will temporarily stop with a combination indicating a miss, and the rescue chance effect will begin.

In addition, when the variation pattern type is "normal reach" or "super reach", the ease with which the rescue chance effect is set differs depending on whether the hit/miss judgment result is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the rescue chance effect is more likely to be set when the hit/miss judgment result is a "jackpot" than when it is a "miss".

This allows the player to anticipate the rescue chance presentation even if the third symbol does not reach the desired state, and keeps the player hopeful of winning the jackpot until the very last moment when the variable display ends.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big win", and the fluctuation pattern type "Special reach", the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to be "0 to 199" in correspondence with "Fluctuation pattern L" and no rescue chance performance. In other words, if the hit/miss judgment result is "Big win" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Special reach", the rescue chance performance is not set. This is because, in this 35th control example, the fluctuation pattern type is set to "Special reach" only when the hit/miss judgment result is "Big win", and since the player can recognize that he has won the jackpot when the special reach begins, the performance effect is low even if the rescue chance performance is executed.

The prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (special symbol 1)," the hit/miss judgment result "small hit," and the fluctuation pattern type "long small hit" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "Fluctuation pattern M" and no rescue chance performance are associated with each other. In other words, if the hit/miss judgment result is a "small hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is a "long small hit," no rescue chance performance is set.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result, and the fluctuation pattern type "miss", the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to be "0 to 179" in correspondence with "fluctuation pattern N" and no rescue chance performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to be "180 to 199" in correspondence with "fluctuation pattern P" and rescue chance performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern type is "miss", the rescue chance performance is set at a rate of 10%.

When the special symbol type is "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" or "Small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type is "Hit", the prescribed contents are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0-149" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Q" and no rescue chance performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "150-199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern R" and rescue chance performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" or "Small hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Hit", the rescue chance performance is set at a rate of 25%.

Figure 1046 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa2. The time-saving variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa2 is a table that is referenced when a special pattern variation display is executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns). As with the normal variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1, it sets the display variation pattern based on the special pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit/miss judgment result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first performance counter CS1.

Specifically, the specified contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)," the hit/miss judgment result "Miss," and the fluctuation pattern type "Ultra-short miss" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "Fluctuation pattern S" and no rescue chance performance are associated with each other.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)," the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit," and the fluctuation pattern type "Short-term hit" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "Fluctuation pattern T" and no rescue chance performance are associated with each other.

For the special symbol type "first special symbol (special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "long small hit", the first performance counter CS1 value is specified to correspond to "0-189" with "fluctuation pattern U" and no rescue chance performance, and for the special symbol type "first special symbol (special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "long small hit", the first performance counter CS1 value is specified to correspond to "fluctuation pattern V" and rescue chance performance. In other words, if the hit/miss judgment result is "small hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "long small hit", the rescue chance performance is set at a rate of 5%.

The prescribed contents for the special symbol type being "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)," the hit/miss judgment result being "miss," and the fluctuation pattern type being "short miss" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "Fluctuation pattern W" and no rescue chance performance are associated with each other.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Super short big hit" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern X" and no rescue chance performance.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result "small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "ultra-short small hit" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Y" and no rescue chance performance.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the rescue chance effect is not set except when the fluctuation pattern type of the first special symbol is a "long small win." This is because in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds or less except when the fluctuation pattern type is a "long small win," which is shorter than the presentation time of the rescue chance effect.

Figure 1046 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa3. The special time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa3 is a table that is referenced when the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the fluctuation pattern type set in the special time-saving state.

Here, in this 35th control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, the time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state include at least a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of second special pattern changes executed during the time-saving state reaches three, and a time-saving end condition that is met when the combined number of first special pattern changes and second special pattern changes executed during the time-saving state reaches ten.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this 35th control example has a gameplay feature in which the time-saving state in which the second special symbol drawing is easily executed is set, the second special symbol drawing is executed three times, and by winning (small win, big win) in any of the second special symbol drawing, which has a probability of about 1/2, the time-saving state is repeated through big win play, and if no win is won in the three second special symbol drawings executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends, and if no win is won in the second special symbol drawing (one time) using the remaining reserved special symbol 2, the gameplay transitions to the normal state (ending the consecutive win state).

Here, if the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set only to be satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state reaches three, the time-saving end condition will also be satisfied when the first special symbol lottery is executed three times, and there is a risk that the time-saving state will end without the second special symbol lottery being executed, even though the time-saving state is set. In other words, in this 35th control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reservation) can be acquired up to four times, and if the time-saving state is set in a state where, for example, four special symbol 1 reservations and no special symbol 2 reservations have been acquired, the first special symbol variation will be executed before the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time-saving end condition will be satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time-saving state will end without exhibiting its original playability, which causes a problem of the player's desire to play to decrease.

In addition, even if four reserved special symbols 1 have been acquired when the time-saving state is set, if the time-saving end condition is established when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches seven in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time-saving state, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol variation more than three times when the time-saving state is set without the reserved special symbol 1 having been acquired, which creates the problem of providing the player with an excessively advantageous gameplay compared to the original gameplay.

Therefore, in this 35th control example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied based only on the number of times the second special pattern change is performed, and a time-saving end condition that is satisfied based on the combined number of times the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change are set, and the time-saving state is configured to end when either of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a predetermined number of second special pattern changes regardless of the acquisition status of the reserved special pattern 1, and it is possible to reliably end the time-saving state when the predetermined number of second special pattern changes have been executed.

Furthermore, in this 35th control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, the first special symbol change corresponding to the upper limit number (4) of reserved special symbols 1, that is, from the time-saving state is set until the fourth first special symbol change is executed, is configured to be set to a short time (0.5 seconds) using the time-saving change pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 957(a)), and for the first special symbol changes thereafter, a change time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even if the time-saving state is set, if a player who does not understand how to play in the time-saving state plays left-handed, if the change time of the first special symbol change executed during the time-saving state is always set to a short time (0.5 seconds), new first special symbol changes will be executed one after another, and there is a risk that the time-saving end condition that is established based on the combined number of first special symbol changes and second special symbol changes will be established.

In contrast to this, in the present 32nd control example, a long change time (20 seconds) is set for the first special pattern change that is executed from the fifth time onwards after the time-saving state is set, i.e., the first special pattern change that is executed only when a new special pattern 1 reservation is acquired during the time-saving state. By lengthening the period required for one first special pattern change to end, a period is secured for the player to understand how to play during the time-saving state, and the time-saving end condition that is established based on the combined number of first special pattern changes and second special pattern changes is prevented from being established.

Furthermore, in the special time-saving state (a state in which the first special symbol variation has been executed five or more times during the time-saving state), the variation effect of the first special symbol variation is configured to include a variation effect that encourages the player to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) by playing on the right. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players who are not familiar with the playing method that should be executed during the time-saving state to understand the correct playing method.

Figure 1046 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving final fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa4. The time-saving final fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa4 is a table that is referenced when the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the fluctuation pattern type set in the time-saving final fluctuation.

In this 35th control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, during the period of the second special symbol change, which is the final change in the time-saving state, the final result of the countdown effect executed during the time-saving state (displaying "0" in the number icon 808) is displayed, and then a charge effect (see FIG. 941(a)) is executed to encourage the acquisition of the reserved special symbol 2 until the time-saving state ends. Therefore, in order to ensure the performance period of the charge effect, a longer change time is set for the third (final) second special symbol change than for the first or second second special symbol change after the time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily end the time-saving state when the special symbol 2 reservation has been acquired. Also, even if a player wins the second special symbol drawing executed during the time-saving state, the time efficiency (the number of second special symbol drawing executed per unit time in the time-saving state) can be made to differ greatly between the first or second second special symbol drawing and the third second special symbol drawing, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the player wins the second special symbol drawing during the time-saving state, but also in which second special symbol drawing during the time-saving state the player will win.

Next, the contents of the operation scenario selection table 222xb will be described with reference to FIG. 1047. FIG. 1047 is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents of the operation scenario selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 1047, in the operation scenario selection table 222xb, operation scenarios corresponding to the respective pass/fail judgment results are set for the value of the second performance counter, which is a counter for scenario selection.

Specifically, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is "miss", "operation scenario A" is specified for the value of the second performance counter CS2 of "0 to 19". Here, the contents of the operation scenario A will be explained with reference to FIG. 1048. FIG. 1048(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down drive of the bar role 902a, among the operation scenarios A of the logo role 902. As shown in FIG. 1048(a), the operation scenario A for the up and down drive of the bar role 902a specifies the operation data (operation contents) of the left bar role motor 902c7, the right bar role motor 902d7, and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 for the value of the scenario counter 223xh, and also shows the position (state) of the bar role 902a at that stage and the state of the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5.

The scenario counter 223xh is a counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is used to set the operation data of each drive motor of the logo role object 902 at a predefined timing. The counter value of this scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 during the rescue chance performance execution process (S3159) of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 4 (see FIG. 1061) described later. Details will be described later, but this liquid crystal performance execution management process 4 is a process executed every 1 ms in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1056). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

In this 35th control example, when the start timing of the rescue chance presentation preset in the display variation pattern arrives, the voice lamp control device 113 starts counting the scenario counter 223xh, and when the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches a value specified in the operation scenario, the corresponding operation data is set.

As shown in FIG. 1048(a), the scenario counter value indicates the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh, and the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 during the rescue chance performance execution process (S3159) of the LCD performance execution management process 4 (see FIG. 1061) described below. Details will be described later, but this LCD performance execution management process 4 is a process executed every 1 ms in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1056). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

The number of steps in the left bar reel motor operation data and the right bar reel motor operation data indicates the number of rotation steps of the left bar reel motor 902c7 and the right bar reel motor 902d7, and the speed specifies the speed at which the stepping motors of the left bar reel motor 902c7 and the right bar reel motor 902d7 are operated.

The step number "+ (forward)" and "- (reverse)" indicate the direction in which the motor rotates; the forward direction rotates the motor in the direction in which the step counter is incremented and updated, and the reverse direction rotates the motor in the direction in which the step counter is decremented and updated. In this 35th control example, the left bar role motor 902c7 rotates clockwise when the forward direction is set, and counterclockwise when the reverse direction is set. The right bar role motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise when the forward direction is set, and clockwise when the reverse direction is set.

In addition, in this 35th control example, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms (high speed), when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms (medium speed), when the speed is 3, the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms (medium-low speed), and when the speed is 4, the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms (low speed). In other words, speed 1 is set as the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 the speed of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 the speed of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1/4 the speed of speed 1.

The bar reel position indicates the position (state) of the bar reel 902a at the time when the operation data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set.

When the start timing of the rescue chance performance set in the display variation pattern arrives, the scenario counter 223xh starts counting. Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the step number +25 and speed 4 are set as the motor operation data for the right bar role. As a result, the right bar role motor 902d7 starts rotating counterclockwise at a speed of 4 until the step counter value becomes 25. In this 35th control example, the stepping motors of the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 are configured to rotate once in 100 steps, and the position (origin position) where the step counter value is 0 is the storage position, and the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are in the release state (OFF state) when the step counter value is 25, and the bar role 902a falls to the lower limit. In this 35th control example, the time required to drive the step counter from 0 to 25 at speed 4 is set to 500 ms.

When the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "500", the number of steps +25 and speed 2 are set as the left bar role motor operation data. As a result, the left bar role motor 902c7 rotates clockwise at speed 2 until the step counter value becomes 25. When the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "500", it means that 500 ms has passed since the operation scenario started, so the right bar role motor 902d7 has rotated to the position of step counter value 25. As described above, when the step counter value is at the position of 25, the right bar role stopper 902d5 is released (OFF state), and the right end of the bar role 902a when viewed from the front starts to fall by its own weight, but since the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is ON, it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 1033(a) (right middle half-fall state).

Then, when 250 ms has passed since the scenario counter value of 500 and the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "750", the motor 902c7 for the left bar role rotates to the position of the step counter value of 25, and the left bar role stopper 902d5 becomes released (OFF state), so the left end of the bar role 902a as viewed from the front falls under its own weight. Since the left lift mechanism 902c does not have a mid-stop solenoid, the left end of the bar role 902a as viewed from the front falls to the lower limit, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 1033(b) (right middle one-sided drop, left one-sided drop state). After that, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1000", the right mid-stop solenoid 902d9 is set to the OFF state, and the right end of the bar role 902a as viewed from the front also falls to the lower limit (see FIG. 1032(b)).

When the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "11250", the number of steps +75 and speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar role and the motor operation data for the right bar role. At this point, the step counter values of the left and right bar role motors are 25, so this operation data causes the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 to rotate in the opposite direction at speed 2 until the step counter values reach 100. In this 35th control example, the cylindrical pins 902c3p and 902d3p start pushing up the lower racks 902c2 and 902d2, respectively, at the step counter value 60, and the bar role 902a is in the stored position at the step counter value 100.

Therefore, 750 ms after the operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value 11250 is set, that is, when the scenario counter value is 12000, the bar reel 902a reaches the stored position. Note that since the scenario counter value "12000" is the end time of operation scenario A, END data is specified. By specifying this END data, it is easy to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the operation scenario.

Figure 1048 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the left-right and rotational drive of the rotating body part 902b, among the operation scenarios A of the logo part 902. As shown in Figure 1048 (b), similar to the operation scenario for the up-down drive of the bar part 902a, the operation data of the horizontal movement motor 902b3 and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 are specified for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The position and orientation of the rotating body part indicate the position and orientation (state) of the rotating body part 902b when it operates according to the scenario. In addition, when the origin sensor data is set to ON, it indicates that it is set to operate until the origin sensor (not shown) for the rotating body motor provided on the rotating body part 902b is turned on.

In operation scenario A, speed 3 and "+ rotations" are set as operation data for the rotating motor 902b2 with respect to the counter value 500 of the scenario counter 223xh. This "+ rotations" is operation data that continues to rotate in the forward direction until the next operation data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotating part 902b2 starts to rotate continuously in the forward direction at speed 3.

When the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is 1000, the operation data of the horizontal movement motor 902b3 is set to a step count of -100 and a speed of 4. In this 35th control example, the horizontal movement motor 902b3 is a stepping motor with a total step count of 200, and is configured so that the position of step count 100 is the reference stop position Pt1 (see FIG. 1032 (b)), with step count 0 being the left range of motion limit Pt2 and step count 200 being the right range of motion limit Pt3. Therefore, in this case, the rotating body role 902b starts moving toward the left range of motion limit Pt2 at a speed of 4.

Furthermore, speed 3 and "- rotations" are set as the rotating body motor operation data. This "- rotations" is operation data that continues to rotate in the reverse direction until the next operation data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotating body part 902b starts to continue to rotate in the reverse direction at speed 3.

At the counter value 3000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps +100 and speed 4 are set as the operation data of the horizontal movement motor 902b3. At this point, the horizontal movement motor 902b3 has completed driving 100 steps in the reverse direction (i.e., the step counter value is 0), so the position of the rotating body role 902b is the left movable range limit Pt2 (see FIG. 1032(b)). Therefore, due to the operation data set at the scenario counter value 3000, the rotating body role 902b starts moving at speed 4 to the reference position Pt1 (see FIG. 1032(b)). In addition, speed 3 and "+ rotation" are set as the rotating body motor operation data. As a result, the rotating body role 902b starts to rotate continuously in the forward direction at speed 3.

When the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is 5000, the number of steps +100 and speed 4 are set as the operation data of the horizontal movement motor 902b3. At this point, the horizontal movement motor 902b3 has completed driving 100 steps in the forward direction (i.e., the step counter value is 100), so the position of the rotating body role 902b is the reference position Pt1 (see FIG. 1032(b)). Therefore, due to the operation data set at the scenario counter value of 5000, the rotating body role 902b starts moving at speed 4 to the right movable range limit position Pt3 (see FIG. 1032(b)).

When the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is 7000, the rotating body motor operation data is set to stop rotation. This causes the rotating body motor 902b2 to stop rotating. Note that at this point, the horizontal movement motor 902b3 has completed driving 100 steps in the forward direction (i.e., the step counter value is 200), so the position of the rotating body role 902b becomes the right movable range limit Pt3 (see FIG. 1032 (b)). Also, because the rotating body motor 902b2 continued to rotate without setting the number of steps, the orientation at the time the rotation stop operation data is set is indefinite.

The scenario counter value 7000 is the timing for executing the notification display of the win/lose determination result in the operation scenario A of the rescue chance performance. Therefore, information indicating that it is the timing for executing the miss notification display is specified. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to easily determine that it is the timing for notifying the win/lose determination result.

In the scenario counter value 11250, the number of steps -50 and speed 1 are set as the horizontal movement motor operation data. At this point, the position of the rotating body role 902b is at the right movable range limit Pt3 (see FIG. 1032 (b)), and the step counter value is 200, so the operation data set in the scenario counter value 11250 causes the rotating body role 902b to start moving at speed 1 to the reference position Pt1. In addition, speed 1 and "- rotation" are set as the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2, and the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotating body motor 902b2 rotates until it reaches the origin position, so the rotating body role 902b can return to the storage position in the forward rotation state.

In this way, in operation scenario A, the fall pattern of the bar device 902a is a fall pattern (first fall pattern) in which it falls stepwise to the lower limit, and the lateral movement pattern of the rotating device 902b is a movement pattern (first movement pattern) in which it first moves from the reference position Pt1 toward the left range of motion limit Pt2.

In addition, in this 35th control example, in addition to operation scenario A, there is operation scenario E as an operation scenario in which the first drop pattern and the first movement pattern are executed. This operation scenario E is an operation scenario that is set when the hit/miss determination result is "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", as shown in FIG. 1047.

Now, the contents of operation scenario E will be explained with reference to Fig. 1052. Fig. 1052(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the bar reel 902a, among the operation scenarios E of the logo reel 902. Until the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the operation of the first falling pattern is executed in the same manner as in operation scenario A.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +40 and a speed of 2. At this point, the bar role 902a is at its lowest position (i.e., the position of the step counter value 25), and due to the operation data set at the scenario counter value of 6700, the bar role 902a reaches the winning notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) 100 ms after the winning notification performance starts.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11,300, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +35 and a speed of 4. At this point, the step counter values of the left and right bar role motors are 65, so this operation data causes the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 to rotate in the forward direction at a speed of 4 until each step counter value reaches 100, and at the step counter value of 100, the bar role 902a is in the stored position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1052(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left-right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios E of the logo role 902 will be described. FIG. 1052(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left-right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios E of the logo role 902. As shown in FIG. 1052(b), up to the scenario counter value 5000, the operation scenario of the first movement pattern (a pattern in which the character moves from the reference position Pt1 to the left range limit Pt2 at first) is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned operation scenario A. When the scenario counter value becomes 5000, the step number +100 and speed 2 are set as the horizontal movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the reference position, so by setting this operation data, the rotating body role 902b starts moving to the right range limit Pt3 at speed 2. In this 35th control example, the time required to drive 100 steps at speed 2 is set to 1000 ms.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6000, the horizontal movement motor operation data is set to step count -100 and speed 2, and the rotating body motor operation data is set to speed 3 and "- rotations". Since the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to on, the rotating body role 902b stops rotating in the forward direction when it rotates to the origin position. Also, since the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the right range limit Pt3 at this point, setting this operation data causes the rotating body role 902b to start moving to the reference position Pt1 at speed 2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 7000, the rotating device 902 stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the win/lose judgment result in the operation scenario E of the rescue chance effect, and the rotating device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1 to notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

In this way, in operation scenario E, the same operation pattern (first drop pattern and first movement pattern) as operation scenario A is performed for a predetermined period of time from the start of the rescue chance presentation, and a scenario is executed in which the rotating body device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in Figure 1041 (b) (i.e., reference position Pt1) at the start of the winning notification presentation.

Here, as described above, operation scenario A is a scenario that is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "miss" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 19", and operation scenario E is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79". Since the second performance counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", operation scenario A is set at a rate of 10% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "miss", and operation scenario E is set at a rate of 40% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit". In other words, the operation scenarios of the first drop pattern and the first movement pattern are more likely to be selected when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" than when it is a "miss". In this way, the set probabilities of the operation scenarios for the first drop pattern and the first movement pattern are configured to be different depending on whether the result of the hit/miss judgment is a "miss" or a "hit," so the player can easily predict the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the movement pattern of the logo device 902.

Next, the contents of the operation scenario B will be described with reference to FIG. 1049. FIG. 1049(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down drive of the bar role 902a among the operation scenarios B of the logo role 902. This operation scenario B is an operation scenario set when the result of the hit/miss judgment is "miss" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "20 to 99". Unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario A, it is an operation scenario of the second drop pattern, which is a drop pattern in which the bar role 902a falls from the storage position to the lower limit in one go. In the second drop pattern, after the bar role 902a falls to the lower limit once, the origin confirmation operation of the rotating body role 902b is executed, and after the origin confirmation is completed, it returns to the storage position, and when it is determined that the origin position of the rotating body role 902b has been confirmed, it performs the operation of falling to the lower limit again. This is because in the second drop pattern, the bar reel 902a falls to the lower limit in one go, so the width of the bar reel 902a's fall is greater than in the first drop pattern, and there is a risk that the impact of the fall may cause an abnormality in the origin sensor. Also, as shown in FIG. 1036, the rotating body reel 902b of the logo reel 902 in this 35th control example is not circular but angular, so if the origin is confirmed in the stored position, it may interfere with other structures provided on the back side of the operating unit, so the origin confirmation operation is performed in a position that does not interfere with other structures. If the origin position cannot be confirmed in the origin confirmation operation, the second drop is stopped and a process is executed to switch to an alternative rescue chance presentation using the liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1049(a), when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the step number +25 and speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles. As a result, the left bar role motor 902c7 starts rotating clockwise at speed 2 until the step counter value becomes 25, and the right bar role motor 902d7 starts rotating counterclockwise at speed 2 until the step counter value becomes 25. Then, at the time of the scenario counter value 250, the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 are in a state where they have rotated to the position of the step counter value 25, and the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are in a released state (OFF state), so the bar role 902a starts falling under its own weight to the descent limit.

After 2000 ms have elapsed since the device reached its lowest point, i.e., when the scenario counter value reaches 2250, the motor operation data for the left and right bar parts is set to a step count of +75 and a speed of 2. This causes the bar part 902a to start moving to the storage position. Note that during the period from when the device reached its lowest point until 2000 ms has elapsed, the origin confirmation operation for the rotating part 902b is executed.

When 750 ms has elapsed since the scenario counter value reached 2250 and the scenario counter value reached 3000, the bar role 902a is in the stored position. If the origin position is confirmed in the origin confirmation operation of the rotating body role 902b, the operation data for the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 are set to step number +25 and speed 4, and when the scenario counter value reaches 3500, the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 are rotated to the step counter value 25 position, and the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released (OFF), so the bar role 902a starts to fall under its own weight to the lower limit.

When the scenario counter value reaches 11,250, the motor operation data for the left and right bar parts is set to a step count of +75 and a speed of 2. This causes the bar part 902a to start moving to the storage position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1049(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the left/right drive and rotation drive of the rotating body role 902b in operation scenario B will be described. FIG. 1049(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the operation scenario related to the left/right drive and rotation drive of the rotating body role 902b in operation scenario B. Operation scenario B is an operation scenario that executes the origin confirmation operation and the operation of the first movement pattern of the rotating body role 902b.

When the scenario counter value reaches 250, the horizontal movement motor operation data is set to +100 steps and speed 2, and the rotating body motor operation data is set to +rotations at speed 3. In addition, the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotating body role 902b starts moving toward the right range limit Pt3 while rotating clockwise, and the origin confirmation operation of the rotating body motor 902b2 is started.

When the rotating body motor origin sensor detects the origin position of the rotating body motor 902b during the origin confirmation operation, the origin flag 223xk is set to on in the voice lamp control device 113. By setting this origin flag 223xk to on, it is determined that the operation scenario being executed will continue in the special scenario execution process (see FIG. 1063) described below, and if the origin flag 223xk is not set to on by the time the origin confirmation operation ends (i.e., the rotating body motor origin sensor cannot detect the origin position), it is determined that the operation scenario being executed will be stopped, and a substitute rescue chance presentation is set by the LCD display.

When the scenario counter value reaches 1250, the horizontal movement motor operation data is set to step count -100 and speed 2, and the rotating body motor operation data is set to speed 3 and "- rotations." At this point, the rotating body role 902b is located at the right range limit Pt3, so by setting this operation data, it starts moving to the reference position Pt1.

After 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of the origin confirmation operation, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 2250, rotation stop is set as the rotating body motor operation data. As a result, even if the rotating body motor origin sensor cannot detect the origin position of the rotating body motor 902b2, the rotating body 902b stops rotating. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the rotating body role 902b from continuing to rotate even in the stored position. Note that since the scenario counter value 2250 is the timing for the end of the origin confirmation operation, information indicating this is the timing for the end of the origin confirmation operation is specified. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine that this is the timing for the end of the origin confirmation operation.

After the origin confirmation operation is completed and the bar role 902a falls again to the lower limit, the first movement pattern (the movement pattern in which the bar moves from the reference position Pt1 to the left range of motion limit Pt2) similar to operation scenario A is executed.

In operation scenario B, compared to operation scenario A, there is a deviation in the scenario counter value for which the operation data is specified by the amount of the origin confirmation operation that was performed, but in this 35th control example, the length of time required for the operation scenario to end is adjusted by shortening the presentation time of the notification presentation of the win/lose determination result. By configuring it in this way, the time required for the operation scenario to end is constant regardless of whether or not the origin confirmation operation is performed, and the operation scenario can be completed within the change time of the special pattern regardless of which operation scenario is selected.

In the 35th control example, the time required for the operation scenario to end is adjusted by shortening the presentation time of the notification presentation of the win/lose judgment result, but this is not limited to this, and the time required for the movement of the rotating body role 902b may be shortened by increasing the movement speed of the rotating body role 902b.

As described above, in operation scenario B, the second drop pattern (a pattern in which the bar element 902a drops in one go from the stored position to the lower limit) is executed as the drop pattern, and the first movement pattern (a pattern in which the element first moves from the reference position Pt1 to the left range limit Pt2) is set as the movement pattern of the rotating element 902b.

In addition, in this 35th control example, in addition to operation scenario B, there is operation scenario F as an operation scenario in which the second drop pattern and the first movement pattern are executed. This operation scenario F is an operation scenario that is set when the hit/miss determination result is "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "80 to 99", as shown in FIG. 1047.

Now, the contents of operation scenario F will be explained with reference to Fig. 1053. Fig. 1053(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the bar reel 902a, among the operation scenarios F of the logo reel 902. Until the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the operation of the second falling pattern is executed in the same manner as in operation scenario B.

When the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +40 and a speed of 2. At this point, the bar role 902a is at its lowest position (i.e., the position of the step counter value 25), and due to the operation data set at the scenario counter value 9200, the bar role 902a reaches the winning notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) 100 ms after the winning notification performance starts.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11,300, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +35 and a speed of 4. At this point, the step counter values of the left and right bar role motors are 65, so this operation data causes the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 to rotate in the forward direction at speed 2 until each step counter value reaches 100, and at the step counter value of 100, the bar role 902a is in the stored position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1053(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left-right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios F of the logo role 902 will be described. FIG. 1053(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left-right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios F of the logo role 902. As shown in FIG. 1053(b), up to the scenario counter value 2250, the origin confirmation operation is executed as in the above-mentioned operation scenario B. After that, unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario B, the operation scenario of the second movement pattern in which the movement is first made from the reference position Pt1 toward the right movable range limit Pt3 is executed. Specifically, when the scenario counter value becomes 3500, the number of steps +100 and speed 4 are set as the horizontal movement motor operation data, and speed 3 and + rotation are set as the rotating body motor operation data. Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 5500, the rotating body role 902b is in a state of rotating at the right range limit Pt3, and the horizontal movement motor operation data is set to step number -100 and speed 4, and the rotating body motor operation data is set to speed 3 and - rotations. Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the operation scenario of the first movement pattern (a pattern in which the rotating body role 902b first moves from the reference position Pt1 to the left range limit Pt2) is executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the reference position at this point, so by setting this operation data, the rotating body role 902b starts moving to the left range limit Pt2 at speed 2. The rotating body role 902b is now at the position of the left range limit Pt2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 8500, the horizontal movement motor operation data is set to +100 steps and speed 2, and the rotating body motor operation data is set to + rotations at speed 3. Since the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to on, the rotating body role 902b stops rotating in the forward direction when it rotates to the origin position. Also, since the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the left range of motion limit Pt2 at this point, setting this operation data causes the rotating body role 902b to start moving to the reference position Pt1 at speed 2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 9500, the rotating device 902 stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the win/lose judgment result in the operation scenario F of the rescue chance effect, and the rotating device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1 to notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

In this way, in operation scenario F, the same operation pattern (second drop pattern and first movement pattern) as operation scenario B is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the rescue chance presentation (the period until the scenario counter value 2250), and a scenario is executed in which the rotating body device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in Figure 1041 (b) (i.e., reference position Pt1) at the start of the winning notification presentation.

As described above, operation scenario B is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "miss" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "20 to 99", and operation scenario F is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "80 to 99". Since the second performance counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", operation scenario B is set at a rate of 40% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "miss", and operation scenario F is set at a rate of 10% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit". In other words, the operation scenarios of the second drop pattern and the first movement pattern are more likely to be selected when the hit/miss judgment result is a "miss" than when it is a "hit".

Next, the contents of operation scenario C will be described with reference to FIG. 1050. FIG. 1050(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the bar part 902a, among the operation scenarios C of the logo part 902. This operation scenario C is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the hit/miss determination is "miss" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 139". As shown in FIG. 1050(a), similar to the above-mentioned operation scenario A, the operation of the first drop pattern (a pattern in which the bar part 902a falls stepwise from the stored position to the lower limit) is executed as the drop pattern of the bar part 902a.

Next, referring to FIG. 1050(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left/right drive of the rotating body part 902b among the operation scenarios C of the logo part 902 will be described. FIG. 1050(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left/right drive of the rotating body part 902b among the operation scenarios C of the logo part 902. As shown in FIG. 1050(b), unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario A, the operation scenario of the second movement pattern in which the operation starts from the reference position Pt1 and moves toward the right range limit Pt3 is executed. Note that this differs from operation scenario A in that the rotation direction of the operation data specified in each scenario counter value is reversed, but otherwise is the same.

In addition, in this 35th control example, in addition to operation scenario C, there is operation scenario G as an operation scenario in which the first drop pattern and the second movement pattern are executed. This operation scenario G is an operation scenario that is set when the hit/miss determination result is "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 159", as shown in FIG. 1047.

Now, referring to FIG. 1054, the contents of operation scenario G of the logo reel 902 will be explained. FIG. 1054(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the bar reel 902a, among the operation scenarios G of the logo reel 902. As shown in FIG. 1054(a), the operation of the first falling pattern is executed in the same manner as operation scenario C until the scenario counter value reaches 6700.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +40 and a speed of 2. At this point, the bar role 902a is at its lowest position (i.e., the position of the step counter value 25), and due to the operation data set at the scenario counter value of 6700, the bar role 902a reaches the winning notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) 100 ms after the winning notification performance starts.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11,300, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +35 and a speed of 4. At this point, the step counter values of the left and right bar role motors are 65, so this operation data causes the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 to rotate in the forward direction at a speed of 4 until each step counter value reaches 100, and at the step counter value of 100, the bar role 902a is in the stored position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1054(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left/right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios G of the logo role 902 will be described. FIG. 1054(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left/right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios G of the logo role 902. As shown in FIG. 1054(b), up to the scenario counter value 5000, the operation scenario of the second movement pattern (pattern in which the character moves from the reference position Pt1 to the right range limit Pt3 at first) is executed as in the above-mentioned operation scenario C. When the scenario counter value becomes 5000, the step number -100 and speed 2 are set as the horizontal movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the reference position, so by setting this operation data, the rotating body role 902b starts moving to the left range limit Pt2 at speed 2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6000, the horizontal movement motor operation data is set to +100 steps and speed 2, and the rotating body motor operation data is set to + rotations at speed 3. Since the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to on, the rotating body role 902b stops rotating in the forward direction when it rotates to the origin position. Also, since the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the left range of motion limit Pt2 at this point, setting this operation data causes the rotating body role 902b to start moving to the reference position Pt1 at speed 2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 7000, the rotating device 902 stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the win/lose judgment result in the operation scenario G of the rescue chance effect, and the rotating device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1 to notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

In this way, in operation scenario G, the same operation pattern (first drop pattern and second movement pattern) as operation scenario C is performed for a predetermined period of time from the start of the rescue chance presentation, and a scenario is executed in which the rotating body device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in Figure 1041 (b) (i.e., reference position Pt1) at the start of the winning notification presentation.

As described above, operation scenario C is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "miss" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 139", and operation scenario G is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 159". Since the second performance counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", operation scenario C is set at a rate of 20% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "miss", and operation scenario G is set at a rate of 30% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit". In other words, the operation scenarios of the first drop pattern and the second movement pattern are more likely to be selected when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" than when it is a "miss".

Next, the contents of operation scenario D will be described with reference to FIG. 1051. FIG. 1051(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the bar part 902a, among the operation scenarios D of the logo part 902. This operation scenario D is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the hit/miss determination is "miss" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "140 to 199". As shown in FIG. 1051(a), similar to the above-mentioned operation scenario B, the second drop pattern (a pattern in which the bar part 902a drops from the stored position to the lower limit in one go) is executed as the drop pattern of the bar part 902a.

Next, referring to FIG. 1051(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotational drive and left/right drive of the rotating body part 902b among the operation scenarios D of the logo part 902 will be described. FIG. 1051(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotational drive and left/right drive of the rotating body part 902b among the operation scenarios D of the logo part 902. As shown in FIG. 1051(b), unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario B, an operation scenario of a second movement pattern in which movement from the reference position Pt1 toward the right range limit Pt3 is executed. Note that this differs from operation scenario B in that the rotation direction of the operation data specified in each scenario counter value is reversed, but otherwise is the same.

In addition, in this 35th control example, in addition to operation scenario D, there is operation scenario H as an operation scenario in which the second drop pattern and the second movement pattern are executed. This operation scenario H is an operation scenario that is set when the hit/miss determination result is "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "160 to 199", as shown in FIG. 1047.

Now, with reference to Fig. 1055, the contents of operation scenario H of the logo reel 902 will be explained. Fig. 1055(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the bar reel 902a, among the operation scenarios H of the logo reel 902. Until the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the operation of the second falling pattern is executed in the same manner as operation scenario D.

When the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +40 and a speed of 2. At this point, the bar role 902a is at its lowest position (i.e., the position of the step counter value 25), and due to the operation data set at the scenario counter value 9200, the bar role 902a reaches the winning notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) 100 ms after the winning notification performance starts.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11,300, the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles is set to a step count of +35 and a speed of 4. At this point, the step counter values of the left and right bar role motors are 65, so this operation data causes the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 to rotate in the forward direction at speed 2 until each step counter value reaches 100, and at the step counter value of 100, the bar role 902a is in the stored position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1055(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left-right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios H of the logo role 902 will be described. FIG. 1055(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the rotation drive and left-right drive of the rotating body role 902b among the operation scenarios H of the logo role 902. As shown in FIG. 1055(b), up to the scenario counter value 7500, the operation scenario of the second movement pattern (pattern in which the character moves from the reference position Pt1 to the right range limit Pt3 at first) is executed as in the above-mentioned operation scenario B. When the scenario counter value becomes 7500, the step number +100 and speed 2 are set as the horizontal movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the reference position, so by setting this operation data, the rotating body role 902b starts moving to the right range limit Pt3 at speed 2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 8500, the horizontal movement motor operation data is set to -100 steps and speed 2, and the rotating body motor operation data is set to - rotations at speed 3. Since the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to on, the rotating body role 902b stops rotating in the forward direction when it rotates to the origin position. Also, since the rotating body role 902b is rotating at the right range limit Pt3 at this point, setting this operation data causes the rotating body role 902b to start moving to the reference position Pt1 at speed 2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 9500, the rotating device 902 stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the win/lose judgment result in the operation scenario H of the rescue chance effect, and the rotating device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1 to notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

In this way, in operation scenario H, the same operation pattern (second drop pattern and second movement pattern) as operation scenario D is performed for a predetermined period of time from the start of the rescue chance presentation, and a scenario is executed in which the rotating body device 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in Figure 1041 (b) (i.e., reference position Pt1) at the start of the winning notification presentation.

As described above, operation scenario D is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "miss" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "140 to 199", and operation scenario H is set when the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a "hit" and the value of the second performance counter CS2 is in the range of "160 to 199". Since the second performance counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", operation scenario D is set at a rate of 30% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "miss", and operation scenario H is set at a rate of 20% when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit". In other words, the operation scenarios of the second drop pattern and the second movement pattern are more likely to be selected when the hit/miss judgment result is a "miss" than when it is a "hit".

In this way, in the 35th control example, when the hit/miss judgment result is "miss", the operation scenario B (second drop pattern, first movement pattern), operation scenario D (second drop pattern, second movement pattern), operation scenario C (first drop pattern, second movement pattern), and operation scenario A (first drop pattern, first movement pattern) are likely to be selected in this order, and when the hit/miss judgment result is "hit", the operation scenario E (first drop pattern, first movement pattern), operation scenario G (first drop pattern, second movement pattern), operation scenario H (second drop pattern, second movement pattern), and operation scenario F (second drop pattern, first movement pattern) are likely to be selected in this order. In other words, the possibility of winning a jackpot is higher when the operation of the first pattern is executed than when the operation of the second drop pattern is executed, and the possibility of winning a jackpot is higher when the operation of the first movement pattern is executed than when the operation of the second movement pattern is executed, and the player can predict whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the operation pattern of the logo role object 902, which can increase the interest in the game.

In the 35th control example, the origin confirmation operation is performed only in the case of the second drop pattern (a pattern in which the bar role 902a falls from the storage position to the lower limit in one go), but this is not limited to this, and the origin confirmation operation may also be performed in the first drop pattern (a pattern in which the bar role 902a falls stepwise from the storage position). In this case, the origin confirmation operation is performed when the bar role 902a is in a right middle half-drop state (see FIG. 1033 (a)), and if the origin position cannot be confirmed, the operation data for returning the bar role 902a to the storage position is set. In addition, in the 35th control example, various operation scenarios are specified for various motors (left bar role motor, right bar role motor) using only rotation in the direction in which the number of steps is added, but this is not limited to this, and rotation instructions in the direction in which the number of steps is subtracted may be specified for various motors. Also, instead of pre-determining the rotation instructions for the various motors, when the conditions for driving the various motors are met, the state of the various devices to be driven may be judged, and the rotation instructions (rotation direction) for the various motors may be determined based on the judgment result, or the rotation instructions for the various motors may be configured to differ based on the result of the target special pattern lottery. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure at least one of the various motors to be driven in a different rotation direction from the normal direction only when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific jackpot win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the movement of the various devices (falling content and left and right movement content) but also in the rotation direction of the various motors to move the various devices.

In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 32nd control example described above, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a first performance counter xa, a second performance counter xb, a reel standby flag xc, an operation scenario storage area 223xd, a reel moving flag xe, a fluctuating flag xf, a fluctuating time counter 223xg, a scenario counter xh, each step counter xi, a special scenario flag 223xj, an origin flag 223xk, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The first effect counter 223xa is a counter used to select a display variation pattern, and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199." It is updated by adding 1 each time the main process is executed.

The second performance counter 223xb is a counter used to select the operation scenario of the logo role object 902, and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199." It is updated by adding 1 each time the main process is executed.

The reel standby flag 223xc is a flag for indicating that the operation scenario of the logo reel 902 is stored in the operation scenario storage area 223xd, and is set to ON when a display variation pattern with a rescue chance performance is set as the display variation pattern in the performance mode setting process 4 (see S4311A in FIG. 1060) and the determined operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 223xd (see S4536 in FIG. 1060). Then, when the timing for the rescue chance performance is reached and an operation scenario is read out from the operation scenario storage area 223xd in the rescue chance performance start process (see S3155 in FIG. 1062), the reel standby flag 223xc is set to OFF (see S3235 in FIG. 1062).

The operation scenario storage area 223xd is an area for storing the operation scenario of the logo gadget 902 determined in the performance mode setting process 4 (see S4311A in FIG. 1060). The information (operation scenario) stored in this operation scenario storage area 223xd is read out when the rescue chance performance starts (see S3232 in FIG. 1062).

The reel moving flag 223xe is a flag for indicating that the operation scenario of the logo reel 902 is being set, and is set to ON when an operation scenario is set from the operation scenario storage area 223xd at the start timing of the rescue chance presentation (see S3236 in FIG. 1062). It is set to OFF when the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (see S4653 in FIG. 1064) or when the cancellation of the operation scenario is set (see S4362 in FIG. 1063).

The changing flag 223xf is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is in a changing display period, and the changing time counter 223xg is a counter for measuring the changing time of the special symbol. In this 35th control example, when the changing flag 223xf is set to on, the value of the changing time counter 223xg is updated in the LCD performance execution management process 4 (see S3120 in FIG. 1061).

The scenario counter 223xh is a counter for setting operation data defined in the operation scenario in accordance with the passage of the special pattern change time. The scenario counter 223xh is incremented by one each time the special scenario execution process (S3157) or rescue chance performance execution process (S3159) in the LCD performance execution management process 4 (see S3120 in FIG. 1061) is executed. Note that the LCD performance execution management process 4 (S3120) is a process that is executed every 1 ms in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1056). Therefore, the scenario counter is updated every 1 ms, just like the change time counter 223xg.

The step counter xi is a counter for counting the number of steps of each stepping motor of the left bar role motor 902c7, the right bar role motor 902d7, the lateral movement motor 902b3, and the rotating body motor 902b2.

The special scenario flag 223xj is a flag that is referenced to determine whether the operation scenario B, D, F, or H is set as the operation scenario for the logo reel 902 in the rescue chance performance. Details will be described later, but in these operation scenarios, the second drop pattern (an operation pattern in which the bar reel 902a falls in one go from the stored position to the lower limit) is executed, so when this special scenario flag 223xj is on, a special scenario execution process (see FIG. 1063) is executed to control the origin confirmation operation. When the origin confirmation operation is completed, the special scenario flag 223xj is set to off.

The origin flag 223xk is a flag that is set on when the rotating body motor origin sensor detects the origin position of the rotating body motor. When this origin flag 223xk is set on during the origin confirmation operation of the rotating body role 902b, it is determined that the currently running operation scenario will continue, and when the origin flag 223xk is not set on during the origin confirmation operation, it is determined that the currently running operation scenario will be stopped.

The RAM 223 has other memory areas 223z, such as a command storage area that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command storage area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable presentation) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 are omitted as they are already publicly known.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 976).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 1056 to 1064, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 1056, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 1056 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the start of the main processing or since the processing of S3101 was executed last time (S3101). If 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S3101: No), the processing of S3102 to S3112 is not performed and the processing proceeds to S3121. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S3101 is that S3102 to S3112 are processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination processing 4 of S3121 and the variable display setting processing 4 of S3122 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3121 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S3121 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3112 to the display control device 114 (S3102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S3108 described later (S3103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process is a process for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S3105.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a process for updating the display of the number of reserved balls is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the settings are sent as commands to the display control device 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After the processing of S3109, the LCD performance execution management process 4 is executed (S3120), then various counter update processes are executed (S3111), and performance update processes are executed (S3112). After the processing of S3112 is executed, the process proceeds to S3121. In the LCD performance execution management process 4, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process 4. The sound editing and output process of S3109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. Details of this LCD performance execution monitoring process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 1061.

After processing of S3112, command determination process 4 (S3121) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110, and the process proceeds to S3122. Details of this command determination process 4 (S3121) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1057.

In the processing of S3122, in order to display a variable display performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display setting process 4 is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 1059.

When the processing of S3122 is completed, it is determined whether or not power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control unit 110. If power failure information is stored in the processing of S3115 (S3115: Yes), both the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are turned on (S3117), and power failure processing is executed (S3118). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall staff member or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 1057, command determination process 4 (S3121) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 1057 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 4 (S3121). As shown in FIG. 1057, command determination process 4 (S3121) differs from the command determination process in the 32nd control example described above (see S3113 in FIG. 983) in that when a pattern determination command (stop command) is received (S3218: Yes), pattern determination command process 4 (see S3219 in FIG. 1058) is executed. The rest of the process contents are the same, and the same process contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1058, the contents of pattern determination command process 4 (see S3219) executed in command determination process 4 (see S3121 in FIG. 1057) will be described. FIG. 1058 is a flowchart showing the contents of pattern determination command process 4 (S3219). This pattern determination command process 4 (S3219) is a process that is executed when a pattern determination command (stop command) that is set when the variation time of the special pattern has ended is received from the main control device 110.

When the pattern determination command process 4 (S3219) is executed, first, a display stop command is set to stop the variable display of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 (S3651). The display stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 1056) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display pattern determination command, it ends the variable display of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81. When the process of S3651 is completed, the variable flag xf is set to OFF (S3652), and the value of the variable time counter xg is reset (S3653).

Next, the contents of variable display setting process 4 (S3122) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1059. FIG. 1059 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable display setting process 4 (S3122). This variable display setting process 4 (S3122) is executed within the main processing (see FIG. 1056) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S3122), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4301). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4301: No), since a variation pattern command has not been received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to S4306. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S4302), the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S4303), and then a performance mode setting process 4 is executed to generate a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type (S4311), a display fluctuation pattern command for indicating the performance mode set by the process of S4311 is set (S4305), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4312), and the fluctuation flag 223xf is set to on (S4313). Details of the performance mode setting process 4 (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1060.

In the process of S4306, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4306). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4306: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4307), and then a display stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command in the process of S4308 (S4309), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the presentation mode setting process 4 (S4311) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1060. FIG. 1060 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the presentation mode setting process 4 (S4311). This presentation mode setting process 4 (S4311) executes processing for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation, and executes processing for setting various presentation modes according to the result of the special pattern lottery for which the presentation mode is set and the set game state. In addition, when it is decided to execute a presentation using the logo role object 902 as the variable presentation, the operation scenario of the logo role object 902 corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery is determined.

When the performance mode setting process 4 (S4311) is executed, first, the counter values of the first performance counter 223xa and the second performance counter xb are obtained (S4531), and the display variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa based on the obtained counter value of the first performance counter 223xa and the variation pattern type of the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S4303 in the variation display setting process 4 (S3121 in FIG. 1059) (S4532).

Next, it is determined whether the display variation pattern determined in the process of S4532 is a display variation pattern with a rescue chance presentation (S4533). If it is determined that it is a display variation pattern with a rescue chance presentation (S4533: Yes), an operation scenario is determined from the operation scenario selection table 222xb based on the result of the special symbol lottery for setting the presentation mode and the counter value of the second presentation counter 223xb (S4534), the determined operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 223xd (S4535), the role standby flag 223xc is set to ON (S4536), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4533 that the displayed variation pattern does not include a rescue chance effect (S4533: No), this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1061, the contents of LCD performance execution management process 4 (S3120) will be explained. FIG. 1061 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 4 (S3120). This LCD performance execution management process 4 (S3120) is executed within the main processing (see FIG. 1056) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and a process is executed to update the value of the variable time counter 223xg, which is set to a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110, and a process is executed to determine the performance mode corresponding to the updated value.

When the LCD performance execution management process 4 (S3120) is executed, it is first determined whether the changing flag 223xf is on (S3151). If it is determined that the changing flag 223xf is not on (i.e., the changing display of the special pattern is not being executed) (S3151: No), this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if the changing flag 223xf is on (i.e., the changing display of the special pattern is being executed) (S3151: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the change time counter 223xg (S3152).

When the processing of S3152 is completed, it is determined whether the reel standby flag 223xc is on or not (S3153). If it is determined that it is on (i.e., the execution of the rescue chance performance is waiting) (S3153: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter 223xg updated in the processing of S3152 is the start time of the rescue chance performance (S3154). If it is determined that it is not the start time of the rescue chance performance (S3154: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3154 that it is the start time of the rescue chance performance (S3154: Yes), rescue chance performance start processing is executed (S3155). Then, this processing is terminated.

Now, the contents of the rescue chance performance start process (S3155) will be described with reference to FIG. 1062. FIG. 1062 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the rescue chance performance start process (S3155). This rescue chance performance start process (S3155) executes processing to start the operation scenario of the logo role object 902 in time with the start of the rescue chance performance.

When the rescue chance performance start process (S3155) is started, first, a display command is set (S3231) to display a notification mode (display in display area HR1 in FIG. 1041(b)) notifying the start of the rescue chance performance, and then an action scenario stored in the action scenario storage area 223xd is set (S3232).

When the processing of S3232 is completed, it is determined whether the set operation scenario is one of operation scenarios B, D, G, or H (S3233). If it is determined that the operation scenario is one of operation scenarios B, D, G, or H (S3233: Yes), the special scenario flag 223xj is set to ON (S3234), and processing of S3235 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3233 that the operation scenario is not one of operation scenarios B, D, G, or H (i.e., the set operation scenario is one of operation scenarios A, C, E, or F) (S3233: No), processing of S3237 is skipped, and processing of S3235 is performed.

In the process of S3235, the reel waiting flag 223xc is set to OFF (S3235), the reel moving flag 223xe is set to ON (S3236), and this process ends.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to start the operation scenario of the logo reel 902 when a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern change was executed.

Returning to FIG. 1061, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S3153, if it is determined that the reel standby flag 223xc is not on (S3153: No), it is determined whether the special scenario flag 223xj is on (S3156). If it is determined that the special scenario flag 223xj is on (S3156: Yes), special scenario execution processing (S3157) is performed.

Now, referring to FIG. 1063, the contents of the special scenario execution process (S3157) will be explained. FIG. 1063 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special scenario execution process. This special scenario execution process (S3157) is executed when any of the operation scenarios B, D, G, or H is set, and is a process for canceling the operation scenario of the logo reel 902 and switching to an alternative rescue chance presentation using the LCD display when the origin position cannot be detected during the origin confirmation operation of the rotating body reel 902b in the operation scenario.

When the special scenario execution process (S3157) is executed, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is the value of the end of origin check (S4351). If it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the value of the end of origin check (S4351: No), it is determined whether the origin flag 223xk is on (S4352). If it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is not on (i.e., the origin position has not been detected) (S4352: No), it is determined whether the origin sensor (not shown) is on (S4353). This origin sensor is a sensor for detecting the origin position of the rotating body role 902b, and is turned on when the rotating body role 902b is at the origin position. If it is determined that the origin sensor is on in the process of S4353 (S4353: Yes), the origin flag 223xk is set to on (S4354), and the process proceeds to S4355. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4353 that the origin sensor 223xk is not on (S4353: No), the process of S4354 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4355.

If it is determined in the process of S4352 that the origin flag 223xk is on (S4352: Yes), the processes of S4353 and S4354 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4355.

In the processing of S4355, the scenario counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 (S4355), operation data corresponding to the updated scenario counter value is set (S4356), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S4351 that the scenario counter value is the value for ending the origin confirmation (S4351: Yes), it is then determined whether the origin flag 223xk is on or not (S4357). If it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is on (S4357: Yes), the origin flag 223xk is set to off (S4358), the special scenario flag 223xj is set to off (S4359), and the processing proceeds to S4355.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4357 that the origin flag 223xk is not on (i.e., the origin position cannot be detected in the origin confirmation operation) (S4357: No), the currently set operation scenario is set to be stopped (S4360), the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4361), and the reel moving flag 223xf is set to OFF (S4362). After that, a display command is set to display an alternative rescue chance presentation corresponding to the win/lose determination result (S4363), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 1061, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S3156 that the special scenario flag 223xj is not on (S3156: No), then it is determined whether or not the reel moving flag 223xe is on (S3158). If it is determined that the reel moving flag 223xe is not on (i.e., the rescue chance performance is not being executed) (S3158: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3158 that the reel moving flag 223xe is on (S3158: Yes), rescue chance performance execution processing is executed (S3159). Then, this processing ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 1064, the contents of the rescue chance performance in progress processing (S3159) will be explained. FIG. 1064 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the rescue chance performance in progress processing (S3159). This rescue chance performance in progress processing (S3159) is processing for setting operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value of the scenario counter 223xh.

When the rescue chance performance execution process (S3159) is executed, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating the end of the scenario (i.e., END information) (S4651). If it is determined that the counter value is the end value of the scenario (S4651: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4652), the role object moving flag 223xe is set to OFF (S4653), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4651: No), it is then determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating that it is time for a notification effect (S4654). If it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is not a value indicating that it is time for a notification effect (S4654: No), 1 is added to the scenario counter 223xh (S4659), operation data corresponding to the updated counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4660), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4654, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating that it is the timing of the notification performance (S4654: Yes), then it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern is a hit (S4655). If it is determined that the hit/miss judgment result is not a hit (i.e., the hit/miss judgment result is a miss) (S4655: No), it is determined whether the stopping position of the rotating device 902b is the hit notification position (the position indicated by the up arrow 802 shown in FIG. 1041(b)) (S4656). If it is determined that it is the hit notification position (S4656: Yes), 30 steps are set to the horizontal movement motor 902b3 (S4657), and a failure notification command for display is set to display a notification mode indicating failure (display of the display area HR in FIG. 1042(b)) (S4658), and the process proceeds to S4659.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4656 that the stopping position of the rotating device 902b is not the winning notification position (S4656: No), the process of S4657 is skipped and the process of S4658 is performed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the rotating device 902b stops at the winning notification position despite a miss due to a malfunction such as loss of synchronism or a breakdown, additional operation data can be set and the device moved from the winning notification position, preventing incorrect game information from being provided to the player.

In the process of S4655, if it is determined that the winning/losing judgment result is a winning (S4655: Yes), it is determined whether the stopping position of the rotating device 902b is the winning notification position (S4661). If it is determined that the stopping position of the rotating device 902b is the winning notification position (S4661: Yes), a display pattern movement command is set (S4662). This display pattern movement command is a command to move the middle pattern row shown in FIG. 1041(b) by half a frame and display the entire third pattern (middle lower pattern Z2c shown in FIG. 1042(a)) that constitutes the winning notification mode (the string of characters "Umi Monogatari") as shown in FIG. 1042(a).

When the processing of S4662 is completed, a display success notification command is set (S4663) to display a notification mode indicating the success of the rescue chance presentation (display of the display area HR shown in FIG. 1042(a)), and the processing proceeds to S4659.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4661 that the stopping position of the rotating device 902b is not the winning notification position (S4661: No), a revival notification command for display is set (S4664) to display a notification mode indicating a failure on the LCD display and then a notification mode indicating a jackpot win (the so-called revival effect), and the process proceeds to S4659.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from experiencing an unnatural presentation, such as a notification mode indicating that the rescue chance presentation was successful, even though the rotating device 902b has not stopped at the winning notification position.

As described above, in the 35th control example, an effect is executed in which an active line is formed by combining the decoration of the game board surface, the decorative movable device (logo device 902), and a part of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to interest the player in the positional relationship between the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration of the game board surface, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 35th control example, the winning line is formed by the decoration on the game board, the decorative movable parts, and the third pattern, but this is not limited to this, and instead of the third pattern, the winning line may be formed by the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, referring to FIG. 1065, a modified example of the 35th control example will be described. In the modified example of the 35th control example, a winning line is formed by the decoration of the game board, the third symbol, and the reserved symbol, without using any decorative movable parts. As shown in FIG. 1065(a), when the rescue chance presentation starts, a character 801 is displayed in a manner suggesting that the display mode of the active reserved symbol hr0 will be changed, and the active reserved symbol hr0 is changed to a manner indicating that the display mode is being changed. Then, a guidance manner is displayed in HR1 displayed at the top center of the main display area Dm to guide the player to the successful presentation condition, "Rescue chance! If the reserved symbol changes to "word", it's a big win."

After a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed, the pending symbol hr0 is displayed in a preset display mode as shown in FIG. 1065(b). FIG. 1065(b) shows the case where the performance is successful, in which the pending symbol hr0 is changed to the pending symbol "word", and the letters "Sea Story" are formed vertically by the logo decoration Rg1, the middle-middle pattern Z2b, and the pending symbol hr0, and the LED built into the logo decoration Rg1 flashes to indicate that a valid line has been formed, and an effect is applied to emphasize the middle-middle pattern Z2b.

By configuring it in this way, even gaming machines that are not equipped with decorative movable parts can produce effects that combine the decoration of the game board surface with the third pattern.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the character string "Umi Monogatari" is formed as a way to notify the player that a jackpot has been won, but this is not limited to this and other character strings may be formed.

<36th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1066 to Fig. 1114. The pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example described above in that it is equipped with a plurality (3) of decorative movable parts used as part of the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special pattern, and a new variable performance using the plurality of decorative movable parts is added.

In the 35th control example described above, a performance using a decorative movable part (a rescue chance performance) is executed after the third symbol is displayed in a manner indicating a loss. In contrast, the 36th control example is configured to execute a new performance using a decorative movable part during the period before the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the win/loss determination.

Here, conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine 10 that executes a performance using a decorative movable part as part of a variable performance for predicting the result of a win/loss judgment of a special pattern. In such a pachinko machine 10, the advance notice performance using the decorative movable part is executed at various times during the variable period.

However, since the decorative movable parts in pachinko machine 10 move in front of the display screen when viewed from the front, it is generally difficult for players to see the display area of the display screen that overlaps with the decorative movable parts while the decorative movable parts are moving.

Therefore, if another effect (for example, a reach state of the third symbol) is displayed on the display screen to provide game information at the same time that an effect using a decorative movable device is executed, if it overlaps with the decorative movable device that is currently moving, it will not be visible to the player. For players hoping that the third symbol, which indicates a jackpot, will be stopped and displayed, the combined effect may become irritating, reducing the effect of the effect.

In contrast to this, in the present 36th control example, the type of elements used to create the same presentation result (the formation of a form that notifies the player of a high probability of winning the jackpot, "Gekiatsu," as shown in FIG. 1090) and the control content for each element are varied depending on the timing at which a composite presentation using multiple decorative movable parts is executed, making it possible to execute the composite presentation without interfering with the variable presentation of the third pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable presentation regardless of the timing at which the composite presentation is executed. Also, since the presentation mode of the composite presentation that shows the same presentation result can be varied in accordance with the content of the variable presentation displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to execute the composite presentation at various times, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example described above in that it is equipped with multiple decorative movable parts, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 35th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the decorative movable parts of the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1066 to Fig. 1088, the configuration of the decorative movable parts of the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example will be described. Fig. 1066 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example. It is different from the above-mentioned 35th control example in that it is equipped with multiple decorative movable parts and that the arrangement of the variable winning device 650, the specific winning port 65a, and the second ball entry port 640 has been changed. Note that the structure of the variable winning device 650 is the same as that of the 35th control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 36th control example is equipped with three decorative movable parts: a logo part 902, an "A" part 903, and a shutter part 904. As shown in FIG. 1066, the logo part 902 is usually stored in the upper part of the third pattern display device 81, the "A" part 903 is stored in the lower center of the third pattern display device 81, and the shutter part 904 is stored on the left and right of the third pattern display device 81. The detailed configuration of each decorative movable part is described below.

Figure 1067 is a front view of the operating unit of the logo reel 902 and the "A" reel 903. The logo reel 902 is composed of a bar reel 902a and a rotating body reel 902b, and the surface of the rotating body reel 902b is decorated with the character "Ki". This logo reel 902b has a built-in LED and can be illuminated by a command from the audio lamp control device 113.

The "A" role 903 is a decorative movable role with the character "A" decorated on its surface. Details will be described later, but in this 36th control example, the logo role 902, the "A" role 903, the "Ge" character decoration 904a4 decorated on the shutter role 904 (see FIG. 1069), and the "Tsu" character decoration 905 decorated on the game board surface form a character string that says "GEKIATSU," indicating a high probability of winning a jackpot (see FIG. 1090).

Figure 1068 (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the operating unit of the logo reel 902. Note that the configuration of this logo reel 902 is the same as that of the logo reel 902 in the 35th control example described above, except that the decoration applied to the surface is different.

As shown in FIG. 1068(a), the logo reel 902 is composed of a bar reel 902a, a rotating body reel 902b, and left and right lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. The structure of the logo reel 902 will be explained below with reference to FIG. 1076 to FIG. 1081 as appropriate.

The bar feature 902a has lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d on both the left and right ends. The lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d are symmetrically configured and have roughly the same shape. For this reason, the explanation of the right lifting mechanism 902d will be omitted for the same configuration as that explained in the left lifting mechanism 902c.

The left lifting mechanism 902c has a two-stage rack consisting of an upper rack 902c1 and a boot-shaped lower rack 902c2, and is connected to the upper rack 902c1 by a connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 1040) provided at the upper end of the lower rack 902c. The height of this two-stage rack can be changed by changing the position of a cylindrical pin 902c3p provided on the upper drive cam 902c3 as the upper drive cam 902c3 rotates.

Now, with reference to Figs. 1076 and 1077, the detailed structure of the left lifting mechanism 902c will be described. Fig. 1076 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d, and Fig. 1077 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. As shown in Fig. 1076, the left lifting mechanism 902c is provided with a bar role motor 902c7, which is a stepping motor for upper drive. The bar role motor 902c7 is provided with an upper drive gear 902c4 that engages with the upper drive cam 902c3. When the bar role motor 902c7 is operated, the upper drive gear 902c4 rotates, thereby rotating the upper drive cam 902c3. The upper drive cam 902c3 is provided with a cylindrical pin 902c3p, and the position of the cylindrical pin 902c3p changes when the upper drive cam 903c3 rotates.

This cylindrical pin 902c3p protrudes toward the front when viewed from the front, and when the bar role 902a is in the storage position, the bottom of the lower rack 902c2 is supported from below by the cylindrical pin 902c3p. Then, when the cylindrical pin 902c3p moves clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right-side lifting mechanism 902d) from the position in FIG. 1032(a), the cylindrical pin 902c3p comes off the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, and the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p. Note that the bar role 902a is supported by a stopper 902c5 (see FIG. 1077), and when the stopper 902c5 is in a locked state, the bar role 902a will not fall even if the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p.

This stopper 902c5 is changed between a locked state and an unlocked state by sliding the arm member 902c6 connected to the upper drive cam 902c3 as the bar role motor 902c7 rotates a predetermined number of steps (25 steps in this 35th control example), and raising and lowering the link member 902c5L connected to the arm member 902c6. When the stopper 902c5 is in the unlocked state and the cylindrical pin 902c3p is not inserted into the lower part of the lower rack 902c2, the lower rack 902c2 falls by its own weight. At this time, the connecting gear 902c8a connecting the lower rack 902c2 and the upper rack 902c1 engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c provided on the support part of the lifting mechanism 902c and rotates counterclockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with the upper protruding piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1077) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the upper rack 902c1 is lowered by rotating the connecting gear 902c8a counterclockwise. As a result, the bar role 902a falls to its lower limit.

The right midway stop solenoid 902d9 shown in Fig. 1032(a) is provided only on the right lift mechanism 902d. When this right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is ON, the valve protrudes toward the back side when viewed from the front, making it possible to stop the bar role 902a, which falls under its own weight, at the position shown in Fig. 1033(a). On the other hand, when the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is OFF, the valve retracts and the bar role 902a falls to its lowest point.

Here, in this 35th control example, two types of drop patterns can be set as the drop pattern of the bar role 902a. First, the first drop pattern is a right-side intermediate drop state (see FIG. 1033(a)) in which the left stopper 902c5 is left in a locked state and only the right stopper 902d5 is released, and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned ON, and then the left stopper 902c5 is released from the right-side intermediate drop state, and the left-side drop state (see FIG. 1033(b)) in which the left end of the bar role 902a has fallen to its lowering limit is set, and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned OFF, causing the right end of the bar role 902a to also fall to its lowering limit (the position shown in FIG. 1032(b)).

The second drop pattern is when the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released simultaneously and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned OFF, causing the bar feature 902a to fall to the lower limit in one go under its own weight.

Thus, even though the bar mechanism 902a is designed to fall under its own weight, various falling patterns can be set by varying the release timing of the right mid-stop solenoid 902d9 and the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5.

Returning to FIG. 1076, we will continue the explanation. When the bar role 902a is at the lower limit (when in the state shown in FIG. 1070), the upper drive cam 902c3 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right lifting mechanism 902d), causing the cylindrical pin 902c3p to move clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 1032(b), enter the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, and push up the lower rack 902c2. When the lower rack 902c2 is pushed up by the cylindrical pin 902c3p, the connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 1077) engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c (see FIG. 1077) provided on the support part of the lifting mechanism 902c, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates clockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a also engages with an upper protruding piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1077) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the upper rack 902c1 is raised by the connecting gear 902c8a rotating clockwise.

In this way, by using a two-tier rack consisting of an upper rack 902c1 and a lower rack 902c2, it is possible to drive the upper drive cam 902c3 up and down with a stroke longer than its diameter, which allows the upper drive cam 902c3 to be made lighter and the stepping motor used to drive it to be driven with reduced output. This allows the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced.

Next, the structure of the rotating body role 902b will be described with reference to Figs. 1080 to 1081. Fig. 1080 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body role 902b and the bar role 902a, and Fig. 1081 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body role 902b and the bar role 902a. The rotating body 902b1 is a member with a decoration on the surface, and in this 35th control example, it is decorated with the character "物" (mono) related to the subject of the pachinko machine 10 (see Fig. 1070). On the back side of this rotating body 902b1, a rotating body motor 902b2, which is a stepping motor for rotation drive, and a roller slider 902b6 are provided (see Fig. 1079). When the rotating body motor 902b2 is driven based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, the rotating gear 902b7 rotates, and the rotation of the rotating gear 902b7 rotates the rotating body 902b1.

The rotor motor 902b2 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the rotation direction of the rotor 902b1 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotor motor 902b2.

In addition, the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the rotation speed of the rotor 902b1 can also be varied in response to the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2.

As shown in FIG. 1078, the roller slider 902b6 provided on the rotating body accessory 902b is configured so that the ball screw 902b5 can be inserted therethrough. This ball screw 902b5 is provided with a lateral drive gear 902b4 at the left end when viewed from the front, and a lateral movement motor 902b3, which is a stepping motor for lateral drive, at the left end when viewed from the front. When the lateral movement motor 902b3 is driven, the lateral drive gear rotates, and the ball screw 902b5 rotates. When the ball screw 902b5 rotates, the roller slider 902b6 moves left and right. This allows the rotating body accessory 902b to move left and right.

Now, referring to FIG. 1090(a), the left and right range of motion of the rotating body part 902b will be explained. The rotating body part 902b can move left and right on the front side of the bar part 902a when viewed from the front, within a range from the left range of motion limit Pt2 to the right range of motion limit Pt3. In addition, a reference position Pt1 is set halfway between the left and right range of motion limits Pt2 and Pt3, and when the bar part 902a is in the stored position, it stops at the reference position Pt1.

The lateral movement motor 902b3 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by the audio lamp control device 113. When the lateral movement motor 902b3 rotates clockwise, the rotating body part 902b moves to the right when viewed from the front, and when it rotates counterclockwise, the rotating body part 902b moves to the left when viewed from the front.

In addition, the bar device 902a is provided with sensors (not shown) at positions corresponding to the reference position Pt1, the left range of motion limit Pt2, and the right range of motion limit Pt3, and is configured to be able to detect the left and right positions of the rotating body device 902b.

In addition, the rotation speed of the horizontal movement motor 902b3 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the movement speed of the rotating device 902b can also be changed according to the rotation speed of the horizontal movement motor 902b3.

Returning to Figure 1068(b), we will continue the explanation. Figure 1068(b) is a schematic diagram of the operating unit of the "A" reel 903, and shows the "A" reel 903 in the state where it has risen to its maximum elevation. Below, we will explain the detailed structure of the "A" reel, with appropriate reference to Figures 1082 to 1085.

Figures 1082 and 1084 are exploded front perspective views of the "A" role 903, and Figures 1083 and 1085 are exploded rear perspective views of the "A" role 903. As shown in Figure 1082, the "A" role 903 is composed of a rising role 903a and a rising rail 903b.

As shown in FIG. 1084, the rising part 903a is provided with a motor for A-type part 903a3, which is a stepping motor for up and down drive. A gear 903a2 to which an arm member is attached is connected to this motor for A-type part 903a3, and the arm member rises when the motor for A-type part 903a3 is driven clockwise, and falls when driven counterclockwise. The height of the rising part 903a can be changed by the arm member moving up and down.

Figure 1069 is a schematic diagram of the operating unit of the shutter part 904, showing the case where the shutter part 904 is in a closed state. As shown in Figure 1069, when the shutter part 904 is in a closed state, the "Ge" character decoration 904a4 is formed across the first left shutter door 904a1 and the left shutter door 904a2. The detailed structure of the shutter part 904 will be described below with reference to Figures 1086 to 1087 as appropriate.

Figure 1086 is a front perspective view showing the operating unit when the shutter role 904 is in the open state. In the open state, the shutter role 904 is stored with the shutter doors 904a1-904a3 and 904b1-904b3, three on each side, stacked on top of each other. A rail mechanism 904c is provided on the top of the shutter doors, which is a stepping motor for driving the shutter doors to open and close.

The rail mechanism 904c is provided with a left shutter role motor 904c1 that drives the left shutter door 904a1-904a3 to open and close, and a right shutter role motor 904c5 that drives the right shutter door 904b1-904b3 to open and close. When the shutter role motors 904c1 and 904c5 are driven clockwise, the slide gears 904c4a and 904c4b connected to the shutter role motors 904c1 and 904c5, respectively, slide in the closing direction. Then, the shutter gears 904c3a and 904c3b connected to the slide gears 904c4a and 904c4b, respectively, slide in conjunction with each other, so that the left third shutter door 904a3 connected to the shutter gear 904c3a and the right third shutter door 904b3 connected to the shutter gear 904c3b slide in the closing direction. The left shutter doors 904a1 to 904a3 are connected by a connecting member, and the right shutter doors 904b1 to 904b3 are also connected by a connecting member. Therefore, when the left and right third shutter doors 904a3 and 904b3 slide in the closing direction, the shutter doors 904a1, 904a2, 904b1, and 904b2 also slide in conjunction with each other. The shutter mechanism 904 can be opened by driving the left and right shutter mechanism motors 904c1 and 904c5 counterclockwise.

Figure 1070 shows the state where the logo reel 902 is at the lowest position, Figure 1071 shows the state where the logo reel 902 is in a right-center half-dropped state, and Figure 1072 shows the state where the logo reel 902 is in a right-center half-dropped state and a left-side drop state. Also, Figure 1073 shows the state where the "A" reel 903 has risen to the highest position.

Figure 1074 shows the case where the shutter device 904 is in a closed state. As shown in Figure 1074, the shutter device 904 is composed of multiple shutter doors 904a1-904a3, 904b1-904b3. When the shutter device 904 is in a closed state, it covers the entire display area of the third pattern display device 81, so the player cannot see the effects displayed in the display area.

Figure 1075 shows the case where all of the decorative movable parts are in a movable state. As shown in Figure 1075, all of the decorative movable parts are movable and stop at a predetermined position, and combine with the "tsu" character decoration 905 on the game board surface to form the character string "Gekiatsu."

<About the performance content in the 36th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1089 to Fig. 1096, the characteristic content of the performance executed in the 36th control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example, a composite performance (character performance) is executed in which all of the decorative movable parts are used to form the character string "Gekiatsu" as a performance suggesting a high probability of winning a jackpot. In the 36th control example, this composite performance is executed at various times during the variable display period of the special symbol. Specifically, the execution timing is specified for each set variable pattern, and there are cases where it is executed during the pre-reach performance period of the special symbol and cases where it is executed during the reach performance period.

By varying the timing of the composite effect execution depending on the variation pattern in this way, it becomes difficult for players to predict the timing of the composite effect execution, making it possible for players to expect the composite effect to be executed until the variation time of the special pattern ends.

First, the composite performance of the normal pattern will be described with reference to Figs. 1089 to 1090(a) and Fig. 1094. The composite performance of the normal pattern is a composite performance pattern executed during the pre-reach performance period during the variable display period of the special pattern. The pre-reach performance period is the period from when the variable display of the third pattern begins on the third pattern display device 81 until the third pattern becomes a reach state, and in addition to the composite performance, various advance notice performances are executed to advance the win/loss judgment result. In the composite performance of the normal pattern, the string "Gekiatsu" is formed using all of the decorative movable parts.

Now, referring to FIG. 1094, the relationship between the special pattern change, the performance display of the third pattern display device 81, and each of the decorative movable parts when a normal pattern composite performance is executed will be described. FIG. 1094 is a timing chart showing the special pattern change, the performance display of the third pattern display device 81, and the state of each of the decorative movable parts when a normal pattern composite performance is executed.

Figure 1094 explains an example in which "Super Reach (change time 80 s)" is set as the special symbol change pattern type. As shown in Figure 1094, in the "Super Reach" change pattern, the pre-reach performance period is 40 seconds, and the reach performance period is 40 seconds. When the special symbol change display starts, the third symbol display device 81 executes a liquid crystal performance for 20 seconds, including a preview performance to notify the win/loss judgment result. During this period, each decorative movable part is in a stored state, so the player can see the performance displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

When 20 seconds have passed since the special symbol started to change, a 20-second composite performance starts. Details will be described later, but in this 36th control example, it is determined whether or not it is a reach performance period at the start timing of the composite performance, and the operation scenario of the decorative movable parts is set according to the determination result (see FIG. 1111). In the example shown in FIG. 1094, since it is a pre-reach performance period, the operation scenario of the normal pattern is set. In the operation scenario of the normal pattern, when the composite performance starts, the logo part 902 falls to the descent limit, and the rotating body part 902b moves to the right movable range limit Pt3 while rotating. FIG. 1089(a) is a diagram showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable part at the point when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance.

As shown in FIG. 1089(a), the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the middle part of the main display area Dm is not visible to the player because the logo device 902 is located in the front. The rotating body device 902b has moved from the reference position Pt1 to the right range limit Pt3. The rotating body device 902b then starts moving toward the left range limit Pt2 while rotating counterclockwise. At this point, the "A" device 903 and the shutter device 904 are both in a stored state.

Returning to FIG. 1094, the explanation will be continued. Five seconds after the start of the composite performance, the shutter role 904 is closed. FIG. 1089(b) is a simplified diagram showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable role at a point five seconds after the start of the composite performance. The shutter role 904 is closed and the "Ge" character decoration 904a4 is formed. The part of the shutter role 904 decorated with the "Ge" character decoration 904a4 is made of a material that is transparent on the back, and by displaying an effect in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the "Ge" character decoration 904a4 part can be made to look as if it is emitting light. In this 36th control example, the decorative movable role that has reached the final stop position is configured to emit light as a mode for indicating that each decorative role has reached the final stop position in the composite performance.

The rotating body part 902b is in the process of moving from the right range of motion limit Pt3 to the left range of motion limit Pt2.

Returning to FIG. 1094, the explanation will be continued. When 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance, the "A" role 903 will be in the rising state. FIG. 1090(a) is a diagram showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable role at the time when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance. In response to the rotation body role 902b reaching the left movable range limit Pt2, which is the final stop position, the LED built into the rotation body role 902b is in the lit state. In addition, the "A" role 903 is in the lit state based on the fact that it has risen to the rising limit, which is the final stop position. Then, in response to all the decorative movable roles stopping at the final stop position, the LED attached to the "Tsu" character decoration 905 on the game board surface is lit, so that the player can easily recognize that the character string "Gekiatsu" has been formed on the performance line EL1.

Returning to FIG. 1094, we will continue with the explanation. Each decorative movable part that has become movable returns to a stored state at the timing specified in the operation scenario before the performance period of the composite performance ends, and at the start of the reach performance period, all decorative movable parts are in a stored state. This makes it possible to prevent the reach state of the third pattern from being hidden from view by the decorative movable parts.

Next, referring to Fig. 1090(b) to Fig. 1093, Fig. 1095 and Fig. 1096, an example of a case where a composite effect is executed during a reach performance period will be described. First, an alternative pattern 1 of a composite effect executed during a reach performance period will be described. Alternative pattern 1 of a composite effect is an alternative pattern of a composite effect executed when the reach line on which the reach mode of the third pattern is displayed is other than the middle line L2. As described above, when the shutter role 904 is in a closed state, the player cannot see the third pattern of the reach mode displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, which may give the player the mistaken impression that the reach performance has ended. Therefore, in alternative pattern 1, the shutter role 904 is not in a closed state, and the liquid crystal display displays the character "ge" at a position that does not overlap with the third pattern of the reach mode.

Now, referring to Figure 1095, the relationship between the special pattern change, the performance display of the third pattern display device 81, and each of the decorative movable parts when the composite performance of alternative pattern 1 is executed will be explained. Figure 1095 is a timing chart showing the special pattern change, the performance display of the third pattern display device 81, and the state of each of the decorative movable parts when the composite performance of the normal pattern is executed. Note that, as with the example shown in Figure 1094, an example will be explained where "Super Reach" is set as the change pattern type.

After the LCD display is executed during the pre-reach performance period of 40 seconds from the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the third symbol stops on the active line in a reach state. In the example shown in FIG. 1095, the start of the reach performance period coincides with the start of the composite performance. Here, if it is determined that the active line is in the reach performance period, it is determined whether the active line on which the reach state of the third symbol is displayed is the middle line L2 (see FIG. 1092(a)), and if it is determined that it is not the middle line L2, the operation scenario of alternative pattern 1 is set.

Figure 1090 (b) is a diagram showing the display state of the third symbol display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable part at the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance of the alternative pattern 1. Unlike the example shown in Figure 1089 (a), the third symbol is displayed stationary in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the third symbol with the same number is displayed stationary on the left-upward line L5, which is in a reach state, and the display area HR1 formed at the center upper part of the main display area Dm displays a guide mode notifying that it is a reach state. As shown in Figure 1090 (b), the left middle pattern z1b and the right middle pattern z3b displayed on the middle line L2 are located on the back side of the logo role object 902, so they are not visible to the player.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance of the alternative pattern 1, unlike the composite performance of the normal pattern, the shutter role 904 does not close, and the "Ge" character display 810 is displayed at the intersection of the upper line L1 of the main display area Dm and the middle pattern Z2. Also, the rotating body role 902b stops at the reference position Pt1. This is because, when the rotating body role 902b stops at the left movable range limit Pt2, the "Ge" character display 810 cannot be displayed because the upper left pattern z1a, which constitutes a reach state, is displayed on the extension line of the line connecting the "Tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotating body role 902b, and the character string "Gekiatsu" cannot be formed on the line connecting the "Tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotating body role 902b and its extension line.

After that, when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance of the alternative pattern 1, the "A" role 903 does not rise to the upper limit, but instead the "A" character display 811 is displayed at the intersection of the second special line tL2 and the lower line L3 in the main display area Dm. When this "A" character display 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, the "Ge" character display 810 moves from the intersection of the middle pattern row Z2 and the upper line L1 to the intersection of the first special line tL1 and the upper line L1 and is displayed. As a result, the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed on the line connecting the "Tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotating body role 902b and its extension line. Then, when the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed, the "Ge" character display 810 and the "A" character display 811 forming the character string "Gekiatsu" are illuminated by the effect, and the LEDs built into the rotating body role 902b and the "Tsu" character decoration 905 are illuminated. This allows players to easily recognize that the character string "Gekiatsu" has been formed.

Next, referring to Fig. 1092 to Fig. 1093 and Fig. 1096, an example of a case where a composite performance of alternative pattern 2 is executed during a reach performance period will be described. The composite performance of alternative pattern 2 is executed when the third symbol is in a reach state on the middle line L2. In this case, if the logo role object 902 is allowed to fall to its lowering limit, it will cover the third symbol in the reach state, so in the composite performance of alternative pattern 2, the "Gekiatsu" character string is formed by the liquid crystal display and the "tsu" character decoration 905 without moving the decorative movable role object.

Now, referring to FIG. 1096, the relationship between the special pattern change, the performance display of the third pattern display device 81, and each of the decorative movable parts when the composite performance of alternative pattern 2 is executed will be described. FIG. 1096 is a timing chart showing the special pattern change, the performance display of the third pattern display device 81, and the state of each of the decorative movable parts when the composite performance of alternative pattern 2 is executed.

In FIG. 1096, an example is explained in which "Super Reach (variation time 80 s)" is set as the type of variation pattern of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 1096, this is different from the example in which the composite performance of the alternative pattern 1 described above is executed in that all decorative movable parts remain in the stored state during the performance period of the composite performance, but otherwise it is the same.

Figure 1092(a) is a simplified diagram showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable device 3 seconds after the start of the composite performance of alternative pattern 2. The third pattern is displayed stationary in the left pattern column Z1 and the right pattern column Z3, and the third pattern is displayed in a reach state on the upper line L1, middle line L2, and lower line L3. In addition, a "K" character display 812 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm in place of the rotating body device 902b.

When five seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance of Alternative Pattern 2, the shutter device 904 does not enter the closed state, as in Alternative Pattern 1, and the character "Ge" 810 is displayed at the intersection of the upper line L1 of the main display area Dm and the middle pattern Z2.

After that, when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite performance of the alternative pattern 2, as in the alternative pattern 1, the "A" role 903 does not rise to the upper limit, but instead the "A" character display 811 is displayed at the intersection of the second special line tL2 and the lower line L3 in the main display area Dm. When this "A" character display 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, the "Ge" character display 810 moves from the intersection of the middle pattern row Z2 and the upper line L1 to the intersection of the first special line tL1 and the upper line L1 and is displayed. As a result, the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed on the line connecting the "Tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotating body role 902b and its extension line. Then, when the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed, the "Ge" character display 810 and the "A" character display 811 forming the character string "Gekiatsu" are illuminated by the effect, and the LEDs built into the rotating body role 902b and the "Tsu" character decoration 905 are illuminated. This allows players to easily recognize that the character string "Gekiatsu" has been formed.

In this way, in this 36th control example, at the timing when the composite performance begins, whether or not the reach state of the third pattern is displayed and the display position of the reach line are determined, and an operation scenario for the decorative movable device is set, thereby preventing the decorative movable device from making the reach state of the third pattern invisible to the player, and preventing the player from misunderstanding that the reach performance has ended.

In the 36th control example, the operation scenario is set depending on whether or not the reach state of the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to set a priority order for the preview performances executed as LCD performances, and set the operation scenario of the decorative movable part depending on whether or not a preview performance with a high priority order is being executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1097. Fig. 1097 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example. In the 36th control example, the difference from the pachinko machine 10 in the 35th control example described above is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, and a drive motor for the A role 903 and a drive motor for the shutter role 904 are added, but otherwise they are the same. The same contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In this 36th control example, the MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7, the rotor motor 902b2, the horizontal movement motor 902b3, the A role motor 903a3, the left and right shutter role motors 904c1 and 904c5, and the right mid-stop solenoid 902d9.

Next, referring to FIG. 1098(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this 36th control example will be described. FIG. 1098(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 36th control example. It differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 35th control example described above in that a variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa, and a composite performance operation scenario table 222xd, a first alternative operation scenario table 222xe, and a second alternative operation scenario table 222xf are newly added.

In the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (miss, false miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in the counter value for variation pattern selection. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In the 36th control example, a variation effect is executed in which the third pattern is displayed by vertical scrolling on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the special pattern variation being executed. In this variation effect, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/loss determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play the game (special pattern game) while predicting whether the current special pattern variation will result in a jackpot win by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third pattern display device 81.

The composite performance operation scenario table 222xd is a table for setting the operation scenario of the drive motor of each decorative movable part when a composite performance of a normal pattern is executed. The operation data of each drive motor is specified for the scenario counter value, and the specified operation data is set when the scenario counter value reaches a specified value.

The contents of the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc will now be described with reference to Figures 1099 to 1100. Figure 1099(a) is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc. As shown in Figure 1099(a), the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc defines a normal fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1, a time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc2, a special time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc3, and a time-saving final fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc4.

Figure 1099 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1. The normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1 is a table that is referenced when a special pattern variation display is executed in the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns). The display variation pattern is set based on the special pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit/miss judgment result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first performance counter CS1. As shown in Figure 1099 (b), in this 36th control example, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned composite performance is specified for each display variation pattern.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)," the win/loss judgment result is "Miss," and the variation pattern type is "Miss," the specified contents are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "Variation pattern Aa" and no composite performance are associated with each other. In other words, when the variation pattern type is "Miss," no composite performance is set.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Miss", and the fluctuation pattern type "False miss", the value of the first effect counter CS1 is specified to be "0 to 199" in correspondence with "Fluctuation pattern Ba" and no composite effect. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern type is "False miss", no composite effect is set.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result, and the fluctuation pattern type "Normal reach", the first performance counter CS1 value "0-179" is associated with "Fluctuation pattern Da" and no composite performance, and the first performance counter CS1 value "180-199" is associated with "Fluctuation pattern Ea" and composite performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Miss" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Normal reach", the composite performance is set at a rate of 10%.

The prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result, and the fluctuation pattern type "Super Reach" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0-149" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Fa" and no composite performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "150-199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Ga" and composite performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Miss" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Super Reach", the composite performance is set at a rate of 25%.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Normal reach", the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to be "0-149" in correspondence with "Fluctuation pattern Ha" and no composite performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to be "150-199" in correspondence with "Fluctuation pattern Ia" and the presence of composite performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Normal reach", the composite performance is set at a rate of 25%.

The prescribed contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Super reach" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0-129" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Ja" and no composite performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "130-199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Ka" and composite performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Super reach", the composite performance is set at a rate of 35%.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Special reach" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern La" and the presence of a composite performance. In other words, if the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Special reach", a composite performance is always set.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "long small hit" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Ma" and no composite performance. In other words, if the hit/miss judgment result is "small hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "long small hit", no composite performance is set.

As the prescribed contents for the special symbol type "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result "miss", and the fluctuation pattern type "miss", the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to correspond to "fluctuation pattern Na" and no composite performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to correspond to "fluctuation pattern Pa" and composite performance, for the value of the first performance counter CS1 is specified to correspond to "180-199". In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern type is "miss", the composite performance is set at a rate of 10%.

When the special symbol type is "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" or "Small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type is "Hit", the specified contents are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 149" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Qa" and no composite performance, and the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "150 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Ra" and composite performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "Big hit" or "Small hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "Hit", the composite performance is set at a rate of 25%.

Figure 1100 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc2. The time-saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc2 is a table that is referenced when a special pattern variation display is executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns). As with the normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1, it sets the display variation pattern based on the special pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit/miss judgment result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first performance counter CS1.

Specifically, the specified contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)," the hit/miss judgment result "Miss," and the fluctuation pattern type "Ultra-short miss" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "Fluctuation pattern Sa" and no composite performance are associated with each other.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "First special symbol (Special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Short-term hit" are that the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "0 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Ta" and no composite effect.

For the special symbol type "first special symbol (special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "long and small hit", the first performance counter CS1 value is specified to correspond to "0-189" with "fluctuation pattern Ua" and no composite performance, and for the special symbol type "first special symbol (special symbol 1)", the hit/miss judgment result "small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "long and small hit", the first performance counter CS1 value is specified to correspond to "fluctuation pattern Va" and composite performance. In other words, when the hit/miss judgment result is "small hit" and the fluctuation pattern type is "long and small hit", a composite performance is set at a rate of 5%.

The prescribed contents for the special symbol type being "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)," the hit/miss judgment result being "miss," and the fluctuation pattern type being "short miss" are that the value of the first performance counter CS1 is "0 to 199," and "fluctuation pattern Wa" and no composite performance are associated with each other.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result "Big hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "Super short big hit" are that the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "0 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Xa" and no composite effect.

The specified contents for the special symbol type "Second special symbol (special symbol 2)", the hit/miss judgment result "small hit", and the fluctuation pattern type "ultra-short small hit" are that the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "0 to 199" and corresponds to "Fluctuation pattern Ya" and no composite effect.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the composite effect is not set except when the fluctuation pattern type of the first special symbol is "long and small win." This is because in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds or less except when the fluctuation pattern type is "long and small win," which is shorter than the performance time of the composite effect.

Figure 1100 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc3. The special time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc3 is a table that is referenced when the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the fluctuation pattern type set in the special time-saving state.

Here, in this 36th control example, as in the 35th control example described above, the time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state include at least a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of second special pattern changes executed during the time-saving state reaches three, and a time-saving end condition that is met when the combined number of first special pattern changes and second special pattern changes executed during the time-saving state reaches ten.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this 36th control example has a playability in that it executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time-saving state is set, which makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery, and by winning (small win, big win) in any of the second special symbol lotteries, which has a probability of about 1/2, the time-saving state is repeated through big win play, and if no win is won in the three second special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends, and if no win is won in the second special symbol lottery (one time) using the remaining reserved special symbol 2, it transitions to the normal state (ending the consecutive win state).

Here, if the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set only to be satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state reaches three, the time-saving end condition will also be satisfied when the first special symbol lottery is executed three times, and there is a risk that the time-saving state will end without the second special symbol lottery being executed, even though the time-saving state is set. In other words, in this 35th control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reservation) can be acquired up to four times, and if the time-saving state is set in a state where, for example, four special symbol 1 reservations and no special symbol 2 reservations have been acquired, the first special symbol variation will be executed before the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time-saving end condition will be satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time-saving state will end without exhibiting its original playability, which causes a problem of the player's desire to play to decrease.

In addition, even if four reserved special symbols 1 have been acquired when the time-saving state is set, if the time-saving end condition is established when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches seven in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time-saving state, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol variation more than three times when the time-saving state is set without the reserved special symbol 1 having been acquired, which creates the problem of providing the player with an excessively advantageous gameplay compared to the original gameplay.

Therefore, in this 36th control example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied based only on the number of times the second special pattern change is performed, and a time-saving end condition that is satisfied based on the combined number of times the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change are performed are set, and the time-saving state is configured to end when either of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a predetermined number of second special pattern changes regardless of the acquisition status of the reserved special pattern 1, and it is possible to reliably end the time-saving state when the predetermined number of second special pattern changes have been executed.

Furthermore, in this 36th control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, the first special symbol change corresponding to the upper limit number (4) of reserved special symbols 1, that is, from the time-saving state is set until the fourth first special symbol change is executed, is configured to be set to a short time (0.5 seconds) using the time-saving change pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 34(a)), and a change time of 20 seconds is set for the first special symbol change thereafter. In other words, even if the time-saving state is set, if a player who does not understand how to play in the time-saving state plays left-handed, if the change time of the first special symbol change executed during the time-saving state is always set to a short time (0.5 seconds), new first special symbol changes will be executed one after another, and there is a risk that the time-saving end condition that is established based on the combined number of first special symbol changes and second special symbol changes will be established.

In contrast, in the present 36th control example, a long change time (20 seconds) is set for the first special pattern change that is executed from the fifth time onwards after the time-saving state is set, i.e., the first special pattern change that is executed only when a new special pattern 1 reservation is acquired during the time-saving state. By lengthening the period required for one first special pattern change to end, a period is secured for the player to understand how to play during the time-saving state, and the time-saving end condition that is established based on the combined number of first special pattern changes and second special pattern changes is prevented from being established.

Furthermore, in the special time-saving state (a state in which the first special symbol variation has been executed five or more times during the time-saving state), the variation effect of the first special symbol variation is configured to include a variation effect that encourages the player to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) by playing on the right. By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a player who does not know how to play during the time-saving state to more easily understand the correct way to play.

Figure 1100 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving final fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc4. The time-saving final fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222xc4 is a table that is referenced when the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the fluctuation pattern type set in the time-saving final fluctuation.

In this 36th control example, as in the 35th control example described above, during the period of the second special symbol change, which is the final change in the time-saving state, the final result of the countdown effect executed during the time-saving state (displaying "0" in the number icon 808) is displayed, and then a charge effect (see FIG. 18(a)) is executed to encourage the acquisition of the reserved special symbol 2 until the time-saving state ends. Therefore, in order to ensure the presentation period of the charge effect, a longer change time is set for the third (final) second special symbol change than for the first or second second special symbol change after the time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily end the time-saving state when the special symbol 2 reservation has been acquired. Also, even if a player wins the second special symbol drawing executed during the time-saving state, the time efficiency (the number of second special symbol drawing executed per unit time in the time-saving state) can be made to differ greatly between the first or second second special symbol drawing and the third second special symbol drawing, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the player wins the second special symbol drawing during the time-saving state, but also in which second special symbol drawing during the time-saving state the player will win.

Next, the contents of the composite performance operation scenario table 222xd will be described with reference to Figs. 1101 and 1102. Fig. 1101(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the bar role 902a from the composite performance operation scenario table 222xd. As shown in Fig. 1101(a), the operation data (operation contents) of the left bar role motor 902c7, the right bar role motor 902d7 and the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 are specified for the value of the scenario counter 223xh, and the position (state) of the bar role 902a at that stage and the states of the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are also shown.

The scenario counter 223xh is a counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is used to set the operation data of each drive motor of the logo reel 902 at a predefined timing. The counter value of this scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 in the first operation process (S3161), second operation process (S3163), and reel moving process (S3165) of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 5 (see FIG. 1110) described later. This liquid crystal performance execution management process 5 is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1107). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

In this 36th control example, when the start timing of a composite performance preset in the display variation pattern arrives, the voice lamp control device 113 starts counting the scenario counter 223xh, and when the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches a value specified in the operation scenario, the corresponding operation data is set.

As shown in FIG. 1101(a), the scenario counter value indicates the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh, and the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 in the first operation process (S3161), the second operation process (S3163), and the reel movement process (S3165) of the LCD performance execution management process 5 (see FIG. 1110).

The number of steps in the left bar reel motor operation data and the right bar reel motor operation data indicates the number of rotation steps of the left bar reel motor 902c7 and the right bar reel motor 902d7, and the speed specifies the speed at which the stepping motors of the left bar reel motor 902c7 and the right bar reel motor 902d7 are operated.

The step number "+ (forward)" and "- (reverse)" indicate the direction in which the motor rotates; the forward direction rotates the motor in the direction in which the step counter is incremented and updated, and the reverse direction rotates the motor in the direction in which the step counter is decremented and updated. In this 35th control example, the left bar role motor 902c7 rotates clockwise when the forward direction is set, and counterclockwise when the reverse direction is set. The right bar role motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise when the forward direction is set, and clockwise when the reverse direction is set.

In addition, in this 36th control example, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms (high speed), when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms (medium speed), when the speed is 3, the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms (medium-low speed), and when the speed is 4, the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms (low speed). In other words, speed 1 is set as the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 the speed of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 the speed of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1/4 the speed of speed 1.

The bar reel position indicates the position (state) of the bar reel 902a at the time when the operation data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set.

When the timing for starting the composite performance set in the display variation pattern arrives, the scenario counter 223xh starts counting. Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the step number +25 and speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left and right bar roles. As a result, the left bar role motor 902c7 starts rotating clockwise and the right bar role motor 902d7 starts rotating counterclockwise at a speed of 4 until the step counter value reaches 25. In this 36th control example, the stepping motors of the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 are configured to rotate once in 100 steps, and the position (origin position) of the step counter value is the storage position, and the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released (OFF state) when the step counter value is 25, and the bar role 902a falls to the lower limit. In this 36th control example, the time required to drive the step counter from 0 to 25 at speed 2 is set to 250 ms.

When the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches "250", the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 rotate to the step counter value 25 position, and the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released (OFF state), causing the bar role 902a to fall under its own weight to the lower limit.

After that, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "19250", the number of steps +75 and speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar role and the motor operation data for the right bar role. At this point, the step counter values of the left and right bar role motors are 25, so this operation data causes the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 to rotate in the opposite direction at speed 2 until the step counter values reach 100. In this 36th control example, the cylindrical pins 902c3p and 902d3p start pushing up the lower racks 902c2 and 902d2, respectively, at the step counter value 60, and the bar role 902a is in the stored position at the step counter value 100.

Therefore, 750 ms after the operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value 19250 is set, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 20000, the bar reel 902a reaches the stored position. Note that the scenario counter value "20000" is the end time of the composite performance operation scenario, so END data is specified. By specifying this END data, it is easy to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the operation scenario.

Figure 1101 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the left-right and rotational drive of the rotating body part 902b, among the composite performance operation scenarios of the logo part 902. As shown in Figure 1101 (b), similar to the operation scenario for the up-down drive of the bar part 902a, the operation data of the horizontal movement motor 902b3 and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 are specified for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The position and orientation of the rotating body part indicate the position and orientation (state) of the rotating body part 902b when it operates according to the scenario. In addition, when the origin sensor data is set to ON, it indicates that it is set to operate until the origin sensor (not shown) for the rotating body motor provided on the rotating body part 902b is turned on.

In the composite performance operation scenario, the operation data for the horizontal movement motor 902b3 is set to a step count of +100 and a speed of 4 for the counter value of 250 in the scenario counter 223xh. The horizontal movement motor 902b3 in this 36th control example is a stepping motor with a total step count of 200, and is configured so that the position of step count 100 is the reference stop position Pt1 (see FIG. 1089 (b)), with step count 0 being the left range of motion limit Pt2 and step count 200 being the right range of motion limit Pt3. Therefore, in this case, the rotating body role 902b starts moving toward the right range of motion limit Pt3 at a speed of 4.

In addition, speed 3 and "+ rotation" are set as the rotating body motor operation data. This "+ rotation" is operation data that continues to rotate in the forward direction until the next operation data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotating body part 902b starts to continue to rotate in the forward direction at speed 3.

In the counter value 2250 of the scenario counter 223xh, the operation data of the rotating body role 902b is set to "+ rotation" and speed 3, and the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotating body role 902b rotates in the forward direction until it reaches the origin position (forward rotation state), at which point it stops rotating. At this point, the horizontal movement motor 902b3 has completed driving 100 steps in the forward direction (i.e., the step counter value is 200), so the position of the rotating body role 902b is at the right movable range limit Pt3 (see FIG. 1089(a)).

When the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is 4000, the operation data of the horizontal movement motor 902b3 is set to a step count of -100 and a speed of 2, and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 is set to "- rotations" and a speed of 3. As a result, the rotating body role 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1 (see FIG. 1089(b)).

When the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is 5000, the operation data of the horizontal movement motor 902b3 is set to step count -100 and speed 2, and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 is set to "- rotations" and speed 3. In addition, the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotating body role 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the left movable range limit Pt2 (see FIG. 1089(a)), and when the rotating body role 902b reaches the origin position, the rotation of the rotating body motor 902b stops.

At a scenario counter value of 6000, the operation data for the rotating motor 902b2 is set to stop rotating. At this point, the position of the rotating part 902b is at the left range of motion limit Pt2 (see FIG. 1090(a)). This scenario counter value of 6000 is the timing at which the rotating part 902b reaches its final stop position in the composite performance of the normal pattern.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 18250, operation data is set to return to the reference position Pt1, and the rotating body part 902b stops in a forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1 by the time the bar part 902a reaches the stored position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1102(a), the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the "A" role 903 in the composite performance operation scenario table 222xd will be explained. FIG. 1102(a) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the "A" role 903 in the composite performance operation scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 1102(a), motor operation data for the "A" role is specified for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The "A" role position indicates the position of the "A" role 903 when it operates according to the scenario.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6500, +100 and speed 1 are set as the motor operation data for the A role object. This causes the A role object 903 to rise from the stored position, and after 500 ms has elapsed, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 7000, it moves to its upper limit (see FIG. 1090(a)). After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 18250, operation data is set to return to the stored position, and the A role object 903 is in a stored state by the time the composite performance time ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1102(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the left and right drive of the left and right shutter role motors 904c1 and 904c5 in the composite performance operation scenario table 222xd will be described. FIG. 1102(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the operation scenario related to the left and right drive of the shutter role motors 904c1 and 904c5 in the composite performance operation scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 1102(b), the left and right shutter role motor operation data is specified for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The shutter role position indicates the open/closed state of the shutter role 904 when operating according to the scenario.

When the scenario counter value reaches 4500, operation data for closing the shutter role 904 is set as the operation data for the left and right shutter roles, and when the scenario counter value reaches 18750, operation data for opening the shutter role 904 is set, and when the scenario counter value reaches 19750, the shutter role 904 is in the open state.

Next, the contents of the first alternative operation scenario 223xe will be described with reference to Figures 1103 and 1104. This first alternative operation scenario 223xe is an operation scenario that is set when the composite performance of alternative pattern 1 is executed.

Figure 1103(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down drive of the left and right bar role motors 902c7 and 902d7 in the first alternative operation scenario table 222xe. As shown in Figure 1103(a), the operation scenario of the bar role 902a in the first alternative operation scenario 223xe is the same as the composite performance operation scenario of the normal pattern described above.

Figure 1103 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation scenario related to the left-right drive and rotation drive of the rotating body role 902b in the first alternative operation scenario table 222xe. As shown in Figure 1103 (b), the operation scenario of the rotating body role 902b in the first alternative operation scenario 223xe is the same as the composite performance operation scenario of the normal pattern described above up to the scenario counter value 5000. When the scenario counter value reaches 5000, "- rotation" and speed 3 are set as the rotating body motor operation data, and the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to on. On the other hand, no horizontal movement motor operation data is set. As a result, the rotating body role 902b rotates counterclockwise until it reaches the origin position (forward rotation state) at the reference position Pt1.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 6000, the rotating body motor operation data is set to stop rotation. As a result, if the rotating body role 902b is still rotating even at the scenario counter value of 6000, it will stop rotating.

In addition, in the first alternative operation scenario 223xe, the final stopping position for forming the "Gekiatsu" character string is the reference position Pt1, so unlike the normal pattern composite performance operation scenario table 222xd, no operation data is set for moving to the reference position Pt1.

Next, referring to Fig. 1104(a) and Fig. 1104(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the A role 903 and the operation scenario related to the left and right movement of the shutter role 904 in the first alternative operation scenario table 222xe will be described. As described above, the composite performance of alternative pattern 1 is a performance that does not use the A role 903 and the shutter role 904, so as shown in Fig. 1104(a) and Fig. 1104(b), the motor operation data for the A role and the motor operation data for the left and right shutter roles are not specified.

Next, referring to Figures 1105(a) and (b), the contents of the operation scenarios related to the up and down drive of the bar reel 902a and the left and right drive and rotation drive of the rotating body reel 902b in the second alternative operation scenario table 222xf will be described. This second alternative operation scenario table 222xf is an operation scenario that is set when the composite performance of alternative pattern 2 is executed. As described above, the composite performance of alternative pattern 2 is a performance that does not use decorative movable reels, so as shown in Figures 1105(a) and 1105(b), the motor operation data for the left and right bar reels and the rotating body motor operation data are not specified.

Next, referring to Figures 1106(a) and 1106(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the up and down movement of the A-type device 903 and the operation scenario related to the left and right movement of the shutter device 904 in the second alternative operation scenario table 222xf will be described. As described above, the composite performance of alternative pattern 2 is a performance that does not use a decorative movable device, and therefore, as shown in Figures 1106(a) and 1106(b), the motor operation data for the A-type device and the motor operation data for the left and right shutter devices are not specified.

In this way, in this 36th control example, the operating scenario of the drive motor of each decorative movable part corresponding to each pattern of the composite performance is specified, and is configured to be set at the start timing of the composite performance. This makes it possible to set an operating scenario suitable for the display status of the third pattern display device 81 at the timing when the composite performance starts, and to execute a composite performance that is suitable for the player.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1107 to Fig. 1114, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 36th control example, which is different from the above-mentioned 35th control example, will be described. The control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 36th control example differs from the control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 35th control example in that the liquid crystal performance execution management processing 5 (S3123) is executed instead of the liquid crystal performance execution management processing (S3110) executed in the main processing, and the variable display setting processing 5 (S4124) is executed instead of the variable display setting processing 4, and is otherwise the same. The same control processing is assigned the same reference numerals and its description is omitted.

First, the contents of the main processing in this 36th control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 1107. FIG. 1107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing in this 36th control example. The main processing in this 36th control example differs in that LCD performance execution management process 5 (S3123) is executed instead of LCD performance execution management process (S3110), and variable display setting process 5 (S4124) is executed instead of variable display setting process 4.

Now, referring to FIG. 1108, the processing contents of variable display setting process 5 (S4124) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 1107) in this 36th control example will be explained. FIG. 1108 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable display setting process 5 (S4124). As shown in FIG. 1108, this variable display setting process 5 (S4124) differs from variable display setting process 4 (see S4122 in FIG. 1059) in the 35th control example described above in that instead of performance mode setting process 4 (see S4311 in FIG. 1060), performance mode setting process 5 (S4314) is executed, but otherwise is the same. Identical processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the performance mode setting process 5 (S4314) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1109. FIG. 1109 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance mode setting process 5 (S4314). This performance mode setting process 5 (S4314) differs from the above-mentioned performance mode setting process 4 (see S4311 in FIG. 1060) in that it adds processing contents for when a composite performance is selected.

Specifically, when the performance mode setting process 5 (S4314) is executed, first, the values of the first performance counter 223xa and the second performance counter 223xb are obtained (S4531), and the display variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc based on the extracted variation pattern type and the obtained value of the first performance counter 223xa (S4532).

Then, it is determined whether the display variation pattern determined by the processing of S4532 includes a composite effect (S4537), and if it is determined that a composite effect is included (S4537: Yes), the reel standby flag 223xc is set to on (S4536) and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4537 that a composite effect is not included (S4537: No), this processing ends without setting the reel standby flag 223xc to on.

Next, the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 5 (S3123) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1110. FIG. 1110 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 5 (S3123). In this LCD performance execution management process 5 (S3123), processing is executed to execute different operation processing at different times for each gimmick according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable performance being executed.

When LCD performance execution management process 5 (S3123) is executed, it is first determined whether the changing flag 223xf is set to ON (S3151). If it is determined that the changing flag 223xf is not set to ON, i.e., the special pattern is not currently changing (S3151: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3151, if it is determined that the variable flag 223xf is set to on (S3151: Yes), add 1 to the value of the variable time counter 223xg (S3152), and then determine whether the reel standby flag 223xc is set to on (S3153). Here, if it is determined that the reel standby flag 223xc is set to on (S3153: Yes), refer to the value of the variable time counter 223xg to determine whether it is the performance start time (S3154). If it is determined that it is the performance start time (S3154: Yes), execute the composite performance start process (S3166), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3154, if it is determined that it is not the performance start time, that is, if the reel standby flag 223xc is set to on (a variable pattern in which a composite performance using a reel is executed is set), but the timing for executing the performance has not arrived (S3154: No), end this process as it is.

In other words, when a variable performance is executed in a variable pattern in which a composite performance is executed, the processes of S3151 to S3254 are executed repeatedly until the timing to start the composite performance is reached. Then, when the timing to start the composite performance is reached, a composite performance start process (S3166) is executed as a process to start the composite performance.

Now, referring to FIG. 1111, the processing contents of the composite performance start processing (S3166) executed in the LCD performance execution management processing 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110) will be explained. FIG. 1111 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the composite performance start processing (S3166). This composite performance start processing (S3166) is processing that is executed when the timing to start the composite performance arrives, and is processing for determining different performance control depending on the execution timing of the composite performance.

In this 36th control example, multiple display variation patterns with different execution timings of the composite performance are configured to be determinable by referring to the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc. Specifically, the display variation patterns executed when the composite performance is in reach and the display variation patterns executed when it is not in reach are configured to be determinable.

In this 36th control example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is used to execute a variable performance of the third pattern, and a composite performance (a "Super Hot" display using reels and LCD display) to suggest that the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery is highly likely to be a jackpot is also executable. When executing this composite performance, it is possible to execute the composite performance using a variety of elements (LCD display, decorative movable reels 90, 903, 904, decoration 905) since this can attract more attention from the player, so it is conceivable to execute the composite performance using a greater number of modes.

However, as described above with reference to Figures 1089 to 1093, this composite presentation is executed so as to cover the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, depending on the content of the third pattern variable presentation executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, part of the variable presentation may be hidden (made difficult to see) by the composite presentation, causing discomfort to players who are watching the third pattern variable presentation.

In particular, when a reach effect is being executed as a variable effect using the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to indicate that the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery is highly likely to be a jackpot, the execution of the composite effect makes it difficult for the player to see the type of third pattern that is being displayed as a reach effect. This causes the composite effect to be annoying to players who are hoping for the third pattern, which indicates a jackpot, to be displayed in a stopped state, reducing the effect of the effect.

In contrast to this, in the present 36th control example, the type of elements used to create the same presentation result (the "Super Hot display") and the control content for each element are varied depending on the timing at which the composite presentation is executed, so that the composite presentation can be executed without interfering with the variable presentation of the third pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable presentation regardless of when the composite presentation is executed. Also, since the presentation mode of the composite presentation showing the same presentation result can be varied in accordance with the content of the variable presentation displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to execute the composite presentation at various times, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

When the composite performance start process (S3166) is executed, first, a display command is set to display a notification mode that notifies the start of the composite performance (S3231), and it is determined whether the current performance mode of the variable performance is in a reach (S3237). If it is determined that it is not in a reach (S3237: No), since the display mode that the player is particularly paying attention to is not displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the operation data for executing the composite performance using all decorative movable parts is set by referring to the composite performance operation scenario table 222xd (S3238), the movable part flag 223xe is set to on (S3239), the standby part flag 223xc is set to off (S3245), and this process is terminated. Based on the operation data set by the process of S3238, the composite performance of the normal pattern described above is executed by referring to FIG. 1089.

If it is determined in the processing of S3237 that the player is in reach (S3237: Yes), it is then determined whether the type of reach being executed is a mid-line reach (S3240), and if it is determined that the player is in a mid-line reach (S3240: Yes), the operation data is set by referencing the second alternative operation scenario table 222xf (S3241), the second operation flag 223xy is set to on (S3242), and the processing proceeds to S3245.

In other words, as described above with reference to FIG. 1092, when the middle line reach is in progress, the movable position of the decorative movable part 902a overlaps with a portion of the reach line in the middle line reach (effective line L2), making it difficult for the player to identify the type of the third pattern displayed on the reach line L2. Therefore, in the operation data set by the processing of S3241, a performance mode that does not use the decorative movable part 902a is set as the performance mode of the composite performance, and the composite performance of the mode shown in FIG. 1092 is executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the middle line (effective line L2) is in a reach state, it is possible to execute a composite presentation without compromising the presentation effect of the variable presentation.

On the other hand, if the process of S3240 determines that the reach is other than a middle line reach (S3240: No), the process sets the action data by referencing the first alternative action scenario table 222xe (S3243), sets the first action flag 223xx to on (S3244), and proceeds to the process of S3245.

In other words, when a reach effect is being performed on an active line other than the middle line (active line L2), even if the decorative movable part 902a is moved to a movable position that overlaps with the middle line, the decorative movable part 902a will not cover the active line that is in the reach state, so the operation data for performing a composite effect using the decorative movable part 902a is set by the processing of S3243.

As shown in FIG. 1091(a), when the pay line L5 reaches the reach state as a reach effect, the decorative movable part 902a is moved to a position that covers part of the pay line L5. Therefore, in the processing of S3243, the operation data for moving the decorative movable parts other than the decorative movable part 902a is not set.

In other words, in this 36th control example, when a composite performance is executed during a reach state, it is determined whether a reach performance using a specific effective line (effective line L5) is being executed (performed), and if a reach performance using a specific effective line is being executed, the composite performance is executed in a performance mode that does not use a decorative movable part (decorative movable part 902a) that covers the specific effective line, and if a reach performance is executed (performed) without using the specific effective line (effective line L5), the composite performance is executed in a performance mode that uses a decorative movable part (decorative movable part 902a) that moves to cover only the specific effective line (effective line L5).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a composite performance without reducing the effect of the reach performance, even if the performance mode of the composite performance is not set to a pattern that corresponds to the performance mode of all reach performances.

Next, the contents of the first operation process (S3161) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1112. FIG. 1112 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first operation process (S3161). This first operation process (S3161) is a process executed in the LCD performance execution management process 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110), and is executed when the first operation flag 223xx is set to on.

When the first operation process (S3161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4751), and if it is determined that it is the end value (S4751: Yes), in order to end the operation process in the composite performance, the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4752), the first operation flag 223xx is set to off (S4753), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S4751, if it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4751: No), it is next determined whether it is the timing to stop the rotating role 902b (S4754), and if it is determined that it is not the stop timing (S4754: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4754 that it is time to stop the rotating device 902b (S4754: Yes), a display command is set to move the "ge" displayed on the liquid crystal display to a specified position (see Figure 1091 (b)) (S4755), 1 is added to the scenario counter 223xh (S4756), operation data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4757), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in the first operation process explained with reference to S206, the display position of the elements ("Ge", "A") represented by the LCD display in the composite performance is set to a position corresponding to the stopping position of the rotating body device 902b based on the stopping of the rotating body device 902b, so that the elements ("Ge", "A") represented by the LCD display can be displayed at the position corresponding to the rotating body device 902b.

Next, the processing contents of the second operation process (S3163) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1113. FIG. 1113 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second operation process (S3163). This second operation process (S3163) is a process executed in the LCD performance execution management process 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110), and is executed when the second operation flag 223xy is set to on.

When the second operation process (S3163) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4851), and if it is determined that it is the end value (S4851: Yes), in order to end the operation process in the composite performance, the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4852), the second operation flag 223xx is set to off (S4853), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4851 that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4851: No), next the display command of the second operation display table is set (S4854), 1 is added to the value of the scenario counter 223xh (S4855), operation data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4856), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second operation process (S3163), a performance mode using only the LCD display and the Tsu decoration 905 is determined as the performance mode of the composite performance, i.e., a performance mode that does not use any of the decorative movable parts (see FIG. 1092), and therefore no operation data is set for operating the decorative movable parts as a composite performance. Even when this second operation process (S3163) is executed, it is advisable to set the timing for displaying the LCD-displayed "Ge", "Ki", and "A" patterns to be the same as for other composite performances. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly inform the player that a composite performance with the same content is being executed with different elements.

Also, without being limited to this, it is possible to determine a presentation mode in which the order in which the "Ge", "Ki", and "A" symbols displayed on the LCD are displayed can be changed, and the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased when the symbols are displayed in the same order as in other composite effects, compared to when the symbols are displayed in a different order. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily increase the variety of presentation content for only the composite effects, which do not require the setting of operation data for the decorative movable parts, compared to other composite effects.

Next, the processing contents of the reel moving process (S3165) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1114. FIG. 1114 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reel moving process (S3165). This reel moving process (S3165) is a process executed in the LCD performance execution management process 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110), and is executed when the reel moving flag 223xe is set to on.

When the reel movement processing (S3165) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4951), and if it is determined that it is the end value (S4951: Yes), the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4952) to end the operation processing in the composite performance, the reel movement flag 223xe is set to off (S4953), and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4951: No), 1 is added to the value of the scenario counter 223xh (S4954), operation data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4955), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this 36th control example, the variation pattern in which the composite performance is executed at various times can be determined, and the composite performance can be executed using different elements depending on the content of the variable performance (reach content) of the third pattern at the time the composite performance is executed, so that a suitable performance can be provided to the player regardless of the timing at which the composite performance is executed. Also, since the presentation mode of the composite performance showing the same presentation result can be varied in accordance with the content of the variable performance displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it becomes possible to execute the composite performance at various times, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the 36th control example, the timing at which the composite performance is executed is determined in advance based on the determined variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the composite performance is executed may be arbitrarily selected by the player. In this case, for example, the operation effective period (SW effective time) during which the operation of the operation means (performance button 22a) that the player can operate is determined to be effective may be set within a range that includes at least the period before the reach state is created and the period after the reach state is created as the third pattern variation performance, and the composite performance may be started based on the player's operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. Then, the performance content of the third pattern variation performance when the composite performance is started, or the elapsed time or remaining time of the operation effective period, may be determined, a performance mode that does not overlap with the performance mode of the variable performance being executed, and the composite performance may be executed according to the determined performance mode.

This configuration allows the player to freely select the timing for executing the composite performance, which increases the player's motivation to participate in the game.

In addition, if each decorative movable part is configured to be usable for purposes other than the composite performance, a specifying means may be provided that determines the movable status of each decorative movable part at the time the execution conditions for the composite performance are met, specifies the decorative movable parts that can be used as a composite performance, determines the performance mode that can be executed within the range of the decorative movable parts specified by the specifying means, and configures the composite performance to be executable using the determined performance mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a suitable performance to the player even if the execution period of various performances other than the variable performance of the third pattern (performances using decorative movable parts) overlaps with the composite performance.

Furthermore, in this 36th control example, a configuration is shown in which the composite performance is executed in an executable performance mode without shifting the execution timing of the composite performance from a predetermined timing, but without being limited to this, the configuration may be such that a process can be executed to correct the execution timing of the composite performance to be earlier or later than the predetermined execution timing.

In this case, if a reach effect is executed when there is one second remaining until the end of the composite effect, a correction process can be performed to bring the timing of the composite effect forward by one second, allowing the normal pattern composite effect (see FIG. 1089) to be executed. In this way, by providing a correction process to correct the timing of the composite effect, a wider variety of effects can be offered to the player.

In addition, if a reach effect is started during the execution of a composite effect, the start of the reach effect may be delayed until the end of the composite effect.

In the 36th control example, the decorative movable device is positioned in front of the three-pattern display device 81 (closer to the player's line of sight), which makes the LCD display (third pattern and other preview effects) on the rear side of the decorative movable device invisible to the player. Therefore, the technical idea of controlling the LCD display, which is of high importance as gaming information, so that it does not overlap with the decorative movable device is explained.

Here, we will explain a modified example that applies this technical concept and allows one decorative movable part to be moved so that it overlaps with another decorative movable part. Below, we will explain the first modified example of the 36th control example with reference to Figures 1115 to 1117.

In the first modified example of the 36th control example, a character effect using a character role (rabbit role) and a character effect combining a decorative movable role and a liquid crystal display is executed. The character effect is one of the preview effects executed during the variable display period of the special pattern, and the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed by combining the character "Ge" 815 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the character "A" 816, the decorative movable role role decorated with the character "Ki", and the character "Tsu" 817b, which is part of the character "Katsutsuzo" decorated on the game board surface bn, to notify the player that the probability of winning the jackpot of the special pattern being displayed is high.

Now, with reference to FIG. 1115(b), the display contents of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 while the character effect is being executed will be described. While the character effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 1115(b), the main display area Dm displays the character "ge" 814, the character "a" 816, which are components of the character effect, and a picture of the sun, which is the background image. By placing the Ki role object 815 on the line connecting the character "ge" 814 and the character "a" 816, the character string "gekia" is formed, and by combining this with the character "tsu" 817b decorated on the game board surface bn, the character string "gekiatsu" is formed.

Returning to FIG. 1115(a), we continue the explanation. The game board surface bn is decorated with the characters "Katsutsuzo". Each character decoration 817a-817c of "Katsutsuzo" on this game board surface bn has an LED built in, and normally all of the LEDs in the character decoration 817a-817c of "Katsutsuzo" are lit. When the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed in the character presentation, the LEDs in the character decoration parts are turned off for the character "Katsu" 817a and the character "Zo" 817c, and only the character "Tsu" 817b is lit. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the character "Tsu" 817b has switched from an element constituting the character string "Katsutsuzo" to an element constituting the character string "Gekiatsu".

The character element 815 used in the character performance is stored outside the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, on the left side when viewed from the front of the third pattern display device) except when the character performance is being performed, and moves to the position shown in FIG. 1116 (b) when the character performance starts.

The start timing of the character effect in the first modified example of the 36th control example is configured to be randomly determined by lottery in the LCD effect execution management process in the voice lamp control device 113. By configuring it in this way, the start timing of the character effect is determined in advance by the player based on the type of variation of the special pattern, etc., which prevents a decrease in interest in the game, and it becomes possible to execute the character effect at an unexpected timing, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The character performance is a preview performance in which a character role object (rabbit role object 813) decorated with a rabbit character moves on the front side of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The character role object 813 is stored outside the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, on the upper side when viewed from the front of the third pattern display device) except during the execution period of the character performance, and moves to be positioned on the front side of the main display area of the third pattern display device 81 when the character performance starts. An LED is built into the flame decoration part surrounding the rabbit character of the character role object 813, and the color of the flame decoration part can be changed by the light emission of this LED. The color of the flame decoration part is configured to suggest the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, if the flame decoration part emits blue light, it suggests that the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and if it emits red light, it suggests that the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

This character role object 813 is configured to be movable up, down, left, and right on the front side of the main display area Dm. Note that in the first modified example of the 36th control example, as described above, the start timing of the character effect is determined by lottery, so if the performance period of the character effect overlaps with the performance period of the character effect, there is a risk that the movable character role object 815 and the character role object 813 will interfere with each other.

To eliminate this problem, the Ki role object 815 in this 36th control example is configured to be able to set its front and rear positions. Specifically, it is configured to be able to set a first position where the Ki role object 815 is positioned in front of the character role object 813 (closer to the player's line of sight), and a second position where the Ki role object 815 is positioned behind the character role object 813 (farther from the player's line of sight). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the Ki role object 815 and the character role object 813 from interfering with each other.

In addition, in the first modified example of the 36th control example, the result of the character effect can be changed depending on the front and rear positions of the Ki role object 815 and the character role object 813. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1117(a), when the character effect is executed and the Ki role object 815 is movable in the second position and the character role object (rabbit role object) 813 moves to the position where the Ki role object 815 is located, the Ki role object 815 is hidden by the character role object 813. Then, the character "Ge" 814 is hidden in the third pattern display device 81, and the character is changed to the character "Atsu", which has a lower rank of the expectation of winning the jackpot than when the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1117(b), when the character role (rabbit role) 813 moves to the position where the Ki role 815 is located while the character role 815 is moving in the first position, the Ki role 815 is located in front of the character role 813, and the character role 813 is hidden by the Ki role 815. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1117(b), since the character role 813 is larger than the Ki role 815, a part of the character role 813 (the flame decoration part) is visible to the player, and from the player's point of view, it looks like the Ki role 815 has a flame decoration. The character string "Gekiatsu" composed of the Ki role 815 with the flame decoration indicates that the probability of winning a jackpot has been ranked up compared to when the normal character string "Gekiatsu" (see FIG. 1115(a)) is formed. In other words, when the text effect and the character effect are executed at the same time, the expected probability of winning the jackpot suggested by the text effect varies depending on the relative positions of the character role object 813 and the character role object 815. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to announce various performance results in the text effect depending on the relative positions of the character role object 813 and the character role object 815, and it is possible to prevent the text effect from becoming monotonous.

In the first modified example of the 36th control example, only the front and rear positions of the character role object 813 can be changed, but this is not limited to the above, and the front and rear positions of the character role object 813 may also be changed.

The position where the character string "GEKI ATS" is formed is not fixed, and the position where the character string "GEKI ATS" is formed may be changed depending on the state of the liquid crystal display. For example, if an error display is displayed in the main display area Dm, the character "Ge" 814 and the character "A" 816 are displayed avoiding the position where the error display is displayed, and the character role 815 is placed on the line connecting the displayed character "Ge" 814 and the character "A" 816. In this case, since the position of the character "Tsu" 817b, which is a decoration on the game board surface bn, is fixed, it is preferable to display the character "A" 816 on the line connecting the character "Ge" 814 and the character "Tsu" 817b based on the character "Tsu" 817b.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the error display from being concealed by the text display, preventing the occurrence of an error from being recognized by the player or the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 36th control example, a configuration is used to execute character effects (composite effects) using decorative movable parts, but character effects may also be executed using only the LCD display without using decorative movable parts. Below, a control example for executing character effects using only the LCD display is described. Note that a control example for executing character effects using only the LCD display is the second modified example of the 36th control example.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the 36th control example, multiple display layers are arranged to display display modes on the third pattern display device 81. From the front side of the display surface, a reserved pattern layer ry1, a first performance layer ry2a, a second performance layer ry2b, a third performance layer ry2c, a special pattern layer ry3, and a background layer ry4 are arranged, and each layer can display a display mode such as a character or background, and by displaying them on top of each other, a display performance with a sense of depth can be displayed.

The reserved pattern layer ry1 is a layer in which the display mode that needs to be displayed at the forefront of the reserved pattern, etc. is displayed. The display mode displayed in the reserved pattern layer ry1 is configured to always be displayed at the forefront, since no layers are set further forward. The first performance layer ry2a is a layer set one layer behind the reserved pattern layer ry1, and is a layer where preview performances and text performances are mainly set. The layers where preview performances and text performances are set are the second performance layer ry2b, which is positioned one layer behind the first performance layer ry2a, and the third performance layer ry2c, which is positioned one layer behind the second performance layer ry2b.

The special pattern layer ry3 is a layer where the special pattern (third pattern) is displayed, and is placed one layer in front of the background layer ry4, so the special pattern can always be displayed in front of the background image. The background layer ry4 is a layer where the background image is displayed, and is the layer that is set as the backmost layer, and the background image during fluctuation, standby, etc. is set.

The character effect in the second modified example of the 36th control example is an effect in which a combination of multiple characters that form an arbitrary word is displayed during the special pattern variation period (dynamic display period), thereby making it possible to suggest the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern during the variation (announcement of the expectation of a hit). Here, in the special pattern layer ry3, the special pattern is displayed, and when the reach effect or the like is displayed, the special pattern that forms the reach pattern is hidden by the characters of the character effect, causing a defect that makes it difficult to know whether the reach has been formed or not. In addition, the character effect is set so that the execution timing is randomly selected by lottery within the period in which the character effect can be executed during the variation display period in the special pattern variation pattern, so as to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by the fact that the execution timing of the character effect is determined in advance by the variation type of the special pattern, etc. By configuring it in this way, the timing of the character effects can be made random, providing a sense of surprise to the player, but it can also be difficult to respond to the content of the variable display of the special symbols being executed, which can lead to problems such as preventing the player from seeing the special symbols that need to be seen, or concealing preview effects, etc. Below, we will explain the configuration of the character effects in this control example so that they can be adapted to eliminate the above-mentioned problems.

For example, the character effect set in the first effect layer ry2a is controlled so that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the left pattern row z1, the character "ki" is placed at the intersection of the middle line L2 and the left pattern row z1, the character "a" is placed at the intersection of the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2, and the character "tsu" is placed at the intersection of the lower line L3 and the right pattern row z3. The character effect set in this first effect layer ry2a is referred to as the first character effect.

This first character effect is configured so that no characters are placed on the upward-sloping line L4, so it is controlled to be executed before the reach effect is executed at the execution timing of the character effect, and when the reach effect is being executed on the upward-sloping line L4.

The character effects set in the second effect layer ry2b are controlled so that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the middle pattern row z2, the character "ki" is placed at the intersection of the middle line L2 and the middle pattern row z2, the character "a" is placed at the intersection of the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2, and the character "tsu" is placed at the intersection of the lower line L3 and the right pattern row z3. The character effects set in this second effect layer ry2a are referred to as the second character effects.

This second character effect is controlled to be executed mainly when the reach line is the middle line L2, because there are no characters at the intersection of the left pattern row z1 and the middle line L2 and at the intersection of the right pattern row z3 and the middle line L2, and the characters in the character effect do not overlap even if the third pattern in the reach state is displayed on the middle line L2. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the characters in the character effect from obscuring the reach pattern during the reach effect, making it difficult to tell whether or not a reach is in progress.

The character effect set in the third effect layer ry2c is controlled so that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the right pattern row z3, the character "ki" is placed at the intersection of the middle line L2 and the right pattern row z3, the character "a" is placed at the intersection of the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2, and the character "tsu" is placed at the intersection of the lower line L3 and the right pattern row z2. The character effect set in this third effect layer ry2c is referred to as the third character effect.

This third character effect is controlled so that it is not used after the reach effect has been executed, because the characters are placed on the right pattern column z3. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the characters in the character effect from obscuring the reach pattern during the reach effect, making it difficult to tell whether or not a reach is in progress.

For example, if the third symbol is displayed stopped in a reach state on the middle line L2, executing a text effect using the first effect layer ry2a will cause the third symbol to be hidden by the character "ki" that constitutes the text effect, and the player will not know that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, executing a text effect using the second effect layer ry2b instead of the first effect layer ry2a will allow the text effect to be executed without hiding the third symbol.

In this way, depending on the display state of the third pattern at the time the character effect is started, the display layer on which the character effect image is drawn can be switched to execute a suitable character effect.

The following configuration is considered as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 for executing the character effects described above using only the LCD display.

First, as the electrical configuration of the display control device 114, a character effect flag 233xa and a character effect execution flag 233xb are provided in the work RAM 233, and a character effect display data selection table 234xa is newly defined in the NAND type flash memory 234a in the character ROM, in comparison with the 36th control example described above. The other processing is the same as the 36th control example (and the first control example) described above.

The character effect flag 233xa is a flag that is set to on when the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113 contains information indicating the execution of character effect, and when the character effect flag 233xa is set to on, the character effect processing is executed in the display setting processing 6. The character effect flag 233xa that is set to on is set to off when a variation stop command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of the character effect processing will be described later.

The character effect execution flag 233xb is a flag that is set to ON when a character display table for a character effect is set in the character effect processing, and by setting the character effect execution flag 233xb to ON, the character effect execution processing is executed in the character effect processing. The character effect execution flag 233xb that is set to ON is set to OFF when the address indicated by the character pointer in the character effect execution processing becomes the END data of the character display data). Details of the character effect execution processing will be described later.

The character effect display data selection table 234xa is a table in which character effect display data is specified for the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern and the value of the display effect counter CS3. Specifically, if the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, "no character effect" is selected if the value of the display effect counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 199, 500 to 899", "first effect layer display data" is selected if it is in the range of "200 to 299, 900 to 999", "second effect layer display data" is selected if it is in the range of "300 to 399", and "third effect layer display data" is selected if it is in the range of "400 to 499".

If the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot, if the value of the display effect counter CS3 is in the range of "0-99, 800-899", "no text effect" is selected, if it is in the range of "200-299, 900-999", "first effect layer display data" is selected, if it is in the range of "300-399", "second effect layer display data" is selected, and if it is in the range of "100-199, 500-799", "third effect layer display data" is selected.

Here, the first performance layer display data is a display data table for drawing an image of a character performance on the first performance layer ry2a among the display data for character performance, the second performance layer display data is a display data table for drawing an image of a character performance on the second performance layer ry2b, and the third performance layer display data is a display data table for drawing an image of a character performance on the third performance layer ry2c. Each display data table corresponds to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of an image to be displayed at that time.

In addition, "no character effect" indicates that display data for a character effect is not currently set, i.e., it is not the execution value of a character effect. In the second modified example of the 36th control example, as described above, when the display variable pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113 contains information indicating the execution of a character effect, the display control device 114 is configured to randomly select the execution timing by lottery within the period in which the character effect can be executed, and execute the character effect. Specifically, when the value of the display effect counter CS3 in the character effect processing becomes the execution value of a character effect, the display data table for the character effect is set, and the character effect is started.

The value of the display effect counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 999", so if the result of the correct/incorrect judgment is a miss, there is a 60% chance that "no character effect" will be selected, a 20% chance that "first character effect layer display data" will be selected, a 10% chance that "second character effect layer display data" will be selected, and a 10% chance that "third character effect layer display data" will be selected. In other words, if the result of the correct/incorrect judgment is a miss, the chance that the character effect will be executed is 40%.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, there is a 20% probability that "no character effect" is selected, a 20% probability that "first performance layer display data" is selected, a 20% probability that "second performance layer display data" is selected, and a 40% probability that "third performance layer display data" is selected. In other words, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the probability that the character effect will be the execution value is 80%. Therefore, the execution value of the character effect is more likely to be selected and the character effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Also, since the probability that "second performance layer display data" and "third performance layer display data" are selected is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss, it becomes easier to predict the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the display mode of the character effect (the arrangement of the "Gekiatsu" character), which can increase the interest of the game.

Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the 36th control example will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the 36th control example differs from the control processing of the display control device 114 in the 36th control example (and the first control example) described above in that it executes a fluctuation pattern command processing 6 instead of a fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 1097(a)), executes a fluctuation stop command processing 6 instead of a fluctuation stop command processing (see FIG. 1100(a)), executes a display setting processing 6 instead of a display setting processing (see FIG. 1102), and also differs in that it executes the character presentation processing, the character presentation execution processing, and the reach presentation processing. The other processing is the same as the 36th control example (and the first control example) described above.

First, the details of the variation pattern command process 6 (S6431) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of this 36th control example will be described. The variation pattern command process 6 (S6431) in the second modified example of this 36th control example is a process executed in place of the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 1097) in the 36th control example (and the first control example) described above.

In the variation pattern command process 6 (S6431), first, it is determined whether there is information for executing character effects in the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S6506). If it is determined that there is information for executing character effects (S6506: Yes), the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6506) and the process proceeds to S6501. Then, the processes of S6501 to S6505 described above are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6506 that there is no information for executing character effects (S6506: No), the process of S6507 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S6501. Then, the processes of S6501 to S6505 described above are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the details of the fluctuation stop command process 6 (S6432) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of this 36th control example will be described. The fluctuation stop command process 6 (S6432) in the second modified example of this 36th control example is a process executed in place of the fluctuation stop command process (see FIG. 1100) in the 36th control example (and the first control example) described above.

In the fluctuation stop command 6 process (S6432), first, it is determined whether the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6936). If it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6936: Yes), the character effect flag 233xa is set to OFF (S6937) and the process proceeds to S6931. Then, the processes of S6931 to S6935 described above are executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6936 that the character effect flag 233xa is not set to ON (S6936: No), the process of S6937 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S6931. Then, the processes of S6931 to S6935 described above are executed, and the process ends.

Next, the details of display setting process 6 (S6331) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of this 36th control example will be described. Display setting process 6 (S6331) in the second modified example of this 36th control example is a process executed in place of the display setting process (see FIG. 1102) of the 36th control example (and the first control example) described above.

In display setting process 6 (S6331), first, the processes of S7201 to S7205 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether the character effect flag 233xa is set to on (S7222). If it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is set to on (S7222: Yes), the character effect process (S7223) is executed and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S7206. A detailed explanation of the character effect process (S7223) will be given later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7222 that the character effect flag 233xa is not set to on (S7222: No), the process of S7223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7206.

Next, the character effect processing (S7223) executed in the display setting processing 6 (S6331) in the second modified example of the 36th control example will be described. In the character effect processing (S7223), first, it is determined whether the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to on (S7251). If it is determined that the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to on (S7251: Yes), the character effect execution processing (S7252) is executed and this processing ends. A detailed description of the character effect execution processing (S7252) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7251 that the character effect execution flag 233xb is not set to on (S7251: No), it is determined whether it is a character effect execution possible period (S7253). If it is determined that it is not a character effect execution possible period (S7253: No), this processing ends as it is. The determination of whether or not it is a period during which character effects can be executed is made by checking whether or not the value of the timing counter 233h is greater than the value corresponding to the character effect execution period (5 seconds in the second modified example of the 36th control example). In other words, if the value of the timing counter 233h is less than the value corresponding to 5 seconds, the character effect cannot be completed within the variable display period of the special pattern, so the character effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7253 that it is a period in which a character effect can be executed, the value of the display effect counter CS3 is obtained (S7254). Then, it is determined whether the value of the display effect counter CS3 obtained in the process of S7254 is the execution value of the character effect (S7255). If it is determined that the value of the display effect counter CS3 obtained is not the execution value of the character effect (S7255: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7255 that the acquired value of the display effect counter CS3 is the execution value of the character effect (S7255: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game is in reach (S7256). If it is determined that the game is in reach (S7256: Yes), the reach effect processing (S7257) is executed, and this processing ends. A detailed explanation of the reach effect processing (S7257) will be given later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7256 that the game is not in reach (S7256: No), the character effect display data corresponding to the acquired display effect counter CS3 is set in the character display data table buffer (S7258), the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to on (S7259), and this processing ends.

Next, the character effect execution process (S7252) executed in the character effect process (S7223) in the second modified example of the 36th control example will be described. In the character effect execution process (S7252), first, the character pointer is incremented by 1 (S7351). Next, it is determined whether the drawing content of the address indicated by the character pointer after the increment is END data (S7352). If it is determined that the drawing content of the address indicated by the character pointer after the increment is END data (S7352: Yes), the value of the character pointer is initialized (S7353), the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to OFF (S7354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7352 that the drawing content of the address indicated by the character pointer after the increment is not END data (S7352: No), the drawing content of the address indicated by the character pointer in the character display data table buffer is obtained (S7355), and this process is terminated.

Next, the reach effect processing (S7257) executed within the character effect processing (S7223) in the second modified example of the 36th control example will be described. In the reach effect processing (S7257), it is first determined whether the current reach is a middle row (x2 line) reach (S7451). If it is determined that the current reach is not a middle row (x2 line) reach (S7451: No), it is determined whether it is a right-upward row (x2 line) reach (S7452). If it is determined that it is a right-upward row (Z2 line) reach (S7452: Yes), the character display data of the first effect layer ry2a is set in the character display data table buffer (S7453), the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to on (S7455), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the process of S7451 determines that the current reach is a middle row (x2 line) reach (S7451: Yes), the character display data of the second performance layer ry2b is set in the character display data table buffer (S7454), the character performance in progress flag 233xb is set to on (S7455), and this process ends.

As described above, in the second variant of the 36th control example, the optimal character presentation can be achieved by switching the presentation layer that displays the character presentation in each layer for displaying the display mode on the third pattern display device 81.

This prevents the text effects from interfering with the visibility of special symbols or obscuring other advance notice effects, and allows the text effects to be executed while providing the player with appropriate game information.

In the second modified example of the 36th control example, when the third symbol is displayed in a reach state, the display layer on which the character effect is displayed is switched so that the third symbol and the characters displayed in the character effect do not overlap, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the reach effect period occurs while the character effect is being executed, the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a reach state may be shifted (delayed), or the reach line may be changed to a reach line that does not overlap with the character effect being executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the 36th control example has multiple (three) presentation layers with different arrangements of characters in the character presentation (a presentation in which a combination of multiple characters that form an arbitrary word (for example, the character "Gekiatsu") is displayed, thereby suggesting the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern that is changing), and by switching the presentation layer to be used depending on the display status of the third pattern at the timing when the character presentation starts, the third pattern in the reach state and the characters that make up the character presentation do not overlap, and a configuration has been described in which the optimal character presentation is executed.

However, in the character presentation of the second variant of the 36th control example, all characters are drawn on one presentation layer, so it is not possible to give the character presentation a sense of depth. Therefore, we will explain the third variant of the 36th control example, which is a control example in which different characters are drawn on multiple presentation layers, and all presentation layers are displayed overlapping each other to display character presentation with a sense of depth.

The following describes the characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modified example of the 36th control example. Two effects, a text effect and a character effect, are executed as effects to notify the winner/loser of the special symbol. The text effect is an effect that notifies the player that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot with the special symbol being displayed by displaying a text line saying "Gekiatsu" in the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

The character effect is an effect that predicts the likelihood of winning a jackpot by the display mode of a rabbit-like character 813. Specifically, the likelihood of winning a jackpot varies depending on the color of the effect displayed surrounding the character 813 and the size of the effect. For example, when a blue effect is displayed, the likelihood of winning a jackpot is lowest, followed by a red effect and then a gold effect, in that order.

The execution or non-execution of these character effects and character effects is regulated in the display variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113, and there are variation patterns in which neither the character effect nor the character effect is executed during the variable display period of one special pattern, variation patterns in which only one of the effects is executed, and variation patterns in which both effects are executed. Furthermore, while the display variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command regulates the start timing of the character effect, it does not regulate the start timing of the character effect, and the start timing of the character effect is determined by lottery in the display control device 114. For this reason, there are cases in which the execution period of the character effect and the execution period of the character effect overlap.

Here, we will explain an example of a display screen when the character effect and character effect periods overlap. In the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, a background image and the character "ge" 814, the character "ki" 815, and the character "a" 816, which are components of the character effect, are displayed, and a character 813, which is a component of the character effect, is also displayed.

The sub-display area Ds is composed of an active reserved pattern display area Ds1, which is a display area that displays an active reserved pattern hr0 indicating a reserved ball corresponding to the special pattern being displayed, a standby reserved pattern display area Ds2 for displaying a standby reserved pattern, and a message display area Ds3 in which the character "Win" 817a, the character "Tsu" 817b, and the character "Zo" 817c are displayed regardless of the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment or the type of display variable pattern. Note that the display of the character "Win Tsu Zo" is displayed even during a period when the special pattern is not displayed, and does not notify the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern, but simply displays a message for the player. Note that in the third modified example of the 36th control example, the message display area Ds3 is configured to display a message for the player, but is not limited to this. For example, the currently set game state (for example, if it is a normal state, "Normal" is displayed) may be displayed, or the stage name of the currently set background stage may be displayed.

Here, the flow of the character presentation in the third modified example of the 36th control example will be explained. When the start timing of the character presentation stipulated in the set display variation pattern arrives, first the character "Ge" 815 is displayed in the position shown in FIG. 219, then the character "Ge" 814 is displayed, and then the character "A" 816 is displayed. When the character "A" 816 is displayed, the character "Katsu" 817a and the character "Zo" 817c of the characters "Katsutsuzo" displayed in the message display area Ds3 are hidden, and only the character "Tsu" 817b is displayed. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily recognize that the character "Tsu" 817b has changed from a component of the message to a component forming the string of characters "Gekiatsu" in the character presentation.

The display position of the character 813 in the character performance varies depending on the display variation pattern that is set, and is displayed at various positions in the main display area Dm. Specifically, in the third modified example of the 36th control example, there are multiple display data tables for the character performance, and one display data table for the character performance is set according to the variation pattern type included in the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113. In this display data table for the character performance, the content (drawing content) of one frame of the image to be displayed at that time is specified in detail in correspondence with an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. The drawing content specifies drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the character 813, such as the display position of the character 813 and the color and size of the effect surrounding the character 813, and different drawing information is specified for each display data table for the character performance. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to predict where the character 813 will be displayed, and it is possible to provide the fun of searching for the character 813 in the main display area Dm.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third modified example of the 36th control example is configured to display the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining images displayed on multiple display layers, just like the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example of the 36th control example. The display layers are configured so that the reserved symbol layer ry1 is at the forefront (the closest side from the player's point of view), followed by the first performance layer ry2a, the second performance layer ry2b, the third performance layer ry2c, the special symbol layer y3, and the background layer ry4 in that order.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to Figure 45, each image layer is formed corresponding to each sprite, such as the background image used in one frame image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). In areas where display images overlap, the display image displayed on the image layer in the foreground is given priority for visibility.

The reserved pattern layer ry1 mainly displays the pending pattern hr0 in the secondary display area Ds, the pending patterns displayed in the standby reserved pattern display area Ds2, and the text image "Win!" displayed in the message display area Ds3.

The first performance layer ry2a displays an image of the character "a" 816 and a character 813. The second performance layer ry2b displays an image of the character "ki" 815, the third performance layer ry2c displays an image of the character "ge" 814, and the background layer ry4 displays a background image.

In this way, the images of the characters 814-816 and 817b, which are components of the character effect, are displayed on different display layers, creating a three-dimensional effect with depth, providing the player with a realistic effect.

The display layer on which the character 813 is drawn in the character performance is determined by the type of display data table for the character performance. For example, when the effect surrounding the character 813 is blue (i.e., when the expected probability of winning the jackpot is relatively low (e.g., 5%)), the importance of the game information provided to the player is low and it is better to display other preview performances with priority, so the character 813 is drawn on the third performance layer ry2c, which is located at the back side of the performance layers. On the other hand, when the effect surrounding the character 813 is gold (i.e., when the expected probability of winning the jackpot is relatively high (e.g., 60%)), the importance of the game information provided to the player is high and it is better to display it with priority over other preview performances, so the character 813 is drawn on the first performance layer ry2a, which is located at the front side of the performance layers.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent game information that is important to the player from being overlapped and hidden by other preview effects, while as described above, the display position of the character 813 displayed in the character effect is not fixed. Therefore, for example, when the character 813 surrounded by a gold effect is displayed at the display position of the character 815 of the character string "Gekiatsu" (the characters "Ge", "Ki", and "A") of the character string "Gekiatsu" in the character effect, the character 813 and the character 815 of the character effect, which is a component of the character effect, are displayed overlapping each other. In this case, the character 813 is drawn on the first effect layer ry2a, and the character 815 of the character effect is drawn on the second effect layer ry2b, so the character 813 drawn on the first effect layer ry2a arranged on the front side is displayed preferentially. As a result, part of the character "ki" 815 (the part that overlaps with the character 813) is hidden from the player by the display of the character 813, and even though the character string "gekiatsu" is formed, it is difficult for the player to tell whether the character "ki" 815 is displayed or not, which may reduce the effect of the character effect. When the character effect is executed, it suggests that the probability of winning the jackpot is extremely high (for example, 80%), and is the most important advance notice effect of the game information provided to the player.

Therefore, in the third modified example of the 36th control example, it is determined whether or not a character effect is being executed when a character (for example, the character "ki" 815) constituting a character effect is drawn on the display layer, and if it overlaps with the character effect execution period, the display layer on which the character "ki" 815 is drawn can be changed from the second effect layer ry2b to the reserved pattern layer ry1. By configuring it in this way, since the reserved pattern layer ry1 is the display layer located on the front side (the closer side from the player's line of sight) of the display layers, the character "ki" 815 is displayed on the front side of the character 813 drawn on the first effect layer ry2a, making it easier for the player to see the character "ki" 815 without changing the display position of the first effect layer 813.

The control for executing the above-mentioned character effects will be described below. First, the contents of the character effect display data table possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 36th control example will be described. This is a diagram showing a schematic example of a character effect display data table. The display data table corresponds to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing contents specify the position where each character of the character effect is displayed and the display layer on which it is drawn. The character effect display data table specifies the drawing contents for each character pointer value. The character pointer value "0" specifies Start data indicating that the character effect is to start. The character pointer value "1000" specifies the drawing instruction for the character "ki" 815 and information indicating the display layer on which it is drawn. The character pointer value "1500" specifies the drawing instruction for the character "ge" 814 and information indicating the display layer on which it is drawn. The character pointer value "2000" specifies the drawing instruction for the character "a" 816 and information indicating the display layer on which it is drawn. The character pointer value "2500" specifies the drawing instruction to hide the character "win" 817a and the character "zo" 817c displayed in the message display area Ds3 and information indicating the display layer on which it is drawn. The character pointer value "5000" specifies END data indicating the end of the character effect. This allows the display control device 114 to determine that the character presentation has ended.

In the third modified example of the 36th control example, the character string "GEKI ATS" is always formed when the character rendering is executed, but this is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to provide a pattern in which the character rendering ends without the character string "GEKI ATS" being formed (a so-called false pattern).

In addition, in the third modified example of the 36th control example, the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed in the character presentation, but this is not limited to this, and other character strings may be formed, or a picture may be formed instead of a character string.

Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the 36th control example will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the 36th control example differs from the control processing of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the 36th control example described above in that display setting processing 7 (S6351) is executed instead of display setting processing 6, character presentation processing 2 (S7224) is executed instead of character presentation processing, and character presentation execution processing 2 (S7552) is executed instead of character presentation execution processing. The other processing is the same.

First, the display setting process 7 (S6351) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of this 36th control example will be described. This is a flowchart showing the contents of the display setting process 7 (S6351). The display setting process 7 (S6351) in the third modified example of this 36th control example differs from the display setting process 6 in the second modified example of the 36th control example described above in that character presentation process 2 (S7224) is executed instead of character presentation process (S7223). The other processes are the same.

Next, we will explain the character presentation process 2 (S7224) executed within the display setting process 7 (S6351) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of this 36th control example.

In character effect processing 2 (S7224), first, it is determined whether the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to on (S7551). If it is determined that the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to on (S7551: Yes), character effect execution processing 2 (S7552) is executed and this processing ends. A detailed explanation of character effect execution processing 2 (S7552) will be described later with reference to FIG. 226. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7551 that the character effect execution flag 233xb is not set to on (S7551: No), it is determined whether it is a period in which character effect execution is possible (S7553). If it is determined that it is not a period in which character effect execution is possible (S7553: No), this processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7553 that it is a period during which a character effect can be executed, the value of the display effect counter CS3 is obtained (S7554). Then, it is determined whether the value of the display effect counter CS3 obtained in the process of S7554 is the execution value of the character effect (S7555). If it is determined that the value of the display effect counter CS3 obtained is not the execution value (S7555: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7555 that the value of the display effect counter CS3 obtained is the execution value of the character effect (S7555: Yes), the character effect execution flag 223xc is set to on (S7556), the character effect data table is set (S7557), and this process ends.

Next, the processing of character effect execution processing 2 (S7552) executed within character effect processing 2 (S7224) in the third modified example of this 36th control example will be described. In character effect execution processing 2 (S7552), first, the character pointer is incremented by 1 (S7651). Next, it is determined whether the drawing content of the address indicated by the character pointer after the increment is END data (S7654). If it is determined that the drawing content of the address indicated by the character pointer after the increment is END data (S7654: Yes), the value of the character pointer is initialized (S7652), the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to OFF (S7653), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7654 that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after the addition is not END data (S7654: No), the data of the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer in the character display data table buffer is obtained (S7655), and it is determined whether the obtained drawing content data is data of drawing content indicating the character "ki" (S7656).

In the process of S7656, if it is determined that the acquired drawing content data is data of drawing content showing the character "ki" (S7656: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a preview performance is being performed (S7657). If it is determined that a preview performance is being performed (S7657: Yes), the display layer is changed to the reserved pattern layer ry1 (S7658), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S7657, if it is determined that a preview performance is not being performed (S7657: No), the process of S7658 is skipped, and this process ends as is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7656 that the acquired drawing content data is not data on the drawing content of the character "ki" (S7656: No), the process of S7657 described above is skipped, the display layer is changed to the reserved pattern layer ry1 (S7658), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the third variant of the 36th control example, different characters are drawn on each of the multiple performance layers, and all the performance layers are displayed overlapping each other to display a character effect with a sense of depth.

In addition, if the performance periods of the text effect and other preview effects overlap and there is a risk that the components (text) of the text effect will be hidden by the other preview effects, the display layer that draws the components (text) of the text effect is switched to the display layer (reserved pattern layer ry1) that is located at the forefront, so that the text effect is displayed in front of the other preview effects.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to eliminate the problem where the text effect is hidden by other preview effects, making it appear to the player that the text effect is not being executed.

In the third modified example of the 36th control example, when the character effect and the character effect overlap, the character effect is switched to the display layer arranged on the front side to prevent the character effect from being hidden. However, a part of the character effect may be hidden by the character effect, and the content of the game information provided by the character effect may be changed. Specifically, the character 813 may be displayed so as to hide the part of the character "Gekiatsu" displayed by the character effect in which "Geki" is displayed, and the character "Atsu" may be displayed, which has a lower expected probability of winning a jackpot than when "Gekiatsu" is displayed. In this case, for example, it is preferable to execute a performance in which the display position of the character 813 is changed or the display layer is switched. By configuring in this way, when the character 813 does not overlap with the character effect or is displayed behind the character effect, the character "Atsu" is promoted to the character "Gekiatsu", which makes it possible to make the player interested in the movement of the character 813 and improve the fun of the game.

<37th control example>
Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to vary the number of special pattern draws that can be executed per unit time according to the game state by determining different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) based on the set game state and the result of a special pattern drawing, and encourages the player to play with enthusiasm, aiming to set a game state that increases the number of special pattern draws that can be executed per unit time.

Also, there is a pachinko machine 10 that makes it easier to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time when the result of the special pattern lottery is a win than when the result is a miss, and thus allows the player to predict the result of the special pattern lottery that corresponds to the currently executing special pattern variation by the time the special pattern variation stops and is displayed, depending on the length of the currently executing special pattern variation.

Furthermore, some machines are configured to determine different variation patterns (variation times) based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of a jackpot game, even during periods when the same game state continues, making it possible for players who play for long periods of time in the same game state to enjoy a game that they will not tire of. Specifically, when the normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game, some machines are configured to allow different variation patterns (variation times) to be set by switching the variation pattern table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern every time 100 special symbol variations are executed.

With a conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, even if the same game state continues for a long time, it is possible to set completely different variation patterns depending on the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, which prevents the player from becoming bored with the game. However, as the prescribed contents (variation pattern selection scenario) for switching the variation pattern table depending on the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, it is necessary to prescribe data corresponding to the enormous number of times the special pattern variation is performed, which may increase the processing load on the main control device 110.

In addition, if the number of times the special pattern variation is performed is perfectly correlated with the variation pattern table that is referenced, it will be easy for the player to predict which variation pattern will be selected at what time. Therefore, it is desirable to diversify the combinations of the number of times the special pattern variation is performed and the variation pattern table that is referenced, making it difficult for the player to predict which variation pattern will be selected at what time. However, when such a configuration is used, the prescribed contents of the variation pattern selection scenario become more diverse, which creates the problem of further increasing the processing load on the main control device 110.

In contrast to this, in the present 37th control example, the same game state is managed by a state table with the range in which the referenced variation pattern table is the same as the smallest unit. Specifically, for the same game state, multiple state tables are provided that reference different variation pattern tables, and when the transition condition in each state table is met, a transition to a different state table is made.

By configuring it in this way, there is no need to measure the number of times the special pattern has changed since the previous big win game ended, which has the effect of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 37th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 37th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1118 to Fig. 1126. In the 37th control example, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially different from that of the 32nd control example described above. Other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1118, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 37th control example will be described. FIG. 1118 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of this 37th control example. As shown in FIG. 1118, this 37th control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that a fluctuation pattern selection table 202ha is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and further, a state transition table 202hb and a jackpot transition setting table 202hc are added.

Here, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202ha will be explained with reference to FIG. 1120. FIG. 1120(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202ha. As shown in FIG. 1120(a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202ha defines three fluctuation pattern tables that are referenced when the normal state is set, and three fluctuation pattern tables that are referenced when the time-saving state is set, and is configured so that different fluctuation pattern tables are read out depending on the type of state status (ST) that is set.

The normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is a variation pattern table that is referenced when ST1 is set as the status. "ST1" is a status that is set when the pachinko machine 10 executes an initialization process or after the rush period ends, and is a state that continues until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times.

Now, with reference to FIG. 1120(b), the contents defined in the normal use variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 will be explained. FIG. 1120(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal use variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 in schematic form. As shown in FIG. 1120(b), the contents described in the normal use variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 differ from the normal use variation pattern table 202d1 in the 32nd control example described above in that the contents of the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol lottery is executed are different, but otherwise they are the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As described above, the state in which the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is referenced is set after the rush period ends (after the second special pattern variation based on the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the time-saving state ends), so the second special pattern variation, the variation pattern of which is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1, is a second special pattern variation that cannot occur when normal play is being performed. Therefore, by specifying the variation pattern so that a long variation with a variation time of 100 seconds is performed, the progress of the game can be delayed for players who are playing an inappropriate game (right-hand play to execute the second special pattern lottery during the normal state).

In addition, a determination means may be provided that can determine that the second special symbol variation has been performed while the state status "ST1" is set, and a notification means may be provided that can notify the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that fraudulent play has been performed when the determination means determines that the second special symbol variation has been performed.

The normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 is a variation pattern table that is referenced when ST2 is set as the status. "ST2" is the status that is set when the transition condition for "ST1" is met, and is the state that continues until the special pattern variation is executed 80 times.

Now, with reference to FIG. 1121(a), the contents stipulated in the normal use variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 will be explained. FIG. 1121(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the normal use variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 in a schematic way. As shown in FIG. 1121(a), the normal use variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 differs from the above-mentioned normal use variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 (see FIG. 1120(b)) in that it stipulates that "normal reach" cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, but is otherwise the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As mentioned above, the contents stipulated in the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 differ in the types of variation patterns that can be selected from those in the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1, so that the player can predict the currently set status based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is being executed.

In addition, even when the same game state is set, the selection of the variation pattern can be made different depending on the set state status, which prevents players who play for a long time in the same game state from quickly becoming bored with the game. Specifically, it is configured so that the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach is more likely to be selected when the state status is set to "ST2" than when "ST1" is set.

The normal fluctuation pattern 3 table 202ha3 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referenced when ST3 is set as the state status. "ST3" is the state status that is set when the transition condition is met in a state where the state status "ST6" corresponding to the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is set, and this state continues until a special pattern fluctuation is executed once.

Here, referring to FIG. 1121(b), the contents stipulated in the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 will be explained. FIG. 1121(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3. As shown in FIG. 1121(b), the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 is configured to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds, regardless of the special pattern type and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. This normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 is usually referenced when executing the second special pattern variation in the normal state during the rush period (the second special pattern variation based on the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the time-saving state).

The time-saving fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha4 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referenced when ST4 is set as the status. "ST4" is a status that is set after the time-saving jackpot (jackpot A, C, D) has ended. In other words, it is a status that corresponds to at least the first special symbol fluctuation that is executed during the time-saving state.

Here, the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 1 table 202ha4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1122(a). FIG. 1122(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 1 table 202ha4. As shown in FIG. 1122(a), the time-saving variation pattern 1 table 202ha4 defines the same contents as the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 957(a)) in the 32nd control example described above.

The time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ha5 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referenced when ST5 is set as the state status. "ST5" is the state status that is set when the transition condition is met with "ST4" set as the state status.

Here, referring to FIG. 1122(b), the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ha5 will be explained. FIG. 1122(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ha5 in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 1122(b), the time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ha5 defines the same contents as the special time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 957(b)) in the above-mentioned 32nd control example for the first special symbol fluctuation, and defines the same contents as the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 957(a)) in the above-mentioned 32nd control example for the second special symbol fluctuation.

Next, the time-saving fluctuation pattern 3 table 202ha6 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referenced when ST6 is set as the state status. "ST6" is the state status that is set when the transition condition is met with "ST5" set as the state status.

Here, referring to FIG. 1123, the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 3 table 202ha6 will be explained. FIG. 1123 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 3 table 202ha6. As shown in FIG. 1123, in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 3 table 202ha6, for the first special symbol fluctuation, the same contents as the special time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 957(b)) in the above-mentioned 32nd control example are defined, and for the second special symbol fluctuation, the same contents as the time-saving final fluctuation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 957(c)) in the above-mentioned 32nd control example are defined.

The state transition table 202hb is a data table in which the contents of the state status to be set in the pachinko machine 10 are predefined. Here, the contents defined in the state transition table 202hb will be explained with reference to FIG. 1124(a). FIG. 1124(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the state transition table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 1124(a), six types of state transition tables are stored in the state transition table 202hb. Each state transition table defines the type of the variation pattern table to be referenced, the transition conditions to different state statuses, and the state status to which the transition is made when the transition conditions are met, and is configured to transition to different state transition tables depending on the progress of the game. By configuring in this way, various variation patterns can be selected according to the game state and the number of times special patterns change, simply by executing management regarding the transition conditions for transitioning the state transition table.

The state transition 1 table 202hb1 is a state status that is set when the pachinko machine 10 executes an initialization process or after the rush period ends. In other words, when the initialized pachinko machine 10 starts up, the state transition 1 table 202hb1 is first referenced to select a change pattern.

Now, with reference to FIG. 1124(b), the contents of state transition 1 table 202hb1 will be explained. FIG. 1124(b) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in state transition 1 table 202hb1. As shown in FIG. 1124(b), state transition 1 table 202hb1 defines the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced, "Normal 1 (normal fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha1)," the transition condition, "20 special chart fluctuations," and the state status to transition to when the transition condition is met, "ST2."

Next, the contents of state transition 2 table 202hb2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1124(c). FIG. 1124(c) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in state transition 2 table 202hb2. As shown in FIG. 1124(c), state transition 2 table 202hb2 defines the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced, "Normal 2 (normal fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ha2)," the transition condition, "80 special chart fluctuations," and the state status to transition to when the transition condition is met, "ST1."

Next, the contents of state transition 3 table 202hb3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1124(d). FIG. 1124(d) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in state transition 3 table 202hb3. As shown in FIG. 1124(d), state transition 3 table 202hb3 defines the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced, "Normal 3 (normal fluctuation pattern 3 table 202ha3)," the transition condition, "one special chart fluctuation," and the state status to transition to when the transition condition is met, "ST1."

Next, the contents of the state transition 4 table 202hb4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1125(a). FIG. 1125(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the state transition 4 table 202hb4. As shown in FIG. 1125(a), the state transition 4 table 202hb4 specifies the type of the referenced fluctuation pattern table "Time reduction 1 (time reduction fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha4)", the transition conditions as transition condition 1 "4 times special chart 1 fluctuation or 1 time special chart 2 fluctuation" and transition condition 2 "Small win win", and the state status of the transition destination when the transition conditions are met as "ST5" when transition condition 1 is met and "ST3" when transition condition 2 is met.

Next, the contents of the state transition 5 table 202hb5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1125(b). FIG. 1125(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the state transition 5 table 202hb5. As shown in FIG. 1125(b), the state transition 5 table 202hb5 specifies the type of the referenced fluctuation pattern table "Time reduction 2 (Time reduction fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ha5)", the transition conditions as transition condition 1 "One special chart 1 fluctuation or one special chart 2 fluctuation" and transition condition 2 "Small win", and the state status of the transition destination when the transition conditions are met as "ST6" when transition condition 1 is met and "ST3" when transition condition 2 is met.

Next, the contents of the state transition 6 table 202hb6 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1125(c). FIG. 1125(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the state transition 6 table 202hb6. As shown in FIG. 1125(c), the state transition 6 table 202hb6 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced as "Time reduction 3 (Time reduction fluctuation pattern 3 table 202ha6)," the transition condition as transition condition 1 as "5 times special chart 1 fluctuation or 1 time special chart 2 fluctuation," and "ST3" as the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition 1 is satisfied.

The jackpot transition setting table 202hc is a data table that stores the type of state status that is set after the jackpot game ends, and is referenced when the jackpot game ends, and the state status (ST1 or ST4) corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot game being played is set.

Now, referring to FIG. 1126, the contents stipulated in the jackpot transition setting table 202hc will be explained. FIG. 1126 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot transition setting table 202hc. As shown in FIG. 1126, the jackpot transition setting table 202hc stipulates a transition destination status (transition destination ST) corresponding to the jackpot type. Specifically, for "jackpot A, C, D" in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, "ST4", which is the initial state status in the time-saving state, is stipulated as the transition destination ST, and for "jackpot B" in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, "ST1", which is the initial state status in the normal state, is stipulated as the transition destination ST.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this 37th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1119. FIG. 1119 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 203 in this 37th control example. As shown in FIG. 1119, the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 37th control example differs from the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that a state status 203ha and a specified number counter 203hb have been added, but otherwise is the same.

The state status 203ha is a memory area for storing the type of state transition table currently being referenced among the various state transition tables defined in the state transition table 202hb.

The specified number of times counter 203hb is a counter for measuring the number of times (the number of times the special pattern changes in the normal state) until the transition condition for transitioning the state transition table is met.

<Regarding control processing in the 37th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1127 to Fig. 1129, the difference between the contents of the control process in the 37th control example and the above-mentioned 32nd control example will be described. In the 37th control example, the contents of the control process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol variation are different from those in the above-mentioned 32nd control example.

First, the processing contents of special pattern change processing 8 (S184) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1127. FIG. 1127 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern change processing 8 (S184). This special pattern change processing 8 (S184) differs from the special pattern change processing (S104) in the 32nd control example described above in that it executes special pattern change pattern selection processing 8 (S290) instead of special pattern change pattern selection processing (S210), and executes change count subtraction processing (S291) after the time-saving update processing (S224) is completed, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and will not be explained.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (S290) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1128. FIG. 1128 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (S290). As shown in FIG. 1128, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (S290) is executed, the same processing of S401 to S403 as the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S210) of the 32nd control example described above is executed, and then the fluctuation pattern selection table according to the current state status is read (S484), and the processing of S405 to S410 is executed.

Next, the processing contents of the change count subtraction process (S291) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1129. FIG. 1129 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the change count subtraction process (S291). In this change count subtraction process (S291), processing is executed to update (subtract) various elements used to determine whether or not the transition condition of the state status has been met.

When the variation count subtraction process (S291) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the specified number of times counter 203hb is greater than 0 (S681), and if it is determined that it is greater (S681: Yes), the value of the specified number of times counter 203hb is subtracted by 1 (S682), and it is determined whether the status transition condition is satisfied (S683). In the process of S683, if it is determined that the status transition condition is satisfied (S683: Yes), a state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202hb, a corresponding state command is set (S684), and the transition conditions according to the state transition table after the transition are set in the specified number of times counter 203hb, the special pattern 2 counter 203q, the time reduction counter 203h, and the small win counter 203r (S685), and this process is terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the variation pattern from the next special pattern variation to be executed by referring to the state transition table of the transition destination.

<38th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the 38th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1130 to Fig. 1136. In the above-mentioned 32nd control example, when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern selection table 202b is referred to, and the process of determining the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern selection table 202b is executed. In this case, in order to determine the variation patterns of various variation times, it is necessary to pre-specify the variation patterns corresponding to various variation times in the variation pattern selection table 202b, and there was a problem that the capacity of the storage area for storing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b increases as the types of variation patterns are increased.

In contrast to this, in the present 38th control example, the first element (main fluctuation time) and the second element (additive fluctuation time) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) are configured to be independently determinable, and the combined fluctuation time calculated by the addition process of adding up the first element and the second element is configured to be determined as the fluctuation pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine more types of fluctuation patterns (added fluctuation times) than the number of data of the predefined fluctuation patterns (part of the fluctuation patterns) by combining multiple elements, and therefore it is possible to suppress the problem of an increase in the capacity of the storage area for storing the defined contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, which occurs when increasing the types of fluctuation patterns.

Furthermore, in this 38th control example, the method of storing the determined fluctuation pattern is configured to differ depending on whether the length of the fluctuation time indicated by the combined fluctuation time is longer than the specified time (65536 x 2 milliseconds) or shorter.

Specifically, the fluctuation time counter for storing the length of the fluctuation time is configured with a capacity of 2 bytes, and is configured to be able to set a value up to 65536. The value of the fluctuation time counter 203ib can be updated (decremented) by the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 963), which is executed in 2 millisecond units. In other words, if the length of the fluctuation time indicated by the total fluctuation time is shorter than a predetermined time (65536 x 2 milliseconds), the value corresponding to that fluctuation time can be set as the value of the fluctuation time counter 203ib, thereby making it possible to store the value.

On the other hand, if the length of the fluctuation time indicated by the total fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (65536 x 2 milliseconds), the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON to indicate that the value that can be set in the fluctuation time counter 203ib has overflowed, and the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined time (65536 x 2 milliseconds) from the total fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time counter 203ib. Then, when the value of the fluctuation time counter 203ib becomes 0, it is determined whether the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, the value of 65536 is reset to the fluctuation time counter 203ib.

By configuring it in this way, it is assumed that the length of the fluctuation time indicated by the total fluctuation time will be longer than a specified time (65536 x 2 milliseconds), and there is no need to configure the fluctuation time counter 203ib with a capacity of 3 bytes, which reduces the processing capacity for managing the fluctuation time.

In addition, in this 38th control example, the overflow flag 203ia is set using free space (one unused bit) of the control data used in other processes, so no dedicated data capacity is used to set the overflow flag 203ia.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, the overflow flag 203ia may be set using an area of the 2-byte data capacity used for the variable time counter 203ib that is not used when subtracting the variable time.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the variable time counter 203ib is updated by a timer interrupt process (every 2 milliseconds) that is periodically executed by the main control device 110. Here, since the pachinko machine 10 needs to execute loop processing at short intervals to detect winning balls and output set commands to other control devices, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executed in 2 millisecond increments.

Therefore, for example, by configuring the loop process to update the value of the variable time counter 203ib in 1-second increments, a maximum of 65536 seconds of variable time can be measured using 2 bytes of data capacity. However, if the execution interval of the timer interrupt process executed by the pachinko machine 10 is set to 1 second in correspondence with the update interval of the variable time counter 203ia, a problem occurs in that it significantly affects control processes related to other games. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt process is executed at 2 millisecond intervals and the update process of the variable time counter 203ia is executed at an equal interval (for example, 20 millisecond intervals) instead of 2 millisecond intervals, a maximum of 65536 x 20 milliseconds of variable time can be measured using 2 bytes of data capacity. However, when such a configuration is used, a dedicated process is required to execute the update process of the variable time counter 203ia when the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed reaches a predetermined number (10 times), so there is a problem in that the processing load of the main control unit 110 increases as a whole process for managing the variable time. In contrast, in this 38th control example, when a fluctuation time greater than the fluctuation time that can be managed with a data capacity of 2 bytes is determined, it is sufficient to execute a process to set the overflow flag 203ib to on, thereby reducing the processing capacity for managing the fluctuation time.

In addition, when outputting information regarding the variable time as a command, it is only necessary to output two bytes of data and one bit of information ("0" = off, "1" = on) indicating the setting information of the overflow flag 203ib. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data output as a command (the number of bits contained in the data) compared to, for example, a case in which three bytes of data are used to manage the variable time.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 38th control example>
First, the electrical configuration in the 38th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1130 to Fig. 1133. The 38th control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been partially changed, but the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 1130 (a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202ia. As shown in Figure 1130 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202ia is provided with a normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 for selecting the main fluctuation time in the normal state, a time-saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 for selecting the main fluctuation time in the time-saving state, and a normal additive fluctuation pattern table 202ia3 for selecting the additive fluctuation time in the normal state. In addition, in this 38th control example, a game state (normal state) in which the fluctuation time is determined using the main fluctuation time and the additive fluctuation time, and a game state (time-saving state) in which the fluctuation time is determined only by the main fluctuation time are configured to be set. Therefore, a data table for selecting the additive fluctuation time is not provided for the time-saving state.

In addition, without being limited to this, the variable time may be determined using the main variable time and the added variable time even in the time-saving state. Also, the variable pattern in the time-saving state may be determined using only the normal added variable pattern table 202ia3 for selecting the added variable time in the normal state.

Now, the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1130(b). FIG. 1130(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 1130(b), the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 defines the same fluctuation pattern as the normal fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha1 (see FIG. 1120(b)) in the 37th control example described above, and defines a fluctuation time value (value set in the fluctuation time counter 203ib) corresponding to the defined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

Next, the time-saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1131(a). FIG. 1131(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 1131(a), the time-saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 defines the same fluctuation pattern as the time-saving fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha4 (see FIG. 1122(a)) in the 37th control example described above, and defines a fluctuation time value (value set in the fluctuation time counter 203ib) corresponding to the defined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

Next, the normal addition variation pattern table 202ia3 will be described with reference to FIG. 1131(b). FIG. 1131(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal addition variation pattern table 202ia3. As shown in FIG. 1131(b), the normal addition variation pattern table 202ia3 defines the addition variation time according to the type of performance to be executed (corresponding performance) according to the pattern type (special pattern type), the lottery result (special pattern lottery result), and the acquired second variation type counter CS11. For example, as the corresponding performance, a 10-second addition variation time corresponding to "1 pseudo consecutive", a 20-second addition variation time corresponding to "2 pseudo consecutive", a 30-second addition variation time corresponding to "3 pseudo consecutive", and a 40-second addition variation time corresponding to "4 pseudo consecutive".

By configuring in this way, the variation time according to the corresponding effect to be executed can be added to the main variation time, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, in this 38th control example, if a small jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery (winning probability 1/65536), the additional variation time is not selected. In other words, if a small jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a dedicated special effect (e.g., freeze effect) is executed as the main variation time, and the player is notified of the small jackpot win immediately after the special pattern variation starts. In this way, if a variation pattern that allows the player to quickly determine the result of the special pattern lottery is selected as the main variation time, the additional variation time is not determined, thereby preventing unnecessary effects (e.g., pseudo consecutive wins) from being executed and reducing the presentation effect.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this 38th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1132. FIG. 1132 is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this 38th control example. As shown in FIG. 1132, this 38th control example differs from the above-mentioned 32nd control example in that an overflow flag 203ia and a fluctuation time counter 203ib have been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The overflow flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that the value indicating the total fluctuation time obtained by adding up the main fluctuation time and the added fluctuation time has exceeded the upper limit value (65536) that can be set in the fluctuation time counter 203ib, and is set to ON when the upper limit value (65536) is exceeded (see S404a in FIG. 1135). Then, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 203ib has reached 1 (S502a: Yes in FIG. 1136), the flag is referenced (see S503a in FIG. 1136), and when it is determined that the flag is set to ON and the value of 65536 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203ib, the flag is set to OFF (see S504a in FIG. 1136).

The fluctuation time counter 203ib is a counter for indicating the fluctuation time of the determined special pattern fluctuation, and a value corresponding to the total fluctuation time obtained by adding together the main fluctuation time and the added fluctuation time is set (see S405a, S409a in FIG. 1135). Then, while the special pattern fluctuation is being executed, it is decremented every 2 milliseconds (S501a in FIG. 1136). Then, when the value indicated by the fluctuation time counter 203ib becomes 0, processing is executed to stop the special pattern fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 1133, this variable time counter 203ib is a 2-byte (16-bit) data area, and binary information can be written to each bit. In other words, the variable time counter 203ib is configured to be able to write 65,536 (2 to the power of 16) pieces of information, ranging from "0000000000000000" to "1111111111111111".

<Regarding control processing in the 38th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1134 to Fig. 1136, the contents of the control process in this 38th control example, which are different from those in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, will be described. As described above, in this 38th control example, the contents of the process for determining the variation time of the special symbol variation and the process for managing the determined variation time are made different. Specifically, it is different in that the special symbol variation process 9 (S104a) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104). The other process contents are the same, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the special symbol change process 9 (S104a) will be described with reference to FIG. 1134. FIG. 1134 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol change process 9 (S104a). As shown in FIG. 1134, the special symbol change process 9 (S104a) differs from the above-mentioned special symbol change process (S104) in that it executes the special symbol change pattern selection process 9 (S210a) instead of the special symbol change pattern selection process (S210), and in that it executes the change time update process (S216a) when it is determined that the change time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S215: No), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the processing contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 9 (S210a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1135. FIG. 1135 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 9 (S210a). In this special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 9 (S210a), the following processes are executed: a process of determining the main fluctuation time, which is the first element of the fluctuation time, and the added fluctuation time, which is the second element, as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation; a process of calculating a combined fluctuation time by adding up the determined main fluctuation time and the added fluctuation time; and a process of storing a fluctuation time according to the length of the combined fluctuation time.

Specifically, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 9 (S210a) is executed, the same processes of S401 to S404 as the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S210) of the 32nd control example described above are executed, and then the fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation time) and the added time (additional fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of each fluctuation type counter are selected from the read table (value 401a of SW effective time counter 223q), and the main fluctuation time and the added fluctuation time (additional time) are added together (S402a).

Then, it is determined whether the sum indicating the summed total fluctuation time is greater than 65,536 (S403a), and if it is determined that it is greater (S403a: Yes), the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON (S404a), the sum is subtracted from 65,536 and the value is stored (set) in the fluctuation time counter 203ib (S405a), and then the same processes as in the 32nd control example described above are executed from S406 to S408, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403a that the sum is not greater than 65536 (S403a: No), the sum is stored (set) as is in the variable time counter 203ib, and the process proceeds to S406.

Next, the process contents of the variable time update process (S216a) will be described with reference to FIG. 1136. FIG. 1136 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the variable time update process (S216a). In this variable time update process (S216a), a process is executed to update the variable time.

When the variable time update process (S216a) is executed, first, the value of the variable time counter 203ib is decremented by 1 (S501a), and it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter 203ib after the decrement is 1 (S502a). If it is determined by the process of S502a that the value of the variable time counter 203ib is 1 (S502a: Yes), it is next determined whether the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON (S503a). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S503a: Yes), the overflow flag 203ia is set to OFF (S504a), the value of the variable time counter 203ib is set to 65536 (S505a), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S506a), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S502a that the value of the variable time counter 203ib is not 1 (S502a: No), or if it is determined in the process of S503a that the overflow flag 203ia is not set to ON (S503a: No), the process skips the processes of S504a and S505a and proceeds to the process of S506a.

<39th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 39th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1137 to Fig. 1143. In each of the above control examples, a variation performance using the third symbol is executed as a variation performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player does not get bored with the game during the period from the start to the end of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation period). In particular, in the above 35th control example, a technology was used that enhances the performance effect by executing a variation performance using the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and a decorative movable role object provided near the third symbol display device 81.

However, in both control examples, a fixed display mode is used as the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, which causes the problem that players who play for long periods of time tend to become bored with the game.

In contrast to this, in the present 39th control example, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is varied in a complex manner, so that the player does not become bored with the game too early. Specifically, the third pattern is configured by combining a number pattern and a box pattern, and the presentation mode of the variable presentation can be determined for each pattern.

By configuring it in this way, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be a combination of the presentation mode of the number pattern and the presentation mode of the box pattern, making it possible to create a more complex presentation mode of the third pattern.

<About the performance content in the 39th control example>
Here, with reference to Fig. 1137 and Fig. 1138, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this 39th control example, characteristic effects different from those of the above-mentioned 32nd control example will be described. Fig. 1137(a) is a diagram showing a display screen during the third symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 1137(a), in this 39th control example, three third patterns (left third pattern Z1, middle third pattern Z2, right third pattern Z3) are displayed variably on the pay line L1 formed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and when the three third patterns are displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of the same numbers), the player can be notified that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win.

As shown in FIG. 1137(a), each third pattern is formed from a box pattern ZA and a number pattern ZB, and is normally configured so that the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB are displayed in the same manner (rotating from the back to the front). Therefore, in the normal third pattern display, as shown in FIG. 1137(a), a third pattern number 1, which is a combination of the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB, is displayed in a variable manner.

However, in this 39th control example, the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB are configured to be able to perform different change patterns, so the third pattern can be displayed in a different manner from the change pattern shown in Figure 1137 (a).

Next, referring to Fig. 1137(b) and Fig. 1138, the presentation mode of the third pattern variable presentation executable in this 39th control example will be explained. Fig. 1137(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a delay presentation is started. As shown in Fig. 1137(b), when a delay presentation is started, only the box patterns ZA1 to ZA3 are displayed first while the numeric patterns ZB1 to ZB3 are displayed stationary.

After that, when 0.2 seconds have passed, the statically displayed number symbols ZB1 to ZB3 start to change. By configuring it in this way, the state when the third symbol starts to change can be made different from normal times, making it possible to execute an effect that gives the player a strange feeling. Also, since it is made difficult for the player to know whether or not a delay effect has been executed at the time when each number symbol ZB starts to change, it is made easier for the player to focus on the timing when the third symbol starts to change.

Next, the unfolding effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 1138(a). FIG. 1138(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the unfolding effect. The unfolding effect is a variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed using only a specific third pattern (Z2) out of the three third patterns (Z1 to Z3) that were displayed in a variable manner on the pay line L1.

Specifically, this is a 60-second fluctuation pattern that is executed if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and until 56 seconds have passed since the fluctuation began, a fluctuation performance using three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) is executed. Then, after the three third symbols (Z1-Z3) are displayed in a combination indicating a win (for example, "2.5.7"), the left third symbol Z1 and the right third symbol Z3 move from the valid line L1, and only the middle third symbol Z2 is displayed on the valid line L1. Then, as shown in FIG. 1138(a), the box symbol ZA2 that constitutes part of the middle third symbol Z2 unfolds, the left side ZAa and the right side ZAb are displayed, and the left side symbol ZB2a "5" attached to the left side ZAa and the right side symbol ZB2b "5" attached to the right side ZAb are used to display three "5"s on the valid line L1, and a combination indicating a big win is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the display mode using the three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) is unsuccessful and the display mode indicating a win is stopped, the hope of winning the jackpot remains, so the player can be made to pay attention to the changing presentation until the end. Note that in the diagram shown in FIG. 1138(a), the left third symbol Z1 and the right third symbol Z3 that have moved from the pay line L1 are displayed in the corners of the main display area Dm, but this is not limited to this and they may be hidden.

Next, the content of the horizontal rotation effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 1138(b). FIG. 1138(b) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed during the horizontal rotation effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 39th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1139 and Fig. 1140, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 39th control example will be described. Fig. 1139 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 39th control example. As shown in Fig. 1139, this 39th control example is different from the ROM 222 of the 32nd control example in that a chance mode selection table 222ja is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and the description is omitted.

The chance mode selection table 222ja is a data table that is referenced when determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and is referenced when a variable pattern command corresponding to a 60-second variable time is received from the main control device 110 (see S4503a in FIG. 1142). This chance mode selection table 222ja specifies additional performance modes for each of the box pattern ZA and number pattern ZB that form the third symbol, and when the additional performance mode is determined by referring to the chance mode selection table 222ja, different display commands are determined for the box pattern ZA and number pattern ZB.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1140, when the hit/miss judgment is "hit" and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the mode type of the additional effect mode is specified as "delay", for the range of "50 to 69", the mode type of the additional effect mode is specified as "development", for the range of "70 to 74", the mode type of the additional effect mode is specified as "reverse", for the range of "75 to 79", the mode type of the additional effect mode is specified as "horizontal rotation", and for the range of "80 to 99", the additional effect mode "none" is specified.

In addition, when the result of the win/loss judgment is "miss" and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 29", the additional effect mode type is specified as "delay", when the value is in the range of "30 to 32", the additional effect mode type is specified as "reverse", when the value is in the range of "33, 34", the additional effect mode type is specified as "horizontal rotation", and when the value is in the range of "35 to 99", the additional effect mode "none" is specified.

<Regarding control processing in the 39th control example>
Next, with reference to Fig. 1141 to Fig. 1143, among the control processes executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this 39th control example, the processing contents of the control processes that differ from the above-mentioned 32nd control example will be explained. In this 39th control example, compared to the above-mentioned 32nd control example, a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are changed, and the rest is the same. The explanation of the same processing contents will be omitted.

Specifically, the difference is that instead of the variable performance setting process (S4304), variable performance setting process 10 (S4304a) is executed as the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and that instead of the variable pattern command process (S6405), variable pattern command process 10 (S6405a) is executed as the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

Now, referring to FIG. 1141, the processing contents of variable performance setting process 10 (S4304a) will be explained. FIG. 1141 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable performance setting process 10 (S4304a). As shown in FIG. 1141, variable performance setting process 10 (S4304a) differs from the variable performance setting process (S4304) described above in the processing for determining the presentation mode of the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern variation executed in the normal state.

Specifically, the process of S4401 to S4408 is executed, which is the same as the variable performance setting process (S4304) described above, and if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the performance fixing flag 223t is set to on (S4404: Yes), or if the process of S4408 is completed, the process of normal performance setting is executed (S4401a), and this process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 1142, the processing contents of the normal performance setting process (S4401a) will be explained. FIG. 1142 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal performance setting process (S4401a). In this normal performance setting process (S4401a), processing is executed to determine the chance performance mode as a variation performance corresponding to the first special pattern variation in the normal state.

When the normal performance setting process (S4401a) is executed, first, the performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on the lottery result of the variable and the extracted variable pattern (S4501a), and it is determined whether the determined performance mode is a chance performance mode (S4502a). In this 39th control example, when a variable pattern command for indicating a variable pattern of 60 seconds of variable time (super reach) is output from the main control device 110 as the variable pattern, it is determined that the chance performance mode is present.

If it is determined in the process of S4502a that the chance presentation mode is selected (S4502a: Yes), the presentation mode is determined by referring to the chance mode selection table 222ja (S4503a), and then it is determined whether the determined presentation mode (additional presentation mode) is a number pattern delay (delay) (S4504a). If it is determined that the number pattern delay (delay) is selected (S4504a: Yes), a display number pattern delay command is set to indicate the delay time (0.2 seconds) according to the determined presentation mode (S4505a), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S4504a, if it is determined that there is no numeric pattern delay (delay) (S4504a: No), then it is determined whether the determined presentation mode (additional presentation mode) is a box pattern expansion (deployment) (S4506a), and if it is determined that it is a box pattern expansion (deployment) (S4506a: Yes), a composite pattern command for display corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set (S4507a), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4506a that the determined presentation mode (additional presentation mode) is not box pattern expansion (expansion) (S4506a: No), display commands are set to indicate the presentation modes of the number pattern ZB and box pattern ZA according to the determined presentation mode (S4508a), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1143, the processing contents of the variation pattern command processing 10 (S6405a) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 1143 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variation pattern command processing 10 (S6405a). This variation pattern command processing 10 (S6405a) differs from the variation pattern command processing (S6405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the 32nd control example described above in that when a display command set in the chance presentation mode is received, processing is executed to set information corresponding to the received display command in the display data table, but otherwise it is the same.

When the variable pattern command process 10 (S6405a) is executed, it is first determined whether a numeric pattern delay command has been received (S6501a), and if it is determined that a command has been received (S6501a: Yes), information corresponding to the delay time is set in the variable display data table for the numeric pattern (S6502a). This process makes it possible to delay the timing at which the drawing information for variable display of the numeric pattern ZB is set in the display data table by the delay time (0.2 seconds). In other words, the delayed performance shown in FIG. 1137(b) can be executed simply by executing a process to shift (delay) the timing at which the drawing information for variable display of the numeric pattern ZB is set, without using a display command indicating a variable performance dedicated to the delayed performance and a display data table dedicated to the delayed performance.

After S6502a is completed, it is next determined whether a reverse rotation command has been received (S6503a), and if it is determined that a reverse rotation command has been received (S6503a: Yes), information corresponding to the received command is set in the variable display data table for the box pattern ZA (S6504a), and the process proceeds to S6505a.

In the process of S6505a, it is determined whether a horizontal rotation command has been received (S6505a), and if it is determined that a horizontal rotation command has been received (S6505a: Yes), the variation information (information for displaying the presentation mode of the variation presentation) included in the display variation pattern command is erased, the variation information corresponding to the horizontal rotation presentation is set in the variation display data table (S6506a), and the same processes of S6501 to S6506 as the variation pattern command process (S6405) of the 32nd control example described above are executed, and this process ends.

<Modification of the 39th control example>
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned 39th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1144 to Fig. 1147. In the above-mentioned 39th control example, the third symbols Z1 to Z3 displayed corresponding to the special symbols are formed by a box symbol ZA imitating a box and a number symbol ZB imitating a number, and different variable performance patterns can be determined for the box symbol ZA and the number symbol ZB, thereby enriching the variation of the variable pattern (performance mode) of the third symbol formed by combining the box symbol ZA and the number symbol ZB.

However, in the 39th control example described above, the degree of freedom in the change pattern (presentation mode) of the third symbol is too high, which causes a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to predict the third symbol that will be stopped and displayed by checking the change status of the third symbol.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the change pattern of the box symbol ZA and the change pattern of the number symbol ZB are configured to be related to each other. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the type of the third symbol that will be stopped and displayed during the change display of the third symbol.

This modified example differs from the 39th control example described above in that the contents of the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB are different, and the content of the performance that is executed is different, but otherwise it is the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1144, the box pattern ZA used in this modified example will be explained. FIG. 1144 is an explanatory diagram that explains the box pattern ZA in an expanded form. As shown in FIG. 1144, the box pattern ZA is formed in a six-sided die shape, and each face (first face ZAa, second face ZAb, third face ZAc, fourth face ZAd, fifth face ZAe, sixth face ZAf) is configured to be displayable on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Here, in this modified example, the operation pattern of the rotation operation of the box pattern ZA is predefined, and is configured to be able to execute a first rotation operation (main rotation operation) in which the display surface is repeatedly rotated and displayed in the order of the fourth surface ZAd, the third surface ZAc, the second surface ZAb, and the first surface ZAa, a second rotation operation (secondary rotation operation) in which the display surface is repeatedly rotated and displayed in the order of the sixth surface ZAf, the second surface ZAb, the fifth surface ZAe, and the fourth surface ZAd, a first sideways movement that switches the rotation operation of the box pattern ZA from the main sideways movement to the secondary sideways movement, and a second sideways movement that switches from the secondary sideways movement to the main sideways movement.

As shown in FIG. 1145(a), a first numeric symbol row ZBA is formed on the display surface that is rotated and displayed by the first rotation operation, and a second numeric symbol row ZBB is formed on the display surface that is rotated and displayed by the second rotation operation, and it is possible to determine whether each numeric symbol row is displayed or not depending on the type of rotation operation being performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1145(b), during the main rotation operation, only the first number pattern row ZBA is displayed, and during the sub-rotation operation, only the second number pattern ZBB is displayed.

Now, referring to FIG. 1146, the pattern of the symbol data displayed in each number symbol column will be explained. As described above, in this modified example, a first number symbol column ZBA and a second number symbol column ZBB are formed so as to be perpendicular to the box symbol ZA, and both are configured so that the number symbols can be displayed in a variable manner. The number symbol data displayed in each number symbol column is configured so that it can be determined according to the variable performance being executed.

Specifically, the first pattern data (see FIG. 1146(a)) is assigned four types of number patterns (sea pattern D0, pattern 1 D1, pattern 2 D2, pattern 3 D3) for the first number pattern string ZBA, and four types of number patterns (pattern 4 D4, pattern 5 D5, pattern 6 D6, pattern 7 D7) for the second number pattern string ZBB, and eight types of number patterns (sea pattern D0, pattern 1 D1, pattern 2 D2, pattern 3 D3, pattern 4 D4, pattern 5 D5) for the first number pattern string ZBA. The number pattern data includes at least the number pattern data (see FIG. 1146(b)) in which four types of number patterns (number 1 D1, number 3 D3, number 7 D7, sea pattern D0) are assigned to the second number pattern string ZBB, and the number pattern data used for the current third pattern change is determined according to the change performance to be executed, and the third pattern display combined with the box pattern ZA can be executed.

For example, in the third pattern in which the first pattern data is set, when the box pattern ZA performs the main rotation operation, a variable display is executed with the number patterns "sea. 1. 2. 3" corresponding to each of the four displayable sides, and when the main rotation operation is followed by the first rollover operation and then the secondary rotation operation, a variable display is executed with the number patterns "4. 5. 6. 7" corresponding to the four displayable sides in the secondary rotation operation.

By configuring it in this way, during the 1st variable performance, the third pattern can be displayed in a variable manner while each side of the box pattern ZA is associated with a number pattern, making it easier for the player to predict the type of third pattern that will be displayed in a stopped state before the third pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the third pattern for which the second pattern data is set, the box pattern ZA performs the main rotation operation and all the number patterns of "1.2.3.4.5.6.7. Sea" are displayed in a variable manner. During this time, the number pattern of "1.3.7. Sea" is controlled to vary in the second number pattern row ZBB, which corresponds to the secondary rotation operation, while remaining hidden. The four types of number patterns (1.3.7. Sea) corresponding to this second number pattern ZBB are types of number patterns that are likely to be displayed when the player wins a jackpot advantageous to the player.

Now, referring to FIG. 1147, the content of the variable performance using the second symbol data will be explained. FIG. 1147(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a miss win during the variable performance, and FIG. 1147(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a miss win and then a horizontal rotation performance is executed in which the box symbol ZA is rotated horizontally.

As shown in FIG. 1147(a), the box symbol ZA executes the main rotation operation, and the third symbols are displayed (temporarily displayed) in a combination (scattered pattern) indicating a miss win using each number symbol attached to the first number symbol row ZBA as each third symbol. Note that, since this state is during the special symbol change, the change control of the number symbols is continuously executed for the hidden second number symbol ZBB.

After that, as shown in FIG. 1147(b), a sideways rotation operation is performed on each of the third symbols, and the second number symbol ZBB is displayed. Then, when the second number symbol string ZBB is completely displayed, that is, when the box symbol ZA is displayed in a state where the face that is displayed when the secondary rotation operation is performed can be seen from the front, the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed using that number symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set a presentation pattern that displays the number pattern that is ultimately stopped and displayed using only the main rotation operation, and a presentation pattern that displays the number pattern that is ultimately stopped and displayed using the secondary rotation operation as well, based on the change time of the special pattern change, the number pattern attached to the display surface of the box pattern ZA that is displayed at the start timing of the special pattern change, and the type of number pattern that is ultimately stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent cumbersome processing from being performed to change the rotation speed of the box pattern ZA or the change display speed of the number pattern in order to stop and display any number pattern.

<Modification of the 32nd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1148, the stage change effect is executed during the fixed mode, and the effect screen is described. Fig. 1148 shows the display screen when the stage change effect is executed at the end of the big win game. Regarding this stage change effect, only the differences from the stage change effect in the 32nd control example (see Fig. 948) are described, and the same contents are omitted.

When a jackpot game is played with the fixed mode set, and a stage change effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, a notification of "Chance when the stage changes" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 1148. Here, in this modified example, even if the fixed mode is set, the stage type set after the jackpot game ends is made different from the stage type set before the jackpot game, so that the player can be notified that a reserve sequence will be made.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know whether the stage types set before and after the big win game, i.e., the stage types displayed across the execution period of the big win game presentation, are the same or different, providing the player with the fun of predicting whether a reserved sequence will be executed after the presentation result of the stage change presentation (the stage type after shutters st1 and st2 are not displayed) is displayed.

<40th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1149 to Fig. 1180. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above, the game state is configured to have two types of game states, namely, a normal state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is set to a low probability state of a normal symbol in which the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to execute, and a time-saving state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is set to a high probability state of a normal symbol in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easy to execute, and the time-saving state is configured to be a game state advantageous to the player, and the normal state is configured to be a game state disadvantageous to the player, by configuring the lottery for the second special symbol to be extremely more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol. More specifically, in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a small prize that essentially guarantees a jackpot is about 1/65536, while in the drawing of the second special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a small prize that essentially guarantees a jackpot is about 1/2. In other words, the actual probability of winning a jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol is about 1/300, while in the drawing of the second special symbol, it is about 1/2. Furthermore, when the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is set to an unfavorable normal state with a probability of 40%, whereas when the second special symbol is selected as a direct jackpot, or when a small jackpot is selected by detecting the ball entering the specific area (V gate) 650e3, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state favorable to the player with a probability of 100%. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example is configured to greatly differ in gameplay between the unfavorable normal state and the favorable time-saving state, making it possible to realize a well-balanced gameplay.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example has in common with the 32nd control example a normal state as a game state disadvantageous to the player and a time-saving state as a game state advantageous to the player, but differs in that it is configured to provide multiple advantageous time-saving states with different degrees of advantage. Specifically, it is configured to be able to form a first time-saving state in which the effective probability of a jackpot is high, and a second time-saving state in which the effective probability of a jackpot is lower than that of the first time-saving state and higher than that of the normal state (lower degree of advantage than the first time-saving state and higher degree of advantage than the normal state). Here, the first time-saving state is a game state that can be set as a game state after the end of a jackpot, and the second time-saving state is a game state that can be set when a time-saving pattern is won in a lottery for special patterns (the lottery result is one that transitions to the time-saving state without going through a jackpot), as in the above-mentioned 5th control example, etc. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this 40th control example, instead of being configured to win either a big win or a small win that is substantially a confirmed big win with a 100% probability when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it is configured so that the end condition of the time-saving state can be established without executing the lottery for the second special symbol even once in the time-saving state. More specifically, as the time-saving end condition that triggers the end of the time-saving state, in addition to the first end condition that is established when the combined number of fluctuations of the first special symbol fluctuation (special symbol 1 fluctuation) and the second special symbol fluctuation (special symbol 2 fluctuation) reaches a specified number (any of 10 times to 1000 times) (the specified number of special symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed), and the second end condition that is established when the special symbol indicating that a small win has been won is stopped and displayed, a third end condition that is established based on the number of times the winning game of the normal symbol is executed reaches a specified number (1 time to 1000 times) is set. Due to the existence of this third ending condition, even if right-handed play continues in the advantageous first time-saving state, there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end without the lottery for the second special symbol being executed even once. Note that in the 40th control example, in any of the normal state, the first time-saving state, and the second time-saving state, when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, the normal symbol wins at a rate of 100%, and when the normal symbol wins, the selection rate of the displacement pattern set for the electric role 640a is different for each game state. Specifically, in the normal state, the first displacement pattern is always set, which makes it extremely difficult (impossible) to insert a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, which is the opportunity to draw the advantageous second special pattern; in the first time-saving state, the first displacement pattern is set 20% of the time, and the second displacement pattern is set 80% of the time, which makes it easy to insert a game ball into the second ball entrance 640; and in the second time-saving state, the first displacement pattern is set about 97% of the time, and the second displacement pattern is set about 3% of the time. Therefore, when the second displacement pattern is set in the event of a winning lottery for the normal pattern, a lottery for the second special pattern, which essentially determines a jackpot, can be executed, thereby realizing an extremely novel gameplay in which winning a lottery for the normal pattern that corresponds to the second displacement pattern is essentially synonymous with winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this 40th control example, the central through gate 67c, which is the trigger for drawing the normal pattern, is located at a position (above the first ball entrance 64) through which the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for drawing the first special pattern, must pass before entering the first ball entrance 64, and further, the period from when the drawing for the normal pattern starts to when the winning normal pattern based on the drawing for the normal pattern ends is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special pattern. In other words, every time the drawing for the first special pattern is performed, the drawing for the normal pattern is performed almost simultaneously (just before the drawing for the first special pattern is performed). In addition, a right through gate 67r that triggers the selection of normal symbols is provided at a position where the game ball can pass when the player hits from the right, but the ratio of game balls shot by left hits that pass through the central through gate 67c and the ratio of game balls shot by right hits that pass through the right through gate 67r are configured to be approximately the same. As a result, particularly in the second time-saving state, the selection of normal symbols and the selection of the first special symbols are performed almost simultaneously by left hits, rather than only the selection of normal symbols by right hits, which increases the possibility of winning the jackpot during the second time-saving state. That is, when the player hits the ball from the right in the second time-saving state, the ball wins only when the ball wins the second displacement pattern, which has a probability of winning about 3% in the lottery of the normal symbol (effectively, the lottery of the second special symbol, which guarantees the big win, can be executed), whereas when the player hits the ball from the left, the ball can win the lottery of the first special symbol in addition to winning the lottery of the second displacement pattern in the lottery of the normal symbol, so that the ball can be played by hitting the ball from the left in the second time-saving state. As described above, when the player hits the ball from the left, the game ball that passes through the central through gate 67c always enters the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery of the normal symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously, so that the effective probability of winning the big win per lottery of the first special symbol is high (effectively, the probability of winning the big win of the first special symbol is about 1/320, and the probability of winning the normal symbol for which the second displacement pattern is set is about 1/33), which is the combined probability, can be realized as an extremely novel game. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 40th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above in that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example. In the following, elements that are the same as those in the 32nd control example will be given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations of those elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1149, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1149 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1149, the game board 13 in the 40th control example is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the 32nd control example described above (see FIG. 925) in that a central through gate 67c, which is a drawing opportunity for a normal pattern, is arranged above the first ball entrance 64. As a result, a game ball that is launched by a left hit and enters the first ball entrance 64 always passes through the central through gate 67c just before entering the first ball entrance 64. In other words, if the left hit is continued, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the normal pattern are likely to be performed approximately simultaneously. In particular, in the second time-saving state, the time for which the first special symbol changes is controlled so that the period from when the drawing for the normal symbol starts until the winning of the normal symbol corresponding to the first displacement pattern (the displacement pattern of the electric device 640a that makes it impossible (difficult) to get the game ball into the second ball entrance 640) ends is the same, so that when a left hit is performed with zero reserved balls for both the first special symbol and the normal symbol, the drawing for the normal symbol can be configured to start almost simultaneously each time the drawing for the first special symbol is performed.

Also, as shown in Fig. 1149, the game board 13 in this 40th control example differs from the game board 13 in the 32nd control example described above (see Fig. 925) in that the configuration of the flow path on the right side of the front view of the variable display unit 80 (the right-hand hit flow path) has been changed. More specifically, as shown in Fig. 1149, the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, has been moved upstream of the right through gate 67r in the right-hand hit flow path, and the second ball entrance 640 is decorated to resemble the letter "V." By locating the second ball inlet 640 upstream in the right-hitting flow path and making the distance from the return ball prevention member 68 to the second ball inlet 640 relatively short, when a normal pattern is hit and a second displacement pattern is set that can cause the game ball to enter the second ball inlet 640, the time from the right hit to the electric device 640a that has been displaced to a protruding state (open state) due to the hit of the normal pattern can be shortened. Therefore, since the game ball can be more reliably admitted into the second ball entrance 640 during the period (open period) when the electric role device 640a is set to the protruding state (open state), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an extremely disadvantageous event for the player in which, even if a normal pattern corresponding to the second displacement pattern that essentially guarantees a jackpot is won in the lottery for the normal pattern in the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state, the game ball cannot be admitted into the second ball entrance 640 during the open period of the electric role device 640a, and the player loses the opportunity to win the jackpot (the opportunity to draw the lottery for the second special pattern that essentially guarantees a jackpot).

In addition, in this 40th control example, the winning of the normal pattern is ended based on the entry of one game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of a winning game of the normal pattern. Also, the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is configured to be only one, as in the above-mentioned 32nd control example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent multiple game balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 during one opening period by the second displacement pattern, and even if multiple game balls enter, it is possible to configure so that the number of reserved balls increases by only one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent multiple reserved balls of the second special pattern, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, from being obtained at once, which would be excessively advantageous for the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1149, in this 40th control example, instead of the through gate 67 in the 32nd control example, a right through gate 67r decorated with a letter "GO" is provided. Also, the arrangement of the game nails on the left side of the right through gate 67r when viewed from the front is changed from the game board 13 in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 925), and is configured so that the game ball launched by hitting from the right is relatively difficult to enter the right through gate 67r compared to the board configuration in the 32nd control example. More specifically, a game ball launched by hitting from the right and passing in front of the electric role 640a in the closed state (buried state) collides with the game nail group YK1, collides with the game nail group YK2, or flows down the gap between the game nail group YK1 and the game nail group YK2 to the downstream side (in the direction where it cannot pass through the right through gate 67r). In order for the game ball that collides with the game nail group YK1 to pass through the right through gate 67r, it must bounce to the right side as seen from the front and collide with the game nail group YK2, then bounce to the right side as seen from the front due to the impact of the collision and collide with the game nail YK3, then bounce to the right side as seen from the front due to the impact of the collision and collide with the game nail YK4, and then bounce to the right side as seen from the front due to the collision. If the flight distance is insufficient or the rebound direction is to the left as seen from the front when colliding with any of the game nails, the ball will flow downstream through the gap between the game nail group YK1 and the game nail group YK2, the gap between the game nail group YK2 and the game nail group YK3, or the gap between the game nail YK3 and the game nail YK4, and will be unable to pass through the right through gate 67r.

Similarly, the game ball that first collides with the game nail group YK2 bounces to the right when viewed from the front and collides with the game nail YK3, and the impact of the collision causes it to bounce to the right when viewed from the front and collide with the game nail YK4. If it bounces to the right when viewed from the front due to the collision, it can pass through the right through gate 67r, but if it flows downstream through the gap between the game nail group YK2 and the game nail group YK3, or the gap between the game nail YK3 and the game nail YK4, it cannot pass through the right through gate 67r. With this board configuration, the rate at which game balls shot by right hits pass through the right through gate 67r is approximately the same as the rate at which game balls shot by left hits pass through the central through gate 67 (roughly one ball passes for every 10 to 15 game balls shot).

In the 40th control example, the proportion of game balls passing through the through gate (center through gate 67c or right through gate 67r) is approximately the same for left and right hits, but this is not limited to this. For example, the proportion of game balls shot by right hits that pass through the right through gate 67r may be higher than the proportion of game balls shot by left hits that pass through the left through gate 67c (for example, one game ball passes through the right through gate 67r for every two game balls shot by right hits). When configured in this way, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to select a game method in the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. In other words, when a left hit is performed in the time-saving state, the frequency of drawing the normal symbol is low (about once every 10 to 15 game balls are shot by a left hit), while the first special symbol is drawn every time the normal symbol is drawn, so that not only will the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern be a winning symbol in the normal symbol drawing, but the first special symbol can also be expected to be a big win. On the other hand, when a right hit is performed in the time-saving state, the frequency of drawing the normal symbol is high (about once every two game balls are shot by a right hit), so that the efficiency of drawing the normal symbol in the time-saving state can be increased, while the first special symbol is not drawn, so that a gameplay in which the possibility of winning a big win during the time-saving state is reduced can be realized. Thus, depending on the gameplay method during the time-saving state (whether to hit from the left or right), a very innovative gameplay can be realized in which the player can choose between a gameplay in which the probability of hitting a jackpot during the time-saving state is relatively high but the lottery efficiency for normal symbols is poor (it takes a relatively long time to complete the time-saving state and a relatively large number of wasted balls occurs), and a gameplay in which the lottery efficiency for normal symbols is good but the probability of hitting a jackpot during the time-saving state is relatively low (the jackpot expectation decreases by the jackpot probability of 1/320 for the first special symbol). Thus, each player can select a gameplay that matches their own preferences, so that a gameplay that suits the tastes of more players can be realized, and the interest of players in the game can be further increased.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1149, on the downstream side of the right through gate 67r, a plurality of game nails are used to form a slope from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, so that all game balls that are shot by hitting from the right and do not enter the second ball entry port 640 can be guided to the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650. By configuring in this way, when a lottery for the second special pattern is executed and a small prize is won, and the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the game ball hit from the right can be surely made to enter the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650, so that even if a small prize that essentially guarantees a big prize is won, the game ball cannot be made to enter the V winning port 650a during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1, and the opportunity to win the big prize is lost. This can suppress the occurrence of an extremely disadvantageous event for the player.

Next, referring to Fig. 1150 to Fig. 1155, the characteristic effects in the 40th control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 1150(a), the effect mode in the case where a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (a lottery result that directly grants a time-saving state without going through a jackpot) occurs. Here, as described above, the second time-saving state is a game state in which a win (normal pattern win B) in which the electric role 640a is opened in the second displacement pattern that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of about 3% when a normal pattern is drawn is won. In other words, compared to the normal state in which the normal pattern win B cannot be won (only the first displacement pattern win (normal pattern win A) that does not allow the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 can be won), it is a game state in which the degree of advantage is increased by being able to draw the second special pattern that at least substantially determines the jackpot. In the normal state, the probability of winning a jackpot when playing with the left hand is about 1/320 each time the first special symbol is drawn, and the ratio of the first time-saving state being set as the game state after the jackpot is set to 50%, so the possibility of transitioning to the first time-saving state each time the first special symbol is drawn is about 1/500 in total. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol drawing when playing with the left hand is about 1/320, the probability of winning the normal symbol B that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the normal symbol drawing is about 1/33, and since the normal symbol drawing is performed each time the first special symbol drawing is performed, the actual probability of winning a jackpot each time the first special symbol drawing is performed is about 1/29.8. In addition, if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, even if the jackpot is the first special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first time-saving state, so the probability of transitioning to the first time-saving state each time a lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the second time-saving state is approximately 1 in 29.8 in total. Therefore, the second time-saving state forms an advantageous state in which the possibility of transitioning to the first time-saving state is significantly increased compared to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 1150(a), when a variable display effect corresponding to the winning of the time-saving pattern is executed, a variable display effect is executed in which a special third pattern indicating that the time-saving pattern has been won is displayed in the seed display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1150(a), after a reach effect is generated by displaying the third pattern imitating the same number in the left pattern row and the right pattern row, a variable display effect is executed in which a special pattern with the word "Chance Time" is displayed in the middle pattern row. Also, at the timing of the variable stop, the word "Chance Time GET!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a state more favorable than the normal state (a second time-saving state in which both the actual probability of a jackpot and the transition rate to the first time-saving state are significantly increased) is set.

As shown in FIG. 1150(a), the upper right portion of the third pattern display device 81 is an area where identification information (fourth pattern) is displayed to show the lottery status of the special pattern (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing), and the lottery result), and a small display area Dm1 is formed for displaying the fourth pattern (special pattern 1 fourth pattern) to show the lottery status of the first special pattern (special pattern 1). In addition, a small display area Dm9 is formed in the lower right portion of the sub-display area Ds to display the reserved pattern corresponding to the first special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 1150(b), the chance time waiting effect executed after the winning of the time-saving pattern is notified (after the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed) will be described. This chance time waiting effect is mainly an effect for notifying the number of time-saving times according to the type of the winning time-saving pattern. In this chance time waiting effect, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed at the bottom left of the seed display area Dm, and above it, patterns 811a to 811d are displayed in a rotating manner, indicating the number of times the special pattern will be drawn (the number of times the winning game of the normal pattern will be executed) until the second time-saving state set this time ends. Further above that, the words "~Chance time waiting~" are displayed. Furthermore, the words "Decide the number of chance times!!" are displayed in the small display area Ds. These display contents can make the player think as if the number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state has not yet been set. In other words, the player can think as if the second time-saving state has not yet started (is waiting). In fact, the game has transitioned to the second time-saving state at the start of this chance time waiting performance, and the display of the first special symbol that was reserved at the end of the display of the time-saving symbol winning (the time when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed. The display of the remaining reserved symbols at the time of the time-saving symbol winning is executed in a small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm in a manner that is relatively difficult for the player to see (a narrow display area). The reserved symbols are also executed in a small display area Dm9 that is relatively difficult for the player to see (a narrow display area). In other words, the game is configured so that the player is unlikely to recognize that the lottery for the first special symbol is being executed based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol (the second time-saving state has already started). This is to prevent the player from starting to hit the left hand if it is determined that the second time-saving state has already started.

Here, if, after the transition to the second time-saving state, the player hits the ball to the left while there are still balls remaining with the first special pattern that were already reserved before the transition, there is a possibility that the ball will pass through the central through gate 67c and enter the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the first special pattern based on the remaining reserved balls is being executed. In this case, although the drawing of the normal pattern starts immediately, the drawing of the first special pattern based on the new starting winning at the first ball entrance 64 does not start until all the reserved balls have been consumed, so there is a possibility that the variable display period of the first special pattern and the variable display period of the normal pattern (and the winning game period of the normal pattern) will not be aligned. As described above, in the second time-saving state, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the normal symbol are started almost simultaneously every time, so that the actual probability of winning when the drawing of the first special symbol is executed is higher than in the normal state, and as for the performance mode, in the variable display performance of the first special symbol, a performance is set that takes into account the result of the drawing of the normal symbol that started almost simultaneously (started immediately before) with the drawing of the first special symbol. In other words, when the drawing of the first special symbol is a big win or the drawing result of the normal symbol is the drawing result corresponding to the normal winning symbol B, a variable display performance of a performance mode in which the third symbol imitating (attached) the same number is aligned is executed, and when the drawing of the first special symbol is a miss and the drawing result of the normal symbol is the normal winning symbol A, a variable display performance of a performance mode in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a miss combination is executed. In such a situation, if the timing of the lottery start of the first special symbol and the timing of the lottery start of the normal symbol are misaligned, it may be difficult to execute a variable display performance based on the lottery result of the normal symbol during the variable display period of the first special symbol. Therefore, in this 40th control example, by executing the chance time waiting performance, it is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult for the player to shoot the game ball by pretending that the second time-saving state has not started, and a situation in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol become 0 during the execution of this chance time waiting performance is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to start left-handed shooting after the reserved balls of the first special symbol become a variable stop state of 0 in the second time-saving state, so that it is possible to suppress the timing of the lottery start of the first special symbol and the lottery start of the normal symbol from being misaligned in the second time-saving state. Therefore, in the variable display performance of the first special symbol, it is possible to reliably set a variable display mode that takes into account the lottery result of the normal symbol executed immediately before the lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

In the 40th control example, the second time-saving state is terminated when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches a specified number (first termination condition) and when the number of times the winning game of the normal symbol is executed reaches a specified number (third termination condition), and the specified number of times is different. Specifically, the specified number of times for the first termination condition is four times more than the specified number of times for the third termination condition. By configuring in this way, even if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is between 0 and 4 at the time the second time-saving state is set, if a jackpot is not won, the second time-saving state can be reliably continued until the number of times the winning game of the normal symbol is executed reaches the specified number. In other words, even if multiple reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed during the chance time standby performance, the number of times that the normal symbol can be drawn during the second time-saving state does not decrease, so the number of times that the normal symbol draws, which are substantially more likely to result in a jackpot than the first special symbol draws, can be made common regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the likelihood of a jackpot in the second time-saving state. Note that in the following explanation, the number of times that the time-saving state is in the second time-saving state refers to the number of times that a winning game with a normal symbol is played that satisfies the fourth ending condition.

Returning to FIG. 1150(b), the explanation will be continued. The symbols (icons) displayed by rotating during the chance time waiting performance are, for example, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811a with the character "10 times" attached, which suggests that at least 10 times of time-saving have been given, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811b with the character "30 times" attached, which suggests that at least 30 times of time-saving have been given, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811c with the character "continue" attached, which suggests that the chance time waiting performance will continue, and a suggestive symbol (icon) 811d with the character "congratulations" attached, which suggests a big win. In addition to these, a suggestive symbol (icon) with the character "100 times" attached, which suggests that 100 times or more of time-saving have been given, and a suggestive symbol (icon) with the character "∞" attached, which suggests that the second time-saving state will continue until the next big win, are also provided. Depending on the type of time-saving symbol that was won (the number of time-saving turns), the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, and the lottery results for the first special symbol, a lottery is held to determine which type of suggestive symbol (icon) will be set as the suggestive symbol (icon) 811a-811d.

When a specific period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the chance time waiting effect, as shown in FIG. 1151(a), an effect is executed in which the rabbit character 801 hits one of the suggestive symbols (icons) 811a-811d, and it is announced that the player has acquired the suggestive content indicated by the hit suggestive symbol. The example in FIG. 1151(a) illustrates an example in which an effect is executed in which the suggestive symbol 811a with the words "10 times" on it is hit. In this case, the words "GET 10 times!! Hit left!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds, allowing the player to easily understand that the "10 times" displayed on the suggestive symbol 811a has been granted as the number of times to shorten the time.

Figure 1151(b) is a diagram showing the presentation mode when a jackpot is won in a lottery for the first special symbol during the execution of the chance time standby presentation. In other words, it is a diagram showing the presentation mode when a jackpot is included among the reserved balls of the first special symbol that were already reserved at the time the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. As shown in Figure 1151(b), when a jackpot is won with the remaining reserved balls of the first special symbol, a presentation is executed in which the rabbit character 801 hits the suggestive symbol (icon) 811d with the word "Congratulations". Also, the words "GET jackpot!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that he or she has won a jackpot.

In the 40th control example, the time for the first special symbol to change in the second time-saving state is fixed to 5 seconds. In conjunction with this, the effect of selecting one suggestive symbol (the rabbit character 801 punches) in the chance time waiting effect is also fixed to 5 seconds. Then, if there is one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, a 5-second effect is executed in which a suggestive symbol with the word "continue" is selected, and in the next change, a new combination of four suggestive symbols is displayed and a 5-second effect is executed again in which one suggestive symbol is selected from among them. Then, if the lottery result of the special symbol based on the remaining reserved is a miss and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, a 5-second effect is executed in which one suggestive symbol is selected, suggesting the number of time-saving times according to the type of the time-saving symbol this time, and the start of the second time-saving state (chance time) is announced. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is 0 at the time of winning the time-saving symbol, a 5-second performance is also executed at the start of the second time-saving state, in which a suggestive symbol of 1 is selected, indicating the number of time-saving times for this second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to draw the attention of players who wish to know the number of time-saving times this time to the performance content of the chance time standby performance, so that it is difficult to launch game balls until the chance time standby performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing of the lottery for the first special symbol from being out of sync with the timing of the lottery for the normal symbol.

Here, in the 40th control example, the degree of advantage is almost the same between starting left-handed play after consuming all reserved balls of the first special pattern without firing game balls during the chance time waiting performance, and starting left-handed play immediately after the start of the chance time waiting performance and saving new reserved balls of the first special pattern while the reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed (waiting for the reserved balls to be consumed increases the number of times the first special pattern is drawn during the time-saving state, making it slightly more advantageous). That is, in the 40th control example, as described above, a termination condition (third termination condition) is set that is established based on the number of times the winning game of the normal pattern has been executed reaching a specified number, and in the chance time (second time-saving state), the third termination condition is established before the termination condition (first termination condition) that is established based on the number of times the special pattern has been drawn reaching a specified number, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern at the time of transition to the chance time. In other words, the number of times the special symbol is drawn until the first end condition is met is greater than the number of times the winning game of the normal symbol is executed until the third end condition is met, by the number of times corresponding to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls (4 balls). By configuring in this way, even if the left hand shot is started after all reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed in the second time-saving state, or even if the left hand shot is started immediately after the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state can be continued until the number of winning games of the normal symbol corresponding to the third end condition is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely disadvantaged by losing the number of winning games of the normal symbol, which has a high actual probability of winning. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who continues to pay attention to the chance time waiting performance without firing the game ball from suffering a loss, and a preferable performance mode can be realized.

Next, referring to Fig. 1152 to Fig. 1154(a), the presentation mode when a normal pattern corresponding to the second displacement pattern that essentially guarantees a jackpot is won during chance time (second time-saving state) will be described. First, Fig. 1152(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when a normal pattern lottery and a first special pattern lottery are executed almost simultaneously during chance time (second time-saving state), and a normal pattern lottery corresponding to the second displacement pattern (long opening that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is won in the normal pattern lottery.

Here, in this 40th control example, when the chance time (second time-saving state) is entered, a performance in which a rabbit-like character 801 moves onto a cloud is executed in the main display area Dm, as in the chance time in other control examples, and thereafter, a performance in which the character 801 performs various actions on the cloud is executed until the chance time ends. Also, as shown in FIG. 1152(a), in the chance time (second time-saving state) in this 40th control example, a third pattern variable display performance is executed in the center part of the main display area Dm, and a fourth pattern variable display performance is executed in the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. The fourth pattern variable display performance is executed in synchronization with the special pattern variable display executed in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, but the third pattern variable display is not necessarily executed in synchronization with the special pattern variable display. That is, in this 40th control example, if a normal symbol win B, which is set to long opening (second displacement pattern) in the normal symbol lottery during the chance time, is won, the result of the normal symbol lottery can be shown by the variable display of the third symbol. In this case, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in accordance with the variable time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 1152(a), the words "High Probability" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, and the words "Hit from the Left" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm. In addition, a display indicating the number of remaining lottery draws until the end of the chance time (second time-saving state) is displayed in the small display area Dm7 formed below the small display area Dm4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that even during the advantageous chance time, it is okay to play using a game method in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by hitting from the left. In addition, the player can understand that the actual probability of a jackpot is high in the chance time (second time-saving state), and how long the state in which the actual probability of a jackpot is high will continue.

In the chance time, if a normal pattern (normal pattern B) set to long opening (second displacement pattern) is won in the lottery of the normal pattern, first, a variable display performance is executed in the third pattern display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display period of the first special pattern that started almost simultaneously with the variable display of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B (immediately after the variable display corresponding to the normal pattern B started), as shown in FIG. 1152(a), a variable display performance is executed in which the third pattern imitating the same number is stopped and displayed for the right pattern row, the center pattern row, and the left pattern row. Also, when the pattern stops, the word "Bonus Confirmed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as shown in FIG. 1152(a). In other words, a pseudo-winning performance of a variable display mode that notifies of a normal pattern B in a manner that is difficult to distinguish (the same) as the variable display performance executed when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special pattern is executed.

In this pseudo-winning performance, the third symbol imitating an even number symbol is always displayed. This is because when the normal winning B is won, it is only determined that the state in which the lottery for the second special symbol, which essentially determines the big win, can be executed (the electric role 640a is opened for a relatively long time (e.g., 2.5 seconds)) is transitioned to, and the type of big win to be won cannot be specified (the ball has not entered the second ball entry means 640, which is the trigger for the lottery for the second special symbol). Therefore, if a variable display performance in a performance mode in which a number (e.g., "7") that is generally used to mean a high degree of advantage is lined up is executed, if a big win or small win of a type with a low degree of advantage is subsequently won in the lottery for the second special symbol, it may confuse the player. Therefore, in this 40th control example, a variable display performance in which a third symbol imitating an even number that is generally used to mean a relatively low degree of advantage is lined up is executed in the pseudo-winning performance. This configuration helps prevent players from becoming confused.

When the pseudo winning performance ends and the opening period of the normal winning B starts, the first suggestion performance is executed, which can suggest to the player that the game ball should be entered into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right during the opening period of the electric role 640a based on the normal winning B. The performance mode of this first suggestion performance will be described with reference to FIG. 1152(b). FIG. 1152(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 during the execution of the first suggestion performance. As shown in FIG. 1152(b), when the first suggestion performance is executed, the display content of the small display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the third pattern display device 81 is switched to the word "Hit to the right". In addition, the third pattern that was confirmed and displayed in the previous variable display performance (pseudo winning performance) is displayed in a reduced size in the display area HR10. In addition, an arrow image YG that imitates a right-facing arrow is formed below the display area HR10, and the word "Aim to the right" is displayed on the arrow image YG. Furthermore, below the arrow image YG, a time gauge ga2 is displayed to indicate the remaining time of the period (long opening period) during which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 in the normal winning B. The display mode of this time gauge ga2 is formed from a remaining period display ga2a to indicate the remaining period of the opening period of the normal winning B and an elapsed period display ga2b to indicate the elapsed period, and the time gauge ga2 is displayed variably according to the passage of time so that the proportion of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the proportion of the remaining period display ga2a decreases with each passing hour since the round play of the normal winning B was executed.

As shown in FIG. 1152(b), while the first suggestion performance is being performed, a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular small display area Dm6 is formed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, in which an image simulating the second ball entrance 640 and its surrounding area on the game board 13 is displayed, and the words "Aim for the V above with a right hit" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot can be won by hitting the game ball to the right into the second ball entrance 640, which is decorated with a "V" symbol, and the second variable winning device 650, which is located upstream, while the remaining time display ga2a remains.

In the 40th control example, the first suggestion effect is executed in synchronization with the opening period of the normal winning B, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first suggestion effect may be started a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) before the opening period of the normal winning B begins. By configuring in this way, the player can start hitting to the right before the opening period based on the normal winning B begins, so that the game ball can be more reliably delivered to the electric device 640a during the opening period, and the game ball can be more reliably delivered to the second ball entrance 640.

When the player hits the ball to the right in the first suggestion effect (the effect suggesting that the player aims for the upper V), the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and as a variable display effect of the second special symbol to show the lottery result of the second special symbol, for example, a promotion effect as shown in FIG. 1153 is executed. In this promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 1153(a), first, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol (in the example of FIG. 1153(a), the third symbol imitating the number "2") that was confirmed and displayed when the normal winning symbol B was won is displayed again, and an effect is executed in which the third symbol imitating the number "7" descends from above the third symbol. In addition, the words "Promote the symbol!" are displayed in the display area HR10, and the words "Promotion Chance!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the third symbol that resembles an even number will be replaced (promoted) by the third symbol that resembles the number "7," and that a favorable type of jackpot game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

As mentioned above, when the second special symbol is drawn, either a small win or a big win is won, and when a small win is won, the game ball can be easily put into the specific area 650e3 by simply continuing to hit the right hand during the small win game, so that the big win is essentially confirmed at the time when the second special symbol is drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win, or if the small win is a small win and the small win type is determined to be small win A40 and the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A40, the big win C40 with the most rounds (10 rounds) is determined as the big win type. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the small win type is determined to be small win B40 and the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B40, the big win D40 with the fewest rounds (3 rounds) is determined as the big win type. In the promotion presentation, if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win A40, the presentation mode is set to one in which promotion is successful (the third symbol that resembles an even number is replaced with the third symbol that resembles a "7"), whereas if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win B, the presentation mode is set to one in which promotion is unsuccessful.

Figure 1153 (b) is a diagram showing the performance mode when a promotion performance mode in which promotion is successful is executed. As shown in Figure 1153 (b), in the promotion performance mode in which promotion is successful, a performance is executed in which the third pattern imitating an even number is knocked away by the third pattern imitating the number "7" that descends from above the third pattern imitating an even number and is replaced by the third pattern imitating the number "7". In addition, the words "Promotion successful!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that he or she has won the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds (either a jackpot in the lottery for the second special pattern or jackpot A40).

Although not shown in the figure, if the second special symbol lottery results in a small prize B40 with a low degree of advantage (if the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3, the small prize D40 with the fewest number of rounds will be won), a presentation is executed in which the third symbol imitating the number "7" is unable to knock away the third symbol imitating an even number and is instead bounced back and blown upward. This allows the player to easily understand that they have failed to be promoted (the small prize D40 with a low degree of advantage will be won).

If the player wins a small prize in the lottery for the second special symbol, the second suggestion performance is executed, which can suggest to the player that the game ball should be entered into the V prize opening 650a by hitting the ball to the right during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable prize-winning device 650 based on the small prize. The performance mode of this second suggestion performance will be described with reference to FIG. 1154(a). FIG. 1154(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 during the execution of the second suggestion performance. As shown in FIG. 1154(a), when the second suggestion performance is executed, the third symbol that was confirmed and displayed in the previous variable display performance (promotion performance) is displayed in a reduced size in the display area HR10. Also, as in the first suggestion performance (Aim Up V performance), an arrow image YG that imitates a right-facing arrow is formed below the display area HR10, and the word "Aim Right" is displayed on the arrow image YG. Furthermore, below the arrow image YG, a time gauge ga2 is displayed to indicate the remaining time during which the game ball can enter the V winning hole 650a in the small win. The display mode of this time gauge ga2 is formed from a remaining period display ga2a to indicate the remaining period of the small win opening period and an elapsed period display ga2b to indicate the elapsed period, and the time gauge ga2 is displayed variably according to the passage of time so that the proportion of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the proportion of the remaining period display ga2a decreases as time passes since the start of the small win game.

As shown in FIG. 1154(a), while the second suggestion performance is being performed, a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular small display area Dm6 is formed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, in which an image simulating the second variable winning device 650 and its surrounding area on the game board 13 is displayed, and the words "Aim for the V below with a right hit" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot can be won by hitting the game ball to the right into the second ball entrance 640, which is decorated with a "V"-like decoration, and the second variable winning device 650, which is located downstream, while the remaining time display ga2a remains.

Here, we will explain the overall transition of the presentation mode during Chance Time (second time-saving state), taking into account the presentation mode during Chance Time (second time-saving state) that has been explained so far (presentation mode explained with reference to Figures 1150 to 1154(a)). Figure 1156 is a time chart showing the transition of the presentation mode from before the transition to Chance Time until after the big win is won.

As shown in Figure 1156, when the time-saving pattern (sudden time-saving) is won in the lottery for the first special pattern in the normal state, an 80-second time-saving pattern change accompanied by a super reach is executed, and finally a special pattern with the words "Chance Time" is displayed stationary on the middle pattern row (see Figure 1150 (a)). When the stationary display period (confirmed display period) of this time-saving pattern change ends, the game state changes from the normal state to the second time-saving state. When the transition to the second time-saving state is made, first a chance time waiting performance (see Figure 1151 (b) and Figure 1152) is executed. This Chance Time waiting effect is an effect that is executed for a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 20 seconds, and as described above, it is executed to execute an effect that notifies the player of the number of times this Chance Time (second time-saving state) will continue (the third ending condition that is determined by the number of times winning games with normal symbols are executed), in order to draw the player's attention to the content of the effect, stop the game (firing of game balls), and consume the reserved balls of the first special symbol that were already reserved at the time of transition to the second time-saving state.

By depleting the reserved balls of the first special symbol during the execution of the chance time standby performance, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be set to 0 at the end of the chance time standby performance, and when the player then hits the ball to the left to enter the first ball entrance 64 and executes the lottery for the first special symbol, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are started almost simultaneously each time (the lottery for the first special symbol is started immediately after the lottery for the normal symbol is started). Therefore, in the variable display performance of the first special symbol, a performance mode can be set that takes into account the lottery result of the normal symbol that was started immediately before. As described above, in the second time-saving state, the rate at which the normal symbol winning B, which is advantageous when the normal symbol wins (effectively confirms the jackpot), is selected is higher than in the normal state (increases from 0% to 3%), so that the behavior is essentially equivalent to the lottery for the jackpot being drawn at a rate of more than 3% each time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. That is, in Chance Time (second time-saving state), even though the game progresses by hitting the left button to draw the first special symbol in the same way as in the normal state, a favorable game state is created in which the apparent probability of winning a jackpot is dramatically increased (the actual probability of winning a jackpot increases from approximately 1/320 to approximately 1/30).

As shown in FIG. 1156, when the chance time standby effect ends, the rabbit character 801 performs various actions on the clouds, and the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, switching to a chance time effect in which an effect indicating the likelihood of a jackpot is executed. In the chance time effect, if the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot, or if the normal symbol B is selected as a normal symbol in the normal symbol selection started immediately before the first special symbol selection, a variable display effect is executed in which the third symbols that resemble the same numbers are displayed in a variable display manner, and if the first special symbol is selected as a miss and the normal symbol A is selected as a normal symbol in the normal symbol selection started immediately before the first special symbol selection corresponding to the miss, a variable display effect is executed in which the third symbols are displayed in a missing combination.

Here, the correspondence between the change time of the first special symbol in the chance time and the change time of the normal symbol will be explained with reference to FIG. 1157. FIG. 1157 shows the correspondence between the change time of the first special symbol and the change time of the normal symbol when the game ball enters the through gate 67 and the first ball entrance 64 almost simultaneously in a state where neither the change display of the first special symbol nor the change display of the normal symbol (nor the change display of the second special symbol) is being executed. FIG. 1157(a) shows the correspondence when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a normal symbol B (a normal symbol with a short opening that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), and FIG. 1157(b) shows the correspondence when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a normal symbol A (a normal symbol with a long opening that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640).

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1157(a), when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the chance time (second time-saving state), a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set. This 5-second fluctuation time is set as a fixed fluctuation time regardless of whether the lottery result is a big win or a miss. On the other hand, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 1157(a), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, which starts almost simultaneously with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the chance time, is set to 1 second. Note that in FIG. 1157(a), for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol are shown as if they were started at exactly the same time, but in reality, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts slightly (for example, around 0.05 seconds) earlier. Since the lottery for the normal symbol is executed slightly before the start of the lottery for the first special symbol (the central through gate 67c is located upstream of the first ball entrance 64), a performance mode (variable display mode) that also takes into account the lottery result of the normal symbol executed immediately before is set as the variable display performance of the first special symbol. Figure 1157 (a) illustrates the case where a normal winning A, which is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640, is won, so if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a miss, a variable display mode in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a miss combination is set as the variable display performance indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol, and if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, a variable display mode in which the third symbol imitating the same number is aligned is set as the variable display mode indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1157(a), when the normal pattern variation time (1 second) has elapsed, the normal pattern win A starts. When the normal pattern win A starts, an opening period of 1.5 seconds (period during which the electric role 640a is closed) is set, followed by an opening period of 0.1 seconds, and then an ending period of 2.4 seconds (period during which the electric role 640a is closed) is set. As a result, the ending period of the normal pattern win A ends almost simultaneously with the timing at which the variable display of the first special pattern ends. In other words, a state in which a new lottery for the normal pattern can be started is formed almost simultaneously with the state in which a new lottery for the first special pattern can be started, so that even in the lottery for the first special pattern from the next time onwards, the lottery for the normal pattern can be started almost simultaneously, and a performance mode that takes into account the lottery result of the normal pattern can be set as the performance mode of the variable display performance of the first special pattern. In other words, a novel presentation mode can be realized in which the variable display performance executed each time during the chance time can be set to a variable display mode that takes into account both the lottery results of the normal symbol and the lottery results of the first special symbol, thereby realizing a more suitable presentation mode. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1157(b), the relationship between the first special symbol's change time and the normal symbol's change time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a normal symbol B will be described. As shown in the upper and middle rows of FIG. 1157(b), the first special symbol's change time and the normal symbol's change time are the same as those in the case of a normal symbol A (see FIG. 1157(a)). In other words, the first special symbol's change display is set to a change pattern with a change time of 5 seconds, and the normal symbol's change time, which starts almost simultaneously (immediately before) with the first special symbol's change display, is set to 1 second. Note that, in the example of FIG. 1157(b), a case is illustrated in which a normal symbol B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, is won in the lottery of the normal symbol, so that the change display mode in which the third symbol imitating the same number is aligned is set as the change display performance of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1157(b), when the normal pattern change time (1 second) has elapsed, the normal pattern win B starts. When the normal pattern win B starts, after a 1.5-second opening period (the closing period of the electric role 640a) is set, a 2.5-second opening period is set, and the ending period is set to approximately 0, and the normal pattern win B ends. As a result, the normal pattern win B ends almost simultaneously with the timing at which the variable display of the first special pattern ends. In other words, regardless of whether it is a normal pattern win A or a normal pattern win B, a state in which a new lottery for the normal pattern can be started is formed almost simultaneously with the state in which a new lottery for the first special pattern can be started, so that even in the lottery for the first special pattern from the next time onwards, the lottery for the normal pattern can be started almost simultaneously, and a performance mode that takes into account the lottery result of the normal pattern can be set as the performance mode of the variable display performance of the first special pattern. In other words, a novel presentation mode can be realized in which the variable display performance executed each time during the chance time can be set to a variable display mode that takes into account both the lottery results of the normal symbol and the lottery results of the first special symbol, thereby realizing a more suitable presentation mode. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 40th control example, even if the player wins the normal winning B during the chance time, which essentially determines the big win, the period from when the normal winning B starts to change to when the normal winning B ends is made to match the time when the first special winning pattern changes (5 seconds), but this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of the normal winning B, the normal winning pattern may be extended (for example, 3.5 seconds) or the opening period may be extended (for example, 4 seconds) so that the opening period of the normal pattern starts after 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, the variable display performance can be executed using the entire 5-second variable period, so the performance mode can be made more diverse. In detail, in the configuration of the 40th control example described above, when the player wins the normal winning B, the opening period based on the normal winning B starts about 2.5 seconds after the first special winning pattern starts to change, so that only 2.5 seconds can be secured as the performance period of the variable display performance. In other words, regardless of the result of the lottery for the normal symbol, the control was adopted to end the winning of the normal symbol almost at the same time as the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. This is the result of consideration to ensure that the game playability of drawing the first special symbol and the normal symbol almost simultaneously can be realized again during the remaining chance time, even if the game ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 because the player does not hit the right hand during the normal symbol winning B and the normal symbol winning B ends as it is. In other words, if the lottery for the first special symbol ends in 5 seconds, while the normal symbol winning B continues for 5 seconds or more, the variable display of the next first special symbol will start during the execution of the normal symbol winning B, and it will be difficult to draw the first special symbol and the normal symbol almost at the same time from then on. This is the purpose of preventing the occurrence of such an event. However, since it is considered that almost no player would continue to hit left despite winning the normal winning B, ignoring the suggestion of the first suggestion performance (see FIG. 1152(b)), it is considered that no major problem would arise if the period from when the normal winning pattern based on the normal winning A starts to when the normal winning A ends is matched to the time of the first special pattern change. Therefore, by configuring the opening period of the normal winning B to start at least 5 seconds after the start of the normal pattern change, it is possible to configure the performance to use the full 5 seconds of the first special pattern change time to suggest whether or not the normal winning B will be achieved (whether the electric role 640a will be long-opened). This allows the performance to be set more suitably.

Returning to FIG. 1156, we will continue with the explanation. When a normal winning B (a normal winning in which the electric device 640a is set to be long-opened for 2.5 seconds) is won during chance time (second time-saving state), a pseudo winning variation effect (see FIG. 1152(a)) is executed as a variation display mode in the first special symbol variation display that starts immediately after the start of the variation display of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal winning B. As described above, this pseudo winning variation effect is an effect mode in which third symbols imitating the same numbers are stopped and displayed in the right symbol row, center symbol row, and left symbol row, respectively, just as in the case of a jackpot winning in the special symbol drawing. In other words, it is an effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from a jackpot winning in the special symbol drawing.

As shown in FIG. 1156, when the pseudo winning variation effect ends, the Aim for the V above effect (first suggestion effect, see FIG. 1152(b)) is executed, and the player is prompted (suggested) to make the first right hit. By hitting the right while the Aim for the V above effect (first suggestion effect) is being executed, the game ball can be made to reach the electric role 640a set in the open state (protruding state), and the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 by the electric role 640a. When the ball is detected to enter the second ball entrance 640, or when the normal winning B ends, the Aim for the V above effect (see FIG. 1152(b)) ends. If a ball is detected entering the second ball entry port 640 (a reserved ball with the second special pattern is acquired), a presentation mode that notifies the player that the ball has been successfully entered into the V above is executed for the period until the end of the variable display of the first special pattern, whereas if the ball does not enter the second ball entry port 640 because a right hit was not made, etc., the "Aim for the V above" presentation ends when the normal pattern hit ends and a short presentation (for example, one second) is executed to indicate that the ball failed to enter the V above.

In addition, if a normal symbol win B (a normal symbol win that essentially guarantees a jackpot) is won in the lottery for the normal symbol and then a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol executed immediately afterwards, the Aim for the V above performance is executed in the same way. In this case, the Aim for the V above performance ends with the end of the variation time of the first special symbol, and the jackpot for the first special symbol starts. In other words, the jackpot performance starts immediately without the promotion performance or the Aim for the V below performance. This can give the player a great surprise and joy. After the jackpot for the first special symbol ends, if a reserved ball for the second special symbol is acquired by hitting the right in the Aim for the V above performance, a variable display based on the reserved ball for the second special symbol is executed, and a jackpot game or a small jackpot game that essentially guarantees a jackpot is executed. In other words, an extremely advantageous situation is created in which the jackpot for the first special symbol and the jackpot for the second special symbol are consecutively won.

As shown in FIG. 1156, if a ball is detected entering the second ball entrance 640 (a reserved ball with the second special symbol has been acquired) during the execution of the Aim for the V above effect (first suggestion effect, see FIG. 1152(b)), a promotion effect (see FIG. 1153) is executed in synchronization with the display of the changing second special symbol. As described above, this promotion effect is set to a performance mode (see FIG. 1153(b)) in which promotion is successful if the lottery result for the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot with the greatest number of rounds (a jackpot or small jackpot A is won), and is set to a performance mode in which promotion is unsuccessful if the lottery result corresponds to a jackpot with fewer rounds (small jackpot B is won).

If the second special symbol is selected as the small prize, the Aim for the V below effect (second suggestion effect, see FIG. 1154(a)) is executed as shown in FIG. 1156, and the player is prompted (suggested) to make a second right hit. By hitting the right while the Aim for the V below effect (second suggestion effect) is being executed, the game ball can be made to enter the V winning hole 650a, which is set to an open state, and the game ball can be made to enter the specific area 650e3. The Aim for the V below effect (see FIG. 1154(a)) ends when the ball is detected to have entered the specific area 650e3 or when the small prize game ends. If a ball is detected entering the specific area 650e3 (a big win is confirmed), a presentation mode that notifies the player that the ball has successfully entered the V below is executed in the period until the end of the small win game, whereas if the game ball does not enter the specific area 650e3 because a right hit was not performed, etc., the "Aim for the V below" presentation ends at the end of the open period of the small win game, and a short presentation (for example, one second) is executed to indicate that the ball failed to enter the V below.

As shown in FIG. 1156, if a ball is detected entering the specific area 650e3 during the execution of the "Aim for the V below" effect, the jackpot will start and the jackpot effect will be executed. Note that if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the "Aim for the V below" effect will not be executed, and the jackpot game will start and the jackpot effect will be executed at the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 1154(b) and FIG. 1155, the presentation mode of the first time-saving state in this 40th control example will be described. As described above, the first time-saving state is a game state that can be set as a game state after the end of a jackpot. More specifically, it is a game state that is set at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, and is set at a rate of 100% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state) or when a jackpot is won directly or via a small jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. This first time-saving state has a rate of winning a jackpot 80%, and when a jackpot is won, the first time-saving state is set again after the jackpot ends (looping the first time-saving state), so once it is shifted to, it forms an extremely advantageous state in which the first time-saving state and a jackpot are repeated at a rate of 80%.

As described above, in the first time-saving state, the third ending condition is that the number of times the normal symbol winning game is executed is set to one. And since the rate of winning the normal symbol winning B, which essentially confirms a jackpot in the normal symbol drawing, is 80%, winning the normal symbol winning B in the normal symbol drawing will confirm the jackpot win and the first time-saving state loop. For this reason, in the first time-saving state in this 40th control example, when a normal symbol drawing is executed, a presentation mode is set that artificially notifies the player whether or not a jackpot will be won.

1154(b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode in the first time-saving state (rush state). In the first time-saving state (rush state), when neither the drawing of the special symbol nor the drawing of the normal symbol is being performed, the rabbit-like character 801 discovers a number of treasure chests 810a to 810c in the main display area Dm, and a presentation is performed in which the rabbit-like character 801 examines which treasure chest to open. In addition, the characters "Hit right" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm. In addition, the characters "Bonus for V appearance from the selected box!?" are displayed in the display area HR10, and the characters "Select a treasure chest through GO!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy to understand that the rabbit-like character 801 can select one of the treasure chests by hitting right and passing through the right through gate 67r decorated with the characters "GO".

1155(a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67r in the first time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 1155(a), when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67r in the first time-saving state, a presentation is executed in which the rabbit character 801 selects a treasure box with a number 1 according to the result of the lottery for the normal pattern based on the passing. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 1155(a), a presentation is executed in which the rabbit character 801 selects a treasure box 810b, and the words "Selection complete!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, the words "Bonus with V appearing from the selected box!?" continue to be displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the appearance of "V" from the selected treasure box will result in a big win.

As shown in Fig. 1154(b) and Fig. 1155(a), there are multiple variations of the treasure chest. That is, three types are provided: a shining treasure chest 810a, a normal treasure chest 810b, and a small treasure chest 810c. The type of treasure chest selected by the rabbit character 801 is configured to suggest to the player the expectation of winning the normal prize B. Specifically, when the normal prize B is won, the selection rate of the treasure chest 810a is higher than when the normal prize A is won, while the selection rate of the treasure chest c is lower than when the normal prize A is won. This allows the player to play while paying attention to the type of treasure chest selected by the character 801 when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67r, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In the example of Fig. 1155(a), the rabbit character 801 selects the treasure chest 810b.

Figure 1155(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a win on normal winning number B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, is notified. As shown in Figure 1155(b), when notifying that a normal winning number B has been won, an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which a V icon 810ba with the letter "V" appears from the treasure chest selected by the rabbit character 801. In addition, the words "Bonus confirmed!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that a jackpot has been confirmed (that the player has won normal winning number B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot). From this point on, just like when you win the regular winning symbol B during chance time, first, the "Aim for the V above" effect is triggered, and then the promotion effect is executed according to the lottery result based on the initial winning entry into the second ball entry port 640. If the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win, the big win game will start as is, but if it is a small win, the "Aim for the V below" effect will be triggered and the big win game will start on the condition that the ball enters the specific area 650e3.

Next, referring to FIG. 1158, the transition method between each state in this 40th control example will be described. Here, in this 40th control example, three game states are provided. That is, three types of game states are provided: a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a first time-saving state that is most advantageous to the player, and a second time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state and less advantageous than the first time-saving state. In the normal state, there is no possibility that a normal winning B that can cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is determined in the lottery of a normal pattern, and in the first time-saving state, the normal winning B is won in the lottery of a normal pattern with a probability of about 80%, and in the second time-saving state, the normal winning B is won in the lottery of a normal pattern with a probability of about 3%.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 1158, a method of transition of the game state in a normal state disadvantageous to the player will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1158, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state (normal mode) to another state when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols or when a time-saving symbol is won. More specifically, when a jackpot A40, which is determined (selected) at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols with a probability of about 1/320, is determined as the jackpot type, the first time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Also, when a time-saving symbol (sudden time-saving) is won with a probability of about 1/200 in a lottery of special symbols, the second time-saving state is directly set. On the other hand, when a jackpot B40, which is determined (selected) at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won, is determined as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state again. For this reason, in the normal state, if the player wins a jackpot in the special pattern lottery or if the player wins a time-saving pattern, the game transitions to a more advantageous gaming state, and the player plays the game in the hope of achieving these lottery results.

Also, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 1158, there is a possibility of transitioning from the first time-saving state to another game state only when the end condition of the time-saving state (any of the first to third end conditions) is met. That is, the first end condition is met when the combined number of changes of the first special symbol change (special symbol 1 change) and the second special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) reaches 10 times, the second end condition is met when a small win is won once, or the third end condition is met when the number of times a normal symbol win game is executed (the number of times the normal electric role 640a is operated) reaches 1 time, and the game state is set to the disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if a normal symbol win B (a long open normal symbol win), which has an 80% chance of being won when a lottery for a normal symbol is executed in the first time-saving state, is won, and a big win is essentially confirmed. In other words, the player is given the right to hold a lottery for a second special symbol that will win either a big win or a small win that essentially guarantees a big win, and after the big win ends, the first time-saving state is set again (the first time-saving state is looped).

Here, in reality, when normal win B begins, the number of times that the electric device 640a is activated reaches the specified number of times, which is one time, and the time-saving state ends (the third ending condition is met), but in FIG. 1158, for ease of explanation, the win of the second special pattern (big win or small win) that occurs when normal win B is won is treated as a win during the first time-saving state.

Also, as shown in the lower right of FIG. 1158, there is a possibility of transitioning from the second time-saving state to another game state when a jackpot is won, or when a normal pattern B (long-open normal pattern) is won in the normal pattern lottery. More specifically, as shown in the lower right of FIG. 1158, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, which has a probability of about 1/320, the game state after the jackpot ends is always set to the highly advantageous first time-saving state, regardless of the type of jackpot. Also, even if a normal pattern B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, is won, the lottery for the second special pattern can be executed by continuing to hit the right according to the suggestion by the performance, and a jackpot or a small jackpot that essentially guarantees a jackpot can be won, so the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the advantageous first time-saving state.

In this way, the 40th dead fish control example is configured to have three game states, and by varying the winning rate of normal winning B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, in each game state, a novel gameplay feature is realized that provides different degrees of advantage. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration of 40th control example>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present 40th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1159(a). Fig. 1159(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the present 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1159(a), the ROM 202 in this 40th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 32nd control example described above (see FIG. 952(a)) in that a first win random number table 202aj is provided instead of the first win random number table 202a, a big win type selection table 202bj is provided instead of the big win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202cj is provided instead of the second win random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202dj is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a time-saving granting table 202ej is provided instead of the time-saving granting table 202e, a small win type selection table 202fj is provided instead of the small win type selection table 202f, a time-saving type selection table 202ja is added, a normal win type selection table 202jb is added, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202h is deleted. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 32nd control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the details of the first winning random number table 202aj in this 40th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1160(a) and Fig. 1160(b). Here, the first winning random number table 202aj in this 40th control example is composed of at least a special pattern 1 random number table 202aj1 that is referenced in the drawing of the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 random number table 202aj2 that is referenced in the drawing of the second special pattern, similar to the first winning random number table 202a (see Fig. 953(a)) in the above-mentioned 32nd control example. First, the details of the special pattern 1 random number table 202aj1 will be described with reference to Fig. 1160(a). Fig. 1160(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special pattern 1 random number table 202aj1.

As shown in FIG. 1160(a), in the special pattern 1 random number table 202aj1 in this 40th control example, 205 random number values (counter values) from "0 to 204" are defined as the range of random number values (values of the first win random number counter C1) that are determined to be a big win, and 328 random number values (counter values) from "205 to 532" are defined as the range of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a time-saving pattern win. On the other hand, no random number values are defined as being determined to be a small win.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65,535" that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, there are 205 random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol is approximately 1/320 (205/65,536). Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, there are 328 random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be time-saving symbol wins, so the probability of winning the time-saving symbol in the lottery for the first special symbol is approximately 1/200 (328/65,536).

Next, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 will be described with reference to FIG. 1160(b). FIG. 1160(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2. As shown in FIG. 1160(b), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 in this 40th control example, 205 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 204" are associated with each other as the range of random number values (values of the first win random number counter C1) that are determined to be a big win, and 65,331 random number values (counter values) of "205 to 65,535" are associated with each other as the range of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a small win. On the other hand, no random number values are associated with each other as the range of random number values that are determined to be a time-saving pattern win.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a big win is 205, so the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/320 (205/65,536), just like the lottery for the first special symbol. Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win is 65,331, so the probability of winning a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 319/320 (65,331/65,536).

Next, referring to FIG. 1160(c), the details of the jackpot type selection table 202bj in this 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1160(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bj in this 40th control example. This jackpot type selection table 202bj is a data table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, similar to the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 954(a)) in the 32nd control example described above. As shown in FIG. 1160(c), the jackpot type selection table 202bj in this 40th control example specifies two types of jackpot types for the first special symbol, jackpot A40 and jackpot B40, and specifies one type of jackpot type for the second special symbol, jackpot C40.

As shown in FIG. 1160(c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "jackpot A40" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B40" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". "Jackpot A40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends with a time-saving count (the specified number of times for normal symbol wins) of 1. "Jackpot B40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (it is set to the normal state). For this reason, there is no difference between "jackpot A40" and "jackpot B40" in terms of the number of rounds, but "jackpot A40" is more advantageous than "jackpot B40" in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) between "0 and 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A40" and "jackpot B40" is 50 each, so when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability of winning "jackpot A40" and "jackpot B40" is 50% each. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state, there is only a 50% probability of transitioning to the most advantageous first time-saving state. Note that when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, transition to the first time-saving state occurs even if the jackpot type is "jackpot B40". In other words, in the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state, a winning jackpot creates an advantageous game state that always transitions to the most advantageous first time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 1160(c), as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, "jackpot C40" is defined to correspond to the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2 (range of "0 to 99"). This "jackpot C40" is a jackpot type with 10 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the advantageous first time-saving state. Since "jackpot C40" is defined to correspond to the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, "jackpot C40" is always determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 1161(a), the second winning random number table 202cj in the present 40th control example will be described in detail. This second winning random number table 202cj is a data table that is referenced to determine whether or not a normal pattern is a winning symbol when a lottery for a normal pattern is executed. As shown in FIG. 1161(a), in the second winning random number table 202cj in the present 40th control example, the entire range of values that the second winning random number counter C4 can take (the range of "0 to 299") is associated with the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a winning symbol for a normal pattern, regardless of the game state. Therefore, in the present 40th control example, regardless of the game state, when a lottery for a normal pattern is executed, a winning symbol for a normal pattern is always won. As described above, the selection ratio of the winning type of the normal pattern executed when a winning symbol is won differs depending on the game state. Details will be described later, but in the normal state, the normal winning B, which allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, is never selected, and in the first time-saving mode, the normal winning B is selected 80% of the time, and in the second time-saving mode, the normal winning B is selected 3% of the time. This creates a large difference in the degree of advantage between game states.

Next, referring to FIG. 1161(b), the details of the variation pattern selection table 202dj in this 40th control example will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202dj, like the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 956(a)) in the 32nd control example, is a data table that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is held. FIG. 1161(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this variation pattern selection table 202dj.

As shown in FIG. 1161(b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dj in this 40th control example is composed of at least a normal table 202dj1 that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the normal state, and a time-saving table 202dj2 that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state). First, the details of the normal table 202dj1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1161(c).

Figure 1161 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202dj1 in this 40th control example. As shown in Figure 1161 (c), the normal table 202dj1 specifies different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) corresponding to the special symbol type used in the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, it is configured so that different fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time can be determined depending on the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 139", "False Miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the range of "140 to 149", "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds for the range of "150 to 179", and "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds for the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 29", "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds for the range of "30 to 189", and "Special reach" with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds for the range of "190 to 198".

Furthermore, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is a "time-saving symbol," the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the full range of "0 to 198" to set a "Super Reach" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds.

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, if the lottery result is a miss, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be determined than if the lottery result is something other than a miss (jackpot or time-saving symbol), and if a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined, the special symbol lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot or time-saving symbol. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a player playing in the normal state from experiencing a long period of special symbol variation with a miss result, which would drastically reduce the number of special symbol lotteries executed per unit time and reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed per unit time decreases, i.e., when the special pattern changes for a long period of time, the player's anticipation of winning (a big win, a time-saving pattern) can be increased, which can prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Win" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Small win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Small win" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". As mentioned above, in this 40th control example, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be either a big win or a small win, and there is no normal (not involving the operation of the V winning device 650) miss. For this reason, only the lottery results of "Big win" and "Small win" are specified in the normal table 202dj1.

As described above, in this 40th control example, even if a normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state and a normal pattern winning is won, normal pattern winning A is always executed, in which an opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) of the electric device 640a that makes it impossible (difficult) to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 as a normal pattern winning, so even if a normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640. In the 40th control example, the situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state is when a normal symbol win B is determined in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state) and the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the time-saving end condition (third end condition) is first established by the operation of the electric device 640a by the normal symbol win B, and the time-saving state is ended, and then the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the normal symbol win B being executed. This situation is particularly likely to occur in the first time-saving state in which the specified number of times for the normal symbol win is set to one as the third end condition. That is, if the normal winning symbol B is won after the transition to the first time-saving state, the start of the normal winning symbol B will almost certainly precede the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so if the lottery for the second special symbol is executed after the first time-saving state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol will start after the transition (fall) to the normal state once. Therefore, in this 40th control example, a variation pattern is determined in which a constant length (10 seconds) of variation time is set regardless of the lottery result as the variation time of the second special symbol variation to indicate the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. Then, this variation time is used to execute the promotion performance (see FIG. 1153).

In this way, when a special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) for a specific special pattern type (second special pattern) is executed in a specific game state (normal state), a variation pattern is determined in which the same length of variation time is set regardless of the lottery result, so that the presentation period of a specific presentation executed during the special pattern variation can be unified regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 1162(a), the details of the time-saving table 202j2 will be described. FIG. 1162(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving table 202j2. As shown in FIG. 1162(a), in the time-saving table 202dj2, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "miss", the time-saving table 202dj2 specifies a "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", when the lottery result is "big win", the time-saving table 202dj2 specifies a "short win" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", when the lottery result is "time-saving symbol", the time-saving table 202dj2 specifies a "short hit" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1162(a), the stipulations for the second special symbol are the same as those in the normal table 202dj1 (see FIG. 1161(c)). That is, when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", a "win" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198", and when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Small win", a "small win" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 198".

These regulations allow the time for the first special symbol to change during the time-saving state to be fixed at 5 seconds, and the time for the second special symbol to change to 10 seconds. As a result, as described above in FIG. 1157, during chance time (second time-saving state), the change of the first special symbol and the change of the normal symbol can be started almost simultaneously, and the timing at which the change of the first special symbol ends and the timing at which the winning normal symbol ends can be made to almost coincide. As a result, a change display mode that takes into account the lottery results of the normal symbol can be set as the change display performance of the first special symbol every time during chance time. Also, by fixing the change time of the second special symbol, the performance period of the promotion performance can be fixed every time.

Next, referring to FIG. 1162(b), the time-saving grant table 202ej in this 40th control example will be described in detail. This time-saving grant table 202ej is a data table that is referenced when setting a time-saving state, in the same way as the time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 954(b)) in the 32nd control example described above, in order to set the end conditions of the time-saving state according to the trigger for setting the time-saving state. FIG. 1162(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving grant table 202ej.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), the time-saving grant table 202ej in this 40th control example specifies the correspondence between each big win type and the time-saving pattern type and the value of each counter that is referenced when determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is met. Note that, as shown in FIG. 1162(b), in this 40th control example, three counters are provided to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition is met: the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, and the normal power operation counter 203ja. The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for determining (judging) whether or not an end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the time-saving state is set is satisfied, the small win counter 203s is a counter for determining (judging) whether or not an end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of times a small win game is played after the time-saving state is set is satisfied, and the normal power operation counter 203ja is a counter for determining (judging) whether or not an end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of times a normal symbol is won after the time-saving state is set is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), in this 40th control example, there are four types of jackpot types, "jackpot A40" to "jackpot D40", and four types of time-saving pattern types, "time-saving pattern A40" to "time-saving pattern E40". In the time-saving granting table 202ej, the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the small jackpot counter 203s, and the normal power operation counter 203ja (i.e., the first to third end conditions) are associated with each jackpot type and each time-saving pattern type.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), for the jackpot types "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40", the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is set to "1", regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, when "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40" are won, the first end condition is set to the number of times that the special pattern changes 10 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times that the small jackpot game is executed once, and the third end condition is set to the number of times that the normal pattern wins once. Note that after these jackpots end, the first time-saving state is set, so the time-saving end condition is almost established by the establishment of the third end condition, which is established by the execution of a normal pattern win game once. If the winning game of this normal pattern is a normal pattern B, the condition for ending the time-saving state is met, but the lottery for the second special pattern, which essentially confirms the jackpot by making the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640, can be executed, so that the game can be transitioned to the first time-saving state again. On the other hand, if the winning game of the normal pattern is a normal pattern A, the electric role 640a is displaced in the first displacement pattern, which makes it impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640, so it is also impossible to execute the lottery for the second special pattern. Therefore, in the first time-saving state set after the end of "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40", the gameplay is such that there is a strong expectation of winning the normal pattern B. Note that the rate of winning the normal pattern B in the first time-saving state is 80% when the lottery for the normal pattern is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1162(b), for "jackpot B40", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, the value of the small win counter 203s, and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja are each set to "no value (shown as "-" in the figure)". Therefore, if "jackpot B40" is won in the normal state, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, but the normal state is set. Therefore, "jackpot B40" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends. Note that if the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the same end conditions as the other jackpot types ("jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40") are specified. The details are as described above, so we will not explain them here.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), for the "time-saving pattern A40", the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "14", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is set to "10" when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state. Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern A40" is won in the normal state, the first end condition is set to the number of times the special pattern changes 14 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times the small win game is played once, and the third end condition is set to the number of times the normal pattern wins 10 times. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving pattern A40" continues until the lottery for the special pattern is played 14 times, the small win game is played once, or the normal pattern wins are played 10 times. As described above, the second time-saving state is a game state in which the first special symbol and the normal symbol are drawn almost simultaneously every time a left-handed shot is made, and the winning rate of the normal symbol B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, is 3% per normal symbol drawing. Taking into account the jackpot probability of the special symbol (approximately 1/320), this creates a favorable game state in which the jackpot is won with a probability of approximately 1/30 each time the first special symbol is drawn. The probability of winning a jackpot of approximately 1/30 combined by drawing the special symbol and the normal symbol almost simultaneously 10 times is approximately 28.5%, so the jackpot expectation rate in the second time-saving state based on winning the "time-saving symbol A40" is approximately 28.5%.

The reason why the first end condition (the end condition based on the number of times the special symbol changes) is set to four times more than the third end condition (the end condition based on the number of times the normal symbol wins) is to allow the player to play in the second time-saving state without losing the number of times the normal symbol wins, regardless of the number of reserved balls at the time the time-saving symbol wins. More specifically, if the first end condition and the third end condition are made to match, if there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time the second time-saving state starts, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery for the normal symbol, and the value of the time-saving number of times 203h corresponding to the first end condition is subtracted. In other words, the first end condition may be established before the third end condition is established, and the more reserved balls of the first special symbol are established, the more likely it is that the number of times the normal symbol, which has a higher probability of actually winning a jackpot than the lottery for the first special symbol, will be lost. For this reason, in this 40th control example, in order to make it extremely difficult for the first termination condition to be met before the third termination condition, regardless of whether the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern at the time of transition to the second time-saving state is 0 to 4, the first termination condition is set to a number of times greater than the third termination condition by the maximum number of reserved balls (i.e., 4 times). By configuring in this way, even if the left shot is started after all reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed in the second time-saving state, the time-saving state can be continued until the number of winning games of normal patterns corresponding to the third termination condition is executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely disadvantaged by losing the number of winning games of normal patterns, which have a high actual probability of winning.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1162(b), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1004", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is set to "1000". Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern A40" is won in the time-saving state, the first end condition is set to the number of times that the special pattern changes 1004 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times that the small win game is executed 1 time, and the third end condition is set to the number of times that the normal pattern wins 1000 times. Since the possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 by drawing the special pattern and the normal pattern almost simultaneously 1000 times is almost 100%, the second time-saving state set based on winning the "time-saving pattern A40" in the time-saving state is a time-saving state in which a jackpot is substantially confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), for the "time-saving pattern B40", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "34", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is set to "30". Therefore, if the "time-saving pattern B40" is won in the normal state, the first end condition is set to the number of times that the special pattern changes 34 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times that the small win game is played once, and the third end condition is set to the number of times that the normal pattern wins 30 times. Therefore, the second time-saving state that is set based on winning the "time-saving pattern B40" continues until the lottery for the special pattern is played 34 times, the small win game is played once, or the win of the normal pattern is played 30 times. The probability of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 by drawing 30 special and normal symbols almost simultaneously is about 63.5%, so the expected jackpot probability in the second time-saving state based on winning the "time-saving symbol B40" is about 63.5%. If the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small win counter 203s "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja "1000" are specified in correspondence with each other, just like the "time-saving symbol A40", so the second time-saving state in which a jackpot is essentially confirmed is set.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "54", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is set to "50" for the "time-saving pattern C40". Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern C40" is won, the first end condition is set to 54 times the number of times the special pattern changes, the second end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the small win game is played, and the third end condition is set to 50 times the number of times the normal pattern wins. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving pattern C40" continues until 54 special pattern lotteries are played, one small win game is played, or 50 normal pattern wins are played. The probability of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 by drawing 50 special and normal symbols almost simultaneously is about 81.3%, so the jackpot expectation rate in the second time-saving state based on winning the "time-saving symbol C40" is about 81.3%. If the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, "1", the value of the small win counter 203s, and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja, "1000", are specified in correspondence with each other, just like the "time-saving symbol A40" and "time-saving state B40", so the second time-saving state in which a jackpot is essentially confirmed is set.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "104", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is set to "100" for the "time-saving pattern D40". Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern D40" is won, the first end condition is set to 104 times the number of times the special pattern changes, the second end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the small win game is played, and the third end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the normal pattern wins. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving pattern D40" continues until the special pattern lottery is played 104 times, one small win game is played, or 100 times the normal pattern wins are played. The probability of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 by drawing 100 special and normal symbols almost simultaneously is about 96.5%, so the jackpot expectation rate of the second time-saving state based on winning the "time-saving symbol D40" is about 96.5%. If the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, "1", the value of the small win counter 203s, and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja, "1000", are specified in correspondence with each other, just like the "time-saving symbol A40" to "time-saving symbol C40", so the second time-saving state in which a jackpot is essentially confirmed is set.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1162(b), for the "time-saving pattern E40", the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1004", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is set to "1000", regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern E40" is won, the first end condition is set to the number of times that the special pattern changes 1004 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times that the small win game is executed 1 time, and the third end condition is set to the number of times that the normal pattern wins 1000 times, regardless of the game state. Therefore, the second time-saving state that is set based on winning the "time-saving pattern E40" continues until the lottery for the special pattern is executed 1004 times, the small win game is executed once, or the win of the normal pattern is executed 1000 times. The combined probability of winning the jackpot by drawing 1,000 special and normal symbols almost simultaneously is approximately 1/30, making it almost 100%, so the second time-saving state based on winning the "time-saving symbol E40" is essentially a time-saving state that guarantees a jackpot.

In this way, in this 40th control example, the end conditions for the second time-saving state, which is granted according to the type of time-saving pattern, are varied to vary the likelihood of winning a jackpot for each type of time-saving pattern. In other words, the number of times a normal pattern winning game is played until the second time-saving state ends is varied according to the type of time-saving pattern, to vary the possibility of winning a jackpot. With this configuration, when a time-saving pattern is won, the player can play while paying attention to the type of time-saving pattern, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1163(a), the details of the small win type selection table 202fj in this 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1163(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 202fj. As shown in FIG. 1163(a), the small win type "small win A40" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 79", and the small win type "small win B40" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "80 to 99". Here, both "small win A40" and "small win B40" are small win types that can easily make the game ball enter the specific area 650e3 by simply continuing to hit the right side during the execution of the small win game, and are configured to win the big win C40 (10 round big win) when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small win A40", while winning the big win D40 (3 round big win) when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small win B40". In either case of winning the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the first time-saving state, so "small win A40" is a small win type that is more advantageous than "small win B40" only in terms of the number of rounds when the big win is won. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 99 that the small prize type counter C5 can take, there are 80 and 20 random numbers (counter values) associated with "small prize A40" and "small prize B40," respectively. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "small prize A40" and "small prize B40" will be determined is 80% (80/100) and 20% (20/100), respectively.

Next, the time-saving type selection table 202ja in this 40th control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1163(b). This time-saving type selection table 202ja is a data table that is referenced to determine the type of time-saving pattern when a time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery. As shown in FIG. 1163(b), the time-saving type selection table 202ja specifies a range of values of the first winning type counter C2 corresponding to each of the five types of time-saving pattern types, "time-saving pattern A40" to "time-saving pattern E40".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89" and the "time-saving pattern A40" is associated with the time-saving pattern type. As described above, this "time-saving pattern A40" is the time-saving pattern type corresponding to the second time-saving state in which the third end condition (the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the winning game of the normal pattern is executed) is set to 10 times. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the "time-saving pattern A40" is 90, so the probability that the "time-saving pattern A40" will be determined when the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the first special pattern is 90% (90/100).

As shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 94" and the "time-saving pattern B40" is associated with the time-saving pattern type. As described above, this "time-saving pattern B40" is the time-saving pattern type corresponding to the second time-saving state in which the third end condition (the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the winning game of the normal pattern is executed) is set to 30 times. Since the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the "time-saving pattern B40" is 5 out of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, when the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the first special pattern, the probability that the "time-saving pattern B40" is determined is 5% (5/100).

As shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "95 to 97" and the "time-saving pattern C40" is associated with the time-saving pattern type. As described above, this "time-saving pattern C40" is the time-saving pattern type corresponding to the second time-saving state in which the third end condition (the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the winning game of the normal pattern is executed) is set to 50 times. Since the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the "time-saving pattern C40" is 3 out of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, when the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the first special pattern, the probability that the "time-saving pattern C40" is determined is 3% (3/100).

As shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value "98" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with the "time-saving pattern D40" as the time-saving pattern type. As described above, this "time-saving pattern D40" is the time-saving pattern type corresponding to the second time-saving state in which the third end condition (the time-saving end condition based on the number of times a winning game with a normal pattern is executed) is set to 100 times. Since the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the "time-saving pattern D40" is one out of the 100 random number values (counter values) "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the probability that the "time-saving pattern D40" will be determined when the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the first special pattern is 1% (1/100).

As shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value "99" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with "time-saving pattern E40" as a time-saving pattern type. As described above, this "time-saving pattern E40" is a time-saving pattern type corresponding to the second time-saving state in which the third end condition (time-saving end condition based on the number of times a winning game with a normal pattern is executed) is set to 1000 times. Since there is only one random number value (counter value) associated with "time-saving pattern E40" out of the 100 random number values (counter values) "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the probability that "time-saving pattern E40" will be determined when the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the first special pattern is 1% (1/100).

Next, referring to FIG. 1163(c), the normal symbol winning type selection table 202jb in this 40th control example will be described. This normal symbol winning type selection table 202jb is a data table that is referenced to select (determine) the winning type of the normal symbol when a normal symbol wins in the normal symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 1163(c), this normal symbol winning type selection table 202jb specifies the winning type of the normal symbol and the range of the value of the second winning type counter C6 in correspondence with each game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1163(c), when the game state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the normal state, the normal symbol win A is defined as a normal symbol win type corresponding to the entire range of the value of the second win type counter C6 (the range of "0 to 99"). As described above, this normal symbol win A is a type of normal symbol win in which the electric device 640a is opened and closed (displaced) in an opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) in which it is impossible (difficult) to insert a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1163(c), when the game state at the time of the lottery of the normal symbol is the first time-saving state, the value of the second winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "0 to 19" corresponding to "normal winning A", and the value of the second winning type counter C6 is set to the range of "20 to 99" corresponding to "normal winning B". As described above, the normal winning B is a type of normal winning in which the electric role 640a is opened and closed (displaced) in an opening and closing pattern (second displacement pattern) that can easily allow the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. And since the lottery of the second special symbol is a lottery that essentially determines a jackpot, the normal winning B can be said to be a type of normal winning in which a jackpot is essentially determined. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 99 that the second winning type counter C6 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the normal winning A and the normal winning B are 20 and 80, respectively, so the percentages of the normal winning A and the normal winning B being determined when a winning normal pattern is won in the first time-saving state are 20% (20/100) and 80% (80/100), respectively. The first time-saving state is a game state that ends (falls into the normal state) when a winning game with a normal pattern is played once, so in the first time-saving state, there is an 80% chance that the normal winning B, which essentially determines a jackpot, is won and a jackpot game is played, while there is a 20% chance that the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 and the game falls into the normal state as it is.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1163(c), when the game state at the time of the lottery for the normal symbol is the second time-saving state, the value of the second winning type counter C2 is specified to correspond to the range of "0 to 96" and the value of the second winning type counter C6 is specified to correspond to "normal winning type A" in the range of "97 to 99". Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the second winning type counter C6 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) corresponding to the normal winning type A and the normal winning type B is 97 and 3, respectively, so that the probability of determining the normal winning type A and the normal winning type B when a winning type is selected in the first time-saving state is 97% (97/100) and 3% (3/100), respectively. In the second time-saving state, the game ends when the normal symbol hits 10, 30, 50, 100, or 1000 times, so in the second time-saving state, the aim is to win the 3% chance of winning normal symbol B before the set number of normal symbol hits is reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 1159(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1159(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1159(b), the RAM 203 in the 40th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 32nd control example described above (see FIG. 952(b)) only in that a normal power operation counter 203ja is provided instead of the special pattern 2 counter 203t. As described above, this normal power operation counter 203ja is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of times the normal pattern is hit after the time-saving state is set, and a counter value corresponding to the jackpot type or time-saving type is set at the end of the jackpot or when the time-saving pattern stops (see S226A in FIG. 1166). In addition, the normal power operation counter 203ja is updated by subtracting one from the value each time a normal pattern winning game starts (see S2332A in FIG. 1173(b)). The value of this normal power operation counter 203ja determines whether the third end condition (the time-saving end condition based on the number of times a normal pattern winning game is executed) is met.

The reason why an end condition based on the number of times a normal symbol is played (third end condition) is specified as one of the time-saving end conditions in this 40th control example is that the board configuration makes it possible to play only a normal symbol draw without drawing the first special symbol by hitting to the right, and the game is designed so that winning the normal symbol B essentially confirms a jackpot. Therefore, if only the end condition based on the number of times a special symbol is drawn (first end condition) and the end condition based on the number of times a small jackpot is played (second end condition) were specified as the time-saving end conditions, continuing to hit to the right after switching to the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state would result in a malfunction in which the time-saving state would continue until winning the normal symbol B, which essentially confirms a jackpot. Therefore, in this 40th control example, the time-saving end condition is set based on the number of times that normal symbol winning games are played (third end condition), and even if you continue hitting the right side in the time-saving state and no special symbol is drawn, the time-saving state ends when normal symbol winning games are played the specified number of times. This prevents the occurrence of a problem where the time-saving state always continues until the normal symbol winning B is won.

Next, referring to FIG. 1164(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1164(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1164(a), the ROM 222 in this 40th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example (see FIG. 959(a)) in that a standby performance selection table 222ja is added, and that the defeat number selection table 222b, the defeat performance mode selection table 222c, the additional reduction value selection table 222d, the performance stage data table 222e, and the game environment data table 222f are deleted. The standby performance selection table 222ja is a data table referenced to determine the performance mode of the chance time standby performance (see FIG. 1150(b), FIG. 1151). Details of this standby performance selection table 222ja will be explained with reference to FIG. 1165.

Figure 1165 is a diagram showing the contents of the standby performance selection table 222ja. As shown in Figure 1165, this standby performance selection table 222ja specifies the correspondence between the combination of icons (suggested patterns) and the range of the value of the first performance counter 223f1 for each combination of the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving pattern that has been won this time and the situation at the start of the performance. Here, as described above, the chance time standby performance (see Figures 1150 (b) and 1151) is a performance that is executed using the period from the end of the variable display corresponding to the time-saving pattern to the end of all reserved balls of the first special pattern (until 5 seconds have passed since the time-saving pattern was stopped and displayed if the number of reserved balls is 0), and is a performance that is executed to prevent game balls from entering (passing through) the first ball entrance 64 (and the central through gate 67c) during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the first special pattern. Therefore, after the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state and transitions to the second time-saving state, the display can be continuously performed up to four times (the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol).

As shown in FIG. 1165, as a situation when a new effect is executed within the effect period of the chance time waiting effect, for the situation at the start of a jackpot fluctuation, regardless of the number of time-saving times (third ending condition), a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "continue", and an icon with the word "congratulations" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 49", and finally, an effect (win notification effect A) is associated with the rabbit character 801 hitting the icon with the word "congratulations" to notify the player. Similarly, for the value range of the first effect counter 223f1 from "50 to 89", a combination of an icon with the word "100 times" marked, an icon with the word "∞", an icon with the word "continue", and an icon with the word "congratulations" is displayed, and finally, an effect (win notification effect B) is specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "congratulations", and for the value range of the first effect counter 223f1 from "90 to 99", a combination of two icons with the word "∞" and two icons with the word "congratulations" is displayed, and finally, an effect (win notification effect C) is specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "congratulations".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of "0-99" for the first effect counter 223f1, the numbers of random numbers (counter values) associated with the winning notification effect A, the winning notification effect B, and the winning notification effect C are 50, 40, and 10, respectively, so that when a winning fluctuation starts during the effect period of the chance time waiting effect, the probability that the winning notification effect A, the winning notification effect B, and the winning notification effect C are determined is 50% (50/100), 40% (40/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. Note that the combination of icons (suggested patterns) displayed first in the winning notification effect A is a combination that is determined at a relatively high rate even when notifying a small number of time-saving times (10 time-saving times), so it is positioned as a presentation mode with a relatively low expectation of a notification that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the combination of icons (suggested patterns) displayed first in the winning notification performance B is a combination that can be selected even when a relatively large number of time-saving times (100 or 1000 times) is set, and is therefore positioned as a performance mode with a high expectation of a relatively advantageous notification to the player. Furthermore, the combination of icons (suggested patterns) displayed first in the winning notification performance C is a combination that can only be selected in a situation where 1000 time-saving times, which is essentially the number of times until a jackpot, are announced, and is therefore positioned as an extremely advantageous performance mode in which it is confirmed that either a winning combination has been displayed or that the 1000 time-saving times state, which essentially confirms a jackpot, is in effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third ending condition) is set to a 10-time time-saving state, and a miss fluctuation starts with zero reserved balls, or the fluctuation is stopped (i.e., the timing at which the chance time waiting effect that is executed last in the effect period starts), a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "continue", and an icon with the word "congratulations" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 79", and finally, an effect (10 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "10 times" is correspondingly specified, and in a situation where the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "80 to 98", a miss fluctuation starts with zero reserved balls, or the fluctuation is stopped (i.e., the timing at which the chance time waiting effect that is executed last in the effect period starts), a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "congratulations", and an icon with the word "congratulations" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 79", and finally, Then, a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "50 times", and an icon with the word "continue" is displayed, and finally, an effect (10 times notification effect B) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "10 times". For the value "99" of the first effect counter 223f1, a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "100 times", an icon with the word "∞", and an icon with the word "continue" is displayed, and finally, an effect (10 times notification effect C) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "10 times".

On the other hand, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third ending condition) is set to a 10-time time-saving state and a miss fluctuation starts with the number of reserved balls being 1 or more (i.e., the execution start timing of a chance time waiting effect that is executed other than at the end of the effect period), a combination of three icons labeled with the word "10 times" and one icon labeled with the word "continue" is displayed for a value range of "0 to 94" of the first effect counter 223f1, and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect A) is correspondingly specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon labeled with the word "continue," and a combination of an icon labeled with the word "10 times," an icon labeled with the word "30 times," an icon labeled with the word "50 times," and an icon labeled with the word "continue" is displayed for a value range of "95 to 99" of the first effect counter 223f1, and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect B) is correspondingly specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon labeled with the word "continue." As a result, when the second time-saving state is set to 10 times, the continuation notification effect A is executed at a high rate as a chance time waiting effect while the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, and when the number of reserved balls becomes 0, the 10-time notification effect A is executed at a high rate.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third ending condition) is set to a time-saving state of 30 times, and a miss fluctuation is started with zero reserved balls, or the fluctuation is stopped (i.e., the timing at which the chance time waiting effect that is executed last in the effect period starts), a combination of two icons with the word "10 times", one icon with the word "30 times", and one icon with the word "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 39", and finally, an effect (30 times notification effect A) is specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "30 times" to notify the player, and in a situation where the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "40 to 98", A combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "50 times", and an icon with the word "continue" is displayed, and finally, an effect (30 times notification effect B) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "30 times". For the value "99" of the first effect counter 223f1, a combination of an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "∞", an icon with the word "continue", and an icon with the word "congratulations" is displayed, and finally, an effect (30 times notification effect C) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "30 times".

On the other hand, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third ending condition) is set to 30 time-saving times and the number of reserved balls is 1 or more and a miss fluctuation starts (i.e., the timing when the chance time waiting effect that is executed other than at the end of the effect period starts to be executed), a combination of three icons with the word "10 times" and one icon with the word "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 94", and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect A) is specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "continue" to notify the player, and a combination of three icons with the word "10 times" and one icon with the word "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "95 to 98". A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "continue" is displayed, and finally, a performance (continue notification performance B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the characters "continue" is correspondingly specified. For the value "99" of the first performance counter 223f1, a combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "congratulations" is displayed, and finally, a performance (continue notification performance C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the characters "continue" is correspondingly specified. As a result, when the second time-saving state with 30 time-saving times is set, as a chance time waiting performance, while the reserved ball is 1 or more, the ratio of the continuation notification performance A is lower than that in the case of 10 time-saving times, and the ratio of the continuation notification performance B is higher. In addition, there is a possibility that the continuation notification performance C, which cannot be selected with 10 time-saving times, will be selected. In addition, when the number of reserved balls reaches 0, notification effect B is executed 30 times with a relatively high probability.

As shown in FIG. 1165, when the number of time-saving times (third end condition) is set to 50 time-saving times, and when there are zero reserved balls, the miss fluctuation starts or the fluctuation stops (i.e., the timing when the chance time standby effect that is executed last in the effect period starts), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 9", and a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "continue", an icon with the word "congratulations" is displayed, and finally, an icon with the word "30 times" is displayed. A performance (30 times notification performance D) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the combo is specified in association with the icon, and when the value of the first performance counter 223f1 is in the range of "10 to 12", a combination of an icon with the text "10 times", an icon with the text "30 times", an icon with the text "50 times", an icon with the text "continue" is displayed. Finally, a performance (30 times notification performance B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the text "30 times" is specified in association with the icon, and when the value of the first performance counter 223f1 is in the range of "13, 14", Then, a combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "∞", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "congratulations" is displayed, and finally, an effect (30 times notification effect C) is provided in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the characters "30 times". The combination of an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "continue" is displayed in response to the value of the first effect counter 223f1 ranging from "15 to 89". and finally, an effect (50th notification effect A) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon marked with the word "50 times." For the value range of the first effect counter 223f1 from "90 to 99," a combination of an icon marked with the word "50 times," an icon marked with the word "100 times," an icon marked with the word "∞," and an icon marked with the word "Congratulations" is displayed, and finally, an effect (50th notification effect B) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon marked with the word "50 times."

In other words, when the number of time-saving times is 50, it is configured so that there is a possibility that a smaller number of time-saving times (30 times) than the actual number is notified. Therefore, even if a small number of time-saving times (30 times) is notified, the player can be made to expect that a larger number of time-saving times may be set. In addition, when a smaller number of time-saving times is notified than the actual number, when the displayed number of time-saving times becomes 0, an effect is executed in which the remaining number of time-saving times that have not been notified is added. Similarly, when the time-saving pattern is won during the chance time and the number of time-saving times increases, when the displayed number of time-saving times becomes 0, an effect is executed in which the remaining number of time-saving times is added. By configuring in this way, even if the displayed number of time-saving times becomes small, the player can play in the hope that the number of time-saving times will be added, so that the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

As shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third end condition) is set to a time-saving state of 50 times and the number of reserved balls is 1 or more and a miss fluctuation starts (i.e., the execution start timing of the chance time waiting effect that is executed other than the last in the effect period), a combination of three icons with the word "10 times" and one icon with the word "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 79", and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "continue" is correspondingly specified, and when the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "80 to 94", the icon with the word "10 times" is displayed. A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "continue" is displayed, and a performance (continue notification performance B) in which the rabbit character 801 finally hits the icon with the characters "continue" is correspondingly prescribed, and a combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "congratulations" is displayed for the range of the value of the first performance counter 223f1 from "95 to 99", and a performance (continue notification performance C) in which the rabbit character 801 finally hits the icon with the characters "continue" is correspondingly prescribed. As a result, when the second time-saving state of 50 times is set, as a chance time waiting performance, while there is one or more reserved balls, the ratio of the continuation notification performance A becomes lower than the cases of the time-saving performances of 10 and 30 times, and the ratio of the continuation notification performance B and the continuation notification performance C becomes higher. In addition, when the number of reserved balls reaches 0, notification effect A is executed 50 times with a relatively high probability.

As shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third end condition) is set to a time-saving state of 100 times, and a miss fluctuation starts with 0 reserved balls, or the fluctuation is stopped (i.e., the timing to start execution of the chance time waiting effect that is executed last in the effect period), a combination of an icon with the text "10 times", an icon with the text "30 times", an icon with the text "50 times", and an icon with the text "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 14", and finally, an effect (50 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the text "50 times" is correspondingly specified, and a combination of an icon with the text "50 times", an icon with the text "100 times", an icon with the text "∞", an icon with the text "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "15 to 24", and finally, an effect (50 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the text "50 times" is correspondingly specified, and The rabbit character 801 hits an icon marked with the character "10 times" (50 times notification effect B), and the rabbit character 801 hits the icon marked with the character "100 times" (50 times notification effect B) to notify the user. In response to the value of the first effect counter 223f1 ranging from "25 to 69", a combination of an icon marked with the character "10 times", an icon marked with the character "100 times", an icon marked with the character "∞", an icon marked with the character "continue" is displayed. Finally, the rabbit character 801 hits the icon marked with the character "100 times". A corresponding notification effect (100 times notification effect A) is defined, and for the value range of the first effect counter 223f1 from 70 to 99, a combination of an icon with the text "50 times", an icon with the text "100 times", an icon with the text "∞", and an icon with the text "continue" is displayed, and finally, a corresponding notification effect (100 times notification effect B) is defined by the rabbit character 801 hitting the icon with the text "100 times".

In other words, even if the number of time-saving times is 100, there is a possibility that a smaller number of time-saving times (50 times) than the actual number will be announced, just as there is when it is 50 times. Therefore, even if a small number of time-saving times (50 times) is announced, it is possible for the player to expect that a larger number of time-saving times may be set.

As shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third ending condition) is set to 100 times and the number of reserved balls is 1 or more and a miss fluctuation starts (i.e., the timing at which a chance time waiting effect that is executed other than at the end of the effect period starts to be executed), a combination of three icons with the word "10 times" and one icon with the word "continue" is displayed for a value range of "0 to 49" of the first effect counter 223f1, and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect A) is specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "continue" to notify the player, and a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "50 times", an icon with the word "continue" and an icon with the word "continue" are displayed for a value range of "50 to 89" of the first effect counter 223f1, and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect A) is specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "continue". An effect (continuation notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 punches an icon to notify is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "90 to 98" is displayed, and a combination of an icon with the text "30 times", an icon with the text "100 times", an icon with the text "continue", and an icon with the text "congratulations" is displayed, and finally an effect (continuation notification effect C) in which the rabbit character 801 punches the icon with the text "continue" is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 of "99" is displayed, and finally an effect (continuation notification effect D) in which the rabbit character 801 punches the icon with the text "continue" is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1. As a result, when the second time-saving state is set to 100 times, the chance time waiting effect will have a lower rate of continuation notification effect A while there is one or more reserved balls than when the time-saving effect is between 10 and 50 times, and the rate of continuation notification effect B and continuation notification effect C will be higher. Also, there is a possibility that continuation notification effect D, which cannot be selected when the time-saving effect is between 10 and 50 times, will be selected.

As shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third end condition) is set to a time-saving state of 1000 times, and a miss fluctuation starts with 0 reserved balls or the fluctuation is stopped (i.e., the timing to start the execution of the chance time waiting effect that is executed last in the effect period), a combination of an icon with the text "50 times", an icon with the text "100 times", an icon with the text "∞", an icon with the text "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 49", and finally, an effect (100 times notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the text "100 times" is correspondingly specified, and in a situation where the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50 to 64", an icon with the text "10 times", an icon with the text "100 times", an icon with the text "∞", an icon with the text "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50 to 64", A combination of icons with letters is displayed, and finally, an effect (∞ notification effect A) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the letter "∞" attached to notify the player. For the value range of the first effect counter 223f1 of "65 to 98", a combination of an icon with the letter "50 times", an icon with the letter "100 times", an icon with the letter "∞", and an icon with the letter "continue" is displayed, and finally, an effect (∞ notification effect B) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the letter "∞" attached to notify the player. For the value of the first effect counter 223f1 of "99", a combination of two icons with the letter "∞" and two icons with the letter "congratulations" is displayed, and finally, an effect (∞ notification effect C) is defined in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the letter "∞" attached to notify the player.

In other words, even if the number of time-saving times is 1000, there is a possibility that a smaller number of time-saving times (100 times) than the actual number will be announced, just as there are cases where the number is 50 or 100. Therefore, even if a small number of time-saving times (100 times) is announced, it is possible for the player to expect that a larger number of time-saving times may be set.

As shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of time-saving times (third end condition) is set to a time-saving state of 1000 times and the number of reserved balls is 1 or more and a miss fluctuation starts (i.e., the timing at which the chance time waiting effect executed other than at the end of the effect period starts to be executed), a combination of three icons with the word "10 times" and one icon with the word "continue" is displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 49", and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect A) is specified in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the word "continue" to notify the player, and a combination of an icon with the word "10 times", an icon with the word "30 times", an icon with the word "50 times", an icon with the word "continue" and an icon with the word "continue" are displayed for the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50 to 74", and finally, an icon with the word "continue" is displayed. a combination of an icon with the text "30 times", an icon with the text "100 times", an icon with the text "continue", and an icon with the text "congratulations" is displayed for a range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "75 to 94", and finally a performance (continuation notification performance C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the text "continue" is correspondingly defined; a combination of an icon with the text "100 times", an icon with the text "∞", an icon with the text "continue", and an icon with the text "congratulations" is displayed for a range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "95 to 99", and finally a performance (continuation notification performance D) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the text "continue" is correspondingly defined. As a result, when the second time-saving state is set to 1000 times, the chance time waiting effect will have a lower rate of continuation notification effect A while there is one or more reserved balls than when the time-saving effect is 10 to 50 times, and the rate of continuation notification effect B and continuation notification effect C will be higher. Also, the possibility of continuation notification effect D being selected, which cannot be selected when the time-saving effect is 10 to 50 times, will be even higher than when the time-saving effect is 100 times.

In this way, in this 40th control example, the chance time waiting effect is configured to execute an effect that notifies the number of time-saving times, and the selection ratio of the icon combination that is displayed first in the notification effect is made different depending on the number of time-saving times, thereby realizing a game feature that allows the player to predict the number of time-saving times based on the icon combination. This can further increase the player's interest in the game while the chance time waiting effect is being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 1164(b), the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 40th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 1164(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1164(b), the RAM 223 in this 40th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 32nd control example (see FIG. 959(b)) in that a standby performance flag 223ja, a standby performance count counter 223jb, and a standby period timer 223jd are added. It also differs in that the defeat count counter 223i, remaining defeat count counter 223j, specific number surfaced flag 223k, rush period measurement counter 223m, prize ball count counter 223n, reserved consecutive flag 223o, round count counter 223p, SW valid time counter 223q, right hit flag 223r, V winning flag 223s, fixed performance flag 223t, and game environment storage area 223u have been deleted.

The standby effect flag 223ja is a flag indicating whether or not the chance time standby effect (see Fig. 1150(b) and Fig. 1151) is being executed. If it is on, it means that the chance time standby effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the chance time standby effect is not being executed. This standby effect flag 223ja is set to on when a state command indicating a transition to the second time-saving state is received from the main control device 110 (see S3451A in Fig. 1176), and is set to off at the timing when the chance time standby effect ends (see S5712A in Fig. 1181 and S4617A in Fig. 1182). When a new variable display effect is to be started while this standby effect flag 223ja is on, the above-mentioned standby effect selection table 222ja (see Fig. 1165) is referenced to set the variable display effect of the variable display mode with the new chance time standby effect.

The standby effect count counter 223jb is a counter for counting the number of changes during the execution period of the chance time standby effect (see Fig. 1150(b) and Fig. 1151). The initial value of this standby effect count counter 223jb is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time a new performance mode is executed during the execution period of one chance time standby effect (see S3455A in Fig. 1176 and S5710A in Fig. 1181). In the chance time standby effect, when this standby effect count counter 223jb becomes 4, the performance is terminated and transitions to the normal chance time performance. This is intended to prevent the chance time standby effect from continuing endlessly when an irregular playing method is executed in which the player continues to hit to the left during the execution of the chance time standby effect and the reserved ball of the first special pattern is maintained at 1 or more.

The standby period timer 223jc is a timer that measures the elapsed time after the start of the lottery for the normal symbol in the chance time (second time-saving state). The initial value of this standby period timer 223jc is set to 0, and a timer value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set each time the lottery for the normal symbol is executed after the chance time standby effect ends (see S5608A in FIG. 1179), and the value is updated by subtracting it each time the effect update process 40 (see FIG. 1182) is executed. If this standby period timer 223jc is updated to 0, it is determined that the timing of the lottery for the normal symbol and the timing of the start of the lottery for the first special symbol are significantly different, and a pseudo-variable display effect is started to notify the result of the lottery for the normal symbol that started 0.2 seconds ago (see S4614A in FIG. 1182). This allows for a suitable presentation style to be achieved because even if the timing of the selection of the first special symbol and the normal symbol differs, the variable display presentation can be executed based on the result of the selection of the normal symbol, which has a higher actual expectation of a jackpot.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 40th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1166 to Fig. 1173, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 40th control example will be described in detail. First, referring to Fig. 1166, the details of the special symbol variation process 40 (S104A) in the 40th control example will be described. Fig. 1166 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 40 (S104A). This special symbol variation process 40 (S104A) is a process for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b during the variation display of the special symbol, similar to the special symbol variation process (see Fig. 964) in the 32nd control example described above.

In the variable display setting process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in this 40th control example, the same processes as those in S201 to S207 and S211 to S223 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 964) in the 32nd control example described above are executed in each of the processes S201 to S207 and S211 to S223. In addition, in the variable display setting process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in this 40th control example, when the process of S207 or the process of S214 is completed, the special pattern determination process 40 is executed (S209A) instead of the special pattern determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example, and then the special pattern variation pattern selection process 40 is executed (S210A) instead of the special pattern variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 966) in the 32nd control example, and this process is terminated. Details of the special pattern determination process 40 (S209A) and the special pattern change pattern selection process 40 (S210A) will be described later with reference to Figures 1167 and 1168, and Figures 1169 and 1170, respectively.

In the special symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result for the special symbol is not a big win (S218: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a time-saving symbol win (S225A), and if it is a time-saving symbol win (S225A: Yes), the time-saving end condition corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol that was won this time is set for the time-saving counter 223f, the small win counter s, and the normal power operation counter 223ja (S226A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S225A that the current lottery result for the special symbol is not a time-saving symbol win (S225A: No), the process proceeds to S222.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S222 that the current lottery result for the special symbol is not a small win (S222: No), or if the process of S223 is completed, the time-saving update process 40 is executed (S224A) instead of the time-saving update process (see FIG. 968) in the above-mentioned 32nd control example, and this process is terminated. Details of this time-saving update process 40 (S224A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1171.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol determination process 40 (S209A) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1167. This special symbol determination process 40 (S209A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example, and is a process for executing a lottery for special symbols, similar to the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example. In the special symbol determination process 40 (S209A) in the 40th control example, each of the processes S301 to S305 is executed in the same manner as each of the processes S301 to S305 in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example.

In addition, in the special symbol determination process 40 (see FIG. 1167) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the lottery result for the special symbol is not a jackpot (S303: No), then the miss process 40 is executed (S311A) to execute control according to the type of miss, and this process ends. Details of this miss process 40 (S311A) will be described with reference to FIG. 1168.

Fig. 1168 is a flow chart showing this loss processing 40 (S311A). In this loss processing 40 (S311A), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current special pattern is a time-saving pattern winning (S2101A), and if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a time-saving pattern winning (S2101A: Yes), the time-saving pattern type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the time-saving pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101A, if it is determined that the result of the current special pattern lottery is not a time-saving pattern win (S2101A: No), then it is determined whether or not the result of the current special pattern lottery is a small win (S2103A), and if it is determined that it is a small win (S2103A: Yes), the result of the special pattern lottery is set to a small win (S2104A), the small win type corresponding to the value of the small win type counter C5 is set as the small win pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (S2105A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2103A, if it is determined that the result of the current special pattern lottery is not a small win (S2103A: No), the processes of S2104A and S2105A are skipped and this process is terminated.

By executing this miss process 40 (see FIG. 1168), if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (other than a jackpot), the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result can be appropriately set.

Next, referring to FIG. 1169, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A) in this 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1169 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A). This special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 966) in the 32nd control example described above.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in this 40th control example, in each process of S401 to S408, the same process as each process of S401 to S408 in the fluctuation pattern selection process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 966) is executed. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big win (S401: No), the failure time type determination process 40 for selecting a fluctuation pattern in the event of a miss (including a small win or a time-saving symbol win) is executed (S421A), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of this failure time type determination process 40 (S421A) will be described with reference to FIG. 1170.

Fig. 1170 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the type of loss (S421A). In the process for determining the type of loss (S421A), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a winning time-saving symbol (S2201A), and if it is determined that the winning time-saving symbol is a winning time-saving symbol (S2201A: Yes), the type of the time-saving symbol is determined by referring to the time-saving symbol type selection table 202ja (see Fig. 1163(b)) (S2202A), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special pattern is not a time-saving pattern winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special pattern is a small win or not (S2203A), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S2203A: Yes), the small win type is determined by referring to the small win type selection table 202fj (see FIG. 1163(a)) (S2204A), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2203A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special pattern is not a small win (i.e., a normal miss (complete miss)) (S2203A: No), the process of S2204A is skipped and this process ends as it is.

By executing this miss type determination process 40 (see FIG. 1170), if the result of the special pattern lottery is a time-saving pattern win or a small win, the time-saving pattern type or small win type can be appropriately determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 1171, the time-saving update process 40 (S224A) in this 40th control example will be described in detail. This time-saving update process 40 (S224A) is a process executed in place of the time-saving update process (see FIG. 968) in the 32nd control example, and, like the time-saving update process (see FIG. 968), it updates various counter values for determining the time-saving end condition, and is a process for ending the time-saving state when it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met.

In the time-saving update process 40 in this 40th control example (see FIG. 1171), steps S601 to S605 and S607 are the same as steps S601 to S605 and S607 in the time-saving update process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 968).

In addition, in the time-saving update process 40 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1171), when the process of S605 is completed, the values of the small win counter 203s and the normal power operation counter 203ja are reset (set) to 0 (S621A) and the process proceeds to S607. The reason why the process of S621A is executed instead of S606 in the time-saving update process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 968) is that the normal power operation counter 203ja is provided in the 40th control example instead of the special pattern 2 counter 203t for determining the third end condition in the 32nd control example. In other words, in the 32nd control example, a time-saving end condition was set that is established when the number of times the second special pattern is drawn reaches a specified number of times, but in the 40th control example, instead, a time-saving end condition is set that is established when the number of times the winning game of the normal pattern is executed reaches a specified number of times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1171, in the time-saving update process 40 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1171), if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h has not been subtracted to 0 (S604: No), then it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol corresponding to the variable display that has become the timing for stopping the variation this time is a small win (S622A), and if it is determined that it is not a small win (S622A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S622A that the result of the lottery for the special symbol corresponding to the variable display this time is a small win (S622A: Yes), first, the small win start flag 203n is set to ON to set the start of the small win game (S623A), and then the value of the small win counter 203s is decremented by 1 (S624A).

When the process of S624A is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the small win counter 203s has been subtracted to 0 (S625A). If it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203s has been subtracted to 0 (S625A: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (second end condition) based on the number of small wins reaching the specified number of times has been established, so each process of S626A to S628A for ending the time-saving state is executed. More specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by updating the data in the game state storage area 203g to data corresponding to the normal state (S626A), and the time-saving end condition is cleared by resetting (setting) each value of the time-saving counter 203h and the normal power operation counter 203ja to 0 (S627A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S628A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S625 that the value of the small win counter 203s has not been decremented to 0 (S625A: No), this means that the second termination condition has not been met, so the processes of S626A to S628A are skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1172, the normal symbol variation process 40 (S106A) in this 40th control example will be described. This normal symbol variation process 40 (S106A) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 972) in the 32nd control example described above, and like the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 972), it is a process for drawing a lottery for a normal symbol and setting the opening and closing control of the electric roler 640a when a normal symbol wins. FIG. 1172 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process 40 (S106A).

In the normal pattern change processing 40 (see FIG. 1772) in this 40th control example, the same processing as S1101 to S1108, S1111, S1115 to S1117, and S1121 in the normal pattern change processing (see FIG. 972) in the 32nd control example described above is executed in each of the processes S1101 to S1108, S1111, S1113, S1115 to S1117, and S1121.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S1108 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (i.e., the current game state is the first or second time-saving state) (S1108: Yes), the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained by referring to the second winning random number table 202cj for the time-saving state (see FIG. 1161(a)) (S1131A), and the process proceeds to S1111. In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S1108 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (i.e., the current game state is the normal state) (S1108: No), the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained by referring to the second winning random number table 202cj for the normal state (see FIG. 1161(a)) (S1132A), and the process proceeds to S1111.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1172, in the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a normal symbol win (S1111: Yes), a normal symbol win process is executed (S1133A) to identify the type of win of the normal symbol and notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the win type, and the process proceeds to S1134A. Details of this normal symbol win process (S1133A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1173(a). In the process of S1133A or the process of S1134A executed after the process of S1113 is completed, the variation time is set to 1 second (S1134A), and this process is terminated.

In the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in the 40th control example, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol this time is determined to be a win in the process of S1117, a third end condition determination process is executed to determine whether or not a time-saving end condition (third end condition) based on the number of wins of the normal symbol is established (S1135A). Details of this third end condition determination process (S1135A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1173 (b). When the processing of S1135A is completed, it is next determined whether the winning normal symbol this time is a normal symbol A (S1136A). If it is determined that the winning normal symbol this time is a normal symbol A (S1136A: Yes), the displacement pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the first displacement pattern for normal symbol A (i.e., a displacement pattern that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) (S1137A), and the processing proceeds to S1121. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1136 that the winning normal symbol this time is not a normal symbol A (i.e., a displacement pattern that makes it possible to easily enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a jackpot win is essentially confirmed), the displacement pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the second displacement pattern for normal symbol B (i.e., a displacement pattern that makes it possible to easily enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a jackpot win is essentially confirmed) (S1138A), and the processing proceeds to S1121.

Next, referring to FIG. 1173(a), the details of the above-mentioned normal pattern winning process (S1133A) will be described. FIG. 1173(a) is a flowchart showing this normal pattern winning process (S1133A). When this normal pattern winning process (S1133A) is executed, first, the normal pattern winning type selection table 202jb (see FIG. 1163(c)) is referenced to determine the normal pattern winning type according to the current game state (S2301A), and then a normal pattern winning command for notifying the determined normal pattern winning type to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S2302A). The normal pattern winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal pattern winning command, it identifies the winning type of the normal pattern from the normal pattern winning command and performs performance control taking into account the identified winning type. In particular, in a time-saving state where a normal winning B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, may be won, each time a normal pattern lottery is executed, a performance is executed to indicate whether or not the normal winning B has been won. After the processing of S2302A is completed, the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 to indicate a normal winning is set (S2303A), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this normal winning process (see FIG. 1173(a)), the normal winning type can be determined at a ratio according to the game state (normal state, first time-saving state, second time-saving state). In other words, the probability of normal winning B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot, can be varied according to the game state, so that game states with different effective jackpot probabilities can be created.

Next, referring to FIG. 1173(b), the details of the third end condition determination process (S1135A) described above will be described. FIG. 1173(b) is a flowchart showing this third end condition determination process (S1135A). As shown in FIG. 1173(b), when this third end condition determination process (S1135A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (S2331A). If it is determined that the counter value of the normal power operation counter 203j is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2331A: No), this means that the current game state is a normal state and there is no need to determine whether the third end condition is met, and this process is terminated as is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2331A that the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (is equal to or greater than 1) (S2331A: Yes), this means that the current game state is in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state), so the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja is updated by subtracting 1 (S2332A), and it is determined whether the value of the normal power operation counter 203ja after subtraction has been updated to 0 (S2333A). If it is determined in the processing of S2333A that the counter value of the normal power operation counter 203ja has been updated to 0 (S2333A: Yes), it is determined that the third termination condition is met, and the processing of S2334 to S2336 is executed to terminate the time-saving state. Specifically, the game status is set to the normal status by updating the data in the game status storage area 203g to data corresponding to the normal status (S2334A), and then the values of the time-saving counter 203h and the small win counter 203s are both reset to 0 (S2335A). Next, a status command indicating the normal status is set (S2336A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2333A that the counter value of the normal power operation counter 203ja after subtraction has not been updated to 0 (it has been updated to a value of 1 or more) (S2333A: No), it is determined that the third end condition has not been established, and each process of S2334A to S2336A is skipped, and this process ends as it is.

By executing this third termination condition determination process (see FIG. 1173(b)), the time-saving state can be ended when the number of times that winning games with normal symbols have been executed reaches a specified number. As a result, even if right-handed hits are continued during the time-saving state, which does not allow the lottery for the first special symbol to be executed, the time-saving state can be ended by executing the specified number of winning games with normal symbols. This prevents the occurrence of a malfunction in which the time-saving state continues until a normal symbol B is hit, even if right-handed hits are continued.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 40th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 40th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1174 to Fig. 1182. First, details of the command determination process 40 (S3113A) in the 40th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1174. This command determination process 40 (S3113A) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see Fig. 983) in the 32nd control example described above, and is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the main control device 110, similar to the command determination process (see Fig. 983).

In the command determination process 40 (see FIG. 1174) in this 40th control example, the processes of S3201 to S3211, S3213, and S3218 are the same as the processes of S3201 to S3211, S3213, and S3218 in the command determination process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 983). In addition, in the command determination process 40 (see FIG. 1174) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S3211 that a status command has been received (S3211: Yes), the status command process 40 is executed (S3231A) instead of the status command process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 985), and this process is terminated. Details of this status command process 40 (S3231A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1175 and FIG. 1176.

In addition, in the command determination process 40 (see FIG. 1174) in the 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S3213 that a win-related command has been received (S3213: Yes), the win-related process 40 (see FIG. 986) in the 32nd control example is replaced with the win-related process 40 (S3232A), and the process ends. Although not shown, this win-related process 40 (S3232A) differs from the win-related process (see FIG. 986) in the 32nd control example only in that the big win-related process 40 (S3504A) is replaced with the big win-related process (S3504), and the small win-related process 40 (S3508A) is replaced with the small win-related process (S3508). Details of the big win-related process 40 (S3504A) and the small win-related process 40 (S3508A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1177 and FIG. 1178, respectively.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3213 that the commands received from the main control unit 110 do not include any hit-related commands (S3213: No), then it is determined whether or not the commands received from the main control unit 110 include a regular hit command (S3233A), and if it is determined that a regular hit command is included (S3233A: Yes), regular hit command processing is executed to perform control according to the notified regular hit type (S3234A), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3233A that the commands received from the main control unit 110 do not include a regular hit command (S3233A: No), processing proceeds to S3218.

Next, the above-mentioned status command processing 40 (S3231A) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1175. As described above, this status command processing 40 (S3231A) is processing executed in place of the status command processing (see FIG. 985) in the 32nd control example, and, like the status command processing (see FIG. 985), is processing for performing control according to the game status notified by the status command.

In the state command processing 40 (see FIG. 1175) in this 40th control example, the same processing as the S3401 and S3402 processing of the state command processing (see FIG. 985) in the 32nd control example is executed in each of the S3401 and S3402 processing. In addition, in the state command processing 40 (see FIG. 1175) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3402 that the state command received this time is a state command notifying a transition to the normal state (S3402: Yes), a display back image command for setting a back image for the normal state is set (S3421A), the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is cleared (S3422A), and this processing is terminated. In addition, if the timing of the transition to the normal state is the start timing of normal hit B, the first suggestive effect based on winning the normal hit B (the Aim for the V effect above, see Fig. 1152 (b)) is set on a layer in front of the back image, making it difficult for the player to see the back image for the normal state, and drawing the player's attention to the first suggestive effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3402, if it is determined that the currently received status command is not a status command notifying a transition to the normal state (S3402: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command indicates a transition to the first time-saving state (S3423A), and if it is determined that the status command indicates a transition to the first time-saving state (S3423A: Yes), the time-saving information included in the received status command is stored in the time-saving information storage area 223h (S3424A), a display command indicating that a rush is in progress is set (S3425A), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3423A, if it is determined that the status command received this time is not a status command notifying a transition to the first time-saving state (S3423A: No), then it is determined whether the received status command is a status command notifying a transition to the second time-saving state (S3426A), and if it is determined that the status command is a status command notifying a transition to the second time-saving state (S3426A: Yes), the time-saving information included in the received status command is stored in the time-saving information storage area 223h (S3424A), and a display command showing a back image for the chance time standby performance is set (S3428A). Next, a standby performance setting process for setting the performance mode of the chance time standby performance is executed (S3429A), and this process is terminated. Details of this standby performance setting process (S3429A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1176. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3426A that the received status command is not a status command notifying the transition to the second time-saving status (S3426A: No), the processes of S3427A to S3429A are skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned standby performance setting process (S3429A) will be described with reference to FIG. 1176. FIG. 1176 is a flowchart showing this standby performance setting process (S3429A). In this standby performance setting process (S3429A), first, the standby performance flag 223ja is set to ON (S3451A), and then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 0 or not (S3452A). In the process of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 0 (S3452A: Yes), the performance mode corresponding to the current time reduction type (time reduction number of times) is specified by referring to the standby performance selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1165) (S3453A), and the execution of the standby performance of the specified performance mode is set (S3454A). Next, the value of the standby performance number counter 223jb is set to 1 (S3455A), and this process is terminated. In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S3452A that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S3452A), the processes of S3453A to S3455A are skipped and this process ends. This is because if there are reserved balls, it is sufficient to set a standby effect as the presentation mode of the variable display effect that is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special pattern based on the reserved balls, and there is no need to set the presentation mode in this process.

By executing this standby effect setting process (see FIG. 1176), when a transition is made to the second time-saving state without any reserved balls of the first special pattern, a chance time standby effect can be executed with an effect mode according to the type of the second time-saving state (number of time-saving times).

Next, referring to FIG. 1177, the details of the jackpot-related process 40 (S3504A) described above will be explained. This jackpot-related process 40 (S3504A) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 987) in the 32nd control example described above, and like the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 987), when various commands related to a jackpot are received, it is a process for performing control according to the type of command received.

The jackpot-related process 40 in this 40th control example (see FIG. 1177) differs from the jackpot-related process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 987) only in that S3601, S3602, S3608, S3609, S3611, and S3612 have been deleted. This is because the various effects that occur during a jackpot have been deleted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1178, the details of the small win related process 40 (S3508A) in this 40th control example will be described. This small win related process 40 (S3508A) is a process that is executed in place of the small win related process 40 (see FIG. 989) in the 32nd control example described above. FIG. 1178 is a flowchart showing this small win related process 40 (S3508A).

In the small win related processing 40 (see FIG. 1178) in this 40th control example, in the processing of S4201, S4206, and S4211, the same processing as the processing of S4201, S4206, and S4211 in the small win related processing in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 989) is executed. Also, in the small win related processing 40 (see FIG. 1178) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that a small win start command has been received (S4201: Yes), the start of the Aim for the V below performance (second suggestion performance, see FIG. 1154 (a)) is set (S4221A), and this processing is terminated. By executing the "Aim for the V below" effect (second suggestion effect), the player can aim the game ball at the V winning device 650 by hitting it to the right while playing the small win game, so that the game ball can be reliably ball-entered into the V winning device 650 during the open period of the opening and closing door 650f1 during the small win game, and the game ball can be ball-entered into the specific area 650e3.

In addition, in the small win related processing 40 in this 40th control example (see FIG. 1178), if it is determined in the processing of S4206 that a small win end command has been received (S4206: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current small win is a small win game executed in the first time-saving state (strictly speaking, a small win game executed based on a game ball entering the second ball entry port 640 during the opening period of a normal win B after the normal win B has started in the first time-saving state and fallen into the normal state) (S4222A). In the process of S4222A, if it is determined that the small win was played in the first time-saving state (S4222A: Yes), this means that even though the small win was won in the first time-saving state (rush), the game ball did not pass through the specific area 650e3 during the small win play because the player did not hit to the right, etc., and the state will transition to the normal state, so a display small win end command is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the rush (S4223A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4222A that the small win game was not executed in the first time-saving state (it was executed based on winning the normal win B in the second time-saving state) (S4222A: No), this means that even though a small win was won in the first time-saving state (rush), the game ball did not pass through the specific area 650e3 during the small win game because the player did not hit to the right, etc., and a transition to the normal state will occur, so a display small win end command is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the chance timing (S4224A), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the small win-related processing in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the processing of S4211 that a V pass command has been received (S4211: Yes), a display command is set to execute an effect indicating a big win (S4225A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1179, the details of the normal symbol win command processing (S3234A) in this 40th control example will be described. As described above, this normal symbol win command processing (S3234A) is processing for performing control according to the type of win of the normal symbol notified by the normal symbol win command. FIG. 1179 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol win command processing (S3234A).

As shown in FIG. 1179, in the normal winning command processing (S3234A), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the first time-saving state based on the data stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g (S5601A). If it is determined that it is the first time-saving state (S5601A: Yes), then, according to the normal winning type notified by the normal winning command, the type of treasure chest to be selected in the presentation in which the rabbit character 801 selects the type of treasure chest (see FIG. 1154 (b) and FIG. 155) is determined by lottery (S5602A), and a rush performance in which the determined type of treasure chest is selected is executed during the normal pattern change time (S5603A). In addition, in the lottery by the process of S5602A, for example, if the lottery result is normal winning A, the normal treasure chest 810b is selected at a rate of 80%, the small treasure chest 810c is selected at a rate of 20%, while if the lottery result is normal winning B, the shiny treasure chest is selected at a rate of 35%, the normal treasure chest 810b is selected at a rate of 55%, and the small treasure chest 810c is selected at a rate of 10%. As a result, if the shiny treasure chest 810a is selected, it is confirmed that the normal winning B, which is a substantial jackpot, has been won, while if the small treasure chest 810c is selected, the possibility of the disadvantageous normal winning A increases, so the player can pay more attention to the type of treasure chest selected by the rabbit character 801 while playing the game. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5601A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the first time-shortened state (S5601A: No), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second time-shortened state (S5604A). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the second time-shortened state (S5604A: No), this means that a normal win has been won in a normal state in which it is not possible to win normal win B, and this means that the gaming state does not require setting a performance based on the fluctuation of the normal pattern, so this processing is terminated. In contrast, in the processing of S5604A, if it is determined that the current game state is the second time-saving state (S5604A: Yes), it is determined whether the standby effect flag 223ja is on (i.e., the chance time standby effect is being executed) (S5605A), and if it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is on (i.e., the chance time standby effect is being executed) (S5605A: Yes), it is then determined whether the current lottery result is a normal win B (S5606A), and if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal win B (S5606A: Yes), the result of the ongoing chance time standby effect is rewritten and set to a performance mode that selects an icon (suggestive pattern) with the word "Congratulations" (S5607A), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5606A that the current normal hit is not normal hit B (i.e., it is normal hit A) (S5606A: No), the process of S5607A is skipped and the process ends.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S5605A that the standby effect flag 223ja is off (i.e., the chance time standby effect is not being executed) (S5605A: No), a timer value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the standby period timer 223jc (S5608A), and this processing is terminated. By executing this normal symbol winning command processing (see FIG. 1179), it is possible to set the performance mode according to the lottery result of the normal symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 1180, the variable presentation setting process 40 (S4304A) in this 40th control example will be described in detail. This variable presentation setting process 40 (S4304A) is a process executed in place of the variable presentation setting process (see FIG. 995) in the 32nd control example described above, and like the variable presentation setting process (see FIG. 995), it is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation of the third pattern executed in the third pattern display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern.

In the variable performance setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in this 40th control example, the same processes as those in S4401 and S4403 in the variable performance setting process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 995) are executed in the respective processes of S4401 and S4403. In addition, in the variable performance setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in this 40th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the variable display performance to be started based on the variable pattern command received this time is a variable display performance based on the variable display of the second special pattern (S4403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special pattern this time is a small win B40 (S4412A). In other words, if the game ball enters the specific area 650e3, it is determined whether or not the type of small win is a type in which a 3-round big win with a small number of rounds (unfavorable) is executed (S4412A), and if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special pattern is not a small win B40 (that is, the lottery result of the second special pattern is a big win or a small win A40, and in either case, a favorable 10-round big win is executed) (S4412A: No), a variable display mode with a promotion effect (see FIG. 1153) of a performance mode in which promotion is successful is determined as the variable display effect of the second special pattern (S4413A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4412A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special pattern is a disadvantageous small win B40 (S4412A: Yes), a variable display mode with a promotion effect of a performance mode in which promotion is unsuccessful is determined as the variable display effect of the second special pattern (S4414A), and this process is terminated.

In contrast, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the variable display effect to be started based on the currently received variable pattern command is not a variable display effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol (S4403: No), then it is determined whether the current game state is normal or not (S4415A), and if it is determined that it is normal (S4415A: Yes), the variable display mode of the variable display effect is determined based on the lottery result notified by the currently received variable pattern command and the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command (S4416A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4415A, if it is determined that the current game state is not normal (S4415A: No), this means that it is the start timing of the variable display effect of the first special symbol during the chance time (second time-shortening state), so a chance time performance setting process for setting the performance mode during the chance time is executed (S4417A), and this process is terminated. Details of this chance time performance setting process (S4417A) will be described with reference to FIG. 1181.

Figure 1181 is a flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process (S4417A). As shown in Figure 1181, when this chance time performance setting process (S4417A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the standby performance flag 223ja is on or not (S5701A). If it is determined that the standby performance flag 223ja is off (S5701A: No), this means that the chance time standby performance (see Figures 1150 (b) and 1151) is not being executed, and it is highly likely that a state is formed in which the drawing of the normal symbol and the drawing of the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously. Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the standby period timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S5702A). If it is determined that the value of the standby period timer 223jc is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (S5702A: No), the chance time standby performance is not being executed. This means that even though the time has already expired, there is a relatively long time difference (at least 0.2 seconds or more) between the normal winning and the selection timing of the first special symbol, and that a pseudo variable display effect to show the result of the normal winning is being executed as a variable display effect with priority. Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol corresponding to the normal winning B is currently being displayed (S5703A). If the normal symbol corresponding to the normal winning B is currently being displayed (S5703A: Yes), a pseudo winning variable display to show the result of the normal winning B should already be set, so the process ends without setting (overwriting) the variable display effect to show the result of the current special symbol selection.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5703 that the normal pattern corresponding to the normal winning pattern B is not currently being displayed (S5703A: No), there is a high possibility that a pseudo-missing variable effect to indicate a normal winning pattern A is being executed, so it is then determined whether or not the result of the current special pattern lottery is a jackpot (S5704A), and if it is a jackpot (S5704A: Yes), the jackpot is set to be announced by a revival effect after the pseudo-missing variable effect ends (S5705A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5704A that the result of the current special pattern lottery is a miss (S5704A: No), the process of S5705A is skipped and this process ends.

In contrast to these, if it is determined in the processing of S5702A that the value of the waiting time timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S5702A: Yes), this means that the drawing of the first special pattern started immediately (within 0.2 seconds) after the drawing of the normal pattern started, and this means that the operation is normal during the chance time. Next, the display mode is determined according to the drawing result of the normal pattern corresponding to the changing display of the normal pattern currently being executed and the drawing result of the first special pattern (S5706A), the value of the waiting time timer 223jc is reset to 0 (S5707A), and this processing is terminated. By processing S5706A, it is possible to set a variable display mode that takes into account the results of the lottery for the normal symbols. If a normal winning symbol B, which is determined at a rate of 3% in the lottery for the normal symbols, is determined, or if a jackpot for a special symbol with a probability of 1/320 is won, the variable display mode is set so that the same third symbol is lined up as in the case of a jackpot, so that during chance time, it is possible to realize novel behavior that makes it seem as if the probability of a jackpot for the first special symbol has increased. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the process of S5701A, if it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is on (S5701A: Yes), the standby effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1165) is referenced to determine the performance mode according to the current lottery result, the number of time-saving times set in the second time-saving state, and the current number of reserved balls for the first special pattern (S5708A), and the value of the standby effect count counter 223jb is updated by adding 1 (S5709A). Next, it is determined whether the value of the standby effect count counter 223jb after the addition has become 4 (S5710A), and if it is determined that it has become 4 (S5710: Yes), the standby effect flag 223ja is set to off (S5711A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5710A, if it is determined that the value of the standby effect count counter 223jb after the addition is not 4 (S5710A: No), the process of S5711A is skipped and this process is terminated as it is. By executing the processes of S5710A and S5711A, the number of times the chance time standby effect changes can be limited to a maximum of four times, so even if the player hits the ball to the left during the chance time standby effect and the reserved ball of the first special pattern is not interrupted, it is possible to prevent the chance time standby effect from continuing indefinitely.

Next, referring to FIG. 1182, the details of the performance update process 40 (S3112A) in this 40th control example will be described. This performance update process 40 (S3112A) is a process executed in place of the performance update process (see FIG. 997) in the 32nd control example described above, and is a process for updating the performance mode, similar to the performance update process (see FIG. 997).

In the performance update process 40 in this 40th control example (see FIG. 1182), first, it is determined whether the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S4611A). If it is determined that the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S4611A: Yes), then the value of the waiting period timer is updated by subtracting it (S4612A), and it is determined whether the timer value of the updated waiting period timer 223jc is 0 (S4613A). In the process of S4613A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc has been updated to 0 (S4613A: Yes), it means that the drawing of the first special symbol has not started even though a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has passed since the drawing of the normal symbol, and since this is an operation that deviates from the basic operation of the chance time in which the drawing of the normal symbol and the drawing of the first special symbol are performed almost simultaneously, a pseudo-variation performance of a performance mode according to the drawing result of the normal symbol variation being performed is performed during the period until the end of the normal symbol win based on the variation display of the normal symbol being performed (S4614A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4613A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc after the update is not 0 (S4613A: No), it cannot be determined whether or not the operation deviates from the basic operation of the chance time in which the drawing of the normal symbol and the drawing of the first special symbol are performed almost simultaneously, so the process of S4614A is skipped and this process is terminated.

In contrast, in the process of S4611A, if it is determined that the value of the standby period timer 223jc is 0 (S4611A: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the chance time standby effect (S4615A), and if it is determined that it is the timing to end the chance time standby effect (S4615A: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current state is a fluctuation stop state (S4616A). In the process of S4616A, if it is determined that the fluctuation stop state is present (S4616A: Yes), this means that when the time-saving pattern is won, the chance time standby effect is executed for 5 seconds with 0 reserved balls for the first special pattern, and the chance time standby effect has ended with the number of reserved balls still at 0, so the standby effect flag 223ja is set to OFF (S4617A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S4615A determines that it is not time for the standby effect to end (S4615A: No), and if the process of S4616A determines that the fluctuation has not stopped (S4616A: No), the process of S4617A is skipped and the process ends.

By executing this presentation update process 40 (see FIG. 1182), if an operation deviates from the basic operation of drawing the normal symbol and the first special symbol almost simultaneously during chance time, a pseudo-variable presentation can be executed to show the result of the normal symbol drawing, which has an effective jackpot probability (determination rate of normal symbol B winning), of 3%, in preference to a variable display presentation to show the result of the first special symbol drawing, which has a jackpot probability of 1/320, thereby realizing a more suitable presentation mode.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured to be able to form a first time-saving state in which the effective probability of winning a jackpot is higher, and a second time-saving state in which the effective probability of winning a jackpot is lower than the first time-saving state and higher than the normal state (less advantageous than the first time-saving state and more advantageous than the normal state), as time-saving states more advantageous than the normal state. More specifically, while the first time-saving state can be set as one type of game state after the end of a jackpot, the second time-saving state is set if a time-saving symbol is selected in a special symbol lottery. In addition, in this 40th control example, when the drawing of the second special pattern is executed, there is a 100% probability of winning either a big win or a small win which essentially guarantees a big win (a big win is essentially confirmed at the time the drawing of the second special pattern is executed), while the configuration is such that the possibility of the ball entering the second ball entry port 640, which triggers the drawing of the second special pattern, varies depending on the type of time-saving state. That is, in the 40th control example, when a normal pattern lottery is executed, the normal pattern win is won at a rate of 100% regardless of the game state, and the rate at which a normal pattern win type (normal pattern win B) that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (i.e., a jackpot is essentially confirmed) is determined is set to a low probability (0%) in the normal state, a high probability (80%) in the first time-saving state, and a probability between the first time-saving state and the normal state (3%) in the second time-saving state, so that the jackpot probability when a normal pattern lottery is executed is different for each game state. This allows the jackpot expectation when a normal pattern lottery is executed to differ for each game state, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 40th control example, the central through gate 67c, which is the trigger for drawing the normal pattern, is located at a position (above the first ball entrance 64) through which the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for drawing the first special pattern, must pass before entering the first ball entrance 64, and further, the period from when the drawing for the normal pattern starts to when the winning normal pattern based on the drawing for the normal pattern ends is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special pattern. In other words, every time the drawing for the first special pattern is performed, the drawing for the normal pattern is performed almost simultaneously (just before the drawing for the first special pattern is performed). In addition, a right through gate 67r that triggers the selection of normal symbols is provided at a position where the game ball can pass when the player hits from the right, but the ratio of game balls shot by left hits that pass through the central through gate 67c and the ratio of game balls shot by right hits that pass through the right through gate 67r are configured to be approximately the same. As a result, particularly in the second time-saving state, the selection of normal symbols and the selection of the first special symbols are performed almost simultaneously by left hits, rather than only the selection of normal symbols by right hits, so that the possibility of winning the jackpot during the second time-saving state is increased. Specifically, if a right-handed hit is made in the second time-saving state, a jackpot will be awarded only if the player wins a normal symbol B (a normal symbol B in which the electric device 640a is displaced in a second displacement pattern that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) which has a winning rate of approximately 3% in the normal symbol drawing (it is possible to draw a second special symbol which essentially guarantees a jackpot), whereas if a left-handed hit is made, in addition to the possibility of winning a normal symbol B (a hit in which the electric device 640a is displaced in the second displacement pattern) in the normal symbol drawing, there is also a possibility of winning a jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol, so that playing can be done by left-handed hitting in the second time-saving state. As described above, when the ball is hit from the left, the game ball that passes through the central through gate 67c always enters the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are performed almost simultaneously, so that the actual probability of winning the lottery for the first special symbol is high (the actual probability of winning the lottery for the first special symbol is about 1/320, and the probability of winning the lottery for the normal symbol for which the second displacement pattern is set is about 1/33, which is the combined probability of winning the lottery for the first special symbol). This realizes an extremely innovative gameplay. In other words, it is more advantageous to hit from the left than to hit from the right, and it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the actual probability of winning the lottery can be made different in multiple game states (normal state and second time-saving state) in which the lottery content for the special symbol (the probability of winning the lottery for the special symbol) is the same, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the 40th control example, an end condition based on the number of times a normal symbol winning game is executed (third end condition) is stipulated as one of the time-saving end conditions. More specifically, in the first time-saving state, the time-saving state is configured to end when a normal symbol winning game is executed once, and in the second time-saving state, the time-saving state is configured to end when a normal symbol winning game is executed 10 to 1000 times depending on the type of time-saving symbol that has been won. The reason for this is that in the 40th control example, the board configuration allows only the drawing of the normal pattern to be performed without the drawing of the first special pattern by hitting the right hand, and the game is designed so that the big win is essentially confirmed by winning the normal pattern winning B. Therefore, if the end condition based on the number of times the special pattern is drawn (first end condition) and the end condition based on the number of times the small win game is performed (second end condition) are specified as the time-saving end condition, a problem will occur in which the time-saving state continues until the normal pattern winning B, which essentially confirms the big win, is won if the right hand is continued after the transition to the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. Therefore, in the 40th control example, the end condition based on the number of times the normal pattern winning game is performed (third end condition) is specified as the time-saving end condition, and even if the right hand is continued in the time-saving state and the special pattern is not drawn at all, the time-saving state is terminated by the normal pattern winning game being performed a specified number of times. This prevents the problem of the time-saving state always continuing until the normal win B is won (i.e., until the jackpot is essentially won).

In addition, in the 40th control example, when a variable display performance to show the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed in the second time-saving state, a performance mode is set that takes into account the lottery result of the normal symbol executed immediately before. In other words, if the normal symbol lottery B, which essentially determines a jackpot, is won, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a miss, a variable display performance in a performance mode that is difficult to distinguish from the variable display mode that notifies the jackpot is executed. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the normal symbol can be notified together by one variable display performance, so that the player can be made to think that the apparent probability of a jackpot in one variable display performance has increased. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game and to realize a preferable performance mode. Furthermore, in the second time-saving state in the 40th control example, when the basic operation of drawing the first special symbol and the normal symbol is deviated from the basic operation of drawing the first special symbol almost simultaneously (the timing of drawing the first special symbol is deviated from the timing of drawing the normal symbol by at least 0.2 seconds), the result of drawing the normal symbol is preferentially notified by the variable display performance over the result of drawing the first special symbol. In other words, a pseudo variable display performance is executed based on the drawing of the normal symbol, and when the drawing of the first special symbol is executed during the execution of the pseudo variable display performance, the performance mode of notifying the result of drawing the first special symbol (the big win) is set only when the result of drawing the first special symbol is a big win and the pseudo variable display performance being executed is a variable display performance that notifies a miss (a normal symbol win A that is impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 640). By configuring it in this way, the lottery results for the normal symbols, which have a high effective probability of winning, can be announced in priority over the lottery results for the first special symbols, which have a low effective probability of winning, making it possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

In the 40th control example, the proportion of game balls passing through the through gate (center through gate 67c or right through gate 67r) is approximately the same for left and right hits, but this is not limited to this. For example, the proportion of game balls shot by right hits that pass through the right through gate 67r may be higher than the proportion of game balls shot by left hits that pass through the left through gate 67c (for example, one game ball passes through the right through gate 67r for every two game balls shot by right hits). When configured in this way, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to select a game method in the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. In other words, when a left hit is performed in the time-saving state, the frequency of drawing the normal symbol is low (about once every 10 to 15 game balls are shot by a left hit), while the first special symbol is drawn every time the normal symbol is drawn, so that not only will the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern be a winning symbol in the normal symbol drawing, but the first special symbol can also be expected to be a big win. On the other hand, when a right hit is performed in the time-saving state, the frequency of drawing the normal symbol is high (about once every two game balls are shot by a right hit), so that the efficiency of drawing the normal symbol in the time-saving state can be increased, while the first special symbol is not drawn, so that a gameplay in which the possibility of winning a big win during the time-saving state is reduced can be realized. Thus, depending on the gameplay method during the time-saving state (whether to hit from the left or right), a very innovative gameplay can be realized in which the player can choose between a gameplay in which the probability of hitting a jackpot during the time-saving state is relatively high but the lottery efficiency for normal symbols is poor (it takes a relatively long time to complete the time-saving state and a relatively large number of wasted balls occurs), and a gameplay in which the lottery efficiency for normal symbols is good but the probability of hitting a jackpot during the time-saving state is relatively low (the jackpot expectation decreases by the jackpot probability of 1/320 for the first special symbol). Thus, each player can select a gameplay that matches their own preferences, so that a gameplay that suits the tastes of more players can be realized, and the interest of players in the game can be further increased.

In this 40th control example, the first time-saving state is configured as a game state that can be set as the game state after the end of a jackpot, and the second time-saving state is configured as a game state that is set when a time-saving symbol is won, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first time-saving state may be configured to be set in part or all of the time when a time-saving symbol is won, or the second time-saving state may be configured to be set as the game state after the end of a jackpot.

In the 40th control example, the ratio at which the normal winning B, which is a substantially confirmed winning combination, is determined is different between the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, so that the effective winning probability is different between the normal state, the first time-saving state, and the second time-saving state. However, the method of making the effective winning probability different is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be provided in which three types of states with different winning probabilities for special symbols are provided. That is, a normal state in which the winning probability for special symbols is about 1/320, a first time-saving state in which the winning probability for special symbols is about 1/1.25, and a second time-saving state in which the winning probability for special symbols is about 1/30 may be provided. By configuring in this way, at least the central through gate 67c can be eliminated, so that the board configuration can be simplified.

In this 40th control example, a right hit is notified in the first time-saving state, while a left hit is notified in the second time-saving state, but a left hit may also be notified in the second time-saving state. In other words, if a left hit is performed in the second time-saving state, a lottery for the first special symbol can be executed, increasing the possibility of a jackpot, so a left hit is slightly more advantageous. Therefore, by notifying a left hit in the second time-saving state, the player's advantage can be increased.

In the 40th control example, the time-saving end conditions are the first end condition that is established based on the total number of times that the special symbol is drawn, the second end condition that is established based on the number of times that the small jackpot is won, and the third end condition that is established based on the number of times that the winning game of the normal symbol is executed. In addition to these, for example, a fourth end condition that is established based on the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small jackpot that cannot win a V) becomes a specified number of times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the second time-saving state to end before the number of times that the winning game of the normal symbol is executed becomes the specified number, particularly in the second time-saving state, so that even if there is a margin in the number of time-saving times (the number of times that the winning game of the normal symbol is executed) in the second time-saving state, the player can play while feeling a sense of tension. In this case, the variable display effect when a predetermined lottery result is reached may be configured to execute a fixed effect (for example, execute a missed reach effect) so that the player can understand that the predetermined lottery result has been reached. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to know the number of times remaining until the specified number of times for the predetermined lottery result is reached based on the number of times the fixed effect is executed, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 40th control example, the ceiling function (a function for setting the second time-saving state when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot reaches the ceiling number of times) was not provided, but the ceiling function may be installed. In this case, the second time-saving state set based on the number of times the ceiling number of times is reached may be set to the same degree of advantage as the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol (the allocation of the winning of the normal symbol B, which essentially determines the jackpot at a rate of about 3%), or may be set to a different degree of advantage. By setting a higher degree of advantage than the second time-saving state based on winning the time-saving symbol (for example, the allocation of a normal winning pattern to win the normal winning pattern B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot with a rate of about 10%), it is possible to have a stronger expectation of reaching the ceiling number of draws, and by setting a lower degree of advantage than the second time-saving state based on winning the time-saving symbol (for example, the allocation of a normal winning pattern to win the normal winning pattern B, which essentially guarantees a jackpot with a rate of about 1%), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to the game by playing with a small number of draws aiming for the ceiling number of draws. Also, in either case, by providing a ceiling function, even if a player becomes addicted, the player can play with the goal of reaching the ceiling number of draws, so it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

In the 40th control example, when the electric role 640a is open, the game ball is guided to the second ball entrance 640, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be combined with the above-mentioned 9th control example. That is, a first start opening that is opened and closed by a so-called non-electric role (first non-electric role) and serves as a lottery trigger for the first special pattern, and a second start opening that is opened and closed by a non-electric role (second non-electric role) and serves as a lottery trigger for the second special pattern are provided. Furthermore, a winning device is provided with a first non-electric operation gate that opens the first non-electric role when the game ball passes through, a second non-electric operation gate that opens the second non-electric role when the game ball passes through, and a distribution role that distributes the game ball that has entered the device to either the first non-electric operation gate or the second non-electric operation gate, and an electric role may be provided at a position that opens the winning device when a normal pattern is hit. Then, the allocation device is displaced by a fixed displacement action based on the winning of the normal symbol, and the winning types of the normal symbol are set to normal symbol win A, in which the winning device is opened during the arrangement allocated to the first non-electrically operated gate by the allocation device, and normal symbol win B, in which the winning device is opened during the arrangement allocated to the second non-electrically operated gate, and the ratio at which normal symbol win B is selected may be configured to be different in the normal state, the first time-saving state, and the second time-saving state, as in the 40th control example described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize behavior similar to that of the 40th control example described above.

In the 40th control example, when the second time-saving state is entered, the chance time standby effect is executed while the reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed, making it easier to hit the left hand after the reserved balls of the first special pattern are reduced to zero, and making it difficult for the action to deviate from the basic action in which the drawing of the normal pattern and the drawing of the first special pattern are performed almost simultaneously, but the method of making it difficult for the action during the chance time to deviate from the basic action (the drawing of the normal pattern and the drawing of the first special pattern are performed almost simultaneously) is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition to this, for example, when the reserved balls of the first special pattern are 1 or more in the chance time (second time-saving state), the change time of the first special pattern may be set to an extremely short change time (for example, 0.1 seconds). By configuring in this way, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be consumed in a relatively short time after the transition to chance time, making it less likely that the actions during chance time will deviate from the basic actions (actions in which the selection of normal symbols and the selection of the first special symbol are performed almost simultaneously). Also, for example, the reserved memory function for the first special symbol and the normal symbol may be eliminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably stop the fluctuation of both the first special symbol and the normal symbol at the time when the time-saving symbol is stopped and the transition to chance time (second time-saving state) is made. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the actions from deviating from the basic actions (actions in which the selection of normal symbols and the selection of the first special symbol are performed almost simultaneously).

In the 40th control example, when a time-saving symbol win occurs and chance time is entered, the chance time standby effect is executed until the variable display based on the reserved balls of the first special symbol ends (or until a specific period has passed after chance time is entered), and the effect is set as if chance time has not started, but the effect is not limited to the chance time standby effect. For example, the variable display effect based on the time-saving symbol win may be executed continuously until all reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed, so that the player feels as if chance time has not started, or the stop display period of the third symbol, which indicates a time-saving symbol win, may be executed continuously even after chance time is entered, until all reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed. Also, from the time when the variable display effect based on the winning of the time-saving symbol is ended (from the time when the third symbol indicating the winning of the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed) until the reserved ball of the first special symbol is consumed, only the effect indicating that the transition to the chance time has been confirmed may be executed, and based on the detection of the entrance of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 (and the central through gate 67c) after the reserved ball is consumed, an effect that clearly notifies the player that the chance time has started may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the chance time (second time-saving state) has not started, so that it is possible to prevent the player from starting to hit left while the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists, and thus to prevent the start timing of the variable display of the first special symbol from being out of sync with the start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol. In other words, the variable display effect can more reliably realize the playability of notifying the result of the effect that takes into account both the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the normal symbol executed almost simultaneously (immediately before) the lottery of the first special symbol, and therefore it is possible to further increase the interest of the player in the game.

In the 40th control example, the rate at which the normal winning B is determined in the normal state is set to 0%, the rate at which the normal winning B is determined in the first time-saving state is set to 80%, and the rate at which the normal winning B is determined in the second time-saving state is set to 3%, but this is not limited to this and can be set to any rate. For example, by configuring so that the normal winning B can be determined in the normal state (for example, determined at a rate of 0.1%), in addition to the jackpot being determined by the lottery of the first special pattern, it is also possible to expect the normal winning B to be determined by the lottery of the normal pattern even in the normal state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous. In addition, by increasing the determination rate of the normal winning B in the second time-saving state, it is possible to improve the actual jackpot expectation rate for each variable display performance in the second time-saving state, and by decreasing it, it is possible to decrease the jackpot expectation rate in the second time-saving state. Furthermore, by increasing the probability of winning a normal B hit in the first time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot (rate of consecutive wins) when transitioning to the first time-saving state can be increased, and by decreasing the probability of winning a normal B hit, the probability of winning a jackpot when transitioning to the first time-saving state can be decreased.

In the 40th control example, when a lottery for a normal symbol is executed, the probability of the normal symbol winning is set to 1/1 (100%) regardless of the game state, but this is not limited to this and can be set to any probability. As with the other control examples, a low probability state for the normal symbol and a high probability state for the normal symbol may be provided, and the normal state and the second time-saving state may be treated as low probability states for the normal symbol, while the first time-saving state is treated as a high probability state for the normal symbol. In this case, the probability of winning with a normal pattern may be set to 1/1.25 (80%) in a high probability state for normal patterns and 3/100 (3%) in a low probability state for normal patterns, and when a normal pattern wins in the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state), it is always set to normal pattern win B (the electric device 640a is displaced in the second displacement pattern), while when a normal pattern wins in the normal state, it is always set to normal pattern win A (the electric device 640a is displaced in the first displacement pattern). In other words, in the first time-saving state, which is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, the normal symbol winning B is always determined, which is a winning symbol for the normal symbol that is normally played at an 80% rate, and in the second time-saving state, which is set to a low probability state for normal symbols, the normal symbol winning B is always determined, which is a winning symbol for the normal symbol that is normally played at an 80% rate, and is a winning symbol for the normal symbol that is effectively a winning symbol, and in the normal state, the normal symbol winning is always determined, so that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, when a normal symbol wins, if the time-saving state is selected, the normal symbol winning B is selected, and if the normal state is selected, the normal symbol winning A is selected, and the operation identical to that of the 40th control example described above can be realized by a relatively simple control, so that the processing load after winning a normal symbol can be reduced.

In the 40th control example, regardless of whether it is a normal winning A or a normal winning B, the length of the period from when the lottery for the normal pattern starts in the second time-saving state until the winning of the normal pattern ends and the lottery for the next normal pattern can be executed is configured to be the same period as the fluctuation time of the first special pattern when no ball is detected entering the second ball entrance 640, so that the gameplay in which the lottery for the normal pattern and the lottery for the first special pattern are executed almost simultaneously during the second time-saving state can be maintained. However, at least in the case of a normal winning B, the period until the winning game of the normal pattern ends does not necessarily have to be made to match the fluctuation time of the first special pattern. For example, when a normal winning B is won, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern may be configured to be 1 second, the opening period of the normal pattern is 7 seconds, and the opening period of the electric role 640a is a maximum of 2 seconds, for a total of 10 seconds. By configuring in this way, the performance period in the case of a normal winning B (i.e., when a jackpot performance is executed) can be secured longer, so that the performance mode can be set more preferably.

In the 40th control example, the configuration is such that when the time-saving symbol is won in the normal state, the game state transitions directly to the second time-saving state without going through a jackpot, but the combination of game states is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, when the time-saving symbol is won in the second time-saving state, the game state transitions to the first time-saving state (or the second time-saving state B, which has a determination ratio of the normal symbol B equivalent to the first time-saving state). By configuring in this way, in addition to winning a jackpot in the second time-saving state, even if a time-saving symbol is won, an extremely advantageous state in which the time-saving state and the jackpot are repeated (looped) at a rate of 80% can be formed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, for example, when a time-saving symbol is won in the first time-saving state, the game state transitions to a game state in which the winning ratio of the normal symbol B is low (for example, the second time-saving state, or the first time-saving state B, which has a determination ratio of the normal symbol B equivalent to the second time-saving state). By configuring in this way, when a left hit is made in the first time-saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol can be performed almost simultaneously, which increases the chance of winning the first special symbol, but it also has the disadvantage that the advantage of the time-saving state itself decreases when the time-saving symbol is won, so that a novel gameplay can be realized in which the player can select a game method by considering the advantages and disadvantages. In addition, the game state is not limited to the time-saving state and the normal state, and for example, a high probability state of the special symbol in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is higher than normal may be provided, and the game state set to the low probability state of the special symbol (normal state, first time-saving state, second time-saving state) may be directly transitioned to the game state set to the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability state and non-time-saving state, high probability state and first time-saving state, high probability state and second time-saving state) without going through a jackpot. Conversely, the game state may be configured to be directly transitionable from a game state set to a high probability state to a game state set to a low probability state without a jackpot, or from a game state set to a high probability state to another game state set to a high probability state without a jackpot. In all of the above cases, the condition for changing the game state without a jackpot is not limited to winning a time-saving pattern, and may be configured to change the game state when, for example, a small win (non-V small win) set in the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 650f1 that does not allow a game ball to enter the specific area 650e3 is won, or the game state may be changed based on the total number of times that the special pattern has been drawn has reached a specified number, or the game state may be changed based on the total number of times that the second special pattern has been drawn has reached a specified number, or the game state may be changed based on the number of times that the winning game of the normal pattern has been executed has reached a specified number. This can diversify the gameplay, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

<41st control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1183 to Fig. 1211. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example described above, a plurality of time-saving states (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) are provided in which the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640, which is the chance of drawing the second special symbol that substantially determines the big win (the rate of winning the normal winning B that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is different as the time-saving state, and thus a plurality of game states in which the substantial probability of winning the big win is different are provided, although the probability of drawing the special symbol is the same.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example, as in the above-mentioned 40th control example, the effective probability of winning (the probability of a small win that effectively guarantees a big win) is different between the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol, but it differs from the 40th control example in that a lottery result of a complete miss is set for the drawing of the second special symbol. That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example differs from the 40th control example in that the effective probability of winning (the combined probability of a big win and a small win in the drawing of the special symbol) when the drawing of the second special symbol is executed is configured to be about 1/3 (about 2/3 probability of a miss). In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is different in that, although the number of time-saving times is the same, multiple time-saving states are provided in which the number of actual times of drawing the second special symbol is different from the time when the time-saving state is entered until the time when the drawing of the second special symbol based on all start winnings detected during the time-saving state is completed. More specifically, the configuration is provided with a time-saving state A in which the drawing of the special symbol can be performed substantially twice, and a time-saving state B in which the drawing of the special symbol can be performed substantially four times. Here, in this 40th control example, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state include a first termination condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn) reaches a specified number, a second termination condition that is established when the number of times the small win game is executed reaches a specified number, a third termination condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn reaches a specified number, and a fourth termination condition that is established when the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol reaches a specified number during the execution of the final time-saving fluctuation. The first to third termination conditions are common between time-saving state A and time-saving state B, and only the fourth termination condition is different, which makes the actual number of times the second special symbol is drawn different.

In addition, in this 41st control example, in addition to the time-saving states A and B, a time-saving state C is provided in which a time-saving end condition that will almost certainly continue until the next big win is set. In addition, in this 41st control example, a limit is set (a time-saving limit number of times) for the number of consecutive times of the time-saving state (the number of times the time-saving state and the big win are repeated without going through the normal state) and if a big win is won during the time-saving state C, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C again unless the time-saving limit number of times has been reached. In other words, once the time-saving state C is set, the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached (the big win of the time-saving limit number of times is almost certain), forming an extremely advantageous state. By configuring in this way, the player can be strongly expected to move to the time-saving state C, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Furthermore, in the 41st control example, by setting the normal symbol variation time, special symbol variation time, and normal symbol release pattern so that the reserved balls can be easily accumulated up to the upper limit number in the time-saving state C, when the time-saving state C and the jackpot are repeated until the time-saving limit number is reached and the state transitions to the normal state, the upper limit number (4 times) of reserved balls of the second special symbol are likely to be reserved. As a result, even after falling into the normal state, the player can be given an opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a jackpot probability of about 1/3, four times, so that the degree of advantage after the time-saving limit number is reached can be made equal to or greater than the degree of advantage in other time-saving states. Specifically, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the time-saving state A, in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed substantially twice, and the jackpot expectation is equal to that of the time-saving state B, in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed substantially four times. Therefore, even if the time-saving limit is reached, the player can have high expectations of a big win, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the 41st control example, when a small win game of the second special symbol is started in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, the second end condition is established (the small win counter 203s is decremented) at the start of the small win, while when a small win game of the second special symbol is started in the time-saving state C, the second end condition is established (the small win counter 203s is decremented) after the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3. By configuring in this way, when a small win is won after transitioning to the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, regardless of whether the lottery of the second special symbol was executed during the time-saving state or the lottery of the second special symbol started after transitioning to the normal state based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol reserved during the time-saving state, the game state at the time when the game ball passed through the specific area 650e3 can be set to the normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether the drawing of the second special symbol is started during the time-saving state or the drawing of the second special symbol is started after the transition to the normal state, the degree of advantage when the jackpot is won can be made common. Also, in the time-saving state C, if a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of the winning can be fixed to the time-saving state, so that it is possible to prevent the repetition of the time-saving state C and the jackpot from continuing beyond the time-saving limit number of times, or conversely, to end the repetition of the time-saving state C and the jackpot before the time-saving limit number of times is reached.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 41st control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 40th control example in that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example. Below, elements that are the same as those in the 40th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1183, the board configuration of the game board 13 in this 41st control example will be described. FIG. 1183 is a front view of the game board 13 in this 41st control example. As shown in FIG. 1183, the game board 13 in this 41st control example differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1149) in that a single through gate 67 is provided upstream of the V winning device 650 instead of the through gate 67c provided above the first ball entrance 64 and the right through gate 67r provided to the right of the variable display unit 80. As shown in FIG. 1183, this through gate 67 is provided at a position where a game ball that is launched into the flow path on the right side of the front view of the variable display unit 80 by a right hit and does not enter the second ball entrance 640 always passes through. In other words, in this 41st control example, compared to the 40th control example, unless a right hit is made, the lottery for the normal pattern is not executed, and the electric role 640a is not opened, but instead the board configuration is such that the passing rate of the through gate 67 is high when a right hit is made.

Next, referring to Fig. 1184 to Fig. 1186, the characteristic presentation mode in this 41st control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 1184, the presentation mode in the time-saving state A, which is set at a high rate (95% rate) after the lottery for the first special symbol results in a jackpot (so-called the first win) in the normal state, will be described. First, Fig. 1184(a) is a diagram showing the presentation mode from the start of the time-saving state A to the start of the lottery for the second special symbol.

1184(a), when the game transitions to time-saving state A after the first win, an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which the adventurer character 801 and the monster character 821 stare at each other. In addition, the words "Hit right to stock attack icons!" are displayed in the display area HR10, which is a horizontally elongated, roughly rectangular shape formed at the top of the main display area Dm. In addition, a small display area Dm4 displaying the words "Hit right" is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm, and attack icon display areas AI1 and AI2 for displaying attack icons, which will be described later, are formed in the lower left of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the words "Enter RUSH if you defeat the enemy!?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that attack icons can be acquired (stocked) by hitting right, and that if the adventurer character 811 defeats the monster character 821, rush mode (time-saving state B, which is more advantageous than time-saving state A) will begin.

Figure 1184(b) shows an example of the display mode when a game ball shot by right-hand hit enters the second ball entrance 640 in the time-saving state A, and the variable display of the second special pattern starts. As shown in Figure 1184(b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the variable display of the second special pattern starts, the variable display of the third pattern showing the lottery result of the second special pattern starts in the relatively narrow (difficult for the player to see) small display area Dm8. Also, a time gauge ga3 is displayed between the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821. This time gauge ga3 is configured so that when the second special symbol starts to change, the remaining time display ga3a occupies the entire time gauge ga3, and as time passes, the right end of the remaining time display ga3a moves leftward when viewed from the front, narrowing its area, while the area of the elapsed time display ga3b increases. When 10 seconds have passed since the second special symbol started to change, the right end of the remaining time display ga3a reaches the left end of the time gauge ga3, the area of the remaining time display ga3a becomes 0, and the elapsed time display ga3b occupies the entire time gauge ga3. When the time gauge ga3 reaches 0, it is determined whether or not a performance in which the monster character 821 is defeated is executed, depending on the lottery result of the change and the pre-read result of the remaining reserve of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, based on the entry into the second ball entry port 640, an attack icon of a type corresponding to the current lottery result of the second special pattern is displayed in the attack icon display area AI1. The example of FIG. 1184(b) illustrates the case where an icon with the word "slash" is acquired. These display contents allow the player to intuitively understand that an attack icon will be acquired based on the start winning of the second special pattern, and that the type of attack icon indicates the expectation of a win (defeating the monster character 821). In this 40th control example, four types of icons are provided: "punch", "kick", "slash", and "special move". The "punch" icon is configured to be easily selected in the case of a miss and difficult to select in the case of a big win or a small win, the "kick" icon is configured to be easily selected when the time-saving state B is reached, and the "slash" icon is configured to be difficult to select in the case of a miss. Furthermore, the "Special Move" icon can only be selected in the case of a big win or a small win, and is configured so that the selection rate is higher when transitioning to the advantageous time-saving state C after a big win than when transitioning to time-saving state B after a big win. These selection rates realize a gameplay that allows the player to predict the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the type of attack icon, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1185(a), the display mode when the first reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired in the time-saving state A where the number of time-saving times (the prescribed number of times of drawing the second special pattern) is one is described. As shown in FIG. 1185(a), the first reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, and the fourth end condition (the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern reaches the prescribed number (1 in the case of the time-saving state A) in the final time-saving change) is established, and the time-saving state A is ended. As shown in FIG. 1185(a), when the reserved ball of the second special pattern becomes one in the first change (final change) of the time-saving state A and the fourth end condition is established, an attack icon according to the pre-reading result of the reserved ball of the second special pattern acquired this time is displayed in the second attack icon display area AI2. The example in FIG. 1185(a) illustrates the case where the "kick" icon is acquired. In addition, the word "ready" is displayed on the time gauge ga3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that he or she has acquired all of the reserved balls of the second special pattern that can be acquired in the time-saving state A. In addition, the player can easily understand that the lottery results corresponding to the changing display of the second special pattern that is being executed and the newly acquired reserved balls of the second special pattern correspond to each type of attack icon.

Although not shown in the figures, after the reserved balls of the second special pattern are accumulated and the time-saving state ends, an effect is executed in which the adventurer's character 811 consumes an attack icon to launch an attack on the monster character 821. That is, using the period up to the latter half (10 seconds to 30 seconds) of the variable display of the ongoing second special pattern, an effect is executed in which an attack is launched against the monster character 821 using the attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI1 (in the example of FIG. 1185(a) , the "Remaining Attack" icon). Then, if the result of the lottery for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, an effect is executed in which the monster character 821 is defeated, whereas if it is a miss, an effect is executed in which it is announced that the monster character 821 could not be completely defeated. If the monster character 821 is not defeated, the display of the second special pattern using the reserved ball of the second special pattern acquired in the time-saving state A starts to change, and an effect is executed in which an attack is launched against the monster character 821 using the attack icon (in the example of FIG. 1185(a) , a "kick" icon) displayed in the attack icon display area AI2. If the result of the lottery for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, an effect is executed in which the monster character 821 is defeated, but if it is a miss, an effect is executed to inform the player that the monster character 821 was not defeated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1185(b), the presentation mode in the time-saving state B to which the player may transition after winning a jackpot in the time-saving state A (so-called consecutive wins) will be described. As shown in FIG. 1185(b), the display content of the main display area Dm is similar to the presentation mode in the time-saving state A, and differs only in that the number of attack icon display areas is changed from two to four. This corresponds to the fact that the number of reserved balls is set to three in the time-saving state B as the fourth end condition (the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern reaches a specified number in the final time-saving change). In other words, the difference is that four display areas are formed to display attack icons corresponding to the four second special patterns in total, consisting of one drawing of the second special pattern executed in the time-saving state B and three drawings of the second special pattern based on the reserved balls of the three second special patterns that can be obtained during the time-saving state B. In addition, the display content of the sub-display area Ds is also different between the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B. That is, in the time-saving state B, the words "If the attack hits, you get a bonus!? If you defeat the enemy, you get a MAX!??" are displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the attack hits the monster character 821, it will be a jackpot, and if the performance of defeating the monster character 821 is executed, the MAX bonus will also be confirmed. The MAX bonus means that after the jackpot ends, the player will transition to the most advantageous time-saving state C (which will essentially continue until the next jackpot). In other words, it means a transition to a state in which the jackpot and the time-saving state C are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times (3 times) is reached, and it shows that a very advantageous state is formed in which a total of four jackpots are guaranteed. In this 41st control example, as the jackpot of the second special pattern, four rounds of jackpot games are executed, and 600 or more prize balls are paid out per jackpot, so that the performance of defeating the monster character 821 is executed, and the player can receive the same benefit as winning a 16-round jackpot (2400 or more prize balls are paid out). Therefore, even though the machine only has a four-round jackpot, it gives players the opportunity to win a large number of prize balls at once, providing a well-balanced gaming experience.

Figure 1186(a) is a diagram showing the presentation mode when a win in the big win (MAX bonus) corresponding to the time-saving state C is confirmed (a big win or small win A41 is won in the lottery for the second special pattern). As shown in Figure 1186(a), when a MAX bonus is won, a presentation is executed in the main display area Dm in which the adventurer character 811 defeats the monster character 821, and a presentation is executed in which the third pattern resembling the number "7" is lined up. Also, the words "MAX bonus confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that he or she has won a MAX bonus.

Next, referring to FIG. 1186(b), the presentation mode in each time-saving state C from winning the MAX bonus until the time-saving limit count is reached will be described. Here, in this 41st control example, the presentation mode during the repetition of the 4-round jackpot and time-saving state C from winning the first jackpot corresponding to time-saving state C until the time-saving limit count is reached (MAX bonus mode) is set to a presentation mode as if one jackpot was continuing. That is, in the first time-saving state C after the first jackpot, a performance is executed as if the interval performance after the end of the 4th round (before the 5th round) is in progress, in the second 4-round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, a performance is executed as if the 5th to 8th rounds of the jackpot are in progress, in the second time-saving state C, a performance is executed as if the interval performance after the end of the 8th round (before the 9th round) is in progress, in the third 4-round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, a performance is executed as if the 9th to 12th rounds of the jackpot are in progress, in the third (last time in the time-saving limit) time-saving state C, a performance is executed as if the interval performance after the end of the 12th round (before the 13th round) is in progress, and in the fourth 4-round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, a performance is executed as if the 13th to 16th rounds of the jackpot are in progress. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that four jackpots are one jackpot, so that it is possible to make the player think that he has won one jackpot with a large number of rounds and a large number of prize balls, even though in reality only a small number of jackpots are repeated. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Figure 1186 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode of the time-saving state C between big wins in the MAX bonus mode. As shown in Figure 1186 (b), in the time-saving state C between big wins in the MAX bonus mode, a pseudo-interval presentation is executed as if it were an interval period. That is, a presentation in which the adventurer character 811 is happy with a large amount of gold coins that appeared from the treasure chest 810 is executed, and the characters "5 rounds" indicating the next pseudo number of rounds are displayed in the small display area Dm9. In addition, in the small consul area Dm2, characters (800) indicating the number of prize balls already paid out in the MAX mode and characters (2400) indicating the total number of prize balls to be paid out in the MAX bonus mode are displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm8, a variable display presentation of the third pattern indicating the lottery result of the second special pattern is executed in a relatively inconspicuous manner. Furthermore, the characters "MAX bonus in progress" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make the player feel as if a 16-round jackpot has been achieved, resulting in a more suitable presentation. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1187, the transition of the presentation mode in the case of transitioning to time-saving state A after the occurrence of the first win in this 41st control example will be described. FIG. 1187 is a diagram showing the change over time of the presentation mode from the end of the first win won in normal mode in this 41st control example, to the end of time-saving state A, consumption of the reserved balls of the second special pattern, and return to normal mode. As shown in FIG. 1187, when the first win ends, first, a presentation (reserved charge presentation, see FIG. 1184 and FIG. 1185(a)) that encourages the player to acquire reserved balls (attack icons) by hitting the right is executed. The reserved charge presentation is executed from the start of the first display of the second special pattern in time-saving state A until 10 seconds have passed. Note that, by continuing to hit the right during the display of the second special pattern, when a start winning corresponding to the second special pattern occurs and the number of reserved balls becomes 1, the time-saving state A ends and transitions to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 1187, during the 20-second period between the end of the reserved charge effect and the end of the first variable display of the second special symbol, an effect is executed in which an attack corresponding to the first attack icon (attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI1) is attempted against the monster character 821, and the effect result is notified during the fixed display period of the symbol (1 second). FIG. 1187 illustrates an example of a case in which an effect result indicating that the monster character 821 has failed to be defeated is notified, and with the end of the notification period, a second variable display effect (variable display effect based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol acquired during the time-saving state A) is started, and an effect is executed in which an attack corresponding to the second attack icon (attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI2) is attempted, and the effect result is notified during the fixed display period of the symbol (1 second). FIG. 1187 illustrates an example of a case in which an effect result indicating that the monster character 821 has failed to be defeated even in the second attack is notified, and the effect mode is switched to that for the normal mode after the end of the notification period.

In this way, during the period from when the game transitions to time-saving state A until all reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired during time-saving state A are consumed, a series of presentations with continuity (story-like quality) can be used to notify the player whether or not they will enter rush mode (time-saving state B) or MAX bonus mode, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1188, the presentation mode in the MAX bonus mode will be described. FIG. 1188 is a diagram showing the change over time in the presentation mode from winning a jackpot that transitions to the time-saving state C until the time-saving limit count is reached in this 41st control example. As shown in FIG. 1188, when a 4-round jackpot (jackpot A41 to jackpot C41) that transitions to the time-saving state C in the time-saving state is executed, first, a presentation corresponding to the 1st to 4th rounds in the MAX bonus mode is executed, and when the 4th round ends, a pseudo-interval presentation is executed. Then, during the first time-saving state C, the pseudo-interval presentation continues, and when a 4-round jackpot (any of jackpots A41 to D42) is won, a presentation that is pseudo-like the 5th to 8th rounds is executed in the 1st to 4th rounds of the 4-round jackpot, and when the pseudo-8th round ends, a pseudo-interval presentation is executed again. Then, during the second time-saving state C, the pseudo interval presentation continues, and when a four-round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, a presentation is executed in the first to fourth rounds of the four-round jackpot as if it were the ninth to twelfth rounds, and when the pseudo twelfth round is finished, the pseudo interval presentation is executed again. Then, during the third time-saving state C (time-saving limit number), the pseudo interval presentation continues, and when a four-round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, a presentation is executed in the first to fourth rounds of the four-round jackpot as if it were the thirteenth to sixteenth rounds, and when the pseudo sixteenth round is finished and the ending period is started, a presentation is executed in which attack icons are acquired by the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern that were reserved at the start of the ending period (approximately four if right-handed shots are continuously performed during the execution of the pseudo interval presentation). After the big win, the attack icons acquired during the ending period are consumed to attack the monster character 821 up to four times. In other words, the same number of effects are executed as in time-saving state B.

In this way, in this 41st control example, when the time-saving state C is set after the end of a jackpot, a novel presentation mode is executed as if one jackpot game is being played continuously during the four jackpot games and the three time-saving states C between the start of the first jackpot and the time-saving limit number of times, making the player feel as if they have won a large number of prize balls with a single opportunity, adding excitement to the game. This can further increase the player's interest in the game and realize a suitable presentation mode.

Next, a method of transitioning between states in this 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1189. As shown in Fig. 1189, this 41st control example has mainly five types of states (modes). That is, at least the following are provided: normal state A (normal mode) which is set to the normal state of normal symbols (low probability state of normal symbols, no variable shortening, no extended opening) and a state in which the game progresses by drawing the first special symbol by hitting left (a state in which the drawing of the second special symbol is impossible (difficult)); time-saving state A (chance mode), time-saving state B (time-saving mode), and time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) which are set to the time-saving state of normal symbols (high probability state of normal symbols, variable shortening available, extended opening available) and a state in which the game progresses by drawing the second special symbol by hitting right; and normal state B (pullback mode) which is set to the normal state of normal symbols (low probability state of normal symbols, no variable shortening, no extended opening) and a state in which the drawing of the second special symbol is preferentially executed due to the presence of one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol.

Here, the time-saving states A to C are different in that different time-saving end conditions are set, but the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 is the same. More specifically, in the time-saving state A, the first end condition is established when the special symbol variable display is executed a total of 10 times, the second end condition is established when the small win game is executed once, the third end condition is established when the second special symbol variable display is executed once, and the fourth end condition is established when one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated in the final time-saving change. For this reason, if the player continues to hit the right in accordance with the suggestion by the performance in the time-saving state A, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the first entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640, and the final time-saving change is started, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 again during the final time-saving change, resulting in one reserved ball of the second special symbol and the time-saving state being ended. After the time-saving state is ended, even if a normal pattern is hit, it is impossible (extremely difficult) to get a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, so it is also impossible to acquire two or more reserved balls of the second special pattern. In the case of a normal pattern hit in this 41st control example, the end condition is met by detecting the entry of one game ball, and the electric device 640a is immediately closed (immersed), so that only one game ball is allowed to enter during the opening period of the electric device 640a based on one normal pattern hit in the time-saving state (entry of two or more game balls is excluded). Therefore, when the time-saving state A is entered, a total of two opportunities to draw the advantageous second special pattern can be obtained.

In addition, while time-saving state B has the same first to third ending conditions as time-saving state A, it differs from time-saving state A in that the fourth ending condition is set to three. For this reason, if right-handed play continues in time-saving state B, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the first ball entering second ball entrance 640, and the final time-saving variation is initiated, and if a game ball enters second ball entrance 640 three times during the final time-saving variation, the reserved balls for the second special symbol become three, and the time-saving state ends. As a result, if a transition is made to time-saving state B, a total of four opportunities to draw the advantageous second special symbol can be obtained. Furthermore, in the time-saving state C, the first end condition is established when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a total of 100 times, the second end condition is established when the small win game is executed once, the third end condition is established when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times, and the fourth end condition is established when 65,535 or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated in the final time-saving change. In other words, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Here, in this 41st control example, since the probability of winning a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/3, the event of not winning a big win or a small win over 100 special symbol lotteries is an extremely low probability (about 2/3 to the power of 100) that almost never occurs. Therefore, the time-saving state C is positioned as a time-saving state that continues until the next big win is confirmed.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 1189, a method of transition from normal state A (normal mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1189, there is a possibility of transitioning from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a jackpot is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1189, in normal state A, a jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/320 in the drawing of the first special symbol, and when jackpot B41, which is determined with a rate of 95%, is determined, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state A. On the other hand, when jackpot A41, which is determined with a rate of 5% when a jackpot is won in normal state A, is determined, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state B. As described above, the time-saving state B can obtain more opportunities to draw the second special symbol, which is more advantageous (the actual jackpot probability is higher than the drawing of the first special symbol), than the time-saving state A, so that when a jackpot is won in normal state A, the player can play with a stronger expectation that the jackpot type is jackpot A41. This can further increase players' interest in the game.

Next, referring to the left middle section of FIG. 1189, a method of transitioning from the time-saving state A (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the left middle section of FIG. 1189, there is a possibility of transitioning from the time-saving state A (chance mode) to another state when a big win is won, when a small win is won, and when all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. More specifically, as shown in the left middle section of FIG. 1189, when a big win is won in the lottery of the special pattern in the time-saving state A, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the big win type. Also, as shown in the left middle section of FIG. 1189, when a small win, which is won with a probability of about 1/3 in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state A, becomes a small win A41, which is determined as a small win type with a rate of 54%, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C on the condition that the small win A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. On the other hand, when a small win is won, if the small win B41 is determined as the small win type at a rate of 46%, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state B, provided that the small win B41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. As described above, the time-saving state C is a favorable game state that continues until the next big win, while the time-saving state B is a game state in which the advantageous second special symbol is given a total of four chances to draw. In other words, since the time-saving state C is more favorable than the time-saving state B, if a small win is won in the time-saving state A, it can be more strongly expected that the small win A41 will be won and the time-saving state C will be set. In contrast, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol acquired in the time-saving state A are consumed, the state after consumption becomes the normal state A. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game that strongly expects to win a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3 between two chances to draw the second special symbol, and therefore it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Strictly speaking, the game transitions to the normal state when the first reserved ball with the second special pattern is acquired in time-saving state A, but in Fig. 1189, the period from when the game transitions to time-saving state A until all reserved balls with the second special pattern are consumed is referred to as time-saving state A.

Next, referring to the middle right of FIG. 1189, a method of transitioning from the time-saving state B (time-saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the middle right of FIG. 1189, there is a possibility of transitioning from the time-saving state B (time-saving mode) to another state when a big win is won, when a small win is won, and when all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. More specifically, as shown in the middle right of FIG. 1189, when a big win is won in the lottery of the special pattern in the time-saving state B, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the big win type. Also, as shown in the middle right of FIG. 1189, when a small win, which is won with a probability of about 1/3 in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state B, becomes a small win A41, which is determined as a small win type with a rate of 54%, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C on the condition that the small win A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. In addition, if all the reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired in the time-saving state B are consumed, the state after consumption becomes the normal state A. In contrast, if the small win is won and the small win type is determined as a small win B41 with a rate of 46%, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state B again (looping the time-saving state B) on the condition that the small win B41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. As a result, in the time-saving state B, as in the time-saving state A, the player strongly hopes to win a small win or a big win with the reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired during the time-saving state, which has a probability of about 1/3, and if a small win is won, the gameplay makes the player strongly hope to be set to the more advantageous time-saving state C, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1189, a method of transition from the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1189, there is a possibility of transition from the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time-saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1189, if a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3 is won in the time-saving state C and the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the game state is set to the normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1189, if a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3 is won in the time-saving state C and the time-saving limit number of times has not been reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C again (the time-saving state is looped). For this reason, once transitioning to the time-saving state C, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the time-saving mode C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached. As mentioned above, in this 41st control example, the number of rounds for all jackpots is 4, and the time-saving limit is set to 3, so 4 jackpots are guaranteed, including the jackpot that triggered the transition to the time-saving state. In other words, a favorable state is created in which 16 rounds' worth of prize balls can be obtained almost all at once, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the lower part of FIG. 1189, a method of transition from normal state B (pullback mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1189, there is a possibility of transition from normal state B (pullback mode) to another state when a jackpot is won, when a small jackpot is won, and when all reserved balls of the second special pattern reserved during time-saving state C are consumed. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1189, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of a special pattern in normal state B, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1189, when a small jackpot is won in a lottery of the second special pattern in normal state B with a probability of about 1/3, when a small jackpot A41, which is determined as a small jackpot type with a rate of 54%, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state C, provided that the small jackpot A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a jackpot. On the other hand, if a small win is won and the result is small win B41, which is determined as the small win type at a rate of 46%, the game state after the big win ends will be set to time-saving state B, provided that the small win B41 passes through specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. As mentioned above, time-saving state C is more advantageous than time-saving state B, so if a small win is won in normal state B, it can be more likely that small win A41 will be won and time-saving state C will be set. In contrast, if all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed in normal state B (all misses), the state after consumption will be normal state A.

In this way, in the 41st control example, when a small prize, which has a high probability of being won of about 1/3, is won in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the normal state B, the profit obtained by the player is significantly different depending on whether the small prize type is determined to be small prize A41 or small prize B41. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether he/she will win small prize A41 and move to the time-saving state C and win a large number of prize balls at once (16 rounds' worth of prize balls), or whether he/she will win small prize B41 and move to the time-saving state B, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration of 41st control example>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1190(a). Fig. 1190(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 41st control example. As shown in FIG. 1190(a), the ROM 202 in this 41st control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see FIG. 1159(a)) in that a first win random number table 202ak is provided instead of the first win random number table 202aj, a big win type selection table 202bk is provided instead of the big win type selection table 202bj, a second win random number table 202ck is provided instead of the second win random number table 202cj, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dj, a time-saving granting table 202ek is provided instead of the time-saving granting table 202ej, a small win type selection table 202fk is provided instead of the small win type selection table 202fj, and the time-saving type selection table 202ja and the normal win type selection table 202jb have been deleted. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned fortieth control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to Figs. 1191(a) and (b), the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 constituting the first winning random number table 202ak in this 41st control example will be described. Fig. 1191(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 in this 41st control example, and Fig. 1191(b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in this 41st control example. First, referring to Fig. 1191(a), the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 that is referenced when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed in this 41st control example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1191(a), the special pattern 1 random number table 202ak1 in this 41st control example is specified to correspond to 205 random number values (counter values) from "0 to 204" as the range of random number values (values of the first win random number counter C1) that are determined to be a jackpot, but is not specified to correspond to random number values that are determined to be a small win. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) from "0 to 65,535" that the first win random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot is 205, so the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special pattern is approximately 1/320 (205/65,536).

Next, referring to FIG. 1191(b), the details of the special pattern 2 random number table 202ak2 that is referenced when the lottery for the second special pattern is executed in this 41st control example will be described. FIG. 1191(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1191(b), in the special pattern 2 random number table 202ak2 in this 41st control example, 205 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 204" are associated with each other as the range of random number values (values of the first win random number counter C1) that are determined to be a big win, and 21845 random number values (counter values) of "205 to 22049" are associated with each other as the range of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a small win.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a big win is 205, so the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/320 (205/65,536), just like the lottery for the first special symbol. Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win is 21,845, so the probability of winning a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/3 (21,845/65,536).

In this way, in the present 41st control example, the random number value for determining the big win of the special pattern is common between the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern (i.e., the big win probability is common), while the random number value for determining the small win is set only for the lottery for the second special pattern. And, like the small wins in the above-mentioned 40th control example and 32nd control example, the small win in the present 41st control example is configured so that the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 and can win the big win almost certainly by continuing to hit the right during the small win game, so it is a lottery result that practically determines the big win. Therefore, the actual big win probability (the probability of the combined big win and small win) is about 1/320 in the lottery for the first special pattern, while it is about 1/3 in the lottery for the second special pattern, so the advantage of the lottery for the second special pattern can be extremely high compared to the lottery for the first special pattern. This allows for a more dynamic gameplay experience, which can increase players' interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1191(c), the details of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in this 41st control example will be described. FIG. 1191(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in this 41st control example. This jackpot type selection table 202bk is a data table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, similar to the jackpot type selection table 202j (see FIG. 1159(c)) in the above-mentioned 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1191(c), the jackpot type selection table 202bk in this 41st control example specifies two types of jackpot types for the first special symbol, jackpot A41 and jackpot B41, and specifies one type of jackpot type for the second special symbol, jackpot C41.

As shown in FIG. 1191(c), as the jackpot type for the first special symbol, "jackpot A41" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot B41" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A41" is a jackpot type with four rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is basically set to time-saving state B (a time-saving state in which a total of four chances to select the second special symbol are given). "Jackpot B41" is a jackpot type with four rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is basically set to time-saving state A (a time-saving state in which a total of two chances to select the second special symbol are given). For this reason, there is no difference between "Jackpot A41" and "Jackpot B41" in terms of the number of rounds, but in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, "Jackpot A41" is given two more chances to select the advantageous second special symbol than "Jackpot B41", so "Jackpot A41" is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than "Jackpot B41".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) between "0 and 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41" is 5 and 95, respectively, so the probability of winning "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41" when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state, the time-saving state B, which has a relatively low probability (5% probability) and a high degree of advantage, is set, and the time-saving state A, which has a relatively high probability (95% probability) and a low degree of advantage, is set. Note that this is limited to the normal state, and when "jackpot A41" or "jackpot B41" is won (a jackpot is started) in the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state C, provided that the time-saving limit number of times has not been reached.

As shown in FIG. 1191(c), as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, "jackpot C41" is defined to correspond to the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2 (range of "0 to 99"). Since "jackpot C41" is defined to correspond to the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, "jackpot C41" is always determined. This "jackpot C41" is a jackpot type with four rounds and with the game state after the jackpot ends set to time-saving state C. Although the number of rounds is the same as other jackpots, it is the most advantageous jackpot type of all jackpot types because the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous time-saving state C.

In addition to these "jackpot A41" to "jackpot C41", this 41st control example also provides "jackpot D41". This "jackpot D41" is a jackpot type that is won when a small jackpot is won, small jackpot B41 is determined as the small jackpot type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed during the small jackpot play of the small jackpot B41, and is a 4-round jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends is basically set to time-saving state B. Note that if "jackpot D41" is won in the time-saving state, time-saving state C is set, as with other jackpot types, on the condition that the time-saving limit number of times has not been reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 1192(a), the second winning random number table 202ck in this 41st control example will be described in detail. This second winning random number table 202ck is a data table that is referenced to determine whether or not a normal pattern has been drawn when a lottery for a normal pattern is executed. As shown in FIG. 1192(a), in the second winning random number table 202ck in this 41st control example, "0" is associated as the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in the normal state of the normal pattern. In contrast, the entire range of values that the second winning random number counter C4 can take (the range of "0 to 299") is associated as the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in the time-saving state of the normal pattern. For this reason, in this 41st control example, even if you hit to the right in the normal state of the normal pattern, you will only win the normal pattern with a low probability (probability of 1/300), but in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, you will win the normal pattern every time a lottery for the normal pattern is executed. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, you can easily make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right.

Next, referring to FIG. 1192(b), the details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk in this 41st control example will be described. This fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk, like the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dj (see FIG. 1161(b)) in the above-mentioned 40th control example, is a data table that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special pattern is held. FIG. 1192(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk.

As shown in FIG. 1192(b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk in this 41st control example is composed of at least a normal table 202dk1 that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the normal state, a time-saving table 202dk2 that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A or B, and a MAX bonus table 202dk3 that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode). First, the details of the normal table 202dk1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1192(c).

Figure 1192 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202dk1 in this 41st control example. As shown in Figure 1192 (c), the normal table 202dk1 specifies different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) corresponding to the special symbol type used in the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, it is configured so that different fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time can be determined depending on the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss", then for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0-139", the fluctuation pattern is "Miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds, for the range of "140-149", the fluctuation pattern is "False Miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, for the range of "150-179", the fluctuation pattern is "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and for the range of "180-198", the fluctuation pattern is "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds.

In addition, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 29", "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds for the range of "30 to 189", and "Special reach" with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds for the range of "190 to 198".

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be determined when the lottery result is a miss than when the lottery result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to result in a jackpot for the special symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a player playing in the normal state from experiencing a long period of special symbol variation with a miss lottery result, which would result in an extremely small number of special symbol lotteries executed per unit time and thus reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, when the number of times special pattern lotteries are executed per unit time decreases, i.e., when special pattern variations are executed for a long period of time, the anticipation of winning the jackpot can be increased, preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Miss", the fluctuation pattern is set to "False Miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0-198", if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Big Win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Win" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0-198", if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Small Win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Small Win" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0-198".

In this 41st control example, even if a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the normal state and a winning normal pattern is obtained, the opening and closing pattern of the electric device 640a (short opening for 0.1 seconds) is set so that it is impossible (difficult) to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a winning normal pattern, so that even if a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the normal state, a game ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640. In this 41st control example, the situation in which the lottery for the second special pattern is executed in the normal state is when, after acquiring one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern by hitting the right in the time-saving state (any of the time-saving states A to C), the time-saving end condition is established and the time-saving state is terminated before the reserved balls are consumed. In other words, after the fourth end condition is established by continuing to hit the right in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, and when the time-saving limit number of times is reached in a state where reserved balls are acquired by continuing to hit the right in the time-saving state C, the normal state B is transitioned to. In both of these cases, the variable display period of the second special symbol is the period during which the adventurer character 811 uses an attack icon to attack the monster character 821, so by fixing the variable time to 20 seconds regardless of the lottery result, the duration of the display can be secured reliably. This allows for a more suitable display mode to be realized.

Next, the details of the time-saving table 202dk2 will be described with reference to FIG. 1193(a). FIG. 1193(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving table 202dk2. As shown in FIG. 1193(a), in the time-saving table 202dk2, when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "miss", the time-saving table 202dk2 specifies a "super short miss" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and when the lottery result is "jackpot", the time-saving table 202dk2 specifies a "super short win" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, it is configured so that the short (0.5 second) fluctuation time ends regardless of the lottery result. The purpose of this is to prevent players from becoming anxious when a time-saving state is entered in which a lottery for a highly advantageous second special symbol can be held while one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol are held, resulting in a prolonged display of the first special symbol's variable display based on the reserved balls of the first special symbol (a period during which a lottery for a second special symbol, which has a high actual chance of winning, cannot be held).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1193(a), the prescribed contents for the second special symbol are as follows: if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "miss", the fluctuation pattern is prescribed as "long miss" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "big win", the fluctuation pattern is prescribed as "long win" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "small win", the fluctuation pattern is prescribed as "long small win" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, regardless of the lottery result, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 30 seconds. Therefore, the 10-second presentation period for the pending charge effect (see Figures 1184(b) and 1185(b)) and the 20-second presentation period for the effect in which the adventurer's character 811 attacks the monster character 821 corresponding to the attack icon can be secured regardless of the lottery results.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned MAX bonus table 202dk3 will be described with reference to FIG. 1193(b). FIG. 1193(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the MAX bonus table 202dk3. As shown in FIG. 1193(b), in the MAX bonus table 202dk3, similar to the time-saving table 202dk2, when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "miss", the fluctuation pattern is "ultra-short miss" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and when the lottery result is "jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is "ultra-short win" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, it is configured so that the short (0.5 second) fluctuation time ends regardless of the lottery result. This is intended to prevent the player from becoming anxious when, as in the case of referring to the time-saving table 202dk2, the variable display performance of the first special pattern based on the reserved balls of the first special pattern (a period during which the lottery for the second special pattern, which has a high actual expectation of a jackpot, cannot be executed) continues for a long time when the time-saving state C is entered while one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern are held.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1193(b), as the prescribed contents for the second special pattern, if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "miss", the fluctuation pattern is prescribed as "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "big win", the fluctuation pattern is prescribed as "short win" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "small win", the fluctuation pattern is prescribed as "short small win" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, regardless of the lottery result, the fluctuation time of the second special pattern can be fixed to 5 seconds. The reason why the fluctuation time is shorter than the time-saving table 202dk2 is that, as described above, while the time-saving state C is set, a performance mode (pseudo-interval performance) is set as if a jackpot game is being played, and the period during which the jackpot and the time-saving state C are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached is set as a performance operation that makes the player think that one jackpot is continuing. In other words, if the fluctuation time is set too long, the performance period of the pseudo-interval performance becomes too long, which may cause the player to feel distrustful and may cause the game in the time-saving state C to become protracted, so by setting the fluctuation time to a relatively short period of 5 seconds, the fluctuation time for each time is kept short and the performance period of the pseudo-interval performance is kept to a minimum. On the other hand, if each fluctuation time is set too short, it becomes difficult to reach the upper limit number of reserved balls when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, and there is a possibility that the chance of drawing the second special pattern in the normal state B will decrease, so a configuration is used to avoid extremely short fluctuation times such as 0.1 seconds or 0.5 seconds. This allows the player to appropriately accumulate reserved balls of the second special pattern in the time-saving state C, while making it easier for the player to think that the time until the time-saving limit is reached is a big win. This increases the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1194(a), the time-saving grant table 202ek in this 41st control example will be described in detail. This time-saving grant table 202ek, like the time-saving grant table 202ek in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see FIG. 1162(b)), is a data table that is referenced when setting a time-saving state in order to set the end conditions of the time-saving state according to the trigger for setting the time-saving state. FIG. 1194(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving grant table 202ek.

As shown in FIG. 1194(a), the time-saving grant table 202ek in this 41st control example is associated with and specifies the value of each counter that is referenced when determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is met for each big win type. Note that, as shown in FIG. 1194(a), in this 41st control example, four counters are provided to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition is met: the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka. The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for determining (judging) whether or not an end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the time-saving state is set is satisfied, the small win counter 203s is a counter for determining (judging) whether or not an end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of times a small win game is played after the time-saving state is set is satisfied, the special symbol 2 counter 203t is a counter for determining (judging) whether or not an end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of times a second special symbol is drawn after the time-saving state is set is satisfied, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka is a counter for determining (judging) whether or not an end condition (fourth end condition) corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the execution of the final variable display of the time-saving state is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 1194(a), in this 41st control example, there are four types of jackpots, "jackpot A41" to "jackpot D41", and the time-saving granting table 202ek specifies the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the small jackpot counter 203s, the East Head 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka (i.e., the first to fourth ending conditions) in association with each jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 1194(a), for the jackpot type "jackpot A41", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", the value of the special 2 counter 203t is set to "1", and the value of the specified reserved balls counter 203ka is set to "3". Therefore, when "jackpot A41" is won in the normal state, the first end condition is set to the number of times the special pattern changes 10 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times the small jackpot game is executed 1 time, the third end condition is set to the number of times the second special pattern is drawn 1 time, and the fourth end condition is set to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern in the final time-saving change, which is 3. In other words, the time-saving state B is set. If the right hit is continuously performed in this time-saving state B, the fourth end condition is almost established and the time-saving state is ended. In other words, after transitioning to time-saving state B, the fourth ending condition is almost always met by obtaining three reserved balls of the second special pattern during the first display of the second special pattern change (final change of the time-saving state), so when transitioning to time-saving state B, you will almost always have four opportunities to draw the second special pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1194(a), when the game state at the time of winning "Big Win A41" is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "100", the value of the small win counter 203s is "1", the value of the special win 2 counter 203t is "100", and the value of the specified reserved balls counter 203ka is "65536". Therefore, when "Big Win A41" is won in the time-saving state, the first end condition is set to the number of times the special pattern changes 100 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times the small win game is executed 1 time, the third end condition is set to the number of times the second special pattern is drawn 100 times, and the fourth end condition is set to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern in the final time-saving change, 65536. In other words, it is set to the time-saving state C. In time-saving state C, there is about a 1/3 chance of winning a big win or a small win that essentially guarantees a big win, so there is almost no chance that the time-saving state will continue until the final change in the time-saving state, and the time-saving state ends when the second ending condition is met or when a big win is won.

As shown in FIG. 1194(a), for the jackpot type "jackpot B41", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", the value of the special 2 counter 203t is set to "1", and the value of the specified reserved balls counter 203ka is set to "1". Therefore, when "jackpot B41" is won in the normal state, the first end condition is set to the number of times the special pattern changes 10 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times the small jackpot game is executed 1 time, the third end condition is set to the number of times the second special pattern is drawn 1 time, and the fourth end condition is set to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern in the final time-saving change 1. In other words, the time-saving state A is set. If the right hit is continuously performed in this time-saving state A, the fourth end condition is almost established and the time-saving state is ended. In other words, after transitioning to time-saving state A, in most cases the fourth ending condition is met by acquiring one reserved ball with the second special pattern during the first display of the second special pattern change (final change of the time-saving state), so if transitioning to time-saving state B, you will almost always have two chances to win the lottery for the second special pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1194(a), when the game state at the time of winning "Big Win B41" is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "100", and the value of the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka is set to "65536". In other words, the time-saving state C is set, just like "Big Win A41".

As shown in FIG. 1194(a), for the jackpot type "jackpot C41", regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "100", and the value of the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka is set to "65536". In other words, the time-saving state C is set in the same way as when "jackpot A41" or "jackpot B41" is won in the time-saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1194(a), for the jackpot type "jackpot D41", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s is set to "1", the value of the special jackpot 2 counter 203t is set to "1", and the value of the specified reserved balls counter 203ka is set to "3". Therefore, when "jackpot D41" is won in the normal state, the first end condition is set to the number of times the special symbol changes 10 times, the second end condition is set to the number of times the small jackpot game is executed 1 time, the third end condition is set to the number of times the second special symbol is drawn 1 time, and the fourth end condition is set to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the final time-saving change to 3. In other words, the time-saving state B is set, and approximately four opportunities to draw the second special symbol can be obtained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1194(a), when the game state at the time of winning "Big Win D41" is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "100", and the value of the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka is set to "65536". In other words, the time-saving state C is set, just like "Big Win A41".

In this way, in the 41st control example, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, one of the time-saving states A to C is set depending on the type of jackpot, while when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous time-saving state C regardless of the type of jackpot. This allows the player to play while paying attention to the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won directly or via a small jackpot in the normal state. Also, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the player can play with a sense of security knowing that the most advantageous time-saving state C has been determined. As mentioned above, even if a jackpot is won in the time-saving state C, if the time-saving limit has been reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state.

Here, in this 41st control example, if the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot, the game state at the time of the jackpot pattern being displayed is determined as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, while if the lottery result of the special pattern is a small win and the jackpot is won based on the game ball passing through the specific area 650e3, the game state at the time of passing through the specific area 650e3 is determined as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. And, as described above, in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, as long as the normal game method (the game method of continuously hitting the right side) is performed, the fourth end condition is satisfied during the first display of the second special pattern, and the time-saving state is ended. In other words, since the time-saving state is ended before the timing of the first stop of the second special pattern, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot can be treated as the normal state, whether the lottery result of the first special pattern is a jackpot or a small win. In other words, the degree of advantage can be the same in the case where the first lottery result of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B is a big win or a small win, and in the case where the first lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss and the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the transition to the normal state is a big win or a small win. In other words, even if the first lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, it does not become a big win in the time-saving state (the transition to the time-saving state C is not confirmed), so the first lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state and the second lottery of the second special symbol executed after the transition to the normal state can make the player have the same sense of expectation. Therefore, even if the first lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling excessive disappointment.

In addition, if the game is played in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B so that the fourth end condition is not satisfied (the game is played so that the number of reserved balls is less than the specified number), the time-saving state can be continued until the timing when the fluctuation of the second special symbol that started in the time-saving state stops for the first time, but in this case, one or more chances to draw the second special symbol, which has a very high actual probability of winning a jackpot (about 1/3 probability), will be lost. In addition, since the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small win, the game has already transitioned to the normal state before the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3, so the only time a jackpot can be started while in the time-saving state is if the special symbol is selected as a jackpot. Furthermore, in this case, it is treated as a jackpot during the time-saving state, and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit is subtracted by one, so compared to the case of transitioning to the time-saving state C using the normal game method, the number of times set for the time-saving state C is one less, resulting in one loss of the number of jackpots. This results in a high risk (losing one or more draws for the second special symbol) with a low return (the game is set to time-saving state C, but the number of jackpots is one less than usual), making it difficult for players to think about playing in an irregular manner so as not to satisfy the fourth ending condition. This makes it possible to discourage players from playing in an irregular manner.

Next, referring to FIG. 1194(b), the details of the small win type selection table 202fk in this 41st control example will be described. This small win type selection table 202fk is a data table that is referenced to determine the small win type when a small win is obtained by drawing a special pattern, similar to the small win type selection table 202fj (see FIG. 1163(a)) in the above-mentioned 40th control example. FIG. 1194(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 202fk. As shown in FIG. 1194(b), the small win type "small win A41" is associated with the range of the small win type counter C5 value "0 to 53", and the small win type "small win B41" is associated with the range of the small win type counter C5 value "54 to 99". Here, both the "small win A41" and the "small win B41" are small win types that can easily make the game ball enter the specific area 650e3 by simply continuing to hit the right side during the execution of the small win game, and are configured to win the big win C41 when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in the "small win A41", while winning the big win D41 when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in the "small win B41". As described above, the big win C41 is a big win type in which the game state after the big win ends is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big win, and the big win D41 is a big win type in which the game state after the big win ends is set to the time-saving state B when the big win is won in the normal state, while the game state after the big win ends is set to the time-saving state C when the big win is won in the time-saving state. In addition, the number of rounds of the big win is 4 for both big wins. Therefore, the big win C41 is more advantageous than the big win B41, so the small win A41 is a small win type that is more advantageous than the small win B41.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 99 that the small prize type counter C5 can take, 54 and 46 random numbers (counter values) are associated with "small prize A41" and "small prize B41", respectively. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "small prize A41" and "small prize B41" will be determined is 54% (54/100) and 46% (46/100), respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 1190(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 41st control example will be described. FIG. 1190(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 41st control example. As shown in FIG. 1190(b), the RAM 203 in this 41st control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see FIG. 1159(b)) in that a special chart 2 counter 203t, a specified reserved ball count counter 203ka, a time-saving limit counter 203kb, a subtraction waiting flag 203kc, and a winning state storage area 203kd have been added. It also differs in that the normal power operation counter 203ja has been deleted.

The special symbol 2 counter 203t is a counter used to determine whether the number of times the second special symbol changes during the time-saving state has reached a specified number. The initial value of this special symbol 2 counter 203t is set to 0, and at the end of the jackpot, a counter value according to the type of jackpot is set. In addition, this special symbol 2 counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 from the counter value each time the timing for the second special symbol to stop changing during the time-saving state is reached (see S634A in FIG. 1199). When the value is updated to 0, it is determined that the third end condition of the time-saving state has been met, and the game state is set to the normal state (see S637A in FIG. 1199).

The specified reserved ball number counter 203ka is a counter used to determine whether the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern reaches a specified number in the final change in the time-saving state. The initial value of this specified reserved ball number counter 203ka is set to 0, and at the end of the jackpot, the counter value is set according to the type of jackpot. In the final change in the time-saving state, each time a new start winning of the second special pattern is detected, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is equal to or greater than the value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (see S852A in FIG. 1202). If the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is equal to or greater than the value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka, it is determined that the fourth end condition is met, and the game state is set to the normal state (see S853A in FIG. 1202).

The time-saving limit counter 203kb is a counter used to determine whether the time-saving limit has been reached. The time-saving limit counter 203kb is initially set to 0, and is set to a value of 3 when a jackpot is won in normal mode and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. The time-saving limit counter 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 from the value every time a jackpot is won in the time-saving state (see S2409A in FIG. 1206), and when the value is updated to 0, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state regardless of the type of jackpot. This makes it possible to limit the number of consecutive times the time-saving state can be played to a fixed number of times.

The subtraction waiting flag 203kc is a flag indicating whether or not the subtraction of the small win counter 203s is put on hold when a small win is won. If the subtraction waiting flag 203kc is on, it means that the subtraction of the small win counter 203s is put on hold (the small win counter 203kc was not subtracted at the timing of the small win win), and if it is off, it means that the subtraction is not put on hold. This subtraction waiting flag 203kc is set on when the state at the time of the small win win is the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) (see S712A in FIG. 1200). When a game ball is detected entering the specific area 650e3 during a small win game, if the subtraction waiting flag 203kc is on, the subtraction process of the small win counter 203s that was put on hold is executed (see S1413A in FIG. 1204). By configuring it in this way, even if a small win is won in the time-saving state C, the small win counter 203s can be decremented after the game ball enters the specific area 650e3, not at the start of the small win, so the game state when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 can be reliably set to the time-saving state.

The winning status storage area 203kd is a memory area for storing data indicating the game status when a jackpot is won. When the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot, data indicating the game status at the timing when the jackpot symbol stops is stored in this winning status storage area 203kd. When the lottery result for the special symbol is a small jackpot, data indicating the game status at the timing when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in the small jackpot game is stored (see S1411A in FIG. 1204). When the jackpot ends, the data stored in this winning status storage area 203kd and the game status (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the jackpot type are read out and set from the time-saving granting table 202ek (see FIG. 1194(a)).

Next, referring to FIG. 1195(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 41st control example will be described. FIG. 1195(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 41st control example. As shown in FIG. 1195(a), the ROM 222 in this 41st control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see FIG. 1164(a)) in that an attack icon selection table 222ka has been added and a standby performance selection table 222kj has been deleted.

The attack icon selection table 222ka is a data table that is referenced to select the type of attack icon to be acquired in the battle performance executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the normal state B. Details of this attack icon selection table 222ka will be explained with reference to FIG. 1195(b).

Figure 1195 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of this attack icon selection table 222ka. As shown in Figure 1195 (b), this attack icon selection table 222ka specifies the range of the value of the first performance counter 223f1 and the type of attack icon in correspondence with each result of the lottery of the second special symbol. More specifically, as shown in Figure 1195 (b), when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win A41, the "special move" icon is specified in correspondence with the value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 19", the "slash" icon is specified in correspondence with the value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "20 to 89", and the "kick" icon is specified in correspondence with the value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "90 to 99". Therefore, if the lottery result is a big win or a small win A41 (i.e., a transition to advantageous time-saving state C), there is a relatively high probability that the "slash" icon will be selected, and a low probability that the "kick" icon will be selected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1195(b), when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win B41 (when the game moves to time-saving state B, which is less advantageous than time-saving state C), the "special move" icon is associated with the value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0-4", the "slash" icon is associated with the value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "5-49", the "kick" icon is associated with the value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "50-84", and the "punch" icon is associated with the value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "85-99". Therefore, when the lottery result is a small win B41 (i.e., when the game moves to time-saving state B, which is less advantageous), the selection rate of the "special move" icon and the "slash" icon is lower and the selection rate of the "kick" icon is higher than when the game moves to time-saving state C. Additionally, when transitioning to time-saving state C, the selection rate for the "punch" icon, which is not selected, is set to 15%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1195(b), if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss, the "slash" icon is specified to correspond to the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0-9", the "kick" icon is specified to correspond to the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "10-49", and the "punch" icon is specified to correspond to the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50-99". Therefore, if the lottery result is a miss, the "special move" icon will not be selected. In other words, the big win or small win is confirmed when the "special move" icon appears. Also, the selection rate of the "punch" icon is significantly higher than when a big win or small win is won.

In this way, the selection ratio for each type of attack icon is varied according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the type of attack icon displayed each time a starting winning is detected at the second ball entrance 640 in time-saving state A or time-saving state B. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1196, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 41st control example will be described in detail. FIG. 1196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 41st control example. As shown in FIG. 1196, the RAM 223 in this 41st control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see FIG. 1164 (b)) in that an icon information storage area 223ka and a remaining win count counter 223kb have been added, and the standby performance flag 223ja, standby performance count counter 223jb, and standby period timer 223jc have been deleted.

The icon information storage area 223ka is a memory area for storing data indicating the type of attack icon selected by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1195(b)). In the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and normal state B, the data stored in this attack icon storage area 223ka is referenced to set the content of the attack to be performed on the adventurer's character 811 in each variable display performance of the second special pattern until the reserved balls of the second special pattern reach 0 (or until a jackpot is won) (see S4424A in FIG. 1211). This makes it possible to prevent the setting of a performance in which an attack with a content different from the type of attack icon acquired in the reserved charge performance (see FIG. 1184(b) and FIG. 1185(b)) is performed, thereby realizing a more preferable performance mode.

The remaining win counter 223kb is a counter that indicates the remaining number of jackpots until the time-saving limit is reached when transitioning to time-saving state C. The initial value of this remaining win counter 223kb is set to 0, and the value is set to 4 when a jackpot that transitions to time-saving state C is won (see S3623A in FIG. 1209). The remaining value counter 223kb is updated by subtracting 1 each time the ending period of the jackpot is reached. In this 41st control example, the value of the remaining win counter 223kb is referenced and the display of the number of rounds in each jackpot until the time-saving limit is reached is set to display as if one jackpot game is continuing.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 41st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1197 to Fig. 1206. First, the details of the special symbol determination process 41 (S231A) in the 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1197. This special symbol determination process 41 (S231A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process 40 (see Fig. 1167) in the above-mentioned 40th control example, and is a process for executing a lottery for a special symbol, similar to the special symbol determination process 40 (see Fig. 1167).

In the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example, the same processes as those in the special symbol determination process 40 (see FIG. 1197) in the 40th control example are executed in each of the processes S301 to S305. In addition, in the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the current special symbol lottery result is not a big win (S303: No), then it is determined whether the current special symbol lottery result is a small win (S321A), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S321A: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a small win (S322A), and the small win pattern indicating the small win type corresponding to the value of the small win type counter C5 is set as the small win pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (S323A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S321A that the current lottery result is not a small win (S321A: No), the processes of S322A and S323A are skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1198, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (S232A) in this 41st control example will be described. This special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (S232A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in the above-mentioned 40th control example, and, like the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169), is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol. FIG. 1198 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (S232A).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (see FIG. 1198) in this 41st control example, in each process of S401 to S408, the same process as each process of S401 to S408 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in the above-mentioned 40th control example is executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (see FIG. 1198) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a big win (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small win (S431A), and if it is determined that it is a small win (S431A: Yes), the small win type is determined by referring to the small win type selection table 202fk (see FIG. 1194 (b)) (S432A), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S431A that the result of the current special symbol lottery is not a small win (S431A: No), the process of S432A is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, referring to FIG. 1199, the details of the time-saving update process 41 (S233A) in this 41st control example will be described. This time-saving update process 41 (S233A) is a process executed in place of the time-saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171) in the 40th control example described above, and like the time-saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171), it is a process for updating various counter values for determining the time-saving end condition, and for ending the time-saving state when it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met.

In the time-saving update process 41 in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1199), the same processes as S601 to S605 and S607 of the time-saving update process 40 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1171) are executed. In the time-saving update process 41 in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1199), when the process of S605 is completed, the values of the special chart 2 counter 203t, the small win counter 203s, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka are all reset to 0 (S631A), and the process proceeds to S607. This process of S631A is a change due to the fact that the normal power operation counter 203ka has been deleted from the 40th control example and the special chart 2 counter 203t and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka have been added as various counters for determining the time-saving end condition.

In addition, in the time-saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1199) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S604: No), then the small win time-saving update process 41 is executed to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition (second end condition) based on the number of times the small win has been won is established (S632A). Details of this small win time-saving update process 41 (S632A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1200. When the process of S632A is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the special pattern for which the stop display has been set this time is the variable display of the second special pattern (S633A), and if it is determined that it is not the variable display of the second special pattern (it is the variable display of the first special pattern) (S633A: No), there is no possibility that the time-saving end condition will be established, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the process of S633A determines that the second special symbol is being displayed (S633A: Yes), the counter value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S634A), and a remaining time reduction number command is set to indicate the counter value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t after subtraction (S635A).

After the process of S635A is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0 (S636A), and if it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0 (S636A: Yes), each process of S637A to S639A is executed to end the time-saving state and set it to the normal state. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S637A), and the time-saving end condition is cleared by resetting the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka to 0 (S638A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S639A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S636A that the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (S636A: No), this means that the time-saving state will continue, so the processes of S637A to S639A are skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1200, the details of the above-mentioned small win time-saving update process 41 (S632A) will be described. FIG. 1200 is a flowchart showing this small win time-saving update process 41 (S632A). When this small win time-saving update process 41 (S632) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the current special symbol lottery is a small win (S701). If it is determined that it is not a small win (S701: No), the time-saving end condition based on the number of small win wins (second end condition) cannot be met, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a small win (S701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current state is MAX bonus mode (time-saving state C) (S711A).

In the process of S711A, if it is determined that the current state is the MAX bonus mode (time-saving state C) (S711A: Yes), the subtraction waiting flag 203kc is set to ON to wait (delay) the subtraction of the small win counter 203s (S712A), and this process is terminated. In the time-saving state C, by waiting for the subtraction of the small win counter 203s, the time-saving state can be continued until the timing of the occurrence of a V winning (entry of a game ball into the specific area 650e3). In other words, if a small win is won in the time-saving state C, and a V winning occurs during the small win game to win a jackpot, the game state at the time of the winning of the jackpot can be set to the time-saving state. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the time-saving state C, regardless of the type of jackpot, the time-saving state C can be set. Therefore, once the game has transitioned to time-saving state C, it is possible to reliably create an extremely advantageous situation in which time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit is reached, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the process of S711A, if it is determined that the current game state is not the MAX bonus mode (time-saving state C) (S711A: No), the counter value of the small win counter 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S702), and it is determined whether the counter value after subtraction has become 0 (S703). In the process of S703, if it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203s has been updated to 0 (S703), each process of S704, S713A, and S706 is executed to end the time-saving state and set it to the normal state. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S704), and the time-saving end condition is cleared by resetting the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka to 0 (S713A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S706), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S703A that the value of the small win counter 203s after subtraction is not 0 (S703A: No), this means that the time-saving state will continue, so the processes of S704, S713A, and S706 are skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1201, the details of the start winning process 41 (S112A) will be described. This start winning process 41 (S112A) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 970) in the above-mentioned 40th control example (and 32nd control example), and like the start winning process (see FIG. 970), when a game ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start winning), each counter value acquired in response to the ball entry is stored in a memory area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) corresponding to the type of ball entry port where the ball entry was detected. FIG. 1201 is a flowchart showing this start winning process 41 (S112A).

In the start winning process 41 (see FIG. 1201) in this 41st control example, the same processes as S801 to S809 and S811 to S813 of the start winning process (see FIG. 970) in the 40th control example (and the 32nd control example) are executed in each of the processes S801 to S809 and S811 to S813. In addition, in the start winning process 41 (see FIG. 1201) in this 41st control example, when the process of S809 is completed, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S821A), and if it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (i.e., it is the upper limit value of 4) (S821A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S821A that the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is less than 4 (S821A: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is updated by adding 1 (S811), and then a reserved ball count determination process is executed to determine whether or not the updated value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e satisfies the time-saving end condition (fourth end condition) (S822A), and the process proceeds to S812. Details of this reserved ball count determination process (S822A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1202.

In this way, in this 41st control example, the upper limit on the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is set to four, the same as for the first special pattern. This allows for variation in the number of remaining reserved balls for the second special pattern when the time-saving state ends and the normal state is restored, so that the actual chances of drawing the second special pattern can be varied depending on the type of time-saving state, and the possibility of winning the jackpot can also be varied, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the reserved ball count determination process (S822A) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 1202. FIG. 1202 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball count determination process (S822A). In the reserved ball count determination process (S822A), first, it is determined whether the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is 1 or not (S851A). If it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is not 1 (S851A: No), this means that this is not the final change in the time-saving state, and that the time-saving state cannot be ended regardless of the number of reserved balls (or the time-saving state is not in the first place), so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S851A, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t is 1 (S851: Yes), then it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is equal to or greater than the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball counter 203ka (S852A), and if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is less than the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball counter 203ka (S852A: No), this means that the end condition of the time-saving state (fourth end condition) has not been met, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S852A, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is equal to or greater than the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball counter 203ka (S852A: Yes), this means that the fourth end condition has been met, so each process of S852A to S855A is executed to end the time-saving state. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S853A), and the time-saving end condition is cleared by resetting the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka to 0 (S854A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S855A), and this process is terminated.

By executing this reserved ball number discrimination process (see FIG. 1202), the time-saving state can be terminated based on the number of reserved balls reaching a specified number in the final change of the time-saving state. Therefore, even though the number of time-saving times is the same between time-saving state A and time-saving state B (one drawing of the second special symbol), the actual number of times the second special symbol is drawn can be made different. That is, in time-saving state A, the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed at most two times from the transition to the time-saving state until all reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed, while in time-saving state B, the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed at most four times from the transition to the time-saving state until all reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed, so that the degree of advantage for each type of time-saving state can be greatly different. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1203, the details of normal symbol variation process 41 (S113A) in this 41st control example will be described. This normal symbol variation process 41 (S113A) is a process for drawing a lottery for a normal symbol and setting the opening and closing control of the electric roler 640a when a normal symbol wins, similar to the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in the 40th control example described above. FIG. 1203 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process 41 (S113A).

In the normal symbol variation processing 41 (see FIG. 1203) in this 41st control example, the same processing as the normal symbol variation processing 40 (see FIG. 1172) in the normal symbol variation processing 40 in the above-mentioned 40th control example is executed in each of the processing of S1101 to S1111, S1113, S1115 to S1117, and S1121 is executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation processing 40 (see FIG. 1203) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the lottery result of this normal symbol is a normal symbol winning (S1111: Yes), the display mode of the second symbol display device 84 for the normal symbol winning is set (S1112), and the processing is shifted to S1131A. In the process of S1131A, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S1131A), and if it is determined that it is in the time-saving state (S1131A: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 1 second (S1132A) and this process is terminated. In contrast, if it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (normal state) in the process of S1131A (S1131A: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds (S1133A) and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the normal pattern variation processing 41 (see FIG. 1203) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the processing of S1117 that the result of the current normal pattern lottery is a winning normal pattern (S1117: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a time-saving state (S1134A), and if it is determined that it is not in a time-saving state (normal state) (S1134A: No), the opening pattern (displacement pattern) of the electric device 640a is set to an opening pattern (displacement pattern) in which it is opened only once for 0.1 seconds, making it impossible (difficult) to insert a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 (S1135A), and the processing transitions to S1121. On the other hand, if the processing of S1134A determines that the current game state is in the time-saving state (S1134A: Yes), the opening pattern (displacement pattern) of the electric device 640a is set to an opening pattern (displacement pattern) of 2 seconds x 1 time that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (S1136A), and the processing proceeds to S1121.

In this way, in this 41st control example, in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter and the opening time of the conductive device 640a when a normal symbol hits is longer than in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). In other words, in the time-saving state, the probability of a normal symbol hitting increases, the fluctuation shortening function is activated, and the opening extension function is activated. This allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 more efficiently in the time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1204, the details of the V passing process 41 (S114A) in this 41st control example will be described. This V passing process 41 (S114A) is a process executed in place of the V passing process (see FIG. 975) in the 40th control example (and the 32nd control example) described above, and like the V passing process (see FIG. 975), it is a process for monitoring the passage of the game ball through the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3 of the V winning device 650, and performing corresponding control when the passage of the game ball is detected.

In the V passing process 41 (see FIG. 1204) in this 41st control example, the same processes as those in S1401 to S1407 and S1409 in the V passing process (see FIG. 975) in the 40th control example (and the 32nd control example) are executed. In addition, in the V passing process 41 (see FIG. 1204) in this 41st control example, when the process of S1407 is completed, data indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd (S1411A), and it is determined whether the subtraction waiting flag 203kc is on (S1412A). In the process of S1412A, if it is determined that the subtraction waiting flag 203kc is off (S1412A: No), this means that the small win counter 203s has already been updated when the small win started, and there is no need to update the value of the small win counter 203s any further, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412A that the subtraction waiting flag 203kc is on (S1412A: Yes), this means that the update of the small win counter 203s was waiting (delayed) at the start of the small win due to winning a small win in the time-saving state C, so the value of the small win counter 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S1413A), and it is determined whether the value of the small win counter 203s after subtraction has become 0 (S1414A). If it is determined in the process of S1414A that the value of the small win counter 203s has become 0 (S1414A: Yes), this means that the number of times the small win game has been executed has reached the specified number of times and the second ending condition has been established, so each process of S1414A to S1417A is executed to end the time-saving state. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S1415A), and the time-saving end condition is cleared by resetting the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka to 0 (S1416A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S1417A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1414A that the value of the small win counter 203s after subtraction is not 0 (S1414A: No), this means that the second end condition is not established, so each process of S1414A to S1417A for terminating the time-saving state is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this V-passing process 41 (see FIG. 1204), when a small win is won in the time-saving state C, the update process of the small win counter 203s that was on standby at the start of the small win can be executed after the V win (ball entering the specific area 650e3) occurs. In other words, the time-saving state can be ended after storing data corresponding to the time-saving state in the winning state storage area 203kd as data indicating the game state at the time of winning the big win, so that when setting the game state after the big win ends, the game state when a big win is won during the time-saving state can be set. In other words, since the time-saving state C can be set regardless of the type of big win, when the time-saving state C is entered, the time-saving state C and the big win can be repeated reliably until the time-saving limit number is reached. Therefore, when the time-saving state C is entered, the player can be made to feel as if he or she won a 16-round big win, so that a sharp gameplay can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 1205, the details of the jackpot control process 41 (S1821A) in this 41st control example will be described. This jackpot control process 41 (S1821A) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 979) in the 40th control example (and the 32nd control example) described above, and, like the jackpot control process (see FIG. 979), is a process for performing various controls during the execution of a jackpot game.

In the jackpot control process 41 in this 41st control example (see FIG. 1205), each of the processes S1901 to S1913 is the same as each of the processes S1901 to S1913 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 979) in the 40th control example (and the 32nd control example) described above. In addition, in the jackpot control process 41 in this 41st control example (see FIG. 1205), if it is determined in the process of S1913 that it is the end timing of the ending period (S1913: Yes), the jackpot end time process 41 for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S1921A), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot end time process 41 (S1921A) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1206.

Figure 1206 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 41 (S1921A). In the jackpot end processing 41 (S1921A), first, it is determined whether the counter value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb is greater than 0 (S2401A), and if it is determined that the counter value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb is greater than 0 (S2401A: Yes), it is then determined whether the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is data corresponding to the normal state (S2402A). In the processing of S2402A, if it is determined that the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is data corresponding to the normal state (S2402A: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb is cleared to 0 (S2403A), and the processing proceeds to S2404A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401A that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (S2401A: No), the processes of S2402A and S2403A are skipped and the process proceeds to S2404A.

In the process of S2404A, the type of jackpot being executed is read (S2404A), and the time-saving end condition corresponding to the read jackpot type and the game state corresponding to the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is identified from the data specified in the time-saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1194 (a)) (S2405A), and the identified time-saving end condition (various counter values) is set for each of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (S2406A). When the process of S2405A is completed, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state has been set (S2407A), and if it is determined that the time-saving state has been set (S2407A: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb is set to 3 (S2408A), and the process proceeds to S2414A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2407A that the time-saving state has not yet been set (S2407A: No), the process of S2408A is skipped and the process proceeds to S2414A.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S2402A that the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is not data corresponding to the normal state (data corresponding to the time-saving state) (S2402A: No), the value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (S2409A), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb after subtraction is 0 (S2410A). If it is determined in the process of S2410A that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb after subtraction is not 0 (S2410A: No), the type of jackpot being executed is read (S2411A), and the time-saving end condition corresponding to the read jackpot type and the game state corresponding to the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is identified from the data specified in the time-saving granting table 202ek (see FIG. 1194(a)) (S2412A). Next, the identified time-saving end condition (various counter values) is set for each of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka (S2413A), and the process proceeds to S2414A.

In the process of S2414A, a time-saving upper command indicating each of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win counter 203s, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka is set (S2414A), and then a state command corresponding to the state after the big win ends is set (S2415A). Then, the end of the big win is set (S2416A), the big win flag 203k is set to OFF (S2417A), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process 41 (see FIG. 1206), the game state after the jackpot end can be appropriately set, taking into account the time-saving limit number of times.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 41st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1207 to Fig. 1211. First, details of the command determination process 41 (S3121A) in the 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1207. This command determination process 41 (S3121A) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 40 (see Fig. 1174) in the 40th control example described above, and is a process for performing control according to the type of various commands received from the main control device 110, similar to the command determination process 40 (see Fig. 1174).

In the command determination process 41 in this 41st control example (see FIG. 1207), steps S3201 to S3209, S3211, S3213, S3218, and S3231A are executed in the same manner as steps S3201 to S3209, S3211, S3213, S3218, and S3231A in the command determination process 40 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1174).

In addition, in the command determination process 41 (see FIG. 1207) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the process of S3209 that the commands received from the main control device 110 include a winning information command (S3209: Yes), winning information command process 41 is executed (S3241A) to perform control according to the pre-reading result notified by the received winning information command, and the process proceeds to S3218. Details of this winning information command process 41 (S3241A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1208.

In addition, in the command determination process 41 (see FIG. 1207) in the 41st control example, if it is determined in the process of S3213 that the commands received from the main control device 110 include a win-related command (S3213: Yes), the win-related process 41 is executed (S3242A) instead of the win-related process 40 (S3232A) in the 40th control example, and the process proceeds to S3218. Although not shown in the figure, this win-related process 41 (S3242A) differs from the win-related process (S3232A) in the 40th control example only in that the jackpot-related process 41 (S3511A) is executed instead of the jackpot-related process 40 (see FIG. 1177). Details of this jackpot-related process 41 (S3511A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1209.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned winning information command processing 41 (S3241A) will be described with reference to FIG. 1208. FIG. 1208 is a flowchart showing this winning information command processing 41 (S3241A). In the winning information command processing 41 (S3241A), first, the winning information notified by the winning information command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S5801A), and then, whether the current game state is the time-saving mode (time-saving state A) or the chance mode (time-saving state B) is determined by referring to the data in the secondary game state storage area 223g (S5802A). In the process of S5802A, if it is determined that the mode is the time-saving mode (time-saving state A) or the chance mode (time-saving state B) (S5802A: Yes), the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1195(b)) is read (S5803A), and the attack icon type is determined from the read attack icon selection table 222ka according to the lottery result corresponding to the winning information notified by the winning information command and the counter value of the first effect counter 223f1 (S5804A). Then, the execution of a notification effect that notifies the determined type of attack icon (displaying it in one of the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4) is set (S5805A), the information in the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined type of attack icon (S5806A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5802A, if it is determined that the current game state is neither the time-saving mode nor the chance mode (S5802A: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command received this time is a winning information command based on the initial winning of the first special symbol (S5807A), and if it is determined that it is a winning information command based on the initial winning of the first special symbol (S5807: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current game state is the normal mode (normal state, and there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol) (S5808A), and if it is determined that it is the normal mode (S5808A: Yes), a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance (S5809A). Next, the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the display mode according to the lottery result is set (S5810A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5807A that the start winning of the second special symbol has been detected (S5807A: No), and if it is determined in the process of S5808A that the normal mode is not being played (S5808A: No), the process is terminated without drawing a lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance. As a result, even if the start winning of the first special symbol is detected while the remaining reserved second special symbol acquired in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B is being consumed, the look-ahead performance is not set, and the player can be directed to the battle performance based on the remaining reserved second special symbol. Also, in the time-saving state C, the look-ahead performance is executed during the execution of the pseudo interval performance, and it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the interval play of the jackpot is not in progress. Therefore, a more preferable performance mode can be realized.

Next, referring to FIG. 1209, the details of the jackpot-related process 41 (S3511A) in this 41st control example will be described. This jackpot-related process 41 (S3511A) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process 40 (see FIG. 1177) in the 40th control example described above, and like the jackpot-related process 40 (see FIG. 1177), when a jackpot-related command is received from the main control device 110, it is a process for performing control according to the type of command received. FIG. 1209 is a flowchart showing this jackpot-related process 41 (S3511A).

In the jackpot-related processing 41 (see FIG. 1209) in this 41st control example, the same processing as S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, and S3614 in the jackpot-related processing in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1177) is executed in each of the processes S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, and S3614. In addition, in the jackpot-related processing 41 (see FIG. 1209) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the process of S3603 that an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3603: Yes), an opening performance is determined according to the jackpot type and the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb (S3621A). That is, in the process of S3621A, if the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is 0, an opening effect indicating the start of a MAX bonus is determined if the jackpot type is jackpot C41, while an opening effect for a 4-round jackpot is determined if the jackpot type is other than jackpot C41. Also, if the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is 1 or more, it means that the jackpot is in the MAX bonus mode, and that an effect that makes it look like one jackpot out of multiple jackpots is being executed, so an opening effect in an effect mode in which the pseudo interval effect continues from the time-saving state C before the jackpot is won is determined.

When the processing of S3621A is completed, a display opening command corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set (S3622A), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the first jackpot in MAX bonus mode (S3623A). If it is determined in the processing of S3623A that the current jackpot is the first jackpot in MAX bonus mode (S3623A: Yes), the remaining jackpot counter 223kb is set to 4 (S3624A), and processing proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3623A that the current jackpot is not the first jackpot in MAX bonus mode (S3623A: No), processing of S3624A is skipped, and processing proceeds to S3614.

In addition, in the jackpot-related process 41 (see FIG. 1209) in this 41st control example, when the process of S3606 is completed, a display round number command indicating the round number according to the number of rounds extracted in the process of S3606 and the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is set (S3625A), and this process is terminated. In the process of S3625A, when the value of the remaining hit counter 223b is 0 or 4, the actual round number is set, when the value of the remaining hit counter 223b is 3, the round number is set 4 rounds more than the actual round number, when the value of the remaining hit counter 223b is 2, the round number is set 8 rounds more than the actual round number, and when the value of the remaining hit counter 223b is 1, the round number is set 12 rounds more than the actual round number. This allows the number of rounds to be carried over from the previous jackpot and displayed without resetting it for the four jackpots in MAX bonus mode, making the player believe that one 16-round jackpot continues from the time the game switches to MAX bonus mode until the time-saving limit is reached. This further increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the jackpot-related processing 41 (see FIG. 1209) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3610 that an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3610: Yes), ending command processing 41 for setting the ending performance is executed (S3626A), and this processing is terminated. Details of this ending command processing 41 (S3626A) will be described with reference to FIG. 1210.

Figure 1210 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned ending command process 41 (S3626A). As shown in Figure 1210, in the ending command process 41 (S3626A) in this 41st control example, first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is greater than 0 (S5901A), and if it is determined that the counter value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (S5901A: No), this means that it is not a jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, so a display ending command that shows an ending performance according to the type of hit is set (S5902A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901A that the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S5901A: Yes), the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is updated by subtracting 1 (S5903A), and it is determined whether the counter value after subtraction has become 0 (S5904A). If it is determined in the process of S5904A that the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb after subtraction has not been updated to 0 (S5904A: No), this means that the MAX bonus mode will continue even after the end of the jackpot, so the start of an ending performance in which a pseudo interval performance is executed is set as the ending performance (S5905A), and this process ends.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S5904A that the value of the remaining win count counter 223kb after subtraction has reached 0 (S5904A: Yes), each data of the winning information storage area 223a is read (S5906A), the attack icon corresponding to the oldest winning information is determined by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (S5907A), and the data of the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S5908A). When the processing of S5908A is completed, next, the attack icon corresponding to the winning information newer than the winning information referred to in the determination for determining the type of attack icon last time is determined by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (S5909A), and the data of the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S5910A).

When the processing of S5910A is completed, it is determined whether or not the types of attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S5911A). If it is determined that the types of attack icons corresponding to all winning information have not been determined (S5911A: No), the processing returns to S5909, and each of the processes of S5909 to S5911A is repeated until the types of attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined and reflected in the data in the icon information storage area 223ka. Then, in the processing of S5911A, if it is determined that the types of attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S5911A: Yes), the execution of an ending performance in a performance mode that notifies each attack icon corresponding to each data stored in the icon information storage area 223ka is set (S5912A), and this processing ends.

When the time-saving limit is reached and the MAX bonus mode ends, and the game transitions to normal state B in which up to four reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed, the processing of S5912A can realize a novel presentation mode in which the type of up to four attack icons to be used in normal state B is notified to the player in advance through the ending presentation. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1211, the variable presentation setting process 41 (S4311A) in this 41st control example will be described in detail. This variable presentation setting process 41 (S4311A) is a process executed in place of the variable presentation setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in the above-mentioned 40th control example, and, like the variable presentation setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180), is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation of the third pattern that is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern. FIG. 1211 is a flowchart showing this variable presentation setting process 41 (S4311A).

In the variable performance setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in this 41st control example, the same processes as those in S4401 and S4403 in the variable performance setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in the above-mentioned 40th control example are executed in the steps S4401 and S4403. In addition, in the variable performance setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in this 41st control example, if it is determined in the step S4403 that the variable pattern command received this time is not a variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol (S4403: No), the display mode of the variable display performance is determined based on the lottery result of the variable notified by the variable pattern command and the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command (S4421A), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the currently received variable pattern command is a variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current mode is the MAX bonus mode (S4422A), and if it is determined that the current mode is not the MAX bonus mode (S4422A: No), the oldest data among the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is read (S4423A), and the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the read data and the current lottery result is set (S4424A). For example, if the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is data corresponding to the residual attack icon and the current lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, a residual attack corresponding to the residual attack icon is launched against the monster character 821, and the residual attack is avoided and a miss is notified, and a performance mode is determined. When the process of S4424A is completed, the data currently read from the icon information storage area 223ka is deleted (S4425A), and this process is terminated. At the time of the initial winning, attacks corresponding to the attack icons that are stored in advance in the icon information storage area 223ka and displayed in the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4 can be performed reliably. This allows for a more optimal presentation.

In contrast, if the processing of S4422A determines that the current game state is MAX bonus mode (S4422A: Yes), the variable display mode during execution of the pseudo interval performance is set (i.e., a performance response in which the pseudo interval performance is performed in most of the main display area Dm, and the variable display performance is performed in a relatively inconspicuous manner in the small display area Dm8) (S4426A), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example, although the number of time-saving times (the specified number of times for the total number of times for which the special symbol is drawn, the specified number of times for the total number of times for which the second special symbol is drawn) is the same, multiple time-saving states are provided in which the effective number of times for which the second special symbol is drawn from the time of transition to the time-saving state until the time of completion of the drawing of the second special symbol based on all start winnings detected during the time-saving state is different. More specifically, the configuration is provided with a time-saving state A in which the drawing of the special symbol can be performed effectively two times, and a time-saving state B in which the drawing of the special symbol can be performed effectively four times. Here, in the 40th control example, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state are a first condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbols are drawn (the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn) reaches a specified number, a second condition that is satisfied when the number of times the small win game is executed reaches a specified number, a third condition that is satisfied when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn reaches a specified number, and a fourth condition that is satisfied when the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol reaches a specified number during execution of the final time-saving variation. The first to third conditions are common between the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, and only the fourth condition is different, thereby making the number of times the second special symbol is substantially drawn different. In other words, in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state ends when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern becomes one during the variable display of the final second special pattern in the time-saving state, while in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state ends when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern becomes three during the variable display of the final second special pattern in the time-saving state, thereby differing the actual degree of advantage. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the 41st control example, in addition to the time-saving states A and B, a time-saving state C is set in which the time-saving end condition that will continue almost certainly until the next jackpot is set, and a limit is set (a time-saving limit number of times) for the number of consecutive times of the time-saving state (the number of times the time-saving state and the jackpot are repeated without going through the normal state). If the execution condition for the jackpot game is met during the time-saving state (the execution of the jackpot game is set), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state C unless the time-saving limit number of times is reached. In other words, once the time-saving state C is set, the time-saving state C and the jackpot are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached (the jackpot win is almost confirmed for the time-saving limit number of times), forming an extremely advantageous state. By configuring in this way, the player can be strongly expected to transition to the time-saving state C, and the player's interest in the game can be increased. In addition, in the 41st control example, a series of presentation modes is set as if one jackpot game is continuing as the presentation mode from when the time-saving state C is entered until the time-saving limit number is reached (while the jackpot and the time-saving state C are repeated), so that the player can be made to believe that he or she has won 16 rounds' worth of prize balls with one jackpot win, even though he or she has actually won four jackpots in four rounds. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that an extremely fortunate situation has occurred in which a relatively large number of prize balls can be won with a single opportunity, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the 41st control example, by setting the normal symbol variation time, special symbol variation time, and normal symbol release pattern so that the reserved balls can be easily accumulated up to the upper limit number in the time-saving state C, when the time-saving state C and the jackpot are repeated until the time-saving limit number is reached and the state transitions to the normal state, the upper limit number (4 times) of reserved balls of the second special symbol are likely to be reserved. As a result, even after falling into the normal state, the player can be given an opportunity to perform the lottery for the second special symbol four times, which has a high degree of advantage (the combined probability of a jackpot and a small jackpot is about 1/3, and when a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the most advantageous time-saving state C is set at a relatively high rate), so that the degree of advantage after the time-saving limit number is reached can be made equal to or greater than the degree of advantage in other time-saving states. Specifically, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the probability of winning is higher than that of the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the second special symbol can be performed substantially twice, and the probability of winning is equal to that of the time-saving state B in which the drawing of the second special symbol can be performed substantially four times. In other words, the normal state B, which is set based on the time-saving limit number of times being reached in the time-saving state C, can be made substantially equal to the advantageous degree of the time-saving state B. In addition, in this 41st control example, except for the first win, the game state after the end of the jackpot is always configured to be either the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C, or the normal state B. In other words, since the game state after the end of the jackpot is configured to be either the time-saving state B or the normal state B from the viewpoint of the player's appearance (the game state is configured to look as if one jackpot continues while the time-saving state C and the jackpot are repeated), when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the chance of drawing the second special symbol granted after the end of the jackpot can be the same number of times (four times) every time. This prevents the degree of advantage from decreasing when the time-saving limit is reached, and gives the player great joy when he or she wins a jackpot (MAX bonus) that transitions to time-saving state C. This further increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the 40th control example, when a small win game of the second special symbol is started in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, the second end condition is established (the small win counter 203s is decremented) at the start of the small win, while when a small win game of the second special symbol is started in the time-saving state C, the second end condition is established (the small win counter 203s is decremented) after the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3. By configuring in this way, when a small win is won after transitioning to the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, regardless of whether the lottery of the second special symbol was executed during the time-saving state or the lottery of the second special symbol started after transitioning to the normal state based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol reserved during the time-saving state, the game state at the time when the game ball passed through the specific area 650e3 (the game state at the time when the execution of the big win game is set) can be set to the normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether the drawing of the second special symbol is started during the time-saving state or after the transition to the normal state, the degree of advantage when the jackpot is won can be made common. Also, in the time-saving state C, when a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of the winning (the game state at the time the execution of the jackpot game is set) can be fixed to the time-saving state, so that it is possible to prevent the repetition of the time-saving state C and the jackpot from continuing beyond the time-saving limit number of times, or conversely, to end the repetition of the time-saving state C and the jackpot before the time-saving limit number of times is reached.

In the 41st control example, the time-saving limit is set to three times, but this is not limited to this and the time-saving limit can be set arbitrarily. Increasing the time-saving limit can increase the number of jackpot wins in MAX bonus mode, thereby increasing the degree of advantage when switching to MAX bonus mode. In addition, decreasing the time-saving limit can reduce the number of times the time-saving state C is set in MAX bonus mode, making it less likely that a relatively large number of consecutive misses in time-saving state C will lengthen the duration of the pseudo-interval effect, causing play in MAX bonus mode to drag on.

<First Modification of the Forty-First Control Example>
Next, a first modified example of the above-mentioned 40th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1212 to Fig. 1215. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 41st control example, a time-saving end condition (fourth end condition) is set in the final change of the time-saving state when the number of reserved balls reaches a specified number, and a number of time-saving states with different performances (jackpot winning rates) are set by providing variations in the specified number of times until the fourth end condition is satisfied.

In contrast, in this first modified example, the fourth end condition is abolished to provide a simpler control, and the gameplay is similar to that of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 41st control example. First, referring to FIG. 1212, the transition method between the states in this first modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1212, in this first modified example, mainly four types of states (modes) are provided. That is, the normal state A, normal state B, and time-saving state C in the above-mentioned 41st control example are provided. In addition, the time-saving states A and B are deleted, and the time-saving state D is newly established. The time-saving state D is a game state in which the first end condition is established by executing the variable display of the special pattern a total of 10 times, the second end condition is established by executing the small win game once, and the third end condition is established by executing the variable display of the second special pattern once. Therefore, if the right hit is continued in the time-saving state A, the number of reserved balls will accumulate to the upper limit (4 balls), and the time-saving state will end at the timing when the variation of the second special symbol stops. Even in this configuration, when a small prize is won, the value of the small prize counter 203s is subtracted at the start of the small prize, so the time-saving state can be ended before passing through the specific area 650e3. Therefore, the game state at the time of winning can be the normal state in both cases where a small prize is won in one drawing of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state D and where a small prize is won in a maximum of four drawings of the second special symbol executed after the transition to the normal state based on the reserved balls reserved during the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state D. Therefore, regardless of whether the drawing of the second special symbol is started during the time-saving state or the drawing of the second special symbol is started after the time-saving state ends, the expectation of going to the MAX bonus mode can be shared. Therefore, the player can have approximately the same sense of expectation in each drawing of the second special symbols from the transition to time-saving state D until all reserved balls of the second special symbols are consumed.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 1212, a method of transition from normal state A (normal mode) to another state in this first modified example will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1212, there is a possibility of transitioning from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a jackpot is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1212, when a jackpot A41, which is determined with a probability of 50% and a jackpot that is won with a probability of about 1/320 is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol in normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state D. On the other hand, when a jackpot B41, which is determined with a probability of 50% when a jackpot is won in normal state A, is determined, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to normal state A again. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols in normal state A, it can be more strongly expected that it is jackpot A41.

Next, referring to the second row from the top of FIG. 1212, a method of transition from the time-saving state D (time-saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 1212, there is a possibility of transition from the time-saving state D (time-saving mode) to another state when a big win is won, when a small win is won, and when all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 1212, when a big win is won in the lottery of the special pattern in the time-saving state D, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the big win type. Also, as shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 1212, when a small win, which is won with a probability of about 1/3.5 in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state D, becomes a small win A41, which is determined as the small win type with a rate of 54%, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C on the condition that the small win A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. On the other hand, if the small win is a small win B41, which is determined as a small win type at a rate of 46%, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state D again (looping the time-saving state D), provided that the small win B41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. In this first modified example, as in the above-mentioned 41st control example, the time-saving state C is more advantageous than the time-saving state B, so that if a small win is won in the time-saving state D, it is more likely that the small win A41 will be won and the time-saving state C will be set. In contrast, if all the reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired in the time-saving state A are consumed, the state after consumption will be the normal state A. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game that strongly expects to win a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3.5 during the five chances of drawing the second special pattern, and therefore it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, referring to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1212, a method of transition from the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1212, there is a possibility of transition from the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time-saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1212, if a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3.5 is won in the time-saving state C and the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the game state is set to the normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1212, if a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3.5 is won in the time-saving state C and the time-saving limit number of times is not reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C again (the time-saving state is looped). For this reason, once transitioning to the time-saving state C, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the time-saving mode C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached. As with the 41st control example described above, in this first modified example, the number of rounds in all jackpots is four, and the time-saving limit is set to three, so four jackpots are guaranteed, including the jackpot that triggered the transition to the time-saving state. In other words, a favorable state is created in which 16 rounds' worth of prize balls can be obtained almost all at once, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the lower part of FIG. 1212, a method of transition from normal state B (pullback mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1212, there is a possibility of transition from normal state B (pullback mode) to another state when a jackpot is won, when a small jackpot is won, and when all reserved balls of the second special pattern reserved during time-saving state C are consumed. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1212, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of a special pattern in normal state B, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1212, when a small jackpot is won in a lottery of the second special pattern in normal state B with a probability of about 1/3.5, when a small jackpot A41, which is determined as a small jackpot type with a rate of 54%, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state C, provided that the small jackpot A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a jackpot. On the other hand, if a small win is won and the result is small win B41, which is determined as the small win type at a rate of 46%, the game state after the big win ends will be set to time-saving state D, provided that the small win B41 passes through specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. As mentioned above, time-saving state C is more advantageous than time-saving state B, so if a small win is won in normal state B, it can be more likely that small win A41 will be won and time-saving state C will be set. In contrast, if all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed in normal state B (all misses), the state after consumption will be normal state A.

In this way, in this first modified example, when a small prize, which has a high probability of being won of about 1/3.5, is won in time-saving state D and normal state B, the profit that the player can obtain is significantly different depending on whether the small prize type is determined to be small prize A41 or small prize B41. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether they will win small prize A41 and transition to time-saving state C and be able to win a large number of prize balls at once (16 rounds' worth of prize balls), or win small prize B41 and transition to time-saving state B, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the first modified example of the 41st control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1214 and FIG. 1215, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this first modified example will be described. Here, the ROM 202 in this first modified example differs from the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 41st control example in that the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 constituting the first winning random number table 202ak are partially changed, the specified contents of the big win type selection table 202bk are partially changed, and the specified contents of the time-saving grant table 202ek are partially changed. First, referring to FIG. 1214(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 1214(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in Fig. 1214(a), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in this first modified example, 205 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 204" are defined as the range of random number values (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be a big win, similar to the above-mentioned control example 41. On the other hand, in this first modified example, a range of 18725 random number values (counter values) of "205 to 18929" is defined as the range of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a small win, which is a modification from the control example 41.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a big win is 205, so the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/320 (205/65,536), as in the 41st control example. Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win is 18,725, so the probability of winning a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/3.5 (18,725/65,536).

In this way, in this first modified example, the probability of the small win is lowered compared to the above-mentioned 41st control example. This is because the time-saving state D is set to a gaming state in which the player is given five chances to select the second special symbol, and if the probability of the small win remains the same as in the 41st control example (approximately 1/3), there is a risk that the player will be overly advantageous.

Next, referring to FIG. 1214(b), the details of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 1214(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in this first modified example. This jackpot type selection table 202bk differs from the jackpot type selection table 202k (FIG. 1191(c)) in the above-mentioned 41st control example only in that the determination ratios of the jackpot A41 and the jackpot B41 have been changed. That is, as shown in FIG. 1214(b), as the jackpot type of the first special pattern, "jackpot A41" is associated with the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 49", and "jackpot B41" is associated with the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 from "50 to 99". In other words, in this first modified example, 50 random numbers (counter values) are allocated to each of "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41", and when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41" are determined at an equal ratio. This is due to the change to set normal state A as the game state after the end of jackpot B41, and is intended to prevent the probability of the game state after the end of the jackpot becoming normal state A from becoming too high, which would be excessively disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 1215, the details of the time-saving grant table 202ek in this first modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1215, this first modified example differs from the time-saving grant table 202ek in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1194 (a)) in that the counter value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka is deleted. In addition, the game state after the end of the big win A41 and the big win D41 won in the normal state is changed to the time-saving state D. In other words, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "10", the value of the small win counter 203s is "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is "1" in correspondence with each other. In addition, the game state after the end of the big win B41 won in the normal state is changed to the normal state A. In other words, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "0", the value of the small win counter 203s is "0", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is "0" in correspondence with each other. The rest of the rules are the same as those in the 41st control example described above, so we will not go into detail here.

Next, referring to FIG. 1213, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this first modified example will be described in detail. FIG. 1213 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this first modified example. As shown in FIG. 1213, the RAM 203 in this first modified example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 41st control example (see FIG. 1190(b)) only in that the normal power operation count counter 203ka has been deleted. This is due to the abolition of the fourth end condition in the above-mentioned 41st control example (the end condition that is established when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern in the final time-saving variation reaches a specified number) as the time-saving end condition. The other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 41st control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first modified example, by eliminating the time-saving end condition (fourth end condition) that is met when the number of reserved balls reaches a specified number, simpler control is achieved than in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 41st control example, and gameplay similar to that of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 41st control example is achieved.

<Second Modification of the Forty-First Control Example>
Next, the second modified example of the above-mentioned 41st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1216 to Fig. 1231. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 41st control example, a fourth end condition is introduced as an end condition of the time-saving state, which is established based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the last variable display of the time-saving state becoming a specified number, so that the number of reserved balls in the time-saving state B does not accumulate to the upper limit number, and the number of lottery opportunities for the second special symbol after transition to the time-saving state B is the same as the number of lottery opportunities for the second special symbol in the normal state B to which the time-saving state C is transitioned when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, and the configuration is such that the reduction in the probability of winning when the time-saving limit number of times is reached is suppressed. The configuration is such that the probability of winning in the time-saving state B and the normal state B are substantially the same.

In contrast, in the second modified example, a novel control is realized that makes the chance of drawing the second special symbol after the transition to a predetermined time-saving state equal to the chance of drawing the second special symbol after the time-saving limit count is reached, without adopting the fourth end condition in the above-mentioned 41st control example. More specifically, when the drawing of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, either a big win, a small win, or a time-saving symbol is won, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is set to 1. Then, after the time-saving limit count is reached and the normal state B is set, the time-saving symbol is won in a drawing based on the remaining reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the number of drawings of the second special symbol until the second time-saving state ends is configured to be the same as the number of drawings in the time-saving state B. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the chances of drawing the second special symbol when time-saving state B is set and after the time-saving limit has been reached, without having to perform the relatively complicated process of monitoring the number of reserved balls at the final time-saving fluctuation and determining whether the time-saving state has ended.

First, referring to FIG. 1216 and FIG. 1217, the characteristic presentation mode in this second modified example will be described. FIG. 1216(a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode of the time-saving state A to which the game is shifted with a relatively high probability after the first win occurs in this second modified example. Here, in the time-saving state A in this second modified example, five chances are given to draw the second special symbol. That is, the time-saving state A ends when the number of times the second special symbol has been drawn reaches five. Also, during the time-saving state, it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, it is configured so that the period from when the normal symbol starts to change to when the normal symbol wins ends is definitely longer than the time the second special symbol changes. As a result, the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the time-saving state A can be fixed every time, so that the probability of winning in the time-saving state A can be the same every time.

As shown in FIG. 1216(a), when the game transitions to time-saving mode A, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 glare at each other. Also, the text "Hit the monster within 5 times!!" is displayed in the display area HR10. Also, the text "Hit right" is displayed in the small display area Dm4, and text indicating the remaining number of time-saving times (in the example of FIG. 1216(a), the text "5 times remaining") is displayed in the small display area Dm5. Furthermore, the text "Breakthrough challenge" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the adventurer character 811 can hit the monster character 821 with an attack before the five second special pattern changes are displayed, a big win is confirmed and the game can transition to rush (time-saving mode).

Figure 1216 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern starts in time-saving state A. As shown in Figure 1216 (b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in time-saving state A and the variable display of the second special pattern starts, the variable display of the third pattern starts and an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 launches an attack on the monster character 821. If the attack hits the monster character 821 in this effect, a notification is issued that a big win (or a small win that essentially guarantees a big win) has been won, and if the attack is avoided, a miss is notified.

Next, referring to FIG. 1217(a), the display mode at the start of the time-saving mode (time-saving state B) or the pull-back mode (normal state B, second time-saving state) in this second modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1217(a), in the time-saving mode and pull-back mode in this second modified example, the number of time-saving times is set to 11 times. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 1217(a), the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the small display area Dm5 is set to "11 times remaining". In addition, the words "Land your attack within 11 times!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that in the time-saving mode and pull-back mode, 11 chances are given to draw the second special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 1217(b), the performance mode during the winning fluctuation when a big win or a small win is won in the time-saving state C at the end (time-saving limit number) of the MAX bonus mode in this second modified example will be described. In this second modified example, as in the above-mentioned 41st control example, a series of performances is executed as if one 16-round big win is continuing during the period from the start of the first big win in which the time-saving state C is set to the time-saving limit number of times until it is reached. Then, in the pull-back mode to which the transition is made after the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the time-saving pattern is won in the first drawing of the second special pattern in the normal state and the transition is made to the second time-saving state, assuming that one reserved ball of the second special pattern is reserved, so that the total number of drawings of the second special pattern is the same 11 times in the time-saving mode and the pull-back mode. Conversely, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern is not acquired at the time when the time-saving limit number is reached, the pull-back mode is not established, and an extremely unfavorable situation may occur in which the game transitions to the unfavorable normal state A (normal mode) immediately after the time-saving limit number is reached. For this reason, in this second modified example, a configuration is adopted in which an effect is executed in the final winning variation in the MAX bonus mode to encourage the player to save reserved balls. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1217(b), during the execution of the pseudo-interval effect, a right-facing arrow image YG accompanied by the text "Aim right" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the remaining variation time is notified by the time gauge ga3. This allows the player to easily understand that the game ball should be inserted into the second ball entrance 640 while the remaining time display ga3a of the time gauge ga3 remains.

Although not shown in the figure, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, an effect is executed in which an icon indicating the expected probability of a big win or a small win appears from the treasure chest 810 according to the results of the foresight based on the ball entering. This makes the player believe that there is an advantage to hitting to the right, so that reserved balls of the second special pattern can be reliably accumulated during the winning fluctuation in the time-saving state C at the time-saving limit number of times. This makes it possible to prevent the extremely unfavorable situation of transitioning to normal state A immediately after reaching the time-saving limit number of times from occurring.

Next, referring to FIG. 1218, the correspondence between the display of the second special symbol and the display of the normal symbol during the time-saving state in this second modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1218, when the time-saving state is entered and the player continues to hit the right hand, the normal symbol is drawn through the through gate 67 and the display of the normal symbol is executed. In the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 1218, the normal symbol's variation time is fixed to one second. Then, when the normal symbol's variation time ends and the normal symbol's lottery result is a win, the normal symbol's variation stops and the normal symbol's win starts. That is, the electric device 640a is opened until two seconds have passed or one or more game balls have entered the second ball entrance 640, and the electric device 640a is closed based on the fact that two seconds have passed or one or more game balls have entered the second ball entrance 640. When the electric device 640a is closed, a 6-second ending period is set and the winning game for the normal symbol ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1218, the display of the second special symbol is started when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the electric device 640a accompanying the winning of the normal symbol. In the time-saving state, the period during which the second special symbol changes is fixed to 5 seconds, so the display of the special symbol changes ends before the ending period of the winning game of the normal symbol ends. Therefore, when the next normal symbol starts to change, the display of the special symbol changes has already ended, and it is impossible (difficult) to generate an additional start winning of the second special symbol during the display of the special symbol. In other words, since it is configured so that it is impossible to acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the time-saving state basically ends at the set number of time-saving times, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not carried over to the normal state. Exceptionally, only in the time-saving state C, when a big win or small win is won, a variable time (15 seconds) is set that allows reserved balls of the second special pattern to be saved, so reserved balls can be saved only during this time. In other words, when the time-saving limit is reached, it is possible to have one reserved ball of the second special pattern, and a lottery for the second special pattern can be executed in the normal state B. As a result, if a big win or small win is not won with the remaining reserved second special pattern in the normal state B, the time-saving pattern can be won and the second time-saving state can be set, so that the chances of winning the lottery for the second special pattern can be substantially the same in the time-saving mode and the pull-back mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 1219, the transition method between states in this second modified example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 1219, in this second modified example, six types of states (five types of modes) are mainly provided. That is, normal states A and B, time-saving states A to C, and a second time-saving state are provided. Normal state A is set to the normal state of the normal pattern (low probability state of the normal pattern, no variable shortening, no opening extension) as in the above-mentioned 41st control example, and is a state in which the game progresses by having the first special pattern drawn by hitting left. Also, time-saving states A to C are set to the time-saving state of the normal pattern (high probability state of the normal pattern, with variable shortening, with opening extension) as in the above-mentioned 41st control example, and is a state in which the game progresses by having the second special pattern drawn by hitting right. Note that, as for the time-saving end conditions, the first end condition and the third end condition have been changed from the 41st control example. Also, the fourth end condition (the end condition that is established when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the final time-saving variation reaches a specified number) is abolished. That is, in the time-saving state A, the first end condition is established when the number of times the special symbol is drawn is 10 in total, and the third end condition is established when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 5. Also, in the time-saving state B, the first end condition is established when the number of times the special symbol is drawn is 20 in total, and the third end condition is established when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 11. On the other hand, the time-saving state C has the first to third end conditions all in common with the 41st control example, and is different only in that the fourth end condition is not imposed on the time-saving state C in the 41st control example. As described above, in this second modified example, the execution interval of the winning game of the normal symbol is made longer than the variation time of the second special symbol so that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are less likely to increase during the variation display of the second special symbol. In other words, the period from the end of the opening period based on a winning normal symbol to the start of the opening period for the next winning normal symbol is configured to be at least 7 seconds, while the variable time of the second special symbol is fixed to 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being executed after the time-saving end condition is met in time-saving state A or time-saving state B and the state transitions to the normal state. In other words, it is possible to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being executed in a normal state other than normal state B after the time-saving limit number of times is reached, and to prevent the transition to the second time-saving state.

The second time-saving state, which was not provided in the 41st control example, is set to a normal pattern time-saving state (low probability state for normal patterns, variable shortening available, and extended opening available), and the game progresses by having the second special pattern drawn by hitting the right button. This second time-saving state is a game state set to a low probability state for normal patterns, unlike time-saving states A to C, but in the 40th control example, the winning probability of normal patterns is almost the same in the high probability state for normal patterns and the low probability state for normal patterns (the high probability state for normal patterns is 300/300, and the low probability state is 299/300), making it difficult for the player to perceive the difference. Therefore, the player can be made to believe that the second time-saving state is a time-saving state with the same performance as time-saving states A to C.

With reference to the upper part of FIG. 1219, a method of transition from normal state A (normal mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1219, there is a possibility of transitioning from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a jackpot is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1219, when a jackpot B41, which is determined at a rate of 95% and is won at a rate of about 1/320 in the lottery of the first special symbol in normal state A, is determined, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state A. On the other hand, when a jackpot A41, which is determined at a rate of 5% when a jackpot is won in normal state A, is determined, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state B. As described above, the time-saving state B can obtain more opportunities to draw the second special symbol, which is more advantageous (the actual jackpot probability is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol), than the time-saving state A, so that when a jackpot is won in normal state A, the player can play with a stronger expectation that the jackpot type is jackpot A41. This can further increase players' interest in the game.

Next, referring to the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, a method of transitioning from time-saving state A (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, there is a possibility of transitioning from time-saving state A (chance mode) to another state when a jackpot is won, when a small jackpot is won, or when the number of time-saving rounds is exhausted (when the first or third ending condition is met). More specifically, as shown in the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol in time-saving state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to time-saving state C, regardless of the type of jackpot. Also, as shown in the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, in the case where a small win is won with a probability of about 1/7.4 in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state A, if the small win type is determined as small win A41 with a rate of 54%, the game state after the big win is set to time-saving state C on the condition that the small win A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. On the other hand, in the case where a small win is won and the small win B41 is determined with a rate of 46%, the game state after the big win is set to time-saving state B on the condition that the small win B41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. As mentioned above, since the time-saving state C is more advantageous than the time-saving state B, if a small win is won in the time-saving state A, it can be more strongly expected that the small win A41 will be won and the time-saving state C will be set. In contrast, if the number of time-saving times has elapsed in the time-saving state A, the state after consumption becomes normal state A. This allows for gameplay that strongly encourages players to expect a big win with a probability of 1/320 or a small win with a probability of approximately 1/7.4 during the five chances to select the second special symbol during time-saving state A, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, a method of transition from the time-saving state B (time-saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, there is a possibility of transitioning from the time-saving state B (time-saving mode) to another state when a big win is won, when a small win is won, or when the number of time-saving times is consumed. More specifically, as shown in the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, when a big win is won in the lottery of a special pattern in the time-saving state B, the game state after the big win ends is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the big win type. Also, as shown in the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, when a small win that is won with a probability of about 1/7.4 in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state B becomes a small win A41 that is determined as a small win type with a rate of 54%, the game state after the big win ends is set to the time-saving state C on the condition that the small win A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. In addition, if all reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired in the time-saving state B are consumed, the state after consumption becomes the normal state A. In contrast, if a small win is won and a small win B41 is obtained, which is determined as a small win type at a rate of 46%, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state B again (looping the time-saving state B), provided that the small win B41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. As a result, in the time-saving state B, as in the time-saving state A, the player strongly hopes to win a big win with a probability of about 1/320 or a small win with a probability of about 1/7.4 with the reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired during the time-saving state, and if a small win is won, the player strongly hopes to be set to the more advantageous time-saving state C, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1219, a method of transition from the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1219, there is a possibility of transition from the time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time-saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1219, if a jackpot or small jackpot with a combined probability of about 1/7.2 is won in the time-saving state C and the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the game state is set to the normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1219, if a jackpot or small jackpot with a combined probability of about 1/7.2 is won in the time-saving state C and the time-saving limit number of times is not reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state C again (the time-saving state is looped). For this reason, once transitioning to the time-saving state C, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the time-saving mode C and the jackpot are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached. As with the 41st control example and the first variation of the 41st control example described above, in this second variation, the number of rounds in all jackpots is set to four, and the time-saving limit is set to three. Therefore, four jackpots are guaranteed, including the jackpot that triggered the transition to the time-saving state. In other words, this creates an advantageous state in which 16 rounds' worth of prize balls can be obtained almost all at once, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the lower part of FIG. 1219, a method of transitioning from the pull-back mode (normal state B and the second time-saving state) to another state will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 1219, the pull-back mode in this second modified example is composed of the normal state B and the second time-saving state to which the transition is made by winning the time-saving pattern in a lottery based on the remaining reserved balls of the second special pattern in the normal state B (not becoming a big win or a small win). Since the number of time-saving times (the number of times of drawing the second special pattern) is set to 10 in the second time-saving state, the player can be given 11 chances to draw the second special pattern in the pull-back mode, including one drawing of the second special pattern based on the reserved ball of one second special pattern that is reserved when the time-saving limit number is reached and consumed in the normal state B. In other words, the player can be given the same number of chances to draw the second special pattern as in the time-saving state B, and a state with substantially the same performance as the time-saving state B can be formed.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1219, there is a possibility of transitioning from the pull-back mode (normal state B or the second time-saving state) to another state when a big win is won, when a small win is won, or when the number of time-saving times is consumed in the second time-saving state. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1219, when a big win is won in the lottery of the special pattern in the pull-back mode, the game state after the big win ends is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the type of big win. Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1219, when a small win, which is won with a probability of about 1/7.4 in the lottery of the second special pattern in the pull-back mode, becomes a small win A41, which is determined as the small win type with a rate of 54%, the game state after the big win ends is set to the time-saving state C, provided that the small win A41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. On the other hand, if a small win results in small win B41, which is determined as the small win type at a rate of 46%, and the small win B41 passes through specific area 650e3 and a big win is won, the game state after the big win ends will be set to time-saving state B. As mentioned above, time-saving state C is more advantageous than time-saving state B, so if a small win is won in normal state B, it can be more likely that small win A41 will be won and time-saving state C will be set. In contrast, if the number of time-saving times is consumed in the pull-back mode, the state after consumption will be normal state A.

In this way, in this second modified example, when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed in the normal normal state B, which is entered when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, if neither a small win nor a big win is won, a time-saving symbol win is always generated. And, when a time-saving symbol win occurs, the system is configured to enter the second time-saving state in which the time-saving number of times is 10, so that the player can be given a total of 11 chances to win the second special symbol in the normal state B and the second time-saving state. In other words, since the degree of advantage can be made approximately the same in the time-saving state B and the pull-back mode, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from decreasing when the time-saving limit number of times is reached after entering the time-saving state C. Therefore, when entering the time-saving state C, the player can be given great joy without any dissatisfaction, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the second modified example of the 41st control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1220 to Fig. 1223, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this second modified example will be described. Here, the ROM 202 in this second modified example differs from the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 41st control example in that the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 constituting the first winning random number table 202ak are partially changed, the specified contents of the second winning random number table 202ck are partially changed, the specified contents of each table constituting the variable pattern selection table 202dk are partially changed, and the specified contents of the time-saving grant table 202ek are partially changed. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the above-mentioned 41st control example, detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1220(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 1220(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1220(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in this second modified example is specified in correspondence with 205 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 204" as the range of random number values (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be a big win, similar to the above-mentioned 41st control example. On the other hand, in this second modified example, the range of 8856 random number values (counter values) of "205 to 9060" is specified in correspondence with the range of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a small win, which is a modification from the 41st control example. Also, as shown in FIG. 1220(a), the special pattern 2 random number table 202ak2 in this second modified example has an additional range of random numbers (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be winning time-saving patterns. In other words, the range of 56,474 random numbers (counter values) from "9,061 to 65,535" is associated with and specified as the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be winning time-saving patterns.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a big win is 205, so the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/320 (205/65,536), as in control example 41. Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win is 8,856, so the probability of winning a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/7.4 (8,856/65,536). Furthermore, out of the 65,536 possible random numbers of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be winning time-saving symbols is 56,474, so the probability of winning the time-saving symbol in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/1.16 (56,474/65,536).

In this way, in this first modified example, the probability of a small win is lowered compared to the 41st control example described above. This is to balance the increased number of times the second special symbol is drawn in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and pull-back mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 1220(b), the second winning random number table 202ck in this second modified example will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 1220(b), this second modified example differs from the second winning random number table 202ck in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1192(a)) in that the range of the random number value (counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in a low probability state of the normal pattern is changed. That is, in this second modified example, the range of "0 to 298" is specified as the range of the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in a low probability state of the normal pattern. In other words, in this second modified example, even in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a winning normal pattern is configured to differ from the high probability state of the normal pattern by only one random number (counter value), so the winning probability of the normal pattern is almost the same in the low probability state of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern. This is a modification to realize the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 equivalent to the other time-saving states (time-saving states A to C) when the second time-saving state (low probability state of the normal pattern, with variable shortening, with opening extension) that is set based on the time-saving pattern winning is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 1221 and FIG. 1222, the details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk in this second modified example will be described. FIG. 1221 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal table 202dk1, the time-saving table 202dk2, and the MAX bonus table 202dk3 that constitute the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk in this second modified example. FIG. 1222(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time-saving table 202dk2, and FIG. 1222(b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the MAX table 202dk3. First, referring to FIG. 1221, the details of the normal table 202dk1 will be described.

Figure 1221 shows the contents of the normal table 202dk1 in this second modified example. This normal table 202dk1 is a data table that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in normal state A or normal state B. Here, as shown in Figure 1221, the contents of the provisions in the normal table 202dk1 in this second modified example when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" are the same as those in the normal table 202dk1 in the above-mentioned 41st control example (see Figure 1192 (c)), so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1221, when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Win" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Small win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Small win" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Time-saving symbol", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Push time" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, it is configured so that the fluctuation time is 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

In this second modified example, as in the above-mentioned 41st control example, even if a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the normal state and a winning normal pattern is won, the opening and closing pattern of the electric device 640a (short opening for 0.1 seconds) is set so that it is impossible (difficult) to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a winning normal pattern, so that even if a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the normal state, a game ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640. In this second modified example, the situation in which the lottery for the second special pattern is executed in the normal state is when a jackpot is started in the time-saving state C with one reserved ball for the second special pattern obtained by hitting the right, and the time-saving limit number is reached in the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state B. The reason why the variable time is fixed to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result is to match the variable time in the time-saving states A and B. In other words, in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, the opening interval of the electric device 640a based on the winning of the normal pattern is configured to be shorter than the variation time of the second special pattern, so that the reserved balls of the second special pattern are maintained at 0, and the variation time is fixed to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result. By setting the variation time of the second special pattern in the time-saving state A and B and the variation time of the second special pattern in the normal state B to 5 seconds, the variation time when the mode is switched to the pull-back mode and the variation time when the mode is switched to the time-saving state B can be made the same, and the player can be made to think that the time-saving state B and the pull-back mode are the same game state. Therefore, a more preferable presentation mode can be realized. Even if a normal symbol hit is initiated in normal state B, the opening and closing operation of the electric device 640a is set to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, if the player focuses on the operation of the electric device 640a, he or she may realize that the pull-back mode is in a different state from time-saving state B.

Next, referring to FIG. 1222(a), the details of the time-saving table 202dk2 in this second modified example will be described. This time-saving table 202dk2 is a data table that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the second time-saving state. FIG. 1222(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this time-saving table 202dk2. As shown in FIG. 1222(a), the stipulated contents of the time-saving table 202dk2 in this second modified example, in which the special symbol type corresponds to "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)", are the same as those of the time-saving table 202dk2 in the above-mentioned 41st control example (see FIG. 1193(a)). In other words, it is configured so that the short (0.5 second) fluctuation time ends regardless of the lottery result. Like the 41st control example, the purpose of this is to prevent the player from becoming anxious when a time-saving state is entered in which a lottery for a highly advantageous second special symbol can be executed while one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol are held, and the variable display performance of the first special symbol based on the reserved balls of the first special symbol (a period during which a lottery for a second special symbol, which has a high actual expectation of a jackpot, cannot be executed) continues for a long time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1222(a), the regulations for the second special symbol are the same as those for the normal table 202dk1 (see FIG. 1221). That is, the variable time is fixed to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, since the variable display of the second special symbol can be ended in a period shorter than the opening interval of the electric role 640a, it is possible to prevent the acquisition of reserved balls for the second special symbol in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the second time-saving state. In addition, if the time-saving symbol is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving state, the time-saving state for the winning time-saving symbol is invalidated without being overwritten or added. In other words, the winning of the time-saving symbol in the time-saving state is essentially positioned as a lottery result equivalent to a complete miss in other control examples.

Next, referring to FIG. 1222(b), the details of the MAX bonus table 202dk3 will be described. The MAX bonus table 202dk3 is a data table that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time-saving state C. FIG. 1222(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the MAX bonus table 202dk3. As shown in FIG. 1222(b), in the MAX bonus table 202dk3, similar to the time-saving table 202dk2, when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss", the fluctuation pattern is "Ultra-short Miss" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is prescribed for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and when the lottery result is "Big Win", the fluctuation pattern is "Ultra-short Win" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is prescribed for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, the short (0.5 second) variable time is configured to end regardless of the lottery result. This is intended to prevent the player from becoming anxious when, as in the case of referring to the time-saving table 202dk2, the variable display performance of the first special pattern based on the reserved ball of the first special pattern (the period during which the lottery for the second special pattern, which has a high actual chance of winning, cannot be executed) continues for a long time if the time-saving state C is entered while one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern are held.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1222(b), the prescribed contents for the second special pattern are as follows: if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Big win", a "Long win" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is prescribed as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from "0 to 198", if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Small win", a "Long short win" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is prescribed as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from "0 to 198", and if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Time-saving pattern", a "Thrust time" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is prescribed as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from "0 to 198". In other words, if you win a big win or a small win that essentially guarantees a big win, the fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds, but if you win a time-saving symbol, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds.

The 15-second variable time set for a big win or a small win is a variable time that allows two or so wins of a normal pattern during the variable time. In other words, if a big win or a small win is won in the time-saving state C, it is possible to accumulate reserved balls of the second special pattern, and if a time-saving pattern win occurs, it becomes difficult to accumulate reserved balls. As a result, if the right hit is continuously performed during the time-saving state C, the reserved balls of the second special pattern (the upper limit number is 1 in this second modified example) can be accumulated at the start of the big win. In other words, when the time-saving limit number is reached and the state transitions to the normal state B, the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be accumulated, and in the normal state B, a lottery for the second special pattern based on the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be executed, and the state transitions to the second time-saving state under the condition that neither a small win nor a big win is won. In other words, a pull-back mode can be formed in which a total of 11 opportunities to draw the second special pattern can be obtained in the normal state B and the second time-saving state. Therefore, the action when the time-saving limit is reached can be made substantially the same as the action when transitioning to time-saving state B, so that when transitioning to time-saving state C, the player can feel great joy without any sense of dissatisfaction. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1223, the time-saving grant table 202ek in this second modified example will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 1223, this second modified example differs from the time-saving grant table 202ek in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1194 (a)) in that the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka has been deleted. In addition, various counter values associated with the jackpot A41, jackpot B41, and jackpot D41 won in the normal state have been changed due to the change in the end conditions of the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B from the 41st control example. In other words, the value "20" of the time-saving counter 203h, the value "1" of the small jackpot counter 203s, and the value "11" of the special chart 2 counter 203t are associated with and specified for the jackpot A41 and D41 won in the normal state. In addition, for the big win B41 that is won in the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small win counter 203s is set to "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "5".

Also, as shown in FIG. 1223, the time-saving grant table 202ek in the second modified example is different in that the time-saving grant content for the time-saving pattern is added. Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h "20", the value of the small win counter 203s "1", and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t "10" are specified in correspondence with the time-saving pattern that is won in the normal state. On the other hand, the value of the time-saving counter 203h "0", the value of the small win counter 203s "0", and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t "0" are specified in correspondence with the time-saving pattern that is won in the time-saving state. In the second modified example, when the time-saving grant condition is established, the time-saving state is granted by adding each counter value specified in the time-saving grant table 202ek to each counter, so that when a time-saving pattern is won in the time-saving state, 0 is added to each counter value. In other words, if a time-saving symbol wins during the time-saving state, it is configured so that it has no practical effect on the number of time-saving times. This allows the second time-saving state to be set when a time-saving symbol wins during normal state B, while at the same time, it is possible to achieve behavior equivalent to a complete miss in other control examples when a time-saving symbol wins during the time-saving state. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 1224 to Fig. 1229. First, the special symbol variation process 41B (S104B) in this second modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 1224. This special symbol variation process 41B (S104B) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 41 (S111A) in the above-mentioned 41st control example, and is a process for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b during the variable display of the special symbol, similar to the special symbol variation process 41 (S111A). Note that the special pattern change processing 41 (S111A) in the 41st control example differs from the special pattern change processing 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the 40th control example only in that a special pattern determination processing 41 (see FIG. 1197) is executed instead of the special pattern determination processing 40 (see FIG. 1167), and in that a special pattern change pattern selection processing 41 (see FIG. 1198) is executed instead of the special pattern change pattern selection processing 40 (see FIG. 1169). Since illustrations of these processings have been omitted, the special pattern change processing 41B (S104B) in this second modified example will be explained here in comparison with the special pattern change processing 40 (see FIG. 1166).

In the special symbol variation process 41B (see FIG. 1224) in this second modified example, the same processes as those in S201 to S207, S211 to S223, and S225A of the special symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the above-mentioned 40th control example are executed in each of the processes S201 to S207, S211 to S223, and S225A. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 41B (see FIG. 1224) in this second modified example, when either the process of S207 or the process of S214 is completed, the special symbol determination process 41B is executed (S231B) instead of the special symbol determination process 40 (see FIG. 1167), and then the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B is executed (S232B) instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol determination process 41B (S231B) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (S232B) will be described later with reference to Figures 1225 and 1226, and Figures 1227 and 1228, respectively.

In the special pattern change process 41B (see FIG. 1224) in the second modified example, if it is determined in the process of S225A that the current lottery result is a time-saving pattern win (S225A: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S233B), and if the current game state is in the time-saving state (S233B: Yes), the process proceeds to S233A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S233B that the current game state is not in the time-saving state (normal state) (S233B: No), the time-saving end condition (counter value of various counters) corresponding to the current time-saving pattern type is read from the time-saving grant table 202ek, and the read end condition is added to the current various counters to update (S234B), and the process is terminated. In other words, the second time-saving state is set only when the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state, and if the time-saving pattern is won in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is not changed in any way. This allows for a transition to the second time-saving state by the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed when the MAX bonus mode ends and transitions to normal state B, and also allows for the same behavior as a complete miss if the time-saving symbol is won during the time-saving state.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned special symbol determination process 41B (S231B) will be described with reference to FIG. 1225. This special symbol determination process 41B (S231B) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example, and is a process for executing a lottery for a special symbol, similar to the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example. In the special symbol determination process 41B (S231B) in this second modified example, each of the processes S301 to S305 is executed as the same process as each of the processes S301 to S305 in the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example.

In addition, in the special symbol determination process 41B (see FIG. 1225) in this second modified example, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the lottery result for the special symbol is not a jackpot (S303: No), then the miss process 41B is executed (S321B) to execute control according to the type of miss, and this process ends. Details of this miss process 41B (S321B) will be described with reference to FIG. 1226.

Fig. 1226 is a flowchart showing this loss processing 41B (S321B). In this loss processing 41B (S321B), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current special pattern is a time-saving pattern winning (S2101A), and if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a time-saving pattern winning (S2101A: Yes), the time-saving pattern type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the time-saving pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101A, if it is determined that the result of the current special pattern lottery is not a time-saving pattern win (S2101A: No), then it is determined whether or not the result of the current special pattern lottery is a small win (S2103A), and if it is determined that it is a small win (S2103A: Yes), the result of the special pattern lottery is set to a small win (S2104A), the small win type corresponding to the value of the small win type counter C5 is set as the small win pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (S2105A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2103A, if it is determined that the result of the current special pattern lottery is not a small win (S2103A: No), each process of S2104A and S2105A is skipped and this process is terminated.

By executing this miss process 41B (see FIG. 1226), if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (other than a jackpot), the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result can be appropriately set.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (S232B) in this second modified example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1227. FIG. 1227 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (S232B). This special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (S232B) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (see FIG. 1198) in the above-mentioned 41st control example.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227) in this second modified example, in each process of S401 to S408, the same process as each process of S401 to S408 of the fluctuation pattern selection process 41 in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1198) is executed. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227) in this second modified example, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big win (S401: No), the failure time type determination process 41B for selecting a fluctuation pattern in the event of a miss (including a small win or a time-saving symbol win) is executed (S421B), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of this failure time type determination process 41B (S421B) will be described with reference to FIG. 1228.

Figure 1228 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the type of the loss (S421B). In the process for determining the type of the loss (S421B), first, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a time-saving symbol winning (S2201A), and if it is determined that the time-saving symbol winning (S2201A: Yes), the type of the time-saving symbol is determined to be time-saving symbol A (S2202B), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a time-saving symbol winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win (S2203A), and if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a small win (S2203A: Yes), the type of the small win is determined by referring to the small win type selection table 202fk (see Figure 1194 (b)) (S2204A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203A that the result of the current special pattern lottery is not a small win (i.e., a normal miss (complete miss)) (S2203A: No), the process of S2204A is skipped and the process ends.

By executing this miss type determination process 41B (see FIG. 1228), if the result of the special pattern lottery is a time-saving pattern win or a small win, the time-saving pattern type or small win type can be appropriately determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 1229, the details of the normal symbol variation process 41B (S113B) in this second modified example will be described. This normal symbol variation process 41B (S113B) is a process for drawing a lottery for a normal symbol and setting the opening and closing control of the electric roler 640a when a normal symbol wins, similar to the normal symbol variation process 41 (see FIG. 1203) in the above-mentioned 41st control example. FIG. 1229 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process 41B (S113B).

In the normal symbol fluctuation processing 41B (see FIG. 1229) in this second modified example, the same processing as the normal symbol fluctuation processing 41 (see FIG. 1203) in the normal symbol fluctuation processing 41 in the above-mentioned 41st control example is executed in each of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to S1117, S1221, and S1132A to S1136A. In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing 41B (see FIG. 1229) in this second modified example, if it is determined in the processing of S1108 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (i.e., the current time-saving state) (S1108: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game state is the second time-saving state (S1131B). In the process of S1131B, if it is determined that the current game state is the second time-saving state (S1131B: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110, whereas if it is determined that the current game state is not the second time-saving state (S1131B: No), the process proceeds to S1109. As a result, in this second modified example, when the second time-saving state is set, a lottery for a normal pattern can be executed using the second winning random number table 202ck (see FIG. 1220(b)) for a low probability of a normal pattern. In other words, the second time-saving state can be set to a low probability state of a normal pattern.

<Control process of the voice lamp control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 1230 and FIG. 1231. First, details of the variable performance setting process 41B (S4311B) in this second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 1230. This variable performance setting process 41B (S4311B) is a process executed in place of the variable performance setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in the above-mentioned 41st control example, and is a process for setting the performance mode of the variable display performance of the third pattern executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern, similar to the variable performance setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211). FIG. 1230 is a flowchart showing this variable performance setting process 41B (S4311B).

In the variable presentation setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230) in this second modified example, the same processes as those of S4401, S4403, S4421A, and S4422A in the variable presentation setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in the above-mentioned 41st control example are executed in each of the processes S4401, S4403, S4421A, and S4422A. In addition, in the variable presentation setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230) in this second modified example, if it is determined in the process of S4422A that the current game state is not the MAX bonus mode (time-saving state C) (S4422A: No), the presentation mode of the variable presentation according to the current lottery result is determined (S4431B), and this process is terminated. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big win or a small win, a five-second performance is set in which an attack hits the monster character 821 to announce a win, whereas if the result is neither a big win nor a small win, a five-second performance is executed in which the monster character 821 avoids the attack to announce a loss.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4422A that the current game state is the MAX bonus mode (S4432B: Yes), the variable display mode in the small display area Dm8 according to the lottery result is determined (S4432B), and it is determined whether or not the current pseudo interval performance before the pseudo 13 rounds is in progress (S4433B). If it is determined in the process of S4433B that the pseudo interval performance before the pseudo 13 rounds is in progress (S4433B: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is either a big win or a small win (S4434B), and if it is determined that the current lottery result is either a big win or a small win (S4434B: Yes), the execution of the Aim to the Right performance in the pseudo interval performance (see FIG. 1217(b)) is set (S4435B), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4333B that the current time is not during the pseudo interval performance of the pseudo 13 rounds ago (S4333B: No), and if it is determined in the process of S4434B that the current lottery result is neither a big win nor a small win (S4334B: No), the process skips the process of S4435B and ends this process.

By executing this variable effect setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230), during the execution of the big win or small win variation immediately before the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the Aim to the Right effect (see FIG. 1217(b)) can be executed to accumulate reserved balls of the second special pattern. Therefore, when the time-saving limit number of times is reached and a transition is made to normal state B, a lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be executed to win the time-saving pattern, and a transition is made to the second time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the time-saving state B and the pull-back mode states have approximately the same performance (expectation of a big win).

Next, referring to FIG. 1231, the details of the performance update process 41B (S3121B) in this second modified example will be described. FIG. 1231 shows a process executed in place of the performance update process 40 (see FIG. 1182) in the above-mentioned 41st control example (and 40th control example), and is a process for updating the performance mode, similar to the performance update process 40 (see FIG. 1182).

In this effect update process 41B (see FIG. 1231), first, it is determined whether or not the Aim Right effect (see FIG. 1217(b)) is being executed (S4621B), and if it is determined that the Aim Right effect is not being executed (S4621B: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4621B, if it is determined that the Aim Right effect is currently being executed (S4621B: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a new start winning of the second special pattern has been detected (a winning information command has been received) (S4622B), and if it is determined that a new start winning of the second special pattern has been detected (a winning information command has been received) (S4622B: Yes), the type of notification icon to be made to appear from the treasure chest 810 is determined by lottery according to the result of the advance reading of the detected start winning (S4623B), and the execution of the notification effect in the performance mode in which the determined type of notification icon appears from the treasure chest 810 is set (S4624B). Then, the Aim Right effect is set to end (S4626B), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4622B that a new starting winning has not been detected (S4622B: No), it is determined whether the presentation period for the Aim Right effect has elapsed (S4625B), and if it is determined that the presentation period has elapsed (S4625B: Yes), the processing proceeds to S4626B. In other words, the Aim Right effect is ended without causing the notification icon to appear. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4625B that the presentation period for the Aim Right effect has not elapsed (S4625B: No), the processing is ended as is.

By executing this effect update process 41B (see FIG. 1231), the notification icon indicating the expected winning probability of the reserved ball is notified only when the reserved ball of the second special pattern increases as a result of hitting to the right while the Aim to the Right effect is being executed, so that the player can be encouraged to actively hit to the right while the Aim to the Right effect is being executed.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second variant of the 41st control example, without adopting the fourth end condition in the above-mentioned 41st control example (a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern in the final time-saving fluctuation reaches a specified number), a novel control is realized that makes the chance of drawing the second special pattern after transitioning to a predetermined time-saving state (time-saving state B) equal to the chance of drawing the second special pattern after the time-saving limit number of times is reached. In other words, even when a favorable first game state (time-saving state B) is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and even when a second game state (normal state B) that is less favorable than the first game state (where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640) is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition (where the time-saving limit number of times has been reached), the same number of chances to draw the favorable second special symbol (11 times) are given before transitioning to the normal state A where the drawing of the second special symbol cannot be executed (is difficult to execute). More specifically, in the time-saving state B, the change time of the special symbol, the change time of the normal symbol, and the opening and closing pattern (displacement pattern) for the normal symbol are set so that it is impossible to save reserved balls for the second special symbol, and the reserved balls for the second special symbol are always set to 0 when the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is established. That is, the number of chances to draw the second special symbol when the time-saving state B is entered is set to the maximum number of times (11 times) until the third end condition is satisfied. The results of the drawing of the second special symbol are limited to three types, namely, a big win, a small win, or a time-saving symbol, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is set to 1. After the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the normal state B is set, the number of times the second special symbol is drawn until the time-saving symbol is won in a drawing based on the remaining reserved number (1 ball) of the second special symbol and the second time-saving state ends is set to be the same as the maximum number of times in the time-saving state B (i.e., 11 times, which is the number of times until the state transitions to the normal state A without winning either a big win or a small win). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the chances of drawing the second special symbol when time-saving state B is set and after the time-saving limit has been reached, without having to perform the relatively complicated process of monitoring the number of reserved balls at the final time-saving fluctuation and determining whether the time-saving state has ended.

In this second modified example, the chances of drawing the second special symbol after transitioning to time-saving state B and normal state B are both set to a maximum of 11 times, but the number of chances of drawing can be set to any number. By increasing the number of draws, the game can be made to be more enjoyable for a longer period of time between transitioning to time-saving state B or normal state B and transitioning to normal state A, which can further increase the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by reducing the number of draws, the period from transitioning to time-saving state B or normal state B until winning a jackpot or transitioning to time-saving state A can be shortened, which can improve the time efficiency of the game.

In this second modified example, the lottery result for the second special symbol is only one of a big win, a small win, or a time-saving symbol win (there is no complete miss), but a complete miss may be provided. In this case, if the lottery result for the second special symbol is executed in normal state B after the time-saving limit has been reached, it will be a complete miss and it will not be possible to transition to the second time-saving state. Therefore, in the variable display performance of the second special symbol in normal state B, a judgment performance may be executed to indicate whether or not to enter the pull-back mode (a time-saving symbol win will occur). This configuration creates a sense of tension for the player that the game will not necessarily enter the pull-back mode, so that when the game transitions to the MAX bonus mode, a large number of prize balls can be obtained, but the gameplay may be such that the advantage of the pull-back mode to be transitioned to thereafter is low. On the other hand, when a four-round jackpot that transitions to time-saving state B is won, the number of prize balls is reduced, but the gameplay is such that a fixed number of (11) chances to draw the second special symbol are guaranteed as the gameplay state after the jackpot ends, so the gameplay can be made to differ greatly depending on the type of jackpot that is won. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In this second modified example, the maximum number of times the second special symbol can be drawn (the number of times it can be drawn before transitioning to normal state A) is the same between time-saving state B and the pull-back mode (normal state B and second time-saving state), but this is not limited to this and the number of times it can be drawn may be different. By making the number of times it can be drawn in the pull-back mode greater than in time-saving state B, the degree of advantage when transitioning to MAX bonus mode can be made higher, and the satisfaction of transitioning to MAX bonus mode can be made greater. Also, by making the number of times it can be drawn in the pull-back mode less than in time-saving state B, it is possible to prevent Kasumi Castle from becoming too advantageous to the player when transitioning to MAX bonus mode. Furthermore, when the game transitions to the MAX bonus mode, a large number of prize balls can be obtained, but the degree of advantage of the subsequent pull-back mode is lower than in time-saving state B. On the other hand, when a four-round jackpot that transitions to time-saving state B is won, the number of prize balls is reduced, but the game state after the jackpot ends has a greater number of lottery draws, so the gameplay can be made to differ greatly depending on the type of jackpot won. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the second modified example, the number of time-saving times (the number of times the second special symbol is drawn) of the second time-saving state that is granted when a time-saving symbol is drawn in the normal state B is fixed to 10 times. However, multiple time-saving symbols with different times of time-saving may be provided as the time-saving symbol, and when a time-saving symbol is drawn, one of the multiple types of time-saving symbols may be determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game in which the degree of advantage of the pull-back mode varies depending on the type of the time-saving symbol. In other words, depending on the result of the lottery for the second special symbol executed in the normal state B (the type of time-saving symbol to be selected), it is possible to vary whether the degree of advantage (the number of time-saving times) is the same as that of the time-saving state B, the degree of advantage is lower than that of the time-saving state B, or the degree of advantage is higher than that of the time-saving state, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the pull-back mode for the first time. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned 41st control example and its various modifications, the so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine specification without the probability variation function is used, but it may be applied to a specification equipped with a probability variation function. In other words, instead of the time-saving limit number of times, the probability variation limit number of times may be applied, and a series of effects may be executed as if one jackpot game is continuing during the period from when the game moves to a predetermined probability variation state until the probability variation limit number of times is reached. By configuring in this way, even for a pachinko machine 10 equipped with a probability variation function, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which only a small number of rounds of jackpots are provided, and the player feels as if he or she has won a jackpot with an extremely large number of rounds, triggered by winning one jackpot. In this case, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, only the probability variation function may be deactivated, and the time-saving state may be granted. By configuring in this way, even if the reserved ball of the second special pattern is not reserved at the time when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, it is possible to transition to the time-saving state after the probability variation limit number of times is reached, and to create a state in which the lottery for the second special pattern is easily executed.

In the above-mentioned 41st control example and its various modified examples, when a small win is won in the time-saving state C, the value of the small win counter 203s is subtracted after the occurrence of a V winning (entry of a game ball into the specific area 650e3), so that when a big win is won based on a V winning during the execution of a small win game in the time-saving state C, the game state at the time of the winning of the big win (the game state at the time when the execution of the big win game is set) is always fixed to the time-saving state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in some small win types (specific small wins), regardless of the type of time-saving state, the small win counter 203s may be subtracted at the start of the small win game. In other words, when a specific small win is won in the time-saving state C, the time-saving state can be ended before the occurrence of a V winning (the timing when the execution of the big win game is set), and the remaining number of times up to the time-saving limit number can be reset, so that the MAX bonus mode can be set to continue longer than usual (four big wins), or conversely, to continue for a smaller number of times. In particular, when a V win occurs, if a portion of the small win type (small win A41 described above) that wins a jackpot of a type that sets the game state after the jackpot to time-saving state C regardless of the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a specific small win, the time-saving limit number of times can be reset while the MAX bonus mode can be continued, so that an operation as if the MAX bonus mode had been reset can be realized with the jackpot based on the specific small win as a trigger, and a novel gameplay in which it is not known how long the MAX bonus mode will continue can be realized. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned 41st control example and its various modified examples, when a small win is won in the time-saving state C, the counter value of the small win counter 203s is updated after the V win occurs, while in other time-saving states, the counter value of the small win counter 203s is updated at the start of the small win, but this is not limited to the above. In the time-saving state C, the small win counter 203s is updated after the V win (the timing when the execution of the big win game is set), while in time-saving states other than the time-saving state C, it is sufficient to control so that the small win counter 203s is updated before the V win. For example, when a small win is won in the time-saving state C, the counter value of the small win counter 203s may be updated at the timing when the opening period of the small win ends or at the end of the small win (at the start of the big win based on the V win). In addition, when a small win is won in a state other than the time-saving state C, the small win counter 203s may be updated at the timing when the small win pattern stops, at the start of the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 based on the small win, or at the start of the variable display corresponding to the small win.

In the above-mentioned 41st control example and its various modified examples, the timing of updating the small win counter 203s is changed depending on whether the time-saving state C is in or a time-saving state other than the time-saving state C when the update condition of the small win counter 203s is met (a small win is won in the lottery for the second special pattern). In other words, the timing of updating the small win counter 203s during the time-saving state is changed depending on the setting trigger of the time-saving state, but this control is not limited to the small win counter 203s. It may be applied to other counters as long as they can be updated at least in the time-saving state. More specifically, it may be applied to the time-saving counter 203h, for example. That is, when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol in the time-saving state C, the time-saving counter 203h is updated after storing data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the winning state storage area 203kd (execution of the jackpot game is set), while in a time-saving state other than the time-saving state C, the time-saving count 203h may be updated before (for example, at the start of fluctuation) storing data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the winning state storage area 203kd (execution of the jackpot game is set). By configuring in this way, in the time-saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state when the execution of the jackpot game is set) is more easily treated as a time-saving state, while in a time-saving state other than the time-saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state when the execution of the jackpot game is set) can be more easily treated as a normal state. In addition to the time-saving counter 203h, a control may be adopted to change the update timing of the specified reserved ball count counter 203ka and the update timing of the special symbol 2 counter 203t depending on the setting trigger of the time-saving state. Furthermore, it is not limited to the counter value for determining the end condition of the time-saving state, but for example, in a specification equipped with a probability fluctuation function and in which the number of times the special symbol state continues (ST number) is predetermined, the update timing when updating the counter value for determining the end condition of the special symbol state may be changed depending on the trigger set for the special symbol state. Furthermore, this control may be applied to counters related to the lottery of special symbols (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, second winning random number counter C4, etc.) and counters for performance (performance lottery counters 223f1, 223f2, etc.).

In the above-mentioned 41st control example and its various modifications, the ceiling function (a function for setting the second time-saving state when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot reaches the ceiling number of times) was not provided, but the ceiling function may be installed. In this case, the time-saving state set based on the fact that the ceiling number of times of drawing is reached may be set to a second time-saving state with a degree of advantage substantially equivalent to that of the MAX bonus mode, may be set to a second time-saving state with a degree of advantage equivalent to that of the time-saving mode, or may be set to a second time-saving state with a degree of advantage different from that of any time-saving state that starts after the end of the jackpot (and when the time-saving symbol is won). By configuring in this way, even if a so-called stuck game occurs, the player can play with the goal of reaching the ceiling number of times of drawing, so that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned 41st control example and its various variations, if a small prize is won in a lottery for the second special pattern executed in the time-saving state C, and a V prize (ball entering specific area 650e3) occurs in the small prize, resulting in a big prize, the value of the small prize counter 203s is decremented after the V prize occurs, whereas if a small prize is won in a lottery for the second special pattern executed in another time-saving state, the value of the small prize counter 203s is decremented at the start of the small prize, so that the time-saving state ends before the V prize occurs. In other words, in the time-saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state at the time when the execution of the jackpot game is set) is treated as the time-saving state (the time-saving end condition corresponding to the case where the jackpot game is won in the time-saving state is read and set from the time-saving granting table 202ek), while in the other time-saving states, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state at the time when the execution of the jackpot game is set) is treated as the normal state (the time-saving end condition corresponding to the case where the jackpot game is won in the normal state is read and set from the time-saving granting table 202ek). By doing so, if a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state C, the state always transitions to the time-saving state C unless the time-saving limit number of times has been reached, whereas if a small win is won in a time-saving state other than the time-saving state C, either the time-saving state B or the time-saving state C is set in the same allocation as when a small win is won in the normal state. However, in the lottery for the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state, the game state at the time of winning the big win may be treated as the time-saving state regardless of the type of the time-saving state. More specifically, for example, the game state at the time of winning the big win may be set to the game state at the time when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In other words, if a big win or a small win is won in the lottery for the special symbol, data indicating the time-saving state may be stored in the winning state storage area 203kd at that time (the time when the start of the variation of the special symbol is set). By configuring in this way, in the above-mentioned 41st control example and the first modified example of the 41st control example, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol that is first executed in a time-saving state other than the time-saving state C, a transition to the most advantageous time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode) is confirmed, while when a small win is won in the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends, it is possible to configure it so that there is a possibility of transitioning to a time-saving state other than the time-saving state C (a time-saving state in which the next big win is not confirmed), so that it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that makes players more strongly expect to win a big win or a small win in the first lottery of the special symbol while multiple chances of drawing the second special symbol are given. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In the first and second modified examples of the 41st control example described above, in addition to the method of setting the game state at the time of winning the jackpot to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot or the small win in the lottery of the second special symbol, regardless of the type of time-saving state, the small win counter 203s may be controlled to be updated after a V win occurs and the execution of the jackpot game is set (data indicating the time-saving state is set in the win-time state storage area 203kd as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot). By configuring in this way, if a V win does not occur in the small win game, the control to store data indicating the game state in the game state storage area 203kd can be skipped, so that the process of storing data in the game state storage area 203kd is unnecessary, and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

<42nd control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1232 to Fig. 1252. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above, the time-saving state is terminated based on the establishment of any one of a plurality of termination conditions as the time-saving termination condition. That is, the time-saving state is terminated regardless of the status of the other termination conditions when any one of the following termination conditions is established: a first termination condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches a specified number, a second termination condition that is established when the number of times the small win game is executed reaches a specified number, and a third termination condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn reaches a specified number.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example, a time-saving end condition is set when all of a plurality of different conditions are satisfied. More specifically, in addition to the V small win, which essentially determines a big win, a plurality of small win types are provided in which the game ball cannot be guided to the specific area 650e3 even if the game ball enters (the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened only during the period when the switching member 650h is arranged to guide the game ball to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 side). That is, a first small win, a second small win, and a third small win are provided. In the 42nd control example, after the transition to the time-saving state, a first condition is established when the first small win (first lottery result) is won a predetermined first number of times in the lottery for the special pattern, a second condition is established when the second small win (second lottery result) is won a predetermined second number of times, and a third condition is established when the third small win (third lottery result) is won a predetermined third number of times. A time-saving end condition (third end condition) is established only when all of the following conditions are established. By configuring in this way, even if one or more of the first condition, second condition, and third condition are established, it is possible to realize a novel control in which the advantageous time-saving state can be continued while at least one condition is not established, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 42nd control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the 41st control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second modified example of the 40th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1232 to FIG. 1237, the characteristic presentation mode in this 42nd control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 1232(a), the details of the remaining machine stock presentation executed during the execution period of the big win game in this 42nd control example will be described. Here, as described above, in this 42nd control example, the first to third small wins are provided as small wins in which it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the specific area 650e3 (to generate a V win). In addition, in this 42nd control example, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the number of times each of the first to third small wins is won reaches a specified number of times that is predetermined for each type of time-saving state. That is, if the other time-saving end conditions (the first end condition that is established when the total number of times that the special symbols are drawn reaches a specified number, the second end condition that is established when the number of times that the V small win that can generate a V prize reaches a specified number, and the third end condition that is established when the number of times that the second special symbol is drawn reaches a specified number) are all not established, the time-saving state is configured to continue as long as the number of times that at least one of the first to third small wins has not reached the specified number (the first to third times). In this 42nd control example, the specified number of times that these first to third small wins have been won is configured to be suggestable by the performance mode. More specifically, when a big win that grants a time-saving state after the big win is won, a performance (remaining machine stock performance) that notifies a number (remaining machine) that suggests the specified number of times corresponding to each of the first to third small wins in the time-saving state set after the big win is won is configured to be executable. After the time-saving mode is entered, the number of remaining machines notified during the big win continues to be displayed, and each time the first, second, or third small win is won, the corresponding number of remaining machines is subtracted, providing an indication to the player as to whether or not each small win has reached the specified number of times.

Figure 1232 (a) is a diagram showing the presentation mode when the remaining life stock presentation is started during the execution of a big win game. This remaining life stock presentation is executed, for example, as a presentation mode during the opening period of the big win. As shown in Figure 1232 (a), when the remaining life stock presentation is executed, the adventurer character 811a is first displayed in the main display area Ds. Then, in the display area HR10 formed above the adventurer character 811a, the words "PUSH to stock the remaining lives!!" are displayed, and on the left side of the adventurer character 811a as viewed from the front, a display area HR11 is formed in which a push button image PB imitating the frame button 22 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period of the frame button 22 are displayed inside. In addition, on the right side of the adventurer character 811a as viewed from the front, display areas Dm6a to Dm6d are formed for displaying images suggesting the specified number of times for each small win. The word "remaining lives" is displayed in the display area Dm6a, and an image of the face of the adventurer character, an image of the face of the rabbit character, and an image of the face of the gunman character are displayed in the display areas Dm6b to Dm6d, respectively. Furthermore, the word "remaining lives stock chance" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that by pressing the frame button 22, the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a among the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c will be notified. The remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a correspond to the prescribed number of first small wins (the number of first small wins required until the first condition is met), the rabbit character 811b corresponds to the prescribed number of second small wins (the number of second small wins required until the second condition is met), and the gunslinger character 811c corresponds to the prescribed number of second small wins (the number of third small wins required until the third condition is met).

1232(b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode when the player presses the frame button 22 in the remaining life stock chance presentation. As shown in FIG. 1232(b), when the press of the frame button 22 is detected in the remaining life stock presentation, a presentation is executed in which the displayed character shouts out the remaining life (the specified number of corresponding small wins) corresponding to the time-saving state to be set after the end of the current big win. FIG. 1232(b) illustrates a situation in which "5" is notified as the remaining life of the adventurer character 811a. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1232(b), a presentation is executed in which the adventurer character 811a shouts "5" (a balloon image SG with the character 5 displayed is formed). In addition, in the display area Dm6b for indicating the remaining life of the adventurer character 811a, the number "x5" is displayed to the right of the image of the face part of the adventurer character 811a. Furthermore, the characters "5 units stocked!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the adventurer character 811a has been granted five remaining lives. Once the announcement of the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a is finished, the remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b and the gunman character 811c are announced in turn using a similar presentation. This makes it possible to announce to the player, while the jackpot game is being played, the number (remaining lives) that suggests the specified number of times for each small win in the time-saving state that is set after the jackpot ends, and thus realizes a novel presentation mode that suggests to the player in advance how long the time-saving number will continue. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

After the transition to the time-saving state, each time one of the first to third small wins is won, an effect is executed in which the remaining lives of the corresponding character are reduced, and the time-saving state ends when the remaining lives of all characters reach 0. The series of effects in this time-saving state will be explained with reference to Figures 1233 to 1236.

1233(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the time-saving state (rush) is started. In FIG. 1233, the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c are notified of 5, 3, and 1 remaining lives, respectively, in the big win, and the big win ends and the time-saving state (rush) is entered. As shown in FIG. 1233(a), when the time-saving state (rush) is started, an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c and the enemy monster character 821 glare at each other. In addition, the characters "Knock down the target before the remaining lives run out!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, the display areas Dm6a to Dm6d continue to be displayed at the right end of the main display area Dm from the time of the big win game. Furthermore, the words "RUSH START" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to intuitively understand that the time-saving state will continue as long as each character has remaining lives, and that defeating the enemy monster character 821 will result in a big win.

Figure 1233 (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when a reach occurs during the time-saving state. Here, in this 42nd control example, when the lottery for the second special pattern results in a big win or a small win, a variable display mode accompanied by a reach effect is set as a variable display effect. In other words, when a reach occurs, it is determined that it is a big win, a V small win that essentially determines a big win, or any of the first to third small wins. In other words, when a reach occurs, it is determined that it is a big win, or that the number of executions of any of the first to third small wins increases by one (the remaining lives of the corresponding character are subtracted). For this reason, in the time-saving state in this 42nd control example, after a reach occurs, a performance is executed in which a big win is obtained by defeating the enemy monster character 821, while the remaining lives of the defeated character are subtracted by one by being defeated by the monster character 821. More specifically, as shown in Figure 1233 (b), when a reach occurs, a performance is executed in which one of the three characters is selected. The example in FIG. 1233(b) illustrates the case where rabbit character 811b has been selected, with the area around rabbit character 811b illuminated and the other characters displayed as black silhouettes. In other words, rabbit character 811b is displayed more emphasized than the other characters. Additionally, the words "Opponent Decided!!" are displayed in display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that rabbit character 811b has been decided as the character that will battle monster character 821.

Basically, if the lottery result is the first small win, the adventurer character 811a is selected as the opponent, if the lottery result is the second small win, the rabbit character 811b is selected, and if the lottery result is the third small win, the gunman character 811c is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a big win or a V small win that is essentially a big win, the selection rate is allocated so that the selection rate of the gunman character is relatively high and the selection rate of the adventurer character 811a is relatively low. Specifically, for example, if a big win or a V small win is won when all characters have one or more remaining lives, the selection rate of the adventurer character 811a is 25%, the selection rate of the rabbit character 811b is 30%, and the selection rate of the gunman character 811c is 45%. Also, if there is one or more characters with 0 remaining lives, one character is selected from the characters with one or more remaining lives. In this case, too, the selection rates are distributed so that the selection rate of the gunman character 811c is relatively high and the selection rate of the adventurer character 811a is relatively low. This allows the player to focus on the character that will be selected when a reach occurs, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1234(a), the presentation mode when a non-V small win (any of the first to third small wins) that cannot be V-winning is won will be described. FIG. 1234(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a second small win corresponding to the rabbit character 811b is won as a non-V small win. If the second small win is won with one or more remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b, a presentation in which the rabbit character 811b is determined as the opponent when a reach occurs (see FIG. 1233(b)) is performed, and finally, as shown in FIG. 1234(a), the rabbit character 811b loses the battle. Also, a presentation in which the remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b are reduced by one is performed. FIG. 1234(a) illustrates a situation in which the number of remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b (i.e., the number of times remaining until the number of times the second small jackpot has been won reaches a specified number) has decreased from 3 to 2, and the number of remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b displayed in the display area Dm6c has been decreased from 3 to 2.

Next, referring to FIG. 1234(b), we will explain the presentation mode when the number of times the first to third small wins have all reached the specified number and the time-saving end condition is met. In this case, the basic flow of the presentation is the same as the presentation in which a non-V small win is won and the remaining lives are reduced (see FIG. 1233(b) and FIG. 1234(a)). However, when the monster character 821 is defeated, the remaining lives corresponding to the defeated character (rabbit character 811b in the example of FIG. 1234(b)) are updated to 0, and the words "RUSH ended..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. This allows the player to easily understand that the time-saving state (rush state) has ended in conjunction with the remaining lives of all characters reaching 0. Therefore, a presentation mode that is easy for the player to understand can be realized, and therefore a preferable presentation mode can be realized.

In addition, in the variable display performance executed based on winning the last non-V small win in the time-saving state, a performance mode is set that also takes into account the results of the pre-reading of the reserved ball of the second special pattern that was reserved at the time of the start of the variation. In other words, even if a non-V small win is won and the time-saving end condition is established, if the lottery result corresponding to a big win or a V small win is reserved in the reserved ball of the second special pattern, the big win will be won immediately after the transition to the normal state and the time-saving state will be transitioned to. In this case, the end of the time-saving state (rush) is not notified, and a performance of defeating the monster character 821 is executed as a variable display performance of the time-saving final variation to notify the big win. On the other hand, if all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are neither a big win nor a V small win, a rush end performance is executed as shown in FIG. 1234 (b). By configuring in this way, the expectation of a big win in the time-saving final variation can be improved. That is, when a reach occurs when character 1 has one remaining life and the other characters have zero, and an effect is started in which the character with one remaining life battles the monster character 821, if the fluctuation and the remaining reserves of the second special pattern include at least one big win (or V small win), an effect is executed in which the character wins against the monster character 821, so the expectation of a battle effect that starts when character 1 has one remaining life and the other characters have zero remaining lives can be made higher than the expectation of a battle effect that is performed at other times. This makes it possible to realize a well-balanced gameplay.

Next, referring to FIG. 1235, a remaining life recovery effect that may be executed during the time-saving state in this 42nd control example will be described. In this 42nd control example, as in the second modified example in the 41st control example described above, there is a possibility that a time-saving pattern will be won in the lottery for the second special pattern. In this 42nd control example, when a time-saving pattern is won during the time-saving state, the specified number of times for the first to third small wins is added. In other words, since the time-saving end condition (second end condition) becomes difficult to be established, the player can be pleased when a time-saving pattern is won. As shown in FIG. 1235(a), when a time-saving pattern is won during the time-saving state (rush state) and the remaining life increase condition is established, a reach effect is generated and a treasure box 810 is displayed. In addition, the words "Treasure box appears! Get a recovery medicine!" are displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to intuitively understand that if the treasure box 810 that appears contains a recovery medicine, it will be advantageous for the player.

As shown in FIG. 1235(b), when an effect is executed in which a recovery potion 810d appears from a treasure chest 810, the words "lives restored" are displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, an effect is executed in which 10 lives are added to the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunslinger character 811c, respectively, and a chance symbol indicating a time-saving symbol win is displayed as the third symbol. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the remaining lives have been restored based on a time-saving symbol win.

In addition, in this 42nd control example, a false remaining life recovery effect is also provided in which the treasure chest 810 is empty and the remaining lives are not restored. This false remaining life recovery effect is executed when a non-V small win of a type corresponding to a character whose remaining lives have already been reduced to 0 is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable display effect corresponding to a non-V small win that has already reached the specified number of times from becoming an incoherent effect in which a character with 0 remaining lives is made to battle again, and it is possible to make the player hope that the remaining lives will be restored. Therefore, a more preferable presentation mode can be realized.

Next, referring to FIG. 1236, the result effect executed during the period from when the end of the time-saving state (rush state) is notified until all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed will be described. FIG. 1236(a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the result effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 1236(a), when the result effect is executed, characters indicating the number of jackpots won before the time-saving state ends and the number of prize balls paid out are displayed in the display area HR10 formed in the center of the main display area Dm. FIG. 1236(ba) illustrates a case in which six jackpots are won and 5850 prize balls are paid out before the time-saving state ends, and the characters "BONUS x 6" and "total 5850pt" are displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to check the game results in the current time-saving state, thereby improving the convenience of the player. In addition, in the small display area Dm8, a variable display effect corresponding to the remaining reserved balls of the second special pattern is executed in a relatively inconspicuous display mode (narrow display area). Furthermore, the words "RUSH END..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time-saving state has ended. In this 42nd control example, the variable time of the second special pattern in the normal state is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, even if the maximum number (4 balls) of reserved balls of the second special pattern are reserved, the remaining reserved balls will be consumed in about 2 seconds.

Figure 1236 (b) is a diagram showing the presentation mode when the winning reserved balls are consumed when the reserved balls of the second special pattern that increased after the start of the final time-saving fluctuation are a winning ball (big winning ball or V small winning ball). Here, as described above, in this 42nd control example, the configuration is such that the presentation result is set taking into account the reserved balls of the second special pattern in the final time-saving fluctuation, but the reserved balls of the second special pattern that increased after the start of the final time-saving fluctuation (i.e., after the fluctuation display performance started) cannot be reflected in the performance. Therefore, if the reserved balls of the second special pattern that increased after the start of the final time-saving fluctuation are a winning ball, a short-time (0.5 second) winning notification performance can be executed when the fluctuation display corresponding to the winning reserved ball starts in the result performance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1236(b), when a winning variation is executed during the result presentation, the third symbol of the winning combination (the third symbol with the same numbers) descends from above the display area HR10 where the characters indicating the game result are displayed, and a presentation is executed in which it pushes aside the display area HR10, and the symbol indicating a big win or small win is displayed frozen in the small display area Dm8. More specifically, in the case of a big win, three identical numbers are displayed frozen, and in the case of a small win, three different odd numbers are displayed frozen. Furthermore, the words "Bonus Confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the remaining reserve of the second special symbol has won a big win or a V small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 1237, the invincible mode, which is one of the time-saving states in the 42nd control example, will be described. This invincible mode has two types: a first time-saving state C, which is entered when the player wins a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special pattern, and a second time-saving state A, which is entered when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached. The game state is configured such that the time-saving state (the first time-saving state C or the second time-saving state A) continues until the next big win is won. As shown in FIG. 1237, when the invincible mode is set, all of the remaining lives of each character are displayed as "∞". In addition, the text "Invincible mode" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that each character has an infinite number of remaining lives and that the time-saving state will definitely continue until the player wins against the monster character 821. In reality, the specified number of times for the first to third small wins in the invincible mode are all set to 100 times.

Next, referring to FIG. 1238, the transition method between each state in this 42nd control example will be described. Here, in this 42nd control example, there are mainly four modes. That is, there are a normal mode (normal state A) that is disadvantageous to the player, a chance mode (first time-saving state A) that is the least advantageous among the time-saving states (hard to win a jackpot), a rush mode (first time-saving state B, second time-saving state B) that is relatively advantageous (easy to win a jackpot), and an invincible mode (first time-saving state C, second time-saving state A) that is the most advantageous (almost continues until the next jackpot). In the chance mode, the number of time-saving times is set to one, as in the time-saving mode in the first modified example of the 41st control example described above, and the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be accumulated up to the upper limit number (four) during the variable display of the second special pattern in one time, so that it is a game state in which five opportunities for drawing special patterns are essentially given. Rush mode is a game state in which the time-saving state ends when the number of wins of the first to third small wins mentioned above reaches a set number, and is a game state with innovative gameplay that allows players to play while hoping that each character's remaining lives will not run out. Invincible mode is the most advantageous game state that will essentially continue until the next big win.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 1238, a method of transition of the game state in the normal mode (normal state A) which is disadvantageous to the player will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1238, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state A (normal mode) to another state when a jackpot is won in the lottery of a special symbol or when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached. More specifically, when the jackpot A42, which is determined (selected) at a rate of 5% when a jackpot is won at a rate of about 1/320 in the lottery of a special symbol, is determined as the jackpot type, the first time-shortened state B (a type of rush mode) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Also, when the jackpot B42, which is determined at a rate of 95% when a jackpot is won, is determined as the jackpot type, the first time-shortened state A (chance mode) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when a jackpot is not won in the normal state A and the number of lotteries of the special symbol reaches the ceiling number of lotteries (950 times), the second time-shortened state A (a type of invincible mode) is set. For this reason, in the normal state, the game is played in the hope of winning a jackpot in the drawing of a special symbol or reaching the ceiling number of draws. Since the invincible mode is the most advantageous game state, especially after a certain number of consecutive draws of special symbols (e.g., 600 draws) with no wins, the player can hope for consecutive losses up to the ceiling number of draws, rather than winning a jackpot. Therefore, even if a player gets stuck, the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

Also, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 1238, there is a possibility of transitioning from the first time-saving state A (chance mode) to another game state when a big win, a small win, a time-saving pattern win, or the end condition of the time-saving state is met and all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. More specifically, as shown in the middle of FIG. 1238, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the game state after the big win is set to the first time-saving state C (a type of invincible mode) regardless of the type of big win. Also, when a small win, which is won with a probability of about 1/10 in the lottery of the second special pattern, is won, when the small win A42, which is determined as the small win type with a rate of 5%, is won, the game state after the big win is set to the first time-saving state C (a type of invincible mode) on the condition that the small win A42 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. On the other hand, if a small win is won and the type of small win is one of small wins B42 to H42, which are determined with a 95% probability, the game state after the big win ends is set to the first time-saving state B (a type of rush mode), provided that the small win passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. Also, if a time-saving pattern with a probability of 1/500 is won in the lottery for the second special pattern in the first time-saving state A (chance mode), the game state is set to the second time-saving state B (a type of rush mode). Furthermore, if all reserved balls for the second special pattern reserved in the chance mode are consumed (all misses), the game transitions to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to the lower left of FIG. 1238, a method of transition from the rush mode (first time-saving state B, second time-saving state B) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower left of FIG. 1238, there is a possibility of transition from the rush mode to another state when a big win is won, when a small win is won, and when the end condition of the time-saving state is met and all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. More specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 1238, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the game state after the big win is set to the first time-saving state C (a type of invincible mode) regardless of the type of big win. Also, when a small win, which is won with a probability of about 1/10 in the lottery of the second special pattern, is won as a small win type with a rate of 5%, when the small win A42 is won, the game state after the big win is set to the first time-saving state C (a type of invincible mode) on the condition that the small win A42 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins a big win. Also, if the time-saving end condition is met (mainly when the first to third small wins all reach the specified number of times), the game is set to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. In contrast, if the small win is one of the small wins B42 to H42, which are determined as the small win type with a 95% probability, the game state after the big win is set to the first time-saving state B (a type of rush mode) again (rush mode loops). Although not shown in the figure, if a time-saving symbol is won, the game is set to the second time-saving state B (a type of rush mode) (rush mode loops).

Next, referring to the lower right of FIG. 1238, a method of transitioning from the invincible mode to another state will be described. As shown in the lower right of FIG. 1238, there is a possibility of transitioning from the invincible mode to another state when a small win is won. More specifically, as shown in the lower right of FIG. 1238, when a small win occurs in the invincible mode, which has a probability of 1/10, and when the small win type is one of small wins B42 to H42, which are determined with a probability of 95%, the game state after the big win is again set to the first time-saving state B (a type of rush mode) on the condition that the small win passes through the specific area 650e3 and a big win is won. On the other hand, when a big win is won in the invincible mode, when a small win A42 is determined, or when a time-saving pattern is won, the invincible mode is looped.

In this way, in this 42nd control example, three modes with significantly different playability (chance mode, rush mode, and invincible mode) are provided as modes advantageous to the player. That is, there are three types of modes: chance mode, which provides the player with the expectation of winning a big win or small win a fixed number of times, rush mode, which provides a fluid number of times the time-saving state continues depending on the winning status of the first to third small wins, and invincible mode, which essentially continues until the next big win. Therefore, the playability can be significantly changed depending on the mode that is set, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration of 42nd control example>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this 42nd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1239(a). Fig. 1239(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this 42nd control example. As shown in FIG. 1239(a), the ROM 202 in this 42nd control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second modified example of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example) (see FIG. 1190(a)) in that the first winning random number table 202am is provided instead of the first winning random number table 202ak, the big winning type selection table 202bm is provided instead of the big winning type selection table 202bk, the variation pattern selection table 202dm is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202dk, the time-saving grant table 202em is provided instead of the time-saving grant table 202ek, and the small winning type selection table 202fm is provided instead of the small winning type selection table 202fk. The other configurations are the same as the configurations of the ROM 202 in the second modified example of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example) described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

First, the details of the first winning random number table 202am in this 42nd control example will be described. Here, the first winning random number table 202am in this 42nd control example differs from the first winning random number table 202ak in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above only in that the prescribed contents of the data table referenced when drawing the second special symbol have been changed. With reference to FIG. 1240(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 referenced when drawing the second special symbol in this 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1240(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of this special symbol 2 random number table 202am2. As shown in FIG. 1240(a), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 in this 42nd control example, as the range of random numbers (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined as a big win, 205 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 204" are associated and specified, as in the first modified example of the 41st control example described above. On the other hand, in this 42nd control example, as the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined as a small win, a range of 48066 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 48270" is associated and specified. The small win here includes all of the V small win and the first to third small wins. Also, as shown in FIG. 1240(a), the special pattern 2 random number table 202am2 in this 42nd control example is associated with a range of 131 random number values (counter values) from "48271 to 48401" as the range of random number values (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be winning time-saving patterns.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a big win is 205, so the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/320 (205/65,536). Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win is 48,066, so the probability of winning a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/1.36 (48,066/65,536). Furthermore, out of the 65,536 possible random number values of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be winning time-saving symbols is 131, so the probability of winning the time-saving symbol in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/500 (131/65,536).

In this way, in this 42nd control example, compared to the second modified example of the 41st control example described above, the probability of a small win is significantly higher and the probability of a time-saving pattern is lowered.

Next, referring to FIG. 1240(b), the details of the jackpot type selection table 202bm in this 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1240(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bm in this 42nd control example. As shown in FIG. 1240(b), the jackpot type selection table 202bm in this 42nd control example specifies two types of jackpot types for the first special pattern, jackpot A42 and jackpot B42, and specifies one type of jackpot type for the second special pattern, jackpot C42.

As shown in FIG. 1240(b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "jackpot A42" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot B42" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A42" is a jackpot type with 10 rounds and a game state after the jackpot ends set to rush mode (first time-saving state B). "Jackpot B42" is a jackpot type with 4 rounds and a game state after the jackpot ends set to chance mode (first time-saving state A). For this reason, "jackpot A42" is more advantageous than "jackpot B42" in terms of both the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) between "0 and 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A42" and "jackpot B42" is 5 and 95, respectively, so the probability of winning "jackpot A42" and "jackpot B42" when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state, the first time-saving state B, which has a relatively low probability (5% probability) and a high degree of advantage, is set, and the first time-saving state A, which has a relatively high probability (95% probability) and a low degree of advantage, is set. Note that this is limited to the normal state, and when "jackpot A42" or "jackpot B42" is won (a jackpot is started) in the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the invincible mode (time-saving state C).

As shown in FIG. 1240(b), as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, "jackpot C42" is defined to correspond to the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2 (range of "0 to 99"). This "jackpot C42" is a jackpot type with 10 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the advantageous invincible mode (first time-saving state C) regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Since "jackpot C42" corresponds to the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, "jackpot C42" is always determined. This "jackpot C42" is the most advantageous jackpot type among all jackpot types.

In addition to these "jackpot A42" to "jackpot C42", this 42nd control example also has "jackpot D42" to "jackpot J42". These "jackpot D42" to "jackpot J42" are jackpot types that are won when a small jackpot is won, small jackpots A42 to H42 are determined as the small jackpot type, and specific area 650e3 is passed between the small jackpots, and the game state after the jackpot ends is basically set to rush mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 1241(a), the details of the variation pattern selection table 202dm in this 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1241(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this variation pattern selection table 202dm. As shown in FIG. 1241(a), the variation pattern selection table 202dm in this 42nd control example is composed of at least a normal table 202dm1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a normal state, a time-saving table 202dm2 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a time-saving state, and a time-saving final variation table 202dm3 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the final variation of the time-saving state. First, referring to FIG. 1241(b), the details of the normal table 202dm1 will be described.

Figure 1241 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal table 202dm1 in this 42nd control example. Here, as shown in Figure 1241, the prescribed contents in the normal table 202dm1 in this 42nd control example when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" are the same as those in the normal table 202dk1 (see Figure 1221) in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted here.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1241, if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Complete miss", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Ultra-short miss" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Ultra-short win" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". is specified, and when the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "small win", a "super short small win" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and when the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "time-saving pattern", a "super short thrust" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, it is configured so that the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

In this 42nd control example, as in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above, even if a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the normal state and a winning normal pattern is obtained, the opening and closing pattern of the electric device 640a (short opening for 0.1 seconds) is set so that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a winning normal pattern. Therefore, even if a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the normal state, the game ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640. In this 42nd control example, the situation in which the lottery for the second special pattern is executed in the normal state is when the time-saving final fluctuation ends and the state transitions to the normal state in the chance mode or rush mode when a reserved ball for the second special pattern is acquired by hitting the right in the time-saving final fluctuation. The reason why the fluctuation time is fixed to 0.5 seconds regardless of the lottery result is to prevent the performance period from being significantly shifted depending on the number of reserved balls when setting one performance mode based on the lottery result of the remaining reserved balls in the time-saving final fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIG. 1242(a), the details of the time-saving table 202dm2 in this 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1242(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time-saving table 202dm2 in this 42nd control example. This time-saving table 202dm2 is a data table referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when performing a lottery for a special pattern in the chance mode (first time-saving state A), rush mode (first time-saving state B, second time-saving state B), or invincible mode (first time-saving state C, second time-saving state A). FIG. 1242(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of this time-saving table 202dm2. As shown in FIG. 1242(a), the content of the time-saving table 202dm2 in this 42nd control example, which corresponds to the special symbol type "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)", is the same as that of the time-saving table 202dk2 in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above (see FIG. 1222(a)). In other words, it is configured so that the short (0.5 second) variable time ends regardless of the lottery result. This is intended to prevent the player from becoming anxious when the time-saving state in which the lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage, can be executed while holding one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, continues for a long time and the player becomes anxious.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1242(a), the prescribed contents for the second special symbol are that when the lottery result is a "complete miss", a "miss" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is prescribed as the fluctuation pattern for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 178", and a "false miss" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is prescribed as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "179 to 198". In addition, if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Long win" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Small win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Long small win" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", if the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (first special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Time-saving pattern", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Long hit" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198".

In other words, in this 42nd control example, if the lottery result is anything other than a complete miss, a 15-second variation pattern is always selected. During this 15-second variation time, a battle performance in which a monster character 821 battles (see Fig. 1233(b) and Fig. 1234), or a remaining life recovery performance (see Fig. 1235) is executed. In addition, since a relatively long variation time (15 seconds) is set in the case of a small win regardless of the small win type, when the first to third small wins are won in the rush mode (first time-saving state B, second time-saving state B) and the time-saving end condition (third end condition) is established, it is possible to easily accumulate the reserved balls of the second special pattern up to the upper limit number by continuing to hit the right during the small win variation. Therefore, when a reach occurs in a situation where the remaining life of the first character is one and the remaining lives of the other characters is zero, and the battle performance develops into a battle performance in which the character with one remaining life battles the monster character 821, the expectation of the battle performance can be made higher than usual. In other words, even if the reserved balls of the second special pattern include a big win or a V small win, the performance of winning the battle is selected, so the actual winning rate can be improved more than usual. Therefore, in a situation where character 1 has one remaining life and the other characters have zero remaining lives, the player can be made to feel great expectations, and the player's motivation can be maintained until the end of the rush mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 1242(b), the details of the time-saving final change table 202dm3 will be described. This time-saving final change table 202dm3 is a table that is referenced when the number of time-saving times (the number of draws until the number of draws for the second special symbol reaches the specified number) is one in the time-saving state (chance mode, rush mode, invincible mode), and is a data table that is referenced almost only in the chance mode where the number of time-saving times is one. FIG. 1242(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the regulations of this time-saving final change table 202dm3. As shown in FIG. 1242(b), the contents of the regulations for the first special symbol are the same as those of the time-saving table 202dm2 (see FIG. 1242(a)). In other words, it is configured so that a change pattern with a change time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1242(b), as the prescribed contents for the second special pattern, when the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Complete miss", the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the entire range of "0 to 198", with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds as the fluctuation pattern, "False miss", and when the special pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the entire range of "0 to 198", with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds as the fluctuation pattern. When the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Small win", a "Long small win" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198", and when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Time-saving symbol", a "Long hit" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". In other words, regardless of the lottery result, a fluctuation pattern of 15 seconds with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. This makes it easier to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol to the upper limit number regardless of the lottery result when the right hit is continued during the time-saving final fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIG. 1243, the time-saving grant table 202em in this 42nd control example will be described in detail. This time-saving grant table 202em is a data table that is referenced when setting a time-saving state in order to set the end conditions of the time-saving state according to the trigger for setting the time-saving state, similar to the time-saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1223) in the modified example of the 41st control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 1243, the time-saving grant table 202em in this 42nd control example is stipulated in correspondence with the value of each counter that is referenced when determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is met for each time-saving state grant trigger (jackpot type, time-saving symbol winning, or reaching the ceiling lottery count). As shown in FIG. 1243, in this 42nd control example, six counters are provided to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition is met: the time-saving counter 203h, the V small win counter 203s1, the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, the third small win counter 203s4, and the special chart 2 counter 203t. The time-saving counter 203h and the special chart 2 counter 203t are the same as the counters with the same names in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

The V small win counter 203s1 is a counter for determining whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of times the V small win was won after the time-saving state was set is satisfied, and is a counter with the same function as the small win counter 203s in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above. In addition, the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4 are counters for determining whether or not the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of times the first to third small wins were won after the time-saving state was set is satisfied. Here, as described above, in this 42nd control example, the time-saving end condition (third end condition) is satisfied when the number of times all of the first to third small wins have been won reaches the specified number set at the start of the time-saving state. In other words, the second end condition is not met until the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4 are all updated to 0 in the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 1243, in this 42nd control example, there are ten types of jackpots, from "jackpot A42" to "jackpot J42", and there are also time-saving triggers based on winning a time-saving symbol and reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws. In the time-saving grant table 202em in this 42nd control example, the values of the time-saving counter 203h, the V small win counter 203s1, the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, the third small win counter 203s4, and the special symbol 2 counter 203t (i.e., the first to fourth end conditions) are associated with each time-saving trigger.

As shown in FIG. 1243, for "Jackpot A42", which is determined with a probability of 5% when a jackpot type is obtained by drawing the first special symbol, if the game state at the time of winning is normal, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "100", the value of the V small win counter 203s1 is "1", the value of the first small win counter 203s2 is "5", the value of the second small win counter 203s3 is "3", the value of the third small win counter 203s4 is "1", and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is "100". For this reason, when the "Big Win A42" is won in the normal state, the first end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the special symbol changes, the second end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the V small win game is executed, the third end condition is set to 5 times the number of times the first small win game is executed, 3 times the number of times the second small win game is executed, and the fourth end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the second special symbol changes. Since the probability of winning the first small win (small win I42), the second small win (small win J42), and the third small win (small win K42) in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, respectively, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state B) set by winning the "Big Win A42" in the normal state, the first and fourth end conditions are almost never established, and the time-saving state is ended by the second end condition, the third end condition, or winning the big win. The probability that the second end condition will be met (winning a V small win (small win A42-H42)) is approximately 1/10. In contrast, the average number of special symbol draws required until the third end condition is met is 15, so the probability of winning a big win or small win before the second end condition is met in the time-saving state (first time-saving state B) set after the end of "big win A42" is approximately 80.4%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1243, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A42" and the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "100", the value of the V small jackpot counter 203s1 is "1", the value of the first small jackpot counter 203s2 is "100", the value of the second small jackpot counter 203s3 is "100", the value of the third small jackpot counter 203s4 is "100", and the value of the special 2 counter 203t is "100". In other words, the first time-saving state C (invincible mode) is set in which the time-saving state does not end until the number of times the special pattern is drawn reaches 100 times, a V small jackpot is won, or a jackpot is won. Since the probability of winning a jackpot or small jackpot, which is about 1/10 in total, is almost 100% in the drawing of special patterns within 100 times, if the jackpot A42 is won during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set to continue until the next jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1243, for "Jackpot B42", which is determined with a 95% probability when a jackpot type is obtained by drawing the first special pattern, if the game state at the time of winning is normal, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "5", the value of the V small win counter 203s1 is "1", the value of the first small win counter 203s2 is "100", the value of the second small win counter 203s3 is "100", the value of the third small win counter 203s4 is "100", and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t is "1". Therefore, when the "big win B42" is won in the normal state, the first end condition is set to 5 times the number of times the special symbol changes, the second end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the V small win game is executed, the third end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the first small win game is executed, 100 times the number of times the second small win game is executed, and 100 times the number of times the third small win game is executed, and the fourth end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the second special symbol changes. Therefore, when the "big win B42" is won in the normal state, the time-saving state continues until the second special symbol is drawn once, the V small win is won, or the big win is won. By continuously hitting the right while the second special symbol is being displayed once in the time-saving state, it is possible to acquire the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit number (4 balls), so that the game is aimed at winning the big win or the V small win in the five draws of the second special symbol. The combined probability of winning a big win or a small V win in five or fewer second special symbol drawings is about 1/10, which is about 41%. Winning a big win or a small V win transitions to invincible mode or rush mode, so players can play with high hopes of winning a big win or a small win in five drawings of the second special symbol. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1243, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B42" and the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "100", the value of the V small jackpot counter 203s1 is "1", the value of the first small jackpot counter 203s2 is "100", the value of the second small jackpot counter 203s3 is "100", the value of the third small jackpot counter 203s4 is "100", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is "100". In other words, just like when "jackpot A42" is won during the time-saving state, the first time-saving state C (invincible mode) is set, and an advantageous state is created in which the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 1243, for the "jackpot C42" which is determined when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol or when a V win occurs in the small jackpot A42, which is a type of V small jackpot, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "100", the value of the V small jackpot counter 203s1 is "1", the value of the first small jackpot counter 203s2 is "100", the value of the second small jackpot counter 203s3 is "100", the value of the third small jackpot counter 203s4 is "100", and the value of the special 2 counter 203t is "100". In other words, the first time-saving state (invincible mode) is associated and defined. Therefore, when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, a favorable state is formed in which the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 1243, for the "jackpot D42" determined when a V win occurs in the small jackpot B42, which is a type of V small jackpot, the time-saving counter 203h has a value of "100", the V small jackpot counter 203s1 has a value of "1", the first small jackpot counter 203s2 has a value of "5", the second small jackpot counter 203s3 has a value of "3", the third small jackpot counter 203s4 has a value of "1", and the special symbol 2 counter 203t has a value of "100", regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, since the same end condition as when "jackpot A42" is won in the normal state is specified, when "jackpot D42" is won, a time-saving state (a time-saving state with a jackpot winning rate of about 80.4%) is set in which the third end condition is met by drawing the second special symbol an average of 15 times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1243, for the "jackpot E42" which is determined when a V winning occurs in the small jackpot C42, which is a type of V small jackpot, as a jackpot type, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", the value of the V small jackpot counter 203s1 is set to "1", the value of the first small jackpot counter 203s2 is set to "7", the value of the second small jackpot counter 203s3 is set to "5", the value of the third small jackpot counter 203s4 is set to "2", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "100", regardless of the game state at the time of the winning. Therefore, when the "big win E42" is won, the first end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the special symbol changes, the second end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the V small win game is played, the third end condition is set to 7 times the number of times the first small win game is played, 5 times the number of times the second small win game is played, and 2 times the number of times the third small win game is played, and the fourth end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the second special symbol changes. As described above, the probability of winning the first small win (small win I42), the second small win (small win J42), and the third small win (small win K42) in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, respectively, so the average number of times the special symbol is drawn until the third end condition is established is 25 times. Therefore, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state B) that is set after the end of "big win E42", the probability of winning a big win or small win, which is approximately 1/10 in total, before the second ending condition is met, is approximately 93.4%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1243, for the "jackpot F42" which is determined when a V winning occurs in the small jackpot D42, which is a type of V small jackpot, as a jackpot type, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", the value of the V small jackpot counter 203s1 is set to "1", the value of the first small jackpot counter 203s2 is set to "10", the value of the second small jackpot counter 203s3 is set to "7", the value of the third small jackpot counter 203s4 is set to "3", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "100", regardless of the game state at the time of the winning. Therefore, when the "big win F42" is won, the first end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the special symbol changes, the second end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the V small win game is played, the third end condition is set to 10 times the number of times the first small win game is played, 7 times the number of times the second small win game is played, and 3 times the number of times the third small win game is played, and the fourth end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the second special symbol changes. As described above, the probability of winning the first small win (small win I42), the second small win (small win J42), and the third small win (small win K42) in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, respectively, so the average number of times the special symbol is drawn until the third end condition is established is 50 times. Therefore, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state B) that is set after the end of "Big Win F42", the probability of winning a big win or small win, which is approximately 1/10 in total, before the second ending condition is met, is approximately 99.6%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1243, for the "jackpot G42" which is determined when a V winning occurs in the small jackpot E42, which is a type of V small jackpot, as a jackpot type, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", the value of the V small jackpot counter 203s1 is set to "1", the value of the first small jackpot counter 203s2 is set to "3", the value of the second small jackpot counter 203s3 is set to "2", the value of the third small jackpot counter 203s4 is set to "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203t is set to "100", regardless of the game state at the time of the winning. Therefore, when the "big win G42" is won, the first end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the special symbol changes, the second end condition is set to 1 time the number of times the V small win game is played, the third end condition is set to 3 times the number of times the first small win game is played, 2 times the number of times the second small win game is played, and the fourth end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the second special symbol changes. As described above, the probability of winning the first small win (small win I42), the second small win (small win J42), and the third small win (small win K42) in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, respectively, so the average number of times the special symbol is drawn until the third end condition is established is 10 times. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot or small jackpot, which is approximately 1/10 in total, before the second ending condition is met in the time-saving state (first time-saving state B) that is set after the end of "jackpot G42" is approximately 66.4%.

As shown in FIG. 1243, the "big win H42" determined when a V win occurs in the small win F42, which is a type of V small win, has the same end conditions as the above-mentioned "big win D42". Similarly, the "big win I42" determined when a V win occurs in the small win G42, which is a type of V small win, has the same end conditions as the above-mentioned "big win E42", and the "big win J42" determined when a V win occurs in the small win H42, which is a type of V small win, and the time-saving pattern winning have the same end conditions as the above-mentioned "big win F42", so detailed explanations are omitted here.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1243, when the time-saving trigger is the reaching of the ceiling number of lottery draws, the same end condition is associated with the time-saving trigger caused by winning "jackpot A42" or "jackpot B42" during the time-saving state, or winning "jackpot C42". In other words, the end condition is associated with the invincible mode.

In this way, in this 42nd control example, the third ending condition (the combination of the initial remaining lives of each character) is varied, so that even in the same rush mode, the possibility of winning a big win or a V small win during the rush mode can be made different, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1244, the details of the small win type selection table 202fm in this 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1244 is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 202fm. As shown in FIG. 1244, the small win type selection table 202fm in this 42nd control example has 11 types of small win types, "small win A42" to "small win J42". Of these, "small win A42" to "small win H42" are V small wins, and "small win I42" to "small win K42" are small wins that do not result in a V win.

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small prize type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 447", and "small prize A42" is associated with it as a small prize type. This "small prize A42" is a type of V small prize, and is a type of small prize that will win the big prize C42 (10-round big prize) if a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 65,535" that the small prize type counter C5 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small prize A42" is 448, which is "0 to 447", so the rate at which "small prize A42" is determined as a small prize type is approximately 0.7% (448/65,536).

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "448 to 3130" and is associated with "small win B42" as a small win type. This "small win B42" is a type of V small win, and is a type of small win that wins the big win D42 (10-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) that the small win type counter C5 can take, "0 to 65,535", the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win B42" is 2,683, "448 to 3,130", so the rate at which "small win B42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 4.1% (2,683/65,536).

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small prize type counter C5 is in the range of "3131 to 4740" and "small prize C42" is associated with it as a small prize type. This "small prize C42" is a type of V small prize, and is a type of small prize that will win the big prize E42 (10-round big prize) if a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random numbers (counter values) that the small prize type counter C5 can take, "0 to 65,535", the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small prize C42" is 1,610, "3131 to 4740", so the rate at which "small prize C42" is determined as a small prize type is approximately 2.5% (1,610/65,536).

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small prize type counter C5 is in the range of "4741 to 4919" and "small prize D42" is associated with it as a small prize type. This "small prize D42" is a type of V small prize, and is a type of small prize that will win the big prize F42 (10-round big prize) if a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random numbers (counter values) that the small prize type counter C5 can take, "0 to 65,535", the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small prize D42" is 179, "4741 to 4919", so the rate at which "small prize C42" is determined as a small prize type is approximately 0.3% (179/65,536).

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "4920 to 7937" and is associated with "small win E42" as a small win type. This "small win E42" is a type of V small win, and is a type of small win that wins the big win G42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) that the small win type counter C5 can take, "0 to 65,535", the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win E42" is 3,018, "4920 to 7937", so the rate at which "small win C42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 4.6% (3,018/65,536).

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "7938-8742" and is associated with "small win F42" as a small win type. This "small win F42" is a type of V small win, and is a type of small win that wins the big win H42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) that the small win type counter C5 can take, "0-65,535", the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win F42" is 805, "7938-8742", so the rate at which "small win F42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 1.2% (805/65,536).

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "8743 to 8903" and "small win G42" is associated with it as a small win type. This "small win G42" is a type of V small win, and is a type of small win that wins the big win I42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) that the small win type counter C5 can take, "0 to 65,535", the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win G42" is 161, "8743 to 8903", so the rate at which "small win F42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 0.2% (161/65,536).

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "8904-8943" and "small win H42" is associated with it as a small win type. This "small win H42" is a type of V small win, and is a type of small win that wins the big win J42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65,536 random number values (counter values) of "0-65,535" that the small win type counter C5 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win H42" is 40, which is "8904-8943", so the rate at which "small win H42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 0.1% (40/65,536).

Also, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "8944 to 38728" and "small win I42" is associated with it as a small win type. This "small win I42" is a type of small win in which a V win is impossible (difficult), and is also a small win type (first small win) that triggers the subtraction of the remaining lives of the adventurer's character 811a by subtracting the value of the first small win counter 203s2 when it is won. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that the small win type counter C5 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win I42" is 29785, which is "8944 to 38728", so the rate at which "small win H42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 45.4% (29785/65536). Since the probability of winning the small prize in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/1.36, the probability of winning the first small prize (small prize I42) in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/3 (45.4% x 1/1.36).

Also, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "38729 to 56599", and "small win J42" is associated with it as a small win type. This "small win J42" is a type of small win in which a V win is impossible (difficult), and is also a small win type (second small win) that triggers the subtraction of the remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b by subtracting the value of the second small win counter 203s3 when it is won. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that the small win type counter C5 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win J42" is 17871, which is "38729 to 56599", so the rate at which "small win J42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 27.3% (17871/65536). Since the probability of winning the small prize in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/1.36, the probability of winning the second small prize (small prize J42) in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/5 (27.3% x 1/1.36).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "56600 to 65535" and "small win K42" is associated with it as a small win type. This "small win K42" is a type of small win in which a V win is impossible (difficult), and is also a small win type (second small win) that triggers the subtraction of the remaining lives of the gunman character 811c by subtracting the value of the third small win counter 203s4 when it is won. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that the small win type counter C5 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "small win K42" is 8936, which is "56600 to 65535", so the rate at which "small win K42" is determined as a small win type is approximately 13.6% (8936/65536). Since the probability of winning the small prize in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/1.36, the probability of winning the second small prize (small prize K42) in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/10 (13.6% x 1/1.36).

Next, referring to FIG. 1239(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1239(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 42nd control example. As shown in FIG. 1239(b), the RAM 203 in this 42nd control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second modified example (and the first modified example) of the above-mentioned 41st control example (see FIG. 1213) in that a V small win counter 203s1, a first small win counter 203s2, a second small win counter 203s3, and a third small win counter 203s4 are provided instead of the small win counter 203s, a special drawing lottery counter 203ma is provided, and the time-saving limit counter 203kb and the subtraction waiting flag 203kc are deleted.

The V small win counter 203s1 is a counter that is referenced to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times that a small win that can be won by a V prize is won in the time-saving state, the first small win counter 203s2 is a counter that is referenced to determine whether or not the number of times that the first small win has been won in the time-saving state has reached a specified number, the second small win counter 203s3 is a counter that is referenced to determine whether or not the number of times that the second small win has been won in the time-saving state has reached a specified number, and the third small win counter 203s4 is a counter that is referenced to determine whether or not the number of times that the third small win has been won in the time-saving state has reached a specified number. At the end of the jackpot, the V small win counter 203s1, the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4 are set with counter values that correspond to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, read from the time-saving grant table 202em (see FIG. 1243).

The special symbol selection counter 203ma is a counter that is referenced to determine whether the ceiling number of selections has been reached. The initial value of this special symbol selection counter 203ma is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time a special symbol selection is executed (see S651A in FIG. 1248), and the value is reset to 0 when a jackpot is won. When the value of this special symbol selection counter 203ma reaches 950, it is determined that the ceiling number of selections has been reached, and a second time-saving state A, which is a type of invincible mode, is set. In other words, a time-saving state that will essentially continue until the next jackpot is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 1245, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 42nd control example will be described in detail. FIG. 1245 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 42nd control example. As shown in FIG. 1245, the RAM 223 in this 42nd control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second modified example of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example) described above (see FIG. 1196) in that an end condition storage area 223ma and a final variation performance counter 223mb have been added. It also differs in that the icon information storage area 223ka and the remaining hit count counter 223kb have been deleted.

The end condition storage area 223ma is a memory area for storing data indicating the time-saving end conditions. Depending on the data stored in this end condition storage area 223ma, the display settings for the remaining lives of each character and the subtraction display of the remaining lives are performed.

The final variation effect counter 223mb is a counter in which a counter value indicating the number of variations that the battle effect, which is started based on the start of the final variation of the time-saving feature, will continue is set. The number of reserved balls of the second special pattern that are reserved at the start of the final variation is set in this final variation effect counter 223mb (see S4453A in FIG. 1252), and the value is decremented by one each time the variation display of the second special pattern is executed (see S4444A in FIG. 1251).

<Regarding control process of main control device in 42nd control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 42nd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1246 to Fig. 1249. First, details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (S241A) in this 42nd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1246. This special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (S241A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (see Fig. 1227) in the second modified example of the above-mentioned 41st control example, and is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (see Fig. 1227).

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 42 (see FIG. 1246) in this 42nd control example, steps S401 to S403, S405 to S408, and S421B are the same as steps S401 to S403, S405 to S408, and S421B of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227) in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (see FIG. 1246) in this 42nd control example, when the process of S403 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is 1 or not (S431A), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is 1 (S431A: Yes), it is then determined whether the current special symbol lottery is a lottery for the second special symbol (S432A). In the process of S432A, if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is a lottery for the second special symbol (S432A: Yes), the time-saving state is ended by the end of the variation display of the second special symbol that is started this time (the current variation display is the final variation of the time-saving), so the time-saving final variation table 202dm3 (see FIG. 1242(b)) is read out (S433A) and the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S431A that the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203t is not 1 (S431A: No), and if it is determined in the process of S432A that the current special symbol drawing is not a drawing of the second special symbol (it is a drawing of the first special symbol) (S432A: No), a variation pattern selection table according to the game state is read (S434A) and the process proceeds to S405. In the process of S434A, if the game state is the normal state, the normal table 202dm1 (see FIG. 1241(b)) is read, and if the time-saving state is the time-saving table 202dm2 (see FIG. 1242(a)) is read.

By executing this special pattern change pattern selection process 42 (see FIG. 1246), the change pattern selection table can be switched depending on whether or not it is the final change of the time-saving feature, so that the change pattern can be set more appropriately.

Next, referring to FIG. 1247, the details of the time-saving update process 42 (S242) in this 42nd control example will be described. This time-saving update process 42 is a process executed in place of the time-saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1199) in the second modified example of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example) described above, and, like the time-saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1199), is a process for updating various counter values for determining the time-saving end condition and for determining whether the time-saving end condition is met.

Of the time-saving update process 42 in this 42nd control example (see FIG. 1247), steps S601 to S605, S633A to S637A, and S639A are the same as steps S601 to S605, S633A to S637A, and S639A of the time-saving update process 41 in the second modified example of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example) (see FIG. 1199).

When the time-saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in this 42nd control example is started, first, the ceiling determination process 42 is executed to determine whether the ceiling number of lottery draws has been reached (S641A), and the process proceeds to S601. Details of this ceiling determination process 42 (S641A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1248.

In addition, in the time-saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in this 42nd control example, when the process of S605 is completed, the values of the special chart 2 counter 203t and various small win counters (V small win counter 203s1, 1st small win counter 203s2, 2nd small win counter 203s3, 3rd small win counter 203s4) are all reset to 0 (S641A), and the process moves to S607. This process of S641A is a change due to the fact that the V small win counter 203s1, 1st small win counter 203s2, 2nd small win counter 203s3, and 3rd small win counter 203s4 are provided instead of the small win counter 203s in the modified example of the 41st control example as various counters for determining the time-saving end condition.

In addition, in the time-saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in this 42nd control example, when the process of S604 ends, the small win time-saving update process 42 (S642A) is executed instead of the small win time-saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1200) in the second modified example of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example), and the process moves to S633A. Details of this small win time-saving update process 42 (S642A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1249.

Furthermore, in the time-saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in this 42nd control example, when the process of S637A is completed, the values of the time-saving counter 203h and the various small win counters (V small win counter 203s1, first small win counter 203s2, second small win counter 203s3, third small win counter 203s4) are all reset to 0 (S643A), and the process proceeds to S639A. This process of S643A, like the process of S641A, is a change due to the fact that the V small win counter 203s1, first small win counter 203s2, second small win counter 203s3, and third small win counter 203s4 are provided instead of the small win counter 203s as various counters for determining the time-saving end condition in the modified example of the 41st control example.

Next, referring to FIG. 1248, the details of the ceiling determination process 42 (S641A) in this 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1248 is a flowchart showing this ceiling determination process 42 (S641A). In this ceiling determination process 42 (S641A), first, the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203ma is updated by adding 1 (S651A), and it is determined whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203ma after the addition has reached 950 (S652A). In the process of S652A, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203ma has reached 950 (S652A: Yes), it is determined that the ceiling number of draws has been reached, and each process of S653A to S655A for setting the second time-saving state A is executed. That is, the game state is set to the second time-saving state (S653A), the time-saving end condition that triggers the time-saving grant when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached is read from the time-saving grant table 202em (see FIG. 1243), and various counters (time-saving counter 203h, V small win counter 203s1, 1st small win counter 203s2, 2nd small win counter 203s3, 3rd small win counter 203s4, special chart 2 counter 203t) are added and updated (S654A), a state command indicating the second time-saving state is set (S655A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S652A, if it is determined that the value of the special chart lottery counter 203ma after the addition is not 950 (S652A: No), it is determined that the ceiling number of lottery draws has not been reached, and each process of S653A to S655A is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this ceiling determination process 42 (see FIG. 1248), it is possible to transition to the advantageous second time-saving state A (invincible mode) by reaching 950 special symbol draws without winning the jackpot, so that, particularly after a certain number of consecutive special symbol draws (e.g., 600 draws) with misses, the player can hope for consecutive misses up to the ceiling number of draws, rather than winning the jackpot. Therefore, even if the player gets stuck, the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

Next, referring to FIG. 1249, the details of the above-mentioned small win time-saving update process 42 (S642A) will be explained. This small win time-saving update process 42 (S642A) is a process executed in place of the small win time-saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1200) in the second modified example of the above-mentioned 41st control example (and the 41st control example), and like the small win time-saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1200), it is a process for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition based on a small win has been met. FIG. 1249 is a flowchart showing this small win time-saving update process 42 (S642A).

In the small win time-saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1249) in this 42nd control example, the same processes as the S701, S704, and S706 processes of the small win time-saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1200) in the second modified example of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example) are executed in the S701 process. In addition, in the small win time-saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1249) in this 42nd control example, if it is determined in the S701 process that the current special pattern lottery result is a small win (S701: Yes), it is then determined whether the type of the current small win is a V small win (any of the small wins A42 to H42) (S721A).

In the process of S721A, if it is determined that the current small win is a V small win (any of small wins A42 to H42) (S721A: Yes), the value of the V small win counter 203s1 is updated by subtracting 1 (S722A), and it is determined whether the value of the V small win counter 203s1 after the subtraction has become 0 (S723A). In the process of S723A, if it is determined that the value of the V small win counter 203s1 after the subtraction has been updated to 0 (S723A: Yes), this means that the termination condition of the time-saving state (second termination condition) has been met, so the processes of S704, S724A, and S706 for terminating the time-saving state are executed. That is, the game state is set to the normal state (S704), and the counter values of the time-saving counter 203h, the special chart 2 counter 203t, and all the small win counters (V small win counter 203s1, the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4) are reset to 0 (S724A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S706A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S723A that the value of the V small win counter 203s1 after subtraction is not 0 (S723A: No), this means that the end condition of the time-saving state is not established, so the processes of S704, S724A, and S706 are skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S721A that the current small win is not a V small win (S721A: No), this means that the current small win is one of the first to third small wins (small wins I42 to K42), so the value of the small win counter corresponding to the current small win type is updated by subtracting 1 (S725A). In the process of S725A, if the current small win is the first small win (small win I42), the first small win counter 203s2 is updated by subtracting 1, if the current small win is the second small win (small win J42), the second small win counter 203s3 is updated by subtracting 1, and if the current small win is the third small win (small win K42), the third small win counter 203s4 is updated by subtracting 1.

When the processing of S725A is completed, it is then determined whether the counter values of the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4 have all become 0 (S726A). If it is determined that the counter values of the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4 have all become 0 (S726A: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (third end condition) has been met, and the processing of S704, S724A, and S706 is executed to end the time-saving state, and then this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S726A that any of the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4 is not 0 (S726A: No), this means that the end condition for the time-saving state (third end condition) is not met, so the processes of S704, S724A, and S706 for ending the time-saving state are skipped and this process is terminated.

By executing this small win time-saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1249), it is possible to realize a novel gameplay feature in which the time-saving state can continue until the number of wins of the first through third small wins all reaches the specified number, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 42nd control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 42nd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1250 to Fig. 1252. First, details of the variable performance setting process 42 (S4321A) in this 42nd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1250. This variable performance setting process 42 (S4321A) is a process executed in place of the variable performance setting process 41B (see Fig. 1230) in the second modified example of the above-mentioned 41st control example, and is a process for setting the performance mode of the variable display performance of the third pattern executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern, similar to the variable performance setting process 41B (see Fig. 1230). Fig. 1250 is a flowchart showing this variable performance setting process 42 (S4321A).

In the variable presentation setting process 42 (see FIG. 1250) in this 42nd control example, the same processes as the S4401, S4403, and S4421A processes of the variable presentation setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230) in the second modified example of the 41st control example are executed in each of the S4401, S4403, and S4421A processes, respectively. In addition, in the variable presentation setting process 42 (see FIG. 1250) in this 42nd control example, when the process of S4401 is completed, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S4441A), and if it is determined that it is in the time-saving state (S4441A: Yes), the time-saving presentation setting process 42 for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation in the time-saving state is executed (S4442A), and this process is terminated. Details of this time-saving presentation setting process 42 (S4442A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1251.

In addition, in the variable performance setting process 42 (see FIG. 1250) in this 42nd control example, if it is determined in the processing of S4403 that the current special pattern drawing is the drawing of the second special pattern (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the final variable performance counter 223mb is greater than 0 (S4443A), and if it is determined that the value of the final variable performance counter 223mb is greater than 0 (S4443A: Yes), the value of the final variable performance counter 223mb is updated by subtracting 1 (S4444A), and the processing proceeds to S4447A. On the other hand, in the processing of S4443A, if it is determined that the value of the final variable performance counter 223mb is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (S4443A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a complete miss or a non-V small win (S4445A), and if it is determined that the lottery result for this special pattern is neither a complete miss nor a non-V small win (i.e., it is either a big win, a V small win, or a time-saving pattern win) (S4446A), processing proceeds to S4447A.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4445A that the result of the current lottery for the special symbol is a complete miss or a non-V small win (S4445A), the process skips the process of S4446A and proceeds to the process of S4447A. In the process of S4447A, the variable display mode in the small display area Dm8 is set according to the lottery result (S4447A), and the process ends.

Next, the details of the time-saving performance setting process 42 (S4442A) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 1251. FIG. 1251 is a flowchart showing the time-saving performance setting process 42 (S4442A). When the time-saving performance setting process 42 (S4442A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is the final change in the time-saving state (i.e., whether or not a change pattern command corresponding to the second special pattern has been received when the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203t is 1) (S4451A), and if it is determined that it is the final change in the time-saving state (S4451A: Yes), a change display mode that takes into account the pre-reading result of the second special pattern is set (S4452A). That is, if the current special pattern lottery result and the reserved balls of the second special pattern include a big win or a V small win, the variable display mode of the performance mode is set to notify of a win (winning against the monster character 821), while if it is determined that the current special pattern lottery result and the reserved balls of the second special pattern are all complete misses or non-V small wins, the variable display mode of the performance mode is set to notify of a miss (defeat by the monster character 821). When the processing of S4452A is completed, a counter value indicating the number of changes until the variable display of the second special pattern to be notified is set to the final change performance counter 223mb (S4453A), and this processing is terminated. In the processing of S4453A, in the case of a performance mode that notifies of a miss, a counter value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is set, while in the case of a performance mode that notifies of a win, a counter value corresponding to the number of reserved balls until the reserved ball that will be a win is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4451A, if it is determined that the final time-saving variation is inside (S4451A: No), it is determined whether the result of the current special symbol lottery is either a big win or a V small win (S4454A), and if it is determined that the result of the lottery is either a big win or a V small win (S4454A: Yes), the presentation mode of the variation presentation according to the current lottery result is decided (S4456A), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4454A, if it is determined that the current lottery result is neither a big win nor a V small win (S4454A: No), it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a complete miss variation in the 5-second variation time (S4455A), and if the lottery result is a complete miss variation in the 5-second variation time (S4455A: Yes), the process proceeds to S4456A.

In contrast, in the process of S4455A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a complete miss during the 5-second fluctuation time (S4455A: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a winning time-saving symbol (S4457A), and if it is a winning time-saving symbol (S4457A: Yes), the specified number of times corresponding to the first to third small wins in the termination condition storage area 223ma is updated by adding 10 times, 7 times, and 3 times respectively (S4458A), and the execution of the remaining life recovery performance (see FIG. 1235) is set (S4459A), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S4457A, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a time-saving pattern win (S4457A: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is a non-V small win or not (S4460A), and if the lottery result is a non-V small win (S4460A: Yes), a non-V small win process is executed to set the performance mode for a non-V small win (S4461A), and this process is terminated. Details of this non-V small win process (S4461A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1252. In contrast, in the process of S4460A, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a non-V small win (S4460A: No), this means that the current lottery result is a complete miss fluctuation in the 15-second fluctuation time, so a treasure chest 810 appears as in the remaining life recovery performance (see FIG. 1235), but the recovery potion 810d does not appear, and the remaining lives are not restored, and a false remaining life recovery performance is set to be executed (S4462A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1252, the details of the non-V small win process (S4461A) described above will be explained. FIG. 1252 is a flowchart showing this non-V small win process (S4461A). As shown in FIG. 1252, when the non-V small win process (S4461A) is executed, first, the data of the end condition storage area 223ma is read (S4471A) and it is determined whether the specified number of times corresponding to the current non-V small win is already 0 (S4473A). In the process of S4473A, if it is determined that the specified number of times corresponding to the current non-V small win is already 0 (S4473A: Yes), the execution of the false remaining life recovery performance is set (S4472A) and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4473A, if it is determined that the specified number of times corresponding to the current non-V small win is not 0 (S4473A: No), the specified number of times corresponding to the current non-V small win is updated by subtracting 1 (S4474A), and it is determined whether the specified number of times for all non-V small wins has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction (S4475A). In the process of S4475A, if it is determined that the specified number of times for all non-V small wins has not become 0 (S4475A: No), the execution of the remaining life reduction effect (see FIG. 1234(a)) corresponding to the current non-V small win is set (S4476A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4475A, if it is determined that the specified number of times for all non-V small wins has become 0 (S4475A: Yes), a variable display mode that also takes into account the results of the pre-reading of the reserved balls of the second special pattern is set (S4477A). That is, if there is a big win or a V small win in the lottery result of the current special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern, a variable display mode of a performance mode that notifies of a win (winning against the monster character 821) is set, while if it is determined that the lottery result of the current special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern are all complete misses or non-V small wins, a variable display mode of a performance mode that notifies of the end of the rush (defeat by the monster character 821) is set. When the process of S4477A is completed, a counter value indicating the number of changes until the variable display of the second special pattern to be notified is set to the final variable performance counter 223mb (S4478A), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4478A, when the presentation mode is one that notifies a miss, the counter value is set to correspond to the current number of reserved balls, while when the presentation mode is one that notifies a win, the counter value is set to correspond to the number of reserved balls up to the reserved ball that will result in a win.

By executing this non-V small win process, if the corresponding character has remaining lives, an effect can be executed to reduce the remaining lives of the corresponding character when a non-V small win is won, and if the corresponding character already has 0 remaining lives, a false remaining life recovery effect can be executed. This prevents a contradictory effect in which a character with 0 remaining lives is further defeated by the monster character 821, and allows the effect mode to be set more appropriately.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 42nd control example is configured to set a time-saving termination condition that is met when multiple different conditions are all met. More specifically, as types of small prizes, in addition to a V small prize that essentially guarantees a big prize, a plurality of types of small prizes (first small prize, second small prize, and third small prize) are provided in which the game ball cannot be guided to the specific area 650e3 even if the game ball enters (the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened only during the period in which the switching member 650h is arranged to guide the game ball to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 side), and a time-saving end condition (third end condition) is provided that is established only when all of the following are established after transition to the time-saving state: a first condition that is established when the first small prize (first lottery result) is won a predetermined first number of times in the lottery for the special pattern, a second condition that is established when the second small prize (second lottery result) is won a predetermined second number of times, and a third condition that is established when the third small prize (third lottery result) is won a predetermined third number of times. By configuring it in this way, even if one or more of the first, second, and third conditions are met, it is possible to realize innovative control that allows the advantageous time-saving state to continue while at least one of the conditions is not met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 42nd control example, when the setting condition of the time-saving state is established, the number of times that each of the first to third small wins can be won is set as a prescribed number, and when the number of times that the first to third small wins can be won in the time-saving state all reach the prescribed number, the third end condition is established and the time-saving state is terminated. On the other hand, while the number of times that at least one small win has not reached the prescribed number, at least the third end condition is not established (other end conditions may be established). However, the types of small wins that are the subject of the judgment of the third end condition are not limited to this, and may be more or less than the three types in the 42nd control example. By reducing the number of types of small wins, the playability of the time-saving state can be made simpler, and therefore it is possible to realize a playability that is easy for the player to understand. Conversely, by increasing the number of types of small wins, it is possible to increase the number of types of characters that may battle the monster character 821 during the time-saving state, and therefore it is possible to diversify the presentation mode.

In the 42nd control example, when the setting condition of the time-saving state is established, the number of times each of the first to third small wins is set as a prescribed number, and when the number of times each of the first to third small wins is all reached the prescribed number in the time-saving state, the third end condition is established and the time-saving state is terminated, while at least one small win has not yet reached the prescribed number of times, at least the third end condition is not established (other end conditions may be established), but this is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving state may be terminated when the number of times any of the first to third small wins is won reaches the prescribed number. In other words, the time-saving state may be terminated when the remaining lives of one character among the multiple characters that may battle the monster character 821 in the time-saving state become 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes players hope that a character with as many remaining lives as possible will be determined as the opponent when a reach occurs, and this can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 42nd control example, the prescribed number of times for each of the first to third small wins in the time-saving state is fixed until the end of the first time-saving state, but the prescribed number may be configured to be variable depending on the situation. That is, when the number of times the first small win is won is less than the specific number, the time-saving state is ended based on the first number of times that the number of times the first small win is won reaches a number that is less than the specific number, the number of times the second small win is won reaches a number that is less than the specific number, and the number of times the third small win is won reaches a number that is the third number (the third end condition is established), while when the number of times the first small win is won is equal to or greater than the specific number, the time-saving state is ended based on the fourth number of times that the number of times the second small win is won reaches a number that is equal to or greater than the specific number, the fifth number of times that the number of times that the second small win is won reaches a number that is greater than the second number, and the sixth number of times that the number of times that the third small win is won reaches a number that is greater than the third number (the third end condition is established). More specifically, for example, in the range where the number of times the first small win is won is less than 10 times in the time-saving state, the third end condition is established based on the fact that the number of times the first small win is won is 5 times or more, the number of times the second small win is won is 3 times or more, and the number of times the third small win is won is 1 time or more, while in the range where the number of times the first small win is won is 10 times or more, the third end condition may be established based on the fact that the number of times the first small win is won is 15 times or more, the number of times the second small win is won is 6 times or more, and the number of times the third small win is won is 2 times or more. By configuring in this way, in the early stage of the time-saving state, the gameplay is such that the number of times the first small win is won is expected not to increase, while after the number of times the first small win is won exceeds 5 times and the remaining lives of the adventurer's character 811a become 0, the gameplay is realized where the number of times the first small win is won is expected to exceed 10 times. In other words, depending on whether the number of times the first small prize is won is less than the first number (5 times) or is equal to or greater than the first number, a completely opposite novel playability can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition, as another example of a configuration that changes the number of times of time reduction according to the situation, in a range in which the number of times of drawing the second special symbol in the time reduction state is less than a specific number of times, the time reduction state is terminated based on the number of times of winning the first small prize reaching the first number, the number of times of winning the second small prize reaching the second number, and the number of times of winning the third small prize reaching the third number (the third termination condition is established), while in a range in which the number of times of drawing the second special symbol is equal to or greater than a specific number of times, the time reduction state is terminated based on the number of times of winning the first small prize reaching the fourth number, which is greater than the first number, the number of times of winning the second small prize reaching the fifth number, which is greater than the second number, and the number of times of winning the third small prize reaching the sixth number, which is greater than the third number (the third termination condition is established). By configuring in this way, unless the third end condition is met until the number of times the second special symbol is drawn reaches a specific number, the third end condition is unlikely to be met, so the player can play the game by paying attention to the number of times the second special symbol is drawn. In these cases, when the condition for increasing the specified number of times for the first to third small wins is met, the remaining machine recovery performance (see FIG. 1235) may be executed in the same manner as when the time-saving symbol win occurs. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand that the specified number has increased and the third end condition is unlikely to be met, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the above modified example, the specified number of times for the first to third small wins is increased by the specified condition being met, but conversely, the specified number of times for some or all of the small wins may be decreased. By configuring in this way, a gameplay that makes the player more strongly expect to win a big win or a V small win early can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 42nd control example, the remaining number of lives of the characters 811a to 811c is displayed in the time-saving state, so that the player can easily grasp the remaining number of wins for each small win until the third end condition, which is established based on the first to third small wins all reaching the specified number of times, is established. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the type of character may be concealed, and a performance may be executed to notify only that the remaining lives of any character have decreased (the remaining number of times until the specified number of times for any small win has decreased). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to accurately grasp the remaining number of wins for each small win until the third end condition is established, thereby realizing a gameplay in which it is not known how long the time-saving state will last. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 42nd control example, the third termination condition is established and the time-saving state is terminated when the number of times of winning the first to third small wins, which are difficult to cause a V win in the time-saving state, reaches a specified number, respectively. However, the lottery results that can establish the third termination condition are not limited to small wins that are difficult to cause a V win, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the variable time may be set to a specified number of times for the losing lottery results set in the first period, the losing lottery results set in the second period, and the losing lottery results set in the third period, and the time-saving state may be terminated when the number of times that all of the losing lottery results have been won reaches the specified number of times. In addition, the number of times of winning the big win or the V small win may be included in the third termination condition. Specifically, for example, the third termination condition may be established when five small wins that are impossible to win a V win, one V small win, and a big win in a special pattern lottery. This control can realize an unprecedented novel gameplay, especially in a specification where it is more advantageous to set the execution of a jackpot game in a normal state than in a time-saving state. That is, when a V small win is won, if the number of times of winning a small win that cannot be won in a V win reaches a specified number, and then a jackpot is won, it is possible to establish the time-saving end condition at the time of winning the jackpot and increase the degree of advantage, so that when a V small win is won during the time-saving state, a player can choose to play a game in a way that generates a V win and ensures the jackpot game is executed, although the degree of advantage is low, or to avoid a V win and aim for a jackpot win with a high degree of advantage, although there is a risk that the number of times of time-saving will be reached without winning a jackpot and the time-saving state will be ended. This can further improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, the condition that can establish the third end condition is not limited to the lottery result, and other conditions may be adopted. Specifically, for example, the total number of times the special symbol is drawn or the number of times the second special symbol is drawn may be adopted as part or all of the conditions that can establish the third end condition. Specifically, for example, the third end condition may be established when the number of times each of the first to third small wins is at least one and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is at least ten. By configuring in this way, the minimum number of times the special symbol is drawn until the third end condition is established can be fixed at ten. In other words, even if the specified number of times of the first to third small wins is reached early, the time-saving state is guaranteed to continue until the specified number of times of the second special symbol is drawn is met, so that the player is less likely to be disappointed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

In the 42nd control example, the number of remaining lives of each character in the time-saving state is configured to match the remaining number of wins (counter values of the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4) relative to the specified number of wins of the first to third small wins, but this is not limited to this. Even if the counter value is not actually subtracted (for example, a small win corresponding to a character that has completely missed or already lost all remaining lives) a performance in which the remaining lives are reduced may be executed at a predetermined rate. Also, for example, the number of remaining lives reported in the remaining life stock performance may be configured to be less than the specified number of wins of the actual first to third small wins. In other words, the performance operation may be such that the number of remaining lives may be less than the actual counter value. In this case, if a predetermined notification condition is met while the number of remaining lives is notified as being less than the actual counter value (for example, when the number of remaining lives for all characters reaches 0, or when a specific number of special symbol drawings have been performed), an effect may be executed in which the actual number of remaining lives is notified by adding to the number of remaining lives. By configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining lives for each character is getting low, it is possible to make the player look forward to an effect that adds to the number of remaining lives, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As another example of presentation control that allows a mismatch between the number of remaining lives of each character and the remaining number of wins relative to the specified number of the first to third small wins (counter values of the first small win counter 203s2, the second small win counter 203s3, and the third small win counter 203s4), it may be possible to configure it so that, under specified conditions, the number of remaining lives of a character other than the character corresponding to the type of small win that has actually been won can be reduced, for example, so that the number of remaining lives of each character is less likely to become zero. More specifically, for example, in a situation where the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a and the gunman character 811c are both 1, and the remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b are 4, if the first small win (small win corresponding to the adventurer character 811a) or the third small win (small win corresponding to the gunman character 811c) is won, that is, when the remaining lives of the corresponding character are reduced to 0, a performance may be executed to reduce the remaining lives of the character (rabbit character 811b) who has a margin of remaining lives (2 or more remaining lives remaining). In other words, in a situation where the remaining lives of some characters (first characters) are a specific number (1), instead of reporting the remaining lives of the character (second character) who has a margin of remaining lives to a number less than the value of the corresponding small win counter, a performance of reducing the remaining lives of the first character who has a remaining life less than a specific number of lives may be avoided (reporting a number of remaining lives greater than the value of the corresponding small win counter). Then, when the number of remaining lives of the second character, which was notified as less than the actual number of remaining lives, becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), and the player wins a small prize corresponding to the second character, the number of remaining lives of the first character is subtracted instead of the number of remaining lives of the second character, to balance the numbers, and the timing when the third end condition is finally established and the timing when the remaining lives of all characters become 0 may be configured to coincide. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the remaining lives of each character to become 0, so that the player can easily feel a sense of security that the remaining lives of multiple characters remain. Therefore, the player can play the game during the time-saving state with more peace of mind. Conversely, it may be configured so that some characters are more likely to have more remaining lives. In other words, when the player wins a small prize corresponding to some characters (specific characters) with a predetermined number or more remaining lives (for example, 5 or more), the number of remaining lives of other characters with one or more remaining lives may be reduced instead of the number of remaining lives of the first character. Then, when the number of remaining lives of another character appears to be 0 (the number of remaining lives is displayed as 0 even though the value of the corresponding small win counter is 1 or more), if the player wins a small win corresponding to another character, the number of remaining lives of the specific character is reduced to balance the numbers, and the timing when the third ending condition is finally met and the timing when the remaining lives of all characters reach 0 may be configured to match. By configuring in this way, the state in which the number of remaining lives of the specific character is large can be continued for a longer period, so that it is possible to make the player believe that the time-saving state will continue if the player does not continue to win the type of small win corresponding to the specific character, and the time-saving state is likely to continue for a longer period. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 42nd control example, only one type of character (monster character 821) is provided as the enemy character that will face (battle) the ally characters (characters 811a to 811c) when the time-saving state progresses to a reach performance, but multiple types of enemy characters may be provided. By configuring in this way, the performance mode can be diversified, further increasing the player's interest in the game. In this case, the number of remaining lives that is reduced when an ally character is defeated may be configured to differ depending on the type of enemy character selected. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which first to third enemy characters are provided as enemy characters, and if a character is defeated by the first enemy character, the number of remaining lives of the ally character determined as the opponent is reduced by one, if a character is defeated by the second enemy character, the number of remaining lives of the ally character determined as the opponent is reduced by a maximum of two (or to zero if there is one or less remaining lives), and if a character is defeated by the third enemy character, the number of remaining lives of the ally character determined as the opponent is reduced by a maximum of three (or to zero if there are two or less remaining lives). In this case, a case may be provided in which the number of remaining lives is notified in the remaining life stock chance performance more than the actual number (or a case may be provided in which the number of remaining lives is more than the actual number by executing a false remaining life recovery performance at a predetermined rate even if the small win counter value corresponding to the first to third small wins is not 0), and a performance in which the player is defeated by the second enemy character or the third enemy character at a predetermined opportunity may be executed to reduce the number of remaining lives that was notified more than the actual counter value of the small win counter, and then a performance operation to balance the number of remaining lives may be performed by executing a performance in which the player is defeated by the second enemy character or the second enemy character, and a performance operation to balance the number of remaining lives may be performed by adding the remaining lives, etc. By configuring in this way, the reduction mode of the remaining lives can be diversified, and the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, in this case, the ratio selected when the big win or V small win is won may be configured so that the third enemy character is the highest and the first enemy character is the lowest. By configuring in this way, when the third enemy character is selected, the expectation of a big win or a V small win is high, but many remaining lives are reduced if the character is defeated, resulting in a high-risk, high-return battle presentation; when the first character is selected, the expectation of a big win or a V small win is low, but even if the character is defeated, the remaining lives are reduced by only one, resulting in a low-risk, low-return battle presentation; and the second enemy character is a battle presentation with intermediate risks and returns, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the type of enemy character to be determined. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, for example, the combination of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured to suggest the expectation of a big win (or a V small win). Specifically, for example, when the adventurer character 811a fights, the second enemy character has a higher expectation of winning than the first enemy character (is less likely to be selected in the case of the first small win), and the third enemy character has a higher expectation of winning than the second enemy character (is less likely to be selected in the case of the first small win), while when the rabbit character 811b fights, the second enemy character has the highest expectation of winning, and the first enemy character has the lowest expectation of winning. Also, when the gunman character 811c fights, the first enemy character is selected, so that a big win or small win is confirmed (cannot be selected in the case of the third small win), and the second small win has a higher expectation of winning than the third small win. By configuring in this way, the player can play while paying attention to the combination of the ally character and the enemy character, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 42nd control example, when a time-saving symbol is won during the time-saving state, the counter values corresponding to the time-saving symbol are added to the various counters. In other words, when a time-saving symbol is won, the degree of advantage is always increased, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration may be provided in which multiple types of time-saving symbols with different time-saving end conditions are provided, and when a time-saving symbol is won during the time-saving state, the corresponding time-saving end condition is overwritten on the various counter values. By configuring in this way, when a time-saving symbol is won, the player can focus on the set time-saving end condition (remaining lives of each character) when playing, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 42nd control example, the time-saving end condition is set to a third end condition that is satisfied when all of the different conditions are satisfied, and the time-saving state is maintained (the degree of advantage is maintained) while any one of the conditions is not satisfied, provided that the other end conditions are not satisfied, but this is not limited to this. For example, the degree of advantage of the time-saving state may be variable each time each of the conditions constituting the end condition is satisfied in the time-saving state. Specifically, for example, the first to third conditions may be set as conditions constituting the end condition, and when the first condition is satisfied, the control may switch to a control that refers to a fluctuation pattern table with a long fluctuation time and selects a fluctuation pattern, and when the second condition is satisfied, the ratio of an opening pattern that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the electric role 640a when a normal pattern is hit and won is increased, and when the third condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern may be lengthened. Then, when all of the first to third conditions are satisfied, the time-saving state may be terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game in which the degree of advantage of the time-saving state decreases each time a condition is established, so that the player can strongly expect to win a big win or a small win before each condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Conversely, it is also possible to configure it so that the more conditions that are established, the higher the degree of advantage of the time-saving state. In this case, it is possible to realize a novel game in which the player expects that one of the conditions will be established early and that all of the conditions will not be established, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure it so that there are conditions that increase the degree of advantage of the time-saving state and conditions that decrease it, or to configure it so that the degree of advantage varies depending on the order in which the conditions are established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a novel game in which the player pays attention to the type of conditions that are established and the order in which they are established while the time-saving state continues, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the control is not limited to varying the degree of advantage of the same time-saving state, but may be configured to provide multiple advantageous game states, transition between advantageous game states each time a condition is satisfied, and transition to an unfavorable normal state when all conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, a first advantageous state, a second advantageous state, and a third advantageous state may be provided as advantageous states, and the conditions may be configured to transition to the second advantageous state when the first condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, transition to the third advantageous state when the second condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, and transition to the normal state when the second condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state or the first condition is satisfied in the third advantageous state. In addition, the conditions in these cases are not limited to the number of times the first to third small wins are won, and any conditions can be set, such as the number of times a special pattern is drawn, the winning of a V small win, the number of times a winning game with a normal pattern is executed, the number of reserved balls with the second special pattern, and the winning of a jackpot of a specified type.

<43rd control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1253 to FIG. 1282. The pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example is configured to be able to set a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as game states, similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example described above, and further configured to be able to grant a privilege (a state that makes it easier to execute a special symbol lottery than in the normal state) that is advantageous to the player when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed (the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed) meets a predetermined condition (for example, 999 times) (when the ceiling granting condition is established). By configuring in this way, a privilege can be granted to a player who has executed a game in which a special symbol lottery is executed for a long time, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this 43rd control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, as a game state (time-saving state) more advantageous than the normal state, a second time-saving state (slight time-saving state) is set in some cases when a time-saving pattern is won in a special pattern lottery, or when the number of times that a special pattern lottery has been executed in succession without winning a jackpot reaches a predetermined number (999 times), and a first time-saving state (time-saving state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, can be set.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the multiple types (two types) of time-saving states executed in this 43rd control example are configured to have different degrees of advantage. Specifically, either time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) is a more advantageous game state than the normal state, and the first time-saving state is a more advantageous game state for the player than the second time-saving state. In other words, of the two types of time-saving states that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the second time-saving state is the most disadvantageous time-saving state for the player, and the first time-saving state is the most advantageous time-saving state for the player.

The factors that determine the degree of advantage given to the player during the time-saving state include the ease of executing the special pattern lottery in the set game state, the type of special pattern lottery that is executed, the type of jackpot game that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery, the type of game state that is set after the jackpot game ends when a jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery, and the type of time-saving state that is set when the time-saving pattern lottery is won.

In the 43rd control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to make it easier to execute a jackpot game based on the lottery results than the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery have the same probability (about 1/250) of winning a jackpot, and only the second special symbol lottery has about 1/25 of winning a small jackpot. Then, by having a game ball enter a specific area during a small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot is won, a jackpot game can be executed after the small jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, the probability that a jackpot game will be played based on the results of one special pattern lottery can be increased when the second special pattern lottery is executed compared to when the first special pattern lottery is executed, so the second special pattern lottery can be a special pattern lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the time-saving symbol is selected with a probability of about 1/40. The setting ratio of the time-saving state type set when the time-saving symbol is selected varies depending on the game state set at the time when the time-saving symbol is selected, so that it is easier to set a time-saving state type that is advantageous to the player when the time-saving symbol is selected in the time-saving state than when the time-saving symbol is selected in the normal state.

Specifically, when the time-saving symbol is selected in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the probability that the second time-saving state (slight time-saving state) is set is 50%, and the probability that the first time-saving state (time-saving state) is set is 50%. When the time-saving symbol is selected in the first special symbol lottery executed in the second time-saving state, the probability that the second time-saving state (slight time-saving state) is set is 30%, and the probability that the first time-saving state (time-saving state) is set is 70%. When the time-saving symbol is selected in the first special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state (time-saving state), the probability that the second time-saving state (slight time-saving state) is set is 0%, and the probability that the first time-saving state (time-saving state) is set is 100%.

Furthermore, in this 43rd control example, when the normal state or the second time-saving state is set, left-handed play, in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and aims to execute the first special pattern lottery, is configured to be more advantageous to the player (to make it easier to execute the special pattern lottery) than right-handed play, in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and aims to execute the second special pattern lottery; and when the first time-saving state is set, right-handed play, in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and aims to execute the second special pattern lottery, is configured to be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play, in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and aims to execute the first special pattern lottery.

By configuring it in this way, in terms of ease of setting the first time-saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special pattern lottery that is advantageous to the player when the time-saving pattern is won, the normal state becomes the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player, followed by the second time-saving state and the first time-saving state, which are the game states that are most advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, in the first time-saving state, that is, in the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, if the first special symbol lottery is executed and the time-saving symbol is won, for example, if a left-handed play is mistakenly performed during the first time-saving state, causing the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed, or if the time-saving symbol is won and the first time-saving state is set while the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reservation) has been acquired by left-handed play, the first special symbol lottery is executed using the already acquired special symbol 1 reservation, and even if the time-saving symbol is won, the game state is configured not to transition from the first time-saving state, which is the most advantageous time-saving state for the player, to another time-saving state (second time-saving state).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the first time-saving state from ending without executing the second special symbol lottery, even though the first time-saving state has been set. In this 43rd control example, the time-saving symbol lottery (determination of whether the time-saving symbol is selected) is executed in the first special symbol lottery regardless of the set game state, but this is not limited to this, and the execution or non-execution of the time-saving symbol lottery may be changed depending on the set game state. In this case, for example, when the first time-saving state is set, it is preferable to configure not to execute the time-saving symbol lottery (determination of whether the time-saving symbol is selected) even if the first special symbol lottery is executed. Even in this case, as in this 43rd control example, it is possible to configure not to transition the game state from the first time-saving state, which is the most advantageous time-saving state for the player, to another time-saving state (second time-saving state) due to the time-saving symbol winning.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, the duration of the second time-saving state (micro time-saving state) is configured to vary depending on the setting trigger of the second time-saving state. When the second time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving pattern (first setting trigger), the period during which the second time-saving state can continue (number of time-saving times) is set to one of "1 to 100 times." When the second time-saving state is set based on the number of times that the special pattern lottery has been executed consecutively without winning the jackpot reaching a predetermined number (999 times) (second setting trigger), the period during which the second time-saving state can continue (number of time-saving times) is set to "40 times." And, the average number of time-saving times set in the second time-saving state based on the first setting trigger is configured to be "5 times."

In other words, the second time-saving state, which is set when the first setting trigger, which can be established each time a special pattern lottery is executed, is established, is configured to be easier to set to a shorter number of time-saving times than the second time-saving state, which is set when the second setting trigger, which is established when a predetermined number (999 times) of special pattern lotteries are executed, is established, and the maximum number of time-saving times that can be set is configured to be larger.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an excessively long-term second time-saving state from being set based on the first setting trigger being established, while allowing the special pattern lottery to be executed each time in the hope that a long-term second time-saving state will be set, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. Also, when the second setting trigger is established, a number of time-saving times (40 times) that is greater than the average number of time-saving times (5 times) that can be set when the first setting trigger is established is set, so it is possible to prevent an insufficient second time-saving state from being set for a player who has played for a long time without winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, the first special pattern lottery executed during the second time-saving state is also configured to allow the time-saving pattern to be won, and depending on the remaining number of time-saving times in the set second time-saving state and the number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state newly set based on the time-saving pattern winning, it is possible to create cases in which the remaining number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state increases, decreases, or does not change. By configuring in this way, even if the same time-saving type (a time-saving type in which the second time-saving state with the same number of time-saving times is set) is set by the time-saving pattern winning, it is possible to create cases in which it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, so that the player can be interested in the results of the time-saving pattern lottery.

As mentioned above, even if the same time-saving type (a time-saving type in which the second time-saving state with the same number of time-savings is set) is set by winning the time-saving pattern, there may be cases in which it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when a time-saving pattern in which the same time-saving type is set is won, the display mode of the identification information (third pattern) showing the lottery result is configured to differ depending on the degree of advantage to the player. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand the set game state, when a game state in which left-handed play is advantageous to the player (normal state, second time-saving state) is set, a background mode (dedicated mode) in which the player can understand which game state is set, and a background mode (common mode) in which the player cannot easily understand which game state is set, are set, and the stop display mode of the identification information for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to differ depending on the set background mode.

Specifically, in the case where the game state at the time when the time-saving pattern for a specific time-saving type is won is the normal state, the first benefit is awarded, and in the case where the game state is the second time-saving state, the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is awarded, even if the time-saving state is set, if the common mode is set as the background mode, the stop display mode of the identification information for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be set to the stop display mode of the identification information for indicating that the first benefit will be awarded.

By configuring it in this way, when a background mode is set that makes it difficult for a player to understand the set game state, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the game state from the stopped display mode of the identification information that shows the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example is configured to allow the player to understand the content of the bonus that will be granted to the player by combining and understanding the set background mode and the stopped display mode of the stopped-displayed identification information.

Specifically, the system is configured so that different bonuses are awarded when the identification information of the first stop display mode is displayed in a stopped state while the common mode is set, and when the identification information of the first stop display mode is displayed in a stopped state while the dedicated mode is set. By configuring the system in this way, players who want to know the bonuses awarded by the special symbol lottery can be interested not only in the stopped display mode of the identification information showing the result of the special symbol lottery, but also in the type of background mode at the time the identification information is displayed in a stopped state (the time the special symbol lottery is executed), thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, when a time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) is set based on the winning of a time-saving pattern, a time-saving state with a different number of time-saving times can be set, and the setting of the notification mode (stop display mode of the identification pattern) for indicating that the time-saving pattern has been won in the special pattern lottery can be determined according to the number of time-saving times that is set.

Specifically, when the number of time-saving times to be set is small (for example, when it is 1 time), the system is configured to read ahead the special reserved pattern (special reserved pattern 1) that has already been acquired at the time when the time-saving pattern is won, and if it is determined that the result of the first special pattern lottery executed in the time-saving state is a miss (time-saving pattern not won), the system is configured not to notify the player that the time-saving pattern has been won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending early even though the time-saving pattern has been won, which would reduce the player's motivation to play. In addition, if the result of the read-ahead is other than a miss (time-saving pattern not won) in the first special pattern lottery, it is possible to notify the player that a time-saving state with a small number of time-saving times will be set. In other words, when it is notified that a time-saving state with a small number of time-saving times will be set, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning some kind of benefit (win, time-saving pattern) in the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state.

Here, conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine 10 that can set a time-saving state with a different number of time-saving times, and in which a time-saving state with a large number of time-saving times is set, and is more advantageous to the player than a time-saving state with a small number of time-saving times is set. In addition, there is known a pachinko machine 10 that can notify the player of at least a part of the number of time-saving times that is currently set when a time-saving state is set. In such conventional pachinko machines 10, the more the number of time-saving times that are notified, the more advantageous it is for the player, so the player becomes interested only in the number of time-saving times that are notified, and there is a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreases when a small number of time-saving times is notified.

In contrast to this, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, as in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, it is more advantageous for the player to have a long number of time-saving times set, but when a short number of time-saving times is set, the player is notified that a time-saving state will be set if the result of a special pattern lottery that is advantageous to the player is predicted in advance, so the player can be interested in the fact that a time-saving state with a small number of time-saving times is set. Therefore, when it is notified that a time-saving state will be set, the number of time-saving times that will be set can arouse interest in the player.

<Configuration of the game board 13 in the 43rd control example>
First, referring to FIG. 1253, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example will be described. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example is the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above (see FIG. 925), so detailed description will be omitted. Here, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example has a first symbol (first special symbol) for which a lottery is executed when an execution condition is established based on the game ball launched into the play area entering the first ball entrance 64, and a first symbol (second special symbol) for which a lottery is executed when an execution condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640. As a result of the first special symbol lottery, a big win, a time-saving symbol win or a miss is determined, and as a result of the second special symbol lottery, a big win, a small win or a miss is determined.

When a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the opening and closing door 65b (see FIG. 1253) of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a jackpot game is executed that makes it easier for the game ball to win the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 1253). When a game ball wins the specific winning port 65a, 11 prize balls are paid out for each winning game ball. Therefore, the player can play the pachinko machine 10 with enthusiasm, aiming to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, in order to win many prize balls in the game.

Furthermore, if a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, the opening and closing door 650f (see FIG. 1253) of the second variable prize device (V prize device) 650 is opened, and a small prize game is executed that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V prize opening 650a (see FIG. 1253). When the game ball enters the V prize opening 650a, 11 prize balls are paid out for each winning game ball.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, when a game ball that has entered the V winning port 650a passes through a specific area (V area) 650e3 provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650, a big win game can be executed in which the opening and closing door 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is opened after the small win game ends.

In other words, in this 43rd control example, the execution triggers for executing a jackpot game are a first jackpot trigger that is established when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a second jackpot trigger that is established when the game ball passes through a specific area (V area) 650e3 during a small jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, a jackpot game can be executed with various triggers, which makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game and a small jackpot game as winning games that can award prize balls to the player, and the content of each winning game is determined in advance so that more prize balls can be awarded to the player during a jackpot game (more game balls can be won) than during a small jackpot game. In other words, a jackpot game is a winning game that is more advantageous to the player in terms of the number of prize balls that the player can acquire than a small jackpot game.

In addition, when a jackpot game is played, the game state corresponding to the jackpot type can be set after the jackpot game ends, whereas after a small jackpot game ends, the game state that was set at the time the small jackpot game started is set again. In other words, for example, when a jackpot game is played in a state in which the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, a game state (time-saving state) different from the normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the jackpot type of that jackpot game, and when a small jackpot game is played in a state in which the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the small jackpot game ends.

Therefore, for a player who is playing in the hope that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the currently set game state will be set, a big win game that can set a new game state will be a more advantageous winning game than a small win game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example is configured to be able to execute a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) in addition to the lottery for the special symbol described above (special symbol lottery), and the lottery for the normal symbol is executed when the execution condition is met based on the game ball passing (entering) through the through gate 67 provided on the game board 13. Then, as a result of the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), it is configured to determine whether it is a win or a miss. If the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, the electric role 640a (see FIG. 1253) is activated to execute a normal symbol winning game that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In other words, by playing a normal winning game, it is easier to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the normal winning game is not being played. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play two games: one in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64, aiming for a big win, and one in which the game ball enters (passes) the through gate 67, executing a normal symbol lottery, and then entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, executing a second special symbol lottery, aiming for a big win. This makes it possible to provide the player with a variety of games and to increase the player's interest in the games.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example is configured so that the probability state for normal symbols can be set to a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and when the low probability state for normal symbols is set, the expectation of being able to cause a gaming ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 based on the results of one normal symbol lottery is lower than when the high probability state for normal symbols is set.

Specifically, the "high probability state of normal symbols" means that the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is increased, and the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the high probability state of normal symbols, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is held can be increased.

In addition, similar to the 40th control example described above, even in a game state in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, a game state (first time-saving state) in which the same control for opening the electric device 640a as in the high probability state for normal symbols can be executed can be set.

In addition, as a normal winning game during a high probability state of a normal pattern, instead of lengthening the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to lengthening the opening time, a change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric role 640a opens in one normal winning game compared to a normal winning game executed during a low probability state of a normal pattern. Also, during a high probability state of a normal pattern, the winning probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) may not be changed, and at least one of the time that the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times that the electric role 640a opens in one normal winning game may be changed. Also, during the high probability state of the normal pattern, the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the electric device 640a is opened in one game that hits a normal pattern may not be changed, and only the probability of hitting the normal pattern (second pattern) may be changed to be higher than during the low probability state of the normal pattern.

In the 43rd control example, as described above, the probability state of the normal pattern is configured to be changeable between "low probability state" and "high probability state", and the probability state of the special pattern is configured not to be changeable. However, without being limited to this, the probability state of the special pattern may also be configured to be changeable between "low probability state" and "high probability state" like the probability state of the normal pattern described above. In this case, when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, it is preferable to configure it so that the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot (jackpot probability) is higher than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set. In addition, it may be configured to increase not only the jackpot probability but also the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern is a small jackpot (small jackpot probability), or it may be configured to increase both the jackpot probability and the small jackpot probability, or it may be configured so that when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss (miss probability) is lower than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set.

The specific configuration of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 used in this 43rd control example is the same as that explained with reference to Figures 926 to 930 of the 32nd control example described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

<About the performance content of the 43rd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1254 to FIG. 1259, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above, a normal state and a time-saving state can be set as game states. Furthermore, a plurality of time-saving state types can be set as time-saving states, and the degree of advantage to the player is made different according to the set time-saving state type. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example, the player is made to perform a left-hand hit game when the normal state is set and when the second time-saving state is set. Then, during the game period in which the player is made to perform a left-hand hit game, that is, during the game period in which the normal state or the second time-saving state is set, a plurality of background modes (advantageous mode, normal mode, disadvantageous mode) can be set, and a background image corresponding to the type of the set background mode is displayed on the display surface (back) of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing left-handed to understand the currently set game state.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, the second time-saving state can be set without going through a jackpot game based on the winning of the time-saving pattern in the first special pattern lottery, making it difficult for a player playing left-handed games to know whether or not they have transitioned to the second time-saving state based on the results of the special pattern lottery. In addition, because a different period (number of time-saving times) can be set as the period during which the second time-saving state continues (number of time-saving times), even if the player knows that the second time-saving state has been set based on the winning of the time-saving pattern, it is difficult for the player to know when the second time-saving state ends and transitions to the normal state occur.

Figure 1254(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of the presentation screen during advantageous mode, which is a background mode used to indicate that a second time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state has been set, and Figure 1254(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of the presentation screen during disadvantageous mode, which is a background mode used to indicate that the normal state has been set.

As shown in FIG. 1254(a), when the advantageous mode is set, a background image of heaven is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and a character 801 that resembles a rabbit and a character 809 that resembles an angel are dynamically displayed. In addition, the word "Advantageous" is displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm to indicate that the currently set background mode is an advantageous mode that is advantageous to the player, and the words "Chance to enter time-saving mode" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide mode to indicate that there is a higher probability of transitioning to the first time-saving mode (a time-saving mode in which right-hand play is performed) than when the normal mode is set.

The advantageous mode screen shown in FIG. 1254(a) shows the second time-saving state in which left-hand play is performed, so the small display area Dm4 displays the word "left-hand play" to encourage the player to play left-hand play. Here, in this 43rd control example, when a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state is selected by a special pattern lottery, the second time-saving state is set at the timing when the special pattern that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and when the special pattern variation that indicates the result of the next special pattern lottery is started, a process for switching the background mode (background mode transition process) is executed.

Then, when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous mode are met by the background mode transition process, the background image shown in FIG. 1254(a) is displayed. In other words, in some cases when the second time-saving state is set, the background mode is transitioned to the advantageous mode, so that the player can be easily informed that the second time-saving state has been set.

On the other hand, the conditions for terminating the advantageous mode are specified separately. For example, each time a special pattern lottery is executed after the end conditions for the second time-saving state are met and the normal state is set, an end lottery to terminate the advantageous mode is executed, and the advantageous mode is terminated if the end lottery is won.

By configuring it in this way, since the advantageous mode is set to inform the player that the second time-saving state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who understands that the second time-saving state has been set to know how long the advantageous mode will continue. This makes it easier for the player to play while expecting that the first time-saving state will be set. Furthermore, since it is possible to leave open the possibility that the second time-saving state has been set internally even when the advantageous mode is not set, it is possible to make it easier for the player to expect that the first time-saving state will be set even when playing with the left hand and the advantageous mode is not set (when the normal mode is set).

Next, referring to FIG. 1254(b), the contents of the presentation screen during the disadvantageous mode will be explained. This disadvantageous mode is a presentation screen for informing the player that the normal state has been set as the game state. By setting this disadvantageous mode, the player is informed that the currently set game state is the normal state, which is not advantageous to the player. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to find a time to stop playing because they are unable to know which game state has been set, which can lead to the player playing for an excessively long period of time and losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this 43rd control example, if a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries (999 times) are performed without winning the jackpot, a ceiling bonus can be awarded, and the fewer the number of special symbol lotteries required to award the ceiling bonus (the more special symbol lotteries that do not win the jackpot), the more likely it is that the disadvantageous mode will be displayed when the normal state is set. As shown in FIG. 1254(b), while the disadvantageous mode is displayed, a remaining number notification is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to show the number of special symbol lotteries required to be performed until the ceiling bonus is awarded.

Specifically, in the display screen shown in FIG. 1254(b), the words "50 more to the ceiling" are displayed in the small display area Dm7. Therefore, the display screen shown in FIG. 1254(b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the period in which the special pattern variation is being carried out to show the result of the 950th special pattern drawing since the end of the previous big win game.

Although not shown in the figures, in this 43rd control example, a normal mode can be set as a background mode in addition to the advantageous and disadvantageous modes described above. This normal mode can be set when the normal state or the second time-saving state is set as the game state. In other words, the advantageous and disadvantageous modes are dedicated modes that are background modes that can notify the player of the set game state, and the normal mode is a common mode that does not notify the player of the set game state. By configuring the common mode to be set in this way, it is possible to prevent the dedicated mode from being set for the player every time the normal state transitions between the normal state and the second time-saving state, and the player from easily understanding the set game state.

In the 43rd control example, the above-mentioned three types (unfavorable mode, normal mode, advantageous mode) can be set as the types of background modes, but the types of background modes may be four or more. In the 43rd control example, two types of game states (e.g., normal state, second time-saving state) can be set as game states in which the game method that is advantageous to the player is the same (e.g., left-handed play), but it may be configured so that the game method that is advantageous to the player is the same in three or more game states. In this case, as the types of background modes, in addition to a background mode (dedicated mode) corresponding to the set game state and a background mode (common mode) that does not correspond to the set game state, a background mode (limited mode) that can exclude at least one game state may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the game state that is set according to the type of background mode that is set.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to notify the player of information indicating that the background mode has not changed despite a transition in the game state. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to be able to set a background mode that cannot be set depending on the game state to be set. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the currently set game state based on the information that the same background mode is set in common before and after the transition in the game state.

It may also be possible to configure the device so that information indicating that the background mode has been switched can be notified to the player even if the game state has not changed. This configuration allows the player to understand that the background mode before the switch and the background mode after the switch were set in the same game state, providing the player with the fun of predicting the current game state, and also providing the player who understands the current game state with the fun of predicting when that game state was set.

Next, referring to FIG. 1255, the content of the presentation that is executed when the time-saving pattern is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state will be explained. FIG. 1255(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the time-saving pattern for which the time-saving type "Time-saving A" is set is won during normal mode, and FIG. 1255(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the time-saving type "Time-saving A" is won during advantageous mode.

In this 43rd control example, if the first special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot win, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving pattern has been won (time-saving pattern lottery), and if the time-saving pattern is won, the time-saving state can be set without executing the jackpot game. If the time-saving pattern is won, the time-saving pattern type is set to either "time-saving A (time-saving pattern A)," which sets the second time-saving state, or "time-saving B (time-saving pattern B)," which sets the first time-saving state. Furthermore, it is configured so that a different number of time-saving times is set depending on the type of time-saving pattern that is won.

The display screen shown in FIG. 1255(a) is a display screen for indicating that the time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state with 10 time-saving times has been won when the normal state is set as the game state and the "normal mode" is set as the background mode, and the treasure chest 810c displayed in the center of the main display area Dm opens, and "Advantageous" is displayed as the contents 810ca as a display mode indicating that the second time-saving state is set. The character 801 is displayed in a display mode (displayed with a V sign in the figure) indicating that the result of this special pattern lottery (the result of the time-saving pattern lottery) is an advantageous result for the player (the game state after the winning is more advantageous to the player than the game state before the winning), and the words "Enter advantageous mode" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 1255(a), the display area Dm1 formed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays a time-saving pattern display mode ("3.5.3") different from the jackpot display mode (e.g., three consecutive numbers) for indicating a jackpot win as the display mode of the third pattern for indicating the result of the first special pattern lottery. Here, the display mode for indicating that the time-saving pattern has been won as a result of the special pattern lottery is configured to display a time-saving pattern display mode different from the miss display mode for indicating a complete miss in which neither the jackpot nor the time-saving pattern has been won as a result of the special pattern lottery, but this time-saving pattern display mode is configured to be displayed in a display mode that is difficult to distinguish from the miss display mode compared to the jackpot display mode.

Specifically, as a jackpot display mode to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, a combination of identical numbers such as "333" is set in the display area Dm1, and as a loss display mode to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is neither a jackpot nor a winning time-saving pattern, a different combination of numbers such as "363" is set in the display area Dm1. And as a time-saving pattern display mode to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a winning time-saving pattern, a specific combination (e.g., 353) is set as a different combination of numbers, similar to the loss display mode described above.

In other words, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win, the jackpot display mode is displayed in a display mode that is easily recognizable to the player in the display area Dm1 in order to provide the player with an early sense of satisfaction by letting the player know that he or she has won the jackpot before the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot win.

By making it difficult for the player to easily distinguish between the time-saving pattern display mode that indicates that the time-saving pattern has been won and the miss display mode that indicates that it is a complete miss, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the time-saving state has been set based on the result of this special pattern lottery (whether or not the time-saving pattern has been won), making it easier for the player to become interested in the presentation (background mode display) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, rather than the display mode displayed in the display area Dm1.

When the display screen shown in FIG. 1255(a) is displayed and it is announced that the advantageous mode will be set, an effect is executed in which the background mode changes from the normal mode to the advantageous mode during the next special pattern change period. Note that in this 43rd control example, as the effect executed during the special pattern change in which the time-saving pattern has been won, as shown in FIG. 1255(a), there are cases where the effect is executed in an effect mode for indicating that the time-saving pattern has been won (an effect mode in which the contents 810ca displaying "Advantageous" is displayed) and cases where the effect is executed in an effect mode that does not notify the player that the time-saving pattern has been won, for example, a treasure chest 810c is opened and the contents 810ca are displayed in an effect mode in which "?" is displayed, making it difficult (impossible) for the player to determine whether the time-saving pattern has been won or not.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute effects that allow the player to understand that they have won the time-saving pattern in the special pattern lottery, as well as effects that make it difficult for the player to understand, making it difficult for the player to understand the currently set game state.

Next, the effects that occur when a time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state ("Time-saving A") is won during the second time-saving state will be explained. In FIG. 1255(b), "3.5.3" is displayed in the display area Dm1 as a display mode to indicate that a time-saving symbol of the same type as that in FIG. 1255(a) described above (a time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state with 10 time-savings) has been won. Then, from within a treasure chest 810c displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, the contents 810ca with the word "Pinch" written on it are displayed, and the words "The advantageous period may have been shortened" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

Here, Fig. 1255(b) displays the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the second time-saving state (30 time-saving times remaining), and when a new second time-saving state is set based on the winning time-saving pattern in this special pattern lottery, the word "Pinch" is displayed to inform the player that the number of time-saving times remaining will be less than that of the second time-saving state that has already been set.

In other words, when the advantageous mode is set, that is, when the background mode for informing the player that the second time-saving state has been set is displayed, the display mode of the contents 810ca can be set to a display mode that allows the player to predict whether the remaining number of time-saving turns will be reduced by the newly set second time-saving state if the player wins the time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state.

On the other hand, even if the second time-saving state is set, in a situation where the advantageous mode is not set as the background mode (a situation where the normal mode is set), even if a time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state is won, the display mode that allows the player to predict whether the remaining number of time-saving times will be reduced by the newly set second time-saving state is not displayed.

In other words, in this 43rd control example, even if the same type of time-saving pattern (a time-saving pattern for setting the second time-saving state with 10 time-savings) is won when the same game state (second time-saving state) is set, the ratio of information provided on whether the currently won time-saving pattern is disadvantageous to the player (whether the remaining period of the second time-saving state will be shortened) is different depending on the type of background mode (presentation mode for allowing the player to predict the set game state) that is set. Therefore, when a dedicated background mode (advantageous mode) is set to indicate that the second time-saving state is set, information on whether the currently won time-saving pattern is disadvantageous to the player is more easily provided than when a common background mode (normal mode) is set, which makes it more difficult to know whether the second time-saving state is set than when the dedicated background mode is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the ease of obtaining information regarding whether the results of the special pattern lottery will be disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of presentation mode (background mode) being executed, making it possible to make the player interested in the type of presentation mode being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 1256, the performance content executed when the time-saving pattern for which the first time-saving state ("time-saving B") is set in the special pattern lottery is selected will be described. In this 43rd control example, when the time-saving pattern is selected, the time-saving type is set to time-saving A for which the second time-saving state is set, or time-saving B for which the first time-saving state is set. When the first time-saving state is set, it becomes easier to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state and the second time-saving state, and right-hand play for making the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 is more advantageous to the player than left-hand play for making the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64, so a guide mode for encouraging right-hand play is displayed in the display area Dm4. In other words, the first time-saving state is a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state.

First, referring to FIG. 1256(a), the effects that are executed when a time-saving symbol that sets the first time-saving state is won while normal mode is set as the background mode will be explained. FIG. 1256(a) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when "Time-saving B" is won during normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 1256(a), when "Time-saving B" is selected, "3.7.3" is displayed in a static manner in the display area Dm1 as a time-saving pattern display mode to indicate that the time-saving pattern for which "Time-saving B" is set has been selected. In the main display area Dm, "Normal" is displayed to indicate that the current background mode is normal mode, and a watermelon-like pattern is displayed as a display mode for the contents 810ca of the treasure chest 810c to indicate that the time-saving pattern for which "Time-saving B" is set has been selected. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Lucky Chance Time Entry" are displayed as a guide mode to indicate that the first time-saving state (right-hand play state) will be set.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 1256(a) is displayed, when the next special symbol variation starts, Chance Time is set as the background mode to indicate the first time-saving state, and "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area Dm4. The display contents during this Chance Time will be described later with reference to FIG. 1257.

In this 43rd control example, the first time-saving state is set as the game state when the special symbol variation that has won "Time-saving B" in which the first time-saving state is set is stopped and displayed, but when the next special symbol variation starts, the background mode during the first time-saving state is switched to. In other words, if the next special symbol variation does not start after the display screen shown in FIG. 1256(a) is displayed, the display screen indicating the entry into chance time is configured to continue to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily secure a longer period for notifying the player that chance time is entering, compared to the case where the background mode corresponding to chance time is set when the special symbol that has won the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed.

In other words, when a time-saving winning combination is won in the special pattern lottery and the time-saving state is set after the time-saving winning play ends, a winning play period is set between the special pattern variation that won the time-saving winning combination and the next special pattern variation, making it easy to secure a period of time to inform the player in advance that the time-saving state will be set, and providing a game that is easy for the player to understand. However, when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving pattern in the special pattern lottery, no winning play period is set between the special pattern variation that won the time-saving winning combination and the next special pattern variation, so the time-saving state is set unexpectedly, resulting in a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

In contrast to this, in the 43rd control example, when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving symbol, a presentation indicating that the time-saving state is in progress (chance time display) is executed after the timing at which the time-saving state is set, and a period of time can be secured for executing a presentation indicating that the time-saving state is set (chance time entry display). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the timing at which the presentation indicating that the time-save state is in progress is executed is different with respect to the timing at which the time-save state is set depending on whether the time-save state is set after a winning game ends or based on the winning of a time-save pattern. In other words, the timing at which the time-save state is notified is different depending on the trigger for setting the time-save state. By configuring it in this way, the fact that the time-save state has been set is notified at various times, allowing the player to play while constantly hoping that the time-save state will be set.

In addition, even if the configuration is other than that used in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, it is sufficient that the configuration can prevent the effect during the time-saving state from being executed without notifying the player for a sufficient period of time that the time-saving state will be set based on the winning of the time-saving pattern. For example, if a 60-second change time is set as the special pattern change to indicate that the time-saving pattern has been won, the first 50 seconds may be used to execute an effect (change effect) to show the result of the special pattern lottery, and then the remaining 10 seconds may be used to notify the player that the time-saving state will be set. By configuring in this way, even if a time-saving effect is executed at the timing when the special pattern change is stopped and displayed, it is possible to ensure sufficient time to notify the player that the time-saving state will be set.

In addition, in the 43rd control example, as shown in FIG. 1256(a), at the time when the special pattern variation that has won the "time-saving B" in which the first time-saving state is set is stopped and displayed (the time when the first time-saving state is set), the guidance mode (the "right hit" display in the display area Dm4) for guiding the player to play right-handed is not displayed. Then, when the next special pattern lottery is executed, the guidance mode for guiding the player to play right-handed is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can be allowed to play right-handed with more leeway than when the background mode corresponding to the chance time is set at the time when the special pattern that has won the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery even after the first time-saving state is set. Furthermore, since it is possible to make it difficult to execute the second special pattern lottery immediately after the first time-saving state is set, the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed per unit time can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this 43rd control example, it is possible to set a different number of time-saving times as the number of time-saving times for the first time-saving state depending on the type of the winning time-saving pattern and the set game state.The display mode for indicating the winning time-saving pattern that sets the first time-saving state is displayed in a display mode that allows the player to predict the number of time-saving times that will be set.

Now, referring to FIG. 1256(b), we will explain the presentation content when the time-saving symbol (time-saving B) that sets the first time-saving state during advantageous mode is won. FIG. 1256(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when "time-saving B" is won during advantageous mode.

As described above, in this 43rd control example, one display mode is selected from icons resembling a number of foods (watermelon, cherry, carrot) as the display mode (display mode of the contents 810ca of the treasure chest 810c) to indicate that "Time-saving B" in which the first time-saving state is set has been won, and the icon to be displayed is determined based on the game state at the time the time-saving pattern is won, the background mode that is set, and the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state that is set by winning the time-saving pattern.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state and the background mode is the normal mode, if "time-saving B" is selected, either the watermelon icon or the cherry icon is determined, and when the game state is the time-saving state and the background mode is the normal mode, if "time-saving B" is selected, either the cherry icon or the carrot icon is determined. When the game state is the second time-saving state and the advantageous mode is set as the background mode, if "time-saving B" is selected, either the watermelon icon, the cherry icon, or the carrot icon is determined, and when the game state is the normal state and the advantageous mode is set as the background mode, that is, after the advantageous mode is set based on the setting of the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, but the condition for terminating the advantageous mode is not met, if "time-saving B" is selected, only the watermelon icon is determined.

In other words, when the normal mode is set as the background mode and a watermelon icon is displayed, the player can predict that the game state at the time when "Time-saving B" is won will be normal, and when the normal mode is set and a carrot icon is displayed, the player can predict that the game state at the time when "Time-saving B" is won will be time-saving. Also, when the advantageous mode is set as the background mode and a cherry icon or a carrot icon is displayed, the player can predict that the game state at the time when "Time-saving B" is won will be the second time-saving state.

This configuration allows the player to predict the currently set game state based on the set background mode and the type of icon displayed, making it possible to arouse the player's interest in the multiple display modes (background images, food-like icons) that are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and have overlapping display periods.

Furthermore, as described above, even if the same type of icon (watermelon icon, cherry icon, carrot icon) is displayed when "Time-saving B" is won, the meaning of the displayed icon differs depending on the type of background mode that is set. This provides the player with the fun of guessing the meaning of the icon that will be displayed when "Time-saving B" is won, compared to when each icon has its own unique meaning regardless of the type of background mode.

In the 43rd control example, whether the normal mode or the advantageous mode is set, the multiple icon types determined to indicate that "Time-saving B" has been won are unified, thereby reducing the number of icon types displayed on the display screen and reducing the amount of display data. However, without being limited to this, a unique icon type corresponding to each background mode may be used. For example, an apple icon resembling an apple may be determined as an icon type that is displayed only in the normal mode, and when the apple icon is displayed, the game state at the time of the time-saving winning is the normal state, and the number of time-saving times set is the maximum (40 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the current time-saving winning is a low probability one, and is the most advantageous one.

Next, referring to FIG. 1257, the content of the effect executed by the special pattern change executed during the first time-saving state will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, after the special pattern indicating the time-saving pattern win is stopped and displayed, a time-saving count notification effect is executed to notify the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state using the change period of the first special pattern change using the remaining reservation of the first special pattern. FIG. 1257(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the time-saving count notification effect, and FIG. 1257(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen on which the effect result of the time-saving count notification effect is displayed.

The time-saving count notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of times (time-saving count) the second special symbol drawing (special symbol 2 drawing) can be performed before the end condition of the first time-saving state set this time is established. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example has, as the end condition of the first time-saving state, a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of special symbol drawing, which is the sum of the number of times the first special symbol drawing (special symbol 1 drawing) is performed and the number of times the second special symbol drawing (special symbol 2 drawing) is performed, reaches a predetermined number (10,000 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol drawing (special symbol 2 drawing) is performed reaches a predetermined number (1 time to 10,000 times), and is configured so that the number of special symbol 2 drawings at which the second time-saving end condition is established is equal to or less than the total number of special symbol drawing at which the first time-saving end condition is established.

In other words, in this 43rd control example, when the first time-saving state is set, the game state becomes one in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed, and so the player will play with a right-hand stroke during the first time-saving state. However, if the player has the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reserved) while the first time-saving state is set, the special symbol 1 lottery will be executed using the winning information contained in the already acquired special symbol 1 reserved until the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is acquired by right-hand play, so there is a high possibility that the first special symbol lottery will be executed during the first time-saving state.

To prevent a decrease in the number of times that the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the first time-saving state due to the first special symbol lottery being executed during the first time-saving state, multiple types of time-saving end conditions can be set. The number of times that the special symbol 2 lottery remains until the second time-saving end condition, which is established based only on the number of times that the special symbol 2 lottery is executed, can be notified to the player as the number of times the time-saving state is executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the first special pattern lottery is executed during the time-saving state, the remaining number of time-saving times (the remaining number of special pattern 2 lotteries until the second time-saving end condition is met) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be prevented from decreasing, so that even if the first special pattern lottery is executed during the first time-saving state, the player can be clearly informed that the number of special pattern 2 lotteries that can be executed during the first time-saving state will not decrease.

Furthermore, if the first special pattern variation starts after the special pattern variation that has been selected for the time-saving pattern for which the first time-saving state is set is displayed as stopped, the number of time-saving times remaining for the first time-saving state that has been set is not displayed, and a time-saving number notification effect is executed, so that the player can be reliably notified that the first time-saving state has been set.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, if the special pattern that is selected as the time-saving pattern for which the first time-saving state is set in the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and then the second special pattern lottery is executed, the above-mentioned time-saving count notification effect is not executed, and the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed based on the start of the second special pattern fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 1257(a), when the time-saving count notification effect is executed, a performance is executed to notify the number of time-saving times according to the type of time-saving pattern that has been won. In this time-saving count notification effect, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the lower left of the main display area Dm, and above it, patterns 811a to 811d are displayed in a rotating manner, indicating the number of times the second special pattern will be drawn until the first time-saving state that has been set this time ends. Further above that, the words "~Chance time waiting~" are displayed. Furthermore, the words "Decide the number of chance times!!" are displayed in the small display area Ds. These display contents can make the player believe that the number of time-saving times for the first time-saving state has not yet been set. In other words, the player can believe that the first time-saving state has not yet started (is waiting).

In fact, the first time-saving state has already started when this time-saving count notification effect begins. In other words, the time-saving count notification effect is executed during the period in which the first special pattern is displayed when the first special pattern is displayed when the time-saving pattern is selected and the display ends (when the time-saving pattern is displayed when it stops). In this way, even if a new first special pattern is displayed when the first time-saving state is set, the time-saving count notification effect is executed using the period in which the first special pattern is displayed when the pattern is displayed when it stops, so that the time-saving count notification effect can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

As described above, the state shown in FIG. 1257(a) is the first time-saving state in which the first special symbol variation is being executed, and therefore the first special symbol variation is being executed in a manner that is relatively difficult for the player to see (narrow display area) in the display area Dm1 formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm. In addition, the reserved symbol display is also executed in the display area Dm9 that is relatively difficult for the player to see (narrow display area). In other words, it is configured in such a way that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the lottery for the first special symbol is being executed based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol (the first time-saving state has already started).

Here, if the time-saving symbol is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during left-hand play (normal state, second time-saving state) and the first time-saving state is set, or if a jackpot is won and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends, this means that right-hand play to execute the second special symbol lottery has not been executed prior to the first time-saving state being set this time, so it is likely that the reserved ball for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) has been acquired, but the reserved ball for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) has not been acquired. In this case, even if the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends, the first special symbol lottery will be executed based on the reserved special symbol 1 that has been acquired.

In this 43rd control example, when the first time-saving state in which the second special symbol drawing is easily performed is set, in order to make it easier to draw the second special symbol a predetermined number of times, a special symbol 2 end condition that is satisfied only by the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is set in addition to a combined end condition that is satisfied based on the combined number of times the first special symbol is drawn and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn, as an end condition for ending the first time-saving state, and the number of times specified as the combined end condition is configured to be greater than the number of times specified as the special symbol 2 end condition.

By configuring it in this way, even if the first special pattern lottery is executed based on the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired immediately after the first time-saving state is set, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the number of second special pattern lotteries that can be executed during the first time-saving state is reduced due to the execution of the first special pattern lottery.

More specifically, in this 44th control example, the number of combined drawings for which the combined end condition is satisfied is greater than the number of drawings for the second special symbol for which the special symbol 2 end condition is satisfied by the number of special symbol drawings (4 times) or more corresponding to the upper limit number (4 pieces) of special symbol 1 reserved that can be stored. By configuring in this way, even if the number of special symbol 1 reserved that has been acquired at the time the first time-saving state is set is the upper limit number, and the first special symbol drawing is performed four times using all of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved before the second special symbol drawing is performed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of second special symbol drawings that can be performed during the first time-saving state is reduced due to the first special symbol drawing being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eager to play left-handed in order to acquire more special symbol 1 reserved without worrying about whether the first time-saving state is executed or not.

In addition, rather than setting the number of combined draws at which the combined end condition is satisfied to be unnecessarily high, for example, if the number of draws for the second special symbol at which the special symbol 2 end condition is satisfied is set to 10, it is better to configure it so that the number of combined special symbol draws at which the combined end condition is satisfied is set to about 20. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the left-hand hit game being continuously performed during the first time-saving state, and the game of intentionally performing only the first special symbol draw, that is, the game of continuing the first time-saving state for a long time without satisfying the special symbol 2 end condition, being performed.

In this case, if the first special pattern lottery is executed more times during the first time-saving state than the first special pattern lottery corresponding to the upper limit number of reserved special pattern 1 that can be stored in the reservation (four first special pattern lotteries), it is preferable to set an emphasis guidance mode that emphasizes right-hit play and guides the player to right-hit play more than the guidance mode that guides normal right-hit play as the guidance mode that guides the player to right-hit play. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to guide the player who was guided to right-hit play in the emphasis guidance mode with more emphasis on right-hit play, and it is possible to prevent players who do not realize that the first time-saving state has been set from continuing with left-hit play.

As described above, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the highlighting guidance mode, even if the maximum number of reserved special symbols 1 (4 symbols) is acquired at the time when the setting condition of the highlighting guidance mode is established (for example, when the fifth first special symbol lottery is executed during the first time-saving state), in order to prevent the combined end condition from being established before the special symbol 2 end condition by playing right-hand after understanding the contents of the highlighting guidance mode, it is preferable to set the number of combined special symbol lotteries at which the combined end condition is established to be about 10 times more than the number of lotteries of the second special symbol at which the special symbol 2 end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the combined end condition from being established before the special symbol 2 end condition, even if the right-hand play is executed in a hurry after understanding the contents of the highlighting guidance mode, and the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this 43rd control example, when the first time-saving state is set, the player is configured to be notified of some of the information until the time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state is met. Specifically, the information (the number of times the second special symbol is drawn) until the special symbol 2 end condition is met, among the time-saving end conditions for ending the first time-saving state, is configured to be notified to the player. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to know the number of times the second special symbol can be drawn during the first time-saving state that has been set, making it easier for the player to know whether or not a first time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (a first time-saving state in which the special symbol 2 end condition is unlikely to be met) has been set.

As described above, in the 43rd control example, there is a possibility that the first special symbol lottery will be executed after the first time-saving state is set. In this case, if the number of times the second special symbol can be drawn (remaining number of time-saving times) until the special symbol 2 end condition is met is notified to the player immediately after the first time-saving state is set (displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), the displayed number of remaining time-saving times will not be subtracted even though the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) has been executed with the first time-saving state set, which causes the player to feel distrustful.

In contrast to this, in the 43rd control example, a time-saving count notification effect can be executed that uses the period from when the first time-saving state is set until the second special symbol lottery is executed to notify the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn (time-saving count) until the special symbol 2 ending condition in the currently set first time-saving state is met.

By configuring it in this way, even if a period in which the second special pattern lottery is not executed is set immediately after the first time-saving state is set (a period in which the first special pattern lottery is executed, or a period in which no special pattern lottery is executed), that period can be effectively utilized to execute a presentation that piques the player's interest, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 1257(a), the explanation will be continued. The symbols (icons) displayed by rotating in the time-saving count notification performance are, for example, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811a with the character "10 times" attached, which suggests that the time-saving count has been granted at least 10 times, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811b with the character "1 time" attached, which suggests that the time-saving count notification performance has been granted at least once, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811c with the character "continue" attached, which suggests that the time-saving count notification performance will continue, and a suggestive symbol (icon) 811d with the character "congratulations" attached, which suggests a big win. In addition to these, a suggestive symbol (icon) with the character "100 times" attached, which suggests that the time-saving count has been granted 100 times or more, and a suggestive symbol (icon) with the character "∞" attached, which suggests that the first time-saving state will continue until the next big win, are also provided. Depending on the type of time-saving symbol that was won (the number of time-saving turns), the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, and the lottery results for the first special symbol, a lottery is held to determine which type of suggestive symbol (icon) will be set as the suggestive symbol (icon) 811a-811d.

When a specific period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the time-saving count notification effect, as shown in FIG. 1257(b), an effect is executed in which the rabbit character 801 hits one of the suggestive symbols (icons) 811a-811d, and it is notified that the player has acquired the suggestive content indicated by the hit suggestive symbol. The example in FIG. 1257(b) illustrates an example in which an effect is executed in which the suggestive symbol 811a, which is labeled "10 times", is hit. In this case, the text "GET 10 times!! Start hitting right!!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds, allowing the player to easily understand that the "10 times" displayed on the suggestive symbol 811a has been granted as the time-saving count.

Although not shown in the figure, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol while the time-saving count notification effect is being executed, an effect is executed in which the rabbit character 801 hits the suggestive symbol (icon) 811d with the word "Congratulations." Also, the words "GET jackpot!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that he or she has won a jackpot.

In other words, in this 43rd control example, the first special pattern lottery is executed between when the first time-saving state is set and when the second special pattern lottery, which is mainly executed during the first time-saving state, is executed, and if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the jackpot is notified to the player without notifying the player of the number of time-saving times set for this first time-saving state. By configuring in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 in which multiple types of time-saving times can be set, even if a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) is set, a jackpot game is executed without ever executing the second special pattern lottery, which prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, as described above, the presentation mode of the time-saving count notification effect (the display mode of the displayed suggestive pattern icons 811a to 811d) is determined according to the type of time-saving pattern that was won (time-saving count), the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern, and the lottery result for the first special pattern. Therefore, even if the suggestive pattern (icon) 811d with the word "Congratulations" indicating a jackpot win is displayed as the presentation result of the time-saving count notification effect, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the number of time-saving counts set for this first time-saving state based on the types of the other suggestive patterns (icons) 811a to 811c that were not stopped and displayed.

In this 43rd control example, if a jackpot is won by the first special pattern drawing executed between the setting of the first time-saving state and the execution of the second special pattern drawing that is mainly executed during the first time-saving state, the jackpot is announced without announcing the number of time-saving times by the time-saving number announcement effect executed during the first special pattern change. However, without being limited to this, for example, if a jackpot is won by the first special pattern drawing executed before the execution of the second special pattern drawing that is mainly executed during the first time-saving state, a suggestive pattern icon corresponding to a number of time-saving times less than the number of time-saving times actually set may be displayed in a frozen state, and then an effect indicating a jackpot may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that the first time-saving state, which has a small number of time-saving episodes, and the second game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, have been set within the first time-saving state, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to winning a jackpot, since winning a jackpot in the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state is a more advantageous game result than ending the first time-saving state without winning the second special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state.

In this 43rd control example, the time for the first special symbol to change during the first time-saving state is fixed to 5 seconds. In conjunction with this, the effect of selecting one suggested symbol (the rabbit character 801 punches) during the time-saving count notification effect is also fixed to 5 seconds. The time-saving count notification effect is then executed using the change period of the first first special symbol change executed during the first time-saving state. In addition, in a state in which neither the reserved ball of the first special symbol nor the reserved ball of the second special symbol is held, a 5-second effect is executed in which a suggested symbol with the word "continue" is selected, and then, when the first special symbol change is executed, a new combination of four suggested symbols is displayed during the change, and a 5-second effect is executed again in which one suggested symbol is selected from among them. In addition, when the condition that the next change is the second special pattern change is satisfied, the suggestive pattern icon displayed as a result of the currently executing time-saving count notification effect is switched from the state of a predetermined suggestive pattern icon to the state of a suggestive pattern icon indicating the number of time-saving times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferably execute the effect (time-saving count notification effect) using the period from when the first time-saving state is set to when the second special pattern lottery is executed.

Next, referring to Fig. 1258(a) and Fig. 1258(b), the content of the variable presentation executed during the variable period of the second special symbol in the first time-saving state will be explained. Fig. 1258(a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable presentation during the time-saving state (first time-saving state), and Fig. 1258(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the end of the variable period of the second special symbol that has won a small jackpot.

In this 43rd control example, when a second special pattern lottery is executed during the first time-saving state, a variation effect is executed in which a plurality of suggestive pattern icons 811e-811g, including suggestive patterns for showing the result of the second special pattern lottery being executed, are displayed in a variable manner, and in time with the end timing of the special pattern variation (special pattern stop display timing), a rabbit-like character 801 performs an action (attack action) to stop the display of the multiple suggestive pattern icons 811e-811g being displayed in a variable manner, and a variation effect is executed in which a suggestive pattern icon corresponding to the special pattern lottery result is displayed in a variable manner from the multiple suggestive pattern icons 811e-811g being displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 1258(a), when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the first time-saving state, the words "Chance Zone" are displayed above the main display area Dm as a display mode to indicate that the current game state is the first time-saving state. In addition, a display area Dm2 is formed at the top right of the main display area Dm to indicate the changing status of the second special symbol, and a display mode (shown by an arrow in the figure) to indicate that the second special symbol is changing is displayed.

At the upper left side of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm4 is formed to guide the player on the game method, and "Right Hit" is displayed to guide the player to right-hand play, which is the most advantageous game method for the player during the first time-saving state. Below the main display area Dm4, a display area Dm7 is formed to show the remaining number of second special symbol draws (remaining number of time-saving times) that can be executed until the special symbol 2 end condition is met, as information until the time-saving end condition for ending the currently set first time-saving state is met. This display area Dm7 shows the number of time-saving times notified in the time-saving number notification performance, that is, the number of second special symbol draws (number of time-saving times) that shows the special symbol 2 end condition set for the currently set first time-saving state, and then, after the second special symbol variation is executed, the number of time-saving times is subtracted and displayed.

In this 43rd control example, the number of remaining time-saving times until the special pattern 2 end condition is met is displayed, so even if the first special pattern lottery is executed during the chance zone, the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the display area Dm7 will not be subtracted. In this way, by configuring the number of time-saving times until the special pattern 2 end condition is met out of the multiple time-saving end conditions to be notified to the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the remaining number of times that the second special pattern lottery can be executed during the first time-saving state.

The diagram shown in FIG. 1258(a) shows an example of a display screen displayed during the seventh second special symbol variation after the first time-saving state with 10 time-saving times is set, and "last 3 times" is displayed in the display area Dm7 as a display mode for indicating the remaining number of time-saving times. When the time-saving number is set to 10 times, the display mode for indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is configured so that "last 10 times" is displayed until one second has elapsed since the first time of the second special symbol variation is started, and then the number is subtracted by one and "last 9 times" is displayed. After that, the number is subtracted and displayed each time a new second special symbol variation is started, and when the second special symbol variation (final time-saving variation) that satisfies the special symbol 2 end condition is executed, "last" is displayed to indicate that the second special symbol variation being executed is the last special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state.

By configuring it in this way, the number of time-saving times currently set can be notified to the player for a predetermined period of time (1 second) even after the second special pattern lottery has been executed.

Here, the contents of the suggestive pattern icons 811e to 811g displayed in the performance executed during the chance zone will be explained. The suggestive pattern icon 811e with the character "?" is a display mode for providing information on the result of the special pattern lottery, and is a display mode for making it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special pattern lottery being executed. This suggestive pattern icon 811e is selectable with a certain probability, whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a winning win (a big win or a small win) or not. The suggestive pattern icon 811f with the character "V" is a display mode for providing information on the result of the special pattern lottery, and is selected when the result of the special pattern lottery being executed is a winning win (a big win or a small win). The suggestive pattern icon 811g with the character "Yo" is a display mode for providing information on the result of the special pattern lottery, as well as information on the time-saving end condition of the set first time-saving state. This suggested symbol icon 811g is selected when the result of the ongoing special symbol lottery is a miss and the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area Dm7 is less than the number of remaining time reductions that will satisfy the special symbol 2 ending condition.

In other words, if the result of the ongoing special pattern lottery is a "miss," the suggested pattern icon 811e or the suggested pattern icon 811g is selectable, and if the result of the ongoing special pattern lottery is a "win," the suggested pattern icon 811e or the suggested pattern icon 811f is selectable. Also, if the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the display area Dm7 is less than the remaining number of time-saving times for which the special pattern 2 ending condition is met, the suggested pattern icon 811g is selectable, and if the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the display area Dm7 is not less than the remaining number of time-saving times for which the special pattern 2 ending condition is met, the suggested pattern icon 811e or the suggested pattern icon 811f is selectable.

And, at the timing when the second special symbol variation is stopped in the first time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 1258(b), as a display mode to show the performance result of this variation performance, a suggestive symbol icon 811f imitating a "V" is displayed in accordance with the action of the character 801, and the remaining suggestive symbol icons 811f and 811g are ejected from the main display area Dm. FIG. 1258(b) shows the display screen when the second special symbol variation that has won the small prize is stopped and displayed, and in the display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed in the display mode "621" indicating a small prize win, and in the sub-display area Ds, the word "Bonus Get" is displayed to show that the result of this lottery is a winning prize.

In this control example, the suggestive pattern icon 811f with a "V" is displayed in a static manner both when a big win is won and when a small win is won, but this is not limited to this, and suggestive pattern icons in different modes may be displayed in a static manner when a big win is won and when a small win is won. In addition, multiple presentation modes may be set as the presentation mode of the variation presentation from when the multiple suggestive pattern icons 811e to 811f are displayed in a dynamic manner until any one of the suggestive pattern icons is displayed in a static manner, and the player may be able to predict whether or not a win has been won depending on the presentation mode that has been set. For example, a first speed and a second speed faster than the first speed may be set as the speed at which the multiple suggestive pattern icons are displayed in a dynamic manner, and the second speed of variation presentation may be more likely to be selected than the first speed of variation presentation when the lottery result is a win. This configuration allows the player to predict the outcome of the special symbol lottery based on the presentation mode of the variable presentation, allowing the player to play without getting bored even during the variable presentation period until the suggestive symbol icon is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, as a presentation mode of the variable presentation, rather than changing the variable display speed of the suggestive pattern icon, the number or type of variable displayed suggestive pattern icons may be displayed differently, allowing the player to predict the result of the special pattern lottery, or the length of the variable presentation period may allow the player to predict the result of the special pattern lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 1259, the effects that are displayed when a ceiling bonus is awarded will be described. FIG. 1259(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a ceiling bonus is awarded during normal mode, and FIG. 1259(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a ceiling bonus is awarded during advantageous mode.

In the 43rd control example, when the number of times the player wins the special symbol lottery after losing (the number of times they get stuck) reaches 999 times, a special bonus (ceiling bonus) can be given to the player regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, and the ceiling bonus is set to a second time-saving state with 40 time-saving times. Furthermore, when the second time-saving state is set as the ceiling bonus, unlike when the second time-saving state is set by winning the time-saving pattern, the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is newly set by the first special pattern lottery executed during the second time-saving state is not won. In other words, the second time-saving state granted by the ceiling bonus is configured not to win the time-saving pattern until the special pattern lottery is executed for the number of time-saving times (40 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress winning the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state with a short number of time-saving times is set during the second time-saving state.

In other words, in the second time-saving state in which left-handed play is more advantageous to the player than right-handed play and the bonus given when the time-saving symbol is won is more advantageous than in the normal state, the degree of advantage given to the player is varied depending on the trigger for setting the second time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily give an appropriate bonus to the player through the ceiling bonus. Note that in this 43rd control example, the second time-saving state is configured to be set so that a certain number of special symbol lotteries can be executed as the ceiling bonus, but this is not limited to this, and the first time-saving state may be configured to be set, or a specific number of second time-saving states and a specific number of first time-saving states may be set consecutively.

When the ceiling bonus is awarded during the normal mode shown in FIG. 1255(a) (when the number of times of stuck is reached 999), as a variation effect to show the result of the lottery for the 999th special pattern variation, the word "Advantageous" to indicate that the player is entering advantageous mode and the contents 810Ca with the number "40" to indicate the number of times the second time-saving state will continue (time-saving number) are displayed from inside the treasure chest 810c, and the character 801 is displayed in a manner to congratulate the player on the transition to an advantageous gaming state. Also, the words "Entering advantageous mode" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds to indicate that the ceiling bonus is awarded.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 1255(a) is displayed, when the special symbol variation ends (the special symbol stops displaying), a background image showing the advantageous mode is displayed, and the display screen shown in FIG. 1259(b) is displayed. Here, when the advantageous mode (second time-saving state) is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, the time-saving symbol may be won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state, and the second time-saving state may end immediately. In order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the duration of the second time-saving state, the remaining period during which the advantageous mode (second time-saving state) will continue is not notified to the player. However, when the second time-saving state is set by the ceiling privilege, the game state is configured not to transition to the normal state until a certain number of times (40 times) of special symbol lotteries are executed, so the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed in the display area Dm7. And, the words "The advantageous mode will not fall off after 40 rotations" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

By configuring it in this way, when the second time-saving state (advantageous mode) is set by the ceiling bonus, the player can easily understand that a more stable game can be played compared to when the second time-saving state (advantageous mode) is set by winning the time-saving symbol.

<Regarding transition of game state in the 43rd control example>
Next, the transition of the game state in the present 43rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1260. Fig. 1260 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 43rd control example. As shown in FIG. 1260, the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example is configured to be able to set a left-hit game state in which a left-hit game is an advantageous game method for the player, in which a left-hit game is performed by firing a game ball toward the left side area (to the left of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 with the aim of having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 1253), which triggers the execution of the first special pattern lottery, and a right-hit game state in which a right-hit game is performed by firing a game ball toward the right side area (to the right of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 with the aim of having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 (see FIG. 1253), which triggers the execution of the second special pattern lottery.

More specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) or the second time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, low frequency state of opening of electric device 640) is set as the game state, the game state is set to a left-hand play state, and when the first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols, or low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, high frequency state of opening of electric device 640) is set, the game state is set to a right-hand play state.

Here, we will explain the time-saving states (second time-saving state and first time-saving state) that are set when the time-saving pattern is won. The details are the same as those in the 40th control example described above, so they will be omitted, but when the time-saving state (second time-saving state, first time-saving state) is set based on the winning of the time-saving pattern, it differs from when the time-saving state is set based on the winning of a jackpot in that the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set.

In other words, when a time-saving state (second time-saving state, first time-saving state) is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, a game state is set in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state while maintaining the same low probability state of the normal symbol as in the normal state. Specifically, the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) is set to be shorter than in the normal state (the same normal symbol change time as the normal symbol change executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol), and the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed per unit time is increased compared to the normal state, thereby creating a game state in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state.

Furthermore, when the first time-saving state is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, the game content of the normal symbol winning game that is executed when the normal symbol lottery is won is configured to be the same as the high probability state of the normal symbol. By configuring in this way, when the first time-saving state is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, even if the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the game content of the normal symbol winning game can be made the same as the high probability state of the normal symbol, making it possible for the player to play in a way that is more advantageous for right-hand play than left-hand play. Note that when the second time-saving state is set, the game content of the normal symbol winning game becomes the same as the normal state, and left-hand play becomes a game state that is more advantageous for the player than right-hand play.

In other words, in this 43rd control example, three game states can be set as game states in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set: the normal state, the first time-saving state, and the second time-saving state. The second time-saving state differs only in that a shorter normal symbol fluctuation time is set than the normal state, and is a game state in which it is difficult to get a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during play when a normal symbol is hit (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, low frequency of opening state) just like the normal state, and the first time-saving state is a game state in which it is easy to get a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during play when a normal symbol is hit (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, high frequency of opening state) just like the high probability state of normal symbols.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, as in the above-mentioned 40th control example, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is stipulated to be slightly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, and in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the normal symbol lottery without delay by the game balls fired by executing a right-hand hit game, the probability difference is configured to be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, in a situation where a high probability state of the normal symbol is set and a situation where a low probability state of the normal symbol and a high frequency opening state are set, the player can play the same right-hand hit game without feeling uncomfortable. Hereinafter, the game state in which right-hand hit play is advantageous to the player is collectively referred to as the first time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this 43rd control example, two types of second time-saving states (second time-saving state a, second time-saving state b) can be set, and different types of second time-saving states can be set depending on the trigger for setting the second time-saving state. Specifically, when a time-saving pattern is won by a special pattern lottery, the second time-saving state a is set, and when the number of consecutive special pattern lotteries performed without a jackpot game being played meets the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus (reaching 999 times), the second time-saving state b is set.

No matter what type of second time-saving state is set, the probability state of the special symbol, the probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening operation content of the electric device 640a in a normal symbol winning game are configured to be the same, but the difference is that the type of bonus granted when a win (jackpot win, time-saving symbol win) is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, even when the same game state (second time-saving state) is set, the content of the game to be executed later can be made different depending on the setting trigger that is established, so that the player can be interested not only in which game state has been set, but also in the setting trigger, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. In the following explanation, when both the second time-saving state a and the second time-saving state b are referred to, they will simply be referred to as the second time-saving state, and when a more detailed type is referred to, they will be referred to as the second time-saving state a (second time-saving state a) and the second time-saving state b (second time-saving state b).

First, the game content during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) will be explained. The normal state is a game state in which a game (special symbol 1 game) is played in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed by causing the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing from the left. When the first special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, a special symbol lottery is executed with a 1/250 probability of winning the jackpot and a 1/40 probability of winning the time-saving symbol.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 1271, but the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example is configured so that a jackpot and a time-saving pattern cannot be won in a single special pattern drawing. Specifically, when a special pattern drawing is performed, a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot determination), and if it is determined by the jackpot determination that a jackpot has not been won, a determination is then made as to whether or not a time-saving pattern has been won.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from receiving multiple benefits (jackpot win, time-saving pattern win) in one special pattern drawing, and to prevent a situation in which excessive benefits are given to a player. Note that in this 43rd control example, the jackpot determination is performed before the time-saving pattern win is determined, but it is sufficient to prevent excessive benefits from being given to a player in one special pattern drawing. For example, the determination of whether the time-saving pattern has been won may be performed before the jackpot determination, and the determination of whether the jackpot has been won may be performed if it is determined that the time-saving pattern has not been won based on the time-saving pattern win determination.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, the range of values for winning the jackpot and the range of values for winning the time-saving pattern are specified without overlap for the values that one piece of information can take (the value of the first winning random number counter C1), so that a jackpot and a time-saving pattern are not judged to be overlapping in a single special pattern drawing (a winning judgment performed based on the value of one first winning random number counter C1), and therefore the order of judgment in a single special pattern drawing may be changed as appropriate.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example, the jackpot win and the time-saving pattern win are not judged to be overlapping, but multiple bonuses may be awarded in overlapping fashion depending on the content of the various bonuses judged to be won. For example, when the jackpot type is set to be a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, the time-saving pattern win may be judged to be executable even when the jackpot win is won. Furthermore, in addition to the jackpot win and the time-saving pattern win, a small bonus win may be judged to be executable, which is a trigger for playing a small bonus game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot win is won, and the time-saving pattern win and the small bonus may be judged to be overlapping with each other by one special pattern lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the content of the bonuses that can be awarded by one special pattern lottery while suppressing excessive bonuses from being awarded to the player, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

First, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state, one of two jackpot types (jackpot A43, jackpot B43) is set, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type is set to 10% for jackpot A43 and 90% for jackpot B43.

When jackpot A43 is set as the jackpot type, a jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) is played, and after the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving state with 10,000 times of time-saving (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. On the other hand, when jackpot B43 is set, a jackpot game with 4 rounds (R) is played, and after the jackpot game ends, the second time-saving state with 100 times of time-saving (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols, low frequency of opening) is set.

The probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (jackpot winning probability) is 1/250, and the rate at which jackpot A43 is set as the jackpot type is 10%, so the probability that the first time-saving state is set based on a jackpot win from the first special symbol lottery executed during left-hand play is 1/2500. Also, the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (jackpot winning probability) is 1/250, and the rate at which jackpot B43 is set as the jackpot type is 90%, so the probability that the second time-saving state is set based on a jackpot win from the first special symbol lottery executed during left-hand play is about 1/277. Although the details will be described later, since the first time-saving state is a more advantageous play state for the player than the second time-saving state, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot will be more advantageous to the player if jackpot A43 is set than if jackpot B43 is set. Therefore, although the probability is low, the player can play with the aim of winning the jackpot set to jackpot A43.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, a time-saving pattern determination is executed, which has a probability of winning the time-saving pattern with a probability of 1/40. If the time-saving pattern is won in this time-saving pattern determination (time-saving pattern lottery), the special pattern fluctuation to show the result of the first special pattern lottery is stopped and then the second time-saving state or the first time-saving state is set.

In the 43rd control example, when a time-saving pattern is selected in the special pattern lottery, one of two types of time-saving types is set, and the selection rate of the time-saving type (time-saving A) for which the second time-saving state is set is 50%, and the selection rate of the time-saving type (time-saving B) for which the first time-saving state is set is 50%. Furthermore, for each time-saving type (time-saving A, time-saving B), a time-saving type with a different time-saving end condition can be set. For example, four types of time-saving types A1, A2, A3, and A4 can be set as the time-saving type A (time-saving A group) for which the second time-saving state is set, and three types of time-saving types B1, B2, and B3 can be set as the time-saving type B (time-saving B group) for which the first time-saving state is set.

The details of the time-saving end conditions set for each time-saving type will be described later with reference to the time-saving granting 43 table 202Ae (see FIG. 1265), but different time-saving end conditions are set depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern is won. Regardless of the time-saving type, the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is set when the game state when the time-saving pattern is won is the normal state, followed by the time-saving end condition that is least likely to be met when the game state when the time-saving pattern is won is the second time-saving state, the first time-saving state, and so on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the game state when the time-saving pattern is won.

In addition, in the time-saving group A, among the time-saving A1 to A4, the time-saving A1 is set as the most disadvantageous time-saving end condition to the player (the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met), followed by the time-saving A2, A3, and A4 in order of the time-saving end conditions that are most likely to be met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the type of time-saving that is set when the time-saving symbol is won.

In the time-saving group B, among time-saving B1 to time-saving B3, time-saving B1 is set as the most disadvantageous time-saving end condition to the player (the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met), followed by time-saving B2 and time-saving B3, which are the time-saving end conditions that are most likely to be met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the type of time-saving that is set when the time-saving symbol is won.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, if the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (999 times) without a jackpot game being executed, a ceiling bonus can be awarded in which the second time-saving state b with the time-saving count of 40 times is set. By configuring it in this way, for a player who has executed multiple special symbol lotteries but has not won a jackpot, the game state can be shifted based on the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed, rather than the result of the special symbol lottery, making it easier for players to play for long periods of time.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the second time-saving state b can be set for a predetermined number of times (40 times of time-saving) as a ceiling bonus, but the content of the ceiling bonus is not limited to this, and the first time-saving state can be set. By configuring it in this way, the advantage of the bonus granted as the ceiling bonus can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with innovative gameplay aimed at granting a ceiling bonus.

In addition, when the conditions for granting a ceiling bonus are met (when the special pattern lottery has been executed 999 times), a ceiling bonus determination process may be executed to determine the content of the ceiling bonus to be granted this time by lottery from among multiple options.The type of ceiling bonus that can be determined by the ceiling bonus determination process may be one of bonuses with different degrees of advantage to the player (for example, a bonus that sets a first time-saving state, a bonus that sets a second time-saving state, and the content of the time-saving end conditions for ending each time-saving state).

By configuring in this manner, when the conditions for granting a ceiling bonus are met, it is possible to make the player more interested in the content of the ceiling bonus that will be granted this time. Furthermore, even if a bonus that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus that sets a first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to meet) can be granted as part of the ceiling bonus, it is possible to prevent a bonus with a high degree of advantage from being granted every time a ceiling bonus is granted, and therefore it is possible to prevent an overly advantageous bonus from being granted to the player as a ceiling bonus.

In addition, the content of the ceiling bonus granted as a ceiling bonus may be determined not when the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, but before the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met (for example, at the end of a jackpot game), and a suggestion effect may be executed that can suggest to the player the content of the ceiling bonus that will be granted if the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, using the period until the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met. By configuring in this way, the player can decide whether or not to play a game aimed at granting the ceiling bonus based on the content of the suggestion effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, if the time-saving end condition of the second time-saving state granted as the ceiling privilege is satisfied and the normal state is set again, that is, if no jackpot has been won in the 999 special pattern lotteries since the end of the previous jackpot game, the second time-saving state (40 time-savings) is set as the ceiling privilege, and 40 special pattern lotteries are performed during the second time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the normal state is set, the information is not updated to satisfy the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege.

In other words, the ceiling bonus can only be awarded once between jackpot wins. This configuration makes it possible to prevent excessive ceiling bonuses from being awarded to players who do not win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the ceiling bonus can be awarded only once between big wins, but the present invention is not limited to this and the ceiling bonus can be awarded two or more times. In this case, the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus can be different for the first ceiling bonus (first ceiling) and the second ceiling bonus (second ceiling). Furthermore, the content (degree of advantage) of the ceiling bonus awarded to the player can be different for the first ceiling and the second ceiling.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the number of times a special symbol is drawn between big wins (number of times it gets stuck) is used as information (ceiling-related information) for establishing the conditions for granting a ceiling privilege (ceiling granting conditions), and if a big win is not won in the special symbol drawing, the number of times the special symbol is drawn is updated. However, without being limited to this, a means may be provided that can measure the number of times the result of the special symbol drawing has resulted in a specific drawing result (for example, the number of times a small prize has been won), and the ceiling privilege may be granted if the number of times measured by that means satisfies the ceiling granting conditions (for example, 100 times the small prize has been won).

By configuring it in this way, the ceiling-related information is not updated every time a special symbol lottery is executed, but rather when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result, making it difficult for the player to predict when the ceiling awarding condition will be met. Therefore, the ceiling bonus can be awarded at a time that the player does not predict, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second time-saving state is a game state that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, a time-saving symbol is won, time-saving group A is set as the time-saving type, and a ceiling bonus is granted. As described above, this is a game state in which left-handed play is more advantageous to the player than right-handed play.

Specifically, in this 43rd control example, the second time-saving state has the second time-saving state a and the second time-saving state b as types of the second time-saving state, and the second time-saving state a is set after the time-saving symbol is won or the jackpot game ends, and the second time-saving state b is set when the ceiling privilege is granted. Regardless of whether the second time-saving state a or the second time-saving state b is set, the probability of winning various prizes in the special symbol lottery, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special symbol variation, the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected normal symbol variation, and the normal symbol winning game content (operation content of the electric role 640a) executed when the normal symbol lottery is won are the same. Therefore, when the second time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which type of second time-saving state is set based on the game content related to the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, the content of the presentation displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to allow the player to understand the type of the second time-saving state that has been set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1259, when the second time-saving state b is set due to the ceiling privilege being granted, the number of special pattern lotteries that can be executed before the second time-saving state b that has been set ends is notified to the player. By configuring in this way, even when the same game state is set, the provision of information on the end conditions for ending the set game state (whether or not to make it easy for the player to understand) can be varied depending on the setting trigger of the game state, so that the player can also be interested in the setting trigger of a new game state.

Next, the contents of the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state will be explained. When this second time-saving state is set, the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is executed by left-handed play, as in the normal state described above. In this second time-saving state, the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol are the same as in the normal state, so the probability of winning the jackpot (1/250) and the probability of winning the time-saving symbol (1/40) when the special symbol lottery is executed are the same as in the normal state. However, the time-saving type that is set when the time-saving symbol is won is different, and when the time-saving symbol is won during the second time-saving state a, the ratio of the time-saving type (time-saving group A) that sets the second time-saving state a to be set is 30%, and the ratio of the time-saving type (time-saving group B) that sets the first time-saving state to be set is 70%.

In addition, if the time-saving symbol is won during the second time-saving state b, the rate at which the second time-saving state b is set is configured to be 100%. In other words, the second time-saving state (second time-saving state b) that is set by the granting of the ceiling bonus is set to a second time-saving state (second time-saving state a) that is set by the time-saving symbol winning or the like in a second time-saving state (second time-saving state a) with a number of time-saving times less than the number of time-saving times remaining in the second time-saving state (second time-saving state a) that has already been set based on the time-saving symbol winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state, and this can prevent the play period of the second time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, from becoming shorter.

In this way, in the second time-saving state a and the second time-saving state b, in which the same game content is played, the second time-saving state b can increase the advantage of the benefit given when the time-saving pattern is won compared to the second time-saving state a, and the second time-saving state becomes advantageous to the player. Therefore, a relatively advantageous benefit (second time-saving state b) can be given to a player who plays for a long time without winning a jackpot. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state given by the ceiling benefit from ending in a short time (without drawing special patterns for the set number of time-saving times), which reduces the player's motivation to play. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play in the hope of setting a second time-saving state that is more advantageous than the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the time-saving pattern.

In the 43rd control example, when the time-saving symbol is won during the second time-saving state b, the second time-saving state b is set. However, without being limited to this, the time-saving type (time-saving group B) in which the first time-saving state is set and the time-saving type (time-saving group A) in which the second time-saving state is set may be selected, and when the time-saving type in which the second time-saving state is set is selected, the second time-saving state b in which the number of time-saving times is set greater than the number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state b granted as the ceiling privilege is set may be set. In this case, the selection ratio of the time-saving group A and the time-saving group B is the same when the time-saving symbol is won during the second time-saving state a and when the time-saving symbol is won during the second time-saving state b, and the number of time-saving times set when the time-saving group A is selected may be different, and each process executed in each game state may be standardized.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, even if the second time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the second time-saving state a (low probability state of normal patterns) is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the second time-saving state c in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set. In this case, even if the second time-saving state c is set, it is preferable that the game content during the second time-saving state c is the same as the game content of the second time-saving state a or the second time-saving state b described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing in the second time-saving state to understand the type of the second time-saving state, even if the second time-saving state c is set.

Furthermore, in this case, the normal state, the second time-saving state a, or the second time-saving state c can be set after the end of the jackpot game, and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be set so that the same left-hand play is executed regardless of which game state is set, making it difficult for the player to understand the type of game state that is set, and the advantageous degree of the bonus granted based on the winning can be made different when the game state at the time of winning the time-saving pattern or the jackpot is the normal state, the second time-saving state a, or the second time-saving state c. For example, when the time-saving pattern is won when the second time-saving state c is set, it is preferable to configure it so that the first time-saving state (the time-saving state advantageous to the player) is more easily set than other game states.

In other words, the normal state and the second time-saving state a are game states that can be set even when a game is being played without winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, whereas the second time-saving state c is a game state that can only be set after a jackpot game ends, and is therefore a game state that cannot be set unless a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (a game state that is more difficult to set than other game states). In this way, by making it easier to grant a player a more advantageous bonus when a time-saving symbol is won during a period in which a game state that is difficult to set is set (a period in which the second time-saving state c is set) than when a time-saving symbol is won during other periods (a normal state, a period in which the second time-saving state a is set), it is possible to make the player interested in the timing of the winning of the time-saving symbol. In addition, even if the first time-saving state (right-hitting game state) is not set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

As explained above, it is easier for the player to set a favorable time-saving state when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state than when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a player playing left-handed to play while keeping in mind the currently set game state.

Here, the normal state in which left-hand play is performed and the contents of the background mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the second time-saving state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1260, when the normal state is set, either the "unfavorable mode" or the "normal mode" can be set as the background mode, and when the second time-saving state is set, either the "normal mode" or the "favorable mode" can be set as the background mode. Then, a background mode transition lottery is executed based on the end of the second time-saving state and the setting of the normal state, and when the background mode transition lottery is won, a background mode corresponding to the normal state can be set.

In other words, when the "unfavorable mode" is set as the background mode, the player can tell that the current game state is the normal state, and when the "normal mode" is set, it is difficult for the player to tell whether the current game state is the normal state or the second time-saving state, and when the "favorable mode" is set, the player can tell that the second time-saving state is set, or that the second time-saving state has ended and the player has not won the background mode transition lottery.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the currently set game state in a situation where the same game method (left-handed play) is used and the normal state or the second time-saving state is set, in which the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability of winning the time-saving pattern are the same.

Next, the first time-saving state will be explained. This first time-saving state is a game state in which a player is more advantageous when playing right-handed games in which a game ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 and a second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is executed than when playing left-handed games. In the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the first time-saving state can be set to two types of game states: a first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) that is set after a jackpot game ends (after the jackpot game in which jackpot A is set ends), and a first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, high frequency state of opening) that is set based on the winning of a time-saving symbol. However, regardless of which trigger the first time-saving state is set, the content of the game executed during right-handed games does not differ significantly, so they will be explained together.

The second special pattern lottery is different from the first special pattern lottery described above in that it is configured so that the judgment of the winning of the time-saving pattern is not executed, but the judgment of the winning of the small prize (the probability of winning the small prize is 1/25) is executed. When the small prize is won in the second special pattern lottery, a small prize game is executed to open the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 1253), and the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small prize game passes through a specific area (V gate), and the big prize game is executed after the small prize game ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area (V gate). In other words, when the small prize is won in the second special pattern lottery, the right to play the big prize game can be easily acquired by continuing to play the appropriate game during the small prize game.

By configuring it in this way, the condition for acquiring the right to play a jackpot game in the first special pattern lottery was only to win the jackpot (probability of winning the jackpot 1/250), whereas in the second special pattern lottery, in addition to winning the jackpot (probability of winning the jackpot 1/250), it also includes winning a small jackpot (probability of winning a small jackpot 1/25). Therefore, in terms of ease of playing a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery is a special pattern lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery.

In addition, when the first time-saving state is set, whether the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A, and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. In other words, the system is configured to grant a more advantageous bonus to the player when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the first time-saving state than when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state or the second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed while the first time-saving state is set and a jackpot is won, it is possible to prevent a game state other than the first time-saving state from being set after the jackpot play ends, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, when the number of times that the special symbol lottery is stuck (the number of times that the special symbol lottery that is executed consecutively after losing) in the normal state or when the second time-saving state is set reaches a specific number (999 times), the second time-saving state (40 times of time-saving) can be set as a ceiling bonus. In addition, as the second time-saving state that can be set when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, a second time-saving state with fewer times of time-saving than the ceiling bonus and a second time-saving state with more times of time-saving than the ceiling bonus can be set.

Therefore, depending on the time-saving situation (remaining number of time-saving times) of the second time-saving state set at the time when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, it is possible to create cases where it is advantageous for the player to be granted a ceiling bonus, such as when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met when the normal state is set, or when the remaining number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state is less than the number of time-saving times granted as the ceiling bonus, and cases where it is disadvantageous for the player to be granted a ceiling bonus, such as when the remaining number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state is more than the number of time-saving times granted as the ceiling bonus.

By configuring it in this way, players do not simply play in the hope of receiving a ceiling bonus, but rather play in the hope of receiving a ceiling bonus as a bonus that is advantageous to the player, which makes it easier for players to become interested in the results of the special symbol lottery that is held just before the conditions for receiving the ceiling bonus are met.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 43rd control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 43rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1261 to Fig. 1269. The 43rd control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, but otherwise the 43rd control example is the same. The same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example described above, regardless of the set game state, the first special pattern lottery is configured to allow a time-saving pattern judgment to be executed in addition to a big win judgment, and the second special pattern lottery is configured to allow a small win judgment to be executed in addition to a big win judgment, whereas in the 43rd control example, the content of the judgment executed during the special pattern lottery according to each special pattern type is the same as in the 40th control example described above, but differs in that the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state is configured so that a time-saving pattern judgment is not executed.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example, when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing a time-saving symbol determination is executed, the execution of the time-saving symbol determination is determined according to the set game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the lottery result of the special symbol lottery different depending on the set game state, and it is possible to provide a game that does not get boring quickly by providing a variety of lottery results to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent the first time-saving state from ending due to the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the first time-saving state is set in a state where the execution right of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reserved) has been acquired, and the first special symbol lottery executed in a state where the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) has not been acquired. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first time-saving state from ending without executing the second special symbol lottery despite the first time-saving state being set, and the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example described above, when a time-saving pattern is determined in the special pattern lottery (when the time-saving pattern is won), only the second time-saving state (the second time-saving state in the 43rd control example) in which left-handed play is advantageous to the player can be set. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example, when a time-saving pattern is won, either the second time-saving state or the first time-saving state can be set. Furthermore, it is different in that the number of time-saving times set when the time-saving pattern is won can be made different depending on the game state at the time when the time-saving pattern is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the content of the game state set based on the time-saving pattern being won, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 40th control example, the time-saving end conditions for ending the set time-saving state can be set based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, the number of times the small win game is executed, and the number of times the normal win game is executed, whereas in the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the time-saving end conditions can be set based on the total number of special pattern lotteries, which is the sum of the number of times the first special pattern lottery is executed and the number of times the second special pattern lottery is executed, and based on the number of times the second special pattern lottery is executed.

First, the configuration of ROM 202 possessed by MPU 201 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 1261 to Fig. 1266. Fig. 1261 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in this 43rd control example. As shown in Fig. 1261 (a), the configuration of ROM 202 in this 43rd control example is different from the configuration of ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see Fig. 1159 (a)) in that the first win random number table 202aj is replaced with first win random number 43 table 202Aa, the big win type selection table 202bj is replaced with big win type selection 43 table 202Ab, the second win random number table 202cj is replaced with second win random number 43 table 202Aa, and the second win random number table 202cj is replaced with second win random number 43 table 202Aa. c, in that it has a fluctuation pattern selection 43 table 202Ad instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202dj, a time-saving granting 43 table 202Ae instead of the time-saving granting table 202ej, a small win type selection 43 table 202Af instead of the small win type selection table 202fj, a time-saving type selection 43 table 202ja instead of the time-saving type selection table 202ja, and in that it has deleted the normal win type selection table 202jb. All other elements are the same, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

Next, referring to Fig. 1262 (a) and (b), the first winning random number 43 table 202Aa in this 43rd control example will be described. This first winning random number 43 table 202Aa is a data table referenced when determining the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, and a big winning judgment value, a small winning judgment value, and a time-saving symbol judgment value are specified in correspondence with the first winning random number counter value C1 (0 to 65535) used to judge the special symbol lottery. More specifically, it has different data tables according to the type of special symbol lottery (special symbol type), and has a special symbol 1 random number 43 table 202Aa1 referenced when judging the first special symbol lottery, and a special symbol 2 random number 43 table 202Aa2 referenced when judging the second special symbol lottery.

Figure 1262 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of special pattern 1 random number 43 table 202Aa1 in this 43rd control example, and Figure 1262 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of special pattern 2 random number 43 table 202Aa2 in this 43rd control example. As shown in Figure 1262 (a), special pattern 1 random number 43 table 202Aa1 differs from the above-mentioned special pattern 1 random number table 202aj1 (see Figure 1160 (a)) in that the range of the first winning random number counter C1 value that is determined to be a jackpot win is different from the range of the first winning random number counter C1 value that is determined to be a time-saving pattern win. The rest of the contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1262(a), in the special pattern 1 random number 43 table 202Aa1 in this 43rd control example, 260 random number values (counter values) from "0 to 259" are defined as the range of random number values (values of the first win random number counter C1) that are determined to be a big win, and 1620 random number values (counter values) from "260 to 1879" are defined as the range of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a time-saving pattern win. On the other hand, no random number values are defined as being determined to be a small win.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65,535" that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be jackpots is 260, so the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol is approximately 1/250 (260/65,536). Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be jackpots in the lottery for the time-saving symbol is 1,620, so the probability of winning the time-saving symbol in the lottery for the first special symbol is approximately 1/40 (1,620/65,536).

Next, referring to FIG. 1262(b), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2 will be described. FIG. 1162(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2. As shown in FIG. 1162(b), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2 in this 43rd control example, 260 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 259" are specified as the range of random number values (values of the first win random number counter C1) that are determined to be a big win, and 2620 random number values (counter values) of "260 to 2879" are specified as the range of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a small win. On the other hand, no random number values are specified as being determined to be a time-saving pattern win.

Of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a big win is 260, so the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/250 (260/65,536), just like the lottery for the first special symbol. Also, of the 65,536 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win is 2620, so the probability of winning a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is approximately 1/25 (2620/65,536).

Next, referring to FIG. 1262(c), the details of the jackpot type selection 43 table 202Ab in this 43rd control example will be described. FIG. 1262(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 43 table 202Ab. This jackpot type selection 43 table 202Ab is a data table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, similar to the jackpot type selection table 202bj (see FIG. 1160(c)) in the above-mentioned 43rd control example. As shown in FIG. 1262(c), the jackpot type selection 43 table 202Ab in this 43rd control example specifies two types of jackpot types for the first special symbol, jackpot A43 and jackpot B43, and specifies one type of jackpot type for the second special symbol, jackpot A43.

As shown in FIG. 1262(c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "jackpot A43" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot B43" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 99". "Jackpot A43" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the first time-saving state is set with 10,000 times of time-saving (number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed) after the jackpot ends. "Jackpot B43" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the second time-saving state is set with 100 times of time-saving (number of times the special symbol lottery is executed) after the jackpot ends. For this reason, "jackpot A43" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player in terms of the number of rounds than "jackpot B43". In addition, in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, "jackpot A43" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B43."

Of the 100 random number values (counter values) between 0 and 99 that the first winning type counter C2 can take, 10 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A43" and 90 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B43". Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A43" will be set is 10%, and the probability that "jackpot B43" will be set is 90%.

Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state or the second time-saving state, there is only a 10% chance of transitioning to the most advantageous first time-saving state. Note that if a jackpot is won in the first time-saving state, a transition to the first time-saving state will occur even if the jackpot type is "jackpot B43." In other words, in the first time-saving state, winning a jackpot creates an advantageous gaming state in which the most advantageous first time-saving state is always set again.

As shown in FIG. 1262(c), as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, "jackpot A43" is defined in correspondence with the entire range of possible values of the first jackpot type counter C2 (the range of "0 to 99"). This "jackpot A43" is the same as the "jackpot A43" set as the jackpot type for the first special symbol described above, so a description of it will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1263(a), the details of the variation pattern selection 43 table 202Ad in this 43rd control example will be described. This variation pattern selection 43 table 202Ad is a data table that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed, similar to the variation pattern selection table 202dj (see FIG. 1161(b)) in the above-mentioned 40th control example. FIG. 1263(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this variation pattern selection 43 table 202Ad.

As shown in FIG. 1263(a), the variation pattern selection 43 table 202Ad in this 43rd control example is composed of at least a normal 43 table 202Ad1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol is drawn in the normal state or the second time-saving state, and a time-saving 43 table 202Ad2 that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol is drawn in the first time-saving state. First, the details of the normal 43 table 202Ad1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1263(b).

Figure 1263 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal 43 table 202Ad1 in this 43rd control example. As shown in Figure 1263 (b), the normal 43 table 202Ad1 specifies different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) corresponding to the special symbol type used in the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, it is configured so that different fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time can be determined depending on the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 139", "False Miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the range of "140 to 149", "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds for the range of "150 to 179", and "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds for the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 29", "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds for the range of "30 to 189", and "Special reach" with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds for the range of "190 to 198".

Furthermore, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is a "time-saving symbol," the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the full range of "0 to 198" to set a "Super Reach" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds.

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery in which the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the normal 43 table 202Ad1, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more likely to be determined when the lottery result is a miss than when the lottery result is something other than a miss (jackpot or time-saving symbol), and a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to result in the special symbol lottery being a jackpot or time-saving symbol. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a player playing in a normal state from experiencing a long period of special symbol fluctuation with a miss lottery result, which would result in an extremely small number of special symbol lotteries being executed per unit time and thus reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, when the number of times special pattern lotteries are executed per unit time decreases, i.e., when special pattern variations are executed for a long period of time, the anticipation of winning (a big win, a time-saving pattern) can be increased, and a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be prevented.

Furthermore, in this 43rd control example, when the game state in which left-hand play is performed, i.e., the normal state or the second time-saving state, is set, the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery is determined by referring to the normal 43 table 202Ad1. This makes it possible to prevent the player from predicting the current game state based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that indicates the result of the special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example, the same fluctuation pattern table (normal 43 table 202Ad1) is referenced in the normal state and the second time-saving state to determine the fluctuation pattern, but this is not limited to this. A fluctuation pattern table with some different provisions may be referenced in the second time-saving state compared to the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the normal state. In this case, it is preferable to specify in the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the second time-saving state that a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time that cannot be selected in the normal state is selected with a low probability (for example, 1% when a miss is won). By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to understand the game state by the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern fluctuation, so that the player can be interested not only in the result of the special pattern lottery but also in the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Win" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value from "0 to 198", and if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss (including small win)", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Non-win" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value from "0 to 198".

In addition, in this 43rd control example, as in the above-mentioned 40th control example, even if a normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state or the second time-saving state and a normal pattern win is won, normal pattern win A is always executed, in which the opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) of the electric device 640a is set so that it is impossible (difficult) to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game, so even if a normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640.

Therefore, in this 43rd control example, a situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state or the second time-saving state is a situation in which the game state transitions to the normal state or the second time-saving state while the right to execute the lottery for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2) acquired during the first time-saving state is held, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired. This situation is more likely to occur when a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 1 time) is set as the time-saving end condition for the first time-saving state (the number of times the lottery for the second special symbol is executed) than when a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 10,000 times) is set. That is, when the first time-saving state is set, the second special pattern lottery is executed, which is easier to obtain the right to play a jackpot game (winning a jackpot (chance of winning 1/250), winning a small jackpot (chance of winning 1/25)) than the first special pattern lottery. Therefore, when the first time-saving state with a large number of time-saving times is set, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed before the time-saving end condition is met. When the first time-saving state with a small number of time-saving times is set, the time-saving end condition is more likely to be met before the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, in particular, when a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 1 time) (number of times the second special pattern lottery is executed) is set as the time-saving end condition for the first time-saving state, it is more likely to occur than when a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 10,000 times) is set.

In this way, when a special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) for a specific special pattern type (second special pattern) is executed in a specific game state (normal state, second time-saving state), a variation pattern is determined in which the same length of variation time is set regardless of the lottery result, so that the presentation period of the specific presentation executed during the special pattern variation can be unified regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 1264, the details of the time-saving 43 table 202Ad2 will be described. FIG. 1264 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving 43 table 202Ad2. As shown in FIG. 1264, in the time-saving 43 table 202Ad2, when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss", the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "Short Miss" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198", when the lottery result is "Big Win", the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "Short Win" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198", when the lottery result is "Time-saving symbol", the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "Short Hit" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1264, the stipulations for the second special symbol are the same as those in the normal 43 table 202Ad1 (see FIG. 1263(b)). That is, when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Big win", a "Win" fluctuation time of 10 seconds is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value from "0 to 198", and when the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "Miss (including small win)", a "Non-win" fluctuation time of 10 seconds is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value from "0 to 198".

These regulations make it possible to fix the time that the first special symbol changes during the first time-saving state to 5 seconds, and to fix the time that the second special symbol changes during the first time-saving state to 10 seconds. Therefore, as described above in FIG. 1258, by fixing the time that the second special symbol changes during the chance zone (first time-saving state), it is possible to fix the presentation period during the first time-saving state every time.

In addition, a situation in which the first special symbol lottery is executed in the first time-saving state may occur when the first time-saving state is set in a state in which the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reserved) has been acquired. In this case, after the first time-saving state is set, the first special symbol lottery based on the already acquired special symbol 1 reserved will be executed until the player executes a right-hand play and acquires the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved). Here, in this 43rd control example, when the first time-saving state is set, a time-saving end condition that is established based on the total number of special symbol lotteries and a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery (number of special symbol 2 lotteries) are set as the time-saving end condition, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the remaining number of time-saving times (remaining number of special symbol 2 lotteries) until the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol 2 lotteries is established, as shown in FIG. 1258 (a).

As shown in FIG. 1257, when the first special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the first time-saving state is set, the variable period (standby period) of the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is used to execute a time-saving count notification effect to notify the player of the time-saving end condition (number of special symbol 2 lotteries) corresponding to the first time-saving state currently set. By configuring it in this way, the content of the first time-saving state currently set can be notified to the player using the period (first special symbol variable period) from when the first time-saving state is set to when the second special symbol lottery is executed, thereby providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Furthermore, immediately after the first time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition (number of times for the remaining special symbol 2 drawing) corresponding to the first time-saving state is displayed, and compared to the case where the first special symbol drawing is executed while the time-saving end condition (number of times for the remaining special symbol 2 drawing) is displayed, the number of times for indicating the time-saving end condition is not subtracted even though the special symbol drawing is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand. Also, as shown in FIG. 1264, the time-saving 43 table 202Ad2 referenced during the first time-saving state is configured to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, regardless of the result of the first special symbol drawing. Therefore, the performance period of the performance executed during the waiting period (see FIG. 1257) can be fixed.

In addition, if the first special pattern drawing executed after the first time-saving state is set is the second special pattern drawing, the above-mentioned waiting period (first special pattern variation period during the first time-saving state) is not set, and the time-saving count notification display is not executed, and the display screen in the chance zone described above is displayed in FIG. 1258. In this case, the value of the remaining time-saving count (remaining special pattern 2 drawing count) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is subtracted each time the second special pattern drawing is executed, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, in the first time-saving state, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the chance zone described above in FIG. 1258, for example, if the right-hand play executed during the first time-saving state is temporarily interrupted and the right-hand play is executed again, the game ball is mistakenly thrown into the first ball entrance 64, and the first special symbol lottery is executed, the display screen for showing the result of the previous second special symbol lottery is configured to continue to be displayed until the special symbol 1 variation is stopped and displayed. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand that the first special symbol lottery has been executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a new special symbol lottery from being executed without subtracting the remaining number of time-saving times displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and to prevent the player from playing a game that is difficult to understand.

In this case, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, the display screen for showing the result of the previous second special symbol lottery is configured to switch to a display screen showing a jackpot win in accordance with the timing at which the result of the first special symbol lottery that won the jackpot is stopped and displayed. By configuring it in this way, the jackpot win is suddenly announced when a new second special symbol lottery has not been executed (when the remaining number of time-saving plays has not been deducted), providing the player with an unexpected and innovative gameplay.

Next, referring to FIG. 1265, the time-saving grant 43 table 202Ae in this 43rd control example will be described in detail. This time-saving grant 43 table 202Ae is a data table that is referenced when setting a time-saving state, in the same way as the time-saving grant table 202ej (see FIG. 1162(b)) in this 40th control example described above, in order to set the end conditions of the time-saving state according to the trigger for setting the time-saving state. FIG. 1265 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving grant 43 table 202Ae.

As shown in FIG. 1265, in the time-saving grant 43 table 202Ae in this 43rd control example, each jackpot type and time-saving pattern type and the value of each counter referenced when determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established are specified in correspondence with each game state at the time of winning. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1265, in this 43rd control example, two counters, a time-saving counter 203h and a special pattern 2 counter 203Ab, are provided as counters for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established. The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of times the special pattern is drawn (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) executed after the time-saving state is set is established, and the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of times the second special pattern is drawn (number of times the special pattern 2 is drawn) executed after the time-saving state is set is established.

As shown in FIG. 1265, in this 43rd control example, there are two types of jackpots, "jackpot A43" and "jackpot B43", and seven types of time-saving pattern types, "time-saving pattern A1" to "time-saving pattern B3", and the time-saving granting 43 table 202Ae specifies the values of the time-saving counter 203h and the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab (i.e., the first end condition and the second end condition) in correspondence with each jackpot type and each time-saving pattern type.

As shown in FIG. 1265, for the jackpot type "jackpot A43", the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10000" and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab is set to "10000" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, when "jackpot A43" is won, the first end condition is set to a total number of times that the special symbols change 10000 times, and the second end condition is set to a number of times that the second special symbols change 10000 times. Note that after the end of the jackpot game in which "jackpot A43" is set, the first time-saving state is set, so when "jackpot A43" is set, the time-saving end conditions (first end condition, second end condition) are not met, and the next jackpot game will be executed before the first time-saving state ends.

As shown in FIG. 1265, for "jackpot B43", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the second time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", and if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10000" and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab is set to "10000". If a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state or the second time-saving state and "jackpot B43" is set, the second time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the total number of special symbol changes is set to 100 as the first end condition of the second time-saving state. Note that if the second time-saving state is set, it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery even if a right-hand hit game is performed, so the value for setting the second end condition (the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203Aa) is not specified.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state and "jackpot B43" is set, the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the first end condition of the first time-saving state is set to a total number of times the special symbols change 10,000 times, and the second end condition is set to a total of 10,000 times the second special symbol changes.

In other words, if "jackpot B43" is set during the first time-saving state, the same time-saving state as when "jackpot A43" is set (first time-saving state with 10,000 time-savings) is set. By configuring in this way, when the first time-saving state is set, even if a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery for any special pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern), the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, which will continue until the next jackpot game is played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state from being set based on the jackpot being won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 1265, the contents of the time-saving end condition that is granted when a time-saving pattern is selected in the special pattern lottery will be described in detail. In this 43rd control example, when a time-saving pattern is selected in the special pattern lottery, it is possible to determine the time-saving pattern type to be one of the time-saving pattern types included in the time-saving pattern group A (time-saving pattern group A) for which the second time-saving state is set, and the time-saving pattern group B (time-saving pattern group B) for which the first time-saving state is set.

First, for the "time-saving pattern A1" among the time-saving pattern group A, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern A1" is won, the number of times the special pattern changes (the total number of times the special pattern is drawn) is set to 1 as the first end condition of the second time-saving state. Here, in this 43rd control example, regardless of which game state is set, the determination of the time-saving pattern winning is executed in the first special pattern drawing. Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern A1" is won in the first special pattern drawing executed in the normal state, the game state can be transitioned from the normal state to the second time-saving state, so that a special benefit advantageous to the player is granted. On the other hand, if the "time-saving pattern A1" is won in the first special pattern lottery that is executed in the second time-saving state and the first time-saving state, regardless of the time-saving situation at the time of winning (the type of time-saving that has been set and the number of time-savings remaining), the second time-saving state with one time of time-saving will be set, and the player will be given a disadvantageous benefit.

In other words, in this 43rd control example, even if the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, the player can be granted an unfavorable benefit, so that the player can always play with a sense of danger, even while a favorable game state (for example, the first time-saving state) is set. As described above, in this 43rd control example, the time-saving symbol determination is only possible in the first special symbol lottery, and the time-saving symbol determination is not possible in the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, mainly in which the second special symbol lottery is executed, if the first time-saving state is set while the special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, for example, the time-saving symbol is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state, and the first time-saving state is set, it is easier for the first special symbol lottery to be executed during the first time-saving state than if the first time-saving state is set without the special symbol 1 reservation being acquired, for example, a jackpot game is executed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, and the first time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is more likely that the first time-saving state will be forcibly ended based on the winning of the time-saving symbol without the time-saving end condition of the first time-saving state being established, and therefore it can be said to be a first time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in a situation where multiple jackpot games are being played based on the results of the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the first time-saving state, right-hand play continues for a long period of time, making it extremely unlikely that special symbol 1 will remain on hold. Therefore, the possibility of the first time-saving state being forcibly ended based on a time-saving symbol win is low, making this a first time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the longer play continues during the first time-saving state, the more difficult it becomes to end the first time-saving state, making it easier to grant advantageous benefits to players who have been in the first time-saving state for a long period of time.

Next, for the "time-saving pattern A2", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set, and if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set. More specifically, the value "10" of the time-saving counter 203h is set for the normal state at the time of winning, and the value "20" of the time-saving counter 203h is set for the second time-saving state at the time of winning. On the other hand, the value "100" of the time-saving counter 203h and the value "1" of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab are set for the first time-saving state at the time of winning.

In other words, if the "time-saving pattern A2" is won during the normal state, the second time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 10, and if the "time-saving pattern A2" is won during the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 20, and if the "time-saving pattern A2" is won during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 100 and the second end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern 2 changes is 1.

Next, for the "time-saving pattern A3", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set, and if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set. More specifically, the value "30" of the time-saving counter 203h is set for the normal state at the time of winning, and the value "50" of the time-saving counter 203h is set for the second time-saving state at the time of winning. On the other hand, the value "100" of the time-saving counter 203h and the value "5" of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab are set for the first time-saving state at the time of winning.

In other words, if the "time-saving pattern A3" is won during the normal state, the second time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 30, if the "time-saving pattern A3" is won during the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 50, and if the "time-saving pattern A3" is won during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 100 and the second end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern 2 changes is 5.

Next, for the "time-saving pattern A4", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set, and if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set. More specifically, the value "70" of the time-saving counter 203h is set for the normal state at the time of winning, and the value "100" of the time-saving counter 203h is set for the second time-saving state at the time of winning. On the other hand, the value "100" of the time-saving counter 203h and the value "10" of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab are set for the first time-saving state at the time of winning.

In other words, if the "time-saving pattern A4" is won during the normal state, the second time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 70 times, if the "time-saving pattern A4" is won during the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 100 times, and if the "time-saving pattern A4" is won during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set with the first end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern changes (combined number of times the special pattern is drawn) is 100 times and the second end condition stipulating that the number of times the special pattern 2 changes is 10 times.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example has four types of time-saving pattern types (time-saving patterns A1 to A4) as the time-saving pattern group A for which the second time-saving state is set if a time-saving pattern is won in a special pattern lottery executed in the normal state or the second time-saving state, and is configured so that a time-saving end condition (first end condition) that differs in ease of establishment is set according to the type of time-saving pattern that is set. And, regardless of the type of time-saving pattern, the time-saving end condition (first end condition) that is less likely to be established is set when a time-saving pattern is won in the second time-saving state than when a time-saving pattern is won in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, when a time-saving symbol is won during the second time-saving state, it becomes easier to set a new number of time-saving times that is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times already set for the second time-saving state.

In addition, when the time-saving pattern is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state and the time-saving pattern group A is set, the first time-saving state can be set with the time-saving pattern type (A2 to A4) other than some of the time-saving pattern types (time-saving pattern A1). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state from being set based on the execution of the first special pattern lottery during the first time-saving state. In addition, when some of the time-saving pattern types (time-saving pattern A1) are set, even if the end condition of the first time-saving state is not established, a new second time-saving state is set, resulting in a game result that is disadvantageous to the player, so a penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an inappropriate game, such as continuing to execute the first special pattern lottery during the first time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the time-saving pattern group B will be explained. In this 43rd control example, the time-saving pattern group B has three types of time-saving pattern types (time-saving pattern B1 to time-saving pattern B3), and when any of the time-saving pattern types (time-saving pattern B1 to B3) is won, the first time-saving state is set regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 1265, the end conditions of the first time-saving state are specified to be different depending on the time-saving pattern type that is set, and specifically, when the "time-saving pattern B1" is won and the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "100" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is "1" are specified. Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern B1" is won in the normal state, the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) is set to 100 times as the first end condition of the first time-saving state, and the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern 2 changes) is set to 1 time as the second end condition of the first time-saving state. In addition, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "100" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is "8" for the game state at the time of winning being the second time-saving state. Therefore, when the "time-saving pattern B1" is won in the second time-saving state, the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) is set to 100 times as the first end condition of the first time-saving state, and the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern 2 changes) is set to 8 times as the second end condition of the first time-saving state. Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab is set to "10". Therefore, when the "time-saving symbol B1" is won in the first time-saving state, the first end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the special symbol changes (total number of times the special symbol is drawn) 100 times, and the second end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the second special symbol changes (number of times the special symbol 2 changes) 10 times.

Next, for the "time-saving pattern B2" and the game state at the time of winning being the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is set to "5". For this reason, when the "time-saving pattern B2" is won in the normal state, the first end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of special pattern draws) 100 times, and the second end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of special pattern 2 changes) 5 times. In addition, for the game state at the time of winning being the second time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is set to "15". Therefore, if the "time-saving pattern B2" is won in the second time-saving state, the first end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) 100 times, and the second end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern 2 changes) 15 times. Furthermore, for the game state at the time of winning being the first time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is set to "10". Therefore, if the "time-saving pattern B2" is won in the first time-saving state, the first end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) 100 times, and the second end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern 2 changes) 10 times.

Next, for the "time-saving pattern B3" and the game state at the time of winning being the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is set to "8". For this reason, when the "time-saving pattern B3" is won in the normal state, the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) is set to 100 as the first end condition of the first time-saving state, and the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern 2 changes) is set to 8 as the second end condition of the first time-saving state. Also, for the game state at the time of winning being the second time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1000" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is set to "100". Therefore, if the "time-saving pattern B3" is won in the second time-saving state, the first end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) 1000 times, and the second end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern 2 changes) 100 times. Furthermore, for the game state at the time of winning being the first time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "1000" and the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is "100". Therefore, if the "time-saving pattern B3" is won in the first time-saving state, the first end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the special pattern changes (total number of times the special pattern is drawn) 1000 times, and the second end condition of the first time-saving state is set to the number of times the second special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern 2 changes) 100 times.

Next, referring to FIG. 1266(a), the details of the small win type selection table 202Af in this 43rd control example will be described. FIG. 1266(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 202Af. As shown in FIG. 1266(a), the small win type "small win A43" is associated with the entire range of the value of the small win type counter C5 from "0 to 99". Here, in the small win game that is executed when "small win A43" is won, the V winning device 650 is configured to be opened so that the game ball can easily enter the specific area (V gate) 650e3 by simply continuing to play right-handed during the execution of the small win game.

If the game ball enters the specific area (V gate) 650e3 during a small win game, the right to play a big win game (Big Win A43) is acquired, and the big win game is executed after the small win game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1266(b), the time-saving type selection 43 table 202Ah in this 43rd control example will be described in detail. This time-saving type selection 43 table 202Ah is a data table that is referenced to determine the type of time-saving pattern when a time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery, similar to the time-saving type selection table 202ja (see FIG. 1163(b)) in the above-mentioned 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1266(b), the time-saving type selection 43 table 202Ah specifies the range of values of the first winning type counter C2 corresponding to each of the seven types of time-saving pattern types, "time-saving pattern A1" to "time-saving pattern B3".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1266(b), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49" and the time-saving pattern type is specified as "time-saving pattern A1", in the range of "50 to 59", the time-saving pattern type is specified as "time-saving pattern A2", in the range of "60 to 64", the time-saving pattern type is specified as "time-saving pattern A3", in the range of "65 to 69", the time-saving pattern type is specified as "time-saving pattern A4", in the range of "70 to 94", the time-saving pattern type is specified as "time-saving pattern B1", in the range of "95 to 98", the time-saving pattern type is specified as "time-saving pattern B2", and in the value of "99", the time-saving pattern type is specified as "time-saving pattern B3".

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving state or the first time-saving state, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29" and is specified as the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern A1", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "30 to 39" and is specified as the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern A2", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "40 to 44" and is specified as the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern A3", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "45 to 49" and is specified as the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern A4", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 79" and is specified as the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern B1", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 89" and is specified as the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern B2", and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99" and is specified as the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern B3".

Next, referring to FIG. 1261(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of this 43rd control example will be described in detail. FIG. 1261(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 43rd control example. As shown in FIG. 1261(b), the RAM 203 in this 43rd control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see FIG. 1159(b)) only in that a special chart 2 counter 203Ab is provided instead of the normal power operation counter 203ja, and that a special chart lottery counter 203Aa and a ceiling reached flag 203Ac are newly provided. The other configurations are the same, and the same components are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is a counter for determining the number of times a special symbol lottery has been performed, and is set to 0 when a jackpot game is played. The counter value is incremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is performed (see S702B in FIG. 1276). Based on the value of this special symbol lottery counter 203Aa, a determination is made as to whether or not the conditions for granting a ceiling bonus have been met (see S704B in FIG. 1276), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is "999" (S704B in FIG. 1276: Yes), the ceiling bonus is awarded.

The special symbol 2 counter 203Ab is a counter for determining the number of times the second special symbol lottery is performed, and when a second end condition that is established based on the number of times the second special symbol lottery is performed (number of special symbol 2 draws) is set as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state), a value corresponding to the number of special symbol 2 draws until the second end condition is established is set (see S226A in FIG. 1270). Then, the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a second special symbol variation is performed during the time-saving state (first time-saving state) in which the second end condition is set (see S609B in FIG. 1275). Based on the value of this special chart 2 counter 203Ab, a determination is made as to whether or not the time-saving end condition (second end condition) has been met (see S610B in FIG. 1275), and if it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab is 0 (S610B in FIG. 1275: Yes), it is determined that the second end condition has been met, and a process to end the time-saving state is executed.

The ceiling reached flag 203Ac is a flag for indicating that a ceiling bonus has been awarded, and is set to ON when it is determined in the ceiling update process 43 (see S252B in FIG. 1276) that a ceiling bonus will be awarded (S704B in FIG. 1276: Yes). It is set to OFF when a jackpot game is executed (see S251B in FIG. 1270).

In the 43rd control example, when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the previous jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (999 times), a ceiling privilege is granted in which the second time-saving state in which the number of time-saving times is 40 times is set regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. When the time-saving end condition of the second time-saving state set by the ceiling privilege is established, the normal state is set. Here, in the above-mentioned 13th control example, the ceiling privilege with a different degree of advantage can be granted in stages depending on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the jackpot game, but in the 43rd control example, the ceiling privilege is granted only once during the jackpot game. In other words, when the time-saving end condition of the second time-saving state set by the ceiling privilege is established and the normal state is set, the information for granting the ceiling privilege is not updated until the next jackpot game is executed.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from being given excessively advantageous benefits based on game results other than traditional gameplay objectives, such as aiming to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. In addition, when playing pachinko machine 10 in a normal state, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting whether or not the machine is in a normal state in which no ceiling benefit has been granted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1267(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 43rd control example will be described. FIG. 1267(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 43rd control example. As shown in FIG. 1267(a), the ROM 222 in this 43rd control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 40th control example (see FIG. 1164(a)) in that a background mode selection table 222Aa and a performance pattern selection table 222Ab have been added.

The background mode selection table 222Aa is a data table that is referenced to determine the background mode type (see FIG. 1254) during left-hand play, and is a data table that is referenced when a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state is selected in a special pattern lottery. Here, the details of this background mode selection table 222Aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 1268.

Figure 1268 is a diagram showing the contents of the background mode selection table 222Aa. As shown in Figure 1268, this background mode selection table 222Aa specifies various background modes corresponding to the game state when the time-saving symbol is won, the time-saving end condition (time-saving count) of the won second time-saving state, the pre-read result of the acquired reserved special symbol 1, and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1.

Here, in this 43rd control example, three types of background mode types can be set during the left-hand play state: "unfavorable mode," "normal mode," and "favorable mode." The background mode types are configured so that when "unfavorable mode" is set, it is most likely that the normal state will occur, and when "favorable mode" is set, it is most likely that the second time-saving state will occur. Therefore, in the background mode selection table 222Aa, which is referenced when a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state is won, each background mode type is specified so that it is difficult to set "unfavorable mode" and easy to set "favorable mode."

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is "normal state" and the second time-saving state with the time-saving count of "1" is set, the player already has the right to execute the first special symbol lottery that can be executed during the second time-saving state (special symbol 1 reserved), and if the pre-read result of the special symbol 1 reserved is a winning symbol (if there is a target winning reserved), the background mode type "favorable mode" is specified for the entire range "0 to 99" of the acquired first performance counter 223f1, and if there is no target winning reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0 to 79", the background mode type "unfavorable mode" is specified for the range of "80 to 84", and the background mode type "favorable mode" is specified for the range of "85 to 99".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state" and the second time-saving state with the number of time-saving times "10 to 29" is set, if there is a target hit reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" for the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value in the range "0 to 49", the background mode type "unfavorable mode" for the range "50 to 54", and the "favorable mode" for the range "55 to 99". If there is no target hit reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" for the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value in the range "0 to 49", the background mode type "unfavorable mode" for the range "50 to 54", and the "favorable mode" for the range "55 to 99".

Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state" and the second time-saving state with the number of time-saving times "from 30" is set, if there is a target hit reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" for the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value in the range "0 to 29", the background mode type "unfavorable mode" for the range "30 to 54", and the "favorable mode" for the range "55 to 99". When there is no target hit reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" for the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value in the range "0 to 29", the background mode type "unfavorable mode" for the range "30 to 34", and the "favorable mode" for the range "35 to 99".

On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning is the "second time-saving state" and the second time-saving state is set to "20 times", the player already has the right to execute the first special pattern lottery that can be executed during the second time-saving state (special pattern 1 reserved), and if the pre-read result of the special pattern 1 reserved is a winning combination (if there is a "target winning reserved"), the background mode type "advantageous mode" is specified for the entire possible range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 "0 to 99", and if there is no target winning reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0 to 9", the background mode type "unfavorable mode" is specified for the range of "10 to 14", and the background mode type "advantageous mode" is specified for the range of "15 to 99".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the "second time-saving state" and the second time-saving state is set to "50 times", if there is a target hit reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 from "0 to 4", the background mode type "unfavorable mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 from "5 to 14", and the "favorable mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 from "15 to 99".If there is no target hit reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 from "0 to 4", and the "favorable mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 from "5 to 99".

Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning is the "second time-saving state" and the second time-saving state is set to "100 times", if there is a target hit reserved, the background mode type "unfavorable mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0 to 29", and "favorable mode" is specified for the range of "30 to 99". If there is no target hit reserved, the background mode type "normal mode" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0 to 4", and "favorable mode" is specified for the range of "4 to 99".

The effect symbol selection table 222Ab is a data table that is referenced when determining the display mode of the effect symbol for indicating that the time-saving symbol for which the first time-saving state is set has been won, and the display mode of each effect symbol (time-saving symbol for effect) is specified in correspondence with the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 based on the game state when the time-saving symbol is won and the background mode type when the time-saving symbol is won.

Now, referring to FIG. 1269, the detailed contents of the effect symbol selection table 222Ab will be explained. FIG. 1269 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect symbol selection table 222Ab. As shown in FIG. 1269, the effect symbol selection table 222Ab defines the game state at the time of winning, the number of time-saving times to be set, the type of background mode to be set, and the type of symbol to be determined as the effect symbol corresponding to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is the "normal state", the first time-saving state with the time-saving count of "1" is set, and when the current background mode is the "unfavorable mode" or "normal mode", the effect pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 69", and the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of "70 to 99", and when the current background mode is the "favorable mode", the effect pattern "watermelon" is specified for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the "normal state", and the first time-saving state with the number of time-saving times set to "5" is set, and the current background mode is the "unfavorable mode" or "normal mode", the effect pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 49", and the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of "50 to 99", and when the current background mode is the "favorable mode", the effect pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99".

Furthermore, if the game state at the time of winning is the "normal state", the first time-saving state with the number of time-saving times set to "8", and the current background mode is the "unfavorable mode" or "normal mode", the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99", and if the current background mode is the "favorable mode", the effect pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99".

On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning is the "second time-saving state" and the first time-saving state with the number of time-saving times "8" is set, when the current background mode is the "unfavorable mode" or "normal mode", the effect pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 19", and the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "20 to 99", and when the current background mode is the "favorable mode", the effect pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 49", and the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "50 to 99".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the "second time-saving state" and the first time-saving state with the number of time-saving times "15" is set, and when the current background mode is the "unfavorable mode" or "normal mode", the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 89", and the effect pattern "carrot" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "90 to 99", and when the current background mode is the "favorable mode", the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 69", and the effect pattern "carrot" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "70 to 99".

Furthermore, if the game state at the time of winning is the "second time-saving state" and the first time-saving state with the number of time-saving times "100" is set, and if the current background mode is the "unfavorable mode" or "normal mode", the effect pattern "cherry" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 79", and the effect pattern "carrot" is specified for the range of "80 to 99", and if the current background mode is the "favorable mode", the effect pattern "carrot" is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value "0 to 99".

As explained above, in this 43rd control example, even when the first time-saving state of the same time-saving type is set, the player is notified that he or she has won the time-saving pattern with a different presentation pattern depending on the set background mode type. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state by combining the background mode type and the presentation pattern, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 43rd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1270 to Fig. 1276, the details of various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 43rd control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 43rd control example differs from the various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned 40th control example in that the contents of the process executed when the time-saving symbol is won and the contents of the process for granting the ceiling privilege are changed, and the other process contents are the same. More specifically, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 40th control example, the differences are that the special symbol change process 43 (see S104B in Fig. 1270) is provided instead of the special symbol change process 40 (see Fig. 1166), the time-saving update process 43 (see S224B in Fig. 1275) is provided instead of the time-saving update process 40 (see Fig. 1171), and the ceiling update process 43 (see S252B in Fig. 1276) is newly added. The rest of the processing is the same, and detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1270, the details of the special symbol change process 43 (S104B) in this 43rd control example will be described. FIG. 1270 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process 43 (S104B). This special symbol change process 43 (S104B) is a process for setting the display of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b while the special symbol is being displayed while changing, similar to the special symbol change process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the 40th control example described above.

In the special symbol variation process 43 (S104B) in this 43rd control example, the processes S201 to S207, S211 to S219, S221 to S223, S209A, S210A, S225A, and S226A are the same as the processes S201 to S207, S211 to S219, S221 to S223, S209A, S210A, S225A, and S226A in the special symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the above-mentioned 40th control example.

In the special symbol variation process 43 (S104B) in this 43rd control example, when the process of S219 is completed, a process is executed to reset the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the special symbol 1 counter 203Ab to 0 (S220B) as a process to start the jackpot game, and then the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to OFF (S251B), the process of S221 is executed, and this process is terminated. By executing the process of S251B, the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to OFF when the jackpot game is completed, so that the value of the special symbol selection counter 203Aa can be added in accordance with the number of times the special symbol selection is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 43 in this 43rd control example (see S104B in FIG. 1166), if it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result for the special symbol is not a jackpot (S218: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a time-saving symbol win (S225A), and if it is a time-saving symbol win (S225A: Yes), the time-saving end condition corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol that has been won this time is set for the time-saving counter 203h and the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab (S226A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S225A that the current lottery result for the special symbol is not a time-saving symbol win (S225A: No), the process proceeds to S222.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 43 in this 43rd control example (see S104B in FIG. 1166), if it is determined in the process of S222 that the current lottery result for the special symbol is not a small win (S222: No), or if the process of S223 is completed, the time-saving update process 43 is executed (S224B), and then the ceiling update process 43 is executed (S252B), and this process is terminated. Details of the time-saving update process 43 (S224B) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1275, and details of the ceiling update process 43 (S252B) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1276.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol determination process 43 (S209B) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1271. This special symbol determination process 43 (S209B) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example, and is a process for executing a lottery for special symbols, similar to the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example. Of the special symbol determination process 40 (S209A) in the 40th control example, each of the processes S301 to S305 is the same as each of the processes S301 to S305 in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example.

In addition, in the special symbol determination process 43 (see FIG. 1271) in this 43rd control example, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the lottery result for the special symbol is not a jackpot (S303: No), then the miss process 43 is executed (S311B) to execute control according to the type of miss, and this process ends. Details of this miss process 43 (S311B) will be described with reference to FIG. 1272.

Fig. 1272 is a flow chart showing this loss processing 43 (S311B). In this loss processing 43 (S311B), first, it is determined whether or not the current state is at the ceiling (S2101B). If it is determined that the current state is not at the ceiling (S2101B: No), it is then determined whether or not the lottery result for this special pattern is a time-saving pattern win (S2101A). If it is determined that the lottery result is a time-saving pattern win (S2101A: Yes), the time-saving pattern type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the time-saving pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101A that the current special symbol lottery result is not a time-saving symbol win (S2101A: No), or if it is determined in the process of ST2101B that it is at the ceiling (S2101B: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is a small win (S2103A). If it is determined that it is a small win (S2103A: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a small win (S2104A), the small win type corresponding to the value of the small win type counter C5 is set as the small win symbol to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (S2105A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2103A that the current special symbol lottery result is not a small win (S2103A: No), the processes of S2104A and S2105A are skipped and this process is terminated.

By executing this miss process 43 (S311B) (see FIG. 1272), if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (other than a jackpot), the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result can be appropriately set.

Next, referring to FIG. 1273, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A) in this 43rd control example will be described. FIG. 1273 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A). This special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 966) in the 32nd control example described above.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1273) in this 43rd control example, in each process of S401 to S408, the same process as each process of S401 to S408 in the fluctuation pattern selection process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 966) is executed. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1273) in this 43rd control example, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big win (S401: No), the failure time type determination process 40 for selecting a fluctuation pattern in the event of a miss (including a small win or a time-saving symbol win) is executed (S421A), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of this failure time type determination process 40 (S421A) will be described with reference to FIG. 1274.

Fig. 1274 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the type of loss (S421A). In the process for determining the type of loss (S421A), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a winning time-saving symbol (S2201A), and if it is determined that the winning time-saving symbol is a winning time-saving symbol (S2201A: Yes), the type of the time-saving symbol is determined by referring to the time-saving symbol type selection 43 table 202Ah (see Fig. 1266 (b)) (S2202A), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special pattern is not a time-saving pattern winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special pattern is a small win or not (S2203A), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S2203A: Yes), the small win type is determined by referring to the small win type selection 43 table 202Af (see FIG. 1266(a)) (S2204A), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2203A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special pattern is not a small win (i.e., a normal miss (complete miss)) (S2203A: No), the process of S2204A is skipped and this process ends as it is.

By executing this miss type determination process 40 (see FIG. 1274), if the result of the special pattern lottery is a time-saving pattern win or a small win, the time-saving pattern type or small win type can be appropriately determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 1275, the time-saving update process 43 (S224B) in this 43rd control example will be described in detail. This time-saving update process 43 (S224B) is a process executed in place of the time-saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171) in the 40th control example, and like the time-saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171), it updates various counter values for determining the time-saving end condition, and is a process for ending the time-saving state when it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met.

When the time-saving update process 43 (S224B) in this 43rd control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S601B), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S601B: No), the process is terminated since the time-saving state is not currently in effect. Also, in the process of S601B, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S601B: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S602B), a remaining time-saving count command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (S603B), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S604B).

If it is determined in the processing of S604B that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S604B: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (first end condition) based on the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed is met, so the game state is set to the normal state (S605B), the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab is set to 0 (S606B), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607B), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604B, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (greater than 0) (S604B: No), it is then determined whether the current lottery (special pattern lottery) is for special pattern 2 (second special pattern) (S608B), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 2 (S608: Yes), the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is decremented by 1 (S609B), and it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab after the decrement is 0 (S610B).

In the process of S610B, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab after subtraction is 0 (S610B: Yes), the time-saving end condition (second end condition) based on the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed (number of times the special symbol 2 changes) is met, so the game state is set to the normal state (S611B), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S612B), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S613B), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S608B, if it is determined that the current lottery is not the special symbol 2 (S608B: No), or if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S610B (S610B: No), the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state is not met, so this process is terminated.

In this 43rd control example, the time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are configured to be a first end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (combined number of times the special symbol lottery is executed), and a second end condition that is established based on the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed (number of times the special symbol 2 changes). However, it is also possible to configure the time-saving end conditions to be set in three or more types. For example, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 40th control example, it is also possible to configure the time-saving end conditions to be set based on the number of times a small jackpot is won or the number of times a normal symbol winning game is executed based on a winning in the normal symbol lottery.

In addition, in this 43rd control example, the same time-saving update process 43 (see FIG. 1275) is executed regardless of the type of time-saving state that has been set (second time-saving state, first time-saving state) or the trigger for setting the time-saving state (winning the time-saving pattern, winning the jackpot, ceiling bonus). However, without being limited to this, the content of the update process for achieving the time-saving end condition may be different depending on the type of time-saving state that has been set (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) or the trigger for setting the time-saving state (winning the time-saving pattern, winning the jackpot, ceiling bonus).

Next, the processing contents of the ceiling update process 43 (S252B) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1276. FIG. 1276 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling update process 43 (S252B). This ceiling update process 43 (S252B) is a process that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery in the special pattern change process 43 (S104B in FIG. 1270) is a miss (including a small win), and executes a process for updating information regarding the conditions for granting a ceiling bonus (ceiling award conditions) and a process for granting a ceiling bonus when the ceiling award conditions are met.

When the ceiling update process 43 (S252B) is executed, it is first determined whether the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to ON (S701B). If it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the ceiling benefit has already been granted (S701B: Yes), the ceiling granting condition cannot be met again, and the process is then terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S701B, if it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is not set to on (S701B: No), the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is incremented by 1 (S702B), and a remaining number command indicating the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is set (S703B). When the remaining number command is set by the process of S703B, it is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as part of various state commands set by other processes. Then, by receiving a state command including the remaining number command on the voice lamp control device 113 side, information indicating the total number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed since the end of the previous big win game (variation number information) is stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g. Based on the variation number information stored here, the remaining number of variations required until the ceiling privilege is granted is calculated, and the remaining number of variations until the ceiling privilege is granted is displayed in the display area Dm7 on the performance screen during the disadvantage mode (see FIG. 1254 (b)).

In the 43rd control example, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is incremented in response to the number of times the special symbol lottery was executed after the end of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. Instead, after the end of the jackpot game, a value (for example, 999) corresponding to the number of remaining changes until the ceiling grant condition is met may be set as the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa, and the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa may be decremented by 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, an information command indicating the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is set, and when the information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number of changes corresponding to the value included in the received information command becomes the number of remaining changes until the ceiling grant condition is met, so that the value included in the received information command can be displayed directly in the display area Dm7, and the process for determining the display mode to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 executed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 1276, the explanation of the ceiling update process 43 (S252B) will be continued. In the process of S704B, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203Aa added by the process of S702B has reached 999 (S704B). If it is determined that it has reached (S704B: Yes), this is a case where the ceiling granting condition is met, so the game state is set to the second time-saving state to grant the ceiling bonus (S705B), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "40" (S706B), a state command indicating the second time-saving state is set (S707B), the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to ON (S708B), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S704B, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203Aa is not 999 (S704B), the ceiling granting condition is not met, so the processes of S705B to S708B for granting the ceiling bonus are skipped and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 43rd control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 43rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1277 to Fig. 1282. First, details of the command determination process 43 (S3113B) in the 43rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1277. This command determination process 43 (S3113B) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 40 (see Fig. 1174) in the 40th control example described above, and is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the main control device 110, similar to the command determination process 40 (see Fig. 1174).

In the command determination process 43 in this 43rd control example (see FIG. 1277), the processes of S3201 to S3211, S3213, and S3218 are the same as the processes of S3201 to S3211, S3213, and S3218 in the command determination process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 983). In addition, in the command determination process 43 in this 43rd control example (see FIG. 1277), the processes of S3232A to S3234A are the same as the processes of S3232A to S3234A in the command determination process 40 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1174).

In addition, in the command determination process 43 (see FIG. 1277) in this 43rd control example, if it is determined in the process of S3211 that a status command has been received (S3211: Yes), status command process 43 is executed (S3231B) and this process is terminated. Details of this status command process 43 (S3231B) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1278.

Next, the above-mentioned status command processing 43 (S3231B) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 1278. As described above, this status command processing 43 (S3231B) is processing executed in place of status command processing 40 (see FIG. 1175) in the 40th control example, and, like status command processing 40 (see FIG. 1175), is processing for performing control according to the game status notified by the status command.

In the state command processing 43 in this 43rd control example (see FIG. 1278), the processes of S3401 and S3402, and S3421A, S3426A to S3428A are the same as the processes of S3401 and S3402, and S3421A, S3426A to S3428A in the state command 40 processing in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1175).

In addition, in the state command processing 43 (see FIG. 1278) in this 43rd control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3402 that the currently received state command is a state command notifying a transition to the normal state (S3402: Yes), the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is cleared (S3421A), a background mode transition lottery is executed (S3401B), it is determined whether the background mode transition lottery has been won (S3402B), and if it is determined that the lottery has been won (S3402B: Yes), a display back image command is set that shows a back image corresponding to the winning result (a back image corresponding to the back mode type) (S3403B), the notified flag 223Ab is set to OFF (S3404B), and this processing ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S3402B that the background mode transition lottery was not won (S3402B: No), the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S3405B), and this processing ends.

Next, the details of the standby effect setting process 43 (S3429B) will be described with reference to FIG. 1279. FIG. 1279 is a flowchart showing this standby effect setting process 43 (S3429B). When this standby effect setting process 43 (S3429B) is executed, first, the standby effect flag 223ja is set to ON (S3451A), and then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is 0 (S3452A). In the process of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S3452A: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S3451B). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S3451B), the condition for executing a new special symbol lottery is not met, so the performance mode corresponding to the current time-saving type (time-saving count) is specified by referring to the standby performance selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1165) (S3453A), and the execution of the standby performance of the specified performance mode is set (S3454A). Next, the value of the standby performance count counter 223jb is set to 1 (S3455A), the notification flag 223Ab is set to ON (S3452B), and this process is terminated.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S3452A that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is not 0 (1 or more) (S3452A), the processes of S3453A to S3455A are skipped, the process of S3452B is executed, and the process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S3451B that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is not 0 (S3451B: No), that is, if it is determined that the execution conditions for the second special pattern lottery are met, this process ends as is. This is because if there are reserved balls, it is sufficient to set a standby effect as the effect mode of the variable display effect that is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special pattern based on the reserved balls, and there is no need to set the effect mode in this process.

By executing this standby effect setting process 43 (S3429B), when a transition is made to the first time-saving state in a situation where there are no reserved balls with the first special pattern and no reserved balls with the second special pattern, a chance time standby effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the type of the first time-saving state (number of time-saving times).

Next, the processing contents of variable presentation setting process 43 (S4304B) in this 43rd control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 1280. FIG. 1280 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable presentation setting process 43 (S4304B). In this variable presentation setting process 43 (S4304B), processing is executed to determine different presentation modes depending on the set game state.

Specifically, when the variable effect setting process 43 (S4304B) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the secondary game state storage area 223g (S4401), and it is determined whether the game state is the first time-saving state (S4401B). If it is determined that it is not the first time-saving state (S4401B: No), it is next determined whether the time-saving pattern has been won (S4402B). If it is determined that the time-saving pattern has been won (S4402B: Yes), the effect setting process when the time-saving pattern has been won is executed (S4404B), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4402B that the time-saving pattern has not been won (S4402B: No), the presentation mode of the variable effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4403B), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S4401B, if it is determined that the first time-saving state is in effect (S4401B: Yes), it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a special pattern 1 change (S4405B), and if it is determined that the current special pattern change is not a special pattern 1 change (S4405B: No), the presentation mode of the change presentation is determined based on the lottery result of the change and the extracted change pattern (S4406B), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4405B that the variation is a special chart 1 variation (S4405B: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223Ab is set to on (S4407B), and if it is set to on (S4407B: Yes), the processing proceeds to S4406B and ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4407B that the notified flag 223Ab is not set to on (S4407B: No), the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is read (S4408B), the presentation mode of the variation presentation is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4409B), the notified flag 223Ab is set to on (S4410B), and the processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1281, the processing contents of the processing for setting the effect when the time-saving symbol is won (S4404B) will be explained. FIG. 1281 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the processing for setting the effect when the time-saving symbol is won (S4404B). In this processing for setting the effect when the time-saving symbol is won (S4404B), when a game state other than the first time-saving state is set (during left-hand play), processing is executed to determine the presentation mode of the variable effect when the time-saving symbol is won in the executed special symbol lottery.

Specifically, when the process for setting the effect when the time-saving symbol is won (S4404B) is executed, first, the currently won time-saving type is read (S5701B), and it is determined whether the read time-saving type is time-saving group A (S5702B). If it is determined that the time-saving type is time-saving group A (S5702B: Yes), the current background mode is read from the background mode storage area (S5703B), and the background mode type is determined by referring to the background mode selection table 222Aa (S5704B), and then it is determined whether the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S5705B).

If it is determined in the processing of S5705B that the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S5705B: Yes), the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to OFF (S5706B), a display background image command indicating a background image corresponding to the determined background mode is set (S5707B), the determined background mode type is stored in the background mode storage area (S5708B), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5702B that the time-saving group is not A (it is B) (S5702B: No), the process executes the process of determining the time-saving pattern for the performance (S5709B), and ends this processing.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving effect symbol determination process (S5709B) will be described with reference to FIG. 1282. FIG. 1282 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving effect symbol determination process (S5709B). When the time-saving effect symbol determination process (S5709B) is executed, first, the current background mode is read from the background mode storage area (S5751B), and it is determined whether or not the game is in an advantageous mode (S5752B). In the processing of S5752B, if it is determined that the game is in an advantageous mode (S5752B: Yes), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S5755B), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning symbol reserved (S5756B). If it is determined that there is a winning symbol reserved (S5756B: Yes), the type of the winning symbol is determined to be "carrot" (S5757B), and the process proceeds to processing of S5754B.

By configuring it in this way, when the advantageous mode is set as the presentation mode, if there is a winning reserved symbol at the time when a time-saving symbol in time-saving group B is won, "carrot" can be set as the presentation symbol type. Therefore, only during a specific presentation mode, the presence or absence of a winning reserved symbol can be notified by the presentation symbol type. Also, when a time-saving symbol with a small number of time-saving times is won as time-saving group B, that is, when a time-saving state in which "carrot" is difficult to select is set, "carrot" is displayed, allowing the player to predict that there may be a winning symbol in the reserved symbol.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5752B that the game is not in the advantageous mode (S5752B: No), the type of effect pattern is determined (S5753B) by referring to the effect pattern table (effect pattern selection table) 222Ab, a display command is set to show the display mode corresponding to the determined effect pattern type (S5754B), and this processing ends.

Next, the processing contents of the performance update process 43 (S3112B) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1283. FIG. 1283 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance update process 43 (S3112B). This performance update process 43 (S3112B) differs from the performance update process 40 (see FIG. 1182) of the 40th control example described above in that a process for determining the performance mode when the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to on has been added, but the control processing contents are otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

When the effect update process 43 (S3112B) is executed, first, the same processes of S4611A to S4617A as those of the effect update process 40 (see FIG. 1182) of the 40th control example described above are executed. Then, it is determined whether the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S4601B), and if it is determined that it is set to ON, it is determined whether the elapsed time since it was set to ON has reached 20 seconds (S4602B). If it is determined that 20 seconds have elapsed in the process of S4602B (S4602B: Yes), a background mode transition lottery is executed (S4603B), and it is determined whether the lottery has been won (S4604B). If it is determined that the lottery has been won (S4604B: Yes), a display back image command showing a back image corresponding to the winning result is set (S4605B), the notified flag 223Ab is set to OFF (S4606B), and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the background mode based on the elapsed time regardless of whether or not a special pattern lottery is being held, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<44th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1284 to Fig. 1316. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example, during the period when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. In contrast, the 44th control example is different in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the given time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

In addition, in the 44th control example, an upper limit is set on the number of times the first game state is set in succession, and when a jackpot is won (a jackpot reaching the time-saving limit is won) and a jackpot game is played in a state in which the first time-saving state is set nine times in succession, the normal state is forcibly set after the jackpot game ends, which is different from the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that the configuration is such that the bonus (first time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is not set excessively in succession, and it is possible to prevent the player from being given excessive prize balls. In addition, even if the number of prize balls that can be acquired during one jackpot game is increased, since an upper limit is set on the number of times the first time-saving state is set in succession, it is possible to prevent the player from being given excessive prize balls. In addition, since an upper limit is set on the number of times the first time-saving state is set in succession, it is possible to increase the probability (jackpot winning probability, small prize winning probability) of playing a jackpot game in which the first time-saving state is set again based on the second special pattern lottery that is mainly performed during the first time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this 44th control example, by executing the first special pattern change during the special pattern change period in which the second special pattern change corresponding to the winning of the time-saving limit is being executed, the time-saving state is ended and the normal state is set, thereby making it possible to reset the state in which the first time-saving state is continuously set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play in an attempt to end the first time-saving state during the special chart change period when the time-saving limit is reached and a win occurs.

In addition, in a gaming machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or small win) is won in one of the special pattern lotteries, the specification is generally such that only one of the following is executed: the variable display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted); however, in this 44th control example, the configuration is such that whether the variable display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped is determined depending on the big win type (or small win type). In other words, a big win type that forcibly stops (discards) the variable display of the other special pattern and a big win type that temporarily stops (interrupts) the variable display of the other special pattern are specified.

By configuring it in this way, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, and a game state disadvantageous to the player may be set by the stopped display of one special symbol, it is possible to prevent the setting of an unfavorable game state when a jackpot of a jackpot type that allows the variation of the other special symbols to be discarded, but if a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, the situation in which an unfavorable game state may be set continues. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols could be discarded, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example follows the basic specifications (configuration of ROM 202) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example, and is a combination of various control processes executed by the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example. Therefore, explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be omitted.

<Configuration of the game board 13 in the 44th control example>
First, referring to FIG. 1284, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example will be described. FIG. 1284 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example. As shown in FIG. 1284, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example is different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example (see FIG. 406) in that the first ball entrance 1640 is removed from the right side area and a second ball entrance 640 accompanied by an electric role 640 is provided. The other configurations are the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1284, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example, when a left-handed game is performed, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 than the second ball entrance 640, and when a right-handed game is performed, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the first ball entrance 64. In addition, the electric device 640a is configured to be variable to a state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 when the first time-saving state is set, as in the above-mentioned 43rd control example. Therefore, while the normal state and the second time-saving state are set, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by playing from the left is an advantageous game for the player, and while the first time-saving state is set, a game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by playing from the right is an advantageous game for the player.

As shown in FIG. 1284, the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example in that it does not have a start ball entry hole in the right area that serves as a trigger for the execution of the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is not executed by the game ball launched by the right-hand hit game executed during the first time-saving state.

<About the performance content in the 44th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1285 and Fig. 1286, the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example will be described. In this 44th control example, the first time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the winning (jackpot win, small win win) in the second special symbol lottery executed in the state in which the first time-saving state is set. In other words, the jackpot game executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery becomes a time-saving jackpot game in which the first time-saving state is set, as in the above-mentioned 43rd control example.

In addition, as described above, in this 44th control example, an upper limit is set on the number of times the first time-saving state is set consecutively, and if the condition for setting the first time-saving state 10 times consecutively across jackpot games is met, a time-saving limit process is executed to forcibly set the normal state after the jackpot game ends.

Therefore, in this 44th control example, during the second special pattern variation period for indicating the result of the second special pattern lottery, which is the trigger for the execution of a jackpot game that would result in the execution of the time-saving limit process, a presentation is configured to be executed to guide the player to a playing method that avoids the first time-saving state being set consecutively.

Specifically, by executing the first special pattern lottery during the second special pattern change period for indicating the result of the second special pattern lottery, which is the trigger for the execution of a jackpot game that will result in the execution of the time-saving limit process, the time-saving end condition is established based on the execution of the first special pattern lottery before the ongoing second special pattern change is stopped and displayed, and by setting the normal state, the game state at the time the ongoing second special pattern change is stopped and displayed is made the normal state, and a presentation (pseudo left-hand hit presentation) is executed to encourage the player to play left-hand during the second special pattern change period in order to prevent the time-saving limit process from being executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play even during the winning fluctuation period of the second special symbol in order to avoid the execution of the time-saving limit process.

First, referring to FIG. 1285(a), we will explain the content of the time-saving hit fluctuation presentation when the time-saving limit has not been reached. FIG. 1285(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving hit fluctuation screen when the time-saving limit has not been reached.

As shown in FIG. 1285(a), when the winning variation of the second special symbol is executed during the first time-saving state, among the variation effects during the first time-saving state of the above-mentioned 43rd control example, a high-speed variation effect with a high winning expectation is executed. Note that, since the state shown in FIG. 1285(a) is a state in which the first special symbol variation is not executed and the second special symbol variation is executed, a stop display mode (stop display at "245") is displayed in the display area Dm1 as the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol variation, and a dynamic display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) is displayed in the display area Dm2 as the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variation. Then, the characters "Chance Zone" to indicate that the first time-saving state is in progress are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and "Right Hit" to encourage the player to play right hit is displayed in the display area Dm4a. As shown in FIG. 1285(a), a display area Dm4 is formed at the lower left side of the main display area Dm, in which a moving image swirling clockwise is displayed, and the direction of rotation of this vortex is configured to guide the player to the most advantageous playing method.

In addition, the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "Fast fluctuation! Chance to win!" to indicate that the currently executing fluctuation effect is advantageous to the player. After the display screen shown in FIG. 1285(a) is displayed, a V icon 811f indicating a win is displayed stopped in the center of the primary display area Dm in time with the stop display of the second special symbol fluctuation, and the player is notified that he or she has won.

Next, referring to FIG. 1285(b), we will explain the content of the time-saving hit fluctuation presentation when the time-saving limit is reached. FIG. 1285(b) is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving hit fluctuation screen when the time-saving limit is reached.

As shown in FIG. 1285(b), when a winning variation is executed in which the time-saving limit is reached (the normal state is forcibly set after the end of the big win game), the words "Chance Zone End" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in a depressed state. Then, in the display area Dm4a, "Hit Left" is displayed as a guide to encourage the player to play with the left hand. Also, in the display area Dm7 for displaying the remaining number of time-saving times, an explosion mode is displayed to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of time-saving times.

However, as shown in display area Dm2, the state shown in FIG. 1285(b) is during the winning fluctuation period of the second special symbol during the first time-saving state. In other words, even though FIG. 1285(b) is in the first time-saving state, it is a pseudo left-hit presentation that encourages the player to play with a left-handed hit. In addition, since a vortex rotates clockwise in display area Dm4, it notifies the player that the most advantageous playing method is to play with a right-handed hit.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 1285(b) is displayed, when a left-hand hit is performed and the first special symbol variation is executed, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 1286(a) is displayed. FIG. 1286(a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content displayed when the first special symbol variation is executed during a pseudo left-hand hit presentation.

As shown in FIG. 1286(a), when the first special symbol variation is executed during the simulated left-hand hit effect, a character 809 resembling an angel and a character 801 resembling a rabbit are displayed, and a treasure chest 810 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Then, based on the first special symbol lottery being executed, an effect is executed that displays the contents 810a of the treasure chest 810.

In addition, the display area Dm13 displays a happiness level to indicate information until the time-saving end condition is met. This happiness level is a maximum value of 100%, and is configured to inform (suggest) the player that the time-saving end condition has been met when a happiness level of 100% is displayed. The initial happiness level (%) when the pseudo left-hit performance is executed is configured to be determined based on the remaining time of the second special pattern fluctuation being executed and the number of times the first special pattern lottery is executed that is required to achieve the time-saving end condition, and is basically configured to increase by "10%" each time a special pattern lottery is executed.

When the happiness level reaches 100%, as shown in FIG. 1286(b), "100%" is displayed in the display area Dm13 as a display mode to indicate that the time-saving state has ended. Then, the words "15 seconds left until lucky" are displayed in the display area Dm14, indicating the remaining time of the second special symbol change that is currently being performed. Furthermore, the comment "Happiness level MAX!! Something good will happen in 15 seconds" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Also, because the time-saving state has ended at this point, a counterclockwise vortex is displayed in the display area Dm4.

In the presentation shown in FIG. 1286(a), the game content (number of times the special pattern is drawn) required to achieve the time-saving end condition, and the remaining time of the second special pattern change are not clearly notified to the player, but are instead configured to allow the player to predict them based on the percentage displayed as the happiness level. However, without being limited to this, the game content (number of times the special pattern is drawn) required to achieve the time-saving end condition, the remaining time of the second special pattern change, or either one of them may be configured to be notified to the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 44th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1287 to Fig. 1291. This 44th control example differs from the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is changed. The rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1287, the ROM 202 possessed by the main control unit 110 in this 44th control example differs from the ROM 202 possessed by the main control unit 110 in the above-described 43rd control example in that a variation pattern selection 44 table 202Bd is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 43 table 202Ad, but is otherwise the same. Identical configurations are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. The contents of the variation pattern selection 44 table 202Bd will be described later with reference to FIG. 1289 to FIG. 1291.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 1288. FIG. 1288 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It differs from the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that it adds a time-saving limit count counter 203Ba, a special chart 1 fluctuation time timer 203Bb, a special chart 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc, a special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd, a special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203Be, a special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf, a special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg, a time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg, and a time-saving limit reaching flag 203Bh. The rest of the configuration is the same as the above-mentioned 43rd control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving limit counter 203Ba is a counter for measuring the number of times the first time-saving state is set in succession. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example is configured to be able to measure the number of times the first time-saving state is set in succession (number of times of consecutive time-saving settings) except during a jackpot game, and is configured to be able to execute a process (time-saving limit process) to forcibly set the normal state when the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time-saving limit is reached), even if the conditions for setting the first time-saving state are met, thereby preventing a game state (first time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player from being set in succession excessively.

When the first time-saving state is set while the normal state or the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba is set to an initial value of "10" (see Y3005 in FIG. 1313). The counter value is decremented each time the number of consecutive time-saving settings is updated (see Y3002 in FIG. 1313), and the counter value after decrement is referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (see Y3003 in FIG. 1313). When the time-saving limit is reached or the type of jackpot currently being executed is one that sets a low probability state for normal patterns, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba is cleared to 0.

The information indicating the value of this time-saving limit counter 203Ba is set as a status command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 during the jackpot end process.

As described above, in the 44th control example, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba for measuring the number of consecutive time-saving settings is set to the number of consecutive time-saving settings until the time-saving limit is reached, and the counter value is subtracted each time the number of consecutive time-saving settings is subtracted. However, without being limited to this, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba may be set to "1" when the first time-saving state is set, and thereafter, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba may be incremented by 1 each time the number of consecutive time-saving settings is updated, and it may be determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba after the increment is a value (e.g., 10) indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached, and if the result of this determination indicates that the time-saving limit has been reached, the time-saving limit process may be executed.

When configured in this way, for example, even if the condition for establishing (reaching) the time-saving limit is changed when a second special condition (e.g., winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period during which a high probability state for a special pattern is continuously set, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving limit has been reached simply by comparing the established condition (reaching condition) after the change with the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba.

When the special condition in the above example is established, the condition for the time-saving limit may be changed to be more difficult to establish than before the change, or may be changed to be easier to establish than before the change. In addition, when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, it may be configured to immediately determine whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit, or it may be configured to determine whether the condition for the time-saving limit is satisfied at the end of the jackpot game, even if the condition for the time-saving limit is changed. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the normal pattern is prevented from immediately ending when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, and the jackpot win of the special pattern lottery is guaranteed at least once during the period when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing.

In this 44th control example, as the trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, a trigger for setting a value in the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba (a trigger for setting the time-saving limit) and a trigger for not setting it (a trigger for not setting the time-saving limit) are provided. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger sets the time-saving state.

Special pattern 1 change time timer 203Bb and special pattern 2 change time timer 203Bc are timers for timing the change time of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, respectively. When the change pattern of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is selected, the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern is set. Whether or not the change time of each special pattern has ended is determined based on the timing results of special pattern 1 change time timer 203Bb and special pattern 2 change time timer 203Bc (see Y701 in FIG. 1300 and Y901 in FIG. 1308).

The special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special chart 1 is stopped. When the flag is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when the flag is set from on to off, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON when the variation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) whose lottery result is a jackpot other than jackpot D is stopped (Y903 in FIG. 1308), and is referenced in the first special pattern variation execution process 44 (see FIG. 1299) and the first special pattern variation stop process 44 (see FIG. 1300, Y708). If the result of the reference is set to ON, a process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device corresponding to the special pattern 1 in the same way as during variation. In other words, while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first pattern display device is in a state where the variation display is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the variation of the special pattern 1 has not been forcibly stopped by setting the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd to ON. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the first special symbol change execution process 44 (see FIG. 1299) (Y2801 in FIG. 1299: Yes), the flag is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 1299). Although detailed explanations and illustrations are omitted, the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON by executing the same process as in the case of a big win even when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a small win.

The special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special chart 2 is stopped. When the flag is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when the flag is set from on to off, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON when the variation of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) that is the winning lottery result is stopped (Y703 in FIG. 1300), and is referenced in the second special pattern variation in progress process 44 (see FIG. 1307) and the second special pattern variation stop process 44 (see FIG. 43). Note that the contents referenced in this process are the same as the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special pattern variation in progress process 44 (see FIG. 1307) (Y2901: Yes in FIG. 1307), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 1307).

The special pattern 1 change stop flag 203Bf is a flag that indicates that it is time to forcibly stop the first special pattern that is changing. This special pattern 1 change stop flag 203Bf is set to ON when the change of the big win D or small win B is stopped for the second special pattern (see Y905 in FIG. 1308 and Y932 in FIG. 1310). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special pattern 1 change stop flag 203Bf is ON while the first special pattern is changing, it is set to OFF (see Y722 in FIG. 1301). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the first special pattern in accordance with the timing when the change of the big win D or small win B of the second special pattern stops first.

The special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Bg is a flag that indicates that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol that is changing. This special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Bg is set to ON when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the change display starts (Y405 in FIG. 1297). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Bg is ON while the second special symbol is changing (Y632 in FIG. 1309). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the second special symbol in line with the timing when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the change starts.

The time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (i.e., the time-saving winning fluctuation state is in a fluctuating manner). This time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a time-saving winning mode (see Y403 in FIG. 1297). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is displayed in a stopped manner and the time-saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 1302), or when the second special symbol wins the big win D or small win B and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is canceled (see Y726 in FIG. 1301). This allows the time-saving winning fluctuation state to be set in the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving winning mode to when the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends.

The time-saving limit reached flag 203Bh is a flag for indicating that the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern has been set consecutively (number of consecutive normal pattern settings) has reached an upper limit, and is set to on when the number of consecutive normal pattern settings has reached an upper limit and the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to a low probability state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1292, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 44th control example will be described. FIG. 1292 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 44th control example. As shown in FIG. 1292, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 44th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see FIG. 1267 (b)) in that a pseudo left-hit flag 223Ba and a happiness counter 223Bb are added, and otherwise it is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The pseudo left-hit flag 223Ba is a flag for indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is a win due to reaching the time-saving limit, and that during the fluctuation period, a pseudo left-hit performance is being executed that prompts the end of the time-saving state by executing the first special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the pseudo left-hit performance is being executed.

The happiness counter 223Bb is a counter for measuring a value corresponding to the happiness (%) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the simulated left-hit performance.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 44th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 44th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 1293 to 1313. The control process of the main control device 110 in this 44th control example differs from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned 5th control example in that the special symbol variation process 44 (see Fig. 1293) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 5 (see Fig. 252), and the game state update process 44 (see Fig. 1298) is executed instead of the update process 5 (see Fig. 256), and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

As described above, the 44th control example is significantly different from the 43rd control example described above in that the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 1) and the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 2) are configured to be able to be changed simultaneously (in parallel).

First, referring to FIG. 1293, the contents of the special pattern change process 44 (Y104) in this 44th control example will be explained. FIG. 1293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern change process 44 (Y104). When the special pattern change process 44 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231). If it is determined that the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231: Yes), it is next determined whether the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on (Y232). In this Y232 process, it is determined whether the subtraction of the special pattern change time of the other special pattern that is changing is interrupted because one of the special patterns is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a win. In the process of Y232, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on (Y232: Yes), the display of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special pattern is updated (Y233), that is, a process is executed to continue the change display of the first pattern display device 37 for the special pattern for which the subtraction of the change time has been interrupted, and this process is terminated. This makes it possible to inform the player that the special pattern change has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of Y231, if it is determined that a big win or a small win is currently occurring (Y231: No), it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203Bb is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 1 is changing) (Y234), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203Bb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y234: No), the same process as the first special pattern change start process 44 (Y237) is executed, and then it proceeds to Y238, which executes change processing for the special pattern 2.

If it is determined in the process of Y234 that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203Bb is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235) is executed. This first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235) executes the process during the special pattern 1 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 1298.

After the first special symbol change in progress process 44 (Y235) is completed, the first special symbol change stop process 44 (Y236) is then executed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.

In the processing of Y238 to Y241, the same processing as Y234 to Y237 executed for special pattern 1 is executed. When the processing of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203Bc is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 2 is changing) (Y238), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203Bc is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special pattern change start processing 44 (Y239) is executed, and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203Bc is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y240) is executed. This second special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y240) executes the process during the special pattern 2 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 1306.

After the second special symbol change in progress process 44 (Y240) is completed, the second special symbol change stop process 44 (Y241) is then executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1294, we will explain the first special symbol change start process 44 (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol change process 44 (FIG. 1293, Y104). FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process 44 (Y237).

In the first special symbol variation start process 44 (Fig. 1293, Y237), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (Y302), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter is greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Y304), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (Y305).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control device 110.

When the process of Y305 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

After the process of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol determination process 44 is then executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 44 (Fig. 1294, Y307) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and based on the set game state. Note that the game state update process 44 (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring it in this way, the special symbol lottery will be executed after the game state is updated.

When the process of Y307 is completed, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 44 is then executed (Fig. 1296, Y308). Details will be described later, but this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 44 (Y308) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 44 (Y308) is completed, the game status update process 44 is then executed (Y309). This game status update process 44 (Fig. 1297, Y309), the details of which will be described later, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time-saving counter 203h) that indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of Y309 is completed, the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and a special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is on (Y311), and if it is determined that it is on (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y311: No), the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), a special symbol 1 standby command indicating on is set (Y313), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 44 (Y307) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1295. FIG. 1295 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 44 (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 44 (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253) of the fifth control example described above, and in addition to determining the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a determination of whether or not a time-saving win has occurred (special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 44) is executed.

When the first special symbol determination process 44 (Y307) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (Y8001), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 43 table 202Aa (Y8002), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8005), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8003: No), the special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 44 is executed (Y8007), and this process is terminated.

Here, special pattern 1 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8007) is a process for executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been won in this special pattern lottery. In other words, in this 44th control example, in the first special pattern lottery, a judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been won is first executed (Y8003), and if a jackpot has been won, the special pattern lottery is terminated without executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been executed, and the judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been executed only if a jackpot has not been won. By configuring it in this way, multiple benefits (a jackpot win for a special pattern, a time-saving win) are not given to the player in one special pattern lottery, so it is possible to prevent the player from being given an overly advantageous game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1296, we will explain the first special symbol change pattern selection process 44 (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process 44 (FIG. 1294, Y237). FIG. 1296 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change pattern selection process 44 (Y308).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 44 (Fig. 1296, Y308), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol determination process 44 (Fig. 1295, Y307), i.e., whether a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (Y501).

If it is determined in the process of Y501 that a jackpot of the first special symbol has been set (Y501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the first jackpot random number 43 table 202Aa based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of Y8005 in the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 44 (see FIG. 1295) (Y502), and the process proceeds to Y503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y501 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y503.

In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see Figures 413 to 416) according to the game status is read (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then a special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y506).

When the process of Y506 is completed, a special pattern 1 stop type command indicating the stop pattern is set (Y507). Next, the start of the variation of the first special pattern is set in the first pattern display device 37 (Y508), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8007) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1297. FIG. 1297 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8007).

When the special pattern 1 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the first winning random number 43 table 202Aa (Y401), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has occurred (Y402). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has occurred (Y402: Yes), the time-saving winning change status flag is set to on (Y403), time-saving A is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y404), the special pattern 2 change stop flag Be is set to on (Y8105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y402 that the time-saving win has not been made (Y402: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y406), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of game status update process 44 (Y309) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1298. FIG. 1298 is a flowchart showing the contents of game status update process 44 (Y309).

When the game status update process 44 (Y309) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (Y602), and a remaining time-saving number command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604). If it is determined that the value is 0 (Y604: Yes), the time-saving game is not granted (i.e., the normal state), so a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), and the normal state is set in the game status storage area 203g (Y606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1299, the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235) executed in the special pattern change process 44 (see Y104 in FIG. 1293) will be explained. FIG. 1299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235). In this first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235), a process is executed to resume the subtraction of the change time of special pattern 1 if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process to subtract the change time.

When the first special symbol change in progress process 44 (Y235) is executed, it is first determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to on (Y2801). Here, we will briefly explain the case where this process is executed with the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd set to on. The special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to on when the special symbol 1 is changing and the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific win (big win A to C, or small win A). Then, when the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on within that process, so the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and the next time the special pattern change process 44 (Fig. 1293) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to on), it is determined that a jackpot is in progress in the process of Y231, so the first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235) is not executed. Then, the jackpot game (or small jackpot game) ends, and the first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235) is executed because it is determined that a jackpot is not in progress (or a small jackpot) in the process of Y231. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the first special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y235) is executed while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON is configured to be the timing when the big win (or small win) game ends and the deduction of the special pattern change change time that was suspended is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 1299, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to on (Y2801: Yes), then the special chart 1 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2802), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to off (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2801: No), the processing of Y2802 and Y2803 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2804.

In the processing of Y2804, the special pattern 1 variable time timer 203Bb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1300, we will explain the first special symbol change stop process 44 (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol change process 44 (FIG. 1293, Y104). FIG. 1300 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change stop process 44 (Y236).

In the first special symbol change stop process 44 (Fig. 1300, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether a jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set (Y702). If it is determined that a jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on (Y703). Although not shown in the figure, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special symbol 2 change stop command is set, indicating that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Be is on.

After completing the process of Y703, a special symbol 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol (Y706). Then, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 (Y707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether or not a time-saving win of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, if it is determined that a time-saving win is set (Y710: Yes), the time-saving setting process 44 (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time-saving setting process 44 (Y711), a process is executed for setting the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving type that has been won. The time-saving setting process 44 (Y711) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 1302.

On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol that is being executed has not arrived (Y701: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is on (Y708). In the process of Y708, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is off (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y708 that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special symbol 1 variation stop flag 203Bf is on (Y708: Yes), this means that the second special symbol has stopped due to a big win or a small win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the first special symbol that is currently being executed, the special symbol 1 forced stop processing 44 is executed (Y709). Details of this special symbol 1 forced stop processing 44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 1301.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop process 44 (Y236), when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), a process (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) is executed to stop the change display with the symbol indicating the judgment result of the first lottery game. Also, when the second special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) and a big win game (or a small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), a process (Y709) is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol during the change display. Note that when the first special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) (Y702: Yes), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped).

Next, referring to FIG. 1301, we will explain the special pattern 1 forced stop process 44 (Y709), which is one process of the first special pattern change stop process 44 (FIG. 1300, Y236). FIG. 1301 is a flowchart showing this special pattern 1 forced stop process 44 (Y709).

In the special symbol 1 forced stop process 44 (Fig. 1301, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203Bf is on (Y721). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203Bf is on (Y721: Yes), the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203Bf is set to off (Y722), and then a special symbol 1 change stop command indicating that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203Bf is off is set (Y723). Then, the change type of the first special symbol is set to miss (Y724), and it is determined whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on (Y725). Although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss symbol, and a special symbol 1 confirmation command for the first special symbol is set.

In the process of Y725, if it is determined that the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern drawing is a time-saving winning) (Y725: Yes), the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is set to off (Y726), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, if the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is not on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern drawing is not a time-saving winning) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped, and this process is terminated.

...

On the other hand, in the processing of Y721, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 variation time flag 203Bf is not on (Y721: No), this means that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the variation of the first special pattern is set (Y729), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this 44th control example, when the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203Bf is turned on (the timing when the change that results in a big win or small win with the second special symbol stops), the change is forcibly interrupted even if the change time of the first special symbol has not yet elapsed, or is forcibly stopped as a result of a miss determination. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a changing manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a small win or big win for only one of the lottery results, which reduces gambling. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this 44th control example, depending on the type of big win or small win of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be forcibly stopped as a miss or temporarily stopped (interrupted).

As described above, in the 44th control example, time-saving A and time-saving B can be set as types of time-saving states. Time-saving A has a time-saving count of 5 times (see FIG. 411), and the probability that the second special symbol will win a big win (1/50 chance of winning) or a small win (1/50 chance of winning) with 5 time-saving times is a low probability of about 18%, so winning a big win or a small win with the second special symbol during time-saving A state is almost impossible. On the other hand, time-saving B has a time-saving count of 10,000 times (see FIG. 411), so when time-saving B is set, there is a high probability of winning the next big win or a small win. Therefore, it can be said that time-saving B state is a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than time-saving A state.

Here, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus and the time-saving bonus B state is set due to the second special symbol winning a big jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving bonus during the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped (i.e., when the time-saving bonus winning variable state is set), if the first special symbol cannot be forcibly stopped as a miss symbol and the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped, the set time-saving bonus B state is discarded and a new time-saving bonus A state is set. In other words, in this case, the time-saving bonus B state will only continue until the variable time of the first special symbol that won the time-saving bonus (300 seconds in this 44th control example) has elapsed, and there is a high possibility that the time-saving bonus state will end before the time-saving bonus limit is reached.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the time-saving B state is set because the second special symbol wins a big win, a small win, or a time-saving feature during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving feature has been won (i.e., when the time-saving feature change state is set), if a specific big win (big win D) or small win (small win B) is won and the change in the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a missing pattern, it is possible to continue the time-saving B state until the time-saving feature limit is reached, and the player can win a large number of prize balls.

In this way, in this 44th control example, if the second special symbol wins a big jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving win during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is stopped and displayed (i.e., when a time-saving win variable state is set) and the time-saving B state is set, the first special symbol that is being displayed as a variable is forcibly stopped (discarded) as a miss, providing the player with new gameplay that allows the player to continue the advantageous time-saving state and increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1302, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 44 (Y711) will be described. FIG. 1302 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 44 (Y711). In this time-saving setting process 44 (Y711), a process for setting the time-saving state when the time-saving winning decision is made is executed. When the time-saving setting process 44 (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is time-saving A (Y8351), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A (Y8351: Yes), the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y8352), a value corresponding to the determined time-saving type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (Y8353), the time-saving state is set in the game state storage area (Y8354), the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the time-saving type game state (information indicating the time-saving state and information indicating the set time-saving type) are set (Y8355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8351 that the time-saving type is not A (i.e., if the time-saving type is B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. Although not shown, in the process of Y8353, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is cleared and a new value corresponding to the determined type of time-saving type is set. Therefore, when the time-saving state A is set based on winning the time-saving state, if the time-saving counter 203h already has a value corresponding to time-saving type B (e.g., 10,000 times), the value corresponding to time-saving type B is discarded and the value corresponding to time-saving type A (5 times) is set.

In this way, in this 44th control example, the time-saving state is set at different times depending on the time-saving winning trigger. If the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern stops changing, and if the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game ends, not when the special pattern stops changing.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be varied, providing players with a game that they will not tire of.

Next, referring to FIG. 1303, we will explain the second special symbol change start process 44 (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol change process 44 (FIG. 1293, Y104). FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change start process 44 (Y239).

In the second special symbol variation start process 44 (Fig. 1303, Y239), it is first determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is on (Y831). In the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is on (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is not on (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is obtained (Y832), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Y834), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (Y835).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110.

When the process of Y835 is completed, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is then shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 -> execution area, reserved area 2 -> reserved area 1, reserved area 3 -> reserved area 2, reserved area 4 -> reserved area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y836 is completed, the second special symbol determination process 44 is then executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process 44 (Fig. 1304, Y837) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and based on the set game state.

When the process of Y837 is completed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 44 is then executed (Fig. 1306, Y838). Details will be described later, but this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 44 (Y838) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 44 (Y838) is completed, the game status update process 44 is then executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game status update process 44 (Fig. 1297, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed for the first special symbol, and the details are explained with reference to Fig. 1298, so detailed explanations are omitted. When the process of Y839 is completed, the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. Note that the game status update process 44 (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game status is updated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 2 standby flag is on (Y841), and if it is determined that it is on (Y841: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y841: No), the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to on (Y842), a special symbol 2 standby command indicating on is set (Y843), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1304, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 44 (Y837) will be explained. FIG. 1304 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 44 (Y837). Unlike the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 44 (Y307 in FIG. 1295), in this second special symbol determination process 44 (Y837), when it is determined that the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is a miss, a judgment of a small jackpot win (small jackpot win lottery process 44) is made in addition to a judgment of a time-saving win (special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 44).

When the second special symbol determination process 44 (Y837) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (Y8101), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 43 table 202Aa (Y8102), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8103: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8104), the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8105), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8107), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8103: No), the special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 44 is executed (Y8106), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this 44th control example, if the big win lottery for the second special symbol does not result in a big win, a time-saving lottery and a small win lottery are executed, so there are more opportunities set for a state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player compared to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol can be said to be a more advantageous special symbol than the first special symbol. As mentioned above, the change time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long period (600 seconds), so that the playing efficiency of a player who tries to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is reduced.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8106), unlike the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8007 in FIG. 1297), when a time-saving win is won, the type of time-saving to be set is determined depending on whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on or not. Specifically, the time-saving B state is set only when the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on. In other words, the time-saving B state is set only when the second special pattern wins the time-saving during the change display of the first special pattern indicating that a time-saving win has been won, and the time-saving A state is set in other cases. By configuring in this way, even if the second special pattern wins the time-saving win when there is no time-saving winning change state, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set, so that it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special pattern lottery without changing the first special pattern from being excessively advantageous.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8107).

When the special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 44 (Y8107) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning determination result) is obtained based on the first winning random number 43 table 202Aa (Y8201), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203). If it is determined that the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203: Yes), time-saving B is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8205), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y8202 that the time-saving win has not been obtained (Y8202: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8206), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Y8203 that the time-saving winning fluctuation status flag 203kg is off (Y8203: No), time-saving A is set as the time-saving special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8204), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in the 44th control example, the time-saving B state is set when the second special symbol wins the time-saving only when the time-saving winning variable state flag kg is on (i.e., when the first special symbol wins the time-saving and the variable display of the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is being executed). By configuring in this way, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set even if the second special symbol wins the time-saving when the time-saving winning variable state is not in effect, so it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special symbol lottery without varying the first special symbol from being excessively advantageous. In addition, a new gameplay feature of aiming to win the time-saving second special symbol within the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving and the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is stopped and displayed can be provided to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1305, we will explain the small prize lottery process 44 (Y8108), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process 44 (FIG. 1304, Y837). FIG. 1305 is a flowchart showing this small prize lottery process 44 (Y8108).

In the small win lottery process 44 (Fig. 1305, Y8108), first, it is determined whether the lottery result for the second special pattern is determined to be a time-saving win, that is, whether a time-saving win for the second special pattern is set (Y8301).

If it is determined in the processing of Y8301 that the time-saving win for the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this processing ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the time-saving winning of the second special symbol is not set (Y8301: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 43 table 202Aa (Y8302), and if it is determined that a small winning symbol has been won (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small winning type counter C5 is obtained, a small winning type is selected from the small winning type selection 43 table 202Af, and the small winning symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first pattern display device is set (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, if it is determined that a small winning symbol has not been won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this 44th control example, the jackpot, time-saving win, and small win are not overlapped in one second special pattern lottery, preventing the player from being awarded multiple benefits and preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

It is also possible for a jackpot or small jackpot to overlap with a time-saving win. In this case, for example, if a jackpot and a time-saving win overlap, a more favorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends than if only a jackpot was won. This makes it possible to provide variety to the game state after the jackpot game ends depending on whether or not a time-saving win was won, even if two jackpots of the same type are won, and increases the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1306, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 44 (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 44 (FIG. 1303, Y239). FIG. 1306 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 44 (Y838).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 44 (Fig. 1306, Y838), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol determination process 44 (Fig. 1304, Y8103), i.e., whether a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (Y921).

If it is determined in the processing of Y921 that a jackpot of the second special symbol has been set (Y921: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection 43 table 202Ab based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the processing of Y8105 in the above-mentioned second special symbol determination processing 44 (see FIG. 1304) (Y922), and the processing proceeds to Y923.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y921 that the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y923.

In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, a variation pattern table (see Figs. 413-416) corresponding to the game status is read (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then a special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y926).

When the process of Y926 is completed, a special symbol 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the second special symbol (Y928), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1307, the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y240) executed in the special pattern change process 44 (see Y104 in FIG. 1293) will be explained. FIG. 1307 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y240). In this second special pattern change in progress process 44 (Y240), a process is executed to resume the subtraction of the second special pattern change time if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process to subtract the change time.

When the second special symbol change execution process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on (Y2901). Here, a brief explanation will be given of the case where this process is executed with the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be set to on. As described above, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on when the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special symbol 2 is changing. Then, when the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on within that process, so that the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and when the special symbol change process 44 (Fig. 1293, Y104) is executed next time (2 milliseconds after the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on), it is determined that the jackpot is being won in the process of Y231, so the second special symbol change execution process 44 (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined in the process of Y231 that the jackpot is not in progress, the second special symbol variation in progress process 44 (Y240) is executed. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in progress process 44 (Y240) is executed with the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be set to on is configured to be the timing when the jackpot game ends and the subtraction of the special symbol variation time that was suspended is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 1307, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to on (Y2901: Yes), then the special chart 2 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2902), the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to off (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2901: No), the processing of Y2902 and Y2903 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2904.

In the processing of Y2904, the special pattern 2 variable time timer 203Bc is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (Y2905), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1308, the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 44 (Y241) will be explained. FIG. 1308 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 44 (Y241). This second special symbol change stop process 44 (Y241) executes processing when stopping the change of special symbol 2, and differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 1300) in that, in addition to the configuration for interrupting the change of special symbol 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the change time) when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a jackpot, a configuration for forcibly stopping the change of special symbol 1 is provided when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot D), and in that a process to be executed when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a small jackpot is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 44 (Y241) is executed, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended (Y901). Whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether the counter value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc is 0 or not.

If it is determined in the process of Y901 that the fluctuation time has ended (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the drawing of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is a big win (Y902), and if it is determined that it is not a big win (a miss) (Y902: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a small win (Y912). If it is determined in the process of Y910 that it is not a small win (Y912: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a time-saving win (Y914). If it is determined that it is not a time-saving win, a confirmation command for the second special pattern is set (Y908), the fluctuation of the second special pattern on the first pattern display device is stopped (Y909), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y914 that the time-saving winning has occurred (Y914: Yes), the time-saving setting process 44 is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is executed. Note that the time-saving setting process 44 is the same process as the time-saving setting process 44 (Y711) executed as one process of the above-mentioned first special pattern variation stop process 44 (Fig. 1300, Y236), so a detailed explanation is omitted.

If it is determined in the process of Y912 that a small win has been won (Y912: Yes), the special chart 2 small win stop process 44 is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is executed. The special chart 2 small win stop process 44 (Y913) executes a process to set whether to forcibly stop (discard) or temporarily stop (interrupt) the variable display of the first special pattern depending on the type of small win of the won small win, and a detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 1310.

In the process of Y902, if it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot D (Y903), and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to on (Y904), a special chart 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y906), a jackpot scenario is set (Y907), and then the processes of Y908 and Y909 are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y903 that it is a jackpot D, the special chart 1 variation stop flag ke is set to on (Y905), and the processing of Y906 to Y909 is executed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 44th control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot D, the special pattern 1 variation stop flag ke is set to ON, and when the jackpot type is other than this, the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON, so that it is possible to vary the variation of the first special pattern between being forcibly stopped (discarded) and being temporarily stopped (interrupted) depending on the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 411, the type of jackpot determined when the second special symbol is a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the second special symbol is changed, and jackpot D is configured to be more likely to be determined when a jackpot is won on or after the 51st spin. By configuring it in this way, even if the player fails to win a jackpot with the second special symbol and continues to win misses (a so-called "stuck"), a jackpot type that is favorable to the player is more likely to be determined, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play when they are stuck.

In the process of Y901, if it is determined that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed has not arrived (Y901: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be or the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is on (Y910). In the process of Y910, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be or the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is off (Y910: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y910 that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be or the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203Bg is on (Y910: Yes), this means that the first special symbol has stopped due to a jackpot or a time-saving win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the second special symbol that is currently being performed, the special symbol 2 forced stop processing 44 is executed (Y911). Details of this special symbol 2 forced stop processing 44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 1309.

In this way, in the second special symbol stop process 44 (Y241), when the specified change time of the second special symbol being changed has elapsed (Y901: Yes), a process is executed to stop the change display at the symbol that indicates the result of the second special symbol lottery game. Also, when the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol that indicates a jackpot and a jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win change state is set (Y910: Yes), a process is executed (Y911) to forcibly stop the second special symbol being changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 1309, we will explain the special pattern 2 forced stop process 44 (Y911), which is one process of the second special pattern change stop process 44 (FIG. 1308, Y241). FIG. 1309 is a flowchart showing this special pattern 2 forced stop process 44 (Y911).

In the special symbol 2 forced stop process 44 (Fig. 1309, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Bg is on (Y631). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Bg is on (Y631: Yes), the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Bg is set to off (Y632), and then a special symbol 2 change stop command indicating that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203Bg is off is set (Y633). Then, the change type of the second special symbol is set to miss (Y634). Although not shown, after the process of Y634, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss symbol, and a special symbol 2 confirmation command for the second special symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203Bg is not on (Y631: No), this means that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the variation of the second special pattern is set (Y635), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this 44th control example, when the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is turned on (the timing when the fluctuation that results in a jackpot with the first special symbol stops), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly interrupted and stopped even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has not yet elapsed. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a fluctuating manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a jackpot game for only one of the lottery results, which makes it possible to suppress gambling. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be increased.

In addition, in this 44th control example, when the first special symbol starts to change when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, the second special symbol change stop flag kf is turned on. As described above, in this 44th control example, in the normal state, the change time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds). Therefore, if the change display of the second special symbol has already started when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win and the change display of the second special symbol continues, the set time-saving win change state will end before the stop display of the changing second special symbol, and a problem may occur in which the player cannot execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving win change state.

Here, by configuring the stop flag kf for the second special pattern to be turned on when the first special pattern starts to change when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature, when the change of the first special pattern that won the time-saving feature starts, the change of the second special pattern that is currently changing is discarded, so that a new drawing for the second special pattern can be held in the time-saving feature winning change state, and a problem in which the player cannot draw for the second special pattern in the time-saving feature winning change state can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 1310, we will explain the special pattern 2 small win stop process 44 (Y913), which is one process of the second special pattern change stop process 44 (FIG. 1308, y241). FIG. 1310 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern 2 small win stop process 44 (Y913).

In the special chart 2 small win stop process 44 (Fig. 1310, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small win type is small win B (Y931), and if it is determined to be small win B (Y931: Yes), the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to on (Y932), and a special chart 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is on is set (Y933). Then, a small win scenario corresponding to the selected small win type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y931 that the win is not a small win B (Y931: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is set to on (Y937), a special chart 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is on is set (Y938), and processing of Y934 is performed.

In this way, in this 44th control example, it is configured to be possible to discard the first special symbol that is changing not only for a specific big win type, but also for a specific small win type. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the small win type as well, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 44th control example, the special symbol 1 change stop flag is set to ON when the second special symbol indicating a small win B win stops changing, but this is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 change stop flag may be set to ON when the second special symbol that won the small win B starts changing. Also, the first special symbol may be discarded at the start of the small win game, or at the end of the small win game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1311, the contents of the jackpot control process 44 (Y1004) executed in the main process will be explained. FIG. 1311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 44 (Y1004). This jackpot control process 44 (Y1004) differs only in that it executes the jackpot end process 44 (Y11613) instead of the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) of the jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 403) in the 11th control example described above, and the other processes are the same as those in the 11th control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1312, the contents of the jackpot end process 44 (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 1312 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 44 (Y11613). When the jackpot end process 44 is executed, the time-saving limit update process 44 (Y2701) is executed first. A detailed explanation of the time-saving limit update process 44 (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1313, but it executes processing to set the upper limit value at which a high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set in the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba, and to update (subtract) the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba that has already been set.

Now, referring to FIG. 1313, we will explain the details of time-saving limit update process 44 (Y2701), which is one process within jackpot end process 44 (see Y11613 in FIG. 1312). FIG. 1313 is a flowchart showing the contents of time-saving limit update process 44 (Y2701). In this time-saving limit update process 44 (Y2701), a process is executed to set an upper limit value for which a high probability state of consecutive normal symbols can be set, and to update the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value.

In the time-saving limit update process 44 (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba is greater than 0 (Y3001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba is not greater than 0, that is, that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203Ba is set to 10 (Y3005) and the time-saving flag is set to ON (Y3006). Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba is decremented by 1 (Y3002), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba after the decrement is 0 (Y3003). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba after the decrement is 0 (Y3003: Yes), the upper limit value at which the high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag 203Bh is set to ON (Y3004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y3004, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203Ba after the decrement is not 0 (Y3004: No), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times, but this is not limited to this and may be set to one of multiple settings, such as 20 times or 30 times.

Returning to FIG. 1312, the explanation will be continued. After executing the time-saving limit update process 44 (Y2701), it is determined whether the time-saving limit reached flag 203Bh is on (Y2702), and if it is determined that the time-saving limit reached flag 203Bh is on (Y2702: Yes), information indicating the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set (Y2707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, if it is determined that the time-saving limit reaching flag 203Bh is not on (Y2702: No), information indicating the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2704), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is set as the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h and the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab based on the jackpot type selection 43 table 202Ab (Y2705), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (Y2706), and the process of Y2707 is performed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 44th control example, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set consecutively after the end of a jackpot game, and the number of times that a state advantageous to the player can be set consecutively is limited, thereby preventing the player from getting excessive prize balls and encouraging his or her gambling urge.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 44th control example, the configuration is such that the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern is not set after the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 44th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1314 to Fig. 1316, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that, as shown in Fig. 1285 and Fig. 1286, the performance content related to the special pattern variation executed during the first time-saving state is different, and a process for determining the performance mode of the performance executed during the first time-saving state is executed. The control process content related to the above-mentioned differences will be described below.

In this 44th control example, the control processing related to the execution processing of the special pattern lottery and the execution processing of the special pattern variation executed by the main control unit 110 is different from the above-mentioned 43rd control example, so the contents of the various commands output from the main control unit 110 are also different, and the contents of the control processing on the voice lamp control unit 113 side executed based on receiving various commands output from the main control unit 110 are also different. However, since this difference is the same as the control processing on the voice lamp control unit 113 side executed in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern (so-called simultaneous variation specification) like the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example such as the above-mentioned 12th control example and 13th control example, a description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1314, the contents of variable presentation setting process 44 (S4304C in FIG. 1314) will be explained. FIG. 1314 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable presentation setting process 44 (S4304C). This variable presentation setting process 44 (S4304C) differs from variable presentation setting process 43 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see S4304B in FIG. 1280) in that it additionally executes special pattern 1 variable presentation setting process (S4402C) for setting the presentation mode corresponding to the first special pattern variation executed during the first time-saving state, and special pattern 2 variable presentation setting process (S4401C) for setting the presentation mode corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the first time-saving state, but the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol 2 variable performance setting process (S4401C) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1315. FIG. 1315 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol 2 variable performance setting process (S4401C). In this special symbol 2 variable performance setting process (S4401C), various processes are executed to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation to indicate that the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is a winning combination (a big win or a small win).

First, when the special symbol 2 variable performance setting process (S4401C) is executed, the result of this special symbol lottery is read (S4501C), and it is determined whether the read result is a winning combination (big win, small win) (S4502C). If it is determined that the result is not a winning combination (S4502C: No), the variable performance mode is determined based on the lottery result for that variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4503C), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4502C that a winning combination has been achieved (S4502C: Yes), the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is read (S4504), and it is determined whether the current winning combination is a winning combination resulting from reaching the time-saving limit (S4505C). If it is determined that the winning combination is not a winning combination resulting from reaching the time-saving limit (S4505C: No), the processing proceeds to S4503C described above.

If it is determined in the process of S4505C that the time-saving limit has been reached and a win has been made, i.e., if the result of this special pattern lottery is such that the first time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, but the normal state is set by the time-saving limit process (S4505C: Yes), it is decided to execute the pseudo left-hand hit mode (presentation) based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation and the remaining number of time-saving plays (S4506C).

Here, the processing contents executed in S4506C will be explained in detail. In this 44th control example, during the period of the second special symbol variation indicating a win when the time-saving limit is reached, the first special symbol lottery is executed, so that the currently set first time-saving state can be ended before the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Then, during the period until the second special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed (remaining variation time), it is determined whether the time-saving end condition of the currently set first time-saving state can be established by left-handed play, and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition of the currently set first time-saving state can be established by left-handed play, a pseudo left-handed play performance (see FIG. 1285(b) and FIG. 1286) is executed to encourage the player to play left-handed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 1291, the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example is configured to be able to determine, when a winning combination is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, the corresponding second special symbol's fluctuation time of 5 seconds, 60 seconds, or 180 seconds. In other words, when a winning combination other than the time-saving limit reaching winning combination is won, a short fluctuation time (e.g., 5 seconds) is set, which is advantageous to the player in increasing the time efficiency of the game, but when a time-saving limit reaching winning combination is won, the longer the winning fluctuation time, the easier it is to establish the time-saving end condition within that fluctuation time, so a long fluctuation time (e.g., 180 seconds) is more advantageous to the player than a short fluctuation time (e.g., 5 seconds).

In the process of S4506C, at least when the change time of the change is 60 seconds or 180 seconds, it is decided to execute the pseudo left hit effect (mode). Note that if the execution of the pseudo left hit effect (mode) is not decided, even if the time-saving limit reaching hit is won, the pseudo left hit effect is not executed, and the second special symbol change effect is executed in the same presentation mode as when a hit other than the time-saving limit reaching hit is won, and the player is notified during the jackpot game that the current jackpot game is a jackpot game based on the time-saving limit reaching hit. In this way, by making it possible to determine the same presentation mode for a part of the second special symbol change effect indicating the time-saving limit reaching hit (when the pseudo left hit effect is not executed) and the second special symbol change effect indicating a hit other than the time-saving limit reaching hit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the time-saving limit processing is executed.

In the process of S4507C, if it is determined that the pseudo left-hand hit mode (effect) has been selected (S4507: Yes), then a display command corresponding to the pseudo left-hand hit mode is set (S4508C), and then it is determined whether the number of remaining time-saving times until the time-saving end condition of the currently set first time-saving state is met is less than three (S4509). If it is determined that it is less than three (S4509C: Yes), since it is a situation in which it is easy to meet the time-saving end condition based on the first special pattern lottery during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation, a display command indicating a performance mode of 80% happiness is set (S4510C), the pseudo left-hand hit flag 223Ba is set to ON (S4512C), the determined value is set to the happiness counter 223Bb (S4513C), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4509C that the remaining number of time-saving times is not less than three, that is, if it is determined that it is difficult to establish the time-saving end condition based on the first special pattern lottery during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation (S4509C: No), a display command indicating a presentation mode of a happiness level of 20% is set (S4511C), the processes of S4512C and S4513C are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol 1 variable performance setting process (S4402C) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1316. FIG. 1316 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol 1 variable performance setting process (S4402C). In this special symbol 1 variable performance setting process (S4402C), the first time-saving state is set, and processing is executed to determine the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the pseudo left-hit performance.

When the special chart 1 variable performance setting process (S4402C) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo left-hitting flag 223Ba is set to ON (S4601C), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4601C: Yes), the result of this first special pattern lottery is obtained (S4602C), and it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is established by this first special pattern lottery (S4603C). If it is determined by the process of S4603C that the time-saving end condition is not established (S4603C: No), the happiness value corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times is determined (S4604C), the determined value is added to the happiness counter 223Bb (S4605C), a display command corresponding to the value of the happiness counter 223Bb after the addition is set (S4606C), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603C, if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met (S4603C: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the presentation mode corresponding to 100% happiness (S4603C), a display command is set to indicate the remaining fluctuation time of the currently executing special chart 2 winning fluctuation (S4608C), the pseudo left-hit flag 223Ba is set to off (S4609C), the value of the happiness counter 223Bb is cleared to 0 (S4610C), and this process is terminated.

Conventionally, there have been pachinko machines that are configured to allow a jackpot game to be executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. Furthermore, some machines are configured to allow a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) to be set as the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. In this way, pachinko machines 10 that are configured to allow the time-saving state to be set provide an advantageous game state for players who expect to execute more jackpot games, since it makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, a jackpot game is executed based on the result of a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and by increasing the probability that the time-saving state will be set again after the jackpot game ends (probability of the time-saving state continuing), it is possible to motivate players to play with the aim of setting the time-saving state, and therefore a pachinko machine 10 designed to have a high probability of the time-saving state continuing has been proposed.

However, in pachinko machines 10 designed with a high probability of the time-saving state continuing, there is a risk that excessive bonuses (prize balls paid out in a jackpot game) may be awarded to the player, so specifications that reduce the number of prize balls that can be awarded in one jackpot game are generally known. In pachinko machines 10 configured in this way, the number of prize balls awarded to the player in one jackpot game is small, but by continuing the time-saving state multiple times, the player can be provided with many jackpot games, which increases the player's motivation to play. However, there was a problem that for players who ended the time-saving state after only one jackpot game despite the time-saving state being set, it was not possible to award a small number of prize balls, which significantly reduced their motivation to play.

In response to this, a pachinko machine 10 has been proposed that has a game specification (so-called time-saving limit) that sets an upper limit on the number of times the time-saving state is repeatedly set, as a game specification that does not reduce the number of prize balls that can be awarded in one jackpot game and does not lower the probability of the time-saving state continuing. By using this time-saving limit, even if the pachinko machine 10 is designed to set the time-saving state with high continuity, if a jackpot game is played in a state where the number of times the time-saving state is repeatedly set reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times) (when the time-saving limit number is reached), it is possible to forcibly set the normal state after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, even if the probability of the time-saving state continuing is designed to be high, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from continuing excessively, and to prevent the player from being given excessive bonuses (prize balls).

However, in pachinko machines 10 with the time-saving limit described above, an upper limit is set on the number of jackpot games that can be played during the period during which the time-saving state continues (advantageous period), and when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the normal state is set, which causes a problem in that the player's motivation to play and play more jackpot games is reduced.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this 44th control example is configured to be able to end the time-saving state while a special symbol variation that results in a winning combination is being executed during the time-saving state. In other words, it is configured to be able to transition from the time-saving state to the normal state when a winning combination has already been determined and before a jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, it is configured so that a second special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) can be executed to indicate the result of the second special pattern lottery while a first special pattern change to indicate the result of the first special pattern lottery is being executed (during the special pattern 1 change period). For example, it is configured so that a time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state can be established by executing the first special pattern lottery during the special pattern 2 change period to indicate that a win has been won in the second special pattern lottery that is mainly executed during the time-saving state.

By configuring it in this way, even if a winning variation that would reach the time-saving limit is executed, the time-saving state can be ended before the winning variation is stopped and displayed, so it is possible to prevent the normal state from being forcibly set by the time-saving limit.

Furthermore, in this 44th control example, during the period of the second special pattern change for the winning of the time-saving limit reaching prize, it is determined whether it is possible or difficult to establish the time-saving end condition by executing the first special pattern lottery, and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is possible to be established, for example, if a long period (180 seconds) is set as the change time for the second special pattern change for the winning of the time-saving limit reaching prize, or the number of remaining time-saving times in the time-saving state set at the time when the second special pattern change for the winning of the time-saving limit reaching prize is executed is small, even while the first time-saving state is being executed (during the winning change for the time-saving limit reaching prize), an effect is executed that pseudo-notifies the player that the first time-saving state has ended, and a pseudo left-hand hit effect is executed to encourage the player to play with the left hand.

In this way, instead of informing the player that the first time-saving state is continuing and encouraging the player to play left-handed, a presentation is executed to encourage left-handed play after pseudo-informing the player that the first time-saving state has ended, allowing the player to smoothly play left-handed.

In addition, in this 44th control example, as in the above-mentioned 43rd control example, since the time-saving end condition has an end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed as the time-saving end condition, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not the time-saving end condition can be established during the second special pattern variation period for the time-saving limit reaching hit winning (whether or not the first special pattern lottery can be executed until the time-saving end condition is established). For example, as the time-saving end condition, an end condition that is established based on the result of the special pattern lottery, for example, an end condition that is established when a small jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery or a specific time-saving pattern is won, may be set. In this case, whether or not it is possible to execute the first special pattern lottery multiple times (for example, twice) during the second special pattern variation period for the time-saving limit reaching hit winning is determined based only on the variation time of the second special pattern variation for the time-saving limit reaching hit winning, and if it is determined that it is possible to execute the first special pattern lottery multiple times (for example, twice), a pseudo left-hit performance may be configured to be executable.

In this case, the value of the happiness counter 223Bb is set according to the remaining number of time-saving times, and based on the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the pseudo left-hand hit performance, if the time-saving end condition is established, a performance mode in which the value of the happiness counter 223Bb suddenly rises to a value corresponding to 100% can be determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to establish the time-saving end condition at any timing, so that a player who has had the second special symbol variation executed in response to a win when the time-saving limit is reached can be made to play left-hand games eagerly to execute the first special symbol lottery until the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in order to avoid the normal state being set based on the time-saving limit.

<First Modification of 44th Control Example>
The first modified example of the 44th control example described above will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example described above was configured to avoid the execution of the time-saving limit process by executing the first special pattern lottery and establishing the time-saving end condition during the period in which the second special pattern variation is being executed when the time-saving limit reaching hit is won by the second special pattern lottery. And, by configuring it so that one of the variation times (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 180 seconds) with different lengths is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special pattern variation when the time-saving limit reaching hit is won, it was configured to make the ease of establishing the time-saving end condition different during the second special pattern variation that is won by the time-saving limit reaching hit.

However, in the above-mentioned 44th control example, when the result of the second special pattern lottery is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the same variation pattern table (variation pattern 44 table 202Bd2 for time-saving state) is referenced to determine the variation pattern (variation time) regardless of the type of winning combination or whether the time-saving limit has been reached. Therefore, even when a winning combination is made that does not reach the time-saving limit, a variation pattern with an unnecessarily long variation time (for example, 180 seconds) is selected, which causes a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreases as the playing efficiency decreases.

In contrast, the first modified example of the 44th control example differs from the above-mentioned 44th control example in that the configuration of the variation pattern table that is referenced when a winning combination is obtained in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state (first time-saving state) is different.

In the variation pattern table used in this first modified example, each variation pattern is specified so that a different variation pattern is selected when a big jackpot is won and when a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state (first time-saving state).

Specifically, when the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state (first time-saving state) is a small win, the following change patterns are specified: a change time of "5 seconds" for the acquired value of the change type counter CS1 in the range "0-49", a change time of "60 seconds" for the range "50-149", and a change time of "90 seconds" for the range "150-198". When the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state (first time-saving state) is a big win, the following change patterns are specified: a change time of "90 seconds" for the acquired value of the change type counter CS1 in the range "0-49", a change time of "120 seconds" for the range "50-149", and a change time of "180 seconds" for the range "150-198".

In other words, it is configured so that a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected when a big jackpot is won than when a small jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to establish the time-saving end condition during the special pattern fluctuation period when a win with a low probability of winning (big jackpot) is won as a time-saving limit reaching win than when a win with a high probability of winning (small jackpot), so the added value of winning a win with a low probability of winning (big jackpot) can be given to the player.

In addition, as described above, in this first modified example, the variation pattern of the variable time (for example, the variable time "5 seconds" when a small jackpot is won, the variable time "180 seconds" when a jackpot is won, etc.) that differs depending on whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot or a small jackpot is won can be selected, or the selection ratio of the variable time (for example, "90 seconds") that can be selected in either case can be changed. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to eliminate the commonly selectable variable time variation pattern depending on the type of winning, or to make only the commonly selectable variable time variation pattern selectable, and to change only the selection ratio of each variation pattern. In this case, as in the first modified example of this 44th control example, it is preferable to configure the device to have at least one selectable variable time variation pattern (common variable pattern) whether a small jackpot is won or a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, when a common variable pattern is selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery until the special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates the lottery result.

Furthermore, if the time-saving state (first time-saving state) is configured to be able to be set continuously through jackpot play and the number of times the time-saving state (first time-saving state) can be set continuously is configured to be distinguishable, the number of times a win occurs (remaining limit number of times) until the time-saving limit process is executed can be ascertained, and a different variation pattern can be selected based on the value indicated by the remaining limit number of times.

In this case, for example, if a winning combination is achieved in the second special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state, the remaining limit number (value of time-saving limit number counter 203ja) described above is determined, and the variation pattern of the second special pattern variation is determined by referring to a different variation pattern table based on the determination result. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the system so that a winning variation with a longer variation time is more likely to be executed when the remaining limit number is small than when the time-saving limit number is large.

By configuring it in this way, when the player is in the first time-saving state and wins a prize that does not trigger the time-saving limit process, an unnecessarily long variable time (e.g., 180 seconds) is set, which can prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example, the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state (first time-saving state) is configured to be selected by referring to the same variation pattern table (time-saving state variation pattern 44 table 202Bd2), but without being limited to this, for example, the variation pattern table referenced during the first time-saving state and the variation pattern table referenced during the winning variation upon reaching the time-saving limit may be configured to be different.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the fluctuation pattern table referenced during a winning fluctuation upon reaching the time-saving limit in the first time-saving state to be more likely to select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation than the fluctuation pattern table referenced during a winning fluctuation upon reaching the non-time-saving limit in the first time-saving state.

By configuring it in this way, while a short change time pattern is set as the change pattern of the first special symbol change that is executed during the winning change when the time-saving limit is reached (during the pseudo left-hit performance), it is possible to prevent a short change time pattern from being set in the first time-saving state other than during the winning change when the time-saving limit is reached, making it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery multiple times during the first time-saving state.

Furthermore, by changing the variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol depending on the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja, it is possible to make the first special symbol vary for a short time when the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is "1", that is, when the first time-saving state in which the time-saving limit can be won by the next winning is set. By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving limit-reaching winning variation of the second special symbol is executed, the first special symbol will be in the midst of a long variation (e.g., a 600-second variation), making it difficult to execute multiple first special symbol lotteries during the pseudo left-hit performance.

In addition, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the system to execute a process that, when one of the special pattern lotteries is won, forces the other special pattern change that is in progress to stop. By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving limit reaching win is won in the second special pattern lottery, the first special pattern change that is in progress can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the second special pattern change starts. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery by playing left-hand during the pseudo left-hand hit performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 44th control example, when a winning combination for reaching the time-saving limit is won in the second special pattern lottery, a determination is made as to whether it is possible to end the time-saving state by playing from the left based on the remaining number of time-saving times to establish the currently set condition for ending the time-saving state of the first time-saving state and the set time for the second special pattern change, and if it is determined that it is possible to end the time-saving state, a pseudo left-hit effect can be executed. However, other elements may be used as the execution conditions for the pseudo left-hit effect. For example, a determination is made as to whether or not the first special pattern change is being executed at the time when the winning combination for reaching the time-saving limit is started, and if it is determined that the first special pattern change is being executed, the remaining number of times the first special pattern change is being executed during execution is executed. The variation time is determined, and if the remaining variation time is longer than the variation time of the second special pattern variation (winning variation per time-saving limit reached) being executed this time, that is, if a new first special pattern variation cannot be executed during the winning variation per time-saving limit reached, the pseudo left-hit effect may be configured not to be executed, or even if the remaining variation time of the first special pattern variation being executed is shorter than the second special pattern variation being executed this time (winning variation per time-saving limit reached), the difference time between the remaining variation time of the first special pattern variation being executed and the variation time of the winning variation per time-saving limit reached may be calculated, and the execution ratio of the pseudo left-hit effect may be made different between cases where the difference time is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) and cases where it is longer (the pseudo left-hit effect is easier to execute when it is longer than when it is shorter). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the time-saving end condition cannot be established even though the pseudo left-hit effect has been executed.

As explained above, in the above-mentioned 44th control example, like the above-mentioned 12th and 13th control examples, the second special pattern can be displayed while the first special pattern is being displayed (the first special pattern can be displayed while the second special pattern is being displayed). And, like the above-mentioned 12th control example, when one of the special pattern lotteries is won (a big win or a small win), the other special pattern is stopped or forcibly stopped in a display mode indicating a miss at the timing when the special pattern corresponding to the winning win is stopped according to the type of winning, but without being limited to this, the other special pattern may be stopped in a display mode indicating a miss regardless of the type of winning, or the other special pattern may be stopped.

In the above-mentioned 44th control example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be able to be executed in parallel, and the variable display mode (stop display mode) of the special symbol variation (other special symbol variation being executed at the time when the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery that is stopped and displayed later is configured to be variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed earlier, regardless of the type of the special symbol lottery that was executed earlier, but without being limited to this, the content of the special symbol lottery that is executed later may be made different based on the result of the special symbol lottery that was executed earlier. In this case, for example, when one special symbol lottery is won, it is preferable to configure it so that a lottery that does not win in the other special symbol lottery (invalid lottery) is executed until the special symbol variation for indicating the winning is stopped and displayed. By configuring it in this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are performed in parallel, providing the player with an efficient game experience, while preventing the player from winning any special symbol type and being awarded excessive bonuses in a short period of time.

Furthermore, as a trigger (lottery result) for executing an invalid lottery based on the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, a trigger may be set that is established regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery being a winning win (e.g., a big win, a small win, or a time-saving pattern win), or the trigger for executing an invalid lottery may be established only when a specific win (e.g., a big win) is won. By configuring in this way, during the period when a variable performance is being executed to indicate that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery has been won as a winning win (e.g., a big win, a small win, or a time-saving pattern), it is possible to make it difficult for a player to know whether an invalid lottery is being executed as the other special pattern lottery. In this case, it is preferable to configure a suggestion performance for suggesting to a player whether the trigger for executing an invalid lottery has been established using a part of the performance mode of the variable performance described above. This configuration allows players to have the fun of predicting whether or not an invalid lottery is being executed, and allows players who are aware of the timing of the execution of an invalid lottery to have the fun of predicting which special pattern change currently in progress indicates which winning combination, by understanding the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation.

In addition, the special pattern lottery executed as an invalid lottery may be configured to execute a special pattern lottery that does not win any winning combination (e.g., big win, small win, time-saving pattern), or may be configured to execute a special pattern lottery that does not win any winning combination (e.g., big win). By configuring it in this way, during the invalid lottery, a special pattern lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player (a special pattern lottery with fewer winning types that can win) will be executed than a normal special pattern lottery in which the trigger for executing the invalid lottery has not been established, but since at least one type of winning lottery is executed, it is possible to prevent a special pattern lottery that is useless to the player (no type of winning lottery is executed) from being executed, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

In this case, it is preferable to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on a winning win (e.g., a small winning win) that can be won in another special pattern lottery executed during the limit-reaching winning variation as the time-saving end condition for terminating the first time-saving state that has been set. By configuring in this way, even if it is difficult to establish a time-saving end condition (time-saving count end condition) that is established based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the remaining variation period of the limit-reaching winning variation, it is possible to establish the time-saving end condition based on a winning win, so that the player can be motivated to play to end the time-saving state until the limit-reaching winning variation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the 44th control example described above, the process is configured to execute a process to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition is met at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, i.e., the end timing of the special symbol variation, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be possible to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition is met at the timing when the special symbol variation is executed, i.e., the start timing of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition is met can be shortened, making it easier for players to play with enthusiasm to execute a new special symbol lottery until the limit-reaching winning variation is stopped and displayed.

<45th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1317 to Fig. 1328. The pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example described above in that the performance content executed when the time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern A) for which the second time-saving state is set as a result of the first special pattern lottery executed by left-hand play is different. Also, the performance content executed to suggest the currently set game state during left-hand play (normal state or during play in the second time-saving state) is different. The other contents are the same, and the description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example, when a time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state is won, a process for selecting a background mode type is executed, and an image of the background mode corresponding to the selected background mode type is displayed. By configuring in this way, the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict that the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving symbol win. However, in the above-mentioned 43rd control example, since a process for selecting a background mode type is executed every time a time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, there is a problem that the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is frequently switched, resulting in a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example is configured to transition to a presentation mode (high probability mode) that indicates that the second time-saving state is more likely to be set than the normal presentation mode (normal mode) when the identification information (second presentation pattern) indicating that the time-saving pattern has been won in the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and during the high probability mode, a presentation is executed that makes it difficult for the player to understand that the time-saving pattern has been won in the special pattern lottery.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example is configured to be able to set a presentation mode (normal mode) that makes it easy to inform the player that he or she has won the time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state, and a presentation mode (high probability mode) that makes it difficult to inform. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not he or she has won the time-saving symbol, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting whether the current game state is the normal state or the second time-saving state.

In addition, when the high probability mode is set as the presentation mode, even if a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the presentation mode during the high probability mode that is already being executed will not change. Therefore, even if a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state is frequently won, it is possible to prevent the presentation mode from frequently switching and the execution of a presentation that is difficult for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in this 45th control example, the display mode of the identification information (second performance pattern) for indicating that the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is set has been won can be selected from display modes (watermelon, cherry, carrot) that differ in the length of time that the set high probability mode will continue, and the display mode of the second performance pattern is selected based on the type of the won time-saving pattern and the result of a preview of the winning information contained in the already acquired first special pattern reservation (special pattern 1 reservation).

In other words, if the time-saving pattern is won in this special pattern lottery, the display mode of the second performance pattern can be determined to indicate that the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is set is won, based on the duration of the second time-saving state (number of time-saving times) that is set based on the time-saving pattern won in this special pattern lottery, and the measurement period of the second time-saving state (number of time-saving times) that is set based on the result of the special pattern lottery that is executed later.

Specifically, the duration of the second time-saving state is calculated based on the result of the current special pattern lottery and the results of the preview of the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired, and the second performance pattern is displayed in different display modes depending on the length of the calculated duration.

By configuring it in this way, even if the currently winning time-saving pattern is a time-saving pattern that can set the second time-saving state for a short period of time (for example, time-saving pattern A1 that grants one time of time saving), the display mode of the second performance pattern can be made different depending on whether or not there is a winning state including a time-saving pattern winning in the pre-read winning information. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the display mode of the second performance pattern is determined based only on the result of this special pattern lottery, it is possible to more easily display the second performance pattern in a display mode that suggests that the second time-saving state will continue for a long period of time, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

When the second performance symbol is displayed, the performance mode transitions to a high probability mode. This high probability mode is configured to continue for a period of time according to the type of the displayed second performance symbol. For example, when a "watermelon" is displayed as the display mode of the second performance symbol, the high probability mode continues for a period until the special pattern lottery has been performed 10 times, when a "cherry" is displayed, the high probability mode continues for a period until the special pattern lottery has been performed 20 times, and when a "carrot" is displayed, the high probability mode continues for a period until the special pattern lottery has been performed 30 times.

The longer the duration calculated, including the results of the look-ahead, the easier it is to set a high-probability mode with a longer duration than if the duration is shorter. This configuration allows the player to predict that the second time-saving state will continue for a longer period of time if "cherry" or "carrot" is displayed as the display mode of the second performance pattern, rather than "watermelon", and therefore provides a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in this 45th control example, similar to the above-mentioned 43rd control example, if a time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern A1) that sets the second time-saving state for a short period (one time of time-saving) is won, the second time-saving state for one time is set regardless of the remaining period (remaining number of time-saving times) of the currently set second time-saving state. In other words, even if a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state for a long period (for example, time-saving pattern A3) is won, if the time-saving pattern A1 is won in the next special pattern lottery, there is a risk that the second time-saving state will end after only two special pattern lotteries have been executed since the second time-saving state was first set.

In this case, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example described above, if the presentation mode for indicating the winning of the time-saving pattern is determined based on the result of the currently executed special pattern lottery (winning of the time-saving pattern), during the next first special pattern change after the presentation indicating that the time-saving pattern A3 has been won (presentation for transitioning to an advantageous mode) is executed, as shown in FIG. 1255, a presentation pattern indicating that the lottery result is unfavorable to the player (contents 810Ca with "pinch" written on it) is displayed, which causes a problem of reducing the player's motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the 45th control example, the display mode of the second performance pattern to indicate that the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is set has been won can be determined based not only on the result of the special pattern lottery but also on the results of the advance reading of the already acquired reserved special pattern 1. Therefore, even if the time-saving pattern A3 has been won, if the already acquired reserved special pattern 1 at that time contains winning information to indicate that the time-saving pattern A1 (one time time saving) has been won, the display mode of the second performance pattern can be displayed in the display mode to indicate a high probability mode with a short duration ("watermelon").

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a second time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player has been set immediately after a second time-saving state that is advantageous to the player has been set, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

In addition, in this 45th control example, when the high probability mode is set, it continues for a predetermined period regardless of the set game state, and then transitions to the normal mode. Then, after the high probability mode ends, if the remaining period of the second time-saving state is a predetermined period (for example, 10 or more remaining time-savings), a pseudo second performance pattern can be displayed in the same display mode as the second performance pattern as a display mode to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. Then, a transition to the high probability mode is made based on the pseudo second performance pattern being displayed in a stopped state.

In other words, in this 45th control example, when the second time-saving state is set, a high-probability mode is set for a predetermined period, so that the game state (remaining number of time-saving times) at the end of the high-probability mode will differ depending on the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the high-probability mode. For example, there may be cases where the time-saving pattern A1 is won during the high-probability mode and the normal state is already set when the high-probability mode ends, or the time-saving pattern A3 is won just before the end of the high-probability mode and the second time-saving state with many remaining time-saving times is set when the high-probability mode ends. Therefore, when the second time-saving state with 10 or more remaining time-saving times is set at the time the high-probability mode ends, the pseudo second performance pattern is stopped and displayed, so that it is possible to transition to the high-probability mode again even if the time-saving pattern is not won (missed) in the special pattern lottery.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the high probability mode from being set for a long period of time even though the second time-saving state is set, which can reduce the player's motivation to play. Also, since the pseudo second performance pattern, which is the same display mode as the second performance pattern, is displayed as a static display mode to show the result of a special pattern lottery that has not actually won the time-saving pattern, it is possible to easily display the second performance pattern, which indicates a time-saving pattern win, as a display mode to show the result of a special pattern lottery executed during normal mode.

Furthermore, in this 45th control example, once the high probability mode is set, the high probability mode is configured to continue until a fixed number of special pattern draws (10, 20, 30) have been performed, regardless of the results of subsequent special pattern draws. Therefore, when the second performance pattern is displayed stationary in a display mode ("carrot") indicating that the second time-saving state will continue for a long period of time, the player can be motivated to continue playing at least until the high probability mode ends.

<About the content of the performance of the pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1317 to Fig. 1319, characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example will be described. As described above, in this 45th control example, a notification effect is configured to be executable to indicate to the player whether the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the game state (normal state, second time-saving state) in which the left-hand hit game is executed is the time-saving symbol winning (time-saving symbol A1).

Fig. 1317(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed when winning time-saving A1 (one time of time-saving) during normal mode, Fig. 1317(b) is a diagram showing some of the various variable effects executed during high probability mode, Fig. 1318(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed when winning a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state in a special pattern lottery executed during high probability mode, and Fig. 1318(b) is a diagram showing an example of the ending screen of high probability mode. And Fig. 1319 is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the second time-saving state in which normal mode is set as the effect mode is transitioned to high probability mode by stopping the display of the pseudo second effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 1317(a), the pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example described above, is configured so that during the normal state in which left-hand play is performed and during the second time-saving state, a display mode showing the result of the special pattern lottery is displayed from within the treasure chest 810C as a variable presentation showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

Figure 1317 (a) shows a state where the special symbol that won the time-saving A1 (time-saving symbol A1) in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is frozen and displayed, and in the display area Dm1, the third symbol is frozen and displayed in the display mode of "353" to indicate that the first special symbol lottery has won the time-saving symbol of the type (time-saving symbol A1) in which the second time-saving state with one time of time saving is set. Furthermore, in the display area Dm9 formed in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved icons hr1 to hr3 are displayed to indicate that there are three reserved special symbols 1, as a display mode to indicate that the reserved special symbols 1 have been acquired.

The state shown in FIG. 1317(a) is a state in which the player has won the second time-saving state with one time of time-saving, but of the three already-acquired special symbol 1 reserves, the pre-read result of the special symbol 1 reserve (special symbol 1 reserve corresponding to reserve icon hr1) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery to be executed next is time-saving A2 (time-saving symbol A2) in which the second time-saving state with 20 times of time-saving is set during the second time-saving state. Therefore, as the second performance symbol to show the result of this special symbol lottery, the contents 810Ca of the treasure chest 810C are displayed with "cherries" added, and the words "Entering high probability mode 20 times" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode to inform the player that the game will move to a high probability mode with a duration of 20 times (20 special symbol lotteries).

In this way, by configuring the display mode of the second performance pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery to be able to be determined based on the result of the special pattern lottery and the result of the advance reading of the reserved special pattern 1, even if the time-saving pattern is consecutively won, it is possible to prevent the performance mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 from frequently switching, resulting in the execution of a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, in this 45th control example, when a time-saving pattern that sets the second time-saving state (for example, one time of time-saving) in which the time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied is won, and even if the acquired special pattern 1 reserve does not contain winning information indicating the time-saving pattern win, the second performance pattern with a display mode with a "cherry" is displayed with a low probability. By configuring in this way, even if the second time-saving state actually ends immediately, a high-probability mode can be set for a predetermined period (the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed 20 times), so that even during the normal state, the player can play while expecting that the second time-saving state is set, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Then, after the second performance symbol (cherry) shown in FIG. 1317(a) is stopped and displayed, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the next first special symbol lottery (the result of winning the time-saving A2 (time-saving symbol A2)), the display screen shown in FIG. 1317(b) is displayed.

Specifically, when the second performance symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance mode transitions from normal mode to high probability mode, and "High Probability Mode" is displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm to indicate that the high probability mode is in effect, and "Last 19 Times" is displayed in the display area Dm7 formed below the display area Dm4 to indicate the remaining period of the high probability mode. In other words, the high probability mode will continue until 19 more special symbol lotteries have been performed, regardless of the results of the special symbol lotteries during that time.

And if the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode, and the special symbol lottery that won the time-saving symbol has already been referenced when determining the display mode of the second performance symbol by the pre-reading process, the performance result of the target variable performance will be a performance result that does not indicate a time-saving symbol win (a performance result in which the second performance symbol is not stopped and displayed). Therefore, in FIG. 1317(b), even though the display mode "363" indicating that the time-saving symbol has been won (winning the time-saving symbol A2) is stopped and displayed in the display area Dm1, a variable performance is executed in which the contents 810ca with a "?" next to it are displayed as the performance result of the variable performance executed in the center of the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, if a time-saving symbol is won in a special symbol drawing executed during high probability mode, and the advance reading information regarding the special symbol drawing that won the time-saving symbol is not referenced when determining the display mode of the second performance symbol that is stopped and displayed when switching to high probability mode, that is, if a time-saving symbol in time-saving group A is won in the first special symbol drawing based on reserved special symbol 1 that has not been acquired at the time of switching to high probability mode, the remaining number of times (remaining number of special symbol drawing) until the ceiling privilege is awarded is displayed as the performance result of the variable performance, instead of stopping and displaying the second performance symbol.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this 45th control example, once the high probability mode has been entered, the high probability mode is configured to continue for a predetermined period of time regardless of the results of the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode. Therefore, even if a time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode and the duration of the second time-saving state changes, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of this change, providing the player with the fun of predicting the current game state.

Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode, information regarding the conditions (number of remaining special symbol lotteries) until the ceiling bonus is awarded can be provided. By configuring it in this way, information is provided for predicting whether or not the time-saving symbol has been won during the high probability mode, and more advantageous information can be provided to a player aiming to be awarded the ceiling bonus if the time-saving symbol is won during the high probability mode than if the time-saving symbol is not won, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 45th control example, the fewer the number of remaining special symbol draws until the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, that is, the fewer the number of remaining special symbol draws until the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, the easier it is to provide information indicating the number of remaining special symbol draws when a time-saving symbol is won during high probability mode. In other words, the number of remaining special symbol draws is more likely to be displayed when the number of remaining special symbol draws until the ceiling bonus is granted is small. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a large value (e.g., 800 remaining special symbol draws) from being displayed as the number of remaining special symbol draws, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

Next, if the player wins the time-saving A group in which the second time-saving state is set during high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 1318(a), the fact that the time-saving pattern has been won is notified, and instead, as a bonus, an effect is executed in which the number of times remaining until the ceiling (number of remaining special pattern draws) is displayed. In FIG. 1318(a), since the 969th special pattern change has occurred since the end of the previous big win game, the display area Dm7b displays "30 more times until the ceiling" as a display mode to indicate the number of times remaining until the ceiling, and the secondary display area Ds displays "Countdown to the ceiling has begun."

Once this display area Dm7b is formed, it will continue to be displayed until the ceiling bonus is awarded or until a big win is played, and the number of times the special symbol is drawn will be subtracted each time a special symbol is drawn. In this way, when a time-saving symbol is won during high probability mode, the number of times the time-saving symbol is newly set based on the time-saving symbol is won is not displayed, and instead, information different from the number of times the time-saving symbol is drawn (the number of times remaining until the ceiling) can be given to the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. It is preferable to configure the device to be able to execute a presentation in which the number of times remaining until the ceiling (the number of times the special symbol is drawn) is displayed with a low probability (for example, 1/100) even if the result of the special symbol lottery executed during high probability mode is a miss. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the time-saving symbol has been won when a presentation in which the number of times remaining until the ceiling (the number of times the special symbol is drawn) is displayed is executed.

When the high probability mode ends, the display mode shown in FIG. 1318(b) appears, that is, the contents 810ca marked with "END" are displayed from within the treasure chest 810c, the words "Transitioning to normal mode" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds, and the mode transitions to normal mode. The state shown in FIG. 1318(b) is a state in which the second time-saving state with 20 remaining time-saving times is set, but since the high probability mode is configured to continue only for a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the time-saving symbol is won, the mode will end and transition to normal mode even if the second time-saving state is set.

After that, if the revival conditions are met while in normal mode, as shown in FIG. 1319, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a pseudo second performance symbol is displayed and the game transitions back to high probability mode. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1319, since the number of remaining time-saving times in the second time-saving state is between 10 and 20, contents 810ca with an icon resembling a "watermelon" as a pseudo second performance symbol are displayed from the treasure chest 810c at the same time as the special symbol fluctuation indicating a miss is stopped, and "Entering high probability mode 10 times" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

In this way, in this 45th control example, when the game state set at the time when the high-probability mode ends is the second time-saving state and the number of remaining time-saving times is 10 or more, the second performance pattern is pseudo-stopped and displayed, making it possible to transition back to the high-probability mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a large discrepancy between the duration of the high-probability mode and the duration of the second time-saving state.

In addition, when a long period of the second time-saving state is set by winning one time-saving symbol, it is possible to execute an effect as if the time-saving symbol had been won multiple times by making it easier to artificially stop and display the second performance symbol. This increases the apparent probability of winning the time-saving symbol, and increases the player's motivation to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 1320, the progress of the game in this 45th control example and the flow of the effects to be executed will be explained. FIG. 1320(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery), FIG. 1320(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1), FIG. 1320(c) is a diagram showing the flow of the second effect symbol set for the result of the special symbol lottery, FIG. 1320(d) is a diagram showing the flow of the game state to be set, FIG. 1320(e) is a diagram showing the flow of the number of remaining time reductions, FIG. 1320(f) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect mode to be set, FIG. 1320 is a diagram showing the flow of the high probability counter 223Ca, and FIG. 1320(h) is a diagram showing the flow of other effects to be executed.

As shown in Figures 1320 (a) to (h), when the normal state is set, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, the contents 810ca with a "?" next to it will be displayed as the second performance pattern (see Figure 1317 (b)). Then, if the third special pattern lottery ch3 wins the time-saving A1 (time-saving pattern A1), which sets the second time-saving state with one time of time saving, since there are three special pattern 1 reserves that have been acquired (see Figure 1320 (b)), a pre-reading process is performed on the three special pattern 1 reserves, and it is determined that the special pattern 1 reserve corresponding to the next special pattern lottery ch4 to be executed contains winning information for winning the time-saving pattern A2, and a content 810ca (see Figure 1317 (a)) imitating a cherry is displayed as the second performance pattern, and after the special pattern fluctuation is displayed as stopped, the game state transitions from the normal state to the second time-saving state, and the performance mode transitions from the normal mode to the high probability mode (20 times) (see Figure 1320 (f)), and the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is set to "20" (see Figure 1320 (g)). In addition, in the special pattern lottery ch3, only the second time-saving state with one time of time-saving is set, so at that point the remaining number of time-saving times is set to one (see Figure 1320 (e)).

Next, special pattern lottery ch4 is executed during the second time-saving state, and the time-saving pattern A2 is won, but because the presentation mode is the high probability mode and the pre-read result indicating the lottery result is referenced when determining the display mode of the second presentation pattern indicating the lottery result of special pattern lottery ch3, the contents 810ca with a "?" are displayed as the second presentation pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that he or she has won the time-saving pattern in special pattern lottery ch4.

In fact, since the time-saving pattern A2, which sets the second time-saving state with 20 times of time-saving in the special pattern lottery ch4, is won, the remaining number of time-saving times is updated to 20. After that, even if the time-saving pattern A2 is won in the special pattern lottery ch7, which is executed when multiple miss fluctuations are executed and the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is subtracted to 2, the content 810ca with a "?" is displayed as the second performance pattern because the performance mode is in the high probability mode. Then, as a bonus given for winning the time-saving pattern during the second time-saving state, a countdown to the ceiling is displayed (see FIG. 1320(h)).

Furthermore, when the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is decremented to 0, the presentation mode transitions from high probability mode to normal mode, and when the special pattern selection ch11 is executed, the conditions for returning to the high probability mode are met, and even though the presentation result of the special pattern selection ch11 is a miss, the contents 810ca with a pseudo "watermelon" attached is displayed as the second presentation pattern, and the high probability mode is set again.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device in the 45th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1321 to Fig. 1323, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 45th control example will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 43rd control example in that the display mode of the identification information for indicating that the time-saving pattern has been won (the display mode of the second performance pattern) is different, the type of background image (the type of performance mode) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the game state (normal state, second time-saving state) in which the left-hand hit game is executed is different, and information regarding the condition (the number of remaining special pattern lotteries) until the regular privilege is granted when the time-saving pattern is won is displayed, and various electrical configurations related to the above-mentioned differences are different.

Specifically, the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example differs from the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see FIG. 1267 (a)), in that a second performance pattern selection table 222Ca and a ceiling information selection table 222Cb are added. In addition, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of this 45th control example differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see FIG. 1267(b)) in that it adds a high probability counter 223Ca, a performance mode storage area 223Cb, a ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, and a ceiling information flag 223Cd, and deletes the background mode storage area 223Aa and the non-transition flag 223Ac. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1321(a), the electrical configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 45th control example will be described. FIG. 1321(a) is a diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 45th control example. As shown in FIG. 1321(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 45th control example differs from the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 43rd control example described above (see FIG. 1267(a)) in that a second performance symbol selection table 222Ca and a ceiling information selection table 222Cb are added. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted.

The second performance symbol selection table 222Ca is a data table referenced to select a display mode (display mode of the second performance symbol) for indicating that a time-saving symbol for which the second time-saving state is set has been won in a first special symbol lottery executed with the normal mode set as the performance mode, and different display modes are defined based on the type of time-saving symbol that has been won (time-saving symbol A1 to time-saving symbol A4) and information regarding the result of a look-ahead process (pre-determination process) for the reserved memory of the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example is configured such that during left-hand play (either during normal play or play in which the second time-saving state is set), the normal mode and the high-probability mode can be set as presentation modes, and during normal mode, the second presentation pattern can be displayed as a stopped pattern to indicate that the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is set has been won. When the second presentation pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern, the presentation mode transitions from the normal mode to the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode continues for a period of time according to the display mode of the stopped second presentation pattern.

During the high probability mode, even if the time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second performance symbol is not stopped and displayed. In other words, during the high probability mode, it is configured to make it more difficult for the player to understand that he or she has won the time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state than during the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to transition to the high probability mode upon winning the time-saving symbol that sets the second time-saving state, but it is also possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the type of performance mode that has been set and the actual game state (normal state, second time-saving state), providing the player with the fun of predicting the game state.

The display mode of the second performance symbol can be set to a first display mode (watermelon icon) in which the duration of the high probability mode is relatively short (10 special symbol lotteries), a second display mode (cherry icon) in which the duration of the high probability mode is longer than the first display mode (watermelon icon), and a third display mode (carrot icon) in which the duration of the high probability mode is longer than the second display mode (cherry icon). The third display mode is easier to set in a situation in which the second time-saving state is more likely to continue for a long time than in a situation in which it is less likely to continue, and the first display mode is easier to set in a situation in which the second time-saving state is less likely to continue for a long time than in a situation in which it is more likely to continue. This configuration can arouse the player's interest in the display mode of the second time-saving symbol that is stopped and displayed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Now, referring to FIG. 1322, the detailed contents stipulated in the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca will be explained. FIG. 1322 is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents stipulated in the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca. As shown in FIG. 1322, in the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca, each selected symbol (display mode of the second effect symbol) is pre-defined in correspondence with the time-saving type (time-saving symbol type) won in this first special symbol lottery, the pre-reading result for the reserved special symbol 1 that has already been acquired, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1.

Specifically, if the time-saving type (time-saving pattern type) won in this first special pattern lottery is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)" and the pre-read result is that the pre-read number is "1, 2", the time-saving amount granted is "1", and a jackpot is "yes", then the selected pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0-69", and the selected pattern "carrot" is specified for the range of "70-99", and if a jackpot is "no" then the selected pattern "no" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223f1 value "0-69", and the selected pattern "watermelon" is specified for the range of "70-99".

In addition, if the time-saving type (time-saving pattern type) won in this first special pattern lottery is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)" and the pre-read result is that the pre-read number is "1, 2", the time-saving amount granted is "2 to 15", and if a jackpot is "yes", the selected pattern "Cherry" is specified for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value from "0 to 99", and if a jackpot is "no", "Cherry" is specified for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value from "0 to 99".

In addition, if the time-saving type (time-saving pattern type) won in this first special pattern lottery is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)," and the pre-read result is that the pre-read number is "1, 2," the time-saving amount granted is "16-29," and if a jackpot is "yes," the selected pattern "carrot" is specified for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value from "0-99," and if a jackpot is "no" then "cherry" is specified for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value from "0-99."

In addition, if the time-saving type (time-saving pattern type) won in this first special pattern lottery is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)" and the pre-read result is that the pre-read number is "1, 2" and the granted time-saving is "30 or more", the selected pattern "carrot" is specified for the entire range of the obtained first performance counter 223f1 value from "0 to 99", regardless of the pre-read result regarding whether or not a jackpot has been won.

Here, the information on the result of the pre-reading among the information stipulated in the second performance symbol selection table 222Ca will be explained in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example, when the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal mode is set and the time-saving symbol (time-saving A group) for which the second time-saving state is set is won, a pre-reading process (a process for determining whether the winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 223a contains information corresponding to a winning prize before the special symbol lottery is executed) is executed for the reserved special symbol 1 acquired at that time, and as a result of the pre-reading process, it is configured to be possible to determine at least in advance whether a jackpot has been won, whether a time-saving symbol has been won, and the type of time-saving symbol that will be set if a time-saving symbol has been won.

And, based on the result of the look-ahead process, the number of time-saving times to be granted by the first special pattern lottery corresponding to the currently acquired reserved special pattern 1 can be calculated. For example, even if three reserved special patterns 1 have been acquired and the time-saving pattern that was won this time is the time-saving pattern A1, which sets the second time-saving state with one time of time-saving, if the result of the first special pattern lottery that is executed first as the look-ahead result of the reserved special pattern 1 that has been acquired at that time is the time-saving pattern A2, the time-saving pattern A2 is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the second time-saving state, and the second time-saving state with 20 time-saving times is set, and if the look-ahead results of the remaining reserved special patterns 1 (for example, two) are all misses, when all reserved special patterns 1 that are the subject of the look-ahead are consumed, the second time-saving state set by the time-saving pattern A2 is set (remaining time-saving times 18 times).

In this case, if we look at the special pattern lottery that won the time-saving pattern A1 as a basis, the next change will set the second time-saving state with 20 time-saving times, so the number of time-saving times granted based on the look-ahead result will be 21. Therefore, the result of the look-ahead process (look-ahead result) will be the number of look-aheads "3", the time-saving time granted "21 times", and whether or not there is a jackpot "none".

In addition, in this 45th control example, the number of time-saving times to be granted (the number showing the maximum number of time-saving times calculated based on the special pattern fluctuation where the second performance pattern is stopped and displayed) is calculated as the result of the pre-reading, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that it is possible to calculate the game state and the remaining number of time-saving times at the time when the lottery for the first special pattern corresponding to the currently acquired reserved special pattern 1 is completed, and to select the display mode of the second performance pattern based on the calculation result. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to select the display mode of the second performance pattern with the same technical concept as this 45th control example.

Next, the ceiling information selection table 222Cb is a data table that is referenced when the first condition for notifying the ceiling information is met. If the second condition for notifying the ceiling information is met as a result of referring to this ceiling information selection table 222Cb, the player is notified of information (number of remaining special symbol draws) regarding the fulfillment of the condition for granting a ceiling bonus (ceiling grant condition).

Now, with reference to FIG. 1323, the contents of the ceiling information selection table 222Cb will be explained. FIG. 1323 is a diagram showing the contents specified in the ceiling information selection table 222Cb. As shown in FIG. 1323, in the ceiling information selection table 222Cb, the specification information indicating whether or not to notify the ceiling information (whether or not to establish the second condition) is pre-specified in correspondence with the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, the type of time-saving pattern that has been won, and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1.

Specifically, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is "999-400" and the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 of "0" and "No" is specified for the range of "1-99". When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A2 (Time-saving pattern A2)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 of "0-5" and "No" is specified for the range of "6-99". When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A3 (Time-saving pattern A3), Time-saving A4 (Time-saving pattern A4)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 of "0-9" and "No" is specified for the range of "10-99".

In addition, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is "399-100" and the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0-9" and "No" is specified for the range of "10-99". When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A2 (Time-saving pattern A2)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0-19" and "No" is specified for the range of "20-99". When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A3 (Time-saving pattern A3), Time-saving A4 (Time-saving pattern A4)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0-29" and "No" is specified for the range of "30-99".

Furthermore, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is "99-40" and the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0-39" and "No" is specified for the range of "40-99". When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A2 (Time-saving pattern A2)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0-49" and "No" is specified for the range of "50-99". When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A3 (Time-saving pattern A3), Time-saving A4 (Time-saving pattern A4)", the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0-79" and "No" is specified for the range of "80-99".

In addition, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is "39 to 1" and the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A1 (Time-saving pattern A1)," the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 89" and "No" is specified for the range of "90 to 99." When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A2 (Time-saving pattern A2)," the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 98" and "No" is specified for "99." When the winning time-saving type is "Time-saving A3 (Time-saving pattern A3), Time-saving A4 (Time-saving pattern A4)," the ceiling information notification "Yes" is specified for the entire range of the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 99."

As explained above, in this 45th control example, the first condition is met when the time-saving pattern (time-saving A group) for which the second time-saving state is set is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode, and based on the first condition being met, whether or not to meet the second condition is determined by referring to the ceiling information selection table 222Cb. The smaller the number of special pattern lotteries (number of remaining special pattern lotteries) required to grant the ceiling privilege, that is, the smaller the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, the more likely it is that the second condition will be met (the more likely it is that the ceiling information notification "Yes" will be selected). By configuring in this way, when the number of remaining special pattern lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is large, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by displaying the number of remaining special pattern lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted.

As described above, the time-saving type that is less likely to be set (time-saving A3 (time-saving pattern A3), time-saving A4 (time-saving pattern A4)) is configured to more easily notify the ceiling information (make it easier to establish the second condition) when the time-saving pattern is won than the time-saving type that is more likely to be set when the time-saving pattern is won (time-saving A1 (time-saving pattern A1)). By configuring it in this way, it is easier to grant the player a bonus (provision of information indicating the remaining number of special pattern draws required until the ceiling bonus is granted) when the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode is less likely to occur than when the result is more likely to occur, so that the player can also be interested in the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode.

In the 45th control example, when the first and second conditions for executing the ceiling information notification are met, the number of remaining special symbol draws until the ceiling privilege is granted is continuously displayed until the ceiling privilege is granted. However, without being limited to this, the period during which the ceiling information notification is executed may be varied depending on the timing when the first and second conditions for executing the ceiling information notification are met. For example, when the first and second conditions are met in a state where the number of remaining special symbol draws until the ceiling privilege is granted is large (e.g., 400 or more), the ceiling information notification may be terminated based on the passage of a predetermined period (e.g., 10 special symbol draws have been executed), and when the first and second conditions are met in a state where the number of remaining special symbol draws until the ceiling privilege is granted is small (e.g., 50 or less), the ceiling information notification may be continuously executed until the ceiling privilege is granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the ceiling information notification is executed in a situation where there are many remaining special symbol draws until the ceiling bonus is awarded, the notification will end after a specified period of time has elapsed. This creates a situation in which the next player cannot (or has difficulty) knowing the number of remaining special symbol draws until the ceiling bonus is awarded, thereby preventing a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

In the 45th control example, the first condition for executing the ceiling information notification is configured to be met when the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is set is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first condition may be configured to be met in some cases where the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode is a miss. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to meet the first condition at various times, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Also, since the ceiling information notification is executed even when the time-saving pattern is not won, it is possible to make it difficult to associate the execution of the ceiling information notification with the winning of the time-saving pattern.

As described above, in this 45th control example, the lower the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, the easier it is for the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification to be met. However, without being limited to this, the second condition may be configured to be met more easily than in other cases when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is a predetermined value (for example, the last digit is a value of 7) or when the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (for example, a number corresponding to a multiple of 7).

By configuring it in this way, during the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded (the period until the special pattern lottery is executed 999 times), it is possible to alternate between periods during which the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification is likely to be met and periods during which it is unlikely to be met, thereby providing a game that players will not tire of. Furthermore, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured to allow multiple setting values (e.g., three levels) that vary the probability of winning the special pattern lottery (winning a big prize, winning a small prize, winning a time-saving pattern, etc.), it is preferable to configure the period during which the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification is likely to be met to vary depending on the setting value that is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the setting value set for the pachinko machine 10 during play based on the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc at the time when the ceiling information notification is executed and the number of special pattern lotteries that have been executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 45th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1321(b). FIG. 1321(b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 45th control example.

As shown in FIG. 1321(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of this 45th control example differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see FIG. 1267(b)) in that it adds a high probability counter 223Ca, a performance mode storage area 223Cb, a ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, and a ceiling information flag 223Cd, and deletes the background mode storage area 223Aa and the non-transition flag 223Ac. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

The high probability counter 223Ca is a counter for measuring the duration of the high probability mode, and in the second performance pattern setting process (see S4401D in FIG. 1327) executed in response to the special pattern change for which the high probability mode is set, a value corresponding to the display mode of the determined second performance pattern is set (see S4456D in FIG. 1327). Then, in the determination command process 45 (see S3202D in FIG. 1325), which is executed when a pattern determination command is received to indicate that the special pattern change executed during the high probability mode has stopped being displayed, the set value is subtracted and is referenced when determining the end of the high probability mode (S3256D in FIG. 1325).

In the 45th control example, by making it possible to transition to high probability mode based on winning the time-saving pattern, when the presentation mode transitions from normal mode to high probability mode, the player can be notified that a time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is set has been won (the second time-saving state is set). After transitioning to high probability mode, the high probability mode continues until the value of the high probability counter 223Ca becomes 0, and the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is subtracted each time the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether or not the time-saving pattern has been won in the special pattern lottery.

In other words, in this 45th control example, the player can be notified that the second time-saving state will be set at the timing of transition to the high-probability mode, but even if the time-saving pattern is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the high-probability mode and a new number of time-saving times is set, the end timing of the high-probability mode is not changed in accordance with the number of time-saving times. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the second time-saving state will continue.

The presentation mode storage area 223Cb is a memory area for storing the currently set presentation mode, and when the presentation mode is switched, information indicating the new presentation mode is stored. The information stored here is referenced when setting variable presentations.

The ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is a counter for indicating the number of times a special symbol drawing (remaining number of times a special symbol drawing) is required before a ceiling privilege is awarded, and is set to an initial value of "999" when a jackpot game starts or when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. After that, when a confirmation command is received indicating that the special symbol variation has stopped, the value is decremented by "1."

The ceiling information flag 223Cd is a flag for indicating that the number of remaining special symbol draws required until the ceiling privilege is awarded can be displayed, and is set to ON when the number of remaining special symbol draws can be displayed. This ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to OFF when a jackpot is won or the ceiling is reached.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 45th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1324 to Fig. 1328, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 45th control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 45th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that the contents of the performance executed during the normal state and the second time-saving state are different. Specifically, instead of the command determination process 43 (see S3113B in Fig. 1277), the command process 45 (S3113D in Fig. 1324) is executed, and instead of the variable performance setting process 43 (S4304B in Fig. 1280), the variable performance setting process 45 (S4304D in Fig. 1326) is executed. The other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of command processing 45 (S3113D) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1324. FIG. 1324 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command processing 45 (S3113D). As shown in FIG. 1324, command processing 45 (S3113D) differs from the above-mentioned command determination processing 43 (see S3113B in FIG. 1277) in that it provides a detailed explanation of the point that when it is determined that a pattern determination command has been received (S3201D: Yes), determination command processing 45 is executed (S3202D). The rest is the same, and the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1325, the processing contents of the fixed command processing 45 (S3202D) executed in the command processing 45 (S3113D in FIG. 1324) will be explained. FIG. 1325 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the fixed command processing 45 (S3202D). In this fixed command processing 45 (S3202D), the update processing of various counters is executed when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed.

When confirmation command process 45 (S3202D) is executed, first it is determined whether the current confirmation command is a confirmation command for indicating a jackpot win (S3251D), and if it is determined that it indicates a jackpot win (S3251D: Yes), the value of the high probability counter 223Ca and the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc are cleared (S3252D), the information in the time-saving information update area 223h and the performance mode storage area 223Cb are cleared (S3253D), and this process ends. Although not shown in the figure, in the process of S3252D, if the ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to on, a process to set it to off is also executed.

In other words, in the processing of S3252D and S3253D, processing is executed to clear the time-saving state and the high-probability mode presentation based on the execution of a jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the presentation executed after the end of a jackpot game from being executed based on information that was set before the jackpot game was executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3251D that the jackpot is not indicated (S3251D: No), it is then determined whether the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is greater than 0 (S3254D). If it is determined that the value is greater (S3254D: Yes), the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is decremented by 1 (S3255D) and it is determined whether the value after decrement is 0 (S3256D). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S3256D: Yes), this is because it is the timing to end the high probability mode. A display command is set to indicate a transition to normal mode (S3257D), and the process proceeds to S3258D. Note that the process of S3257D also executes a process of storing information related to normal mode in the performance mode storage area 223Cd.

If, in the processing of S3254D, it is determined that the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is not greater than 0, i.e., the current presentation mode is normal mode (S3254D: No), or, in the processing of S3256D, it is determined that the value of the high probability counter 223Ca is not 0, i.e., it is not the end timing of the high probability mode (S3256D: No), the process proceeds directly to S3258D.

In the process of S3258D, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is greater than 1 (S3258D), and if it is determined that it is greater (S3258D: Yes), the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is decremented by 1 (S3259D), and then it is determined whether the ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to ON (S3260D), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3260D: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the number of times remaining until the ceiling (S3261D), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3258D, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is not greater than 1, that is, the ceiling privilege has already been granted, or the granting of the ceiling privilege has ended (S3258D: No), or if it is determined that the ceiling information flag 223Cd is not set to ON (S3260D: No), the condition indicating the number of times remaining until the ceiling is not met, and this process ends as it is.

In this 45th control example, the values of the various counters described above are configured to be updated upon receiving a confirmation command to indicate that the special pattern variation has been stopped, but without being limited to this, the values of the various counters described above may be configured to be updated based on receiving a variation pattern command to indicate that the special pattern variation has started.

Next, the processing contents of variable presentation setting process 47 (S4304D) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1326. FIG. 1326 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable presentation setting process 47 (S4304D). This variable presentation setting process 47 (S4304D) differs from the above-mentioned variable presentation setting process 43 (see S4304B in FIG. 1280) in that if it is determined that the game state is not the first time-saving state (S4401B: No), then the second presentation symbol setting process (S4401D) is executed, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the second effect symbol setting process (S4401D) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1327. FIG. 1327 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second effect symbol setting process (S4401D). In this second effect symbol setting process (S4401D), processing is executed to determine the presentation mode of the variable effect to show the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state or the first time-saving state.

When the second performance pattern setting process (S4401D) is executed, first it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a winning time-saving pattern change (S4451D), and if it is determined that it is a winning time-saving pattern change (S4451D: Yes), the type of time-saving pattern that was won is read out (S4452D), and it is determined whether the time-saving group A was won (S4453D).

In the process of S4453D, if it is determined that the time-saving symbol of the time-saving A group has been won (S4453D: Yes), the current presentation mode is read from the presentation mode storage area 223Cb (S4454D), and it is determined whether it is in normal mode (S4455D). If it is determined that it is in normal mode (S4455D: Yes), the display mode of the second presentation symbol is determined by referring to the second presentation symbol selection table 222Ca (S4456D), and the value corresponding to the determined display mode is set as the value of the high probability counter 223Ca (S4457D), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4453D that the currently selected time-saving type is not the time-saving group A (S4453D: No), the process for determining the time-saving symbol for effect is executed (S5709B), and this process is terminated. Note that the process content of the process for determining the time-saving symbol for effect (S5709B) is the same as that of the 43rd control example described above, and therefore the explanation thereof is omitted.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S4455D that the mode is not normal (it is high probability mode) (S4455D: No), the ceiling information notification setting process 45 is executed (S4458D) and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1328, the processing contents of the ceiling information notification setting process 45 (S4458D) will be explained. FIG. 1328 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling information notification setting process 45 (S4458D). This ceiling information notification setting process 45 (S4458D) executes a process to determine whether the conditions for displaying the number of times remaining until the ceiling are met when the high probability mode is set, and to display the number of times remaining until the ceiling if it is determined that the conditions are met.

When the ceiling information notification setting process 45 (S4458D) is executed, first it is determined whether the ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to ON (S4461D). If it is determined that it is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the conditions for displaying the remaining number of times up to the ceiling have already been met and the remaining number of times up to the ceiling (remaining number of times special pattern draws can be made) is being displayed (S4461D: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4461D that the ceiling information flag 223Cd is not set to on (S4461D; No), the presence or absence of a ceiling information alert is determined by referring to the ceiling information selection table 222Cb (S4462D), and it is determined whether or not there is a ceiling information alert (S4463D). If it is determined that there is an alert (S4463D: Yes), a display command is set to show the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc (S4464D), the ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to on (S4465D), and this processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined that there is no alert in the processing of S4463D (S4463D: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

<46th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1329 to Fig. 1339. The pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example in that it is configured to be able to execute various effects that encourage left-hand play during the time-saving state in which right-hand play is executed.

In the 44th control example described above, the left-hand play is executed during the time-saving state when the winning (winning when the time-saving limit is reached) changes, and the time-saving state can be ended by executing the first special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state is ended between the time-saving limit reaching winning and the time when the winning change is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the game state after the big win game ends from being forcibly changed to the normal state by the time-saving limit processing, thereby providing a novel gameplay that encourages left-hand play during the time-saving state.

However, because the gameplay only allowed left-hand play during the winning variation when the time-saving limit was reached, for example, if a false effect was executed to encourage the player to play left-hand at a time other than the time-saving limit was reached, the player who played left-hand based on the false effect would only feel uncomfortable, and the player's motivation to play would decrease. Also, if the game was configured not to execute false effects, there was a problem in that the player could easily predict that the second special pattern variation being executed was a winning variation when the pseudo left-hand effect that encouraged left-hand play was executed.

In contrast, this 44th control example differs from the above-mentioned 44th control example in that it is configured to be able to award a special bonus to the player even if the player performs a left-handed play during the time-saving state and at a timing other than during the time-saving limit-reaching winning fluctuation.

Specifically, the difference is that part of the configuration of the game board 13 has been changed, and part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice and lamp control device 113, part of the configuration of the RAM 223, and part of the control processing content of the voice and lamp control device 113 have been changed. Everything else is the same.

<Configuration of the game board in the 46th control example>
First, referring to Fig. 1329, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example will be described. Fig. 1329 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example. As shown in Fig. 1329, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example (see Fig. 1284) only in that a through gate 67a is added to the left side area. The other configurations are the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As described above, in this 46th control example, even when left-handed play is performed, the game ball can be passed through the through gate 67a, making it possible to execute a normal symbol lottery. In addition, by passing the game ball through the through gate 67a during the time-saving state, the remaining number of time-saving times in the currently set time-saving state can be notified. In other words, a player who continues to play right-handed play after the time-saving state is set will play without knowing the remaining number of time-saving times, while a player who plays left-handed play can play while knowing the remaining number of time-saving times.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game to the player by performing left-handed play during the time-saving state than by continuing to perform right-handed play. In the 44th control example, the player is given a bonus of leaving the remaining number of time-saving plays by left-handed play during the time-saving state, but other bonuses may be given. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that allow multiple levels of winning probability to be set, a bonus that suggests the set value may be given, or a bonus that changes the probability of winning in the special pattern lottery when the number of game balls passing through the through gate 67a by left-handed play exceeds a predetermined number may be given. Furthermore, although it does not directly affect the game result, a bonus image may be displayed based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the through gate 67a by performing left-handed play during the time-saving state.

The device may also be configured to notify the player of the remaining number of times (remaining number of jackpots) until the time-saving limit is reached based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 67a.

<About the performance contents executed in the 46th control example>
Next, referring to Figure 1330, we will explain the content of characteristic effects that are not executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example, among the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this 46th control example.

First, referring to FIG. 1330(a), the presentation content of the chance zone displayed during the time-saving state will be explained. Note that the basic presentation mode is the same as the presentation content of the chance zone executed during the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 44th control example (see FIG. 1285(a)), and the same presentation elements are given the same symbols and their detailed explanation will be omitted.

Figure 1330(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the chance zone. As shown in Figure 1330(a), the display area Dm7 displays "Last? Times" as a display mode to indicate the number of remaining time-saving times, and an effect is implemented that prevents the player from knowing the number of remaining time-saving times. In addition, a display area Dm9 is formed to show the number of reserved special charts 2, and the reserved special charts 2 icons hr5 to hr8 are displayed, indicating that four reserved special charts 2 have been acquired.

Then, the secondary display area Ds displays the text "You may be able to find out the number of time-saving times if you hit it through with a left-handed hit," and an effect (challenge effect) is executed to encourage the player to play with a left-handed hit. Details will be described later, but in this 46th control example, the challenge effect can be executed based on the player having acquired the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 during the time-saving state. When the challenge effect is executed, "Right hit?" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm4a to encourage the player to play with a left-handed hit. However, this is not limited to this, and it may also be configured to display "Left hit."

Then, when a left-handed hit is performed during the challenge performance, the game ball passes through the through gate 67a, and the notification condition for the remaining number of time-saving plays is met, the display screen shown in FIG. 1330(b) is displayed. FIG. 1330(b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen that is displayed when a left-handed hit is made through during the chance zone.

As shown in FIG. 1330(b), when the condition for notifying the remaining number of time-saving times is met, an effect is executed in which a treasure chest 810d is acquired, and an effect is executed in which the contents 810da of the display mode indicating the remaining number of time-saving times (in the figure, "3 times") are displayed from within the treasure chest 810d. Then, "Last 3 times" is displayed in the display area Dm7 to indicate the remaining number of time-saving times, and the challenge effect ends.

As explained above, in this 46th control example, if a predetermined condition (a condition that is met according to the number of reserved special charts 2) is met during the time-saving state, a challenge effect can be executed, and the remaining number of time-saving times can be notified by passing the game ball through the through gate 67a during the challenge effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enthusiastically play left-hand plays even during the time-saving state, so that even if a pseudo left-hand play effect is executed during a winning fluctuation due to reaching the time-saving limit, the player can play left-hand plays without feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, by combining and executing a false pattern of the pseudo left-hand hit effect with a challenge effect, it is possible to prevent the player from performing unnecessary left-hand play and to make it difficult for the player to understand that a winning change due to reaching the time-saving limit is being performed.

In addition, the challenge performance is executed when the number of reserved special symbols 2 is equal to or greater than a specified number, so it is possible to prevent a period of time during which the second special symbol lottery is not executed due to left-handed play during the time-saving state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 46th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example will be described. The 46th control example differs from the above-mentioned 44th control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The other configurations are the same, and the description of the same configurations will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1331(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 46th control example will be described. FIG. 1331(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 46th control example. As shown in FIG. 1331(a), the ROM 222 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 46th control example differs from the ROM 222 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 44th control example in that a remaining time reduction count notification selection table 222Ea has been added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The remaining time reduction count notification selection table 222Ea is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to notify the remaining time reduction count based on the passage of game balls during a challenge performance, and specifies whether or not to notify the remaining time reduction count and the notification mode in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 67a during one challenge performance (the value of the through passage counter 223E1) and the acquired first performance counter 223f1.

Specifically, when the value of the first effect counter 223f1 obtained when the through pass counter 223E1 has a value of "1" is in the range of "0 to 29," the remaining time-saving count notification is set to "Yes (all times)," and when the value is in the range of "30 to 99," the remaining time-saving count notification is set to "No." Also, when the value of the first effect counter 223f1 obtained when the through pass counter 223E1 has a value of "2 to 20" is in the range of "0 to 9," the remaining time-saving count notification is set to "Yes (all times)," when the value is in the range of "10 to 14," the remaining time-saving count notification is set to "Yes (up to 2 times)," and when the value is in the range of "15 to 99," the remaining time-saving count notification is set to "No." In addition, when the value of the first effect counter 223f1 obtained when the through pass counter 223E1 is "21~" is in the range of "0 to 39," the remaining time reduction notification is set to "Yes (all times)," when the value is in the range of "40 to 89," the remaining time reduction notification is set to "Yes (up to 2 times)," and when the value is in the range of "90 to 99," the remaining time reduction notification is set to "No."

In other words, the more game balls that pass through the through gate 67a during the challenge performance, the easier it is to notify the player of the remaining number of time-saving turns. This configuration makes it easier to play left-handed for long periods of time during the challenge performance. In addition, the remaining number of time-saving turns can be notified in a selectable manner, between a manner in which "all turns" is notified and a manner in which "upper limit of 2 turns" is notified, making it possible to notify the player of the remaining number of time-saving turns as it gradually increases. This allows the player to enjoy the challenge performance until the full extent of the remaining number of time-saving turns becomes clear.

In addition, if the condition for the remaining time reduction notification is met based on the first passage of the game ball through the through gate 67a, even though there is a low probability (30/100), the remaining number of time reductions corresponding to all the times is notified. This prevents the challenge presentation from being unnecessarily prolonged each time, and prevents the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

In the 46th control example, the value of the through-passing counter 223E1 is incremented each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67a during the challenge performance, and the presence or absence of a notification of the number of remaining time-saving turns is determined based on the value after the increment; however, without being limited to this, the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 67a within a specified period during the challenge performance may be incremented, and the incremented value after the specified period has elapsed may be used to determine whether or not a notification of the number of remaining time-saving turns is to be determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 1332, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 46th control example will be described. FIG. 1332 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 1332, the RAM 223 in this 46th control example differs from the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 44th control example (see FIG. 1292) in that a through pass counter 223E1 and a challenging flag 223E2 have been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The through pass counter 223E1 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 67a during the challenge performance, and is cleared to 0 when the challenge performance is executed (see S4560E in FIG. 1338), and the value is incremented by 1 each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67a during the challenge performance (see S3293 in FIG. 1336). The value after the increment is then used to determine the notification mode for the remaining number of time reductions (see S3294 in FIG. 1336).

The challenge flag 223E2 is a flag to indicate that a challenge performance is being performed, and is set to ON when a challenge performance is being performed. -Then, it is set to OFF when the special chart 2 variation being performed during the challenge performance is stopped and displayed, or when the total number of remaining time reductions is notified.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 46th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1333 to Fig. 1339, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this 46th control example will be described. This 46th control example differs from the above-mentioned 44th control example in that the command determination process 46 (see S3113E in Fig. 1333) is executed, and the second variable performance setting process 46 (see S4401C in Fig. 1315) is replaced by the second variable performance setting process 46 (see S4401E in Fig. 1337), and the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 46 (see S4402C in Fig. 1316) is replaced by the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 46 (see S4402E in Fig. 1339). The other control process contents are the same, and the description of the same process contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1333, the processing contents of command determination process 46 (S3113E) will be explained. FIG. 1333 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 46 (S3113E). This command determination process 46 (S3113E) differs from the above-mentioned 44th control example in that when a reserved ball count command is received, reserved information related process 46 (S3208E) is executed, and when a pattern determination command is received (S3201D: Yes), determination command process 46 (S3202E) is executed. Other control processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and description is omitted.

Here, the processing contents of the pending information related process 46 (S3208E) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1334. FIG. 1334 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pending information related process 46 (S3208E). This reserved information related process 46 (S3208E) is a process executed when a reserved ball number command is received in the command determination process 46 (see FIG. 1333). In addition to the process of extracting the reserved ball number from the received command and storing it in the corresponding special pattern reserved ball number counter (S3301E) and the process of setting a display command corresponding to the value of each special pattern reserved ball number counter (S3302E), the process of determining whether the received command is a special pattern 2 reserved (S3303E), and if it is determined that it is a special pattern 2 reserved (S3303E: Yes), it determines whether it is in the first time-saving state (time-saving state) (S3305E), and if it is determined that it is in the first time-saving state (time-saving state) (S3305: Yes), it determines whether the special pattern 2 reserved number is 4 (S3306E), and if it is determined that the special pattern 2 reserved number is 4 (S3306E: Yes), it sets the challenge in progress flag 223E2 to on (S3307E).

In other words, in this 46th control example, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the time-saving state reaches the upper limit, the challenge flag 223E2 is set to ON and a challenge effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the challenge effect from being executed in a situation where the number of reserved special symbols 2 has not been acquired or the number of reserved balls for special symbols 2 acquired is small, resulting in the occurrence of a period during which the second special symbol lottery is not executed.

Although not shown in the figure, after the processing of S3307E is executed, the same processing (challenge performance execution processing) as the processing of S4559E and S4560 in FIG. 1338 described below is executed. The contents of this challenge performance execution processing will be described later, so it will be omitted here.

Next, the processing contents of the confirmation command processing 46 (S3202E) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1335. FIG. 1335 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the confirmation command processing 46 (S3202E). This confirmation command processing 46 (S3202E) is a process that is executed when a confirmation command is received to indicate that the special pattern variation has stopped being displayed, and various processes for ending the challenge presentation and various processes for ending the pseudo left hit presentation are executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 1336, the processing contents of the through-passing process (S3281E) will be described. FIG. 1336 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the through-passing process (S3281E). This through-passing process (S3281E) is a control process executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed periodically (every millisecond) by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Although detailed explanations are omitted, in this 46th control example, a detection means capable of detecting the passing of a game ball through the through gate 67a (see FIG. 1329) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is provided, and a signal indicating that the detection means has detected the passing of the game ball is output to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the through-passing process (S3281E) is configured to be able to measure and manage the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 67a.

When the through pass process (S3281E) is executed, first it is determined whether the challenge in progress flag 223E2 is set to ON (S3291E). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S3291E: Yes), it is then determined whether a signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67a has been received (S3292E). If it is determined that a signal has been received (S3292E: Yes), the value of the through pass counter 223E1 is incremented by 1 (S3293E) and the remaining time reduction count notification mode (whether or not to notify) is determined by referring to the remaining time reduction count notification selection table 222Ea (S3294E).

Then, by processing S3294E, it is determined whether or not a notification of the remaining number of time-saving times has been made (S3295E), and if it is determined that a notification of the remaining number of time-saving times has been made (S3295E: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the remaining number of time-saving times for which the notification is to be made (S3296E), and it is determined whether or not all of the remaining number of time-saving times has been notified (S3297E).

If it is determined in the processing of S3297E that all the attempts have been notified (S3297E: Yes), a display command indicating that all attempts have been notified is set (S3298E), the challenging flag 223E2 is set to off (S3299E), and this processing ends.

The processing of S3298E allows the player to easily understand that the remaining number of times displayed in the display area Dm7 is the entire number of remaining time-saving times due to the display command that has been set. Furthermore, when no display command has been set by the processing of S3298E, it is possible for the player to understand that only a portion of the remaining time-saving times is displayed in the display area Dm7, which allows the player to eagerly play left-handed during the challenge performance in the hope that the remaining number of times will increase.

Next, referring to FIG. 1337, the processing contents of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 46 (S4401E) will be explained. FIG. 1337 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 46 (S4401E). As shown in FIG. 1337, in this special chart 2 variable performance setting process 46 (S4401E), the special chart 2 variable performance setting process (see S4401C in FIG. 1315) of the above-mentioned 44th control example is different in that when it is determined that a winning combination has not been made (S4502C: No) or when it is determined that the time-saving limit has not been reached (S4505C: No), the non-time-saving limit performance setting process 46 (S4501E) is executed, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and will not be described.

Next, the processing contents of the non-time-saving limit time performance setting process 46 (S4501E) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1338. FIG. 1338 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the non-time-saving limit time performance setting process 46 (S4501E). In this non-time-saving limit time performance setting process 46 (S4501E), a process is executed to set the performance changes other than the winning change when the time-saving limit is reached, among the change effects of the second special pattern change during the time-saving state.

When the non-time-saving limit effect setting process 46 (S4501E) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more (S4551E). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds or more (S4551E: Yes), it decides to execute the pseudo-left hit mode based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation and the number of remaining time-saving times (S4552E). If it is determined that the pseudo-left hit mode is executed (S4553E: Yes), it sets a display command corresponding to the pseudo-left hit mode (pseudo-left hit effect) (S4554E), sets a display command indicating a performance mode of 50% happiness (S4555E), sets the pseudo-left hit flag 223Ba to ON (S4556E), sets the determined value (value corresponding to 50%) to the happiness counter 223Bb (S4557E), and ends this process.

In other words, in this process, if a fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds or more is set as a winning fluctuation that has not reached the time-saving limit, or if a fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds or more is set as a losing fluctuation, and execution is decided by processing S4552E, a presentation mode that becomes a false pattern of a pseudo left-hit presentation is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the pseudo left-hit performance using a long fluctuation (fluctuation of 60 seconds or more) other than the winning fluctuation when the time-saving limit is reached, making it difficult for the player to understand the winning fluctuation when the time-saving limit is reached. In addition, when a pseudo left-hit performance of a false pattern is executed and the corresponding special pattern fluctuation is a winning fluctuation, a performance result with a happiness level of 100% (a performance result indicating that the time-saving limit processing is not executed) is displayed regardless of the number of times the first special pattern lottery is executed during the pseudo left-hit performance, and when the corresponding special pattern fluctuation is a losing fluctuation, a performance result with a happiness level of less than 100% is displayed regardless of the number of times the first special pattern lottery is executed during the pseudo left-hit performance, and then a notification performance indicating that the winning was not executed is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay in which he is grateful that the fluctuation was a losing fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4551E, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of less than 60 seconds (S4551E: No), it is determined whether the current number of reserved special figures 2 is 3 (S4558E), and if it is determined that it is 3 (S4558E: Yes), it is determined that a challenge performance is to be executed (S4559E), the value of the through pass counter 223E1 is reset (S4560E), the challenge in progress flag is set to on (S4561E), and the processing proceeds to S4503C. Also, in the processing of S4558E, if it is determined that the current number of reserved special figures 2 is not 3 (S4558E: No), the execution condition of the challenge performance is not met, so the processing proceeds directly to S4503C. Furthermore, in the processing of S4553E, if it is determined that the execution of the pseudo left hit mode has not been determined (S4553E: No), the processing proceeds to S4503C. Then, when the processing of S4503C is completed, this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 1339, the processing contents of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 46 (S4402E) will be explained. FIG. 1339 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 46 (S4402E). This special chart 1 variable performance setting process 46 (S4402E) differs from the special chart 1 variable performance setting process (S4402C in FIG. 1316) of the 44th control example described above in that the happiness value displayed when the time-saving end condition is met during the pseudo left-hit performance is different, but is otherwise the same.

When the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 46 (S4402E) is executed, first, the process of S4601C to S4606C is executed, which is the same as the special chart 1 variable performance setting process (S4402C in FIG. 1316) of the above-mentioned 44th control example. Then, in the process of S4603C, if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met (S4603C: Yes), it is then determined whether the time-saving limit is in effect (won when the time-saving limit is reached) (S4601E), and if it is determined that the time-saving limit is in effect (S4601E: Yes), a display command indicating a performance mode corresponding to a happiness level of 200% is set (S4602E), and the process proceeds to S4608C.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601E that the time-saving limit is not in effect (S4601E: No), a display command is set that indicates a presentation mode corresponding to a happiness level of 100% (S4603E), and the process proceeds to S4608C. Then, the process of S4608C to S4610C is executed, which is the same as the special chart 1 variable presentation setting process (S4402C in FIG. 1316) of the 44th control example described above, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this 46th control example, the pseudo left-hit effect (fake pattern) can be executed even for fluctuations other than the winning fluctuation when the time-saving limit is reached, so by varying the percentage of happiness displayed when the time-saving end condition is met, the player can understand the lottery result of the fluctuation (whether the time-saving limit has been reached or not).

By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand the validity of achieving the time-saving end condition by playing from the left.

<Regarding the first modified example of the 43rd control example>
Next, the first modified example of the above-mentioned 43rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1340 and Fig. 1341. In the above-mentioned 43rd control example, when a time-saving symbol is won in a left-hand play state (normal state, second time-saving state), a performance of switching background modes (normal mode, disadvantageous mode, advantageous mode) can be executed, and the background mode selection table 222Aa (see Fig. 1268) referred to when selecting the background mode type specifies the background mode to be switched to based on the play state at the time of winning, the type of time-saving symbol that has been won, and the result of the look-ahead.

In contrast, the first modified example differs in that it uses background mode selection 43a table 222Aaa (see FIG. 1340) instead of background mode selection table 222Aa (see FIG. 1268). It also differs in that when the number of remaining plays until the ceiling (number of remaining special chart draws) falls below a predetermined number (less than 50), the disadvantageous mode is always set even if the second time-saving state would be set in the normal state. All other contents are the same, and explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Now, the contents of background mode selection 43a table 222Aaa will be explained with reference to FIG. 1340. FIG. 1340 is a diagram showing the contents defined in background mode selection 43a table 222Aaa. As shown in FIG. 1340, background mode selection 43a table 222Aaa defines different background modes depending on the number of remaining plays until the ceiling (number of remaining special chart draws).

Specifically, the fewer the number of times remaining until the ceiling, the more likely it is that the disadvantageous mode will be selected. Here, when the disadvantageous mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 1254(b), the number of times remaining until the ceiling is displayed. As a result, the fewer the number of times remaining until the ceiling, the easier it is for the player to understand the number of times remaining until the ceiling. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the number of times remaining until the ceiling from being displayed when there are an excessively large number of times remaining until the ceiling, and by making it easier to display the number of times remaining until the ceiling when there are only a few times remaining, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping playing just before the ceiling is reached.

Furthermore, if there is a winning combination in the target reserve, the unfavorable mode is more likely to be selected when there are many remaining combinations until the ceiling (for example, 999 to 500 combinations) than when there is no winning combination. Therefore, if the remaining combinations until the ceiling are displayed when there are an excessively large number of combinations until the ceiling, the player's chances of winning can be increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 1341, the processing contents of the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43a (S4404Ba) executed in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 1341 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43a (S4404Ba). This time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43a (S4404Ba) differs from the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process of the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see S4404B in FIG. 1281) in that the processing contents for selecting the background mode when a time-saving symbol in the time-saving A group is won are different, but otherwise it is the same.

Specifically, if it is determined in the processing of S5702B that the time-saving group A is selected (S5702B: Yes), it is determined whether the number of remaining turns until the ceiling is less than 50 turns (S5701Ba), and if it is determined that there are fewer than 50 turns (S5701Ba: Yes), the disadvantageous mode is selected as the background mode (S5702Ba), and the processing proceeds to S5705B.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5701Ba that the number of times is not less than 50 (S5701Ba: No), the current background mode is read from the background mode storage area (S5702B), the background mode selection 43a table is referenced to determine the background mode type (S5703Ba), and the processing proceeds to S5705B.

In other words, if there are fewer than 50 reels remaining until the ceiling at the time when the time-saving symbol in time-saving group A is won, the disadvantageous mode is forcibly set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from quitting play just before the ceiling is reached by making it easier to display the number of reels remaining until the ceiling when there are only a few reels remaining.

<Second modified example of 43rd control example>
Next, the second modified example of the 43rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1342 and Fig. 1343. In the above-mentioned 43rd control example, the process of selecting the background mode based on the winning of the time-saving pattern is executable regardless of the remaining number of times to the ceiling, whereas in the present second modified example, the remaining number of times to the ceiling is determined at the time of winning the time-saving A group in which the second time-saving state is set, and when it is determined that the second time-saving state will continue until the ceiling privilege is granted, the performance mode (background mode of the ceiling privilege) indicating that the ceiling privilege will be granted can be set before the ceiling privilege is granted.

By configuring it in this way, the execution timing of the effect corresponding to the ceiling bonus can be varied depending on the winning status of the time-saving symbol, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the ceiling bonus will be awarded. Also, since the ceiling bonus itself sets the second time-saving state for a fixed period, if the effect corresponding to the ceiling bonus is executed before the ceiling bonus is awarded, the period during which the effect corresponding to the ceiling bonus is executed can be extended. This makes it easier for the player to believe that there are multiple bonus contents that can be awarded as the ceiling bonus.

The second modified example differs from the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that it is configured to execute the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43b (see S4404Bb in FIG. 1342) instead of the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process (see S4404B in FIG. 1281), but is otherwise the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1342, the processing contents of the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43b (S4404Bb) will be explained. FIG. 1342 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43b (S4404Bb). This time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 43b (S4404Bb) differs from the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process of the 43rd control example described above (see S4404B in FIG. 1281) in that if it is determined that the time-saving symbol is in the A group (S5702B: Yes), a ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb) is executed, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1343. FIG. 1343 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb). In this ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb), when a time-saving pattern (time-saving group A) for which a second time-saving state is set is won, it is determined whether the second time-saving state that has been won this time will continue until a ceiling bonus is awarded, and if it is determined that the second time-saving state will continue, a process is executed to set a performance mode corresponding to the ceiling bonus based on the time-saving pattern win.

Specifically, when the ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 223b is read (S5721Bb), and the time-saving duration is calculated based on the type of time-saving effect that has been won this time (any of time-saving effect group A) and the results of the advance reading of the winning information that has been read (S5722Bb). After that, it is determined whether the time-saving duration calculated in the process of S5722Bb will continue up to the ceiling (S5723Bb), and the result of this determination is determined to be whether the time-saving duration will continue up to the ceiling (S5724Bb).

If it is determined in the processing of S5724Bb that the bonus will continue until the ceiling (S5724Bb: Yes), a display background image command showing a background image corresponding to the background mode of the ceiling bonus is set (S5725Bb), the determined background mode type is stored in the background mode storage area (S5726Bb), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5724Bb that the bonus will not continue until the ceiling (S5724Bb: No), this processing ends as it is.

As explained above, in this second modified example, if it is determined that the game state that would be the same as that which would be set if the ceiling bonus was awarded will continue until the ceiling bonus is awarded, then a presentation is executed to indicate that the ceiling bonus will be awarded at the time of determination. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the ceiling bonus is awarded at various times, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the second modified example, when a time-saving symbol is won, it is determined whether the effect for granting a ceiling bonus can be executed before the ceiling bonus is awarded, and it is executed based on the result of the determination. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the game to progress in a state in which the same game state as the game state granted by the ceiling bonus (second time-saving state) is set, and to execute an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus will be awarded when it is determined that the currently set game state will continue until the time when the ceiling bonus is awarded. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus will be awarded before the ceiling bonus is awarded.

<47th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1344 to Fig. 1359. The pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example has the same game board 13 configuration (see Fig. 1253) as the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example, and is configured to be able to set a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as game states, and is configured to be able to set a time-saving state even when a time-saving symbol is won in a special symbol lottery.

In addition, the first special pattern lottery is configured to only determine whether a jackpot has been won, while the second special pattern lottery is configured to determine whether a small jackpot has been won and whether a time-saving pattern has been won in addition to determining whether a jackpot has been won. The jackpot game is executed based on the game ball passing through a specific area (the V-gate in the V-winning device 650) during the small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot has been won in the second special pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example, a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state can be set as the time-saving state, and no matter which time-saving state is set, it is configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (Fig. 1253) than in the normal state. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example, when the time-saving state is set, right-hand play, which fires the game ball toward the right area of the game board 13, becomes a playing method that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the reserved memory for the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) is configured to be able to acquire up to four pieces, and once the time-saving state is set, the second special pattern lottery is executed until the time-saving state ends, and if there is no winning (big win, small win) in the second special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, it transitions to the normal state, and the second special pattern lottery can be executed using the reserved special pattern 2 that has already been acquired during the time-saving state, so that a game period (pullback period) that is more advantageous to the player than usual can be provided for a predetermined period of time even after the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player ends.

Here, conventionally, there are some that execute a series of period effects across the game period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the setting of the time-saving state (the game period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state and the second special symbol lottery is executed during the pull-back period). For example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to acquire up to four reserved special symbols 2 and that is set to a time-saving state with four time-saving times, when the time-saving state is set, the period effect is executed in a performance mode (e.g., a display that there are eight chances) that indicates that the second special symbol lottery can be executed up to eight times, thereby clearly informing the player of the game content during the period effect (the number of times the second special symbol is drawn) and making the player look forward to the display of a performance result indicating a win during the period effect, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In conventional pachinko machines 10 configured in this manner, some have enhanced the presentation effect by being more creative with the presentation mode of the period presentation. For example, rather than executing a presentation individually for each of the second special pattern variations executed during the period presentation, the presentation mode is changed stepwise each time a second special pattern lottery is executed, so that a story-like presentation is executed over the entire period of the period presentation (the period until the second special pattern lottery is executed 8 times), thereby enhancing the presentation effect more than if the same presentation were executed repeatedly.

In this 47th control example, it is configured so that the time-saving pattern can be won in the second special pattern lottery, and if the time-saving pattern is won, the number of time-saving times is reset according to the type of time-saving pattern that was won. Therefore, if the time-saving pattern is won in the second special pattern lottery executed during the above-mentioned period performance, the number of times that the second special pattern lottery can be executed will increase.

Therefore, if a conventional periodic effect were used for the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example, the number of remaining second special symbol drawing times that can be executed during the execution period of the periodic effect would increase, making it necessary to extend the performance period of the periodic effect midway, resulting in a problem that the periodic effect that was previously set to correspond to the period during which a predetermined number (e.g., 8 times) of second special symbol drawing times (variable) would be lengthened, reducing the performance effect.

In addition, it is possible to prepare in advance a pattern for the time-saving effect to be executed when the performance period of the time-saving effect is extended, assuming that the time-saving pattern will be won during the execution of the time-saving effect. In this case, however, it is necessary to prepare a pattern for the timing when the time-saving pattern is won in the second special pattern drawing executed during the time-saving effect (the number of times the second special pattern is drawn) and the number of times the time-saving pattern is newly set based on the time-saving pattern being won, which creates a problem of an increase in the capacity of the performance data.

In contrast to this, in the 47th control example, even if the time-saving pattern is won in the second special pattern lottery executed during the period effect, the preset period effect is executed as is, and when the period effect ends, a second period effect can be executed to notify the player that a period in which it is easy to execute the second special pattern lottery (time-saving state, normal state in which special pattern 2 reservation has been obtained) will continue.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the previously set period effect from becoming drawn out based on the winning of the time-saving symbol. Also, since the period effect for suggesting the winning of the winning symbol is not used to indicate to the player whether or not the time-saving symbol has been won, if the time-saving symbol is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the period effect, it is possible to prevent the performance result indicating that the time-saving symbol has been won from being displayed as the performance result of the period effect being executed, so that it is possible to provide the player with a performance that is easy to understand.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example is configured to vary the timing of notifying the player of the set number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times) based on the content of the currently being performed performance when a predetermined number of time-saving times is set based on the winning of a time-saving pattern in a special pattern lottery. For example, when a time-saving performance is not being performed, the type of time-saving pattern to be set this time (remaining number of time-saving times) can be notified to the player at the timing when the first special pattern to indicate that the time-saving pattern has been won is stopped and displayed, and when a time-saving performance is being performed, the winning of the time-saving pattern is not notified (is made difficult) until the time-saving performance ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the time-saving pattern has been won.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example, a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state can be set as the time-saving state. In both the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, a game is executed to cause a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by playing with the right hand, and the ease of causing a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is the same in either time-saving state (a concept that includes an error that is not noticeable to the player, for example, a slight error that occurs in the probability of winning in a normal pattern lottery). In other words, the configuration is such that it is difficult for a player playing with the right hand to know whether the currently set time-saving state is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state.

The system is configured so that when the second time-saving state is set, it is easier for the player to receive a beneficial bonus when the time-saving symbol or small win is won than when the first time-saving state is set. Specifically, it is configured so that it is easier to set a time-saving state (second time-saving state) in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to play with enthusiasm in an attempt to understand the type of time-saving state that is currently set.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example is configured to vary at least a portion of the presentation mode of the period presentation executed during the time-saving state depending on the type of time-saving state that has been set. By configuring it in this way, the currently set game state (type of time-saving state) can be understood by understanding the presentation mode of the period presentation that is being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<About the performance content in the 47th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1344 to Fig. 1346, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 47th control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present 47th control example, the contents of the first period effect executed in the period in which the second special symbol lottery set based on the setting of the time-saving state can be executed (the first period in which the time-saving state is set, the second period in which the normal state has the special symbol 2 reserved) and the contents of the second period effect executed after the first period effect has ended are characteristic.

In this 47th control example, a final countdown effect using a game period of eight second special symbol lotteries is configured to be executable as the first period effect, and an additional effect is configured to be executable as the second period effect.

The Final Countdown performance is a period performance (first period performance) that is executed when the first time-saving state with four time-saving times is set after the end of a big win game, and is composed of a first half part (four second special symbol draws) until the end of the first time-saving state, and a second half part (four second special symbol draws) in which the remaining reserve of special symbol 2 can be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 1344(a), the contents of the performance at the time when the final countdown performance is started will be explained. FIG. 1344(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the final countdown performance is started. As shown in FIG. 1344(a), the final countdown performance is a period performance executed when the first time-saving state is set, so that "Right hit" is displayed in the display area Dm4, and a display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) for indicating that the second special symbol is changing is displayed in the display area Dm2. In addition, a display area Dm9 for indicating the number of reserved memories (special symbol 2 reserved) of the second special symbol is formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, so that the player can easily grasp the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired. Note that the display screen shown in FIG. 1344(a) shows a state in which no Special Chart 2 reservations have been acquired (four circles are displayed in dashed lines), and each time a Special Chart 2 reservation is acquired, the circles in the display area Dm9 are displayed in solid lines in order from the left.

When the final countdown performance is executed, the words "Up to 8 chances!!" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm as a display mode to indicate the number of times the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the currently set time-saving state (first time-saving state with four time-saving times). Here, it shows that by acquiring the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 during the last second special symbol change (final time-saving change) period in the time-saving state, it is possible to execute a total of eight second special symbol lotteries, four times during the first time-saving state and four times during the normal state after the end of the first time-saving state.

The first time-saving state has multiple time-saving end conditions, similar to the 43rd control example described above. In addition to the first time-saving end condition that is met when the second special symbol lottery has been executed four times, it also has a second time-saving end condition that is met when the total number of special symbol lotteries, which is the sum of the number of times the first special symbol lottery has been executed and the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been executed, reaches 10.

In other words, if the second time-saving end condition is met before the first end condition is met, the first time-saving state will end before the second special symbol lottery is executed four times, so the number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the currently set time-saving state (first time-saving state with four time-savings) will be reduced. Also, if the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 is not acquired during the final time-saving fluctuation period, the number of second special symbol lotteries executed during the normal state will be reduced.

In addition, in this 47th control example, as shown in FIG. 1344(a), the "right hit" guidance mode is displayed immediately after the first time-saving state is set, and by executing a right-hit play in accordance with the contents of the guidance mode, a situation in which the second time-saving end condition is met before the first time-saving end condition is met, or a situation in which the maximum number (4) of special chart 2 reserves cannot be obtained during the final time-saving fluctuation period will not occur (it will be less likely to occur), so when the final countdown performance begins, "You have up to 8 chances!!" is displayed.

In this way, even if the first time-saving state is set after the end of a big win game, if the player does not play normally, the second special symbol lottery will not be executed the specified number of times (8 times), and the game state will be one in which it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery (left-hand play state). In this case, that is, if the final countdown performance is not executed to the end and the normal state is entered in which the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired, the system is configured to make this situation identifiable, and is configured to display a performance result (forced end mode) indicating that the final countdown performance has ended as the performance result of the final countdown performance.

Although not shown in the figures, when the forced termination mode presentation result is displayed, a guide mode is displayed to indicate that the opportunity to execute the second special pattern lottery has been lost, and a guide mode is displayed to indicate a play method in which the execution opportunity is not lost (a play method in which right-hand play is continued). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the game content executed this time was unfavorable to the player, and also to notify the player of appropriate game content, making it easier for the player to execute an appropriate game the next time the first time-saving state is set.

During the execution period of the final countdown effect, a battle effect is executed in which the ally character 801F fights the enemy character E1, and is basically configured so that one battle effect is executed for each second special symbol drawing. Then, if the ally character 801F wins as a result of the battle effect, it is announced that the result of the target second special symbol drawing is a win (small win, big win), and if the ally character 801F is defeated, it is announced that the result of the target second special symbol drawing is a miss (including winning the time-saving symbol).

The display screen shown in FIG. 1344(a) shows the second special symbol variation period for showing the results of the first second special symbol lottery performed since the first time-saving state was set, and displays the first ally character 801F1, modeled after a hero, facing off against an enemy character E1 as the display screen showing the first battle performance in this final countdown performance. In addition, to the left of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm1F is formed in which an ally stock display mode showing the number of ally characters in stock is displayed.

The ally stock display mode displayed in this display area Dm1F is configured to be able to notify the number of ally characters 801 to be used in each battle performance executed in this final countdown performance, and the display area Dm1F is configured to be able to display stock icons ms1 to ms8 that resemble up to eight ally characters 801.

These stock icons ms1 to ms8 are configured to be displayed in accordance with the acquired reserved special symbol 2, and in the display screen shown in FIG. 1344(a), as shown in display area Dm2 and display area Dm9, the second special symbol is changing and the reserved special symbol 2 has not been acquired, so only the stock icon ms1 corresponding to the ally character 801F1 used in the battle performance is displayed, and the stock icon ms1 is displayed in a manner to indicate that it corresponds to the battle performance currently being performed (in the figure, it is displayed in a manner indicating that it is lit up).

By configuring it in this way, when multiple stock icons ms1 to ms8 have been acquired, the type of stock icon being used in the current battle performance can be clearly notified to the player.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 1344(b), but the ally stock display mode displayed in the display area Dm1F is configured to display stock icons that have already been used in a battle effect in a manner that allows the player to identify them. In other words, by checking the ally stock display mode, the player can easily grasp the number of stock icons that have been acquired (number of reserved special charts 2) and the number of battle effects executed in this final countdown effect. This allows the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner while checking the remaining number of battle effects executed during the final countdown effect and the remaining number of reserved special charts 2 that can be acquired during this first time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1344(b), the content of the effect that is executed when the time-saving symbol is won during the final countdown effect will be explained. FIG. 1344(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the final countdown effect is in progress, the normal state is set as the game state, and the time-saving symbol B is won in the second special symbol lottery that corresponds to the ongoing battle effect.

Figure 1344 (b) shows a display screen on which the result of the sixth second special symbol drawing since the first time-saving state was set, that is, the second second special symbol drawing since the normal state was set after the four second special symbol drawings performed during the first time-saving state have ended, is displayed, and in the display area Dm2, the third symbol (identification information) is displayed frozen in the display mode of "353" to indicate that the result of this second special symbol drawing is a win for time-saving symbol B, and at the top of the main display area Dm, "3 remaining" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the number of battle effects to be performed in this final countdown effect (including the battle effect currently being performed) is three.

In addition, a display mode to indicate that two special 2 reserved symbols have been acquired is displayed in the display area Dm9, and the first special 2 reserved symbol hr5 and the second special 2 reserved symbol hr6 are displayed, indicating that a special 2 reserved symbol has been acquired. In addition, in the display area Dm1F, stock icons ms1 to ms5 are displayed in a display mode (a display mode with a cross in the figure) to indicate that an ally has been defeated in the past five battle performances, and the stock icon ms6 corresponding to the ally character 801F corresponding to the battle performance currently being performed is lit up. In addition, since two special 2 reserved symbols have been acquired, stock icons ms7 and ms8 are displayed, indicating that the remaining number of battle performances that can be performed during the final countdown performance (number of times the second special symbol can be drawn) is two.

In the main display area Dm, the result of the ongoing battle effect is displayed as an effect in which a rabbit-shaped ally character 801F6 is defeated by an enemy character E1, and in the secondary display area Ds, "Unfortunately, you have two chances left" is displayed to indicate that the result of this battle effect is not favorable to the player.

As shown in FIG. 1344(b), the ally character 801F is configured to be selected from a plurality of types of characters based on the result of the corresponding second special pattern lottery (pre-reading result), and the expectation of the player being granted a beneficial benefit varies depending on the type of character selected. For example, the ally character 801F modeled after a hero shown in FIG. 1344(a) is configured to be more likely to be selected than the ally character 801F modeled after a rabbit when a small win is won, and when a time-saving pattern is won, the ally character 801F modeled after a rabbit is more likely to be selected than the ally character 801F modeled after a hero. In addition, as will be described in detail later, the ally character 801F modeled after a turtle, which has a lower chance of winning but a higher chance of winning the time-saving pattern, is also configured to be selectable.

In addition, even when a battle effect is executed that results in the defeat of an ally character 801F, the display mode of the enemy character E1 can be made different. For example, the display mode of the enemy character E1 can be made to display a first mode (see FIG. 1344(a)) and a second mode (FIG. 1344(b)) that is more likely to be selected than in other cases when the corresponding second special pattern lottery result is a winning combination or a time-saving pattern winning combination.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 1344(b), the enemy character E1 is displayed in a second mode, which indicates that the enemy character E1 has sustained a predetermined amount of damage. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that makes it easy to understand that the mode of the battle effect that was executed this time is a mode that is unlikely to be selected in the event of a losing win.

Next, referring to FIG. 1345(a), the content of the presentation that is executed when a small jackpot is won during the final countdown presentation will be explained. FIG. 1345(a) is an example of a display screen for indicating that a small jackpot has been won in the second special pattern presentation that is executed during the final countdown presentation.

As shown in FIG. 1345(a), if a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, "341" is displayed in a stopped state in the display area Dm2 as the display mode of the third symbol to indicate that a small jackpot has been won, and an effect in which enemy character E1 is defeated is executed as the result of the battle effect executed during the countdown effect. Then, the words "Congratulations on defeating the enemy" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a message to congratulate the player on defeating the enemy. In addition, as a result of the enemy character E1 being defeated, a V icon appears and "V Get" is displayed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 1344(b), during the Final Countdown performance, even if a time-saving symbol is won and the number of remaining time-saving turns increases, the player is not notified of the increase in the number of remaining time-saving turns. Therefore, if a small jackpot is won during the Final Countdown performance, the player can know the number of remaining battle turns (second special symbol lottery) that are executed during the Final Countdown performance, but it is difficult for the player to know the remaining period of the time-saving state. Therefore, for example, even if a time-saving symbol that grants many time-saving turns is won during the Final Countdown performance and a small jackpot is won with many time-saving turns remaining, the player will not know that many time-saving turns have been granted, and it is possible to suppress a needless decrease in motivation to play due to winning the time-saving symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 1345(b), the content of the performance executed when the final countdown performance ends will be explained. FIG. 1345(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the final countdown performance ends. The display screen shown in FIG. 1345(b) is the display screen at the time when two second special pattern draws have been executed from the state shown in FIG. 1344(b) described above, that is, the state in which the time-saving pattern B was won in the sixth second special pattern draw (the second special pattern draw executed during the normal state) after the first time-saving state was set.

In other words, the second time-saving state with 20 time-saving cycles was set based on winning time-saving pattern B in the sixth second special pattern drawing (second special pattern drawing executed during normal state) after the first time-saving state was set, and then two second special pattern drawings were executed, so internally the second time-saving state with 18 time-saving cycles remaining is set.

In this case, to indicate that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) will continue even after the final countdown performance has ended, after ally character 801F8 is defeated in the final battle performance (battle performance using ally character 801F8 corresponding to stock icon ms8), an angel-like character 802F appears and a performance is executed in which character 801F8 is revived, and then an performance is executed in which enemy character E1, surprised by the appearance of character 802F, flees.

Then, in the display area Dm2F formed near the center of the main display area Dm, "+18 times" is displayed as a display mode to indicate the number of remaining time-saving times, and in the secondary display area Ds, the words "An angel has appeared!! Lucky!" are displayed. After that, a second period performance (additional performance) is executed using the remaining number of time-saving times (18 times in the figure).

Next, referring to FIG. 1346(a), the content of the second period effect (addition effect) executed after the end of the first period effect (final countdown effect) will be described. FIG. 1346(a) is a diagram showing the content of the addition effect. In this addition effect, a variation effect is executed in which the pattern icons 811e to 811g are displayed to vary horizontally (to the left), and a rabbit-like character 801 displays one of the pattern icons 811 in a stopped state in accordance with the timing at which the corresponding second special pattern variation is displayed in a stopped state. Note that the content of the variation display effect executed in the center of the main display area Dm during the addition effect is the same as the effect executed during the chance zone in the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see FIG. 1258(a)), so its description will be omitted.

This additional effect is configured to be performed each time a second special symbol lottery is executed, and the display area Dm3F displays "18 remaining" as a display mode indicating the remaining number of second special symbol lotteries to be executed during the additional effect.

If a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the added performance, symbol icon 811f is displayed as a still image, if a time-saving symbol is won, symbol icon 811g is displayed as a still image, and if a miss occurs, symbol icon 811e is displayed as a still image. Here, if a time-saving symbol is won, the remaining number of times displayed in display area Dm3F increases or decreases according to the newly set number of time-saving times.

If the player does not win the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the time-saving state (second time-saving state) in which the additional effect is executed, an effect is executed that encourages the player to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 during the final change of the time-saving state (the second special symbol change when the time-saving end condition is met). Note that, as with the display screen shown in FIG. 941(a) above, the effect that encourages the player to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 includes at least an effect mode that indicates the remaining time of the final change of the time-saving state, an effect mode that indicates that the upper limit number of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired, and an effect mode that allows the player to continue playing with the right hand.

After that, "Last Chance" is displayed in the display area Dm3F, and the results of the second special pattern drawing (up to four times) using the reserved special pattern 2 already acquired at the end of the time-saving state are displayed in the same manner as the variable display during the added performance (see FIG. 1346(a)). Note that the variable performance executed while "Last Chance" is displayed in the display area Dm3F is configured so that one variable performance continues from the start of the second special pattern drawing using the reserved special pattern 2 already acquired at the end of the time-saving state until all reserved special pattern 2 is consumed, or until any of the second special pattern drawings is won, or until the time-saving pattern is won.

By configuring it this way, if all of the reserved special chart 2 that have been acquired are misses, it is sufficient to execute a single variable performance with a performance result indicating a miss, which prevents the execution of many unnecessary variable performances that result in a performance disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the content of the presentation when the time-saving pattern A is won in the second special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state (first half part) during the final countdown presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 1346(b). FIG. 1346(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the time-saving pattern is won during the final countdown presentation.

The display screen described above with reference to FIG. 1344(b) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when a time-saving symbol is won during the normal state (during the latter part) during the final countdown effect, and by executing an effect that does not inform the player that the time-saving symbol has been won (informing the player in a difficult-to-understand manner), it is made difficult for the player to know whether or not the time-saving state will continue after the final countdown effect ends.

On the other hand, the display screen shown in FIG. 1346(b) is a display screen that is displayed when the time-saving symbol is won during the time-saving state, even during the same final countdown performance, and notifies the player that the time-saving symbol has been won and the newly set number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times).

The pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example is configured so that the first time-saving state is always set to four time-saving cycles, and if a time-saving pattern is selected in the second special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state, the time-saving pattern type (time-saving pattern A) for which the first time-saving state is set is always selected. And, for the fourth second special pattern variation executed during the first time-saving state, a variation time of 20 seconds is set, which is longer than the first to third second special pattern variations.

In other words, during the second special symbol change period, which is the final change of the first time-saving state (the fourth second special symbol change period since the first time-saving state was newly set), a battle effect (for 10 seconds) is executed to indicate whether or not a win has been won, and an effect (for 10 seconds) is executed to encourage the player to acquire the reserved special symbol 2.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a similar battle effect for each second special symbol change executed during the final countdown effect, while still making it easier to obtain the maximum number of special symbol 2 reserves during the final change of the first time-saving state.

Here, if the player is not notified that he or she has won the time-saving symbol during the first half of the final countdown performance (during the first time-saving state), the final change of the first time-saving state will not be executed, leaving the second half of the final countdown performance unfinished. This creates a problem in that the remaining number of times (remaining number of battle performances) announced in advance using the final countdown performance will not match the number of reserved special symbols 2 that the player is encouraged to win during the final change of the first time-saving state.

Specifically, if the time-saving symbol is won in the third second special symbol drawing (the third battle effect of the final countdown effect) after the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state is newly set at that point, and the number of remaining time-saving times becomes 4. If the second special symbol drawing executed thereafter is consecutively unsuccessful, the seventh second special symbol change since the first time-saving state was first set (since the final countdown effect is executed) becomes the final change of the first time-saving state (a second special symbol change with a change time of 20 seconds), and after the battle effect ends, an effect is executed encouraging the acquisition of special symbol 2 reserve. However, because the seventh battle performance in the Final Countdown performance has been performed at this point, the display screen shows "2 remaining," indicating that only one more battle performance will be performed during the Final Countdown performance, excluding the battle performance currently being performed. This means that the number of battle performances notified at the start of the Final Countdown performance (8 times) differs from the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired during the final fluctuation of the first time-saving state. This causes a problem in that the player can easily grasp that the second special symbol lottery will be performed even after the Final Countdown performance has ended, before the performance result of the Final Countdown performance is stopped and displayed, reducing the effectiveness of the performance.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example, when a time-saving symbol is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, the player is notified of the time-saving symbol win using a battle presentation, as shown in FIG. 1346(b).

Specifically, as a battle effect, an ally character 801F3, modeled after a turtle facing an enemy character E1, calls for allies without attacking the enemy character E1. Then, a display area Dm1Fa is formed to show the number of ally characters 801 who can respond to the call of the ally character 801F3. The display screen shown in FIG. 1346(b) shows that the time-saving pattern was won in the third second special pattern lottery after the final countdown effect was executed (after the first time-saving state was set), and since the first time-saving state with the time-saving count of four times is newly set at the timing when the fluctuation is stopped and displayed, a display area Dm1Fa is formed with a size corresponding to the difference value of the remaining time-saving count of "3 times" (a size that can display three stock icons ms).

Then, above the main display area Dm, "6 times remaining + 3" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the number of battle effects executed during the final countdown effect will increase in response to the increasing number of remaining time-saving effects. Note that in FIG. 1346(b), "6 times remaining" is displayed as the number of times including the battle effect currently being executed. After that, when a new battle effect is executed in response to the start of the next second special pattern variation, "8 times remaining" is displayed above the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, the timing when the final change of the first time-saving state is executed can be the second special symbol change period where "5 times remaining" is always displayed. Therefore, the remaining number of battle effects displayed during the final countdown performance can be matched with the number of reserved special symbols 2 acquired at that time, providing the fun of predicting whether the game period in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed will end when the final countdown performance ends, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

As described above, when a battle effect that notifies a winning time-saving symbol is executed, the battle effect is configured to start in a manner that confirms that the ally character 801 (ally character 801F3) does not attack the enemy character E1, that is, that the performance result of a winning (the performance of defeating the enemy character E1) is not displayed. In other words, although the battle effect is normally intended to allow the player to predict whether or not a winning will occur, when the condition is satisfied (when the time-saving symbol is won during the first time-saving state), the battle effect is executed in a performance mode that suggests whether or not the time-saving symbol will be won, taking priority over the performance of whether or not a winning will occur. By configuring it in this way, the lottery result that should be prioritized can be changed as the performance mode of the variable performance for showing the result of the 1st special symbol lottery, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The presentation mode of the battle presentation shown in FIG. 1346(b) is configured to be set with a low probability even when the time-saving symbol is not won (even when it is not won). In this case, after the ally character 801 executes a presentation to call for a companion, a presentation mode (for example, displaying "...") corresponding to the presentation result indicating that the companion did not respond to the call is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when an effect in which the ally character 801 calls a friend is executed, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting whether or not a time-saving pattern has been won. Furthermore, it may be configured to execute an effect in which the ally character 801F calls a friend as a battle effect corresponding to the second special pattern change in which a small win has been won, and in this case, it is sufficient to configure it to execute an effect in which the angry ally character 801F blows away the enemy character E1 (reverse effect) after an effect is executed showing that the ally character 801F has not responded to the call from the ally character 801F. This allows the possibility of a winning (small win) to remain even if an effect in which the ally character 801F calls a friend is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 1347, the flow of execution of the above-mentioned first period effect (final countdown effect) and second period effect (additional effect) will be explained in correspondence with the progress of the game. FIG. 1347 is a diagram that associates the progress of the game with the content of the effect to be executed, where FIG. 1347(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 1347(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the special pattern change (second special pattern change) to be executed, FIG. 1347(c) is a diagram showing the increase and decrease of the number of remaining time-saving times in the time-saving state, and FIG. 1347(d) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect to be executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

As shown in Figures 1347 (a) to (d), during a small win game, no special pattern change is performed, and no time-saving state is set. Then, on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, effects that indicate the game content during the small win game (for example, "Aim for V") and effects to celebrate the small win game are executed. Note that the contents of the effects executed during a small win game are any of the effects executed during a small win game explained in each of the control examples above, and so an explanation of these will be omitted.

If the game ball passes through a specific area during a small win game and the right to play a big win game is acquired, the big win game is played after the small win game ends, and a performance during the big win game is executed. If the first time-saving state is set after the big win game ends, the time-saving state (first time-saving state) is set to four times in accordance with the end timing of the big win game, and a final countdown performance is started.

<Regarding the transition of the game state in the 47th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1348, the transition contents of the game state in this 47th control example will be explained. FIG. 1348 is a diagram showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 1348, in this 47th control example, a normal state, a first time-saving state, and a second time-saving state can be set. In FIG. 1348, for convenience of explanation, the normal state is described as a first normal state in which the first special pattern lottery is executed by left-handed play, and a second normal state in which the second special pattern lottery is executed using the special pattern 2 reservation acquired during the time-saving state, but both the first normal state and the second normal state are the same game state (low probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern, no electric support state).

During the first normal state, a game is played with the aim of winning the jackpot, which has a probability of 1/250 in the first special symbol lottery. If a jackpot is won in the first normal state, the first time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) with four time-saving cycles is set after the jackpot game ends, and right-hand play begins. If the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, a final countdown performance begins on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

As mentioned above, the final countdown effect is a period effect that corresponds to the period during which the eight second special symbol lotteries are executed, and during the first time-saving state, the effect period is the first half of that period (four times). In the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, in addition to winning the big prize, which has a probability of 1/250, a game is executed with the aim of winning the small prize, which has a probability of 1/8, and winning the time-saving symbol, which has a probability of 1/50.

First, the flow when a small jackpot is won during the first time-saving state will be explained. When a small jackpot is won during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set again after the big jackpot game that is executed based on the small jackpot win ends. In other words, when a small jackpot is won during the first time-saving state, a game in which the first time-saving state is repeatedly set is executed. On the other hand, when a time-saving pattern is won during the first time-saving state, the selection ratio between time-saving pattern A, which sets the first time-saving state, and time-saving pattern B, which sets the second time-saving state, is configured to be 1:1.

Next, if the player fails consecutively in the four second special symbol drawings executed during the first time-saving state and transitions to the second normal state, a number of second special symbol drawings (maximum of four) that are more favorable than those during the first time-saving state are executed corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 2. Specifically, if a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol drawing executed in the normal state (second normal state), small jackpot C, which is a small jackpot type that sets the second time-saving state after the big jackpot game ends, is selected with a 20% probability. Furthermore, if a time-saving symbol is won, time-saving symbol B, which sets the second time-saving state, is always set.

In other words, it is configured so that if a small jackpot or time-saving symbol is won in the normal state, it is easier for the player to transition to the second time-saving state, which is the most advantageous state for the player, than if the player was in the first time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation until the final lottery for the second special symbol is executed.

When the second time-saving state is set, 50% of the time when a small win is won the second time-saving state will loop, and the remaining 50% will transition to the first time-saving state. When a time-saving pattern is won, time-saving pattern B, which always sets the second time-saving state, is set.

Therefore, once the second time-saving state is set, it is possible to play a game in which the second time-saving state is looped with a high probability. Note that in the 47th control example, when a small jackpot is won in the second time-saving state, a state other than the second time-saving state is set with a 50% probability, thereby preventing the second time-saving state from continuing for a long period of time. However, without being limited to this, for example, as in the 44th control example described above, a time-saving limit function that also places an upper limit on the number of times the time-saving state is set in succession may be provided, and if the time-saving state is set a predetermined number of times in succession (for example, 10 times), a forced transition to the normal state may be made.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main control device in the 47th control example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 1349 to Fig. 1352. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that the contents predefined for various components are different. Other configurations are the same, and a description of the same configurations will be omitted. In addition, as for the various configurations (special pattern 1 random number 47 table 202Fa1, special pattern 2 random number 47 table 202Fa2, big win type selection 47 table 202Fb, variable pattern selection 47 table 202Fd, time-saving granting 47 table 202Fe, small win type selection 47 table 202Ff, time-saving type selection 47 table 202Fh) which have different prescribed contents (information), their uses are the same as those of the 43rd control example described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

First, the configuration of special pattern 1 random number 47 table 202Fa1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1349(a). FIG. 1349(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in special pattern 1 random number 47 table 202Fa1. This special pattern 1 random number 47 table 202Fa1 differs from the above-mentioned special pattern 1 random number 43 table 202Aa1 (see FIG. 1262(a)) in that the range of the jackpot determination value has been changed and the time-saving pattern determination value has been deleted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example is configured so that the range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 1000 values from "0 to 999", of which the range "0 to 3" is specified as the range that is determined to be a big win, and the values that are determined to be small wins or time-saving patterns are not specified. In other words, when the first special pattern lottery is executed, a lottery that is determined to be a big win with a probability of 4/1000 (1/250) is executed, regardless of the set game state.

Next, the configuration of the special symbol 2 random number 47 table 202Fa2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1349(b). FIG. 1349(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 47 table 202Fa2. This special symbol 2 random number 47 table 202Fa2 differs from the above-mentioned special symbol 2 random number 43 table 202Aa2 (see FIG. 1262(b)) in that the range of the big win determination value and the range of the small win determination value have been changed, and a time-saving symbol determination value has been newly defined. Note that the range of values that the first win random number counter C1 can take is configured to be 1000, from "0 to 999", as described above.

Specifically, the range in which the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is determined to be a big win when it is in the range of "0-3," the range in which it is determined to be a small win when it is in the range of "40-164," and the range in which it is determined to be a time-saving pattern when it is in the range of "165-184." In other words, when the second special pattern lottery is executed, regardless of the set game state, it is configured so that it is determined to be a big win with a probability of 40/1000, a small win with a probability of 125/1000, and a time-saving pattern win with a probability of 20/1000.

As explained above, in this 47th control example, the first special pattern lottery with a probability of 1/250 for winning a jackpot, and the second special pattern lottery with a probability of 1/250 for winning a jackpot, a probability of 1/8 for winning a small jackpot, and a probability of 1/50 for winning a time-saving pattern are executable, and the lottery is configured so that a special benefit advantageous to the player is awarded in all cases where a jackpot, small jackpot, or time-saving pattern is won. Therefore, the second special pattern lottery is a special pattern lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery.

As described above, the system is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery when the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) is set as the gaming state than when the normal state is set. Therefore, the time-saving state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player (advantageous gaming state) than the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1349(c), the contents of the jackpot type selection 47 table 202Fb will be explained. FIG. 1349(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 47 table 202Fb. As shown in FIG. 1349(c), the jackpot type selection 47 table 202Fb differs from the above-mentioned jackpot type selection 43 table 202Ab (see FIG. 1262(c)) in that the contents of the jackpot type defined for each special symbol type are different, and in that it defines a jackpot type exclusively for jackpot play (for small jackpots) that is executed based on the passage of the game ball into a specific area during a small jackpot play.

Specifically, for the special pattern type "Special pattern 1 (first special pattern)", the jackpot type "Jackpot A47" is defined for the entire range of "0-99" that the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 can take, and for the special pattern type "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)", the jackpot type "Jackpot C47" is defined for the entire range of "0-99" that the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 can take, and as the jackpot type for small jackpots, the jackpot type "Jackpot B47" is defined.

The jackpot type "jackpot A47" is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot play are played, and after the jackpot play ends, a first time-saving state with a time-saving count of 4 times is set. The jackpot type "jackpot B47" is a jackpot type in which 10 rounds of jackpot play are played, and after the jackpot play ends, a first time-saving state with a time-saving count of 4 times is set. The jackpot type "jackpot C47" is a jackpot type in which 10 rounds of jackpot play are played, and after the jackpot play ends, a second time-saving state with a time-saving count of 10 times is set.

In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game, jackpot A47 is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player, while jackpot B47 and jackpot C47 are the most advantageous jackpot types for the player. In terms of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, jackpot A47 and jackpot B47 are the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player, while jackpot C47 is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Overall, jackpot C47 is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Next, because of the large number of rounds played, jackpot B47 is the advantageous jackpot type, while jackpot A47 is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

In this 47th control example, when the normal state is set, a left-hand play is performed to execute the first special symbol lottery, and a game is performed to aim for a jackpot win (1/250 chance of winning) in the first special symbol lottery. If a jackpot wins in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type "jackpot 47" is set, and the first time-saving state with four time-saving times is set after the jackpot play ends. Then, a right-hand play is performed to aim for a small jackpot win (1/8 chance of winning) or a jackpot win (1/250 chance of winning) in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the first time-saving state being set (four second special symbol lotteries executed during the first time-saving state and a second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved number of special symbols (maximum of four) executed after the transition to the normal state).

In other words, in the second special symbol lottery, which can be executed a specified number of times based on the setting of the time-saving state, if a jackpot is won before a small jackpot, the jackpot type "jackpot C47" that is most advantageous to the player is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with added value by winning a jackpot, which is difficult to win, before a small jackpot, which is easier to win.

Next, referring to FIG. 1350, the contents of the normal 47 table 202Fd1 of the variation pattern selection 47 table 202Fd (not shown) will be explained. FIG. 1350 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal 47 table 202Fd1. This normal 47 table 202Fd1 differs from the normal 43 table 202Ad1 (see FIG. 1263(b)) in the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that it is configured to be referenced only when the normal state is set, that some of the contents defined as the variation pattern for showing the result of the special pattern 1 (first special pattern) lottery have been changed, and that the contents defined as the variation pattern for showing the result of the special pattern 2 (second special pattern) lottery are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1350, in this 47th control example, different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the number of fluctuations since the game state was changed, and for special chart 1, various fluctuation patterns are specified for the range of the number of fluctuations "1 to 10,000" at the same selection ratio as the above-mentioned 43rd control example. Next, for special chart 2, different fluctuation patterns are selected for the fluctuation count "1-3", the fluctuation count "4", and the fluctuation count "5+", and for the fluctuation count "1-3", a "common fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the entire range of "0-198" that the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, for the fluctuation count "4", a "common medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range of "0-198" that the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and for the fluctuation count "5+", a "common long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 100 seconds is specified for the entire range of "0-198" that the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

In other words, in this 47th control example, since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that even if a right-hand play is performed during the normal state, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 (almost no balls enter), the second special pattern lottery performed during the normal state is the second special pattern lottery using the special pattern 2 reserved acquired during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, as long as the game is being played properly, the second special pattern lottery (for example, five second special pattern lotteries) will not be performed during the normal state more than the upper limit number (4) of the special pattern 2 reserved. Therefore, if the second special pattern lottery is performed more than the upper limit number of the special pattern 2 reserved, it means that an improper game is being played, and in order to suppress the improper game being played continuously, a long-term variation time (100 seconds) variation pattern is selected.

This configuration can prevent many second special symbol lotteries from being executed in a state where there is a malfunction in the various components of the game board 13 (for example, a malfunction that causes the electric role device 640 to be in a constantly open state), which can prevent players from being given excessively many bonuses. It can also prevent a game in which a special tool is used to illegally insert a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during a normal state from being executed for a long period of time.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this 47th control example, the contents of the time-saving 47 table 202Fd2 (not shown) that is referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state are also partially changed. Specifically, similar to the above-mentioned normal 47 table 202Fd1, a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected according to the number of variations of the second special symbol variation, and for the final variation of the first time-saving state (the second special symbol variation of the fourth rotation), a variation pattern with a longer variation time (20 seconds) than other variations (variations other than the final variation of the time-saving state) is selected, and the first 10 seconds of the 20-second variation time are used to execute a battle performance, and the remaining 10 seconds are used to execute a performance to encourage the acquisition of the special symbol 2 reservation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily obtain the special symbol 2 reservation in the final change during the time-saving state. In this 47th control example, only the change pattern of the fixed change time corresponding to the number of changes is selected as the change pattern for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure it so that a plurality of different change time change patterns can be selected. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that a change pattern of the same change time and a change pattern of different change times can be selected for different number of changes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which it is easy for the player to understand which change of the second special symbol being executed (how many changes since the new game state was set) is, depending on the selected change pattern, and a situation in which it is difficult to understand, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the change pattern of the second special symbol change.

Next, the contents of the time-saving granting table 47 202Fe will be explained with reference to FIG. 1351(a). FIG. 1351(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving granting table 47 202Fe. This time-saving granting table 47 202Fe differs from the time-saving granting table 43 202Ae (see FIG. 1265) of the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that the defined pattern types (jackpot type, time-saving pattern type) and the time-saving granting contents for each pattern type are different.

Specifically, for the jackpot type "jackpot A47", the time-saving type is "first time-saving", and the time-saving content is the value of the time-saving counter 203h "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab "4". For the jackpot type "jackpot B47", the time-saving type is "first time-saving", and the time-saving content is the value of the time-saving counter 203h "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab "4". For the jackpot type "jackpot C47", the time-saving type is "second time-saving", and the time-saving content is the value of the time-saving counter 203h "10", the value of the small jackpot counter 203s "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab "4". The value of 03h is "20", the value of the small win counter 203s is "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab is "10". For the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern A47", the time-saving type is "first time-saving", and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "10", the value of the small win counter 203s is "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab is "4". For the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern B47", the time-saving type is "second time-saving", and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "20", the value of the small win counter 203s is "1", and the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab is "10".

Here, the values of the various counters defined as the number of times time-saving is granted indicate different time-saving end conditions, and when any of the counter values becomes "0", the time-saving end condition is met and a process to end the time-saving state is executed. Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is a value that is subtracted based on the execution of a special pattern lottery during the time-saving state, and when the first special pattern variation is stopped or when the second special pattern variation is stopped, the value is subtracted by "1". In other words, the time-saving end condition that is met based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h is the time-saving end condition that is met when the total number of times the first special pattern variation and the second special pattern variation are added together reaches a predetermined number.

The small win counter 203s is a value that is subtracted based on the winning of a small win during the time-saving state, and the value is subtracted by "1" when the special pattern variation is stopped in a display mode indicating a small win (when a small win game is executed). In other words, the time-saving end condition that is established based on the value of the small win counter 203s is the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times that small wins have been won during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number. In this 47th control example, by properly executing a right-hit game during a small win game, it is possible to reliably establish an opportunity to execute a big win game (to pass the game ball to a specific area). Therefore, by setting this time-saving end condition, it is possible to determine whether the type of the won small win pattern is advantageous to the player, and if it is determined to be an unfavorable type, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game aiming for the next small win without passing the game ball to a specific area during the small win game.

Finally, the special chart 2 counter 203Ab is a value that is subtracted based on the execution of a second special pattern lottery during the time-saving state, and the value is subtracted by "1" when the second special pattern variation is stopped. In other words, the time-saving end condition that is established based on the value of the special chart 2 counter 203Ab is the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special pattern variations has occurred reaches a predetermined number.

As explained above, in this 47th control example, three types of time-saving end conditions can be set. Of these, for the time-saving end condition that is established based on winning a small jackpot, even if it is established, a jackpot game is actually played, so there are two types of time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state without playing a jackpot game. And, if right-hand play is continuously performed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition that is established based on the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab is the most likely to be established. Therefore, the remaining number of times the time-saving state will end is displayed as the number of times the second special pattern will change (the remaining number of times the special pattern 2 will change) until the time-saving end condition is established based on the value of the special pattern 2 counter 203Ab.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to the number of times the second special pattern variation that is likely to be executed when the time-saving state is set, so that the player can easily understand the number of times the second special pattern variation that can be executed during the time-saving state.

As described above, the time-saving end condition based on the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203Ab is less likely to be met when the time-saving type is set to "second time-saving (second time-saving state)" than when it is set to "first time-saving (first time-saving state)." In other words, the second time-saving state is a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed more frequently than the first time-saving state. Therefore, the second time-saving state is a more advantageous time-saving state for the player than the first time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1351(b), the contents of the small win type selection 47 table 202Ff will be explained. FIG. 1351(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the small win type selection 47 table 202Ff. This small win type selection 47 table 202Ff differs from the small win type selection 43 table 202Af (see FIG. 1266(a)) of the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that each small win type is defined so that a different small win type is selected in accordance with the game state at the time of winning a small win and the value of the acquired small win type counter C5. Note that, in this 47th control example, as in the above-mentioned 43rd control example, since it is configured so that a small win can be won only in the second special pattern lottery, a small win type is defined only for the special pattern type "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)".

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the small prize is "normal (normal state)", the small prize type "small prize A47" is specified for the range of the acquired small prize type counter C5 value "0 to 29", the small prize type "small prize B47" is specified for the range of "30 to 79", and the small prize type "small prize C47" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". Also, when the game state at the time of winning the small prize is "first time reduction (first time reduction state)", the small prize type "small prize A47" is specified for the range of the acquired small prize type counter C5 value "0 to 49", and the small prize type "small prize B47" is specified for the range of "50 to 99". Finally, if the game state at the time of winning the small prize is the "second time-saving (second time-saving state)", the small prize type "small prize A47" is specified for the range of the acquired small prize type counter C5 value "0 to 49", and the small prize type "small prize C47" is specified for the range of "50 to 99".

Here, each small prize type will be explained. In this 47th control example, regardless of which small prize type (small prize A47, small prize B47, small prize C47) is set, a small prize game in which the V winning device 650 is opened is executed, and the game ball can be easily made to enter a specific area (V gate) during the small prize game. In other words, this 47th control example is configured so that when a small prize is won, the right to play a jackpot game can be acquired. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to not being able to acquire the right to play a jackpot game despite winning a small prize.

A different jackpot type is associated with each small jackpot type, and the content of the jackpot game to be played and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ depending on the set small jackpot type. Specifically, if the right to play a jackpot game is acquired during the small jackpot game of small jackpot A47, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot A47", if the right to play a jackpot game is acquired during the small jackpot game of small jackpot B47, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B47", and if the right to play a jackpot game is acquired during the small jackpot game of small jackpot C47, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C47".

The details of each jackpot type have been described above with reference to Figure 1349 (c), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but "jackpot C47" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, followed by "jackpot B47", and then "jackpot A47" is the least advantageous jackpot type for the player.

As described above, if a small win is won during the second time-saving state, "small win C47" is set with a probability of 1/2, if a small win is won during the normal state, "small win C47" is set with a probability of 1/5, and if a small win is won during the first time-saving state, "small win C47" is not set. Therefore, the game state at the time of winning a small win is the most advantageous game state for the player when the second time-saving state is selected, followed by the normal state as the advantageous game state, and the first time-saving state as the least advantageous game state.

In this 47th control example, since it is configured so that a small prize can only be won in the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery is first executed during the first time-saving state that is set based on winning a big prize in the first special symbol lottery. Then, if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, a big prize type is set that sets the first time-saving state after the big prize game ends, and a right-hand play that loops the first time-saving state is executed.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state does not result in a winning result and the state transitions to the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is executed using the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired. If a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during this normal state, small jackpot C47 is set with a probability of 1/5. In other words, when the first time-saving state is set, it is configured so that a small jackpot that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to be won if the small jackpot is won with the remaining reserved special symbol 2 than if the small jackpot is won early (during the first time-saving state).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay experience to the player in which the player can play either a game in which the player desires to win a small prize as soon as possible when the first time-saving state is set, and a game in which the player does not desire to win a small prize early, but desires to win a small prize in a state in which there are few remaining times for the second special pattern drawing that can be performed based on the first time-saving state being set (a state in which the second special pattern drawing is being performed using the remaining special pattern 2 reservation during the normal state) without desiring to win a small prize early.

Furthermore, once the second time-saving state is set, a time-saving end condition that is more difficult to achieve than the first time-saving state is set, and more second special symbol lotteries can be executed than when the first time-saving state is set, and when a small jackpot is won during the second time-saving state, small jackpot C47 is set with a 1/2 probability. In other words, when the second time-saving state is set, the second time-saving state is more likely to be set repeatedly with a higher probability than when other game states are set.

By configuring it in this way, the second time-saving state can be made a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the first time-saving state. This makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm, aiming to be set to the second time-saving state.

In the 47th control example, when a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed is set, a more advantageous bonus is given to the player if the player wins a small prize in the latter half of the period (the period during which the remaining special symbol 2 is reserved in the normal state) than if the player wins a small prize in the first half of the period (during the time-saving state). However, without being limited to this, when a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed is set, a more advantageous bonus may be given to the player if the player wins a small prize in the first half of the period (during the time-saving state) than if the player wins a small prize in the second half of the period (the period during which the remaining special symbol 2 is reserved in the normal state). By configuring in this way, a bonus advantageous to the player is given in a situation in which there are many remaining times in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed, that is, when the player does not have to think deeply about the result of the second special symbol lottery to be executed this time and when it is difficult for the player to concentrate on playing, so that the player can be interested in the result of the second special symbol lottery immediately after the time-saving state is set.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 47 table 202Fh will be explained with reference to FIG. 1352. FIG. 1352 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 47 table 202Fh. This time-saving type selection 47 table 202Fh differs from the time-saving type selection 43 table 202Ah (see FIG. 1266(b)) in the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that the time-saving pattern types defined for each game state are different.

Specifically, when the normal state or the second time-saving state is set as the game state, the "time-saving pattern B47" is specified as the time-saving pattern type for the entire range of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, and when the first time-saving state is set as the game state, the "time-saving pattern A47" is specified as the time-saving pattern type for the entire range of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take. In other words, when the time-saving pattern is won in the second special pattern lottery executed during the normal state or the second time-saving state, the time-saving pattern B47 is always set, and when the time-saving pattern is won in the second special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state, the time-saving pattern A47 is always set.

Here, the contents of the time-saving state granted when each time-saving pattern type is set have been described above with reference to FIG. 1351(a), so detailed description will be omitted. However, when time-saving pattern A47 is set, the first time-saving state with four time-saving times is set, and when time-saving pattern B47 is set, the second time-saving state with ten time-saving times is set. As described above, in this 47th control example, the second time-saving state is configured to be a more advantageous time-saving state for the player than the first time-saving state. In terms of the degree of advantage of the game state when the time-saving pattern is won in the second special pattern lottery, the normal state and the second time-saving state are the most advantageous game states for the player, and the first time-saving state is the least advantageous game state for the player.

In the 47th control example, as shown in FIG. 1352, the second time-saving state is always set when the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state and when the time-saving pattern is won in the second time-saving state. However, without being limited to this, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state may be set in any game state, and the selection ratio may be made different depending on the game state. In this case, it is preferable to configure the second time-saving state to be set more easily when the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state, where the number of times the second special pattern lottery is executed is small, than when the time-saving pattern is won in the second time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with added value by winning the time-saving pattern within a limited short period of time.

On the other hand, the system may be configured so that the second time-saving state is set more easily when the time-saving symbol is won in the second time-saving state than when the time-saving symbol is won in the normal state. This configuration makes it easier to repeatedly set the second time-saving state, so that the player can be motivated to play with the aim of setting the second time-saving state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound and lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example will be described. This 47th control example differs from the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound and lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same contents will not be described.

First, referring to FIG. 1353, the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 47th control example will be described. FIG. 1353 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 1353, the RAM 223 in this 47th control example differs from the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example (see FIG. 1267(b)) in that a final performance counter 223Fa and a remaining time reduction counter 223Fb have been added, but the other elements are the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

The final performance counter 223Fa is a counter for indicating that the final countdown performance is being executed, and when the trigger for executing the final countdown performance is met (when the first time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the value "9" corresponding to the number of times (8 times) the second special symbol is drawn during the final countdown performance is set (see S3410F in FIG. 1354). Then, each time a process for setting a new variable performance is executed during the final countdown performance, the value is decremented by "1" (see S4403F in FIG. 1356).

When the value of this final performance counter 223Fa is equal to or greater than "1" (greater than "0"), it is the period during which the final countdown performance is being executed. Then, at various times when the variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation is set, it is determined whether the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is greater than 0, and the performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on the result of this determination.

In this 47th control example, the game state can be set to any of the first time-saving state, the second time-saving state, and the normal state during the period when the final countdown performance is being executed, and the presentation mode of the variable performance executed during each game state is determined differently depending on whether or not the final countdown performance is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance (battle performance) with a sense of unity during the period when the final countdown performance is executed, regardless of the set game state.

The remaining time-saving count counter 223Fb is a counter for indicating the remaining number of time-saving times in the currently set time-saving state (the number of times the second special symbol lottery can be executed before the time-saving end condition is met), and in the state command process 47 (see S3231F in FIG. 1354) that is executed when a state command indicating that the time-saving state has been set is received, the value of the remaining number of time-saving times according to the type of time-saving state that has been set this time is set (see S3409 in FIG. 1354 and S3503F in FIG. 1355). Then, the value is decremented by "1" each time a second special symbol variation is executed during the time-saving state (see S4406F in FIG. 1356).

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 47th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1354 to FIG. 1359, the control process contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 47th control example will be described. In this 47th control example, the control process contents executed when a state command is received and the control process contents for setting a variable performance corresponding to the special pattern variation are changed from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 43rd control example in that they are changed. More specifically, the control process differs in that the state command process 47 (S3231F in FIG. 1354) is executed instead of the state command process 43 (see S3231B in FIG. 1278), and the variable performance setting process 47 (S4304F in FIG. 1356) is executed instead of the variable performance setting process 43 (see S4304B in FIG. 1280). The other process contents are the same, and the description of the same process contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the control process of status command process 47 (S3231F) will be described with reference to FIG. 1354. FIG. 1354 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of status command process 47 (S3231F). This status command process 47 (S3231F), like the above-mentioned status command process 43 (see S3232B in FIG. 1278), is a control process that is executed when it is determined that a status command has been received from the main control unit 110, and processing is executed according to the contents included in the received status command.

Specifically, when the state command process 47 (S3231F) is executed, first, the information contained in the received state command is analyzed, and information indicating the current game state is stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g (S3401). After that, based on the information contained in the currently received state command, it is determined whether the game state has transitioned to the normal state (S3402). If it is determined that the game state has transitioned to the normal state, that is, if it is determined that the currently received state command contains information corresponding to the normal state (S3402: Yes), then the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223h is cleared (S3421A), and based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 reserved state is obtained (S3401F). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 reserved state is obtained (S3401F: Yes), the process is terminated since the second special symbol lottery can be executed even after the game state has transitioned to the normal state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3401F that there is no reserved special symbol 2, that is, if the normal state is set without a game ball being inserted into the second ball entrance 640 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery (S3401F: No), the process ends the final countdown performance without executing the previously set number of battle performances by clearing the value of the final performance counter 223Fa to 0 (S3402F), setting a display command to indicate the end of the final countdown performance (S3403F), clearing the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb to 0 (S3404F), setting a display back image command to show the back image for normal mode (S3405F), and ending this process.

In addition, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that there will be no transition to the normal state (S3402: No), it is then determined whether there has been a transition to the first time-saving state (S3406F), and if it is determined that there has been a transition (S3406F: Yes), the time-saving information contained in the received state command is stored in the time-saving information update area 223h (S3407F), a display back image command showing a back image for the final countdown performance is set (S3408F), the value of the remaining time-saving counter 223Fb is set to 4 (S3409F), the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is set to 9 (S3410F), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S3406 that the state has not been changed to the first time-saving state (S3406F: No), it is determined whether the state has been changed to the second time-saving state (S3411F), and if it is determined that the state has been changed to the second time-saving state (S3411F: Yes), the second time-saving state change processing (S3412F) is executed and this processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S3411F that the state has not been changed to the second time-saving state (S3411F: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 1355, the processing contents of the second time-saving state transition processing (S3412F) executed in state command processing 47 (see S3231F in FIG. 1354) will be explained. FIG. 1355 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second time-saving state transition processing (S3412F). In this second time-saving state transition processing (S3412F), processing is executed to determine whether or not to display the remaining number of time-saving times depending on the effect content being executed at the time of transition to the second time-saving state (presence or absence of a final countdown effect).

When the second time-saving state transition process (S3412F) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the secondary game state storage area 223g (S3501F), the time-saving information contained in the received state command is stored in the time-saving information update area 223h (S3502F), and a value corresponding to the received time-saving information is set to the value of the remaining time-saving count counter 223Fb (S3503F).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is greater than 0, i.e., whether the final countdown performance is being performed (S3504F), and if it is determined that it is being performed (S3504F: Yes), the remaining number of time reductions is not displayed, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the processing of S3504F determines that the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., that the final countdown performance is not currently being executed (S3504F: No), the performance mode of the additional performance according to the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is determined (S3505F), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of variable presentation setting process 47 (S4304F) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1356. FIG. 1356 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable presentation setting process 47 (S4304F). In this variable presentation setting process 47 (S4304F), a process is executed to update the values of various counters when the special pattern variation starts, and a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the variable presentation according to the set game state.

Specifically, when the variable performance setting process 47 (S4304F) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is greater than 0 (S4401F), and if it is determined that it is greater (S4401F: Yes), it is then determined whether the current special pattern change is a special pattern 2 change (S4402F). In the process of S4402F, if it is determined that it is a special pattern 2 change (S4402F: Yes), the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is decremented by 1 (S4403F), and the process proceeds to S4404F.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4401F that the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is not greater than 0 (S4401F: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4402F that there is no special chart 2 change (S4402F: No), the process proceeds directly to processing of S4404F.

In the process of S4404F, it is determined whether the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is greater than 1 (S4404F), and if it is determined that it is greater (S4404F: Yes), it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a special pattern 2 change (S4405F). In the process of S4405F, if it is determined that it is a special pattern 2 change (S4405F: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is decremented by 1 (S4406F), and the process proceeds to S4407F.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4404F that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is not greater than 1 (S4404F: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4405F that the special chart 2 change is not occurring (S4405F: No), the process proceeds directly to processing of S4407F.

In the process of S4407F, the current game state is read from the secondary game state storage area 223g (S4407F), and it is determined whether the game state is the first time-saving state (S4408F). If it is determined that it is the first time-saving state (S4408F: Yes), it is then determined whether the current special pattern change is a time-saving pattern win (S4409F). If it is determined that the time-saving pattern wins (S4409F: Yes), the effect setting process 47 when the time-saving pattern wins is executed (S4410F), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving pattern has not been won in the process of S4409F (S4409F: No), the effect mode of the change effect is determined based on the lottery result of the change and the extracted change pattern (S4411F), and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S4408F that the game is not in the first time-saving state (S4408F: No), then it is determined whether the game state is in the second time-saving state (S4412F), and if it is determined that the game state is in the second time-saving state (S4412F: Yes), the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 is executed (S4413F), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4412F that the second time-saving state is not in effect (the state is normal) (S4412F: No), the normal state presentation setting process 47 is executed (S4417F), and this processing ends.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 47 (S4410F) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1357. FIG. 1357 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 47 (S4410F). This time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 47 (S4410F) executes processing to determine the presentation mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation when the time-saving symbol is won while the first time-saving state is set.

Specifically, when the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process 47 (S4410F) is executed, the currently won time-saving type (time-saving symbol type) is read (S4501F), and it is determined whether the read time-saving type is time-saving A (time-saving symbol A) (S4502F). If it is determined in the process of S4502F that it is time-saving A (S4502F: Yes), the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is set to 9 (S4503F), the effect mode in which the remaining number of times in the final countdown effect increases to 9 is determined (S4504F), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502F that it is not time-saving A (S4502F: No), the effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on the lottery result of the relevant variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4505F), and this process ends.

As explained above, if the time-saving A symbol (the type of time-saving symbol for which the first time-saving state is set) is selected in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, an effect is executed that increases the remaining number of times the final countdown effect is performed. By configuring it in this way, the final fluctuation period of the first time-saving state during the final countdown effect can be fixed to the timing when the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is 5.

Next, the processing contents of the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 (S4413F) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1358. FIG. 1358 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 (S4413F). In this second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 (S4413F), a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation (second special pattern variation) executed during the second time-saving state, which is different depending on the presentation content being executed.

Specifically, when the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 (S4413F) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the final presentation counter 223Fa is greater than 0, i.e., whether the final countdown presentation is currently in progress (S4601F). If it is determined that the value of the final presentation counter 223Fa is greater than 0 (S4601F: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the final presentation counter 223Fa is 0 (S4602F). In other words, in the process of S4602F, it is determined whether the change in question is the final change in the final countdown presentation.

In the process of S4602F, if it is determined that the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is 0 (S4602F: Yes), the value of the remaining time-saving counter 223Fb is read (S4603F), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time-saving counter 223Fb read is greater than 1 (S4604F). In the process of S4604F, if it is determined that the value is not greater than 1, that is, that the time-saving state ends with the change (S4604F: No), this is a case in which the end timing of the final countdown performance and the end timing of the time-saving state match, so without determining the presentation mode of the added performance to indicate that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) continues even after the end of the final countdown performance, the presentation mode of the variation performance is determined based on the lottery result of the change and the extracted variation pattern (S4606F), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4604F that the value of the remaining time-saving count counter 223Fb is greater than 1 (S4604F: Yes), the second time-saving state will continue when the final countdown performance ends, so the performance mode of the additional performance with the value corresponding to the difference (the value indicating the remaining number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state at the end of the final countdown performance) as the initial value is determined as the second half performance (S4605F), the processing of S4606F described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of S4601F, if it is determined that the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is not greater than 0, i.e., the final countdown performance is not currently in progress (S4601F: No), then it is determined whether the current special pattern change has resulted in a time-saving win (S4607F), and if it is determined that the time-saving pattern has not resulted in a win (S4607F: No), the process of S4606F is executed and this process ends. If it is determined that the time-saving pattern has resulted in a win (S4607: Yes) in the process of S4607F, a performance mode for suggesting the addition of the remaining number of time-saving plays is determined (S4608F), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1359, the processing contents of normal state presentation setting process 47 (S4414F) will be explained. FIG. 1359 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal state presentation setting process 47 (S4414F). In this normal state presentation setting process 47 (S4414F), a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation executed during the normal state, which differs depending on the presentation content being executed.

Specifically, when the normal state presentation setting process 47 (S4414F) is executed, first it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a special pattern 2 change (S4701F), and if it is determined that it is not a special pattern 2 change (it is a special pattern 1 change) (S4701F: No), the presentation mode of the change presentation is determined based on the lottery result of that change and the extracted change pattern (S4706F), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701F, if it is determined that there is a special chart 2 change (S4701F: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is greater than 0, i.e., whether there is a special chart 2 change in the normal state using the special chart 2 remaining reserve acquired during the time-saving state (S4702F). If it is determined that the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is greater than 0 (S4702F: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is 1, i.e., whether there is the final change of the final countdown performance (S4703F). If it is determined that it is 1 (S4703F: Yes), the performance mode for indicating the end of the final countdown performance is determined to be the latter half performance (S4704F), the processing of S4706F is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the processing of S4702F, if it is determined that the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is not greater than 0 (S4702F: No), the final countdown performance is not being performed and the second special symbol variation is being performed, so a display command for displaying a warning image is set (S4705F) and processing proceeds to S4706F. In other words, in this 47th control example, even if a right-hand hit game is performed during the normal state, the game ball cannot be inserted into the second ball entrance 640, and if the special symbol 2 variation is executed in the normal state other than the final countdown performance, it is possible that the player has illegally inserted the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, or that the electric role 640a has broken down and is always in an open state. If the game is continued while leaving such a situation, the player will be given excessive benefits, so by displaying a warning image, it is easier for the hall staff to understand that an abnormal situation has occurred. Although we will not go into detail here, when the process of S4705F is executed, an abnormality notification is also output by voice. This makes it easier for the hall staff to understand that an abnormality has occurred.

<Regarding the first modified example of the 47th control example>
Next, the first modified example of the 47th control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 1360 to FIG. 1365. In the 47th control example described above, the performance period of one battle performance executed during the final countdown performance was configured to be 10 seconds regardless of the result of the target special symbol lottery. Then, in the case of a lottery result (time-saving symbol win, miss) other than winning (big win, small win), a defeat performance in which the ally character 801F is defeated is executed as the performance result of the battle performance, so that it is configured to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the time-saving symbol has been won. By making the player play while expecting that the time-saving state will continue (the time-saving symbol has been won in the middle) at the timing when the final countdown performance ends, that is, at the timing when the second special symbol lottery is executed for the number of times (8 times) that can be executed by the first time-saving state set after the end of the big win game, the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, different patterns of time fluctuation can be selected depending on the results of the special symbol lottery, and the battle performance can be executed in different performance modes depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting whether or not a time-saving symbol will be won by understanding the performance mode of the battle performance.

In addition, the long fluctuation pattern (20 second fluctuation time) which is longer than the normal fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds is more likely to be selected if the result of the second special pattern lottery is a winning combination or if the time-saving pattern is won, than if the result is a losing combination, and a battle performance (a battle performance in which a special move is unleashed) can be executed in a performance mode dedicated to the long fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when a battle performance in which a special move is unleashed is executed during the final countdown performance, the player can watch the performance with interest while hoping for a winning combination. Also, even if the ally character 801F is defeated in the battle performance in which a special move is unleashed, the player can be made to hope for the time-saving pattern to be won, so that a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed until the final countdown performance ends.

Furthermore, in this first modified example, the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2) is read in advance, and the period during which multiple second special symbol variations are executed based on the read-ahead results is configured to be the execution period of one battle effect. In other words, the results of multiple consecutive second special symbol lotteries can be notified by the performance results of one battle effect (combination battle performance). By configuring in this way, the number of times battle effects in which ally character 801F is defeated can be reduced, preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, the system is configured so that the combination battle effect is more likely to be executed if the result of the pre-read using the already acquired reserved special symbol 2 is a winning combination or a winning time-saving symbol, than if the result is a losing combination. By configuring it in this way, the player can enjoy the battle effect while hoping for a winning combination or a winning time-saving symbol when the combination battle effect is executed.

In addition, in this first modified example, if a specific game state (e.g., second time-saving state) is set as the game state during the final countdown performance in the second special pattern lottery, and a time-saving pattern set to a specific time-saving pattern type (e.g., time-saving pattern B47) is won, a background change performance can be executed in which the background image of the battle performance is switched to a special background image (e.g., a heavenly background).

In this case, the content of the battle effect will be the same as a normal battle effect (a defeat effect in which ally character 801F is defeated), but because a background change effect is executed, it is easier for the player to understand that they have won the time-saving pattern.

As explained above, the first variant of this 47th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 47th control example in that it is configured to add various variations to the presentation content of each battle presentation without changing the presentation results of each battle presentation executed during the final countdown presentation, and is configured to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the results of the corresponding second special pattern lottery at various times when the battle presentation is executed. Note that, apart from the configuration related to the above content, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 47th control example, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<About the performance content in the first modified example of the 47th control example>
Next, with reference to Fig. 1360 and Fig. 1361, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example, the contents of characteristic effects different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 47th control example will be described. Fig. 1360(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a long battle effect displayed when a 20-second long fluctuation is set as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol lottery executed during the final countdown effect, Fig. 1360(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a combination battle effect is executed during the final countdown effect, and Fig. 1361 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a background change effect is executed during the final countdown effect.

First, the content of the long battle effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 1360(a). This long battle effect is a battle effect that is executed when a long fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the corresponding second special symbol fluctuation. In FIG. 1360(a), the sixth second special symbol fluctuation has been executed since the final countdown effect was executed, and the display screen during the long fluctuation period in which the time-saving symbol was won during the normal state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 1360(a), near the center of the main display area Dm, a battle effect begins in which ally character 801F6, corresponding to the sixth second special symbol drawing, faces off against enemy character E1. This battle effect (long battle effect) and the normal battle effect are configured to be executed in the same manner until two seconds have passed since the start of the battle effect, and after two seconds have passed, an action to unleash a special move is executed as the effect in which ally character 801F6 launches an attack, and the words "Special move activated! Even if you can't defeat him, there's still a chance!?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

Then, either the first effect is executed, in which the special move explodes on the enemy, or the second effect is executed, in which the enemy avoids it. If the first effect is executed, the third effect is executed, in which the enemy falls, or the fourth effect is executed, in which the enemy does not fall but counterattacks. On the other hand, if the second effect is executed, the fifth effect is executed, in which enemy character E1 attacks ally character 801F6 in a counterattack.

In FIG. 1360(a), the results of the first to fifth second special symbol lottery draws are all misses, and a long battle effect is executed based on the winning of the time-saving symbol in the second second special symbol lottery after the transition to the normal state, so the effect in which the enemy is defeated (third effect) is not executed, and the fourth effect is executed after the first effect is executed, and a defeat effect in which ally character 801F6 is defeated is executed. Details will be described later, but the rate at which the long fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern to show the result of the second second special symbol lottery after the transition to the normal state is about 2% (4/199) when the special symbol lottery result is a miss, and about 90% (189/199) when the time-saving symbol is won.

The probability that the second special symbol lottery result will be a miss is approximately 85% (851/1000), the same as in the 47th control example described above, and the probability that the time-saving symbol will be a win is 2% (20/1000). In other words, when a defeat effect is executed in a long battle effect, the probability that the corresponding second special symbol lottery result will be a win for the time-saving symbol is higher than the probability that it will be a miss. Therefore, even when a battle effect is executed that results in the effect of being defeated by an enemy, the player can play in the hope of winning the time-saving symbol until the end of the final countdown effect without losing his or her motivation to play.

If the final countdown effect ends while the time-saving state is still in progress, an additional effect will be executed, as in the 47th control example described above.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this first modified example, the above-mentioned multiple presentation patterns (first presentation pattern in which the second to fifth presentations are executed, and second presentation pattern in which the first to fourth presentations are executed) can be set as the presentation content during the long battle presentation that results in a defeat presentation, and the selection ratio of each presentation pattern is varied depending on the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery. Specifically, the long variation pattern resulting in a miss is configured to make it easier to set the first presentation pattern and harder to set the second presentation pattern than the long variation pattern resulting in a win for the time-saving symbol.

By configuring it in this way, when the defeat effect of the second presentation pattern is executed, the player can expect to win the time-saving pattern more than when the defeat effect of the first presentation pattern is executed, so the player can be interested not only in whether or not the long battle presentation is executed and the presentation result, but also in the presentation process (presentation pattern), thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 1360(b), the content of the combination battle effect will be explained. This combination battle effect is a battle effect that is executed using the variation time of multiple consecutive second special symbol variations, and the result of the lottery for the multiple target second special symbols is announced as the result of one battle effect. Specifically, when setting the presentation mode of the battle effect corresponding to a new second special symbol variation (when determining the presentation mode of the variation effect), it is determined whether the already acquired reserved special symbol 2 contains winning information corresponding to a winning or time-saving symbol win, and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the combination battle effect based on the result of the determination.

Figure 1360 (b) shows a display screen in which a combination battle performance is being performed using the change (10-second change) and the second special pattern change period (total of 20 seconds) of the next change (10 changes), based on the fact that the winning information corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserve (special pattern 2 reserve icon hr5) corresponding to the next change contains information indicating a time-saving pattern win in which time-saving pattern A is set.

As shown in FIG. 1360(b), when the combination battle effect is executed, an effect is executed in which the ally characters 801F6 and 801F7 corresponding to the stock icons ms6 and ms7 corresponding to the targeted second special pattern change form a combination to attack the enemy character E1, and the words "Attack with a combination!! Great chance!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode to indicate that the combination battle effect is executing (will execute) a lottery for a second special pattern that is advantageous to the player.

To explain the content of the Combo Battle effect more specifically, during the first half of the Combo Battle effect period (the sixth second special symbol change period), the words "3 times remaining" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and the ally character 801F6 launches an attack on the enemy character E1. Then, when the second half of the period (the seventh second special symbol change period) is reached, the words "2 times remaining" are displayed above the display area Dm, and an effect is executed in which the ally character 801F7 launches a pursuit attack on the enemy character E1.

In other words, an effect is executed in which the ally character 801F attacks multiple times in succession without receiving a counterattack from the enemy character E1. By executing such an effect, an effect is executed that makes it visually easier to defeat the enemy character E1, making it easier for the player to understand that the combination battle effect is an advantageous effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the type of ally character 801F that will form a combination in the combination battle performance is configured to be determined based on the result (pre-reading result) of the second special pattern lottery that is the subject of the combination battle performance, and is configured to be able to determine at least combinations of types that are likely to be determined when the result (pre-reading result) of the second special pattern lottery that is the subject of the combination battle performance is advantageous to the player, and combinations of types that are difficult to determine. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the performance result of this combination battle performance and the result (pre-reading result) of the second special pattern lottery that is the subject of the combination battle performance at the time when this combination battle performance is executed and multiple ally characters 801F are displayed.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, a trio battle effect in which up to three ally characters 801F fight together can also be executed, and when a trio battle effect is executed, the expectation of winning is higher than in a combination battle effect. In this case, the three ally characters 801F may be displayed from the start of the battle effect, or a third ally character 801F may appear midway through the combination battle effect.

As explained above, in this first modified example, instead of a fixed period (10 seconds) battle presentation, the 47th control example described above is configured to be able to execute multiple presentations (long battle presentation, combination battle presentation) as a battle presentation using 20 seconds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel presentation in which the content of each battle presentation executed during the final countdown presentation can provide the enjoyment of predicting not only whether or not a winning combination will be achieved, but also whether or not a time-saving pattern will be achieved.

In addition to the various battle effects used in this first modified example, the following battle effects may be configured to be executable. For example, as a look-ahead effect, if two consecutive second special pattern changes are both 10-second changes, a long battle effect may be configured to be executable, or if a long change pattern with a change time of 20 seconds is selected, a combination battle effect may be configured to be executable.

The type of enemy character E1 and the display mode may be changed using the results of the pre-reading used in this first modified example. For example, if the acquired reserved special symbol 2 contains winning information for winning a prize or a time-saving pattern, a different enemy character E1 from the normal one (for example, a display mode in which the character appears in pain as shown in FIG. 1360(b)) may be displayed in the battle performance corresponding to the second special symbol drawing prior to the second special symbol drawing based on the winning information being executed, and the different display mode of the enemy character E1 may be continuously displayed in multiple battle performances, thereby increasing the possibility that the acquired reserved special symbol 2 contains winning information for winning a prize or a time-saving pattern.

By configuring it in this way, when the enemy character E1 is displayed in a different display mode from normal, the player can continue to be interested in the game while hoping that the second special pattern lottery that is executed later will produce a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving pattern).

Next, referring to FIG. 1361, the content of the background change effect during the final countdown effect will be explained. FIG. 1361 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the background change effect. This background change effect is an effect that can notify the player that they have won the time-saving pattern by switching the background image without changing the content of the battle effect.

As mentioned above, in the battle performance executed during the final countdown performance, a performance is executed to show whether or not the target second special pattern lottery has been won, so if the time-saving pattern has been won, i.e., if it has not been won, the performance result (defeat performance) is the same as if it had been a miss.

Therefore, there was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to determine whether or not the time-saving symbol had been won from the result of the battle effect. However, if the result of the battle effect was set to be the same as that of a winning combination when the time-saving symbol had been won (a winning combination), there was a problem in that it caused discomfort when a winning combination was not executed even though a winning combination had been executed.

Furthermore, if a special performance result were set for when the time-saving symbol is won, the battle performance itself would be difficult for the player to understand, which would reduce the effectiveness of the performance. Therefore, in this first variant, the battle performance is configured to be able to determine the performance mode that is solely for showing the player whether or not they have won, and is configured to be able to execute a background change performance that switches the background image in at least some cases when the time-saving symbol is won.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not they have won a winning combination during the battle performance, as well as whether or not they have won a time-saving pattern.

As shown in FIG. 1361, when the background change effect is executed, a background that resembles heaven is displayed as the background image for the battle effect, and the words "The background is heaven!! Maybe you're lucky" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Note that a defeat effect is executed as the battle effect being executed.

In this first modified example, the background change effect is not always executed when the time-saving symbol is won, but is configured so that the conditions for executing the background change effect are met in some cases when the time-saving symbol is won. By configuring it in this way, even in battle effects where the background change effect is not executed, the effect can be executed without damaging the anticipation of winning the time-saving symbol.

Furthermore, in this first modified example, if the time-saving pattern for which time-saving pattern B is set is won in the second special pattern lottery executed during the second time-saving state, that is, if the second time-saving state can continue with many (at least 10 or more) time-saving times remaining at the end timing of the final countdown effect, the execution condition for the background change effect is established.

By configuring it in this way, when the background change effect is executed and the heavenly background is displayed, the next big win game can be executed with a high probability, and the effect of the presentation can be enhanced because the player can understand that there is a high possibility that the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, will be repeatedly set.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the first modified example in the 47th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1362, the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the 47th control example, which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 47th control example, will be described. The first modified example of the 47th control example differs from the above-mentioned 47th control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed. Specifically, it differs in that the normal 47a table 202Fad1 is used instead of the normal 47 table 202Fd1 (see Fig. 1350). The other configurations are the same, and the description of the same configurations will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 1362, the contents of the normal use 47a table 202Fad1 will be explained. FIG. 1362 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal use 47a table 202Fad1. As shown in FIG. 1362, the normal use 47a table 202Fad1 differs from the above-mentioned normal use 47 table 202Fd1 (see FIG. 1350) in that the contents defined in the data table referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation are different.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations is "1-3" and the lottery result is "big win, miss", a "common fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0-194", and a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the range of "195-198". Also, if the lottery result is "small win", a "common fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0-149", and a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the range of "150-198". Also, if the lottery result is "time-saving pattern", a "common fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0-19", and a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the range of "20-198".

Furthermore, if the number of fluctuations is "4" and the lottery result is "big win, miss", a "common medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". Also, if the lottery result is "small win", a "common medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 149", and a "normal fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the range of "150 to 198". Also, if the lottery result is "time-saving pattern", a "common medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 59", and a "special fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified for the range of "60 to 198".

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the 47th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 1363 to Fig. 1365, the control process contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the 47th control example will be described. In this first modified example, the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47a (S4413Fa in Fig. 1363) is executed instead of the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 (S4413F in Fig. 1358), and the normal state presentation setting process 47a (S4414Fa in Fig. 1365) is executed instead of the normal state presentation setting process 47 (see S4414F in Fig. 1359), and the rest is the same. The description of the same process contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47a (S4413Fa) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1363. FIG. 1363 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second time-saving state presentation setting process 47a (S4413Fa). This second time-saving state presentation setting process 47a (S4413Fa) differs from the above-mentioned second time-saving state presentation setting process 47 (S4413F in FIG. 1358) in that if it is determined that the value of the final presentation counter 223Fa is not 0, a special background setting process (S4601Fa) is executed, but the other control processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the special background setting process (S4601Fa) will be explained with reference to FIG. 1364. FIG. 1364 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special background setting process (S4601Fa). In this special background setting process (S4601Fa), when the second time-saving state is set, a process is executed to set a presentation mode (see FIG. 1361) to indicate that a large number of time-saving turns remain based on winning a time-saving symbol (time-saving B) that further sets the second time-saving state.

When the special background setting process (S4601Fa) is executed, first it is determined whether or not a time-saving bonus has been won (S4651Fa), and if it is determined that a time-saving bonus has not been won (S4651Fa: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won (S4651Fa: Yes), it is determined whether the type of time-saving symbol that has been won is time-saving symbol B (S4652Fa), and if it is determined that it is time-saving symbol B (S4652Fa: Yes), a display background image command showing a background image for the heaven background is set (S4653Fa), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving pattern is not B (S4652Fa: No), a background image transition lottery is executed (S4654Fa), and if it is determined that the background image will transition (S4655Fa: Yes), the process of S4653Fa is executed and this process ends. Also, if it is not determined that the background image will transition (S4655Fa: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the processing contents of the normal state presentation setting process 47a (S5709Fa) will be described with reference to FIG. 1365. FIG. 1365 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal state presentation setting process 47a (S5709Fa). This normal state presentation setting process 47a (S5709Fa) differs from the above-mentioned normal state presentation setting process 47 (see S4414F in FIG. 1359) in that the processing contents for determining the presentation mode to be executed during the final countdown presentation are different.

Specifically, when the normal state presentation setting process 47a (S5709Fa) is executed, the processes of S4701F to S4703F are executed, which are the same as those of the normal state presentation setting process 47 described above (see S4414F in FIG. 1359). If it is determined in the process of S4703F that the value of the final presentation counter 223Fa is not 1 (S4703F: No), the winning information for the reserved special chart 2 is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S4701Fa) and it is determined whether the winning information corresponding to a small prize win is included (S4702Fa). Then, if it is determined that there is small prize information (S4702Fa: Yes), the presentation type of continuous performance (such as a combination battle performance) using the period until the special chart 2 variation that wins the small prize stops is determined by lottery (winning probability approximately 1/10) (S4703Fa), and it is determined whether a continuous performance is present (S4704Fa), and if it is determined that a continuous performance is present (S4704Fa: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4704Fa that there is no continuous performance (S4704Fa: No), the performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variable pattern (S4706F), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4702Fa that there is no small win information (S4702Fa: No), the performance mode of the continuous performance is determined with a low probability (1/60) (S4705Fa), and the process proceeds to S4704Fa.

By configuring it in this way, when the player has a reserved special chart 2 that will result in a small win due to the pre-reading process (S4701Fa), it becomes easier to execute consecutive effects (such as a combo battle effect), which increases the expectation of a win when a consecutive effect is executed, thereby improving the effect of the performance.

If it is determined in the processing of S4703F that the value of the final performance counter 223Fa is 1 (S4703F: Yes), it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a "special fluctuation" (S4706Fa), and if it is determined that it is a special fluctuation (S4706Fa: Yes), the performance mode indicating a time-saving win is determined (S4707Fa) and this processing ends. If it is determined that it is not a special fluctuation (S4706Fa: No), it proceeds to processing of S4704F, and then S4706 is executed and this processing ends.

As explained above, in the 47th control example and the first modified example of the 47th control example, the presentation for showing the results of the second special symbol drawing executed during the time-saving state and the second special symbol drawing executed after the time-saving state ends (the second special symbol drawing executed based on the remaining special symbol 2 reservation) is configured to be executed using a predetermined first period presentation (final countdown presentation), and even if a new time-saving symbol is won during the first period presentation, the player is not notified that the remaining number of time-saving times has increased at that point, and a second period presentation (additional presentation) using the remaining number of time-saving times is executed after the first period presentation executed using the predetermined presentation period ends.

By configuring it in this way, even if a time-saving symbol is won midway, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable presentation without reducing the presentation effect of the first period presentation.

In the 47th control example described above, the timing of notifying the remaining number of time-saving times is changed depending on the situation at the time when the time-saving pattern is selected, but it may also be configured to set different timing of notification depending on whether or not other conditions are met when the conditions for notifying are met for various numbers set for special pattern selections (number of special pattern selections, number of jackpot wins, number of small jackpot wins, etc.).

In this case, for example, the notification conditions may be established based on the switching of the game state, and the notification timing may be varied depending on other game conditions at the time the game state is switched (for example, whether or not a special pattern change is being performed, or whether or not a special pattern change is being performed for a specific special pattern type (a special pattern type that is less likely to be performed in the game state after the switch)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned 47th control example, as a variable presentation executed during the time-saving state, a presentation showing whether or not the result of the special pattern lottery has resulted in a small win is executed as a priority, and a presentation showing whether or not the time-saving pattern has been won is executed as a non-priority (not executed). Variable presentations are mainly executed, and when a specific condition is met, a presentation showing the time-saving pattern has been won is executed in priority over a presentation showing the small win.

In this way, by configuring the variable effects to be executed with a different priority than the variable effects that are usually executed primarily, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects.

Now, referring to Figures 1366 to 1368, an additional example will be described regarding the settings of the presentation mode of the variable presentation for indicating the result of a special pattern selection in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be capable of awarding multiple types of benefits based on one special pattern selection.

In this additional example, the system is configured to be able to execute the determination of whether a jackpot has been won by a special symbol lottery, and whether a time-saving symbol has been won. Note that detailed control content and electrical configuration are omitted here, as any of the configurations described in the control examples above are applied.

In this additional example, the presentation mode for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be able to set either alone or in combination, a presentation mode for indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot suggestion presentation mode) and a presentation mode for indicating whether or not a time-saving pattern has been won (time-saving pattern suggestion presentation mode).

Figure 1366(a) is a diagram showing a display screen related to the jackpot suggestion presentation mode, and Figure 1366(b) is a diagram showing a display screen related to the time-saving symbol suggestion presentation mode. In the case of a normal presentation pattern, when a 90-second variation pattern is set as the variation pattern, presentation pattern A or presentation pattern B shown in Figure 1368(a) is set.

In other words, as a result of the 60-second super reach presentation shown in FIG. 1366(a), instead of the display mode (777) indicating a jackpot win, the medium symbol Z3b is displayed stationary, the display screen shown in FIG. 1367 is displayed, and then the time-saving suggestion presentation shown in FIG. 1366(b) is executed. In other words, in the variable presentation of presentation pattern A, the player is notified first of whether or not a jackpot win has been won, and then the player is notified of whether or not a time-saving symbol has been won.

In addition, in the presentation pattern B shown in FIG. 1368(b), the presentation pattern B is a variable presentation in which the jackpot suggestion presentation mode is set using the entire 90-second variable time, and in this case too, the variable presentation notifies the player of whether or not a jackpot has been won in priority over whether or not a time-saving pattern has been won.

For this type of configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that, for example, presentation pattern C shown in FIG. 1368(c) can be set. In other words, it is preferable to configure it so that, as the variable presentation (30 seconds), a variable presentation in which only the time-saving pattern presentation mode is set can be set, without setting a jackpot suggestion presentation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player of whether or not the time-saving pattern has been won in priority over whether or not the jackpot has been won, so that it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that is unexpected. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure it so that presentation pattern D shown in FIG. 1368(d) can be set.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the display screen shown in FIG. 1367 to be displayed after the time-saving symbol suggestion effect shown in FIG. 1366(b) is executed, and then the jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 1366(a) is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a priority that is swapped with the normal effect pattern (effect pattern A), thereby further enhancing the effect of the effect.

<Other information>
Conventionally, there have been devices that increase a player's interest in the game by playing music during a specific game period (e.g., a jackpot game period) and displaying lyrics corresponding to the music being played on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, there was a problem that the music being played and the lyrics being displayed were out of sync. Specifically, when a jackpot game is played and the timing to play a music arrives, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a command to the audio output device 226 to play (output) the audio data of the corresponding music, and is configured to output a command to the display control device 114 to indicate the display content to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the progress of the jackpot game. Therefore, although it is possible to synchronize the start timing of the music playback and the display of the lyrics, there is a problem that the music playback status and the lyrics display status cannot be synchronized thereafter, and there is a problem that the music being played and the lyrics being displayed are out of sync when the music playback process or the lyrics display process stagnates.

In addition, some pachinko machines 10 are designed not to display lyrics from the start, due to concerns that the music being played and the lyrics being displayed may be out of sync. However, by not displaying the lyrics of the music being played, players are unable to understand the meaning of the music, which reduces the presentation effect.

In response to this, as with conventional pachinko machines 10, the lyrics are displayed in accordance with the timing of the music being played, and the lyrics are hidden only when an event occurs that may cause a mismatch between the music being played and the displayed lyrics. If an event occurs that requires the lyrics to be hidden, it is preferable to configure the device to display information about the music being played (information different from the lyrics) instead of the lyrics.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the music being played and the lyrics being displayed from becoming out of sync, which would reduce the dramatic effect, and it is also possible to prevent the dramatic effect from being reduced even if the lyrics are hidden.

<Summary of technologies described>
<Summary A> (Button operation stuck period)
The game device comprises an operation means (effect button 22) operable by a player, an operation effective period setting means capable of setting an operation effective period during which an operation on the operation means is determined to be valid (a process for determining an operation effective period according to a result of a special symbol lottery in a second part performance in a battle performance), an operation determination means (a process for determining a long press operation) capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means during the operation effective period set by the operation effective period setting means, and a performance varying means (a process for determining a long press operation) capable of gradually varying a performance mode (HP value) from a first mode to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode based on the determination by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed ( a first period during which the presentation mode can be changed (a period during which a non-decreasing period is not set) and a second period during which it is more difficult to change the presentation mode than in the first period (a non-decreasing period), based on the predetermined operation (long press operation) performed in a state in which the presentation mode can be changed (a state in which the remaining HP value is not the final HP value).

<Summary B> (When performing a long press operation, it is easier to proceed if you cancel the long press)
A gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player, an operation valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period during which an operation on the operation means is judged to be valid, an operation determination means capable of determining that a continuing operation is being performed on the operation means for a predetermined period during the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means, a performance changing means capable of gradually changing a performance mode from a first mode to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode while it is determined by the operation determination means that the continuing operation is being performed, and a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when the performance mode is changed to the second mode. a first presentation control (control for reducing the HP value based on a long press operation when a non-decreasing period is not set) that makes it easier to change the presentation mode to the second mode when the continuing operation is continued for a first period than when the continuing operation is ended in a second period shorter than the first period, and a second presentation control (control for canceling the non-decreasing period by interrupting a long press operation when a non-decreasing period is set) that makes it easier to change the presentation mode to the second mode when the continuing operation is ended in a second period shorter than the first period than when the continuing operation is continued for the first period.

<Summary C> (During rapid-fire performance, different performance control is performed when performing rapid-fire operation and long press operation)
a signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operating means; a signal discrimination means for discriminating the signal output by the signal output means; a presentation variation means for gradually varying a presentation mode from a first mode to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode when a discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a predetermined execution condition; and a final mode determination means (a process for determining a final HP value) for determining a final mode to which the presentation mode can be varied by the presentation variation means from among the plurality of modes, wherein the presentation variation means varies the presentation mode to the final mode in different variable modes when a first execution condition is established (when determined to be a press down operation) and when a second execution condition different from the first execution condition is established (when determined to be a long press operation) as the predetermined execution condition.

<Summary D> (Forced chance performance execution control)
In a game having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the game further comprises a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a performance mode determination means capable of determining, as a performance mode of the performance, one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a first performance mode which is more likely to be selected when the discrimination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is not the specific discrimination result, and and an update means capable of updating a presentation value based on information regarding the presentation executed by an execution means, wherein the presentation mode determination means is capable of executing a first decision that determines the presentation mode based on the determination result by the determination means (determining the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation based on whether or not a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a chance notice presentation is won), and a second decision that determines the first presentation mode as the presentation mode regardless of the determination result by the determination means if the presentation value updated by the update means satisfies an execution condition (forcibly determining the presentation mode of the chance notice presentation based on the value of the presentation execution counter 223aah).

<Summary E> (The super hot announcement that was missed during the big win performance after the super hot miss announcement occurs is executed)
In a game having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the game further comprises a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a performance mode determination means capable of determining, as a performance mode of the performance, one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a first performance mode which is more likely to be selected when the discrimination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is not the specific discrimination result, and a memory means for storing, for a predetermined period of time, decision information indicating that the first presentation mode has been decided as the presentation mode of the presentation to be executed during a period in which identification information for indicating a discrimination result is dynamically displayed, and the presentation mode decision means is capable of executing a first decision for deciding the presentation mode based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a second decision for deciding the first presentation mode (a process of using, for a winning presentation, the presentation mode used for a losing presentation stored in a chance mode information storage area 223aag) when the decision information is stored in the memory means as the presentation mode of the presentation to be executed during a period in which identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed.

<Summary F> (Long button display with longer effective operation period than usual)
a game machine including: a determination means capable of executing a determination; a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; an operation means operable by a player; an operation determination means capable of determining that the operation means has been operated; a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which an operation on the operation means is determined to be valid by the operation determination means; a valid period informing means for informing a player of at least a portion of the valid period set by the valid period setting means; and an operation presentation executing means for executing an operation presentation to show the result of the determination by the determination means based on the operation of the operation means being determined by the operation determination means while the valid period is being notified by the valid period informing means, wherein the valid period setting means is capable of setting a first valid period and a second valid period longer than the first valid period as the valid period, and wherein it is easier to set the second valid period when the result of the determination by the determination means is the specific determination result than when the specific determination result is not the specific determination result.

<Summary G> (Bond 60-second mission)
a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which the acquisition means is easy to acquire the acquired information, and a second game state in which the acquisition means is more difficult to acquire than the first game state; and a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which the acquisition means is easy to acquire the acquired information, and a game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the acquisition means is easy to acquire the acquired information, and a game state setting means for setting a first ...

<Summary of technical ideas 1>
Next, each technical concept described in each of the above control examples will be briefly explained. First, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a trigger other than the big win of the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for shifting the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some of the lottery results (misses) in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is different from the big win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus that is different from the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the ease of triggering the setting of a high probability state for normal symbols varies depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, it is configured to be possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win (whether or not a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established) in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, it is configured to be possible to determine only whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed.

In this way, when the normal state is set, a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery or a time-saving win can be established as an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns, and when playing in a game state other than the normal state, a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery can be established as an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns. In other words, the normal state, in which the presence or absence of a time-saving win can be determined, is configured to be more likely to establish an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns than a game state other than the normal state. Therefore, the normal state, in which each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is set to a low probability state and is the game state in which it is most difficult to win in each pattern lottery (a game state that is disadvantageous to the player), can make it easier to set a high probability state for normal patterns than other game states, and can increase the motivation of players playing in the normal state.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the game state (normal state, second high probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is configured to be memorizable (reserved and memorizable) up to a predetermined number (4). And, the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving lottery in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state transitions from any game state (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state (when the game state transitions from an advantageous to an unfavorable game state for the player), the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving state if a second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state after the transition based on the execution right for the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) that was reserved and stored in the high probability state for normal symbols before the transition.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game state has shifted from favorable to unfavorable to the player, the player can be made to execute a special symbol lottery for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier for the player to return to a favorable game state, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly when the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, is set. Also, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, it is possible to motivate the player to play to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, in order to end the high probability state of the normal symbol when the upper limit (4) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2) has been acquired.

In the fifth control example described above, in addition to winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set even when the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, and the ease of establishing the end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is different between the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving feature) that is set based on winning the jackpot and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving feature) that is set based on winning the time-saving feature.

Specifically, the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the second time-saving is configured to be more likely to be greater than the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the first time-saving. In this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, it is possible to set a high probability state for a normal pattern with a different degree of advantage depending on the setting trigger (the trigger for setting the high probability state for a normal pattern). This makes it possible to interest the player not only in whether or not a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, but also in the game process of what trigger sets the high probability state for a normal pattern, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In the fifth control example described above, the ease of achieving the time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) is varied in order to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player in the high probability state of normal patterns. However, without being limited to this, for example, the ease of obtaining the reserved memory for the second special pattern lottery (opening pattern of the electric role 640a) may be varied between when the first time-saving is set and when the second time-saving is set, or the degree of advantage of the bonus given when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during jackpot play or the type of game state set after the jackpot play ends) may be varied.

Next, the first variant of the fifth control example described above differs from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured so that the first special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set can also be a time-saving win.

In the fifth control example described above, a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) for normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols is executed in the normal state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set, in addition to the jackpot lottery, the time-saving lottery is also executed. This makes it possible for a player who has experienced a game during a high probability state for normal symbols (advantageous game) that is advantageous to the player to execute a game (pull-back game) that is more likely to return to advantageous game after the advantageous game ends.

However, in the fifth control example described above, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is executed, the player cannot benefit from the time-saving lottery, resulting in a problem that the player may become bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

In contrast, the first variant of the fifth control example described above is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery even in the first special pattern lottery that is executed in the normal state, making it easier for players to benefit from the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special symbol lottery is configured to tend to have a longer period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period) than the high probability state (probable bonus state, time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the player is configured to be granted a privilege that makes it easier for the normal symbol high probability period to continue until the next jackpot is won.

In contrast to this, in the first modified example of the fifth control example described above, if a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short-term time-saving state (for example, one time of time-saving) can be set, and a game that acquires the right to execute the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the period in which the short-term time-saving state is set (normal symbol high probability period). In other words, in this first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above is configured to be executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the first modified example of the fifth control example described above, a plurality of variation times can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. In this first modified example, when the time-saving state is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed frozen in a display mode (time-saving symbol) for indicating the time-saving win after a predetermined variation time has passed, and then the time-saving state (one time of time-saving) is set, and the time-saving state continues until the special symbol variation executed next is displayed frozen.

In other words, the length of time that the time-saving state lasts is determined according to the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state. Therefore, the longer the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state, the easier it is to acquire many reserved special symbols 2 during the time-saving state, making it a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, in order to further increase interest in comparison with the fifth control example described above, the contents of the bonus granted in the case of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery executed in a state in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set are configured to differ depending on the trigger (first time reduction or second time reduction) in which the high probability state of normal patterns is set. In other words, the contents of the bonus granted in the case of winning a jackpot during the first time reduction and the case of winning a jackpot during the second time reduction when the same jackpot type is set are different. By configuring in this way, when a high probability state (time reduction state) of normal patterns is set, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger set the time reduction state, thereby further increasing the interest of the player in the game.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short play time per round (2R jackpot) can be executed as the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the difference in the content of the game executed between when the time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving state is set without executing a jackpot game, i.e., when the second time-saving state is set.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the variation effect executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the variation effect executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are configured to be executable in the same presentation mode. Specifically, the first period from when the special pattern variation to indicate that a jackpot win (a 2R jackpot win) for which the first time reduction is set is started until the special pattern variation is stopped and the 2R jackpot game ends, and the second period, which is the variation time of the special pattern variation to indicate that a time reduction win for which the second time reduction is set is set, are set to be approximately the same period, and the presentation is executed in a common presentation mode using the periods.

By configuring it in this way, when the first time-saving state is set and when the second time-saving state is set, a common presentation style can be executed in the period from when the special pattern variation starts to when the time-saving state is set, making it difficult for the player to understand which trigger set the time-saving state.

Next, the sixth control example described above is significantly different from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving feature in the special symbol lottery even when a game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a new time-saving win occurs while the time-saving state is set, it is possible to update the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue.

In addition, when updating the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue, it is configured so that the period for which the time-saving state will continue can be updated to be longer than the current remaining period (favorable update) or shorter (unfavorable update). In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the time-saving lottery and the number of time-saving times (length of time period) that is set when the time-saving state is won, winning the time-saving state can be a favorable benefit to the player or an unfavorable benefit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide innovative gameplay that combines gameplay in which a time-saving state is expected to be won and gameplay in which a time-saving state is not expected to be won.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example described above, the more consecutive time-saving wins without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes for the player to be set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, multiple time-saving types that differ in the degree of advantage to the player are defined, and the more time-saving wins there are during the time-saving state, the easier it becomes to set an advantageous time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, the longer the period without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes to grant a player an advantageous bonus.

In addition, when the most advantageous time-saving type for the player is set, it is configured so that it is easier for the player to transition to a time-saving type that is less advantageous than when a time-saving type that is less advantageous than the most advantageous time-saving type is set. In other words, there are multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantageousness, and time-saving types with gradually increasing degrees of advantageousness are set based on the time-saving win, so that when the highest stage of time-saving type is reached, it is easier for the player to fall down to the lowest stage of time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a time-saving type that is advantageous for the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

As in the sixth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute a time-saving lottery when the time-saving state is set, that is, when the setting condition for a new time-saving state is established when the time-saving state is set, to execute a process to set a new time-saving state regardless of the content of the already-set time-saving state (short remaining time period), or to execute a process to determine whether or not to set a new time-saving state based on the result of the determination between the content of the already-set time-saving state (short remaining time period) and the content of the time-saving state for which the new setting condition is established, and to execute a process to calculate the difference between the content of the already-set time-saving state and the content of the time-saving state for which the new setting condition is established, and to add (subtract) the information corresponding to the difference (short remaining time period) to (from) the short remaining time period of the already-set time-saving state.

The system may also be configured to execute a process that waits for a new time-saving state for which the setting conditions are met to be set until an already-set time-saving state ends. In this case, if multiple setting conditions for time-saving states are met before an already-set time-saving state ends, the system may be configured to set all of the time-saving states for which the setting conditions are met in order, or it may be configured to store up to a predetermined number of time-saving states that are advantageous to the player among the waiting time-saving states, and to set only the stored time-saving states in order.

Of course, each of the technical ideas described in the sixth control example above may be applied to each of the above control examples, and the technical idea described in the thirteenth control example above, that is, the technical idea that allows the time-saving state to be set as a ceiling privilege, may be applied to the sixth control example above as a setting condition for the time-saving state.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be determined in a single special pattern lottery. Also, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a time-saving win determination is made before a jackpot win determination is made, and when a time-saving win is made, a time-saving state is set before a jackpot win determination is made in the special pattern lottery, a jackpot win determination is made in the special pattern lottery while the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when a special pattern change is made to show the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, the time-saving state is set for a short period including the timing when the jackpot determination is executed in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a function (time-saving period setting function) that allows the time-saving win in the special symbol lottery is set in order to play a game (a game that is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player toward the next jackpot win for a predetermined period (up to 10,000 times) without going through the jackpot game, whereas in the above-mentioned seventh control example, in addition to the above-mentioned time-saving period setting function, a function (special lottery function) is set that allows the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state to be executed during the game (left-handed play) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing when the jackpot determination is executed by the special symbol lottery to be in the time-saving state without making it easy to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination for the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state while making it difficult for the player to realize that they have won the time-saving special pattern lottery, so it is possible to notify the player of the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is different between when a jackpot is won in the normal state and when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and it is configured so that a bonus that is more advantageous to the player is granted when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state (for example, a jackpot game with more rounds). In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when a player wins both the time-saving state and the jackpot, a bonus that is more advantageous is granted than when a player wins only a jackpot.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be able to set a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a time-saving win has been won, and a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In other words, by grasping the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the result of the jackpot determination executed for the currently executing special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable presentation, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a time-saving winning is configured to be different from the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a determination to grant multiple different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to grasp the suggestion mode for suggesting other judgment results while grasping (predicting) at least one judgment result.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the result of the effect (time-saving effect) including a suggestive aspect that can suggest whether or not the time-saving effect will be won is an effect result including a suggestive aspect that suggests that the time-saving effect will not be won, than when the time-saving effect is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which multiple bonuses with different awarding judgments can be awarded in one special pattern lottery, when a judgment result suggestive effect that can suggest the result of the awarding judgment for one bonus is executed, the result of the judgment result suggestive effect suggests that one bonus will not be awarded, so that the expectation of awarding another bonus is higher than when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed. This makes it possible to notify the player that a bonus is more likely to be awarded at the time the judgment result suggestive effect is executed, compared to when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed.

As in the seventh control example described above, a configuration that allows multiple bonuses to be awarded in a overlapping manner based on the execution of one special pattern lottery may of course be applied to each of the control examples described above. For example, a technical idea that allows a player to win both the jackpot lottery and the time-saving lottery in a overlapping manner based on the execution of one special pattern lottery may be applied to the thirteenth control example to the sixteenth control example described above, and the technical idea regarding the ceiling bonus used in the thirteenth control example to the eighth control example described above may be applied to the fifth control example to the eighth control example described above.

For example, if a technical idea regarding a ceiling bonus is added to the seventh control example, a single special pattern lottery can be executed to award up to three different bonuses (jackpot win, time-saving win, ceiling bonus) to the player, making the player more interested in the results of the special pattern lottery. In this case, the system may be configured to provide all three bonuses that can be awarded, or to discard at least one bonus. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an overly advantageous bonus is offered to the player.

Next, the eighth control example described above is configured to be able to execute a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery that are executed in the normal state, and is configured to have a high probability of winning the time-saving win (most of the time-saving wins are negative wins), and is configured so that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on the time-saving win is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in the eighth control example described above, the game board 13 is configured to make it easier for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be executed alternately, and the end condition for the second time reduction described above is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed consecutively.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example described above, configured in this way, if the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state does not result in a jackpot win (jackpot probability 1/300), the second time-saving period is set by winning the time-saving period with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time-saving period until the condition for ending the second time-saving period is met.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be set as a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of special pattern lotteries executed during the second time-saving period reaches a specific number (100 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the special pattern lotteries are executed in a predetermined order, and the second time-saving end condition is configured to be established before the first time-saving end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time-saving period is set, the player can be motivated to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition in order to end the second time-saving period as soon as possible.

In addition, the degree of advantage given to the player is varied depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, so that it is easier to set an advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot game if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state than if the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of special pattern lottery that will be held after the second time-saving period ends.

In the eighth control example described above, if the type of special pattern lottery executed immediately after the time-saving state is set satisfies a specific condition (the same type as the special pattern for which the time-saving state is set), the special pattern lottery executed immediately thereafter is configured to establish the time-saving end condition (establish the shortened time-saving end condition). However, the configuration for establishing the shortened time-saving end condition is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be able to execute the time-saving lottery even when the time-saving state is set, and if a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state, a new time-saving state with the content of the time-saving win may be set.

In the eighth control example described above, if an unfavorable time-saving effect is won in the second special pattern lottery, a special pattern lottery that is less favorable than the normal state is executed in the first special pattern lottery until the unfavorable time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured so that a penalty can be imposed on other special pattern lotteries depending on the result of one special pattern lottery.

As a gaming method for imposing such a penalty, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) display the varying display of the first special symbol and the varying display of the second special symbol (so-called simultaneous variation specification) as in the 12th control example described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing an inappropriate game in a specific gaming state (normal state), an unfavorable time-saving state is set, and while the unfavorable time-saving state is set, a special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal state is executed in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, the twelfth control example described above is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a specified time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the specified time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

In addition, in the twelfth control example described above, the time-saving lottery can be executed for both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and the player is granted a more advantageous benefit if one of the special patterns wins the time-saving lottery during the period from when the time-saving lottery is won for the first special pattern to when the other special pattern also wins the time-saving lottery during the period until the variable display of that special pattern stops, than if only one of the first special pattern or the second special pattern wins the time-saving lottery.

In the twelfth control example described above, if the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving feature in the normal state, the time-saving A state is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature in the normal state, a long (300-second) fluctuation time is set (time-saving winning fluctuation state), and if the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature during the period until the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends (i.e., until the first special symbol, which indicates a time-saving feature win, is stopped and displayed), the time-saving B state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, is set.

By configuring it in this way, if one special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the other special symbol will also win the time-saving feature, giving the player a special advantage. Therefore, when one special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the special symbol changes to indicate that a time-saving feature has been won, the player will be made to want to win the other special symbol as well, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type that can set a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends, the system is configured to execute a process to set the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage by continuing a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player's gambling spirit from increasing.

In addition, in a gaming machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or small win) is won in one of the special pattern lotteries, the specification is generally such that only one of the following is executed: the variable display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted); however, in the above-mentioned 12th control example, the configuration is such that whether the variable display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped is determined depending on the big win type (or small win type). In other words, a big win type that forcibly stops (discards) the variable display of the other special pattern and a big win type that temporarily stops (interrupts) the variable display of the other special pattern are specified.

By configuring it in this way, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, and a game state disadvantageous to the player may be set by the stopped display of one special symbol, it is possible to prevent the setting of an unfavorable game state when a jackpot of a jackpot type that allows the variation of the other special symbols to be discarded, but if a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, the situation in which an unfavorable game state may be set continues. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols could be discarded, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Of course, the playability in the above-mentioned twelfth control example, i.e., the playability of the simultaneous variation specification, may be applied to each of the above-mentioned control examples. In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 with simultaneous variation specifications, a configuration may be used in which, based on the execution of one special pattern lottery, the result of the other special pattern lottery is discarded, for example, when a time-saving win is won or a ceiling bonus is awarded based on the execution of one special pattern lottery, the other special pattern lottery (variation) being executed is discarded.

<Summary of technical ideas 2>
Next, each technical idea described in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be briefly explained. First, regarding the technical idea that the probability of obtaining an advantageous privilege by the special drawing lottery increases when the number of times the special drawing lottery using the special drawing lottery reserved acquired during the time reduction exceeds a predetermined number of times, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has a means for acquiring the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information) and has a means for reserving and storing the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, based on the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) that is reserved and stored, the second special pattern lottery is executed (discrimination means capable of executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery being a jackpot win (first discrimination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, continues until the end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. In addition, in the second special pattern lottery, a time-saving winning judgment can be executed separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that the time-saving winning has been won in the time-saving winning judgment (if it is determined that the second judgment result is true), the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern can be set without executing the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a plurality of game states are configured to be set, but among them, the time-saving winning judgment can be executed only in the state in which the normal state (specific period) is set.

By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for the normal pattern is set at the end of the jackpot game, not when the special pattern variation stops, and when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a time-saving game in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for the normal pattern is set at the stop of the special pattern variation. Thus, the timing at which the high probability state for a normal pattern is set can be made to differ depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed (period during which the normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be performed (period during which the normal state is not set), it is possible to make the player interested in the period during which the special pattern lottery is performed. Note that in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is performed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed and a period during which it is not performed. For example, it is also possible to configure so that the time-saving winning judgment can be performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set (normal state, second probability state), and not to perform the time-saving winning judgment in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability state).

Furthermore, rather than switching whether or not to execute the time-saving win judgment depending on the set game state, the probability of winning the time-saving win judgment may be made to differ depending on the game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the time-saving win judgment has a 1/6 probability of winning the time-saving win, and in other game states, the probability of winning the time-saving win may be configured to be 1/200. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set game states in which it is easy to win the time-saving win and game states in which it is difficult to win the time-saving win, so that, similar to the technical idea described above, it is possible to get the player interested in the effect, i.e., the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a first ball entry port 64 (a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a first special symbol lottery is provided, and a second ball entry port 640 (a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is configured to be possible only in the second special symbol lottery.

In other words, in the first special pattern lottery, no time-saving winning judgment is performed regardless of the game state set, and in the second special pattern lottery, the time-saving winning judgment can be performed during a specific period (normal state). By configuring it in this way, the amount of value that is later granted to the player can be significantly different between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and further between the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning judgment, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment during a specific period (normal state). However, without being limited to this, for example, the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the second special symbol lottery during the first specific period (normal state), and the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the first special symbol lottery during a second specific period (second probability change state) different from the first specific period. By configuring in this way, depending on the set period, it is possible to create a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eager to play a game in which a more advantageous value is more likely to be given.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 329, it is advisable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the rate at which game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 is similar to the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, regardless of which game state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can select which ball entrance to enter the game ball at his/her discretion, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving state by the time-saving state winning judgment (first time-saving state) is more likely to be set as a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, i.e., a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be established, than the time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot. In other words, the system is configured to vary the degree of advantage of the set time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state. This makes it possible to vary the period (time-saving end condition) during which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determined judgment result (setting trigger), which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a case where the second time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state, depending on the game state before the time-saving state is set, and a case where the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the situation under which the time-saving state is set.

More specifically, for example, the system may be configured so that a more advantageous time-saving state is more likely to occur when the number of times special symbol lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of times they have been stuck) exceeds a predetermined number, compared to when this number has not been exceeded.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be won in one special pattern lottery (see FIG. 315). This allows a jackpot win (first discrimination result) and a time-saving win (second discrimination result) to be discriminated in a overlapping manner, so that various lottery results can be expected in one special pattern lottery, such as a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or both a jackpot win and a time-saving win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when there are no overlapping wins (see FIG. 306(b)). Therefore, since it is easy to execute a specific type of game that is advantageous to the player by discriminating in overlapping, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by granting the player a bonus corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, a configuration other than that of the seventh control example described above may be used to provide a more advantageous benefit to the player in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins. For example, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be configured so that a more advantageous game state (e.g., a special bonus state, a time-saving state, etc.) can be set in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after a time-saving winning judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the second judgment result) is made, a jackpot judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the first judgment result) is made, and if a time-saving winning is made in one special pattern lottery, the jackpot judgment in that special pattern lottery can be made in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is a double win different from the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is no double win.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the type of bonus (the number of time-saving times granted after the end of the jackpot game) granted to the player when the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) set based on winning the time-saving in the special pattern lottery is different (see FIG. 280 (b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio (the content of the jackpot game and the number of time-saving times granted) in the type of bonus game is variable according to the setting type (first time-saving, second time-saving), the bonus granted to the player can be different even in the high probability state of the same normal pattern (second game state), and there is an effect that the game can be diversified without setting many game states, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the number of time-saving periods granted is different depending on the setting type (first time-saving period and second time-saving period), but this is not limited to this, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of rounds played) may be configured to be different.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, when the second time reduction is set rather than the first time reduction, that is, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without a jackpot game being played, it is configured so that the high probability state for normal symbols, in which the end condition is less likely to be established, is more likely to be set. In other words, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without winning a prize ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the second time reduction, which provides fewer benefits before the high probability state for normal symbols is set than the first time reduction, can prolong the high probability state for normal symbols, which has the effect of allowing benefits to be awarded fairly to players.

Furthermore, in the second variant of the fifth control example described above, similar to the fifth control example and the first variant of the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning judgment (determination of the second discrimination result) is configured to be executable only in the normal state. In other words, the execution of the time-saving winning judgment is restricted in states other than the normal state. Therefore, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect of making the player more interested in the game state that has been set, and making the player look forward to the game state being set in which the second discrimination result can be determined.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a presentation mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first or second time reduction has been set (see Figs. 278 and 279). In other words, when the first time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(a)) is executed for the first period which is the sum of the special symbol change time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol change time (including the fixed time).

More specifically, the variable time and the jackpot game period are predefined in accordance with each special symbol lottery result so that the first period and the second period described above are approximately the same, and the performance periods of the specific effects are the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a performance indicating a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed after a specific effect with the same performance period and performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is watching the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to determine which setting trigger set the high probability state of a normal symbol.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed even during the time-saving state (second game state), and if a time-saving winning occurs during the time-saving state (second game state), it is possible to set a time-saving state (second game state) of a time-saving type in which the time-saving ending condition is unlikely to be met (the number of time-saving events is large or the probability of winning the time-saving event is high).

As a result, the longer the period for which the time-saving state is set, the more likely it is that a time-saving state of a type for which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met will be set, making it easier to play bonus games.

In the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the set game state, but the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to the same. In addition, although the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the game state, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may also be different depending on the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game was played. In this case, it is preferable to configure the probability of winning the time-saving bonus to be higher when the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game is played exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grant a special bonus of winning the time-saving bonus, which is different from the big win game, to a player who has not won a big win in a special pattern draw for a long time. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

The following configuration may be used as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the embodiments or control examples described above.

<About the configuration of high probability states of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a high probability state for a normal pattern can be set after the jackpot game ends. However, a setting trigger other than a jackpot win in a special pattern lottery may be provided as a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern. For example, a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern may be established when the number of times that a special pattern variation is executed without winning a jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, twice the denominator value of the probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed in a low probability state for a special pattern).

By configuring it in this way, when a situation occurs in which special symbol lotteries (variations) that do not result in a jackpot are repeatedly performed, i.e., a situation in which the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, it is possible to provide the player with a special bonus (a high probability state for normal symbols), thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol variation, which is an element for realizing the above-mentioned setting opportunity, is executed may be configured to be variable according to the game situation. For example, the number of times the special symbol variation that realizes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to differ according to the set game state. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special symbol variation that realizes the setting opportunity is executed to differ depending on the type of game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, that is, when the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set and when the second probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. By configuring in this way, the expectation that the high probability state of the normal symbol will be set can be made different according to the set game state.

In this case, since the second probability variable state in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set makes it easier to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which a low probability state of the special symbol is set (because the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is higher), it is preferable to configure the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol to be established with fewer special symbol fluctuations when the second probability variable state is set than when the normal state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to establish the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol regardless of which game state is set.

On the other hand, the configuration may be such that when the normal state is set, the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established with fewer executions of the special pattern variation than when the second probability variable state is set. In other words, in the normal state (the most unfavorable game state for the player) in which the probability state of the special pattern is also set to a low probability state that is unfavorable to the player, the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern can be made more likely to be established, making it difficult for the player to play an excessively unfavorable game. Also, since the high probability state of the normal pattern is more likely to be set based on the setting trigger that is established when the number of executions of the special pattern variation reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to easily provide the player with a surprising game in which a high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, when the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is configured to differ depending on the set game state, a game state in which the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern cannot (is difficult to) be established may be provided in some of the set game states. For example, a configuration may be made in which multiple types (e.g., normal AA, normal AB) can be set as normal states (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), and the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is more likely to be established when the game state of normal AB is set than when the game state of normal AA is set.

By configuring it in this way, a player playing on a gaming machine in which the normal state is set can play while predicting when the high probability state of the normal pattern will be set, or whether the game state is one in which a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern can be established, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that a presentation can be executed that allows the player to predict whether the currently set game state (game state for each type) is a game state in which a setting trigger for the high probability state of the normal pattern is likely to be established.

Furthermore, in gaming machines with game specifications in which the bonus (the jackpot game content and the game state set at the end of the jackpot game) given to the player when he wins the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is more likely to be favorable to the player in a game state in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set than in a game state in which a low probability state of normal patterns is set, it is preferable to configure the machine to be able to execute a presentation in which the presentation mode is changed based on information indicating the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of normal patterns is realized and information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (or information indicating the advance determination result (pre-reading result) that has determined the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in advance).

For example, when determining the presentation mode of an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that is more likely to be executed when a jackpot has been won in a special pattern lottery than when a jackpot has not been won, the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is realized is referenced, and different presentation modes are determined when the remaining number of special pattern changes is small, i.e., a first situation in which the high probability state of the normal pattern will soon be set, and when the remaining number of special pattern changes is large, i.e., a second situation in which the high probability state of the normal pattern will not be set for some time. The presentation mode of the reach effect can be determined so that a reach effect is more likely to be executed in a presentation mode that can inform the player that the first situation is more advantageous than the second situation.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute reach effects with different presentation modes depending on the timing when the reach effect suggesting a jackpot win is executed and the timing when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the reach effects can be executed in various presentation modes, enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to understand the degree of advantage of the timing when the reach effect is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set or not) based on the presentation mode of the reach effect executed, so it is possible to provide a novel presentation that makes the player hope that the presentation result of the currently executed reach effect will be a miss (a presentation result indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a miss).

In addition, in a case where a high probability state for normal symbols is set when a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot while a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and the high probability state for normal symbols is more likely to be set after the end of a jackpot game if a jackpot is won during a high probability state for normal symbols than if a jackpot is won during a low probability state for normal symbols, a specific variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is won in a different symbol lottery than when a jackpot is not won. It may be configured to be able to execute a performance (for example, a reach performance), and to determine the performance mode of the specific performance between a first performance mode suggesting that a jackpot has been won in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of a jackpot game, and a second performance mode simply suggesting that a jackpot has been won, and to fix the frequency with which the specific performance of the first performance mode is executed regardless of the remaining number of times that special symbols will fluctuate until the high probability state of normal symbols is set, and to lower the frequency with which the specific performance of the second performance mode is executed as the remaining number of times that special symbols will fluctuate until the high probability state of normal symbols is set decreases.

By configuring it in this way, the selection rate of the first presentation mode when a specific presentation is executed can be increased as the number of special pattern changes approaches the number of times that sets the high probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, even if a specific presentation is executed in a state close to the number of special pattern changes that sets the high probability state of the normal pattern (for example, the number of special pattern changes since the end of the previous jackpot game is between 90 and 99 times), the player can be interested in the presentation result of the specific presentation without being disappointed.

In addition, a number of times lottery means may be provided to determine the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to establish a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern, and the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to establish the setting trigger may be determined based on the results of the lottery by the number of times lottery means. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to be "0" as the number of times that is most likely to establish the setting trigger, within the range of the number of times that can be determined by the number of times lottery means.

By configuring it in this way, even if a jackpot type that sets a low probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to set a game state that is essentially the same as when a high probability state for normal symbols is set.

In other words, even when the same game state is set and the same jackpot type (a jackpot type in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set) is set, the game state (probability state of a normal pattern) that is set after the jackpot game ends (until the first special pattern variation is executed) can be made different based on the lottery result of the number of times lottery means.

This makes it difficult for players to predict the game state that will be set after the big win game ends, and provides players with an element of surprise.

The timing for executing the above-mentioned number of times lottery means may be set appropriately, and may be, for example, the timing when the big win game ends, or the number of times lottery means may be configured to be executable each time the special pattern variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). In this case, if the number of times the special pattern variation has been executed determined as the lottery result of the number of times lottery means, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be set immediately after the lottery by the number of times lottery means is executed.

In this way, by configuring the number of times lottery means to be executable every time the special pattern variation is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to vary the contents of the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern (the number of special pattern variations that establish the setting trigger) during the period in which the special pattern variation is performed multiple times without winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the high probability state of the normal pattern will be set. In this case, it is preferable to vary the range of the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, which is determined by lottery, based on the number of times the number of times lottery is performed by the number of times lottery means from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the next jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that the more the number of times lottery is performed, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal pattern. By configuring in this way, the more the number of special pattern variations performed between jackpots increases, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, the above-mentioned number of times selection means executes a selection to determine the number of times the special pattern will change to establish a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of the normal pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the contents of the number of times selection means may be configured to determine the number of times the special pattern will change required from the execution of the number of times selection means until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine configured to execute a frequency selection means each time a special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, configured to be able to execute the frequency selection means when a predetermined selection condition is established based on the execution of a special symbol variation, a normal symbol high probability selection means may be provided in place of the frequency selection means described above, and configured to set a high probability state for the normal symbol when this normal symbol high probability selection means is selected.

In addition, a different setting trigger may be provided as a setting trigger for the high probability state of the normal pattern. For example, a measuring means may be provided that measures the number of times the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result other than a big win (for example, a small win), and when the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined measurement result, a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. Alternatively, a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern may be established when the game result (increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed) since the end of the previous big win game exceeds a predetermined range (for example, when the rate of decrease in the number of balls dispensed is extremely drastic).

Furthermore, the degree to which the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established (ease of establishment) may be varied depending on past game results. For example, if past winning jackpots have been biased toward jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player, that is, if a game that is disadvantageous to the player has continued for a predetermined period of time, the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols may be configured to be established more easily, or if a game that is advantageous to the player has continued for a predetermined period of time, the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols may be configured to be established less easily. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing for a long time from continuing to play excessively disadvantageous or excessively advantageous games.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, if a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set and a time-saving end condition is met, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. Then, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is met when the special symbol variation count is executed (is executed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

The time-saving end condition is not limited to this, and different time-saving end conditions may be set depending on the type of special symbol, for example. Specifically, the time-saving end condition may be established when the first special symbol has changed a first number of times, when the second special symbol has changed a second number of times, or when the combined number of times the first special symbol has changed and the second special symbol has changed a third number of times, etc.

In addition, when setting a time-saving end condition based on the number of times that the special pattern changes are performed, various numbers may be set as the number of times that the special pattern changes at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. As shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time-saving end condition may be satisfied when the special pattern changes are performed more than 100 times (e.g., 200 times) other than when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times, or when the time-saving end condition is performed less than 100 times (e.g., 50 times). Furthermore, the content of the time-saving end condition may be different depending on the setting trigger (jackpot type, number of special pattern changes, etc.) that is established to set the time-saving state, and it is preferable to configure the number of times that the special pattern changes at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied to be reduced so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be established when another setting trigger is established than when one setting trigger is established. By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state will end, and to make the player interested in which setting trigger was met to set the time-saving state.

In addition, factors other than the number of times the special pattern variation is performed may be used as factors for establishing the time-saving end condition. For example, the time-saving end condition may be established when the number of times the special pattern lottery results in a specific lottery result (small win) reaches a predetermined number.

The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special symbol change (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special symbol change, or a specific timing until the next special symbol lottery after the corresponding special symbol change is executed. Furthermore, the time-saving state may be ended at the start or end timing of a winning game (big win game, small win game), or the start or stop timing of a normal symbol change, or the start or end timing of a normal winning game.

In this case, the time-saving state may be configured to end at the same timing regardless of which time-saving end condition is met, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at different timings depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is met. For example, if a time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times a special pattern change is performed, the time-saving state may be ended at a predetermined timing related to the special pattern change, and if a time-saving end condition is met based on the result of a special pattern lottery (such as winning a small jackpot), the time-saving state may be ended at a predetermined timing related to a winning game (small jackpot game, big jackpot game) that is executed based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is met, making it more difficult to tell how long the time-saving state will continue.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the game is executed with a gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased without winning a jackpot (a gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased by frequently occurring small jackpot games). However, by using a different gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased without winning a jackpot, it is also possible to configure it so that the ball output can be increased even when another game state is set.

For example, by setting a large number of prize balls as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters an entrance (e.g., the first right entrance 64b2) that is easier for the ball to enter when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it may be possible to increase the number of balls paid out without winning a jackpot when a high probability state for normal symbols is set. By configuring in this way, the player can simultaneously play a game aiming to win a jackpot with a special symbol and a game aiming to win a jackpot with a normal symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the length of the normal pattern change time may be made different between the first game state (time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set and the second game state (probability change state) in order to make the number of balls dispensed per unit time different, or the length of the period in which it is actually possible to insert the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 during the normal pattern winning game period that is executed when a normal pattern is won may be made different, and the first game state may be configured to make it possible to obtain more balls dispensed per unit time than the second game state.

For gaming machines that have the ability to increase the number of balls dispensed without winning a jackpot when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is a good idea to provide the above-mentioned setting trigger (a setting trigger established based on the number of times the special symbol changes) as a setting trigger for setting the high probability state for normal symbols. This makes it possible to set a high probability state for normal symbols and allow a player who has been experiencing special symbol changes (lottery) for a long period of time without winning a jackpot in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, to play a game that increases the number of balls dispensed (rescue game). This makes it possible to prevent the execution of games that result in excessively disadvantageous game results for the player.

As described above, a configuration that can increase the number of balls dispensed by playing without winning a jackpot in a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be configured, for example, so that the number of prize balls paid out is equal to or slightly (in the range of about 1 to 1.2 times the number of balls fired) greater than the number of balls continuously fired during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, even in gaming machines with game specifications that tend to prolong play during the time-saving state (for example, game specifications with a low probability of winning a jackpot for special symbols, or game specifications with a relatively long change time set as the change pattern for the special symbol change executed during the time-saving state), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play during long-lasting time-saving games.

The above describes the configuration related to the high probability state of normal symbols, but the same content may be applied as the configuration related to the high probability state of special symbols. In this case, a configuration in which the elements corresponding to the normal symbols in the above content are changed to special symbols may be applied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand at what timing the probability state of the special symbols (low probability state, high probability state) is set, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, the configuration with the above content may be used for both normal and special symbols.

<About the configuration of the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration is used in which the same ratio is pre-defined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol as the ratio at which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game according to the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. However, without being limited thereto, for example, in a state in which a jackpot type that can set a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of a jackpot game is set (a state in which the right to set a high probability state of the special symbol has been acquired), a configuration may be used in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game by passing a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game, and a configuration may be made in which the execution ratio of an advantageous jackpot game in which it is possible to pass the ball through a specific area during a jackpot game and an unfavorable jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball through a specific area during a jackpot game differs between a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot win in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot win in the second special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same percentage is pre-defined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the percentage at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the percentage at which the high probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

However, other configurations may be used, for example, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, and may be predefined. In this case, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game may be different for the same special pattern type depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win (game state at the time of win).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type of special symbol after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be, for example, the jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol changes performed between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., and it is preferable to configure the game situation so that the high probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is unfavorable to the player than when the judgment result is favorable to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively unfavorable game result for the player.

Similarly, if a jackpot is won when a high probability state for a special symbol is set, the above-mentioned contents may also be applied to the rate at which a low probability state for a special symbol is set after the jackpot play ends.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the same ratio is predefined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol as the ratio at which the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, according to the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a state where a high probability state of the special symbol is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, in a state where a jackpot type that can set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends is set (a state where the right to set a high probability state of the special symbol has been acquired), a low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends because the ball did not pass through a specific area during the jackpot game, and the execution ratio of the advantageous jackpot game in which the ball can pass through a specific area during the jackpot game and the disadvantageous jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball through a specific area during the jackpot game may be different between the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win of the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win of the second special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same rate is pre-specified for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

However, other configurations may also be used. For example, the ratio at which a low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game in which a jackpot win during a high probability state of the special pattern is won may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, and may be predefined. In this case, the ratio at which a low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game in which a jackpot win is won during a high probability state of the special pattern may also be predefined to be different for the same special pattern type, depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win (game state at the time of winning).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a low probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type of special symbol after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be, for example, a jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol changes performed between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., and it is preferable to configure the game situation so that the low probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is favorable to the player than when the judgment result is unfavorable to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively favorable game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, an end condition based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery can be set as an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern, and when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the high probability state of the special pattern continues until the next jackpot is won. However, other end conditions may be set, and the configuration used as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern in each of the above-mentioned embodiments may be used as an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern.

Specifically, the system may be configured so that the end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes after the high probability state of the special pattern is set reaches a specific number (e.g., 150 times). This makes it possible to end the high probability state of the special pattern, which has a high probability of winning a jackpot, without winning a jackpot, so that a player playing in a game state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set can be motivated to play in an attempt to win a jackpot before the end condition is met.

The gaming machine may be configured to have both the above-mentioned end condition and the time-saving end condition. In this case, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special pattern variation is executed, which is set as the end condition, to be different from the number of times the special pattern variation is executed, which is set as the time-saving end condition. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to switch the game state each time each end condition is met, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that they will never tire of.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the number of times the special symbol changes as the end condition can be set to one from a number of times including at least a first number of times of changes and a second number of times of changes different from the first number of times of changes. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is met.

In addition, when configuring an end condition related to the number of special pattern variations to be set for a gaming machine configured to be able to vary the number of special pattern variations set as an end condition, it is preferable to configure the first number of special pattern variations among the numbers of special pattern variations that can be set as an end condition to be a number of variations less than the number of special pattern variations at which the time-saving end condition is established, and the second number of variations different from the first number of variations to be a number of variations greater than the number of special pattern variations at which the time-saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the end condition and the time-saving end condition, whichever is established first, depending on the end condition that is set.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the first probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the next game state to be set can be either the second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) depending on the content of the set end condition, so that the player can be made to play a game that allows him to predict the next game state to be set while keeping him interested in the content of the set end condition, thereby increasing his interest in the game.

In this way, in a gaming machine configured to allow different contents to be set as the end condition or the time-saving end condition, it is preferable to configure it so that a notification effect can be executed that can notify the player of information indicating the contents of each currently set condition. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information that allows him to predict the timing when each condition may be fulfilled and the contents of each set condition, thereby making the player interested in the notification effect that is executed and improving the presentation effect.

The above describes an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern that is established based on the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery (falling lottery) for transitioning the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state may be configured to be executable separately from the special pattern jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery), and the end condition may be established when the falling lottery is won. Even in this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery or the number of times the falling lottery is executed during the period in which one special pattern lottery is executed may be configured to be different, thereby varying the ease with which the end condition is established during the high probability state of the special pattern. This makes it difficult for the player to tell when the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special pattern is set.

<About the function that sets an upper limit on the period during which a high probability state can be continuously set (limit function)>
In a gaming machine in which high and low probability states can be set as probability states for special patterns, and high and low probability states can be set as probability states for normal patterns, and in which game states of different degrees of advantage can be set depending on the probability state that is set, an upper limit is set on the number of times that a probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) can be set in succession, and a function (limit function) is provided that, when the upper limit is reached, forcibly sets the probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) to a probability state that is less advantageous than that probability state (e.g., a low probability state), thereby preventing game states that are excessively advantageous to the player from being set and preventing the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

In a gaming machine having such a limit function, the activation conditions of the limit function may be configured to be different depending on the limit setting conditions that are met. Specifically, based on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won, one of a first activation condition that makes the limit function more likely to be activated and a second activation condition that is less likely to be activated than the first activation condition may be selected and set.

Specifically, in a gaming machine with a probability limit function that sets an upper limit on the number of times a high probability state of a special pattern is set in succession, and when the upper limit is reached, forcibly sets a low probability state of the special pattern, it is preferable to configure the upper limit value until the probability limit function is activated to be different depending on the type of jackpot, and to configure the activation condition to be configurable so that when a first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "5 times," and when a second jackpot type different from the first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "3 times."

By configuring it in this way, the length of the advantageous play period during which the player can continue playing in an advantageous play state can be varied based on the type of jackpot that is set, depending on the value set as the activation condition.

In the above example, the limit function for the high probability state of special symbols (probability change limit function) was explained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above contents may be applied to the limit function for the high probability state of normal symbols (time-saving limit function), or a combination of the above contents may be applied to each limit. Furthermore, for gaming machines with game specifications in which a low probability state is more advantageous to the player than a high probability state as a probability state for a symbol type, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times the low probability state is set consecutively, and forcibly sets the high probability state when the upper limit is reached.

In addition, in the above example, the limit function is used with the aim of preventing the execution of games that are excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may also be used for other purposes. For example, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times that a game state (low probability state) that is disadvantageous to the player is consecutively set, and when the upper limit is reached, a game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is forcibly set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent games that are excessively disadvantageous to the player from being executed.

<Configuration that allows winning games to be played based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a jackpot game can be executed. A different execution trigger may be provided as an execution trigger for a jackpot game advantageous to a player. For example, a game machine (so-called two-type specification) may be configured to have a ball-entering means through which a ball can enter, a variable means that opens in a variable pattern that can be changed between a first state and a second state different from the first state when an operating condition is established based on the ball entering the ball-entering means, a second ball-entering means that is easier for the ball to enter when the variable means is changed to the first state than when the variable means is changed to the second state, a specific area through which the ball that entered the second ball-entering means can pass, and a jackpot game execution means that can execute a jackpot game based on the ball passing through the specific area, i.e., a jackpot game execution trigger is established based on the ball passing through the specific area. With this configuration, whether or not a big win game will be executed is determined by the behavior of the ball that has entered the second ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the behavior of the ball.

In addition, in such a gaming machine with two types of specifications, the operating conditions may be established based on the ball entering the ball entry means described above, or an action lottery is executed based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and the operating conditions are established if the action lottery is won. In the former case, the operating conditions are always established when the ball enters the ball entry means, making it easier for players to become interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, the operating conditions are not established unless the action lottery is won, even if the ball enters the ball entry means, so the frequency of balls entering the ball entry means can be increased.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine with the above-mentioned two types of specifications, a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path that can pass through a specific area and a second flow path that has more difficulty passing through the specific area than the first flow path are provided as flow paths for balls that have entered the second ball entry means, and furthermore, a distribution means is provided that can distribute balls that have entered the second ball entry means to one of the plurality of flow paths, and the proportion of balls that have entered the second ball entry means that pass through the specific area can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means.

By configuring it in this way, the degree to which the opportunity to execute a jackpot game is realized can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, so it is possible to generate interest in the timing at which the ball that enters the second ball entry means will reach the distribution means.

As described above, in a gaming machine having a configuration that can vary the degree to which a jackpot game execution trigger is realized depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, the distribution operation content of the distribution means may be configured to always execute a certain operation after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or may be configured to always execute a certain operation based on either the entry of a ball into the ball entry means, the establishment of an operating condition, or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry means.

Furthermore, the distribution operation contents of the distribution means may be varied depending on the conditions to be met. For example, depending on the type of winning in the operation lottery, the distribution means may be configured to determine one of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a first distribution operation content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area and a second distribution operation content that makes it harder for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first distribution operation content, and operate the distribution means.

Also, in a gaming machine (so-called type 1/type 2 mixed specification) that is configured so that the trigger for the execution of a jackpot game can be established in either case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery or when the ball passes through a specific area, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. In other words, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. In other words, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended (forced to end) if the ball does not pass through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery.

This configuration makes it possible for players to become interested in both the results of the special pattern lottery and the behavior of the ball as it flows down toward the specific area.

<About the structure for changing the falling direction of the ball>
As a configuration for changing the flow direction (falling direction) of the ball flowing down the play area formed on the play board 13 configured in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the nail members used in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, i.e., members capable of changing the flow direction of the ball within a range that does not go against the direction of gravity, a means for moving the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided. For example, a moving means for moving (e.g., lifting) the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided by using an electric drive source or by using the moving energy of another ball.

By configuring it in this way, the direction of movement of the ball flowing down the play area can be various, including directions different from the direction of gravity, providing players who are closely watching the ball's behavior with an unexpected movement of the ball. In addition, it is possible to move (rise) a ball that has reached the lowest point of the play area, i.e., a ball that has not entered the ball entry port that would grant the player a special privilege, toward the upstream side of the play area, keeping the player excited about the behavior of one ball until the very end.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming machine in which a gate member through which a ball can pass is provided in the gaming area and a predetermined bonus can be awarded when a ball passes through the gate member, a moving means can be provided in the area that a ball that has passed through the gate member can reach, and the moving means can be configured to eject the ball above the gate member. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which a single ball can award multiple bonuses to a player.

The above-mentioned moving means may also be provided in an area where the ball is more likely to enter during a winning game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) (for example, an internal area of the winning device that opens during a winning game). This configuration makes it possible to raise the ball inside the winning device, so that, for example, in a gaming machine that is configured to be able to award a player an advantageous benefit by having a ball pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game, it is possible to configure a ball that entered the winning device in a round prior to the specific round to be raised by the moving means, so that it remains there for a predetermined period of time, and to be able to pass through the specific area during the specific round depending on the timing at which the retained ball is discharged.

In this way, a moving means may be used to keep the ball within the specific area for a predetermined period of time. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to predict when the ball will be ejected from within the specific area.

<Configuration that acts on the entry of a ball into one entry hole to open another entry hole>
The machine is provided with a first operating port through which game balls can enter, and a first operating member which, in response to a game ball entering the first operating port, operates to a first state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more easily, and is configured such that, in response to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., two) entering the first operating port, the first operating member operates to a second state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more difficultly than in the first state.

A second operating member is provided that operates in response to a game ball that has entered the first operating port entering a specific area, to a third state in which game balls can enter a second operating port different from the first operating port. This second operating member is configured to operate in a fourth state in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second operating port than in the third state when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the second operating port.

With this configuration, when a game ball enters the first operating port, the second operating member operates to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second operating port, and in that state, by allowing one game ball to enter the second operating port, the second operating member operates to the fourth state. Then, by allowing the first operating member to again enter a game ball into the first operating port, which is in the first state, the second operating member is again operated to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second operating port.

More specifically, when a game ball is inserted into the first operating port while the first operating member is in the second state, up to four balls can be inserted into the operating ports (first operating port, second operating port). Furthermore, a first winning/losing lottery (lottery for a first normal symbol) is executed based on the game ball that entered the second operating port entering the second specific area, and when the result of the first winning/losing lottery is a winning (probability of winning is about 1/2), the first normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the first variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable ball entry means) until a first closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or four balls have entered) is met. Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first variable ball entry means has entered a third specific area where entry is possible, a second win/lose lottery (second normal pattern lottery) is executed, and if the result of the second win/lose lottery is a win (probability of winning approximately 1/1), a second normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the second variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the game ball to enter the second variable ball entry means) until a second closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or four balls have entered) is met. Then, based on the game ball that entered the second variable ball entry means entering a fourth specific area where balls can enter, a third winning/losing lottery (third normal symbol lottery) is executed, and if the result of the third winning/losing lottery is a winning (probability of winning is approximately 1/1), the third normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the third variable ball entry means is configured to open (change to a state that allows the game ball to enter the third variable ball entry means) until a third closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or 10 balls have entered) is met.

In this case, the maximum number of winning balls that can be entered into each operating port based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating port may be calculated as "4" by adding "2", which is the maximum number of winning balls into the first operating port, to "2", which is the product of the maximum number of winning balls into the first operating port (2) multiplied by the maximum number of winning balls into the second operating port (1) that can be entered each time a game ball enters the first operating port, or by calculating "4" based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating port (a winning game using multiple ordinary electric devices). The number of game balls that can enter each operating port during the period until the game is executed may be calculated as the maximum number of winning entries, that is, the number of winning entries required to execute one winning game ("2" obtained by adding the number of balls that enter the first operating port "1" to the number of balls that enter the second operating port "1"). Alternatively, the maximum number of winning entries may be calculated by adding the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port to the value obtained by dividing the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port by the maximum number of winning entries into the second operating port that can be won each time a game ball enters the first operating port.

The winning game may be configured to end when the maximum number of winnings reaches a predetermined limit, and the value of the maximum number of winnings calculated when determining whether the limit has been reached based on the establishment of a switching condition may be switched from values (maximum number of winnings) calculated using the various calculation formulas described above for reference. If the switched value has not reached the limit, the winning game may be configured to be extended until the maximum number of winnings after the switch reaches the limit.

In other words, using various calculation formulas that can vary the calculated value, the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port is specified so that the number of game balls that can win into multiple operating ports in a series of games when a game ball wins into the first operating port is a limited number, and the calculation formula for determining the maximum number of winning entries is specified differently depending on the conditions, and a winning game is executed based on the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port specified corresponding to the specified calculation formula.

By configuring it in this way, the content of the winning game (the total number of winnings for each operating port and each variable ball entry means) can be varied depending on the specified calculation formula.

The value of the maximum winning number may be changed according to the conditions. For example, when a first condition is met, the maximum winning number for the first operating port may be changed from "2" to "3", and when a second condition different from the first condition is met, the maximum winning number for the first operating port may be changed from "2" to "1". By configuring in this way, the content of the winning game (a game in which a game ball is made to enter each operating port and the variable ball entry means) that is executed when a game ball enters the first operating port may be changed according to the condition that is met, so that the player can play the game while expecting that a favorable condition for the advantageous establishment (a condition in which the total number of prize balls awarded during the winning game is set to be large) that is favorable to the player will be established, and that the winning game will be executed when the favorable condition is established.

<Regarding gaming machines that allow multiple setting levels>
It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which multiple combinations of probabilities (commonly known as settings) for jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in a pachinko machine having multiple setting values, a configuration other than the configuration for changing the probability of winning (winning a big prize, winning a small prize, etc.) by the special symbol lottery by changing the set setting value may be used. For example, in a gaming machine capable of setting a first gaming state (low probability state of special symbols) in which a first probability is set as the probability of winning a special symbol lottery, and a second gaming state (high probability state of special symbols) in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set, the length of the specific period may be changed according to the set value when a specific period is set as the period during which the second gaming state continues, for example, a period until the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches a specified number, or a period until a specified ending lottery (so-called fall lottery) is won. For example, the specific period during which the second gaming state continues may be longer when a setting value advantageous to the player is set than when a setting value disadvantageous to the player is set.

By configuring it in this way, even without using a configuration that changes the probability of winning the special pattern lottery according to a set value, the frequency of winning the special pattern lottery can be varied according to the set value by varying the length that the second gaming state continues.

In the above example, a pachinko machine having multiple setting values is configured to be able to set setting values that are advantageous to the player and setting values that are disadvantageous to the player regardless of the game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. In at least one of the various game situations (for example, a game situation in which a specific game situation is set among multiple types of game situations set by a combination of the probability state of a special symbol and the probability state of a normal symbol, a game situation in which a big win game is being played, and a game situation in which a small win game is being played) that are set in the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be able to set setting values that are advantageous to the player and setting values that are disadvantageous to the player, or the game content that is set corresponding to each setting value may be specified so that a specific setting value is more advantageous to the player in a specific game situation than a specific setting value other than the specific setting value, and a specific setting value other than the specific setting value is more advantageous to the player in a specific game situation other than the specific game situation than a specific setting value.

This configuration eliminates any absolute advantage or disadvantage for the set values, and makes it possible to switch the relative degree of advantage of each set value depending on the game situation being played, so that players can be motivated to play no matter what set value is set.

In addition, players who understand the set setting value can be made to play in a game situation where the set setting value is relatively more advantageous than other setting values. In other words, it is possible to set different game situations as the game situation desired by the player depending on the set setting value. This makes it possible to provide a game that the player will not quickly become bored of.

In the above example, a configuration was described that aims to vary the degree of advantage given to the player according to the set value, but it may also be configured to provide multiple levels of set values for other purposes. For example, it may be configured so that the game process up until the point where the player is given a bonus corresponding to the degree of advantage varies according to the set value, without changing the degree of advantage given to the player. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the probability of winning a jackpot for a special symbol varies according to the set value, the probability (expectation) of winning a jackpot within a specified period does not vary according to the set value ( The length of the specified period may be varied according to the set value so that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is not significantly different from the set value. For example, when a set value of "1" is set, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/10 during a specific period until the 10th special pattern lottery has been performed (the probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is approximately 65%) may be played, and when a set value of "6" is set, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/9 during a specific period until the 9th special pattern lottery has been performed (the probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is approximately 65%) may be played.

By configuring it in this way, even if the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is changed according to each setting value, it is possible to change only the game content without significantly changing the degree of advantage given to the player. This allows players to play a variety of games.

It is also advisable to configure the above-mentioned multiple setting values so that they can be set (changed) as part of the process (initial setting process) that is performed when the pachinko machine is powered on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on, making it more difficult for players to commit fraud by, for example, manipulating the setting values while playing.

Note that other timings may be used as the timing at which the setting value can be set (changed). For example, the currently set value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in playing the pachinko machine) is equal to or greater than the upper limit as a result of playing with the pachinko machine, or the currently set value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is advantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in playing the pachinko machine) is less than the lower limit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent games that are excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player from being played.

In the above embodiments, the case where the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (AN) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is updated in the main control device 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively) has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (AN) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This can reduce the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, the first ball entrance 64 is configured to allow a maximum of four balls to enter the ball entrance and the through gate 67 is configured to allow a maximum of four balls to pass through the through gate 67, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying the pattern vertically or along a predetermined path such as an AL shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern for indicating the lottery result of the normal pattern may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. Furthermore, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the targeted area (play area) of the game board 13 is configured to differ depending on the game state, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that a left-hand hit game that targets the left-hand area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Also, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means that can be operated by the player is a frame button 22 that is pressed by the player to determine that the operation means has been operated, but other configurations may also be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor-type operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player contacting or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

The numerical values (probabilities) related to the game specifications, such as the distribution (ratio) of the jackpot types, the number of time-saving times and the number of chance-changing times (ASAT times) after the jackpot ends, the probability of a jackpot or a small win, the probability of winning a normal pattern, the number of prize balls for winning each winning slot, and the number of chance-changing times limit, are not limited to the numerical values in each of the above embodiments, and can be changed freely within the scope of the embodiment without changing the purpose of the embodiment. The degree of advantage for the player can be further increased by increasing the ratio of the advantageous jackpot types, increasing the number of time-saving times and the ASAT times, increasing the probability of a jackpot or a small win, increasing the number of prize balls, or increasing the number of chance-changing times limit. Conversely, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous by decreasing the ratio of the advantageous jackpot types, decreasing the number of time-saving times and the ASAT times, decreasing the probability of a jackpot or a small win, decreasing the number of prize balls, or decreasing the number of chance-changing times limit.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as an AV zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 that can be set to multiple settings, it is preferable to configure it so that, based on the set value, the type of variation pattern selection table 202b referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the main control device 110 is changed, the type of variation pattern selection table 222a referenced when selecting the variation pattern (variation performance) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, or the type of various selection tables referenced when selecting a detailed performance mode to be executed as a variation performance is changed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 depending on the content of the variation performance to be executed, so that a variation performance that interests the player can be executed.

In addition, if the data table referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation is made different based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to define the presentation mode of the operation presentation as a "setting suggestion" presentation mode for suggesting the set setting value so that the selection ratio is the same for each data table used for each setting value, and configure the presentation content of the operation presentation executed in the "setting suggestion" presentation mode to differ depending on each setting value, and configure the selection ratio of other presentation modes to vary depending on the setting value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the presentation content when the "setting suggestion" operation presentation that directly suggests the setting value is executed, and the selection ratio of each presentation mode when other operation presentations are executed, so that it is possible to get the player interested in the various operation presentations that are executed.

Furthermore, as described above, the selection ratio of each presentation mode in the operation presentation is configured to differ depending on the game state that is set. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that allows the setting value to be set in six stages from setting "1" that is disadvantageous to the player to setting "6" that is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the same as the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when settings "4" to "6" are set and the second game state (time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set. This makes it possible to make a player playing a pachinko machine 10 with a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player believe that a setting value that is advantageous to the player has been set.

In this way, by configuring the selection ratio of the presentation mode to be variable based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (jackpot lottery result, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)), it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective symbol line, the symbols are changed by operating an operating lever, and the symbols are stopped and finalized by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then displays the finalized identification information, in which the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and finalized due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-mentioned embodiments may be configured in whole or in part in combination.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path forming means conceals the passed means>
A gaming machine AA1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first gaming ball, when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and are configured so that the area around the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the decorative plate 302 always makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is not possible to respond to a game mode in which the ball entering the ball detection hole 431 is confirmed to continue or stop the launch of the game ball, and there is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the parts related to the game ball launch operation.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AA1, the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path configuration means is a predetermined displaceable means, so it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see. Therefore, in a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see, it is easy to confirm the flow of the first gaming ball and to decide whether to continue or stop the operation of launching the gaming ball, so that it is possible to improve the parts related to the operation of launching the gaming ball.

The form of the specified displaceable means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that in gaming machine AA1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball that flows downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA1, gaming machine AA2 can change the visibility of the first gaming ball by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, which reduces material costs and design costs compared to using other decorative members as the displaceable means.

Gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the path configuration means in gaming machine AA2 has a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA2, gaming machine AA3 has a forward/backward path that allows a second gaming ball to be positioned in front of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball when viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine AA3, the forward/rearward path is configured such that when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at the launch interval set in the launch device, the second gaming ball hides at least a portion of the first gaming ball. Gaming machine AA4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA3, gaming machine AA4 can also provide the effect of making it difficult to recognize a first gaming ball as a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the launch intervals unchanged. This makes it possible to create a situation in which it is difficult to recognize the first gaming ball as the second gaming ball even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AA3 or AA4, the front-rear path is arranged such that the front side component is closer to the center of the gaming area than the rear side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA3 or AA4, gaming machine AA5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined along the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AA5, the front side component is positioned in the line of sight of the player who is looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AA5, gaming machine AA6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is usually believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect, but if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

A gaming machine AA7 is characterized in that the path configuration means of any one of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6 includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows the gaming ball to flow left-right upstream of the front-rear path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AA2 to AA6, gaming machine AA7 can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down a left-right path, so a concealing effect can be created not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a concealing effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is more pronounced when one side of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, when one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on the left or right side, making it easier to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA7, the path configuration means is provided with a first flow path through which the gaming ball passes through the passing means in a first manner, and a second flow path through which the gaming ball passes in a second manner, and is configured so that the first gaming ball is at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be seen, regardless of which flow path of the path configuration means the first gaming ball flows down. Gaming machine AA8.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA7, gaming machine AA8 can make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the passing means, thereby increasing attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

A gaming machine AA9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, a branching means is provided on the upstream side of the passing means for dividing the flow direction of the gaming ball, the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received gaming ball, and the path configuration means is configured so that gaming balls whose flow paths are divided by the branching means and that reach the switching means flow down the same path for a specified section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, the gaming ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same path for a certain section, making it more difficult to grasp the flow of the gaming ball compared to when the gaming ball that reaches the switching means immediately flows down a path that corresponds to the subsequent flow path. This can improve the player's ability to focus on the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine AA9, the path configuration means has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming balls flowing down, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means. Gaming machine AA10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA9, gaming machine AA10 can use the protruding portion to branch the game balls, improving the durability of the structure compared to, for example, cases where branching is caused by the movement of a valve body.

In the gaming machine AA10, the protruding portion includes a first protruding portion that extends in a predetermined direction and a second protruding portion that extends in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and the protruding amount of the first protruding portion and the protruding amount of the second protruding portion are configured to be different. Gaming machine AA11.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA10, the gaming machine AA11 can differentiate the effect of the first protrusion on the gaming ball from the effect of the second protrusion on the gaming ball depending on the flow-down state of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to use the fixed first protrusion and second protrusion to branch the gaming ball according to a predetermined rule depending on the flow-down state of the gaming ball.

<Points to appeal for the introduction of a ball passing through a route forming means into a passed means>
A gaming machine AB1 is characterized in that it comprises a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, the path forming means having a specified portion that constitutes the upstream side of the passed means, the specified portion being positioned on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and being configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the area around the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to identify by the decorative plate 302, and depending on the state of the big prize component 300, the game ball may flow down a position outside the decorative plate 302 or may flow down in a manner that is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, highly visible gaming balls that fall off the decorative plate 302 and flow down are instead configured to miss the ball detection hole 431, and some of the gaming balls that flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 are guided to the ball detection hole 431. This means that the visibility of the gaming ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player may feel dissatisfied because paying attention to the gaming ball is likely to be wasted. In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of making the way the gaming ball flows down after attracting attention worth paying attention to.

In response to this, gaming machine AB1 is configured so that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section arranged on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, and so the degree of improvement in attention to the gaming ball can be associated with the gaming ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section will pass through the passing means, leading to an improvement in terms of the significance of paying attention to the gaming ball after it has attracted attention.

In addition, this configuration makes it easier to guide the player's gaze to the game ball flowing down the specified area, reducing the possibility that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

The conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the display device side that easily attracts the player's attention, the winning hole side or the starting hole side, the front side (nearby side) that is easy for the player to see, the stage side (mainly the part where the game ball is temporarily held at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) where the gaze is likely to be focused as the probability of the ball entering a specific ball entry hole is remarkably high, the V-winning hole side that directly leads to winning a jackpot, the ball dispensing device side as an object of operation, the performance operation button side, the area where the game ball that has strayed from the ball entry hole flows down (the area where the player will inevitably follow it with his eyes out of frustration), the bright side as a light-emitting means switches between light and dark, or any other side. Also, it is possible to intentionally form a less conspicuous side to make it stand out in comparison.

A gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the path configuration means of the gaming machine AB1 includes a second predetermined portion that makes a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means less noticeable than when the ball entered the path, and the predetermined portion is positioned on a more noticeable side than the second predetermined portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB1, gaming machine AB2 reduces the attention of the gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means at the second specified section before it flows down the specified section, thereby making it possible to highlight the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the specified section.

A gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the predetermined portion of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2 has sections where the speed at which gaming balls flow down is different.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 and AB2, gaming machine AB3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming balls.

A gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the gaming machine AB4 is configured such that the second flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second specified part is faster than the first flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the specified part.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB3, gaming machine AB4 can shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means to reach a specified section.

A gaming machine AB5 is one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, characterized in that the specified section has a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction differs.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, gaming machine AB5 can create sections in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction is different, regardless of the actual speed at which the gaming ball flows down. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction at any specified location, the player's gaze can be easily focused on a specified location and distracted from other areas.

The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a difference between displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front and displacement on a straight line having a front-to-rear component, a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or serpentine shape, or some other difference.

A gaming machine AB6 is any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB5, and is provided with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce gaming balls into the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Gaming machine AB6 can ensure the visibility of the introduction means in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AB1 to AB5. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means while also increasing the attention to gaming balls that are likely to pass through the passing means.

A gaming machine AB7 is one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, and is characterized by having an avoidance means configured to cause gaming balls on the front side of the path configuration means to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the specified part.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, the gaming machine AB7 is configured so that the gaming balls can flow down the front side of the path configuration means, and is equipped with an avoidance means for making the flow path of the gaming balls avoid the line of sight toward the passing means, so that it is possible to ensure both the size of the gaming area and the visibility of the gaming balls toward the passing means.

The manner in which the game ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the last position at which the player can see the game ball heading towards the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position, or it may be something else.

In gaming machine AB7, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state change means is configured to be able to guide the game ball that has reached the acceptance state change means in the acceptance state to the path configuration means side when the state changes from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state. Gaming machine AB8.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB7, gaming machine AB8 can prevent gaming balls that reach the receiving state changing means and then flow down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

A gaming machine AB9 is characterized in that it is provided with a partitioning means that is arranged above the passing means in a front view of the gaming machine AB7 or AB8 and that partitioning means divides the gaming area, and that the partitioning means is configured to allow gaming balls to flow down the left and right outer sides.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB7 or AB8, gaming machine AB9 uses a partitioning means to prevent gaming balls from flowing down in front of the passing means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passing means.

The partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that forms the flow surface of the game balls, or it may be a ball entry port forming means through which the game balls can enter. The partitioning means may be a means with a fixed shape (appearance) or a means with a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine AB9, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state where the game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state where they cannot be accepted, and the part of the partition means on the acceptance state change means side is configured to easily guide the game balls to the acceptance state change means side. Gaming machine AB10.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB9, the gaming machine AB10 can be configured to accept a gaming ball that is in the process of being accepted by the acceptance state change means by pushing it into the acceptance state change means using the partition means. This makes it easier to prevent a gaming ball that slides sideways while being accepted from escaping from the acceptance state change means and falling down the front side of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means may be a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means may be a first winning port located above the special winning port of the special winning device. A game ball that reaches the special winning port just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the direction of the pivoting axis of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after sliding can reach any position within the range of the pivot tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is positioned above the passing means, the game ball after sliding may fall to the front side and then pass in front of the passing means, and the game ball after sliding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after sliding sideways, it will be necessary to position the opening and closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means when viewed from the front, which reduces the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

In contrast, gaming machine AB10 makes it easier to prevent the gaming ball from sliding sideways and falling to the front side of the opening and closing plate, improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

A gaming machine AB11 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, gaming machine AB11 makes it difficult to distinguish between gaming balls that flow down the path forming means and may pass through the passed means and gaming balls that flow down the front side of the path forming means and do not pass through the passed means, making it difficult to determine the number of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between cases where it is easy and difficult for game balls to enter the path forming means from game balls flowing down near the path forming means.

A gaming machine AB12 is any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, characterized by having a light-emitting means for irradiating light from behind the ball flowing down the specified portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, gaming machine AB12 makes it easier to avoid the front of the ball flowing down a specified area reflecting light, making it difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the path length to the V-hole while saving space>
A gaming machine AC1 comprising: a path forming means configured to allow a gaming ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the gaming ball that has flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which the gaming ball can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means comprises a delay means which delays the vertical displacement of the gaming ball, and the delay means configures the gaming ball to be able to flow down towards the passed means.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a distribution unit 75 that is configured to be movable left and right is arranged in the flow path of the gaming ball that entered the second large winning opening 12, and the flow direction of the gaming ball can be changed by the positioning of the distribution unit 75 (see, for example, JP 2014-155538 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, it is essential for the distribution unit 75 to operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous entry into the specific area 73 or balls being caught by the distribution unit 75, and some players may feel suspicious of the behavior of the distribution unit 75 and be unable to continue playing with confidence.

One example of a solution to this problem is to lengthen the flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. For example, by changing the position of the distribution section 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the play area (near the first large prize opening 10), it is possible to ensure a long flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. This is thought to reduce the possibility of an erroneous prize entry into the specific area 73.

On the other hand, when this method is implemented, it becomes necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide area from the second large prize opening 12 to the first large prize opening 10, and the design freedom of the game area is limited in this area. In other words, there is a problem in that the design freedom of the game area is limited over a wide area in order to prevent erroneous winning into the specific area 73.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of preventing game balls from entering the game area by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AC1, the path configuration means is equipped with a predetermined delay means, so even if the vertical length of the path configuration means in a front view is shortened to save space, it is possible to ensure that a long time passes before a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means passes through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path configuration means, so that erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the game ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The form of the delay means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a form in which a protrusion for deceleration is formed in the flow path, or a form in which a predetermined flow path is provided that causes the game ball to flow down a flow path having a forward/rearward component.

In the gaming machine AC1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down the flow path toward the front side is greater than that of the flow path toward the back side. In the gaming machine AC2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming ball flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

A gaming machine AC3, in which the delay means in the gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down is greater in a flow path toward the front side than in a flow path in which the gaming ball flows down while maintaining its front-to-rear position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AC1 and AC2, gaming machine AC3 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming balls flowing in front of them. This makes it easier to increase the player's attention to the gaming balls flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

A gaming machine AC4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the gaming ball passes through a position located in front of the passing means when viewed in the predetermined direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the gaming machine AC4 can reduce the visibility of the area near the passed means when the gaming ball is placed in a forward position. This can increase the attention to the area near the passed means.

A gaming machine AC5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC4, the front position can be configured in multiple places.

According to the gaming machine AC5, gaming balls are placed at multiple front positions, so that the gaming balls at the front can hide at least a portion of the gaming ball at the back. Since the passing means is placed behind the gaming balls at the back, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by the multiple gaming balls, and the visibility of the passing means can be reduced.

In this case, if the interval between balls entering a specified flow path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is always positioned at one of the front positions, making it possible to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that the path configuration means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner when viewed from above.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the gaming machine AC6 can shorten the vertical width required to install a path configuration means of the same length.

In addition, compared to when a turn-around path is formed, there is no need to make the path walls thinner, which improves the strength of the flow path, and reduces the possibility of ball clogging, etc., compared to a turn-around path that turns 180 degrees.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, the path configuration means is characterized in that the gaming machine AC7 has a front-rear flow path section that extends in the front-rear direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, the gaming machine AC7 can reduce the width of the path configuration means, so that a pair of path configuration means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced width.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, the gaming machine AC8 is characterized in that the passing means is disposed diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path configuration means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, the gaming machine AC8 makes it easier to bring the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means within the field of view of the player looking from the front side.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the path configuration means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and the gaming machine AC9 is configured so that the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

According to gaming machine AC9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive gaming balls at all times, and further, the benefits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means, so that the player's attention to the gaming balls can be improved.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

A gaming machine AC10 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AC9, the profits obtained by the player change depending on whether gaming balls are received by only the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether gaming balls are received by both the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9, the gaming machine AC10 makes it easier for the player to shoot the gaming ball in a predetermined launch pattern by setting the amount of profit the player can obtain.

The benefits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the game balls flowing down, or it may be a benefit related to the game obtained by the game balls flowing down (payout of prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.).

A gaming machine AC11 is characterized in that the path configuration means in the gaming machine AC9 or AC10 is configured symmetrically from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AC9 and AC10, gaming machine AC11 can reduce the possibility of a player suffering a disadvantage regardless of whether the gaming ball is mainly shot from the left or right.

In any one of the gaming machines AC9 to AC11, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state where the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state where the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state change means or the state change state of the gaming machine AC12.

According to gaming machine AC12, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AC9 to AC11, the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the state change state, so that the impact of the player's skill in firing the game ball on the profits obtained by the player can be reduced.

A gaming machine AC13 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC12, the state change mode of the receiving state change means is configured in a plurality of types.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC12, the gaming machine AC13 can change the reception mode of the gaming balls to the first reception means and the second reception means even when the gaming balls are launched in a certain launch mode. This makes it possible to adjust the profits that the player can obtain based on the state change mode of the reception state change means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction in which the ball flows>
Gaming machine XAA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement that occurs during the state change is along the direction in which the game balls flow down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the big prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening and closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game balls, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

In contrast, with the gaming machine XAA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to follow the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward, so that by displacing the state switching means when the gaming ball is in close proximity to or in contact with the state switching means, it is possible to affect a change in the rolling pattern of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid to the right with the gaming ball on top of it, applying a load to the gaming ball that rotates it in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the gaming ball.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid leftward with the game ball on top of it, applying a load to the game ball that rotates it in the opposite direction to the rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the game ball.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball that is not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also has a component in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, so that the change in the flow pattern of the game ball can be made complex and irregular.

These effects on the way the game ball flows down can be varied in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, allowing players who are watching the game balls to concentrate on the game without getting bored.

In addition, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the gaming ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the gaming ball, or it may be positioned so that it collides with the gaming ball in the direction opposite to the flow of the gaming ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner that collides with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to perform a closing operation in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can be bounced back, or it may be configured to perform a closing operation in the same direction as the flow direction of the game ball, so that the introduction of the game ball thereafter can be restricted with little resistance.

Gaming machine XAA2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XAA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the gaming ball are in contact with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XAA1, gaming machine XAA2 can cause the gaming ball to spin by changing the state of the state switching means.

Gaming machine XAA3 is characterized in that the state switching means in gaming machine XAA1 or XAA2 is equipped with a change means that changes the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XAA1 and XAA2, gaming machine XAA3 can release the load applied from the gaming ball while the state switching means is displaced, thereby reducing the load applied to the state switching means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that allows balls to flow in a first direction when open and in a second direction when closed>
Gaming machine XAB1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passed means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to be able to guide the game ball in a first direction in the introduction state, and to be able to guide the game ball in a second direction in the non-introduction state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended forward, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and it falls freely, so it does not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame part, etc.) other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the game ball flowing down, and there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members) for guiding the game ball flowing down.

In contrast, with the gaming machine XAB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or not, making it unnecessary to use a dedicated component for guiding the flow path of the gaming ball, thereby reducing the number of components required. This makes it possible to diversify the flow direction of the gaming ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited in any way. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to the game ball flowing down in the front-to-back direction. In this case, it is possible to maximize the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means begins, while only slight displacement of the game ball is discernible when viewed from the front before it is guided by the state switching means.

The arrangement of the guide section that produces the guiding effect of the state switching means is not limited in any way. For example, the guide section may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide section may be disposed on a non-movable section in the periphery of the state switching means, and may be configured so that the state is switched to one in which the game ball is likely to approach or come into contact with the guide section by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide is provided on a movable member, it is preferable that the design not only provides guidance after switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also takes into consideration the effect on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, if the state switching means is equipped with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, providing a wall portion with a surface (flat, curved, etc.) shape that is inclined with respect to the flow direction, rather than providing a wall portion with a flat shape perpendicular to the flow direction, makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball becomes large in a direction that causes the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid the game ball flowing backwards.

Gaming machine XAB2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XAB1, the state change of the state switching means occurs due to a displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine XAB1, the gaming machine XAB2 can reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means due to the load applied by the guided gaming ball.

Gaming machine XAB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XAB1 or XAB2, the path configuration means has a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means has a pair of guide sections capable of receiving gaming balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically in the pair of guide sections.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines XAB1 and XAB2, the gaming machine XAB3 can complicate the path along which the gaming ball flows. Also, since the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically on the left and right in the pair of guide sections, the displacement that the state switching means receives due to the load that the pair of guide sections receive from the gaming ball can be made symmetrical on the left and right.

This makes it easier to uniformly position the state switching means, for example, when gaming balls are placed into a pair of left and right paths in approximately equal numbers, depending on the load that the guide section receives from the gaming balls.

Gaming machine XAB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XAB3, the state switching means has a protruding portion formed to protrude in a direction intersecting the third direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XAB3, gaming machine XAB4 can reduce the contact area with other components by using the protruding portion, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the state switching means.

The gaming machine XAB5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XAB3 or XAB4, it is provided with an abutment means configured to be able to abut when the state switching means is in the introduced state or the unintroduced state, and is configured to be able to correct the left-right displacement of the state switching means by abutting against the abutment means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines XAB3 and XAB4, the gaming machine XAB5 can receive load from the gaming ball from either the left or right direction, so the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to become disorderly, can be returned to an orderly state by the action of the abutment means.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine AD1 is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable so that the visible surface changes, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured so that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of the base arm 220 is configured to be able to rotate multiple times (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although the rotating base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface visible to the player is the same, which creates the problem that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means.

In contrast, gaming machine AD1 is configured so that the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed in response to the displacement, so attention can be maintained on the displacement means.

In addition, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member relative to each other, thereby increasing the attention to the displacement means.

In the gaming machine AD1, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collected and arranged, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate based on the collection section. In the gaming machine AD2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD1, gaming machine AD2 can easily dynamically cause relative movement between the first and second displacement members. That is, with only the first displacement as a displacement based on the assembly part, the displacement between the first and second displacement members is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the assembly part is the shortest or longest, and the first and second displacement members may appear to be stationary, which may reduce the presentation effect. However, by mixing in the second displacement, it is possible to cause a rotational displacement even at the terminal part, improving the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AD3, in which the predetermined displacement in the gaming machine AD1 or AD2 includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD1 or AD2, gaming machine AD3 inverts the surface that is visible due to the third displacement, making it possible to significantly change the decorations that are visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

A gaming machine AD4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AD1 to AD3, gaming machine AD4 has a load related to the fixation that acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first and second displacement members, so the displacement of the first and second displacement members can be designed taking into account the load related to the fixation.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

The degree of fixation may also be configured to vary depending on the visible surfaces of the first and second displacement members.

In this case, the effect of fixation differs depending on the surface being viewed, so the degree of fixation can be varied on the side the player can see.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and integrated, while the other surface can be easily viewed as loosely joined together and easily displaced relative to one another.

In addition, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

The manner in which the magnet can be attached is not limited in any way. For example, the magnet can be attached with an adhesive tape, or the magnet can utilize the adhesive force between the magnet and the metal part. The first and second inverted members can also be designed to use, for example, fixing screws or bolts as the metal part that is attached to the magnet.

Among any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, and displaces in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to displace in the first displacement mode after displacing in the predetermined mode. Among the gaming machines AD5, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions in a first displacement mode, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the first displacement mode.

According to gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, so that the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means can be reduced. This reduces the attention to the displacement means when retracting, and relatively increases the attention to the displacement means that displaces at the presentation position.

In conventional machines, the rotation pattern was the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending the display to the performance position (the position in front of the LCD display area), it was necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction multiple times before retreating to the retracted position (the position outside the LCD display area). In this case, there was a possibility that the viewer's gaze would be drawn to the part retreating from the performance position, which could be seen as a problem.

The type of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

In the gaming machine AD5, the displacement means is equipped with a release means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount. A gaming machine AD6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD5, gaming machine AD6 can change the displacement mode of the displacement means by varying the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal structure of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AD7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AD1 to AD6, it is provided with a light-emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be able to change the visible state of the light from the light-emitting means depending on whether the visible surface is one side or the other side.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD6, the gaming machine AD7 can change the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means in accordance with the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it is possible to change between a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light individually and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light together.

A gaming machine AD8 is any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD7, and is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to detect whether the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state.

According to gaming machine AD8, in any of gaming machines AD1 to AD7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

In addition, since the detection means can detect the section in which the displacement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced, by controlling the displacement to occur in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out after a certain amount of displacement from the performance position toward the evacuation position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to when the displacement from the performance position to the evacuation position occurs in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out from the start of the displacement.

A gaming machine AD9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD7, it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AD1 to AD7, gaming machine AD9 can reduce the number of detection means. Various types of values for the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, they may be values for the respective positions and attitudes of different movable members, or they may be values related to the change in the operating mode when the operating mode changes at a predetermined timing.

The arrangement of the detection means is not limited in any way. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure that detects the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip end side of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AD10, in any one of gaming machines AD1 to AD9, is characterized in that the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be reversible between a position in which the surface facing the player is one side and a position in which the surface is the other side, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, whereas when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are indistinguishable.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD9, gaming machine AD10 can maintain high expectations from the player that a reversal action will occur, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
The gaming machine AE1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversible reversing unit 71, and are configured to change the appearance seen by the player by changing the surface seen (see, for example, JP 2016-153095 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the reversing unit 71 is turned over while remaining in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the surface seen. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with the gaming machine AE1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the position, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE1, an opening portion is provided that opens so that the displacement means can be viewed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE1, gaming machine AE2 allows a player looking through the opening to easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AE3 is characterized in that the displacement means in the gaming machine AE2 is positioned closer to the rear side when placed on the edge of the opening than when placed in the center of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE2, gaming machine AE3 makes it possible to make the displacement means visible from the front when it is placed in the center of the open section, while reducing the amount of eye movement required when viewing the displacement means when it is placed on the edge of the open section. This makes it possible to achieve both good visibility of the displacement means and reduced fatigue for the player who follows the displacement means with their eyes.

A gaming machine AE4, which is any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, is characterized in that the displacement means has a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and when the first visible surface and the second visible surface of one set are visible, the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are difficult to see.

According to gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AE1 to AE3, by applying different letters or figures for each set to the first visible surface and the second visible surface, it is possible to make different letters or figures visible to a player viewing the displacement means, and by configuring the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set that are not intended to be visible to be difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means being unsightly.

For example, if the first set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a low expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a high expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, the level of expectation of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. In this case, the display of the expectation of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, so that the display of the expectation of a jackpot can continue to be visible even to a player who has taken their eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

The manner in which the display is made difficult to see is not limited in any way. For example, it may be arranged on a surface on a side other than the player's side (the rear side, the left or right outer surface, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by being shielded with a shielding means.

A gaming machine AE5 is characterized in that the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are visible in the gaming machine AE4 is configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the operation.

According to gaming machine AE5, it is possible to easily avoid predicting the pair of first and second visible surfaces that will be displayed to the player during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of first and second visible surfaces that are visible in gaming machine AE4. This makes it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other parts and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark part to make it difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner in which the separation occurs is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the device may be configured to operate facing backward so that only one of the part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is not visible, or the device may be configured to operate in a state in which the part and the other part are simultaneously visible but out of alignment.

A gaming machine AE6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE5, an opening portion is provided that opens the displacement means so that the displacement means can be seen, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is positioned in the center of the opening portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE5, gaming machine AE6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, improving attention to the switching action.

A gaming machine AE7, which is a gaming machine AE5 or AE6, is characterized in that during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE5 or AE6, gaming machine AE7 makes it difficult to recognize the first visible surface during operation by making a portion of the first visible surface visible and the entire surface invisible during operation.

A gaming machine AE8 is any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE7, and is provided with a second displacement means configured to be capable of blocking at least a portion of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state, together with the second displacement means, for making the first visible surface visible.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE7, the gaming machine AE8 can improve the design freedom of the presentation position of the displacement means by making at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see using the second displacement means.

A gaming machine AE9, which is one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE8, is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement occurs.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE8, the gaming machine AE9 changes the surface that is visible when viewed in a specified direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so the surface that is easily visible can be changed at will, regardless of the amount of change in the player's line of sight.

A gaming machine AE10, which is a gaming machine AE9, is characterized in that the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE9, gaming machine AE10 can increase the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state by changing the posture of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AE11 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE9 or AE10, it is provided with an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AE9 and AE10, gaming machine AE11 can arrange the auxiliary means close to the displacement means so that they can be viewed as one unit, and can also arrange the auxiliary means and the displacement means so that they can be viewed separately, allowing the displacement means to give multiple different impressions to the player.

The type of the auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a means whose arrangement is fixed, or it may be a movable means.

A gaming machine AE12 is characterized in that the auxiliary means in the gaming machine AE11 is configured to be switchable between a state in which it is viewed integrally with the displacement means and a state in which it is viewed separately from the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE11, the gaming machine AE12 can switch between viewing the displacement means and the auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visible patterns relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs in each section>
A gaming machine AF1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a tiltable base arm 220, a rotating part 211 rotatably attached to the tilt tip side of the base arm 220, and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating part 211, and is configured to rotate the rotating part 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating part 211 is prone to wobbling at the tip of the base arm 220, and rotating the rotating part 211 while the base arm 220 is tilting and displacing may cause a malfunction in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotating part 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, and the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the design freedom for the displacement of the displaceable parts.

In contrast, according to gaming machine AF1, the placement means is supported at least at two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to displace relative to one another during the displacement of the displacement means. The support means makes it possible to control the placement of the second part based on the first part, so that the placement means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while being stably supported. This allows for greater design freedom in the displacement of the placement means (displaceable part).

The manner of the support means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported in a manner that restricts displacement in a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. Furthermore, control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control, such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second part with a wall portion.

A gaming machine AF2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AF1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace a first section and a second section, the support means has a first range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the second section, and is configured such that the direction in which the second part is displaced in the first range differs from the direction in which the second part is displaced in the second range.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF1, gaming machine AF2 allows the displacement speed of the arrangement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, so that the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

A gaming machine AF3, which is a gaming machine AF1 or AF2, characterized in that the support means is equipped with a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 and AF2, gaming machine AF3 can limit the displacement of the second portion at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first and second ranges, making it easier to stop the second portion at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first and second ranges when displacing the second portion from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement.

The type of load required to displace the second part relative to the first part is not limited in any way. For example, the second part may be pulled, or the second part may be pushed.

The type of the limiting section is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a type that sets an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second section, or a type that switches the displacement direction of the second section.

A gaming machine AF4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF2 or AF3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the second section is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the first section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF2 and AF3, gaming machine AF4 can provide a section in which the relative amount of displacement of the arrangement means based on the displacement means becomes smaller at an intermediate position of the displacement of the displacement means, so that positions at which the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be provided in addition to the end position of the displacement of the displacement means, and as a result, the number of positions at which the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be increased.

A gaming machine AF5 is one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, characterized in that the (ratio of) the displacement speed of the second part based on the displacement speed of the first part is made variable.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, the gaming machine AF5 can change the displacement speed of the second part of the arrangement means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, so that a motion presentation can be created in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable through simple drive control of the drive means (constant speed drive).

A gaming machine AF6 is one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement end of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 to AF5, gaming machine AF6 can prevent the second portion from bouncing back, making it easier to stop the placement means early at the end of the displacement.

The method for preventing the second part from bouncing back is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to reduce the displacement speed of the second part at the end of the displacement (e.g., the amount of displacement of the second part when the first part displaces a predetermined unit length), or it may be configured to restrict the displacement of the second part by a geometric design such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second part when the first part is stopped.

In addition, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied to the displacement end of the second portion by magnetic force or the like to increase the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be increased by the biasing force of a coil spring or the like.

A gaming machine AF6, characterized in that the support means is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end. A gaming machine AF7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF6, gaming machine AF7 has a support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part, thereby reducing the return displacement (bound) of the second part when the first part stops.

A gaming machine AF8 is any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF7, and is characterized in that it is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount of displacement that corresponds to the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF7, the gaming machine AF8 can also perform complex effects using the supported means that displaces in conjunction with the placement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or the supported means may be displaced in a manner different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

The manner in which the displacing means is displaced with respect to the amount of displacement of the displacing means is not limited in any way. For example, the displacing means may be a change in posture, or may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

A gaming machine AF9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section in which it can move back and forth in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF8, gaming machine AF9 can achieve a configuration in which the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (e.g., increases and then decreases) while the first part is displaced, thereby realizing a displacement configuration in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

A gaming machine AF10, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine AF8 or AF9, the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the placement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF8 and AF9, gaming machine AF10 can make the displacement mode of the supported means equivalent to that of the displacement means, sandwiching the placement means. This gives the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own drive means.

A gaming machine AF11, in any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF10, is characterized in that the positioning means includes a position change means that changes its position so that the side facing the player is switched between the first side and the second side as the positioning means itself is displaced, and the position change means is configured so that when the second portion is positioned at the end of the displacement, the first side or the second side is in a position facing the player.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF10, the gaming machine AF11 faces the first or second surface of the position change means toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second portion has reached the end of the displacement, making it possible to easily understand the end of the presentation action by the displacement means.

A gaming machine AF12 is any one of gaming machines AF1 to AF11, and is configured so that electrical wiring is inserted into the arrangement means through the second part, and is provided with an arrangement means in which the electrical wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second part, the arrangement means having an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with the surrounding parts formed around it.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF11, the gaming machine AF12 can prevent electrical wiring from coming into contact with surrounding areas.

The positioning means may be configured as a means for combining multiple components when the second part is composed of multiple components, or as a means for preventing a separate component from falling off the second part when a separate component is disposed in the second part.

<Characteristic BA group>
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means;

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine BA1, the presentation mode executed during the period when the second identification information is dynamically displayed varies depending on the number of pieces of second information stored, so that it is possible to execute a presentation that corresponds to the number of times that the second identification information can be dynamically displayed thereafter. Even if the second identification information for indicating a specific second judgment result is not displayed, the player's interest in the game thereafter can be maintained, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine BA2, characterized in that in the gaming machine BA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed in priority to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode execution means executes the presentation mode when a specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to gaming machine BA2, the specific second dynamic display mode is executed, which has the effect of making the player motivated to store the second information, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine BA3, in which the presentation mode is set for a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is executed consecutively after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of stored second information ends, in the gaming machine BA1 or BA2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BA1 or BA2, gaming machine BA3 has the effect of increasing interest by making the multiple second dynamic display modes appear as a single dynamic display, since the presentation mode is configured to be executable across the dynamic display period of the second identification information that is executed multiple times in succession.

A gaming machine BA4, which has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, in any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BA1 to BA3, gaming machine BA4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information, since a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be easily obtained.

<Feature BB group> (Performance can be changed depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 during the execution of the variable pattern)
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having: a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information; and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, the presentation mode selection means selecting the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is a presentation to show the result of a lottery held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the presentation mode that has been determined (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information, so that not only the result of the first discrimination but also information regarding the possibility of executing the second discrimination can be determined from the presentation mode, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BB1, gaming machine BB2 has the effect of being able to execute a variety of presentation modes, since the presentation mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of second information stored during that execution.

Gaming machine BB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode is one in which a presentation related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information that is executed thereafter is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BB1 and BB2, gaming machine BB3 has the effect that, when second information is stored, dynamic display of second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the presentation mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information starts, so that the player can be made aware at an early stage that the dynamic display of the second identification information, which is executed with priority, is about to start.

Any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, which have a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, the gaming machine BB4 is characterized in that the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BB1 to BB3, gaming machine BB4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information because a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be easily obtained.

<Feature BC group> (Special chart 1 change performance is used as a pseudo-performance of special chart 2 change)
a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; a second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the first determination being executed; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the second determination being executed, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of a presentation pattern including at least a specific presentation pattern that is likely to be executed during a presentation period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine BC1 can execute the first effect as an effect for indicating the result of the second determination, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BC1, the second performance execution means is capable of executing the second performance in a performance mode that includes at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the performance mode of the first performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BC1, gaming machine BC2 can execute a second presentation using a display mode that shows the result of the first judgment, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BC2, the second performance execution means executes a second performance mode for indicating the result of the second discrimination within one performance indicating the result of the second discrimination, and the performance mode. Gaming machine BC3.

Gaming machine BC3 has the effect of being able to provide more unexpected effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BC2.

<Feature BD group> (Double display including probability change even for normal hits)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of first discrimination symbols on a display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of second discrimination symbols on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a second discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the first discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific first discrimination result or when the second discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific second discrimination result, The gaming machine BD1 is configured such that a first benefit can be awarded as the benefit when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination is stopped and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit can be awarded when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine has a determination means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a multiple reach display mode in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining identification patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either of the first specific combination and the second specific combination, and then displays the first identification patterns in the specific combination.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot using a combination of multiple symbols, and then awarding different prizes depending on the type of symbol displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, some of the symbols that make up a combination that does not award a lower bonus than the bonus desired by the player are displayed statically, which causes the player to lose interest in the game before the result is announced.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players.

With gaming machine BD1, when identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed after passing through multiple reach display modes, so that it is possible to prolong the anticipation that both the combination corresponding to the first special benefit and the combination corresponding to the second special benefit will be displayed, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BD1, the determination means determines the first benefit when the specific first judgment result occurs during the specific period.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BD1, gaming machine BD2 has the effect of making it easier to have expectations that the second benefit will be awarded even if the first judgment is made during the specific period, since a specific combination is displayed through a multiple reach display mode, even during the specific period in which the first benefit is determined by the determination means.

In the gaming machine BD2, the determination means determines the second benefit when the specific second discrimination result is obtained during the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a special multiple reach display mode in which one second discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining discrimination patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any one of two or more different second specific combinations, and then displays the second discrimination patterns in the specific combination. In the gaming machine BD3,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BD2, gaming machine BD3 has the effect of allowing the player to recognize early on that a second benefit advantageous to the player will be granted without fail if a specific second judgment result is obtained during the specific period.

<Feature BE group> (Break ED control when hitting the probability hit)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a setting means for setting a favorable game state that is more favorable to the player than a normal game state as a game state that is set after the execution of the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area until an end condition is established; and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode that can suggest the game state that will be set after the execution of the bonus game when the bonus game ends, wherein the suggestion mode is configured by a combination of a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the favorable game state are configured in the same period.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game is decided by a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and different winning games are played depending on the type of winning game. During a specific type of winning game, a variable ball entry area that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter is changed to a state where the ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the area, the game state after the winning game becomes a game state favorable to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, even when a specific type of winning game is executed, there are cases where the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry area, which causes an increase in the control load in the notification control.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can reduce the control load.

According to gaming machine BE1, by setting the second suggested mode to the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation in the period for displaying the suggested mode, while setting the mode suggested by the ball entry state in a specific area, which has the effect of facilitating notification control of the suggested mode at the end of the bonus game and reducing the control load.

The gaming machine BE2 is characterized in that it has a suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode to be executed by the suggestion mode execution means in response to the type of bonus game to be executed when the bonus game is executed in the gaming machine BE1, and a switching means capable of switching the second suggestion mode, which is set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the specific bonus game, to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BE1, gaming machine BE2 has the effect of suppressing the control load and executing the correct suggestion, because even if the suggestion mode is set at the start of bonus play to suppress the concentration of control load at the end of the bonus play, the suggestion mode can be switched to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal play state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode.

<Feature BF group> (Set different lengths of ED period depending on the type of jackpot)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; and a period setting means for setting a period of a length corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed as a period for indicating the end of the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the bonus game.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine BF1 has the effect of increasing interest in the game by allowing different periods to be set depending on the type of bonus game.

A gaming machine BF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BF1, it is provided with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BF1, gaming machine BF2 can execute specific effects at different periods set according to the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BF3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a period switching means that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during the execution of the bonus game in gaming machine BF1 or BF2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BF1 and BF2, gaming machine BF3 can also vary the length of the period when a variable condition is met during bonus play, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

<Feature BG group> (ED period varies depending on whether or not V is won)
a specific area through which a game ball can pass while the bonus game is being executed; a game state setting means for setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player while the bonus game is being executed, based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed; and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period to indicate the end of the bonus game while a predetermined end condition is established while the bonus game is being executed, wherein the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period of different lengths depending on whether the game ball has passed through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed or not.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine BG1 makes it possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether or not the gaming ball has passed through a specific area during bonus play, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period in the gaming machine BG1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BG1, gaming machine BG2 can execute specific effects within a specific period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BG3 is characterized in that the specific presentation in gaming machine BG2 includes at least a notification mode for notifying the player of the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area during the bonus game.

With gaming machine BG3, the specific effects include a notification mode, which has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

<Feature BH Group> (Limitation control of button operation)
A gaming machine BH1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine being characterized in having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a setting execution means that can execute a setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and a restriction means that restricts the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means when a specific condition is established during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

Traditionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, many machines are configured to notify (statically display) the result of the lottery via a specified special symbol variation period, and use the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is statically displayed (special symbol variation period) to execute various effects (variable effects) to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game. Among these, some machines are configured to prepare multiple presentation modes in advance, and to vary the manner of the variable effects executed during the special symbol variation period for each presentation mode.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable presentations can be provided to the player by switching presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to the same variable presentations being provided all the time. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that allow the player to switch presentation modes at will by operating an operating means that the player can operate (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A). In such gaming machines, the player can select the presentation mode that he or she is most interested in from among multiple presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to a variable presentation that he or she is less interested in being executed. Furthermore, the player's interest in the game can be improved because the player himself or herself needs to operate the operating means to switch presentation modes.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is frozen and displayed, or when a short period of change is set as the special pattern change period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, resulting in a problem of reduced motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine BH1, if a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information, the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means can be restricted, thereby preventing malfunctions caused by the operation of the operating means.

A gaming machine BH2, characterized in that in the gaming machine BH1, a dynamic display period determination means determines a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a gaming state setting means is capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is set as at least one of the conditions for satisfaction that the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH1, gaming machine BH2 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, and can prevent the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means in the gaming machine BH1 or BH2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BH1 and BH2, gaming machine BH3 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

BH4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines BH1 to BH3 has a specific setting means capable of executing a specific setting, and the regulating means is configured to be capable of executing the specific setting by the specific setting means without causing the setting execution means to execute the setting based on the operation of the operating means when the specific condition is set.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines BH1 to BH3, gaming machine BH4 has the effect of making the operation of the operating means a meaningful act by providing the player who operated the operating means with an action resulting from the operation of the operating means, since the specific setting is executed even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operating means during the period when a specific condition is satisfied.

A gaming machine BH4 is characterized in that it has a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that can suggest information about the identification information that is stopped and displayed before the identification information is stopped and displayed based on the specific setting. A gaming machine BH5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH4, gaming machine BH5 has the effect that, when a specific condition is met, the information of the identification information displayed in a stopped state can be identified by a suggestive effect before the stopped state is displayed, and when a specific condition is met, a variety of effects can be executed by operating the device, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored.

<Feature BI group> (notifying advantageous periods spanning multiple game states)
a game machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and is different from the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended, a third gaming state can be set when a first setting condition is established while a skill state is set, and the first gaming state can be set when a second setting condition different from the first setting condition is established while the third gaming state is set, and when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming machine BI1 is characterized in having an advantageous period determination means for determining an advantageous period based on the period until the second setting condition is established, and an indication means for indicating the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determination means.

Conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period during which that favorable game state will continue (number of times the special pattern will change). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the favorable game state will continue, and subtract one from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special pattern lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the currently set favorable game state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines are capable of setting multiple types of advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, and some of these advantageous game states can be set to a first advantageous game state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second advantageous game state that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state (e.g., a special state).

In a gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when a first advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) is set, it is possible to inform the player of the period (remaining period) during which the first advantageous gaming state will continue, but there is a problem in that it is not possible to inform the player of which gaming state will be set after the first advantageous gaming state ends. In other words, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, making it difficult for the player to know what they should aim for during the first advantageous gaming state, which reduces their motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by increasing the player's motivation to play.

According to gaming machine BI1, when a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set, the notification means notifies the player of the advantageous period determined based on the period until the first gaming state is set again. Therefore, even in a gaming machine that has multiple gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the player can know the period during which the gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine BI2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BI1, a suggestion effect execution means is provided that is capable of executing a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

The gaming machine BI2 can notify the player of the advantageous period until the first gaming state is set, while also suggesting the currently set gaming state, which has the effect of making the player interested in the content of the suggestive performance that is executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine BI3, in which the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a past suggestion effect to suggest the game state set by the game state setting means when the notification means has notified the player that the advantageous period is in progress.

According to the gaming machine BI3, the suggestion effect execution means can suggest to the player the game state that was set in the past. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the contents of the past suggestion effects, and to analyze the past game contents during the advantageous period, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BI4, in which the notification means in gaming machine BI2 or BI3 is capable of displaying on the display means a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, and the suggestion performance execution means is capable of suggesting the currently set gaming state or a gaming state that was set in the past by varying the remaining period display mode.

According to gaming machine BI4, by varying the remaining period display mode for showing the remaining advantageous period, a suggestive presentation regarding the game status is executed, so that the suggestive presentation can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for a player who is paying close attention to the remaining advantageous period, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Gaming machine BI5 is any one of gaming machines BI1 to BI4, characterized in that it has a second suggestion presentation means capable of suggesting the timing when the first set condition may be met when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

The gaming machine BI5 allows the player to predict the timing when the game state will change during the advantageous period, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly during the advantageous period.

Gaming machine BI6 is any one of gaming machines BI1 to BI5, characterized in that it has an advantageous notification means capable of notifying the player of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player between the second gaming state and the third gaming state.

The gaming machine BI6 allows the player to grasp the relative merits of multiple game states that are set during the advantageous period, which can generate interest by predicting which game state is currently set.

<Feature BJ Group> (Displaying one symbol row variably with multiple symbol display control)
A gaming machine BJ1 having a display means for displaying suggestive information that can suggest a discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the suggestive information is set to at least a first pattern row composed of a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns, and a second pattern row composed of a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns different from the first pattern row, and the dynamic display means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the second pattern row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first pattern row is dynamically displayed in a first direction.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417). In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, and allow the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is composed of multiple third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a variable pattern display is executed using multiple (for example, three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, an effect (for example, a reach effect) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by using multiple symbol rows to change the third symbol and perform a change effect to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot, the player's expectations of winning the jackpot can be gradually increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the order of the symbols that make up the symbol string is not changed, and the third symbol is simply displayed in a variable manner for each symbol string. This means that the only variations available are, for example, changing the speed at which each symbol string is displayed, changing the direction in which each symbol string is displayed, or changing the size at which each symbol string is displayed. This creates a problem in that there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game by improving the effect of the variable presentation using the variable display of the symbol string.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BJ1, the first and second symbol rows are dynamically displayed in different directions, making it easier to distinguish between the first and second symbol rows, and the discrimination result can be more easily determined from the suggestive information.

A gaming machine BJ2, which has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed in the gaming machine BJ1, the first symbol row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second symbol row is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition at a position where the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol row and the symbols constituting the second symbol row at least partially overlap with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BJ1, gaming machine BJ2 has the effect of dynamically displaying the first and second symbol rows at overlapping positions, making it possible to perform effects that make effective use of the display area.

A gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BJ2, it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first pattern row and the second pattern row are configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BJ2, gaming machine BJ3 has the effect of increasing the interest in the game because the first and second symbol rows are dynamically displayed in the first and second directions, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

A gaming machine BJ4 is any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ3, and has a display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestion information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first pattern row so as to display the discrimination result according to the display mode of the first pattern row.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BJ3, gaming machine BJ4 uses the display mode of the first symbol row to display the discrimination result, so the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol row can be controlled based on the discrimination result, and the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row can be freely set. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the dynamic display of the suggestive information and increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine BJ4 has a first display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, and the gaming machine is configured such that at least a portion of a first display area in the first display image layer and a second display area in the second display image layer overlap, and in the area where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first symbol row can be displayed so as to be visible to a player in priority to the second symbol row. A gaming machine BJ5.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BJ4, gaming machine BJ5 displays the first symbol row so that it is more visible to the player when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap. This has the effect of making effective use of the display area while still displaying the display mode showing the determination result in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In the gaming machine BJ4 or BJ5, the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first symbol row and the second symbol row so that the multiple symbols constituting the first symbol row and the multiple symbols constituting the second symbol row are arranged in a predetermined order to form a combined symbol row. Gaming machine BJ6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BJ4 and BJ5, gaming machine BJ6 can dynamically display the first and second symbol rows as a combined symbol row, making the player believe that a combined symbol row is formed. Among these, since the first and second symbol rows can be dynamically displayed in the opposite direction, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising presentation, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine BJ6, the display control means is capable of display control so that it is easier to dynamically display the first and second pattern rows as the combined pattern row when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. Gaming machine BJ7.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BJ6, gaming machine BJ7 makes it more difficult to dynamically display the first and second symbol strings as the combined symbol string when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first and second symbol strings is in a different form from the dynamic display of the second symbol string, it is possible to heighten the expectation for a specific discrimination result, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

<Feature BK group> (Velo control of the V-sure machine is performed based on the number of balls entered by the attacker)
a first detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the first specific area; a second detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second specific area; a guide path for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area; and a variable means for varying the second specific area between an allowable state in which a game ball can pass and a restricted state in which it is difficult to pass, the variable means being configured to vary the second specific area from the restricted state to the allowable state based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detection means until a variable condition is met.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines (so-called V-guaranteed machines) that provide a specific area within an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a gaming ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game, set a high probability state after the jackpot game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2015-119807 A). In such gaming machines, the percentage at which the high probability state is set can be specified in advance by setting a first state in which the gaming ball is likely to pass through the specific area for a predetermined period based on the elapsed time since the start of the jackpot game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the first state is set based on the time that has elapsed since a jackpot game was played. For example, if a malfunction of the gaming machine occurs during a jackpot game that prevents the gaming ball from entering the attacker, the predetermined period during which the first state is set may pass, causing a problem that reduces the player's motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by increasing the player's motivation to play.

According to gaming machine BK1, the variable means is changed to an allowable state based on the measurement results of the gaming balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, so it is possible to pass gaming balls into the second specific area depending on the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, which has the effect of making the player interested in the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine BK2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BK1, the variable means is changed to the permissible state during a period in which the predetermined number of gaming balls in the first specific area can reach the variable means in a state changed to the permissible state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BK1, gaming machine BK2 has the effect of making it possible to cause a predetermined number of gaming balls that have passed through a first specific area to enter a second specific area, and by controlling gaming balls that pass through the second specific area, it is possible to limit the number of balls that enter the second specific area.

Gaming machine BK3 is characterized in that it has a period determination means capable of determining the period from when the predetermined number of gaming balls pass through the first specific area until the gaming ball is detected by the second detection means, and an abnormality processing means capable of executing an abnormality processing based on the determination result of the period determination means, in the gaming machine BK1 or BK2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BK1 and BK2, gaming machine BK3 has the effect of being able to detect malfunctions early on, such as when a predetermined number of gaming balls have passed through the first specific area but are stuck on the guideway.

Gaming machine BK4 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the termination condition is set to be met when a period of time that is shorter than the period of time it takes for the next gaming ball to reach the variable means has elapsed after the predetermined number of gaming balls have been detected by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, gaming machine BK4 has the effect of being able to reliably cause a predetermined number of gaming balls to enter the second specific area.

BK5 is a gaming machine that is any one of BK1 to BK4 and is characterized by having a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, gaming machine BK5 has the effect of making the player motivated to land the gaming ball in the second specific area even when a bonus game is played, thereby preventing the bonus game from becoming boring.

<Feature BL group> (By varying the pattern row, some of the patterns in the pattern row are switched)
a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification pattern; a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification pattern indicating a specific identification result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and a bonus type determination means for determining a bonus type to be awarded by the bonus awarding means, the gaming machine having: a discrimination means for performing discrimination, a display means for displaying an identification pattern indicating a result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and a setting means for setting the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means so that a first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern indicating a first result during a first period, and a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed during a second period to indicate a second result different from the first result.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to gaming machine BL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine BL2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL1, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the first identification symbol in a static manner at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period at least after the first period has elapsed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BL1, gaming machine BL2 can easily notify the player that the first period has ended and the second period has begun, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine BL3 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL2, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern to indicate that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BL2, gaming machine BL3 can notify the player of the determination result of the determination means before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, so that players who wish to quickly understand the determination result of the determination means can focus on the dynamic display of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BL4 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL3, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the second identification pattern to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means as the second result.

Gaming machine BL4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine BL3. That is, after the end of the second period, an identification pattern for indicating the bonus type can be displayed. In other words, after displaying the discrimination result of the discrimination means, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be displayed. Therefore, after notifying the player that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be notified to the player, which has the effect of enabling the dynamic display of the second period to be executed with at least a sense of security that bonus play will be executed.

Gaming machine BL5 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL4, the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode that includes at least information for indicating the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BL4, gaming machine BL5 has the effect of allowing the player to predict the determined bonus means even during the period when the second identification pattern is dynamically displayed, since the display mode of the second identification pattern indicates the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine BL6, which has a pattern row setting means capable of setting a pattern row in which the multiple identification patterns dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification patterns based on the pattern row set by the pattern row setting means, and the pattern row setting means is capable of setting a second pattern row in which the first identification pattern forming at least a part of the first pattern row set during a first period is switched to the second identification pattern.

In gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine BL5, a second pattern row is set in which the first identification pattern forming at least a part of the first pattern row is switched to the second identification pattern, so the number of identification patterns in the first pattern row and the number of identification patterns in the second pattern row can be made the same. Therefore, there is no need to vary the dynamic display mode of the identification patterns executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of pattern row to be set, which has the effect of reducing the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification patterns.

In the gaming machine BL6, the symbol row setting means can form the first symbol row by overlapping first identification symbols to indicate the same discrimination result of the discrimination means, and when setting the second symbol row, the gaming machine BL7 is characterized in that one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

According to gaming machine BL7, the first identification symbols that are overlapping in the first symbol string are switched to the second identification symbols, so that even during the second period, it is possible to confirm each of the first identification symbols that were displayed in the dynamic display executed during the first period. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature BM group> (Release the restriction by another operation while the button operation is restricted)
A gaming machine BM1 having a display means for displaying an identification information showing a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having an operable operation means, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating at least a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation as types of operation for the operation means, a setting execution means capable of executing a setting based on a discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a restriction means for restricting the setting execution means from executing a first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates that the operation is the first operation, and the setting execution means is capable of executing the first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates that the operation is the second operation during the restriction by the restriction means.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, many machines are configured to notify (stop display) the lottery result through a specified special symbol changing period, and various effects (changing effects) are executed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped display (special symbol changing period), in order to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game. Among these, there are machines that are configured to prepare multiple performance modes in advance, and to vary the manner of the changing effects executed during the special symbol changing period for each performance mode (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A).

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable presentations can be provided to the player by switching presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to the same variable presentations being provided all the time. Furthermore, some gaming machines allow the player to switch presentation modes at will by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In such gaming machines, the player can select the presentation mode that interests him/her most from among multiple presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to a variable presentation that he/she finds less interesting being executed. Furthermore, the player's interest in the game can be improved because he/she needs to operate the operating means to switch presentation modes.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is frozen and displayed, or when a short period of change is set as the special pattern change period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, resulting in a problem of reduced motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine BM1, even if the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be executed by executing the second operation. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means in an attempt to execute various operations.

In the gaming machine BM1, the setting execution means is capable of executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operation determination means determines that the first operation is performed during the regulation by the regulation means. Gaming machine BM2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BM1, gaming machine BM2 executes the second setting when the first operation is executed during regulation, which makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the setting execution means does not execute anything even though the first operation is executed. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operation means.

A gaming machine BM3, which has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the restricting means is capable of restricting the first setting from being executed by the setting execution means when the short gaming state is set and the operation determining means has determined that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BM1 and BM2, gaming machine BM3 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, and can prevent the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BM3, gaming machine BM4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine BM5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines BM1 to BM4, the operation means has a first operation section for executing the first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing the second operation.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM4, the gaming machine BM5 operates different operation sections when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, which prevents the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine BM6 is characterized in that in gaming machine BM5, the second operation unit is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during play than the first operation unit.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BM5, gaming machine BM6 can vary the ease of operation of each operation unit, making it possible to set a first operation using a first operation unit as a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit as an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Feature BN group> (Perform different operations while limiting button operations)
A gaming machine having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine BN1 having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first setting execution means that can execute a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, a restriction means that restricts the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means, and a second setting execution means that executes a second setting different from the first setting when the operation means is operated while the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restriction means.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to gaming machine BN1, during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed during the second period, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine BN1, when the operating means is operated while the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which nothing is executed despite the operation of the operating means. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means.

A gaming machine BN1, characterized in that the regulating means is capable of regulating the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BN1, gaming machine BN2 has the effect of preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the dynamic display of the identification information due to the execution of the first setting being restricted by the restricting means while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed.

A gaming machine BN3 having a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the restricting means is capable of restricting the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the short game state is set and the operation determining means has determined that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BN1 and BN2, gaming machine BN3 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, and can prevent the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BN3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the first setting executed by the setting execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BN3, gaming machine BN4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine BM5 is one of gaming machines BN1 to BN4, characterized in that the operation means has a first operation section for executing a first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing a second operation different from the first operation.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN4, gaming machine BN5 has the advantage that when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, different operation parts are used, which prevents the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine BN6 is characterized in that the second operation unit in gaming machine BN5 is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during a game than the first operation unit.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN5, the gaming machine BN6 can vary the ease of operation of each operation unit, making it possible to set a first operation using a first operation unit as a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit as an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic BO group> (If you change stages when it is difficult to do so, it is your chance)
A gaming machine BO1 having a display means for displaying identification information showing a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine BO1 having an operation means operable by a player, a presentation mode setting means for setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode as presentation modes based on the operation of the operation means, and a period setting means for setting a first period during which the presentation mode setting means can set the presentation mode, and a second period during which it is more difficult to set the presentation mode than the first period, the gaming machine being characterized in that the gaming machine can provide the player with more advantageous information when the presentation mode is set during the second period rather than during the first period.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to gaming machine BO1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine BO1, when a presentation mode is set during the second period in which it is difficult to set a presentation mode, advantageous information can be provided to the player, so that the player can play the game while hoping that the presentation mode will be set during the second period. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine BO2, characterized in that in gaming machine BO1, the presentation mode setting means is capable of setting a third presentation mode different from the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode when executing the setting of the presentation mode during the second period.

In addition to the effects of game machine BO1, game machine BO2 has the effect of providing the player with an easily understandable effect by setting the third presentation mode, which can inform the player that a presentation mode has been set during the second period.

A gaming machine BO4, which is any one of the gaming machines BO1 to BO3, has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the period setting means is capable of setting the second period when the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BO1 to BO3, the gaming machine BO4 makes it difficult for the presentation mode to be set during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the presentation mode being set. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BO5 is any one of the gaming machines BO1 to BO4, characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a player that the second period will be set by the period setting means before the second period is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BO1 to BO4, the gaming machine BO5 allows the player to know in advance that the second period will be set, and therefore allows the second period to be set with the desired presentation mode set. This has the effect of preventing the second period from being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

<Feature BP group> (Advance stage change by predicting the timing)
a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, an identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means. The gaming machine BP1 further comprises: a pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the determination by the determination means based on the information is executed; and a switching means for switching the presentation mode from a first presentation mode to a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode when a switching condition is established, wherein the switching condition is more likely to be established when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a first pre-determination result.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to the gaming machine BP1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine BP1, the ease with which the switching condition is met can be varied depending on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, which has the effect of allowing the player to predict the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means when the presentation mode is switched, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine BP2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BP1, it has an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation discrimination means that can discriminate the operation on the operation means, and the switching condition can be established when the operation is discriminated by the operation discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BP1, gaming machine BP2 can also satisfy the switching condition when the player operates the operating means, which has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine BP2, characterized in that the switching means is capable of switching from the first presentation mode to a third presentation mode different from the second presentation mode when the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result. A gaming machine BP3.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2, the gaming machine BP3 can set the third presentation mode, thereby making it possible to inform the player that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result. This has the effect of providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BP4, which is any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP3, has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and is characterized in that the switching condition is more difficult to satisfy when the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BP1 to BP3, the gaming machine BP4 can make it difficult to switch presentation modes during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the discrimination means due to the presentation mode being set. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BP5 is any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP4, characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a player that the short gaming state will be set by the gaming state setting means before the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BP1 to BP4, gaming machine BP5 allows the player to know in advance that a short play state will be set, so that the player is motivated to operate the operating means to achieve the switching condition before the short play state is set. This makes it easier to set the short play state with the desired presentation mode set, and has the effect of preventing the short play state from being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

<5066 Series>
<Feature CA group> (When the number of times the special chart 2 lottery is performed using the special chart 2 reservation acquired during the time reduction exceeds a certain number of times, the probability of receiving a favorable bonus by the special chart 2 lottery increases)
A gaming machine CA1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting after the specific game is executed until an end condition is met, characterized in that the gaming machine CA1 has a setting control means capable of causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result when a specific period is set.

According to gaming machine CA1, when a specific period is set, it is possible to determine that the result is the second judgment, and therefore when a specific period is set, the result is determined to be the second judgment, and the specific setting is set, so that the specific setting is set at a timing different from normal times, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the game by not only executing a specific game, but also increasing the expectation for the period in which the specific period is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine CA2, which has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result based on the second information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA1, gaming machine CA2 is configured so that the second judgment result can be determined by having the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be varied, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information was stored, and the game can be made more interesting by diversifying the game.

Gaming machine CA3 is characterized in that the specific setting set based on the determination of the second discrimination result in gaming machine CA1 or CA2 is configured to be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after the execution of a specific game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines CA1 and CA2, gaming machine CA3 makes it possible to vary the period during which a specific setting is set depending on the results of the determination, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

<Feature CB group> (If you win both the jackpot and the time-saving bonus in one special drawing, you will receive more special bonuses than if you won only one of them)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result; a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in a duplicated manner.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine CB1 is configured to be able to discriminate between the first and second discrimination results in a redundant manner, so that a specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not met, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is set.

A gaming machine CB2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine CB1, a type of specific game that is advantageous to the player is made easier to execute based on the fact that the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are discriminated as overlapping by the discrimination means, compared to a case where the overlapping was not discriminated as the specific game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CB1, gaming machine CB2 has the effect of diversifying games by granting players benefits corresponding to various discrimination results, since specific types of games that are advantageous to the player are likely to be executed by overlapping discrimination results.

Gaming machine CB3, which is characterized in that in gaming machine CB1 or CB2, the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting during the period in which the discrimination means discriminates whether the result is the first discrimination result after discriminating that the result is the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CB1 or CB2, gaming machine CB3 has the effect of making a specific setting during the period in which, when the second discrimination result is determined, it is determined whether the result is the first discrimination result, and therefore it is possible to determine whether the result is the first discrimination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and thus making it possible to make discriminations in a variety of states.

<Feature CC group> (The degree of advantage when winning the time-saving jackpot during the time-saving state is changed depending on the time-saving trigger)
a first determination result obtained by the determination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a specific first determination result; and a game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be performed than a first game state, the game state setting means being capable of executing at least a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated, and a second setting for setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the gaming machine being capable of changing a selection ratio of the type of bonus game to be executed based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, when an advantageous state is set, although there is an effect that the game win/loss lottery is more likely to be held, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the same benefit is always awarded if the game win/loss lottery results in a win during the advantageous state. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine CC1, the selection ratio for the type of bonus game is variable depending on the set type, so even the same second game state can be made different, which has the effect of diversifying the game and increasing interest in the game without having to set many game states.

In gaming machine CC1, the second game state is set to continue until a termination condition is met, and gaming machine CC2 is characterized in that, when the bonus game is executed while the second setting is set, it is easy to set the period until the termination condition is met to be longer after the bonus game is executed.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine CC1, gaming machine CC2 has the effect of lengthening the period during which the second gaming state is set by making the second setting, which creates an increased interest in the period until the end condition is set when a bonus game is executed in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine CC1 or CC2, the discrimination means is regulated from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines CC1 and CC2, gaming machine CC3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature CD group> (The more you get into it, the easier it is to set advantageous time-saving when time-saving is established)
a game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the second game state is set, and the game machine has setting information discrimination means for discriminating setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and is capable of setting the second game state in which the end condition is less likely to be established after the bonus game is ended when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the second game state is set, and the game machine has setting information discrimination means for discriminating setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and is capable of setting the second game state in which the end condition is less likely to be established after the bonus game is ended when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CD1, the longer the period during which the second game state is set, the more difficult it becomes for the end condition to be met when a bonus game is played. Therefore, it is possible to alternate between setting a period during which the player expects a bonus game to be played and a period during which the player does not expect a bonus game to be played, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine CD2, which is characterized in that the gaming machine CD1 has a setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined that a specific second discrimination result different from the specific first discrimination result, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to the type of setting information that has been set.

In addition to the effects of the game machine CD1, the game machine CD2 has the effect of being able to regularly vary the setting information set according to the history of the setting information, making it easy to determine the period during which the second game state is set.

A gaming machine CD3, which is a gaming machine CD1 or CD2, is characterized in that the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines CD1 and CD2, gaming machine CD3 has the effect of increasing interest in the set gaming state and creating anticipation that a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned will be set, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature CE group> (Special chart 1 that can execute big win lottery + time-saving lottery, and special chart 2 that can execute big win lottery + small win lottery)
a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit based on a result of the first benefit executed by the first benefit execution means being a first benefit result, and a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the result of the first benefit execution being a second benefit result different from the first benefit; a second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit based on the result of the second benefit execution being a third benefit result, and a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit based on the result of the second benefit execution being a fourth benefit result different from the third benefit result;

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the bonus awarded if a player wins is the same whether the first lottery is held or the second lottery is held, which can lead to the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine CE1 is configured to be able to award different benefits when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature CF group> (When a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of a first advantageous condition and the setting of the first advantageous state, a specific advantageous state can be set)
A gaming machine having a first judgment means capable of performing a first judgment to determine that a first condition has been established, a first state setting means capable of setting a first advantageous state based on the first judgment means determining that the first condition has been established, a second judgment means capable of performing a second judgment to determine that a second condition different from the first condition has been established, and a second state setting means capable of setting a second advantageous state based on the second judgment means determining that the second condition has been established, characterized in that the gaming machine CF1 has a third state setting means capable of setting a third advantageous state which is more advantageous to a player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state based on the second judgment means determining that the second condition has been established between the time when the first judgment means determines that the first condition has been established and the time when the first advantageous state is set by the first state setting means.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, whether the first lottery is executed or the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is one in which a bonus is awarded, the corresponding bonus is simply awarded, creating the problem that gameplay can become monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine CF1, a first advantageous state is set based on the first condition being met, and a second advantageous state is set based on the second condition being met. Then, if the second condition is met between the time the first condition is met and the time the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. This has the effect of keeping the player interested in the timing at which the first condition is met and the timing at which the second condition is met, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature CG group> (Performs advantageous lotteries at specific intervals)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a second judgment result different from the first judgment result, the game state setting means being capable of setting the first game state based on the establishment of a termination condition in a state in which the second game state is set, and being capable of setting a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third judgment result different from the first judgment result and the second judgment result.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the same winning/losing lottery is always executed, which can lead to monotony in gameplay. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CG1, while the second gaming state is set, it is difficult to set the third gaming state, so that the player aims to play a game in which the third gaming state is set during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since it is possible to execute a game with a different degree of advantage depending on the gaming situation.

A gaming machine CG2, characterized in that in the gaming machine CG1, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination so that the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CG1, gaming machine CG2 is more likely to result in the second determination result than the third determination result, and therefore allows the player to play with the aim of setting the third gaming state while avoiding the game state transitioning to the second gaming state in which it is difficult to set the third gaming state due to the determination result of the determination means becoming the second determination result. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine CG3 is characterized in that it has an end condition setting means for setting, as the end condition, a first end condition that can be established based on the number of times the determination by the determination means executed when the second gaming state is set reaching a predetermined number, in the gaming machine CG1 or CG2.

Gaming machine CG3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine CG1 or CG2. That is, since the second gaming state can be ended when the number of determinations performed during the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform determination by the determination means in the first gaming state at least at a specific period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine CG3, characterized in that the end condition setting means is capable of setting a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a specific judgment result.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine CG3, gaming machine CG4 has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected gameplay by ending the second game state at an interval shorter than the specific period when the second ending condition is met.

Gaming machine CG5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines CG1 to CG4, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination such that the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the second gaming state will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the first gaming state will be the third discrimination result.

Gaming machine CG5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines CG1 to CG4. That is, since the third gaming state is more likely to be set in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, it has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that a determination will be made in a situation where the second gaming state is not set.

<Feature CH group> (You can set time-saving that is better to finish and time-saving that is better not to finish)
a first determination result indicating a first determination result obtained by the determination means and a second determination result indicating a second determination result obtained by the determination means and a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; and a type setting means for setting at least a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated and a second setting for setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, the game state setting means being capable of setting a second advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the first game state and a second disadvantageous game state that is less advantageous than the first game state, according to the setting type set by the type setting means.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the advantageous state is simply set after the bonus game is executed, which creates the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine CH1 can set a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state and a gaming state that is less advantageous than the first gaming state, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Technical Concept of 5068>
<Feature DA group> (When the number of times the special chart 2 lottery is performed using the special chart 2 reservation acquired during the time reduction exceeds a certain number of times, the probability of receiving a favorable bonus by the special chart 2 lottery increases)
A gaming machine DA1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting after the specific game is executed until an end condition is met, characterized in that the gaming machine has a setting control means capable of causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result when a specific period is set.

According to the gaming machine DA1, when a specific period is set, it is possible to determine that the result is the second judgment, and therefore when a specific period is set, the result is determined to be the second judgment, and the specific setting is set, so that the specific setting is set at a timing different from normal times, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the game by not only executing a specific game, but also increasing the expectation for the period in which the specific period is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine DA2 has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result based on the second information.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1, the gaming machine DA2 is configured so that the second judgment result can be determined by having the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be varied, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information was stored, and the game can be made more interesting by diversifying the game.

A gaming machine DA3, characterized in that the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result in the gaming machine DA1 or DA2 is configured to be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after the execution of a specific game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DA1 and DA2, gaming machine DA3 makes it possible to vary the period during which a specific setting is set depending on the results of the determination, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

<Feature DB group> (If you win both the jackpot and the time-saving bonus in one special drawing, you will receive more special bonuses than if you won only one of them)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine DB1 is configured to be able to discriminate between the first and second discrimination results in a redundant manner, so that a specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not met, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is set.

A gaming machine DB2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine DB1, a type of specific game that is advantageous to the player is made easier to execute based on the fact that the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are discriminated as overlapping by the discrimination means, compared to a case where the overlapping was not discriminated as the specific game.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB1, the gaming machine DB2 has the effect of diversifying games by granting the player benefits corresponding to the various discrimination results, since it is easy to execute specific types of games that are advantageous to the player by discriminating them in overlapping fashion.

In the gaming machine DB1 or DB2, the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting during the period in which the discrimination means discriminates whether the result is the first discrimination result after discriminating that the result is the second discrimination result. Gaming machine DB4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1 or DB2, gaming machine DB4 has the effect that, when the second discrimination result is determined, a specific setting is made during the period in which it is determined whether the result is the first discrimination result, which is executed thereafter, so that it is possible to determine whether the result is the first discrimination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and thus it is possible to perform discrimination in a variety of states.

<Characteristic DC group> (The degree of advantage when winning the time-saving jackpot during the time-saving state is varied depending on the time-saving trigger)
a first determination result indicating that the second game state is more likely to be determined than a first game state; and a second determination result indicating that the second game state is more likely to be determined than a first game state. The gaming machine DC1 is characterized in that the gaming machine DC1 has a determination means capable of performing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a specific first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be determined than a first game state, the game state setting means being capable of performing at least a first setting capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated, and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the gaming machine is capable of changing a selection ratio of the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, when an advantageous state is set, although there is an effect that the game win/loss lottery is more likely to be held, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the same benefit is always awarded if the game win/loss lottery results in a win during the advantageous state. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DC1, the selection ratio for the type of bonus game is variable depending on the set type, so even the same second game state can be made different, which has the effect of diversifying the game and increasing the interest in the game without having to set many game states.

In the gaming machine DC1, the second gaming state is set to continue until a termination condition is met, and when the bonus game is executed while the second setting is set, the gaming machine DC2 is characterized in that it is easy to set it so that the period until the termination condition is met after the bonus game is executed can be extended.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1, the gaming machine DC2 has the effect of lengthening the period during which the second gaming state is set by making the second setting, which has the effect of making the player more interested in the period until the end condition is set when a bonus game is executed in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine DC3, which is a gaming machine DC1 or DC2, is characterized in that the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DC1 and DC2, gaming machine DC3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined depending on the gaming state.

<Feature DD group> (The more you get into it, the easier it is to set advantageous time-saving when time-saving is established)
a game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the second game state is set, and the gaming machine has setting information discrimination means for discriminating setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and is capable of setting the second game state in which the end condition is less likely to be established when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information, wherein the second game state is set when the bonus game is ended.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine DD1, the longer the period during which the second game state is set, the more difficult it becomes for the end condition to be met when a bonus game is played. This makes it possible to alternate between a period during which the player expects a bonus game to be played and a period during which the player does not expect a bonus game to be played, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine DD2, which is characterized in that it has a setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined that a specific second discrimination result different from the specific first discrimination result in the gaming machine DD1, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to the type of setting information that has been set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DD1, gaming machine DD2 has the effect of being able to regularly vary the setting information set according to the history of the setting information, making it easy to determine the period during which the second gaming state is set.

Gaming machine DD3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DD1 or DD2, the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DD1 and DD2, gaming machine DD3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature DE group> (Special chart 1 that can execute big win lottery + time-saving lottery, and special chart 2 that can execute big win lottery + small win lottery)
a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit when a result of the first benefit executed by the first benefit execution means is a first benefit result, and a second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit different from the first benefit when the result of the first benefit execution is a second benefit result; and a second benefit granting means for granting the first benefit when a result of the second benefit execution by the second benefit execution means is a specific second benefit result, and a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit when the result of the second benefit execution is a fourth benefit result different from the third benefit result, wherein the gaming machine is configured so that the third benefit is not granted based on the first benefit execution by the first benefit execution means, and the second benefit is not granted based on the second benefit execution by the second benefit execution means.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the bonus awarded if a player wins is the same whether the first lottery is held or the second lottery is held, which can lead to the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine DE1 is configured to be able to award different benefits when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature DF group> (If a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of a first advantageous condition and the setting of the first advantageous state, a specific advantageous state can be set)
a display means for displaying first identification information showing a result of the first determination made by the first determination means; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and then statically displaying the first identification information in a manner showing the first determination result; a second determination means for performing a second determination; and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information showing a result of the second determination made by the second determination means and then statically displaying the second identification information in a manner showing the second determination result. The gaming machine DF1 is characterized in that it further comprises a game state setting means for setting a specific game state when dynamic display of the first identification information is started, which sets an advantageous game state that can be advantageous to a player; and when the specific game state is set, the second determination means is configured to easily determine the second determination result that is advantageous to the player.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, whether the first lottery is executed or the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is such that a bonus is awarded, the corresponding bonus is simply awarded, which creates a problem of gameplay becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DF1, a first advantageous state is set based on the first condition being met, and a second advantageous state is set based on the second condition being met. Then, if the second condition is met between the time the first condition is met and the time the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. This has the effect of keeping the player interested in the timing at which the first condition is met and the timing at which the second condition is met, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine DF1, in which the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the advantageous gaming state is set is controlled so that a dynamic display mode is selected from a group of dynamic display modes in which a dynamic display of a period longer than the period in which the dynamic display of the second identification information executed in the specific gaming state can be executed multiple times is likely to be selected, and when the specific gaming state is set, a dynamic display mode is selected as the dynamic display of the second identification information from a group of dynamic display modes in which a dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display period shorter than the normal gaming state is likely to be selected. Gaming machine DF2, which is characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DF1, gaming machine DF2 has the effect of making it possible to set a specific gaming state longer by selecting a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and in that specific gaming state, by setting a short dynamic display period of the second identification information, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed multiple times, which makes it easier to motivate the player to execute the dynamic display of the second identification information more frequently, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine DF3 is characterized in that, when the specific gaming state is set in gaming machine DF1 or DF2, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous gaming state can be set based on the specific second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DF1 and DF2, gaming machine DF3 has the effect of diversifying play, because a gaming state that is more advantageous than the advantageous gaming state is set in the specific gaming state when the second identification information becomes a specific second discrimination result, making it possible to vary the benefits given to the player depending on the remaining period of the specific gaming state.

A gaming machine DF4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines DF1 to DF3, the dynamic display of the second identification information is displayed in a frozen state, and the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed dynamically when a specific condition is met can be forcibly frozen so that the advantageous gaming state is not set.

According to gaming machine DF4, in any of gaming machines DF1 to DF3, the advantageous gaming state that would be set by the dynamic display of the second identification information can be forcibly discarded, which has the effect of diversifying the game.

Gaming machine DF5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines DF1 to DF4, when the special game state is set and the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to execute a bonus game, the dynamic display period of the dynamically displayed first identification information is interrupted, and is resumed after the bonus game ends, so that the dynamic display can be executed.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines DF1 to DF4, gaming machine DF5 has the effect that during a bonus game, the dynamic display of the first identification information is suspended and then resumed after the bonus game ends, so that the bonus game is executed, reducing expectations for a favorable gaming state and suppressing defects that reduce the value of the bonus game.

Gaming machine DF6, which is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines DF1 to DF5, the advantageous gaming state can be set based on at least a first setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that a bonus game is executed after the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and a second setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is not executed.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DF1 to DF5, gaming machine DF6 is configured to set an advantageous gaming state even if a bonus game is not executed, making it difficult to predict the timing at which the advantageous gaming state is set, which has the effect of adding a sense of freshness to the game.

<Feature DG group> (Advantageous lottery is executed at specific intervals)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a second determination result different from the first determination result, the game state setting means being capable of setting the first game state based on the establishment of a termination condition in a state in which the second game state is set, and being capable of setting a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the same winning/losing lottery is always executed, which can lead to monotony in gameplay. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DG1, while the second gaming state is set, it is difficult to set the third gaming state, so that the player aims to play a game in which the third gaming state is set during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since it is possible to execute a game with a different degree of advantage depending on the gaming situation.

Gaming machine DG2 is characterized in that in gaming machine DG1, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination so that the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DG1, gaming machine DG2 is more likely to result in the second determination result than the third determination result, and therefore allows the player to play with the aim of setting the third gaming state while avoiding the game state transitioning to the second gaming state in which it is difficult to set the third gaming state due to the determination result of the determination means becoming the second determination result. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine DG3 is characterized in that it has a termination condition setting means capable of setting, as the termination condition, at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the number of times the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the second gaming state is set has reached a predetermined number of times.

Gaming machine DG3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines DG1 and DG2. That is, since the second gaming state can be ended when the number of determinations performed during the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform determination by the determination means in the first gaming state at least at a specific period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine DG4 is characterized in that in gaming machine DG3, the end condition setting means is capable of setting a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a specific judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DG3, gaming machine DG4 has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected gameplay by ending the second game state at an interval shorter than the specific period when the second ending condition is met.

Gaming machine DG5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines DG1 to DG4, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination such that the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the second gaming state will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the first gaming state will be the third discrimination result.

Gaming machine DG5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines DG1 to DG4. That is, since the third gaming state is more likely to be set in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, it has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that a determination will be made in a situation where the second gaming state is not set.

<Feature DH group> (You can set time-saving that is better to finish and time-saving that is better not to finish)
A gaming machine DH1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed, and a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, characterized in that the gaming machine DH1 has a state setting means for setting a first state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set when a termination condition for terminating the setting of the second game state is satisfied, and a second state in which a game state which is more playable than a case in which the game ends when the termination condition is not satisfied is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the advantageous state is simply set after the bonus game is executed, which creates the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

When the second game state is set, the gaming machine DH1 can vary the expectation of the end condition being met by setting the first and second states, which has the effect of varying the interest felt when the second game state ends, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine DH2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DH1, when the first state is set, the first gaming state is set by the completion of the termination condition, and the second state is set based on the second gaming state being set from the state in which the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DH1, gaming machine DH2 sets a second gaming state in which the first state is set, the first gaming state is passed through, and the second state is set. This has the effect of making it easier to continue playing while gradually increasing expectations, as advantageous gaming states are set depending on the order in which the gaming states are set.

Gaming machine DH3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DH1 or DH2, the second gaming state is configured to be set based on a first condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is executed, and a second condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is not executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DH1 and DH2, gaming machine DH3 has the effect of diversifying the timing at which the second gaming state is set, providing a fresh gaming experience.

<Feature DI group> (When the special drawing 2 is performed under normal circumstances, a penalty is also imposed on the special drawing 1 for a specified period of time)
A gaming machine DI1 having a first discrimination means capable of performing a first discrimination and a second discrimination means capable of performing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, characterized in that the gaming machine DI1 has setting means capable of setting a first setting that can be set when the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means are discriminated in a first order, and a second setting that can be set when they are discriminated in a second order different from the first order.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which multiple triggers are used to determine whether a player has won or not, in a predetermined order, and the player is notified based on the results of the determination, and a special bonus is awarded to the player when a specific notification such as a win is made (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, even if the order in which hit and other determinations are made is different, games are played based on the results of each determination, and changing the order does not result in games with different playability being played, which can lead to the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent games from becoming monotonous.

With the gaming machine DI1, different settings are made depending on the order in which the first and second judgments are performed, which has the effect of making the player interested in the order in which the judgments are performed and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine DI2 having a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state in a gaming machine DI1, the gaming state setting means being capable of setting the second gaming state based on the first determination being made, and being capable of setting the first gaming state based on the first determination being made next.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DI1, the gaming machine DI2 makes it possible to set the first gaming state periodically, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by varying the gaming state at regular intervals.

In the gaming machine DI2, the gaming state setting means can set the second gaming state based on the second determination being made, and can set the first gaming state based on the second determination being made next. Gaming machine DI3.

By alternately executing the first and second judgments, it is possible to continuously set the first game state, which has the effect of making the order of judgments interesting and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine DI4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DI1 to DI3, in the first setting, a first bonus game is executed based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result, and in the second setting, a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game is executed based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DI1 to DI3, the gaming machine DI4 has the effect of providing an advantage to the player by setting a second setting, and of varying the interest of the game depending on the order of judgment.

In any of the gaming machines DI2 to DI4, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of a setting condition that can be established by at least the first determination being performed multiple times when the second determination is performed following the first determination that triggered the setting of the second gaming state. Gaming machine DI5.

<Feature DJ Group> (Three game states can be set: normal state, advantageous state, and super advantageous state. It is possible to transition from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the super advantageous state, but it is difficult to transition from the advantageous state to the super advantageous state)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than a first game state and a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game ends, and ... third game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the discrimination means is capable of determining the second discrimination result more easily when the discrimination is performed in a state where the first game state is set than when the discrimination is performed in a state where the second game state is set, and the gaming machine is configured such that the third game state is more easily set when the discrimination is performed in a state where the first game state is set than when the discrimination is performed in a state where the second game state is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allows players to switch between multiple game states by setting multiple game states and switching between the game states when certain conditions such as a win are met, thereby increasing motivation to play (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, some machines are configured to be able to set multiple game states with different degrees of advantage to the player, and by gradually switching from a game state with a low degree of advantage to a game state with a high degree of advantage, the player is encouraged to aim to switch to a game state that is even more advantageous than the current one, thereby maintaining a high desire to play.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, if the gaming state was switched periodically, the player would not quickly become bored with the game and could maintain a high desire to play. However, if the gaming state did not switch and a gaming state with a low degree of advantage continued for a long period of time, the player's desire to play would drop significantly, which was a problem. This product was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

According to the gaming machine DJ1, a determination is made that the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state, is more likely to set the third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, than the second gaming state. Therefore, for a player in the first gaming state, a game aiming to set the second gaming state after a bonus game is executed and a game aiming to set the third gaming state can be executed in parallel, which has the effect of providing a gaming machine in which the player does not quickly become bored with the game.

In addition, by continuing the first gaming state for a long period of time without switching to the second gaming state, the possibility of the gaming state switching to the third gaming state can be increased, which has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the first gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues.

Gaming machine DJ2 is characterized in that in gaming machine DJ1, the discrimination means can execute a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and can execute a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the establishment of the second discrimination condition is restricted, and in the third gaming state, a setting is executable in which the establishment of the second discrimination condition is permitted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DJ1, gaming machine DJ2 has the effect of varying the gameplay method and adding a new element of novelty to the gameplay, since the ease with which the discrimination conditions are met is changed for each type depending on the gameplay state.

Gaming machine DJ3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DJ1 or DJ2, the gaming state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the second gaming state when the second determination determines that a specific determination result has been obtained when the third gaming state has been set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DJ1 and DJ2, gaming machine DJ3 has the effect of being able to transition to the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, even after the third gaming state, allowing the player to continue in an advantageous state for a longer period of time.

<Feature DK group> (The performance mode of the "Save reserved during time reduction" performance is changed based on the reserved pre-reading result)
a first determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination means determines the information stored in the storage means before the determination means determines the information; and a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first game state, based on a condition that can be established based on the information. The game machine DK1 has a ball entry means through which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game based on the determination result by the determination means being a first determination result, a pre-determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means, and a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first game state, based on a condition that can be established based on the information.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which information such as random numbers is obtained when a gaming ball enters a starting hole or the like, and a lottery is run based on the random numbers to determine whether or not to award a beneficial bonus to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, a configuration was proposed that allows the acquired information to be stored up to a predetermined number, and allows the game state to be set to a first game state in which it is difficult to get the game ball into the starting hole, etc., and a second game state in which it is easier to get the game ball into the starting hole, etc., than in the first game state.

In such conventional gaming machines, the most advantageous play for the player is likely to be to end the second gaming state with as much information stored as possible, so players play in the second gaming state in a way that allows them to get as many gaming balls into the starting hole or the like.

However, depending on the content of the lottery based on already acquired information, it may be possible to acquire the right to set the second gaming state again even after the currently set second gaming state has ended, which may lead to the player playing a game that unnecessarily puts many gaming balls into the starting hole, etc. There is also the problem that the game becomes monotonous just before the end of the second gaming state, reducing interest in the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in the game.

According to gaming machine DK1, a specific presentation is executed based on the results of a prior determination during the second gaming state, making it possible to quickly identify that the first condition has been met, which has the effect of increasing the value of the second gaming state being set and enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine DK1, a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged as the ball entry means, the discrimination means executes a first discrimination based on the ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of executing a second discrimination that is more advantageous than the first discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second gaming state is characterized in that the second gaming state makes it easier to change the variable means from the first state to the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DK1, gaming machine DK2 has the effect of increasing the frequency with which the ball is scored into the second ball scoring means in the second gaming state, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

Gaming machine DK3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DK1 or DK2, a first end condition and a second end condition that is more advantageous to the player than the first end condition can be set as end conditions for the second gaming state, and the first condition can be established based on the fact that the second end condition is determined to be established by the advance determination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DK1 and DK2, gaming machine DK3 has the effect that, by satisfying the first condition, it is possible to store more information and execute the advantageous second judgment more frequently, so that by executing a specific presentation, it is possible to determine early on that the second judgment will be executed more frequently, and anticipation for the game can be increased in advance.

<Technical Concept of 5072>
<Feature EA group> (Different conditions (ceiling and effects) can be set)
A gaming machine EA1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine has a setting means capable of setting a first setting based on the establishment of a specific condition when a first gaming state is set, and capable of setting a second setting different from the first setting based on the establishment of the specific condition when a second gaming state different from the first gaming state is set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EA1, the setting type when a specific condition is met is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, so the gaming settings can be varied in a variety of ways, and this has the effect of making the game more interesting by creating interest in whether a specific condition is met in the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

The gaming machine EA2 described in claim 1 is characterized in that in the gaming machine EA1, the specific condition is set to be satisfied when a condition corresponding to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed is satisfied, and the counted value of the number of times is maintained even when the first gaming state is transitioned to the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EA1, gaming machine EA2 provides the following effect. That is, since the count value of the number of times is maintained even when the gaming state changes, it is possible to reach the number of times until a specific condition is met while changing the gaming state in various ways.

Gaming machine EA3, in which the first setting is capable of setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in a first period in gaming machine EA1 or EA2, and the second setting is capable of setting the advantageous state in a second period that is longer than the first period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 and EA2, gaming machine EA3 provides the following effect. That is, by setting the second setting, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by varying the degree of advantage depending on the establishment of specific conditions.

A gaming machine EA4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA3, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the second gaming state can be set before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 to EA3, gaming machine EA4 has the following effect. That is, the first determination result transitions to the second gaming state, which has the effect of making it possible to vary the gaming state in a variety of ways.

A gaming machine EA5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA4, when the second gaming state is set, the first gaming state can be set based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 to EA4, gaming machine EA5 provides the following effect. That is, it is possible to transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state before the number of times until the specific condition is met is counted, and it is possible to diversify the period until the number of times until the specific condition is met has elapsed.

A gaming machine EA6 is any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA5, and is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution means capable of suggesting that the second gaming state has been set before the specific condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 to EA5, gaming machine EA6 provides the following effect. That is, it is possible for the player to understand that the second gaming state has been set, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the gaming state that will be set when a specific condition is met.

A gaming machine EA7 is any one of the gaming machines EA3 to EA6, characterized in that it has at least an advantageous state setting means capable of setting the advantageous state for the second period based on the fact that the judgment result by the judgment means is the specific judgment result.

Gaming machine EA7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines EA3 to EA6. That is, since it is possible to set an advantageous state for the second period based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous state for the second period before the specific condition is established. This has the effect of making the player believe that various conditions are set as specific conditions, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EA7, characterized in that the advantageous state of the second period can be set based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine EA8.

Gaming machine EA8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine EA7. That is, even if the judgment result is not one that grants a bonus, it is possible to set an advantageous state for the second period, making it easier for the player to believe that an advantageous state for the second period has been set in accordance with the number of times the identification information has been dynamically displayed. This has the effect of making the player believe that various conditions have been set as specific conditions, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EA9 is characterized in that it has a third setting execution means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when a period during which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period of time in any of the gaming machines EA1 to EA8.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines EA1 to EA8, the gaming machine EA9 has the following effect. That is, when a long period of time continues during which a specific condition is not met, a third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, thereby minimizing damage to the player.

<Feature EB group> (number of activations randomized)
a first setting means for executing a first setting when the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result; a release means for releasing the first setting when the first setting is set on the basis that the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed a predetermined number of times; and a second setting means for executing a second setting different from the first setting when the first setting is executed when a specific condition is met.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the entertainment value of the game.

With gaming machine EB1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EB2 is characterized in that, when the first setting is being executed in the gaming machine EB1, the first setting is not set after the first benefit is awarded.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EB1, gaming machine EB2 provides the following effects. That is, since the first setting is cancelled when a bonus is awarded, it is possible to execute the second setting when a bonus is not awarded for a long period of time, and this has the effect of making the player feel advantageous that a bonus will not be awarded for a certain period of time or more.

A gaming machine EB3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EB1 or EB2, the second setting is executed to create a state that is more advantageous to the player than when the first setting is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EB1 and EB2, gaming machine EB3 has the following effect. That is, by executing the second setting, a favorable state can be created for the player, so that even if a state occurs in which no bonus is awarded for a long period of time, the player's losses can be reduced.

A gaming machine EB4 is characterized in that it has a third setting execution means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when a period during which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period of time in any of the gaming machines EB1 to EB3.

Gaming machine EB4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EB1 to EB3. That is, when a long period of time continues during which a specific condition is not met, a third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, thereby minimizing damage to the player.

<Characteristic EC group> (Randomization 2)
A gaming machine EEC1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit that is advantageous to a player when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in having: first setting means for executing a first setting when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result; cancellation means for canceling the first setting when the first setting is set based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times; and second setting means for executing a second setting based on the establishment of a first condition when the first setting is canceled by the cancellation means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EC1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine EC2 is characterized in that in gaming machine EC1, the second setting means is configured to be able to execute the second setting based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC1, the gaming machine EC2 has the following effect. That is, it has the effect of being able to randomize the number of dynamic displays until the second setting is executed.

Gaming machine EC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine EC1 or EC2, the second setting means is capable of executing the second setting when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EC2, gaming machine EC3 has the following effects. That is, because the second setting is executed based on multiple conditions, it is difficult for the player to understand the trigger for executing the second setting, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic ED group> (Randomization 3)
a first setting means for executing a first setting when the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result; a release means for releasing the first setting when the first setting is set, based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times; and a second setting means for executing a second setting based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined specific number of times, wherein the gaming machine ED1 is characterized in that when the dynamic display of the identification information is started while the first setting is being executed, a count value for counting the specific number of times is not updated.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

With the gaming machine ED1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine ED2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ED1, the second setting is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first setting.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine ED1, gaming machine ED2 provides the following effects. That is, when the first setting is not set, dynamic display is executed a specific number of times to set the second setting, which has the effect of randomizing the period until a setting advantageous to the player is granted, thereby providing the player with an element of surprise.

A gaming machine ED3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, when the special benefit is granted to the player, the count value for counting the specific number of times is updated to an initial value.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines ED1 and ED2, gaming machine ED3 has the following effect. That is, by providing a bonus, the count value that counts a specific number of times is updated to the initial value, which has the effect of preventing a malfunction in which the game becomes too advantageous for the player.

A gaming machine ED4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED3, when the specific number of times is reached when a dynamic display is executed to indicate that the discrimination means has determined that the first discrimination result has been obtained, the first setting is not set and the second setting is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines ED1 to ED3, gaming machine ED4 has the following effect. That is, the second setting, which is more advantageous than the first setting, is set with priority, which has the effect of providing the player with a more advantageous game.

A gaming machine ED5 is characterized in that it has a first measuring means for measuring the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed, a second measuring means for measuring the count value, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the first measurement result by the first measuring means and the second measurement result by the second measuring means, in any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED4.

In addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED4, the gaming machine ED5 has the following effect. That is, based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to easily predict the remaining number of times until the measurement value by the second measurement means reaches a specific number of times, and therefore it has the effect of making it easier for the player to predict the remaining period until the second setting is executed.

<Feature EE Group> (Lottery control during state transition)
A gaming machine EE1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine also has a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a means for transitioning to the second game state with information set in the first game state stored, and for canceling the second game state with the information stored, thereby making it easier to grant an advantageous period to the player.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EE1, since the information is maintained in a stored state even when the gaming state changes, it is easy to grant the player an advantageous period, so that it is possible to generate interest in whether the information is being maintained, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the change in the gaming state.

A gaming machine EE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EE1, it has an acquisition means capable of acquiring the information, and a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the information stored in the storage means is maintained during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed as the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EE1, gaming machine EE2 provides the following effects. That is, by continuing the dynamic display of the first identification information, the memory of the information is maintained, so that the player can play the game in anticipation of the dynamic display of the first identification information, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EE3, which is a gaming machine EE1 or EE2, has a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information, and a first storage means in which the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means is stored, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed when the determination is made by the determination means based on the first information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EE1 and EE2, gaming machine EE3 provides the following effects. That is, since it is possible to create the expectation that the first information will be acquired so that the memory of the information is maintained, it is possible to increase the expectation for acquiring the first information until the second gaming state is released, and it is possible to vary the value of acquiring the first information depending on the period.

<Feature EF Group> (V Icon Control Part 1)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EF1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when the information determined by the advance determination means is stored, and a setting means for setting the timing of the execution of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EF1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information that results in a specific discrimination, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EF1, when the execution of the specific performance is decided by the decision means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific performance has been decided can be executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EF1, gaming machine EF2 has the following effect. That is, the execution of the specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, so that the player can play the game looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

In the gaming machine EF1 or EF2, the setting means is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of the specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later start to be dynamically displayed. Gaming machine EF3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EF1 and EF2, gaming machine EF3 provides the following effect. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EFa Group> (V Icon Control Part 1)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EFa1 having: an acquisition means for acquiring information; a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when the information stored in the storage means is determined to be stored by the advance determination means;

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine EFa1 has the effect of making it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information resulting from a specific discrimination, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine EFa2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EFa1, when the execution of the specific effect is decided by the decision means, during the waiting period until the timing for the execution of the specific effect, a notification mode is displayed to indicate that the execution of the specific effect is waiting.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EFa1, the gaming machine EFa2 has the following effect. That is, the notification mode is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the execution of a specific effect is pending. This has the effect of preventing the player from stopping play before the specific effect is executed without realizing that the specific effect will be executed, even though the execution of the specific effect has been decided.

A gaming machine EFa3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EFa2, when a specific condition is established, it is possible not to execute the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information determined to be the specific determination result in a state in which the notification mode is displayed.

The gaming machine EFa3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine EFa2. That is, even if a specific effect is not executed during the period when a notification mode indicating that the execution of a specific effect is pending is displayed, identification information indicating a specific determination result may be displayed, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

A gaming machine EFa4, which is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EFa1 to EFa3, when the execution of the specific performance is decided by the decision means in a state where the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of the information judged to be the specific discrimination result, the gaming machine EFa4 has a selection means that allows a player to select in advance which of the dynamic display periods during which the execution timing of the specific performance is likely to be set by the setting means: the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information judged to be the specific discrimination result that is executed first, or the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information judged to be the specific discrimination result that is executed later.

The gaming machine EFa4 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines EFa1 to EFa3. That is, for a player who has previously selected a setting that makes it easy for a specific effect to be executed during the dynamic display period of the identification pattern corresponding to the information determined as the specific discrimination result executed first, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting whether or not there is information determined as the specific discrimination result among the information remaining in the storage means at the time the specific effect is executed, and for a player who has previously selected a setting that makes it easy for a specific effect to be executed during the dynamic display period of the identification pattern corresponding to the information determined as the specific discrimination result executed later, it is possible to provide a game with an element of surprise in which identification information is displayed to indicate that the specific discrimination result is obtained even though the specific effect has not been executed during the dynamic display period of the identification information, so that a game tailored to the player's preferences can be provided.

<Feature EG group> (variable ratio control)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means; and a gaming machine EG1, characterized in that the gaming machine EG1 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not a specific performance will be executed based on information stored in the storage means when the advance determination means determines that information determined to be the specific determination result has been stored.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EG1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information that results in a specific discrimination, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EG2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EG1, it has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EG1, gaming machine EG2 provides the following effect. That is, the timing of the execution of the specific effect can be set randomly, which has the effect of making it possible to vary the expectation of a bonus being awarded to a player depending on the timing of the execution of the specific effect.

A gaming machine EG3, in which the determination means in the gaming machine EG1 or EG2 is set to vary the probability of determining the execution of the specific effect based on the number information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored during a predetermined period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EG1 and EG2, gaming machine EG3 provides the following effect. That is, the probability of a winning combination varies depending on the number of pieces of information stored in a specified period of time, so the timing at which a specific performance is executed can be controlled in accordance with the number of pieces of information stored, which can further increase interest.

A gaming machine EG4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG3, when the execution of the specific effect is decided by the decision means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific effect has been decided can be executed.

Gaming machine EG4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EG1 to EG3. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

In any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG4, the setting means is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later start to be dynamically displayed. Gaming machine EG5.

Gaming machine EG5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EG1 to EG4. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EGa Group> (Variable ratio control)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EGa1 having: an acquisition means for acquiring information; a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when a specific condition is satisfied, the gaming machine having: an acquisition means for acquiring information;

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine EGa1 has the effect of making it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information resulting from a specific discrimination by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine EGa1, the determination means is more likely to determine the execution of the specific performance the more information that can be newly stored in the storage means before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information that is determined to be the specific discrimination result stored in the storage means is executed. The gaming machine EGa2 is characterized in that.

The gaming machine EGa2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine EGa1. That is, the more information that can be newly stored in the storage means before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the specific discrimination result stored in the storage means and the information to be discriminated is executed, the easier it is for the determination means to decide to execute the specific performance, so that of the information stored in the storage means at the time the specific performance is executed, the amount of information that has not been discriminated in advance by the pre-discrimination means at the time the execution of the specific performance is decided tends to be large, making it difficult for the player to predict the discrimination result of the information remaining in the storage means after the specific performance is executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine EGa3, characterized in that, in the gaming machine EGa1 or EGa2, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number, the determination means is more likely to determine the execution of the specific performance when there are a plurality of pieces of information that are determined to be the specific discrimination result among the pieces of information stored in the storage means, than when there is only one piece of information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EGa1 and EGa2, gaming machine EGa3 provides the following effect. That is, when there are multiple pieces of information in the storage means that are determined to be specific judgment results, the determination means is likely to determine that a specific performance will be executed. Therefore, when it is determined that a specific performance will be executed, the player is made to expect that multiple bonuses will be awarded, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

<Feature EH group> (Determining where to use)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means; a gaming machine EH1, characterized in that the gaming machine has: an acquisition means for acquiring information; a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when the information is determined by the advance determination means to be stored, and a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific effect has been determined by the determination means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a certain period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if certain conditions are met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EH1, the execution of the specific suggestion mode allows the player to recognize at an early stage that information that will result in a specific discrimination has been stored, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, by setting the timing for executing the specific presentation, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which identification information the information that will result in a specific discrimination corresponds to, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EH2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EH1, it has an execution decision means capable of deciding to execute the determined specific performance when dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EH1, gaming machine EH2 provides the following effects. That is, the execution determination means determines whether or not to determine the dynamic display of identification information that executes a specific performance at the start of each dynamic display, so that the execution timing can be set depending on the content of the newly stored information.

A gaming machine EH3 is characterized in that, in either gaming machine EH1 or EH2, when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determination means, a specific suggestion mode is executable to indicate that the execution of the specific effect has been determined.

Gaming machine EH3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EH1 to EH2. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

In any one of gaming machines EH1 to EH3, the setting means is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later begin to be dynamically displayed. Gaming machine EH4.

Gaming machine EH4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EH1 to EH3. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EI group> (frequency of use variable)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the gaming machine EI1 has an acquisition means for acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a determination means for determining, based on the type of dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the execution of a specific presentation to indicate that the information stored in the storage means is information that is determined to be the specific determination result.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a certain period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if certain conditions are met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EI1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information that results in a specific discrimination, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EI2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EI1, it has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EI1, gaming machine EI2 provides the following effect. That is, the timing of the execution of the specific effect can be set randomly, which has the effect of making it possible to vary the expectation of a bonus being awarded to a player depending on the timing of the execution of the specific effect.

Gaming machine EI3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EI1 or EI2, when the execution of the specific performance is determined by the determination means, a specific suggestion mode is executable to indicate that the execution of the specific performance has been determined.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EI1 and EI2, gaming machine EI3 has the following effect. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore allows the player to play the game while looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

Gaming machine EI4, characterized in that in gaming machine EI2 or EI3, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information whose dynamic display will start later, when the storage means stores information that will result in a plurality of the specific discrimination results.

Gaming machine EI4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of either gaming machine EI2 or EI3. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of a specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, and this has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EJ group> (Controlled by round)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EJ1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining a type of bonus to be granted by the bonus granting means from a plurality of bonus types, and a determination means for determining to execute a specific presentation to indicate that the information stored in the storage means is determined to be the specific determination result, based on determination information corresponding to a result of a prior determination of a type of bonus to be granted by the bonus granting means based on the stored information.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a certain period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if certain conditions are met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EJ1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information that is a specific discrimination result, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EJ1, it has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EJ1, gaming machine EJ2 has the following effect. That is, the timing of the execution of the specific effect can be set randomly, so that the expectation of the player receiving a special bonus can be varied depending on the timing of the execution of the specific effect.

Gaming machine EJ3, which is characterized in that in gaming machine EJ1 or EJ2, the bonus is a bonus game that is executed a number of times corresponding to the type of bonus, and the decision means is configured to be able to decide to execute the specific presentation when the judgment information determines that the bonus game will be executed a predetermined number of times or more.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EJ1 and EJ2, gaming machine EJ3 provides the following effect. That is, if the execution of bonus play is determined to be a predetermined number of times or more, the execution of a specific presentation is determined. Therefore, if the bonus play is executed less than the predetermined number of times and ends, the player can easily recognize that a specific judgment result will be obtained afterwards, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine EJ4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the predetermined number of times is set to be greater than the number of bonus games that are executed when multiple bonuses are awarded.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the gaming machine EJ4 has the following effect. That is, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to create anticipation for the number of times that a special bonus will be awarded, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine EJ5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ4, when the specific effect is executed, the gaming machine EJ5 has a means for changing the mode of the specific effect being executed during the execution of the bonus game to a mode that indicates the number of times the remaining bonus games will be executed.

Gaming machine EJ5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ4. That is, by executing a bonus game, the remaining number of bonus games to be executed can be indicated in a specific manner, and the effect is that the player can play the game while expecting a larger number of remaining games.

A gaming machine EJ6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ5, when the execution of the specific performance is decided by the decision means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific performance has been decided can be executed.

Gaming machine EJ6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ5. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in anticipation of which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

A gaming machine EJ7, which is any one of the gaming machines EJ2 to EJ5, is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later start to be dynamically displayed.

Gaming machine EJ7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EJ2 to EJ6. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Features of the 5071 series>
<Feature FA group> (Differentiate the degree of advantage between the advantageous state set after the end of a specific number of pre-determined special drawing lotteries and the advantageous state set by other triggers)
a first setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition; and a second setting means for setting a third state in which the discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state and which has a different degree of advantage from the second state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition and the satisfaction of a predetermined specific number of times in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a lottery system in which a winning or losing game is determined when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board, and if the lottery results in a winning game, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, some such gaming machines execute a time-saving game for a predetermined period of time after the winning game is executed, making it easier to execute a lottery (for example, JP 2012-217766 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the degree of advantage of the time-saving game is the same regardless of the conditions under which the time-saving game is set, which creates the problem that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In response to this, with the gaming machine FA1, if a period of time continues during which bonus play is not executed, the state is changed to the third state, making it easier for the discrimination condition to be met, so there is an effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if a long period of time continues during which bonus play is not executed.

A gaming machine FA1, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry means; a variable means for varying a first position through which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position; and a variable control means for executing a plurality of variable controls including at least a first variable control of the variable means and a second variable control that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the entry means than the first variable control based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition, and the second state is configured as a state in which the variable means is more easily controlled by the second variable control than the first state. A gaming machine FA2, characterized in that

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FA1, the gaming machine FA2 has the effect that, since it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means in the second state than in the first state, when a predetermined setting condition is met, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the second state will be set.

A gaming machine FA3, characterized in that the third state is a state in which the variable means is more easily controlled by the second variable control than in the first state, and is configured as a state in which the specified variable condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the second state, in the gaming machine FA2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA2, gaming machine FA3 has the effect of being able to configure the second state as a state in which the discrimination means is more likely to make a discrimination than the third state.

A gaming machine FA4, which is configured such that a gaming ball can enter the game machine FA2 or FA3, includes a second ball entry means that is configured to be located at a position different from the ball entry means and that is capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the discrimination means being configured such that discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the third state is configured such that discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is more likely to be executed than in the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FA2 and FA3, gaming machine FA4 has the effect of allowing a player to play with a stronger expectation of transitioning to the third state than the second state, since in the third state, it becomes easier to make a highly advantageous determination using the determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means.

A gaming machine FA4, comprising a launching means configured to launch at least a gaming ball in a first direction in which the gaming ball can reach the ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and a second direction different from the first direction, and a third ball entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the second direction by the launching means can enter the ball and where the gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering the ball, and the discrimination information acquisition means is configured to acquire the discrimination information when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means and when the gaming ball enters the third ball entry means, and the first state is configured such that the discrimination means is more likely to execute discrimination when the gaming ball is launched in the second direction than when the gaming ball is launched in the first direction, and the second state and the third state are configured such that the discrimination means is more likely to execute discrimination when the gaming ball is launched in the first direction than when the gaming ball is launched in the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA4, gaming machine FA5 has the effect of adding variety to the game by making it possible to change the direction in which the gaming ball is launched between the first state and the second and third states.

A gaming machine FA6 is any one of the gaming machines FA1 to FA5, and is provided with an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the specific condition is established at least when the settings of the gaming machine are initialized by the initialization means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines FA1 to FA5, the gaming machine FA6 can achieve novel behavior in which an advantageous third state is set even if a bonus game has never been played, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine FA6, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition that is established when the settings of the gaming machine are initialized by the initialization means, and a second specific condition that is established when the determination result of the determination means becomes the first determination result. In the gaming machine FA7,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA6, gaming machine FA7 has the effect of allowing players to play while paying attention to the number of determinations made after initialization or after a bonus game is played.

In the gaming machine FA7, the specific condition is at least composed of the first specific condition, the second specific condition, and a third specific condition that is established based on the third state being set. In the gaming machine FA8,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA7, gaming machine FA8 has the effect that even after the third state is set, if the second determination result is obtained consecutively a specific number of times, the third state is set again, so that even if the third state ends, the player can play the game in the hope that the third state will be set again.

<Feature FB group> (suppressing the execution of pre-reading performance for reserved balls that will be consumed after the end of a predetermined specific number of special drawing)
a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a discrimination means for executing a discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result; a discrimination information storage means for storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; and a pre-identification means for using the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means to identify the discrimination result of the discrimination means before the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means being determined by the pre-determination means; a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition in the first game state; and a suppression means for suppressing the specific effect of a predetermined presentation pattern from being executed by the specific effect execution means based on the determination information used for the determination of the determination means after the establishment of the second condition being obtained in the first game state.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

In addition, some conventional gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest by implementing suggestive effects that indicate the possibility of a winning game being awarded even before the display of changing patterns begins (for example, when the initial winning event is detected).

However, if the suggestive performance is unconditionally executed, there is a risk of malfunction. As a result, it may be difficult to set the performance mode appropriately.

In contrast, with the gaming machine FB1, the player can pay more attention to the fact that the second condition is met and the second gaming state is set, which has the effect of allowing the presentation mode to be set appropriately.

In the gaming machine FB1, the second condition is configured as a condition that is established at least when a second determination result different from the first determination result is obtained consecutively over a predetermined specific number of determinations of the determination means in the first gaming state. Gaming machine FB2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FB1, gaming machine FB2 has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since a second gaming state with a different degree of advantage is set even if the first judgment result is not obtained in the first gaming state.

A gaming machine FB3, which is characterized in that it is provided with a presentation mode determination means for determining one of a plurality of presentation modes, including at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode that is more likely to be determined when the pre-determination means determines the first determination result than the first presentation mode, as the presentation mode of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means, in the gaming machine FB1 or FB2, and the suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing the execution of at least the second presentation mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FB1 and FB2, gaming machine FB3 allows players to focus on the presentation of specific effects while playing the game, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine FB3, the presentation mode determination means is configured to be capable of determining one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least the first presentation mode, the second presentation mode, and a third presentation mode that is more likely to be determined when the second condition is satisfied than the first presentation mode, and the suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing the execution of at least the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode. Gaming machine FB4.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine FB3, gaming machine FB4 has the effect of suggesting both the possibility of the first judgment result and the possibility of the second condition being met, depending on the presentation mode of a specific presentation, so that the presentation mode can be set more appropriately.

A gaming machine FB5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines FB1 to FB4, it is provided with a termination means for terminating the second gaming state based on the establishment of a third condition that is predetermined in the second gaming state, and the discrimination information acquired in the first gaming state and corresponding to the first discrimination result is configured to be more advantageously used for discrimination by the discrimination means during the second gaming state than for discrimination by the discrimination means after the second gaming state has been terminated by the termination means.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines FB1 to FB4, gaming machine FB5 can make it difficult to know from the presentation mode of the specific presentation whether or not the discrimination information obtained before the second condition is met and used after transition to the second gaming state is likely to be the first discrimination result, and therefore has the effect of suppressing irregular gaming methods in which the order of use of the discrimination information is adjusted so that it is used in the lottery during the second gaming state only when there is a high possibility of the first discrimination result.

A gaming machine FB6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FB5, the first gaming state is set based on the second gaming state being ended by the ending means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FB5, gaming machine FB6 allows the player to play in the strong hope that the first determination result will be obtained before the second gaming state ends, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine FB7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine FB5 or FB6, the discrimination information acquired in the first gaming state and corresponding to a miss discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is more likely to be advantageously used for discrimination by the discrimination means after the second gaming state is terminated by the termination means than for discrimination by the discrimination means during the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FB5 and FB6, gaming machine FB7 makes it difficult to know from the presentation mode of the specific presentation whether the discrimination information obtained before the second condition is met and used after transition to the second gaming state is likely to be the first discrimination result, and therefore has the effect of suppressing irregular gaming methods in which the order of use of the discrimination information is adjusted so that it is used in the lottery after the second gaming state ends when the possibility of the first discrimination result is low.

Any of the gaming machines FB5 to FB7 includes a first ball entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a variable means capable of changing between a first position through which the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, and the discrimination information acquisition means is configured to acquire first discrimination information as the discrimination information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means and acquire second discrimination information as the discrimination information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, the discrimination means is configured so that discrimination using the second discrimination information is more likely to give the player an advantage than discrimination using the first discrimination information, and the second gaming state is configured as a gaming state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position than in the first gaming state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines FB5 to FB7, gaming machine FB8 can further increase the degree of advantage of the second gaming state, so that the player can play with a stronger expectation that the second gaming state will be set.

<Feature FC group> (When transitioning to the first state and when transitioning to the second state, signals having different output modes are output from the same channel at the outer end)
A gaming machine FC1 comprising: a signal output section consisting of a plurality of signal output terminals capable of outputting a predetermined signal toward a predetermined device; a first signal control means for controlling a signal of a predetermined first output mode to be output from a predetermined specific signal output terminal among the plurality of signal output terminals based on a predetermined first output condition being satisfied; and a second signal control means for controlling a signal of a predetermined second output mode to be output from the specific signal output terminal based on a second output condition different from the first output condition being satisfied.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, output information about the game to a specified device (such as a hall computer) depending on the game situation. In such gaming machines, the specified device can be made to understand the game situation being played on the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, as the amount of information to be output to a specific device increases, the number of signal output terminals for outputting signals may increase. This may make it difficult to output signals to a specific device in an optimal manner.

In response to this, with the gaming machine FC1, a signal can be output to a specified device from the same signal output terminal in different output modes depending on whether the first output condition is met or the second output condition is met, which has the effect of reducing the number of signal output terminals.

A gaming machine FC2 is provided with a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, a first gaming state setting means for setting a predetermined first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the first gaming state, the first condition being established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and the second condition being established when the second setting condition is established.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FC1, gaming machine FC2 can output a signal indicating that a bonus game is being played and a signal indicating that an advantageous second game state is being set from a common signal output terminal, which has the effect of reducing the number of signal output terminals.

A gaming machine FC3, in which the second set condition in the gaming machine FC2 is configured with a condition that is at least different from the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FC2, gaming machine FC3 can achieve novel gameplay in which a highly advantageous gaming state is set even if no specific judgment result is obtained, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FC4, characterized in that the second setting condition is configured to be satisfied when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific number of times the discrimination means performs discrimination, which are executed after a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, result in a miss discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FC3, gaming machine FC4 can provide novel gameplay that creates the expectation of consecutive misses, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FC5, which is characterized by comprising: a third gaming state setting means capable of setting a third gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed in a gaming machine FC3 or FC4; a third signal output control means for controlling a signal of a third output mode to be output from a first signal output terminal different from the specific signal output terminal during the period from when either the second gaming state or the third gaming state is set until the second gaming state or the third gaming state is ended; a gaming state determination means for determining the gaming state based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on; and a fourth signal output control means for controlling a signal of a fourth output mode to be output from the specific signal output terminal based on the fact that the gaming state determination means has determined that the second gaming state has been reached.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FC3 and FC4, gaming machine FC5 has the effect of allowing a specified device to easily determine whether the gaming state at the time the gaming machine is powered on is the second gaming state or the third gaming state based on the presence or absence of a signal of the fourth output mode.

A gaming machine FC6 is characterized in that it is provided with: a consecutive number determination means for determining the number of consecutive miss determination results after the specific condition is satisfied based on the power being turned on for the gaming machine FC4; and a fifth signal output control means for controlling the output of a signal in an output mode corresponding to the consecutive number of times determined by the consecutive number determination means from a predetermined signal output terminal.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FC4, gaming machine FC6 has the effect of allowing a specified device to grasp the number of consecutive miss determination results at the time the gaming machine is powered on.

A gaming machine FC7 is characterized in that it is provided with: a means for specifying the number of consecutive misses when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, which specifies the number of consecutive misses after the specific condition is met, based on the power supply to the gaming machine being cut off; and a sixth signal output control means for controlling the output of a signal in an output mode corresponding to the consecutive number of misses specified by the means for specifying the number of consecutive misses when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, from the specified signal output terminal.

Gaming machine FC7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine FC6, can allow a specified device to grasp the number of consecutive miss judgment results when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive results when the power is turned on. Therefore, if there is a discrepancy between the number of consecutive results when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive results when the power is turned on next, the specified device can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity against the gaming machine. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activity.

<Feature FD group> (output number of times stuck from the outer end)
A gaming machine FD1 having a signal output unit capable of outputting a predetermined signal to a predetermined device, characterized in that it comprises: a discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result; a counting means which counts the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result in at least a specific gaming state; and a signal control means which causes the signal output unit to output a signal corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, output information about the game to a specified device (such as a hall computer) depending on the game situation. In such gaming machines, the specified device can be made to understand the game situation being played on the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a limit to the information that can be output to a specified device, which can make it difficult to output a signal to the specified device in an appropriate manner.

In response to this, the gaming machine FD1 has the advantage that the count value of the counting means can be ascertained by a specified device when the gaming machine is powered on.

The gaming machine FD2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an advantageous gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific gaming state, based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means has been the second discrimination result a predetermined specific number of times in succession after the specific gaming state is set in the gaming machine FD1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FD1, gaming machine FD2 can provide a novel gameplay that allows players to hope for successive second discrimination results, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FD3, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine FD1 or FD2, the signal control means is configured to be able to output a signal from the signal output unit according to the number of times counted by the counting means based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FD1 and FD2, gaming machine FD3 has the effect of allowing a specified device to grasp the count value of the counting means when the power is cut off.

A gaming machine FD3, the specified device is characterized by having a storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means output from the signal output unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, at least until the gaming machine is next powered on and receives information corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FD3, gaming machine FD4 has the effect that if fraudulent activity such as rewriting the number of times counted by the counting means while the gaming machine is powered off is committed, the fraudulent activity can be easily detected by a specified device the next time the power is turned on.

<Feature FE group> (When a predetermined signal is output to a device other than the display for displaying the performance, a predetermined performance is executed on the display)
a signal output means for outputting a signal to a specific device in which a visual appearance mode corresponding to the type of signal received is set; a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the specific discrimination result; a signal control means for controlling, based at least on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, to output to the specific device a specific type of signal by which the specific device can be set to a specific visual appearance mode; and a first effect execution means for executing a first effect configured with an effect mode that makes it easier for a player to confirm that the specific device is in the specific visual appearance mode based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the specific discrimination result.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there is a demand for more innovative presentation styles to be implemented in gaming machines to increase players' interest in playing the games.

In response to this, the gaming machine FE1 can realize a novel presentation style that makes the player feel as if a special device and the gaming machine are working together to notify the player that a special game will be played, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FE1, it is provided with a second effect execution means for executing a second effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the specific judgment result has been obtained, at least from the time when the judgment result of the judgment means becomes the specific judgment result until the first effect is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FE1, gaming machine FE2 can give the player the impression that a specific judgment result has suddenly been notified to him/her through the first presentation and the specific visual appearance, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FE3, which is provided with a variable means for varying the position between a first position where the visual appearance of the specific device is visible and a second position where the visual appearance of the specific device is more difficult to see than the first position, and a variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, and is configured such that the variable means is varied to the second position at least while the second performance is being executed, and is varied to the first position based on the execution of the first performance.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine FE2, gaming machine FE3 makes it physically difficult to visually determine whether or not a specific device is set to a specific viewing mode while the second performance is being performed, so that even if the player has visually determined the specific device before the first performance is performed, it is difficult for the player to realize that a specific judgment result will be obtained while the second performance is being performed.

A gaming machine FE4 is provided with a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state disadvantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition in any one of the gaming machines FE1 to FE3, and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition in the first gaming state, the signal control means being configured to be controllable so that a first type of signal that can set the specific device to a first viewing state different from the specific viewing state based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first performance execution means being configured to be capable of executing the first performance when the second condition is established.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines FE1 to FE3, the gaming machine FE4 can not only notify the player that a bonus game is being played, but also that a second game state is being set, through a presentation that makes it seem as if a specific device and the gaming machine are linked, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FE4, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry means; a variable means capable of changing between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position; and a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition, the second gaming state being configured as a gaming state in which the predetermined variable condition is more likely to be established than the first gaming state; and the first performance execution means being configured to execute the first performance based on the first change of the variable means to the first position after the second gaming state is set, when it is determined before the second condition is established that the period from the establishment of the second condition to the change of the variable means to the first position by the variable control means is equal to or longer than a predetermined specific period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FE4, gaming machine FE5 can notify the player of the second gaming state only after it is possible to actually insert the gaming ball into the ball insertion means, which has the effect of preventing the player from unnecessarily firing the gaming ball.

Gaming machine FE6 is one of gaming machines FE1 to FE5, characterized in that the specific visual appearance is configured as a visual appearance that can notify the player that the bonus game is being played.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines FE1 to FE5, the gaming machine FE6 has the effect of clearly notifying the player that a special game is being played by a specific device.

A gaming machine FE7, in which the signal control means is configured to be controllable so that a second type of signal is output to the specific device based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, and the specific device is configured to be capable of setting a visual indication that can indicate to the player the number of times the determination by the determination means has been executed, depending on the number of times the second type of signal has been output from the signal output means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines FE1 to FE6, the gaming machine FE7 has the effect of improving convenience for the player by allowing the player to check the number of determinations made based on the visual confirmation mode of a specific device.

Gaming machine FE8 is characterized in that the specific device in gaming machine FE7 is configured to be able to set a visual indication that can indicate to the player the number of times the bonus game has been executed, depending on the number of times the specific type of signal is output from the signal output means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FE7, gaming machine FE8 has the effect of improving convenience for players by allowing them to check the number of bonus games that have been played based on the visual confirmation mode of a specific device.

<Feature FF group> (Regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, the ceiling time reduction is activated when the number of draws after the win reaches a certain number of draws)
a control unit for controlling a game machine that has a display unit capable of displaying identification information, a determination unit capable of executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating a determination result of the determination unit on the display unit, and a bonus granting unit capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player based on the display of the identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display unit, the control unit comprising: a dynamic display mode determination unit capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information, a control information storage unit having stored therein a plurality of control information that defines a plurality of different dynamic display modes that can be determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, a control information selection unit capable of selecting one control information for determining the dynamic display mode from the control information storage unit, an operation unit operable by an operator, an initialization unit capable of initializing a setting of the game machine to a predetermined initial setting based on the game machine being powered on in a state in which a predetermined operation content has been performed on the operation unit, and a suppression unit for suppressing a change in information for selecting the control information when the initialization is performed by the initialization unit.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, dynamically display multiple symbols on a display means, such as a liquid crystal display, to notify the player of the results of a lottery that is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot. In such gaming machines, when the dynamically displayed multiple symbols are statically displayed in a specific predetermined combination, the machine transitions to a so-called winning state, which is advantageous for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, with such conventional gaming machines, it can be difficult to appropriately determine the dynamic display mode.

In contrast, with the FF1 gaming machine, the information for selecting the specified information is prevented from being changed even after initialization, which has the effect of allowing the specified information to be suitably selected even after initialization.

The gaming machine FF2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, based on the fact that the determination means has executed a predetermined specific number of determinations without the awarding of the bonus after the awarding of the bonus has ended in the gaming machine FF1.

In addition to the effects of the FF1 gaming machine, the FF2 gaming machine has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the discrimination means does not produce a specific result by executing discrimination a specific number of times, thereby setting a favorable specific gaming state. Even if a long period of time continues without a specific result being produced, the FF2 gaming machine has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

A gaming machine FF3, which is characterized in that it includes a counting means for counting the number of times the discrimination means executes discrimination without the bonus being awarded in the FF2 gaming machine, and a second suppression means for suppressing initialization of the count value counted by the counting means when the initialization is performed by the initialization means, and the setting means is configured to be able to set information for setting the specific gaming state based on the count value of the counting means reaching a count value corresponding to the specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FF2, gaming machine FF3 maintains the count value of the counting means even when the gaming machine is initialized, so that the number of determinations by the determination means until the specific gaming state is set can be prevented from increasing from the time the power is cut off, even if the gaming machine is initialized. This has the effect of preventing players from being reluctant to play on an initialized gaming machine.

In the gaming machine FF3, the specified information selection means is configured to be able to select the specified information based at least on the count value of the counting means. In the gaming machine FF4,

In addition to the effects of the FF3 gaming machine, the FF4 gaming machine has the advantage that the count value of the counting means can be used in common when reading out the number of determinations made by the determination means to determine whether or not to set a specific gaming state, and when reading out the number of determinations made by the determination means to select the specified information, eliminating the possibility of the two being out of sync, allowing the specified information to be suitably selected.

A gaming machine FF5 is characterized in that it is provided with a second setting means capable of setting information for setting the specific gaming state based on the fact that, after the specific gaming state is set, the determination by the determination means is executed the specific number of times without the bonus being awarded, in any of the gaming machines FF2 to FF4.

According to the FF5 gaming machine, even after a specific game state has been set, if no bonus is awarded, the specific game state will be set again when the number of determinations reaches a specific number, which has the effect of realizing innovative gameplay in which the degree of advantage periodically increases even if no bonus is awarded.

A gaming machine FF5, characterized in that it is provided with a second initialization means capable of initializing the count value of the counting means based on the setting of the specific gaming state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FF5, the FF6 gaming machine can initialize the count value when a specific gaming state is set. Therefore, even when the specific gaming state has not been set, or even when the specific gaming state has been set, it is possible to determine whether or not to set a specific gaming state depending on whether the count value has reached a specific number of times, and this has the effect of allowing common control between the setting means and the second setting means.

A gaming machine FF7 is any one of the gaming machines FF2 to FF6, and is characterized by having a third initialization means for initializing the count value of the counting means based on the completion of the awarding of the bonus by the bonus awarding means.

According to the gaming machine FF7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines FF2 to FF6, the count value of the counting means is initialized each time the awarding of the bonus is completed, so that regardless of the timing of the awarding of the bonus, a specific gaming state can be set when the number of determinations of the determination means reaches a specific number after the awarding of the bonus is completed.

<Feature FG group> (When the first lottery result after RAM clearing is different from a winning lottery result, a variation pattern scenario is set, and the second or subsequent lottery results avoid setting the scenario)
A gaming machine FG1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a control means for performing predetermined control related to a game, and is equipped with a specific control setting means for setting the control means to perform a predetermined specific control based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a suppression means for suppressing the setting of the specific control setting means if the predetermined specific condition is established at the time when the predetermined setting condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, in such gaming machines, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

In contrast, gaming machine FG1 can avoid specific control when specific conditions are met, which has the effect of allowing more optimal control.

In the gaming machine FG1, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means based on the discrimination of the discrimination means being executed, a stipulated information storage means for storing a plurality of stipulated information in which at least a correspondence is stipulated between dynamic display period information, which is information for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a discrimination count, which is the number of times the discrimination of the discrimination means has resulted in a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, and A gaming machine FG2 that includes a dynamic display period information specifying means for specifying the dynamic display period information corresponding to the number of determinations according to one of the multiple pieces of specified information stored in the specified information storage means based on the establishment of a condition, and a dynamic display period determination means for determining the dynamic display period according to the dynamic display period information specified by the dynamic display period information specifying means, and the control setting means is configured to be able to set, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, the control of specifying one of the multiple pieces of specified information stored in the specified information storage means to be used for specifying the dynamic display period information by the dynamic display period information specifying means as the specific control to be performed by the control means.

The gaming machine FG2 has the advantage of being able to optimally determine the dynamic display period.

A gaming machine FG3, characterized in that in the gaming machine FG2, the predetermined setting condition is a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a first discrimination result that is at least different from the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FG2, gaming machine FG3 has the effect of being able to identify specified information when the first determination result is reached, making it possible to differentiate the trends in the dynamic display period determined before and after the first determination result.

A gaming machine FG3, comprising an operating means operable by an operator, and an initializing means capable of initializing the settings of the gaming machine to a predetermined initial setting based on the gaming machine being powered on while a predetermined operation is being performed on the operating means, and the determining means is configured to determine the result of the determination as either the specific determination result or the first determination result. A gaming machine FG4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FG3, gaming machine FG4 has the effect that the determination means executes a determination after the gaming machine is initialized, and if a specific determination result is not obtained, the regulated information can be identified. Therefore, the regulated information can be identified by executing the determination means once after the gaming machine is initialized. This has the effect of preventing a state in which the regulated information is not identified from continuing for a long period of time.

A gaming machine FG5, in which the specific condition in the gaming machine FG4 is configured as a condition that is established when the first determination result is obtained for the first time after the settings of the gaming machine are initialized to the initial settings by the initialization means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FG4, gaming machine FG5 has the effect of preventing the repeated identification of stipulated information each time the first determination result is obtained.

Gaming machine FG6, in which the control means of the gaming machine FG4 or FG5 is configured to be capable of performing at least the following specific controls: a first specific control that identifies one of the prescribed information based on the initialization means initializing the settings of the gaming machine to the initial settings and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming the first discrimination result; and a second specific control that identifies one of the prescribed information based on the completion of the execution of the bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FG4 and FG5, gaming machine FG5 can also identify stipulated information when the bonus game ends, so the tendency of the dynamic display period to be determined can be changed when the bonus game ends. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FG7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines FG4 to FG6, it is provided with an advantageous gaming state setting means for setting an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player based on the number of determinations having reached a predetermined specific number after the initialization means has initialized the settings of the gaming machine to the initial settings, and the specific control is configured with control for specifying the stipulated information that stipulates the correspondence between each of the determination numbers at least until the specific number is reached and the dynamic display period information.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines FG4 to FG6, gaming machine FG7 can continue to use the stipulated information identified when the gaming machine is initialized and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result until an advantageous gaming state is set, so there is no need to perform control to switch the stipulated information until an advantageous gaming state is set, and there is an effect that the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

A gaming machine FG8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines FG4 to FG7, the gaming machine is initialized by the initialization means, and the gaming machine is equipped with a performance execution means that executes a specific performance when the judgment result of the judgment means becomes the first judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FG4 to FG7, gaming machine FG8 has the effect of making the player understand that a specific condition has been met when a specific presentation is executed.

In the gaming machine FG8, the effect execution means is configured to be able to suppress the execution of the specific effect when the power to the gaming machine is turned on and the settings of the gaming machine are not initialized to the initial settings by the initialization means. Gaming machine FG9.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine FG8, gaming machine FG9 allows the player to understand whether the gaming machine has been initialized based on whether a specific performance is executed, so that when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the player is made to want to play at least until a specific condition is met to determine whether the gaming machine has been initialized. This has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine, particularly immediately after the opening of the hall in which the gaming machine is installed.

Gaming machine FG10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines FG2 to FG9, the dynamic display period information is composed of information that specifies at least a plurality of different periods that can be determined as the dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines FG2 to FG9, gaming machine FG10 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game by diversifying the dynamic display period, thereby providing variation in the period until the determination result of the determination means is displayed.

<Feature FH group> (Reset the fluctuation pattern scenario when the ceiling lottery count is reached)
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player based on the identification information for indicating a predetermined specific discrimination result being displayed on the display means, the gaming machine further comprising: a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the discrimination of the discrimination means being executed a predetermined specific number of times without the benefit being granted after the granting of the benefit has been completed; a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display mode a selection information identification means for identifying one of the plurality of different pieces of selection information as selection information which is information for selecting one piece of selection information from the specification information storage means; and a selection information selection means for selecting one piece of selection information from the specification information storage means in accordance with the selection information identified by the selection information identification means, wherein the selection information identification means is configured to be capable of identifying one piece of selection information for determining the dynamic display mode from the specification information storage means, based on the fact that the determination of the determination means has been performed a predetermined specific number of times without the benefit being awarded after the awarding of the benefit has been completed.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, dynamically display multiple symbols on a display means, such as a liquid crystal display, to notify the player of the results of a lottery that is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot. In such gaming machines, when the dynamically displayed multiple symbols are statically displayed in a specific predetermined combination, the machine transitions to a so-called winning state, which is advantageous for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, with such conventional gaming machines, it can be difficult to appropriately determine the dynamic display mode.

In response to this, the gaming machine FH1 has the advantage of being able to optimally identify the selection information.

A gaming machine FH2, characterized in that the selection information identification means in the gaming machine FH1 is configured to identify first selection information as the selection information based on the fact that the bonus has been awarded, and to identify second selection information different from the first selection information based on the fact that the determination means has performed a predetermined specific number of times without the bonus being awarded after the awarding of the bonus has ended.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH1, the gaming machine FH2 has the effect of diversifying the tendency of the specified information to be determined, since different selection information can be specified when the awarding of the bonus is completed and when a specific gaming state is set.

The gaming machine FH3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FH1 or FH2, the setting means is configured to be able to set information for setting the specific gaming state based on the fact that, after the specific gaming state has been set, the determination by the determination means has been performed the specific number of times without the bonus being awarded.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FH1 and FH2, gaming machine FH3 has the effect of realizing novel gameplay in which a specific gaming state is set periodically even if no special benefit is awarded, since the specific gaming state is set again even after the specific gaming state has been set once if no special benefit is awarded.

In the gaming machine FH3, the selection information is determined based on the determination of the determination means being performed a predetermined specific number of times without the benefit being granted after the awarding of the benefit has been completed, and is configured with information that allows the specified information selection means to select the first specified information when the number of determinations of the determination means is less than a first number, which is less than the specific number, and to select the second specified information when the first number has been reached. In the gaming machine FH4, the selection information is determined based on the number of determinations of the determination means being less than a first number, which is less than the specific number.

According to the gaming machine FH4, when the first number of times is determined after the specific gaming state is set, the tendency of the determined dynamic display mode can be made different, which has the effect of making the player feel that the specific number of times is approaching due to the change in the tendency of the dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine FH4, the selection information that is determined based on the determination of the determination means being performed a predetermined specific number of times without the bonus being awarded is configured as information that allows the specified information selection means to select the second specified information based on the number of times the determination means has determined a second number that is less than the specific number and greater than the first number, and allows the determination means to select the first specified information when the number of times the determination means has determined is greater than the first number and less than the second number. In the gaming machine FH5,

In addition to the effect of gaming machine FH4, gaming machine FH5 can determine a different tendency of the dynamic display mode when the determination count of the determination means executed after the setting of the specific gaming state becomes the first count and when it becomes the second count, compared to the other counts. This has the effect of making the player feel that the specific count is approaching in stages each time the tendency of the dynamic display mode changes.

A gaming machine FH6, which is any one of the gaming machines FH3 to FH5, is characterized by having an advantage degree varying means capable of varying the advantage degree between the specific gaming state that is initially set after the awarding of the benefit is completed and the specific gaming state that is set after the specific gaming state is set based on the determination of the determination means being performed the specific number of times without the benefit being awarded.

With the gaming machine FH6, the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the timing set even in the same specific gaming state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine FH7 is characterized in that in the gaming machine FH6, the advantage degree varying means is configured to vary the advantage degree so that the specific gaming state that is set after the specific gaming state is set based on the discrimination of the discrimination means being executed the specific number of times without the benefit being granted is more advantageous than the specific gaming state that is initially set after the benefit is granted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FH6, gaming machine FH7 has the effect of realizing novel gameplay that creates the expectation that no bonus will be awarded, since a specific gaming state that is set for a longer period of time can have a higher degree of advantage.

<Feature FI group> (When an interruption of a predetermined control with a high priority occurs during a periodic control that periodically varies the control, and the predetermined control is terminated, the periodic control is resumed from the control position as if the predetermined control had not been executed.)
a control means for executing a first control based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and for executing a second control different from the first control based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during the execution of the first control; a third control setting means for setting a third control different from both the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the establishment of a predetermined third execution condition at least during the execution of the first control; a termination means for terminating the third control based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition during the execution of the third control; and a post-termination control setting means for setting the second control to be executed by the control means if a predetermined specific condition is established at the time when the third control is terminated by the termination means, and for setting the first control to be executed by the control means if the specific condition is not established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, in such gaming machines, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

In response to this, gaming machine FI1 can switch between executing first control or second control after the end of third control depending on whether a specific condition is met at the end of third control, which has the effect of realizing more suitable control.

In the gaming machine FI1, the post-termination control setting means is configured to set the second control to be executed by the control means if the second control is being executed at the time the termination condition is satisfied, assuming that the third execution condition is not satisfied during execution of the first control, and to set the first control to be executed by the control means if the first control is being executed at the time the termination condition is satisfied.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FI1, gaming machine FI2 has the effect of realizing more suitable control when the third control is terminated by setting the control content as if the third control had not been executed.

A gaming machine FI3, which is equipped with a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in a gaming machine FI1 or FI2, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result, and which is characterized in that the second execution condition is a condition that is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result after the first execution condition is established reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FI1 and FI2, gaming machine FI3 can switch to a different control when the number of times the second determination result occurs reaches a specific number of times, so it is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed in a situation where an advantageous bonus game is not being executed. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine FI3, the post-termination setting means is configured to set the second control to be executed by the control means if the number of times the second determination result has occurred since the first execution condition was previously satisfied is equal to or greater than the specific number of times at the time the termination condition is satisfied, and to set the first control to be executed if the number of times the second determination result has occurred is less than the specific number of times. In the gaming machine FI4,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FI3, gaming machine FI4 has the effect of being able to switch the control content after the end of the third control depending on the number of times the second judgment result is obtained, thereby realizing more suitable control.

A gaming machine FI5 comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information in a gaming machine FI3 or FI4, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means to show the result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a prescribed information storage means for storing a plurality of prescribed information including at least a first prescribed information and a second prescribed information different from the first prescribed information as prescribed information for determining the dynamic display period, the control means being configured to be capable of controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the first prescribed information as the first control, and controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the second prescribed information as the second control.

With the gaming machine FI5, the tendency of the dynamic display period determined by whether the first control or the second control is executed can be made different, so the tendency of the period until the determination result of the determination means is displayed can also be made different. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FI6 is provided with a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition in any one of the gaming machines FI3 to FI5, and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means has been the second discrimination result for a first number of times, which is greater than the specific number of times, after the first gaming state has been set, and the first execution condition is configured as a condition that is established when the specific setting condition is established.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines FI3 to FI5, gaming machine FI6 can switch from the first control to the second control during the first gaming state, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous until the second gaming state is set.

A gaming machine FI7 is provided with a third game state setting means for setting a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a third determination result that is different from the first determination result and is a part of the second determination result, and the third execution condition is configured as a condition that is established when the result of the determination by the determination means is the third determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FI6, gaming machine FI7 can also switch control when switching from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, which has the effect of enabling control to be executed according to the gaming state.

In the gaming machine FI7, the first gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the third discrimination result has been obtained has been the second discrimination result a predetermined second number of times in succession, and the termination condition is configured as a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the third discrimination result has been obtained has been the second discrimination result a predetermined second number of times in succession. Gaming machine FI8.

According to gaming machine FI8, when the third gaming state ends and the first gaming state is returned to, it is possible to switch between executing the first control or the second control depending on the number of times the second judgment result occurs, which has the effect of realizing more suitable control.

<Feature FJ group> (when a setting condition for an advantageous state is established, if it is determined that the setting condition for an advantageous state will be established again during the advantageous state, the degree of advantage taking into account the advantageous state that will be set later is notified)
A gaming machine FJ1 comprising: a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition; a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition which can be established at least in the first gaming state; and a specific effect execution means for executing, at least before the second gaming state is set, a specific effect which suggests to the player a degree of advantage taking into account the setting condition which is established again when the setting condition of the second gaming state is established again during the second gaming state.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines are known to have multiple game states with different degrees of advantage, and some machines notify players of the degree of advantage through display effects or the like when transitioning to a game state with a higher degree of advantage.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the degree of advantage is reported based on only the degree of advantage of the most recently set advantageous state, which may result in a discrepancy between the actual degree of advantage and the reported degree of advantage.

In response to this, with the gaming machine FJ1, when it is known in advance that the second gaming state will be set and that the setting conditions for setting the second gaming state again during the second gaming state will be met, a novel presentation can be realized that suggests to the player the degree of advantage that takes into account the fact that the second gaming state will be set in an overlapping manner before the second gaming state is set, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FJ1, comprising: a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result; and a termination means for terminating the second gaming state based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the second gaming state is set being a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result a predetermined specific number of times, and the specific presentation is configured as a presentation capable of suggesting the number of discriminations of the discrimination means until the second gaming state is terminated by the termination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FJ1, gaming machine FJ2 has the effect of drawing attention to the special effects, since it can suggest the number of judgments until the second gaming state ends through the special effects.

The gaming machine FJ3 is characterized in that it is provided with a termination count determination means for determining one of a plurality of times including at least a first count and a second count greater than the first count as the number of times the determination means determines the number of times the determination means determines the second gaming state until the termination means terminates the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition.

According to the gaming machine FJ3, multiple numbers of times can be determined by the end number determination means, so that the player can pay attention to the number of times suggested by the specific presentation while playing the game.

In the gaming machine FJ2 or FJ3, the predetermined setting condition is at least composed of a first setting condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a third discrimination result that is different from the first discrimination result and is included in the second discrimination result, and a second setting condition that is different from the first setting condition. Gaming machine FJ4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FJ2 and FJ3, gaming machine FJ4 has multiple conditions for setting an advantageous gaming state, which increases the number of situations where a transition to the second gaming state can be expected. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine FJ4, the second setting condition is configured as a condition that is established when the determination result of the determination means executed at least after the first gaming state is set becomes the second determination result a predetermined third number of times. Gaming machine FJ5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FJ4, gaming machine FJ5 has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the first judgment result is not obtained in the first gaming state in which the degree of advantage is low, because the judgment of the judgment means is the second judgment result for the third number of times, and a second gaming state in which the degree of advantage is high is set.

In the gaming machine FJ5, the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to set, as the effect mode of the specific effect, an effect mode corresponding to the number of determinations that can be executed between the establishment of the first setting condition and the end of the second gaming state, which is set based on the determination result of the determination means reaching the third number, when the first setting condition is established and the number of determinations of the determination means reaches the third number before the determination of the specific number of times is executed in the second gaming state, which is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition. In the gaming machine FJ6,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FJ5, gaming machine FJ6 can set the presentation mode of the specific presentation according to the number of determinations until the second game state is actually ended, which has the effect of allowing the player to pay more attention to the specific presentation while playing the game.

The gaming machine FJ6 is provided with a presentation mode determination means for determining one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode indicating that at least a fourth number of determinations can be made when the first determination result is not obtained in the set second gaming state, and a second presentation mode indicating that a fifth number of determinations, which is greater than the fourth number, can be made as the presentation mode of the specific presentation performed by the specific presentation execution means, and the presentation mode determination means is configured to be capable of determining the first presentation mode when the number of determinations that can be made when the first determination result is not obtained in the set second gaming state is equal to or greater than the first number and less than the second number.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine FJ6, gaming machine FJ7 can uniformly determine the first presentation mode when the number of determinations until the second gaming state ends is equal to or greater than the first number and less than the second number, thereby reducing the processing load of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine FJ7, characterized in that it comprises a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, a display control means for causing the display means to display information indicating the number of judgments corresponding to the presentation mode of the specific presentation executed before the second gaming state is set as information indicating the number of judgments that can be executed until the second gaming state that has been set is terminated based on the setting of the second gaming state, and an update means for updating the information indicating the number of judgments displayed on the display means to information indicating the number of judgments that is one less each time the discrimination means makes a judgment in the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FJ7, gaming machine FJ8 has the effect of displaying the number of determinations until the second gaming state ends on the display means, making it easy for the player to understand how long the second gaming state will continue.

<Feature FK group> (update the counter within a predetermined range, and when the counter value becomes the first counter value, update the counter value to the second counter value)
A gaming machine FK1 comprising: an update means capable of updating a counter value of a specific counter to a value of 1 within a predetermined range based on the establishment of a predetermined specific update condition; a specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the counter value of the specific counter being updated to a predetermined first counter value by the update means; and a counter value setting means for setting the counter value of the specific counter to a second counter value which is within the predetermined range and is different from the first counter value based on the counter value of the specific counter being updated to the first counter value by the update means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, better control is needed.

In contrast, with the gaming machine FK1, when a specific counter value is updated to a first counter value, it can be updated to a second counter value, so the counter value can be updated appropriately. This has the effect of allowing specific control to be executed more appropriately.

A gaming machine FK2, in which the first counter value is configured to be greater than the second counter value in the gaming machine FK1, and the update means is configured to be able to update the counter value of the specific counter to a counter value greater than the counter value before the update.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FK1, gaming machine FK2 has the effect of making the player expect that the specific control will be executed again, since after updating to the second counter value, the counter value can be updated again to the first counter value by repeatedly updating the counter value.

In the gaming machine FK1 or FK2, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player based on the display of the identification information indicating a predetermined specific discrimination result on the display means, a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the discrimination of the discrimination means being executed a predetermined specific number of times without the bonus being granted after the granting of the bonus has ended, a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information, and a plurality of different pre-display modes that can be determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The gaming machine FK3 is equipped with a stipulated information storage means in which multiple pieces of stipulated information that stipulate the dynamic display mode are stored, and a stipulated information selection means capable of selecting one piece of stipulated information for determining the dynamic display mode from the stipulated information storage means, the update condition is configured to be established based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the specific control execution means is configured to be capable of executing control to specify a specific selection information that has been determined in advance from multiple selection information that is predefined as selection information that causes the stipulated information selection means to select one piece of stipulated information from the stipulated information storage means, and the stipulated information selection means is configured to be capable of selecting one piece of stipulated information in accordance with the counter value of the specific counter and the specified selection information.

The gaming machine FK3 has the effect of being able to appropriately identify the selection information.

A gaming machine FK4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FK3, it is configured to be able to specify, as the selection information, first selection information different from the specific selection information based on the fact that the privilege has been granted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FK3, gaming machine FK4 can also identify selection information when a bonus is awarded, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine FK5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine FK3 or FK4, the setting means is configured to be able to set information for setting the specific gaming state based on the fact that, after the specific gaming state has been set, the determination of the determination means has been performed the specific number of times without the bonus being awarded.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FK3 and FK4, gaming machine FK5 has the effect of realizing novel gameplay in which a specific gaming state is set periodically even if no special benefit is awarded, since the specific gaming state is set again even after the specific gaming state has been set once if no special benefit is awarded.

<Feature FL group> (When an interruption of a first control having a high priority occurs during a periodic control in which a control is periodically varied, and the first control is terminated, a second control different from the periodic control is executed)
a control means for executing a first control based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and for executing a second control different from the first control based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during the execution of the first control; a third control setting means for setting a third control different from both the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the establishment of a predetermined third execution condition at least during the execution of the first control; a termination means for terminating the third control based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition during the execution of the third control; and a post-termination control setting means for setting a fourth control different from both the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the termination of the third control by the termination means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, in such gaming machines, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

In contrast, with the gaming machine FL1, the fourth control can be executed when the third control is terminated, which has the effect of realizing more suitable control.

A gaming machine FL2, in which the first execution condition in the gaming machine FL1 is composed of a condition that can be met at least while the fourth control is being executed.

Since the first execution condition is satisfied while the fourth control is being executed, the first control is executed again, which has the effect of enabling the expectation that the first execution condition will be satisfied while the fourth control is being executed.

A gaming machine FL3, which is equipped with a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in a gaming machine FL1 or FL2, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result, and which is characterized in that the second execution condition is a condition that is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result after the first execution condition is established reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FL1 and FL2, gaming machine FL3 can switch to a different control when the number of times the second determination result occurs reaches a specific number of times, so it is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed in a situation where an advantageous bonus game is not being executed. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine FL3, comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means to show the result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a prescribed information storage means for storing a plurality of prescribed information including at least a first prescribed information and a second prescribed information different from the first prescribed information as prescribed information for determining the dynamic display period, the control means being configured to be capable of controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the first prescribed information as the first control, and controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the second prescribed information as the second control.

A gaming machine FL4, comprising a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state advantageous to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a third determination result that is different from the first determination result and is included in the second determination result, the third execution condition being configured as a condition that is established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being the third determination result, and the third control being configured as a control for causing the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using third specified information that is different from both the first specified information and the second specified information. A gaming machine FL5, comprising a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state advantageous to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a third determination result that is different from the first specified information and the second specified information.

With the gaming machine FL5, it is possible to vary the tendency of the dynamic display period that is determined when a specific gaming state is set, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Features of the 5073 (base) series>
<Characteristics of βA group>
A gaming machine βA1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine βA1 has: a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the presentation mode displayed on the display means, an announcement means capable of arranging an announcement mode at a position where the presentation mode is displayed, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the variable presentation mode by arranging the announcement mode when the plurality of presentation modes are displayed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine βA1 has an effect of making it easier for players to recognize the variable presentation mode by providing a notification mode, which reduces the inconvenience of overlooking the variable presentation mode and increases the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine βA2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine βA1, it has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means, and a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the performance mode display means is capable of displaying the performance mode when the information is stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine βA1, the gaming machine βA2 has the effect of being able to determine the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means based on the number of presentation modes displayed, and is able to predict the number of times that can be determined.

A gaming machine βA3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine βA2, it has a pre-determination means capable of executing a determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the variable display means is configured to be variable based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines βA1 and βA2, gaming machine βA3 has the effect of varying the presentation mode based on the results of the determination made by the advance determination means, making it possible to predict the results of the determination by varying the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Characteristic βB group>
a setting means for setting information for varying a setting based on the operation of the operating means; a presentation execution means for executing a presentation mode corresponding to the varied setting; an identification mode display means for displaying an identification mode corresponding to the set information on a display means when the operating means is operated; a setting means for setting a specific period during which the identification mode is more difficult to see than during a normal period; and a presentation execution means for executing a first mode during a period during which the identification mode is not displayed, and executing a second mode different from the first mode to suggest the identification mode when the operating means is operated during the specific period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game has been won or not, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the judgment. Gaming machines have been proposed in which the game mode can be changed by operating an operating means that is provided on the gaming machine and can be operated by the player. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there has been a problem in that when the operating means is operated, it is sometimes difficult to determine whether the game mode has been changed, which reduces the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine βB1, during a specific period when the identification mode is difficult to see, a second mode is executed to suggest the identification mode, so that by utilizing the mode execution means that normally executes a different first mode, it is possible to suggest the identification mode to the player, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine βB2, which has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information showing a specific result of the discrimination is displayed on the display means, and the performance execution means is configured to be able to change during the period in which the identification information is subsequently dynamically displayed based on a setting changed by operating the operation means during a period in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed, and execute the performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine βB1, gaming machine βB2 has the effect of allowing players to enjoy the effects of the dynamic display of the identification information in addition to the content operated during periods when dynamic display is not performed, which is reflected in the subsequent dynamic display period.

Gaming machine βB3, which is a gaming machine βB1 or βB2, is characterized in that the mode execution means is configured to be moved to the position where the identification mode was displayed during the specific period and executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines βB1 and βB2, gaming machine βB3 has the effect of making it easier to understand that the second mode is being executed instead of the identified mode, as the mode execution means is moved to the position where the identified mode was displayed and executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Characteristic βC Group> (door opening and closing)
A gaming machine βC1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine βC1 has: a performance execution means capable of performing a performance during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; a variable means capable of varying the state of the identification information based on the establishment of a specific condition during the period in which the performance is being executed; and a determination means capable of varying and determining the number of times the specific condition is established during the period until the dynamic display period of the identification information has elapsed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and multiple symbols are dynamically displayed as an effect to notify the result of the determination, and then the symbols are statically displayed in a combination to notify the result of the lottery. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a problem that the dynamic display mode of the symbols was prone to becoming monotonous, and the combination to be notified could be predicted before the symbols were statically displayed, reducing the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

With gaming machine βC1, the identification information changes each time a specific condition is met, so that the player can expect the information to change to a state that indicates a specific determination result each time the specific condition is met. This creates interest in the number of times determined by the determination means, and has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine βC2 is characterized in that in gaming machine βC1, the dynamic display of the identification information is configured to be capable of executing a temporary stop mode that temporarily stops at least a portion of the identification information in a manner that allows the identification information to be displayed in a manner that indicates the specific determination result, and the specific condition is configured to be established during the period in which the temporary stop mode is being executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine βC1, gaming machine βC2 has the effect that when a specific condition is met during the temporary stop period, the state of the identification information is changed, making it easier to identify that the change has occurred.

Gaming machine βC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine βC1 or βC2, the identification information is configured to show a form indicating the specific discrimination result by displaying a combination of multiple symbols, and the variable means varies the combination of symbols.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines βC1 and βC2, gaming machine βC3 has the effect of being able to change the combination of symbols each time a specific condition is met, thereby increasing the expectation of a specific determination result.

<Characteristic βD group>
A gaming machine βD1 has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, a bonus granting means capable of granting an advantageous bonus to a player when a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, an operation means operable by a player, and a setting means capable of varying game settings based on the operation of the operation means, and is capable of executing an effect based on the game settings that have been varied during the execution period of the effect, based on the operation of the operation means during the period when the effect is being executed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and the results of the judgment are announced by determining the content of the performance through a lottery and executing a preview performance that indicates the expected probability of the success or failure judgment before the lottery results are announced. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a problem in that the frequency at which the content of the performance mode to be executed was determined tended to be constant, reducing the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

With the gaming machine βD1, game settings can be changed by operating the operating means while the performance is being performed, and the performance can be executed based on the changed settings during the performance period, which has the effect of allowing the player to play early on in a state that corresponds to the player's desires, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine βD2 is characterized in that it has a performance setting means that can set a performance mode corresponding to multiple settings when the performance is executed in the gaming machine βD1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine βD1, gaming machine βD2 has the effect that when a performance is executed, the performance mode corresponding to multiple settings is set, so that the performance mode can be easily changed during execution of the performance.

A gaming machine βD3, which is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a special effect based on the operation means being operated during the period in which the specific effect is being executed, thereby changing the setting, in the gaming machine βD1 or βD2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines βD1 and βD2, gaming machine βD3 has the effect of making it possible to quickly identify when a specific effect will be performed by changing the settings, further increasing the interest in the game.

<Characteristic βE group>
A gaming machine βE1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the identification information is composed of a plurality of patterns, and when the patterns are displayed in a stopped state, the gaming machine βE1 has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect mode corresponding to the type of pattern that is stopped.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and as a presentation to notify the result of the judgment, multiple symbols are dynamically displayed, and then a combination of symbols showing the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a problem in that the game became monotonous and interest in the game was reduced by simply repeating the dynamic display and stopping of symbols. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in the game.

The gaming machine βE1 executes a presentation mode that corresponds to the type of stopped symbol, which has the effect of making the type of stopped symbol easier to understand and increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine βE2, in which the identification information is configured by adding an identification mode to each of the plurality of symbols in the gaming machine βE1, and the identification mode is determined and added without corresponding to the type of the symbol.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine βE1, the gaming machine βE2 has the effect of providing a wide variety of identification information, since the identification mode is added to the pattern without corresponding to the type.

A gaming machine βE3, which is characterized in that the mode for indicating the specific discrimination result in the gaming machine βE1 or βE2 is configured by displaying the identification modes in a specific combination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines βE1 and βE2, gaming machine βE3 has the effect of being able to flexibly combine and report patterns with identification modes, since a specific discrimination result is reported by a combination of identification modes regardless of the type of pattern.

<Feature βF group> (The expectation level is suggested by the operation pattern when the reserved pattern is shifted)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination made by the determination means; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; an identification pattern display means for displaying an identification pattern indicating the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means on the display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. The gaming machine βF1 is characterized in that it has a display position change means for, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means changes, changing the display position of the identification pattern to a display position corresponding to the new number of pieces of information, and an operation mode setting means for setting the operation mode of the identification pattern when the display position of the identification pattern is changed by the display position change means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine βF1, the operation mode when the display position of the identification pattern is changed can be set by the operation mode setting means, so that it is possible to execute a performance using the operation mode of the identification pattern, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine βF2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine βF1, the operation mode setting means is capable of setting a specific operation mode when the identification information corresponding to the identification pattern is the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine βF2, when the identification symbol changes its display position, it operates in a specific manner, so that the player can recognize that the identification information corresponding to the identification symbol is identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result, and therefore it is possible to make the player interested in the manner in which the identification symbol operates, which has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature βG group> (Performance in which reserved patterns other than the reserved pattern are not displayed during reach performance)
A gaming machine βG1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information when a discrimination condition is established, a display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that it has a blocking means capable of making the display means difficult to see, and a range setting means capable of setting the range within which the blocking means will make it difficult to see.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, when multiple effects are executed simultaneously, there is a risk that the effect of the effects will be reduced because the player will not know which effect to focus on. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine βG1, a range is set by the range setting means, and the range is blocked by the blocking means, making it difficult for the player to see, which has the effect of drawing the player's attention to the presentation mode being executed within the visible range.

A gaming machine βG2 is characterized in that it has a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means in the gaming machine βG1, and the performance mode display means is capable of displaying the performance mode when the information is stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine βG1, the gaming machine βG2 has the effect of being able to determine the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means based on the number of presentation modes displayed, and predicting the number of times that can be determined.

Gaming machine βG3 is characterized in that the storage means in gaming machine βG2 is capable of storing the information up to a specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine βG2, gaming machine βG3 has the effect of preventing excessively large numbers of determinations from being made by setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be stored and used for determination by the determination means.

<Feature βH Group> (Pattern Stock Reach)
In a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a display means for displaying a discrimination pattern composed of a plurality of symbol rows for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a display control means for dynamically displaying the discrimination pattern on the display means and then statically displaying the discrimination pattern in a display mode for indicating the discrimination result, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the discrimination pattern is statically displayed by the discrimination means in a static display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result, the static display mode for indicating the specific discrimination result is a static display of the plurality of symbol rows in a specific combination The display control means is configured to be capable of displaying at least two or more of the multiple pattern rows in a reach display mode in which a combination of patterns that is part of a combination for indicating the specific discrimination result is stopped or temporarily stopped, and a suggestion effect is capable of executing a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the identification pattern that is stopped and displayed in the pattern rows that are dynamically displayed while the reach display mode is displayed, and the gaming machine is capable of changing the display mode of the identification pattern that indicates the reach display mode based on the display mode of the identification pattern suggested by the suggestion effect.

In the past, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, the variable display of the pattern for indicating the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to a game state that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine βH1, it is possible to vary the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode while suggesting the stopped display mode of the dynamically displayed identification pattern by using a suggestive performance executed while the reach display mode is displayed. Therefore, depending on the content of the suggestive performance, it is possible to execute a game in which the player expects the dynamically displayed identification pattern to be stopped and displayed without changing the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode, and a game in which the player expects the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode to be changed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine βH1, the suggestive effect is characterized in that after displaying a plurality of decorative patterns having information corresponding to the display mode of the identification pattern, a predetermined number of the decorative patterns are displayed from among the plurality of displayed decorative patterns to indicate the effect result. In the gaming machine βH2,

The gaming machine βH2 can provide the player with the fun of predicting the outcome of a suggestive performance by displaying multiple decorative patterns, including decorative patterns for indicating the outcome of the suggestive performance. In addition, by grasping the information contained in the multiple decorative patterns displayed, it is possible to execute a game in which the player hopes that the dynamically displayed identification pattern will be displayed stationary without the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode being changed by the current suggestive performance, and a game in which the player hopes that the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode will be changed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine βH2, the suggestion effect is characterized in that the multiple decorative symbols are displayed in order, and the decorative symbol having information other than information corresponding to the identification symbol displayed in the reach display mode is displayed first. In the gaming machine βH3,

With the gaming machine βH3, the decorative pattern that is first displayed when the reach display mode is displayed can be a decorative pattern that has information other than the information corresponding to the identification pattern displayed in the reach display mode, which has the effect of preventing the player from mistakingly believing that an identification pattern for indicating a specific discrimination result has been displayed.

<Feature βI Group> (Screen Press Preview)
A gaming machine βI1 having a discrimination means capable of performing a discrimination, a display image creation means capable of creating a display image to indicate the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a display means capable of displaying the display image created by the display image creation means in a specified display area, and an image control means capable of variably controlling the display image created by the display image creation means, characterized in that the display image creation means is capable of creating the display image by superimposing a plurality of image layers, and the image control means is capable of variably controlling the display image on a layer-by-layer basis.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that use a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to perform a variable performance to show the result of the discrimination means, and in order to enhance the performance effect by performing a variety of variable performances, a gaming machine has been proposed that displays various display images on a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, as the number of types of variable performances increases, the amount of display data required to create the display images increases, which creates a problem of putting pressure on manufacturing costs. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the performance effect and increase the player's interest in playing by performing a variety of variable performances while suppressing the increase in the amount of display data required to create the display images. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of playing.

According to gaming machine βI1, the display image created by the display image creation means can be variably controlled in units of multiple image layers that form the display image, so that the same display image can be used to display various display modes in the display area. This has the effect of making it possible to execute a variety of variable effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of display data required to create the display image.

A gaming machine βI2 is characterized in that the image creation means in the gaming machine βI1 is capable of creating a display image of identification information to show the result of the determination by the determination means in a specific first image layer among the multiple image layers, and has a correction means capable of executing correction control to make the identification information difficult to see when the first image layer is variably controlled by the image control means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine βI1, gaming machine βI2 has the following effect. That is, when the display image of the identification information is variably controlled by the image control means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the display image of the identification information variably controlled by the correction means, which has the effect of preventing the player from misinterpreting the identification information displayed on the display means.

A gaming machine βI3, characterized in that the multiple images in the gaming machine βI2 include at least a second image layer located in front of the first image layer, the image control means executes specific variable control of the same content on the first image layer and the first image layer, and the correction means makes the display image of the identification information displayed on the first layer difficult to see by the display image displayed on the second layer when the specific variable control is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine βI2, gaming machine βI3 provides the following effects. That is, in order to make the display image showing the variably controlled identification information difficult to see, a first image layer on which the display image of the identification information is created and a display image displayed on a second image layer on which specific variable control of the same content is executed are used. Therefore, no matter what type of variable control is executed, the display image on the second image layer can be easily displayed without being misaligned with the display position of the display image of the identification information.

<Characteristic βJ group>
A gaming machine βJ1 having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine βJ1 being characterized in having a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the presentation mode displayed on the display means, and a display mode determination means capable of determining a display mode corresponding to the position at which the plurality of presentation modes are displayed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

With the gaming machine βJ1, the notification mode is arranged to make it easier for the player to recognize the variable presentation mode, which has the effect of reducing the inconvenience of overlooking the variable presentation mode and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine βJ2 in which the variable display means in the gaming machine βJ1 is capable of varying the degree of variability of the presentation mode depending on the display mode determined by the display mode determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, gaming machine βJ2 has the effect of making it easier to generate interest in the displayed display mode, since the degree of variability of the presentation mode can be varied depending on the determined display mode.

A gaming machine βJ3 is characterized in that it has a notification means capable of placing a notification pattern at the position where the presentation pattern is displayed in the gaming machine βJ2, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the presentation pattern that can be changed by placing the notification pattern when the multiple presentation patterns are displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine βJ2, gaming machine βJ3 has the effect of making it easier for players to recognize the variable presentation mode by providing a notification mode, thereby reducing the inconvenience of overlooking the variable presentation mode and increasing the interest in the game.

<Characteristic βK group>
A gaming machine βK1 having an alarm means capable of alarming a predetermined alarm mode, an operation means operable by a player, a setting means capable of setting information for varying a setting based on the operation of the operation means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect mode corresponding to the varied setting, characterized in that the gaming machine has a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus based on the information being set by the setting means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game has been won or not, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the judgment. Gaming machines have been proposed in which the game mode can be changed by operating an operating means that is provided on the gaming machine and can be operated by the player. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there has been a problem in that when the operating means is operated, it is sometimes difficult to determine whether the game mode has been changed, which reduces the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

The gaming machine βK1 provides bonuses based on the information set, so the player can operate the operating means to receive the bonus. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine K2 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination in a gaming machine βK1, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and the bonus granting means notifies the player that the result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result before the bonus game is executed.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine βK1, the gaming machine βK2 can quickly notify the player that a bonus game is being played by the bonus granting means, so that the player can operate the operating means to receive the bonus. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine βK3, characterized in that in the gaming machine βK2, the bonus granting means is capable of granting the bonus when the information is set by the setting means while the identification information showing the result of the determination by the determination means is being dynamically displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K2, gaming machine βK3 can make the player operate the operating means to receive a special bonus even during the period when the identification information is being dynamically displayed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Features of the 5073 (additional) series>
<Feature GA group> (Stuck period of button operation)
a game machine having an operation means operable by a player, a valid operation period setting means capable of setting a valid operation period during which an operation on the operation means is determined to be valid, a presentation changing means capable of gradually changing a presentation mode from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode based on the operation being executed during the valid operation period set by the valid operation period setting means, and a specific presentation execution means capable of executing a specific presentation when the presentation mode is changed to the second mode, the game machine having a state setting means capable of setting a first state and a second state in which it is more difficult to change the presentation mode than the first state as the valid operation period, the state setting means being capable of setting the second state based on the operation of the operation means when the first state is set.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko machines that are capable of executing operation effects based on the content of operations performed on the operating means (frame button 22, etc.) that can be operated by the player. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that provide an effect of decreasing the vitality value of an enemy character (hereinafter, "gauge decrease effect") as an effect of the operation effect, and execute an effect in which the vitality value of the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the gauge decrease effect when it is possible to grant a special benefit advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A).

However, in conventional gauge reduction effects, the amount of vitality that can ultimately be reduced is determined depending on whether or not a bonus can be awarded, so the player has to focus only on the degree to which the vitality value is reduced based on the operation of the operating means. If the reduction in vitality value stops midway during the gauge reduction effect, the player can easily predict that the result of this effect will be unfavorable to the player before the result is displayed, which creates a problem in that the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further increases the excitement of the game by setting a period during which the decrease in vitality value is forcibly stopped at a stage before the vitality value that can be decreased during the gauge decrease performance is reached, thereby making the player look forward to a further decrease in vitality value even if the decrease in vitality value has stopped for a predetermined period during the gauge decrease performance.

According to the gaming machine GA1, the second state can be set based on an operation on the operating means executed during the first state, so that when the presentation mode is difficult to change despite the execution of a specific operation, it is difficult for the player to predict whether the presentation mode will not change to the second state or whether the second state has simply been set. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means until the effective operation period has elapsed.

A gaming machine GA2 is characterized in that it has a state switching means that can set the first state when a release condition is met while the second state is set in the gaming machine GA1.

Gaming machine GA2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GA1. That is, even if the second state in which it is difficult to change the presentation mode is set, the first state in which it is possible to change the presentation mode is set by satisfying the release condition, making it easier to change the presentation mode. Therefore, even if the second state is set, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the desire to play and change the presentation mode to the second state.

A gaming machine GA3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine GA2, the release condition can be met based on the predetermined operation executed during the second state.

According to the gaming machine GA3, the release condition can be met by performing a specific operation during the second state, so it is possible for a player for whom the second state has been set to continue performing a specific operation on the operating means, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

<Feature GB group> (When performing long press operation, it is easier to proceed with the performance if you cancel the long press)
A gaming machine GB1 having an operation means operable by a player, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating whether a predetermined operation is being continuously performed on the operation means, a presentation variation means capable of changing a presentation mode from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode based on the determination by the operation discrimination means that the predetermined operation is being continuously performed for a specific period, and a specific presentation execution means capable of executing a specific presentation when the presentation mode is changed to the second mode, characterized in that the gaming machine GB1 has a presentation control means capable of executing presentation control that can change the presentation mode to the second mode when a predetermined condition is established while the predetermined operation is continuing for a second period shorter than the specific period.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko machines that are capable of executing operation effects based on the content of operations performed on the operating means (frame button 22, etc.) that can be operated by the player. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that provide an effect of decreasing the vitality value of an enemy character (hereinafter, "gauge decrease effect") as an effect of the operation effect, and execute an effect in which the vitality value of the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the gauge decrease effect when it is possible to grant a special benefit advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A).

In addition, a gaming machine has been proposed that has a function that allows the gauge reduction effect to progress in the same way as if the operating means were pressed repeatedly (rapid tapping), by continuously pressing the operating means (holding down the operating means).

However, in gauge reduction effects that are executed based on a long press, it is common for the effect to progress (the gauge decreases) the longer the long press is continued, which can lead to the player's method of operating the control means becoming monotonous, causing the player to become bored with the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game.

With gaming machine GB1, it is possible to change the presentation mode to the second mode before the period during which a specific operation continues reaches the specific period, making it difficult for a player who is continuously performing a specific operation to know when the specific presentation will be executed. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine GB2 is characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying the user that the performance control is being executed by the performance control means in the gaming machine GB1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine GB1, gaming machine GB2 has the following effect. That is, the notification means can notify the player that presentation control is being executed, which has the effect of allowing the player to easily understand that a predetermined condition may be met.

Gaming machine GB3 is characterized in that the predetermined condition can be met when the predetermined operation is completed in a second period that is shorter than the first period in gaming machine GB1 or GB2, rather than when the predetermined operation is continuously performed for the first period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines GB1 and GB2, gaming machine GB3 provides the following effect. That is, when a specified operation that has been continuously performed is ended, a specified condition is met, so that a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player can choose whether or not to continue the specified operation. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

A gaming machine GB3 has an effective operation period setting means capable of setting an effective operation period during which an operation on the operation means is determined to be valid, the presentation control means is capable of executing the presentation control during a first period during the effective operation period, and has a second presentation change means capable of changing the presentation mode based on the lapse of the first period.

Gaming machine GB4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GB3. That is, even if the first period during which the presentation control is executed has elapsed, the presentation mode can be changed by the second presentation change means. Therefore, even if a predetermined operation is continued while the presentation control is being executed, the presentation mode can be changed later, which has the effect of providing the player with a novel gameplay that allows the player to choose whether or not to end the continuing predetermined operation.

A gaming machine GB4, comprising: a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; and a period determination means capable of determining one period from among a plurality of periods including a normal period and a special period longer than the normal period as the first period during which the performance control is executed, the specific performance execution means being capable of executing the specific performance when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and the period determination means being more likely to determine the special period when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result than when the result is a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine GB5.

Gaming machine GB5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GB4. That is, when a special period is set as the period during which the presentation control is executed, the possibility that the judgment result of the judgment means is a specific judgment result can be increased, so that when the presentation control is executed, the player can select the timing to end the specified operation depending on whether or not he/she understands the length of the period during which the presentation control will continue. That is, for a player who wants to know the length of the period during which the presentation control is executed, the player can continue the specified operation at least until the normal period has elapsed, and after understanding that a special period is set as the current presentation control, the player can select whether or not to continue the specified operation, and for a player who does not need to know the length of the period during which the presentation control is executed, the player can select whether or not to continue the specified operation immediately after the presentation control is executed.

This has the effect of providing the player with a novel gaming experience by allowing them to choose the timing to end a specific ongoing operation.

<Feature GC group> (During rapid-fire performance, different performance control is performed depending on whether the player performs rapid-fire or long-press operation)
a signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operating means; a signal discrimination means for discriminating the signal output by the signal output means; a presentation variation means for gradually changing a presentation mode from a first mode to a final mode different from the first mode when the result of the discrimination by the signal discrimination means satisfies a predetermined execution condition; a final mode determination means for determining one mode from a plurality of modes including a second mode as the final mode; and a specific presentation execution means for executing a specific presentation when the presentation mode is changed to the second mode, wherein the presentation variation means is capable of changing the presentation mode to the final mode in different variable patterns when a first execution condition is established and when a second execution condition different from the first execution condition is established as the predetermined execution condition.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko machines that are capable of executing operation effects based on the content of operations performed on the operating means (frame button 22, etc.) that can be operated by the player. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that provide an effect of decreasing the vitality value of an enemy character (hereinafter, "gauge decrease effect") as an effect of the operation effect, and execute an effect in which the vitality value of the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the gauge decrease effect when it is possible to grant a special benefit advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A).

In addition, a gaming machine has been proposed that has a function that allows the gauge reduction effect to progress in the same way as if the operating means were pressed repeatedly (rapid tapping), by continuously pressing the operating means (holding down the operating means).

However, in conventional gaming machines, when a long press is performed on the operating means, the gauge reduction effect is generally executed in the same presentation as when a rapid-fire operation is performed. In other words, it is common for the technical idea to be able to execute a gauge reduction effect in the same presentation as when a rapid-fire operation is performed even when a long press is performed on the operating means as a means of game support for players who have difficulty executing rapid-fire operations.

In such conventional gaming machines, a player can simply perform a simple long press operation to execute a gauge reduction effect in the same presentation format as when a rapid-fire operation is performed, making it easier for the player to enjoy the gauge reduction effect. However, because the presentation format of the gauge reduction effect executed when a rapid-fire operation is performed is similar to that executed when a long press operation is performed, the player cannot enjoy being able to select the operating method for the operating means, and there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the operation presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game.

The gaming machine GC1 makes it possible to change the presentation mode to a final mode in different variable patterns depending on the type of execution condition that is met. In other words, it is possible to execute different presentations when different operations are performed on the operating means. This provides the player with the enjoyment of being able to select an operation on the operating means, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with operating the operating means.

A gaming machine GC2 has a variable mode determination means capable of determining the variable mode of the presentation mode changed by the presentation change means based on the first execution condition being satisfied in the gaming machine GC1, and a period determination means capable of determining the duration during which the second execution condition is satisfied, and the presentation change means is capable of performing a first change that changes the presentation mode to the variable mode determined by the variable mode determination means, and a second change that changes the presentation mode according to the duration determined by the period determination means.

Gaming machine GC2 provides the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machine GC1. That is, when the first execution condition is met, the presentation mode changes to a variable mode determined based on the first execution condition being met, and when the second execution condition is met, the presentation mode changes depending on the duration during which the second execution condition is met. In other words, the trigger for changing the presentation mode differs depending on the type of execution condition that is met. Thus, it is possible to change the presentation mode to different variable modes depending on the operating method of the operating means, and the timing for changing the presentation mode can also be made different. This has the effect of greatly differing the variable mode of the presentation mode depending on the type of execution condition that is met, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine GC3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine GC1 or GC2, both the first execution condition and the second execution condition can be established within one effective operation period during which the discrimination by the signal discrimination means is valid.

Gaming machine GC3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GC1 or GC2. That is, it is possible to satisfy both the first execution condition and the second execution condition during one effective operation period. In other words, during one effective operation period, it is possible to vary the type of execution condition that is satisfied by switching the operation method for the operation means. This has the effect of providing the player with a novel gameplay experience in which the operation method can be switched to another operation method while operating the operation means.

<Feature GD Group> (Forced Chance Performance Execution Control)
a first display mode determining means for determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means and a second display mode determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means when the determination value updated by the update means satisfies an execution condition, the first display mode determining means determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means and a second display mode determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means and a second display mode determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means and a second display value determining means for determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means and a second display value determining means for determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means and a second display value determining means for determining the first display mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means and a

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and after a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a notification effect that notifies the player of a suggestive manner to suggest the lottery result before the pattern is displayed stationary (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, the type of suggestion mode can be determined from a number of types including at least a first type in which the lottery result is more likely to be advantageous to the player (e.g., a win) and a second type in which the lottery result is less likely to be advantageous to the player (e.g., a win) than the first type. By determining the type of suggestion mode to be notified by lottery, it is possible to provide diversity to the notification presentation that is executed, thereby improving the presentation effect.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the type of suggestive mode is determined by lottery, so there are cases where the notification effect is not executed for a long period of time, or a specific type of suggestive mode is not determined, resulting in the problem that the player becomes bored with the game before the various effects prepared in advance are provided to the player.

In particular, the first type, which is likely to be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a win), is more difficult to determine than the second type when the lottery result is not advantageous to the player (e.g., a loss), and this causes a problem in that the player becomes bored with the game before the notification effect including the suggestive mode that determines the first type is executed.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game.

According to gaming machine GD1, when the performance value updated based on information related to the performance executed by the performance execution means satisfies the execution condition, the performance of the first performance mode can be executed regardless of the judgment result of the judgment means, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game before the performance of the first performance mode is executed.

A gaming machine GD2 in which the update means in the gaming machine GD1 varies the updated performance value depending on the type of the performance mode of the performance executed by the performance execution means.

Gaming machine GD2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GD1. That is, since the performance value updated by the update means can be made different depending on the performance mode of the performance to be executed, it is possible to make different the number of determinations by the determination means executed until the performance value satisfies the execution condition. Therefore, when a performance of the first performance mode is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the performance of the first performance mode was executed based on the first decision or the performance of the first performance mode was executed based on the second decision, so that even when the performance of the first performance mode is executed based on the second decision, it is possible to make the player more likely to expect that the determination result of the corresponding determination means is a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine GD2, the presentation mode determination means can determine, as the presentation mode of the presentation, a second presentation mode that is less likely to be selected when the discrimination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific discrimination result than when the specific discrimination result is not the specific discrimination result, and a third presentation mode that is different from the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, and the update means can update the presentation value so that the execution condition is more likely to be established when the presentation in which the second presentation mode is determined is executed than when the presentation in which the third presentation mode is determined is executed. A gaming machine GD3.

Gaming machine GD3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GD2. That is, when a performance in which the possibility of a bonus being awarded is low is executed, it is easier to execute a performance of the first performance mode based on the second decision than when a performance in which the possibility of a bonus being awarded is not executed. This has the effect of preventing only performances in which the possibility of a bonus being awarded from continuing to be executed.

In the gaming machine GD3, the update means is capable of updating the performance value so that the execution condition is more likely to be satisfied when the performance in which the second performance mode and the third performance mode are determined is executed than when the performance in which the first performance mode is determined is executed. A gaming machine GD4.

Gaming machine GD4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GD3. That is, it is easier to execute the first presentation mode based on the second decision in a short period of time when a presentation with a low probability of awarding a bonus is executed than when a presentation with a high probability of awarding a bonus is executed. This has the effect of preventing the first presentation mode from being executed too frequently.

<Feature GE group> (The super hot announcement that was missed is executed in the big win performance after the super hot miss announcement occurs)
a display means for displaying an identification information indicating a determination result other than the specific determination result, and a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means; a performance execution means for executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; a performance mode determination means for determining, as a performance mode of the performance, one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a first performance mode which is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when the specific determination result is not the specific determination result; and a storage means for storing, for a predetermined period of time, decision information indicating that the first presentation mode has been decided as the presentation mode of the performance to be executed during a period in which the identification information indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed, wherein the presentation mode determination means is capable of executing a first decision for determining the presentation mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means, and a second decision for determining the first presentation mode based on the decision information stored in the storage means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and after a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a notification effect that notifies the player of a suggestive manner to suggest the lottery result before the pattern is displayed stationary (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, the type of suggestion mode can be determined from a number of types including at least a first type in which the lottery result is more likely to be advantageous to the player (e.g., a win) and a second type in which the lottery result is less likely to be advantageous to the player (e.g., a win) than the first type. By determining the type of suggestion mode to be notified by lottery, it is possible to provide diversity to the notification presentation that is executed, thereby improving the presentation effect.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the type of suggestive mode is determined by lottery. Therefore, for example, if the lottery result is unfavorable to the player (e.g., a miss), the first type may be determined multiple times, and the notification performance including the first type of suggestive mode may appear to be a suggestive mode that is unlikely to result in a lottery result that is favorable to the player (e.g., a win).

Here, conventionally, the presentation mode of a presentation where the lottery result is likely to be advantageous to the player (e.g., a win) is generally more flashy in order to draw the player's attention than the presentation mode of a presentation where the lottery result is unlikely to be advantageous to the player (e.g., a win). Therefore, in a configuration where the type of suggestion mode is determined by lottery, there is a problem in that presentations executed in flashy presentation modes are executed continuously when the lottery result is a loss, significantly reducing the presentation effect.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by improving the presentation effects.

According to the gaming machine GE1, when a first presentation mode that is more likely to be determined for a specific discrimination result than for a non-specific discrimination result is determined as the presentation mode of a presentation executed during a period in which identification information for indicating a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed, the information is stored, and next time, when determining the presentation mode of a presentation executed during a period in which identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed, the first presentation mode is determined based on the information stored in the storage means, so that it is possible to prevent the presentation of the first presentation mode from being continuously executed as a presentation executed during a period in which identification information for indicating a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed.

This has the effect of making it easier to execute the presentation mode of the presentation executed to indicate the result of the discrimination means according to predefined rules, thereby preventing a significant decrease in the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine GE1, the presentation mode determination means is capable of executing a third decision to determine a presentation mode other than the first presentation mode when the decision information is stored in the storage means as the presentation mode of the presentation executed during a period in which identification information for indicating a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed. In the gaming machine GE2,

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine GE1, the gaming machine GE2 provides the following effects. That is, while the determination information is stored in the storage means, the first presentation mode can be made difficult to be determined as the presentation mode of the presentation executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed. In other words, the first presentation mode can be made difficult to be determined consecutively as the presentation mode of the presentation executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed. Thus, the presentation mode of the presentation executed to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means can be made easier to execute according to a predetermined rule, and when the presentation of the first presentation mode is executed consecutively, the possibility of a specific discrimination result can be increased, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the presentation mode of the presentation executed.

The gaming machine GE3 is characterized in that it has an erasing means capable of erasing the decision information stored in the storage means when the judgment by the judgment means has been performed a predetermined number of times in the gaming machine GE1 or GE2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines GE1 and GE2, gaming machine GE3 provides the following effects. That is, since the decision information stored in the storage means is erased based on the number of decisions made by the decision means, it is possible to set a limit on the period during which the second decision is made. This makes it easier to decide the presentation mode based on the first decision, and has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect by providing the player with a variety of presentations.

<Feature GF group> (Long button display with longer effective operation period than usual)
a game machine including: a determination means capable of executing a determination; a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; an operation means operable by a player; an operation determination means capable of determining that the operation means has been operated; a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which an operation on the operation means is determined to be valid by the operation determination means; a valid period informing means for informing a player of at least a portion of the valid period set by the valid period setting means; and an operation presentation executing means for executing an operation presentation to show the result of the determination by the determination means based on the operation of the operation means being determined by the operation determination means while the valid period is being notified by the valid period informing means, wherein the valid period setting means is capable of setting a first valid period and a second valid period longer than the first valid period as the valid period, and wherein it is easier to set the second valid period when the result of the determination by the determination means is the specific determination result than when the specific determination result is not the specific determination result.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines that set a certain period of validity during which operations on the operating means (frame button 22, etc.) that can be operated by the player can be effectively distinguished, and that can execute operation presentations based on the operations on the operating means executed during that valid period. When a valid period is set, a configuration has been proposed that makes it easier for the player to operate the operating means during the valid period by displaying a display mode (valid period gauge) to inform the player that the valid period has been set and the length of the set valid period (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the length of the valid period set as the period during which the operation effects can be executed is always constant, and the length of the displayed valid period is always constant, making it difficult to vary the player's willingness to operate the operating means when the valid period is displayed.

As a result, because a presentation result that is disadvantageous to the player is set as the presentation result of the operation presentation, a presentation result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed even if the player operates the operation means with enthusiasm, or, even though a presentation result that is advantageous to the player is set, the operation of the operation means is neglected and the presentation result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed, resulting in a problem in which the player becomes bored with the operation presentation.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the operation presentation and increases the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine GF1, when the result of the judgment by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, it is more likely that the second valid period will be set as the length of the valid period during which operation of the operating means is judged to be valid, and at least a portion of the set valid period is notified to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of different lengths of the set valid period, and therefore it is possible to set the player's willingness to operate the operating means to a high or low level depending on the length of the notified valid period.

Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines in which the operating means is operated with the same operating willingness each time a valid period is set, regardless of the result of the judgment by the corresponding judgment means, it is possible to vary the operating willingness to operate the operating means at a stage prior to operating the operating means, thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which a presentation result that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and therefore a presentation result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed despite the player operating the operating means with willingness, or in which the operation of the operating means is neglected despite a presentation result that is advantageous to the player being set, and therefore a presentation result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed, and thus preventing the player from becoming bored with the operation presentation.

A gaming machine GF2, characterized in that in the gaming machine GF1, there is a validity period determination means capable of determining one validity period from among a plurality of validity periods including at least the first validity period and the second validity period as the validity period, the validity period setting means is capable of setting the validity period determined by the validity period determination means, and the gaming machine GF2 has a validity period advance notification means capable of notifying information indicating the length of the validity period determined by the validity period determination means before the determined validity period is set by the validity period setting means.

Gaming machine GF2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine GF1. That is, before the valid period is set, information indicating the length of the valid period to be set by the advance notification means can be notified. Therefore, since the valid period can be set while allowing the player to predict the length of the valid period to be set this time, it becomes possible to have the player operate the operation means from the beginning of the valid period with an operating motivation that corresponds to the content of the notification by the advance notification means, which has the effect of making it easier to execute operation presentations that correspond to the player's operating motivation.

Gaming machine GF3, in which the validity period notification means in the gaming machine GF1 or GF2 is capable of executing a first notification that gradually notifies the validity period set by the validity period setting means, and a second notification that notifies the validity period set by the validity period setting means all at once.

Gaming machine GF3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines GF1 and GF2. That is, since a second notification can be executed to increase the length of the valid period notified by the valid period notification means midway, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the valid period currently set. This has the effect of making the player expect that the valid period actually set is long, making it easier for the player to operate the operation means with enthusiasm during the valid period.

<Feature GG Group> (Bond 60 Second Mission)
A storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number, a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined discrimination condition is established, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discriminating the discrimination information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the discrimination information is executed, a pre-performance execution means capable of executing a pre-performance based on the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means, and A gaming machine GG1 having a presentation mode determination means capable of determining the presentation mode of a presentation, wherein the presentation mode determination means is capable of determining a first presentation mode based on the result of the pre-determination for a plurality of the discrimination information stored in the storage means that is included in a first range, and a second presentation mode based on the result of the pre-determination for a plurality of the discrimination information that is included in a second range that is after the first range, and wherein the gaming machine is capable of including at least a portion of the plurality of discrimination information that is included in the second range in the first range when a predetermined condition is met.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines acquire lottery information based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole on the gaming board, and a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure based on the acquired lottery information. After a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed variably for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the lottery result. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and if a predetermined condition is met after the bonus game ends, a configuration has been proposed in which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be set for a predetermined period of time as the gaming state (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

A configuration has also been proposed in which a storage means is provided that can store acquired lottery information up to a predetermined number, and the lottery information stored in the storage means is pre-determined before the lottery is executed, allowing a pre-indication effect to be executed that can suggest in advance the result of the lottery to be executed.

Furthermore, a configuration has been proposed in which the results of pre-determination of multiple lottery information can be suggested in advance using a single pre-suggestion effect.

In the conventional gaming machines described above, the results of pre-determination for multiple pieces of lottery information can be suggested using one pre-suggestion effect. For example, if the results of pre-determination for multiple pieces of lottery information are all losses, the player can be notified of a loss as the result of one pre-suggestion effect. This reduces the number of times that effects notifying the player that the lottery result is a loss, compared to when the lottery result is notified of a loss every time a lottery is executed. This prevents a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced by the continuous display of results indicating that the lottery result is a loss as the result of the effects executed.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the range of the multiple lottery information included in the pre-suggestion effect is fixed, so there is a problem that a player who has been playing for a long time can easily figure out how many lottery results are displayed together when the result of the pre-suggestion effect indicates a loss.

In addition, the rate at which pre-suggested effects with results indicating a win are executed, and the rate at which pre-suggested effects with results indicating a miss are executed, are always constant, which creates the problem that it is difficult to enhance the effect of the pre-suggested effects.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by improving the presentation effects.

According to gaming machine GG1, when a predetermined condition is met, the discrimination information used to determine the first presentation mode can also be discrimination information that is normally included in the second range used to determine the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to understand the number of discrimination information used to determine the presentation mode of the first presentation mode. This has the effect of preventing the player from easily understanding the content of the game to be played later, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, if the number of discrimination information items used when determining the first presentation mode increases, it becomes easier to determine a presentation mode for indicating a pre-discrimination result that may result in a specific discrimination result as the first presentation mode, and it becomes more difficult to determine a presentation mode for indicating a pre-discrimination result that may result in a specific discrimination result as the second presentation mode. Therefore, since it becomes easier to determine different presentation modes for multiple pre-discriminations that are executed in succession, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine GG1 having a first gaming state in which the discrimination information is easy to obtain, a second gaming state which is more difficult to obtain than the first gaming state, a settable gaming state setting means, and a termination means capable of terminating the first gaming state when the number of discriminations performed by the discrimination means in the state in which the first gaming state is set meets a termination condition, and the pre-performance execution means is capable of executing the pre-performance of the first performance mode when the remaining number of discriminations until the termination condition is met in the state in which the first gaming state is set reaches a specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine GG1, gaming machine GG2 provides the following effects. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the remaining number of judgments executed during the first game state, the judgment results of which have not been suggested to the player by the advance suggestion performance, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from easily knowing the content of the game to be executed later, which would result in a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, even if a presentation mode that indicates a presentation result corresponding to a discrimination result other than a specific discrimination result is determined as the presentation mode of the pre-suggestion presentation, the pre-suggestion presentation makes it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of discriminations whose discrimination results have not been suggested to the player, thereby making the player eager to play while expecting that more discriminations will be made during the first game state.

Gaming machine GG3, characterized in that in gaming machine GG2, the pre-effect execution means is capable of executing the pre-effect of the second effect mode using the pre-determination results corresponding to the multiple determinations performed when the first gaming state is set.

Gaming machine GG3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine GG2. That is, the pre-performance of the second performance mode executed after the pre-performance of the first performance mode is also executed based on the pre-determination result corresponding to the determination executed when the first gaming state is set. In other words, when the number of remaining determinations until the end condition is satisfied when the first gaming state is set reaches a specific number, the pre-performance of the first performance mode and the pre-determination of the second performance mode are executed consecutively. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand the remaining number of determinations that can be executed when the first gaming state is set.

Gaming machine GG4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines GG1 to GG3, the predetermined condition can be established when the result of the pre-determination corresponding to the specific determination information for which the determination is performed next to the determination information included in the first range is a determination result for indicating the specific determination result.

Gaming machine GG4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines GG1 to GG3. That is, when the result of pre-discrimination corresponding to the specific discrimination information in which discrimination is performed following discrimination information included in the first range is a discrimination result for indicating a specific discrimination result, the result of pre-discrimination corresponding to the specific discrimination information can be used to determine the first presentation mode, so that it is possible to prevent the presentation period in which the pre-presentation of the first presentation mode is performed from becoming unnecessarily long, and it is possible to perform a presentation that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, compared to when the pre-performance of the second performance mode is used to notify that the discrimination information included in the second range that is first discriminated will result in a specific discrimination result, a longer performance period can be ensured from when the pre-performance is executed until the performance result is notified, which has the effect of making it easier for the player to execute a pre-performance that is easy to understand.

Any of gaming machines GG1 to GG4 includes dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on a display means, and dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display period determination means being capable of determining at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the specific determination information, and the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the first dynamic display period is determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the specific determination information.

Gaming machine GG5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines GG1 to GG4. That is, when a short dynamic display period is determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information for showing the result of the determination based on the specific determination information, the first presentation mode can be determined using the result of the pre-determination corresponding to the specific determination information, so that it is possible to prevent the presentation period during which the pre-performance of the first presentation mode is executed from becoming unnecessarily long, and it is possible to execute a presentation that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Feature GH group> (Determine the presentation mode of the jackpot presentation based on the number of payouts during the jackpot game and the presence or absence of reserved consecutive wins)
A gaming machine having: acquisition means for acquiring information; storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means; discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means; bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means; bonus type determination means for determining one bonus type from a plurality of bonus types capable of granting different bonuses as a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; and bonus effect execution means for executing a bonus effect to notify that the bonus game will be executed. The gaming machine GH1 has a pre-discrimination means capable of performing a discrimination before the discrimination means based on information stored in the memory means, and a presentation mode determination means capable of determining the presentation mode of the bonus presentation executed by the bonus presentation execution means, wherein the presentation mode determination means is capable of determining the same specific presentation mode in two cases: when the bonus game is executed in which a specific bonus type is determined, and when the bonus game is executed in which a bonus type different from the specific bonus type is determined and it is determined that the information determined by the pre-discrimination means to be the specific discrimination result is stored.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines acquire lottery information based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole on the game board, and a lottery is conducted to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss based on the acquired lottery information. After a pattern to notify the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the lottery result. If the lottery result is a win, a configuration has been proposed in which one of a number of bonus games with different degrees of advantage is executed as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

In addition, a configuration has been proposed in which the content of the bonus granted during bonus play is notified to the player after the bonus play is executed, thereby allowing the player to continue to have expectations of a more advantageous bonus being granted, compared to when the content of the bonus is notified before the bonus play is executed.

In addition, a configuration has been proposed in which a storage means is provided that can store acquired lottery information up to a predetermined number, and the lottery information stored in the storage means is pre-determined before the lottery is executed, so that, for example, during bonus play, the player can be notified that the stored lottery information includes lottery information that will result in a winning lottery.

In the conventional gaming machines described above, while a bonus game is being played, it is possible to execute effects that inform the player of the bonus that will be awarded by the bonus game being played and the possibility of a new bonus game being played. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effects being executed during the bonus game, and prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the content of the bonus granted by the bonus game currently being played and the fact that a new bonus game will be played are notified by different effects, making it easy for the player to understand the content of the game that will be played later. As a result, depending on the content of the effects played during the bonus game, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play the game may decrease once they understand the content of the effects.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine GH1, the same specific presentation mode can be determined as the presentation mode of the bonus presentation in the case where a bonus game in which a specific bonus type is determined is executed and in the case where a bonus game in which a bonus type different from the specific bonus type is determined is executed and it is determined by the pre-discrimination means that information that is determined to be a specific discrimination result has been stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player who has grasped the presentation content of the bonus presentation with the enjoyment of predicting the game content that will be executed later, and it has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the motivation of a player who has grasped the content of the bonus presentation to play the game.

Gaming machine GH2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine GH1, the bonus performance execution means is capable of executing the bonus performance during at least a portion of the period during which the bonus games are executed multiple times as the performance period.

According to the gaming machine GH2, the bonus performance can be executed across multiple bonus plays, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when the bonus performance is executed in the same presentation format in cases where a bonus play in which a specific bonus type is determined is executed and where a bonus play in which a bonus type different from the specific bonus type is executed and where the advance discrimination means determines that information that is determined to be a specific discrimination result has been stored.

The gaming machine GH3 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game ends in the gaming machine GH1 or GH2, and the gaming machine is configured such that the second game state is more likely to be set after the bonus game ends in the bonus game in which the specific bonus type is determined than in the bonus game in which a bonus type other than the specific bonus type is determined, and the bonus performance execution means is capable of executing the bonus performance of the specific performance mode when the second game state is set after the bonus game executed based on the information stored in the storage means ends when the bonus game in which the bonus type different from the specific bonus type is executed and the pre-discrimination means determines that the information determined to be the specific discrimination result is stored.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines GH1 and GH2, gaming machine GH3 provides the following effect. That is, when a bonus performance of a specific performance mode is executed in response to multiple bonus games, the second gaming state is set after the corresponding bonus game ends, so that when a bonus performance of a specific performance mode is executed, the expectation that the second gaming state will be set can be increased.

<Feature GI Group> (The order in which each performance element used in the composite performance is notified is changed according to the conditions for establishment)
A gaming machine GI1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, the gaming machine having a performance information notification means capable of notifying a plurality of performance information in sequence, the performance execution means being capable of executing a composite performance including a performance pattern corresponding to the performance information notified by the performance information notification means as the performance, and the gaming machine being capable of changing the order of the performance information notified by the performance information notification means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning or losing game is determined based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole provided on the gaming board, and after a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a winning game, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which a performance is executed to indicate the result of the lottery, allowing the player to predict the result of the lottery (prior art document: JP 2015-208557 A).

Furthermore, a configuration has been proposed that allows players to enjoy predicting the content of the upcoming performance by informing them of at least a portion of the performance information indicating the performance mode to be used in the performance before the performance is executed.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the presentation information is announced in a specific order. For example, if the presentation information announced first (first presentation information) is presentation information that allows the player to predict the lottery result more easily than the presentation information announced later (second presentation information), the player will be able to predict the lottery result too early, and the player will lose interest in the content of the presentation information announced later.

In addition, by configuring the second performance information to be performance information that makes it easier for the player to predict the lottery result than the first performance information, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the lottery result until the second performance information is announced, even if the performance information is announced in a specific order. However, in this case, there is a problem that the player will lose interest in the announcement of the first performance information, and the performance effect of announcing the performance information in order cannot be enhanced.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by improving the presentation effects.

With gaming machine GI1, the order in which multiple pieces of presentation information corresponding to the presentation modes included in the composite presentation can be changed, which has the effect of making it easier for the player to continue enjoying predicting the presentation content of the composite presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine GI2, which has a performance type determination means capable of determining one type from among a plurality of types including a first type and a second type different from the first type as the type of the composite performance, and a type notification means capable of notifying the type determined by the performance type determination means, the type notification means being capable of notifying the type determined before the performance information is notified, the gaming machine being capable of changing the order of the performance information notified by the performance information notification means according to the type of the composite performance determined by the performance type determination means, and configured so that the second performance information notified after the first performance information is more likely to determine performance information that is easier to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means than the first performance information notified earlier by the performance information notification means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine GI1, gaming machine GI2 provides the following effects. That is, the order in which the presentation information is presented can be varied depending on the type of composite presentation determined, and presentation information that makes it easier to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means is determined as the second presentation information. This has the effect of allowing a player to play the game in the hope that the discrimination result of the discrimination means will be a specific discrimination result during the period in which multiple pieces of presentation information are presented by the presentation information presentation means.

In the gaming machine GI2, the effect type determination means can determine a third type different from the first type and the second type, and the type notification means can notify the type determined after the effect information is notified when the third type is determined as the type of the composite effect, and the gaming machine is configured so that the third type is more likely to be determined as the type of the composite effect when the discrimination means determines a specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result. Gaming machine GI3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine GI2, gaming machine GI3 provides the following effects. That is, the timing of announcing the type of composite effect can be varied depending on the type of composite effect determined, making it easier to provide various effects to the player during the period until the composite effect is executed.

<Feature GJ Group> (In battle performances in which multiple battles are performed, the performance results when a specific attack pattern is performed in the final battle can be limited by the attack pattern performed before the final battle)
a game machine GJ1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, wherein the effect execution means is capable of executing at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect consecutively as the effect, and has an effect mode determination means capable of determining one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes including the first specific effect mode as the effect mode of the first specific effect, the game machine is capable of notifying the result of the discrimination based on the effect result of the second specific effect, and it is possible to make it easier for a player to predict the effect result when the second specific effect mode is determined as the effect mode of the second specific effect when the first specific effect of the first specific effect mode is executed than when the first specific effect is executed in a performance mode other than the first specific effect mode.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning or losing game is determined based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole provided on the gaming board, and after a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a winning game, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which a performance is executed to indicate the result of the lottery, allowing the player to predict the result of the lottery (prior art document: JP 2015-208557 A).

In addition, a configuration has been proposed in which the same type of presentation is executed multiple times, and the lottery result is notified to the player based on the result of the last presentation executed, thereby diversifying the presentations executed before the lottery result is notified, thereby improving the presentation effect.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although it was possible to diversify the presentation by executing the presentation multiple times, the lottery result was notified based on the result of the last presentation executed, which caused the player to lose interest in the content of the presentation executed other than the last of the multiple presentations, resulting in a reduced presentation effect.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by improving the presentation effects.

According to the gaming machine GJ1, the ease of predicting the result of the second specific performance when the second specific performance is executed in the second specific performance mode can be varied depending on the performance mode of the first specific performance, which has the effect of making the player interested in the performance content of the first specific performance and enhancing the performance effect. In addition, it has the effect of making a player who understands that the first specific performance has been executed in the first specific performance mode pay attention to the content of the performance being executed while expecting that the second specific performance will be executed in the second specific performance mode.

A gaming machine GJ2, characterized in that in the gaming machine GJ1, the presentation mode determination means is more likely to determine the first specific presentation mode when the result of the judgment by the judgment means is the specific judgment result than when the result of the judgment is other than the specific judgment result.

A gaming machine GJ2 has a performance result determination means capable of determining, as a result of the performance executed by the performance execution means, a first performance result that is advantageous to the player, a second performance result that is disadvantageous to the player, or a third performance result that is more advantageous to the player than the second performance result, and the gaming machine is capable of determining the second specific performance mode as the performance mode of the second specific performance to be executed after the execution of the first specific performance in which the first specific performance mode was determined, when a performance result other than the second performance result is determined as the performance result of the second specific performance. A gaming machine GJ3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine GJ2, gaming machine GJ3 provides the following effects. That is, when a performance result other than the second performance result that is disadvantageous to the player is determined as the performance result of the performance executed to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means, the first specific performance in the first specific performance mode and the second specific performance in the second specific performance mode can be executed consecutively, so that a player who understands that the first specific performance has been executed in the first specific performance mode can be made to pay attention to the content of the performance that is executed while expecting that the second specific performance will be executed in the second specific performance mode.

<Features of the 5075 series>
<Feature HA group> (Setting a common end condition in a specific game state while varying the continuation rate)
a first game state setting means for setting a first game state that is advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the first game state being advantageous to the player; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state that is less advantageous than the first game state based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the first game state; and a setting means for setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a first control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied is a first rate from the time the first game state is set to the time the specific condition is satisfied, and a game in which a second control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied is a second rate higher than the first rate from the time the first game state is set to the time the specific condition is satisfied.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning one. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set multiple states that are different in degree of advantage to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to provide multiple end conditions for a specific highly advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving gaming state), and different end conditions are set depending on the trigger that sets the specific gaming state, so that the degree of advantage varies depending on the set trigger, even for the same specific gaming state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the termination conditions for each set trigger must be predefined in a storage device such as a ROM, which creates the problem that the more termination conditions there are, the greater the memory capacity of the gaming machine becomes.

In response to this, the gaming machine HA1 is provided with a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition, a first game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, a second game state setting means for setting a second game state less advantageous than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first game state, and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a first control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is established is a first rate from the time the first game state is set until the specific condition is established, and a game in which a second control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is established is a second rate higher than the first rate from the time the first game state is set until the specific condition is established.

As a result, even in the same first game state, the possibility of a bonus game being executed can be made different depending on whether the first control or the second control is executed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine HA2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine HA1, the first control is configured to make the specific condition more likely to be satisfied than the second control.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine HA1, the gaming machine HA2 has the effect that the first control is configured to make the specific condition more likely to be satisfied than the second control, so that the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied can be varied depending on whether the first control or the second control is used. This has the effect of making it possible to vary the possibility that the specific execution condition is satisfied before the specific condition is satisfied.

A gaming machine HA3, which is equipped with a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition in a gaming machine HA1 or HA2, and a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the specific execution condition is configured as a condition that is established based on either the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, and the specific condition is configured as a condition that is established based on at least the number of times the first discrimination is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine HA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HA1 or HA2, it is equipped with a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the specific execution condition is configured as a condition that is established based on either the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, and the specific condition is configured as a condition that is established based on at least the number of times the first discrimination is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a predetermined specific number of times.

This has the effect of ensuring that the first determination is performed a specific number of times in the first gaming state, since the first gaming state is maintained as long as the number of times the first determination is performed is within a range that is less than the specific number of times.

A gaming machine HA3, characterized in that the first control is configured as a control that is more likely to result in a smaller number of executions of the second determination between when the first gaming state is set and when the specific number of executions of the first determination are made than when the second control is configured. A gaming machine HA4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HA3, gaming machine HA4 has the effect that the first control is configured to make it easier to execute the second judgment fewer times between when the first gaming state is set and when the specific number of first judgments are executed than the second control, so that by changing the number of times the second judgment is executed before the second gaming state is set, the rate at which a specific execution condition is actually met can be changed.

In the gaming machine HA3 or HA4, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition that is established based on the number of times the first judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming the specific number, and a second specific condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is executed and the number of times the second judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a first number that is greater than the specific number, and the first control and the second control are configured to make it easier for the first specific condition to be established before the second specific condition is established, and the first control is configured to make it easier for the first specific condition to be established in a shorter period of time than the second control. Gaming machine HA5.

According to the gaming machine HA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HA3 or HA4, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition that is established based on the number of times the first judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming the specific number, and a second specific condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is executed and the number of times the second judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a first number that is greater than the specific number, and the first control and the second control are configured to make it easier for the first specific condition to be established before the second specific condition is established, and the first control is configured to make it easier for the period required for the first specific condition to be established shorter than the second control.

This allows for novel control in which the length of time required for the first specific condition to be met is varied, thereby varying the number of times the second determination is performed and varying the rate at which the specific execution condition is met. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine HA5, comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information indicating the result of the first discrimination, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information indicating the result of the second discrimination, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means, and the first control is configured to control the first dynamic display period to be selected by the period selection means at a higher rate than the second control.

According to the gaming machine HA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HA5, the gaming machine HA6 is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information indicating the result of the first discrimination, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information indicating the result of the second discrimination, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means, and the first control is configured to control such that the rate at which the first dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means is higher than the second control.

This has the effect of making the length of the period required for the first specific condition to be satisfied different by making the tendency of the dynamic display period selected by the period selection means different between the first control and the second control.

Gaming machine HA7 is characterized in that in gaming machine HA6, the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information.

According to gaming machine HA7, in addition to the effect of gaming machine HA6, the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information, so that the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started regardless of the status of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the first discrimination can be executed reliably and efficiently.

Gaming machine HA7, characterized in that the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information. Gaming machine HA8.

According to gaming machine HA8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine HA7, the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started regardless of the status of the dynamic display of the first identification information. This has the effect of enabling the second determination to be performed reliably and efficiently.

A gaming machine HA9 is any of the gaming machines HA3 to HA8, characterized in that the second judgment is configured to be a judgment that is more advantageous than the first judgment.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines HA3 to HA8, the gaming machine HA9 has the second judgment that is more advantageous than the first judgment, so that the player can play the game with a strong expectation that the second judgment will be executed rather than the first judgment. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature HB group> (execute a performance indicating the possibility of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state of 1, and update the possibility indicated by the performance mode according to the game situation)
a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on a first predetermined setting condition being satisfied; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on a second predetermined setting condition being satisfied in the first game state; a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on a first predetermined execution condition being satisfied in the first game state; and an effect mode determination means for determining a first effect mode as an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means when a predetermined first situation is satisfied in which the specific determination result is less likely to be achieved before the second setting condition is satisfied, and determining a second effect mode when a second situation is satisfied in which the specific determination result is more likely to be achieved before the second setting condition is satisfied than the first situation.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be able to execute an exciting presentation that indicates the likelihood of a winning game being executed within a specified period of time (for example, until all reserved balls are used up), and some are configured to be able to continuously create a sense of expectation of a winning game being executed over multiple changing displays, not just by displaying the changes during execution.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is only possible to execute effects that indicate the likelihood of a winning game being executed for a relatively small number of variable displays, making it difficult to increase interest.

In response to this, the gaming machine HB1 includes a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the first game state, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first game state, and a performance mode determination means for determining a first performance mode as the performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means when a predetermined first situation occurs in which the possibility of the specific discrimination result occurring before the second setting condition occurs is low, and determining a second performance mode when a second situation occurs in which the possibility of the specific discrimination result occurring before the second setting condition occurs is higher than the first situation.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game by showing the player the possibility of a specific judgment result being reached during the first game state depending on the presentation mode of the specific presentation.

Gaming machine HB2, in which the specific performance execution means in gaming machine HB1 is configured to be able to execute the specific performance of the second performance mode based on the second situation occurring during execution of the specific performance of the first performance mode.

According to gaming machine HB2, in addition to the effect of gaming machine HB1, the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect of the second effect mode based on the fact that the second situation has occurred during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode, so that when the situation changes in the first game state, the performance mode of the specific effect can be switched according to the changed situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can accurately show the situation to the player.

Gaming machine HB3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a first performance execution means for executing a predetermined first performance during the execution of the bonus game in the gaming machine HB1 or HB2, and a performance mode determination means configured to determine, as the performance mode of the first performance executed by the first performance execution means, a third performance mode corresponding to the first performance mode when the first gaming state corresponding to the first situation is set as the gaming state after the bonus game being executed is ended, and to determine a fourth performance mode corresponding to the second performance mode when the first gaming state corresponding to the second situation is set.

The gaming machine HB3 is equipped with, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB1 or HB2, a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect during the execution of the bonus game, and an effect mode determination means configured to determine, as the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, a third effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the bonus game being executed ends, and to determine a fourth effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set.

As a result, while the bonus game is being played, the first presentation can indicate to the player the possibility of a specific judgment result being obtained in the first game state after the bonus game ends, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest while the bonus game is being played.

A gaming machine HB4, which is any one of the gaming machines HB1 to HB3, is characterized in that the second situation is configured as a situation in which the number of judgments made by the judgment means from when the first gaming state is set until the second setting condition is met without the specific judgment result being obtained is more likely to be greater than in the first situation.

According to gaming machine HB4, in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines HB1 to HB3, the second situation is configured in a situation in which the number of judgments by the judgment means executed from when the first gaming state is set until the second setting condition is met without the specific judgment result being reached is more likely than in the first situation, so that there are more opportunities to obtain a specific judgment result. Therefore, there is an effect of being able to strongly expect a specific presentation of the second presentation mode to be executed.

In the gaming machine HB4, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the second setting condition is composed of a condition that is executed based on at least the number of times the first discrimination is executed after the first game state is set becoming a specific number of times that is common to the first situation and the second situation. In the gaming machine HB5,

According to gaming machine HB5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine HB4, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the second setting condition is composed of a condition that is satisfied based on at least the number of times the first discrimination is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a specific number of times that is common to the first situation and the second situation.

This has the effect of realizing novel control that can differentiate the possibility of a specific judgment result between the first situation and the second situation, even though the second setting condition is met and the second game state is set when the first judgment is executed a specific number of times in both the first situation and the second situation.

In the gaming machine HB5, the second setting condition is at least composed of a first setting condition that is established based on the number of times the first judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming the specific number of times, and a second setting condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is executed and the number of times the second judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a predetermined second number that is greater than the specific number of times and is a number common to the first situation and the second situation. In the gaming machine HB6,

According to gaming machine HB6, in addition to the effect of gaming machine HB5, the second setting condition is at least composed of a first setting condition that is established based on the number of times the first judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming the specific number of times, and a second setting condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is executed and the number of times the second judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a predetermined second number that is greater than the specific number and is a number common to the first situation and the second situation. Therefore, even though a common setting condition that is not dependent on the first situation and the second situation is set as the second setting condition, there is an effect that a novel control that can vary the possibility of a specific judgment result depending on the situation can be realized.

A gaming machine HB7, which is equipped with a display means capable of displaying identification information in HB5 or HB6, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information indicating the result of the determination by the first determination means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information indicating the result of the determination by the second determination means, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means, and which is characterized in that the first situation is characterized in that the first dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means at a higher rate than the second situation.

According to the gaming machine HB7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB5 or HB6, the gaming machine HB7 is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means, and the first situation has a higher ratio of the first dynamic display period being selected by the period selection means than the second situation.

This has the effect of making the tendency of the dynamic display period selected by the period selection means different between the first situation and the second situation, thereby making it possible to effectively make a difference in the length of the period required until the first setting condition is satisfied, and to make a difference in the number of times that the second determination means can perform the determination until the first setting condition is satisfied.

Gaming machine HB7 is characterized in that the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information. Gaming machine HB8.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HB7, gaming machine HB8 has the advantage that the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information, so that the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started regardless of the status of the dynamic display of the second identification information. This has the effect of enabling the first determination to be executed reliably.

Gaming machine HB9 is characterized in that in gaming machine HB8, the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HB8, gaming machine HB9 has the advantage that the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started regardless of the status of the dynamic display of the first identification information. This has the effect of enabling the second determination to be performed reliably.

A gaming machine HB10, which is one of the gaming machines HB5 to HB9, is characterized in that the judgment of the second judgment means is configured to be a judgment with a higher degree of advantage than the judgment of the first judgment means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines HB5 to HB9, the gaming machine HB10 has the effect of making the judgment of the second judgment means be more advantageous than the judgment of the first judgment means, so that the player can play the game with a strong expectation that the judgment of the second judgment means will be executed rather than the judgment of the first judgment means. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature HC group> (executing a performance that encourages the player to play in a way that allows the advantageous side's reserved points to be accumulated after the advantageous state ends)
a first state setting means for setting a first state configured to make it easier to advantageously launch the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction based on a first predetermined setting condition being satisfied; a second state setting means for setting a second state configured to make it easier to advantageously launch the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction based on a second predetermined setting condition being satisfied in the first state; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect including at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to a player to launch the game ball in the first direction based on a specific execution condition being satisfied in the first state; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect including at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to a player the same game as the game suggested by the first effect for a predetermined period in the second state.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines are designed to allow players to enjoy changing their playing method depending on the game state by changing the game method (the direction in which the game ball is launched) that is advantageous to the player for each game state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is common for the game method corresponding to each game state to be announced regardless of the game situation in each game state, which creates the problem that the degree of advantage may decrease depending on the situation.

In response to this, the gaming machine HC1 is provided with a launching means configured to be able to launch the gaming ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a first state setting means for setting a first state configured to make it easier to be advantageous to launch the gaming ball in the first direction than in the second direction based on the establishment of a first predetermined setting condition, a second state setting means for setting a second state configured to make it easier to be advantageous to launch the gaming ball in the second direction than in the first direction based on the establishment of a second predetermined setting condition in the first state, a first performance execution means for executing a first performance configured to include at least a performance mode that can suggest to the player that the gaming ball should be launched in the first direction based on the establishment of a specific predetermined execution condition in the first state, and a second performance execution means for executing a second performance configured to include at least a performance mode that can suggest to the player the same game as the game suggested by the first performance for a predetermined period in the second state.

This allows for a novel presentation that suggests to the player a game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction in the second state where shooting the game ball in the second direction is more likely to be advantageous, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine HC1, the second state is configured so that while a predetermined specific condition is met, it is more likely to be advantageous to shoot the gaming ball in the first direction than in the second direction, and the second performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the second performance at least while the specific condition is met. Gaming machine HC2.

According to gaming machine HC2, in addition to the effect of gaming machine HC1, the second state is configured so that while a predetermined specific condition is met, it is more likely to be advantageous to shoot the gaming ball in the first direction than in the second direction, and the second performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the second performance at least while the specific condition is met.

As a result, in the second state where it is generally more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction, if a specific condition is met and it becomes more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction, the second presentation can suggest to the player to shoot the game ball in the first direction, which has the effect of preventing the player from incurring losses.

Gaming machine HC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine HC2, the specific condition is configured as a condition that is met based on the second set condition being met.

According to gaming machine HC3, in addition to the effect of gaming machine HC2, the specific condition is configured as a condition that is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the second set condition, so that the first and second effects can continue to suggest a gaming method of firing a gaming ball in a first direction from the start of the first state to the transition to the second state and until the specific condition is no longer satisfied. Therefore, even after the first state has ended, the player can be made to believe that the first state is continuing for longer than it actually is, which has the effect of making the player believe that the first state is continuing for longer than it actually is.

In any one of the gaming machines HC1 to HC3, a first ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter but where a gaming ball launched in the second direction has difficulty entering; a first discrimination means capable of making a first discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means; a second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter but where where a gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering; and a second discrimination means for making a second discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine HC4 that is equipped with a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on whether the first judgment or the second judgment results in a predetermined specific judgment result, and the first state is configured as a state in which the judgment of the first judgment means is more likely to be executed when the gaming ball is shot in the second direction than in the second state, and the second state is configured as a state in which the judgment of the first judgment means is more likely to be executed when the gaming ball is shot in the second direction during the specified period than in a period other than the specified period.

According to the gaming machine HC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HC1 to HC3, there is provided a first ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter and where a gaming ball launched in the second direction has difficulty entering, a first discrimination means capable of performing a first discrimination based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, a second ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter and where a gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering, and a second discrimination means capable of performing a second discrimination based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means. The game includes a second discrimination means for executing a discrimination, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on whether the first discrimination or the second discrimination results in a predetermined specific discrimination result, and the first state is configured as a state in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is more likely to be executed when the game ball is shot in the second direction than in the second state, and the second state is configured as a state in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is more likely to be executed when the game ball is shot in the second direction during the specified period than in a period other than the specified period.

This has the effect of realizing a novel gameplay characteristic in which, even in the second state where the degree of advantage is low, the first discrimination means is more likely to make a judgment for a predetermined period of time, just as in the first state.

A gaming machine HC4, characterized in that the first state is configured such that when the gaming ball continues to be shot in the first direction, the shot gaming ball enters the first ball entry means at a first rate, the second state is configured such that when the gaming ball continues to be shot in the first direction, the shot gaming ball enters the first ball entry means at a rate equal to or greater than the first rate, and the predetermined period is configured such that the period from when the first discrimination means makes a discrimination to when the discrimination result is shown is shorter than periods other than the predetermined period.

According to gaming machine HC5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine HC4, the first state is configured such that when the gaming ball continues to be shot in the first direction, the shot gaming ball enters the first ball entry means at a first rate, the second state is configured such that when the gaming ball continues to be shot in the first direction, the shot gaming ball enters the first ball entry means at a rate equal to or greater than the first rate, and the predetermined period is configured such that the period from when the first discrimination means makes a discrimination to when the discrimination result is shown is shorter than periods other than the predetermined period.

As a result, even in the second state, the game ball will enter the first ball entry means at a rate equal to or higher than the first rate, which has the effect of preventing a player who shoots a game ball in the first direction while the second performance is being executed from suffering a loss.

A gaming machine HC6, which is equipped with a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used in the first discrimination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means in the gaming machine HC4 or HC5, and a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a specific number of pieces of information until it is used in the first discrimination, and the predetermined period is at least the period from when one of the discrimination pieces is used in the first discrimination in a state in which the specific number of pieces of discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means until the discrimination result of the first discrimination using the last of the discrimination pieces in the specific number of pieces of information is displayed.

According to gaming machine HC6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine HC4 or HC5, it is equipped with a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used in the first discrimination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means, and a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a specific number of pieces of information until it is used in the first discrimination, and the specified period is at least the period from when one of the discrimination pieces is used in the first discrimination in a state where the specific number of pieces of discrimination information are stored in the discrimination information storage means until the discrimination result of the first discrimination using the last discrimination piece in the specific number of pieces of information is displayed.

This ensures that the first judgment will be executed for a specific number of pieces of information when a specified period is set, which has the effect of making the player happy when a specified period is set.

Gaming machine HC7 is characterized in that in gaming machine HC6, the predetermined period is a period that is set based on the second setting condition being met.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine HC6, gaming machine HC7 has the effect of guaranteeing the execution of the first judgment for at least a specific number of pieces of information immediately after the second state, in which the degree of advantage is low, is set, since the predetermined period is configured as a period that is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition.

Gaming machine HC8 is any one of gaming machines HC4 to HC7, characterized in that the first judgment is configured to be a judgment that is more advantageous than the second judgment.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines HC4 to HC7, the gaming machine HC8 can increase the degree of advantage in a specified period because the first judgment is configured with a judgment that is more advantageous than the second judgment. This has the effect of making the player play the game with a stronger expectation that the specified period will be set.

<Feature HD group> (In the time-saving state 1, the timing of subtracting the number of time-saving times is changed under predetermined conditions)
a first update control means for updating the counter value of the counter means at a first timing between the satisfaction of the first condition and the satisfaction of the second condition, the first update control means being configured to update the counter value of the counter means at a first timing between the satisfaction of the first condition and the satisfaction of the second condition, the second update control means being configured to update the counter value at a second timing different from the first timing, the first update control means being configured to update the counter value at a first timing between the satisfaction of the first condition and the satisfaction of the second condition, the second update control means being configured to update the counter value at a second timing different from the first timing, the second ...

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, set a specific initial value for a specific counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of time-saving modes) at a specific trigger, and perform an update process until the counter value reaches a specific value (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, a more suitable method for updating the counter value was required.

Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with multiple special symbols (e.g., a first special symbol and a second special symbol) and are configured so that the variable displays showing the lottery results for each special symbol can be executed independently of each other. In gaming machines with this specification, in order to prevent overlapping win games with different special symbols, for example, when the variable display showing one win game ends, control is employed that forcibly stops and displays the variable displays of other special symbols in a different symbol from the winning game.

However, in this gaming machine, even if the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed with a symbol other than the winning symbol, the counter value of a specified counter is updated, which causes a problem in that the player will essentially lose one lottery draw.

In response to this, the gaming machine HD1 includes a counter means capable of storing a counter value, a counter value setting means for setting a predetermined first counter value for the counter means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, an update means for updating the counter value of the counter means between the establishment of the predetermined first condition and the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and a specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the counter value of the counter means being updated to the predetermined second counter value by the update means, and the update means is configured to be able to update the counter value by either a first update control for updating the counter value at a first timing between the establishment of the first condition and the establishment of the second condition, or a second update control for updating the counter value at a second timing different from the first timing.

This allows multiple different timings to be set for updating the counter value, which has the effect of allowing the counter value to be updated more optimally.

A gaming machine HD1, comprising: a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and a gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the counter value setting means being configured to be able to set the first counter value to the counter means based on the second gaming state being set by the gaming state setting means, the first condition being established when the discrimination condition is established, the second condition being established when the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, and the specific control being configured as a control for changing the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine HD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD1, the gaming machine is provided with a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the counter value setting means is configured to be able to set the first counter value to the counter means based on the second gaming state being set by the gaming state setting means, the first condition is established when the discrimination condition is established, the second condition is established when the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, and the specific control is configured to change the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

This allows the timing of updating the counter means to be varied between the time when the discrimination condition is met and the time when the dynamic display of the identification information showing the discrimination result of the discrimination ends, so that the counter means can be suitably updated between the time when the second game state is set and the time when the game state is changed to the first game state.

A gaming machine HD3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine HD2, the first timing is established when the first condition is established, and the second timing is established when the second condition is established.

According to gaming machine HD3, in addition to the effect of gaming machine HD2, the first timing occurs when the first condition is met, and the second timing occurs when the second condition is met.

This allows the timing for updating the counter means to be set to either the timing when the discrimination condition is met or the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information ends, depending on the situation, which has the effect of allowing the counter means to be updated more appropriately.

In the gaming machine HD2 or HD3, the update means is configured to be able to update the counter means at the first timing when the remaining number of updates of the counter means until the first gaming state is changed is one, and is configured to be able to update the counter means at the second timing when the remaining number of updates of the counter means is two or more. In the gaming machine HD4,

According to gaming machine HD4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine HD2 or HD3, the update means is configured to be able to update the counter means at the first timing when the number of updates remaining for the counter means until the first gaming state is changed is one, and is configured to be able to update the counter means at the second timing when the number of updates remaining for the counter means is two or more.

This allows the final update before changing to the first gaming state to be performed at the first timing, and other updates to be performed at the second timing, resulting in the effect of more optimally updating the counter means.

A gaming machine HD5, in which the discrimination means in any one of the gaming machines HD2 to HD4 is composed of at least a first discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition and a second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, the dynamic display means is composed of at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination means and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information, and the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine HD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HD2 to HD4, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, the dynamic display means is composed of at least a first dynamic display means that dynamically displays a first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and a second dynamic display means that dynamically displays a second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to start the dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information, and the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start the dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information.

This allows the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information to be performed in parallel, which has the effect of making the discrimination by the discrimination means more efficient.

A gaming machine HD5, characterized in that the gaming machine HD6 is provided with a stop display means for stopping and displaying the first identification information with a loss identification information indicating a loss determination result different from the specific determination result, regardless of the state of the dynamic display of the first identification information, when the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information, which is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HD5, gaming machine HD6 is equipped with a stop display means for stopping and displaying the first identification information with a loss identification information indicating a loss determination result different from the specific determination result, regardless of the state of the dynamic display of the first identification information, when the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result. Therefore, even if the determination of the first determination means and the determination of the second determination means overlap and result in a specific determination result, it is possible to prevent the bonus game from being executed in duplicate.

A gaming machine HD6, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a variable means for varying between a first position through which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the entry means than the first position; and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result and the miss determination result; and the stop display means is configured to be capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information with a miss identification information for indicating the miss determination result, regardless of the state of the dynamic display of the first identification information, when the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine HD7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD6, the gaming machine is provided with an entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, a variable means capable of changing between a first position through which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the entry means than the first position, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result and the miss determination result, and the stop display means is configured to be capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information with a miss identification information for indicating the miss determination result, regardless of the state of the dynamic display of the first identification information, when the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the first determination result.

This has the effect of preventing bonus play and variable play from being executed in the same time when the specific judgment result and the first judgment result overlap.

Gaming machine HD8, which is a gaming machine HD6 or HD7, is characterized in that the update means is configured to be able to suppress the counter means from updating in the dynamic display of the first identification information that is stopped and displayed by the stop display means with the loss identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HD6 or HD7, gaming machine HD8 has the update means configured to suppress the counter means from being updated in the dynamic display of the first identification information stopped and displayed by the stop display means with the loss identification information, so that it is possible to suppress the counter means from being updated due to a useless judgment for the player that is stopped and displayed with the loss identification information. This has the effect of suppressing excessive disadvantages for the player.

<Feature HE group> (It is more likely that winning a small win after winning a win will be more advantageous than winning a small win after winning a win)
a game state setting means for setting a specific game state as a game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed; a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball; a bonus awarding means for awarding a specific bonus based on the game ball entering the ball entry means; a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means; and a second position at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming a second judgment result different from the first judgment result, wherein the specific game state is configured such that the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher when a first situation that can be established when the second judgment result is established after the first judgment result is established is established than when a second situation different from the first situation is established.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, if a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning combination, a winning combination that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some such gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning combinations with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning combination (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

Some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with a big win game in which the game state after the winning game is set to a game state corresponding to the type of winning that was won, and a small win game in which the game state after the winning game is maintained as it was when the winning game was won. However, even if a small win game is executed, the game state does not change regardless of the timing of execution, so it is relatively difficult to increase interest by executing a small win game.

In response to this, the gaming machine HE1 includes a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result, a game state setting means for setting a specific game state as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the gaming ball entering the ball entry means, a first position through which a gaming ball can enter the ball entry means, and a ball entry means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the gaming ball entering the ball entry means. The ball is moved to a second position where it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball hole, and a variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the variable means moves from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the specific game state is configured to be more advantageous when a first situation that can be established when the second determination result is established after the first determination result is established is established than when a second situation different from the first situation is established.

This has the effect of making the player strongly expect the second judgment result to occur after the first judgment result has occurred, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine HE2, characterized in that in the gaming machine HE1, the second situation is configured as a situation that can occur when the first determination result occurs after the second determination result occurs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HE1, gaming machine HE2 has the second situation which is configured as a situation that can occur when the first determination result occurs after the second determination result occurs, so that in a specific gaming state, a novel gameplay can be realized in which the degree of advantage varies depending on whether the second determination result occurs before or after the first determination result. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine HE1 or HE2, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the specific gaming state is configured such that the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher when the first discrimination means determines the first discrimination result and then the second discrimination results in the second discrimination than when the first discrimination means determines the first discrimination result and then the second discrimination does not result in the second discrimination. Gaming machine HE3.

According to the gaming machine HE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines HE1 and HE2, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means which executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means which executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the specific gaming state is configured to be more likely to be advantageous when the first discrimination means determines the first discrimination result and then the second discrimination results in the second discrimination than when the first discrimination means determines the first discrimination result and then the second discrimination does not result in the second discrimination.

This provides an innovative gaming experience that allows players to anticipate that when the first discrimination means produces a first discrimination result in a specific game state, the second discrimination means will produce a second discrimination result, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine HE3, comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, the second dynamic display means being configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the specific gaming state is configured such that the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher when dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is started during dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result than when dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is not started.

According to the gaming machine HE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HE3, the gaming machine HE4 is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous when dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is started during dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result than when dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is not started.

This provides a novel gameplay experience that allows the player to anticipate that identification information corresponding to the second discrimination result will be displayed by the dynamic display of the second identification information while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine HE4 is provided with a stop control means for controlling the display means to stop displaying the first identification information indicating a miss determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, based on the second identification information indicating the second determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, and the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the specific gaming state and a first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, and the gaming state setting means is configured to set the first gaming state to a higher setting ratio than the first gaming state when the determination of the first determination means is higher than the determination of the second determination means.

According to the gaming machine HE5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HE4, a stop control means is provided that controls the display means to stop displaying the first identification information indicating a miss determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, based on the second identification information indicating the second determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, and the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the specific gaming state and a first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, and is configured so that the gaming state setting means sets a higher setting ratio of the first gaming state when the determination of the first determination means is higher than the determination of the second determination means.

As a result, even if the first discrimination means gives the first discrimination result and there is a high possibility that the first game state with a low degree of advantage will be set, the second discrimination information indicating the second discrimination result is displayed before the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result is displayed, so that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is rewritten to a loss discrimination result instead of the first discrimination result, and it is possible to prevent a specific advantageous game state from ending and transitioning to the first game state with a low degree of advantage. Therefore, there is an effect of realizing a novel gameplay that gives the player hope that the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result will be displayed first when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means in the first game state becomes the first discrimination result.

A gaming machine HE6, which is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines HE3 to HE5, when the second determination is performed during a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result, the first determination result is suppressed.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines HE3 to HE5, gaming machine HE6 suppresses the first determination result when the second determination is performed during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result, thereby suppressing a malfunction in which the first determination result is obtained by the second determination means after the first determination result is obtained by the first determination means, resulting in the bonus game being executed in duplicate.

A gaming machine HE7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines HE4 to HE6, it is provided with a first dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the second identification information by the second dynamic display means, and the first dynamic display time setting means is configured to select a dynamic display period of a length that allows the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed multiple times as the dynamic display time corresponding to the first determination result in the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine HE7, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines HE4 to HE6, a first dynamic display time setting means is provided for setting a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the second identification information by the second dynamic display means, and the first dynamic display time setting means is configured to select a dynamic display period of a length that allows the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed multiple times as the dynamic display time corresponding to the first determination result in the specific gaming state.

This has the effect of providing multiple opportunities for the identification information corresponding to the second determination result to be statically displayed by the dynamic display of the second identification information while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed.

Gaming machine HE8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines HE1 to HE7, the specific gaming state is configured to be able to continue until the next time the bonus game is executed.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines HE1 to HE7, the gaming machine HE8 is configured so that the specific gaming state can continue until the next bonus game is executed, so that the next bonus game is essentially confirmed by entering the specific gaming state. This has the effect of allowing the player to play in the strong hope that the specific gaming state will be set.

Gaming machine HE9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines HE1 to HE8, the variable game is configured so that the game state at the time when the second determination result is reached is maintained even after the variable game ends.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines HE1 to HE8, the gaming machine HE9 has the effect of preventing a transition to another gaming state even if the second determination result is obtained in a specific gaming state, since the variable game is configured so that the gaming state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is maintained even after the variable game ends.

<Feature HF group> (The special chart of one of the two switches between an easy and difficult state depending on the number of times the special chart of the other changes)
a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition; a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on either a discrimination result of the first discrimination or a discrimination result of the second discrimination becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a display means capable of displaying at least a first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination and a second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means based on the execution of the first discrimination; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means based on the execution of a predetermined setting condition; a game state setting means for setting a predetermined specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition; and a control means capable of executing a first control in which the frequency of the dynamic display of the second identification information is more likely to be higher than the frequency of the dynamic display of the first identification information when the predetermined specific condition is established in the specific game state, and executing a second control in which the frequency of the dynamic display of the first identification information is more likely to be higher than the first control when the specific condition is not established in the specific game state.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set multiple states that are different in degree of advantage to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with multiple starting winning slots, and draw different special symbols depending on the type of starting winning slot that detects a win. In these gaming machines, the type of starting winning slot that is easier to win is different for each gaming state, which makes the degree of advantage different for each gaming state, thereby increasing interest.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the type of special symbol that is likely to be selected for each game state is fixed, which creates the problem that if the same game state continues for a long time, the game becomes monotonous.

In response to this, the gaming machine HF1 includes a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the fact that either the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result, a display means capable of displaying at least a first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination and a second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means based on the fact that the first discrimination has been executed. The game device includes a dynamic display means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means based on the execution of the second determination, a game state setting means for setting a specific predetermined game state based on the establishment of a specific predetermined setting condition, and a control means capable of executing a first control in which the frequency of the dynamic display of the second identification information is more likely to be higher than the frequency of the dynamic display of the first identification information when the specific predetermined condition is established in the specific game state, and executing a second control in which the frequency of the dynamic display of the first identification information is more likely to be higher than the first control when the specific condition is not established in the specific game state.

This allows the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information to vary depending on whether or not a specific condition is met, preventing play in a specific game state from becoming monotonous. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine HF2 is characterized in that the control means is configured to execute the first control from when the specific gaming state is set until the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed a predetermined specific number of times, and to execute the second control after the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine HF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF1, the control means is configured to execute the first control from when the specific gaming state is set until the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed a predetermined specific number of times, and to execute the second control after the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed the specific number of times, so that the first control and the second control are switched depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed after the specific gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the specific gaming state from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine HF3, characterized in that the specific setting condition in the gaming machine HF2 is composed of at least a first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the specific number of times is set to a predetermined first specific number of times when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and is set to a second specific number of times greater than the first specific number of times when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition.

According to the gaming machine HF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HF2, the specific setting condition is at least composed of a first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the specific number of times is set to a predetermined first specific number of times when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and is set to a second specific number of times greater than the first specific number of times when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition.

This has the effect of allowing the number of times the first control is executed to vary depending on the trigger for setting a specific game state, making it possible to play the game while paying attention to the trigger for setting a specific game state.

A gaming machine HF3 is provided with a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game as the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and the first setting condition is established based on the completion of the execution of the first bonus game, and the second setting condition is established based on the completion of the execution of the second bonus game. A gaming machine HF4 is characterized in that:

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine HF3, the gaming machine HF4 is provided with a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game as the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and the first setting condition is established based on the completion of the execution of the first bonus game, and the second setting condition is established based on the completion of the execution of the second bonus game.

This allows the degree of advantage in a specific game state to be set according to the type of bonus game, which has the effect of allowing players to pay more attention to the type of bonus game when playing.

A gaming machine HF5, which is any one of the gaming machines HF1 to HF4, is provided with a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the first control is configured to control in such a way that a longer dynamic display period is more easily set by the dynamic display period setting means than the second control.

According to the gaming machine HF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HF1 to HF4, a dynamic display period setting means is provided for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the first control is configured to make it easier for the dynamic display period setting means to set a longer dynamic display period than the second control.

This has the effect of increasing the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information by making it easier to select a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information while the first control is being executed.

A gaming machine HF5, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a variable means that can change between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position where it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the entry means; a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on whether the result of the first discrimination or the result of the second discrimination is a first discrimination result that is different from the specific discrimination result; and a stop display means that, when the second identification information indicating the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, stops and displays the first identification information at the first identification information indicating a miss discrimination result that is different from the specific discrimination result and the first discrimination result, regardless of the status of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine HF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF5, the gaming machine HF6 is provided with: an entry means through which the gaming ball can enter; a variable means capable of changing between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position where it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the entry means; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on whether the result of the first discrimination or the result of the second discrimination is a first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result; and a stop display means for stopping and displaying the first identification information at the first identification information indicating a miss discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result or the first discrimination result, regardless of the state of the dynamic display of the first identification information, when the second identification information indicating the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed.

As a result, when the second identification information indicating the first discrimination result is statically displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information is not displayed and the discrimination result is terminated, so that the frequency of the dynamic display of the first identification information may increase, particularly in a situation where the first control is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect of realizing novel gameplay that strongly encourages the player to hope that the discrimination result of the second discrimination will not be the first discrimination result while the first control is being executed.

A gaming machine HF7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine HF6, a first effect execution means is provided for executing a first effect during a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the first determination result when the second determination performed while the first control is being executed results in the first determination result.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF6, the gaming machine HF7 is equipped with a first performance execution means for executing a first performance during a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the first determination result when the second determination performed while the first control is being executed results in the first determination result, so that the player can understand that the first determination result has been obtained when the first performance is executed. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the first determination result has been obtained without paying attention to the variable means. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

A gaming machine HF7, characterized in that it is provided with a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance including a specific performance mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first performance during a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the failure judgment result when the second judgment executed while the first control is being executed results in the failure judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HF7, gaming machine HF8 is equipped with a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance including a specific performance mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first performance during a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the failure determination result when the second determination performed while the first control is being executed results in the failure determination result, so that when the specific performance mode is executed, it is possible to strongly anticipate that the second performance is being executed. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature HG group> (The electric support state is common, but the frequency of the advantageous special chart 2 lottery is different from each other)
a first entry means through which a game ball can enter, a first discrimination means capable of making a first discrimination based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry means, a second entry means different from the first entry means, a second discrimination means capable of making a second discrimination based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on whether a discrimination result of the first discrimination or a discrimination result of the second discrimination becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result, a first position through which a game ball can enter the second entry means, and a second position through which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position. , a displacement control means for displacing the displacement means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined displacement condition, and a state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the ease of a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means differs from the first state in terms of the ease with which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the gaming states to be set to the first state include at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the first determination means is more likely to execute determination more frequently than the first gaming state.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set multiple states that are different in degree of advantage to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with multiple starting winning slots, and draw different special symbols depending on the type of starting winning slot where a win is detected. Some of these gaming machines switch between a non-time-saving state, in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter a specific starting winning slot, and a time-saving state, in which it is easy for the gaming ball to enter a specific starting winning slot, to differentiate the types of starting winning slots that are easier to enter, thereby increasing interest.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn is fixed depending on whether the machine is in a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state, which creates the problem that if the same state continues for a long time, the game becomes monotonous.

In contrast, the gaming machine HG1 includes a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on whether the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result, a first position through which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on whether the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result, The ball is provided with a displacement means capable of displacing the ball to a second position where it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball hole, a displacement control means for displacing the displacement means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined displacement condition, and a state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the ease of the ball entering the ball hole differs from the first state in terms of the ease of the ball entering the ball hole at the second ball entry means, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. As game states to be set to the first state, at least a first game state and a second game state in which the first determination means is more likely to perform the determination more frequently than the first game state are provided.

This makes it possible to realize novel control in which the frequency of execution of the judgment by the first judgment means is variable between the first game state and the second game state, in which the ease with which the game ball will enter the second ball entry means is the same, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine HG2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine HG1, the second judgment is configured as a judgment that is more advantageous than the first judgment.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HG1, gaming machine HG2 has the effect that the frequency of execution of the first judgment, which is less advantageous, can be reduced in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state because the second judgment is configured with a judgment that is more advantageous than the first judgment.

Gaming machine HG3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine HG1 or HG2, the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result being obtained is higher than in the second gaming state.

According to gaming machine HG3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines HG1 and HG2, the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state in which the probability of the specific judgment result is higher than that of the second gaming state. In the first gaming state, the frequency of execution of the judgment by the first judgment means, which has a low degree of advantage, is relatively high, but the probability of the specific judgment result is high. In the second gaming state, the frequency of execution of the judgment by the first judgment means, which has a low degree of advantage, is relatively low, but the probability of the specific judgment result is low. Therefore, even in a gaming state set to the same first state, the gameplay can be completely reversed. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine HG4, which is any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG3, includes a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, the second dynamic display means being configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period setting means being configured to make it easier to set a longer dynamic display period in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine HG4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG3, the gaming machine HG4 is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means a second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means, the second dynamic display means being configured to be able to start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period setting means being configured to make it easier to set a longer dynamic display period in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

This has the effect of varying the dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the first identification information for each game state, thereby varying the number of times the dynamic display of the second identification information can be performed while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, and varying the frequency with which the first determination is performed.

Gaming machine HG5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second gaming state setting means for setting the second gaming state based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is performed and the number of times the second judgment is performed reaching a predetermined first number after the first gaming state is set in any one of gaming machines HG1 to HG4.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines HG1 to HG4, the gaming machine HG5 is equipped with a second gaming state setting means for setting the second gaming state based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is performed and the number of times the second judgment is performed reaching a predetermined first number after the first gaming state is set, so that a first gaming state in which the judgment of the first judgment means is performed frequently and a second gaming state in which the judgment of the first judgment means is performed less frequently are set consecutively. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine HG5 is characterized in that it is provided with a third gaming state setting means for setting a third gaming state that is set to the second state based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is performed and the number of times the second judgment is performed reaching a predetermined second number after the second gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HG5, gaming machine HG6 is provided with a third gaming state setting means for setting a third gaming state to be set to the second state based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is performed and the number of times the second judgment is performed reaching a predetermined second number after the second gaming state is set, so that the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state are set consecutively. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine HG7 is one of gaming machines HG1 to HG6, characterized in that the second state is configured to be a state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state.

According to gaming machine HG7, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines HG1 to HG6, the second state is configured to be a state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first state, so the frequency of execution of the judgment by the first judgment means can be made different between the first gaming state, in which the first state in which it is relatively easy for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the second gaming state. This has the effect of making it possible to differ the playability in a relatively advantageous gaming state.

<Feature HH Group> (Variable continuation rate in specific game states)
a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the first game state; and a setting means for setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a first control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied is a first rate from the time the first game state is set to the time the specific condition is satisfied, and a game in which a second control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied is a second rate different from the first rate from the time the first game state is set to the time the specific condition is satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set multiple states that are different in degree of advantage to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to provide multiple end conditions for a specific highly advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving gaming state), and different end conditions are set depending on the trigger that sets the specific gaming state, so that the degree of advantage varies depending on the set trigger, even for the same specific gaming state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the termination conditions for each set trigger must be predefined in a storage device such as a ROM, which creates the problem that the more termination conditions there are, the greater the memory capacity of the gaming machine becomes.

In response to this, the gaming machine HH1 is equipped with a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition, a first game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first game state, and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a first control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is established is a first rate from the time the first game state is set until the time the specific condition is established, and a game in which a second control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is established is a second rate different from the first rate from the time the first game state is set until the time the specific condition is established.

As a result, even in the same first game state, the possibility of a bonus game being executed can be made different depending on whether the first control or the second control is executed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine HH2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine HH1, the first control is configured to make the specific condition more likely to be satisfied than the second control.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HH1, gaming machine HH2 has the effect of being able to change the possibility of a specific execution condition being satisfied before the specific condition is satisfied, since the first control is configured to be a control that makes the specific condition more likely to be satisfied than the second control.

A gaming machine HH3, which is equipped with a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition in a gaming machine HH1 or HH2, and a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the specific execution condition is configured as a condition that is established based on either the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, and the specific condition is configured as a condition that is established based on at least the number of times the first discrimination is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine HH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HH1 or HH2, it is equipped with a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the specific execution condition is configured as a condition that is established based on either the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, and the specific condition is configured as a condition that is established based on at least the number of times the first discrimination is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a predetermined specific number of times.

This has the effect of ensuring that the first determination is performed a specific number of times in the first gaming state, since the first gaming state is maintained as long as the number of times the first determination is performed is within a range that is less than the specific number of times.

A gaming machine HH3, characterized in that the first control is configured as a control that is more likely to result in a smaller number of executions of the second determination between when the first gaming state is set and when the specific number of executions of the first determination are made than the second control. A gaming machine HH4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HH3, gaming machine HH4 has the effect that the first control is configured to make it easier to execute the second judgment fewer times between when the first gaming state is set and when the specific number of first judgments are executed than the second control, so that by changing the number of times the second judgment is executed before the second gaming state is set, the rate at which a specific execution condition is actually met can be changed.

In the gaming machine HH3 or HH4, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition that is established based on the number of times the first judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming the specific number, and a second specific condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is executed and the number of times the second judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a first number that is greater than the specific number, and the first control and the second control are configured to make it easier for the first specific condition to be established before the second specific condition is established, and the first control is configured to make it easier for the period required for the first specific condition to be established shorter than the second control. Gaming machine HH5.

According to gaming machine HH5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine HH3 or HH4, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition that is established based on the number of times the first judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming the specific number, and a second specific condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times the first judgment is executed and the number of times the second judgment is executed after the first gaming state is set becoming a first number that is greater than the specific number, and the first control and the second control are configured to make it easier for the first specific condition to be established before the second specific condition is established, and the first control is configured to make it easier for the period required for the first specific condition to be established to be shorter than the second control.

This allows for novel control in which the length of time required for the first specific condition to be met is varied, thereby varying the number of times the second determination is performed and varying the rate at which the specific execution condition is met. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature HI Group> (Perform a performance indicating the possibility of winning the jackpot until the end of one game state)
a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on a first predetermined setting condition being satisfied; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on a second predetermined setting condition being satisfied in the first game state; a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on a predetermined specific execution condition being satisfied in the first game state; and an effect mode determination means for determining a first effect mode when a predetermined first situation is satisfied, and determining a second effect mode when a second situation is satisfied which is more likely to result in the specific determination result than the first situation, as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be able to execute an exciting presentation that indicates the likelihood of a winning game being executed within a specified period of time (for example, until all reserved balls are used up), and some are configured to be able to continuously create a sense of expectation of a winning game being executed over multiple changing displays, not just by displaying the changes during execution.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is only possible to execute effects that indicate the likelihood of a winning game being executed for a relatively small number of variable displays, making it difficult to increase interest.

In response to this, the gaming machine HI1 includes a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the first game state, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first game state, and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a first performance mode as the performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means when a predetermined first situation occurs and determining a second performance mode when a second situation occurs which is more likely to result in the specific discrimination result than the first situation occurs.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game by showing the player the possibility of a specific judgment result being reached during the first game state depending on the presentation mode of the specific presentation.

A gaming machine HI2, characterized in that in the gaming machine HI1, the first situation is a situation in which the possibility of the specific judgment result being reached before the second set condition is met is lower than the second situation.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine HI1, the gaming machine HI2 has the effect that the first situation is less likely to result in the specific judgment result before the second set condition is met than the second situation, so that the presentation mode of the specific presentation can suggest the possibility of the specific judgment result being reached before the second set condition is met. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine HI1 or HI2, the specific performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance of the second performance mode based on the second situation occurring during the execution of the specific performance of the first performance mode. Gaming machine HI3.

According to the gaming machine HI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines HI1 and HI2, the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect of the second effect mode based on the fact that the second situation has occurred during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode, so that when the situation changes in the first gaming state, the performance mode of the specific effect can be switched according to the changed situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can accurately show the situation to the player.

A gaming machine HI4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a first performance execution means for executing a predetermined first performance during the execution of the bonus game in any one of the gaming machines HI1 to HI3, and a performance mode determination means configured to determine, as the performance mode of the first performance executed by the first performance execution means, a third performance mode corresponding to the first performance mode when the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the bonus game being executed is ended, and to determine a fourth performance mode corresponding to the second performance mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set.

The gaming machine HI4 is equipped with a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect during the execution of the bonus game, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines HI1 to HI3, and an effect mode determination means configured to determine, as the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, a third effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the bonus game being executed ends, and a fourth effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set.

As a result, while the bonus game is being played, the first presentation can indicate to the player the possibility of a specific judgment result being obtained in the first game state after the bonus game ends, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest while the bonus game is being played.

A gaming machine HI5, in any one of the gaming machines HI1 to HI4, is characterized in that the second situation is configured as a situation in which the number of judgments made by the judgment means from when the first gaming state is set until the second setting condition is met without the specific judgment result being obtained is more likely to be greater than in the first situation.

According to gaming machine HI5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines HI1 to HI4, the second situation is configured in a situation in which the number of judgments by the judgment means executed from when the first gaming state is set until the second setting condition is met without the specific judgment result being reached is more likely than in the first situation, so that in the second situation, the number of judgments by the judgment means is more than in the first situation, and therefore there are more opportunities for a specific judgment result to be reached. Therefore, there is an effect of being able to strongly anticipate the execution of a specific presentation of the second presentation mode.

<Feature HJ Group> (execute a performance that encourages the player to play in a way that allows the advantageous side's reserved points to be accumulated after the advantageous state ends)
a first state setting means for setting a first state in which a degree of advantage is more likely to be obtained by launching the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction based on a first predetermined setting condition being satisfied; a second state setting means for setting a second state in which a degree of advantage is more likely to be obtained by launching the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction based on a second setting condition being satisfied that is different from the first setting condition being satisfied; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect including at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to a player that the game ball be launched in the first direction based on a specific execution condition being satisfied in the first state; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect including at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to a player the same game as that suggested by the first effect for a predetermined period in the second state.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines are designed to allow players to enjoy changing their playing method depending on the game state by changing the game method (the direction in which the game ball is launched) that is advantageous to the player for each game state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is common for the game method corresponding to each game state to be announced regardless of the game situation in each game state, which creates the problem that the degree of advantage may decrease depending on the situation.

In response to this, the gaming machine HJ1 includes a launching means configured to be able to launch a gaming ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a first state setting means for setting a first state configured to make it easier to be advantageous to launch the gaming ball in the first direction than in the second direction based on the establishment of a first predetermined setting condition, a second state setting means for setting a second state configured to make it easier to be advantageous to launch the gaming ball in the first direction than in the first state based on the establishment of a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, a first performance execution means for executing a first performance configured to include at least a performance mode that can suggest to the player that the gaming ball should be launched in the first direction based on the establishment of a specific execution condition that is predetermined in the first state, and a second performance execution means for executing a second performance configured to include at least a performance mode that can suggest to the player the same game as the game suggested by the first performance for a predetermined period in the second state.

This allows for a novel presentation that suggests to the player a game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction in the second state, where shooting the game ball in the first direction does not provide as much advantage as in the first state, and has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine HJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine HJ1, the second set condition is a condition that can be met in the first state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine HJ1, gaming machine HJ2 has the effect that the second setting condition can be satisfied in the first state, so that even after the second condition is satisfied in the first state and the second state is set, the same game as the game suggested by the first presentation can be suggested. This makes it seem as if the first state is continuing. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine HJ1 or HJ2, the second state is configured so that while a predetermined specific condition is met, it is more likely to be advantageous to shoot the gaming ball in the first direction than in the second direction, and the second performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the second performance at least while the specific condition is met. Gaming machine HJ3.

According to gaming machine HJ3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine HJ1 or HJ2, the second state is configured so that while a predetermined specific condition is met, it is more likely to be advantageous to launch the gaming ball in the first direction than in the second direction, and the second performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the second performance at least while the specific condition is met.

As a result, in the second state where it is generally more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction, if a specific condition is met and it becomes more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction, the second presentation can suggest to the player to shoot the game ball in the first direction, which has the effect of preventing the player from incurring losses.

Gaming machine HJ4 is characterized in that in gaming machine HJ3, the specific condition is configured as a condition that is met based on the second set condition being met.

According to gaming machine HJ4, in addition to the effect of gaming machine HJ3, the specific condition is configured as a condition that is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the second set condition, so that the first and second effects can continue to suggest a gaming method of firing a gaming ball in a first direction from the start of the first state to the transition to the second state and until the specific condition is no longer satisfied. Therefore, even after the first state has ended, the player can be made to believe that the first state is continuing for longer than it actually is, which has the effect of making the player believe that the first state is continuing for longer than it actually is.

In any one of the gaming machines HJ1 to HJ4, a first ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter but where a gaming ball launched in the second direction has difficulty entering; a first discrimination means capable of making a first discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means; a second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter but where where a gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering; and a second discrimination means for making a second discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means. A bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on whether the first or second judgment is a predetermined specific judgment result, and the first state is configured as a state in which the judgment of the first judgment means is more likely to be executed when the game ball is shot in the second direction than in the second state, and the second state is configured as a state in which the judgment of the first judgment means is more likely to be executed when the game ball is shot in the second direction during the specified period than in a period other than the specified period.

According to the gaming machine HJ5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines HJ1 to HJ4, the gaming machine HJ5 has a first ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter and where a gaming ball launched in the second direction has difficulty entering, a first judgment means capable of performing a first judgment based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, a second ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter and where a gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering, and a second judgment means capable of performing a second judgment based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means. The game includes a second discrimination means for executing a discrimination, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on whether the first discrimination or the second discrimination results in a predetermined specific discrimination result, and the first state is configured as a state in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is more likely to be executed when the game ball is shot in the second direction than in the second state, and the second state is configured as a state in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is more likely to be executed when the game ball is shot in the second direction during the specified period than in a period other than the specified period.

This has the effect of realizing a novel gameplay characteristic in which, even in the second state where the degree of advantage is low, the first discrimination means is more likely to make a judgment for a predetermined period of time, just as in the first state.

<5076 Series>
<Characteristics Group IA>
A gaming machine IA1 has a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance that changes the performance mode, and a determination means capable of determining the number of times the performance mode can be changed with the variable performance, and the gaming machine has an additional performance execution means capable of executing an additional performance to change the performance mode in a specific manner.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko machines that can execute periodic effects that change the presentation mode in stages by executing multiple operation presentations that change the presentation mode based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that the player can operate. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, as the presentation result of the periodic effect, when the presentation mode is changed to a specific stage, a beneficial bonus is given to the player (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A). However, in conventional gaming machines, only the presentation result of the periodic effect is determined in advance, and the presentation result of each operation presentation is not determined in advance, so that the presentation mode is changed to a stage corresponding to the presentation result of the periodic effect without using all of the multiple operation presentations executed during the periodic effect, resulting in a problem of a decrease in the presentation result of the periodic effect. In addition, a gaming machine has been proposed that is configured to determine the presentation result of each operation presentation in advance, and to change the presentation mode to a stage corresponding to the predetermined presentation result at the end of each operation presentation, regardless of the operation content of the operation means during each operation presentation. However, in such a gaming machine, regardless of the operation contents of the operation means during the operation performance, a predetermined performance result is displayed as the performance result of the operation performance, which reduces the player's motivation to operate the operation means. Furthermore, since a predetermined performance result is always displayed for each operation performance, in order to execute a period performance with a wide variety of performance modes, it is necessary to prepare performance data for period performances with different performance results for each operation performance in advance, which increases the amount of performance data required to execute the period performance. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that increases the player's motivation to operate the operation means during the operation performance and improves the player's interest in the game by configuring each operation performance to be executed with a different performance result depending on the operation contents of the operation means in each operation performance executed in the period performance. In addition, it aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the player's interest in the game by configuring it to be possible to execute period performances with a wider variety than the types of performance modes of the period performances that are predetermined, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the period performance.

According to gaming machine IA1, even after the variable presentation has been performed a set number of times, an additional presentation is performed to change the presentation mode in a specific manner, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by changing the presentation beyond the set number of times.

A gaming machine IA1, characterized in that it is configured to include an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on a display means an identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, a bonus granting means capable of granting an advantageous bonus to a player when the identification information is statically displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating a specific determination result, and when the determination means determines that a specific determination result has been obtained based on information stored in the storage means before the determination is executed by the determination means, the presentation mode can be changed to a predetermined notification mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IA1, gaming machine IA2 has the effect of making the player interested in changing the presentation mode, since the presentation mode can be changed to a notification mode, allowing the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained.

A gaming machine IA3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine IA1 or IA2, it has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the presentation mode can be changed based on the operation of the operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines IA1 and IA2, gaming machine IA3 can be changed depending on the timing of the player's operation, which has the effect of making the player feel as if the content of the notification is variable depending on the player's operation.

A gaming machine IA4, in which the variation of the presentation mode is executed in multiple stages in any one of the gaming machines IA1 to IA3, and the additional presentation execution means executes the additional presentation based on the determined number of times and information on the timing of the multiple stages of variation after the variation of the presentation for the number of times has ended.

According to gaming machine IA4, in any of gaming machines IA1 to IA3, additional effects are executed based on the number of times and information on the multiple stages of variable timing, which has the effect of enabling additional effects to be executed in response to changes in the presentation mode.

<Characteristics Group IB>
A gaming machine IB1 has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, an effect type determination means capable of determining the type of the effect executed by the effect execution means, an effect type transition means capable of transitioning the type of the effect to a different type based on the establishment of a transition condition, and a state setting means capable of setting a first state and a second state in which the transition condition is more difficult to establish than the first state, wherein, when the second state is set, the gaming machine is capable of establishing the transition condition when a granting condition is established that can grant a player a beneficial benefit.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed that are configured to switch between multiple presentation stages, and that can prevent the presentation from becoming monotonous by determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the jackpot lottery in accordance with the set presentation stage (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A). In addition, a gaming machine has been proposed that is configured to automatically switch the presentation stage when the transition condition of the presentation stage is met by executing the jackpot lottery a predetermined number of times, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early. However, in conventional gaming machines in which the presentation stage is automatically switched, the presentation stage is switched regardless of the player's will, and there was a problem that when the presentation stage that matches the player's taste is switched to a presentation stage that does not match the player's taste, the player's motivation to play is significantly reduced. Furthermore, if the game was configured so that the player could set the presentation stage at will, there would be cases where the player would play only at a specific presentation stage without experiencing all the presentation stages, and the game would not be able to fully provide the player with the presentation content that the gaming machine already has. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and by configuring the game to be switchable to another presentation stage even when the presentation stage is fixed so that the player's motivation to play is not reduced, the game aims to improve the player's interest in playing by providing the player with a variety of presentations while preventing the player's motivation from decreasing.

According to gaming machine IB1, the state setting means can vary the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied when the second state in which the transition condition is difficult to satisfy is set, a bonus is awarded, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine IB1, comprising: an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number; a discrimination means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means; a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result; and a transition condition setting means for setting the transition condition, wherein the transition condition setting means is capable of setting at least a first transition condition that is established when the number of discriminations performed by the discrimination means reaches a specific number; and a subsequent performance execution means for executing a transition suggestion performance to indicate that the first transition condition may be established before the first transition condition is established based on the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IB1, gaming machine IB2 has the following effect. That is, since the transition suggestion effect can be executed before the first transition condition is met, it has the effect of making it easier for the player to predict the timing when the transition condition will be met.

Gaming machine IB3 is characterized in that it has an operating means operable by a player in gaming machine IB1 or IB2, and the state setting means is capable of setting the second state based on an operation on the operating means.

Gaming machine IB3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine IB1 or IB2. That is, since the player can set the second state at any timing, it has the effect of making it easier for the player to select and execute a game in which it is possible to check whether or not the transition condition is met with the second state set.

In gaming machine IB3, when the second state is set while the transition suggestion presentation is being executed, if the result of the judgment by the judgment means for which the first transition condition is satisfied is the specific judgment result, the first transition condition is satisfied, and if the result of the judgment is not the specific judgment result, the first transition condition is not satisfied. Gaming machine IB4.

Gaming machine IB4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine IB3. That is, when the second state is set while a transition suggestion effect is being executed, the first transition condition is met and the type of effect can be changed only when the discrimination result of the target discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. That is, even when the second state is set, the transition suggestion effect can be executed as is, which has the effect of reducing the processing load for controlling the executed effect.

<Feature IC group>
A gaming machine IC1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine IC1 having a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect to show predetermined game information, the specific effect being more easily executed when a specific condition is met than when the specific condition is not met.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko machines that, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and a winning game is executed if the lottery result indicates a winning game. A gaming machine has been proposed that is configured to reserve and store up to a predetermined number of execution rights for executing the lottery to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and that, if the execution rights reserved and stored during a winning game include an execution right that may result in a winning game, a consecutive winning effect is executed that notifies the player of the next winning game in advance using the winning game effect executed during the winning game (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, if a consecutive win effect is executed with a high probability when an execution right that can result in a win is reserved during a winning game, there is a high possibility that the reserved execution rights will not include an execution right that can result in a win when the consecutive win effect is not executed during a winning game. As in the above example, there is a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreases when the likelihood of the effect being executed is always the same. The objective is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing.

With gaming machine IC1, the fulfillment of certain conditions makes it easier for certain effects to be executed, so it is possible to vary the frequency with which game information is notified to the player, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine IC2, which is characterized in that it has a pre-determination means capable of performing a pre-determination based on information stored in the storage means before the determination is performed by the determination means, the specific performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance when the pre-determination means determines that the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored, and the specific condition is established by the execution of the specific performance.

In addition to the effects of the IC1 gaming machine, the IC2 gaming machine has the effect of fulfilling a specific condition by executing a specific effect, so that executing a specific effect once makes it easier for subsequent specific effects to be executed in succession, allowing the player to enjoy successive specific effects.

A gaming machine IC3 that is capable of setting the period during which the bonus game is being played based on the result of the determination using the information that triggered the execution of the specific performance in the gaming machine IC1 or IC2.

Gaming machine IC3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines C1 and C2. That is, since it is possible to set the execution period of the bonus game that has been notified in advance by the special effect, once a special effect has been executed, it is easy to execute the special effect consecutively. This has the effect of making players eager to execute the special effects consecutively.

Any of gaming machines IC1 to IC3 has a bonus performance execution means capable of executing a bonus performance to indicate the content of the bonus game being executed using the period during which the bonus game is being executed, and a performance mode determination means capable of determining the performance mode of the bonus performance executed by the bonus performance execution means, and the performance mode determination means is capable of determining a performance mode that inherits the content of the bonus game executed previously when the specific performance is executed consecutively. Gaming machine IC4 is characterized in that it has the following features.

Gaming machine IC4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines IC1 to IC3. That is, when specific effects are executed consecutively, the content of the bonus effect can be determined across multiple bonus games, which has the effect of making the player more motivated to play in order to execute specific effects consecutively.

In the gaming machine IC4, the bonus game execution means can execute either a first bonus game or a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game as the bonus game, and the gaming machine IC5 has a special effect execution means that can execute a special effect when the content of the bonus effect executed by the bonus effect execution means becomes more advantageous to the player than the content of the bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the second bonus game.

Gaming machine IC5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine IC4. That is, when specific effects are executed consecutively, and the content of the bonus effect obtained by accumulating the content of multiple bonus games becomes more advantageous to the player than the content of a single second bonus game, a special effect is executed, so that the player is motivated to play in order to have the special effect executed.

<Feature ID group>
A gaming machine ID1 has a specific area into which a gaming ball can enter, a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus based on the gaming ball entering the specific area, and a notification execution means capable of executing a guide notification for launching the gaming ball into an area into which the gaming ball can enter the specific area, wherein the gaming machine is capable of varying the period until the next performance is started after the guide notification is executed.

In the past, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a pattern for notifying the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, the variable display of the pattern for indicating the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the gaming state to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the entertainment value of the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

With gaming machine ID1, the period from when the information notification is executed to when the next performance starts can be varied, which has the effect of making the information notification be executed at the optimal period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine ID1, the next effect is an effect to indicate that a gaming ball has entered the specific area, and gaming machine ID2 is characterized in that the execution of the next effect is restricted even if the gaming ball has entered the specific area until a first period has elapsed since the announcement was made.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine ID1, gaming machine ID2 has the effect of preventing the end of the information announcement before the player is able to understand its contents, since the information announcement will not end during the first period even if the gaming ball enters the specific area immediately after the announcement is made.

In gaming machine ID2, when the first period has elapsed since the announcement was made, gaming machine ID3 is characterized in that the announcement is terminated based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered the specific area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine ID2, gaming machine ID3 has the effect of preventing the announcement from being given to the player for an unnecessarily long period of time because the announcement ends when the first period has elapsed and the announcement is based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the specific area.

Gaming machine ID4 is characterized in that it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect using the remaining period from when the gaming ball enters the specific area until the first period has elapsed, in accordance with gaming machine ID2 or ID3.

Gaming machine ID4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine ID2 or ID3. That is, it has the effect of making the player more interested in the game because it can motivate the player to play a game in which the gaming ball enters a specific area in order to execute a specific performance.

<Feature IE group>
a dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which different dynamic display periods are predefined as dynamic display periods for the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a dynamic display period group determination means for determining one of the dynamic display period groups stored in the dynamic display period group storage means; and a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the identification information using the dynamic display period group determined by the dynamic display period group determination means, wherein the dynamic display period group determination means is capable of determining a dynamic display period group different from the currently determined dynamic display period group when a transition condition is established based on information related to the determination executed by the determination means, and the dynamic display period group has information indicating the dynamic display period group to be transitioned to predefined.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that are configured to determine different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the results of special symbol lotteries, so that the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is made different depending on the game state, and to encourage players to play with the aim of setting a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is large. There is a gaming machine that is configured to determine different variation patterns (variation times) based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of a jackpot game, so that a player who plays for a long time in the same game state can play an uninteresting game (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). Specifically, there is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set different variation patterns (variation times) by switching the variation pattern table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern every time the special symbol variations are executed 100 times when the normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game. According to the conventional gaming machine configured in this way, even if the same game state continues for a long time, completely different variation patterns can be set according to the number of times the special symbol variation is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. However, as the prescribed contents (variation pattern selection scenario) for switching the variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol variation is performed, it is necessary to prescribe data corresponding to the huge number of times the special symbol variation is performed, and there is a risk that the processing load of the gaming machine will increase. In addition, if the number of times the special symbol variation is performed and the referenced variation pattern table are completely associated, it becomes easy for the player to predict which variation pattern will be easily selected at what timing, so it is desirable to diversify the combination of the number of times the special symbol variation is performed and the referenced variation pattern table, making it difficult for the player to predict which variation pattern will be easily selected at what timing. However, when such a configuration is used, the prescribed contents of the variation pattern selection scenario become more diverse, and there is a risk that the processing load of the gaming machine will increase. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to determine a variation pattern by referencing different variation pattern tables based on the number of times a special pattern variation has been performed, without increasing the processing load of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine IE1, if a transition condition is met based on a judgment performed when one dynamic display period group has been determined by the dynamic display period group determination, a transition to a predefined dynamic display period group can be made, which has the effect of preventing an increase in the processing load of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine IE2, characterized in that, in the gaming machine IE1, for at least two of the dynamic display period groups stored in the dynamic display period group storage means, information indicating the same dynamic display period group as the destination dynamic display period group is predefined.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IE1, gaming machine IE2 provides the following effects. That is, even if different dynamic display period groups have been determined, if the transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the same dynamic display period group, making it possible to switch between dynamic display period groups in various combinations. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine IE3, in which at least one of the dynamic display period groups stored in the dynamic display period group storage means in the gaming machine IE1 or IE2 has a plurality of the transition conditions.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines IE1 and IE2, gaming machine IE3 has the following effect. That is, by providing multiple transition conditions for the dynamic display period group, it becomes possible to switch between dynamic display period groups under various conditions, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine IE4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine IE3, it is possible to transition to a different dynamic display period group depending on the transition condition that is met.

The gaming machine IE4 transitions to a different dynamic display period group depending on which transition condition is met, so the player can be interested in which transition condition is met. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic IF group>
In a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information showing a result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means on a display means, a dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a storage means capable of storing the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit to a player when the identification information showing a specific result of the discrimination is stopped and displayed on the display means, the present invention provides a method for determining a dynamic display period based on a result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means, comprising: and a secondary dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a secondary dynamic display period different from the primary dynamic display period based on a result of the determination by the determination means, wherein the dynamic display period determination means is capable of determining a total dynamic display period obtained by adding together the primary dynamic display period and the secondary dynamic display period as the dynamic display period, and wherein the gaming machine stores information indicating the total dynamic display period in the storage means when the total dynamic display period is shorter than a first period, and stores post-processing information obtained by applying special processing to the information indicating the total dynamic display period in the storage means when the total dynamic display period is equal to or longer than the first period.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that are configured to determine different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) based on the set game state and the results of special symbol lotteries, thereby varying the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time depending on the game state, and encourage players to play with enthusiasm, aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is large. There is a gaming machine that is configured to determine different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) based on the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of a jackpot game, so that a player who plays for a long time in the same game state can play an uninteresting game (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). In such conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is configured to determine multiple pieces of information related to the fluctuation time in order to be able to determine various fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times), and to determine the fluctuation pattern by adding up the fluctuation times included in the multiple pieces of information determined. In such gaming machines, various variation patterns can be determined by combining multiple variation times, making it possible to play games that the player will not tire of. However, for example, if long variation times are determined as multiple variation times to be combined, a long variation pattern will be determined as the combined variation pattern. This means that a large data area must be secured to store information about the variation time corresponding to the longest variation pattern, which creates a problem of straining the data area of the gaming machine. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the data area of the gaming machine from being strained.

According to the gaming machine IF1, when the length of the dynamic display period after addition is equal to or longer than the first period, the post-processing information in which special processing has been performed on the information indicating the length of the dynamic display period can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, even when the dynamic display period is determined to be equal to or longer than the first period, it is possible to simplify the information to be stored in the storage means. This has the effect of preventing the problem of the data area of the gaming machine being overloaded.

A gaming machine IF2, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine IF1, there is a second storage means capable of storing excess information for indicating that the combined dynamic display period has exceeded the first period, and the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information based on the processing information stored in the storage means and the excess information stored in the second storage means when the combined dynamic display period has exceeded the first period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IF1, gaming machine IF2 provides the following effects. That is, since identification information can be dynamically displayed based on excess information indicating that the combined dynamic display period has exceeded the first period and processing information, it is possible to reliably dynamically display identification information in accordance with the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means.

In the gaming machine IF1 or IF2, the special process is characterized in that the gaming machine IF3 calculates a subtraction value by subtracting the first period from the total dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines IF1 and IF2, gaming machine IF3 has the following effect. That is, because the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the first period from the total dynamic display period is stored in the storage means, it is possible to prevent information indicating a period longer than the first period from being stored in the storage means.

A gaming machine IF3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that the upper limit of the period that can be calculated as the combined dynamic display period does not exceed twice the first period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IF3, gaming machine IF4 provides the following effect. That is, since the total dynamic display period is shorter than twice the first period, the total dynamic display period can be accurately reproduced simply by storing in the second storage means only the excess information indicating that the total dynamic display period has exceeded the first period.

Gaming machine IF5 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines IF1 to IF4, the active dynamic display periods determined by the active dynamic display period determination means are all shorter than the first period.

Gaming machine IF5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines IF1 to IF4. That is, since a dynamic display period longer than the first period is not set only in the active dynamic display period, the frequency with which special processing is executed can be suppressed.

<Characteristic IG group>
a discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means, the discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means, the discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means, the discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means, the discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means, the discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means, the discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means, the discrimination information display means for displaying a first pattern corresponding to the number of the discrimination information stored in the storage means in a predetermined dynamic manner on a display means,

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed that acquire lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole provided on the game board, and that the acquired lottery information can be stored up to a predetermined number, and a winning or losing game is determined based on the stored lottery information, and after a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed variably for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the lottery result, and if the lottery result is a winning game, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Also, a configuration has been proposed that can display reserved patterns to notify the player of the number of stored lottery information (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there was a problem that the display mode of reserved patterns to notify the player of the number of stored lottery information was monotonous, and the presentation effect could not be enhanced. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the presentation effect by using reserved patterns.

According to gaming machine IG1, the dynamic behavior of the first symbol after the transition condition is met can be varied depending on the timing of the transition condition being met and the timing of the display of the dynamic behavior of the first symbol, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation using the dynamic behavior of the first symbol.

A gaming machine IG1, which has a pre-discrimination means for pre-discriminating the discrimination information stored in the storage means before the discrimination information is used for the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a dynamic mode determination means for determining the dynamic mode of the first symbol based on the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means, the dynamic mode determination means being capable of determining a first dynamic mode that is easier to determine when the pre-discrimination means determines that the discrimination information resulting in the specific discrimination result is stored than when the pre-discrimination means determines that the discrimination information resulting in the specific discrimination result is not stored, and the gaming machine is capable of displaying the first symbol in the special dynamic mode when the transition condition is met while the first symbol is displayed in the first dynamic mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IG1, gaming machine IG2 provides the following effects. That is, when the first symbol is displayed in the special dynamic mode, the possibility of a bonus game being executed can be increased, so that the player can play the game while hoping that the first symbol will be displayed in the special dynamic mode. This has the effect of making the player more interested in the timing at which the transition condition is met.

In the gaming machine IG2, the first dynamic mode dynamically displays the first symbol in a dynamic display period including at least a first period during which the first symbol is dynamically displayed in one display mode, and a second period that is a period after the first period during which the first symbol is changed to another display mode different from the first display mode, and the discrimination information number notifying means is capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol in different dynamic modes when the transition condition is satisfied in the first period and when the transition condition is satisfied in the second period. Gaming machine IG3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IG2, gaming machine IG3 has the following effect. That is, the dynamic mode after the transition condition is met can be changed depending on the progress of the period during which the first symbol is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic mode, which has the effect of making the player more interested in the timing at which the transition condition is met.

In the gaming machine IG3, the second period is set to be shorter than the first period, and the dynamic mode determination means is more likely to determine a special first dynamic mode that is more likely to be determined when the transition condition is satisfied in the second period than when the transition condition is satisfied in the first period, when the advance discrimination means determines that the discrimination information that results in the specific discrimination result is stored as the dynamic mode of the first symbol, than when the advance discrimination means determines that the discrimination information that results in the specific discrimination result is not stored. Gaming machine IG4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IG3, gaming machine IG4 has the following effect. That is, when the transition condition is met during the short second period, the special first dynamic mode is more likely to be determined, which has the effect of making the player more interested in the timing at which the transition condition is met.

<Characteristic IH group>
a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means and then statically displaying the identification pattern in a display mode for indicating the discrimination result; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification pattern is statically displayed by the identification means in a static display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result, the identification pattern is formed by combining a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern, and the display control means is capable of executing a first display control for the first pattern and a first display control for the second pattern differently.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball into a starting hole on the gaming board, a winning or losing game is drawn, and after a pattern for notifying the result of the drawing is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the result of the drawing, and if a drawing result indicating a loss is announced, the variable display of the pattern for indicating the next result of the drawing is started. If the result of the drawing is a winning game, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed in which the gaming state can be changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, in conventional gaming machines, the pattern displayed tends to be monotonous, causing players to quickly become bored with the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can display designs in a variety of ways, preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine IH1, the discrimination result of the discrimination means can be displayed using a discrimination pattern formed by combining the first and second patterns, and the display control means can execute separate display control for the first and second patterns, so that the discrimination pattern displayed on the display means can be displayed in a variety of display modes, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine IH2, in which the display control means in the gaming machine IH1 is capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol by the second display control at a timing delayed from the timing at which the first symbol is dynamically displayed by the first display control.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IH1, gaming machine IH2 provides the following effects. That is, since the timing at which the second symbol, of the first symbol and the second symbol that form the identification symbol, is dynamically displayed can be delayed, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine IH3, characterized in that in gaming machine IH1 or IH2, the display control means is capable of executing normal first display control and specific first display control as the first display control, and is capable of executing normal second display control and specific second display control as the second display control, and the gaming machine is capable of executing, at least when the normal first display control is executed, a normal display in which the normal second display control is executed, and a specific display in which the specific second display control is executed, as the second display control.

Gaming machine IH3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine IH1 or IH2. That is, when normal first display control is executed for the first symbol, it is possible to execute a normal display for executing normal second display control for the second symbol, and a specific display for executing specific second display control. Therefore, by combining the dynamic display of the first symbol and the dynamic display of the second symbol, it is possible to execute a dynamic display of a wide variety of identification symbols, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine IH4 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines IH1 to IH3, the display control means is capable of notifying the result of the discrimination means using only the first symbol, without using the second symbol, when a specific condition is met.

Gaming machine IH4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines IH1 to IH3. That is, when a specific condition is met, the discrimination result of the discrimination means can be notified by the first symbol alone, which has the effect of providing the player with a surprising presentation.

<Characteristics Group II>
A gaming machine II1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means capable of displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, further comprising: a dynamic display means for arranging an identification pattern in a visible state in an area in which the identification information can be displayed during a period in which the identification information is displayed; and a dynamic display pattern determination means for determining a dynamic display pattern of the identification pattern, wherein the dynamic display pattern determination means is capable of determining a dynamic display pattern that can regulate the positional relationship between the identification information and the arranged identification pattern so that it is not a specific positional relationship depending on the timing of dynamically displaying the identification pattern during a period in which the identification information is displayed.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball into a starting hole on the gaming board, a winning or losing game is drawn, and after a pattern for notifying the result of the drawing is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the result of the drawing, and if a drawing result indicating a loss is announced, the variable display of the pattern for indicating the next result of the drawing is started. If the result of the drawing is a winning game, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed in which the gaming state can be changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, in conventional gaming machines, the pattern displayed tends to be monotonous, causing players to quickly become bored with the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can display designs in a variety of ways, preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to gaming machine II1, the timing at which the dynamic display of the identification symbols begins is determined, and a dynamic display pattern is decided according to that timing, restricting the formation of a specific positional relationship, thereby preventing a positional relationship that is inconvenient from a design perspective, and making it possible to flexibly determine the timing at which the identification symbols are dynamically displayed, which has the effect of further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine II2 is characterized in that in gaming machine II1, the dynamic display pattern determination means is capable of determining a dynamic display pattern for dynamically displaying a plurality of the identification symbols.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine II1, gaming machine II2 has the effect of reducing the control load for dynamically displaying the identification patterns because it is possible to dynamically display multiple identification patterns using a dynamic display pattern.

Gaming machine II3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine II1 or II2, an allowable period during which the identification information is displayed is preset to determine the timing for starting the dynamic display of the identification pattern.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines II1 and II2, gaming machine II3 has the effect of limiting the timing at which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed during the period in which the identification information is displayed, thereby suppressing the problem of the identification pattern not being positioned in the specified position even after the period in which the identification information is displayed has ended.

<Characteristic IJ group>
A gaming machine IJ1 having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, the identification information being composed of a combination of a plurality of identification patterns, a special pattern setting means capable of setting a special pattern different from the identification patterns to be arranged at a predetermined position based on the establishment of a specific condition, and an effect execution means capable of executing a first effect based on the discrimination result by stopping and displaying the plurality of identification patterns in a specific combination during a first period, and executing a second effect based on the discrimination result by arranging the special patterns in a specific combination form including at least the special pattern during a second period different from the first period.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball into a starting hole on the gaming board, a winning or losing game is drawn, and after a pattern for notifying the result of the drawing is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the result of the drawing, and if a drawing result indicating a loss is announced, the variable display of the pattern for indicating the next result of the drawing is started. If the result of the drawing is a winning game, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed in which the gaming state can be changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, in conventional gaming machines, the pattern displayed tends to be monotonous, causing players to quickly become bored with the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can display designs in a variety of ways, preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine IJ1 can be set to switch between a period in which effects based on the discrimination results are performed using only the identification symbols, and a period in which effects based on the discrimination results are performed using a combination including special symbols. This allows the player to vary their expectations regarding the discrimination results between the first and second effects, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine IJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine IJ1, when a first condition is met, the pay line along which a combination including the special symbol is formed is different from the pay line along which a combination including the special symbol is formed when a second condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IJ1, gaming machine IJ2 varies depending on the conditions under which a winning line is established, allowing the player to predict the winning line he or she will identify while playing the game, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine IJ3 is characterized in that it has a variable means capable of changing the distinguishing symbols that are not combined with the special symbols to a state that is more difficult to see than the normal state during the period in which the special symbols are arranged in gaming machine IJ1 or IJ2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines IJ1 and IJ2, gaming machine IJ3 has the effect of making it easier for players to distinguish the combination of special symbols, since distinguishing symbols that are not combined with special symbols are changed to a state that makes them difficult to see.

<Characteristic IK group>
A gaming machine IK1 has a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate the discrimination result by the discrimination means, the gaming machine also has a first drive means capable of driving on the front side of the display means during a period when the identification information can be dynamically displayed, an identification means for identifying a predetermined position of the first drive means, and a drive pattern means capable of driving the first drive means in a predetermined drive pattern, the drive pattern means being configured to not execute some of the drive patterns to be executed based on the fact that the predetermined position is not identified at a predetermined timing when driven in the drive pattern.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball into a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern for notifying the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern for indicating the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to a game state that is advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, conventional gaming machines have a problem in that the pattern displayed becomes monotonous, causing players to quickly become bored with the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can display designs in a variety of ways, preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game and increasing players' interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine IK1, if it is not possible to identify a specific position when driving the first driving means with a driving pattern, some of the driving patterns are not driven, which has the effect of preventing the first driving means from coming into contact with other structures, etc., and being damaged.

A gaming machine IK2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine IK1, the first drive means has a rotatable rotation means, and the identification means is capable of identifying the origin position of the rotation means as the predetermined position.

According to gaming machine IK2, when the origin position of the rotation means cannot be identified, part of the drive pattern is not executed, which has the effect of preventing the rotation means from stopping at the correct position and thus preventing the performance using the first drive means from being properly conveyed to the player.

Gaming machine IK3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine IK2, the front side of the rotation means is provided with text information indicating that the origin position is the correct position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IK2, gaming machine IK3 has the effect of allowing the player to easily identify the text information when placed at the origin position by adding text information.

<Characteristic IL group>
Gaming machine IL1 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a variable presentation execution means that can execute a variable presentation that changes the presentation mode based on the operation of the operating means, characterized in that the presentation mode changed by the variable presentation based on one of the operations is capable of notifying two or more different players that a special benefit that will be advantageous to them will be granted.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko machines that can execute periodic effects that change the presentation mode in stages by executing multiple operation presentations that change the presentation mode based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that the player can operate. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the presentation mode is changed to a specific stage as a result of the periodic presentation, a beneficial bonus is given to the player (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A). However, in conventional gaming machines, only the presentation result of the periodic presentation is determined in advance, and the presentation results of each operation presentation are not determined in advance, so that the presentation mode is changed to a stage corresponding to the presentation result of the periodic presentation without using all of the multiple operation presentations executed during the periodic presentation, resulting in a problem of a decrease in the presentation result of the periodic presentation. This has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that increases the player's motivation to operate the operation means during the presentation and improves the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine IL1 can notify two or more players of benefits that are advantageous to them based on one operation, which has the effect of increasing the benefits obtained by operating the operating means and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine IL1, characterized in that it is configured to include an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on a display means an identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, a bonus granting means capable of granting an advantageous bonus to a player when the identification information is statically displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating a specific determination result, and when the determination means determines that a specific determination result has been obtained based on information stored in the storage means before the determination is executed by the determination means, the presentation mode can be changed to a predetermined notification mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IL1, gaming machine IL2 has the effect of making the player interested in changing the presentation mode, since the presentation mode can be changed to a notification mode, allowing the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained.

In either gaming machine IL1 or IL2, the variation of the presentation mode is carried out in multiple stages, and gaming machine IL3 is configured such that after the variation of the presentation for the number of times has been completed, additional presentations based on information on the timing of the multiple stages of variation can be added.

According to gaming machine IL3, in any of gaming machines IL1 to IL3, additional effects are executed based on information at multiple stages of variable timing, which has the effect of enabling effects to be executed in response to changes in the presentation mode.

<Characteristic IM group>
A gaming machine IM1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus to a player when the identification information indicating a specific result of the discrimination is displayed statically on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine IM1 has a first information value determination means capable of determining a first information value required for controlling a game, a second information value determination means capable of determining a second information value required for controlling a game, and a special processing execution means capable of executing a special processing when a specific condition is established based on the first information value and the second information value.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that are configured to determine different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) based on the set game state and the results of special symbol lotteries, thereby varying the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time depending on the game state, and encourage players to play with enthusiasm, aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is large. There is a gaming machine that is configured to determine different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) based on the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of a jackpot game, so that a player who plays for a long time in the same game state can play an uninteresting game (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). In such conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that is configured to determine multiple pieces of information related to the fluctuation time in order to be able to determine various fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times), and to determine the fluctuation pattern by adding up the fluctuation times included in the multiple pieces of information determined. In such gaming machines, various variation patterns can be determined by combining multiple variation times, making it possible to play games that players will not tire of. However, for example, if long variation times are determined as multiple combined variation times, a long variation pattern will be determined as the combined variation pattern. This means that a large data area must be secured to store information about the variation time corresponding to the longest variation pattern, which puts a strain on the data area of the gaming machine. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control load even when control is performed based on information values that are flexibly determined.

According to gaming machine IM1, when a specific condition is met based on the first information value and the second information value, a special process is executed, which has the effect of reducing the frequency with which the special process is executed and reducing the control load.

In gaming machine IM1, the specific condition is met when the sum of the first information value and the second information value is equal to or greater than a specific value. Gaming machine IM2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IM1, gaming machine IM2 has the effect of executing special processing when the sum of the first information value and the second information value is equal to or greater than a specific value, making it possible to execute special processing for data with a large amount of data.

In gaming machine IM2, the special process is a process for adding information indicating that the added value is equal to or greater than a specific value, and setting information indicating a value obtained by subtracting the specific value from the added value. Gaming machine IM3.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine IM2, gaming machine IM3 provides information indicating that the value is equal to or greater than a specific value through special processing, making it possible to easily determine the added value with a small amount of data by adding the specific value to the subtracted value.

<Feature IN group>
a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means when a predetermined discrimination condition is met; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; and an information display means for displaying, on a display means, identification patterns corresponding to the number of the information stored in the storage means in a predetermined manner, wherein the information display means is capable of varying and displaying at least one of the identification patterns based on predetermined lottery information, and when the state of the identification pattern that has been varied and displayed is set to be displayed in the state before it was varied, the identification pattern that had been varied based on the predetermined lottery information can be varied and displayed again.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed to acquire lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole provided on the game board, and to store the acquired lottery information up to a predetermined number, and a winning or losing game is determined based on the stored lottery information, and after a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed variably for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating the lottery result, and if the lottery result is a winning game, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Also, a configuration has been proposed that can display reserved patterns to notify the player of the number of stored lottery information (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there was a problem that the display mode of reserved patterns to notify the player of the number of stored lottery information was monotonous, and the presentation effect could not be enhanced. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

According to gaming machine IN1, even if the identification pattern is displayed in its initial form due to an accident such as a power outage, it is set so that it can be displayed again in a variable form, which has the effect of preventing a decrease in the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine IN1, the information display means is capable of displaying the identification pattern in an initial state after the identification pattern is changed and then changing the identification pattern based on the establishment of a change condition when the power is turned off and then turned back on again. In the gaming machine IN2, the information display means is capable of displaying the identification pattern in an initial state after the identification pattern is changed and then changing the identification pattern based on the establishment of a change condition when the power is turned off and then turned on again when the power is turned back on.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine IN1, gaming machine IN2 has the effect of allowing the identification symbols to be changed again after the power is restored, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification symbols that have been changed.

In the gaming machine IN1 or IN2, the identification pattern is dynamically displayed at a specific cycle, and the changed and displayed identification pattern is displayed in a dynamic display mode different from the identification pattern before it was changed. In the gaming machine IN3,

In addition to the effects of gaming machines IN1 and IN2, gaming machine IN3 has the effect of making it easier for the player to identify the changed identification pattern from the dynamic display mode, thereby reducing the inconvenience of the player overlooking it.

<Feature IO group>
A gaming machine IO1 has a specific area into which a gaming ball can enter, a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus based on the gaming ball entering the specific area, and a notification execution means capable of executing a guide notification for launching the gaming ball into an area into which the gaming ball can enter the specific area, characterized in that the gaming machine is capable of delaying the period until the start of a performance executed based on an execution condition that is established after the guide notification is executed.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball in a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss. After a pattern for notifying the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner that indicates the lottery result. If a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, the variable display of the pattern for indicating the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to a game state that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game.

The gaming machine IO1 can delay the period between when the information notification is issued and when the start of the performance is initiated, which has the effect of making the information notification be issued at the optimal period, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Features of the 5077 series>
<Characteristic JA group> (When a specific lottery result occurs in an unfavorable first gaming state, a second gaming state is set in which the actual probability of a jackpot is higher than that of the first gaming state without going through a winning combination)
A gaming machine JA1 comprising: a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a first setting condition; and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state without going through the bonus game based on the establishment of a second setting condition in the first gaming state.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state that is highly advantageous to the player after the winning game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to provide multiple game states with different degrees of advantage as the game state that is set after the execution of a winning game has ended, thereby realizing gameplay that gives the player the expectation that a more advantageous game state will be set as the game state after the winning game has ended.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when a gaming state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set, there is no possibility of transitioning to a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage unless a winning game is executed, resulting in a gaming experience in which the only expectation is that a winning game will be executed, resulting in a monotonous game.

In contrast, with gaming machine JA1, in the first gaming state, a second gaming state with a high degree of advantage is set without the need for bonus play, so that a novel gameplay can be realized in which the player can look forward to the fulfillment of the second set condition in addition to a specific judgment result. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine JA1, characterized in that the second set condition is a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a first discrimination result that is different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine JA2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JA1, gaming machine JA2 can achieve novel gameplay that allows the player to expect not only a specific judgment result but also the first judgment result when the judgment of the judgment means is executed, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JA3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JA1 or JA2, a display control means is provided that is capable of displaying a specific display that can suggest to the player a game method for the second gaming state in the second gaming state, the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the bonus game is executed at a first rate per determination by the determination means, and the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the bonus game can be executed at a second rate higher than the first rate when playing at least the game method suggested by the specific display.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines JA1 and JA2, gaming machine JA3 can achieve extremely innovative gameplay in which a game state in which a bonus game is relatively difficult to execute can be shifted to a game state in which a bonus game is relatively easy to execute, without going through a bonus game, and this has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine JA3, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition that is predetermined as the discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition that is different from the first discrimination condition as the discrimination condition, and when the discrimination of the first discrimination means is executed, the bonus game is executed at the first ratio, and when the discrimination of the second discrimination means is executed, the bonus game is executed at a ratio that is substantially higher than the first ratio.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JA3, gaming machine JA4 has the effect that the ratio of bonus games being played varies depending on whether the determination of the first determination means or the second determination means is made, so that the player can play with a stronger expectation that the determination of the second determination means will be made.

Gaming machine JA4, the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the second discrimination condition is difficult to achieve, and the second gaming state is a gaming state in which, when playing using the gaming method suggested by the specific display, a specific percentage of the discrimination conditions that are achieved become the second discrimination condition, and the bonus game is executed at the second rate. Gaming machine JA5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JA4, gaming machine JA5 has the effect of varying the rate at which the second discrimination condition is met depending on the gaming state, thereby making it possible to vary the rate at which bonus play is executed for each gaming state.

In the gaming machine JA5, a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, a variable means capable of changing between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass, a specific discrimination means for making a specific discrimination based on the gaming ball passing through the passing means, and a discrimination result of the specific discrimination means being a predetermined judgment. A gaming machine JA6 is provided with a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a different result, and a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, including at least a first variable game in which the period in which the ball is changed to the first position is set to a first period in which the ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a second variable game in which the ball is set to a second period in which the ball cannot enter the second ball entry means, and the first game state is a game state in which the second variable game cannot be determined, and the second game state is a game state in which the second variable game is determined at a predetermined rate.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JA5, gaming machine JA6 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, since whether or not the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means varies depending on whether the gaming state is the first or second gaming state.

In the gaming machine JA6, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball that has passed through the passing means can enter the gaming machine JA7.

The gaming machine JA7 has the effect of being able to execute the determination by the specific determination means and the determination by the first determination means almost simultaneously every time.

In the gaming machine JA7, the second rate is the sum of the rate at which the first discrimination means determines a specific result and the rate at which the specific discrimination means determines a predetermined result, the type determination means determines the first variable game, and the second discrimination means determines that a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means during the execution of the first variable game, and the bonus game is executed based on this determination. In the gaming machine JA8, the second rate is the sum of the rate at which the first discrimination means determines a specific result, the type determination means determines the first variable game, and the bonus game is executed based on this determination.

In gaming machine JA8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine JA7, in the second gaming state, by shooting a gaming ball at the first ball entry means in the same way as in the first gaming state, it is possible to expect that a bonus game will be executed by the first discrimination means, and it is also possible to expect that a bonus game will be executed by the second discrimination means when the first variable game is executed and the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means, forming a special Yuzuki state in which it is possible to expect that a bonus game will be executed by the second discrimination means, thereby having the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature JB group> (In the time-saving state set by the first trigger, the number of time-saving times is updated at the first timing, and in the time-saving state set by the second trigger, it is updated at the second timing)
a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition or a second setting condition different from the first setting condition; an update means for updating a specific counter value in accordance with a predetermined update rule based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the first game state; and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the specific counter value being updated to a predetermined specific value by the update means, wherein in the first game state set in response to the establishment of the first setting condition, the specific counter value can be updated by the update means based at least on the establishment of a first update condition as the update condition, and in the first game state set in response to the establishment of the second setting condition, the specific counter value can be updated by the update means based at least on the establishment of a second update condition different from the first update condition as the update condition.

Here, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines that set a specific initial value for a specific counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of time-saving modes) at a specific trigger, and perform an update process until the counter value reaches a specific value (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, a more suitable method for updating the counter value was required.

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to vary the degree of advantage of the gaming state after the winning game ends depending on the gaming state when the execution of the winning game is set.

However, in such gaming machines, when the same winning game is set to be executed in the same game state, the same game state is always set as the game state after the winning game ends. Therefore, for example, if a configuration is made in which multiple states with different possibilities for executing a winning game are set in the same game state as a game state advantageous to the player by differentiating the ending conditions, it becomes difficult to differentiate the degree of advantage other than the possibility of executing a winning game.

In response to this, gaming machine JB1 can vary the timing of updating a specific counter value depending on the trigger for setting the first gaming state, which has the effect of allowing the specific counter value to be updated more appropriately.

Gaming machine JB2 is characterized in that it is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage between a case where the first bonus game is set to be executed in the first gaming state and a case where the first bonus game is set to be executed in the second gaming state, and includes a discrimination means for discriminating the degree of advantage between a case where the first bonus game is set to be executed in the first gaming state and a case where the first bonus game is set to be executed in the second gaming state, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the discrimination means determines the degree of advantage between a case where the first bonus game is set to be executed in the first gaming state and a case where the first bonus game is set to be executed in the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JB1, gaming machine JB2 has the effect of allowing a player to play while paying attention to the timing at which the first bonus game is executed, since the degree of advantage varies depending on whether the timing at which the first bonus game is executed is set to be the first game state or the second game state.

Gaming machine JB3, characterized in that in the first gaming state set in response to the fulfillment of the first setting condition in gaming machine JB2, it is more difficult to set the execution of the first bonus game in the first gaming state than in the first gaming state set in response to the fulfillment of the second setting condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JB2, gaming machine JB3 can vary the ease with which the first bonus game is executed during the first gaming state depending on whether the first gaming state is set as a result of the first set condition being met or the first gaming state is set as a result of the second set condition being met, thereby providing the effect of varying the degree of advantage of the first gaming state depending on the set conditions.

Gaming machine JB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JB2 or JB3, the first update condition is a condition that can be met at a predetermined first timing between when the discrimination condition is met and when a new discrimination condition can be met, the second update condition is a condition that can be met at a second timing that is later than the first timing between when the discrimination condition is met and when a new discrimination condition can be met, and the bonus game can be set to be executed at a third timing that is later than the first timing and earlier than the second timing.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JB2 or JB3, gaming machine JB4 has the effect that when the execution of a bonus game is set in the first gaming state, if the first gaming state is one in which a specific counter value is updated at a second timing, the execution of the bonus game can be set before the specific counter value is updated, making it easier to set the execution of the bonus game during the first gaming state, whereas if the first gaming state is one in which a specific counter value is updated at a first timing, the execution of the bonus game is set after the specific counter value is updated, making it relatively more difficult to set the execution of the bonus game during the first gaming state.

A gaming machine JB4, characterized in that it comprises: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a variable means capable of changing between a first position through which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the entry means than the first position; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result; and a bonus game execution setting means for setting the execution of the bonus game based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry means during the execution of the variable game.

In addition to the effects of game machine JB4, game machine JB5 sets the bonus game to be played if a game ball enters the ball entry means while a variable game is being played, so that the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine JB5, the first timing is a timing between when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and when the variable means is changed to the first position, and the second timing is a timing at least later than the timing when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game executed based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming the first discrimination result. In the gaming machine JB6,

In addition to the effect of gaming machine JB5, gaming machine JB6 has the effect that, when the first determination result is reached in the first gaming state and a variable game is executed, if the first gaming state is one in which the specific counter value is updated at the second timing, the bonus game can be set to be executed before the specific counter value is updated, making it easier to set the bonus game to be executed during the first gaming state, whereas if the first gaming state is one in which the specific counter value is updated at the first timing, the bonus game is set to be executed after the specific counter value is updated, making it relatively more difficult to set the bonus game to be executed during the first gaming state.

Gaming machine JB7 is any one of gaming machines JB1 to JB6, characterized in that the first gaming state is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines JB1 to JB6, gaming machine JB7 has the effect of making the player hope that a specific counter value will not be updated to a specific value, since the first gaming state is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state.

<Feature JC group> (An unfavorable second gaming state is set based on the fact that all of a plurality of conditions including at least a first condition and a second condition different from the first condition are satisfied in an advantageous first gaming state)
Gaming machine JC1 is characterized by comprising: a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state less advantageous than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a plurality of conditions, including at least a predetermined first condition and a second condition different from the first condition, after the first gaming state is set.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state that is highly advantageous to the player after the winning game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some in which, when a highly advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state ends and the game transitions to an unfavorable gaming state when one of multiple predetermined ending conditions is met.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the advantageous gaming state is ended when one of the multiple ending conditions is met, regardless of whether the other conditions are met. Therefore, even if there is a relatively long time before the other ending conditions are met, the advantageous gaming state is ended simply by the fulfillment of one ending condition, which may cause the player to feel that something is wrong.

In contrast, with gaming machine JC1, the highly advantageous first gaming state continues until multiple conditions are met, realizing a novel gaming experience that focuses on the fulfillment of multiple conditions. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JC2 is characterized in that it comprises a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in gaming machine JC1, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result, and the first condition is a condition that can be established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JC1, gaming machine JC2 has the effect of allowing a player to expect that in the first gaming state, the first determination result will be obtained and that the second determination result will not be obtained, thereby allowing the player to play while paying attention to the determination result of the determination means.

Gaming machine JC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine JC2, the second condition is a condition that can be established when the determination result of the determination means is a third determination result that is different from both the first determination result and the second determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JC2, gaming machine JC3 can provide a stronger expectation that the third determination result will not be obtained after the first condition is met, while providing a stronger expectation that the second determination result will not be obtained if the second condition is met first, thereby providing a novel gameplay that allows players to want to avoid different determination results depending on the order in which the conditions are met. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JC4 is characterized in that in gaming machine JC3, the first condition is a condition that is met when the second determination result is reached a predetermined first number of times after the first gaming state is set, and the second condition is a condition that is met when the second determination result is reached a predetermined second number of times after the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JC3, gaming machine JC4 allows the player to play the game while paying attention to both the number of times the second judgment result occurs and the number of times the third judgment result occurs, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JC5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines JC1 to JC4, after the first gaming state is set, the first gaming state can be maintained while at least one of the multiple conditions remains unfulfilled, regardless of the order in which the multiple conditions are fulfilled.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines C1 to C4, gaming machine JC5 maintains the advantageous first gaming state regardless of the order in which the conditions are met while at least one of the conditions is not met, which has the effect of realizing novel gameplay that strongly encourages players to hope that not all of the conditions will be met.

Gaming machine JC4 is characterized in that it is provided with a change means for changing the number of times of the third determination result to a fourth number different from the second number based on the fact that the number of times of the second determination result becomes a third number greater than the first number in a situation in which the first condition is satisfied after the first game state is set and the second condition is not satisfied, so that the second condition is satisfied when the number of times of the third determination result becomes a fourth number different from the second number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JC4, gaming machine JC6 can vary the number of third determination results required to satisfy the second condition when the second determination result continues to be obtained even after the first condition is satisfied and the number of times the second determination result has been obtained reaches a third number. This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether the number of times the second determination result has been obtained reaches the third number after the first condition is satisfied. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JC7 is characterized in that the fourth number of times in gaming machine JC6 is greater than the second number of times.

According to gaming machine JC7, in addition to the effect of gaming machine JC6, when the number of times the second determination result reaches the third number, the specified number of times the third determination result is required to satisfy the second condition increases, and the first gaming state is likely to continue for a long time, so that the gameplay can be such that the player can expect that the second determination result will not be obtained until the first condition is satisfied, and that the player can expect that the second determination result will be obtained after the first condition is satisfied. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JC8 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines JC1 to JC7, the second gaming state setting means is capable of setting the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition different from any of the multiple conditions in the first gaming state, regardless of whether the multiple conditions are established.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines JC1 to JC7, gaming machine JC8 has the effect of forcibly setting the second gaming state when a specific condition is met in the first gaming state, regardless of whether multiple conditions are met, thereby preventing the first gaming state from continuing for an excessively long period of time, which would give the player an excessive advantage.

Gaming machine JC9 is characterized in that it is provided with a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in gaming machine JC8, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result, and the specific condition is a condition that is established based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means not being the first discrimination result and being executed a predetermined specific number of times.

With gaming machine JC9, the first gaming state can be ended within a specific number of determinations, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming overly advantageous.

<Feature JD group> (The performance suggesting the possibility of the first condition that can end the time-saving state being satisfied and the performance suggesting the possibility of the second condition being satisfied can be executed independently.)
Gaming machine JD1 is characterized by comprising: a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; a first condition determination means for determining whether a first condition that can end the first game state has been established; a second condition determination means for determining whether a second condition that can end the first game state and is different from the first condition has been established; and an effect execution means for executing at least a first effect that can suggest the possibility that the first condition will be established and a second effect that can suggest the possibility that the second condition will be established.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a demand for a more suitable presentation.

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be able to execute presentations in presentation modes that correspond to multiple gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and are also configured to be able to issue notifications indicating the possibility (number of plays) of the conditions for terminating a gaming state being met in at least some of the gaming states with a high degree of advantage.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if multiple end conditions are set, the possibility of only the one end condition that is most likely to be met is usually notified, which creates the problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the possibility of other end conditions being met.

In response to this, gaming machine JD1 allows the player to more accurately grasp the possibility of the first gaming state ending by checking the first and second presentations, which has the effect of realizing a suitable presentation mode.

A gaming machine JD2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine JD1, it is provided with a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, the first condition being a condition that can be established based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result, and the second condition being a condition that can be established based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JD1, gaming machine JD2 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game because, in the first gaming state, the player can play the game while paying attention to the determination result of the determination means.

Gaming machine JD3, characterized in that in gaming machine JD2, the first condition is a condition that is met when the first determination result occurs a predetermined first number of times in the first gaming state, and the second condition is a condition that is met when the second determination result occurs a predetermined second number of times in the first gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JD2, gaming machine JD3 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game, since in the first game state, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the first judgment result occurs and the number of times the second judgment result occurs.

Gaming machine JD3, the first presentation is a presentation in which the presentation mode can be changed depending on the number of times the first determination result occurs in one of the first gaming states, and gaming machine JD4 is a presentation in which the presentation mode can be changed depending on the number of times the second determination result occurs in one of the first gaming states.

With the gaming machine JD4, by checking the first and second effects, it is possible to estimate the number of times the first judgment result and the number of times the second judgment result were obtained, which has the effect of improving convenience for the player.

Gaming machine JD5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JD3 or JD4, a plurality of first gaming states are provided in which at least one of the first number and the second number is set to a different number, and the gaming machine JD5 is equipped with a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect that can suggest to the player at least one of the first number and the second number set in the first gaming state before the first gaming state is set.

The gaming machine JD5 can provide variation to the first gaming state, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JD6 is any one of gaming machines JD3 to JD5, and is provided with a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination means being a predetermined specific determination result, and both the first determination result and the second determination result are at least different from the specific determination result.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines JD3 to JD5, gaming machine JD6 has the effect of strongly encouraging a specific judgment result in the first gaming state, since both the first and second judgment results are different conditions from the specific judgment result.

Gaming machine JD7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines JD1 to JD6, the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state that can be continued even if one of the first condition and the second condition is met, as long as the other condition is not met.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines JD1 to JD6, gaming machine JD7 can provide novel gameplay in which the first gaming state can continue until both the first and second conditions are met, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature JE group> (The number of times the special chart 2 is drawn is made common between the first game state and the second game state in which the number of time-saving times is different from that of the first game state)
a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a discrimination means for executing a discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a first state formation means for forming a first state based on the establishment of a first formation condition; a second state formation means for forming a second state different from the first state based on the establishment of a second formation condition different from the first formation condition; a first specific state forming means for forming a specific state in which the acquisition condition is unlikely to be satisfied, and a second specific state forming means for forming the specific state based on the satisfaction of a second condition different from the first condition after the second state is formed, wherein the number of times that the discrimination means makes discrimination from the time that the first state is set until the time that discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired before the specific state is formed can match the number of times that the discrimination means makes discrimination from the time that the second state is set until the time that discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired before the specific state is formed.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state that is highly advantageous to the player after the winning game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a first start port where a drawing with a relatively low degree of advantage is executed as a start winning port, and a second start port where a drawing with a relatively high degree of advantage is executed, and are configured to be able to create an unfavorable gaming state in which it is difficult to execute a drawing for the second special symbol executed based on an entry into the second start port, and a gaming state in which it is easy to execute a drawing for the second special symbol. In such conventional gaming machines, it is normal for the advantageous gaming state to end and the machine to be set to an unfavorable gaming state when the number of drawings for the second special symbol executed in the shell after transitioning to the advantageous gaming state reaches a specified number.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in multiple highly advantageous states, it may be difficult to standardize the chances to select the second special symbol until the end condition is met and the gaming state is set to an unfavorable one.

In contrast, gaming machine JE1 makes it possible to perform the same number of judgments even in different states, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JE2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JE1, it is provided with a gaming state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first state being a state that can be formed based on the first gaming state being set, and the second state being a state that can be formed based on the second gaming state being set.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine JE1, the gaming machine JE2 has the effect of being able to standardize the number of discriminations made by the discrimination means between the first state and the second state, even though different gaming states are set.

Gaming machine JE3 is characterized in that it is provided with a third gaming state setting means capable of setting a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the first gaming state being determined by the determination means a first number of times, the second gaming state being a gaming state in which the determination means can determine a second number of times that is greater than the first number of times, and the third gaming state being a gaming state in which the determination means can determine a third number of times that is less than the second number of times.

With the gaming machine JE3, when the second state is formed, the first determination can be made in the second gaming state, and then the third determination can be made in the third gaming state, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine JE4 is characterized in that in gaming machine JE3, the first condition is a condition that can be met when the discrimination means executes a discrimination the third number of times in the third gaming state, the second condition is a condition that can be met when the discrimination means executes a discrimination the second number of times in the second gaming state, and the second number of times is equal to the sum of the first number of times and the third number of times.

The gaming machine JE4 has the advantage of being able to reliably match the number of discriminations made by the discrimination means in the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine JE3 or JE4, the discrimination information acquisition means is capable of acquiring first discrimination information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition, and acquiring second discrimination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the discrimination means is at least composed of a first discrimination means that executes discrimination using the first discrimination information based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination using the second discrimination information based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, the discrimination of the second discrimination means is configured to be more advantageous than the discrimination of the first discrimination means, the third gaming state setting means is capable of setting the third gaming state based on the first number of discriminations of the second discrimination means in the first gaming state, the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the discrimination of the second discrimination means can be executed the second number of times, and the third gaming state is a gaming state in which the discrimination of the second discrimination means can be executed the third number of times.

The gaming machine JE5 can realize innovative gameplay by making the number of judgments by the second judgment means, which has a high degree of advantage, common between the first state and the second state, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JE6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JE5, it is provided with a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means until the discrimination means executes a discrimination using the discrimination information, and the specific state is the first gaming state in which the second discrimination information is not stored in the discrimination information storage means.

According to gaming machine JE6, if the first gaming state is set with the second discrimination information stored, a third gaming state in which the second discrimination can be executed can be set, whereas if the second discrimination information is not stored, an unfavorable specific state is created, so there is an effect that attention can be drawn to the number of second discrimination information stored at the time the first gaming state is set.

Gaming machine JE7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JE6, it is equipped with a presentation execution means capable of executing a notification presentation that notifies a player of a game method in which the second discrimination information is likely to be stored in the discrimination information storage means at least before the first game state is set when the first formation condition is established.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JE6, gaming machine JE7 can execute a notification effect and store second discrimination information in the discrimination information storage means before the first gaming state is set, so that discrimination by the second discrimination means can be reliably executed in the first gaming state. This has the effect of reliably matching the number of discriminations by the second discrimination means between the first state and the second state.

<Features JF Group> (Type 1 and Type 2 time-saving limit machines with pullback after limit is reached)
a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition; a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination, which is more advantageous than the first discrimination, based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on either the discrimination result of the first discrimination or the discrimination result of the second discrimination becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a first game state setting means for setting a first game state in which the second discrimination condition is likely to be established based on the establishment of a first set condition; and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state which is less advantageous than the first game state based on the establishment of a second set condition in the first game state, wherein a specific state in which the second discrimination is likely to be executed can be formed from the time the second game state is set until a specific condition is established.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state that is highly advantageous to the player after the winning game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines employ a control that forcibly sets a game state with a low degree of advantage after a specific game state with a high degree of advantage has been set in succession a specified number of times as the game state set after the completion of a winning game, even if a winning game corresponding to the specific game state is executed.

However, with such conventional gaming machines, when a gaming state with a low degree of advantage is set, the expectation of winning drops significantly, which creates a problem in that it significantly reduces the player's motivation to play.

In response to this, gaming machine JF1 can create a state in which the second judgment, which has a high degree of advantage, is likely to be executed even though the second gaming state, which has a low degree of advantage, has been set, thereby reducing the disappointment felt when the second gaming state has been set. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine JF2 comprising an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition in a gaming machine JF1, and a discrimination information storage means for storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined specific number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the specific state being a state in which the second discrimination can be executed using the discrimination information with a number of pieces of information at least greater than the specific number of pieces of information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JF1, gaming machine JF2 has the effect of pleasing the player when a specific state is formed, because the second judgment is executed a relatively large number of times when a specific state is formed.

Gaming machine JF3 is characterized in that it is provided with a gaming state determination means for determining one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game ends in gaming machine JF1 or JF2, and the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be determined by the gaming state determination means than the second gaming state when the specific determination result is reached in a state in which a predetermined first condition is not met, and the second gaming state is more likely to be determined by the gaming state determination means than a state in which the first condition is not met when the specific determination result is reached.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines JF1 and JF2, gaming machine JF3 has the effect of making the player expect a specific judgment result while the first condition is not met in the first gaming state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine JF4 is characterized in that in gaming machine JF3, the first condition is a condition that can be met based on the first gaming state being determined by the gaming state determination means for a predetermined specific number of consecutive bonus games.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JF3, gaming machine JF4 creates an extremely favorable situation in which the advantageous first gaming state is likely to be set continuously over a specific number of bonus games when the first gaming state is set, so that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the first gaming state is set.

Gaming machine JF5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines JF1 to JF4, a third gaming state setting means is provided which sets a third gaming state in which the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied based on the satisfaction of a predetermined second condition in the second gaming state, and the second gaming state set based on the satisfaction of the second setting condition is more likely to satisfy the second condition than the second gaming state set based on the satisfaction of a setting condition different from the second setting condition.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines JF1 to JF4, gaming machine JF5 has the effect of realizing novel gameplay in which the degree of advantage of the second gaming state set based on the establishment of a second setting condition can be made higher than the second gaming state set by another trigger.

Gaming machine JF6 is characterized in that in gaming machine JF5, the second condition is a condition that is established based on the second discrimination means discriminating in the second gaming state to a first discrimination result that is different from the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JF5, gaming machine JF6 has the effect of being able to focus on the results of the determination when the second determination means makes a determination in the second gaming state and play the game accordingly.

Gaming machine JF7 is characterized in that in gaming machine JF6, the determination made by the first determination means is a determination that cannot be the first determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JF6, gaming machine JF7 has the effect of providing a stronger expectation that the second discrimination means will make a judgment in the second gaming state, since the first discrimination result will not be obtained even if the first discrimination means makes a judgment.

Gaming machine JF8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JF6 or JF7, the determination of the second determination means is configured such that the execution of the bonus game is substantially confirmed if the result of the first determination is not obtained.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines JF6 and JF7, gaming machine JF8 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game, because when the second determination means makes a determination in the second game state, either a bonus game is executed or the third game state is executed.

A gaming machine JF8, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a variable means that can change between a first position through which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position; a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a predetermined second determination result; and a second bonus game execution means that executes the bonus game based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry means during the execution of the variable game, wherein the determination by the first determination means is a determination that cannot be the second determination result, and the determination by the second determination means is a determination that is one of the specific determination result, the first determination result, and the second determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JF8, gaming machine JF9 has the effect that when the second discrimination means makes a judgment in the second gaming state, a specific discrimination result is obtained and a bonus game is executed, or the first discrimination result is obtained and a third gaming state is set, or the second discrimination result is obtained and a variable game is executed, so that the degree of advantage can be significantly increased compared to a judgment by the first discrimination means that cannot result in either the first or second discrimination result. Therefore, when the second discrimination means makes a judgment, the player can have high expectations, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature JG group> (A predetermined performance is executed during the period from when the game state is changed to when the reserved balls acquired in the game state before the change are consumed)
A gaming machine JG1 is characterized by comprising: a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance based on the setting of the first game state; and a second performance execution means for executing a second performance configured in a performance manner that allows the player to recognize that the player is in the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition during the execution of the first performance.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a demand for a more suitable presentation.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines have multiple game states with different degrees of advantage, and are configured to be able to execute presentations with presentation patterns that correspond to each game state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when one gaming state is ended and set, a presentation corresponding to the set gaming state is executed at the same time, and if a player immediately starts playing a game method corresponding to the set gaming state, it may become difficult to set the presentation appropriately.

In response to this, gaming machine JG1 allows the player to recognize that the first game state has been set by checking the second presentation, which has the effect of allowing the presentation to be set appropriately.

A gaming machine JG2 comprising: a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result; and a discrimination information storage means for storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the specific execution condition is a condition that can be established after discrimination using all of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time the first gaming state is set is completed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JG1, gaming machine JG2 can execute the second presentation after the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means is completed, which has the effect of preventing the start of a game corresponding to the first game state while the determination information is stored in the determination information storage means.

A gaming machine JG3 is characterized in that it is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means to show the result of the determination made by the determination means in the gaming machine JG2, and the specific execution condition is a condition that can be established after the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination made using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the time the first gaming state is set is completed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JG2, gaming machine JG3 has the effect of preventing a player from starting a game corresponding to the first gaming state during dynamic display of identification information based on discrimination information acquired before the first gaming state is set.

A gaming machine JG4 comprising a first termination means for terminating the first gaming state and setting a second gaming state with a lower degree of advantage than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a first termination condition, which is established when the number of determinations made by the determination means after the first gaming state is set reaches a predetermined specific number, and a second termination means for terminating the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the establishment of a second termination condition different from the first termination condition in the first gaming state, wherein the second termination condition is more likely to be established before the first termination condition is established in both cases of the first gaming state being played in a gaming method corresponding to the first gaming state immediately after the first gaming state is set and the first gaming state being played in a gaming method corresponding to the first gaming state after the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the time the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines JG2 and JG3, gaming machine JG4 has the effect of preventing the player from suffering losses even if the player continues to check the first performance without playing during the first performance, and then plays a game corresponding to the first game state based on the start of the second performance.

Gaming machine JG5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines JG1 to JG4, the first presentation is configured in a presentation manner that can make the player think that the first gaming state has not been set.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines JG1 to JG4, gaming machine JG5 can make the player believe that the first gaming state has not been set until the second performance is executed, which has the effect of preventing the player from starting a game corresponding to the first gaming state before a specific execution condition is met.

<Feature JH Group> (Performances suggesting the possibility of a specific condition that can end a specified game state being met)
Gaming machine JH1 is characterized by comprising a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a condition determination means for determining whether a first condition that can end the first game state has been established, and an effect execution means for executing at least a first effect that can suggest the possibility that the first condition will be established.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a demand for a more suitable presentation.

In response to this, gaming machine H1 allows the player to understand the possibility of the first gaming state ending by checking the first presentation, which has the effect of realizing a suitable presentation mode.

A gaming machine JH2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine JH1, it is provided with a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and the first condition is a condition that can be established based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine JH2 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game because, in the first gaming state, the player can play the game while paying attention to the determination result of the determination means.

Gaming machine JH3 is characterized in that in gaming machine JH2, the first condition is a condition that is met when the first determination result occurs a predetermined first number of times in one of the first gaming states.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H2, gaming machine JH3 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game because, in the first gaming state, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the first judgment result occurs.

A gaming machine JH3 is provided with a second condition determination means capable of determining whether a second condition that can end the first gaming state and is different from the first condition has been established, and a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance that can suggest the possibility that the second condition will be established, and the second condition is a condition that is established when the determination result of the determination means becomes a second determination result different from the first determination result a predetermined second number of times in one of the first gaming states. A gaming machine JH4 is characterized in that the second condition is established when a second determination result different from the first determination result is obtained in one of the first gaming states.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JH3, gaming machine JH4 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game because, in the first gaming state, the player can play the game while paying attention to both the number of times the first determination result occurs and the number of times the second determination result occurs.

Gaming machine JH4, the first presentation is a presentation in which the presentation mode can be changed depending on the number of times the first determination result occurs in one of the first gaming states, and the second presentation is a presentation in which the presentation mode can be changed depending on the number of times the second determination result occurs in one of the first gaming states. Gaming machine JH5.

With the gaming machine JH5, by checking the first and second effects, it is possible to estimate the number of times the first judgment result and the number of times the second judgment result were obtained, which has the effect of improving convenience for the player.

<Feature JI group> (executing a predetermined effect for a predetermined period after the game state is changed)
A gaming machine JI1 is characterized by comprising: a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance based on the setting of the first game state; and a second performance execution means for executing a second performance having a different performance mode from the first performance based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition during the execution of the first performance.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when a predetermined symbol is displayed stationary, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to symbols, the display device also displays various images, such as characters and landscapes, and aims to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wide variety of exciting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a demand for a more suitable presentation.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines have multiple game states with different degrees of advantage, and are configured to be able to execute presentations with presentation patterns that correspond to each game state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when one gaming state is ended and set, a presentation corresponding to the set gaming state is executed at the same time, and if a player immediately starts playing a game method corresponding to the set gaming state, it may become difficult to set the presentation appropriately.

In response to this, gaming machine JI1 has the advantage of being able to set the presentation in an optimal way.

Gaming machine JI2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine JI1, the second presentation is configured in a presentation manner that allows the player to recognize that the first gaming state is being reached.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine JI1, gaming machine JI2 has the effect of allowing the player to recognize that the first gaming state has been set by confirming the second presentation.

A gaming machine JI3, which is equipped with a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition in a gaming machine JI1 or JI2, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, and a discrimination information storage means for storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for the discrimination of the discrimination means, and the specific execution condition is a condition that can be established after the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time when the first gaming state is set is completed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine JI1 or JI2, gaming machine JI3 can execute the second presentation after the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means is completed, which has the effect of preventing a game corresponding to the first game state from being started while the determination information is stored in the determination information storage means.

A gaming machine JI3, comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means to show the result of the determination by the determination means, wherein the specific execution condition is a condition that can be established after the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the time the first gaming state is set is completed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I3, gaming machine JI4 has the effect of preventing a player from starting a game corresponding to the first gaming state during dynamic display of identification information based on discrimination information acquired before the first gaming state is set.

A gaming machine JI5 comprising: a first termination means for terminating the first gaming state and setting a second gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the first gaming state, based on the establishment of a first termination condition, which is established when the number of determinations made by the determination means after the first gaming state is set reaches a predetermined specific number, and a second termination means for terminating the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state, based on the establishment of a second termination condition different from the first termination condition in the first gaming state; and a gaming machine JI5 characterized in that the second termination condition is more likely to be established before the first termination condition is established in both cases, when the first gaming state is set immediately after the first gaming state is set and when the first gaming state is set and a game is played using a game method corresponding to the first gaming state after the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the time the first gaming state is set is completed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines JI3 and JI4, gaming machine JI5 has the effect of preventing the player from suffering losses even if the player continues to check the first performance without playing during the first performance, and plays a game method corresponding to the first game state based on the start of the second performance.

<Features of the 5078 series>
<Feature A group> (A game state in which a jackpot game is more likely to be played than in a normal state during a jackpot can be set multiple times based on the number of times the special drawing is performed or the drawing results)
a first determination result is a result of the determination made by the determination means; and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be made than the first game state, the second game state being set based on the establishment of either a first condition which can be established when a predetermined number of determinations are made by the determination means after the bonus game is ended, or a second condition which can be established based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the gaming machine is configured to be capable of causing the second game state to be set a plurality of times by the game state setting means during a play period from when one bonus game is executed to when the next bonus game is executed.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, with conventional gaming machines, the advantageous state is set only when a bonus game is executed, which creates the problem that players who continue to play without winning lose their motivation to play.

Furthermore, there are conventional gaming machines in which an advantageous state that is set after a bonus game ends continues until the next bonus game is played. In such gaming machines, the advantageous state is set, which increases the advantageous degree of the bonus given to the player. In order to prevent an excessively advantageous bonus from being given to the player, the specifications are made such that it is difficult to set the advantageous state itself, which causes a problem of reducing the motivation of players who play for long periods of time in the hope that an advantageous state will be set.

There are also gaming machines that end the advantageous state that is set after the bonus game ends depending on the number of lotteries that have been executed. With such gaming machines, if the advantageous state ends after a certain number of lotteries have been executed during the advantageous state, the player must play in a less favorable state than the advantageous state until the next bonus game is executed, which causes a problem in that the motivation of the player who has ended the advantageous state decreases.

According to gaming machine A1, the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, can be set multiple times between bonus games, making it easier for a player playing in the first gaming state to continue playing the bonus game for a long period of time, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the second game state can be set based on the number of times the determination means performs the determination, regardless of the determination result by the determination means, there is an effect that the second game state is not set and that it is possible to prevent a game in which no bonus game is performed from continuing for a long period of time.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A1, the gaming machine is configured such that the second condition is more likely to be met than the first condition by the determination performed during the gaming period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can easily set the second gaming state based on the judgment result before a predetermined number of judgments are performed, which has the effect of making the player interested in the results of the judgments performed during the game period and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A1 or A2, the upper limit of the number of times that the second condition can be satisfied during the gaming period is configured to be greater than the upper limit of the number of times that the first condition can be satisfied.

Gaming machine A3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines A1 and A2. That is, since the upper limit number of times that the second condition can be satisfied during the game period is greater than the upper limit number of times that the first condition can be satisfied, it is possible to easily set the second game state based on the satisfaction of the second condition multiple times during the game period. This has the effect of making the player interested in the results of the determination performed during the game period, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a player that the number of times the first condition is satisfied during the gaming period has reached an upper limit in the gaming machine A3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 can notify the player of the play period in which the first condition cannot be satisfied, making it easier for the player to understand play periods in which it is easy to set the second play state and play periods in which it is difficult to do so.

<Feature B group> (The combination of the type of background mode that indicates the game state and the displayed performance pattern indicates the degree of advantage of the special drawing result)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect suggesting the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means; and a first effect mode setting means for setting a mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. In a gaming machine having a determination means for executing a determination means for determining a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first gaming state. a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance to suggest the game state set by a performance setting means; and a second performance mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of mode types as the mode type of the second performance executed by the second performance execution means, wherein the first performance mode setting means is capable of setting one of a plurality of performance modes including a specific first performance mode and a specific second performance mode which is less likely to be set when the first bonus type is determined than the specific first performance mode, and the gaming machine is capable of varying the rate at which the specific first performance mode is set by the first performance mode setting means based on the mode type of the second performance set by the second performance mode setting means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed that are configured to switch between multiple presentation stages, and that can prevent the presentation from becoming monotonous by determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of a winning lottery in accordance with the presentation stage that has been set (prior art document: JP 2009-233171 A).

In addition, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows multiple game states to be set, and in order to make it difficult for the player to understand which game state has been set, multiple presentation stages that can be set even for different game states are provided, and the selection ratio of each presentation stage is varied depending on the set game state, allowing the player to predict the current game state based on the type of presentation stage that has been switched to.

In such conventional gaming machines, it is common that the contents of the bonus awarded when a winning prize is awarded differ depending on the game state that is set, and the player wants to know the game state when a winning prize is awarded as soon as possible. However, regardless of which presentation stage is set, a common display mode is set as the display mode for showing the winning lottery result, which creates a problem in that the player cannot grasp the game state when a winning prize is awarded until the bonus is actually awarded.

According to gaming machine B1, by combining the presentation mode of the first presentation with the presentation mode of the second presentation that can suggest the game state, it is possible to allow the player to predict the type of bonus that will be awarded by the bonus awarding means, thereby having the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine B2, characterized in that in gaming machine B1, the second presentation mode setting means is capable of setting at least a first mode type that is more likely to be set when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means than when the second gaming state is set, and a second mode type that is more likely to be set when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 makes it possible to predict the set game state based on the mode type set as the performance mode of the second performance, which has the effect of enhancing the performance effect.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B1 or B2, when the gaming state setting means executes a first setting in which the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it is easier to cause the second effect execution means to execute the second effect than when the gaming state setting means executes a second setting in which the gaming state is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can vary the ease of executing the second presentation depending on the transition pattern of the game state, so that even when the second presentation is merely executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the newly set game state, providing the player with the enjoyment of predicting the current game state.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, the first performance mode setting means can set one of the common performance modes from the plurality of performance modes, regardless of the type of the second performance mode set by the second performance mode setting means.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines B1 to B3, gaming machine B4 can standardize the presentation mode of the first presentation regardless of the type of the second presentation mode, which has the effect of reducing the total amount of presentation data required to execute the first presentation.

<Feature C Group> (The display mode of the effect symbols for showing the same lottery result is determined according to the game situation at the time of winning)
a game state setting means for setting a second game state different from a first game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; and a first effect execution means for executing a first effect to indicate that the result of the determination is the specific determination result, wherein the game machine C1 further comprises: an end condition determination means for determining an end condition of the second game state set by the game state setting means; an information determination means for determining remaining period information until the end condition is established during the second game state; and an effect mode determination means for determining the effect mode of the first effect based on the remaining period information determined by the information determination means when the result of the determination performed during the second game state is the specific determination result.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a specific win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is played after a performance is executed to indicate that the lottery result is a win, and after the special game is completed, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game's success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

In addition, a configuration has been proposed in which a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set as the duration of the advantageous state set after the bonus play ends, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the first period, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the second period are executed, allowing the player to easily understand the lottery results.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, if a player wins a jackpot that sets the advantageous state of the first period when the remaining period of the advantageous state is longer than the first period, the current jackpot will be disadvantageous to the player, whereas if a player wins a jackpot that sets the advantageous state of the first period when the remaining period of the advantageous state is shorter than the first period, the current jackpot will be advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the same jackpot (a jackpot that sets the advantageous state of the first period) is won, the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player by the jackpot will differ depending on the remaining period of the advantageous state that has already been set. However, the same type of presentation is executed for the same jackpot, making it difficult to determine whether the current jackpot is advantageous to the player based on the presentation that is executed.

According to gaming machine C1, when the result of the determination by the determination means executed during the second game state is a specific determination result that allows the second game state to be set, the presentation mode of the first presentation for indicating the specific determination result can be determined based on information up until the end condition of the already set second game state is established, so that the presentation mode of the first presentation can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand whether or not the setting of a new second game state is advantageous to the player based on the presentation mode of the first presentation, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1, the presentation mode setting means is capable of determining at least a first presentation mode indicating that the remaining time until the already set end condition of the second gaming state is satisfied is longer than the time until the new end condition of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is satisfied, based on the remaining time information, and a second presentation mode indicating that the time until the new end condition of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is satisfied is longer than the remaining time until the already set end condition of the second gaming state is satisfied.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game because the player can easily determine whether a judgment favorable to the player has been executed depending on whether the execution mode of the first effect is the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C2, the end condition determination means is capable of determining at least one end condition from among a plurality of end conditions including a first end condition and a second end condition that is less likely to be met than the first end condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C2, gaming machine C3 can set a second gaming state in which a different end condition is determined, making it easier to set a difference between the length of the period indicated by the remaining time information of the already set second gaming state and the length of the period indicated by the remaining time information until the end condition of the newly set second gaming state is met. This has the effect of making it possible to further increase the player's interest in the first presentation and to enhance the presentation effect.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that in gaming machine C3, the end condition determination means can determine the end condition that is established based on at least the number of times the determination is performed during the second gaming state, the first end condition is established based on the determination being performed a first number of times during the second gaming state, and the second end condition is established based on the determination being performed a second number of times that is less than the first number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C3, gaming machine C4 has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand, since the first and second end conditions are met based on the number of times the determination means executes a determination during the second game state. The ease with which the first and second end conditions are met is not reversed, and gaming machine C4 provides the player with a game that is easy to understand.

<Feature D group> (Whether or not to execute the time-saving notification effect when the time-saving win is won is determined based on the number of time-saving times set and the result of the pre-reading)
a storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number; a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined discrimination condition is established; a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which the discrimination is easier to execute than the first game state; and a plurality of end conditions including a first end condition and a second end condition which is easier to establish than the first end condition as end conditions for terminating the second game state set by the game state setting means. and a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect capable of suggesting the type of the end condition determined for the second game state, the gaming machine D1 further comprising a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discriminating the discrimination information stored in the storage means before the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the first effect execution means being capable of executing the first effect when the first end condition is determined or when the second end condition is determined and the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means satisfies an execution condition.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held to determine whether the player has won the game based on the ball entering a starting hole on the game board, and if the lottery results in a win, a configuration has been proposed that can set an advantageous state for a certain period of time (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

There are also gaming machines that are configured to allow advantageous states to be set by varying the duration length, and in this case, a configuration has been proposed that allows the player to be notified of the length of the duration using a notification effect to notify that an advantageous state has been set.

In such conventional gaming machines, the longer the duration of an advantageous state, the more advantageous it is for the player, so the player can play while hoping that the notification effect will notify them of information indicating a long duration, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the notification effect. However, there was a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreased when information indicating a short duration was notified.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in playing by preventing a player from losing motivation to play when a notification effect is executed to notify information showing the duration of an advantageous state, regardless of the length of the duration notified.

The gaming machine D1 is configured to execute the first presentation when the second gaming state is set in which the first end condition that is difficult to achieve is determined, and when the second gaming state is set in which the second end condition that is easy to achieve is determined, and when the result of the determination by the advance determination means satisfies the execution condition. Therefore, whether the first presentation suggests the first end condition or the second end condition, the player's interest in the game can be increased without decreasing the player's motivation to play.

In the gaming machine D1, the end condition determination means can determine the end condition that is established based on at least the number of times the determination is performed during the second gaming state, and the first end condition can be established based on the determination being performed a first number of times during the second gaming state, and the second end condition can be established based on the determination being performed a second number of times that is less than the first number of times. Gaming machine D2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand, since the first and second end conditions are met based on the number of times that the determination means executes a determination during the second game state.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, the execution condition can be established when the result of the pre-determination corresponds to the specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 can execute the first presentation when the result of the pre-determination at the time when the second game state in which the second end condition is determined is set indicates that a bonus game will be executed. This has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even when the first presentation is executed, which indicates that the second end condition, which is easier to achieve, has been determined, rather than the first end condition, which is harder to achieve.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that in gaming machine D3, the execution condition can be established when the result of the pre-determination corresponding to the first determination performed after the second gaming state is set is a result corresponding to the specific determination result.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine D3, gaming machine D4 can execute the first presentation when the result of the pre-determination corresponding to the first determination after the second game state in which the second end condition is determined is set is the result of the pre-determination indicating that a bonus game will be executed. This has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even when the first presentation is executed indicating that the second end condition, which is easier to achieve, has been determined rather than the first end condition, which is harder to achieve.

<Feature E Group> (derivation of determining the display mode of the performance pattern for showing the same lottery result according to the game situation at the time of winning)
a game state setting means for setting a second game state different from a first game state based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a specific judgment result; and a first effect execution means for executing a first effect to indicate that the result of the judgment is the specific judgment result, the game machine E1 being characterized by having an end condition determination means for determining an end condition of the second game state set by the game state setting means, an information identification means for identifying information for establishing the end condition during the second game state, and an effect mode determination means for determining the effect mode of the first effect based on the information identified by the information identification means.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a specific win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is played after a performance is executed to indicate that the lottery result is a win, and after the special game is completed, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game's success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

In addition, a configuration has been proposed in which a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set as the duration of the advantageous state set after the bonus game ends, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the first period, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the second period are executed, allowing the player to easily understand the lottery results.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, if a player wins a jackpot that sets the advantageous state of the first period when the remaining period of the advantageous state is longer than the first period, the current jackpot will be disadvantageous to the player, whereas if a player wins a jackpot that sets the advantageous state of the first period when the remaining period of the advantageous state is shorter than the first period, the current jackpot will be advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the same jackpot (a jackpot that sets the advantageous state of the first period) is won, the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player by the jackpot will differ depending on the remaining period of the advantageous state that has already been set. However, the same type of presentation is executed for the same jackpot, making it difficult to determine whether the current jackpot is advantageous to the player based on the presentation that is executed.

According to gaming machine E1, the presentation mode of the first presentation for indicating a specific judgment result can be determined based on information up until the end condition of the already set second game state is met, so the presentation mode of the first presentation can be made different. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to understand whether the setting of a new second game state is advantageous to the player based on the presentation mode of the first presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine E2 is characterized in that in gaming machine E1, the presentation mode setting means is capable of determining, based on the information, at least a first presentation mode indicating that the end condition of the second gaming state already set is less likely to be met than the end condition of the second gaming state newly set by the gaming state setting means, and a second presentation mode indicating that the end condition of the second gaming state newly set by the gaming state setting means is less likely to be met than the end condition of the second gaming state already set.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game because the player can easily determine whether a judgment favorable to the player has been executed depending on whether the execution mode of the first performance is the first performance mode or the second performance mode.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that in gaming machine E2, the end condition determination means is capable of determining at least one end condition from among a plurality of end conditions including a first end condition and a second end condition that is less likely to be met than the first end condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 can set a second gaming state in which a different end condition is determined, making it easier to establish a second gaming state that has already been set and a second gaming state that is newly set. This has the effect of making it possible to further increase the player's interest in the first presentation and to enhance the presentation effect.

<Feature F group> (Derivation of determining whether or not to execute the time-saving notification effect when the time-saving win is won based on the number of time-saving times set and the result of the pre-reading)
a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state in which it is easier to make the judgment than the first game state; an end condition determination means for determining an end condition for terminating the second game state set by the game state setting means; and a first performance execution means for executing a first performance to indicate the end condition determined for the second game state. The game machine F1 has a storage means for storing a predetermined number of discrimination information, a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined discrimination condition is established, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state in which it is easier to make the discrimination than the first game state, an end condition determination means for determining an end condition for terminating the second game state set by the game state setting means, and a first performance execution means for executing a first performance to indicate the end condition determined for the second game state.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held to determine whether the player has won the game based on the ball entering a starting hole on the game board, and if the lottery results in a win, a configuration has been proposed that can set an advantageous state for a certain period of time (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

There are also gaming machines that are configured to allow advantageous states to be set by varying the duration length, and in this case, a configuration has been proposed that allows the player to be notified of the length of the duration using a notification effect to notify that an advantageous state has been set.

In such conventional gaming machines, the longer the duration of an advantageous state, the more advantageous it is for the player, so the player can play while hoping that the notification effect will notify them of information indicating a long duration, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the notification effect. However, there was a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreased when information indicating a short duration was notified.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in playing by preventing a player from losing motivation to play when a notification effect is executed to notify information showing the duration of an advantageous state, regardless of the length of the duration notified.

According to the gaming machine F1, the first performance can be executed if the result of the determination by the advance determination means satisfies the execution condition, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game without reducing the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine F2, in which the end condition determination means in gaming machine F1 is capable of determining the end condition that is established based on at least the number of times the determination is performed during the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand, since the end condition is met based on the number of determinations made by the determination means during the second game state.

Gaming machine F3, which is characterized in that in gaming machine F1 or F2, the execution condition can be established when the result of the pre-determination corresponds to the specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 can execute the first performance when the result of the pre-determination indicates that a bonus game will be executed, which has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

<Feature Group G>
a determination means capable of executing a first determination and a second determination, a display means capable of displaying a first identification for indicating a first determination result corresponding to the first determination made by the determination means and a second identification for indicating the second determination, a dynamic display means capable of displaying the identification in a manner for indicating the first determination result or the second determination result after dynamically displaying the first identification or the second identification on the display means, a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the first identification or the second identification is displayed in a manner for indicating a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result, and a setting control means for setting the first state as a state after the specific benefit is awarded until an end condition is established, when the specific benefit is awarded in a state in which the first state is set, and a release setting means for executing a setting such that the end condition is not established until the dynamic display of the second identification information ends, in response to the first judgment result by the first judgment executed during a period in which the dynamic display of the second identification information is being displayed and the end condition is established by the specific benefit being awarded in response to the second identification information.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a specific win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is played after a performance is executed to indicate that the lottery result is a win, and after the special game is completed, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game's success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

In addition, a configuration has been proposed in which a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set as the duration of the advantageous state set after the bonus play ends, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the first period, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the second period are executed, allowing the player to easily understand the lottery results.

However, there was a drawback in that the gameplay could easily become monotonous, reducing interest in the game.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in gaming.

According to gaming machine G1, a bonus is awarded in response to the second identification information, and a termination condition is met in which the first state is not set for a long time. By executing a first determination during the dynamic display period of the second identification information, the establishment of the termination condition can be avoided based on the result of the first determination. This makes it possible to extend the setting period of the first state depending on the playing method of the player, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine G1, the termination condition is met when the specific benefit is awarded a predetermined number of times in succession.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 has the effect of limiting the number of times the first state is set consecutively, thereby preventing excessive gambling.

A gaming machine G3, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine G1 or G2, a long dynamic display period is set to be easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information during which the specific benefit is awarded when the end condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 and G2, gaming machine G3 can lengthen the period until the end condition is met, which gives the player more opportunities to avoid the end condition being met.

A gaming machine G4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines G1 to G3, a specific performance is executed during the period in which the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, during which the specific benefit is awarded when the end condition is met.

With gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines G1 to G3, a specific presentation is executed, which allows the player to easily determine that the end condition has been met, and allows the player to easily recognize the timing to switch to a game that executes the first determination.

<Characteristic Group H> (Derivation of Group G)
a determination means capable of executing a first determination and a second determination, a display means capable of displaying a first identification for indicating a first determination result corresponding to the first determination made by the determination means and a second identification for indicating the second determination, a dynamic display means capable of displaying the identification in a manner for indicating the first determination result or the second determination result after dynamically displaying the first identification or the second identification on the display means, a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the first identification or the second identification is displayed in a manner for indicating a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result, and a state setting means for setting a first state in which a specific benefit is awarded as the benefit based on a predetermined value, thereby making it easier for the discrimination means to make the first or second discrimination; a setting control means for setting the first state as a state after the specific benefit is awarded until an end condition is established, when the specific benefit is awarded in a state in which the first state is set, until an end condition is established, and a release setting means for releasing the end condition during a period in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, in which the end condition is established by the award of the specific benefit in response to the second identification information.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a specific win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is played after a performance is executed to indicate that the lottery result is a win, and after the special game is completed, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game's success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

In addition, a configuration has been proposed in which a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set as the duration of the advantageous state set after the bonus play ends, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the first period, and a presentation indicating that a win has been won that sets the advantageous state for the second period are executed, allowing the player to easily understand the lottery results.

However, there was a drawback in that the gameplay could easily become monotonous, reducing interest in the game.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, the release setting means can prevent the first state from continuing and setting an end condition from being met, which would occur if a bonus were awarded in response to the second identification information. This makes it possible to extend the setting period of the first state depending on the player's playing method, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine H2 is characterized in that in gaming machine H1, the termination condition is met when the specific benefit is awarded a predetermined number of times in succession.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 has the effect of limiting the number of times the first state is set consecutively, thereby preventing excessive gambling.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H1 or H2, the dynamic display period of the second identification information during which the specific benefit is awarded when the end condition is met is set to be a long dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines H1 and H2, gaming machine H3 has the effect of lengthening the period until the end condition is met, thereby giving the player more opportunities to avoid the end condition being met.

<Characteristics Group I>
a display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and then displaying the identification information in a manner indicating the result of the determination, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a manner indicating a specific result of the determination, the gaming machine I1 being characterized by having a specific condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is met, a storage means for storing specific information based on the determination by the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is met, and a performance execution means for executing a first performance based on the specific information being stored in the first period, and for executing a second performance different from the first performance based on the specific information being stored in a second period different from the first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine I1, specific information is stored for the first and second periods, and the effects that are executed can be changed, so effects can be executed that match the set state, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine I2, characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, the specific condition determination means determines whether the specific condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, the storage means stores count information as the specific information based on the determination that the specific condition is met, the count information is updated according to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the gaming machine is capable of executing settings that are advantageous to the player when the count information is predetermined information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, gaming machine I2 stores count information when a specific condition is met, and during the period when the count information is a specific information, the setting is favorable to the player. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to make the ball enter the ball entry means and to meet a specific condition, in addition to the specific determination result being determined by the determination means, and thus further increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that in the second period of gaming machine I1 or I2, the determination by the determination means is set to be more favorable to the player than in the first period, and the second presentation is a presentation that makes it more difficult to identify that the specific information has been stored than in the first presentation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines I1 and I2, gaming machine I3 makes it difficult to identify that specific information has been stored during the second period, allowing the player to focus on the discrimination of the discrimination means that is more likely to make a judgment advantageous to the player, and thus enabling the execution of presentations more suited to the state of the game.

<Characteristics Group J>
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the determination, a dynamic display means for displaying the identification information in a manner showing the result of the determination on the display means and then displaying the identification information in a manner showing the result of the determination, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a manner showing a specific result of the determination, the gaming machine having: a determination means for executing a performance during a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed; a specific condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is met; and a storage means for storing specific information based on the determination by the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is met, the performance execution means being capable of executing a first performance in a first period in which notification information showing that the specific information has been stored is more difficult to identify than in a second period which is set after the first period has elapsed, and being capable of executing a second performance by transitioning to the second period in which the specific information has been stored.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine J1, during the first period, it is difficult to recognize that specific information has been stored, but during the subsequent second period, the second presentation makes it possible to recognize that specific information has been stored. This allows the player to recognize that specific information has been stored with a time lag, and during the first period, the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is focused on, and during the subsequent second period, the player can be made aware of whether specific information has been stored. This provides an easy-to-understand game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine J1, the first period is set to a period that is more advantageous to the player than the second period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, gaming machine J2 has the effect that, when the first period is favorable, the player is made to focus on the first presentation corresponding to the judgment result, making the first period seem even more favorable.

Gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine J1 or J2, the first period can be set based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines J1 and J2, gaming machine J3 has the effect of setting the first period by determining that a specific determination result has been obtained, so that an advantageous period can be set for the player by the determination by the determination means, and the player can be made to anticipate that the first period will be set, thereby concentrating on the dynamic display of the identification information.

A gaming machine J4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines J1 to J3, the specific information is count information determined when a specific condition is met, and when the first period is transitioned to the second period, a notification mode corresponding to the count information is executed as the second performance.

According to gaming machine J4, in any of gaming machines J1 to J3, the count information is made difficult to distinguish during the first period, which has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the first period without being hindered by the count information.

<Feature K group>
a display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and then displaying the identification information in a manner indicating the result of the determination; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a manner indicating a specific result of the determination; and a specific condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is met; and a storage means for storing specific information based on the determination by the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is met, wherein the execution conditions of a presentation executed based on the specific condition being met are variable between a first period and a second period different from the first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine K1, the execution conditions for an effect that is executed based on the fulfillment of a specific condition are variable between the first and second periods, so the execution timing of an effect that allows the player to recognize that a specific condition has been fulfilled can be varied depending on the period, and there is an effect that the entertainment value of the game can be increased by executing the effect in accordance with the state of the game.

A gaming machine K2 is characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, and the specific condition determination means executes a determination as to whether the specific condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, and count information is stored as the specific information based on the fulfillment of the specific condition.

According to gaming machine K2, a specific condition can be fulfilled by making the ball enter the ball entry means, which has the effect of increasing the player's desire to enter the ball entry means and further enhancing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it has an update means capable of updating the count information in response to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed in the gaming machine K2, and a setting means capable of setting the count information to an advantage of the player based on the count information being a predetermined value.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K2, gaming machine K3 has the effect of increasing the value of achieving a specific condition, since the count information is stored and the settings are set to be advantageous to the player up to a certain number of dynamic displays.

<Feature L group>
a state setting means for setting one state from a plurality of states including a first state and a second state different from the first state based on a result of the determination by the determination means; a display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination; a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information and then displaying the identification information in a manner indicating the result of the determination; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a manner indicating a specific result of the determination, the gaming machine L1 being characterized in having: a specific condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is met; a storage means for storing specific information based on the determination by the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is met; and an effect execution means for executing an effect corresponding to the type of the stored specific information in correspondence with the state set by the state setting means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine L1, the effect execution means can execute a corresponding effect depending on the type of specific information stored and the set state, so it is possible to execute an effect that matches the state of the game, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine L2, which has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, the specific condition determination means determines whether the specific condition is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, the storage means stores count information as the specific information based on the determination that the specific condition is met, the count information is updated according to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the gaming machine is capable of executing settings that are advantageous to the player when the count information is predetermined information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L1, gaming machine L2 stores count information when a specific condition is met, and during the period when the count information is a specific information, the setting is favorable to the player. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to make the ball enter the ball entry means and to meet a specific condition, in addition to the specific determination result being determined by the determination means, and thus further increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the effect execution means in gaming machine L2 is capable of executing a first effect that makes it possible to identify that the count information has been stored based on the fact that specific count information has been stored as the count information, and is capable of executing a second effect that makes it more difficult to identify that the count information has been stored than the first effect based on the fact that count information different from the specific count information has been stored.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L2, gaming machine L3 can vary the degree to which a player can recognize that count information has been stored depending on the type of count information stored, which has the effect of allowing the player to vary the degree to which they pay attention to the fact that count information has been stored, making it easier to understand how the game is played.

Among the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. Also, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. In particular, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information, using balls as a gaming medium, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1369 to 1423, a tenth embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1369 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, Fig. 1370 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 1371 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side for the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1369. Also, the top side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1369 will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side as the lower (lower) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 1370) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Fig. 1369, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1369), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board A13 (see FIG. 1370) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board A13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 1372) that launches balls into the front area of the game board A13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board A13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1369) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at approximately the center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board A13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1369), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Fig. 1372). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 1370) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1369) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 1370) on the front of the game board A13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board A13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board A13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 1370, the game board A13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding balls to a base plate A60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side (or front side) of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1369).

The base plate A60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board A13 with tapping screws or the like. The base plate A60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board A13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1369) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board A13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 1370.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board A13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1369) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board A13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board A13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Fig. 1372) to the top of the game board A13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of Fig. 1370) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board A13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of Fig. 1370) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 1370), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 1372), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), in other words, a state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability change) includes a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than when the probability change is in progress. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a jackpot increases, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, which is neither a probability change nor a time-saving state (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of a jackpot for the second symbol is increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

The state change of the electric role 640a between the open state and the closed state occurs by the opening and closing action of an opening and closing plate that can slide back and forth. When the electric role 640a is in the open state, the opening and closing plate is retracted rearward from the front surface of the base plate A60, allowing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 side, and when the electric role 640a is in the closed state, the opening and closing plate blocks the space between the game area and the second winning opening 640, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 (the ball is swept to the left).

The change between the open and closed states of the electric device 640a may be caused by the opening and closing of an opening and closing plate that has a rotating shaft at the bottom end and rotates and displaces in a manner that tilts or stands up toward the play area. In this case, when the electric device 640a is in the open state, it is configured so that the ball is easily guided along the top surface of the opening and closing plate to the second winning hole 640, and when the electric device 640a is in the closed state, the opening and closing plate can be configured to block the gap between the play area and the second winning hole 640, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are a number of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged at a position visible through the center of the play area (behind the window of the base plate A60). The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern in synchronization with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 (initial winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame A86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 1372), so that, for example, three symbol rows, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1372) is performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device 640a of the second winning slot 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 640 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board A13 in the area to the right of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the ball launched at the game board A13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second pattern is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second pattern display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The change in the second pattern may be displayed by switching on and off a number of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be displayed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern hold lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of through gates 67 that can be installed is not limited to one, but may be, for example, two.

The installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, on the left, right, or bottom of the variable display unit 80. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, so the second symbol reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board A13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1372), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1372), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. Note that the location of the second winning hole 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, or it may be to the left of the center of the game area.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 640a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 640 than during normal play.

The probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot to be selected when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the electric device 640a found in the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by shooting the ball toward the first winning port 64, which does not have the electric device 640a, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "left shot") and having the ball win at the first winning port 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the big win lottery.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 640a attached to the second winning slot 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning slot 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device 640a and aiming for a 15R special bonus jackpot by winning at the second winning slot 640.

Unlike the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 640 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit", and so that a ball shot with a "left hit" does not pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can request the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, by adding a game feature that changes the way the ball is shot, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 1370) is provided to the right of the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and a game state may be formed as a special game state. In addition, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or above.

In the lower right corner of the game board A13, an attachment space K1 is provided for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 (see Figure 1369) in the front frame 14.

The game board A13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The game board A13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 1371, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 1372). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the launch control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 1372). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 1372. FIG. 1372 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing plate of the specific winning port 65a in the forward and backward directions and a solenoid for driving the electric role 640a, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and to retain (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. The other devices 228 include the drive motors AMT1, AMT2, AMT3, AMT4, etc.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The display of various images on the third pattern display device 81 is perceived by the player as being layered, with the rear image and the image of the third pattern, etc., which is positioned in front of the rear image as described above. When the third pattern display device 81 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, each layer corresponds to a number of layers in which liquid crystal is arranged, and the state of the liquid crystal in each layer is switched to determine which layer's display is to be viewed.

Other embodiments of the third symbol display device 81 are also possible. For example, it may be configured as a rotating drum, and the player may be notified by a symbol that is visible when the rotating drum is stopped. Alternatively, it may be possible to configure a situation in which a plurality of displaceable components arranged in layers that overlap one another and are configured to be displaceable are visible inside the center frame 86, and the plurality of components may be configured to allow the player to see specific symbols, etc.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 1371). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24-volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 1371) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200 will be described. Figure 1373 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200, and Figure 1374 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200. Note that in Figures 1373 and 1374, the liquid crystal display device (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening A211a of the rear case A210 is omitted, and the rear side is shown as being visible through the opening A211a. Also, in the explanation of Figures 1373 and 1374, reference will be made to Figure 1370 as appropriate.

The operating unit A200 includes a rear case A210 formed in a box shape with the front side open from a bottom wall A211 and an outer wall A212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall A211. The rear case A210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening A211a in the center of the bottom wall A211. The opening A211a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case A210 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall A212 along the rear surface of the game board A13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate portion A213 that is supported by a surface of the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 1370).

With the support plate portion A213 supported by the surface of the game board A13, the game board A13 and the operating unit A200 can be fixed together by screwing a fastening screw into the base plate A60 of the game board A13, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board A13 and the operating unit A200.

A pair of displacement control devices A214 are disposed on the rear side of the rear case A210. The displacement control devices A214 are configured to be able to change between a protruding state and a immersed state by manual operation from the rear of the rear case A210, and in the protruding state, they control the movable parts (first operating unit A400 and second operating unit A500) described below from starting to move from the performance standby state.

By adopting the displacement control device A214, it is possible to facilitate shipping and transporting the pachinko machine 10, even when the central opening of the base plate A60 is blocked by the light guide plate unit A700, as in this embodiment.

In more detail, in the past, the displacement of the movable parts was suppressed by stuffing the area in which the movable parts would displace with shock-absorbing material (cushioning material such as cotton) and removing the shock-absorbing material after the game arrived at the game hall, which sometimes prevented the movable parts from displacing during shipping or transportation. However, when the central opening of the base plate A60 is blocked as in this embodiment, there is no penetration for removing the shock-absorbing material, and therefore the shock-absorbing material cannot be removed without disassembling the game board A13 and the back case A210, which can cause a great burden on the game hall.

To address this issue, this embodiment employs a displacement restriction device A214. This allows the state of the displacement restriction device A214 to be switched between a protruding state in which the movement of the movable parts is restricted, and a recessed state in which the restriction is released, without releasing the fixation of the game board A13 and the rear case A210.

The pair of displacement restriction devices A214 are arranged as members that restrict the movement of different movable parts. In other words, if the number of movable parts increases or decreases, this can be accommodated by increasing or decreasing the number of displacement restriction devices A214.

The base plate A60 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured to make it easy for the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side. This allows the structures arranged on the back side to be seen regardless of the shape or arrangement of the base plate A60, and can be used for various effects. Note that if there are areas that you do not want the player to see, you can deal with this by attaching a seal material with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance), etc.

The operation unit A200 is disposed on the rear side of the game board A13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit A200 includes a rear case A210, a first operation unit A400 disposed on the inner right part and upper part of the rear case A210 when viewed from the front and disposed near the front side of the rear case A210, a second operation unit A500 disposed on the inner left part and upper part of the rear case A210 when viewed from the front and disposed between the first operation unit A400 and the bottom wall part A211 of the rear case A210, a third operation unit A600 disposed on the inner lower part of the rear case A210 when viewed from the front, and a light guide plate unit A700 fastened and fixed to the front end surface of the outer wall part A212 of the rear case A210 in front of the first operation unit A400.

Specifically, the third operating unit A600 is fastened to the bottom wall A211 of the rear case A210 at a lower position of the opening A211a, and the second operating unit A500 is fastened to the bottom wall A211 of the rear case A210 at a left position and an upper position of the opening A211a. The first operating unit A400 is fastened to the bottom wall A211 of the rear case A210 at a right position of the opening A211a, and is fastened to the front side of the second operating unit A500 at an upper position of the opening A211a. First, an overview of the operation control of this operating unit A200 will be described.

Figures 1375 to 1380 are front views of the operating unit A200 showing an example of the operation control of the operating unit A200. Figure 1375 illustrates the first operating unit A400, the second operating unit A500, and the third operating unit A600 in a performance standby state, and Figure 1376 illustrates the first operating unit A400 in an extended state, and the second operating unit A500 and the third operating unit A600 in a performance standby state.

Furthermore, FIG. 1377 illustrates the second operating unit A500 in an extended state, and the first operating unit A400 and the third operating unit A600 in a performance standby state, FIG. 1378 illustrates the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 in an extended state, and the third operating unit A600 in a performance standby state, and FIG. 1379 illustrates the third operating unit A600 in an extended state, and the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 in a performance standby state.

Figure 1380 also shows the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 after rotating from the performance standby state without any change in external shape, and the third operating unit A600 after rising while maintaining the external shape in the performance standby state.

In addition, in Fig. 1375 to Fig. 1380, the shape surrounded by the edge of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b of the light guide plate unit A700, the edge of the decorative member A808, and the edge of the center frame A86 is shown by imaginary lines. The shape surrounded by this imaginary line is the actual size at which the third pattern display device 81 can be seen when viewed from the front, and outside the shape surrounded by this imaginary line (especially on the left and right sides), the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b of the light guide plate unit A700 and the decorative member A808 are hidden, so that the visibility of the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 in the retracted state can be reduced.

As shown in Fig. 1376 to Fig. 1378, the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit A400 and the displacement trace of the second operating unit A500 partially overlap when viewed from the front, but since the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit A400 and the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit A500 are shifted front to back (do not overlap when viewed from above), the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 do not collide with each other during operation. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 1378, both the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 can be in an extended state.

As shown in Fig. 1376 to Fig. 1379, the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A500 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit A600 when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A500 is in the extended state, if the third operating unit A600 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A500 from the performance standby state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit A600 is in the performance standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit A600 from the performance standby state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit A400 is in the performance standby state and the second operation unit A500 is in the performance standby state, thereby making it possible to avoid collision between the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A500 and the third operation unit A600. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first operation unit A400, the second operation unit A500, and the third operation unit A600 (it is possible to allow the displacement trajectories to overlap when viewed from the front).

The operation of the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 is configured to be performed in such a manner that the length and width of the rotating rotation operation units A400b and A500b change during the rotation operation, as will be described in detail later.

The operation mode of the third operating unit A600 is configured so that the lifting and lowering operation of the opening and closing operating unit A600b and the opening and closing operation of the moving member A650 can be performed at different times. In other words, the opening and closing operation of the moving member A650 is controlled to be performed when the opening and closing operating unit A600b is positioned at the upper end position.

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation timing of each operating unit A400, A500, and A600 may be controlled to be staggered in anticipation of the possibility of a collision, but if the possibility of a collision can be eliminated from the beginning, it is of course possible to drive them simultaneously. Figure 1380 shows a case in which each operating unit A400, A500, and A600 is driven simultaneously from a standby state and moves to a position where they will not collide with each other.

In other words, the state change that moves each of the operating units A400, A500, and A600 from a standby state to the state shown in FIG. 1380 can be realized by driving the drive devices that drive each of the operating units A400, A500, and A600, provided that each of the operating units A400, A500, and A600 is in a standby state, so that it is possible to realize a unified operation performance by the multiple operating units A400, A500, and A600.

In the state shown in FIG. 1380, the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 are in a posture immediately before the length and width of the rotational operating units A400b, A500b begin to change during the rotational operation. In other words, if further tilting occurs, the driving force will be consumed in changing the length and width of the rotational operating units A400b, A500b, and the operating resistance of the rotational operating units A400b, A500b will increase. Therefore, it is possible to easily stop the operating units A400, A500 in the posture shown in FIG. 1380, where the operating resistance begins to change.

As the tilting motion continues, the amount of change in the length and width of the rotational motion units A400b and A500b increases, and the motion resistance increases accordingly. This resistance creates a change in motion resistance similar to the elastic force of a spring, making it easier to maintain the motion units A400 and A500 in the position shown in FIG. 1380, and to return them to their original position even if they have been tilted too far.

As described below, the third operating unit A600 has a drive unit used for lifting and lowering operations that is separate from the drive unit that opens and closes the moving member A650. By only driving the drive unit used for lifting and lowering operations and not driving the moving member A650, it is possible to easily control the third operating unit A600 to stop in the state shown in FIG. 1380.

In this way, it is possible to execute control to drive the first operating unit A400, the second operating unit A500, and the third operating unit A600 simultaneously, realizing a sense of unity in operation while avoiding collisions between the operating units A400, A500, and A600.

The range in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 located behind it can be seen changes according to the positioning of each operating unit A400, A500, A600. In other words, when all of the operating units A400, A500, A600 are in a performance standby state, the range (area) in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be seen is at its largest (see FIG. 1375), and the range (area and position) in which the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is hidden is configured to differ according to the operating units A400, A500, A600 that are in a protruding state.

The extent to which the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is hidden (area and position) also differs depending on the extent to which each operating unit A400, A500, A600 extends from the performance standby state. Also, for example, even when the same operating unit (e.g., first operating unit A400) is operating, the amount of operation and the external shape of the rotational operating unit A400b are different between the state shown in FIG. 1376 and the state shown in FIG. 1380 (the extended position side is larger), so the extent to which the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is hidden (area and position) differs.

In addition, even if the same operating unit (e.g., third operating unit A600) is operating, the state shown in FIG. 1379 and the state shown in FIG. 1380 have the same up-down position, but the left-right arrangement of the movable member A650 is different, resulting in a different range (area and position) of the hidden display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, even if multiple identical operating units (e.g., first operating unit A400 and second operating unit A500) are operating, the state shown in FIG. 1378 differs from the state shown in FIG. 1380 in terms of whether or not the multiple operating units A400, A500 intersect, and therefore the number of ranges that are continuously visible as ranges that are not hidden by the multiple operating units A400, A500 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (four above, below, left and right in FIG. 1378, and one in FIG. 1380) differs.

In this way, by providing multiple ranges for hiding the display area of the third pattern display device 81 by each operating unit A400, A500, and A600, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations that allow the display of the third pattern display device 81 to be viewed together with each operating unit A400, A500, and A600.

In other words, the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to develop a display performance in the range that is not hidden by each of the operating units A400, A500, and A600. Since the range that is hidden by each of the operating units A400, A500, and A600 can be changed in multiple types, it is possible to increase the variation in the display performance in the range that is not hidden by each of the operating units A400, A500, and A600, thereby improving the presentation effect of the display performance.

For example, when a large, continuously visible display area is maintained as in FIG. 1380, the player can be relaxed by viewing an animation on the full screen, whereas when the display area is viewed as being divided as in FIG. 1376, FIG. 1377 or FIG. 1378, the displays in each divided area can be differentiated (for example, as displays distinguished between advantageous and unfavorable developments) and one of these displays can be selected to determine the subsequent development of the presentation, thereby increasing attention to the displays in each divided area.

Next, the first operating unit A400 will be described with reference to Figs. 1381 to 1394. Fig. 1381 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and Fig. 1382 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400.

The first operating unit A400 comprises a support unit A400a held in the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373) and a rotation operating unit A400b supported on the support unit A400a so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft AJ1 located at the lower right side when viewed from the front.

In the first operating unit A400, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed on the upper left side, and the rotating shaft AJ1 is disposed on the lower right side. This simplifies the structure around the rotating shaft AJ1 compared to when the drive motor AMT1 is disposed near the rotating shaft AJ1, and allows the rotating shaft AJ1 to be positioned closer to the right corner.

Furthermore, the front-to-rear width of the first operating unit A400 can be made shorter than when the driving motor AMT1 is arranged on the front or rear side of the rotary operating unit A400b, as occurs when the driving motor AMT1 is arranged near the rotary shaft rod AJ1. Therefore, sufficient space can be secured when multiple movable parts are stacked in the front-to-rear direction of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373).

Fig. 1383 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and Fig. 1384 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. In Figs. 1383 and 1384, the support unit A400a is shown disassembled, and the rotation operating unit A400b is shown in a non-disassembled state.

The support unit A400a includes a fixed support unit A410 that is fastened to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373), and a drive transmission unit A420 that has a drive motor AMT1 that is fixed in position to the fixed support unit A410 and is configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the rotational motion unit A400b.

The fixed support unit A410 includes a vertical member A411 fastened to the right side of the bottom wall A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373) when viewed from the front, a horizontal member A413 arranged opposite the upper end side of the vertical member A411 in the front-rear direction, a reinforcing member A415 formed by bending a sheet metal member disposed between the horizontal member A413 and the vertical member A411 forward, and an upper cover member A417 fastened to the horizontal member A413 in such a manner that the bent portion of the reinforcing member A415 is sandwiched between the horizontal member A413 and the reinforcing member A415.

The vertical member A411 includes a cylindrical support portion A411a through which the rotation shaft rod AJ1 of the rotation operation unit A400b is inserted, a non-performance hole A411b through which the protruding tip of the displacement control device A214 (see FIG. 1374) disposed on the lower right side is inserted, a repair hole A411c formed through the hole large enough to allow a fastening screw to be attached and removed for maintenance purposes, and a detection sensor A411d for detecting whether the first operation unit A400 is in a performance standby state or an extended state by detecting the position of the rotation operation unit A400b.

The non-performance hole A411b is formed in a location that is concealed by the decorative member A808 on the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1376). Therefore, regardless of the position of the rotational motion unit A400b, it is easy to prevent the player from seeing the displacement control device A214 (see FIG. 1374) through the non-performance hole A411b.

This concealing effect also occurs with the upper displacement regulation device A214. That is, the upper displacement regulation device A214 is intended to regulate the displacement of the second operating unit A500, but by being concealed by the upper decorative member A808, it is also possible to easily prevent the displacement regulation device A214 from being seen by the player.

The detection sensor A411d is usually a photocoupler type sensor, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be a magnetic sensor or a contact type sensor.

The horizontally long member A413 includes a plate-shaped main body A413a formed from a resin material in the shape of a horizontally long plate, a guide elongated hole A414 formed through the plate-shaped main body A413a, a motor support hole A413b formed through the plate-shaped main body A413a in a bulging portion that bulges forward at the left end side of the plate-shaped main body A413a so as to be able to support the drive motor MT1, and a plate-shaped extension portion A413d that extends forward from the upper end of the plate-shaped main body A413a in a plate-like shape and has multiple protrusions A413c with female threads formed on the extension tip side.

The reinforcing member A415 is a member formed by bending a metal plate, and includes a plate-shaped main body A415a that is arranged to be attached to the back side of the plate-shaped main body A413a and is sandwiched between the vertical member A411 and the horizontal member A413 in an assembled state (see FIG. 1381), a bent plate A415c that is bent from the upper end of the plate-shaped main body A415a to the front side and has a plurality of through holes A415b through which the plurality of protrusions A413c can be inserted, a pair of retaining bent portions A415d that are bent from the bent plate A415c and have through holes through which the metal rod AMB1 can be inserted, and a long hole A415e that is drilled in a shape that surrounds the guide long hole A414 from the outside.

The upper cover member A417 is a member formed from a resin material, and includes a plate-shaped main body A417a that is fastened to the horizontal member A413 by a fastening screw that is screwed into the female thread of the protrusion A413c that is inserted into the through hole A415b in a positional relationship in which the reinforcing member A415 is sandwiched between the plate-shaped main body A417a and the horizontal member A413, a biasing spring A417b whose one end is supported by the plate-shaped main body A417a, and a damper member A417c whose other end is supported by the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b and which is biased to the right end of the movable range extending in the left-right direction by the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b.

The drive transmission unit A420 includes a support member A421, which is a sheet metal member on whose left end the drive motor AMT1 is supported and which is fastened to the horizontal member A413 at both left and right ends, a transmission mechanism A423 composed of a plurality of rotating members rotatably supported on the front side of the support member A421, a covering cover A425 fastened to the support member A421 so as to cover the rotating members of the transmission mechanism A423 from the front side, and a connecting mechanism A427 which connects the transmission mechanism A423 to the rotation operation unit A400b.

The transmission mechanism A423 includes a ring-shaped belt A423a with teeth formed on the inner circumference, a pair of left and right pulleys A423b, A423c with teeth formed on the outer circumference that mesh with the teeth of the belt A423a and rotatably supported on the columnar portion A421a of the support member A421 so as to be able to support the belt A423a without slack, a drive gear A423d fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT1 so as not to move relative to it, and a transmission gear A423f rotatably supported on the columnar portion A421a of the support member A421 so as to mesh with the gear portion A423e formed on the back side of the left pulley A423c and the drive gear A423d.

The covering cover A425 is not only fastened to the female screw formed on the main plate portion of the support member A421, but also fastened to the female screw formed on the tip of the columnar portion A421a that supports the pulleys A423b, A423c and the transmission gear A423f. This improves the rigidity of the columnar portion A421a and stabilizes the rotation of the pulleys A423b, A423c and the transmission gear A423f.

The connecting mechanism A427 includes a connecting member A427a to which the upper end side of the rotational motion unit A400b is connected and which receives the metal bar AMB1 in a recess A427b on the front side, so that the direction of operation is left and right; a prevention member A427c which is fastened and fixed to the connecting member A427a so as to cover the recess A427b of the connecting member A427a from the front side, thereby preventing the metal bar AMB1 from falling out from between the connecting member A427a and the preventing member A427a; and a belt fixing member A427d which is fastened and fixed to the preventing member A427c in an arrangement in which the belt A423a is sandwiched between the preventing member A427c and the preventing member A427c.

A cylindrical collar A427f through which the metal bar AMB1 is inserted is disposed in the pair of recesses A427b, and a pulley A427g that supports the metal bar AMB1 in a groove on the outer periphery while it is inserted into the collar is rotatably supported by the connecting member A427a. This makes it easier to prevent the position of the connecting member A427a relative to the metal bar AMB1 from shifting, and reduces the operating resistance.

The upper surface of the belt fixing member A427d, which faces the belt A423a, is formed with an engagement protrusion A427h that corresponds to the tooth shape formed on the inner circumference of the belt A423a. The belt A423a is positioned so that this engagement protrusion A427h meshes with the teeth of the belt A423a, and the prevention member A427c is positioned facing the outer circumference of the belt A423a (above the upper belt A423a), thereby fastening and fixing the belt fixing member A427d and the prevention member A427c.

This prevents the belt A423a from falling off the engagement protrusion A427h. Also, unlike when the belt A423a is fixed by pressing it, it is possible to prevent the belt A423a from slipping relative to the connecting mechanism A427 while improving the durability of the belt A423a.

With this structure, the drive motor AMT1 is driven to rotate, and the left pulley A423c is rotated through meshing transmission, causing the portion of the belt A423a extending to the left and right to move left and right, and the connecting mechanism A427 is guided by the metal bar AMB1 to move left and right.

The connecting member A427a has a guide slot A427e extending in the vertical direction, through which the columnar protrusion A448 of the rotational motion unit A400b is inserted. The columnar protrusion A448 of the rotational motion unit A400b is inserted into the guide slot A427e and the guide slot A414 of the fixed support unit A410, so that as the connecting mechanism A427 moves left and right, the columnar protrusion A448 of the rotational motion unit A400b moves up and down and left and right.

In this way, a driving force is transmitted to the rotational motion unit A400b via the connecting mechanism A427, which moves in the left-right direction, and the rotational motion unit A400b is displaced. Details of the rotational motion unit A400b are described below.

Figure 1385 is an exploded front oblique view of rotational motion unit A400b, and Figure 1386 is an exploded rear oblique view of rotational motion unit A400b. As shown in FIG. 1385 and FIG. 1386, the rotational motion unit A400b includes a base plate member A430 with a rotational shaft rod AJ1 fitted to its lower end, a moving member A440 connected to the base plate member A430 so as to be slidable in a linear direction passing through the rotational shaft rod AJ1 on a plane perpendicular to the rotational shaft rod AJ1, a direction switching member A450 inserted through the base plate member A430 and the moving member A440 and movable in a direction perpendicular to the sliding movement of the moving member A440, a decorative member A460 for showing the player that the length of the short side of the rotational motion unit 400b changes as the position or posture of the direction switching member A450 changes due to the movement of the direction switching member A450, and a covering member A470 that is fitted or fastened to the base plate member A430 so as to arrange the direction switching member A450 in the space formed between the base plate member A430 and the direction switching member A450, and is formed in a shape that covers the direction switching member A450 from the front side.

The base plate member A430 includes a long plate-like plate body A431 into which the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is fitted, a pair of upper and lower guide elongated holes A432 drilled in the plate body A431 on the same straight line passing through the rotary shaft rod AJ1, a plurality of auxiliary elongated holes A433 drilled between the pair of guide elongated holes A432 so as to extend in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the guide elongated holes A432 extend, and a plurality of auxiliary elongated holes A433 drilled in the plate body A431 near the lower end of the upper guide elongated hole A432. The plate-shaped body A431 is provided with a pair of support elongated holes A434 formed as elongated holes parallel to the guide elongated holes A432 at the short end of the plate-shaped body A431, a malfunction prevention tube portion A435 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the plate-shaped body A431 to the rear side, a pair of guide extension portions A436 that protrude from the front of the lower end of the plate-shaped body A431 and extend parallel to the straight line along which the guide elongated holes A432 are arranged, and a plate-shaped detection piece A437 that protrudes downward in a plate shape from the lower end of the plate-shaped body A431.

The malfunction prevention tube A435 is a through hole formed to a size that allows the protruding tip of the right-side displacement restriction device A214 (see FIG. 1374) to be inserted. This malfunction prevention tube A435 is positioned in front of the non-performance hole A411b (see FIG. 1376) when the first operating unit A400 is in a performance standby state.

When the protruding tip of the displacement restriction device A214 is brought into a protruding state in which it protrudes forward, the protruding tip passes through the non-performance hole A411b and is inserted into the malfunction prevention tube portion A435, thereby restricting the rotational movement of the rotational movement unit A400b.

The plate-shaped detection piece A437 is formed in a front-rear position that allows it to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d (see FIG. 1383). The plate-shaped detection piece A437 is formed on the side (back side) where the rotating shaft rod AJ1 is supported. This minimizes the positional deviation of the plate-shaped detection piece A437 even if the rotating shaft rod AJ1 is bent (tilted) due to deformation of the rotating shaft rod AJ1, making it easier to avoid the plate-shaped detection piece A437 being placed in a position that deviates from the front-rear position that fits into the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d.

The position of the plate-shaped detection piece A437 is detected by the detection sensor A411d (see FIG. 1383), so that the posture of the rotational motion unit A400b can be grasped, and therefore, even if multiple motion units A400 to A600 are driven by separate drive sources, collisions between them can be avoided.

The movable member A440 is configured to be able to perform an effect in which the decorative plate A441 on the front side is brightly illuminated by light irradiated from the light emitting means of the light emitting board arranged inside, and is equipped with a plate-shaped main body A442 arranged to sandwich the light emitting board between the plate-shaped main body A442 and the decorative plate A441, a pair of insertion protrusions A443 protruding from the back surface of the plate-shaped main body A442, a plurality of functional long holes A444 drilled in a shape combining the up-down direction and the left-right inclination direction at a position corresponding to the auxiliary long hole A433 of the base plate member A430, an extension part A445 extending parallel to the straight line on which the pair of insertion protrusions A443 are arranged, and a columnar protrusion part A448 protruding from the upper right corner of the plate-shaped main body A422 to the back side and inserted into the guide long hole A427e (see FIG. 1383) of the drive transmission unit A420.

The decorative plate A441 has a translucent area A441a extending in the longitudinal direction at the center of the translucent area A441a, and a plated area A441b on both sides of the translucent area A441a in the translucent area A441a.

As a result, even if the placement of the board is restricted to the center in the short side direction due to the formation of the functional long hole A444, the light emission effect is achieved in the translucent area A441a near the center in the short side direction, and the other plated area A441b uses reflection from the plating to achieve the effect, thereby avoiding a decrease in the presentation effect.

The insertion protrusion A443 is inserted into the long guide hole A432 of the base plate member A430 and is configured to be prevented from falling out of the long guide hole A432 by the screw and collar member AC1 screwed into the tip.

The functional long hole A444 is composed of four long holes: a pair of upper and lower long holes and another pair of upper and lower long holes that are inverted by a straight line connecting a pair of insertion protrusions A443, and the shapes of the long holes are the same except for the inversion relationship.

Of the multiple functional long holes A444, a pair of upper and lower long holes are formed at a position where one of the long holes is translated along a straight line connecting a pair of insertion protrusions A443. In other words, the corresponding parts of the pair of upper and lower long holes extend on the same straight line or maintain a relationship of being arranged in parallel.

The extension portion A445 is formed with a width and length slightly shorter than the distance between the pair of guide extension portions A436 of the base plate member A430, and functions as a guide when the moving member A440 moves. The extension portion A445 has a U-shaped cross section in the extension direction that is open on the front side, and this shape not only improves rigidity but also prevents breakage of the wiring A449 connected to the board. In other words, by holding the wiring A449 on the extension portion A445 from the open side of the U shape, contact between other moving members and the wiring A449 can be avoided.

The wiring A449 is made of a flat cable and is made up of wiring that can bend in a direction corresponding to the rotation around the rotating shaft AJ1 and wiring that can bend in the direction in which the extension portion A445 extends.

In this embodiment, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed at a position away from the rotating shaft rod AJ1 (see FIG. 1382), which makes it easier to secure space around the rotating shaft rod AJ1, and this space can be used as space for the wiring A449 to flex. This makes it possible to prevent excessive load from being applied to the wiring A449, and improves the durability of the wiring A449.

The direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 will be described together. The direction switching member A450 is composed of a pair of left and right members, and includes a plate-shaped main body A451, a pair of upper and lower columnar members A452 protruding from the back surface on the left and right inner parts of the plate-shaped main body A451, and a pair of upper and lower through holes A453 drilled on the left and right outer parts of the plate-shaped main body A451.

The columnar portion A452 is inserted in turn through the functional long hole A444 of the movable member A440 and the auxiliary long hole A433 of the base plate member A430, and can be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443 depending on the arrangement of the movable member A440. In other words, depending on the arrangement of the movable member A440, the direction switching member A450 can be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443 (can be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the movable member A440).

The decorative member A460 comprises a pair of left and right parallel moving members A461 and a pair of left and right rotational moving members A465. The parallel moving members A461 comprise a plate-shaped main body A462, a columnar portion A463 protruding from the lower corners on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped main body A462 toward the rear side, and a long columnar portion A464 protruding from the center side on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped main body A462 toward the rear side.

The rotational movement member A465 includes a plate-shaped main body A466, a columnar portion A467 protruding from the rear surface at the upper end of the plate-shaped main body A466, and a through hole A468 drilled below the columnar portion A467.

The columnar portion A463 has a female thread formed at the tip. A fastening screw is inserted into the through hole A453 on the lower side of the direction switching member A450 and screwed into the female thread, thereby fastening the decorative member A460 and the direction switching member A450 together.

The long columnar portion A464 has a female thread at the tip, but this is not used for fastening, but rather to prevent the member from falling off. In other words, the rotational movement member A465 through which the long columnar portion A464 is inserted is configured to be capable of rotational movement relative to the parallel movement member A461.

The long columnar portion A464 is first inserted through the upper through-hole A453 of the direction switching member A450, and then through the through-hole A468 of the rotational movement member A465. A large head screw is fixed to the tip of the long columnar portion A464, thereby preventing the rotational movement member A465 from falling off the long columnar portion A464.

The columnar portion A467 of the rotational movement member A465 is supported by the support long hole A434 of the base plate member A430, so that the displacement is reduced. By configuring it in this way, the displacement of the opposite end (lower end) of the columnar portion A467 of the rotational movement member A465 can be made greater than the displacement of the direction switching member A450 that displaces the through hole A468.

The covering member A470 has a translucent area A471 extending in the longitudinal direction at the center of the translucent area A471, and a plated area A472 on both sides of the translucent area A471 in the translucent area A471.

As a result, the direction switching member A450 and decorative member A460 are arranged so that the presentation effect can be maintained at a high level even on both sides of the short side where the light irradiated from the movable member A440 is easily blocked. In other words, the light emission presentation is performed in the translucent area A471 near the center of the short side, and the other plated area A472 uses reflection from the plating to produce the presentation, thereby avoiding a decrease in the presentation effect.

The covering member A470 has a pair of protruding portions A473 that protrude from the rear side at the lower end. The protruding portions A473 are positioned in a position corresponding to the front end of the guide extension portion A436 of the base plate member A430.

By arranging them in this manner, in the assembled state, the covering member A470 and the base plate member A430 can form an opening through which the extension portion A445 of the movable member A440 is inserted. This makes it possible to stabilize the movement direction of the movable member A440 in the extension direction of the extension portion A445.

Figures 1387(a), 1387(b), 1388(a) and 1388(b) are rear views of the rotational motion unit A400b. Figures 1387(a), 1387(b), 1388(a) and 1388(b) show the relative movement of the moving member A440 of the rotational motion unit A400b with respect to the base plate member A430 in chronological order.

That is, the relative movement is shown from the rotational movement unit A400b (see FIG. 1387(a)) in the performance standby state (see FIG. 1375) of the first movement unit A400 to the rotational movement unit A400b (see FIG. 1388(b)) in the extended state (see FIG. 1376). Note that the top and bottom on the paper of FIG. 1387 and FIG. 1387 differ from the actual top and bottom directions, and the direction of the sliding movement of the moving member A440 is shown in a position that matches the top and bottom of the paper.

The functional long hole A444 has a first parallel portion A444a that extends parallel to a straight line passing through the pair of insertion protrusions A443, an inclined portion A444b that is formed so that one end is connected to the first parallel portion A444a and extends linearly in a direction inclined relative to the first parallel portion A444a, and a second parallel portion A444c that is formed so that the other end is connected to the inclined portion A444b and extends parallel to the extension direction of the first parallel portion A444a.

Here, FIG. 1387(a) illustrates a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is disposed on the end side of the first parallel portion A444a, FIG. 1387(b) illustrates a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is disposed at the intersection of the first parallel portion A444a and the inclined portion A444b, FIG. 1388(a) illustrates a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is disposed at the intersection of the inclined portion A444b and the second parallel portion A444c, and FIG. 1388(b) illustrates a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is disposed on the end side of the second parallel portion A444c.

The length of the first parallel portion A444a is formed to be sufficiently long. As a result, even if the movable member A440 starts to move relative to the base plate member A430 from the state shown in FIG. 1387(a), the direction switching member A450 does not move in the short direction of the movable member A440 for a while (until the state shown in FIG. 1387(b) is reached), and the rotation operation unit A400b can be rotated while maintaining the appearance of a short width in the short direction.

The inclined portion A444b extends from the position where the first parallel portion A444a is formed toward the outside in the short side direction of the moving member A440. Therefore, when the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430 from a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is arranged on the first parallel portion A444a, and the columnar portion A452 enters the inclined portion A444b, the direction switching member A450 moves toward the outside in the short side direction of the moving member A440.

A pair of columnar sections A452 of the direction switching member A450 are inserted into a pair of auxiliary long holes A433, and the pair is guided in parallel. Therefore, the relative movement of the direction switching member A450 with respect to the base plate member A430 is a parallel movement in the short direction of the base plate member A430.

The speed of this movement is proportional to the speed at which the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430 because the inclined portion A444b is formed in a straight line. This makes it easier for the moving member A440, the direction switching member A450, and the decorative member A460 to perform linked motion effects.

The second parallel part A444c is not as long as the first parallel part A444a, and is formed to the minimum necessary length. The purpose of forming the second parallel part A444c is to improve the presentation effect of the rotational motion unit A400b.

In other words, when the first operating unit A400 is driven to the extended state and the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 1383) is stopped, the connecting mechanism A427 is pushed back slightly by the biasing force applied to the damper member A417c by the biasing spring A417b, and even if the moving member A440 moves in the opposite direction (return direction) relative to the base plate member A430, the presence of the second parallel portion A444c makes it possible to prevent the position of the direction switching member A450 in the short direction of the moving member A440 from changing.

This makes it easier to maintain the appearance of the first operating unit A400 in the extended state (the short-side length of the rotation operating unit A400b) even if a push-back action occurs due to the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b, which can occur when adopting control that stops the drive of the drive motor AMT1 when the first operating unit A400 is in the extended state.

In the state shown in FIG. 1387(a), the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is the first length AD1, and the angle between the straight line passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and the straight line passing through the pair of insertion protrusions A443 is the first angle Aθ1.

In the state shown in FIG. 1387(b), the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is the second length AD2, and the angle between the line passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and the line passing through the pair of insertion protrusions A443 is the second angle Aθ2.

The second length AD2 is configured to be longer than the first length AD1 (first length AD1 < second length AD2). The second angle Aθ2 is configured to be smaller than the first angle Aθ1 (first angle Aθ1 > second angle Aθ2).

In the state shown in FIG. 1388(a), the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is the third length AD3, and the angle between the straight line passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and the straight line passing through the pair of insertion protrusions A443 is the third angle Aθ3.

The third length AD3 is configured to be longer than the second length AD2 (first length AD1 < second length AD2 < third length AD3). The third angle Aθ3 is configured to be smaller than the second angle Aθ2 (first angle Aθ1 > second angle Aθ2 > third angle Aθ3).

In the state shown in FIG. 1388(b), the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is the fourth length AD4, and the angle between the line passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and the line passing through the pair of insertion protrusions A443 is the fourth angle Aθ4.

The fourth length AD4 is configured to be longer than the third length AD3 (first length AD1 < second length AD2 < third length AD3 < fourth length AD4). The fourth angle Aθ4 is configured to be smaller than the third angle Aθ3 (first angle Aθ1 > second angle Aθ2 > third angle Aθ3 > fourth angle Aθ4).

Therefore, when the first operating unit A400 goes from the performance standby state to the extended state, the rotation operating unit A400b changes so that the distance between the rotation shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 gradually increases, and accordingly, the angle between the straight line passing through the rotation shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and the straight line passing through the pair of insertion protrusions A443 gradually decreases.

Figures 1389, 1390, and 1391 are front views of the first operating unit A400. Figures 1389, 1390, and 1391 chronologically illustrate how the first operating unit A400 is driven from a performance standby state to an extended state.

Figure 1389 illustrates the first operating unit A400 in a standby state, Figure 1390 illustrates a state between the standby state and the extended state of the first operating unit A400, where the appearance of the rotation operating unit A400b is the same as the standby state except for the change in posture, and Figure 1391 illustrates the extended state of the first operating unit A400.

In the state shown in FIG. 1389, the plate-shaped detection piece A437 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d. This allows the corresponding control device to know that the first operating unit A400 is in a performance standby state.

The long guide hole A414 has an arc portion A414a that follows an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and is formed to the right of the columnar protrusion A448 shown in FIG. 1390, and a straight portion A414b that is formed in a straight line to the left of the columnar protrusion A448 shown in FIG. 1390 and smoothly connects to the arc portion A414a (extending in the tangent direction of the arc portion A414a at the connecting portion).

In other words, when the columnar protrusion A448 is positioned on the arc portion A414a (see Figures 1389 and 1390), even if the rotational motion unit A400b rotates, the distance between the rotational shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is maintained at the first length AD1 (see Figure 1387 (a)), and no relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs, so the appearance of the rotational motion unit A400b is maintained.

During the process of the rotational movement from the state shown in FIG. 1390 to the state shown in FIG. 1391, the appearance of the rotational movement unit A400b is changed so that the rotational movement member A465 protrudes in the short side direction of the rotational movement unit A400b.

Between the state shown in FIG. 1390 and the state shown in FIG. 1391, the straight line portion A414b along which the columnar protrusion A448 is guided is arranged to intersect at one point with a circle centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1, so there is a one-to-one correspondence between the arrangement of the columnar protrusion A448 and the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448.

The amount of protrusion of the rotational movement member A465 is configured to correspond to the distance between the rotational shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion portion A448 (see Figures 1387 and 1388), so the position of the columnar protrusion portion A448 at which the rotational movement member A465 begins to protrude and the amount of protrusion of the rotational movement member A465 corresponding to the position of the columnar protrusion portion A448 can be identified from a structural aspect.

This can avoid a situation that can occur when the posture change of the rotational motion unit A400b and the extension of the rotational movement member A465 are performed by separate drive sources, in which the amount of change (angle) in the posture of the rotational motion unit A400b is insufficient, causing the rotational movement member A465 to extend and collide with the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373).

When the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 1383) is transmitted and the belt A423a is operated, the connecting mechanism A427 is guided by the metal bar AMB1 and slid left and right. In this embodiment, by controlling the driving amount of the drive motor AMT1, the rotational motion unit A400b can be operated to move back and forth between the state shown in FIG. 1389 and the state shown in FIG. 1390, the rotational motion unit A400b can be operated to move back and forth between the state shown in FIG. 1390 and the state shown in FIG. 1391, or the rotational motion unit A400b can be operated to move back and forth between the state shown in FIG. 1389 and the state shown in FIG. 1391.

On the extended side (left side), the connecting mechanism A427 comes into contact with the damper member A417c and is decelerated by the elastic force of the biasing spring A417b. As a result, even if the belt A423a is operated at high speed in a direction that puts the first operating unit A400 in the extended state, the connecting mechanism A427 bounces back on the extended side (left side), making it easier to avoid excessive load being applied to the belt A423a, and improving the durability of the belt A423a and the connecting mechanism A427.

When the rotational motion unit A400b starts from the performance standby state of the first motion unit A400 shown in FIG. 1389, the starting direction of the columnar protrusion A448 will be in the tangent direction AT1 of a circle that passes through the columnar protrusion A448 and has the rotation shaft rod AJ1 as its center.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 1389, the angle between the tangential direction AT1 and the direction in which the metal bar AMB1 extends (left-right direction) is small, so that the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 can be efficiently transmitted to perform the rotational operation of the rotational operation unit A400b.

In the state shown in FIG. 1390, the tangential direction AT1 is parallel to the straight line portion A414b. Therefore, the resistance in the rotational direction can be reduced when the rotational motion unit A400b is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 1390.

Between the state shown in FIG. 1390 and the state shown in FIG. 1391, the angle between the direction of the tangential direction AT1 and the direction in which the metal bar AMB1 extends (left-right direction) gradually increases, and the downward component of the tangential direction AT1 becomes larger. As a result, the proportion of the force that rotates the rotational motion unit A400b due to its own weight increases, creating a surplus in the driving force of the drive motor AMT1. This surplus driving force can be used for the relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430.

In this way, the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is used for both the rotational movement of the rotational movement unit A400b and the relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, and by configuring the timing at which the driving force is required for these multiple movements to be staggered, the maximum driving force required at one time can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the drive motor AMT1.

As shown in FIG. 1391, the angle between the moving direction AM1, which is the direction in which the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, and the extension direction of the metal rod AMB1 is smaller than the angle between the straight line connecting the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion portion A448, which is the point of transmission of the driving force, and the extension direction of the metal rod AMB1.

In this embodiment, the angle between the movement direction AM1 and the extension direction of the metal bar AMB1 is an acute angle, which makes it easier to ensure that the component of the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 transmitted in the extension direction of the metal bar AMB1 is directed in the movement direction AM1. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the driving force is transmitted in a direction that rotates the rotational motion unit A400b before the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, resulting in increased operating resistance of the rotational motion unit A400b. Note that in this embodiment, the movement direction AM1 coincides with the longitudinal direction of the rotational motion unit A400b.

When a load from the drive motor AMT1 is transmitted to the columnar protrusion A448 in the left-right direction, the load is resolved into a downward load that moves the movable member A440 relatively in the movement direction AM1, and an upward load that rotates (raises) the rotational motion unit A400b around the rotational axis rod AJ1. Because the load from the drive motor AMT1 is in the left-right direction (directly to the side), this kind of smooth resolution of the load in the up-down direction can occur.

At this time, the rotating shaft AJ1 is not positioned in the direction of the load that is resolved into the moving direction AM1, so that load also acts to rotate the rotational motion unit A400b around the rotating shaft AJ1.

In other words, in this embodiment, the columnar protrusion A448 is positioned at a position offset from a straight line passing through the rotation axis rod AJ1 and parallel to the movement direction AM1, so that the load component that moves the moving member A440 relatively in the movement direction AM1 also occurs in the rotation direction of the rotational movement unit A400b, making it easier to avoid malfunctions in rotation, such as when the load from the columnar protrusion A448 toward the rotation axis rod AJ1 becomes excessive.

Figures 1392, 1393, and 1394 are rear views of the first operating unit A400. In Figures 1392, 1393, and 1394, the first operating unit A400 is illustrated in chronological order as it is driven from the standby state to the extended state, and the illustration of the vertical member A411 is omitted.

Figure 1392 illustrates the first operating unit A400 in a standby state, Figure 1393 illustrates a state between the standby state and the extended state of the first operating unit A400, in which the appearance of the rotation operating unit A400b is the same as in the standby state except for the change in posture, and Figure 1394 illustrates the extended state of the first operating unit A400.

That is, FIG. 1392 corresponds to a rear view of the rotational motion unit A400b in the state shown in FIG. 1389, FIG. 1393 corresponds to a rear view of the rotational motion unit A400b in the state shown in FIG. 1390, and FIG. 1394 corresponds to a rear view of the rotational motion unit A400b in the state shown in FIG. 1391.

Mainly with reference to FIG. 1393, the operation of rotational operation unit A400b starting from the performance standby state of first operation unit A400 will be described. Also, refer to FIG. 1387 and FIG. 1388 as appropriate.

From the state shown in FIG. 1393, when the rotational motion unit A400b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the rear, until the distance between the rotational axis rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 becomes the second length AD2 (see FIG. 1387 (b)), the movable member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, but the direction switching member A450 does not move in the short direction of the movable member A440. Therefore, the appearance of the rotational motion unit A400b changes to extend in the longitudinal direction, and no change occurs in the short direction.

When the rotational motion unit A400b is further rotated clockwise when viewed from the rear, and the distance between the rotational axis rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 changes from the second length AD2 to the third length AD3 (see FIG. 1388(a)), the movable member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, and the direction switching member A450 moves in the short direction of the movable member A440.

Therefore, the appearance of the rotational motion unit A400b changes so that it extends in the longitudinal direction and also changes so that the width in the lateral direction becomes wider. In this way, the change in the appearance of the rotational motion unit A400b occurs in two stages during the rotational motion of the rotational motion unit A400b: a state in which only the longitudinal direction changes, and a state in which both the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction change.

When the rotational motion unit A400b is further rotated clockwise when viewed from the rear, and the distance between the rotational axis rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 changes from the third length AD3 to the fourth length AD4 (see FIG. 1388(b)), the movable member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, but the direction switching member A450 does not move in the short direction of the movable member A440. Therefore, the appearance of the rotational motion unit A400b changes to extend in the longitudinal direction, and no change occurs in the short direction.

This makes it easier to maintain the appearance of the first operating unit A400 in the extended state (the short-side length of the rotation operating unit A400b) even if a push-back action occurs due to the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b (see FIG. 1389), which may occur when adopting control that stops the drive of the drive motor AMT1 when the first operating unit A400 is in the extended state (see FIG. 1394).

In this way, in the tilting operation of the rotational motion unit A400b, the number of members that move relative to the base plate member A430 varies in each section. By controlling the control load of the drive motor AMT1 to switch in accordance with the number of members that move relative to each other (for example, by increasing the control load in a range where the number of members is large and decreasing the control load in a range where the number of members is small), the effects of changes in the motion resistance can be suppressed, making it easier to prevent local changes in the motion speed of the rotational motion unit A400b.

The following describes the change in the rotation angle of the rotational motion unit A400b when the columnar protrusion A448 moves to the left at a constant speed component from the state shown in FIG. 1393. First, in the state shown in FIG. 1393, the straight line connecting the rotation shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is perpendicular to the straight line portion A414b of the guide elongated hole A414.

When the columnar protrusion A448 moves with a constant speed component to the left from the state shown in FIG. 1393, the columnar protrusion A448 is guided by the straight line portion A414b of the guide long hole A414, and the rotation angle Aφ1 of the rotation motion unit A400b is specified as the acute angle of a right triangle with the straight line connecting the rotation shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 as the hypotenuse, the straight line connecting the rotation shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 shown in FIG. 1393 as the base, and the straight line along the straight line portion A414b as the height AX1, as shown in FIG. 1394.

If we assume that the first length AD1 is a unit length, then the relational equation for a right-angled triangle is given by the trigonometric functions Equation 1 [tan Aφ1 = AX1], and the inverse function Equation 2 [Aφ1 = arctan AX1] is also given.

From Equation 2, when the height AX1 increases at a constant speed as the columnar protrusion A448 moves at a constant speed component to the left, the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 gradually decreases. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the drive motor AMT1 is driven at a constant speed and the connecting member A427a (see FIG. 1389) of the connecting mechanism A427 is moved left and right at a constant speed, the rotation operation unit A400b can be rotated in an operating mode in which the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 at start-up from the state shown in FIG. 1393 to the state shown in FIG. 1394 is maximized, and then the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 gradually decreases.

In other words, while adopting simple control of driving the drive motor AMT1 at a constant speed, an operating mode can be realized in which the rotation speed of the rotational motion unit A400b is gradually reduced.

As a result, when the first operating unit A400 operates from the performance standby state to the extended state, the rotation speed of the rotational operating unit A400b is reduced as it approaches the extended state, while rotating at high speed at start. This allows the player to be surprised when the rotational operating unit A400b appears, while maintaining the position and posture of the rotational operating unit A400b in the extended state, making it easier for it to remain in the player's field of vision, by controlling the drive motor AMT1 to drive at a constant speed.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit A400 operates from the extended state to the performance standby state, the rotation speed of the rotational operating unit A400b is increased as the first operating unit A400 approaches the performance standby state, while rotating slowly at start-up. Therefore, by increasing the rotational speed of the rotational operating unit A400b near the performance standby state while retaining the afterglow of the start-up of the rotational operating unit A400b toward the retreat side, the rotational operating unit A400b can be quickly retreated by controlling the drive motor AMT1 to drive at a constant speed.

As a result, the operation of the rotational motion unit A400b can simultaneously cause a displacement in the rotational direction and a displacement in the linear direction, and can be configured to have an operating state in which the displacement in the rotational direction is noticeable (the rotational speed is high) and an operating state in which the displacement in the rotational direction is not noticeable (the rotational speed is low) but the displacement in the linear direction is noticeable.

In other words, when the first operating unit A400 is rotated clockwise from the performance standby state (see FIG. 1392) as viewed from the rear, the relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 is hardly caused until the state shown in FIG. 1393 is reached, and further, in the rotational movement from the state shown in FIG. 1393, the rotational speed of the first operating unit A400 is gradually decreased when the drive motor AMT1 is driven at a constant speed.

This allows for a smooth and natural transition between an operating state in which the rotational displacement is noticeable and an operating state in which the linear displacement is noticeable but the rotational displacement is not noticeable, with the columnar protrusion A448 being positioned at a position where the tip of the straight line of the second length AD2 coincides with the center line of the guide long hole A414.

As shown in Figures 1392 to 1394, when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the performance standby state, from the start of rotation from Figure 1392 to the state shown in Figure 1393, the columnar protrusion portion A448 is guided by the arc portion A414a, so there is no relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, and only a rotational motion occurs.

From the state shown in FIG. 1393 to the state shown in FIG. 1394, the rotation of the rotational motion unit A400b causes relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430. The manner of relative movement occurs in the order shown in FIG. 1387 and FIG. 1388.

In FIG. 1393, the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 illustrated in FIG. 1387 and FIG. 1388 are illustrated correspondingly. The postures of the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 illustrated in FIG. 1393 correspond to the postures of the rotational motion unit A400b in each state of the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 illustrated in FIG. 1387 and FIG. 1388.

In other words, when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the state shown in FIG. 1393 to the posture of the second length AD2, only the relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs (see FIG. 1387(a) and FIG. 1387(b)).

Furthermore, when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the position of the second length AD2 to the position of the third length AD3, in addition to the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, the direction switching member A450 also moves relative to the base plate member A430 (see Figures 1387(b) and 1388(a)).

Furthermore, when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the position of the third length AD3 to the position of the fourth length AD4, only the relative movement of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs (see Figures 1388(a) and 1388(b)).

In this manner, in this embodiment, the rotational motion of the rotational motion unit A400b is configured to cause relative motion of multiple other members, but the start timing of the relative motion of each member is not the same, but is configured to be shifted from one another. This makes it possible to avoid a sudden increase in the driving force required for the operation of the rotational motion unit A400b.

The following describes the relationship between changes in the first length AD1, second length AD2, third length AD3, and fourth length AD4 shown in FIG. 1393 and changes in posture. The angle between the first length AD1 and the second length AD2 and the angle between the second length AD2 and the third length shown on the right are almost the same (about 18 degrees), but the difference between the first length AD1 and the second length AD2 and the difference between the second length AD2 and the third length AD3 is more than three times larger than the former.

Therefore, the length of movement of the moving member A440 relative to the base plate member A430 per unit angle when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the position of the second length AD2 to the position of the third length AD3 is more than three times longer than the length of movement of the moving member A440 relative to the base plate member A430 per unit angle when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the position of the second length AD2 to the position of the third length AD3 shown on the right side.

Furthermore, the movement length of the moving member A440 relative to the base plate member A430 per unit angle when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the position of the third length AD3 to the position of the fourth length AD4 is longer than the movement length of the moving member A440 relative to the base plate member A430 per unit angle when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates from the position of the third length AD2 to the position of the third length AD3.

This allows the operating mode of the rotational motion unit A400b to be gradually shifted from a state in which rotational motion is the main focus to a state in which relative movement (linear motion) of the movable member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 is the main focus.

Here, at the end of the rotational movement of the first operating unit A400 toward the extended state (for example, from the position of the third length AD3 to the position of the fourth length AD4 in FIG. 1393), the moving direction AM1 is configured to be returned to the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear for the columnar protrusion portion A448, which moves in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear around the rotation shaft rod AJ1 (see FIGS. 1387 and 1388).

In other words, the angle between the columnar protrusion A448 and the moving direction AM1 is reduced so as to partially offset the rotation angle of the rotational motion unit A400b, so that the change in angle of the moving direction AM1 (see FIG. 1391) in the state shown in FIG. 1394 can be suppressed. As a result, even if the rotational motion unit A400b is pushed back slightly by the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b via the damper member A417c (see FIG. 1391), the resulting change in angle of the moving direction AM1 can be suppressed.

This not only makes it difficult for the width of the rotational motion unit A400b to change in the short-side direction when the first motion unit A400 is in the extended state (see FIG. 1388), but also suppresses the change in the angle of the movement direction AM1, making it easier to stabilize the first motion unit A400 in the extended state.

In addition, the rotational motion unit A400b is configured to become longer in the longitudinal direction as it approaches the extended state, so the air resistance applied to the rotational motion unit A400b from the rotational direction becomes greater as it approaches the tilt end. This makes it possible to effectively generate a braking action due to air resistance.

Furthermore, with the rotational motion unit A400b, the direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 protrude in the short direction as they approach the protruding state, increasing the area when viewed in the front-to-rear direction. This increases the air resistance against tipping in the front-to-rear direction, making it easier to prevent the rotational motion unit A400b from tipping in the front-to-rear direction.

Next, the second operating unit A500 will be described with reference to Figs. 1395 to 1402. Fig. 1395 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit A500, and Fig. 1396 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit A500.

The second operating unit A500 includes a support unit A500a held in the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373) and a rotation operating unit A500b supported on the support unit A500a so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft AJ2 located at the lower left side when viewed from the front.

In the second operating unit A500, the drive motor AMT2 is disposed on the upper right side, and the rotating shaft AJ2 is disposed on the lower left side. This simplifies the structure around the rotating shaft AJ2 compared to when the drive motor AMT2 is disposed near the rotating shaft AJ2, and the rotating shaft AJ2 can be positioned closer to the left corner.

Furthermore, the front-to-rear width of the second operating unit A500 can be made shorter than when the driving motor AMT2 is arranged on the front or rear side of the rotary operating unit A500b, as occurs when the driving motor AMT2 is arranged near the rotary shaft rod AJ2. Therefore, sufficient space can be secured when multiple movable parts are stacked in the front-to-rear direction of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373).

Furthermore, by orienting the axis of the drive motor AMT2 in the vertical direction, the front-to-rear width is kept to approximately the diameter of the main body of the drive motor AMT2. This allows the front-to-rear width of the second operating unit A500 to be shortened.

In addition, by making the axial direction of the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 1382) perpendicular to the axial direction of the drive motor AMT2, it is easier to prevent the drive motor AMT2 from being moved (malfunctioning) by vibrations (vibrations on a plane perpendicular to the axis) that occur when one of the drive motors AMT1 is driven.

Fig. 1397 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit A500, and Fig. 1398 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit A500. In Figs. 1397 and 1398, the support unit A500a is shown disassembled, and the rotation operating unit A500b is shown in a non-disassembled state.

The support unit A500a includes a fixed support unit A510 that is fastened to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373), and a drive transmission unit A520 that has a drive motor AMT2 that is fixed in position to the fixed support unit A510 and is configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 to the rotational motion unit A500b.

The fixed support unit A510 includes a vertical member A511 fastened to the right side of the bottom wall A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373) when viewed from the front, a horizontal member A513 fastened to the upper end side of the vertical member A511, a reinforcing member A515 formed by bending a sheet metal member disposed on the rear side of the horizontal member A513, and a covering member A517 disposed on the lower side of the vertical member A511 and configured to cover the lower end of the rotation operation unit A500b from the front.

The horizontal member A513 includes a plate-shaped main body A513a formed from a resin material in the shape of a horizontal plate, a guide elongated hole A514 formed through the plate-shaped main body A513a, a support portion A513b formed so as to be able to support a drive gear A523d of the drive transmission unit A520 with a protruding portion protruding in a bifurcated shape toward the front side at the right end side of the plate-shaped main body A513a, a biasing spring A513c having one end supported by the plate-shaped main body A513a, and a damper member A513d having the other end supported by the biasing force of the biasing spring A513c and biased to the left end of a movable range extending in the left-right direction.

The shape of the guide slot A514 is symmetrical to the shape of the guide slot A414 (see FIG. 1392) described above in the first operating unit A400. As a result, the relationship of the rotational operation of the rotational operation unit A500b (relationship between the rotation angle and the longitudinal movement width) is the same as the rotational operation described in the rotational operation unit A400b (see FIGS. 1389 to 1394) except for the left-right symmetry, so a description of the rotational operation of the second operating unit A500 will be omitted.

The guide slot A514 corresponds to the location where the protruding tip of the upper displacement restriction device A214 (see FIG. 1374) is inserted. When the upper displacement restriction device A214 is in the protruding state, the protruding tip interferes with the columnar protruding portion A546 (see FIG. 1396) and is configured to restrict the movement of the columnar protruding portion A546.

The reinforcing member A515 is a member formed by bending a metal plate, and includes a plate-shaped body A515a arranged to be attached to the back side of the plate-shaped body A513a, a pair of retaining bent portions A515b formed by bending the plate-shaped body A515a and having through holes through which the metal rod AMB2 is inserted, and a long hole A515c drilled in a shape that surrounds the guide long hole A514 from the outside.

The covering member A517 is a member formed from a resin material, and includes a main body A517a formed in a shape in which the left and right side ends and the lower end of a plate-like portion are extended toward the rear side, a cylindrical support portion A517b formed on the main body A517a and into which the rotation shaft rod AJ2 of the rotation operation unit A500b is inserted, and a detection sensor A517c for detecting whether the second operation unit A500 is in a performance standby state or an extended state by detecting the position of the rotation operation unit A500b.

The detection sensor A517d is usually a photocoupler type sensor, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be a magnetic sensor or a contact type sensor.

The drive transmission unit A520 includes a support member A521 that is fastened to the right end of the horizontal member A513 and supports the drive motor AMT2, a transmission mechanism A523 that is composed of a plurality of rotating members that are rotatably supported on the upper surface side of the support member A521, a left end holding member A525 that holds the rotating member at the left end of the transmission mechanism A523 and is fastened to the horizontal member A513, and a connecting mechanism A527 that connects the transmission mechanism A523 to the rotation operation unit A500b.

The transmission mechanism A523 includes a ring-shaped belt A523a with teeth formed on the inner circumference, a pair of left and right pulleys A523b, A523c with teeth formed on the outer circumference that mesh with the teeth of the belt A523a and rotatably supported on the horizontal member A513 via the support member A521 and the left end holding member A525 so as to be able to support the belt A523a without slack, a drive gear A523d fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT2 so as not to move relative to it, and a transmission gear portion A523e, which is a gear-shaped portion formed at the lower end of a cylindrical portion that extends from the underside of the right pulley A523b into a cylindrical shape centered on the rotation axis and which meshes with the drive gear A523d.

The rotation axes of the pulleys 523b, 523c and the drive gear A523d are parallel to each other. As a result, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven and the drive gear A523d rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear portion A523e, causing the right pulley A523b to rotate, and the belt A523a is driven in such a manner that the portion of the belt A523a that extends in the left-right direction is moved in the left-right direction.

The left end holding member A525 is made of a resin material and includes an upper member A525a that is fastened to the plate-shaped main body A513a and rotatably supports the left pulley A523c, and a lower member A525b that is made of a metal material and fastened to the upper member A525a in such a way that the left pulley A523c is sandwiched between the upper member A525a and the lower member A525b.

The connecting mechanism A527 includes a connecting member A527a to which the upper end side of the rotational motion unit A500b is connected and which receives the metal rod AMB2 in a recess A527b on the front side, thereby making the direction of operation the left-right direction, and a prevention member A527c which is fastened and fixed to the connecting member A527a so as to cover the recess A527b of the connecting member A527a from the front side, thereby preventing the metal rod AMB2 from falling out from between the connecting member A527a and the connecting member A527a.

The connecting member A527a has a flat plate-like contact portion A527d at its upper end that contacts the rear surface of the belt 523a, and the preventing member A527c has a sawtooth-shaped contact portion A527e at a position corresponding to the contact portion A527d.

The contact portion A527d is disposed opposite the flat portion (outer peripheral portion) of the belt A523a, and the sawtooth contact portion A527e is disposed opposite the sawtooth portion (inner peripheral portion) of the belt A523a. By sandwiching the belt A523a between the contact portion A527d and the sawtooth contact portion A527e, it is possible to prevent misalignment due to slippage of the flat contact portion A527d and the sawtooth contact portion A527e relative to the belt A523a.

The connecting member A527a is formed with columnar fastening parts for fastening and fixing to the prevention member A527c, and the connecting mechanism A527 is designed so that the pulley A527g is rotatably supported on one of them and the metal bar AMB2 is placed in a groove on the outer periphery of the pulley A527g. This reduces the operating resistance generated between the connecting mechanism A527 and the metal bar AMB2, thereby reducing the driving force required of the drive motor AMT2 to operate the second operating unit A500 and making the drive motor AMT2 more compact.

With this structure, the drive motor AMT2 is driven to rotate, and the right pulley A523b is rotated through meshing transmission, causing the portion of the belt A523a extending to the left and right to move left and right, and the connecting mechanism A527 is guided by the metal bar AMB2 to move left and right.

The connecting member A527a has a guide slot A527f extending in the vertical direction, through which the columnar protrusion A546 of the rotational motion unit A500b is inserted. The columnar protrusion A546 of the rotational motion unit A500b is inserted into the guide slot A527f and the guide slot A514 of the fixed support unit A510, so that as the connecting mechanism A527 moves left and right, the columnar protrusion A546 of the rotational motion unit A500b moves up and down and left and right.

Through the connecting mechanism A527, which moves in the left-right direction in this manner, a driving force is transmitted to the rotational motion unit A500b, and the rotational motion unit A500b is displaced. Details of the rotational motion unit A500b are described below.

1399 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational motion unit A500b, and FIG. 1400 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational motion unit A500b. As shown in FIG. 1399 and FIG. 1400, the rotational motion unit A500b comprises a base member A530 rotatably supported on the rotational axis rod AJ2 at the lower end, a movable member A540 connected to the base member A530 so as to be slidably movable in a linear direction passing through the rotational axis rod AJ2 on a plane perpendicular to the rotational axis rod AJ2, and a movable member A540 inserted through the base member A530 and the movable member A540 so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the sliding movement of the movable member A540 when the movable member A540 slides. It is equipped with a direction switching member A550, a change member A560 that allows the player to see the short-side length of the rotational motion unit 500b change as the position or posture is changed by the movement of the direction switching member A550, and a covering member A570 that is fixed to the base member A530 via a fixed support member A565 so that the moving member A540 and the direction switching member A550 are positioned in the space formed between the base member A530 and the change member A560 and fixed forward of the change member A560.

The base member A530 includes a long plate-shaped main body A531, a pair of upper and lower guide long holes A532 drilled as long holes parallel to the long direction of the plate-shaped main body A531, a plurality of functional long holes A533 drilled in a position between the pair of guide long holes A532 in a shape that combines the up-down direction and the left-right inclined direction, a spatial component A534 fastened to both ends of the short side direction of the lower end of the plate-shaped main body A531 so as to form a space between the plate-shaped main body A531, a support hole A535 drilled in the front-back direction in the spatial component A534 and supported by the rotating shaft rod AJ2, and a pair of protruding insertion parts A536 formed to protrude in the short side direction of the plate-shaped main body A531 above the position where the spatial component A534 is fastened and fixed, and function as an insertion part for the fastening screw.

The functional long hole A533 is composed of four long holes: a pair of long holes, one above the other, and another pair of long holes, the shape of which is the inverse of the first pair of long holes. The shapes of the long holes are the same except for the inversion.

Of the multiple functional slots A533, a pair of upper and lower slots are formed at positions where one of the slots is translated in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the guide slot A532. In other words, the corresponding portions of the pair of upper and lower slots are on the same straight line or maintain a relationship of being arranged in parallel.

Of the functional long holes A533, a pair of upper and lower long holes and another pair of upper and lower long holes are offset in the direction in which the guide long holes A532 extend. This configuration makes it easier to utilize the free space compared to when the arrangements are not offset, and makes it easier to ensure the length of the functional long holes A533 in the short direction of the plate-shaped main body A531 while suppressing the short-side length of the plate-shaped main body A531.

The spatial component A534 has a plate-shaped detection piece A534a that extends from the lower end on the front side in a plate-like shape in a direction away from the support hole A535. The plate-shaped detection piece A534a is formed at a front-rear position that allows it to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor A517c (see FIG. 1398).

The plate-shaped detection piece A534a is formed on the side (front side) where the rotating shaft rod AJ2 is supported. This makes it possible to minimize the positional deviation of the plate-shaped detection piece A534a even if the rotating shaft rod AJ2 is bent (tilted) due to deformation of the rotating shaft rod AJ2, making it easier to avoid the plate-shaped detection piece A534a being positioned outside the front-rear position where it fits into the detection groove of the detection sensor A517c.

By detecting the position of the plate-shaped detection piece A534a using the detection sensor A517c, the posture of the rotational motion unit A500b can be grasped, so that even if multiple motion units A400 to A600 are driven by separate drive sources, collisions between them can be avoided.

The moving member A540 includes a plate-shaped main body A541 made of a resin material, a light-emitting substrate A542 fastened to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A541 and having a plurality of light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a decorative member A543 fastened to the plate-shaped main body A541, which is configured to cover the upper side of the light-emitting substrate A542 and has a portion that can transmit light from the light-emitting means of the light-emitting substrate A542, and is configured to cover the upper side of the light-emitting substrate A542 and has a portion that can transmit light from the light-emitting means of the light-emitting substrate A542, a pair of insertion protrusions A544 protruding to an extent that they can be inserted into the guide elongated hole A532 of the base member A530, a plurality of auxiliary elongated holes A545 drilled at positions corresponding to the functional elongated holes A533 of the base member A530 so as to extend in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the guide elongated hole A532, and a columnar protrusion A546 protruding from the upper left corner of the plate-shaped main body A541 to the rear side and inserted into the guide elongated hole A527f (see FIG. 1398) of the drive transmission unit A520.

By configuring the movable member A540 in this manner, it is possible to create an effect in which the decorative member A543 is brightly illuminated by light irradiated from the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting board A542. In addition, the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the light emitting board A542 include not only LEDs arranged with their optical axes facing forward (perpendicular to the front surface of the board), but also LEDs arranged with their optical axes facing sideways (parallel to the front surface of the board), particularly at the short ends. This can improve the effect of the light-based presentation, and more details will be given below.

The lower end of the movable member A540 is disposed in the space formed between the plate-shaped main body A531 of the base member A530 and the space forming member A534 when the second operating unit A500 is in the standby state for performance (see FIG. 1395). In other words, when viewed from the front, the movable member A540 is configured to be able to overlap with the rotating shaft rod AJ2 inserted into the support hole A535, improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the movable member A540.

The decorative member A543 has a translucent area A543a extending in the longitudinal direction at the center of the translucent area A543a, and plated areas A543b on both sides of the translucent area A543a in the transverse direction.

As a result, even if the placement of the board is restricted to the center in the short side direction due to the formation of the functional long hole A533 and auxiliary long hole A545, the front-facing light emission effect is achieved in the translucent area A543a near the center in the short side direction, and the other plated area A543b uses reflections from the plating to achieve the effect, thereby avoiding a decrease in the presentation effect.

In addition, the short end of the decorative member A543 does not extend to the rear side and does not cover the side of the light-emitting substrate A542. This allows the light irradiated laterally from the light-emitting substrate A542 to be sufficiently illuminated in the light-emitting performance without being attenuated by the decorative member A543.

The insertion protrusion A544 is inserted into the long guide hole A532 of the base member A530 and is configured to be prevented from falling out of the long guide hole A532 by the screw and collar member AC1 screwed into the tip. By configuring it in this way, the moving member A540 is configured to be movable relative to the base member A530 along the long guide hole A532.

The direction switching member A550 is composed of a pair of corresponding left and right members, and includes a corresponding plate-shaped main body A551, a pair of front columnar parts A552 arranged in the longitudinal direction protruding toward the front side at the left and right inner parts of the plate-shaped main body A551, a pair of rear columnar parts A553 arranged in the longitudinal direction protruding toward the rear side in the same straight line as the protruding direction of the front columnar parts A552, through holes A554 drilled in the longitudinal direction at the left and right outer parts of the plate-shaped main body A551, a movable decorative member A555 fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body A551 at the left and right outer and upper outer peripheral ends of the plate-shaped main body A551 so as to maintain a space between the plate-shaped main body A551 and the movable member A540, and a through hole A556 drilled in the longitudinal direction (parallel to the through hole A554) from the lower end of the movable decorative member A555.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped main body A551 and the movable decorative member A555 are formed from a colored, transparent, light-transmitting resin material in consideration of the presentation. In particular, the resin is yellow in color, which improves the color continuity with the plated area A543b (gold plating) of the movable member A540, improving the light-emitting presentation effect when in operation.

If the plate-shaped main body A551 and the movable decorative member A555 could be constructed from identically shaped components, it would be possible to standardize the components, which may be preferable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped main body A551 and the movable decorative member A555 are constructed from two corresponding components, and although they are not constructed with the exact same shape, this difference in shape is designed based on functional requirements.

For example, the difference in shape at the upper end is due to the fact that a notch is formed on the side where the columnar protrusion A546 of the moving member A540 is located to avoid interference with the columnar protrusion A546, resulting in a different shape.

For example, the difference in the arrangement of the front columnar portion A552 and the rear columnar portion A553 is that the functional elongated hole A533 and the auxiliary elongated hole A545 are arranged in asymmetric positions, resulting in different shapes.

By having the rear side configuration take care of such functional requirements, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the shape of the front side of the moving decorative member A555 that is visible to the player, and in this embodiment, by making the shape symmetrical, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the rotational motion unit A500b.

The front columnar portion A552 is inserted into the auxiliary elongated hole A545 of the movable member A540, and the rear columnar portion A553 is inserted into the functional elongated hole A533 of the base member A530. This allows the direction switching member A550 to be displaced in the direction in which the auxiliary elongated hole A545 extends, depending on the position of the movable member A540 relative to the base member A530.

The rear columnar portion A553 is inserted into the functional long hole A533 of the base member A530 and is configured to be prevented from falling out of the functional long hole A533 by a screw and collar member AC1 that are screwed into the tip.

On the other hand, since the movable member A540 is connected to the base member A530 by the insertion protrusion A544, and the direction switching member A550 is connected by the rear columnar portion A553, which is sufficient to prevent them from falling off, a collar member AC1 is disposed between the front columnar portion A552 and the movable member A540, and no screw threading is used to prevent them from falling off.

As a result, even if the light-emitting substrate A542 is formed very close to the auxiliary elongated hole A545, friction does not occur between the collar member AC1 and the light-emitting substrate A542, so the durability of the light-emitting substrate A542 is not reduced and the design freedom of the shape of the light-emitting substrate A542 can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw head from interfering with the movable decorative member A555, and to shorten the front-to-rear distance between the movable decorative member A555 and the movable member A540. This allows the front-to-rear thickness of the direction switching member A550 to be shortened.

The change member A560 is composed of a pair of left and right members, and includes a guide support member A561 that is supported displaceably (rotatably and displaceably in the direction in which the through hole A554 extends) in the through hole A554 of the direction switching member A550, a wing-shaped member A562 to which the guide support member A561 is fastened to the back side, an intermediate displacement member A563 that is rotatably supported by the wing-shaped member A562, a fixed member A564 that is fastened to the wing-shaped member A562 in such a position that the intermediate displacement member A563 is sandwiched between the wing-shaped member A562, a fixed support member A565 that is fastened to the overhang insertion portion A536 of the base member A530 and rotatably supports the intermediate displacement member A563, and a fixed member A566 that is fastened to the fixed support member A565 in such a position that the intermediate displacement member A563 is sandwiched between the fixed support member A565.

The wing-shaped member A562 is a columnar part that rotatably supports the intermediate displacement member A563, and includes a support fastening part A562a to which the fixing member A564 is fastened by screwing a fastening screw into a female thread formed at the tip, and a fastened part A562b to which the guide support member A561 is fastened.

The intermediate displacement member A563 is a plate-shaped member and includes a first through hole A563a through which the support fastening portion A562a is inserted, a second through hole A563b through which the fixed support member A565 is inserted and which is rotatably supported by the fixed support member A565, and an insertion protrusion A563c which is inserted into the through hole A556 of the direction switching member A550 and supported so as to be displaceable (capable of rotational displacement and displacement in the direction in which the through hole A556 extends).

The fixed support member A565 has a symmetrical shape with a pair of straight leg parts formed from the outer periphery of the arc-shaped part, and includes a columnar fixing part A565a that protrudes from the lower end of the leg towards the rear side in a columnar shape and is fastened and fixed to the protruding insertion part A536 of the base member A530, and a columnar support part A565b that protrudes towards the rear side at the upper left and right ends of the arc-shaped part and rotatably supports the second through hole A563b of the intermediate displacement member A563.

The columnar support portion A565b has a female thread formed at its tip, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A566a of the fixed member A566 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fastening the fixed member A566 to the fixed support member A565 in a manner that prevents the intermediate displacement member A563 from falling off the fixed support member A565.

In this embodiment, in addition to the through hole A566a, the fastening screw of the fixing member A566 is inserted through a through hole A566b, through which the fastening screw is inserted to fasten the fixing member A566 to the fixed support member A565 without sandwiching any other member therebetween.

Therefore, the screwing position of the fastening screw can be changed flexibly. For example, the fastening screw may be inserted and screwed into all of the insertion holes A566a, A566b. In this case, the strength of the columnar support part A565b can be improved by the strength of the fastening screw, making it easier to avoid the columnar support part A565b being damaged and the intermediate displacement member A563 falling off.

Furthermore, for example, a fastening screw may be inserted and screwed into either the insertion hole A566a or the insertion hole A566b. In this case, the number of fastening screws required can be reduced, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the product.

The covering member A570 comprises a translucent region A571 extending in the longitudinal direction at the center in the translucent direction, a plated region A572 in which plating is applied on both sides in the translucent region A571 in the translucent direction, a pair of claw-shaped portions A573 extending from the outer end in the translucent direction to the rear side on the rear side of the plated region A572 in the translucent direction and formed by bending the extended end, and a plurality of fastened column-shaped portions A574 fastened to the fixed support member A565.

The translucent area A571 and the plated area A572 make it possible to maintain a high level of illumination effect even when the shape of the light-emitting substrate A542 is restricted to a shape that does not interfere with the auxiliary long hole A545. In other words, the illumination effect is achieved in the translucent area A571 near the center in the short direction, and in the other plated areas A572, the illumination effect is achieved by reflection from the plating, thereby avoiding a decrease in the illumination effect.

The claw-shaped portion A573 is configured to support and guide both short sides of the decorative member A543 of the movable member A540. This makes it possible to suppress misalignment of the movable member A540 in the front-to-rear direction, making it easier to prevent the movable member A540 from falling forward or backward relative to the base member A530, particularly in the extended state (see FIG. 1377).

The fastened columnar portion A574 is positioned at a position corresponding to the central side of the pair of legs of the fixed support member A565 and the central portion of the arc-shaped portion, and is fastened to the fixed support member A565 by screwing in fastening screws that are inserted into the fixed support member A565 at each position.

Figures 1401(a), 1401(b), 1402(a) and 1402(b) are rear views of the rotational motion unit A500b. Figures 1401(a), 1401(b), 1402(a) and 1402(b) show the relative movement of the moving member A540 of the rotational motion unit A500b with respect to the base member A530 in chronological order. Note that the collar member AC1 is omitted from Figures 1401(a), 1401(b), 1402(a) and 1402(b).

Figures 1401(a), 1401(b), 1402(a) and 1402(b) show the relative movement from rotational motion unit A500b (see Figure 1401(a)) in the performance standby state (see Figure 1375) of the second motion unit A500 to rotational motion unit A500b (see Figure 1402(b)) in the extended state (see Figure 1377).

The guide slots A532 are a pair of slots that extend parallel to one another, but are not formed in a straight line. The upper guide slot A532 is formed in the center of the short side of the base member A530, while the lower guide slot A532 is positioned slightly offset from the center of the short side to avoid the rotating shaft rod AJ2.

In this way, even if the guide long holes A532 are slightly shifted, the moving member A540 is supported by a pair of guide long holes A532, so the moving member A540 can be moved smoothly in the direction in which the guide long holes A532 extend. Also, by shifting the position of the guide long holes A532 in this way, the rotating shaft rod AJ2 can be disposed in the center position in the short direction of the base member A530.

The functional slot A533 includes a first parallel portion A533a extending parallel to the extension direction of the guide slot A532, an inclined portion A533b formed so that one end is connected to the first parallel portion A533a and extends linearly in a direction inclined relative to the first parallel portion A533a, and a second parallel portion A533c formed so that the other end is connected to the inclined portion A533b and extends parallel to the extension direction of the first parallel portion A533a.

Here, FIG. 1401(a) illustrates a state in which the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged on the end side of the first parallel portion A533a, FIG. 1401(b) illustrates a state in which the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged at the intersection of the first parallel portion A533a and the inclined portion A533b, FIG. 1402(a) illustrates a state in which the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged at the intersection of the inclined portion A533b and the second parallel portion A533c, and FIG. 1402(b) illustrates a state in which the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged on the end side of the second parallel portion A533c.

The length of the first parallel portion A533a is formed to be sufficiently long. As a result, even if the moving member A540 starts to move relative to the base member A530 from the state shown in FIG. 1401(a), the direction switching member A550 is not likely to move in the short direction of the moving member A540 for a while (until the state shown in FIG. 1401(b) is reached).

In the operation of the second operating unit A500, the relative movement of the movable member A540 with respect to the base member A530 is performed simultaneously with the rotational operation of the rotational operation unit A500b around the rotation axis rod AJ2, but from the state shown in FIG. 1401(a) to the state shown in FIG. 1401(b), the rotational operation unit A500b can be rotated while maintaining the appearance of a short short-side width.

The inclined portion A533b extends from the position where the first parallel portion A533a is formed toward the outside in the short side direction of the base member A530. Therefore, when the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 from a state in which the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged on the first parallel portion A533a and the rear columnar portion A553 enters the inclined portion A533b, the direction switching member A550 moves toward the outside in the short side direction of the moving member A540.

The pair of rear columnar portions A553 of the direction switching member A550 are inserted into a pair of auxiliary long holes A545 (see FIG. 1400), and the pair are guided in parallel. Therefore, the relative movement of the direction switching member A550 with respect to the moving member A540 is a parallel movement in the short direction of the moving member A540.

The speed of this movement is proportional to the speed at which the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 because the inclined portion A533b is formed in a straight line. This makes it easier to perform a motion presentation in which the moving member A540 and the direction switching member A550 are linked together.

The second parallel part A533c is not as long as the first parallel part A533a, and is formed to the minimum necessary length. The purpose of forming the second parallel part A533c is to improve the presentation effect of the rotational motion unit A500b.

In other words, when the second operating unit A500 is driven to the extended state and the drive motor AMT2 (see FIG. 1397) is stopped, the connecting mechanism A527 is pushed back slightly by the biasing force applied to the damper member A513d by the biasing spring A513c, and even if the moving member A540 moves in the opposite direction (return direction) relative to the base member A530, the presence of the second parallel portion A533c makes it possible to prevent the position of the direction switching member A550 in the short direction of the moving member A540 from changing.

This makes it easier to maintain the appearance of the second operating unit A500 in the extended state (the short-side length of the rotation operating unit A500b) even if a push-back action occurs due to the biasing force of the biasing spring A513c (see FIG. 1397), which can occur when adopting control that stops the drive of the drive motor AMT2 when the second operating unit A500 is in the extended state.

Here, we will explain the differences between the rotational motion unit A500b of the second motion unit A500 and the rotational motion unit A400b of the first motion unit A400. First, as mentioned above, in the rotational motion unit A500b, the guide elongated holes A532 are not arranged in a straight line.

In the rotational operation unit A500b of the second operation unit A500, the functional long holes A533 are not aligned in the short direction of the base member A530, but are shifted in the longitudinal direction. This allows a portion of the functional long holes A533 formed on the opposite side in the short direction to fit into the gap between the functional long holes A533 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the base member A530, thereby shortening the short-side length of the base member A530.

The rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is configured to be vertically shifted in accordance with the vertical shift of the functional long hole A533. This allows the timing of the left and right direction switching members A550 to move in opposing directions (the short side direction of the moving member A540) to be synchronized.

In the rotational motion unit A400b, the functional long hole A444 is formed in the moving member A440, but in the rotational motion unit A500b, the functional long hole A533 is formed in the base member A530.

For this reason, in the first operating unit A400, as the rotational operating unit A400b rotates and the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, the functional long hole A444 also moves relative to the base plate member A430 (see Figures 1387 and 1388), but in the second operating unit A500, even if the rotational operating unit A500b rotates and the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530, the arrangement of the functional long hole A533 does not move relative to the base member A530.

Conversely, in the first operating unit A400, the auxiliary elongated hole A433 (see FIG. 1385) is formed in the base plate member A430, while in the second operating unit A500, the auxiliary elongated hole A545 is formed in the moving member A540 (see FIG. 1400), so the correspondence is reversed.

Because of this relationship, the functional slot A533 formed in the rotational motion unit A500b of the second motion unit A500 is inverted in the up-down relationship with the functional slot A444 formed in the rotational motion unit A400b of the first motion unit A400.

In this way, by reversing the vertical relationship of the functional long holes A444, A533 and the auxiliary long holes A433, A545, the rotational motion unit A500b can also realize an operating mode similar to that of the rotational motion unit A400b, in which the length of the rotational motion unit A500b in the short direction increases as it extends in the longitudinal direction.

In the second operating unit A500, the arrangement of the direction switching member A550 in the longitudinal direction of the rotational operating unit A500b corresponds to the arrangement of the auxiliary long hole A545 of the moving member A540. Therefore, as the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 in the longitudinal direction of the rotational operating unit A500b, the direction switching member A550 moves in the longitudinal direction of the rotational operating unit A500b by an amount similar to the amount of movement of the moving member A540, and at the same time, moves in the lateral direction of the moving member A540.

In other words, the movement of the direction switching member A550 is a relative movement with respect to the movable member A540 in the short direction of the movable member A540 (a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the guide long hole A532), and is a relative movement with respect to the base member A530 along the formation direction of the functional long hole A533.

The change member A560 is supported by the columnar support portion A565b of the fixed support member A565, the second through hole A563b of which is fixed to the base member A530, while the insertion protrusion A563c is supported by the through hole A556 of the displaceable direction switching member A550, and the guide support member A561 is supported by the displaceable through hole A554. This allows the change member A560 to rotate in response to the amount of displacement in the short direction of the moving member A540, with the base member A530 as the fulcrum, and causes a displacement different from the displacement of the moving member A540 and the displacement of the direction switching member A550.

In addition, when the second operating unit A500 goes from the performance standby state to the extended state, the rotation operating unit A500b changes so that the distance between the rotation axis rod AJ2 and the columnar protrusion A546 gradually increases, and accordingly, the angle between the line passing through the rotation axis rod AJ2 and the columnar protrusion A546 and the line extending in the longitudinal direction of the rotation operating unit A500b (the direction of movement of the moving member A540) gradually decreases, as described above in the explanation of the first operating unit A400 with reference to Figures 1387 and 1388, so a description of this will be omitted here.

Next, the third operating unit A600 will be described with reference to Figs. 1403 to 1410. Fig. 1403 is a front perspective view of the third operating unit A600, and Fig. 1404 is a rear perspective view of the third operating unit A600.

The third operating unit A600 includes a support unit A600a held by the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373) and an opening/closing operating unit A600b supported by the support unit A600a so as to be movable up and down.

Figure 1405 is an exploded front perspective view of the third operating unit A600, and Figure 1406 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third operating unit A600. In Figures 1405 and 1406, the support unit A600a is shown disassembled, and the opening/closing operating unit A600b is shown in a non-disassembled state.

The support unit A600a includes a fixed support unit A610 that is fastened to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373), and a drive transmission unit A620 that has a drive motor AMT3 that is fixed in position to the fixed support unit A610 and is configured to be able to transmit the drive force of the drive motor AMT3 to the opening/closing operation unit A600b.

The fixed support unit A610 comprises a horizontal member A611 fastened to the lower part of the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373) when viewed from the front, a decorative member A613 fastened to the upper right side of the horizontal member A611, a right side member A615 fastened to the horizontal member A611 below the decorative member A613, and a left side member A617 fastened to the left side of the horizontal member A611 with a space between it and the left side of the horizontal member A611 to allow the drive transmission unit A620 to move.

The horizontal member A611 comprises a plate-shaped main body A611a, a pair of support formation parts A611b formed by bending the upper and lower ends of the plate-shaped main body A611a toward the front side, and a lift support rod A611c formed from a metallic cylindrical member that is inserted vertically through and fixed to the support formation parts A611b.

The lifting support rod A611c is supported by the support formation part A611b while being inserted into the rear side of the opening/closing operation unit A600b, thereby guiding the lifting direction of the opening/closing operation unit A600b and functioning to maintain the front-to-rear positioning of the opening/closing operation unit A600b relative to the plate-shaped main body A611a.

The decorative member A613 comprises a main body A613a formed in a box shape with an open back side, and a protruding portion A613b formed by protruding to the left from the left end of the front side surface of the main body A613a. The protruding portion A613b functions to prevent the opening/closing operation unit A600b from falling forward when the third operation unit A600 is in a standby state for performance, as will be described in detail below.

The right side member A615, together with the left side member A617, supports the light guide plate unit A700 (see FIG. 1373), and is a member to which the light guide plate unit A700 is fastened and fixed. That is, the opening/closing operation unit A600b is disposed behind the light guide plate unit A700 when the third operation unit A600 is in a standby state for performance, and is configured to be displaced upward toward the center of the light guide plate unit A700 by changing its state to the protruding state.

The left side member A617 is made up of a plate-shaped main body A617a, a support portion A617b formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the back side of the plate-shaped main body A617a, a fan-shaped through hole A617c drilled along an arc centered on the support portion A617b, an upwardly biased torsion spring A617d wound around a metal rod arranged on the plate-shaped main body A617a in an arrangement coaxial with the support portion A617b, one end of which is fixed and the other end of which is arranged in a position facing the fan-shaped through hole A617c, and a box-shaped member formed on the lower side of the plate-shaped main body A617a with the back side open. The box-shaped portion A617e includes a cylindrical support portion A617f protruding from the rear side of the box-shaped portion A617e, an insertion hole A617g drilled in the box-shaped portion A617e large enough to insert the drive gear AMG3 of the drive motor AMT3, a covering portion A617h extending from the lower edge of the insertion hole A617g to the rear side with an arc-shaped cross section and partially covering the insertion hole A617g at the extended end, and a detection sensor A617i fastened to the rear side of the box-shaped portion A617e with the detection gap facing the support portion A617f.

The covered portion A617h functions as a stopper that prevents the drive gear AMG3 from coming off the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT3 and falling off to the rear side. This makes it possible to prevent the drive gear AMG3 from falling off the drive motor AMT3.

The detection sensor A617i is a device that detects the position of the drive transmission unit A620, making it possible to determine whether the third operating unit A600 is in a performance standby state or an extended state.

The drive transmission unit A620 includes a rotational movement member A621 supported by the support portion A617b so as to be rotatable between the horizontal member A611 and the left side member A617 and connected to the opening/closing movement unit A600b, and a transmission member A625 rotatably supported by the support portion A617f so as to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor AMT3 to the rotational movement member A621.

The rotating member A621 includes a plate-shaped main body A621a, an insertion hole A621b drilled at the end of the plate-shaped main body A621a so that the support part A617b of the left side member A617 can be inserted therethrough, a transmission long hole A621c drilled as a long hole with a straight line in the longitudinal direction passing through the insertion hole A621b, a spring receiving protrusion A621d protruding from the upper end close to the insertion hole A621b toward the front side and receiving the other end of the torsion spring A617d, and an insertion protrusion A621e protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the insertion hole A621b of the plate-shaped main body A621a is disposed and inserted into the opening/closing unit A600b.

The rotating member A621 is rotatably supported on the left side member A617 by inserting the support portion A617b into the insertion hole A621b. The retaining screw screwed into the tip of the support portion A617b is configured to be removable through the through hole A611d of the horizontal member A611. That is, in this embodiment, an assembly procedure can be adopted in which the left side member A617 is fastened to the horizontal member A611, and then the screw is screwed into the tip of the support portion A617b.

The transmission member A625 includes a main gear portion A625a that meshes with the drive gear AMG3, a protruding portion A625b that protrudes like a flange from the entire circumference on the back side of the main gear portion A625a, an insertion protrusion A625c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the outer peripheral end of the protruding portion A625b to the back side, and an extension portion A625d that is bent from the outer peripheral end of the protruding portion A625b and extends in a direction away from the rotation axis.

The insertion protrusion A625c is inserted into the transmission long hole A621c of the rotating member A621 via the collar member AC1. This allows the rotation of the transmission member A625 and the rotation of the rotating member A621 to be linked.

The extension A625d is disposed at a position that allows it to cross the detection gap of the detection sensor A617i. In other words, the corresponding control device can determine the position of the transmission member A625 depending on whether the extension A625d is disposed in the detection gap of the detection sensor A617i.

Figure 1407 is an exploded front oblique view of the opening/closing operation unit A600b, and Figure 1408 is an exploded rear oblique view of the opening/closing operation unit A600b. The opening/closing operation unit A600b includes a plate-shaped member A630 made of a resin material, a space forming member A640 fastened to the front side of the plate-shaped member A630 so as to form a space between the plate-shaped member A630, a pair of moving members A650 supported movably in the space between the plate-shaped member A630 and the space forming member A640, a drive motor AMT4 fastened to the plate-shaped member A630, a drive transmission unit A660 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive motor AMT4 to the moving member A650, a rear cover member A670 fastened to the plate-shaped member A630 so as to sandwich the drive transmission unit A660 between the plate-shaped member A630, and a guide unit A680 fastened to the rear cover member A670 so as to sandwich the lift support rod A611c between the rear cover member A670.

The plate-shaped member A630 comprises a plate-shaped main body A631, a protruding support part A632 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A631, a pair of arc-shaped holes A633 that are drilled in an arc shape centered on the protruding support part A632, a protruding support part A634 that protrudes parallel to the protruding support part A632, and a frame-shaped part A635 that protrudes toward the rear side in a frame shape along the outer edge of the plate-shaped main body A631 to form a space between the rear cover member A670.

The space forming member A640 includes a main body member A641 forming a framework, a light-transmitting member A642 fastened to the front side of the main body member A641, a non-transmitting plating member A643 that is hollowed out to surround the light-transmitting member A642 and fastened to the main body member A641 with plating applied to the front side, a light-emitting substrate A644 that is formed so as to be able to irradiate light over the entire area of the light-transmitting member A642 and fastened to the main body member A641, and a detection sensor A645 that is disposed on the back side of the main body member A641 to detect the position of the moving member A650.

The main body member A641 has a pair of guide grooves A641a on the back side that are long in the left-right direction, and a stopper portion A641b that is formed to protrude near the end of the guide groove portion A641a. The guide groove portion A641a is a pair of grooves that are arranged in parallel vertically, and is a linear, long groove that runs from the upper left to the lower right, and is configured to be able to guide the movement of the moving member A650. The stopper portion A641b is a protrusion that prevents the moving member A650 from falling off the space forming member A640, and is configured to be able to engage with the moving member A650 that is arranged at the end position of the moving range.

The flat cable A644a extending from the light emitting substrate A644 enables power to be supplied to the moving member A650. In this embodiment, the flat cable A644a is arranged to extend along the longitudinal direction of the guide groove portion A641a. This makes it easier to avoid excessive load being applied to the flat cable A644a when the moving member A650 moves, and improves the durability of the flat cable A644a.

The movable member A650 comprises a main body member A651 that is made up of a pair of members of the same shape arranged in rotational symmetry to form a framework, and a decorative member A655 that is formed in a different shape and fastened to the corresponding main body member A651.

By configuring it in this way, the shape of the parts where the driving force is transmitted can be standardized, simplifying the transmission mechanism and allowing the use of a resin mold, while by arranging decorative member A655 on the side visible to the player, it is possible to prevent the simplified shape from affecting the presentation.

The main body member A651 includes a long main body portion A652 that is arranged with its long dimension aligned with the long dimension of the guide groove portion A641a and extends from the leading side to the front side when moving outward in the left-right direction, forming an L-shape when viewed from above, and a pair of roller members A653 that are rotatable and sized to be placed inside the guide groove portion A641a.

The long body portion A652 includes a stoppered portion A652a that faces and can come into contact with the stopper portion A641b when it moves outward in the left-right direction, a detected portion A652b that protrudes in a plate-like shape in the short direction from approximately the center in the longitudinal direction, and a rectangular recessed portion A652c that extends in the short direction and is recessed from the back side.

The detected portion A652b is disposed in a shape that allows it to cross the detection groove of the detection sensor A645. By disposing the detected portion A652b in the detection groove of the detection sensor A645, the corresponding control device can be made to recognize that the moving member A650 has been placed at the end of its movement.

In this embodiment, the detection sensor A645 is disposed only on the underside of the lower body member A651, so it is sufficient for the detection part A652b to be disposed on the lower body member A651, and the detection part A652b is not necessary on the upper body member A651. However, due to the need to share the resin mold, the detection part A652b is also formed on the upper body member A651.

The roller member A653 functions to reduce the operating resistance of the moving member A650 against the guide groove portion A641a. In other words, compared to when the moving member A650 slides against the guide groove portion A641a, the frictional force can be reduced by the rolling of the roller member A653, so that the moving member A650 can move smoothly.

The decorative member A655 is a member that is fastened to the front side of the end opposite the end where the stoppered portion A652a of the main body member A651 is disposed, and includes a translucent member A656 formed from a light-transmitting resin material, a frame-shaped member A657 formed in a frame shape surrounding the translucent member, and a light-emitting substrate A658 equipped with light-emitting means such as an LED that irradiates light toward the translucent member A656 and the frame-shaped member A657.

By fastening the decorative member A655 to the main body member A651, a U-shape that is open on one side in the left or right direction when viewed from above can be formed. A flat cable A644a is arranged inside this U-shape, and one end of the flat cable A644a is connected to the light-emitting substrate A658. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the flat cable A644a from protruding outside the main body member A651 or decorative member A655 and being visible to the player.

When the movable members A650 are in a closed state (see FIG. 1375) and are arranged close to each other, the decorative member A655 is arranged to cover the front side of the translucent member A642, and when the movable members A650 are in an open state (see B5) and are separated from each other, the decorative member A655 is arranged to move away from the front side of the translucent member A642 so that the translucent member A642 and the decorative member A655 can be seen at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to switch between a state in which only the decorative member A655 is visible to produce a light-emitting effect, and a state in which the translucent member A642 is placed between the decorative members A655 and both are visible at the same time to produce a light-emitting effect, depending on the position of the movable member A650.

The drive transmission unit A660 includes a drive gear A661 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT4 so as not to rotate relative to the drive shaft, a rotating plate member A662 that is rotatably supported on the protruding support portion A632 of the plate-shaped member A630, and a transmission gear A663 that is rotatably supported on the protruding support portion A634 of the plate-shaped member A630 and that links the drive gear A661 and the rotating plate member A662.

The rotating plate member A662 includes a through hole A662a through which the protruding support portion A632 can be inserted, a pair of fan-shaped plate portions A662b formed in a fan shape centered on the through hole A662a, an arc-shaped gear portion A662c having gear teeth that mesh with the transmission gear A663 formed on the arc-shaped portion of one of the fan-shaped plate portions A662b, and a pair of protruding portions A662d protruding in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b at positions that are rotationally symmetrical about the through hole A662a (positions shifted by 180 degrees in this embodiment).

The rotating plate member A662 is not a circular disk-shaped member, but is formed in a shape that resembles a circle with a part cut out, so that the area where friction occurs between the rotating plate member A662 and the plate-shaped main body A631 can be reduced. This reduces the resistance that occurs when the rotating plate member A662 rotates, and therefore reduces the driving force required for the drive motor AMT4.

The protrusion A662d passes through the arc-shaped hole A633 of the plate-shaped member A630 and is inserted into the recessed portion A652c of the moving member A650. In other words, by changing the position of the protrusion A662d, the position of the recessed portion A652c changes accordingly, causing the moving member A650 to move.

The rear cover member A670 includes a plate-shaped main body A671 that has the same external shape as the frame portion A635 of the plate-shaped member A630 and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member A630, a protruding portion A672 that protrudes in a plate shape from the right end of the plate-shaped main body A671, a pair of upper and lower protruding support portions A673 that protrude from the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A671 and support the rotation shaft of the rotating member of the guide unit A680, and a plurality of arc-shaped through holes A674 that are drilled in the plate-shaped main body A671 in relation to the rotation trajectory of the rotating plate member A662.

The extension portion A672 is a portion that is positioned behind the extension portion A613b (see FIG. 1405) in the performance standby state, and functions as a portion that returns the opening/closing operation unit A600b to its original position (leaning backwards) by receiving a rearward load from the extension portion A613b, for example, when the opening/closing operation unit A600b returns from the extension state to the performance standby state in a tilted forward state.

The guide unit A680 includes a box-shaped main body A681 formed in a box shape with an open front side, a pair of upper and lower roller members A682 arranged inside the box-shaped main body A681 and rotatable on a rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, a pair of pulley-shaped members A683 arranged on the left and right sides inside the box-shaped main body A681 and rotatable on a rotating shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a long through hole A684 drilled in a left-right long shape.

The roller member A682 is configured to protrude from the through hole A681a of the box-shaped main body A681 to the rear side, so that when the rear surface of the box-shaped main body A681 is placed opposite the plate-shaped main body A611a of the fixed support unit A610 (see FIG. 1405), the contact with the plate-shaped main body A611a can be achieved by the roller member A682 rolling rather than by the rubbing of the box-shaped main body A681. This makes it easier to reduce the resistance received from the fixed support unit A610 when the opening/closing operation unit A600b is raised and lowered.

A lifting support rod A611c (see FIG. 1405) is disposed between the pulley-like members A683 and passed through the recessed portion A681b of the box-shaped main body A681. As a result, the guide unit A680 is guided by the lifting support rod A611c and moves up and down, so that the operating direction of the opening/closing operation unit A600b can be stabilized.

The long through hole A684 is a long hole through which the insertion protrusion A621e (see FIG. 1405) of the rotating member A621 is inserted. That is, the driving force of the drive motor AMT3 (see FIG. 1405) is transmitted to the opening/closing unit A600b via the long through hole A684.

Figures 1409 and 1410 are rear views of the opening and closing operation unit A600b of the third operation unit A600. Figure 1409 illustrates the opening and closing operation unit A600b in the performance standby state of the third operation unit A600, and Figure 1410 illustrates the opening and closing operation unit A600b in the extended state of the third operation unit A600.

In addition, in Figures 1409 and 1410, for ease of understanding, the rear cover member A670 and the guide unit A680 are omitted, the arrangement of the arc-shaped through holes A674 of the rear cover member A670 is shown by imaginary lines, and the arrangement of the protruding portion A662d of the rotating plate member A662 is shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in Figures 1409 and 1410, the operating mode of the opening/closing operation unit A600b is such that, as the arrangement of the protrusions A662d changes along an arc centered on the protrusion support portion A632 with the rotation of the rotating plate member A662, the pair of moving members A650 move parallel in opposite directions above and below the protrusion support portion A632 along the formation direction (directions parallel to each other) of the corresponding guide groove portions A641a (see Figure 1408).

As described above, the main body member A651 of the moving member A650 is composed of a pair of members of the same shape arranged in rotational symmetry, and the protrusion portion A662d is also arranged in a symmetrical position around the protrusion support portion A632, which is the rotation axis of the main body member A651, so the effect of the protrusion portion A662d on the moving member A650 is commonly given to the pair of members.

That is, for example, if the rotating plate member A662 rotates at high speed, the pair of moving members A650 move in parallel at a common speed, and even if the rotating plate member A662 suddenly reverses (changes the direction of rotation), the pair of moving members A650 can be reversed simultaneously.

The positional relationship between the sectorial plate portion A662b of the rotating plate member A662 and the arc-shaped through hole A674 of the rear cover member A670 will be described. The area of overlap between the sectorial plate portion A662b and the arc-shaped through hole A674 in the front-to-rear direction changes as the rotating plate member A662 rotates. Air resistance occurs due to the air sandwiched between the sectorial plate portion A662b and the rear cover member A670, but this air resistance is reduced in the areas where the arc-shaped through holes A674 are formed in the rear cover member A670.

In FIG. 1410, the angular width of the arrangement range (see FIG. 1409) of the sectorial plate portion A662b of the rotating plate member A662 in the performance standby state of the third operating unit A600 is illustrated in the first area AE21, the angular width of the arrangement range of the sectorial plate portion A662b after the rotating plate member A662 is rotated clockwise in rear view from the state shown in FIG. 1409 is illustrated in the second area AE22, the angular width of the arrangement range of the sectorial plate portion A662b after the rotating plate member A662 is rotated clockwise in rear view from the state in which it is arranged on the sectorial plate portion A662b in the second area AE22 is illustrated in the third area AE23, and the angular width of the arrangement range of the sectorial plate portion A662b of the rotating plate member A662 in the extended state of the third operating unit A600 is illustrated in the fourth area AE24.

As shown in FIG. 1409, in this embodiment, regardless of the position of the rotating plate member A662, one of the sectorial plate portions A662b is positioned opposite at least one arc-shaped through hole A674. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 1409 (where the sectorial plate portion A662b is positioned in the first area AE21) is illustrated as the state in which the overlapping area between the sectorial plate portion A662b and the arc-shaped through hole A674 is the smallest, i.e., the state in which the air resistance applied to the sectorial plate portion A662b is the largest.

When placed in the first area AE21, the edge of the sectorial plate portion A662b on the clockwise side as viewed from the rear is positioned so as not to overlap with the arc-shaped through hole A674. Therefore, when the rotating plate member A662 starts to rotate clockwise as viewed from the rear, in addition to the arc-shaped through holes A674 (arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged on the left and right) that originally overlapped with the sectorial plate portion A662b, it also begins to overlap with other arc-shaped through holes A674 (arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged above and below), and this state continues until the sectorial plate portion A662b is placed in the second area AE22.

The overlapping area between the other arc-shaped through holes A674 and the sectorial plate portion A662b increases as the rotation angle of the rotating plate member A662 increases, so that the air resistance can be gradually reduced from the start of rotation of the rotating plate member A662, and as the rotation proceeds, the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 can be further reduced. This allows the rotation of the rotating plate member A662 and the movement of the moving member A650 to be carried out smoothly.

When the sectorial plate portion A662b is positioned in the second region AE22, the edge of the sectorial plate portion A662b on the counterclockwise side as viewed from behind is positioned so as to overlap the edge of the arc-shaped through hole A674 on the left and right sides on the counterclockwise side as viewed from behind. In other words, when the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise as viewed from behind, the edge of the sectorial plate portion A662b on the counterclockwise side as viewed from behind enters the interior of the arc-shaped through hole A674 as viewed from behind.

Therefore, as the rotating plate member A662 continues to rotate clockwise when viewed from the rear, the overlapping area between the arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged on the left and right and the sectorial plate portion A662b gradually decreases, while the overlapping area between the other arc-shaped through holes A674 (arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged above and below) and the sectorial plate portion A662b gradually increases. These changes occur at the same angle, so ultimately the overlapping area between the arc-shaped through holes A674 and the sectorial plate portion A662b remains constant.

This state continues until the sectorial plate portion A662b is positioned in the third region AE23. In other words, the air resistance acting on the rotating plate member A662 can be maintained constant from the state in which the sectorial plate portion A662b is positioned in the second region AE22 to the state in which it is positioned in the third region AE23.

From the state where the sectorial plate portion A662b is positioned in the third region AE23 to the state where the sectorial plate portion A662b is positioned in the fourth region AE24, the area where the sectorial plate portion A662b overlaps with the arc-shaped through holes A674 positioned on the left and right gradually decreases. As the rotation of the rotating plate member A662 progresses, the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 increases, and the rotating plate member A662 and the moving member A650 can be decelerated smoothly.

The state in which the sectorial plate portion A662b is positioned in the fourth region AE24 is such that the edge of the sectorial plate portion A662b on the counterclockwise side as viewed from the rear exactly overlaps the edge of the arc-shaped through-hole A674 on the left and right sides as viewed from the clockwise side as viewed from the rear.

Therefore, even when the rotating plate member A662 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear from the state shown in FIG. 1410 (when the third operating unit A600 is operated from the extended state to the standby state), a change in air resistance similar to that described above can be produced.

Therefore, regardless of whether the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise when viewed from behind from the state shown in FIG. 1409 or counterclockwise when viewed from behind from the state shown in FIG. 1410, the above-mentioned change in air resistance can be caused in both directions.

The movable member A650, which is operated by the transmission of driving force via the rotating plate member A662, is configured as a pair above and below, and the direction of the load applied from the movable member A650 to the rotating plate member A662 is the same regardless of the operating direction of the rotating plate member A662.

In other words, when the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise when viewed from the rear from the state shown in FIG. 1409, a load is generated from the upper moving member A650 to the left and a load is generated from the lower moving member A650 to the right, whereas when the rotating plate member A662 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear from the state shown in FIG. 1410, a load is generated from the upper moving member A650 to the right and a load is generated from the lower moving member A650 to the left.

In other words, the load applied to the rotating plate member A662 is simply reversed in direction, and does not change due to the difference in the direction of rotation. Therefore, regardless of whether the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise when viewed from the rear from the state shown in FIG. 1409, or whether the rotating plate member A662 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear from the state shown in FIG. 1410, the operating resistance generated in both directions can be made the same, and the operating speed can be made common.

Next, the light guide plate unit A700 will be described with reference to Figs. 1411 to 1416. Fig. 1411 is an exploded front perspective view of the light guide plate unit A700, and Fig. 1412 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light guide plate unit A700.

As shown in Figures 1411 and 1412, the light guide plate unit A700 includes a covering light guide plate unit A700a that is held by the rear case A210 (see Figure 1373) and is formed to a size that covers most of the front opening of the rear case A210, and an auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b that is fastened and fixed to the left side of the covering light guide plate unit A700a.

The covered light guide plate unit A700a comprises a plate-shaped light guide plate A701, a left light emitting substrate A702 having a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light toward the light guide plate A701 and disposed on the left side of the light guide plate A701, an upper light emitting substrate A703 having a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light toward the light guide plate A701 and disposed above the light guide plate A701, and a set of front and rear frame members A710 that fix the light guide plate A701, left light emitting substrate A702, and upper light emitting substrate A703 to prevent misalignment.

The light guide plate A701 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a rectangular flat plate shape with a notch A701a in the lower right corner. A groove is formed on the back surface of the light guide plate A701 along the outline of the shape of an illustration, including a specific character or logo, and when light is incident on the light guide plate A701 from the left light-emitting substrate A702 or the upper light-emitting substrate A703, the light is refracted in the groove, allowing the player to see a line of light that follows the outline of a specific character, etc.

The left light emitting substrate A702 and the upper light emitting substrate A703 are arranged so that the optical axes of the multiple LEDs are incident at right angles on the end face of the light guide plate A701. By configuring the direction of incidence on the light guide plate A701 in two directions, the above-mentioned line-shaped light can be generated in at least two types: when only light from the left light emitting substrate A702 is incident, and when only light from the upper light emitting substrate A703 is incident.

The frame member A710 is formed from a rectangular frame with the cutout A701a of the light guide plate A701 severed, and includes a set of left and right fixing parts A711 fastened to the front end of the outer wall part A212 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1373), a pair of lower fixing parts A712 fastened to the right side member A615 and the left side member A617 of the third operating unit A600 (see FIG. 1373), and abutting support parts A713 that abut against the support member A421 (see FIG. 1381) of the first operating unit A400 in the front-rear direction.

The abutment support portion A713 is disposed between the vertically arranged belts A423a (see FIG. 1383). Since the connecting mechanism A427 is disposed on the upper belt A423a, by disposing the abutment support portion A713 in a position closer to the lower belt A423a, the rigidity of the support member A421 can be used to support the abutment support portion A713 of the frame member A710 without impeding the movement of the connecting mechanism A427.

Figure 1413 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, and Figure 1414 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b. The auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b includes a plate-shaped light emitting substrate A720 with LEDs on the front and back sides, a front side plate member A730 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and disposed on the front side of the light emitting substrate A720 so as to be able to receive light irradiated from the LEDs of the light emitting substrate A720, a rear side plate member A740 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and disposed on the rear side of the light emitting substrate A720 so as to be able to receive light irradiated from the LEDs of the light emitting substrate A720, and a front cover member A750 formed from a light-transmitting resin material and disposed so as to sandwich the front side plate member A730 between the light emitting substrate A720.

The light emitting substrate A720 comprises a vertically long plate-shaped main body A721, a number of bulging plate sections A722 formed so as to bulge in an arc-like shape to the right from the plate-shaped main body A721, a number of recessed sections A723 recessed in the left side of the plate-shaped main body A721 at positions corresponding to the bulging plate sections A722, a number of front light emitting sections A724 such as highly directional LEDs arranged vertically on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A721, with the optical axis directed to the left, and a number of back light emitting sections A725 such as low-directional LEDs arranged vertically at positions on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A721 corresponding to the front light emitting sections A724 (positions moved parallel to the arrow F-B). The light emitting sections A725 are light emitting means such as low-directional LEDs, with the optical axis directed to the left.

By forming the bulging plate portions A722 at multiple positions in the vertical direction, it is possible to ensure a large support area (area of surface contact between the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 and the light-emitting substrate A720. This makes it possible to stabilize the posture of the light-emitting substrate A720 in the assembled state.

Light from the front light-emitting unit A724 is received by the front side plate member A730. The optical axes of the light from the multiple front light-emitting units A724 are each oriented to the left and parallel to each other, so that the front side plate member A730 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

Light from the rear light emitting units A725 is received by the rear plate member A740. The optical axes of the light from the multiple rear light emitting units A725 are all oriented to the left and are parallel to each other, so that the rear plate member A740 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

As described above, the front light-emitting portion A724 and the rear light-emitting portion A725 are arranged at corresponding positions in the front-to-rear direction, so that the range of the front side plate member A730 illuminated by the front light-emitting portion A724 and the range of the rear side plate member A740 illuminated by the rear light-emitting portion A725 can be made to correspond to each other.

As a result, when both the front light-emitting portion A724 and the rear light-emitting portion A725 are illuminated, their lights are combined to make the area illuminated by the front light-emitting portion A724 or the rear light-emitting portion A725 on the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 more brightly visible.

On the other hand, even when only one side of the front light-emitting portion A724 or the rear light-emitting portion A725 is illuminated, the bright areas of the front plate member A730 or the rear plate member A740 do not shift position, making it difficult for the presentation to feel unnatural.

The area illuminated by the front light-emitting element A724 or the rear light-emitting element A725 is the same, so even if, for example, a state is transitioned from one in which only the front light-emitting element A724 is illuminating to one in which only the rear light-emitting element A725 is illuminating, it is possible to avoid a change in the planar light brightness pattern received by the player (the pattern of which areas are bright and which areas are dark when viewed from the front). This can reduce fatigue among players.

The front plate member A730 comprises a plate-shaped main body A731 with a front side formed as a smooth surface, a linear groove portion A732 formed on the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A731 along the contour of the shape of an illustration including a specific character or logo, a plurality of fastening portions A733 that are cylindrically protruding from the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A731 and fastened to the frame-shaped member A710 (see FIG. 1411) by screwing into a female screw formed at the tip, a circular insertion through hole A734 for fastening to the front cover member A750, and an alignment long hole A735 for aligning with the front cover member A750.

When light from the front light emitting portion A724 is received by the front side plate member A730, the light is refracted by the linear groove portion A732, causing the outline of the shape of the above illustration to be visible as a bright line.

The rear plate member A740 is made of a plate-shaped main body A741 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and having the same shape as the front-view outer shape of the front plate member A730, a light-opaque (or low-transmittance) white sheet A742 formed of the same shape as the front-view outer shape of the plate-shaped main body A741 and disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A741, and a light-transmitting (or low-transmittance) white sheet A742 formed of the same shape as the front-view outer shape of the plate-shaped main body A741 and disposed on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A741. The thin resin plate A743 has a first through hole A741a, A742a, and A743a formed at the same position in the upper left corner so as to penetrate the plate-shaped main body A741, the sheet A742, and the thin resin plate A743 in the front-to-rear direction, and a second through hole A741b, A742b, and A743b formed at the same position in the lower part so as to penetrate the plate-shaped main body A741, the sheet A742, and the thin resin plate A743 in the front-to-rear direction.

The front side of the plate-shaped body A741 is formed as a smooth surface, and the rear side has numerous embossments. As a result, when light that is received by the plate-shaped body A741 and passes through to the rear side is reflected by the sheet A742, the light is diffused by the numerous embossments and emitted from the surface. This makes it possible to efficiently brighten the rear side of the plate-shaped body A741.

An illustration that is the basis for the outline of the linear groove portion A732 is drawn on the thin resin plate A743, and in this embodiment, it is painted in a color that corresponds to the illustration. Therefore, when light from the rear light emitting portion A725 is received by the rear side plate member A740, the illustration drawn on the thin resin plate A743 is brightly visible through surface illumination due to the texture on the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A741.

The front cover member A750 includes a plate-shaped main body A751 with numerous hemispherical protrusions formed on the back side, an extended edge portion A752 extending in a plate-like manner from the upper and right edges of the plate-shaped main body A751 to the back side, a fastening portion A753 consisting of a protrusion used to align the light-emitting substrate A720 at the left end of the plate-shaped main body A751 and a female screw portion used for fastening, a plurality of cylindrical fastening portions A754 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the right end of the plate-shaped main body A751 to the back side, a protrusion portion A755 with a smaller diameter and shorter protrusion length than the cylindrical fastening portion A754, and a light-transmitting decorative sticker A756 decorated on the front side and attached to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A751.

During assembly, the protrusion A755 is inserted into the alignment slot A735 of the front plate member A730, and the cylindrical fastening portion A754 is inserted into the through-hole of the front plate member A730, thereby aligning the front plate member A730 with the front cover member A750.

Next, the light emitting substrate A720 is aligned with the fastening portion A753 so as to overlap the front plate member A730, and the rear plate member A740 is positioned so as to overlap the light emitting substrate A720. At this time, the cylindrical fastening portion A754 is inserted into the first through holes A741a, A742a, A743a of the rear plate member A740, and the fastening portion A733 at the lower right of the front plate member A730 is inserted into the second through holes A741b, A742b, A743b of the rear plate member A740, thereby aligning the rear plate member A740 with the front plate member A730.

When the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is fastened to the covering light guide plate unit A700a (see FIG. 1411) with the front side plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear side plate member A740 aligned with the front cover member A750, a pressing force (fastening force) is applied to the fastening portion A733 of the front side plate member A730 and the cylindrical fastening portion A754 of the front cover member A750.

In this embodiment, the fastening portion A733 and the cylindrical fastening portion A754 are disposed outside the light-emitting substrate A720, so that even if the pressing force (fastening force) becomes unintentionally excessive during assembly, it is easy to avoid the light-emitting substrate A720 cracking or breaking.

The cylindrical fastening portion A754 located at the upper right of the front cover member A750 allows the alignment of the front plate member A730, the rear plate member A740, and the front cover member A750, and the pressing (pressing) of the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 against the light emitting substrate A720 to be performed in one place. This reduces the number of assembly steps.

Figure 1415 is a rear view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, Figure 1416(a) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b taken along line MCDXVIa-MCDXVIa in Figure 1415, and Figure 1416(b) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b taken along line MCDXVIb-MCDXVIb in Figure 1415. Figure 1416(a) shows a cross section passing through the center of the cylindrical fastening portion A754.

When assembling the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the front side plate member A730 is aligned and attached to the front cover member A750, and then when the light emitting substrate A720 is attached to the front cover member A750, the height (front-to-back position) of the end face of the fastening portion where the female screw of the fastening portion A753 is formed matches the height (front-to-back position) of the rear side surface of the front side plate member A730 with which the bulging plate portion A722 abuts, thereby stabilizing the posture of the light emitting substrate A720.

Furthermore, when the rear plate member A740 is attached to the rear of the light-emitting substrate A720, the front side surface of the rear plate member A740 comes into contact with the bulging plate portion A722 over a wide area, stabilizing the posture of the rear plate member A740 and reducing localized loads.

As shown in Figures 1415 and 1416(a), the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 are formed so that they overlap with the light emitting substrate A720 in the same shape, so that the pressing force from the fastening screw screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion A754 is transmitted in a balanced manner to the light emitting substrate A720 via the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740. Since the pressing force can be prevented from functioning as a force that shears the light emitting substrate A720, cracking or chipping of the light emitting substrate A720 can be prevented.

Pressure is applied from the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 to the edge of the light-emitting substrate A720, so that the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 are pressed against the front and rear surfaces of the light-emitting substrate A720.

As a result, by accurately aligning the front and rear positions of the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 relative to the plate-shaped main body A721 of the light-emitting substrate A720, the front and rear positions of the front plate member A730 relative to the front light-emitting portion A724 and the rear plate member A740 relative to the rear light-emitting portion A725 can be easily aligned, making it easier to align the light-receiving positions of the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740.

The cylindrical fastening portion A754 is disposed at a position (between) that does not overlap with the optical axis of the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725. This prevents the cylindrical fastening portion A754 from blocking the optical axis of the light from the front light emitting portion A724 that is received by the front side plate member A730, improving the effect of the light emission effect using the front side plate member A730.

Figure 1416 (b) is illustrated as a cross section passing through the center of the third rear light emitting unit A725 from the bottom. As shown in Figures 1415 and 1416 (b), the fastening unit A733 is disposed at a position overlapping with the optical axis of the rear light emitting unit A725.

Even when the fastening portion A733 is arranged in this manner, the fastening portion A733 does not penetrate the front plate member A730 and does not block the light of the front light emitting portion A724. In addition, the light received by the rear plate member A740 has a slightly lower directivity in order to make the rear plate member A740 surface-emitting (LEDs with low directivity are likely to be selected), so even if the fastening portion A733 is arranged on the optical axis, the light is not completely blocked, and the impact on the light emission performance can be reduced. In other words, the freedom of arrangement of the fastening portion A733 of the front plate member A730 can be improved without reducing the performance effect of the light emission performance using the rear plate member A740.

When the rear side plate member A740 is fastened to the front cover member A750, the front side surface of the plate-shaped main body A741 is fastened so as to sandwich the left edge of the thin resin plate A743 between the rear side surface of the plate-shaped main body A721, thereby preventing the thin resin plate A743 from floating up from the plate-shaped main body A741.

In this case, the load applied to the thin resin plate A743 is not a point load like a fastening screw, but a line (surface) load along the left edge of the thin resin plate A743 between the plate-shaped main body A721 of the light-emitting substrate A720, so the pressing force per unit area applied to the thin resin plate A743 can be reduced. This makes it easier to avoid cracking or chipping of the thin resin plate A743.

As shown in Figures 1416(a) and 1416(b), the travel path AL1 of the irradiated light from the front light-emitting unit A724, which is selected from highly directional LEDs, extends in the left-right direction after being received by the front side plate member A730 until it reaches the linear groove portion A732 in a manner that causes total reflection at the front and rear surfaces of the front side plate member A730, and when it reaches the linear groove portion A732, it is refracted and redirected toward the front side.

Therefore, when light is being emitted from the front light emitting portion A724 when viewing the front side plate member A730 from the front side, the light directed from the linear groove portion A732 to the front side reaches the player's eyes, so that the outline of the shape of the illustration, including a specific character or logo, which is the original shape of the linear groove portion A732, can be seen to be glowing.

The light from the rear light emitting portion A725 is less directional than the light from the front light emitting portion A724, so the light from the rear light emitting portion A725 is not totally reflected within the rear plate member A740, and functions to uniformly illuminate the rear plate member A740.

As shown in FIG. 1416, the end of the front plate member A730 on the side of the front light-emitting portion A724 and the end of the rear plate member A740 on the side of the rear light-emitting portion A725 are positioned closer to the front light-emitting portion A724 and the rear light-emitting portion A725 than the end of the light-emitting substrate A720 on the side of the irradiation direction (right side) of the front light-emitting portion A724 and the rear light-emitting portion A725.

This allows the plate-shaped main body A721 of the light-emitting substrate A720 to be used as a shielding plate, making it possible to prevent light irradiated from the front light-emitting portion A724 (rear light-emitting portion A725) from leaking before being received by the front plate member A730 (rear plate member A740). This makes it easier to avoid, for example, situations in which light irradiated from the front light-emitting portion A724 is received by the rear plate member A740, or in which light irradiated from the rear light-emitting portion A725 is received by the front plate member A730, making it easier to avoid poor light-emitting performance.

When light is received from the front side, the plate-shaped main body A751 diffuses the light and emits it from the surface due to the numerous hemispherical protrusions A751a formed on the back side. This improves the effect of the light presentation and reduces the visibility of the back side of the front cover member A750, so it can be used to hide the light-emitting substrate A720.

The front light emitting part A724 of the light emitting substrate A720 is disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A751, but the light emitted from the front light emitting part A724 is incident on the front plate member A730 in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the plate-shaped main body A751 and is totally reflected within the front plate member A730. As a result, the plate-shaped main body A751 is not easily illuminated by the light emitted from the front light emitting part A724, and is perceived as dark, making it difficult to use as a performance area.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the received light can be diffused by the numerous hemispherical protrusions A751a formed on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A751, allowing the player to view the plate-shaped main body A751 in a bright state.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative sticker A756, which covers the entire front side of the plate-shaped body A751, to the front side of the plate-shaped body A751, the effect of the numerous protrusions A751a formed on the back side of the plate-shaped body A751 being conspicuous by light is reduced, and the visibility of the decoration on the brightly lit front side of the decorative sticker A756 can be improved.

Figures 1417(a) to 1417(f) are schematic front views of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, showing the visual appearance of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b. For ease of explanation, the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is illustrated with a rectangular outer shape, and triangular illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 are illustrated inside the rectangular outer shape. These triangular illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 correspond to an example of the outline of the shape of an illustration including a specific character, logo, etc., formed by the thin resin plate A743 and the linear groove portion A732 (see Figure 1414).

Figures 1417(a) to 1417(f) show an example of the difference in appearance of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b depending on whether the front light emitting portion A724 (see Figure 1413) is turned on or off, and whether the rear light emitting portion A725 (see Figure 1414) is turned on or off.

Figure 1417 (a) shows a case where the front light emitting part A724 (see Figure 1413) is turned off and the rear light emitting part A725 (see Figure 1414) is turned off. In this case, the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2, including specific characters, logos, etc., formed on the thin resin plate A743, are visible.

Figure 1417 (b) shows a case where the front light emitting part A724 (see Figure 1413) is turned off and the rear light emitting part A725 (see Figure 1414) is turned on. In this case, the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 are illuminated and visible.

Figure 1417 (c) shows a case where the front light emitting unit A724 (see Figure 1413) is turned on and the rear light emitting unit A725 (see Figure 1414) is turned off. In this case, the outline of the shape of the illustrations AIL1, AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed in the linear groove portion A732 (see Figure 1414) is illuminated and is visible as a line of light. In this case, the shape of the illustrations AIL1, AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed in the thin resin plate A743 is blocked by the line of light, reducing visibility.

Figure 1417 (d) illustrates a case where the front light emitting portion A724 (see Figure 1413) is turned on and the rear light emitting portion A725 (see Figure 1414) is turned on. In this case, the brightness of the front side of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b can be improved compared to the state illustrated in Figure 1417 (c).

Figure 1417 (e) shows a case where the front light emitting portion A724 (see Figure 1413) above the upper and lower halves of the plate-shaped body A721 is turned off, the front light emitting portion A724 below the upper and lower halves of the plate-shaped body A721 is turned on, the rear light emitting portion A725 (see Figure 1414) above the upper and lower halves of the plate-shaped body A721 is turned on, and the rear light emitting portion A725 (see Figure 1414) below the upper and lower halves of the plate-shaped body A721 is turned off.

In this case, in the upper half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the illustration AIL1 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 is illuminated and visible, and in the lower half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the outline of the shape of the illustration AIL2 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed in the linear groove portion A732 (see FIG. 1414) is illuminated and visible as a line of light.

Figure 1417 (f) illustrates a case in which the front light-emitting portion A724 (see Figure 1413) above the upper and lower halves of the plate-shaped body A721 is turned on, the front light-emitting portion A724 below the upper and lower halves of the plate-shaped body A721 is turned off, and the rear light-emitting portion A725 (see Figure 1414) is turned off.

In this case, in the upper half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the contour of the shape of the illustration AIL1 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed in the linear groove portion A732 (see FIG. 1414) is illuminated and is visible as a line of light, and in the lower half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the illustration AIL2 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 is visible.

As shown in Figures 1417(a) to 1417(f), in this embodiment, the visual appearance of the front side of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b can be changed in response to the various combinations of turning on and off the front light emitting part A724 (see Figure 1413) and turning on and off the rear light emitting part A725 (see Figure 1414).

Figure 1418 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, and Figure 1419 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13. As shown in Figures 1418 and 1419, the game board A13 is configured such that a center frame A86 is fastened and fixed to the window portion A60a of the base plate A60 from the front side, and game balls can flow down the left and right sides of the center frame A86.

The game board A13 is provided with a downstream branching member A801 formed from a light-transmitting resin material with a protruding portion that branches the downstream flow of game balls and disposed on the upper left side of the center frame A86, a guide member A802 formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a shape that constitutes two guide flow paths arranged side by side to the left and right as flow paths for guiding the downstream flow of game balls and disposed on the right front side of the center frame A86, a downstream guide member A803 fixed to the base plate A60 below the guide member A802 and formed in a shape that constitutes two guide flow paths arranged side by side to the left and right as flow paths for guiding the downstream flow of game balls and an auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 disposed on the rear side of a light-transmitting decorative member A808 disposed inside the center frame A86 and configured to be able to irradiate light to the decorative member A808.

The downstream branching member A801 is disposed in front of the inner area of the window portion A60a when the center frame A86 is disposed on the base plate A60. In this case, the light traveling from the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 toward the downstream branching member A801 does not pass through the base plate A60, but passes through the center frame A86, which is thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate A60, to reach the downstream branching member A801, so that attenuation of the light reaching the downstream branching member A801 can be suppressed.

The guide member A802 includes a plate-shaped main body A802a formed in a shape that covers the upper right region A60b of the window portion A60a of the base plate A60 from the front side, a pair of extension plates A802b that extend from the plate-shaped main body A802a to the front side, and a number of deceleration protrusions A802c that protrude from the plate-shaped main body A802a or the extension plates A802b to decelerate the game ball, and is fastened and fixed to the base plate A60 at the top and bottom positions of the upper right region A60b.

The auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is disposed on the back side of the guide member A802, sandwiching the protruding plate portion A86a of the center frame A86, which is contained in the upper right region A60b and has a plate thickness thinner than that of the base plate A60. In this case, the light traveling from the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to the guide member A802 does not pass through the base plate A60, but passes through the protruding plate portion A86a of the center frame A86, which is thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate A60, and reaches the guide member A802, so attenuation of the light reaching the guide member A802 can be suppressed.

For the left flow path, the deceleration protrusion A802c protrudes from both of a pair of opposing extension plates A802b, allowing the game ball flowing down to sway left and right. For the right flow path, the deceleration protrusion A802c protrudes from the right extension plate A802b and protrudes forward from the plate-shaped main body A802a, allowing the game ball flowing down to sway left and right and forward and backward.

In this way, the game ball flowing down the two flow paths formed by the guide member A802 is decelerated by the deceleration protrusion A802c, but the way it flows down differs depending on which flow path it flows down. This allows the player to immediately know which flow path the game ball is flowing down by looking at the way the game ball flows down.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, there is no need to form a deceleration protrusion on the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 1370), so the outer edge member 73 can be configured as a common part. This allows for cost reduction of the product.

In this embodiment, the guide member A802 forms two flow paths that are wider from side to side than a single flow path, which can easily cause problems in terms of strength. In contrast, in this embodiment, the extension plate A802b that forms the flow path is positioned in the center of the plate-shaped main body A802a, and also serves as a reinforcing material for the guide member A802. This makes it easier to avoid insufficient strength even if the guide member A802 is formed as a thin member.

The downstream guide member A803 comprises a plate-shaped main body A803a and an extension plate A803b extending from the rear surface of the plate-shaped main body A803a, and their front-to-back relationship is reversed to that of the guide member A802.

Unlike the two flow paths formed by the guide member A802, the two guide flow paths formed by the downstream guide member A803 have different flow path shapes on the left and right. That is, the flow path on the left side is a flow path that slopes downward and to the left, while the flow path on the right side is formed as a path that meanders from left to right. This allows the flow pattern of the game ball to be greatly changed depending on which flow path it flows down.

Figure 1420 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, and Figure 1421 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810. The auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 includes a set of plate-shaped front light emitting substrates A820 with LEDs arranged on the front surface, a set of plate-shaped rear light emitting substrates A830 with LEDs arranged on the rear surface, a front side plate member A840 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and arranged on the front side of the front light emitting substrate A820 so as to be able to receive light emitted from the LEDs of the front light emitting substrate A820, a rear side plate member A850 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and arranged on the rear side of the rear light emitting substrate A830 so as to be able to receive light emitted from the LEDs of the rear light emitting substrate A830, and a base member A860 formed in a white resin material with low light transmittance and arranged to sandwich the rear side plate member A850 between the rear light emitting substrate A830.

The front light emitting substrate A820 includes an upper substrate A821 disposed on the upper side and a right substrate A825 disposed on the right side. The upper substrate A821 includes a plate-shaped main body A822, a plurality of edge light emitting units A823, each of which is a light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower right corner on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A822 and has an optical axis directed to the right, and a plurality of surface light emitting units A824, each of which is a light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged to the left of the edge light emitting unit A823 and has an optical axis directed to the front side.

Light from the edge light emitters A823 is received by the front plate member A840. The optical axes of the light from the multiple edge light emitters A823 are each oriented to the right and parallel to the front plane of the front plate member A840, so that the front plate member A840 can be illuminated over a wide range.

Furthermore, the edge light emitter A823 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED does not face directly to the right, but is configured to face in a radial direction such that the spacing between the optical axes becomes wider toward the right. This allows the light from the edge light emitter A823 to be guided over a wide area of the front side plate member A840.

The light from the surface light emitting unit A824 is received by the decorative member A808 (see FIG. 1418) arranged on the front side. The optical axes of the light from the multiple surface light emitting units A824 are all facing the front side and are parallel to each other, so that the decorative member A808 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

The right side substrate A825 comprises a plate-shaped main body A826, a plurality of edge light emitting units A827 such as LEDs arranged in the upper left corner on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A826, with their optical axes directed upward, and a plurality of surface light emitting units A828 such as LEDs arranged below the edge light emitting units A827, with their optical axes directed toward the front side.

Light from the edge light emitters A827 is received by the front plate member A840. The optical axes of the light from the multiple edge light emitters A827 are each oriented upward and parallel to the front plane of the front plate member A840, so that the front plate member A840 can be illuminated over a wide range.

Furthermore, the edge light emitter A827 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED does not face straight up, but is configured to face in a radial direction such that the spacing between the optical axes becomes wider the further upward. This allows the light from the edge light emitter A827 to be guided over a wide area of the front side plate member A840.

Light from the edge light emitting portion A823 of the upper substrate A821 is received from the left end of the front plate member A840, while light from the edge light emitting portion A827 is received from the lower end of the front plate member A840. This makes it easier for light to reach the entire front plate member A840, even if the front plate member A840 has a narrowed shape with a narrowed portion A844 at the center when viewed from the front.

The light from the surface light emitting unit A828 is received by the decorative member A808 (see FIG. 1418) arranged on the front side. The optical axes of the light from the multiple surface light emitting units A828 are all facing the front side and are parallel to each other, so that the decorative member A808 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

The rear light emitting substrate A830 includes an upper substrate A831 disposed on the upper side and a right substrate A835 disposed on the right side. The upper substrate A831 includes a plate-shaped main body A832 and a plurality of edge light emitting units A833, such as a plurality of LEDs, arranged in the lower right corner on the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A832, with their optical axes directed to the right.

The light from the edge light emitters A833 is received by the rear plate member A850. The optical axes of the light from the multiple edge light emitters A833 are each oriented to the right and parallel to the front plane of the rear plate member A850, so that the rear plate member A850 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

Furthermore, the edge light emitter A833 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED does not face directly to the right, but is configured to face in a radial direction such that the spacing between the optical axes becomes wider toward the right. This allows the light from the edge light emitter A833 to be guided over a wide area of the rear side plate member A850.

The right-side substrate A835 includes a plate-shaped main body A836 and a plurality of edge light-emitting units A837, such as a plurality of LEDs, arranged in the upper left corner on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A836, with their optical axes directed upward.

The light from the edge light emitters A837 is received by the rear plate member A850. The optical axes of the light from the multiple edge light emitters A837 are each oriented upward and parallel to the front plane of the rear plate member A850, so that the rear plate member A850 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

Furthermore, the edge light emitter A837 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED does not face straight up, but is configured to face in a radial direction such that the spacing between the optical axes becomes wider the further upward. This allows the light from the edge light emitter A837 to be guided over a wide area of the rear side plate member A850.

Light from the edge light emitting portion A833 of the upper substrate A831 is received from the left end of the rear plate member A850, while light from the edge light emitting portion A837 is received from the bottom end of the rear plate member A850. This makes it easier for light to reach the entire rear plate member A850, even if the rear plate member A850 has a narrow shape toward the center when viewed from the front.

The edge light emitting parts A823, A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 and the edge light emitting parts A833, A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 are arranged at corresponding positions in the front-to-rear direction (positions moved parallel to the arrows F-B), so that the range of the front side plate member A840 illuminated by the edge light emitting parts A823, A827 can correspond to the range of the rear side plate member A850 illuminated by the edge light emitting parts A833, A837.

As a result, when both the edge light emitting portions A823, A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 and the edge light emitting portions A833, A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 are illuminated, the combined light makes it possible to make the area illuminated by the edge light emitting portions A823, A827 or the edge light emitting portions A833, A837 on the front side plate member A840 and the rear side plate member A850 more brightly visible.

On the other hand, even when only one side of the edge light emitting sections A823, A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 or the edge light emitting sections A833, A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 is illuminated, the bright areas of the front plate member A840 or the rear plate member A850 do not shift in position, making it difficult for the presentation to feel unnatural.

The area illuminated by the edge light emitting parts A823, A827 of the front light emitting board A820 or the edge light emitting parts A833, A837 of the rear light emitting board A830 is the same, so even if a state is transitioned from one in which only the edge light emitting parts A823, A827 of the front light emitting board A820 are illuminated to one in which only the edge light emitting parts A833, A837 of the rear light emitting board A830 are illuminated, it is possible to avoid a change in the planar light brightness pattern received by the player (the pattern of which positions are bright and which positions are dark when viewed from the front). This can reduce fatigue among players.

The front plate member A840 comprises a plate-shaped main body A841 whose front side surface is formed as a smooth surface, a linear groove portion A842 formed on the rear side surface of the plate-shaped main body A841 along the contour of the shape of an illustration including a specific character or logo, a circular through-hole A843 drilled for fastening and fixing to the base member A860, and a constricted portion A844 formed so that the middle portion of the plate-shaped main body A841 is constricted.

When light from the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 is received by the front side plate member A840, the light is refracted in the linear groove portion A842, causing the outline of the shape of the above illustration to be visible as a bright line.

The shape of the plate-shaped main body A841 having the constricted portion A844 is a result of matching the outer shape of the illustration that is the basis for the linear groove portion A842. In other words, the linear glowing shape is visible throughout the entire plate-shaped main body A841, so that no unnecessary areas are created in the plate-shaped main body A841 in terms of presentation.

The rear plate member A850 includes a plate-shaped main body A851 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and having the same shape as the front-view outer shape of the front plate member A840, a light-transmitting thin resin plate A855 formed in the same shape as the front-view outer shape of the plate-shaped main body A851 and disposed on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A851, first through holes A851a, A855a formed at the same position in the upper left corner so as to penetrate the plate-shaped main body A851 and the thin resin plate A855 in the front-to-rear direction, and second through holes A851b, A855b formed at the same position in the lower part so as to penetrate the plate-shaped main body A851 and the thin resin plate A855 in the front-to-rear direction.

The plate-shaped main body A851 has a constricted portion A852 formed in a position corresponding to the constricted portion A844 of the front side plate member A840, and has a smooth front side surface and numerous embossments formed on the rear side surface. As a result, when light received by the plate-shaped main body A851 that escapes to the rear side is reflected by the white base member A860, the light is diffused by the numerous embossments and emitted from the surface. This makes it possible to efficiently brighten the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A851.

The plate-shaped main body A851 has a constricted portion A852, and after passing through the constricted portion A852, the light received from one side of the constricted portion A852 tends to travel within a range limited by the width of the constricted portion A852. Therefore, when the constricted portion A852 is formed wider on both sides than the width of the constricted portion A852, as in the plate-shaped main body A851 of this embodiment, it is difficult to spread the light received from one side of the constricted portion A852 over the entire area of the plate-shaped main body A851.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped body A851 is configured so that light from the edge light emitter A833 is received above the constricted portion A852, and light from the edge light emitter A837 is received below the constricted portion A852. This makes it possible to receive light over the entire area of the plate-shaped body A851 while employing the constricted portion A852, compared to when light is received only from the upper or lower side of the constricted portion A852. This makes it possible to efficiently brighten the entire area of the plate-shaped body A851.

An illustration that is the basis for the outline of the linear groove portion A842 is drawn on the thin resin plate A855, and in this embodiment, it is painted in a color that corresponds to the illustration. Therefore, when light from the edge light emitting portions A833, A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 is received by the rear plate member A850, the illustration drawn on the thin resin plate A855 is brightly visible through surface emission due to the texture on the rear side of the plate-shaped main body A851.

The base member A860 is a member formed from a white resin material, and includes a plate-shaped main body A861 formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from the front, an alignment protrusion A862 for aligning the rear plate member A850 supported by the plate-shaped main body A861, a fastening portion A863 to which the rear plate member A850 is fastened, a substrate fastening portion A864 to which the rear light emitting substrate A830 is aligned and fastened, a base portion A865 formed in a base shape on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A861, a cylindrical fastening portion A866 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the front of the plate-shaped main body A861 at a height matching the front side surface of the base portion A865 and having a female screw formed at its tip, and a plate-sandwich fastening portion A867 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the front of the plate-shaped main body A861 and having a female screw formed at its tip, and which is longer in the protruding direction by the thickness of the front light emitting substrate A820 than the protruding length of the cylindrical fastening portion A866.

The auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is assembled by fastening and fixing the rear plate member A850, rear light emitting substrate A830, front light emitting substrate A820, and front plate member A840 to the base member A860 in that order.

First, the fastening of the rear plate member A850 to the base member A860 will be described. The fastening of the rear plate member A850 to the base member A860 is performed by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted into the plate-shaped main body A851 into the fastening portion A863 while the corresponding alignment protrusion A862 is inserted into the first through hole A851a and the second through hole A851b.

At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-shaped main body A851 but not into the thin resin plate A855. Therefore, with the plate-shaped main body A851 fastened and fixed to the base member A860, the corresponding alignment protrusions A862 are inserted into the first through holes A855a and the second through holes A855b, making it easy to align the thin resin plate A855 with the base member A860 and the plate-shaped main body A851.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the thin resin plate A855 from cracking due to the pressing force applied during fastening. It is also possible to replace the thin resin plate A855 while maintaining the fastening of the plate-shaped main body A851.

Next, the fastening and fixing of the rear light emitting substrate A830 to the base member A860 will be described. The rear light emitting substrate A830 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 by fastening the rear light emitting substrate A830 to the substrate fastening portion A864.

The board fastening portions A864 are each inserted into the through holes A853 of the rear plate member A850, and also function to align the rear plate member A850 with the base member A860.

When the rear light emitting substrate A830 is fastened to the base member A860, the rear side of the plate-shaped body A832 of the upper substrate A831 is fastened so that the left edge of the thin resin plate A855 is sandwiched between the rear side of the plate-shaped body A851 and the front side of the plate-shaped body A851, and the rear side of the plate-shaped body A836 of the right substrate A835 is fastened so that the lower right edge of the thin resin plate A855 is sandwiched between the front side of the plate-shaped body A851, thereby preventing the thin resin plate A855 from floating up from the plate-shaped body A851.

In this case, the load applied to the thin resin plate A855 is not a point load like a fastening screw, but a line (surface) load along the left edge, so the pressing force per unit area applied to the thin resin plate A855 can be reduced. This makes it easier to avoid cracking or chipping of the thin resin plate A855.

As described above, when the rear light emitting substrate A830 is fastened and fixed, the rear side surface of the plate-shaped main body A832 is configured to abut the front side surface of the rear plate member A850, so that the optical axes of the edge light emitting parts A833, A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 and the rear plate member A850 can be easily aligned in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the front side surface of the rear plate member A850 faces). This allows for good light reception at the rear plate member A850.

Next, the fastening of the front light emitting substrate A820 to the base member A860 will be described. The front light emitting substrate A820 is fastened to the base member A860 by fastening the front light emitting substrate A820 to the cylindrical fastening portion A866 with the lower left side of the rear side surface of the front light emitting substrate A820 in surface contact with the base portion A865.

The front light emitting substrate A820 and the rear light emitting substrate A830 are arranged parallel to each other with a gap between them, so that no pressing force is generated between the front light emitting substrate A820 and the rear light emitting substrate A830 and rear side plate member A850.

Next, the fastening of the front plate member A840 to the base member A860 will be described. The fastening of the front plate member A840 to the base member A860 is performed by fastening the front plate member A840 to the plate-sandwich fastening portion A867.

The clamping fastening part A867 is positioned outside and near the front light emitting substrate A820, so that the pressing force generated when fastening to the clamping fastening part A867 is prevented from being applied to the front light emitting substrate A820 as a point load. This makes it possible to prevent cracking or chipping of the front light emitting substrate A820.

The front plate member A840 has a through hole A845 formed therein to ensure the positioning of LEDs such as the edge light emitter A823 arranged on the front light emitting substrate A820, and the rear side surface of the plate-shaped main body A841 excluding this through hole A845 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 so as to apply a surface pressure against the plate-shaped main bodies A822 and A826 of the front light emitting substrate A820. This makes it possible to increase the support area of the front plate member A840 by utilizing the plate-shaped main bodies A822 and A826 of the front light emitting substrate A820.

When the front plate member A840 is fastened to the base member A860, the rear side surface of the plate-shaped main body A841 of the front plate member A840 is configured to abut the front side surface of the front light-emitting substrate A820 at a surface, so that the optical axes of the edge light-emitting parts A823, A827 of the front light-emitting substrate A820 and the front plate member A840 can be easily aligned in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the front side surface of the front plate member A840 faces). This allows for good light reception to the rear plate member A850.

As described above, the front light-emitting substrate A820, the rear light-emitting substrate A830, the front plate member A840, and the rear plate member A850 are aligned with and fastened to each component formed on the base member A860. This makes it easy to align the front light-emitting substrate A820, the rear light-emitting substrate A830, the front plate member A840, and the rear plate member A850 in a direction parallel to the front side surface of the base member A860.

Even if the substrates are configured with a pair of front light emitting substrate A820 and rear light emitting substrate A830 arranged in front and rear, the front light emitting substrate A820, rear light emitting substrate A830, front plate member A840 and rear plate member A850, which correspond to the light receiving member, are fastened and fixed in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, so that the front light emitting substrate A820, rear light emitting substrate A830, front plate member A840 and rear plate member A850 can be easily aligned in the direction intersecting with the front side surface of the base member A860.

Figure 1422 is a front view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, and Figure 1423 is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 taken along line MCDXXIII-MCDXXIII in Figure 1422. In Figure 1422, the outline of the decorative member A808 and the outline of the upper right region A60b (see Figure 1418) are shown by imaginary lines, the portion of the outline of the front light emitting substrate A820 that overlaps with the front side plate member A840 is shown by hidden lines, and Figure 1423 shows a cross section passing through the center of the cylindrical fastening portion A866 (see Figure 1420) located on the central side of the base member A860.

As shown in FIG. 1422, the front light-emitting substrate A820 is disposed so as to fit within the outline of the decorative member A808 when viewed from the front, and the front side plate member A840, which receives light from the edge light-emitting portions A823 and A827 of the front light-emitting substrate A820, is disposed so as to extend beyond the decorative member A808 when viewed from the front.

This makes it possible to reduce the front-to-back thickness of the entire auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 while concealing the front light emitting board A820 with the decorative member A808. In other words, when arranging a light emitting board on the back side of the front plate member A840 of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to perform light emission of the front plate member A840, it is necessary to arrange the light emitting board at an appropriate distance to make the front plate member A840 emit light, which increases the front-to-back width of the unit and reduces the space available behind it for arranging moving props.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front light emitting substrate A820 is positioned not behind the front plate member A840, but offset left/right or front/rear from the front plate member A840, thereby shortening the front/rear width of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, and therefore providing sufficient space behind the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to place moving objects.

In this embodiment, by using the guide member A802 (see FIG. 1418), a play area is also formed in front of the upper right region A60b of the window portion A60a. The right end of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 extends into the upper right region A60b. In other words, it is positioned further inward than the thickness of the base plate A60 in the front-to-rear direction.

This allows the front-to-rear thickness of the game board A13 (see FIG. 1418) to be reduced compared to when the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged behind the base plate A60. Furthermore, since the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged behind the base plate A60, and light entering the game area is less likely to be attenuated compared to light that reaches the game area by passing through the thickness of the base plate A60, the game area in front of the upper right area A60b can be brightly illuminated.

The front plate member A840 is formed in a shape that overlaps with the edge of the front light emitting substrate A820. That is, when the front plate member A840 is fastened to the base member A860 from the front side of the front light emitting substrate A820, the pressing force applied from the front plate member A840 to the front light emitting substrate A820 is divided along the edge of the front light emitting substrate A820, so that the load per unit area can be reduced.

This allows the front light emitting substrate A820 and the front plate member A840 to come into surface contact while avoiding excessive load being applied between them, making it easy to align the optical axes of the edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 with the front plate member A840.

As shown in FIG. 1423, the travel path AL2 of the irradiated light from the edge light emitters A823, A827, which are selected from highly directional LEDs, extends in the left-right direction after being received by the front side plate member A840 until it reaches the linear groove portion A842 in a manner that causes total reflection at the front and rear surfaces of the front side plate member A840, and when it reaches the linear groove portion A842, it is refracted and redirected toward the front side.

Therefore, when light is being emitted from the edge light emitting units A823, A827 when viewing the front side plate member A840 from the front side, the light directed from the linear groove unit A842 to the front side reaches the player's eyes, so that the outline of the shape of the illustration, including a specific character or logo, which is the original shape of the linear groove unit A842, can be seen as glowing.

The LEDs constituting the edge light-emitting units A833 and A837 (see FIG. 1421) are less directional than the LEDs constituting the edge light-emitting units A823 and A827. This allows the entire area of the rear side plate member A850 to be illuminated uniformly.

That is, the light from the edge light emitters A833, A837 (see FIG. 1421) does not undergo total reflection within the rear plate member A850, and functions to uniformly illuminate the rear plate member A850.

Let's go back to Figure 1370. As shown in Figure 1370, the downstream guide member A803 is disposed on the lower right side of the center frame A86 when viewed from the front. The downstream guide member A803 constitutes a flow path that guides the game ball guided by the guide member A802 regardless of whether it passes through the through gate 67.

Figure 1424 is an exploded front perspective view of the downstream guide member A803, and Figure 1425 is an exploded rear perspective view of the downstream guide member A803. Note that Figures 1424 and 1425 only show a portion of the base plate A60 to which the downstream guide member A803 is fixed, and other portions of the base plate A60 are omitted.

The downstream guide member A803 includes a front member A803z having a plate-shaped main body A803a and an extension plate A803b extending from the rear surface of the plate-shaped main body A803a, a rear member A804 made of a light-transmitting resin material that is fastened to the base plate A60 while being fastened to the front member A803z so as to form a path between the front member A803z and the front member A803z through which game balls can flow, and a decorative plate member A805 that is attached to the front surface of the plate-shaped main body A803a of the front member A803z. In the assembled state (see FIG. 1370), game balls guided by the guide member A802 are configured to flow down the area between the plate-shaped main body A803a and the rear member A804.

The extension plate A803b includes a left extension plate A803c that is formed from a plate portion extending in the vertical direction and an inclined plate portion extending in the lower left direction, extending from the left edge of the plate-shaped main body A803a, a middle left extension plate A803d that is formed from a shape corresponding to the left extension plate A803c and is arranged opposite the left extension plate A803c to form a left flow path ATL1 in the area between the left extension plate A803c, a middle right extension plate A803e that has a portion that branches off from a midpoint of the middle left extension plate A803d and extends to the right, and is formed to extend downward while bending left and right, and a right extension plate A803f that is arranged opposite the middle right extension plate A803e to form a right flow path ATL2 in the area between the middle right extension plate A803e.

The game ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1 passes through the ball detection sensor ASE1, which is disposed between the left extension plate A803c and the middle left extension plate A803d and is held by the sensor support portion A804a of the rear member A804 in the assembled state, on its way down to the left, which is the direction in which the left extension plate A803c and the middle left extension plate A803d extend, and is discharged toward the rear of the base plate A60 through the opening A804b of the rear member A804. Therefore, the game ball that flows into the left flow path ATL1 is not guided to the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 1370).

The direction in which the left flow path ATL1 extends (to the lower left) is away from the right flow path ATL2, so when both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are visible, it is easy to avoid confusing a game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 with a game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2.

There are various possible modes of control when a gaming ball is detected by the detection sensor ASE1, but in this embodiment, when the detection sensor ASE1 detects the passage of a gaming ball, it is controlled so that one prize ball is paid out.

The number of prize balls is just an example, and is not limited to one, but may be two or more. On the other hand, by limiting the number of prize balls to one as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the loss of balls when a game ball hit from the right flows through the left flow path ATL1.

In addition, when the number of prize balls is two or more, the number of balls that the player has will increase due to the prize balls paid out to the player, even after subtracting the shot balls. This can reduce the disappointment felt when balls flow into the left flow path ATL1.

The game ball that flows into the right-side flow path ATL2 flows down along the inclined surface A803e1 that extends in a downward right direction on the upstream side of the center right extension plate A803e. In this case, the ball flows down away from the left-side flow path ATL1 that is provided adjacent to the right-side flow path ATL2, so when both the left-side flow path ATL1 and the right-side flow path ATL2 are visible, it is easy to avoid confusing the game ball flowing in the left-side flow path ATL1 with the game ball flowing in the right-side flow path ATL2.

The ball rolling on the inclined surface A803e1 flows to the right near the upper edge of the plate-shaped body A803a, so the visibility of the ball when viewed from above the downstream guide member A803 can be improved compared to a ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1, which allows the ball to flow in a manner similar to free fall. In other words, the period during which the ball is visible when viewed from above the downstream guide member A803 can be extended.

The game ball flowing down the right flow path ATL2 rolls on the extension plate A803f1 that extends leftward from the inside of the right extension plate A803f, and flows down along the curved surface A803e2 of the middle right extension plate A803e that is curved in an arc shape to accommodate the rolling ball.

The ball rolling on the extension plate A803f1 flows down in a direction approaching the left flow path ATL1, but the curved surface A803e2 is positioned with a gap between it and the left flow path ATL1, and the ball flowing down along the curved surface A803e2 flows down in a direction away from the left flow path ATL1, making it easier to avoid confusing the game ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1 with the game ball flowing down the right flow path ATL2.

In addition, while the ball flows down the left flow path ATL1 while inclining to the left in the direction of gravity, the ball flows down the right flow path ATL2 while meandering left and right. This makes it easier to avoid mistaking the game ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1 for the game ball flowing down the right flow path ATL2 when both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are visible.

In addition, the period during which a game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 and a game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2 stay in the internal flow path of the downstream guide member A803 can be made different. For example, if balls flow into the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 at the same time, the ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1 is quickly swept downward, while the ball flowing down the right flow path ATL2 meanders left and right, so that the period during which the balls flowing down the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are at the same height can be shortened (the height positions of the balls can be made different). This makes it easier to avoid confusing the game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 with the game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2.

The game ball that passes through the right-side flow path ATL2 flows downward along the front side of the base plate A60 and is guided toward the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 1370). Therefore, among the balls that flow down the downstream guide member A803, only the balls that flow down the right-side flow path ATL2 can enter the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a.

As described above, the right-side flow path ATL2 is formed as a flow path that meanders left and right, so the vertical speed of the ball can be reduced compared to when the ball falls freely. This reduces the vertical speed of the ball when it reaches the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a, making it easier to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the opening and closing plate of the electric device 640a or the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device 65 are damaged by a collision with the ball.

The decorative plate member A805 is made of a resin material and includes a transparent sheet A805a that transmits light to the same degree regardless of the viewing direction, and a viewing pattern changing sheet A806 that is configured so that the light transmittance changes depending on the viewing direction.

The visual appearance changing sheet A806 is formed to a size that includes the left flow path ATL1 when viewed from the front, and the transparent sheet A805a is formed to a size that includes the right flow path ATL2 when viewed from the front, and the decorative plate member A805 composed of the visual appearance changing sheet A806 and the transparent sheet A805a is formed to a shape that occupies an area slightly smaller than the outer edge of the plate-shaped main body A803a.

Figure 1426 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the viewing behavior changing sheet A806. The viewing behavior changing sheet A806 can also be called a viewing angle control sheet, and is structured by laminating a transparent resin film A806c to the front and back of a louver film in which transparent silicone rubber A806a and black silicone rubber A806b are alternately arranged, and it is possible to design the angular range (viewing angle) of transmitted light by varying the arrangement interval and posture of the black silicone rubber A806b during manufacturing.

The visual appearance changing sheet A806 is a sheet that is attached to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A803a as shown in FIG. 1424, and is required to be very thin since it is placed in the limited area of the gap between the glass unit 16. In this embodiment, too, a finely designed sheet is used in which the transparent resin film A806c is a film made of polycarbonate and has a thickness of about 0.2 mm, and the black silicone rubber A806b is arranged at an interval (pitch) of about 0.1 mm.

Figures 1427(a) and 1427(b) are schematic diagrams showing the change in appearance of the downstream guide member A803 depending on the viewing direction. Figure 1427(a) shows the appearance when viewed in the direction of arrow AEL1 in Figure 1426, and Figure 1427(b) shows the appearance when viewed in the direction of arrow AEL2 in Figure 1426. Note that in Figure 1427, although changes in the external shape may occur depending on the viewing direction, for convenience, the same shape is shown ignoring the changes in the external shape. Also, in Figure 1427, the inner surfaces of the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2, which are visible through the viewing appearance changing sheet A806, are shown in solid lines.

In this embodiment, the spacing and orientation of the black silicone rubber A806b (see FIG. 1426) are designed so that the viewing angle at which the rear side of the visual appearance-changing sheet A806 can be seen through the visual appearance-changing sheet A806 is approximately 30 degrees.

That is, as shown in FIG. 1427(a), when the visual appearance changing sheet A806 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL1 (see FIG. 1426) (when viewed directly in front of the downstream guide member A803), the left side flow path ATL1 located at the back can be viewed through the visual appearance changing sheet A806.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1427(b), when the visual appearance-changing sheet A806 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL2 (see FIG. 1426) at an angle larger than the viewing angle (when viewed from a position shifted to the side from directly in front of the downstream guide member A803, for example, when viewed diagonally from directly in front of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1370)), the visual appearance-changing sheet A806 cannot be transmitted and the front side of the visual appearance-changing sheet A806 is viewed (if the surface is decorated with figures, illustrations, etc., the decoration is viewed), making it difficult to view the ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is easier for the player to see the game ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1 when viewing the downstream guide member A803 in the direction of arrow AEL1 than when viewing the downstream guide member A803 in the direction of arrow AEL2.

By utilizing the function of the visual appearance changing sheet A806 as described above, it is possible to make the player see only the ball that is most profitable for the player among the balls passing through the downstream guide member A803. This will be described in more detail.

A player playing on a pachinko machine 10 basically plays while viewing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1370) and the effects that are created by the movable parts (e.g., operating units A400-A600) that operate in front of it, so they rarely stare at a specific area of the play area, and often glance sideways at the downstream guide member A803 while viewing the third pattern display device 81 from the front (e.g., looking in the direction of arrow AEL2 in FIG. 1426).

For example, even during time-saving or special bonus play when playing with the right hand to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 1370), the player will want to focus on the presentation in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1370), so once the player has confirmed that the game ball is indeed flowing downward by glancing sideways at the downstream guide member A803, the player will normally take his or her eyes off the downstream guide member A803 and focus on the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, in the downstream guide member A803, which is only visible for such a short time, game balls that flow into the left flow path ATL1 do not flow to the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 1370) side, but are discharged from the game area. This type of configuration is adopted to keep the prize ball performance per unit time of the pachinko machine 10 within the standard (for adjusting the game time and prize balls), but for players, balls that flow into the left flow path ATL1 are not very desirable balls.

Being exposed to such undesirable ball movements can dampen the player's interest and can easily result in a lack of motivation to play the pachinko machine 10 again, which can be undesirable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the viewing pattern changing sheet A806 allows the player to see only the game ball flowing in the right-side flow path ATL2, but not the game ball flowing in the left-side flow path ATL1, when the player looks sideways at the downstream guide member A803 (for example, in the direction of the arrow AEL2).

In other words, by making only the ball flowing down the right-side flow path ATL2 visible when looking sideways at the downstream guide member A803, the downstream guide member A803 has multiple flow paths for the game ball to flow down, the left-side flow path ATL1 and the right-side flow path ATL2, but the player can only see the game ball flowing down the right-side flow path ATL2. This makes it seem to the player that all of the balls fired are being guided to the second winning hole 640 or the specific winning hole 65a (guided without waste), which increases the player's interest and therefore increases the player's desire to play again.

In this way, in this embodiment, by utilizing the viewing mode changing sheet A806, a player playing while viewing the display performance unfolding in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be configured to avoid seeing unfavorable balls (balls that are not guided to the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a) flowing down the left flow path ATL1, and can be configured to only see favorable balls (balls that are guided to the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a) flowing down the right flow path ATL2.

On the other hand, some players may wish to see disadvantageous balls flowing down the left flow path ATL1 as well. In this case, by moving their head from in front of the third pattern display device 81 and looking in the direction from the front of the downstream guide member A803 (in the direction of arrow AEL1 in FIG. 1426), the balls flowing down the left flow path ATL1 can be seen, which makes it possible to avoid the accumulation of dissatisfaction among players who wish to see disadvantageous balls flowing down the left flow path ATL1, and to prevent such players from losing their willingness to play again.

The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1428. In the tenth embodiment, the rotational motion unit 400b of the first motion unit A400 is configured to extend in the longitudinal direction (the direction connecting the rotational shaft AJ1 and the rotation tip) with the tilting motion. However, in the first motion unit A2400 of the eleventh embodiment, the rotational motion unit 400b is configured to extend and contract in the longitudinal direction with the tilting motion. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1428 is a rear view of the first operating unit A2400 in the eleventh embodiment. Figure 1428 illustrates the first operating unit A2400 in a performance standby state. Note that in the first operating unit A2400 in the eleventh embodiment, the rotation operating unit 400b is the same as in the tenth embodiment, while the support unit A2400a is different from the support unit A400a in the tenth embodiment, particularly in the guide long hole A2414. Note that in the explanation of Figure 1428, Figures 1387 and 1388 will be referred to as appropriate.

Instead of the long guide hole A414 described above in the tenth embodiment, the support unit A2400a has a long guide hole A2414 through which the columnar protrusion A448 of the rotational motion unit A400b is guided.

The guide elongated hole A2414 includes a first arc portion A2414a extending from the right end to the left in an arc shape, a second arc portion A2414b formed to the left of the first arc portion A2414a in an arc shape with a shorter radius than the first arc portion A2414a, a third arc portion A2414c formed to the left of the second arc portion A2414b in an arc shape with a longer radius than the first arc portion A2414a, a first straight portion A2414d formed in a straight hole shape connecting the left end of the first arc portion A2414a and the right end of the second arc portion A2414b, and a second straight portion A2414e formed in a straight hole shape connecting the left end of the second arc portion A2414b and the right end of the third arc portion A2414c.

The first arc portion A2414a is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 of a second radius AR2 whose radius is the second length AD2 (see FIG. 1387(b)), the second arc portion A2414b is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 of a first radius AR1 whose radius is the first length AD1 (see FIG. 1387(a)), and the first straight portion A2414d is formed in an inclined straight line.

Therefore, when the drive motor AMT1 is driven from the performance standby state of the first operating unit A2400 and the rotation operating unit A400b starts tilting, the longitudinal length of the rotation operating unit A400b does not change and only the rotation operation continues while the columnar protrusion portion A448 moves along the first arc portion A2414a.

Furthermore, while the columnar protrusion A448 moves along the first straight section A2414d, the rotational movement continues while the longitudinal length of the rotational movement unit A400b changes in the direction of shrinking, so the driving resistance increases.

Furthermore, while the columnar protrusion A448 moves along the second arc portion A2414b, the longitudinal length of the rotational motion unit A400b does not change and the rotational motion continues, so the driving resistance decreases accordingly.

In this way, the guide elongated hole A2414 is configured to increase the drive resistance when the columnar protrusion A448 enters the first straight section A2414d, so that it is easy to perform operation control to suddenly stop the rotation operation unit A400b in the posture when the columnar protrusion A448 enters the first straight section A2414d.

When the columnar protrusion A448 moves from the first arc portion A2414a to the first straight portion A2414d to the second arc portion A2414b, only the length of the rotational motion unit A400b in the longitudinal direction changes (see Figures 1387(a) and 1387(b)), and there is no change in the length of the rotational motion unit A400b in the width direction.

The second straight section A2414e is formed as an inclined straight line extending on the straight line AVL2 passing through the center of the rotating shaft rod AJ1. Therefore, when the columnar protrusion A448 moves along the second straight section A2414e, the rotation of the rotational motion unit A400b is stopped, and only a displacement extending in the longitudinal direction occurs.

When the length between the columnar protrusion A448 and the rotating shaft rod AJ1 becomes longer than the second length AD2 while the columnar protrusion A448 moves leftward along the second straight section A2414e, in addition to the displacement extending in the longitudinal direction of the rotating motion unit A400b, a displacement extending in the lateral direction of the rotating motion unit A400b occurs (displacement of the direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 outward to the left and right, see FIG. 1388).

Therefore, while the columnar protrusion A448 moves along the second straight section A2414e, the resistance applied to the drive motor AMT1 transitions from a state in which resistance is caused by the displacement extending in the longitudinal direction of the rotational motion unit A400b to a state in which resistance is also caused by the displacement extending in the lateral direction of the rotational motion unit A400b in addition to that resistance.

This makes it possible to increase the resistance to the displacement of the rotary motion unit A400b, and therefore to change the speed of displacement occurring in the rotary motion unit A400b when the driving force from the drive motor AMT1 is constant. In other words, the speed of displacement can be slowed down when the length between the columnar protrusion A448 and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is longer than the second length AD2, compared to when the length between the columnar protrusion A448 and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is shorter than the second length AD2, so that the player can be impressed by the displacement of the rotary motion unit A400b in the short direction.

The third arc portion A2414c is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation shaft rod AJ1 with a fourth radius AR4, whose radius is the fourth length AD4 (see FIG. 1388(b)), and is positioned lower toward the tilted tip of the rotation motion unit A400b.

As a result, after the columnar protrusion portion A448 enters the third arc portion A2414c from the second straight portion A2414e, a rotational movement (tilting movement) can be generated in a state in which the rotational movement unit A400b is displaced to its maximum in both the longitudinal and lateral directions (see FIG. 1388(b)), thereby increasing the impact of the rotational movement of the rotational movement unit A400b.

The position of the left end of the third arc portion A2414c is the same as the left end of the guide slot A414 in the tenth embodiment. When the drive motor AMT1 is driven in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotational motion unit A400b is tilted from a state in which the columnar protrusion A448 is disposed at the left end of the third arc portion A2414c, the columnar protrusion A448 is guided to the right through the guide slot A2414, causing the rotational motion unit A400b to rotate in the direction of rising up, similar to the first motion unit A400 in the tenth embodiment.

The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1429 to 1431. In the tenth embodiment, the rotational motion unit 400b of the first motion unit A400 moves from an upright state to a tilted state, but the first motion unit A3400 of the twelfth embodiment is configured to move from a horizontally extending state to a tilted state. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1429 to 1431 are schematic rear views of the first operating unit A3400 in the twelfth embodiment. In Figure 1429, the first performance standby state of the first operating unit A3400 is illustrated, in Figure 1430, the extended state of the first operating unit A3400 is illustrated, and in Figure 1431, the second performance standby state of the first operating unit A3400 is illustrated. In addition, in Figures 1429 to 1431, in order to make it easier to understand the positional relationship, the external position of the rear case A210 (see Figure 1375) (part of the illustration is omitted at the lower side) and the external position of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 1370) are illustrated with imaginary lines.

The first operating unit A3400 includes a support member A3400a that is fastened to the rear case A210 on the inside of the rear case A210, and a rotation operating unit A3400b that is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft AJ3 that is fixed to the support member A3400a.

The support member A3400a has a guide slot A3414 for guiding the displacement of the rotational motion unit A3400b. The guide slot A3414 has an arc portion A3414a formed in an arc shape centered on the rotational shaft rod AJ3, a straight portion A3414b extending linearly from the lower end of the arc portion A3414a with the tip side closer to the rotational shaft rod AJ3, and a recessed portion A3414c recessed downward from the lower end of the straight portion A3414b.

In order to avoid overlapping of the support member A3400a and the rotational motion unit A3400b, which would make the diagram difficult to see, the outline of the support member A3400a is shown by imaginary lines, and the inside of the outline is not shown except for the guide elongated hole A3414.

The rotational motion unit A3400b includes a base end member A3430 rotatably supported on the rotation shaft AJ3, and a tip end member A3440 disposed on the rotation tip side of the base end member A3430 and configured to be displaceable in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation shaft AJ1 relative to the base end member A3430.

The tip side member A3440 includes a movable body A3441 and a guided protrusion A3442 that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the side of the movable body A3441 closer to the rotation shaft rod AJ3 and is inserted into the guide long hole A3414.

The transmission of the driving force in the 12th embodiment is configured in the same manner as in the 10th embodiment, in which the driving force is applied to the columnar protrusion A448 (see Figures 1383 and 1384) in the left-right direction as the guide long hole A427e of the connecting member A427a guided by the belt A423a moves in the left-right direction, thereby displacing the rotational motion unit A400b.

That is, in the first operating unit A3400 in the twelfth embodiment, the belt A423a, the connecting member A427a, and the guide long hole A427e (not shown) are configured to change their orientation by 90 degrees to move in the vertical direction, and as they move in the vertical direction, a driving force is applied in the vertical direction to the guided protrusion A3442 inserted into the guide long hole A427e, displacing the rotation operating unit A3400b.

The following describes the rotational movement of the first operating unit A3400 from the first performance standby state. When a driving force is generated to move the guided protrusion A3442 downward from the first performance standby state (see FIG. 1429), the rotational movement unit A3400b starts a rotational movement centered on the rotation shaft rod AJ3.

Here, while the guided protrusion A3442 is guided by the arc portion A3414a of the guide slot A3414, no relative movement of the tip side member A3440 with respect to the base side member A3430 (longitudinal displacement of the rotational motion unit A3400b) occurs (see FIG. 1430).

When a driving force is generated to move the guided protrusion A3442 further downward from the state shown in FIG. 1430, the guided protrusion A3442 enters the straight portion A3414b of the guide long hole A3414, so that the further the rotation progresses, the closer the guided protrusion A3442 gets to the rotating shaft rod AJ3.

As a result, in addition to the rotational motion of the rotational motion unit A3400b around the rotational axis AJ3, the tip side member A3440 starts to move relative to the base side member A3430, increasing the drive resistance.

When the tilt of the rotational motion unit A3400b progresses to the end, as shown in FIG. 1431, the guided protrusion A3442 enters the recessed portion A3414c of the guide long hole A3414, and the tip side member A3440 moves relative to the base side member A3430 in a direction in which the distance between the guided protrusion A3442 and the rotation shaft rod AJ3 becomes longer compared to when it is located at the lower end side of the straight portion A3414b.

That is, when the rotational motion unit A3400b tilts from the first performance standby state, the tip side member A3440 of the rotational motion unit A3400b transitions from a state in which it does not move relative to the base side member A3430 to a state in which it moves relatively toward the base side member A3430, and then transitions from a state in which it moves relatively toward the base side member A3430 to a state in which it moves relatively away from the base side member A3430. In this way, the variation in the relative movement of the tip side member A3440 with respect to the base side member A3430 when the rotational motion unit A3400b tilts can be increased.

In the state shown in FIG. 1431, the movement of the guided protrusion A3442 in the rotational direction around the rotation shaft rod AJ3 is prevented by the recessed portion A3414c. Therefore, even if the tilting operation of the rotational operation unit A3400b is performed at high speed, the occurrence of a return movement in the rotational direction (a rotational operation in the opposite direction due to a reaction) can be prevented by the guided protrusion A3442 being stopped by the recessed portion A3414c.

In addition, by generating an upward driving force from the state shown in FIG. 1431, the rotational motion unit A3400b can be rotated (raised) in such a manner that the guided protrusion A3442 is guided in the opposite direction.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the direction of the tilting motion of the rotational motion unit A3400b is set to a direction that causes it to rotate under its own weight, so that the driving force required at the start of the tilting motion can be reduced.

In addition, it is possible to change the appearance of the rotational motion unit A3400b by shrinking in the longitudinal direction during the tilting motion. This allows the rotational motion unit A3400b to deform in a more compact direction during the tilting motion, and by reducing the centrifugal force that occurs during this motion, it is possible to stabilize the stopping position along the way and the stopping at the end.

In addition, since the guide long hole A3414 for regulating the displacement of the tip side member A3440 is arranged near the rotating shaft rod AJ3, the support member A3400a for forming the guide long hole A3414 can be made smaller. In addition, since it is not necessary to arrange the configuration of the first operating unit A3400 up to the area on the rotation tip side of the rotation operating unit A3400b in the rear case A210 (the area to the right of the third pattern display device 81 in FIG. 1429), the degree of freedom in arranging the operating units in the rear case A210 can be improved.

The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1432. In the tenth embodiment, a fixed downstream guide member A803 changes the visibility of the ball flowing down the play area, but in the ball guide unit A4900 of the thirteenth embodiment, the part that changes the visibility of the ball is configured to be displaceable. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1432(a) and 1432(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball guiding unit A4900 in the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 1432(a) shows the electric device 640a in a closed state, and Figure 1432(b) shows the electric device 640a in an open state.

Figure 1432 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane that passes through the middle of the electric prop 640a and is perpendicular to the left-right direction. To facilitate understanding, the base plate A60 and glass unit 16 are shown with imaginary lines, and only the opening and closing plate of the electric prop 640a is shown, with other drive mechanisms omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1432, the ball guide unit A4900 is a unit that forms a ball flow path between the glass unit 16 and the base plate A60, and includes a flow path forming member A4910 made of a light-transmitting resin material and fastened to the base plate A60, a light-guiding displacement member A4920 made of a light-transmitting resin material and configured to be movable up and down along the front surface of the flow path forming member, a covering member A4930 made of a light-transmitting resin material and fastened to the base plate A60, arranged to sandwich the light-guiding displacement member A4920 from the opposite side to the flow path forming member A4910, and a solenoid A4940 for driving the light-guiding displacement member A4920.

The flow path forming member A4910 comprises a rear side plate portion A4911 formed along the surface of the base plate A60, a front side plate portion A4912 arranged parallel to the front side of the rear side plate portion A4911 with a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and a thick main body portion A4913 connecting the lower ends of the rear side plate portion A4911 and the front side plate portion A4912.

A through hole A4911a is formed in the rear side plate A4911 to allow the electric prop 640a to pass through, and the through hole A4911a allows the electric prop 640a to move back and forth in parallel between a closed state (see FIG. 1432(a)) in which it is positioned close to the front side plate A4912, and an open state (see FIG. 1432(b)) in which it is retracted to the rear.

The light-guiding displacement member A4920 includes a guided plate portion A4921 that is disposed opposite the front side surface of the front side plate portion A4912 of the flow path forming member A4910 and whose displacement is guided by the front side surface, and an extension portion A4922 that extends rearward from the lower end portion of the guided plate portion A4921.

The guided plate portion A4921 has a number of linear grooves A4921a cut into the upper portion from the rear side. The linear grooves A4921a function to refract light incident from the end of the guided plate portion A4921 and emit it toward the front side (having the same function as the linear grooves A732 (see FIG. 1416) described above in the tenth embodiment).

The covering member A4930 includes a front guide plate portion A4931 that is disposed opposite the front side surface of the guided plate portion A4921 and is configured to guide the displacement of the guided plate portion A4921 together with the front side plate portion A4912 of the flow path forming member A4910, an extension portion A4932 that extends rearward from the lower end of the front guide plate portion A4931 and has its rear end fastened and fixed to the base plate A60, and a light emitting substrate A4933 that is fixedly disposed on the upper surface side of the front end of the extension portion A4932 and has light emitting means A4933a such as an LED that irradiates light upward.

The light emitting means A4933a is arranged and designed so that its optical axis is aligned with the extension direction (vertical direction) of the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guiding displacement member A4920, and is configured so that light is guided upward from the lower end of the guided plate portion A4921 along the inside of the guided plate portion A4921. In other words, the light irradiated from the light emitting means A4933a is configured to reach the linear groove portion A4921a.

In this embodiment, when light is emitted from the light-emitting means A4933a, the light is refracted by the linear groove portion A4921a and travels toward the front side, so that the linear groove portion A4921a emits light brightly and visibility through the linear groove portion A4921a decreases.

Therefore, when viewed in a direction that overlaps with the linear groove portion A4921a, the visibility of the ball flowing down behind it decreases. It is easier to see the ball rolling on the electric prop 640a when viewed in a direction ADL1 that looks diagonally down the linear groove portion A4921a than when viewed in the front-to-back direction.

On the other hand, if one tries to view a ball rolling below the electric prop 640a (corresponding to the ball in the position shown in FIG. 1432(b)) from diagonally above in the direction ADL2 without changing the eye position from the position in the direction ADL1 in which the ball rolling on the top surface of the electric prop 640a in FIG. 1432(a) is viewed from diagonally above, the linear groove portion A4921a will be in line with the line of sight, reducing the visibility of the ball.

Therefore, players who want to see the ball with good visibility will have to change their eye position every time the electric device 640a is opened or closed. This reduces the burden on the player since the ball can be released by hitting it with the right hand, but the burden on the player increases due to the frequent changing of eye position.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operation timing of the electric role 640a and the drive timing of the solenoid A4940 are controlled to be synchronized. That is, when the electric role 640a is in the open state, the solenoid A4940 is driven and the light guide displacement member A4920 is displaced downward, eliminating the state in which the linear groove portion A4921a blocks the line of sight to the ball rolling below the electric role 640a.

As a result, the player can simply change the direction of his or her line of sight between directions ADL1 and ADL2 without changing the position of his or her eyes, and the visibility of the ball will not be impaired even if the rolling position of the ball changes in response to the opening and closing of the electric device 640a, thereby reducing the burden on the player when playing the game.

When the ball guiding unit A4900 is viewed from the front to back in the state shown in FIG. 1432(a), if there is a ball rolling below the electric device 640a, the line of sight to the ball is not blocked by the linear groove portion A4921a. Therefore, if there is a ball flowing directly below the electric device 640a immediately after the electric device 640a is switched from the open state to the closed state (for example, if there is an over-winning ball), the ball can be seen by the player without any problem by viewing it from the front to back.

Compared to the state shown in FIG. 1432(a), the state shown in FIG. 1432(b) has a shorter distance between the light emitting means A4933a and the guided plate portion A4921. Therefore, when light from the light emitting means A4933a is irradiated toward the guided plate portion A4921, the state shown in FIG. 1432(b) has less light leakage compared to the state shown in FIG. 1432(a), so that even if the amount of light irradiated from the light emitting means A4933a is the same, the state shown in FIG. 1432(b) can illuminate the linear groove portion A4921a more brightly than the state shown in FIG. 1432(a).

On the other hand, compared to the state shown in FIG. 1432(b), the state shown in FIG. 1432(a) allows the position of the linear groove portion A4921a to be closer to the player (upper side), so the range of the covering member A4930 illuminated by the light refracted by the linear groove portion A4921a can be closer to the player (upper side).

The front side of the front guide plate portion A4931 of the covering member A4930 is decorated with figures, illustrations, etc., and the illuminated area of this decoration can be moved closer to the player (upper side), thereby improving the presentation effect provided by the front guide plate portion A4931.

Note that, although a case has been described in which light is irradiated onto the light-guiding displacement member A4920 from below, this is not limited to this. For example, light may be irradiated onto the light-guiding displacement member A4920 from the left or right side, from above, from the back side, or from the front side.

The fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1433. In the tenth embodiment, the columnar protrusion A448 of the first operating unit A400 is formed to protrude from the back side of the moving member A440 and cannot move relative to the plate-shaped main body A442. However, in the first operating unit A5400 of the fourteenth embodiment, a columnar protrusion member A5448 is configured to be movable relative to the moving member A5440. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1433(a) and 1433(b) are rear views of the rotational motion unit A5400b in the fourteenth embodiment. Figure 1433(a) illustrates the state of the rotational motion unit A5400b in a state corresponding to the performance standby state (see Figure 1375), and Figure 1433(b) illustrates the state of the rotational motion unit A5400b in a state corresponding to the extended state (see Figure 1375).

The following describes the configuration of the rotational motion unit A5400b, focusing on the differences from the rotational motion unit A400b described in the tenth embodiment. In the rotational motion unit A5400b in this embodiment, a columnar protrusion member A5448 is disposed so as to be movable relative to the moving member A5440 as a member corresponding to the columnar protrusion portion A448 in the tenth embodiment.

That is, the columnar protruding member A5448 has its protruding tip portion (rear end portion) inserted rearward into the long guide hole A5442a drilled in the plate-shaped main body A5442 of the movable member A5440 and protrudes outward, while its protruding base end portion (front side portion) is formed in a shape larger than the long guide hole A5442a, thereby functioning as a retainer, so that the columnar protruding member A5448 is configured to be movable relative to the plate-shaped main body A5442 along the long guide hole A5442a.

The columnar protrusion member A5448 is biased toward the right end of the guide slot A5442a (the end where the columnar protrusion member A5448 is positioned in FIG. 1433(b)) by a biasing member (not shown) such as a spring that generates a biasing force in one direction.

The guide slot A5442a is formed as a curved slot that extends along an arc centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 when in the performance standby state. This makes it possible to prevent the columnar protrusion member A5448 from coming off the arc portion A414a (see FIG. 1392) of the guide slot A414 even if the position of the columnar protrusion member A5448 changes inside the guide slot A5442a.

This makes it easier to avoid an increase in the motion resistance between the columnar protruding member A5448 and the arc portion A414a when the rotational motion unit A5400b tilts from the performance standby state.

In the rotational motion unit A5400b, the base plate member A5430 is provided with an extension guide portion A5438 extending from one short side (left side in FIG. 1433(a)) of the longitudinal tip portion (upper end portion in FIG. 1433(a)).

The extension guide portion A5438 is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the columnar protrusion member A5448, regardless of where the columnar protrusion member A5448 is positioned in the guide long hole A5442a, and the load generated when they come into contact allows the columnar protrusion member A5448 to move along the guide long hole A5442a.

That is, as shown in FIG. 1433(b), when the movable member A5440 moves toward the rotation shaft rod AJ1 relative to the base plate member A5430 from a state in which the columnar protrusion member A5448 is disposed at one end of the guide long hole A5442a (left end of the paper in FIG. 1433(b)), the columnar protrusion member A5448 comes into contact with the upper surface of the extended guide portion A5438 during the movement, and receives a load, so that it moves toward the other end of the guide long hole A5442a (right end of the paper in FIG. 1433(a)). Then, finally, the columnar protrusion member A5448 is disposed on a straight line passing through the rotation shaft rod AJ1 as the movement direction of the movable member A5440.

The above-mentioned configuration enables good transmission of driving force to the rotational motion unit A5400b when the first motion unit A5400 tilts from the standby state for performance.

Here, in transmitting the driving force from the extended state, as described above in the tenth embodiment, the component of the load applied to the columnar protrusion A448 that is parallel to the relative movement direction of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 (the linear direction passing through the rotation shaft rod AJ1) does not pass through the rotation shaft rod AJ1, but generates a force in the rotation direction centered on the rotation shaft rod AJ1, thereby enabling the rotational motion unit A400b to move smoothly from the extended state.

In the tenth embodiment, in order to produce this effect, the position of the columnar protrusion A448 is purposely shifted from the center of the short side of the moving member A440. On the other hand, if the rotational motion unit A400b is erected with the columnar protrusion A448 in a misaligned position and the erected state is supported and maintained by the columnar protrusion A448, it is difficult to achieve balance when the longitudinal direction of the rotational motion unit A400b faces vertically, and it tends to end up in a slightly tilted position (see FIG. 1392).

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the columnar protruding member A5448 is configured to be movable relative to the movable member A5440, so that when the rotational motion unit A5400b is raised (see FIG. 1433(a)), it is easy to achieve balance in a position in which the longitudinal direction of the rotational motion unit A400b faces vertically.

In this embodiment, the posture of the rotational motion unit A5400b in the standing state can be designed as desired depending on the design of the length of the guide long hole A5442a. In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the posture in the performance standby state while maintaining the effect of improving the transmission of driving force from the extended state.

The fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1434. In the tenth embodiment, the visibility changing sheet A806 changes the appearance of the ball flow path (play area) when the viewing angle changes left and right. However, the flow path front component A6900 of the fifteenth embodiment is configured so that the appearance of the ball flow path (play area) changes when the viewing angle changes up and down. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1434 is a cross-sectional view of the flow path front component A6900 in the fifteenth embodiment. In Figure 1434, the flow path front component A6900 is viewed in cross section in a plane formed by the vertical sides and the front-rear sides at a location where a ball can pass. Note that the front and rear sides of the base plate A60 arranged opposite the flow path front component A6900 are shown by imaginary lines.

The flow path front component A6900 includes a cover member A6910 made of a non-transparent resin material and arranged opposite the front side of the base plate A60, a decorative plate A6920 that is a plate-shaped member made of a light-transparent resin material and attached (or fastened) to the front side of the cover member A6910, and is decorated on the front side, and a fastening part A6930 that fastens and fixes the cover member A6910 to the base plate A60.

The screen member A6910 comprises a pair of plate-shaped bodies A6911 (one side of which is shown in FIG. 1434) extending in a plate-like manner in the up-down direction, and a number of louver portions A6913 extending in the left-right direction between the pair of plate-shaped bodies A6911 and forming rectangular elongated holes A6912 extending in the left-right direction together with the pair of plate-shaped bodies A6911.

The horizontal length of the rectangular long hole A6912 and the louver portion A6913 is longer than the diameter of the ball, and is formed with a length that corresponds to the horizontal width of the play area at the placement location. In addition, the vertical spacing of the louver portion A6913 is designed to be smaller than the diameter of the ball.

There are various exemplary manufacturing methods for the screen member A6910. For example, it may be a method in which a plurality of louver portions A6913 are fixed to the plate-shaped main body A6911, or a method in which a rectangular long hole A6912 is formed by drilling holes or the like in a plate having a thickness corresponding to the front-to-rear length of the plate-shaped main body A6911, and the plurality of louver portions A6913 are formed as the remaining portion.

The louver portion A6913 is slightly wider in the front-to-back direction, and decorative illustrations are applied to the top and bottom sides. When viewing the flow path front component A6900 in the direction of arrow AEL61, the line of sight is blocked by the louver portion A6913, making it difficult to see the ball AB61 flowing down its rear side. In this case, a reduction in the presentation effect is avoided by allowing the player to view the illustrations applied to the upper side of the louver portion A6913.

On the other hand, when viewing the flow path front component A6900 in the direction of arrow AEL62 (viewing in the direction along the front-to-rear direction), the line of sight does not overlap with the upper or lower side surfaces of the louver portion A6913, and the sphere AB61 can be viewed through the parts other than those hidden by the upper and lower thicknesses of the louver portion A6913, i.e., through the rectangular elongated hole A6912.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1434, the louver portion A6913 is shaped so that its vertical thickness is shorter than its front-to-back width, so that the visibility of the sphere AB61 flowing down behind the front component A6900 can be improved when the front component A6900 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL62 compared to when the front component A6900 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL61.

Next, with reference to Figs. 1435 to 1445, the board box W100 in the 16th embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, with reference to Figs. 1435 to 1439, the general configuration of the board box W100 will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1435 is a rear view of the pachinko machine W10 in the 16th embodiment, Figure 1436 is a front oblique view of the board box W100, Figure 1437 is a rear oblique view of the board box W100, Figure 1438 is a front view of the board box W100, Figure 1439(a) is a rear view of the board box W100, and Figure 1439(b) is a side view of the board box W100 as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDXXXIXb in Figure 1439(a), showing the state in which the protective cover W500 has been removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300. Figure 1440(a) is a partial front perspective view of the board box W100, and Figure 1440(b) is a partial rear perspective view of the board box W100. Figures 1440(a) and 1440(b) show the state in which the protective cover W500 and the sealing seal WSL have been removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

In addition, the arrows F-B, L-R, and U-D in Figures 1435 to 1439 indicate the front-rear, left-right, and up-down directions of the board box B100, respectively. This also applies to the following figures, so their explanations will be omitted.

The pachinko machine W10 in the 16th embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the 10th embodiment, except for the circuit board box W100. Therefore, a description of the rest will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 1435 to 1439, the board box W100 includes a box cover W200, a box base W300 whose opening is covered by the box cover W200, a sealing unit W400 that connects the box cover W200 and the box base W300 together so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure), and a protective cover W500 and a sealing seal WSL that are disposed on the end of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 connected by the sealing unit W400 on the opposite side from the sealing unit W400, and houses a main control board (not shown). The board box W100 may also house a sub-control board, boards for light-emitting or sound-emitting effects, various switches, connectors, a game board, gadgets, or a drive motor for driving the gadgets.

A rotation axis W410 is formed in the sealing unit W400. The rotation axis W410 is an axis for rotatably supporting the board box W100 on the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1369), and is formed as an axis parallel to the up-down direction (direction of arrows U-D) of the board box W100 (box cover W200) and perpendicular to the left-right direction (direction of arrows L-R) of the board box W100 (box cover W200).

The rotation shaft W410 is disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the board box W100 (box cover W200) when viewed from the rear (arrow F direction). The rotation shaft W410 may be disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the board box W100 (box cover W200), or the rotation shaft W410 may be disposed on the upper side (arrow U direction side), lower side (arrow D direction side), front side (arrow F direction side), or rear side (arrow B direction side) of the board box W100 (box cover W200).

The box cover W200 mainly comprises a rear wall W201 formed in a plate shape of a generally horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, plate-shaped walls (upper wall, lower wall, left wall W202 and right wall connecting the upper wall and lower wall) erected from the four sides of the rear wall W201 toward the box base W300 (arrow F direction), and a cover-side engaged portion W210 protruding to the left from the left wall W202. The box cover W200 is formed in a box shape with the box base W300 side open by each wall. The box cover W200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

The protective cover W500 is attached to the cover-side engaged part W210 together with the base-side engaged part W310 described later. The cover-side engaged part W210 mainly comprises a base part W211 protruding from the left wall part W202 toward the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side), a side wall part W212 formed at the protruding tip of the base part W211, a flat part W220 protruding from the side wall part W212 toward the opposite side to the sealing unit W400, an upper protruding part W213a, and a lower protruding part W213b, and a cover part W214 protruding from the back of the base part W211 and the flat part W220 toward the opposite side to the box base W300 (arrow B direction side).

The base portion W211 is a portion for connecting the left wall portion W202 and the side wall portion W212, and is formed in a plate shape. The side wall portion W212 is a portion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the sealing unit W400 (the direction of the arrow R), and is formed in a plate shape.

An upper protrusion W213a, a lower protrusion W213b, and a flat surface W220 are disposed on the side wall W212. The upper protrusion W213a is disposed above the flat surface W220 (in the direction of the arrow U), and the lower protrusion W213b is disposed on the opposite side of the flat surface W220 from the upper protrusion W213a (in the direction of the arrow D).

The back surface of the lower protrusion W213b is disposed closer to the box base W300 (in the direction of arrow F) than the back surface of the side wall W212 and the erected portion W540 of the protective cover W500 described below.

The flat portion W220 is a portion to which the sealing seal WSL is attached, and is formed in a plate shape. The flat portion W220 mainly comprises a protrusion W221 and a pair of upright portions W222 that protrude toward the opposite side (arrow B direction) from the box base W300, a pair of end wall portions W223 arranged at both ends of the flat portion W220 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), recesses W224a, W224b recessed into the back surface of the flat portion W220, a pair of fastening holes W225 drilled through the flat portion W220 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction), and a notch portion W226 (see FIG. 1444) that is cut out at the end of the flat portion W220 on the opposite side (arrow L direction) from the sealing unit W400.

The protrusion W221 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 in the direction opposite the sealing unit W400 (the direction of the arrow L). The protrusion W221 is formed with an inclined portion W221a that inclines toward the opposite side of the box base W300 (the direction of the arrow B) as it moves from the side opposite the sealing unit W400 toward the sealing unit W400 side (the direction of the arrow R).

The erected portion W222 and both end wall portions W223 are intended to prevent a wire that is improperly inserted through the gap formed between the side wall portion W212 and the protective cover W500 from releasing the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.

The pair of standing portions W222 are formed extending in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) at a predetermined distance from the side wall portion W212. Both ends of the pair of standing portions W222 in the up-down direction are joined to a pair of end wall portions W223, and no gap is formed between the pair of standing portions W222 and the pair of end wall portions W223.

The pair of end wall portions W223 are formed in a plate shape and are disposed at both ends of the flat portion W220 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) with the plate thickness directions of the pair of end wall portions W223 facing each other. The ends of the pair of end wall portions W223 on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side) and the ends on the opposite side to the box base W300 (arrow B direction side) are formed to protrude toward the box base W300 side and the opposite side to the box base W300 from the front and back sides of the flat portion W220, respectively. In addition, the ends of the pair of end wall portions W223 on the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) are formed to protrude toward the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 from the ends of the flat portion W220 on the opposite side to the sealing unit W400. The front faces of the pair of end wall portions W223 are disposed on approximately the same plane as the protruding surfaces of the erected portions W222.

The recesses W224a and W224b are portions for forming a space between the affixing surface of the sealing seal WSL and the flat surface portion W220. By forming the recesses W224a and W224b separately from each other, the area in which the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL are affixed can be increased.

The recesses W224a, W224b may be formed so as to be connected to each other. This makes it easier to ensure the formability of the box cover W200 and reduces manufacturing costs. The recesses W224a, W224b may be formed so as to penetrate the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) of the planar portion W220. This makes it easier to ensure the formability of the box cover W200.

The dimension of the recess W224a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531a of the protective cover W500 in the left-right direction, which will be described later, and the dimension of the recess W224a in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed to be approximately three times the dimension of the connecting piece W531a in the up-down direction. The dimension of the recess W224b in the up-down direction is formed to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500 in the up-down direction, and the dimension of the recess W224b in the left-right direction is formed to be approximately three times the dimension of the connecting piece W531b in the left-right direction.

The pair of fastening holes W225 are holes into which screws (not shown) are inserted to fasten the box cover W200 and the box base W300. The box cover W200 and the box base W300 are fastened by inserting the screws through the pair of fastening holes W225 and fastening them to the box base W300.

The notch portion W226, together with the notch portion W325 of the box base W300 described below, is a portion for forming a space on the attachment surface side (arrow R direction side) of the sealing seal WSL. The notch portion W226 is formed continuously from the upper end to the lower end of the flat portion W220. The notch portion W226 is also formed so as to incline toward the opposite side from the notch portion W325 (arrow B direction side) as it moves from the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side) toward the opposite side from the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side).

The cover part W214 mainly comprises walls (upper wall part, lower wall part, right wall part connecting the right ends of the upper wall part and lower wall part) formed in a plate shape erected from the base part W211 and the flat part W220 toward the opposite side to the box base W300 (the direction of the arrow B), and a back wall part W214a connecting the erected tips of the upper wall part, lower wall part, and right wall part. The cover part W214 and the flat part W220 form a box shape that is open on the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 (the direction of the arrow L).

The upper and lower wall portions are formed to extend in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and are disposed between the protrusion W221 and the pair of standing portions W222 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction). The rear wall portion W214a is formed in a plate shape. The end of the rear wall portion W214a on the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) is disposed closer to the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side) than the protrusion W221, and the protrusion W221 is visible when viewed from the rear (arrow F direction). This makes it possible to visually observe the engagement between the protrusion W221 and the engagement hole W533 of the protective cover W500 described below, and the engagement state between the box cover W200 and the protective cover W500 can be confirmed.

In addition, the rear wall portion W214a may be formed to protrude to a position where the end of the rear wall portion W214a on the side opposite the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L) overlaps the protrusion W221 when viewed from the rear. This makes it difficult to disengage the protrusion W221 from the engagement hole W533.

The box base W300 mainly comprises a front wall W301 formed in a generally horizontally elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front, plate-shaped walls (upper wall, lower wall, left wall W302 and right wall connecting the upper and lower wall) erected from the four sides of the front wall W301 toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction), and a base-side engaged portion W310 protruding from the left wall W302 toward the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction). The box base W300 is formed in a box shape with an open back side by each wall. The box base W300 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

A protective cover W500 is attached to the base-side engaged portion W310 together with the cover-side engaged portion W210. The base-side engaged portion W310 mainly comprises an upper protruding portion W311 that protrudes from the left wall portion W302 toward the opposite side (the direction of the arrow L) from the sealing unit W400, a cover portion W312, and a flat portion W320.

The upper protrusion W311 is disposed at a position corresponding to the upper protrusion W213a of the cover-side engaged portion W210 when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). The front surface of the upper protrusion W311 is disposed on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the front wall portion W301.

The cover portion W312 mainly comprises a front wall portion W312a formed in a plate shape, and wall portions (upper wall portion, lower wall portion, and left wall portion W312b connecting the ends of the upper wall portion and lower wall portion on the opposite side (arrow L direction) from the sealing unit W400) formed in a plate shape and extending from the three sides of the front wall portion W312a excluding the side on the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction) toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction). The upper wall portion, lower wall portion, and left wall portion W312b are formed in a plate shape, and the erected tips of the upper wall portion, lower wall portion, and left wall portion W312b are joined to the flat portion W320.

A pair of protrusions W312c protrude toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction) at a specified distance in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) on the back surface of the front wall portion W312a. The pair of protrusions W312c are protrusions for restricting displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the opposite side (arrow L direction) from the sealing unit W400. The pair of protrusions W312c are formed with an inclined portion W312d that inclines toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction) as it moves from the opposite side (arrow L direction) from the sealing unit W400 toward the sealing unit W400 (arrow R direction).

A pair of through holes W312e are drilled through the left wall portion W312b in the plate thickness direction (arrow L-R direction) at positions corresponding to the pair of protrusions W312c in side view (arrow R direction). The inner shape of the pair of through holes W312e is formed larger than the outer shape of the pair of protrusions W312c, making the pair of protrusions W312c visible in side view.

The flat portion W320 is a portion to which the sealing seal WSL is affixed, and is formed in a plate shape. The flat portion W320 mainly comprises a pair of end wall portions W321 disposed at both ends of the flat portion W320 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), a pair of fastening holes W322 drilled through the flat portion W320 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction), a pair of suppression portions W323 protruding from the flat portion W320 toward the opposite side to the box cover W200 (arrow F direction), and a protruding portion W324 protruding from the flat portion W320 toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction).

The pair of end wall portions W321 are formed in a plate shape and are disposed on the flat portion W320 with the plate thickness direction of the pair of end wall portions W321 aligned in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction). The ends of the pair of end wall portions W321 on the opposite side to the box cover W200 (arrow F direction side) are formed to protrude beyond the front surface of the flat portion W320. In addition, the ends of the pair of end wall portions W321 on the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) are formed to protrude beyond the end of the flat portion W320 on the opposite side to the sealing unit W400.

The pair of fastening holes W322 are holes into which screws (not shown) are fastened that pass through a pair of fastening holes W225 drilled in the box cover W200, and the pair of fastening holes W322 are provided with internal threads on their inner peripheries. This fastens the box cover W200 and the box base W300 together.

The pair of suppression portions W323 are portions for preventing the protective cover W500 and the sealing seal WSL from coming into contact with each other. The protruding length of the pair of suppression portions W323 is formed to be longer than the thickness dimension of the sealing seal WSL. In the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), the pair of suppression portions W323 are disposed at positions corresponding to the pair of insertion holes W312e.

The protrusion W324 is disposed at the end of the flat portion W320 on the opposite side (arrow L direction) from the sealing unit W400, and a notch W325 is formed at the protruding tip of the protrusion W324 (see FIG. 1444). The protrusion length of the protrusion W324 toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction) is formed to be the same as the protrusion length of the pair of end wall portions W223 from the front of the flat portion W220. This makes it possible to prevent gaps from being formed between the pair of end wall portions W321 and the pair of end wall portions W223 when the protrusion W324 and the flat portion W220 are in contact. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of wire inside the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

The notch W325, together with the notch W226 of the box cover W200, is a portion for forming a space on the attachment surface side (arrow R direction side) of the sealing seal WSL. The notch W325 is formed continuously from the upper end to the lower end of the flat portion W320 (protruding portion W324) and is disposed opposite the notch W226 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The notch W325 is also formed so as to incline toward the opposite side to the notch W226 (arrow F direction side) as it moves from the left wall portion W302 side (arrow R direction side) toward the opposite side to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side).

The protective cover W500 is intended to shield the sealing seal WSL attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and mainly comprises a rear wall W510 formed in a generally vertically elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front, a front wall W520 formed in a generally vertically elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front and facing the rear wall W510 at a predetermined distance toward the front side (arrow F direction), walls (upper wall W501, lower wall W502, and left wall W502) connecting three sides of the rear wall W510 and the front wall W520 excluding the right side (arrow R direction), engagement parts W530a, W530b connected to the rear wall W510 and the front wall W520 and formed in a plate, and an erect part W540 formed in an erect plate from the lower wall W501 downward (arrow D direction).

The protective cover W500 is formed into a box shape with each wall portion opening to the right (the direction of the arrow R). The protective cover W500 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

The length of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is longer than the length of the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320. The distance between the opposing rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 is approximately the same as or slightly larger than the distance from the back of the end wall portions W223 of the box cover W200 to the front of the end wall portions W321 of the box base W300. The distance between the opposing upper wall portion and lower wall portion W501 of the protective cover W500 is greater than the distance between the surfaces opposite the opposing surfaces of the pair of end wall portions W223 (end wall portions W321).

This allows the cover-side engaged portion W210 and the base-side engaged portion W310 to be arranged inside the protective cover W500, and restricts displacement of the protective cover W500 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and box base W300.

The rear wall W510 is formed intermittently in the up-down direction (arrows U-D direction), and in this embodiment, is not formed at one location. The rear wall W510 is the side that is not formed in the up-down direction, and mainly comprises a rib portion W511 that stands from an edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrows L-R direction) toward the front wall W520 side (arrow F direction side), and a connecting portion W512 that connects the tips of the rib portions W511 together.

The back surface of the rear wall portion W510 is disposed slightly further forward (in the direction of arrow F) than the back surface of the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. This allows the back surface of the rear wall portion W510 to be disposed rearward (in the direction of arrow B) than the back surface of the side wall portion W212, preventing the formation of a step between the rear wall portion W510 and the side wall portion W212 in a state in which the rear wall portion W510 protrudes rearward beyond the side wall portion W212. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 by using this step.

The rib portion W511 and the connecting portion W512 are portions for supporting the engaging portion W530a. The rib portion W511 is erected from an edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the rear wall portion W510, thereby preventing a wire that is improperly inserted through the gap between the rear wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530b from releasing the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.

The erected length of the rib portion W511 is formed shorter than the protruding length of the end wall portions W223 toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) from the flat portion W220 of the box cover W200. This prevents the rib portion W511 from contacting the sealing seal WSL and damaging the sealing seal WSL when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

The connecting portion W512 is disposed to connect the rib portions W511 on the left side (the side indicated by the arrow L), and the length of the connecting portion W512 in the left-right direction (the direction indicated by the arrows L-R) is shorter than the length of the rear wall portion W510.

The front wall W520 is formed intermittently in the up-down direction (arrows U-D direction), and in this embodiment, is left unformed at two locations. Note that the position where the unformed portion is formed in the rear wall W510 in the up-down direction is different from the position where the unformed portion is formed in the front wall W520. The front wall W520 is the side that is left unformed in the up-down direction, and mainly comprises a rib portion W521 that stands from an edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrows L-R direction) toward the rear wall W510 side (arrow B direction side), and a connecting portion W522 that connects the tips of the rib portion W521 together.

The front surface of the front wall portion W520 is disposed on approximately the same plane as or slightly toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front surface of the upper overhang portion W311 of the box base W300. This allows the front surface of the front wall portion W520 to be disposed closer to the front side (arrow F direction side) than the front surface of the upper overhang portion W311, preventing the front wall portion W520 from protruding further forward than the upper overhang portion W311 and preventing a step from being formed between the front wall portion W520 and the upper overhang portion W311. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 by using such a step.

The rib portion W521 and the connecting portion W522 are portions for supporting the engaging portion W530b. The rib portion W521 is erected from an edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the front wall portion W520, thereby preventing a wire that is improperly inserted through the gap between the front wall portion W520 and the engaging portion W530a from releasing the adhesion between the flat portion W320 and the sealing seal WSL.

The erected length of the rib portion W521 is formed shorter than the protruding length of the end wall portions W321 toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) relative to the flat portion W320 of the box base W300. This prevents the rib portion W521 from contacting the sealing seal WSL and damaging the sealing seal WSL when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

The connecting portion W522 is disposed to connect the rib portions W521 on the left side (the side indicated by the arrow L), and the length of the connecting portion W522 in the left-right direction (the direction indicated by the arrows L-R) is shorter than the length of the front wall portion W520.

The engagement portions W530a and W530b are portions for engaging the protective cover W500 with the box cover W200 and the box base W300. In this embodiment, one engagement portion W530a is provided on the rear wall portion W510 side of the protective cover W500, and a pair (two) engagement portions W530b are provided on the front wall portion W520 side at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction (arrows U-D direction).

The engaging portion W530a is disposed between a pair of engaging portions W530b in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D). This makes it possible to disperse the engagement positions of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 with the protective cover W500 in the vertical direction, making it difficult to improperly remove the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

It mainly comprises multiple (three in this embodiment) connecting pieces W531 formed at the ends of the engagement parts W530a, W530b on the left side (arrow L direction side), an inclined portion W532 formed at the ends of the engagement parts W530a, W530b on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) from the connecting pieces W531, and an engagement hole W533 drilled between the inclined portion W532 and the connecting pieces W531.

The engaging portions W530a, W530b are connected to the rear wall portion W510 (rib portion W511) or the front wall portion W520 (rib portion W521) via the connecting piece W531. As a result, the engaging portions W530a, W530b are disposed between the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 rather than the rear wall portion W510 or the front wall portion W520. As a result, when the protective cover W500 is attached (engaged) to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the distance between the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) and the sealing seal WSL can be made smaller than when the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) is disposed on approximately the same plane as the rear wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520).

The right end (arrow R direction side) of the engagement parts W530a, W530b is formed to protrude further to the right than the right end of the front wall part W520 and the rear wall part W510. Although the inclined part W532 and the engagement hole W533 formed in the engagement part W530a have different shapes from the inclined part W532 and the engagement hole W533 formed in the engagement part W530b, in this embodiment, they are described using the same reference numerals.

Of the connecting pieces W531, the connecting piece W531 that protrudes leftward from the end on the left side (arrow L direction) of the engaging parts W530a, W530b is defined as connecting piece W531a, and the pair of connecting pieces W531 that protrude in the vertical direction from both ends in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) on the left side of the engaging parts W530a, W530b are defined as connecting piece W531b. The connecting piece W531a is supported by the connecting parts W512, W522 of the rear wall part W510 or the front wall part W520, and the pair of connecting pieces W531b are joined to the rib parts W511, W521 of the rear wall part W510 or the front wall part W520.

The connecting pieces W531a, W531b are formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape when viewed from the back. The thickness dimension of the connecting pieces W531a, W531b in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed to be substantially the same as that of the engaging parts W530a, W530b, and the front and back faces of the connecting pieces W531a, W531b are disposed on substantially the same plane as the front and back faces of the engaging parts W530a, W530b, respectively. In other words, no step is formed between the connecting pieces W531a, W531b and the engaging parts W530a, W530b. This makes it possible to prevent stress concentration between the connecting pieces W531a, W531b and the engaging parts W530a, W530b, and ensures the strength of the connecting pieces W531a, W531b, compared to when a step is formed between the connecting pieces W531a, W531b and the engaging parts W530a, W530b.

A pair of surfaces (hereinafter defined as "side surfaces of connecting pieces W531a, W531b") connecting the surface of connecting pieces W531a, W531b facing the sealing seal WSL and the surface opposite the surface facing the sealing seal WSL are formed perpendicular to the surface of connecting pieces W531a, W531b facing the sealing seal WSL and the surface opposite the surface facing the sealing seal WSL. Note that the front and back surfaces of connecting pieces W531a, W531b are surfaces formed parallel to the sealing seal WSL when protective cover W500 is attached (engaged) to box cover W200 and box base W300, and the pair of side surfaces of connecting pieces W531a, W531b are surfaces formed perpendicular to the sealing seal WSL.

Here, the distance between the connecting piece W531b and the tip of the engaging portion W530b is formed to be greater than the distance between the connecting piece W531b and the tip of the engaging portion W530a. Also, as described above, the thickness dimension of the engaging portion W530b in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the engaging portion W530a. As a result, the engaging portion W530b is formed to be more easily elastically deformed than the engaging portion W530a.

The inclined portion W532 is a portion that facilitates elastic deformation of the engagement portions W530a and W530b, and is formed so as to incline toward the front side (arrow F direction) as it moves from the right side (arrow R direction) to the left side (arrow L direction).

The engagement hole W533 is a portion for surrounding the protrusion W221 of the box cover W200 or the protrusion W312c of the box base W300. The inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole W533 abuts against the right side (arrow R direction) surface of the protrusions W221, W312c, restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the left side (arrow L direction).

The erected portion W540 is a portion for preventing the protective cover W500 from being attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 with the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 in the opposite position (the rear wall portion W510 facing the front side of the front wall portion W520).

The erected portion W540 protrudes from the lower wall portion W501 in the direction opposite to the upper wall portion (the direction of the arrow D), and the protruding length of the erected portion W540 is formed to be greater than the distance between the upper end wall portions W223, W321 arranged on the upper side (the direction of the arrow U) and the upper protruding portion W213a.

The erected portion W540 is disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the lower protrusion W213b. This prevents the erected portion W540 from coming into contact with the lower protrusion W213b when the protective cover W500 is displaced to the right (the side in the direction of arrow R), and the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

On the other hand, when the protective cover W500 is displaced to the right (arrow R direction) with the front wall W520 and the rear wall W510 in the opposite position (the rear wall W510 facing the front side of the front wall W520), the erected portion W540 and the upper protruding portion W311 come into contact with each other, restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the right. This prevents the protective cover W500 from being displaced to the right and the engagement portion W530a from coming into contact with the left wall W312b of the box base W300, or the engagement portion W530b from coming into contact with the side wall W212 of the box cover W200. As a result, the engagement portions W530a and W530b can be prevented from being damaged. The erected portion W540 may not be formed.

The sealing seal WSL is formed in a sheet shape to prevent the box cover W200 and the box base W300 from being opened. The sealing seal WSL is folded into a roughly U-shape when viewed from above, and is attached across the flat portion W220, the flat portion W320, and the protruding portion W324. The sealing seal WSL mainly comprises an adhesive sheet with adhesive applied to its back side, and a display sheet with identification information printed on its front side, and is formed by attaching the front surface of the adhesive sheet to the back surface of the display sheet.

The dimension of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is slightly smaller than the distance between the pair of opposing end wall portions W223, W321. By attaching the sealing seal WSL to the flat portion W220, the flat portion W320 and the protruding portion W324, the cutout portions W226, W325 are shielded by the sealing seal WSL except for the pair of end wall portions W223, W321. This makes it difficult to see the cutout portions W226, W325, and makes it difficult for a tamperer to easily cut the sealing seal WSL using the cutout portions W226, W325.

The back surface of the adhesive sheet is the portion that is attached to the planar portion W220 of the box cover W200 and the planar portion W320 of the box base W300, and the adhesive force between the adhesive sheet and the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320 is stronger than the adhesive force between the adhesive sheet and the display sheet. As a result, when attempting to peel off the sealing seal WSL from the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320, the adhesion between the adhesive sheet and the display sheet is released, the display sheet is separated from the adhesive sheet, and the adhesion between the adhesive sheet and the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320 is maintained. As a result, it is easier to prevent the box cover W200 and the box base W300 from being opened.

Identification information such as a number of numbers, the name of the pachinko machine W10 (model name), the manufacturer name, or circuit board information is written on the surface of the display sheet (not shown). The identification information is written in a position where it is affixed to the flat portion W220. This allows the identification information to be viewed by opening the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1369). As a result, compared to when the identification information is written in a position where it is affixed to the flat portion W320, it is not necessary to rotate the circuit board box W100 relative to the inner frame 12 to view the identification information.

In addition, the surface of the display sheet is coated with a pattern of special ink that becomes visible when irradiated with light of a specific wavelength, such as ultraviolet light.

The outer peripheral edge of the sealing seal WSL is formed in a sawtooth shape. This makes it easier to cause stress concentration in the sawtooth recesses when peeling the sealing seal WSL from the flat surface portions W220 and W320, making it easier to break the sealing seal WSL. As a result, it becomes easier to maintain at least a portion of the sealing seal WSL attached to the flat surface portions W220 and W320, making it easier to prevent the box cover W200 and box base W300 from being opened.

The sealing seal WSL may be equipped with an IC chip. By receiving the ID information stored in the IC chip with a scanner, it is possible to check whether the board box W100 has been illegally replaced. This also makes it more difficult for those attempting fraud to illegally obtain or counterfeit the sealing seal WSL.

Next, the attachment of the protective cover W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described with reference to Figures 1441 and 1442. Figures 1441(a) and 1441(b) are partial front views of the board box W100, and Figures 1441(c) and 1441(d) are partial rear views of the board box W100. Figure 1442(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W100 taken along line MCDXLIIa-MCDXLIIa in Figure 1441(b), and Figure 1442(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W100 taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in Figure 1441(b).

...

As shown in Figures 1441(a) and 1441(c), in the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), the protective cover W500 is displaced to the right (direction of arrow R) from a state in which the positions of the engagement holes W533 of the engagement parts W530a and W530b are aligned with the positions of the protrusions W221 of the box cover W200 and the protrusions W312c of the box base W300 (see Figure 1440).

By displacing the protective cover W500 to the right (arrow R direction), the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portion W530a comes into contact with the inclined portion W221a of the protrusion W221, and the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portion W530b comes into contact with the inclined portion W312d of the protrusion W312c (see FIG. 1440). By displacing the protective cover W500 to the right (arrow R direction) from a state in which the inclined portions W532 of the engaging portions W530a, W530b come into contact with the inclined portions W221a of the protrusion W221 and the inclined portion W312d of the protrusion W312c, the engaging portions W530a, W530b are elastically deformed toward the back side (arrow B direction).

By elastically deforming the engaging portions W530a and W530b toward the rear side (arrow B direction), the protective cover W500 can be easily rotated toward the rear side. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of elastic deformation of the engaging portions W530a and W530b compared to when the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the rear side (front side) and the engaging portion W530b is elastically deformed toward the front side (rear side). As a result, damage to the engaging portions W530a and W530b can be easily suppressed.

By displacing the protective cover W500 to the right (arrow R) from the state in which the engaging portions W530a and W530b are elastically deformed toward the rear side (arrow B direction), as shown in Figures 1441(b), 1441(d) and 1442, the protrusion W221 is disposed inside the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion W530a (the engaging portion W530a and the protrusion W221 are engaged), and a pair of protrusions W312c is disposed inside the engaging hole W533 of the pair of engaging portions W530b (the pair of engaging portions W530b and the pair of protrusions W312c are engaged). This releases the elastic deformation of the engaging portions W530a and W530b.

Hereinafter, the state in which the protrusion W312c is disposed inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement part W530a and the protrusion W221 is disposed inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement part W530b is defined as the restricted state. Note that since the manner of engagement between the pair of engagement parts W530b and the pair of protrusions W312c is the same on one side (upper side) and the other side (lower side), only the cross section on one side is illustrated and the cross section on the other side is omitted in the description.

The distance between the opposing rear wall W510 and front wall W520 is formed to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the distance from the rear of both end wall W223 of the box cover W200 to the front of both end wall W321 of the box base W300, so that in the restricted state, the displacement of the protective cover W500 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is restricted. This prevents the engagement between the engagement portion W530a (engagement portion W530b) and the protrusion W221 (protrusion W312c) from being released.

In addition, in the restricted state, the surface of the protrusion W221 opposite the inclined portion W221a (the side in the direction of arrow R) abuts against the inner surface of the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530a, and the surface of the protrusion W312c opposite the inclined portion W312d (the side in the direction of arrow R) abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b, thereby restricting displacement of the protective cover W500 to the left side (the side in the direction of arrow L). This prevents the sealing seal WSL affixed to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 from being exposed.

In addition, in the restricted state, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are disposed in a position where they overlap the recesses W224a and W224b when viewed from the rear. In detail, the connecting piece W531a is disposed in a position that is approximately the center of the recess W224a in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), and the connecting piece W531b is disposed in a position that is approximately the center of the recess W224b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

In addition, in the restricted state, the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear wall portion W510 and the right end of the front wall portion W520 abut against the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300. In addition, the right end of the engagement portion W530a abuts against the side wall portion W212. This restricts the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the right. Note that at least one of the right end of the rear wall portion W510, the right end of the engagement portion W530a, and the right end of the front wall portion W520 may abut against the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200 or the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300.

Due to factors such as the machining accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the protective cover W500, a gap may be formed between the right end of the rear wall W510 and the side wall W212 of the box cover W200, and this gap may be used to illegally insert a wire into the inside of the protective cover W500. This may result in the illegal release of the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.

In response to this, by providing a pair of erected portions W222 on the flat portion W220, even if a wire is improperly inserted inside the protective cover W500, the improperly inserted wire can be brought into contact with the pair of erected portions W222. This makes it possible to prevent the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL from being improperly released.

In addition, since the front faces of the pair of end wall portions W223 are disposed on approximately the same plane as the protruding surface of the erect portion W222, when the front faces of the pair of end wall portions W223 (the protruding surfaces of the erect portion W222) are in contact with the inner surface of the rear wall portion W510, it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the protruding surface of the erect portion W222 (the front faces of the pair of end wall portions W223) and the inner surface of the rear wall portion W510. This makes it possible to prevent a wire from being illegally inserted through such a gap, which would cause the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL to be released.

Next, referring to Figures 1443 to 1445, the removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described. Figure 1443(a) is a partial front view of the board box W100, and Figure 1443(b) is a partial rear view of the board box W100. Figure 1444 is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W100 taken along line MCDXLIV-MCDXLIV in Figure 1443(b). Figure 1445(a) is a partial front view of the board box W100, and Figure 1445(b) is a partial rear view of the board box W100.

Note that Figures 1443(a) and 1443(b) show the state in which the engagement portions W530a and W530b have been cut off from the protective cover W500. Also, Figures 1445(a) and 1445(b) show the state in which the protective cover W500 has been removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and the engagement portions W530a and W530b cut off from the protective cover W500 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

In addition, FIG. 1444 illustrates one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b of the engaging portion W530a, and the cutting of one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b is described, but the cutting manner of the other of the pair of connecting pieces W531b and connecting piece W531a is the same as that of one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b, so a description of the cutting of the other of the pair of connecting pieces W531b and connecting piece W531a is omitted. In addition, the cutting of the connecting pieces W531a, W531b of the engaging portion W530b is the same as that of the engaging portion W530a, so a description of the cutting of the connecting pieces W531a, W531b of the engaging portion W530b is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1443, the connecting pieces W531a, W531b of the engaging portions W530a, W530b are cut by a cutting tool (not shown), thereby separating the engaging portions W530a, W530b from the protective cover W500 (the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520). Examples of cutting tools include nippers, scissors, a utility knife, or a knife.

For example, when the cutting tool is made up of nippers or scissors and the connecting pieces W531a, W531b are sandwiched between a pair of blades to cut the connecting pieces W531a, W531b, the pair of blades come into contact with a pair of side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a, W531b, respectively, and the pair of blades are displaced toward the opposing sides of the pair of side surfaces to cut the connecting pieces W531a, W531b.

For example, when the cutting tool is composed of a cutter knife or a knife and a single blade is used to cut the connecting pieces W531a and W531b, the blade is brought into contact with one of a pair of sides of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b, and the blade is displaced toward the other side of the pair, thereby cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b.

As described above, in rear view, the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500 is disposed at a position overlapping the recess W224b (see FIG. 1441). That is, as shown in FIG. 1444, the recess W224b is recessed toward the opposite side (arrow F direction) of the sealing seal WSL, facing the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530b via the sealing seal WSL. This allows a space to be formed between the sealing seal WSL and the recess W224b, and when the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) is inserted between the rear wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a to cut the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool can be received in the recess W224b. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

In other words, when the connecting piece W531b is cut, a trace (damage) can be formed on the sealing seal WSL. This makes it possible to confirm the condition of the sealing seal WSL (whether the sealing seal WSL is new or reused) based on the presence or absence of the trace on the sealing seal WSL. Furthermore, the formation of the trace on the sealing seal WSL can prevent the sealing seal WSL from being reused.

The connecting piece W531b is disposed at a position that is approximately the center of the recess W224b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The connecting piece W531b is disposed at a position that overlaps with the recess W224b in rear view (see FIG. 1441). Therefore, when the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) is disposed on the side of the connecting piece W531b to cut the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool can be easily received into the recess W224b. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the cutting action of the connecting piece W531b, and the traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL can be easily recognized by the worker (store clerk).

In addition, because the engagement portion W530a (connecting piece W531b) is connected to the rib portion W511, the opposing distance between the connecting piece W531b and the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220) is smaller than the opposing distance between the rear wall portion W510 and the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220). This allows the tip of the cutting tool to be brought closer to the sealing seal WSL, making it easier to receive into the recess W224b. As a result, it becomes easier to damage the sealing seal WSL.

As described above, the connecting piece W531a of the protective cover W500 is disposed in a position overlapping the recess W224a when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 1441). As a result, when the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) is inserted between the rear wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a to cut the connecting piece W531a, similar to cutting the connecting piece W531b, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

The connecting piece W531a protrudes from the engaging portions W530a, W530b to the left (arrow L direction), and the connecting piece W531b protrudes from the engaging portions W530a, W530b in the vertical direction. This makes it necessary to change the orientation of the cutting tool (not shown) when cutting the connecting piece W531a and when cutting the connecting piece W531b. As a result, the time it takes a fraudster to cut the connecting pieces W531a, W531b can be extended, which helps to discourage fraudulent behavior.

As shown in FIG. 1445, when the engagement portions W530a and W530b are cut off from the protective cover W500, the restricted state is released and the protective cover W500 can be displaced to the left (in the direction of arrow L).

In this way, by making it easier for the sealing seal WSL to be damaged by the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) when cutting the connecting pieces W531a, W531b, even if, for example, the connecting pieces W531a, W531b are fraudulently cut (the engaging portions W530a, W530b are separated) and the protective cover W500 is removed, and the protective cover W500 is still attached with the engaging portions W530a, W530b joined with adhesive, the traces (damage) on the sealing seal WSL make it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that the connecting piece W531b has been cut, i.e., that there is a risk that a fraudulent person has performed fraudulent operations on the main control board (not shown).

Even if a fraudulent person possesses a protective cover W500 with the connecting pieces W531a, W531b still intact, and replaces the protective cover W500 with the connecting pieces W531a, W531b still intact with a new protective cover W500 with the connecting pieces W531a, W531b still intact, traces (damage) on the sealing seal WSL can easily make the worker (store clerk) aware that fraudulent operation may have occurred.

In addition, even if a fraudster fraudulently removes the sealing seal WSL from the flat portion W220 (flat portion W320) and performs fraudulent operations on the main control board (not shown), and then reattaches the removed sealing seal WSL to the flat portion W220 (flat portion W320), thereby making it difficult for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that the sealing seal WSL has been removed, the traces (damage) on the sealing seal WSL can make the worker (store clerk) more aware of the risk of fraudulent operations on the main control board by the fraudster.

Compared to the protective cover W500, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to obtain the sealing seal WSL fraudulently or to counterfeit the sealing seal WSL. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when the protective cover W500 is fraudulently removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, it is particularly effective to make the sealing seal WSL easily damaged (easily leave traces) so that the worker (store clerk) is easily made aware of the risk of fraudulent operation on the main control board (not shown).

In addition, since the board box W100 is disposed (axially supported) on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1369), and the recesses W224a and W224b are formed in the box cover W200 that constitutes the rear side of the board box W100, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the rear side of the inner frame 12 is visible, the traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL are visible. This makes it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize the traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL, compared to when, for example, the recesses W224a and W224b are recessed in the box base W300 (flat surface portion W320) that constitutes the front side (arrow F direction side) of the board box W100, and the damage to the sealing seal WSL is visible by rotating the board box W100 relative to the inner frame 12.

If there are no traces (damage) on the seal seal WSL, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the seal seal WSL has not been tampered with. On the other hand, if there are traces (damage) on the seal seal WSL, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the protective cover W500 was removed from the box cover W200 and box base W300, the seal seal WSL was peeled off, and then the seal seal WSL was reattached. Alternatively, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that tampering was attempted because the protective cover W500 was removed from the box cover W200 and box base W300, and traces (damage) were formed on the seal seal WSL at that time.

Next, the opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described. With the protective cover W500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the sealing seal WSL is released from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, or the sealing seal WSL is cut at the boundary between the box cover W200 (flat portion W220) and the box base W300 (protruding portion W324). This opens the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

Here, the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320 are formed with the notches W226, W325, and the notches W226, W325 are arranged opposite each other in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), so that when the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are combined, a substantially V-shaped space is formed on the affixed surface side (arrow R direction side) of the sealing seal WSL in a cross-sectional view. This makes it easy to place the tip of a cutting tool in the space formed by the notches W226, W325, and makes it easy to cut the sealing seal WSL (see FIG. 1444). In addition, by combining the box cover W200 and the box base W300, a space can be easily formed on the affixed surface side of the sealing seal WSL, and the manufacturing cost of the box base W300 can be reduced compared to when a recess is formed in the protruding portion W324.

In addition, the notch W226 is formed to be inclined toward the opposite side (arrow B direction) of the notch W325 as it moves from the side wall W212 side (arrow R direction) toward the tip side (arrow L direction) of the flat surface W220, and the notch W325 is formed to be inclined toward the opposite side (arrow F direction) of the notch W226 as it moves from the left wall W302 side (arrow R direction) toward the tip side (arrow L direction) of the flat surface W320. As a result, a non-adhered area is formed between the flat surface W220 and the protruding portion W324 and the sealing seal WSL at the boundary between the flat surface W220 and the protruding portion W324 (see FIG. 1444). As a result, the engagement between the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily released by cutting the sealing seal WSL.

Next, with reference to Figures 1446 (a) and 1446 (b), the board box W2100 in the 17th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1446(a) is a partial rear view of the board box W2100 in the seventeenth embodiment, and Figure 1446(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W2100 taken along the line MCDXLVIb-MCDXLVIb in Figure 1446(a). Note that in Figure 1446(a), both end wall portions W223 and both end protrusions W2223a of the box cover W2200 are shown by dashed lines, and Figure 1446(b) shows the state in which the engagement portions W2530a, W2530b have been cut off from the protective cover W2500.

As shown in Figures 1446(a) and 1446(b), in the protective cover W2500 of the board box W2100 in the 17th embodiment, the connecting piece W2531b is connected to the rear wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520.

The connecting piece W2531b includes a hanging portion W2531c extending in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) from the edge of the rear wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), and a parallel portion W2531d extending in the up-down direction from the tip of the hanging portion W2531c, and is formed in a generally L-shape in cross section. In addition, the distance between the opposing rear wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520 is larger than that of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in the 16th embodiment.

The pair of end wall portions W223 of the box cover W2200 have end protrusions W2223a that protrude from the end wall portions W223 toward the rear wall portion W510 (arrow B direction), and the pair of end wall portions W321 of the box base W2300 have end protrusions W2321a that protrude from the end wall portions W321 toward the front wall portion W520 (arrow F direction).

The protruding length of both end protrusions W2223a is approximately equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing end wall portions W223 and the rear wall portion W510. The length of both end protrusions W2223a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is approximately 1/3 of the length of both end wall portions W223, and one end of both end protrusions W2223a on the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side) is disposed in contact with the side wall portion W212.

The protruding length of both end protrusions W2321a is formed to be approximately equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing end wall portions W321 and the front wall portion W520. The length of both end protrusions W2321a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be approximately 1/3 of the length of both end wall portions W321, and one end of both end protrusions W2321a on the cover portion W312 side (arrow R direction side) is arranged in contact with the left wall portion W312b (see FIG. 1440).

As a result, in the restricted state, the protruding portions W2223a (protruding portions W2321a) at both ends and the rear wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520) come into contact with each other, restricting the displacement of the protective cover W2500 in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B). As a result, the engagement between the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) and the protrusion W221 (protrusion W312c) is prevented from being released (see FIG. 1442).

The protective cover W2500 can be removed from the box cover W2200 and the box base W2300 by cutting the connecting piece W531a and the hanging portion W2531c of the connecting piece W2531b with a cutting tool (not shown) and separating the engaging portions W2530a and W2530b from the protective cover W2500.

When the protective cover W2500 is displaced in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) away from the side wall W212 (left wall W312b) (arrow L direction) beyond both end protrusions W2223a (both end protrusions W2321a), both end protrusions W2223a (both end protrusions W2321a) and the rear wall W510 (front wall W520) are not in contact, and the restriction on displacement of the protective cover W2500 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is released.

Here, by forming the hanging portion W2531c on the connecting piece W2531b, the distance between the facing cut portion formed on the hanging portion W2531c and the sealing seal WSL in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) can be made smaller than when the hanging portion W2531c is not formed on the connecting piece W2531b. This makes it easier to bring the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) or the cut portion of the connecting piece W2531b into contact with the sealing seal WSL, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL.

In addition, the cut portion formed in the hanging portion W2531c can be made to face the sealing seal WSL, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL by the cut portion formed in the hanging portion W2531c when removing the protective cover W2500 from the box cover W2200 and the box base W2300. This makes it easier for workers (store clerks) to recognize that there is a risk of tampering with the main control board (not shown) by a tampering perpetrator.

Next, referring to FIG. 1446(c), a protective cover W3500 according to an 18th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1446 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover W3500 in the 18th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIb-MCDXLVIb in Figure 1446 (a).

As shown in FIG. 1446(c), in the protective cover W3500 of the 18th embodiment, the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engagement portion W3530a (engagement portion W3530b) are formed on approximately the same plane, and the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engagement portion W3530a (engagement portion W3530b) are connected via a connecting piece W3531b.

The connecting piece W3531b has engaging portions W3530a, W3530b in the up-down direction (direction of the arrows U-D), a pair of hanging portions W3531c extending from the edges of the rear wall portion W3510 and the front wall portion W3520 toward the opposing sides of the rear wall portion W3510 and the front wall portion W3520, and a parallel portion W3531d connecting the tips of the pair of hanging portions W3531c, and is formed in a roughly U-shape in cross section.

The protective cover W3500 can be removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 1446(b)) by cutting the parallel portion W3531d of the connecting piece W3531b with a cutting tool (not shown) and separating the engaging portions W3530a and W3530b from the protective cover W3500.

By forming the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engagement portion W3530a (engagement portion W3530b) on approximately the same plane, it is possible to prevent a step from being formed between the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engagement portion W3530a (engagement portion W3530b). This makes it difficult to catch fingers on the protective cover W3500, making it easier to prevent unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

By forming a pair of hanging parts W3531c, the opposing distance between the connecting piece W3531b and the sealing seal WSL is smaller than the opposing distance between the rear wall part W3510 (front wall part W3520) and the sealing seal WSL (see FIG. 1446 (b)). This allows the tip of the cutting tool to be brought closer to the sealing seal WSL, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL. As a result, it is easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that there is a risk of tampering with the main control board (not shown) by a tampering perpetrator.

Next, referring to FIG. 1447, the board box W4100 according to the 19th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1447(a) is a partial rear view of the board box W4100 in the 19th embodiment, Figure 1447(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W4100 taken along line MCDXLVIIb-MCDXLVIIb in Figure 1447(a), Figure 1447(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W4100 taken along line MCDXLVIIc-MCDXLVIIc in Figure 1447(a), and Figure 1447(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W4100 taken along line MCDXLVIId-MCDXLVIId in Figure 1447(a).

As shown in FIG. 1447, the protective cover W4500 of the board box W4100 in the 19th embodiment has a protrusion W4534. The protrusion W4534 is formed in a pyramidal shape at the protruding tip of the engagement parts W4530a, W4530b, protruding from the engagement parts W4530a, W4530b toward the opposing sides of the rear wall part W510 and the front wall part W520.

In addition, by forming the protrusions W4534 on the engagement portions W4530a and W4530b, the flat surface portion W4220 (flat surface portion W4320) is formed on the front side (rear side) by the amount of protrusion of the protrusions W4534. This makes it possible to prevent the protrusions W4534 from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL when attaching the protective cover W4500 to the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300, thereby preventing damage to the sealing seal WSL.

In addition, since the protrusion W4534 is disposed at the protruding tip of the engagement portions W4530a and W4530b, in the restricted state, the protrusion W4534 is disposed closer to the side wall portion W212 (the cover portion W312) than the sealing seal WSL.

In order to illegally remove the protective cover W4500 from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300, it is possible to disengage the engaging portion W4530a (engaging portion W4530b) from the protrusion W221 of the planar portion W4220 (protrusion W312c of the planar portion W4320) by elastically deforming the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b without cutting them.

In this embodiment, the protrusions W4534 are formed to protrude from the engagement portions W4530a, W4530b toward the opposing sides of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, making it easier to bring the protrusions W4534 and the sealing seal WSL into contact when removing the protective cover W4500 from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300. In addition, because the protrusions W4534 are formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the protrusions W4534 and the sealing seal WSL coming into contact with each other.

In addition, since the protrusion W4534 is disposed closer to the side wall portion W212 (to the cover portion W312) than the sealing seal WSL, when removing the protective cover W4500 from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300, the protrusion W4534 can be brought into contact with the side surface connecting the affixed surface of the sealing seal WSL and the surface opposite the affixed surface.

This makes it easier to damage the seal seal WSL compared to when the protrusions W4534 come into contact with the surface of the seal seal WSL and the protective cover W4500 is removed from the box cover W4200 and box base W4300 while the protrusions W4534 slide along the surface of the seal seal WSL (without damaging the seal seal WSL).

A pair of protrusions W4534 are formed at both ends of the engagement parts W4530a, W4530b in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction). If the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions W4534, the damage to the sealing seal WSL can be easily seen from the gap between the engagement part W4530a (engagement part W4530b) and the rear wall part W510 (front wall part W520).

This makes it easier for workers (store clerks) to recognize that a fraudulent individual may have performed tampering on the main control board (not shown).

In addition, by utilizing the protrusion W4534, the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300 can be easily opened (the sealing seal WSL can be cut). In more detail, by separating the engagement portion W4530a (engagement portion W4530b) from the protective cover W4500 and arranging the protrusion W4534 in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

This eliminates the need to carry a cutting tool (not shown). In addition, the engagement portion W4530a (engagement portion W4530b) is formed small relative to the protective cover W4500, so interference with the pair of end wall portions W223 and the pair of end wall portions W321 can be suppressed, making it easy to cut the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be cut in an optimal manner.

Next, with reference to Fig. 1448(a) to Fig. 1448(c), the board box W5100 in the twentieth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted. Also, in Fig. 1448(a) to Fig. 1448(c), the engagement hole W533 is shown by a dashed line. Also, in the description of Fig. 1448(a) to Fig. 1448(c), Fig. 1441(c) will be referred to as appropriate.

Figures 1448(a) to 1448(c) are partial cross-sectional views of the board box W5100 in the twentieth embodiment, and correspond to the cross-sectional view taken along the line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in Figure 1441(b). Note that Figure 1448(a) illustrates a state in which the engagement portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to attach the protective cover W5500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, Figure 1448(b) illustrates a state in which the engagement portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533 is released, and Figure 1448(c) illustrates a state in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced to the left (arrow L direction) from the state in Figure 1448(b).

As shown in Figures 1448(a) to 1448(c), the box base W5300 of the board box W5100 in the twentieth embodiment has a recess W5326, and the protective cover W5500 has a protrusion W5534.

In addition, by forming a protrusion W5534 on the engagement portion W5530b, the flat portion W5320 is formed on the rear side by the amount of protrusion of the protrusion W5534. This makes it possible to prevent the protrusion W5534 from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL when attaching the protective cover W5500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, thereby preventing damage to the sealing seal WSL.

The recess W5326 is a portion for forming a space between the affixed surface of the sealing seal WSL and the flat surface W5220, and is recessed into the front surface of the flat surface W5320. In the restricted state, the recess W5326 is formed in a position that overlaps with the protrusion W5534 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), and the inner surface of the recess W5326 on the right side (arrow R direction) is disposed to the right of the protrusion W5534.

The length of the recess W5326 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is greater than the left-right dimension of the protrusion W312c of the box base W5300, and even when the protective cover W5500 is displaced leftward to a position where the engagement hole W533 is to the left of the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction), the inner surface of the recess W5326 on the left side is disposed to the left of the protrusion W5534.

The protrusion W5534 is a protrusion for damaging the sealing seal WSL when the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, and is formed to protrude toward the sealing seal WSL side (the direction of arrow B).

In other words, because the protrusions W5534 protrude toward the inside of the protective cover W5500, which is formed in a box shape, it is possible to prevent workers (store clerks) from coming into contact with the protrusions W5534 and being injured during the manufacturing or transporting operations of the board box W5100 or the protective cover W5500.

A pair of protrusions W5534 are formed on both ends of the engagement portion W5530b in the up-down direction (direction of arrows U-D). This makes it easier to visually check damage to the sealing seal WSL from the gap between the engagement portion W5530b and the front wall portion W520 (see FIG. 1441 (c)).

Next, referring to FIG. 1448(b), a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed improperly toward the seal seal WSL side (arrow B direction side) will be described. As shown in FIG. 1448(b), in a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed improperly toward the seal seal WSL side (arrow B direction side) larger than the protrusion dimension of the protrusion W312c in order to release the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engaging hole W533, the tips of the pair of protrusions W5534 are disposed in the space formed by the recessed portion W5326, and the seal seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions W5534. As a result, it is possible to easily make the worker (store clerk) aware that there is a possibility that a person committing fraud has performed fraudulent operations on the main control board (not shown).

Figure 1448 (c) shows a state in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced to the left (arrow L direction) while the engagement portion W5530b is maintained in an improperly elastically deformed state toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction) from the state in Figure 1448 (b), and the engagement hole W533 is positioned to the left of the protrusion W312c (a state in which the engagement between the engagement hole W533 and the protrusion W312c is released).

As described above, the length of the recess W5326 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is greater than the dimension of the protrusion W312c, so even when the protective cover W5500 is displaced leftward to a position where the engagement hole W533 is to the left of the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction), the tips of the pair of protrusions W5534 can be disposed in the space formed by the recess W5326. This makes it possible to increase the area in which the sealing seal WSL is damaged, making it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize damage to the sealing seal WSL.

In this way, when the engagement portion W5530b is elastically deformed to release the engagement between the engagement hole W533 and the protrusion W312c without cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engagement portion W5530b, it is possible to easily leave a mark (damage) on the sealing seal WSL.

Next, referring to FIG. 1448(d), a board box W6100 according to the 21st embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted. Also, in FIG. 1448(d), the engagement hole W533 is shown by a dashed line.

Figure 1448(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W6100 in the 21st embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in Figure 1441(b). Figure 1448(d) illustrates a state in which the engagement portion W5530b has been elastically deformed to unauthorizedly remove the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300, and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533 has been released.

As shown in FIG. 1448(d), the box base W6300 of the board box W6100 in the 21st embodiment has a recess W6326. The recess W6326 is formed with a shorter recess dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) compared to the recess W5326 in the 20th embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, the recess shape of the recess W6326 is formed to be approximately the same as the outer shape of the protrusion W5534 of the protective cover W5500. Furthermore, the recess W6326 is formed at a position that overlaps with the protrusion W5534 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) in the restricted state.

As a result, when the engaging portion W5530b is improperly elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction), the tip of the protrusion W5534 is disposed in the space formed by the recess W6326, and the protrusion W5534 abuts against the inside of the recess W6326, restricting displacement of the protective cover W5500 toward the left side (arrow L direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover W5500 from being improperly removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300.

In addition, when the engaging portion W5530b is improperly elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL (the direction of arrow B), the tips of the pair of protrusions W5534 are disposed in the space formed by the recess W6326, and the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions W5534. As a result, it is possible to make the worker (store clerk) more easily aware that there is a possibility that a tampering has been performed on the main control board (not shown) by a tamperer.

Next, referring to FIG. 1449, the board box W7100 according to the 22nd embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1449(a) is a partial rear view of the board box W7100 in the 22nd embodiment, and Figure 1449(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W7100 taken along line MCDXLIXb-MCDXLIXb in Figure 1449(a). Note that in Figure 1449(a), a pair of fastening holes W7225 are shown by dashed lines.

As shown in FIG. 1449, in the flat surface portion W7220 and the flat surface portion W7320 of the board box W7100 in the 22nd embodiment, a pair of fastening holes W7225 and a pair of fastening holes W7322 are formed at positions that overlap the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). That is, the pair of fastening holes W7322 are drilled facing the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530b via the sealing seal WSL, toward the opposite side of the sealing seal WSL (arrow F direction).

The fastening hole W7322 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the diameter of the fastening hole W7322 is formed to be larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

This allows a space to be formed between the screws fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 and the sealing seal WSL, and when the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) is inserted between the rear wall portion W510 and the engagement portion W530a to cut the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool can be received in the fastening hole W7322. As a result, it is easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool, making it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that there is a risk of tampering with the main control board (not shown) by a tampering perpetrator.

By using the fastening hole W7322 (allowing the tip of a cutting tool to be received in the fastening hole W7322), traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL are formed at positions corresponding to the screws used to fasten the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 together. Therefore, even if the screws used to fasten the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 together are blocked by the sealing seal WSL, the positions of those screws can be ascertained based on the traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL. This improves the workability of the work of releasing the fastening of the screws.

The pair of fastening holes W7225 can serve both to insert screws for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 and to form a space for arranging the tip of a cutting tool (not shown). This makes it possible to prevent the formation of a recess W224b (see FIG. 1440) in the flat surface portion W7220, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

Next, referring to FIG. 1450(a), a protective cover W8500 according to a 23rd embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1450 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W8100 in the 23rd embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section at part LXXXIIa in Figure 1444 (a).

As shown in FIG. 1450(a), the connecting piece W8531b of the protective cover W8500 in the 23rd embodiment is formed as a parallelogram in cross section. In this embodiment, a pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b are formed at an angle with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220).

In detail, it is formed so as to incline to the right (arrow R direction) as it moves from the opposite side to the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction) toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow F direction). It may also be formed so as to incline to the left (arrow L direction) as it moves from the opposite side to the sealing seal WSL toward the sealing seal WSL side.

This makes it easier to rotate the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) to the right (arrow R direction) of the direction from the opposite side (arrow B direction) to the sealing seal WSL toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow F direction) when cutting the connecting piece W8531b using a cutting tool (not shown). As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be received in the recess W224b, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool. This makes it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that there is a risk of tampering with the main control board (not shown) by a tampering perpetrator.

Next, referring to Figures 1450(b) and 1450(c), a protective cover W9500 according to a 24th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1450(b) is a partial rear view of the board box W9100 in the 24th embodiment, and Figure 1450(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W9100 taken along line MCDLc-MCDLc in Figure 1450(b).

As shown in Figures 1450(b) and 1450(c), the connecting piece W9531b of the protective cover W9500 in the 24th embodiment includes a first part W9531b1 that extends in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) in a cross-sectional view and is formed into a vertically elongated, generally rectangular shape, and a second part W9531b2 that is disposed at the end of the first part W9531b1 on the side of the engaging part W530a and the rib part W511 (connecting part W512), extends in the direction in which the rib part W511 (connecting part W512) extends, and is formed into a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape in a cross-sectional view.

The first part W9531b1 is disposed approximately in the center in the direction in which the second part W9531b2 extends. The surfaces of the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 formed on the opposite side to the sealing seal WSL are disposed approximately on the same plane, and the opposing distance between the second part W9531b2 and the sealing seal WSL is smaller than the opposing distance between the first part W9531b1 and the sealing seal WSL.

As a result, when cutting the first part W9531b1 with a cutting tool (not shown), the tip of the cutting tool can be easily inserted into the space formed by the recess W224b, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool. This makes it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that there is a risk of tampering with the main control board (not shown) by a tamperer.

Furthermore, in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), the first part W9531b1 is formed smaller than the second part W9531b2. This makes it easier to cut the first part W9531b1 than the second part W9531b2.

In addition, in a cross-sectional view, the cross-sectional areas of the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 are formed to be approximately the same. As a result, when the protective cover W9500 is molded using a resin mold, the difference in the cross-sectional areas of the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 can be suppressed, and the moldability of the protective cover W9500 (connecting piece W9531b) can be ensured.

Next, referring to FIG. 1451, the board box Wa100 according to the 25th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1451(a) and 1451(c) are partial cross-sectional views of the board box Wa100 in the 25th embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in Figure 1441(b). Figure 1451(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wa100 taken along line MCDLIb-MCDLIb in Figure 1451(a). Note that Figure 1451(c) illustrates a state in which the protective cover Wa500 has been displaced to the left (in the direction of arrow L) from the state in Figure 1451(a). Also, in the explanation of Figure 1451, reference will be made to Figure 1441 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1451(a) and FIG. 1451(b), the protective cover Wa500 of the board box Wa100 in the 25th embodiment has a cutting portion Wa550 that protrudes from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502 of the protective cover Wa500. The cutting portion Wa550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL.

By having the cutting portion Wa550 protrude from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502, the strength of the protective cover Wa500 (the left wall portion W502) can be improved. This makes it difficult for the protective cover Wa500 to be damaged.

The amount of protrusion of the cutting portion Wa550 is smaller than the distance between the left wall portion W502 and the sealing seal WSL in the restricted state. This prevents the cutting portion Wa550 from cutting the sealing seal WSL in the restricted state.

The cutting portion Wa550 is disposed opposite the notches W226, W325 formed in the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The dimension of the cutting portion Wa550 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed to be slightly smaller than the distance between the pair of opposing end wall portions W223, W321, and larger than the distance between the two ends of the sealing seal WSL in the up-down direction.

The cutting portion Wa550 is disposed in a position offset toward the rear wall portion W510 (arrow B direction) from approximately the center of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This prevents the cutting portion Wa550 from being disposed opposite the notches W226, W325 when the protective cover Wa500 is attached to the box cover W200 and box base W300 with the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 in the opposite orientation (the rear wall portion W510 facing the front side of the front wall portion W520), for example. This prevents the cutting portion Wa550 from functioning.

The cutting portion Wa550 is formed so that the dimension in the front-to-rear direction (arrows F-B direction) becomes smaller as it moves from the inner surface of the protective cover Wa500 toward the protruding tip side (arrow R direction side) of the cutting portion Wa550. Also, the protruding tip side (arrow R direction side) of the cutting portion Wa550 is formed in a sawtooth shape in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 1451(b) and is formed by repeated bending in the left-right direction (arrows L-R direction). As a result, the cutting portion Wa550 is displaced toward the space formed in the notches W226 and W325, making it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.

As shown in FIG. 1451(a), the rear wall Wa510 and the front wall Wa520 of the protective cover Wa500 are formed with smaller dimensions in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) compared to the rear wall W510 and the front wall W520 of the protective cover W500 in the 16th embodiment. As a result, in the restricted state, gaps are formed between the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear wall Wa510 and the right end of the front wall Wa520 and the side wall W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall W302 of the box base W300 (see FIG. 1441(b) and FIG. 1441(d)). Such gaps are formed larger than the distance between the recess formed on the opposite side of the sealing seal WSL and the sealing seal WSL in the sawtooth shape formed in the cutting portion Wa550.

On the other hand, the end on the right side (arrow R direction) of the engagement portion W530a abuts against the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. This restricts the displacement of the protective cover Wa500 to the right side, and the restricted state is maintained. In addition, the end on the right side (arrow R direction) of the engagement portion W530b may abut against the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300 (see FIG. 1442), thereby restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wa500 to the right side.

Next, referring to FIG. 1451(c), the cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the cutting portion Wa550 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1451(c), by cutting the engagement portions W530a, W530b (see FIG. 1443), the protective cover Wa500 can be displaced toward the sealing unit W400 (the direction of arrow R, see FIG. 1436). By displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the sealing unit W400, the cutting portion Wa550 can be received in the space formed by the notches W226, W325, and the sealing seal WSL is cut by the cutting portion Wa550.

Here, the pair of end walls W223, W321 come into contact with the rear wall W510 and the front wall W520, preventing the protective cover Wa500 from being displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B). This allows the cutting portion Wa550 to remain facing the notches W226, W325, making it easier for the cutting portion Wa550 to cut the sealing seal WSL.

In this embodiment, there is no need to perform the steps of cutting the engagement portions W530a, W530b to remove the protective cover Wa500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 and displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the sealing unit W400 (the direction of arrow R, see Figure 1436) separately, and these steps can be performed efficiently as a single operation.

As described above, in the restricted state, the gaps formed between the right end of the rear wall Wa510 (arrow R direction) and the right end of the front wall Wa520 and the side wall W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall W302 of the box base W300 are larger than the distance between the sealing seal WSL and the recess formed on the opposite side of the sealing seal WSL in the sawtooth shape formed in the cutting portion Wa550, so that the entire sawtooth shape formed in the cutting portion Wa550 can be received in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325. As a result, the sealing seal WSL is cut between both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), and the sealing seal WSL is separated into the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side.

In addition, by displacing the protective cover Wa500 to the right (arrow R direction), the right end (arrow R direction) of the rear wall Wa510 and the right end of the front wall Wa520 come into contact with the side wall W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall W302 of the box base W300 (see FIG. 1442). This restricts the protective cover Wa500 from being displaced to the right.

The cutting portion Wa550 may abut against the notches W226, W325 to restrict displacement of the protective cover Wa500 to the right. In this case, the cutting portion Wa550 can adhere the sealing seal WSL to the notches W226, W325. In other words, the sealing seal WSL can be made difficult to peel from the notches W226, W325. This makes it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL when peeling it from the notches W226, W325, and makes it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL.

In this embodiment, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the side wall portion W212 (the direction of the arrow R). This allows the worker (store clerk) to easily open the box cover W200 and the box base W300, even if he or she does not have a cutting tool.

The cutting portion Wa550 is disposed opposite the notches W226, W325 formed in the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), so that even when the notches W226, W325 are covered by the sealing seal WSL, the cutting portion Wa550 can be easily disposed in the space formed by the notches W226, W325.

The cutting portion Wa550 protrudes from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502, preventing it from being exposed from the box-shaped protective cover Wa500. This prevents workers (store clerks) from coming into contact with the cutting portion Wa550 and being injured during operations such as cutting the sealing seal WSL, and manufacturing and transporting the board box Wa100 and protective cover Wa500.

In addition, because the cutting portion Wa550 protrudes from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502, the cutting portion Wa550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wa500. In other words, the protective cover Wa500 is formed larger than the cutting portion Wa550. Therefore, the worker (store clerk) can grasp the protective cover Wa500 and use the cutting portion Wa550 to cut the sealing seal WSL, making the cutting operation easy.

The protective cover Wa500 (cutting portion Wa550) is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin molding die, so it has a lower ability to cut the sealing seal WSL than, for example, a cutting tool that is sharply formed using a metal material. In contrast, because a space is formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325 on the adhesive surface side of the sealing seal WSL, even if the cutting portion Wa550 has a low cutting ability, it is possible to easily cut the sealing seal WSL.

Next, with reference to Figures 1452 and 1453, we will explain the board box Wb100 in the 26th embodiment of the present invention. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

Figure 1452(a) is a front view of the protective cover Wb500 of the board box Wb100 in the 26th embodiment, Figure 1452(b) is a side view of the protective cover Wb500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIIb in Figure 1452(a), and Figure 1452(c) is a rear view of the protective cover Wb500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIIc in Figure 1452(b). Figure 1453(a) is a rear view of the board box Wb100, Figure 1453(b) is a side view of the board box Wb100 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIIIb in Figure 1453(a), and Figure 1453(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wb100 along the line MCDLIIIc-MCDLIIIc in Figure 1453(b).

Note that Figures 1452 and 1453 show the state in which the engagement portions Wb530a and Wb530b are cut off from the protective cover Wb500. Also, in Figure 1452, the engagement portions Wb530a and Wb530b are shown by two-dot chain lines, and in Figure 1453(b), the cut portion Wb550 and the guide portion Wb560 are shown by dashed lines. Also, the spaces formed in the protective cover Wb500 by cutting the engagement portions Wb530a and Wb530b from the protective cover Wb500 are defined as spaces WS1 and WS2, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1452, the protective cover Wb500 of the board box Wb100 in the 26th embodiment has an engagement portion Wb530a and a cutting portion Wb550 that are connected to the rear wall portion W510, and an engagement portion Wb530b and a guide portion Wb560 that are connected to the front wall portion W520.

The engagement portion Wb530a includes a relief portion Wb534a. The relief portion Wb534a is a portion for preventing contact between the engagement portion Wb530a and the cutting portion Wb550, and is recessed downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the upper surface of the engagement portion Wb530a at a position overlapping the cutting portion Wb550 in rear view.

The bottom surface (surface formed on the lower side) of the relief portion Wb534a is formed lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550 described later, and the side surface of the relief portion Wb534a in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows L-R) is formed on both left-right ends of the support portion Wb551 and the blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550 described later. This prevents the engagement portion Wb530a from coming into contact with the cutting portion Wb550.

Before the engagement portion Wb530a is cut, the relief portion Wb534a is formed surrounding the cut portion Wb550. This prevents the worker (store clerk) from coming into contact with the cut portion Wa550 and being injured.

The cutting portion Wb550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL, and includes a support portion Wb551 that protrudes from the rib portion W511 disposed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) toward the engaging portion Wb530a side (arrow D direction side), and a blade portion Wb552 that protrudes from the protruding tip of the support portion Wb551 toward the tip side of the engaging portion Wb530a (arrow R direction side).

The support portion Wb551 is a portion for supporting the blade portion Wb552 by providing a predetermined distance between the rib portion W511 and the blade portion Wb552. The blade portion Wb552 has a base portion supported by the support portion Wb551 and formed into a cylindrical shape, and a tip portion formed into a cone shape at the protruding tip of the base. The tip portion being formed into a cone shape makes it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.

The cutting portion Wb550 may protrude from the rib portion W511 disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) toward the engaging portion Wb530a side (arrow U direction side), and the relief portion Wb534a may be recessed from the lower surface of the engaging portion Wb530a toward the upper side (arrow U direction side).

The engagement portion Wb530b is connected to a pair of rib portions W521 and a connecting portion W522 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side), and includes a relief portion Wb534b. The relief portion Wb534b is a portion for preventing contact between the engagement portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560, and is recessed upward (arrow U direction side) from the lower surface of the engagement portion Wb530b at a position overlapping the guide portion Wb560 in a front view.

The bottom surface (surface formed on the upper side) of the relief portion Wb534b is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) the protruding tip of the guide portion Wb560, and the side surface of the relief portion Wb534b in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows L-R) is formed on both left-right ends of the side surfaces of the guide portion Wb560 in the left-right direction. This prevents the engagement portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560 from coming into contact with each other.

In addition, by forming the relief portion Wb534b, when the engagement portion Wb530b is separated from the protective cover Wb500, the engagement hole W533 is disengaged from the protrusion W312c (see FIG. 1441), making it easier to prevent the engagement portion Wb530b from coming into contact with the guide portion Wb560 when the engagement portion Wb530b is displaced, and making it easier to remove the engagement portion Wb530b from the box base Wb300.

The guide portion Wb560 is a portion for maintaining the position of the protective cover Wb500 when the sealing seal WSL is cut by the cutting portion Wb550, and protrudes upward from the rib portion W521 that is disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of a pair of rib portions W521 disposed on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The guide portion Wb560 is disposed to the left (arrow L direction side) of the tip of the blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The guide portion Wb560 protrudes downward from the rib portion W521 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of a pair of rib portions W521 arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side), and the engagement portion Wb530b and the escape portion Wb534b may be recessed downward from the upper surface of the engagement portion Wb530b connected to the pair of rib portions W521 arranged on the lower side and the connecting portion W522.

Next, referring to FIG. 1453, the cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wb500 (cutting portion Wb550) will be described. In this embodiment, the protruding length of the protruding portion Wb324 of the box base Wb300 is formed to be smaller than the protruding length of the protruding portion W324 in the 16th embodiment, and the distance between the surfaces on the opposite side to the opposing surfaces of the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320 is formed to be smaller. In addition, the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320 do not have a pair of end wall portions W223, W321 (see FIG. 1440).

Figure 1453 shows the protective cover Wb500, in which the engagement portions Wb530a, Wb530b have been cut to form spaces WS1, WS2, rotated counterclockwise when viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIIIb, so that the flat portions W220 and W320 are disposed in the spaces WS1, WS2, and the blade portion Wb552 is disposed in the space formed by the cutout portions W226, W325.

In this way, in this embodiment, the protective cover Wb500 is equipped with a cutting portion Wb550, so that even if the worker (store clerk) does not have a cutting tool, the box cover Wb200 and the box base Wb300 can be easily opened.

The cutting portion Wb550 is arranged in the space WS1, making it visible. This makes it easier to arrange the cutting portion Wb550 in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325, making it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.

In addition, by arranging the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320 in the space WS2, the guide portion Wb560 and the protrusion portion W324 can be brought into contact with each other. This makes it possible to prevent the protective cover Wb500 from rotating around the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) as the axis of rotation, and makes it easier to arrange the cutting portion Wb550 in the space formed by the notched portions W226 and W325.

Because the cutting portion Wb550 protrudes from the rib portion W511 of the protective cover Wb500, the cutting portion Wb550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wb500. In other words, the protective cover Wb500 is formed larger than the cutting portion Wb550. Therefore, the worker (store clerk) can grasp the protective cover Wb500 and use the cutting portion Wb550 to cut the sealing seal WSL, making the cutting operation easy.

Next, referring to FIG. 1454, the board box Wc100 according to the 27th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1454(a) is a side view of the protective cover Wc500 of the board box Wc100 in the 27th embodiment, and Figure 1454(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wc100 taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in Figure 1441(b). Figure 1454(b) illustrates the state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using the protective cover Wc500 removed from the box cover W200 and box base Wb300.

As shown in FIG. 1454(a), the protective cover Wc500 of the board box Wc100 in the 27th embodiment includes a cutting portion Wc550. The cutting portion Wc550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL, and is formed at the end of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the standing portion Wc540, protruding from the rear wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction) toward the front wall portion W520 side (arrow F direction).

The erect length of the erect portion Wc540 on the opposite side (the direction of arrow D) of the lower wall portion W501 of the protective cover Wc500 is formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat portion W220 of the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B) and the space formed by the notches W226 and W325.

Next, referring to FIG. 1454(b), the cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wc500 (cutting portion Wc550) will be described. In FIG. 1454(b), the position of the protective cover Wc500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 has been changed. In detail, the cutting portion Wc550 (standing portion Wc540) is in a position facing from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow R direction).

The protective cover Wc500 is equipped with a cutting section Wc550, so even if the worker (store clerk) does not have a cutting tool, the box cover W200 and box base W300 can be easily opened.

As described above, the erection length of the erected portion Wc540 on the opposite side (the direction of arrow D) from the lower wall portion W501 is formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat portion W220 of the box cover W200 and the space formed by the notched portions W226 and W325 in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B). Therefore, by abutting the lower wall portion W501 against the flat portion W220 via the sealing seal WSL, the cut portion Wc550 can be made to face the space formed by the notched portions W226 and W325. In other words, the position of the cut portion Wc550 and the position of the space formed by the notched portions W226 and W325 are approximately the same in the front-to-rear direction.

This makes it easy to place the cutting portion Wc550 in the space formed by the cutout portions W226, W325, even when the sealing seal WSL is blocking the cutout portions W226, W325. By sliding the protective cover Wc500 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) while maintaining contact between the lower wall portion W501 and the flat portion W220, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

The cutting portion Wc550 protrudes from the erected portion Wc540 of the protective cover Wc500, so the cutting portion Wc550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wc500. In other words, the protective cover Wc500 is formed larger than the cutting portion Wc550. Therefore, the worker (store clerk) can grasp the protective cover Wc500 and use the cutting portion Wc550 to cut the sealing seal WSL, making the cutting operation easy.

Next, referring to FIG. 1455, the board box Wd100 according to the 28th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1455(a) is a front view of the protective cover Wd500 of the board box Wd100 in the 28th embodiment, Figure 1455(b) is a side view of the protective cover Wd500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLVb in Figure 1455(a), and Figure 1455(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wd100 along the line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in Figure 1441(b). Note that Figure 1455(b) illustrates the state in which the cut engagement portion Wd530a is attached to the standing portion Wd540, and Figure 1455(c) illustrates the state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using the protective cover Wd500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wb300.

As shown in Figures 1455(a) and 1455(b), the protective cover Wd500 of the board box Wd100 in the 28th embodiment has a guide portion Wd560. The standing portion Wd540 is disposed at a position that is approximately the center of the lower wall portion W501 in the plate thickness direction (arrow L-R direction) of the left wall portion W502.

The dimension of the standing portion Wd540 in the thickness direction (arrow L-R direction) of the left wall portion W502 is formed to be approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the dimension of the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wd530a in the thickness direction (arrow U-D direction) of the bottom wall portion W501. Also, the dimension of the standing portion Wd540 in the opposing direction (arrow F-B direction) of the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 is formed to be approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the dimension between the inner surfaces of the engagement hole W533 in the thickness direction of the left wall portion W502. As a result, as shown in FIG. 1455(b), the standing portion Wd540 can be fitted (engaged) into the engagement hole W533, and the engagement portion Wd530a cut off from the protective cover Wd500 can be attached (held) to the protective cover Wd500.

The dimension of the standing portion Wd540 in the thickness direction of the left wall portion W502 (arrow L-R direction) may be slightly larger than the dimension of the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wd530a in the thickness direction of the lower wall portion W501 (arrow U-D direction), and the dimension of the standing portion Wd540 in the opposing direction of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 (arrow F-B direction) may be slightly larger than the dimension between the inner surfaces of the engagement hole W533 in the thickness direction of the left wall portion W502. By engaging the standing portion Wd540 with the engagement hole W533 while elastically deforming the standing portion Wd540, it is possible to prevent the engagement portion Wd530a from coming off the protective cover Wd500. In addition, when the engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the protective cover Wd500, the position of the engaging portion Wd530a relative to the protective cover Wd500 can be prevented from changing. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut using the engaging portion Wd530a.

The erected portion Wd540 can be made to function both to prevent the protective cover W500 from being attached to the box cover Wb200 and the box base Wb300 when the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 are in the opposite position (the rear wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520) and to attach (hold) the engaging portion Wd530a, which reduces the manufacturing cost of the protective cover Wd500 compared to when parts having these functions are arranged on the protective cover Wd500. In addition, the mounting portion (holding portion) of the engaging portion Wd530a can be simplified. In addition, the parts arranged on the outer surface of the protective cover Wd500 can be reduced, improving the freedom of arrangement of the protective cover Wd500.

The rear wall W510 does not have a connecting portion W512 (see FIG. 1440), and the connecting piece W531a of the engaging portion Wd530a is connected to the left wall W502. In addition, by not forming the connecting portion W512, the dimension of the engaging portion Wd530a in the plate thickness direction of the left wall W502 is formed larger than that of the engaging portion W530a in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441). In this embodiment, the distance between the inner surface of the engaging hole W533 on the connecting piece W531a side (arrow L direction side) and the connecting piece W531a is formed larger than the distance between the front of the erected portion Wd540 on the front wall W520 side (arrow F direction side) and the front of the front wall W520 formed on the opposite side to the rear wall W510.

As a result, when the engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the protective cover Wd500, the cut surface of the connecting piece W531a can be positioned on the opposite side of the front wall portion W520 from the rear wall portion W510.

The guide portion Wd560 is a portion that makes it easier to arrange the connecting piece W531a of the engaging portion Wd530a in the space formed by the notch portion W226 of the planar portion W220 and the notch portion W325 of the planar portion W320 when cutting the sealing seal WSL using the protective cover Wd500 (engaging portion Wd530a). The guide portion Wd560 is formed in a plate shape and is arranged with the plate thickness direction of the guide portion Wd560 aligned with the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502 (arrow L-R direction).

The distance between the guide surface Wd561 formed on the lower wall W501 side (arrow D direction) of the guide portion Wd560 and the outer surface of the lower wall W501 is approximately the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat portion W220 of the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and the space formed by the notches W226, W325 (see FIG. 1455 (c)).

Next, referring to FIG. 1455(c), the cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wd500 (engagement portion Wd530a) will be described. Note that in FIG. 1455(c), the position of the protective cover Wd500 removed from the box cover W200 and box base Wb300 has been changed. In detail, the front wall portion W520 is positioned facing the protrusion portion W324 of the box base W300 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

As described above, the distance between the guide surface Wd561 formed on the lower wall W501 side (arrow D direction side) of the guide portion Wd560 and the outer surface of the lower wall W501 is formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat portion W220 of the box cover W200 and the space formed by the notches W226, W325 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Therefore, by abutting the guide surface Wd561 of the guide portion Wd560 against the front surface of the flat portion W320 via the sealing seal WSL, the connecting piece W531a of the disconnected engaging portion Wd530a can be made to face the space formed by the notches W226, W325. In other words, the position of the connecting piece W531a and the position of the space formed by the notches W226, W325 are approximately the same in the front-rear direction.

This makes it easy to place the connecting piece W531a in the space formed by the cutouts W226 and W325, even when the cutouts W226 and W325 are covered by the sealing seal WSL. By sliding the protective cover Wd500 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) while maintaining contact between the guide surface Wd561 and the front of the flat surface W320, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

The protective cover Wd500 is formed larger than the engaging portion Wd530a, so the worker (store clerk) can grasp the protective cover Wd500 and use the engaging portion Wd530a (connecting piece W531a) to cut the sealing seal WSL, making the cutting operation easy.

Next, with reference to Fig. 1456(a) and Fig. 1456(b), the board box We100 in the 29th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1456 (a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover We500 of the board box We100 in the 29th embodiment, and Figure 1456 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box We100 along the line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in Figure 1441 (b). Note that Figure 1456 (b) illustrates the state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using the cut engagement portion Wd530a.

As shown in FIG. 1456(a), the protective cover We500 of the board box We100 in the 29th embodiment does not have the connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 1440), and has a pair of connecting pieces We531a that connect the engagement portion We530a and the connecting portion W512.

The distance between the engagement portion We530a and the connecting portion W512, i.e., the extension length of the pair of connecting pieces We531a, is made shorter than the recess depth of the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325.

The cutouts We226 and We325 are recessed toward the opposite side of the flat surface e220 and the protruding portion We324, and the space formed by the cutouts We226 and We325 is roughly U-shaped in cross section. The distance between the opposing cutouts We226 and We325 is roughly equal to or slightly larger than the width of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the vertical direction (arrows U-D direction). This makes it possible to receive the pair of disconnected connecting pieces We531a in the space formed by the cutouts We226 and We325.

The cutout dimensions of the cutouts We226 and We325 toward the side wall W212 (arrow R direction) are slightly larger than the extension dimensions of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a facing each other is formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the front of the flat portion We320 of the box base We300 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325 (see FIG. 1456 (b)).

Next, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the engaging portion We530a will be described with reference to FIG. 1456(b). In FIG. 1456(b), the engaging portion We530a, which has been separated from the protective cover We500, is in a changed position. In detail, the pair of connecting pieces We531a of the engaging portion We530a are positioned to face the protruding portion We324 of the box base We300 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

As described above, the distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a is formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the front of the flat surface We320 of the box base We300 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and the space formed by the notches We226 and We325. Therefore, by abutting one of the opposing surfaces of the pair of connecting pieces We531a against the front of the flat surface We320 via the sealing seal WSL, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be made to face the space formed by the notches We226 and We325. In other words, the position of the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the position of the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 are approximately the same in the front-rear direction.

As a result, even when the cutout portions We226 and We325 are covered by the sealing seal WSL, the opposing surface of one of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be abutted against the front surface of the flat portion We320, making it possible for the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a to be received (disposed) in the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325. By sliding and displacing the engagement portion We530a in the vertical direction (direction of the arrows U-D) while maintaining the abutment between the opposing surface of one of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the front surface of the flat portion We320, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

In addition, the cutout dimensions of the cutout portions We226 and We325 toward the side wall portion W212 (arrow R direction) are formed to be slightly larger than the extension dimensions of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), thereby preventing the cut ends of the pair of disconnected connecting pieces We531a from contacting the bottom surfaces of the cutout portions We226 and We325 on the side wall portion W212 side, thereby preventing damage to the cutout portions We226 and We325.

In this way, in this embodiment, the sealing seal WSL can be cut using the engagement portion We530a, which is formed small relative to the protective cover We500, so that the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by suppressing interference between the engagement portion We530a and the pair of end wall portions W223, W321 (see FIG. 1440) of the planar portion W220 and the planar portion W320.

In addition, when the pair of connecting pieces We531a are connected to the protective cover We500 (the state before the pair of connecting pieces We531a are cut), the cut portions are not formed in the pair of connecting pieces We531a, so that it is possible to prevent a worker (store clerk) from coming into contact with the cut portions of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and being injured.

Next, referring to FIG. 1456(c) and FIG. 1456(d), a protective cover Wf500 according to a 30th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1456 (c) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wf500 in the 30th embodiment, and Figure 1456 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover Wf500 taken along line MCDLVId-MCDLVId in Figure 1456 (c).

As shown in Figures 1456(c) and 1456(d), the engagement portion Wf530a of the protective cover Wf500 in the 30th embodiment has a cutting portion Wf550.

Compared to the engaging portion W530a in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441), the engaging portion Wf530a is arranged such that the connecting piece W531b is displaced a predetermined distance toward the opposite side (arrow R direction) from the connecting portion W512, and a cutting portion Wf550 is formed at the end of the engaging portion Wf530a on the connecting portion W512 side (arrow L direction). The cutting portions Wf550 are formed in pairs facing a pair of rib portions W511.

The cutting portion Wf550 is formed so that the dimension in the plate thickness direction becomes smaller in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) from the center of the engaging portion Wf530a toward both ends. In other words, the tip of the cutting portion Wf550 is formed sharp. This makes it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.

On the other hand, the cutting portion Wf550 is disposed closer to the connecting portion W512 (the side in the direction of arrow L, the opposite side to the engagement hole W533) than the pair of connecting pieces W531b, so it does not affect the engagement between the engagement hole W533 and the protrusion W221 of the box cover W200 (see FIG. 1442). In other words, the formation of the cutting portion Wf550 can prevent the elasticity of the engagement portion Wf530a from being reduced.

Therefore, the engagement force for attaching the protective cover Wf500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 1441) can be prevented from being reduced by the formation of the cut portion Wf550.

The cutting portion Wf550 is disposed opposite the rib portion W511 and the connecting portion W512. This prevents the worker (store clerk) from coming into contact with the cutting portion Wf550 and being injured before the engaging portion Wf530a is separated from the protective cover Wf500.

Next, referring to FIG. 1457(a) and FIG. 1457(b), a protective cover Wg500 according to the 31st embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1457(a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wg500 in the 31st embodiment, and Figure 1457(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover Wg500 taken along line MCDLVIIb-MCDLVIIb in Figure 1457(a).

As shown in Figures 1457(a) and 1457(b), the protective cover Wg500 in the 31st embodiment does not have a connecting piece W531b (see Figure 1440), and has a pair of connecting pieces Wg531a that connect the engagement portion Wg530a and the connecting portion W512.

The pair of connecting pieces Wg531a are formed so that the cross-sectional area in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 1457(b) becomes smaller from the connecting portion W512 side and the engaging portion Wg530a side toward the space between the connecting portion W512 and the engaging portion Wg530a. In other words, the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a are formed in a shape in which a pair of truncated quadrangular pyramids are connected from the connecting portion W512 side and the engaging portion Wg530a side toward the space between the connecting portion W512 and the engaging portion Wg530a.

This makes it easier to cut the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a when separating the engaging portion Wg530a from the protective cover Wg500. In addition, the cut surface of the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a is smaller than when the cross-sectional area shown in FIG. 1457(b) is constant between the opposing connecting portion W512 and the engaging portion Wg530a, so the cut portion of the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a is sharp. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be cut easily.

Next, referring to FIG. 1457(c), the board box Wh100 according to the 32nd embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1457 (c) is a partial rear view of the board box Wh100 in the 32nd embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1457(c), the protective cover Wh500 of the board box Wh100 in the 32nd embodiment has a restricting portion Wh570.

The restricting portion Wh570 is a portion for restricting the engaging portion W530a from being elastically deformed improperly. The restricting portion Wh570 is disposed closer to the tip of the engaging portion W530a (the side in the direction of the arrow R) than the pair of connecting pieces W531b, and is disposed on the opposite side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) from the front wall portion W520 (see FIG. 1440) than the engaging portion W530a.

As a result, even if the engaging portion W530a is improperly elastically deformed to disengage the protrusion W221 of the planar portion W220 from the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion W530a, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530a can be restricted by the abutment of the engaging portion W530a and the restricting portion Wh570. As a result, it is easy to prevent the protective cover Wh500 from being improperly removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 1440).

Next, referring to FIG. 1458, the board box Wi100 according to the 33rd embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1458(a) is a side view of the protective cover Wi500 of the board box Wi100 in the 33rd embodiment, Figure 1458(b) is a side view of the board box Wi100, and Figure 1458(c) is a cross-sectional view of the board box Wi100 along the line MCDLVIIIc-MCDLVIIIc in Figure 1458(b). Note that Figure 1458 illustrates a state in which the engagement portion W530a has been separated from the protective cover Wi500.

As shown in FIG. 1458(a), the protective cover Wi500 of the board box Wi100 in the 33rd embodiment is provided with a rear wall portion W510 instead of the front wall portion W520 of the protective cover W500 in the 16th embodiment. In more detail, a pair of rear wall portions W510 are provided at both ends of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The pair of rear wall portions W510 are arranged in a symmetrical position in the side view shown in FIG. 1458(a). The pair of rear wall portions W510 also include the engagement portion We530 and a pair of connecting pieces We531a in the 29th embodiment (see FIG. 1456(c) and FIG. 1456(d)).

Next, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wi500 will be described with reference to Figures 1458(b) and 1458(c). Note that in Figures 1458(b) and 1458(c), the posture of the protective cover Wi500 is changed. In detail, the pair of connecting pieces We531a of the protective cover Wi500 is positioned facing the protruding portion We324 of the box base We300 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Note that in this embodiment, the state in which the pair of connecting pieces We531a are cut on the engaging portion We530a side rather than the connecting portion W512 side is illustrated.

The distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a is formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the front of the flat surface We320 of the box base We300 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and the space formed by the notches We226 and We325, so that by abutting one of the opposing surfaces of the pair of connecting pieces We531a against the front of the flat surface We320 via the sealing seal WSL, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be made to face the space formed by the notches We226 and We325. In other words, the position of the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the position of the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 are approximately the same in the front-rear direction.

As a result, even when the cutout portions We226 and We325 are covered by the sealing seal WSL, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be easily disposed in the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325. By sliding and displacing the engaging portion We530a in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) while maintaining contact between the opposing surface of one of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the front surface of the flat portion We320, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

In this embodiment, the sealing seal WSL is cut using a pair of connecting pieces We531a formed on the protective cover Wi500, making it easier for the worker (store clerk) to grasp the protective cover Wi500 and perform the cutting operation compared to the case in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using a pair of connecting pieces We531a formed on the engagement portion We530a in the 29th embodiment.

Next, with reference to Figs. 1459 to 1461, the board box Wj100 in the 34th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1459(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wj100 in the 34th embodiment, Figure 1459(b) is a partial side view of the board box Wj100 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIXb in Figure 1459(a), and Figure 1459(c) is a rear view of the protective cover Wj500. Figures 1460(a) and 1460(c) are rear views of the board box Wj100 in the MCDLXa portion in Figure 1459(a), Figure 1460(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wj100 along the line MCDLXb-MCDLXb in Figure 1460(a), and Figure 1460(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wj100 along the line MCDLXd-MCDLXd in Figure 1460(c). Figure 1461(a) is a rear view of the board box Wj100 in the MCDLXa portion of Figure 1459(a), and Figure 1461(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wj100 along the line MCDLXIb-MCDLXIb of Figure 1461(a).

Note that Figures 1459(a) and 1459(b) show the state in which the protective cover Wj500 has been removed from the box cover Wj200 and the box base W300. Also, in Figures 1460(a), 1460(c), and 1461(a), the illustration of the rear wall portion Wj214a is partially omitted.

As shown in Figures 1459(a) and 1459(b), the box cover Wj200 of the board box Wj100 in the 34th embodiment has an elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 instead of the protrusion W221 in the 16th embodiment (see Figure 1440).

The rear wall Wj214a of the cover Wj214 is formed to protrude further toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) than the rear wall W214a in the 16th embodiment, and is disposed at a position overlapping the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 in rear view. A restricting wall Wj214b is formed on the front side of the rear wall Wj214a, protruding toward the second restricting part Wj250 side (arrow F direction side) at a position facing the second restricting part Wj250 in a second restricting state described below. The restricting wall Wj214b is a portion for restricting the elastic deformation of the engaging part Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500.

A notch Wj227 is formed in the planar portion Wj220 at a position corresponding to the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, and a second restricting portion Wj250 of the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, which will be described later, is disposed in the space formed by the notch Wj227.

The dimensions of the planar portion Wj220 and the planar portion Wj320 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) are smaller than the dimensions of the planar portion Wj220 and the planar portion Wj320 in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1440), and when the planar portion Wj220 and the planar portion Wj320 are disposed inside the protective cover Wj500, the protective cover Wj500 is capable of being displaced in the vertical direction relative to the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300.

The elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 is for restricting the engagement portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 from being elastically deformed improperly in the restricted state, and includes a first restricting portion Wj240 and a second restricting portion Wj250. In addition, in explaining the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, refer to FIG. 1460 and FIG. 1461 as appropriate.

The first restricting portion Wj240 is a portion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 to the left side (arrow L direction) in the restricted state, and protrudes from the rear surface of the flat portion Wj220 toward the rear wall portion Wj214a side (arrow B direction). The first restricting portion Wj240 is formed with an inclined portion Wj241 that inclines toward the rear wall portion Wj214a side as it moves from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow R direction).

The second restricting portion Wj250 is a portion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 downward (in the direction of arrow D) in the restricted state, and is disposed opposite the first restricting portion Wj240 in the up-down direction (in the direction of arrows U-D). The second restricting portion Wj250 includes a plate-shaped support portion Wj251 that protrudes from the side wall of the flat portion Wj220 formed by the notch Wj227 toward the first restricting portion Wj240 (in the direction of arrow D), and an engagement portion Wj252 that protrudes from the protruding tip of the support portion Wj251 toward the restricting wall portion Wj214b (in the direction of arrow B).

The support portion Wj251 is disposed with its thickness direction aligned along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), and the thickness of the support portion Wj251 is smaller than the thickness of the planar portion Wj220. This allows the support portion Wj251 to be elastically deformed relative to the planar portion Wj220 when an external force in the front-rear direction is applied to the second restricting portion Wj250.

The engagement portion Wj252 is formed so as to incline from the first restricting portion Wj240 side (arrow D direction side) toward the restricting wall portion Wj214b side (arrow B direction side) as it moves toward the opposite side to the first restricting portion Wj240 (arrow U direction side). The upper surface of the engagement portion Wj252 formed on the opposite side to the first restricting portion Wj240 (arrow U direction side) is formed perpendicular to the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction).

As shown in FIG. 1459(c), the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 is formed with a smaller dimension in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) compared to the engaging portion Wj530a in the 16th embodiment. This makes it possible to prevent contact between the engaging portion Wj530a and the cover portion Wj214 even when the protective cover Wj500 is displaced in the vertical direction from a state in which the planar portion Wj220 and the planar portion Wj320 are disposed inside the protective cover Wj500.

Next, referring to Figures 1460 and 1461, the attachment of the protective cover Wj500 to the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 will be described. First, in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 is opposed to a position where the restricting wall portion Wj214b of the cover portion Wj214 is not formed, and the protective cover Wj500 is displaced toward the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 side (arrow R direction).

When the tip of the engagement portion Wj530a comes into contact with the inclined portion Wj241 of the first restricting portion Wj240, the engagement portion Wj530a is elastically deformed toward the protruding tip side (arrow B direction) of the first restricting portion Wj240.

As shown in Figures 1460(a) and 1460(b), the rear wall portion Wj510 and the side wall portion W212 come into contact with each other, restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 to the right (in the direction of arrow R) relative to the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 (hereinafter referred to as the "first restricted state").

In the first restricted state, the first restricting portion Wj240 is disposed inside the engagement hole W533 of the protective cover Wj500, and the elastic deformation of the engagement portion Wj530a is released. In addition, in the first restricted state, the inner wall of the engagement hole W533 comes into contact with the surface formed on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the first restricting portion Wj240, thereby restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 toward the left side (arrow L direction side).

Next, as shown in Figures 1460(c) and 1460(d), by displacing the protective cover Wj500 from the first restricting state toward the upward side (arrow U direction), the upper end of the engagement portion Wj530a comes into contact with the engagement portion Wj252 of the second restricting portion Wj250, and the second restricting portion Wj250 is elastically deformed toward the opposite side (arrow F direction) from the rear wall portion Wj214a of the cover portion Wj214.

Here, because the plate thickness of the support portion Wj251 is formed to be smaller than the plate thickness of the planar portion Wj220, the support portion Wj251 is elastically deformed by the upper end portion of the engagement portion Wj530a, and displacement toward the upper side (arrow U direction) of the protective cover Wj500 is permitted.

Next, as shown in Figures 1461(a) and 1461(b), the inner wall of the engagement hole W533 comes into contact with the surface formed on the lower side (arrow D direction) of the first restricting portion Wj240, restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 toward the upper side (arrow U direction) (hereinafter referred to as the "second restricting state").

In the second restricted state, the inner wall of the engagement hole W533 abuts against the surface formed on the upper side (arrow U direction) of the engagement portion Wj252, restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 downward (arrow D direction). As a result, the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 from the second restricted state to the first restricted state is restricted.

In the second restricted state, at least a portion of the engagement portion Wj530a is disposed in a position overlapping with the restriction wall portion Wj214b in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Therefore, elastic deformation of the engagement portion Wj530a toward the rear side (arrow B direction) is restricted by abutting against the restriction wall portion Wj214b. In other words, the restriction wall portion Wj214b restricts the first restriction portion Wj240 and the second restriction portion Wj250 from disengaging from the engagement portion Wj530a (engagement hole W533) in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wj500 from the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300.

As described above, the rear wall portion Wj214a is disposed at a position overlapping the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 in rear view, so that the second restricting portion Wj250 can be shielded. This makes it difficult to cause the second restricting portion Wj250 to undergo improper elastic deformation and to release the engagement between the first restricting portion Wj240 and the second restricting portion Wj250 and the engaging portion Wj530a (engagement hole W533).

This helps prevent the protective cover Wj500 from being illegally removed from the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300.

Next, with reference to Figures 1462 and 1463, the board box Wk100 in the 35th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1462 (a) is a partial front view of the board box Wk100 in the 35th embodiment, Figure 1462 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wk100 taken along line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb in Figure 1462 (a), and Figure 1462 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wk100 taken along line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc in Figure 1462 (a). Figures 1463 (a) and 1463 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the board box Wk100 taken along line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb in Figure 1462 (a), and Figures 1463 (b) and 1463 (d) are partial cross-sectional views of the board box Wk100 taken along line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc in Figure 1462 (a).

FIG. 1462 shows the protective cover W500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300. In this embodiment, the engaging portion W530b arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the protective cover W500 is referred to as engaging portion W530b1, and the engaging portion W530b arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side) is referred to as engaging portion W530b2, with different reference numerals used (see FIG. 1440).

As shown in FIG. 1462, the box base Wk300 of the board box Wk100 in the 35th embodiment has a protrusion Wk312c instead of the protrusion W312c arranged on the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) of the pair of protrusions W312c in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441). In addition, the cover part Wk312 of the box base Wk300 has a locking part Wk312f.

The protrusion Wk312c has an inclined portion Wk312d that inclines toward the back side (arrow B direction) as it moves from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow L direction). The protrusion Wk312c is disposed to the left (arrow L direction) of the protrusion W312c in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). In detail, the boundary between the inclined portion Wk312d and the front wall portion W312a is formed to the left of the boundary between the inclined portion W312d of the protrusion W312c and the front wall portion W312a, and the side surface of the protrusion Wk312c formed on the right side is formed to the left of the side surface of the protrusion W312c formed on the right side. In addition, the dimension of the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction is formed to be approximately 1/2 the dimension of the protrusion W312 in the left-right direction.

As a result, when attaching the protective cover W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c can come into contact with each other earlier than the engagement portion W530b1 and the protrusion W312c (see FIG. 1463). Also, the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c can come into engagement with each other earlier than the engagement portion W530b1 and the protrusion W312c (the protrusion W312c is disposed inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b1). Also, when the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged with each other, the protective cover W500 can be displaced left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-R).

The locking portion Wk312f is a portion for restricting the displacement of the engaging portion W530b toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and protrudes toward the left side (arrow L direction) from the left wall portion W302. The locking portion Wk312f includes an inclined portion Wk312g that inclines toward the rear side (arrow B direction) as it moves from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow L direction).

The distance between the locking portion Wk312f and the protrusion Wk312c in the left-right direction is set to be greater than the distance between the engagement portion W530b and the inner surface of the engagement hole W533. Furthermore, the inclined portion Wk312g is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). As a result, by displacing the protective cover W500 to the right (arrow R direction) from a state in which the engagement portion W530b is engaged with the protrusion Wk312c, the tip of the engagement portion W530b can be brought into contact with the inclined portion Wk312g.

Next, referring to FIG. 1463, the attachment of the protective cover W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300 will be described. Note that FIG. 1463(a) and FIG. 1463(b) show the protective cover W500 being attached to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300 in the middle of being attached, with the engagement portion W530b1 elastically deformed, and FIG. 1463(c) and FIG. 1463(d) show the board box Wk100 in the restricted state.

In the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), the positions of the engagement holes W533 of the engagement parts W530a, W530b1, and W530b2 are aligned with the positions of the projection W221 of the box cover W200 and the projections W312c, Wk312c of the box base Wk300 (see Figures 1440 and 1441), and then the protective cover W500 is displaced to the right (arrow R direction) so that the tip of the engagement part W530b2 abuts against the inclined part Wk312d of the projection Wk312c. The engagement part W530b2 is elastically deformed toward the rear side (arrow B direction), allowing the protective cover W500 to be displaced to the right.

Next, the protrusion Wk312c is disposed inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b2, thereby releasing the elastic deformation of the engagement portion W530b2 toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B), and the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged with each other, as shown in FIG. 1463(b).

As described above, the protrusion Wk312c is disposed to the left (arrow L direction) of the protrusion W312c in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Therefore, when the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged, as shown in FIG. 1463(a), the tip of the engagement portion W530b1 abuts against the inclined portion W312d of the protrusion W312c, and the engagement portion W530b1 is elastically deformed toward the rear side (arrow B direction).

In addition, the dimension of the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be approximately half the dimension of the protrusion W312 in the left-right direction, so that when the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged, the protective cover W500 is allowed to move to the right (arrow R direction).

Next, by displacing the protective cover W500 to the right (arrow R direction) from the state in which the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged, the engagement portion W530b1 and the protrusion W312c are engaged, the elastic deformation of the engagement portion W530b1 toward the rear side (arrow B direction) is released, and the board box Wk100 is placed in a restricted state, as shown in FIG. 1463(c).

As described above, the inclined portion Wk312g is formed at a position that overlaps the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Therefore, by displacing the protective cover W500 to the right (arrow R direction), as shown in FIG. 1463(d), the tip of the engaging portion W530b2 abuts against the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f, and the engaging portion W530b2 is elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction). As a result, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the back side (arrow B direction) is restricted.

In this way, in this embodiment, the elastic deformation of the engagement portion W530b2 toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) is restricted, which prevents the engagement portion W530b2 from being improperly elastically deformed toward the rear side, thereby preventing the protective cover W500 from being improperly removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300.

In addition, by displacing the protective cover W500 to the right (arrow R direction), elastic deformation of the engagement portion W530b2 toward the rear side (arrow B direction) is restricted, so the operation of attaching the protective cover W500 to the box cover W200 and box base Wk300 (displacement of the protective cover W500 to the right side) and the operation of restricting elastic deformation of the engagement portion W530b2 toward the rear side can be made the same, making it easier to move the board box Wk100 into the restricted state.

In addition, by engaging the engagement portion W530b1 with the protrusion W312c, displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the left side (arrow L direction) is restricted, and the elastic deformation of the engagement portion W530b2 toward the front side (arrow F direction) can be prevented from being released.

In addition, the tip of the engagement portion W530b2 abuts against the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f, so that the protective cover W500 can be displaced toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and the formation of a gap between the rear wall portion W510 and the standing portion W222 can be prevented. This makes it easier to prevent a wire that is illegally inserted through the gap formed between the rear wall portion W510 and the standing portion W222 from releasing the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.

Next, referring to Figures 1464 and 1465, the board box Wl100 in the 36th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1464(a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wl100 in the 36th embodiment, Figure 1464(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wl100 taken along line MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb in Figure 1464(a), Figure 1464(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wl100 taken along line MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc in Figure 1464(a), Figure 1464(d) is a rear view of the protective cover Wl500, and Figure 1464(e) is a cross-sectional view of the protective cover Wl500 taken along line XCVIe-XCVIe in Figure 1464(d). FIG. 1465(a) is a rear view of the board box Wl100 in the MCDLXVa portion of FIG. 1464(a), FIG. 1465(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wl100 along the line MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb of FIG. 1464(a), and FIG. 1465(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wl100 along the line MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc of FIG. 1464(a).

Note that Figures 1464(a) to 1464(c) show the state in which the protective cover Wl500 has been removed from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300. Also, in Figure 1465(a), the tip portion Wl436 is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 1464(a) to 1464(c), the box cover Wl200 of the board box Wl100 in the 36th embodiment has an elastic deformation restricting means Wl230 instead of the protrusion W221 in the 16th embodiment (see Figure 1440).

The elastic deformation restricting means Wl230 is intended to prevent unauthorized removal of the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300, and includes a first restricting portion Wl240 and a second restricting portion Wl250 that protrude from the flat portion W220 toward the rear side (the direction of the arrow B).

The first restricting portion Wl240 and the second restricting portion Wl250 are spaced apart in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) by the vertical dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 of the protective cover Wl500, which will be described later. This allows the connecting portion Wl535 to be disposed between the opposing first restricting portion Wl240 and the second restricting portion Wl250.

The first restricting portion Wl240 is formed with an inclined portion Wl241 that inclines toward the rear side (arrow B direction) as it moves from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow R direction). The locking surface Wl242, which is the surface formed on the opposite side to the inclined portion Wl241 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), is formed along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The second restricting portion Wl250 is formed with a first inclined portion Wl251 that inclines toward the rear side (arrow B side) as it moves from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow R direction), and a second inclined portion Wl252 that inclines toward the front side (arrow F side) as it moves from the right end of the first inclined portion Wl251 to the right side. In the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), the second inclined portion Wl252 is disposed at a position overlapping with the locking surface Wl242 of the first restricting portion Wl240.

As shown in Figures 1464(d) and 1464(e), the engagement portion Wl530a of the protective cover Wl500 includes a connecting portion Wl535 and a tip portion Wl536 disposed at the tip of the connecting portion Wl535.

The connecting portion Wl535 protrudes from approximately the center of the engaging portion Wl530a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the right side (arrow R direction). The protruding dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed to be larger than the dimension of the first restricting portion Wl240 in the left-right direction and smaller than the dimension of the second restricting portion Wl250 in the left-right direction.

The inclined portion Wl535a formed on the underside of the connecting portion Wl535 is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) as it moves from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow R direction). That is, the connecting portion Wl535 is formed so that the connecting portion with the engaging portion Wl530a is smaller than the connecting portion with the tip portion Wl536. This makes it easier to deform the connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) relative to the engaging portion Wl530a.

The tip portion Wl536 is formed to extend in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction). In this embodiment, the tip portion Wl536 above the connecting portion Wl535 (arrow U direction side) is referred to as the upper tip portion Wl536a, and the tip portion Wl536 below the connecting portion Wl535 (arrow D direction side) is referred to as the lower tip portion Wl536b.

Next, the board box Wl100 in the restricted state will be described with reference to FIG. 1465. As described above, the protruding dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed to be larger than the dimension of the first restricting portion Wl240 in the left-right direction, so that the first restricting portion Wl240 is disposed in the space formed between the engaging portion Wl530a and the upper tip portion Wl536a.

On the other hand, the protruding dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is smaller than the dimension of the second restricting portion Wl250 in the left-right direction, so the second inclined portion Wl252 of the second restricting portion Wl250 comes into contact with the lower tip portion Wl536b. As a result, the connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) is rotated (twisted) around the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as the rotation axis, and the lower tip portion Wl536b is displaced toward the rear side (arrow B direction) and the upper tip portion Wl536a is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction).

As described above, the inclined portion Wl535a is formed to be inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) as it moves from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow R direction), making it easier to rotate the connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) relative to the engaging portion Wl530a.

By displacing the upper end Wl536a toward the front side (the direction of arrow F), the amount of engagement between the upper end Wl536a and the first restricting portion Wl240 can be increased (the overlap between the upper end Wl536a and the first restricting portion Wl240 in the left-right direction can be increased). This makes it difficult to illegally remove the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300.

In addition, when the lower tip Wl536b is displaced toward the rear side (arrow B direction) to illegally release the engagement between the lower tip Wl536b and the second restricting part Wl250, the upper tip Wl536a is rotated (twisted) around the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a rotation axis and displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction), thereby increasing the amount of engagement between the upper tip Wl536a and the first restricting part Wl240. This makes it difficult to illegally remove the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300.

Next, referring to FIG. 1466, the board box Wm100 according to the 37th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1466(a) is a partial front view of the board box Wm100 in the 37th embodiment, and Figure 1466(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wm100 along the line MCDLXVIb-MCDLXVIb in Figure 1466(a). Note that the sealing seal WSL in this embodiment is formed in the same way as the sealing seal WSL in the 16th embodiment except that it has smaller dimensions in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), so it will be described using the same reference numerals. Also, Figure 1466(a) shows the state in which the protective cover Wm500 has been removed from the box cover Wm200 and box base Wm300.

As shown in FIG. 1466, the box base Wm300 of the board box Wl100 in the 37th embodiment is provided with a pair of elastic deformation restricting means Wm330. A notch Wm327 is formed in the planar portion Wm320 at a position corresponding to the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330, and the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 is disposed in the space formed by the notch Wm327. In addition, the planar portion Wm220 of the box cover Wm200 is provided with a restricting protrusion Wm228, and the engagement portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 is provided with a protrusion Wm534.

The elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 is intended to restrict unauthorized elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 in the restricted state, and includes a connecting portion Wm331 that protrudes from the notch Wm327, an extension portion Wm332 that extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the protruding tip of the connecting portion Wm331, and a contact portion Wm333 and a restricting portion Wm334 that protrude from both ends of the extension portion Wm332 toward the front side (arrow F direction).

The connecting portion Wm331 is plate-shaped and protrudes from the side wall of the flat portion Wm320 formed by the notch Wm327 toward the sealing seal WSL. The inclined portion Wm331a formed on the front side of the connecting portion Wm331 is inclined toward the front side (arrow F direction) as it moves from the upper side (arrow U direction) to the lower side (arrow D direction). That is, the connecting portion Wm331 is formed so that the connecting portion with the side wall of the flat portion Wj220 is smaller than the connecting portion with the extension portion Wm332. This makes it easier to deform the extension portion Wm332 (the abutment portion Wm333 and the restricting portion Wm334) relative to the side wall of the flat portion Wj220.

The abutment portion Wm333 is the portion that abuts against the protrusion Wm534 of the protective cover Wm500 described below, and protrudes from the end of one side (arrow L direction) of the extension portion Wm332 in the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the extension portion Wm332 toward the front side (arrow F direction).

The restricting portion Wm334 protrudes toward the front side (arrow F direction) from the end of the extension portion Wm332 on the opposite side (arrow R direction) from the abutting portion Wm333 in the extension direction (arrow L-R direction), and is formed at a position that, in the restricted state, is on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500.

The restricting protrusion Wm228 of the planar portion Wm220 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and protrudes from the planar portion Wm220 toward the planar portion Wm320 side (arrow F direction) of the box base Wm300. In the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), the restricting protrusion Wm228 is disposed at a position overlapping with approximately the center of the extension portion Wm332 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The restricting protrusion Wm228 may also be disposed at a position overlapping the connecting portion Wm331 or the restricting portion Wm334 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion Wm534 of the protective cover Wm500 is a protrusion for deforming (rotating) the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330, and protrudes from the rear surface of the engaging portion Wm530b toward the rear surface side (arrow B direction side). The protrusion Wm534 is disposed at a distance from the tip of the engaging portion Wm530b approximately equal to the extension dimension of the extension portion Wm332 of the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330. This allows the tip of the engaging portion Wm530b and the protrusion Wm534 to be disposed on the front surface side (arrow F direction side) of the abutment portion Wm333 and restricting portion Wm334 in the restricted state.

As shown in FIG. 1466(b), in the restricted state, the protrusion Wm534 of the engagement portion Wm530b comes into contact with the abutment portion Wm333 of the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330. As a result, the connection portion Wm331 (extension portion Wm332) is rotated (twisted) around the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) as the rotation axis, and the abutment portion Wm333 is displaced toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and the restricting portion Wm334 is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction).

As described above, the inclined portion Wm331a is formed to incline toward the front side (arrow F direction) as it moves from the upper side (arrow U direction) to the lower side (arrow D direction), making it easier to rotate the connecting portion Wm331 (extension portion Wm332) relative to the side wall of the flat portion Wj220.

By displacing the restricting portion Wm334 toward the front side (the direction of arrow F), the distance between the restricting portion Wm334 and the tip of the engaging portion Wm530b can be reduced. This makes it difficult to cause unauthorized elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wm530b. Note that in the restricted state, the restricting portion Wm334 may abut against the back surface of the engaging portion Wm530b.

As described above, in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), the restricting protrusion Wm228 is disposed at a position overlapping approximately the center of the extension portion Wm332 in the left-to-right direction (arrow L-R direction), so that the restricting protrusion Wm228 comes into contact with the extension portion Wm332, thereby restricting the extension portion Wm332 (contact portion Wm333 and restricting portion Wm334) from being displaced toward the rear side (arrow B direction). This makes it difficult for the engagement portion Wm530b to be elastically deformed improperly.

Next, referring to FIG. 1467, the board box Wn100 according to the 38th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1467(a) is a partial front view of the board box Wn100 in the 38th embodiment, Figure 1467(b) is a side view of the protective cover Wn500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLXVIIb in Figure 1467(a), and Figure 1467(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wn100 along the line MCDLXVIIc-MCDLXVIIc in Figure 1467(a). Note that Figure 1467(a) illustrates the state in which the protective cover Wn500 has been removed from the box cover W200 and box base Wn300, with the protrusion Wn534 and a pair of wall portions Wn538 of the protective cover Wn500 being illustrated by dashed lines.

As shown in FIG. 1467, the box base Wm300 of the board box Wn100 in the 38th embodiment has a pair of claw portions Wm340, and the engagement portion Wn530b of the protective cover Wn500 has a protrusion Wn534 and a pair of wall portions Wn538.

The front wall Wn312a of the box base Wm300 has notches formed at positions corresponding to the pair of claws Wm340, and the pair of claws Wm340 are disposed in the space formed by the notches. The pair of claws Wm340 are formed to protrude leftward (arrow L direction side) from the rear surface of the front wall Wn312a, and are disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front wall Wn312a.

The pair of claws Wm340 are used to engage the protective cover Wn500 with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300, and are arranged in a position overlapping the engagement portion Wn530b of the protective cover Wn500 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in the restricted state. An engagement hole Wm341 is drilled in the pair of claws Wm340 at a position on the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) of the claws Wm340.

The engagement hole Wm341 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the protrusion Wn534 of the protective cover Wn500 described below, and the protrusion Wn534 is disposed inside the engagement hole Wm341 (the protrusion Wn534 engages with the engagement hole Wm341), thereby engaging the protective cover Wn500 with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.

The engaging portion Wn530b has a pair of connecting pieces W531b at both ends of the engaging portion Wn530b in the up-down direction (arrows U-D direction) spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (arrows L-R direction). This prevents the engaging portion Wn530b from elastically deforming.

Furthermore, the engagement portion Wn530b is formed closer to the front side (the direction of the arrow F) than the engagement portion W530b in the 16th embodiment, and in this embodiment, is disposed on approximately the same plane as the front wall portion W520.

The protrusion Wn534 protrudes from the engagement portion Wn530b toward the rear wall portion W510 (arrow B direction). In the restricted state, the protrusion Wn534 is disposed at a position overlapping the engagement hole Wm341 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows the protective cover Wn500 to engage with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.

The pair of walls Wn538 are intended to prevent a wire improperly inserted through a gap formed between the front wall W520 and the engagement portion Wn530b from releasing the engagement between the engagement hole Wm341 and the protrusion Wn534. The pair of walls Wn538 are formed at the end of the engagement portion Wn530b facing the front wall W520. This provides a protrusion Wn534 between the opposing pair of walls Wn538. The pair of walls Wn538 also protrude from the engagement portion Wn530b toward the rear wall W510 (arrow B direction).

As shown in FIG. 1467(c), in the restricted state, a protrusion Wn534 is disposed on the inside of the engagement hole Wm341, and the inner wall of the engagement hole Wm341 comes into contact with the protrusion Wn534, restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wn500 to the left (in the direction of the arrow L).

The engaging portion Wn530b is disposed on approximately the same plane as the front wall portion W520, and the pair of claw portions Wm340 are disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion Wn312a, so that in the restricted state, the pair of claw portions Wm340 are disposed on the rear wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side) of the engaging portion Wn530b. Therefore, the pair of claw portions Wm340 are shielded by the protective cover Wn500. This makes it possible to prevent the pair of claw portions Wm340 from being improperly elastically deformed, and to prevent the protective cover Wn500 from being improperly removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.

Next, referring to FIG. 1468, the board box Wo100 according to the 39th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1468(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wo100 in the 39th embodiment, and Figure 1468(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wo100 taken along line MCDLXVIIIb-MCDLXVIIIb in Figure 1468(a). Note that the illustration of the retaining pin Wo580 is omitted in Figure 1468(a).

As shown in FIG. 1468, the protective cover Wo500 of the board box Wo100 in the 39th embodiment has a retaining pin Wo580, and the planar portion Wq220 has a recess Wo229.

In addition, since the protective cover Wo500 is provided with the anti-slip pin Wo580, the flat portion Wo220 is formed on the front side by the amount of protrusion of the anti-slip pin Wo580 toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) relative to the engagement portion Wo530a. This makes it possible to prevent the anti-slip pin Wo580 from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL, thereby preventing damage to the sealing seal WSL.

The rear wall portion Wo214a of the cover portion Wo214 is formed to protrude further toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) than the rear wall portion W214a in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441). The rear wall portion Wo214a has a protrusion Wo214b protruding toward the flat portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) at a position overlapping with the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wo530a when viewed from behind in the restricted state. The protrusion Wo214b is a portion for engaging the box cover Wo200 and the protective cover Wo500 (engagement portion Wo530a) (for restricting displacement of the protective cover Wo500 to the opposite side from the side wall portion W212).

A recess Wo229 is recessed into the flat portion Wo220 at a position overlapping the retaining pin Wo580 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The recess Wo229 is recessed from the rear surface of the flat portion Wo220 toward the flat portion W320 of the box base W300 (arrow F direction). This forms a space between the recess Wo229 and the sealing seal WSL.

The recess Wo229 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the inner diameter of the recess Wo229 is formed to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the head Wo581 described below. This makes it possible to receive a part of the retaining pin Wo580 inside the recess Wo229 when the engagement portion Wo530a is displaced (elastically deformed).

The engagement portion Wo530a of the protective cover Wo500 has an insertion hole Wo538 between the connecting piece W531a and the engagement hole W533. The insertion hole Wo538 is a hole for inserting the pin portion Wo582 of the anti-slip pin Wo580 described later, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from behind.

The retaining pin Wo580 is made of a resin material and has a head Wo581 formed in a plate shape and a pair of pin portions Wo582 formed in a plate shape and erected in the plate thickness direction from the head Wo581.

The head Wo581 is circular when viewed from the rear, and the outer diameter of the head Wo581 is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole Wo538.

The erect length of the pair of pin portions Wo582 is formed to be smaller than the dimension between the back surface of the engagement portion Wo530a on the side opposite the sealing seal WSL and the sealing seal WSL. The pair of pin portions Wo582 are disposed at a predetermined distance in the plate thickness direction. In addition, the pair of pin portions Wo582 are formed with a plate thickness that allows for flexural deformation, and the pair of pin portions Wo582 are deformable in a direction approaching each other.

The erected tip of the pin portion Wo582 is formed with a locking portion Wo583 that protrudes toward the opposite side of the opposing surface. The opposite side of the engaging portion Wo583 is formed with an inclined portion o584 that is inclined toward the opposing surface of the engaging portion Wo583 as it approaches the erected tip, and the outer shape of the engaging portion Wo583 at the erected tip is formed to a size that allows it to be inserted through the insertion hole Wo538.

The outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 on the head Wo581 side (opposite the erected tip side) is formed to a size that does not allow it to pass through the insertion hole Wo538. In addition, the outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 on the head Wo581 side is formed to a size that allows it to pass through the insertion hole Wo538 when the pair of pin portions Wo582 are bent and deformed in a direction toward each other. In addition, the outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 on the erected tip side is formed to a size that allows it to pass through the insertion hole Wo538.

As a result, the pair of pin portions Wo582 of the anti-slip pin Wo580 are deflected toward each other, causing the locking portion Wo583 to be inserted through the insertion hole Wo538. On the other hand, the pair of pin portions Wo582 are released from deflection, causing the locking portion Wo583 to come into contact with the engagement portion Wo530a, restricting displacement in the direction opposite the insertion direction (arrow F direction) (arrow B direction).

The inclined portion o584 is formed so as to incline toward the opposing surface of the locking portion Wo583 as it approaches the erected tip, so that when the inclined portion o584 comes into contact with the inner circumference of the insertion hole Wo538, the pair of pin portions Wo582 are deflected and deformed in a direction that brings them closer to each other.

The outer diameter of the head Wo581 is made larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole Wo538, so that the head Wo581 abuts against the engagement portion Wo530a, restricting the displacement of the retaining pin Wo580 in the insertion direction (direction of arrow F). This prevents the erected tips of the pair of pin portions Wo582 from abutting against the sealing seal WSL, preventing damage to the sealing seal WSL.

On the other hand, if the engaging portion Wo530a is elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction) in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wo500 from the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300, the erected tips of the pair of pin portions Wo582 come into contact with the sealing seal WSL. This restricts the elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wo530a toward the front side (arrow F direction), and prevents the protective cover Wo500 from being removed from the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300.

In addition, the sealing seal WSL is damaged when the erected tips of the pair of pins Wo582 come into contact with the sealing seal WSL. This makes it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that a fraudulent person may have performed tampering on the main control board (not shown).

In addition, in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), the flat portion Wo220 at the position overlapping with the retaining pin Wo580 (pair of pin portions Wo582) may have a recess facing away from the sealing seal WSL (arrow F direction). This makes it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL by abutting the erected tip portions of the pair of pin portions Wo582 with the sealing seal WSL.

Next, the attachment of the protective cover Wo500 to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300 will be described. When attaching the protective cover Wo500 to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300, the anti-slip pin Wo580 is disengaged from the protective cover Wo500, and with the protective cover Wo500 attached to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300, the anti-slip pin Wo580 is engaged with the protective cover Wo500.

This makes it possible to prevent damage to the sealing seal WSL caused by the anti-slip pin Wo580 (locking portion Wo583) compared to when the protective cover Wo500 with the anti-slip pin Wo580 engaged is attached to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300.

Next, referring to FIG. 1469, a protective cover Wp500 according to the 40th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1469 is a rear view of the protective cover Wp500 in the 40th embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, the box cover and box base to which the protective cover Wp500 is attached are not shown, and the concept of removing the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and box base is explained. Also, in the explanation of Figure 1469, Figure 1468 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1469, the protective cover Wp500 in the 42nd embodiment has a second engagement portion Wp590. The protective cover Wp500 has a pair formed symmetrically (vertically symmetrically in FIG. 1469) with respect to a plane parallel to the upper wall portion (lower wall portion W501) at approximately the center of the upper and lower wall portions W501 of the protective cover Wp500. In addition, the engagement portion W530b is not formed on the front wall portion Wp520 of the protective cover Wp500 (see FIG. 1440).

The engaging portion Wp530a has a pair of connecting pieces W531b at both ends of the engaging portion Wp530a in the up-down direction (arrows U-D direction) spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (arrows L-R direction). The connecting piece W531b on the left side (arrow L direction) of the pair of connecting pieces W531b is connected to the rear wall portion Wp510, and the connecting piece W531b on the right side (arrow R direction) of the pair of connecting pieces W531b is connected to the second engaging portion Wp590.

The second engagement part Wp590 is the part with which the retaining pin Wo580 engages. The second engagement part Wp590 has an insertion hole Wo538, a connecting piece W531a, and a pair of connecting pieces W531b. The connecting piece W531a is connected to the end of the second engagement part Wp590 on the left side (arrow L direction side) and the rear wall part Wp510, and the connecting piece W531b is connected to both ends of the second engagement part Wp590 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) and the upper end (lower end) and upper wall part (lower wall part W501) of the engagement part Wp530a.

The box cover and the box base each have a protrusion that engages with the engagement hole W533 at a position corresponding to the engagement hole W533 of one of the pair of engagement parts Wp530a in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction). These protrusions are disposed symmetrically with respect to a plane parallel to the rear wall part Wp510 (front wall part Wp520) at approximately the center of the rear wall part Wp510 and the front wall part Wp520.

As a result, when the protrusion formed on the box cover and the engagement hole W533 of one (the other) of the pair of engagement parts Wp530a are engageable, the protrusion formed on the box base and the engagement hole W533 of the other (the other) of the pair of engagement parts Wp530a are disengaged.

When the protrusion formed on the box cover is engageable with one (the other) engagement hole W533 of the pair of engagement parts Wp530a, the retaining pin Wo580 is inserted into the insertion hole Wo538 of the second engagement part Wp590 connected to one (the other) engagement part Wp530a, and the second engagement part Wp590 and the retaining pin Wo580 are engaged.

If one (the other) of the engaging parts Wp530a is improperly elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction) in order to improperly remove the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and box base, the erected tips of the pair of pin parts Wo582 come into contact with the sealing seal WSL. This restricts the elastic deformation of one (the other) of the engaging parts Wp530a toward the front side (arrow F direction), preventing the protective cover Wp500 from being removed from the box cover and box base.

In addition, the sealing seal WSL is damaged when the erected tips of the pair of pins Wo582 come into contact with the sealing seal WSL. This makes it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that a fraudulent person may have performed tampering on the main control board (not shown).

The protective cover Wp500 can be removed from the box cover and box base by cutting the connecting pieces W531a, W531b connected to the one (other) engaging part Wp530a and the second engaging part Wp590 with a cutting tool (not shown), and separating the one (other) engaging part Wp530a and the second engaging part Wp590 from the protective cover Wp500.

Here, the protective cover Wp500, from which one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 have been separated, can be rotated (flipped) 180 degrees around the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a rotation axis, allowing the protrusion formed on the box base to engage with the other (one) engaging hole W533 of the pair of engaging portions Wp530a.

This allows the protective cover Wp500 to be used (reused) twice to prevent the box cover and box base from being opened. As a result, the maintenance costs of the pachinko machine W10 can be reduced compared to when the protective cover Wp500 is discarded every time the box cover and box base are opened.

In addition, depending on whether one (the other) of the engaging parts Wp530a and the second engaging part Wp590 are separated from the protective cover Wp500, it is possible to distinguish whether the protective cover Wp500 is reused and attached to the box cover and box base, or whether a new protective cover Wp500 is attached to the box cover and box base. Therefore, by comparing with the maintenance record of the pachinko machine W10, for example, if the maintenance record indicates that the protective cover Wp500 is reused, but a new protective cover Wp500 is attached to the box cover and box base, it is possible to easily make the worker (store clerk) aware that there is a risk of fraudulent manipulation of the main control board (not shown) by a fraudster.

Next, referring to FIG. 1470, the board box Wq100 in the 41st embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1470(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wq100 in the 41st embodiment, and Figure 1470(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wq100 taken along line MCDLXXb-MCDLXXb in Figure 1470(a).

As shown in FIG. 1470, the protective cover Wq500 of the board box Wq100 in the 41st embodiment has a second engagement portion Wq590 and a pair of protrusions Wq534. Since the protective cover Wq500 has the second engagement portion Wq590, the dimension of the rear wall portion Wq510 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) is shorter than the dimension of the rear wall portion W510 in the 16th embodiment.

In addition, by forming a pair of protrusions Wq534 on the engagement portion Wq530a, the flat portion Wq220 is formed on the front side (the direction of the arrow F) by the amount of protrusion of the pair of protrusions Wq534. This makes it possible to prevent the pair of protrusions Wq534 from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL when attaching the protective cover Wq500 to the box cover Wq200 and the box base W300, thereby preventing damage to the sealing seal WSL.

A recess Wq229 is recessed into the flat surface Wq220 at a position overlapping a pair of protrusions Wq534 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The recess Wq229 is recessed from the rear surface of the flat surface Wq220 toward the flat surface W320 side of the box base W300 (arrow F direction). This forms a space between the recess Wq229 and the sealing seal WSL.

The rear wall Wq214a of the cover Wq214 is formed to protrude toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) more than the rear wall W214a in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441). In the rear wall Wq214a, a protrusion Wq214b protrudes toward the flat surface W320 side (arrow F direction side) at a position overlapping with the engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 1441) of the engagement part Wq530a in the rear view in the restricted state. The protrusion Wq214b is a part for engaging the box cover Wq200 and the protective cover Wq500 (engagement part Wq530a) (for restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wq500 to the opposite side from the side wall W212). In addition, the cover Wq214 does not have a side wall on the lower side (arrow D direction side).

The second engagement portion Wq590 is disposed at the end of the engagement portion Wq530a on the lower side (the side indicated by the arrow D), and the pair of protrusions Wq534 are disposed at the end of the engagement portion Wq530a on the opposite side (the side indicated by the arrow U) from the second engagement portion Wq590. The pair of protrusions Wq534 are also disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (the direction indicated by the arrows L-R).

The second engagement portion Wq590 has an insertion hole Wo538 (see FIG. 1468). With the pin portion Wo582 of the retaining pin Wo580 inserted through the insertion hole Wo538, the retaining pin Wo580 engages with the second engagement portion Wq590.

Next, the removal of the protective cover Wq500 from the box cover Wq200 and the box base W300 will be described. When removing the engaging portion Wq530a from the box cover Wq200 in a state in which the engaging portion Wq530a has been separated from the protective cover Wq500, the engaging portion Wq530a can be easily removed from the box cover Wq200 by displacing the engaging portion Wq530a downward, since the cover portion Wq214 does not have a side wall on the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D).

Here, in order to release the engagement between the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wq530a and the protrusion Wq214b of the rear wall portion Wq214a, it is necessary to displace the engagement portion Wq530a toward the flat portion W320 (in the direction of the arrow F).

On the other hand, the anti-slip pin Wo580 is engaged with the second engagement portion Wq590, and the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 is disposed closer to the flat portion W320 (in the direction of the arrow F) than the second engagement portion Wq590, so that the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 is easily brought into contact with the rear wall portion Wq510.

Therefore, in order to prevent the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 from coming into contact with the rear wall portion Wq510, the retaining pin Wo580 is rotated toward the opposite side (arrow B direction) from the flat portion W320, with the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as the rotation axis. As a result, the pair of protrusions Wq534 are rotated toward the flat portion W320 side (arrow F direction), and the pair of protrusions Wq534 damage the sealing seal WSL.

The pair of protrusions Wq534 can be easily received in the space formed between the sealing seal WSL and the recess Wq229, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the pair of protrusions Wq534. The area of the sealing seal WSL that is damaged by the pair of protrusions Wq534 can also be made larger.

In this way, in this embodiment, by making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL when removing the engagement portion Wq530a from the box cover Wq200, it is possible to make the worker (store clerk) more aware of the risk of unauthorized operation of the main control board (not shown).

Next, referring to FIG. 1471(a), the board box Wr100 according to the 42nd embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1471 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wr100 in the 42nd embodiment, and corresponds to the line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in Figure 1441 (b). In addition, in the explanation of Figure 1471 (a), Figure 1442 (a) will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1471(a), the box cover Wr200 of the board box Wr100 in the 42nd embodiment has a protrusion Wr214b instead of the protrusion W221 in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1440).

The protrusion W221 is not formed on the flat surface portion Wr220, and a notch is formed at a position overlapping the engagement portion W530a in rear view up to a position on the opposite side of the side wall portion W212 (the direction of the arrow L) from the engagement hole W533. This prevents the engagement portion W530a from contacting the flat surface portion Wr220 and restricting the elastic deformation of the engagement portion W530a even when the engagement portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the flat surface portion Wr220 (the direction of the arrow F).

The rear wall portion Wr214a of the cover portion Wr214 is formed to protrude further toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) than the rear wall portion W214a in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441). The rear wall portion Wr214a has a protrusion Wr214b protruding toward the flat portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) at a position overlapping with the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530a in rear view. The protrusion Wr214b is a portion for engaging the box cover Wr200 and the protective cover Wr500 (engagement portion W530a) (for restricting displacement of the protective cover Wr500 toward the opposite side from the side wall portion W212).

The protrusion Wr214b protrudes from the rear wall portion Wr214a toward the flat surface portion W320 (in the direction of arrow F), so that the engagement portion W530a can be elastically deformed toward the front wall portion W520 (flat surface portion Wr220) to engage the box cover Wr200 and the protective cover Wr500.

On the other hand, the pair of engaging portions W530b are elastically deformed toward the rear wall portion W510 side (the flat portion W320 side, the direction of arrow B) to engage the box base W300 and the protective cover Wr500 (see FIG. 1442(a)). Therefore, in order to illegally release the engagement between the box cover Wr200 and the box base W300 and the protective cover W500, the direction in which the engaging portions W530a are elastically deformed (displaced) (the direction of arrow F) can be opposite to the direction in which the pair of engaging portions W530b are elastically deformed (displaced) (the direction of arrow B).

As a result, when the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) is elastically deformed (displaced) to release the engagement between the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) and the protrusions Wr214b (pair of protrusions W312c), the pair of engaging portions W530b (engaging portion W530a) can be displaced in a direction that maintains the engagement with the pair of protrusions W312c (protrusions Wr214b) in accordance with the elastic deformation (displacement) of the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b). As a result, unauthorized removal of the protective cover Wr500 from the box cover Wr200 and the box base W300 can be prevented.

In addition, the protrusion Wr214b protrudes from the rear wall portion Wr214a toward the flat portion W320 (the direction of the arrow F), so that the engagement between the protrusion Wr214b and the engagement hole W533 is blocked by the rear wall portion Wr214a. This makes it difficult for the engagement between the protrusion Wr214b and the engagement hole W533 to be illegally released.

Next, referring to FIG. 1471(b), the board box Ws100 according to the 43rd embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1471(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Ws100 in the 43rd embodiment, and corresponds to the line MCDXLIIa-MCDXLIIa in Figure 1441(b). In addition, in the explanation of Figure 1471(b), Figure 1442(b) will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1471(b), the box base Ws300 of the board box Ws100 in the 43rd embodiment has a pair of protrusions Ws328 instead of the pair of protrusions W312c in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441). Note that the manner in which the pair of engaging portions W530b engage with the pair of protrusions Ws328 is the same on one side (upper side) and the other side (lower side) (see FIG. 1441), so a cross-sectional view of one side will be illustrated and explained, and an explanation of the other side will be omitted.

The front wall portion W312a of the box base Ws300 does not have the projections W312c formed thereon, and the planar portion Ws320 extends to a position overlapping the engagement holes W533 of the pair of engagement portions W530b in a front view. At the extended tip of the planar portion Ws320, a pair of projections Ws328 protrude toward the planar portion W220 (the direction of arrow B) at a position overlapping the engagement holes W533 of the pair of engagement portions W530b in a front view. The pair of projections Ws328 are used to engage the box base Ws300 with the protective cover W500 (the pair of engagement portions W530b) (to restrict displacement of the protective cover W500 in the direction opposite the left wall portion W302).

The pair of projections Ws328 protrude from the flat surface Ws320 toward the opposite side to the front wall W312a (the direction of arrow F), so that the pair of engagement portions W530b can be elastically deformed toward the front wall W312a side (the opposite side to the flat surface W220) to engage the box base Ws300 and the protective cover W500.

On the other hand, the engagement portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the opposite side of the front wall portion W520 (the opposite side of the flat portion W220, the direction of arrow B) in order to engage the box cover W200 and the protective cover W500 (see FIG. 1442 (b)). Therefore, in order to illegally release the engagement between the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300 and the protective cover W500, the direction in which the engagement portion W530a is elastically deformed (displaced) (the direction of arrow B) can be opposite to the direction in which the pair of engagement portions W530b are elastically deformed (displaced) (the direction of arrow F).

As a result, when the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) is elastically deformed (displaced) to release the engagement between the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) and the protrusions W221 (pair of protrusions Ws328), the pair of engaging portions W530b (engaging portion W530a) can be displaced in a direction that maintains the engagement with the pair of protrusions Ws328 (protrusions W221) in accordance with the elastic deformation (displacement) of the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b). As a result, unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300 can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 1472, the board box Wt100 according to the 44th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1472(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wt100 in the 44th embodiment, and Figure 1472(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wt100 taken along line MCDLXXIIb-MCDLXXIIb in Figure 1472(a). Note that Figure 1472 illustrates the board box Wt100 with the protective cover W500 removed.

As shown in FIG. 1472, the box cover Wt200 (flat portion Wt220) of the board box Wt100 in the 44th embodiment has a protrusion Wt224b instead of the recess W224b in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1441).

The protrusion Wt224b protrudes from the rear surface of the planar portion Wt220 toward the opposite side to the planar portion W320 (the direction of the arrow B) and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross section. The protrusion Wt224b ensures the strength of the planar portion Wt220.

A pair of notches Wt224b1 are formed in the protrusion Wt224b. The space formed between the opposing surfaces of the protrusion Wt224b by the notches Wt224b1 is defined as the cutting space WS3. In the restricted state, the cutting space WS3 is disposed at a position overlapping the connecting piece W531b of the engagement portion W530a when viewed from behind.

The distance between the opposing surfaces of the protrusion Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 is formed to be approximately equal to or slightly larger than the extension dimension of the connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 1441) in the vertical direction (direction of the arrows U-D). This allows the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) to be received in the cutting space WS3 when cutting the connecting piece W531b.

The protrusion Wt224b extends in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) and is formed by connecting a pair of end wall portions W223. This allows the sealing seal WSL to be attached to the protrusion Wt224b between both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), excluding the cutting space WS3. Therefore, compared to a case where both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction are not attached to the protrusion Wt224b, it is possible to prevent wrinkles from occurring in the sealing seal WSL and to prevent a space from occurring between the back surface of the flat portion Wt220 and the sealing seal WSL. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL from being easily peeled off from the back surface of the flat portion Wt220.

In addition, by connecting the protrusion Wt224b to the pair of end wall portions W223, the strength of the pair of end wall portions W223 can be ensured.

Note that the protrusions Wt224b may be unconnected to the pair of end wall portions W223 as long as they extend beyond both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (direction of the arrows U-D) toward the pair of end wall portions W223.

In the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), the distance between the protruding tip of the protrusion Wt224b and the protruding tip of the pair of end wall portions W223 is greater than the distance between the front surface of the engagement portion W530a (the surface facing the front wall portion W520) and the front surface of the rear wall portion W510 (the surface facing the front wall portion W520) (see FIG. 1440). This prevents the sealing seal WSL affixed to the protrusion Wt224b from coming into contact with the engagement portion W530a when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover Wt200 and the box base W300, and prevents the sealing seal WSL from being damaged.

In addition, in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), the distance between the protruding tip of the protrusion Wt224b and the protruding tip of the pair of end wall portions W223 may be formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the front surface of the engagement portion W530a (the surface facing the front wall portion W520) and the front surface of the rear wall portion W510 (the surface facing the front wall portion W520).

In the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), the dimensions of the protrusion Wt224b are formed to be approximately the same as the dimensions of the connecting piece W531b of the engagement portion W530a.

Next, the application of the sealing seal WSL to the protrusion Wt224b will be described. The sealing seal WSL is applied along the protruding shape of the protrusion Wt224b, and is applied to a pair of side surfaces and the protruding tip surface that connect the protruding tip surface of the protrusion Wt224b to the flat portion Wt220.

On the other hand, the sealing seal WSL is not affixed to the opposing surface of the protrusion Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 or to the flat portion Wt220 in the cutting space WS3. Therefore, the sealing seal WSL is affixed to the protrusion Wt224b in a manner that surrounds the cutting space WS3.

This makes it easier to place the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) in the cutting space WS3 when cutting the connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 1441). As a result, it is easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool.

In addition, the dimensions of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are formed to be approximately the same as the dimensions of the connecting piece W531b of the engagement portion W530a, so the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) can be positioned in a manner that faces the sealing seal WSL. This allows the marks (damage) formed on the sealing seal WSL to be made larger.

Next, referring to FIG. 1473, the board box Wu100 according to the 45th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1473 is a partial rear view of the board box Wu100 in the 45th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in Figure 1441 (b).

As shown in FIG. 1473, the protective cover Wu500 of the board box Wu100 in the 45th embodiment has a protrusion Wu534. Compared to the protrusion W5534 in the 20th embodiment, the protrusion Wu534 is formed such that the side surface Wu534c of the protrusion Wu534 formed on the protruding tip side (arrow R direction side) of the engagement portion Wu530b is curved on an arc that is convex toward the protruding tip side. The side surface Wu534d of the protrusion Wu534 formed on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) from the protruding tip of the engagement portion Wu530b is formed by linearly connecting the engagement portion Wu530b and the protruding tip of the protrusion Wu534.

As a result, when the engagement portion Wu530b is elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction) to attach the protective cover Wu500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the side surface Wu534c of the projection Wu534 faces the sealing seal WSL. Therefore, even if the side surface Wu534c of the projection Wu534 abuts against the sealing seal WSL due to factors such as the machining accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the box base W5300 or the protective cover Wu500, it is possible to easily prevent the sealing seal WSL from being damaged when the protective cover Wu500 is displaced toward the cover portion W312 (arrow R direction).

In other words, even if the protective cover Wu500 has the protrusion Wu534, damage to the sealing seal WSL is likely to be suppressed when the protective cover Wu500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300.

On the other hand, when the protective cover Wu500 is displaced toward the opposite side to the cover part W312 (the direction of arrow L) while elastically deforming the engagement part Wu530b in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wu500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the connecting part (the protruding tip part of the protrusion Wu534) of the side surfaces Wu534c and Wu534d.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the protective cover Wu500 has a protrusion Wu534 and is configured such that the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged if the protective cover Wu500 is unauthorizedly removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, it is possible to easily prevent the sealing seal WSL from being damaged when attaching the protective cover Wu500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300.

In addition, side Wu534d may be curved concavely toward side Wu534c (the direction of arrow R). This allows the connection between side Wu534c and side Wu534d to be sharp, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL.

Next, referring to FIG. 1474, the board box Wv100 according to the 46th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1474(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wv100 in the 46th embodiment, and Figure 1474(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wv100 along the line MCDLXXIVb-MCDLXXIVb in Figure 1474(a). Note that in Figure 1474(a), the outline of the recess Wv229 and the sealing seal WSL are shown by dashed lines. Also, in the explanation of Figure 1474, Figure 1470 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1474, the box cover Wv200 of the board box Wv100 in the 46th embodiment has a recess Wv229 in addition to the box cover Wq200 in the 41st embodiment.

The recess Wv229 is recessed at a position overlapping the anti-pullout pin Wo580 when viewed from behind in the restricted state. The recess Wv229 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from behind, and the inner diameter of the recess Wv229 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the head Wo581. The sealing seal WSL is affixed to the flat portion Wv220 on the opposite side of the recess Wv229 from the side wall portion W212 (the side in the direction of arrow L). In other words, the sealing seal WSL is not affixed to the recess Wv229.

The protrusion amount of the pair of protrusions Wv534 formed on the protective cover Wv500 (engagement portion Wv530a) is shorter than that of the pair of protrusions Wq534 in the 41st embodiment. In detail, when the retaining pin Wo580 is disposed (engaged) on the protective cover Wv500, the protruding tip portions of the pair of protrusions Wv534 are formed on the opposite side to the box base W300 (the direction of arrow B) from the protruding tip portion of the locking portion Wo583 of the retaining pin Wo580.

Of the pair of protrusions Wv534, the protrusion Wv534 arranged on the left wall W502 side (arrow L direction side) is arranged in a position overlapping the sealing seal WSL in rear view. This allows the protrusion Wv534 arranged on the left wall W502 side to come into contact with the sealing seal WSL when the pair of protrusions Wv534 are displaced (rotated) toward the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side).

In addition, by forming a pair of protrusions Wv534 on the engagement portion Wv530a, the flat portion Wv220 is formed toward the box base W300 (in the direction of arrow F) by the amount of protrusion of the pair of protrusions Wv534. This makes it possible to prevent the pair of protrusions Wv534 from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL when attaching the protective cover Wv500 to the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300, thereby preventing damage to the sealing seal WSL.

Meanwhile, in the restricted state, the anti-slip pin Wo580 is disposed (engaged) in the protective cover Wv500, so that the protruding tip of the locking portion Wo583 of the anti-slip pin Wo580 is disposed closer to the box base W300 (in the direction of the arrow F) than the protruding tips of the pair of projections Wv534. As a result, the protruding tip of the locking portion Wo583 is received in the space formed by the recess Wv229.

As a result, when attaching the protective cover Wv500 to the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300, the engagement portion Wv530a is elastically deformed when the anti-slip pin Wo580 is not disposed (not engaged), and the engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 1471(a)) of the engagement portion Wv530a can engage with the protrusion Wq214b of the box cover Wv200.

In the restricted state, when the anti-slip pin Wo580 is disposed (engaged) in the protective cover Wv500, the locking portion Wo583 abuts against the bottom surface of the recess Wv229, restricting the elastic deformation of the engagement portion Wv530a. This prevents the engagement portion Wv530a from being disengaged from the box cover Wv200.

In addition, when the protective cover Wv500 is displaced toward the opposite side of the side wall W212 (the direction of arrow L) while the engaging portion Wv530a is improperly elastically deformed in order to disengage the engaging hole W533 (see FIG. 1441) of the engaging portion Wv530a from the protrusion Wq214b of the rear wall Wq214a, the locking portion Wo583 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the recess Wv229, thereby restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wv500 toward the opposite side of the side wall W212. This makes it possible to prevent the protective cover Wv500 from being removed from the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300.

Next, the removal of the protective cover Wv500 from the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300 will be described. When the engaging portion Wv530a is removed from the box cover Wv200 with the engaging portion Wv530a separated from the protective cover Wv500, the engagement hole W533 of the engaging portion Wv530a is released from the protrusion Wq214b of the rear wall portion Wq214a, and the retaining pin Wo580 is rotated toward the opposite side (arrow B direction) from the flat portion W320 with the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as the rotation axis in order to prevent the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 from contacting the inner peripheral surface of the recess Wv229. As a result, the pair of protrusions Wv534 are rotated toward the flat portion W320 side (arrow F direction). From this state, by displacing the engagement portion Wv530a toward the opposite side of the side wall portion W212 (the direction of the arrow L), the pair of protrusions Wv534 come into contact with the sealing seal WSL, damaging the sealing seal WSL.

In this way, in this embodiment, by making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL when removing the engagement portion Wv530a from the box cover Wv200, it is possible to make the worker (store clerk) more aware of the risk of unauthorized operation of the main control board (not shown).

Next, referring to FIG. 1475(a), the protective cover Ww500 according to the 47th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1475 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Ww100 in the 47th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-section at part LXXXIIa in Figure 1444 (a).

As shown in FIG. 1475(a), the connecting piece Ww531b of the protective cover Ww500 in the 47th embodiment is molded by two-color molding using different resin materials. In other words, the connecting piece Ww531b is formed from multiple (in this embodiment, two types) parts with different rigidities.

The connecting piece Ww531b is composed of a first connecting piece Ww531b1 and a second connecting piece Ww531b2 formed from a resin material having a different rigidity from that of the first connecting piece Ww531b1, and the first connecting piece Ww531b1 and the second connecting piece Ww531b2 are arranged side by side in the protruding direction (arrow L-R direction) of the engaging portion W530a (see FIG. 1444).

This makes it easier to rotate the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) when cutting the connecting piece Ww531b. In more detail, for example, if the first connecting piece Ww531b1 is molded using a resin material that is harder than the second connecting piece Ww531b2, and the cutting tool is made of pliers or scissors, and the connecting piece Ww531b is sandwiched between a pair of blades to cut the connecting piece Ww531b, the second connecting piece Ww531b2 is more likely to be cut than the first connecting piece Ww531b1.

This makes it easier to cut the second connecting piece Ww531b2 from the first connecting piece Ww531b1, and easier to rotate the blade of the cutting tool. This makes it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool. As a result, it makes it easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that there is a risk of tampering with the main control board (not shown) by a tampering perpetrator.

Next, referring to FIG. 1475(b), a protective cover Wx500 according to the 48th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1475 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wx100 in the 48th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-section at part LXXXIIa in Figure 1444 (a).

As shown in FIG. 1475(b), the connecting piece Wx531b of the protective cover Wx500 in the 48th embodiment is composed of a first connecting piece Wx531b1 and a second connecting piece Wx531b2 whose dimension in the direction from the front wall portion W520 to the rear wall portion W510 (arrow F-B direction, see FIG. 1444) is smaller than that of the first connecting piece Wx531b1.

The first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the second connecting piece Wx531b2 are arranged side by side in the protruding direction (arrow L-R direction) of the engaging portion W530a (see FIG. 1444), and in cross-sectional view, the connecting piece Wx531b is formed in a substantially L-shape.

As a result, when the cutting tool is composed of nippers or scissors and the connecting piece Wx531b is sandwiched between a pair of blades to cut the connecting piece Wx531b, it is easier to cut the second connecting piece Wx531b2 relative to the first connecting piece Wx531b1, and it is easier to rotate the blades of the cutting tool. This makes it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool. As a result, it is easier for the worker (store clerk) to recognize that there is a risk of tampering with the main control board (not shown) by a tampering perpetrator.

Next, referring to FIG. 1475(c), the protective cover Wy500 according to the 49th embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1475 (c) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wy500 of the board box Wy100 in the 49th embodiment. In the explanation of Figure 1475 (c), refer to Figure 1456 (b) as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1475(c), the protective cover Wy500 of the board box Wy100 in the 49th embodiment has a cutting portion Wy550. In addition, the connecting piece We531a is disposed at a predetermined distance from the cutting portion Wy550.

The cutting portion Wy550 is formed so that its width dimension in the direction connecting the pair of connecting pieces W531b (the direction of arrows U-D) becomes smaller as it moves from the engaging portion Wy530a toward the connecting portion W512 (the direction of arrow L). In other words, the cutting portion Wy550 is formed at an acute angle when viewed from the rear. This makes it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.

When the engaging portion Wy530a is connected to the protective cover Wy500, the cutting portion Wy550 is surrounded by the rear wall portion W510 and the connecting portion W512. This prevents the worker (store clerk) from coming into contact with the cutting portion Wy550 and being injured.

The distance between the connecting piece W531a and the cut portion Wy550 is approximately the same as the distance between the front of the flat portion We320 of the box base We300 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325 (see FIG. 1456 (b)).

By separating the engaging portion Wy530a from the protective cover Wy500 and abutting the side of the connecting piece We531a on the cutting portion Wy550 side (arrow D direction side) against the front of the flat portion We320, the cutting portion Wy550 can be received (disposed) in the space formed by the notches We226, We325. As a result, the effort of searching for the notches We226, We325 can be reduced, and the cutting operation of the sealing seal WSL can be easily performed.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1476 to 1489, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as the 50th embodiment. Fig. 1476 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 50th embodiment, Fig. 1477 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 1478 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1476. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1476, the top side will be referred to as the upper (top) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (bottom) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see FIG. 1477, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Fig. 1476, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 2, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 4, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 2 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 2. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1476) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 1477) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached from the back side to the inner frame 4. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 1479) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there is a front door 5 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1476) to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front door 5 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 5c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is disposed on the rear side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front door 5, the upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1476), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 1479). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1477) or when changing the content of the super reach performance.

The front door 5 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around it (for example, in the corners). The light-emitting means are controlled to change their light-emitting state by lighting or blinking depending on the change in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window 5c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1476) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and the stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 1477) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

The ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 1477, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding the balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 65, normal winning ports (through gates) 66, 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1476).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from its front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The construction of the base plate 60 is not limited to resin materials. For example, it may be made of wood with thin plates glued together, and the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 may be formed so that they cannot be seen by the player from the front side.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1476) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 1477.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1476) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin arc member 70 that connects the rails.

The above-mentioned play area is a narrow interpretation, and in a broader sense, the play area may be expressed as the area where the game balls flow down until the profit given to the player by the game balls that flow down is determined. In this sense, the play area is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board 13. For example, the path located upstream of the sensor SE described below is also included in the play area.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 1479) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 1477), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 1477) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

The lottery based on winning will be explained in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is held when a ball wins a prize (a ball that is expected to give the player some kind of benefit (e.g., the payout of prize balls, the execution of a lottery, or the benefit of moving to a more favorable state)) in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, and a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is held when the ball passes through the normal winning slots 66, 67 (or the normal winning slot (through gate) 765 described later). In the lottery for a special symbol held for a ball that wins the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, a judgment is made as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and if a jackpot for a special symbol is determined, the type of jackpot is also determined.

In this pachinko machine 10, in a low probability state of the special symbol, for example, there is a 1 in 320 probability of a special symbol being determined to be a jackpot, and in a high probability state of the special symbol (also called a special symbol probability state), for example, there is a 1 in 60 probability of a special symbol being determined to be a jackpot. For ease of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol that is performed when the game ball that entered the first winning slot 64 is detected by the sensor SE described below is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 1," and the lottery for the special symbol that is performed when the game ball that entered the second winning slot 640 is detected by a downstream sensor (not shown) is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 2."

When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special game state, and the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls (the specified number) have entered), and this operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning port 65a, and a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual. Note that prize balls are paid out when balls enter the specific winning port 65a, and the number of balls paid out will be described later.

There are six types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A," "jackpot B," "jackpot C," "jackpot a," "jackpot b," and "jackpot c." Details will be described later, but the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a after the special game ends are configured to differ depending on the jackpot type.

When a special pattern (first pattern) is drawn, the first pattern display device 37 starts displaying the special pattern, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 11 to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special pattern showing the result of the drawing is displayed stationary. When a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 while the first pattern display device 37 is displaying the variable display, the number of balls entering is reserved for each type of winning slot up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also by the third pattern display device 81. When the variable display by the first pattern display device 37 ends, if there are still reserved balls for the first winning slot 64 (reserved balls for special pattern 1) or the second winning slot 640 (reserved balls for special pattern 2), the next special pattern is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. In addition, if there are both reserved balls with special pattern 1 and reserved balls with special pattern 2 remaining, the lottery based on the reserved balls with special pattern 2 will be held first.

In this embodiment, if there are both reserved balls with special pattern 1 and reserved balls with special pattern 2 remaining, the lottery based on the reserved balls with special pattern 2 is executed preferentially, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the lottery may be executed preferentially in the order in which the special patterns are obtained (balls are scored), or the lottery may be executed alternately between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, or the lottery may be executed simultaneously for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the electric device 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. In other words, if the normal symbol is a winning symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, it becomes easier for the lottery for the special symbol to be drawn.

When the normal pattern (second pattern) is drawn, the second pattern display device 83 starts displaying the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 or 1 second) has elapsed, the normal pattern showing the lottery result is displayed stationary. If a ball passes through the normal winning slots 66, 67, 765 while the second pattern display device 83 is displaying the variable display, the number of passes is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also shown by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. When the variable display by the second pattern display device 83 ends, if there are reserved balls remaining for the normal winning slots 66, 67, 765, the next normal pattern is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery starts.

In this embodiment, as added value after a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transition to a high probability state of special symbols (special symbol probability change) from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a, jackpot b described below), and to a time-saving state of normal symbols after a jackpot game until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed (for example, jackpot C, jackpot c described below).

In this embodiment, when a special symbol high probability state is granted after the end of a special game state, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next big win is achieved. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability state) may be granted from the end of the special game state until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed, and the normal state may be set after 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed.

The number of times the special symbol is drawn to give the special symbol a high probability state (high probability state) is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of times the special symbols that result in the time-saving state of the normal symbols described above are drawn is not limited to 100 times. For example, it could be 50 times, 5 times, or even 0 times.

Here, "high probability state for special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after the end of a jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a special jackpot), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state for special symbols (during a special jackpot) includes a game state in which the probability of a hit with a normal symbol (second symbol) does not change, but in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640. On the other hand, "low probability state for special symbols" refers to a time when the special symbol is not in a special jackpot, and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the jackpot probability is lower than during a special jackpot.

"Normal symbol time-saving state (time-saving state)" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning with a normal symbol does not change, but the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 640. "Normal state" refers to a game state that is not in a special symbol probability change state, nor in a normal symbol time-saving state (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of winning with a normal symbol (second symbol) has changed, and it is not more likely that the ball will enter the second winning slot 640).

During the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed and set to a longer time than in the normal state. When the electric device 640a is in an excited state (excited state, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is placed in the front position and enters the first ball sending path KR1), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a de-excited and withdrawn state (de-excited state, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is placed in the rear position and withdrawn from the first ball sending path KR1). Therefore, during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640. In other words, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be held.

In addition, during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times that the electric device 640a opens when a normal symbol wins may be increased from the normal state.

In addition, during the special pattern's probability of winning or during the normal pattern's time-saving period, the probability of winning the normal pattern (second pattern) may be increased, and at least one of the time during which the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric device 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened or the number of times the electric device 640a is opened may be left unchanged, and only the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) may be increased compared to the normal state.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 1477), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 1479), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

When a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 while the special pattern (first pattern) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the number of balls entering each winning slot is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and also by the third pattern display device 81. In this embodiment, the sensor SE located downstream of the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640 are each configured to reserve balls up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved times is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won at either the sensor SE located downstream of the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R variable jackpot, an 8R variable jackpot, a 4R normal jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a symbol according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and an "8R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 8.

A "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is 4, followed by a transition to a low probability state and a time-saving state for a specified number of variations (e.g., 100 variations), and a "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is 15, followed by a transition to a low probability state and a time-saving state for a specified number of variations (e.g., 100 variations).

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after the jackpot has ended, i.e., when the probability is fluctuating (during a high probability state), in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state.

The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not in a special probability state, and refers to a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than when the probability of winning a jackpot is in a special probability state. The time-saving state (during time-saving state) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is normal, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a changes (or the probability of winning the second pattern (normal pattern) increases) while the probability of winning a jackpot remains the same, making it easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is not in a special probability state, nor is the time-saving state (a state in which neither the probability of winning a jackpot nor the ease of winning the second winning slot 640 has increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

The play area is provided with multiple general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. A variable display unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area.

The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a third pattern in synchronization with the display change in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a win (initial win) in either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640; a second pattern display device 83 consisting of an LED that displays a second pattern in synchronization with a ball passing through the normal winning port (through gate) 66, 67; and a second pattern reserved lamp 84 that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball has passed through the normal winning port 66, 67 by lighting it up.

In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be seen through an opening in the center of this center frame 86.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 1479), so that, for example, three pattern rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, while the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B display the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1479). Note that the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols numbered "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1479), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols line up (a variable display that finally stops with the same main symbols lined up) is performed, and the jackpot occurs (the transition to the special game state begins) after the variable display ends. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up (a variable display that finally stops with the symbols not lined up) is performed.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a regular jackpot, a variable display will be displayed in which the main symbols with the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" will line up. On the other hand, if the result is a special jackpot, a variable display will be displayed in which the main symbols with any of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9", including odd numbers, will line up. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, a variable display will be displayed in which the main symbols with the same numbers do not line up.

Next, we will explain the display (right hit navigation) that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and encourages the player to aim for the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 and shoot the ball.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the special symbol is in a high probability state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric device 640a is more likely to guide the game ball, so that the ball can be more easily entered into the second winning hole 640 by shooting the ball to the right side of the game board 13 where the electric device 640a is located (hitting to the right). In addition, although details will be described later, when a jackpot is awarded by a lottery for a special symbol (lottery for special symbol 2) based on a ball entering the second winning hole 640, the jackpot is more likely to be awarded with the maximum number of prize balls (jackpot a, b, c) compared to when a jackpot is awarded by a lottery for a special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1) based on a ball entering the first winning hole 64.

Therefore, in the special symbol probability state that is granted after the end of a jackpot, or in the normal symbol time-saving state, hitting to the right is advantageous for the player. In other words, even if the special symbol probability state or normal symbol time-saving state is set, it is difficult for the player to get the ball into the second winning hole 640 unless the player hits to the right, and the player will not be able to fully enjoy the benefits of the special symbol probability state or the normal symbol time-saving state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a specific image (right-hit navigation) is displayed when the special symbol is in a high probability state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, ensuring that the player can obtain the benefits of entering the special symbol's high probability state or the normal symbol's time-saving state.

In the right-hit navigation, the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Aim to the right!!" along with three right-pointing arrows above and below the words. By displaying these words and arrows, the player is made to feel that he or she should shoot the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This allows the player to reliably obtain the benefits of entering the special symbol's high probability state and the normal symbol's time-saving state.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. This warning image is an image (right hit warning image) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the player is making a right hit even though it is not the period in which the player should shoot the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (to make a right hit). More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right hit in the normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not in a special bonus state, nor in a normal symbol time-saving state).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the electric device 640a is controlled so that it is difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in the normal state (even if a right hit is made, it is difficult to make the ball enter the second winning hole 640). For this reason, if a right hit is made in the normal state, there are fewer opportunities to win a special pattern compared to when a left hit is made to shoot the ball toward the first winning hole 64. In other words, if a right hit is made in the normal state, it is difficult to win a jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the right hit warning image is displayed to encourage a left hit, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from incurring a loss.

If it is determined that the player is hitting with the right hand under normal conditions, the third symbol display device 81 will display the words "Warning" and "Play with your left hand!!" By displaying these words, the player can be made aware that they should not hit with the right hand (they should hit with the left hand). Also, by checking for the presence or absence of a right hand warning screen, the hall staff can easily determine whether or not a player is playing in an irregular way by hitting with the right hand under normal conditions.

In this embodiment, the method for determining whether or not a right-handed hit is made is to determine whether or not the ball has entered the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 1477) into which the ball can flow if a right-handed hit is made.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal winning port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 1477) in the normal state, a right-hit warning image is displayed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when it is detected that a ball has entered (entered) the specific winning port 65a in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), it may be determined that an illegal game (not limited to a right-hit game, but including, for example, a game mode in which a load is applied to the variable winning device 65 to open the specific winning port 65a and the game ball is forcibly entered) is being played, and a right-hit warning image is displayed. This allows the hall staff to easily determine whether or not there is illegal play simply by checking whether or not there is a right-hit warning image.

In addition, for example, when it is detected that a ball has entered the specific winning port 65a in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), a signal indicating that cheating is occurring may be output to the hall computer. This allows the operator of the hall computer to easily determine whether or not cheating is likely to be occurring and the machine number (location) of the pachinko machine 10 where the cheating is occurring.

For example, the right-side flow path of the variable display unit 80 may be narrowed to create an area through which the game ball must pass, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball may be disposed in that area. In this case, it may be determined that a right-side hit is being performed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

In addition, for example, a detection sensor may be provided that can detect the displacement of a movable member (e.g., a windmill) that is located to the left of the top position of the variable display unit 80 (corresponding to the center position in the left-right direction in FIG. 1477). In this case, when a game ball is being shot, it can be determined that a right shot is being performed based on the fact that no displacement of the movable member is detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.

Next, we will explain the warning image that is displayed when an abnormality is detected in the variable winning device 65. Here, an abnormality in the variable winning device 65 is, for example, when a ball is detected entering a specific winning hole 65a even though the special game state (jackpot state) is not in effect.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device 65, the word "Warning" is displayed in large letters in the center of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the words "Please call a gate error attendant" are displayed below that. These letters enable the player to determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and so the player can promptly request repairs from the hall staff, etc.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. If the result of the lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the result of the lottery is a miss, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display (change time) is set to be shorter during the special symbol's probability change or during the normal symbol's time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and during the normal symbol's time-saving mode, the second symbol's change display is performed in a short time, so more normal symbols (second symbols) can be drawn than during the normal state. This increases the chances of winning with the normal symbol, giving the player more opportunities to open the electric device 640a of the second winning slot 640. Therefore, during the special symbol's probability change and during the normal symbol's time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640.

Note that if the state is made such that it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640 during a special symbol probability change or during a normal symbol time-saving period, such as by increasing the probability of winning or by increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special symbol probability change or during a normal symbol time-saving period than during the normal state, the probability of a normal symbol winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one normal symbol winning may be constant regardless of the game state.

Normal winning ports (through gates) 66, 67 are attached to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow some of the balls that flow down the game board out of the balls that are shot onto the game board to pass through. In addition, normal winning port (through gate) 765 is arranged so that it can detect game balls that flow down the internal flow path of the path configuration device 700.

When the ball passes through the normal winning gate (through gate) 66, 67, 765, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. After the lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery result is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display, and if the lottery result is a miss, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and is also displayed by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. There are four second pattern reserved lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The change in the second pattern may be displayed by switching on and off a number of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in this embodiment, or may be displayed using a part of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern hold lamp 84 may be lit by a part of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be reserved for passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or to five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 attached to the base plate 60 is not limited to two, but may be one, or any other number (e.g., three or more).

The installation positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 are not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, either the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or above or below the variable display unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserved lamp 84 may not be illuminated.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a sensor SE serving as a first winning hole switch provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1479), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 640, into which a ball can enter, is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1479), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, the sensor SE as the first winning port switch or the second winning port switch (each switch is arranged so that the flowing balls do not pass through consecutively) turns on, and five balls are paid out as prize balls (prize ball ports).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be different, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be five. Also, the number of prize balls and the size relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be slidable, and normally the electric device 640a is in a non-energized state (retracted state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the electric device 640a is in an excited state (entering state), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the special symbol's probability of winning and during the normal symbol's time-saving period, the probability of winning is higher than during the normal state, and the time it takes for the normal symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol may be made more likely to be displayed in the normal symbol's change display. In other words, the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special symbol's probability of winning and during the normal symbol's time-saving period, the time for which the electric device 640a is open may be made longer than during the normal state.

During the special symbol probability change and during the normal symbol time reduction, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win a prize in the second prize winning slot 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first prize winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second prize winning slot 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, a, b, c) that can provide the maximum profit (number of winning balls in the special game state) as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the electric device 640a that the second winning slot 640 has, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a prize.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is often in a non-energized state (retracted state), making it difficult to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by shooting the ball toward the first winning slot 64, which does not have the electric device 640a, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "left shot") and having the ball win at the first winning slot 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the big win lottery.

On the other hand, during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the electric device 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an excited state (entry state) by passing the ball through the normal winning port (through gate) 66, 67, 765, making it easier to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the side where the electric device 640a is located so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the normal winning port (through gate) 67 to open the electric device 640a and aiming for a jackpot by winning at the second winning port 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment allows the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This allows the player to have more fun playing the game because it allows them to change the way they hit the ball.

A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is awarded in a lottery for a special symbol resulting from winning in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit up to show the jackpot stopping symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. In addition, the stopping symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning slot 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls (prescribed number) have won).

The opening and closing of this special winning port 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual (in this embodiment, 15 balls based on the winning of one ball) as an added gaming value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening plate to open and close in the forward and backward directions. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to retract the opening plate to the rear, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning opening 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, so that a game state can be formed as a special game state. Also, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, on the left or right side or upper side of the variable display unit 80.

In the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, there is a space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 (see Figure 1476) in the front frame 14.

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first outlet 71 is disposed below the first winning hole 64.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 1478, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 1479). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 1479). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 1479. FIG. 1479 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 1478). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 1478) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

The overall configuration of the path configuration device 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 1480 to Fig. 1482. Fig. 1480 is an exploded front perspective view of the path configuration device 700, Fig. 1481 is a partially enlarged front view of the path configuration device 700, and Fig. 1482(a) and Fig. 1482(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the path configuration device 700 taken along line MCDLXXXIIa-MCDLXXXIIa in Fig. 1481.

In FIG. 1481, the inner circumferential surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the outer shape of the recovery hole 752 are shown by dashed lines. Also, FIG. 1482(a) shows a retracted state in which the electric device 640a is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1 described below, and FIG. 1482(b) shows an advanced state in which the electric device 640a is advanced into the first ball throwing path KR1.

As shown in FIG. 1480, the path configuration device 700 is disposed below the center frame 86 of the game board 13 and is formed mainly with a front side forming section 710 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60, and a rear side forming section 720 arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60.

The front side forming section 710 is formed mainly by comprising a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side on both the left and right sides of the winning member 730.

The rear side forming section 720 is formed mainly by comprising an interposed member 750 attached to the rear side of the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the rear side of the interposed member 750, and an electric accessory 640a to which a solenoid 640s is fixedly disposed on the interposed member 750.

The winning member 730 is arranged on the front of the base plate 60, and is formed thinly to cover the through hole 60a and attached to the base plate 60. The covering plate 711 has an upper ball passing hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left-right center of the covering plate 711, a lower ball passing hole 714 drilled in the front-rear direction below the upper ball passing hole 713, a first winning opening 64 located at the top left-right center of the covering plate 711, a second winning opening 640 located below the first winning opening 64 (below the lower ball passing hole 714), through holes 731 located on both left-right sides and formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the through holes 7 It is mainly composed of a lower through hole 732 located below 31 and formed through in the front-rear direction, a first ball throwing section 734 having a ball passing hole 734a formed through in the front-rear direction to the left of the right lower through hole 732, a through hole 735 formed through in the front-rear direction as a long hole extending from the right end of the lower edge of the first ball throwing section 734 in the upper right direction, a second ball throwing section 736 having a ball passing hole 736a formed through in the front-rear direction to the right of the right lower through hole 732, and a third ball throwing section 737 formed symmetrically to the first ball throwing section 734 with respect to the upper ball passing hole 713.

The through hole 731 is a member into which the upper protrusion 741 of the bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with an opening slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protrusion 741 when viewed from the back.

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 disposed on the rear side, and is formed at a position opposite the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750. The lower insertion hole 732 is also opened in a generally D-shape when viewed from the front, with the lower side curved.

A sensor SE that detects the passage of a ball is disposed on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is a member in which a through hole with a diameter slightly larger than that of the ball is formed on one side thereof, and the passage of the ball can be detected when the ball passes through the through hole. The sensor SE is disposed so that the axis of the through hole is positioned coaxially with the arc axis on the underside of the lower insertion hole 732. This allows the opening direction of the through hole to be inclined slightly downward as it approaches the back surface, preventing a ball passing through the sensor SE's through hole from remaining inside the through hole.

The first ball sending section 734 is equipped with a ball passing hole 734a arranged at a position connected to the upstream end of the first inclined groove 755 of the interposed member 750, a protruding edge portion 734b where the edge portion of the U-shape of the ball passing hole 734a when viewed from the front is protruding toward the front side, and a downstream ball sending section 734c which is protruding toward the ball path side at the downstream part of the protruding edge portion 734b and has a protruding tip that is inclined toward the rear side so that the ball flowing down can be sent to the rear side.

The through hole 735 is formed in a shape that allows the movable plate member 641 to be inserted in the front-rear direction. In other words, the through hole 735 is formed in a shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the right guide portion 643 and the left guide portion 645 of the movable plate member 641 and the connecting portion that connects them when viewed from the front.

As a result, when the movable plate member 641 is in the retracted state, the front end of the movable plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735, and when the movable plate member 641 is in the advanced state, the rear end side of the movable plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735, thereby stabilizing the position of the movable plate member 641.

The second ball sending section 736 is equipped with a ball passing hole 736a arranged at a position connected to the upstream end of the second inclined groove 757 of the interposed member 750, a protruding edge portion 736b where the edge portion of the U-shape of the ball passing hole 736a when viewed from the front is protruding toward the front side, and a downstream ball sending section 736c which is protruding toward the ball path side at the downstream part of the protruding edge portion 736b and has a protruding tip that is inclined toward the rear side so that the ball flowing down can be sent to the rear side.

The third ball throwing section 737 is formed symmetrically to the first ball throwing section 734, but is not configured to guide the game ball with the electric device 640a. Its shape allows balls to enter from the left, reducing the frequency of balls entering. The third ball throwing section 737 has the same function as the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 1477). That is, when a ball enters, 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Since balls rarely enter the third ball throwing section 737, the number of prize balls is set to a maximum (15) in order to maximize the player's profits in the event that a ball does enter.

The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the above-mentioned winning member 730, and two are disposed symmetrically at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see Figure 1477) when viewed from the front, and its external shape is formed to be roughly symmetrical.

In addition, the bending member 740 is positioned, when viewed from the front, at a position where a gap large enough for a ball to pass through is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 1477) that forms the play area. This prevents balls flowing down the play area below the bending member 740 from being pinched between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and remaining in the play area.

The bending member 740 is formed from a plate-like body that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and is formed with an upper protrusion 741 that protrudes from its back surface, a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes below the upper protrusion 741, and an opening 744 that is formed between the opposing upper protrusion 741 and lower protrusion 743.

The upper protrusion 741 is formed in a roughly U-shape that is open at the bottom when viewed from behind, and its outer shape is set to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. This allows the upper protrusion 741 to be inserted into the through hole 731 when placing the bending member 740 on the winning member 730. Therefore, when placing the bending member 740 on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted and positioned, simplifying the assembly process.

The lower protrusion 743 is formed below the upper protrusion 741 and is formed in a generally U-shape when viewed from the rear, with the upper side open. In other words, when viewed from the rear, the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 are formed such that their open portions face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protrusion 743 is a member for forming a path (hereinafter referred to as the "second ball sending path KR2") for sending the ball sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, and is formed in a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-to-rear direction.

The protruding distance of the lower protrusion 743 toward the rear side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball. In addition, the bending member 740 is placed on the winning member 730 with the protruding tip surface of the lower protrusion 743 abutting the winning member 730. Thus, the distance dimension between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and a ball throwing path (hereinafter referred to as the "first ball throwing path KR1") along which the ball is thrown vertically is formed between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protrusion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protrusion 743. The guide portion 742 protrudes in a generally U-shape with an open back side in a side view.

The guide portion 742 is a protruding wall that sends the ball vertically from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball sending path KR1) and then sends it to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, and the vertical height of the lower inner edge is formed slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 located on the back surface.

The guide portion 742 is formed along the center line in the left-right direction of the through-hole 731 located on the rear side when viewed from the front. This allows the ball to be easily shifted left-right as it comes into contact with the guide portion 742 and is guided (folded back toward the rear side).

The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the opposing upper protrusion 741 and lower protrusion 743, and is formed on both the left and right sides in rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a roughly U-shape in side view with the rear side open.

The upper end of the rear end of the opening 744 is set at approximately the same vertical height as the tip side of the guide portion 742 at the same front-to-rear position, and the lower end of the rear end is set at approximately the same vertical height as the lower surface of the right guide portion 643 of the moving plate member 641. The opening 744 is formed by opening into the left and right sides of the connection portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the fourth ball throwing path KR4.

The allocating member 760 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape with the front side open. The allocating member 760 is bent at approximately the center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to incline downward as it moves from the approximately center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Furthermore, both ends of the allocating member 760 in the left-right direction are set in positions facing the through holes 731 of the above-mentioned winning member 730.

The distribution member 760 is mainly comprised of a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to both the left and right, a seesaw member 762 that is positioned in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, a ball sending port 763 formed above the seesaw member 762, a regulating wall portion 764 for regulating the rotation of the seesaw member 762, and a normal winning port (through gate) 765 that is arranged in a position that allows the ball guided to the right-side inclined surface 761 to pass through.

The pair of inclined surfaces 761 are inclined surfaces that extend in opposite directions, and are formed so that the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane is symmetrical. In this embodiment, an area with a slightly steeper inclination angle is provided on the upstream side, and an area with a gentler inclination angle downstream is formed at an inclination angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane.

The ball throwing port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed in a position opposite the first winning port 64 of the winning member 730. As a result, when the distribution member 760 is disposed on the intervening member 750 described later, a space can be formed between the ball throwing port 763 and the intervening member 750.

The space is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the ball (i.e., a space through which the ball can pass), and is connected to the internal space of the first winning opening 64 of the winning member 730 via a through hole 60b drilled in the base plate 60. This allows the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to be sent into the space between the ball sending opening 763 and the interposed member 750, and the ball can be sent inside that space.

The shaft portion 762b is a support for rotating the seesaw member 762 around its axis, and is formed in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the inner side of the ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is arranged to be rotatable around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusions 762a are protrusions for distributing the balls alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the balls are thrown from the space between the above-mentioned ball throwing port 763 and the interposed member 750, and the balls are thrown in the direction opposite to the left and right direction of the tip of the central protrusion 762a. The protrusions 762a protruding from both ends are members that regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and displace the direction of the tip of the central protrusion 762a (rotate the seesaw member 762) due to the weight applied when the ball passes through, and the rotation of the seesaw member 762 is regulated by the contact of the tip surface of the protrusion 762a with the regulating wall portion 764.

On the other hand, when a ball is guided by the central protrusion 762a, the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the regulating wall portion 764 collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. This causes the protrusion 762a on the opposite side to be displaced upward, and the tip of the downwardly displaced protrusion 762a comes into contact with the regulating wall portion 764, restricting its displacement.

The inclined surface 761 is the rolling surface of the path (hereinafter referred to as the "third ball sending path KR3") along which the ball sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 described above rolls and is sent, and is formed with a downward incline toward the outside from the center position in the left-right direction of the sorting member 760. As a result, the ball sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760 rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent (rolled) to the downward end of the inclined surface 761.

The downward end of the inclined surface 761 is formed with an inclination toward the interposed member 750 so that the rear side surface becomes thicker toward the front as it approaches the end. This allows a ball that rolls along the inclined surface 761 and is sent to the end to be sent to the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 750 that is disposed in front of the sorting member 760.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is disposed between the intervening member 750 and the allocating member 760, and is fixedly positioned on the inside by connecting and fixing the intervening member 750 and the allocating member 760.

The layout of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is designed so that the inner surface of the ball passage hole of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, which is the surface that runs along the inclined surface 761, is flush with the upper surface of the inclined surface 761.

This minimizes the resistance experienced by the ball as it passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, and makes it possible to equalize the flow speed of the ball flowing down the right-hand inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is located, and the ball flowing down the left-hand inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is not located.

The function of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is the same as the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 described above. In other words, the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 functions as a detection opening through which a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed when a ball passes through.

In addition, if a ball passes through the normal winning gate (through gate) 765 while the variable display is being performed on the second pattern display device 83, the number of times it has passed through is reserved up to a maximum of four times together with the number of times it has passed through the normal winning gates (through gates) 66, 67, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also indicated by the second pattern reserved lamp 84.

The maximum number of balls that can be reserved for passing through the normal winning gates (through gates) 66, 67, and 765 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. If the result of the lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the result of the lottery is a miss, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed.

When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the normal winning gates (through gates) 66, 67, and 765, a lottery is held for the next normal symbol, and the variable display according to the lottery is started.

The intermediate member 750 is a member interposed between the bending member 740 and the distribution member 760, and is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a communication hole 751 penetrating in the front-back direction on both the left and right sides, a recovery hole 752 opened below the communication hole 751, a support recess 753 penetrating in the front-back direction between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 in a left-right elongated shape, a first inclined groove 755 in a straight line that slopes downward toward the left side when viewed from the front, with the downstream end at the left-right center position below the first inclined groove 755, a second inclined groove 757 in a straight line that slopes downward toward the left side when viewed from the front, with the downstream end at the left-right center position below the first inclined groove 755, and a second recovery hole 758 located below the second inclined groove 757.

The communication holes 751 are formed on the front side of both the left and right ends of the distribution member 760, and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at both the left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication holes 751. Therefore, a path (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth ball sending path KR4") can be formed that sends the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above through the communication holes 751 to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730.

As described above, the recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the rear side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. In other words, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the rear side of the sensor SE, and balls that pass through the sensor SE are sent to the opening of the recovery hole 752. The recovery hole 752 is connected to a ball circulating device installed in the store, and the balls recovered in the recovery hole 752 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out again from the ball launching unit 112a as game balls.

The support recess 753 is a recessed groove formed to ensure sufficient space for the right guide portion 643 of the moving plate member 641 to move in the front-rear direction. The lower bottom surface of the support recess 753, which faces the lower surface of the right guide portion 643 in the vertical direction, is formed in a planar shape that is horizontal in the left-right direction. In addition, the upper top surface of the support recess 753, which faces the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 in the vertical direction, is formed in a planar shape with the same inclination angle as the inclined surface 643a.

That is, the support recess 753 is recessed from the left side to the right side, and is formed in a wedge shape that is wider on the left side and narrower on the right side, and functionally has a vertical width (slightly larger wedge shape) that is slightly larger than the vertical width of the right guide portion 643 when viewed from the front.

As a result, when the movable plate member 641 is used and slid forward and backward, the right guide portion 643 is guided along the inside of the support recess 753, allowing for smooth movement, and when the right guide portion 643 enters the first ball sending path KR1 to receive a ball that has flowed down, the lower surface of the support recess 753 can support the right guide portion 643 from below. In other words, the support recess 753 provides the effect of smoothing the movement of the movable plate member 641 and the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the movable plate member 641.

The first inclined groove 755 is disposed at a position where its upstream end communicates with the ball passing hole 734a, and is configured in such a way that a ball that reaches its downstream end can be sent to the front side through the upper ball passing hole 713 of the front side forming part 710.

The second inclined groove 757 is disposed at a position where its upstream end communicates with the ball passing hole 736a, and is configured in such a way that a ball that reaches its downstream end can be sent to the front side through the lower ball passing hole 714 of the front side forming part 710.

In this embodiment, the first inclined groove 755 and the second inclined groove 757 are formed in a linear groove shape, and the straight lines along which each groove runs are parallel to each other.

The second collection hole 758 is an opening through which balls that enter the second winning hole 640 are sent, and is located upstream of the second winning hole switch (not shown). The second collection hole 758 is connected to a ball circulating device installed in the store, and the balls collected in the second collection hole 758 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out again from the ball launching unit 112a as game balls.

The upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 are aligned in a straight line along the vertical direction, and the second winning hole 640 is located below the lower ball passing hole 714 on the same straight line (see Figure 1481).

Therefore, a ball sent to the front side through the upper ball passing hole 713 passes through the front side of the lower ball passing hole 714 and enters the second winning hole 640. In addition, a ball sent to the front side through the lower ball passing hole 714 merges with the flow path of the ball sent to the front side from the upper ball passing hole 713 and enters the second winning hole 640.

At the confluence point of the ball flow paths, the ball flows down from the upper ball passing hole 713 in a vertical direction, which allows the ball to fall at a high speed at the confluence point. Therefore, even if the balls guided from the upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 reach the confluence point at the same time, the ball flowing down from the upper ball passing hole 713 can pass downwards by its momentum, making it easy to avoid ball clogging.

The wall portion 714a extending from the left and right edges of the lower ball passage hole 714 to the front side makes it easier to prevent the ball from deviating to the left or right from the joining position. The wall portion 714a also acts to prevent balls from entering the second winning hole 640 from the outside left or right.

The wall portion 713a extending from the left and right edges and the upper edge of the upper ball passing hole 713 to the front side prevents a ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 from colliding with a ball immediately after it is sent to the front side from the upper ball passing hole 713. The wall portion 713a also acts to prevent a ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 from flowing down toward the second winning opening 640.

The electric device 640a includes a solenoid 640s fixed to the intermediate member 750, and a movable plate member 641 that is interlockingly connected to the solenoid 640s and slides forward and backward when driven by the solenoid 640s.

The movable plate member 641 includes a transmission plate portion 642 that is a plate-shaped portion to which the driving force of the solenoid 640s is transmitted and that extends in the vertical direction, a left guide portion 645 that is disposed at the front end of the transmission plate portion 642 and protrudes toward the front side, and a right guide portion 643 that extends to the right of the left guide portion 645.

The right guide portion 643 has an upper surface that forms the rolling surface of the ball and is formed as an inclined surface 643a that slopes downward toward the right, and is disposed between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 when viewed from the front.

The left guide portion 645 is formed with an inclined surface 645a whose upper surface, which is the ball rolling surface, slopes downward toward the left side, and is disposed so as to connect the bending member 740 and the first ball throwing portion 734 when viewed from the front. The upper surface of the downstream end of the inclined surface 645a is positioned so as to be flush with the upper surface of the lower end of the protruding edge portion 734b of the first ball throwing portion 734.

The protruding edge 734b of the first ball throwing section 734 is not dish-shaped with an open top, but has a shape with a lid on the top with the open side facing to the right, so that the left guide section 645 can smoothly receive rolling balls while preventing balls that bounce off the left guide section 645 or balls that flow down a path that reaches the first ball throwing section 734 from above from flying into the ball passage hole 734a. The protruding lid section 734b may also be formed into a dish shape to allow balls to fly in from above.

Even if the ball lands on the left guide section 645, it is difficult for it to enter the first ball sending section 734 until the bounce stops. For this reason, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that reduces the bounce at the left guide section 645.

For example, the momentum of the ball's downward flow can be slowed down in advance by closely arranging nails above the left guide section 645 that can collide with the ball, or by arranging multiple deceleration protrusions protruding from the front side of the covering plate section 711. Also, a highly cushioned sheet material can be attached to the inclined surface 645a to prevent the ball from bouncing.

When the solenoid 640s is in a non-energized state, the moving plate member 641 is in a retracted state where it retreats from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1482(a)), and when the solenoid 640s is in an excited state (a state in which a driving force is being generated), the moving plate member 641 is in an entering state where it enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1482(b)).

The path configuration device 700 configured as above sends a game ball as follows. A ball entering from the first winning opening 64 is sent to the distribution member 760 and sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760. When the ball sent on the third ball sending path KR3 reaches the end of the third ball sending path KR3, it is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the intervening member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball sent on the fourth ball sending path KR4 is sent to the first ball sending path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball sent on the first ball sending path KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and sent to the second ball sending path KR2. The ball sent along the second ball sending path KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, is sent to the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750, and passes through the inside of the sensor SE.

The ball sent from the fourth ball sending path KR4 to the first ball sending path KR1 flows down toward the front side of the base plate 60, and the ball appears to be approaching the player from the player's point of view. This clarifies the difference in the flow pattern between the ball and other game balls flowing downward in the game area, thereby enhancing the presence of the ball sent from the fourth ball sending path KR4 to the first ball sending path KR1.

Next, the setting of the ball flow pattern will be described with reference to Fig. 1483 and Fig. 1484. Fig. 1483(a), Fig. 1483(b), Fig. 1484(a) and Fig. 1484(b) are partial front views of the path configuration device 700 in the range MCDLXXXIIIa of Fig. 1481.

Figures 1483(a), 1483(b), 1484(a) and 1484(b) show the flow patterns of three balls P1 to P3 that enter the first winning hole 64 in succession with no gap between them, shown in a time series at 0.5 second intervals.

That is, FIG. 1483(b) is illustrated as the state 0.5 seconds after the state of FIG. 1483(a), FIG. 1484(a) is illustrated as the state 0.5 seconds after the state of FIG. 1483(b), and FIG. 1484(b) is illustrated as the state 0.5 seconds after the state of FIG. 1484(a). Note that, as an example, FIG. 1483(a) illustrates a state in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a faces leftward.

As shown in FIG. 1483(a), when the ball P1 is guided by the central protrusion 762a, the guided ball P1 collides with one of the protrusions 762a at both ends and is pushed downward. This displaces the protrusion 762a on the opposite side upward, and the tip of the downwardly displaced protrusion 762a abuts against the regulating wall portion 764, regulating its displacement (see FIG. 1483(b)).

In this state, ball P1, which has pushed down the seesaw member 762, flows down to the right, and at the same time the next ball P2 is guided to the central protrusion 762a. At this time, at the same time that ball P2 reaches the central protrusion 762a, ball P1, which previously pushed down the seesaw member 762, passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (see FIG. 1483 (b)).

Ball P2 is caused to flow down to the left by the seesaw member 762, while the next ball P3 is guided to the central protrusion 762a. At this time, just as ball P3 reaches the central protrusion 762a, ball P1 is positioned below the right-side guide portion 643 (see FIG. 1484(a)). After that, ball P3 is caused to flow down to the right by the seesaw member 762 (see FIG. 1484(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the position of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is determined in relation to the position of the electric device 640a. In other words, it is designed so that the next ball P3 does not reach the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 between the time when ball P1 passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the time when ball P3 is positioned below the right guide section 643.

When the passage of a ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the operation of the electric device 640a is executed based on a preset operation pattern. The operation of the electric device 640a is not interrupted in the middle of the operation pattern. Even if the passage of a ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 while the operation of the electric device 640a based on the operation pattern is continuing, the execution of the operation of the electric device 640a due to the detection is put on hold until the operation of the electric device 640a based on the currently executed operation pattern is completed.

Therefore, even if the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set so that it can affect the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 based on the ball's flow time, if the execution of the operation of the electric device 640a is put on hold, the effect on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 may be unexpected.

In contrast, in this embodiment, on the premise that the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set based on the time width until the ball reaches the right guide section 643, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the operation of the electric device 640a continues due to the previous ball P1 being detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until the next ball P3 is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (the operation of the electric device 640a ends in advance).

Therefore, when the passage of a ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the operation of the electric device 640a can be immediately executed based on a preset operation pattern without being suspended. This reduces the possibility that the impact on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 will be unexpected.

Figures 1485(a), 1485(b), 1486(a) and 1486(b) are partial front views of the path configuration device 700 in the range MCDLXXXIIIa of Figure 1481. Figures 1485(a) and 1485(b) and Figures 1486(a) and 1486(b) show different examples of how a ball flows down the right-side inclined surface 761 in chronological order.

That is, FIG. 1485(a) shows the state in which the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, and FIG. 1485(b) shows the state in which the moving plate member 641 is maintained in a retracted state (see FIG. 1482(a)) in which it is retracted from the first ball sending path KR1 as the ball passes through, and the ball is guided to the recovery hole 752.

In addition, Figure 1486(a) shows the state in which the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (a state similar to Figure 1485(a)), and Figure 1486(b) shows the state in which the moving plate member 641 is in an entry state in which it enters the first ball throwing path KR1 just before the ball passes through (see Figure 1482(b)), and the ball is guided toward the second ball throwing section 736.

In addition, in Figure 1486 (b), dots are drawn on the movable plate member 641 to show diagrammatically that the movable plate member 641 is sliding toward the front side and is in a state in which it is not allowing the ball to pass through the front side.

When the solenoid 640s is in a non-excited state, the moving plate member 641 is in a retreat state where it retreats from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1482(a)), and when the solenoid 640s is in an excited state (when a driving force is being generated), the moving plate member 641 is in an entry state where it enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1482(b)). Therefore, when in the non-excited state, a ball that reaches the top surface of the moving plate member 641 in a front view passes through the front side of the moving plate member 641 and flows downward, while when in the excited state, a ball that reaches the top surface of the moving plate member 641 in a front view rolls on the inclined surface 643a or inclined surface 645a of the moving plate member 641 and flows downward in the left-right direction.

For example, the ball flows down along the arrow shown in FIG. 1486(b). More specifically, when the moving plate member 641 is in an excited state, the ball that reaches the first ball throwing path KR1 rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 643a, passes through the opening 744, and then falls to be received by the second ball throwing section 736.

When the moving plate member 641 is in an excited state, a ball attempting to flow down between the right-side bending member 740 and the first ball sending section 734 rolls along the upper surface of the inclined surface 645a, is guided to the ball passing hole 734a, and enters the second winning hole 640.

Figure 1487 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the range MCDLXXXVII of Figure 1477. Figure 1487 shows the solenoid 640s in an excited state and the moving plate member 641 in an advanced state.

As mentioned above, the functions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765 are the same, so the electric device 640a will operate not only when the ball that entered the path configuration device 700 passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, but also when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 when playing the right-hand game described above.

In this case, more balls released in right-handed play will reach the ceiling surface of the right-side bending member 740 than will be guided to the first winning opening 64 (approximately 10 times as many), so when the moving plate member 641 is in the entered state, the balls are more likely to reach the left guide portion 645 of the electric device 640a than the right guide portion 643.

If the solenoid 640s remains energized until the ball reaches the first ball throwing section 734, it will enter the second winning hole 640 after reaching the left guide section 645. Even if the solenoid 640s is switched to a de-energized state before the ball reaches the first ball throwing section 734, the ball will simply flow directly below it and will not be guided to the recovery hole 752. In other words, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that reaches the left guide section 645 wins the lottery for special pattern 1.

A ball that reaches the left guide section 645 in the approaching state can be received by the first ball throwing section 734 in approximately 1.0 second, regardless of the landing position. On the other hand, if the moving plate member 641 changes to the retracted state in a very short time, such as 0.5 seconds, the ball may be prevented from entering the first ball throwing section 734 even if it lands near the left end of the left guide section 645 in the approaching state.

Therefore, when a ball that does not enter the first winning opening 64 but flows down reaches the left guide section 645, which is activated and put into an entry state as a result of a lottery based on the detection of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, at the right time, whether the ball is accepted by the first ball sending section 734 depends on the operating state of the electric device 640a.

In particular, in the normal operating pattern (the fourth operating pattern described below), the period during which the moving plate member 641 is in the entered state is shorter than 0.5 seconds, so the probability that the ball will be received by the first ball sending section 734 is extremely low.

When a ball enters the first winning opening 64, if the moving plate member 641 is in the advanced state when the ball reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, the ball will be guided by the right guide portion 643 and will ultimately enter the second winning opening 640, and will not pass through the sensor SE (see FIG. 1482 (b)), preventing the ball from winning the lottery for special pattern 1. On the other hand, if the moving plate member 641 is in the retracted state when the ball reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, the ball will be guided to the second ball throwing path KR2 and will pass through the sensor SE, resulting in the ball winning the lottery for special pattern 1.

In this way, with the electric device 640a of this embodiment, the chances of the ball winning the lottery for special pattern 1 (the chances of winning the lottery for special pattern 2) can be varied depending on whether the ball flows down a path that can reach the right guide section 643 (the path after entering the first winning opening 64) or a path that can reach the left guide section 645.

As mentioned above, the balls arrive at the right guide section 643 at intervals, but the left guide section 645 does not have intervals due to the action of the seesaw member 762, so multiple balls that flow down the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 side can arrive at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable to make the left guide section 645 stronger than the right guide section 643.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the left guide portion 645 is disposed on the transmission plate portion 642 (see FIG. 1480). That is, by disposing the left guide portion 645 on the transmission plate portion 642, which is closer to the solenoid 640s (upstream side of the drive force transmission path), changes in the posture of the left guide portion 645 are suppressed. As a result, even if multiple balls are placed on the left guide portion 645 and weight is applied to it, it is possible to avoid an excessive change in posture of the left guide portion 645 and an increase in the operating resistance of the moving plate member 641.

The means for making the left guide portion 645 sturdy are not limited to those described above. For example, the plate thickness of the left guide portion 645 may be made thicker than the plate thickness of the right guide portion 643, or a rib may be formed to connect the lower portion of the left guide portion 645 and the transmission plate portion 642.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 1479) will be described with reference to FIG. 1488. FIG. 1488(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110, FIG. 1488(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in special patterns, and FIG. 1488(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and winning in normal patterns.

As shown in FIG. 1488(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 1488(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 1 (drawing based on the ball entering first winning slot 64), the value of first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19" is associated with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 1488(b)).

When jackpot A is obtained, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the first operation pattern described below, and this state continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 49" is defined as corresponding to the big win B (see 202b2 in FIG. 1488(b)).

When jackpot B is achieved, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the second operating pattern described below, and this state continues until the next jackpot is achieved.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C (see 202b3 in FIG. 1488(b)).

If a jackpot C is obtained, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) will be set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a will be set to the second operation pattern described below, and this state will continue until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

In a jackpot based on the drawing of special pattern 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering first winning slot 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while there is a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot, so you basically cannot expect to win a large number of prize balls. On the other hand, a 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, so you can start shooting balls earlier in order to try to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 640), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b4 in FIG. 1488(b)).

When jackpot a is achieved, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, just like jackpot A, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the first operation pattern described below, and this state continues until the next jackpot is achieved.

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 49" is associated with the big win b (see 202b5 in FIG. 1488(b)).

When jackpot b is achieved, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the first operating pattern described below, and this state continues until the next jackpot is achieved.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with a big win c (see 202b6 in FIG. 1488(b)).

If jackpot c is obtained, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the third operation pattern described below, and this state continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed.

As described above, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of special symbol 2 (a drawing based on a ball entering the second winning slot 640), 15 rounds of jackpot play can be played regardless of the type of jackpot, but the allocation of the operating pattern of the electric device 640a after the jackpot play ends is set to be different from when a jackpot is won in the drawing of special symbol 1. The difference is particularly noticeable with jackpot c, but more details will be given later.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 1488(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for a winning normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 1488(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for a winning normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 1488(c)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not the normal pattern is a winning pattern. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

Figures 1489(a) to 1489(d) are diagrams showing an example of the detection of the passage of a ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the time-counting change in the state of the electric role 640a. Note that Figure 1489(a) shows the time-counting change in the first operation pattern, Figure 1489(b) shows the time-counting change in the second operation pattern, Figure 1489(c) shows the time-counting change in the third operation pattern, and Figure 1489(d) shows the time-counting change in the fourth operation pattern.

The fourth operating pattern is used during normal play or after 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed after the end of a jackpot C or c (see Figure 1488 (b)).

In Figures 1489(a) to 1489(d), when the second pattern is displayed as a change due to the detection of the passage of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (after about 0.1 seconds in this embodiment), and the "○" pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83, the meaning of the state of the electric device 640a at the reference time Td1 (about 0.5 seconds in this embodiment) from the detection of the passage of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is described in detail, among the operation patterns of the electric device 640a based on the detection of the passage of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765.

The length of the reference time Td1 is set to the time corresponding to the time from when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 to when it passes through the right guide section 643.

As shown in FIG. 1489(a), in the first operating pattern, from when the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, until the end of the display of the changing second pattern (0.1 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765), the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a is maintained in an advanced state (also indicated as "advance" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures) in which it has advanced into the first ball sending path KR1 for a reference time Td1.

In the first operating pattern, the electric device 640a remains in the first ball sending path KR1 until approximately 3.0 seconds after the reference time Td1 has passed and the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (approximately 3.0 seconds pass before the normal pattern stops changing).

As a result, when a right-handed hit is made and the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the moving plate member 641 can be maintained in a state in which it has entered the first ball sending path KR1 for a length sufficient to guide the ball that has reached the left-side guide section 645 to the first ball sending section 734. This makes it easier to get the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, the moving plate member 641 can be set to enter the first ball sending path KR1 before the ball detected to have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right-side guide section 643, so that the ball can be made to roll on the top surface of the right-side guide section 643 and flow to the right, making it easier to guide the ball to the second ball sending section 736.

This makes it easier for a ball that enters the first winning slot 64 to be swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 and enter the second winning slot 640, winning the lottery for special pattern 2, compared to a ball that enters the first winning slot 64 and is then detected by the sensor SE and wins the lottery for special pattern 1.

As shown in FIG. 1489(b), in the second operating pattern, after the passage of a ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a changes to a state in which it has entered the first ball throwing path KR1 just before the reference time Td1 has elapsed, and immediately after the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a changes to a retracted state (also indicated as "retracted" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures) in which it has retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1.

In the second operating pattern, the electric device 640a remains in the first ball sending path KR1 until approximately 1.0 second after the reference time Td1 has elapsed and the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (approximately 1.0 second has passed before the normal pattern stops changing).

As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to a right-handed hit, even if the ball reaches the left-side guide section 645, it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 will maintain a state in which it has entered the first ball sending path KR1 long enough to guide the ball to the first ball sending section 734, so it is not easy to get the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 when playing with a right-handed hit.

On the other hand, the moving plate member 641 can be set to a state in which the ball detected to have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 has entered the first ball throwing path KR1 before passing through the right-side guide section 643, so that the ball can be made to roll on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and flow to the right, making it easier to guide the ball to the second ball throwing section 736. Since the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the entered state for 0.5 seconds after the ball reaches the right-side guide section 643, the ball can be stably thrown toward the second ball throwing section 736.

This makes it easier for a ball that enters the first winning slot 64 to be swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 and enter the second winning slot 640, winning the lottery for special pattern 2, compared to a ball that enters the first winning slot 64 and is then detected by the sensor SE and wins the lottery for special pattern 1.

As shown in FIG. 1489(c), in the third operating pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, and after the display of the variable second pattern ends (0.1 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765), the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a is maintained in a state in which it has entered the first ball throwing path KR1, and just before the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a changes to a state in which it has retreated from the first ball throwing path KR1 (also shown as "retreat" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures), and just after the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a changes to a state in which it has entered the first ball throwing path KR1.

In the third operating pattern, after the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the electric device 640a remains in the first ball sending path KR1 until approximately 3.0 seconds have elapsed since the passage of the ball was detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (approximately 3.0 seconds have elapsed until the normal pattern changes have finished).

As a result, when a right-handed hit is made and the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the moving plate member 641 can be maintained in a state in which it has entered the first ball sending path KR1 for a length sufficient to guide the ball that has reached the left-side guide section 645 to the first ball sending section 734. This makes it easier to get the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can be moved away from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball detected to have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right-side guide section 643, so that the ball can be rolled on the top surface of the right-side guide section 643 and steered to the right, thereby preventing the ball from being guided to the second ball throwing section 736.

This makes it less likely that a ball that enters the first winning slot 64 will be swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 and detected by the sensor SE, resulting in a drawing for special symbol 1, and that the ball will enter the second winning slot 640 and win a drawing for special symbol 2.

If the normal pattern (second pattern) is still fluctuating when the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the electric device 640a may be in an in-going state when the ball reaches the first ball sending path KR1. In this case, the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 enters the second winning opening 640, and the player can win the lottery for special pattern 2.

As shown in FIG. 1489(d), in the fourth operating pattern, after the passage of a ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a is maintained in a retracted state away from the first ball sending path KR1, and after the moving plate member 641 changes to an entering state, the moving plate member 641 of the electric device 640a changes again to the retracted state just before the reference time Td1 has elapsed. In the fourth operating pattern, control is completed at the reference time Td1 (approximately 0.5 seconds elapse before the normal pattern changes to the end).

As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to a right-handed hit, even if the ball reaches the left-side guide section 645, it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 will maintain a state in which it has entered the first ball sending path KR1 long enough to guide the ball to the first ball sending section 734, so it is not easy to get the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 when playing with a right-handed hit.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can be moved away from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball detected to have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right-side guide section 643, so that the ball can be rolled on the top surface of the right-side guide section 643 and steered to the right, thereby preventing the ball from being guided to the second ball throwing section 736.

This makes it less likely that a ball that enters the first winning opening 64 will be swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 and detected by the sensor SE, resulting in a drawing for special pattern 1, and that the ball will enter the second winning opening 640 and win a drawing for special pattern 2. In other words, when multiple balls enter the first winning opening 64, the drawing for special pattern 1 can be configured to be repeatedly won.

According to each of the operation patterns described above, in a game state where the aim is to win a jackpot by winning the lottery for special pattern 1 or special pattern 2, it is possible to create different patterns for winning the lottery for special patterns.

For example, in the first and third operating patterns, it is possible to aim to win the lottery for special pattern 2 when playing with a right-hand hit, so it is preferable to display the above-mentioned "right-hand hit navigation" on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, in the first operating pattern, the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the state of entering the first ball sending path KR1 (see FIG. 1482 (b)) for a long period of time, and the moving plate member 641 is in the state of entering the first ball sending path KR1 when the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the passage of the ball was detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Therefore, even if the ball enters the first winning opening 64, it is possible to win the lottery for special pattern 2 with part of the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. This makes it possible to keep to a low level the disadvantage suffered by the player when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 during right-handed play.

On the other hand, in the third operating pattern, the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the approaching state (see FIG. 1482 (b)) for a long period of time, but when the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the moving plate member 641 is in a retreated state in which it retreats from the first ball sending path KR1. Therefore, when the normal pattern (second pattern) begins to change at the same time as the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the ball passes through the front side of the moving plate member 641 and is guided to the sensor SE.

In other words, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64, the possibility of winning the lottery for special pattern 2 with the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 can be reduced. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage suffered by the player when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during right-handed play, compared to the first operation pattern.

For example, in the second and fourth operating patterns, it is difficult to aim to win the lottery for special symbol 2 in right-hand play because the operating time of the electric role 640a is too short, so it is preferable not to display the above-mentioned "right-hand play navigation" on the third symbol display device 81 and to recommend left-hand play.

In this case, in the second operating pattern, the moving plate member 641 is in an entry state (see FIG. 1482(b)) in which it has entered the first ball sending path KR1 when the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, so even if the ball enters the first winning opening 64, it is possible to win the lottery for special pattern 2 with part of the ball that has been swept to the right by the seesaw member 762.

This allows the player to alternate between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 in the lottery for the special pattern that can be won when the ball enters the first winning port 64 during left-handed play. Note that when the moving plate member 641 is in the entered state at the reference time Td1 after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning port (through gate) 765, the lottery for special pattern 2 can be won only when the normal pattern (second pattern) begins to change at the same time as the ball passes through the normal winning port (through gate) 765. Therefore, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is still changing when the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning port (through gate) 765, the effect of making it easier to win the lottery for special pattern 2 cannot be achieved.

On the other hand, in the second operation pattern (or the fourth operation pattern), the time from the detection of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 to the end of the operation control of the electric role device 640a is set to 0.5 seconds, so compared to the first and third operation patterns in which the same time span is set to 3 seconds, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation occurring in which the change in the normal pattern (second pattern) is put on hold. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of making it easier to win the lottery for special pattern 2 with a high probability.

On the other hand, in the fourth operating pattern, the entry state of the moving plate member 641 (see FIG. 1482(b)) is as short as in the second operating pattern, and the moving plate member 641 is in a retracted state when the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Therefore, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64, it is possible to reduce the possibility of winning the lottery for special pattern 2 with the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. As a result, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 during left-handed play, the lottery for special pattern 1 can account for most of the lotteries for special patterns that the player can win.

As described above in detail, each operation pattern can create different patterns for drawing special symbols in a game state in which the player aims to win a jackpot by drawing special symbol 1 or special symbol 2.

Returning to Figure 1488(b), we will explain the difference in the benefits a player can get from a jackpot with special symbol 1 and a jackpot with special symbol 2.

First, the probability of winning a jackpot of the maximum round (15 rounds in this embodiment) is higher with special pattern 2. Among jackpots with special pattern 1, the probability of winning a jackpot of the maximum round is 20%, while the probability of winning a jackpot with special pattern 2 is 100%. Therefore, at least in terms of the number of winning balls, the profit that a player can get from a jackpot with special pattern 2 is greater than the profit that a player can get from a jackpot with special pattern 1.

In addition, in the case where a high probability state occurs after the end of a jackpot game, if the jackpot is a special symbol 2, right-hand play will be performed 100%, and the special symbol 2 can be drawn repeatedly. However, in 30% of jackpots with special symbol 1 (jackpot B), right-hand play will not be performed and left-hand play is recommended, and the drawings for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 will alternate.

In this case, when playing with the left hand, the time efficiency of winning the lottery for the special symbol is lower than when playing with the right hand, and since the lottery for special symbol 1 is executed with a 1/2 chance, the hurdle to winning the maximum round of the jackpot is higher.

In addition, if the player is in a low probability state after a jackpot game ends, if the jackpot is a special symbol 2 (jackpot c), the player will play with a right-handed reel and can repeatedly win the lottery for special symbol 2. However, if the jackpot is a special symbol 1 (jackpot C), the player will not play with a right-handed reel and left-handed play is recommended, and the lottery for special symbol 1 and the lottery for special symbol 2 will alternate.

In this case, when playing with the left hand, the time efficiency of winning the lottery for the special symbol is lower than when playing with the right hand, and since the lottery for special symbol 1 is executed with a 1/2 chance, the hurdle to winning the maximum round of the jackpot is higher.

Furthermore, while the condition of 100 draws for the special symbol is the same, with jackpot C it is easy to win 100 draws for special symbol 2, whereas with jackpot C the 100 draws are completed after 50 draws for special symbol 1 and 50 draws for special symbol 2, so in effect you can only win 50 draws for special symbol 2.

In summary, a jackpot resulting from the drawing of special symbol 2 has at least the following advantages over a jackpot resulting from the drawing of special symbol 1: first, it is easier to win a jackpot of the maximum round; second, it is easier to enter a gaming state in which the drawing of special symbol 2 is repeatedly won; and third, it is easier to maintain a high time efficiency in winning the drawing of special symbols by playing to the right.

In the above 50th embodiment, when the lottery for special symbol 2 is executed preferentially, the variable time for the lottery is selected probabilistically from options of about 3 seconds to 5 minutes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when the lottery is executed simultaneously for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, a game state may be configured in which the variable time for the lottery for special symbol 2 is intentionally set long.

That is, for example, in the 100 drawings of special symbols after the end of jackpot B or jackpot C, the variation time for the drawing of special symbol 2 may always be set to 10 minutes. In this case, assuming that the ball that enters first winning port 64 alternates between passing through sensor SE and passing through second winning port 640, if a ball is placed in first winning port 64 after the reserved number of special symbol 2 is full, the ball will not be able to win the drawing of special symbol 2 even if it passes through second winning port 640, and the drawing of special symbol 1 will be repeatedly executed.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 is full, the player can choose not to let the ball enter the first winning slot 64. In this case, the time efficiency of the game can be reduced, and the number of jackpots that occur within the same time period can be reduced. This makes it easier for the gaming machine store to avoid running at a loss.

In the above-mentioned game state, the balls swept to the right from the seesaw member 762 will give the player the benefit of winning the lottery for special symbol 2 and the benefit of receiving prize balls until the reserved number of special symbol 2 is full, and therefore the player will receive a greater benefit than the balls swept to the left from the seesaw member 762, which will give the player the benefit of winning the lottery for special symbol 1 and the benefit of receiving prize balls.

On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbol 2 is full, balls swept to the right from the seesaw member 762 only provide the player with the benefit of receiving prize balls, so the benefit the player receives is smaller than that of balls swept to the left from the seesaw member 762, since it includes the benefit of winning the lottery for special symbol 1.

In other words, the amount of benefit given to the player by the balls that are swept to the right and the balls that are swept to the left by the seesaw member 762 can be switched depending on whether the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full or not.

In addition, in the above-mentioned game state, the operation of the moving plate member 641 based on the detection of a ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 may be configured to be selected by lottery from multiple operating patterns.

For example, the second operation pattern may be controlled to operate 5% of the time, and the remaining 95% may be controlled to operate in the fourth operation pattern. In this case, there is an advantage that if the moving plate member 641 operates in the second operation pattern, a lottery for special pattern 2 can be won, so the attention to the moving plate member 641 can be increased.

On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, if the moving plate member 641 is operated in the fourth operating pattern, a lottery for special symbol 1 can be won, but if the moving plate member 641 is operated in the second operating pattern, there is a disadvantage in that neither the lottery for special symbols 1 nor 2 can be won, so even in this case, attention to the moving plate member 641 can be improved. In other words, whether the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full or not, attention to the moving plate member 641 can be improved.

When special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are drawn simultaneously, a game state may be configured in which the variable time for the drawing of special symbol 1 is intentionally set long. For example, by always setting the variable time for the drawing of special symbol 1 to 10 minutes, in a game state in which both the drawing of special symbol 1 and the drawing of special symbol 2 can occur, the drawing of special symbol 2 can be performed multiple times before the result of the drawing of special symbol 1 is announced. This reduces the possibility of an unintentional jackpot occurring by the drawing of special symbol 1, which would cause a disadvantage to the player.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

It is possible to equalize the speed at which balls flow down the right-hand inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is located, and the speed at which balls flow down the left-hand inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is not located.

In addition, at the position where the ball that entered the first winning opening 64 branches off into the flow path on the second winning opening 640 side (e.g., the first ball sending path KR1) and at the position where the ball falls toward the second winning opening 640 side (e.g., the upper ball passing hole 713, the lower ball passing hole 714), the ball's flow direction has a front-to-rear component. This makes it possible to highlight the areas that are closely related to the ball's flow toward the second winning opening 640.

The paths to the second winning port 640 merge in front of the lower ball passing hole 714, but this merging position is far enough away from the moving plate member 641. This makes it possible to prevent a load from a ball colliding at the merging position from being applied to the moving plate member 641. It is also possible to avoid the merging of the flow paths in front of the lower ball passing hole 714 by shifting the left-right positions of the upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 and expanding the left-right width of the second winning port 640 to more than the width of two balls.

It is also possible to create a case where it is possible to manage so that the next ball is not detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 from the time the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until the display of the normal pattern changes ends. This allows the electric device 640a, which is controlled by the detection of the ball, to act in a timely manner on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765.

Moreover, the movable plate member 641 is arranged so that it can act on balls that have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 as well as on balls that have passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67. This increases the availability of the movable plate member 641.

In other words, the movable plate member 641 can be effectively used in a game state in which left-handed play is recommended to aim for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64, and in a game state in which right-handed play is recommended to aim for the ball to enter the normal winning hole (through gate) 67. Note that this effect is not limited to a symmetrical board surface, but can also be achieved, for example, on an asymmetrical board surface (for example, a configuration in which the normal winning hole (through gate) 66 is omitted).

In addition, regarding the number of balls that can be placed on the movable plate member 641, the left guide section 645 can simultaneously carry multiple balls, while the number of balls that can be placed on the right guide section 643 is limited to one. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the movable plate member 641 by making the right guide section 643 stronger than the left guide section 645.

In addition, by providing multiple operating patterns for the electric roler 640a, different patterns for winning the lottery for the special symbol can be created. For example, when the ball repeatedly enters the first winning slot 64, it is possible to switch between a pattern in which the lottery for special symbol 1 is repeatedly won, and a pattern in which the lottery for special symbol 1 and the lottery for special symbol 2 are alternately won.

In addition, when right-handed play is recommended as a pattern for winning the lottery for the special symbol, if the ball accidentally enters the first winning slot 64, it is possible to switch between a pattern in which it is easy to repeatedly win the lottery for special symbol 1, and a pattern in which there is a high probability that the winning of the lottery for special symbol 1 will be avoided for balls swept to the right by the seesaw member 762.

Next, the 51st embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1490 to 1499. In the 50th embodiment, a case was described in which a ball passes through a normal winning port (through gate) 765 when flowing down one of the paths allocated by the path configuration device 700, but the allocation unit 980 of the 51st embodiment is configured so that the ball passes through detection devices SE4 and SE5 as normal winning ports (through gates) in multiple paths to which the ball is allocated. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1490 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 in the 51st embodiment. Note that in Figure 1490, units other than the winning slot unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate 60 are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 1490, a through hole 2060a is formed in the base plate 60 by router processing below the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 1477) is attached, penetrating through the thickness of the base plate 60.

The through hole 2060a is formed slightly smaller than the external shape of the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning port unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning port unit 930 is arranged from the playing area (front side), and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite side (back side) of the playing area, and each is fastened and fixed with tapping screws or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The winning port unit 930 is mainly formed by a front unit 940, a specific winning port unit 950 arranged on the rear side of the front unit 940, a drive unit 960 arranged on the rear side of the specific winning port unit 950, and a displacement member 966 configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the driving force of the drive unit 960. The displacement member 966 will be described later.

A portion of the specific winning hole unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning hole 65a formed in the front unit 940, and a game ball can be sent to the inside of the specific winning hole unit 950 through the specific winning hole 65a.

The drive unit 960 is disposed on the rear side of the specific winning port unit 950, and is connected to the feather member 945 disposed on the front unit 940 via a displacement member 966. This allows the feather member 945 to be rotationally displaced by operating the displacement member 966 with the driving force of the drive unit 960. The operation of the feather member 945 will be described in detail later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 1491 to 1493. Fig. 1491(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and Fig. 1491(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. Fig. 1492 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit 940, and Fig. 1493 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit 940. Note that in Figs. 1491(a) and 1491(b), the outline of the wing member 945 is shown by hidden lines.

As shown in Figures 1491 to 1493, the front unit 940 is mainly formed with a rear base 941 that is fastened to the base plate 60, a front base 943 that is disposed on the rear base 941 at a distance greater than the diameter of a game ball, and two (a pair) of wing members 945 that are rotatably disposed between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943.

The rear base 941 is formed from a plate-like body with a predetermined thickness and has an external shape that is roughly a vertically inverted T shape when viewed from the front. The rear base 941 is also formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the prize winning port unit 930 (front unit 940) is arranged on the base plate 60, the inside of the through hole 2060a of the base plate 60 can be seen through the rear base 941.

The rear base 941 mainly comprises a first outlet 71 cut out at the bottom end, a specific winning opening 65a located above the first outlet 71 and formed as a horizontally long rectangle, a second winning opening 640 formed above the specific winning opening 65a, and a first winning opening 64 cut out at the edge (upper edge) opposite the first outlet 71.

The rear base 941 has a number of through holes 941a penetrating the outer edge in the plate thickness direction. The through holes 941a are formed of a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side to the rear side, and a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter decreases from the rear side to the front side.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw is inserted to fasten the rear base 941 (prize-winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60, and its inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the tapping screw.

As described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed with a smaller diameter from the front side to the rear side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the larger diameter portion on the front side. This prevents the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the play area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a is formed near the first through hole 941a1, protruding cylindrically from the rear surface of the rear base 941.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole formed around the through hole 2060a of the base plate 60, and is formed with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole. This allows the rear base 941 (prize winning port unit 930) to be positioned and arranged relative to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the rear base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the rear base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screw-threaded portion. In other words, the front base 943 is fastened with a screw from the rear side of the rear base 941. In this case, the operation of removing the front base 943 from the rear base 941 must be performed after the prize winning port unit 930 has been removed from the base plate 60. This prevents a player from cheating and removing only the front base 943 from the front side (play area side) of the game board 13.

As described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed with a smaller diameter from the rear side to the front side, so the head of the screw can be accommodated in the larger diameter portion on the rear side. This prevents the head of the screw from protruding into the rear side of the rear base 941. As a result, when the specific winning port unit 950 described later is disposed on the rear side of the rear base 941, the head of the screw can be prevented from abutting against the specific winning port unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end of the rear base 941 in the direction of gravity is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 1477) of the game board 13. The first outlet 71 is formed so that the edge of the cutout bottom (the upper edge in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. This allows game balls that flow down the game area formed on the front of the game board 13 and do not flow into any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the specific winning opening 65a, or the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 1477) to be sent to the rear side of the game board 13 (the opposite side of the game area) via the first outlet 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end opposite the first outlet 71 in a semicircular shape. The first winning opening 64 is also formed so that the inner edge dimension is larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball that flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 941g (described later) to be sent through the first winning opening 64 to the back side (the opposite side of the game area (the front side of the paper in Figure 1491 (b)).

The edge of the first winning opening 64 is formed with a first receiving portion 941g that protrudes toward the playing area (the front side of the page in Figure 1491 (a)) and is cup-shaped, and a first ball throwing portion 942g that protrudes with a U-shaped cross section toward the opposite side of the playing area (the front side of the page in Figure 1491 (b)).

The first receiving portion 941g is formed to be large enough to receive one game ball inside. This allows the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning port 64) in the direction of gravity to flow inside the first receiving portion 941g.

The first receiving portion 941g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the rear side. This allows the game ball that flows into the first receiving portion 941g to be sent to the rear side (the first ball sending portion 942g side) through the first winning opening 64.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g has a guide portion 941g1 that extends downward from the upper end portions of both ends of the short side (left-right direction in FIG. 1491) of the base plate 60, slanting outward in the left-right direction. The guide portion 941g1 is formed into a plate-like body with a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite the play area (the rear side) is connected to the front side of the rear base 941. This increases the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g, and prevents game balls flowing down the flow area from colliding with the first receiving portion 941g and damaging the first receiving portion 941g.

In addition, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the rear base 941, there is a possibility that there will not be enough game nails to change the direction of the game ball flowing down the play area, making it difficult to change the direction of the game ball. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's interest will be lost, but by having the game ball collide with the guide portion 941g1, the direction of the game ball flowing down can be changed, preventing the player's interest from being lost.

Furthermore, when a game ball flowing down the front side of the rear base 941 toward the second winning opening 640 collides with the guide portion 941g1, the guide portion 941g1 can guide the game ball outward in the left-right direction. This makes it possible to prevent the probability of the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 from becoming excessively high.

The first ball throwing section 942g is formed in a U-shape that opens upward in the direction of gravity, and the distance between the opposing inner edges is formed to be greater than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the bottom surface of the first ball throwing section 942g is formed to slope downward toward the rear side, and the protruding tip side abuts against the edge of the inlet 982d of the ball throwing unit 970 described later. This allows the game ball that is thrown from the inside of the first receiving section 941g through the first winning port 64 to the first ball throwing section 942g to roll toward the rear side and be thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing section 942g has a first notch 942g1 cut into a rectangular shape in side view at the upper end of the protruding tip. The first notch 942g1 is a notch on which the second protrusion 982d1 of the ball throwing unit 970 described below is placed, and is notched to a size approximately the same as the shape of the second protrusion 982d1 in side view. The arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described in detail later.

The second winning opening 640 is formed in a generally D-shape with a curved upper portion when viewed from the front, and the inner edge is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball sent between the opposing blade members 945 (described later) to be sent from the second winning opening 640 to the rear side.

The second winning port 640 has a front side wall portion 941b that protrudes toward the front side and a second ball throwing portion 942c that protrudes toward the rear side formed on its edge.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface abuts against the ball sending guide portion 943d of the front base 943 described later.

The second ball sending section 942c is formed by bending in an approximately L-shape when viewed from behind at both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 640. The dimension of the second ball sending section 942c in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 1491 (b)) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling section 943a of the front base 943 (described later) from falling from the upper surface of the rolling section 943a.

The pair of second ball sending sections 942c are set so that the distance between them in the short side direction of the base plate 60 (left and right direction in Fig. 1491 (b)) is set to be approximately the same as the length dimension of the rolling section 943a of the front base 943 described later in the short side direction of the base plate 60 (left and right direction in Fig. 1491 (b)), and the rolling section 943a is arranged on the inside.

The second ball throwing section 942c is positioned inside the displacement member 966 in the assembled state, and faces the displacement member 966 in the up, down, left and right directions. The left-right width between the outer surfaces of the second ball throwing section 942c is formed slightly shorter than the left-right width between the inner surfaces of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 966. This allows the second ball throwing section 942c to limit the left-right displacement of the displacement member 966.

The rear base 941 is formed with first shaft holes 941d recessed in two circular locations on the upper side (first winning opening 64 side) near the second winning opening 640 from the playing area side of the rear base 941 toward the opposite side of the playing area, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft holes 941d and formed through the rear base 941, and a first guide wall 942b located outside the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and protruding toward the rear side.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting the shaft member 945a that supports the blade member 945 (described later), and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. This allows one end of the shaft member 945a to be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis. The first opening 941e is also designed to allow the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. This makes it possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from contacting the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the feather member 945 rotates.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the upward and downward displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described below is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of opposing first guide walls 942b is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short side direction (left and right direction) of the displacement member 966.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extend in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. This allows the protrusion 966a of the displacement member 966 to abut against the bent portions of the first guide walls 942b, thereby regulating the displacement distance of the displacement member 966.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed as a long rectangular opening in the opposing direction of the pair of blade members 945 (left and right direction in Figure 1491 (b)), and an opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is arranged inside the opening.

The rear base 941 has a bulge 942h that bulges out between the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball sending section 942c, and a second guide wall 942d that protrudes from the outer frame of the specific winning opening 65a toward the first guide wall 942b (upper side in Figure 1491 (b)).

The bulging portion 942h bulges out toward the rear side of the rear base 941 and is connected to the outer frame of the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball sending portion 942c. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the displacement member 966 and the rear side of the rear base 941 when the displacement member 966 described below is disposed on the rear side of the rear base 941, thereby reducing the frictional (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is set to be slightly larger than the distance in the short direction of the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the short direction (left and right direction) of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

Therefore, not only is the displacement of the displacement member 966 restricted by the second ball sending section 942c being positioned on the inside, but the displacement of the displacement member 966 is also restricted by the second guide wall 942d being positioned on the outside. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the left-right direction for a long period of time.

The rear base 941 is provided with a second outlet 941f formed by cutting out a semicircular shape downward from the upper edge of both the left and right ends of the specific winning port 65a. The second outlet 941f is a cutout for sending the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a formed in the front base 943 to the rear side of the base plate 60, and is formed in a shape larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The edge of the second outlet 941f is formed with a third ball throwing section 942e that is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear side. This allows the game ball that is thrown to the rear side via the inside of the second outlet 941f to be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing section 942e is formed so that the curved part (lower part) of the U-shape when viewed from the rear is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes toward the rear side, and the game ball thrown from the second outlet 941f can be rolled toward the rear side.

The rear base 941 is formed with a third through hole 941i that is formed in a shape that extends linearly upward from the upper end of the first opening 941e, a fourth through hole 941j that is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the first axis hole 941d from the upper end of the third through hole 941i toward the left and right outside, a ball throwing hole 941k that is drilled between the pair of third through holes 941i and is large enough for a game ball to pass through, and a rolling plate portion 941l that extends toward the rear side from the lower edge of the ball throwing hole 941k as a base end.

The third through hole 941i is a through hole for passing the extension portion 945d and the plate-shaped portion 945e to the rear side when the wing member 945 is assembled. The fourth through hole 941j is a through hole for allowing the extension portion 945d to be displaced when the wing member 945 is in operation, and is drilled in a shape that includes the entire displacement trajectory of the extension portion 945d when viewed from the front (as viewed in the axial direction of the shaft member 945a). Note that since the plate-shaped portion 945e is disposed on the rear side through the rear base 941, it is not necessary to consider the displacement trajectory of the plate-shaped portion 945e.

The ball throwing hole 941k is an opening for throwing a ball that has rolled on the top surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e to the front side when the feather member 945 is in an open state. Because the lower part of the ball throwing hole 941k is left open on the front side of the ball throwing hole 941k (see Figures 1492 and 1493), it is possible to reduce the possibility of a ball entering the ball throwing hole 941k from the front side.

In other words, the front area of the ball throwing hole 941k is formed as a meeting point between the ball rolling on the top surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e and the ball rolling on the top surface of the feather-shaped body 945, and the flow of the ball through the ball throwing hole 941k can be made to flow exclusively toward the front side.

The rolling plate portion 941l is formed as an inclined plate that slopes upward toward the rear side, and is configured to allow a ball that has landed on the extended tip side to flow down to the base end side (front side). The ball that rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 941 and reaches the base end side passes through the ball sending hole 941k and reaches the front side of the rear base 941 (the space between the rear base 941 and the front base 943), and then flows down.

The front base 943 is formed in a roughly upside-down T-shape, with an outer shape smaller than that of the rear base when viewed from the front. The front base 943 is also formed from a colorless and transparent plate. This allows the player to visually see the game balls flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and rear base 941.

The front base 943 is formed mainly with a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a that protrude from positions corresponding to the second winning opening 640 and the second outlet 941f of the above-mentioned rear base 941, respectively.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second winning opening 640 of the rear base 941 is located on the inside when viewed from the front. In addition, a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape).

Furthermore, the protruding distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 is set to be greater than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to be sent between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943, while preventing the game ball from flowing into the second winning opening 640 from outside the opposing space between a pair of blade members 945 (described later).

The second receiving portion 943c also includes a ball guide portion 943d that protrudes inward from its inner edge, and a rolling portion 943a that protrudes from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base.

The ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed as a pair on the underside of the pair of wing members 945. The pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are also formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the rear base 941, and when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end faces abut against each other. This allows a game ball that has flowed between the opposing wing members 945 to be thrown between the opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed below the opposing pair of ball guide portions 943d, and the upper end surface 943a1 is formed so as to slope downward toward the rear base 941. As described above, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), the rolling portion 943a is positioned at the inner lower end of the second winning opening 640, and the tip protrudes toward the rear side of the rear base 941.

This allows the game ball sent between the pair of opposing ball sending guide parts 943d to be sent to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the end surface 943a1 and sent to the rear side of the rear base 941.

The front base 943 also has a ring-shaped protrusion 943b that protrudes from the opening side (upper side) of the second receiving portion 943c in a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941. The ring-shaped protrusion 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 on its inner edge, and the other end of the shaft member 945a that supports the blade member 945 described later can be inserted into the inside of the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be supported by being sandwiched between the opposing rear base 941 and front base 943.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is located inside it. This allows game balls flowing down the play area of the game board 13 to flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and game balls that have flowed into the third receiving portion 944a can be sent to the rear side via the second outlet 941f.

When viewed from the front, the feather members 945 are arranged in pairs, sandwiching the second winning opening 640 formed in the rear base 941. The feather members 945 are made of a colored translucent material and are visible to the player through the front base 943.

The feather member 945 mainly comprises a feather-shaped body 945m formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front and formed with a thickness smaller than the width between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, a protrusion 945b protruding from the rear side of the feather-shaped body 945m, an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction of the feather-shaped body 945m (from the rear base 941 side to the front base 943 side), a connecting portion 945d extending from the end of the feather-shaped body 945m opposite the side where the insertion hole 945c is located to the rear side, and a plate-shaped portion 945e extending in a plate shape from the tip side of the extension portion 945d in the longitudinal direction of the feather-shaped body 945m (up and down direction in FIG. 1491 (a)).

The extension portion 945d and the plate-shaped portion 945e pass through the through holes 941i and 941j in the assembled state (see FIG. 1491(a)) and are configured to be operable inside the sorting unit 980, but details will be described later.

The insertion hole 945c is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the rear base 941 and the front base 943, the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c, so that the wing member 945 can be arranged between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943 in a rotatable state. This allows the wing member 945 to be displaced between a closed state (see FIG. 1491(a)) in which the rotating tip side is close to each other, and an open state in which the rotating tip side is displaced to open outward to both the left and right.

The protrusion 945b is inserted into the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 described below, and is a transmission part to which the driving force of the drive unit 960 is transmitted. The protrusion 945b has a dimension set so that its tip protrudes through the first opening 941e of the rear base 941 to the rear side of the rear base 941 and can be inserted into the sliding groove 966a2.

The displacement member 966 is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side when viewed from the front, and has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from the upper end and a bulging portion 966b that bulges outward from the lower end toward the rear side, with a second opening 966c formed through it at approximately the center when viewed from the front.

The second opening 966c is formed so that the shape of the inner edge when viewed from the front is larger than the second winning opening 640, and the second winning opening 640 is disposed on the inside. This prevents the game ball sent to the opposite side of the game area through the second winning opening 640 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The protrusion 966a includes abutment portions 966a1 that are located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the short direction and extend in the longitudinal direction, and a sliding groove 966a2 that penetrates the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction.

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966. The width dimension of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. This prevents the protrusion 945b from contacting both inner surfaces facing each other in the width direction of the sliding groove 966a2 when the feather member 945 rotates, thereby preventing the movement of the feather member 945 from being restricted.

The bulging portion 966b is formed by bulging out toward the rear side (the rear base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is an opening into which the transmission member of the drive unit 960 is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member.

When the displacement member 966 is placed in a lower position via the transmission member of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 is in a closed state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 966 is placed in an upper position via the transmission member of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 is in an open state.

Next, the sorting unit 980 will be described with reference to Fig. 1494 and Fig. 1495. Fig. 1494(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 980, Fig. 1494(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 980, Fig. 1495(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line MCDXCVa-MCDXCVa in Fig. 1494(a), and Fig. 1495(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line MCDXCVb-MCDXCVb in Fig. 1495(a).

The distribution unit 980 is formed mainly by comprising a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a distribution section 983 disposed in a rotatable state between the front base 981 and the rear base. The distribution section 983 is a member corresponding to the seesaw member 762 in the 50th embodiment.

The rear base 985 is formed from a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and is mainly comprised of a base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body, a number of openings (openings 985b to 985g) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction, a recess 985h recessed above the multiple openings, and a storage portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is formed with a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d that penetrate the outer edge in a circular shape. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw that is inserted through the front base 981 (described later) is screwed. This allows the front base 981 and the rear base 985 to be fastened together. The fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw that is inserted through the passage unit 990 (described later) is screwed. This allows the rear base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 to be fastened together.

The recess 985h is recessed from the front base 981 side toward the back side at approximately the center of the short side (left-right direction) of the base portion 985a. The recess 985h is formed with a size that can accommodate a part of the distribution portion 983 (described later) on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j that protrudes in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

Openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the short direction, and the dimensions of the inner edges are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, openings 985b and 985c are formed with their lower inner surfaces sloping downward as they approach the opposite side to the front base 981 side. This allows the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll to the opposite side of the front base 981 (the back side).

Opening 985e is formed closer to opening 985b than the center position on the left and right, and opening 985f is formed closer to opening 985c than the center position on the left and right. In the following, openings 985e and 985f have the same configuration, so a detailed explanation will be given of opening 985f that can receive balls that have flowed down the second passage TR2, and an explanation of opening 985e that can receive balls that have flowed down the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

The opening 985f is formed mainly by an inlet passage 985f1 of the space that opens on the front base 981 side, an outlet passage 985f3 of the space that opens on the opposite side to the front base 981 side, an intermediate passage 985f2 that extends in the direction of gravity and connects the inlet passage 985f1 and the outlet passage 985f3, and a recessed portion 985f4 recessed in the intermediate passage 985f2 in a direction that is approximately perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball (the direction of gravity) (see Figure 1494 (b) and Figure 1495 (a)).

The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to the second passage TR2 formed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 described below, and is formed large enough for game balls to pass through. This allows game balls flowing down the second passage TR2 to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.

The intermediate passage 985f2 is formed by extending in the direction of gravity, and the upper side is connected to the inflow passage 985f1, and is formed large enough for game balls to pass through. This allows game balls passing through the inflow passage 985f1 to flow into the intermediate passage 985f2.

The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for disposing the detection device SE3 (described later) inside, and is set to be approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. This allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted and disposed from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects the passage of a game ball, and has a detection hole SE1a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball formed through it in the thickness direction. The detection hole SE1a is formed offset to one side in the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE3, and a detection board SE1b that controls the detection device SE1 is disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction where the detection hole SE1a is not formed.

The detection device SE3 is also arranged such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passage 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985f2 are approximately aligned. This allows a gaming ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 when it flows down from the upper side of the intermediate passage 985f2. This allows a gaming ball passing through the second passage TR2 to be detected.

In addition, the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, making it easier to utilize the weight of the game ball when sending it to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passage 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portion 985f4 is formed so as to be continuous with the spaces of the inlet passage 985f1 and the outlet passage 985f3. That is, the intermediate passage 985f2 is formed using the detection device SE3. This makes it possible to prevent the length dimension of the intermediate passage 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the lower side of the intermediate passage 985f2 and is formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. In addition, the discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the insertion hole of the passage unit 990 when the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls passing through the intermediate passage 985f2 to flow into the discharge passage 985f3 and to be sent to the passage unit 990 by passing through that space.

The opening 985g is formed at the lower end of the rear base 985 in the center position from left to right. The lower inner surface of the opening 985g is also formed so that it slopes downward toward the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll toward the side opposite the front base 981.

The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to the second passage TR2 formed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 described below, and is formed large enough for game balls to pass through. This allows game balls flowing down the second passage TR2 to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.

The storage section 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. The storage section 986b is a portion that stores the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. The protruding dimension of the storage section 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. This allows the magnetic body 988b to be stored inside the storage section 986b. Since the storage section 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed slightly larger due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular rings can be elastically deformed to arrange the magnetic body 988b.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel the magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution portion 983 described later, making it easier to displace the distribution portion 983.

The rear base 985 has an opening 985k, which is a cutout for arranging the detectors SE4 and SE5 in the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 described below, formed in a shape substantially identical to the outer shape of the detectors SE4 and SE5 when viewed from the rear. This allows the detectors SE4 and SE5 to be inserted and arranged from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite the front base 981). Note that the structure of the detectors SE4 and SE5 is similar to that of the detector SE3 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The detection devices SE4 and SE5 are also arranged so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is approximately aligned with the space of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

As a result, when a game ball flows down from the upper side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4, SE5. This makes it possible to detect a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In addition, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 are formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, making it easier to utilize the weight of the game ball when sending it to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting caught in the connection between the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and the detection hole SE1a.

Detection devices SE4 and SE5 are configured as devices that draw a regular symbol (second symbol) when it is detected that a ball has passed through detection hole SE1a.

The opening 985k is formed so as to be continuous with the space of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed using the detection device SE3. This makes it possible to prevent the length dimension of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material (blue in this embodiment). The front base 981 is formed in a generally rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front, and is formed mainly with a base plate 981a and a bulge portion 982 that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (the opposite side of the rear base 985).

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on its outer peripheral edge, a first guide wall 981f protruding toward the rear base 985 side, and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side of the bulge portion 982 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity).

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) is inserted to fasten the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 1490), and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed as a pair in the short side direction with a bulge portion 982 (described later) sandwiched between them. The first guide wall 981f is also formed with the semicircular open portion facing approximately the center of the base plate 981a in the short side direction.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of the game ball. The through hole 981c is also formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the front side along its edge.

The through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning port 640 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that flows into the second winning port 640 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60.

The side wall portion 981b is formed with dimensions such that the erected tip surface abuts the second ball throwing section 942c (see FIG. 1493) of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b is formed so that the rolling surface 981c1 on the lower inner surface is positioned lower than the end surface 943a1 (see FIG. 1493) of the rolling section 943a, and is inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to pass through its inside. It is formed with a ball sending passage TR0 through which the game ball flowing in from the inlet 982d passes, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 that branch off from the ball sending passage TR0.

The bulge 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is mainly composed of an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end, an upright wall 982a formed in a wall-like shape that extends toward the rear base 985 side at approximately the center position from the left to right when viewed from the front, and recesses 982e to 982j formed as curved surfaces that can send game balls to the rear side at multiple points in the direction of gravity.

The bulge 982 also includes a ball throwing opening 982k drilled in the front-to-rear direction below the standing wall 982a, a vertically elongated rectangular insertion opening 982l drilled in the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the ball throwing opening 982k, and a rotation permitting opening 982m drilled in a shape that extends outward to the left and right from the upper end of the insertion opening 982l.

The inlet 982d is cut out to have a generally U-shape when viewed from the front. The inlet 982d is formed at a position where the inner edge of the inlet 982d overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning opening 64 of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60.

The inlet 982d also has a second protrusion 982d1 at its upper edge that protrudes in the direction opposite the rear base 985. The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recess 942g1 (see FIG. 1493) of the prize winning port unit 930 described above, and when the prize winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 abuts against the inner edge of the first recess 942g1.

In addition, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 1494(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the lower end face of the inlet 982d is set to be greater than the distance dimension L15 (see FIG. 1491(b)) from the inner edge of the first recess 942g1 to the lower inner edge of the first ball throwing section 942g. This makes it possible for the game ball sent to the first ball throwing section 942g through the first winning opening 64 to be less likely to get caught between the inlet 982d (bulge 982) and the first ball throwing section 942g as it flows into the inlet 982d.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape with a predetermined distance from the outer edge shape of the bulge portion 982 when viewed from the front. The erected wall 982a is formed below the inlet 982d and is provided with an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape on the upper side when viewed from the erected direction.

The horizontal distance between the vertical wall 982a and the inner edge of the outer periphery of the bulge 982 is set to be greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed between them, which are spaces through which the game ball can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed downstream of the distribution section 983 described below, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are sent to one of them. The distribution section 983 is set up so that game balls flowing into the inlet 982d can be sent alternately to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. This makes it possible to prevent the sending of game balls flowing into the first winning port 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

A bearing portion 982c is formed on the upper side of the erected wall 982a, protruding in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that axially supports the distribution portion 983 described below, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

As described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the rear base 985. When combining the front base 981 and the rear base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j and the other end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 982c, so that the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation trajectory of the distribution portion 983 described below, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact of the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983.

The recesses 982e and 982f are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulge 982 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. In addition, inside the recesses 982e and 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 is formed as a space that communicates with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

The first branch passage BK1 is connected to the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 is connected to the opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.

Balls guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 are guided to a ball discharge passage (not shown). That is, balls guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 are discharged without providing any benefit to the player, just like balls that flow into the first outlet 71.

The benefit given to the player by the ball guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 can be changed in various ways. For example, it can be designed as a benefit in which a preset number of prize balls are paid out, or as a benefit obtained by the ball being detected by a detection device for drawing the normal symbol or the jackpot.

The recesses 982h and 982j are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulge 982 in the direction in which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend downward by the amount of the recesses 982h and 982j.

The first passage TR1 is connected to the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 receives game balls that have flowed into the inlet 982d, and allows the game balls to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985.

The second passage TR2 is connected to the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second passage TR2 receives the game balls that have flowed into the inlet 982d, and allows the game balls to flow into the opening 985f of the rear base 985.

The ball throwing opening 982k is formed between the recesses 982h and 982j. In addition, inside the ball throwing opening 982k, a third branch passage BK3 is formed, which is a space that communicates with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 that communicates with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be made smaller.

The rolling surface 982g formed on the lower side of the third branch passage BK3 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. As a result, the third branch passage BK3 becomes a passage through which a game ball that has flowed down the back side of the front base 981 can pass to the front side of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined.

In this embodiment, the third branch passage BK3 is formed to be capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the received game ball flows to the front side through the ball sending opening 982k and the ball sending hole 941k (see FIG. 1491(a)) and is configured to be able to enter the second winning hole 640.

The inclined portion 982b of the bulge portion 982 is formed on the lower side of the bulge portion 982 and extends downwardly toward the rear base 985. In addition, the inclined portion 982b is formed across the left-right width direction of the bulge portion 982 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined.

As a result, game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, and the second branch passage BK2 can be brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, and the game balls flowing down can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f (the rear side), making it easier for them to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

On the other hand, by bringing the game ball flowing down the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the rolling surface 982g, the game ball flowing down can be guided toward the ball throwing opening 982k (front side), making it easier for the ball to flow into the ball throwing opening 982k.

The rolling surface 982g is not symmetrical when viewed from the front, but is asymmetrical with the left side being formed lower than the right side. This makes it easier to prevent balls from lining up side by side in the third branch passage BK3 when balls reach the third branch passage BK3 from the left and right at the same time, and makes it possible to make the direction in which the balls are lined up (series direction) have an up-down component. This makes it easier to prevent balls from clogging the third branch passage BK3, and makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the blade member 945 becomes inoperable due to ball clogging.

The insertion opening 982l is an opening for inserting the extension portion 945d and the plate-shaped portion 945e of the feather member 945 into the back side of the bulge portion 982 when assembling the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base member 60.

In other words, when the winning hole unit 930 is in an assembled state, the extension portion 945d and the plate-shaped portion 945e (see FIG. 1491(b)) that are inserted into the third through-hole 941i of the rear base 941 and protrude toward the rear side are also inserted into the insertion opening 982l of the ball throwing unit 970, and with the extension portion 945d penetrating the insertion opening 982l, the plate-shaped portion 945e is positioned on the rear side of the bulge portion 982.

The rotational opening 982m is an opening formed to a necessary extent to avoid restricting the displacement of the extension portion 945d that penetrates the bulge portion 982. By forming the rotational opening 982m to a minimum size (a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball), it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sent to the front side through the rotational opening 982m. Next, the displacement of the plate-shaped portion 945e accompanying the opening and closing operation of the blade member 945 will be described with reference to FIG. 1496.

Figures 1496(a) and 1496(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting unit 980 taken along line MCDXCVb-MCDXCVb in Figure 1495(a). Figure 1496(a) illustrates the wing member 945 (plate-shaped portion 945e) in the closed state, and Figure 1496(b) illustrates the wing member 945 (plate-shaped portion 945e) in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 1496(a), when the vane member 945 is in the closed state, it is retracted from the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are directed to the openings 985e, 985f. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls that have flowed down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided to the third branch passage BK3 side.

As shown in FIG. 1496(b), when the blade member 945 is in the open state, the plate-shaped portion 945e enters the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are directed to the third branch passage BK3 side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided into the openings 985e, 985f.

That is, the wing member 945 is configured to be able to switch between an open state and a closed state, thereby switching the guided side of the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In other words, the wing member 945 not only acts to switch the guide direction of the balls flowing down the area between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 where the wing-shaped main body 945m (see FIG. 1492) is arranged, but also acts to switch the guide direction of the balls flowing down the internal area of the sorting unit 980 where the plate-shaped portion 945e is arranged.

The following describes the case where the blade member 945 opens and closes immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. The upstream branch position BK0 is set as the position immediately before the position where the flowing ball is subjected to the action of the blade member 945. When the blade member 945 opens and closes to the closed state immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 in the open state, the ball is pushed into the third branch passage BK3 by the plate-shaped portion 945e.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in a closed state and immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0, the wing member 945 opens and closes to the open state, the ball is guided to the openings 985e, 985f, or to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2.

In this way, the side of the wing member 945 in the direction of movement is not blocked, and a space is formed in the direction of movement that is large enough to guide the ball, making it easier to avoid the ball getting stuck between the wing member 945 and the bulge 982.

When the ball is guided to the openings 985e, 985f, it is possible for the ball to win a lottery for special pattern 1 by being detected by the detection device SE3, and the player can receive the benefit of a prize ball being paid out, but when the ball is guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2, the player cannot win a lottery for special pattern 1, nor can the player receive the benefit of a prize ball being paid out.

Therefore, if the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 when the feather member 945 is closed, the feather member 945 may open and close immediately afterwards, causing the player to suffer a disadvantage. This can increase attention to the upstream branch position BK0 and the feather member 945.

As shown in FIG. 1496(b), the feather member 945 and feather-like portion 945e are configured with a symmetrical shape, so that there is no difference in the ease with which the feather member 945 can pick up balls that flow down the first passage TR1 and balls that flow down the second passage TR2. In addition, ball clogging when balls are guided simultaneously from the left and right is prevented by making the shape of the rolling surface 982g, which serves as the rolling surface of the third branch passage BK3, asymmetrical as described above.

Returning to Figures 1494 and 1495, the explanation will be given. The distribution part 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the opposing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a roughly T-shape when viewed from the front. The distribution part 983 is mainly formed with an action part 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from approximately the center position in the extension direction of the action part 983a, a through hole 983c penetrating the connecting part of the action part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, a contact part 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall part 983e formed by connecting the action part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the rear base 985 side.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which the shaft member 988a supported between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and rear base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, so that the distribution part 983 is disposed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 in a rotatable state.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed by extending radially outward from the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution section 983 is restricted by rotation to one side or the other, the distance L17 (see FIG. 1495(b)) from its tip to the inside of the intermediate plate 983b is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This restricts the throw of the game ball to either the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In addition, the intermediate plate 983b can be switched from a state in which the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one side of the first passage TR1 to a state in which the throwing of the game ball is restricted to the other side of the second passage TR2 by rotating the distribution portion 983 around the through hole 983c.

The action portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. In addition, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the abutment portion 983d is set lower than the connection position with the abutment portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution portion 983 through the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action portion 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is set smaller than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above.

Therefore, when the distribution section 983 is disposed between the opposing rear base 985 and front base 981, the wall section 983e can be disposed inside the recess 985h. This prevents the game ball sent from the inlet 982d to the inside of the distribution unit 980 from getting caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the flow of the game ball from being obstructed.

The wall portion 983e is provided with a housing portion 983e1 on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b, recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b at the radially outer end from the through hole 983c. The housing portion 983e1 is a portion that houses the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. The housing portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is housed inside from the rear base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is arranged in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic force acts on the magnetic body 988c from the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985, and the distribution section 983 can rotate around the through hole 983c as an axis, causing the extension direction of the action section 983a to be tilted to one side or the other.

In addition, the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the storage section 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, so that the magnetic body 988c inserted into the storage section 983e1 can be prevented from slipping out of the storage section 983e1. In other words, since there is no need for a part to lock the magnetic body 988c inserted into the storage section 983e1, the structure of the sorting section 983 can be simplified, and the magnetic body 988c can be easily arranged in the sorting section 983.

The magnetic force of magnetic body 988b and magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. This prevents the game ball sent inside the sorting unit 980 from being magnetically attracted to magnetic body 988b and magnetic body 988c and from stagnating inside the sorting unit 980.

Next, the operation pattern of the feather member 945 driven by the drive unit 960 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1496, the relationship between the time required for a ball that enters the first winning hole 64 to flow down will be described.

After a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and reaches the ball sending passage TR0, the distribution section 983 is tilted to flow down to one side. This tilting operation overlaps with the operation of the seesaw member 762 explained in Figures 1483(a) and 1483(b), so an explanation is omitted, but in this embodiment, the magnetic force of the magnetic bodies 988b, 988c is designed to be large in order to ensure that the time required for the tilting operation is sufficiently long. In other words, in this embodiment, the tilting operation of the distribution section 983 (operation from the state shown in Figure 1483(a) to the state shown in Figure 1483(b)) is designed to take at least 0.8 seconds.

When a ball flows from the throwing passage TR0 to the first passage TR1 after the sorting unit 963 is tilted, the passages are designed so that it takes 0.4 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detection device SE4. Also, when a ball flows from the throwing passage TR0 to the second passage TR2 after the sorting unit 963 is tilted, the passages are designed so that it takes 0.2 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detection device SE5. In other words, the vertical distance between the detection sensors SE4 and SE5 is set to a distance that requires 0.2 seconds at the ball's flow speed.

A pair of upstream branch positions BK0 are set on the left and right as positions just before the flowing ball is subjected to the action of the feather member 945. It is designed so that it takes 0.6 seconds for the ball to reach the upstream branch position BK0 after flowing from the ball sending passage TR0 to the first passage TR1 side or the second passage TR2 side.

In other words, it takes 0.2 seconds for the ball to reach the upstream branch position BK0 after it is detected by the detection device SE4. Also, it takes 0.4 seconds for the ball to reach the upstream branch position BK0 after it is detected by the detection device SE5.

If the feather member 945 is closed when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0, the ball passes through openings 985b, 985c or openings 985e, 985f, whereas if the feather member 945 is open when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0, the ball is guided to the third branch passage BK3 and passes through the ball sending opening 982k (see FIG. 1494(a)).

According to the above-mentioned flow path configuration, if the operation pattern of the vane member 945 driven by the drive unit 960 is designed to end in less than 0.6 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, even if multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 with no gap between them, the normal pattern can start changing immediately when the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5.

For example, if multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 without any gaps between them, and the previous ball flows to the first passage TR1 and is detected by detection device SE4, there is a gap of 0.8 seconds before the next ball flows to the second passage TR2, and even if detection device SE5 is 0.2 seconds above detection device SE4, a gap of 0.6 seconds is ensured. In other words, it takes 0.6 seconds from when the previous ball is detected by detection device SE4 until the next ball is detected by detection device SE5.

For example, if multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 without any gaps between them, and the previous ball flows to the second passage TR2 side and is detected by detection device SE5, there is a gap of 0.8 seconds before the next ball flows to the first passage TR1 side, and because detection device SE4 is 0.2 seconds below detection device SE5, a gap of 1.0 seconds is ensured. In other words, it takes 1.0 seconds from when the previous ball is detected by detection device SE5 until the next ball is detected by detection device SE4.

In this way, when multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 without any gaps between them, the interval at which the balls are detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 will be 0.6 seconds or more, regardless of whether the previous ball flows to the left or right.

Based on this premise, the eleventh to fourteenth operation patterns described in this embodiment are each designed to be completed 0.5 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 (0.5 seconds are required for the display of the normal pattern to finish), so even if multiple balls enter the first winning slot 64 with no gap between them, the normal pattern can start to change immediately once the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5. This makes it possible to prevent a time delay from occurring between the detection of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the operation of the wing member 945 being executed.

Figures 1497(a) to 1497(d) are diagrams showing an example of the detection of the passage of a ball by detection devices SE4 and SE5, and the change over time in the state of the wing member 945. Note that Figure 1497(a) illustrates the change over time in the eleventh actuation pattern, Figure 1497(b) illustrates the change over time in the twelfth actuation pattern, Figure 1497(c) illustrates the change over time in the thirteenth actuation pattern, and Figure 1497(d) illustrates the change over time in the fourteenth actuation pattern.

Figures 1497(a) to 1497(d) explain the time-based change in the state of the feather member 945 when the second pattern display device 83 (see Figure 1477) displays a "circle" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern (0.1 seconds) due to the detection of the passage of a ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5.

As shown in FIG. 1497(a), in the 11th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is displayed stationary (0.1 seconds later), the wing member 945 is opened (also shown as "open" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures), and the open state is maintained for 0.4 seconds.

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is detected by detection devices SE4 and SE5, the feather member 945 is maintained in an open state both 0.2 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE4 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0 and 0.4 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE5 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, regardless of whether the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 flows down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, the ball can be guided to the third branch passage BK3 side, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In other words, there are more lottery entries for special pattern 2 than for special pattern 1 based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64.

As shown in FIG. 1497(b), in the 12th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is displayed stationary (0.1 seconds later), the wing member 945 is put into an open state (also shown as "open" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures), and this open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. For the next 0.2 seconds, it is put into a closed state (also shown as "closed" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures).

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is detected by detection devices SE4 and SE5, the feather member 945 is maintained in an open state 0.2 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE4 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0, but the feather member 945 is closed 0.4 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE5 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, if a ball that enters the first winning opening 64 flows down the first passage TR1, the ball can be guided to the third branch passage BK3, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. However, if the ball flows down the second passage TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch passage BK3 and cannot enter the second winning opening 640, so the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 (see FIG. 1495(a)).

In other words, the lottery that is won based on the ball entering the first winning slot 64 alternates between the lottery for special symbol 1 and the lottery for special symbol 2. When the ball flows down the first passage TR1, it corresponds to the lottery for special symbol 2.

As shown in FIG. 1497(c), in the 13th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is displayed stationary (0.1 seconds later), the wing member 945 is opened (also shown as "open" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures) 0.2 seconds later, and the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. After that, it is closed (also shown as "closed" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures).

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is detected by detection devices SE4 and SE5, the feather member 945 is closed 0.2 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE4 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0, but the feather member 945 is maintained in an open state 0.4 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE5 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, if a ball that enters the first winning opening 64 flows down the first passage TR1, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch passage BK3 and cannot enter the second winning opening 640, so the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 (see FIG. 1495 (a)). However, if the ball flows down the second passage TR2, the ball can be guided to the third branch passage BK3, making it easier to enter the second winning opening 640.

In other words, the lottery that is won based on the ball entering the first winning slot 64 alternates between the lottery for special symbol 1 and the lottery for special symbol 2. When the ball flows down the second passage TR1, it corresponds to the lottery for special symbol 2.

As shown in FIG. 1497(d), in the 14th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is displayed stationary (0.1 seconds later), the wing member 945 is opened (also shown as "open" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures) just before 0.4 seconds have elapsed, and is closed (also shown as "closed" in the figure; the same applies in the following figures) immediately thereafter.

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is detected by detection devices SE4 and SE5, the wing member 945 is maintained in a closed state both 0.2 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE4 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0 and 0.4 seconds after it is detected by detection device SE5 and reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, regardless of whether a ball that enters the first winning opening 64 flows down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch passage BK3, and it is not possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In other words, there are more lottery entries for special pattern 1 than for special pattern 2 based on a ball entering the first winning opening 64.

As shown in Figures 1497(a) to 1497(d), by changing the operating pattern of the feather member 945, the lottery that is won when the ball enters the first winning slot 64 can be switched between a lottery for special pattern 1 or a lottery for special pattern 2.

In other words, when the feather member 945 operates in the 11th operating pattern, it is possible to win consecutive draws for special pattern 2. Also, when the feather member 945 operates in the 14th operating pattern, it is possible to win consecutive draws for special pattern 1.

When the vane member 945 operates in the 12th or 13th operating pattern, the special symbols obtained by the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the balls flowing down the second passage TR2 are different, and the special symbols 1 and 2 are obtained alternately.

Here, if the profit a player can get from a jackpot resulting from the drawing of special symbol 1 is different from the profit a player can get from a jackpot resulting from the drawing of special symbol 2, the player will pay close attention to whether the jackpot was the result of the drawing of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2.

Conventionally, gaming machines in which balls are distributed to the left and right by the distribution unit 983 are configured so that a ball diverted to one side (usually the left) by the distribution unit 983 can win a lottery for special pattern 1, and a ball diverted to the other side (usually the right) can win a lottery for special pattern 2.

Therefore, if it was possible to confirm whether the ball was being swept to the left or right by the sorting unit 983, it was possible to know whether the upcoming drawing would be for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, even if the player took their eyes off the ball. In this case, attention to the path of the ball's flow downstream of the sorting unit 983 would decrease, resulting in the problem that the play area is not being effectively used as a presentation area.

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the 12th operating pattern, a ball flowing down the first passage TR1 can win a draw for special pattern 2, and in the 13th operating pattern, a ball flowing down the second passage TR2 can win a draw for special pattern 2. Therefore, simply by checking whether a ball is flowing left or right by the distribution unit 983, it is not possible to know whether the ball can win a draw for special pattern 1 or special pattern 2.

In other words, unless it is confirmed downstream of the distribution section 983 whether the ball is picked up by the plate-shaped portion 945e of the feather member 945, or whether the ball passes through the ball sending hole 941k (see FIG. 1493) and flows forward to enter the second winning port 640, it is not possible to know whether the ball will win the lottery for special pattern 1 or special pattern 2. This makes it possible to increase attention to the flow path of the ball downstream of the distribution section 983, and makes effective use of the play area as a presentation area.

In addition, in each operating pattern, the relationship between the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 and the feather member 945 has been mainly explained. However, since the feather-shaped body 945m of the feather member 945 is positioned further forward than the rear base 941 (see FIG. 1490), if a ball flowing down the front side of the rear base 941 reaches the feather member 945 at the exact moment that the feather member 945 is in the open state, it is natural that the ball will be guided to the second winning opening 640.

Figure 1498 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line MCDXCVIII-MCDXCVIII in Figure 1491(a), and Figures 1499(a) and 1499(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 taken along line MCDXCIXa-MCDXCIXa in Figure 1498.

Figure 1499(a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and Figure 1499(b) illustrates the open state of the wing member 945. Note that Figure 1497 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 1498 and 1499.

As shown in FIG. 1498, the rolling plate portion 941l and the ball throwing hole 941k are positioned closer to the front than the ball throwing opening 982k of the sorting unit 980, so that the ball guided to the third branch passage BK3 in the internal flow path of the sorting unit 980 flows down toward the front.

This ball appears to be approaching the player from the player's point of view, and is therefore visually perceived in a manner that is clearly different from balls that appear to be moving away from the player by flowing downward in the play area or backwards, such as balls that enter the first winning hole 64 or the third receiving portion 944a.

By having the player focus on the ball that appears to be approaching him/her, the player can easily notice when a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 escapes from the internal flow path of the distribution unit 980 and flows toward the second winning port 640.

This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the second winning slot 640 without the player realizing it, and the lottery for special symbol 2 is executed without the player realizing it.

In addition, balls flowing down the front side of the distribution unit 980 (the front side of the rear base 941) can act to block the player's line of sight. This makes it easier to reduce the visibility of the balls as they flow down the internal path of the distribution unit 980, making game balls that are guided into the third branch passage BK3 and appear to be approaching the player's side even more noticeable.

In addition, since the ball throwing hole 941k is located on the back side of the front base 943, if the front base 943 is made of an opaque resin material, the visibility of the ball throwing hole 941k and the ball guided to the front side through the ball throwing hole 941k can be reduced.

In this case, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 can be easily seen, but it is difficult to know that the ball will flow down the ball sending hole 941k to the front side, so it is easy for a ball that has entered the first winning hole 64 to enter the second winning hole 640 without the player realizing, causing a lottery for special pattern 2 to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 1498, a detection device SE6 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed downstream (back side) of the second winning opening 640. The detection device SE6 is a device for detecting the passage of a game ball and has a similar configuration to the detection device SE3, and a detection hole SE1a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed through it in the thickness direction.

The lottery that can be won by the ball passing through detection device SE3 is a lottery for special pattern 1, while the lottery that can be won by the ball passing through detection device SE6 is a lottery for special pattern 2.

Which of the eleventh to fourteenth operating patterns (see FIG. 1497) the feather member 945 will operate in is preset based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 1488).

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, a, or b, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the 11th operation pattern. If the jackpot type is jackpot B or C, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the 12th operation pattern. If the jackpot type is jackpot c, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the 13th operation pattern. During periods other than the duration of the 11th to 13th operation patterns, the operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the 14th operation pattern.

As a result, for the same event of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 and being distributed to the left and right, whether the ball can win a lottery for special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 can be changed depending on which operating pattern is used. This makes it possible to increase attention to the path of the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 and attract the player's attention.

In addition to the operation patterns shown in FIG. 1497, the wing member 945 also has a long-open operation pattern in which the wing member 945 opens for a long period of time (approximately 2 seconds) from the timing when the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4, SE5 or the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 (see FIG. 1477).

When the vane member 945 is operated in the long open operating pattern, balls that flow down the front side of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 1490) can be easily picked up by the vane-shaped body 945m (see FIG. 1492). In addition, balls that enter the first winning hole 64 can be easily guided to the third branch passage BK3 (see FIG. 1496(b)).

In this way, it is easy to configure the ball picked up by the feather-shaped main body 945m to repeatedly enter the second winning opening 640. In addition, it is easy to configure the ball that has once entered the first winning opening 64 to be guided by the plate-shaped portion 945e (see FIG. 1496(b)) to the third branch passage BK3 side, so that it ultimately enters the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game mode in which the lottery for special symbol 1 is avoided and the lottery for special symbol 2 is repeatedly won.

As shown in FIG. 1499(b), when the wing member 945 is in the open state, a ball P21 placed on the wing-shaped main body 945m on the front side of the rear base 941 and a ball P22 placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e on the rear side of the rear base 941 can be guided simultaneously at different front and rear positions (separate positions).

Therefore, even if the wing member 945 changes to the closed state in this state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the balls P21 and P22 collide with each other. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions in which the opening and closing operation of the wing member 945 is not completed due to the balls interfering with the opening and closing operation of the wing member 945.

Furthermore, since the ball P22 on the plate-shaped portion 945e can be placed on it, the number of balls that can be guided simultaneously when the feather member 945 is in an open state can be increased compared to the number of balls P21 that can be placed on the feather-shaped main body 945m at the same time (in this embodiment, one on each side).

For example, in a game mode in which all balls are launched toward the feather members 945, when the feather members 945 are in an open state, only one ball can be placed on the feather-shaped body 945m of one feather member 945 at a time, and it is difficult to place multiple balls on it at the same time.

On the other hand, in a game mode in which some balls are shot toward the vane members 945 and the remaining balls are shot toward the first winning opening 64, the balls can be placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e regardless of whether or not they are on the vane-shaped main body 945m, so it is easy for balls to be placed on the vane members 945 on one side at the same time.

In other words, the number of balls that can be placed on the feather member 945 at the same time can be changed depending on whether the game mode is one in which all balls are shot toward the feather member 945, or one in which some balls are shot toward the first winning hole 64 in addition to the feather member 945.

Ball P22, which reaches the feather member 945 via the first winning opening 64, and ball P21, which reaches the feather member 945 without passing through the first winning opening 64, have different flow directions before they reach the feather member 945, and therefore different flow speeds after they reach the feather member 945. Therefore, even though the balls reach the feather member 945 at the same time, they look different.

That is, the ball P22 flows vertically downward through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and reaches the plate-like portion 945e of the vane member 945, while the ball P21 reaches the vane-like body 945m in a downward flow direction having a velocity component that is directed from the left-right outer side to the left-right inner side of the guide portion 941g1 (see FIG. 1491(a)).

Therefore, ball P21 flows faster to the left and right after reaching the wing member 945 than ball P22 because the left-right velocity component is larger. Therefore, even if balls P21 and P22 reach the wing member 945 at the same time, the time that balls P21 and P22 overlap when viewed from the front can be shortened, thereby improving the visibility of the balls rolling on the wing member 945.

Depending on the timing at which ball P22 rolls on the top surface of rolling plate portion 941l and passes through ball throw hole 941k to the front side of rear base 941, it may collide with ball P21 (their paths will merge).

Here, the vertical position of the top surface height at the rotation base end side of the feather member 945 is positioned lower than the vertical position of the lower edge of the ball throwing hole 941k. This allows the vertical position where the ball rolling on the rolling plate portion 941l flies into the front side of the rear base 941 and the vertical position where the ball rolling on the feather-shaped main body 945m flies into the space between the pair of feather members 945 to be shifted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when balls collide with each other, the vertical positions of the balls can be shifted, and multiple balls can be made to flow down in sequence by relying on their own weight. This helps prevent balls from clogging.

In addition, in the long-open operation pattern of the wing member 945, as can be seen from the fact that the open duration exceeds 0.6 seconds, when, for example, multiple balls enter the first winning slot 64 without any gaps between them, there is a waiting time before the normal pattern starts to change (the change of the normal pattern may be put on hold).

Therefore, unlike the case described in FIG. 1497 where the timing at which the ball is detected by detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the timing at which the wing members 945 are opened and closed are set to correspond to the time it takes for the ball to flow downstream, it becomes difficult to match the placement of the ball with the opening and closing of the wing members 945.

Therefore, not all balls can be guided to the second winning opening 640, and it is possible that some of the balls that enter the first winning opening 64 may reach the upstream branch position BK0 when the wing member 945 is in the closed state (see FIG. 1496(a)).

On the other hand, in the long-open operation pattern, by setting the time during which the wing member 945 is maintained in the closed state (operation waiting time, post-operation waiting time) to a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), it is possible to minimize the probability of the wing member 945 reaching the upstream branch position BK0 at the timing when it is in the closed state (see FIG. 1496(a)).

The ball P22 rolling on the top surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e arrives at intervals of at least 1.8 seconds due to the operation of the distribution portion 983. In other words, it is configured so that multiple balls cannot be placed on the ball at the same time.

On the other hand, there is no restriction on the interval at which ball P21 reaches feather-shaped body 945m, and multiple balls may reach it at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable to form feather-shaped body 945m stronger than plate-shaped portion 945e.

In this embodiment, the blade-shaped body 945m is made thicker than the plate-shaped portion 945e, making it stronger. In addition, the blade-shaped body 945m is supported directly by the shaft member 945a, which makes it possible to suppress changes in posture and bending in the front-rear direction due to the weight of the ball.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

By extending the plate-like portion 945e from the wing-shaped main body 945m of the wing member 945 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 to the rear side, it is possible to act on game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 arranged inside the base plate 60.

In other words, the feather member 945 can switch between a state in which it is easy to guide a game ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 toward the second winning opening 640 and a state in which it prevents the game ball from flowing down to the second winning opening 640, and can also switch between a state in which it is easy to guide a game ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 toward the second winning opening 640 and a state in which it prevents the game ball from flowing down to the second winning opening 640.

Furthermore, a rear base 941 that functions as a partition plate is provided between the balls rolling on the upper surface of the feather-shaped body 945m and the balls rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e, making it possible to prevent the balls from colliding with each other at any position.

This prevents the ball from falling out of the vane member 945 (spill on the side opposite to the side guided to the second winning opening 640) due to a collision between the ball rolling on the vane-shaped body 945m and the ball rolling on the plate-shaped portion 945e.

In addition, at the position where the ball that entered the first winning opening 64 branches off into the flow path on the second winning opening 640 side (for example, the third branch passage BK3), the direction in which the ball flows down has a front-to-rear component. This makes it possible to highlight the area that is closely related to the ball flowing down to the second winning opening 640.

It is also possible to create a case where it is possible to manage the detection devices SE4 and SE5 so that they are not detected from the time the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 until the display of the normal pattern changes ends. This allows the feather member 945, whose operation is controlled by the detection of the ball, to act in a timely manner on the ball that has passed through the detection devices SE4 and SE5.

There is an interval of at least 0.8 seconds between the timing when the ball is sent to the first passage TR1 and the timing when the ball is sent to the second passage TR2, so that balls do not enter the third branch passage BK3 from the left and right at the same time, but in addition, the rolling surface 982g is formed asymmetrically, making it easier to prevent ball clogging in the third branch passage BK3. This makes it possible to prevent malfunction of the feather member 945 due to ball clogging, even if the merging point of the ball flow path is close to the feather member 945.

The speed of the balls rolling on the top surface of the wing member 945 on the front side of the base plate 60 is configured to be different from the speed of the balls rolling on the top surface of the wing member 945 inside the base plate 60. This makes it possible to prevent the front and rear balls from continuously overlapping, and makes it easier to grasp the number of balls rolling on the top surface of the wing member 945.

In addition, regarding the number of balls that can be placed on the feather member 945, while the feather-shaped main body 945m can simultaneously carry multiple balls, the number of balls that can be placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e is limited to one. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the feather member 945 by making the feather-shaped main body 945m stronger than the plate-shaped portion 945e.

In addition, by providing multiple operating patterns for the electric roler 640a, different patterns for winning the lottery for the special symbol can be created. For example, when the ball repeatedly enters the first winning slot 64, it is possible to switch between a pattern in which the lottery for special symbol 1 is repeatedly won, a pattern in which the lottery for special symbol 1 and the lottery for special symbol 2 are alternately won, and a pattern in which the lottery for special symbol 2 is repeatedly won.

In addition, in a pattern in which the drawing of special symbol 1 and the drawing of special symbol 2 are alternately obtained, a pattern can be formed in which the game ball on the left or right corresponds to the drawing of special symbol 2 is reversed. This makes it possible to improve attention to the area downstream of the distribution unit 983, since simply checking whether the ball has flowed to the left or right is insufficient information.

In addition, when right-hand play is recommended as a pattern for winning the lottery for the special symbol, if the ball accidentally enters the first winning slot 64, it is possible to switch between a pattern in which it is easy to win the lottery for special symbol 1 and a pattern in which there is a high probability of avoiding winning the lottery for special symbol 1.

Next, the 52nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1500. In the 50th embodiment, a case was described in which a ball passes through a normal winning opening (through gate) 765 when flowing down one of the paths allocated by the path configuration device 700. However, in the path configuration device 3700 of the 52nd embodiment, a normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is provided that can detect the passage of a ball when the ball flows down the other path. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1500 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the 52nd embodiment. In the path configuration device 3700, of the paths that are distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 760, a normal winning port (through gate) 3765 is disposed on the left path.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is positioned so that the left-right distance from the seesaw member 762 is the same as the left-right distance between the seesaw member 762 and the normal winning opening (through gate) 765.

Since a normal symbol can be drawn not only when the game ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows to the right, but also when it flows to the left, the frequency with which the electric device 640a operates can be increased.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which the number of passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765 was reserved up to a maximum of four times. In this case, there is an advantage that the reserved state is not interrupted and the electric device 640a can be easily operated continuously, allowing right-hand play to be performed smoothly.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the number of passes through the normal winning ports (through gates) 66, 67, 765, 3765 is reserved up to a maximum of one time. The operation pattern selected by lottery for normal symbols when there are zero reserved balls is different from the operation pattern selected by lottery for normal symbols when there is one reserved ball. Since a state in which the number of reserved balls is full (one ball) is more likely to occur than when there are four reserved balls, differences in operation patterns occur frequently.

In this embodiment, as an example, in the special state, when the number of reserved balls with normal symbols is 0, the second activation pattern is likely to be selected, and when the number of reserved balls with normal symbols is 1, the first activation pattern is likely to be selected.

On this premise, when balls enter the first winning slot 64 consecutively (see Figures 1483 and 1484), it becomes easier to maintain the electric device 640a in the entered state at the timing when the third ball P3 reaches the moving plate member 641.

In other words, ball P1 is detected at normal winning opening (through gate) 765, and ball P2 is detected at normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 before the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the detection of ball P1. Therefore, the operation pattern selected in the lottery for the normal symbol upon detection of ball P2 is likely to be the first operation pattern.

As a result, the electric device 640a is maintained in the entered state even before the ball P3 reaches the moving plate member 641, so that both balls P1 and P2 can be guided to the second ball sending section 736 from the state shown in FIG. 1483(a).

In FIG. 1483(a), the case where ball P1 flows to the right side is described, but even if the inclination of seesaw member 762 is reversed and ball P1 flows to the left side, the operation pattern selected by lottery for normal symbols upon detection of ball P2 is likely to be the first operation pattern. Therefore, since electric device 640a is maintained in the entered state before ball P2 reaches moving plate member 641, ball P2 can be guided to second ball sending section 736.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is one as an example, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls for normal symbols may be set to four, as in the explanation of the 50th embodiment.

Next, the 53rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1501. In the 50th embodiment, the moving plate member 641 is provided with a right guide section 643 that guides game balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, and a left guide section 645 that guides game balls that have not entered the first winning opening 64, and a case has been described in which the guide sections 643, 645 are partitioned. However, the path configuration device 4700 of the 53rd embodiment is configured so that game balls that have not entered the first winning opening 64 can be guided to the right guide section 643. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1501 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the 53rd embodiment. As shown in Figure 1501, the moving plate member 4641, which slides forward and backward as the state of the electric role 4640a is switched between a retracted state and an advanced state, is provided with a right guide portion 643 and an upstream guide portion 4645 that extends from the left end of the right guide portion 643 to the upper left along the slope of the sloped surface 643a of the right guide portion 643.

The upstream guide section 4645 has an inclined surface 4645a that rolls the ball and slopes downward to the right, with the angle of inclination being the same as the angle of inclination of the right guide section 643 (approximately 5 degrees from the horizontal).

In this embodiment, an opening is formed in the left and right inner wall portions of the bending member 740, the opening being large enough to allow the ball rolling on the upper surface of the moving plate member 4641 to pass through. That is, an opening similar to the opening 744 (see FIG. 1482(a)) is formed through the left and right inner wall portions of the bending member 740 (the wall portion on the left side of the right guide portion 643).

As a result, in addition to the path of the ball that has passed through the first winning opening 64, a path can be prepared that rolls through the upstream guide section 4645 and reaches the right guide section 643 as an inflow path into the first ball sending path KR1.

As shown in FIG. 1501, when a ball rolls from the upstream guide section 4645 through the right guide section 643, depending on the operation timing of the moving plate member 4641, the ball may be received by the recovery hole 752 or the second ball sending section 736.

That is, when the electric device 4640a is switched to the retracted state while the ball is positioned on the first ball throwing path KR1, the ball flows down toward the recovery hole 752. On the other hand, if the electric device 4640a is still in the advanced state while the ball is positioned on KR1, the ball passes through the right guide portion 643 to the right and flows down toward the second ball throwing portion 736. That is, the ball rolling to the right on the top surface of the stiffening plate member 4641 can be made to flow down toward the recovery hole 752 or the second ball throwing portion 736.

The moving plate member 4641 is inclined downward to the right, but when a ball is hit with a right-handed hit, it passes above the bending member 740 to the left and reaches the moving plate member 4641, and there is a possibility that the momentum to the left will cause the ball to pass through the moving plate member 4641 in a leftward direction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding edge 734b of the first ball sending portion 734 is disposed so as to protrude upward from the left end of the moving plate member 4641. In other words, a ball that is about to pass through the left end of the moving plate member 4641 can be made to collide with the protruding edge 734b, causing the ball to bounce back, making it easier to create a state in which the ball rolls to the right on the upper surface of the moving plate member 4641.

Furthermore, the greater the repulsive force of the ball's rebound in the rightward direction, the shorter the time it takes for the ball to reach the right end of the movable plate member 4641. In other words, the protruding edge portion 734b not only prevents the ball from dropping off the left end of the movable plate member 4641, but also makes it easier for the ball to reach the right end of the movable plate member 4641 while the movable plate member 4641 is maintained in the advanced state.

The left end of the moving plate member 4641 is located above the ball passing hole 734a. Therefore, when the electric device 4640a is in the entering state, if the ball travels to the left on the top surface of the moving plate member 4641 and the moving plate member 4641 changes to the retracted state just before reaching the left end, the ball will fly leftward in a parabola, and although there is a low probability, it is possible for the ball to enter the ball passing hole 734a of the first ball throwing section 734.

Next, referring to Fig. 1502 to Fig. 1551, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") B10 will be described as the 54th embodiment. Fig. 1502 is a front view of the pachinko machine B10 in the 54th embodiment, Fig. 1503 is a front view of the game board B13 of the pachinko machine B10, and Fig. 1504 is a rear view of the pachinko machine B10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side for the pachinko machine B10 in the state shown in FIG. 1502. Also, the top side will be referred to as the upper (top) side, the bottom side as the lower (bottom) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side for the pachinko machine B10 in the state shown in FIG. 1502. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 1503) indicate the up-down, left-right, and front-back directions of the pachinko machine B10, respectively.

As shown in Fig. 1502, the pachinko machine B10 comprises an outer frame B11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame B12, which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame B11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame B11. Metal hinges B18 are attached to the outer frame B11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 1502) to support the inner frame B12, and the inner frame B12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges B18 are provided as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board B13 (see FIG. 1503) having a number of nails BKG1 and winning holes B63, B64, etc., is removably attached to the inner frame B12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board B13. The inner frame B12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit B112a (see FIG. 1505) that launches balls into the front area of the game board B13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit B112a to the front area of the game board B13.

The illustration of the nail BKG1 shows the outer shape of the nail BKG1 when viewed in the length direction unless otherwise specified. That is, the nail BKG1 is generally formed with a bulging shape at the tip on the front side (similar to a shape of a safety pin), but the shape of the bulging part is illustrated, and the shape of the thin part that is driven into the base plate B60 is not illustrated. Therefore, even if the gap between the nails BKG1 in FIG. 1503 is less than the diameter of the ball, the ball can still pass through if the gap between the thin parts of the nail BKG1 (not shown) is longer than the diameter of the ball.

On the front side of the inner frame B12, there is a front frame B14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower plate unit B15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges B19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1502) to support the front frame B14 and the lower plate unit B15, and the front frame B14 and the lower plate unit B15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinge B19 is provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame B12 and the front frame B14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole B21 of the cylinder lock B20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame B14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window B14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit B16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame B14, and the front of the game board B13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine B10 through the glass unit B16.

The front frame B14 has an upper tray B17 for storing balls, which juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged onto this upper tray B17. The bottom of the upper tray B17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1502), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray B17 to the ball launching unit B112a (see FIG. 1505). In addition, a frame button B22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray B17. This frame button B22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device B81 (see FIG. 1503) or when changing the content of the super reach performance.

The front frame B14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around it (for example, in the corners). The light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking depending on the change in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window B14c is provided with illumination units B29-B33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine B10, these illumination units B29-B33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit B29-B33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame B14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1502) is provided with an indicator lamp B34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window B35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section B32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame B14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space BK1 (see FIG. 1503) on the front of the game board B13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine B10. In addition, in the pachinko machine B10, a plated member B36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections B29 to B33 to create a more dazzling appearance.

The ball lending operation unit B40 is disposed below the window B14c. The ball lending operation unit B40 is provided with a number display unit B41, a ball lending button B42, and a return button B43. When the ball lending operation unit B40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine B10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit B41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button B42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray B17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button B43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray B17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit B40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit B40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit B15, located below the upper tray B17, has a lower tray B50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray B17. An operating handle B51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray B50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board B13.

The operating handle B51 contains a touch sensor B51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit B112a, a launch stop switch B51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle B51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle B51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor B51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the front of the game board B13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle B51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor B51a and the launch stop switch B51b are off.

A ball removal lever B52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray B50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray B50 downward. This ball removal lever B52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray B50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever B52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray B50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray B50. As mentioned above, the operating handle B51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray B50, and an ashtray B53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray B50.

As shown in FIG. 1503, the game board B13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails BKG1 and windmills BWF for guiding balls, as well as rails B61, B62, a general winning port B63, a first winning port B64, a second winning port B640, a third winning port B64b, a variable winning device B65, an upper variable winning device B700, normal winning ports (through gates) B66, B67, a variable display unit B80, etc., to a base plate B60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame B12 (see FIG. 1502).

The base plate B60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate B60 from the front side. The general winning port B63, the winning unit B400 in which the first winning port B64 and the second winning port B640 are arranged, the variable winning device B65 in which the third winning port B64b is arranged, the upper variable winning device B700, and the variable display unit B80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate B60 by router processing and are fixed from the front side of the game board B13 with tapping screws or the like.

The construction of the base plate B60 is not limited to resin materials. For example, it may be made of wood with thin plates glued together, and the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate B60 may be formed so that they cannot be seen by the player from the front side.

The central front portion of the game board B13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame B12 through the window portion B14c (see FIG. 1502) of the front frame B14. The configuration of the game board B13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 1503.

An outer rail B62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board B13, and an inner rail B61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail B62 is set up inside the outer rail B62. The inner rail B61 and the outer rail B62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board B13, and the game board B13 and the glass unit B16 (see Figure 1502) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board B13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board B13 and is formed by the two rails B61, B62 and the resin outer edge member B73 that connects the rails.

The above-mentioned game area is a narrow interpretation, and in a broader sense, the game area may be expressed as the area where game balls flow down until the profit given to the player by the game balls that flow down is determined. In this sense, the game area is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board B13. For example, the upstream path of the detection sensor B462 described later may also be included in the game area.

The two rails B61, B62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit B112a (see FIG. 1505) to the top of the game board B13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail B61 (upper left of FIG. 1503), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board B13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber B69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail B62 (upper right of FIG. 1503) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber B69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail B61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail B62, a resin arc member B70 formed with an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate B60 and fixed.

The play area B301 on the front side of the game board B13 is largely divided into a left play area B302, a right play area B303, and a lower play area B304 with respect to the center frame B86 located in the inner central position.

The left side game area B302 is a game area where game balls hit from the left, which are launched with a reduced launch strength, flow down, and the right side game area B303 is a game area where game balls hit from the right, which are launched with a greater launch strength than game balls hit from the left, flow down. The lower game area B304 is a game area where game balls that have passed through the left side game area B302 or the right side game area B303 flow down.

The lottery based on winning will be explained in detail below. In the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is held when a ball wins a prize (a ball that is expected to give the player some kind of benefit (e.g., the payout of a prize ball, the execution of a lottery, or the benefit of moving to a more advantageous state)) in the first winning slot B64, the second winning slot B640, or the third winning slot B64b, and a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is held when the ball passes through the normal winning slots B66, B67.

In the special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is conducted for balls that enter the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b, a win/loss determination is made as to whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot (or a miss), and if it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined.

In the special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is held for balls that enter the second winning slot B640, a determination is made as to whether the special pattern is a big win, a miss, or a small win. If it is determined that the special pattern is a big win, the type of big win is also determined, and if it is determined that the special pattern is a small win, the type of small win is also determined.

In other words, in the lottery for the special symbol held for the ball that enters the second winning slot B640, in addition to determining whether or not it is a big win based on the lottery for the special symbol held for the ball that enters the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b, if it is not a big win, it is determined whether it is a small win or a miss.

In this embodiment, a small win is prepared as a win other than a miss, but with a different nature from a big win. In other words, a big win creates an opportunity (a turning point in the game) to transition the game state to a high probability state or a time-saving state, but a small win does not create an opportunity to transition the game state.

Even if a small win is won in a high probability state, the end of the small win will not trigger the end of the high probability state (unless the upper limit of the number of wins is reached), and even if a small win is won in a normal state or a time-saving state, the end of the small win will not trigger a transition to a high probability state. However, a small win is considered to satisfy the conditions for activating the variable winning device B65, just like a big win.

In this pachinko machine B10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of a special symbol winning is 1 in 320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also called the special symbol high probability state), the probability of a special symbol winning is 1 in 32. Note that the probability of a jackpot is only an example, and various values can be set as long as the probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is not less than 1/10 of the probability in the high probability state of the special symbol.

For ease of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol held when the game ball enters the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 1," and the lottery for the special symbol held when the game ball enters the second winning slot B640 is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 2."

In addition, in this pachinko machine B10, in a state where the probability of a special symbol is low, there is a probability of 318 out of 320 that a small win will be determined for the special symbol in the drawing of special symbol 2, and in a state where the probability of a special symbol is high, there is a probability of 309 out of 320 that a small win will be determined for the special symbol in the drawing of special symbol 2. Note that the probability of a small win is just an example, and can be set to various values.

When a special symbol is hit as a small win (a win), a small win game is played and the variable winning device B65 opens and closes. During the small win game, the player can win a certain number of prize balls by having the game ball enter the specific winning port B65a located inside the variable winning device B65. In this embodiment, the small win game is played by closing the variable winning device B65 1.8 seconds after it is opened.

The operation pattern of the variable winning device B65 in the small win of the special symbol may be a single pattern, or multiple types of patterns may be provided. For example, the operation pattern may be configured so that it is set differently depending on the type of small win, depending on the number of times the specific winning port B65a is opened and closed, or the opening and closing time. Specifically, it may be an operation pattern in which the port is opened for 1.8 seconds, or an operation pattern in which an opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times at intervals of several seconds (a total opening of 1.8 seconds), or another operation pattern may be used.

When a special symbol hits the jackpot (wins), the pachinko machine B10 transitions to a special game state, and the specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a of the upper variable winning device B700, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls (prescribed number) have been won), and this operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a, so more prize balls are paid out than usual. Note that prize balls are paid out when balls enter the specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a, and the number of balls paid out will be described later.

There are six types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A," "jackpot B," "jackpot C," "jackpot a," "jackpot b," and "jackpot c." Details will be described later, but the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric device B640a after the special game ends are configured to differ depending on the jackpot type.

When a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is held, the first symbol display device B37A, B37B starts displaying the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 11 to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol showing the lottery result is displayed stationary. If a ball enters the first winning slot B64, the third winning slot B64b, or the second winning slot B640 while the variable display is being held on the first symbol display device B37A, B37B, the number of balls entering is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each type of special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the lottery held based on the ball entering the winning slot, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol display device B37A, B37B and also on the third symbol display device B81. When the variable display has ended in the first pattern display device B37A, B37B, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b (reserved balls for special pattern 1), or for the second winning slot B640 (reserved balls for special pattern 2), a lottery will be held for the next special pattern and the variable display will begin according to the lottery.

In this embodiment, even if there are still reserved balls for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, when the display of the corresponding next special pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) is completed, a lottery is held for the corresponding next special pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) and the display of the corresponding next special pattern is started. In other words, even if the display of the corresponding next special pattern (for example, special pattern 2 for special pattern 1) is not completed, the display of the corresponding next special pattern is completed, and the drawing of the corresponding next special pattern is started.

In this embodiment, even if there are both reserved balls for special pattern 1 and reserved balls for special pattern 2 remaining, when the variable display of the corresponding previous special pattern for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 has ended, a lottery for the next corresponding special pattern is held and the variable display according to the lottery is started. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery may be held in the order in which the special patterns are obtained (in the order in which the balls are scored), or the lottery may be held alternately between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

The system may also be configured so that the lottery based on reserved balls with special pattern 2 is executed with priority over the lottery based on reserved balls with special pattern 1. In this case, the lottery based on reserved balls with special pattern 1 can be avoided from being executed while the number of reserved balls with special pattern 2 is maintained greater than zero.

In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a judgment is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the electric device B640a attached to the second winning hole B640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds, 2.0 seconds, or 3.9 seconds), and the ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole B640. In other words, if the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole B640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is more likely to be held.

When the normal pattern (second pattern) is drawn, the second pattern display device B83 starts displaying the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.05 seconds or 1 second) has elapsed, the normal pattern showing the lottery result is displayed stationary. If a ball passes through the normal winning openings B66, B67 while the variable display is being performed on the second pattern display device B83, the number of times it has passed is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B and is also shown by the second pattern reserved lamp B84. When the variable display on the second pattern display device B83 ends, if there are reserved balls remaining for the normal winning openings B66, B67, the next normal pattern is drawn and the variable display corresponding to that lottery starts.

In this embodiment, as added value after a jackpot, the pachinko machine B10 is configured to transition to a special probability state of special symbols (high frequency special symbol probability state accompanied by small wins) from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot (for example, jackpot A, jackpot a described below), the pachinko machine B10 is configured to transition to a high probability state of special symbols (special symbol probability state) (for example, jackpot B, jackpot b, jackpot c described below), and the pachinko machine B10 is configured to transition to a time-saving state of normal symbols until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed after a jackpot game (for example, jackpot C, jackpot c described below).

In this embodiment, when a special symbol high probability state is granted after the end of a special game state, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next big win is achieved. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability state) may be granted from the end of the special game state until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed, and the normal state may be set after 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed.

The number of times the special symbol is drawn to give the special symbol a high probability state (high probability state) is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

The number of times the special symbol that results in the time-saving state of the normal symbol is drawn is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times. The number of times the special symbol that results in the time-saving state is drawn may be set to be different from the number of times the special symbol that results in the special symbol's high probability state is drawn.

Here, "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state after a jackpot where the probability of subsequent jackpots is increased as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), or in other words, a gaming state where it is easy to transition to a special gaming state.

In this embodiment, the "special probability state of special symbols (special symbol probability state with high frequency of small wins)" is a state in which the probability of a subsequent big win is increased as an added value after the end of a big win, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability state), and is a state with high frequency of small wins. In other words, it is a game state in which a large number of prize balls can be won through small win games while playing in a state in which it is easy to transition to the special game state. The probability of winning a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second winning hole B640 is created. The electric role B640a is operated in the third operating pattern described below.

In this embodiment, the "high probability state of special symbols (special symbol probability change)" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability change (probability change), in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. The probability of winning a normal symbol (second symbol) increases, creating a gaming state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning slot B64b. The electric role B640a is operated in the second operating pattern described below.

On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbols" refers to the time when the special symbols are not in a special probability state, and the probability of winning a jackpot is in a normal state, i.e., the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than when the special symbols are in a special probability state.

The "normal symbol time-saving state (during time-saving)" is one aspect of the low probability state of special symbols, in which the probability of winning with normal symbols is increased and the ball is more likely to enter the third winning slot B64b due to the action of the winning unit B400 described below. The electric device B640a is operated in the second operating pattern described below.

The "normal state" is one aspect of the low probability state (not a high probability state) of the special symbol, and refers to a game state where the normal symbol is not in the time-saving mode (where neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol) has changed, and where it is not easy for the ball to enter the second winning slot B640 or the third winning slot B64b). The electric role B640a is operated in the first operating pattern described below.

During the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, the operating pattern of the electric device B640a associated with the second winning hole B640 is changed, and is basically set to maintain a state in which the game ball is more likely to be guided to the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b for a longer period of time than in the normal state.

In this embodiment, when the electric role B640a is in a non-energized state (non-energized state, i.e., the moving plate member B641 described later is located in the front position and has entered the first ball sending path BKR1), the game ball is more likely to be guided to the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b than when the electric role B640a is in an excited state (energized state, i.e., the moving plate member B641 described later is located in the rear position and has retreated from the first ball sending path BKR1). Therefore, during the special probability of a special pattern, during the probability of a special pattern, and during the time reduction of a normal pattern, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b, making it easier to draw a special pattern.

In addition, during the special pattern's probability of winning or the normal pattern's time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric device B640a associated with the second winning slot B640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric device B640a opens when a normal pattern is won may be increased from the normal state.

In addition, during the probability of a special symbol being in a special state or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) may not change, but at least one of the time during which the electric device B640a associated with the second winning slot B640 is opened and the number of times the electric device B640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the special pattern's probability of winning or during the time-saving mode of the normal pattern, the time for which the electric device B640a associated with the second winning slot B640 is opened or the number of times the electric device B640a is opened may be left unchanged, and only the probability of winning the normal pattern (second pattern) may be increased compared to the normal state.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 1503), first pattern display devices B37A, B37B equipped with multiple LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first pattern display devices B37A, B37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device B110 (see Fig. 1505), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine B10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b, or the second winning hole B640. Specifically, if the ball enters the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b, the first pattern display device B37A is activated, while if the ball enters the second winning slot B640, the first pattern display device B37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices B37A and B37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine B10 is in a special probability variable, probability variable, time-saving, or normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special probability variable jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, and blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine B10 with a small number of LEDs.

When a ball enters the first winning slot B64, the third winning slot B64b, or the second winning slot B640 while the special pattern (first pattern) is being displayed on the first pattern display device B37A, B37B, the number of balls entering is reserved for each type of winning slot (i.e., for each type of special pattern, the number of balls entering the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b corresponding to special pattern 1 and the number of balls entering the second winning slot B640 corresponding to special pattern 2 are reserved separately) up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device B37A, B37B and also by the third pattern display device B81.

In this embodiment, the ball entering the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b, and the ball entering the second winning slot B640 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of times of reservation is not limited to four, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).

In this pachinko machine B10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first prize slot B64, the third prize slot B64b, or the second prize slot B640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine B10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, an 8R jackpot, and a 4R jackpot. The first pattern display devices B37A, B37B not only show whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation ends, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special probability jackpot" refers to a probability jackpot that transitions to a special probability jackpot state (a high probability state of special symbols with frequent small wins) after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and an "8R probability jackpot" refers to a probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 8.

A "4R jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 4, followed by a transition to a low probability state and a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (e.g., 100 changes), or a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 4, followed by a transition to a high probability state.

The play area is provided with multiple general winning holes B63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, a variable display unit B80 is provided in the center of the play area.

The variable display unit B80 is provided with a third pattern display device B81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a third pattern in synchronization with the display change in the first pattern display device B37A, B37B, triggered by a win (initial win) in either the first winning port B64, the third winning port B64b, or the second winning port B640; a second pattern display device B83 consisting of an LED that displays a second pattern in synchronization with a ball passing through the normal winning port (through gate) B66, B67; and a second pattern reserved lamp B84 that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball has passed through the normal winning port B66, B67 by lighting it up.

The variable display device unit B80 also has a center frame B86 arranged around the outer periphery of the third pattern display device B81. The third pattern display device B81 can be seen through an opening in the center of the center frame B86.

The third pattern display device B81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device B114 (see FIG. 1505), so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled vertically for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81.

The third pattern display device B81 of this embodiment displays decorative images according to the display of the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B, whereas the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B display the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505). Note that the third pattern display device B81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 main symbols numbered "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for special symbols performed by the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are lined up (a variable display that finally stops with the same main symbols lined up) is performed, and the jackpot occurs (a transition to a special game state begins) after the variable display ends.

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a variable display will be displayed in which the same main symbols do not line up (the variable display will ultimately stop in a non-lineup state). Also, if the special symbol lottery result is a small win, a variable display will be displayed in which a specific small win symbol will ultimately stop.

For example, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a regular jackpot, a variable display is displayed in which the main symbols with the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a special or special jackpot, a variable display is displayed in which the main symbols with any of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9", including odd numbers, are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a variable display is displayed in which the main symbols with the same numbers are not aligned. Also, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a small win, a variable display is displayed in which a symbol with the words "prize ball ready" added stops in the center of the display area of the display device.

The second symbol display device B83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67. In the pachinko machine B10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. If the lottery results in a win, the second symbol display device B83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol has been displayed. If the lottery results in a miss, the second symbol display device B83 displays a static "x" symbol after the second symbol has been displayed.

The pachinko machine B10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device B83 stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device B640a attached to the second winning port B640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change (change time) is set to be shorter during the special symbol's probability change or during the normal symbol's time-saving mode than during the normal mode. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and during the normal symbol's time-saving mode, the second symbol's change display is performed for a short time, so that the normal symbol (second symbol) can be drawn more often than during the normal mode. This increases the chances of winning the normal symbol, giving the player more opportunities to have the game ball picked up by the electric role B640a located upstream of the second winning hole B640 and the third winning hole B64b. Therefore, during the special symbol's probability change and during the normal symbol's time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the third winning hole B64b or the second winning hole B640.

Note that if the state is made such that it is easier for the ball to enter the third winning slot B64b or the second winning slot B640 by increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device B640a opens during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time taken for the second symbol to change display may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction than during the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device B640a opens for one normal symbol win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67 are attached to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit B80, and are arranged in a position where a ball that is shot into the game area B301 and flows down the left game area B302 or the right game area B303 will always pass through (the upstream nail BKG1 arrangement is configured to collect the balls at the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67).

Note that the relationship between the balls shot into the game area B301 and the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67 is not limited to this. For example, the game area B301 may be configured such that some of the balls that flow down pass through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices B37A, B37B and is also displayed by the second pattern reservation lamp B84 being lit. There are four second pattern reservation lamps B84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device B81.

The change in the second pattern may be indicated by switching on and off a number of lamps in the second pattern display device B83 as in this embodiment, or may be indicated by using a part of the first pattern display device B37A, B37B and the third pattern display device B81. Similarly, the second pattern reserved lamp B84 may be lit by a part of the third pattern display device B81. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B, the second pattern reserved lamp B84 may not be lit.

In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or to five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67 attached to the base plate B60 is not limited to two, but may be one, or any other number (e.g., three or more).

In addition, the installation positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67 are not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display unit B80, but may be, for example, on either the left or right side of the variable display unit B80, or above or below the variable display unit B80.

A first winning hole B64, into which a ball can enter, is disposed below the variable display unit B80. When a ball enters this first winning hole B64, the passage of the ball is detected by a first winning hole switch (detection sensor B442, described later) provided on the back side of the game board B13, and the first winning hole switch is turned on. When the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery is performed for special pattern 1 by the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device B37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole B640, into which a ball can enter, is disposed below the first winning hole B64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second winning hole B640, a second winning hole switch (detection sensor B462, described later) provided on the back side of the game board B13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery is performed for special pattern 2 by the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device B37B.

The second winning port B640 is configured so that only balls that pass through the inside of the winning unit B400 can enter, and winning that does not pass through the winning unit B400 is prevented; more details will be given later.

In addition, a third winning hole B64b, into which a ball can enter, is disposed below the second winning hole B640 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the third winning hole B64b, a third winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board B13 turns on. When the third winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for special pattern 1 is performed by the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device B37A.

The third winning port B64b is configured so that only balls that pass through the inside of the winning unit B400 can enter, and winning that does not pass through the winning unit B400 is prevented, but more details will be given later.

In addition, the first winning hole B64, the third winning hole B64b and the second winning hole B640 are each a winning hole (prize ball hole) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the hole and the first winning hole switch, the third winning hole switch or the second winning hole switch is turned on.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port B64 or the third winning port B64b is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port B640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port B64 or the third winning port B64b and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port B640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port B64 or the third winning port B64b may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port B640 may be five. Also, the number of prize balls and the size relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric device B640a is attached to the second winning opening B640 (and the third winning opening B64b). This electric device B640a is normally in a non-energized state (forward closed state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening B640. On the other hand, when the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner in response to the passage of a ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67, and a "○" pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device B83, the electric device B640a becomes energized (rear open state), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening B640.

During the special probability of a special symbol, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole B640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first winning hole B64 does not have the electric device B640a that is provided in the second winning hole B640, and the ball can always enter the hole.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot B64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot B640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, a) that will provide the maximum profit (number of winning balls in the special game state) as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot B640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot B64.

Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port B640 due to the electric device B640a located upstream of the second winning port B640 and the third winning port B64b during normal play, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by shooting the ball with a shooting strength that makes it easier for the ball to reach the first winning port B64, which does not have the electric device B640a, and by having the ball enter the first winning port B64, which gives the player more opportunities to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, if the electric device B640a located upstream of the second winning hole B640 and the third winning hole B64b is controlled to operate by passing the ball through the normal winning hole (through gate) B66, B67, the ball is likely to be picked up by the electric device B640a, and it is likely to win the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball with a shooting strength that makes it easy for the ball to reach the electric device B640a, pass the normal winning hole (through gate) B66, B67 to operate the electric device B640a, and aim for the ball to win the jackpot by winning the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b.

In this way, the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment can allow the player to change the way the ball is shot, between a shot with a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the ball to reach the first winning port B64, and a shot with a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the ball to reach the electric device B640a, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine B10 (whether it is in a special probability variable state, during probability variable, during time-saving, during normal play, etc.). This allows the player to have more fun playing the game by providing variation in the way the ball is hit.

In this embodiment, during a jackpot game, the electric device B640a is driven in the same operating pattern as in the normal state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to configure the device so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b during a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which both a ball that has flowed down the left play area B302 and a ball that has flowed down the right flow area B303 can reach the first winning opening B64 or the electric device B640a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which only balls that have flowed down the left flow area B302 reach the first winning opening B64, and only balls that have flowed down the right flow area B303 reach the electric device B640a.

In this case, during normal play, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the first winning port B64 so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit B80 (the so-called "left shot"), aiming to win the jackpot by winning the first winning port B64 and obtaining more jackpot lottery machines.

On the other hand, during the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, if the electric device B640a associated with the second winning port B640 is controlled to operate by passing the ball through the normal winning port (through gate) B66, B67, the ball is likely to be picked up by the electric device B640a and it is likely to win at the second winning port B640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the side where the electric device B640a is located so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit B80 (so-called "right hit"), pass through the normal winning port (through gate) B67 to operate the electric device B640a, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port B640 to win the jackpot.

This allows the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game status of the pachinko machine B10. This allows the player to have more fun playing the game by providing variation in the way the ball is shot.

In this case, when a "right hit" should be performed, a specific image (right hit navigation) may be displayed on the third pattern display device B81, so that the player can reliably obtain the benefits of entering a (special) high probability state of a special pattern or a time-saving state of a normal pattern.

In the right-hit navigation, the third symbol display device B81 displays the words "Aim to the right!!" along with three right-pointing arrows above and below the words. By displaying these words and arrows, the player is made to feel that he or she should shoot the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board B13. This allows the player to reliably obtain the benefits of entering the special symbol's high probability state and the normal symbol's time-saving state.

In addition, if a player is performing a "right hit" even though a "left hit" should be performed, it is preferable to be able to notify the player that the recommended game mode and the game mode being performed are different. For example, a warning image may be displayed on the third pattern display device B81.

This warning image (right-hit warning image) is displayed on the third symbol display device B81 when it is determined that the player is making a right hit even though it is not the period in which the player should hit the ball (right hit) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board B13. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right hit in the normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not in a special bonus state, nor in a normal symbol time-saving state).

For example, consider a pachinko machine in which the electric device B640a is controlled so that it is difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole B640 in the normal state (it is difficult to make the ball enter the second winning hole B640 even if the player hits from the right). In this case, if the player hits from the right in the normal state, there are fewer opportunities to win a special pattern compared to hitting from the left and aiming for the first winning hole B64. In other words, if the player hits from the right in the normal state, it is difficult to win a jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the device is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from incurring losses by displaying a right-hit warning image to encourage the player to hit from the left.

When it is determined that a player is hitting with the right hand under normal conditions, the words "Warning" and "Play with the left hand!!" are displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device B81. By displaying these words, the player is made aware that he should not hit with the right hand (he should hit with the left hand). In addition, by checking for the presence or absence of the right hand warning screen, the hall staff can easily determine whether or not a player is playing in an irregular way by hitting with the right hand under normal conditions.

The method for determining whether or not a right-handed hit is made is to determine whether or not the ball has entered the normal winning opening (through gate) B67 (see FIG. 1503), into which the ball can flow if a right-handed hit is made.

In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal winning port (through gate) B67 (see FIG. 1503) in a normal state, it is easy to configure the display to display a right-hit warning image, but this is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has entered (entered) the specific winning port B65a in a state other than a big win game or a small win game, it may be configured to determine that an illegal game is being played (not limited to a right-hit game, but also including a game mode in which a load is applied to the variable winning device B65 to open the specific winning port B65a and force the game ball to enter) and display a right-hit warning image. This allows the hall staff to easily determine whether or not there is illegal play by simply checking whether or not there is a right-hit warning image.

In addition, for example, when it is detected that a ball has entered a specific winning port B65a in a state other than a big win or small win game, a signal indicating that cheating is occurring may be output to the hall computer. This allows the operator of the hall computer to easily determine whether or not cheating is possible, and the machine number (location) of the pachinko machine B10 where the cheating is occurring.

For example, the right-side flow path of the variable display unit B80 may be narrowed to create an area through which the game ball must pass, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball may be disposed within that area. In this case, it may be determined that a right-side hit is being performed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

In addition, for example, a detection sensor may be provided that can detect the displacement of a movable member (e.g., a windmill) that is located to the left of the top position of the variable display unit B80 (corresponding to the center position in the left-right direction in FIG. 1503). In this case, when a game ball is being shot out, it can be determined that a right shot is being performed based on the fact that no displacement of the movable member is detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.

In this embodiment, a variable winning device B65 is provided below the first winning port B64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) B65a is provided in the approximate center.

In the pachinko machine B10, when a small win is obtained in the lottery for a special symbol that is performed as a result of winning in the second winning port B640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device B37A or the first symbol display device B37B is lit up to show the stopping symbol for the small win. In addition, the stopping symbol corresponding to the small win is displayed on the third symbol display device B81 to notify the occurrence of the small win. After that, a small win game in which the ball is likely to win is executed. For this small win game, the specific winning port B65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 1.8 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls (the specified number) have won).

In addition, in the pachinko machine B10, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols held due to winning in the first winning slot B64, the third winning slot B64b, or the second winning slot B640, the first symbol display device B37A or the first symbol display device B37B is lit up to show the jackpot stop symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. In addition, the third symbol display device B81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning slot B65a or the second specific winning slot B700a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls (prescribed number) have won).

The opening and closing of this specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual (in this embodiment, 15 balls based on the winning of one ball) as an added gaming value (game value).

The variable winning device B65 specifically comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning port B65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the opening plate. The specific winning port B65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening and closing plate forward, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning port B65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state. The opening and closing manner of the second specific winning port B700a will be described later.

The variable winning device B65 is designed with a horizontal length so that it can receive not only balls that pass through the inside of the winning unit B400, but also balls that do not enter the winning unit B400 but flow down the outside left and right sides of the winning unit B400 while being guided by the nails BKG1. In other words, the horizontal width of the specific winning opening B65a is designed to be longer than the horizontal width of the winning unit B400.

Whether or not a ball is easily guided into the winning unit B400 depends on the state of the nail BKG1 that is arranged upstream of the winning unit B400, but in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being given too much of an advantage or disadvantage depending on the state of the nail BKG1 (a balance of advantages can be achieved).

In other words, for example, if there is a high probability that the ball will be guided inside the winning unit B400, during the time-saving period in which the ball passes through the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b, through which the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit B400, and during the special bonus period in which the lottery is drawn, the player can receive frequent lottery draws for special symbols, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when balls enter the variable winning device B65 in big prize games or small prize games, the balls that enter the inside of the winning unit B400 are picked up by the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b before reaching the variable winning device B65, and fewer balls reach the specific winning port B65a. In addition, if there are fewer balls that deviate from the winning unit B400 and flow down the left and right sides of the winning unit B400, this is disadvantageous for games in which prize balls are frequently paid out by balls entering the specific winning port B65a.

In addition, for example, if the probability of the ball being guided into the winning unit B400 is low, during the time-saving period in which the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit B400 to pass the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b and a lottery is held, or during the special bonus period, the intervals between the drawing of the special symbol tend to be long, which is disadvantageous to the player in terms of game efficiency.

On the other hand, when balls enter the variable winning device B65 in a big win game or a small win game, fewer balls enter the inside of the winning unit B400, so fewer balls are picked up by the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b and are unable to reach the specific winning port B65a. In addition, more balls deviate from the winning unit B400 and flow down the left and right sides of the winning unit B400, so when the specific winning port B65a is open, it is expected that a large number of balls will enter the specific winning port B65a and a large number of prize balls will be paid out, which is advantageous for the player.

In this way, even if the state of the nail BKG1 makes it easier or harder to guide the ball into the winning unit B400, if the state of the nail BKG1 works to the player's advantage during the period in which the player is trying to win a special pattern by drawing a lottery and hit a jackpot, it can work to the player's disadvantage during the jackpot game, whereas if the state of the nail BKG1 works to the player's disadvantage during the period in which the player is trying to win a special pattern by drawing a lottery and hit a jackpot, it can work to the player's advantage during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being too advantageous or too disadvantageous depending on the state of the nail BKG1 (a balance of advantages can be achieved).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device B37A, B37B, the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is opened for a predetermined time, and when a ball enters the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a while the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is open, the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state.

Furthermore, the number of specific winning openings B65a or second specific winning openings B700a is not limited to two, but one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the first winning opening B64, but may be, for example, on the left or right side or upper side of the variable display unit B80.

The lower right corner of the game board B13 is provided with an attachment space BK1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space BK1 can be seen through a small window B35 (see Figure 1502) in the front frame B14.

The game board B13 is provided with a first outlet B71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning holes B63, B64, B64b, B65a, B640, B700a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first outlet B71, the left outlet B71L, or the right outlet B71R.

The first outlet B71 is located below the first winning port B64. The left outlet B71L is located to the left of the specific winning port B65a, and the right outlet B71R is located to the right of the specific winning port B65a.

In this embodiment, the specific winning hole B65a is located near the bottom edge of the play area, so the gap between the inner rail B61 and the specific winning hole B65a is narrow. Therefore, if the multiple balls rolling along the bottom edge of the play area on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole B65a are all configured to head toward the first outlet B71, there is a possibility that balls will get stuck between the inner rail B61 and the specific winning hole B65a, causing play to be interrupted.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by providing the left outlet B71L and right outlet B71R, a ball rolling along the lower edge of the play area on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening B65a can be discharged through the left outlet B71L or right outlet B71R to a ball discharge path (not shown) before heading toward the first outlet B71. This makes it possible to avoid ball jams between the inner rail B61 and the specific winning opening B65a, thereby avoiding interruptions to play.

The game board B13 has numerous nails BKG1 planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the ball falls, and various components (gimmicks) such as a windmill BWF are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 1504, the rear side of the pachinko machine B10 is mainly equipped with control board units B90 and B91 and a back pack unit B94. The control board unit B90 is unitized with a main board (main control device B110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device B113), and a display control board (display control device B114). The control board unit B91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device B111), a launch control board (launch control device B112), a power supply board (power supply device B115), and a card unit connection board B116.

The back pack unit B94 is a unit consisting of the back pack B92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit B93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device B110, the voice lamp control device B113 and the display control device B114, the payout control device B111 and the launch control device B112, the power supply device B115, and the card unit connection board B116 are each stored in the board boxes B100 to B104. The board boxes B100 to B104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the control devices and boards.

The board box B100 (main control device B110) and board box B102 (dispensing control device B111 and launch control device B112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box B100, B102 or forcefully open the board box B100, B102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box B100, B102 has been opened.

The payout unit B93 is equipped with a tank B130 located at the top of the back pack unit B94 and opening upward, a tank rail B131 connected to the bottom of the tank B130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail B132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail B131, and a payout device B133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail B132 and which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor B216 (see FIG. 1505). The tank B130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device B133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator B134 is attached to the tank rail B131 to impart vibration to the tank rail B131.

The payout control device B111 is also provided with a state recovery switch B120, the launch control device B112 with a variable resistor control knob B121, and the power supply device B115 with a RAM erase switch B122. The state recovery switch B120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor B216 (see FIG. 1505). The control knob B121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch B122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine B10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine B10 will be described with reference to FIG. 1505. FIG. 1505 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine B10.

The main control device B110 is equipped with MPUB201, a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. MPUB201 contains ROMB202, which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by MPUB201, RAMB203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in ROMB202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device B110, MPUB201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine B10, such as the jackpot lottery, display settings in the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B and the third pattern display device B81, and the lottery of the display results in the second pattern display device.

In order to instruct the sub-controllers, such as the dispensing control unit B111 and the voice lamp control unit B113, to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit B110 to the sub-controllers via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control unit B110 to the sub-controllers.

RAMB203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPUB201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by MPUB201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. RAMB203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device B115 even after power to pachinko machine B10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAMB203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAMB203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine B10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAMB203. Writing to RAMB203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAMB203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPUB201 is configured to receive a power outage signal BSG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit B252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal BSG1 is input to MPUB201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPUB201 of the main control device B110 is connected to an input/output port B205 via a bus line B204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port B205 is connected to the payout control device B111, the audio lamp control device B113, the first pattern display device B37A, B37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids B209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port B65a forward around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role device, and the MPUB201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port B205.

The input/output port B205 is also connected to various switches B208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit B253 (described below) provided in the power supply device B115. The MPUB201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches B208 and the RAM erase signal BSG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit B253.

The payout control device B111 drives the payout motor B216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPUB211, which is a calculation device, has a ROMB212 that stores the control program executed by the MPUB211 and fixed value data, etc., and a RAMB213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM B213 of the payout control device B111, like the RAM B203 of the main control device B110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPUB 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPUB 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM B213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device B115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine B10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM B213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPUB 201 of the main control device B110, the NMI terminal of the MPUB 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal BSG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit B252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal BSG1 is input to the MPUB 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port B215 is connected to the MPUB211 of the payout control device B111 via a bus line B214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port B215 is connected to the main control device B110, the payout motor B216, the launch control device B112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device B111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device B111 but not connected to the main control device B110.

When the main control device B110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device B112 controls the ball launch unit B112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle B51. The ball launch unit B112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor B51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle B51, and on condition that the launch stop switch B51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle B51, and the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle B51.

The audio lamp control device B113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) B226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (illumination section B29-B33, display lamp B34, etc.) B227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device B81 performed by the display control device B114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPUB221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM B222 that stores control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPUB221, and a RAM B223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port B225 is connected to the MPUB221 of the audio lamp control device B113 via a bus line B224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port B225 is connected to the main control device B110, the display control device B114, the audio output device B226, the lamp display device B227, other devices B228, the frame button B22, etc.

The voice lamp control device B113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device B81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device B110, and notifies the display control device B114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device B113 monitors input from the frame button B22, and when the frame button B22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device B114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device B81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device B114 so that the third symbol display device B81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device B81. The display control device B114 displays various images on the third pattern display device B81 according to the commands sent from this voice and lamp control device B113.

The voice lamp control device B113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device B114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device B81. Based on the display command received from the display control device B114, the voice lamp control device B113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device B81 from the voice output device B226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device B227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device B114 is connected to the voice lamp control device B113 and the third pattern display device B81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device B81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device B113. The display control device B114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device B113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device B81. The voice lamp control device B113 can output sound from the sound output device B226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands, thereby coordinating the display of the third pattern display device B81 with the sound output from the sound output device B226.

The power supply device B115 has a power supply unit B251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine B10, a power failure monitoring circuit B252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit B253 provided with a RAM erase switch B122 (see FIG. 1504). The power supply unit B251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices B110 to B114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit B251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches B208, solenoids such as the solenoid B209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices B110 to B114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit B252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal BSG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPUB201 of the main control device B110 and the MPUB211 of the dispensing control device B111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit B252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit B251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal BSG1 to the main control device B110 and the dispensing control device B111. By outputting the power failure signal BSG1, the main control device B110 and the dispensing control device B111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit B251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit B110 and the dispensing control unit B111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM erase switch circuit B253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal BSG2 to the main control device B110 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase switch B122 (see FIG. 1504) is pressed. When the main control device B110 inputs the RAM erase signal BSG2 when the pachinko machine B10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device B111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device B111.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning unit B400 will be described. Fig. 1506 is a front perspective view of the winning unit B400, and Fig. 1507 is a rear perspective view of the winning unit B400. As shown in Figs. 1506 and 1507, the winning unit B400 is equipped with a plate member B410 having a plurality of insertion holes B411 through which fastening screws are inserted when the winning unit B400 is fastened to the front surface of the base plate B60 (see Fig. 1503) so as to cover the opening of the base plate B60.

That is, the portion on the front side of the plate member B410 is the portion disposed between the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1503) and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1502), and the portion on the rear side of the plate member B410 is the portion disposed on the rear side of the front side of the base plate B60 that faces the glass unit B16.

The plate member B410 of the winning unit B400 is provided with a ball receiving section B412 at the center of the upper left and right ends, which is shaped to receive a ball from above and send the ball rearward. The ball sent rearward from the ball receiving section B412 enters the first winning hole B64 (see FIG. 1503) of the game board B13.

Some of the balls guided inside the winning unit B400 are configured to win in the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b (see FIG. 1503). The ball is sent backward once inside the winning unit B400, then reverses direction and is placed again on the front side of the plate member B410 before winning in the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b; the details of the ball flow will be described later.

Figures 1508 and 1510 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit B400, and Figures 1509 and 1511 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit B400. Figures 1508 and 1509 show the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric role B640a, and Figures 1510 and 1511 show the excited state (rear open state) of the electric role B640a. Details of the arrangement of the electric role B640a in the non-excited state and excited state will be described later.

As shown in Figures 1508 to 1511, the winning unit B400 comprises a plate member B410 fastened to a base plate B60 (see Figure 1503), a front design member B420 disposed on the front side of the plate member B410 and fastened to the plate member B410, a middle member B430 disposed on the rear side of the plate member B410 and fastened to the plate member B410, an upper member B440 disposed above the middle member B430 and fastened to the middle member B430, and a slide member B450 supported on the middle member B430 between the middle member B430 and the upper member B440 so as to be slidable back and forth and constituting an electric role B640a.

The plate member B410 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a central opening B413 that is drilled in a generally rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction and has a left-right width that allows a ball to pass through at the left-right center position, a ball passage opening B414 that is drilled to the upper right side of the upper end of the central opening B413 and is large enough to allow a ball to pass through after it has landed on the front end of the slide member B450, a sliding opening B415 that is continuously formed below the ball passage opening B414 and is expanded outward to the left and right from the left-right width of the ball passage opening B414 so that the slide member B450 can be inserted through, a support opening B416 that is continuously formed below the sliding opening B415 and is drilled in a generally rectangular shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the protrusion B437a of the middle member B430, and through which the protrusion B437a is inserted and supported, and a ball discharge opening B417 that is continuously formed below the support opening B416 and is drilled to a left-right width that allows a ball to pass through.

The ball passage opening B414, the sliding opening B415, the support opening B416, and the ball discharge opening B417 are configured symmetrically, so the same symbols are used for the left-hand components and the description is omitted.

The central opening B413 is an opening through which the balls that are guided to the central flow path B431 of the middle member B430 and flow down to the front side pass to the front side. In addition, when the electric device B640a is in the excited state (retracted open state), it also functions as an opening through which the balls pass to the rear side and are guided to the second winning port switch (detection sensor B462 described later), but details will be described later.

The ball passage opening B414 is an opening through which a ball placed on the slide member B450 in a non-excited state (see FIG. 1506) can pass on the front side of the plate member B410. That is, the ball received on the slide member B450 is guided to the back side of the plate member B410 by passing through the ball passage opening B414.

The sliding opening B415 is an opening that supports the tip B451 of the sliding member B450 in a sliding manner when the sliding member B450 moves back and forth. The plate member B410 is provided with slide support parts B418 that extend rearward from the left and right ends of the sliding opening B415 while maintaining the shape of the inner surface of the sliding opening B415. This allows the sliding member B450 to be supported at a position rearward of the sliding opening B415, so that the displacement of the sliding member B450 can be stabilized even when the sliding member B450 slides with a displacement width equal to or greater than the front-to-rear width of the sliding opening B415.

Through the support opening B416, the protruding portion B437a of the middle member B430 projects to the front side. An opening B435a of a detection sensor B435 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed in front of the plate member B410 in the protruding portion B437a of the middle member B430. In other words, of the balls received by the slide member B450 in a non-excited state, those that did not pass through the ball passage opening B414 before the slide member B450 was placed in an excited state pass through the opening B435a disposed in front of the support opening B416 directly below it.

The ball discharge opening B417 is an opening that allows the passage of a ball that has passed through the opening B435a located in front of the support opening B416, and sends the ball to the rear side.

The front design member B420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and comprises a front plate B421 that constitutes the design surface, a joint B422 that is formed at the upper end of the front plate B421 in the center position on the left and right and protrudes toward the rear side in a shape that can receive the lower edge of the ball receiving portion B412, a pair of partition plates B423 that extend downward from the lower end of the joint B422, and a pair of partition plates B423 that protrude outward to the left and right at a height position that can support the protrusion B437a of the middle member B430 at the lower part of the partition plate B423. The ball is provided with a support portion B424, a curved wall portion B425 formed below the support portion B424 and protruding rearward from the front plate portion B421 as a curved wall that forms a path for the ball to flow down, a pair of left and right eaves portions B426 protruding outward from the upper edge of the joint portion B422 to the left and right and formed so as to be able to change the direction in which the ball flows down, and a pair of left and right ball guide ridges B427 protruding rearward from the rear side surface of the front plate portion B421, left and right outside and below the eaves portions B426.

Because the front design member B420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, even if the front plate B421 covers it from the front, the structure of the back side and the balls flowing down can be seen through the front plate B421. In other words, the player can see the state of the electric device B640a (the slide member B450 and tilt member B470) and the way the balls flow down the back side of the front plate B421.

The joint B422 is formed in a shape that can receive the ball receiving portion B412 so that the seam with the lower edge of the ball receiving portion B412 of the plate member B410 is not noticeable, so that the ball receiving portion B412 and the front plate portion B421 appear integrated when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1506).

Therefore, in addition to a design in which the ball receiving portion B412 and the front plate portion B421 have separate designs, it is also acceptable to design the ball receiving portion B412 and the front plate portion B421 to be combined to form a completed design.

The joint B422 also has the function of restricting the direction in which the ball flows down on the front side of the plate member B410. In other words, the ball received on the non-energized slide member B450 is prevented from flowing directly to the center position on the left or right side with the force of flowing down to the inside on the left or right side by colliding with the joint B422. In other words, the flow path of the ball received on the slide member B450 is restricted by the state of the slide member B450 and the joint B422.

Therefore, the ball received by the non-energized slide member B450 is guided rearward on the slide member B450, or the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state, and the ball is guided to the opening B435a disposed in front of the support opening B416.

The partition plate B423 has the function of restricting the direction in which the balls flow downward on the front side of the plate member B410. In other words, by disposing the partition plate B423, the balls that pass through the central opening B413 on the front side are prevented from being discharged to the left or right outside, and the flow path of the balls is restricted so that they flow exclusively downward.

The curved wall portion B425 is formed so that the balls flow outward to the left and right. This makes it easy to distinguish, in a front view, between balls guided by the curved wall portion B425 and flowing rearward through the ball discharge opening B417 and balls flowing rearward through the central opening B413.

In addition, unlike when the ball flow path is formed so that it does not flow outward to the left or right, space can be secured for arranging specific components by providing a left-right gap between the front-to-back positions of the central opening B413 and the front-to-back positions of the ball discharge opening B417. In this embodiment, a space (receiving recess B465) is formed for arranging a component (first component B481) for transmitting driving force to the electric device B640a, but details will be described later.

The upper surface of the eaves portion B426 is formed as a smooth surface with the same slope as the upper surface of the joint portion B422, and functions as a part that switches the flow direction of a ball resting on the upper left and right surfaces of the joint portion B422 to the left and right outward directions, but details will be described later.

The ball guide protrusion B427 is formed along the flow path of the balls that are placed on the slide member B450 and flow down toward the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, and functions as the part that comes into contact with the flowing balls.

As a result, even if the rear surface of the front plate portion B421 wears down due to friction with the ball over a long period of use, the ball can be worn down from the tip of the ball guide ridge B427, so the contact area between the ball and the rear surface of the front plate portion B421 can be kept small.

In addition, since the front design member B420 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, scratches reduce the degree of transparency regardless of whether they occur on the front or back side. In other words, the larger the area on which scratches occur, the more difficult it becomes to see the components arranged behind the front design member B420 through the front design member B420. In this embodiment, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transparency through the front design member B420 in order to ensure visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member B420.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the location where scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide ridge B427, minimizing scratches on the front design component B420 and ensuring visibility of the ball as it flows down.

The middle member B430 is a member that supports the slide member B450, and includes a central flow path B431 formed at a position sandwiched between the slide member B450 from the left and right, and a pair of left and right detection sensors B435 disposed below the slide member B450 in a non-excited state.

The central flow passage B431 is provided with a bottom surface portion B431a that is formed with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the ball and slopes downward toward the front side, a left wall portion B432 and a right wall portion B433 that are erected upward on the left and right sides of the bottom surface portion B431a to prevent the ball from passing through, and a rear wall portion B434 that is erected upward behind the bottom wall portion 431a to prevent the ball from passing through.

The left wall B432 is configured to secure a gap B432a between it and the rear wall B434 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the right wall B433 is configured to secure a gap B433a between it and the rear wall B434 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere.

Gap B433a is positioned at a position shifted toward the front side from gap B432a. In this embodiment, gaps B432a and B433a are arranged so that the front end of gap B432a and the rear end of gap B433a are approximately aligned in the front-to-rear direction.

The left wall B432 has an alignment portion B432b formed by cutting out the upper half from the rear end. The right wall B433 has an alignment portion B433b formed by cutting out the upper half from the rear end. The alignment portions B432b and B433b are used for alignment when assembling the upper member B440 to the middle member B430, as will be described in detail below.

At the rear side of the left wall portion B432, the right side surface facing the central flow path B431 is a smooth surface, while a notch portion B432c is formed on the left side surface not facing the central flow path B431 so that the left-right width is shorter than that of the front side portion.

At the rear side, the left side surface of the right wall portion B433 that faces the central flow path B431 is a smooth surface, while a notch portion B433c is formed on the right side surface that does not face the central flow path B431 so that the left-right width is shorter than that of the front side portion.

The notches B432c and B433c are formed with the same front-to-rear width and function to avoid interference with the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450 during sliding movement, as will be described in detail later.

The rear wall portion B434 is formed as a curved wall portion that connects the rear ends of the gaps B432a and B433a. This allows the ball that passes through the gap B432a and abuts against the rear wall portion B434 to be smoothly redirected toward the front side.

The detection sensor B435 is configured as a detection sensor that does not draw a pattern even if it detects the passage of a ball. In other words, when a ball passes the detection sensor B435, neither the drawing of a special pattern nor the drawing of a normal pattern is performed, and the payout of prize balls is performed. In this embodiment, the detection sensor B435 is controlled so that five prize balls are paid out in response to the detection of one winning ball by the detection sensor B435.

The upper member B440 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes an upper flow path component B441 that configures a flow path that slopes downward toward the rear for the ball received in the ball receiving portion B412 to flow down, a detection sensor B442 that detects balls that have flowed down the upper flow path component B441, an upper cover member B443 that is fastened and fixed as an upper cover for the upper flow path component B441 and that secures the detection sensor B442 to the upper flow path component B441, a ceiling component B444 that configures at least the ceiling of the central flow path B431 of the middle member B430, and a left side wall portion B445 and a right side wall portion B446 that guide the flow of the balls rolling on the upper surface of the slide member B450.

The upper member B440 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, so that the ball flow paths (the central flow path B431 and the flow paths guided by the slide member B450) below the upper member B440 can be seen through the upper member B440 from the player's line of sight looking down at the winning unit B400 through the base plate B60. In other words, the player can see the balls rolling on the slide member B450 and flowing down the central flow path B431.

The detection sensor B442 detects a ball that enters the first winning hole B64 (see FIG. 1503). That is, when a ball passes through the detection sensor B442, a lottery for special pattern 1 is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

The upper cover member B443 is arranged so that the path along which the ball flows to the left is rearward of the rear end of the left wall portion B445. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball flowing down the upper flow path component B441 is positioned above the flow path guided by the left wall portion 445. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the ball guided by the left wall portion 445 from being reduced by a ball flowing down the upper flow path component B441.

The left side wall B445 is formed as a wall that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center at the rear end. The front-rear position of the tip of the curved portion at the left-right center coincides with the front-rear position of the left end of the rear wall B434 of the middle member B430.

The right side wall portion B446 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center at the rear end. The front-rear position of the tip end of the curved portion at the left-right center matches the front-rear position of the right end of the rear wall portion B434 of the middle member B430.

In other words, both the left side wall portion B445 and the right side wall portion B446 are formed to be continuous with the rear wall portion B434 that forms the rear ends of the gaps B432a, B433a of the middle member B430, and are configured to guide the ball into the gaps B432a, B433a. In other words, the rear end of the right side wall portion B446 is positioned more forward than the rear end of the left side wall portion B445.

The slide member B450 is formed from a non-permeable resin material and includes a pair of left and right end portions B451, a left guide plate portion B452 and a right guide plate portion B453 that extend rearward from the left and right inner portions of the end portions B451, and a central fixing portion B454 that connects and fixes the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 at the rear end.

By forming the slide member B450 from a non-transparent resin material, the balls flowing down the underside of the slide member B450 (for example, balls flowing down the left and right paths B463 of the lower member B460) can be hidden (masked so that they are difficult to see) by the slide member B450. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the balls rolling on the slide member B450 and the balls flowing down the underside of the slide member B450 (for example, balls flowing down the left and right paths B463 of the lower member B460) appear to overlap at the player's line of sight (the line of sight looking diagonally downward from the front side of the winning unit B400) even when the middle member B430 is formed from a light-transparent resin material.

The pair of tip portions B451 are formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to the central flow passage B431, and are arranged in symmetrical positions with respect to the central flow passage B431. The pair of left and right ends are formed in a plate shape that slopes downward toward the inside of the left and right at the same angle relative to the horizontal, and also slopes downward toward the rear at the same angle.

The left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 extend rearward while following the inclination of the tip portion B451, and the extension length of the left guide plate portion B452 is longer than that of the right guide plate portion B453. Therefore, the vertical position of the rear end portion of the left guide plate portion B452 is lower than that of the right guide plate portion B453.

The left guide plate portion B452 has an inclined surface portion B452a formed near the right edge of the rear half of the plate so that the degree of the downward inclination toward the right of the plate top surface increases. The right guide plate portion B453 has an inclined surface portion B453a formed near the left edge of the rear half of the plate so that the degree of the downward inclination toward the left of the plate top surface increases.

The inclined surface portions B452a and B453a are formed with a width sufficient for the slide member B450 to be positioned opposite the gaps B432a and B433a in the left-right direction regardless of whether the slide member B450 is in a non-excited state or an excited state.

In other words, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member B450 passes through the gaps B432a, B433a, regardless of whether the slide member B450 is in a non-excited state or an excited state, the ball can flow along the slope of the inclined surface portions B452a, B453a, so that the flow direction can be shifted inward to the left and right.

Because the extension length of the right guide plate portion B453 is shorter, it is possible to secure space behind the right guide plate portion B453. In this embodiment, the solenoid BSOL41 for driving the electric role B640a is disposed in the freed space, so that the winning unit B400 can be configured to fit the solenoid BSOL41 well (with a shape that is roughly square when viewed from above).

The width (left-right width) of the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a can be set as desired. For example, they may be configured to extend upward to the top side of the bottom surface portion B431a of the central flow path B431, so as to partially overlap when viewed from above. In this case, the balls can flow down smoothly.

Figures 1512 and 1514 are exploded front perspective views of winning unit B400, and Figures 1513 and 1515 are exploded rear perspective views of winning unit B400. Figures 1512 to 1515 show the non-excited state of the electric role B640a, and also show the exploded members below the middle member B430. Also, Figures 1512 and 1513 show the winning unit B400 viewed diagonally from above, and Figures 1514 and 1515 show the winning unit B400 viewed diagonally from below.

The winning unit B400 includes a lower member B460 that is disposed below the middle member B430 and fastened to the middle member B430, a tilting member B470 that is supported on the lower member B460 between the middle member B430 and the lower member B460 so as to be tiltable forward and backward and that constitutes an electric device B640a, and a transmission member B480 that transmits the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 to the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470.

First, referring to Figures 1512 to 1515, we will provide additional explanation on the configuration of the plate member B410, front design member B420, middle member B430, upper member B440 and slide member B450 of the winning unit B400.

The front design component B420 is provided with a ball guide ridge B428 formed as a pair of ridges that guide the balls downward, at a position slightly offset to the left and right from the center position between the left and right of the pair of partition plates B423.

The protruding tip (rear end) of the ball guide ridge B428 is shaped to slope downward toward the front, so that when a ball arriving from the rear is guided, a downward load is easily applied to the ball, making it easier to prevent the ball from bouncing back.

The ball guide ridge B428 is formed along the flow path of the ball that passes through the central opening B413 of the plate member B410 to the front side, and functions as the part that comes into contact with the flowing ball. The ball guide ridge B428 is formed from a pair of ridges that are offset outward to the left and right from the left and right center of the flowing ball. This makes it easier for the ball to come into contact with the left and right inner corners of the ball guide ridge B428, so that wear of the ball guide ridge B428 can occur from the corners. This makes it possible to suppress damage to the left and right central parts of the ball guide ridge B428.

As a result, even if the rear surface of the front plate portion B421 wears down due to friction with the ball over a long period of use, the wear can start from the tip of the ball guide ridge B428, so the contact area between the ball and the rear surface of the front plate portion B421 can be kept small.

In addition, since the front design member B420 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, scratches reduce the degree of transparency regardless of whether they occur on the front or back side. In other words, the larger the area on which scratches occur, the more difficult it becomes to see the components arranged behind the front design member B420 through the front design member B420. In this embodiment, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transparency through the front design member B420 in order to ensure visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member B420.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the location where scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide ridge B428, minimizing scratches on the front design component B420 and ensuring visibility of the ball as it flows down.

The middle member B430 includes a support extension B436 that extends outward from the left wall B432 and the right wall B433 to the left and right and presses down and supports the detection sensor B435 from above, and a base plate B437 that is a plate-shaped member on which the detection sensor B435 is placed and to which the support extension B436 is fastened at the left and right ends.

On the opposite side (lower side) of the bottom surface portion B431a disposed between the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433, a locking plate portion B431b is provided in a plate shape protruding vertically downward from a position near the rear end side. The locking plate portion B431b functions as a portion that determines the end of movement of the slide member B450, and will be described in detail later.

The support extension B436 has an upper surface formed as a smooth surface along the front-rear direction, an opening B436a that is drilled in a rectangular shape and opens above the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 so that a ball can pass through, and a protrusion B436b that is formed on the upper surface and protrudes upward in a manner that extends in the left-right direction.

The protrusion B436b is disposed at a position where the front side smoothly communicates with the edge of the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 when the middle member B430 is in the assembled state (see FIG. 1510). This prevents balls flowing downward along the front side of the tip B451 from entering the gap between the tip B451 and the detection sensor B435 when the slide member B450 is in the excited state (see FIG. 1510), causing the balls to unintentionally stop flowing downward. In other words, the protrusion B436b can guide the balls as they flow downward, making the balls flow smoothly.

In addition, when the slide member B450 is in a non-excited state (see FIG. 1508), the protrusion B436b is disposed directly below the joint between the tip B451 and the left guide plate B452 or the right guide plate B453. Therefore, even if a ball is placed on the tip B451 and the tip B451 and the left guide plate B452 or the right guide plate B453 are deflected and deformed in a direction in which they fall forward due to the weight of the ball, the joint between the tip B451 and the left guide plate B452 or the right guide plate B453 can be supported from below by the protrusion B436b, thereby suppressing the above-mentioned deflection deformation.

The base plate B437 is perforated in the vertical direction in various places to form openings. That is, the protruding portion B437a, which is formed protruding forward to accommodate the detection sensor B435, has an opening larger than the opening of the detection sensor B435 perforated in a position that does not block the opening of the detection sensor B435, and at the right rear end, an opening B437b is formed at the lower part of the solenoid BSOL41 that is fitted and supported, through which the plunger BSOL41a of the solenoid BSOL41 passes, and at the central rear end, an opening B437c is formed with a width sufficient for the front-to-rear width to pass the second member B485 of the transmission member B480 through and allow displacement.

The base plate B437 has, on its lower side, a receiving recess B437d extending in the front-rear direction as a portion for receiving the first member B481 of the transmission member B480 that transmits the driving force to the tilting member B470, an inclined surface portion B437e that forms the ceiling of the path of the ball guided to the lower member B460 and slopes downward toward the rear, and an inclined stopper B437f that slopes downward toward the rear at the front end of a pair of extension walls that extend downward from the left and right ends of the inclined surface portion B437e.

The tilt stopper B437f allows the tilt member B470 in its non-excited state to be slightly tilted from the upright position while still blocking the path of the ball, so the opening and closing angle of the tilt member B470 can be kept small. This reduces the time required for the tilt member B470 to open and close, thereby preventing ball jamming, as will be described in more detail below.

The ceiling component B444 of the upper member B440 includes an inclined surface B444a that is arranged opposite the bottom surface B431a of the middle member B430 in the vertical direction and inclines upward toward the front, and a pair of extensions B444b that extend downward with an L-shaped cross section from the rear end of the portion arranged on both the left and right sides of the inclined surface B444a.

The inclined surface portion B444a constitutes the ceiling portion of the central flow passage B431, and since the inclined surface portion B444a is inclined upward as it approaches the front, the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow passage B431 becomes larger as it approaches the front. In other words, since the flow passage area becomes larger as it approaches the downstream side, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed when the central flow passage B431 flows forward.

The extension portion B444b is designed so that when the upper member B440 is assembled to the middle member B430, the left and right inner ends of the rear end can be aligned by engaging with the alignment portions B432b, B433b of the middle member B430.

By assembling in this manner, the front-to-rear position of the rear side surface of the extension portion B444b coincides with the front-to-rear position of the rear end portions (front ends of gaps B432a, B433a) of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433. That is, a gap B444c is provided between the extension portion B444b and the left wall portion B445 or the right wall portion B446 that are arranged opposite each other in the front-to-rear direction, and this gap B444c is arranged directly above the gaps B432a, B433a and is configured to be continuously connected to the gaps B432a, B433a.

In other words, the lower part of the opening through which the ball passes is made up of gaps B432a and B433a, and the upper part of the opening of which the lower part is made up of gaps B432a and B433a is made up of gap B444c. This opens up the upper parts of gaps B432a and B433a, and when the ball bounces, unlike when the ball can jump over gaps B432a and B433a and flow down, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through a position outside of gaps B432a, B433a, and B444c.

The slide member B450 has a pair of protrusions B455 that extend in the front-to-rear direction and protrude downward from the lower surfaces of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453. The protrusions B455 are designed to have a width smaller than the widths of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453, and the protruding end (lower end) is shaped to follow the movement direction (front-to-rear direction) of the slide member B450.

When the slide member B450 moves back and forth, the protrusion B455 is supported by the support extension B436 of the middle member B430. In this case, the contact area between the slide member B450 and the support extension B436 can be reduced, so the movement resistance of the slide member B450 can be reduced and forward tilting (deformation) caused by the weight of the ball resting on the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 can be suppressed.

The protrusions B455 are formed along the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 and function as ribs, thereby increasing the rigidity of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453, which are long in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion B455 is disposed rearward of the tip B451. In other words, the protrusion B455 is not formed on the underside of the tip B451, and does not increase the rigidity of the tip B451.

This allows the ease of elastic deformation of the slide member B450 to be changed for each part. In other words, by configuring the tip portion B451 to tolerate a certain degree of elastic deformation, for example, when the slide member B450 moves forward, even if a ball becomes caught between the front end of the slide member B450 and the front design member B420, the load generated by the elastic deformation and elastic recovery of the tip portion B451 can quickly release the ball from being caught.

When the tip portion B451 elastically deforms, if the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 also elastically deform, the cross-sectional area of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 may be narrowed due to the fact that the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 are long in the front-to-rear direction.

In this case, the flow resistance of the ball that has already passed through the ball passage opening B414 and is rolling on the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 increases, which may cause the time it takes for the ball to pass over the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 to be longer than usual.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 are formed with protrusions B455, which function as ribs to prevent the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 from elastically deforming. This makes it possible to maintain the size of the cross-sectional area of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453, making it easier to manage the time the ball takes to pass over the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453.

Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously achieve both the effect of the tip portion B451 being easily elastically deformed and the effect of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 being less easily elastically deformed.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the winning unit B400 other than the plate member B410, the front design member B420, the middle member B430, the upper member B440, and the slide member B450.

The lower member B460 configures multiple ball rolling paths. That is, the lower member B460 has a central path B461 along which the ball picked up by the tilting member B470 rolls, and left and right paths B463 along which the ball that has passed the detection sensor B435 rolls. The ball that has rolled along the central path B461 is detected as having passed by the detection sensor B462 disposed behind it.

The detection sensor B462 detects the passage of the ball that has entered the second winning port B640 (see FIG. 1503). That is, when the ball passes through the detection sensor B462, a lottery for special pattern 2 is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

The lower member B460 also includes a bearing portion B464 constituting the lower half of the receiving portion that pivotally supports the tilting member B470 in a tiltable manner, a receiving recess B465 extending in the front-rear direction as a portion for receiving a first member B481 of the transmission member B480 that transmits driving force to the tilting member B470, and a bearing portion B466 constituting the lower half of the receiving portion that pivotally supports the second member B485 of the transmission member B480 that transmits driving force to the slide member B450 in a tiltable manner.

The bearing portion B464 is configured as a recess that is open at the top, and when the supported protrusion B473 of the tilting member B470 is positioned, the middle member B430 is fastened and fixed to the lower member B460, so that the tilting member B470 is supported by the bearing portion B464 and the middle member B430 so that it can tilt.

The receiving recess B465 is formed at a position between the central path B461 and the left and right paths B463 as an area that is long enough in the front-rear direction to receive the first member B481, which is long in the front-rear direction, and deep enough to allow vertical displacement of the first member B481. By preventing the first member B481 from falling out of the receiving recess B465, deformation of the first member B481 in the left and right direction can be suppressed.

The bearing portion B466 is configured as a recess that is open at the top, and when the second member B485 of the transmission member B480 is positioned, the middle member B430 is fastened and fixed to the lower member B460, so that the second member B485 is supported by the bearing portion B466 and the middle member B430 so as to be tiltable.

When the tilting member B470 is in a non-energized state, it stands up as shown in FIG. 1512 and is in a position that prevents the ball from entering the central path B461, whereas when it is in an excited state, it tilts (see FIG. 1510) and is in a position that allows the ball to enter the central path B461.

The tilting member B470 includes a plate-shaped portion B471 that curves gently inward (upward) toward the tip, a pair of cylindrical portions B472 that protrude in the left-right direction from the lower end of the plate-shaped portion B471, a supported protrusion B473 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the cylindrical portion B472 and is coaxial with the cylindrical portion B472 and has a smaller diameter than the cylindrical portion B472, and a transmitted portion B474 that extends in a C-shape in side view from the outer periphery of the right cylindrical portion B472 and abuts against the first member B481 of the transmitting member B480 to receive the load.

The plate-shaped portion B471 is formed with a left-right width approximately equal to the diameter of a ball, and is configured to prevent multiple balls from landing at the same time.

The cylindrical portion B472, like the supported protrusion B473, is a portion that is rotatably supported by the lower member B460. The cylindrical portion B472 is configured to ensure an area that can bear the sliding load during rotation and the load in the direction of gravity caused by the load from the ball, so mechanical wear can be reduced compared to when it is supported only by the supported protrusion B473.

The transmission member B480 includes a first member B481, the rear end of which is configured so that the plunger BSOL41a is inserted in the left-right direction to prevent it from falling off in the up-down direction, and a second member B485 that works in conjunction with the first member B481.

The opening B437b of the base plate B437 restricts the movement of the plunger BSOL41a in all directions, front to back and left to right, except for up and down, and the first member B481 into which the plunger BSOL41a is inserted in the left to right direction is restricted in its movement in the left to right direction by the receiving recess B465, making it easier to prevent the first member B481 and the plunger BSOL41a from becoming disconnected due to falling off in the left to right direction, etc.

When the excitation state of the solenoid BSOL41 is switched and the plunger BSOL41a is displaced in the vertical direction, the first member B481 is displaced in the vertical direction and the second member B485 is displaced in a direction tilting forward and backward, as will be described in detail later.

Figure 1516(a) is a front view of winning unit B400, Figure 1516(b) is a side view of winning unit B400 as viewed in the direction of arrow MDXVIb in Figure 1516(a), and Figure 1516(c) is a top view of winning unit B400 as viewed in the direction of arrow MDXVIc in Figure 1516(a).

Figures 1516(a) to 1516(c) show the non-excited state of the electric device B640a. Also, Figures 1516(b) and 1516(c) show with imaginary lines the positions of the front and rear sides of the base plate B60 to which the winning unit B400 is attached. In this embodiment, the ball that flows down the front side of the front side of the front side of the base plate B60 reaches the winning unit B400.

As shown in FIG. 1516(c), when the electric accessory B640a is in a non-energized state, the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is positioned outside the eaves portion B426 on the left and right sides, and the tip B451 is inclined downward toward the rear as shown in FIG. 1516(b).

Therefore, if a ball flowing down the front side of the base plate B60 evades the ball receiving portion B412 and lands on the tip portion B451 via the eaves portion B426, or if the ball lands on the tip portion B451 directly without passing through the eaves portion B426 (a diving ball), it is pulled backward along the slope of the tip portion B451. Then, when the ball reaches a position where it can pass through the ball passage opening B414 (see FIG. 1512), it flows along the slope of the tip portion B451 along the top surface of the slide member B450 toward the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453.

Figures 1517(a) and 1517(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXVIIa-MDXVIIa in Figure 1516(c). Figure 1517(a) illustrates the non-excited state of the electric device B640a (slide member B450 and tilt member B470), and Figure 1517(b) illustrates the excited state of the electric device B640a. Also, Figures 1517(a) and 1517(b) illustrate some of the nails BKG1 planted in the base plate B60.

The state of the slide member B450 is changed by sliding it forward and backward, and is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish between the non-energized state and the energized state when viewed from the front. This makes it difficult to predict whether a game ball flowing down toward the slide member B450 will roll on the top surface of the slide member B450 or flow downward along the front side of the tip B451.

The state of the tilting member B470 is changed by a tilting action, and is configured to make it easy to distinguish between the non-energized state and the energized state. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the ball is in a state in which it can enter the second winning hole B640 (see FIG. 1503).

The manner in which the balls flow down to the winning unit B400 will be described with reference to Figures 1517(a) and 1517(b). Note that since the winning unit B400 is formed with a bilaterally symmetrical shape in the cross section shown in Figures 1517(a) and 1517(b), only one side will be described and the other side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1517(a), a ball that misses the ball receiving portion B412 and flows down will flow along route BDR1, for example, via the eaves portion B426. In this case, the ball will not flow down the shortest distance to the ball passage opening B414 because it is blocked by the eaves portion B426, and the time it stays on the tip portion B451 will be extended. Also, because the inclination of the eaves portion B426 causes the ball to flow down with a velocity component to the left and right outward, after landing on the slide member B450 and bouncing off, it will tend to bounce back to the left and right outward.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the top surface of the slide member B450 is inclined downward toward the left and right inside, so the ball can bounce toward the left and right inside. This makes it easier to prevent the ball that flows down the path BDR1 from spilling onto the left and right outside of the tip B451 of the slide member B450.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the nail BKG1 is planted in a position opposite the ball flowing outward to the left and right of the tip B451 of the slide member B450. Therefore, even if the ball flows outward to the left and right of the tip B451, the greater the momentum of the ball, the more likely it is to return to the slide member B450 side upon collision with the nail BKG1. If the momentum of the ball is insufficient when it flows outward to the left or right of the tip B451, it will not bounce back upon collision with the nail BKG1, and will instead flow down between the nail BKG1 and the tip B451 of the slide member B450.

Even if the material flows down a path different from path BDR1, due to the influence of the arrangement of the nails BKG1, it will usually reach the same point BDR1a as the point where path BDR1 reaches the slide member B450, and will be guided to the slide member B450.

The ball flows down over the nail BKG1, which is planted in a position opposite the ball rolling on the top surface of the slide member B450, and reaches point BDR1a. Because the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is formed to protrude toward the nail BKG1, the ball is prevented from falling between the tip B451 of the slide member B450 and the nail BKG1.

In addition, although there are cases where the ball bounced off the nail BKG1 flies toward the left and right inner parts of the tip B451 (the forward position of the ball passage opening B414), the arrangement of the eaves B426 is designed so that the ball and the eaves B426 can easily collide. That is, in this embodiment, even in the case of an irregular flow pattern caused by the ball being bounced off the nail BKG1, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the forward position of the ball passage opening B414 without passing through point BDR1a is suppressed. In this embodiment, the frequency of balls that are bounced off the nail BKG1 and reach the forward position of the ball passage opening B414 without passing through point BDR1a is adjusted and designed so that it is about 1 in 10 balls bounced off the nail BKG1.

As shown in FIG. 1517(b), when the electric device B640a (slide member B450 and tilt member B470) is in an excited state and the ball flows down path BDR1, the ball does not land on the slide member B450, but flows while maintaining the left-right velocity component caused by the inclination of the eaves portion B426.

Because the tip B451 of the slide member B450 does not overhang to the left or right, it is not possible to expect the effect of narrowing the gap between the nail BKG1, and the ball will flow down to the left or right of the opening B436a. In addition, the design of the eaves B426 described above prevents the ball from reaching a position in front of the ball passage opening B414 in an irregular manner due to the ball being bounced off the nail BKG1, and prevents the ball from passing through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.

In other words, when a ball flows down as illustrated by path BDR1, if the slide member B450 is in a non-excited state, the ball is likely to be guided inward to the left and right along the upper surface of the tip B451, and if the slide member B450 is in an excited state, the ball is unlikely to enter directly into the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, and is likely to flow down the outer left and right sides of the front design member B420.

Next, the flow behavior of the ball after it comes on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 in the non-energized state will be described. If the ball that comes on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 flows inward to the left and right along the slope of the tip B451, and the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-energized state until it passes through the ball passage opening B414, the ball will flow behind the tip B451 without any problems, increasing the possibility that it will enter the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b (see FIG. 1503).

As another example, we will explain the case where the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state while the ball is resting on the tip portion B451.

The ball arrangement BB1 in FIG. 1517(a) is shown as resting on the left and right outer ends of the slide member B450. When the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state while there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB1, the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member B410, so the ball cannot move rearward as the slide member B450 moves, and the ball flows down the left and right outer sides of the front design member B420.

The ball arrangement BB2 in FIG. 1517(b) is illustrated as a state in which the center of the ball is located above the left and right outer edges of the opening B436a of the middle member B430. When the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB2, the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member B410, so the ball cannot move rearward as the slide member B450 moves.

Whether the ball flows down the outer left or right side of the front design member B420 or toward the opening B436a depends on the momentum of the ball at the time and the deviation of the ball's center position. A ball that flows down toward the opening B436a passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, and a prize ball is paid out to the player.

Therefore, when the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state while there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB2, the fate of the ball is uncertain, and the profit that the player can obtain varies depending on the fate of the ball, so that it is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide member B450 when there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB2.

The ball arrangement BB3 in FIG. 1517(b) is illustrated as a state in which the ball is arranged in front of the ball passage opening B414. When the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state while there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB3, the rear of the ball is open at the ball passage opening B414, so that the ball moves rearward due to the load received from the slide member B450 as the slide member B450 moves (it moves rearward by being pushed by the slide member B450).

In other words, even if the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state when a ball is placed in the ball arrangement BB3, the ball (only one) can be caused to flow downward to the rear of the ball passage opening B414. In this case, the upper surface of the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is inclined downward toward the rear, making it easier to prevent the ball from spilling forward while the slide member B450 is moving.

In this embodiment, the ball arrangements BB3 are formed symmetrically, so when the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state with balls on both the left and right ball arrangements BB3, both balls move backwards with the movement of the slide member, and flow down behind the ball passage opening B414.

Thus, according to this embodiment, even if the state change is the same, that is, when the slide member B450 is switched from a state in which a ball is placed on the tip portion B451 to an excited state, the flow path of the ball after the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state is configured to change depending on the arrangement of the ball on the tip portion B451. Therefore, when a ball is placed on the tip portion B451, attention can be increased to the movement of the ball and the slide member B450.

When the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state, the further downstream (towards ball arrangement BB3) the ball arrangement BB1-BB3 is, the greater the potential profit the player can potentially obtain. Therefore, even after the ball lands on the slide member B450, the potential profit the player can obtain continues to increase, which can increase the player's attention to the ball flowing downstream.

In addition, the number of balls on the slide member B450 is not limited to one, and for example, balls may be placed in ball arrangements BB1 and BB3 at the same time. In this case, the player's potential profits will be higher if the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-excited state until the ball in ball arrangement BB3 passes backward through the ball passage opening B414 and the ball in ball arrangement BB1 reaches the ball arrangement BB3 side (approximately 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and therefore the player's attention to the movement of the balls and slide member B450 can be improved.

Figure 1518 is a cross-sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXVIII-MDXVIII in Figure 1516(c), Figure 1519 is a cross-sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516(c), and Figure 1520 is a cross-sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXX-MDXX in Figure 1516(c). Figures 1518 to 1520 show the non-excited state (forward closed state) of electric role B640a.

When the electric device B640a is in a non-energized state (forward closed state), as shown in Figures 1518 to 1520, the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position and the tilt member B470 is positioned in the closed position.

First, referring to Figures 1518 and 1520, the configuration of the flow path for the ball rolling on the top surface of the slide member B450 will be described. When the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position, the front-to-rear width between the front design member B420 and the slide member B450 becomes less than the diameter of the ball, so the ball is prevented from flowing into the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, and the ball on the tip B451 is introduced to the rear of the ball passage opening B414.

The ball that passes through the ball passage opening B414 rolls on the slide member B450 along the area surrounded by the middle member B430 and the upper member B440. The upper member B440 has a ceiling surface B447 that is disposed opposite the upper surface of the slide member B450.

Unlike the inclination of the upper surface of the slide member B450, the ceiling surface B447 is formed as a flat surface extending along the front-to-rear direction (in this embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide member B450). Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the flow path formed between the top and bottom of the ceiling surface B447 and the slide member B450 becomes larger toward the rear side (downstream side), making it possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and to avoid an increase in the resistance of the ball to flow downward.

This also makes it easier to avoid the ball colliding with the ceiling surface B447, even if the ball rolling backwards on the slide member B450 bounces upwards, or if the ball bounces backwards due to a load pushing it backwards.

As shown in FIG. 1520, the vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a of the ceiling component B444 is lower than the vertical position of the ceiling surface B447. Therefore, even if the ball bounces close to the ceiling surface B447, the height position of the ball can be lowered to the inclined surface portion B444a before passing through the gap B444c and joining the central flow path B431.

In other words, the momentum of the ball can be slowed down before it merges with the central flow path B431. This makes it easier to avoid situations where a ball newly guided into the central flow path B431 applies a large load to a ball already placed in the central flow path B431 that would cause the ball to flow backwards, even in cases where balls are introduced into the central flow path B431 from the left and right at any time and may collide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the backward flow of balls in the central flow path B431 and make the ball flow smoother.

This effect occurs not only for the ball guided by the right guide plate portion B453, but also for the ball guided by the left guide plate portion B452, since the height position of the ceiling surface B447 is the same on the left and right.

The ceiling surface B447 has a curved guide portion B447a formed as a curved surface at the rear end and smoothly connected to the left side wall portion B445 and the right side wall portion B446. When a ball bounces off the top surface of the slide member B450 and collides with the curved guide portion B447a, the ball can be directed downward along the shape of the curved guide portion B447a, so that the ball can be brought closer to the slide member B450.

This allows the ball to be smoothly displaced below the vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a, allowing the ball to smoothly merge with the central flow path B431.

As shown in Figures 1518 and 1520, the forward and backward movement of the ball rolling on the top surface of the slide member B450 is several centimeters (approximately 3 to 5 centimeters), but the length (left-right width) that it occupies on the front side of the base plate B60 is kept to approximately 1 to 2 centimeters on each side (see Figure 1517).

In other words, the slide member B450 is configured so that the range in which the slide member B450 is arranged on the front side of the base plate B60 (the area it occupies when viewed from the front) can be made smaller compared to the length of the path along which the ball is guided. This allows the space in the play area occupied by the slide member B450 to be reduced while still ensuring a sufficient length for guiding the ball with the slide member B450, so that space can be secured in the play area for arranging other electric devices, winning slots, etc.

As shown in FIG. 1520, the inclined surface portion B444a of the upper member B440 and the right guide plate portion B453 (and the left guide plate portion B452, see FIG. 1518) of the slide member B450 have the same inclination angle in the front-to-rear direction. This ensures that the areas of the right opening BRT (the opening defined by the right gap B444c, the inclined surface portion B444a, and the right guide plate portion B453) through which the ball passes from the right guide plate portion B453 to the central flow path B431 and the left opening BLT (the opening defined by the left gap B444c, the inclined surface portion B444a, and the left guide plate portion B452) through which the ball passes from the left guide plate portion B452 to the central flow path B431 are the same.

In other words, since the left and right openings BLT, BRT are located at different front-to-rear positions, the area (vertical width) of the openings BLT, BRT may be smaller for the rear left opening BLT due to the vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a being lower; however, in this embodiment, the vertical position of the right guide plate portion B453 (and the left guide plate portion B452, see FIG. 1518) of the slide member B450 is similarly lowered in response to the lower vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a, so the vertical width of the left and right openings BLT, BRT can be ensured to be the same.

This makes it easier to prevent a situation in which the flow resistance of the ball when it joins the central flow path B431 changes depending on whether the ball is guided to the right guide plate portion B453 or the left guide plate portion B452.

On the other hand, the length of time the ball rolls on the slide member B450 differs depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453 or the left guide plate portion B452 (the left guide plate portion B452 is longer than the right guide plate portion B453 by at least 11 mm (the diameter of the ball)), so the time it takes for the ball to pass through the ball passage opening B414 and join the central flow path B431 differs, but details about the time it takes for the ball to flow down will be given later.

In addition, in Figures 1518 to 1520, the left and right openings BLT, BRT are shown by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position. Also, to avoid overlapping with other solid lines, they are shown slightly smaller, but this is not intended to limit the shape to a small one, and they are formed with a size and arrangement sufficient to be smoothly guided from the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 to the central flow path B431.

Next, the central flow passage B431 will be described with reference to FIG. 1519. The ball guided by the slide member B450 is introduced into the central flow passage B431 along the slope of the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a at the openings BLT and BRT, which are located at different positions on both the left and right sides.

The introduced ball flows down along the central flow path B431 toward the front side, and when the tilting member B470 is in the closed position, it flows downward after colliding with the ball guide ridge B428, falls out of the winning unit B400, and flows down toward the third winning port B64b (see Figure 1503).

Here, the balls received in the ball receiving portion B412 flow down the upper flow path component B441 in order, so the number of balls does not suddenly increase, and the inclination of the upper cover member B443 is parallel to the upper flow path component B441. On the other hand, multiple balls may be placed in the central flow path B431 at the same time, such as when balls are guided into the central flow path B431 from the left and right at the same time, and the balls may become connected together or float up due to the load generated between the balls.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inclined surface portion B444a that constitutes the ceiling portion of the central flow path B431 is inclined upward as it approaches the front, so the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow path B431 becomes larger as it approaches the front. In other words, since the flow path area becomes larger as it approaches the downstream side, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed when the balls flow forward through the central flow path B431. In other words, even in a flow path configuration in which the balls join at an intermediate position, a large flow path area is ensured, so an increase in the flow resistance of the balls can be avoided.

Figure 1521 is a cross-sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXVIII-MDXVIII in Figure 1516(c), Figure 1522 is a cross-sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516(c), and Figure 1523 is a cross-sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXX-MDXX in Figure 1516(c). Figures 1521 to 1523 show the excited state (rear-open state) of the electric role B640a.

In addition, in Figures 1521 to 1523, the left and right openings BLT and BRT are shown by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member B450 is in the forward position, similar to the illustration in Figures 1518 to 1520.

When the electric device B640a is in the excited state (retracted open state), as shown in Figures 1521 to 1523, the sliding member B450 is positioned in the retracted position and the tilting member B470 is positioned in the open position.

As shown in Figures 1521 and 1523, when the slide member B450 is placed in the retracted position, the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is placed rearward of the front side surface of the plate member B410. This makes it possible to prevent a new ball from landing on the slide member B450.

In other words, no new balls are introduced toward the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b (see FIG. 1503), which are located downstream of the central flow path B431 located downstream of the slide member B450. Therefore, if the excited state is maintained for longer than the time required for the balls on the slide member B450 to flow completely along the front side of the tilt member B470, all of the balls guided to the winning unit B400 can be picked up by the tilt member B470. In addition, since the balls guided to the slide member B450 are not added, it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b from becoming excessive. Details of ball entry control will be described later.

As shown in Figures 1521 and 1523, a narrow protrusion B455 is formed on the underside of the slide member B450, and the narrow protrusion B455 is supported by the support extension B436 of the middle member B430. This suppresses the change in posture of the slide member B450 tilting in the forward/backward direction, and reduces the contact area between the slide member B450 and the support extension B436 when the slide member B450 moves forward/backward, thereby reducing frictional resistance.

When the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state and displaced from the forward position to the backward position, if a ball is placed on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 are inclined downward toward the rear, suppressing ball slippage, and the ball moves backward integrally with the slide member B450 (with the same displacement amount as the displacement amount of the slide member B450). In addition, the ball is accelerated backward by the load applied via the slide member B450.

On the other hand, if a ball is placed on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 when the slide member B450 is switched from an excited state to a de-excited state and displaced from the retracted position to the advanced position, the vertical height of the slide member B450 at the front-to-rear position where the ball is placed decreases due to the inclination of the upper surface of the slide member B450, and the vertical distance between the slide member B450 and the ball increases.

In other words, the ball will float relative to the slide member B450 and then land on the slide member B450 again, preventing the ball from moving forward integrally with the slide member B450.

In addition, if a forward spin is applied to the ball when the slide member B450 starts to move (before a vertical gap opens between the ball and the slide member B450), the speed at which the ball flows down the slide member B450 can be increased.

When the slide member B450 is switched from a non-energized state to an energized state, the ball already resting on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 remains on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, and the branching of the flow path is confirmed further downstream.

On the other hand, as described above in FIG. 1517, when the slide member B450 is switched from a non-excited state to an excited state, the ball positioned in front of the ball passage opening B414 may fall toward the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435. In other words, at a position in front of the ball passage opening B414, it is possible that the ball's flow path may branch off, with the ball either passing through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 and being discharged outside the play area, or flowing along a different flow path.

In this embodiment, the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 is configured to be located closer to the front than the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453. This can improve attention to the detection sensor B435, and the flow path branches off to the opening B435a side of the detection sensor B435, making it easier to see the ball passing through the opening B435a.

As shown in FIG. 1522, even when the slide member B450 is positioned in the retracted position, the inclined surface portion B452a is positioned at the left opening BLT. That is, the inclined surface portion B452a is formed with a front-to-rear width sufficient to be positioned at the left opening BLT regardless of the position of the slide member B450. The same is true for the inclined surface portion B453a.

When a ball introduced into the central flow passage B431 passes through the central flow passage B431, if the tilting member B470 is still positioned in the open position, the ball will be picked up by the tilting member B470 and pass through the detection sensor B462.

In other words, the position in front of the tilting member B470 is the position where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined, that is, whether the ball passes through the detection sensor B462 and is discharged outside the play area, or flows down a different flow path.

In this embodiment, the tilting member B470 is configured to be positioned closer to the front than the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453. This increases the attention to the tilting member B470, and the flow path branches off to the detection sensor B462 side, making it easier to see the ball flowing down to the detection sensor B462 side.

In this way, the winning unit B400 is configured so that the position where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined is located on the front side. Furthermore, by configuring the ball to pass through multiple positions where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined (the position in front of the ball passage opening B414 and the position in front of the tilting member B470) with a sufficient amount of time between them, rather than passing through them immediately, a player who is paying attention to the ball can have time to move their eyes.

In addition, by narrowing the distance between the multiple positions where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined (the position in front of the ball passage opening B414 and the position in front of the tilting member B470) when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1517), a player who is focusing on the ball can have more room to move his or her eyes.

As shown in FIG. 1522, the supported protrusion B473, which serves as the rotation axis of the tilting member B470, is disposed at a position further rearward than the front end of the central flow passage B431. In addition, in the closed position, the tilting member B470 is slightly tilted forward in response to the inclination of the inclined stopper B437f of the middle member B430 (see FIG. 1519).

As a result, even if the tilting member B470 is excited and displaced toward the open position when a ball is located in front of the tilting member B470 in the closed position, the front surface of the tilting member B470 is already tilted forward, making it easier to apply a downward load to the ball and to expel the ball downward early. In other words, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the ball gets caught between the tilting member B470 and the front design member B420, prolonging the time during which the displacement of the tilting member B470 to the open position is hindered.

In addition, the rotation angle of the tilting member B470 during the opening and closing operation can be reduced, so the time required for the opening and closing operation can be shortened. This makes it easier to control the timing of opening and closing, and also makes it easier to prevent excessive ball entry.

In this embodiment, the left and right width of the plate-shaped portion B471 of the tilting member B470 is formed to a length approximately equal to the diameter of a ball (see FIG. 1517), and it is configured so that multiple balls cannot be picked up while shifting from the open position to the closed position, making it easier to prevent excessive ball insertion.

The inclined surface portion B437e, which constitutes the ceiling of the flow path through which the balls picked up by the tilting member B470 flow, is formed as an inclined surface parallel to the central path B461 at the rear side, and is configured so that the angle of the upward inclination toward the front increases at the front side, which is closer to the tilting member B470.

As a result, even if a ball picked up by the tilting member B470 bounces due to a collision with the tilting member B470, the ball can be smoothly introduced into the path between the central path B461 and the inclined surface portion B437e. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the displacement of the tilting member B470 toward the closed position is delayed due to the weight of the ball resting on the tilting member B470 or the high resistance of the ball to flow into the path between the central path B461 and the inclined surface portion B437e, which prevents the ball from displacing.

As shown in FIG. 1523, when the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state, the vertical position of the slide member B450 rises at the same front-to-rear position, so the lower edge of the right opening BRT rises and the area through which the ball can pass becomes smaller. The same is true for the left opening BLT.

At this time, the ball that reaches the rear end of the left side wall portion B445 or the right side wall portion B446 bounces up due to the vertical position of the slide member B450 rising at that position. This may increase the kinetic energy of the ball.

On the other hand, the vertical distance between the inclined surface portion B444a and the slide member B450 is narrower than when the slide member B450 is in the forward position, increasing the resistance of the ball to flow downward and enhancing the effect of the inclined surface portion B444a in slowing down the momentum of the ball. This allows the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball to be sufficiently reduced before being guided into the central flow path B431.

Figures 1524(a) and 1524(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXXIVa-MDXXIVa in Figure 1516(c). Figure 1524(a) illustrates the non-excited state of the electric device B640a (slide member B450 and tilt member B470), while Figure 1524(b) illustrates the excited state of the electric device B640a. Note that Figures 1524(a) and 1524(b) illustrate cross sections passing through the midpoint of the gap B444c in the fore-and-aft direction.

In this embodiment, the left opening BLT and the right opening BRT are misaligned in the front-to-rear direction, which avoids the problem that often occurs when the left and right openings are arranged on a straight line extending in the left-right direction, where balls passing through the openings collide with each other in the left-right direction, and the load generated by the balls is oriented outward in the left-right direction, resulting in a balance and preventing the balls from flowing down.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the balls on the right guide plate portion B453 are introduced into the central flow path B431 through the right opening BRT, which is located in front of the left opening BLT through which the balls on the left guide plate portion B452 are introduced into the central flow path B431. This means that there is a possibility that a ball passing through the right opening BRT may collide with a ball flowing down the central flow path B431 (see FIG. 1524(a)). In this case, even if the flow path shape is designed to make this unlikely, the loads that the balls impart to each other may become unbalanced, causing the flow of the balls to stop.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state and displaced to the retracted position, the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central flow path B431 is not affected, but the vertical position of the ball resting on the right guide plate portion B453 is raised, creating a momentary gap between the ball placed in the central flow path B431 and the ball resting on the right guide plate portion B453. During this time, the ball placed in the central flow path B431 flows along the slope of the central flow path B431, disrupting the balance of the loads that the balls impart to each other.

In addition, when the slide member B450 is switched to a non-energized state and displaced to the forward position, the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central flow path B431 is not affected, but the vertical position of the right guide plate portion B453 is lowered, so that a gap can be created (floated) between the ball above the right guide plate portion B453 and the right guide plate portion B453, albeit for a moment. When the ball above the right guide plate portion B453 displaces downward to fill this gap, it is believed that the ball is pushed by the load from the balls arranged in the central flow path B431 and displaces outward to the left and right, thus disrupting the balance of the loads that the balls impart to each other.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the loads applied by the balls to each other become balanced at the joining point to the central flow path B431, the state of the slide member B450 can be switched to change the position of one of the balls with balanced loads, thereby breaking the load balance. This allows the flow of balls from the slide member B450 through the central flow path B431 to be kept smooth.

The above-mentioned load imbalance occurs when the state of the slide member B450 is switched, so the operation pattern of the slide member B450 may be designed in anticipation of this action. In other words, the more frequently the state of the slide member B450 is switched, the easier it is to imbalance the loads of the balls as they flow down, making it possible to make the balls flow down more smoothly.

Next, with reference to Figures 1525 to 1529, variations in the flow path of the ball that reaches the position where the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is located will be described.

Figures 1525(a) to 1525(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. Figures 1525(a) to 1525(d) show the non-excited state of the electric device B640a, and the flow of the ball after it hits the tip B451 in chronological order. Note that in Figures 1525(a) to 1525(d), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, the plate member B410, front design member B420, and upper member B440 are omitted, and the areas that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, when the electric device B640a is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to land on the left or right outer part of the tip B451 of the slide member B450 (ball arrangement BB1, see FIG. 1517(a)) as shown in FIG. 1525(a). The ball that lands on the tip B451 then passes through the ball passage opening B414 as shown in FIG. 1525(b) and flows down the slide member B450 along the left side wall B445 or right side wall B446 of the upper member B440.

Then, as shown in FIG. 1525(c), the balls flow into the central flow passage B431 via the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450, and flow down toward the front side along the inclination of the central flow passage B431. Then, as shown in FIG. 1525(d), the balls pass through the central opening B413 at the front end side of the central flow passage B431 and flow downward.

As shown in Figures 1525(a) to 1525(d), if the electric device B640a is maintained in a non-energized state throughout the period in which the ball passes through the winning unit B400, the ball that lands on the tip B451 falls down the front side of the central opening B413 and flows downward toward the third winning port B64b (see Figure 1503).

Figures 1526(a) to 1526(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. Figures 1526(a) and 1526(b) show the non-energized state of the electric device B640a, Figures 1526(c) and 1526(d) show the energized state of the electric device B640a, and Figures 1526(a) to 1526(d) show the flow of the ball after it hits the tip B451 in chronological order. Note that in Figures 1526(a) to 1526(d), the plate member B410, front design member B420, and upper member B440 are omitted in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the parts that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, when the electric device B640a is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to land on the left or right outer part of the tip B451 of the slide member B450 (ball arrangement BB1, see FIG. 1517(a)) as shown in FIG. 1526(a). The ball that lands on the tip B451 then flows down the left or right inner side toward the front side of the ball passage opening B414, and passes through ball arrangement BB2 (see FIG. 1517(a)) as shown in FIG. 1526(b).

When the ball is placed in ball position BB2 and the electric device B640a is switched to an excited state as shown in FIG. 1526(c), the ball flows inward to the left and right due to inertia, and as shown in FIG. 1526(d), the ball flows downward along the front side of the ball passage opening B414 and passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.

As shown in Figures 1526(a) to 1526(d), if the electric device B640a is switched to an excited state within a short time after a ball is placed on the tip B451, the ball on the tip B451 may fall down the front side of the ball passage opening B414 and pass through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.

However, if the electric device B640a is switched to an excited state in such a short time that inertia does not act on the inside left or right, the ball on the tip B451 may come off the opening B435a and flow down the outside left or right of the detection sensor B435.

1527(a) to 1527(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. 1527(a) and 1527(b) show the non-energized state of the electric device B640a, 1527(c) and 1527(d) show the energized state of the electric device B640a, and 1527(a) to 1527(d) show the flow of the ball after it hits the tip B451 in chronological order. Note that in 1527(a) to 1527(d), the plate member B410, front design member B420, and upper member B440 are omitted from the illustration in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the parts that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, when the electric device B640a is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to land on the left or right outer part of the tip B451 of the slide member B450 (ball arrangement BB1, see FIG. 1517(a)) as shown in FIG. 1527(a). The ball that lands on the tip B451 then passes through the ball passage opening B414 as shown in FIG. 1527(b) and flows down the slide member B450 along the left side wall B445 or right side wall B446 of the upper member B440.

Then, as shown in FIG. 1527(c), the ball flows into the central flow passage B431 via the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450, and flows down toward the front side along the inclination of the central flow passage B431. Then, as shown in FIG. 1527(d), the ball passes through the central opening B413 at the front end side of the central flow passage B431, flows down, is picked up by the tilting member B470, and flows down toward the rear.

As shown in Figures 1527(a) to 1527(d), if the electric device B640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state while a ball passes through the winning unit B400 and is maintained in the excited state, the ball that lands on the tip B451 falls down the front side of the central opening B413, is picked up by the tilting member B470, and enters the second winning opening B640 (an opening that is opened and closed by the tilting member B470, see Figure 1503).

Figures 1528(a) to 1528(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. Figures 1528(a), 1528(b) and 1528(d) show the non-energized state of the electric device B640a, Figure 1528(c) shows the energized state of the electric device B640a, and Figures 1528(a) to 1528(d) show the flow of the ball after it hits the tip B451 in chronological order. Note that in Figures 1528(a) to 1528(d), the plate member B410, front design member B420 and upper member B440 are omitted in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the parts that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, when the electric device B640a is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to land on the left or right outer part of the tip B451 of the slide member B450 (ball arrangement BB1, see FIG. 1517(a)) as shown in FIG. 1528(a). The ball that lands on the tip B451 then passes through the ball passage opening B414 as shown in FIG. 1528(b) and flows down the slide member B450 along the left side wall B445 or right side wall B446 of the upper member B440.

Then, as shown in FIG. 1528(c), it flows into the central flow path B431 via the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450, and flows down along the inclination of the central flow path B431 to the front side. At this point, the electric device B640a is in an excited state as shown in FIG. 1528(c), similar to that shown in FIG. 1527(c).

Then, before the ball passes through the central opening B413 at the front end of the central flow path B431, the electric device B640a is switched to a non-energized state as shown in FIG. 1528(d). Then, as shown in FIG. 1528(d), the ball that has passed through the central opening B413 at the front end of the central flow path B431 flows downward.

As shown in Figures 1528(a) to 1528(d), when the electric device B640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state while a ball passes through the winning unit B400, and then switched back to a non-energized state, the ball that lands on the tip B451 falls down the front side of the central opening B413 and flows downward toward the third winning port B64b (see Figure 1503).

Thus, in this embodiment, when the electric device B640a is switched to an excited state after the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, it is unclear whether the ball will be picked up by the tilting member B470.

In other words, depending on how the state of the tilting member B470 changes after the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the ball will either fall down the front side of the tilting member B470 and flow down toward the third winning opening B64b, or be picked up by the tilting member B470 and flow down toward the second winning opening B640, and it is not clear which direction the ball will flow down until it reaches the tilting member B470. This makes it possible to maintain a high level of attention on the ball that passes through the ball passage opening B414 and flows down toward the front side of the tilting member B470.

When the ball lands on the tip B451, it becomes a branching point as to whether the ball will flow into the ball passage opening B414 or not, improving the attraction, and when the ball passes through the central opening B413, it becomes a branching point as to whether the ball will be picked up by the tilting member B470 or not, improving the attraction. This makes it possible to improve the attraction of the ball flowing down inside the winning unit B400 at multiple positions.

Figures 1529(a) and 1529(b) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. In Figures 1529(a) and 1529(b), the excited state of the electric device B640a is illustrated, and the flow of balls flowing down the front side of the tip B451 is illustrated by arrows. Note that in Figures 1529(a) and 1529(b), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing balls, the plate member B410, front design member B420, and upper member B440 are omitted, and the areas that guide the flow of the balls are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 1529(a), when the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position, if the ball flows down a path that passes through the left and right positions where it lands on the left and right outer parts of the tip B451 (ball position BB1, see FIG. 1517(a)), the ball flows to the left and right outer sides of the opening B436a. In other words, the ball does not pass through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.

As shown in FIG. 1529(b), when a ball with a velocity component to the left and right inward flows downward toward the front position of the slide member B450, there is a possibility that the ball will enter the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.

On the other hand, since the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is positioned far back (see FIG. 1521), the balls flowing down like they are about to jump in are prevented from landing on the tip B451. This prevention effect is also strengthened by the reduction in the opening area enclosed by the ball passage opening B414 and the tip B451.

In other words, because the tip portion B451 is formed to slope downward toward the rear, when the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position (see FIG. 1518), the vertical position of the portion of the slide member B450 (corresponding to the rear edge portion of the tip portion B451) that can form an opening together with the ball passage opening B414 when the slide member B450 is positioned in the backward position (see FIG. 1521) is higher than the vertical position of the portion of the slide member B450 (corresponding to the rear edge portion of the tip portion B451) that forms an opening together with the ball passage opening B414 when the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position (see FIG. 1518).

Therefore, when the slide member B450 is positioned in the retracted position, the vertical position of the lower edge (corresponding to the edge formed by the tip portion B451) of the opening surrounded by the ball passage opening B414 and the tip portion B451 is raised, thereby reducing the opening area. This makes it easier to prevent a ball with a velocity component to the left and right inward as it flows down toward the front position of the slide member B450.

In this way, when the electric device B640a is in an excited state, the balls flowing down the front position of the slide member B450 generally deviate to the outside of the winning unit B400 to the left or right, and some of them enter the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.

On the other hand, when the electric device B640a is in an excited state, balls flowing down the front position of the slide member B450 are prevented from landing on the slide member B450, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which new balls are introduced toward the second winning hole B640 (see FIG. 1503) or the third winning hole B64b, which are located downstream of the slide member B450, when the electric device B640a is in an excited state.

As shown in Figures 1525 to 1529, the winning unit B400 can branch the flow of a ball that has landed on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 at multiple positions. First, immediately after a ball has landed on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 in a non-excited state (first branch position), if the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state, the ball can flow down toward the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 (see Figure 1526 (c)).

On the other hand, balls that do not flow down into the opening B435a flow from the tip B451 along the slope. If the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state when the ball is resting on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, the ball will still remain on the slide member B450. Also, if the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state when the ball is resting on the bottom portion B431a (see FIG. 1527(c)), the ball will still remain on the bottom portion B431a.

A ball flowing backward down the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 is constantly pulled inward to the left or right due to the left-right inclination formed across the entire front-to-rear width of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, and flows backward. This allows the ball to be pulled toward the downstream central flow path B431 before it reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453. This allows the ball to flow more smoothly into the central flow path B431 than if the ball were to change direction to the central flow path B431 only after it reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453.

The ball that flows into the central flow path B431 rolls forward along the inclination of the central flow path B431. When the ball falls from the front end of the central flow path B431 (second branch position), if the tilting member B470 of the electric device B640a is in a non-energized closed position, the ball falls downward (see FIG. 1525(d)). If the tilting member B470 of the electric device B640a is in an energized open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470 and flows backward (see FIG. 1527(d)).

In this embodiment, the flow direction of the game ball rolling on the slide member B450 is set to include the front-to-rear direction, so that the game ball can roll over a path length that is greater than or equal to the dimensions of the slide member B450 and the tilt member B470 when viewed from the front.

As a condition for the development of the pachinko machine B10, for example, the width dimension of the electric device B640a when viewed from the front cannot be extended indefinitely, and a length limit is set (for example, 55 mm). However, according to this embodiment, the left-right width dimension of the electric device B640a when viewed from the front satisfies the condition for the development of the pachinko machine B10, while the actual rolling length of the ball through the electric device B640a can be further extended. As a result, in a configuration in which the ball flows over the electric device B640a and is guided to the winning port on the downstream side, the placement space for the electric device B640a when viewed from the front can be narrowed, while the time required for the ball to flow down can be lengthened.

Furthermore, the electric device B640a has the points (tip B451 and tilting member B470) that come into contact with the game ball flowing down located at a distance. This allows the game ball to flow down a greater distance than the shape of the electric device B640a by the length of the central flow path B431 between them.

Figures 1530(a) and 1530(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in Figure 1516(b). Figure 1530(a) illustrates the state in which the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position (de-energized state), and Figure 1530(b) illustrates the state immediately after the slide member B450 is switched from the state shown in Figure 1530(a) to the state in which the slide member B450 is positioned in the retracted position (energized state). Figures 1530(a) and 1530(b) also illustrate balls that were positioned on the slide member B450 or the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slid.

As shown in Figures 1530(a) and 1530(b), when the slide member B450 slides, the ball resting on the left guide plate portion B452 is displaced backward together with the slide member B450 by the amount of displacement of the slide movement. Furthermore, since the left guide plate portion B452 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see Figure 1518), a backward load is applied to the ball, and the ball accelerates.

On the other hand, the ball that was on the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slid, rolls on the fixed floor surface without being displaced particularly backward. Therefore, even if the ball flows down the same path, the time required for the ball that was on the left guide plate portion B452 when the slide member B450 slid and the ball that was not on the left guide plate portion B452 but on the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slid will differ, but the difference in time will be described in detail later.

Note that in Figures 1530(a) and 1530(b), when two balls are placed in the flow-down area formed by the slide member B450 and the central flow path B431, one ball is placed on each of the slide member B450 and the central flow path B431, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that balls are placed only on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, or that balls are placed only on the central flow path B431. Furthermore, the number of balls placed is not limited to two, and there may be one, or three or more.

Figures 1531(a) and 1531(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in Figure 1516(b). Figure 1531(a) illustrates the state in which the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position (de-energized state), and Figure 1531(b) illustrates the state immediately after the slide member B450 is switched from the state shown in Figure 1531(a) to the state in which the slide member B450 is positioned in the retracted position (energized state). Also, Figures 1531(a) and 1531(b) illustrate balls that were positioned on the slide member B450 or the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slid.

As shown in Figures 1531(a) and 1531(b), when the slide member B450 slides, the ball resting on the right guide plate portion B453 is displaced rearward by the amount of displacement of the slide movement together with the slide member B450, similar to the ball resting on the left guide plate portion B452. Furthermore, since the right guide plate portion B453 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see Figure 1520), a rearward load is applied to the ball, and the ball accelerates.

On the other hand, the ball that was on the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slid, rolls on the fixed floor surface without being displaced particularly backward. Therefore, even if the ball flows down the same path, the time required for the ball that was on the right guide plate portion B453 when the slide member B450 slid and the ball that was not on the right guide plate portion B453 but on the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slid will differ, but the difference in time will be described in detail later.

The time required for a ball to flow down the slide member B450 and pass the front end of the central flow path B431 will be described. In this embodiment, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 rolls down the right guide plate portion B453, if no sliding motion of the slide member B450 occurs while the ball is flowing down, the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 will pass the front end of the central flow path B431 in approximately 2.0 seconds.

On the other hand, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 rolls down the left guide plate portion B452, if the sliding member B450 does not slide while the ball is flowing down, the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 will pass the front end of the central flow path B431 in approximately 2.4 seconds.

The slide member B450 constitutes half of the path from when the ball passes through the ball passing opening B414 to when it passes through the front end of the central flow path B431. That is, when a ball that has passed through the ball passing opening B414 flows down on the right guide plate portion B453, if the slide member B450 slides before about 1.0 second has elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passing opening B414, the ball receives a load from the slide member B450, whereas if the slide member B450 slides after about 1.0 second has elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passing opening B414, the ball does not receive a load from the slide member B450.

In addition, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 flows down the left guide plate portion B452, if the sliding member B450 performs a sliding operation before approximately 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening B414, the ball will receive a load from the sliding member B450, whereas if the sliding member B450 performs a sliding operation after approximately 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening B414, the ball will not receive a load from the sliding member B450.

In this embodiment, even if the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passage openings B414 at the same time, depending on the timing of the sliding movement of the slide member B450, the ball may or may not receive a backward load from the slide member B450.

In other words, if the sliding member B450 slides after approximately 1.0 second has elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening B414 but before approximately 1.2 seconds have elapsed, the ball flowing down the left guide plate portion B452 will be subjected to a backward load, and the ball flowing down the right guide plate portion B453 will not be subjected to a backward load.

When the slide member B450 slides backward while a ball is resting on it, the time it takes for the ball to pass through the ball passage opening B414 and pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 is reduced by approximately 0.5 seconds.

The breakdown of this 0.5 seconds is roughly 0.3 seconds saved by the amount of forward/rearward displacement of slide member B450 (approximately 12 mm), and 0.2 seconds saved by the acceleration caused by the load applied to the ball from slide member B450.

A ball that rolls backward on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 passes through gap B432a or gap B433a (see FIG. 1525(b)) and flows into the central flow passage B431. Since gaps B432a and B433a are offset from each other in the front-to-back direction, it is possible to prevent a head-on collision between the ball passing through gap B432a and the ball passing through gap B433a at the same time. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has passed through gap B432a or gap B433a is pushed back by a collision with a ball and flows back.

When the electric device B640a is in the excited state, a ball flowing down the front position of the slide member B450 is prevented from reaching the slide member B450 (see FIG. 1529), so the ball that takes the longest time to reach the tilting member B470 after the electric device B640a is switched to the excited state is the ball that was on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 at the time the electric device B640a is switched to the excited state, and no balls after that will reach the tilting member B470.

Figures 1532(a) to 1532(c) are diagrams showing an example of the change over time in the state of the electric role B640a. Note that Figure 1532(a) shows the change over time in the first operation pattern, Figure 1532(b) shows the change over time in the second operation pattern, and Figure 1532(c) shows the change over time in the third operation pattern.

Figures 1532(a) to 1532(c) explain the operation pattern of the electric device B640a, whose operation is controlled when the passage of a ball is detected through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67.

As shown in FIG. 1503, in this embodiment, the pin arrangement is designed so that all balls flowing down toward the electric role B640a pass through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67, and the operation time of the electric role B640a (operation time in the standard operation pattern, equivalent to the interval between the drawings of the normal pattern) triggered by the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 (a single drawing of a normal pattern) is longer than the ball launch interval (0.6 second interval), so that the number of reserved balls for normal patterns is unlikely to run out during pinball play, and the number of reserved balls for normal patterns is likely to be maintained at a level greater than 0 at all times. Therefore, the operation of the electric role B640a is performed repeatedly without any intervals according to the standard operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 1532(a), in the first operation pattern, the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for a waiting time Bt1a (0.1 seconds in this embodiment), and then the slide member B450 is maintained in an energized state (retracted position) for an operating time Bt1b (3.9 seconds in this embodiment), and this pattern is repeated as the reference operation pattern BRP1.

In more detail, the 0.1 seconds that constitute the non-energized state are broken down into 0.05 seconds during which the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after this, the slide member B450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.05 seconds.

When the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position, the ball can rest on the tip B451 of the slide member B450, but 0.1 seconds is not long enough compared to the time (approximately 0.2 seconds) required for the ball to move from ball position BB1 to ball position BB3 (see FIG. 1517(a)).

Therefore, when the electric device B640a is controlled to operate in the first operating pattern, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball passage opening B414 and is prevented from being introduced into the central flow path B431, so that the ball can be prevented from entering the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b (see FIG. 1503).

As shown in FIG. 1532(b), in the second operation pattern, the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for a waiting time Bt2a (1.8 seconds in this embodiment), then the slide member B450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) for an operating time Bt2b (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), then the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for the waiting time Bt2a, then the slide member B450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) for the operating time Bt2b. This pattern is repeated as the standard operation pattern BRP2.

In more detail, the 1.8 seconds that constitute the non-energized state are broken down into 0.05 seconds during which the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after this period, the slide member B450 is maintained in the forward position for 1.75 seconds.

When the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip B451 of the slide member B450, and if the slide member B450 is subsequently maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, rolls on the slide member B450, and is guided toward the central flow path B431.

The following describes the relationship between the position and timing at which the ball arrives and the time that passes before the ball passes the front end of the central flow passage B431. Since it takes approximately 0.2 seconds for the ball to reach BB3 from ball position BB1, the ball begins to pass through the ball passage opening B414 0.2 seconds after the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position.

When a ball is guided by the left guide plate portion B452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the first left ball entry period BTIL1 (0.2 to 0.6 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 2.4 seconds later, after the first left discharge period BTOL1 (2.6 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment). In this case, the ball reaches the central flow path B431 before the slide member B450 operates, so there is no change in the ball's flow speed due to the load from the slide member B450.

In addition, when the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion B452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the second left ball entry period BTIL2 (0.6 to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and the passage period is shortened by 0.5 seconds due to the backward load from the slide member B450, so that the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 after the second left discharge period BTOL2 (2.5 to 3.7 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening B414.

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the first right ball entry period BTIR1 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 2.0 seconds later, the first right discharge period BTOR1 (2.2 to 2.8 seconds in this embodiment). In this case, the ball reaches the central flow path B431 before the slide member B450 operates, so there is no change in the ball's flow speed due to the load from the slide member B450.

In addition, when the ball is guided to the right guide plate portion B453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the second right ball entry period BTIR2 (0.8 to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and the passing period is shortened by receiving a rearward load from the slide member B450, and the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 after the second right discharge period BTOR2 (2.3 to 3.3 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening B414.

Therefore, when the electric device B640a is controlled to operate in the second operating pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the electric device B640a is in a de-energized state (the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position and the tilt member B470 is positioned in the closed position) at the timing when the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431, so the ball is not picked up by the tilt member B470 and is not guided to the second winning opening B640 (see Figure 1503), but is guided to the third winning opening B64b (see Figure 1503).

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the position of the ball (for balls that enter later), a load is applied to the ball when the slide member B450 is operated, shortening the time required for the ball to pass through. This makes it possible to operate the slide member B450 with an operating pattern having a shorter period than the time required for a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 to pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-excited state (the time required for the ball to flow down through the left guide plate portion B452 (approximately 2.4 seconds in this embodiment)), while still allowing the ball to pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 within the period of the operating pattern of the slide member B450.

Therefore, the ball that passes through the ball passage opening B414 when the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position for the first time (nth time) can pass through the front end of the central flow passage B431 when the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position for the second time (n+1th time) via the slide member B450 being positioned in the retracted position.

In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage opening B414 and the passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow passage B431 can be completed as one set of the nth state and the n+1th state in which the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position.

As shown in FIG. 1532(c), in the third operation pattern, the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for a waiting time Bt3a (2.0 seconds in this embodiment), and then the slide member B450 is maintained in an energized state (retracted position) for an operating time Bt3b (2.0 seconds in this embodiment), and this pattern is repeated as the reference operation pattern BRP3.

In more detail, of the 2.0 seconds that constitute the non-energized state, the second symbol is displayed in a varying manner for 0.05 seconds, and after this period the slide member B450 is maintained in the forward position for 1.95 seconds.

When the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip B451 of the slide member B450, and if the slide member B450 is subsequently maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, rolls on the slide member B450, and is guided toward the central flow path B431.

The following describes the relationship between the position and timing at which the ball arrives and the time that passes before the ball passes the front end of the central flow passage B431. Since it takes approximately 0.2 seconds for the ball to reach BB3 from ball position BB1, the ball begins to pass through the ball passage opening B414 0.2 seconds after the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position.

When a ball is guided by the left guide plate portion B452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the third left ball entry period BTIL3 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 2.4 seconds later, after the third left discharge period BTOL3 (2.6 to 3.2 seconds in this embodiment).

In addition, when a ball is guided by the left guide plate portion B452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the fourth left ball entry period BTIL4 (0.8 to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and the passage period is shortened by receiving a rearward load from the slide member B450, and the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 after the fourth left discharge period BTOL4 (2.7 to 3.9 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening B414.

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the third right ball entry period BTIR3 (0.2 to 1.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 2.0 seconds later, the third right discharge period BTOR3 (2.2 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment).

In addition, when a ball is guided to the right guide plate portion B453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 after the fourth right ball entry period BTIR4 (1.0 to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, and the passing period is shortened by receiving a rearward load from the slide member B450, and the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 after the fourth right discharge period BTOR4 (2.5 to 3.5 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening B414.

Therefore, when the electric device B640a is controlled to operate in the third operating pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the electric device B640a is in an excited state (the slide member B450 is in the retracted position and the tilt member B470 is in the open position) at the timing when the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431, so the ball is picked up by the tilt member B470 and guided without fail to the second winning opening B640 (see Figure 1503), and is not guided to the third winning opening B64b (see Figure 1503).

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the position of the ball (for balls that enter late), a load is applied to the ball when the slide member B450 is operated, shortening the time required for the ball to pass through. As a result, even if the operation pattern is such that the period during which the slide member B450 is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than the time required for a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 to pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-excited state (the time required for the ball to flow down through the left guide plate portion B452 (approximately 2.4 seconds in this embodiment)), the ball can pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 while the slide member B450 is maintained in the retracted position.

Therefore, in the standard operating pattern, the ball that rides on the slide member B450, which is positioned in the forward position when the electric device B640a is in the non-energized state, and flows down to the central flow path B431 can be picked up by the tilting member B470, which is positioned in the open position when the electric device B640a is in the energized state. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage opening B414 and the passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow path B431 can be completed in the standard operating pattern BRP3.

As described above, the ball guided by the electric device B640a passes through different ball entrances depending on the operation pattern of the electric device B640a. First, when the electric device B640a is controlled to operate in the first operation pattern, the ball does not pass through the ball passage opening B414, but passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, or falls off the opening B435a.

Therefore, there is no support for drawing special symbols, and since the drawing of special symbols is solely based on balls entering the first winning port B64, it is difficult to draw special symbols frequently without intervals. When a ball that has flown down the front side of the sliding member B450 passes through the opening B435a, a prize ball is paid out, and the only support provided is in terms of increasing the number of game balls the player has in hand.

Next, when the electric device B640a is controlled to operate in the second operating pattern, the electric device B640a is de-energized at the timing when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 passes the front end of the central flow path B431, and the tilting member B470 is positioned in the closed position, so that the ball flows down the front side of the tilting member B470 toward the third winning opening B64b (see Figure 1503).

This allows the special symbol 1 to be drawn more frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the third winning slot B64b, a prize ball is paid out, which helps increase the number of game balls the player has in hand.

Next, when the electric device B640a is controlled to operate in the third operating pattern, the electric device B640a is energized at the timing when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 passes the front end of the central flow path B431, and the tilting member B470 is positioned in the open position, so that the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470 and flows down toward the second winning opening B640 (see FIG. 1503), that is, toward the detection sensor B462 (see E5).

This allows the special symbol 2 to be drawn more frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the second winning slot B640, a prize ball is paid out, which helps increase the number of game balls the player has in hand.

By being able to set the third operating pattern from the first operating pattern in this way, even in a design in which the electric device B640a is constantly driven to open and close, it is possible to switch between a case in which a ball enters the second winning hole B640 and a case in which a ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole B640.

In other words, when the drive control of the electric device B640a is executed in the first or second operation pattern, the ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole B640, and when the drive control of the electric device B640a is executed in the third operation pattern, the ball frequently enters the second winning hole B640.

Figure 1533 is a diagram explaining the relationship between reservation type, game state, special symbol type, and variable time. Note that, to make it easier to understand, only special symbol 2 is illustrated, and special symbol 1 is omitted from the illustration.

For special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is set the same in both low and high probability states, and if a losing pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 or 20 seconds, and if a winning pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, the state of the lottery for special pattern 2 is set to either the low probability state or the high probability state described above, and the game progresses with the variation time being different based on the set game state.

As shown in FIG. 1533, in a low probability state (normal state or time-saving state in this embodiment), if a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is determined based on the reservation of special pattern 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 minutes. On the other hand, in a low probability state, if a big winning pattern is determined based on the reservation of special pattern 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

The reason why the fluctuation time is set to a long time of 10 minutes is to reduce the profit that the player can obtain if a ball enters the second winning port B640 in a low probability state. As a result, even if a ball flowing down inside the winning unit B400 accidentally enters the second winning port B640, the fluctuation of the special pattern 2 can be prolonged unless the game state is shifted to a high probability state, making it difficult for the player to obtain a profit from the lottery for the special pattern 2.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls of special pattern 2 is allowed to be up to four, so if a jackpot pattern is determined with reserved balls of special pattern 2, a jackpot based on that determination may occur 10 to 30 minutes later (the special pattern fluctuations may stop).

As a result, it is possible that the player playing when the jackpot pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 2 may be different from the player playing when the jackpot based on the reserved special pattern 2 occurs, or that there may be no player playing when the jackpot occurs.

In such a case, if the machine immediately transitions to a special game mode when a jackpot occurs, the player currently playing the machine, or players playing another pachinko machine nearby, may be surprised by the sudden start of the special game mode, which may lead players to suspect a malfunction.

In response to this, when a jackpot is determined, it is possible to determine the conditions for transitioning to a special game state. In this embodiment, after a jackpot is determined (after the special symbols have stopped varying), the player can transition to the special game state by passing the ball through the through gates B66 and B67 in accordance with the instructions displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81.

In other words, by controlling the machine so that the special game state is not entered until the ball passes through the through gates B66 and B67, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suspect a malfunction. Note that the location through which the ball must pass to enter the special game state is not limited to the through gates B66 and B67; for example, the machine may be controlled so that the special game state is entered when the ball passes through the general winning port B63.

In addition, in a high probability state (high probability state or special high probability state in this embodiment), if a losing symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 5 seconds or 20 seconds.

In addition, in a high probability state, if a small winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 2 seconds. On the other hand, in a high probability state, if a big winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

In the high probability state, the change time is set short, especially when the small winning pattern is determined based on the reservation of special pattern 2. Therefore, in a state where balls frequently enter the second winning port B640 (in this embodiment, when the drive control of the electric device B640a is executed in the third operation pattern), the player can frequently execute the small winning game and open the specific winning port B65a, so that the player can frequently obtain prize balls based on the balls entering the specific winning port B65a.

The setting of the change time for the special symbols is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a wide variety of variations may be added to the change time for each symbol, or the length of the change time may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols. When the length of the change time changes according to the number of reserved special symbols, the change time is generally set to be longer when there are fewer reserved symbols than when there are more reserved symbols (when the tank is close to full).

This embodiment can solve the problem seen in conventional machines where a player may receive an unexpected benefit by firing a ball at an inappropriate time to win the lottery for special symbol 2.

That is, even in conventional machines, there have been examples of configurations that allow switching between a state in which the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port associated with the drawing of special symbol 1 is high, as in this embodiment, and a state in which the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry port associated with the drawing of special symbol 2 is high.

However, if the number of electric device B640a to be installed is limited to one, it is assumed that the electric device B640a will be installed in association with either the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, and no electric device B640a will be installed in the other ball entrance, so that the balls will always be able to enter the stadium.

In this case, if the ball entry efficiency of one ball entry port (corresponding to the first winning port B64, see FIG. 1503) located in the center of the game board B13 is higher than that of the other ball entry port, or if the player can obtain a very high profit if a ball enters the other ball entry port and a jackpot is won in the lottery, the player may shoot the ball toward the other ball entry port even if the game provided by the pachinko machine B10 indicates that it is the right time to let the ball enter the one ball entry port.

Even if measures are taken to reduce the efficiency of consumption of fluctuations based on balls entering the other ball entry port by making the fluctuation time of special pattern 2 in a low probability state extremely long, if fluctuations based on the reserved special pattern 1 start regardless of the number of reserved special pattern 2, and the game is played by first having a ball enter the other ball entry port to cause special pattern 2 to fluctuate, and then having a ball enter one ball entry port, the fluctuating time of special pattern 2 can be consumed while playing the game provided by pachinko machine B10, then the deterrent effect can be said to be low.

Even if the timing is such that the ball should enter one of the ball entry slots in the game provided by the pachinko machine B10, if the ball enters the other ball entry slot, resulting in a jackpot, the game will transition to a special game state. If this gives the player an advantage that was not intended in the game provided by the pachinko machine B10, this creates a problem in terms of the fairness of the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the electric role B640a (slide member B450 and tilt member B470) driven by a single solenoid BSOL41 can reduce the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry port (corresponding to the second winning port B640) related to the lottery for special pattern 2 in a state in which the electric role B640a (slide member B450 and tilt member B470) supports an increase in the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port (corresponding to the third winning port B64b) related to the lottery for special pattern 1 (a state in which the electric role B640a is driven and controlled by the second operating pattern), while it can reduce the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port related to the lottery for special pattern 1 in a state in which the electric role B640a supports an increase in the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry port related to the lottery for special pattern 2 (a state in which the electric role B640a is driven and controlled by the third operating pattern).

Furthermore, it is possible to configure a state in which the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port (corresponding to the third winning port B64b) related to the drawing of special pattern 1 and the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry port (corresponding to the second winning port B640) related to the drawing of special pattern 2 are both low (a state in which the electric device B640a is driven and controlled in the first operating pattern).

This makes it possible to prevent the pachinko machine B10 from giving players benefits that were not intended in the game it provides, improving the fairness of the game.

Figures 1534 to 1536 are cross-sectional views of the slide member B450, tilt member B470, and transmission member B480 along the line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV in Figure 1524(a). Figures 1534 to 1536 chronologically illustrate the switching operation of the electric role B640a from a non-excited state to an excited state, with Figure 1534 illustrating the non-excited state of the electric role B640a, Figure 1535 illustrating the state in which the first member B481 rises while the slide section 450 is maintained in the forward position, and Figure 1536 illustrating the excited state of the electric role B640a. Also, in Figures 1534 to 1536, the outline of the plate member B410 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a reference for the arrangement.

As shown in Figures 1534 to 1536, when the electric role B640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state, there is a discrepancy between the operation timing of the sliding member B450 and the operation timing of the tilting member B470.

That is, only the tilting member B470 moves from the start of the operation to the intermediate position (see Figs. 1534 and 1535), and from the intermediate position, the tilting member B470 and the slide member B450 move (see Figs. 1535 and 1536). At this time, the operation ends almost simultaneously for the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470 (see Fig. 1536).

This will be explained in detail below. The first member B481 moves integrally with the plunger BSOL41a (see FIG. 1512) of the solenoid BSOL41, and therefore moves up and down in synchronization with the drive timing of the solenoid BSOL41.

On the other hand, in a configuration in which the driving force is transmitted from the first member B481 to the second member B485 via a pair of transmission plate portions B482 formed at the rear end of the first member B481, when the electric device B640a is in a non-excited state, the upper plate portion B482a abuts against the eccentric protrusion B486 of the second member B485, while a gap is maintained between the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486.

The second member B485 is supported so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft portion B485a, and is engaged with the engaging plate portion B431b via the slide member B450 (see FIG. 1519), so that its position in the non-excited state (see FIG. 1534) is the terminal position of the forward rotation displacement.

When the first member B481 rises from the non-energized state, the position of the second member B485 and the arrangement of the slide member B450 are maintained until the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486 come into contact, and only the tilting member B470 tilts. In other words, the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilting member B470.

When the first member B481 is rising, after the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486 come into contact, the second member B485 rotates in the backward direction around the rotation shaft portion B485a with the eccentric protrusion B486 being lifted by the lower plate portion B482b.

In this way, when switching the electric role B640a from an excited state to a non-excited state while using the driving force of the same solenoid BSOL41 (see FIG. 1512), the timing at which the tilting member B470 requires a driving force is shifted from the timing at which the sliding member B450 requires a driving force.

In particular, after the state in which the transmission of driving force to the slide member B450 starts (see FIG. 1535), the transmitted part B474 of the tilt member B470 is retracted from above the first member B481, so the operation of the tilt member B470 is left to its own weight, and the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 is used to move the slide member B450.

In addition, as described above, when the electric device B640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state, the tilting operation of the tilting member B470 starts first, so the tilting operation of the tilting member B470 can start regardless of the operating resistance of the slide member B450.

Therefore, even if a ball is placed on the slide member B450, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the tilting action of the tilting member B470 is delayed due to the weight of the ball, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the start timing of the period in which the ball is guided toward the second winning port B640 deviates from the control due to the tilting member B470 being placed in the open position.

In addition, even if the ball is positioned on the front side when the tilting member B470 starts to displace and the ball is pinched between the tilting member B470 and the front design member B420 (see FIG. 1519), the driving force is transmitted to the tilting member B470 without being allocated to the sliding member B450, so a force sufficient to expel the ball downward can be generated. Therefore, the state in which the ball is pinched between the tilting member B470 and the front design member B420 can be quickly resolved.

On the other hand, when the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 (see FIG. 1513) is transmitted to the slide member B450 (see FIG. 1535 and FIG. 1536), the driving force allocated to the tilting member B470 becomes extremely small, and the driving force can be concentrated on the slide member B450. Therefore, when a ball is placed on the slide member B450, a backward load can be applied to the ball via the slide member B450.

In this embodiment, the path of the ball flowing down toward the tilting member B470 is surrounded by the plate member B410 and the front design member B420, and is configured so that the ball does not deviate from the tilting member B470 (see FIG. 1522). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1535, even before the tilting member B470 is fully opened, the weight of the ball is applied to the tilting member B470, displacing the tilting member B470 to the open position (pushing it down), making it easier for the ball to be picked up by the tilting member B470.

Even when the electric device B640a is switched from an excited state to a non-excited state (the operation returning from FIG. 1536 to FIG. 1534), there is a discrepancy between the operation timing of the sliding member B450 and the operation timing of the tilting member B470.

That is, from the start of the operation (see FIG. 1536) to the midway position (see FIG. 1535), the first member B481 of the transmission member B480 presses down on the transmitted portion B474 of the tilting member B470, and the lower plate portion B482b of the first member B481 presses down on the locking protrusion B487 of the second member B485, so that the tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 operate together. On the other hand, since the sliding member B450 has already reached the forward position at the midway position (see FIG. 1535), only the tilting member B470 operates from the midway position.

As a result, when the electric device B640a is switched from an excited state to a de-excited state, the slide member B450 can be positioned in the forward position before the tilt member B470 completes its operation. This makes it easier for the ball to land on the tip B451 (the period during which the ball is picked up by the tip B451 can be extended as much as possible), and also makes it easier for the ball to be picked up by the tilt member B470 (the period until the tilt member B470 reaches the closed position can be extended).

In addition, in this embodiment, the protrusion B455 is not formed on the underside of the tip B451 of the slide member B450, and elastic deformation in the vertical direction is allowed at the tip B451. Therefore, even if a ball is caught between the slide member B450 and the front design member B420 (see FIG. 1521) during the switching operation from the excited state (see FIG. 1536) to the de-excited state (see FIG. 1534), and the displacement of the slide member B450 is suppressed, the tip B451 can be elastically deformed to continue the forward displacement of the slide member B450, so that the rise-up operation of the tilting member B470 linked to the slide member B450 is prevented from becoming defective, and the rise-up operation of the tilting member B470 can be reliably completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, while using the driving force of the same solenoid BSOL41 (see FIG. 1512), when switching the electric role B640a from a non-energized state to an excited state, the timing at which the tilting member B470 requires a driving force is shifted from the timing at which the sliding member B450 requires a driving force.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the electric role B640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state, the tilting member B470 starts to operate first, and then the sliding member B450 starts to operate, and the timing at which the tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 end their operations is set to be approximately the same.

The load transmission from the slide member B450 side will be described. As shown in FIG. 1534, a locking protrusion B487 is formed on the lower end of the second member B485 (the portion below the rotating shaft B485a) and protrudes along the axial direction of the rotating shaft B485a.

The locking protrusion B487 is disposed so as to abut against the lower plate B482b of the first member B481 in the front-rear direction. The frictional force generated at this abutment portion can suppress unintended lifting (floating) of the first member B481 when the electric role B640a is in a non-energized state, making it easier to maintain the tilting member B470 in the closed position.

Furthermore, even if a load (rearward load) is applied to the slide member B450 in a direction that moves the slide member B450 backward and, in conjunction with this, rotates and displaces the second member B485 in the backward direction when the electric device B640a is in a non-energized state, the rotational displacement of the second member B485 is stopped and the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 is also stopped because the lower plate portion B482b is positioned in the direction of movement of the locking protrusion portion B487.

In this case, the movement direction of the locking protrusion B487 (direction along a circle centered on the rotating shaft B485a) and the movement direction of the first member B481 (vertical direction) intersect (are perpendicular), preventing the first member B481 from being displaced vertically due to the load transmitted via the locking protrusion B487. This makes it easier to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the slide member B450 is unexpectedly displaced backward in the non-excited state.

This can be used as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts, such as, for example, inserting a thin metal wire (such as a piano wire or wire) from outside the pachinko machine B10 (see FIG. 1502) into the play area, applying a load to the slide member B450 via the thin metal wire, and changing the position of the electric device B640a.

In particular, by taking measures regarding the slide member B450, which protrudes from the front side of the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1503) in the non-energized state and which a fraudster would find easy to apply load to, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity from continuing.

Figure 1537 is a cross-sectional view of the plate member B410, base plate B437, slide member B450, tilt member B470, and transmission member B480 taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516(c). In Figure 1537, unnecessary components of the winning unit B400 are omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure, and the figure shows a state in which the operation of the tilt member B470 is temporarily stopped due to a ball being caught between the tilt member B470 and the inclined surface portion B437e while the electric role B640a is being switched from an excited state to a non-excited state.

As described above, the movements of the tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 are linked via the transmission member B480. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1537, when a ball is caught between the tilting member B470 and the inclined surface portion B437e (ball bite occurs), the forward movement of the sliding member B450 is restricted, and the ball flowing down the front side of the ball passage opening B414 (see FIG. 1517) of the plate member B410 is unlikely to be picked up by the sliding member B450.

Therefore, when a ball becomes caught between the tilting member B470 and the inclined surface portion B437e (ball biting occurs), it is easier to avoid a situation in which an unexpectedly large number of balls become trapped inside the winning unit B400.

This prevents the balls from being picked up one after another by the slide member B450 when a ball is caught between the tilting member B470 and the inclined surface portion B437e, causing the balls to flow down one after another toward the tilting member B470, and subsequent balls to overlap the ball caught between the tilting member B470 and the inclined surface portion B437e, thereby preventing a malfunction of the tilting member B470.

Returning to FIG. 1503, the explanation will be given. In this embodiment, the upper variable winning device B700 is disposed at approximately the center of the left-right width of the play area, forming the upper part of the center frame B86. Some of the balls shot out along the rails B61 and B62 collide with the nails and reach the upper variable winning device B700.

Figures 1538(a) and 1538(b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device B700 in the range MDXXXVIIIa of Figure 1503. Figure 1538(a) illustrates the upper variable winning device B700 in a closed state, and Figure 1538(b) illustrates the upper variable winning device B700 in an open state.

The upper variable winning device B700 is provided with a base plate member B710 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate B60 so as to close the opening drilled in the front-rear direction in the base plate B60 and forms a path for the balls to flow down between the base plate member B60 and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1502), a movable upper cover member B730 that can slide in the front-rear direction through an inverted V-shaped opening B711 drilled in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the base plate member B710, a detection sensor that forms a second specific winning port B700a that is configured to allow the game balls that pass through the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 to pass (win), a movable floor member B740 that can slide in the front-rear direction through a rectangular opening B712 drilled in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the base plate member B710, and a plurality of detection sensors B750 that are configured to detect the passage of balls flowing down the front side of the base plate member B710 and have openings B751 through which the balls can pass, which are arranged on the front side of the base plate member B710.

In addition, game balls that pass through the front side of the movable floor member B740 are received by the intermediate rail member B781, which is formed in a curved shape from a strip-shaped metal plate, similar to the inner rail B61 and outer rail B62, and is installed on the front side of the base plate B60.

A ball removal opening B782 is formed in the base plate B60 at the rear position of the lowest end of the intermediate rail member B781. The ball received by the intermediate rail member B781 passes through the ball removal opening B782 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The upper variable winning device B700 is positioned to form a play area between it and the glass unit B16 arranged on the front side. Because the glass unit B16 is transparent, the player can see the second specific winning port B700a and the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 when looking from the front.

In addition, a resin plate member of a size that overlaps with the second specific winning opening B700a and the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 when viewed from the front may be placed on the rear side of the glass unit B16, and the balls may be configured to flow down between the resin plate member and the base plate member B710. In this case, the visibility of the game balls can be varied depending on whether a transparent or non-transparent member is used as the resin plate member. For example, if a non-transparent member is used, the upper variable winning device B700 can be configured to make it difficult to see the passage of balls through the specific winning opening 700a or the opening B751.

The base plate member B710 has an inverted V-shaped opening B711 on the upper side, the left and right ends of which are close to the left and right central ends of the center frame B86, a rectangular opening B712 on the lower side, a pair of left and right inclined rolling plate sections B713 extending to the front side below the inverted V-shaped opening B711 and sloping downward toward the second specific winning opening B700a, and a pair of left and right inclined rolling plate sections B713 extending to the front side below the inverted V-shaped opening B711 and sloping downward toward the second specific winning opening B700a. It is equipped with an outer wall panel B714, a pair of plate-shaped parts extending to the front below the second specific winning opening B700a with a gap that can receive balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening B700a, a pair of left and right storage plate parts B715 with their lower ends positioned close to the rectangular opening B712, a pair of left and right receiving parts B716 extending to the front below the detection sensor B750 in a U-shape with a left-right width that can receive balls that have passed through the opening B751, and a pair of left and right discharge openings B717 drilled in the front-rear direction according to the inner shape of the receiving parts B716 and discharging the balls received by the receiving parts B716 to the rear side.

The inclined rolling plate portion B713, the inclined outer wall plate portion B714, the storage plate portion B715 and the receiving portion B716 are extended to a sufficient position to prevent the balls from spilling between the glass unit B16. In other words, when viewed from the front, the balls do not penetrate the inclined rolling plate portion B713, the inclined outer wall plate portion B714, the storage plate portion B715 and the receiving portion B716, but flow down along their shapes.

The inclined outer wall plate B714 forms a gap between the inclined rolling plate B713 and the upper side of the detection sensor B750 into which the ball can enter. This allows a ball that has deviated to the left or right outside above the detection sensor B750 to be guided along the incline toward the detection sensor B750.

The storage plate section B715 is positioned at a position that is the same distance to the left and right from the central axis of the second specific winning port B700a. In other words, the central axis of the second specific winning port B700a is positioned on a plane that is parallel to the left and right side surfaces of the storage plate section B715 and is positioned at the midpoint between the pair of storage plate sections B715. This makes it easier for balls that enter the second specific winning port B700a to flow into the gap between the pair of storage plate sections B715.

The movable top cover member B730 has a plate portion B731 that is bent in an inverted V shape when viewed from the front and slopes downward outward to the left and right. When the upper variable winning device B700 is in the closed state, the plate portion B731 protrudes to the front side of the base plate B60, and balls placed on the movable top cover member B730 are swept outward to the left and right along the slope of the plate portion B731.

When the upper variable winning device B700 is switched to the open state, the plate portion B731 is retracted rearward from the front end surface of the base plate B60, and the balls on the plate portion B731 fall toward the inclined rolling plate portion B713.

At this time, when the upper variable winning device B700 is in the closed state, the ball that flows down along the slope of the plate portion B731 has a speed toward the left and right outside, so it is likely to land on the left and right outside parts of the inclined rolling plate portion B713. After that, the ball flows along the slope toward the left and right inside of the inclined rolling plate portion B713 and passes through the second specific winning port B700a.

In other words, the direction in which the ball flows down the top surface of the plate portion B731 is more likely to take a detour than the shortest route to the second specific winning opening B700a, and the time it takes for the ball to pass through the second specific winning opening B700a can be lengthened.

By tilting the movable top cover member B730 to both the left and right, the above-mentioned effect of lengthening the time it takes for the ball to pass through the second specific winning port B700a can be achieved in multiple ways, so that the ball's flow can be slowed down and the ball's flow can be prevented from becoming stagnant.

In other words, while it prolongs the time it takes for the ball to pass through, it is easy to maintain the ball's smooth flow, which prevents players from stopping to shoot the ball because they suspect it is jammed. In other words, it promotes the shooting of the ball.

Furthermore, by lengthening the time it takes for the ball to pass through, even if multiple balls are placed near the top of the second specific winning opening B700a, they will always pass through the second specific winning opening B700a. Therefore, by keeping the second specific winning opening B700a in the player's field of vision, the player can avoid losing sight of the ball that has passed in front of the movable top cover member B730.

The vertical distance between the plate portion B731 and the inclined rolling plate portion B713 is longest at the center on the left and right, and becomes shorter toward the outside on the left and right. Furthermore, at the outside ends on the left and right, the vertical distance is configured to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Therefore, for example, when a ball is resting on the left or right outer end of the inclined rolling plate portion B713, when the upper variable winning device B700 is switched to the closed state and the plate portion B731 of the movable upper cover member B730 slides forward, a load is generated from the plate portion B731 in a direction pushing the ball inward to the left or right.

This prevents the ball that has passed the front side of the plate portion B731 from becoming stuck at the left and right outer ends of the inclined rolling plate portion B713, and also prevents the time it takes for the ball to reach the second specific winning port B700a from becoming excessively long.

The movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 move in synchronous opposite directions by the driving force of the solenoid B763 described below. In Figures 1538(a) and 1538(b), the outer shapes of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are shown in solid lines when the gap between them and the glass unit B16 is short enough to prevent a ball from passing through, and are shown in imaginary lines when the gap between them and the glass unit B16 is long enough to allow a ball to pass through.

In other words, when the upper variable winning device B700 is closed, the movable floor member B740 is retracted to the rear, allowing balls to be discharged below the storage plate portion B715 (see Figure 1538 (a)), and when the upper variable winning device B700 is open, the movable floor member B740 is extended forward, making it impossible to discharge balls below the storage plate portion B715 (see Figure 1538 (b)).

When the upper variable winning device B700 is in the open state, if a ball that has flowed down the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 is detected passing through the second specific winning port B700a, a prize ball is paid out, while the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 functions as a specific area for changing the game state in response to the ball entering the game. In other words, if a ball passes through the opening B751 during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to be a high probability state, as will be described in detail later.

Figures 1539(a) to 1539(c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device B700 in the range MDXXXVIIIa of Figure 1503. Figures 1539(a) to 1539(c) show an example of the manner in which a ball enters the upper variable winning device B700 in chronological order.

In Figures 1539(a) to 1539(c), the meaning of the outer shapes of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 being illustrated with solid lines and with imaginary lines is the same as in Figures 1538(a) and 1538(b).

As shown in FIG. 1539(a), when the upper variable winning device B700 is in the open state, a ball that passes the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 rolls on the inclined rolling plate portion B713 and passes through the second specific winning port B700a, or, for example, a ball that falls from directly above the second specific winning port B700a flows directly into the second specific winning port B700a without passing through the inclined rolling plate portion B713.

The balls that pass through the second specific winning opening B700a are stored in order in the area formed by the storage plate B715 and the movable floor member B740, as shown in FIG. 1539(b). Then, when the storage plate B715 is filled with balls up to near the top end (ball BP1, the fourth ball that passed through the second specific winning opening B700a, is positioned near the top end of the storage plate B715), ball BP2 that passed through the second specific winning opening B700a following ball BP1 cannot enter the gap between the storage plate B715 and flows left and right and passes through the opening B751 (see FIG. 1539(c)).

In other words, when the storage plate B715 is filled with balls up to near the top end, it is not the balls positioned inside the storage plate B715 that pass through the opening B751, but rather the balls that follow and reach near the top end of the storage plate B715.

In the example shown in FIG. 1539, if more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plates B715 (in this embodiment, four balls) pass through the second specific winning port B700a, the balls will pass through the opening B751.

Figures 1540(a) to 1540(c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device B700 in the range MDXXXVIIIa of Figure 1503. Figures 1540(a) to 1540(c) show an example of the manner in which a ball enters the upper variable winning device B700 in chronological order.

In Figures 1540(a) to 1540(c), the meaning of the outer shapes of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 being illustrated with solid lines and with imaginary lines is the same as in the illustrations in Figures 1538(a) and 1538(b).

As shown in FIG. 1540(a), when the upper variable winning device B700 is in the open state, balls are maintained stored in the area formed by the storage plate section B715 and the movable floor member B740, and balls that pass the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 roll on the inclined rolling plate section B713 and pass through the second specific winning port B700a, or, for example, balls that fall from directly above the second specific winning port B700a flow directly into the second specific winning port B700a without passing through the inclined rolling plate section B713.

The state shown in Figure 1540 (a) is similar to the state shown in Figure 1539 (b), in which a ball BP1 that can be positioned near the upper end of the storage plate portion B715 by riding on the balls stored between the storage plates B715 flows down.

In this state, when the upper variable winning device B700 is switched to the closed state, the movable floor member B740 retreats to the rear, and the balls stored in the area between the storage plate sections B715 are discharged in order from the bottom (see FIG. 1540(b)).

Figures 1540(b) and 1540(c) show a state in which only one ball has been discharged, but the number of balls discharged corresponds to the length of time that the movable floor member B740 is retracted rearward; if the time is short, only a portion of the balls are discharged, and if the time is long, all of the balls are discharged.

Since the balls are discharged from the area between the storage plates B715, ball BP1, which is the fourth ball to pass through the second specific winning port B700a, is positioned one ball (i.e., the number of balls discharged) below the upper end of the storage plate B715, and as shown in FIG. 1540(c), ball BP2, which follows ball BP1 and passes through the second specific winning port B700a, also enters the area between the storage plates 715, and ball BP2 is positioned near the upper end of the storage plate B715.

From the state shown in Figure 1540 (c), if a ball passes through the second specific winning port B700a following ball BP2, it cannot enter the gap between the storage plates B715, but flows to the left and right and passes through the opening B751.

In other words, according to the example shown in FIG. 1540, even if a number of balls greater than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gaps between the storage plates B715 (four in this embodiment) pass through the second specific winning port B700a, the balls do not necessarily pass through the opening B751.

Whether or not the ball passes through the opening B751 depends on whether or not the state in which ball BP1 is positioned near the upper end of the storage plate B715 (see FIG. 1539(c)) is maintained until the trailing ball BP2 passes through the second specific winning port B700a and reaches near the upper end of the storage plate B715.

The discharge of balls from the storage plate B715 occurs when the movable top cover member B730 is closed (see FIG. 1540(b)). Since the number of balls discharged is related to the length of the opening and closing operation, the more frequently the opening and closing operation of the movable top cover member B730 occurs and the longer the movable top cover member B730 is closed, the more difficult it becomes to maintain the state in which the ball BP1 is positioned near the upper end of the storage plate B715 (see FIG. 1539(c)), and the more difficult it becomes for the ball to pass through the opening B751. Details of the operation control of the movable top cover member B730 will be described later.

Figures 1541(a) to 1541(c) are cross-sectional views of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in Figure 1538(a). In Figures 1541(a) to 1541(c), the front and rear end faces of the base plate B60 are shown in imaginary lines, and the manner in which the upper variable winning device B700 is switched from a closed state to an open state is illustrated in chronological order. Note that in Figures 1541(a) to 1541(c), for ease of understanding, the drive transmission device B760 is illustrated as a side view viewed from the right, rather than as a cross-sectional view.

The drive transmission device B760 includes a first member B761 journaled on a rotating shaft BJ1 fixedly positioned near the rear side of the base plate B60, a second member B762 journaled on a rotating shaft BJ2 fixedly positioned near the front side of the base plate B60, a solenoid B763 configured to allow a plunger B763a to slide vertically by electromagnetic force, and a transmission member B764 into which the plunger B763a of the solenoid B763 is fitted and which slides vertically in sync with the sliding movement of the plunger B763a.

When the upper variable winning device B700 is in the closed state (see FIG. 1541(a)), the first member B761 is supported in a forward-leaning position by a support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side, the movable upper cover member B730 is positioned in a forward position, the second member B762 is supported in a backward-leaning position by a support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side, and the movable floor member B740 is positioned in a backward position.

When the upper variable winning device B700 is in the open state (see FIG. 1541 (c)), the first member B761 is in a backward position, the movable upper cover member B730 is in a retracted position, the second member B762 is in a forward position, and the movable floor member B740 is in an advanced position.

The first member B761 has a protrusion B761a that protrudes rightward from the right side surface and has a circular cross section, and the transmission member B764 has a rear extension B764a that extends toward the protrusion B761a side (the rear side in this embodiment) so as to be located below the protrusion B761a, and a bent extension B764b that extends toward the protrusion B761a side (the rear side in this embodiment) above the rear extension B764a and parallel to the rear extension B764a, and has a bent tip.

The second member B762 has a protrusion B762a that protrudes rightward from the right side surface and has a circular cross section, and the transmission member B764 has a rear extension B764c that extends toward the protrusion B762a (the rear side in this embodiment) so as to be located above the protrusion B762a, and a bent extension B764d that extends toward the protrusion B762a side (the rear side in this embodiment) below the rear extension B764c and parallel to the rear extension B764c, and has a bent tip.

The solenoid B763 is configured to pull the plunger B763a upward when an electromagnetic force is generated (excited state), and when the electromagnetic force disappears (de-excited state), the plunger B763a is lowered downward by the force of the coil spring and gravity.

The interlocking of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 will now be described. As shown in FIG. 1541(a), when the solenoid B763 is in a non-excited state, the plunger B763a is positioned at the lower end position, and the transmission member B764 of the drive transmission device B760 is positioned at the lower end position.

When the solenoid B763 is energized, the transmission member B764 slides upward, and in the process of the sliding movement, the second member B762 begins to rotate in the forward direction with the protrusion B762a first being pushed up against the upper surface of the bent extension B764d (see FIG. 1541(b)).

During this time, the rear extension B764a also slides upward, but the gap between the rear extension B764a and the protruding portion B761a is merely filled, and the protruding portion B761a is not subjected to a load from the rear extension B764a. In other words, the first member B761 still maintains its forward-leaning position.

When the transmission member B764 slides further upward from the state shown in FIG. 1541(b), the first member B761 rotates in the rearward rotation direction with the protrusion B761a being pushed up against the upper surface of the rearward extension B764a, changing to a rearward tilted position (see FIG. 1541(c)).

In this embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member B764 until the first member B761 reaches the backward position from the forward position is the same as the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member B764 until the second member B762 reaches the forward position from the backward position.

Therefore, the second member B762 assumes a forward-leaning position before the first member B761 assumes a backward-leaning position. In this embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension portion B764d is set to a length that does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion B762a in the forward-leaning position of the second member B762, so that an upward load from the bent extension portion B764d to the second member B762 is prevented from being applied after the second member B762 assumes a forward-leaning position.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the portion extending downward at the rear end side of the bent extension portion B764d abuts against the protrusion portion B762a, restricting the displacement diagonally forward and downward, thereby preventing the second member B762 from rotating in the backward direction.

In this case, the load applied from the protrusion B762a to the transmission member B764 is mainly a load in the front-to-rear direction, so it is easy to prevent the transmission member B764 from being displaced in the up-down direction due to the load transmitted via the protrusion B762a, and it is easy to maintain the position of the transmission member B764.

As shown in Figures 1541(a) to 1541(c), when the upper variable winning device B700 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 do not operate simultaneously, but there is a time difference in the operation timing.

In other words, the movable floor member B740 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the movable top cover member B730 starts moving toward the retracted position. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a ball passes the front side of the movable top cover member B730 immediately after the movable top cover member B730 is displaced to the retracted position, the movable floor member B740 is already positioned in the forward position at that time.

This prevents the movable floor member B740 from being positioned in the forward position until the ball that has passed the front side of the movable top cover member B730 has passed by, making it possible to avoid a situation in which the ball passes by the front side of the movable floor member B740 and is not stored between the storage plate sections B715.

In addition, in this embodiment, the shape of the movable top cover member B730 is designed to lengthen the period it takes for a ball to roll along the top surface of the plate portion B731 and pass through the second specific winning port B700a, thereby preventing the ball from being stored between the storage plate portions B715.

Figures 1542(a) to 1542(c) are cross-sectional views of the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in Figure 1538(a). In Figures 1542(a) to 1542(c), the front and rear end faces of the base plate B60 are shown in imaginary lines, and the manner in which the upper variable winning device B700 is switched from an open state to a closed state is illustrated in chronological order. Note that in Figures 1542(a) to 1542(c), for ease of understanding, the drive transmission device B760 is illustrated not as a cross-sectional view but as a side view viewed from the right.

The interlocking of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 will now be described. As shown in FIG. 1542(a), when the solenoid B763 is in an excited state, the plunger B763a is positioned at the upper end position, and the transmission member B764 of the drive transmission device B760 is positioned at the upper end position.

When the solenoid B763 is de-energized, the force of the coil spring of the solenoid B763 and gravity move the plunger B763a downward, causing the transmission member B764 to slide downward. During this sliding movement, the protrusion B761a is first pressed down against the underside of the bent extension B764b, causing the first member B761 to begin to rotate in the forward direction (see FIG. 1542(b)).

During this time, the rear extension B764c also slides downward, but the gap between the rear extension B764c and the protruding portion B762a is merely filled, and the protruding portion B762a is not subjected to a load from the rear extension B764c. In other words, the second member B762 still maintains its forward-leaning position.

When the transmission member B764 slides further downward from the state shown in FIG. 1542(b), the second member B762 rotates in the rearward rotation direction with the protrusion B762a being pressed down against the underside of the rearward extension B764c, changing to a rearward tilted position (see FIG. 1542(c)).

In this embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member B764 until the first member B761 reaches the forward-tilted position from the backward-tilted position is the same as the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member B764 until the second member B762 reaches the backward-tilted position from the forward-tilted position.

Therefore, the first member B761 assumes a forward-leaning position before the second member B762 assumes a backward-leaning position. In this embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension portion B764b is set to a length that does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion B761a in the forward-leaning position of the first member B761, so that a downward load is prevented from being applied from the bent extension portion B764b to the first member B761 after the first member B761 assumes a forward-leaning position.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end side of the bent extension portion B764b abuts against the protrusion portion B761a, restricting the displacement diagonally forward and upward, thereby preventing the first member B761 from rotating in the backward direction.

In this case, the load applied from the protrusion B761a to the transmission member B764 is mainly a load in the front-to-rear direction, so it is easy to prevent the transmission member B764 from being displaced in the up-down direction due to the load transmitted via the protrusion B761a, and it is easy to maintain the position of the transmission member B764.

As shown in Figures 1542(a) to 1542(c), when the upper variable winning device B700 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 do not operate simultaneously, but there is a time difference in the operation timing.

That is, the movable top cover member B730 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the movable floor member B740 starts moving toward the retreated position. This makes it possible to extend the time it takes for a ball that triggers the closing of the movable top cover member B730 (for example, a ball that passes through the second specific winning port B700a the specified number of times) to reach the upper end of the storage plate section B715.

In other words, the time from when the movable floor member B740 is moved to the retracted position until balls begin to be discharged from the storage plate portion B715 can be extended, thereby increasing the likelihood that the ball that triggers the closing of the movable top cover member B730 will pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750.

In particular, the ball that triggers the closing of the movable top cover member B730 passes the front side of the plate portion B731, so it is not affected by the inclination of the plate portion B731 and often flows down at a speed inward to the left and right. This shortens the time it takes to reach the second specific winning port B700a, increasing the player's anticipation of reaching the upper end of the storage plate portion B715 before the movable floor member B740 is displaced to the retracted position.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the distance from the second specific winning opening B700a to the detection sensor B750 is short, and the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion B715 is positioned directly below the second specific winning opening B700a. This makes the player think that if the ball simply passes through the second specific winning opening B700a, it may pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750, increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

Next, referring to FIG. 1543, the opening pattern of the second specific winning port B700a that opens in the first round in the big win game of this embodiment will be described. In the explanation of FIG. 1543, FIG. 1503, FIG. 1505, and FIG. 1538 to FIG. 1542 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 1543(a) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning port B700a in the first special operation pattern, Figure 1543(b) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning port B700a in the second special operation pattern, and Figure 1543(c) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning port B700a in the third special operation pattern.

When the MPUB201 (see FIG. 1505) determines that a jackpot has been awarded, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the special chart change display (pattern change presentation) ends. Below, we will explain the operation control of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded.

In addition, in Figures 1543(a) to 1543(c), "top open, bottom closed" means a state in which the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the retreated position and the movable floor member B740 is positioned in the advanced position, and "top closed, bottom open" means a state in which the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the advanced position and the movable floor member B740 is positioned in the retreated position. As described above, in this embodiment, the timing of the displacement of the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 is shifted, but in Figures 1543(a) to 1543(c), this is illustrated in a simplified manner that does not express the timing shift.

First, a case where the operation of the first special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPUB201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 operate based on the first special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPUB201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that when the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the timer means (not shown) holds the movable upper cover member B730 in the forward position until a predetermined opening time BOP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time BOP1 has elapsed, the first round of round play R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid B763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member B730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening B700a, thereby causing the movable upper cover member B730 to operate for a long period of time.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time BT1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the solenoid B763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member B730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning hole B700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the first special operation pattern, the movable floor member B740 is always kept in the forward position during the first round of round play R, so that, as described above with reference to FIG. 1539, in the process of passing a specified number of balls through the second specific winning port B700a, a number of balls greater than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate sections B715 (four in this embodiment) can be made to flow down toward the storage plate section B715. This makes it easy to create the situation where the balls pass through the opening B751.

When the first round of play R ends, the timer means controls the solenoid B763 to hold the movable top cover member B730 in the forward position until the first interval time BInt1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and starts the second round of play R after the first interval time BInt1 has elapsed.

The first interval time BInt1 between rounds should be set to a time sufficient for the ball that passed the front side of the movable top cover member B730 immediately before the movable top cover member B730 is displaced to the forward position to pass the front side of the movable floor member B740, and in this embodiment is set to approximately 2 seconds.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operation time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the specific winning hole B65a is opened. Then, when the round end condition is met in the round game R (the round game time (maximum value of the first operation time BT1, 30 seconds) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls have won), the specific winning hole B65a is closed and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, the round games R from the 3rd round to the maximum 15th round are repeated with a first interval time BInt1 between each round game R, and the specific winning port B65a is opened and closed.

When the final round of play R ends, the timer means keeps the specific winning port B65a closed until the first interval time BInt1 between rounds and the ending time ED (e.g., 11 seconds) have elapsed, and the jackpot play ends with the passage of that time.

Next, a case where the operation of the second special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPUB201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 operate based on the second special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPUB201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that when the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the movable upper cover member B730 in the forward position until a predetermined opening time BOP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time BOP1 has elapsed, the first round of round play R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid B763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member B730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening B700a, thereby causing the movable upper cover member B730 to operate for a long period of time.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time BT1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the solenoid B763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member B730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning hole B700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the second special operation pattern, during the first round of round play R, a state in which the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the retracted position and the movable floor member B740 is positioned in the advanced position is switched approximately every second between a state in which the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the advanced position and the movable floor member B740 is positioned in the retracted position.

In other words, the state is switched approximately every second between a state in which balls can be guided toward the second specific winning opening B700a and balls can be stored in a position between the storage plates B715, and a state in which the guidance of balls toward the second specific winning opening B700a is restricted and balls stored in a position between the storage plates B715 are discharged.

In this embodiment, the discharge of balls from the position between the storage plate parts B715 is completed in approximately 0.2 seconds per ball. Therefore, while the movable floor member B740 is positioned in the retracted position for approximately 1 second, a maximum of 5 balls can flow down the front side of the movable floor member B740 from the position between the storage plate parts B715. Also, considering the ball launch interval allowed for the pachinko machine B10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), the number of balls passing the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 while it is positioned in the retracted position for approximately 1 second is at most about 3.

Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 1540, in the process of passing a specified number of balls through the second specific winning port B700a, a state is created in which the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plates B715 can be discharged. Furthermore, since the number of balls that can be discharged from the gaps between the storage plates B715 is greater than the number of balls that can be guided to the gaps between the storage plates B715 per unit time (approximately one second), it is difficult to create a state in which more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gaps between the storage plates B715 (four in this embodiment) are stored in the gaps between the storage plates B715. Therefore, it is difficult to create a situation in which the balls pass through the opening B751.

On the other hand, because the opening B751 does not appear to be closed, the player is made to believe that there is a rare possibility that the ball may enter the opening B751 due to the irregular flow of the ball or the tilt of the pachinko machine B10 when it is installed, and this can increase the player's attention to the upper variable winning device B700.

Note that the control after the first round of play R is completed is the same as when operating with the first special operation pattern, so a description will be omitted.

Next, a case where the operation of the third special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPUB201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 operate based on the third special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPUB201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that when the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the timer means (not shown) holds the movable upper cover member B730 in the forward position until a predetermined opening time BOP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time BOP1 has elapsed, the first round of round play R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid B763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member B730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening B700a, thereby causing the movable upper cover member B730 to operate for a long period of time.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time BT1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the solenoid B763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member B730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning hole B700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the third special operation pattern, during the first round of round play R, a state in which the movable top cover member B730 is maintained in the retracted position and the movable floor member B740 is maintained in the forward position for approximately 1 second is alternated with a state in which the movable top cover member B730 is maintained in the forward position and the movable floor member B740 is maintained in the retracted position for approximately 0.2 seconds.

In other words, a state in which the ball can be guided toward the second specific winning opening B700a and the ball can be stored in a position between the storage plates B715 is maintained for approximately 1 second, and a state in which the guidance of the ball toward the second specific winning opening B700a is restricted and the ball stored in a position between the storage plates B715 is discharged is maintained for approximately 0.2 seconds, are alternately repeated. According to this time setting, the state in which the movable upper cover member B730 is positioned in the retracted position can be created a maximum of approximately 25 times during the first round of play.

In this embodiment, the discharge of a ball from a position between the storage plate sections B715 is completed in approximately 0.2 seconds per ball. Therefore, while the movable floor member B740 is positioned in the retracted position for approximately 0.2 seconds, a maximum of one ball can flow down the front side of the movable floor member B740 from a position between the storage plate sections B715. Also, considering the ball launch interval allowed for the pachinko machine B10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), the number of balls passing the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 while it is positioned in the retracted position for 1 second is at most about three.

Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 1540, in the process of passing a specified number of balls through the second specific winning port B700a, a state is created in which the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plate sections B715 can be discharged.

Furthermore, since the number of balls that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plates B715 per second unit time (approximately 0.2 seconds) is smaller than the number of balls that can be guided into the gap between the storage plates B715 per unit time (approximately 1 second), it is easier to create a state in which more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plates B715 (4 in this embodiment) are stored in the gap between the storage plates B715 than in the case described above for the second special operation pattern. Therefore, it is easier to cause the balls to pass through the opening B751 than in the case described above for the second special operation pattern.

On the other hand, the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plate sections B715 are discharged at a rate of one each time the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are displaced (at approximately 1.2 second intervals). Depending on the frequency with which the balls pass in front of the movable top cover member B730 and the time interval, it may happen that the first round of play R ends without the ball passing through the opening B751.

According to the third special operation pattern in this embodiment, by increasing the frequency with which the ball passes the front side of the movable top cover member B730, the possibility of the ball passing through the opening B751 can be increased, so that the ball shooting mode in the first round of round play R can be easily made to be continuous shooting (a mode in which ball shooting is not stopped and balls are continuously shot at the ball shooting interval allowed by the pachinko machine B10 (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment)).

This makes it easier to prevent players from taking single shots (a technique in which the firing of balls is intentionally stopped and balls are fired one at a time with an interval of 0.6 seconds or more as a technical intervention to obtain benefits such as excess prize balls), thereby making it possible to standardize the benefits that players can obtain regardless of their level of experience.

Note that the control after the first round of play R is completed is the same as when operating with the first special operation pattern, so a description will be omitted.

The contents of ROM B202 (see FIG. 1505) will be described with reference to FIG. 1544 (a). FIG. 1544 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM B202 in the main control device B110. As shown in FIG. 1544 (a), the ROM B202 of the main control device B110 stores at least a first win random number table B202a, a first win type selection table B202b, a second win random number table B202c, and a variation pattern selection table B202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table B202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table B202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The variation pattern selection table B202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode. Details of the first winning type selection table B202b and the second winning random number table B202c will be described later.

Figure 1544(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table B202a, Figure 1544(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C3 and the judgment value in the special pattern 1 random number table B202a1, and Figure 1544(d) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C3 and the judgment value in the special pattern 2 random number table B202a2.

As shown in FIG. 1544(b), the first winning random number table B202a is a table in which a special pattern 1 random number table B202a1 is set to determine whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b is a jackpot, and a special pattern 2 random number table B202a2 is set to determine whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained when a gaming ball enters the second winning slot B640 is a jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1544(c), the special pattern 1 random number table B202a1 is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a win in the lottery for special pattern 1 based on the ball entering the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b is set. In the lottery for special pattern 1, it is judged whether the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is judged as a big win. Also, if the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C3 is judged to be a value from "1 to 319", it is judged as a miss.

On the other hand, the special pattern 2 random number table B202a2 is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a win in the lottery for special pattern 2 based on the ball entering the second winning port B640 is set, as shown in FIG. 1544 (d). In the lottery for special pattern 2, it is judged whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is judged as a big win. It is also judged whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is judged as a small win. Otherwise, if it is judged as "319", it is judged as a miss.

In this way, the first winning random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine B10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 319. In this first winning random number counter C3, when the special symbol 1 is selected based on the ball entering the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b, the random number value that results in a jackpot for special symbol 1 is 1, and since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 320, the probability of a jackpot for special symbol 1 is 1/320.

On the other hand, when the lottery for special pattern 2 is drawn based on the ball entering the second winning slot B640, the random number value that results in a jackpot for special pattern 2 is 1, and since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 320, the probability of a jackpot for special pattern 2 is 1/320. Also, since the total number of random numbers that result in a small jackpot is 318, the probability of a small jackpot for special pattern 2 is 318/320.

The above explanation of the special pattern 1 random number table B202a1 and the special pattern 2 random number table B202a2 corresponds to the low probability state in this embodiment. In the high probability state, the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is changed so that if it is "1 to 9" in addition to "0", it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot with special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 in the high probability state is "1/32".

Figure 1545(a) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first win type counter C2 in the first win type selection table B202b and the jackpot type for special symbols, and Figure 1545(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second win random number counter C4 in the second win random number table B202c and the win for normal symbols.

The first win type selection table B202b (see FIG. 1545(a)) is a data table that stores judgment values for determining the jackpot type, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table B202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for special pattern 1 (a lottery based on a ball entering the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19" is associated with jackpot A (see B202b1 in FIG. 1545(a)).

When jackpot A is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is executed is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role B640a is set to the third operation pattern continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

In this case, the game state is not simply a probability change, but corresponds to a special probability change (a probability change of a special symbol that frequently accompanies a small win). Therefore, before winning the next big win, the player can land a ball in the special winning hole B65a that is opened by a small win, and receive many prize balls.

If the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric role B640a is set to the second operating pattern, and this state continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed.

The situation in which the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round is assumed to be the case where the ball is not released satisfactorily into the upper variable winning device B700 and a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed, ending the first round of play.

This situation may occur due to ball jamming in the ball launching unit B112a or in the game area. In contrast, in this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is determined, the jackpot game is controlled so that it does not start until the ball passes through the through gates B66 and B67, making it easier to avoid a situation where the jackpot game starts without noticing the ball jam.

After the special jackpot is determined, the display on the third symbol display device B81 is preferably designed to prevent the player from being confused as to whether to aim at the through gates B66, B67 or the upper variable winning device B700. For example, immediately after the jackpot is determined, arrows pointing to the through gates B66, B67 and the upper variable winning device B700 may be displayed to encourage the player to aim, and after the jackpot game has started, the arrows pointing to the through gates B66, B67 may be removed, leaving only the arrow pointing to the upper variable winning device B700. This allows the game flow of having the ball pass through the through gates B66, B67 and then enter the upper variable winning device B700 smoothly.

When the ball is shot toward the upper variable winning device B700, if the upper variable winning device B700 is closed, it will flow left and right along the slope of the movable upper cover member B730, flow through the game area B301, and pass through the through gates B66 and B67.

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 49" is defined as corresponding to the big win B (see B202b2 in FIG. 1545(a)).

When a jackpot B is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) is executed is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device B640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

In this case, the game state corresponds to a probability bonus. Therefore, the player cannot receive many prize balls before winning the next jackpot, so the player will progress through the game in order to win the next jackpot as quickly as possible.

If the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) will be set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric device B640a will be set to the second operating pattern, and this state will continue until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with the big winning type C (see B202b3 in FIG. 1545(a)).

When a jackpot C is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set to the second special operation pattern, and it is difficult for the ball to pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. Therefore, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device B640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed.

In this case, the game state corresponds to the time-saving mode. Therefore, since the player cannot receive many prize balls before winning the next jackpot, the player will progress through the game so that the next jackpot can be won as quickly as possible.

In addition, since the operating pattern of the electric device B640a is the same as the gaming state after the big win B, it is not possible to determine whether the currently executing gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state from the operating mode of the electric device B640a. Therefore, if the currently executing gaming state is not notified as to whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, a gaming mode can be configured in which the player is forced to guess. On the other hand, it is also possible to notify as to whether the currently executing gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In a jackpot based on the drawing of special pattern 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while there is a 50% chance of a 4-round jackpot, so you basically can't expect to win a large number of prize balls. On the other hand, a 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, so you can start shooting balls earlier in an attempt to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawn based on the ball entering the second winning slot B640), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 29" is associated with jackpot a (see B202b4 in FIG. 1545(a)).

When a jackpot a is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, as in the case of a jackpot A, and the ball easily passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device B640a is set to the third operation pattern (corresponding to a special probability change) continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "30 to 49" is associated with the big win b (see B202b5 in FIG. 1545(a)).

If the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role B640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed.

When a jackpot b is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) is executed is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role B640a is set to the second operation pattern (corresponding to a high probability state) continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with the big win c (see B202b6 in FIG. 1545(a)).

If the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) will be set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric device B640a will be set to the second operating pattern, and this state will continue until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

When a jackpot c is hit, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round becomes the third special operation pattern, and depending on the way the player shoots the ball, the ball may or may not pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750.

If the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device B640a is set to the second operation pattern (corresponding to a high probability state) continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device B640a is set to the second operation pattern (corresponding to the time-saving period) continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

In either case, the operating pattern of the electric role B640a is the same as the second operating pattern, so it is not possible to determine whether the currently active game state is a high probability state or a low probability state from the operating state of the electric role B640a. Therefore, if the currently active game state is not notified as to whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, a game mode can be configured in which the player is forced to guess.

On the other hand, it may be possible to notify whether the currently active game state is a high probability state or a low probability state. In fact, whether the game state after the end of a jackpot game is a high probability state or a low probability state depends on whether the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, so in the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment in which the player can see the opening B751, the player can often tell whether the currently active game state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

Therefore, if the third symbol variation presentation is designed on the assumption that the player cannot ascertain whether the current game state is a high probability state or a low probability state, it is preferable to incorporate measures to make the opening B751 difficult to see in the first round or to draw the player's attention away from the opening B751.

For example, one way to make the opening B751 less visible is to reduce the light intensity of the illumination means that illuminates the upper variable winning device B700, particularly near the opening B751, or to make the light extremely strong near the opening B751, making it dazzling, thereby reducing the visibility of the opening B751 itself, or to focus the player's attention on the performance executed by the third pattern display device B81, thereby relatively reducing the attention paid to the opening B751.

For a jackpot based on the drawing of special pattern 2 (a drawing based on a ball entering the second winning slot B640), there is a 30% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, but a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot, so you basically can't expect to win a large number of prize balls.

On the other hand, the possibility of winning a 15-round jackpot is set higher than when special symbol 1 is drawn. Therefore, compared to when special symbol 1 is drawn, when special symbol 2 is drawn, the expectation that a 15-round jackpot may be won can be increased.

The second winning random number table B202c (see FIG. 1545(b)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for a winning normal symbol (see B202c1 in FIG. 1545(b)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 239" are stipulated as the judgment value for a winning normal symbol (see B202c2 in FIG. 1545(b)).

In the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66, B67, and the second winning random number table B202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol has been won.

And even in a state where the probability of a normal symbol is high, and even in a state where the probability of a normal symbol is low, the normal symbol will frequently win. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the electric role B640a operates frequently.

Next, we will explain the ending presentation in this embodiment. First, we will explain the upper tray B17 of the pachinko machine B10 and the group of operation buttons located near the upper tray B17.

Figure 1546 is a top view of the front frame B14 and the outer frame B11. The front frame B14 has an upper tray B17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are ejected onto this upper tray B17. The bottom of the upper tray B17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1502), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray B17 to the ball launching unit B112a (see Figure 1505).

Furthermore, a frame button B22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray B17. This frame button B22 is generally operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device B81 (see FIG. 1503) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance, but in this embodiment, it is used to execute a specific performance by operating it during a jackpot game (during a jackpot performance), and details will be described later.

A second ball loan operation unit B40b, which has the same function as the ball loan operation unit B40 described above, is provided on the upper surface of the upper tray B17. The second ball loan operation unit B40b is provided with a second number display unit B41b, a second ball loan button B42b, and a second return button B43b.

When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of the pachinko machine B10 and the second ball lending operation unit B40b is operated, balls are lent in accordance with the operation.

Specifically, the second number display section B41b is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The second ball loan button B42b is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray B17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The second return button B43b is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted in the card unit.

In addition, in pachinko machines in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray B17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the second ball dispensing operation unit B40b is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the second ball dispensing operation unit B40b to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

In addition, a ball removal operation unit B44 is disposed to the left of the second ball loan operation unit B40b on the top surface of the upper tray B17. By pressing the ball removal operation unit B44, the balls can be made to flow down from the upper tray B17 toward the lower tray B50 (see FIG. 1502), allowing the player to end the game at any time without having to fire all the balls stored in the upper tray B17.

A directional operation unit B45 is also provided to the right of the frame button B22 on the top surface of the upper tray B17. The directional operation unit B45 has four independently operable operation units that are positioned in positions corresponding to the up, down, left and right directions when viewed from above, and is operated by the player, for example, to adjust the volume of the sound output from the pachinko machine B10, to adjust the light emission intensity of a display device such as the third pattern display device B81 or a light emitting means such as an LED, or to switch between different types of game-related effects (e.g., variable effects) when such types can be switched between multiple modes.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device B81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1547. FIG. 1547 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, FIG. 1547(a) is a diagram showing the area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen for the variable performance, and FIG. 1547(b) is a diagram showing an example of the actual display screen.

The third design is made up of 10 main designs numbered "0" to "9". Each main design is made up of a rear design of a wooden box with the numbers "0" to "9" added above it, and the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, and even numbers are added in small green to the lower right of the additional designs so that they are displayed in front of the additional designs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505) is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols line up, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols do not line up.

For example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" (see Fig. 1545), a variable display will be displayed in which the main patterns with the odd number "7" added will line up. Also, if the result is "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" (see Fig. 1545), a variable display will be displayed in which the main patterns with the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" added except for "7" will line up, and if the result is "jackpot C" or "jackpot c" (see Fig. 1545), a variable display will be displayed in which the main patterns with the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" added will line up.

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number do not line up. Note that in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a continuous notice performance may be performed to suggest (predict) that there is a high possibility of a special symbol jackpot. In that case, when the variable display is performed, a so-called "chance eye" is always displayed, which is a combination of a specified main symbol (for example, the combination of main symbols is "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left symbol row BZ1 on the activated line LB1).

As shown in FIG. 1547(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 is roughly divided into two parts, top and bottom, with the lower 2/3 being the main display area BDm which displays the changing third pattern, and the remaining upper 1/3 being the secondary display area BDs which displays preview effects, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area BDm is divided into three display areas BDm1 to BDm3, left, center, and right, and three pattern columns BZ1, BZ2, and BZ3 are displayed in each of the three display areas BDm1 to BDm3. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns BZ1 to BZ3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns BZ1 to BZ3, and the display changes by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns BZ1 to BZ3. In particular, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order in the left pattern column BZ1, and the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in ascending order in the center pattern column BZ2 and the right pattern column BZ3.

In addition, in the main display area BDm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol rows BZ1 to BZ3. The middle section of this main display area BDm is set as the active line LB1, and with each play, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line LB1 in the following order: left symbol row BZ1 → right symbol row BZ3 → center symbol row BZ2. When the third symbols stop, if they line up on the active line LB1 in a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area BDs is elongated horizontally above the main display area BDm, and is further divided equally in the left-right direction into three small areas BDs1 to BDs3. Of these, small area BDs1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have entered the first winning slot B64, the third winning slot B64b, or the second winning slot B640 but have not yet been changed, and small areas BDs2 and BDs3 are areas that display preview performance images.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 1547(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area BDm. In the sub-display area BDs, a video (not shown) is displayed in the small area BDs3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely than usual to transition to a jackpot. In the small area BDs2 in the center, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears, providing a preview performance.

If a ball enters the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b while the third pattern display device B81 (first pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area BDs1 of the sub-display area BDs. In the small area BDs1, one reserved ball number pattern (in this embodiment, a "straw hat" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. In addition, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, that there are no reserved balls.

Similarly, if a ball enters the second winning hole B640 while the third pattern display device B81 (first pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area BDs1 of the sub-display area BDs. In the small area BDs1, one reserved ball number pattern (in this embodiment, a "star-shaped" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. In addition, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, that there are no reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls when the ball enters the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b is displayed horizontally in the upper half of the small area BDs1 (see FIG. 1547 (b)), whereas the number of reserved balls when the ball enters the second winning slot B640 is displayed horizontally in the lower half of the small area BDs1.

In this embodiment, the balls entering the first winning slot B64 or the third winning slot B64b and the balls entering the second winning slot B640 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). Also, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area BDs1, the reserved ball number may be displayed as numbers in a part of the third pattern display device B81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different forms (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device B81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit B80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Next, referring to FIG. 1548, the big win presentation performed in the third symbol display device B81 will be described. FIG. 1548(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the big win presentation, FIG. 1548(b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending presentation, and FIG. 1548(c), FIG. 1548(d), and FIG. 1548(e) are diagrams illustrating display screens of the ending display presentation displayed in the ending presentation, which is part of the big win presentation.

In the main control device B110, when a ball enters the first winning slot B64, the second winning slot B640 or the third winning slot B64b (initial winning), this triggers a lottery for a special pattern, after which the first pattern display device 37 executes a variable display of the special pattern (first pattern). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1548(a), a variable pattern command and a stop type command are sent from the main control device B110 to the voice lamp control device B113, and as a result, the third pattern display device B81 executes a variable display of the third pattern in accordance with the variable display of the first pattern display device 37.

When the third pattern display device B81 performs a variable display of the third pattern, first, the high-speed variable display of the third pattern is started, and then, after a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 60 seconds) has passed, the display switches to a medium-speed variable display of the third pattern, and then to a low-speed variable display of the third pattern. Here, if the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot, a stop display is made in which the main pattern (third pattern) of the same number is lined up, the variable performance ends, and then the jackpot performance starts. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss, a stop display is made in which the main pattern (third pattern) of the same number is not lined up, the variable performance ends, and if there is a pending start winning, the lottery for the next special pattern is held and the next variable performance starts.

As shown in FIG. 1548(a), the big win effect is divided into three periods: a period during which a fanfare effect is performed, a period during which a round effect is performed, and a period during which an ending effect is performed.

The fanfare effect is intended to heighten the player's sense of anticipation by informing the player that the pachinko machine B10 is about to enter a special game state and that the specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is intended to inform the player of the number of rounds that will soon begin, encourage the player to fire balls toward the specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a, and inform the player that a large number of prize balls will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1548(b), in the ending presentation, an ending display presentation is executed to notify the player of the end of the special game state and to inform the player of the game value that will be granted to the player after the jackpot ends (the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol, whether or not a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out before the next jackpot is won, the time period for normal symbols, etc.).

In addition, depending on the circumstances, the ending performance may include a company name display that notifies the player of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine B10, or a card forget prevention display that suggests the player perform an operation to return cards (recording media, coins, etc.) that have a remaining balance when the game ends or when the player leaves the seat, but details will be provided later.

When a jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device B81, as shown in FIG. 1548(a), first, a fanfare command is sent from the main control device B110 to the audio lamp control device B113 in time with the stopped display of the third symbol. As a result, on the third symbol display device B81, a fanfare effect is started following the variable effect.

Next, at the same time as the fanfare effect ends, a round number command indicating the first round is sent from the main control device B110 to the sound lamp control device B113. As a result, in the third pattern display device B81, following the fanfare effect, a round effect corresponding to the first round is started. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine B10 transitions to the special game state, that state continues until the opening and closing of the specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a is repeated a number of times according to the type of jackpot (up to 15 rounds, see FIG. 1545(a)).

After the first round begins and the second specific winning port B700a is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls have won) elapses, at which point the second specific winning port B700a closes and the first round ends. Then, the second round starts immediately after the round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 1543), and a round number command indicating the second round is sent from the main control device B110 to the audio lamp control device B113. As a result, in the third pattern display device B81, following the round presentation corresponding to the first round, the round presentation corresponding to the second round begins.

After the second round begins and the specific winning port B65a is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won) elapses, at which point the specific winning port B65a closes and the second round ends. Then, immediately after the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 1543), the third round begins, and a round number command indicating the third round is sent from the main control device B110 to the audio lamp control device B113. As a result, in the third pattern display device B81, following the round presentation corresponding to the second round, the round presentation corresponding to the third round begins.

When the third round begins, the opening and closing of the specific winning port B65a is controlled in the same way as in the second round. After that, every time a new round begins, a round number command indicating a new round number is sent from the main control device B110 to the audio lamp control device B113, and the opening and closing of the specific winning port B65a is controlled. This causes each round performance to be executed in order from the first round to the final round (maximum 15 rounds).

Then, at the same time as the opening and closing of the specific winning port B65a in the final round is completed, an ending command is sent from the main control device B110 to the audio lamp control device B113. As a result, an ending performance is started in the third pattern display device B81. As described above, in the ending performance, the end of the special game state is notified to the player, and the game value that will be granted to the player after the jackpot is ended in the ending display performance (the probability of a jackpot with a special pattern, whether or not a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out before the next jackpot is won, the time period for normal patterns, etc.) is notified to the player.

For example, as shown in FIG. 1548(c), in the ending display performance, a prize ball display B801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and an identification display B802 showing the content "100 chances" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device B81. In addition, a reliability display B803 showing the content "Don't give up yet" is displayed above the identification display B802, and a time display B811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display B802.

The time display B811 has the role of notifying the end of the ending performance (including the case where only the ending display performance is performed), and the right end portion moves from the appropriate timing toward the end position B812, but details will be described later.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the result of the drawing is "jackpot C" (see FIG. 1545), or when the result of the drawing is "jackpot c" and the ball does not pass through the opening B751 (see FIG. 1538) of the detection sensor B750 during the jackpot game. The identification display B802 indicates that the electric device B640a will continue to be controlled to operate in the second operating pattern from the end of the jackpot until 100 special symbol drawings have been completed, and the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is low (1 in 320 in this embodiment).

By configuring the display in this manner, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display B802, the reliability display B803 allows the player to recognize that there is a small possibility of hitting the jackpot next time.

In other words, by visually checking the ending display effect on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the next big win, which motivates the player to continue playing.

In the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 1548(d), a prize ball display B801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and an identification display B802 showing the content "Probability fluctuation entry" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device B81. Also, a reliability display B803 showing the content "Expectation high" is displayed above the identification display B802, and a time display B811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display B802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the result of the drawing is "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" (see FIG. 1545). The identification display B802 indicates that from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot for the special symbol, the electric device B640a will continue to be controlled in the second operation pattern, and the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is high (1 in 32 in this embodiment).

The identification display B802, reliability display B803, and time display B811 on this screen are also displayed when the lottery result is "jackpot c" and the ball passes through the opening B751 (see FIG. 1538) of the detection sensor B750 during jackpot play. In that case, the prize ball display B801 is different from the number shown in FIG. 1548(d) and is set to "600" as shown in FIG. 1548(c).

By configuring the display in this manner, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display B802, the player can recognize from the reliability display B803 that he or she can expect to win the jackpot next time.

In other words, by visually checking the ending display effect on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the next big win, which motivates the player to continue playing.

The contents of the identification display B802 and the reliability display B803 are not limited to the above, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the identification display B802 may display "Next big win guaranteed" and the reliability display B803 may display "More winning balls in preparation."

In the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 1548(e), a prize ball display B801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and an identification display B802 showing the content "rush entry" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device B81. Also, a reliability display B803 showing the content "super high expectation" is displayed above the identification display B802, and a time display B811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display B802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the result of the drawing is "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" (see Figure 1545). The identification display B802 indicates that from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot for the special symbol, the electric device B640a will continue to be controlled in operation with the third operating pattern, and the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is high (1 in 32 in this embodiment).

By configuring the display in this manner, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display B802, the reliability display B803 allows the player to recognize that in addition to expecting the next big win, he or she can also win even more profit.

In other words, by visually viewing the ending display presentation on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for the next big win, as well as a sense of anticipation for further profits (for example, the possibility of an increase in prize balls through winning small wins before the next big win is won), which can motivate the player to continue playing.

In this way, the identification display B802 is configured to change its display in response to the game state after the big win game ends, and the player can predict the profits he or she will get after the big win game ends by visually checking the ending display presentation.

The contents of the identification display B802 and the reliability display B803 are not limited to the above, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of "rush entry", it may be "super probability change entry", "small win rush entry", or a unique name such as "super advantageous mode" may be given to the display.

Next, the company name display performance and the card forgetting prevention display performance in the ending performance will be explained. In the ending performance in the example shown in FIG. 1548 (b), a company name display command is sent from the main control device B110 to the voice lamp control device B113 in time with the ending display performance ending. As a result, in the third pattern display device B81, the company name display performance starts following the ending display performance.

Next, at the same time as the company name display performance ends, the main control device B110 sends a card forget prevention display command to the voice lamp control device B113. As a result, in the third pattern display device B81, the card forget prevention display performance starts following the company name display performance.

The ending performance ends when the card forget prevention display performance ends. After the ending performance ends, if there is a pending start winning, the next special pattern will be drawn and the next variable performance will begin. On the other hand, if there is no pending start winning (if there are zero balls in reserve), the third pattern display device B81 will display a variable waiting screen.

Figure 1549(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for the company name display effect displayed in the ending effect, and Figure 1549(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. Figures 1549(a) and 1549(b) explain the case where the company name display effect is executed following the ending display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed following the company name display effect (see Figure 1548(b)).

In the example shown in Figures 1549(a) and 1549(b), the execution time of the ending performance is divided equally between the ending display performance, the company name display performance, and the card forgetting prevention display performance, and the execution time of the ending performance is set to 15 seconds. In this case, the ending display performance, the company name display performance, and the card forgetting prevention display performance are each allocated 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 1549(a), in the company name display performance, the name of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine B10 (Company A) is displayed as a specific display B810 near the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1549(b), when the display switches to the anti-forgetting-of-card display effect, a still image (or video) showing the card being returned from the card unit's insertion port is displayed as a specific display B810 near the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and a comment saying "Please be careful not to forget to take your card" is displayed below it.

In the ending performance in the example shown in Figures 1549(a) and 1549(b), after the ending display performance, which runs for 5 seconds, ends, the company name display performance is executed for 5 seconds, and the card forgetting prevention display performance is executed for 5 seconds, so there is a gap of 10 seconds from the end of the ending display performance to the start of the next variable performance. In this embodiment, it is designed to make effective use of that free time.

As shown in Fig. 1549(a) and Fig. 1549(b), during the execution of the company name display performance and the card forgetting prevention display performance, a time display B811 whose right end moves to the right as time passes is displayed near the bottom edge of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and a frame button display B813 which shows a frame button B22 in a schematic manner is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and a scale is arranged vertically to the right of the frame button display B813 to show the current light emission intensity (snapshot). A scale display B814 is displayed to show the setting value (indicating the second highest setting value out of five levels) of the light emission intensity of the light emitting means such as the LEDs (for example, the illumination units B29-B33 and the display lamp B34 (see FIG. 1502)) arranged in the machine B10, and the brightness of the screen of the third pattern display device B81 so that the player can easily understand it, and a warning comment display B815 is displayed below the frame button display B813 and the scale display B814, stating "Be careful of long-term light."

In this embodiment, during the ending performance, when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the operation of pressing the frame button B22 is controlled to be valid. In other words, during the ending performance, when the frame button display B813 is not displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the operation of the frame button B22 is invalid.

On the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the frame button display B813 and the scale display B814 are hidden halfway through the card forgetting prevention display performance (at the point when 4 seconds remain), but the specific display B810, time display B811, and warning comment display B815 continue to be displayed until the card forgetting prevention display performance ends.

Here, even if a game ball enters the first winning slot B64, the second winning slot B640, or the third winning slot B64b, the variation of the special symbols is stopped while the ending performance is being performed, so the number of reserved balls for the special symbols does not decrease. Therefore, even if a ball enters the first winning slot B64, the second winning slot B640, or the third winning slot B64b when the number of reserved balls for the special symbols is full, the player cannot receive a lottery for the special symbols. On the other hand, if the ending performance has ended, the variation of the special symbols begins, so the number of reserved balls for the special symbols decreases from full, and the player is more likely to receive a lottery for the special symbols by placing a ball in the starting slot.

During the jackpot game, including the ending performance, the operation pattern of the electric device B640a is set to the normal operation pattern. In this embodiment, the first operation pattern (see FIG. 1532(a)) is set, so the game ball is less likely to be picked up by the slide member B450. On the other hand, once the ending performance ends, the electric device B640a is driven in an operation pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot, so the game ball is more likely to be picked up by the slide member B450, and the game ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b (see FIG. 1503).

For these reasons, after a round of play has finished, players tend to think that they will incur less loss if they start firing balls after the ending performance has ended, but with conventional gaming machines, it was difficult to tell when the ending performance would end. That is, because the game result is indicated by the ending display performance, players tend to think that the variable performance will start immediately, and they think that they will fire the balls as soon as the screen switches from the ending display performance, but in fact there may be an ending performance remaining for the company name display performance or the card forget prevention display performance, and by the time the player realizes this, the balls have already been fired, which can leave the player dissatisfied with having wasted several balls by firing during the ending performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the movement of the time display B811 is set so that the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 at the same time as the ending performance ends. In other words, the right end of the time display B811 moves to the right as time passes, and the variable performance starts after the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, making it easier to understand the length of the ending performance and when it will end, and making it easier to avoid a situation where a ball is fired during the ending performance.

The manner in which the time display B811 moves is not limited in any way, but in this embodiment, the display manner of the time display B811 and the end position B812 is designed with the length between the left end of the time display B811 and the end position B812 as a guideline for a length of 10 seconds. If there are 10 seconds or more remaining until the end of the ending performance when the ending performance starts, the right end of the time display B811 is set to remain stopped or to move at an extremely slow speed until there are approximately 10 seconds remaining until the end of the ending performance, at which point the right end of the time display B811 is set to start moving at a constant speed to the right as time passes.

On the other hand, if there are less than 10 seconds left until the end of the ending performance when the ending performance starts, the right end of the time display B811 starts moving immediately. In this case, the movement speed of the time display B811 is set to a speed at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812 simultaneously with the end of the ending performance (i.e., if there are 5 seconds left until the end of the ending performance, the speed is set to twice the speed at which it would take 10 seconds to move to the end position B812).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1549(a) and FIG. 1549(b), the letters "GO" indicating the start of the launch of the game ball are always displayed above the terminal position B812, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the letters "GO" may be displayed when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 or a few seconds before the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 (for example, the average number of seconds before the launched ball reaches the through gates B66 and B67). In this case, the letters "GO" may be displayed from a hidden state, or may be displayed so that they become substantial from a state in which "GO" is displayed semi-transparently.

In this case, if the player starts shooting the ball when the "GO" letter is displayed, it becomes easier to avoid the ball passing through the through gates B66, B67 before the ending performance ends, and the player does not need to follow the moving time display B811 with his eyes. This reduces the burden on the player.

The manner in which the letters "GO" are displayed is not limited in any way. For example, they may be replaced with comments such as "Start firing the ball" or "Start firing when the bar reaches it." The size of the letters "GO" does not need to always be the same. For example, the letters "GO" may gradually become larger as the right end of the time display B811 moves. In this case, the maximum size of the letters "GO" is displayed semi-transparently, and the timing at which the size of the gradually increasing letters "GO" matches the maximum size displayed semi-transparently may be controlled to coincide with the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812.

In the state shown in FIG. 1549, if the player does not operate the frame button B22, after the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 during the card forgetting prevention display effect shown in FIG. 1549(b), the screen of the third pattern display device B81 will switch to the screen shown in FIG. 1547(b), and the variable effect will begin.

As shown in FIG. 1549, when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, this generally indicates that the frame button B22 can be operated. The following describes how the screen of the third pattern display device B81 changes when the player operates the frame button B22 in the state shown in FIG. 1549.

Figure 1550(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen for the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed during the ending effect, and Figure 1550(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen immediately after the ending effect has ended.

Figure 1550 (a) illustrates the screen of the third pattern display device B81 which is switched when the player operates the frame button B22 (see Figure 1546) in the state shown in Figure 1549 (b) (state in which the frame button display B813 is displayed).

When the frame button B22 is operated to switch the screen of the third pattern display device B81 to the state shown in FIG. 1550(a), just as when the frame button B22 is not operated, the right end of the time display B811 moves to the right over time, and after the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, the screen of the third pattern display device B81 switches to the screen shown in FIG. 1550(b), and the variable performance begins.

As shown in FIG. 1550(a), when the player operates the frame button B22, the specific display B810, a still image (or video) showing the card being returned from the card unit's slot and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to take your card", are moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the third pattern display device B81 and the display format is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the distinctiveness of the specific display B810, making it easier to direct the player's attention to parts other than the specific display B810.

A directional control display B816 is displayed near the center of the screen, which shows a schematic representation of the directional control B45. To the left of the directional control display B816, a vertical scale display B817 is displayed, which has scales lined up from top to bottom to show the current light emission intensity setting value so that the player can grasp it (displays that the setting is the second setting value from the top out of five levels), and below the directional control display B816, a horizontal scale display B818 is displayed, which has scales lined up from left to right to show the current volume setting value so that the player can grasp it (displays that the setting is the third setting value from the top (right) out of five levels).

Furthermore, below the warning comment display B815, a second warning comment display B819 is displayed, stating "Pay attention to long-lasting sounds." The warning comment display B815 and the second warning comment display B819 are displayed in accordance with the type of object for which the player can check the setting value.

As shown in FIG. 1550(a), when the directional operation unit display B816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the vertical scale display B817 can be changed by operating the up and down buttons of the directional operation unit B45. In other words, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the setting value of the scale, allowing the player to easily understand how to operate.

As shown in FIG. 1550(a), when the directional operation unit display B816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the horizontal scale display B818 can be changed by operating the left and right buttons of the directional operation unit B45. In other words, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the setting value of the scale, allowing the player to easily understand how to operate.

In addition, the operation of the directional operation unit B45 is controlled to be invalid when the directional operation unit display B816 is not displayed on the display screen. This allows the player to know whether the current operation of the directional operation unit B45 is valid or invalid simply by checking whether the directional operation unit display B816 is displayed or not.

A display resembling a light bulb is provided near the end of the vertical scale display B817, allowing the player to easily understand that the vertical scale display B817 can be used to set the light emission intensity (the light emission intensity of light-emitting means such as LEDs (e.g., the illumination units B29-B33 and the display lamp B34 (see FIG. 1502)) arranged in the pachinko machine B10, and the brightness of the screen of the third pattern display device B81). In addition, a display resembling musical notes is provided near the end of the horizontal scale display B818, allowing the player to easily understand that the horizontal scale display B818 can be used to set the volume.

In the state shown in FIG. 1550(b), unlike the state shown in FIG. 1547(b), which is similar to the state in which the special pattern variation performance starts, the directional operation unit display B816, vertical scale display B817, and horizontal scale display B818 are arranged in a reduced state in small area BDs3.

Therefore, even after the ending performance has ended and the variable performance has been executed, the directional control display B816 will continue to be displayed for a while, allowing you to change the light emission intensity setting and the volume setting.

In this embodiment, the directional control display B816 continues to be displayed during the high-speed change display of the first change performance that begins after the ending performance ends, and is hidden after the high-speed change display of that change performance ends.

As a result, at least at the timing when the symbols are displayed in a stopped state and the variable presentation ends, the directional operation unit display B816 is hidden and operation of the directional operation unit B45 is invalidated, so that the player does not operate the directional operation unit B45, and it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is concentrating on operating the directional operation unit B45 and misses the stopped display of the symbols.

During high-speed fluctuations, there will be spaces in the reserved balls, so the player will start firing balls to enter the lottery for the special symbol, but since the directional control unit B45 can be operated with one hand, it is possible to avoid impeding the firing of the balls. While the player has fired several balls (after going through the firing state), the directional control unit display B816 is hidden.

From the second change performance that starts after the ending performance ends, the direction operation unit display B816 is hidden. In other words, the screen of the third pattern display device B81 is in the state shown in FIG. 1547(b), and the change performance is executed.

Figure 1551 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the ending effects and the jackpot type in the special pattern. As shown in Figure 1551, in this embodiment, the ending display effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type (indicated by a circle in Figure 1551).

In addition, the company name display effect is executed when the game state to be entered after the end of the jackpot game is the most advantageous state for the player, so that players who see the company name display effect can have a sense of anticipation for the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the company name display effect is executed in the ending effect of the jackpot type "jackpot A" or "jackpot a", which is a jackpot type that enters a special probability change state after the jackpot game ends (indicated by a circle in Figure 1551), but the company name display effect is not executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game of other jackpot types (indicated by an x in Figure 1551).

The conditions for executing the company name display effect correspond to the game state that is entered after the end of a jackpot game, and do not correspond to the number of payouts in the jackpot game. In other words, even if the number of payouts in the jackpot game is, for example, 0, the company name display effect will be executed.

In this embodiment, the number of balls paid out in a jackpot game of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is the maximum number of balls out of all jackpot types, so when the company name display effect is executed, the player can feel that a jackpot game with the maximum number of balls paid out has been executed.

The card forget prevention display effect is executed when the number of balls paid out in a jackpot game is equal to or greater than the number of balls for eight rounds (a specified number or more), allowing players who see the card forget prevention display effect to feel the joy of winning many prize balls.

In this embodiment, a card forget prevention display effect is executed in the ending effects of the 15-round jackpot types "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" and the 8-round jackpot types "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" (indicated by a circle in FIG. 1551), but a card forget prevention display effect is not executed in the ending effects of jackpot games of other jackpot types (indicated by an x in FIG. 1551).

In this way, in this embodiment, the content of the ending performance differs depending on the type of jackpot. The ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance each last for 5 seconds, so the execution time of the ending performance differs depending on the different combinations.

For example, the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is performed over 15 seconds, the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" is performed over 10 seconds, and the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot C" or "jackpot c" is performed over 5 seconds.

Due to these circumstances, it may be difficult for the player to determine the end point of the ending performance, leading to confusion about the timing of the ball's release; however, in this embodiment, the end point of the ending performance can be ascertained by the time display B811 (see FIG. 1549).

In other words, even if the duration of the ending performance is different, the speed at which the right end of the time display B811 moves (or the starting point of the movement of the time display B811 is changed) is changed so that the ending performance ends when the time display B811 reaches the end position B812, and by visually checking the time display B811, the player will not be confused about the timing of the ball's release. This reduces the burden on the player when playing the game.

Note that the execution time of the ending performance is specified according to the type of jackpot and remains constant, but the content during the ending performance can change. For example, even if the execution time of the ending performance is 15 seconds, if certain conditions are met (or randomly), the ending display performance can be set to 10 seconds, and the company name display performance and the card forget prevention display performance can be executed in the remaining 5 seconds. In particular, when the first jackpot is won, the player's interest can be increased by setting the ending display performance to be longer.

Next, the 55th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1552 and 1553. In the 54th embodiment, the bottom surface portion B431a of the winning unit B400, which supports the ball flowing down the central flow path B431, is configured as a fixed plate portion. However, in the winning unit B2400 of the 55th embodiment, the shape of the portion supporting the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 is configured to change. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1552 and 1553 are cross-sectional views of the winning unit B2400 in the 55th embodiment taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX in Figure 1516(c). Figure 1552 illustrates the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric device B640a, and Figure 1553 illustrates the excited state (rear open state) of the electric device B640a.

The electric role B640a includes a tilting member B470 that is the same as the 54th embodiment, and a sliding member B2450 that is partially different in shape from the sliding member B450 of the 54th embodiment. Note that the sliding member B2450 is only partially different in shape, and its operating mode is the same as that of the sliding member B450 of the 54th embodiment.

The following describes the differences between the slide member B2450 and the slide member B450 in the 54th embodiment. The slide member B2450 includes a lower protrusion B2456 that protrudes downward from the front end of the central fixing part B454, and a front protrusion B2457 that protrudes forward from the front end of the central fixing part B454.

As shown in FIG. 1522, in the winning unit B400 of the 54th embodiment, the arrangement of the central fixing portion B454 and the arrangement of the rear wall portion B434 of the middle member B430 do not overlap in the vertical direction, and it was possible to assemble the sliding member B450 by placing it over the middle member B430 from above. However, in the winning unit B2400 of the 55th embodiment, the front protrusion B2457 is shaped to protrude forward beyond the rear end of the rear wall portion B434, and the assembly method cannot be used as is.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a continuous notch B2431d is formed in the bottom surface portion B431a, the locking plate portion B431b, and the rear wall portion B434 with a left-right width (in this embodiment, a left-right width of about 3 mm) centered on the cross section shown in FIG. 1552. That is, the notch B2431d is formed as an opening that cuts from the upper end to the lower end of the rear wall portion B434 and continues from that position to a midpoint on the bottom surface portion B431a and to a midpoint on the locking plate portion B431b.

The left-right width of the notch B2431d is formed to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the front protrusion B2457, so that in the arrangement shown in FIG. 1553, the arrangement of the front protrusion B2457 of the slide member B2450 and the arrangement of the notch B2431d of the middle member B2430 can be overlapped.

As a result, the front protrusion B2457 of the slide member B2450 can pass through the middle member B2430 in the vertical direction through the notch B2431d, making it possible to assemble the slide member B2450 by placing it over the middle member B2430 from above.

The lower protrusion B2456 is a part that protrudes to a position where it can abut against the rear surface of the locking plate B431b outside the notch B2431d, and is used to determine the front movement end of the slide member B2450.

In the 54th embodiment, the front movement end of the slide member B450 was determined at the position where the front end of the central fixing part B454 abutted against the rear surface of the locking plate part B431b (see FIG. 1519), but in the 55th embodiment, the front movement end of the slide member B2450 is determined at the position where the front surface of the lower protruding part B2456, which protrudes directly downward from the front end of the central fixing part B454, abuts against the rear surface of the locking plate part B431b, so the front movement end position of the slide member B2450 in the 55th embodiment and the front movement end position of the slide member B450 in the 54th embodiment are the same position.

The front protrusion B2457 has a pair of ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b that protrude upward. The ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b are arranged side by side in the front and rear at left and right positions that allow them to enter the notch B2431d, and the front ball interference protrusion B2458a is formed so that its upper end is lower than the rear ball interference protrusion B2458b.

The front-to-rear inclination angle of the straight line passing through the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion B2458b and the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion B2458a is formed to be the same as the front-to-rear inclination angle of the upper surface of the bottom surface portion B431a of the middle member B2430.

The protruding length of the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b is set to a length that protrudes upward by 1 to 2 mm from the top surface of the bottom surface portion B431a when the slide member B2450 is positioned in the forward position (see FIG. 1552). This allows the upper end positions of the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b to be contained inside the notch B2431d (inside the vertical thickness dimension of the middle member B2430) so as not to protrude from the top surface of the bottom surface portion B431a when the slide member B2450 is positioned in the retracted position.

As a result, when the slide member B2450 is positioned in the forward position, the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b can be brought into contact with the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431, whereas when the slide member B2450 is positioned in the backward position, the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 is configured not to come into contact with the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b.

With the configuration described in Figures 1552 and 1553, in the winning unit B2400 in the 55th embodiment, in addition to the action produced by the winning unit B400 described in the 54th embodiment, the flow speed of the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 can be changed depending on the circumstances.

For example, when the slide member B2450 is in an excited state (retracted position), the ball interference protrusions B2458a and B2458b retract to the outside of the central flow path B2431, so that the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 is no longer decelerated by contact with the ball interference protrusions B2458a and B2458b.

In addition, as described above in the 54th embodiment, when the slide member B2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the ball resting on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 (see FIG. 1508) is pushed backward by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, and is accelerated in the downward flow direction (in the direction of arrow B).

Therefore, when the slide member B2450 is changed to an excited state (retracted position), the ball tends to flow faster in the entire area of the ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431.

For example, when the slide member B2450 is in a non-energized state (advance position), the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b protrude from the upper surface of the bottom portion B431a toward the central flow path B2431, and the balls flowing down the central flow path B2431 come into contact with the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b and are slowed down. This makes it easier for the balls to slow down in the central flow path B2431 compared to when the slide member B2450 is in an excited state (retracted position), and the flow pattern of the balls can be stabilized (rectified).

In addition, as described above in the 54th embodiment, even if a ball is placed on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 (see FIG. 1508) when the slide member B2450 changes to the non-excited state (forward position), the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 is displaced in a direction that creates a gap between the ball (a direction that does not push the ball, the direction of arrow F), so that the change in the flow speed of the ball is suppressed (it is not accelerated).

Therefore, when the slide member B2450 changes to a non-excited state (forward position), the ball's flow speed tends to slow down in the entire area of the ball's flow path formed by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the slide member B2450 changes to an excited state (retracted position), the effect of increasing the ball's flow speed occurs throughout the entire ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431, while when the slide member B2450 changes to a non-excited state (advance position), the effect of decreasing the ball's flow speed occurs throughout the entire ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431.

As a result, the difference (difference in length) in the period required for the ball to pass through the flow path formed by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431 can be increased when the slide member B2450 is changed to a non-excited state (advance position) and when the slide member B2450 is changed to an excited state (retracted position).

Next, the 56th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1554. In the 54th embodiment, the internal flow path in the winning unit B400 is formed as a flow path extending forward and backward, but in the winning unit B3400 of the 56th embodiment, the internal flow path is formed as a flow path extending left and right. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1554(a) is a schematic diagram showing the winning unit B3400 in the 56th embodiment, and Figure 1554(b) is a schematic diagram showing winning unit B3400b as another example of winning unit B3400. In Figure 1554, the thin-diameter portion of the nail BKG1 that is driven into the base plate B60 is shown in solid lines, and the bulging portion of the front tip is shown in imaginary lines.

The winning unit B3400 is arranged, for example, downstream of the through gate B67 in the right-side play area B303 (see FIG. 1503), and is configured as a unit that guides the flow of balls arranged in the play area B301.

The winning unit B3400 includes a flow path component B3410 formed from a plate-like member disposed between the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1503) and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1502) of the game board B13, and a sliding member B3420 that is slidably displaced in the forward and backward directions so as to change state between a protruding state (corresponding to a forward position state) positioned inside the game area and a retracted state (corresponding to a retracted position state) retracted outside the game area.

The slide member B3420 is arranged separately as a first slide member B3421 near the ball inlet B3411 of the flow path configuration section B3410 and a second slide member B3422 near the ball outlet B3412, which are integrally configured on the back side so that they slide and displace integrally.

In other words, the slide member B3420 is integrally configured so that the second slide member B3422 is in the protruding state in synchronization with the first slide member B3421 being in the protruding state, and the second slide member B3422 is in the retracted state in synchronization with the first slide member B3421 being in the retracted state.

The following describes variations in the flow patterns of balls that enter the winning unit B3400. When the ball that enters through the ball entrance B3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first sliding member B3421, if the first sliding member B3421 is in a retracted state, or if the first sliding member B3421 is in a protruding state but is switched to the retracted state in an extremely short time (shorter than the time it takes for the ball to be guided to the right (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), the ball is discharged from the mid-way discharge section B3413 to the outside (outside the left side) of the flow path configuration section B3410. In this embodiment, the ball that passes through the mid-way discharge section B3413 is configured to flow down by avoiding the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b.

On the other hand, when the ball that has entered through the ball inlet B3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member B3421, if the first slide member B3421 maintains the protruding state for a length of time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) sufficient to guide the ball, the ball is guided inside the flow path configuration portion B3410.

When the ball guided inside the flow path configuration part B3410 reaches the ball outlet B3412, the subsequent flow path of the ball changes depending on whether the second slide member B3422 is in a protruding state or a retracted state.

In other words, when the second slide member B3422 is in a protruding state, the ball passes directly above the second winning opening B640 while rolling on the upper surface of the second slide member B3422, and flows down toward the third winning opening B64b. In this embodiment, a detection sensor BSE1 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is disposed upstream of the third winning opening B64b, and this detection sensor BSE1 functions in the same way as the detection sensor B442 (see FIG. 1508) in the 54th embodiment.

In other words, when the detection sensor BSE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening BSE1a, the first winning port switch is turned on, and the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505) is configured to draw a lottery for special pattern 1 as a result of the first winning port switch being turned on.

On the other hand, if the second slide member B3422 is in a retracted state, the ball flows down toward the second winning opening B640. In this embodiment, a detection sensor BSE2 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is disposed upstream of the second winning opening B640, and this detection sensor BSE2 functions in the same way as the detection sensor B462 (see FIG. 1512) in the 54th embodiment.

In other words, when the detection sensor BSE2 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening BSE2a, the second winning port switch is turned on, and the main control device B110 (see FIG. 1505) is configured to draw a lottery for special pattern 2 as a result of the second winning port switch being turned on.

The second winning opening B640 is located directly below the second slide member B3422, and is positioned so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening B640, but the distance between the detection sensor BSE2 and the nail BKG1 directly above it, and the distance between the detection sensor BSE2 on the opposite side (right side) and the flow path configuration part B3410 are designed to be longer than the diameter of the ball. In other words, the second slide member B3422 is in a retracted state, and some of the balls that flow down to the second winning opening B640 side are configured to be able to flow down away from the second winning opening B640.

Although not shown in the figure, a variable winning device B65 that opens and closes during small win play is disposed below the winning unit B3400, so that balls that flow below the winning unit B3400 (balls that do not enter either the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b and deviate, for example balls that flow toward the midway discharge section B3413) can be made to enter a specific winning port B65a that is opened during small win play.

As shown in FIG. 1554(b), the intermediate discharge section B3413 may be omitted, and the general winning opening B63 may be located directly below the first slide member B3421. In this case, if the first slide member B3421 is in a retracted state when the ball that has entered through the ball entrance B3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member B3421, or if the first slide member B3421 is in a protruding state but is switched to the retracted state in an extremely short time (shorter than the time it takes for the ball to be guided to the right (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), the ball will enter the general winning opening B63.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1554(b), a detection sensor BSE3 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed upstream of the general winning opening B63, and this detection sensor BSE3 functions in the same manner as the detection sensor B435 (see FIG. 1512) in the 54th embodiment. In other words, when the detection sensor BSE3 detects that a ball has passed through the ball passage opening BSE3a, neither the drawing of the special symbol nor the drawing of the normal symbol is performed, and the payout of the prize balls is performed.

As shown in FIG. 1554(b), the winning openings may be arranged close to each other so that balls discharged to the left from the ball outlet B3412 do not spill out. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1554(b), the third winning opening B64b is arranged close to the ball outlet B3412, so that balls guided to the outside (left) of the flow path component B3410 when the second slide member B3422 is in the protruding state are reliably admitted into the third winning opening B64b.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is not awarded a prize ball when it is guided to the outside (left) of the flow path component B3410 when the second slide member B3422 is in the protruding state, as compared to the embodiment shown in FIG. 1554(a) in which a ball may deviate from the third winning opening B64b due to a collision with the nail BKG1 causing a change in the flow path.

Next, the 57th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1555. In the 54th embodiment, the winning unit B400 has an electric device B640a that is composed of multiple components spaced apart, and the interval between the timing when the upstream component hits the ball and the timing when the downstream component hits the ball is lengthened. However, in the winning unit B4400 of the 57th embodiment, the electric device B4420 is composed of a single component. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1555(a) and 1555(b) are schematic diagrams showing the winning unit B4400 in the 57th embodiment. Figure 1555(a) shows the electric device B4420 in a forward position where it is positioned overhanging the area (play area) between the base plate B60 (see Figure 1503) and the glass unit B16 (see Figure 1502), and Figure 1555(b) shows the electric device B4420 in a retracted position where it is positioned rearward away from the play area.

In Figures 1555(a) and 1555(b), the outline of the part of the electric device B4420 that is located inside the winning unit B4400 in a position that blocks the passage of the ball is shown in solid lines and the interior is painted with a dotted pattern, while the outline of the part that is located in a position that does not block (allows) the passage of the ball is shown in imaginary lines.

In FIG. 1555, the thin portion of the nail BKG1 that is driven into the base plate B60 is shown in solid lines, and the bulging portion at the front tip is shown in imaginary lines.

The winning unit B4400 includes a flow path component B4410, which is formed from a plate-like member arranged between the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1503) of the game board B13 and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1502) and which constitutes the flow path of the balls, and an electric device B4420, which is arranged inside the flow path component B4410 and which changes the flow path of the balls.

The electric device B4420 is equipped with a rolling plate section B4421 that has an upper surface for rolling the ball and is guided so that it can move back and forth, and an obstruction rod section B4425 that protrudes from the downstream end of the rolling plate section B4421 and is formed with enough strength to obstruct the flow of the ball.

In this embodiment, when a ball enters the flow path configuration section B4410 through the ball inlet B4411 formed at the upstream end of the flow path configuration section B4410 and reaches the position where the electric device B4420 is located, the flow path of the ball differs depending on whether the electric device B4420 is located in the forward position or the backward position.

First, when the ball that has entered the flow path configuration section B4410 reaches the position where the electric device B4420 is located, if the electric device B4420 is located in the forward position (see FIG. 1555(a)), the ball rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate section B4421 and flows to the left side (the specific winning port B65a side) of the flow path configuration section B4410.

At this time, the obstruction rod portion B4425 is positioned at a distance of 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere from the front surface of the base plate B60. For example, the obstruction rod portion B4425 is positioned so as not to obstruct the flow of the sphere down through the flow path configuration portion B4410 by entering an opening formed in a plate-like member disposed between the flow path configuration portion B4410 and the glass unit B16 and covering the flow path configuration portion B4410 from the front side.

On the other hand, if the electric device B4420 is positioned in the retracted position when the ball that has entered the flow path configuration section B4410 reaches the position where the electric device B4420 is positioned (see FIG. 1555 (b)), the ball flows down the front side of the rolling plate section B4421 and down the flow path configuration section B4410 (towards the second winning port B640).

At this time, the obstruction rod portion B4425 is positioned in a front-rear position where it can collide with the ball flowing down the flow path configuration portion B4410 and obstruct (prevent) the passage of the ball. As a result, when the electric device B4420 is positioned in the retracted position (see FIG. 1555(b)), even if a ball bounces off a plate portion of the flow path configuration portion B4410 (for example, the plate portion B4412 positioned below the rolling plate portion B4421) and flies toward the obstruction rod portion B4425, it can be prevented from passing over (passing) the obstruction rod portion B4425 and flowing through the guide portion B4413 that guides the ball toward the specific winning port B65a.

In other words, the ball that flies toward the obstruction rod portion B4425 will lose its momentum to the left by the obstruction rod portion B4425 and will either fall straight down and enter the second winning hole B640, or will bounce to the right and then roll along the top surface of the plate-shaped portion B4412 and enter the second winning hole B640.

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on whether the electric device B4420 is positioned in the forward or backward position, the ball that enters the ball entrance B4411 will either pass downward through the electric device B4420 and roll down the plate-shaped portion B4412, or pass to the left through the electric device B4420 and roll down the guide portion B4413.

One of the purposes of forming the paths and winning ports B65a, B640 like the winning unit B4400 is to control the operation of the electric device B4420 so that it can be switched between a state in which the majority of balls that enter the ball entrance B4411 are guided to the specific winning port B65a (guiding state), and a state in which the majority of balls that enter the ball entrance B4411 are not guided to the specific winning port B65a (non-guiding state).

This control can be achieved by switching the operating pattern (length of opening and closing) of the electric device B4420, but if the left-right length of the rolling plate portion B4421 of the electric device B4420 is short, the ball is likely to be guided to the specific winning port B65a even when in the non-guiding state.

For example, even if the time that the rolling plate section B4421 is placed in the forward position is set to be shorter than the time required for a ball to pass through the rolling plate section B4421 several seconds after the rolling plate section B4421 is placed in the forward position, if the ball arrives at the same time that the electric device B4420 is placed in the forward position (if there is almost no difference between the timing of the ball's arrival and the timing when the electric device B4420 is placed in the forward position) or if the ball arrives with greater momentum than usual (for example, if there is a rotation in an accelerating direction), the ball may pass through to the guide section B4413 while the rolling plate section B4421 is placed in the forward position.

As a countermeasure to this, first, the horizontal length of the rolling plate portion B4421, which is usually designed to be 55 mm or less, may be designed to be longer (for example, 77 mm or 100 mm). In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the time during which the rolling plate portion B4421 is positioned in the forward position as the non-guiding state of the electric role B4420.

In addition, by designing the width of the rolling plate portion B4421 to be longer, the number of balls that can ride on the rolling plate portion B4421 when the electric device B4420 is positioned in the forward position can be increased.

When the rolling plate portion B4421 is formed with a normal left-right length (55 mm or less), at most two to three balls can ride on the rolling plate portion B4421 at the same time, but when the rolling plate portion B4421 is formed with a longer length (for example, 100 mm), it is possible to create a situation in which four or more balls can ride on the rolling plate portion B4421 at the same time.

When four or more balls are simultaneously placed on the rolling plate portion B4421 and the electric device B4420 is displaced to the retracted position, the four or more balls are guided toward the second winning port B640 at once, so the number of reserved special symbols 2 can be increased to four (full) in a short time.

In addition, unlike the case where balls are guided one by one to the electric device 640 as described in the 54th embodiment, multiple balls resting on the top surface of the electric device B4420 simultaneously fall toward the second winning opening B640 immediately after the electric device B4420 is displaced to the retracted position, so the length of time that the electric device B4420 is required to maintain its position in the retracted position in order to allow multiple balls to flow down toward the second winning opening B640 can be shortened. In other words, the design freedom of the operation pattern of the electric device B4420 can be improved.

As a next measure, secondly, the flow of balls moving from the downstream end of the rolling plate portion B4421 to the guide portion B4413 just before the rolling plate portion B4421 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position can be cut off by the obstruction rod portion B4425.

In other words, by positioning the obstruction rod B4425 at a position that protrudes further toward the guide section B4413 than the downstream end of the rolling plate section B4421 (in this embodiment, it protrudes toward the guide section B4413 by protruding diagonally to the upper left perpendicular to the upper surface of the rolling plate section B4421), even if a ball is about to pass through the downstream end of the rolling plate section B4421 when the electric device B4420 is in the guiding state (see FIG. 1555(a)), if the electric device B4420 is immediately switched to the non-guiding state (see FIG. 1555(b)), the flow of the passing ball can be blocked by the obstruction rod B4425.

As a result, even if the horizontal length of the rolling plate portion B4421 is short, it is possible to prevent the ball moving to the guide portion B4413 from being guided toward the specific winning port B65a just before the electric device B4420 switches from being positioned in the forward position to being positioned in the backward position.

In other words, balls attempting to pass the rolling plate portion B4421 to the left can be pulled back toward the second winning opening B640 by the obstruction rod portion B4425. This makes maximum use of the left-right length of the rolling plate portion B4421, increasing the number of balls that land on the electric device B4420 when the electric device B4420 is positioned in the forward position, and by positioning the electric device B4420 in the backward position, the number of balls that fall toward the second winning opening B640 can be increased.

This also allows more balls than would be expected from the left-right length of the rolling plate portion B4421 to flow down toward the second winning port B640 immediately after the electric device B4420 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position.

In other words, in addition to the balls resting on the rolling plate section B4421, balls that are pulled back (backflowed) by the obstruction rod section B4425 after passing the downstream end of the rolling plate section B4421 can also be made to flow down toward the second winning hole 640, thereby improving the winning frequency of the second winning hole B640.

On the other hand, the flow path configuration section B4410 has a ceiling section B4414 formed in such a manner that it covers the flow path from above so that balls do not flow into the electric device B4420 side, except for the ball inlet B4411. In other words, since the introduction of balls into the electric device B4420 is limited to the ball inlet B4411, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of balls remaining on the electric device B4420 becomes greater than expected (for example, a situation in which balls are remaining in a manner such that they are stacked in two or more layers).

In this way, according to this embodiment, the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether or not the ball passes over the rolling plate portion B4421. In other words, the ball will flow toward the specific winning port B65a only when the period during which the electric device B4420 is maintained in the forward position exceeds the time required for the ball to pass over the rolling plate portion B4421.

This differs from the case described in the 54th embodiment above, where as long as the ball has passed the tip portion B451, whether the ball has passed over the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 does not affect the switching of the ball's flow path.

The state of the electric role B4420 shown in FIG. 1555(a) corresponds to the non-excited state of the electric role B640a (slide member B450 and tilt member B470) in the 54th embodiment described above, and the state of the electric role B4420 shown in FIG. 1555(b) corresponds to the excited state of the electric role B640a (slide member B450 and tilt member B470) in the 54th embodiment described above. In this case, the rolling plate portion B4421 corresponds to the slide member B450, and the obstruction rod portion B4425 corresponds to the tilt member B470.

Next, the 58th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1556. In the 54th embodiment, the upper variable winning device B700 was described as a case in which the balls that passed through the second specific winning port B700a flow down toward the gap between a pair of storage plate sections B715. However, in the upper variable winning device B5700 of the 58th embodiment, a switching device B5770 is provided for switching the flow of the balls that passed through the second specific winning port B700a. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1556(a) and 1556(b) are front views of the upper variable winning device B5700 in the 58th embodiment in the range MDXXXVIIIa of Figure 1503. Figure 1556(a) illustrates the upper variable winning device B5700 in a closed state, and Figure 1556(b) illustrates the upper variable winning device B5700 in an open state.

As shown in Figures 1556(a) and 1556(b), the upper variable winning device B5700 in the 58th embodiment is equipped with a base plate member B5710 formed by partially reusing the configuration of the base plate member B710 in the 54th embodiment.

The base plate member B5710 is provided with a pair of left and right intermediate plate parts B5718 in the space created between the inclined rolling plate part B713 and the inclined outer wall plate part B714 by lowering the arrangement of the lower components from the inclined outer wall plate part B714, and a pair of left and right discharge openings B5719 drilled in the front-to-rear direction in a shape that fits along a part of the edge of the intermediate plate part B5718, and that discharge balls received by the intermediate plate part B5718 to the rear side.

The intermediate plate portion B5718 is a plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side toward the space created between the inclined rolling plate portion B713 and the inclined outer wall plate portion B714, and is equipped with a prevention wall portion B5718a for preventing balls from spilling out from the left and right outer ends, an inclined plate portion B5718b connected to the lower end of the prevention wall portion B5718a and extending in an upwardly inclined direction toward the left and right position of the second specific winning port B700a, and an arc plate portion B5718c connected to the extended end of the inclined plate portion B5718b and formed in an arc shape with a curvature radius slightly longer than the radius of the ball receiving rotation member B5771, centered on the rotation axis BJ51 of the ball receiving rotation member B5771 of the switching device B5770.

The switching device B5770 includes a ball receiving rotating member B5771 that is rotatable around a rotation axis BJ51, and a pair of flow control members B5778 that are arranged on the left and right sides of the ball receiving rotating member B5771 at positions that face each other on the left and right.

The flow-down restriction member B5778 is formed in an arc shape with a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball-receiving rotation member B5771, centered on the rotation axis BJ51, and is configured to be displaceable between a forward position where it protrudes further forward than the front surface of the base plate member B5710 to restrict the passage of balls discharged from the ball-receiving rotation member B5771, and a retracted position where it retreats further back than the front surface of the base plate member B5710 to allow the passage of balls discharged from the ball-receiving rotation member B5771.

The ball receiving rotation member B5771 is a disk-shaped member that is located directly below the left-right center of the second specific winning opening B700a and is capable of rotating around a rotation axis BJ51 that extends in the front-to-rear direction, and has four ball receiving recesses B5772 recessed from the outer periphery at 90 degree intervals so that it can receive balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening B700a.

The drive device that drives the ball receiving rotation member B5771 and the drive device that drives the flow-down restriction member B5778 are drive devices (not shown) different from the solenoid B763 (see FIG. 1541). In this case, the drive device that drives the ball receiving rotation member B5771 may also be used as the drive device that drives the flow-down restriction member B5778.

In this embodiment, in the first round of play, the solenoid B763 is driven in the first special operating pattern (see FIG. 1543(a)), and the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is constantly rotated in the clockwise direction at a rotational speed of 90 degrees/second.

The flow-down restriction member B5778 is set so that its operating mode during the first round of play can be changed depending on the type of jackpot. For example, for jackpots A, B, a, and b (see FIG. 1545), it is always fixed in the forward position, for jackpot C, it is always fixed in the backward position, and for jackpot c, it is driven to switch between the forward and backward positions every second.

The following describes the flow pattern of the ball that passes through the second specific winning port B700a. In this embodiment, the ball that passes through the second specific winning port B700a is always received in one of the ball receiving recesses B5772 of the ball receiving rotation member B5771.

When the ball receiving rotation member B5771 rotates with the ball received in the ball receiving recess B5772, the ball received in the ball receiving recess B5772 is displaced in accordance with the change in the position of the ball receiving recess B5772.

When the ball receiving rotation member B5771 is rotating and the lower edge of the ball receiving recess B5772 (the lower edge of a pair of edges at the radially outer end of the ball receiving recess B5772 centered on the rotation axis BJ51; the side that forms the ball flow down surface) is flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion B5718b, if the flow down restriction member B5778 is positioned in the retracted position, the ball will be discharged from the ball receiving recess B5772 that is flush with the inclined plate portion B5718b, and the ball will pass through the discharge opening B5719 and be discharged from the upper variable winning device B5700. The balls discharged in this manner are not stored in the gap between the pair of storage plates B715.

On the other hand, when the lower edge of the ball receiving recess B5772 becomes flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion B5718b during rotation of the ball receiving rotation member B5771, if the flow-down restriction member B5778 is positioned in the forward position, the discharge of balls is restricted by the flow-down restriction member B5778, and the rotation of the ball receiving rotation member B5771 continues without balls being discharged from the ball receiving recess B5772. After that, when the ball receiving recess B5772 is positioned between a pair of left and right arc plate portions B5718c, the balls can flow through the gap between the pair of arc plate portions B5718c and flow down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715, where they can be stored.

In other words, in this embodiment, depending on the operating mode of the switching device B5770, it is possible to configure two cases: a ball that has passed through the second specific winning port B700a flows down toward the gap between a pair of storage plate sections B715, and a ball that has passed through the second specific winning port B700a is discharged without reaching the gap between a pair of storage plate sections B715.

Therefore, even if the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are driven in the first special operation pattern so that the balls guided into the gap between the pair of storage plate sections B715 are stored without being discharged during a round of play, when the position of the flow control member B5778 is switched during a round of play, particularly in the case of a jackpot c, depending on the timing of the balls entering the second specific winning port B700a, the number of balls guided to the pair of storage plate sections B715 may be sufficiently large (in this embodiment, five or more) or may be less than that, thereby increasing the player's attention to the upper variable winning device B700.

In addition, it is not enough for one ball to pass from the switching device B5770 to the pair of storage plate sections B715; only when a number of balls (five or more in this embodiment) that exceeds the number that fills the position between the pair of storage plate sections B715 is passed can the balls be reliably passed through the opening B751, so that the player's attention to the upper variable winning device B700 can be maintained at a high level for a long period of time.

According to this embodiment, the ball flows slower when it passes through the second specific winning opening B700a and is displaced by the ball receiving rotating member B5771 than when it passes through the second specific winning opening B700a. This makes it possible to delay the time it takes for the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening B700a to reach a position between a pair of storage plates B715. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball that passes through the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 immediately after the movable upper cover member B730 is placed in the retracted position from immediately reaching a position between the pair of storage plates B715.

Next, the 59th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1557 to 1559. In the 54th embodiment, the time display B811 was used to indicate when the ending performance of the big win game would end, but in the launch time display B6811 in the 59th embodiment, the display of the third pattern display device B81 is designed so that the appropriate timing for launching the ball just before the end of the ending performance can be determined. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1557(a) and 1557(b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 59th embodiment. Figure 1557(a) illustrates the display screen after the specific display B810 has been moved from the center by operating the frame button B22 (see Figure 1546), and Figure 1557(b) illustrates the display screen after being switched by operating the frame button B22 in the state shown in Figure 1557(a).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1557(b), when the frame button B22 is operated while the card forgetting prevention display effect is being executed, the direction operation section display B816, vertical scale display B817, and horizontal scale display 818 are switched to a launch position suggestion display B6820, which suggests a position where the player may gain an advantage by aiming by firing the ball, and a launch time display B6811 is displayed superimposed on the time display B811.

The launch position suggestion display B6820 includes a game area display B6821 that (schematically) displays an illustration, photo, etc. of the game area (at least a part of it), and a target suggestion display B6822 that indicates a part of the game area display B6821 with an arrow or the like so that the player knows that he or she should aim at the target by launching the ball.

In this embodiment, the launch position suggestion display B6820 displays the entire game board B13 (see FIG. 1503) as the game area display B6821, and the through gates B66 and B67 (see FIG. 1503) as the target suggestion display B6822, along with the comment "Aim here."

Note that the launch position suggestion display B6820 is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of displaying the entire game board B13 as the game area display B6821, a portion of the game board B13 may be displayed. For example, as a portion including the through gates B66, B67, only the portion above the windmill BWF (see FIG. 1503) may be displayed, or only the area around the through gates B66, B67 (or the area around either of the through gates B66, B67) may be displayed.

In cases where a portion of the game board B13 is displayed, the game area display B6821 may be displayed as a still image or a moving image. For example, in the launch position suggestion display B6820, the game area display B6821 may be configured to display a schematic view of the periphery of the ball about to be launched, and the game area display B6821 may be moved (displayed as a moving image) along the path along which the ball is launched, flows down, and reaches the through gates B66, B67, and when the ball reaches the through gates B66, B67, the game area display B6821 may be fixed (displayed as a still image) at the display of the periphery of the through gates B66, B67.

For example, as the target suggestion display B6822, instead of displaying an arrow to indicate the location to aim at by firing the ball, the location may be displayed by illuminating it, or the rest of the screen except for the location may be displayed in a dark color to make it stand out in comparison.

The position indicated by the target suggestion display B6822 may be fixed from the beginning, or may be fixed after it has moved. For example, the light may be moved along the path along which the ball is launched, and when the light reaches the through gates B66 and B67, the light may be fixed at the position where it reaches the through gates B66 and B67.

In this way, by displaying the launch position suggestion display B6820, the player can easily understand where to aim and launch the ball after the ending performance has ended. This allows the game to proceed smoothly after the ending performance has ended.

Like the time display B811, the right end of the launch time display B6811 is displayed as moving to the right over time, and the speed of movement is the same as that of the time display B811. Also, the right end of the launch time display B6811 is positioned closer to the terminal position B812 than the right end of the time display B811, and the right end of the launch time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812 before the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812.

In this embodiment, the length of time that elapses from the moment when the right tip of the launch time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812 to the moment when the right tip of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 is designed to be slightly longer than the average length of time that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates B66, B67 (the positions indicated by the target suggestion display B6822).

Therefore, the ending performance of the currently active jackpot game will end before the ball, which was launched at the timing when the right tip of the launch time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812, passes through the through gates B66 and B67.

In this way, by using the launch time display B6811 as a guide when launching the ball, it is possible to prevent the launched ball from passing through the through gates B66, B67 during a jackpot game (before the ending performance ends). This makes it possible to maximize the profits that the player can obtain in the lottery for the second symbol that is executed when the ball is detected at the through gates B66, B67.

In other words, the lottery for the second symbol, which is generally executed when a ball is detected at the through gates B66, B67 during a jackpot game, is held with a normal probability, so the profit that the player can obtain is minimal. If the jackpot game ends, the probability of the lottery for the second symbol can increase depending on the type of jackpot, so by preventing the ball from passing through the through gates B66, B67 during a jackpot game, the profit that the player can obtain in the lottery for the second symbol (profit that changes depending on differences in the operation pattern of the electric device B640a) can be maximized.

Furthermore, by using the launch time display B6811 as a guide to launch the ball, the length of time from the end of the jackpot game to the first time the ball passes through the through gates B66, B67 after the end of the jackpot game can be shortened compared to when the ball is launched after the right tip of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812.

In this way, by using the launch time display B6811 as a guide when launching the ball, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a ball launched just before the end of a jackpot game passing through the through gates B66, B67 during the jackpot game (before the ending performance ends), thereby maximizing the profits obtained by the player, while at the same time shortening the period until the ball passes through the through gates B66, B67 after the jackpot game ends, making the game progress smoother.

Figure 1558 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed in the ending effect. Figure 1558 illustrates the display screen when the right tip of the firing time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812 from the state shown in Figure 1557 (b).

As shown in FIG. 1558, when the right end of the launch time display B6811 reaches the end position B812, the display mode of the target suggestion display B6822 switches. In this embodiment, the shape of the frame surrounding the comment in the target suggestion display B6822 is changed, and the "aim" portion is enlarged.

In other words, the timing at which the "aim" portion of the target suggestion display B6822 is enlarged coincides with the timing at which the right end of the launch suggestion display 6811 reaches the terminal position B812. Therefore, even if the player does not view the launch time display B6811, by allowing the player to view the launch position suggestion display B6820, the player can be prompted to launch the ball at the appropriate launch timing based on the timing of the change in the target suggestion display B6822.

By visually checking the launch position suggestion display B6820, the player can grasp not only the target position to launch the ball, but also the timing to launch the ball. This reduces the burden on the player, who must select only the top portion of the display on the third symbol display device B81 as needed.

Figures 1559(a) and 1559(b) are diagrams illustrating examples of the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed during the ending effect. Figure 1559(a) illustrates the display screen that is switched from the state shown in Figure 1557(a) when the passage of a ball is detected through the through gates B66 and B67 before the end of the ending effect.

Also, FIG. 1559(b) illustrates the display at the timing when time has passed since the display in FIG. 1559(a) and the right end of the firing suggestion display 6811 would reach the terminal position B812 if the firing suggestion display 6811 were displayed. In other words, the positioning of the right end of the time display B811 in FIG. 1559(b) is the same as the positioning of the right end of the time display B811 in FIG. 1558.

As shown in FIG. 1559(a), when the player fires the ball from the state shown in FIG. 1557(a) without operating the frame button B22 (see FIG. 1546), if the passage of the ball is detected through the through gates B66, B67 before the ending performance ends, the direction operation unit display B816, vertical scale display B817 and horizontal scale display 818 are switched to a game stop suggestion display B6831 to prompt the player to stop firing the ball.

In this embodiment, the game stop suggestion display B6831 is an illustration that resembles a crossing gate installed at a railroad crossing, and a still image of the crossing gate being lowered is displayed along with the comment "Stop." This can prompt the player to stop shooting balls, thereby reducing the number of balls that are shot before the ending performance is completed.

As shown in FIG. 1559(b), when time has elapsed since the game stop suggestion display B6831 was displayed, the game stop suggestion display B6831 is switched to a game preparation suggestion display B6841 to prompt the player to prepare to launch the ball.

In this embodiment, the game preparation suggestion display B6841 is an illustration that imitates a crossing gate installed at a railroad crossing, and a still image of the crossing gate raised is displayed along with the comment "START." This allows the player to understand that the period during which ball launch is suspended has ended, and prompts the player to prepare to launch the ball.

In this embodiment, if the player does not operate the frame button B22, the launch time display B6811 (see FIG. 1557(b)) is not displayed, but the timing at which the game stop indication B6831 is switched to the game preparation indication B6841 coincides with the timing at which the right end of the launch time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812.

Therefore, if the ball is detected at the through gates B66, B67 before the end of the ending performance, a benefit similar to that obtained by operating the frame button B22 in the state shown in FIG. 1557(a) (i.e., the benefit of being able to grasp the appropriate timing for firing the ball by visually checking the firing time display B6811) can be obtained.

This makes it possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the profits that the player can obtain, for example, when the frame button B22 is not operated due to a malfunction of the frame button B22. In other words, even if the player is unable to grasp the appropriate timing to fire the ball and starts firing the ball before the ending performance ends because the launch position suggestion display B6820 (see FIG. 1557(a)) is not displayed due to the frame button B22 not being operated, the game stop suggestion display B6831 or game preparation suggestion display B6841 is displayed, making it possible to have the player stop firing the ball or prepare to fire the ball at the appropriate time.

The form of the game stop suggestion display B6831 and the game preparation suggestion display B6841 is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, instead of an illustration of a barrier, an illustration of a picture of the handle B51 (see FIG. 1502) of the pachinko machine B10 with an x mark may be displayed. For example, instead of a still image, they may be configured as a video. For example, they may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen of the third pattern display device B81, instead of a part of it.

The contents of the caution comment display B815 and the second caution comment display B819 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 1559, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the contents may correspond to the launch of the ball. That is, an illustration imitating the handle B51 (see FIG. 1502) may be displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow may be added to the handle B51 to suggest that the launch of the ball should be stopped, or a clockwise arrow may be added to the handle B51 to suggest the timing to start launching the ball. Also, a comment corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special pattern (such as "full" or "one ball remaining") may be displayed.

Next, the 60th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 1560 and Fig. 1561. In the 54th embodiment, when the frame button B22 is operated during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display performance, the directional operation section display B816, the vertical scale display B817, and the horizontal scale display B818 are displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, and the light intensity and the volume volume can be adjusted. However, the situation suggestion display B7821 in the 60th embodiment is designed to display comments about the currently executed light intensity and volume settings in response to the light intensity and volume settings made by the player. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1560(a), 1560(b) and 1561 are diagrams illustrating display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 60th embodiment. Figures 1560(a) and 1561 show display screens in different jackpot games with the same timing (the position of the right tip of the time display B811 is the same timing) as the ending effect, and Figure 1560(b) shows the display screen after time has passed from the state shown in Figure 1560(a).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1560(a), when the frame button B22 (see FIG. 1546) is operated in accordance with the frame button display B813 (see FIG. 1549(b)) in the ending performance, the direction operation section display B816, the vertical scale display B817 and the horizontal scale display B818 are displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, and above them, the situation suggestion display B7821 is displayed.

The status indication B7821 is designed to display various comments, but in FIG. 1560(a) it says "Cancel," suggesting that changes to the light and volume settings have been initialized (returned to maximum values).

In other words, in this embodiment, the light intensity and volume settings are set to be initialized (returned to maximum values) by the audio lamp control device B113 (see FIG. 1505) when a specified time has elapsed since the setting change was performed, and the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the status suggestion display B7821 during the ending performance of the first jackpot game after the initialization is performed.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation where, for example, if the left and down switches (switches operated to decrease the volume or light intensity) of the directional control unit B45 (see FIG. 1546) are functioning but the right and up switches (switches operated to increase the volume or light intensity) are malfunctioning, once the light intensity or volume has been reduced to its minimum, the light intensity or volume cannot be increased at all thereafter, even if the player changes.

The player can understand that the changes to the light and volume settings have been initialized (returned to maximum value) by visually checking that the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the status indication display B7821. If the player who previously changed the light and volume settings is the same player who is currently playing, it is likely that the player will want to return the light and volume settings to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value).

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the ending performance of the first jackpot game after the initialization is performed, the light intensity setting in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) remains on the vertical scale display B817 as the past light intensity display B7817 (corresponding to the part shown in light shading), and the volume setting in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) remains on the horizontal scale display B818 as the past volume display B7818 (corresponding to the part shown in light shading).

Therefore, the player can easily restore the light intensity and volume settings to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value) by operating the directional control unit B45 using the past light intensity display B7817 as a guide to change the light intensity setting, and by operating the directional control unit B45 using the past volume display B7818 as a guide to change the volume setting.

As described above, the past light intensity display B7817 and the past volume display B7818 are displayed during the ending performance of the first big win game after the initialization of the light intensity and volume is performed by the sound lamp control device B113 (see FIG. 1505), but are set to disappear if that timing is missed, making it more difficult (more time consuming) to change the light intensity and volume settings.

This allows the player to be prompted to operate the direction operation unit B45 at the timing when the past light intensity display B7817 and the past volume display B7818 are displayed, thereby improving the player's ability to focus on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81.

As shown in FIG. 1560(b), when the player operates the directional control B45 to return the light intensity and volume settings to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value), the comment "Cancel" on the status indication display B7821 is changed to the comment "Restoration complete."

The player can see that the light intensity and volume settings have been restored to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value) by visually checking that the comment "Return Completed" is displayed on the status indication display B7821. As a result, the setting change has been executed, and the light intensity and volume will not be initialized (returned to maximum value) by the audio lamp control device B113 (see FIG. 1505) until a specified time has elapsed.

In the display shown in FIG. 1561, the status indication display B7821 displays the comment "Automatic continuation," and the volume and light intensity settings are maintained as set by the player. Therefore, the player does not need to change the volume or light intensity settings, and can focus on the movement of the time display B811 and figuring out the timing of the ball's release.

In this way, by changing the content of the situation suggestion display B7821 in the ending performance and, depending on the content, encouraging the player to operate the directional operation unit B45 to change the light intensity and volume settings, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the ending performance.

Next, the 61st embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1562 to 1564. In the 54th embodiment, the frame button display B813 is always displayed during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display performance, and the frame button B22 can be operated. However, in the 61st embodiment, the frame button display B8813 is displayed as an entity for a further limited period during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display performance, and the frame button B22 can be operated. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1562(a), 1562(b) and 1563 are diagrams illustrating, in chronological order, display screens for the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 61st embodiment. In Figures 1562(a), 1562(b) and 1563, the display of the frame button display B8813 is shown by imaginary lines when it is displayed semi-transparently, and by solid lines when it is displayed as an actual object.

In this embodiment, when the card forgetting prevention display performance is started, as shown in FIG. 1562(a), in addition to a specific display B810 being displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, multiple semi-transparent frame button displays B8813 are displayed so as to be dotted near the edge of the display screen. The frame button displays B8813 move toward the center of the display screen as time passes.

When the semi-transparent frame button display B8813 reaches the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 and merges with it, the frame button display B8813 materializes as shown in FIG. 1562(b). When the frame button display B8813 is materialized, the input of the frame button B22 is controlled to be valid, and when the input of the frame button B22 is detected as valid, an operation validity display B8813a (in this embodiment, the comment "Good") is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, and then the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 transitions to the state shown in FIG. 1550(a) described in the 54th embodiment.

When a player operates the frame button B22 to transition the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 to the state shown in FIG. 1550(a), the player will follow the moving frame button display B8813 with his or her eyes in order to time the frame button display B8813 to materialize.

Since the specific display B810 is displayed on the movement path of the frame button display B8813, it is possible to induce the specific display B810 to come into the field of view of the player who is following the frame button display B8813 with his or her eyes. In addition, by overlapping the position where the frame button display B8813 materializes with the position where the specific display B810 is displayed, it is possible to induce the player to pay attention to the specific display B810 that is displayed behind the frame button display B8813.

In the first place, during the period from when the card forgetting prevention display performance starts until the frame button display B8813 is materialized, the specific display B810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, making it easier for the specific display B810 to come into the player's field of view compared to when the frame button B22 can be operated immediately after the card forgetting prevention display performance starts and the specific display B810 can be instantly moved to the corner of the display screen.

If the frame button B22 is not operated while the frame button display B8813 is materialized, the frame button display B8813, which is displayed semi-transparently from the center position of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 outward, moves as shown in FIG. 1563.

In the state shown in FIG. 1563, input to the frame button B22 is controlled to be invalid, and even if the frame button B22 is operated, only an invalid operation display B8813b (in this embodiment, a comment "Miss") is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, and the display screen does not transition to the state shown in FIG. 1550(a), and the specific display B810 is maintained in a state in which it is positioned in the center of the display screen.

In this way, in this embodiment, by limiting the operation timing of frame button B22 while the card forget prevention display effect is being performed, the following favorable effects can be achieved.

In other words, when the display mode of the frame button display B8813 changes from a semi-transparent display to a solid display to indicate the timing when the frame button B22 can be operated, the specific display B810 is positioned in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 until the display mode of the frame button display B8813 changes, and is configured to be easily visible to the player, thereby increasing the attention to the specific display B810.

Furthermore, by switching the frame button display B8813 from a solid display to a semi-transparent display during the card forgetting prevention display performance, it is possible to prevent the period from being too short from the timing at which the display screen transitions to the state shown in FIG. 1550(a) by operating the frame button B22 to the end of the card forgetting prevention display performance period.

This prevents a situation from occurring in which, even if the player has effectively operated frame button B22, the player is unable to change the light intensity or volume settings to their preferred settings because there is not enough time to do so before the card forgetting prevention display performance ends.

This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player who has had the experience of operating the frame button B22 only to be unable to change the light intensity or volume settings to their liking from underestimating the value of operating the frame button B22. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player's motivation to operate the frame button B22 (not only during the ending performance, but also during gameplay) decreases.

Note that the frame button display B8813 may be accompanied by a musical note mark or a light bulb mark to suggest an object that can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22. In this case, when the player is thinking of adjusting the volume, the frame button display B8813 can be more attention-grabbing if a musical note mark is attached, and attention can be distracted from the frame button display B8813 if a light bulb mark is attached.

Figure 1564 is a diagram showing the change over time of the frame button display B8813 in the card forgetting prevention display performance, the change over time of the validity of the operation of the frame button B22, and an example of the operation of the frame button B22. As an example, Figure 1564 shows a case in which the period of the card forgetting prevention display performance is divided into three equal parts and assigned to a first period BT81 (see Figure 1562 (a)) in which the semi-transparent frame button display B8813 is scattered, a second period BT82 (see Figure 1562 (b)) in which the frame button display B8813 is merged and materialized, and a third period BT83 (see Figure 1563) in which the frame button display B8813 becomes semi-transparent again and is scattered.

Unlike the 54th embodiment in which the frame button B22 could be operated at any time during the card forgetting prevention display performance, in this embodiment, operation of the frame button B22 is only valid during the second period BT82. If the frame button B22 is operated during the second period BT82, the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 transitions to the state shown in FIG. 1550(a), and the light intensity and volume settings can be changed. On the other hand, no matter how much the frame button B22 is operated during the first period BT81 or the third period BT83, the light intensity and volume settings cannot be changed.

In FIG. 1564, the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 are illustrated as being the same, but the lengths of the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 can be changed in various ways depending on the purpose. Below, an example of an effect that can be expected from changing the length of the first period 81 or the length of the third period BT83 is described.

For example, by setting the first period BT81 to be shorter, the transition to the second period BT82, during which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid, can be accelerated. This makes it possible to lengthen the maximum length of time that can be spent changing the settings of the light intensity or volume.

The setting of shortening the first period BT81 may be effective, for example, when used in the ending performance of the first jackpot game (the first jackpot in a series of consecutive jackpots). During the time-saving state, the probability of winning, or the jackpot game, a specific song may be played, and there are players who are not interested in the sound during the normal state but would like to hear a specific song.

Even if such players play with the volume turned down during normal play, they would like to turn up the volume to a level where they can hear a specific song when they move from the normal play state through a jackpot play state and into a time-saving or special bonus state.

Therefore, by lengthening the maximum length of time that can be spent changing the light intensity and volume settings, particularly in the ending performance of the first jackpot game, it becomes easier to change the volume settings at the appropriate timing when moving from the normal state through the jackpot game state to the time-saving state or the probability variable state, and it is possible to improve the satisfaction of players who want to hear the above-mentioned specific song.

In addition, for example, by setting the first period BT81 longer, the transition to the second period BT82 in which operation of the frame button B22 is valid is delayed, while the period during which the specific display B810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 can be maintained for a longer period.

The setting of lengthening the first period BT81 may be effective, for example, in the ending performance of a jackpot game during a winning streak. In many cases, changing the volume or light intensity settings at the time of the first win is sufficient, and since it is unlikely that a situation will arise in which the player would want to change the volume or light intensity settings during a winning streak, there is little disadvantage to the player even if the maximum length of the period that can be spent on changing the volume or light intensity settings is shortened by delaying the transition to the second period BT82.

On the other hand, the longer the winning streak continues, the more excited the player becomes, and the more likely it is that the player will be so excited that he or she will forget to return the cards inserted in the card unit when finishing the game. In contrast, if the first period BT81 is set long, the period during which the specific display B810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 during the card forget prevention display performance can be maintained for a long time, which can encourage the player to focus on returning the cards.

Also, for example, by setting the second period BT82 shorter, it can be made more difficult for the frame button B22 to be operated and transition to the state shown in FIG. 1550(a). In this case, in addition to being able to guide the player's gaze to the specific display B810 with the moving frame button display B8813 (see FIG. 1562(a)), it is possible to induce the player to fail to operate when multiple frame button displays B8813 are combined, thereby increasing the likelihood that the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 will transition to the state shown in FIG. 1563.

This allows the specific display B810 to be maintained in the center of the display screen throughout the entire card forgetting prevention display performance, and the movement of the frame button display B8813 is expected to have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the specific display B810. Therefore, the specific display B810 can leave a stronger impression on the player than if the frame button display B8813 were not present.

Furthermore, for example, by setting the second period BT82 longer, the period during which operation of the frame button B22 is valid can be maintained for a longer period, thereby ensuring an opportunity to operate the frame button B22.

Furthermore, for example, by setting the third period BT83 to be shorter, T82 can be relatively lengthened, and the period during which operation of frame button B22 is valid can be maintained for a long period, thereby ensuring opportunities to operate frame button B22.

Furthermore, for example, by setting the third period BT83 longer, it is possible to ensure a longer remaining period for the card forgetting prevention display performance after the state shown in FIG. 1550(a) is transitioned to by operating frame button B22 during the second period BT82, making it easier to avoid incomplete changes to the light intensity or volume settings.

The length of each period BT81, BT82, and BT83 may be changed for reasons other than those mentioned above. For example, if a jackpot is found on a reserved ball that has already been used to draw the first symbol during a jackpot game, the first period BT81 may be made extremely short, and the second period BT82 may be made longer by that amount.

In this case, the card forgetting prevention display effect can be made to appear to the player as if it had started from the state of FIG. 1562(b) without going through the state of FIG. 1562(a), giving the player a sense of incongruity. This sense of incongruity makes the player realize that he or she will be able to grasp that the reserved balls are a jackpot, which can encourage the player to pay attention to the card forgetting prevention display effect, thereby improving the player's ability to pay attention to the card forgetting prevention display effect. This can make the player aware of the need to return cards, etc. inserted into the card unit, and can prevent the player from actually forgetting cards, etc.

Next, the center frame C86 in the 62nd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1565 to 1580.

In each of the above embodiments, the center frame 86 is described as being composed of one part, but in the 62nd embodiment, the center frame C86 is composed of two members, an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1565 is a front view of the game board C13 in the 62nd embodiment. As shown in Figure 1565, the center frame C86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 1517) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1565) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 1565) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1517) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame C86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1565) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is configured by omitting a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (the portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in Figure 1565) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, i.e., the portion where the lower frame C86b is arranged), and the other portions excluding the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments.

Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. Fig. 1566 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Fig. 1567 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. Note that Figs. 1566 and 1567 only partially illustrate a portion of the base plate 60, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 1566 and 1567, the lower frame C86b is provided with an inlet COPin formed as an opening capable of receiving balls, a first passage CRt1 connected to the inlet COPin, a second passage CRt2 through which the balls guided along the first passage CRt1 flow down, a third passage CRt3 through which the balls guided along the second passage CRt2 (balls that have reciprocated along the second passage CRt2 in its longitudinal direction) flow down, a fourth passage CRt4 and a fifth passage CRt5 through which the balls guided along the third passage CRt3 are sorted by the sorting member C170 and flow down, a sixth passage CRt6 through which the balls guided along the fourth passage CRt4 flow down, and an outlet COPout formed as an opening through which the balls guided along the fifth passage CRt5 flow out to the play area (see Figures 1574 and 1575).

The upper frame C86a has an upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 1565). The upper frame passage CRt0 is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of FIG. 1565) (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 is connected to the receiving port COPin of the lower frame C86b.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage CRt0 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage CRt0 through the receiving port COPin into the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b.

A distribution member C170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C86b (see Figs. 1574 and 1575). When a series of balls is guided down the third passage CRt3, the leading ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt4, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fifth passage CRt5. If the distance between the series of balls is greater than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4.

Here, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the balls flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 1565). Therefore, balls distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 are likely to win at the first winning hole 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt6, not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided along the sixth passage CRt6 to flow out into the play area, but side outflow surfaces C182 are also formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in Figure 1565) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt6, with side outflow surfaces C182 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, a ball allocated to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface C182 into the play area in the sixth passage CRt6 than from the central outlet surface C181 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball allocated to the fifth passage CRt5 described above).

In this manner, in the lower frame C86b of this embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the third passage CRt3, the leading ball is diverted to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4), while the trailing ball is diverted to a passage that is more likely to win the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, the passage (fifth passage CRt5) that almost certainly ensures that the ball will win the first winning port 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning port 64 (ensuring a win), the player is made to look forward to the formation of a series of balls, which increases the excitement of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described with reference to Figures 1566 to 1567 as well as Figures 1568 to 1580.

Figure 1568 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 1569 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. Figure 1570 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, Figure 1571 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 1572 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. Figure 1573(a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDLXXIIIa in Figure 1571, and Figure 1573(b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDLXXIIIb in Figure 1571.

1574 and 1575 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in FIG. 1570, and FIG. 1576 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along line MDLXXVI-MDLXXVI in FIG. 1571. FIG. 1577(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b at part MDLXXVIIa in FIG. 1574, and FIG. 1577(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along line MDLXXVIIb-MDLXXVIIb in FIG. 1570. FIG. 1574 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in the first position, and FIG. 1575 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in Figures 1566 to 1577, the lower frame C86b includes a front member C110, a dish member C120 disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front member C110, a back member C130 disposed facing the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the front member C110 at a predetermined distance, a first intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the back member C130, and a second intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the back member C130. The plate includes a second intermediate member C150 arranged facing each other at a predetermined distance on the surface of the plate (the surface facing the direction of the mark F), a first intermediate member C160 and a distribution member C170 interposed between the opposing back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150, a second intermediate member C180 interposed between the opposing front member C110 and the first and second intermediate members C140, C150, and a decorative member C190 and a detour member C200 disposed on the back of the back member C130.

The lower frame C86b is constructed as a single unit by fastening each component together with tapping screws, and the distribution component C170 and decorative component C190 are rotatably supported on the back component C130 (see FIG. 1566).

In addition, the lower frame C86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) except for the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190, and the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to visually see the balls passing through the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, as well as the distribution action of the distribution member C170 and the associated displacement of the decorative member C190, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 of the lower frame C86b are made of a light-transmitting resin material. This is because the player can visually confirm at least one or both of the line-up of balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the distribution operation by the distribution member C170, while visually confirming that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170, and therefore such balls will enter the first winning hole 64 from the outlet COPout with a high probability (almost all balls in this embodiment), and therefore it is sufficient that the player does not need to visually confirm the balls being guided down the fifth passage CRt5.

The dividing member C170 and the decorative member C190 are made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

Also, on the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be painted or have a sticker attached. In other words, the balls passing through the third passage CRt3 and the distribution member C170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C110 comprises a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms the front, a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands upright from the back surface of the front portion C111, and a connecting portion C113 that is disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front portion C111 and the bottom portion C112.

The front portion C111 has multiple through holes C111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front portion C111. The lower frame C86b, in an assembled state (unitized state), is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes C111a to the base plate 60.

In the front portion C111, an outlet COPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1565). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out into the play area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C180 is disposed opposite the upper surface of the bottom surface portion C112, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the bottom surface portion C112 and the second intervening member C180 (recess C183). Therefore, compared to, for example, a case in which a through hole formed through the second intervening member C180 is used as part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced.

The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the erected tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C112 abuts against the front surfaces of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering.

An receiving port COPin is formed in the connecting portion C113 (drilled in the plate thickness direction). As described above, the receiving port COPin is an opening that receives balls from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a. When the center frame C86 is attached (disposed) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion C111 and the connecting portion C113, and both are fastened and fixed with tapping screws. This connects the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 to the receiving port COPin.

The dish member C120 has an upper bottom surface portion C121 and a lower bottom surface portion C122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C123 and a lower side wall portion C124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C121 extends in the left-right direction (arrow F-B direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the receiving opening COPin (arrow R direction). The upper bottom surface portion C121 is located vertically below the receiving opening COPin (arrow D direction), and a vertical step is formed between it and the upper frame passage CRt0. In other words, the dish member C120 is configured to allow balls to freely fall from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.

A groove C121a with a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the width direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (see FIG. 1577). The groove C121a extends linearly in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The groove width (dimension in the direction of arrows L-R) of the groove C121 is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension in the direction of arrows U-D) of the groove C121a is set to a depth that prevents the ball from contacting the bottom surface of the groove C121a.

This allows the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 to be supported at two points (a pair of ridges where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the groove C121a intersect). Therefore, compared to when the groove C121a is not formed (i.e., when the ball is supported at only one point), the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased. This cushions (accepts) the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage CRt0, and increases the resistance when the ball rolls.

As described above, by dropping a ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 onto the upper bottom surface portion C121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 at two points, when two balls flow (drop) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) with a specified distance between them, the flow down of the leading ball is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), making it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. This makes it possible to reduce the distance between the leading and trailing balls.

The upper side wall portion C123 defines the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can be guided only in series.

A cutout portion C123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) through this cutout portion C123a.

The lower bottom surface portion C122 extends in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as a substantially straight passage when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved in an arc that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 1577 (b)).

The lower side wall portion C124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom surface portion C121, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B).

At the position corresponding to the cutout portion C123a in the upper side wall portion C123, the lower side wall portion C124 is not formed, and as described above, the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) via the cutout portion C123a.

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface C122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is curved in an arc shape, and the ball flows down from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the upwardly inclined side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122). The ball that flows down can then be caused to reciprocate between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then can be caused to flow down from the cutout portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The lower bottom surface portion C122 has an outflow surface C122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (i.e., the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), balls with a reduced gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining that connected state.

In addition, the outflow surface C122a is formed in such a way that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion C124a (see FIG. 1570).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion C124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C122, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C122, there is a risk that a ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) without ever reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) or before it has reciprocated a sufficient number of times due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. In other words, there is a risk that the leading ball and the trailing ball will not decrease the distance between them and the two balls will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining a gap between them.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed with a downward inclination in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (the direction of the arrow L) (see FIG. 1577). As a result, the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122 makes it possible to press the ball against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a, while causing the ball to roll (reciprocate) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make the ball easily overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball easily move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction), see FIG. 1577(b)) has a radius of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction that is smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a). In other words, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is larger.

This makes it easier for the balls to reciprocate and for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity), while making it easier for the leading and trailing balls to maintain a connected state in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls slows (the stage where the balls do not reach the one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a). As a result, it is easier for the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining a connected state.

The dish member C120 is arranged in such a position that the extension direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is aligned along the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B), and is placed inside the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, so that the space in the front-to-rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. This ensures the full length of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), making it easier to string the balls together.

The back member C130 includes a main body C131 formed in a plate shape, and a lower stopper C132, an upper stopper C133, and an axis support seat C134 that are erected from the front of the main body C131.

An opening C131a is formed in the main body C131 to connect a passage (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and rear side of the main body C131. Below the opening C131a, a recess C131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C131. The recess C131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt5 between itself and the detour member C200.

The lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced downward, thereby determining the second position of the sorting member C170 (see FIG. 1575). On the other hand, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced upward, thereby determining the first position (predetermined position) of the sorting member C170 (see FIG. 1574).

The shaft support seat C134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. The shaft C192 is fixed to the decorative member C190, and the sorting member C170 is non-rotatably connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back of the main body C131, so that the sorting member C170 and the decorative member C190 are integrally rotatably supported by the main body C131 (shaft support seat C134). The shaft C192 is supported by the shaft support seat C134 in a position along the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-shaped main body C141, a bottom surface C142 that stands upright from the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C141, a top surface C143, and a passage portion C144, and is disposed on the left side of the back surface member C130 when viewed from the front.

When the first intermediate member C140 is disposed on the rear member C130, the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the erected ends (in the direction of arrow B) of the passage portion C144 are in contact with the front surface of the rear member C130. As a result, a third passage CRt3 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (main body portion C141, bottom surface portion C142, and top surface portion C143), and a fourth passage CRt4 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C130, the first intermediate member C140 (passage portion C144), and the sorting member C170 in the second position (see FIG. 1575).

The bottom surface portion C142 is inclined downward from the dish member C120 side toward the sorting member C170 side. The passage portion C144 includes an opposing portion C144a formed at a position facing the sorting member C170 in the second position, and a bottom surface portion C144b forming a rolling surface for the balls, and the bottom surface portion C144b is inclined downward from the sorting member C170 in the second position toward the opposing portion C144a side, and is also inclined downward from the back member C130 side toward the front member C110 side. Therefore, the balls can be received from the sorting member C170 displaced to the second position into the fourth passage CRt4 and can flow out (roll) into the sixth passage CRt6.

Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the dish member C120 rolls the ball in the front-to-back direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), the ball flows down from the dish member C120 to the bottom surface portion C142 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) rolls the ball flowing down from the dish member C120 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment).

In this case, the distance between the leading ball CB1 and the trailing ball CB2 (see FIG. 1578) is determined by the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and the two balls CB1, CB2 flow down in the left-right direction from the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) and also flow (roll) down in the left-right direction on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), making it possible to confirm the distance between the two balls CB1, CB2 when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to see. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

The second intermediate member C150 has a plate-shaped main body C151 and a bottom surface C152 standing upright from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C151, and is disposed on the right side of the rear surface member C130 when viewed from the front. When the second intermediate member C150 is disposed on the rear surface member C130, the standing tip (on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface C152 abuts against the front surface of the rear surface member C130.

The main body C151 has a recess C151a formed by recessing its outer edge. The bottom surface C152 has a detour member C200 (gutter C203) disposed opposite its underside, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C151a and the bottom surface C152 and the detour member C200 (gutter C203). Therefore, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced, for example, compared to a case in which the detour member C200 is formed into a cylindrical shape and used as part of the fifth passage CRt5.

The first intervening member C160 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in a portion of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the opposing back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned between the back member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the first intervening member C160.

The first intermediate member C160 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) that is curved into an arc that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 1575). Therefore, the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 to the first intermediate member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) can be made to reciprocate on the first intermediate member C160 and then flow out to the opening C131a.

This allows the time required for the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 to flow out to the opening C131a to be longer, compared to a configuration in which the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 are directly sorted out to the opening C131a. In other words, it makes it easier for players hoping for a state in which there is a high probability of the ball entering the first winning port 64 (winning), to notice that such a state has been created, and allows them time to enjoy such a state. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The first interposed member C160 has an outflow surface C160a recessed at a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (i.e., the lowest vertical position of the rolling surface of the first interposed member C160). The outflow surface C160a is a portion for allowing the ball guided through the first interposed member C160 to flow out to the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the opening C131a.

The distribution member C170 includes a main body C171 having a fitting hole C171a formed on one side, a receiving portion C172 formed on the other side of the main body C171 opposite the side on which the fitting hole C171a is formed, and a rolling portion C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C171, and is rotatable around a shaft C192 (shaft support portion C134) fitted into the fitting hole C171a.

The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole with a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192, which has a cross-sectional shape that matches the fitting hole C171a, is fitted into the fitting hole C171a, thereby fixing the shaft C192 to the main body C171 so that it cannot rotate. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 so that it cannot rotate, and therefore the main body C171 (distributing member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192.

In this case, the center of gravity of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 is offset to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C170 across the axis C192, the right side of Fig. 1574) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the distribution member C170 is raised on the receiving section C172 side (rotated clockwise around the axis C192 when viewed from the front), and is in a state in which its rotation is restricted by the upper stopper section C133 (a state in which it is disposed in the first position (predetermined position)) (see Fig. 1574).

On the other hand, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be offset to the other side (the side on which the sorting member C170 is disposed with respect to the axis C192, the left side of FIG. 1574) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the receiving portion C172 side of the sorting member C170 is lowered (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in a front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C132 (disposed in the second position) (see FIG. 1575).

At least a portion of the main body C191 of the decorative member C190 is visible to the player, and as the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) between the first and second positions, the decorative member C190 (main body C191) also rotates, changing the position (shape) that is visible to the player. Therefore, based on the position (shape) of the decorative member C190, the state of the distribution member C170 (i.e., the distribution direction of the balls) can be recognized by the player. In addition, the decorative member C190 can serve both as a weight for displacing the distribution member C170 and as a part that allows the player to recognize the distribution direction of the balls, which reduces production costs.

After the distribution member C170 is placed in the second position, when the balls are discharged (flow out) from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140, the distribution member C170 is returned to the first position (predetermined position) by the action of the weight of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 (eccentricity from the axis C192 of the center of gravity).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C170 to the first position is performed by the weight (mass) of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190, so the structure can be simplified compared to, for example, a case in which a biasing spring is provided and the biasing spring biases the distribution member C170 toward the first position.

In addition, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement (returning operation) of the sorting member C170 to the first position can be slowed down, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling portion C173. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for the sorting member C170 to be displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling portion C173 after it starts to displace (rotate) from the second position toward the first position. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility for a third ball, which is further behind the trailing ball CB2, to reach the rolling portion C173 (see Figures 1578 to 1580).

The receiving portion C172 has an opposing portion C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 in the first position, and a bottom surface portion C172b that supports the received ball in the first position and forms a rolling surface for rolling the ball toward the passage portion C144 in the second position.

When the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C172 is formed such that the facing portion C172a is approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom surface portion C172b is inclined upward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 1574).

When the distribution member C170 is positioned in the first position, if the opposing portion C172a is inclined in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the rolling portion C173 side of the opposing portion C172a is inclined in a direction away from the third passage CRt3 more than the bottom surface portion C172b side), there is a risk that a ball that collides with the opposing portion C172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the third passage CRt3.

In contrast, when the distribution member C170 is positioned in the first position, the opposing portion C172a is oriented approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, so that the balls received from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 are received by the opposing portion C172a, preventing them from flowing back into the third passage CRt3.

In addition, when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, if the bottom surface C172b is formed to slope downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom surface C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140, the balls received in the receiving portion C172 will flow out into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 prematurely, and the weight of the balls will not be utilized, which may prevent the sorting member C170 from reaching the second position.

In contrast, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed so as to incline upward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the sorting member C170 is disposed in the first position, so that the balls can be held on the bottom surface portion C172b at least until the sorting member C170 rotates a predetermined amount from the first position. This makes it possible to delay the time until the balls received in the receiving portion C172 flow out into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140. As a result, the weight of the balls can be effectively utilized to ensure that the sorting member C170 reaches the second position.

For the reasons mentioned above (preventing backflow into the third passage CRt3), the opposing portion C172a may be inclined in a direction such that the rolling portion C173 side is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom surface portion C172b side.

When the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, the receiving portion C172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 1575). This allows the balls received in the receiving portion C172 to flow reliably into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140.

In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b, the weight of the ball acts on the distribution member C170, making it easier to maintain the distribution member C170 in the second position (i.e., in a state in which the trailing ball can be guided to the rolling portion C173 (fifth passage CRt5)).

The rolling portion C173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second interposed member C160 (fifth passage CRt5), and is positioned (installed) between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end of the second interposed member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) when the distribution member C170 is disposed in the second position.

The upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is formed to protrude from the opposing portion C172a of the receiving portion C172. That is, at the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173, a plate-shaped portion is formed that protrudes from the opposing portion C172a toward the upstream side (first intermediate member C140 (third passage CRt3) side, arrow L direction) from the opposing portion C172a. By inserting this plate-shaped portion between ball CB1 and ball CB2, the two balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

When the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, the height position of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the height position of the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140. That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and when the distribution member C170 disposed at the second position is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle) toward the first position, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are disposed at the same height position.

When a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball displaces (rotates) the distributing member C170 downward from the first position, and the lower surface of the distributing member C170 abuts against the lower stopper portion C132, thereby positioning the distributing member C170 at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C170 will be bounced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132. If the upward bounce of the distribution member C170 causes the height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) to be positioned vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140, there is a risk that the balls will not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 into the rolling portion C173.

In particular, if a ball collides with the sorting member C170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173) that has been bounced upward, and the impact of the ball's collision causes the sorting member C170 to bounce further upward (if the ball pushes the sorting member C170 further upward), there is a risk that the ball will flow into (be received by) the receiving portion C172, even though it should have flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C173.

In contrast, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, as described above, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface), so that even if the sorting member C170 is bounced upward by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 can be prevented from being positioned vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 by the step between the two. In other words, the sorting member C170 can be allowed to be bounced upward by the step between the two. Therefore, it is possible to easily allow the ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the leading ball CB1 is a predetermined amount or less) to flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) into the rolling portion C173.

Furthermore, the distribution member C170 is formed such that the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C140, the face in the direction of the arrow L) is inclined downward from the rolling portion C173 toward the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142). That is, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 is formed in a shape such that the edge portion on the receiving portion C172 (opposing portion C172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C173.

As a result, when a ball collides with the sorting member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173) that has been bounced upward, the direction of the force acting from the ball on the sorting member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173) can be set to a force in a direction that pushes the sorting member C170 downward. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C173 (a trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the preceding ball CB1 is a predetermined amount or less) to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) into the rolling portion C173.

The receiving section C172 and the rolling section C173 are arranged on the same side of C192 (the side where the weight of the ball rotates the sorting member C170 in the same direction). Therefore, even if the weight of the ball received by the receiving section C172 places the sorting member C170 in the second position and the ball is discharged from the receiving section C172, the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling section C173 can be used to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position. In other words, when there is a ball to be guided to the fifth passage CRt5, the weight of the ball can be used to maintain the position of the sorting member C170 in a position for guiding the ball to the fifth passage CRt5.

Therefore, there is no need to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position by using the weight of the ball received in the receiving portion C172 (the ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b), and the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b can be shortened, thereby making the sorting member C170 smaller. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the sorting member C170 can be increased.

Here, the sorting member C170 is configured so that the direction in which the balls roll from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) towards the receiving portion C172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the balls, arrow R direction) is opposite to the direction in which the balls roll from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 (the direction in which the received balls are made to roll, arrow L direction). In other words, the sorting member C170 is configured to reverse (change direction) the flow (rolling) direction of the balls in the receiving portion C172.

As a result, compared to when the direction in which the receiving section C172 receives the balls and the direction in which the balls roll from the receiving section C172 to the passage section C144 are the same, the balls can be retained in the sorting member C170 (receiving section C172) for the time required for reversal, and the weight of the balls retained in the receiving section C172 can be used to easily maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position. As a result, the balls can be stably rolled in the rolling section C173.

In addition, by utilizing the inversion of the balls, the residence time can be secured, and the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened accordingly, thereby making the distribution member C170 smaller. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the distribution member C170 can be increased.

The second interposed member C180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the front member C111 and the opposing first and second intermediate members C140 and C150. That is, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed by the space partitioned between the front member C110, the first and second intermediate members C140 and C150, and the second interposed member C180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 has a concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and lateral outflow surface C182) that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow the ball guided through the second interposed member C180 (sixth passage CRt6) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6 has undulations, with the lateral outflow surface C182 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface C181 located at the top of the undulations.

The upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion C111 of the front member C110 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180, except for the areas where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. In other words, a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 flows out (flows down) into the play area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C180, and as described above, a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110.

The decorative member C190 comprises a main body C191 formed in a plate shape and an axis C192 fixed to the main body C191, and as described above, is connected (integrated) to the distribution member C170 via the axis C192. A pattern such as a character is displayed on the front of the main body C191 by printing or attaching a sticker, and the operation of the distribution member C170 can be visually recognized by the player based on the movement (displacement) of the character.

The axis C192 is disposed perpendicular to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 1565). This allows the dimensions of the lower frame C86b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

The detour member C200 includes a plate-shaped main body C201, a wall portion C202 erected from the front surface (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the main body C201, and a gutter portion C203 formed by further extending a portion of the wall portion C202 toward the front surface, and is disposed on the rear surface side of the rear surface member C130 at a position opposite the opening C131a.

When the detour member C200 is disposed on the rear member C130, the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall portion C202 abuts against the rear face of the rear member C130 (main body portion C131), and the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the gutter portion C203 abuts against the rear face of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge of the gutter portion C203 abuts against the bottom face of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152).

As a result, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned between the back member C130 (main body portion C131) and the detour member C200 (main body portion C201 and wall portion C202), and the space partitioned between the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152) and the detour member C200 (gutter portion C203) (see FIG. 1576).

The gutter portion C203 is inclined downward from the rear member C130 side toward the second intermediate member C150 side. Therefore, the ball that flows into the detour member C200 from the opening C131a of the rear member C130 can be made to roll on the gutter portion C203 and flow into the fifth passage CRt5 formed between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 and the second intermediate member C180 (recess C183).

Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C170 will be described. Figures 1578 to 1580 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C170, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in Figure 1570.

Note that Fig. 1578(a) and Fig. 1578(b) show the state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in the first position, and correspond to Fig. 1574. Fig. 1579(b) and Fig. 1580 show the state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in the second position, and correspond to Fig. 1575.

As shown in FIG. 1578(a), when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C172 is positioned in a position that can receive (allow the ball CB1 to flow in) the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140.

That is, the receiving portion C172 has an opposing portion C172a disposed at a position intersecting an extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface), and a bottom portion C172b disposed at a position vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface).

When the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface (surface opposite the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173 is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass).

On the other hand, when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the rolling portion C173 is positioned in a position that cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in).

That is, the bottom surface portion C172b of the rolling portion C173 is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) (one step higher). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C173 and the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the sorting member C170 in the first position.

When the sorting member C170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C173 is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass). This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the sorting member C170 in the first position. However, this distance may also be set to a distance larger than the diameter of the ball.

When ball CB1 (a leading ball) and ball CB2 (a trailing ball spaced a predetermined distance from the leading ball) roll on the bottom surface C142 of the first intermediate member C140, as shown in FIG. 1578(b), ball CB1 flows into (is received by) the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C170, and ball CB1 abuts (is received by) the opposing portion C172a and is held in the receiving portion C172.

Furthermore, when the distance between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1 and comes into contact with ball CB1. As described above, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass), so that ball CB2 can be prevented from passing over ball CB1 and flowing into the rolling portion C173. In other words, ball CB2 can be made to wait behind (upstream of) ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 1578(b), when ball CB1 is received by receiving portion C172, the weight of ball CB1 displaces (rotates) sorting member C170 from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 1579(a). Also, when ball CB2 has caught up with ball CB1, the weight of ball CB2 is also applied to sorting member C170.

The receiving portion C172 has an area on the side of the opposing portion C172a that is connected to the bottom portion C172b, and an area on the side of the bottom portion C172b that is connected to the opposing portion C172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C172a and the bottom portion C172b, that is, is curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C192 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

In addition, the gap between the sorting member C170 (the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface portion C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the opposing portion C144a) is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) when the sorting member C170 is disposed in the first position, and is gradually enlarged as the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position.

That is, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 1579(a) and FIG. 1579(b)), the gap between the above-mentioned distribution member C170 (the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface portion C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the opposing portion C144a) is expanded to a dimension approximately equal to the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass), and when the distribution member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position, the above-mentioned gap is further expanded, and the maximum gap is formed at the second position.

Therefore, while the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172 is maintained. In other words, the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) with the ball CB1 received in the receiving portion C172 between the first position and the predetermined intermediate position. This allows the ball CB2 to remain in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 to be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom portion C142.

In this case, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface (surface opposite the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173 is gradually reduced as the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) before the sorting member C170 reaches a predetermined intermediate position. Therefore, the ball CB2 can be prevented from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C172.

In addition, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) on the bottom surface (surface opposite the rolling surface, surface on the arrow D direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is configured to pass closer to the axis C192 than the outer edge (outer edge on the opposite side to the axis C192) of the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving portion C172 (the connecting portion between the opposing portion C172a and the bottom surface portion C172b).

Therefore, the ball CB2 can be maintained in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 can be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142, while the ball CB2 can be pushed back by the upstream end (the end on the direction of the arrow L) of the rolling portion C173. In other words, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 can be inserted between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 to separate the two balls. This makes it possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C172. In addition, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled into the rolling portion C173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the sorting member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 1579(a) toward the second position, the ball CB1 rolls on the bottom surface portion C172b toward the passage portion C144, and the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C173 (is received by the rolling portion C173).

As shown in Figures 1579(b) and 1580, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (fourth passage CRt4), and the ball CB2 rolls in the rolling portion C173 and flows into the first intermediate member C160 (fifth passage CRt5).

After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the sorting member C170 returns (displaces) from the second position toward the first position due to its own weight. Note that even when the sorting member C170 is disposed in the second position, or even after the sorting member C170 has started to displace (rotate) from the second position to the first position, if a third ball reaches the rolling portion C173 and flows onto the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows (is guided) into the fifth passage CRt5.

As described above, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C140, the face in the direction of arrow L) is formed with a downward incline from the rolling portion C173 toward the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142), so that even after the distribution member C170 has begun to displace (rotate) from the second position to the first position, the upstream inclined surface (end face) of the rolling portion C173 can be used to facilitate the flow of the third ball into the rolling portion C173.

The distribution member C170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position by the weight of only one ball. Therefore, when the distance between ball CB1 and ball CB2 is greater than a predetermined amount, both balls CB1 and CB2 are received in turn by the receiving portion C172, and are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 through the distribution operation described above.

As described above, according to the lower frame C86b in the 62nd embodiment, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance of less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the distance between the two balls is 0), ball CB1 is sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4, and ball CB2 is sorted (guided) to the fifth passage CRt5 by the sorting member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of ball CB1. On the other hand, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the guided passage can be changed depending on the state of the line of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), which can improve the interest.

Next, the center frame C2086 in the 63rd embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1581 to 1596. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1581 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b in the 63rd embodiment, and Figure 1582 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Note that in Figures 1581 and 1582, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 1581 and 1582, the lower frame C2086b is provided with an receiving port COP2000in formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt2001 connected to the receiving port COP2000in, a second passage CRt2002 through which the balls guided through the first passage CRt2001 (balls that have reciprocated along the longitudinal direction of the first passage CRt2001) flow down, and a third passage CRt2003 and a fourth passage CRt2004 through which the balls guided through the second passage CRt2002 are sorted by a sorting member C2170 and flow down. CRt2004, a sixth passage CRt2006 through which balls guided along the third passage CRt2003 and balls that fall from the fourth passage CRt2004 (balls that do not reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flow down, a fifth passage CRt2005 through which balls guided along the fourth passage CRt2004 (balls that reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flow down, and an outlet COP2000out formed as an opening through which balls guided along the fifth passage CRt2005 flow out to the play area (see Figures 1589 and 1590).

The center frame in the 63rd embodiment is composed of an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. The upper frame in the 63rd embodiment has the same configuration as the upper frame C86a in the 62nd embodiment, except that the shape of its upper frame passage (not shown) differs from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the 62nd embodiment, so a description of it will be omitted.

The upper frame passage is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of Figure 1565) (the area between the center frame (upper frame) and rail 61 (see Figure 1565)), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage is connected to the receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b. In other words, balls that flow in (enter) the upper frame passage from the play area flow in (enter) from the upper frame passage via the receiving port COP2000in into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b.

A distribution member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C2086b (see Figs. 1589 and 1590). When a series of balls is guided down the second passage CRt2002, the leading ball is distributed to the third passage CRt2003, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004. If the distance between the series of balls is greater than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the third passage CRt2003.

Here, the ball that reaches the end of the fourth passage CRt4 flows down to the fifth passage CRt5, and the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt2005 (the opening that allows the ball to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see Figure 1565). Therefore, a ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 is likely to enter the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of entering the first winning opening 64).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt2006, not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided into the sixth passage CRt2006 to flow out into the play area, but side outflow surfaces C182 are also formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in Figure 1565) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt2006, with side outflow surfaces C182 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, a ball that is sorted into the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface C182 into the play area in the sixth passage CRt2006 than from the central outlet surface C181 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to enter the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of entering the first winning hole 64 than a ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 described above).

In this way, in the lower frame C2086b of this embodiment, as in the case of the 62nd embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the second passage CRt2002, the leading ball is diverted to the normal passage (third passage CRt2003), while the trailing ball is diverted to the fourth passage CRt2004, which directs the ball down a passage that is more likely to win the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) that almost certainly makes the ball win the first winning port 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning port 64 (ensuring a win), the player is made to look forward to the formation of a series of balls, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ball guided along the fourth passage CRt2004 is formed so that it can fall into the sixth passage along the way, and only balls that reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling can flow down (flow into) the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, in order to increase the probability of a ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a winning), after the trailing ball among the connected balls is sorted into the fourth passage CRt2004, the player is made to hope that the ball will reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling, which increases the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described with reference to Figures 1581 to 1582 as well as Figures 1583 to 1596.

Figure 1583 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 1584 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 1585 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, Figure 1586 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 1587 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 1588(a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDLXXXVIIIa in Figure 1586, and Figure 1588(b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDLXXXVIIIb in Figure 1586.

Figures 1589 and 1590 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in Figure 1585. Figure 1591 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line MDXCI-MDXCI in Figure 1587, and Figure 1592 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII in Figure 1587. Note that Figure 1589 illustrates a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in a first position, and Figure 1590 illustrates a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in a second position.

As shown in Figures 1581 to 1592, the lower frame C2086b includes a front member C2110, a dish member C2120 disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front member C2110, a back member C2130 disposed opposite the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the front member C2110 at a predetermined distance, and a first intermediate member C2140 disposed on the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the back member C2130. , a second intermediate member C2150, a first intervening member C2160, a magnetic part C2400 and a receiving member C2500, a distribution member C2170 interposed between the opposing rear member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140, a second intervening member C2180 interposed between the opposing front member C2110 and the rear member C2130, and a detouring member C2200 and a magnet C2300 disposed on the rear surface of the rear member C2130.

The lower frame C2086b is configured as a single unit by fastening each component to the other components with tapping screws, and the distribution component C2170 is rotatably supported by the rear component C2130 and the first intermediate component C2140 (see FIG. 1581).

In addition, the lower frame C2086b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) for all components except for the distribution member C2170, and the distribution member C2170 is made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to visually see the balls passing through the first passage CRt2001 to the sixth passage CRt2006, and also allows the player to visually see the distribution action of the distribution member C2170, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that at least the first intermediate member C2140 of the lower frame C2086b is made of a light-transmitting resin material. This is because if the player can visually confirm the arrangement of the balls in the second passage CRt2002 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the distribution operation by the distribution member C2170, and can visually confirm that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170, the ball will enter the first winning hole 64 from the outlet COPout with a high probability (in this embodiment, almost all balls enter the fifth passage CRt2005), so it is sufficient that the player does not visually confirm the balls being guided along the fifth passage CRt2005.

The distribution member C2170 is made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

Also, on the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or may be painted or have a sticker attached to it. In other words, the balls passing through the third passage CRt2003 and the distribution member C2170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C2110 has a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms the front side, and a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands upright from the back side of the front portion C111.

The front portion C111 has multiple through holes C111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front portion C111. The lower frame C2086b, in an assembled state (unitized state), is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes C111a to the base plate 60.

In the front portion C111, an outlet COPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1565). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out into the play area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C2180 is disposed opposite the upper surface of the bottom surface portion C112. A cylindrical portion that communicates with the outlet COPout is formed in the bottom surface portion C112, and this cylindrical portion is made part of the fifth passage CRt2005. As a result, no overlapping portion (seam) is formed between the front member C2110 and the second intervening member C180 on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, which improves the appearance when a player peers into the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outlet COPout, and also prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering through the overlapping portion (seam).

The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the erected tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C112 abuts against the front surfaces of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first interposed member C2160. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering.

The dish member C2120 has an upper bottom surface portion C2121 and a lower bottom surface portion C2122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and a side wall portion C2124 that forms the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C2121 is formed as a substantially straight passage extending in the front-to-rear direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from above, and is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the receiving opening COP2000in (arrow direction).

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 extends in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 1577 (b)).

The side wall portion C2124 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (first passage CRt2001), the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 intersects with the upper bottom surface portion C2121 at approximately 90 degrees, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow R) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow F).

A notch C124a is formed in the side wall C2124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped lower bottom surface C2122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is curved in an arc shape, and the ball flows down from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the upwardly inclined side (one end side of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 in the longitudinal direction), so that the ball that flows down can be made to move back and forth between one end side and the other end side of the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and then the ball can be made to flow down from the cutout portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 has an outflow surface C122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (i.e., the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining that connected state.

In addition, the outflow surface C122a is formed in such a way that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion C124a (see FIG. 1585).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion C124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball abuts on the lower side wall portion C2124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface C2122, there is a risk that a ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) without ever reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) or before it has reciprocated a sufficient number of times due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. In other words, there is a risk that the leading ball and the trailing ball will not decrease the distance between them and the two balls will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining a gap between them.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed with a downward inclination in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (the direction of the arrow L) (see FIG. 1589). As a result, the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 presses the ball against the side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a, and the ball can be made to roll (reciprocate) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction), see Figures 1577(b) and 1588(b)) has a radius of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction that is smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a). In other words, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is larger.

This makes it easier for the balls to reciprocate and for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity), while making it easier for the leading and trailing balls to maintain a connected state in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls has slowed (the stage where the balls do not reach the one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a). As a result, it is easier for the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining a connected state.

The back member C2130 comprises a main body C2131 formed in a plate shape and an axis support portion C2134 erected from the front of the main body C2131.

The main body C2131 is provided with an opening C2131a for connecting the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) formed on the front and back sides of the main body C2131, and an opening C2131c for avoiding interference with the distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). Below the opening C2131a, a recess C2131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C2131. The recess C2131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt2005 between the opposing side and the detour member C2200.

The shaft support seat C2134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170. The shaft C2174 is supported by the shaft support seat C2134 and the shaft support seat C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a position along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-shaped main body C2141, a bottom surface C2142 erected from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C2141, a top surface C2143, a passage portion C2144, and a lower stopper portion C2145, and is disposed on the left side of the rear surface member C2130 when viewed from the front.

The main body C2141 is formed with an opening C2141a that connects the passages (third passage CRt2003 and sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front and back sides of the main body C2141. In addition, an axis support seat C2141b is erected from the back of the main body C2141. The axis support seat C2141b is formed as an axis support (bearing) that rotatably supports the axis C2174 of the distribution member C2170.

When the first intermediate member C2140 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tips (in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 abut against the front surface of the rear member C2130. As a result, a second passage CRt2002 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (main body portion C2141, bottom surface portion C2142, and top surface portion C2143), and a third passage CRt2003 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C2130, the first intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142 and passage portion C2144), and the sorting member C2170 in the second position (see FIG. 1590).

The bottom surface portion C2142 is inclined downward from the dish member C2120 side toward the sorting member C2170 side. The passage portion C2144 is located between the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position and the opening C2141a, and is formed with a downward incline from the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position toward the opening C2141a side. Therefore, when the passage portion C2144 receives a ball from the sorting member C2170 displaced to the second position, it can cause the ball to flow (roll) into the sixth passage CRt2006 via the opening C2141a.

The bottom surface portion C2142 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced upward, thereby determining the first position of the sorting member C2170 (see FIG. 1589). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced downward, thereby determining the second position of the sorting member C2170 (see FIG. 1590).

When the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (raised) upward. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the bottom portion C2173 is positioned higher (towards the arrow U) than the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom portion C2173 when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position.

The second intermediate member C2150 comprises a plate-shaped main body C2151, a bottom surface C2152 and wall surface C2153, C2154 erected from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C2151, and is disposed to the right of the rear surface member C2130 when viewed from the front, with a predetermined distance between it and the first intermediate member C2140.

In this embodiment, the distance between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 (the distance in the direction of the arrows L-R) is set to a value larger than the dimension obtained by adding at least twice the diameter of the ball to the longitudinal dimension (direction of the arrows L-R) of the receiving member C2500. Therefore, a space through which the ball can pass can be secured on both sides of the longitudinal direction (direction of the arrows L-R) of the receiving member C2500 (both between the first intermediate member C2140 and between the second intermediate member C2150). This increases the variety (variation) of directions in which the ball can flow down, making the game more interesting.

When the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the bottom portion C2152 is positioned so as to be in communication with the opening C2131a of the rear member C2130, and is tilted downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when the bottom portion C2152 receives a ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (a ball that has fallen from the end of the magnetic portion C2400), it can cause the ball to flow (roll) into the opening C2131a. In other words, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom portion C2152.

When the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tips (on the arrow B direction side) of the bottom portion C2152 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 abut against the front surface of the rear member C2130. In addition, the main body portion C2151 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 protrude upward (in the arrow U direction) by a predetermined amount along the edge of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom portion C2152.

The wall portion C2153 located on the side farther from the magnetic portion C2400 forms a surface that intersects with an extension of the direction of movement of the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (the direction along the lower edge (edge that attracts the ball) of the magnetic portion C2400). This allows the ball that is ejected from the fourth passage CRt2004 (that falls from the magnetic portion C2400) to be directly received by the wall portion C2153, or to be received by the wall portion C2153 after bouncing (jumping up) from the bottom portion C2152 and then dropped onto the bottom portion C2152. In this embodiment, the wall portion C2153 is formed to a position higher than the lower edge (edge that attracts the ball) at the end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the magnetic portion C2400.

On the other hand, the protruding dimension from the top surface of the bottom portion C2152 is smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of the wall portion C2154 located closer to the magnetic portion C2400, and the protruding dimension of the main body portion C2151 is smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of the wall portion C2153 located farther from the magnetic portion C2400. This allows the ball to fall from the bottom portion 2152 (fifth passage CRt2005) to the first intervening member C2160 or the second intervening member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), increasing the interest of the game. Note that it is preferable that the protruding dimensions of the wall portion C2154 and the main body portion C2151 are smaller than the diameter of the ball.

The receiving member C2500 has a first bottom surface portion C2501 and a second bottom surface portion C2502 that form the upper surface (rolling surface), and is disposed between the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member 2150, at a position below the magnetic portion C2400 (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, a ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be received by the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 and allowed to flow down (roll) to the first intermediate member C2160.

The first bottom surface portion C2501 is formed with a downward incline from the connection portion with the second bottom surface portion C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 side (arrow L direction), and the second bottom surface portion C2502 is formed with a downward incline from the connection portion with the first bottom surface portion C2501 toward the second intermediate member C2150 side (arrow R direction). In addition, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are inclined downward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back member C2130 side) (see FIG. 1592).

As described above, on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows L-R), a space the size of at least one sphere is formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150.

Therefore, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) can be rolled in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first bottom surface part C2501 or the second bottom surface part C2502, and can flow down to the first interposed member C2160. In this case, the direction in which the ball flows down can be changed depending on the part (first bottom surface part C2501 or second bottom surface part C2502) that receives the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400).

In addition, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be made to roll in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, and then flow down from the downstream end of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 to the first intermediate member C2160. This makes it easier to make the ball roll along the longitudinal direction of the first intermediate member C2160.

In addition, at least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side to the rear side (back member C2130 side) of the receiving member C2500, or may be non-inclined (i.e., horizontal) from the front side to the rear side (back member C2130 side) of the receiving member C2500.

The receiving member C2500 may also be in a form in which a space through which the ball can pass is secured only on one side of its longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) (i.e., a space through which the ball can flow (pass) is formed only between it and either the first intermediate member C2140 or the second intermediate member C2150, and the ball cannot flow (pass) between it and the other). In this case, the longitudinal dimension of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 is secured, and the rolling time of the ball can be increased accordingly. This can increase the interest of the game.

The first intermediate member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface that allows the balls flowing down from the receiving member C2500 to flow down to the second intermediate member C2180, and is interposed between the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and second intermediate member C2150.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160 is formed with concave surfaces (central outflow surface C2161 and side outflow surface C2162) that are inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) to allow the balls to flow out to the second interposed member C2180. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (placed) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (i.e., the first winning hole 64) of the second interposed member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 1565) from the central outflow surface C2161. In addition, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160, and the side outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and the central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulations.

The side outflow surface C2162 is formed (placed) at a different position toward the outside (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1565) of the game board 13 with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 can be made to flow down to the outside of the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180 (i.e., the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 that slopes downward toward the side outflow surface C182). Therefore, such balls can be made to roll easily along the longitudinal direction of the second intervening member C2180. As a result, an opportunity is created for the ball to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 of the second intervening member C2180 (i.e., to enter (win) the first winning hole 64), which can increase the interest of the game.

The distribution member C2170 includes a main body C2171 on which the shaft C2174 is supported, a receiving portion C2172 formed on one side of the main body C2171, a rolling portion C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C2171, and a brass weight C2175 disposed (attached) to the main body C2171 at a position opposite the receiving portion C2172 across the shaft C2174, and is rotatable around the shaft C2174 (shaft support seat portions C2134, C2141b).

The distribution member C2170 has its center of gravity eccentric to the other side (the side where the weight C2175 is disposed, i.e., the side opposite the receiving portion C21720 across the axis C2174, the right side of FIG. 1589) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the distribution member C2170 is in a state where the receiving portion C2172 side is raised (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 in a front view) and the rotation is restricted by the bottom portion C2142 (disposed in the first position) (see FIG. 1589).

On the other hand, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C2172 of the distributing member C2170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be offset to one side (the side where the receiving portion C2172 is formed, i.e., the side opposite the weight C2175 with respect to the axis C2174, the left side of FIG. 1590) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). Therefore, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C2172, the receiving portion C2172 side of the distributing member C2170 is lowered (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C2174 in a front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C2145 (disposed in the second position) (see FIG. 1590).

After the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, when the balls are discharged (flow out) from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140, the sorting member C2170 is returned to the first position by the action of its own weight (eccentricity from the axis C2174 of the center of gravity).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position is performed by the weight (mass) of the distribution member C2170 itself, so the structure can be simplified compared to, for example, a case in which a biasing spring is provided and the biasing spring biases the distribution member C2170 toward the first position.

In addition, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement (returning operation) of the sorting member C2170 to the first position can be slowed down, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling part C2173. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for the sorting member C2170 to be displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling part C2173 after it starts to displace (rotate) from the second position toward the first position. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility for a third ball, which is further behind the trailing ball CB2, to reach the rolling part C2173 (see Figures 1593 to 1595).

The receiving portion C2172 has an opposing portion C2172a formed at a position facing the second passage CRt2002 in the first position, and a bottom surface portion C2172b that supports the received ball in the first position and forms a rolling surface for rolling the ball toward the passage portion C2144 in the second position.

When the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the facing portion C2172a is approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom surface portion C2172b is inclined upward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 1589).

When the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, if the opposing portion C2172a is inclined in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the rolling portion C2173 side of the opposing portion C2172a is inclined in a direction away from the second passage CRt2002 more than the bottom surface portion C2172b side), there is a risk that a ball that collides with the opposing portion C2172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the second passage CRt2002.

In contrast, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, the opposing portion C2172a is oriented approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, so that the balls received from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 are received by the opposing portion C2172a, preventing them from flowing back into the third passage CRt2003.

In addition, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned at the first position, if the bottom surface C2172b is formed to slope downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface C2142 (passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140, the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 will flow out into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 prematurely, and the weight of the balls will not be utilized, which may prevent the sorting member C2170 from reaching the second position.

In contrast, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed so as to incline upward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the sorting member C2170 is disposed in the first position, so that the balls can be held on the bottom surface portion C2172b at least until the sorting member C2170 rotates a predetermined amount from the first position. This makes it possible to delay the time until the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 flow out into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140. As a result, the weight of the balls can be effectively utilized to ensure that the sorting member C2170 reaches the second position.

In this case, in this embodiment, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the angle of the upward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the base end side (right side of FIG. 1589, arrow R direction side) connected to the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the upward inclination of the tip side (left side of FIG. 1589, arrow L direction side) opposite the opposing portion C2172a. In other words, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position, the angle of the downward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the tip side (left side of FIG. 1589) opposite the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the downward inclination of the base end side (right side of FIG. 1589) connected to the opposing portion C2172a.

Therefore, in the initial stage when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upward inclination in the area on the base end side (right side of Figure 1589) of the bottom surface C2172b is utilized to ensure that the ball is held in the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface C2172b), while in the later stage, the downward inclination in the area on the tip end side (left side of Figure 1589) of the bottom surface C2172b is utilized to smoothly deliver the ball into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003).

For the reasons mentioned above (preventing backflow into the second passage CRt2002), the opposing portion C2172a may be inclined in a direction such that the rolling portion C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom surface portion C2172b side.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C2172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 1590). This allows the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 to flow reliably into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.

In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the weight of the ball acts on the distribution member C2170, making it easier to maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position (i.e., a state in which the trailing ball can be guided to the rolling portion C2173 (fourth passage CRt4)).

The rolling portion C2173 is formed in an area on the opposite side of the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface portion 2172b) across the axis C2174. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position due to the weight of the balls received by the receiving portion C2172, the rolling portion C2173 is formed in an area that includes at least an area that is raised upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with the rotation. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling portion C2173 is lifted upward, and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is shortened. This makes it easier for the balls rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, if the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position and the rolling portion C2173 is formed only on the opposite side of the axis C2174 in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction), when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the force of the fall may cause the sorting member C2170 to rotate towards the first position. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling portion C2173 is lowered and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is increased, which may cause the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to not jump to (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400.

In contrast, the rolling portion C2173 is formed over a range (area) that overlaps vertically with the axis C2174 when the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position (see FIG. 1590). That is, the area on the upstream side (second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling portion C2173 is located to one side in the horizontal direction (the direction of arrow L) of the axis C2174, and the weight of the balls rolling on that upstream side can be made to act as a force in a direction that maintains the sorting member C2170 in the second position.

Therefore, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the momentum of the fall are used to apply an inertial force to the sorting member C2170 in a direction to maintain the state in the second position, and while the sorting member C2170 is attempting to displace (rotate) in a direction to maintain the state in the second position due to the action of that inertial force, the ball can be made to roll to the area downstream of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

The extension length (length in the direction in which the ball is guided) of the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 is set to a dimension greater than the extension length of the rolling portion C2173. This makes it easier to create a state in which, while a ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, another ball is simultaneously rolling on the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172. In other words, while a ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, the weight of another ball can be applied to the distribution member C2170 on the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172.

This makes it possible to prevent the weight of the ball from displacing the sorting member C2170 from the second position toward the first position (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 being displaced downward) when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173. As a result, it becomes easier for the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In particular, the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (in a direction perpendicular to the axis C2174), so that as the ball rolls on the bottom surface C2172b, the distance between the point of application of the force (the position where the weight of the ball acts) and the fulcrum (center of rotation) can be made larger (increased). In other words, as the ball rolls on the bottom surface C2172b, it becomes easier to maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position (the force required to displace (rotate) the distribution member C2170 arranged in the second position to the first position can be increased).

This makes it possible to prevent the weight of the ball from displacing the sorting member C2170 from the second position toward the first position (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 being displaced downward) when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173. As a result, it becomes easier for the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

Here, the sorting member C2170 is configured so that the direction in which the balls roll from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) towards the receiving portion C2172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the balls, arrow R direction) is opposite to the direction in which the balls roll in the receiving portion C2172 (the direction in which the received balls are made to roll, arrow L direction). In other words, the sorting member C2170 is configured to reverse (change direction) the flow (rolling) direction of the balls in the receiving portion C2172.

As a result, compared to when the direction in which the receiving section C2172 receives the balls and the direction in which the balls roll in the receiving section C2172 are the same, the time the balls remain in the sorting member C2170 (receiving section C2172) can be secured for the time required for reversal, and the weight of the balls remaining in the receiving section C2172 can be utilized to easily maintain the sorting member C2170 in the second position. As a result, the balls can be stably rolled in the rolling section C2173.

The rolling portion C2173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004), and is positioned (installed) between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) when the distribution member C2170 is disposed in the second position.

As described above, the rolling part C2173 has its upper surface (rolling surface) displaced (raised and lowered) in the vertical direction (arrows U-D) by displacing (rotating) the sorting member C2170 between the first position and the second position. This allows the rolling part C2173 to be positioned below the magnetic part C2400.

As a result, by placing the sorting member C2170 in the second position and displacing (raising) the rolling portion C2173 upward, it is possible to bring it closer to the magnetic portion C2400 and make it easier to attract the balls against the action of gravity, while by placing the sorting member C2170 in the first position and displacing (raising) the rolling portion C2173 downward, it is possible to move it away from the magnetic portion C2400 and reliably form a state in which the balls are not attracted, also utilizing the action of gravity.

The connecting portion between the upstream end (the end on the side of the arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173 and the opposing portion C2172a of the receiving portion C2172 is formed in an acute protrusion shape that protrudes toward the upstream side (the first intermediate member C2140 (second passage CRt2002) side, in the direction of the arrow L). By inserting this protrusion-shaped portion between ball CB1 and ball CB2, the two balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

When the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the height position of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling part C2173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the height position of the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface part C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140. That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling part C2173, and when the sorting member C170 arranged in the second position is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle) toward the first position, the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 are arranged at the same height position.

When a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving portion C2172, the weight of the ball displaces (rotates) the sorting member C2170 downward from the first position, and the lower surface of the sorting member C2170 abuts against the lower stopper portion C2145, thereby positioning the sorting member C2170 at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C2170 will be bounced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145. If the upward bounce of the distribution member C2170 causes the height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) to be positioned vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140, there is a risk that the balls will not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 into the rolling portion C2173.

In particular, if a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) that has been bounced upward, and the impact of the ball's collision causes the sorting member C2170 to be bounced further upward (if the ball pushes the sorting member C2170 further upward), there is a risk that the ball will flow into (be received by) the receiving portion C2172, even though it should have flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173.

In contrast, when the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, as described above, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface), so even if the sorting member C2170 is bounced upward by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 can be prevented from being positioned vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 by the step between them. In other words, the sorting member C2170 can be allowed to be bounced upward by the step between them. Therefore, it is possible to easily allow the ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) to flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) into the rolling portion C2173.

As in the case of the 62nd embodiment, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C2140, the face on the direction of the arrow L) may be inclined downward from the rolling portion C2173 toward the first intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142). In other words, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173 may have a cross-sectional shape in which the edge portion on the receiving portion C2172 (opposing portion C2172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C2140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C2173.

As a result, when a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) that has been bounced upward, the direction of the force acting from the ball on the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) can be set to a force in the direction of pushing the sorting member C2170 downward. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173 (a trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount) to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) into the rolling portion C2173.

The magnetic part C2400 is a long metal plate-like body, and is capable of attracting a ball by utilizing the magnetic force exerted by the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. Note that multiple magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C2400.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, a ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173. The ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400. That is, the ball is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 (the ridgeline formed by the intersection of the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) and the lower surface (surface in the direction of arrow D)) (see FIG. 1596). The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 by the momentum of the ball due to the jump (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the speed of the ball when it jumps from the rolling part C2173 of the sorting member C2170 to the magnetic part C2400, the position of the ball, the rotation state of the ball, etc.), an unstable state can be created in which there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400 (the ball may not reach the end). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In particular, the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the distribution member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, which can increase the interest of the game. In other words, the balls distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 are only balls (trailing ball CB2) that flow (roll) down the second passage CRt2002 when the distance between them and the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount (i.e., when connected to the preceding ball CB1), and the possibility of such a trailing ball B2 occurring is relatively low. By displacing the ball (trailing ball B2) that reaches the distribution member C2170 through such a low possibility in an unstable state where there is a possibility of it falling (possibility of it not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005), the player is made to expect that it will pass through safely, which can increase the interest of the game.

The thickness dimension of the magnetic part C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (6% of the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment). Therefore, when the outer surface point CP1 of the sphere is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400, the outer surface point CP2, which is located lower than the position CP1, is abutted against the front surface of the main body part C2131. In this case, since the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front surface of the main body part C2131 than the outer surface point CP2, the weight of the sphere (gravity acting on the center of gravity) acts as a force in a direction that presses the outer surface point CP2 against the front surface of the main body part 2131 with the outer surface point CP1 as the fulcrum (i.e., a force that rotates the sphere rightward (clockwise) around the outer surface point CP1 in FIG. 1596) (see FIG. 1596).

As a result, when a ball is attracted to the magnetic part C2400, the ball can be supported at two points, outer surface point CP1 and outer surface point CP2, and as a result, the movement of the ball along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic part C2400 can be stabilized. In addition, the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front surface of the main body part 2131 can be used to slow down the movement of the ball. This also stabilizes the movement of the ball, and increases the time it takes to pass through the fourth passage CRt2004, increasing the interest of the player who hopes that the ball will reach the fifth passage CRt2005 without falling.

In this way, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C2400 are arranged on either side of the main body part c2131 of the back member C2130, and the ball is moved (slid) along the magnetic part C2400, making it easy to adjust the attraction force and optimize the frictional force, while forming a path for the ball with a simple structure.

The second intervening member C2180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the front member C2110 and the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and first intervening member C2160. In other words, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed by the spaces partitioned by the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, the first intervening member C2160, and the second intervening member C2180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 is formed with a concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and lateral outflow surface C182) that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided through the second intervening member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed with undulations, with the lateral outflow surface C182 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface C181 located at the top of the undulations.

The upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion C111 of the front member C2110 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180, except for the areas where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. In other words, a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180 flows out (flows down) into the play area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C2180, and as described above, a portion of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110.

The detour member C2200 includes a plate-shaped main body C2201, a wall portion C2202 erected from the front surface (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the main body C2201, and a gutter portion C2203 formed by further extending a portion of the wall portion C2202 toward the front surface, and is disposed on the rear surface side of the rear surface member C2130 at a position opposite the opening C2131a.

When the detour member C2200 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall portion C2202 abuts against the rear face of the rear member C2130 (main body portion C2131), and the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the gutter portion C2203 abuts against the rear face of the second interposed member C2180, and the edge of the gutter portion C2203 abuts against the bottom face of the first interposed member C2160.

As a result, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C2130 (main body portion C2131) and the detour member C2200 (main body portion C2201 and wall portion C2202), and the space partitioned between the first intervening member C2160 and the detour member C2200 (gutter portion C2203) (see Figures 1591 and 1592).

The gutter portion C2203 is inclined downward from the rear member C2130 side toward the second intermediate member C2180 side. Therefore, the ball that flows into the detour member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the rear member C2130 can be made to roll on the gutter portion C2203 and flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 formed between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second intermediate member C2180 (recess C183).

Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170 will be described. Figures 1593 to 1595 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in Figure 1585. Figure 1596 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line MDXCVI-MDXCVI in Figure 1595(b).

Note that Fig. 1593(a) and Fig. 1593(b) show the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, and correspond to Fig. 1589. Fig. 1595(a) and Fig. 1595(b) show the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the second position, and correspond to Fig. 1590.

As shown in FIG. 1593(a), when the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C2172 is positioned in a position capable of receiving (allowing the flow of) the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140.

That is, the receiving portion C2172 has an opposing portion C2172a disposed at a position intersecting an extension line of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface), and a bottom portion C2172b disposed at a position vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the extension line of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface).

When the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L, the connection portion between the rolling portion C2173 and the opposing portion C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass).

On the other hand, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is positioned in a position that cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in).

That is, the bottom surface portion C2172b of the rolling portion C2173 is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the extension line of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) (one step higher). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C2173 and the extension line of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the top surface C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173 is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass). This allows the ball to jump over the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position.

In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is located on the opposite side of the axis C2174 from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction), and is tilted downward in the direction away from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) (arrow R direction).

Therefore, even if a ball climbs over the step and flows into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position, the ball can be prevented from rotating the sorting member C2170 toward the second position (i.e., the rolling portion C2173 can be lifted upward), and the ball can be allowed to fall toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) along the downward slope of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, the ball that climbs over the step can be prevented from jumping onto (being attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (reaching the fifth passage CRt2005).

However, the magnetic portion C2400 may be disposed in a position where a ball that has overcome the step can jump onto (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400. In other words, when the gap between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small and ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1 and overcomes ball CB1, the magnetic portion C2400 may be disposed in a position where ball CB2 can jump onto (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400. Since ball CB2 is a ball that should normally be sorted into the fourth passage CRt2004, it is possible to prevent such a ball from falling toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) and thereby prevent it from being disadvantageous to the player.

When ball CB1 (a leading ball) and ball CB2 (a trailing ball spaced a predetermined distance from the leading ball) roll on the bottom surface C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, as shown in FIG. 1593(b), ball CB1 flows into (is received by) the receiving portion C2172 of the sorting member C2170, and ball CB1 abuts (is received by) the opposing portion C2172a and is held in the receiving portion C2172.

Also, if the distance between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, ball CB2 will catch up with ball CB1 and come into contact with ball CB1. This allows ball CB2 to wait behind (upstream of) ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 1593(b), when ball CB1 is received by receiving portion C2172, the weight of ball CB1 displaces (rotates) sorting member C2170 from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 1594(a). Also, when ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1, the weight of ball CB2 is also applied to sorting member C2170.

Here, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the area of the opposing portion C2172a that is connected to the bottom portion C2172b and the area of the bottom portion C2172b that is connected to the opposing portion C2172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C2172a and the bottom portion C2172b, are curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C2174 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

In addition, the gap between the sorting member C2170 (the area on the upstream side (arrow R direction) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the downstream side (arrow R direction) of the bottom surface portion C2142) is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position, and is gradually enlarged as the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position.

That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 1594(a) and FIG. 1594(b)), the gap between the above-mentioned sorting member C2170 (the area on the upstream side (arrow R direction) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the downstream side (arrow R direction) of the bottom surface portion C2142) is expanded to a dimension approximately equal to the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass), and when the sorting member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position, the above-mentioned gap is further expanded, and the maximum gap is formed at the second position.

Therefore, while the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. In other words, the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) with the ball CB1 received in the receiving portion C2172 between the first position and the predetermined intermediate position. This allows the ball CB2 to remain in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 to be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142.

In this case, the distance between the downstream end (end on the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end on the direction of arrow L, the connection portion with the opposing portion C2172a) of the rolling portion C2173 is gradually reduced as the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) before the sorting member C2170 reaches a predetermined intermediate position. This prevents the ball CB2 from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C2172.

In addition, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side, connecting part with the opposing part C2172a) of the rolling part C2173 is configured to pass closer to the axis C2174 than the outer edge (outer edge opposite the axis C2174) of the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving part C2172 (connecting part between the opposing part C2172a and the bottom part C2172b).

Therefore, the ball CB2 can be maintained in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 can be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142, while the ball CB2 can be pushed back by the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the direction of the arrow L, the connecting portion with the opposing portion C2172a). In other words, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 can be inserted between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 to separate the two balls. This makes it possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C2172. In addition, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled into the rolling portion C2173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the sorting member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 1594(a) toward the second position, as shown in FIG. 1594(b), the ball CB1 rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b toward the passage portion C2144, and the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C2173 (is received by the rolling portion C2173).

As shown in Figures 1595(a) and 1595(b), when the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003), and the ball CB2 that rolls in the rolling portion C2173 jumps to (is attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.

After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the distributing member C2170 returns (displaces) from the second position toward the first position due to its own weight.

When the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, or even after the sorting member C2170 starts to move (rotate) from the second position to the first position, if the third ball reaches the rolling portion C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C2173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173. In this case, depending on whether the ball CB1 is on the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface portion C2172b) or the rolling speed (momentum) of the third ball, it is determined whether the ball CB1 falls to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) or jumps (is attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004. In other words, two states can be formed.

The distribution member C2170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position by the weight of only one ball. Therefore, when the distance between ball CB1 and ball CB2 is greater than a predetermined amount, both balls CB1 and CB2 are received in turn by the receiving portion C2172, and are distributed to the third passage CRt2003 through the distribution operation described above.

As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b in the 63rd embodiment, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance of less than a predetermined amount, ball CB1 is sorted (guided) to the third passage CRt2003, and ball CB2 is lifted upward by the sorting member C2170 displaced to the second position by the weight of ball CB1, and sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt2004. On the other hand, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be sorted (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. In this way, the guided passage can be changed depending on the state of the line of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), which can improve the interest.

Next, the center frame C3086 in the 64th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1597 to 1600.

In the 62nd embodiment, the distribution member C170 is rotated, but in the 63rd embodiment, the distribution member C3170 is slidably displaced. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Figures 1597 and 1599 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C3086b in the 64th embodiment, and Figures 1598 and 1600 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. Note that Figures 1597 and 1598 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged in a first position, and Figures 1599 and 1600 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged in a second position. Also, Figures 1597 and 1599 correspond to a cross section taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in Figure 1570.

The lower frame C3086b in the 64th embodiment is configured identically to the lower frame C86b in the 62nd embodiment, except for the structure for displacing the distribution member C3170 and the structure for linking the decorative member C3190 to the distribution member C3170.

As shown in Figures 1597 to 1600, two linear guide grooves C3131c are provided in the main body C131 of the back member C3130, extending in the vertical direction in a parallel orientation. These two guide grooves C3131c are arranged in an orientation that inclines in the direction closer to the first intermediate member C140 as they move downward (toward the direction of arrow D).

In other words, the horizontal position (arrow L-R direction) of the sorting member C3170 in the second position is located closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the sorting member C3170 in the first position.

The distribution member C3170 has a total of four shafts C3171a, one pair above the other, protruding from the back surface of the main body C3171. The shafts C3171a are guided parts that are slidably inserted into the guide grooves C3131c, and the shafts C3171a slide along the guide grooves C3131c, causing the distribution member C3170 to slide (linearly move) between the first position and the second position.

A pair of shafts C3171a are disposed in each of the left and right guide grooves C3131c. Therefore, the distribution member C3170 can slide between the first position and the second position without causing a change in posture due to rotation (i.e., while maintaining a constant inclination angle of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173).

A collar CW having a diameter larger than the width of the guide groove C3131c is provided at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and this collar CW acts as a stopper to prevent the shaft C3171a from slipping out of the guide groove C3131c.

The distribution member C3170 is defined (placed) in a first position by the shaft c3171a abutting against the upper end (end in the direction of the arrow U) of the guide groove C3131c, restricting upward displacement (see Figs. 1597 and 1598), and is defined (placed) in a second position by the lower stopper portion C132 abutting against the lower surface of the distribution member C3170, restricting downward displacement (see Figs. 1599 and 1600).

The decorative member C3190 is formed integrally with the main body C191 and has an arm C3193 that extends radially outward around the axis C192. A linear guide groove C3193a extends radially around the axis C192 on the arm C3193. The axis C3171a is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3193a.

The decorative member C3190 has its center of gravity eccentric to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C3170 across the axis C192, the left side of FIG. 1598) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the decorative member C3190 is in a position in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotating counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, see FIG. 1598), and the distribution member C3170 is in a state in which it is disposed in the first position by the axis C3171a being pushed upward by the arm portion C3193 (see FIGS. 1597 and 1598).

On the other hand, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the sorting member C3170 and the decorative member C3190 as a whole to be offset to the other side (the side where the sorting member C3170 is arranged with respect to the axis C192, the right side in FIG. 1600) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). In other words, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball causes the sorting member C3170 to descend along the guide groove C3131c and to be positioned in the second position. Also, the decorative member C3190 has its arm portion C3193 pushed downward by the axis C3171a, and is rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in rear view (see FIG. 1600).

When a ball is bowled from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 in the second position, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, taking advantage of the eccentricity of its center of gravity, and the arm portion C3193 is raised upward. As a result, the axis C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, and the distribution member C3170 is positioned (returned) to the first position (see Figures 1597 and 1598).

The sorting operation of balls CB1 and CB2 by the sliding displacement of sorting member C3170 between the first position and the second position is the same as in the 62nd embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b in the 64th embodiment, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance of less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the distance between the two balls is 0), ball CB1 is sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4, and ball CB2 is sorted (guided) to the fifth passage CRt5 by the sorting member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of ball CB1. On the other hand, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the guided passage can be changed depending on the state of the line of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), which can improve the interest.

Here, in a structure in which the sorting member C170 rotates around the axis C192, as in the case of the 62nd embodiment, in order to ensure the amount of displacement of the receiving portion C172 (enabling it to displace between the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the position facing the fourth passage CRt4), it is necessary to increase the length (distance) between the axis C192 and the receiving portion C172, which results in an increase in the size of the sorting member C170 in the width direction (the direction connecting the axis C192 and the receiving portion C172).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sorting member C3170 is displaced by sliding in the vertical direction, so the amount of displacement of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (i.e., it can be displaced between a position facing the third passage CRt3 and a position facing the fourth passage CRt4), while the sorting member C3170 can be made smaller in the width direction because there is no need to provide a part connecting the center of rotation (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172. In other words, the width dimension of the sorting member C3170 can be the length dimension of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173 (the dimension in the direction of the arrows L-R).

Next, referring to FIG. 1601, the plate member C4120 in the 65th embodiment will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1601(a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 in the 65th embodiment, Figure 1601(b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line MDCIb-MDCIb in Figure 1601(a), and Figure 1601(c) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line MDCIc-MDCIc in Figure 1601(a).

The dish member C4120 has an upper bottom surface portion C4121 and a lower bottom surface portion C4122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C4123 and a lower side wall portion C4124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C4121 extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially straight passage (first passage CRt4001) when viewed from above, and is formed with a downward incline in the direction approaching the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (arrow R direction).

The upper side wall portion C4123 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can be guided only in series. However, the passage width may be a dimension that allows multiple balls to be guided in parallel (a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the ball).

A notch C4123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C4123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) through this notch C4123a.

The lower bottom surface portion C4122 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) when viewed from above, and is formed of straight line portions C4122a that are approximately straight at one end and the other end in the extension direction, and arc portion C4122b that is curved in an arc shape with a concave outflow surface C122a side between the pair of straight line portions C4122a when viewed from above. Note that the arc portion C4122b is shaped to protrude most toward the upstream side (arrow L direction) of the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at approximately the center in the front-rear direction.

The cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed as a plane that slopes downward vertically (arrow D direction) toward the arc portion C4122b in the pair of straight line portions C4122a, and is formed approximately horizontally in the arc portion C4122b. In other words, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction.

The lower side wall portion C4124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The straight portion C4122a of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is disposed approximately perpendicular to the upper bottom surface portion C4121 when viewed from above, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (the end on the arrow R direction side) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the end on the arrow B direction side, the upward sloping side of the straight portion C4122a).

At the position corresponding to the cutout portion C4123a in the upper side wall portion C4123, the lower side wall portion C4124 is not formed, and as described above, the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) via the cutout portion C4123a.

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C4124 on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the side toward the center of the arc in a top view, the side in the direction of arrow R) at approximately the center in the front-to-rear direction of the arc portion C4122b (the position where the curved shape protrudes most in the direction of arrow L), and balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see Figure 1574) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed from a pair of straight portions C4122a and arc portions C4122b, and the ball flows down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the upwardly inclined side of the straight portion C4122a (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122). The ball that flows down can then be reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), and then the ball can flow down from the cutout portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 1574).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 at a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (i.e., approximately in the center in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the arc portion C4122b (the position that protrudes most in the direction of the arrow L of the curved shape). The outflow surface C122a is a portion that allows the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see Figure 1574).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), balls with a reduced gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining that connected state (see FIG. 1574).

In addition, the outflow surface C122a is formed in such a way that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion C124a.

In addition, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side, arrow L direction side) of the cutout portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) rolls at the position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (the position where the lateral apex of the ball abuts on the lower side wall portion C4124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to the range overlapping with the center of the ball in top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface C4122, the ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002) may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) without ever reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002) or before it has reciprocated a sufficient number of times due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. In other words, there is a risk that the leading ball and the trailing ball will not decrease the distance between them and the two balls will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) while still spaced apart.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is curved in an arc shape, and a notch portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc when viewed from above, the direction of arrow R). Therefore, a centrifugal force is applied to the ball rolling on the arc portion C4122b toward the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball can be rolled (reciprocated) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while being pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a.

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 1574) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make the ball easily overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball easily move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are connected).

Next, the lower frame C5086b in the 66th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1602(a). Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1602(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C5086b in the 66th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII in Figure 1587. Note that Figure 1602(a) only shows cross sections of the back member C2130, magnet C2300, and magnetic part C5400 of the lower frame C5086b.

The magnetic part C5400 is a long metal body, and a protrusion is provided on the end opposite the back member C2130 (the side in the direction of arrow F) that protrudes vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). Therefore, the cross section of the magnetic part C5400 is formed into a substantially L-shape. The protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed such that the end on the back member C2130 side is located at a distance greater than the radius of a sphere from the front of the back member C2130, and the cross section of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is formed into a straight line in the width direction (the direction of arrows F-B).

The magnetic part C5400 is capable of attracting the ball by utilizing the magnetic force exerted by the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. Note that multiple magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C5400.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 (see FIG. 1595). That is, the ball is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400. The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C5400 is moved to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400 by the momentum of the ball due to the jump (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C5400. This allows the ball that flows down along the magnetic portion C5400 to be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 1590).

As described above, the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed at a position where the end on the back member C2130 side is located at a distance from the front of the back member C2130 that is greater than the radius of the ball, so that the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C5400 is prevented from coming into contact with the back member C2130. This prevents frictional forces from acting on the ball, and increases the speed at which the ball flows down. In addition, because the ball is not supported on the front of the back member C2130, it is possible to form a state in which the ball wobbles as it flows down, and to increase the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005). As a result, the player is drawn to the behavior of the ball, and the interest of the game is increased.

Next, the lower frame C6086b in the 67th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1602(b). Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1602(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the 67th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII in Figure 1587. Note that Figure 1602(b) only shows cross sections of the back member C2130, magnet C2300, and magnetic part C6400 of the lower frame C6086b.

The magnetic part C6400 in the 67th embodiment is different from the magnetic part C5400 in the 66th embodiment in that the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (i.e., a surface that is closer to the back member C2130 the further upward in the vertical direction), but the other configurations are the same as the magnetic part C5400 in the 66th embodiment.

The ball attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic section C6400 comes into contact with the back member C2130 due to the inclination of the bottom surface and the effect of the magnetic force directly applied by the magnet section C2300. This allows a frictional force to act on the ball, slowing down the speed at which the ball flows down along the magnetic section C6400. This allows the travel time of the ball to be extended, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the ball can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130, preventing the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C6400.

Next, the center frame D86 in the 68th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1603 to 1615.

In each of the above embodiments, the center frame 86 is described as being composed of one part, but in the 68th embodiment, the center frame D86 is composed of two members, an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1603 is a front view of the game board D13 in the 68th embodiment. As shown in Figure 1603, the center frame D86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 1517) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b.

The upper frame D86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1603) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 1603) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1517) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame D86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1603) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame D86a and the lower frame D86b.

The upper frame D86a is configured by omitting a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (the portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in Figure 1603) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, i.e., the portion where the lower frame D86b is arranged), and the other portions except for the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments.

Next, the lower frame D86b will be described. Fig. 1604 is a front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and Fig. 1605 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. Note that Figs. 1604 and 1605 only partially illustrate a portion of the base plate 60, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame D86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 1604 and 1605, the lower frame D86b has an receiving port DOPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage DRt1 connected to the receiving port DOPin, a second passage DRt2 through which the ball guided through the first passage DRt1 flows down, a third passage DRt3 through which the ball guided through the second passage DRt2 (a ball that has reciprocated through the second passage DRt2 in its longitudinal direction (arrow F-B direction)) flows down, and a third passage DRt4 through which the ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (a ball that has reciprocated through the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction) flows down. The ball (which has reciprocated along the direction of the arrows L-R) is sorted into the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5, and the sixth passage DRt6 according to the position where it flows down from the third passage DRt3, the seventh passage DRt7 where the ball guided along the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows down, the eighth passage DRt8 where the ball guided along the sixth passage DRt6 flows down, and the outflow outlet DOPout formed as an opening for the ball guided along the eighth passage DRt8 to flow out to the play area (see Figures 1612 to 1614).

The sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 are connected to each other by the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8, forming a single passage. That is, the upstream part (first half) of the passage is formed by the sixth passage DRt6, and the downstream part (second half) of the passage is formed by the eighth passage DRt8.

In addition, an upper frame passage DRt0 (see FIG. 1603) is formed in the upper frame D86a. The upper frame passage DRt0 is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of FIG. 1603) (the area between the center frame D86 (upper frame D86a) and the rail 61), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 is connected to the receiving port DOPin of the lower frame D86b.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage DRt0 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage DRt0 through the receiving opening DOPin into the first passage DRt1 of the lower frame D86b.

The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined by opposing side walls (side wall portion D142 of intermediate member D140 and side wall portion D132 of back member D130) spaced a predetermined distance apart, and one of the side walls defining the passage width (side wall portion D132 of back member D130) is partially divided (side wall is not formed), and a flow-down port DOPfl through which the balls can flow down is opened at a position adjacent to the divided area in a top view.

The ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (the ball that moves back and forth through the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows L-R)) can flow down (enter) either the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5 or the sixth passage DRt6 via the flow-down port DOPfl.

The flow-down opening DOPfl is formed as a generally rectangular space (opening) when viewed from above, which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 (the direction of arrow B) and extends along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. The flow-down opening DOPfl is defined by the main body portion D131 and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130.

In the downflow port DOPfl, the upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4, the sixth passage DRt6, and the fifth passage DRt5 are arranged in sequence along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. That is, the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 is located in the longitudinal center of the downflow port DOPfl, and the upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 are located on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) and the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the downflow port DOPfl, respectively, with the upstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 in between.

Therefore, a ball that reciprocates along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction and flows down into an area including the longitudinal center of the downflow port DOPfl (arrow L-R direction) flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, and a ball that flows down into an area including one longitudinal side (arrow L side) or the other longitudinal side (arrow R side) of the downflow port DOPfl flows into (enters) the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. In other words, whether a ball guided through the third passage DRt3 is assigned to either the fourth passage DRt4 or the sixth passage DRt6 is determined according to the position (area) into which it flows down from the third passage DRt3.

Here, the ball guided down the sixth passage DRt6 flows down (into) the eighth passage DRt8, and the outlet DOPout, which is the outlet of the eighth passage DRt8 (the opening that allows the ball to flow out into the play area), is formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1603). Therefore, the balls sorted into the sixth passage DRt6 are more likely to win at the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning opening 64).

On the other hand, when the ball is guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5, it flows down (flows into) the seventh passage DRt7. In the seventh passage DRt7, a central outflow surface D151 is formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side) to allow the ball guided through the seventh passage DRt7 to flow out into the play area. In addition, side outflow surfaces D152 are formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 1603) from the vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed on the seventh passage DRt7, with side outflow surfaces D152 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface D151 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, a ball allocated to the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface D162 into the play area in the seventh passage DRt7 than from the central outlet surface D161 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball allocated to the sixth passage DRt6 described above).

In this way, the lower frame D86b in this embodiment can make it easier for a ball reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction to enter the first winning hole 64 by being diverted to the sixth passage DRt6 (in this embodiment, the ball is almost guaranteed to enter the first winning hole 64). Therefore, when the ball reciprocates along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction, the player is made to expect that the ball will be diverted to the sixth passage DRt6 in order to increase the probability of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a winning opportunity), and this can increase the interest of the game.

In the lower frame D86b in this embodiment, a pair of displacement members D180 are disposed at the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 so as to be openable and closable (displaceable between a closed position and an open position). The pair of displacement members D180 are disposed such that the base ends are rotatably supported and the tip ends opposite the base ends are disposed on the upper side (the side indicated by the arrow U), and the tip ends are displaced (rotated) in a direction approaching or separating from each other around the base ends as a rotation axis, thereby displacing (rotating) between the closed position and the open position.

The pair of displacement members D180 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl, and balls that flow (enter) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6, and balls that do not flow (enter) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 flow (enter) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

The distance between the tips of the pair of displacement members D180 is larger in the open position than in the closed position, and when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position, the area in which the ball can flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 is enlarged and the area in which the ball can flow (enter) the fourth and fifth passages DRt4, DRt5 is reduced compared to when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the closed position. In other words, the proportion of the distance between the tips of the pair of displacement members D180 to the distance (dimension) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl is larger in the open position than in the closed position. Therefore, when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the open position, it is easier for balls to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 compared to when they are in the closed position.

In this case, as described below, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position using the weight (mass) of the ball. Specifically, a rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and while a ball is rolling on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the open position, and while no ball is present on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the closed position.

In this way, in the lower frame D86b of this embodiment, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position (making it easier for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6), thereby making it easier for a ball following the ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (for example, a ball reciprocating in the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, a subsequent ball) to enter the sixth passage DRt6.

Therefore, if the first ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position, creating a state in which the following second ball is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6, and if the following second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the following third ball (the third ball following the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6 due to the entry of the following second ball into the sixth passage DRt6 (due to the displacement of the displacement members D180 to the open position using the weight of the second ball), and these modes can be repeated thereafter. Therefore, the entry of a ball into the sixth passage DRt6 can make the player look forward to the occurrence of a chain reaction of balls entering the sixth passage DRt6. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position, the minimum opposing distance is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (for example, 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere), and when displaced (rotated) to the open position, the opposing distance at the tip side is set to approximately three times the diameter of the sphere.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame D86b will be described with reference to Figures 1604 to 1605 as well as Figures 1606 to 1615.

Figure 1606 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and Figure 1607 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. Figure 1608 is a top view of the lower frame D86b, Figure 1609 is a front view of the lower frame D86b, and Figure 1610 is a rear view of the lower frame D86b.

Figure 1611(a) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXIa in Figure 1609, and Figure 1611(b) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXIb in Figure 1609.

Figures 1612(a), 1613(a) and 1614(a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D86b, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in Figure 1608. Figures 1612(b), 1613(b) and 1614(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D86b.

Note that Figures 1612(a) and 1612(b) show a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figures 1614(a) and 1614(b) show a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

Furthermore, Figures 1613(a) and 1613(b) show the state during the displacement when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).

In addition, in Figures 1613(a) and 1614(a), the balls rolling on the rolling member D170 are omitted, and in Figures 1612(b), 1613(b), and 1614(b), the detour member D200 is shown in a removed state.

Figure 1615(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line MDCXVa-MDCXVa in Figure 1608, Figure 1615(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line MDCXVb-MDCXVb in Figure 1608, and Figure 1615(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in Figure 1612.

As shown in Figures 1604 to 1615, the lower frame D86b comprises a front member D110, a dish member D120 disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front member D110, a back member D130 disposed opposite the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the front member D110 at a predetermined distance, an intermediate member D140 disposed between the opposing front member D110 and the back member D130 and disposed opposite the back surface of the front member D110 and the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the back member D130 at a predetermined distance, and an intermediate member D140 disposed between the opposing front member D110 and the intermediate member D140. The support member D210 includes a first intermediate member D150 disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the rear member D130, a second intermediate member D160 disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the rear member D130, a rolling member D170 and a displacement member D180 disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the rear member D130, a transmission member D190 and a detour member D200 disposed on the rear side of the rear member D130, and a support member D210 displaceably disposed (rotatably supported) on the rear member D130, with the displacement member D180 fixed to one side (arrow F direction side) and the other side (arrow B side) capable of contacting the transmission member D190.

The rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 are disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the back member D130 in a displaceable (rotatable) manner, and the transmission member D190 is disposed on the back side of the back member D130 in a displaceable (rotatable) manner.

The lower frame D86b is configured as a single unit by fastening each component to the other components with tapping screws, and the rolling component D170, the displacement component D180, and the transmission component D190 are each displaceably disposed (rotatably supported) on the back component D130 (see FIG. 1604).

In addition, the lower frame D86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and the ball can be seen through) except for the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190, and the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to see the ball passing through the first passage DRt1 to the eighth passage DRt8, and also allows the player to see the opening and closing operation (opening and closing state) of the displacement member D180, which increases the fun of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that the lower frame D86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material in the member located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of at least one of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170. Alternatively, only a part of the front side of at least one of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. If the displacement member D180 can be seen, the player can understand whether the ball is likely to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 based on its open/closed state. Even if the displacement member D180 is not visible, if the rolling member D170 can be seen, the player can understand the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 based on the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the position that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball), which can increase the interest of the game.

Therefore, it is preferable to construct the rolling member D170 from a colored resin material, because this allows the player to easily visually recognize the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the position that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball).

The rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

On the other hand, the lower frame D86b may be configured so that the components located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the displacement member D180 or rolling member D170 are made of a light-impermeable resin material (or are painted or have a sticker attached) so that the displacement member D180 or rolling member D170 is not visible to the player from the front side.

The front member D110 includes a plate-shaped front portion D111 that forms the front, a plate-shaped bottom portion D112 that stands upright from the back surface of the front portion D111, and a connecting portion D113 that is disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front portion D111 and the bottom portion D112.

The front portion D111 has multiple insertion holes D111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction side) and the lateral side (arrow L direction side) of the front portion D111. In the assembled state (unitized state), the lower frame D86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the insertion holes D111a to the base plate 60.

In the front portion D111, an outlet DOPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1603). As described above, the outlet DOPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flows out into the play area.

The bottom surface of the bottom surface portion D112 is disposed opposite the bottom surface of the first intervening member D150, and a portion (the most downstream portion) of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the bottom surface portion D112 and the first intervening member D150 (recess D153). Therefore, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced, for example, compared to a case in which a through hole formed through the first intervening member D150 is used as part of the eighth passage DRt8.

The bottom surface portion D112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal area of the front surface portion D111, and the erected tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion D112 abuts over the entire area against the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the bottom surface portion D144 of the intermediate member D140. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D86b.

The bottom surface portion D112 has a larger erection dimension from the front surface portion D111 of the portion that defines the eighth passage DRt8 than the erection dimension of the other portions of the bottom surface portion D112, and the erection tip of the portion of the bottom surface portion D112 that defines the eighth passage DRt8 abuts against the front surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

A dish member D120 is disposed on the upper surface side (the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the connecting portion D113 and is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw.

The dish member D120 has an receiving opening DOPin, an upper bottom surface portion D121 and a lower bottom surface portion D122 that form the bottom surface of the passage that guides the balls received from the receiving opening DOPin, and an upper side wall portion D123 and a lower side wall portion D124 that form the side walls of the passage.

As described above, the receiving port DOPin is an opening that receives balls from the upper frame passage DRt0 of the upper frame D86a (see FIG. 1603). When the center frame D86 is attached (disposed) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame D86a is placed on the front surface of the front portion D111 and the connecting portion D113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. This connects the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 to the receiving port DOPin.

The upper bottom surface portion D121 is formed as a substantially straight passage extending in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) when viewed from above, and is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the receiving port DOPin (arrow B direction). The upper bottom surface portion D121 is located vertically lower (arrow D direction) than the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0, and a vertical step is formed between it and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0. In other words, the dish member D120 is configured to allow balls to freely fall from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121.

A groove D121a with a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the width direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (see FIG. 1577). The groove D121a extends linearly in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The groove width (dimension in the arrow L-R direction) of the groove D121a is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension in the arrow U-D direction) of the groove D121a is set to a depth such that the ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove D121a.

This allows the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 to be supported at two points (a pair of ridges where the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the groove D121a intersect). Therefore, compared to when the groove D121a is not formed (i.e., when the ball is supported at only one point), the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased. This cushions (accepts) the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage DRt0, and increases the resistance when the ball rolls.

As described above, by dropping a ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 onto the upper bottom surface portion D121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 at two points, when two balls flow (drop) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) with a specified distance between them, the flow down of the leading ball is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), making it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. This makes it possible to reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball.

The upper side wall portion D123 is a wall portion that separates the downstream end (arrow B direction side) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) from the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), and is formed as a plate-like body erected in the vertical direction (arrow F-B direction). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

A notch D123a is formed in the upper side wall portion D123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) through this notch D123a.

The lower bottom surface portion D122 extends in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) and the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow D) (see FIG. 1614).

The lower bottom surface portion D122 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the portion where the notch portion D123a is formed), and a vertical step is formed between the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121. In other words, the dish member D120 is configured to allow balls to freely fall from the upper bottom surface portion D121 to the lower bottom surface portion D122.

The lower side wall portion D124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided, the direction of the arrow F-B) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, and preferably smaller than a dimension 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom surface portion D121, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end (end portion on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (end portion on the side in the direction of arrow B).

At the position corresponding to the cutout portion D123a in the upper side wall portion D123, the lower side wall portion D124 is not formed, and as described above, the balls can flow (fall) from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) through the cutout portion D123a.

A notch D124a is formed in the lower side wall D124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface D122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface D122 (second passage DRt2) to the first intervening member D150 (third passage DRt3) through this notch D124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is curved in an arc shape, and the balls flow down from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to one of the upwardly inclined sides (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122), so that the balls that flow down can be made to reciprocate between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), and then the balls can be made to flow down from the cutout portion D124a to the first intervening member D150 (third passage DRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The lower bottom surface portion D122 has an outflow surface D122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion D124a (i.e., the lowest vertical position). The outflow surface D122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) to flow out to the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion D122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface D122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3) while maintaining that connected state.

In addition, the outflow surface D122a is formed in such a shape that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion D124a (see FIG. 1608).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion D124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion D124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface D122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion D124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion D124), the outflow surface D122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion D122, crosses the outflow surface D122a).

In this embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom surface portion D122 in a plane perpendicular to its extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and parallel to the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed into a linear shape parallel to the horizontal direction (arrow F-B direction). However, as in the above-mentioned embodiment (see FIG. 1577), the lower bottom surface portion D122 may be inclined downward in a direction away from the cutout portion D124a (arrow L direction).

The outflow surface D122a is formed at a position biased toward (close to) one end (in this embodiment, toward the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121, in the direction of arrow B) rather than the center in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the direction of arrow F-B) (see FIG. 1614).

In this case, the height position in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 is the same at one end side in the longitudinal direction (end side in the direction of arrow B) and the other end side (end side in the direction of arrow F), and the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion D122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction)) is made larger in curvature between the one end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow B direction) and the outflow surface D122a than in curvature between the other end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a. In other words, the radius between the one end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow B direction) and the outflow surface D122a is made smaller than the radius between the other end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a.

This makes it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the region between the other longitudinal end side (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a, and also makes it easier for the leading ball and trailing ball to form a connected state by softening the collision when they catch up (i.e., by preventing the gap between the two balls from widening due to the impact when the trailing ball collides with the leading ball). As a result, it becomes easier for the two balls to flow out (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3) while connected together.

The dish member D120 is disposed in such a position that the extension direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) is aligned along the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B), and is disposed within the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, so that the space in the front-to-rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. This ensures the full length of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), making it easier to string the balls together.

The back member D130 includes a main body D131 formed in a plate shape, a side wall D132 formed in a plate shape that is located closer to the front side (the direction of arrow F) than the main body D131 and is arranged in a parallel posture to the main body D131, a connecting portion D133 that connects the main body D131 and the side wall D132, and a partition wall D134 that stands upright from the back of the main body D131.

The main body D131 is formed with a support portion D131a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a support hole D131b that supports the shaft D211 of the support member D210, an insertion hole D131c through which the body D192 of the transmission member D190 is inserted, openings D131d and D131e that allow a ball to pass through, and a protrusion D131f that can come into contact with the ball.

The pivot support portion D131a is formed as a bearing on the front surface (surface on the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion D131, and a pivot support portion D141a is formed on the rear surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the pivot support portion D131a. The rolling member D170 has ends of the shaft D171 protruding from one side surface and the other side surface in the width direction (front-rear direction, arrow F-B direction). The shaft D171 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and both ends of the shaft D171 are supported by the pivot support portion D131a of the rear member D130 and the pivot support portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, respectively. This allows the rolling member D170 to be rotatably disposed between the opposing rear member D130 and intermediate member D140.

The shaft support hole D131b is formed as a hole penetrating the main body D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction), and a shaft support portion D141b is formed on the back surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the shaft support hole D131b. The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is inserted in order through the shaft support hole D131b of the main body D131 and the shaft hole of the displacement member D180 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and one end of the shaft D211 protruding from one side surface of the displacement member D180 (intermediate member D140 side) is supported by the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140. This allows the displacement member D180 to be rotatably disposed between the opposing back member D130 and intermediate member D140.

The insertion hole D131c is formed penetrating the main body D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) and is formed as an opening (hole) of a size that allows rotation of the trunk D192 of the transmission member D190. The transmission member D190 has ends of a shaft D191 protruding from one end face and the other end face in the axial direction (front-back direction, arrow F-B direction) of the trunk D192, and both ends of the shaft D191 are journaled by the journal support portion D141c of the intermediate member D140 and the journal support portion D201 of the detour member D200, respectively. As a result, the transmission member D190 is rotatably disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the detour member D200, on the back side of the back member D130.

Openings D131d and D131e are formed as openings (holes) large enough to allow a ball to pass through, penetrating the main body D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction). In other words, they are formed as openings to connect the passages (fifth passage DRt5 and eighth passage DRt8) formed on the front side and back side of the main body D131. Openings D131d and D131e are set to a size that allows only one ball to pass through (two balls cannot pass through at the same time).

Here, the sixth passage DRt6 is formed on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the intermediate member D140), and the eighth passage DRt8 is formed on the upstream side (first half) on the rear side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the detour member D200) and on the downstream side (second half) on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (inside the intermediate member D140, facing the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

Therefore, the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131d, and the upstream side (first half) and downstream side (second half) of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131e. That is, the ball flowing down (guided) the sixth passage DRt6 passes through the opening D131d, moves from the front side to the back side of the back member D130 (main body part D131), and flows into the eighth passage DRt8. Also, the ball flowing down (guided) the upstream side (first half) of the eighth passage DRt8 passes through the opening D131e, moves from the back side to the front side of the back member D130 (main body part D131), and flows into the downstream side (second half) of the eighth passage DRt8.

The protrusions D131f are formed as ridges (long, thin protrusions) that protrude from the front surface (surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the main body D131 and extend linearly along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and are arranged at multiple locations (five locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (equally spaced in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the balls in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170) (see FIG. 1615(c)). The protruding dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusions D131f are the same along the extension direction (vertical direction).

The lower end (the end on the side in the direction of arrow D) of protrusion D131f is set at a position where the distance between the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 arranged in the second position is smaller than the radius of the ball when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1614). Therefore, even when the rolling member D170 is arranged in the second position, the ball and protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other.

In addition, the upper end (end on the direction of arrow U) of protrusion D131f is set at a position where the distance between the upper surface of main body D172 of rolling member D170 arranged in the initial position (first position) and the upper end (end on the direction of arrow U) is greater than the diameter of the ball when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1612). Therefore, even if the ball bounces up (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface of rolling member D170 (main body D172) arranged in the second position, the ball and protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other.

In this embodiment, the spacing between the multiple protrusions D131f (spacing in the direction of the arrows L-R) is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the ball. In addition, the multiple protrusions D131f are arranged at different positions along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 relative to the multiple protrusions D141g protruding from the back surface of the intermediate member D140 (main body part D141). That is, the protrusions D131f of the back surface member D130 and the protrusions D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 (see FIG. 1615(c)). This allows the ball rolling in the sixth passage DRt6 to be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as a means for acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and this action applies resistance to the ball, slowing down the ball's speed. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170), and therefore makes it easier (longer) to maintain (lengthen) the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

The protruding tip of the protrusion D131f is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the protrusion D131f may also be substantially rectangular. The protrusion D131f may also have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), or may have a shape that includes at least a portion of a curved shape extending to have an arc-like curve.

When the protrusion D131f is formed into a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), it is preferable to incline the upper side (in the direction of the arrow U) of the ball's rolling surface (the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in a direction that is located upstream (in the direction of the arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because, when a ball bounces up from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D131f, a force component is applied to the ball in a direction that pushes the ball back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (upstream), making it easier to delay the ball.

The side wall portion D132 is disposed at a height position where its upper edge (the side in the direction of the arrow U) is higher (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160, and defines the passage width of the third passage DRt3 together with the side wall portion D142 of the intermediate member D140.

The partition wall D134, together with the main body D131 and the detour member D200, defines the eighth passage DRt8. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite the main body D131, and the area defined by the partition wall D134 between them defines the eighth passage DRt8. The area defined by the partition wall D134 is formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from the rear (as viewed in the direction of arrow F), with an opening D131d at one end in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow L) and an opening D131e at the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow R), and is inclined downward from one end in the longitudinal direction to the other end.

The intermediate member D140 includes a main body portion D141 formed in a plate shape, a side wall portion D142 formed in a plate shape and positioned closer to the front side (the direction of arrow F) than the main body portion D141 and arranged in a parallel posture to the main body portion D141, a connecting portion D143 connecting the main body portion D141 and the side wall portion D142, a bottom surface portion D144 erected from the front side of the main body portion D141, and partition walls (fourth passage partition wall D145L, fifth passage partition wall D145R, sixth passage partition wall D146, eighth passage partition wall D147) erected from the back side of the main body portion D141.

The main body D141 is formed with a support portion D141a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a support portion D141b that supports the shaft D211 of the support member D210, a support portion D141c that supports the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190, openings D141d, D141e, and D141f that allow the ball to pass through, and a protrusion D141g that can come into contact with the ball.

The pivot support parts D141a, D141b, and D141c are formed as bearings on the rear surface (the surface on the direction of arrow B) of the main body part D141, and as described above, are formed at positions facing the pivot support part D131a of the rear member D130, the pivot support hole D131b, and the pivot support part D201 of the detour member D200.

That is, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170 is supported by the shaft support portion D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is supported by the shaft support hole D131b of the back member D130 and the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140, and the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190 is supported by the shaft support portion D141c of the intermediate member D140 and the shaft support portion D201 of the detour member D200. The shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and the transmission member D190 are all disposed with their axial directions aligned with the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

Openings D141d, D141e, and D141f are openings (holes) large enough to allow a ball to pass through, and are formed by penetrating the main body D141 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction).

The openings D141d and D141e are formed as outlets of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5, respectively (openings that allow the balls to flow into the seventh passage DRt7), and are formed above the upper surface (the ball rolling surface) of the first intermediate member D150. That is, the balls guided through the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 flow out (down) into the seventh passage DRt7 via the openings D141d and D141e.

The opening D141f is formed as a communication port (opening) that connects the downstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the back side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) with the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the front side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141). In other words, the opening D141d is formed as part of the passage (eighth passage DRt8) that penetrates the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

The protrusions D141g are formed as ridges (long, thin protrusions) that protrude from the back surface (surface on the side facing the direction of arrow B) of the main body D141 and extend linearly along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and are arranged at multiple locations (six locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (equally spaced in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the balls in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170) (see FIG. 1615(c)). The protruding dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusions D141g are the same along the extension direction (vertical direction).

In this embodiment, the spacing between the multiple protrusions D141g (spacing in the direction of the arrows L-R) is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the ball. In addition, the multiple protrusions D141g are arranged at different positions along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6, relative to the multiple protrusions D131f protruding from the front of the back member D130 (main body part D131). That is, the protrusions D131f of the back member D130 and the protrusions D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 (see FIG. 1615(c)). This allows the ball rolling in the sixth passage DRt6 to be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as a means for acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and this action applies resistance to the ball, slowing down the ball's speed. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170), and therefore makes it easier (longer) to maintain (longer) the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

In this embodiment, the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between the front of the main body D131 of the back member D130 and the back of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140 is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of a sphere, and the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between an imaginary surface (flat surface) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D131f and an imaginary surface (flat surface) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D141g is set to a dimension approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the diameter of the sphere. However, the facing distance between the two imaginary surfaces may be set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The protruding tip of the protrusion D141g is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the protrusion D141g may also be substantially rectangular. The protrusion D141g may also have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), or may have a shape that includes at least a portion of a curved shape extending to have an arc-like curve.

When the protrusion D141g is formed into a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), it is preferable to incline the upper side (in the direction of the arrow U) of the ball's rolling surface (the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in a direction that is located upstream (in the direction of the arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because, when a ball bounces up from the rolling surface and collides with the protrusion D141g, a force component is applied to the ball in a direction that pushes the ball back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (upstream), making it easier to delay the ball.

The side wall portion D142 is disposed at a height position where its upper edge (the side in the direction of the arrow U) is higher (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160, and as described above, defines the passage width of the third passage DRt3 together with the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130.

The connecting portion D143 connects the lower edge (arrow D direction side) of the side wall portion D142 to the upper edge (arrow U direction side) of the main body portion D141 continuously over the entire longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), and the second intermediate member D160 is disposed on the upper surface side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion D143.

The connecting portion D143 faces the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R of the intermediate member D140 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), and the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 are respectively formed between them. In other words, the connecting portion D143 forms the upper surfaces (upper inner surfaces) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5.

The bottom surface portion D144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in the area excluding the opening D141f, and the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the bottom surface portion D144 abuts against the erected tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110. In other words, the bottom surface portion D144 is formed divided in the area where the opening D141f is opened and in the area nearby.

In the area where the bottom surface portion D144 is divided (the area including the opening D141f), as described above, the erected tip of the portion of the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110 that defines the eighth passage DRt8 abuts against the front surface of the main body portion D141 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) and the left and right lateral sides (arrow L direction side and arrow R direction side) of the opening D141f.

The fourth passage partition wall D145L, together with the main body D141 and the main body D131 and connecting portion D133 of the back member D130, partitions the fourth passage DRt4, and forms a portion (rolling portion) whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball, and a portion (vertical wall portion) whose inner wall surface receives the ball rolling on the rolling portion (rolling surface) and determines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, the fourth passage partition wall D145L has a rolling portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the rolling portion is arranged at a position where one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) overlaps with the downflow port DOPfl when viewed from above (a position where it can receive (catch) a ball that has entered (flowed down) into the downflow port DOPfl), and is inclined downward toward the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side), and extends to a position where the other longitudinal end side overlaps with the lower edge of the opening D141d, and a vertical wall portion that runs along the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) is connected to the extended end (other longitudinal end).

In addition, a portion of the fourth passage partition wall D145L (the area overlapping with the opening D141d) on the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) is also inclined downward toward the opening D141d, so that a ball that reaches the other longitudinal end of the fourth passage partition wall D145L (rolling surface) can roll toward the opening D141d.

Therefore, the ball that enters the fourth passage DRt4 from the downflow port DOPfl is received (caught) at one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and rolls on the fourth passage partition wall D145L toward the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side). The ball that reaches the other longitudinal end abuts (is caught) against the vertical wall portion connected to the other longitudinal end, and after its rolling is restricted, it flows out (flows down) into the seventh passage DRt7 (first intervening member D150) through the opening D141d.

The fifth passage partition wall D145R, together with the main body D141 and the main body D131 and connecting portion D133 of the back member D130, partitions the fifth passage DRt5, and forms a portion (rolling portion) whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball, and a portion (vertical wall portion) whose inner wall surface receives the ball rolling on the rolling portion (rolling surface) and determines the end point of the ball's rolling.

The fifth passage partition wall D145R is formed symmetrically with respect to the fourth passage partition wall D145L with the displacement member D180 at the center when viewed from the front, and its configuration and function are substantially the same as those of the fourth passage partition wall D145L described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The sixth passage partition wall D146, together with the main body D141, the fourth passage partition wall D145L, the main body D131 of the back member D130, and the rolling member D170, partitions the sixth passage DRt6, and forms a part (rolling part) whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball, and a part (vertical wall part) whose inner wall surface receives the ball rolling on the rolling part (rolling surface) and determines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, the sixth passage partition wall D146 is provided in parallel with one longitudinal end side of the rolling member D170 (the side in the direction of arrow L, on the extension of the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170) and has a rolling portion formed to be able to receive the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and a vertical wall portion connected to the end of the rolling surface (the side opposite the rolling member D170) and formed along the up-down direction (the direction of arrows U-D).

The sixth passage partition wall D146 has an upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion that is inclined downward toward the opening D141f, allowing the ball received from the rolling member D170 to roll toward the opening D141f.

Therefore, the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 from the downflow port DOPfl and rolls on the rolling member D170, is received by the rolling portion (rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, abuts (is received) against the vertical wall portion connected to the end of the rolling portion, and after its rolling is restricted, it flows out (flows down) into the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D141f.

The eighth passage partition wall D147 is a section that partitions a part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140), and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a roughly rectangular (frame-like) cross section, and connects the opening D141f to the opening D131e of the back member D130. That is, the ball that flows out from the opening D131e of the back member D130 flows into the passage (space) partitioned by the eighth passage partition wall D147, flows down (rolls) through the passage (space), and then flows out from the opening D141f and into the remainder of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

The first intervening member D150 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the seventh passage DRt7, and is interposed between the opposing front member D110 and intermediate member D140. That is, the seventh passage DRt7 is formed by the space partitioned between the front member D110, the intermediate member D140, and the first intervening member D150. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 is curved in a circular arc that is convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, and the balls that flow down from the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d) or the fifth passage DRt5 (opening D141e) can reciprocate along the curve.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 has a concave surface (central outflow surface D151 and lateral outflow surface D152) that slopes downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) to allow the ball guided through the first intervening member D150 (seventh passage DRt7) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the seventh passage DRt7 has undulations, with the lateral outflow surface D152 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface D151 located at the top of the undulations.

The upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion D111 of the front member D110 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150, except for the areas where the central outflow surface D151 and the lateral outflow surface D152 are formed. In other words, a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 flows out (flows down) into the play area only from the central outflow surface D151 or the lateral outflow surface D152.

A recess D153 is formed in the bottom surface of the first intermediate member D150, and as described above, a portion of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the recess D153 and the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110.

The second intervening member D160 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the third passage DRt3, and is interposed between the opposing back member D130 and intermediate member D140. That is, the third passage DRt3 is formed by the space partitioned between the back member D130, the intermediate member D140, and the second intervening member D160. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 is curved in a circular arc that is convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, allowing the balls that flow down from the second passage DRt2 to reciprocate along the curve.

In this embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member D160 is lowest at a position corresponding to the center (opposing space between a pair of displacement members D180) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl, and is formed so that the height position increases toward one or the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side or arrow R direction side) of the second interposed member D160 (third passage DRt3).

That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intermediate member D160 is formed with an upward inclination from a position corresponding to the opposing space of the pair of displacement members D180 toward one or the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrow L or the direction of arrow R). Therefore, the ball can reciprocate along the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrows L-R) of the third passage DRt3.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intermediate member D160 is formed (recessed) with concave surfaces (central outflow surface D161 and lateral outflow surfaces D162) that are inclined downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) to allow the balls to flow out of the second intermediate member D160 (third passage DRt3) to the outflow port DOPfl.

The central outflow surface D161 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the center (opposing space of a pair of displacement members D180) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl. On the other hand, the lateral outflow surface D162 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closed position) toward one or the other end of the second intervening member D160 (third passage DRt3) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closer to the center of the opposing space than the tip of the displacement member D180) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

Therefore, when the displacement member D180 is positioned in the closed position, a ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter the space between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6), and a ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

On the other hand, when the displacement member D180 is positioned in the open position, both the ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl and the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6).

In this embodiment, the longitudinal dimension (arrow L-R direction) of the flow-down port DOPfl is set to a dimension that allows the ball to flow down (enter) the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position.

That is, a gap (distance) larger than the diameter of the ball is secured (formed) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the flow-down port DOPfl between the tip of the displacement member D180 arranged in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 when viewed from above. This makes it possible for the ball to flow down (enter) not only the sixth passage DRt6, but also the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5, even when the displacement member D180 is arranged in the open position. This can increase the interest of the game.

However, the longitudinal dimension (in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the outflow port DOPfl may be set to a dimension that prevents the ball from flowing down (entering) at least one of the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position.

In other words, the gap (distance) between the tip of the displacement member D180 placed in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 may be smaller than the diameter of the ball when viewed from above (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass). This allows the ball to flow (enter) only into the sixth passage DRt6 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

When viewed from above, the central outflow surface D161 has a concave extension length (dimension in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating through the third passage DRt3 (arrow F-B direction)) that is greater than the extension length of the lateral outflow surface D162 (concave). Also, when viewed from above, the central outflow surface D161 has a concave width (dimension in a direction parallel to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating through the third passage DRt3 (arrow L-R direction)) that is greater than the width of the lateral outflow surface D162 (concave).

Therefore, even if the number of central outflow surfaces D161 (one location) is less than the number of lateral outflow surfaces D162 (two locations), the probability that the ball reciprocating through the third passage DRt3 will flow down (enter) from the central outflow surface D161 to the outflow port DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6) can be ensured.

The extension length and width of the concave surface may be set to be the same for the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162. Also, contrary to this embodiment, the extension length of the central outflow surface D161 (concave surface) may be set to be shorter than the extension length of the side outflow surface D162 (concave surface). In these cases, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, it becomes difficult for the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 to flow down (enter) the downflow port DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6), and the advantage of placing the displacement member D180 in the open position can be relatively pronounced.

In addition, the formation of at least one or both of the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162 (recesses in the upper surface of the second intervening member D160) may be omitted. The position at which the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 flows down to the outflow port DOPfl is made uniform along the longitudinal direction of the outflow port DOPfl (the direction of the arrows L-R), thereby increasing the randomness of which passage the ball will flow down (enter) among the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5, and the sixth passage DRt6.

The rolling member D170 includes an axis D171, a long plate-shaped main body D172 with the axis D171 disposed at one end in the longitudinal direction, a transmission part D173 disposed at the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 (the side opposite to the side where the axis D171 is disposed), and a weight part D174 disposed on the opposite side of the transmission part D173 (main body D172) across the axis D171, and is disposed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140 so as to be rotatable about the axis D171.

As described above, the shaft D171 is disposed in a position that is aligned along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) about the shaft D171, the main body D172 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The main body portion D172 is a portion whose upper surface forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is juxtaposed to the rolling portion (the part whose upper surface serves as the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, and the other longitudinal end side (the side opposite the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) is arranged in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 in a top view (a position that can receive (catch) a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180).

Whether the main body D172 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end side of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (the side in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The axis D171 is embedded inside the main body D172, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed up to a position beyond the axis D171. That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (the arrow U direction side) and then rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a flat surface on the transmission part D173 side, with the boundary being a position above the axis D171 (the side in the direction of the arrow U), and is formed as a curved surface centered on the axis D171 on the weight part D174 side. In other words, the shape of the upper surface of the main body D172 cut by a plane perpendicular to the axis D171 is a straight line on the transmission part D173 side, and an arc shape concentric with the axis D171 on the weight part D174 side (see FIG. 1612).

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a flat surface on the side closer to the transmission part D173 than the shaft D171, so that the ball rolling in that area can be prevented from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, the main body D172 can be prevented from being displaced upward by the action of the weight part D174 as the ball bounces upward.

The upper surface of the main body portion D172 does not need to be a straight line in cross section; it is sufficient if no steps are formed, and it may be formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball (a cross-sectional shape in which curves or curves and straight lines are smoothly connected, for example, a sine wave (sine curve) shape).

Here, a configuration is also conceivable in which the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is made to roll (flow) into the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 before reaching the axis D171. However, in such a configuration, the ball is thrown from the upper surface of the main body D172 in a state in which the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the action of the weight of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 (the state before the rolling member D170 (main body D172) returns to the initial position (first position)). Therefore, the rolling member D170 is affected by the inertial force accompanying the ball being thrown (the effect of the weight of the ball being momentarily no longer acting) and flutters. If the rolling member D170 flutters, the opening and closing state of the displacement member D180 becomes unstable, leading to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball rolling on the top surface of the main body part D172 rolls beyond a position above the axis D171 (in the direction of the arrow U), so the effect of the weight of the ball rolling on the top surface of the main body part D172 is suppressed, and the ball can be thrown from the top surface of the main body part D172 with the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170 returned to its initial position (first position). Therefore, even if the rolling member D170 is affected by the inertial force associated with the ball being thrown (the effect of the weight of the ball being momentarily no longer acting), fluttering can be suppressed. As a result, the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 is stabilized, improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, as described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a curved surface with the weight D174 side centered on the axis D171, with the boundary being a position above the axis D171 (arrow U direction). Therefore, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (arrow U direction), the weight of the ball does not act on the upper surface of the main body D172. That is, in this embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is an area on the transmission part D173 side from the position above the axis D171 (arrow U direction), and the area on the weight D174 side from the position above the axis D171 does not function as a rolling surface.

The transmission part D173 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the other longitudinal end side of the main body part D172 toward the opposite side to the shaft D171 (the arrow R direction side). The extended tip side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission part D173 is disposed above (arrow U direction side) the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 (disposed in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) around the axis D171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface and the transmission part D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed down) downward by the transmission part D173, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191 (see Figures 1612 to 1614).

The weight portion D174 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the rolling member D170, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D172 toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D172 (the direction of the arrow L), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D170 (main body D172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D174 rather than the axis D171. As a result, by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D174 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D171), the rolling member D170 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight.

In other words, when the rolling member D170 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the main body portion D172), the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D171 when viewed from the front), and are placed in and maintained in the initial position (first position). This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D170 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

On the other hand, when a ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D172 (the opposite side of the axis D171 from the weight D174). As a result, the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D171 when viewed from the front), and the rolling member D170 is positioned in the second position.

The first position (initial position) of the rolling member D170 is determined by the end face of one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) of the main body part D172 abutting against the sixth passage partition wall D146 (end face opposite the vertical wall part of the rolling part) of the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the main body part D172 against the sixth passage partition wall D146, the upward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D171) of the main body part D172 and the transmission part D173 is restricted, and the rolling member D170 is disposed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 1612).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D170 is determined by the upper surface of the weight portion D174 abutting against the sixth passage partition wall D146 (the lower surface of the rolling portion) of the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the weight portion D174 against the sixth passage partition wall D146, the downward displacement (clockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D171) of the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is restricted, and the rolling member D170 is positioned in the second position (see FIG. 1614).

When the rolling member D170 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and when the rolling member D170 is arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D170 (main body D172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D141f (the eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, where the rolling member D170 is rotatably supported around the axis D171, and the angle of downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body D172 relative to the horizontal plane when the ball is rolling (when the weight of the ball is being received) is smaller than the angle of downward inclination when the ball is not rolling (when the weight of the ball is not being received and no load is being applied).

This makes it possible to prevent momentum from being imparted to the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172. This makes it possible to increase (lengthen) the time it takes for the ball to pass over the upper surface of the main body part D172. As a result, the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (main body part D172) is lengthened, making it easier (longer) to maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (a state in which the opposing distance between at least one pair of displacement members D180 is wider than the opposing distance when disposed in the closed position).

In this embodiment, the rolling member D170 is formed so that when the weight of one ball is applied to the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body D172, the weight of the weight portion D174 side and the weight of the main body D172 side are balanced around the axis D171 (the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located on a vertical line passing through the axis D171).

Therefore, when only one ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, and that ball is located on the transmission part D173 side (opposite the axis D171) rather than the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body D172, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (when viewed from the front, they rotate clockwise around the axis D171).

On the other hand, when the ball is located on the axis D171 side (opposite the transmission part D173) from the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body part D172, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) on the weight part D174 side from the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the main body part D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (when viewed from the front, they are rotated counterclockwise around the axis D171).

When two or more balls roll on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 (when the weight of two or more balls is applied to the main body D172), regardless of the rolling position of each ball (the position in the longitudinal direction of the main body D172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 is positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D172 rather than the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (when viewed from the front, they are rotated clockwise around the axis D171).

In this way, by providing a balancing position halfway (in this embodiment, at the center of the longitudinal direction) of the rolling surface (main body portion D172) of the rolling member D170 (in the direction of the arrows L-R), after the ball passes the balancing position, the rolling member D170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. As a result, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position.

When the weight of one ball acts, the position where the weight of the weight portion D174 side and the weight of the main body portion D172 side are balanced around the axis D171 may be on the axis D171 side of the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body portion D172, or may be on the transmission portion D173 side of the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body portion D172.

The displacement member D180 is a member for guiding the ball that has flowed down (entered) from the third passage DRt3 into the downflow port DOPfl toward the sixth passage DRt6, and as described above, is supported by the pivot support member D210 and is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

The shaft support member D210 includes a shaft D211 fixed to the base end side of the displacement member D180, a protruding portion D212 that protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft D211 (radially outward), and a connecting pin D213 that protrudes from the protruding portion D212 in a position parallel to the shaft D211 (in the direction of the arrow F-B) and is connected to the transmission member D190.

As described above, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is supported by the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) and the shaft support hole D131b of the rear member D130 (main body portion D131). The protruding portion D212 is disposed on the rear side of the rear member D130 (main body portion D131), and the connecting pin D213 protrudes toward the rear side (arrow B direction) in a position parallel to the shaft D211.

The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is fixed to the displacement member D180. The connecting pin D213 is positioned differently in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction (radial direction) relative to the shaft D211 (positioned at an eccentric position relative to the shaft D211). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190, the displacement of the connecting pin D213 is converted into the rotation of the shaft D211, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) together with the shaft D211.

The connecting pin D213 is disposed outside the axis D211 (opposite the space in which the pair of displacement members D180 face each other). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of the arrow D), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and when the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed up) upward (in the direction of the arrow U), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the closed position.

The closed and open positions of the displacement member D180 are determined by the outer surface of the base end side of the displacement member D180 abutting against the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R. That is, by abutting the outer surface of the base end side of the displacement member D180 against the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R, the displacement of the pair of displacement members D180 in a direction to bring them closer together (to reduce the opposing distance) or in a direction to move them apart (to increase the opposing distance) is restricted, and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed or open position (see Figures 1612 to 1614).

The displacement member D180 and the axial support member D210 are integrated (unitized) by fixing the axis D211 of the axial support member D210 to the base end side of the displacement member D180.

When the displacement member D180 and the pivot support member D210 are integrated into a part (hereinafter referred to as the "displacement member D180 unit"), at least when the part is placed in the closed position, the center of gravity of the displacement member D180 unit as a whole is located (eccentric) toward the other displacement member D180 unit from the axis D211. In other words, when viewed from the direction of the axis D211 (arrow F-B), the center of gravity is located (eccentric) toward the other displacement member D180 unit from a virtual line passing through the axis D211.

As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is able to maintain its posture in the closed position by utilizing the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D211 (i.e., the eccentricity of the center of gravity acts as a force that rotates the pair of displacement members D180 in a direction that brings them closer to each other).

The transmission member D190 is a member for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 (axial support member D210), and includes a shaft D191, a cylindrical body portion D192 from which the shaft D191 protrudes from an end face on one axial side (arrow F direction side) and an end face on the other axial side (arrow B direction side), a transmitted portion D193 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on one axial side of the body portion D192, and a main body portion D194 and a weight portion D195 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on the other axial side of the body portion D192.

The shaft D191 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (arrows F-B), and as described above, one end of the shaft D191 is supported by the support portion D141c of the intermediate member D140 by inserting the body portion D192 into the insertion hole D131c of the back member D130, and the other end of the shaft D191 is supported by the support portion D201 of the detour member D200.

The transmitted part D193 is a part to which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted from the rolling member D170 (transmitting part D173), and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main body part D131 of the back member D130.

As described above, the extended tip side (arrow L direction side) of the transmitted part D193 is arranged below (arrow D direction side) the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 (arranged at a position overlapping when viewed from above), and when the transmission part D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (arrow D direction), the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed down) downward by the transmission part D173, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191 (see Figures 1612 to 1614).

Here, a predetermined gap is formed in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170, and when the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (descended) downward (arrow D direction), the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170 can come into contact with the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 after filling the predetermined gap. In other words, the rolling member D170 cannot press the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 downward unless it is displaced (descended) enough to fill the gap.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement of the rolling member D170 from being transmitted to the displacement member D180 when the displacement of the rolling member D170 is relatively small. This makes it difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts, such as, for example, hitting the gaming machine to displace (lower) the rolling member D170 or using a foreign object such as a wire to displace (lower) the rolling member D170.

The main body portion D194 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 to the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210, and is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion D131 in the rear member D130.

Grooves D194L and D194R are formed in the main body D194, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is slidably inserted into these grooves D194L and D194R. Thus, when the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted and the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surfaces of the insertion grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190. As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is displaced (rotated), and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open or closed position.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow F-B direction), the groove D194R has a width dimension (dimension in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the connecting pin D213 slides relative to one another) set to a dimension that is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213, and extends linearly along a direction that intersects with an arc centered on the axis D191. Therefore, while the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 inserted in the groove D194R is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow F-B direction), the groove D194L is extended in an arc-shaped curve with its center on the axis D191 side, and the width dimension of the groove at the lower extension end (the end on the arrow D direction side, the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located when the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is in the closed position) is set to a dimension that is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213, and the width dimension of the groove increases toward the upper extension end (the end on the arrow U direction side, the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located when the rolling member D170 is in the second position and the displacement member D180 is in the open position).

In detail, the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194L on the side farther from the axis D191 is shaped along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a shape obtained by dividing a circle centered on the axis D191 at a specified central angle), and the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191 is curved in an arc shape whose distance from the axis D191 increases from the lower extension end (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow D) to the upper extension end (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow U).

In addition, since the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is eccentric with respect to the axis D211, the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 is maximum when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, and decreases as the displacement member D180 is displaced toward the open position. In other words, the more the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the smaller the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 becomes.

Therefore, when the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from a state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (i.e., a state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed up) to the uppermost position (in the direction of the arrow U), see FIG. 1612), the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (is not abutted against) by either of the inner wall surfaces along the extension direction of the groove D194R.

On the other hand, when the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from a state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (i.e., the state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) to the lowest position (in the direction of the arrow D), see FIG. 1614), the connecting pin D213 is acted upon (contacted by) by the inner wall surface that is closer to the axis D191 among the inner wall surfaces along the extension direction of the groove D194L, and is gradually displaced (pushed up) upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by this action.

In this way, when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, even if the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194L, and is not displaced downward (pushed down). Instead, after reaching the upper extension end (end on the side of the arrow U direction) of the groove D194L (see FIG. 1613), it is displaced downward (pushed down) by the inner wall surface at the upper extension end.

This allows the operation modes (displacement modes) of the pair of displacement members D180 to be different from each other. In other words, it is possible to create a state in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin D213 and the upper extended end of the groove D194L (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow U, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 1612).

When the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 begins, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby starting the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L is not displaced downward (is not pushed down) until it reaches the upper extension end of the groove D194L (the extension end on the arrow U direction side, the inner wall surface), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the closed position.

When the transmission member D190 is further displaced (rotated) in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position), the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R continues to be displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position to the open position.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L reaches the upper extended end of the groove D194L (the end on the direction of the arrow U, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 1613), it is displaced (pushed down) downward by the upper extended end (inner wall surface), thereby starting the displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position.

After that, both connecting pins D213 are displaced (pushed down), and the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and when the rolling member D170 reaches the second position, the pair of displacement members D180 are positioned in the open position.

In this way, in this embodiment, the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 start to displace (rotate) from the closed position to the open position can be made different (one can be delayed relative to the other). This allows a change to be made in the open state for a player who is expecting the displacement member D180 to displace to the open position (i.e., the ball flowing (scoring) into the sixth passage DRt6), making the game more interesting.

The weight portion D195 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the transmission member D190, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D194 toward the opposite side of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow R), with a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The weight of the weight portion D195 causes the center of gravity of the transmission member D190 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D195 rather than the axis D191. As a result, the transmission member D190 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (the position where the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, see FIG. 1612) by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D195 (the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D191), and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight (i.e., the displacement member D180 returns to the closed position).

In other words, when the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 is not displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the main body portion D194 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D191 in rear view) and placed in the initial position (the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position) and maintained in the initial position. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the transmission member D190 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

The detour member D200 is formed in a plate shape having an outer shape larger in rear view than the partitioned area by the partition wall D134 of the rear member D130, and is disposed on the erected tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the partition wall D134 to partition the eighth passage DRt8 together with the partition wall D134. In addition, the detour member D200 has a shaft support portion D201 formed in an area that is outward in rear view from the partitioned area by the partition wall D134.

Next, the opening and closing operation of the displacement member D180 will be described with reference to Figures 1612 to 1614 and Figure 1615 (c).

As shown in FIG. 1612, when no balls are flowing (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) from the outflow port DOPfl, the rolling member D170 is positioned in the initial position (first position). Therefore, the transmission member D190 is not acted upon by the rolling member D170, and the displacement member D180 is positioned in the closed position.

In this state, when a ball (not shown) flows (enters) from the downflow port DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180), the ball passes (flows down) between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 and falls onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the other longitudinal end side (opposite the axis D171, in the direction of arrow R) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, and then rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D172 towards one longitudinal end side (the axis D171 side, in the direction of arrow L).

As shown in FIG. 1613, when a ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) toward the second position under the weight of the ball, and as shown in FIG. 1614, when the rolling member D170 is further displaced (rotated) and reaches the second position, a pair of displacement members D180 are positioned in the open position, and the opposing distance between the displacement members D180 is maximized.

The ball (not shown) rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 rolls (flows) from one longitudinal end side (axis D171 side, arrow L side) of the main body D172 into the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, and then rolls (flows) into the eighth passage DRt8 through the opening D131d.

After that, when the balls are no longer present on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 returns to the initial position (first position) by its own weight, and accordingly, the transmission member D190 returns to its initial position by its own weight, and the displacement member D180 is positioned in the closed position (see FIG. 1612).

In this manner, in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is supported rotatably around the axis D171, and a ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 toward the axis D171 side (the direction of the arrow L).

As described above, the rolling member D170 is arranged at the other longitudinal end (the side opposite to the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a position where a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 can be received (catch)).

Therefore, the ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) can be dropped onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170.

Here, for example, in a structure in which the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 is set in a direction away from the axis D171, in the initial stage of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 (main body part D172), the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is close, so until the ball rolls a predetermined distance and the distance from the axis D171 (distance between the point of force and the fulcrum) is secured, it is unable to counter the weight of the weight part D174, and the rolling member D170 cannot be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the ball rolls on the top surface of the main body portion D172, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is secured in the initial stage, and the effect of the weight portion D174 can be reduced, so that the weight of the ball can easily displace (rotate) the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position).

In other words, immediately after the ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180), the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the displacement member D180 can be quickly displaced toward the open position (and placed in the open position).

In particular, since the balls that have flowed into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing pair of displacement members D180) can be dropped directly onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) can be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by utilizing not only the effect of the weight of the balls but also the momentum (kinetic energy) of the falling balls. In this respect, too, the displacement of the displacement member D180 toward the open position (and placement at the open position) can be performed quickly.

As a result, for a player who has witnessed the ball flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180), the displacement member D180 can immediately begin to move to the open position, providing a well-paced presentation.

In addition, when multiple balls roll on the third passage DRt3, if the distance between a first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) and a second ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, a subsequent ball) following the first ball is relatively small, the subsequent second ball can be made to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180).

The direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 is a direction approaching the axis D171, so as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is gradually shortened, and the influence of the weight part D174 can be increased. Therefore, the rolling member D170 can be gradually returned from the second position toward the initial position (first position).

In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member D180 that was in the open position can be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position. This allows the player to focus on whether, for example, when another ball is reciprocating on the third passage DRt3, the other ball will enter (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) in time for the advantageous state in which the displacement members D180 are open (at least a state in which the amount of opening is greater than when the displacement members are in the closed position), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) falls onto the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 can receive the fallen ball on the side of the rolling member D170 that has a larger amount of displacement in the up-down direction (the side farther away from the axis D171) (the side in the direction of the arrows U-D).

Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) as energy for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170, i.e., lifting the weight portion D174 upward. As a result, the ball that has fallen onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 can be prevented from bouncing upward. As a result, the weight of the ball can be stably applied to the rolling member D170, stabilizing the state of the displacement member D180 (for example, preventing the displacement member D180 from being temporarily displaced (rotated) toward the closed position).

In addition, if a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) is dropped onto a member other than the rolling member D170 (a fixed, non-displaceable member, for example, part of the back member D130 or intermediate member D140), this other member is likely to be damaged. However, as described above, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member D170, thereby suppressing damage to the rolling member D170 and the back member D130 and intermediate member D140 that support the rolling member D170 due to the collision of the ball. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased by the amount that the ball can be allowed to fall (the upper limit of the height to which the ball can fall can be made more lenient).

The main body D131 of the back member D130 and the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140, which form the side wall (inner surface) of the sixth passage DRt6, are provided with protrusions D131f and D141g (acting means) that are capable of acting on a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170.

That is, the protrusions D131f, D141g protrude from the main body parts D131, D141, which are arranged facing each other with a specified distance between them, toward the sixth passage DRt6 and extend linearly in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), and are arranged at specified intervals in the direction in which the balls roll in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170).

Therefore, when the ball passes through the sixth passage DRt6, not only when it rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, but also when it moves while floating above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, the protrusions D131f, D141g come into contact with the ball and provide resistance, thereby slowing down the speed of the ball.

As a result, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the displacement member D180 is at least more open than in the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter) can be maintained (lengthened).

In this case, the protrusions D131f, D141g are formed on both sides of the sixth passage DRt6 (main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170) and are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170), so that the ball can be made to abut alternately against the protrusions D131f, D141g as it passes through the sixth passage DRt6.

This not only provides resistance to the ball, but also adds a lateral (perpendicular to the rolling direction) velocity component to the ball's velocity component (the ball's path can be made to zigzag rather than straight). This lengthens the time it takes for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, from this point of view, it becomes easier to maintain (lengthen) the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

On the other hand, since the protrusions D131f and D141g extend in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), resistance is unlikely to be applied to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the ball bounces upward (arrow U direction) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 (main body part D172), the ball can be quickly dropped downward (rolling surface). Therefore, even if the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced upward by the action of the weight part D174 as the ball bounces upward, the weight of the ball can be quickly applied to the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, and the main body part D172 can be quickly returned to its original state.

As a result, while the ball passes through the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball acts on the main body portion D172, and the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier to maintain a state in which the ball can easily enter.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is formed as a flat surface. That is, the upper surface of the main body D172 is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, and no steps are formed. This makes it possible to prevent the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This makes it possible to prevent the main body D172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball bounces upward.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the displacement member D180 is formed to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the structure in which the ease with which balls flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement (rotation), when a ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced to the side (open position) where the ball is more likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6, so that when a ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, it becomes easier for the ball following that ball (for example, a ball reciprocating in the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, a subsequent ball) to enter the sixth passage DRt6.

In other words, when a first ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the entry of the first ball into the sixth passage DRt6 displaces the displacement member D180, creating a state in which the following second ball (the second ball following the first ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and when a second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the entry of the second ball into the sixth passage DRt6 displaces the displacement member D180, creating a state in which the following third ball (the third ball following the second ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and these patterns can be repeated after the third ball.

Therefore, the player can expect that the flow (sinking) of one ball into the sixth passage DRt6 will trigger a chain reaction of balls into the sixth passage DRt6. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In this case, the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the side where the ball is more likely to enter (open position) is achieved by utilizing the weight of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6. This eliminates the need for an actuator to drive the displacement member D180 and a sensor to control that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

In particular, in this embodiment, the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 is formed by the rolling member D170, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) by the action of the weight of the rolling ball, so that the time during which the weight of the ball can be utilized can be secured. As a result, it becomes easier to maintain a state in which the ball can easily flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6.

Next, the 69th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1616. In the 68th embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be forcibly opened from the outside, but in the 69th embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be restricted from being forcibly opened from the outside. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1616(a) and 1616(b) are cross-sectional views of the lower frame D2086b in the 69th embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in Figure 1608. Note that Figure 1616(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and Figure 1616(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 1616, the transmission member D2190 includes an engagement portion D2196. Note that the transmission member D2190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the 68th embodiment only in that it further includes an engagement portion D2196, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

The engaging portion D2196 is a portion that allows the rolling member D170 to be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, and restricts the displacement member D180, which is in the closed position, from being displaced (rotated) toward the open position when the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position). It is erected from the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the transmitted portion D193, and is disposed with its outer surface (surface opposite the axis D191) facing the extended tip (end on the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170.

The outer surface of the engagement portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the axis D191) is formed in a shape that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the extended tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D173 when the rolling member D170 rotates around the axis D171 (a shape that is in contact with the displacement locus, or a shape that has a gap between it and the displacement locus). Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position is permitted (see FIG. 1616(b)).

Therefore, when a ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 and rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball can be used to displace the rolling member D170 to the second position. As a result, the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 can displace (push) the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D2190 downward, displacing (rotating) the displacement member D180 to the open position.

The outer surface of the engagement portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the axis D191) is formed into a shape that can restrict the rotation of the transmission member D2190 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left in FIG. 1616(a), i.e., the direction in which the displacement member D180 disposed in the open position is displaced toward the open position) when the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position.

Specifically, when the transmission member D2190 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left in FIG. 1616(a)), and the outer surface (the surface opposite the axis D191) of the engagement portion D2196 abuts against and presses against the extended tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the extended tip of the transmission portion D173 is pressed in the direction toward the axis D171 (the axis D171 is positioned on the extension line of the force acting from the engagement portion D2196 to the extended tip of the transmission portion D173).

Therefore, no force component is generated to displace (rotate) the rolling member D170, and the rolling member D170 is maintained in the initial position (first position) (is rendered non-rotatable), thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission member D2190 in the counterclockwise direction (left direction in FIG. 1616(a)) as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1616(a)). In other words, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) (i.e., when the weight of the ball is not acting on it), the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position can be restricted. That is, for example, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of forcibly displacing the displacement member D180 from the closed position toward the open position by inserting a foreign object such as a wire (making it easier for the ball to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6).

In this case, in this embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted by utilizing the rolling member D170 (engaging the engagement portion D2196 of the transmission member D2190 with the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170). Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate part to restrict the displacement member D180 from being forcibly displaced (rotated), and the transmission member D190 can be used, which simplifies the structure for preventing unauthorized forcible displacement of the displacement member D180.

Next, the 70th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1617. In the 68th embodiment, the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 rolls toward the axis D171, but in the rolling member D3170 of the 70th embodiment, the ball rolls away from (is separated from) the axis D3171. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1617(a) and 1617(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D3086b in the 70th embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in Figure 1608. Note that Figure 1617(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and Figure 1617(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 1617, the rolling member D3170 includes an axis D3171, a long plate-shaped main body D3172 on the other longitudinal end side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the axis D3171, a weight portion D3174 on the other longitudinal end side (the side on which the axis D3171 is arranged) of the main body D3172, and a transmission portion D3173 on the opposite side of the main body D3172 across the weight portion D3174, and is arranged rotatably about the axis D3171 between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The parts D3171 to D3174 of the rolling member D3170 are substantially identical in function to the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the 68th embodiment, and differ only in their arrangement. The transmission member D3190 differs from the transmission member D3190 in the 68th embodiment only in the orientation (extension direction) of the transmitted part D3193, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

The shaft D3171 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is supported by a shaft support (not shown) formed on the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140. Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) around the shaft D3171, the main body portion D3172 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The main body portion D3172 is a portion whose upper surface forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow L) is juxtaposed to the rolling portion (the part whose upper surface serves as the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, and the other longitudinal end side (the side where the axis D3171 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow R) is arranged in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 in a top view (a position that can receive (catch) a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180).

When the main body D3172 is placed in the second position (posture), the upper surface of one end of its longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is disposed, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is placed at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (the side in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is formed as a flat surface. This prevents the rolling ball from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This prevents the main body D3172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight D3174 as the ball bounces upward.

The upper surface of the main body D3172 does not need to be a flat surface (a cross section cut by a plane perpendicular to the axis D3171 is a straight cross section), but it is sufficient if no steps are formed, and it may be formed as a smooth surface that is smoothly connected along the rolling direction of the ball (a cross section shape in which curves or curves and straight lines are smoothly connected, for example, a sine wave (sine curve) shape).

The weight portion D3174 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170, and extends from the other longitudinal end side (the side where the shaft D3171 is disposed) of the main body portion D3172 toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D3172 (the side indicated by the arrow R), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The transmission part D3173 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 to the transmission member D3190, and is further extended from the extension direction end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight part D3174 toward the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the axis D3171. The extension tip side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission part D3173 is arranged below (arrow D direction side) the transmitted part D3193 of the transmission member D3190 (arranged in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) around the axis D3171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface and the transmission part D3173 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of the arrow U), the transmitted part D3193 of the transmission member D3190 is displaced (pushed up) upward by the transmission part D3173, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D3190 around the axis D3191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In this embodiment, a protrusion protrudes (stands up) from the transmitting part D3173 toward the transmitted part D3193. However, a protrusion may protrude (stand up) from the transmitted part D3193 toward the transmitting part D3173. In other words, it is sufficient that the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 can be transmitted to the transmitting member D3190 via the transmitting part D3173 and the transmitted part D3193.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D3170 (main body part D3172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body part D3172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight part D3174 (and the transmission part D3173) side rather than the axis D3171. As a result, the rolling member D3170 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state by utilizing the weight of the weight part D3174 (and the transmission part D3173) (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D3171), and is able to return to the initial position by its own weight after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position (see FIG. 1617 (a)).

In other words, when the rolling member D3170 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the main body portion D3172), the main body portion D3172 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated clockwise around the axis D3171 when viewed from the front), and is placed in and maintained in the initial position (first position). This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D3170 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

On the other hand, when a ball rolls on the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D3172 (the opposite side of the axis D3171 from the weight D3174). As a result, the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (when viewed from the front, it is rotated counterclockwise around the axis D3171) and is positioned in the second position.

The first position (initial position) of the rolling member D3170 is determined by the lower surface (surface on the arrow D side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L side) of the main body D3172 abutting against a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the main body D3172 against the stopper portion, the downward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D3171) of the main body D3172 is restricted, and the rolling member D3170 is disposed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 1617(a)).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D3170 is determined by the lower surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow D) of the weight portion D3174 abutting against a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the weight portion D3174 against the stopper portion, the upward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D3171) of the main body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is restricted, and the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position (see FIG. 1617(b)).

When the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and when the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D3170 (main body D3172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131d (eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D3170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172. The rolling member D3170 is rotatably supported around the axis D3171, and in this embodiment, the angle of downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body D3172 with respect to the horizontal plane when the ball is rolling (when the weight of the ball is being received) is made larger than the angle of downward inclination when the ball is not rolling (when the weight of the ball is not being received and no load is being applied).

In other words, in this embodiment, the ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 falls to a position on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D3172, close to the axis D3171, and rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D3172 in a direction away from the axis D3171.

As a result, in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D3171 (fulcrum) is shortened, making the weight of the weight part D3174 dominant, and as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D3172, the distance from the axis D191 (distance between the point of force and the fulcrum) is gradually increased (lengthened) to counter the weight of the weight part D174. As a result, the rolling member D3170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position.

In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position, gradually increasing the amount of opening (the distance between the opposing displacement members D180). This allows, for example, when the second ball reciprocates along the third passage DRt3, to gradually increase the expectation that the second ball will flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing displacement members D180), making the game more interesting.

In addition, even if the distance between the first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 and the second ball that follows the first ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, the following ball) is relatively large, it is possible to make it easier for the following second ball to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180).

On the other hand, the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D3170 is away from (moves away from) the axis D171, so that at least when the ball reaches the end of the main body portion D3172 (one end in the longitudinal direction, the end on the side in the direction of arrow L), the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position.

In other words, just before the ball rolls (flows) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, the distance from the axis D191 (distance between the force point and the fulcrum) is at its maximum, and the weight of the ball is acting at its maximum on the main body D3172. However, when the ball rolls (flows) from the upper surface of the main body D3172 into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146, the effect of the weight of the ball instantly disappears, and only the effect of the weight part D3174 remains.

Therefore, the rolling member D3170 can be returned from the second position to the initial position (first position) at maximum speed, and the displacement member D180 that was in the open position can be instantly placed in the closed position. This allows for a performance with good tempo. In addition, the player can focus on whether the second ball will enter (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) in time for the displacement member D180 to be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the open position, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when a single ball is rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172, the rolling member D3170 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position as the ball rolls toward one longitudinal end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the main body D3172, and is configured so that when the ball reaches one longitudinal end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the main body D3172 (at least before the ball rolls (flows into) the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140), the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position.

Next, the 71st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1618. In the 68th embodiment, only the rolling member D170 is disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout (the path formed by the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8), but in the 71st embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout (the path formed by the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8). Note that the same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1618(a) and 1618(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D4086b in the 71st embodiment, showing the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D4221.

In addition, FIG. 1618(a) illustrates a state in which the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and FIG. 1618(b) illustrates a state in which the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 1618, the rear member D4130 has a partition wall D4134 erected from its rear surface.

The partition wall D4134, together with the main body D131, the detour member D200, and the second rolling member D4220, defines the eighth passage DRt8. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite the main body D131, and the area defined between them by the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 defines the eighth passage DRt8.

The second rolling member D4220 includes an axis D4221, a long plate-shaped main body D4222 with the axis D4221 disposed at one longitudinal end (the side in the direction of arrow L), a weight D4224 disposed at one longitudinal end (the side where the axis D4221 is disposed) of the main body D4222, and a transmission part D4223 disposed on the opposite side of the main body D4222 across the weight D4224, and is disposed between the back member D4130 and the detour member D200 so as to be rotatable about the axis D4221.

The parts D4221 to D4224 of the second rolling member D4220 are substantially identical in function to the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the 68th embodiment, and differ only in their arrangement. The partition wall D4134 of the back member D4130 is different from the partition wall D134 in the 68th embodiment in that a portion of the wall forming the ball's rolling surface is omitted (replaced with the main body part D4222 of the second rolling member D4220), but the other configurations are the same.

The shaft D4221 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown) formed on the back member D4130 and the detour member D200. Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) around the shaft D4221, the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The upper surface of the main body D4222 forms the rolling surface for the balls in the eighth passage DRt8, and one longitudinal end (the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is juxtaposed to the rolling portion (the part whose upper surface becomes the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the balls to the opening D131e, and the other longitudinal end (the side opposite the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) is arranged downstream of the opening D131d (at a position that can receive (accept) the balls flowing down from the opening D131d).

Whether the main body D4222 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (arrow U direction side) than the upper surface of the rolling part (the part whose upper surface becomes the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the ball into the opening D131e.

The axis D4221 is embedded inside the main body D4222, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is formed up to a position beyond the axis D4221. That is, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D4222 passes above the axis D4221 (the direction of the arrow U), it rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the partition wall D4134, which rolls the ball into the opening D131e.

The weight portion D4224 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220, and extends from one end of the main body portion D4222 in the longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is disposed) toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D4222 (the side indicated by the arrow L), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The transmission part D4223 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the extension direction end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight part D4224 toward the transmission member D190 (weight part D195). The extension tip side (arrow U direction side) of the transmission part D4223 is disposed below (arrow D direction side) the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 (disposed in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) around the axis D4221 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface and the transmission part D4223 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of the arrow U), the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed up) upward by the transmission part D4223, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the second rolling member D4220 (main body D4222) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D4222), the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight D4224 (and the transmission part D4223) side rather than the axis D4221. As a result, the second rolling member D4220 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state by utilizing the weight (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D4221) of the weight of the weight D4224 (and the transmission part D4223), and is able to return to the initial position (first position) by its own weight after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position (see FIG. 1618(a)).

In other words, when the second rolling member D4220 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the main body portion D4222), the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front) and is placed in and maintained in the initial position (first position). This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the second rolling member D4220 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

On the other hand, when a ball rolls on the main body D4222 of the second rolling member D4220, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D4222 (the opposite side of the weight D4224 across the axis D4221). As a result, the main body D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front), and the second rolling member D4220 is positioned in the second position.

The first position (initial position) of the second rolling member D4220 is determined by the end face (surface on the arrow L side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L side) of the main body D4222 abutting against the partition wall D4134, and the second position of the second rolling member D4220 is determined by the underside (surface on the arrow D side) of the other longitudinal end side (arrow R side) of the main body D4222 abutting against the partition wall D4134.

When the second rolling member D4220 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D4222 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and even when arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D4222 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the second rolling member D4220 (main body part D4222) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131e.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the eighth passage DRt8 downstream of the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, compared to the 68th embodiment, even if the length of the path (passage, i.e., the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout) is the same, the section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized can be secured (lengthened) by the amount of the second rolling member D4220 disposed. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the open position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

Here, in a configuration in which the longitudinal dimension (length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of the first member (rolling member D170 (main body D172)) is extended to ensure (lengthen) a section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized, it becomes difficult to arrange the rolling member D170 with an extended longitudinal dimension in the limited space (widthwise dimension (arrow L-R direction)) of the lower frame D86b. If the arrangement positions of the pair of displacement members D180 are shifted to one widthwise side (arrow L direction side) of the lower frame D86b, it is possible to extend the longitudinal dimension (length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of the rolling member D170 (main body D172) accordingly, but there is a limit to the length that can be extended. In addition, the third passage DRt3 cannot be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, which reduces the interest of the game.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, multiple members (in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged to ensure (lengthen) the section in which the weight of the ball can be used, so the limited space of the lower frame D4086b can be effectively utilized to ensure (lengthen) a sufficient section in which the weight of the ball can be used. In addition, the third passage DRt3 can be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, which increases the excitement of the game.

In other words, the second rolling member D4220 is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the rolling member D170, and these are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), so that the thickness of the lower frame D4086b in the front-to-rear direction, which is dead space, can be effectively utilized, and the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 can ensure (lengthen) a section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized.

In this way, a pair of displacement members D180 can be arranged in the center of the width direction (arrow L-R) of the lower frame D4086b while ensuring (lengthening) a section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized, so the third passage DRt3 can be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth (a shape that slopes downward toward the center in the width direction), improving the enjoyment of the game.

In a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is arranged in a path (passage, i.e., the section from a pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), a predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 (displacement from a closed position to an open position due to the weight of the ball, and a displacement mode in which the displacement member D180 returns to the closed position after the ball passes) is only formed once while one ball passes through the path, but if multiple members (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in the path (passage), the above-mentioned predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 can be formed multiple times (twice in this embodiment) while one ball passes through the path. By repeatedly opening and closing the displacement member D180, a player who expects a ball to flow (enter) into the sixth path DRt6 can focus on the relationship between the displacement state of the displacement member D180 and other balls on the third path DRt3, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is arranged in a path (passage, i.e., the section from a pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), even if multiple (two or more) balls pass through the path, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 is only one (i.e., the displacement mode in which the displacement member D180 is arranged from the closed position to the open position due to the weight of the ball and returns to the closed position after the ball passes). However, if multiple members (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in the path (passage), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 that can be formed while multiple balls pass through the path can be multiple. In other words, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be diversified by combining the timing at which the weight of the ball acts on one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 (the timing at which the ball rolls). As a result, it is possible to perform a surprising performance.

The transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 is located above the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 (in the direction of the arrow U), and displaces (pushes) the transmitted part D193 downward when the weight of the ball acts on the main body part D172. The transmission part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 is located below (in the direction of the arrow D) the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190, and displaces (pushes) the weight part D195 upward when the weight of the ball acts on the main body part D4222.

That is, when the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 move due to the weight of the ball to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190, the direction of displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 is the same, and the movements of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are not opposed. Similarly, when one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 moves to return to the initial position (displaced (rotated) by the weight of the weight parts D174, D4224 without the weight of the ball acting), regardless of the state of the movement of the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, the movement of one is not opposed to the movement of the other (both the movement of one and the movement of the other are allowed).

In this way, the displacement (rotation) when the weight of the balls of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is applied can be transmitted to the transmission member D190 individually and independently, and the displacement (rotation) when the action of the weight of the balls of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is released can be performed individually and independently.

Therefore, when multiple balls pass through the path (passage, i.e., the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), depending on the rolling positions of the balls, the transmission member D190 can be displaced (rotated) due to the movement of only one or the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, or the transmission member D190 can be displaced (rotated) due to the movement of both the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and by combining these, the manner in which the displacement member D180 is displaced can be diversified.

For example, if the weight of a ball is applied to either the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 while the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, the movement of either of them can displace the displacement member D180 toward the open position while it is being displaced toward the closed position.

In addition, for example, when the weight of a ball is applied to one of the rolling members D170 or the second rolling members D4220, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position by the action of one of the members, the weight of a ball is applied to the other of the rolling members D170 or the second rolling members D4220, and the action of the weight of the ball is greater on the other member (the force displacing the displacement member D180 is stronger), the displacement member D180 can be displaced to the open position at a faster displacement speed by the action of the other member.

In addition, according to this embodiment, there is no need to provide a separate member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 and a separate member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 can be used as such a member (transmission means). This reduces the number of parts and simplifies the structure. As a result, improved operational reliability and reduced product costs can be achieved.

Next, the 72nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1619. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1619 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame D5086b in the 72nd embodiment, showing the state in which the detouring member D200 has been removed. Note that Figure 1619(a) shows the state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position.

As shown in FIG. 1619, grooves D5194L and D194R are formed in the main body D5194, and the connecting pins D213 of the shaft support member D210 are slidably inserted into these grooves D5194L and D194R.

The transmission member D5190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the 68th embodiment only in the shape of the groove D194L, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow F-B), the groove D5194L extends in an arc-like curve with its center on the axis D191 side, and the width of the groove is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213. The width of the groove is constant along the extension direction of the groove D5194L.

In detail, the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D5194L, both the inner wall surface on the side farther from the axis D191 and the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191, have a shape along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a shape obtained by dividing a circle centered on the axis D191 at a specified central angle).

Therefore, the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (is not abutted against) by both of the inner wall surfaces along the extension direction of the groove D5194L, but is acted upon only by the lower or upper extension end (the end in the direction of the arrow D or the end in the direction of the arrow U) of the groove D5194L (it is displaced upward or downward (pushed down or pushed down) by the inner wall surface at the lower or upper extension end).

As a result, according to this embodiment, not only when the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, but also when the displacement member D180 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the operation mode (displacement mode) of the pair of displacement members D180 can be made different from each other (a state can be created in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated)).

Specifically, when the displacement member D180 is in the open position, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin D213 and the lower extension end of the groove D5194L (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow D, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 1614).

When the rolling member D170 starts to displace (rotate) from the second position to the initial position (first position) and the transmission member D5190 starts to displace (rotate) to the initial position, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced (pushed up) upward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby starting the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L is not displaced upward (is not pushed up) until it reaches the extending end on the lower side of the groove D5194L (the extending end on the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the open position.

When the transmission member D5190 is further displaced (rotated) in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member from the second position, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R continues to be displaced (pushed up) upward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position to the closed position.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L reaches the lower extension end of the groove D5194L (the end on the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface), it is displaced (pushed up) upward by the lower extension end (inner wall surface), thereby starting the displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position.

After that, both connecting pins D213 are displaced (pushed up) upward, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and when the transmission member D190 reaches the initial position, the pair of displacement members D180 are positioned in the closed position (see FIG. 1612).

In this way, in this embodiment, not only the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 start to displace (rotate) from the closed position to the open position, but also the timing at which they start to displace (rotate) from the open position to the closed position can be made different (one delayed relative to the other). This allows for variation in the manner in which the displacement members D180 are displaced to the closed position, making the game more interesting for players who expect the displacement members D180 to be in an open state (i.e., a state in which it is easy for balls to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6).

Next, the lower frame D6086b in the 73rd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1620 to 1623.

In the 68th embodiment, all balls that flow into (enter) the 6th passage DRt6 are guided to the 8th passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout). In the 73rd embodiment, however, the 9th passage DRt9 is connected to the 6th passage DRt6 in the middle, and balls that flow into (enter) the 6th passage DRt6 are guided to either the 8th passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout) or the 9th passage DRt9 (outlet DOP6out). The same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Figure 1620 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D6086b in the 73rd embodiment, and Figure 1621 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D6086b. Figure 1622 is a front view of the lower frame D6086b, and Figures 1623(a) and 1623(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D6086b.

Note that Figure 1623(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in Figure 1608, and Figure 1623(b) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in Figure 1612.

As shown in Figures 1620 to 1623, the lower frame D6086b in the 73rd embodiment is formed with a 9th passage DRt9 connected midway to the 6th passage DRt6, and an outlet DOP6out formed as an opening through which balls guided to the 9th passage DRt9 flow out into the play area.

That is, a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 flows into (enters) the eighth passage DRt8, flows down the eighth passage DRt8, and then flows out from the outlet DOPout into the playing area, while a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and flows into (enters) the ninth passage DRt8 midway along the sixth passage DRt6 flows down the ninth passage DRt9, and then flows out from the outlet DOP6out into the playing area.

Here, the outlet DOPout, which is the outlet of the 8th passage DRt8 (the opening that allows the balls to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1603). Therefore, a ball that flows down from the 6th passage DRt6 to the 8th passage DRt8 is likely to win at the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning opening 64).

On the other hand, the outlet DOP6out, which is the outlet of the 9th passage DRt9 (the opening through which the balls flow out into the play area), is positioned horizontally to one side of the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1603) (formed (positioned) in a position where it does not overlap with the first winning opening 64 vertically downward). Therefore, balls that flow down from the 6th passage DRt6 to the 9th passage DRt9 are less likely to win the first winning opening 64 (there is a lower probability of winning the first winning opening 64 than balls that flow down to the above-mentioned 8th passage DRt8).

In this way, in the lower frame D6086b of this embodiment, when a ball reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction is diverted to the sixth passage DRt6, the ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 does not flow down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, but reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, making it easier for the ball to win the first winning hole 64 (in this embodiment, the ball is almost guaranteed to win the first winning hole 64). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a win), the player can expect the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if the ball flows down to the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 is maximized, making it easier to maintain the state in which the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position (making it easier for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). On the other hand, if a ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 flows down to the ninth passage DRt9 midway, the weight of the ball cannot be acted on the rolling member D170, and the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position (making it harder for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 remain displaced (rotated) to the open position, making it easier for the ball to be diverted from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6, and the player can expect the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down the ninth passage DRt9 along the way, which also increases the interest of the game.

The front member D6110 has an opening DOP6out formed in the front portion D111 and a plate-shaped bottom portion D6112 standing upright from the back surface of the front portion D111, and the intermediate member D6140 has a bottom portion D144 standing upright from the front surface of the main body portion D141 and an opening D6148 formed in the main body portion D141.

The bottom surface portion D6112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal area of the front surface portion D111, and the bottom surface portion D6144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in the area excluding the opening D141f, and the erected tip of the bottom surface portion D6112 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) and the erected tip of the bottom surface portion D6144 (on the side in the direction of arrow F) are abutted over the entire area. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D6086b.

A part of the bottom surface portions D6112, D6144 (the part located below the opening D6148 in the intermediate member D6140) forms the rolling surface of the ninth passage DRt9. The part forming the rolling surface is formed with a predetermined distance (a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere) between it and the bottom surface of the first interposed member D150.

The portions of the bottom surface D6112, D6144 that form the rolling surfaces described above are formed with a downward incline toward approximately the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), and the outflow surfaces D6112a, D6144a are recessed in the portions that are lowest in height in the vertical direction (approximately the center in the longitudinal direction).

The outflow surfaces D6112a, D6144a are portions for allowing the balls guided along the bottom surface portions D6112, D6144 (portions forming the rolling surfaces) to flow out to the outflow outlet DOP6out, and are integrally formed as concave surfaces that slope downward toward the outflow outlet DOP6out. In other words, the opening DOP6out is formed at a position corresponding to the outflow surfaces D6112a, D6144a (a position where the balls can flow out).

The opening D6148 of the intermediate member D6140 is formed as an opening (hole) that receives the balls rolling on the rolling member D170 (sixth passage DRt6) into the ninth passage DRt9, penetrating the main body D141 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction). That is, the opening 6148 is formed in one of the pair of side walls that define the sixth passage DRt6, and the upstream end of the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 via the opening 6148.

The dimension of the opening D6148 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 is set to a size that allows multiple balls (three balls in this embodiment) to pass through at the same time. The lower edge of the opening D6148 is formed at a position lower (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling member D170 that is placed in the second position (the position pushed down to the bottom) by the weight of the ball (see FIG. 1623(a)), and the upper edge of the opening D6148 is formed at a position that is spaced apart from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 that is placed in the initial position (the first position, the position returned to the top) without the weight of the ball acting thereon, with a distance greater than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball can pass through the opening D6148 regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "upstream side edge") located on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in Figure 1623(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 of the opening D6148 is disposed downstream (arrow L direction side, left side in Figure 1623(a)) of the edge portion on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in Figure 1623(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 of the rolling member D170 in a front view.

In this embodiment, the upstream edge of the opening D6148 is disposed at a position (downstream position) that does not vertically overlap with the opposing space at the base of the pair of displacement members D180. That is, it is located downstream in the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere in this embodiment) from the base (opposing surface facing the upstream displacement member D180) of the pair of displacement members D180 that is located downstream in the sixth passage DRt6 (arrow L direction side, left side of FIG. 1623(a)).

This prevents a ball that has flowed (entered) between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 and fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 from immediately flowing (entering) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148, and allows the ball to roll on the rolling members D170. Therefore, the weight of the ball can be applied to the rolling members D170 to displace (rotate) the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether the ball will reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the main body D141 has a protrusion D141g protruding from a position on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 (the side in the direction of the arrow R, the right side of FIG. 1623(b)) relative to the upstream edge of the opening D6148. Therefore, when the ball flows (enters) between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 and falls into the sixth passage DRt6, the ball's rolling is delayed (its speed is reduced) by the action (contact) of the protrusion D141g, making it easier for the player to grasp the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and the action (contact) of the protrusion D141g moves the ball to the opposite side of the opening D6148 (the main body D131 side), allowing the player to expect the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6. This increases the interest in the game.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "downstream side edge") located downstream (arrow L direction side, left side in Figure 1623 (a)) of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6 is disposed upstream (arrow R direction side, right side in Figure 1623 (a)) of the edge portion (axis D171) of the rolling member D170 on the downstream side (arrow L direction side, left side in Figure 1623 (a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 in a front view.

In this embodiment, the downstream side edge of opening D6148 is disposed at a position (upstream side position) that does not overlap with opening D131d in a front view. That is, it is located upstream in the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment) from the side edge of opening D131d on the upstream side (the side in the direction of arrow R, the right side in Figure 1623 (a)) in the sixth passage DRt6.

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing (entering) into the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148 even if the ball has reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, if the ball passes the downstream edge of the opening D6148, the player can feel secure that the ball will be sure to flow (enter) into the eighth passage DRt8. This allows the player to keep a close eye on the ball's trajectory, increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, the downstream edge of opening D6148 may be positioned so that it overlaps with opening D131d in a front view (a position overlapping with or downstream from the downstream edge of opening D131d). In this case, even after the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, it is not clear whether the ball will enter (enter) the eighth passage DRt8 or the ninth passage DRt9. This allows the player to keep an eye on the direction of the ball, increasing the fun of the game.

As described above, the protrusions D131f, D141g are arranged in a staggered pattern, with the protrusion D131f protruding from the main body D131 upstream of the upstream edge of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, when a ball that has fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170, the action (contact) of the protrusion D131f can move (change the rolling direction) the ball toward the opening D6148 (main body D141). That is, the ball affected by the protrusion D131f collides (comes into contact with) the main body D141 located upstream of the upstream edge of the opening 6148 on the sixth passage DRt6 (in the direction of arrow R, to the right in Figures 1623(a) and 1623(b)), allowing the player to focus on whether the ball is bounced away from the opening D6148 or flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, multiple protrusions D131f of the main body D131 are disposed between the upstream and downstream edges of the opening D6148 in a position that overlaps when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1623(a)). This allows the protrusions D131f to act on (contact) the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, causing a change in the rolling direction of the ball (a component of the rolling direction toward the opening D6148). This creates the possibility that the ball will flow (enter) the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148 due to contact with the protrusions D131f, increasing the interest of the game.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a position inclined by about 1 to 2 degrees with respect to the vertical direction (a so-called "lying" position, i.e., a position in which the top surface is positioned on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, in this embodiment, the opening D6148 is formed in the wall portion (main body portion D141) located on the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10, arrow F direction side) of the wall portions that define the sixth passage DRt6.

As a result, when a ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170, the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10 makes it easier for the ball to pass through the main body D131 side, and as a result, the protrusion D131f can be easily applied to the ball. On the other hand, the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is inclined upward from the main body D131 side toward the opening D6148 side due to the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10, so the ball moved toward the opening D6148 by the action of the protrusion D131f can be moved toward the main body D131 side by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface).

As a result, when the protrusion D131f acts (contacts) the ball relatively strongly, the ball flows (enters) through the opening D6148 into the ninth passage DRt9, whereas when the protrusion D131f acts (contacts) the ball relatively weakly, the ball heading toward the opening D6148 can be returned to the main body D131 by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface). Therefore, depending on the manner in which the protrusion D131f acts on the ball (such as the speed of the ball when it contacts and the angle of entry of the ball), the rolling behavior of the ball can be changed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, by utilizing the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, each component of the lower frame D6086b can be configured in a mutually orthogonal relationship. That is, the main body portion D131 and the main body portion D141 can be arranged in parallel, and the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 can be configured to be orthogonal to the main body portions D131 and D141 (that is, the axis D171 can be supported in a position perpendicular to the main body portions D131 and D141). Therefore, it is not necessary to make only some of these components tilted relative to the other components, or to support the axis D171 in a tilted position, which simplifies the structure and improves the moldability and assembly of each part. As a result, it is possible to reduce product costs.

Next, the 74th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1624. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1624(a) to 1624(c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D7086b in the 74th embodiment, illustrating the transition state when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) between the initial position (first position) and the second position, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

1624(a) to 1624(c) show a state in which the detouring member D200 is removed. FIG. 1619(a) corresponds to a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (see FIG. 1612), and FIG. 1624(c) corresponds to a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see FIG. 1614). FIG. 1624(b) corresponds to a state in the middle of displacement when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position) (see FIG. 1613).

As shown in Fig. 1624(a) to Fig. 1624(c), the transmission member D7190 in the 74th embodiment includes a display unit D7197 that is disposed on the outer edge of the main body D194 and extends from the outer edge of the main body D194 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the axis D191. In detail, the display unit D7197 extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the longitudinal end of the main body D194, which is the end opposite the axis D191.

Here, the upper edge (edge on the side of the arrow U direction) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 and the upper edge (edge on the side of the arrow U direction) of the side wall portion D142 of the intermediate member D140 are positioned (height position) approximately the same in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction).

As shown in FIG. 1624(a), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 1612), the longitudinal end (end opposite the axis D191) of the main body D194 is positioned at the uppermost position (arrow U direction side) as the transmission member D7190 is displaced (rotated). As a result, the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 protrudes (is positioned) above the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130, and the protruding portion is visible to the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1624(c), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (see FIG. 1614), the longitudinal end (end opposite the axis D191) of the main body D194 is placed at the lowest position (arrow D direction side) due to the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D7190. As a result, the entire display unit D7197 is immersed (placed) below the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 (the entire display unit D7197 is placed on the back side of the side wall portion D132). Therefore, the player cannot directly see the display unit D7197. However, it is possible to see the display unit D7197 through the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130.

In this way, the amount of protrusion (protruding dimension) of the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 protruding from the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132) is maximum when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 1612) as shown in FIG. 1624(a). As shown in FIG. 1624(b) when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the above-mentioned amount of protrusion (size of the part visible to the player) gradually decreases, and is minimum (not protruding and not visible to the player) when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (see FIG. 1614).

Therefore, the player can grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether it is in the open or closed position) by visually checking whether the extended tip side (part) of the display portion D7197 protrudes above the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132). Furthermore, the player can grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether it is in a position between the open and closed positions) by visually checking the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension).

Next, the lower frame D8086b in the 75th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1625 to 1627.

In the 73rd embodiment, the protrusion amount (protrusion dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D170 is constant regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. However, in the 75th embodiment, the protrusion amount (protrusion dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D8170 changes (increases or decreases) depending on the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Here, the lower frame D8086b in the 75th embodiment has the same configuration (e.g., shape and number) as D6086b in the 73rd embodiment, except that the protrusion D131f includes the second protrusion D131fa and the weight of the weight portion D8174 of the rolling member D8170 is different. Therefore, a description of the configuration other than the second protrusion D131fa and the rolling member D6087 will be omitted.

Figures 1625(a) and 1625(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D8086b in the 75th embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in Figure 1608. Note that Figure 1625(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (see Figure 1612), while Figure 1625(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see Figure 1614).

Figure 1626(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b taken along line MDCXXVIa-MDCXXVIa in Figure 1625(a), and Figure 1626(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b taken along line MDCXXVIb-MDCXXVIb in Figure 1625(b). Figure 1627 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in Figure 1612.

As shown in Figs. 1625 to 1627, the multiple (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f arranged on the back member D8130 have second protrusions D131fa protruding from predetermined (two in this embodiment) protrusions D131f toward the rolling member D8170. Note that in this embodiment, the (predetermined) protrusions D131f from which the second protrusions D131fa are protruding are the two protrusions D131f located downstream (in the direction of arrow L) of the three protrusions D131f that overlap the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view.

The body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 has a recess formed on the side (edge) facing the back member D8130, which is recessed in the protruding direction of the protrusion D131f (the direction in which the protrusion D131f is received) when viewed from above (see FIG. 1627). The recesses are arranged at multiple locations (four locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (approximately equal intervals in this embodiment) along the longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D8170. That is, the recesses are formed (recessed) at positions facing the protrusions D131f.

In this embodiment, the shape of the recess when viewed from above is curved like an arc. However, it may be rectangular. In other words, the shape is not limited as long as it is large enough not to interfere with the second protrusion D131fa when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated).

The second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the front surface (surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion D131f toward the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above, and the protruding tip side (part) of the second protrusion D131fa is received in the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above (positioned in the internal space of the recess) when viewed from above (see FIG. 1627). That is, when viewed from above, part of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) is formed by the second protrusion D131fa.

The protruding tip of the second protrusion D131fa is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the second protrusion D131fa may be substantially rectangular. The protruding direction of the second protrusion D131fa is the same as the protruding direction of the protrusion D131f. However, the protruding direction of the second protrusion D131fa may be a different direction (inclined direction) from the protruding direction of the protrusion D131f.

The height position (position in the direction of arrows U-D) of the second protrusion D131fa is set so that when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the initial position (first position), the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is substantially the same as or slightly lower than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 1626(a)), and when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position, the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is higher than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 1626(b)).

In other words, when the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the initial position (first position), the side of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, the surface on the right side in Figures 1625(a) and 1625(b)) is disposed at a position lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the upper surface of the main body part D172 (the rolling surface of the ball), so that the side of the second protrusion D131fa does not come into contact with (act on) the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172).

On the other hand, when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) a predetermined amount from the initial position (first position) toward the second position, at least a portion of the side of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, the surface on the right side in Figures 1625(a) and 1625(b)) is positioned at a higher position (in the direction of arrow U) than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172, and the side of the second protrusion D131fa can be abutted (acted upon) by the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172).

When the rolling member D8170 is in the second position, the area of the side of the second protrusion D131fa, which is located at a higher position (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body D172, is maximized. Therefore, in this case, even if the ball rolls (moves through the sixth passage DRt6) while bouncing on the rolling surface, it is possible to easily bring the side of the second protrusion D131fa into contact (act on) the ball.

The second protrusion D131fa is formed on the opposite side of the opening D6148 across the rolling member D8170 (main body D172). That is, the second protrusion D131fa protrudes toward the opening D6148. When a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is acted upon by the second protrusion D131fa (when it comes into contact with the second protrusion D131fa), the ball is caused to roll toward the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9) in reaction to the action (contact), and the ball is more likely to flow (enter) into the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9). That is, the ball is less likely to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body portion D172), as described above, the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole is located (eccentric) toward the weight portion D8174 side from the axis D171, and the rolling member D8170 is maintained (or returned) to the initial position (first position). On the other hand, in a state in which a ball rolls on the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170 and the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole including the ball is located (eccentric) toward the main body portion D172 side (the opposite side of the axis D171 from the weight portion D8174), the main body portion D172 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) (disposed in the second position).

In this case, in this embodiment, when a single ball is located at position DP (see FIG. 1625) of the main body D172 (the weight of the single ball acts on position DP), the weight of the weight D8174 is set so that the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball is located on the axis D171.

In other words, assuming a static state in which the balls are not rolling, when one ball is located upstream of position DP of the main body D172 (opposite axis D171) (the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) toward the second position, when one ball is located at position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of the ball acts), the rolling member D8170 is balanced around axis D171 (i.e., the force that displaces (rotates) the rolling member D8170 is not formed), and when one ball is located downstream of position DP of the main body D172 (on the axis D171 side) (the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position.

With the rolling member D8170 configured in this manner, when a ball flows down from the third passage DRt3 onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) which is in the initial position (first position), the weight of the ball (and the momentum of the fall) displaces the main body D172 downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position.

When the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 toward the downstream side (position DP), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170, including the ball, gradually approaches the axis D171, causing the main body D172 to gradually displace (rotate) upward (in the direction of arrow U), and the rolling member D8170 to displace (rotate) from the second position toward the first position.

When the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 reaches position DP, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 continues in the direction toward the first position due to the influence of the inertial force associated with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 up to that point, and when the ball passes position DP, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball is decentered toward the weight portion D8174, accelerating the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 in the direction toward the first position.

In this embodiment, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes position DP, the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position before it reaches the second protrusion D131fa located upstream (in the direction of arrow R). In other words, when only one ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa does not act on (contact) the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172.

However, if the speed (rolling speed) of the ball heading downstream is faster than the average speed due to factors such as the position and direction of the ball's flow from the third passage DRt3, or a collision with the displacement member D180 while flowing, the ball rolling on the top surface of the main body D172 may reach the second protrusion D131fa on the upstream (or downstream) side before the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position, and the ball may be acted upon by the second protrusion D131fa. In other words, even when only one ball is rolling, it is possible to create a situation in which the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be applied to the ball, drawing the player's attention to the effects of the above-mentioned factors and increasing the fun of the game.

In this embodiment, the distance between the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (the side in the direction of arrow R) and position DP is set to approximately twice the diameter of the ball. However, this distance can be set arbitrarily. When only one ball is rolling, shortening the above-mentioned distance makes it easier to impart the effect of the second protrusion D131fa to the ball, while lengthening the above-mentioned distance makes it more difficult to impart the effect of the second protrusion D131fa to the ball.

In this embodiment, when two balls are positioned on the main body D172 (when the weights of the two balls are acting), the weight of the weight D8174 is set so that the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the balls is eccentric to the main body D172 side from the axis D171, regardless of the respective positions of the two balls (for example, even if both balls are positioned downstream of position DP (between the axis D171 and position DP)).

Therefore, for example, even if only one ball is rolling on the main body D172 and the rolling position of the ball has passed position DP, and the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the initial position (first position) (i.e., the second protrusion D131fa is not acting (contacting) the ball, and the ball is expected to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6), when another ball flows (enters) from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 (two balls are positioned on the upper surface of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172)), the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position (or at least displaced (rotated) toward the second position), and a state in which the second protrusion D131fa can act (contact) on the ball (a state in which the ball is likely to flow (enter) the ninth passage DRt9) can be created.

In this way, in this embodiment, if only one ball (a ball rolling on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172)) flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa is less likely to act on (contact) the ball, making it easier for the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 (to enter the first winning hole 64). On the other hand, if a first ball is rolling and a second ball also flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa is caused to act on (contact) the first ball, making it harder for the first ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6.

That is, since the ball that reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 enters the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 1603) via the eighth passage DRt8, the player expects the ball to flow (enter) from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 when there are no balls on the rolling member D8170. On the other hand, after the first ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6, the player expects that the next ball (second ball) will not flow (enter) further into the sixth passage DRt6 so that the second protrusion D131fa will not act (contact) on the first ball. In this way, the player is not always expected to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6, but the expected situation can be changed depending on the number of balls that enter the sixth passage DRt6, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, as the first ball approaches position DP, the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position toward the first position, and the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position. When the first ball passes position DP, the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the first position, and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position.

In other words, as the first ball approaches the second protrusion D131fa, the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, making it difficult for the second ball to flow (enter) from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6. This increases the player's anticipation that the first ball will reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6.

Next, the center frame E86 in the 76th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1628 to 1640.

Figure 1628 is a front view of the game board E13 in the 76th embodiment. As shown in Figure 1628, the center frame E86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 1517) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame E86a and a lower frame E86b.

The upper frame E86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1628) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 1628) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1517) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame E86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1628) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame E86a and the lower frame E86b.

The upper frame E86a is configured by omitting a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (the portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in Figure 1628) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, i.e., the portion where the lower frame E86b is arranged), and the other portions excluding the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments.

Next, the lower frame E86b will be described with reference to Fig. 1629 to Fig. 1630. Fig. 1629 is a front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and Fig. 1630 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. Note that in Fig. 1629 and Fig. 1630, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame E86b to the base plate 60 are omitted. The same applies to Figs. 1631 to 1649.

As shown in Figures 1629 and 1630, the lower frame E86b is provided with a pair of receiving openings EOPin formed as openings capable of receiving balls, a pair of first passages ERt1 connected to the pair of receiving openings EOPin, a pair of second passages ERt2 through which balls guided through the pair of first passages ERt1 flow down, a pair of third passages ERt3 through which balls guided through the pair of second passages ERt2 flow down, a fourth passage ERt4, a fifth passage ERt5, and a sixth passage ERt6 through which balls guided through the pair of third passages ERt3 flow down after being sorted by a protrusion E151 formed on the sorting passage E150 described later, a seventh passage ERt7 through which balls guided through the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 are guided to the fourth passage ERt4, and an outlet EOPout formed as an opening through which balls guided through the fourth passage ERt4 flow out to the play area.

The pair of receiving openings EOPin, the first passage ERt1, the second passage ERt2, and the third passage ERt3 are each formed linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in FIG. 1628) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1628) of the game board E13.

A pair of upper frame passages ERt0 are also provided in the upper frame E86a (see FIG. 1628). The upper frame passages ERt0 are passages that guide the balls flowing down the play area, and the downstream ends of the upper frame passages ERt0 are connected to the receiving openings EOPin of the lower frame E86b.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage ERt0 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage ERt0 through the receiving opening EOPin into the first passage ERt1 of the lower frame E86b.

A sorting passage E150 operated by a drive motor E191 is provided in the lower frame E86b, and the balls come into contact with a protrusion E151 formed on the sorting passage E150, changing (altering) their flow direction, and are sorted from the third passage ERt3 to either the fourth passage ERt4, the fifth passage ERt5, or the sixth passage ERt6.

Here, the outlet EOPout, which is the outlet of the fourth passage ERt4 (the opening that allows the balls to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1628). Therefore, balls that are distributed to the fourth passage ERt4 are more likely to win at the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning opening 64).

In addition, balls that are diverted to the seventh passage ERt7 are guided to the fourth passage ERt4, making it easier for them to enter the first winning hole 64.

In addition, the sixth passage ERt6 has a first outlet surface E141a formed (positioned) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the seventh passage ERt7 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) to guide a ball guided along the sixth passage ERt6 to the seventh passage ERt7. Therefore, a ball guided to the first outlet surface E141a of the sixth passage ERt6 is likely to enter the first winning hole 64.

On the other hand, the fifth passage ERt5 is formed with a downward incline toward the sixth passage ERt6 (arrow F direction), and a pair of vertical wall portions E135c are arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the boundary between the fifth passage ERt5 and the seventh passage ERt7. Therefore, a ball diverted to the fifth passage ERt5 is more likely to be guided to the sixth passage ERt6 than to the seventh passage ERt7.

In the sixth passage ERt6, the second outflow surface E141b is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F, the playing area side) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board E13 (left and right direction in Figure 1628) relative to the first outflow surface E141a.

The sixth passage ERt6 is undulated, with the second outlet surface E141b at the bottom of the undulations and the first outlet surface E141a at the top of the undulations. Therefore, a ball diverted to the sixth passage ERt6 is more likely to flow out from the second outlet surface E141b into the play area than to be sent from the first outlet surface E141a to the seventh passage ERt7.

In other words, balls diverted from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 have a high probability of flowing out into the play area, and as a result, are less likely to win in the first winning hole 64 (they have a lower probability of winning in the first winning hole 64 than balls diverted from the third passage ERt3 to the fourth passage ERt4 described above).

In this way, in the lower frame E86b of this embodiment, when a ball abuts against the protrusion E151 formed on the distribution passage E150 and is distributed to either the fourth passage ERt4 or the sixth passage ERt6, the ball distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fourth passage ERt4 will easily enter the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 1628) (in this embodiment, the ball is almost certain to enter the first winning port 64), while the ball distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 will have difficulty traveling along the seventh passage ERt7 (and the fourth passage ERt4 formed downstream of the seventh passage ERt7) and entering the first winning port 64. Therefore, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a winning), the player is made to expect that the ball guided along the third path ERt3 will be sorted into the fourth path ERt4, which increases the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame E86b will be described with reference to Figures 1629 to 1630 as well as Figures 1631 to 1636.

Figure 1631 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and Figure 1632 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. Figure 1633 is a top view of the lower frame E86b, Figure 1634 is a front view of the lower frame E86b, and Figure 1635 is a rear view of the lower frame E86b. Figure 1636(a) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXXXVIa in Figure 1634, Figure 1636(b) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXXXVIb in Figure 1634, and Figure 1636(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b along the line MDCXXXVIc-MDCXXXVIc in Figure 1634.

As shown in Figures 1629 to 1636, the lower frame E86b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E130 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 disposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E130, a distribution passage E150, a central passage E160, and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 disposed on the base member E130, a cover member E180 disposed at a predetermined interval on the underside (arrow D direction side) of the base member E130, and a drive means E190 disposed inside the cover member E180.

The driving means E190 is arranged so as to be capable of reciprocating movement on the cover member E180. In addition, the sorting passage E150 is arranged so as to be capable of reciprocating movement on the base member E130 by engaging the sorting passage E150 with the driving means E190.

The central passage E160, the flow path adjustment block E170, and the cover member E180 are each fastened to the base member E130 by tapping screws, and the guide member E120 and the base member E130 are each fastened to the front member E110 by tapping screws.

The intermediate member E140 is sandwiched between the front member E110 and the base member E130. As a result, the lower frame E86b is configured as a single unit (see FIG. 1629).

In addition, the lower frame E86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) with the exception of the distribution path E150 and the drive means E190, and the distribution path E150 and drive means E190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to see the balls moving from the first path ERt1 to the seventh path ERt7, as well as the reciprocating movement of the distribution path E150, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The sorting passage E150 and the driving means E190 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

On the other hand, the lower frame E86b may be configured so that the components located on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the drive means E190 are made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or are painted or have a sticker attached) so that the drive means E190 is not visible to the player from the front side.

The front member E110 comprises a plate-shaped front plate E111 that forms the front surface, and a plate-shaped bottom surface portion E112 that stands upright from the back surface of the front plate E111.

The front plate E111 is formed from a pair of vertical sections extending vertically from both ends of its length, and an inclined section that connects the vertical sections and is inclined vertically downward from both ends of the length toward the center.

The front plate E111 has multiple through holes E111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the front plate E111. When assembled (unitized), the lower frame E86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes E111a to the base plate 60.

An receiving opening EOPin is formed in the front plate E111 (drilled in the plate thickness direction). As described above, the receiving opening EOPin is an opening that receives balls that flow (enter) into the upper frame passage ERt0 (see FIG. 1628).

An outlet EOPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) in the front plate E111 at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1628). The outlet EOPout is circular when viewed from the front, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outline of a ball. As described above, the outlet EOPout is an opening that serves as the exit when the ball guided through the fourth passage ERt4 flows out into the play area.

As described above, the front plate E111 has a protruding portion E111b protruding from the front side (arrow F direction) of the first outflow surface E141a. In addition, a notch E111c having substantially the same shape as the second outflow surface E141b in a front view is formed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the second outflow surface E141b. By passing through the notch E111c, the ball guided through the sixth passage ERt6 flows out (flows down) into the play area.

A pair of restricting portions E111d protrude from the rear surface of the front plate E111 on the longitudinal outer side of the inclined portion. The interposed member E140 is sandwiched between the front member E110 and the base member E130, and the restricting portions E111d abut against the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140, thereby preventing the interposed member E140 from detaching upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the base member E130. This makes it unnecessary to fasten the interposed member E140 to the front member E110 or the base member E130 with tapping screws, thereby reducing product costs.

The bottom surface portion E112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal length of the front plate E111, thereby preventing the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

The guide member E120 is for forming the first passage ERt1 together with the front member E110, and includes a pair of side portions E121 and a back portion E122 that connects the pair of side portions E121.

The pair of side portions E121 are formed into a plate-like body that is vertically elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from the side. The pair of side portions E121 are arranged opposite each other in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) with a distance greater than the diameter of the sphere, with the surface at one end in the short side direction (surface on the side facing the arrow F) abutting the back surface (surface on the side facing the arrow B) of the front plate E111 (front member E110).

The back portion E122 connects the other short-side ends and the upper ends of the pair of side portions E121, and is curved in an arc that is convex from one short-side end to the other short-side end of the side portions E121.

The first passage ERt1 is formed by a space partitioned by the guide member E120 and the front plate E111 (front member E110) to allow the balls to move (flow down, fall). In addition, the lower part (arrow D direction) of the first passage ERt1 is open. This allows the flow direction of the balls that have passed through the receiving port EOPin and flowed into the first passage ERt1 to be changed (shifted) downward and guided to the second passage ERt2.

The base member E130 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of first inclined surfaces E133 facing each other, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E130, and a plate-shaped back plate E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 to each other. The detailed configuration of the base member E130 will be described with reference to Figures 1629 to 1636 as well as Figures 1637 to 1640.

The curved section E131 extends in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) as a substantially straight passage when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) and the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow D) (see FIG. 1636 (c)).

The curved portion E131 has an outflow surface E131a recessed at the lowest vertical position. The outflow surface E131a is a portion for allowing the balls guided through the curved portion E131 to flow out into the sorting passage E150, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the sorting passage E150.

A cutout portion E132a is formed in the wall plate E132 on the sorting passage E150 side (the opposing side of the pair of wall plates E132). By passing through this cutout portion E132a, the balls can flow down from the curved portion E131 to the sorting passage E150. The cutout portion E132a is also formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball (about five times the diameter of the ball in this embodiment). The larger the size of the cutout portion E132a, the more the balls can flow down into the sorting passage E150 from any position in the front-to-rear direction.

The second passage ERt2 is formed by the space partitioned by the curved portion E131 and the wall panel E132. The curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) is disposed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1), and a vertical step is formed between the curved portion E131 and the first passage ERt1. In other words, the ball falls freely from the first passage ERt1 to the second passage ERt2.

In addition, the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1) is disposed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the curved portion E131. Therefore, the ball can be sent from the first passage ERt1 to the end of the front side of the second passage ERt2.

As a result, the ball that flows down to the front end of the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can move back and forth in the front-to-back direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) along the arc-shaped curve of the curved portion E131. This allows the ball to be sent from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) with a velocity component in the front-to-back direction.

The first inclined surface portion E133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b, and a groove portion E133c.

The insertion hole E133a is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at approximately the center of the first inclined surface portion E133, and is formed so that the engaged portion E153 of the distribution passage E150 described later can be inserted therethrough (see Figures 1631 and 1638 (b)).

The restricting portion E133b is erected from the front edge of the insertion hole E133a on the underside of the first inclined portion E133, and its underside is formed parallel to the inclined surface of the first inclined portion E133 (see Figures 1638(b) and 1639(b)).

The groove portion E133c is a groove formed along the inclination direction at approximately the center of the first inclined surface portion E133 in the front-rear direction, and a pair is formed on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the insertion hole E133a. In the groove portion E133c, the guided portion E152 of the sorting passage E150 described later is arranged so as to be slidable in the inclination direction (see Figures 1631, 1638(a), and 1640(a)). A guide wall is erected around the groove portion E133c to prevent damage to the groove portion E133c.

The first inclined surface portion E133 is provided with multiple (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the sorting passage E150, and a cover E202.

The cylindrical body E201 is intended to facilitate the displacement of the sorting passage E150 in the first inclined surface portion E133, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an axial hole formed around its axis. A rotating shaft is inserted into the axial hole and the cylindrical body E201 is disposed on the first inclined surface portion E133 with the rotating shaft aligned in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). This allows the cylindrical body E201 to be rotatably disposed on the first inclined surface portion E133. As the cylindrical body E201 rotates around its axis, the sorting passage E150 abutting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body E201 can be easily displaced.

The cover E202 is for holding the cylindrical body E201 on the first sloped surface portion E133, and is formed in a plate shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the first sloped surface portion E133. The cover E202 has a hole larger than the insertion hole E133a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E133a of the first sloped surface portion E133, and a groove having approximately the same outer shape as the groove portion E133c is formed at a position corresponding to the pair of groove portions E133c. In addition, a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 is formed at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201.

The cover E202 is disposed on the upper surface of the first sloped portion E133 with its upper surface parallel to the inclined surface of the first sloped portion E133.

A rotating shaft longer than the hole drilled in the cover E202 at a position corresponding to the cylinder E201 is inserted into the cylinder E201, the cylinder E201 and the rotating shaft are disposed on the first inclined surface E133, and the first inclined surface E133 and the cover E202 are fastened and fixed with a tapping screw, so that the cover E202 can hold the rotating shaft and the cylinder E201 through which the rotating shaft is inserted on the first inclined surface E133.

The cylindrical body E201 is arranged so that a part of its side (outer peripheral surface) protrudes from the upper surface of the cover E202 through a hole formed in the cover E202, thereby allowing the cylindrical body E201 and the sorting passage E150 to come into contact with each other.

The mounting portion E134 is formed substantially horizontally vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the end of the first inclined surface portion E133 on the downward inclination direction. The front end of the mounting portion E134 is disposed closer to the back plate E137 (in the direction of arrow B) than the front end of the first inclined surface portion E133.

The curved portion E134a is disposed by connecting the mounting portion E134 and the first and second sloped portions E133 and E135, and the curved portion E134a is curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the back panel E137.

The second inclined surface portion E135 is a portion for forming the fifth passage ERt5 (part of it), and is formed vertically below the mounting portion E134 (in the direction of arrow D), sloping downward from the back plate E137 toward the front member E110. The second inclined surface portion E135 is formed with an insertion hole E135a, a central passage E135b, a pair of vertical wall portions E135c, a partition portion E135d, and a ball-throwing wall E135e.

A fifth passage ERt5 is formed in the space partitioned by the second inclined surface portion E135, the mounting portion E134, the curved portion E134a, and the back plate E137.

The through hole E135a is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at approximately the center of the second inclined surface portion E135 and is larger than the outline of a sphere. A recess is provided on the outer periphery of the through hole E135a along the outer edge thereof for inserting the lower end of the cylindrical wall E163 of the central passage E160 (described later).

The central passage E135b is a portion for forming the seventh passage ERt7, and is curved in a circular arc that is convex vertically downward, and the curved shape is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from being sent (flowing out) from the central passage E135b to the inclined surface of the second inclined surface portion E135 when the ball is sent to the central passage E135b.

The central passage E135b connects the edge of the front side (arrow F direction) of the second sloped surface portion E135 to the insertion hole E135a, and is formed by sloping downward from the edge of the front side of the second sloped surface portion E135 toward the insertion hole E135a. This allows the ball guided into the central passage E135b to be sent toward the insertion hole E135a. In other words, the seventh passage ERt7 is formed by the arc-shaped curved space of the central passage E135b.

The central passage E135b is disposed at a position overlapping with the first outlet surface E141a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the ball sent from the first outlet surface E141a to be guided to the central passage E135b.

The pair of vertical walls E135c are sections for separating the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), and protrude vertically upward (arrow U direction) on the rear panel E137 side (arrow B direction side) at both ends of the central passage E135b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The length of the pair of vertical walls E135c in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is shorter than the length of the central passage E135b, and they are disposed on the insertion hole E135a side (arrow B direction side) of the central passage E135b.

As a result, the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) crosses the boundary between the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the pair of vertical wall portions E135c, and the ball is guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). On the other hand, the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) abuts against the pair of vertical wall portions E135c, preventing it from crossing the boundary between (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), and the ball flows down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and is guided to the sixth passage ERt6. In this way, by making it more difficult for balls to be thrown into the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the excitement of the game can be increased.

The partition portion E135d protrudes vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is formed by connecting the outer edge of the insertion hole E135a to the back plate E137. This makes it possible to prevent the balls flowing down from one sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) from being guided to the other sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) side of the second inclined surface portion E135.

The ball-throwing wall E135e is formed by standing from the underside of the second inclined surface E135 (see FIG. 1638(a)). The ball-throwing wall E135e is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from below, with an arcuate portion along the edge of the back side (arrow B direction) of the insertion hole E135a and straight portions extending from both ends of the arcuate portion to the front side (arrow F direction). This allows a ball to be thrown through the space surrounded by the ball-throwing wall E135e, and a ball that passes through the insertion hole E135a can be sent to the back side passage E181b of the cover member E180 described later.

The protruding portion E136 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 side toward the second inclined surface portion E135 side, and a guide portion E136a is formed on the protruding portion E136.

The guide portion E136a is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the interposed member E140 to the base member E130, and protrudes vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the end of the opposing side (inner side in the left-right direction) of the overhang portion E136. A lower passage E143 of the interposed member E140, which will be described later, is disposed between the opposing pair of guide portions E136a.

The rear plate E137 is formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The rear plate E137 is disposed in contact with the rear side ends of the pair of first inclined surface portions E133, the pair of mounting portions E134, and the second inclined surface portion E135, and the upper end of the rear plate E137 is located above (in the direction of arrow U) the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) and the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5). This allows the rear plate E137 to prevent the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) or the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) from being guided to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of the rear plate E137.

The intermediate member E140 includes a rolling portion E141 that extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, a plate-shaped abutment portion E142 that protrudes vertically downward (arrow D direction) from the underside of the rolling portion E141, and a lower passage E143 that stands upright from the back surface of the abutment portion E142.

The cross-sectional shape of the rolling portion E141 in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed with a downward slope toward the center of the extension direction.

The upper surface of the rolling portion E141 is formed with a downward incline from the front member E110 side (arrow F direction) to the base member E130 side (arrow B direction). As described above, the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 is formed with a first outflow surface E141a formed with a downward incline toward the back side (arrow B direction) and a second outflow surface E141b formed with a downward incline toward the front side (arrow F direction).

In addition, undulations are formed in the rolling portion E141, with the top of the undulations being located in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). The second outflow surface E141b is located at the bottom of the undulations, while the first outflow surface E141a is located at the top of the undulations. Therefore, the first outflow surface E141a is located in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

The first outlet surface E141a is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), so that the balls flowing down the first outlet surface E141a can be guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

A notch E141c is formed on both left and right ends (in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the upper surface of the rolling portion E141, and the protruding portion E111e of the front member E110 abuts against the notch E141c. The interposed member E140 is also arranged in abutment against the upper surface of the overhanging portion E136. This fixes the interposed member E140 to the base member E130 (front member E110). As a result, a sixth passage ERt6 is formed by the space partitioned between the interposed member E140 (upper surface of the rolling portion E141), the base member E130, and the front member E110 (rear surface of the front plate E111).

In the contact portion E142, a passage opening E142a is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position that is the back surface of the outlet EOPout. The passage opening E142a is generally rectangular in front view and is formed to be slightly larger than the outline of a sphere.

The lower passage E143 protrudes from the outer edge of the passage opening E142a toward the cover member E180 (the direction of arrow B), and the space partitioned by the lower passage E143 forms (part of) the fourth passage ERt4.

The lower passage E143 is formed with a downward incline from the cover member E180 side toward the front member E110 side (the direction of arrow F), and the side and bottom surfaces of the lower passage E143 are formed to protrude toward the cover member E180 side from the top surface. In other words, the top surface of the lower passage E143 on the cover member E180 side is open.

In addition, a groove E143a having a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the width direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower surface of the lower passage E143 (see FIG. 1637(a)). The groove E143a extends in a substantially straight line along the protruding direction of the lower surface of the lower passage E143.

The groove width (dimension in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the groove E143a is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension perpendicular to the bottom surface of the lower passage E143) of the groove E143a is set to a depth that prevents the ball from contacting the bottom surface of the groove E143a.

This allows the ball on the underside of the lower passage E143 to be supported at two points (a pair of ridges where the underside of the lower passage E143 and the groove E143a intersect). Therefore, the ball can be guided in a stable state compared to when the groove E143a is not formed (i.e., when the ball is supported at only one point). To explain in more detail, the ball is sandwiched between the groove E143a, allowing it to flow down the center in the width direction while being prevented from displacing in the width direction.

As a result, even if the center positions of the outlet EOPout and the passage opening E142a are misaligned due to dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, and the front member E110 (front plate E111) is partially disposed in front of the passage opening E142a (a state in which part of the outer edge of the passage opening E142a is blocked by the front member E110 (front plate E111)), the ball that flows down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) passes through the outlet EOPout and flows out into the play area.

As described above, the lower passage E143 is disposed between the pair of opposing guide portions E136a of the protruding portion E136. This makes it possible to easily dispose the lower passage E143 (interposition member E140) in the base member E130 by abutting the lower passage E143 against the pair of guide portions E136a when assembling the lower frame E86b.

The sorting passage E150 is for the balls to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the first inclined surface E133 (cover E202). Thus, like the first inclined surface E133, the sorting passage E150 is disposed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 to the mounting portion E134. The sorting passage E150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided portions E152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E150, and an engaged portion E153 erected between the pair of guided portions E152. The detailed configuration of the sorting passage E150 will be described with reference to Figs. 1629 to 1636 as well as Figs. 1637 to 1640.

The protrusions E151 are parts for changing the direction of movement (flow) of the balls, and are regularly arranged on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 with a spacing that allows the balls to move (flow down, roll) between the protrusions E151. The shape of the protrusions E151 is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E150. The substantially hexagonal shape is formed such that two sides arranged parallel to the inclination direction of the sorting passage E150 are longer than the other four sides, in other words, longer in the direction along the inclination direction of the sorting passage E150 than in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction). In addition, the other four sides except for the two long sides are formed to be the same length. In addition, the side of the protrusions E151 is formed at an incline with respect to the sorting passage E150 (in this embodiment, at an incline of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150), and the protrusions E151 are formed in a manner in which a part of the apex side of the hexagonal pyramid is cut off. In other words, the cross-sectional area in a plane parallel to the sorting passage E150 becomes smaller as it moves away from the top surface of the sorting passage E150.

The protrusions E151 are formed with their long sides parallel to each other in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, the distance between the opposing protrusions on the top surface of the sorting passage E150 is approximately one-quarter of the diameter of the sphere). In addition, a set of protrusions E151 arranged on the downward inclination direction of a set of protrusions E151 arranged in a row in the front-rear direction is shifted in the front-rear direction by half the distance between the protrusions E151 in the front-rear direction. In other words, in the front-rear direction, a set of protrusions E151 arranged on the downward inclination direction is arranged between the opposing protrusions E151 of a set of protrusions E151. This allows a ball that flows down between the long sides of a pair of protrusions E151 in the front-rear direction to abut against the protrusions E151 arranged on the downward inclination direction.

The distance between the short sides of the protrusions E151 is also the same as the distance between the long sides of the protrusions E151. As a result, one protrusion E151 is arranged in the sorting passage E150 at the same distance from the protrusions E151 arranged around it. A third passage ERt3 is formed by the space partitioned by the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 and the inclined side surface E151a of the protrusions E151.

In this embodiment, the protrusion height of the protrusion E151 is approximately half the radius of the sphere. The distance between the protrusions E151 at the protruding tips is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to move (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) while abutting against the inclined side surfaces E151a of adjacent protrusions E151. In other words, the protrusions E151 can prevent the balls from remaining in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3).

When a ball moves (flows down, rolls) in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the flow direction of the ball is changed (changed) by contacting the protrusion E151, and the ball is guided between the opposing protrusions E151 formed on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side) or the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction side). In this way, the protrusions E151 can change (change) the flow direction of the ball that flows down along the inclined direction.

In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) between the long sides of adjacent protrusions E151 in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B), the ball can move (flowing down, rolling) from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 along the inclination direction of the distribution passage E150.

In addition, the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 have their flow speed reduced by coming into contact with the protrusion E151. This allows the balls to flow down the sorting passage E150 for a longer period of time compared to when the sorting passage E150 does not have the protrusion E151.

In addition, since the protrusion E151 is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, it can be easily seen by the player. This makes it easier for the player to see the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is changed. That is, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) moves at a relatively low speed, and it takes a relatively long time to move (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3). However, the time required for the ball to move (flowing down, rolling) can be further increased by contact with the protrusion E151. As a result, it is easier for the player to see the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball is changed (changed), which can increase the interest of the game.

In this way, in this embodiment, the protrusion E151 can change (vary) the flow direction of the balls flowing down the distribution passage E150 and extend (vary) the flow time, which can increase the excitement of the game. In addition, by using a single part (the protrusion E151) to change (vary) the flow direction and extend (vary) the flow time, the number of parts can be reduced, which can reduce product costs.

In addition, because the distribution passage E150 is arranged at an angle, even if the flow speed of the ball decreases, the flow speed increases due to the ball's own weight, allowing it to flow down the third passage ERt3.

The protrusions E151, which are disposed adjacent to the front and rear edges of the sorting passage E150, are formed in only a portion of a substantially hexagonal shape; in other words, the shape of the protrusions E151 is formed in such a manner that it is cut off by the front and rear edges of the sorting passage E150. This allows more third passages ERt3 to be formed in the sorting passage E150, increasing the interest of the game.

The guided portions E152 are arranged in pairs in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) with the engaged portion E153 between them, approximately in the center of the fore-aft direction (arrow F-B direction) of the sorting path E150 (see Figures 1638 (a) and 1640 (a)). The fore-aft dimension of the guided portion E152 is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion E133c of the base member E130. By inserting the guided portion E152 into the groove portion E133c, the fore-aft displacement of the sorting path E150 relative to the base member E130 is restricted.

As described above, a guide wall is provided around the groove portion E133c, so that the guided portion E152 comes into contact with the guide wall of the groove portion E133c, thereby preventing damage to the groove portion E133c.

The engaged portion E153 has an engaging recess E153a, the rear surface of which is recessed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and a restricting piece E153b, which protrudes toward the front side from the lower end of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 1638 (b)).

The engagement recess E153a is formed by extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). The restricting piece E153b is parallel to the inclined surface of the first inclined surface portion E133 (sorting passage E150) and is disposed below the restricting portion E133b of the first inclined surface portion E133 (arrow D direction). This makes it possible to prevent the restricting piece E153b and the restricting portion E133b from coming into contact when the sorting passage E150 is displaced in the inclined direction. On the other hand, the restricting piece E153b comes into contact with the restricting portion E133b, thereby preventing the sorting passage E150 from being displaced upward (arrow U direction).

The sorting passage E150 is disposed parallel to the inclined surface of the first inclined portion E133 while abutting against the side surface of the cylindrical body E201 protruding from the top surface of the cover E202. The cylindrical body E201 rotates about its axis, which allows the sorting passage E150 to be easily displaced.

In addition, at least a portion of the sorting path E150 is disposed below the curved portion E131, i.e., the sorting path E150 is disposed at a position where it does not pass completely from below the curved portion E131 to the attachment portion E134 side, and the distance between the sorting path E150 and the curved portion E131 is disposed to be smaller than the radius of the ball (see Fig. 1638 (a) and Fig. 1640 (a)). This makes it possible to prevent balls sent to the sorting path E150 from flowing out from below the curved portion E131 to both longitudinal ends of the base member E130. In addition, it is possible to prevent the balls from being pinched between the curved portion E131 and the sorting path E150.

The distribution passage E150 is formed as a generally rectangular plate-like body that is long in the direction of the incline when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the incline. This makes it easier to send balls to the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) in the shorter direction than the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) that is arranged at one end side (downward inclination side) of the distribution passage E150 in the longitudinal direction.

In addition, the length of the distribution passage E150 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), which is the short side, is at least twice the diameter of the ball, and in this embodiment, is approximately 4.5 times the diameter of the ball. This allows multiple (two in this embodiment) ball movement (flowing down, falling) areas to be formed on the downward inclination side of the distribution passage E150. As a result, players can expect that the balls that flow down the distribution passage E150 will be sorted into the fourth passage ERt4, which has a high probability of winning the first winning hole 64, out of the multiple passages (fourth passage ERt4, fifth passage ERt5, and sixth passage ERt6) that are formed, and this can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, even if fraud is committed with the lower frame E86b, it is difficult to commit the fraud. To explain in detail, even if a fraudulent attempt is made by causing the ball to flow down to the fourth passage ERt4, either the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6, which have a lower probability of causing the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 than the fourth passage ERt4, the ball will move (flow down, fall) down the other of the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6, making the fraudulent attempt difficult.

A notch E150a is formed in part of the front side of the sorting passage E150 on the downward inclination direction. By passing through the notch E150a, the balls that flow down (fall) through the sorting passage E150 can easily come into contact with the flow path adjustment block E170.

The central passage E160 includes an erection passage E161 that extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, an upper hole E162 that opens (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at substantially the center of the erection passage E161 in the left-right direction, a cylindrical wall E163 that stands along the upper hole E162 from the underside of the erection passage E161, and installation parts E164 that are disposed at both left-right ends of the erection passage E161.

The width dimension of the erected passage E161 (the extension direction of the erected passage E161 and the direction perpendicular to the vertical direction, the direction of the arrows F-B) is made larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The erection passage E161 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) that is curved like a circular arc that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction). This allows the ball that flows down the erection passage E161 to be guided to the upper hole E162 that is formed approximately in the left-right center of the erection passage E161 (the vertically lowest part of the erection passage E161).

A rear wall E161a is formed on the erected passage E161, which stands vertically upward (in the direction of arrow F) from the edge of its rear end (in the direction of arrow B). This makes it possible to prevent balls that flow down the erected passage E161 from falling from the rear side.

The erected passage E161 is formed so that its cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to its extension direction is curved into an arc that is convex downward in the vertical direction. This makes it possible to prevent balls that flow down the erected passage E161 from flowing down (falling) from the front side.

The upper hole E162 is circular when viewed from above and is formed to be approximately the same size as the insertion hole E135a formed in the second inclined surface portion E135, i.e., larger than the outer shape of a sphere. A protrusion E162a that protrudes upward is formed around the periphery of the upper hole E162. This makes it difficult for a sphere flowing down the erection passage E161 to be guided into the upper hole E162.

The cylindrical wall E163 is formed in a cylindrical shape with approximately the same inner diameter as the upper hole E162, and is disposed on the second sloped portion E135 with its lower end inserted into a recess formed on the outer periphery of the insertion hole E135a of the second sloped portion E135. This makes it possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the lower end of the cylindrical wall E163 and the upper surface of the second sloped portion E135. In addition, the central passage E160 can be positioned relative to the second sloped portion E135.

A notch E163a is formed in the cylindrical wall E163 at a position corresponding to the central passage E135b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the notch is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The fourth passage ERt4 (part of it) is formed by the arc-shaped curved space of the erected passage E161 and the space surrounded by the cylindrical wall E163.

The mounting portion E164 is a vertically elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from above, and when the central passage E160 is fixed (disposed) to the base member E130 (mounting portion E134), the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 is formed flush with the upper surface of the cover E202 disposed on the first inclined surface portion E133. This makes it possible to prevent the distribution passage E150 and the central passage E160 (mounting portion E164) from coming into contact with each other even if the distribution passage E150 is displaced.

The flow path adjustment block E170 is used to change (vary) the direction in which the balls flow down, and is formed in a roughly triangular pyramid shape. The flow path adjustment block E170 is formed with a front wall E171 parallel to the front surface of the base member E130, an outer wall E172 facing the curved portion E134a, and an inner wall E173 facing the central passage E135b. A pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 are disposed on either side of the central passage E135b in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

When viewed from above, the flow path adjustment block E170 is formed in a triangular shape whose width increases toward the downward inclination side (arrow F direction) of the second inclined surface portion E135, and is disposed on the second inclined surface portion E135 with the front wall E171 and the front surface of the base member E130 formed flush. This makes it possible to prevent a ball flowing down the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) from abutting against the flow path adjustment block E170.

The outer wall E172 is curved convexly toward the curved portion E134a, and the inner wall E173 is curved concavely from the central passage E135b toward the center of the flow path adjustment block E170. The space between the outer wall E172 and the curved portion E134a, and the space between the inner wall E173 and the central passage E135b are each larger than the outer shape of a sphere, allowing the sphere to flow down between the outer wall E172 and the curved portion E134a, and between the inner wall E173 and the central passage E135b.

The cover member E180 includes a front cover member E181 disposed below the base member E130 (in the direction of the arrow D) and a rear cover member E182 disposed on the rear side of the front cover member E181 (in the direction of the arrow B).

The cover member E180 and the driving means E190 described later will be explained with reference to Figure 1638 as appropriate in addition to Figures 1629 to 1636.

The front cover member E181 includes a main body E181a formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a rear passage E181b recessed in the approximate center of the longitudinal direction of the main body E181a from the front cover member E181 side (arrow F direction side) to the rear cover member E182 side (arrow B direction side), a motor mounting surface E181c disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the main body E181a, a first upper surface plate E181d disposed above the motor mounting surface E181c (arrow U direction side), and a second upper surface plate E181d disposed on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the motor mounting surface E181c. A first lower plate E181e is arranged vertically downward (arrow D direction) in parallel with a predetermined distance in between, a second upper plate E181f and a second lower plate E181g are erected in parallel with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction) of the first lower plate E181e, a plurality of slide protrusions E181h (five in this embodiment) are arranged on the upper surfaces of the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g, and a pivot support portion E181i is arranged between the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction).

The motor mounting surface E181c, the first upper plate E181d, the first lower plate E181e, the second upper plate E181f, and the second lower plate E181g are erected from the rear surface of the main body E181a.

The rear passage E181b is formed with a throwing plate E181b1 erected from its underside, and a pair of support plates E181b2 erected on either side of the throwing plate E181b1 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

The throwing plate E181b1 in the longitudinal direction is disposed at a position corresponding to the center of the insertion hole E135a of the second slope portion E135, and a throwing slope portion E181b3 that slopes upward toward the rear side is formed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the upper surface of the throwing plate E181b1. As a result, the ball guided inside the cylindrical wall E163 of the central passage E160 abuts against the throwing slope portion E181b3, and the guiding direction is changed (changed) from the vertical downward direction (arrow D direction) to the front member E110 side (arrow F direction).

The pair of support plates E181b2 are used to guide the ball as it flows down the throwing plate E181b1, and are each formed vertically below the straight portion of the throwing wall E135e.

The upper surface of the rear side passage E181b has an opening, through which the throwing wall E135e of the second sloped portion E135 is inserted into the rear side passage E181b, and the space partitioned by the lower surface of the second sloped portion E135, the throwing plate E181b1, the throwing wall E135e, and the pair of support plates E181b2 forms (part of) the fourth passage ERt4.

The motor mounting surface E181c is the portion where the mounting member E192 of the drive means E190 (described later) is disposed (fixed), and a central notch E181c1 is formed in the motor mounting surface E181c at approximately the center in the longitudinal direction, and the shape of the notch is approximately U-shaped when viewed from above, with the rear side (arrow B direction side) open.

The first upper plate E181d and the second upper plate E181f are arranged in parallel. Therefore, the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g are also arranged in parallel. The space partitioned by the first upper plate E181d and the first lower plate E181e, and the space partitioned by the second upper plate E181f and the second lower plate E181g are spaces for respectively arranging the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 of the drive means E190 described later.

The upper surfaces of the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g each have a plurality of protrusions E181e1 (two on the first lower plate E181e and four on the second lower plate E181g in this embodiment) formed in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). The protrusions E181e1 come into contact with the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195, thereby reducing the frictional force generated between the first lower plate E181e and the first transmission member E194 and between the second lower plate E181g and the second transmission member E195, and facilitating the displacement of the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 (see FIG. 1637 (b)).

The slide protrusion E181h is intended to guide the displacement of the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195, and is disposed parallel to the first upper plate E181d, the first lower plate E181e, the second upper plate E181f, and the second lower plate E181g.

The pivot support E181i is formed as a bearing on the rear surface (surface on the direction of arrow B) of the main body E181a, and a pivot support E182d is formed on the front surface of the rear cover member E182 at a position facing the pivot support E181i. The pinion gear E196 of the driving means E190 described below has ends of a shaft E197 protruding from its side surface (front-rear surface, surface in the direction of arrows F-B). The shaft E197 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B), and both ends of the shaft E197 are supported by the pivot support E181i of the front cover member E181 and the pivot support E182d of the rear cover member E182, respectively. This allows the pinion gear E196 to be rotatably disposed between the opposing front cover member E181 and rear cover member E182.

The rear cover member E182 includes a main body E182a formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a first top plate E182b erected from the front of the main body E182a on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the main body E182a, a second top plate E182c erected from the front of the main body E182a on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the main body E182a, and a pivot support E182d disposed on the front of the main body E182a in a position facing the pivot support E181i of the front cover member E181.

The first and second top plates E182b and E182c are respectively formed with a first notch E182b1 and a second notch E182c1 that are open on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F). The engagement bases E194b of the first and second transmission members E194 and E195, which will be described later, are inserted into the first and second notches E182b1 and E182c1, respectively.

The pivot support portion E182d is for supporting the shaft E197 of the driving means E190, and is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface facing the direction of the arrow F) of the main body portion E182a, and is formed in a position facing the pivot support portion E181i of the front cover member E181, as described above.

That is, the shaft E197 of the driving means E190 is supported by the support portion E181i of the front cover member E181 and the support portion E182d of the rear cover member E182, and the axial direction of the shaft E197 is aligned along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

The driving means E190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, an attachment member E192 disposed above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of the arrow U), a driving force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191, a first transmission member E194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E195 engaged with the first transmission member E194, a pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195, and a shaft E197 passing through the shaft center of the pinion gear E196.

The drive motor E191 displaces the sorting passage E150 in its inclined direction, and is arranged with its axis pointing vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This allows the installation space in the front-to-rear direction to be smaller than when the axis is arranged to point in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B).

The mounting member E192 is used to fix (mount) the drive motor E191 to the front cover member E181, and is formed with a base portion E192a formed in a generally rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, and a peripheral wall portion E192b erected vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) along the outer edge of the base portion E192a.

A through hole is drilled in the thickness direction of the base portion E192a at approximately the center thereof for inserting the shaft of the drive motor E191, and the drive motor E191 is fixed (disposed) to the mounting member E192 with the shaft of the drive motor E191 inserted through the through hole. The upper end of the shaft of the drive motor E191 is disposed vertically above the upper end of the peripheral wall portion E192b.

The driving force transmission member E193 is for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor E191 to the first transmission member E194, and is formed in a cylindrical shape smaller than the inner shape of the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c, and the shaft of the driving motor E191 is fixed to its axis. The driving force transmission member E193 is formed with an eccentric shaft E193a disposed at a position different from the axis, and a flange portion E193b protruding from the side wall of the driving force transmission member E193.

The eccentric shaft E193a is a part that engages with the first transmission member E194, and is formed in a cylindrical shape smaller than the diameter of the driving force transmission member E193. When viewed from above, the outer edge of the eccentric shaft E193a is disposed inscribed in the outer edge of the driving force transmission member E193. Therefore, the axis of the eccentric shaft E193a is disposed at a position different from the axis of the driving force transmission member E193, that is, it is disposed eccentrically with respect to the axis of the drive motor E191. Therefore, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape centered on the axis of the driving force transmission member E193 (the axis of the drive motor E191) when viewed from above.

The flange portion E193b is a portion for restricting the displacement of the driving force transmission member E193 in the vertical direction (arrow U direction), and is disposed at the end on the driving motor E191 side (arrow D direction side) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). The outer shape of the flange portion E193b is formed into a circle larger than the inner shape of the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c, which allows the flange portion E193b to abut against the motor mounting surface E181c. As a result, the driving force transmission member E193 inserted into the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c can be prevented from detaching upward (arrow U direction) from the motor mounting surface E181c.

The first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the distribution passage E150.

The first transmission member E194 is formed with a main body E194a formed in a generally rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body E194a, an engagement portion E194c protruding from the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction side), a first rack portion E194d protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) of the main body E194a, and a transmission recess E194e recessed into the lower surface of the main body E194a.

The main body E194a is disposed above the driving force transmission member E193 (in the direction of the arrow U). The size of the main body E194a in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the driving force transmission member E193, and the driving force transmission member E193 is disposed between the front and rear ends of the main body E194a, i.e., at a position overlapping with the main body E194a when viewed from above.

The engagement portion E194c is generally circular when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the inner walls of the engagement recess E153a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the engagement portion E194c to be inserted into the engagement recess E153a. The engagement portion E194c comes into contact with the inner walls of the engagement recess E153a in the left-right direction, allowing the driving force of the drive motor E191 to be transmitted to the sorting passage E150.

In addition, since the engagement recess E153a extends in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), the engagement portion E194c can be displaced vertically within the engagement recess E153a. In other words, the driving force of the drive motor E191 in the vertical direction can be prevented from being transmitted to the sorting passage E150.

In this way, the engagement portion E194c transmits the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 to the sorting passage E150, while not transmitting the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 to the sorting passage E150, allowing the sorting passage E150 to displace along the inclined surface of the first inclined portion E133 of the base member E130.

The first rack portion E194d has a rack gear E194d1 engraved on its underside that meshes with the pinion gear E196, and the pinion gear E196 is rotated by the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194.

The transmission recess E194e extends in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and is formed from the front end to the rear end. The width of the groove of the transmission recess E194e (the distance between the inner walls in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer shape of the eccentric shaft E193a. By inserting the eccentric shaft E193a into the transmission recess E194e, the driving force of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194 via the driving force transmission member E193.

In more detail, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape around the axis of the drive force transmission member E193 (the axis of the drive motor E191) in a top view. When the left-right inner walls of the transmission recess E194e come into contact with the eccentric shaft E193a, the left-right displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a caused by the drive of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and the first transmission member E194 is displaced in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the transmission recess E194e is formed from the front end to the rear end of the main body E194a, i.e., is formed longer than the outer shape of the driving force transmission member E193, so that the eccentric shaft E193a and the inner wall of the transmission recess E194e in the front-rear direction are not in contact with each other. Therefore, the front-rear displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a caused by the drive of the drive motor E191 is not transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and the first transmission member E194 can be prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction.

In addition, because the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be set to a predetermined amount, that is, the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined amount. In addition, the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be made to reciprocate.

The second transmission member E195 is formed with a main body E195a that is substantially rectangular and elongated when viewed from the rear, a second rack portion E195b that protrudes from a side surface on one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the main body E195a, a guide groove E195c that is disposed in the approximate center in the longitudinal direction of the main body E195a, an engagement base E194b that protrudes from the top surface on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the main body E195a, and an engagement portion E194c that protrudes from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (the side in the direction of arrow F).

A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196 is engraved on the upper surface of the second rack portion E195b, and the rotation of the pinion gear E196 displaces the second transmission member E195 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The guide groove E195c extends in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction, arrow L-R direction) and is formed in the front cover member E181 on its inner side, through which a fastening portion is inserted for fastening the front cover member E181 and the rear cover member E182. By inserting the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 into the guide groove E195c, the left-right displacement of the second transmission member E195 can be guided. In addition, a tapping screw is screwed into the fastening portion of the front cover member E181, and the rigidity of the tapping screw can be utilized to prevent damage caused by contact between the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 and the guide groove E195c.

The pinion gear E196 is disposed with its axial direction aligned along the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). A shaft E197 is inserted into an insertion hole drilled in the axial direction, and the shaft E197 is supported by the shaft supports E181i, E182d disposed on the front cover member E181 and the rear cover member E182, so that the pinion gear E196 is rotatably disposed on the cover member E180.

Next, the displacement (reciprocation) operation of the sorting passage E150 by the driving means E190 will be described with reference to Fig. 1637 to Fig. 1640. Fig. 1637(a) and Fig. 1639(a) are front views of the lower frame E86b with the front member E110 omitted, Fig. 1637(b) and Fig. 1639(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame E86b with the rear cover member E182 omitted, and Fig. 1637(c) and Fig. 1639(c) are top views of the lower frame E86b.

Figure 1638(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in Figure 1637(c), Figure 1638(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along line MDCXXXVIIIb-MDCXXXVIIIb in Figure 1638(a), and Figure 1638(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b. Figure 1640(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in Figure 1639(c), Figure 1640(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along line MDCXLb-MDCXLb in Figure 1640(a), and Figure 1640(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b.

Note that Figures 1637 and 1638 show the state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged in the first position, and Figures 1639 and 1640 show the state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in Figures 1637 and 1638, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E130. That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

When placed in the first position, the distribution passage E150 is placed above the installation part E164 of the central passage E160. This makes it easier to send balls that flow down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4).

In addition, the cutout portion E150a of the distribution passage E150 is positioned close to the outer wall E172 of the flow path adjustment block E170 when viewed from above. This makes it easier for balls flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to come into contact with the outer wall E172. This makes it possible to change (vary) the direction in which the balls are thrown, making the game more interesting.

As shown in Figures 1639 and 1640, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the second position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are located on the curved portion E131 side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E130. That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are disposed at positions spaced apart from each other compared to when disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed at positions spaced apart from each other.

When placed in the second position, the end of the sorting passage E150 on the downward side in the inclined direction when viewed from above is positioned approximately in the center in the left-right direction of the installation section E164. Therefore, balls that pass (flow down, roll) through the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can roll on the upper surface of the installation section E164. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to be sent from the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope section E135 (fifth passage ERt5), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The sorting passage E150 and the first and second transmission members E194 and E195 are engaged by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153. As described above, the engagement recess E153a is formed by extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) when viewed from the rear, so that the engagement portion E194c can be displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) within the engagement recess E153a. As a result, even when the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 is displaced in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), the sorting passage E150 can be displaced in the left-right direction as well as in the vertical direction. As a result, the sorting passage E150 can be displaced along its inclination direction (the inclination direction of the first inclined surface portion E133). That is, the sorting passage E150 and the protrusions E151 formed on its upper surface can be displaced (reciprocated) in a direction parallel to the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (the direction from the end of the sorting passage E150 on the curved section E131 side to the end on the central passage E160 side). As a result, it is easy to impart a change (change) to the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls. Also, the change (change) in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be made more diverse.

As described above, the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) are arranged to be able to move (flowing down, rolling) in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) while abutting against the inclined side surfaces E151a of the protrusions E151, so that the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can be prevented from remaining in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3). Therefore, in order to prevent the balls from remaining in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3), it is possible to prevent the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) from being displaced along a complex trajectory or with a large displacement amount or displacement speed. As a result, the driving means E190 can be simplified.

The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position is achieved by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved portion E131 side (arrow L direction side) by driving the drive motor E191.

As described above, the eccentric shaft E193a is inserted into the transmission recess E194e of the first transmission member E194, and thus displaces from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side in the same manner as the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as the first transmission member E194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the pinion gear E196 that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E194d is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second rack portion E195b that meshes with the pinion gear E196, i.e., the second transmission member E195, is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and the distribution passage E150 that engages with the second transmission member E195 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In this way, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 is transmitted to the second transmission member E195 via the pinion gear E196. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drive motors E191 installed and reduce production costs. In addition, the second transmission member E195 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first transmission member E194, i.e., it is not necessary to synchronize the displacement of the first transmission member E194 and the displacement of the second transmission member E195, and this makes it possible to reduce production costs.

In addition, because the pinion gear E196 is used, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 can be in the opposite direction (opposite phase). In other words, the vibrations in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) that occur when the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) on the base member E130 (first inclined surface portion E133) can be canceled out by each other. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for vibration-damping members and reduce product costs.

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the second position to the first position is performed by driving the drive motor E191, similar to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that, other than the sorting passage E150, the direction of displacement of the first transmission member E194, the direction of displacement of the second transmission member E195, and the direction of rotation of the pinion gear E196, the displacement is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Here, by keeping the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the same direction, the sorting passage E150 can be reciprocated left and right (arrow L-R direction) between the first position and the second position. To explain in detail, among the circular displacements of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the central passage E160 side toward the curved section E131 side displaces the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position. Also, among the circular displacements of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the curved section E131 side toward the central passage E160 side displaces the sorting passage E150 from the second position to the first position.

In this way, by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a in a circular shape when viewed from above, the sorting passage E150 can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position while maintaining the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the same direction. This makes it possible to suppress switching of the drive direction of the drive motor E191. As a result, a sensor for controlling the drive motor E191 is not required, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, because the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, it is possible to prevent the first transmission member E194 from displacing in the left-right direction beyond a predetermined amount. For example, in a configuration in which the drive motor E191 is engaged with the first transmission member E194 without going through the drive force transmission member E193, there is a risk that the first transmission member E194 will be displaced beyond a predetermined amount due to malfunction of the drive motor E191, poor control of the sensor, etc.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, and the first transmission member E194 is displaced in the left-right direction within a predetermined range, so that the first transmission member E194 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members (e.g., the central passage E160). In addition, the generation of vibrations caused by switching the driving direction of the drive motor E191 (stopping driving or restarting driving) can be prevented, and the reciprocating movement of the sorting passage E150 can be made smooth.

Returning from Figure 1629 to Figure 1636, we will explain the ball flowing down the lower frame E86b.

By passing through the receiving opening EOPin formed in the front plate E111, the ball is guided to the first passage ERt1, and then falls down the first passage ERt1 due to the ball's own weight, and is guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2).

The ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) reciprocates in the front-to-back direction (direction of arrows F-B) due to its shape, and is guided to the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) by passing through the notch portion E132a in the wall plate E132. This allows the ball guided to the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to pass through the notch portion E132a while having a velocity component in the front-to-back direction.

In addition, the notch E132a is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball, so that the ball can be guided from any position of the notch E132a to the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3).

This allows the balls flowing from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) in an irregular manner, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

As described above, the ball flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) has its flow direction changed (changed) by abutting against the protrusion E151. Here, the flow direction of the ball is changed (changed) to the rear side (arrow B direction), and the ball abuts against the rear plate E137 of the base member E130 and abuts against the side E151a of the protrusion E151 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) of the rear plate E137. In other words, the ball is sandwiched between the rear plate E137 and the protrusion E151, which may inhibit the flow of the ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor E191 reciprocates the sorting passage E150 along the inclination direction of the sorting passage E150 (first inclined surface portion E133), so that it is possible to prevent the balls from being pinched between the back plate E137 and the protrusion E151. In addition, by displacing (reciprocating) the sorting passage E150, it is possible to make the contact between the balls and the protrusion E151 irregular, and it is possible to diversify the change (change) in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passage E150. This makes it possible to prevent the change (change) in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passage E150 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) come into contact with the protrusion E151, and the speed of the flowing balls decreases, which allows the flow time of the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to be extended (changed). In addition, the flow direction is changed (varied), so the balls are guided to either the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4), the second sloped portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

When a ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is sent to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) of the central passage E160, it is guided toward the upper hole E162 formed in approximately the center of the erected passage E161 in the left-right direction. The ball flowing down the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) passes through the upper hole E162 and flows (falls) vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) inside the cylindrical wall E163 (fourth passage ERt4) by flowing down without changing (changing) its guide direction due to the protrusions E162a protruding from the periphery of the upper hole E162.

The ball that flows down (falls) inside the cylindrical wall E163 passes through the insertion hole E135a of the second inclined surface portion E135, is guided to the rear passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the front cover member E181, and when it comes into contact with the throwing inclined portion E181b3 of the throwing plate E181b1, its guiding direction is changed (transformed) from vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) to the front member E110 side (in the direction of arrow F), and flows down the top surface of the throwing plate E181b1 (see FIG. 1636 (c)).

The ball that flows down the top surface of the throwing plate E181b1 flows down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) of the intermediate member E140, passes through the passage opening E142a of the abutment portion E142, and is discharged into the playing area from the outlet EOPout of the front member E110.

When the direction of a ball flowing down the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) is changed (changed) by the protrusion E162a protruding from the periphery of the upper hole E162, the ball is sent from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the erected passage E161 to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

When a ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is sent to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), it is guided toward the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

When a ball flows down the second sloped surface E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), the flow direction is changed (varied) when the ball comes into contact with the flow path adjustment block E170 disposed on the second sloped surface E135. A ball that comes into contact with the inner wall E173 of the flow path adjustment block E170 may be guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), which can increase the excitement of the game.

When a ball flows down the second sloped surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the ball comes into contact with a pair of vertical wall portions E135c arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the boundary between the second sloped surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), thereby preventing the ball from being guided into the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

The ball guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) flows down toward the insertion hole E135a (in the direction of arrow B) of the second inclined surface portion E135 due to its inclination direction, passes through the insertion hole E135a, and is guided to the rear passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the front cover member E181.

Of the balls guided to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), those sent closer to the back plate E137 (in the direction of arrow B) than the central passage E160 come into contact with the cylindrical wall E163, preventing them from passing through the insertion hole E135a.

In addition, by abutting against the partition portion E135d formed on the second slope portion E135, the ball can be prevented from being sent from one side to the other in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the distribution passage E150, or from the other side to one side. As a result, a ball guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be prevented from being guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) by abutting against the side surface (surface formed in the left-right direction) of the attachment portion E134 and changing (changing) its flow direction.

In addition, by abutting against the partition portion E135d, the ball can be prevented from flowing down the back side (arrow B direction) of the cylindrical wall E163. This prevents the player from losing sight of the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

A ball sent from the front end (end on the arrow F direction side) of the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) or the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) rolls on the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) toward the center of its extension direction. Here, the cross-sectional shape of the rolling portion E141 in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed with a downward inclination toward the center of the extension direction, so that the ball flowing down the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) reciprocates in the extension direction (left and right direction) along the shape of the rolling portion E141, and is guided from the first outflow surface E141a to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), or flows out (flows down) from the second outflow surface E141b into the play area.

The flow path adjustment block E170 is disposed at a position overlapping with the second outflow surface E141b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to prevent balls flowing down the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) from flowing out (flowing down) from the second outflow surface E141b directly into the play area. This allows the rolling portion E141 to roll, increasing the interest of the game.

As described above, by forming the protrusion E151 on the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be changed (altered). In other words, randomness can be imparted to the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls. That is, the protrusion E151 can function as a means of inhibiting or assisting the balls from passing through the sorting passage E150 (crossing the entire length of the sorting passage E150 (in the direction of the arrows L-R)).

Similarly, by providing the driving means E190, the direction of movement (flow, rolling) of the balls can be changed (altered), and the driving means E190 can function as a means for preventing or assisting the balls from passing through the sorting passage E150 (crossing completely in the longitudinal direction of the sorting passage E150 (in the direction of the arrows L-R)).

A ball that moves (flows down, rolls) through the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) and passes the end on the central path E160 side (has crossed completely in the longitudinal direction of the distribution path E150 (arrow L-R direction)) is guided to either the erected path E161 (fourth path ERt4) or the second inclined portion E135 (fifth path ERt5). In other words, the player can expect that the ball that flows down the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) (passes the end on the downward flow direction side) will be distributed to the erected path E161 (fourth path ERt4), which can increase the excitement of the game.

Here, a ball that passes through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F) is sent (guided) to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), i.e., the passage where the probability of the ball winning the first winning opening 64 is low. In other words, a ball that does not completely cross the distribution passage E150 in the longitudinal direction has a low probability of winning the first winning opening 64.

This allows the player to expect the ball to pass through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side (downstream direction side) (crossing the entire length of the distribution passage E150 (arrow L-R direction)) and be sent (guided) to the erected passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4) where there is a high probability of the ball entering the first winning hole 64. This increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by abutting against the protrusion E151, the speed at which the ball flows down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can be slowed down, and the time that the player can expect the ball to be guided to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) can be lengthened, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, the protrusion E162a allows the ball guided to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) to be sent to the second inclined surface E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Meanwhile, the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) formed in the second sloped surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) allows the ball guided to the second sloped surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) to be sent to the rear side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) where the ball is more likely to enter the first winning hole 64 (high probability of entering the first winning hole 64). This allows the player to expect the ball to be guided to the rear side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) until it flows out (flows down) into the play area, increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame E2086b in the 77th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1641 and 1642.

In the 76th embodiment, a protrusion E151 is provided on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, but in the 77th embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E2150 is curved in an arc shape. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 1641 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E2086b in the 77th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in Fig. 1637. Fig. 1641(a) shows a state in which the sorting path E2150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact, and Fig. 1641(b) shows a state in which the elastic spring E2190 configured as a coil spring is compressed in comparison with Fig. 1641(a). FIG. 1642(a) is a front perspective view of the sorting passage E2150, FIG. 1642(b) is a front view of the sorting passage E2150 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXLIIb in FIG. 1642(a), FIG. 1642(c) is a bottom view of the sorting passage E2150 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXLIIc in FIG. 1642(b), and FIG. 1642(d) is a side view of the sorting passage E2150 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXLIId in FIG. 1642(b).

As shown in Figures 1641 and 1642, the lower frame E2086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E2130 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 disposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E2130, a distribution passage E2150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170, and a plurality of elastic springs E2190 (two in this embodiment) disposed on the base member E2130 (see Figure 1629).

The base member E2130 includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall panel E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of flat portions E2133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed above the pair of flat portions E2133 (arrow U direction) on the central passage E160 side, a second inclined portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 (see FIG. 1631) erected from the front of the base member E2130, and a plate-shaped back panel E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 together.

The flat portion E2133 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and has a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2133a formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support portions E2133b formed on the central passage E160 side of the plurality of support protrusions E2133a.

The support protrusion E2133a is formed in a cylindrical shape. The support portion E2133b is a plate-like body that is generally rectangular in side view and protrudes from the upper surface of the planar portion E2133. At the tip end side of the protruding direction (the direction of arrow U), an insertion hole for inserting the support shaft E20j described below, i.e., an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the support shaft E20j, is drilled in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow F-B). The multiple support protrusions E2133a and multiple support portions E2133b are each arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow F-B).

The sorting passage E2150 slopes downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134, and is formed into a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the slope. On the underside of the sorting passage E2150, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2150a are formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support portions E2150b are formed on the central passage E160 side of the plurality of support protrusions E2150a.

The support protrusions E2150a are disposed at positions corresponding to the support protrusions E2133a when viewed from above. The support portions E2150b are disposed at positions different from the support portions E2133b in the front-rear direction when viewed from above. In detail, the support portions E2150b are disposed between the opposing pairs of support portions E2133b.

Support portion E2150b has an insertion hole drilled in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) that is approximately the same as the insertion hole drilled in support portion E2133b.

A rolling surface E2151 is formed on the upper surface of the sorting passage E2150, along which the balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow, and the cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the extension direction of the sorting passage E2150 is curved in an arc shape that is concave vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). The third passage ERt203 is formed by the space curved in an arc shape.

The end of the rolling surface E2151 on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction, see FIG. 1629) is formed vertically lower (arrow D direction) than the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction). Therefore, a ball flowing down the rolling surface E2151 is more likely to pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the intervening member E140 side and be sent to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) than to pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the back plate E137 side and abut against the back plate E137 (see FIG. 1629).

As described above, the elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, and its inner diameter is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a. By inserting the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a into the inside of the elastic spring E2190, the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a can support the elastic spring E2190.

With the elastic spring E2190 supported by the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a, the support shaft E20j can be inserted through the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b, allowing the sorting passage E2150 to engage with the flat portion E2133.

The support shaft E20j is for rotatably engaging the sorting passage E2150 with the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as the rotation axis relative to the flat surface portion E2133, and is formed as a rod-shaped cylindrical body with an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b, and is inserted into the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b in a position along the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, the pair of sorting paths E2150 are rotatably engaged on the central path E160 side, and both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E2150 are displaced (reciprocated) up and down (in the directions of the arrows U and D) by the elastic spring E2190. That is, the pair of sorting paths E2150 are each engaged with the base member E2130 (flat surface portion E2133) so as to be displaceable (rotatable, reciprocating). In addition, both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E2150 (in the directions of the arrows L and R) are each disposed in contact with the underside of the curved portion E131.

In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190 is utilized to maintain the abutment state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting path E2150. That is, in this embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged vertically downward (arrow D direction side) of the sorting path E2150, and is formed in a manner that displaces the sorting path E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side).

In addition, in this state, the lowest vertical position of the rolling surface E2151 (in the direction of arrows U-D) is disposed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 of the central passage E160. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E2151 from coming into contact with the mounting portion E164, and to guide the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E2151 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second inclined portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Next, we will explain the ball flowing down the sorting passage E2150. The ball is guided to the sorting passage E2150 with a velocity component in the forward and backward directions by reciprocating in the front and rear directions (arrow F-B direction) on the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2), and while reciprocating in the front and rear directions on the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), it flows down toward the central passage E160 in the inclined direction.

When the ball passes the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the back plate E137 (the side in the direction of arrow B) due to the reciprocating movement in the forward and backward directions, it comes into contact with the back plate E137 and is guided back to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203).

Meanwhile, as the ball reciprocates in the forward and backward directions, it passes through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the interposed member E140 (the side in the direction of the arrow F) and is guided to the interposed member E140 (the sixth passage ERt6) (see FIG. 1629).

A ball that does not pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F), i.e., is not guided to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) but passes through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the downward inclination direction, is guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

In this way, the rolling surface E2151 is curved so that the cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the extension direction of the distribution passage E2150 is an arc that is convex vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D), so that the flow direction of the ball can be changed (changed) and the ball can be guided to either the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) (see FIG. 1629). In other words, the player can expect that the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) will be sorted into the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), which can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, when a ball sent from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) comes into contact with (falls against) the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), the weight of the ball causes the distribution passage E2150 to rotate vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) with the curved portion E131 side rotating around the support axis E20j. In other words, the inclination of the distribution passage E2150 becomes smaller. This makes it possible to slow down the speed at which the ball flows down the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), and to lengthen the time that the player is expecting the ball to be guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), thereby increasing the fun of the game.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the curved portion E131 in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the vertical downward direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 1636(c)). Therefore, the ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the extension direction and then flow down to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203). Therefore, when two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) with a predetermined gap between them, the reciprocating motion in the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball and reduce the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (connect the balls). As a result, while the leading ball is flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), the trailing ball is guided to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), and the weight of the leading ball and the weight of the trailing ball further reduce the inclination of the sorting passage E2150. As a result, the time that the player expects the ball to be guided to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) can be further extended, increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1643, the lower frame E3086b in the 78th embodiment will be described.

In the 77th embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E2150 is curved in an arc shape, but in the 78th embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E3150 is flat. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1643 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E3086b in the 78th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in Figure 1637(c). Note that Figure 1643(a) shows a state in which the sorting path E3150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact, and Figure 1643(b) shows a state in which the elastic spring E2190 is compressed compared to Figure 1641(a).

As shown in FIG. 1643, the lower frame E3086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E3130 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 disposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E3130, a distribution passage E3150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170, and a plurality of elastic springs E2190 (two in this embodiment) disposed on the base member E3130, and a ball joint E3200 (see FIG. 1629).

The base member E3130 is formed in the same manner as the base member E2130 in the 77th embodiment, except that the socket E3220 of the ball joint E3200 is disposed on the flat portion E3133 instead of the support portion E2133b.

The socket E3220 of the ball joint E3200 is disposed approximately in the center of the flat surface E3133 in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B) on the central passage E160 side of the support protrusion E2133a of the flat surface E3133.

Here, we will explain the ball joint E3200. The ball joint E3200 is formed of a ball member E3210 and a socket E3220.

The ball member E3210 is formed with a spherical portion E3211 and a fixed portion E3212 that is connected to the spherical portion E3211. The socket E3220 has a recessed receiving port E3221 formed with an outer diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the spherical portion E3211 on its upper surface. When the spherical portion E3211 is inserted into the receiving port E3221, the ball member E3210 is displaceably engaged with the socket E3220.

The sorting passage E3150 is formed of a plate-like body that slopes downward from the curved portion E131 toward the mounting portion E134 and is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the slope. On the underside of the sorting passage E3150, multiple support protrusions E2150a (two in this embodiment) are formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a ball member E3210 is formed on the central passage E160 side of the multiple support protrusions E2150a.

The support protrusion E2150a and the ball member E3210 are disposed at positions corresponding to the support protrusion E2133a and the socket E3220 formed on the planar portion E3133, respectively, when viewed from above.

A rolling surface E3151 is formed on the upper surface of the distribution passage E3150 formed in the plate-like body, along which the balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow. The rolling surface E3151 forms the third passage ERt303.

With the elastic spring E2190 supported by the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a, the ball member E3210 (sphere portion E3211) disposed on the underside of the sorting passage E3150 can be inserted into the socket E3220 (receiving port E3221) disposed on the upper surface of the flat portion E3133, thereby engaging the sorting passage E3150 with the flat portion E3133.

As a result, the pair of sorting paths E3150 are rotatably engaged on the central path E160 side, and both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E3150 are displaced (reciprocated) up and down (in the directions of the arrows U and D) by the elastic spring E2190. That is, the pair of sorting paths E3150 are each disposed on the base member E3130 (flat surface portion E3133) so as to be displaceable (rotatable, reciprocating). In addition, both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E3150 (in the directions of the arrows L and R) are disposed in contact with the underside of the curved portion E131.

In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190 is utilized to maintain the abutment state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting path E3150. That is, in this embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged vertically downward (arrow D direction side) of the sorting path E2150, and is formed in a manner that displaces the sorting path E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side).

In addition, in this state, the end of the rolling surface E3151 on the downward inclination side (arrow D direction), i.e., the lowest position of the rolling surface E3151 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), is disposed vertically above (arrow U direction) the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 of the central passage E160. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E3151 from coming into contact with the mounting portion E164, and makes it possible to guide the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E3151 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second inclined portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Next, we will explain the ball flowing down the distribution passage E3150. The ball is guided to the distribution passage E3150 with a velocity component in the forward and backward directions by reciprocating the curved portion E131 in the forward and backward directions (in the direction of the arrows F-B). The ball can displace the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) in the forward and backward directions, and flows down toward the central passage E160 according to the inclination direction.

Here, depending on the position in the front-to-rear direction where the ball abuts (falls) on the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution passage E3150 inclines toward the intermediate member E140 (arrow F direction) or toward the back plate E137 (arrow B direction) (see FIG. 1629).

In more detail, since the distribution path E3150 engages with the base member E3130 (flat portion E3133) via the ball joint E3200, when a ball abuts (falls) against the intermediate member E140 (see FIG. 1629) side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution path E3150 not only declines from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, but also declines from the back plate E137 side to the intermediate member E140 side due to the weight of the ball. On the other hand, when a ball abuts (falls) against the back plate E137 side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution path E3150 not only declines from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, but also declines from the intermediate member E140 side to the back plate E137 side due to the weight of the ball. That is, in the front-to-rear direction, the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) slopes downward toward the side where the ball abuts (falls).

This allows the direction of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) to be changed (varied), and the ball can be guided to either the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second inclined surface E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) (see FIG. 1629). In other words, the player can expect the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) to be diverted into the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), which increases the excitement of the game.

In addition, when a ball sent from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) comes into contact with (falls against) the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the weight of the ball causes the distribution passage E3150 to rotate vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) with the curved portion E131 side as the center of rotation at the ball joint E3200. In other words, the inclination of the distribution passage E3150 in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrows L-R) becomes smaller. This slows down the speed at which the ball flows down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), and lengthens the time that the player is expecting the ball to be guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), making the game more interesting.

Furthermore, as described above, the cross-sectional shape of the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) in a plane including the extension direction (direction of arrows F-B) and the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D) is formed by curving in an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (direction of arrow D) (see Figure 1636 (c)).Therefore, the ball guided into the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be made to reciprocate between one end side and the other end side in the extension direction, and then allowed to flow down to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). Therefore, when two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) with a certain distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (connecting the balls). As a result, while the leading ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the trailing ball is guided to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), and the weight of the leading ball and the weight of the trailing ball can further reduce the inclination in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the sorting passage E3150. As a result, the time during which the player expects the ball to be guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be further extended, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by making the balls flow down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), it may be possible to change (alter) the inclination direction of the sorting passage E3150 in the forward/backward direction (arrow F-B direction).

For example, when a leading ball is flowing down the intervening member E140 (see FIG. 1629) side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) and a trailing ball abuts (falls) against the back plate E137 side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), it may be possible to change (change) the downward direction of the inclination of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-to-back direction from the intervening member E140 side to the back plate E137 side. In this way, by changing (changing) the inclination direction of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-to-back direction while the ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the destination of the ball can be changed, making the game more interesting.

In this embodiment, the same elastic spring E2190 is provided on each of the multiple (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2133a, but different elastic springs, i.e., elastic springs having different elastic coefficients, may also be provided.

For example, by making the elastic coefficient of the elastic spring disposed on the intermediate member E140 side (arrow F direction side) smaller than the elastic coefficient of the elastic spring disposed on the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction side), it is possible to easily tilt the sorting passage E3150 downward toward the intermediate member E140 side (see FIG. 1629). This makes it possible to prevent a ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) from flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) in a state of abutting (being clamped) between the rolling surface E3151 and the back plate E137, and then flowing (falling) between the central passage E160 and the back plate E137 and being guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Next, the lower frame E4086b in the 79th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1644 and 1645.

In the 76th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 is provided. In the 79th embodiment, a pair of second sorting passages E4150 is provided in addition to the pair of sorting passages E150. The same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 1644(a) and Fig. 1645(a) are front views of the lower frame E4086b in the 79th embodiment, and Fig. 1644(b) and Fig. 1645(b) are rear views of the lower frame E4086b. Note that Fig. 1644 and Fig. 1645 are illustrated diagrammatically, and Fig. 1644(a) and Fig. 1645(a) omit illustration of the front member E110 and the guide member E120. Also, Fig. 1644(b) and Fig. 1645(b) only show the sorting path E150, the second sorting path E4150, and the driving means E4190 for ease of understanding. Also, Fig. 1644 shows a state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the first position, and Fig. 1645 shows a state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in Fig. 1644 and Fig. 1645, the lower frame E4086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 arranged at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E4130 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 interposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E4130, a distribution passage E150, a second distribution passage E4150, a central passage E160 and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 arranged on the base member E4130, a cover member E4180 arranged at a predetermined interval on the underside (arrow D direction side) of the base member E4130, and a drive means E4190 arranged inside the cover member E4180 (see Fig. 1629).

The base member E4130 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1629) formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E4133 formed between the opposing sides of the pair of curved portions E131, a pair of third inclined surfaces E4139 formed between the opposing sides of the pair of first inclined surfaces E4133, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing sides of the pair of third inclined surfaces E4139, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing sides of the pair of mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 (see FIG. 1631) erected from the front of the base member E4130, and a plate-shaped back panel E4137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 together.

Since the third slope portion E4139 is formed, the first slope portion E4133 is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is shorter in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) than the first slope portion E133 in the 76th embodiment.

The third inclined surface portion E4139 is disposed between the first inclined surface portion E4133 and the mounting portion E134 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) and is formed parallel to the first inclined surface portion E4133.

The rear plate E4137, like the first inclined surface portion E4133, is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) relative to the rear plate E137 in the 76th embodiment.

The second sorting passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the inclination direction than the sorting passage E150, but is otherwise identical, so its description will be omitted. By forming a protrusion E151 on the second sorting passage E4150, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the second sorting passage E4150. The second sorting passage E4150 is disposed between the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) and the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). In other words, the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed vertically below the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) (arrow D direction) and vertically above the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) (arrow U direction).

The driving means E4190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, an attachment member E192 disposed above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of the arrow U), a driving force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191, a first transmission member E4194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E4195 and a third transmission member E4198 engaged with the first transmission member E4194, a fourth transmission member E4199 engaged with the second transmission member E4195, and a plurality of pinion gears E196 (three in this embodiment).

In this embodiment, all of the multiple pinion gears E196 are identical, but for ease of understanding, the pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 is designated as pinion gear E196a, the pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the third transmission member E4198 is designated as pinion gear E196b, and the pinion gear E196 interposed between the second transmission member E4195 and the fourth transmission member E4199 is designated as pinion gear E196c.

The first transmission member E4194 is formed by extending an engagement base E4194b vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) compared to the first transmission member E194 in the 76th embodiment, and a rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196b is engraved on the upper surface of the first rack portion E4194d.

The second transmission member E4195 is formed by extending an engagement base E4194b vertically upward (arrow U direction) compared to the second transmission member E195 in the 76th embodiment, and a rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is engraved on the upper surface of the main body part E4195a on one side (arrow L direction) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

The third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the second distribution passage E4150.

The third transmission member E4198 is formed with a main body E4198a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body E4198a, and an engagement portion E194c (see FIG. 1631) protruding from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction). A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196b is engraved on the lower surface of the main body E4198a, and the third transmission member E4198 is displaced left and right by the rotation of the pinion gear E196b.

The fourth transmission member E4199 is formed with a main body E4199a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body E4199a, and an engagement portion E194c (see FIG. 1631) protruding from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction). A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is engraved on the lower surface of the main body E4199a, and the fourth transmission member E4199 is displaced in the left-right direction by the rotation of the pinion gear E196c.

As shown in FIG. 1644, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E4194, and the second transmission member E4195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198, and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the wall panel E132 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are disposed at positions spaced apart from each other, and therefore the pair of second distribution passages E4150 are also disposed at positions spaced apart from each other.

When the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the end of the second sorting passage E4150 on the downward side in the inclination direction is located closer to the wall plate E132 than the end of the sorting passage E150 on the downward side in the inclination direction; that is, when viewed from above, the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed in a position where the entirety of the second sorting passage E4150 overlaps with the sorting passage E150. Therefore, the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed in a position where a passage for the balls is not formed.

As a result, the balls that flow down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) are sent (dropped) to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) without moving (flowing down, rolling) on the second sorting passage E4150. That is, the balls can be made to flow (drop) from the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4). As a result, the balls that flow (drop) from the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) come into contact with the erected passage E161 and bounce off, making it easier to flow (drop) from the erected passage E161 to the second slope section E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

On the other hand, by allowing the ball to flow (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), it may be possible to send the ball directly to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing (falling) down to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) due to contact with the protrusion portion E162a, compared to when the ball rolls down the erected passage E161 toward the upper hole E162 (see FIG. 1633).

In this way, in this embodiment, by making the balls flow (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4), it is made more difficult for the balls allocated to the erected passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4) to enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 1628) (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 can be reduced) compared to the 76th embodiment.

On the other hand, by sending the ball from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161, i.e., without the ball coming into contact with the protrusion E162a, the ball can easily pass through the upper hole E162. This allows the player to expect that the ball that has flowed down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) will pass directly through the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161, increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 1645, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the second position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E4194, and the second transmission member E4195 are located on the wall panel E132 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are disposed at positions spaced apart from each other compared to when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed at positions spaced apart from each other.

On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198, and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are disposed closer to each other than when the distribution passage E150 is disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of second distribution passages E4150 are also disposed closer to each other.

When the sorting passage E150 is placed in the second position, the end of the second sorting passage E4150 on the downward side in the inclination direction is located closer to the upper hole E162 than the end of the sorting passage E150 on the upward side in the inclination direction. That is, when viewed from above, a part of the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed in a visible position. This allows balls that have flowed down the sorting passage E150 to be guided to the second sorting passage E4150. As a result, it becomes easier to send balls that have flowed down the second sorting passage E4150 directly to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161.

Here, the second distribution passage E4150 is disposed vertically below the distribution passage E150 (in the direction of arrow D), so that when a ball flows (falls) from the second distribution passage E4150 to the erection passage E161, the amount of rebound of the ball due to contact with the erection passage E161 can be reduced compared to when the ball flows (falls) from the distribution passage E150 to the erection passage E161. This makes it possible to suppress the ball from flowing (falling) from the erection passage E161 to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

In this way, by being guided from the distribution path E150 to the second distribution path E4150, it becomes easier for the balls distributed to the erected path E161 (central path E160, fourth path ERt4) to enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 1628) (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 can be increased). Therefore, the player can expect the ball to be guided to the second distribution path E4150 (the ball is sent from the distribution path E150 when the distribution path E150 is positioned in the second position), which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sorting passage E150 is positioned in the second position, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the second sorting passage E4150, so that the flow time of the balls flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be extended (changed) compared to the 76th embodiment.

In addition, by making the balls flow down (fall) from the sorting passage E150 to the second sorting passage E4150, they can come into contact with the upper surface of the protrusion E151 formed on the second sorting passage E4150. Therefore, in addition to flowing down (falling) from the curved portion E131 to the sorting passage E150, by making the balls flow down (fall) from the sorting passage E150 to the second sorting passage E4150, it is possible to easily move (flow down, roll) the upper surface of the protrusion E151, and the direction of movement (flow down, roll) of the balls can be diversified. To explain in detail, by moving (flow down, roll) the upper surface of the protrusion E151 formed in a flat shape, it is possible to suppress the balls from moving (flow down, roll) on the third passage ERt3, so that it is easy to form both a mode in which the balls move (flow down, roll) on the third passage ERt3 and a mode in which the balls do not move (flow down, roll) on the third passage ERt3.

Next, we will explain the reciprocating movement of the sorting passage E150 and the second sorting passage E4150 by the driving means E4190.

The first and second transmission members E4194 and E4195 are engaged with the distribution passage E150, and the third and fourth transmission members E4198 and E4199 are engaged with the second distribution passage E4150 by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 1638).

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position, and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, is achieved by the drive motor E191 displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the drive force transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the wall plate E132 side (arrow L direction side).

When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as a result of the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the pinion gear E196a that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the lower surface of the first rack portion E4194d is rotated clockwise in rear view, and the pinion gear E196b that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the first rack portion E4194d is rotated counterclockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second transmission member E4195 (second rack portion E195b) meshing with the pinion gear E196a is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, and the distribution passage E150 engaged with the second transmission member E4195 is displaced from the first position to the second position. In addition, the third transmission member E4198 (main body portion E4198a) meshing with the pinion gear E196b is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, and the second distribution passage E4150 engaged with the third transmission member E4198 is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

In addition, as the second transmission member E4195 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the pinion gear E196c that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the main body portion E4195a of the second transmission member E4195 is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the main body E4199a of the fourth transmission member E4199, which meshes with the pinion gear E196c, is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, and the second distribution passage E4150 engaged with the fourth transmission member E4199 is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the second position to the first position, and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the central passage E160 side to the wall panel E132 side, are performed by driving the drive motor E191, similar to the displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position, and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the wall panel E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

Here, other than the displacement directions of the sorting passage E150, the second sorting passage E4150, the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199, and the rotation direction of the pinion gears E196a, E196b, and E196c, the displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the wall panel E132 side to the central passage E160 side are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, a single drive motor E191 can reciprocate through a pair of sorting paths E150 and a pair of second sorting paths E4150, thereby reducing the number of drive motors E191 and reducing product costs.

In addition, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 can displace the second transmission member E4195 to the fourth transmission member E4199, that is, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199 can be linked. This allows the displacement of the pair of sorting passages E150 and the pair of second sorting passages E4150 to be linked. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for sensors to control the reciprocating movement of the pair of sorting passages E150 and the pair of second sorting passages E4150, and it is possible to reduce product costs.

Next, the lower frame E5086b in the 80th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1646 to 1649.

In the 76th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 are provided. In the 80th embodiment, in addition to the sorting passage E150, a third sorting passage E5150 is provided between the pair of sorting passages E150. The same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 1646(a) and 1648(a) are front views of the lower frame E5086b in the 80th embodiment, and Figures 1646(b) and 1648(b) are rear views of the lower frame E5086b. Figures 1647 and 1649 are top views of the lower frame E5086b. Note that Figures 1646 to 1649 are illustrated diagrammatically, and in Figures 1646(a) and 1648(a), the front member E110 and the guide member E120 are omitted, and in Figures 1647(a) and 1649(a), the guide member E120 is omitted. In addition, for ease of understanding, only the sorting passage E150, the third sorting passage E5150, and the driving means E5190 are displayed in Figures 1646(b) and 1648(b). Also, in Fig. 1647(b) and Fig. 1649(b), only the third sorting path E5150 and the driving means E5190 are illustrated, and only the external shape of the third sorting path E5150 is illustrated. Also, Fig. 1646 and Fig. 1647 illustrate a state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the first position, and Fig. 1648 and Fig. 1649 illustrate a state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in Figures 1646 to 1649, the lower frame E5086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 (see Figure 1629) arranged on both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E5130 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 interposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E5130, a distribution passage E150, a third distribution passage E5150, a central passage E160, and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 arranged on the base member E5130, a cover member E5180 arranged at a predetermined interval on the underside (arrow D direction side) of the base member E5130, and a drive means E5190 arranged inside the cover member E5180.

The base member E5130 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E5133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of third mounting portions E5139 formed between the pair of first inclined surfaces E5133 facing each other, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of third mounting portions E5139 facing each other, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 (see FIG. 1631) erected from the front of the base member E5130, and a plate-shaped back panel E5137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 to each other.

Since the third mounting portion E5139 is formed, the first inclined surface portion E5133 is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is shorter in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) than the first inclined surface portion E133 in the 76th embodiment.

The third mounting portion E5139 is for displaceably engaging the third distribution passage E5150, and is disposed between the first inclined surface portion E5133 and the mounting portion E134 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), with its upper surface formed horizontally.

A third guide portion E5139a is formed on the upper surface of the third attachment portion E5139 on the other longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow R) through which the guided portion E5152 of the third distribution passage E5150 described later is slidably inserted.

The third guide portion E5139a is formed of a plate-like body that is vertically elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and a pair of plate-like bodies that protrude from both ends of the plate-like body in the extension direction (the direction of arrows F-B) toward the third attachment portion E5139, and is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the side. The guided portion E5152 is slidably inserted into the space surrounded by this third guide portion E5139a and the third attachment portion E5139.

The rear plate E5137, like the first inclined surface E5133, is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) relative to the rear plate E137 in the 76th embodiment.

The third distribution passage E5150 allows the balls to flow down its upper surface, and is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above. It has a protrusion E151 formed on its upper surface, a guided portion E5152 formed on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side), and an engaged portion E5153 formed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side).

Since the protrusion E151 is formed in the third sorting passage E5150, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the third sorting passage E5150. In addition, the arrangement of the protrusion E151 on the upper surface of the third sorting passage E5150 is the same as the arrangement of the sorting passage E150.

The guided portion E5152 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and as described above, when the guided portion E5152 is inserted into the space surrounded by the third guide portion E5139a and the third mounting portion E5139, the third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

The engaged portion E5153 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the third distribution path E5150, and protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the end face of one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the third distribution path E5150. A rack gear E194d1 is engraved on the side face of the lower end of the engaged portion E5153 on the other longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow R).

The dimension of the third sorting passage E5150 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be larger than the distance between the pair of sorting passages E150 arranged at the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent balls flowing down (falling) from the sorting passage E150 from coming into contact with the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153 arranged at both ends of the third sorting passage E5150 in the longitudinal direction. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed in the third attachment portion E5139 (base member E5130) with the guided portion E5152 inserted into the third guide portion E5139a and the rack gear E194d1 engraved on the engaged portion E5153 meshing with the second pinion gear E5196 described below.

The driving means E5190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, an attachment member E192 disposed above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of the arrow U), a driving force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191, a first transmission member E5194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E5195 engaged with the first transmission member E4194, a pinion gear E196, and a second pinion gear E5196.

The first transmission member E5194 is formed by extending an engagement base E5194b vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) compared to the first transmission member E194 in the 76th embodiment, and a rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the second pinion gear E5196 is engraved on the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the first rack portion E5194d.

The second transmission member E4195 is formed by extending the engagement base E5194b vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the second transmission member E195 in the 76th embodiment.

The second pinion gear E5196 is disposed with its axial direction aligned along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and is different from the pinion gear E196 in that its axial dimension (thickness) is larger than that of the pinion gear E196, but otherwise has the same configuration. The axial dimension (thickness) of the second pinion gear E5196 is larger than the sum of the vertical dimension of the first rack portion E5194d of the first transmission member E5194 and the vertical dimension of the rack gear E194d1 formed at the lower end of the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150. As a result, the second pinion gear E5196 is formed so that it can mesh with the first rack portion E5194d and the engaged portion E5153 at different positions in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 1646 and FIG. 1647, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between the central passage E160 and the rear panel E5137 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) (hereinafter referred to as the "third position"). This makes it possible to prevent balls that flow down (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) between the central passage E160 and the rear panel E5137 from being sent to the fifth passage ERt5 by being guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3). As a result, the player can expect that the balls guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) will be sorted into the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), which can increase the interest of the game. In addition, since the third passage ERt3 is formed in the third distribution passage E5150, the flow time of the balls flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be extended (changed) compared to the 76th embodiment.

In addition, the distance between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137 in the front-rear direction is made smaller than the radius of the ball. This prevents the ball from being pinched between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137, allowing the ball to flow down the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3).

As shown in FIG. 1648 and FIG. 1649, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the second position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are located on the curved portion E131 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are disposed at positions spaced apart from each other compared to the state in which they are disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed at positions spaced apart from each other.

The third distribution path E5150 is disposed at a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the central path E160 when viewed from above, i.e., above the central path E160 (in the direction of the arrow U) (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth position"). This makes it possible to prevent balls from being guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) by guiding them from the distribution path E150 to the third distribution path E5150. Note that balls guided to the third distribution path E5150 are sent to the second sloped portion E135 (fifth path ERt5) by crossing the front or rear end of the third distribution path E5150.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at a position where the distance between the third distribution passage E5150 and the rear plate E5137 in the front-to-rear direction is greater than the diameter of the ball. This allows the balls flowing down from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) between the third distribution passage E5150 and the rear plate E5137 to be guided to the second sloped portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) without coming into contact with the third distribution passage E5150.

Thus, in this embodiment, compared to the 76th embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged in the first position and the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged in the third position, it is easy to guide the ball sent from the distribution passage E150 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4). On the other hand, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged in the second position and the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged in the fourth position, it is difficult to guide the ball sent from the distribution passage E150 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4). In other words, the difficulty of sending the ball to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be changed depending on the arrangement position of the third distribution passage E5150 (distribution passage E150), and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, since the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between a pair of opposing distribution passages E150, it may be possible to guide a ball that has flowed down the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). In other words, the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be sent to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) in addition to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second sloped portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, we will explain the reciprocating movement of the sorting passage E150 and the third sorting passage E5150 by the driving means E5190.

The distribution passage E150 and the first and second transmission members E5194 and E5195 are engaged with each other by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 1638).

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position, and the associated displacement of the third sorting passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position, are achieved by the drive motor E191 displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved portion E131 side (arrow L direction side).

When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the pinion gear E196 that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E5194d is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second rack portion E195b of the second transmission member E5195, which meshes with the pinion gear E196, is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and the distribution passage E150 engaged with the second transmission member E5195 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the second pinion gear E5196, which meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the first rack portion E5194d, is rotated counterclockwise in top view.

As a result, the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150, which meshes with the second pinion gear E5196, is displaced from the rear plate E5137 side (arrow B direction side) to the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction side), and the third distribution passage E5150 is displaced from the third position to the fourth position.

The displacement of the sorting path E150 from the second position to the first position and the associated displacement of the third sorting path E5150 from the fourth position to the third position are performed by driving the drive motor E191, similar to the displacement of the sorting path E150 from the first position to the second position and the associated displacement of the third sorting path E5150 from the third position to the fourth position.

Note that, other than the displacement directions of the sorting passage E150, the third sorting passage E5150, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195, and the rotation direction of the pinion gear E196 and the second pinion gear E5196, the displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position and the associated displacement of the third sorting passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position are the same, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, a single drive motor E191 can reciprocate through a pair of sorting paths E150 and the third sorting path E5150, thereby reducing the number of drive motors E191 and reducing product costs.

In addition, the second transmission member E5195 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced by the displacement of the first transmission member E5194, that is, the displacements of the first transmission member E5194, the second transmission member E5195, and the third distribution passage E5150 can be linked. This allows the displacements of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 to be linked. As a result, a sensor for controlling the reciprocating movement of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be eliminated, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, the second pinion gear E5196 is engaged with the engaged portion E5153 and the first rack portion E5194d at different positions in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, the engaged portion E5153 is engaged vertically upward (arrow U direction), and the first rack portion E5194d is engaged vertically downward (arrow D direction). This allows the displacement directions of the first transmission member E5194 and the third distribution path E5150 to be perpendicular to each other, that is, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E5130, and the third distribution path E5150 is displaced in the lateral direction (arrow F-B direction) of the base member E5130. This allows the number of pinion gears to be reduced, thereby reducing product costs.

Next, referring to FIG. 1650(a), the lower frame E6086b in the 81st embodiment will be described.

In the 76th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first inclined surface E133 of the base member E130. In the 81st embodiment, the angle of the sorting passages E6150 relative to the first inclined surface E6133 is changed (modified). The same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1650 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E6086b in the 81st embodiment. Note that Figure 1650 (a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in Figure 1639 (c). Also, the lower frame E6086b is formed linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in Figure 1628) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 1628) of the game board E13, so only one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) is shown.

The lower frame E6086b in the 81st embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 76th embodiment, except for the base member E130 and the distribution passage E150, so only the base member E6130 and the distribution passage E6150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1650(a), the base member E6130 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E6133 formed between the opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing first inclined surfaces E6133, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E6130, and a plate-shaped back panel E6137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 together (see FIG. 1631).

The first inclined surface portion E6133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E6133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E6133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 1638(b) and 1639(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a protrusion E6133d.

The protrusion E6133d is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the first inclined surface E6133 on the curved portion E131 side of the base member E6130 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

The first inclined surface portion E6133 is provided with a plurality of cylindrical bodies E6201 (four in this embodiment) for displacing the sorting passage E6150, and a cover E6202.

The cylindrical body E6201 is formed in the same shape as the cylindrical body E201 in the 76th embodiment, except that its outer shape is larger. As a result, the arrangement position of the sorting passage E6150 is arranged above (in the direction of the arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 76th embodiment.

Since the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201 is made larger, the cover E6202 has a hole drilled in the position corresponding to the cylindrical body E6201 that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201.

The pair of cylinders E6201 arranged on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) are arranged on the first inclined surface portion E6133, while the pair of cylinders E6201 arranged on the curved portion E131 side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) are arranged on the protruding portion E6133d. This makes it possible to make the inclination angle of the sorting passage E6150 different from the inclination angle of the first inclined surface portion E6133, or more specifically, to make it larger. As a result, the displacement (reciprocating movement) of the sorting passage E6150 can be made non-parallel to the first inclined surface portion E6133.

The rear panel E6137 is formed to extend upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the rear panel E137 in the 76th embodiment, since the arrangement position of the sorting passage E6150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 76th embodiment.

The sorting passage E6150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E6152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E6150, and an engaged part E6153 erected between the pair of guided parts E6152.

As described above, since the arrangement position of the sorting path E6150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 76th embodiment, the guided portion E6152 and the engaged portion E6153 are formed by extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) relative to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153 in the 76th embodiment. Since the engaged portion E6153 is formed by extending downward, the engaging recess E6153a is also formed by extending downward, similar to the engaged portion E6153.

This prevents the guided portion E6152 from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first inclined surface portion E7133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passage E6150 in the front-rear direction relative to the base member E6130. It also prevents the engagement recess E153a from coming into contact with the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.

Next, the lower frames E7086b and E8086b in the 82nd and 83rd embodiments will be described with reference to Figures 1650(b) and 1650(c).

In the 76th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first inclined surface E133 of the base member E130. In the 82nd and 83rd embodiments, the arrangement angle of the sorting passages E7150, E8150 changes (is altered) as the sorting passages E7150, E8150 are displaced. Note that the same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1650(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E7086b in the 82nd embodiment, and Figure 1650(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E8086b in the 83rd embodiment. Note that Figures 1650(b) and 1650(c) correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in Figure 1639. Also, since the lower frames E7086b, E8086b are formed linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in Figure 1628) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 1628) of the game board E13, only one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) is shown.

The lower frames E7086b, E8086b in the 82nd and 83rd embodiments are formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 76th embodiment, except for the base member E130 and the distribution passage E150, so only the base members E7130, E8130 and the distribution passages E7150, E8150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1650(b), the base member E7130 in the 82nd embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E7133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of first inclined surfaces E7133 facing each other, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E7130, and a plate-shaped back panel E7137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 to each other (see FIG. 1631).

The first inclined surface portion E7133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E7133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E7133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 1638(b) and 1639(b)), and a groove portion E133c.

The first inclined surface portion E7133 is provided with a plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E7201a and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E7201b for displacing the sorting passage E150, as well as a cover E7202.

The cylinders E7201a are disposed at the same position in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) and are disposed on the central passage E160 side of the first inclined surface portion E7133. The cylinders E7201a are formed in the same shape as the cylinders E201 in the 76th embodiment, except that their outer shape is larger than that of the cylinders E201 in the 76th embodiment. As a result, the arrangement position of the sorting passage E6150 is disposed above (arrow U direction) the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 76th embodiment.

The cylindrical body E7201b is disposed at the same position in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) and is disposed on the curved portion E131 side of the first inclined surface portion E7133. The outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201b is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a. As a result, the arrangement position of the sorting path E7150 is arranged above (arrow U direction) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 76th embodiment. Also, the inclination angle of the sorting path E7150 can be made different from the inclination angle of the first inclined surface portion E7133, specifically, made larger. As a result, the displacement (reciprocating movement) of the sorting path E7150 can be made non-parallel to the first inclined surface portion E7133.

Since the outer shapes of the cylindrical bodies E7201a and 7201b are made larger, holes slightly larger than the outer shapes of the cylindrical bodies E7201a and 7201b are drilled in the cover E7202 at positions corresponding to the cylindrical bodies E7201a and 7201b.

The rear panel E7137 is formed to extend upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the rear panel E137 in the 76th embodiment, since the arrangement position of the sorting passage E7150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 76th embodiment.

The sorting passage E7150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E7152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E7150, an engaged part E7153 erected between the pair of guided parts E7152, and a sloped part E7154 formed on the lower surface of the sorting passage E7150 on the curved part E131 side.

As described above, since the arrangement position of the sorting path E7150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 76th embodiment, the guided portion E7152 and the engaged portion E7153 are formed by extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) relative to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153 in the 76th embodiment. Since the engaged portion E7153 is formed by extending downward, the engaging recess E7153a is also formed by extending downward, similar to the engaged portion E7153.

This prevents the guided portion E7152 from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first inclined surface portion E7133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passage E7150 in the front-rear direction relative to the base member E7130. It also prevents the engagement recess E7153a from coming into contact with the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.

The sloped surface E7154 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 side, and the cylindrical body 7201b abuts against the sloped surface E7154. Therefore, the inclination angle of the distribution passage E7150 increases as it moves from the first position to the second position. In other words, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E7150 can be changed (modified). This allows the change (modification) of the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls to be diversified, and prevents the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls from becoming monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 1650(c), the base member E8130 in the 83rd embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E8133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of first inclined surfaces E8133 facing each other, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E8130, and a plate-shaped back panel E8137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 to each other (see FIG. 1631).

The first inclined surface portion E8133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E8133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E8133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 1638(b) and 1639(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a curved guide portion E8133d.

The first inclined surface portion E8133 is provided with multiple (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies 7201a for displacing the sorting passage E8150, and a cover E8202.

Since the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a is made larger, a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a is drilled in the cover E8202 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E7201a.

The curved guide portion E8133d is a portion for changing (altering) the inclination angle of the sorting passage E8150, and is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the curved guide portion E8133d on the curved portion E131 side of the first inclined surface portion E8133, and its upper surface is curved in an arc shape that is concave downward (in the direction of arrow D).

The end of the distribution path E8150 on the curved portion E131 side is abutted against the arc-shaped curved surface of the curved guide portion E8133d, and supports (holds) the distribution path E8150 together with the cylindrical body E7201a. As the distribution path E8150 moves from the first position to the second position, the end of the curved portion E131 side is displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) along the curved surface of the curved guide portion E8133d. This allows the inclination angle of the distribution path E8150 to be increased. That is, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution path E8150 can be changed (changed). This allows the change (change) in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls to be diversified, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls can be prevented from becoming monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The rear panel E8137 is formed to extend upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the rear panel E137 in the 76th embodiment, since the arrangement position of the sorting passage E8150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 76th embodiment.

The sorting passage E8150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E8152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E8150, and an engaged part E8153 erected between the pair of guided parts E8152.

As described above, since the arrangement position of the sorting path E8150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 76th embodiment, the guided portion E8152 and the engaged portion E8153 are formed by extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) relative to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153 in the 76th embodiment. Since the engaged portion E8153 is formed by extending downward, the engaging recess E8153a is also formed by extending downward, similar to the engaged portion E8153.

This prevents the guided portion E8152 from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first inclined surface portion E8133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passage E8150 in the front-rear direction relative to the base member E8130. It also prevents the engagement recess E8153a from coming into contact with the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.

Next, the lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the 84th and 85th embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 1651.

In the 76th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) (parallel) along the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E130. However, in the 84th and 85th embodiments, the sorting passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base members E9130, E10130. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1651 (a) is a partial top view of the lower frame E9086b in the 84th embodiment, and Figure 1651 (b) is a partial top view of the lower frame E10086b in the 85th embodiment. Note that in Figure 1651, the distribution passage E150 is omitted for ease of understanding. Also, since the lower frames E9086b, E10086b are formed linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in Figure 1628) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 1628) of the game board E13, only one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) is shown.

The lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the 84th and 85th embodiments are formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 76th embodiment, except for the base member E130, so only the base members E9130 and E10130 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1651(a), the base member E9130 in the 84th embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E9133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of first inclined surfaces E9133 facing each other, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E9130, and a plate-shaped back panel E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 to each other (see FIG. 1631).

The first inclined surface portion E9133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E9133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E9133 is formed with an insertion hole E9133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 1638(b) and 1639(b)), and a groove portion E9133c.

The first inclined surface portion E9133 is provided with multiple (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the sorting passage E150, and a cover E9202.

The cylinder E201 is disposed along (parallel to) the groove E9133c, and the cover E9202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylinder E201 drilled at a position corresponding to the cylinder E201, and a hole roughly the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion hole E9133a drilled at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E9133a.

A pair of grooves E9133c are formed on both the left and right sides (arrows L-R) of the insertion hole E9133a.

The insertion hole E9133a and the pair of grooves E9133c extend non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130. More specifically, they extend at an angle forward (arrow F direction) from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 side. Therefore, the distribution passage E150 (see FIG. 1633) is displaced along (parallel to) the extension direction of the grooves E9133c.

That is, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and is also displaced rearward (in the direction of arrow B). This makes it easier to bring the protrusion E151 (see FIG. 1633) of the sorting passage E150 into contact with the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, making it easier to change (alter) the direction of the ball's movement (flowing down, rolling) to the rearward (in the direction of arrow B). As a result, it becomes more difficult for the ball to be sent to the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

On the other hand, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 and is also displaced forward (in the direction of arrow F). This makes it easier to abut the protrusion E151 of the sorting passage E150 against the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, making it easier to change (alter) the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball to the forward side (in the direction of arrow F). As a result, it becomes easier to send the ball to the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

In addition, since the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engagement recess E153a (see FIG. 1638(a)), the engagement between the engagement recess E153a and the engagement portion E194c can be maintained even when the distribution passage E150 is not parallel to the left-right (arrow L-R) displacement (reciprocating movement) of the first transmission member E194, i.e., when it is displaced (reciprocating movement) in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

In this way, the direction in which the balls tend to move (flow down, roll) can be changed (modified) when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position and when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, making it possible to diversify the change (change) in the direction in which the balls move (flow down, roll).

As shown in FIG. 1651(b), the base member E10130 in the 85th embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E10133 formed between the opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing first inclined surfaces E10133, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E10130, and a plate-shaped back panel E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1631).

The first inclined surface portion E10133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E10133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E10133 is formed with an insertion hole E10133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 1638(b) and 1639(b)), and a groove portion E10133c.

The first inclined surface portion E10133 is provided with multiple (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the sorting passage E150, and a cover E10202.

The cover E10202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201, and a hole approximately the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion hole E10133a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E10133a.

The insertion hole E10133a is formed with a larger width (opening) in the front-rear direction than the insertion hole E133a in the 76th embodiment. This makes it possible to prevent the insertion hole E10133a from coming into contact with the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 1638(a)) even when the sorting passage E150 (see FIG. 1633) displaces (reciprocates) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) and also displaces (reciprocates) in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The groove portion E10133c is formed in a shape in which curves are combined when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first inclined surface portion E10133. In addition, a pair of groove portions E10133c are formed on both sides of the insertion hole E10133a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the sorting passage E150 to be displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) and in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction) when the sorting passage E150 displaces from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position. As a result, it is possible to create a mode in which the sorting passage E150 is displaced forward (arrow F direction) and backward (arrow B direction) during the process of displacing the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position, and the number of changes (changes) in the direction in which the balls are likely to move (flow down, roll) can be increased.

In addition, since the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engagement recess E153a (see FIG. 1638(a)), the engagement between the engagement recess E153a and the engagement portion E194c can be maintained even when the distribution passage E150 is not parallel to the left-right (arrow L-R) displacement (reciprocating movement) of the first transmission member E194, i.e., when it is displaced (reciprocating movement) in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

Next, referring to Figures 1652(a) and 1641, the sorting passage E11150 in the 86th embodiment will be described.

In the 77th embodiment, the sorting passage E2150 rotates around the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) relative to the flat surface E2133 as the rotation axis. In the 86th embodiment, the sorting passage E11150 rotates around the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) relative to the flat surface E2133 as the rotation axis. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1652 (a) is a front perspective view of the sorting passage E11150 in the 86th embodiment. The sorting passage E11150 is formed in the same manner as the sorting passage E2150 in the 77th embodiment, except for the number and positions of the support parts E2150b of the sorting passage E2150, so a description of parts other than the support parts E11150b of the sorting passage E11150 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1652(a), the support portion E11150b of the sorting passage E11150 is formed to protrude from the underside of the sorting passage E11150 on the central passage E160 side toward the central passage E160 side. The support portion E11150b is disposed approximately in the center of the sorting passage E11150 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The support portion E11150b has an insertion hole substantially the same as the insertion hole drilled in the support portion E2150b, i.e., an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the support shaft E20j, drilled in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the support portion E11150b.

In this way, in the lower frame E11086b in the 86th embodiment, the sorting passage E11150 can be rotated with the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) relative to the flat portion E2133 as the rotation axis. In particular, the curved portion E131 side of the sorting passage E11150 can be displaced in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction) with the axis of the insertion hole drilled in the support portion E11150b as the rotation axis. This allows a velocity component in the front-back direction to be imparted to the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface E2151 of the sorting passage E11150, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be diversified. As a result, the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the distribution passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 in the 87th to 90th embodiments will be described with reference to Fig. 1652(b) to Fig. 1652(e). Note that the 87th to 90th embodiments will be described with reference to Fig. 1629 as appropriate.

In the 76th embodiment, the protrusion E151 is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E150. However, in the 87th to 90th embodiments, the protrusions E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 of the sorting passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 are formed in various shapes. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Fig. 1652(b) is a view of the sorting passage E12150 in the 87th embodiment viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E12150, Fig. 1652(c) is a view of the sorting passage E13150 in the 88th embodiment viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E13150, Fig. 1652(d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage E12150 in the 89th embodiment, and Fig. 1652(e) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage E13150 in the 90th embodiment. Note that Figs. 1652(d) and 1652(e) correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in Fig. 1639. In addition, since the protrusions E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are regularly arranged on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, only a portion of them are shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 1652(b), the protrusion E12151 of the sorting passage E12150 in the 87th embodiment is formed to protrude spherically from the upper surface of the sorting passage E12150. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) along the upper surface of the sorting passage E12150 to move (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the protrusion E12151, preventing the balls from displacing (reverse flow, rolling) upward in the inclined direction. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily visually see how the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) is being changed, improving the enjoyment of the game.

The distance between the protrusions E12151 facing each other is formed to be greater than the diameter of the sphere. This prevents the sphere from remaining in the sorting passage E12150, and allows it to move (flow down, roll) along (parallel to) the inclination direction of the sorting passage E12150 from the end of the sorting passage E12150 on the curved section E131 side toward the end of the central passage E160 side. As a result, in order to prevent the sphere from remaining in the sorting passage E12150, it is possible to prevent the sorting passage E12150 from being displaced along a complex trajectory or with a large displacement amount or displacement speed, and the driving means E190 can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 1652(c), the protrusion E13151 of the sorting passage E13150 in the 88th embodiment protrudes from the top surface of the sorting passage E13150 and is formed in a generally rhombus (square) shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E13150. Similarly to the protrusion E151 in the 76th embodiment, the protrusion E13151 is formed in a manner in which a portion of the apex side of a quadrangular pyramid has been cut off. In other words, the cross-sectional area in a plane parallel to the sorting passage E13150 becomes smaller with increasing distance from the top surface of the sorting passage E13150.

This makes it possible to omit the straight line portion formed along (parallel to) the inclination direction relative to the protrusion E151 in the 76th embodiment, thereby reducing the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball in the inclination direction on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150. In other words, it is possible to increase the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball in the direction perpendicular to the inclination direction on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed) before it is guided to either the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in FIG. 1652(d), the protrusion E14151 of the sorting passage E14150 in the 89th embodiment is formed to protrude in a cone shape from the upper surface of the sorting passage E14150. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E14150 to move (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the protrusion E14151, and prevents the balls from moving (flowing down, rolling) over the protrusion E14151. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily visually confirm the manner in which the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) is changed, and the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) caused by the protrusion E14151 can be prevented from becoming monotonous, improving the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 1652 (e), the protrusion E15151 of the sorting passage E15150 in the 90th embodiment has a concave side toward the center of the protrusion E15151. This makes it easier for balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the top surface of the sorting passage E15150 to climb over the protrusion E15151, and diversifies the direction in which the balls move (flow down, roll). As a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

Next, the lower frame E16086b in the 91st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1653(a).

In the 79th embodiment, a protrusion E151 is formed on the upper surface of the second sorting passage E4150, and the direction in which the balls flow (roll) is changed (altered). In the 91st embodiment, the balls flow (roll) toward a specific position. The same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description is omitted.

Figure 1653 (a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E16086b in the 91st embodiment. Note that Figure 1653 (a) illustrates the state in which the sorting passage E150 is placed in the second position.

The lower frame E16086b in the 91st embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E4086b in the 79th embodiment, except for the second distribution passage E4150, so only the second distribution passage E16150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1653(a), the second sorting passage E16150 is arranged parallel to the sorting passage E150 in a front view, that is, the second sorting passage E16150 is arranged at a downward incline from the wall plate E132 toward the mounting portion E134 (see FIG. 1645(a)). The second sorting passage E16150 is formed as a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the second sorting passage E16150, and the length in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the front-rear direction of the sorting passage E150 on the central passage E160 side. As a result, when the sorting passage E150 is arranged in the second position, balls passing through the end of the sorting passage E150 on the central passage E160 side can be sent (guided) to the second sorting passage E16150. In other words, it is possible to prevent balls that flow down from the end of the sorting passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F) or from the cutout portion E150a of the sorting passage E150 from being sent (guided) to the second sorting passage E16150.

A guide portion E16154 is erected on the outer edge of the second distribution path E16150, and a guide cutout portion E16154a is cut into the guide portion E16154 on the central path E160 side. The guide cutout portion E16154a is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and is formed at a position corresponding to the central path E160 (construction path E161) in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows the ball that has passed through the guide cutout portion E16154a of the second distribution path E16150 (having crossed the second distribution path E16150 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) to be sent (guided, dropped) to the central path E160 (construction path E161, fourth path ERt4).

In addition, the guide section E16154 can prevent balls sent (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150 from being sent (guided, falling) from anywhere other than the guide cutout section E16154a, so that the balls can be sent (guided, falling) more reliably to the central passage E160 (the erected passage E161, the fourth passage ERt4). This makes it easier for balls to enter the first winning opening 64 in the second distribution passage E16150 (increasing the probability of balls entering the first winning opening 64) than in the distribution passage E150.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is positioned in the second position, i.e., when balls can be sent (guided) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E16150, balls passing through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side can be made to more easily enter the first winning opening 64 (increasing the probability of winning the first winning opening 64), thereby increasing the interest of the game (see FIG. 1628).

On the other hand, it is possible to prevent balls flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F) or from the cutout portion E150a of the distribution passage E150 from being sent (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. This allows the player to expect the ball to pass through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the central passage E160.

In addition, when the distribution passage E150 is located in the first position, it is possible to prevent balls flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 from being sent (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. This allows the player to expect that the ball will pass through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side when the distribution passage E150 is located in the second position. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame E17086b in the 92nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1653(b).

In the above 80th embodiment, a protrusion E151 is formed on the upper surface of the third sorting passage E5150, and the direction in which the ball flows (rolls) is changed (altered). In the 92nd embodiment, the ball flows (rolls) toward a specific position. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description is omitted.

Figure 1653(b) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E17086b in the 92nd embodiment. Note that Figure 1653(b) illustrates the state in which the sorting passage E150 is placed in the first position.

The lower frame E17086b in the 92nd embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E5086b in the 80th embodiment, except for the third distribution passage E5150, so only the third distribution passage E17150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1653(b), the third distribution path E17150 extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially linear path when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved into an arc that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction). The third distribution path E17150 is also disposed with a downward incline from the rear panel E5137 side (arrow B direction) toward the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction).

A guide portion E17154 is erected on the outer edge of the third distribution passage E17150, and a guide cutout portion E17154a is cut into the guide portion E17154 on the side of the intermediate member E140 (the side indicated by the arrow F). The guide cutout portion E17154a is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and is formed at a position corresponding to the upper hole E162 of the central passage E160 in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R). This allows the ball that has passed through the guide cutout portion E17154a (having crossed the second distribution passage E16150 in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R)) to be sent (guided, dropped) to the upper hole E162 (the fourth passage ERt4) or the central passage E135b (the seventh passage ERt7).

In addition, the guide portion E17154 can prevent the ball sent (guided) to the third distribution passage E17150 from being sent (guided, falling) from anywhere other than the guide cutout portion E17154a, and can more reliably send (guided, falling) the ball to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4) or central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). This makes it easier for the third distribution passage E17150 to allow the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 (increasing the probability of the ball entering the first winning hole 64) than the distribution passage E150.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that passes through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side and is sent (guided) to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the third distribution passage E17150 to enter the first winning hole 64 (increasing the probability of entering the first winning hole 64), thereby increasing the interest of the game (see FIG. 1628).

When the distribution passage E150 is located in the first position, the ball can be sent (guided) from the third distribution passage E17150 to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4), and when the distribution passage E150 is located in the first position, the ball can be sent (guided) from the third distribution passage E17150 to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). In other words, whether the distribution passage E150 is located in the first position or the second position, it is easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 (increasing the probability of entering the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, balls that have passed through the end of the distribution path E150 on the central path E160 side but have not been sent (guided) to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) or the third distribution path E17150, i.e., balls that have been sent (guided) to the second inclined portion E135 (fifth path ERt5), are less likely to enter the first winning hole 64 (lowering the probability of entering the first winning hole 64). This allows the player to expect that the ball will pass through the end of the distribution path E150 on the central path E160 side, as well as be sent (guided) to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) or the third distribution path E17150. As a result, the gameplay can be diversified and the interest of the game can be increased.

Next, the center frame F86 in the 93rd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1654 to 1671.

Figure 1654 is a front view of the game board F13 in the 93rd embodiment. As shown in Figure 1654, the center frame F86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 1375) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame F86a and a lower frame F86b.

The upper frame F86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1654) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 1654) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1375) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame F86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1654) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1512) is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame F86a and the lower frame F86b.

The upper frame F86a is configured by omitting a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (the portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in Figure 1654) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, i.e., the portion where the lower frame F86b is arranged), and the remaining portions except for the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (see Figure 1512).

Next, the lower frame F86b will be described with reference to Figs. 1655 and 1656 in addition to Fig. 1654. Fig. 1655 is a front perspective view of the lower frame F86b, and Fig. 1656 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame F86b. Note that Figs. 1655 and 1656 only partially illustrate a portion of the base plate 60, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame F86b to the base plate 60 are omitted. The same applies to Figs. 1655 to 1671.

As shown in Figures 1654 to 1656, the lower frame F86b is provided with a first passage FRt1 formed to allow balls to move (flow down, roll), a second passage FRt2 and a pair of third passages FRt3 through which balls guided through the first passage FRt1 move (flow down, roll), a fourth passage FRt4 through which balls guided through one end of the second passage FRt2 or the pair of third passages FRt3 move (flow down, roll), a fifth passage FRt5 through which balls guided through the other end of the pair of third passages FRt3 or the fourth passage FRt4 move (flow down, roll), and a fifth passage FRt6 through which balls guided through the other end of the pair of third passages FRt3 or the fourth passage FRt4 move (flow down, roll). There is a sixth passage FRt6 through which the ball guided through t5 flows down, a seventh passage FRt7 through which the ball guided through the first winning opening 64 moves (flows down, rolls), an inflow opening FOPf1 (see FIG. 1657) formed as an opening through which the ball guided through the fifth passage FRt5 is guided (flows in, is sent) to the sixth passage FRt6, an outflow opening FOPout1 formed as an opening through which the ball guided through the sixth passage FRt6 flows out to the play area, and an outflow opening FOPout2 formed as an opening through which the ball guided through the seventh passage FRt7 flows out to the play area.

The pair of third passages FRt3 are arranged linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in FIG. 1654) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1654) of the game board F13.

An upper frame passage FRt0 is disposed in the upper frame F86a (see FIG. 1654). The upper frame passage FRt0 is a passage that guides the balls flowing down the play area, and the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt0 is connected to the upstream end of the first passage FRt1.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage FRt0 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage FRt0 to the first passage FRt1 of the lower frame F86b via the upstream end of the first passage FRt1. Note that a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage FRt0 from the play area may also flow (enter) from the upper frame passage FRt0 to the first passage FRt1 or the fifth passage FRt5 of the lower frame F86b.

Here, the outlet FOPout1, which is the outlet of the sixth passage FRt6 (the opening that allows balls to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64. Therefore, a ball that passes through the inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1657) of the fifth passage FRt5 and is diverted (guided) from the fifth passage FRt5 to the sixth passage FRt6 is likely to win at the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning opening 64).

In addition, in the fifth passage FRt5, an outflow surface F112b is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F, the playing area side) at two different positions in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1654) of the game board F13 relative to the first winning opening 64. Therefore, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the outflow surface F112b of the fifth passage FRt5 has a high probability of flowing out into the playing area, and as a result, it is difficult for the ball to win the first winning opening 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning opening 64 than a ball that passes through the above-mentioned inflow opening FOPf1 and is distributed from the fifth passage FRt5 to the sixth passage FRt6).

In addition, undulations F112a are formed in the fifth passage FRt5, and an outflow surface F112b is formed at the bottom of the undulations F112a. The top of the undulations F112a is inclined downward toward the inflow opening FOPf1 (see FIG. 1657). Therefore, a ball that is sorted to a position on the fifth passage FRt5 different from the top of the undulations F112a and moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction of the fifth passage FRt5 (left-right direction in FIG. 1654) is more likely to flow out from the outflow surface F112b into the play area (it is more difficult to win at the first winning opening 64) than to be guided (thrown, flows down) to the sixth passage FRt6.

On the other hand, a ball that is diverted from above the top of the ridge F112a to the top of the ridge F112a is likely to be guided (thrown, flow down) to the sixth passage FRt6 along the downward slope toward the inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1657) (there is a high probability that the ball will enter the first winning hole 64).

In the first passage FRt1, a first outlet surface F114a and a second outlet surface F114b are formed (arranged) as concave surfaces that slope downward toward the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 1654) to guide the ball guided through the first passage FRt1 to the second passage FRt2 and the third passage FRt3. The second outlet surface F114b is formed (arranged) in two different positions in the width direction of the game board F13 (left and right direction in FIG. 1654) relative to the first outlet surface F114a.

The first passage FRt1 is undulated, with the second outlet surface F114b at the bottom of the undulations and the first outlet surface F114a at the top of the undulations. Therefore, a ball diverted to the first passage FRt1 is more likely to flow from the second outlet surface F114b to the third passage FRt3 than from the first outlet surface F114a to the second passage FRt2.

A second passage through hole F171b (see FIG. 1661) is formed (arranged) in the second passage FRt2 to guide the ball guided through the second passage FRt2 to the fourth passage FRt4. The second passage through hole F171b is arranged at a position overlapping the first distribution hole F161a of the fourth passage FRt4 in a top view. This makes it easier for the ball distributed to the second passage FRt2 to pass through the first distribution hole F161a of the fourth passage FRt4.

A first distribution hole F161a and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) second distribution holes F161b are formed (arranged) in the fourth passage FRt4 to guide the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt4 to the fifth passage FRt5.

The first distribution hole F161a is formed (arranged) above the top of the undulations F112a of the fifth passage FRt5, and the multiple second distribution holes F161b are each arranged between the top and bottom (outflow surface F112b) of the undulations F112a of the fifth passage FRt5 in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 1654) of the game board F13.

Therefore, the ball that passes through the first distribution hole F161a moves (flows down, rolls) in the fifth passage FRt5 along the downward slope of the undulations F112a toward the inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1657), and is easily guided (thrown, flows down) to the sixth passage FRt6 (in this embodiment, making it almost certain that the ball will enter the first winning hole 64). Therefore, the ball that is distributed to the second passage FRt2 is easily guided (thrown, flows down) to the sixth passage FRt6.

On the other hand, balls that pass through the second distribution holes F161b move (flow down, roll) in the fifth passage FRt5 along the extension direction of the fifth passage FRt5 (left-right direction in Figure 1654) from the top of the undulations F112a to the bottom (outflow surface F112b), and are likely to flow out from the outflow surface F112b into the play area (in this embodiment, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the first winning hole 64).

A third passage outlet surface F131a and a third passage through hole F131d are formed (arranged) in the third passage FRt3 to distribute (guide) the balls guided through the third passage FRt3 to the fourth passage FRt4 or the fifth passage FRt5.

The third passage outlet surface F131a is formed on the fourth passage FRt4 side in the extension direction of the third passage FRt3, and the third passage through hole F131d is formed on the opposite side of the fourth passage FRt4 (third passage outlet surface F131a). In addition, the third passage through hole F131d is formed at a different position in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1654) of the game board F13 relative to the top and bottom of the undulations F112a of the fifth passage FRt5. Therefore, the ball that passes through the third passage through hole F131d and is sorted into the fifth passage FRt5 moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction of the fifth passage FRt5 (left-right direction in FIG. 1654).

In addition, undulations are formed in the third passage FRt3, and the top of the undulations is located on the fourth passage FRt4 side of the lowest position in the vertical direction (up and down direction in Figure 1654) of the second outflow surface F114b of the first passage FRt1. Therefore, a ball that is diverted (guided) to the third passage FRt3 is more likely to be diverted (guided) from the third passage through hole F131d to the fifth passage FRt5 than to be diverted (guided) from the third passage outflow surface F131a to the fourth passage FRt4.

A movable passage F193 that is displaced (rotated) according to the weight of the ball is provided in the seventh passage FRt7 (see FIG. 1668). The presentation means F120 operates in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the movable passage F193, making it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball has been guided to the seventh passage FRt7 (the ball has entered the first winning hole 64).

The lower frame F86b is provided with a displacement member F130 that is displaced (rotated) by the weight of the ball, and a fixed passage F140 that is linked to the movement of the displacement member F130. In addition, a pair of blocking sections F143a of the fixed passage F140 are positioned inside the edge of the inlet FOPf1 in a front view (see FIG. 1665), so that a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the fifth passage FRt5 is unlikely to pass through the inlet FOPf1 (is unlikely to be diverted to the sixth passage FRt6). In other words, the pair of blocking sections F143a are disposed in a position that is likely to prevent a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the fifth passage FRt5 from passing through the inlet FOPf1.

The displacement member F130 operates by the ball guided into the third passage FRt3 moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the third passage through-hole F131d. The determined passage F140 is displaced in conjunction with the operation of the displacement member F130, and after operation, the pair of blocking portions F143a are displaced outward from the edge of the inlet FOPf1 in a front view (see FIG. 1666).

In this embodiment, the determined passage F140 is defined as blocking the inlet FOPf1 when the blocking portion F143a of the determined passage F140 is positioned inside the edge of the inlet FOPf1, and the determined passage F140 is defined as opening the inlet FOPf1 when the blocking portion F143a is displaced outside the edge of the inlet FOPf1.

Therefore, when the ball sorted into the third passage FRt3 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the third passage through hole F131d, causing the determined passage F140 to open the inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1666), the pair of blocking sections F143a are displaced in a direction that increases the distance between the pair of opposing blocking sections F143a. As a result, a ball moving (flows down, rolls) through the fifth passage FRt5 is more likely to be guided (thrown, flows down) through the inlet FOPf1 to the sixth passage FRt6 (more likely to enter the first winning hole 64).

In addition, when the determined passage F140 blocks the inflow opening FOPf1 (see FIG. 1665), the probability that a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the third passage outlet surface F131a of the third passage FRt3 to the fourth passage FRt4 passes through the first distribution hole F161a of the fourth passage FRt4 is set to be higher than the probability that a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the third passage through hole F131d of the third passage FRt3 to the fifth passage FRt5 passes through the inflow opening FOPf1 of the fifth passage FRt5. Therefore, a ball that is distributed to the third passage FRt3 is more likely to pass through the inflow opening FOPf1 and be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the sixth passage FRt6 (more likely to enter the first winning opening 64) if it moves (flows down, rolls) toward the third passage outlet surface F131a rather than the third passage through hole F131d.

In this way, the lower frame F86b in this embodiment can distribute (guide) balls moving (flowing down, rolling) along the first passage FRt1 in its extension direction to the second passage FRt2, making it easier for the ball to win in the first winning hole 64 (in this embodiment, making it easier for the ball to win in the first winning hole 64 with almost certainty).

In addition, when the determined passage F140 blocks the inflow opening FOPf1 (see FIG. 1665), a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the first passage FRt1 in its extension direction is diverted (guided) to the third passage FRt3, and then diverted (guided) from the third passage outlet surface F131a to the fourth passage FRt4, making it easier for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64 than if it were diverted (guided) from the third passage through hole F131d to the fifth passage FRt5.

In addition, when a ball is sorted (guided) from the third passage through hole F131d to the fifth passage FRt5 and moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction of the fifth passage FRt5, the ball following the ball moving (flows down, rolls) along the fifth passage FRt5 moves (flows down, rolls) along the third passage FRt3 toward the third passage through hole F131d (the displacement member F130 is operated, and the determined passage F140 opens the inlet FOPf1), making it easier to guide (throw, flow down) the ball moving along the fifth passage FRt5 (the ball preceding the ball moving along the third passage FRt3 toward the third passage through hole F131d) to the sixth passage FRt6 (making it easier to enter the first winning hole 64).

Therefore, even if a ball does not pass through the first distribution hole F161a of the fourth passage FRt4 (a ball with a low probability of winning the first winning opening 64), the ball can be easily guided (thrown, flowing down) to the sixth passage FRt6 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is increased) by displacing (rotating) the displacement member F130 (the fixed passage F140 opens the inlet FOPf1). This makes the player aware of the presence or absence of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the displacement member F130 when the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction of the fifth passage FRt5, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame F86b will be described with reference to Figures 1655 to 1656 as well as Figures 1657 to 1664.

Figure 1657 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame F86b, and Figure 1658 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame F86b. Figure 1659(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the determined passage F140, and Figure 1659(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the drive means F180, and Figure 1660(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the determined passage F140, and Figure 1660(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive means F180. Figure 1661 is a top view of the lower frame F86b, and Figure 1662 is a front view of the lower frame F86b, and Figure 1663 is a rear view of the lower frame F86b. Figure 1664(a) is a side view of the lower frame F86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCLXIVa in Figure 1662, Figure 1664(b) is a side view of the lower frame F86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCLXIVb in Figure 1662, and Figure 1664(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame F86b along the line MDCLXIVc-MDCLXIVc in Figure 1662.

As shown in Figures 1655 to 1664, the lower frame F86b includes a passage member F110, a performance means F120 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front panel F111 of the passage member F110, a pair of displacement members F130 that are displaceably (rotatably) engaged (supported) with the performance means F120 and arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110, and a pair of displacement members F130 arranged on the rear side of the performance means F120. The system includes a fixed passage F140, a rear member F150 disposed on the rear side of the fixed passage F140, a distribution passage F160 fixed to the rear member F150 and disposed on the front side of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110, a second passage member F170 fixed to the distribution passage F160 and disposed on the front side of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110, and a drive means F180 disposed on the rear side of the rear member F150.

The passage member F110 and the performance means F120 are respectively formed with an outlet FOPout1 and a lower hole F121a, and the passage section F141b of the fixed passage F140 is inserted into the outlet FOPout1 and the lower hole F121a. In addition, the passage member F110 and the performance means F120 are respectively formed with a first notch section F113b and an upper hole F121b, and the fixing section F162 of the distribution passage F160 is inserted into the first notch section F113b and the upper hole F121b.

The displacement member F130 is engaged (supported) to the performance means F120 so as to be displaceable (rotatable). The connection member F145 of the determined passage F140 is engaged (fixed) to the displacement member F130 so as not to rotate, and the connection member F145 is displaced (rotated) when the displacement member F130 is displaced (rotated). This causes the opening/closing member F143 (blocking portion F143a) of the determined passage F140 to open the inlet FOPf1.

The driving means F180 is engaged with the movable member F122 of the performance means F120, and the driving means F180 drives the movable member F122 to reciprocate in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D).

The rear member F150 is fastened to the passage member F110 with tapping screws. The performance means F120, the determination passage F140, the distribution passage F160 and the drive means F180 are each fastened to the rear member F150 with tapping screws, and the second passage member F170 is fastened to the distribution passage F160 with tapping screws. As a result, the lower frame F86b is configured as a single unit (see Figures 1655 and 1656).

In addition, the seventh passage F190 is fastened to the base plate 60 by tapping screws on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the passage member F110 and on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the performance means F120.

The lower frame F86b has the passage member F110, rear member F150, distribution passage F160 and second passage member F170 made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e. transparent so that the rear side members and balls can be seen through), and the performance means F120, displacement member F130, determination passage F140 and drive means F180 made of a colored resin material. The seventh passage F190 is also made of a light-transmitting resin material.

The upper end of the wall portion F132 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the displacement member F130 is formed lower than the upper end of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the displacement member F130. This allows the player to visually see the ball moving from the first passage FRt1 to the seventh passage FRt7, and also allows the player to visually see the operation of the displacement member F130, the presentation means F120, and the final passage F140, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The performance means F120, the displacement member F130 and the confirmation passage F140 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

On the other hand, the lower frame F86b is configured so that the performance means F120, which is disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the drive means F180, is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or is painted or has a sticker attached), making the drive means F180 invisible to the player. Note that the drive means F180 may be configured so that the performance means F120 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, making the drive means F180 visible to the player.

The passage member F110 is for forming the first passage FRt1 and the fifth passage FRt5, and includes a plate-shaped front plate F111 that forms the front surface, a lower passage F112 that protrudes from the back surface of the front plate F111, a vertical wall portion F113 that extends vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the end of the back surface side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the lower passage F112, an upper passage F114 that protrudes from the back surface of the vertical wall portion F113, and a pair of fastening portions F115 that protrude vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D) from the ends of both the left and right ends of the lower passage F112 and the upper passage F114.

The first passage FRt1 is formed by the space partitioned by the rear member F150, the vertical wall portion F113, and the upper passage F114, and the fifth passage FRt5 is formed by the space partitioned by the front plate F111, the lower passage F112, and the vertical wall portion F113.

The front plate F111 is a part for preventing balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112 from leaking out into the play area, and is formed of a central section extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and an inclined section that is inclined vertically upward (arrow U direction) from both left-right ends of the central section toward the outside. The upper end of the inclined section of the front plate F111 is formed vertically above the upper surface of the lower passage F112. This allows balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112 to abut against the back surface of the inclined section of the front plate F111, preventing balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112 from leaking out into the play area.

The front plate F111 has multiple through holes F111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the front plate F111. When assembled (unitized), the lower frame F86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes F111a to the base plate 60.

In the center of the front panel F111, an outlet FOPout1 is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1654). The outlet FOPout1 is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outline of a ball. As described above, the outlet FOPout1 is an opening that serves as an exit when a ball guided through the sixth passage FRt6 flows out (flows down) into the play area.

A protruding portion F111b is provided on the front plate F111 so as to protrude vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the outlet FOPout1. A notch F111c, whose shape in a front view is substantially the same as the shape of the outlet surface F112b of the lower passage F112, is formed on the front side (in the direction of the arrow F) of the outlet surface F112b. The protruding portion F111b prevents balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112 from flowing out into the play area, and by passing through the notch F111c, balls sorted to the fifth passage FRt5 flow out (flow down) into the play area.

The lower passage F112 is a portion along whose upper surface the ball moves (flows down, rolls), and is formed with a downward incline towards the vertical wall portion F113 (the direction of arrow B). The lower passage F112 is also formed with a downward incline from both ends in the left-right direction (the direction of arrows L-R) towards the center. This allows a ball guided (thrown, flows down) into the lower passage F112 to oscillate (move, roll) along the left-right direction while abutting against the vertical wall portion F113.

In addition, the lower passage F112 has undulations F112a formed at a position on the front side (arrow F direction) of the inlet FOPf1, and a pair of outlet surfaces F112b are formed (arranged) as concave surfaces at the bottom of the undulations F112a, in other words, at the boundary between the undulations F112a and a surface formed by sloping downward as it approaches the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The undulations F112a are formed by sloping downward in the left-right direction from the top of the undulations F112a, and are also formed by sloping downward toward the back side (arrow B direction, inlet FOPf1 side). On the other hand, the outlet surface F112b is formed by sloping downward toward the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side).

Therefore, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from above the top of the ridges F112a (in the direction of arrow U) to the ridges F112a moves (flows down, rolls) from the top of the ridges F112a toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B, toward the inlet FOPf1), passes through the inlet FOPf1 (flows into the inlet FOPf1), and is likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the sixth passage FRt6. On the other hand, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to a position other than the top of the ridges F112a moves (flows down, rolls) toward the outlet surface F112b, and is likely to be discharged from the outlet surface F112b into the play area.

The vertical wall portion F113 is a portion for connecting the lower passage F112 and the upper passage F114. A bulge portion F113a is formed in the vertical wall portion F113 at a position on the rear side (the direction of arrow B) of the undulations F112a of the lower passage F112, and the inlet FOPf1 is opened (drilled in the plate thickness direction) in the bulge portion F113a.

The bulge F113a is formed to protrude towards the front side (arrow F direction). As a result, when a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F112 while abutting against the upright wall F113 passes through the undulations F112a, a velocity component towards the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side) can be imparted to the ball passing through the undulations F112a. As a result, it is made difficult for the ball passing through the undulations F112a to be guided (thrown, flowing down) into the sixth passage FRt6 (made difficult for the ball to flow into the inlet FOPf1).

The dimension of the inflow opening FOPf1 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is larger than the outline of a sphere, and more specifically, is approximately three times the size of the outline of a sphere. In addition, a pair of opening/closing members F143 (blocking portions F143a) of the determined passage F140 are disposed in the area surrounded by the edges of the inflow opening FOPf1 in a front view, excluding approximately the center in the left-right direction. As a result, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction of the lower passage F112 (arrow L-R direction) is less likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the sixth passage FRt6.

The gap between the pair of opening and closing members F143 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of a ball, and the ball that passes between the pair of opening and closing members F143 (flows into the gap between the opening and closing members F143) is guided (thrown, flows down) to the sixth passage FRt6.

A first notch F113b is formed in the inner circumferential surface above the inlet FOPf1 (the side in the direction of the arrow U), and a second notch F113c is formed in the inner circumferential surface above the first notch F113b. In addition, a pair of insertion holes F113d are formed in the vertical wall F113 at both left and right ends of the inlet FOPf1 in the plate thickness direction (drilled in the plate thickness direction).

The first cutout portion F113b is a cutout through which the fixed portion F162 of the distribution passage F160 is inserted, and the second cutout portion F113c is a cutout through which the fixed portion F172 of the second passage member F170 is inserted. In addition, the pair of insertion holes F113d are holes through which the shaft F133 of the displacement member F130 is inserted.

The upper end of the vertical wall portion F113 is formed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the upper passage F114. This allows a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F114 to abut against the back surface of the vertical wall portion F113, and prevents the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F114 from flowing out (flowing down) into the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5).

The vertical wall portion F113 also has a third notch portion F113e and a fourth notch portion F113f, whose shapes in a front view are substantially the same as the shapes of the first outflow surface F114a and the second outflow surface F114b of the upper passage F114, formed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the first outflow surface F114a and the second outflow surface F114b, respectively.

By passing through the third notch portion F113e, the ball guided through the first passage FRt1 is guided (thrown, discharged) to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2), and by passing through the fourth notch portion F113f, the ball guided through the first passage FRt1 is guided (thrown, discharged) to the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3).

The upper passage F114 is the area on whose upper surface the balls move (flow down, roll) and is formed with a downward slope from both ends in the left-right direction (arrows L-R direction) towards the center.

In addition, an undulation is formed in approximately the center of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and it slopes downward from the top of the undulation in the left-right direction. Also, a first outflow surface F114a is formed (placed) at the top of the undulation as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the second passage member F170 side (front side, arrow F direction), and a pair of second outflow surfaces F114b are formed (placed) at the bottom of the undulation, in other words, at the boundary between the surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction and the undulating surface, as concave surfaces that slope downward toward the displacement member F130 side (front side, arrow F direction).

Therefore, a ball that is diverted (guided) to the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) is more likely to be guided (thrown, flow down) from the second outflow surface F114b through the fourth notch portion F113f to the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) than from the first outflow surface F114a through the third notch portion F113e to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2).

The upper passage F114 is also formed with a downward incline toward the rear member F150 (arrow B direction). This allows a ball oscillating (flowing down, rolling) along the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) to easily pass through the first outlet surface F114a or the second outlet surface F114b, and the time required to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) or the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) can be increased. As a result, the time that the player expects to be sorted (guided) to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) can be lengthened, increasing the excitement of the game.

The fastening portion F115 has multiple (two in this embodiment) through holes F115a drilled in the plate thickness direction, and the back member F150 is fixed (disposed) to the passage member F110 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes F115a to the back member F150.

The presentation means F120 is intended to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball has been guided to the seventh passage FRt7 (entered the first winning hole 64), and comprises a fixed member F121, a movable member F122 disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) and on the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of the fixed member F121, and a colored member F123 disposed on the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of the fixed member F121 and the movable member F122.

The fixed member F121 is formed of a main body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and protrusions protruding downward (arrow D direction) from both left-right ends of the main body. The movable member F122 is formed of a main body extending in the left-right direction and protrusions protruding upward (arrow U direction) from both left-right ends of the main body. An opening is formed in the space surrounded by the main body and protrusions of the fixed member F121 and the main body and protrusions of the movable member F122.

The details will be described later, but the movable member F122 is arranged so that it can reciprocate up and down (in the direction of the arrows U and D). This allows the size of the opening formed by the fixed member F121 and the movable member F122 to be variable. Note that the movable member F122 is arranged on the rear side (in the direction of the arrow B) of the fixed member F121, thereby preventing the fixed member F121 and the movable member F122 from coming into contact with each other.

The fixing member F121 has a lower hole F121a located approximately in the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), an upper hole F121b located above the lower hole F121a (arrow U direction side), and a pair of insertion holes F121c located on both left-right ends of the upper hole F121b (drilled in the plate thickness direction). In addition, a pair of restriction pieces F121d (see FIG. 1665) are formed on the back surface of the fixing member F121 at positions that are the center of the pair of insertion holes F121c in the left-right direction.

The lower hole F121a and the upper hole F121b are formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the inlet FOPf1 and the first cutout portion F113b of the passage member F110, respectively. The opening/closing member F143 of the fixed passage F140 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the fixed member F121 via the lower hole F121a. In addition, the fourth passage portion F161 of the distribution passage F160 is disposed on the front side of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110 via the upper hole F121b.

The pair of insertion holes F121c are holes for inserting the shaft F133 of the displacement member F130, and are drilled below the second outflow surface F114b of the passage member F110 (in the direction of arrow D). Bushes (not shown) are disposed at the ends of the front side (in the direction of arrow F) and back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the insertion hole F121c. The shaft F133 is rotatably engaged (pivotally supported) with the fixed member F121 via these bushes.

The pair of regulating pieces F121d are parts for regulating the displacement (rotation) of the fixed passage F140 (connecting member F145) and are formed so as to be able to abut against the weight support portion F145c of the connecting member F145 (see FIG. 1665).

The movable member F122 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of a ball, and more specifically, the dimension of the movable member F122 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be approximately 20 times larger than the outer shape of a ball. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the movement (displacement) of the movable member F122 compared to a ball.

The movable member F122 is engaged with the driving means F180, and when the driving means F180 is driven, the movable member F122 reciprocates in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D). The driving means F180 is driven when the ball is guided to the seventh passage FRt7. Therefore, when the movable member F122 reciprocates in the vertical direction, it is easy for the player to visually confirm that the ball has been guided to the seventh passage FRt7 (the ball has entered the first winning hole 64).

The colored member F123 is intended to make the driving means F180 invisible to the player, and is formed from a colored plate-like body. The lower end of the colored member F123 is formed below the upper end of the main body of the movable member F122 when it is positioned at the lowest position (in the direction of arrow D).

The colored member F123 is also colored a different color from the movable member F122. This makes it easier for the player to visually see the reciprocating movement of the movable member F122 in the up and down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), and makes it easier for the player to visually see that the ball that has been sorted (guided) to the lower frame F86b has been guided to the seventh passage FRt7 (the ball has entered the first winning hole 64).

The displacement member F130 is for operating (displacing, rotating) the opening/closing member F143 of the fixed passage F140, and includes a passage section F131 and a wall section F132 disposed at the front end of the passage section F131. A third passage FRt3 is formed by the space partitioned by the passage section F131, the wall section F132, and the upright wall section F113 of the passage member F110. In addition, the shaft F133 is disposed (fixed) in the displacement member F130 in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

The passage section F131 is a section for distributing (guiding) balls guided (thrown, flowing down) from the second outlet surface F114b of the upper passage F114 to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) or the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110, and is formed from a plate-shaped body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The passage section F131 is formed with undulations that slope downward in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the side closer to the sorting passage F160 (towards the center in the left-right direction) than the top of the undulations is formed as the third passage outlet surface F131a described above. A rolling surface F131b is formed closer to the sorting passage F160 than the top of the undulations (the side opposite the third passage outlet surface F131a, both ends in the left-right direction), and the boundary between the third passage outlet surface F131a and the rolling surface F131b is formed as the top of the undulations. In addition, the passage section F131 is formed with a recess F131c recessed downward (towards the direction of arrow D) at the position that is the tip of the rolling surface F131b.

In the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the passage section F131, the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the sorting passage F160 is located at a position facing the third passage outlet face F131a (a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the end of the third passage outlet face F131a). This allows the ball sorted (guided) from the third passage outlet face F131a to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to a position (eccentric position) different from the center of the sorting passage F160.

The width of the passage F131 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and the rolling surface F131b is made so that its width in the front-to-rear direction gradually increases from the top of the undulations toward the recess F131c.

The third passage outlet surface F131a and the rolling surface F131b are each formed with a downward inclination in the extension direction (left-right direction) of the passage section F131 as they approach the opposite side to the peak of the undulations. The rolling surface F131b is also formed with a downward inclination toward the wall section F132 side (the direction of the arrow F). This allows the balls that are distributed (guided) to the rolling surface F131b to move (flow down, roll) while abutting against the wall section F132.

The recess F131c is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the above-mentioned third passage through hole F131d is formed (drilled) in the bottom surface F131c1 of the recess F131c. In other words, the bottom surface F131c1 is formed continuously along the periphery of the third passage through hole F131d. The third passage through hole F131d is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of a sphere, and the center of the third passage through hole F131d is located on the central axis of the recess F131c.

The inner diameter of the recess F131c is formed to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the ball, and the distance between the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c and the inner peripheral surface of the third passage through hole F131d is formed to be smaller than the radius of the ball. This allows the center of gravity of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the recess F131c to be positioned closer to the center than the inner peripheral surface of the third passage through hole F131d, and the weight of the ball can be used to displace the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the recess F131c toward the third passage through hole F131d.

The recess F131c is also formed to a depth smaller than the diameter of the ball. This allows the player to visually see the ball that has been guided (thrown, flowed down) into the recess F131c. The bottom surface F131c1 of the recess F131c is also formed to be flat. In other words, the height of the bottom surface F131c1 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is set to be the same continuously along the periphery of the third passage through-hole F131d.

As described above, the rolling surface F131b is formed with a downward incline toward the wall portion F132 (the direction of the arrow F), so that the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F131b can be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the recessed portion F131c while abutting against the wall portion F132. In other words, the ball can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward an eccentric position (a position different from the central axis) relative to the central axis of the recessed portion F131c (third passage through hole F131d).

This allows the ball that has been guided (thrown, flowed down) to the recess F131c to move (flow down, roll) along the inner circumferential surface of the recess F131c (around the third passage through hole F131d) by utilizing the centrifugal force acting on the ball. In addition, the ball's speed can be reduced by moving (flowing down, rolling) while in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the recess F131c (around the third passage through hole F131d). As a result, it is possible to delay the ball's flow into the third passage through hole F131d and its guidance (throwing, flowing down) from the recess F131c (the time required for the ball to flow into the third passage through hole F131d can be increased).

The passage F131 also has a connecting portion that protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) at a position slightly to the left and right (in the direction of arrows L-R) from the peak of the undulations, and the connecting portion has a fitting hole F131e that is formed with a D-shaped cross section and is recessed from the back surface of the connecting portion toward the front surface (in the direction of arrow F). The fitting hole F131e is a hole for fitting (fixing) the shaft F133 so that it cannot rotate.

The wall portion F132 is a portion for preventing movement (flowing down, rolling) on the third passage outlet surface F131a or rolling surface F131b of the passage portion F131 from moving (flowing down, falling) into the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110.

The wall portion F132 is made of a colored resin material, making it possible for the player to see the undulations of the passage portion F131. This makes it difficult for the player to tell whether a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage portion F131 (third passage FRt3) is being guided (thrown, flowing down) to the third passage outlet surface F131a or the rolling surface F131b, making the game more interesting.

On the other hand, the distance between the upper end of the wall portion F132 and the upper surface of the passage portion F131 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. This allows the player to see the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the passage portion F131 (third passage FRt3).

The shaft F133 is made of a metal material and is rod-shaped, and is rotatably engaged with the fixed member F121 via a bush (not shown) with the extension direction of the shaft F133 aligned along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

The front and rear ends of the shaft F133 are formed to have outer shapes that match the cross-sectional shape of the fitting hole F131e and the cross-sectional shape of the insertion hole F145a1 drilled in the connecting body portion F145a of the determined passage F140. The front end side of the shaft F133 is fitted (fixed) into the fitting hole F131e, so that the shaft F133 is non-rotatably arranged (axially supported) in the passage portion F131, and the rear end side of the shaft F133 is fitted into the insertion hole F145a1, so that the shaft F133 is non-rotatably arranged (axially supported) in the connecting body portion F145a. Through the shaft F133, the displacement member F130 and the determined passage F140 are integrated (formed as one unit).

The fixed passage F140 is for guiding (sending, flowing down) the ball that has passed through the inlet FOPf1 of the passage member F110 (flowing into the inlet FOPf1) to the first winning opening 64, and is equipped with a sixth passage member F141, an axis F142 arranged in the sixth passage member F141, an opening/closing member F143 rotatably engaged with the axis F142, a sliding member F144 that engages with the opening/closing member F143 and displaces left and right (arrow L-R direction), a connecting member F145 that connects the sliding member F144 to the axis F133 of the displacement member F130, and a weight F146 arranged on the connecting member F145.

The sixth passage member F141 includes an attachment portion F141a, a passage portion F141b and a pair of ball receiving portions F141c protruding from the front of the attachment portion F141a, a bearing portion F141d protruding from the back of the attachment portion F141a, and multiple (four in this embodiment) fastening portions F141e arranged on both ends of the bearing portion F141d in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The attachment portion F141a is formed of a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from the front. When a ball is guided (thrown, flows down) into the sixth passage member F141, it abuts against the attachment portion F141a, thereby restricting the ball from displacing toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B).

The passage portion F141b is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a bottom surface portion F141b1 extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and a pair of wall portions F141b2 protruding upward (arrow U direction) from both left-right ends of the bottom surface portion F141b1. The distance between the opposing surfaces of the pair of wall portions F141b2 is formed slightly larger than the outline of a sphere, and the sixth passage FRt6 is formed by the space partitioned by the bottom surface portion F141b1 and the pair of wall portions F141b2.

The passage section F141b is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F110, and by passing through the outlet FOPout1, the ball moving (flowing down, falling) in the passage section F141b (sixth passage FRt6) flows out into the game area (guided to the first winning port 64).

A pair of protrusions F141b3 are provided on the top surface of the bottom portion F141b1, spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The protrusions F141b3 extend linearly in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the top surface of the protrusions F141b3 is formed to slope downward toward the front side (arrow F direction). The distance between the opposing surfaces of the pair of protrusions F141b3 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the protruding length (dimension in the arrow U-D direction) at the front end of the protrusions F141b3 is set to a depth that prevents the sphere from contacting the top surface of the bottom portion F141b1.

This allows the ball on the bottom portion F141b1 to be positioned at two points (a pair of ridges on the opposing surface side at the upper end of the protrusion F141b3). Therefore, compared to when the pair of protrusions F141b3 are not formed, it is easier to keep the position of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the passage portion F141b constant. This makes it easier to guide (enter) the ball that has passed through the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F110 into the first winning port 64.

The ball receiving section F141c is a section for guiding (throwing, flowing down) the ball that has passed through the inlet FOPf1 to the passage section F141b (sixth passage FRt6). The ball receiving section F141c is formed from a plate-shaped body that extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and is formed with a downward incline from both left-right ends toward the center.

The lower surface of the ball receiving portion F141c is disposed in contact with the upper end of the wall portion F141b2 of the passage portion F141b. This allows the wall portion F141b2 to serve both the function of forming the sixth passage FRt6 and the function of supporting (reinforcing) the ball receiving portion F141c, making it easier to prevent damage to the ball receiving portion F141c.

The bearing portion F141d is a portion for supporting the shaft F142, and a recess is provided on the upper surface of the bearing portion F141d facing downward (in the direction of arrow D). The lower end side of the shaft F142 is disposed (engaged) in the recess, whereby the shaft F142 is supported by the bearing portion F141d.

The fastening portion F141e is a portion where a tapping screw is screwed in order to fasten the fixed passage F140 and the rear member F150. The fastening portion F141e protrudes from the rear face of the mounting portion F141a, so that a predetermined space can be formed between the mounting portion F141a and the rear member F150. The shaft F142 and a pair of slide members F144 are disposed in this space.

The shaft F142 is a rotation axis for displacing (rotating) the opening/closing member F143. The shaft F142 is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material, and the outer diameter of the shaft F142 is formed slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole formed in the bearing portion F141d of the sixth passage member F141.

The opening/closing member F143 is intended to make it difficult for balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 to flow into the inlet FOPf1. The opening/closing member F143 is composed of a left opening/closing member F143L arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) and a right opening/closing member F143R arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side), and the left opening/closing member F143L and the right opening/closing member F143R are each arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the pair of ball receiving portions F141c.

The left opening/closing member F143L includes a blocking portion F143a, a connecting portion F143b that protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the rear end of the blocking portion F143a, and a protruding portion F143c that protrudes from the lower end of the connecting portion F143b toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B).

The right-side opening/closing member F143R is formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1654) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1654) of the game board F13, except that the connecting portion F143b is omitted and the protruding portion F143c protrudes from the upper end of the blocking portion F143a to the rear side (arrow B direction) compared to the left-side opening/closing member F143L. Therefore, the parts of the right-side opening/closing member F143R that are formed symmetrically with the left-side opening/closing member F143L are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

The blocking portion F143a is formed from a plate-like body, and the upper end side of the blocking portion F143a is bent toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B). The connecting portion F143b is disposed at the rear end of the bent portion of the blocking portion F143a. When viewed from the front, the blocking portion F143a is disposed at a position that is visible to the player through the inlet FOPf1 formed in the passage member F110. In other words, the blocking portion F143a is disposed inside the edge of the inlet FOPf1. Therefore, the blocking portion F143a is disposed so that it can come into contact with a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5).

The distance between the opposing blocking portions F143a of a pair (left opening/closing member F143L and right opening/closing member F143R) is made slightly larger than the diameter of a ball. This makes it difficult for a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) to flow between the pair of opposing blocking portions F143a and into the inlet FOPf1 (making it difficult for the ball to be guided into the sixth passage FRt6).

The blocking portion F143a is curved in an arc shape centered on the axis F142. In other words, the blocking portion F143a is curved in a shape that becomes convex toward the front side (arrow F direction) from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the center in the left-right direction.

This allows the ball that abuts against the blocking portion F143a to move (flow down, roll) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110, and also to move (flow down, roll) toward the front side (arrow F direction). As a result, it is possible to easily guide (throw, flow down) the ball moving (flow down, roll) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) to the outflow surface F112b (making it difficult to guide it to the sixth passage FRt6).

The connecting portion F143b is a portion for preventing the protrusion F143c of the left opening/closing member F143L from coming into contact with the protrusion F143c of the right opening/closing member F143R. By forming the connecting portion F143b on the left opening/closing member F143L, the protrusion F143c formed on the left opening/closing member F143L is disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) the protrusion F143c formed on the right opening/closing member F143R.

The protrusion F143c is supported by the shaft F142 and engages with the slide member F144. A shaft support hole F143d is drilled on the connecting portion F143b side (front side, arrow F direction side) of the protrusion F143c, and an engagement hole F143e is drilled at a position closer to the rear side (arrow B direction side) than the shaft support hole F143d.

The shaft support hole F143d is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft F142, and when the shaft F142 is inserted into the shaft support hole F143d, the left opening/closing member F143L is rotatably engaged (supported) with the shaft F142 as the rotation axis.

The first engagement portion F144c of the left slide member F144L is inserted (engaged) into the engagement hole F143e. The engagement hole F143e is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) when viewed from above. In detail, when the first engagement portion F144c of the left slide member F144L is inserted (engaged) into the engagement hole F143e, a gap larger than the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the protrusion F143c due to the rotation (displacement) of the left opening/closing member F143L is formed between the inner circumferential surface of the engagement hole F143e and the first engagement portion F144c.

As a result, when the left slide member F144L is displaced in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), the inner circumferential surface of the engagement hole F143e in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) comes into contact with the first engagement portion F144c, preventing the rotation (displacement) of the left opening/closing member F143L from being restricted.

The slide member F144 is for operating (displacing, rotating) the opening/closing member F143. The slide member F144 is composed of a left slide member F144L that engages with the left opening/closing member F143L, and a right slide member F144R that engages with the right opening/closing member F143R.

The left side slide member F144L comprises a slide main body portion F144a, an extension portion F144b extending from the lower end of the slide main body portion F144a toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a first engagement portion F144c protruding upward (arrow U direction) from the extension portion F144b, and a second engagement portion F144d protruding from the slide main body portion F144a toward the front side (arrow F direction).

The right-side slide member F144R is formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1654) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1654) of the game board F13, except that the extension portion F144b extends from the upper end of the slide main body portion F144a on the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and the first engagement portion F144c protrudes downward (arrow D direction) compared to the left-side slide member F144L. Therefore, the parts of the right-side slide member F144R that are formed symmetrically with the left-side slide member F144L are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

The slide body F144a is formed from a plate-like body, and both ends of the slide body F144a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are bent toward the rear side (arrow B direction). An insertion hole F144a1 is drilled in the plate thickness direction (arrow L-R direction) in each of the portions bent toward the rear side.

The slide bar F158 of the back member F150 is inserted (engaged) into the insertion hole F144a1 (see FIG. 1665), so that the slide member F144 is arranged (engaged) so as to be displaceable along the extension direction of the slide bar F158 (arrow L-R direction).

The extension portion F144b formed on the left slide member F144L and the extension portion F144b formed on the right slide member F144R are disposed at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). As a result, the first engagement portion F144c of the right slide member F144R and the protrusion portion F143c of the right opening and closing member F143R are disposed above (arrow U direction) the first engagement portion F144c of the left slide member F144L and the protrusion portion F143c of the left opening and closing member F143L. As a result, the first engagement portion F144c and the protrusion portion F143c can be disposed at positions that overlap in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), improving the degree of freedom in designing the fixed passage F140 (opening and closing member F143 and slide member F144).

The first engagement portion F144c is a portion that is inserted (engaged) into the engagement hole F143e of the opening/closing member F143 and is formed in a cylindrical shape. When the left slide member F144L is displaced in the extension direction of the slide rod F158 (arrow L-R direction) and pushes against the inner circumferential surface of the engagement hole F143e, the opening/closing member F143 rotates around the shaft F142 as the rotation axis.

The second engagement portion F144d is a portion that is inserted (engaged) into the slide engagement portion F145b of the connecting member F145, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The engagement between the second engagement portion F144d and the slide engagement portion F145b causes the slide member F144 to displace in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member F145.

The connecting member F145 is for operating (displacing) the slide member F144, and includes a connecting body part F145a, a slide engagement part F145b that protrudes downward (in the direction of the arrow D) from the connecting body part F145a, and a weight support part F145c that protrudes from the connecting body part F145a toward the center in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R).

The connecting body F145a is formed in a cylindrical shape. An insertion hole F145a1 is drilled in the connecting body F145a in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) and is formed as a hole with a D-shaped cross section. The shaft F133 of the displacement member F130 is non-rotatably arranged (fixed) in the insertion hole F145a1, so that the connecting member F145 can be displaced (rotated) in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130.

The slide engagement portion F145b is formed in a cylindrical shape, and an insertion hole F145b1 is drilled in the slide engagement portion F145b, through which the second engagement portion F144d of the slide member F144 is inserted (engaged).

The insertion hole F145b1 is formed as a long hole that is long in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) when viewed from the front. In detail, when the second engagement portion F144d of the slide member F144 is inserted (engaged) into the insertion hole F145b1, a gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole F145b1 and the second engagement portion F144d that is larger than the amount of displacement in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the slide engagement portion F145b due to the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member F145.

As a result, when the left slide member F144L is displaced in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R), the inner surface of the insertion hole F145b1 in the up-down direction comes into contact with the second engagement portion F144d of the slide member F144, preventing the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member F145 from being restricted.

The weight support portion F145c is formed in a cylindrical shape that is recessed from the rear side (arrow B direction side) toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F145c is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the weight F146. The weight F146 is disposed (engaged) on the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F145c, so that the weight F146 is disposed (supported) on the connecting member F145.

The weight F146 is used to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the connecting member F145, and is formed into a cylindrical shape from a metal material. By arranging the weight F146 on both ends of the insertion hole F145a1 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), the center of gravity of the entire connecting member F145 and weight F146 is located on both ends of the insertion hole F145a1 in the left-right direction.

The rear member F150 is used to form the rear surface of the lower frame F86b and includes a rear wall portion F151, a pair of first fixing portions F152 protruding from both left-right (arrow L-R) ends and the lower end of the rear wall portion F151 toward the front side (arrow F direction), a pair of second fixing portions F153 protruding toward the front side above (arrow U direction) the pair of first fixing portions F152, a pair of fastening portions F154 protruding toward the front side at the left-right center of the pair of second fixing portions F153, a pair of first support portions F155 protruding toward the front side at the left-right center of the pair of fastening portions F154, a second support portion F156 protruding toward the front side at the left-right center of the pair of first support portions F155, and a protruding portion F157 protruding from the rear surface of the rear wall portion F151 toward the rear side (arrow B direction). Additionally, a pair of slide rods F158 are disposed (engaged) on the back surface member F150.

The rear wall portion F151 is formed of a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular plate-like body, and a pair of first escape holes F151a and a pair of second escape holes F151b formed below the pair of first escape holes F151a (in the direction of arrow D) are formed in the thickness direction of the rear wall portion F151. In addition, a notch portion F151c is formed in the lower end of the rear wall portion F151 by being cut out toward the upper side (in the direction of arrow U).

The first escape hole F151a is formed larger than the outer shape of the weight support portion F145c of the connecting member F145, and the weight support portion F145c is disposed inside the first escape hole F151a. This allows the thickness dimension of the lower frame F86b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

The second escape hole F151b is composed of a semicircular curved portion F151b1 that is convex toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a straight portion F151b2 that extends in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) at the left-right center of the curved portion F151b1. The curved portion F151b1 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the connecting member F184 of the driving means F180, and the connecting member F184 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the back member F150 by inserting it through the second escape hole F151b (curved portion F151b1).

The straight portion F151b2 is an escape hole for the connecting member F184 of the driving means F180 to reciprocate in the up and down direction (arrow U-D direction). The upper end of the straight portion F151b2 is formed integrally with the upper end of the curved portion F151b1, and the lower end of the straight portion F151b2 is formed lower (arrow D direction) than the lower end of the curved portion F151b1. As a result, when the connecting member F184 is displaced downward, the rear wall portion F151 is located on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the connecting member F184 (the curved portion F151b1 is not formed). In this way, by forming the curved portion F151b1 that is opened (drilled) in the rear wall portion F151 small, it is possible to easily prevent the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

The cutout portion F151c is a portion through which wiring (not shown) is inserted that electrically connects the drive motor F181 of the drive means F180 and the switch F192 of the seventh passage F190, thereby electrically connecting the switch F192 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back member F150 and the drive motor F181 of the drive means F180 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back member F150.

The first fixing portion F152 is a portion for fastening the rear member F150 to the base plate 60, and is formed in a rectangular prism shape. An insertion hole is formed in the first fixing portion F152, and a tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole is fastened to the base plate 60, thereby fixing (disposing) the rear member F150 to the base plate 60. By fixing (disposing) the first fixing portion F152 to the base plate 60 in addition to the front plate F111 of the passage member F110, the posture of the lower frame F86b relative to the base plate 60 can be stabilized.

In addition, because the first fixing portion F152 is disposed at the lower end of the rear wall portion F151, the distance between the first fixing portion F152 and the front plate F111 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) can be set large, further stabilizing the position of the lower frame F86b relative to the base plate 60.

The second fixing portion F153 and the fastening portion F154 are portions for fastening and fixing the back member F150 to the passage member F110, and the second fixing portion F153 is formed in a rectangular prism shape, and the fastening portion F154 is formed in a cylindrical shape.

The back member F150 is fixed (arranged) to the passage member F110 by fastening a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole F115a of the fastening portion F115 to the second fixing portion F153. In addition, an insertion hole is drilled in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in the fastening portion F154, and the back member F150 is fixed (arranged) to the passage member F110 by inserting a tapping screw into the insertion hole.

The first support portion F155 and the second support portion F156 are portions for supporting the slide bar F158. The first support portion F155 and the second support portion F156 each have an insertion hole drilled along the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the slide bar F158 is inserted into these insertion holes, thereby disposing (supporting) the slide bar F158 on the back member F150.

The second support portion F156 has an insertion hole F156a drilled in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the second support portion F156, and a locking portion F156b is formed to protrude from the front end of the second support portion F156.

The inner diameter of the insertion hole F156a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft F142, and the shaft F142 is inserted into the insertion hole F156a. The shaft F142 is supported (engaged) by the bearing portion F141d of the determined passage F140 and the second support portion F156 (insertion hole F156a), and the shaft F142 is disposed in the lower frame F86b. The locking portion F156b is a portion that restricts the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F143 of the determined passage F140.

The protrusion F157 is a portion where the tapping screw that has passed through the guide member F185 of the driving means F180 is fastened and is formed in a cylindrical shape. By having the protrusion F157 protrude from the back surface of the back wall portion F151, the fastening margin of the tapping screw can be increased.

The slide bar F158 is for displacing the slide member F144 of the fixed passage F140 along the extension direction of the slide bar F158 (arrow L-R direction), and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. A radial cut is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the slide bar F158 at a position slightly toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the first support part F155, and a metal ring-shaped C-ring (not shown) is fitted into the cut. As a result, the slide bar F158 is supported by the first support part F155 and the second support part F156 so that it cannot be removed.

The slide bar F158 is supported (disposed) by the first support part F155 and the second support part F156 in a position in which the extension direction (axial direction) of the slide bar F158 is along the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The slide bar F158 is inserted (engaged) into the insertion hole F144a1 of the slide member F144, so that the slide member F144 is disposed (engaged) on the slide bar F158.

The distribution passage F160 is a device known as a "Kroon" that guides (sends, flows) balls to different positions in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) according to multiple distribution holes formed in the distribution passage F160. The distribution passage F160 includes a fourth passage section F161 and a fixed section F162 that protrudes from the rear end of the fourth passage section F161 toward the rear side (arrow B direction).

The fourth passage section F161 is circular when viewed from above and is recessed from the top (arrow U direction) to the bottom (arrow D direction), and the recessed bottom surface of the fourth passage section F161 is curved and convex downward (arrow D direction). In addition, the fourth passage section F161 is formed with a downward incline from the fixed section F162 to the front side (arrow F direction, game area side).

As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) into the fourth passage section F161 can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the center of the fourth passage section F161, and at the center of the fourth passage section F161, can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the front side (the direction of arrow F, the playing area side).

A first distribution hole F161a and multiple (two in this embodiment) second distribution holes F161b are drilled in the plate thickness direction in the recessed bottom surface of the fourth passage portion F161. The first distribution hole F161a and the multiple second distribution holes F161b are drilled at positions that overlap with the lower passage F112 of the passage member F110 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), so that balls that pass through the first distribution hole F161a or the second distribution hole F161b can be distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5).

The first distribution hole F161a is drilled at a position above the top of the undulations F112a of the lower passage F112 (in the direction of the arrow U). The multiple second distribution holes F161b are drilled at a different position from the first distribution hole F161a in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) and are drilled closer to the front (in the direction of the arrow F) than the first distribution hole F161a.

The ball that passes through the first distribution hole F161a and is distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is guided (thrown, flows down) to the top of the undulations F112a, flows into the inlet FOPf1 of the vertical wall portion F113, and is likely to be guided (thrown, flows down) to the final passage F140 (sixth passage FRt6) (is likely to enter the first winning hole 64).

The first distribution hole F161a is drilled closer to the inlet FOPf1 side of the fourth passage section F161 (the direction of arrow B) than the second distribution hole F161b. This makes it possible to reduce the distance that a ball that passes through the first distribution hole F161a travels (flows down, rolls) along the top of the undulations F112a, making it easier to guide (throw, flow down) the ball to the fixed passage F140 (sixth passage FRt6).

On the other hand, the ball that passes through the second distribution hole F161b and is distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is guided (thrown, flows down) to a position different from the top of the undulations F112a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), so it moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope from the top of the undulations F112a in the left-right direction and is likely to flow out (flow down) into the play area through the cutout portion F111c of the front panel F111 (it is difficult for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64).

The second distribution hole F161b is drilled closer to the play area of the fourth passage section F161 (the direction of the arrow F, the opposite side to the inlet FOPf1) than the first distribution hole F161a. This increases the distance between the ball that has passed through the second distribution hole F161b and the inlet FOPf1, making it more difficult to guide the ball to the inlet FOPf1 (it makes it easier to guide the ball to the outlet surface F112b of the lower passage F112).

This allows the player to anticipate that the ball sorted into the sorting passage F160 will pass through the first sorting hole F161a rather than the second sorting hole F161b, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The fixing portion F162 is for fastening and fixing the distribution passage F160 to the back member F150. A recess is formed on the upper surface of the fixing portion F162, recessed downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the fixing portion F172 of the second passage member F170 is inserted (fitted) into the recess.

The second passage member F170 is for distributing (guiding) the balls guided along the first outlet surface F114a of the upper passage F114 to the distribution passage F160, and includes a passage portion F171 and a fixed portion F172 that protrudes from the lower surface of the passage portion F171 toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B).

The passage section F171 is the area where the balls move (flow down, roll) on the upper surface of the passage section F171, and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side, playing area side) of the vertical wall section F113 of the passage member F110. In addition, the passage section F171 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first outflow surface F114a (third cutout section F113e).

The passage F171 extends toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F, the playing area side) and slopes downward as it approaches the front side. A standing portion F171a is erected upward (the direction of the arrow U) on the outer edge of the passage F171, excluding the contact portion with the vertical wall F113, and the second passage FRt2 is formed by the space partitioned by the standing portion F171a.

A second passage through hole F171b is drilled at the tip of the passage section F171 and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere. The second passage through hole F171b is formed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160 (formed at a position where the second passage through hole F171b and the first distribution hole F161a overlap in a top view). By passing through the second passage through hole F171b, the ball distributed (guided) to the passage section F171 (second passage FRt2) is guided to the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160.

A pair of protrusions F171c are provided on the upper surface of the passage F171, spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The protrusions F171c extend linearly in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the upper surface of the protrusions F171c is formed to slope downward toward the front side (arrow F direction). The distance between the opposing surfaces of the pair of protrusions F171c is made smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the protruding length (dimension in the direction of arrows U-D) at the front end of the protrusions F171c is set to a depth that prevents the ball from contacting the upper surface of the passage F171.

This allows the ball on the passage section F171 to be positioned at two points (a pair of ridges on the opposing surface side at the upper end of the protrusion F171c). Therefore, compared to when the pair of protrusions F171c are not formed, it is easier to keep the movement (flowing down, rolling) position of the ball constant in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the passage section F171. This makes it easier to guide the ball that has passed through the second passage through hole F171b to the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160.

The fixed portion F172 is formed from a substantially rectangular parallelepiped, and the outer shape of the fixed portion F172 is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the inner shape of the recess formed in the fixed portion F162 of the sorting passage F160. By arranging (fixing, fitting) the fixed portion F172 in the recess formed in the fixed portion F162, it becomes easier (accurately arranged) to arrange (arrange) the second passage through hole F171b above (in the direction of the arrow U) the first sorting hole F161a of the sorting passage F160.

Here, for example, when the second passage member F170 is fixed (disposed) to the rear member F150, there is a risk that the second passage through hole F171b will not be positioned above (in the direction of the arrow U) the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160 (when viewed from above, the center of the second passage through hole F171b will not coincide with the center of the first distribution hole F161a) due to factors such as errors (assembly tolerances) when fixing the distribution passage F160 and the second passage member F170 to the rear member F150 and the machining accuracy (dimensional tolerances) of the rear member F150, the distribution passage F160, and the second passage member F170. In this case, there is a risk that the ball that passes through the second passage through hole F171b will not pass through the first distribution hole F161a and will be distributed (guided) to the second distribution hole F161b.

By fixing (arrangement) the second passage member F170 to the distribution passage F160, the second passage through hole F171b of the second passage member F170 can be easily arranged (accurately arranged) above the first distribution hole F161a (in the direction of the arrow U), and the ball guided to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) is easily guided (thrown, flowed down) through the first distribution hole F161a to the fixed passage F140 (sixth passage FRt6) (easy to enter the first winning port 64).

The driving means F180 is for operating the movable member F122 of the performance means F120, and includes a driving motor F181 that generates a driving force, a support member F182 that supports (fixes) the driving motor F181, a transmission shaft F183 that is disposed penetrating the support member F182 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a connecting member F184 that engages with the end of the transmission shaft F183, and a guide member F185 that engages (supports) the connecting member F184 at both left-right ends of the connecting member F184. The driving of the driving means F180 will be explained with reference to FIG. 1669 and FIG. 1671 as appropriate.

The drive motor F181 provides the driving force that operates (reciprocates up and down) the movable member F122 of the performance means F120, and is arranged with its shaft pointing vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). This allows for a smaller installation space in the front-to-rear direction compared to when the shaft is arranged to face in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of arrows F-B). In addition, a gear (not shown) is arranged (fixed) on the shaft of the drive motor F181.

The support member F182 is used to support (fix) the drive motor F181 and is formed in a box shape. The support member F182 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the back surface member F150 by tapping screws. An insertion hole that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the drive motor F181 is drilled in the underside of the support member F182, and the shaft of the drive motor F181 is inserted through the insertion hole and disposed inside the support member F182.

The transmission shaft F183 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor F181 to the connecting member F184, and includes a shaft portion F183a, a transmission portion F183b disposed on both ends of the shaft portion F183a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and an eccentric shaft F183c protruding from the end faces of both ends of the transmission portion F183b in the left-right direction.

The shaft portion F183a extends in a rod shape in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is disposed so as to penetrate the support member F182. A gear (not shown) is disposed (fixed) on the shaft portion F183a at a position inside the support member F182, and the gear disposed on the shaft portion F183a meshes with a gear (not shown) disposed on the shaft of the drive motor F181, thereby transmitting the driving force of the drive motor F181 to the transmission shaft F183.

The transmission part F183b is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the axis of the transmission part F183b is disposed in a position along the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The shaft part F183a is fixed (disposed) to the axis of the transmission part F183b, and the eccentric shaft F183c is disposed at a position different from the axis of the transmission part F183b. In other words, the eccentric shaft F183c is disposed eccentrically with respect to the axis of the transmission part F183b. As a result, when the transmission part F183b rotates about the shaft part F183a as the rotation axis, the eccentric shaft F183c is displaced in a circular shape centered on the axis of the transmission part F183b (shaft part F183a) in a side view.

The connecting member F184 is for operating (reciprocating vertically) the movable member F122 of the performance means F120, and includes a main body portion F184a, a pair of guided portions F184b protruding from the end faces of both ends of the main body portion F184a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and an attachment portion F184c disposed on the front of the main body portion F184a.

A slide groove F184a1 is formed in the main body F184a along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B). The slide groove F184a1 is formed so that the eccentric shaft F183c of the transmission shaft F183 can be disposed therein, and the length of the slide groove F184a1 in the front-rear direction is formed to be equal to or slightly greater than the amount of displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c in the front-rear direction. This allows the driving force of the drive motor F181 to be transmitted to the connecting member F184 via the transmission shaft F183.

In more detail, when the drive motor F181 is driven, the eccentric shaft F183c is displaced in a circular shape around the axis (shaft F183a) of the transmission part F183b in a side view. When the eccentric shaft F183c pushes against the inner wall of the slide groove F184a1 along the front-rear direction (direction of the arrow F-B), the vertical displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c is transmitted to the connecting member F184, and the connecting member F184 is displaced in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the length of the slide groove F184a1 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed to be equal to or slightly greater than the amount of displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c in the front-rear direction, so that the eccentric shaft F183c does not abut against the inner walls formed on both sides of the slide groove F184a1 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the front-rear displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c is not transmitted to the connecting member F184, and the front-rear displacement of the connecting member F184 can be suppressed.

In addition, because the eccentric shaft F183c is displaced in a circular shape in side view, the displacement of the connecting member F184 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) can be set to a predetermined amount; in other words, the connecting member F184 can be prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction beyond a predetermined amount. Furthermore, by displacing the eccentric shaft F183c in a fixed direction, the displacement of the connecting member F184 in the vertical direction can be made to be a reciprocating movement. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for control to switch the drive direction of the drive motor F181.

The pair of guided portions F184b are disposed at a predetermined distance from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). The pair of guided portions F184b are engaged (inserted) into the pair of guide grooves F185a, respectively, thereby preventing the connecting member F184 from rotating relative to the guide member F185.

The mounting portion F184c is formed in a plate shape with the plate thickness direction being the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). The mounting portion F184c has multiple insertion holes drilled in the plate thickness direction, and tapping screws inserted into the insertion holes are fastened to the movable member F122 of the performance means F120, thereby fixing (disposing) the movable member F122 to the connecting member F184.

The guide member F185 is intended to guide the displacement (reciprocation) of the connecting member F184 in the up-down direction (direction of arrows U-D) (restricting the displacement of the connecting member F184 in the front-rear direction). The guide member F185 has multiple insertion holes drilled in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B), and tapping screws inserted into the insertion holes are fastened to the protruding portion F157 of the back member F150, thereby fixing (disposing) the guide member F185 to the back member F150.

A pair of guide grooves F185a are drilled in the guide member F185 at positions corresponding to a pair of guided portions F184b of the connecting member F184. The guide grooves F185a extend in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D), and the extension length of the guide grooves F185a in the vertical direction is formed to be slightly greater than the amount of displacement of the guided portions F184b in the vertical direction. By inserting (disposing) the guided portions F184b into the guide grooves F185a, the connecting member F184 (guided portions F184b) is made displaceable in the extension direction of the guide grooves F185a (vertical direction), and displacement of the connecting member F184 (guided portions F184b) in the front-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) is restricted.

The seventh passage F190 is for allowing balls that have entered the first winning port 64 to flow out (down) into the play area, and is equipped with a rear passage member F191, a switch F192 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the rear passage member F191, and a movable passage F193 disposed above the switch F192 (arrow U direction).

The rear passage member F191 is a member for restricting the displacement of a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B), and is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from the front. The rear passage member F191 is disposed at a distance slightly greater than the outline of the ball from the rear side of the base plate 60, and the seventh passage FRt7 is formed by the space surrounded by the base plate 60, the rear passage member F191, and the movable passage F193.

The rear passage member F191 has a plurality of (four in this embodiment) engaging protrusions F191a arranged on the periphery of the rear passage member F191, and a switch receiving portion F191b arranged at the lower end of the rear passage member F191. In addition, a notch portion F191c is cut out and formed on the lower end side of the rear passage member F191.

The engaging protrusion F191a has an insertion hole, and a tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole is fastened to the base plate 60, thereby fixing (disposing) it to the base plate 60. In addition, the protruding length of the engaging protrusion F191a is formed to be greater than the outer shape of the ball, and by abutting the protruding tip of the engaging protrusion F191a against the back surface of the base plate 60, a space capable of guiding (throwing, flowing down) the ball can be formed between the base plate 60 and the back passage member F191.

The switch receiving portion F191b is formed to protrude from the lower end of the rear passage member F191 toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and the switch F192 is supported (disposed) on the upper surface of the switch receiving portion F191b. The cutout portion F191c is cut out in a shape that follows the outer shape of the movable passage F193, thereby preventing the rear passage member F191 and the movable passage F193 from coming into contact with each other.

The switch F192 is for outputting a signal to drive the drive motor F181 of the drive means F180, and the switch F192 and the drive motor F181 are electrically connected by wiring (not shown). The switch F192 is turned on, and a signal is output to the drive motor F181 based on this on operation.

The movable passage F193 is for turning on the switch F192 and includes a shaft supported portion F193a, a shaft F193b that protrudes from the shaft supported portion F193a toward the front side, and a passage portion F193c formed at the end of the shaft supported portion F193a on the central side in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The movable passage F193 is rotatably supported by the base plate 60 by inserting the shaft F193b into a through hole drilled in the base plate 60. The center of gravity of the movable passage F193 is located closer to the passage section F193c than the shaft F193b, and the passage section F193c abuts against the switch F192, restricting the displacement (rotation) of the movable passage F193. When no ball is disposed in the movable passage F193 (passage section F193c), the switch F192 is turned off.

The passage section F193c is a section for allowing balls guided (thrown, flowing down) into the movable passage F193 (seventh passage FRt7) to flow out (flow down) into the play area, and the passage section F193c is formed with a wall section F193c1 that protrudes upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the end of the rear side (arrow B direction) of the passage section F193c, a push section F193c2 that protrudes downward (in the direction of the arrow D) from the underside of the passage section F193c, and an outflow surface F193c3 that is disposed at the lowest height position in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the passage section F193c.

The passage section F193c is formed with a downward incline towards the rear passage member F191 side (the direction of arrow B), and is formed in a curved shape that is convex downward (the direction of arrow D). This allows the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) into the passage section F193c to oscillate (move, roll) in the left-right direction (the direction of arrows L-R) while abutting against the wall section F193c1, and delays the ball flowing out (flowing down) into the play area.

In addition, the end of the passage portion F193c opposite the supported portion F193a is located below the first winning opening 64 (in the direction of arrow D). This makes it easier for the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the first winning opening 64 to the passage portion F193c to sway (move, roll) along the passage portion F193c.

The push portion F193c2 is a portion for turning on the switch F192, and is disposed in contact with the switch F192. When no ball is disposed in the movable passage F193 (passage portion F193c), the switch F192 is in an off state, and the displacement (rotation) of the movable passage F193 is restricted by the switch F192. When a ball is distributed to the movable passage F193 (passage portion F193c) and the weight of the movable passage F193 increases, the movable passage F193 is displaced (rotated) about the axis F193b as the central axis, and the switch F192 is turned on.

The outflow surface F193c3 is formed (positioned) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the base plate 60 (the direction of the arrow F). The outflow surface F193c3 is also formed on the back surface of the outflow outlet FOPout2 of the base plate 60, so that the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage portion F193c flows into the outflow outlet FOPout2 and is discharged (flows down) into the play area.

The base plate 60 in this embodiment is formed in the same manner as the base plate 60 in each of the above embodiments, except for the outlet FOPout2, and will be described using the same reference numerals.

Next, the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F143 of the defined passage F140 in response to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 will be described with reference to Figs. 1665 to 1666. Figs. 1665(a) and 1666(a) are partially enlarged front views of the lower frame F86b, and Figs. 1665(b) and 1666(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame F86b.

FIG. 1665 shows the lower frame F86b before the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 (hereinafter referred to as the "closed state"), and FIG. 1666 shows the lower frame F86b after the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 (hereinafter referred to as the "open state"). In addition, in FIG. 1665(a) and FIG. 1666(a), the protruding portion F111b of the passage member F110 is omitted, and in FIG. 1665(b) and FIG. 1666(b), the back member F150 is omitted.

In addition, FIG. 1666 shows the lower frame F86b after the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side), but the lower frame F86b is also defined as being in an open state when the displacement member F130 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is displaced (rotated) or when a pair of displacement members F130 are displaced (rotated).

As shown in FIG. 1665, in the closed state, the side surfaces of the opposing blocking portions F143a of the pair of opening/closing members F143 abut against the locking portions F156b of the back member F150, thereby restricting the displacement of the opening/closing members F143.

As described above, the blocking portion F143a is disposed in a position that is visible to the player through the inflow opening FOPf1 formed in the passage member F110 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 is unlikely to flow into the inflow opening FOPf1, and is unlikely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140.

The distance between the pair of blocking sections F143a is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. In other words, the pair of blocking sections F143a are not arranged in the center of the inlet FOPf1 in the left-right direction, but are arranged on both left-right sides of the area surrounded by the inlet FOPf1.

As a result, even in a blocked state, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 flows between the pair of opposing blocking sections F143a and into the inlet FOPf1, and can be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage section F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the defined passage F140.

The gap between the pair of blocking sections F143a is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the top of the undulations F112a of the lower passage F112. As a result, a ball that is diverted to the top of the undulations F112a of the lower passage F112 moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the undulations F112a, flows into the gap between the pair of blocking sections F143a, and is easily guided (thrown, flows down) to the passage section F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140.

In the closed state, the center of gravity of the displacement member F130, the connecting member F145, and the weight F146 is located toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the axis F133. This maintains the abutment state between the opposing surfaces of the pair of blocking portions F143a and the locking portion F156b of the back member F150, and maintains the lower frame F86b in the closed state.

A detailed explanation will be given below with reference to Figures 1659 and 1660 as appropriate. Because the center of gravity of the entire displacement member F130, the connecting member F145, and the weight F146 is located toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the axis F133, a force acts on the displacement member F130 to rotate the recess F131c side (both ends in the left-right direction, see Figure 1661) upward (arrow U direction) around the axis F133 as the rotation axis.

Because the shaft F133 and the connecting member F145 are engaged (fixed) so as not to rotate, a force that rotates toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) acts on the slide engagement portion F145b of the connecting member F145, and a force that displaces toward both ends in the left-right direction acts on the slide member F144 (second engagement portion F144d) that engages with the slide engagement portion F145b.

The opening/closing member F143 (engagement hole F143e) engages with the slide member F144 (first engagement portion F144c), so that a force acts on the slide member F144 to displace it toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a force acts on the opening/closing member F143 to rotate the engagement hole F143e toward both ends in the left-right direction around the axis F142 as the rotation axis.

The blocking portion F143a and the engagement hole F143e are disposed in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) on either side of the axis F142. Therefore, a force acts on the blocking portion F143a to rotate it toward the center in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R), which maintains the abutment state between the side faces of the opposing surfaces of the pair of blocking portions F143a and the locking portion F156b of the back member F150, and maintains the lower frame F86b in a closed state.

Next, the movement of the lower frame F86b from the closed state to the open state will be described. The ball guided along the second outlet surface F114b (first passage FRt1) of the upper passage F114 is guided (thrown, flows down) to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (see FIG. 1655), and as the ball moves (flows down, rolls) toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), the center of gravity of the entire displacement member F130, connecting member F145, and weight F146, including the ball moving (flows down, rolls) on the rolling surface F131b, is positioned on both ends of the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the axis F133.

As a result, the displacement member F130 rotates downward (in the direction of arrow D) with the recess F131c side (both left and right ends, see FIG. 1661) rotating about the axis F133, and the connecting body part F145a of the connecting member F145 rotates upward (in the direction of arrow U). When the connecting body part F145a rotates upwardly, it abuts against the restricting piece F121d of the performance means F120, restricting the operation of the displacement member F130 and the fixed passage F140, and the lower frame F86b is positioned (maintained) in an open state.

Note that a force acts on each of the displacement member F130 and the fixed passage F140 in the direction opposite to the direction of maintaining the closed state of the lower frame F86b described above, which causes the lower frame F86b to move to the open state, so a detailed description of this will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1666, when the lower frame F86b is in an open state, the blocking portion F143a is positioned on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110. In other words, when viewed from the front, the blocking portion F143a is displaced to a position where it is not visible to the player through the inflow opening FOPf1 formed in the passage member F110. Therefore, compared to when the lower frame F86b is in a closed state, the distance between the pair of opposing blocking portions F143a is larger, making it easier for balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 to flow between the opposing pair of blocking portions F143a and into the inflow opening FOPf1.

When the lower frame F86b is in the open state, the displacement member F130 is maintained in a displaced (rotated) state. This makes it easier for the player to visually confirm the open state of the lower frame F86b.

In this way, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) of the passage member F110 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) (see FIG. 1655), and the weight of the ball is used to displace (rotate) the displacement member F130 from a closed state to an open state. This makes it easier for the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 to flow between the opposing pair of blocking portions F143a and into the inlet FOPf1, and easier to guide (throw, flow down) to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140 (easier to enter the first winning hole 64).

Therefore, when a ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), the player is made aware of the presence or absence of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3), which can increase interest.

The movement of the lower frame F86b from the released state to the closed state is achieved by the ball flowing out from the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) (the weight of the ball no longer acts on the rolling surface F131b). The action of force (gravity) from the released state to the closed state of the lower frame F86b is the same as for maintaining the closed state, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the weight of the ball can be used to move the lower frame F86b from a closed state to an open state, or from an open state to a closed state, eliminating the need for a drive device and reducing manufacturing costs.

Here, in order to increase the interest of the game, a ball (hereinafter referred to as the "leading ball") moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) of the passage member F110 is distributed to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) (see FIG. 1655), so that the ball following the leading ball (hereinafter referred to as the "subsequent ball") is more likely to be distributed to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) or the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) (more likely to win the first winning port 64).

In this case, the leading ball that is allocated (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is likely to flow out from the outflow surface F112b into the playing area (is unlikely to enter the first winning hole 64), and is therefore unlikely to be noticed by the player until the end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the trailing ball is diverted (guided) to the rolling surface F131b (third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F130, which makes it easier for the leading ball to flow between the pair of opposing blocking portions F143a and into the inlet FOPf1 (making it easier for the leading ball to win into the first winning hole 64). This allows the player to keep their eyes on the leading ball that has been diverted to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) until the very end.

In addition, by the trailing ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F131b, it becomes easier for not only the leading ball but also the ball that is allocated (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) ahead of the leading ball (hereinafter referred to as the "preceding ball") to enter the first winning port 64.

Therefore, when multiple (two or more) balls are distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), the subsequent balls are distributed to the rolling surface F131b, making it easier for all of the multiple balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) to enter the first winning port 64, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by directing (guiding) the leading ball to the rolling surface F131b (third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F130, it becomes easier for the preceding ball to enter the first winning opening 64, and when the leading ball is directed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), the leading ball can enter the first winning opening 64. In this way, the ball can serve both the role of making it easier for the preceding ball to enter the first winning opening 64 and the role of entering the first winning opening 64, thereby increasing the value of the ball.

Returning from FIG. 1655 to FIG. 1664, we will now explain the balls flowing down the lower frame F86b. Of the balls flowing down the play area, those guided through the upper frame passage FRt0 (see FIG. 1654) arranged in the upper frame F86a flow (enter) into the upstream end of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) of the passage member F110.

The ball that flows (enters) the upstream end of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper passage F114, and is guided (thrown, flows out) from the first outlet surface F114a or the second outlet surface F114b to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) or the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3).

The ball guided (thrown, flowed out) to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) moves (flows down, rolls) along the protruding direction of the passage portion F171 (arrow F direction), passes through the second passage through hole F171b drilled in the passage portion F171, and is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4).

The ball guided (thrown, discharged) to the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) moves (flows down, rolls) on the third passage outlet surface F131a or the rolling surface F131b along the extension direction of the displacement member F130 (arrow L-R direction). The ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the third passage outlet surface F131a is guided (thrown, discharged) to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4), and the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the rolling surface F131b passes through the third passage through hole F131d and is guided (thrown, discharged) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110.

Here, the apex of the undulations formed in the passage section F131 of the displacement member F130 (the boundary between the third passage outlet surface F131a and the rolling surface F131b) is formed at a position closer to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) than the lowest position in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the second outlet surface F114b of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1). As a result, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) to the passage section F131 (third passage FRt3) is more likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the rolling surface F131b (lower passage F112, fifth passage FRt5) than to the third passage outlet surface F131a (distribution passage F160, fourth passage FRt4).

The ball guided (thrown, flowing out) to the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the rolling surface F131b, so that the lower frame F86b is positioned in an open state, making it easier to guide (throw, flow down) the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 to the passage section F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140 (easier to enter the first winning hole 64).

As described above, the axis F133 of the displacement member F130 is disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) the second outflow surface F114b of the passage member F110, so that the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the second outflow surface F114b can be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage section F131 above the axis F133 (in the direction of arrow U). This allows the impact of the ball being guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage section F131 to be applied to the passage section F131 and received by the axis F133, making it easier to prevent damage to the passage section F131.

In addition, as the ball rolls (throws, flows down) on the rolling surface F131b, the displacement member F130 and the fixed passage F140 can be gradually displaced (rotated). This reduces the impact when the connecting body part F145a of the connecting member F145 and the restricting piece F121d of the performance means F120 come into contact, making it easier to prevent damage to the connecting body part F145a or the restricting piece F121d.

Now, referring to FIG. 1667, we will explain the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3). FIG. 1667 is a partial top view of the displacement member F130, with FIG. 1667(a) showing the displacement member F130 in the closed state of the lower frame F86b, and FIG. 1667(b) to FIG. 1667(d) showing the displacement member F130 in the open state of the lower frame F86b (see FIG. 1665, FIG. 1666).

As shown in FIG. 1667(a), the ball CB1 is guided (thrown, flows down) from the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) (see FIG. 1661) of the passage member F110 to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3), and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the recess F131c along the downward slope formed on the rolling surface F131b.

As shown in FIG. 1667(b), the rolling surface F131b is formed with a downward incline toward the wall portion F132 (the direction of the arrow F), so the ball CB1 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the recess F131c while abutting against the wall portion F132. In this way, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the ball CB1 while abutting against the wall portion F132, the frictional force generated between the ball and the wall portion F132 can be utilized to reduce the ball's movement speed. This makes it possible to extend the period during which the lower frame F86b is in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 1667(c), the ball CB1 moves (flows down, rolls) while contacting the wall F132, so that the ball CB1 is guided toward the wall F132 side (the direction of the arrow F) in the recess F131c. That is, the ball CB1 is guided toward a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F131c (the center of the third passage through hole F131d).

As shown in FIG. 1667(d), by guiding the ball CB1 to a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F131c (the center of the third passage through hole F131d), the ball CB1 tends to revolve along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the ball CB1 into the third passage through hole F131d and outflow (flow down) from the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3). As a result, the period during which the weight of the ball CB1 acts on the displacement member F130 can be lengthened, and the period during which the lower frame F86b is in an open state can be lengthened.

In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the ball CB1 along the inner circumferential surface of the recess F131c, the frictional force generated between the ball and the inner circumferential surface of the recess F131c can be utilized to reduce the speed at which the ball moves, and the flow of the ball CB1 into the third passage through-hole F131d can be delayed.

Here, the inner peripheral surface and bottom surface F131c1 of the recess F131c are formed as flat surfaces. In other words, the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c is formed flush in the radial direction, and the bottom surface F131c1 is formed flush in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D). Therefore, there is no difference in height between the inner peripheral surface and bottom surface F131c1 of the recess F131c, making it easy to rotate the ball CB1 along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c.

In addition, the inner peripheral surface and bottom surface F131c1 of the recess F131c are formed continuously, in other words, no intermittent portions are formed on the inner peripheral surface and bottom surface F131c1 of the recess F131c, making it easier to rotate the ball CB1 along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c.

Let us return from FIG. 1655 to FIG. 1664 for further explanation. As described above, in the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the passage portion F131, the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the sorting passage F160 is located at a position opposite the third passage outlet surface F131a.

This allows the ball sorted (guided) from the third passage outlet surface F131a (third passage FRt3) to the fourth passage section F161 (fourth passage FRt4) to move (flow down, roll) along the concave side surface of the fourth passage section F161, which is formed by curving in a circle, and can delay the ball being guided (thrown, flowed out) through the first sorting hole F161a or the second sorting hole F161b to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5). As a result, the time that the player is expecting the ball to pass through the first sorting hole F161a can be extended, increasing the excitement of the game.

The second passage through hole F171b of the second passage member F170 is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160 (formed at a position where the second passage through hole F171b and the first distribution hole F161a overlap when viewed from above) (see FIG. 1661), so that the balls distributed (guided) from the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) tend to pass through the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160.

On the other hand, the fourth passage portion F161 of the distribution passage F160 is formed with a downward incline from the fixed portion F162 toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F, the playing area side), and the second distribution hole F161b is drilled closer to the front side than the first distribution hole F161a, so that balls distributed (guided) from the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) tend to pass through the second distribution hole F161b.

The ball that passes through the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the top of the undulations F112a formed in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5). Due to the downward slope of the undulations F112a toward the back side (arrow B direction), the ball guided (thrown, flowed out) to the top of the undulations F112a moves (flows down, rolls) toward the inlet FOPf1, flows between the pair of opposing blocking parts F143a of the opening/closing member F143, and is likely to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the passage part F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140 (it is likely to win into the first winning opening 64).

On the other hand, a ball that passes through the second distribution hole F161b of the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) or the third passage through hole F131d of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) is guided (thrown, discharged) to a position different from the top of the undulations F112a formed in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5).

The outflow surface F112b of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is formed at the bottom of the undulations F112a, so balls that are sorted to a position other than the top of the undulations F112a tend to sway (move, roll) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), and tend to flow out (flow down) from the outflow surface F112b into the play area.

In addition, since the vertical wall portion F113 has a bulge portion F113a formed to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction), a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) moves (flowing down, rolling) along the bulge portion F113a, and is given a velocity component toward the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side). Therefore, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is unlikely to flow into the inlet FOPf1 drilled in the vertical wall portion F113, and is likely to flow out (flow down) from the outlet surface F112b into the playing area.

Here, in the closed state of the lower frame F86b, the pair of blocking parts F143a are arranged inside the edge of the inlet FOPf1. On the other hand, in the open state of the lower frame F86b, the blocking parts F143a are arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall part F113 of the passage member F110, and the distance between the pair of opposing blocking parts F143a is made larger than in the closed state. As a result, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) flows into the inlet FOPf1 (between the pair of opposing blocking parts F143a) in the open state than in the closed state, and is more likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the sixth passage member F141 (sixth passage FRt6) of the determined passage F140 (more likely to win the first winning hole 64).

Therefore, when the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), the player can expect the lower frame F86b to be in an open state, which can increase the excitement of the game.

The ball that flows into the inlet FOPf1 (between a pair of blocking sections F143a) is guided (thrown, flows down) to the sixth passage member F141 (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140, and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction) along a pair of protrusions F141b3 formed on the passage section F141b of the sixth passage member F141. Then, the ball passes through the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F110 and enters (guided, thrown, flows out) into the first winning port 64.

Next, the operation (up-down reciprocating movement) of the movable member F122 of the performance means F120 will be described with reference to Figs. 1668 to 1671. Figs. 1668 and 1670 are front views of the lower frame F86b. Figs. 1669(a) and 1671(a) are rear views of the lower frame F86b, Fig. 1669(b) is a side view of the lower frame F86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCLXIXb in Fig. 1669(a), and Fig. 1671(b) is a side view of the lower frame F86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCLXXIb in Fig. 1671(a).

Note that Figures 1668 and 1669 show the movable member F122 in the state where it is positioned at the lowest position (in the direction of the arrow D), and Figures 1670 and 1671 show the movable member F122 in the state where it is positioned at the highest position (in the direction of the arrow U).

In addition, in Figures 1668 and 1670, the base plate 60 and the rear passage member F191 of the seventh passage F190 are omitted, and in Figures 1669 and 1671, the outline of the guide member F185 of the drive means F180 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in Figures 1668 and 1669, when the movable member F122 is positioned at the lowest position (in the direction of arrow D), an opening is formed in the space surrounded by the main body and protrusion of the fixed member F121 and the main body and protrusion of the movable member F122, and the colored member F123 is exposed from the opening (the colored member F123 is visible to the player). In addition, the eccentric shaft F183c and the connecting member F184 arranged on the transmission shaft F183 of the drive means F180 are positioned at the lowest position (in the direction of arrow D).

Next, the upward movement (displacement) of the movable member F122 (in the direction of the arrow U) will be described. When the ball that has been sorted (guided) from the first winning opening 64 to the seventh passage F190 (seventh passage FRt7) is guided (thrown, flows out) to the passage section F193c of the movable passage F193, the weight of the ball and the movable passage F193 causes the passage section F193c of the movable passage F193 to displace (rotate) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) with the axis F193b as the axis of rotation.

This turns on the switch F192 and drives the drive motor F181. Drive of the drive motor F181 rotates the transmission shaft F183 and displaces the eccentric shaft F183c upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Engagement of the eccentric shaft F183c with the slide groove F184a1 of the connecting member F184 displaces the connecting member F184 upward (in the direction of the arrow U), causing the movable member F122 fixed (disposed) to the connecting member F184 to move (displace) upward.

The movement (displacement) of the movable member F122 allows the player to visually confirm that the ball has entered (guided, thrown, discharged) into the first winning opening 64, eliminating the need for the player to stare intently at the first winning opening 64. The ball that has been guided (thrown, discharged) into the movable passage F193 passes through the outlet F193c3 of the passage portion F193c and the outlet FOPout2 of the base plate 60, and discharges (flows down) into the playing area.

As shown in Figures 1670 and 1671, when the movable member F122 is positioned at the top (arrow U direction), compared to when it is positioned at the bottom (arrow D direction), the opening surrounded by the main body and protrusion of the fixed member F121 and the main body and protrusion of the movable member F122 is smaller, and the exposed area of the colored member F123 exposed from the opening is reduced. In this way, the movement (displacement) of the movable member F122 changes (decreases or increases) the exposed area of the colored member F123, making it easier for the player to visually recognize that the movable member F122 has moved (displaced), i.e., that the ball has entered (guided, sent, flowed out) into the first winning opening 64.

When the movable member F122 is positioned at the top (in the direction of the arrow U), the lower end of the main body of the movable member F122 is disposed lower (in the direction of the arrow D) than the lower end of the colored member F123, preventing the colored member F123 from being exposed from below the movable member F122. This allows the exposed area of the colored member F123 to continue to decrease (preventing the colored member F123 from being exposed from below the movable member F122) as the movable member F122 is displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U), making it easier for the player to visually recognize that the movable member F122 has operated (displaced).

Next, the lower frame F2086b in the 94th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1672. In the above 93rd embodiment, the opening/closing member F143 of the determined passage F140 and the slide member F144 are engaged in an irreleasable manner, but in the 94th embodiment, the opening/closing member F2143 of the determined passage F2140 and the slide member F2144 are engaged in an releasable manner. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

1672(a) and 1672(c) are partially enlarged front views of the lower frame F2086b in the 94th embodiment, and 1672(b) and 1672(d) are partially enlarged top views of the lower frame F2086b. Note that 1672(a) and 1672(b) show the closed state of the lower frame F2086b, and 1672(c) and 1672(d) show the open state of the lower frame F2086b when the displacement member F130 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is displaced (rotated). FIG. 1672 also shows a schematic diagram of the displacement member F130 of the lower frame F2086b, the axis F142 of the fixed passage F2140, the opening/closing member F2143, the slide member F2144, and the connecting member F145, as well as a pair of slide rods F158 of the rear member F150.

As shown in FIG. 1672, the blocking portion F143a of the opening/closing member F2143 in the 94th embodiment is formed with regulated portions F2143f that protrude from the back surface to the back surface side (arrow B direction side) on both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). In addition, the slide main body portion F144a of the slide member F2144 is formed with a regulating portion F2144e that protrudes to the front surface side (arrow F direction side) at a position on the back surface side of the regulated portion F2143f.

Furthermore, the engagement hole F2143e formed in the protruding portion F2143c of the opening/closing member F2143 has a notch F2143e1 formed on both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized manipulation of the opening/closing member F2143 and displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 1672(a) and 1672(b), when the opening/closing member F2143 is rotated around the axis F142 by an external force, a notch F2143e1 is formed in the engagement hole F2143e, so that the protrusion F2143c (engagement hole F2143e) of the opening/closing member F2143 and the first engagement portion F144c of the slide member F2144 are disengaged.

As a result, when the opening/closing member F2143 rotates, the slide member F2144 is not displaced along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the slide rod F158 of the back member F150, and remains in the closed position. As a result, the regulated portion F2143f and the regulating portion F2144e come into contact, and the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143 is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 1672(c) and FIG. 1672(d), when the slide member F2144 is displaced along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the slide rod F158 of the back member F150 in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130, the regulating portion F2144e of the slide member F2144 is displaced to a position different from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the regulated portion F2143f of the opening/closing member F2143. This allows the opening/closing member F2143 to be displaced (rotated), and the opening/closing member F2143 is displaced (rotated) in conjunction with the displacement of the slide member F2144.

A biasing spring (e.g., a torsion spring) (not shown) is engaged with the opening/closing member F2143, and the biasing spring applies a biasing force to the blocking portion F143a of the opening/closing member F2143 to displace it toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). As a result, when a ball flows out (flows down, falls) from the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3), the lower frame F2086b (opening/closing member F2143) is operated from an open state to a closed state.

Next, the lower frame F3086b in the 95th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1673. In the lower frame F3086b in the 95th embodiment, if the weight support portion F3145c of the fixed passage F3140 is damaged and falls off, the displacement of the slide member F3144 is restricted. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1673(a) and 1673(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame F3086b in the 95th embodiment, with Figure 1673(a) illustrating the lower frame F3086b in a closed state and Figure 1673(b) illustrating the lower frame F3086b in an open state.

Figure 1673 (b) shows the open state of the lower frame F3086b when the displacement member F130 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is displaced (rotated), and the weight support part F3145c of the fixed passage F3140 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is broken and has fallen off from the connecting body part F145a.

In addition, in FIG. 1673, only the fixed member F3121 of the performance means F3120, the displacement member F130, the confirmation passage F3140, the slide rod F158 of the back member F150, and the distribution passage F160 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 1673, in the 95th embodiment, the determined passage F3140 is formed such that the upper surface of the slide body portion F3144a of the slide member F3144 is at approximately the same height as the upper end of the slide rod F158 of the back member F150, and the slide member F3144 is formed with a restricting portion F3144e that protrudes from the upper end of the slide body portion F3144a.

The restricting portion F3144e is formed on both ends of the slide member F3144 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the upper end of the restricting portion F3144e is formed with a guide portion F3144f that is inclined upward as it approaches both ends in the left-right direction.

A restricting portion F3121e is formed on the back surface of the fixed member F3121 of the performance means F3120. The restricting portion F3121e is disposed facing the restricting portion F3144e of the sliding member F3144 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is disposed at a predetermined distance (slightly larger than the outer shape of the weight support portion F3145c of the connecting member F3145) from the restricting portion F3144e when the lower frame F3086b is in the closed state.

The weight support portion F3145c of the fixed passage F3140 is formed in a rectangular prism shape and is disposed between the restricting portion F3144e of the sliding member F3144 and the restricting portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

In the present embodiment, in the lower frame F3086b, if the weight support portion F3145c falls off the connecting member F3145 due to an impact when the weight support portion F3145c abuts against the restricting piece F121d of the performance means F3120 or due to unauthorized cutting of the weight support portion F3145c from the connecting main body portion F145a, the weight support portion F3145c falls between the restricting portion F3144e of the slide member F3144 and the restricting portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121. The fallen weight support portion F3145c is supported by the upper surface of the slide main body portion F3144a of the slide member F3144 and the slide rod F158 of the back member F150.

When the weight support portion F3145c falls off the connecting member F3145, the center of gravity of the entire displacement member F130 and the fixed passage F3140, which are formed as one unit, is located on both ends of the axis F133 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). As a result, the slide member F3144 is displaced toward the center in the left-right direction, and the lower frame F3086b moves (displaces) toward the open state.

In the lower frame F3086b of this embodiment, the fallen weight support portion F3145c falls between the restricting portion F3144e of the slide member F3144 and the restricting portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121, so that the weight support portion F3145c restricts the displacement of the slide member F3144 toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it possible to prevent the lower frame F3086b from becoming open due to the falling off of the weight support portion F3145c.

In addition, when the slide member F3144 is displaced toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and the distance between the regulating portion F3144e of the slide member F3144 and the regulating portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121 is smaller than the outer dimension of the weight support portion F3145c (open state of the lower frame F3086b), the weight support portion F3145c abuts against the intake portion F3144f, displacing the slide member F3144 toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the lower frame F3086b to be in a closed state. In other words, the weight support portion F3145c falling off can prevent the lower frame F3086b from being maintained in an open state.

Next, the lower frame F4086b in the 96th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1674 and 1675. In the lower frame F4086b in the 96th embodiment, the displacement member F4130 is displaced (rotated) to prevent the balls from passing through the second sorting hole F161b of the sorting passage F160. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1674(a) and 1675(a) are top views of the lower frame F4086b in the 96th embodiment, and Figures 1674(b) and 1675(b) are partially enlarged front views of the lower frame F4086b. Note that Figure 1674 illustrates the closed state of the lower frame F4086b, and Figure 1675 illustrates the open state of the lower frame F4086b. Also, in Figures 1674 and 1675, a part of the suppression portion F4134 of the displacement member F4130 is illustrated by a dashed line.

As shown in Fig. 1674 and Fig. 1675, the displacement member F4130 in the 96th embodiment is formed with a suppression section F4134 in addition to the displacement member F130 in the 93rd embodiment. The suppression section F4134 is formed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the ends of the suppression section F4134 on both left-right ends are connected to the passage section F131. The end of the suppression section F4134 on the left-right center side is formed by extending toward the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second distribution hole F161b of the distribution passage F160. In addition, a protrusion F4134a that protrudes toward the upper side (arrow U direction side) is provided at the end of the suppression section F4134 on the left-right center side.

The protrusion F4134a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the outer diameter of the protrusion F4134a is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the second distribution hole F161b of the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4).

The protrusion F4134a is disposed below the axis F133 (in the direction of the arrow D), and when the displacement member F4130 is displaced (rotated) about the axis F133 as the rotation axis, the protrusion F4134a is rotated (displaced) toward the center in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R).

Also, as shown in FIG. 1674, when the lower frame F4086b is in the closed state, the protrusion F4134a is disposed on both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the inner circumferential surface of the second sorting hole F161b of the sorting passage F160. This makes it possible to prevent balls that pass through the second sorting hole F161b of the sorting passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) from coming into contact with the protrusion F4134a.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1675, when the lower frame F4086b is in the open state, the displacement member F4130 is displaced (rotated) about the axis F133 as the rotation axis, so that the protrusion F4134a is disposed in a state in which it is inserted through the second sorting hole F161b of the sorting passage F160.

Therefore, when the lower frame F4086b is in the open state, the ball guided to the fourth passage portion F161 (fourth passage FRt4) is prevented from passing through the second distribution hole F161b, and can be guided (thrown, flowed out) to the first distribution hole F161a (making it easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64).

In the lower frame F4086b of this embodiment, in the open state, balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 can be easily distributed to the passage section F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140 (easier to enter the first winning port 64), and balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the fourth passage section F161 (fourth passage FRt4) of the distribution passage F160 can be easily distributed to the passage section F141b (sixth passage FRt6).

In other words, even if a ball that has been distributed to the passage portion F131 (third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F4130 moves (flows down, rolls) toward either the third passage outlet surface F131a or the third passage through hole F131d, it can be easily distributed to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) (easy to enter the first winning hole 64), which can increase the excitement of the game.

Next, the lower frame F5086b in the 97th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1676 to 1688. In the above 93rd embodiment, the opening/closing member F143 is displaced (rotated) by the ball being sorted (guided) into the passage portion F131 of the displacement member F130. However, in the lower frame F5086b in the 97th embodiment, the opening/closing member F5158 is displaced (rotated) by the ball being held by the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1676 is a front view of the game board F5013 in the 97th embodiment. As shown in Figure 1676, the center frame F5086 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 1375) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame F5086a and a lower frame F5086b.

The upper frame F5086a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1676) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 1676) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1375) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame F5086b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1676) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1512) is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame F5086a and the lower frame F5086b.

The upper frame F5086a is configured by omitting a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (the portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1676) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, i.e., the portion where the lower frame F5086b is arranged), and the remaining portions excluding the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments.

Next, the lower frame F5086b will be described with reference to Figs. 1677 and 1678 in addition to Fig. 1676. Fig. 1677 is a front perspective view of the lower frame F5086b, and Fig. 1678 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame F5086b.

As shown in Figures 1677 and 1678, the lower frame F5086b is formed with a first passage FRt51 through which the ball can move (flow down, roll), a second passage FRt52 and a pair of third passages FRt53 through which the ball guided through the first passage FRt51 moves (flows down, rolls), a fourth passage FRt54 through which the ball guided through the second passage FRt52 or the pair of third passages FRt53 moves (flows down, rolls), a fifth passage FRt55 through which the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 flows down, an inflow opening FOPf51 formed as an opening through which the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 is guided (flows in, is sent) to the fifth passage FRt55, and an outflow opening FOPout1 formed as an opening through which the ball flowed down the fifth passage FRt55 flows out to the play area.

The pair of third passages FRt53 are arranged linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in Figure 1676) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 1676) of the game board F5013.

An upper frame passage FRt50 is disposed in the upper frame F5086a (see FIG. 1676). The upper frame passage FRt50 is a passage that guides the balls flowing down the play area, and the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt50 is connected to the upstream end of the first passage FRt51.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage FRt50 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage FRt50 to the first passage FRt51 of the lower frame F5086b via the upstream end of the first passage FRt51. Note that a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage FRt50 from the play area may also flow (enter) from the upper frame passage FRt50 to the first passage FRt51 or the fourth passage FRt54 of the lower frame F5086b.

Here, the outlet FOPout1, which is the outlet of the fifth passage FRt55 (the opening that allows balls to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning port 64. Therefore, a ball that passes through the inlet FOPf51 of the fourth passage FRt54 and is diverted (guided) from the fourth passage FRt54 to the fifth passage FRt55 is likely to win at the first winning port 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning port 64).

In addition, in the fourth passage FRt54, an outflow surface F5112b is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F, the playing area side) at two different positions in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1676) of the game board F5013 relative to the first winning hole 64. Therefore, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the outflow surface F5112b of the fourth passage FRt54 has a high probability of flowing out into the playing area, and as a result, it is difficult for the ball to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball that passes through the above-mentioned inflow opening FOPf51 and is distributed from the fourth passage FRt54 to the fifth passage FRt55).

In addition, an undulation F5112a is formed in the fourth passage FRt54, an outflow surface F5112b is formed at the bottom of the undulation F5112a, and the top of the undulation F5112a is inclined downward toward the fifth passage FRt55 (inflow opening FOPf51). Therefore, a ball that is distributed to a position in the fourth passage FRt54 other than the top of the undulation F5112a and moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction of the fourth passage FRt54 is more likely to flow out from the outflow surface F5112b into the play area (it is more difficult to win into the first winning opening 64) than to be guided (thrown, flows down) to the fifth passage FRt55.

On the other hand, a ball that is diverted to the top of the undulation F5112a is likely to be guided (thrown, flowed down) along the downward slope of the undulation F5112a to the fifth passage FRt55 (high probability of winning into the first winning hole 64).

In the first passage FRt51, a first outlet surface F5114a and a second outlet surface F5114b are formed (arranged) as concave surfaces that slope downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) to guide the ball guided through the first passage FRt51 to the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53. The second outlet surface F5114b is formed (arranged) in two different positions in the width direction of the game board F5013 (left and right direction in Figure 1676) relative to the first outlet surface F5114a.

In addition, the first passage FRt51 is formed with undulations, with the second outflow surface F5114b formed at the bottom of the undulations and the first outflow surface F5114a formed at the top of the undulations. Therefore, a ball diverted to the first passage FRt51 is more likely to flow out from the second outflow surface F5114b to the third passage FRt53 than to be sent from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage FRt52.

The second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53 are formed with a downward slope from the center to both ends in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1676) of the game board F5013 in order to guide the ball guided through the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53 to the fourth passage FRt54.

A displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 that operates (displaces) due to the weight of the guided ball is disposed at the downstream end of the second passage FRt52, and the displacement member F5155 after operation (displacement) is positioned differently from the top of the undulations F5112a of the fourth passage FRt54. Therefore, a ball guided to the second passage FRt52 is likely to be guided (thrown, flow down) to the outflow surface F5112b of the fourth passage FRt54 (it is difficult to enter the first winning hole 64).

In addition, the downstream end of the third passage FRt53 is located at a different position in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1676) of the game board F5013 relative to the top of the undulations F5112a of the fourth passage FRt54, so the ball is easily guided (thrown, flowing down) to the outlet surface F5112b of the fourth passage FRt54 (making it difficult for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64).

An opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150 that operates (displaces) due to the weight of the ball is disposed on the lower frame F5086b. Note that the opening/closing member F5158 is disposed inside the inner peripheral surface of the inlet FOPf51 when viewed from the front, so that the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the fourth passage FRt54 is unlikely to pass through the inlet FOPf51 and be diverted (guided) to the fifth passage FRt55.

The displacement means F5150 operates (displaces) when the ball guided through the second passage FRt52 is guided (thrown, flows down) to the displacement member F5155. The opening/closing member F5158 displaces in conjunction with the operation of the displacement member F5155, and is displaced outward from the inner circumferential surface of the inlet FOPf51 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1688).

Therefore, the ball distributed to the second passage FRt52 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the displacement member F5155, and the displacement member F5155 is operating (displaced). In other words, when the opening/closing member F5158 opens the inflow opening FOPf1, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the fourth passage FRt54 is more likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) through the inflow opening FOPf51 to the fifth passage FRt55 (more likely to enter the first winning opening 64).

The right opening/closing member F5158R of the pair of opening/closing members F5158 is not linked to the right displacement member F5155R of the pair of displacement members F5155, and remains in the position after operation (displacement) until at least one ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage FRt55, and the right opening/closing member F5158R continues to keep the inlet FOPf51 open (see FIG. 1688).

In this way, in this embodiment, the lower frame F5086b is diverted (guided) to a position different from the top of the undulations F5112a of the fourth passage FRt54, and when the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction of the fourth passage FRt54, the ball following the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction of the fourth passage FRt54 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the second passage FRt52, and the displacement member F5155 operates (displaces), making it easier to guide (throw, flow down) the ball moving along the extension direction of the fourth passage FRt54 (the ball preceding the ball guided to the displacement member F5155) to the fifth passage FRt55 (making it easier to win the first winning hole 64).

In addition, by operating (displacing) the right-side displacement member F5155R of the pair of displacement members F5155, the ball can be maintained in a state that makes it easier to guide (throw, flow) the ball to the fifth passage FRt55 (to make it easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64) until at least one ball is guided (thrown, flowed) to the fifth passage FRt55.

Therefore, even if a ball is diverted to a position other than the top of the undulations F5112a of the fourth passage FRt54 (where the probability of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is low), the displacement member F5155 can be operated to easily guide (throw, flow down) the ball to the fifth passage FRt55 (increasing the probability of the ball entering the first winning hole 64). As a result, when the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) on the fourth passage FRt54, the player can expect the displacement member F5155, particularly the right displacement member F5155R, to operate, which can increase the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame F5086b will be described with reference to Figures 1677 to 1678 as well as Figures 1679 to 1686.

Fig. 1679 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame F5086b, and Fig. 1680 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame F5086b. Fig. 1681 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement means F5150, and Fig. 1682 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement means F5150. Fig. 1683 is a top view of the lower frame F5086b, Fig. 1684 is a front view of the lower frame F5086b, and Fig. 1685 is a rear view of the lower frame F5086b. Figure 1686(a) is a side view of the lower frame F5086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCLXXXVIa in Figure 1684, Figure 1686(b) is a side view of the lower frame F5086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCLXXXVIb in Figure 1684, and Figure 1686(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame F5086b along the line MDCLXXXVIc-MDCLXXXVIc in Figure 1684.

As shown in Figures 1677 to 1686, the lower frame F5086b includes a passage member F5110, a second passage member F5120 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110, a back member F5130 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the passage member F5110, a fifth passage member F5140 disposed between the back member F5130 and the passage member F5110, a displacement means F5150 disposed on the back side of the back member F5130, and a maintaining means F5160 disposed below the displacement means F5150 (arrow D direction side).

The passage member F5110 has an outlet FOPout1, into which the fifth passage section F5141 of the fifth passage member F5140 is inserted. In addition, the passage member F5110 and the back member F5130 have a first insertion hole F5113b and a second escape hole F5131b, respectively, into which the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 is inserted.

The rear surface member F5130 is formed with a third escape hole F5131c and a fourth escape hole F5131d, through which a pair of opening and closing members F5158 of the displacement means F5150 are inserted, and through which the fourth escape hole F5131d and the passage member F5162 of the retention means F5160 are inserted.

After the operation (displacement), the right-side displacement member F5155R of the pair of displacement members F5155 engages with the retention means F5160 and remains in the position after the operation (displacement). When the ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the retention means F5160, the engagement between the right-side displacement member F5155R and the retention means F5160 is released, and the right-side displacement member F5155R returns to the position it was in before the operation (displacement).

The rear member F5130 and the second passage member F5120 are fastened to the passage member F5110 by tapping screws. The fifth passage member F5140, the displacement means F5150 and the retention means F5160 are fastened to the rear member F5130 by tapping screws. As a result, the lower frame F5086b is configured as a single unit (see Figures 1677 and 1678).

In the lower frame F5086b, the passage member F5110, the second passage member F5120, and the displacement member F5150 excluding the maintaining means F5160 and the displacement member F5155 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side members and balls can be seen through), and the fifth passage member F5140 and the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 are made of a colored resin material. In addition, the distribution member F5154 of the displacement means F5150 is painted on a part of the distribution member F5154 (display portion F5154d). This allows the player to see the balls moving from the first passage FRt51 to the fifth passage FRt55, and also allows the player to see the operation of the displacement member F5155 and the display portion F5154d of the distribution member F5154, which enhances the interest of the game.

The fifth passage member F5140 and the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

On the other hand, the lower frame F5086b makes it possible for the maintaining means F5160 to be invisible to the player from the front side by having the fifth passage member F5140 located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the maintaining means F5160 be made of a light-impermeable resin material (or by having it painted or having a sticker attached). Note that the maintaining means F5160 may be configured so that the maintaining means F5160 is visible to the player from the front side by having the fifth passage member F5140 made of a light-transmitting resin material.

The passage member F5110 is for forming the first passage FRt51 and the fourth passage FRt54, and includes a plate-shaped front plate F5111 that forms the front surface, a lower passage F5112 that protrudes from the back surface of the front plate F5111, a vertical wall portion F5113 that extends vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the end of the back surface side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the lower passage F5112, an upper passage F5114 that protrudes from the back surface of the vertical wall portion F5113, and a pair of fastening portions F5115 that protrude vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D) from the ends of both the left and right ends of the lower passage F5112 and the upper passage F5114.

The first passage FRt51 is formed by the space partitioned by the rear member F5130, the vertical wall portion F5113, and the upper passage F5114, and the fourth passage FRt54 is formed by the space partitioned by the front plate F5111, the lower passage F5112, and the vertical wall portion F5113.

The front plate F5111 is a part for preventing balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F5112 from leaking out into the play area, and is formed of a central section extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and an inclined section that is inclined vertically upward (arrow U direction) from both left-right ends of the central section toward the outside. The upper end of the inclined section of the front plate F5111 is formed vertically above the upper surface of the lower passage F5112. This allows balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F5112 to abut against the back surface of the inclined section of the front plate F5111, preventing balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F5112 from leaking out into the play area.

The front plate F5111 has multiple through holes F111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the front plate F5111. When assembled (unitized), the lower frame F5086b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes F111a to the base plate 60.

In the center of the front panel F5111, an outlet FOPout1 is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1676). The outlet FOPout1 is an opening that serves as the exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage FRt55 flows out (flows down) into the play area.

A protrusion F5111b is provided on the front plate F5111 so as to protrude vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the outlet FOPout1. In addition, a notch F5111c, whose shape in a front view is substantially the same as the shape of the outlet surface F5112b of the lower passage F5112, is formed on the front side (in the direction of the arrow F) of the outlet surface F5112b. By passing through the notch F5111c, the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 flows out (flows down) into the play area.

The lower passage F5112 is formed in the same manner as the lower passage F112 in the 93rd embodiment, except for the shape of the undulations F5112a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and the pair of outflow surfaces F5112b, and the dimensions of the lower passage F5112 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), so a description thereof will be omitted.

The undulations F5112a are formed with a larger width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) compared to the undulations F112a in the 93rd embodiment. Also, the outflow surface F5112b is formed with a larger recess dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side) compared to the outflow surface F112b in the 93rd embodiment. Therefore, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the front side of the lower passage F5112 (first passage FRt51) is more likely to flow out from the outflow surface F5112b to the playing area than passing through (crossing) the outflow surface F5112b in the left-right direction.

The vertical wall portion F5113 is a portion for connecting the lower passage F5112 and the upper passage F5114. A bulge portion F5113a is formed on the vertical wall portion F5113 at the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the inlet port FOPf51 is formed as an opening (drilled in the plate thickness direction) in the bulge portion F5113a.

In addition, the vertical wall portion F5113 has openings (drilled in the plate thickness direction) formed therein: a pair of first through holes F5113b arranged on both left and right ends (arrow L-R directions) of the inlet FOPf51, a pair of second through holes F5113c arranged above the first through holes F5113b (arrow U direction side), and a third through hole F5113d arranged above the inlet FOPf51.

The dimension of the inflow opening FOPf51 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is larger than the outer shape of a sphere, and more specifically, is formed to be approximately five times the size of the outer shape of a sphere. As described above, the inflow opening FOPf51 is an opening that serves as an outlet when a ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 flows out into the fifth passage FRt55. In addition, an opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150 is disposed in the area surrounded by the inner peripheral surface of the inflow opening FOPf51 in a front view, excluding approximately the center in the left-right direction. This makes it difficult to guide (send, flow down) a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction of the lower passage F5112 (arrow L-R direction) to the fifth passage FRt55.

The bulge portion F5113a is formed to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction). As a result, when a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) while abutting against the vertical wall portion F5113 passes through the undulations F5112a, a velocity component toward the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side) can be imparted to the ball passing through the undulations F5112a. As a result, it is made difficult for the ball passing through the undulations F5112a to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage FRt55 (making it difficult for the ball to pass through the inlet FOPf1).

The first insertion hole F5113b is a portion for inserting the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150, and is arranged with an upward inclination toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it possible to reduce the opening for displacing the displacement member F5155 (preventing the displacement member F5155 from coming into contact with the first insertion hole F5113b), making it easier to prevent the intrusion of foreign objects such as wire.

The first insertion hole F5113b is formed with a notch portion F5113b1 that is notched upward (toward the direction of the arrow U). By displacing the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 into the notch portion F5113b1, the displacement member F5155 can be displaced upward (toward the direction of the arrow U) relative to the second bearing member F5152 of the displacement means F5150, and the engagement between the displacement member F5155 and the second bearing member F5152 can be released.

A tapping screw is inserted into the second insertion hole F5113c, and the tapping screw inserted into the second insertion hole F5113c is fastened to the second passage member F5120, thereby fixing (disposing) the second passage member F5120 to the vertical wall portion F5113.

The third insertion hole F5113d is a portion for inserting the sorting member F5154 of the displacement means F5150, so that the sorting member F5154 of the displacement means F5150 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F5113.

The upper end of the vertical wall portion F5113 is formed vertically above the upper surface of the upper passage F5114. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F5114 to come into contact with the back surface of the vertical wall portion F5113, preventing them from flowing out (flowing down) into the fourth passage FRt54.

In addition, at the upper end of the vertical wall portion F5113, notches whose shapes in a front view are substantially the same as the shapes of the first outflow surface F5114a and the second outflow surface F5114b of the upper passage F5114 are formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first outflow surface F5114a and the second outflow surface F5114b. By passing through these notches, the ball guided through the first passage FRt51 flows out (flows down) into the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53.

The upper passage F5114 is formed in the same manner as the upper passage F114 in the 93rd embodiment, except for the shape of the first outlet surface F5114a and the pair of second outlet surfaces F5114b, and the dimensions of the upper passage F5114 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Therefore, a description thereof will be omitted.

The first outflow surface F5114a is formed with a larger width in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) compared to the first outflow surface F114a in the 93rd embodiment. Therefore, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) is easily guided to the first outflow surface F5114a, and is easily guided (thrown, flowing down) from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage FRt52.

On the other hand, the second outflow surface F5114b is formed so that its width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) becomes larger toward the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side) compared to the second outflow surface F114b in the 93rd embodiment. Therefore, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the front side of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) is more likely to flow out from the second outflow surface F114b to the second passage member F5120 (second passage FRt52) than passing through (crossing) the second outflow surface F114b in the left-right direction.

The fastening portion F5115 is formed in the same manner as the fastening portion F115 in the 93rd embodiment, except that the fastening portion F5115 has a different shape and that the fastening portion F5115 has only one insertion hole F115a drilled in the plate thickness direction, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The second passage member F5120 is for forming the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53, and includes a second passage section F5121, curved sections F5122 arranged on both left and right ends (arrow L-R direction) of the second passage section F5121, a second passage wall section F5123 protruding from the front end of the second passage section F5121, a pair of third passage sections F5124 (see FIG. 1683) arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) of the second passage section F5121, a third passage wall section F5125 arranged on the outer edge of the third passage section F5124, and a central wall section F5126 arranged between the pair of third passage wall sections F5125.

The second passage FRt52 is formed by the space partitioned by the second passage portion F5121, the second passage wall portion F5123, and the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110, and the third passage FRt53 is formed by the space partitioned by the third passage portion F5124 (see FIG. 1683), the third passage wall portion F5125, and the vertical wall portion F5113 (bulge portion F5113a) of the passage member F5110.

The second passage section F5121 is a section on its upper surface along which the ball moves (flows down, rolls), and is formed from a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The second passage section F5121 is formed with a downward incline from the center toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the ball guided (thrown, flows down) to the second passage section F5121 to move (flow down, roll) in the left-right direction.

The second passage section F5121 is formed with a downward incline toward the vertical wall section F5113 (the direction of arrow B). This makes it possible to prevent a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the second passage section F5121 from being guided (thrown, flowing out) to the third passage section F5124, or from moving (flowing down, falling) from the second passage section F5121 without coming into contact with the curved section F5122.

A notch F5121a is formed in the center of the second passage portion F5121 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The notch F5121a is a notch for arranging the sorting member F5154 of the displacement means F5150, which has been inserted through the third insertion hole F5113d of the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110, on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121.

The curved portion F5122 is a portion for changing the direction of displacement of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121, and is formed in a curved shape that is concave toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from above. By abutting against the curved portion F5122, the direction of displacement of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121 is changed from the tip side of the extension direction of the second passage portion F5121 (both ends in the left-right direction) to the front side (arrow F direction).

The second passage wall portion F5123 is a portion for preventing balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121 from moving (flowing down, falling) into the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110, and is formed by standing upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the front end of the second passage portion F5121.

The erected height of the second passage wall portion F5123 is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the ball, thereby allowing the player to see the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121. The erected height of the second passage wall portion F5123 may also be formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the ball. Even in this case, since the second passage wall portion F5123 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121 is visible to the player.

The third passage section F5124 is a section on whose upper surface the ball moves (flows down, rolls), and is formed with a downward incline from the center toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the third passage section F5124 to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

The third passage wall portion F5125 is a portion for preventing balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the third passage portion F5124 from moving (flowing down, falling) into the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110, and is formed by standing upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the front end and the end on the center side in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrow L-R) of the third passage portion F5124.

The third passage wall portion F5125 is not formed at both ends of the third passage portion F5124 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and by passing through these non-formed portions, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the third passage portion F5124 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

In addition, a connecting portion F5125a that connects to the second passage wall portion F5123 is formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the third passage wall portion F5125. By connecting the connecting portion F5125a to the second passage wall portion F5123, it is possible to easily prevent damage to the third passage wall portion F5125 due to a ball coming into contact with the third passage wall portion F5125, etc.

The connecting portion F5125a is disposed at a position above (in the direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the third passage portion F5124 at a distance greater than the outer shape of the ball, so that the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the third passage portion F5124 passes between the connecting portion F5125a and the third passage portion F5124 and is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

The central wall portion F5126 is a portion for preventing a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the first outlet surface F5114a of the upper passage F5114 to the second passage portion F5121 from moving (flowing down, falling) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110, and is formed between a pair of third passage wall portions F5125, standing upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the front end of the second passage portion F5121.

The rear member F5130 is intended to form the rear surface of the lower frame F5086b, and includes a rear wall portion F5131 and a pair of fixing portions F5132 that protrude from both ends of the rear wall portion F5131 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The rear wall F5131 is composed of a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular plate-like body, and the rear wall F5131 has a first escape hole F5131a formed in the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a pair of second escape holes F5131b formed below the first escape hole F5131a (arrow D direction side) and at both ends of the first escape hole F5131a in the left-right direction, a third escape hole F5131c formed below the second escape hole F5131b formed on the right side (arrow R direction side), and a fourth escape hole F5131d formed below the second escape hole F5131b formed on the left side (arrow L direction side) in the plate thickness direction (drilled in the plate thickness direction).

The first escape hole F5131a is a portion for inserting the sorting member F5154 and the second engagement portion F5157c of the displacement means F5150, and is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular shape.

The second escape holes F5131b are portions through which the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 is inserted, and are each formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape. The second escape holes F5131b are each arranged with an upward incline toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the opening for displacing the displacement member F5155 (preventing contact between the displacement member F5155 and the second escape hole F5131b) to be made smaller, making it easier to prevent the intrusion of foreign objects such as wire.

The third escape hole F5131c and the fourth escape hole F5131d are portions for inserting the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150, and are formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape. In addition, the retention means F5160 is inserted into the fourth escape hole F5131d.

The third escape hole F5131c and the fourth escape hole F5131d are arranged with an upward incline toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it possible to reduce the opening for displacing the opening/closing member F5158 (preventing the opening/closing member F5158 from coming into contact with the third escape hole F5131c or the fourth escape hole F5131d), making it easier to prevent the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

The fixing portion F5132 is a portion for fastening and fixing the rear member F5130 to the base plate 60. By fixing (arranging) the fixing portion F5132 to the base plate 60 in addition to the front plate F5111 of the passage member F5110, the position of the lower frame F5086b relative to the base plate 60 can be stabilized.

The back member F5130 is fixed (arranged) to the passage member F5110 by fastening a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole F115a drilled in the fastening portion F5115 of the passage member F5110 to the fixing portion F5132.

The front end of the fixing part F5132 is disposed in contact with the base plate 60. In addition, the lower end of the fixing part F5132 is disposed lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the displacement member F5155 and the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150. This makes it easier to prevent the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires, and makes it easier to prevent unauthorized operation of the displacement member F5155 and the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150.

The fifth passage member F5140 is for forming the fifth passage FRt55 and includes a fifth passage section F5141 and a pair of guide sections F5142 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the fifth passage section F5141 and above (arrow U direction side) the fifth passage section F5141.

The fifth passage portion F5141 is formed in a generally U-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a bottom surface portion F5141a extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and a pair of wall portions F5141b protruding upward (arrow U direction) from both left-right ends of the bottom surface portion F5141a. A pair of protrusions F5141c protrude from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion F5141a at positions a predetermined distance away from the center in the width direction (arrow L-R direction). The fifth passage portion FRt55 is formed by the space partitioned by the bottom surface portion F5141a and the pair of wall portions F5141b.

The fifth passage section F5141 is formed in the same manner as the passage section F141b of the fixed passage F140 in the 93rd embodiment, except for the extension length in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), so a description of it will be omitted.

When the fifth passage member F5140 is fixed to the rear member F5130, the fifth passage section F5141 is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F5110, and by passing through the outlet FOPout1, balls moving (flowing down, falling) through the fifth passage section F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) can be discharged into the play area.

The guidance section F5142 is a section for guiding (sending, flowing down) the ball that has passed through the inlet FOPf51 to the passage member F5162 of the maintenance means F5160, and is formed with a downward incline from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the center.

The displacement means F5150 is for changing the ease with which a ball moving (flowing down, falling) through the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110 is guided into the fifth passage member F5140 (fifth passage FRt55) in response to the operation (displacement) of the displacement means F5150, and is made up of a first bearing member F5151, a pair of second bearing members F5152 arranged at both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the first bearing member F5151 at a predetermined distance, and a pair of second bearing members F5152 fixed to the first bearing member F5151 and the second bearing member F5152 ( The bearing member F5152 includes a slide rod F5153 (disposed in the first bearing member F5151), a distribution member F5154 rotatably engaged with the first bearing member F5151, a displacement member F5155 rotatably engaged with the second bearing member F5152, a weight F5156 disposed on the displacement member F5155, a slide member F5157 engaged with the slide rod F5153 and the displacement member F5155, an opening/closing member F5158 engaged with the slide member F5157, and a holding member F5159 that rotatably holds the opening/closing member F5158.

In this embodiment, the displacement member F5155, slide member F5157, and opening/closing member F5158 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are distinguished by their respective reference symbols as left displacement member F5155L, left slide member F5157L, and left opening/closing member F5158L, and the displacement member F5155, slide member F5157, and opening/closing member F5158 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction) are distinguished by their respective reference symbols as right displacement member F5155R, right slide member F5157R, and right opening/closing member F5158R.

The first bearing member F5151 is for holding the slide rod F5153 together with the second bearing member F5152, and the first bearing member F5151 is formed with a restricting portion F5151a that protrudes from the rear surface of the first bearing member F5151 toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and a shaft portion F5151b that protrudes upward (arrow U direction) from the top surface of the first bearing member F5151.

The first bearing member F5151 has multiple (two in this embodiment) insertion holes drilled therein, and tapping screws inserted into the insertion holes are fastened to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130, thereby fixing (disposing) the first bearing member F5151 to the rear wall portion F5131.

The restricting portion F5151a is a plate-like body and is disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first bearing member F5151. The restricting portion F5151a is formed to be inclined downward toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). In addition, an insertion hole for inserting the slide rod F5153 is formed in the restricting portion F5151a.

The shaft portion F5151b is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the sorting member F5154 is rotatably engaged with the shaft portion F5151b. As a result, the sorting member F5154 is engaged so as to be rotatable (displaceable) around the shaft portion F5151b as a rotation axis.

The second bearing member F5152 is fixed (disposed) to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130. The second bearing member F5152 is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance (smaller than the axial dimension of the slide rod F5153) in a direction perpendicular to the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151.

The second bearing member F5152 is formed with a restricting portion F5152a that protrudes from the rear surface of the second bearing member F5152 toward the rear surface side (the direction of the arrow B). The restricting portion F5152a is a plate-shaped body and is disposed parallel to the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151. In addition, the restricting portion F5152a is formed with an insertion hole for inserting the slide rod F5153.

The displacement of the slide member F5157 is restricted by the slide member F5157 abutting against the restricting portion F5152a or the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151.

The second bearing member F5152 is provided with multiple (two in this embodiment) insertion holes, and the second bearing member F5152 is fixed (disposed) to the rear wall portion F5131 by inserting tapping screws into the insertion holes and fastening them to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130.

The second bearing member F5152 is provided with a protruding portion (not shown) that protrudes in a direction that inclines upward as it approaches the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a ball bearing F5152b is disposed on the protruding portion.

The ball bearing F5152b is composed of an inner ring, a number of balls arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the inner ring, and an outer ring arranged rotatably on the inner ring via the balls. When the balls rotate, friction between the inner and outer rings is lower than when the outer peripheral surface of the inner ring and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring are in contact, allowing the outer ring to rotate easily relative to the inner ring. By fitting the inner ring onto a protruding portion (not shown) of the second bearing member F5152, the ball bearing F5152b is supported (arranged) on the protruding portion.

The slide bar F5153 is for displacing the slide member F5157 along the extension direction of the slide bar F5153, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. Radial cuts are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the slide bar F5153 at a position slightly closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151, and at positions slightly closer to both ends in the left-right direction than the restricting portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152.

The slide rod F5153 is inserted into the insertion holes drilled in the shaft portion F5151b of the first bearing member F5151 and the restricting portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152, and metal ring-shaped C-rings (not shown) are fitted into the notches formed in the slide rod F5153, so that the slide rod F5153 is supported by the first bearing member F5151 and the second bearing member F5152 so that it cannot be removed.

The slide rod F5153 is supported by the first bearing member F5151 and the second bearing member F5152 in such a position that the extension direction (axial direction) of the slide rod F5153 is perpendicular to the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 (the restricting portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152). Therefore, the slide rod F5153 is disposed in such a position that it is inclined upward as it approaches both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The sorting member F5154 is intended to change the direction of movement (flow, roll) of the balls sorted (guided) to the second passage section F5121 of the second passage member F5120, and includes an engaged section F5154a, an intermediate section F5154b erected from the front end of the engaged section F5154a, a sorting section F5154c protruding from the upper end of the intermediate section F5154b toward the front side (arrow F direction), and a display section F5154d disposed in front of the intermediate section F5154b.

The engaged portion F5154a is formed from a plate-like body, and an insertion hole is drilled in the end on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion F5154a. The shaft portion F5151b of the first bearing member F5151 is inserted into the insertion hole, and the sorting member F5154 is supported by the shaft portion F5151b of the first bearing member F5151.

Also, at approximately the center of the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) of the engaged portion F5154a, a shaft portion F5154a1 is provided protruding upward (arrow U direction). The shaft portion F5154a1 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the second engaging portion F5157c of the slide member F5157 engages with the shaft portion F5154a1.

The intermediate portion F5154b is formed from a plate-like body, passes through the third insertion hole F5113d of the passage member F5110 and the notch portion F5121a of the second passage member F5120, and is disposed between the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110 and the central wall portion F5126 of the second passage member F5120. The upper end of the intermediate portion F5154b is disposed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120, so that the distribution portion F5154c is disposed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the second passage portion F5121.

The intermediate portion F5154b is curved along the notch portion F5121a of the second passage member F5120. This prevents the intermediate portion F5154b from coming into contact with the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120 when the sorting member F5154 rotates (displaces).

The sorting section F5154c is formed from a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The upper surface of the sorting section F5154c is undulated, with the peak of the undulations located approximately in the left-right center of the sorting section F5154c. The undulations are formed with a downward slope toward both left-right ends, and the balls sorted to the sorting section F5154c move (flow down, fall) from the left-right center toward both left-right ends along the downward slope.

The display unit F5154d is a portion that indicates the position of the allocation unit F5154c, and is disposed below the allocation unit F5154c (in the direction of arrow D). The display unit F5154d is colored, making it easy for the player to visually recognize the position of the display unit F5154d (allocation unit F5154c).

The displacement member F5155 is for guiding (sending, flowing down) the balls that are sorted (guided) from the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120 to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110, and is made up of a support portion F5155a that is supported (engaged) by the ball bearing F5152b of the second bearing member F5152, and an arm portion that protrudes from the outer circumferential surface of the support portion F5155a toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F). F5155b, a weight support portion F5155c that protrudes from the outer circumferential surface of the pivot portion F5155a toward the rear side (arrow B direction), a main body portion F5155d that is disposed at the tip of the arm portion F5155b, a holding portion F5155e that is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the main body portion F5155d, and a restricting wall F5155f that is disposed at the center of the holding portion F5155e in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The bearing F5155a is cylindrical and recessed along the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b, and the inner circumferential surface of the bearing F5155a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the ball bearing F5152b. The ball bearing F5152b is enclosed within the inner circumferential surface of the bearing F5155a, so that the displacement member F5155 is rotatably supported by the ball bearing F5152b.

The arm F5155b is a plate-like body, and is disposed by inserting it through the second escape hole F5131b of the back member F5130 and the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110. The extension length of the arm F5155b is formed to be longer than the distance between the back wall F5131 of the back member F5130 and the vertical wall F5113 of the passage member F5110. As a result, when the pivot support F5155a is pivotally supported by the ball bearing F5152b, the tip of the arm F5155b is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall F5113 of the passage member F5110.

In addition, when an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1511), the arm portion F5155b can be easily bent (the tip of the arm portion F5155b can be easily displaced relative to the pivot support portion F5155a).

The outer shape of the arm F5155b is formed to be smaller than the second escape hole F5131b of the back member F5130 and the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110. As a result, when an external force is applied to the arm F5155b, the arm F5155b is disposed so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) or the up-down direction (arrow F-B direction) when inserted into the second escape hole F5131b and the first insertion hole F5113b.

In addition, when the pivot support portion F5155a is pivotally supported by the ball bearing F5152b, the distance between the upper surface of the arm portion F5155b and the edge on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110 is formed to be smaller than the axial dimension of the ball bearing F5152b. This makes it possible to prevent the pivot support between the pivot support portion F5155a and the ball bearing F5152b from being released when the arm portion F5155b is displaced in the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b.

In addition, by guiding the arm portion F5155b into the notch portion F5113b1 formed in the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110, the amount of displacement of the arm portion F5155b in the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b can be increased, and the support between the bearing portion F5155a and the ball bearing F5152b can be released.

The weight support portion F5155c is formed in a cylindrical shape recessed along the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b, and the inner circumferential surface of the weight support portion F5155c is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the weight F5156. The weight F5156 is enclosed within the inner circumferential surface of the weight support portion F5155c, so that the weight F5156 is disposed (supported) on the weight support portion F5155c.

In addition, a protrusion F5155c1 that protrudes along the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b is provided on the upper surface of the weight support portion F5155c, and the protrusion F5155c1 is inserted into the second insertion hole F5157a2 of the slide member F5157, thereby engaging the displacement member F5155 and the slide member F5157.

The main body F5155d is colored, which allows the player to easily see that the displacement member F5155 is operating (rotating, displacing). A cylindrical recess F5155d1 is formed on the lower side (the direction of arrow D) of the main body F5155d, and a circular through hole F5155d2 is drilled in the bottom surface of the recess F5155d1. The recess F5155d1 and the through hole F5155d2 are arranged on the same axis.

The inner diameter of the recess F5155d1 is formed to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the ball, and the distance between the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1 and the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F5155d2 is formed to be smaller than the radius of the ball. This allows the center of gravity of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the recess F5155d1 to be positioned inside the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F5155d2, and the ball's own weight can be used to displace the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the recess F5155d1 toward the through hole F5155d2.

The depth of the recess F5155d1 is also made smaller than the diameter of the ball. This allows the player to visually confirm that the ball has been guided (thrown, flowed down) into the recess F5155d1.

The holding portion F5155e has a pair of straight portions F5155e1 arranged in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at a distance smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and a curved portion F5155e2 connecting the ends of the pair of straight portions F5155e1 at both ends in the left-to-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from above.

The holding portion F5155e is disposed between the curved portion F5122 and the second passage wall portion F5123 of the second passage member F5120 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), on the front side (arrow F direction) and lower side (arrow D direction) of the second passage portion F5121. As a result, the ball that is guided (thrown) to the curved portion F5122 and moves (flows down, falls) from between the curved portion F5122 and the second passage wall portion F5123 toward the front side is guided (thrown, flows down) to the holding portion F5155e.

The holding portion F5155e is arranged to be inclined upward as it approaches the front side (the direction of the arrow F). This makes it possible to restrict the displacement of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the holding portion F5155e toward the front side by abutting against the straight portion F5155e1 arranged on the front side. As a result, it becomes easier to prevent the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the holding portion F5155e from moving (flowing down, falling) from the holding portion F5155e to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

The holding portion F5155e is also arranged to slope downwards toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the holding portion F5155e to be kept in contact with the curved portion F5155e2, and the ball can be held by the pair of straight portions F5155e1 and curved portion F5155e2.

The holding portion F5155e is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion F5155d, and is disposed in a position facing the inner peripheral surface on the rear side of the main body portion F5155d. In other words, the approximate center of the pair of straight portions F5155e1 is disposed in a position facing a position (eccentric position) different from the central axis of the main body portion F5155d. This allows the ball sorted (guided) from the holding portion F5155e to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to a position (eccentric position) different from the central axis of the recess F5155d1 (through hole F5155d2) of the main body portion F5155d, and the flow into the through hole F5155d2 can be delayed.

The restricting wall F5155f is a plate-like body, and is formed in a curved shape that is convex toward the rear side (arrow B direction) when viewed from above. Both ends of the restricting wall F5155f in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are connected to the ends of the straight portion F5155e1 arranged on the rear side of the holding portion F5155e, and the end on the center side in the left-right direction of the restricting wall F5155f is arranged above the inner circumferential surface of the recess F5155d1 of the main body portion F5155d (arrow U direction).

This allows the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the holding portion F5155e along the restricting wall F5155f to the recess F5155d1 of the main body portion F5155d to the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1, in other words, to a position different from the central axis of the recess F5155d1 (through hole F5155d2). As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the recess F5155d1 can be displaced along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1 (making it difficult to displace toward the central axis of the recess F5155d1), and the time required for the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the recess F5155d1 to pass through the through hole F5155d2 can be increased.

The weight F5156 is used to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member F5155, and is formed into a cylindrical shape from a metal material. By arranging the weight F5156 closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the rotation axis of the ball bearing F5152b, the overall center of gravity of the displacement member F5155 and weight F5156 is located closer to the back side (arrow B direction) than the ball bearing F5152b.

The slide member F5157 is for connecting the displacement member F5155 and the opening/closing member F5158. The left slide member F5157L includes a slide main body portion F5157a, a first engagement portion F5157b disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the slide main body portion F5157a, and a second engagement portion F5157c disposed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the slide main body portion F5157a.

The right slide member F5157R is formed in the same manner as the left slide member F5157L, except that the second engaging portion F5157c is omitted and an engaged portion F5157d is provided. Therefore, for the right slide member F5157R, only the engaged portion F5157d will be described, and detailed descriptions of other portions will be omitted.

The slide body F5157a is formed from a plate-like body, and both ends of the slide body F5157a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are bent toward the rear side. A first insertion hole F5157a1 is drilled in the plate thickness direction in each of the portions bent toward the rear side. The slide rod F5153 is inserted (engaged) into the first insertion hole F5157a1, whereby the slide member F5157 is engaged so as to be displaceable along the extension direction of the slide rod F5153.

The lower end of the slide body portion F5157a is bent toward the rear surface, and a second through hole F5157a2 is drilled in the plate thickness direction at the portion bent toward the rear surface. The protruding portion F5155c1 of the displacement member F5155 is inserted (engaged) into the second through hole F5157a2, thereby engaging the slide member F5157 and the displacement member F5155.

The first engagement portion F5157b is a plate-like body that extends downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the front end of the slide body portion F5157a. The lower end of the first engagement portion F5157b is bent toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and an insertion hole F5157b1 is drilled in the bent portion.

The protrusion F5158c of the opening/closing member F5158 is inserted (engaged) into the insertion hole F5157b1, thereby engaging the slide member F5157 and the opening/closing member F5158. The insertion hole F5157b1 is formed as an elongated hole extending in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B), and the protrusion F5158c of the opening/closing member F5158 is inserted (engaged) so as to be displaceable in the front-to-rear direction.

The second engagement portion F5157c is a plate-like body that extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the front end of the slide main body portion F5157a. The upper end of the second engagement portion F5157c is bent toward the front side (in the direction of the arrow F), and an insertion hole F5157c1 is drilled in the bent portion. The shaft portion F5154a1 of the sorting member F5154 is inserted (engaged) into the insertion hole F5157c1, thereby engaging the slide member F5157 and the sorting member F5154.

The engaged portion F5157d is formed from a plate-like body. An insertion hole is formed in the engaged portion F5157d, and a tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole is fastened to the first engaging portion F5157b, thereby fixing (disposing) the engaged portion F5157d to the first engaging portion F5157b.

The right side (arrow R direction side) of the engaged portion F5157d is bent toward the rear side (arrow B direction side), and a magnetic body (not shown) made of a magnetic material is disposed at the bent portion. The magnetic body is magnetically attached to the magnetic body F5164 of the retaining means F5160, so that the right slide member F5157R engages (fixes) with the magnetic body F5164.

The opening/closing member F5158 is intended to make it difficult for balls moving (flowing down, falling) through the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 to pass through the inlet FOPf51, and is provided with a blocking portion F5158a, a connecting portion F5158b extending from the lower end of the blocking portion F5158a toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and a protruding portion F5158c protruding downward (arrow D direction) from the lower surface of the connecting portion F5158b.

The blocking portion F5158a is curved along the bulging portion F5113a of the passage member F5110. In other words, the blocking portion F5158a is formed to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction) as it moves from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the center.

As a result, when a ball comes into contact with the blocking portion F5158a and moves (flows down, rolls) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110, it oscillates (moves, rolls) in the left-right direction and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction) along the curved shape of the blocking portion F5158a. As a result, the outflow surface F5112b can easily guide (throw, flow down) the ball moving (flows down, rolls) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), making it difficult to guide it into the fifth passage FRt55 (making it difficult to pass through the inflow opening FOPf51).

The connecting portion F5158b is a portion for engaging (pivotally supported) with the holding member F5159, and an insertion hole F5158b1 is drilled in the connecting portion F5158b on the rear side (arrow B direction side). The pivot portion F5159c of the holding member F5159 is inserted (engaged, pivotally supported) into the insertion hole F5158b1, whereby the opening/closing member F5158 is rotatably engaged (pivotally supported) with the pivot portion F5159c.

The protrusion F5158c is formed in a cylindrical shape and is disposed on the connecting portion F5158b on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F). The opening/closing member F5158 and the sliding member F5157 are engaged with each other by inserting the protrusion F5158c into the insertion hole F5157b1 of the sliding member F5157.

Here, the insertion hole F5157b1 of the slide member F5157 is formed as an elongated hole extending in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B). Therefore, even when the slide member F5157 is displaced in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrow L-R) and the opening/closing member F5158 (protruding portion F5158c) rotates around the pivot portion F5159c of the holding member F5159 (displaces in the front-rear direction), it is possible to prevent the engagement portion F5158c1 from coming into contact with the inner surface of the insertion hole F5157b1.

The opening/closing member F5158 is engaged (supported) with the slide member F5157 and the holding member F5159 by the protrusion F5158c disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) and the insertion hole F5158b1 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction). This allows the opening/closing member F5158 to be engaged (supported) at two points spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), stabilizing the position of the opening/closing member F5158.

The holding member F5159 is for rotatably engaging (axially supporting) the opening/closing member F5158, and includes a fixing portion F5159a, a protruding portion F5159b protruding from the fixing portion F5159a toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and an axial support portion F5159c protruding upward from the protruding portion F5159b (the direction of the arrow U).

The fixing portion F5159a is formed from a plate-like body. A through hole is formed in the fixing portion F5159a, and a tapping screw inserted into the through hole is fastened to the rear member F5130, thereby fixing (disposing) the holding member F5159 to the rear member F5130. The protruding portion F5159b is formed from a plate-like body and is formed to protrude from the front of the fixing portion F5159a toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F).

The pivot support portion F5159c is a portion for rotatably supporting the opening/closing member F5158, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The pivot support portion F5159c is disposed on the protruding portion F5159b in such a position that the axial direction of the pivot support portion F5159c is parallel to the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b.

The pivot support portion F5159c is disposed on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the protruding portion F5159b. This allows the extension dimension of the connecting portion F5158b of the opening/closing member F5158 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be shortened, and the posture of the opening/closing member F5158 can be stabilized when the opening/closing member F5158 rotates around the pivot support portion F5159c as the rotation axis.

The maintaining means F5160 is for maintaining the state after the right slide member F5157R of the displacement means F5150 is displaced, and includes an axial arrangement member F5161, a passage member F5162 and an engagement member F5163 rotatably supported on the axial arrangement member F5161, and a magnetic body F5164 disposed on the engagement member F5163.

The shaft mounting member F5161 is formed from a plate-like body and includes a first wall portion F5161a arranged parallel to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130, and a second wall portion F5161b extending from an end portion on the left side (arrow L direction) of the first wall portion F5161a toward the front side (arrow F direction).

In addition, an insertion hole is formed in the shaft mounting member F5161, and a tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole is fastened to the back member F5130, thereby fixing (disposing) the retaining means F5160 to the back member F5130. Note that a part of the insertion hole formed in the shaft mounting member F5161 is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole formed in the fixing portion F5159a of the holding member F5159. This allows the tapping screw for fixing (disposing) the holding member F5159 to the back member F5130 to also be used to fix (dispose) the shaft mounting member F5161, thereby reducing production costs.

The first wall portion F5161a has a first shaft portion F5161c protruding toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and the second wall portion F5161b has a second shaft portion F5161d protruding toward the left side (arrow L direction). The first shaft portion F5161c and the second shaft portion F5161d are portions for supporting the engagement member F5163 and the passage member F5162.

The passage member F5162 is for displacing (rotating) the engaging member F5163, and includes a passage portion F5162a, a shaft supported portion F5162b extending from the rear surface of the passage portion F5162a toward the rear surface side (arrow B direction), and a transmission portion F5162c protruding from the rear surface end of the shaft supported portion F5162b toward the right side (arrow R direction).

The passage section F5162a is formed from a plate-like body, and a wall section that protrudes upward (arrow U direction) is formed at the end except the front side (arrow F direction). The passage section F5162a is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction) of the fifth passage section F5141 of the fifth passage member F5140, and the fifth passage FRt55 is formed by the space partitioned by the passage section F5162a and the fifth passage section F5141. The ball sorted to the passage section F5162a passes through the end on the front side (arrow F direction) where no wall section is formed, and is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage section F5141 of the fifth passage member F5140.

The supported shaft portion F5162b is formed of a rod-shaped body extending in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B). An insertion hole is formed in the supported shaft portion F5162b, and the second shaft portion F5161d is inserted into the insertion hole, so that the passage member F5162 is rotatably supported by the shaft arrangement member F5161.

The transmission part F5162c is formed in a cylindrical shape. The transmission part F5162c and the transmitted part F5163b of the engagement member F5163 are engaged with each other, so that the engagement member F5163 can be displaced (rotated) in accordance with the rotation (displacement) of the passage member F5162.

The engaging member F5163 is for restricting the displacement of the right slide member F5157R of the displacement means F5150, and includes a shaft-supported portion F5163a, a transmission-receiving portion F5163b disposed at one end of the shaft-supported portion F5163a in the extension direction, and a retaining portion F5163c disposed at the other end of the shaft-supported portion F5163a in the extension direction.

The supported shaft portion F5163a is formed of a rod-shaped body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). An insertion hole is formed in the supported shaft portion F5163a, and the first shaft portion F5161c is inserted into the insertion hole, so that the engaging member F5163 is rotatably supported by the shaft arrangement member F5161.

The transmitting portion F5163b is disposed at the end of the shaft receiving portion F5163a on the passage member F5162 side (arrow L direction side). The transmitting portion F5163b includes a connecting portion F5163b1, a pair of protruding portions F5163b2 protruding in parallel from the end of the connecting portion F5163b1 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), and an engaging portion F5163b3 which is the protruding tip of the pair of protruding portions F5163b2 and protrudes from the opposing surface of the pair of protruding portions F5163b2.

The protruding tips of the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 are curved. The distance between the opposing protruding tips of the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the transmission portion F5162c of the passage member F5162. The transmission portion F5162c is disposed between the pair of engaging portions F5163b3, so that the transmitted portion F5163b and the transmission portion F5162c are engaged in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

In addition, since the pair of protrusions F5163b2 (engagement portion F5163b3) are arranged in parallel, the pair of engagement portions F5163b3 and the transmission portion F5162c are disengaged in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B) (the transmission portion F5162c is displaceable in the front-to-rear direction relative to the pair of protrusions F5163b2). This allows the engagement member F5163 to rotate around the first shaft portion F5161c as the rotation axis in response to the rotation of the passage member F5162 with the second shaft portion F5161d as the rotation axis.

In addition, because the protruding tips of the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 are curved and the transmission portion F5162c is cylindrical, the contact area between the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 and the transmission portion F5162c can be reduced, and the frictional force generated between the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 and the transmission portion F5162c can be reduced. This makes it possible to suppress malfunction of the passage member F5162 or the engaging member F5163 and damage to the transmitted portion F5163b or the transmission portion F5162c.

The holding portion F5163c is a portion for holding (fixing) the magnetic body F5164. The holding portion F5163c is formed by protruding upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the end of the supported shaft portion F5163a on the opposite side (in the direction of the arrow R) from the transmitted portion F5163b.

The magnetic body F5164 is for restricting the displacement of the right slide member F5157R, and is formed as a plate-like body made of a magnetic material such as iron, cobalt, nickel, or an alloy thereof. A through hole is drilled in the magnetic body F5164, and a tapping screw inserted into the through hole is fastened to the holding portion F5163c, thereby holding (fixing) the magnetic body F5164 to the holding portion F5163c.

When the right slide member F5157R is displaced toward the magnetic body F5164 (the direction of the arrow R), the magnetic body F5164 and a magnetic body (not shown) disposed in the engaged portion F5157d of the right slide member F5157R are magnetically attracted to each other. This makes it possible to prevent the right slide member F5157R from returning (displacing) to the state before the displacement.

The center of gravity of the entire passage member F5162, engagement member F5163, and magnetic body F5164 of the maintaining means F5160 is located on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the second shaft portion F5161d of the shaft arrangement member F5161. As a result, in the passage member F5162, the transmission portion F5162c rotates (displaces) downward (arrow D direction side) with the second shaft portion F5161d as the rotation axis, and the passage portion F5162a rotates (displaces) upward (arrow U direction side). The passage portion F5162a abuts against the fifth passage member F5140, thereby restricting the rotation (displacement) of the passage member F5162.

Next, the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F5158 in response to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 will be described with reference to Figs. 1687 to 1689. Note that in describing the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F5158, Figs. 1681 and 1682 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 1687 illustrates the lower frame F5086b before the displacement (rotation) of the displacement members F5155 (left displacement member F5155L and right displacement member F5155R), Figure 1688 illustrates the lower frame F5086b after the displacement (rotation) of the left displacement member F5155L, and Figure 1689 illustrates the lower frame F5086b after the displacement (rotation) of the right displacement member F5155R, with Figures 1687(a), 1688(a), and 1689(a) being front views of the lower frame F5086b, and Figures 1687(b), 1688(b), and 1689(b) being rear views of the lower frame F5086b.

1687 to 1689, the central wall portion F5126 of the second passage member F5120 is omitted, and a state in which a part of the third passage wall portion F5125 is broken is shown. In addition, in the lower frame F5086b, the state before the displacement member F5155 is displaced (rotated) is called the closed state, and the state after the displacement member F5155 is displaced (rotated) is called the open state.

As shown in FIG. 1687, when the lower frame F5086b is in the closed state, the slide main body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 (left slide member F5157L and right slide member F5157R) abuts against the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 to restrict the displacement of the slide member F5157, and the blocking portion F5158a of the opening/closing member F5158 is disposed in a position visible to the player through the inlet FOPf1 formed in the passage member F5110 when viewed from the front. In other words, the restricting portion F5151a is disposed inside the edge of the inlet FOPf51.

The distance between the opposing surfaces of the pair of blocking sections F5158a is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. In other words, the pair of blocking sections F5158a are not arranged in the center of the inlet FOPf51 in the left-right direction, but are arranged on both left-right sides of the area surrounded by the inlet FOPf51.

As a result, even in a blocked state, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 flows between the pair of opposing blocking sections F5158a and into the inlet FOPf51, and can be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage section F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140.

The gap between the pair of blocking sections F5158a is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the top of the undulations F5112a of the lower passage F5112. As a result, the ball that is diverted to the top of the undulations F5112a moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the undulations F5112a, flows into the gap between the pair of blocking sections F5158a, and is easily guided (thrown, flows down) to the fifth passage section F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140.

In the closed state, the center of gravity of the entire combination of the displacement member F5155, weight F5156, slide member F5157, and opening/closing member F5158 is located on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the ball bearing F5152b. The ball bearing F5152b is arranged inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the rear side of the ball bearing F5152b is displaced downward (arrow D direction).

As a result, a force that displaces the slide body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 downward (in the direction of arrow D) acts on the slide body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157. As a result, the abutting state between the slide body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 and the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 is maintained, and the lower frame F5086b is maintained in a closed state.

Next, the movement of the lower frame F5086b from the closed state to the open state will be described. The ball guided through the second passage section F5121 of the second passage member F5120 is guided (thrown, flows down) to and held in the holding section F5155e of the displacement member F5155, so that the center of gravity of the entire combination of the displacement member F5155, the weight F5156, the slide member F5157, the opening/closing member F5158, and the ball held in the holding section F5155e is positioned on the front side (the direction of the arrow F).

As a result, a force acting to displace the main body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155 downward (in the direction of arrow D) acts on the main body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155, and a force acting to displace the main body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 upward (in the direction of arrow U) acts on the main body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155.

The slide body portion F5157a is displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and comes into contact with the restricting portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152, restricting the displacement of the slide member F5157 and positioning (maintaining) the lower frame F5086b in the open state.

Here, the movement of the lower frame F5086b to the open state is achieved by guiding (throwing, flowing down) the ball sorted (guided) from the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 to the holding portion F5155e of the displacement means F5150, and displacing (rotating) the displacement member F5155 together with the ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, the arm F5155b is formed to be easily flexible (the tip of the arm F5155b is easily displaced relative to the pivot support F5155a), and the ball is easily moved (flows down, falls) from the holding portion F5155e.

Here, in the lower frame F86b in the 93rd embodiment, the ball is distributed (guided) to the passage portion F131 (third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F130, thereby moving from a closed state to an open state. Therefore, when an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1511), the displacement member F130 is displaced, resulting in a state (open state) in which it is easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64.

In contrast, in the lower frame F5086b of this embodiment, the balls are moved from a closed state to an open state by being held by the holding portion F5155e of the displacement means F5150, and when an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1511), the balls tend to move (flow down, fall) from the holding portion F5155e. As a result, when an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to put the balls in a state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the first winning port 64, making it easier to prevent an impact or the like from being applied to the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figures 1688 and 1689, when the lower frame F5086b is in an open state, the blocking portion F5158a is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110. In other words, the blocking portion F5158a is disposed in a position where it is not visible to the player through the inflow opening FOPf51 formed in the passage member F5110 when viewed from the front. Therefore, compared to when the lower frame F5086b is in a closed state, the distance between the pair of opposing blocking portions F5158a is larger, making it easier for balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 to flow between the opposing pair of blocking portions F5158a and into the inflow opening FOPf51.

When the lower frame F5086b is in the open state, the displacement member F5155 is maintained in a displaced (rotated) state. This makes it easier for the player to visually confirm the open state of the lower frame F5086b.

In this way, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 (see FIG. 1677), and the displacement member F5155 is displaced (rotated) from the closed state to the open state by using the weight of the ball. This makes it easier for the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 to flow between the pair of opposing blocking sections F5158a and into the inlet FOPf51, and easier to guide (throw, flow down) to the fifth passage section F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140 (easier to enter the first winning hole 64).

Therefore, when a ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), the player is made aware of the presence or absence of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52), which can increase interest.

The movement of the lower frame F5086b from the open state to the closed state is achieved by the ball flowing out of the displacement member F5155 (the weight of the ball no longer acts on the displacement member F5155). The action of force (gravity) from the open state to the closed state of the lower frame F5086b is the same as for maintaining the open state, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the weight of the ball can be used to move the lower frame F5086b from a closed state to an open state, or from an open state to a closed state, eliminating the need for a drive device and reducing manufacturing costs.

Here, in the closed state, the apex of the undulations of the sorting section F5154c of the sorting member F5154 is disposed at a position to the right (in the direction of arrow R) of the lowest vertical position (in the direction of arrows U-D) of the first outflow surface F5114a of the passage member F5110.

As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the first outlet surface F5114a of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 is guided to the sorting section F5154c and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the left displacement member F5155L.

The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) is diverted to the left-side displacement member F5155L, and the left-side displacement member F5155L rotates around the ball bearing F5152b as the rotation axis, displacing the left-side slide member F5157L to the left (in the direction of the arrow L).

In addition, because the second engaging portion F5157c of the left slide member F5157L and the engaged portion F5154a of the sorting member F5154 are engaged, the sorting portion F5154c is displaced to the left (in the direction of arrow L) in conjunction with the displacement of the left slide member F5157L. As a result, the apex of the undulations of the sorting portion F5154c is disposed at a position to the left (in the direction of arrow L) of the lowest position in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrows U-D) of the first outflow surface F5114a.

In addition, among the open states, the state in which the sorting member F5154, the left displacement member F5155L, the left sliding member F5157L, and the left opening/closing member F5158L are in operation (rotated, displaced) is referred to as the "first open state."

Therefore, in the first open state, the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the first outlet surface F5114a of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 is guided to the sorting section F5154c and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the right-side displacement member F5155R.

Here, when the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, if the second ball (the ball following the first ball and flowing down from the first outlet surface F5114a to the second passage FRt52) flows down from the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53 toward the left displacement member F5155L and collides with the left displacement member F5155L, there is a risk that the first ball will fall off (flow down) from the left displacement member F5155L. If the first ball falls off (flows down) from the left displacement member F5155L, the blocking portion F5158a will return to a closed state, making it difficult for balls to flow into the inlet FOPf51.

In particular, if the weight of the first ball acts on the left-side displacement member F5155L with the third ball on the fourth passage FRt54, causing the blocking portion F5158a to open, and the player is hoping that the third ball will flow into the inlet FOPf51, the falling out of the first ball (returning of the blocking portion F5158a to the blocked state) will interrupt that expectation and reduce interest in the game.

In contrast, when the weight of the first ball is acting on the left-side displacement member F5155L, the second ball can be guided by the sorting section F5154c to move (flow down, roll) toward the right-side displacement member F5155R. In other words, the movement (flow down, roll) of the second ball toward the left-side displacement member F5155R can be restricted (suppressed).

This makes it possible to prevent the left-side displacement member F5155L from being affected by the second ball when the weight of the first ball is acting on the left-side displacement member F5155L (the second ball flows down from the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53 toward the left-side displacement member F5155L, and the first ball falls off (flows down) from the left-side displacement member F5155L due to the collision of another second ball with the left-side displacement member F5155L). In other words, it is possible to prevent the state of the blocking portion F5158a from changing (from an open state to a closed state) due to the collision of the second ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ease of balls flowing into the inlet FOPf51 from changing midway, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In this case, when the weight of the first ball is applied to the left displacement member F5155L, it is possible to consider a configuration in which the second ball is held in a predetermined position (e.g., on the first passage FRt51) (stopping movement).

In response to this, when the weight of the first ball is applied to the left-side displacement member F5155L, the sorting section F5154c guides the second ball to the right-side displacement member F5155R rather than retaining it in a predetermined position (making it easier to move to the right-side displacement member F5155R than to the left-side displacement member F5155L), making it easier to continue changing the ease with which balls (e.g., the third ball on the fourth passage FRt54) can flow into the inlet FOPf51.

In other words, while the weight of the first ball is acting on the left-side displacement member F5155L, this state is prevented from being interrupted (the second ball collides with the left-side displacement member F5155L and the first ball falls off the left-side displacement member F5155L), and the second ball is received by the right-side displacement member F5155R, creating a state in which the weight of the received second ball is acting on the right-side displacement member F5155R, thereby creating a state in which the right-side displacement member F5155R also facilitates the flow of a ball (third ball) into the inlet FOPf51. This can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the second passage wall portion F5123 and the third passage wall portion F5125 are erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53, so that when the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, the ball flowing down from the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53 is less likely to collide (contact) with the side of the left displacement member F5155L. This prevents the first ball from falling off (flowing down) from the left displacement member F5155L, and prevents the ease of ball flow into the inlet FOPf51 from changing midway. As a result, the fun of the game can be increased.

In addition, when another ball (second ball) abuts against the first ball that was exerting its weight on the left-side displacement member F5155L, even if the first ball falls off the left-side displacement member F5155L, the other ball (second ball) may be able to exert its weight on the left-side displacement member F5155L in place of the first ball. In addition, when the other ball (second ball) abuts against (is received by) the upper surface of the left-side displacement member F5155L (the part where the ball exerting the weight is held or rolled, the holding part 5155e or the recessed part F5155d1), the other ball (second ball) may be able to exert its weight on the left-side displacement member F5155L in addition to the first ball that was exerting its weight, or in place of the first ball. Therefore, it is effective if the other ball (second ball) is unlikely to collide (abut) against at least the side surface of the left-side displacement member F5155L. That is, the second passage wall F5123 and the third passage wall F5125 are effective against the left displacement member F5155L, which rotates around the ball bearing F5152b as the rotation axis.

In this case, the left-side displacement member F5155L can be displaced in a direction away from the flow-down portion of the second passage FRt52 (the portion that causes the ball to flow down to the left-side displacement member F5155L, the portion where the second passage wall portion F5123 is not formed) and the flow-down portion of the third passage FRt53 (the portion that causes the ball to flow down to the left-side displacement member F5155L, the portion where the third passage wall portion F5125 is not formed) by rotating around the ball bearing F5152b as the rotation axis. This makes it less likely that another ball (second ball) flowing down from the flow-down portion will collide (come into contact) with the side of the left-side displacement member F5155.

The passage lengths of the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53 can be set arbitrarily, and are preferably set to lengths shorter than those in the present embodiment. In addition, the size (dimension in the direction of the arrows L and R) of the distribution section F5154c may be made larger than that in the present embodiment, so that when the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, the ball flowing down from the second outflow surface F5114b (the one of the pair of second outflow surfaces F5114b located on the left displacement member F5155L side) to the second passage FRt52 may also be guided to the right displacement member F5155R. In addition, the formation of the second outflow surface F5114b may be omitted. In either case, when the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, it is easy to suppress the left displacement member F5155L from being affected by the second ball.

The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) is diverted to the right-side displacement member F5155R, and the right-side displacement member F5155R, right-side slide member F5157R, and right-side opening/closing member F5158R operate (rotate, displace) to open the lower frame F5086b. Hereinafter, the open state in which the right-side displacement member F5155R, right-side slide member F5157R, and right-side opening/closing member F5158R operate (rotate, displace) is referred to as the "second open state."

In the second open state of the lower frame F5086b, a magnetic body (not shown) disposed on the engaged portion F5157d of the right slide member F5157R is magnetically attached to the magnetic body F5164 of the retaining means F5160. This makes it possible to prevent the right slide member F5157R (right opening/closing member F5158R) from moving (rotating, displacing) (moving from the second open state to the closed state) even when the ball flows out (flows down) from the main body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155. Therefore, the lower frame F5086b is maintained in the second open state (a state in which the distance between the pair of opposing blocking portions F5158a is increased).

As a result, even when the ball flows out (flows down) from the right-side displacement member F5155R and the weight of the ball is not acting on the right-side displacement member F5155R, it is possible to maintain a state in which the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) can easily flow between the pair of opposing blocking portions F5158a and into the inlet FOPf51.

In this way, when a ball is guided (thrown, flows down) from the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120, it moves (flows down, rolls) toward the right-side displacement member F5155R, which makes it easier for the player to expect that the ball moving (flows down, rolls) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) will flow between the pair of opposing blocking sections F5158a and into the inlet FOPf51, compared to when the ball moves (flows down, rolls) toward the left-side displacement member F5155L, and this makes the game more interesting.

In addition, the ball (leading ball) guided (thrown, flowing down) from the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 can move (flow down, roll) toward the left displacement member F5155L, causing the ball (subsequent ball) following the leading ball to move (flow down, roll) toward the right displacement member F5155R. In other words, the player can expect that the subsequent ball will be guided (thrown, flowing down) from the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) within a predetermined time after the leading ball is sorted to the left displacement member F5155L, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the lower frame F5086b is in the second open state, the right-side displacement member F5155R is maintained in a displaced state, making it easier for the player to understand that the lower frame F5086b is in the second open state.

Next, the operation (displacement) from the second open state to the closed state will be described. The ball that flows between the pair of opposing blocking portions F5158a and into the inlet FOPf51 is guided (sent, flowing down) to the passage portion F5162a of the maintaining means F5160, so that the center of gravity of the passage member F5162, engagement member F5163, magnetic body F5164, and ball is positioned closer to the front side (arrow F direction side) than the second shaft portion F5161d of the shaft arrangement member F5161. As a result, the passage portion F5162a (transmission portion F5162c) of the passage member F5162 rotates downward (upward) with the second shaft portion F5161d as the rotation axis.

By rotating the passage portion F5162a downward, the holding portion F5163c of the engagement member F5163 rotates downward (in the direction of arrow D) around the first shaft portion F5161c as the axis of rotation, and the engagement (magnetization) between the right slide member F5157R and the retaining means F5160 is released. As a result, the lower frame F5086b is positioned in a closed state.

In this way, when the lower frame F5086b is operated to the second open state (a state in which a ball is easily entered into the first winning opening 64), the lower frame F5086b can be maintained in the second open state until at least one ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) into the passage portion F5162a of the maintaining means F5160 (entered into the first winning opening 64).

This ensures that balls can flow between the pair of opposing blocking sections F5158a and into the inlet FOPf51 in the second open state. In other words, it is possible to prevent the lower frame F5086b from being operated from the second open state to the closed state without balls flowing between the pair of opposing blocking sections F5158a and into the inlet FOPf51. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Next, we will explain the balls flowing down the lower frame F5086b. Of the balls flowing down the play area, those guided through the upper frame passage FRt50 (see FIG. 1676) arranged in the upper frame F5086a flow into (enter) the upstream end of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110.

The ball that flows (enters) the upstream end of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper passage F5114, and is guided (thrown, flows out) from the first outlet surface F5114a or the second outlet surface F5114b to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) or the third passage section F5124 (third passage FRt53) of the second passage member F5120.

The ball guided (thrown, flowed out) from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) moves (flows down, rolls) toward the left displacement member F5155L (arrow L direction) along the inclination direction of the sorting section F5154c of the sorting member F5154, and changes its direction of movement to the front side (arrow F direction) by abutting against the curved section F5122. As a result, the ball is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the left displacement member F5155L arranged on the front side of the second passage section F5121.

The curved portion F5122 is formed in a curved shape that is concave toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from above, so the direction of movement of the ball can be changed to the front side (arrow F direction) while maintaining the speed of movement of the ball guided (thrown, flowed out) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52). This allows the ball to be guided (thrown, flowed out) to the left displacement member F5155L more quickly than when the curved portion F5122 is not formed.

In addition, because the left-side displacement member F5155L is journaled on the ball bearing F5152b, the time from when the ball is guided (thrown, discharged) to the left-side displacement member F5155L until the left-side displacement member F5155L rotates (displaces) can be shortened, compared to when the ball bearing F5152b is not provided, and the time until the first open state is reached can be shortened.

As a result, even if a ball following the ball guided (thrown, flowed out) to the left displacement member F5155L continues to move (flow down, roll) through the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) toward the left displacement member F5155L (guided from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage section F5121 before the displacement of the sorting section F5154c), the following ball can be prevented from coming into contact with the preceding ball (the ball guided to the left displacement member F5155L), and the preceding ball can be prevented from falling (flowing out) from the left displacement member F5155L.

The ball guided (thrown, discharged) to the left-side displacement member F5155L rotates (displaces) with the left-side displacement member F5155L around the ball bearing F5152b as the axis of rotation, and is displaced toward the inlet FOPf51 side (the center in the left-right direction).

The ball bearing F5152b is arranged so that it slopes downward toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), so the left-side displacement member F5155L is displaced downward (arrow D direction) as it moves from both left-right ends toward the center. In other words, the left-side displacement member F5155L is displaced along the slope of the sloped portion of the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

As a result, even if the left-side displacement member F5155L is displaced between the lower passage F5112 and the second passage member F5120, the space required to prevent the left-side displacement member F5155L from coming into contact with the lower passage F5112 or the second passage member F5120 can be reduced. In other words, the distance between the lower passage F5112 and the second passage member F5120 can be reduced, and the lower frame F5086b can be made smaller.

In addition, the distance (step) between the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) and the left-side displacement member F5155L can be reduced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). This makes it easier to guide (throw, flow out) a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) to the left-side displacement member F5155L.

In addition, the distance between the left-side displacement member F5155L and the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) can be reduced. This reduces the impact force when the ball diverted from the left-side displacement member F5155L hits the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), suppressing damage to the lower passage F5112.

The ball that is guided (thrown, flown out) to the left-side displacement member F5155L is held in the holding portion F5155e. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from falling (flowing out) from the left-side displacement member F5155L when the left-side displacement member F5155L rotates (displaces).

Now, referring to Fig. 1690 in addition to Fig. 1687 to Fig. 1689, the displacement of the left-side displacement member F5155L and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the left-side displacement member F5155L will be described. Fig. 1690 is a partial top view of the left-side displacement member F5155L, Fig. 1667(a) shows the left-side displacement member F5155L in the closed state of the lower frame F5086b, and Fig. 1690(b) to Fig. 1690(d) show the left-side displacement member F5155L in the first open state of the lower frame F5086b.

As shown in FIG. 1690(a), the ball CB51 guided (thrown, flowing down) from the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) (see FIG. 1683) to the left-side displacement member F5155L is held in the left-side displacement member F5155L by the holding portion F5155e (is prevented from being displaced from the holding portion F5155e).

As shown in FIG. 1690(b), the slide body portion F5157a of the left slide member F5157L abuts against the restricting portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152, restricting the displacement of the left slide member F5157L (left displacement member F5155L), and the lower frame F5086b is disposed in the first open state.

In the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, the ball CB51 is maintained in a state held by the holding portion F5155e. In this way, when the lower frame F5086b moves from the closed state to the first open state, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball CB51 is stopped (the ball CB51 is maintained in a state held by the holding portion F5155e), thereby preventing the ball CB51 from flowing into the through hole F5155d2. This makes it possible to extend the period in which the lower frame F5086b is in the first open state.

In addition, as the displacement of the left-side displacement member F5155L is restricted (the lower frame F5086b is placed in the first open state), an inertial force acts, causing the ball CB51 held by the holding portion F5155e to move (flow down, roll) toward the main body portion F5155d. In this way, the inertial force acting on the ball CB51 can be used to cause the ball CB51 to resume movement (flow down, roll) (holding by the holding portion F5155e is released), eliminating the need for a drive device to release the holding by the holding portion F5155e.

In addition, in the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, the angle of the downward inclination toward both ends of the left and right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the holding portion F5155e is smaller than in the closed state. This makes it easier to ensure the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball CB51 (easier to release the hold by the holding portion F5155e).

As shown in FIG. 1690(c), the ball CB51 moves (flows down, rolls) while contacting the regulating wall F5155f, so that the ball CB51 is guided toward the regulating wall F5155f side (the direction of arrow B) in the recess F5155d1. That is, the ball CB51 is guided to a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F5155d1 (the center of the through hole F5155d2).

As shown in FIG. 1690(d), by guiding the ball CB51 to a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F5155d1 (the center of the through hole F5155d2), the ball CB51 is likely to revolve along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1. This makes it possible to delay the ball CB51 from flowing into the through hole F5155d2 and flowing out (downward) from the left displacement member F5155L. As a result, the period during which the weight of the ball CB51 acts on the left displacement member F5155L can be lengthened, and the period during which the lower frame F5086b is in an open state can be lengthened.

In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the ball CB51 along the inner circumferential surface of the recess F5155d1, the frictional force generated between the ball and the inner circumferential surface of the recess F5155d1 can be utilized to reduce the speed at which the ball moves, and the flow of the ball CB51 into the through hole F5155d2 can be delayed.

Here, the inner peripheral surface and bottom surface F5155d3 of the recess F5155d1 are formed as flat surfaces. In other words, the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1 is formed flush in the radial direction, and the bottom surface F5155d3 is formed flush in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D). Therefore, there is no difference in height between the inner peripheral surface and bottom surface F5155d3 of the recess F5155d1, making it easier to rotate the ball CB51 along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1.

In addition, the inner circumferential surface and bottom surface F5155d3 of the recess F5155d1 are formed continuously, in other words, no intermittent portions are formed on the inner circumferential surface and bottom surface F5155d3 of the recess F5155d1, making it easier to rotate the ball CB51 along the inner circumferential surface of the recess F5155d1.

Returning from FIG. 1687 to FIG. 1689, the ball flowing down the lower frame F5086b will be described. In the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, the through hole F5155d2 (see FIG. 1683) of the left displacement member F5155L is disposed above (in the direction of the arrow U) on the front side (the direction of the arrow F) of the lower passage F5112 (the fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110. As described above, the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the lower passage F5112 (the fourth passage FRt54) oscillates (moves, rolls) along the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) while abutting against the vertical wall portion F5113, that is, oscillates (moves, rolls) on the back side (the side facing the arrow B) of the lower passage F5112 (the fourth passage FRt54).

This prevents the balls distributed from the main body portion F5155d (through hole F5155d2) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) from coming into contact with balls oscillating (moving, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54).

In addition, in the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, the main body portion F5155d of the left displacement member F5155L is disposed above the outflow surface F5112b of the passage member F5110 (in the direction of the arrow U). This makes it easier for the balls sorted from the main body portion F5155d to flow out (flow down) into the play area.

Next, the second open state of the lower frame F5086b will be described. When the lower frame F5086b is operated (displaced) to the first open state, the top of the distribution section F5154c of the distribution member F5154 is disposed in a position to the left (arrow L direction side) of the lowest height position in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the first outflow surface F5114a. As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowed out) from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) moves (flows down, rolls) along the inclination direction of the distribution section F5154c toward the right displacement member F5155R side (arrow R direction side). As a result, the ball is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the right displacement member F5155R.

The operation (rotation, displacement) of the right-side displacement member F5155R from when the ball is distributed to the right-side displacement member F5155R until it is guided (thrown, discharged) into the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) is linearly (planarly) symmetrical (left-right symmetrical in Figure 1676) with the left-side displacement member F5155L with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 1676) of the game board F5013, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. As a result, the lower frame F5086b operates (displaces) to the second open state.

Here, as the right-side displacement member F5155R operates (rotates and displaces), the right-side slide member F5157R displaces toward the holding portion F5163c of the retention means F5160. This causes the magnetic body (not shown) disposed in the engaged portion F5157d of the right-side slide member F5157R to be magnetically attached to the magnetic body F5164 of the retention means F5160. As a result, even when the balls have flowed out (flowed down) from the right-side displacement member F5155R, the lower frame F5086b is maintained in the second open state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1683, the movement (displacement) of the ball guided (thrown, flowed out) from the second outflow surface F5114b formed in the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) will be described. The ball guided (thrown, flowed out) from the second outflow surface F5114b is first sorted (guided) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120.

The second outflow surface F5114b is formed with a downward incline toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), so that the balls that are distributed (guided) to the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) move (flow down, roll) toward the front side and are then distributed (guided) to the third passage section F5124 (third passage FRt53).

Here, the ball that is diverted (guided) from the second outflow surface F5114b is first guided (thrown, flows out) into the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52), so that it can come into contact with the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) toward both ends of the second passage section F5121 (second passage FRt52) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

This makes it possible to guide (throw, flow out) balls moving (flowing down, rolling) toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) to the third passage section F5124 (third passage FRt53). In other words, it is possible to prevent the second sorted (guided) ball from the first outflow surface F5114a from being guided (thrown, flow out) to the displacement member F5155, making it difficult to operate the lower frame F5086b to the open state (first open state or second open state).

As a result, the player can expect that the ball distributed (guided) from the first outflow surface F5114a and the ball distributed (guided) from the second outflow surface F5114b will not come into contact, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The ball guided (thrown, flowed out) to the third passage section F5124 (third passage FRt53) moves (flows down, rolls) from the center toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is guided (thrown, flowed down) from the ends on both left-right ends of the third passage section F5124 (third passage FRt53) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110.

Here, an operating (displacement) range of the displacement member F5155 is formed below (in the direction of arrow D) the ends of both ends in the left-right direction (in the directions of arrows L-R) of the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53). This allows the ball diverted (guided) from the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53) to come into contact with the arm portion F5155b of the displacement member F5155 during operation (displacement).

As described above, the arm F5155b is formed to be easily flexible (the tip of the arm F5155b is easily displaced relative to the pivot support F5155a), so that when the ball comes into contact with the arm F5155b, the ball held by the holding portion F5155e of the displacement member F5155 can be easily dropped (flowed out). This makes it possible to prevent the lower frame F5086b from moving from a closed state to an open state.

This allows the player to anticipate that the ball diverted (guided) from the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53) will not come into contact with the displacement member F5155, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Let us return to the explanation from FIG. 1677 to FIG. 1686. The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 oscillates (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), flows into a pair of blocking portions F5158a and the inlet FOPf51 of the opening/closing member F5158, and is guided to the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140, or flows out (flows down) from the outlet surface F5112b of the lower passage F5112 to the playing area.

The pair of blocking sections F5158a are disposed in a position that is visible to the player through the inlet FOPf51 when viewed from the front. In other words, the pair of blocking sections F5158a are disposed inside the edge of the inlet FOPf51. Therefore, balls that are diverted (guided) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) are unlikely to flow into the inlet FOPf51, and are likely to flow out (flow down) from the outlet surface F5112b into the playing area.

In addition, since the vertical wall portion F5113 has a bulge portion F5113a formed to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction), a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) is given a velocity component toward the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side) by abutting against the bulge portion F5113a. Therefore, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) is unlikely to flow into the inlet FOPf51 drilled in the vertical wall portion F5113, and is likely to flow out (flow down) from the outlet surface F5112b into the playing area.

Here, in the closed state of the lower frame F5086b, the pair of blocking sections F5158a are disposed inside the edge of the inlet FOPf51. On the other hand, in the open state of the lower frame F5086b, the blocking section F5158a is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall section F5113 of the passage member F5110, and the distance between the pair of opposing blocking sections F5158a is made larger than in the closed state. As a result, a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) flows into the inlet FOPf51 (between the pair of opposing blocking sections F5158a) in the open state than in the closed state, and is more likely to be guided (thrown, flow down) to the fifth passage section F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140 (more likely to win into the first winning hole 64).

Therefore, while moving (flowing down, rolling) through the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), the player can expect the lower frame F5086b to be in an open state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The ball that flows into the inlet FOPf51 (between the pair of opposing blocking portions F5158a) is guided (thrown, flows down) to the passage portion F5162a of the retention means F5160. As described above, when the ball is guided (thrown, flows down) to the passage portion F5162a, the retention portion F5163c of the engagement member F5163 rotates downward (in the direction of arrow D) with the first shaft portion F5161c as the rotation axis. As a result, when the lower frame F5086b is placed in the second open state (see FIG. 1689), the engagement (magnetization) between the right slide member F5157R and the retention means F5160 is released, and the lower frame F5086b is placed in the closed state.

The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage section F5162a of the maintenance means F5160 is then guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage section F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140, moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction) along a pair of protrusions F5141c formed on the fifth passage section F5141, passes through the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F5110, and enters (guides, throws, flows out) into the first winning port 64.

Next, the lower frame F6086b in the 98th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1691 to 1703. In the above 93rd embodiment, the inlet FOPf1 and the outlet face F112b are formed in the same passage (fifth passage FRt5), but in the lower frame F6086b in the 98th embodiment, the inlet FOPf61 and the inlet FOPf62 are formed in different passages. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1691 is a front view of the game board F6013 in the 98th embodiment. As shown in Figure 1691, the center frame F6086 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 1375) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame F6086a and a lower frame F6086b.

The upper frame F6086a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1691) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 1691) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1375) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame F6086b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1691) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1512) is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame F6086a and the lower frame F6086b.

The upper frame F6086a is configured by omitting a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (the portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1691) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1375) of the base plate 60, i.e., the portion where the lower frame F6086b is arranged), and the other portions excluding the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments.

Next, the lower frame F6086b will be described with reference to Figs. 1692 and 1693 in addition to Fig. 1691. Fig. 1692 is a front perspective view of the lower frame F6086b, and Fig. 1693 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame F6086b.

As shown in Figures 1692 and 1693, the lower frame F6086b is provided with a pair of first passages FRt61 formed to allow balls to move (flow down, roll), a second passage FRt62 through which balls guided through the pair of first passages FRt61 move (flow down, roll), a pair of third passages FRt63 and a pair of fourth passages FRt64 through which balls guided through the second passages FRt62 move (flow down, roll), and a fifth passage FRt65 through which balls guided through the pair of third passages FRt63 move (flow down, roll), , a sixth passage FRt66 through which the ball guided through the fifth passage FRt65 flows down, inflow openings FOPf61 and FOPf62 formed as openings through which the ball guided through the fifth passage FRt65 and the second passage FRt62 is guided (flows in, is sent) to the sixth passage FRt66 and the fourth passage FRt64, and outflow openings FOPout1 and FOPout62 formed as openings through which the balls flowing down the sixth passage FRt66 and the fourth passage FRt64 flow out to the play area.

The pair of first passages FRt61, the pair of third passages FRt63, and the pair of fourth passages FRt64 are each arranged linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in FIG. 1691) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1691) of the game board F6013.

An upper frame passage FRt60 is disposed in the upper frame F6086a (see FIG. 1691). The upper frame passage FRt60 is a passage that guides the balls flowing down the play area, and the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt60 is connected to the upstream end of the first passage FRt61.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage FRt60 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage FRt60 through the upstream end of the first passage FRt61 into the first passage FRt61 of the lower frame F6086b.

Although not shown in the figure, the upper frame passages FRt60 are arranged linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in FIG. 1691) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1691) of the game board F6013. Therefore, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage FRt60 from the game area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage FRt60 arranged on the right side of the game board F6013 (right side in FIG. 1691) into the first passage FRt61 arranged on the right side of the game board F6013.

Here, the outlet FOPout1, which is the outlet of the sixth passage FRt66 (the opening that allows balls to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning port 64. Therefore, a ball that passes through the inlet FOPf61 of the fifth passage FRt65 and is diverted from the fifth passage FRt65 to the sixth passage FRt66 is likely to win at the first winning port 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning port 64).

In addition, a concave surface is formed (placed) in the second passage FRt62, sloping downward toward the front side (the direction of arrow F, the playing area side) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64. Therefore, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) along the outflow surface F6112b of the second passage FRt62 is likely to win the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of winning the first winning opening 64).

On the other hand, the outlet FOPout62, which is the outlet of the fourth passage FRt64 (the opening that allows the ball to flow out into the play area), is formed (placed) in two different positions in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1691) of the game board F6013 relative to the first winning port 64. Therefore, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fourth passage FRt64 has a high probability of flowing out into the play area, and as a result, it is difficult for the ball to win the first winning port 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning port 64 than a ball that passes through the above-mentioned inlet FOPf1 and is distributed from the fifth passage FRt65 to the sixth passage FRt66).

The second passage FRt62 has an undulation F6112a, and the bottom of the undulation F6112a is located on the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side) of the inlet FOPf62. The second passage FRt62 is also formed with a downward slope towards the back side (arrow B direction, opposite the playing area), and a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the bottom of the undulation has a high probability of being sorted into the fourth passage FRt64.

In addition, the outflow surface F6112b is formed at the top of the undulations F6112a. Therefore, a ball that is diverted to the second passage FRt62 is more likely to flow out from the bottom of the undulations F6112a to the fourth passage FRt64 than to be sent from the outflow surface F6112b to the first winning hole 64.

As a result, balls that are guided (thrown, flow down) to the bottom of the undulations are less likely to enter the first winning opening 64 (there is a lower probability of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 than balls that pass through the inlet FOPf61 and are diverted from the fifth passage FRt65 to the sixth passage FRt66 or balls that are diverted from the outlet face F6112b of the second passage FRt62).

Abutment portion F6154 is formed (placed) in third passage FRt63 to guide (throw, flow down) the ball that is diverted to third passage FRt63 to fifth passage FRt65. Third passage FRt63 is formed in a curved shape that is concave vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D), and abutment portion F6154 is disposed at the end of third passage FRt63 opposite first passage FRt61.

If the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball distributed from the first passage FRt61 to the third passage FRt63 is greater than a predetermined amount, the ball moves (flows down, rolls) vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) on the curved surface of the third passage FRt63 and abuts against the abutment point F6154. This changes the direction of the ball's movement (flows down, rolls), and the ball is distributed to the fifth passage FRt65.

In addition, the curved bottom surface of the third passage FRt63 has an outflow surface F6114a formed (positioned) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (the direction of arrow F). If the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball is below a predetermined amount, it cannot abut against the abutment part F6154 and is diverted from the outflow surface F6114a to the second passage FRt62.

The fifth passage FRt65 has an inlet FOPf61 and a pair of insertion holes F6121b formed (arranged), and the ball diverted to the fifth passage FRt65 passes through the inlet FOPf61 or the pair of insertion holes F6121b and is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the sixth passage FRt66 or the second passage FRt62.

The pair of insertion holes F6121b are formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1691) of the game board F6013 relative to the top (outflow surface F6112b) of the undulations F6112a of the second passage FRt62. Therefore, a ball that passes through the pair of insertion holes F6121b is unlikely to be guided to the top (outflow surface F6112b) of the undulations F6112a of the second passage FRt62, and is likely to be guided from the bottom of the undulations F6112a to the fourth passage FRt64 (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is low).

In the lower frame F6086b, the abutment portion F6173b formed on the displacement member F6173 of the sorting means F6170, which operates according to the weight of the ball, is disposed at a position vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the abutment portion F6154 (see FIG. 1703). When the abutment portion F6173b is disposed in the third passage FRt63, even if the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) on the curved surface of the third passage FRt63 is below a predetermined amount, the ball's movement (flowing down, rolling) direction is changed by abutting against the abutment portion F6173b, and the ball is sorted into the fourth passage FRt64.

Therefore, even if the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the third passage FRt63 in its extension direction is below a predetermined amount, the distribution means F6170 (displacement member F6173) will operate to make it easier to guide (throw, flow down) the ball to the fifth passage FRt65 (increasing the probability of winning at the first winning hole 64). As a result, the player can expect the distribution means F6170 (displacement member F6173) to operate when the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) along the third passage FRt63, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame F6086b will be described with reference to Figures 1692 to 1693 as well as Figures 1694 to 1701.

Figure 1694 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame F6086b, and Figure 1695 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame F6086b. Figure 1696 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting means F6170, and Figure 1697 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting means F6170. Figure 1698 is a top view of the lower frame F6086b, Figure 1699 is a front view of the lower frame F6086b, and Figure 1700 is a rear view of the lower frame F6086b. FIG. 1701(a) is a side view of the lower frame F6086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCIa in FIG. 1699, FIG. 1701(b) is a side view of the lower frame F6086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCIb in FIG. 1699, and FIG. 1701(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame F6086b along the line MDCCIc-MDCCIc in FIG. 1699.

As shown in Figures 1692 to 1701, the lower frame F6086b includes a passage member F6110, a fifth passage member F6120 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F6113 of the passage member F6110, a sixth passage member F6130 disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110, an intermediate passage member F6140 disposed on the rear side (arrow D direction side) of the sixth passage member F6130, a rear member F6150 disposed on the rear side of the intermediate passage member F6140, a pair of first passage members F6160 disposed on both ends of the rear member F6150 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a distribution means F6170 disposed on the rear side of the rear member F6150.

The passage member F6110 is formed with an outlet FOPout1 and an outlet FOPout62, the sixth passage section F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130 is inserted into the outlet FOPout1, and the fourth passage section F6132 of the sixth passage member F6130 is inserted into the outlet FOPout62. The passage member F6110 is also formed with an inlet FOPf61 and an inlet FOPf62, and the inlet FOPf61 and the inlet FOPf62 are disposed at positions corresponding to the first recess F6141 and the second recess F6142 of the intermediate passage member F6140, respectively.

Through holes F6143 are formed in the intermediate passage member F6140 and the rear member F6150, and the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170 is inserted into the through holes F6143. In addition, an insertion hole F6151b is formed in the rear member F6150, and the displacement member F6173 of the sorting means F6170 is inserted into the insertion hole F6151b.

The fifth passage member F6120 and the rear member F6150 are fastened to the passage member F6110 by tapping screws. The sixth passage member F6130 is fastened to the intermediate passage member F6140 by tapping screws, and the intermediate passage member F6140, the first passage member F6160 and the distribution means F6170 are fastened to the rear member F6150 by tapping screws. As a result, the lower frame F6086b is configured as a single unit (see Figures 1692 and 1693).

In the lower frame F6086b, the passage member F6110, the fifth passage member F6120, the sixth passage member F6130, the back member F6150, the first passage member F6160 and the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the back side members and balls can be seen through), and the middle passage member F6140 and the displacement member F6173 of the sorting means F6170 are made of a colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually see the balls moving from the first passage FRt61 to the sixth passage FRt66, and can also visually see the operation of the displacement member F6173 of the sorting means F6170, which enhances the fun of the game.

The intermediate passage member F6140 and the displacement member F6173 of the sorting means F6170 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

On the other hand, the lower frame F6086b is configured so that the intermediate passage member F6140, located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the connecting member F6175 of the sorting means F6170, is made of a light-impermeable resin material (or is painted or has a sticker attached), making it possible for the connecting member F6175 of the sorting means F6170 to be invisible to the player from the front side. Note that the intermediate passage member F6140 may be configured so that the connecting member F6175 of the sorting means F6170 is visible to the player from the front side by making it out of a light-transmitting resin material.

The passage member F6110 is for forming the second passage FRt62 and the third passage FRt63, and includes a plate-shaped front plate F6111 that forms the front surface, a lower passage F6112 that protrudes from the back surface of the front plate F6111, a vertical wall portion F6113 that extends vertically upward (arrow U direction) from approximately the center of the lower passage F6112 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), an upper passage F6114 that extends from the end of the vertical wall portion F6113 to the back surface side (arrow B direction), and a pair of fastening portions F6115 that protrude vertically downward (arrow D direction) from the ends of both ends of the lower passage F6112 in the left-to-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The second passage FRt62 is formed by the space partitioned by the front plate F6111, the lower passage F6112, the vertical wall portion F6113 and the rear member F6150, and the third passage FRt63 is formed by the space partitioned by the upper passage F6114 and the rear member F6150.

The front plate F6111 has multiple insertion holes F111a drilled in the plate thickness direction, and the outlet FOPout1 and outlet FOPout62 are formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction). In this embodiment, the outlet FOPout1 is an opening that serves as an outlet when the ball guided through the sixth passage FRt66 flows out (flows down) into the play area, and the outlet FOPout62 is an opening that serves as an outlet when the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt64 flows out (flows down) into the play area.

The front plate F6111 has a notch F6111b formed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the outflow surface F6112b, whose shape in a front view is approximately the same as the shape of the outflow surface F6112b of the lower passage F6112. By passing through the notch F6111b, the ball guided through the second passage FRt62 is sent to the first winning hole 64.

The lower passage F6112 is a portion on its upper surface along which the ball moves (flows down, rolls), and is formed with a downward incline towards the back side (the direction of arrow B). The lower passage F6112 is also formed with a downward incline from both ends in the left-right direction (the direction of arrows L-R) towards the center. This allows the ball guided (thrown, flows down) into the lower passage F6112 to oscillate (move, roll) in the left-right direction while abutting against the back member F6150 or the vertical wall portion F6113.

In addition, an undulation F6112a is formed in approximately the center of the lower passage F6112 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and at the top of the undulation F6112a, an outflow surface F6112b is formed (positioned) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (arrow F direction, playing area side).

In addition, the bottom of the undulations F6112a, in other words the boundary between the area formed by sloping downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the center and the undulations F6112a, is formed (located) in front (arrow F direction) of the inlet FOPf62 of the vertical wall portion F6113. Therefore, balls sorted into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) are more likely to be guided from the bottom of the undulations F6112a through the inlet FOPf62 of the vertical wall portion F6113 to the fourth passage FRt64 (more likely to flow out into the play area) than to be guided from the outlet surface F6112b to the first winning hole 64.

The vertical wall portion F6113 is a portion for connecting the lower passage F6112 and the upper passage F6114. Both ends of the upper passage F6114 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are formed flush with the lower passage F6112, and therefore the vertical wall portion F6113 is formed so as not to be connected to both ends of the lower passage F6112 in the left-right direction. In other words, the extension length of the vertical wall portion F6113 in the left-right direction is formed to be smaller than the extension length of the lower passage F6112 in the left-right direction.

In the vertical wall portion F6113, an inlet FOPf61 and a pair of inlets FOPf62 are formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction). The dimension of the inlet FOPf61 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is slightly larger than the outer shape of a sphere. The dimension of the inlet FOPf62 in the left-right direction is approximately twice the size of the outer shape of a sphere. As described above, the inlet FOPf61 and the inlet FOPf62 are openings that serve as outlets when a sphere guided through the fifth passage FRt65 flows out into the sixth passage FRt66.

The vertical wall portion F6113 is formed in a curved shape that convexly faces the front side (arrow F direction), so that when a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F6112 while abutting against the vertical wall portion F6113 passes through the undulations F6112a of the lower passage F6112, the ball is given a velocity component toward the front side (arrow F direction, game area side). As a result, it is possible to easily guide the ball passing through the undulations F6112a to the outflow surface F6112b (first winning opening 64) and to make it difficult to guide it to the fourth passage FRt64.

The upper end of the vertical wall portion F6113 is formed to have approximately the same shape as the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. This allows the balls guided into the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to flow out (flow down, fall) from the front of the upper passage F6114 into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62).

The upper passage F6114 is a portion on whose upper surface the balls move (flow down, roll), and the upper passage F6114 is formed in a curved shape that is concave toward the downward side (the direction of arrow D). In addition, both ends of the upper passage F6114 in the left-right direction (the direction of arrow L-R) are formed flush with the upper surface of the lower passage F6112, which makes it easier to distribute (guide) the balls moving (flow down, roll) in the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63).

The upper passage F6114 is also formed with a downward incline toward the rear member F6150 (the direction of arrow B). This makes it difficult for balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the left-right direction (the direction of arrows L-R) of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to flow (flowing down, falling) into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62).

Abutment portion F6154 of the back member F6150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the center of the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows L-R) of the upper passage F6114. If the speed (kinetic energy) of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 from both ends in the left-right direction toward the center is greater than a predetermined amount, the ball can abut against the abutment portion F6154.

On the other hand, if the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 from both left-right ends toward the center is less than a predetermined amount, the ball does not abut against the abutment portion F6154 and moves (flowing down, rolling) toward both left-right ends along the curved shape of the upper passage F6114. In other words, the ball oscillates (moves, rolls) along the extension direction of the upper passage F6114 (the direction of the arrows L-R).

In addition, at the lowest position (curved recess) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the upper passage F6114, an outflow surface F6114a is formed (positioned) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (arrow F direction). Therefore, of the balls sorted into the upper passage F6114, those that do not abut against the abutment portion F6154 of the back member F6150 are guided (thrown, flow down) from the outflow surface F6114a to the lower passage F6112.

A notch F6114b is formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the upper passage F6114. The inner peripheral surface of the notch F6114b is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the abutment portion F6173b formed on the displacement member F6173 of the sorting means F6170, and the abutment portion F6173b is arranged to be displaceable from the lower surface side to the upper surface side of the upper passage F6114 by passing through the notch F6114b.

In the upper passage F6114, the upper passage F6114 closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the outflow surface F6114a will be referred to as the first inclined portion F6114c, and the upper passage F6114 at both ends in the left-right direction will be referred to as the second inclined portion F6114d.

A through hole F115a is drilled in the plate thickness direction in the fastening portion F6115, and a tapping screw inserted through the through hole F115a is fastened to the back member F6150, thereby fixing (arranging) the back member F6150 to the passage member F6110.

The fastening portion F6115 is disposed in contact with the rear surface of the base plate 60. The lower passage F6112 is formed continuously from one end to the other in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the front plate F6111. This prevents foreign matter such as wire from entering. The fastening portion F6115 is disposed at a predetermined distance from the rear surface of the base plate 60, and the fastening portion F6115 and the rear surface of the base plate 60 may not be in contact with each other.

The fifth passage member F6120 is for forming the fifth passage FRt65, and includes a fifth passage section F6121, a wall section F6122 erected from the outer edge of the fifth passage section F6121, and a connecting section F6123 protruding from both ends of the wall section F6122 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the rear member F6150 side (arrow B direction side). In addition, a colored member F6124 is disposed in front of the wall section F6122. The fifth passage FRt65 is formed by the space partitioned by the fifth passage section F6121, the wall section F6122, and the erect wall section F6113 of the passage member F6110.

The fifth passage section F6121 is a section on its upper surface along which the balls move (flow down, roll) and is formed from a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The fifth passage section F6121 is formed with an outflow surface F6121a and a pair of insertion holes F6121b arranged on both sides of the outflow surface F6121a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The fifth passage section F6121 is disposed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110. This makes it possible to prevent balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 from contacting the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage section F6121). In addition, the fifth passage section F6121 is disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) the contact section F6154 of the back member F6150. This makes it possible to guide (send, flow down) balls that contact the contact section F6154 to the fifth passage section F6121.

The center side of the fifth passage section F6121 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to protrude towards the front side (arrow F direction), and a pair of insertion holes F6121b are drilled in the protruding part. The dimensions of the area between the end (vertical wall section F6113) on the back side (arrow B direction) of the fifth passage section F6121 and the insertion holes F6121b are formed to be larger than the outline of a sphere, and the area is formed so that the ball can move (flow down, roll) through.

The fifth passage section F6121 is formed with a downward incline from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the center, and also with a downward incline toward the vertical wall section F6113 side (arrow B direction).

The outflow surface F6121a is formed as a concave surface at approximately the center in the left-right direction of the fifth passage section F6121, at a position that is the front side (the direction of the arrow F) of the inflow opening FOPf61 of the vertical wall section F6113. Therefore, a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage section F6121 is likely to be guided (thrown, flowing out) to the outflow surface F6121a, and is likely to be guided (thrown, flowing out) to the first recess F6141 (inflow opening FOPf61) of the intermediate passage member F6140.

The insertion hole F6121b is a portion for allowing balls distributed to the fifth passage section F6121 to flow out (flow down, fall) into the lower passage F6112. This prevents balls distributed to the fifth passage section F6121 from being guided into the first recess F6141 (inlet FOPf61) of the intermediate passage member F6140, making the game more interesting.

The fifth passage portion F6121 may not have an insertion hole F6121b. This allows the ball guided (thrown, flowing out) to the fifth passage member F6120 to be reliably guided (thrown, flowing down) to the first recess F6141 (first winning opening 64) of the intermediate passage member F6140.

The wall portion F6122 is a portion for preventing a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the fifth passage portion F6121 from flowing out (flowing down) into the lower passage F6112, and the protruding height of the wall portion F6122 is formed to be smaller than the outer shape of the ball. This makes it easier for the player to see the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the fifth passage portion F6121.

A protrusion F6122a is formed on the wall portion F6122 at a position above the outflow surface F6121a (in the direction of the arrow U) (between the pair of opposing insertion holes F6121b) and protrudes toward the inflow port FOPf61 side (in the direction of the arrow B). By abutting against the protrusion F6122a, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the fifth passage portion F6121 can be made to move (flowing down, rolling) toward the back side (in the direction of the arrow B), making it difficult for the ball to be guided into the insertion hole F6121b.

The connecting portion F6123 is a portion for fixing (disposing) the fifth passage member F6120 to the rear member F6150. The dimension between the lower end of the connecting portion F6123 and the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere. This makes it possible to prevent the sphere moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 from abutting against the connecting portion F6123.

The colored member F6124 is made of a colored resin material. This makes it difficult for the player to see that the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the fifth passage portion F6121 is being guided (thrown, flowing out) from the outflow surface F6121a through the inflow opening FOPf61 to the sixth passage FRt66, or is being flowed out (flowing down, falling) through the insertion hole F6121b to the lower passage F6112, making the game more interesting.

The sixth passage member F6130 is for allowing the balls diverted (guided) from the intermediate passage member F6140 to flow out into the play area, and is equipped with a sixth passage section F6131 formed in approximately the center of the sixth passage member F6130 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a pair of fourth passage sections F6132 formed on both the left-right sides of the sixth passage section F6131.

The sixth passage portion F6131 is a portion for allowing the balls sorted from the first recessed portion F6141 of the intermediate passage member F6140 to flow out into the play area, and is formed in a roughly U-shape in front view with a bottom surface portion F6131a extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and a pair of wall portions F6131b protruding upward (arrow U direction) from both left-right ends of the bottom surface portion F6131a. The distance between the opposing surfaces of the pair of wall portions F6131b is formed slightly larger than the outline of the ball, and the sixth passage FRt66 (part of it) is formed by the space partitioned by the bottom surface portion F6131a, the pair of wall portions F6131b, and the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110.

The sixth passage section F6131 is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F6110. As a result, the balls that are distributed (guided) to the sixth passage section F6131 pass through the outlet FOPout1 and are discharged into the play area.

A pair of protrusions F6131c are provided on the upper surface of the bottom portion F6131a, spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The protrusions F6131c extend linearly along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the upper surface of the protrusions F6131c is formed to slope downward toward the front side (arrow F direction). The distance between the opposing surfaces of the pair of protrusions F6131c is made smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the protruding length (dimension in the arrow U-D direction) at the front end of the protrusions F6131c is set to a depth that prevents the ball from contacting the bottom surface of the bottom portion F6131a.

This allows the ball on the bottom portion F6131a to be positioned at two points (a pair of ridges on the opposing surface side at the upper end of the protrusion F6131c). Therefore, compared to when the pair of protrusions F6131c are not formed, it is easier to keep the movement (flowing down, rolling) position of the ball constant in the width direction (arrow L-R direction) of the sixth passage portion F6131. This makes it easier to guide (enter) the ball that has passed through the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F6110 into the first winning port 64.

The fourth passage portion F6132 is a portion for allowing balls sorted from the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170 to flow out into the play area, and is provided with a bottom portion F6132a extending in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), a side wall portion F6132b protruding upward (arrow U direction) from the end of the center of the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the bottom portion F6132a, a rear wall F6132c protruding upward from the end of the rear side of the bottom portion F6132a, a curved portion F6132d connecting the side wall portion F6132b and the rear wall F6132c, and a regulating wall F6132e protruding upward from the upper surface of the rear wall F6132c. The fourth passage FRt64 (part of it) is formed by the space partitioned by the bottom surface portion F6132a, the side wall portion F6132b, the rear wall F6132c, the curved portion F6132d, and the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110.

The fourth passage section F6132 is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the outlet FOPout62 of the passage member F6110. As a result, the balls that are distributed (guided) to the fourth passage section F6132 pass through the outlet FOPout62 and are discharged into the play area.

A recess F6132a1 is formed on the top surface of the bottom portion F6132a, recessed downward (toward the direction of arrow D) along the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrow F-B). The recess F6132a1 is formed with a downward incline toward the front side (the direction of arrow F), so that the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fourth passage portion F6132 can be discharged into the play area by utilizing the ball's own weight.

The recess F6132a1 is formed in approximately the center of the bottom surface portion F6132a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the movement (flow, roll) position of the ball sorted (guided) into the fourth passage portion F6132 to be approximately the center of the fourth passage portion F6132 in the left-right direction.

Due to factors such as an error (assembly tolerance) when fixing the sixth passage member F6130 to the intermediate passage member F6140 and an error (assembly tolerance) when fixing the passage member F6110 to the base plate 60, the relative position of the fourth passage section F6132 and the outlet FOPout62 may be arranged differently from the designed position, and the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the fourth passage section F6132 may come into contact with the front plate F6111 of the passage member F6110. In this case, the balls are likely to remain in the fourth passage section F6132, and it becomes difficult for the balls to be sorted (guided) from the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170 to the fourth passage section F6132. Therefore, there is a risk that the balls may remain in the displacement passage member F6174.

In response to this, a recess F6132a1 is formed on the top surface of the bottom portion F6132a, and the ball moves (flows down, rolls) approximately in the center of the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the fourth passage portion F6132, preventing the ball from coming into contact with the front plate F6111 of the passage member F6110, making it easier for the ball moving (flows down, rolls) through the fourth passage portion F6132 to flow out into the play area. As a result, the ball can be easily sorted (guided) from the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170 to the fourth passage portion F6132, preventing the ball from accumulating in the displacement passage member F6174.

A through hole is formed in the rear wall F6132c, and a tapping screw inserted into the through hole is fastened to the intermediate passage member F6140, thereby fixing (arranging) the sixth passage member F6130 to the intermediate passage member F6140.

The curved portion F6132d is formed in a curved shape that is concave toward the center (back side) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). By abutting against the curved portion F6132d, the ball can be guided toward the front side (arrow F direction) without slowing down the speed of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction. This makes it difficult for the ball to become stuck in the fourth passage portion F6132, and makes it difficult for the ball to become stuck in the displacement passage member F6174.

The restricting wall F6132e is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed of a straight section extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and a curved section extending from the end of the straight section at the center in the left-right direction toward the front side (arrow F direction). By abutting the balls sorted (guided) from the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110 to the curved section of the restricting wall F6132e, the balls can be restricted from displacing toward both ends in the left-right direction (the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170), and the time required for the balls that have passed through the inlet FOPf62 to be sorted (guided) to the displacement passage member F6174 can be increased.

As a result, when the ball that has been distributed (guided) to the displacement passage member F6174 is moving (flowing down, rolling) through the displacement passage member F6174, in other words, it becomes easier to guide (flow) into the lower frame F6086b the ball that follows the ball that was distributed to the displacement passage member F6174 before being distributed (guided) from the displacement passage member F6174 to the fourth passage section F6132.

The intermediate passage member F6140 is intended to guide (send, flow down) the balls sorted (guided) from the fifth passage section F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 or the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110 to the sixth passage section F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130 or the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170.

The intermediate passage member F6140 has a first recess F6141 formed in approximately the center of the intermediate passage member F6140 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a pair of second recesses F6142 formed on both left-right sides of the first recess F6141, and a pair of through holes F6143 formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second recesses F6142.

The sixth passage FRt66 (part of it) is formed by the space partitioned by the first recess F6141 and the vertical wall portion F6113 of the passage member F6110, and the fourth passage FRt64 (part of it) is formed by the space partitioned by the second recess F6142 and the vertical wall portion F6113.

The first recess F6141 is formed by recessing toward the rear side (arrow B direction) to a larger size than the outer shape of the ball. The first recess F6141 extends in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), with the upper end of the first recess F6141 disposed on the rear side of the inlet FOPf61 of the passage member F6110, and the lower end of the first recess F6141 disposed on the rear side of the sixth passage section F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130. This allows the ball's own weight to be used to guide (send, flow down) the ball sorted from the fifth passage section F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (the inlet FOPf61 of the passage member F6110) to the sixth passage section F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130.

The second recess F6142 is formed with a recess toward the back side (arrow B direction) that is larger than the outer shape of the ball. The rolling surface F6142a formed as the surface with which the ball abuts in the second recess F6142 is formed with a downward inclination toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it possible to use the weight of the ball to guide (send, flow down) the ball sorted from the lower passage F6112 (inlet FOPf62) of the passage member F6110 to the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170.

The through hole F6143 is a portion for inserting the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170. By inserting the through hole F6143, the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170 can be disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the intermediate passage member F6140.

The rear member F6150 is for supporting the fifth passage member F6120, the intermediate passage member F6140, the first passage member F6160 and the distribution means F6170, and includes a rear plate F6151, a pair of side plates F6152 arranged at both ends of the rear plate F6151 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a lower plate F6153 arranged at the lower end of the rear plate F6151, a contact portion F6154 protruding from the front of the rear plate F6151, and a protruding plate F6155 protruding from the rear of the rear plate F6151.

The rear panel F6151 is composed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). A recess F6151a is formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the left-right center of the rear panel F6151, recessed toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). The upper surface of the recess F6151a is left unformed; in other words, the recess F6151a is formed with an open upper side, and the lower end of the connecting member F6175 of the sorting means F6170 passes through the open portion and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the recess F6151a.

In addition, an insertion hole F6151b is drilled in the plate thickness direction in the rear plate F6151 at a position below the contact portion F6154 (arrow D direction side) and on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the notch F6114b of the passage member F6110. The insertion hole F6151b is formed extending toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the contact portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170 is inserted into the insertion hole F6151b.

The side plate F6152 is formed of a plate-like body extending in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), and the lower end of the side plate F6152 is formed and connected to the lower plate F6153. In addition, a pair of protrusions F6152a are formed on the surface of the side plate F6152 opposite the opposing surface.

The protrusions F6152a are cylindrical and arranged at a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). The first passage member F6160 is fixed (arranged) to the back member F6150 by fitting the fixing holes F6164a of the first passage member F6160 into the protrusions F6152a.

The lower plate F6153 is composed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R). The lower plate F6153 is arranged and connected to a pair of side plates F6152, and no gap is formed between the lower plate F6153 and the pair of side plates F6152.

The front surface of the lower plate F6153 and the front surfaces of the pair of side plates F6152 are formed flush with each other, and the front surfaces of the lower plate F6153 and the pair of side plates F6152 abut against the rear surface of the base plate 60. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering the inside of the rear surface member F6150.

The pair of side plates F6152 and the lower plate F6153 may be arranged so as to be unconnected (not in contact), and a gap may be formed between the lower plate F6153 and the pair of side plates F6152. Also, the front surface of the lower plate F6153 and the front surfaces of the pair of side plates F6152 may be formed to be non-flush, and the front surface of the lower plate F6153 or the front surfaces of the pair of side plates F6152 may not be in contact with the rear surface of the base plate 60.

The abutment portion F6154 is a portion for distributing balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 to the fifth passage member F6120. The abutment portion F6154 is disposed at a predetermined distance from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. The predetermined distance is set to be greater than the radius of the ball and less than the diameter of the ball. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 to abut against the abutment portion F6154. It is also possible to prevent the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 from climbing over the abutment portion F6154.

The contact portion F6154 is formed of a plate-like body. The contact portion F6154 is formed to be inclined downwards toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and is disposed approximately parallel to the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. The surface on the lower side of the inclination direction of the contact portion F6154, in other words the surface facing the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, is formed with a curved surface F6154a that is concave toward the upper side of the inclination direction (the direction in which the ball moving on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 approaches).

When a ball moves (flows down, rolls) along the top surface of the upper passage F6114 and comes into contact with the curved surface F6154a of the contact portion F6154, the direction of the ball's movement (flows down, rolls) is changed to the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and the ball is thus diverted (guided) from the upper passage F6114 to the fifth passage member F6120.

The protruding plate F6155 is a part for restricting the displacement of the weight support member F6176 of the sorting means F6170, and is composed of a plate-shaped body. The weight support member F6176 comes into contact with the lower surface of the protruding plate F6155, thereby restricting the displacement of the weight support member F6176 toward the upper side (the direction of the arrow U).

The first passage member F6160 is for guiding (sending, flowing down) balls that have been redirected (guided) from the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1691) to the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110. The first passage member F6160 includes a groove portion F6161 that is connected to the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt60, a recess F6162 that is connected to the downstream end of the groove portion F6161, and a guide portion F6163 and a fixed portion F6164 that protrude from the underside of the recess F6162. The first passage FRt61 is formed by the space partitioned by the groove portion F6161 and the recess F6162.

The groove portion F6161 is formed in a groove shape, and the groove shape of the groove portion F6161 is formed (recessed) to be approximately the same as the outer shape of the sphere. In addition, the groove portion F6161 is formed with a downward slope from the upstream end (the end connected to the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1691)) to the downstream end (the end connected to the recess F6162). This allows the ball sorted from the upper frame passage FRt60 to move (flow down, roll) toward the recess F6162 by utilizing the ball's own weight.

The groove depth (dimension in the direction of the arrows U-D) of the groove portion F6161 is formed to be approximately equal to the radius of the ball. This allows the ball that is diverted (guided) from the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1691) to move (flow down, roll) along the groove portion F6161, and prevents the ball from being guided (thrown, flow down) to the recess F6162 from a portion other than the downstream end of the groove portion F6161 (a portion between the upstream end and downstream end of the groove portion F6161).

The groove F6161 is formed from a straight portion extending in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) and a curved portion formed by curving from the downstream end of the straight portion. The curved portion of the groove F6161 is formed to be connected to the recessed side surface of the recess F6162.

The recess F6162 is formed in a cylindrical shape that is open on the upper side (arrow U direction), and the bottom surface of the recess F6162 is formed in a mortar shape that is concave downward (arrow D direction). In addition, a pair of insertion holes F6162a are drilled in the bottom surface of the recess F6162, spaced from the recessed side by a distance greater than the outline of the sphere.

As described above, the curved portion of the groove portion F6161 and the recessed side surface of the recess F6162 are connected to each other, so that the balls distributed (guided) from the groove portion F6161 can move (flow down, roll) along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F6162. This makes it difficult for the balls to pass through the pair of insertion holes F6162a. As a result, it is easy to make the distance between a first ball passing through the pair of insertion holes F6162a and a second ball following the first ball smaller than a predetermined amount.

The through hole F6162a is a portion for distributing (guiding) the ball from the recess F6162 to the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110, and is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. The pair of through holes F6162a are formed at a predetermined distance from the central axis of the recess F6162 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The holes formed on the front side (arrow F direction) are referred to as insertion holes F6162a1, and the holes formed on the rear side (arrow B direction) are referred to as insertion holes F6162a2, and are distinguished by using different reference numerals. The insertion holes F6162a1 are drilled closer to the front side (arrow F direction) than the vertical wall portion F6113 of the passage member F6110, and the insertion holes F6162a2 are drilled closer to the rear side (arrow B direction) than the vertical wall portion F6113.

As a result, for example, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) passes in front of the vertical wall portion F6113 (arrow F direction) and moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the lower passage F6112 toward the first passage member F6160 disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side). In contrast, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the left side does not pass in front of the vertical wall portion F6113, but is guided (thrown, flows out) from the left side of the lower passage F6112 to the upper passage F6114 formed on the left side.

The guide portion F6163 is a portion for guiding (throwing, flowing out) the ball that has passed through the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 of the recessed portion F6162 to the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110, and is formed with a downward inclination toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). By interposing the guide portion F6163 between the recessed portion F6162 and the lower passage F6112, the impact of the ball when it is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the lower passage F6112 can be reduced, and damage to the lower passage F6112 can be suppressed. In addition, the amount of rebound when it hits the lower passage F6112 can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress the ball from flowing out (flowing down, falling) from the lower passage F6112 to the play area beyond the front plate F6111 of the passage member F6110.

A pair of guide recesses F6163a are formed in the guide portion F6163 at a position below the insertion holes F6162a1, F6162a2 (in the direction of arrow D) and recessed toward the lower passage F6112 (both ends in the left-right direction). The guide recesses F6163a are curved to a shape roughly equivalent to the outer shape of a ball, so that the ball guided (thrown, discharged) by the guide portion F6163 is restricted from being displaced in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F-B).

As a result, it is possible to prevent a ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 from being guided (thrown, flowing out) into the upper passage F6114, and to prevent a ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 from passing in front of the vertical wall portion F6113 (in the direction of the arrow F).

The fixing portion F6164 is a portion for fixing (disposing) the first passage member F6160 to the rear member F6150 (side plate F6152), and a pair of fixing holes F6164a are drilled in the plate thickness direction in the fixing portion F6164. The fixing holes F6164a are formed so that the protrusions F6152a of the side plate F6152 can be inserted therethrough, and are formed as elongated holes extending in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This makes it possible to change the position of the first passage member F6160 relative to the passage member F6110 (lower passage F6112) in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

As a result, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a1 formed in one of the first passage members F6160 can be guided (thrown, flow out) to the upper passage F6114 arranged on the side of the one of the first passage members F6160, and a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 formed in one of the first passage members F6160 can pass in front of the vertical wall portion F6113 (in the direction of the arrow F) and move (flow down, roll) in the lower passage F6112 toward the other first passage member F6160 (passing in front of the vertical wall portion F6113 (in the direction of the arrow F)).

The sorting means F6170 is operated by the weight of the balls to change the direction of movement of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110, and includes a support member F6171, a first shaft F6172 supported by the support member F6171, a pair of displacement members F6173 journaled on the first shaft F6172, a pair of displacement passage members F6174 engaged with the displacement member F6173, a pair of connecting members F6175 connecting the displacement passage member F6174 and the displacement member F6173, a pair of weight support members F6176 arranged on the connecting member F6175, a pair of weights F6177 arranged on the weight support member F6176, and a pair of second shafts F6178 journaling the connecting member F6175.

The displacement member F6173, the displacement passage member F6174, the connecting member F6175, the weight support member F6176, the weight F6177 and the second shaft F6178 are each arranged linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in FIG. 1691) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1691) of the game board F6013.

The displacement member F6173 and the displacement passage member F6174 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the connecting member F6175. In this embodiment, the weight support member F6176 is fixed (disposed) to the connecting member F6175, and the weight F6177 is disposed (supported) on the weight support member F6176, so that the displacement member F6173, the displacement passage member F6174, the connecting member F6175, the weight support member F6176, and the weight F6177 are integrated (formed as one unit).

The support member F6171 is made of a plate-like body, and a pair of bent portions F6171a that are bent toward the front side (arrow F direction) are formed on both ends of the support member F6171 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). An insertion hole is drilled in the plate thickness direction in the bent portion F6171a, and the first shaft F6172 is inserted into the insertion hole, thereby supporting the first shaft F6172 on the support member F6171.

A notch F6171b is formed in the lower end of the support member F6171, cutting out the upper part (in the direction of the arrow U). The weight support portion F6176b abuts against the notch F6171b, thereby restricting the displacement of the displacement member F6173 (displacement passage member F6174).

By disposing the first shaft F6172, a pair of displacement members F6173, and a pair of connecting members F6175 in the space partitioned by the support member F6171 and the pair of bent portions F6171a, the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires is suppressed.

The first shaft F6172 is for displaceably engaging (supporting) the pair of displacement members F6173, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. The first shaft F6172 has notches formed at positions on both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the pair of bent portions F6171a of the support member F6171, and metal ring-shaped C-rings (not shown) are fitted into the notches. This allows the first shaft F6172 to be supported by the support member F6171 so that it cannot be removed.

The displacement member F6173 is intended to change the direction of movement of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110, and includes a main body portion F6173a formed of a plate-shaped body, a contact portion F6173b protruding from the main body portion F6173a toward the front side (arrow F direction), and a supported portion F6173c and an engagement portion F6173d protruding from the main body portion F6173a toward the back side (arrow B direction).

The displacement member F6173 is colored. This allows the player to easily visually recognize that the displacement member F6173 has been displaced. Here, the pair of displacement members F6173 are colored in different colors. This allows the player to easily visually recognize that one or the other of the pair of displacement members F6173 has been displaced. Note that the pair of displacement members F6173 may be colored the same color.

The main body portion F6173a is made of a plate-like body and is disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the rear plate F6151 of the rear member F6150. This makes it possible to prevent the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 from coming into contact with the main body portion F6173a.

Note that although the outer shape of the main body portion F6173a differs between one and the other of the pair of displacement members F6173, the outer shape of the main body portion F6173a does not affect the function of the displacement member F6173, so they will be described using the same reference numerals.

The abutment portion F6173b is formed to be inclined downward toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and is disposed approximately parallel to the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110. The outer shape of the abutment portion F6173b is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner circumferential surface of the notch F6114b of the upper passage F6114, and the abutment portion F6173b is disposed inside the notch F6114b.

The contact portion F6173b is made of a plate-like body and is disposed substantially parallel to the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 and substantially flush with it. The lower surface of the contact portion F6173b in the inclination direction, in other words the surface facing the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, is curved to form a curved surface F6173b1 that is concave toward the upward inclination direction (the direction in which the ball moving on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 approaches).

Details will be described later, but the abutment portion F6173b is disposed at a position a predetermined distance from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110, and when displaced to a position where it can abut against a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, the ball's movement (flowing down, rolling) direction is changed to the front side (arrow F direction) by abutting against the curved surface F6173b1. This causes the ball to be sorted (guided) from the upper passage F6114 to the fifth passage member F6120.

The curved surface F6173b1 may be formed so as to be inclined upward (in the direction in which the ball moving on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 approaches) as it approaches the front side (the direction of the arrow F).

The supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d are each formed of a plate-like body, and the supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d each have an insertion hole drilled in the plate thickness direction. By inserting the first shaft F6172 into these insertion holes, the displacement member F6173 is supported so that it can be displaced left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-R) on the first shaft F6172.

The supported portion F6173c is disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the abutting portion F6173b. This reduces the moment generated in the supported portion F6173c when the ball abuts against the abutting portion F6173b, and prevents damage to the supported portion F6173c.

In addition, by supporting the displacement member F6173 at two points, the supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d, with respect to the first shaft F6172, it is easier to prevent damage to the supported portion F6173c or the engaging portion F6173d due to the impact when the ball abuts against the abutment portion F6173b, compared to when the displacement member F6173 is supported at one point with respect to the first shaft F6172.

The supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d are disposed at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it easier to suppress changes in the posture of the displacement member F6173 when a ball abuts against the abutment portion F6173b.

The engaging portion F6173d has a bent portion F6173d1 formed by bending the end of the engaging portion F6173d on the rear side (arrow B direction) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The bent portion F6173d1 has an insertion hole F6173d2 drilled in the plate thickness direction. The insertion hole F6173d2 is formed so that the engaged portion F6175b1 of the connecting member F6175 can be inserted therethrough, and is formed as an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). This engages the displacement member F6173 and the displacement passage member F6174, and the engaged portion F6175b1 is engaged with the insertion hole F6173d2 so that it can be displaced in the vertical direction.

The displacement passage member F6174 is for distributing (guiding) balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 to the fourth passage section F6132 of the sixth passage member F6130, and is provided with a passage section F6174a, an outer wall section F6174b erected from the edges on both ends of the passage section F6174a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a front wall section F6174c erected from the edge on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the passage section F6174a, an inner wall section F6174d erected from the edge on the left-right center side of the passage section F6174a, and a connecting section F6174e erected from the edge on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the passage section F6174a.

The passage portion F6174a is composed of a plate-like body extending in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is disposed so as to incline downward toward the center in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R). The passage portion F6174a is formed with a protrusion F6174a1 that protrudes from the upper surface of the passage portion F6174a.

Protrusion F6174a1 is composed of a straight section extending in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and a bent section that is bent from the front end of the straight section toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), with the top surface of the straight section sloping downward as it approaches the front side (arrow F direction), and the top surface of the bent section sloping downward as it approaches the center in the left-right direction.

The straight portion of the protrusion F6174a1 is disposed at a distance smaller than the radius of the ball from the outer wall portion F6174b and the inner wall portion F6174d. The bent portion of the protrusion F6174a1 is disposed at a distance smaller than the radius of the ball from the front end of the front wall portion F6174c and the inner wall portion F6174d. As a result, the ball sorted into the displacement passage member F6174 can roll on the upper surface of the protrusion F6174a1, and is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fourth passage portion F6132 of the sixth passage member F6130 by utilizing the ball's own weight.

The protruding height of the outer wall portion F6174b and the front wall portion F6174c is formed to be greater than the radius of the ball. This prevents the ball diverted to the displacement passage member F6174 from climbing over the outer wall portion F6174b and the front wall portion F6174c and falling between the base plate 60 and the rear plate F6151 of the rear member F6150. In addition, the protruding height of the front wall portion F6174c is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the ball. This makes it easier for the player to see the ball diverted to the displacement passage member F6174.

In addition, the outer wall portion F6174b and the inner wall portion F6174d are respectively formed with protrusions F6174b1 and F6174d1 that protrude toward the protrusion F6174a1 side of the passage portion F6174a (the center side of the passage portion F6174a in the left-right direction). The protrusions F6174b1 and F6174d1 are formed in a tapered shape whose width dimension in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) decreases toward the protruding tip. In addition, the protrusion F6174b1 is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion F6174d1.

When a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of protrusion F6174a1 comes into contact with protrusions F6174b1 and F6174d1, the speed at which the ball moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) can be reduced. This increases the time it takes for a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to pass through the displacement passage member F6174.

In addition, by abutting against the protrusion F6174b1, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the protrusion F6174a1 can be displaced in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the center. This makes it easier for the ball abutting against the protrusion F6174b1 to abut against the protrusion F6174d1.

The connecting portion F6174e is a portion where a tapping screw is screwed in order to fasten and fix the displacement passage member F6174 and the connecting member F6175. By fixing the displacement passage member F6174 to the connecting member F6175 and engaging the connecting member F6175 with the displacement member F6173, the displacement member F6173 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement passage member F6174.

The connecting member F6175 is for linking the displacement member F6173 with the displacement of the displacement passage member F6174, and includes a supported shaft portion F6175a, a first connecting portion F6175b protruding upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the outer circumferential surface of the supported shaft portion F6175a, and a second connecting portion F6175c protruding from the outer circumferential surface of the supported shaft portion F6175a toward both ends in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R).

The supported shaft portion F6175a is formed in a cylindrical shape and is disposed with the central axis of the supported shaft portion F6175a aligned along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B). In addition, an insertion hole is drilled in the supported shaft portion F6175a along the central axis of the supported shaft portion F6175a, and the second shaft F6178 is inserted into the insertion hole, thereby supporting the connecting member F6175 on the second shaft F6178.

The first connecting portion F6175b is disposed between the first axis F6172 and the bent portion F6173d1 of the displacement member F6173 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). An engaged portion F6175b1 that protrudes toward the rear side (arrow B direction) is formed at the upper end of the first connecting portion F6175b, and the engaged portion F6175b1 is inserted into the insertion hole F6173d2 of the displacement member F6173, thereby engaging the displacement member F6173 and the displacement passage member F6174.

In this embodiment, the first connecting portion F6175b is rotationally displaced around the second shaft F6178 as the axis of rotation, whereas the displacement member F6173 is supported on the first shaft F6172 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Therefore, the first connecting portion F6175b (engaged portion F6175b1) displaces the displacement member F6173 in the left-right direction while being displaced relative to the displacement member F6173 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction).

As described above, the insertion hole F6173d2 of the displacement member F6173 is formed as a long hole extending in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D). In detail, when the engaged portion F6175b1 is inserted into the insertion hole F6173d2, the upper and lower ends of the insertion hole F6173d2 and the engaged portion F6175b1 are not able to come into contact with each other.

As a result, when the sorting means F6170 is in operation, the engaged portion F6175b1 comes into contact with the side surface (inner surface extending in the vertical direction) of the insertion hole F6173d2, displacing the displacement member F6173 in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R). On the other hand, because the upper and lower ends of the insertion hole F6173d2 cannot come into contact with the engaged portion F6175b1, it is possible to prevent the displacement member F6173 from being displaced in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D).

The bent portion F6173d1 of the displacement member F6173 is bent from the end on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the engagement portion F6173d toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the first connecting portion F6175b is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the bent portion F6173d1. Therefore, of the gap formed between the bent portion F6173d1 and the first connecting portion F6175b, both ends in the left-right direction are blocked by the engagement portion F6173d.

Here, if the gap formed between the bent portion F6173d1 and the first connecting portion F6175b is exposed, there is a risk that a foreign object such as a wire may be trapped in the gap, thereby suppressing the displacement of the first connecting portion F6175b or the displacement member F6173. In contrast, in this embodiment, the engagement portion F6173d shields at least both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the gap formed between the first connecting portion F6175b and the bent portion F6173d1, making it easier to suppress the trapping of a foreign object such as a wire.

The second connecting portion F6175c is a portion for connecting the supported portion F6175a and the displacement passage member F6174, and is disposed on the supported portion F6175a on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connecting portion F6175b. A notch is formed on the upper surface of the second connecting portion F6175c toward the downward side (arrow D direction side), thereby preventing the second connecting portion F6175c and the weight support member F6176 from coming into contact.

The weight support member F6176 is for supporting the weight F6177 and includes an extension portion F6176a and a weight support portion F6176b formed at the tip of the extension portion F6176a.

The extension portion F6176a is composed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and one end (base end) of the extension portion F6176a is fastened and fixed to the first connecting portion F6175b of the connecting member F6175 by a tapping screw or the like. The extension direction of the extension portion F6176a is opposite to the extension direction of the second connecting portion F6175c of the connecting member F6175, that is, while the second connecting portion F6175c extends from the supported portion F6175a toward both ends in the left-right direction, the extension portion F6176a extends from the first connecting portion F6175b of the connecting member F6175 toward the center in the left-right direction.

One end (base end) of the extension portion F6176a is disposed on one side of the game board F6013 with respect to the center in the width direction of the game board F6013 (left and right direction in FIG. 1691), and the other end (tip) of the extension portion F6176a is disposed on the other side of the game board F6013 with respect to the center in the width direction of the game board F6013. In other words, the other end (tip) of the extension portion F6176a is disposed on the opposite side of the one end (base end) of the extension portion F6176a with respect to the center in the width direction of the game board F6013.

For example, one end (base end) of the extension portion F6176a that is fastened and fixed to the first connecting portion F6175b of the connecting member F6175 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is arranged to the left of the center in the width direction of the game board F6013 (left-right direction in Figure 1691), and the other end (tip) of the extension portion F6176a is arranged to the right of the center in the width direction of the game board F6013 (arrow R direction side).

Here, the weight support member F6176 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is fixed (disposed) to the front of the connecting member F6175, and the weight support member F6176 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is fixed (disposed) to the back of the connecting member F6175. This makes it possible to prevent the pair of weight support members F6176 from coming into contact even when a pair of connecting members F6175 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The weight support portion F6176b is formed in a cylindrical shape that is recessed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and the inner circumferential surface of the weight support portion F6176b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the weight F6177. The weight F6177 is enclosed within the inner circumferential surface of the weight support portion F6176b, so that the weight F6177 is disposed (supported) on the weight support portion F6176b.

In addition, since the weight support portion F6176b is recessed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), the weight F6177 can be inserted and removed even when the distribution means F6170 is disposed (assembled) on the back member F6150.

The weight F6177 is used to adjust the position of the center of gravity and is formed into a cylindrical shape from a metal material. By arranging the weight F6177 in the weight support portion F6176b, the center of gravity of the entirety of the displacement member F6173, displacement passage member F6174, connecting member F6175, weight support member F6176 and weight F6177 (hereinafter referred to as the "movable portion of the distribution means F6170") formed as one unit is located toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the second axis F6178.

The second shaft F6178 is for supporting (rotatably engaging) the connecting member F6175, and is formed into a cylindrical shape from a metal material. The second shaft F6178 is disposed in an orientation along the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B), and the second shaft F6178 is inserted into an insertion hole drilled in the supported portion F6175a of the connecting member F6175. This allows the connecting member F6175 to be rotatable around the second shaft F6178 as the rotation axis.

When the connecting member F6175 and the displacement member F6173 are engaged, the displacement member F6173 is configured to be displaceable along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first axis F6172 in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member F6175.

Next, the operation of the sorting means F6170 will be described with reference to Fig. 1702 and Fig. 1703. Fig. 1702(a) and Fig. 1703(a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame F6086b taken along line MDCCIIa-MDCCIIa in Fig. 1701(c), and Fig. 1702(b) and Fig. 1703(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame F6086b.

Note that the rear panel F6151 of the rear member F6150 is omitted in Fig. 1702(b) and Fig. 1703(b). Fig. 1702 illustrates the lower frame F6086b before the movable part of the sorting means F6170 operates, and Fig. 1703 illustrates the lower frame F6086b after the movable part of the sorting means F6170 operates. The state before the movable part of the sorting means F6170 operates is defined as the pre-operation state, and the state after the movable part of the sorting means F6170 operates is defined as the post-operation state.

As shown in FIG. 1702, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the inner wall portion F6174d of the displacement passage member F6174 abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F6143 of the intermediate passage member F6140, thereby restricting the operation (displacement) of the displacement passage member F6174, and the abutment portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 is disposed in a position flush with the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110.

This prevents the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 from abutting against the curved surface F6173b1 of the abutment portion F6173b. In addition, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 is able to move (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the abutment portion F6173b and abut against the abutment portion F6154 of the back member F6150.

When the abutment portion F6173b is formed flush with the top surface of the upper passage F6114, the abutment portion F6173b is considered to be part of the upper passage F6114. By making the abutment portion F6173b part of the upper passage F6114 in this way, for example, it is possible to omit an insert member that is formed to be able to be inserted into the notch F6114b to allow the ball to move (flow down, roll), and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Here, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the abutment portion F6173b may be disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the rear member F6150, and the abutment portion F6173b may be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). In this case, the dimension of the sorting means F6170 in the front-rear direction may increase, and the lower frame F6086b may become larger.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the contact portion F6173b is formed flush with the top surface of the upper passage F6114, so the dimensions of the sorting means F6170 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) can be reduced. In addition, the space in the center of the upper passage F6114 in the left-to-right direction (arrow L-R direction) can be effectively utilized, and the lower frame F6086b can be made smaller.

In addition, in the pre-operation state, the center of gravity of the movable part of the sorting means F6170 is located closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the second axis F6178. As a result, gravity acts in a direction that rotates (displaces) the displacement passage member F6174 upward (arrow U direction), maintaining contact between the inner wall portion F6174d of the displacement passage member F6174 and the inner surface of the through hole F6143 of the intermediate passage member F6140. As a result, the lower frame F6086b is maintained in the pre-operation state.

Next, the movement of the lower frame F6086b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state will be described. As the ball is guided (thrown, flows down) into the displacement passage member F6174, the center of gravity of the movable part of the sorting means F6170 to which the ball has been added is positioned on both ends of the second axis F6178 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

As a result, gravity acts on the movable part of the sorting means F6170 in a direction in which the displacement passage member F6174 rotates (displaces) downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the weight support part F6176b of the weight support member F6176 rotates (displaces) upward (in the direction of arrow U).

As a result, the displacement member F6173 is displaced toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) along the first axis F6172, and the abutment portion F6173b is displaced to a position a predetermined distance away from the top surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110, and is positioned at a position where it can abut against a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114. The predetermined distance is set to be slightly smaller than the diameter of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from getting caught between the top surface of the upper passage F6114 and the abutment portion F6173b.

The weight support portion F6176b also contacts the protruding plate F6155 of the back member F6150 and the support member F6171, thereby restricting the movement (displacement) of the movable portion of the sorting means F6170 and positioning (maintaining) the lower frame F6086b in the post-operation state.

As described above, the weight support member F6176 of the distribution means F6170 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is fixed (disposed) on the front side of the connecting member F6175, while the weight support member F6176 of the distribution means F6170 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is fixed (disposed) on the back side of the connecting member F6175. Therefore, the weight support portion F6176b of the weight support member F6176 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is arranged in a position that does not abut the protruding plate F6155 of the back member F6150.

As a result, of the movable parts of the sorting means F6170, the weight support member F6176 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) abuts against the protruding plate F6155, and the weight support member F6176 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) abuts against the inner surface of the notch F6171b of the support member F6171. Therefore, there is a risk that the amount of displacement of the movable parts of the sorting means F6170 will differ between the left side and the right side.

In response to this, by forming a notch F6171b in the support member F6171, the distance between the protruding plate F6155 and the notch F6171b and the pair of weight support portions F6176b in the pre-operation state can be made the same. This makes it possible to make the amount of operation (displacement) the same on the left and right sides of the movable portion of the sorting means F6170.

In addition, when the movable part of the sorting means F6170 is in operation, the engaged part F6175b1 of the connecting member F6175 is displaced from the center to both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) across the upper side of the second axis F6178 (arrow U direction). As a result, when the engaged part F6175b1 is located closer to the left-right center than the second axis F6178, the engaged part F6175b1 is displaced upward, and when the engaged part F6175b1 is located at both ends in the left-right direction than the second axis F6178, the engaged part F6175b1 is displaced downward (arrow D direction).

As a result, the vertical dimension (direction of arrows U-D) of the elongated insertion hole F6173d2 can be reduced, and the engagement portion F6173d (bent portion F6173d1) can be made small. As a result, the design freedom of the sorting means F6170 can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the abutment portion F6173b is formed flush with the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, so that the amount of displacement of the abutment portion F6173b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state can be reduced, and the time required for the operation from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state can be shortened.

For example, in a configuration in which the contact portion F6173b is displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B), the amount of displacement of the contact portion F6173b is set to be greater than the diameter of the sphere. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of displacement of the contact portion F6173b, and shorten the time required for the movement from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state.

For example, in a configuration in which the abutment portion F6173b is disposed at a distance greater than the diameter of the sphere from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, the displacement amount of the abutment portion F6173b is set to be greater than the radius of the sphere. In such a configuration, the movement of the lower frame F6086b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state may cause the sphere to become caught between the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 and the abutment portion F6173b.

As shown in FIG. 1703, in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the displacement member F6173 is displaced toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the abutment portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 is positioned so that it can abut against a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110.

The abutment portion F6173b is disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) the abutment portion F6154 of the rear member F6150. As a result, even if the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 is such that it cannot abut against the abutment portion F6154 of the rear member F6150, the ball will abut against the curved surface F6173b1 of the abutment portion F6173b and be diverted from the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).

When the lower frame F6086b is in the open state, the displacement member F6173 is maintained in a displaced state. This makes it easier for the player to visually confirm the open state of the lower frame F6086b.

In this way, by having the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the top surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 come into contact with the curved surface F6173b1 of the abutment portion F6173b, it is possible to easily guide (throw, flow down) the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the top surface of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) (making it easier to win at the first winning hole 64). This causes the lower frame F6086b to enter the post-operation state; in other words, it is possible to make the player aware of the presence or absence of a ball moving through the displacement passage member F6174, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the contact portion F6173b is positioned closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the outflow surface F6114a, in other words, at the position where the ball rises on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. This causes the speed of the ball rising on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 to gradually decrease, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the movement of the ball (flowing down, rolling) and the contact between the ball and the contact portion F6173b.

The movement of the lower frame F6086b from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state is achieved by the ball flowing out of the displacement passage member F6174 (the weight of the ball no longer acts on the displacement passage member F6174). The action of force (gravity) from the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b to the pre-operation state is the same as for maintaining the pre-operation state, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the weight of the ball can be used to move the lower frame F6086b from a pre-operation state to a post-operation state, or from a post-operation state to a pre-operation state, eliminating the need for a drive device and reducing manufacturing costs.

Returning from FIG. 1692 to FIG. 1701, we will now explain the balls flowing down the lower frame F6086b. Of the balls flowing down the play area, those guided through the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1691) arranged in the upper frame F6086a flow (enter) into the upstream end of the groove portion F6161 (first passage FRt61) of the first passage member F6160.

The ball that flows (enters) into the upstream end of the groove portion F6161 of the first passage member F6160 is guided (thrown, discharged) to the recessed portion F6162, and is guided (thrown, discharged) from the insertion hole F6162a1 or the insertion hole F6162a2 drilled in the bottom surface of the recessed portion F6162 to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110.

The ball that is guided (thrown, flowed out) into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center of the lower passage F6112 in the left-right direction along the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62).

The ball that is diverted (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on one side (for example, the right side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) passes in front of the vertical wall portion F6113 (in the direction of the arrow F) and is guided (thrown, discharged) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) of the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62).

Here, as the ball moves (flows down, rolls) through the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) and comes into contact with the vertical wall portion F6113, frictional forces act on the ball, causing the ball's speed (kinetic energy) to decrease.

As a result, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the ball is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side), and the ball ascending the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) cannot abut against the abutment portion F6154 of the back member F6150. Therefore, after the ball reciprocates between the first inclined portion F6114c and the second inclined portion F6114d of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63), it is guided (thrown, flowed down) from the outflow surface F6114a formed in the upper passage F6114 on the other side to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62).

In addition, the ball that is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) has its speed (kinetic energy) reduced by passing through the outflow surface F6114a, which is formed as a concave surface.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball moving (rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) from coming into contact with the contact portion F6154. In this way, the outflow surface F6114a can serve both to guide (send, flow down) the ball that has been sorted (guided) into the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) and to reduce the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (rolling) in the upper passage F6114, thereby reducing product costs.

The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the outflow surface F6114a to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is guided (thrown, flowing down) from the outflow surface F6112b to the first winning opening 64, or flows from the bottom of the undulations F6112a into the inlet FOPf62 of the vertical wall portion F6113 and is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the second recess F6142 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) of the intermediate passage member F6140.

Next, we will explain what happens when the ball is guided (thrown, flows down) to the second recess F6142 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) located on the other side (left side).

The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the second recess F6142 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) arranged on the other side (left side) is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the displacement passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) of the sorting means F6170 arranged on the other side. This causes the lower frame F6086b to move from a pre-operation state to a post-operation state. In detail, the displacement member F6173 on the other side is moved to a post-operation state in a displaced state.

The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the displacement passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) arranged on the other side (left side) is then guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fourth passage section F6132 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) of the sixth passage member F6130 arranged on the other side. This causes the lower frame F6086b to move from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state. The ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fourth passage section F6132 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) arranged on the other side passes through the outlet FOPout62 of the passage member F6110 and flows out into the play area.

In addition, after the lower frame F6086b is in operation, specifically, when the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) through the displacement passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) of the sorting means F6170 arranged on the other side (left side), the second ball (hereinafter referred to as the "second ball") that follows the ball (hereinafter referred to as the "first ball") moving through the displacement passage member F6174 arranged on the other side, and the second ball that has flowed into the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on one side (right side) is guided (sent, flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side.

Now, referring to FIG. 1704, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls ascending (moving toward the center in the left-right direction) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b will be described. FIG. 1704 is a partial top view of the lower frame F6086b. Note that FIG. 1704 omits the illustration of the sorting means F6170, excluding the abutment portion F6173b formed on the displacement member F6173.

As shown in FIG. 1704(a), in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the abutment portion F6173b is disposed in a position capable of abutting against the ball CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63).

In detail, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the abutment portion F6173b is disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) the position where the ball CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c reaches the uppermost side (in the direction of arrow U).

Next, as shown in FIG. 1704(b), the ball CB61 ascends (moves toward the center in the left-right direction) on the first inclined portion F6114c, and by abutting against the curved surface F6173b1 of the abutment portion F6173b, it ascends on the first inclined portion F6114c and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) along the curved surface F6173b1. In other words, a velocity component toward the front side is imparted to the ball CB61.

Here, when ball CB61 reaches the uppermost position (the direction of arrow U), the speed of the ball becomes 0 (or the speed becomes small) and the momentum of the ball is weak. Therefore, if abutment portion F6173b is disposed at the position where ball CB61 reaches the uppermost position, there is a risk that ball CB61 will not be guided toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) even if it abuts against abutment portion F6173b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the abutment portion F6173b is disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) the position where the ball CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c reaches its uppermost position (in the direction of arrow U), so the momentum of the ball CB61 is strong (speed is ensured). This makes it easier to guide the ball CB61 abutting the abutment portion F6173b toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) by utilizing the momentum of the ball CB61.

Next, as the ball CB61 is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction), as shown in FIG. 1704 (c), the ball CB61 is distributed from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65), and by abutting against the wall portion F6122, movement (flowing down, rolling) toward the front side (arrow F direction) is restricted.

Here, when the lower frame F6086b moves from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state, the contact portion F6173b is displaced from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) toward the center in the left-right direction. Also, the ball CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c (moving toward the contact portion F6173b) moves toward the center and upward in the left-right direction (arrow U direction). Therefore, the displacement direction of the contact portion F6173b when the lower frame F6086b moves from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state includes a movement direction component of the ball CB61 moving along the first inclined portion F6114c toward the contact portion F6173b.

As a result, the abutment portion F6173b is displaced in the direction of movement of the ball CB61 (toward the center in the left-right direction) by the abutment between the ball CB61 and the abutment portion F6173b (moving back toward the position of the abutment portion F6173b in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b), absorbing the impact. As a result, damage to the abutment portion F6173b can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 1704(d), the ball CB61 moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the fifth passage portion F6121, and flows from the outflow surface F6121a into the inlet FOPf61. Alternatively, it flows into the insertion hole F6121b and is guided (thrown, flows out) into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 (see FIG. 1692).

Returning to FIG. 1701 from FIG. 1692, the explanation will be given. In this way, the lower frame F6086b is operated to the post-operation state (the first ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the displacement passage member F6174), so that the second ball and the ball following the second ball can be distributed (guided) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65). As described above, the ball distributed (guided) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) is likely to enter the first winning hole 64, and therefore, in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the player can expect that the second ball and the ball following the second ball will be distributed (guided) to the lower frame F6086b, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member F6173 due to the contact of the ball can be made to coincide with at least a portion of the direction of displacement of the displacement member F6173 from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state (toward the center in the left-right direction). As a result, when the ball contacts the displacement member F6173, the impact force applied to the displacement member F6173 can be reduced by displacing the displacement member F6173 toward the pre-operation state, and damage to the displacement member F6173 can be suppressed.

In addition, after the lower frame F6086b is in the operated state, the ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on one side (right side) and is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) abuts against the abutment portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 with the ball's speed (kinetic energy) reduced. Therefore, the impact force applied to the abutment portion F6173b when the ball abuts can be reduced, and damage to the displacement member F6173 can be suppressed.

Next, the movement (flow, roll) of the ball that is diverted (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the other side (left side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) will be described. The ball that is diverted (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the other side does not pass in front of the vertical wall portion F6113 (in the direction of the arrow F), but is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side.

In this case, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) has a smaller movement distance than the ball diverted (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1. In addition, the ball does not abut against the vertical wall portion F6113. As a result, the frictional force acting on the ball is small, and the decrease in the ball's speed (kinetic energy) is suppressed.

As a result, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, a ball guided (thrown, flowed out) to one side (left side) of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) can abut against the curved surface F6154a formed on the abutment portion F6154 of the back member F6150.

Now, referring to FIG. 1705, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls ascending (moving toward the center in the left-right direction) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b will be described. FIG. 1705 is a partial top view of the lower frame F6086b. Note that the sorting means F6170 is omitted from the illustration in FIG. 1705.

As shown in FIG. 1705(a), the ball CB62 that is distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 has a greater speed (kinetic energy) than the ball that is distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1, and abuts against the curved surface F6173b1 formed on the abutment portion F6173b.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 1705(b), the ball CB62 ascends (moves toward the center in the left-right direction) on the first inclined portion F6114c, and at the same time, moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) along the curved surface F6173b1. In other words, a velocity component toward the front side is imparted to the ball CB62.

Next, as shown in FIG. 1705(c), the ball CB62 is distributed from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65), and by abutting against the wall portion F6122, movement (flowing down, rolling) toward the front side (arrow F direction) is restricted.

The curved surface F6173b1 is formed so that the tip on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the curved surface F6173b1 protrudes toward both ends in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R), and therefore abuts against the wall portion F6122 at both ends in the left-right direction, compared to when the abutting portion F6173b abuts against the curved surface F6173b1 (see FIG. 1704).

The fifth passage section F6121 is formed with a downward incline toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B), so that as the ball CB62 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center in the left-right direction (the direction of arrows L-R), it also moves (flows down, rolls) toward the rear side (wall section F6113).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 1705(d), ball CB62 is more likely to flow into the inlet FOPf61 from the outlet surface F6121a than into the insertion hole F6121b, compared to a ball that is diverted (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1.

Returning to FIG. 1701 from FIG. 1692, the explanation will be given. In the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the movement (flow, roll) of the ball that is diverted (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the other side (left side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is the same as the case where the ball is diverted (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on one side (right side) described above to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62), so the explanation will be omitted.

The speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side is different between the ball that passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (right side) and the ball that passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on the other side (left side). In detail, the ball that passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 on the other side has a higher speed (kinetic energy) than the ball that passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on one side.

As a result, in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the amount of displacement of the displacement member F6173 toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) due to the impact of the ball abutting against the abutment portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 can be made to differ between a ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (right side) and a ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on the other side (left side).

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball can abut against the abutment portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 during the movement from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state. This makes it possible to vary the distribution position of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) to the fifth passage portion F6121 depending on the degree of displacement of the displacement member F6173 (displacement passage member F6174). In other words, the abutment position with respect to the wall portion F6122 can be varied.

This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the ball that has been sorted (guided) into the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) will flow from the outlet surface F6121a of the fifth passage member F6120 into the inlet FOPf61, or will flow into the insertion hole F6121b and be guided (thrown, discharged) into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110, thereby increasing the interest.

The ball that flows into the inlet FOPf61 is guided (thrown, flows down) to the first recess F6141 of the intermediate passage member F6140 and the sixth passage portion F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130, and after flowing out from the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F6110, it enters the first winning port 64.

The movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the insertion hole F6121b of the fifth passage member F6120 to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is the same as the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) from the outlet surface F6114a of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) described above to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62), so a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, multiple balls (two or more) (for example, the first ball and the ball preceding the first ball) are continuously guided (thrown, flowed down) into the displacement passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64). In other words, as the weight of the ball acting on the displacement passage member F6174 increases, the amount of displacement of the displacement member F6173 toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) due to the abutment of the abutment portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 with the ball can be reduced.

As a result, for example, when the amount of displacement of the displacement member F6173 toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) due to contact with the ball is small, the ball can be more easily distributed (guided) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) at both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). As a result, it is easier for the ball to flow from the outflow surface F6121a into the inflow opening FOPf61 than into the insertion hole F6121b.

Therefore, the player can expect that multiple balls will be guided (thrown, flow down) to the displacement passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) in succession; in other words, the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 will be guided (thrown, flow down) in a continuous state to the displacement passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64), which can increase the player's interest.

In addition, the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) are arranged side by side in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This makes it difficult for the player to visually determine whether the ball diverted from the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (the right side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 passes through the front side (arrow F direction) of the vertical wall portion F6113.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see whether the ball that is diverted from the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (right side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on one side, or is guided (thrown, flowing down) through the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F6113 to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side). As a result, the player can focus on the ball that is diverted to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62), which increases the fun of the game.

Next, the lower frame F7086b in the 99th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1706 to 1708. In the lower frame F7086b in the 99th embodiment, second displacement passages F7180 (seventh passage FRt77) are arranged on both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the displacement passage member F7174 in order to maintain the post-operation state longer than in the 98th embodiment. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1706(a) and 1707(a) are cross-sectional views of the lower frame F7086b in the 99th embodiment, and Figures 1706(b) and 1707(b) are rear views of the lower frame F7086b. FIG. 1708 is a schematic diagram of the distribution of balls to the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180, and FIG. 1708(a), FIG. 1708(c), and FIG. 1708(e) are schematic top views of the lower frame F7086b, and FIG. 1708(b), FIG. 1708(d), and FIG. 1708(f) are schematic front views of the lower frame F7086b as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXLb in FIG. 1708(a), arrow CCCXLd in FIG. 1708(c), and arrow CCCXLf in FIG. 1708(e).

FIG. 1706(a) and FIG. 1707(a) correspond to a cross section taken at the center of the second displacement passage F7180 in the fore-and-aft direction (arrow F-B direction) along a plane perpendicular to the fore-and-aft direction. FIG. 1706 illustrates the state before the sorting means F7170 and the second displacement passage F7180 operate, while FIG. 1707 illustrates the state after the sorting means F7170 and the second displacement passage F7180 disposed on the left side (arrow L direction) operate. In addition, the rear panel F6151 of the rear member F6150 is omitted from the illustration in FIG. 1706(b) and FIG. 1707(b).

...

In addition, FIG. 1708 illustrates a state in which two balls spaced a predetermined distance apart are distributed to the second recess F6142 (fourth passage FRt64) of the intermediate passage member F6140. FIG. 1708(a) and FIG. 1708(b) show the state in which the two balls move (flow down, roll) on the rolling surface F6142a of the second recess F6142, and FIG. 1708(c) and FIG. 1708(d) show the state in which the balls are distributed to the fourth passage FRt64. Among the balls thus received, the leading ball (hereinafter referred to as the "leading ball CB71") is shown in a state in which it has been sorted into the displacement passage member F7174 of the sorting means F7170, while Figures 1708(e) and 1708(f) respectively show a state in which the ball following the leading ball CB71 (hereinafter referred to as the "trailing ball CB72") has been sorted into the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180.

As shown in Figures 1706 and 1707, in the sorting means F7170 of the 99th embodiment, in addition to the sorting means F6170 of the 98th embodiment, a pair of second displacement passages F7180 are arranged at both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the displacement passage member F7174.

The second displacement passage F7180 is for operating (displacing) the displacement member F6173 by the displacement (rotation) of the second displacement passage F7180, and includes a second displacement passage member F7181, a shaft F7182 that supports the second displacement passage member F7181, and a weight F7183 disposed on the second displacement passage member F7181.

The second displacement passage member F7181 includes a second displacement passage section F7181a which serves as a passage for the ball, a support section F7181b having one end fixed (disposed) to the second displacement passage section F7181a, a supported section F7181c which is fixed (disposed) to the other end of the support section F7181b, and a weight support section F7181d which is fixed (disposed) to the supported section F7181c.

The second displacement passage portion F7181a is a portion through which the balls diverted (guided) from the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 move (flow down, roll), and includes a rolling surface F7181a1 and a wall portion F7181a2 erected from the edge of the rolling surface F7181a1. The seventh passage FRt77 is formed by the space partitioned by the rolling surface F7181a1 and the wall portion F7181a2.

The rolling surface F7181a1 is composed of a plate-like body that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from above, with both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) bent toward the front side (arrow F direction). In addition, the extension length of the rolling surface F7181a1 (seventh passage FRt77) is formed to be approximately three times the extension length of the displacement passage member F7174 (see FIG. 1696).

The wall portion F7181a2 is a portion for regulating the displacement of a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) into the second displacement passage portion F7181a, and is erected from the edge excluding the end portion (upstream end of the second displacement passage portion F7181a) on the displacement passage member F7174 side (center side in the left-right direction) and the end portion (downstream end of the second displacement passage portion F7181a) on the front side of the portion bent toward the front side (arrow F direction).

By not forming the wall portion F7181a2 at the upstream end of the rolling surface F7181a1, the ball is guided (thrown, flows down) from the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 to the second displacement passage portion F7181a, and by not forming the wall portion F7181a2 at the downstream end of the rolling surface F7181a1, the ball flows out from the second displacement passage portion F7181a into the play area.

In addition, a through hole (not shown) is drilled in the base plate 60 at a position that is in front of the downstream end of the rolling surface F7181a1 (in the direction of the arrow F), and the ball is discharged into the play area by passing through this through hole.

The protruding height of the wall portion F7181a2 is formed to be greater than the radius of the ball. This prevents the ball that is diverted to the second displacement passage portion F7181a from climbing over the wall portion F7181a2 and falling between the base plate 60 and the back member F6150.

The support portion F7181b is a portion for connecting the second displacement passage portion F7181a and the axially supported portion F7181c, and is formed of a rod-shaped body. The axially supported portion F7181c is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the shaft F7182 is inserted into the inner periphery of the axially supported portion F7181c. This makes the second displacement passage member F7181 rotatable around the shaft F7182 (axially supported portion F7181c) as the rotation axis.

The weight support portion F7181d is a portion for supporting the weight F7183. One end (base end) of the weight support portion F7181d is fixed (disposed) to the axially supported portion F7181c, and the other end (tip) of the weight support portion F7181d has a recess formed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) for fixing (disposing) the weight F7183.

The shaft F7182 is for rotatably engaging (supporting) the second displacement passage member F7181, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. The shaft F7182 is disposed in an orientation along the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B), and is supported by the rear plate F6151 and lower plate F6153 of the rear member F6150. This makes the second displacement passage member F7181 rotatable around the shaft F7182 as the rotation axis.

The weight F7183 is used to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the second displacement passage F7180, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. By arranging the weight F7183 on the weight support portion F7181d, the center of gravity of the second displacement passage F7180 is positioned closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the axis F7182.

The displacement passage member F7174 of the sorting means F7170 is formed in the same way as the displacement passage member F6174 in the 98th embodiment, except for the protruding height of the outer wall portion F7174b, which is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. As a result, when a ball is guided (thrown, flows down) into the displacement passage member F7174, the uppermost part of the ball in the vertical direction (arrow U direction) (arrow D direction) is lower than the protruding tip of the outer wall portion F7174b (arrow D direction).

The protruding height of the outer wall portion F7174b is formed to be a dimension that, in the post-operation state, is lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the upper surface of the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 to be distributed to the second displacement passage portion F7181a.

Next, the operation of the second displacement passage F7180 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1706, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F7086b, the weight support portion F7181d of the second displacement passage F7180 and the weight support member F6176 of the sorting means F7170 are in contact with each other or are disposed at a predetermined distance (e.g., 1 mm) apart. In addition, the upper end of the wall portion F7181a2 of the second displacement passage F7180 comes into contact with the protrusion F7152b protruding from the side plate F7152 of the back member F7150, thereby restricting the operation (displacement) of the second displacement passage F7180.

In addition, in the pre-operation state, the centers of gravity of the pair of second displacement passages F7180 are each located closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the axis F7182. As a result, gravity acts on the second displacement passage F7180 in a direction that rotates (displaces) the second displacement passage portion F7181a upward (arrow U direction), maintaining contact between the upper end of the wall portion F7181a2 of the second displacement passage F7180 and the protrusion F7152b protruding from the side plate F7152 of the back member F7150. As a result, the lower frame F7086b is maintained in the pre-operation state.

Next, we will explain the movement of the lower frame F7086b from the pre-movement state to the post-movement state. As the ball is guided (thrown, flows down) into the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180, the center of gravity of the entire second displacement passage F7180 including the ball is positioned on both ends of the axis F7182 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

As a result, gravity acts on the second displacement passage F7180 in a direction in which the second displacement passage portion F7181a rotates (displaces) downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the weight support portion F7181d rotates (displaces) upward (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, the weight support member F6176 of the sorting means F7170 rotates (displaces) upward, and the displacement member F6173 is displaced toward both ends in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows L-R) along the first axis F6172 (the lower frame F7086b is operated to the post-operation state).

Now, referring to FIG. 1708, the distribution of balls to the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1708(a) and FIG. 1708(b), in a state (pre-operation state) in which the leading ball CB71 and the trailing ball CB72 move (flow down, roll) on the rolling surface F6142a, at least a part of the outer wall portion F7174b of the displacement passage member F7174 is disposed at a position that is above (in the direction of the arrow U) the upper surface of the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180. This allows the leading ball CB71 to abut against the outer wall portion F7174b, and prevents it from being guided from the rolling surface F6142a to the second displacement passage portion F7181a (not being guided to the displacement passage member F7174).

Next, as shown in Figures 1708(c) and 1708(d), the leading ball CB71 is guided (thrown, flows down) into the displacement passage member F7174, and the weight of the leading ball CB71 causes the displacement passage member F7174 to rotate (displace) downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the lower frame F7086b is operated to the post-operation state (see Figure 1707).

Here, the leading ball CB71 abuts against the protrusion F6174b1 of the displacement passage member F7174, slowing down the speed at which the leading ball CB71 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction), and can also move (flows down, roll) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it easier to distribute the trailing ball CB72 to the second displacement passage F7180, as shown in Figures 1708(e) and 1708(f).

In detail, the leading ball CB71 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), i.e., toward the trailing ball CB72, thereby reducing the distance between the leading ball CB71 and the trailing ball CB72 in the left-right direction. Also, by reducing the speed at which the leading ball CB71 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction), the leading ball CB71 and the trailing ball CB72 can be prevented from separating from each other in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction).

Compared to when the protrusion F6174b1 is not formed, this allows the following ball CB72 to abut (fall) against the upper part (arrow U direction side) of the preceding ball CB71. As a result, the amount of displacement (fall, flow) of the following ball CB72 downward (arrow D direction side) can be reduced, making it easier to guide (throw, flow) the following ball CB72 to the upper surface of the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180.

Returning to FIG. 1707 from FIG. 1706, the explanation will be given. The extension length of the rolling surface F7181a1 (seventh passage FRt77) is formed to be longer than the extension length of the displacement passage member F7174 (see FIG. 1696), so the time required for the ball to move (flow down, roll) through the second displacement passage portion F7181a (seventh passage FRt77) of the second displacement passage F7180 can be made longer than the time required for the ball to move (flow down, roll) through the displacement passage member F7174. As a result, the time required for the ball to be sorted into the second displacement passage portion F7181a (seventh passage FRt77) and reach the post-operation state can be made longer, compared to when the ball is sorted into the displacement passage member F7174.

Therefore, the player can expect that two balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 will be sorted into the second recess F6142 (fourth passage FRt64) of the intermediate passage member F6140 with a gap smaller than a predetermined gap between them, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1709, the lower frame F8086b in the 100th embodiment will be described. In the lower frame F8086b in the 100th embodiment, the ease with which a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 can enter the first winning hole 64 differs between the pre-operation state and the post-operation state. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1709 is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame F8086b in the 100th embodiment, with Figure 1709(a) showing the lower frame F8086b in a pre-operation state, and Figure 1709(b) showing the lower frame F8086b in a post-operation state in which the contact portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) has been displaced.

As shown in FIG. 1709, the insertion hole F8121b of the fifth passage member F8120 in the 100th embodiment is drilled at positions on both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) compared to the insertion hole F6121b in the 98th embodiment.

In detail, in the post-operation state, the hole is drilled on an extension of the movement direction of the ball that is guided (thrown, flowed down) into the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by contacting the contact portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170. This makes it easier to move (flow down, roll) the ball that is guided (thrown, flowed down) into the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by contacting the contact portion F6173b in the post-operation state toward the insertion hole F8121b.

The fifth passage member F8120 also has an upright portion F8121b1 disposed along the edge of the insertion hole F8121b. The upright portion F8121b1 is formed to a height that allows a ball traveling at a speed equal to or greater than a predetermined value to overcome it.

In addition, the front end of the curved surface F8154a formed on the abutment portion F8154 of the back member F8150 is formed at a position toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) compared to the front end of the curved surface F6154a in the 98th embodiment. This makes it easier for a ball guided (thrown, flowing down) into the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by abutting against the abutment portion F8154 in the pre-operation state to move (flow down, roll) toward the pair of insertion holes F8121b. In other words, it makes it harder for the ball to move (flow down, roll) toward the pair of insertion holes F8121b.

In the lower frame F8086b of this embodiment, in the post-operation state, for example, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) and is distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 does not pass in front of the vertical wall portion F6113, but is guided (thrown, flowing out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) formed on the left side, and is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) with the decrease in speed (kinetic energy) suppressed.

As described above, the insertion hole F8121b is drilled on an extension of the movement direction of the ball that abuts against the abutment portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170, so that the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) tends to move (flow down, roll) toward the insertion hole F8121b and is unlikely to abut against the wall portion F8122 of the fifth passage member F8120.

As a result, in the post-operation state, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on one side (the left side in the above example) and is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by abutting against the abutment portion F6173b is likely to pass over the upright portion F8121b1 and pass through the insertion hole F8121b (it is difficult to enter the first winning opening 64).

Meanwhile, in the post-operation state, the ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) and is sorted into the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) with a reduced speed (kinetic energy).

Therefore, the ball that is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by abutting against the abutment portion F6173b is less likely to overcome the upright portion F8121b1 (less likely to pass through the insertion hole F8121b) and is more likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) from the outflow surface F6121a to the first recess F6141 (sixth passage FRt66) of the intermediate passage member F6140 (more likely to enter the first winning hole 64).

In addition, in the pre-operation state, the abutment portion F8154 of the back member F8150 is disposed above the abutment portion F6173b (in the direction of the arrow U), so that the ball that abuts against the abutment portion F8154 is guided (thrown, flows down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) with a reduced speed (kinetic energy).

In addition, a ball that is guided (thrown, flows down) into the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by abutting against the abutment portion F8154 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the gap between the pair of insertion holes F8121b, and is likely to abut against the wall portion F6122 of the fifth passage member F8120 and is unlikely to be guided into the insertion hole F8121b.

Therefore, the ball that is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by abutting against the abutment portion F8154 is less likely to overcome the upright portion F8121b1 (less likely to pass through the insertion hole F8121b) and is more likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) from the outflow surface F6121a to the first recess F6141 (sixth passage FRt66) of the intermediate passage member F6140 (more likely to enter the first winning hole 64).

As described above, in the pre-operation state, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of a pair of first passage members F6160 is more likely to be guided (thrown, flow down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) and enter the first winning hole 64 than a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a1.

On the other hand, in a post-operation state, for example, in which the abutment portion F6173b of the distribution means F6170 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is displaced, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the left side is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65), and then passes through the insertion hole F8121b and is likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 (difficult to enter the first winning opening 64).

In this way, by changing the ease with which a ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) can enter the first winning port 64 between the pre-operation state and the post-operation state, the player can be made to expect that the ball will pass through the insertion hole F6162a2 in the pre-operation state, and that the ball will not pass through the insertion hole F6162a2 on the side where the abutment portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170 has been displaced (the left side in the above example), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is guided (thrown, flowing down) from the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65). In this case, the ball is less likely to climb over the erected portion F8121b1 (hard to pass through the insertion hole F8121b), and is more likely to be guided (thrown, flowing down) from the outflow surface F6121a to the first recess F6141 (sixth passage FRt66) of the middle passage member F6140 (easy to enter the first winning hole 64).

Therefore, in the post-operation state, a ball that is diverted (guided) to the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) located on the right side (arrow R direction side) is more likely to enter the first winning hole 64 than a ball that is diverted (guided) to the first passage member F6160 located on the left side (arrow L direction side). This makes it possible to use the post-operation state as a trigger to make the player intend for the ball to be diverted (guided) to the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) located on the right side, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame F9086b in the 101st embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1710 and 1711. In the lower frame F9086b in the 101st embodiment, the ease with which a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) can enter the first winning hole 64 differs between the pre-operation state and the post-operation state. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1710(a) and 1711(a) are partially enlarged top views of the lower frame F9086b in the 101st embodiment, and Figures 1710(b) and 1711(b) are partially enlarged front views of the lower frame F9086b.

FIG. 1710 shows the lower frame F9086b in a pre-operation state, and FIG. 1711 shows the lower frame F9086b in a post-operation state in which the contact portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170 disposed on the left side (the direction of the arrow L) is displaced. Also, in FIG. 1710(b) and FIG. 1711(b), the connecting hole F9144 formed in the intermediate passage member F9140 is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 1710 and 1711, a connecting hole F9144 is drilled in the intermediate passage member F9140 in the 101st embodiment, penetrating the upper surface of the intermediate passage member F9140 and the first recess F6141. In addition, an insertion hole F9116 is drilled in the plate thickness direction in the passage member F9110 above the connecting hole F9144 (the arrow U direction side).

In addition, an abutment portion F6154 is provided on the back member F9150 on the right side (arrow R direction side), while no abutment portion F6154 is provided on the back member F9150 on the left side (arrow L direction side).

Next, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) will be described. The ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) is distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F9110, and is guided (thrown, out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) without passing in front of the vertical wall portion F6113. Therefore, the ball distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) moves (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) toward the upper side (arrow U direction) with the decrease in speed (kinetic energy) suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 1710, in the pre-operation state, a ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) and moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) toward the upper side (arrow U direction side) reaches the insertion hole F9116 of the passage member F9110 and is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the first recess F6141 (sixth passage FRt66) via the connecting hole F9144 of the intermediate passage member F9140.

This makes it easier for a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) located on the left side (arrow L direction) to enter the first winning hole 64 (in this embodiment, it is easier to ensure that the ball enters the first winning hole 64).

Meanwhile, in the pre-operation state, the ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) and moves (flows down, rolls) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) toward the upper side (arrow U direction side) comes into contact with the abutment portion F6154 of the back member F9150 and is guided (thrown, flows down) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).

A pair of insertion holes F6121b are drilled in the fifth passage section F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120. Therefore, compared with a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side), a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is less likely to enter the first winning hole 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 1711, in the post-operation state, a ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) and moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) abuts against the abutment portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170 and is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65). In other words, the abutment portion F6173b prevents the ball from being guided (thrown, flowing down) to the insertion hole F9116 of the passage member F9110. Therefore, it is more difficult for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 than in the pre-operation state.

In addition, in the post-operation state, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) abuts against the abutment portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170 and is guided (thrown, flows down) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65). Therefore, the ease with which the ball is entered into the first winning port 64 is almost the same in the pre-operation state and the post-operation state.

In this way, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) can almost certainly enter the first winning hole 64 in the pre-operation state, whereas in the post-operation state, it is less likely to enter the first winning hole 64 compared to the pre-operation state.

Therefore, the player can expect that the ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the left side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) will move (flow down, roll) upward through the upper passage F6114 in the pre-operation state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the lower frame F10086b in the 102nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1712. In the lower frame F10086b in the 102nd embodiment, the abutment portion F6154 of the lower frame F6086b in the 98th embodiment is not provided. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1712(a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame F10086b in the 102nd embodiment, and Figure 1712(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame F10086b.

In addition, FIG. 1712 illustrates the lower frame F10086b in the post-operation state. Also, in FIG. 1712(a), the illustration of the distribution means is omitted except for the abutment portion F10173b of the displacement member F10173, and in FIG. 1712(b), the illustration of the fifth passage member F6120 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1712, the abutment portion F10173b in the 102nd embodiment is curved to have a second curved surface F10173b2 on the upward direction (arrow J direction in FIG. 1712(b), hereafter referred to as the "upward direction") side of the inclination of the upper passage F6114. The second curved surface F10173b2 is recessed toward the downward direction (arrow K direction in FIG. 1712(b), hereafter referred to as the "downward direction") side of the inclination of the upper passage F6114.

Next, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls that are sorted (guided) into the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) of the passage member F6110 will be described. In the pre-operation state of the lower frame F10086b, the balls that move (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) in the upward direction (arrow J direction) pass through the guide surface F10173b3 that is formed flush with the upper passage F6114 at the abutment portion F10173b, and are guided in the upward direction beyond the abutment portion F10173b.

The ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) in the upward direction (arrow J direction) gradually slows down, stops briefly, and then moves (flowing down, rolling) in the downward direction (arrow K direction). The ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) in the downward direction (arrow K direction) passes through the guide surface F10173b3 of the abutment portion F10173b again and is guided further downward than the abutment portion F10173b.

On the other hand, if the lower frame F10086b is operated to the post-operation state during the period from when the ball passes through the guide surface F10173b3 of the abutment portion F10173b and is guided in the upward direction (arrow J direction) beyond the abutment portion F10173b until the ball moves (flows down, rolls) along the guide surface F10173b3 of the abutment portion F10173b in the downward direction (arrow K direction), the abutment portion F10173b is displaced toward a position where it can come into contact with the ball, so that the ball moving (flows down, rolls) in the downward direction (arrow K direction) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) comes into contact with the second curved surface F10173b2.

By contacting the second curved surface F10173b2, the ball is displaced toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) along the curved surface of the second curved surface F10173b2 and is distributed to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).

Here, if the second curved surface F10173b2 is not formed at the abutment portion F10173b, for example, if the upward direction side (arrow J direction) of the upper passage F6114 is formed as a flat surface along the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), the ball may abut against the flat surface of the abutment portion F10173b, restricting the movement of the ball (flowing down, rolling).

In this case, by operating the lower frame F10086b to the pre-operation state, the ball moves (flows down, rolls) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) in the downward direction (arrow K direction), and there is a risk that the ball will not be distributed (not guided) to the fifth passage section F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).

Therefore, even if the lower frame F10086b is operated to the post-operation state during the period from when the ball passes through the guide surface F10173b3 of the abutment portion F10173b and is guided in the upward direction (arrow J direction) from the abutment portion F10173b until the ball moves (flows down, rolls) along the guide surface F10173bb3 of the abutment portion F10173b in the downward direction (arrow K direction), the ball will not be distributed (not guided) to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65), which may reduce interest in the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a second curved surface F10173b2 is formed at the abutment portion F10173b, so that the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) toward the downward direction (arrow K direction) can be diverted to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65), preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Next, the lower frame F11086b in the 103rd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1713 and 1714. In the above 98th embodiment, the displacement member F6173 is operated (displaced) by utilizing the weight of a ball in the displacement passage member F6174. In the 103rd embodiment, in addition to utilizing the weight of the ball, the displacement member F6173 can also be operated (displaced) by the driving force of an actuator (solenoid F11002). Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1713 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame F11086b in the 103rd embodiment, and Figure 1714 is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame F11086b. The lower frame F11086b in the 103rd embodiment further includes a sensor F11001 and a solenoid F11002 compared to the lower frame F6086b in the 98th embodiment.

In FIG. 1714, the first region F11003a and the second region F11003b are illustrated as hatched regions. The first region F1103a is a region (position) where a ball can flow into the insertion hole F6162a2, and is defined as a circular range concentric with the insertion hole F6162a2. The second region F1103b is a region (position) where a ball can flow into the insertion hole F6162a1, and is defined as a circular range concentric with the insertion hole F6162a1. In this embodiment, the first region F1103a and the second region F1103b are the same size.

As shown in Figures 1713 and 1714, the sensor F1101 is a sensor (a proximity switch that detects a ball passing through the inner circumference of the through hole) for detecting a ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 (i.e., the hole formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the pair of insertion holes F6162a drilled in the recess F6162), and is disposed at the downstream end of the guide recess F6163a connected to the insertion hole F6162a2.

The sensors F1101 are disposed in each of the insertion holes F6162a2 in the pair of first passage members F6160 (the left side (arrow L direction) and the right side (arrow R direction) when viewed from the front). The sensors F1101 are disposed in a manner that does not affect the ball's guiding direction by the guide recess F6163a. For example, a ball that passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 in the first passage member F6160 on the left side (arrow L direction) when viewed from the front is guided (thrown, discharged) from the lower passage F6112 to the upper passage F6114 on the left side (arrow L direction) when viewed from the front, rather than to the front side of the vertical wall portion F6113.

The solenoid F11002 is an actuator for independently displacing a pair of displacement members F6173, and is disposed (fixed, attached) in a pair facing each other on the back surface of the back plate F6151 (with the plunger F11002b connected to the displacement member F6173).

The solenoid F11002 comprises a case F11002a that houses a coil, a fixed core and a return spring, and a plunger F11002b that can be moved in and out (linearly displaced) relative to the case F11002a, and is disposed in such a position that the direction of linear displacement of the plunger F11002b is parallel to the first axis F6172.

The solenoid F11002 is configured as a pull (suction) solenoid. That is, when not energized, the plunger F11002b is in a protruding state due to the elastic force of the return spring, and the displacement member F6173 is disposed in the initial position (a position where the ball cannot abut against the abutment portion F6173b). When energized, the plunger F11002b is pulled (suctioned), and the displacement member F6173 is displaced (slid) along the first axis F6172, and the displacement member F6173 is disposed in the protruding position (a position where the displacement member F6173 protrudes from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 and where the ball can abut against the abutment portion F6173b).

The elastic force of the return spring is set to a magnitude that allows the displacement member F6173 to move (displace) even when the weight of a ball acts on the displacement passage member F6174. However, the displacement member F6173 may be configured so that the weight of the ball, even when acting on the displacement passage member F6174, does not allow the displacement member F6173 to move (displace). Alternatively, the displacement passage member F6174 and the mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement passage member F6174 (displacement due to the weight of the ball) to the displacement member F6173 may be omitted (i.e., the displacement member F6173 may be displaced only by the drive of the solenoid F11002).

In this embodiment, the solenoid F11002 is energized for a predetermined period of time when the sensor F11001 detects the passage of a ball. Specifically, when the sensor F110001 detects the passage of a ball, the solenoid F11002 is energized immediately upon detection, and this energization continues for five seconds.

The time from when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor F110001 until the solenoid F11002 starts to be energized can be arbitrary, and energization can be started after a predetermined time has elapsed (standby) after the passage of the ball is detected. In other words, the timing at which energization starts can be delayed from the detection of the passage of the ball. This makes the player look forward to the effect of the displacement member F6173 (contact portion F6173b) on the subsequent ball (the manner in which the subsequent ball is made to flow more easily into the inlet FOPf61), which can increase the excitement of the game. In this case, multiple types of delay times can be prepared and the delay time can be set randomly from among the multiple types.

The time for which the solenoid F11002 is energized can be any length of time, and may be shorter or longer than the time exemplified above (5 seconds).

The solenoid F11002 may be energized intermittently. For example, an example is one in which energization for a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and de-energization for a second time (e.g., 1 second) are repeated for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds). In this case, the first time and the second time may be either longer or the same length. The first time and/or the second time may be different lengths each time.

One set is defined as a repeat of energizing (for example, 0.5 seconds) and deenergizing (for example, 1 second) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), and such a set may be performed multiple times (for example, 15 times).

In addition, if the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor F11001 and a lottery with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1 in 199) results in a winning entry, the solenoid F11002 may be energized.

The conditions for energizing the solenoid F11002 may be a combination of the above aspects.

As in the 98th embodiment, the ball that flows into the lower passage F6112 from the insertion hole F6162a2 is more likely to flow into the inlet FOPf61 than the ball that flows into the lower passage F6112 from the insertion hole F6162a1. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention (be aware) to which of the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 the ball that flows into the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) will flow into the lower passage F6112, that is, the position where the ball will flow down (the first area F11003a or the second area F11003b). As a result, the player can look forward to the ball flowing down from the first area F1103a (insertion hole F6162a2), which can increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the sensor F11001 detects the passage of a ball, the solenoid F11002 is energized for a predetermined period of time, which causes the displacement member F6173 to be displaced so that the ball can easily flow into the inlet FOPf61. Therefore, even if the ball flows down from the second area F1103b (insertion hole F6162a1), the player can have hope that the ball will flow into the inlet FOPf61. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In this case, the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) is formed so that the ball can move between the first region F11003a and the second region F11003b, allowing the player to pay close attention to the movement of the ball in the recess F6162 and see whether the ball will flow down from the first region F11003a or the second region F11003b. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

The path of the ball from the insertion holes F6162a1, F6162a2 to the displacement member F6173 includes a first path along which the ball flows down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (first region F11003a) and moves to the displacement member F6173, and a second path along which the ball flows down from the insertion hole F6162a1 (second region F11003b) and moves to the displacement member F6173, and is formed so that the ball can move between the first and second paths.

This makes it possible to ensure, within a given space, a greater variety of paths by which a ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (first region F11003a) can reach the displacement member F6173, and a greater variety of paths by which a ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a1 (second region F11003b) can reach the displacement member F6173. As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of ball movement, making the game more interesting.

The first path is, for example, a path along which a ball flows down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (first region F11003a) in the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) on the left side as viewed from the front (arrow L direction), moves through the region on the back panel F6151 side of the lower passage F6112 on the left side as viewed from the front (arrow L direction), and the upper passage F6114 on the left side as viewed from the front (arrow L direction), in that order, to the displacement member F6173 on the left side as viewed from the front (arrow L direction).

On the other hand, the second path is a path along which a ball that flows down from the insertion hole F6162a1 (second region F11003b) in the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) on the left side (arrow L direction) as viewed from the front moves through the region on the front plate F6111 side of the lower passage F6112 on the left side (arrow L direction) as viewed from the front, the lower passage F6112 in the center as viewed from the front (region between the front plate F6111 and the vertical wall portion F6113), the region on the front plate F6111 side of the lower passage F6112 on the right side (arrow R direction) as viewed from the front, the region on the back plate F6151 side of the lower passage F6112 on the right side (arrow R direction) as viewed from the front, and the upper passage F6114 on the right side (arrow R direction) as viewed from the front, in that order, to the displacement member F6173 on the right side (arrow R direction) as viewed from the front.

When the ball flows down from the insertion holes F6162a1, F6162a2, the flow direction, flow speed, and rotation direction of the ball change depending on the entry state (entry angle, entry speed, etc.) into the insertion holes F6162a1, F6162a2 and the contact state with the inner surface of the insertion holes F6162a1, F6162a2 at the time of entry (contact angle, contact strength, etc.). Therefore, it is effective that the ball is formed to be movable between the first path and the second path, and various forms can be formed, such as a ball that flows down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (insertion hole F6162a1) moving to the second path halfway through the first path (to the first path halfway through the second path). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

The lower passage F6112 and the upper passage F6114 may be formed with one or more protrusions (contact means) that protrude from the ball's rolling surface and are formed so that the ball can come into contact with them. In this case, the ball moving along the first path and/or the second path comes into contact with the protrusions (contact means), thereby changing the direction of the ball's movement and making it easier to move the ball between the first path and the second path. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

The protrusion (contact means) may be provided at any position. For example, the protrusion (contact means) may be arranged in a manner such that a plurality of protrusions are arranged in a row at a predetermined interval (a distance that allows the ball to pass between them) along the boundary between the first path and the second path (for example, on the lower passage F6112 on the left side (arrow L direction) when viewed from the front, separating the path along which the ball that flows down from the insertion hole F6162a2 heads toward the upper passage F6114 from the path along which the ball that flows down from the insertion hole F6162a1 heads toward the lower passage F6112 (the area between the front plate F6111 and the vertical wall portion F6113) in the center when viewed from the front, and a virtual line parallel to the front plate F6111 and the back plate F6151).

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1715 to 1724, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") H10 will be described as the 104th embodiment.

Figure 1715 is a front view of the pachinko machine H10 in the 104th embodiment, Figure 1716 is a rear view of the pachinko machine H10, Figure 1717 is a front oblique view of the pachinko machine H10 showing the inner frame H12 in an open (deployed) state relative to the outer frame H11, and Figure 1718 is a front oblique view of the pachinko machine H10 showing the back pack unit H94 in an open (deployed) state relative to the inner frame H12 with the inner frame H12 open relative to the outer frame H11. 1719 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine H10 with the inner frame H12 closed relative to the outer frame H11 and the front frame H14 open (deployed), FIG. 1720 is a front view of the pachinko machine H10 with the front frame H14 removed, FIG. 1721 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board H13 and the inner frame H12, FIG. 1722 is an exploded oblique front view of the front frame H14, and FIG. 1723 is an exploded oblique rear view of the front frame H14. In FIG. 1720, the rear opening H172 for sending the ball from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the ball launch unit H112a is shown by a two-dot chain line.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (back) side for the pachinko machine H10 in the state shown in FIG. 1715. Also, in the pachinko machine H10 in the state shown in FIG. 1715, the top side will be referred to as the upper (top) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (bottom) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see FIG. 1715, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine H10, respectively.

In addition, unless otherwise specified, the player playing the pachinko machine H10 will be described as being positioned in front of the pachinko machine H10 (in the direction of arrow F) and facing the rear side of the pachinko machine H10 (in the direction of arrow B) (facing the front side of the pachinko machine H10).

As shown in Figures 1715 to 1723, the pachinko machine H10 mainly comprises an outer frame H11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, an inner frame H12 formed in roughly the same outer shape as the outer frame H11 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame H11, and a front frame H14 formed in roughly the same outer shape as the inner frame H12 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the inner frame H12.

Metal hinges H18 are attached to the outer frame H11 at two locations, top and bottom (arrows U-D direction) on the left side (arrow L direction) when viewed from the front (see Figure 1715), to support the inner frame H12. The inner frame H12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed toward the front side (arrow F direction) together with the front frame H14, with the side where the hinge H18 is installed serving as the axis for opening and closing.

The pachinko machine H10 is installed in the amusement center by attaching and fixing the outer frame H11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame H11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine H10, and the amusement center may be configured with the outer frame H11 or a component having the same inner shape as the outer frame H11 and having the inner frame H12 support structure (hinge H18, etc.) and locking structure of the outer frame H11.

The outer frame H11 is formed into a frame shape by combining an upper plate H11a arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side), a lower plate H11b arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side), and a left plate H11c and a right plate H11d that vertically connect the left and right ends (arrow L-R directions) of the upper plate H11a and the lower plate H11b.

The outer frame H11 is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of a metal material such as aluminum or a resin material such as plastic, or may be formed by combining members (upper plate H11a, lower plate H11b, left plate H11c, right plate H11d) made of wood, metal, or resin materials.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hinge H18 is attached to the left side (arrow L direction) of the outer frame H11 when viewed from the front, and the right side (arrow R direction) of the inner frame H12 when viewed from the front can be opened and closed toward the front (arrow F direction) relative to the outer frame H11; however, the hinge H18 may be attached to the right side of the outer frame H11 when viewed from the front, and the left side of the inner frame H12 when viewed from the front can be opened and closed toward the front relative to the outer frame H11, or the hinge H18 may be attached to both the left and right (arrow L-R directions) of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the outer frame H11 when viewed from the front, and the upper side (arrow U direction) of the inner frame H12 when viewed from the front can be opened and closed toward the front relative to the outer frame H11.

The inner frame H12 is formed mainly by a frame forming unit H12a formed in a rectangular shape with an outline almost identical to that of the outer frame H11, and a back pack unit H94 rotatably supported on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the frame forming unit H12a, and the back pack unit H94 is rotatable backwards with the left side (arrow L direction side) as viewed from the front as the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side (arrow R direction side) as the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip end side) (see Figure 1718).

The inner frame H12 is formed into a roughly box-like shape by the frame forming unit H12a and the back pack unit H94, with the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) open, and a game board H13 (see Figures 1720 and 1721) with numerous nails and winning holes H63, H64, etc. is arranged inside the inner frame H12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of this game board H13.

The frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 is provided with a left end support part H12a1 for supporting the left end of the game board H13 at the top and bottom corners of the inner surface on the left side (arrow L side), and a board surface support device H12a2 for supporting the right end of the game board H13 at the top and bottom corners of the inner surface on the right side (arrow R side). The game board H13 is fixed to the inside of the inner frame H12 by inserting the left end of the base plate H60 into the left end support part H12a1 and pushing it into the back side (arrow B side) of the inner frame H12, and then operating the board surface support device H12a2 so that the board surface support device H12a2 engages with the front of the base plate H60 (supports the front of the base plate H60).

The frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 is mainly formed with a ball launching unit H112a (see FIG. 1720) that launches balls into the front area (play area) of the game board H13, and a dish passage forming member H160 (see FIG. 1720) that sends balls to the front frame H14 (upper and lower dish units H15).

Furthermore, metal hinges H19 are attached to the frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side (arrow L direction) when viewed from the front, to support the front frame H14, and the front frame H14 is supported so that it can be opened and closed toward the front side (arrow F direction) with the side where the hinge H19 is provided as the axis of opening and closing (see Figure 1719). The locks on the inner frame H12 and the front frame H14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole H21 of the cylinder lock H20 arranged on the frame forming unit H12a and performing a specified operation.

The ball launching unit H112a is formed to be capable of receiving balls sent one by one at a predetermined timing from the upper tray H17 via the launch position ball sending unit H170, and is mainly equipped with a launch rail H112a1 that extends in the direction of sending the ball to the game board H13 (inner rail H61 and outer rail H62), a rotating body H112a2 that is rotatably supported and formed so that it can rotate and come into contact with the ball sent on the launch rail H112a1, and a drive motor (not shown) for rotating the rotating body H112a2.

The ball is launched (thrown) from the ball launching unit H112a to the upper side (arrow U direction) of the game board H13 by rotating the rotating body H112a2 after the ball is launched onto the launching rail H112a1, and colliding the rotating body H112a2 with the ball that has been launched onto the launching rail H112a1.

In this embodiment, the ball is launched (thrown) from the ball launching unit H112a by the rotating rotor H112a2, but the structure for launching the ball is not limited to a rotating member (rotor H112a2). For example, a structure may be provided that includes a slider that can slide in the direction in which the ball is launched, and a solenoid that slides and displaces the slider, and the ball is launched (thrown) by displacing the slider by exciting the solenoid and colliding with the ball.

The ball launching unit H112a is not limited to being disposed in the inner frame H12, but can also be disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate H60 (on the game board H13) as a performance device for the pachinko machine H10. For example, a ball can be sent from an opening in the center frame H86 or the base plate H60 onto a launch rail H112a1 disposed on the rear side of the base plate H60, and the ball can be launched by the rotating body H112a2 so that it passes the front side of the third pattern display device H81.

As shown in FIG. 1720, the dish passage forming member H160 has a main body side upper dish passage section H161 and a main body side lower dish passage section H162. The main body side upper dish passage section H161 and the main body side lower dish passage section H162 form a curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (from the front-to-back direction to the up-to-down direction) so that the end on the back side (arrow B direction side) can communicate with the through hole penetrating the inner frame H12 in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction), and the end on the front side (arrow F direction side) opens downward (arrow D direction). In this configuration, the balls dispensed from the dispensing device H133 pass through the through hole of the inner frame H12, enter the dish passage forming member H160 from the end on the back side, and are discharged from the end on the front side.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1720, a shutter H163 is provided on the lower part of the dish passage forming member H160 to restrict the outflow of balls from the upper dish passage part H161 on the main body side and the lower dish passage part H162 on the main body side. The shutter H163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position in which the outlet part of both passages is narrowed to block the outflow of balls, and a permitting position in which the outflow of balls is permitted. The shutter H163 is disposed in the permitting position when the front frame H14 is closed relative to the inner frame H12, and is disposed in the blocking position when the front frame H14 is opened relative to the inner frame H12 (the state shown in FIG. 1719). This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front frame H14 is opened while balls are stored in the upper dish passage part H161 on the main body side or the lower dish passage part H162 on the main body side.

The front frame H14 is mainly composed of a main body frame H14d formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape using metal plates, an upper decorative unit H14a arranged on the main body frame H14d and arranged on the front of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the main body frame H14d, a left decorative unit H14b and a right decorative unit H14c extending downward (arrow D direction side) from both the left and right sides (arrow L-R directions) of the upper decorative unit H14a, an upper and lower plate unit H15 covering the front of the lower side of the main body frame H14d, a passage forming unit H140 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the upper and lower plate unit H15 via the main body frame H14d, and a launch position ball throwing unit H170 arranged on the back side of the passage forming unit H140, and is rotatably attached to the inner frame H12.

In addition, as shown in Figures 1722 and 1723, front door mounting brackets H57 and H58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame H14, and these front door mounting brackets H57 and H58 (front door mounting bracket H57 is a cylindrical portion, and front door mounting bracket H58 is a metal plate with an axial hole) engage with the inner frame H12, thereby supporting the front frame H14 rotatably relative to the inner frame H12.

In detail, the front door mounting bracket H57 is supported by a support plate H12e that extends from the front end of the inner frame H12 to the front side (arrow F direction) below the upper hinge H19 of the inner frame H12 and has a fitting recess H12e1 (see FIG. 1721) that is recessed from the tip to the rear side (arrow B direction) with a size that allows the front door mounting bracket H57 to be fitted inside. In addition, the front door mounting bracket H58 is supported by being fitted externally onto a support pin H19a that is a stepped cylinder (a shape in which cylinders of different diameters are connected vertically and vertically, with the upper cylinder having a smaller diameter) that protrudes upward (arrow U direction) from the lower hinge H19 of the inner frame H12.

The front frame H14 also has a window H14e in the area surrounded by the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, the right decorative unit H14c, and the upper and lower tray units H15, and a glass unit H16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front frame H14 (main frame H14d) so as to cover the window H14e (see Figure 1715). Note that the front of the game board H13 of the pachinko machine H10 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine H10 through the glass unit H16 (window H14e).

As shown in Figures 1715 and 1719, the glass unit H16 comprises a pair of front and rear transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b that are larger in outer shape than the window portion H14e and have optical transparency (transparency), and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b. The fixed frame is made of a resin material and has a ring shape that is one size larger than the transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b, and the outer peripheries of the transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b are bonded to the fixed frame, making the glass unit H16 into an integrated insulating glass piece.

The glass unit H16 is formed colorless and transparent using transparent glass H16a and H16b, but is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent using a resin material, and may be formed colored and transparent instead of colorless and transparent as long as the playing area can be seen through the glass unit H16 from the front of the pachinko machine H10.

The two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b may also be arranged with a predetermined gap between them. When the two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b are arranged with a predetermined gap between them, a displaceable displacement means may be arranged between them to enable a performance by the displacement means in front of the game board H13 (in the direction of the arrow F). The displacement means in this case may be, for example, a means for performing a performance in which a plurality of displacement members made of a material such as paper or nylon are blown away by wind sent out from holes formed in the fixed frame, or a means for displacing a displacement member displaceably arranged in the fixed frame between the two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b by the sound lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724). Also, a light emitting means may be provided on a fixed plate that fixes the two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b, and light emitted from the light emitting means may be irradiated onto either the front transparent glass sheet H16a or the rear transparent glass sheet H16b (the side indicated by the arrow B), allowing the player to see the light irradiated onto one of the transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b.

Around the window section H14e in the front frame H14 (upper decorative unit H14a, left decorative unit H14b, right decorative unit H14c), multiple illumination sections H29-H33 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided as shown in FIG. 1715. These illumination sections H29-H33 light up or flash in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached. In addition, the illumination section H30 on the upper side of the window section H14e (the direction of the arrow U) has built-in light-emitting means that light up when a specified error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and light up while prize balls are being paid out.

In addition, the areas of the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right decorative unit H14c other than the areas where the illuminated parts H29 to H33 are arranged are made of a non-transparent resin material that does not transmit the light emitted from the illuminated parts H29 to H33. This makes it easier for players to notice the light emitted by the illuminated parts H29 to H33 (lighting up or blinking).

The areas other than the areas where the illuminated parts H29 to H33 are arranged do not have to be opaque, but may be made of a transparent resin material so that light can be emitted (transmitted) from the entire front frame H14 when the illuminated parts H29 to H33 emit light (light up or blink). Also, the areas around the illuminated parts H29 to H33 may be provided with plated members made of chrome-plated ABS resin to create a dazzling appearance.

On the left side (arrow L direction) and right side (arrow R direction) of the upper decorative unit H14a (on the upper right and upper left sides of the window portion H14e), there is a speaker cover H27 (a thin plate member formed from punching metal) that covers a speaker assembly (audio output device H226 (see Figure 1724)) that outputs sound effects according to the game status, and is configured so that the sound from the speaker can be emitted to the front side (arrow F direction) of the pachinko machine H10 through the speaker cover H27.

Below the window portion H14e (in the direction of arrow B), as shown in FIG. 1715, an upper tray H17 and a lower tray H50 are arranged to bulge toward the front, and an upper/lower tray unit H15 is arranged in which the upper tray H17 and the lower tray H50 are arranged side by side vertically.

The upper tray H17 is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls, loan balls, etc. are discharged onto this upper tray H17. The upper tray H17 also has the function of temporarily storing balls dispensed from the dispensing device H133 (see FIG. 1716) and guiding them to the ball launching unit H112a (see FIG. 1720) while lining them up in a row, and the bottom surface is formed with a downward incline to the right side (arrow R direction) when viewed from the front, and this incline allows the balls inserted into the upper tray H17 to be guided to the launch position ball throwing unit H170. The balls sent from the upper tray H17 to the launch position ball throwing unit H170 are guided one by one to the ball launching unit H112a by the operation of the launch position ball throwing unit H170.

The lower tray H50 is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and has the function of storing balls that are surplus to the upper tray H17. In addition, a ball guide opening H53 that opens in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) and guides the balls to the lower tray H50 is formed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the lower tray H50.

A ball removal lever H52 is provided below (in the direction of arrow D) the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the lower tray H50, and is used to operate when discharging balls stored in the lower tray H50 downward. This ball removal lever H52 is always biased to the right (in the direction of arrow R), and by sliding it to the left (in the direction of arrow L) against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray H50 opens, and the balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever H52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray H50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray H50.

Operation of the ball removal lever H52 is not limited to discharging balls into the coin box, but may also discharge balls into a collection port connected to the island equipment. Also, there is no need to provide multiple locations for storing balls on the upper tray H17 and lower tray H50, and the configuration may have only one storage area, with only the upper tray H17 being eliminated and the lower tray H50 being used.

An operation unit H180 that is manually operated by the player is provided in front (in the direction of arrow F) of the upper tray H17 (ball storage area). The operation unit H180 is an operation device that is used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third pattern display device H81, etc.

A button member H181 is provided on the top side of this operation unit H180. The button member H181 can be pressed downward around an axis extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device H81 (see FIG. 1720) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The operation unit H180 may be provided in another location, such as around the lower tray H50, other than the upper tray H17, or may be provided in multiple locations. The operation method may be a push button switch, or the operation may be configured to allow information to be input using another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

On the right side of the operation unit H180, a ball lending operation unit H40 (see FIG. 1722), a function adjustment operation unit H190, and a ball discharge lever H54 are arranged on the top side of the upper and lower tray unit H15. The ball lending operation unit H40 is provided with a degree display unit H41, a ball lending button H42, and a return button H43. When the ball lending operation unit H40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine H10, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit H41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information.

The ball lending button H42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray H17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. The return button H43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that in pachinko machines in which balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device or the like to the upper tray H17 without going through a card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending operation unit H40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball lending operation unit H40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The function adjustment operation unit H190 includes a decision button H191, and an up button H192, a down button H193, a left button H194, and a right button H195 arranged in four outer positions in a cross shape centered on the decision button H191.

The function adjustment operation unit H190 is an operation unit for changing the volume of the speaker (audio output device H226) arranged in the upper decorative unit H14a, the brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device H81, and the brightness of the electric decoration units H29 to H33 arranged in the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right decorative unit H14c. The player can change the volume and brightness to suit his (the player's) preferences by operating the decision button H191, the up button H192, the down button H193, the left button H194, and the right button H195.

In addition, when changing the volume or brightness, the degree of adjustment of the volume or brightness is displayed as a number or volume on a part of the third pattern display device H81. This allows the player to easily adjust the volume or brightness when starting to play another pachinko machine H10.

The changes made by the function adjustment operation unit H190 are not limited to volume and brightness, but may be able to change the effects displayed on the third pattern display device H81. Also, the adjustment degree of volume and brightness is not limited to being displayed on the third pattern display device H81, and for example, even if it is not displayed on the third pattern display device H81, it may be possible to adjust by making a sound or display after the change (adjustment) at the same time as the operation, or the adjustment degree may be displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device H81.

The ball discharge lever H54 is a lever operated by the player when sending balls stored in the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50, and is arranged in a state where it is biased upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by a biasing means (spring) not shown. The ball discharge lever H54 is configured so that when it is operated (pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow D)), the passage that connects the upper tray H17 to the launched ball sending unit H170 can be switched to a state where it connects from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50 (foul ball passage H145). This allows the balls stored in the upper tray H17 to be discharged to the lower tray H50.

On the right side (the direction of the arrow R) of the lower tray H50, an operating handle H51 that is operated by the player during play is disposed. Inside the operating handle H51, there are a touch sensor H51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit H112a, a launch stop switch H51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle H51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle H51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor H51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is shot into the front of the game board H13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle H51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor H51a and the launch stop switch H51b are turned off.

The passage forming unit H140 is molded from a resin material and has an upper tray passage section H141 on the front door side that leads to the upper tray H17, a lower tray passage section H142 on the front door side that leads to the lower tray H50, and a foul ball passage section H145.

A ball receiving port H143 is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit H140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame H14) which protrudes rearward (in the direction of arrow B) and opens upward. The ball receiving port H143 is partitioned into left and right parts by a partition wall H144, forming a passage entrance for the front door side upper tray passage section H141 and a passage entrance for the front door side lower tray passage section H142 (see Figure 1722).

The passage entrance of the upper tray passage section H141 on the front door side is connected to the upper tray passage section H161 (see FIG. 1720) on the main body side of the inner frame H12, and the passage entrance of the lower tray passage section H142 on the front door side is connected to the lower tray passage section H162 (see FIG. 1720) on the main body side of the inner frame H12. As a result, the ball sent from the payout device H133 is sent to the upper tray H17 or the lower tray H50.

The foul ball passage H145 (see FIG. 1722) is a section that forms a passage for discharging balls that have been launched from the ball launching unit H112a but have not reached the playing area as foul balls into the lower tray H50.

As shown in FIG. 1723, the foul ball passage H145 is provided with a foul ball receiving port H146 that is open on the upper side (the side in the direction of the arrow U). The foul ball received in this foul ball receiving port H146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage H145 (see FIG. 1722) and is then discharged into the lower tray H50. Note that the foul ball passage H145 may be connected to the upper tray H17 instead of the lower tray H50, and the foul ball may be discharged into the upper tray H17.

The foul ball passage H145 is also formed to merge with a ball ejection passage (not shown), which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50 are guided when the player operates the ball ejection lever H54.

The launch position ball sending unit H170 is a unit for sending the balls stored in the upper tray H17 one by one to the ball launch unit H112a. The launch position ball sending unit H170 is mainly formed with a front side opening H171 connected to the opening of the ball sending path of the upper tray H17, a rear side opening H172 that can discharge the balls that flow in from the front side opening H171 from the rear side, a switching means (not shown) that is displaceably arranged on the passage that passes from the front side opening H171 to the rear side opening H172, and a solenoid (not shown) that drives the switching means.

The switching means of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 is configured to be displaceable between a position where it is possible to allow balls to flow from the upper tray H17 to the front side opening H171, and a position where it is not possible to allow balls to flow from the upper tray H17 to the front side opening H171. When displaced to a position where it is not possible to allow balls to flow from the upper tray H17 to the front side opening H171, the balls on the path of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 are allowed to flow from the rear side opening H172 to the ball launching unit H112a (launching rail H112a1). This makes it possible to discharge balls one by one from the rear side opening H172 as the position of the switching means is switched (one round trip displacement).

The rear opening H172 is located on the front side (arrow F direction) above (arrow U direction) the launch rail H112a1 of the ball launch unit H112a (see FIG. 1720). Therefore, balls are sent one by one from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the launch rail H112a1 of the ball launch unit H112a.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1720, the rear opening H172 is formed between both ends of the launch rail H112a1 in the throwing direction of the ball on the launch rail H112a1. Therefore, the ball thrown from the rear opening H172 onto the launch rail H112a1 can roll in both directions (arrow L-R directions) on the launch rail H112a1, but since the launch rail H112a1 is arranged with one side (the side away from the rotating body H112a2) tilted upward (arrow U direction), the ball thrown from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 (the ball before being launched by the rotating body H112a2) is prevented from rolling in the direction away from the rotating body H112a2.

As shown in FIG. 1720, the game board H13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding balls to a base plate H60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rail members H61, H62, a general winning hole H63, a first winning hole H64, a second winning hole H640, a variable winning device H65, a through gate H67, a variable display unit H80, etc., and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame H12.

The base plate H60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side (arrow B side) of the base plate H60 from its front side (arrow F side). The general winning hole H63, the first winning hole H64, the second winning hole H640, and the variable display unit H80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate H60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board H13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate H60 is not limited to being made from a light-transmitting resin material, but may be made from wood made of thin boards glued together, or may be made from a non-transmitting resin material. In these cases, it is preferable to ensure the decorativeness of the base plate H60 by attaching a decorated sticker or the like to the entire front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the base plate H60.

The central front portion of the game board H13 can be seen from the front side (arrow F direction) of the inner frame H12 through a part of the window portion H14e (see FIG. 1715) of the front frame H14. The configuration of the game board H13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 1720.

An outer rail H62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board H13, and an arc-shaped inner rail H61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail H62 is set up on the inside of the outer rail H62. The inner rail H61 and the outer rail H62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board H13, and the game board H13 and the glass unit H16 (see Figure 1715) surround the front and rear (arrows F-B direction), forming a game area in front of the game board H13 where games are played depending on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board H13 and is formed by the two rail members H61, H62 and the resin outer edge member H73 that connects the rails. The two rail members H61 and H62 do not have to be metal plates, but may be formed in a strip shape from a resin material.

The two rail members H61, H62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit H112a to the upper side (arrow U direction) of the game board H13. A return ball prevention member H68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail H61 (upper left of FIG. 1720).

The return ball prevention member H68 is formed from a resin plate member that extends from the inner rail H61 side to the outer rail H62 side, and is rotatable around one end on the inner rail H61 side in a direction that moves the other end away from the outer rail H62. The return ball prevention member H68 also has a weight on one end, which biases the other end in a direction toward the outer rail H62.

This allows the momentum of the ball guided to the upper side of the game board H13 (in the direction of arrow U) to rotate the other end of the return ball prevention member H68 in a direction away from the outer rail H62, and when the ball is guided to a position beyond the return ball prevention member H68 (upper side of the game board H13), the other end of the return ball prevention member H68 can be rotated in a direction approaching the outer rail H62, preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board H13 from returning back into the ball guide passage.

The return ball prevention member H68 does not have to be made of a resin material, and may be made of a metal material. In addition, the other end of the return ball prevention member H68 may be biased toward the outer rail H62 by a magnetic force such as a magnet or a biasing force such as a torsion spring, other than a weight.

A return rubber H69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail H62 (upper right in Fig. 1720) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball, and when a ball is launched with a force greater than a certain level, it hits the return rubber H69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 1720), the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first pattern display devices H37A and H37B display according to each control performed by the main control device H110 (see Fig. 1724), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine H10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole H64 or the second winning hole H640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole H64, the first pattern display device H37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole H640, the first pattern display device H37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices H37A and H37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine H10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while also displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine H10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine H10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot H64 and the second prize slot H640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine H10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R sure jackpot, a 4R sure jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first pattern display devices H37A and H37B not only show whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

The number of rounds in a jackpot is not limited to 15R and 4R, but may be changed to another number of rounds depending on the model of the pachinko machine H10, and may have two or more types of number of rounds. Also, the predetermined number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is not limited to 100 fluctuations, but may be set to, for example, 1 fluctuation or 1000 fluctuations.

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the jackpot has ended, i.e., during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability change), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The high probability state (during a probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described below is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole H640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability change. The time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second symbol is increased, making it easy for a ball to enter the second winning hole H640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine H10 is when the game is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device H640a associated with the second winning port H640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device H640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port H640 than when the electric device H640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port H640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role H640a associated with the second winning slot H640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role H640a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role H640a associated with the second winning slot H640 is opened and the number of times the electric role H640a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role H640a associated with the second winning slot H640 is opened and the number of times the electric role H640a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes H63, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit H80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit H80 is provided with a third pattern display device H81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate H67. In addition, a center frame H86 is arranged in the variable display unit H80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device H81.

The center frame H86 is a member for preventing balls flowing down the play area from flowing down to the third pattern display device H81 side through the central opening of the base plate H60, and is formed to protrude from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate H60. A warp passage (not shown) is formed in part of the center frame H86 to receive balls flowing down the play area and pass them around the third pattern display device H81 and discharge them from the first winning opening H64 side. In this embodiment, the warp passage is configured so that the balls pass on the front side of the base plate H60, but it is also possible to form the warp passage so that the balls pass on the rear side of the base plate H60.

The third pattern display device H81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device H114 (see FIG. 1724), so that, for example, three rows of patterns, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Note that the third pattern display device H81 may be composed of a size other than 9 inches, or may be composed of two or more liquid crystal displays arranged side by side.

Each symbol row of the third symbol display device H81 is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device H81. The third symbol display device H81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices H37A, H37B, while the display of the game status associated with the control of the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1724) is performed by the first symbol display devices H37A, H37B. Note that the third symbol display device H81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and a "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate H67. In the pachinko machine H10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate H67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a "circle" symbol as a static display after the second symbol is displayed as a variable. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a "x" symbol as a static display after the third symbol is displayed as a variable. The second symbol display device may display symbols using a part of the third symbol display device H81, or may display symbols on either the third symbol display device H81 or another display device. In this embodiment, the second symbol display device displays symbols using a part of the third symbol display device H81.

The pachinko machine H10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device H640a attached to the second winning hole H640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device H640a of the second winning slot H640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot H640.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot H640 during a probability bonus or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device H640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a probability bonus or time-saving period than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device H640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate H67 is attached to the game board H13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit H80, and is configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board H13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate H67, a lottery is held to determine whether a second symbol will win. After the lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate H67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices H37A and H37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). In this embodiment, the second pattern reserved lamp is configured to be displayed using a part of the third pattern display device H81, but it may be displayed by lighting a display device other than the third pattern display device H81. For example, four LEDs that light up as the balls pass through the through gate H67 may be arranged below the third pattern display device H81 and displayed by lighting them.

In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for balls passing through the through gate H67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of through gates H67 installed is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. In addition, the installation position of the through gate H67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit H80, but may be below the variable display unit H80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first winning hole H64, into which a ball can enter, is disposed below the variable display unit H80. When a ball enters this first winning hole H64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board H13 turns on, and when the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1724), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole H64 when viewed from the front, there is a second winning hole H640 into which a ball can enter. When a ball enters this second winning hole H640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board H13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1724), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37B.

The first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640 are also each one of the winning holes into which five balls are paid out when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole H640, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole H640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole H640 may be five.

An electric device H640a is attached to the second winning hole H640. This electric device H640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning hole H640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate H67, the electric device H640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning hole H640.

In this embodiment, vane members (electric device H640a) that open and close are provided on both the left and right sides (in the direction of the arrows L and R) of the second winning opening H640, and when the electric device H640a is in the open state, balls can enter the second winning opening H640 from both the left and right sides of the second winning opening H640. However, a wall may be formed that blocks the flow path on one side in the left-right direction, and balls can enter the second winning opening H640 only from the other side. In this case, vane members (electric device H640a) that open and close only are provided on the other side of the second winning opening H640.

The electric device H640a is not limited to a rotating blade member, but may be a sliding device that moves between a position that opens the second winning opening H640 and a position that closes it. For example, the electric device H640a may be a sliding device that slides up and down (in the direction of the arrows U-D) or forward and backward (in the direction of the arrows F-B).

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device H640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device H640a is open is longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot H640 than during normal play.

In the pachinko machine H10 of this embodiment, the game board H13 is symmetrical, so that the ball can be shot so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit H80 (arrow R direction) (so-called "right shot") and aimed at the first winning hole H64, or the ball can be shot so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit H80 (arrow L direction) and aimed at the second winning hole H640 (so-called "left shot"). Therefore, the pachinko machine H10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left shot" and "right shot" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine H10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of changing the way the ball is shot.

It is also possible to configure the game so that the probability of a jackpot remains the same whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state (the jackpot probability in a low probability state is the same as the jackpot probability in a high probability state). In this case, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot to be selected in the event of a jackpot is set to be higher when the ball enters the second winning hole H640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole H64, and it is preferable to configure the game board H13 so that the first winning hole H64 is located in the flow path on the "left hit" side and the second winning hole H640 is located in the flow path on the "right hit" side (the game board H13 is asymmetrical).

With this configuration, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning slot H640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning slot H640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by shooting the ball toward the first winning slot H64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left (in the direction of arrow L) of the variable display unit H80 ("left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning slot H64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device H640a associated with the second winning slot H640 is likely to open by passing the ball through the through gate H67, making it easier to win at the second winning slot H640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning slot H640 so that it passes to the right (arrow R direction) of the variable display unit H80 ("right hit"), passing through the through gate H67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning slot H640 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

Therefore, depending on the game status of the pachinko machine H10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode), the player can change the way the ball is shot to "left-handed" or "right-handed," thereby maintaining the player's interest.

A variable winning device H65 (see FIG. 1720) is provided below the first winning hole H64, and a specific winning hole H65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine H10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning hole H64 or the second winning hole H640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device H37A or the first pattern display device H37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device H81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole H65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning port H65a closes after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after that closure, the specific winning port H65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning port H65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of gaming value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning hole H65a is provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, the specific winning hole H65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning hole H65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning hole H65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning hole H65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, so that a game state can be formed as a special game state. Also, the specific winning hole H65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning hole H64 or the lower left side of the first winning hole H64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit H80.

In the lower right corner of the game board H13, an attachment space K1 is provided for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through the glass unit H16 of the front frame H14.

The game board H13 is provided with an outlet H71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes H63, H64, H65a, or H640 are guided through the outlet H71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlet H71 is located below the specific winning hole H65a (in the direction of arrow D).

In addition, numerous nails are planted on the game board H13 to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (game parts) such as windmills (not shown) are also arranged. Furthermore, a part of the center frame H86, which is arranged in the central opening of the base plate H60 in a manner surrounding the third pattern display device H81, has its rear side (arrow B side) extended up to the game area on the upper side (arrow U side), and is provided with multiple protrusions that protrude toward the front side (arrow F side) in this extended area. The balls flowing down the game area of the game board H13 collide with numerous nails, the protrusions of the center frame H86, the windmills, etc., as they flow down, so that the direction in which the balls fall is appropriately dispersed.

In this embodiment, the direction in which a portion of the center frame H86 extends is set to the upward side (arrow U direction), but it may also extend to the right side (arrow R direction) or left side (arrow L direction), and the extended portion may be configured to include not only a protrusion but also the through gate H67 and each winning opening H63, H64, H65a, and H640. The center frame H86 may also be configured without an extended portion or protrusion.

The windmill is formed so that it can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction (arrows F-B direction). In addition, the windmill is formed with a disk member that is formed in a circle centered on the axis of rotation when viewed from the front and is arranged at a distance of one ball from the front of the base plate H60, and multiple (in this embodiment, three) ball abutment parts that protrude from part of the disk member toward the base plate H60 side (arrow B direction side) and are distributed at a predetermined angle (120 degrees in this embodiment) along the rotation direction of the windmill, and are formed so that the ball flowing down the game board H13 can be guided in multiple (two or more) directions while rotating due to the impact of the ball abutting on the ball abutment parts.

The windmill is also made entirely from a light-transmitting resin material. This makes it easier for players to see the direction in which the balls that come into contact with the ball contact section will flow, while making it harder for players to recognize the direction in which the windmill is rotating.

The game board H13 does not necessarily have to have a windmill on the base plate H60, and may be configured without a windmill. It is also possible to arrange a windmill in the warp passage (not shown) of the center frame H86 or in the passage (not shown) through which the balls that enter each winning hole H63, H64, H65a, and H640 pass, and to configure the ball's path to be changed by the windmill. Furthermore, the windmill may be made partially of an impermeable resin material or entirely of an impermeable metal material such as aluminum, and may have any shape, color, or material as long as it can guide the ball in multiple directions when it comes into contact with it. For example, the windmill may be configured to distribute the balls in different directions alternately one by one.

As shown in FIG. 1716, the rear side of the pachinko machine H10 is mainly equipped with control board units H90 and H91 and a back pack unit H94. The control board unit H90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device H110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device H113), and a display control board (display control device H114). The control board unit H91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device H111), a launch control board (launch control device H112), a power supply board (power supply device H115), and a card unit connection board H116.

The back pack unit H94 is a unit consisting of the back pack H92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit H93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device H110, the voice lamp control device H113 and the display control device H114, the payout control device H111 and the launch control device H112, the power supply device H115, and the card unit connection board H116 are each stored in the board boxes H100 to H104. The board boxes H100 to H104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box H100 (main control device H110) and the board box H102 (dispensing control device H111 and launch control device H112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box H100, H102, or if you try to forcefully open the board box H100, H102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box H100, H102 has been opened.

The payout unit H93 is equipped with a tank H130 located at the top of the back pack unit H94 and opening upward, a tank rail H131 connected to the bottom of the tank H130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail H132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail H131, and a payout device H133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail H132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor H216 (see FIG. 1724). The tank H130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device H133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator H134 for applying vibration to the tank rail H131 is attached to the tank rail H131, and the vibration of the vibrator H134 prevents balls from clogging the tank rail H131. The vibrator H134 can be attached not only to the tank rail H131, but also to other rail parts (passages). For example, it can be disposed in the ball delivery passage (dish passage forming member H160) that delivers balls to the upper dish H17 or the lower dish H50, or in the ball delivery passage (launch position ball delivery unit H170) that delivers balls from the upper dish H17 to the ball launching device H117a.

The payout control device H111 is provided with a state return switch H120, the launch control device H112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob H121, and the power supply device H115 is provided with a RAM erase switch H122. The state return switch H120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor H216 (see FIG. 1724). The control knob H121 is operated by the store to adjust the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker (audio output device H226). The RAM erase switch H122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine H10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine H10 will be described with reference to FIG. 1724. FIG. 1724 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine H10.

The main control device H110 is equipped with an MPU (microprocessor) H201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU H201 contains a ROM (semiconductor memory) H202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU H201, a RAM (random access memory) H203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM H202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The main control device H110 uses the MPU H201 to execute the main processes of the pachinko machine H10, such as drawing the jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display devices H37A, H37B and the third pattern display device H81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In order to instruct the sub-controllers, such as the dispensing control unit H111 and the voice lamp control unit H113, to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit H110 to the sub-controllers via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control unit H110 to the sub-controllers.

RAMH203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPUH201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPUH201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAMH203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device H115 even after power to pachinko machine H10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAMH203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAMH203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine H10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAMH203. Writing to RAMH203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAMH203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPUH201 is configured to receive a power outage signal HSG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit H252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal HSG1 is input to the MPUH201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

The MPUH201 of the main control device H110 is connected to an input/output port H205 via a bus line H204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port H205 is connected to the payout control device H111, the audio lamp control device H113, the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids H209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port H65a to the front side around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role device, and the MPUH201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port H205.

The solenoid H209 may be configured to include not only a solenoid for driving the large opening solenoid and the electric device, but also a drive source (drive motor) for the device arranged on the game board H13, a drive motor (not shown) for the ball launching unit H112a, and a drive motor (not shown) for driving the payout device H133 for sending balls to the upper tray H17.

The input/output port H205 is connected to various switches H208, which include a group of sensors such as a switch group (not shown) and a sensor (through gate H67) that detects the ball passing through the through gate H67, a winning detection sensor (not shown) that detects the ball entering each winning hole H63, H64, H65a, H640, a vibration detection sensor (not shown) that detects the input of vibration to the pachinko machine H10, and a magnetic force detection sensor that detects when a magnet or the like is brought close to the playing area of the game board H13, and a RAM erase switch circuit H253 (described later) provided in the power supply H115.The MPU H201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches H208 and the RAM erase signal HSG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit H253.

The various switches H208 may also be configured to include frame buttons H22 in the voice lamp control device H113 (the operation button member H181 of the operation unit H180 and the decision button H191, up button H192, down button H193, left button H194, and right button H195 of the function adjustment operation section H190).

The payout control device H111 drives the payout motor H216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPUH211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM H212 that stores the control program executed by the MPUH211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM H213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM H213 of the payout control device H111, like the RAM H203 of the main control device H110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPUH211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPUH211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM H213 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device H115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine H10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM H213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPUH201 of the main control device H110, the NMI terminal of the MPUH211 is configured so that a power outage signal HSG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit H252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal HSG1 is input to the MPUH211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU H211 of the payout control device H111 is connected to an input/output port H215 via a bus line H214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device H110, payout motor H216, launch control device H112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port H215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device H111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device H111 but not connected to the main control device H110.

When the main control device H110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device H112 controls the ball launch unit H112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle H51.

The rotating body H112a2 of the ball launching unit H112a is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor H51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle H51, and on condition that the launch stop switch H51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), a driving force is transmitted from the drive motor corresponding to the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operating handle H51, and the rotating body H112a2 is rotated at a speed according to the operation amount of the operating handle H51. As a result, a ball is launched from the ball launching unit H112a between the opposing inner rail H61 and outer rail H62 with a strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle H51.

The audio lamp control device H113 controls the audio output of the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) H226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination section H29 to H33) H227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device H81 performed by the display control device H114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU H221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM H222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU H221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM H223 used as a work memory, etc.

The input/output port H225 is connected to the MPU H221 of the audio lamp control device H113 via a bus line H224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port H225 is connected to the main control device H110, the display control device H114, the audio output device H226, the lamp display device H227, other devices H228, the button member H181, etc.

The other device H228 may include not only the drive source for the accessory device arranged on the game board H13, but also a drive motor (not shown) for the ball launching unit H112a and an electric accessory H640a for the second winning slot H640.

The voice lamp control device H113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device H81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110, and notifies the display control device H114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.).

The sound lamp control device H113 also monitors input from the button member H181, and when the player operates the button member H181, it instructs the display control device H114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device H81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device H114 so that the third pattern display device H81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device H81. The display control device H114 displays various images on the third pattern display device H81 according to the command sent from this sound lamp control device H113.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device H113 monitors input from the function adjustment operation unit H190 (decision button H191, up button H192, down button H193, left button H194, right button H195), and when the player operates the function adjustment operation unit H190, it instructs the display control device H114 to change the volume of the speaker (audio output device H226), change the brightness of the third pattern display device H81, or change the brightness of the illumination units H29 to H33. When the volume or brightness is changed, the degree of adjustment of the volume or brightness is temporarily displayed in the form of a number, volume, etc. in front of the main display displayed on the third pattern display device H81.

In FIG. 1724, the operation button member H181 of the operation unit H180 and the decision button H191, up button H192, down button H193, left button H194, and right button H195 of the function adjustment operation part H190 are collectively illustrated as a frame button H22.

The voice lamp control device H113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device H81 from the display control device H114. Based on the display command received from the display control device H114, the voice lamp control device H113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device H81 from the voice output device H226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device H227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device H114 is connected to the voice lamp control device H113 and the third pattern display device H81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device H81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device H113. The display control device H114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device H113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device H81. The voice lamp control device H113 can match the display of the third pattern display device H81 with the audio output from the audio output device H226 by outputting audio from the audio output device H226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The various switches H208 connected to the input/output port H205 in the main control device H110 may be configured to be connected to the input/output port H225 in the voice lamp control device H113, and the MPU H221 may execute various processes based on signals output from the various switches H208. Also, various switches may be connected to the input/output port H225 in the voice lamp control device H113 separately from the various switches H208 connected to the input/output port H205 in the main control device H110. In this case, it is preferable to configure a group of sensors, such as position detection sensors for the role-playing devices arranged mainly on the game board H13, as the various switches.

The power supply device H115 has a power supply unit H251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine H10, a power failure monitoring circuit H252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit H253 provided with a RAM erase switch H122 (see FIG. 1724). The power supply unit H251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices H110 to H114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit H251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches H208, solenoids such as the solenoid H209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices H110 to H114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit H252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal HSG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPUH201 of the main control device H110 and the MPUH211 of the dispensing control device H111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit H252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit H251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal HSG1 to the main control device H110 and the dispensing control device H111. By outputting the power failure signal HSG1, the main control device H110 and the dispensing control device H111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit H251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit H110 and the dispensing control unit H111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit H253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal HSG2 to the main control device H110 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase switch H122 (see FIG. 1724) is pressed. When the main control device H110 inputs the RAM erase signal HSG2 when the pachinko machine H10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device H111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device H111.

Next, referring to Fig. 1725 to Fig. 1785, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") K10 will be described as the 105th embodiment. Fig. 1725 is a front view of the pachinko machine K10 in the 105th embodiment, and Fig. 1726 is a front view of the game board K13 of the pachinko machine K10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (back) side for the pachinko machine K10 in the state shown in FIG. 1725. Also, the top side will be referred to as the upper (top) side, the bottom side as the lower (bottom) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side for the pachinko machine K10 in the state shown in FIG. 1725. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 1726) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine K10, respectively.

The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their explanation will be omitted. Also, in regard to reference numerals, parts having common functions are assigned similar reference numerals, such as pachinko machine H10 in the 104th embodiment being pachinko machine K10 in this embodiment.

That is, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine K10 includes at least a front frame K14 (corresponding to the front frame H14 in the 104 embodiment), a base plate K60 (corresponding to the base plate H60 in the 104 embodiment), an inner rail K61 (corresponding to the inner rail H61 in the 104 embodiment), an outer rail K62 (corresponding to the outer rail H62 in the 104 embodiment), a general winning hole K63 (corresponding to the general winning hole H63 in the 104 embodiment), a first winning hole K64 (corresponding to the first winning hole H64 in the 104 embodiment), and a second winning hole K640 (corresponding to the second winning hole H640 in the 104 embodiment). , an electric device K640a (corresponding to the electric device H640a in the 104th embodiment), a first variable winning device K65 (corresponding to the variable winning device H65 in the 104th embodiment), a first specific winning port K65a (corresponding to the specific winning port H65a in the 104th embodiment), a through gate K67 (corresponding to the through gate H67 in the 104th embodiment), a return ball prevention member K68 (corresponding to the return ball prevention member H68 in the 104th embodiment), a return rubber K69 (corresponding to the return rubber H69 in the 104th embodiment), and an outlet K71 (corresponding to the outlet H71 in the 104th embodiment).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine K10 includes at least an outer edge member K73 (corresponding to the outer edge member H73 of the 104th embodiment), a variable display unit K80 (corresponding to the variable display unit H80 of the 104th embodiment), a third pattern display device K81 (corresponding to the third pattern display device H81 of the 104th embodiment), and a center frame K86 (corresponding to the center frame H86 of the 104th embodiment).

As shown in FIG. 1726, the game board K13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill KWF, rails K61, K62, a general winning port K63, a first winning port K64, a second winning port K640, a first variable winning device K65, a second variable winning device K650, a through gate K67, a variable display unit K80, etc., to a base plate K60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion of the board is attached to the back side (or front side) of the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1725).

The base plate K60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning port K63, the first winning port K64, the second winning port K640, and the variable display unit K80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate K60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board K13 with tapping screws or the like. The base plate K60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate K60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board K13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame H12 through a glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1725) arranged in the front frame K14. Below, the configuration of the game board K13 will be explained, mainly with reference to FIG. 1726.

An outer rail K62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board K13, and an arc-shaped inner rail K61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail K62 is set up inside the outer rail K62. The inner rail K61 and the outer rail K62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board K13, and the game board K13 and the glass unit H16 (see Figure 1725) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board K13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board K13 and is formed by the two rails K61, K62 and the resin outer edge member K73 that connects the rails.

The two rails K61, K62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit H112a (see FIG. 1724) to the top of the game board K13. A return ball prevention member K68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail K61 (upper left of FIG. 1726) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board K13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber K69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail K62 (upper right of FIG. 1726) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined value hits the return rubber K69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 1726), first pattern display devices H37A and H37B equipped with multiple LEDs and a 7-segment display as light-emitting means are provided. The functions of the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B have been explained in the 104th embodiment, so explanations will be omitted here.

In addition, in this pachinko machine K10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning port K64 and the second winning port K640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine K10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a normal jackpot with 15R time reduction, a normal jackpot with 4R time reduction, and a normal jackpot without 15R time reduction. The first pattern display devices H37A and H37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

In this pachinko machine K10, during the time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device K640a associated with the second winning port K640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device K640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for balls to enter the second winning port K640 than when the electric device K640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the time-saving period, it is easier for balls to enter the second winning port K640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

The change between the open and closed states of the electric role K640a occurs by the opening and closing action of an opening and closing plate that can slide back and forth. When the electric role K640a is in the open state, the opening and closing plate extends forward from the front surface of the base plate K60, allowing the game ball to roll on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate, and the rolling game ball can enter the second winning hole K640. When the electric role K640a is in the closed state, the opening and closing plate is retracted rearward from the front surface of the base plate K60, and the game ball cannot be bridged to the second winning hole K640, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole K640.

As an example of the change between the open and closed states of the electric role K640a caused by the opening and closing action of an opening and closing plate that can slide back and forth, the second winning opening K640 may be arranged below the electric role K640a, and the opening and closing plate may be retracted backward when the electric role K640a is in the open state, and the opening and closing plate may be extended forward when the electric role K640a is in the closed state. In other words, when the electric role K640a is in the open state, the opening and closing plate may be retracted backward from the front surface of the base plate K60, and the game ball may enter the second winning opening K640 side, and when the electric role K640a is in the closed state, the opening and closing plate may be configured to block the space between the game area and the second winning opening K640, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening K640 (to be swept to the left).

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric role K640a may be caused by the opening and closing action of an opening and closing plate that has a rotation axis at the lower end and rotates and displaces in a manner that tilts or stands up toward the play area. In this case, when the electric role K640a is in the open state, the game ball picked up on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate is easily guided to the second winning hole K640, and when the electric role K640a is in the closed state, the opening and closing plate can be configured to block the space between the play area and the second winning hole K640, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole K640.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes K63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit K80 is arranged at a position visible through the center of the game area (behind the window of the base plate K60). The variable display unit K80 is provided with a third pattern display device K81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole K64 and the second winning hole K640, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate K67. In addition, a center frame K86 is arranged on the base plate K60 so as to surround the third pattern display device K81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device K81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device H114 (see FIG. 1724), so that, for example, three symbol rows, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device K81. The third symbol display device K81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device H37A, H37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1724) is performed by the first symbol display device H37A, H37B. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device K81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate K67. In the pachinko machine K10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate K67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine K10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device K640a attached to the second winning port K640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed is set to be shorter during the time-saving mode than during the normal game mode. As a result, during the time-saving mode, the second symbol is changed and displayed in a short time, so that more winning draws can be held than during the normal mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, and gives the player more opportunities for the electric device K640a of the second winning port K640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port K640.

Note that if the state is made such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot K640 during the time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device K640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time taken for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during the time-saving period than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device K640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate K67 is attached to the game board K13 in the area to the right of the variable display unit K80, and is configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board K13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate K67, a winning lottery for the second pattern is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second pattern display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "X" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate K67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices H37A and H37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device K81.

The change in the second pattern may be displayed by switching on and off a number of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be displayed using a part of the first pattern display device H37A, H37B and the third pattern display device K81. Similarly, the second pattern pending lamp may be lit by a part of the third pattern display device K81.

In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be reserved for passing through the through gate K67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or to five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of through gates K67 that can be installed is not limited to one, but may be, for example, two.

The installation position of the through gate K67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit K80, but may be, for example, on the left, right, or below the variable display unit K80. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first winning hole K64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit K80. When a ball enters this first winning hole K64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board K13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1724), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole K640 into which a ball can enter is disposed on the lower left side of the through gate K67 as viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole K640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board K13 is turned on, and when the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held in the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1724), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device H37B. Note that the location of the second winning hole K640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first winning hole K64 as viewed from the front, or it may be to the left of the center of the game area (for example, to the lower left of the first winning hole K64 as viewed from the front).

In addition, each of the first winning port K64 and the second winning port K640 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port K64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port K640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port K64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port K640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port K64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port K640 may be five. In this case, the magnitude relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric device K640a is attached to the second winning opening K640. This electric device K640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state (retracted state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening K640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate K67, the electric device K640a is in an open state (extending state), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening K640.

As mentioned above, during the time-saving mode, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device K640a is in the open state (extended state) increases. Furthermore, during the time-saving mode, the time that the electric device K640a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and the time-saving mode, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot K640 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot being won is the same (approximately 1/319) when a ball enters the first winning slot K64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot K640. However, the probability of a 15R regular jackpot with time reduction being selected as the type of jackpot to be won is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot K640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot K64. On the other hand, the first winning slot K64 does not have the electric device K640a that the second winning slot K640 has, and the ball is always in a state where it can win.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device K640a associated with the second winning port K640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning port K640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by shooting the ball toward the first winning port K64, which does not have the electric device K640a, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit K80 (so-called "left shot") and having the ball win at the first winning port K64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the big win lottery.

On the other hand, during the time-saving period, the electric device K640a associated with the second winning port K640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate K67, making it easier to win at the second winning port K640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port K640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate K67 to open the electric device K640a, and aiming for a normal jackpot with 15R time-saving by winning at the second winning port K640.

Unlike the pachinko machine K10 in this embodiment, if the game board K13 is symmetrical, the player can aim for the first winning hole K64 with a "right hit" or the second winning hole K640 with a "left hit." In this case, the player can be relieved of the hassle of having to change the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine K10 in this embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning slot K64 with a "right hit", and so that a ball shot with a "left hit" does not pass through the through gate K67. Therefore, the pachinko machine K10 in this embodiment can request the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine K10 (whether it is in time-saving mode or normal mode). Therefore, by adding a game feature that changes the way the ball is shot, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish.

The second variable winning device K650 (see FIG. 1726) is disposed to the right of the first winning port K64, and the second specific winning port K650a is disposed downstream of it. In the pachinko machine K10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port K64 or the second winning port K640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device H37A or the first pattern display device H37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device K81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the second specific winning port K650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This second specific winning port K650a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the second specific winning port K650a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this second specific winning port K650a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of gaming value (game value).

If the drawn jackpot is a normal jackpot with time reduction, the player can make the game ball enter the second winning hole K640 by playing right-hand during the time reduction after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, the number of time reductions granted is three, and when the game ball enters the second winning hole K640, there is about a 1/2 probability of a small win occurring, and the LED corresponding to the small win is lit in the first pattern display device H37A, H37B. This small win causes the first specific winning hole K65a, which is located upstream of the second specific winning hole K650a, to open for a predetermined time, and while the first specific winning hole K65a is open, the ball enters the first specific winning hole K65a, and when it passes through the specific area K65c downstream of the specific winning hole K65a, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot).

In this way, in this pachinko machine K10, when a game ball enters the second winning slot K640 during right-hand play, there is a probability of about 1/2 for the game state to transition to a special game state, which is a significantly higher probability than the probability of a jackpot during left-hand play (about 1/319), and this can increase the player's interest in the right-hand play state.

In addition, the number of specific winning openings K65a, K650a is not limited, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be placed, and the placement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening K64, but may be, for example, the lower right side of the first winning opening K64, the lower left side of the first winning opening K64, the left or right side of the variable display unit K80, or above.

The game board K13 is provided with an outlet K71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning holes K63, K64, K65a, K640, or K650a are guided through the outlet K71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The game board K13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

Note that other devices H228 (see FIG. 1724) in this embodiment include the drive solenoid KSOL41 and drive motors KMT41a, KMT41b, KMT51, KMT61, KMT71, KMT81, KMT82, etc.

In this embodiment, the other device H228 (see FIG. 1724) may also include not only the drive source for the above-mentioned role device, but also a drive motor (not shown) for the ball launching unit H112a and a drive source for the electric role K640a for the second winning port K640 (drive solenoid K247, drive solenoid K253, etc.).

In addition, the various switches H208 in this embodiment (see FIG. 1724) include detection sensors K413, K418, K556a, K556b, K556c, K565, K711e, K716, K858, etc.

Next, the structure of the game board K13 and the operating unit K300 will be described. Figure 1727 is an exploded front oblique view of the game board K13 and the operating unit A200. Note that in the explanation of Figure 1727, Figure 1726 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit K300 is disposed on the rear side of the game board K13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside, as will be described in detail later. With the support plate portion K313 of the operation unit K300 supported by the surface of the game board K13, the game board K13 and the operation unit K300 are fixed together by screwing a fastening screw into the base plate K60 of the game board K13, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board K13 and the operation unit K300.

The base plate K60 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured to make it easy for the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate K60 from the front side. This allows the structures arranged on the back side to be seen regardless of the shape or arrangement of the base plate K60, and can be used for various effects. Note that if there are areas that you do not want the player to see, you can deal with this by attaching a seal material with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance), etc.

Figure 1728 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board K13. Figure 1728 shows the decorative cover K220 disassembled from the winning unit K200. As with Figure 1726, the ball guide nails are omitted from the illustration, and the windmill KWF (see Figure 1726) is also omitted from the illustration.

Figure 1729 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit K200, and Figure 1730 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit K200. As shown in Figures 1729 and 1730, the winning unit K200 includes a base member K201 fastened to the front of the base plate K60, a decorative cover K220 arranged on the front side of the base member K201 and forming a ball flow path together with the base member K201, a first electric device K240 having an electric device K640a that moves forward and backward from the back side of the base member K201, and a second electric device K250 as a second variable winning device K650 that is arranged on the back side of the base member K201 below the first electric device K240 and has a movable plate K251 that moves forward and backward from the back side of the base member K201.

The base member K201 includes a plate-shaped main body K202 in which a light diffusion shape is formed inside a protruding edge formed in a protruding shape on the back side, a guide opening K203 drilled in the plate-shaped main body K202, a plurality of deceleration protrusions K204 protruding on the front side to decelerate the balls flowing down the front side of the guide opening K203, a guide opening K205 drilled in the plate-shaped main body K202 below the guide opening K203, a protruding portion K206 protruding on the front side along the lower edge of the guide opening K205, and a plurality of deceleration protrusions K204 recessed in the plate-shaped main body K202 above the guide opening K205. It is equipped with a fast recess K207, a long protrusion K208 formed in a long protrusion shape in the left-right direction at a position below the guide opening K203 and above the guide opening K205, an extension K209 extending to the rear side along the upper edge of the guide opening K205, a plurality of ball guide parts K210 formed below the guide opening K205 to be able to guide balls to the rear side, and an electric decoration board K211 having a plurality of light emitting parts K212 such as LEDs that can irradiate light to the area where the light diffusion shape of the plate-shaped main body K202 is formed and fastened to the rear side of the plate-shaped main body K202.

The decorative cover K220 includes a plate-shaped body K221 that, together with the plate-shaped body K202 of the base member K201, divides the front and rear of the ball's flow path, an extension forming portion K222 that extends from the plate-shaped body K221 to the rear side and forms the ball's flow path, a branch forming portion K223 that protrudes from the plate-shaped body K221 to the rear side inside the area bordered by the extension forming portion K222 and branches the flow path, and a guide opening K20 of the base member K201 that protrudes from the plate-shaped body K221 to the rear side inside the area bordered by the extension forming portion K222. 3, a plurality of deceleration protrusions K225 protruding from the plate-shaped main body K221 to the rear side corresponding to the forward position of the deceleration recess K207 of the base member K201, and an electric decoration board K227 having a plurality of light-emitting parts K228 such as LEDs capable of irradiating light to a location below the area bordered by the extension forming part K222, and being fastened to the decorative cover K220 with a sufficient distance from the plate-shaped main body K221 by forming the extension tip of the extension forming part K222 approximately flush with the extension forming part K222.

The first electric device K240 includes a second winning opening K640, an electric device K640a that can guide balls toward the second winning opening K640 in an extended state (open state) that passes through the guide opening K203 and is positioned forward, a support box member K246 that supports the electric device K640a from below and has a drive solenoid K247 that drives the electric device K640a disposed inside, and an upper cover member K248 that guides the top surface of the electric device K640a so that the electric device K640a can be displaced in the front-rear direction and forms the ceiling of the path to the second winning opening K640.

The electric prop K640a is made of a colored (red in this embodiment) opaque resin material and includes a first forming surface K241 that slopes downward to the left, a second forming surface K242 that is connected to the downstream end of the first forming surface K241 and slopes downward to the rear, and a third forming surface K243 that slopes downward to the right and rear from the left front portion on the opposite side (left side) of the second forming surface K242 to the first forming surface K241 in the left-right direction.

The second electric device K250 includes a movable plate K251 that can move forward and backward through the guide opening K205, and a support box member K252 that supports the movable plate K251 from below and has a drive solenoid K253 disposed inside to drive the movable plate K251.

The movable plate K251 is formed from a colored (red in this embodiment) opaque resin material, and when the drive solenoid K253 is in a non-energized state and in a protruding state (closed state) in which it protrudes forward, balls are prevented from entering the second specific winning opening K650a, and when the drive solenoid K253 is in an excited state and in a retracted state (open state) in which it retracts backward, balls are allowed to enter the second specific winning opening K650a.

When the movable plate K251 is in the extended state, if the weight of the ball acts in a direction that tilts the movable plate K251, the protrusion portion K206 abuts against the underside of the movable plate K251, thereby preventing the movable plate K251 from tilting.

Furthermore, an extension portion K209 is disposed above the rear end side of the movable plate K251, and when the extension portion K209 abuts against the upper surface of the movable plate K251, tilting of the movable plate K251 is prevented. In this way, tilting of the movable plate K251 can be prevented by abutting at multiple points.

Figure 1731 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board K13 at the MDCCXXXI portion of Figure 1726, and Figure 1732 is a cross-sectional view of the game board K13 at the line MDCCXXXII-MDCCXXXII of Figure 1731. In Figure 1731, the shape of the inside of the decorative cover K220 is shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 1731, the branch forming part K223 is positioned so that it can guide the ball that reaches the upper surface toward the right end of the electric role K640a. In addition, the portion of the inclined forming part K224 that protrudes to the right corresponds to the third forming surface K243 of the first electric role K240 and inclines downward to the right when viewed from the front.

As a result, when the electric reel K640a of the first electric reel K240 is in the extended state and a ball collides with the upper surface of the electric reel K640a, causing the electric reel K640a to be displaced in the vertical direction, the collision between the third forming surface K243 and the inclined forming portion K224 can be made a surface collision. Therefore, compared to when the load at the time of collision occurs at a point, the load received by the third forming surface K243 can be dispersed, making it easier to avoid damage to the electric reel K640a.

Figure 1731 shows the large design K221a and the small design K221b applied to the front side of the plate-shaped main body K221 of the decorative cover K220. Here, in this embodiment, the same red as the electric prop K640a and the movable plate K251 is selected as the color of the border of the large design K221a, and the parts other than the border are basically colorless and transparent, and are applied opaquely in white, especially in the positions where they overlap the electric lighting board K227 at the front and back, and the small design K221b is formed as a colored (white in this embodiment) opaque decoration. Correspondingly, the large design K221a is shown with shading indicating red, and the small design K221b is shown without shading.

The small design K221b is designed as an arrow tip shape (a bracket shape with an apex on the lower left side) that indicates the direction along the path of the ball rolling on the top surface of the electric device K640a, and functions to suggest the path of the ball to the player who sees the small design K221b.

In this way, by matching the color of the large design K221a as decoration of the cosmetic cover K220 with the color of the electric role K640a and the movable plate K251, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the electric role K640a and the movable plate K251 as part of the decoration.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1731, the direction of inclination of the electric prop K640a and the movable plate K251 (the direction of inclination downwards to the left) is aligned with the inclination of the large design K221a, so the electric prop K640a and the movable plate K251 can be viewed together with the large design K221a as "one decorative pattern." In this case, the difference in appearance due to the difference in the arrangement of the electric prop K640a and the movable plate K251 can be used to change the above-mentioned "one decorative pattern" that is viewed.

As shown in FIG. 1731, the plate-shaped body K221 is colorless and transparent in front of the ball's guide path (path along the upper surface) by the electric prop K640a or the movable plate K251, and visibility is good. Therefore, visibility of the ball guided by the electric prop K640a or the movable plate K251 can be improved.

Furthermore, the front of the vertical position of the ball guide path (path along the top surface) by the electric role K640a or the movable plate K251 is colored (red in this embodiment) and transparent as the large design K221a of the plate-shaped main body K221, and visibility is reduced compared to colorless transparency. This allows the player's line of sight to be guided to the ball guide path (path along the top surface) by the electric role K640a or the movable plate K251, which has good visibility, making it easier to distinguish the ball when it is being guided by the electric role K640a or the movable plate K251.

In FIG. 1732, the arrangement of the electric role K640a (retracted state) and the movable plate K251 (extended state) in the non-excited state of the first electric role K240 and the second electric role K250 is shown by solid lines, and the arrangement of the electric role K640a (extended state) and the movable plate K251 (retracted state) in the excited state of the first electric role K240 and the second electric role K250 is shown by imaginary lines.

When the electric device K640a is in the excited state (extended state), the upper surface functions as a ball flow surface. In other words, the ball guided through the guide opening K203 to the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1729) rolls on the upper surface of the electric device K640a in the extended state shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 1732.

This makes it possible to prevent the light from the light-emitting unit K212 shown in FIG. 1732 as an LED that emits light visible to a player looking diagonally downward at the electric role K640a in the viewing direction KDR21, which is located below the electric role K640a and above the movable plate K251, from being obscured by the ball rolling on the electric role K640a and not reaching the player's eyes.

In other words, the light from the light-emitting unit K212 shown in FIG. 1732 passes below the electric device K640a and reaches the player's eyes, preventing the visibility of the light from the light-emitting unit K212 from changing depending on the presence or absence of a ball rolling on the top surface of the electric device K640a.

In addition, the light from the light-emitting unit K212 acts to brightly illuminate the electric prop K640a itself, thereby brightening the area above the electric prop K640a. Since the light from the light-emitting unit K212 is not blocked by the balls rolling on the electric prop K640a before it reaches the electric prop K640a, the brightness (appearance) of the electric prop K640a can be prevented from changing regardless of whether there is a ball on the electric prop K640a. In this way, the electric prop K640a can be brightened regardless of whether there is a ball on the electric prop K640a, and the visibility of the balls rolling on the electric prop K640a can be improved.

In this case, the degree of brightness on the electric prop K640a can be increased in areas with smaller plate thickness dimensions, such as the forming portion of the first forming surface K241, so that the brightness of the electric prop K640a can be brighter on the forming portion of the first forming surface K241 than on the forming portion of the third forming surface K243.

This allows the player's gaze to be guided upstream rather than downstream along the path of the ball rolling over the electric device K640a, drawing attention to the branching of the ball at the branching formation section K223.

This allows the player to understand the presence of balls that may flow to the left along the top surface of the branch formation section K223 and be guided to the top surface of the electric device K640a, and the presence of balls that flow to the right along the top surface of the branch formation section K223 and flow downstream without being guided to the electric device K640a. This makes it easier to prevent a situation in which the player stops playing because the number of balls guided to the second winning port K640 (see Figure 1729) is smaller than the number of balls fired, leading to the player believing that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine, such as balls leaking from the playing area or balls not being fired properly.

As shown in FIG. 1732, the movable plate K251 of the second electric device K250 has left and right edges that protrude downward in the form of protrusions extending in the front-rear direction, and the protruding tip is supported from below by the protrusion portion K206 of the base member K201, thereby preventing the movable plate K251 from changing its posture in the forward tilt direction when in the extended state.

In addition, an extension portion K209 is formed on the upper side of the movable plate K251, which restricts the change in posture when the movable plate K251 changes its posture in the forward tilt direction. That is, in this embodiment, a shaped portion for restricting the change in posture of the movable plate K251 is formed on the base member K201, and is not formed on the decorative cover K220.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the movable plate K251 while narrowing the area in which the uneven shape is formed on the decorative cover K220, thereby improving the visibility of the flow path of the ball when visually observing the flow path through the decorative cover K220.

The bottom surface of the extension K209 is curved so as to totally reflect light from the front or from an obliquely upward front direction. This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the rear part of the movable plate K251, which extends further rearward than the plate-shaped main body K202 on which the base end of the extension K209 is located, and allows the player to focus solely on the part of the movable plate K251 that protrudes forward from the plate-shaped main body K202.

In this embodiment, the shape of the extension portion K209 is designed to prevent structures below the extension portion K209 from being visible, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extension portion K209 may be configured to prevent light from passing through by attaching mirror tape or light-shielding tape to the surface of the extension portion K209.

The deceleration recess K207 is formed so that when the vicinity of the movable plate K251 is viewed in the forward/rearward direction, the upper surface of the movable plate K251 in the extended state can be viewed through the upper edge K207a of the deceleration recess K207. That is, the upper edge K207a functions like a mirror, and the upper edge K207a can be viewed in the color of the movable plate K251 (red in this embodiment).

On the other hand, when the movable plate K251 is in a retracted state, the tip of the movable plate K251 retracts rearward of the upper edge K207a, so that the upper edge K207a functions like a mirror, allowing the upper edge K207a to be seen through the color near the top surface of the protrusion K206 (which is colorless and transparent in this embodiment, and is the same as the upper edge K207a).

That is, the visible appearance (color) of the upper edge K207a can be changed depending on whether the movable plate K251 is in an extended state (visible in red) or in a retracted state (visible in colorless transparency). This makes it possible to increase the degree of change in the visible appearance around the movable plate K251 when the state of the movable plate K251 changes.

The upper edge K207a is formed in a line shape that is approximately parallel to the upper surface of the movable plate K251 in the central and right-side deceleration recesses K207, so that the upper edge K207a extending parallel to the flow direction of the ball, slightly above the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate K251, is visible in the same red color as the movable plate K251. This allows the player to grasp the flow direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate K251 by the upper edge K207a, which is located in a different position from the movable plate K251.

Furthermore, in the left deceleration recess K207, the upper edge K207a is formed in a line shape that slopes downward to the left toward the flow path (the flow path to the left of the movable plate K251) where the ball guided to the left on the upper surface of the movable plate K251 is guided, so the upper edge K207a extending along the flow direction of the ball flowing down after passing the left end of the movable plate K251 is visually recognized in the same red color as the movable plate K251. This allows the player to grasp the flow direction of the ball after passing to the left on the upper surface of the movable plate K251 by the upper edge K207a, which is located in a different position from the movable plate K251.

The upper edge portion K207a will be further described with reference to Figures 1731 and 1732. The deceleration recess K207 in which the upper edge portion K207a is formed is formed so that its vertical width is longer than the diameter of the ball so that the ball can enter.

Therefore, when a player is viewing the vicinity of the movable plate K251 with the direction view KDR22, even if a ball rolls on the upper surface of the movable plate K251, the upper edge K207a is not hidden by the ball. Therefore, above and below the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate K251, the player can see two red line-shaped decorations due to the movable plate K251 and the upper edge K207a, which slopes downward and to the left just like the movable plate K251.

Here, when the upper edge K207a acts as a mirror with respect to the direction view KDR22 to make the movable plate K251 visible, the path of light passes through the deceleration recess K207, so even if there is a ball flowing down the movable plate K251, as long as the ball does not enter the deceleration recess K207, there is no effect on the visibility of the upper edge K207a.

In addition, even if the ball enters the deceleration recess K207, while the ball is spherical, the recessed end of the deceleration recess K207 is flat, and the deceleration recess K207 is never filled with the ball, so the light that travels without being blocked by the ball is reflected by the upper edge K207a and reaches the player's eyes.

Therefore, even if a ball flows down the movable plate K251, the change in the visible state of the upper edge K207a can be reduced. In other words, the state in which the upper edge K207a is visible in red can be generated in common whether or not there is a ball on the movable plate K251.

As shown in FIG. 1731, in this embodiment, the upper edge K207a and the movable plate K251 are arranged along the inside of the border of the large design K221a of the decorative cover K220, and the color of the border of the large design K221a of the decorative cover K220 and the color of the movable plate K251 are the same.

Therefore, when the movable plate K251 is in an extended state, the upper edge K207a acts to partially thicken the border of the large design K221a, and when the movable plate K251 is in a retracted state, the upper edge K207a is visible as transparent, so that the border of the large design K221a appears uniform.

When the shape seen as the border of the large design K221a is partially thick, it corresponds to the protruding state of the movable plate K251, and when the shape seen as the border of the large design K221a is uniform in thickness, it corresponds to the retracted state of the movable plate K251. Therefore, the player can grasp the state of the movable plate K251 by visually checking the thickness of the border of the large design K221a.

The deceleration protrusion K225 of the decorative cover K220 is located in front of the downward flow path of the ball rolling on the movable plate K251. Unlike the deceleration recess K207, the vertical width of the deceleration protrusion K225 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball (smaller than the radius of the ball). This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which, when the ball rolls on the movable plate K251, the ball is hidden (made difficult to see) by the deceleration protrusion K225, making it impossible for the player to grasp the position of the ball.

Figures 1733, 1734, 1735, and 1736 are perspective views of the winning unit K200 in the direction KDR21 viewed diagonally downward. In Figures 1733, 1734, 1735, and 1736, in order to explain the difference in the visual appearance of the large design K221a and the small design K221b of the decorative cover K220 due to the difference in the arrangement of the electric role K640a and the movable plate K251, the outline of the plate-shaped main body K221 of the decorative cover K220 is illustrated with imaginary lines, the positions of the large design 221a and the small design K221b are illustrated, and the arrangement of the branch formation part K223, the inclination formation part K224, and the deceleration protrusion K225 as the shaped parts protruding to the rear side are illustrated with imaginary lines.

In addition, in Fig. 1733, Fig. 1734, Fig. 1735 and Fig. 1736, the red border of the large design K221a, the electric role K640a and the movable plate K251 are all shaded in common. Note that the details of the flow path of the balls guided to the winning unit K200 are not shown, so please refer to Fig. 1731 as appropriate for details of the flow path.

In FIG. 1733, the electric role K640a of the first electric role K240 is in a retracted state (non-excited state), and the movable plate K251 of the second electric role K250 is in an extended state (non-excited state). This state mainly corresponds to the normal state.

The state shown in Figure 1733 is a state in which the ball flowing down the winning unit K200 is not guided to the second winning port K640 (see Figure 1729), nor is it guided to the second specific winning port K650a (see Figure 1731).

In this state, the large design K221a is visually recognized as if the movable plate K251 has entered the center of the top and bottom of the inside of the border, giving the player the impression that the shape of the large design K221a itself has been cut.

Therefore, since the state in which the shape of the large design K221a itself is seen as if it is cut corresponds to a state in which the ball is not guided to the second winning port K640 and the second specific winning port K650a, the player can predict how the ball that has entered the winning unit K200 will flow down from the visual appearance of the large design K221a. Therefore, the degree of fatigue of the player can be reduced compared to the case in which it is necessary to visually see the ball itself in order to understand (predict) the flow of the ball that has entered the winning unit K200.

In FIG. 1734, the electric role K640a of the first electric role K240 is in an extended state (excited state), and the movable plate K251 of the second electric role K250 is in an extended state (non-excited state). This state corresponds to a state that frequently occurs mainly in the time-saving state and the probability change state.

The state shown in FIG. 1734 is a state in which a ball flowing down the winning unit K200 can be guided to the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1729), but is not guided to the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1731).

In this state, the small design K221b is seen as a single decoration with the red background color of the electric feature K640a, which is seen as entering inside the border of the large design K221a. In this case, the white small design K221b can be made to stand out compared to when the background color is colorless, as shown in FIG. 1733.

Therefore, since the small design K221b is viewed as a single point decoration with the red background color of the electric device K640a corresponding to the state in which the ball can be guided to the second winning port K640, the player can predict from the viewing state of the small design K221b whether the ball that entered the winning unit K200 will enter the second winning port K640. Therefore, the degree of fatigue of the player can be reduced compared to the case in which it is necessary to view the ball itself in order to grasp (predict) the flow of the ball that entered the winning unit K200.

Here, if the small design K221b applied to the decorative cover K220 is made into an easily distinguishable decoration, the decoration may get in the way and make it difficult to see the flow of the balls themselves, and conversely, if the decoration is made light in order to make the flow of the balls easier to see, the decoration may be difficult to see and have a small dramatic effect. One option would be to use a light-guiding panel that highlights the shape when illuminated with light, but this has problems such as being expensive and requiring a certain thickness, and placement is limited due to design-related conditions, so it is not an all-purpose solution.

In contrast, in this embodiment, rather than completing the decoration with the front of the decorative cover K220, the electric feature K640a is configured to affect the appearance of the small design K221b, achieving both a good appearance of the decoration and easy visibility of the ball.

In other words, by making the small design K221b a decoration that is not conspicuous on its own, when the electric reel K640a is in a retracted state, the small design K221b is not conspicuous, drawing attention to the ball itself flowing down the back side of the decorative cover K220, while when the electric reel K640a is in an extended state, the small design K221b itself is made conspicuous, improving the presentation effect as a decoration that creates anticipation of the ball entering the second winning hole K640.

When the small design K221b is to be highlighted against the background of the electric prop K640a, there is a concern that the appearance of the small design K221b may change if a ball enters between the small design K221b and the electric prop K640a.

Considering that the front-to-rear width of the flow path formed by the plate-shaped body K202 of the base member K201 and the plate-shaped body K221 of the decorative cover K220 (see Fig. 1729) is sufficiently longer than the diameter of the ball (approximately 19 mm), and that the pachinko machine K10 is generally tilted backward by a few degrees (approximately 1 degree), it is highly likely that the ball rolling on the top surface of the electric device K640a will flow down while contacting the plate-shaped body K202 of the base member K201 located at the rear, which reduces the possibility of the ball moving toward the decorative cover K220 (flowing down toward the front), which is the premise for the ball to enter between the small design K221b and the electric device K640a.

This makes it difficult for a ball to get between the small design K221b and the electric device K640a, making it easier to prevent changes in the appearance of the small design K221b when a ball is rolling on the electric device K640a.

In FIG. 1735, the electric device K640a in the first electric device K240 is in a retracted state (de-energized state), and the movable plate K251 in the second electric device K250 is in a retracted state (energized state). This state mainly corresponds to the state during a round of play in the special play state.

The state shown in FIG. 1735 is a state in which a ball flowing down the winning unit K200 is not guided to the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1729), but may be guided to the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1731).

When the movable plate K251 is in the retracted state, the tip of the movable plate K251 is fully retracted to the rear side of the guide opening K205 (see FIG. 1732), and is not visible in the direction view DR21. In addition, due to the effect of total reflection of the extension part K209 (see FIG. 1732) that covers the upper side of the movable plate K251 in the retracted state, it is not possible to see the movable plate K251 through the extension part K209, so that in the state shown in FIG. 1735, the movable plate K251 can be completely hidden.

In the state shown in FIG. 1735, the electric device K640a does not form the background color of the small design K221b, and the movable plate K251 is not visible inside the border of the large design K221a, so the shape of the large design K221a itself can be impressively seen by the player.

Therefore, since the state in which the shape of the large design K221a itself is viewed without being cut corresponds to the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning port K650a, the player can predict how the ball that entered the winning unit K200 will flow down from the viewing state of the large design K221a. Therefore, the degree of fatigue of the player can be reduced compared to the case in which it is necessary to view the ball itself in order to understand (predict) the flow of the ball that entered the winning unit K200.

In this embodiment, in the direction view DR21, the state change can be grasped based on whether or not the movable plate K251 is visible inside the border of the large design K221a, while in the direction view DR22, as described above in FIG. 1731, the state change can be grasped based on whether or not the thickness of the border of the large design K221a changes partially by visually recognizing the upper edge K207a in red.

Thus, in this embodiment, while the movable plate K251 is the common entity that causes the change in appearance, multiple objects that change appearance are provided, so that even if the direction in which the player views the winning unit K200 changes during play, the objective of allowing the player to predict how the ball that has entered the winning unit K200 will flow down from the viewing mode of the large design K221a can be achieved.

In FIG. 1736, the electric role K640a of the first electric role K240 is in an extended state (excited state), and the movable plate K251 of the second electric role K250 is in a retracted state (excited state). This state corresponds to a state in which the electric role K640a is driven when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol during a round of play in the special play state.

The state shown in FIG. 1736 is a state in which a ball flowing down the winning unit K200 can be guided to the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1729) or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1731).

In this state, the small design K221b is seen as a single decoration with the red background color of the electric feature K640a, which is seen as entering inside the border of the large design K221a. In this case, the white small design K221b can be made to stand out compared to when the background color is colorless, as shown in FIG. 1733.

Therefore, since the small design K221b is viewed as a single point decoration with the red background color of the electric device K640a corresponding to the state in which the ball can be guided to the second winning port K640, the player can predict from the viewing state of the small design K221b whether the ball that entered the winning unit K200 will enter the second winning port K640. Therefore, the degree of fatigue of the player can be reduced compared to the case in which it is necessary to view the ball itself to grasp (predict) the flow of the ball that entered the winning unit K200.

On the other hand, in the special game state, the excitation time of the electric device K640a is extremely short, so it is configured to make it difficult for a ball to actually enter the second winning hole K640. Therefore, by using the electric device K640a, it is possible to execute a performance that only changes the appearance of the small design K221b (making it difficult for a winning ball to enter the second winning hole K640).

Figure 1737 is a rear perspective view of the game board K13, and Figure 1738 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board K13. As shown in Figure 1737, the base plate K60 has an opening K60w formed in a shape that allows the center frame K86 to be fitted inside. In addition, the base plate K60 has a sufficient thickness in terms of strength in the formation range of the play area whose outer edge is defined by the inner rail K61 and the outer rail K62 (see Figure 1726), and has formation recesses K60a to K60d outside the formation range of the play area where the thickness is reduced so as to be recessed from the rear side.

The opening K60w is formed to have the same shape even if the position in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the base plate K60 is different in order to support the center frame K86 across the front-rear width. This allows the center frame K86 to be stably supported.

The first forming recess K60a on the upper left side is located behind a resin shielding member K74 arranged on the upper left side of the outer rail K62 (see FIG. 1726), and the first forming recess K60a is concealed by the shielding member K74.

The second forming recess K60b on the upper right side is located behind the outer edge member K73 (see FIG. 1726) and in the upper range of the outer edge member K73, and the second forming recess K60b is concealed by the outer edge member K73.

The third formation recess K60c on the lower left side is located on the lower left side of the outer rail K62 (see FIG. 1726) and is located behind a plastic shielding member K75 that houses the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B, and the third formation recess K60c is concealed by the shielding member K75.

As shown in FIG. 1738, the game board K13 includes a long gutter front member K91 fastened to the rear side of the lower part of the base plate K60, a gutter rear member K92 fastened to the rear side of the gutter front member K91 and constituting a gutter for flowing balls down together with the gutter front member K91, an illumination board K93 fastened to the rear side of the gutter rear member K92 and having LEDs arranged to irradiate light to the front side, a prevention member K94 fastened to the gutter rear member K92 so as to sandwich the illumination board K93 so as to prevent the illumination board K93 from being removed, an auxiliary member K95 that constituting a gutter for flowing balls down together with the prevention member K94, and a blocking member K96 that has the function of blocking unnecessary openings that arise from manufacturing conditions in the gutter rear member K92 and functions as a support part for bundling electrical wiring with cable ties.

The light from the illumination board K93 is directed toward the general winning opening K63 located on the lower left side of the game area. In other words, by turning on the LEDs on the illumination board K93, the general winning opening K63 can be made bright and visible, so the attention of the player to the general winning opening K63 can be changed by turning on or off the LEDs on the illumination board K93.

The fourth forming recess K60d on the lower right side is positioned below the lower edge of the outer rail K62 so as to include the area behind the lower end forming portion K73a (see FIG. 1728) of the outer edge member K73, and at least a portion of the fourth forming recess K60d is concealed by the lower end forming portion K73a.

The left side portions of the front gutter member K91 and rear gutter member K92 are arranged behind the fourth formation recess K60d, allowing the balls to flow down the area behind the fourth formation recess K60d.

Figure 1739 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit K300. In the explanation of Figure 1739, refer to Figure 1727 as appropriate. The operating unit K300 includes an upper decorative member K330 that is elongated from side to side and arranged above the display area of the third pattern display device K81 when viewed from the front, a left decorative member K350 that is elongated from top to bottom and arranged to the left of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 when viewed from the front, a front layer movable device K400 to which the upper decorative member K330 and the left decorative member K350 are fastened to the front side, a rear layer movable device K800 that is arranged behind the front layer movable device K400, and a rear case K310 to which the front layer movable device K400 and the rear layer movable device K800 are housed and fastened.

The rear case K310 is formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion K311 and an outer wall portion K312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion K311. The rear case K310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening K311a in the center of the bottom wall portion K311. The opening K311a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device K81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case K310 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall K312 along the rear surface of the game board K13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate K313 that is supported by a surface of the game board K13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 1726).

When the support plate portion K313 is supported by the surface of the game board K13, the game board K13 and the operating unit K300 can be fixed together by screwing a fastening screw into the base plate K60 of the game board K13, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board K13 and the operating unit K300.

The front layer movable device K400 includes a first movable device K401 that is elongated from left to right and can move up and down from the upper end position as an initial position, and a second movable device K701 that can move up and down at a central left-right position below the first movable device K401.

The upper decorative member K330 has a light-emitting substrate disposed inside, and the light emitted from the light-emitting substrate to the front is directed onto the translucent decorative portion to create a light-emitting effect, while being formed in a size that allows it to conceal the first movable device K401 in the initial position.

The left decorative member K350 has a light-emitting board disposed inside, and the light emitted from the light-emitting board to the front is directed onto the translucent decorative portion to create a light-emitting effect, while being sized to be able to conceal the drive force transmission mechanism on the left side of the first movable device K401.

Since the front layer side movable device K400 is disposed at the front side, the rear layer side movable device K800 is disposed at the back side (rear side) of the rear case K310 relative to the front layer side movable device K400, and is therefore disposed closer to the variable display unit K80 than the front layer side movable device K400.

The rear layer side movable device K800 is equipped with a third movable device K801 that operates to expose or hide the display area of the third pattern display device K81 by sliding plate-like members arranged in layers in the front and back directions in the left and right directions.

The rear layer side movable device K800 is fastened to the bottom wall portion K311 of the rear case K310, and the front layer side movable device K400 is fastened to the bottom wall portion K311 of the rear case K310 via a fastening portion that passes outside the rear layer side movable device K800, and is fastened to a non-movable portion of the rear layer side movable device K800. First, an overview of the operation control of the operating unit K300 will be described by way of example.

Figures 1740 to 1746 are front views of the operating unit K300 showing an example of the operating control of the operating unit K300. Figure 1740 illustrates a case where the first movable device K401, the second movable device K701, and the third movable device K801 are each in a performance standby state. That is, in Figure 1740, the first movable device K401 is hidden by the upper decorative member K330, and the third movable device K801 is hidden by the front layer movable device K400, so the first movable device K401 and the third movable device K801 cannot be seen from the front.

Figure 1741 illustrates a case in which the second movable device K701 is placed in a lowered position lower than the performance standby state, and the first movable device K401 falls to enter the vacant space, placing the first movable device K401 in a dropped position state, and the third movable device K801 is placed in a performance standby state.

The positions of the first movable device K401 and the second movable device K701 are not shifted forward or backward (they overlap when viewed from above), and if the second movable device K701 remained in a standby state for performance, it would collide with the first movable device K401 after it falls. Therefore, the second movable device K701 is first placed in a descending position, and then the first movable device K401 is driven and controlled to fall.

The first movable device K401 is configured so that at least the rearmost component (the main body K541 of the long device K540) is opaque, so the display by the third pattern display device K81 is hidden in the portion overlapping with the first movable device K401. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 1741, the player cannot fully see the display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 when viewed from the front.

Figure 1742 illustrates a case in which the first movable device K401 and the second movable device K701 are each in a performance standby state, and the third movable device K801 is in a blocked state blocking the front side of the third pattern display device K81.

The third movable device K801 has plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, which are light-transmitting and have different degrees of transparency. As a result, when the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81 is blocked by the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 as shown in FIG. 1742, it is possible to form a portion where the display of the third pattern display device K81 is easily visible, and a portion where the display of the third pattern display device K81 is hidden by the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 and the decoration on the surface of the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 is easily visible.

Figure 1743 shows a case in which the first movable device K401 maintains the up-down position in the dropped position, the moving device K560 slides to the left, the second movable device K701 that was in a lowered position is changed to a performance standby state, and the third movable device K801 is placed in a blocked state.

The moving device K560 is slid left and right to a position where it does not interfere with the second movable device K701 (see FIG. 1743), and then the second movable device K701 is moved, thereby narrowing the gap between the moving device K560 and the second movable device K701 and moving the second movable device K701 closer to the center of the operating unit K300 when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to see the first movable device K401 and the second movable device K701.

As shown in FIG. 1743, the displacement trajectory of the first movable device K401 and the displacement trajectory of the third movable device K801 partially overlap when viewed from the front, but the displacement trajectory of the first movable device K401 and the displacement trajectory of the third movable device K801 are shifted front to back (do not overlap when viewed from above), so the first movable device K401 and the third movable device K801 do not collide (do not interfere) with each other during operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1743, when the first movable device K401 is changed from the performance standby state to the drop position state, the third movable device K801 can be changed from the performance standby state to the blocked state.

In this way, it is possible to execute control to drive the first movable device K401, the second movable device K701, and the third movable device K801 from a performance standby state, thereby realizing a unified operation while avoiding collisions between the movable devices K401, K701, and K801.

In the state shown in FIG. 1743, it is possible to execute a performance that gives meaning by visually displaying the decoration drawn on the left side of the third movable device K801, the decoration drawn on the moving device K560 of the first movable device K401, the decoration drawn on the second movable device K701, and the decoration drawn on the decorative cover K220 of the winning unit K200 in a series (the decoration drawn on the third movable device K801 is omitted from this figure. Details will be described later).

Figure 1744 illustrates a case where the first movable device K401 and the third movable device K801 are in a performance standby state, and the second movable device K701 is in a raised position state. In the performance standby state, the second movable device K701 overlaps mostly with the lower part of the center frame K86, resulting in poor visibility (see Figure 1726), but in the raised position state, more than half of it is positioned above the lower part of the center frame K86, improving the visibility of the second movable device K701.

Figure 1745 illustrates a case where the second movable device K701 and the third movable device K801 are in a performance standby state, and only the right side of the first movable device K401 has fallen to a midway position, resulting in a one-sided falling state, and Figure 1746 illustrates a case where the moving device K560 of the first movable device K401 has been displaced from the state of Figure 1745 to the right end of the range of motion.

When the first movable device K401 changes between a performance standby state and a one-sided falling state, the position of the moving device K560 is maintained at the center in the left-right direction. This makes it possible to prevent the left-right balance of the first movable device K401 from being lost when it is raised or lowered.

In the one-sided falling state shown in FIG. 1746, the attitude of the moving device K560 tilts in a manner that causes it to fall diagonally downward to the right, causing the design on the front side of the moving device K560 to tilt and look bad. In contrast, in this embodiment, the design on the front side of the moving device K560 is controlled to continue rotating during the time it changes from the performance standby state to the one-sided falling state and until it changes again to the performance standby state. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the design on the front side of the moving device K560 tilts and looks bad.

In this embodiment, the rotation of the design on the front side of the moving device K560 is clockwise when viewed from the front (rightward forward rotation direction) when the moving device K560 moves to the right when viewed from the front, and counterclockwise when viewed from the front (leftward forward rotation direction) when the moving device K560 moves to the left when viewed from the front. This allows the player to understand the left-right movement and rotational movement of the moving device K560 in relation to each other, resulting in a unified movement presentation.

As shown in Figures 1740 to 1746, the range in which the display of the third pattern display device K81 located behind it can be seen changes depending on the state of each movable device K401, K701, K801. In other words, when all of the movable devices K401, K701, K801 are in a performance standby state, the range in which the display of the third pattern display device K81 can be easily seen (area and position) is at its widest (see Figure 1740), and the range in which the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is hidden (area and position) is configured to differ depending on the movable devices K401, K701, K801 whose state changes from the performance standby state.

The extent to which the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is hidden (area and position) also differs depending on the degree of change in the state of each movable device K401, K701, K801 from the performance standby state. Also, for example, even if the same movable device (e.g., the first movable device K401) is operating, the amount of operation and the area and position of the first movable device K401 that overlaps with the display area of the third pattern display device K81 differ between the state shown in FIG. 1741 and the state shown in FIG. 1746, so the extent to which the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is hidden (area and position) differs.

In other words, in the third pattern display device K81, the control is designed to allow the display performance to be viewed in the range that is not hidden by each movable device K401, K701, K801 (including the range where the display can be viewed by looking through the movable devices K401, K701, K801), and since the range that is hidden by each movable device K401, K701, K801 (excluding the range where the display can be viewed by looking through the movable devices K401, K701, K801) varies in multiple types, it is possible to increase the variety of display performance in the range that is not hidden by each movable device K401, K701, K801, and the presentation effect of the display performance can be improved.

Next, the first movable device K401 will be described with reference to Fig. 1747 to Fig. 1768. Fig. 1747 is an exploded front perspective view of the front layer side movable device K400, and Fig. 1748 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front layer side movable device K400.

The first movable device K401, which constitutes the front layer movable device K400 except for the second movable device K701, includes a pair of support members K410 made up of a pair of members having a substantially symmetrical shape and fastened to the rear case K310, a pair of rotating members K430 rotatably supported on the lower side of the support members K410, a pair of drive motors KMT41a, KMT41b that generate a driving force to rotate the rotating members K430, and a lifting device K500 that is configured to be able to move up and down depending on the rotation state of the rotating members K430.

The first movable device K401 further includes a pair of left and right front cover members K440 fastened to the support member K410 so as to cover the front opening of the support member K410, a switching device K460 fastened to the right front cover member K440 from the front side and switching the operating mode of the lifting device K500, and a pair of left and right state change devices K470 that change between an allowable state that allows the lifting device K500 to descend and a preventive state that prevents the lifting device K500 from descending in response to the rotation state of the rotating member K430.

The first movable device K401 further includes a decorative member K402 made of light-transmitting resin and fastened to the lower part of the left front cover member K440 from the front side, an illumination board K403 on which light-emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the decorative member K402 are arranged, a decorative member K404 made of light-transmitting resin and fastened to the lower part of the right front cover member K440 from the front side, an illumination board K405 on which light-emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the decorative member K404 are arranged, and an upper cover member K406 that closes the gap between the support member K410 and the front cover member K440 and the second movable device K701 from above when the front layer movable device K400 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 1739).

The front cover member K440 will be described in detail. The front cover member K440 includes a plate-shaped body K441 formed in a substantially L-shape, a guide long hole K442 that is drilled in the plate-shaped body K441 as a long hole extending in the vertical direction and guides the lifting device K500 as it moves up and down, an absorbing member K443 that is a resin member disposed near the lower end of the guide long hole K442 and is capable of absorbing impacts when the lifting device K500 moves down, a protruding portion K444 that protrudes from the back surface of the plate-shaped body K441 toward the rotating member K430, and a connecting member K445 that is disposed in front of the guide long hole K442 and is connected to a fastening portion K533 of the lifting device K500 that passes through the guide long hole K444 to the front.

Fig. 1749 is an exploded front perspective view of the first movable device K401, and Fig. 1750 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first movable device K401. Figs. 1749 and 1750 show the support member K410, the rotating member K430, and the state change device K470 of the first movable device K401, and omit the illustration of the front cover member K440 and the switching device K460.

1749 and 1750, the support member K410 includes a main body K411 formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from the front, a support K412 that is cylindrically protruding from the front side of the lower part of the main body K411 and rotatably supports the rotating member K430, a detection sensor K413 that is disposed on the left-right outer side of the support K412 to detect the attitude of the rotating member K430, a support K414 that is cylindrically protruding from the front side of the lower end of the main body K411 and rotatably supports the lower rotating member K471 of the state change device K470, and a long hole that extends in the vertical direction to guide the lifting device K500. a guide elongated hole K415 formed along the guide elongated hole K415, a rack K416 with gear teeth formed along the guide elongated hole K415, guide protrusions K417 formed in a vertical line on the rear side of the main body K411 and guiding the lifting and lowering movement of the interlocking member K473 of the state change device K470, a detection sensor K418 disposed on the front side of the upper end of the main body K411 and capable of detecting whether the lifting device K500 is positioned in a position for a performance standby state, and a coil spring K419 whose upper end is suspended from the main body K411 and whose lower end is hooked onto the hook-shaped portion K515 of the lifting device K500.

The support member K410 further includes a metal rod K421 extending in the vertical direction to guide the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting device K500, a support receiving portion K422 into which the lower end of the metal rod K421 is inserted, a fixed member K423 fastened and fixed to the lifting device K500 at a position where the metal rod K421 is sandwiched between the lifting device K500 and the metal rod K421 in order to align the lifting device K500 with the metal rod K421, and an auxiliary member K424 as a retainer to prevent the upper end of the metal rod K421 from slipping out of the main body portion K411 of the support member K410 in the upward and forward directions.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped body K441 of the front cover member K440 is configured to perform the same function as the auxiliary member K424 for the metal bar K421 on the left side, so that the auxiliary member K424 is disposed only on the right side.

The rotating member K430 is made up of a disk-shaped main body K431 on which gear teeth K432 are formed all around the circumference on the back side in order to transmit the rotation of the drive gear KG42 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motors KMT41a and KMT41b via the intermediate gear KG43 supported by the main body K411 of the support member K410, a rotation center hole K433 that is circularly drilled in the center of the main body K431 and through which the support part K412 of the support member K410 is inserted, and a rotation center hole K433 that is circularly drilled in the center of the main body K431 and through which the support part K412 of the support member K410 is inserted. It is equipped with a transmission tubular part K434 that is rotatably connected to the outer peripheral edge of the rotating member K431 with a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating member K430 and supports the lifting device K500, a notch part K435 formed in the concentric circular ridge of the rotation center hole K433 with a width that allows detection by the detection sensor K413 of the support member K410, and a guide groove K436 formed by a set of ridges that protrude from the back side near the outer peripheral side of the main body part K431.

The state change device K470 includes a lower rotating member K471 rotatably supported on the support portion K414 of the support member K410, a switching protrusion K472 protruding from the left and right inner ends of the lower rotating member K471 toward the rotating member K430 and received in the guide groove K436, an interlocking member K473 connected to each other so as to be movable relative to each other via a shaft portion disposed on the left and right outer ends of the lower rotating member K471, and a plate-shaped The interlocking member K473 is provided with a plurality of long guide holes K474 that are drilled vertically as elongated holes through which the guide protrusions K417 of the support member K410 are inserted to change the operating direction of the interlocking member K473 to the vertical direction, a switching protrusion K475 that protrudes from the front side near the upper end of the interlocking member K473, and an upper rotating member K476 that is rotatably supported by the main body K411 of the support member K410 and whose rotational position changes depending on the arrangement of the switching protrusions K475.

The lifting device K500 is configured to be able to move upward when supported by the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 and is lifted when the vertical position of the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 changes upward.

Figure 1751 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting device K500, and Figure 1752 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting device K500. The lifting device K500 includes a pair of left and right lower members K510 that can be directly pushed up by the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430, a pair of left and right speed change gears K520 rotatably supported on the rear side of the upper end of the lower members K510, a pair of left and right upper members K530 that have racks K532 that mesh with the speed change gear K520 so that the amount of lifting movement of the lower members K510 is increased or decreased by the speed change gear K520 and transmitted, and that move up and down in conjunction with the lower members K510, a long device K540 whose left and right ends are supported by the upper members K530, and a moving device K560 that is configured to be slidable in the long direction of the long device K540.

The lower member K510 includes a main body K511 formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from the front, a flat portion K512 formed in a plane perpendicular to the moving direction (up-down direction) of the lower member K510 at the lower end of the main body K511, a support fastening portion K513 cylindrically protruding from the rear side of the main body K511 and having a female screw formed therein, configured to be able to support the speed change gear K520, a guided portion K514 guided by a metal rod K421 (see FIG. 1749), and a hook-shaped portion K515 formed in a hook shape on the front side of the upper end of the main body K511 and on which the lower end of the coil spring K419 (see FIG. 1749) is hooked.

The screw fastened to the support fastening portion K513 functions as a retainer for the speed change gear K520, and its head is positioned inside the long guide hole K415 of the support member K410. This makes it possible to absorb the protrusion of the head of the screw fastened to the support fastening portion K513, and to support the rear side of the speed change gear K520 with the front side of the main body portion K411 of the support member K410. Furthermore, since the movement direction of the screw fastened to the support fastening portion K513 is limited by the long guide hole K415, the lower member K510 can be moved stably in the vertical direction.

Through the hook-shaped portion K515, the lower member K510 is biased upward by the coil spring K419 (see FIG. 1749). This allows the biasing force of the coil spring K419 to assist the upward movement of the lifting device K500.

The speed change gear K520 has a first gear K522 formed on the rear side of the intermediate disc K521, and a second gear K523 formed coaxially with the first gear K522 on the front side of the intermediate disc K521. The intermediate disc K521 is formed as a circular plate portion having a diameter larger than that of the first gear K522 and larger than that of the second gear K523, thereby preventing a situation in which a mating member meshed with the first gear K522 or the second gear K523 shifts position in the front-rear direction and meshes with the opposite second gear K523 or the first gear K522.

The first gear K522 meshes with the rack K416 (see FIG. 1749) of the support member K410, and the second gear K523 meshes with the rack K532 of the upper member K530. The number of teeth of the first gear K522 is 8, and the number of teeth of the second gear K523 is 12.

Therefore, when the lower member K510 moves up and down, the upper member K530 moves relative to the lower member K510 by an amount that is 1.5 times the amount of up and down movement of the lower member K510, but details of the up and down movement will be described later.

The upper member K530 includes a main body K531 that is long in the vertical direction, a rack K532 that is extended vertically outward on the rear side of the main body K531 to the left and right, a pair of cylindrical fastening parts K533 that protrude from the front side of the main body K531 and have female threads formed therein, a rotating shaft part K534 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear side of the main body K531 and supports the long device K540 so that it can rotate, an auxiliary protrusion K535 that protrudes cylindrically in a direction parallel to the rotating shaft part K534, a guided part K536 that is guided by a metal rod K421 (see FIG. 1749), and a curved receiving part K537 that is formed as a curved surface that is supported by the upper rotating member K476 (see FIG. 1749).

A connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1747) is fastened to the fastening portion K533. That is, the connecting member K445 is fastened to the tip of the fastening portion K533 which passes through the elongated guide hole K442 (see FIG. 1747) of the front cover member K440 to the front side. This limits the movement of the fastening portion K533 to the elongated guide hole K442, thereby stabilizing the upward and downward movement of the upper member K530.

The upper member K530 is guided by the guided portion K536, and the lower member K510 is guided by the guided portion K514, to the metal rod K421 (see FIG. 1749), so that the lower member K510 and the upper member K530 can be prevented from falling in the front-back and left-right directions.

Figure 1753 is an exploded front perspective view of the long-length device K540, and Figure 1754 is an exploded rear perspective view of the long-length device K540. In Figures 1753 and 1754, the upper member K530 and the moving device K560 are illustrated to facilitate understanding of the positional relationship.

The long-length device K540 includes a main body K541 formed in the shape of a long plate, a support shaft K542 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear side at the center of the left and right sides of the main body K541, a central gear K543 that is rotatably supported by the support shaft K542, a number of guide protrusions K544 that protrude cylindrically in a direction parallel to the support shaft K542, and a pair of slide racks K545 that are guided by the guide protrusions K544 and are configured to be slidable in the long direction of the main body K541.

A left-right long recess K541a is formed in the front part of the main body K541, with its end position formed inside the left-right outer ends. The recess K541a functions as a part that receives the lower end part on the rear side of the moving device K560 when the long device K540 is in the assembled state (see FIG. 1751).

The slide rack K545 is a pair of left and right plate-like members whose vertical widths on the left and right inner sides are shorter than their vertical widths on the left and right outer sides in the state shown in FIG. 1754, and includes a receiving portion K546 drilled in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the left and right outer ends and receiving the rotating shaft portion K534 of the upper member K530, an arc-shaped portion K547 drilled in an arc shape centered on the receiving portion K546 and receiving the auxiliary protrusion K535, a plurality of guide long holes K548 drilled in the left-right direction in the state shown in FIG. 1754 and receiving the guide protrusion portion K544, and a rack K549 that meshes with the central gear K543.

The sliding direction of the slide rack K545 is set to the direction in which the guide long hole K548 extends (the left-right direction in the state shown in FIG. 1754, the longitudinal direction of the main body K541). Therefore, based on the state in which the left and right upper members K530 are aligned in the vertical direction (closest position), as the vertical positional deviation between the upper members K530 increases, the slide rack K545 moves relative to the left-right upper members K530 toward the outside in the longitudinal direction of the main body K541; details will be described later.

The long device K540 further includes a decorative member K551 fastened to the main body K541 from the front side, an illumination board K552 on which an LED that irradiates light to the front side is arranged inside the decorative member K551, a motor support member K553 fastened to the left end of the decorative member K551, a screw shaft K554 that is configured to change the axial position of the moving device K560 by rotating via a transmission gear group KG52 that can transmit the driving force of the drive motor KMT51 supported by the motor support member K553, a support receiving portion K555 that rotatably receives both ends of the screw shaft K554 on the rear side of the decorative member K551, and photocoupler-type detection sensors K556a to K556c that are provided on the rear side of the illumination board K552 at a position that penetrates the rear plate of the decorative member K551 with the detection groove facing the rear side.

The axial direction of the screw shaft K554 coincides with the longitudinal direction of the main body K541, and the axial movement of the screw shaft K554 of the moving device K560 is limited to the range in which the recess K541a is formed.

The detection sensors K556a to K556c are configured to be able to detect the position of the moving device K560. That is, when the moving device K560 is positioned in the left-right center position when the first movable device K401 is in the standby state for performance, it is detected by the center detection sensor K556b, when the moving device K560 slides left and right along the axial direction of the screw shaft 554 and is positioned at the right end position of its movement range, it is detected by the right detection sensor K556a, and when it is positioned at the left end position of its movement range, it is detected by the left detection sensor K556c.

Fig. 1755 is an exploded front perspective view of the moving device K560, and Fig. 1756 is an exploded rear perspective view of the moving device K560. The moving device K560 comprises a main body K561, a front receiving part K571 fastened to the upper end of the main body K561, a rear receiving part K572 fastened to the front receiving part K571 from the rear side, and a nut KNT61 that is held between the front receiving part K571 and the rear receiving part K572 and is configured to prevent rotation around its own opening direction (arrow L-R direction in Fig. 1755) as a rotation axis.

The nut KNT61 has a helical protrusion formed on the inner periphery of the long opening KNT61a, which corresponds to the helical groove cut on the outer periphery of the screw shaft K554 (see Figure 1753).

As a result, when the screw shaft K554 is rotated while inserted into the long opening KNT61a, the nut KNT61 is moved in the axial direction of the screw shaft K554 in accordance with the amount of rotation. In other words, the axial arrangement of the screw shaft K554 of the moving device K560 is changed in accordance with the drive of the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1753) (the structure of a ball screw is used).

The front receiving portion K571 is provided with a detectable plate portion K571a that protrudes from below the position where the nut KNT61 is disposed toward the front side in a plate shape. The output from the detection sensors K556a to K556c (see FIG. 1754) of the long device K540 can be made different depending on whether the detectable plate portion K571a is located in the detection groove of the detection sensors K556a to K556c (see FIG. 1754) or not. From the difference in the output from the detection sensors K556a to K556c, the audio lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) can determine whether the moving device K560 is located in the left-right center position in the performance standby state of the first movable device K401, is located at the left-right end position of the moving range, or is neither of these.

The moving device K560 further includes a motor receiver K575 fastened to the lower end of the main body K561, a drive motor KMT61 held by the motor receiver K575, a drive gear KMG62 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor KMT61 and disposed between the main body K561 and the motor receiver K575, a transmission gear KMG63 rotatably supported on the support shaft K562 of the main body K561 at a position meshed with the drive gear KMG62, an end gear KMG64 meshed with the transmission gear KMG63, and a rotating decorative member K578 whose central insertion portion K579, which is inserted into the circular opening K563 of the main body K561, is fastened to the end gear KMG64.

The moving device K560 further includes an illumination board K564 that is disposed on the front side of the main body K561 and has a circular opening K564a formed at a position corresponding to the circular opening K563, and a light receiving member K567 that has a circular opening K567a formed at a position corresponding to the circular opening K564a of the illumination board K564 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a cut formed therein that can refract (scatter) the light irradiated from the illumination board K564.

The illumination board K564 and the light receiving member K567 are stacked on the main body K561 in the order of illumination board K564, light receiving member K567, and are arranged so that the central axis of the circular opening K563 coincides with the central axis of the circular opening K564a and the circular opening K567a, and are fastened and fixed to the main body K561.

A photocoupler type detection sensor K565 is disposed on the rear side of the illumination board K564. The detection groove of the detection sensor K565 is located on the rear side of the opening K561a drilled in the main body K561, and is capable of receiving the annular rib of the transmission gear KMG63.

The annular rib of the transmission gear KMG63 has cutouts KMG63a cut out at equal intervals (180 degree intervals), and the output from the detection sensor K565 can be made different depending on whether the cutouts KMG63a are positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565 or not. From the difference in output of this detection sensor K565, the voice lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) can determine the phase of the transmission gear KMG63 and, therefore, the phase of the rotating decorative member K578.

In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the terminal gear KMG64 is half that of the transmission gear MG63, so that when the transmission gear MG63 rotates half a turn, the terminal gear KMG64 rotates once. When the transmission gear MG63 rotates half a turn from the phase where the notch portion KMG63a is located in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565, the notch portion KMG63a is again located in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565.

In other words, when the notch portion KMG63a is located in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565, the phase of the terminal gear KMG64 and the rotating decorative member K578 will be the same regardless of which notch portion KMG63a is located.

Figures 1757(a) and 1757(b) are partially enlarged front views of the front layer movable device K400. Figures 1757(a) and 1757(b) mainly show the switching device K460, and for convenience, the decorative portion on the front side is partially broken away to allow the internal structure to be seen. Figure 1757(a) shows the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is de-energized, and Figure 1757(b) shows the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized.

As shown in Figures 1757(a) and 1757(b), the switching device K460 includes a base member K461 fastened to the plate-shaped body K441 of the right-side front cover member K440, a stopper member K462 supported on the base member K461 so as to be capable of rotating about the support hole portion K462b, a drive solenoid KSOL41 fastened to the base member K461, and a transmission member K463 supported on the base member K461 so as to be capable of rotating about the support hole portion K463b and configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the drive solenoid KSOL41 to the stopper member K462.

The stopper member K462 includes an arm portion K462a having a support hole portion K462b formed at its end, a guide elongated hole K462c formed in the longitudinal direction of the arm portion K462a, and a protruding receiving portion K462d protruding from the end of the arm portion K462a opposite the end at which the support hole portion K462b is formed in the longitudinal direction of the arm portion K462a toward the rear side.

The transmission member K463 includes an arm portion K463a in which a support hole portion K463b is formed, an auxiliary arm portion K463c extending from the support hole portion K463b in a direction different from that of the arm portion K463a, a transmission base end projection K463d projecting rearward from the extended tip of the auxiliary arm portion K463c and connected in such a manner that the transmission member K463 is rotated by the linear displacement of the linear motion portion KSOL41a of the drive solenoid KSOL41, and a transmission tip projection K463e projecting rearward from the tip of the arm portion K463a and received in the guide elongated hole K462c of the stopper member K462.

The operation of the switching device K460 will be described. The base plate member K461 is disposed in front of the connecting member K445 so as not to enter the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445, while the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 extends below the base plate member K461 and to the rear of the base plate member K461, and depending on the state, enters the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445.

As shown in FIG. 1757(a), when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is in a non-energized state, the protruding receiving portion K462d is disposed in front of the guide elongated hole K442 and enters the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445.

That is, the downward displacement of the connecting member K445 in the state shown in FIG. 1757(a) is stopped midway by the protruding receiver K462d. In this case, the load of the lifting device K500, etc. is applied to the protruding receiver K462d via the connecting member K445. However, since the protruding receiver K462d is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of the load via the connecting member K445) starting from the support hole portion K462b, it is possible to easily prevent the stopper member K462 from rotating due to the load of the lifting device K500, etc. via the connecting member K445.

As a result, when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is in a non-energized state, the movement of the connecting member K445 can be stopped midway along the length of the guide slot K442. Even when performing operational control that frequently causes the connecting member K445 to stop midway, there is no need to excite the drive solenoid KSOL41 to stop the connecting member K445 midway, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of times the solenoid is energized, thereby extending the life of the drive solenoid KSOL41.

As shown in FIG. 1757(b), when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is excited from the state shown in FIG. 1757(a), the vertical displacement of the linear motion part KSOL41a rotates the transmission member K463, and the stopper member K462 rotates in conjunction with this rotation, causing the protruding receiving part K462d of the stopper member K462 to move away from the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445.

As a result, when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is excited, the connecting member K445 is not stopped by the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462, and the connecting member K445 is able to move to the end of the guide elongated hole K442.

This allows the amount of movement of the upper member K530 (see FIG. 1751), which has the fastening portion K533 to which the connecting member K445 is fastened, to be switched between a state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is de-energized (see FIG. 1757(a)) and a state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized (see FIG. 1757(b)).

Figures 1758 to 1763 are partially enlarged front views of the first movable device K401. Figures 1758 to 1763 chronologically illustrate how the right side of the lifting device K500 moves up and down based on the first operating mode in which the rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In addition, in Figures 1758 to 1763, in order to facilitate understanding of the movable parts, the lower right end and upper right end of the main body K411 of the support member K410, the front side of the main body K511 of the lower member K510, the intermediate disk K521 and second gear K523 of the speed change gear K520, and the front side of the main body K531 of the upper member K530 are shown partially cut away.

Figure 1758 illustrates the first movable device K401 in a performance standby state. That is, the rotating member K430 is in a phase where the cutout portion K435 (see Figure 1750) is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K413, and the upper member K530 is prevented from moving up and down by being supported from below by the upper rotating member K476 in an inserted state with the curved receiving portion K537, and as the upper member K530 is prevented from moving up and down, the speed change gear K520 is also prevented from rotating, and the lower member K510 on which the speed change gear K520 is supported is also prevented from moving up and down.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 1758, even when the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 is retracted from below the lower member K510, the upper rotating member K476 prevents the upper member K530 from moving up and down, thereby preventing the lower member K510 from moving up and down.

In FIG. 1759, the drive gear KG42 is driven in a direction in which the rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 1758. During rotation of the rotating member K430, the transmission tubular portion K434 is disposed opposite the curved surface of the protruding portion K444. By disposing the protruding portion K444 closer to the rotation center of the rotating member K430 than the transmission tubular portion K434, and by disposing the protruding tip (rear tip) of the protruding portion K444 opposite the front side surface of the rotating member K430, it is possible to prevent a posture shift in which the transmission tubular portion K434 is displaced radially from the rotating member K430 (a posture shift in which the rotating member K430 is tilted relative to the rotation axis).

As a result, even if the rotating member K430 is subjected to a load in a direction that tilts the main body K431 relative to the rotation axis at an eccentric position, the change in posture of the rotating member K430 can be suppressed, thereby reducing the rotational resistance of the rotating member K430.

In FIG. 1759, the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is still maintained in the large diameter groove K436a of the guide groove K436. While the switching protrusion K472 is maintained in the large diameter groove K436a, the state of the state change device K470 is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 1758, and the vertical position of the lifting device K500 is also maintained.

Furthermore, FIG. 1758 illustrates the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1757(b)) in a non-excited state (see FIG. 1757(a)), and FIG. 1759 onwards illustrates the drive solenoid KSOL41 in an excited state (see FIG. 1757(b)) such that the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 is retracted from the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445.

In Figure 1760, the drive gear KG42 is driven in a direction in which the rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 1759, and the portion in which the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is received is switched from the large diameter groove K436a of the guide groove K436 to the small diameter groove K436b, showing the state immediately before the lifting device K500 starts to fall.

When the switching protrusion K472 is received in the small diameter groove K436b, the lower rotating member K471 rotates around the support portion K414 of the support member K410, and the rotation of the lower rotating member K471 moves the interlocking member K473 and the switching protrusion K475 up and down, causing the upper rotating member K476 to rotate around the support hole K476a from the advanced state to the retracted state.

The upper rotating member K476 has a rotating tip K476b arranged opposite the curved receiving portion K537, which is formed as an arc-shaped surface centered on the center of rotation in the support hole K476a. The curved receiving portion K537 is also formed from a curved surface shape that can come into surface contact with the rotating tip K476b of the upper rotating member K476 in the inserted state (see FIG. 1758).

This makes it possible to limit the resistance that occurs when the upper rotating member K476 is rotated from the state in which the curved receiving portion K537 abuts against the rotating tip portion K476b of the upper rotating member K476 in the advanced state to the retracted state, to frictional resistance, thereby preventing the resistance from becoming excessive.

In addition, the weight of the lifting device K500, which is applied to the upper rotating member K476 in the advanced state via the curved receiving portion K537, is applied to the upper rotating member K476 as a load in the direction opposite to the direction in which the upper rotating member K476 moves toward the retracted state (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 1760).

Therefore, while reducing the operating resistance between the curved receiving portion K537 and the upper rotating member K476, it is possible to prevent the upper rotating member K476 from changing to a retracted state due to the weight of the lifting device K500 being applied to the upper rotating member K476 via the curved receiving portion K537.

In addition, due to the shape of the upper rotating member K476 described above, when the left-right balance is lost, such as when the first movable device K401 falls on one side, and a load having a left-right component in addition to its own weight is applied to the upper rotating member K476 from the curved receiving portion K537, the load can be directed toward the center of rotation of the upper rotating member K476. This makes it possible to stabilize the posture of the upper rotating member K476 and stabilize the support of the lifting device K500.

In FIG. 1761, the dropped position state (see FIG. 1741) is shown as the state after the lifting device K500 has dropped from the state shown in FIG. 1760. Note that before the dropped position state is reached, not only the right side of the lifting device K500 but also the left side, the rotating members K430 are rotated and the upper rotating members K476 are rotated, but the rotation direction in the first operating mode of the rotating members K430 on the left side is the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front) to the rotation direction in the first operating mode of the rotating members K430 on the right side (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front).

The movement caused by the lifting device K500 falling is configured to occur up to a position where the upper member K530 is stopped by the absorbing member K443 (see FIG. 1748) of the front cover member K440, and is not configured to occur until the lower member K510 collides with the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430.

This makes it possible to prevent the impact load from being transmitted to the transmission tubular portion K434 when the lifting device K500 is dropped. In other words, it is possible to easily prevent damage caused by the impact of the lifting device K500 being transmitted to the transmission tubular portion K434 or the lower member K510.

The details of the lifting and lowering movements of the lower member K510, the speed change gear K520, and the upper member K530 of the lifting device K500 will be described. First, the lower member K510 and the upper member K530 are each guided by a common metal bar K421 so as to be able to slide in the vertical direction.

When the lower member K510 descends from the state shown in FIG. 1760, the speed change gear K520 rotates due to meshing with the rack K416 of the support member K410, and this rotation causes the rack K532 of the upper member K530 to move vertically relative to the speed change gear K520.

In other words, when the lower member K510 moves up and down, the upper member K530 moves relative to the lower member K510 by the amount of vertical movement of the shift gear K520 due to the movement of the lower member K510, as well as the amount of movement of the rack K532 of the upper member K530 that meshes with the shift gear K520 when it rotates.

In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the second gear K523 that meshes with the rack K532 of the upper member K530 is designed to be 1.5 times the number of teeth of the first gear K522 that meshes with the rack K416 of the support member K410 and rotates as the lower member K510 moves, so the upper member K530 moves an amount that is the amount of movement of the lower member K510 plus 1.5 times the length of the amount of movement of the lower member K510.

Therefore, the upper member K530 is moved up and down by a movement amount KVD2 that is 2.5 times the movement amount KVD1 of the lower member K510 (KVD1:KVD2=2:5). This makes it possible to avoid the vertical movement distance of the upper member K530 being limited to the vertical movement distance of the transmission tubular part K434 of the rotating member K430 rotated by the drive motors KMT41a, KMT41b (see FIG. 1749).

In other words, the diameter of the rotating member K430 can be kept small while the vertical movement distance of the upper member K530 can be designed to be long, thereby improving the design freedom of the arrangement of the upper member K530 and the rotating member K430.

The protrusion K444 is disposed to the left of the lower member K510, and the left end of the lower member K510 is guided in the vertical direction by the right flat surface of the protrusion K444. This makes it possible for the protrusion K444 to prevent the lower member K510 from shifting to the left.

Figure 1762 shows a state in which the lower member K510 is lifted by the transmission tubular portion K434 as a result of the rotating member K430 being further rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 1761, and the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is still received in the small diameter groove K436b of the rotating member K430.

When the rotating member K430 rotates, the transmission tubular portion K434 rotates and moves while rubbing against the underside of the lower member K510. However, since the underside of the lower member K510 is formed as a flat portion K512, the operating resistance between the transmission tubular portion K434 and the lower member K510 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the upward biasing force applied from the coil spring K419 to the lower member K510 reduces the load applied downward from the lower member K510 to the transmission tubular portion K434, thereby reducing the operating resistance generated between the transmission tubular portion K434 and the lower member K510.

Figure 1763 shows the state in which the rotating member K430 has been further rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 1762, and the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 has been received in the large diameter groove K436a of the rotating member K430.

In FIG. 1763, the upper rotating member K476 changes from the retracted state shown in FIG. 1762 to the advanced state. At this time, the curved receiving portion K537 of the upper member K530 is positioned above the rotating tip portion K476b of the upper rotating member K476, and a gap is generated between the curved receiving portion K537 and the rotating tip portion K476b. This makes it possible to reduce the operating resistance of the upper rotating member K476.

Here, in order to change the upper rotating member K476 from the retracted state to the advanced state, it is necessary to displace the interlocking member K473 upward against its own weight, which requires a greater force than when changing the upper rotating member K476 from the advanced state to the retracted state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the upper rotating member K476 is changed from a retracted state to an advanced state, a gap is created between the curved receiving portion K537 and the rotating tip portion K476b, thereby reducing the operating resistance of the upper rotating member K476 and preventing the force required to change the state from becoming excessive.

When the rotating member K430 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 1763, it returns to the state shown in FIG. 1758. In this way, when the rotating member K430 continues to rotate counterclockwise, the vertical movement of the lifting device K500 can be circulated. In other words, the first operating mode of the rotating member K430 is an operating mode that can circulate the vertical movement of the lifting device K500.

Figures 1764 and 1765 are partially enlarged front views of the first movable device K401. In Figures 1764 and 1765, a part of the second operating mode in which the right side of the lifting device K500 descends based on the rotation of the rotating member K430 clockwise from the state shown in Figure 1758 is illustrated in chronological order.

The second operating mode is an operating mode in which the rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise until the performance standby state is restored after changing from the performance standby state (see FIG. 1758) to FIG. 1764 and then to FIG. 1765.

In addition, in Figures 1764 and 1765, in order to facilitate understanding of the movable parts, the lower right end and upper right end of the main body K411 of the support member K410, the front side of the main body K511 of the lower member K510, the intermediate disk K521 and the second gear K523 of the speed change gear K520, and the front side of the main body K531 of the upper member K530 are shown partially broken away.

In addition, Figures 1764 and 1765 show the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see Figure 1757 (a)) in a non-excited state so that the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 enters the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445.

In FIG. 1764, the drive gear KG42 is driven in a direction in which the rotating member K430 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 1758. The upper rotating member K476 is changed to a retracted state based on the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 being received in the small diameter groove K436b of the rotating member K430, but the lifting device K500 does not fall because the lower member K510 is supported from below by the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430.

In other words, the lower member K510 maintains a state in which it is pressed against the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 by its own weight, and moves up and down as the rotating member K430 rotates so that the contact between the flat portion K512 and the transmission tubular portion K434 is maintained.

Figure 1765 shows the state in which the rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 1764, and the connecting member K445 is received by the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462, stopping the descent.

This stops the descent of the upper member K530 to which the connecting member K445 is fastened, and accordingly stops the descent of the lower member K510. Therefore, when the rotating member K430 is further rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 1765, the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 moves away from the flat portion K512 of the lower member K510.

When returning from the state shown in FIG. 1765 to the performance standby state, the rotating member K430 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 1765), and the transmission tubular portion K434 pushes up the lower member K510.

In this case, regardless of whether the rotation of the rotating member K430 starts from the state shown in FIG. 1765 or starts from a state in which the rotating member K430 is rotated slightly clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 1765, the load applied from the lifting device K500 to the transmission tubular portion K434 is generated from the state shown in FIG. 1765.

In the state shown in FIG. 1765, the transmission tubular part K434 is positioned directly to the right of the support part K412, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotating member K430, and the direction of movement of the transmission tubular part K434 (the direction of the tangent drawn to the movement trajectory of the transmission tubular part K434) faces in the vertical direction, so that an upward load can be efficiently applied to the lower member K510. This allows for a swift return operation from the state shown in FIG. 1765 to the performance standby state.

When the rotating member K430 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 1765, the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 comes into contact with the upper surface of the lower member K510 and can transmit a load directed downward to the lower member K510. In other words, since a load in a direction to raise the lower member K510 cannot be generated, the operation of the lifting device K500 does not cycle in drive control that continues to rotate the rotating member K430 clockwise as viewed from the front.

Figures 1766 and 1767 are partially enlarged rear views of the first movable device K401. Figure 1766 illustrates the first movable device K401 in a performance standby state (see Figure 1740), and Figure 1767 illustrates the first movable device K401 in a one-sided falling state (see Figure 1745).

When the first movable device K401 is in a standby state for performance as shown in FIG. 1766, the upper members K530 on both the left and right sides are supported by the upper rotating member K476 (see FIG. 1759). On the other hand, when the first movable device K401 is in a one-sided dropped state as shown in FIG. 1767, the upper member K530 on the left side is supported by the upper rotating member K476, while the upper member K530 on the right side is supported by the connecting member K445, which is fastened and fixed, on the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 (see FIG. 1765), thereby tilting the long device K540.

In the state shown in FIG. 1767, the distance between the left and right rotating shafts K534 is extended from the state shown in FIG. 1766, and the slide rack K545 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the long device K540 by the amount of this extension.

The pair of slide racks K545 are meshed with a common central gear K543 and displace in opposite directions along the longitudinal direction of the long-length device K540, so that the amount of displacement along the longitudinal direction of the long-length device K540 is common to both of them.

In other words, the amount of movement KSDa of the right-side slide rack K545 from the performance standby state is the same as the amount of movement KSDb of the left-side slide rack K545 from the performance standby state (KSDa = KSDb).

This makes it possible to suppress left-right positional deviation of the central gear K543 when changing from the state shown in FIG. 1766 to the state shown in FIG. 1767, thereby suppressing left-right positional deviation of the main body part K541 that supports the central gear K543.

Here, when the first movable device K401 is changed from the performance standby state to the drop position state, it is preferable that the left and right rotating members K430 (see FIG. 1750) are rotationally driven in the first operating mode, and the left and right upper rotating members K476 (see FIG. 1760) are simultaneously changed from the entering state in the performance standby state to the retracted state, so that the left and right upper members K530 (see FIG. 1761) drop simultaneously. Furthermore, during the raising operation, the left and right rotating members K430 are rotated at the same rotation angle, so that the lifting device K500 can be raised without any difference in height between the left and right.

However, it is difficult to make the operating resistance of the left and right rotating members K430 (see FIG. 1750) exactly the same, and since they are driven by the corresponding drive motors KMT41a and KMT41b (see FIG. 1750), there may be a slight difference in the rotation speed even when the same voltage is supplied, depending on the quality of the drive motors KMT41a and KMT41b. Therefore, when the lifting device K500 moves up and down, there may be a difference in the height position of the left and right sides of the lifting device K500.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the change in the vertical position of the transmission tubular portion K434 caused by the rotation of the rotating member K430 is increased by 2.5 times when it is transmitted from the lower member K510 to the upper member K530 (see Figs. 1758 to 1763). Therefore, even if the phase shift of the rotating member K430 is small, the shift is multiplied by 2.5 and appears as a shift in the height positions of the left and right sides of the long device K540 supported by the upper member K530.

In this way, in this embodiment, a misalignment in height between the left and right sides of the lifting device K500 can occur. If a misalignment in height between the left and right sides of the lifting device K500 occurs, the posture of the long device K540 will tilt around a straight line facing the front-to-rear direction as the lifting device K500 moves up and down, which can easily result in an unattractive appearance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the left and right slide racks K545 are configured to have the same movement amounts KSDa and KSDb, so that even if the posture of the long-length device K540 is tilted, it is possible to suppress left-right positional deviation of the left-right center position of the long-length device K540.

This makes it possible to prevent the movement device K560, which is positioned in the center of the long device K540 in the left-right direction during the up-down movement of the lifting device K500, from shifting left-right during the performance standby state.

The slide rack K545 has a common structure on the base end side on the rotating shaft portion K534 side, but the arrangement of the rack K549 that meshes with the central gear K543 is different on the top and bottom.

In this embodiment, the device is controlled so that the one-sided falling state shown in FIG. 1767 occurs frequently, but it is extremely rare (non-existent) that the device is controlled to fall to the opposite side (a position inclined so that the left side is at the bottom).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the slide rack K545 is formed to facilitate proper meshing between the central gear K543 and the rack K549 in the one-sided drop state. In other words, in the one-sided drop state, the rack K549 on the side that covers the central gear K543 (the side on which the rotating shaft portion K534 is on the upper side) is formed to be positioned above the central gear K543.

Furthermore, by locating the rotating shaft portion K534 at the lower end of the rack K549, the protrusion of the rack K549 on the side that covers the central gear K543 toward the central gear K543 is increased. This makes it easier to optimize the meshing state between the rack K549 and the central gear K543 due to the weight of the rack K549 on the side that covers the central gear K543.

As shown in FIG. 1767, the one-sided falling state of the first movable device K401 is changed from the performance standby state by tilting the rotation shaft portion K534 of the upper member K530 on the left side as the base end, and the drive motor KMT51 is disposed on the base end side of the tilting motion.

In other words, by locating the drive motor KMT51, which acts as a heavy object, at the base end, the center of gravity can be moved closer to the base end, and the weight of the tip end (right side) of the tilting motion that moves up and down when changing from the performance standby state to the one-sided falling state can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the load (see FIG. 1765) that the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 receives from the connecting member K445 in the one-sided falling state.

An example of drive control of the moving device K560 will be described with reference to FIG. 1768. FIG. 1768(a), FIG. 1768(b), FIG. 1768(c), and FIG. 1768(d) are partial front views of the first movable device K401.

Figures 1768(a), 1768(b), 1768(c) and 1768(d) show the movement of the moving device K560 in chronological order when the long device K540 is positioned at the top or bottom of the dropped position state of the first movable device K401 (see Figure 1741). With regard to the left and right positions of the moving device K560, the arrangement shown in Figure 1768(a) is the same as the arrangement in Figure 1741, and the arrangement shown in Figure 1768(d) is the same as the arrangement in Figure 1743.

First, when the drive control shown in FIG. 1768 is executed, the long device K540 of the first movable device K401 is moved downward (falling) from the up-down position in the performance waiting state (see FIG. 1740) to the up-down position in the drop position state (see FIG. 1741). From the start of this movement, even after reaching the drop position state, the rotating decorative member K578 of the moving device K560 continues to rotate in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front by the driving force generated when the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1755) is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise direction as viewed from the front).

During continued rotation with the moving device K560 positioned in the left-right center position KC41 as shown in FIG. 1768(a), the audio lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) detects the actual rotation speed KVR1 of the rotating decorative member K578 from the placement distance of the cutout portion KMG63a (see FIG. 1755) of the transmission gear KMG63 to the detection groove of the detection sensor K565 (see FIG. 1756).

If the rotation speed KVR1 is within a predetermined design value, the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1753) is driven to rotate in the positive direction (the direction that moves the moving device K560 to the right, the clockwise direction as viewed in the direction of arrow L) at the midpoint of the detection interval of the detection sensor K565 (see FIG. 1768(b)) under the control of the voice lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724), and the moving device K560 is moved at a speed KVS1.

After the drive motor KMT51 starts to drive as shown in FIG. 1768(b), the output from the detection sensor K565 determines that the notch portion KMG63a of the transmission gear KMG63 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565. Based on this, the voice lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) is controlled to stop driving the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1755) and the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1753).

In other words, the timing at which the rotating decorative member K578 stops in an appropriate position (a position in which the up, down, left and right directions are correct) when the cutout portion KMG63a is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565 can be matched with the timing at which the movement of the moving device K560 in the left and right directions is stopped.

From the state in which it is positioned at the right-side intermediate position KR42 shown in FIG. 1768(c), the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1755) is rotated in the reverse direction, and at the same time, the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1753) is rotated in the reverse direction, thereby moving the moving device K560 to the left-side intermediate position KL43 shown in FIG. 1768(d).

At this time, the rotational speed KVR2 of the drive motor KMT61 is set slower than the rotational speed KVR1, and the rotational speed of the drive motor KMT51 is kept the same, so that the left-right movement speed of the moving device K560 is maintained at speed KVS1.

After the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1755) is rotated as shown in FIG. 1768(c), the notch portion KMG63a of the transmission gear KMG63 is first positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565, and based on this, the voice lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) is controlled to stop driving the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1755) and the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1753).

Here, the rotating decorative member K578 rotates half a turn from FIG. 1768(b) to FIG. 1768(c), and rotates once from FIG. 1768(c) to FIG. 1768(d). Therefore, if the speed relationship is the same, the right-side midway position KR42 shown in FIG. 1768(c) and the left-side midway position KL43 shown in FIG. 1768(d) are symmetrical positions with respect to the left-right center position KC41.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotation speed KVR2 is set slower than the rotation speed KVR1 (KVR1>KVR2), so the distance from the left-right center position KC41 to the left-side intermediate position KL43 is longer than the distance from the left-right center position KC41 to the right-side intermediate position KR42. In this way, the stopping positions of the moving device K560 can be set asymmetrically.

In this embodiment, the state in which the moving device K560 is positioned at the left-side intermediate position KL43 corresponds to the position in which the detected portion K571a begins to extend outside the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (the position in which the output of the central detection sensor K556b switches).

In this case, the detectable portion K571a (see FIG. 1755) extends symmetrically in the left-right direction from the left-right center of the moving device K560, so whether or not the detectable portion K571a goes outside the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) depends on the amount of movement of the moving device K560 from the left-right central position KC41, regardless of whether it is left or right.

That is, in the state shown in Figures 1768(a), 1768(b) and 1768(c), the detectable portion K571a (see Figure 1755) is still disposed in the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (see Figure 1754), and it is only in the state shown in Figure 1768(d) that the detectable portion K571a extends outside the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (the detectable portion K571a is designed with a left-right length that satisfies this condition).

The state shown in FIG. 1768(d) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 1743 as described above, and therefore the second movable device K701 (see FIG. 1743) is driven based on the fact that the detectable portion K571a protrudes from the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) and that the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1753) was driven in the reverse direction when the detectable portion K571a protruded from the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b, thereby making it possible to prevent the moving device K560 and the second movable device K701 from coming into contact during operation.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned rotational speeds KVR1, KVR2 and speed KVS1 are designed to have a relationship that allows the detected part K571a (see FIG. 1755) to be positioned outside the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) immediately after the series of operations illustrated in chronological order in FIG. 1768.

As described above in detail, in the first movable device K401, the displacement of the transmission tubular part K434 accompanying the rotation of the rotating member K430 is increased, causing the displacement of the lifting device K500. This ensures a large amount of displacement of the lifting device K500 even when the rotation angle of the rotating member K430 is small.

The first movable device K401 is also configured to be able to displace the lifting device K500 in two different displacement modes depending on the rotation direction of the rotating member K430 from the performance standby state. At this time, the switching device K460, which changes the amount of displacement of the lifting device K500, is synchronously controlled, so that not only the displacement speed but also the displacement range of the lifting device K500 can be changed, thereby increasing the variety of performances.

In addition, the first movable device K401 is configured so that the movement amounts KSDa and KSDb of the slide rack K545 are the same, even if there is a discrepancy in the vertical sliding amount of the left and right sides of the lifting device K500, thereby suppressing the horizontal displacement of the moving device K560. This makes it possible to suppress the deviation in the horizontal position of the moving device K560 when the lifting device K500 is displaced vertically, improving the presentation effect.

In addition, in the first movable device K401, the speed of the left-right sliding movement of the moving device K560 and the timing of stopping are determined based on the detection of the rotation speed and timing of stopping of the rotating decorative member K578. This makes it possible to unify the movements of the moving members driven by different drive sources, and to create a sense of unity in the performance.

The structure used for ball screws is used for the left-right sliding movement of the moving device K560, so the moving speed and stopping position of the moving device K560 can be controlled accurately. This improves the reproducibility of the performance.

In addition, the first movable device K401 is controlled so that the direction of the sliding movement of the moving device K560 corresponds to the direction of the rotational movement of the rotating decorative member K578. This allows the movement of the multiple movable members to have a sense of unity, improving the presentation effect.

Let us return to Fig. 1747 and Fig. 1748. As shown in Fig. 1747 and Fig. 1748, a second movable device K701 is disposed on the front layer movable device K400 so as to connect a pair of support members K410 at the center position on the left and right side below the first movable device K401. Details of the second movable device K701 are described below.

1769 is an exploded front perspective view of the second movable device K701, and FIG. 1770 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second movable device K701. The second movable device K701 is a member that constitutes the framework, and includes a base member K710 that is connected and fixed to a pair of support members K410 (see FIG. 1747), a vertical slide member K720 that is supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction relative to the base member K710, a drive motor KMT71 that is disposed on the base member K710 and generates a drive force for driving the vertical slide member K720, a transmission device K730 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor KMT71 to the vertical slide member K720, and a vertical slide member K720. It comprises a followable member K740 that is arranged on the front side of the slide member K720 and is configured to be able to move in a manner that follows the vertical slide member K720, a pair of interlocking members K750 that are supported by both the followable member K740 and the vertical slide member K720 and are interlocked with the movement of the followable member K740 and the vertical slide member K720, and a main decorative member K760 that is fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member K720 from the front side so as to sandwich the followable member K740 and the interlocking member K750.

The base member K710 includes a main body K711 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of cylindrical support members K712 protruding parallel to each other from the front side of the main body K711, a metal rod K713 arranged and fixed to the left side of the main body K711 when viewed from the front in a vertically extending position, a long hole K714 extending vertically parallel to the extension direction of the metal rod K713, a support area K715 formed in a roughly L-shape on the back side of the base member K710 behind the long hole K714 and behind the range extending leftward from the upper end of the long hole K714, a detection sensor K716 arranged on the base member K710 and capable of detecting that the transmission device K730 is in a performance standby state, and a relay board K718 fixed to the back side of the base member K710 by a fixing member K717.

A horizontally long cover member K711a is fastened and fixed to the lower end of the main body K711 from the front side. The cover member K711a is a member that holds the metal bar K713 against the main body K711 from the front side, and includes a lower prevention piece K711b that prevents the metal bar K713 from falling off downward, and a front prevention piece K711c that prevents the drive gear KMG72 from falling off the drive shaft of the drive motor KMT71.

The main body K711 is also formed with a protruding portion K711d that protrudes forward at the right side of the middle portion of the long hole K714, and a detection sensor K711e with a detection groove located on the front side is disposed inside the protruding portion K711d. In addition, a protruding portion K711f that protrudes forward is formed on the left side of the metal bar K713. By switching the output of the detection sensor K711e, it is possible to determine whether the vertical sliding member K720 is in the lowered position of the second movable device K701, but details will be described later.

Of the support parts K712, the first support part 712a rotatably supports the transmission gear KMG73 which is meshed with the drive gear KMG72 which is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor KMT71. The other support parts 712b to 712d will be described later.

One end of the coil spring KSP74 is supported at the upper left end of the support region K715, and the coil spring KSP74 is bent along the outer circular arc of the ring-shaped set collar KRG75, which is rotatably supported by a support portion K715a that protrudes cylindrically inside the intersection position of the support region K715.

The other end of the coil spring KSP74 is fastened to the fastening portion K723 of the vertical sliding member K720 that passes through the long hole K714, and is hooked onto the guided member KLG76 that can slide up and down together with the fastening portion K723. In other words, the coil spring KSP74 is configured to bias the vertical sliding member 720 upward via the guided member KLG76.

The detection sensor K716 is configured to detect that the second movable device K701 is in a standby state based on the arc-shaped portion K732 of the driving side two-layer gear K731 of the transmission device K730 entering the detection groove in the standby state.

The relay board K718 is formed so as to partially block the rear opening of the support area K715. In other words, by the relay board K718 blocking the rear opening of the support area K715, it becomes easier to prevent the coil spring KSP74 from falling off to the rear.

The vertical sliding member K720 includes a plate-shaped main body K721, a rectangular tubular insertion portion K722 that is vertically penetrated at the lower left of the main body K721 so that the metal rod K713 can be inserted therethrough, a pair of upper and lower fastening portions K723 that are inserted into the long holes K714 of the base member K710 and fasten the guided member KLG76, a plurality of long holes K724 that extend parallel to each other in the left-right direction and guide the movement of the interlocking member K750, a plurality of support portions K725 that protrude cylindrically from the back side of the main body K721 to support the transmission end member K737 of the transmission device K730, a detection piece K726 that is used for position detection and extends rearward from the upper right part of the main body K721, and a spring support portion K727 that has a claw portion from which the upper end of the small coil spring KSP77 can be suspended.

By guiding the inserted portion K722 to the metal rod K713, the vertical sliding member K720 is guided in the vertical direction, which is the extension direction of the metal rod K713. Similarly, by guiding the fastening portion K723 to the long hole K714 of the base member K710, the vertical sliding member K720 is guided in the vertical direction. Therefore, the movement direction of the vertical sliding member K720 is limited to the vertical direction.

The transmission device K730 includes a drive side two-layer gear K731 rotatably supported by the second support part K712b of the support part K712 and having a front layer gear part K731a meshed with the transmission gear KMG73, a transmission side two-layer gear K733 rotatably supported by the third support part K712c of the support part K712 and engaging with the rear layer transmission part K731b of the drive side two-layer gear K731, an arm member K735 rotatably supported by the fourth support part K712d of the support part K712 and rotating in conjunction with the rotation of the transmission side two-layer gear K733 by meshing the front layer gear part K733a of the transmission side two-layer gear K733 with the base end gear part K735a, and a transmission end member K737 whose lower end part K737c is connected to the rotating end part K735b of the arm member K735.

The rear layer transmission part K731b of the driving side two-layer gear K731 does not have gear teeth formed all around, but has an arc-shaped part K732 where no gear teeth are formed in a part and the outer shape is formed in an arc centered on the rotation axis, and the outermost diameter part of the arc-shaped part K732 extends toward the rear in a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and the extended tip of this arc-shaped part K732 is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor K716.

The rear transmission part K733b of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 does not have gear teeth formed all around, but has an arc-shaped part K734 that is formed in an arc shape (concave shape) protruding toward the rotating shaft side without any gear teeth formed in a part, and this arc-shaped part K734 and the arc-shaped part K732 of the drive side double-layer gear K731 are configured to be able to abut on each other at a surface, as will be described in detail later.

The transmission termination member K737 is formed in a plate shape and includes a base end support hole K737a that is rotatably supported by a first support portion K725a formed at the upper end of the vertical slide member K720 of the support portion K725, a guide hole K737b that is formed in an arc shape centered on the base end support hole K737a and through which a second support portion K725b of the support portion K725 is inserted, and a lower end portion K737c that is connected to the rotating end portion K735b of the arm member K735 so as to be rotatable relative to the rotating end portion K735b.

The followable member K740 includes a main body K741 formed in a plate shape, a plurality of vertical long holes K742 (in this embodiment, three holes are provided in the center and at both ends) drilled in the main body K741 in a vertically long hole, a plurality of inclined long holes K743 (in this embodiment, a pair of inclined long holes on each side) formed in an inverted V shape that slopes downward toward the center of the left and right sides of the main body K741 and has a lateral length equal to the lateral length of the long hole K724 at a position corresponding to the long hole K724 of the vertical sliding member K720, a left side receiving portion K744 extending rearward from the lower left end of the main body K741, a right side receiving portion K745 extending rearward from the lower right end of the main body K741, and a spring support portion K746 having a claw portion that is suspended from the lower end of the small coil spring KSP77.

The followable member K740 is configured to follow the movement of the vertical sliding member K720 by the biasing force of the small coil spring KSP77. However, it does not always follow. During the ascent of the vertical sliding member K720, the left side receiving portion K744 is blocked by the protruding portion K711f and the right side receiving portion K745 is blocked by the protruding portion K711d, so that the vertical sliding member K720 can move in such a manner that the followable member K740 is left behind. Details will be described later.

The interlocking member K750 includes a pair of left and right main body parts K751 formed in a plate shape, and a pair of upper and lower fastening protrusions K752 that protrude cylindrically from the back side of the main body parts K751.

The fastening protrusion K752 is inserted from the front side through the inclined long hole K743 of the followable member K740 and the long hole K724 of the vertical sliding member K720, and is prevented from falling off by the screw head that is screwed into the female thread formed at the tip.

The main decorative member K760 has an electric illumination board K761a disposed therein, a main body K761 whose front side, onto which light from the electric illumination board K761a is irradiated, is formed from a light-transmitting plate-like member, and a number of fastening parts K762 protruding from the rear surface of the main body K761.

The fastening portion K762 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion K721 of the vertical sliding member K720 while being inserted from the front side into the vertical long hole K742 of the followable member K740. In other words, the vertical arrangement of the main decorative member K760 is the same as the vertical arrangement of the vertical sliding member K720, and the amount of relative vertical movement between the vertical sliding member K720 and the followable member K740 is limited to the dimensions of the vertical long hole K742 of the followable member K740.

Figures 1771(a), 1771(b), 1772(a) and 1772(b) are front views of the second movable device K701. Note that Figures 1771(a), 1771(b), 1772(a) and 1772(b) chronologically illustrate the change of the second movable device K701 from a performance standby state to an elevated arrangement state, and among the components of the second movable device K701, the vertical sliding member K720 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the followable member K740, interlocking member K750 and main decorative member K760 (see Figure 1769) that are arranged in front of the vertical sliding member K720 are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 1771(a), when the second movable device K701 is in the standby state for performance, the arc-shaped portion K734 of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 is in surface contact with the arc-shaped portion K732 of the drive side double-layer gear K731.

In this state, the arc-shaped portion K732 protrudes to a position closer to the rotation axis of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 than the maximum diameter position (both ends in the circumferential direction) of the arc-shaped portion K734, thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission side double-layer gear K733. This allows the arm member K735 and transmission end member K737, which are arranged downstream of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 in the direction of transmission of the driving force, to be stabilized in a stopped state.

In the standby state of the second movable device K701 shown in FIG. 1771(a), the arc-shaped portion K732 of the driving side double-layer gear K731 is in the detection groove of the detection sensor K716. In this embodiment, the length of the arc-shaped portion K732 in the arc direction is longer than the thickness of the detection sensor K716 that forms the detection groove. Therefore, even if the state in which the arc-shaped portion K732 is in the detection sensor K716 is detected, the phase of the driving side double-layer gear K731 cannot be accurately determined.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission side two-layer gear K733 is configured not to rotate (maintaining the state shown in FIG. 1771(a)) when the arc-shaped portion K732 is in the detection sensor K716 (the gear teeth are designed to be formed in such a way that meshing rotation does not begin), so it is possible to determine whether the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737, which are downstream of the transmission side two-layer gear K733 in the driving force transmission direction, are positioned in a performance standby state by detecting the state in which the arc-shaped portion K732 is in the detection sensor K716.

Thus, while there is a tolerance for the position of the arc-shaped portion K732 when detected by the detection sensor K716, as long as the detection sensor K716 detects the arc-shaped portion K732, the voice lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) can determine that the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 are maintained in a position in the performance standby state of the second movable device K701, so that a certain degree of tolerance can be given to the phase of the drive side two-layer gear K731 that causes the second movable device K701 to form a performance standby state.

In other words, even if the drive side two-layer gear K731 rotates in the forward or reverse direction to a certain extent (an angle of less than 45 degrees in this embodiment) from the state shown in FIG. 1771(a) and the phase shifts, the transmission side two-layer gear K733 does not rotate and the current state is maintained.

In accordance with this premise, the arc-shaped portion K732 is formed so that the angle around the rotation axis of the driving side double-layer gear K731 is 90 degrees, so that even if the detection sensor K716 rotates in the forward or reverse direction at an angle of less than 45 degrees from a state in which it is positioned at the center position of the arc direction of the arc-shaped portion K732, the arc-shaped portion K732 remains in the detection groove of the detection sensor K716.

Therefore, the phase of the driving side double gear K731 for positioning the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 of the second movable device K701 in a performance standby state can be given a tolerance of approximately 90 degrees. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize an operating mode that is generally considered difficult, such as instantly stopping the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 from driving at such an excessively high speed that it is difficult to accurately determine the phase when the driving side double gear K731 stops.

In other words, the driving side two-layer gear K731 only needs to be stopped within an allowable range of approximately 90 degrees, and the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 are maintained in the performance standby state of the second movable device K701 from the start of rotation of the driving side two-layer gear K731 within that allowable range and throughout its continued rotation, so that the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 can be stopped in a position in the performance standby state of the second movable device K701 before the driving side two-layer gear K731 stops.

Figure 1771 (b) shows the state in which the transmission side double-layer gear K733 begins to rotate as the drive side double-layer gear K731 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 1771 (a) by an angle of more than 45 degrees when viewed from the front.

The state shown in FIG. 1771(b) corresponds to the moment when the arcuate portion K732 of the driving side double-layer gear K731 exits the detection groove of the detection sensor K716. From the state shown in FIG. 1771(b), the driving force is transmitted from the driving side double-layer gear K731 to the transmission side double-layer gear K733 by the meshing rotation of the gear teeth. Therefore, by appropriately controlling the rotation angle of the driving gear KMG72 from the point when the arcuate portion K732 exits the detection groove of the detection sensor K716, the arrangement of the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 disposed downstream of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 in the driving force transmission direction can be controlled.

In other words, since the arm member K735 of the second movable device K701 can rotate from a performance standby state to a raised position state in which the arm member K735 is rotated 90 degrees upward, the rotation angle of the drive gear KMG72 required for that rotation is calculated in advance from the gear ratio relationship, and by rotating the drive gear KMG72 at that rotation angle, the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 can be positioned in the raised position state. Therefore, a detection device for detecting that the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 have been positioned in the raised position state can be eliminated.

Figure 1772 (a) shows an approximately intermediate state when the second movable device K701 moves from the performance standby state to the raised position state, and in this state, the right side receiving portion K745 (see Figure 1770) of the followable member K740 abuts against the underside of the protruding portion K711d (see Figure 1769) of the base member K710, preventing the followable member K740 from rising any further. The performance effect caused by preventing the followable member K740 from rising any further will be described later.

Figure 1772 (b) illustrates the raised position state of the second movable device K701. In the raised position state of the second movable device K701, the center (center of the circle) of the fourth support part K712d of the base member K710, the center (center of the circle) of the rotating tip part K735b of the arm member K735, and the center (center of the circle) of the base end support hole K737a of the transmission termination member K737 are located on a straight line KVL78 that extends approximately in the vertical direction.

This makes it possible to suppress the displacement in the direction of gravity (downward) of the vertical sliding member K720, the followable member K740 arranged on the vertical sliding member K720, the interlocking member K750, and the main decorative member K760 when the second movable device K701 is in the raised position.

In other words, the load in the direction of gravity (downward) transmitted to the transmission end member K737 via the first support portion K725a of the vertical sliding member K720 is directed toward the center (center of the circle) of the fourth support portion K712d of the base member K710 and the center (center of the circle) of the rotating tip portion K735b of the arm member K735, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the transmission end member K737 and the arm member K735 rotate due to this load.

This allows the second movable device K701 to be maintained in an elevated position without requiring a load to stop the rotation of the drive side double-layer gear K731 or the transmission side double-layer gear K733, and therefore allows the drive motor KMT71 (see FIG. 1769) to be de-energized while maintaining the second movable device K701 in an elevated position, thereby extending the service life of the drive motor KMT71.

Figures 1773(a) and 1773(b) are front views of the second movable device K701. Note that Figures 1773(a) and 1773(b) chronologically illustrate the process in which the second movable device K701 changes from a performance standby state (see Figure 1771(a)) to a lowered position state after starting operation, and among the components of the second movable device K701, the upper and lower sliding members K720 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the followable members K740, interlocking members K750, and main decorative members K760 (see Figure 1769), which are arranged in front of the upper and lower sliding members K720, are omitted from the illustration.

Figure 1773 (a) shows the state in which the transmission side double-layer gear K733 begins to rotate as the drive side double-layer gear K731 rotates at an angle of more than 45 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 1771 (a).

The state shown in FIG. 1773(a) corresponds to the moment when the arcuate portion K732 of the driving side double-layer gear K731 exits the detection groove of the detection sensor K716. From the state shown in FIG. 1773(a), the driving force is transmitted from the driving side double-layer gear K731 to the transmission side double-layer gear K733 by the meshing rotation of the gear teeth, so that the positioning of the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737, which are disposed downstream of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 in the driving force transmission direction, can be controlled by appropriately controlling the rotation angle of the driving gear KMG72 from the point when the arcuate portion K732 exits the detection groove of the detection sensor K716.

In other words, since the arm member K735 of the second movable device K701 can rotate from a performance standby state to a lowered position state in which the arm member K735 is rotated 90 degrees downward, the rotation angle of the drive gear KMG72 required for that rotation is calculated in advance from the gear ratio relationship, and the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 can be positioned in the lowered position state by rotating the drive gear KMG72 at that rotation angle. Therefore, a detection device for detecting that the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 have been positioned in the lowered position state can be eliminated.

In this embodiment, the change of the second movable device K701 to the lowered position state is determined by the detection piece K726 of the vertical sliding member K720 entering the detection groove of the detection sensor K711e of the base member K710. Detection by the detection sensor K711e is used for operation control involving linkage with other movable devices, and details will be described later.

Figure 1773 (b) illustrates the lowered position state of the second movable device K701. In the lowered position state of the second movable device K701, the center (center of the circle) of the fourth support part K712d of the base member K710, the center (center of the circle) of the rotating tip part K735b of the arm member K735, and the center (center of the circle) of the base end support hole K737a of the transmission termination member K737 are located on a straight line KVL78 that extends approximately in the vertical direction.

This makes it possible to suppress upward displacement of the vertical sliding member K720, the followable member K740 arranged on the vertical sliding member K720, the interlocking member K750, and the main decorative member K760 when the second movable device K701 is in the raised position.

In other words, the upward biasing force of the coil spring KSP74 transmitted to the transmission end member K737 via the first support portion K725a of the vertical sliding member K720 is directed from the center (center of the circle) of the rotating tip portion K735b of the arm member K735 to the center (center of the circle) of the fourth support portion K712d of the base member K710, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the transmission end member K737 and the arm member K735 rotate due to this biasing force.

This allows the second movable device K701 to be maintained in a lowered position without requiring a load to stop the rotation of the drive side double-layer gear K731 or the transmission side double-layer gear K733, and therefore allows the drive motor KMT71 (see FIG. 1769) to be de-energized while maintaining the second movable device K701 in a lowered position, thereby extending the service life of the drive motor KMT71.

In this case, after the drive force of the drive motor KMT71 has changed the position to the lowered position, the position can be maintained regardless of the magnitude of the biasing force of the coil spring KSP74, so the design range of the biasing force of the coil spring KSP74 can be expanded, and by setting the biasing force of the coil spring KSP74 to a sufficiently large value, sufficient assistance can be obtained and the drive force required to start driving from the lowered position can be reduced.

Figures 1774(a), 1774(b) and 1774(c) are schematic front views of the vertical sliding member K720, the trackable member K740 and the interlocking member K750. Figures 1774(a) to 1774(c) show schematic diagrams of the change in the arrangement of the vertical sliding member K720, the trackable member K740 and the interlocking member K750 in chronological order until the second movable device K701 changes from the performance standby state to the raised arrangement state.

As shown in FIG. 1774(a), when the second movable device K701 is in a standby state, the followable member K740 is attracted to the vertical sliding member K720 by the biasing force of the small coil spring KSP77, and the followable member K740 also moves integrally with the vertical movement of the vertical sliding member K720.

The position of the interlocking member K750 is determined by the relative positions of the vertical sliding member K720 and the followable member K740, so in a situation where the followable member K740 moves integrally with the vertical movement of the vertical sliding member K720, the interlocking member K750 also moves integrally with the vertical sliding member K720. The operating principle of the interlocking member K750 will be described in detail later.

Figure 1774(b) shows the state in which the right-side receiving portion K745 of the followable member K740 abuts against the underside of the protruding portion K711d of the base member K710 (see Figure 1772(a)). The position in Figure 1774(b) is the upper end position of the movement range of the followable member K740, and if the vertical sliding member K720 continues to rise beyond this position, the unity of the vertical sliding member K720 and the followable member K740 will be lost, and they will move relative to each other.

Figure 1774 (c) illustrates the raised position state of the second movable device K701 (see Figure 1772 (b)). As illustrated in Figure 1774 (c), in the raised position state, the vertical sliding member K720 moves relative to the followable member K740 compared to the performance standby state. This causes the small coil spring KSP77 to stretch, changing the left-right position where the long hole K724 of the vertical sliding member K720 and the inclined long hole K743 of the followable member K740 overlap.

The fastening protrusion K752 of the interlocking member K750 is positioned at a position where the long hole K724 of the vertical sliding member K720 and the inclined long hole K743 of the followable member K740 overlap, so that the left-right position of the interlocking member K750 changes as the vertical sliding member K720 moves relative to the followable member K740. That is, the left-right position changes from being positioned on the inside left-right to being positioned on the outside left-right.

In this way, the interlocking member K750 is configured to move left and right in conjunction with the ascending movement of the second movable device K701, so that attention during the ascending movement can be improved compared to a movable part that simply ascends.

When the vertical sliding member K720 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 1774(c), the position of the followable member K740 is maintained by the biasing force of the small coil spring KSP77 until the state shown in FIG. 1774(b) is reached, and after the state shown in FIG. 1771(b) is reached, the vertical sliding member K720 and the followable member K740 are lowered together, returning to the state shown in FIG. 1774(a). In other words, the lowering operation of the vertical sliding member K720 occurs in the chronological order of FIG. 1774(c), FIG. 1774(b), and FIG. 1774(a).

As described above in detail, the second movable device K701 is configured so that the position of the main decorative member K760 is stable even if the arm member K735 rotates within a certain angle range at an intermediate position in the operating range of the arm member K735. This makes it easy to move the main decorative member K760 at high speed to an intermediate position and stop it.

In addition, in the second movable device K701, at the end position of the operating range of the arm member K735, the load direction is set to face the rotation axis of the arm member K735, thereby stabilizing the arm member K735 at the end position.

Returning to FIG. 1739, the explanation will be given. As shown in FIG. 1739, the rear layer side movable device K800 is disposed on the rear case K310, on the rear side of the front layer side movable device K400. Details of the rear layer side movable device K800 will be explained below. Note that in order to explain the structure first, the illustration of the decoration formed on the third movable device K801 will be omitted, and the details of the decoration will be explained later.

Figure 1775 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear layer side movable device K800, and Figure 1776 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear layer side movable device K800. The rear layer side movable device K800 includes a third movable device K801 configured to be capable of opening and closing the front side of the third pattern display device K81 (see Figures 1741 and 1742), a support member K850 that supports the third movable device K801 from the rear side, an upper front cover member K861 that is arranged on the upper support member K851 of the support member K850 so as to sandwich the third movable device K801 from the front side and is fastened and fixed to the upper support member K851, and an upper rear cover member K864 that is fastened and fixed to the upper support member K851 from the rear side.

The rear layer movable device K800 further includes a pair of drive motors KMT81, KMT82 arranged on the left and right, a pair of left and right transmission devices K870 arranged between the upper support member K851 and the upper rear cover member K864 as a group of gear members rotatably supported on the upper support member K851 to transmit the driving force of the drive motors KMT81, KMT82, and a pair of left and right base end slide members K880 that slide left and right in response to the operation of the transmission device K870.

The support member K850 includes the above-mentioned upper support member K851, a plurality of support parts K852 that are cylindrically protruding so as to rotatably support the gear group of the transmission device K870, a plurality of long holes K853 that extend in the left-right direction to slidably support the base end side slide member K880, a pair of left and right upper extension gear teeth K854 and lower extension gear teeth K855 that are engraved with gear teeth that extend in the left-right direction on the front side, end side support parts K856 that support the left and right ends of the metal rods KMB83 and KMB84 of the third movable device K801, and the metal rods K855. It is equipped with a plurality of intermediate support members K857 fastened to the upper support member K851 so as to clamp the approximate middle positions of MB83 and KMB84 between them, a pair of left and right detection sensors K858 arranged on the rear side of the upper support member K851 and detecting that the base end slide member K880 is positioned at a position in the performance standby state of the third movable device K801, and a lower support member K859 that is a member that supports the lower end side of the third movable device K801 from the rear side and is fastened to the rear case K310 (see FIG. 1739).

Two long holes K853 are formed on the right side and one on the left side, but they share the function of supporting the base end slide member K880. That is, the shape of the base end slide member K880 on the right side is such that the vertical positions of the multiple cylindrical protrusions K882 inserted into the long holes K853 are different, so two corresponding parallel long holes K853 are formed, while the shape of the base end slide member K880 on the left side is such that the vertical positions of the multiple cylindrical protrusions K882 inserted into the long holes K853 are the same, so both multiple cylindrical protrusions K882 are supported by a single long hole K853 extending left and right.

The upper front cover member K861 has multiple cylindrical portions K862 protruding from the rear side. The cylindrical portions K862 are formed in pairs on the left and right, and each is formed on a straight line extending in the left-right direction.

The upper rear cover member K864 has a long guide hole K865 that is drilled to extend in the left-right direction to guide the left-right movement of the base end slide member K880. The base end slide member K880 on the left side has a retaining screw fixed to a retaining protrusion K888 that penetrates from the long guide hole K865 to the rear side, and the head of the retaining screw interferes with the long guide hole K865 to prevent it from falling off.

The transmission device K870 includes a drive gear K871 fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82, intermediate gears K872 and K873 to which the rotation of the drive gear K871 is transmitted, and an extended rotating member K874 having a circumferential gear portion K875 that meshes with the intermediate gear K873.

The extended rotating member K874 includes the above-mentioned circumferential gear portion K875 and an extended portion K876 that extends radially outward from the center of rotation on the rear side of the circumferential gear portion K875. The extended portion K876 is formed with a cylindrical protrusion K876a that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear side at its extended tip.

In the transmission device K870, when the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 are driven to rotate, a driving force is transmitted from the drive gear K871 to the extended rotating member K874 via the intermediate gears K872 and K873, and as the extended portion K876 rotates, the cylindrical protrusion K876a is displaced, and the base end side slide member K880 is displaced in the left-right direction due to this displacement.

The base end side slide member K880 includes a plate-shaped main body K881, a plurality of cylindrical protrusions K882 guided by the long holes K853 of the support member K850, a rotation support portion K883 that is arranged on the left-right outer side of the cylindrical protrusions K882 on the left-right center side and protrudes further forward than the cylindrical protrusions K882 to rotatably support the pinion K825 of the third movable device K801, a long hole K884 that is drilled in the front-rear direction in a shape that extends in the up-down direction in the main body K881, and a detection target portion K885 that extends downward from the outer left-right end and is formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor K858 of the support member K850.

The left base end slide member K880 is provided with a cylindrical anti-slip projection K888 that protrudes toward the rear side and is inserted into the long guide hole K865 of the upper rear cover member K864, and a screw member for preventing the anti-slip is fastened and fixed from the tip.

Figure 1777 is an exploded front perspective view of the third movable device K801, and Figure 1778 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third movable device K801. Note that Figures 1775 and 1776 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 1777 and 1778.

The third movable device K801 includes a rear opening/closing member K810 that is guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by a metal rod KMB83 that is long in the left-right direction and fixed to the end support part K856 of the support member K850, a middle opening/closing member K820 that is guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by a metal rod KMB84 that is long in the left-right direction and fixed to the end support part K856 of the support member K850 on the front side of the metal rod KMB83, and a front opening/closing member K830 that is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by a cylindrical part K862 (see FIG. 1776) of the upper front cover member K861 on the front side of the middle opening/closing member K820.

The rear opening/closing member K810 includes a pair of vertically long left and right plate-shaped members K811, a bearing structure member K813 that is fastened to the plate-shaped members K811 and disposed at a position where it sandwiches the metal bar KMB83 between the upper ends of the plate-shaped members K811 and forms a bearing structure on the front side, a pinion K815 that meshes with a rack member K814 having gear teeth on the upper surface of the bearing structure member K813 and is rotatably supported by the support member K826 of the middle opening/closing member K820, and a groove forming member K818 that is fastened to the lower support member K859 (see FIG. 1775) of the support member K850 and forms a groove extending in the left-right direction between the lower support member K859 and the pinion K815 to guide the lower end of the plate-shaped members K811.

The middle opening/closing member K820 comprises a pair of vertically long left and right plate-shaped members K821, a bearing structure member K823 that is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped members K821 and that forms a bearing structure between the upper end of the plate-shaped members K821 and the upper end of the plate-shaped members K821 and that protrudes from the rear side of the plate-shaped members K821 and has gear teeth on the upper surface of the protruding portion. The pinion K825 is engaged with a rack member K824 that has gear teeth on the upper surface of the protruding portion that protrudes from the rear side of the plate-shaped members K821 and is rotatably supported by a rotation support member K883 of the base end slide member K880.

The middle opening/closing member K820 further includes a support portion K826 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear side of the plate-shaped portion K821, rotatably supports the pinion K815 of the rear opening/closing member K810, and prevents the pinion K815 from coming loose by the screw head of a screw that is screwed into the tip of the support portion K826, a protrusion portion K827 that protrudes from the left and right outer ends of the upper end side of the plate-shaped portion K821 to the front side and can abut against the front opening/closing member K830 in the left-right direction, and a second groove forming member K828 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the groove forming member K818 of the rear opening/closing member K810 and forms a groove extending in the left-right direction between the groove forming member K818 and the second groove forming member K828 to guide the lower end of the plate-shaped portion K821.

The front opening/closing member K830 includes a pair of vertically long plate-shaped members K831, a long hole K833 that is long in the left-right direction and drilled in the front-rear direction in the portion extending in the left-right direction at the upper end side of the plate-shaped member K831, and is supported by being inserted into the cylindrical portion K862 (see FIG. 1776) of the upper front cover member K861, a recessed portion K835 that is recessed in the plate-shaped member K831 below the long hole K833 so as to be able to receive the protruding portion K827 of the middle opening/closing member K820, and a third groove forming member K838 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the second groove forming member K828 of the middle opening/closing member K820 and forms a groove extending in the left-right direction between the second groove forming member K828 and the third groove forming member K838, which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the second groove forming member K828 of the middle opening/closing member K820 and forms a groove extending in the left-right direction to guide the lower end of the plate-shaped member K831.

The driving force transmission generated in the third movable device K801 from the above-mentioned configuration is as follows. That is, the amount of left-right movement of the base-end slide member K880 is transmitted to the plate-shaped portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820 via the pinion K825, and the amount of movement of the plate-shaped portion K821 is transmitted to the plate-shaped portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 via the pinion K815. The movement of the plate-shaped portion K821 and the plate-shaped portion K811 occurs due to meshing.

The amount of movement of the plate-shaped portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820 is transmitted to the plate-shaped portion K831 of the front opening/closing member K830 by the protrusion K827 pushing against the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed portion K835. The movement of the plate-shaped portion K831 occurs when it is pushed forward from the middle opening/closing member K820.

Thus, the plate-shaped portion K811 always moves in conjunction with the movement of the plate-shaped portion K821, but even if the plate-shaped portion K821 moves, the plate-shaped portion K831 remains stationary within the range where the protrusion portion K827 does not push against the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed portion K835.

Figures 1779(a), 1779(b) and 1779(c) are front views of the upper rear cover member K864, the extended rotating member K874, the base end side slide member K880 and the pinion K825. Figures 1779(a), 1779(b) and 1779(c) show an example of the operation of the extended rotating member K874 from the standby state of the third movable device K801 in chronological order.

First, as shown in FIG. 1779(a), when the third movable device K801 is in a standby state for performance, the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a is positioned on a straight line extending in the left-right direction that passes through the center of rotation of the extended rotation member K874, and the extended rotation member K874 abuts against the upper component K866 of the upper rear cover member K864 in the rotational direction, preventing further rotation.

In other words, when the cylindrical protrusion K876a rotates outward to the left or right from the center of rotation of the extended rotation member K874, the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a stops at a position located on a straight line extending in the left-right direction that passes through the center of rotation of the extended rotation member K874, and no further rotation occurs.

When the cylindrical protrusion K876a rotates inwardly from the state shown in FIG. 1779(a), the left-right position of the cylindrical protrusion K876a changes, and the base-end slide member K880 having the long hole K884 through which the cylindrical protrusion K876a is inserted interlocks with the base-end slide member K880 and slides left-right guided by the long hole K853 (see FIG. 1776) of the support member K850, transitioning to the interlocking switching state shown in FIG. 1779(b).

As shown in FIG. 1779(b), when the third movable device K801 is in the interlocking switching state, the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion K876a of the extended rotating member K874 is along the left-right direction, so that the left-right force transmitted to the base end side slide member K880 is maximized.

When the extension rotation member K874 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 1779(b), the left-right position of the cylindrical protrusion K876a changes, and the base-end slide member K880 having the long hole K884 through which the cylindrical protrusion K876a is inserted moves in tandem with the long hole K853 (see FIG. 1776) of the support member K850 and slides left-right, transitioning to the closed state shown in FIG. 1779(c).

As shown in FIG. 1779(c), when the third movable device K801 is in the closed state, the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a is positioned above a straight line extending in the left-right direction that passes through the rotation center of the extended rotation member K874, and the extended rotation member K874 abuts against the inclined forming portion K867 of the upper rear cover member K864 in the rotational direction, preventing further rotation.

In other words, when the cylindrical protrusion K876a rotates inwardly to the left or right from the center of rotation of the extended rotation member K874, the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a is stopped at a position located above a straight line extending in the left-right direction that passes through the center of rotation of the extended rotation member K874, and no further rotation occurs.

This reduces the proportion of the load that is applied to the rotation axis of the extended rotation member K874 in the outward left-right direction on the extended rotation member K874 via the base-end slide member K880 after the third movable device K801 transitions to the closed state.

In other words, when the third movable device K801 is in the closed state, if the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a of the extended rotation member K874 is positioned on a straight line extending in the left-right direction passing through the rotation center of the extended rotation member K874, all of the load generated in the left-right outward direction on the extended rotation member K874 via the base end slide member K880 will be applied to the rotation axis of the extended rotation member K874, which may reduce the durability of the extended rotation member K874.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the third movable device K801 is in the closed state, the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a of the extended rotation member K874 is positioned above a straight line extending in the left-right direction that passes through the rotation center of the extended rotation member K874. Therefore, the load acting on the extended rotation member K874 in the left-right outward direction via the base end slide member K880 is resolved into a component received by the rotation axis of the extended rotation member K874 and a component received by the inclination forming portion K867. This makes it possible to avoid concentration of the load and improve the durability of the extended rotation member K874.

The upper component K866 on the left side as viewed from the front and the inclination forming part K867 on the right side as viewed from the front are formed to protrude from the upper support member K851 (see FIG. 1776) toward the rear side, and the inclination forming part K867 on the left side as viewed from the front and the upper component K866 on the right side as viewed from the front are formed as the upper edge of the upper rear cover member K864.

In addition, when the third movable device K801 is in the closed state, the angle between the line connecting the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a and the center of rotation of the extended rotation member K874 and the line extending in the left-right direction is 5 degrees.

Therefore, if the length between the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a and the center of rotation of the extended rotation member K874 is 25 mm, the displacement amount by which the base end slide member K880 returns outward in the left-right direction when the extended rotation member K874 over-rotates by 5° is 0.1 mm (25-25 cos (5°)), which is not a distance that is noticeable to the player. Therefore, for example, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation occurring in which the extended rotation member K874 over-rotates and the plate-shaped portion K811 (see FIG. 1777) returns outward in the left-right direction, thereby reducing the effect of the presentation.

Furthermore, if the backlash between the pinion K825 supported by the rotation support portion K883 of the base end slide member K880 and the upper extension gear teeth K854 and rack portion K824 is designed to be about 0.1 mm, the left-right displacement of the base end slide member K880 caused by the extension rotation member K874 over-rotating by 5° falls within the above-mentioned backlash, and it is possible to prevent the plate-shaped portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820 having the rack portion K824 and the plate-shaped portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 interlocking with the plate-shaped portion K821 from being displaced outward in the left-right direction. The interlocking between the plate-shaped portion K821 and the plate-shaped portion K811 will be described below with reference to FIG. 1780.

Figure 1780 is a partially enlarged front view of the rear layer movable device K800. In Figure 1780, in order to make the internal structure easier to understand, the upper front cover member K861 and the front opening/closing member K830 are omitted, the plate-shaped portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820 is shown partially broken away, and the outer shape of the middle opening/closing member K820 is shown in imaginary lines. In addition, the pinion K815 is shown with a large diameter gear K815a that meshes with the lower extension gear teeth K855 of the support member K850 on the upper side, and a small diameter gear K815b that meshes with the rack portion K814 of the rear opening/closing member K810 on the lower side.

The method of transmitting the driving force will be described with reference to FIG. 1780. First, the driving force of the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 is transmitted, and the extended rotating member K874 of the transmission device K870 is rotated, causing the base end slide member K880 to slide left and right (see FIG. 1779). The pinion K825, which rotates around the rotating support part K883 that is moved as a result, is rotated by meshing with the upper extended gear teeth K854 (when the rotating support part K883 moves to the left in FIG. 1780, it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front).

By rotating the pinion K825, the rack portion K824 that is engaged on the lower side is moved to the left, and the plate-shaped portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820 moves to the left. At this time, since the number of teeth that mesh with the upper extension gear teeth K854 of the pinion K825 is the same as the number of teeth that mesh with the rack portion K824 of the pinion K825, the plate-shaped portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820 can be moved by twice the amount of left-right movement of the rotation support portion K883.

Therefore, the amount of movement of the base-end slide member K880 required to move the plate-shaped portion K821 the desired distance can be shortened, thereby reducing the space required to arrange the base-end slide member K880.

When the middle opening/closing member K820 is moved left or right, the large diameter gear K815a of the pinion K815 supported by the support part K826 rotates by meshing with the lower extension gear K855 (when the support part K826 moves to the left in FIG. 1780, it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front).

When the pinion K815 rotates, the rack portion K814, which is engaged with the small diameter gear K815b on the lower side, moves to the left, so that the plate-shaped portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 moves to the left.

At this time, the large diameter gear K815a has 23 teeth, while the small diameter gear K815b has 11 teeth, so that the plate-shaped portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 can be moved by an amount that is 34/23 times the amount of left-right movement of the support portion K826.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to transmit the driving force via the base-end slide member K880 to the middle opening/closing member K820, rather than to the rear opening/closing member K810, which has the greatest amount of movement.

Here, the opening and closing operation of the third movable device K801 can be performed even if the driving force is transmitted to the rear opening and closing member K810, which has the greatest amount of movement, via the base end slide member K880. In this case, however, it becomes necessary to set the amount of movement of the base end slide member K880 long to match the amount of movement of the rear opening and closing member K810. This requires the length of the extension rotation member K874 (see FIG. 1779) to be excessively long, which is a factor that makes it impossible to adopt a transmission mechanism that utilizes the extension rotation member K874.

If this occurs, even if the rotation speed is the same, it will not be possible to achieve the unique effect of the extended rotation member K874 (see FIG. 1779), that is, the speed in the left-right direction changes depending on the position of the extended rotation member K874.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the driving force is transmitted to the middle opening/closing member K820 via the base-end slide member K880, and a pinion K815 that slides left and right is employed. This maximizes the amount of movement of the rear opening/closing member K810 by increasing the amount of movement of the plate-shaped portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 more than the amount of movement of the plate-shaped portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820.

This allows the amount of movement of the base end slide member K880 to be reduced while still ensuring a large amount of movement of the plate-shaped portion K811, thereby preventing the length of the extended rotation member K874 (see FIG. 1779) from becoming excessively large, thereby producing an action and effect unique to the extended rotation member K874.

Figures 1781, 1782, and 1783 are front views of the rear layer side movable device K800. Figures 1781, 1782, and 1783 chronologically illustrate how the state of the third movable device K801 changes from a performance standby state to a blocked state.

That is, FIG. 1781 illustrates the performance standby state of the third movable device K801 (see FIG. 1741), FIG. 1782 illustrates the interlocking switching state of the third movable device K801, and FIG. 1783 illustrates the closed state of the third movable device K801 (see FIG. 1742). In FIG. 1781 to FIG. 1783, in order to facilitate understanding of the interlocking, the arrangement of the protruding portion K827 of the middle opening/closing member K820 and the arrangement of the recessed portion K835 of the front opening/closing member K830 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 1781 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 1779(a), the state shown in FIG. 1782 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 1779(b), and the state shown in FIG. 1783 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 1779(c).

As shown in FIG. 1781, when the third movable device K801 is in a standby state, the protrusion K827 of the middle opening/closing member K820 abuts against the left and right outer edges of the recessed portion K835, restricting the left and right inward movement of the front opening/closing member K830.

In the process in which the plate-shaped portions K821 and K811 move inward to the left and right (see FIG. 1780), from the performance standby state shown in FIG. 1781 to the interlocking switching state shown in FIG. 1782, the protrusion portion K827 moves inside the recessed portion K835 and does not come into contact with the left and right inner edges.

Therefore, no load is transmitted between the middle opening/closing member K820 and the front opening/closing member K830 via the protruding portion K827. Therefore, the arrangement of the plate-shaped portion K831 of the front opening/closing member K830 is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 1781 to the state shown in FIG. 1782.

In addition, since no load is transmitted between the middle opening/closing member K820 and the front opening/closing member K830 via the protruding portion K827, the driving force required to operate the middle opening/closing member K820 and the rear opening/closing member K810 from the performance standby state shown in FIG. 1781 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since no load is transmitted between the middle opening/closing member K820 and the front opening/closing member K830 via the protruding portion K827, when the plate-shaped portions K821, K811 are driven in a reciprocating manner between the state shown in FIG. 1781 and the state shown in FIG. 1782 (intermediate reciprocating drive), the resistance experienced by the drive motors KMT81, KMT82 (see FIG. 1775) can be reduced, and fatigue accumulated in the drive motors KMT81, KMT82 can be reduced.

In the process of the plate-shaped parts K821, K811 moving inward to the left and right (see FIG. 1780), from the interlocking switching state shown in FIG. 1782 to the closed state shown in FIG. 1783, the protrusion part K827 abuts against the left and right inner edge parts of the recessed part K835 so as to push them forward, so that the plate-shaped part K831 of the front opening/closing member K830 also moves inward to the left and right as the plate-shaped parts K821, K811 move.

The interlocking switching state shown in FIG. 1782 is a state in which the plate-shaped portion K831 starts to move, and therefore requires a driving force that exceeds the static friction of the plate-shaped portion K831. However, in this embodiment, in the interlocking switching state, the direction of movement of the cylindrical protrusion K876a of the extended rotating member K874 is oriented in the left-right direction, which is the direction of movement of the plate-shaped portion K831, and the force can be transmitted efficiently (see FIG. 1779 (b)).

This allows a sufficient driving force greater than the static friction of the plate-shaped portion K831 to be transmitted to the plate-shaped portion K831, thereby suppressing the amount of decrease in the movement speed of the plate-shaped portions K821 and K811 when they start to move in conjunction with the plate-shaped portion K831, and allowing smooth movement between the plate-shaped portions K821 and K811 and the plate-shaped portion K831.

When the protrusion K827 moves outward in the left-right direction from the closed state shown in FIG. 1783, from the start of the movement until the protrusion K827 moves inside the recessed portion K835, no driving force is transmitted from the protrusion K827 to the plate-shaped portion K831 of the front opening/closing member K830, and the plate-shaped portion K831 is maintained in the position shown in FIG. 1783.

Therefore, when the plate-shaped parts K821, K811 start to move outward in the left-right direction from the closed state shown in FIG. 1783, they do not receive resistance from the plate-shaped part K831, so the driving force of the drive motors KMT81, KMT82 (see FIG. 1775) required to move the plate-shaped parts K821, K811 can be reduced. The same is true when the plate-shaped parts K821, K811 start to move inward in the left-right direction from the performance standby state shown in FIG. 1781.

In addition, even if the return movement outward in the left-right direction due to over-rotation of the above-mentioned extended rotating member K874 (see FIG. 1779(c)) does not fall within the gear backlash, the outward movement of the plate-shaped portion K831 in the left-right direction due to the outward movement of the protrusion portion K827 in the left-right direction can be prevented, and the position of the plate-shaped portion K831 can be maintained.

After changing from the state shown in FIG. 1781 to the state shown in FIG. 1782, it is also possible to drive the extended rotating member K874 to change its rotation direction and control the drive to return to FIG. 1781.

In this case, the driving force may be continuously transmitted to the extended rotating member K874 until the state shown in FIG. 1782 is reached, or the driving force may be stopped before the state shown in FIG. 1782 is reached.

Even in the latter case, the rotation of the extended rotating member K874 continues due to its own weight until it reaches the position shown in FIG. 1779(b), and since static friction of the plate-shaped portion K831 is applied in the state shown in FIG. 1782, it is easy to stop the extended rotating member K874 in the state shown in FIG. 1779(b).

In other words, by controlling the extended rotating member K874 to drive in the reverse direction (generating a driving force in a pulsed manner) with a time interval sufficient for it to reach FIG. 1779(b), it is possible to perform a motion presentation that moves back and forth between the state shown in FIG. 1745 and the state shown in FIG. 1782.

As described above in detail, the third movable device K801 operates in a manner that links the three plate-shaped members K811, K821, and K831 together, but the type of linkage can be changed. That is, at the start of the movement, only the plate-shaped members K811 and K821 are linked, but halfway through the movement, the plate-shaped member K831 is also linked. This makes it possible to complicate the movement and improve the presentation effect.

In addition, in the third movable device K801, the extended rotating member K874 is prevented from over-rotating after the plate-shaped members K811, K821, and K831 have been moved to the end of their travel, and all of the load caused by the reaction from the plate-shaped members K811, K821, and K831 is prevented from being applied to the rotating shaft. This makes it possible to increase the service life of the extended rotating member K874.

Furthermore, by limiting the over-rotation dimension of the extended rotating member K874 to a level that does not cause movement of the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, and K831, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect due to the return movement of the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, and K831 (problems such as gaps occurring between the plate-shaped parts K811).

Returning to FIG. 1725, the explanation will be given. In the pachinko machine K10 of this embodiment, the display lamps K900 are arranged so as to surround the top, bottom, left and right of the glass unit H16 arranged inside the front frame K14.

The indicator lamp K900 includes a top lamp K910 formed in a horizontally elongated shape on the upper side of the glass unit H16, a right side lamp K920 formed in a vertically elongated shape on the right side of the glass unit H16, and a left side lamp K930 formed in a vertically elongated shape on the left side of the glass unit H16.

The display lamp K900 is controlled by the sound lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) to emit light in a functional display mode corresponding to the internal state of the pachinko machine K10 when an error occurs in the pachinko machine K10 or when prize balls are being paid out, or to emit light in a performance display mode corresponding to the performance performed by the operation unit K300 (see FIG. 1727) or the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1726) that is visible through the glass unit H16. An example of when the pachinko machine K10 is controlled in the performance display mode is described below.

Figures 1784(a) to 1784(f) and 1785(a) to 1785(e) are schematic front views of pachinko machine K10. Figures 1784(a) to 1784(f) and 1785(a) to 1785(e) show an example of the performance control executed in pachinko machine K10 in chronological order.

In FIG. 1784(a), the third symbol display device K81 displays the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot aligned on the left and right (not stopped), indicating a jackpot. In this state, the display lamp K900 emits white light, and the game board K13 emits white light overall due to illumination from an LED or the like from behind (the white light emission is shown by the first cross-hatching).

From this point, after the performance operation in the operating unit K300 and the third symbol display device K81, the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and then the big win game begins. The performance operation will be described in detail below.

Figure 1784 (b) illustrates a state in which the output from the detection sensor K711e (see Figure 1773 (b)) has changed, and the voice lamp display device H113 (see Figure 1724) has determined that the second movable device K710, which is located on the front side of the third pattern display device K81, has entered a lowered position state, after which the first movable device K401 has changed to a dropped position state.

The rotating decorative member K578 of the first movable device K401 has already been rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front before the moving device K560 is dropped, and the rotation continues even after the first movable device K401 changes to the dropped position state.

On the rear side of the play area, the light emission from the operating unit K300 side is suppressed, and the play board 13 appears to be dark. In the display lamp K900, the light emission mode is controlled so that the player sees a rainbow-colored light (rainbow-colored light emission is illustrated by the second shading). This makes it possible to guide the player's gaze to the inside of the third pattern display device K81 rather than to the play area, while maintaining the brilliance of the entire pachinko machine K10.

In FIG. 1784(c), while the rotational operation of the moving device K560 continues, the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1754) is driven in the forward direction, causing the moving device K560 to move to the right; when the output of the right-side detection sensor K556a (see FIG. 1754) is changed, the drive direction of the drive motor KMT51 is reversed, the moving device K560 is moved to the left; when the output of the left-side detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1754) is changed, the drive direction of the drive motor KMT51 is reversed to the forward direction, the moving device K560 is moved to the right; and when the output of the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) is changed, the drive of the drive motor KMT51 is stopped.

At this time, the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K578 of the moving device K560 is set to a direction of forward rotation to the right when the moving device K560 is moving to the right, and a direction of forward rotation to the left when the moving device K560 is moving to the left. This allows the left-right sliding movement of the moving device K560 to correspond to the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K578, allowing for the performance of a unified movement.

In the illumination board K564 (see FIG. 1755) of the moving device K560, the light emission color of the LED is designed to make the rotating decorative member K578 glow in the colors of the rainbow. Note that the design for making the light from the LEDs appear rainbow-colored can be set in advance so that the player can select the LED that emits light that will make the rainbow-colored light appear visible, and is not limited to the illumination board K564. Alternatively, each LED can be configured to emit light in multiple colors, and the light emission color can be switched in an order that makes it easy for the player to see the rainbow-colored light.

In the third pattern display device K81, a circular rainbow-colored spiral that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the moving device K560 is displayed in the front layer at a position corresponding to the position of the moving device K560. In other words, the spiral display also moves in conjunction with the left-right movement of the moving device K560. Furthermore, a rainbow-colored cloud-like display is displayed across the entire display area in the rear layer.

On the rear side of the play area, the light emission from the operating unit K300 side is suppressed, and the play board 13 appears to be dark. The light emission mode of the display lamp K900 is controlled so that the player sees a rainbow-colored light. This makes it possible to guide the player's gaze to the inside of the third pattern display device K81 rather than to the play area, while maintaining the brilliance of the entire pachinko machine K10.

Figure 1784 (d) shows the state after the first movable device K401 has been changed to a performance standby state while the output of the center detection sensor K556b indicates that the movable device K560 has been positioned in the center position in the left-right direction.

Until the first movable device K401 is changed to a performance standby state, the rotating decorative member K578 continues to rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. In other words, the first movable device K401 raises the long device K540 and the moving device K560 while the rotating decorative member K578 is rotating.

When the first movable device K401 is changed to a standby state and the moving device K560 is hidden by the upper decorative member K330, light is simultaneously emitted from the light-emitting section K212 (see FIG. 1729) of the winning unit K200, the light-emitting board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1740), the light-emitting board inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1740), and the electric display board K761a (see FIG. 1770) of the second movable device K701. Furthermore, the third pattern display device K81 displays a male character gathering power on the front layer.

Figure 1784 (e) shows the state in which the light except for the third pattern display device K81 is turned off toward the inside to the left and right. That is, the right side lamp K920 and the left side lamp K930 start to turn off, then the outside of the top lamp K910, the outside of the left and right of the light-emitting board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see Figure 1740), the light-emitting board inside the left decorative member K350 (see Figure 1740), and the light-emitting part K212 (see Figure 1729) of the winning unit K200 are turned off, and finally the inside of the top lamp K910, the inside of the left and right of the light-emitting board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see Figure 1740), and the electric decoration board K761a (see Figure 1770) of the second movable device K701 are turned off, and a state in which the pachinko machine K10 is viewed in the dark is formed except for the third pattern display device K81.

This allows the player's gaze to be gradually guided toward the center of the play area, i.e., toward the center of the third pattern display device K81, increasing the sense of anticipation for the performance that will be performed subsequently. Then, at the timing when the player's gaze has been guided, an action is displayed in which the male character displayed on the third pattern display device K81 releases its accumulated power, and immediately after this, the first movable device K401 is changed from the performance standby state to the drop position state.

Figure 1784 (f) shows the state in which the rotation of the rotating decorative member K578 is maintained when the first movable device K401 is changed to the dropped position state. At the same time that the first movable device K401 is changed to the dropped position state, the pachinko machine K10 appears bright overall.

That is, light is emitted simultaneously from the light-emitting section K212 (see FIG. 1729) of the winning unit K200, the light-emitting board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1740), the light-emitting board inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1740), and the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1770) of the second movable device K701. The form of this light may be white light, rainbow light, or a light emission form that changes from white light to rainbow light.

Furthermore, in the first movable device K401, the rotating decorative member K578 appears rainbow-colored due to the light from the illumination board K564 (see FIG. 1755), and the decorative member K551 also appears bright overall due to the white light irradiated from the illumination board K552 (see FIG. 1753).

Figure 1785 (a) shows the state in which the moving device K560 of the first movable device K401 moves to the right-side intermediate position KR42 (see Figure 1768 (c)) while rotating the rotating decorative member K578 and then stops.

In this state, within the play area and its inner area, only the rotating decorative member K578 is brightly illuminated by light from the illumination board 564 (see FIG. 1755), and the other illumination boards (such as the light-emitting portion K212 (see FIG. 1729) of the winning unit K200, the illumination board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1740), the illumination board inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1740), and the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1770) of the second movable device K701)) are turned off.

In the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the front layer displays light shaped to be concentrated around the rotating decorative element K578, while the rear layer is displayed against a black background, creating an effect that draws attention to the rotating decorative element K578.

Figure 1785 (b) shows the state in which the moving device K560 of the first movable device K401 moves to the left intermediate position KL43 (see Figure 1768 (d)) while rotating the rotating decorative member K578 and then stops.

During this operation, the display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 changes from a black background to a white background, and the third movable device K801 changes from a performance standby state to a blocked state. This brightens the field of view inside the play area.

Figure 1785 (c) shows the state in which the second movable device K701 is changed from the lowered position state to the performance standby state when the audio lamp control device H113 (see Figure 1724) determines from a change in the output of the central detection sensor K556b that the detected plate portion K571a (see Figure 1755) of the first movable device K401 has left the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (see Figure 1754).

In this state, the third pattern display device K81 executes a display that emphasizes the decoration (shown as an "S"-shaped decoration in FIG. 1785(b)) applied to the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 of the third movable device K801, and the display is viewed by the player through the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831, and is viewed in a manner different from when only the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 are visible.

In the state shown in FIG. 1785(c), the player can visually see a series of presentation displays consisting of a string of letters "SFME" (assuming the initials of ScienceFictionMyEnergy). Note that in this embodiment, a series of displays consisting of a string of Roman letters has been described as an example, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a string of kana characters or kanji characters, or a string of illustrations or shapes are also acceptable.

In the process of changing from FIG. 1785(b) to FIG. 1785(c), white light is simultaneously emitted from the light-emitting portion K212 (see FIG. 1729) of the winning unit K200, the light-emitting board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1740), the light-emitting board inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1740), and the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1770) of the second movable device K701. Furthermore, in the first movable device K401, in addition to the rotating decorative member K578 being brightly visible due to the light from the illumination board K564 (see FIG. 1755), the decorative member K551 is also brightly visible overall due to the white light being emitted from the illumination board K552 (see FIG. 1753).

Furthermore, after the change to FIG. 1785(c) (after the second movable device K701 is changed to the performance standby state and each movable device stops), the above decorations applied to the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, and K831 are displayed in rainbow colors in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. In addition, the pachinko machine K10 is illuminated to form a rainbow color as a whole by light from the light-emitting part K212 (see FIG. 1729) of the winning unit K200, the light-emitting board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1740), the light-emitting board inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1740), the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1770) of the second movable device K701, and the illumination board K564 (see FIG. 1755) of the first movable device K401.

In this way, by uniformly changing the lighting state before and after each movable device stops, it is possible for the player to easily distinguish between the period when each movable device is moving and the period after the movement of each movable device has stopped, thereby reducing the burden on the player while playing the game.

Figure 1785 (d) shows the state where the pachinko machine K10 is maintained in a state where it is illuminated to form rainbow colors as a whole, and the rotating decorative member K578 is rotated while the moving device K560 reaches the center position in the left and right direction. The rotation of the rotating decorative member K578 continues even after the moving device K560 reaches the center in the left and right direction.

In FIG. 1785(e), as the first movable device K401 begins to change to a performance standby state (moves upward), the third movable device K801 changes from a closed state to a performance standby state. As the state of the third movable device K801 changes, the display of the third pattern display device K81 is switched from a display emphasizing the decorations applied to the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 to a display in which the third patterns are aligned to the left and right.

That is, the display emphasizing the decorations applied to the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831 is displayed in the front layer of the third pattern display device K81 so as to move in accordance with the movement of the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, and K831, and the rear layer displays the third pattern being stopped after it is aligned left and right. That is, as shown in FIG. 1785(e), the stopped pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device K81, the occurrence of a jackpot is indicated, and then the jackpot game begins.

Between the time when the third symbol is displayed and the time when it is stopped, the output of the detection sensor K418 (see FIG. 1749) of the first movable device K401 is changed, the voice lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1724) determines that the lifting device K500 is positioned at a height in the performance standby state, and the second movable device K701 is controlled to change to the performance standby state.

In the above example of presentation control, the content to be viewed on each movable device (first movable device K401, second movable device K701, and third movable device K801) is described as being different from the content to be viewed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the shape and pattern of each movable device can be displayed (video display, still image display) in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 so that the player can view them in the same viewing manner as when each movable device is placed in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81.

When viewed from the front, the visual appearance can be made similar when each movable device is placed in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 and when the shape and pattern of each movable device (first movable device K401, second movable device K701, and third movable device K801) are displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. In this case, even if any of the movable devices breaks down and stops working, the loss of performance effect can be minimized by compensating with the display corresponding to the broken movable device.

The display mode in which the display area of the third pattern display device K81 displays corresponding to each movable device (first movable device K401, second movable device K701, and third movable device K801) is not limited to being executed only when each movable device fails. For example, there may be cases in which each movable device is operated in response to the performance being executed, and cases in which each movable device is not operated and a display corresponding to each movable device is performed on the third pattern display device K81.

In this case, when each movable device (first movable device K401, second movable device K701, and third movable device K801) is not operated, the illumination of each movable device (illumination board K564 of first movable device K401 (see FIG. 1755) and illumination board K761a of second movable device K701 (see FIG. 1770)) can be turned off or hidden behind a blind member, making it easier to guide the player's gaze to the display corresponding to each movable device displayed on the third pattern display device K81.

In addition, the display corresponding to each movable device (first movable device K401, second movable device K701, and third movable device K801) on the third pattern display device K81 is not limited to the display of each movable device itself. For example, on the first movable device K401, the position corresponding to the rotating decorative member K578 may be left blank, and a display may be made at a position corresponding to the outside of the rotating decorative member K578 when viewed from the front, so that the display corresponds to the movement of the rotating decorative member K578.

In this case, for example, if the long-length device K540 (see FIG. 1768) is made of a light-transmitting resin material and the display of the third pattern display device K81 is configured to be visible through the long-length device K540, the rotating decorative element K578 can be viewed as if it were floating in the display area of the third pattern display device K81.

In this case, if the first movable device K401 malfunctions and stops working, the shape and pattern of the rotating decorative member K578 can be displayed in the white-out position that corresponds to the rotating decorative member K578, thereby displaying a visual appearance similar to the visual appearance based on the operation of the first movable device K401, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable.

In addition, this is not a problem for the first movable device K401 and the third movable device K801, which are positioned in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 due to movement, but for the second movable device K701, which is only partially positioned in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 due to movement, it is possible to set only the display mode in the arrangement overlapping with the third pattern display device K81, or to expand the display area by lowering the lower edge of the frame of the third pattern display device K81 to a position overlapping with the second movable device K701 in the performance waiting state (or raised arrangement state) when viewed from the front.

In this case, by displaying the shape and pattern of the second movable device K701 in the same position (the lower range of the display area) as the possible placement position of the second movable device K701 in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, it is possible to visually recognize that the second movable device K701 is operating, even without operating the second movable device K701.

In this case, if the second movable device K701 breaks down and becomes inoperable, the second movable device K701 is maintained in a lowered position and the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1770) is turned off, so that the presentation effect achieved by the operation of the second movable device K701 is compensated for by the display of the third pattern display device K81, and by making the second movable device K701 less noticeable, repair work such as removal can be omitted.

The 106th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1786 to 1791. In the 105th embodiment, the insides of the formation recesses K60a to K60d formed on the rear side of the base plate K60 function as spaces, but in the 106th embodiment, a light irradiation device K2100 is disposed inside the first formation recess K60a and the second formation recess K60b of the base plate K2060. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1786 is a rear view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100 in the 106th embodiment, and Figure 1787 is a rear perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100. As shown in Figures 1786 and 1787, the light irradiation device K2100 is disposed in the first forming recess K60a and the second forming recess K60b so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate K2060 on the rear side of the area forming the play area.

This makes it possible to avoid the position of the operating unit K300 (see FIG. 1727) disposed on the rear side of the base plate K2060 being restricted by the light irradiation device K2100. In other words, regardless of the presence or absence of the light irradiation device K2100, the operating unit K300 can be positioned closer to the base plate K2060.

In addition, since the light irradiation device K2100 is disposed outside the rear area of the play area formed on the front side of the base plate K2060, it is possible to prevent the light irradiation device K2100 from reducing visibility behind the play area or blocking the line of sight. In other words, regardless of whether the light irradiation device K2100 is present or not, the player can easily see the operating unit K300 (see FIG. 1727) on the rear side by looking through the base plate K2060.

The base plate K2060 is provided with an externally inclined portion K2060e that constitutes the edge of the forming recesses K60a-K60d on the playing area side and is located at the rear of the external shape of the area that forms the playing area, and an inclined opening K2060w that is located inside the ring-shaped playing area and has an inclined surface formed all around the circumference that expands in the direction toward the rear side.

In this embodiment, the shape of the external inclined portion K2060e at the rear end of the base plate K2060 is made slightly smaller than the shape at the recessed tip end (front side) of the forming recesses K60a to K60d, and is formed so that the inclination angle with respect to the rear side surface of the base plate K2060 is approximately 45 degrees in the cross-sectional shape when cut across the base plate K2060.

The inclined opening K2060 is formed so that the shape at the rear end of the base plate K2060 is slightly larger than the shape at the front end of the base plate K2060, and the inclination angle with respect to the front side of the base plate K2060 is approximately 45 degrees in the cross-sectional shape when cut across the base plate K2060.

Figure 1788 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100, and Figure 1789 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100.

The light irradiation device K2100 includes an illumination board K2110 on which a plurality of light emitting means K2111 consisting of LEDs or the like are arranged, and an intermediate member K2120 to which the illumination board K2110 is fastened and fixed, which is made of a light-transmitting resin material and fastened to a base plate K2060.

The light irradiation device K2100 is arranged in a pair on the left and right sides of a set of components that have a common configuration and common functions, so we will explain the set of the illumination board K2110 and intermediate member K2120 on the right side, and will omit the explanation of the set of the illumination board K2110 and intermediate member K2120 on the left side.

The front-view external shape of the illumination board K2110 is designed to fit into the second recess K60b of the base plate K2060, and multiple light-emitting means K2111 are spaced apart along an arc shape that corresponds to the outer edge of the play area.

The front view outer shape of the intermediate member K2120 is designed to fit into the second formed recess K60b of the base plate K2060, similar to the illuminated board K2110, and a linear inclined surface K2121 is formed on the arc-shaped portion side corresponding to the outer edge of the play area to include the area in front of the light-emitting means K2111.

The inclined surface K2121 is inclined in a direction in which the radius of the arc shape increases toward the rear side, and is designed so that the angle of inclination is approximately 45 degrees.

In this embodiment, the recessed end faces of the forming recesses K60a to K60d of the base plate K2060, the external inclined portion K2060e, the inclined opening K2060w, and the inclined surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120 are embossed with countless projections and recesses.

Figure 1790 is a partial cross-sectional view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100 taken along the line MDCCXC-MDCCXC in Figure 1786. Figure 1790 shows the cross-sectional shape of the light emitting means K2111 taken along a plane that passes through the center of the light emitting means K2111 and intersects the arc of the external inclined portion K2060e at a right angle.

Figure 1790 also illustrates the travel directions KLD21 to KLD23, which travel through different positions in three stages and cause differences in the visibility of the light irradiated forward from one light-emitting means K2111.

As shown in FIG. 1790, of the light emitted forward from one light-emitting means K2111, the light that passes through the inclined surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120 travels in the direction of travel KLD21, so that the player can see a brighter position slightly outside the external inclined portion K2060e, which corresponds to the rear of the outer edge of the play area.

As described above, the inclined surface K2121 and the recessed end surface of the second forming recess K60b are embossed, which diffuses the light, so that the light can be seen as a line of light that matches the shape of the inclined surface K2121, rather than as scattered light that depends on the placement spacing of the light-emitting means K2111. This makes it possible to make the area slightly outside the outer edge of the play area appear brighter.

As shown in FIG. 1790, the light emitted forward from one light-emitting means K2111 is reflected by the inclined surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120, and then refracted by the external inclined portion K2060e travels in the direction of travel KLD22, so that the player can clearly see the position on the front surface of the base plate K2060 that corresponds to the external inclined portion K2060e located behind the outer edge of the play area.

As described above, the outer inclined portion K2060e is embossed to diffuse the light, so that the light can be seen as a line of light that matches the shape of the outer inclined portion K2060e, rather than as scattered light that depends on the spacing of the light-emitting means K2111. This allows the area around the outer edge of the play area to be seen brightly.

As shown in FIG. 1790, the light emitted forward from one light-emitting means K2111 is reflected by the inclined surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120, passes through the external inclined portion K2060e, and is reflected by the inclined opening K2060w and travels in the direction KLD23, so that the player can clearly see the position on the front surface of the base plate K2060 that corresponds to the edge of the inclined opening K2060w (the position that corresponds to the position of the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1728)).

As described above, the inclined opening K2060w is embossed to diffuse the light, so that the light can be seen as a line of light that matches the shape of the inclined opening K2060w, rather than as scattered light that depends on the spacing of the light-emitting means K2111. This allows the outer edge of the center frame K86 that divides the play area to be brightly visible in the center of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 1790, according to this embodiment, the illuminated board K2110 is positioned outside the play area, and the light from the light-emitting means K2111 of the illuminated board K2110 can be seen by the player slightly outside the outer edge of the play area, near the outer edge of the play area, and through the outer edge of the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1728), so that the base plate K2060 can be seen brightly over a wide area.

In this way, by configuring the light emitting means K2111 to make the base plate K2060 brightly visible over a wide area, the space required for arranging the light emitting means K2111 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the illumination board K2110.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1790, the light irradiation device K2100 is positioned within the thickness of the base plate K2060 (the rear end surface of the light irradiation device K2100 is flush with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060), which improves the degree of freedom in the placement of the operating unit K300 (see FIG. 1727) disposed on the back side of the base plate K2060. In other words, even if the operating unit K300 is disposed in a manner in which it is in close contact with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060, it is possible to place the light irradiation device K2100, and the base plate K2060 can be made bright and visible.

As shown in FIG. 1790, when the light from the light emitting means K2111 travels in the up, down, left and right directions before passing through the play area, the light travels behind the front end face of the base plate K2060. In other words, the light does not pass through the play area in the range in which it travels in the up, down, left and right directions, so the light is not blocked by the ball located in the play area in the range in which it travels in the up, down, left and right directions.

This makes it possible to avoid changes in the amount of light in the travel directions KLD21-KLD23 depending on the arrangement of the balls in the play area, and therefore makes it possible to avoid situations in which the light is blocked by the balls during pinball play, reducing the brightness of the base plate K2060, while adopting a configuration in which light travels from the outside of the play area to the inside of the play area.

The position of the light irradiation device K2100 is not limited to the first formation recess K60a or the second formation recess K60b, but may be arranged in the third formation recess K60c. In this case, light from the light emitting means K2111 may enter the flow path of the ball that has entered the general winning opening K63 (see FIG. 1728), so when a ball enters the general winning opening K63, the light is blocked by the ball.

The blocking effect of this ball affects the appearance of light traveling toward the center of the play area. In other words, when a ball enters the general winning hole K63, the light irradiated from the light emitting means K2111 and traveling to the inclined opening K2060w is blocked by the ball and does not reach the inclined opening K2060w.

As a result, the ball entering the general winning opening K63 corresponds to the visual appearance of the inclined opening K2060w, so the player can know that the ball has entered the general winning opening K63 by visually checking the inclined opening K2060w without visually checking the general winning opening K63.

In this case, the inclined opening K2060w is located at a position corresponding to the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726) that borders the front opening of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1726). Therefore, by allowing the light reflected by the inclined opening K2060w to be visible, the player can enjoy viewing the display effects in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 while knowing whether or not a ball has entered the general winning port K63.

In reality, the direction of travel of light from the light emitting means K2111 may be refracted due to refraction and reflection at the base plate K2060, but in FIG. 1790, the direction of travel of light from the light emitting means K2111 is shown diagrammatically in the up, down, left and right directions for ease of understanding.

Figure 1791 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine K10. Figure 1791 illustrates the visual confirmation state when a base plate K2060 and a light irradiation device K2100 are arranged on the pachinko machine K10.

As shown in FIG. 1791, light from a light irradiation device K2100 disposed on the rear side of the base plate K2060 is irradiated onto the center frame K86 through the inclined opening K2060w. This allows the center frame K86 to be brightly illuminated.

At this time, the LEDs arranged on the illumination board and the light-emitting board arranged on the operating unit K300 are turned off, and light is emitted from the light irradiation device K2100, making the center frame K86 stand out and drawing attention to the third pattern display device H81 arranged inside it.

In addition, since the center frame K86 is positioned forward of the upper decorative member K330, by emitting light from the light emitting means K2100 while turning on the LEDs of the light emitting board arranged inside the upper decorative member K330, the illuminated upper decorative member K330 can be made to appear as if it is divided by the light visible along the center frame K86 when viewed from the front.

The 107th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1792 to 1794. In the 105th embodiment, the insides of the formation recesses K60a to K60d formed on the back side of the base plate K60 function as spaces. In the 107th embodiment, the light irradiation device K3100 is disposed inside the first formation recess K60a and the second formation recess K60b of the base plate K2060. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1792 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K3100 in the 107th embodiment, and Figure 1793 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K3100.

The light irradiation device K3100 includes an illumination board K3110 on which a plurality of light emitting means K3111 consisting of LEDs or the like are arranged, and an intermediate member K3120 to which the illumination board K3110 is fastened and fixed, which is made of a light-transmitting resin material and fastened to a base plate K2060.

The light irradiation device K3100 has a pair of components arranged on the left and right sides that have a common configuration and common functions, so we will explain the set of the illumination board K3110 and intermediate member K3120 on the right side, and will omit the explanation of the set of the illumination board K3110 and intermediate member K3120 on the left side.

The front view external shape of the illumination board K3110 is designed to fit into the second forming recess K60b of the base plate K2060, and multiple light emitting means K3111 are arranged at intervals along an arc shape that corresponds to the outer edge of the play area.

The intermediate member K3120 is designed so that its outer shape when viewed from the front fits into the second recess K60b of the base plate K2060, similar to the illumination board K3110, and is provided with a number of openings K3121 drilled in a U-shape in front of the light-emitting means K3111, with the open side facing the center of the arc shape corresponding to the outer edge of the play area, and a number of inclined surfaces K3122 formed in the inner component of the U-shape of the openings K3121 so as to slope toward the rear side as they approach the concave end of the U-shape.

The inclined surface K3122 is inclined in a direction such that the distance between the wall of the opening K3121, which is arranged opposite the intermediate member K3120 in a direction perpendicular to the arc on the play area side, becomes narrower as it approaches the rear side, and is designed so that the angle of inclination is approximately 45 degrees.

In this embodiment, the recessed end faces of the forming recesses K60a to K60d of the base plate K2060, the external inclined portion K2060e, and the inclined opening portion K2060w are embossed with a myriad of projections and recesses.

Figure 1794 is a partial cross-sectional view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K3100 taken along a line corresponding to the MDCCXC-MDCCXC line in Figure 1786. Figure 1794 shows the cross-sectional shape taken along a plane that passes through the center of one light-emitting means K3111 and intersects at a right angle with the arc of the external inclined portion K2060e.

As shown in FIG. 1794, the light irradiation device K3100 is disposed in the first forming recess K60a and the second forming recess K60b so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate K2060 on the rear side of the area forming the play area.

FIG. 1794 also illustrates the travel directions KLD31 to KLD33, which travel through different positions in three stages and cause differences in the visual perception of the light irradiated forward from one light-emitting means K3111.

As shown in FIG. 1794, of the light emitted forward from one light-emitting means K3111, the light that passes through the inclined surface K3122 of the intermediate member K3120 travels in the direction of travel KLD31, so that the player can see a brighter position slightly outside the external inclined portion K2060e, which corresponds to the rear of the outer edge of the play area.

As described above, the recessed end surface of the second forming recess K60b is embossed to diffuse light, but the space is closed by the opening K3121, so the diffusion of light is suppressed within the opening K3121. This allows the light to be viewed as scattered light that corresponds to the arrangement of the light emitting means K3111 and is expanded to the size of the opening K3121. This allows the area slightly outside the outer edge of the play area to be viewed brightly.

As shown in FIG. 1794, the light emitted forward from one light-emitting means K3111 is reflected by the inclined surface K3122 of the intermediate member K3120, and then refracted by the external inclined portion K2060e travels in the direction KLD32, so that the player can clearly see the position on the front surface of the base plate K2060 that corresponds to the external inclined portion K2060e located behind the outer edge of the play area.

As described above, the outer inclined portion K2060e is embossed to diffuse the light, so that the light can be seen as a line of light that matches the shape of the outer inclined portion K2060e, rather than as scattered light that depends on the spacing of the light-emitting means K3111. This allows the area around the outer edge of the play area to be seen brightly.

As shown in FIG. 1794, the light emitted forward from one light-emitting means K3111 is reflected by the inclined surface K3122 of the intermediate member K3120, passes through the external inclined portion K2060e, and is reflected by the inclined opening K2060w and travels in the direction KLD33, so that the player can clearly see the position on the front surface of the base plate K2060 that corresponds to the edge of the inclined opening K2060w (the position that corresponds to the arrangement of the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1728)).

As described above, the inclined opening K2060w is embossed to diffuse the light, so that the light can be seen as a line of light that matches the shape of the inclined opening K2060w, rather than as scattered light that depends on the spacing of the light-emitting means K3111. This allows the outer edge of the center frame K86 that divides the play area to be brightly visible in the center of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 1794, according to this embodiment, the illuminated board K3110 is positioned outside the play area, and the light from the light-emitting means K3111 of the illuminated board K3110 can be seen by the player slightly outside the outer edge of the play area, near the outer edge of the play area, and through the outer edge of the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1728), so that the base plate K2060 can be seen brightly over a wide area.

In this way, by configuring the light emitting means K3111 to make the base plate K2060 brightly visible over a wide area, the space required for arranging the light emitting means K3111 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the illumination board K3110.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1794, the light irradiation device K3100 is positioned within the thickness of the base plate K2060 (the rear end surface of the light irradiation device K3100 is flush with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060), which improves the degree of freedom in placement of the operating unit K300 (see FIG. 1727) disposed on the back side of the base plate K2060. In other words, even if the operating unit K300 is disposed in a manner in which it is in close contact with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060, it is possible to place the light irradiation device K3100, and the base plate K2060 can be visually brightly recognized.

As shown in FIG. 1794, when the light from the light emitting means K3111 travels in the up, down, left and right directions before passing through the play area, the light travels behind the front end face of the base plate K2060. In other words, the light does not pass through the play area in the range in which it travels in the up, down, left and right directions, so the light is not blocked by the ball located in the play area in the range in which it travels in the up, down, left and right directions.

This makes it possible to avoid changes in the amount of light in the travel directions KLD31-KLD33 depending on the arrangement of the balls in the play area, and therefore makes it possible to avoid situations in which the light is blocked by the balls during pinball play, reducing the brightness of the base plate K2060, while adopting a configuration in which light travels from the outside of the play area to the inside of the play area.

The position of the light irradiation device K3100 is not limited to the first formation recess K60a or the second formation recess K60b, but may be arranged in the third formation recess K60c. In this case, light from the light emitting means K3111 may enter the flow path of the ball that has entered the general winning opening K63 (see FIG. 1728), so when a ball enters the general winning opening K63, the light is blocked by the ball.

The blocking effect of this ball affects the appearance of light traveling toward the center of the play area. In other words, when a ball enters the general winning hole K63, the light irradiated from the light emitting means K3111 and traveling to the inclined opening K2060w is blocked by the ball and does not reach the inclined opening K2060w.

As a result, the ball entering the general winning opening K63 corresponds to the visual appearance of the inclined opening K2060w, so the player can know that the ball has entered the general winning opening K63 by visually checking the inclined opening K2060w without visually checking the general winning opening K63.

In this case, the inclined opening K2060w is located at a position corresponding to the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726) that borders the front opening of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1726). Therefore, by allowing the light reflected by the inclined opening K2060w to be visible, the player can enjoy viewing the display effects in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 while knowing whether or not a ball has entered the general winning port K63.

In reality, the direction of travel of light from the light emitting means K2111 may be refracted due to refraction and reflection at the base plate K2060, but in FIG. 1790, the direction of travel of light from the light emitting means K2111 is shown diagrammatically in the up, down, left and right directions for ease of understanding.

The 108th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1795 to 1822. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surface of the rotating decorative member K578 of the moving device K560 is decorated has been described, but in the 108th embodiment, the moving device K4560 is provided with a small display device K4580 capable of displaying on the front side of the moving device K4560. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1795 is a front view of the operating unit K4300 in the 108th embodiment. As shown in Figure 1795, in the operating unit K4300, the display device K4580 is disposed approximately in the center of the moving device K4560.

The display device K4580 is composed of a small liquid crystal display with the display surface facing the front side, and is surrounded by a rotating decorative member K4578 whose inner edge is formed in a roughly circular shape so as to surround the display area of the display device K4580.

The rotating decorative member K4578 has an approximately rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, with an opening formed inside, and the inner edge of the opening is formed to surround the display area of the display device K4580, thereby forming a frame for the display area of the display device K4580.

A drive motor KMT4061 is provided on the rear side of the moving device K4560, and the driving force of the drive motor KMT is transmitted via a transmission mechanism (not shown), allowing the rotating decorative member K4578 to rotate in both forward and reverse directions.

The rotating decorative member K4578 has a viewing window K4578a that opens in the front-to-rear direction. The viewing window K4578a is formed in a roughly fan-like shape surrounded by two straight lines that extend radially from the center of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 and two curved lines that are formed as arcs coaxial with the center of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578.

The viewing window portion K4578a is formed on the inside of the frame portion K4581 (i.e., the portion that forms the outer edge of the display area of the display device K4580) that surrounds the display area of the display device K4580 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the display in the display area of the display device K4580 can be viewed through the viewing window portion K4578a.

Figures 1796(a), 1796(b), 1796(c), and 1796(d) are front views of the moving device K4560. In Figures 1796(a), 1796(b), 1796(c), and 1796(d), an example of a change in the visual recognition mode of the moving device K4560 is illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 1796(a), the operation patterns of the rotating decorative member K4578 of the moving device K4560 in the first and second performance control examples are illustrated in chronological order. As illustrated in FIG. 1796(a), in the first performance control example, the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from a state in which the viewing window K4578a is positioned above the rotation axis (the state illustrated first from the top) to a state in which the viewing window K4578 is positioned to the right of the rotation axis (the state illustrated second from the top), and then rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise to return to a state in which the viewing window K4578 is positioned above the rotation axis (corresponding to the state illustrated first from the top), thereby terminating the first performance control example.

Next, in the second example of performance control, the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated approximately 90 degrees counterclockwise from a state in which the viewing window portion K4578a is positioned above the rotation axis (the state shown in the first figure from the top) to a state in which the viewing window portion K4578 is positioned to the left of the rotation axis (the state shown in the third figure from the top), and then rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise to return to a state in which the viewing window portion K4578 is positioned above the rotation axis (corresponding to the state shown in the fourth figure from the top), thereby ending the second example of performance control.

In FIG. 1796(a), for the sake of convenience, the first and second performance control examples are connected to each other, but the operation control of the rotating decorative member K4578 is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to configure a state in which the first or second performance control example is repeatedly rotated, or it may be possible to configure a state in which the second performance control example is rotated to connect to the first performance control example, or it may be possible to configure a state in which the first and second performance control examples are executed alternately and continuously.

Figure 1796 (b) illustrates a first viewing mode of the moving device K4560 in the first and second performance control examples. As illustrated in Figure 1796 (b), in the first viewing mode of the first and second performance control examples, a circular first viewing object K4580x displayed on the display device K4580 can be viewed through the viewing window K4578 when the viewing window K4578a is positioned to the right of the rotation axis.

Furthermore, after the second example of control of the presentation ends, the display area of the display device K4580 on the inner circumference side of the rotating decorative member K4578 displays "〇GET." This allows the player to understand through the display area of the display device K4580 that he or she has acquired some gaming value (gaming benefit).

Figure 1796 (c) illustrates a second viewing mode of the moving device K4560 in the first and second performance control examples. As illustrated in Figure 1796 (c), in the second viewing mode of the first and second performance control examples, a circular and triangular second viewing object K4580y displayed on the display device K4580 can be viewed through the viewing window K4578 when the viewing window K4578a is positioned to the left of the rotation axis.

Furthermore, after the second example of performance control ends, "O△GET" is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 on the inner circumference side of the rotating decorative member K4578. This allows the player to understand through the display area of the display device K4580 that he or she has acquired some gaming value (gaming benefit). Also, the difference between the display of "OGET" and "O△GET" can remind the player of the difference in gaming value that can be obtained.

In FIG. 1796(d), a third viewing mode of the moving device K4560 in the first and second performance control examples is illustrated. As illustrated in FIG. 1796(d), in the third viewing mode of the first and second performance control examples, the first circular viewing object K4580x displayed on the display device K4580 can be viewed through the viewing window K4578 when the viewing window K4578a is arranged to the right of the rotation axis, and the second circular and triangular viewing object K4580y displayed on the display device K4580 can be viewed through the viewing window K4578 when the viewing window K4578a is arranged to the left of the rotation axis.

Furthermore, after the second example of control of the performance ends, "〇GET, 〇△GET" is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 on the inner circumference side of the rotating decorative member K4578. This allows the player to understand through the display area of the display device K4580 that he or she has acquired some gaming value (gaming benefit). Furthermore, the difference in the display between "〇GET" and "〇△GET" can remind the player of the difference in gaming value that can be obtained.

The following describes a first example of presentation use in which the moving device K4560 is controlled in operation by the first and second examples of presentation control described above. In this first example of presentation use, in a jackpot game state, the moving device K4560 is moved to a position visible to the player (see FIG. 1795), and is controlled in operation by the first and second examples of presentation control described above.

In the first presentation use example, at the end of each round of play in the jackpot game state, the movement device K4560 is controlled by the first presentation control example and the second presentation control example, and the first visual object K4580x is displayed corresponding to the number of game balls that have entered the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726), which is likely to receive game balls that flow relatively to the right when shot from the right, and the second visual object K4580y is displayed corresponding to the number of game balls that have entered the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1726), which is likely to receive game balls that flow along a path relatively to the left compared to game balls that enter the second specific winning port K650a.

Therefore, since each round of play usually ends when a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the second specific winning port K650a, the first visual object K4580x is basically visually recognized as 10 circles, and the display of "〇 GET" (see FIG. 1796(b)) is changed to "〇 x 10 GET" or the like corresponding to the number of balls entered. This allows the player to predict the number of prize balls that will be paid out.

On the other hand, depending on the game mode, a round may end due to the passage of time even if 10 or more game balls are entered, or even if only 1 or 2 game balls are entered, the number of first visual objects K4580x displayed corresponds to the number of game balls entered.

In addition, the opening time of the electric device K640a (see FIG. 1726) during each round of play is shortened to a time that is short enough to prevent the game ball from entering the hole, so that the ball does not generally enter the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1726), and the second visual object K4580y is rarely seen.

On the other hand, even if it is rare, if a game ball enters the second winning port K640, the player can win not only prize balls but also a lottery for a special pattern, even during a round of play. In this embodiment, the first visual object K4580x is displayed as an indication corresponding only to the payout of prize balls, and the second visual object K4580y is displayed as an indication that the player may be given another benefit (for example, a lottery for a special pattern) in addition to the payout of prize balls, thereby making it possible to distinguish and notify the player of the benefits that may be given to him/her. This reduces the burden on the player while playing, and improves the player's ability to pay attention to the visual objects K4580x and K4580y.

In the above-mentioned first example of performance use, a case was described in which the operation of the moving device K4560 is controlled by the first and second examples of performance control at the end of each round of play, regardless of whether or not there are visually recognized visual objects K4580x, K4580y, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, while the operation is performed so that the visual objects K4580x and K4580y are visually recognized, the operation may not be executed if the visual objects K4580x and K4580y are not visually recognized (not displayed). That is, for example, if the first visual object K4580x is displayed and the second visual object K4580y is not displayed, only the operation according to the first performance control example may be executed, and the operation according to the second performance control example may not be executed.

In this case, the time for which the rotating decorative member K4578 is operated at the end of each round of play can be shortened, so that the operation period of the rotating decorative member K4578 can easily be accommodated within the interval between rounds. Also, by knowing that the operation according to the second presentation control example is not being executed, the player can know that the second visual object K4580y is not being displayed, and can also know that the ball has not entered the second winning hole K640, so the burden on the player can be reduced compared to when it is necessary to visually confirm the second visual object K4580y.

In addition, for example, when the first visual object K4580x is not displayed and the second visual object K4580y is displayed, the operation according to the first performance control example may not be executed, and only the operation according to the second performance control example may be executed.

In this case, the time for which the rotating decorative member K4578 is operated at the end of each round of play can be shortened, so that the operating period of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be easily accommodated within the interval between rounds. Also, if the player understands that the operation according to the first presentation control example is not being executed, the player will realize that an abnormality exists in which the ball has not been inserted into the second specific winning port K650a even though a round of play is in progress, and the player can be prompted to check whether the ball is being fired (whether the ball is being supplied, whether there is a ball jam, etc.) and whether the second variable winning device K650 is operating normally, etc.

Also, for example, if the first visual object K4580x is not displayed and the second visual object K4580y is not displayed, the round of play may be ended without executing either the operation according to the first presentation control example or the operation according to the second presentation control example.

In this case, the time for which the rotating decorative member K4578 is operated at the end of each round of play can be shortened (eliminated), so the operating period of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be easily accommodated within the interval between rounds. Also, if the player understands that the operation according to the first presentation control example is not being executed, he or she will realize that an abnormality exists in which the ball has not been inserted into the second specific winning port K650a even though a round of play is in progress, and can be prompted to check whether the ball is being fired (are balls being supplied, are there any ball jams, etc.) and whether the second variable winning device K650 is operating normally, etc.

In addition, when the first visual object K4580x is not displayed and the second visual object K4580y is not displayed, this is assumed to be a situation in which the player is not aiming the game ball at the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a in the first place (such as a situation in which the player has stopped playing or a situation in which the player is deliberately using an irregular shot to shoot the ball with the left hand). Therefore, even if the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated in such a situation, it will not attract the player's attention, so the rotation operation may not be executed.

Although the position at which the first visual object K4580x and the second visual object K4580y are viewed is to the right or left of the rotation axis of the rotating decorative member K4578, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first visual object K4580x and the second visual object K4580y may be viewed from the right or left of the rotation axis at an upstream position rotated upward around the rotation axis of the rotating decorative member K4578, or the first visual object K4580x and the second visual object K4580y may be configured to rotate from the state viewed at the upstream position as the viewing window portion K4578a moves with the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578.

The "△GET" portion of the second visual object K4580y is a notification that implicitly suggests that a special pattern can be drawn. Therefore, for example, if a ball enters the second winning port K640 in a state in which a special pattern cannot be drawn by the ball entering the winning port (for example, when the number of reserved balls is full), it may be possible to display "〇GET" instead of "〇△GET" to correspond to the fact that a special pattern cannot be drawn.

Figure 1797 is a partial rear view of the first movable device K4401 of the front layer side movable device K4400. In Figure 1797, the external shape of the long device K540 in the performance standby state (see Figure 1766) is shown by imaginary lines.

In FIG. 1797, the upper left member K530 remains unchanged from its position in the performance standby state, and the upper right member K530 is shown in solid lines descending to the bottom end of its range of movement. In other words, only the upper right member K530 is positioned in the position in the drop position state (see FIG. 1741, FIG. 1761).

The performance standby state shown by the imaginary lines in FIG. 1797 is a state in which the downward displacement of the upper members K530 on both the left and right sides is restricted by the upper rotating member K476 in the entering state (see FIG. 1758), and the state shown by the solid lines in FIG. 1797 is a state in which the upper rotating member K476 on the right side is in a retracted state and only the upper member K530 on the right side is displaced downward (see FIG. 1761).

The vertical position of the right-side upper member K530 can vary depending on the arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 (see Figures 1761, 1762, 1763, and 1765). Therefore, the inclination angle of the posture of the long-length device K540 can also vary. In this embodiment, the right side of the long-length device K540 can be displaced to the tip side of the rotation operation with the rotating shaft portion K534 of the left-side upper member K530 as the fulcrum, and the inclination angle of the posture of the long-length device K540 based on this displacement is not limited in any way, and any inclination angle (less than about 45 degrees from the posture along the left and right) is possible.

The rotating decorative member K4578 is supported on the long-length device K540 so that it can rotate. The rotating decorative member K4578 can rotate regardless of whether the long-length device K540 is in a position for standby (a position in which downward displacement is restricted by the upper rotating members K476 in the advanced state on both the left and right sides) or whether the upper rotating member K476 on the right side is in a retracted state and the posture of the long-length device K540 is in an inclined position.

As shown by the solid lines in FIG. 1797, the operating mode of the upper rotating member K476 from the state in which the attitude of the long-length device K540 is tilted to the state in which the attitude of the long-length device K540 is aligned in the left-right direction as a position in the performance standby state is explained as being linked to the operation of the long-length device K540.

The upper member K530 supporting the long device K540 can receive a load in the upward direction from the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 via the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1762). The arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 corresponds to the state of the surface side of the rotating member K430 (see FIG. 1750).

The upper rotating member K476 is rotated (changes its posture) around the support part K414 by the load that the lower rotating member K471 receives through the guide groove K436 of the rotating member K430, and is changed between an advanced state (see FIG. 1759) and a retracted state (see FIG. 1760). The state (phase) of the guide groove K436 corresponds to the state of the back side of the rotating member K430 (see FIG. 1750).

Therefore, the upper member K530 and the upper rotating member K476 can be linked via the rotating member K430. That is, the upper member K530 on the right side shown in FIG. 1797 is moved in the upward direction, and based on the upper member K530 passing through the vertical height position corresponding to the upper rotating member K476 (see FIG. 1762), the upper rotating member K476 is changed from a retracted state to an advanced state (see FIG. 1763).

This prevents the long-length device K540 from returning, and maintains the long-length device K540 in a position aligned to the left and right. In this way, the long-length device K540 is maintained in a position in which it is ready to perform the performance.

The upper rotating member K476 is maintained in the inserted state not by a driving force, but by the shape characteristics of the guide groove K436 of the rotating member K430, which maintains the posture of the lower rotating member K471. In other words, the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is maintained in the large diameter groove K436a.

Therefore, even when the driving force of the drive motors KMT41a, KMT41b (see FIG. 1750) that drive the rotating member K430 is released, the upper rotating member K476 can be maintained in the inserted state.

This makes it possible to reduce the power consumption required to maintain the long device K540 in a position in a standby state. Also, even if the power to the pachinko machine K4010 is cut off (due to a sudden power outage or outside store business hours), the state of the upper rotating member K476 can be maintained in the advanced state. This makes it possible to stabilize the position of the long device K540 in a position in a standby state, making it easier to perform maintenance work by cutting off the power.

The inclination angle of the long device K540 relative to the horizontal line is maximum in the state shown in FIG. 1797 (second right inclination position). This inclination is not limited to a right-side-down inclination; it is also possible to reverse the left-right inclination by inverting the top-down positions of the upper members K530 on the left and right (second left inclination position).

Here, if the slide rack K545 is not used and only the left or right end (the left side in FIG. 1797) of the long-length device K540 rotates around the rotating shaft K534 (for example, if the slide rack K545 and the main body K541 (see FIG. 1753) are integrally molded), the rotation of the long-length device K540 around the rotating shaft K534 causes the posture to tilt, and there is a possibility that the moving device K4560 and the support member K410 will interfere with each other at the left or right ends of the moving range of the moving device K4560 (the end on the rotating shaft K534 side mentioned above).

In this case, the movement range of the moving device K4560 differs between when the attitude of the long-length device K540 is not tilted and when the attitude of the long-length device K540 is tilted, which may reduce the presentation effect.

In addition, the end position of the movement of the moving device K4560 toward the tip of rotation of the long-length device K540 (right side in FIG. 1797) moves closer to the rotating shaft portion K534 (left side in FIG. 1797) as the inclination of the long-length device K540 increases, which can cause the movement range of the moving device K4560 to be narrowed.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as in each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIG. 1797, when the long device K540 is tilted, the slide rack K545 slides outward to the left and right by the movement amount KSDM relative to the guide protrusion K544. This also adjusts the left and right positioning of the part movement width KSDF of the moving device K4560 (displacement in the direction away from the rotation shaft K534).

This makes it possible to avoid interference between the moving device K4560 and the support member K410 when the long device K540 is tilted, and therefore ensures a sufficient movement width without the moving device K4560 going beyond the area between the pair of support members K410 (the area on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1741)).

In addition, the end position of the movement of the moving device K4560 toward the tip of rotation of the long device K540 (the right side in FIG. 1797) is extended toward the tip of rotation, so that the movement range of the moving device K4560 can be sufficiently secured. This makes it possible to create a performance that makes full use of the left and right width of the performance area, regardless of the degree of inclination of the long device K540.

Figure 1798 is a partial rear view of the first movable device K4401 of the front layer side movable device K4400. In Figure 1798, the external shape of the long device K540 in the one-side dropped state (see Figure 1767) is shown by imaginary lines.

In FIG. 1798, the upper member K530 on the right side remains unchanged from its position in the one-sided drop state, and the upper member K530 on the left side has been lowered to the bottom end of its range of movement, as shown by solid lines. In other words, only the upper member K530 on the left side is positioned in the position in the drop position state (see FIG. 1741 and FIG. 1761).

In FIG. 1798, the inclination angle of the long device K540 relative to the horizontal line is smaller than that shown in FIG. 1797 (first left inclined position). This inclination is not limited to a left-side downward inclination; it is also possible to configure an inverted left-right inclination position by inverting the top-bottom positions of the left and right upper members K530 (first right inclined position).

In this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the right first tilted position is nothing more than the position in a one-sided falling state shown by imaginary lines. That is, in this embodiment, the position of the long-length device K540 in the left first tilted position is different from the position of the long-length device K540 in the right first tilted position in terms of the up-down position.

In this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the switching device K460 is arranged only on one side (the right side in this embodiment) (see FIG. 1747), so the arrangement of the long-length device K540 in the right first tilt position is different from the arrangement of the long-length device K540 in the left first tilt position as shown in FIG. 1798, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, if the switching device K460 is configured to be placed on both the left and right sides and the upper member K530 can be stopped midway on either the left or right side, it is possible to make the vertical position of the long-length device K540 in the first right tilt position the same as the vertical position of the long-length device K540 in the first left tilt position. Note that if the switching device K460 is configured to be placed only on the left side, it is possible to configure a performance device in which the vertical relationship of the long-length device K540 in the first right tilt position and the vertical relationship of the long-length device K540 in the first left tilt position are reversed from the vertical relationship in this embodiment.

In addition, when rapid displacement such as a fall is not required, the position of the upper member K530 can be set to the lower position in a one-sided fall state (the position of the upper member K530 on the right side (arrow R side) shown in FIG. 1798) by controlling the rotation of the rotating member K430, regardless of the presence or absence of the switching device K460 (see FIG. 1765).

Therefore, depending on the control settings of the pair of left and right rotating members K430, the long-length device K540 can be placed in the right-first inclined position or the left-first inclined position without changing the vertical position of the long-length device K540, or the long-length device K540 can be placed in the right-first inclined position or the left-first inclined position by changing the vertical position of the long-length device K540 (see Figure 1798).

Here, if the slide rack K545 is not used and only the left or right end of the long-length device K540 (the right side (arrow R side) shown in FIG. 1798) rotates around the rotating shaft K534 (for example, if the slide rack K545 and the main body K541 (see FIG. 1753) are integrally molded), the rotation of the long-length device K540 around the rotating shaft K534 causes the posture to tilt, and there is a possibility that the moving device K4560 and the support member K410 will interfere with each other at the left or right ends of the moving range of the moving device K4560 (the end on the rotating shaft K534 side mentioned above).

In this case, the movement range of the moving device K4560 differs between when the attitude of the long-length device K540 is not tilted and when the attitude of the long-length device K540 is tilted, which may reduce the presentation effect.

In addition, the end position of the movement of the moving device K4560 toward the tip of rotation of the long-length device K540 (the left side (arrow L side) shown in FIG. 1798) moves closer to the tip of rotation as the attitude of the long-length device K540 approaches horizontal, so there is a possibility that the moving device K4560 may interfere with the support member K410, which may narrow the range of movement of the moving device K4560.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the slide rack K545 slides and displaces from the one-sided drop state (see FIG. 1767) until the long-length device K540 changes to the state shown in FIG. 1798. That is, first, the slide rack K545 slides and moves inward to the left and right by the movement amounts KSDa and KSDb (see FIG. 1767) relative to the guide protrusion K544 until the long-length device K540 reaches a horizontal posture. Next, the slide rack K545 slides and moves outward to the left and right by the movement amounts KSDa and KSDb (see FIG. 1767) relative to the guide protrusion K544 until the long-length device K540 reaches the first left inclined posture shown in FIG. 1798.

This also adjusts the left-right positioning of the paraphernalia movement width KSDF of the moving device K4560. In other words, the paraphernalia movement width KSDF is configured to move closer to the rotation axis portion K534 (on the right side (arrow R side) shown in FIG. 1798) as the rotation axis as the posture of the long device K540 approaches the horizontal posture.

As a result, when the long device K540 is tilted, the moving device K4560 and the support member K410 can be separated, and interference between them can be avoided, so that a sufficient movement width can be ensured without the moving device K4560 going beyond the area between the pair of support members K410 (the area on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see Figure 1741)).

In addition, by moving the left and right arrangement of the paraphernalia movement width KSDF closer to the rotation axis section K534 when the posture of the long-length device K540 approaches horizontal, it is possible to prevent the tip of rotation of the long-length device K540 (the left side (arrow L side) shown in FIG. 1798) from entering the support member K410 at the tip of rotation. This makes it possible to create a performance that makes full use of the left and right width of the area between the pair of support members K410 (the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1741)) regardless of whether the long-length device K540 is tilted or not.

In this embodiment, as in each of the above embodiments, the position of the moving device K4560 is controlled by the rotationally driven screw shaft K554 and nut KNT61 (see Figures 1753 and 1755). Since the screw shaft K554 and the nut KNT61 form a ball screw structure, even if the posture of the long device K540 is tilted, downward displacement due to its own weight (displacement in the direction in which the screw shaft K554 extends, i.e., in the longitudinal direction of the long device K540) is prevented.

In other words, when the screw shaft K554 (see FIG. 1753) is rotated by the drive motor KMT51, the moving device K4560 is displaced in the direction in which the screw shaft K554 extends (the longitudinal direction of the long device K540), whereas if the screw shaft K554 is not rotated, the position of the moving device K4560 is prevented from being displaced in the direction in which the screw shaft K554 extends (the longitudinal direction of the long device K540).

Figures 1799(a) to 1799(c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010, and Figure 1800 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine K4010. Figure 1799(a) illustrates an example of a viewing mode when the long device K540 is in the right first tilt position (see Figure 1746), Figure 1799(b) illustrates an example of a viewing mode when the long device K540 is in the right second tilt position (see Figure 1797), and Figure 1799(c) illustrates an example of a viewing mode when the long device K540 is in the left second tilt position. In addition, in the explanation of Figure 1799, Figure 1726 will be referred to as appropriate.

The state shown in FIG. 1799(a) is shown as an intermediate state of the first operation pattern of the first movable device K4401. That is, in the first operation pattern of the first movable device K4401, the first movable device K4401 is first in a performance standby state (see FIG. 1766), and the long device K540 is controlled to assume a first right inclined posture with the rotating decorative member K4578 rotating clockwise (see FIG. 1767), and the moving device K4560 is slid to the right end of the movable range while the rotating decorative member K4578 continues to rotate (see FIG. 1799(a)).

Furthermore, after that, the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed (counterclockwise) and the moving device K4560 slides back to the center on the left and right (see FIG. 1767), after which the upper member K530 on the right side is controlled to rise so as to return the first movable device K4401 to its standby state for performance (see FIG. 1766), thereby completing the first operation pattern.

In FIG. 1799(a), multiple first rear displays K81a in the shape of arrows parallel to the inclination of the long device K540 in the first rightward tilted position are displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the first front display K4580a representing the Roman alphabet "V" is displayed on the display device K4580 (the first front display K4580a may also represent "Aim for the V"). This allows the player to fire the game ball toward the first specific winning port K65a of the first variable winning device K65, and to be notified to aim for passing through the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1726).

The display mode of the display device K4580 and the display mode of the third pattern display device K81 may be configured to be linked. For example, when the first front display K4580a is displayed on the display device K4580, the first front display K4580a on the display device K4580 may disappear and the display of "V" may be moved to the third pattern display device K81 based on the game ball entering the specific area K65c (for example, the drawing settings may be set on the third pattern display device K81 and the display device K4580 so that the first front display K4580a appears to move from the display device K4580 to the third pattern display device K81, allowing the player to visually recognize it).

When the above-mentioned notification is being executed, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates in a clockwise direction. This allows a player who visually observes the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 to intuitively grasp the direction in which the game ball will flow down.

In other words, when the game ball is hit to the right to be launched toward the first variable winning device K65 (see FIG. 1726), the game ball passes to the right along the upper side of the rotating decorative member K4578 along the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726), and flows down the right side of the rotating decorative member K4578. This can be intuitively understood by the player in correspondence with the operating mode of the rotating decorative member K4578, making it easy for the player to follow the game ball with his eyes.

As shown in FIG. 1799(a), by moving the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to the right, the range into which a game ball hit to the right flows (the range to the right of the display area of the third pattern display device K81) can be brought closer to the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580, making it easier for the player to simultaneously see the rotating decorative member K4578, the display device K4580, and the flowing game ball.

This allows a player viewing the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to visually confirm that the launch of the game ball is being carried out without any problems, thereby reducing the burden on the player compared to when the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 are far away from the range in which the game ball flows and cannot be viewed at the same time.

The manner in which the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 continues and stops is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the clockwise rotation may continue until it reverses to a counterclockwise rotation, or the clockwise rotation may occur intermittently.

When the clockwise rotational motion occurs intermittently, the interval between the start of the rotational motion may be set, for example, so that the rotational motion is restarted after a certain period of time has elapsed, or the start time of the rotational motion may be set in accordance with the flow pattern of the game ball.

When the start time of the rotation operation is set in accordance with the flow-down behavior of the game ball, for example, by making the rotating decorative member K4578 start rotating based on the detection of the game ball passing through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1726), the timing when the game ball flows down near the rotating decorative member K4578 can be matched with the timing when the rotating decorative member K4578 starts to rotate. This makes it possible to predict the position where the game ball will flow down by visually observing the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 without visually observing the game ball itself.

The probability that a game ball hit from the right will pass through the through gate K67 (see Figure 1726) depends on conditions such as the nail arrangement upstream of the through gate K67, but if all game balls hit from the right pass through the through gate K67, the rotating decorative element K4578 can be rotated without exception when a game ball flows down the right side of the rotating decorative element K4578.

In addition, even if not all game balls hit to the right pass through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1726) (some may miss the through gate K67), the rotating decorative element K4578 can be rotated intermittently at intervals between ball launches from the pachinko machine K4010 (for example, at 0.6 second intervals) triggered by a specific point in time when the game ball passes through the through gate K67, so that the rotating decorative element K4578 can be rotated intermittently in accordance with the timing of the game ball flowing down near the through gate K67 regardless of whether it passes through the through gate K67 or not.

Therefore, regardless of the probability that a game ball hit to the right will pass through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1726), the timing at which the game ball flows down near the through gate K67 and the timing at which the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated can be roughly matched, so that the player can predict the position at which the game ball will flow down by visually checking the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 without visually checking the game ball itself.

When the start time of the rotation operation is set in accordance with the flow-down behavior of the game ball, for example, the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated based on the game ball entering the first specific winning opening K65a or the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1726). In this case, even if the player is not focusing on the first specific winning opening K65a or the specific area K65c, the player can understand that the game ball has entered the first specific winning opening K65a or the specific area K65c by visually checking the operating behavior of the rotating decorative member K4578.

This allows the player to know that the game ball has entered the first specific winning port K65a or the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1726) without taking his eyes off the display area of the third pattern display device K81, reducing the possibility of missing various notifications displayed on the third pattern display device K81 during the period when the player is required to launch the game ball toward the first specific winning port K65a or the specific area K65c.

The various notification modes displayed on the third symbol display device K81 are not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification regarding the number of reserved balls (particularly whether the reserved balls are full or not), a notification of an over-winning (the occurrence of an excess prize ball payout due to a winning of more than a specified number of balls), a notification regarding a game mode selection, a notification regarding the game state after the end of a jackpot game, a notification regarding the number of rounds during a jackpot game, or a notification regarding the number of winning balls (or the number of balls paid out).

The timing at which the moving device K4560 slides leftward from the state shown in FIG. 1799(a) is not limited in any way. For example, it may correspond to the timing at which the opening period of the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726) ends, or it may correspond to the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1726), or it may be controlled to slide at a specific timing that is unrelated to the ball entry mode.

In particular, when it is made to correspond to the timing at which the opening period of the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726) ends, the moving device K4560 can function as a means of informing a player who visually observes the operating state of the moving device K4560 that there is a possibility of reducing wasted balls by ending right-handed hits when the moving device K4560 moves.

In this case, the rotating decorative member K4578 will rotate counterclockwise at the timing when the game ball is not hit to the right. Therefore, for a player who understands the association between the situation where the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise and the situation where right-hitting continues, the rotating decorative member K4578 can issue a notification to prevent the game ball from being shot to the right until after the opening period of the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726) has ended.

The state shown in FIG. 1799(b) is a state in which the inclination angle of the long device K540 relative to the horizontal is greater than that shown in FIG. 1799(a), and is shown as an intermediate state of the second operation pattern of the first movable device K4401. That is, in the second operation pattern of the first movable device K4401, the first movable device K4401 is first controlled from a performance standby state (see FIG. 1766) to a state in which the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated clockwise, so that the long device K540 is in a right second inclined position (see FIG. 1797), and the rotating decorative member K4578 continues to rotate while the moving device K4560 slides to the right end of the movable range (see FIG. 1799(b)).

Furthermore, the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed (counterclockwise) and the moving device K4560 slides back to the center on the left and right (see FIG. 1797), after which the upper member K530 on the right side is controlled to rise so as to return the first movable device K4401 to its standby state for performance (see FIG. 1766), thereby completing the second operation pattern.

In FIG. 1799(b), multiple arrow-shaped second rear displays K81b parallel to the inclination of the long device K540 in the second rightward tilt position are displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and a second front display K4580b representing the Roman letter "R" is displayed on the display device K4580.

By increasing the inclination angle of the long device K540 with respect to the horizontal compared to the state shown in FIG. 1799(a), the player's line of sight can be guided diagonally downward (diagonally downward to the left in this embodiment) compared to the state shown in FIG. 1799(a). This makes it possible to notify the player to shoot the game ball toward the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1726) located diagonally downward to the left of the first specific winning opening K65a.

In this case, the "R" on the second front display K4580b drawn on the display device K4580 can be associated with a round of play, and by switching the display of the second front display K4580b to "R1" or "R5", etc. in association with the number of rounds, the progress of the game can be notified by the display on the display device K4580.

In addition, based on the relative positions of the second specific winning port K650a and the second winning port K640, the player can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1726) in the state shown in FIG. 1799(b).

In this case, the "R" on the second front display K4580b drawn on the display device K4580 can be associated with a rush (such as a guaranteed bonus game), and by switching the second front display K4580b to "R100" or "R2" in association with the remaining number of lottery draws in the guaranteed bonus state or time-saving state, the progress of the game can be notified by the display on the display device K4580.

When the above-mentioned notification is being executed, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates in a clockwise direction. This allows a player who visually observes the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 to intuitively grasp the direction in which the game ball will flow down.

In other words, when the game ball is hit to the right so as to be launched toward the second winning port K640 or the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726), the game ball passes to the right along the upper side of the rotating decorative member K4578 along the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726), and flows down the right side of the rotating decorative member K4578. This can be intuitively understood by the player in correspondence with the operating mode of the rotating decorative member K4578, making it easy for the player to follow the game ball with his eyes.

As shown in FIG. 1799(b), by moving the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to the right, the range into which a game ball hit to the right flows (the range to the right of the display area of the third pattern display device K81) can be brought closer to the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580, making it easier for the player to simultaneously see the rotating decorative member K4578, the display device K4580, and the flowing game ball.

This allows a player viewing the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to visually confirm that the launch of the game ball is being carried out without any problems, thereby reducing the burden on the player compared to when the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 are far away from the range in which the game ball flows and cannot be viewed at the same time.

The manner in which the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 continues and stops is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the clockwise rotation may continue until it reverses to a counterclockwise rotation, or the clockwise rotation may occur intermittently.

When the clockwise rotational motion occurs intermittently, the interval between the start of the rotational motion may be set, for example, so that the rotational motion is restarted after a certain period of time has elapsed, or the start time of the rotational motion may be set in accordance with the flow pattern of the game ball.

When the start time of the rotation operation is set in accordance with the flow-down behavior of the game ball, for example, by making the rotating decorative member K4578 start rotating based on the detection of the game ball passing through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1726), the timing when the game ball flows down near the rotating decorative member K4578 can be matched with the timing when the rotating decorative member K4578 starts to rotate. This makes it possible to predict the position where the game ball will flow down by visually observing the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 without visually observing the game ball itself.

The probability that a game ball hit from the right will pass through the through gate K67 (see Figure 1726) depends on conditions such as the nail arrangement upstream of the through gate K67, but if all game balls hit from the right pass through the through gate K67, the rotating decorative element K4578 can be rotated without exception when a game ball flows down the right side of the rotating decorative element K4578.

Even if not all game balls hit to the right pass through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1726) (some may miss the through gate K67), the rotating decorative member K4578 can be rotated intermittently at intervals between ball launches from the pachinko machine K4010 (for example, at 0.6 second intervals) triggered by a specific point in time when the game ball passes through the through gate K67, so that the rotating decorative member K4578 can be rotated intermittently in accordance with the timing of the game ball flowing down near the through gate K67 regardless of whether the game ball has passed through the through gate K67 or not.

Therefore, regardless of the probability that a game ball hit to the right will pass through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1726), the timing at which the game ball flows down near the through gate K67 and the timing at which the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated can be roughly matched, so that the player can predict the position at which the game ball will flow down by visually checking the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 without visually checking the game ball itself.

When the start time of the rotation operation is set in accordance with the flow-down behavior of the game ball, for example, the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated based on the game ball entering the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726). In this case, even if the player is not focusing on the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a, the player can understand that the game ball has entered the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a by visually checking the operating behavior of the rotating decorative member K4578.

This allows the player to know that the game ball has entered the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726) without taking his eyes off the display area of the third pattern display device K81, reducing the possibility of missing various notifications displayed on the third pattern display device K81 during the period when the player is required to launch the game ball toward the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a.

The various notification modes displayed on the third symbol display device K81 are not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification regarding the number of reserved balls (particularly whether the reserved balls are full or not), a notification of an over-winning (the occurrence of an excess prize ball payout due to a winning of more than a specified number of balls), a notification regarding a game mode selection, a notification regarding the game state after the end of a jackpot game, a notification regarding the number of rounds during a jackpot game, or a notification regarding the number of winning balls (or the number of balls paid out).

The timing at which the moving device K4560 slides leftward from the state shown in FIG. 1799(b) is not limited in any way. For example, it may correspond to the timing at which the period during which a game ball is likely to enter the second winning port K640a (see FIG. 1726) (period during time-saving or special probability) ends, or it may correspond to the timing at which the period during which the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726) is open (period during a round in a jackpot game or period during a jackpot game) ends, or it may be controlled to slide at a specific timing that is unrelated to the ball entry mode.

In particular, when it is made to correspond to the timing of the end of a period (a time-saving period or a period of a special probability) in which a game ball is likely to enter the second winning port K640a (see FIG. 1726), or when it is made to correspond to the timing of the end of a period (a period during a round in a jackpot game or a period during a jackpot game) in which the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726) is opened, the moving device K4560 can function as a means of informing a player who visually observes the operating state of the moving device K4560 that there is a possibility of reducing wasted balls by ending right-handed hits when the moving device K4560 moves.

In this case, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates counterclockwise at the timing when the game ball is not hit to the right. Therefore, for a player who understands the relationship between the situation in which the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise and the situation in which the game ball passes above the rotating decorative member K4578 and flows to the right of the rotating decorative member K4578 (the situation in which the right hit is continued), the rotating decorative member K4578 can issue a notification to prevent the game ball from being hit to the right until after the opening period of the second winning port K640a or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726) has ended.

Although the third pattern display device K81 is described as displaying the first rear display K81a and the second rear display K81b corresponding to the tilt of the long device K540, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display within the third pattern display device K81 may be configured so that the player sees that the display area of the third pattern display device K81 itself is tilted. In other words, the display by the third pattern display device K81 is tilted as a whole. This makes it possible to execute an effect that makes it appear as if the attitude of the long device K540 is tilted and that of the third pattern display device K81 is also tilted.

In the above explanation of Fig. 1799(a) and Fig. 1799(b), the first and second operation patterns are described as independent operation patterns, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the long device K540 rising from the state shown in Fig. 1799(a), the driving solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited (see Fig. 1757(b)), causing it to fall further, changing to the state shown in Fig. 1799(b), and then the right side of the long device K540 is raised to return to the performance standby state (see Fig. 1766).

This operating pattern is particularly effective, for example, when a set of game flow in right-hand play is such that, after the game ball enters the first specific winning port K65a and passes through the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1726), a period begins in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726) or a period begins in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1726).

As one set of game flows, for example, a game flow in which a special game is started when a game ball enters the specific area K65c and the second specific winning port K650a is opened, or a game flow in which the second winning port K640 is opened after the special game period ends (a game in which the time-saving state is entered after the special game ends), etc. are envisioned.

In this case, in one set of game flow in the right-hand play described above, the focus point as the winning location of the game ball will change (i.e., from the vicinity of the first specific winning port K65a and the specific area K65c to the vicinity of the second specific winning port K650a and the second winning port K640), but if the state is changed from that of FIG. 1799(a) to that of FIG. 1799(b) at the timing of this change, the player can be notified in real time that the focus point has changed. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the player is unable to respond to the change in the focus point and misses the winning of the game ball.

The state shown in FIG. 1799(c) is a state in which the inclination of the long device K540 is symmetrical to the state shown in FIG. 1799(b), and is shown as an intermediate state of the third operation pattern of the first movable device K4401. That is, in the third operation pattern of the first movable device K4401, the first movable device K4401 is first controlled from the performance standby state (see FIG. 1766) to the second left inclination posture with the rotating decorative member K4578 rotating counterclockwise (see FIG. 1799(c)), and the moving device K4560 is slid to the left end of the movable range while continuing the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 (see FIG. 1799(c)).

Furthermore, the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed (made clockwise) and the moving device K4560 slides back to the center on the left and right, and then the upper member K530 on the left side is controlled to rise so as to return the first movable device K4401 to its standby state for performance (see FIG. 1766), thereby completing the third operation pattern.

In FIG. 1799(c), a large third rear display K81c in the shape of an arrow pointing left is displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and a third front display K4580c meaning the kanji character for "left" is displayed on the display device K4580. This notifies the player to launch the game ball with a left hit.

While this notification is being made, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates in a counterclockwise direction. This allows a player who visually observes the motion of the rotating decorative member K4578 to intuitively grasp the direction in which the game ball will flow.

In other words, when the game ball is hit from the left so as to be launched toward the general winning port K63 or the first winning port K64 (see FIG. 1726) located on the left side of the game area, the game ball that flows down to the left along the upper side of the rotating decorative member K4578 along the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726) flows down the left side of the rotating decorative member K4578, which the player can intuitively understand by matching it with the operating mode of the rotating decorative member K4578, making it easy for the player to follow the game ball with his eyes.

As shown in FIG. 1799(c), by moving the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to the left, the range into which a game ball hit from the left flows (the range to the left of the display area of the third pattern display device K81) can be brought closer to the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580, making it easier for the player to simultaneously see the rotating decorative member K4578, the display device K4580, and the flowing game ball.

This allows a player viewing the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to visually confirm that the launch of the game ball is being carried out without any problems, thereby reducing the burden on the player compared to when the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 are far away from the range in which the game ball flows and cannot be viewed at the same time.

The manner in which the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 continues and stops is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the counterclockwise rotation may continue until it reverses to a clockwise direction, or the counterclockwise rotation may occur intermittently.

When the counterclockwise rotation occurs intermittently, the interval between the start of the rotation may be set, for example, so that the rotation is restarted after a certain period of time has elapsed, or the start time of the rotation may be set in accordance with the flow pattern of the game ball.

An example of a case where the start time of the rotation operation is set in accordance with the flow-down behavior of the game ball is described below. For example, a detection device capable of detecting a game ball passing between the inner rail K61 and the outer rail K62 is provided, and an approximate flow-down period required for a game ball that has entered the game area to pass to the left of the moving device K4560 in the state shown in FIG. 1799(c) is set in advance.

In this case, by starting the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 at a timing delayed by the required flow-down period described above after the passage of the game ball is detected by the above-mentioned detection device, it is possible to synchronize the timing at which the game ball passes to the left of the moving device K4560 with the timing at which the rotating decorative member K4578 starts its rotation. This makes it possible to predict the flow-down position of the game ball by visually checking the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 without visually checking the game ball itself.

In addition, in cases where the start time of the rotation operation is set in accordance with the flow-down behavior of the game ball, for example, the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated based on the game ball entering the first winning hole K64 or the general winning hole K63 (see FIG. 1726). In this case, even if the player is not focusing on the first winning hole K64 or the general winning hole K63, the player can understand that the game ball has entered the first winning hole K64 or the general winning hole K63 by visually checking the operating behavior of the rotating decorative member K4578.

This allows the player to know that the game ball has entered the first winning hole K64 or the general winning hole K63 (see FIG. 1726) without looking away from the display area of the third pattern display device K81, thereby reducing the possibility of missing various notifications displayed on the third pattern display device K81 during the period when the player is required to launch the game ball toward the first winning hole K64 or the general winning hole K63.

The various notification modes displayed on the third symbol display device K81 are not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification regarding the number of reserved balls (particularly whether the reserved balls are full or not), a notification of an over-winning (the occurrence of an excess prize ball payout due to a winning of more than a specified number of balls), a notification regarding a game mode selection, a notification regarding the game state after the end of a jackpot game, a notification regarding the number of rounds during a jackpot game, or a notification regarding the number of winning balls (or the number of balls paid out).

The timing at which the moving device K4560 slides to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1799(c) is not limited in any way. For example, it may correspond to the timing when several balls (which may be one or more) enter the first winning hole K64 (FIG. 1726), or when several balls are reserved in the first winning hole K64, or when several balls pass through the outlet 71 (see FIG. 1726) (in this case, it may be assumed that the through gate K67 does not detect the passage of the game balls, or this assumption may not be necessary), or it may be controlled to slide at a specific timing regardless of the ball entry mode.

In the above description, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates when the moving device K4560 slides, and the direction of rotation corresponds to the direction of the sliding movement, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. The rotational movement of the rotating decorative member K4578 and the sliding movement of the moving device K4560 are performed by independent driving devices, so the correspondence between the operating modes depends on the control program.

For example, in the third operation pattern shown in FIG. 1799(c), the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 when the moving device K4560 slides to the right as an intermediate operation returning to the performance standby state may be set (or maintained) to a counterclockwise direction. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing left-handed, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578, while performing the operation of returning the moving device K4560 to the position in the performance standby state (see FIG. 1766).

In addition, for example, in the third operation pattern shown in FIG. 1799(c), the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be stopped when the moving device K4560 slides to the right as an intermediate operation returning to the standby state. This allows the movement of the moving device K4560 to be returned to the position in the standby state (see FIG. 1766) while creating an effect in which the relationship between the state of the rotating decorative member K4578 and the direction in which the game ball flows down is severed.

In addition, for example, the control to stop the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 described above may be controlled so that it can be executed when a jackpot occurs in a lottery for a special pattern based on a ball entering the first winning slot K64 or the second winning slot K640. If a jackpot occurs in a lottery for a special pattern, the reserved special patterns do not decrease until the jackpot is announced, so once the reserved special patterns become full, no matter how many game balls are placed in the first winning slot K64 or the second winning slot K640, no special pattern will be selected, and a situation in which balls are likely to be wasted may arise.

Therefore, it is often more profitable for the player to stop firing balls as soon as possible and wait for the big win to be announced. In other words, by informing the player that the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 has stopped and that no game balls are flowing down to either the left or right of the rotating decorative member K4578, the player can be encouraged to stop firing game balls.

Furthermore, in a situation where the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 has been stopped once, if a game ball enters the first winning hole K64 or the second winning hole K640, the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be resumed. This allows the player to visually confirm the operating state of the rotating decorative member K4578 and make the player aware that the ball is still being shot, even if the ball is still being shot despite the player's intention (for example, if the rotation position of the operating handle H51 (see Figs. 1715 and 1725) is not returned and the ball is being shot using the shot stop switch H51b (see Fig. 1715) and the shot stop switch H51b is not pressed down enough). If the player notices this, he or she can improve the operation (for example, press the shot stop switch H51b hard) to stop the ball from being shot, thereby reducing the number of balls shot in vain.

This allows the player to focus on the presentation and wait for the timing of the jackpot announcement without letting the game balls flow down to either the left or right of the rotating decorative member K4578. Therefore, if the player can confirm that the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 has stopped, not only can the player reduce the number of wasted balls by stopping the firing of the game balls, but he or she can also understand that a jackpot will be obtained. This therefore increases the player's ability to focus on the rotating decorative member K4578.

The display modes shown in Fig. 1799(a) to Fig. 1799(c) are examples and are not limited in any way. For example, the arrow of the second rear display K81b shown in Fig. 1799(b) may be inverted left and right and used for the display of the third pattern display device K81 in the state shown in Fig. 1799(c), and the arrow of the third rear display K81c shown in Fig. 1799(c) may be inverted left and right and used for the display of the third pattern display device K81 in the state shown in Fig. 1799(a) or Fig. 1799(b).

In addition, in Figures 1799(a) to 1799(c), a case has been described in which the arrow is displayed in a downwardly inclined position in the third pattern display device K81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrow may be displayed in an upwardly inclined position.

By adopting this display (for example, a display with a shape that is an inverted top-bottom view of the second rear display K81b) in the second left tilt position shown in FIG. 1799(c), it can be visually recognized as an arrow pointing toward the upper right lamp K940 arranged in the upper right corner as part of the display lamp K900 of the front frame K14.

For example, the upper right lamp K940 is normally off, but is controlled to light up or flash when an event occurs that benefits the player, such as a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, or when balls are paid out. For this reason, it is a light-emitting element that is of great interest to players, but in normal gameplay where attention is focused on the display area of the third pattern display device K81, it is located in such an outer position (upper right corner of the front frame K14) that it is difficult to fit within the field of view, so that unless there is a trigger, the player may not notice that the upper right lamp K940 has lighted up or flashed.

In response to this, by adopting the above-mentioned display (for example, a display with a shape that is an inverted top-bottom view of the second rear display K81b) in the second left tilted position shown in FIG. 1799(c) in accordance with the timing when the upper right lamp K940 lights up or flashes, the display on the third pattern display device K81 can guide the player's gaze toward the upper right lamp K940 arranged on the front frame K14.

This allows the player's gaze to be guided to the upper right lamp K940, which is located outside the display area of the third pattern display device K81 and is arranged on the front frame K14, thereby reducing eye fatigue for the player compared to when the player continues to look at the display area of the third pattern display device K81.

In this case, the player's field of vision can be expanded from a narrow range that can accommodate the display area of the third pattern display device K81 and part of the play area to a range that also includes the front frame K14, so that the player's eyes can be moved back. This can reduce eye fatigue in the player.

The display for guiding the gaze to the upper right lamp K940 does not need to be located in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. For example, among the LEDs arranged inside the upper decorative member K330, the LEDs may be lit in the order from the LED furthest from the upper right lamp K940 to the LED closest to the upper right lamp K940 to form a line (band) of light to guide the gaze toward the upper right lamp K940.

A similar lighting method may also be implemented in an LED that irradiates light from the rear to the front of the play area, or in the display lamp K900 that is located outside the glass unit H16. This allows the line of sight to be guided to the upper right lamp K940 over a wide area.

In addition, from the viewpoint of presentation effect, the case where the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates when the long device K540 is moved has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the long device K540 may be moved in a state where the rotating decorative member K4578 is not rotating. In this case, it is easier to avoid a situation where the rotating decorative member K4578 is damaged when the long device K540 is dropped.

The moving device K4560 may also be configured to be able to slide while the rotating decorative member K4578 is stopped. In this case, the sliding movement of the moving device K4560 can be varied, thereby improving the presentation effect of the moving device K4560.

The settings for the rotation drive control of the rotating decorative member K4578 are not limited to those described above. For example, it may be controlled so that rotation continues in a fixed direction from power-on regardless of the display of the display device K4580 or the movement direction of the moving device K4560, or it may be controlled so that the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed at equal intervals.

The rotating decorative member K4578 may also be configured to rotate in response to the game ball flowing down. In this case, by configuring the rotating decorative member K4578 to rotate when the game ball flows down a specific range, the player can understand that the game ball has flowed down a specific range while still viewing the rotating decorative member K4578, thereby reducing the burden of playing the game.

The detection of a game ball flowing down a specific range may be performed by providing a sensor to detect the passage of the game ball, or the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be caused by the load from the game ball flowing down a specific range. In the latter case, the rotational force of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be generated by the weight of the game ball being transmitted, or the load of the game ball may be released to release a lock that restricts the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578, allowing the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578.

In particular, the rectangular shape of the rotating decorative member K4578 has parts that are far from the axis of rotation and parts that are close to it, which provides a catch and makes it easier to transmit the load in the direction of rotation.

In addition, based on detection of the passage of the game ball through the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726), the display area of the display device K4580 may be controlled to emit light and a winning sound may be output from an audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) such as a speaker.

When the display area of the display device K4580 is illuminated, the illumination mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the entire range of the display area of the display device K4580 may be illuminated regardless of whether the passage of the game ball is detected through the winning hole K65a, K640, or K650a (see FIG. 1726), or the illumination may be set to correspond to the winning position.

In the former case, a player who notices the illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 cannot determine from the illumination pattern alone which of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) the game ball has passed through, so the player's attention can be shifted to the location of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a. This allows the player's line of sight to be guided from the display area of the display device K4580 to the game area.

In the latter case, for example, when the passage of a game ball is detected through the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726) located relatively to the right, the right side of the display area of the display device K4580 may be illuminated, whereas when the passage of a game ball is detected through the second specific winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726) located to the left of the first specific winning port K65a, the left side of the display area of the display device K4580 may be illuminated. In this case, it is possible for a player who visually observes the light emission mode (light emission range) of the display device K4580 to easily predict where the game ball has passed.

The game balls passing through the winning holes K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1726) may be treated uniformly, or the game balls may be treated separately, with the illumination and sound output switched on and off depending on the difference.

For example, game balls passing through the first specific winning port K65a or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726) may be configured to be distinguishable as game balls that fit within the specified number (10 in this embodiment) for a round play in a special play state, or game balls that pass beyond that number (over-winning game balls).

In this case, when the number of game balls passing is within the specified number, the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated and the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) is not output with a winning sound, whereas when the number of game balls passing exceeds the specified number, the display area of the display device K4580 is illuminated and the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) is output with a winning sound.

In this control mode, when the player confirms the illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 or the output of the winning sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), the player can simultaneously understand that a prize ball will be paid out when more than the prescribed number of game balls pass through the first specific winning port K65a or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726), thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Alternatively, when a specified number of game balls pass through, the display area of the display device K4580 may be illuminated and a sound for winning may be output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), whereas when a specified number of game balls pass through, the display area of the display device K4580 may not be illuminated and the sound for winning may not be output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724).

In this control mode, even if the player is made to check the illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 or the output of the winning sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not more than the specified number of game balls have passed through the first specific winning port K65a or the second specific winning port K650a (see FIG. 1726). Therefore, even if the occurrence of over-winning balls causes variation in the prize balls paid out in the special game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the variation, making it easier to avoid a situation in which player dissatisfaction accumulates.

For example, the game balls passing through the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1726) may be configured to be distinguishable as game balls that pass through when there are vacant balls for the first pattern (e.g., special pattern 2) that is drawn by lottery upon winning at the second winning port K640, and game balls that pass through when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is full (overflow game balls).

In this case, when a game ball passes when the number of reserved balls of special pattern 2 is full, the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated and the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) is not outputted as a sound for winning, whereas when a game ball passes when there is an empty number of reserved balls of special pattern 2, the display area of the display device K4580 is illuminated and the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) is outputted as a sound for winning.

In this control mode, the player can be made to understand that the special pattern 2 has been drawn by the passage of the game ball through the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1726) by having the player confirm the illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of the winning sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724).

Alternatively, when a game ball passes when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is full, the display area of the display device K4580 may be illuminated and a sound for winning may be output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), whereas when a game ball passes when there is an empty number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, the display area of the display device K4580 may not be illuminated and the sound for winning may not be output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724).

In this control mode, by having the player check the illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of the winning sound from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), the player can understand that the special pattern 2 has not been drawn even though the game ball has passed through the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1726).

In this case, the player can be provided with information that will help him or her select the game mode, whether to continue firing the balls as is (if the balls continue to be fired, as soon as there is an empty space in the reserved balls for special pattern 2, a ball will enter the second winning slot K640 (see FIG. 1726) and there is a possibility of winning the lottery for special pattern 2, which will increase the speed of the game but will likely result in a large number of out balls) or to temporarily halt firing of the balls until there is an empty space in the reserved balls for special pattern 2 (if the balls are stopped firing, out balls will no longer be generated but the interval between balls is likely to be longer and the game will likely be less quick), and the burden on the player during the game can be reduced.

Note that the illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of the winning sound from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) do not necessarily have to occur as a set. For example, it may be set up so that the display area of the display device K4580 is illuminated but the winning sound is not output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), or so that the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated and only the winning sound is output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1724).

Note that passing through the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) is not limited to lighting up the display area of the display device K4580 and outputting a winning sound from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1724). For example, passing through the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a may be configured to cause the corresponding LED to light up.

That is, for example, when a gaming ball enters the second winning hole K640 or the second specific winning hole K650a (see FIG. 1726), light may be emitted from a light-emitting element K212 (see FIG. 1729) that emits light from behind the winning hole. This allows the brightly-seen location to be associated with the location where the gaming ball entered, making it easier for the player to predict the profit that can be obtained from the ball entering the hole from the brightly-seen location.

In addition, when the display on the display device K4580 and the brightened winning unit K200 are brought close together (see FIG. 1799(b)), the display on the display device K4580 and the design (the "E" symbol) on the front side of the winning unit K200 can be viewed in series. This allows the display device K4580 to be viewed in a different manner from the manner in which it is viewed only by the display device K4580 and the manner in which it is viewed only by the winning unit K200, thereby increasing the variety of presentations.

As described above, the timing of illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 and output of the winning sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) is not limited to when the game ball passes through the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726), and various modes are exemplified.

For example, any of the opening and closing plates (e.g., the opening and closing plate K65b for opening and closing the winning opening K65a, the electric device K640a for opening and closing the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1726), the second electric device K250 for opening and closing the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1731)) arranged upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) can cause game balls to flow down to the corresponding winning openings K65a, K640, K650a. When the display device K4580 is in the open state, the display area of the display device K4580 is illuminated and a specific sound is output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724). However, when the display device K4580 is in the closed state, which makes it difficult for game balls to flow down to the corresponding winning openings K65a, K640, K650a, the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated and the specific sound is not output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724).

In this case, by having the player check the light emission pattern in the display area of the display device K4580 and the specific sound output pattern from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), it is possible to make it easier for the player to distinguish between the period during which the game ball is shot with a right hit and the period during which the shooting of the game ball is stopped.

In other words, the player can fire a game ball when light is emitted in the display area of the display device K4580 and a specific sound is output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), but can stop the firing of the game ball when light is not emitted in the display area of the display device K4580 and a specific sound is not output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724), thereby reducing the possibility of the fired ball being ejected from the game area without entering any of the winning holes K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726), and reducing the number of wasted balls in the game.

Or, any of the opening and closing plates (e.g., the opening and closing plate K65b for opening and closing the winning opening K65a, the electric device K640a for opening and closing the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1726), the second electric device K250 for opening and closing the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1731)) arranged upstream of the winning opening K65a, K640, K650a is in an open state in which game balls can flow down to the corresponding winning opening K65a, K640, K650a. When the winning hole K65a, K640, or K650a is closed, which makes it difficult for game balls to flow down to the corresponding winning hole K65a, K640, or K650a, the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated and a specific sound is not output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724).

Even in this case, the presence or absence of light emission and the presence or absence of sound output can be associated with the ball entering one of the winning slots K65a, K640, or K650a (see FIG. 1726), so that the player can easily distinguish the period during which the game ball is shot with a right hit and the period during which the shooting of the game ball is stopped by checking the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724).

In addition, various control modes are exemplified, including but not limited to control of switching the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) in relation to whether any of the opening and closing plates (for example, the opening and closing plate K65b that opens and closes the winning opening K65a, the electric device K640a that opens and closes the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1726), and the second electric device K250 that opens and closes the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1731)) located upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a are currently in an open or closed state. In addition, switching the sound output mode may be a change that occurs while the sound continues to be generated, or a change between a state in which the sound is generated and a state in which the sound is muted.

For example, the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 or the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) may be controlled to be switched from a point in time before the state of the opening and closing plate is switched.

In this case, for example, the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 or the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) may be switched several seconds before the opening and closing plate located upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) is switched from a closed state to an open state.

In this case, by using the switching time as a guideline for when to start firing the game balls, it is possible to eliminate a situation that tends to occur when balls are fired after the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) are opened, in which the timing of the first game ball to enter the winning hole after the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a are opened is delayed by the travel time (time lag) it takes for the fired ball to reach the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a.

In particular, by setting the timing for switching the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) to a point that is a travel time (time lag) required for the fired ball to reach the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) before the opening/closing plate is switched from a closed state to an open state, a situation can be created in which the opening/closing plate located upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a is switched to the open state just before the fired ball reaches the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, for example, the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 or the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) may be switched several seconds before the opening and closing plate located upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) is switched from an open state to a closed state.

In this case, by using the switching point as a guideline for stopping the release of game balls, it is possible to eliminate a situation that cannot be prevented when the release of balls is stopped after the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1726) are closed, in which a ball that has already been released flows down the right side of the third pattern display device K81 and is discharged from the outlet K71 (see FIG. 1726) without entering any of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a, even though all of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a are closed.

In particular, by setting the timing for switching the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) to a point that is a travel time (time lag) required for the fired ball to reach the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) before the opening and closing plate is switched from the open state to the closed state, if the firing of the ball is stopped at that point, the balls fired previously can be made to arrive at the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a when they are in the open state, thereby reducing the number of wasted balls.

In addition, the prize opening K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) may not be specified, and an alert may be given when any of the prize openings K65a, K640, K650a is opened, or an alert may be given corresponding to the opened prize opening K65a, K640, K650a. For example, an LED corresponding to the opened prize opening K65a, K640, K650a may be illuminated.

That is, for example, when the second winning hole K640 or the second specific winning hole K650a (see FIG. 1726) is opened, light may be emitted from a light-emitting element K212 (see FIG. 1729) that emits light from behind it. This allows the brightly-seen location to be associated with the location where the game ball can enter, making it easier for the player to predict the profit that can be obtained by the ball entering the location from the brightly-seen location.

Referring to FIG. 1801, a third example of performance control is described in which the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) are controlled to be switched from a point in time before the state of the opening and closing plate located upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1726) is switched. Note that, for convenience, the following describes the performance mode from a point in time before the state of the opening and closing plate of the first specific winning opening K65a is switched, but a similar performance can also be applied to the second winning opening K640 and the second specific winning opening K650a.

Figures 1801(a) and 1801(b) are partial front views of a pachinko machine K4010. Figures 1801(a) and 1801(b) show a time series of changes in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 several seconds before the opening/closing plate K65b (see Figure 1726) of the first specific winning port K65a is changed to an open state when the third performance control example is executed.

In other words, in FIG. 1801(a), a reduced-sized front view K4010F of the pachinko machine K4010 is displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and in FIG. 1801(b), a state is shown in which the right-side detection sensor K556a (see FIG. 1754) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the right end of its moving range after the long device K540 has been changed to a second right-side tilted posture (see FIG. 1797) in the layer in front of the third pattern display device K81.

In this case, the ring shape of the rotating decorative member K4578 of the moving device K4560 is likened to the lens frame of a magnifying glass, and the display device K4580 displays an enlarged front view K65F of the vicinity of the first variable winning device K65 (see FIG. 1726) in the front view K4010F of the pachinko machine K4010 displayed on the third pattern display device K81.

The display of the display device K4580 is controlled so that it changes according to its positional relationship with the pachinko machine K4010 displayed on the third pattern display device K81, and at the position shown in FIG. 1801(b), an enlarged front view K65F of the vicinity of the first variable winning device K65 (see FIG. 1726) is displayed.

In this way, the display on the display device K4580 is changed from the entire pachinko machine K4010 displayed on the third pattern display device K81 to a part of it, making it easier for the player to view the front view K4010F displayed on the third pattern display device K81 and the enlarged front view K65F displayed on the display device K4580 in series, making it easier for the player to understand that the display on the display device K4580 represents a part of the pachinko machine K4010.

This makes it easier to avoid situations in which the display on the display device K4580 becomes meaningless because the player cannot understand what the display on the display device K4580 means, or even if the player can understand that the display on the display device K4580 refers to the pachinko machine K4010, he or she cannot understand which part of the pachinko machine K4010 the display refers to.

Furthermore, by making the position where the enlarged front view K65F is displayed on the third pattern display device K81 closer to the front (the player's side) than the position where the front view K4010F is displayed, the player can be given the illusion that the display is moving closer to the player when changing from the entire pachinko machine K4010 to a part of it. This makes it possible to create a display performance with a sense of realism.

In the state shown in FIG. 1801(b), within the display area of the third pattern display device K81, in the area to the upper right of the long device K540, an arrow pointing to the display device K4580 and the word "Aim" are displayed, and the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) outputs a voice saying "Aim here and hit the ball."

This makes it easier for the player to understand where to shoot the game ball and at what timing even before the opening and closing plate K65b (see FIG. 1726) of the first specific winning port K65a is changed to the open state, thereby reducing the burden on the player. The third example of performance control will be explained below.

In the third example of control of the performance, when the player shoots the ball with a right-handed shot based on the display in FIG. 1801(b) and the ball lands in the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1726) (based on detection of the first ball entering), the display on the display device K4580 is switched to a right-facing arrow pattern (see FIG. 1800) as described above, and the front view K4010F on the third pattern display device K81 is erased. Instead, on the third pattern display device K81, a number display such as "+15" that evokes the payout of prize balls (or "GET POINTS" or a coin display may also be displayed) is displayed each time a ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a is detected.

In the third example of performance control, each time a ball is detected entering the first specific winning port K65a, an arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) is displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise, but the display mode and rotation mode are controlled so that they are not constant but can change.

In other words, in the third example of performance control, the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous game ball's entry and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 are controlled so that they are the same as or faster than the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous game ball's entry.

This makes it possible to create a situation in which the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 tend to increase as the number of balls entering the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726) increases. Furthermore, the number of numbers such as "+15" that evoke the payout of prize balls displayed on the third pattern display device K81 increases as the number of balls entering the first specific winning port K65a increases, so that the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display (number) of the numbers can be viewed in series.

Therefore, the player can associate the number of balls entering the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726) with the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578, and can grasp this correspondence. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be easily predicted from the size of the arrow shape displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578, thereby improving attention to the display of the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In the third example of performance control, the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous game ball's entry and the amount of change (amount of speed increase) in the size of the arrow shape and the rotational speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580 based on the subsequent game ball's entry may be the same each time or may be different.

For example, if the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be set to five different speeds from the first stage (slow) to the fifth stage (fast), when the size of the arrow shape and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 based on the previous game ball entering the game are at the first stage, it is possible to implement not only a pattern in which the size of the arrow shape and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 based on the subsequent game ball entering the game are changed to the second stage, but also a pattern in which the size changes to the third to fifth stages.

In this case, for example, if the next ball enters the ball before the size of the displayed arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) has completely changed (two balls enter the ball in succession in a short period of time), the size of the arrow shape and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be increased by one step, and if another ball enters the ball before the size of the arrow shape displayed based on the next ball has completely changed (three balls enter the ball in succession in a short period of time), the size of the arrow shape and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be increased by two steps. In this case, the change in the size of the arrow shape and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 can allow the player to understand that balls are entering the ball frequently.

In the third example of performance control described above, the display of the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1726), but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, if a ball does not enter the first specific winning hole K65a and does not enter the second specific winning hole K650a either by flowing leftward along the top surface of the movable plate K251 of the second electric role K250, the display of the display device K4580 may be switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated when the ball enters the left ball guide section K210 (see FIG. 1731).

While the right-side ball guide section K210 (see FIG. 1731) has the same function as the outlet K71 (see FIG. 1726), the left-side ball guide section K210 (see FIG. 1731) has the same function as the general winning port K63 (see FIG. 1726), and prize balls are paid out based on the ball entering the port. That is, just like a ball entering the left-side ball guide section K210 (see FIG. 1731), when a ball enters the general winning port K63, the display on the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated.

In this case, the display on the display device K4580 and the rotating action of the rotating decorative member K4578 can alert the player to the presence of a ball that has flowed downstream without entering the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726), and can prompt the player to reconsider the operation of the operating handle H51 (see FIG. 1725), such as whether the ball is being shot when the opening/closing plate K65b is in the closed state, and whether the strength of the ball shot is appropriate.

In other words, when all of the shot balls land in the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726), the display of the display device K4580 does not change, the state shown in FIG. 1801(b) is maintained, and no rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 occurs, whereas when some of the shot balls do not land in the first specific winning port K65a, the display of the display device K4580 changes, and the rotating decorative member K4578 also rotates.

This allows the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 to be used as a barometer to inform the player whether the ball has been properly placed in the first specific winning port K65a, thereby increasing the player's attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In the third example of performance control described above, the display of the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening K65a (see FIG. 1726), but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a ball entering the left ball guide K210 (see FIG. 1731) may not cause the display of the display device K4580 to be switched or the rotating decorative member K4578 to be rotated, but may be configured so that the display of the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the ball entering the general winning opening K63 (see FIG. 1726).

In this case, the display on the display device K4580 and the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 can alert the player to the presence of the ball that has been guided to the left side of the rotating decorative member K4578 rather than being guided to the right on the side of the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726), i.e., the upper side of the rotating decorative member K4578, and can prompt the player to reconsider the operation of the operating handle H51 (see FIG. 1725), such as whether the ball's launch strength has weakened.

In other words, when the situation in which the game ball continues to flow down to the right in the position upstream of the rotating decorative member K4578 is maintained, the display of the display device K4580 will not be switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 will not rotate, but when even one game ball flows down to the left in the position upstream of the rotating decorative member K4578, the display of the display device K4580 will be switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 will not rotate.

Therefore, when the display of the display device K4580 is switched or the rotating operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is performed, it is evidence that the launch strength has weakened to the extent that the game ball flows down to the left at a position upstream of the rotating decorative member K4578, so the player who sees the display of the display device K4580 or the rotating operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be prompted to reconsider the operating strength of the operating handle H51 (see Figure 1725).

This allows the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 to be used as a barometer to inform the player whether the ball has been properly placed in the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726), thereby increasing the player's attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In the above third example of performance control, the display of the display device K4580 and the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 are based on the game ball entering the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the display of the display device K4580 or the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 may occur regardless of the game ball entering the ball.

In this case, the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be configured to be increased based on the operation (pushing, tapping repeatedly, pressing and holding, etc.) of the operation button member H181 (see FIG. 1725). For example, if the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 is configured to be able to be set to five different speeds from the first stage (slow) to the fifth stage (fast), the stage to which the speed can be increased by operating the operation button H181 (maximum increase) can be associated with the expected profit the player can obtain (the number of prize balls paid out in a jackpot game (the number of jackpot rounds won), the expected jackpot probability in a special drawing, etc.), thereby improving the player's motivation to operate the operation button member H181.

The above-mentioned upper limit increase setting may also be applied to the upper limit increase in the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 when the display of the display device K4580 or the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 occurs based on a ball entering the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726). This can increase the attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In the third example of performance control described above, a case was described in which the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1800) displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be changed (increased) based on the ball entering the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned size and rotation speed may be controlled to be decreased, or may be controlled to allow both an increase and a decrease.

It is also possible to change the color displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 or the color of light emitted from the LED of the electrode substrate K564 (see FIG. 1755) that illuminates the rotating decorative member K4578. That is, the color change may be staged (for example, the light may initially be blue, then green, then purple, then red, then rainbow), and the color displayed on the display device K4580 may be controlled to change based on the ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1726).

In this case, the player can obtain information based on the ball entry pattern into the first specific winning port K65a (see FIG. 1726) through color information that can be easily recognized in an instant, rather than information that may be difficult to recognize in an instant, such as the content displayed on the display device K4580 or the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578, thereby reducing the burden on the player while playing the game.

Note that, as an example of the winning openings where the display area of the display device K4580 is illuminated and the winning sound output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) is switched upon a winning ball, the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1726) with an opening/closing plate on the upstream side are used, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening K64, the general winning opening K63, the through gate K67, the out opening K71, etc. (see FIG. 1726), which do not have an opening/closing plate, may also be used.

In this case, the player can know the frequency of balls entering (passing through) the corresponding winning hole from the illumination of the display area of the display device K4580 and the switching of the winning sound output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724). This makes it possible to provide the player with information that is useful for deciding whether or not to continue playing.

In addition, the position where the light is irradiated based on the ball entering is not necessarily limited to the display area of the display device K4580, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a position upstream of the corresponding winning hole (a position within the game area), or a position where the ball guided to the corresponding winning hole can be stored (temporarily retained) (for example, a position upstream of the first specific winning hole K65a and downstream of the opening and closing plate K65b, a position upstream of the second winning hole K640 and above the electric device K640a, or a position upstream of the second specific winning hole K650a and downstream of the movable plate K251 (see Figures 1726 and 1731)). In this case, by brightly illuminating the position where a ball that has not yet entered the corresponding winning hole may be placed, the field of view for the game ball can be brightened, and the visibility of the game ball can be improved.

In this case, if the light emission control executed by the display device K4580 described above can also be executed by a device that irradiates light to a position upstream of the corresponding winning opening described above or to a position where the balls guided to the corresponding winning opening can be stored, the position where the light emission control is executed can be switched between the display device K4580 or another position depending on the situation, thereby making it possible to switch the position to which the player is directed.

As described above, when a ball enters a winning slot K65a, K640, or K650a (see FIG. 1726), the display area of the display device K4580 lights up and the sound output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) switches, allowing the player to know that the ball has entered the slot.

On the other hand, the player's sense of anticipation can also be heightened by notifying the player that a gaming ball may soon enter the winning slots K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1726). An example of a notification mode for notifying the player that a gaming ball may soon enter the winning slots will be described below.

Figure 1802 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board K13 in the range corresponding to the MDCCXXXI portion of Figure 1726. In Figure 1802, the winning unit K200 is illustrated, the internal shape of the decorative cover K220 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the light-emitting parts K212, K228 of the illumination boards K211, K227 are illustrated with hidden lines (see Figures 1729 and 1730).

The light-emitting units K212 and K228 are formed from LEDs, and their optical axes are directed toward the front side. That is, the light irradiated to the plate-shaped body K221 of the decorative cover K220 is viewed in a substantially circular range centered on the arrangement of the light-emitting units K212 and K228 shown in FIG. 1802, in a manner in which the amount of light decreases the further away from the center.

The range in which the light is visible (diameter of the circle) depends on the LED used, but in this embodiment, the light-emitting elements K212, K228 are configured so that the diameters of adjacent circles are in a relationship that is roughly circumscribing each other. If the diameter of the circle is wide enough to overlap with the adjacent light-emitting elements K212, K228, it will be easily visible as a faint, weak light, and if the diameter of the circle is large enough not to reach the adjacent light-emitting elements K212, K228, the center will be a strong light, but each will be easily visible as an independent light. When using LEDs, it is best to consider these balances and make your selection from the perspective of presentation effect.

In this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the decorative cover K220 is provided with a large design K221a and a small design K221b (see FIG. 1729), which enhances the presentation effect of the design, but may reduce the visibility of the game balls flowing down the back side of the decorative cover K220.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as in each of the above embodiments, light is irradiated from the rear side of the ball's flow path toward the decorative cover K220 side (front side), allowing the player to understand where the game ball is flowing down.

First, we will explain the types of ball flow patterns. A game ball that flows down the right side of the game area and enters the winning unit K200 from the first variable winning device K65 (see FIG. 1726) side will first flow down in the first flow pattern KFL51.

The game ball that flows down in the first flow-down mode KFL51 reaches the branch formation section K223 and branches off to the left and right. When the game ball flows to the left at the branch formation section K223, if the electric device K640a is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 1734), the game ball flows down in the second flow-down mode KFL52. The game ball that flows down in the second flow-down mode KFL52 passes through the guide opening K203 and enters the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1726).

When the game ball flows to the left at the branch formation section K223, if the electric device K640a is changed to a closed state before the game ball has passed completely (see FIG. 1733), the game ball flows down in the third flow down mode KFL53. The game ball that flows down in the third flow down mode KFL53 reaches the front side of the deceleration recess K207.

When the game ball flows to the right at the branch formation section K223 and deviates from the discharge extension section K222a, which is part of the extension formation section K222 and is connected to the ball guide section K210, the game ball flows down in the fourth flow down pattern KFL54. The game ball that flows down in the fourth flow down pattern KFL54 flows so as to reach the movable plate K251 from the upstream end, and can merge with the third flow down pattern KFL53.

When the game ball flows to the right at the branch formation section K223, if it is introduced into the discharge extension section K222a, which is part of the extension formation section K222 and is connected to the ball guide section K210, the game ball flows down in the fifth flow down mode KFL55. The game ball that flows down in the fifth flow down mode KFL55 passes through the right ball guide section K210 and is discharged from the game area.

When the game ball is flowing down in the third flow down mode KFL53 or the fourth flow down mode KFL54, if the movable plate K251 is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 1733), the ball will flow down in the sixth flow down mode KFL56. The game ball that flows down in the sixth flow down mode KFL56 is discharged into the game area from the left side of the winning unit K200.

When the game ball is flowing down in the third flow down mode KFL53 or the fourth flow down mode KFL54, if the movable plate K251 is opened (see Figures 1735 and 1736), the ball will flow down in the seventh flow down mode KFL57. The game ball that flows down in the seventh flow down mode KFL57 will enter the second specific winning hole K650a.

As mentioned above, there are multiple variations in the way that a gaming ball that enters the winning unit K200 flows down, so multiple light-emitting elements K212 (light-emitting elements K212a to K212w) are positioned behind the range in which the gaming ball flows down to correspond to each variation.

The light from the light-emitting unit K212 is partially blocked by the sphere when the sphere is located in front of it (in the direction of light irradiation), but is projected onto the plate-shaped body K221 of the decorative cover K220 when the sphere is not located in front of it.

In this embodiment, the uneven configuration that comes into contact with and affects the ball is concentrated on the front side of the plate-shaped body K202 of the base member K201, and the rear surface of the plate-shaped body K221 is configured to be mostly smooth.

This narrows the area where the light projected onto the plate-shaped body K221 is refracted due to the uneven shape, making it possible to maximize the visibility of the light projected onto the plate-shaped body K221. Furthermore, by reducing the variation in the plate thickness of the plate-shaped body K221, the brightness of the decorative cover K220 can be made almost uniform.

In addition, an inclined surface portion K229 (see FIG. 1730) is formed in a position that guides the game ball flowing down in the fourth flow-down mode KFL54 to the movable plate K251, and is slanted downward toward the rear.

The inclined surface portion K229 can easily adjust the flow pattern downstream by adjusting the front-to-rear position of the ball as it flows downward toward the rear. In other words, by moving the ball toward the deceleration recess K207 from the beginning of the ball's flow down the upper surface of the movable plate K251, a sufficient deceleration effect can be achieved.

In addition, when the movable plate K251 is in an open state (see Figures 1735 and 1736), the ball is moved to the rear side from the beginning of its flow in the seventh flow pattern KFL57, which prevents the ball from becoming stuck downstream of the movable plate K251 and allows the ball to pass through the second specific winning port K650a quickly.

When light is irradiated from the light-emitting element K212 onto the inclined surface portion K229, the direction of the light from the light-emitting element K212 can be changed upward by reflecting the light on the surface of the inclined surface portion K229, as will be described in more detail below.

The light-emitting unit K212 includes upstream light-emitting units K212a and K212b capable of emitting yellow light, downstream light-emitting units K212c and K212d capable of emitting red light, and distributed light-emitting units K212g and K212w capable of emitting white light.

The first upstream light-emitting element K212a is positioned so that at least a portion of the irradiated light can be irradiated onto the ball flowing down in the first flow-down mode KFL51. Therefore, when the ball flows down in the first flow-down mode KFL51 while light is being irradiated from the first upstream light-emitting element K212a, the light is blocked by the ball and the yellow component of the light reaching the decorative cover K220 is weakened, thereby changing the visible mode of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729).

In other words, the player can recognize that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200 by visually noticing that the visibility of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) has changed so that the intensity of the yellow component of the light changes.

The second upstream light-emitting element K212b is positioned at a position where at least a portion of the irradiated light can be irradiated onto the ball flowing down in the second flow-down mode KFL52. Therefore, when the ball flows down in the second flow-down mode KFL52 while light is being irradiated from the second upstream light-emitting element K212b, the light is blocked by the ball and the yellow component of the light reaching the decorative cover K220 is weakened, thereby changing the visible mode of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729).

In other words, if the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) changes so that the intensity of the yellow component of the light continues to change even after the player has recognized that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200, the player can predict that the game ball is flowing down in the second flow down pattern KFL52.

The first downstream light-emitting element K212c is positioned at a position where at least a portion of the irradiated light can be irradiated onto the sphere flowing down in the third flow-down mode KFL53. Therefore, when the sphere flows down in the third flow-down mode KFL53 while light is being irradiated from the first downstream light-emitting element K212c, the light is blocked by the sphere and the red component of the light reaching the cosmetic cover K220 is weakened, thereby changing the visible mode of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1729).

In other words, if the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) changes so that the intensity of the red component of the light changes after the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200, the player can predict that the game ball is flowing down toward the movable plate K251.

The second downstream light-emitting element K212d is positioned so that at least a portion of the irradiated light can be irradiated onto the sphere flowing down in the fourth flow-down mode KFL54. Therefore, when the sphere flows down in the fourth flow-down mode KFL54 while light is being irradiated from the second downstream light-emitting element K212d, the light is blocked by the sphere and the red component of the light reaching the cosmetic cover K220 is weakened, thereby changing the visible mode of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1729).

In other words, if the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) changes so that the intensity of the red component of the light changes after the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200, the player can predict that the game ball is flowing down toward the movable plate K251.

Here, even if it is visually recognized that the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) has changed so that the intensity of the red component of the light changes after it is recognized that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200, it is difficult to distinguish from this alone whether the game ball is flowing down in the third flow down appearance KFL53 or the fourth flow down appearance KFL54.

On the other hand, while a ball flowing down in the third flow-down mode KFL53 reaches a position midway along the left-right length of the movable plate K251, a ball flowing down in the fourth flow-down mode KFL54 arrives from the upstream end of the movable plate K251. Therefore, if the time from when the ball reaches the movable plate K251 to when the movable plate K251 is opened is the same, a ball flowing down in the fourth flow-down mode KFL54 is more likely to enter the second specific winning port K650a than a ball flowing down in the third flow-down mode KFL53.

Therefore, if one can distinguish whether the game ball is flowing down in the third flow down pattern KFL53 or the fourth flow down pattern KFL54, by understanding both the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) and the operating mode of the movable plate K251, one can accurately determine whether the ball can enter the second specific winning port K650a.

From this perspective, in this embodiment, the appearance of the light irradiated from the first downstream light-emitting element K212c is made different from the appearance of the light irradiated from the second downstream light-emitting element K212d, so that it is possible to distinguish whether a change in the visible state of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) is due to the light from the first downstream light-emitting element K212c being blocked or the light from the second downstream light-emitting element K212d being blocked.

In other words, the light from the first downstream light-emitting element K212c is irradiated in the front-to-rear direction and reaches the decorative cover K220, so it is seen as a roughly circular light spreading from the first downstream light-emitting element K212c when viewed from the front, while the light from the second downstream light-emitting element K212d is reflected by the inclined surface portion K229 and extends upward to reach the decorative cover K220, so it is seen as a band extending upward from the bottom end of the second downstream light-emitting element K212d when viewed from the front.

Therefore, even though the visible mode of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) is changed so that the intensity of the red component of the light changes, if the shape seen by the light that changes the visible mode is approximately circular, the player can understand that the ball is flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53, and if the shape seen by the light that changes the visible mode is strip-shaped, the player can understand that the ball is flowing down in the fourth flow mode KFL54.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) can be made different when the ball is flowing down in the third flow down manner KFL53 and when the ball is flowing down in the fourth flow down manner KFL54.

The first distributed light-emitting unit K212g is positioned in a position where at least a portion of the irradiated light can be irradiated onto the sphere flowing down in the fifth flow-down mode KFL55 or the sixth flow-down mode KFL56. Therefore, when the sphere flows down in the fifth flow-down mode KFL55 or the sixth flow-down mode KFL56 while light is being irradiated from the first distributed light-emitting unit K212g, the light is blocked by the sphere and the white component of the light reaching the cosmetic cover K220 is weakened, thereby changing the visible mode of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1729).

In other words, if the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) changes so that the intensity of the white component of the light changes after the player recognizes that a gaming ball has entered the winning unit K200, the player can predict that the gaming ball is being ejected from the winning unit K200.

The distributed light emitting unit K212g includes an LED positioned to irradiate light onto a ball flowing down in the fifth flow-down mode KFL55, and an LED positioned to irradiate light onto a ball flowing down in the sixth flow-down mode KFL56. These differ in that a ball flowing down in the fifth flow-down mode KFL55 is discharged from the play area through the ball guide unit K210, while a ball flowing down in the sixth flow-down mode KFL56 is returned to the play area, but they have in common that they are discharged from the winning unit K200.

In other words, if the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) changes so that the intensity of the white component of the light changes after the player recognizes that a gaming ball has entered the winning unit K200, the player can predict that the gaming ball that has entered the winning unit K200 will be ejected from the decorative cover K200 without entering either the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a.

The second distributed light-emitting unit K212w is positioned in a position where the emitted light is not blocked by the balls flowing down the winning unit K200 (does not overlap with the balls when viewed from the front). Therefore, the light emitted from the second distributed light-emitting unit K212w reaches the decorative cover K220 without being affected by the game balls flowing down inside the winning unit K200. This ensures the brightness of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) when viewed from the front, regardless of whether or not balls are flowing down inside the winning unit K200.

In other words, by ensuring a minimum level of brightness in the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1729), it becomes easier to recognize the above-mentioned changes in the visual appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) that occur when the ball flows down inside the cosmetic cover K220 (changes involving the intensity of color).

The light emission control of the second distributed light emitting unit K212w may be controlled to emit light in a fixed pattern regardless of whether a ball is in the light, or may be controlled so that the intensity of the light emission changes depending on whether a ball is in the light.

For example, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the guide opening K203 and passed through the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1726), the light emission is controlled to increase the light emission intensity of the second distributed light-emitting element K212w for approximately 0.2 seconds, allowing the player to understand that the game ball has entered the second winning hole K640 from the change in the visible state of the white light passing through the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729).

The same thing can be done by controlling the light emission of the light-emitting unit K228. That is, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the second specific winning opening K650a, the light emission of the light-emitting unit K228 can be controlled to increase its light emission intensity for about 0.2 seconds, so that the player can know that a game ball has entered the second specific winning opening K650a from the change in the visibility of the white light through the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729).

The configuration of the winning unit K200 described above allows the player to know that a ball has entered the winning unit K200 by the change in the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) without having to visually see the ball itself flowing down the rear of the decorative cover K220.

After the ball enters the winning unit K200, the light from behind casts a shadow of the ball on the decorative cover K220, and this shadow overlaps with areas of lower transparency than other areas, such as the large design K221a and the small design K221b, changing the visibility of the decorative cover K220 and improving the presentation effect.

Furthermore, while the shadow of the ball is flowing down at a position where it overlaps with the large design K221a or the small design K221b, there is still a possibility that the ball will enter the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1726) or the second specific winning hole K650a, but when the shadow of the ball moves away from the large design K221a or the small design K221b (the ball flows down in the fifth flow pattern KFL55 or the sixth flow pattern KFL56), there is no longer any possibility that the ball will enter the second winning hole K640 or the second specific winning hole K650a.

As a result, attention can be drawn to whether the shadow of the ball flows near the large design K221a or the small design K221b, which can increase the attention not only to the shadow of the ball but also to the large design K221a and the small design K221b.

It also allows the player to understand where the ball is flowing down. That is, when the state in which the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1729) is changed so that the intensity of the yellow component of the light changes is maintained, the ball is heading toward the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1726), when the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 is changed to a state in which the intensity of the red component of the light changes, the ball is heading toward the second specific winning opening K650a, and when the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 is changed to a state in which the intensity of the white component of the light changes, the ball is not entering the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a but is being discharged from the winning unit K200.

In the above description, the inclined surface portion K229 is formed in a position where the ball can collide, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion with a shape similar to the inclined surface portion K229 may be formed in a position away from the ball's flow range and where the ball will not collide with it. In this case, the inclined surface portion K229 is unlikely to be damaged by a collision with the ball, so the light refraction effect of the inclined surface portion K229 can be generated for a long period of time.

In addition, the inclined surface of the inclined surface portion K229 is inclined downwards as it approaches the rear, but in terms of the purpose of causing light refraction, this is not limited to this, and the inclined surface may be inclined left and right as it approaches the rear, or may be inclined upwards as it approaches the rear.

For example, if an inclined surface is formed on the rear of the decorative cover K220 at the front side of the range where the deceleration protrusion K204 (see FIG. 1731) is located, the light irradiated to the front side in the range where the deceleration protrusion K204 is located can be refracted downward, allowing the player to see a band of light extending in the vertical direction along the decorative cover K220. In other words, contrary to the light that is refracted at the inclined surface portion K229 and travels upward, a band of light can be seen by the light traveling downward after refracting.

In the above embodiment, the light emitting units K212 and K228 are basically kept illuminated, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, when the light emitting units K212 and K228 are illuminated during a round of play in a jackpot game, they may continue to be illuminated during the interval between rounds, or may stop being illuminated during the interval between rounds.

In the former case, the player can play comfortably without being made aware of the interval between rounds. In the latter case, by making the player aware of the interval between rounds, it becomes easier to understand the divisions in the jackpot game and to predict how much time is left until the jackpot game ends. This makes it easier for the player to avoid a situation in which a large number of balls are wasted by continuing to shoot balls until the ending performance of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the light emitting elements K212, K228 are basically maintained illuminated, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the illumination state may be changed when a prize is won at the second prize winning port K640 or the second specific prize winning port K650a, and the visible state of the winning unit K200 may be changed.

In this case, when the second winning port K640 wins, the light emission mode may be changed even when the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the winning of the second winning port K640 is full, or the light emission mode may not be changed when the reserved number of special symbols is full.

In the former case, the change in the light emission pattern corresponds to the payout of prize balls, so the player can be made aware that a payout of prize balls will occur. In the latter case, the change in the light emission pattern can be made to correspond to the occurrence of a lottery for a special symbol, so the player can be made aware that a lottery for a special symbol will occur.

When a winning entry into the second specific winning port K650a occurs, the lighting mode may be changed if the number of winning entries into the second specific winning port K650a exceeds a specified number in a round of play, or the lighting mode may not be changed if the number of winning entries exceeds the specified number.

In the former case, if the change in the lighting pattern when more than the specified number of balls are won is made the same as when the specified number of balls are won, the change in the lighting pattern can be made to correspond to the payout of prize balls, allowing the player to recognize the payout of prize balls, but it may also be made to be different from the case when the specified number of balls are won.

If the change in the lighting pattern when more than the specified number of winnings is made different from that when winning up to the specified number of winnings, it will be easier for the player to be aware that an excess winning has occurred in the second specific winning port K650a. Note that the change when more than the specified number of winnings is made may be reflected in the display on the third pattern display device K81.

In the latter case, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of excess winnings, making it difficult for the player to recognize whether excess winnings are likely or unlikely to occur, and making it easier to avoid situations that encourage special firing patterns, such as changing the interval between firing game balls in an attempt to win excess winnings during a jackpot game.

In the above-mentioned winning unit K200, the visibility of the small design K221b can be improved when viewed from an oblique direction compared to when viewed from the front, which has been described as encouraging players to play by viewing from an oblique direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning unit K200 may be configured so that it is difficult to see the game balls flowing down inside the winning unit K200 when viewed from an oblique direction.

That is, for example, the small design K221b may be formed to protrude toward the rear side, so that when viewed from the front, the rear side is easily visible through the gaps between the small designs K221b, but when viewed from an oblique angle, the protruding parts of the small designs K221b appear to overlap, narrowing (eliminating) the gaps and making it difficult to see the rear side.

In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the internal state of the winning unit K200 even when viewed from an oblique direction, so that the player is not made aware of viewing from an oblique direction and is encouraged to play from the front. This makes it possible to maintain a state in which the design formed by the combination of the small design K221b and the large design K221a, which are designed to have the highest design value when viewed from the front, can be clearly seen. When the player's line of sight can be guided in this way, the design formed by the combination of the small design K221b and the large design K221a can be clearly seen even if either the large design K221a or the small design K221b is formed behind the range in which the game ball flows down.

Figures 1803(a) to 1803(c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010. In Figures 1803(a) to 1803(c), the horizontal drop motion pattern of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding states is illustrated typically, and an enlarged view is shown of the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 in an excited state (see Figure 1757(b)).

In the horizontal drop movement pattern, as shown in FIG. 1803(a), first, from the performance standby state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1740, FIG. 1758), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization, and the left and right rotating members K430 are set to the first release position (see FIG. 1761).

As shown in FIG. 1803(b), the stopper member K462 of the switching device K460 is positioned at a retracted position away from the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1757(b)), and the first movable device K4401 is not supported by the switching device K460. Therefore, support on both the left and right sides of the lifting device K4500 is released, and a falling motion occurs, so that the first movable device K4401 changes from the performance standby state to the falling position state (see FIG. 1741) as shown in FIG. 1803(b).

In this case, the impact generated in the lifting device K4500 may be large. In contrast, in this operation pattern, the moving device K4560 is positioned in advance at the middle position of the moving range (see FIG. 1803(b)), so that the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560 can be reduced. In other words, by positioning the moving device K4560 at the middle position of the long device 540, which is supported at both the left and right ends, the impact absorption effect due to the bending of the long device K540 can be utilized to reduce the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560.

As shown in FIG. 1803(c), from the state shown in FIG. 1803(b), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization, returning them to the performance standby state. This allows the long-length device K540 to be raised while maintaining its horizontal position.

During the horizontal drop movement pattern, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in a clockwise direction, and is also controlled in the display area of the display device K4580 to be displayed rotating in the same direction and at the same speed as the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578. This makes it possible to minimize any deterioration in the appearance of the moving device K4560 even if a malfunction occurs on one side of the left or right rotating member K430 and the horizontal position of the long device K540 is lost.

In other words, the tilt of the moving device K4560 can be made less noticeable compared to when the moving device K4560 is viewed at an angle, thereby improving the presentation effect of the moving device K4560.

Figures 1804(a) to 1804(c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010. In Figures 1804(a) to 1804(c), the horizontal descent movement pattern of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in time series, the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding states is illustrated typically, and an enlarged view is shown of the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 in an excited state (see Figure 1757(b)).

In the horizontal descent movement pattern, as shown in FIG. 1804(a), first, from the performance standby state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1740, FIG. 1758), the left rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates clockwise in synchronization, and the left and right rotating members K430 are set to the second release position (see FIG. 1764) (see FIG. 1804(b)).

In the second release position of the rotating member K430, the upper rotating member K476 is in a retracted state (see FIG. 1764), and the lifting device K4500 can be lowered by further rotating the left rotating member K430 counterclockwise and the right rotating member K430 clockwise (see FIG. 1765). Since the rotation of the left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, the long-length device K540 can be lowered to the representative midway stop position while maintaining the horizontal position of the long-length device K540 (see FIG. 1804(c)).

From the state shown in FIG. 1804(c), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization, returning them to the performance standby state. This allows the long-length device K540 to be raised while maintaining its horizontal position.

During the horizontal descent movement pattern, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in a clockwise direction, and is also controlled in the display area of the display device K4580 to be displayed rotating in the same direction and at the same speed as the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578. This makes it possible to minimize any deterioration in the appearance of the moving device K4560 even if a malfunction occurs on one side of the left or right rotating member K430 and the horizontal position of the long device K540 is lost.

In other words, the tilt of the moving device K4560 can be made less noticeable compared to when the moving device K4560 is viewed at an angle, thereby improving the presentation effect of the moving device K4560.

Note that in Fig. 1804(a) to Fig. 1804(c), the stopper member K462 of the switching device K460 is positioned at a retracted position away from the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445 (see Fig. 1757(b)). However, until the rotating member K430 reaches the position shown in Fig. 1804(c), the stopper member K462 does not impede the movement of the connecting member K445 (see Fig. 1765), and the position of the stopper member K462 does not affect the position of the lifting device K4500. Therefore, it is also possible to operate the long device K540 in a horizontal descent operation pattern with the switching device K460 in a non-excited state (see Fig. 1757(a)).

On the other hand, the lowering operation is not limited to stopping the long-length device K540 at the representative intermediate stopping position shown in FIG. 1804(c), and it is also possible to continue the rotation of the rotating member K430 to lower the long-length device K540. In this case, if the switching device K460 is not energized (see FIG. 1757(a)), the stopper member K462 will hinder the movement of the connecting member K445, causing the horizontal posture of the long-length device K540 to be lost.

In this way, in the horizontal descent operation pattern, the descent position of the long-length device K540 can be varied by providing variations in the rotation reversal position of the rotating member K430 (see FIG. 1804 (c)), and by setting the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 to an excited state (see FIG. 1757 (b)), the degree of freedom of the descent position of the long-length device K540 can be improved (it can reach a lower position in a horizontal position).

In addition, since the long device K540 is raised (see FIG. 1763) before the rotating member K430 reaches the second release position (see FIG. 1804(b)) from the state shown in FIG. 1804(a), the player may be able to understand that the rotating member K430 is rotating through the positioning of the long device K540.

In this case, if the state of the rotating member K430 is grasped, it may be possible to predict whether the next movement will be a horizontal drop movement pattern or a horizontal descent movement pattern, which may reduce the performance effect of the first movable device K4401. Even in this embodiment in which the view of the rotating member K430 is blocked by the plate-shaped main body K441 of the front cover member K440 (see Figures 1740 and 1747) and the state of the rotating member K430 cannot be seen from the front, it is possible to predict the state of the rotating member K430 by visually checking the movement of the long device K540 that is linked to the rotation of the rotating member K430.

In contrast, in this embodiment, in addition to the horizontal descent movement pattern shown in FIG. 1804, as in the above-described embodiments, a first mid-way reversal movement pattern can also be executed in which the left rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates clockwise synchronously from the state shown in FIG. 1804(a), reversing the direction of rotation at a first reversal posture (see FIG. 1763) before reaching the state shown in FIG. 1804(b), and returning to the state shown in FIG. 1804(a).

Here, the first inversion posture (see FIG. 1763) is a posture in which the rotating member K430 causes the long-length device K540 to reach the upper end position of its movement range, so the position and movement direction of the long-length device K540 do not change between the horizontal descent movement pattern in which the rotating member K430 continues to rotate in the same direction even after reaching the first inversion posture, and the first mid-way inversion movement pattern in which the rotating member K430 reverses its rotation direction after reaching the first inversion posture.

Therefore, for a player who can see the long device K540 but cannot see the rotating member K430, it can be difficult to determine what position the rotating member K430 is currently in (i.e., in what direction it has rotated from the first inverted position).

In addition, regardless of whether the operation is in the horizontal descending operation pattern or the first mid-way reversal operation pattern, the drive control may be performed to temporarily halt the rotation of the rotating member K430 when the rotating member K430 reaches the first reversal position. In this case, the stopped state of the long device K540 that inevitably occurs when the rotating member K430 is reversed can be caused even when the rotating member K430 is not reversed in the first reversal position, making it more difficult for the player to predict the position of the rotating member K430.

In addition to reversing the rotation direction of the rotating member K430 in the first reversal position, a second mid-way reversal operation pattern may also be executed in which the rotation direction of the rotating member K430 is reversed in the second release position (see FIG. 1804(b)) to return to the state shown in FIG. 1804(a).

In this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the vertical position of the long-length device K540 in the state shown in FIG. 1804(a) (see FIG. 1758) is the same as the vertical position of the long-length device K540 in the state shown in FIG. 1804(b) (see FIG. 1764).

During play, the player does not always pay attention to the long device K540, but rather the player's attention shifts to the game balls flowing down the play area, the payout position of the prize balls, the display contents of the third pattern display device K81, etc. Therefore, even if the rotating member K430 is simply repeatedly moved back and forth between the state shown in FIG. 1804(a) and the state shown in FIG. 1804(b), the player does not measure the number of up and down movements of the long device K540 that result from this, making it difficult for the player to know whether the rotating member K430 is in the state shown in FIG. 1804(a) or the state shown in FIG. 1804(b).

In this way, by making it possible to execute the first mid-way reversal motion pattern and the second mid-way reversal motion pattern, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the position of the long device K540 is the state shown in FIG. 1803(a) or the state shown in FIG. 1804(b), even if the positioning height of the long device K540 is the same. Furthermore, since it is possible to execute both the horizontal drop motion pattern and the horizontal descent motion pattern from the same positioning height of the long device K540, the presentation effect of the first movable device K4401 can be improved.

In addition, as described above, when the long device K540 is placed at a height position for a performance standby state, if there are multiple possible attitudes (phases) of the rotating member K430, the device may be configured to be able to execute a notification corresponding to the attitude (phase) of the rotating member K430. This notification may be an internal system notification that is not notified to the player, a notification that accompanies light illumination that is recognized by the player, or a notification in which sound is output from a sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1724) such as a speaker.

Fig. 1805(a) to Fig. 1805(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. In Fig. 1805(a) to Fig. 1805(c), the eleventh operating pattern and a part of the twelfth operating pattern (downward period) of the first movable device K4401 are illustrated in time series, the states of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding states are illustrated, and an enlarged view is shown showing that the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is in a non-excited state (see Fig. 1757(a)).

In the eleventh and twelfth operation patterns, as shown in FIG. 1799(a), first, from the performance standby state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1740), the right-side rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise to the first release position (see FIG. 1761).

As a result, support for the right side of the lifting device K4500 is released, and after the right side descends (falls), it is supported by the stopper member K462, and as shown in FIG. 1805(a), the first movable device K4401 changes from a performance standby state to a one-sided falling state (see FIG. 1745). During this time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the clockwise direction, and while maintaining this rotation, the moving device K4560 slides along the long device K540 to the right side.

When the right-side detection sensor K556a (see FIG. 1754) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the right end of its moving range, the left-side rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise to assume the first release position (see FIG. 1761; since the rotating member K430 is reversed, this corresponds to the symmetrical position of FIG. 1761).

As a result, the support on the left side of the lifting device K4500 is released and the left side is lowered (dropped), so that the long device K540 is in the left first inclined position (see FIG. 1798) as shown in FIG. 1805(b).

In this case, the amount of displacement (fall distance) on the left side is longer than the displacement on the right side of the lifting device K4500, and the impact on the left side of the lifting device K4500 may be large. In contrast, in this operation pattern, the moving device K4560 is positioned at the right end of its movement range in advance, so the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560 can be reduced.

When the left side of the lifting device K4560 is lowered (dropped), the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed and a counterclockwise rotation motion is initiated. While maintaining this rotation motion, the moving device K4560 is slid to the left along the elongated device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the left side detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1754) that it has reached the left end of its movement range, and is stopped based on the reaching of the left end of its movement range (see FIG. 1805(c)).

Fig. 1806(a) to Fig. 1806(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. In Fig. 1806(a) to Fig. 1806(c), a part (upward direction period) of the eleventh operation pattern of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding state is illustrated in a schematic manner, and the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is illustrated in an enlarged manner in which it is in a non-excited state (see Fig. 1757(a)).

In the eleventh operation pattern, after the state shown in FIG. 1805(c), the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed and a clockwise rotation motion is started. While maintaining this rotation motion, the moving device K4560 is slid to the right along the long device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) that it has reached the middle of its movement range, and the sliding motion is stopped based on the fact that it has reached the center of the movement range (see FIG. 1806(a)). The rotating motion of the rotating decorative member K4578 continues even after the sliding motion has stopped.

Then, the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization to assume the intermediate support position (see FIG. 1765). During this process, on the left side of the lifting device K4560, the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1761) is pushed up via the transmission tubular portion K434, thereby lifting the left side of the long device K540.

On the other hand, the right side of the lifting device K4560 is supported by the stopper member K462, and no load is transmitted to the lower member K510 via the transmission tubular part K434 until the rotating member K430 reaches the intermediate support position (see FIG. 1765). Therefore, the vertical position of the right side of the lifting device K4560 is maintained between the state shown in FIG. 1806(a) and the state shown in FIG. 1806(b).

That is, the pair of left and right rotating members K430 rotate in sync, but the left rotating member K430 generates a load that pushes up the left side of the lifting device K4560, but the right rotating member K430 does not push up the lifting device K4560, so no load is generated.

Then, the pair of left and right rotating members K430 continue to rotate synchronously, and the first movable device K4401 returns to a performance standby state (see FIG. 1806(c)), completing the 11th operation pattern. From the state shown in FIG. 1806(b), the lower members K510 (see FIG. 1761) are pushed up on both the left and right sides via the transmission tubular parts K434, and the long device K540 is raised.

Here, the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, so the arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 is symmetrical, but the vertical positions are the same. Therefore, the vertical positions of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1761) are the same on the left and right, so the long-length device K540 can be raised while maintaining the horizontal posture of the long-length device K540.

In this way, according to the 11th operation pattern, the pair of left and right rotating members K430 are not controlled to start rotating at different times, but are rotated simultaneously, so that the operation mode of the lifting device K4560 is such that the lifting timing of the left and right members is shifted.

Fig. 1807(a) to Fig. 1807(c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010. In Fig. 1807(a) to Fig. 1807(c), a part (upward direction period) of the 12th operation pattern of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding state is illustrated in a schematic manner, and the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited (see Fig. 1757(b)) is illustrated in an enlarged view.

In the twelfth operation pattern, after the state shown in FIG. 1805(c), the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited (see FIG. 1757(b)), the direction of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed, and clockwise rotation begins (see FIG. 1807(a)). In this state, the position of the long device K540 is approximately horizontal from left to right.

Before the moving device K4560 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1807(a), the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is changed from a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740) to a lowered position state (see FIG. 1741). This makes it possible to avoid a collision between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701. The change of the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) to the lowered position state can be determined by switching the output of the detection sensor K711e (see FIG. 1773).

When the output of the detection sensor K711e is switched and it is determined that the second movable device K4701 has changed to a lowered position state, the moving device K4560 slides to the right along the long device K540 while maintaining the clockwise rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578. The moving device K4560 slides until it is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) that it has reached the middle of its movement range, and the sliding movement is stopped based on the fact that it has reached the center of the movement range (see FIG. 1807(b)). The rotating movement of the rotating decorative member K4578 continues even after the sliding movement has stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 1807(c), from the state shown in FIG. 1807(b), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization, returning to the performance standby state, completing the 12th operation pattern.

In this way, the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, so although the arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 is symmetrical, the vertical positions are the same. Therefore, the vertical positions of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1761) are the same on the left and right, so the long-length device K540 can be raised while maintaining the horizontal posture of the long-length device K540.

In this way, according to the 12th operation pattern, the operation pattern is made different from the 11th operation pattern by exciting the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460, while the rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 required when lifting the long-length device K540 can be made the same as the 11th operation pattern. In other words, by sharing the operation patterns of the pair of left and right rotating members K430, even if only partially, between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.

When the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited, the weight of the long device K540 creates resistance, and the drive force required for the drive solenoid KSOL41 may become excessive. However, in this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is disposed on the left and right opposite the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1753) that generates the drive force to slide the moving device K4560.

By configuring the weight of the drive motor KMT51 to shift the center of gravity of the long-length device K540 to the left while operating the drive solenoid KSOL41 on the opposite side (right side), the weight of the long-length device K540 applied to the drive solenoid KSOL41 can be reduced, and the drive force required for the drive solenoid KSOL41 can be reduced.

Fig. 1808(a) to Fig. 1808(c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010. In Fig. 1808(a) to Fig. 1808(c), a part (downward direction period) of the thirteenth operation pattern of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding state is illustrated in a schematic manner, and the excited state of the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 (see Fig. 1757(b)) is illustrated in an enlarged view.

In the thirteenth operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 1808(a), the first movable device K4401 is first in a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740), and the right-side rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise to assume the first release position (see FIG. 1761).

This releases the support on the right side of the lifting device K4500, and the right side descends (falls). At this time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is excited, and the stopper member K462 is retracted from below the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1757 (b)), so that the connecting member K445 is not supported by the stopper member K462. As shown in FIG. 1808 (a), the first movable device K4401 changes from a performance standby state to the long device K540 in the second right inclined position (see FIG. 1797). During this time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the clockwise direction, and while maintaining this rotation, the moving device K4560 slides and moves to the right along the long device K540.

When the right-side detection sensor K556a (see FIG. 1754) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the right end of its moving range, the left-side rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise to assume the first release position (see FIG. 1761; since the rotating member K430 is reversed, this corresponds to the symmetrical position of FIG. 1761).

As a result, the support on the left side of the lifting device K4500 is released and the left side is lowered (dropped), so that the posture of the long device K540 becomes approximately horizontal from left to right, as shown in FIG. 1808(b).

When changing from FIG. 1808(a) to FIG. 1808(b), the amount of displacement (fall distance) on the left side is longer than the displacement on the right side of the lifting device K4500, and the impact on the left side of the lifting device K4500 may be large. In contrast, in this operation pattern, the moving device K4560 is positioned at the right end of its movement range in advance, so the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560 can be reduced.

When the left side of the lifting device K4560 is lowered (dropped), the direction of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed and a counterclockwise rotation motion is initiated. While maintaining this rotation motion, the moving device K4560 is slid to the left along the elongated device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until the left side detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1754) detects that it has reached the left end of its movement range, and is stopped based on the reaching of the left end of its movement range (see FIG. 1808(c)).

Before the moving device K4560 moves leftward from the state shown in FIG. 1808(b), the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is changed from a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740) to a lowered position state (see FIG. 1741). This makes it possible to avoid a collision between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701. The change of the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) to the lowered position state can be determined by switching the output of the detection sensor K711e (see FIG. 1773).

When the output of the detection sensor K711e is switched and it is determined that the second movable device K4701 has changed to a lowered position state, the moving device K4560 is slid to the left along the long device K540 while the counterclockwise rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is maintained.

The moving device K4560 slides until the left end of the moving range is detected by the left detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1754), and the sliding movement is stopped based on the fact that the left end of the moving range has been reached (see FIG. 1808(c)).

The rotating decorative member K4578 may be controlled so that its rotation continues even after the sliding movement has stopped, or the rotating decorative member K4578 may be controlled so that its rotation stops based on the stopping of the sliding movement.

After the state shown in FIG. 1808(c), similar to the 12th operation pattern described above, the state is returned to the performance standby state via the states shown in FIG. 1807(b) and FIG. 1807(c), and the 13th operation pattern is completed.

That is, in the thirteenth operation pattern, the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed from the state shown in FIG. 1808(c), a clockwise rotation motion is started, and while the clockwise rotation motion of the rotating decorative member K4578 is maintained, the moving device K4560 is slid to the right along the long device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) that it has reached the middle of its movement range, and the sliding motion is stopped based on the fact that it has reached the center of the movement range (see FIG. 1807(b)). The rotating motion of the rotating decorative member K4578 continues even after the sliding motion has stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 1807(c), from the state shown in FIG. 1807(b), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization, and the long device K540 is returned to the performance standby state, completing the 13th operation pattern.

In this way, the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, so although the arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 is symmetrical, the vertical positions are the same. Therefore, the vertical positions of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1761) are the same on the left and right, so the long-length device K540 can be raised while maintaining the horizontal posture of the long-length device K540.

In this way, according to the 13th operation pattern, the operation pattern is made different from the 11th operation pattern by exciting the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460, while the rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 required when lifting the long-length device K540 can be made similar to the 11th operation pattern (and the 12th operation pattern). In other words, by sharing the operation patterns of the pair of left and right rotating members K430, even partially, between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.

Fig. 1809(a) to Fig. 1809(c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010. In Fig. 1809(a) to Fig. 1809(c), a part of the 21st operation pattern (downward period) of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding state is illustrated in a schematic manner, and the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is illustrated in an enlarged view in a non-excited state (see Fig. 1757(a)).

In the 21st operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 1809(a), the first movable device K4401 is first in a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740), and the left rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise to the first release position (see FIG. 1761; since the rotating member K430 is reversed left and right, this corresponds to the left-right symmetrical position of FIG. 1761).

This releases the support on the left side of the lifting device K4500, causing the left side to descend (fall). This causes the first movable device K4401 to change from a performance standby state to the long device K540's second left inclined posture (see FIG. 1799 (c)). During this time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and while maintaining this rotation, the moving device K4560 slides along the long device K540 to the left side.

When the left side detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1754) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the left end of its moving range, the right side rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise to assume the first release position (see FIG. 1761).

As a result, support for the right side of the lifting device K4500 is released, and the right side is lowered (dropped). At this time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is de-energized, and the stopper member K462 is positioned below the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1757(b)), so that the connecting member K445 is supported by the stopper member K462, and the long device K540 is changed to the first left inclined position (see FIG. 1798) as shown in FIG. 1809(b).

When changing from FIG. 1809(a) to FIG. 1809(b), the displacement (fall distance) on the right side of the lifting device K4500 is longer than the displacement on the left side, and the impact on the right side of the lifting device K4500 may be large. In contrast, in this operation pattern, the moving device K4560 is positioned at the left end of its movement range in advance, so the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560 can be reduced.

As the right side of the lifting device K4560 descends (falls), the direction of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed and a clockwise rotation motion is initiated. While maintaining this rotation motion, the moving device K4560 slides to the right along the elongated device K540. The moving device K4560 slides until it is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) that it has reached the middle position of its movement range, and is stopped based on reaching the middle position of its movement range (see FIG. 1809(c)).

The rotating decorative member K4578 may be controlled so that its rotation continues even after the sliding movement has stopped, or the rotating decorative member K4578 may be controlled so that its rotation stops based on the stopping of the sliding movement.

When the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740), even if the state changes from that shown in FIG. 1809(b) to that shown in FIG. 1809(c), no collision occurs between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701, and therefore the second movable device K4701 is maintained in the performance standby state as shown in FIG. 1809(c).

After the state shown in FIG. 1809(c), similar to the 11th operation pattern described above, the state is returned to the performance standby state via the states shown in FIG. 1806(b) and FIG. 1806(c), and the 21st operation pattern is completed.

In other words, in the 21st operation pattern, from the state shown in FIG. 1809(c), while the clockwise rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is maintained, the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization, and the long device K540 is returned to the performance standby state, completing the 21st operation pattern.

In this way, according to the 21st operation pattern, while the operation pattern is different from the 11th to 13th operation patterns, the rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 required when lifting the long-length device K540 can be the same as the 11th to 13th operation patterns. In other words, by sharing the operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430, even partially, between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.

In the 21st operation pattern, after the state shown in FIG. 1809(b), the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is maintained in an excited state (see FIG. 1757(b)), so that the right side of the long-length device K540 falls from the first left inclined posture of the long-length device K540 shown in FIG. 1809(b) to a horizontal posture, and then the long-length device K540 is moved upward. This operation pattern may be set as the 22nd operation pattern.

In other words, even in the 22nd operation pattern, the operation pattern can be made different from the 11th to 13th and 21st operation patterns, while the rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 required when lifting the long-length device K540 can be made similar to the 11th to 13th and 21st operation patterns. In other words, by sharing the operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430, even partially, between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.

In the case of the 22nd operation pattern, the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1757(b)) abuts against the protruding receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 in the vertical direction, and it is necessary to generate a driving force sufficient for the stopper member K462 to rotate under weight. However, in this embodiment, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the lower end of the connecting member K445 is formed from a curved surface, so that the contact area between the connecting member K445 and the protruding receiving portion K462d can be reduced. This reduces frictional resistance and the driving force required for the rotational movement of the stopper member K462.

Figures 1810(a) to 1810(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. In addition, Figures 1810(a) to 1810(c) show a part (downward period) of the 23rd operation pattern of the first movable device K4401 in a time series, and show a schematic representation of the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding state, as well as an enlarged view showing the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited (see Figure 1757(b)).

In the 23rd operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 1810(a), the first movable device K4401 is first in a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740), and the left rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise to the first release position (see FIG. 1761; since the rotating member K430 is reversed left and right, this corresponds to the left-right symmetrical position of FIG. 1761).

This releases the support on the left side of the lifting device K4500, causing the left side to descend (fall). This causes the first movable device K4401 to change from a performance standby state to the long device K540's second left inclined posture (see FIG. 1799 (c)). During this time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and while maintaining this rotation, the moving device K4560 slides along the long device K540 to the left side.

When the left side detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1754) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the left end of its moving range, the right side rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise to assume the first release position (see FIG. 1761).

As a result, support for the right side of the lifting device K4500 is released, and the right side is lowered (dropped). At this time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is excited, and the stopper member K462 is retracted from below the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1757(b)), so that the connecting member K445 is no longer supported by the stopper member K462, and the position of the long device K540 is changed to an approximately horizontal position as shown in FIG. 1810(b).

When changing from FIG. 1810(a) to FIG. 1810(b), the displacement (fall distance) on the right side of the lifting device K4500 is longer than the displacement on the left side, and the impact on the right side of the lifting device K4500 may be large. In contrast, in this operation pattern, the moving device K4560 is positioned at the left end of its movement range in advance, so the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560 can be reduced.

As the right side of the lifting device K4500 descends (falls), the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 is reversed and a clockwise rotation motion is initiated. While maintaining this rotation motion, the moving device K4560 slides to the right along the elongated device K540.

Before the moving device K4560 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1810(b), the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is changed from a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740) to a lowered position state (see FIG. 1741). This makes it possible to avoid a collision between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701. The change of the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) to the lowered position state can be determined by switching the output of the detection sensor K711e (see FIG. 1773).

When the output of the detection sensor K711e is switched and it is determined that the second movable device K4701 has changed to a lowered position state, the moving device K4560 is slid to the right along the long device K540 while the clockwise rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is maintained.

Note that FIG. 1810(b) illustrates a case in which the second movable device K4701 has changed to a lowered position state at the time the right side of the lifting device K4500 is lowered (dropped), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second movable device K4701 may be controlled to change to a lowered position state after the right side of the lifting device K4500 has been lowered (dropped).

In this case, at the time when the right side of the lifting device K4500 descends (falls), the second movable device K4701 is positioned in a position that interferes with the movement of the moving device K4560, making it difficult for the player to predict whether the moving device K4560 will move to the right or whether the lifting device K4500 will rise without moving. This makes it possible to increase attention to the second movable device K4701 and the moving device K4560.

The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1754) that it has reached the middle position of its moving range, and is stopped based on this (see FIG. 1810(c)).

The rotating decorative member K4578 may be controlled so that its rotation continues even after the sliding movement has stopped, or the rotating decorative member K4578 may be controlled so that its rotation stops based on the stopping of the sliding movement.

After the state shown in FIG. 1810(c), the operation is the same as the 12th operation pattern described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 1807(c), from the state shown in FIG. 1810(c), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization, returning to the performance standby state, completing the 23rd operation pattern.

In this way, the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, so although the arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 is symmetrical, the vertical positions are the same. Therefore, the vertical positions of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1761) are the same on the left and right, so the long-length device K540 can be raised while maintaining the horizontal posture of the long-length device K540.

In this way, according to the 23rd operation pattern, the operation pattern is made different from the 21st and 22nd operation patterns by exciting the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460, while the rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 required when lifting the long-length device K540 can be made similar to the 11th to 13th, 21st, and 22nd operation patterns. In other words, by sharing the operation patterns of the pair of left and right rotating members K430, even if only partially, between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.

In the above embodiment, the moving device K4560 equipped with the rotating decorative member K4578, etc. is positioned inside the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726) when viewed from the front, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, it may be arranged outside the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726) when viewed from the front. In this case, fixing the center of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 can limit the range in which it overlaps with the game ball flowing down the outside of the center frame K86 when viewed in the front-to-back direction, making it easier to avoid the game ball getting lost due to overlapping with the rotating decorative member K4578 in the front-to-back direction.

In addition, for example, when the moving device K4560 is disposed between the upper right lamp K940 and the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726) when viewed from the front, the moving device K4560 plays a role in connecting the display of the third pattern display device K81 and the light emission mode of the upper right lamp K940, making it easier to view the upper right lamp K940, the display of the third pattern display device K81, and the display of the display device K4580 in a series.

The same can be said when the moving device K4560 is arranged between the upper right lamp K940 and the other display lamps K900. For example, when the moving device K4560 is arranged between the left side lamp K930 and the third pattern display device K81, the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated clockwise, the timing of the light emission of the LED arranged inside the left side lamp K930 is controlled so that the light is visually perceived as rising upward in the left side lamp K930, and a moving image is displayed so that the light is visually perceived as being lowered downward in the left range of the third pattern display device K81. In this way, the light from the left side lamp K930, the operation of the rotating decorative member K4578, and the display from the third pattern display device K81 can be visually perceived in a series.

For example, when the moving device K4560 is placed in front of the left decorative device K350, the brightness of the outer part of the moving device K4560 can be ensured by the light from the light-emitting board inside the left decorative device K350. This can improve the presentation effect of the moving device K4560.

In addition, when the moving device K4560 is positioned outside the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1726) when viewed from the front, it may be positioned on the rear side of the base plate K13 (see FIG. 1800) or on the front side of the base plate K13.

When the moving device K4560 is placed on the front side of the base plate K13, it may be placed on the rear side of the glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1800) or on the front side of the glass unit H16. Being closer to the player makes it easier for the player to recognize, which improves the presentation.

When the moving device K4560 is arranged on the front side of the glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1800), the moving device K4560 may be configured to be rotatably fixed to the glass unit H16, and may be configured to be illuminated by light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1800). This allows the light from the third pattern display device K81 to illuminate not only the moving parts constituting the operating unit K300 (see FIG. 1727) arranged on the rear side of the glass unit H16, but also the moving parts (moving device K4560) arranged on the front side of the glass unit H16.

1811(a), 1811(b) and 1812 are front views of the second movable device K4701. In addition, in Fig. 1811(a), 1811(b) and 1812, the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is illustrated in a time series of a breakthrough upward movement pattern in which the arm member K735 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front from the lowered position state (see Fig. 1773(b)), causing the vertical sliding member K4720 to move upward. Of the configuration of the second movable device K4701, the vertical sliding member K4720 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the followable member K740, the interlocking member K750 and the main decorative member K760 (see Fig. 1769) arranged in front of the vertical sliding member K4720 are omitted from the illustration.

In Figures 1811(a), 1811(b) and 1812, in order to facilitate understanding, the transmission end member K4737, the arm member K735 and the drive side two-layer gear K731, which overlap when viewed from the front, are partially broken away or illustrated with imaginary lines so that the configuration at the rear can be seen.

The second movable device K4701 in this embodiment uses many of the same components as the second movable device K701 described above, but some of the components have been modified to enable clockwise rotation of the arm member K735 from the lowered position, which was not possible with the second movable device K701.

For example, the position of the metal rod K713 has been moved to the left so as not to interfere with the arm member K735, which rotates clockwise from the lowered position. Accordingly, the left-right width of the vertical sliding member K4720 has also been increased.

In addition, the end of the guide hole K4737b is extended, so that even if the transmission end member K4737 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front from the lowered position, it does not interfere with the second support portion K725b (see FIG. 1770) of the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments).

In each of the above embodiments, the right side surface of the stopper portion K711g, which is extended from the main body portion K711 of the base member K710 to the front side on the right side of the metal bar K713, abuts against the arm member K735 in the rotational direction (abuts in the left-right direction), thereby stopping (blocking) the rotational movement of the arm member K735 and the transmission terminal member K4737 in the lowered position (see FIG. 1773(b)). However, in this embodiment, the stopper portion K711g and the arm member K735 do not abut, so this effect cannot be expected.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in each of the above embodiments, in the lowered position, the center (center of the circle) of the fourth support part K712d of the base member K710, the center (center of the circle) of the rotating tip part K735b of the arm member K735, and the center (center of the circle) of the base end support hole K737a of the transmission termination member K4737 are positioned to overlap with the straight line KVL78 extending approximately in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the arm member K735 rotates (sways) left or right from the lowered position around the fourth support portion K712d, the height position of the base end support hole K737a rises in response to the rotation. However, the weight of the upper and lower sliding member K4720, the followable member K740, the interlocking member K750 and the main decorative member K760 (see FIG. 1769) arranged on the upper and lower sliding member K4720 is applied in the direction pushing back the upward displacement (the direction lowering the height position of the base end support hole K737a), so that the position of the arm member K735 can be stabilized in the position in the lowered position (see FIG. 1811(a)).

In other words, in the operation control for rotating the arm member K735 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front from the performance standby state (see FIG. 1771(a)) to change it to the lowered position state, the drive gear KMG72 is controlled to rotate by an amount of rotation for rotating the arm member K735 90 degrees. Even if a control failure occurs and the rotation angle of the arm member K735 varies from 88 degrees to 92 degrees, the variation is corrected by the weight of the upper and lower sliding member K4720 (corresponding to the upper and lower sliding member K720 in each of the above embodiments), the followable member K740, the interlocking member K750 and the main decorative member K760 (see FIG. 1769), so that the position of the arm member K735 can be stabilized in the position in the lowered position state (see FIG. 1811(a)).

In FIG. 1811(b), the inclination angle of the arm member K735 with respect to the vertical direction is the same as that shown in FIG. 1773(a), and the state in which the left and right are reversed is shown. In other words, the height positions of the base end support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) are the same as those shown in FIG. 1773(a).

Figure 1812 illustrates the motion end state of the breakthrough-ascending motion pattern. That is, the motion end state of the breakthrough-ascending motion pattern is set as the state of the rotation angle immediately before the gear teeth of the rear layer transmission part K731b and the gear teeth of the rear layer transmission part K733b of the transmission side double layer gear K733 are no longer engaged.

In the state shown in FIG. 1812, the arm member K735 does not reach the position in the raised position state (see FIG. 1772). That is, the height position of the base end support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) in the operation terminal state of the breakthrough rising operation pattern in which the arm member K735 is rotated clockwise from the lowered position state is lower than the height position (see FIG. 1772(b)) of the base end support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) in the operation terminal state of the staircase rising operation pattern in which the arm member K735 is rotated counterclockwise from the lowered position state.

With this configuration, according to the second movable device K4701, the arm member K735 can be rotated (vibrated) back and forth in the left and right direction around the lowered position, thereby causing the base end support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) to move back and forth (vibrate) up and down. Furthermore, two different operating modes starting from the lowered position can be generated by changing the rotation direction of the arm member K735 (changing the drive direction of the drive motor KMG71) while keeping the drive motor KMG71 (see FIG. 1770) continuously driven at a constant speed.

First, in the case of a staircase ascent operation pattern in which the arm member K735 is rotated counterclockwise from the descending arrangement state, the base end support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) are raised from the descending arrangement state (see FIG. 1773(a)), and then the ascent operation is temporarily stopped in the arrangement in the performance standby state (see FIG. 1771(a)), and then the arm member K735 is raised to the height position in the ascending arrangement state (see FIG. 1771(b), 1772(a), 1772(b)).

Secondly, in the case of a breakthrough ascent operation pattern in which the arm member K735 is rotated clockwise from the lowered position state, the process from the lowered position state until the base end support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) are raised is the same as the staircase ascent operation pattern (see Figures 1773(a) and 1811(b)), but the ascent operation is not temporarily stopped and is raised in one go to the operation terminal state (see Figure 1812).

The second movable device K4701 is configured so that, particularly near the lowered position, the view of the arm member K735 is blocked by the up-down sliding member K4720 arranged in front of the arm member K735, making it difficult for the player to determine whether the arm member K735 has rotated clockwise or counterclockwise from the lowered position.

Therefore, when the second movable device K4701 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the second movable device K4701 is operating in a staircase ascent operation pattern or a breakthrough ascent operation pattern up to a certain elevation height (see Figures 1773(a) and 1811(b)).

In this case, by providing settings that change the subsequent performance development or the probability of a jackpot due to special chart fluctuation depending on whether the second movable device K4701 operates in a staircase-rising motion pattern or a breakthrough-rising motion pattern, it is possible to increase the attention given to the second movable device K4701.

Here, switching between an operation pattern that stops midway and an operation pattern that does not stop midway can also be achieved by providing a movable stopper member that can be switched between a state in which it can abut the vertical sliding member K4720 in the vertical direction and a state in which it retreats from the movement trajectory of the vertical sliding member K4720. In this case, there is no need to configure the arc-shaped portions K732 and K734.

On the other hand, in the case of a configuration in which the vertical sliding member K4720 is stopped by contact with a stopper member, the load generated increases as the operating speed increases, increasing the possibility of damage to the vertical sliding member K4720 or the stopper member. If braking is applied before contact or the operating speed is slowed down to avoid damage, it becomes difficult to distinguish between an operating pattern that stops midway and an operating pattern that does not, which may reduce the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the vertical sliding member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical sliding member K720 in each of the above embodiments) stops midway in the stair-climbing movement pattern, the arc-shaped portion K732 rubs against the arc-shaped portion K734 (see FIG. 1771(a)). No matter how fast the movement speed is, no impact strong enough to cause damage is generated. Rather, the load in the rotational direction is not easily transmitted to the downstream side in the transmission direction of the driving force (the transmission side double-layer gear K733, the arm member K735, and the transmission end member K4737, etc., downstream of the drive side double-layer gear K731), so there is no need for braking at midway positions (see FIG. 1773(a) and FIG. 1811(b)), and high-speed movement is possible.

As a result, in the stair-climbing motion pattern, it is possible to make it appear as if a high-speed upward movement suddenly stops, while since the upward movement speed can be increased in the stair-climbing motion pattern, it is also possible to increase the upward movement speed of the breakthrough upward movement pattern that is confusingly similar to the stair-climbing motion pattern. This improves the degree of freedom in setting the motion speed of the upward movement, and improves the presentation effect of the second movable device K4701.

Figure 1813 is a schematic front view showing the plate-shaped portion K4811 of the rear opening/closing member K4810 of the rear layer movable device K4800, the plate-shaped portion K4821 of the middle opening/closing member K4820, and the plate-shaped portion K4831 of the front opening/closing member K4830. The rear opening/closing member K4810, the middle opening/closing member K4820, and the front opening/closing member K4830 have substantially the same structure as the rear opening/closing member K810, the middle opening/closing member K820, and the front opening/closing member K830 of the rear layer movable device K800 described above in each of the above embodiments, but there are differences in the decorations applied to the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, which will be explained again.

Stickers having the same outline as each of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 when viewed from the front are affixed to the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, so that when viewed from the front, almost the entire part is visible in the color of the sticker.

The decoration on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 is based on a shape printed on a sticker. The left plate-shaped parts K4821 and K4831 have the outline KOL481 in the shape of the Roman letter "S", as in the above-mentioned embodiments (see FIG. 1785(b)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the right plate-shaped parts K4811 and K4821 are provided with an inner contour KOL482a in the shape of the Roman letter "G", and an outer contour KOL482b in the shape of the Roman letter "G" that surrounds the outside of the inner contour KOL482a, the right plate-shaped part K4821 is provided with a contour KOL483 in the shape of the Roman letter "O", and the right plate-shaped part K4831 is provided with a contour KOL484 in the shape of a figure "crown".

In this embodiment, the shape is printed in red on a colorless and transparent sticker. Since the areas outside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 and inside the inner contour KOL482a are printed in red, the areas outside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 and inside the inner contour KOL482a are visible in red, and the areas inside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 and outside the inner contour KOL482a are visible as colorless and transparent.

During actual play, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the closed state (see FIG. 1813) are not viewed individually, and the third pattern display device K81 located behind the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 can also be seen through (see FIG. 1785 (b) and FIG. 1785 (c)). Therefore, the visible state of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 can change in response to the display of the third pattern display device K81.

Figure 1814(a) is a front view of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, Figure 1814(b) is a front view of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 shown in Figure 1814(a), Figure 1815(a) is a front view of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and Figure 1815(b) is a front view of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 shown in Figure 1815(a).

In FIG. 1814(a), the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is illuminated with the same red light (same intensity of red) as the stickers attached to the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 (first embodiment).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 1814(b), the inside of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 and the outside of the inner contour KOL482a are visually recognized in red, as in the display of the display area, and it becomes difficult to distinguish from the red of the outside of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 and the inside of the inner contour KOL482a, making it difficult to distinguish the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484.

As a result, the player's attention is less likely to be drawn to the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484, and the visual appearance of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 gives the impression that they are simply completely painted red.

In FIG. 1815(a), in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the red color of the stickers attached to the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is displayed as being illuminated from one side with light that also includes colors other than red (e.g., white light) (second embodiment).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 1815(b), inside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 and outside the inner contour KOL482a, the color of light (including colors other than red) emitted in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is seen, while outside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 and inside the inner contour KOL482a, the colors other than red of the light emitted in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 are absorbed by the sticker and seen as red.

This makes it easier to distinguish between the color of light (including colors other than red) inside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 and outside the inner contour KOL482a, and the red color outside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 and inside the inner contour KOL482a, making it easier to distinguish between the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484.

As a result, the player's attention is more easily drawn to the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484, and the visual appearance of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 gives the impression that some kind of suggestion is being given to the player.

In this way, while adopting a mode in which the display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is displayed in the same color across the board (see Figures 1814 (a) and 1815 (a)), the first and second modes, which are different in color, can give different impressions of the visual appearance through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 due to the relationship between the light displayed and the colors printed on the stickers of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which colored stickers are attached to the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a non-transparent printed sticker may be attached, or the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be formed from a colored resin material (which may be a transparent resin material or a non-transparent resin material).

In this case, the shape of the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 may be formed by two-color molding, or a reel member that matches the shape may be attached, or the light transmittance may be varied by forming recesses and protrusions that match the shape to adjust the visibility.

In many cases, the color added to the resin material, such as the color of the hardener, improves the material strength and viscosity compared to colorless, transparent resin materials. Therefore, when forming the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 from a colored resin material, it is possible to achieve sufficient material strength while improving the design freedom of the shape.

In addition, the outlines KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 formed on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 have been described as shapes formed on the attached sticker, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outlines KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 may be made visible by the shapes of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

That is, for example, a rib portion may be formed so as to protrude rearward from the back side of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in a shape that follows the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484.

At the locations where the rib portions are formed, the thickness dimensions of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are large, so the transparency is reduced and the portions appear dark. In other words, by forming lines that appear dark along the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the boundaries between the inside of the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484, and it is possible to improve the presentation.

Furthermore, the rib portion can improve the material strength of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, making it easier to prevent bending and folding deformation of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

In this way, by forming ribs along the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, it is possible to improve the presentation while also improving the durability of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, while the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are kept in a closed state, the display mode of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 can be switched, thereby instantly changing the impression of the viewing mode through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

For example, by switching the display mode of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 from a full red display (see FIG. 1814(a)) to a full multi-color display (e.g., colors including colors other than red) (see FIG. 1815(a)) while the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are kept in a closed state, the viewing mode through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be instantly switched from the mode shown in FIG. 1814(b) to the mode shown in FIG. 1815(b).

Thus, according to this embodiment, when the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in the same state of being blocked, the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are easily distinguished, and the inside and It is possible to switch between a case where it is easy to draw attention to the display visible through the outside of the inner contour KOL482a (easy to draw attention to the display area of the third pattern display device K81) and a case where it is easy to draw attention to the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the front side because the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 are difficult to distinguish and are viewed in the same color on one side.

That is, in addition to the function of drawing attention to the display by the third pattern display device K81 arranged behind the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 (see FIG. 1815(b)), which is unique to the case where the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 are formed from a transparent material, it is also possible to achieve the function of drawing attention to the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 themselves and making it difficult to draw attention to the display area of the third pattern display device K81 behind (see FIG. 1814(b)), which is unique to the case where the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 are formed from a non-transparent material.

With reference to Fig. 1815(a) and Fig. 1815(b), an example of setting the display mode in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 will be described. In the above explanation, a case was described in which the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is controlled to show the same mode (color) of light across the entire area, but for example, as shown in Fig. 1815(a), the display area of the third pattern display device K81 may be divided into multiple ranges, and each range may be configured to display a different display mode.

For example, when plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a closed state, the first door performance display KER481 is executable in the range including the contour KOL481 when viewed from the front, the second door performance display KER482 is executable in the range including the outer contour KOL482b when viewed from the front, the third door performance display KER483 is executable in the range including the contour KOL483 when viewed from the front, and the fourth door performance display KER484 is executable in the range including the contour KOL484 when viewed from the front.

When each door display KER481, KER482, KER483, KER484 is displayed in a color other than red, the display range is larger than the corresponding outlines KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484, but outside each outline KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484, the colors other than red are absorbed by the sticker, so that the display in colors other than red is limited to the inside of each outline KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484.

For example, the first door effect display KER481 may be displayed as seven rainbow colors arranged in equally spaced stripes. In this case, only the inside of the outline KOL481 is visible in rainbow colors, and the outside of the outline KOL481 is visible in red, so that the player can see the Roman letter "S" in rainbow colors. This can suggest to the player that some kind of benefit is possible (for example, that they have won the jackpot in a special pattern lottery).

For example, in the second door performance display KER482, a display of a yellow band extending vertically moving to the left may be executed at equal intervals, and in the third door performance display KER483, a display of a yellow band extending horizontally moving upward may be executed at equal intervals.

In this case, the yellow part is visually perceived to move leftward only outside the inner contour KOL482a and inside the outer contour KOL482b, and the yellow part is visually perceived to move upward only inside the contour KOL483, and the inside of the inner contour KOL482a, the outside of the outer contour KOL482b, and the outside of the contour KOL483 can be visually perceived as red, so that the player can visually perceive the romanized "GO" as the yellow part moves, and can guide the player's gaze in the upper left direction as the direction of movement of the yellow part.

As a result, even if the player's gaze is biased toward the right half of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the player's gaze can be guided to the left, so that by bringing the outline KOL481 into view, the player can notice the rainbow-colored Roman letter "S" displayed.

For example, the fourth door effect display KER484 may be controlled to be completely gold and alternately displayed and turned off (blinked). In this case, while it is displayed, only the inside of the outline KOL484 is visible in gold, creating an impression of a "crown," while when the display is turned off, it can be seen as if the "crown" is not there.

In this case, the impression can be made different by varying the ratio between the time it is displayed and the time it is erased. That is, if the time it is displayed is longer than the time it is erased, the "crown" appears darker and more substantial. On the other hand, if the time it is displayed is shorter than the time it is erased, the "crown" appears faint (see-through), giving the impression of an afterimage.

In this way, even though the outer edge shape of each door effect display KER481, KER482, KER483, KER484 is a simple rectangle, the player can visually recognize the shape of each outline KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 in accordance with the display mode of each door effect display KER481, KER482, KER483, KER484.

Therefore, the display mode of the third pattern display device K81 can be a simpler pattern than when the shapes of each of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 arranged in front are displayed, so the time required for drawing can be shortened while allowing the player to visually recognize a pattern corresponding to the shape of each of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484.

The illumination of the inside of each of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 utilizes the illumination of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, so it can be seen by surface illumination. Therefore, compared to the moving device K4560 (corresponding to the moving device K560 in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, see FIG. 1755) that is illuminated by a point light source, the inside of each of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 can be illuminated more brightly and more uniformly, improving visibility.

In this embodiment, the door display KER481, KER482, KER483, and KER484 are described as corresponding only to the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 that open and close, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a second door-like movable device that can be opened and closed in the same manner as the plate-like parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be disposed on the front layer side (or rear layer side) of the plate-like parts K4811, K4821, and K4831. A sticker is also affixed to the plate-like part of the second door-like movable device, and an outline different from the outlines KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 is applied to the sticker at a position that overlaps with each door performance display KER481, KER482, KER483, and KER484 when viewed from the front when the second door-like movable device is in the closed state.

In this case, even if the display mode of each door performance display KER481, KER482, KER483, KER484 is the same, the viewing mode on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 can be made different between a case where the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 are in a closed state (see FIG. 1742) and the second door-shaped movable device is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740) and a case where the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 are in a performance standby state (see FIG. 1740) and the second door-shaped movable device is in a closed state (see FIG. 1742).

Like the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, K831 in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 can easily be stopped in the blocked state (see Figs. 1779(c) and 1783) and in the interlocking switching state (see Figs. 1779(b) and 1782). In other words, even if the timing of stopping the driving force is slightly off, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 can easily be stopped in the blocked state or the interlocking switching state.

The left and right plate-shaped members K4811, K4821, and K4831 are driven by independent drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 (see FIG. 1776) on the left and right sides, respectively, in the same way as the plate-shaped members K811, K821, and K831 in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, making it possible to drive the left and right sides with synchronized operation timing or to drive the left and right sides independently.

In other words, the performance standby state (see FIG. 1781), the interlocking switching state (see FIG. 1782), and the blocked state (see FIG. 1783), which have been described as the states of the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, and K831 in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, are not limited to cases in which the left and right are operated simultaneously, but can also be configured as states that either the left or right can take.

Here, if the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 come into contact with the opposing door and are stopped, there is a possibility that the stopping position will not be determined when only one side is operated. In contrast, in this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned embodiments, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 can be stopped in the closed state or interlocking switching state without coming into contact with the opposing member (the member on the opposite side), so even when only one of the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 is operated, they can be accurately stopped in the closed state or interlocking switching state.

The operating speed of the left and right plate-shaped members K4811, K4821, and K4831 will now be described. As with the base-end slide member K880 (see Figs. 1779 and 1780) located upstream of the drive force transmission to the plate-shaped members K811, K821, and K831 in each of the above-described embodiments, the movement speed of the base-end slide member K880 can be maximized in the interlocking switching state (see Fig. 1779(b)) even when the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 (see Fig. 1776) are driven at a constant drive speed.

Figure 1816 is a schematic front view showing the plate-shaped portion K4811 of the rear opening/closing member K4810 of the rear layer side movable device K4800, the plate-shaped portion K4821 of the middle opening/closing member K4820, and the plate-shaped portion K4831 of the front opening/closing member K4830. Figure 1816 shows the visual appearance in the interlocking switching state (see Figures 1779 (b) and 1782).

The rear layer side movable device K4800 can be switched between a state in which the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 do not overlap at all and the contents of the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 can be clearly understood (see FIG. 1813), and a state in which the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 partially overlap and the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 (e.g., contours KOL482a, KOL482b) become difficult to see (see FIG. 1816). This increases the variety of visual patterns provided by the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831, improving attention-grabbing and performance effects.

As shown in FIG. 1816, at least a portion of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are overlapped front to back, thereby reducing the overall left-right width. In addition, the overlapping positions of the outside of the inner contour KOL482a formed in the plate-shaped part K4811 and the inside of the outer contour KOL482b (colorless and transparent) and the outside of the contour KOL482 formed in the plate-shaped part K4821 (red) and the inner contour KOL482 formed in the plate-shaped part K4811 are also overlapped. At the positions where the inside of L482a and the outside of the outer contour KOL482b (red) overlap with the inside of the contour KOL482 formed on the plate-shaped portion K4821 (colorless and transparent), the inside of the inner contour KOL482a formed on the plate-shaped portion K4811 and the outside of the outer contour KOL482b are visible in their colors (red), so the area of the parts that are easy to distinguish as contours KOL482a and KOL482b (visually visible as colorless and transparent) is reduced.

Therefore, compared to the state shown in FIG. 1813, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the decoration formed as the contours KOL482a and KOL482b. In comparison to the case where the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 slide left and right without changing the degree of overlap in the front-to-back direction, in this embodiment, the contours KOL482a and KOL482b begin to overlap before they retreat to the front and outside of the third pattern display device K81, so in this embodiment, the area visible as the contours KOL482a and KOL482b (visualized as colorless and transparent) decreases earlier, making it difficult to distinguish the contour KOL482.

This makes it possible to more clearly distinguish the difference in ease of distinguishing the contours KOL482a and KOL482b between the state shown in FIG. 1813 and the state shown in FIG. 1816, thereby making it possible to increase the difference in the variation in visual recognition patterns.

In the state shown in FIG. 1816, by executing the above-mentioned first mode of display in the range located behind the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 within the display area of the third pattern display device K81 shown by a thick imaginary line, the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be viewed as long frame components (part of a frame) with a left-right width arranged on the left and right sides of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the area in which the display of the third pattern display device K81 is visible can be narrowed to the spacing between the plate-shaped portions K4811 (reduced display mode).

In other words, since it is possible to make it appear as if the size of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 has changed, it is possible to present to the player not only display effects that are appropriate for the size of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 itself, but also display effects that are appropriate for the size of the apparently changed (reduced) display area, all by using the same third pattern display device K81.

On the other hand, within the display area of the third pattern display device K81, in the range located behind the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, a display (third type display) is made in which the shape is visually recognized by shading in a red that is darker than the color of the stickers on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 (because red is not absorbed by the stickers, the player can see the shape by shading through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831), and a display in which the shape by shading in red is visually recognized even when placed at the intervals between the plate-shaped portions K4811 may also be made.

For example, as shown in FIG. 1816, the fourth rear display K81d extending in a band shape in the left-right direction in the upper range of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is displayed in the same shade of red as the stickers on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, and the fifth rear display K81e in the shape of an arrow pointing to the right inside the fourth rear display K81d is displayed in a shade of red that is darker than the red of the stickers on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

In this case, the inner end of the plate-shaped portion K4811 does not give the impression that the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is partitioned, and the fourth rear display K81d and the fifth rear display K81e in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 can be seen through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

According to this embodiment, even if the fifth rear display K81e overlaps with the inner edge of the plate-shaped portion K4811, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and therefore the player will not feel uncomfortable even if the fifth rear display K81e is displayed as a dynamic display that slides left and right (for example, to the right in the direction of the arrow).

In this way, while the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are positioned on the front side of the third pattern display device K81, a display presentation suitable for the size of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 itself can be executed (non-reduced display mode).

In this way, in this embodiment, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device K81, the player can be shown not only display effects that are appropriate for the size of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 itself, but also display effects that are appropriate for the size of the apparently changed (reduced) display area, which are realized by switching the display mode of the third pattern display device K81.

In addition, in the above-mentioned reduced display mode and non-reduced display mode, the display range behind the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 is not limited to the projection range of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831.

For example, in the reduced display mode, the left and right inner ends of the range in which the display of the first mode described above is executed may be shifted left and right outward from the left and right inner tip side (sides arranged opposite each other) edges of the plate-shaped portion K4811. In this case, even if the operation (stop position) of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 becomes unstable, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the display of the first mode is exposed and not covered by the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

In addition, in the reduced display mode, a band-like display extending vertically on the left and right inner tips of the plate-like portion K4811 makes it easier to distinguish between the display range of the third pattern display device K81 in the space between the left and right plate-like portions K4811 and the display range behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, but the position of this band-like display is not limited to the projection range of the left and right inner tips of the plate-like portion K4811.

For example, the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811 may be shifted to the opposing side (inner left and right). In this case, even if the operation (stop position) of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 becomes unstable, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the band-shaped display is covered by the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, making it difficult to see the band-shaped display.

Figures 1817(a), 1817(b) and 1817(c) are top views of the third pattern display device K81 and the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821 and K4831 of the rear layer movable device K4800. Figures 1817(a), 1817(b) and 1817(c) show schematic diagrams of the positional relationship between the third pattern display device K81 and the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821 and K4831.

As shown in FIG. 1817(a), in this embodiment, the third pattern display device K81 is provided with a transparent film K4891 arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device K81 with a size covering the display area of the third pattern display device K81 and with its left and right side ends adhered to the left and right frames of the third pattern display device K81, a pair of gripping portions K4892 arranged on both the top and bottom sides of the transparent film K4891 and gripping the transparent film K4891, a first drive device K4893 that slides and displaces the gripping portion K4892 in the forward and backward directions, and a second drive device K4894 that slides and displaces the first drive device K4893 in the left and right directions.

When the gripping portion K4892 is positioned in the initial position (see FIG. 1817(a)), the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is parallel to the display surface K81s of the third pattern display device K81, and the display visible through the transparent film K4891 does not change significantly from when the transparent film K4891 is not disposed.

As shown in FIG. 1817(b), when a pair of upper and lower gripping portions K4892 are positioned in the forward position, the transparent film K4891 is deformed in a manner that forms two sides of a triangle with the gripping portions K4892 as vertices when viewed from above, and the plane KS49 on which the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is formed is made non-parallel to the display surface K81s of the third pattern display device K81. In this case, the display visible through the transparent film K4891 may be different from that when the transparent film K4891 is not arranged.

In Figure 1817 (c), a pair of upper and lower gripping parts K4892 are arranged in a forward position, and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side of the rear layer side movable device K4800 are arranged in a performance standby state, while the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are arranged in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 1817(c), by arranging the pair of upper and lower gripping portions K4892 in a forward position, the front-to-back distance between the edge of the transparent film K4891 on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 side and the edge of the transparent film K4891 on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 side is narrowed in a front view.

Furthermore, the plane KS49 on which the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is formed when the pair of upper and lower gripping portions K4892 are positioned in the forward position is approximately parallel to the direction KL50 in which the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 arranged in the closed state are aligned.

The transparent film K4891 refracts the light incident from the third pattern display device K81, causing it to travel in a direction perpendicular to the plane KS49 and be visible to the player. This makes it easier to view the display from the third pattern display device K81, which is viewed through the front surface of the transparent film K4891 as the viewing surface, and the decoration, which is viewed through the front surfaces of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, in a continuous manner.

The display on the third pattern display device K81 side, which is viewed through the transparent film K4891, may be formed continuously slightly beyond the left and right positions of the gripping portion K4892 (even beyond the left side in FIG. 1817(c)) in consideration of the possibility that the player may view it in a direction perpendicular to the plane KS49. In this case, even if the player views it in a direction perpendicular to the plane KS49, it is easy to prevent a gap from being visible between the transparent film K4891 and the plate-shaped portion K4811, and when the player views it from the front, the area to the left of the gripping portion K4892 overlaps with the plate-shaped portion K4811, so that it is viewed almost in the color of the plate-shaped portion K4811 (red in this embodiment), and the viewing pattern can be divided at the center position of the left and right where the gripping portion K4892 is located.

The front-to-rear position of the gripping portion K4892 can be changed by driving the first driving device K4893. Therefore, the inclination angle of the plane KS49 on which the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is formed can be set arbitrarily. That is, by adjusting the front-to-rear spacing between the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and the transparent film K4891, it is possible to adjust the visibility (whether they are viewed as a series or not) or to purposely incline the angle of the plane KS49 relative to the direction in which the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 are arranged.

The left-right position of the gripping portion K4892 can be changed by driving the second driving device K4894. Therefore, by matching the left-right position where the end of the plate-shaped portion K4811 is disposed with the left-right position of the gripping portion K4892, the front-to-back distance between the edge of the transparent film K4891 on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 side and the edge of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 on the transparent film K4891 side in a front view can be narrowed, regardless of the left-to-right position of the plate-shaped portion K4811.

In this embodiment, the transparent film K4891 is configured in a positional relationship along the direction KL50 in which the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are arranged when it is extended with the left and right ends of the third pattern display device K81 as vertices, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the front-to-back distance between the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 and the third pattern display device K81 is shorter than the arrangement shown in FIG. 1817, the transparent film K4891 can be configured to be extended with the parts on the left and right inner side of the left and right ends of the third pattern display device K81 as vertices, thereby forming a state in which the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 are parallel.

In addition, for example, if the front-to-rear distance between the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and the third pattern display device K81 is longer than the arrangement shown in FIG. 1817, the position at which the end of the transparent film K4891 is fixed can be set to a position away from the outer frame of the third pattern display device K81 forward, thereby making it possible to achieve a state in which the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 are parallel.

In this embodiment, the deformation direction of the transparent film K4891 was designed based on the fact that the movement direction of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 is the left-right direction, but if the movement direction of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 changes, it goes without saying that the deformation direction of the transparent film K4891 can also change. For example, if the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 slide in the front-back direction, it is also possible to arrange the gripping parts K4892 on the left and right of the third pattern display device K81 to cause deformation of the transparent film K4891.

Although the case where the gripping portion K4892 is arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple gripping portions K4892 may be arranged on each of the upper and lower sides. In this case, the deformation mode of the transparent film K4891 can be changed by switching the gripping portion K4892 to be displaced for each case, and the deformation mode of the transparent film K4891 can also be changed by simultaneously displacing multiple gripping portions K4892.

In this embodiment, a gap is created between the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 by the thickness of the plate-shaped portion K4811, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the end of the slide tip side (the gripping portion K4892 side) of the plate-shaped portion K4811 may be inclined (sharply formed) so as not to interfere with the extended transparent film K4891 (see FIG. 1817(b)), so that the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 are flush in top view. In this case, it is possible to easily visually recognize the transparent film K4891 and the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in a series.

Figures 1818(a), 1818(b), 1818(c), 1818(d), 1818(e), 1818(f), 1818(g), 1818(h) and 1818(i) are partially enlarged front views of the pachinko machine K4010 in the MDCCCXVIII portion of Figure 1799(a).

Figure 1818(a) shows a case where the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a performance standby state (see Figure 1781). Figure 1818(b) shows a case where the left plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a performance standby state (see Figure 1781) and the right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a closed state (see Figure 1783).

Figure 1818(c) shows a case where the right-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a performance standby state (see Figure 1781) and the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a closed state (see Figure 1783). Figure 1818(d) shows a case where the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a closed state (see Figure 1783).

Figure 1818 (e) illustrates a case in which the right-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a linked switching state (see Figure 1782) and the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a performance standby state (see Figure 1781).

Figure 1818(f) shows a case where the left plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a linked switching state (see Figure 1782) and the right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a performance standby state (see Figure 1781). Figure 1818(g) shows a case where the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a linked switching state (see Figure 1782).

Figure 1818 (h) illustrates a case in which the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in an interlocking switching state (see Figure 1782) and the right-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a blocked state (see Figure 1783).

Figure 1818 (i) illustrates a case in which the right-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in an interlocking switching state (see Figure 1782) and the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a blocked state (see Figure 1783).

In this way, the arrangement of the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 is changed depending on the state corresponding to the voltage application to the rear layer side movable device K4800 (see FIG. 1813). This changes the viewing state in the display area of the third pattern display device K81.

In this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the way the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is displayed can be changed by switching between the states shown in FIG. 1818(a) and FIG. 1818(i).

For example, when the display of the third pattern display device K81 is set in the first manner described above in the area covered by the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, the area covered by the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 will be viewed as the same shade of red all over, and the dynamic display will not be visible, so the actual display range in which the dynamic display can be viewed in the state shown in Figures 1818(b) to 1818(i) (for example, the display range viewed as surrounded by a frame, such as the third pattern display device K81 and display device K4580) will be narrower than the display range shown in Figure 1818(a).

In addition, for example, when the state changes from that shown in FIG. 1818(a) to that shown in FIG. 1818(b), the right-hand area is hidden, and if the state is then changed again to that shown in FIG. 1818(a), the player's attention to the right-hand area can be improved.

Also, for example, by changing the state shown in FIG. 1818(e) and the state shown in FIG. 1818(f) to alternate, the player can see that the actual display range in which the dynamic display can be viewed is displaced back and forth from left to right. In this case, by setting the drawing so that the display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 appears to slide left and right in conjunction with the displacement of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, it is possible to realize an effect in which the third pattern display device K81 appears to slide left and right, even without actually sliding the third pattern display device K81 left and right.

Not limited to this, a similar effect can also be achieved when the state shown in FIG. 1818(b) and the state shown in FIG. 1818(c) occur alternately, or when the state shown in FIG. 1818(h) and the state shown in FIG. 1818(i) occur alternately.

Figures 1819(a), 1819(b) and 1819(c) are partially enlarged front views of the pachinko machine K4010 in the MDCCCXVIII section of Figure 1799(a). In Figures 1819(a), 1819(b) and 1819(c), an example of the changes in the pachinko machine K4010 is illustrated in chronological order. Note that the patterns and colors of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821 and K4831 are omitted from the illustration.

In Fig. 1819(a), the first movable device K4401 is operated in a left-right symmetrical operation pattern of the above-mentioned eleventh operation pattern (see Figs. 1805 and 1806), and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 of the rear layer side movable device K4800 are maintained in a closed state (see Fig. 1813) on both the left and right sides, forming a first combined operation pattern, which is illustrated in chronological order. Such an operation pattern can be realized by placing the switching device K460 (see Fig. 1805) on the left side as well, and appropriately controlling the switching device K460 following the eleventh operation pattern.

The moving device K4560 receives light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81, which is arranged behind the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, via the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

The plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visually recognized in red due to the sealing material, and the light from the third pattern display device K81 that passes through these plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is reddish in color, so the outer periphery of the moving device K4560 is also visually recognized in a reddish color.

In Fig. 1819(b), the second composite motion pattern is illustrated in a time series. In the second composite motion pattern, the first movable device K4401 is operated in the first composite motion pattern described above (see Fig. 1805 and Fig. 1807) until halfway through (corresponding to the first and second figures from the top).

Meanwhile, of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 of the rear layer movable device K4800, which are both in a closed state on the left and right, the left plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed midway to a performance standby state (see FIG. 1781) (corresponding to the third diagram from the top), and immediately thereafter the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the left switching device K460 is excited, causing the left side of the long device K540 to drop and the long device K540 to assume a horizontal position (corresponding to the fourth diagram from the top).

In the twelfth operation pattern described above, the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1807(a)) is excited after the moving device K4560 reaches the left end of the moving range, but in the second combined operation pattern, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is excited at an earlier timing than the moving device K4560 reaches the right end.

That is, when the moving device K4560 is moving between the left end and the center of its range of movement (corresponding to the third image from the top), the left plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are driven and the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1807(a)) is excited.

In this case, while the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a closed state, the moving device K4560 slides in a downward and rightward direction along the longitudinal direction of the long device K540, but as the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to a performance standby state, the moving device K4560 first displaces downward, and then the inclination of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 also becomes more horizontal.

This allows the side where the movement of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 occurs (the left side) to be aligned with the side where the change in the movement direction of the moving device K4560 occurs (from the lower right direction to the lower direction), so that an action presentation can be executed that allows the player to visually recognize the moving device K4560 and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 as a single unit.

The moving device K4560 receives light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81, which is positioned behind the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 until partway through.

The plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visually recognized in red due to the sealing material, and the light from the third pattern display device K81 that passes through these plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is reddish in color, so the outer periphery of the moving device K4560 is also visually recognized in a reddish color.

On the other hand, after the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 change to a performance standby state, the moving device K4560 receives light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81 without passing through the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831.

As a result, the reddish discoloration caused by the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 disappears, and the outer periphery of the moving device K4560 is illuminated by light from the third pattern display device K81, and is viewed in a manner influenced by the color of that light.

As a result, even if the display by the third pattern display device K81 cannot be switched, the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be switched from a closed state to a standby state for a performance, thereby enabling a performance that changes the appearance of the moving device K4560 to be executed.

In Fig. 1819(c), the third composite motion pattern is illustrated in a time series. In the third composite motion pattern, the first movable device K4401 is operated in the same manner as the second composite motion pattern illustrated in Fig. 1819(b) until halfway through (corresponding to the first and second figures from the top), and is also similar to Fig. 1819(a) which follows the eleventh motion pattern described above.

Meanwhile, of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 of the rear layer movable device K4800, which are both in a closed state on the left and right, the right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed midway to a performance standby state (see FIG. 1781) (corresponding to the third diagram from the top), and immediately thereafter the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the left switching device K460 is excited (see FIG. 1807(a)), causing the left side of the long device K540 to drop and assume a horizontal position (corresponding to the fourth diagram from the top).

In the twelfth operation pattern described above, the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1807(a)) is excited after the moving device K4560 reaches the left end of the moving range, but in the third combined operation pattern, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is excited at an earlier timing than the moving device K4560 reaches the right end.

That is, when the moving device K4560 is moving between the center and the right end of its range of movement (corresponding to the third image from the top), the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are driven and the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1807(a)) is excited.

In this case, while the right-side plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in a closed state, the moving device K4560 slides in a downward and rightward direction along the longitudinal direction of the long device K540, but as the right-side plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to a performance standby state, the moving device K4560 first displaces downward, and then the inclination of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 also becomes more horizontal.

This allows the side where the movement of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 occurs (the right side) to be aligned with the side where the change in the movement direction of the moving device K4560 occurs (from the lower right direction to the downward direction), so that an action presentation can be executed that allows the player to visually recognize the moving device K4560 and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 as a single unit.

The moving device K4560 receives light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81, which is positioned behind the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 until partway through.

The plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visually recognized in red due to the sealing material, and the light from the third pattern display device K81 that passes through these plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is reddish in color, so the outer periphery of the moving device K4560 is also visually recognized in a reddish color.

On the other hand, after the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 change to a performance standby state, the moving device K4560 receives light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81 without passing through the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831.

As a result, the reddish discoloration caused by the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 disappears, and the outer periphery of the moving device K4560 is illuminated by light from the third pattern display device K81, and is viewed in a manner influenced by the color of that light.

As a result, even if the display by the third pattern display device K81 is not switched (even if the same light-emitting state is maintained), the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be switched from a closed state to a standby state for performance, thereby enabling the execution of a performance that changes the appearance of the moving device K4560.

By enabling the movement of the moving device K4560 and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 to be performed in the first to third combined movement patterns described above, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the displacement of the moving device K4560 flowing diagonally down to the right in front of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 in a blocked state. In addition, by changing the movements of the moving device K4560 and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 to be all symmetrical, it is also possible to execute a displacement of the moving device K4560 flowing diagonally down to the left.

Furthermore, if it is intended that the player will gain more benefits (for example, a higher chance of winning or more prize balls will be paid out) if the displacement direction of the moving device K4560 is changed midway (see Figs. 1819(b) and 1819(c)) compared to when the displacement of the moving device K4560 diagonally to the right continues to the right end (see Fig. 1819(a)), the player can be induced to follow the moving device K4560, which is displacing in a downward diagonal direction to the right, with his or her eyes, hoping that the displacement direction will change.

This allows the viewer to focus their gaze on the moving device K4560 while also improving their ability to focus their attention on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 that are located behind the view (view centered on the moving device K4560).

Note that, although Fig. 1819(a) to Fig. 1819(c) describe a case where the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 located at the rear of the moving device K4560 can be displaced, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a case may be configured where the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 located at a position away from the rear of the moving device K4560 are displaced.

For example, when the moving device K4560 is displaced from the second position from the top in FIG. 1819(b) to the third position from the top in FIG. 1819(b), an operation pattern may be configured in which the left plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are maintained in a blocked state, and the right plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to a standby state for performance.

In this case, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the left switching device K460 is maintained in a non-energized state (see FIG. 1805(c)). Furthermore, in this operation pattern, the right plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to a closed state before the moving device K4560 reaches the left-right center position (corresponding to the third position in FIG. 1819(a)), so that after the moving device K4560 reaches the left-right center position, it is slid downward and to the right in the same manner as in the first combined operation pattern.

This allows for a situation in which the direction of movement of the moving device K4560 does not change even if the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced, making it easier to avoid a game in which the player keeps the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in view but does not pay attention to the moving device K4560.

In addition, for example, when the moving device K4560 is displaced from the second position from the top in FIG. 1819(c) to the third position from the top in FIG. 1819(c), an operation pattern may be configured in which the right-side plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are maintained in a blocked state, and the left-side plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to a performance standby state.

In this case, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is kept de-energized (see FIG. 1805(c)). Therefore, in this operation pattern, after the moving device K4560 reaches the center position in the left-right direction, it slides in the lower right direction as in the first combined operation pattern.

This allows for a situation in which the direction of movement of the moving device K4560 does not change even if the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced, making it easier to avoid a game in which the player keeps the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in view but does not pay attention to the moving device K4560.

Note that in Figures 1819(b) and 1819(c), the second and third composite motion patterns are described as cases in which the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 that change from a blocked state to a performance standby state are on one side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a different composite motion pattern, in the second and third composite motion patterns, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be configured to be operable in a composite motion pattern in which both the left and right sides change from a blocked state to a performance standby state.

With this composite movement pattern, the position of the moving device K4560 at the timing when the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 change from the closed state to the performance standby state is not limited. For example, it may be positioned in the center of the left and right (see the third image in Fig. 1819(a)), or it may be positioned anywhere within the slide movement range.

In the case of this composite motion pattern, as long as the state of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 changes, the displacement direction of the moving device K4560 will change midway, regardless of the positioning of the moving device K4560, so it is possible to create a situation in which attention is more focused on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 than on the moving device K4560.

The plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 have a larger area when viewed from the front, so there is less stress when bringing them into view, and this reduces the burden on the player compared to when the player needs to follow the moving device K4560 with his or her eyes.

Note that each of the above-mentioned composite motion patterns is not limited to an independent control mode, and it is of course possible to combine parts of each composite motion pattern to create another composite motion pattern.

When each of the composite operation patterns described above is being executed, light may be emitted from the third pattern display device K81 toward the front side. In this case, light may be emitted from the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81, or light may be emitted according to the state of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

For example, light may not be emitted (or an inconspicuous red light may be emitted) in the areas covered by the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the closed state, and bright light (e.g., white light) may be emitted from the areas where the front side is no longer covered as the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced to a performance standby state.

That is, for example, in the third state of FIG. 1819(b), light may be projected forward in the left half of the third pattern display device K81, or in the third state of FIG. 1819(c), light may be projected forward in the right half of the third pattern display device K81.

Here, the moving device K4560 is illuminated by the light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81, thereby changing the visible appearance (e.g., color) of the moving device K4560. In particular, the area around the outer shape of the rotating decorative member K4578 is visible in the color of the light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81, improving the presentation effect of the rotating decorative member K4578.

The color of the light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81 does not affect the interior of the rotating decorative member K4578, but the manner in which the light is irradiated from the third pattern display device K81 may be designed, for example, taking into account how the display device K4580 appears.

For example, when red light is being emitted from the third pattern display device K81, by emitting red light from the display device K4580 as well, it can be made to appear as if the light from the third pattern display device K81 has passed through the inside of the rotating decorative member K4578.

In addition, for example, when white light is being irradiated from the third pattern display device K81, black (or silver) light can be irradiated from the display device K4580, and the electric decoration of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be lit with white light, thereby producing an effect that gives the player the impression that a black (or silver) sphere that stands out against the white background (light from the third pattern display device K81 and light from the rotating decorative member K4578) is moving diagonally downward.

In other words, by designing the color of the light irradiated from the third pattern display device K81 so that the moving device K4560 stands out more based on the visual appearance of the display device K4580, it is possible to further increase the attention to the moving device K4560 and improve the presentation effect of the moving device K4560.

In each of the composite movement patterns described above in Figures 1819(b) and 1819(c), after the moving device K4560 falls based on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 changing to a performance standby state, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be operated so that they change again to a closed state (for example, see the state in the second image in Figure 1819(b)) before the moving device K4560 returns to the position in the performance standby state.

In this case, depending on the arrangement of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, there is a difference between whether the light from the third pattern display device K81 side passes through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 and reaches the moving device K4560, or whether the light from the third pattern display device K81 side reaches the moving device K4560 without passing through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, and even if the moving device K4560 is arranged in the same position, its visual appearance changes. This can improve the presentation effect of the moving device K4560.

In addition, in each of the composite motion patterns described above in Figures 1819(b) and 1819(c), a mode may be adopted in which the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 change to a performance standby state and then return to a blocked state again, and variations (length or length) may be provided in the period until the blockage is restored.

In this case, regardless of the length of the period, the moving device K4560 may be displaced in the falling direction based on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 changing to a performance standby state, or if the period until the blocked state is returned to is shorter than a standard (e.g., a short period such as 0.2 seconds or 1 second), the inclined posture of the long device K540 may be maintained even if the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 change to a performance standby state, and the moving device K4560 may be configured to continue moving diagonally downward without falling.

This makes it more difficult to predict how the displacement of the moving device K4560 will be performed, compared to when there is a one-to-one correspondence between the operation of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 and the fall of the moving device K4560, thereby improving attention to the moving device K4560.

In the above embodiment, a wide range of light that illuminates the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is irradiated from the third pattern display device K81, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a linear band-like pattern parallel to the inclination of the long-length device K540 in a red color that is darker than the red color of the seal material attached to the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be displayed at a position slightly above or below the long-length device K540 without overlapping.

As a result, even after the left side of the long device K540 falls, the band-like pattern remains (visible through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831), allowing the player to continue to see the original movement path of the moving device K4560. This makes it easier for the player to avoid losing track of the timeline of the presentation (for example, the movement of the moving device K4560 to reach the position in the dropped position state), and reduces the burden on the player when playing.

Furthermore, when the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced, the display mode may be controlled so that this band-shaped pattern also displaces left and right in accordance with the displacement of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

In this case, if the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced to change to a closed state before the moving device K4560 falls, and the band-shaped patterns of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 and the moving device K4560 are positioned so as to begin to overlap when viewed from the front, the moving device K4560 and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be controlled to operate as if the band-shaped patterns interfere with (collide with) the moving device K4560.

For example, the moving device K4560 may be pushed by the moving end of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 that are moving inward to the left and right toward the closed state, accelerating the moving device K4560.

Alternatively, the moving speed of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be slowed down when the moving device K4560 and the band-shaped pattern begin to overlap in a front view, compared to when the moving device K4560 and the band-shaped pattern are separated. In this case, it can be visually recognized as if the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are receiving a load from the moving device K4560, and the movement resistance of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 is increasing.

Note that, although Fig. 1819(a) to Fig. 1819(c) describe a case where the inclination of the long-length device K540 is maintained in a position when the left end portion is supported by the switching device K460, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination of the long-length device K540 may be shifted slightly so that the movement direction of the moving device K4560 is not limited to a straight line direction but may also include a direction intersecting the straight line direction.

For example, the left rotating member K430 may be controlled to alternate between an intermediate support position (see FIG. 1765) and a position in which the rotating member K430 is rotated about 15 degrees clockwise from the intermediate support position. In this case, the left end of the long device K540 is displaced up and down, so that the inclination angle of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed during the sliding movement of the moving device K4560.

For example, the right-side rotating member K430 may be controlled to alternate between a first release position (see FIG. 1806(a)) and an intermediate support position (see FIG. 1806(b)) from the first release position. In this case, the right end of the long device K540 is displaced up and down, so that the inclination angle of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed during the sliding movement of the moving device K4560.

In this case, when the right-side rotating member K430 is in the intermediate support position, the positions of the left and right rotating members K430 are aligned, so that the long-length device K540 is in a horizontal position. In other words, the movement direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed between a downward inclination with respect to the horizontal direction and the horizontal direction.

For example, the left and right rotating members K430 may be operated together to act on the long-length device K540 from both sides. In this case, the variation in the movement direction of the moving device K4560 can be increased. The timing of the action on the long-length device K540 may be shifted by synchronizing the operation timing of the left and right rotating members K430, or one rotating member K430 may be operated while the other rotating member K430 is operating.

The rotation of the rotating member K430 may also be performed when the long device K540 is positioned in the dropped position (see the fourth image in FIG. 1819(b)). For example, from the state shown in the fourth image in FIG. 1819(b), the rotating members K430 on both the left and right sides may be moved to the intermediate support position (see FIG. 1806(b)), and then moved back to the first release position (see FIG. 1806(a)).

In this case, even if the second movable device K4701 is not positioned in the position in the lowered position state (see FIG. 1808(c)) but is positioned in the position in the performance standby state (see FIG. 1808(b)), the moving device K4560 moves away from above the second movable device K4701, so that the moving device K4560 can reach the lower right area while preventing the second movable device K4701 from impeding its movement.

In other words, a path for moving the moving device K4560 to reach the lower right area can be configured that is different from the above-mentioned path in which the moving device K4560 does not move in the upward direction after the long device K540 is positioned in the dropped position state.

In the above description, the moving direction of the moving device K4560 changes based on the rotational movement of the rotating member K430, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a rod-shaped obstacle protrudes from the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 (see FIG. 1795) that are arranged opposite the long-length device K540 toward the area (front side) where the long-length device K540 moves, and the obstacle acts to interfere with the moving device K4560 during sliding movement, thereby changing the moving direction of the moving device K4560.

That is, for example, if the first obstacle is located at a position where the moving device K4560 shown in the second image of FIG. 1819(b) abuts on the lower right side of the rotating decorative member K4578, when the moving device K4560 slides further to the lower right from the state shown in the second image of FIG. 1819(b), the first obstacle and the moving device K4560 interfere with each other, so the long device K540 is displaced upward to avoid the first obstacle. Then, when the first obstacle is passed to the right, the posture of the long device K540 is returned to the state shown in the second image of FIG. 1819(b) due to its own weight.

Alternatively, if you want to stabilize the change in posture of the long-length device K540, for example when the movement becomes unstable when returning due to its own weight, you can place a second obstacle part that produces an action similar to the first obstacle part described above in a position that abuts the moving device K4560 from the upper right side. This allows the second obstacle part to interfere with the moving device K4560, and the posture of the long-length device K540 can be reliably returned to the state in the second sheet of Figure 1819 (b) (original posture), so that the sliding movement direction of the moving device K4560 can be returned.

The above-mentioned first and second obstacles are not limited to those protruding from the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 (see FIG. 1795). For example, they may be provided so as to protrude toward the moving device K4560 from a plate-shaped part arranged in a layer in front of the moving device K4560. In this case, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 due to a collision with the moving device K4560, thereby improving the durability of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 and allowing the operation of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 to be smoother.

In this case, the shape protruding from the plate-like portion arranged in the layer in front of the moving device K4560 when viewed from the front may be a long protrusion shape extending in a direction intersecting (orthogonal or extending approximately vertically) the direction in which the moving device K4560 moves (a direction inclined relative to the left-right direction). In this case, the sliding direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed to a direction having a component in the front-to-back direction by the collision of the moving device K4560 with an obstacle, and a three-dimensional effect can be produced.

Similar obstacles may also be formed from the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 toward the moving device K4560. In this case, the arrangement of the obstacle protruding in the forward direction when viewed from the front and the arrangement of the obstacle protruding in the rearward direction when viewed from the front may overlap or may be misaligned. If they overlap, it becomes easier to correct the misalignment of the forward/backward position of the moving device K4560, and if there is a misalignment, it is possible to promote the forward/backward displacement of the moving device K4560.

Figure 1820 (a) and Figure 1820 (b) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010. In Figure 1820 (a), the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) in the performance standby state (see Figure 1740) is illustrated in solid lines, the outline KG4701 of the outer shape when the second movable device K4701 is in the raised position state (see Figure 1744) is illustrated in imaginary lines, and the first lower performance display KER471 is illustrated as a shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, converging line-like, radial) area displayed so as to surround a part of the periphery of the second movable device K4701 in the performance standby state in the display area of the third pattern display device K81.

In addition, in Figure 1820 (b), the second movable device K4701 in the raised position state (see Figure 1744) is shown in solid lines, and the second lower performance display KER472 is shown in a shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, converging line-like, radial) range displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 so as to surround a portion of the periphery of the second movable device K4701 in the raised position state.

A fourth example of performance control using the first lower performance display KER471 and the second performance display KRER472 will be described. In the fourth example of performance control, the first lower performance display KER471 and the second performance display KRER472 are displayed in response to the execution of driving the second movable device K4701.

The timing of the display of the first lower performance display KER471 and the second performance display KRER472 and the timing of the drive execution of the second movable device K4701 may be simultaneous or may be out of sync. For example, if the timing of the display of the first lower performance display KER471 and the second performance display KRER472 is earlier, the first lower performance display KER471 and the second performance display KRER472 are displayed and made visible to the player, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation that the second movable device K4701 may be operated.

In addition, in the fourth performance control example, the display of the first lower performance display KER471 and the second performance display KRER472 is switched in conjunction with the operation of the second movable device K4701. That is, when the second movable device K4701 is in a performance standby state, the first lower performance display KER471 is displayed (see FIG. 1820(a)), while when the second movable device K4701 is changed to a raised position state, the second lower performance display KER472 is displayed (see FIG. 1820(b)).

As a result, when the second movable device K4701 is operated, the moving target visually recognized by the player can be made to appear larger than the actual size of the second movable device K4701. This can increase the impact of the action presentation.

When an intermediate display having a shape corresponding to the external shape of the second movable device K4701 while it is in operation is configured to be displayable in a position between the first lower performance display KER471 and the second lower performance display KER472, the object displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 can be changed in the order of first lower performance display KER471, intermediate display, and second lower performance display KER472 in accordance with the movement of the second movable device K4701 from the performance standby state to the raised position state, so that the display in the vicinity of the second movable device K4701 can be visually perceived as moving together with the second movable device K4701.

Similarly, by changing the object to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 from the second lower performance display KER472 to the intermediate display to the first lower performance display KER471 in the order shown in accordance with the movement of the second movable device K4701 from the raised position state to the performance standby state, the display in the vicinity of the second movable device K4701 can be visually perceived as moving together with the second movable device K4701.

In addition, in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the layer on which the first lower performance display KER471 is displayed and the layer on which the second lower performance display KER472 is displayed may be the same, or may be different. For example, if the second lower performance display KER472 is configured to be displayed in a layer in front of the layer on which the first lower performance display KER471 is displayed, even if the second lower performance display KER472 is displayed while the first lower performance display KER471 is displayed, the first lower performance display KER471 is visually hidden by the second lower performance display KER472 (see FIG. 1820(b)), so that the overlapping of the displays does not result in a poor appearance. This simplifies the control of switching between the second lower performance display KER472 and the first lower performance display KER471.

In the fourth example of performance control, a case is described in which the first lower performance display KER471 and the second lower performance display KER472 are switched in accordance with the operation timing of the second movable device K4701, but the performance control is not necessarily limited to this, and various modes are exemplified.

For example, it may be possible to configure a situation in which the display of the second lower performance display KER472 begins while the second movable device K4701 is maintained in a performance standby state. In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation that the second movable device K4701 may begin to move toward an elevated position state, and the player's attention to the second movable device K4701 can be increased.

In this case, the transparency of the second lower performance display KER472 can be varied so that the lower the transparency (closer to the actual object), the more likely it is that the second movable device K4701 will begin to move toward the raised position state, thereby increasing the attention to the second lower performance display KER472.

In addition, for example, it may be possible to configure a situation in which the second lower performance display KER472 is maintained without disappearing after the second movable device K4701 changes from the raised position state to the performance standby state. In this case, the horizontal drop movement pattern of the first movable device K4401 (see Figures 1741 and 1803), which is impossible to execute when the second movable device K4701 is positioned in the raised position state due to interference between the components, can be executed while appearing as if the second movable device K4701 remains in the raised position state by maintaining the second lower performance display KER472.

This allows movement patterns that would be impossible to achieve between moving parts due to interference between their movement trajectories to be simulated using the display of the third pattern display device K81, thereby enhancing the impact of the presentation.

In the fourth example of performance control, the outlines of the first lower performance display KER471 and the second lower performance display KER472 are formed to have a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the second movable device K4701, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as an outline display that extends in a band shape along the inner circumference of the frame of the third pattern display device K81, including the range that includes the second movable device K4701.

In this case, the display may move from the second movable device K4701 to both the left and right sides so as to extend along the frame of the third pattern display device K81, and after merging, may be formed into a frame shape (ring). Also, when the display is formed into a frame shape (ring), additional displays may be formed so as to overlap and extend onto the frame shape (ring) display, the width of the frame shape (ring) display may be controlled to change, or the color or brightness of the frame shape (ring) display may be controlled to change in accordance with changes (movements, light emission, etc.) of the second movable device K4701.

In this case, the effect of the change in the second movable device K4701 can be caused to occur around the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the player does not see the second movable device K4701 and therefore does not notice the change in the second movable device K4701.

Figures 1821(a) to 1821(c), 1822(a) and 1822(b) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine K4010. In Figure 1821(a), the second movable device K4701 in the lowered position (see Figure 1741) is shown in solid lines, the first movable device K4401 is positioned in a performance standby state, and the first lower performance display KER471 and the first upper performance display KER451 in a shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, converging line-like, radial) range displayed so as to surround a portion of the periphery of the moving device K4560 in the performance standby state are shown in the display area of the third pattern display device K81.

Furthermore, in FIG. 1821(a), a bar indicating the time limit and a button member H181 are displayed in the center of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and a display effect is executed to encourage the operation of the button member H181 (see FIG. 1725).

A fifth performance control example that utilizes the first lower performance display KER471 and the first upper performance display KER451 will be described. In the fifth performance control example, the first lower performance display KER471 and the first upper performance display KER451 are displayed in positions that suggest movable members that may subsequently perform an operation. That is, the first upper performance display KER451 is displayed as a display that suggests the possibility of operation of the first movable device K4401, and the first lower performance display KER471 is displayed as a display that suggests the possibility of operation of the second movable device K4701.

The operation of the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 is executed in response to the player operating the button member H181 (see FIG. 1725). Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the button member H181 in the hope that the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 will operate, so that the player's attention at the timing of operating the button member H181 can be focused on a position to which the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 may move (for example, a position inside the display area of the third pattern display device K81).

Various control modes are exemplified for the case where the player does not operate the button member H181 (see FIG. 1725). For example, the operation of the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 may be executed after the operation waiting period ends, or the operation of the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 may be executed during the operation waiting period when the player has previously indicated his/her intention not to execute an operation (when automatic operation is enabled), or the operation of the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 may not be executed when the button member H181 is not operated.

Figure 1821 (b) illustrates the first post-operation notification mode in the fifth performance control example. In the first post-operation notification mode, after passing through the state illustrated in Figure 1821 (a), the first movable device K4401 is displaced to a position above the representative intermediate stopping position (see Figure 1804 (c)), the first upper performance display KER451 is erased, the second movable device K4701 is changed to an elevated position state, and the second lower performance display KER472 is displayed.

This draws the player's attention to the "M" pattern formed on the second movable device K4701. The "M" can be interpreted as the initial letter of "MAX," for example, and when combined with the "E" on the winning unit K200, it can be read as "MAX-Energy," suggesting to the player the possibility of making a large profit.

On the other hand, FIG. 1821(c) illustrates the second post-operation notification mode in the fifth performance control example. In the second post-operation notification mode, after passing through the state illustrated in FIG. 1821(a), the second movable device K4701 is displaced to a position in the performance standby state, the first lower performance display KER471 is erased, the first movable device K4401 is changed to the representative mid-stop position (see FIG. 1804(c)), and the second upper performance display KER452 is displayed in a shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, converging line-like, radial) range that surrounds a portion of the periphery of the movable device K4560 at the representative mid-stop position.

This draws the player's attention to the "P" displayed on the display device K4580 of the mobile device K4560. The "P" can be interpreted as the initial letter of "Petit," for example, and when combined with the "E" of the winning unit K200, it can be read as "Petit-Energy," suggesting to the player the possibility of a small profit.

By controlling the presentation according to the fifth presentation control example so that the profit obtained by the player differs depending on whether the presentation proceeds to the first post-operation notification mode or the second post-operation notification mode, the player's attention to the position to which the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 may move (for example, a position inside the display area of the third pattern display device K81) can be further improved, and the player's motivation to operate the button member H181 (see FIG. 1725) can be increased.

Figure 1822 (a) illustrates the third post-operation notification mode in the fifth performance control example. In the third post-operation notification mode, after passing through the state illustrated in Figure 1821 (a), the first movable device K4401 (corresponding to the first movable device K401 in each of the above embodiments) is changed to a dropped position state (see Figure 1741), the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is maintained in a lowered arrangement state (see Figure 1741), and the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 (corresponding to the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, and K831 in each of the above embodiments) are changed to a blocked state.

In this case, "SPME" is visible on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and can be read as "Special-MAX-Energy," suggesting to the player the possibility of obtaining a very large profit.

In the fifth example of the presentation control, the second movable device K4701 is set to be maintained in the lowered position only in the third post-operation notification mode. In response to this, for example, the direction of change of the shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, converging line-like, radial) display displayed by the first lower presentation display KER471 (see FIG. 1820(a)) is usually upward (rising direction), but in a situation where the third post-operation notification mode is expected, the direction of change of the display may be downward (for example, downward once in two times), so that a player who sees the first lower presentation display KER471 can have a sense of expectation that the presentation operation of the third post-operation notification mode may be executed even before the button member H181 (see FIG. 1725) is operated.

In FIG. 1822(b), the fourth post-operation notification mode in the fifth performance control example is illustrated. In the fourth post-operation notification mode, after passing through the state illustrated in FIG. 1821(a), the first movable device K4401 (corresponding to the first movable device K401 in each of the above embodiments) is displaced to a position above the representative intermediate stop position (see FIG. 1804(c)), the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is changed to the operation terminal state of the breakthrough rising operation pattern (see FIG. 1812), the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 (corresponding to the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, and K831 in each of the above embodiments) are changed to the interlocking switching state (see FIG. 1782), and the third pattern display device K81 displays a display that looks like a glass plate is broken.

By displaying in this manner, the player is notified that he or she has lost the lottery, and is also made to look as if the display surface K81s (see FIG. 1817) of the third pattern display device K81 has been shattered by the impact caused by the movement of the movable parts around the third pattern display device K81, surprising the player and increasing the player's concentration.

By controlling the presentation according to the fifth presentation control example so that the profit obtained by the player differs depending on whether the presentation progresses to the first post-operation notification mode, the second post-operation notification mode, the third post-operation notification mode, or the fourth post-operation notification mode, the player's attention to the inner position of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 can be further improved, and the player's motivation to operate the button member H181 (see FIG. 1725) can be increased.

The display manner in which the movement of the movable reels around the third pattern display device K81 and the display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 are related is not limited to the above. For example, a rubber-like member may be displayed on the third pattern display device K81, and the movable reels may extend forward of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and an animation may be displayed as if the rubber-like member is being bent (squeezed) by the movable reels. This allows the movable reels and the display to be viewed in a series.

Also, for example, a video may be displayed in which a spinning roulette is displayed on the third pattern display device K81, and the roulette stops as the movable device projects forward into the display area of the third pattern display device K81. This makes it possible to express a situation in which a load is being applied from the movable device to the roulette in the display area, allowing the player to visually recognize the movable device and the display in a continuous sequence.

Also, for example, when the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are moved from a position in the closed state to a position in the performance standby state, a human hand may be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, with the palm of the hand touching the inner end of the plate-shaped part K4811 from the inside left and right, and may be animated as moving in the same direction and at the same moving speed as the plate-shaped part K4811. This makes it possible to express a situation in which a load is being applied to the movable part (plate-shaped part K4811) from the display in the display area, allowing the player to visually recognize the movable part and the display in a continuous sequence.

Note that the third pattern display device K81 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 and irradiating light toward the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831. For example, an illumination board may be arranged so that LED light is irradiated toward the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831. The illumination board may be fixed so that it cannot be moved, or may be configured to be movable (for example, movable by being arranged on a movable part). It may also be configured so that light is irradiated toward the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 from a lamp-shaped light-emitting means, like a patrol lamp or warning light.

In addition, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are not limited to being arranged within the center frame K86. For example, they may be arranged on the front side (of the opening) of the base plate K60 of the game board K13 (see FIG. 1802) and configured to open and close the opening, or they may be configured to be able to change the background of the game area by opening and closing on the back side of the base plate K60. In either case, the presentation effect can be improved by changing the visual appearance of the area that is opened and closed.

The 109th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1823 to 1830. In each of the above embodiments, the game area into which the game balls flow is formed outside the center frame 86. However, in the 109th embodiment, the game balls can also flow down from a position inside the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1823 and 1824 are front views of a pachinko machine K5010 in the 109th embodiment. Figure 1823 illustrates a state in which the long-length device K5540 (corresponding to the long-length device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is in a first right-tilted position (see Figure 1746), and Figure 1824 illustrates a state in which the long-length device K5540 is in a second right-tilted position (see Figure 1797).

The long-length device K5540 has the illumination board K552 (see FIG. 1754) that was previously installed inside the long-length device K540 removed, and each component is made of a light-transmitting resin material, with the moving device K4560 arranged to be slidable.

In this case, when the long-length device K5540 appears inside the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front (see Figures 1823 and 1824), the third pattern display device K81 at the rear cannot be seen through the position of the moving device K4560 (the line of sight is blocked), but at the position of the long-length device K5540, the display by the third pattern display device K81 can be seen because the long-length device K5540 is transparent.

This allows the player to see the moving device K4560 as if it were floating, and allows the player to see the notification mode (light or display) from the third pattern display device K81 on all four sides of the moving device K4560, thereby increasing the variety of visual modes provided by the moving device K4560 and the third pattern display device K81.

The center frame K5086 has a left flow path K5086L formed to the left of the position (center position on the left and right, see FIG. 1766) of the moving device K4560 in the performance standby state, through which the game ball can flow down, and a right flow path K5086R formed to the right of the position of the moving device K4560 in the performance standby state, through which the game ball can flow down.

The left side flow path K5086L is a flow path structure in which at least the rear side is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a first flow path K5086a that receives the game ball at a position inside the center frame K5086, a second flow path K5086b that guides the game ball to the left from a branching position at the downstream end of the first flow path K5086a, a left side detection sensor K5086c that can detect the flow of the game ball down in the second flow path K5086b, a third flow path K5086d that guides the game ball to the right from a branching position at the downstream end of the first flow path K5086a, and a right side detection sensor K5086e that can detect the flow of the game ball down in the third flow path K5086d.

Of the game balls that flow down the left flow path K5086L, those that flow down the second flow path K5086b are discharged to the left of the center position in the left-right direction of the game area, in front of the base plate K5060 (corresponding to the base plate K60 in each of the above embodiments, see FIG. 1726), and are discharged from the game area through the general winning opening K63 or the outlet K71 (see FIG. 1726).

Of the game balls that flow down the left flow path K5086L, those that flow down the third flow path K5086d are discharged in front of the base plate K5060 (corresponding to the base plate K60 in each of the above embodiments, see FIG. 1726) above the first winning hole K64 (see FIG. 1726) located in the center of the game area in the left-right direction. The discharge hole of the third flow path K5086d is formed horizontally long enough to allow the discharge position of the game ball to vary from left to right, and the game balls discharged from the third flow path K5086d enter the first winning hole K64 or deviate to the left or right side of the first winning hole K64 and flow down to be discharged from the game area through the outlet K71 (see FIG. 1726).

The right flow path K5086R is a flow path structure in which at least the rear side is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes an receiving flow path K5086j that receives game balls at an inner position of the center frame K5086, a detection sensor K5086k that can detect the flow of game balls down the receiving flow path K5086j, a connecting flow path K5086l that is connected to the third flow path K5086d so that game balls that flow to the left from the branch position at the downstream end of the receiving flow path K5086j can be guided to the third flow path K5086d of the left flow path K5086L, and a right discharge flow path K5086m that discharges game balls that flow to the right from the branch position at the downstream end of the receiving flow path K5086j to the game area upstream of the through gate K67 (see Figure 1726).

Of the game balls that flow down the right-side flow path K5086R, those that flow down the connecting flow path K5086l enter the first winning hole K64, just like the game balls that flow down the third flow path K5086d of the left-side flow path K5086L described above, or flow down the left or right side of the first winning hole K64 and are discharged from the game area through the outlet K71 (see Figure 1726).

Of the game balls that flow down the right flow path K5086R, those that flow down the right discharge flow path K5086m may flow to the right of the third pattern display device K81 and enter the first specific winning hole K65a, the second winning hole K640, or the second specific winning hole K650a (see FIG. 1726), just like the game balls launched by the "right hit" described above. Also, if the ball does not enter any of the first specific winning hole K65a, the second winning hole K640, or the second specific winning hole K650a, it may be discharged from the game area through the outlet K71 (see FIG. 1726).

As long as a game ball enters the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R, depending on the internal distribution, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the first winning hole K64, so the player can be encouraged to use a ball launching method that causes the ball to enter the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R as a different ball launching method with the same purpose as "left hit", which causes the game ball to flow down to the left of the third pattern display device K81.

In this embodiment, an on-off valve K5086V that slides back and forth at regular intervals at the upstream ends of the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R to open and close the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R is provided. That is, when the on-off valve K5086V is in an open state, it is possible to allow game balls to enter the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R, but when the on-off valve K5086V is in a closed state, it is configured so that game balls cannot enter the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R.

The opening and closing operation pattern of the on-off valve K5086V may be a constant operation from power on, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the operation pattern may be a repeated operation in which the closed state is maintained for 10 seconds, then the valve is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the closed state is maintained again.

In addition, the time intervals between the closed states do not need to be the same, and a repeating operation pattern may be used in which the valve is closed for 10 seconds, and then the closed state immediately after the on-off valve K5086V is opened is maintained for 20 seconds, and then the closed state immediately after the on-off valve K5086V is opened is maintained for 30 seconds, and then the closed state immediately after the on-off valve K5086V is opened is maintained for 10 seconds.

In addition, the time interval during which the open state is maintained may be 0.5 seconds each time, or it may alternate between 0.5 seconds and 1.0 seconds, or the time interval during which the open state is maintained may be changed according to a certain pattern.

The configuration of the upstream side of the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R is not limited to this, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, in the game area upstream of the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R, multiple nails (not shown) may be used to adjust the number of game balls guided to the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R so that they are not excessive.

The player can change the ball launching method while checking whether it is easier to get the ball to enter the first winning port K64 by "shooting from the left" (whether the ratio of balls that enter is higher compared to the number of balls shot), or whether it is easier to get the ball to enter the first winning port K64 by shooting the ball toward the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R. This increases the variety of playing styles for the player, and allows them to select their preferred ball launching method.

Here, in a gaming situation where "left-handed hitting" is recommended, the player aims to win a jackpot by having the ball enter the first winning slot K64, so there is often no disadvantage caused by the game ball entering the left-side flow path K5086L or the right-side flow path K5086R.

On the other hand, in a game state where "right-hand hit" is recommended (time-saving, high probability, etc.), it is possible to allow the ball to enter the second winning slot K640, obtain a more favorable distribution in the lottery, and continue the favorable state (continue winning streak); however, if the ball enters the first winning slot K64 in this state, there is a possibility of obtaining a jackpot with an unfavorable distribution, and in some cases there is a risk that the favorable state will be interrupted. In other words, in a game state where "right-hand hit" is recommended (time-saving, high probability, etc.), allowing the game ball to enter the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Therefore, the ball launch strength during game states (such as during time-saving or special bonus) that recommend "hitting to the right" for the player can be maintained at its strongest, preventing the ball from entering the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R.

This makes it easier to avoid situations where the strength of the ball's launch varies depending on the player in game states where "right hit" is recommended (during time-saving mode, during special bonus mode, etc.), and makes it easier to realize gameplay with the expected flow pattern of the ball in the game area.

For example, even if the arrangement of the nails (not shown) upstream of the through gate K67 is designed to guide the ball to the through gate K67 easily when the ball is shot with the strongest shooting strength, if the player continues to shoot with about 80% shooting strength, the ball may not be guided to the through gate K67 very often, which can help to avoid dissatisfaction on the player's part.

In this embodiment, the rotating decorative member K4578 is configured to be able to rotate based on the game ball flowing down the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R, and even if the flow pattern of the ball is the same, the rotational behavior of the rotating decorative member K4578 is different if the flow position of the game ball relative to the rotating decorative member K4578 is different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 1823, when the long device K5540 is in the right first tilted position (see FIG. 1746) and the moving device K4560 is positioned at the right end of the movable range, the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate based on the passage of a game ball being detected by the left side detection sensor K5086c, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates counterclockwise based on the passage of a game ball being detected by the right side detection sensor K5086e, and the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise based on the passage of a game ball being detected by the detection sensor K5086k.

In other words, when a game ball flowing down the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R is sufficiently far away from the rotating decorative member K4578 (when it is viewed outside the outline of the rotating decorative member K4578), the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate based on the game ball flowing down. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down a position close to the rotating decorative member K4578 (when it is viewed inside the outline of the rotating decorative member K4578), the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates based on the game ball flowing down, and the direction of the rotational movement is set to a rotational direction corresponding to the direction in which the game ball flows down relative to the rotation axis of the rotating decorative member K4578.

As a result, the player can visually check the operating state of the rotating decorative member K4578 and determine whether or not a game ball is flowing down the left side flow path K5086L or the right side flow path K5086R, and the position to which the game ball is flowing down, without having to gaze at the entire (wide area) of the left side flow path K5086L or the right side flow path K5086R.

For example, as shown in FIG. 1824, when the long device K5540 is in the second right inclined position (see FIG. 1797) and the moving device K4560 is positioned at the right end of the movable range, the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate based on the passage of a game ball being detected by the left side detection sensor K5086c, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise based on the passage of a game ball being detected by the right side detection sensor K5086e, and the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate based on the passage of a game ball being detected by the detection sensor K5086k.

In other words, when a game ball flowing down the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R is sufficiently far away from the rotating decorative member K4578 (when it is viewed outside the outline of the rotating decorative member K4578), the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate based on the game ball flowing down. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down a position close to the rotating decorative member K4578 (when it is viewed inside the outline of the rotating decorative member K4578), the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates based on the game ball flowing down, and the direction of the rotational movement is set to a rotational direction corresponding to the direction in which the game ball flows down relative to the rotation axis of the rotating decorative member K4578.

As a result, the player can visually check the operating state of the rotating decorative member K4578 and determine whether or not a game ball is flowing down the left side flow path K5086L or the right side flow path K5086R, and the position to which the game ball is flowing down, without having to gaze at the entire (wide area) of the left side flow path K5086L or the right side flow path K5086R.

For example, when a "right-hand hit" game is played in the state shown in FIG. 1824, the rotational movement of the rotating decorative member K4578 occurs only when the game ball enters the left-side flow path K5086L, so a player who sees the rotational movement of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be informed that the launch strength of the game ball may be decreasing.

As described above, even if a game ball flowing down the same position is detected by the detection sensor K5086k, it is possible to configure a case in which the rotating decorative member K4578 is not rotated based on the detection by the detection sensor K5086k (see FIG. 1824) and a case in which the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the detection by the detection sensor K5086k (see FIG. 1823).

In other words, when the position of the game ball relative to the rotating decorative member K4578 is different, the relationship between the flow of the game ball and the manner of the rotational movement of the rotating decorative member K4578 is changed. Or, when the flow direction (inclination) of the game ball relative to the longitudinal direction of the long device K5540 arranged behind the flowing game ball is different, the relationship between the flow of the game ball and the manner of the rotational movement of the rotating decorative member K4578 is changed.

This allows the player to be induced to look at the rotating decorative member K4578 or the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R while being conscious of the placement of the rotating decorative member K4578, rather than just looking at the rotating decorative member K4578 randomly, so that the player's gaze can be moved to multiple locations rather than being concentrated in one place.

The manner of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 based on the detection of the passage of a game ball by the detection sensors K5086e, K5086k may be exemplified in various ways. For example, the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated at a constant speed based on the detection of the passage of a game ball by the detection sensors K5086e, K5086k, or the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be increased or decreased (accelerated if the rotation is in the same direction, decelerated if the rotation is in the opposite direction) when the detection sensors K5086e, K5086k detect the passage of a game ball after the rotating decorative member K4578 is already rotating.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 1823, when the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates in a clockwise direction based on the detection of the passage of a game ball by the detection sensor K5086k, if the passage of a game ball is detected by the detection sensor K5086k, the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 is increased and the rotating member K4578 rotates in a clockwise direction.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 1823, when the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates in a clockwise direction based on the detection of the passage of a game ball by the detection sensor K5086k, if the right-side detection sensor K5086e detects the passage of a game ball, the direction of rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is opposite, so the rotational speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 is decelerated and then the rotating member K4578 rotates in a counterclockwise direction.

Figure 1825 is a rear view of the game board K5013, and Figure 1826 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board K5013 taken along line MDCCCXXVI-MDCCXXVI in Figure 1825. Note that in Figure 1825, in order to facilitate understanding of the shape of the base plate K5060, illustrations of components such as the winning unit K200 (see Figure 1728) and discharge path components such as the gutter front member K91 (see Figure 1738) are omitted. Also, in Figure 1826, illustrations of the center frame K5086 are omitted.

The base plate K5060 reuses the shape of the base plate K60 described above in each of the above embodiments, while also reusing the shape of the external inclined portion K2060e and the inclined opening K2060w of the base plate K2060 described above in each of the above embodiments.

As shown in Figures 1825 and 1826, in the game board K5013, a plate-shaped light-guiding member K5150 is fixed to the rear side of the base plate K5060, and when the light-guiding member K5150 receives light from an end, the light is refracted toward the front side at an inner position of the light-guiding member K5150, allowing the player to see the shape of the light.

A light irradiation device K5100 is disposed inside the forming recesses K60a and K60b of the base plate K5060. That is, the light irradiation device K5100 is disposed in the first forming recess K60a and the second forming recess K60b so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate K5060 on the rear side of the area that forms the play area.

Like the above-mentioned light irradiation device K2100 (see Figures 1788 and 1789), the light irradiation device K5100 comprises an illumination board K2110 on which a plurality of light emitting means K2111 consisting of LEDs or the like are arranged, and an intermediate member K2120 which is a member to which the illumination board K2110 is fastened and which is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and fastened to the base plate K5060, and further comprises a plurality of second light emitting means K5112 consisting of LEDs or the like which are arranged on the rear side of the illumination board K2110 and can irradiate light in a direction along the rear side of the illumination board K2110.

The front-view external shape of the illumination board K2110 is designed to fit into the forming recesses K60a, K60b of the base plate K5060, and multiple light-emitting means K2111 are arranged at intervals along the external inclined portion K2060e that forms the outer edge of the play area. This light-emitting means K2111 is disposed on the front side of the illumination board K2110, and a second light-emitting means K5112 is disposed on the front-to-back opposite side of the light-emitting means K2111 (at a corresponding position in the front-to-back direction) across the illumination board K2110.

For convenience, the second light-emitting means K5112 and the light-emitting means K2111 are described as being arranged in a position where they overlap in the front-to-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The arrangement of the second light-emitting means K5112 may vary depending on the type of light presentation realized by the light-guiding member K5150.

The light-guiding member K5150 is formed to a size that covers the central opening of the base plate K5060 on which the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) is disposed, and has light-refracting portions K5151 that are cut out in various places to refract light.

The light emitted from the second light emitting means K5112 is configured to be received by the light guiding member K5150 from its end, and is guided through the inside of the light guiding member K5150 while being totally reflected. The guided light is refracted by the light refraction section K5151, so that the light changes direction and travels to the front side of the light guiding member K5150, reaching the player's eyes.

In other words, when the second light-emitting means K5112 is turned on, the player can visually recognize that the light refraction section K5151 is emitting light. Therefore, the second light-emitting means K5112 is positioned so that it fits into the formation recesses K60a and K60b when viewed from the front, while the light refraction section K5151 is formed over a wide area, allowing the player to visually recognize a large-shaped light.

The second light emitting means K5112 are arranged in a line along the external inclined portion K2060e, and depending on the design of the shape of the light refracting portion K5151, the player can see light of a complex shape.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device K5100 is disposed outside the rear area of the play area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060, so that it is possible to prevent the light irradiation device K5100 from reducing visibility behind the play area or blocking the line of sight. In other words, regardless of the presence or absence of the light irradiation device K5100, the player can easily see through the base plate K5060 to visually confirm the structure on the rear side of the base plate K5060 (for example, the operating unit K4300 (see FIG. 1795)).

In addition, if the light irradiation device K5100 is disposed inside the play area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060 as viewed from the front, extra space is required to place a concealing member (for example, a case member surrounding the illuminated board K2110 or a plate-shaped member with an embossed finish to reduce visibility) to prevent the player from directly viewing the illuminated board K2110, which may limit the space available for the presentation.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the light irradiation device K5100 is disposed outside the rear area of the play area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060, so there is little possibility that the player will be directed at the light irradiation device K5100 itself, and there is no need to purposely install a new concealing member. This makes it possible to secure space that can be used for presentations.

Here, the light irradiation unit that replaces the light irradiation device K5100 is positioned inside the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed from the front, and the light guide member K5150 is also positioned inside the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front, so that the light irradiation device K5100 does not block the line of sight at a position that overlaps with the play area, the positioning of the light refraction unit K5151 is limited to the inside of the center frame K5086. Therefore, for example, if the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1823) is larger than the center frame K5086, the positioning and shape of the light refraction unit K5151 will not reach the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81, which may reduce the presentation effect.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the light irradiation device K5100 is disposed outside the rear area of the play area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060, the size of the light guide member K5150 is not limited by the size of the center frame K5086. Therefore, even if the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1823) is larger than the size of the center frame K5086, the arrangement and shape of the light refraction section K5151 can reach the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81, thereby improving the presentation effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, the light-guiding member K5150 extends beyond the center frame K5086, so depending on the configuration of the light refraction section K5151, the player can see the light from the second light-emitting means K5112 outside the center frame K5086. Several examples are described below.

First, the set of second light-emitting means K5112 is divided. That is, as shown in FIG. 1825, the plurality of second light-emitting means K5112 are divided into a first range KG51, a second range KG52, a third range KG53, and a fourth range KG54 in the right-side light irradiation device K5100, and a fifth range KG55, a sixth range KG56, and a seventh range KG57 in the left-side light irradiation device K5100.

Light from each of the ranges KG51 to KG54 travels in a straight line along the light-guiding member K5150 in a lower left direction, and light from each of the ranges KG55 to KG57 travels in a lower right direction. However, the light-guiding member K5150 has linear cutouts K5155a to K5155d formed therein, which block the intersecting light from traveling.

The first cutout portion K5155a is formed along the light propagation direction (linear direction) on the left side of the propagation range of the light irradiated from the second range KG52, and the formation range is a length and position corresponding to the propagation range of the light irradiated from the sixth range KG56.

That is, the first cutout portion K5155a prevents light irradiated from the second range KG52 from leaking to the upper left side beyond the first cutout portion K5155a, and prevents light irradiated from the sixth range KG56 from passing through to the lower right side beyond the first cutout portion K5155a.

The second cutout portion K5155b is formed along the light propagation direction (linear direction) on the right side of the propagation range of the light irradiated from the fourth range KG54, and its formation range is from the end on the fourth range KG54 side to just before it reaches the propagation range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57.

That is, the second cutout portion K5155b prevents light irradiated from the third range KG53 from leaking to the upper left beyond the second cutout portion K5155b and prevents light irradiated from the fourth range KG54 from leaking to the lower right beyond the second cutout portion K5155b, while allowing light irradiated from the seventh range KG57 to proceed without being blocked.

The third cutout portion K5155c is formed along the light propagation direction (linear direction) on the right side of the propagation range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57, and its formation range is a length and position corresponding to the propagation range of the light irradiated from the third range KG53 from the end connected to the second cutout portion K5155b.

That is, the third cutout portion K5155c prevents light irradiated from the seventh range KG57 from leaking to the upper right side of the third cutout portion K5155c, and prevents light irradiated from the third range KG53 from passing to the lower left side of the third cutout portion K5155c.

The fourth cutout portion K5155d is formed along the light propagation direction (linear direction) on the left side of the propagation range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57, and its formation range is from the end on the seventh range KG57 side to just before it reaches the propagation range of the light irradiated from the fourth range KG54.

That is, the fourth cutout K5155d prevents light irradiated from the sixth range KG56 from leaking to the upper right side beyond the fourth cutout K5155d and prevents light irradiated from the seventh range KG57 from leaking to the lower left side beyond the fourth cutout K5155d, while allowing light irradiated from the fourth range KG54 to proceed without being blocked.

The light refraction portion K5151 of the light guide member K5150 has a plurality of refraction shape portions K5151a to K5151f formed in different shapes at different positions corresponding to the arrangement of the second light emitting means K5112.

The first refraction shape portion K5151a is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the first range KG51, and is formed as a concave arrow shape pointing diagonally downward to the left. The first refraction shape portion K5151a is also formed in the range inside and to the right of the center frame K5086 when viewed in the front-to-rear direction.

The second refraction shape portion K5151b is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the second range KG52, and is formed as a radial recess extending from the vicinity of the end of the second range KG52 in the lower left direction. The second refraction shape portion K5151b also includes a transverse portion K5151b1 formed across both the inside and outside of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed in the front-rear direction, and an extension portion K5151b2 formed on the extension line of the transverse portion K5151b1 on the opposite side of the transverse portion K5151b1 across the travel range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57.

In this way, the second refraction shape portion K5151b is not recessed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57, making it easier to prevent the second refraction shape portion K5151b from appearing shiny when light is irradiated from the seventh range KG57.

The third refraction shape portion K5151c is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the third range KG53, and is formed as a concave arrow shape pointing diagonally downward to the right. The third refraction shape portion K5151c is also formed in the range outside and to the right of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed in the front-to-rear direction.

The fourth refraction shape portion K5151d is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the fourth range KG54, and is recessed in a triangular shape with a vertex on the diagonally lower right side. The fourth refraction shape portion K5151d is also formed in the range inside and above the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed in the front-rear direction.

The fifth bent portion K5151e is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the fifth range KG55, and is formed as a concave arrow shape pointing diagonally downward to the right. The fifth folded portion K5151e is also formed in the range inside and to the left of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed in the front-to-rear direction.

The sixth refraction shape portion K5151f is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the sixth range KG56, and is formed as a concave arrow shape pointing diagonally downward to the left. The sixth refraction shape portion K5151f is also formed in the range outside and to the left of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed in the front-to-rear direction.

The seventh refraction shape portion K5151g is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57, and is recessed in a triangular shape with a vertex on the diagonally lower left side. The seventh refraction shape portion K5151g is also formed in the range inside and above the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed in the front-rear direction.

The above-mentioned configuration of the light-guiding member K5150 allows the player to visually perceive different shapes of light in response to differences in the illumination mode of the light from the light illumination device K5100. An example of the visual appearance of the light shape is described below.

Figure 1827 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. Figure 1827 illustrates the state in which the long device K5540 (corresponding to the long device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is in the first rightward tilted position (see Figure 1746), and also illustrates the first light performance mode. Note that in Figure 1827, the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R are omitted from illustration in order to make it easier to understand.

In the first light performance mode shown in FIG. 1827, a sixth rear display K81f in the shape of an arrow pointing in the upper right direction is displayed on the left side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. Furthermore, light is irradiated from the first range KG51 and the second range KG53 of the second light-emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1825), and is visually recognized as shining in the shape of the first refraction shape portion K5151a and the third refraction shape portion K5151c of the light-guiding member K5150 (see FIG. 1825).

Furthermore, the rotating decorative member K4578 of the moving device K4560 is rotated clockwise, and a fourth front display K4580d in the shape of an arrow pointing diagonally downward to the right is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 1827, each arrow shape can guide the gaze in a clockwise direction, starting from the lower end of the sixth rear display K81f, through the third bent shape portion K5151c, the fourth front display K4580d, and the first bent shape portion K5151a. This can encourage the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area in the direction of the gaze guidance.

In this way, according to this embodiment, not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the moving device K4560 and the first refractive shape portion K5151a of the light-guiding member K5150 arranged in front of the display area, and the third refractive shape portion K5151c formed outside the display area are illuminated at the same time, allowing the player to visually recognize them as a series of decorations.

In particular, the third bent shape portion K5151c allows the player to visually recognize the arrow shape that overlaps the game area, and therefore allows the player to accurately grasp the position at which the game ball should be launched and aimed, compared to when an arrow is displayed on the third pattern display device K81, whose display area fits inside the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed from the front.

Figure 1828 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. Figure 1828 shows the state in which the long device K5540 (corresponding to the long device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is retracted upward (standby state for performance), and also shows the second light performance mode.

In the second light performance mode shown in FIG. 1828, the third rear display K81c is displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. Furthermore, light is irradiated from the fifth range KG55 and the sixth range KG56 of the second light-emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1825), and is visually recognized as shining in the shape of the fifth refraction shape portion K5151e and the sixth refraction shape portion K5151f of the light-guiding member K5150 (see FIG. 1825).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 1828, each arrow shape can have the effect of guiding the player's ball shooting strength to stop the ball from being shot to the right side of the play area and to flow down the left side of the third pattern display device K81. This can encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the play area.

In this way, according to this embodiment, not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the fifth refractive shape portion K5151e of the light-guiding member K5150 arranged in front of the display area and the sixth refractive shape portion K5151f formed outside the display area are illuminated at the same time, allowing the player to visually recognize them as a series of decorations.

In particular, the sixth bent shape portion K5151f allows the player to visually recognize the arrow shape that overlaps the game area, and therefore allows the player to accurately grasp the position at which the game ball should be launched and aimed, compared to when an arrow is displayed on the third pattern display device K81, whose display area fits inside the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1823) when viewed from the front.

Figure 1829 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. Figure 1829 illustrates the state in which the long device K5540 (corresponding to the long device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is in the second rightward tilted position (see Figure 1824), and also illustrates the third light performance mode. Note that in Figure 1829, the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R are omitted from illustration to make it easier to understand.

In the third light performance mode shown in FIG. 1829, a fifth front display K4580e consisting of an exclamation mark is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580. Furthermore, light is irradiated from the second range KG52 of the second light-emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1825), and is visible as being illuminated in the shape of the second refraction shape portion K5151b of the light-guiding member K5150 (see FIG. 1825). Furthermore, the upper right lamp K940 is controlled to light up.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 1829, the second bent shape portion K5151b is seen to extend in an upper right direction through the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front, so the line formed by the second bent shape portion K5151b can guide the gaze of a player who focuses on the fifth front display K4580e in an upper right direction, thereby making the player aware that the upper right lamp K940 is lit.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by simultaneously illuminating not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the moving device K4560 arranged in front of the display area and the second refractive shape portion K5151b of the light-guiding member K5150 formed inside and outside the display area, the player can recognize them as a series of decorations, and the player's gaze can be guided outside the play area.

In particular, the second refraction shape portion K5151b allows the player to see light along a line-like shape even in a position overlapping the play area, so compared to when the player sees the display on the third pattern display device K81, whose display area fits inside the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front, the line created by the second refraction shape portion K5151b is not blocked by the play area, making it easier to guide the player's gaze to the upper right lamp K940 located outside the glass unit H16.

The relationship between the timing of display execution on the display device K4580 and the timing of light irradiation from the second range KG52 can be exemplified in various ways. For example, they may be simultaneous or there may be a time lag.

For example, by executing the fifth front display K4580e on the display device K4580 and then emitting light from the second range KG52, the player's gaze can be directed to the display area of the display device K4580 and then projected onto the second refraction shape portion K5151b. As a result, after the display by the display device K4580 and the shape of the light in the second refraction shape portion K5151b are produced, a series of visual patterns including the upper right lamp K940 are formed, while during this formation process, the player's gaze can be effectively guided to the upper right lamp K940.

Figure 1830 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. Figure 1830 shows the state in which the long device K5540 (corresponding to the long device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is retracted upward (standby state for performance), and also shows the fourth light performance mode.

In the fourth light performance mode shown in FIG. 1830, a seventh rear display K81g consisting of the comment "If it lights up, it's an oven" is displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. Furthermore, light is irradiated from the fourth range KG54 and the seventh range KG57 of the second light-emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1825), and is visible as being illuminated in the shape of the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g of the light-guiding member K5150 (see FIG. 1825).

The LEDs in the fourth range KG54 and the seventh range KG57 of the second light-emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1825) are controlled to light up when the opening/closing valve K5086V (see FIG. 1823) is open. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1830, if the player can see the light of the fourth bending shape portion K5151d and the seventh bending shape portion K5151g, the player can grasp the timing at which the game ball can enter the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R (see FIG. 1823) even if it is difficult to see the change in the state of the opening/closing valve K5086V. This provides the player with a game mode in which the ball can be launched by paying attention to the way the fourth bending shape portion K5151d and the seventh bending shape portion K5151g are illuminated.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by controlling the illumination of not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g, which are arranged in front of the display area and formed outside the display area, the player can visually recognize them as a series of decorations.

In particular, since the fourth bent shape portion K5151d and the seventh bent shape portion K5151g are fixed to the rear side of the base plate K5060 (see FIG. 1826), they are closer to the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R (see FIG. 1823) than the third pattern display device K81 (closer both in the front-to-back direction and in the direction intersecting the front-to-back direction).

Therefore, the player can be prompted to focus on the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g, and when the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g light up, to launch the ball toward the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g. This makes it less likely for the player to feel uncomfortable compared to when the location of attention and the location aimed at by the launched ball are different.

The 110th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1831 and 1832. In each of the above embodiments, a large design K221a or a small design K221b is applied to the decorative cover K220 arranged on the front side of the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a. In the 110th embodiment, however, the front side of the path from the through gate K67 to the first specific winning port K65a is decorated. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1831 is a front view of the game board K5013 in the 110th embodiment. As shown in Figure 1831, the game board K5013 is provided with a second winning unit K5270 that forms a flow path to the first specific winning port K65a downstream of the through gate K67.

The second winning unit K5270 is configured to distribute game balls that flow downstream of the through gate K67 to the first specific winning port K65a or a winning unit K200 further downstream.

The second winning unit K5270 includes a flow path component K5271 that forms a flow path for the game ball and is fixed to the base plate K60, and a decorative cover K5280 that is fixed to the front side of the flow path component K5271 and forms the front part of the flow path together with the flow path component K5270.

The flow path component K5271 and the decorative cover K5280 are made of a light-transmitting resin material, and light is emitted from the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1747) located on the rear side to brighten the flow path component K5271 and the decorative cover K5280, creating a light effect.

Figure 1832(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board K5013 in the MDCCCXXXIIa portion of Figure 1831, and Figure 1832(b) is a partially enlarged front view of Figure 1832(a). In Figure 1832(b), the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c of each forming portion K5282, K5284 are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 1832(a), on the front side of the flow path for the game ball formed by the flow path component K5271, the decorative cover K5280 is patterned with symbols (in this embodiment, symbols such as "A" and "B") that can be seen, thereby improving the presentation of the game ball as it flows down the stream. This will be described in detail below.

The flow path component K5271 is provided with a first inclined portion K5272 that is arranged on the left and right sides of the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1831) and inclines downward to the right so that game balls that flow downstream of the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1831) land, a vertical component K5273 that extends vertically to allow game balls that reach the downstream end of the first inclined portion K5272 to flow downward, and a second inclined portion K5274 that inclines downward to the left so that game balls that reach the downstream end of the vertical component K5273 land and then flow downward to the left.

In other words, downstream of the through gate K67, a bypass flow path is formed by the flow path component K5271, which causes the game ball to detour to the right and flow down, so that the period during which the game ball is visible through the decorative cover K5280 is longer and the range over which the game ball is visible is wider than when the game ball falls vertically downward.

The decorative cover K5280 has a sticker made of a light-transmitting resin material attached to the front side, and the sticker has a pattern printed thereon, which includes a first contour portion K5281 forming the symbol "A", a first forming portion K5282 formed inside the first contour portion K5281, a second contour portion K5283 forming the symbol "B", a second forming portion K5284 formed inside the second contour portion K5283, a third contour portion K5285 forming the symbol "!!", and a third forming portion K5286 formed inside the third contour portion K5285, so that a series of decorations such as "AB", "A!!", "B!!" or "AB!!" can be visually recognized.

It is also possible to provide part of the flow path structure on the decorative cover K5280 side, but in this embodiment, the decorative cover K5280 is configured as a simple plate member. This allows for a change in decoration (for example, changing "AB" to "CD" or, if "AB" is a number, changing it to another number) to be handled by simply replacing the decorative cover K5280 with a decorative cover K5280 on which a different decoration is formed, thereby reducing the effort required to change the decoration.

The choice of symbols to be viewed in a series may be left to the player, but for example, a configuration may be made in which light is shone on a specific symbol (set of symbols) and not on other symbols, making it easier to view the specific symbols in a series. In this case, it may be possible to make it possible to view symbols different from "A" and "B" by shining light on parts rather than the entirety of "A" and "B," or at the same time, light may be shone on "!!" to make it visible as a series of decorations.

In this embodiment, the first contour portion K5281, the second contour portion K5283, and the third contour portion K5285 are black and formed to have low transparency, while the first forming portion K5282, the second forming portion K5284, and the third forming portion K5286 are yellow and formed to have higher light transmission than the first contour portion K5281, the second contour portion K5283, and the third contour portion K5285.

The width of the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 is made shorter than the diameter of the sphere. This prevents a situation in which, when a sphere flows down the back side of the decorative cover K5280 and is positioned behind the first contour portion K5281 or the second contour portion K5283, the sphere is entirely inside the first contour portion K5281 or the second contour portion K5283 when viewed from the front, resulting in extremely poor visibility of the sphere.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 are arranged next to each other, as long as there is even a small gap between the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283, even if the ball is located at the first flow-down position KPD51 behind it, the ball will be entirely inside the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 when viewed from the front, and this will prevent the visibility of the ball from becoming extremely poor.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the width of the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 is shorter than the radius of the sphere. As a result, for example, when the second contour portion K5283 is positioned without a gap between it and the first contour portion K5281, even if the sphere is positioned at the second downstream position KPD52 behind it, the sphere will be entirely inside the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 when viewed from the front, and this will prevent the visibility of the sphere from becoming extremely poor.

The pattern formed by the third contour portion K5285 and the third forming portion K5286 is positioned away from the flow path formed by the flow path component K5271. Therefore, there is a high degree of freedom in design, since the third contour portion K5285 and the third forming portion K5286 cannot hide the ball through the decorative cover K5280. In fact, in this embodiment, the third contour portion K5285 is configured so that its left-right dimension is longer than the diameter of the ball, improving decorativeness.

As a result of the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 1832(a), the balls are configured to flow downstream of the first contour portion K5281, the first forming portion K5282, the second contour portion K5283, and the second forming portion K5284. This makes it more difficult to tell whether or not a ball is passing through the flow path on the rear side compared to when viewed through a colorless, transparent plate, and also makes it possible to highlight the pattern printed on the sticker of the decorative cover K5280, making the decorative cover K5280 stand out.

In addition, when a ball actually passes through the back side of the decorative cover K5280, the transparency of the ball as viewed through the decorative cover K5280 alternates between being easily transparent and being difficult to see through, which can cause the appearance of the ball to change over a long period of time and improve the presentation.

Furthermore, by projecting the shadow of the ball onto the decorative cover K5280, it becomes easier to avoid the player losing sight of the ball flowing down the back side of the decorative cover K5280. By superimposing the shadow of the ball on each of the contour portions K5281, K5283 and each of the forming portions K5282, K5284, the player can see a pattern that is different from the situation when the ball is not flowing down.

The flow path formed by the flow path component K5271 is a roughly U-shaped flow path that detours, and at each position where the ball flows down in the left-right and up-down directions, the ball crosses the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283. In other words, even when a single game ball flows down, it is possible to create multiple changes between easy and difficult to see through, making it easier to improve the presentation compared to when multiple balls flow down and the appearance of the ball changes repeatedly.

When white light is emitted from the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1747) located on the rear side, the flow path component K5271 and the decorative cover K5280 are illuminated. On the other hand, when a sphere flows down the flow path formed by the flow path component K5271, the shadow of the sphere is projected onto the decorative cover K5280, changing the appearance of the pattern formed on the decorative cover K5280.

First, when the ball is not flowing down, the difference in color between the first outline portion K5281 and the second outline portion K5283 and the first formation portion K5282 and the second formation portion K5284 is large, so the "AB" symbol is clearly visible. This "AB" symbol stands for "Advance Base (advantageous state)," and by making this "AB" symbol brightly visible, it is possible to inform the player that the state is more advantageous than the normal state.

On the other hand, when the ball is flowing down, the difference in color between the ball's shadow and the first and second contour portions K5281 and K5283 is small, making it difficult to distinguish between the ball's shadow and the first and second contour portions K5281 and K5283, and the first and second forming portions K5282 and K5284 appear to be hollowed out by spherical shadows. By visually recognizing this hollowing out, the player can understand that the ball is flowing down.

The first forming part K5282 and the second forming part K5284 have change areas K5282b, K5284b that can be visually recognized as having a spherical shadow wormhole created by the ball flowing downstream behind them, and non-change areas K5282c, K5284c that do not overlap with the ball's flow path, so the ball will not flow downstream behind them in the first place and no spherical shadow wormholes can be created.

While the non-changing areas K5282c and K5284c are areas that form part of the symbol "AB" described above, they are also areas that form the symbol "HK" as shown in FIG. 1832(b). This symbol "HK" stands for "HoleKeep", and by making this symbol "HK" visible brightly, it is possible to inform the player that, for example, the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1831) on the downstream side is open and ready for a ball to enter.

As described above, no ball shadows are cast on the non-changing areas K5282c and K5284c, making it easier to view the non-changing areas K5282c and K5284c in their entirety (without wormholes) regardless of the spacing between the multiple balls flowing down.

Here, while the ball is flowing down the second inclined portion K5274, it is already visible as if a spherical shadow had been worm-eaten on the first forming portion K5282 and the second forming portion K5284, and in this situation, the ball may flow down the first inclined portion K5272. In other words, when a ball flows down the rear position of the decorative cover K5280, whether there is one ball or multiple balls, it is visible as if a spherical shadow had been worm-eaten on the first forming portion K5282 and the second forming portion K5284, and ultimately it may be difficult to determine how many balls are flowing down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a non-transparent forming portion K5282a is formed at the lower end of the first forming portion K5282. The non-transparent forming portion K5282a is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, is non-transparent (low transparency), and is white. The color relationship is such that it is difficult to distinguish from the color of the adjacent first forming portion K5282 (yellow in this embodiment), and the non-transparent forming portion K5282a is difficult for a player to recognize when the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1747) located on the rear side is turned off or when it is illuminated by white light from the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1747) located on the rear side.

On the other hand, when illuminated by white light from the illuminated board K405 (see FIG. 1747) located on the rear side, if a game ball is placed behind the non-transparent forming portion K5282a, the shadow of the ball will be projected around the non-transparent forming portion K5282a. In this case, since the shadow of the ball is black compared to the color of the non-transparent forming portion K5282a (white in this embodiment), the colors are easily distinguished, making the non-transparent forming portion K5282a easier for the player to recognize. In other words, by counting the number of times the player recognizes the non-transparent forming portion K5282a, the player can accurately count the number of game balls that have flowed down the rear of the decorative cover K5280.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, the outline portions K5281, K5283 are formed with the same width, and the forming portions K5282, K5284 are formed with the same width, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The outline portions K5281, K5283 may be formed with different widths, the forming portions K5282, K5284 may be formed with different widths, or the widths may be designed to vary from one area to another.

Although the case where each of the contour portions K5281, K5283 is wider than each of the forming portions K5282, K5284 has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pattern may be formed so that each of the forming portions K5282, K5284 is wider than each of the contour portions K5281, K5283. In this case, each of the contour portions K5281, K5283 may have a gap with the adjacent portion, regardless of whether it is inside or outside, or may be configured so that the gap is filled to exclude the configuration between each of the contour portions K5281, K5283.

In the above embodiments, the symbol "AB" is formed on the decorative cover K5280, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a spreading shape such as a "wave pattern," "ripple," "star shape," or "lightning bolt shape."

In the above embodiments, the flow path formed on the rear side of the decorative cover K5280 is formed forward of the front side of the base plate K60, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pattern may be formed in front of the flow path formed behind the front side of the base plate K60.

That is, for example, a pattern may be formed on the gutter front member K91 (see FIG. 1738) that constitutes the gutter through which the balls flow. In this case, the balls can pass through either the back side of the pattern or the front side of the pattern, which increases the variety of changes in the way the pattern can be seen.

In the above embodiments, the difference in transparency between each of the contour portions K5281, K5283 and each of the forming portions K5282, K5284 is realized by the difference in color (black can block more colors of light than yellow as a light-blocking filter), but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the thickness of each contour portion K5281, K5283 may be made thicker than the thickness of each forming portion K5282, K5284, so that each contour portion K5281, K5283 is less likely to transmit light than each forming portion K5282, K5284. In this case, even if the color of each contour portion K5281, K5283 and each forming portion K5282, K5284 is the same, a difference in transmittance can be created because the thicker portion is more likely to absorb light.

In this case, each contour portion K5281, K5283 is formed to protrude in the front-rear direction from each forming portion K5282, K5284, but the forming direction may be the front side, the rear side, or both the front and rear. If it is formed on the side of the area where the ball flows down, it can affect the direction of the ball flowing down, and conversely, if it is formed on the side opposite the area where the ball flows down, it will not be scraped off by collision with the ball, so the difference in permeability between each contour portion K5281, K5283 and each forming portion K5282, K5284 can be maintained for a long period of time.

The thickness of the area (colorless and transparent area) on the opposite side of each contour portion K5281, K5283 from each forming portion K5282, K5284 may be the same as each forming portion K5282, K5284, or may be thinner than each forming portion K5282, K5284. Being thinner than each forming portion K5282, K5284 can make it easier to increase attention to the area inside each contour portion K5281, K5283.

In the above embodiments, a case has been described in which white light is emitted from the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1747) arranged on the rear side of the decorative cover K5280 to illuminate the decorative cover K5280, but an example of this variation will be described.

For example, to encourage right-hand play, white light may be emitted from the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1747) during a jackpot play or during time-saving play, while in a normal state where right-hand play is not encouraged, the illumination board K405 may be turned off and the "AB" symbol may be darkened to make it difficult to see.

In this case, compared to when light is constantly being irradiated from the illumination board K405 (see Fig. 1747), it is easier to avoid a situation in which a player sees the "AB" symbol on the decorative cover K5280, mistakenly assumes that he or she is in an advantageous position, and erroneously plays with a right-hand hit.

Also, for example, a separate LED may be prepared to illuminate the changed areas K5282b and K5284b, and a separate LED to illuminate the non-changed areas K5282c and K5284c. In this case, in addition to the situation where the entire "AB" symbol is illuminated, depending on the lighting pattern of the LED, it is possible to create a situation where only the changed areas K5282b and K5284b are illuminated, or a situation where only the non-changed areas K5282c and K5284c are illuminated.

In this case, for example, during the period when the downstream first specific winning port K65a (or the second winning port K640, the second specific winning port K650a, see FIG. 1831) is open, the LED that illuminates only the changed areas K5282b, K5284b may be turned off, and the LED that illuminates only the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c may be turned on. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the "HK" formed by the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c, and allows the player to easily understand that it is time to launch the ball toward the first specific winning port K65a (or the second winning port K640, the second specific winning port K650a, see FIG. 1831).

In addition, for example, the color of light is not limited to white, and colored light may be emitted, the color of light emitted may be different for each symbol, or the emitted light may be controlled so that the colors change in sequence (for example, in the seven colors of the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, orchid, purple)).

In addition, for example, the light irradiation mode (timing) may be such that multiple LEDs are lit simultaneously to simultaneously illuminate the entire "AB" symbol on the cosmetic cover K5280, or the timing of lighting multiple LEDs may be staggered to illuminate from left to right, taking into account the order in which the symbols are to be read.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1833 to 1936, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") H10 will be described as the 111th embodiment.

Figure 1833 is a front view of a pachinko machine H10 in the 111th embodiment, Figure 1834 is a rear view of the pachinko machine H10, Figure 1835 is a front oblique view of the pachinko machine H10 showing the inner frame H12 in an open (deployed) state relative to the outer frame H11, and Figure 1836 is a front oblique view of the pachinko machine H10 showing the back pack unit H94 in an open (deployed) state relative to the inner frame H12 with the inner frame H12 open relative to the outer frame H11. 1837 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine H10 with the inner frame H12 closed relative to the outer frame H11 and the front frame H14 open (deployed), FIG. 1838 is a front view of the pachinko machine H10 with the front frame H14 removed, FIG. 1839 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board H13 and the inner frame H12, FIG. 1840 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame H14, and FIG. 1841 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame H14. In FIG. 1838, the rear opening H172 for sending the ball from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the ball launch unit H112a is shown by a two-dot chain line.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side for the pachinko machine H10 in the state shown in FIG. 1833. Also, in the pachinko machine H10 in the state shown in FIG. 1833, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see FIG. 1833, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine H10, respectively.

In addition, unless otherwise specified, the player playing the pachinko machine H10 will be described as being positioned in front of the pachinko machine H10 (in the direction of arrow F) and facing the rear side of the pachinko machine H10 (in the direction of arrow B) (facing the front side of the pachinko machine H10).

As shown in Figures 1833 to 1841, the pachinko machine H10 mainly comprises an outer frame H11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, an inner frame H12 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame H11 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame H11, and a front frame H14 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame H12 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the inner frame H12.

Metal hinges H18 are attached to the outer frame H11 at two locations, top and bottom (arrows U-D direction) on the left side (arrow L direction) when viewed from the front (see Figure 1833), to support the inner frame H12. The inner frame H12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed toward the front side (arrow F direction) together with the front frame H14, with the side where the hinge H18 is installed serving as the axis for opening and closing.

The pachinko machine H10 is installed in the amusement center by attaching and fixing the outer frame H11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame H11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine H10, and the amusement center may be configured with the outer frame H11 or a component having the same inner shape as the outer frame H11 and having the inner frame H12 support structure (hinge H18, etc.) and locking structure of the outer frame H11.

The outer frame H11 is formed into a frame shape by combining an upper plate H11a arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side), a lower plate H11b arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side), and a left plate H11c and a right plate H11d that vertically connect the left and right ends (arrow L-R directions) of the upper plate H11a and the lower plate H11b.

The outer frame H11 is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of a metal material such as aluminum or a resin material such as plastic, or may be formed by combining members (upper plate H11a, lower plate H11b, left plate H11c, right plate H11d) made of wood, metal, or resin materials.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hinge H18 is attached to the left side (arrow L direction) of the outer frame H11 when viewed from the front, and the right side (arrow R direction) of the inner frame H12 when viewed from the front can be opened and closed toward the front (arrow F direction) relative to the outer frame H11; however, the hinge H18 may be attached to the right side of the outer frame H11 when viewed from the front, and the left side of the inner frame H12 when viewed from the front can be opened and closed toward the front relative to the outer frame H11, or the hinge H18 may be attached to both the left and right (arrow L-R directions) of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the outer frame H11 when viewed from the front, and the upper side (arrow U direction) of the inner frame H12 when viewed from the front can be opened and closed toward the front relative to the outer frame H11.

The inner frame H12 is formed mainly by a frame forming unit H12a formed in a rectangular shape with an outline almost identical to that of the outer frame H11, and a back pack unit H94 rotatably supported on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the frame forming unit H12a, and the back pack unit H94 is rotatable backwards with the left side (arrow L direction side) as viewed from the front as the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side (arrow R direction side) as the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip end side) (see Figure 1836).

The inner frame H12 is formed into a roughly box-like shape by the frame forming unit H12a and the back pack unit H94, with the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) open, and a game board H13 (see Figures 1838 and 1839) with numerous nails and winning holes H63, H64, etc. is arranged inside the inner frame H12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of this game board H13.

The frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 is provided with a left end support part H12a1 for supporting the left end of the game board H13 at the top and bottom corners of the inner surface on the left side (arrow L side), and a board surface support device H12a2 for supporting the right end of the game board H13 at the top and bottom corners of the inner surface on the right side (arrow R side). The game board H13 is fixed to the inside of the inner frame H12 by inserting the left end of the base plate H60 into the left end support part H12a1 and pushing it into the back side (arrow B side) of the inner frame H12, and then operating the board surface support device H12a2 so that the board surface support device H12a2 engages with the front of the base plate H60 (supports the front of the base plate H60).

The frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 is mainly formed with a ball launching unit H112a (see FIG. 1838) that launches balls into the front area (play area) of the game board H13, and a dish passage forming member H160 (see FIG. 1838) that sends balls to the front frame H14 (upper and lower dish units H15).

Furthermore, metal hinges H19 are attached to the frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front, to support the front frame H14, and the front frame H14 is supported so that it can be opened and closed toward the front side (arrow F direction side) with the side where the hinge H19 is provided as the axis of opening and closing (see Figure 1837). The locking of the inner frame H12 and the locking of the front frame H14 are each released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole H21 of the cylinder lock H20 arranged in the frame forming unit H12a and performing a specified operation. The keyhole H21 of the cylinder lock H20 is configured to be vibrated or movable, and is also configured to be displaceable.

The hinge H19 may be used to unlock the inner frame H12 and the front frame H14, not by inserting a dedicated key into the cylinder lock H20, but by operating an operation unit disposed on the front frame H14, such as the operation unit H180, the function adjustment operation unit H190, the operation handle H51, the ball removal lever H52, the ball discharge lever H54, or the ball lending operation unit H40, which will be described later. After opening the inner frame H12 or the front frame H14, the operation unit H180, the function adjustment operation unit H190, the operation handle H51, the ball removal lever H52, the ball discharge lever H54, or the ball lending operation unit H40, which will be described later, may be operated from the inside of the opened frame to release the engagement of a specific member (for example, the decorative panels of the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right decorative unit H14c) and remove the specific member.

The ball launching unit H112a is formed to be capable of receiving balls sent one by one at a predetermined timing from the upper tray H17 via the launch position ball sending unit H170, and is mainly provided with a launch rail H112a1 extending in the direction of sending the ball to the game board H13 (inner rail H61 and outer rail H62), a rotating body H112a2 rotatably supported on a shaft and formed so that it can rotate and come into contact with the ball sent onto the launch rail H112a1, and a drive motor H850 (see FIG. 1903) for rotating the rotating body H112a2.

That is, the ball launching unit H112a is configured to be able to launch a game ball by displacing the rotating body H112a2, which is configured to be displaceable. Note that the rotating body H112a2 is configured to be able to be driven or operated.

The ball is launched (thrown) from the ball launching unit H112a to the upper side (arrow U direction) of the game board H13 by rotating the rotating body H112a2 after the ball is launched onto the launching rail H112a1, and colliding the rotating body H112a2 with the ball that has been launched onto the launching rail H112a1.

In this embodiment, the ball is launched (thrown) from the ball launching unit H112a by the rotating rotor H112a2, but the structure for launching the ball is not limited to a rotating member (rotor H112a2). For example, a structure may be provided that includes a slider that can slide in the direction in which the ball is launched, and a solenoid that slides and displaces the slider, and the ball is launched (thrown) by displacing the slider by exciting the solenoid and colliding with the ball.

The drive motor H850 is configured to be capable of vibrating or moving. In other words, the drive motor H850 is configured to be capable of displacement. This makes it possible to rotate the rotating body H112a2 and launch the game ball.

The ball launching unit H112a is not limited to being disposed in the inner frame H12, but can also be disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate H60 (on the game board H13) as a performance device for the pachinko machine H10. For example, a ball can be sent from an opening in the center frame H86 or the base plate H60 onto a launch rail H112a1 disposed on the rear side of the base plate H60, and the ball can be launched by the rotating body H112a2 so that it passes the front side of the third pattern display device H81.

As shown in FIG. 1838, the dish passage forming member H160 has a main body side upper dish passage section H161 and a main body side lower dish passage section H162. The main body side upper dish passage section H161 and the main body side lower dish passage section H162 are open toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) so that the end on the rear side (arrow B direction side) can communicate with the through hole penetrating the inner frame H12 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and form a curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees inside (changing from the front-to-rear direction to the up-to-down direction) so that the end on the front side (arrow F direction side) is open toward the bottom (arrow D direction). In this configuration, the balls dispensed from the dispensing device H133 pass through the through hole of the inner frame H12, enter the dish passage forming member H160 from the end on the rear side of the dish passage forming member H160, and are discharged from the end on the front side.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1838, a shutter H163 is provided at the lower part of the dish passage forming member H160 to restrict the outflow of balls from the upper dish passage part H161 on the main body side and the lower dish passage part H162 on the main body side. The shutter H163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position in which the outlet part of both passages is narrowed to block the outflow of balls, and a permitting position in which the outflow of balls is permitted. The shutter H163 is disposed in the permitting position when the front frame H14 is closed relative to the inner frame H12, and is disposed in the blocking position when the front frame H14 is opened relative to the inner frame H12 (the state shown in FIG. 1837). This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front frame H14 is opened while balls are stored in the upper dish passage part H161 on the main body side or the lower dish passage part H162 on the main body side.

The front frame H14 is mainly composed of a main body frame H14d formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape using metal plates, an upper decorative unit H14a arranged on the main body frame H14d and arranged on the front of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the main body frame H14d, a left decorative unit H14b and a right decorative unit H14c extending downward (arrow D direction side) from both the left and right sides (arrow L-R directions) of the upper decorative unit H14a, an upper and lower plate unit H15 covering the front of the lower side of the main body frame H14d, a passage forming unit H140 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the upper and lower plate unit H15 via the main body frame H14d, and a launch position ball throwing unit H170 arranged on the back side of the passage forming unit H140, and is rotatably attached to the inner frame H12.

In addition, as shown in Figures 1840 and 1841, front door mounting brackets H57 and H58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame H14, and these front door mounting brackets H57 and H58 (front door mounting bracket H57 is a cylindrical portion, and front door mounting bracket H58 is a metal plate with an axial hole) engage with the inner frame H12, thereby supporting the front frame H14 rotatably relative to the inner frame H12.

In detail, the front door mounting bracket H57 is supported by a support plate H12e that extends from the front end of the inner frame H12 to the front side (arrow F direction) below the upper hinge H19 of the inner frame H12 and has a fitting recess H12e1 (see FIG. 1839) that is recessed from the tip to the rear side (arrow B direction) with a size that allows the front door mounting bracket H57 to be fitted inside. In addition, the front door mounting bracket H58 is supported by being fitted externally onto a support pin H19a that is stepped and cylindrical (a shape in which cylinders of different diameters are connected vertically and vertically, with the upper cylinder having a smaller diameter) that protrudes upward (arrow U direction) from the lower hinge H19 of the inner frame H12.

The front frame H14 also has a window H14e in the area surrounded by the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, the right decorative unit H14c, and the upper and lower tray units H15, and a glass unit H16 having two glass plates and configured to transmit light is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front frame H14 (main frame H14d) to cover the window H14e (see Figure 1833). Note that the front of the game board H13 of the pachinko machine H10 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine H10 through the glass unit H16 (window H14e).

As shown in Figures 1833 and 1837, the glass unit H16 comprises a pair of front and rear transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b that are larger in outer shape than the window portion H14e and have optical transparency (transparency), and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b. The fixed frame is made of a resin material and has a ring shape that is one size larger than the transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b, and the outer peripheries of the transparent glass pieces H16a, H16b are bonded to the fixed frame, making the glass unit H16 into an integrated double-glazed glass.

The glass unit H16 is configured to be light-transmitting (colorless and transparent) using transparent glass H16a and H16b, but is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent using a resin material, and may be colored and transparent instead of colorless and transparent as long as the playing area can be seen through the glass unit H16 from the front of the pachinko machine H10.

The two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b may also be arranged with a predetermined gap between them. When the two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b are arranged with a predetermined gap between them, a displaceable displacement means may be arranged between them to enable a performance by the displacement means in front of the game board H13 (in the direction of the arrow F). The displacement means in this case may be, for example, a means for performing a performance in which a plurality of displacement members made of a material such as paper or nylon are blown away by wind sent out from holes formed in the fixed frame, or a means for displacing a displacement member displaceably arranged in the fixed frame between the two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b by the sound lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1842). Also, a light emitting means may be provided on a fixed plate that fixes the two transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b, and light emitted from the light emitting means may be irradiated onto either the front transparent glass sheet H16a or the rear transparent glass sheet H16b (the side indicated by the arrow B), allowing the player to see the light irradiated onto one of the transparent glass sheets H16a, H16b.

Around the window section H14e in the front frame H14 (upper decorative unit H14a, left decorative unit H14b, right decorative unit H14c), multiple illumination sections H29-H33 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided as shown in FIG. 1833. These illumination sections H29-H33 light up or blink in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached. In addition, the illumination section H30 on the upper side of the window section H14e (the direction of the arrow U) has built-in light-emitting means that light up when a specified error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and light up while prize balls are being paid out.

In addition, the areas of the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right decorative unit H14c other than the areas where the illuminated parts H29 to H33 are arranged are made of a non-transparent resin material that does not transmit the light emitted from the illuminated parts H29 to H33. This makes it easier for players to notice the light emitted by the illuminated parts H29 to H33 (lighting up or blinking).

The areas other than the areas where the illuminated parts H29 to H33 are arranged do not have to be opaque, but may be made of a transparent resin material so that light can be emitted (transmitted) from the entire front frame H14 when the illuminated parts H29 to H33 emit light (light up or blink). Also, the areas around the illuminated parts H29 to H33 may be provided with plated members made of chrome-plated ABS resin to create a dazzling appearance.

On the left side (arrow L direction) and right side (arrow R direction) of the upper decorative unit H14a (on the upper right and upper left sides of the window portion H14e), there is a speaker cover H27 (a thin plate member formed from punching metal) that covers a speaker assembly (audio output device H226 (see Figure 1842)) that outputs sound effects according to the game status, and is configured so that the sound from the speaker can be emitted to the front side (arrow F direction) of the pachinko machine H10 through the speaker cover H27.

Below the window portion H14e (in the direction of arrow B), as shown in FIG. 1833, an upper tray H17 and a lower tray H50 are arranged to bulge toward the front, and an upper/lower tray unit H15 is arranged in which the upper tray H17 and the lower tray H50 are arranged side by side vertically.

The upper tray H17 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged to this upper tray H17. The upper tray H17 also has the function of temporarily storing the balls dispensed from the dispensing device H133 (see FIG. 1834) and guiding them to the ball launching unit H112a (see FIG. 1838) while aligning them in a row. The bottom surface is formed with a downward inclination to the right side (arrow R direction) when viewed from the front, and is formed so that the balls inserted into the upper tray H17 can be guided to the launching position ball sending unit H170 by the inclination. The balls sent from the upper tray H17 to the launching position ball sending unit H170 are guided one by one to the ball launching unit H112a by the operation of the launching position ball sending unit H170. In other words, the game balls can be sent to the ball launching unit H112a by the launching position ball sending unit H170, which is configured so that the game balls can pass through. In other words, the game ball can be sent to the ball launch unit H112a by the launch position ball sending unit H170, which is configured to be able to send the game ball.

The lower tray H50 is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and has the function of storing balls that are surplus to the upper tray H17. In addition, a ball guide opening H53 that opens in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) and guides the balls to the lower tray H50 is formed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the lower tray H50.

A ball removal lever H52 is provided below (in the direction of arrow D) the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the lower tray H50, and is used to operate when discharging balls stored in the lower tray H50 downward. This ball removal lever H52 is always biased to the right (in the direction of arrow R), and by sliding it to the left (in the direction of arrow L) against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray H50 opens, and the balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever H52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray H50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray H50.

Operation of the ball removal lever H52 is not limited to discharging balls into the coin box, but may also discharge balls into a collection port connected to the island equipment. Also, there is no need to provide multiple locations for storing balls on the upper tray H17 and lower tray H50, and the configuration may have only one storage area, with only the upper tray H17 being eliminated and the lower tray H50 being used.

It is also possible to control the operation of the ball removal lever H52, which ejects balls from the lower tray H50, by the drive motor. In this way, when a ball has been dispensed onto the lower tray H50 or when a predetermined number of balls have been dispensed onto the lower tray H50, the ball removal lever H52 is displaced by the drive motor, which prevents the player from forgetting to eject the balls from the lower tray H50, causing balls to overflow into the storage area of the lower tray H50.

In particular, recently, more and more stores are discharging balls from the lower tray H50 into a recovery port that is connected to the island equipment of the store where the pachinko machine H10 is installed, and fewer stores are discharging balls from the lower tray H50 into a senryo box that can only store a specified number of balls. In stores that discharge balls from the lower tray H50 into a recovery port that is connected to the island equipment of the store, there is no need to replace the senryo box while balls are being dispensed from the lower tray H50, so by configuring the ball removal lever H52 to be displaced by a drive motor as balls are dispensed to the lower tray H50, it is possible to eliminate the need for the player to operate the ball removal lever H52.

In other words, by displacing the ball removal lever H52 of the lower tray H50 by the drive motor in conjunction with the presentation of the jackpot by the MPU H201 of the main control device H110 described below, the balls dispensed to the lower tray H50 upon a jackpot can be discharged into the recovery port, eliminating the need for the player to operate the ball removal lever H52. As a result, the player can concentrate on the presentation of the pachinko machine H10 (especially the presentation of the jackpot), enhancing the player's interest.

On the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the upper tray H17 (ball storage area), there is provided an operation unit H180 that is configured to be displaceable and that is manually operated by the player. The operation unit H180 is an operation device that is used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third pattern display device H81, etc. The operation unit H180 is configured to be capable of vibrating or moving.

A button section H181 is provided on the top side of this operation unit H180. The button section H181 can be pressed downward around an axis extending in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R), and is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device H81 (see FIG. 1838) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The operation unit H180 may be provided in another location, such as around the lower tray H50, other than the upper tray H17, or may be provided in multiple locations. The operation method may be a push button switch, or the operation may be configured to allow information to be input using another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

In addition, the operation unit H180 may be placed on the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, or the right decorative unit H14c, rather than on the front side of the upper tray H17. In this case, an operation unit H180 separate from the front side of the upper tray H17 may be placed, and the player may operate each operation unit H180 for a different effect.

On the right side of the operation unit H180, a ball lending operation unit H40 (see FIG. 1840), a function adjustment operation unit H190, and a ball discharge lever H54 are arranged on the top side of the upper and lower tray unit H15. The ball lending operation unit H40 is provided with a degree display unit H41, a ball lending button H42, and a return button H43. When the ball lending operation unit H40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine H10, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit H41 is an area where the remaining balance information of cards, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information.

The ball lending button H42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray H17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. The return button H43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that in pachinko machines in which balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device or the like to the upper tray H17 without going through a card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending operation unit H40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball lending operation unit H40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The function adjustment operation unit H190 includes a decision button H191, and an up button H192, a down button H193, a left button H194, and a right button H195 arranged in four outer positions in a cross shape centered on the decision button H191.

The function adjustment operation unit H190 is an operation unit for changing the volume of the speaker (audio output device H226) arranged in the upper decorative unit H14a, the brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device H81, and the brightness of the electric decoration units H29 to H33 arranged in the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right decorative unit H14c. The player can change the volume and brightness to suit his (the player's) preferences by operating the decision button H191, the up button H192, the down button H193, the left button H194, and the right button H195.

In addition, when changing the volume or brightness, the degree of adjustment of the volume or brightness is displayed as a number or volume on a part of the third pattern display device H81. This allows the player to easily adjust the volume or brightness when starting to play another pachinko machine H10.

The changes made by the function adjustment operation unit H190 are not limited to volume and brightness, but may be able to change the effects displayed on the third pattern display device H81. Also, the adjustment degree of volume and brightness is not limited to being displayed on the third pattern display device H81, and for example, even if it is not displayed on the third pattern display device H81, it may be possible to adjust by making a sound or display after the change (adjustment) at the same time as the operation, or the adjustment degree may be displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device H81.

The ball discharge lever H54 is a lever operated by the player when sending the balls stored in the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50, and is arranged in a state where it is biased upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by a biasing means (spring) not shown. The ball discharge lever H54 is configured so that when it is operated (pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow D)), the passage that connects the upper tray H17 to the launch position ball sending unit H170 can be switched to a state where it connects from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50 (foul ball passage section H145). This allows the balls stored in the upper tray H17 to be discharged to the lower tray H50.

On the right side (the direction of the arrow R) of the lower tray H50, an operating handle H51 is arranged, which is displaceable and operated by the player during the game. The operating handle H51 is configured to be capable of vibrating or moving. Inside the operating handle H51, there are built-in a touch sensor H51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit H112a, a launch stop switch H51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the period of pressing, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle H51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle H51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor H51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is shot into the front of the game board H13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Additionally, when the operating handle H51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor H51a and the firing stop switch H51b are off.

The operating handle H51 can be replaced with an operating button of the operating unit H180, the function adjustment operating unit H190, or the ball loan operating unit H40. For example, the amount of depression of the operating button can be detected by a variable resistor, and the ball can be shot into the front of the game board H13 at a ball launch speed corresponding to the amount of depression of the operating button. Also, the function adjustment operating unit H190 can be provided with a control for adjusting the ball launch speed, so that the ball can be shot into the front of the game board H13 at a launch speed set by the player.

Furthermore, the operating handle H51 may be replaced with the ball discharge lever H52 described above. That is, the ball discharge lever H52 may serve both the role of allowing the discharge of balls from the lower tray H50 and the role of allowing balls to be shot toward the front of the game board H13. In this case, when a ball is shot toward the front of the game board H13, the discharge of balls from the lower tray H50 can be permitted, and when the shooting of balls toward the front of the game board H13 is stopped, the discharge of balls from the lower tray H50 can be restricted, thereby preventing too many balls from accumulating on the lower tray H50.

The passage forming unit H140 is molded from a resin material and has an upper tray passage section H141 on the front door side that leads to the upper tray H17, a lower tray passage section H142 on the front door side that leads to the lower tray H50, and a foul ball passage section H145.

The upper corner of the passage forming unit H140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame H14) is formed with a ball receiving port H143 that protrudes rearward (in the direction of arrow B) and opens upward. The ball receiving port H143 is partitioned into left and right parts by a partition wall H144, forming a passage entrance for the front door side upper tray passage section H141 and a passage entrance for the front door side lower tray passage section H142 (see Figure 1840).

The passage entrance of the upper tray passage section H141 on the front door side is connected to the upper tray passage section H161 (see FIG. 1838) on the main body side of the inner frame H12, and the passage entrance of the lower tray passage section H142 on the front door side is connected to the lower tray passage section H162 (see FIG. 1838) on the main body side of the inner frame H12. As a result, the ball sent from the payout device H133 is sent to the upper tray H17 or the lower tray H50.

The foul ball passage H145 (see FIG. 1840) is a section that forms a passage for discharging balls that have been launched from the ball launching unit H112a but have not reached the playing area as foul balls into the lower tray H50.

As shown in FIG. 1841, the foul ball passage H145 is provided with a foul ball receiving port H146 that is open on the upper side (the side in the direction of the arrow U). The foul ball received in this foul ball receiving port H146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage H145 (see FIG. 1840) and is then discharged into the lower tray H50. Note that the foul ball passage H145 may be connected to the upper tray H17 instead of the lower tray H50, and the foul ball may be discharged into the upper tray H17.

The foul ball passage H145 is also formed to merge with a ball ejection passage (not shown), which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50 are guided when the player operates the ball ejection lever H54.

The launch position ball sending unit H170 is a unit for sending the balls stored in the upper tray H17 one by one to the ball launch unit H112a. The launch position ball sending unit H170 is mainly formed with a front side opening H171 connected to the opening of the ball sending path of the upper tray H17, a rear side opening H172 that can discharge the balls that flow in from the front side opening H171 from the rear side, a switching means (not shown) that is displaceably arranged on the passage that passes from the front side opening H171 to the rear side opening H172, and a solenoid (not shown) that drives the switching means.

The switching means of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 is configured to be displaceable between a position where it is possible to allow balls to flow from the upper tray H17 to the front side opening H171, and a position where it is not possible to allow balls to flow from the upper tray H17 to the front side opening H171. When displaced to a position where it is not possible to allow balls to flow from the upper tray H17 to the front side opening H171, the balls on the path of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 are allowed to flow from the rear side opening H172 to the ball launching unit H112a (launching rail H112a1). This makes it possible to discharge balls one by one from the rear side opening H172 as the position of the switching means is switched (one round trip displacement).

The rear opening H172 is located on the front side (arrow F direction side) above (arrow U direction) the launch rail H112a1 of the ball launch unit H112a (see FIG. 1838). Therefore, balls are sent one by one from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the launch rail H112a1 of the ball launch unit H112a.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1838, the rear opening H172 is formed between both ends of the launch rail H112a1 in the throwing direction of the ball on the launch rail H112a1. Therefore, the ball thrown from the rear opening H172 onto the launch rail H112a1 can roll in both directions (arrow L-R directions) on the launch rail H112a1, but since the launch rail H112a1 is arranged with one side (the side away from the rotating body H112a2) tilted upward (arrow U direction), the ball thrown from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 (the ball before being launched by the rotating body H112a2) is prevented from rolling in the direction away from the rotating body H112a2.

As shown in FIG. 1838, the game board H13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding balls, as well as rail members H61, H62, a general winning opening H63, a first winning opening H64, a second winning opening H640, a variable winning device H65, a through gate H67, a variable display unit H80, etc., to a base plate H60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portions of the board are attached to the back side of the inner frame H12. The general winning opening H63, the first winning opening H64, the second winning opening H640, and the variable winning device H65 are constructed to be light-transmitting.

The base plate H60 is made of a resin material that is light-transmitting (light-transmitting) and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side (arrow B side) of the base plate H60 from its front side (arrow F side). The general winning hole H63, first winning hole H64, second winning hole H640, and variable display unit H80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate H60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board H13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate H60 is not limited to being made from a light-transmitting resin material, but may be made from wood made of thin boards glued together, or may be made from a non-transmitting resin material. In these cases, it is preferable to ensure the decorativeness of the base plate H60 by attaching a decorated sticker or the like to the entire front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the base plate H60.

The central front portion of the game board H13 can be seen from the front side (arrow F direction) of the inner frame H12 through a part of the window portion H14e (see FIG. 1833) of the front frame H14. The configuration of the game board H13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 1838.

An outer rail H62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board H13, and an arc-shaped inner rail H61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail H62 is set up inside the outer rail H62. The inner rail H61 and the outer rail H62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board H13, and the game board H13 and the glass unit H16 (see Figure 1833) surround the front and rear (arrows F-B direction), forming a game area in front of the game board H13 where games are played depending on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board H13 and is formed by the two rail members H61, H62 and the resin outer edge member H73 that connects the rails. The two rail members H61 and H62 do not have to be metal plates, but may be formed in a strip shape from a resin material.

The two rail members H61, H62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit H112a to the upper side (arrow U direction) of the game board H13. A return ball prevention member H68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail H61 (upper left of FIG. 1838).

The return ball prevention member H68 is formed from a resin plate member that extends from the inner rail H61 side to the outer rail H62 side, and is rotatable around one end on the inner rail H61 side in a direction that moves the other end away from the outer rail H62. The return ball prevention member H68 also has a weight on one end, which biases the other end in a direction toward the outer rail H62.

This allows the momentum of the ball being guided to the upper side of the game board H13 (in the direction of arrow U) to rotate the other end of the return ball prevention member H68 in a direction away from the outer rail H62, and when the ball is guided to a position beyond the return ball prevention member H68 (upper side of the game board H13), the other end of the return ball prevention member H68 can be rotated in a direction approaching the outer rail H62, preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board H13 from returning back into the ball guide passage.

The return ball prevention member H68 does not have to be made of a resin material, and may be made of a metal material. In addition, the other end of the return ball prevention member H68 may be biased toward the outer rail H62 by a magnetic force such as a magnet or a biasing force such as a torsion spring, other than a weight.

The return ball prevention member H68 may also be capable of rotating continuously in one direction (not returning one ball at a time to a designated position) like a windmill, which will be described later. In this case, it is preferable to provide a one-way clutch that restricts the ball from rotating in the opposite direction (other direction) to the direction (one direction) in which the ball is guided to the top of the game board H13 so that the ball guided to the top of the game board H13 does not return to the ball guide passage again.

A return rubber H69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail H62 (upper right in Fig. 1838) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball, and when a ball is shot with a force greater than a certain level, it hits the return rubber H69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 1838), the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first pattern display devices H37A and H37B display according to each control performed by the main control device H110 (see Fig. 1842), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine H10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole H64 or the second winning hole H640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole H64, the first pattern display device H37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole H640, the first pattern display device H37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices H37A and H37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine H10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while also displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine H10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine H10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot H64 and the second prize slot H640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine H10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R sure jackpot, a 4R sure jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first pattern display devices H37A and H37B not only show whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

The number of rounds in a jackpot is not limited to 15R and 4R, but may be changed to another number of rounds depending on the model of the pachinko machine H10, and may have two or more types of number of rounds. Also, the predetermined number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is not limited to 100 fluctuations, but may be set to, for example, 1 fluctuation or 1000 fluctuations.

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the jackpot has ended, i.e., during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability change), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The high probability state (during a probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described below is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole H640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability change. The time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second symbol is increased, making it easy for a ball to enter the second winning hole H640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine H10 is when the game is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device H640a associated with the second winning port H640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device H640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port H640 than when the electric device H640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port H640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role H640a associated with the second winning slot H640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role H640a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role H640a associated with the second winning slot H640 is opened and the number of times the electric role H640a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role H640a associated with the second winning slot H640 is opened and the number of times the electric role H640a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes H63, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit H80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit H80 is provided with a third pattern display device H81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640, and a second pattern display device (not shown) that is composed of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate H67 and is configured to be able to emit light. In addition, a center frame H86 is arranged in the variable display unit H80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device H81.

The center frame H86 is a member for preventing balls flowing down the game area from flowing down to the third pattern display device H81 side through the central opening of the base plate H60, and is formed by protruding from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate H60. The center frame H86 is also configured to be light-transmitting.

In addition, a warp passage (not shown) is formed in a portion of the center frame H86, which receives balls flowing down the game area and passes them around the third pattern display device H81 before being discharged from the first winning opening H64. The warp passage formed in the center frame H86 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. In other words, the warp passage is configured to allow game balls to be sent.

The center frame H86 also has a stage configured to allow the game ball discharged from the warp passage to pass through. In other words, the stage is configured to allow the game ball discharged from the warp passage to be sent. The stage of the center frame H86 has a recess configured to be able to apply a reaction force in a different direction when the game ball comes into contact with it, and is configured to allow the game ball to be sent to a specified area of the base plate H60 by using the recess.

In this embodiment, the warp passage is configured so that the ball passes in front of the base plate H60, but it is also possible to form the warp passage so that the ball passes behind the base plate H60. For example, a passage that passes behind the base plate H60 may be configured to pass behind the ring forming unit G700, the petal operating device G800, or the flower rotation unit G400 that are arranged behind the base plate H60, so that the game ball passing through the warp passage as the ring forming unit G700, the petal operating device G800, or the flower rotation unit G400 are displaced may be made visible to the player.

The center frame H86 may be provided with a pair of standing sections that protrude into the play area and partition the back side of the play area, and that stand toward the front side with a specified width between them, so that the game balls can flow down along the area partitioned by the pair of standing sections. In other words, the center frame may be provided with a flow path (a pair of standing sections) that allows the game balls to pass through.

In addition, when the center frame H86 forms a path for the game ball to flow down, a concave portion or a convex portion may be formed on the opposing surfaces (inner surface side of the path) of the pair of standing parts, and the game ball flowing down between the opposing pair of standing parts may be abutted against the concave portion or the convex portion to apply a force component in a direction other than the flow direction (extension direction of the pair of standing parts) to the game ball flowing down between the opposing pair of standing parts, thereby slowing down the flow direction speed of the game ball flowing down between the opposing pair of standing parts. In other words, the concave portion or the convex portion formed on the pair of standing parts is configured to be able to apply a reaction force in a different direction when the game ball abuts against it. In this way, by slowing down the flow speed of the ball, it is possible to make the game ball flowing down easier to be seen by the player, and it is possible to prevent the game ball sent (launched) to the game area by the ball launching unit H112a from abutting against a nail or protrusion while maintaining its launched speed (while flowing down at a high speed), which may cause the nail or protrusion to bend.

It is also possible to configure the pair of standing portions separately from the center frame H86. That is, a member having a pair of standing portions configured to allow the game ball to pass through may be separately disposed on the base plate H60. In this way, the game ball can be made to flow down in a predetermined direction by the pair of standing portions configured to allow the game ball to be thrown.

The third pattern display device H81 is configured with a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device H114 (see FIG. 1842), so that, for example, three rows of patterns, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. The third pattern display device H81 may be configured with a size other than 9 inches, or may be configured with two or more liquid crystal displays arranged side by side. The third pattern display device H81 may also be disposed in the circular ring forming unit G700, petal operating device G800, or flower rotation unit G400 described below, and may switch (change the display) the display of the third pattern display device H81 in accordance with the displacement of the circular ring forming unit G700, petal operating device G800, or flower rotation unit G400.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the petal movement device G800 is arranged in a retracted position around (above) the third pattern display device H81, and when the petal movement device G800 is displaced to the extended position, the petal movement device G800 is displaced to a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the third pattern display device H81. Therefore, when the petal movement device G800 is displaced to the extended position, the performance of the third pattern display device H81 can be visually recognized by the player together with the petal movement device G800.

The petal operation device G800 has a second decorative unit G480 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flower rotation unit G400, which is made of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, when the petal operation device G800 is arranged in the extended position, at least a part of the third pattern display device H81 can be seen by the player through the second decorative unit G480 of the second decorative unit G480.

Each symbol row of the third symbol display device H81 is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device H81. The third symbol display device H81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device H37A, H37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1842) is performed by the first symbol display device H37A, H37B. In other words, the third symbol display device H81 is configured to be able to emit light according to the display of the first symbol display device H37A, H37B. Note that the third symbol display device H81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and a "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate H67. In the pachinko machine H10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate H67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a "circle" symbol as a static display after the second symbol is displayed as a variable. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a "x" symbol as a static display after the third symbol is displayed as a variable. The second symbol display device may display symbols using a part of the third symbol display device H81, or may display symbols on either the third symbol display device H81 or another display device. In this embodiment, the second symbol display device displays symbols using a part of the third symbol display device H81.

The pachinko machine H10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device H640a attached to the second winning hole H640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device H640a of the second winning slot H640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot H640.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot H640 during a probability bonus or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device H640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a probability bonus or time-saving period than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device H640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate H67 is attached to the game board H13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit H80, and is configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board H13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate H67, a lottery is held to determine whether a second symbol will win. After the lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate H67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices H37A and H37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). In this embodiment, the second pattern reserved lamp, which is configured to be able to emit light, is configured to be displayed using a part of the third pattern display device H81, but it may also be displayed by lighting a display device other than the third pattern display device H81. For example, four LEDs that light up as the balls pass through the through gate H67 may be arranged below the third pattern display device H81 and displayed by lighting them.

In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for balls passing through the through gate H67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of through gates H67 installed is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. In addition, the installation position of the through gate H67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit H80, but may be below the variable display unit H80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first winning hole H64, into which a ball can enter, is disposed below the variable display unit H80. When a ball enters this first winning hole H64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board H13 turns on, and when the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1842), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole H64 as viewed from the front, there is a second winning hole H640 into which a ball can enter. When a ball enters this second winning hole H640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board H13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device H110 (see FIG. 1842), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37B.

The first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640 are also each one of the winning holes into which five balls are paid out when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole H640, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole H640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole H640 may be five.

An electric device H640a is attached to the second winning hole H640. This electric device H640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning hole H640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate H67, the electric device H640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning hole H640.

In this embodiment, vane members (electric device H640a) that open and close are provided on both the left and right sides (in the direction of the arrows L and R) of the second winning opening H640, and when the electric device H640a is in the open state, balls can enter the second winning opening H640 from both the left and right sides of the second winning opening H640. However, a wall may be formed that blocks the flow path on one side in the left-right direction, and balls can enter the second winning opening H640 only from the other side. In this case, vane members (electric device H640a) that open and close only are provided on the other side of the second winning opening H640.

The electric device H640a is not limited to a rotating blade member, but may be a sliding device that moves between a position that opens the second winning opening H640 and a position that closes it. For example, the electric device H640a may be a sliding device that slides up and down (in the direction of the arrows U-D) or forward and backward (in the direction of the arrows F-B).

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device H640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device H640a is open is longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot H640 than during normal play.

In the pachinko machine H10 of this embodiment, the game board H13 is symmetrical, so that the ball can be shot so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit H80 (arrow R direction) (so-called "right shot") and aimed at the first winning hole H64, or the ball can be shot so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit H80 (arrow L direction) and aimed at the second winning hole H640 (so-called "left shot"). Therefore, the pachinko machine H10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left shot" and "right shot" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine H10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of changing the way the ball is shot.

It is also possible to configure the game so that the probability of a jackpot remains the same whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state (the jackpot probability in a low probability state is the same as the jackpot probability in a high probability state). In this case, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot to be selected in the event of a jackpot is set to be higher when the ball enters the second winning hole H640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole H64, and it is preferable to configure the game board H13 so that the first winning hole H64 is located in the flow path on the "left hit" side and the second winning hole H640 is located in the flow path on the "right hit" side (the game board H13 is asymmetrical).

With this configuration, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning slot H640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning slot H640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by shooting the ball toward the first winning slot H64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left (in the direction of arrow L) of the variable display unit H80 ("left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning slot H64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device H640a associated with the second winning slot H640 is likely to open by passing the ball through the through gate H67, making it easier to win at the second winning slot H640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning slot H640 so that it passes to the right (arrow R direction) of the variable display unit H80 ("right hit"), passing through the through gate H67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning slot H640 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

Therefore, depending on the game status of the pachinko machine H10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode), the player can change the way the ball is shot to "left-handed" or "right-handed," thereby maintaining the player's interest.

A variable winning device H65 (see FIG. 1838) is provided below the first winning hole H64, and a specific winning hole H65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine H10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning hole H64 or the second winning hole H640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device H37A or the first pattern display device H37B is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device H81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole H65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning port H65a closes after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after that closure, the specific winning port H65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning port H65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of gaming value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning hole H65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, the specific winning hole H65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning hole H65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning hole H65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning hole H65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, so that a game state can be formed as a special game state. Also, the specific winning hole H65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning hole H64 or the lower left side of the first winning hole H64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit H80.

In the lower right corner of the game board H13, an attachment space K1 is provided for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through the glass unit H16 of the front frame H14.

The game board H13 is provided with an outlet H71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes H63, H64, H65a, or H640 are guided through the outlet H71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlet H71 is located below the specific winning hole H65a (in the direction of arrow D).

In addition, numerous nails are planted on the game board H13 to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (game parts) such as windmills (not shown) are also arranged. Furthermore, a part of the center frame H86, which is arranged in the central opening of the base plate H60 in a manner surrounding the third pattern display device H81, has its rear side (arrow B side) extended up to the game area on the upper side (arrow U side), and is provided with multiple protrusions that protrude toward the front side (arrow F side) in this extended area. The balls flowing down the game area of the game board H13 collide with numerous nails, the protrusions of the center frame H86, the windmills, etc., as they flow down, so that the direction in which the balls fall is appropriately dispersed.

In this embodiment, the direction in which a portion of the center frame H86 extends is set to the upward side (arrow U direction), but it may also extend to the right side (arrow R direction) or left side (arrow L direction), and the extended portion may be configured to include not only a protrusion but also the through gate H67 and each winning opening H63, H64, H65a, and H640. The center frame H86 may also be configured without an extended portion or protrusion.

The windmill is formed so that it can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction (arrows F-B direction). In addition, the windmill is formed with a disk member that is formed in a circle centered on the axis of rotation when viewed from the front and is arranged at a distance of one ball from the front of the base plate H60, and multiple (in this embodiment, three) ball abutment parts that protrude from part of the disk member toward the base plate H60 side (arrow B direction side) and are distributed at a predetermined angle (120 degrees in this embodiment) along the rotation direction of the windmill, and are formed so that the ball flowing down the game board H13 can be guided in multiple (two or more) directions while rotating due to the impact of the ball abutting on the ball abutment parts.

The windmill is also made entirely from a light-transmitting resin material. This makes it easier for players to see the direction in which the balls that come into contact with the ball contact section will flow, while making it harder for players to recognize the direction in which the windmill is rotating.

The game board H13 does not necessarily have to have a windmill on the base plate H60, and may be configured without a windmill. It is also possible to arrange a windmill in the middle of the warp passage (not shown) of the center frame H86 or the passage (not shown) through which the balls that enter each winning hole H63, H64, H65a, and H640 pass, and to configure the ball's passage to be changed by the windmill. Furthermore, the windmill may be made of a non-transparent resin material in part or a non-transparent metal material such as aluminum in whole, and may have any shape, color, or material as long as it can guide the ball in multiple directions when it comes into contact with it. For example, the windmill may be configured to distribute the balls in different directions alternately one by one. In addition, instead of the windmill, the above-mentioned return ball prevention member H68 may be arranged to make the balls flowing down the game area flow in one direction (the balls do not return).

In addition, in the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which a game ball flowing down the game area abuts (collides with) a windmill arranged on the base plate H60 of the game board H13 to rotate the windmill, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the windmill may be configured to transmit the driving force of a driving means to the windmill.

For example, in place of the windmill in the 111th embodiment, the left circular ring member G710, the right circular ring member G720, the arm portion G812, the first rotating base G410, the first decorative unit G420, G6420, the petal side transmission member G430, the second rotating base G460, and the second decorative unit G480 may be arranged on the base plate H60, and a game ball flowing down the game area may be collided with the rotating left circular ring member G710, the right circular ring member G720, the arm portion G812, the first rotating base G410, the first decorative unit G420, G6420, the petal side transmission member G430, the second rotating base G460, and the second decorative unit G480 to change the direction in which the game ball flows down.

As shown in FIG. 1834, the rear side of the pachinko machine H10 is mainly equipped with control board units H90 and H91 and a back pack unit H94. The control board unit H90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device H110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device H113), and a display control board (display control device H114). The control board unit H91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device H111), a launch control board (launch control device H112), a power supply board (power supply device H115), and a card unit connection board H116.

The back pack unit H94 is a unit consisting of the back pack H92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit H93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device H110, the voice lamp control device H113 and the display control device H114, the payout control device H111 and the launch control device H112, the power supply device H115, and the card unit connection board H116 are each stored in the board boxes H100 to H104. The board boxes H100 to H104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box H100 (main control device H110) and the board box H102 (dispensing control device H111 and launch control device H112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box H100, H102, or if you try to forcefully open the board box H100, H102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box H100, H102 has been opened.

The payout unit H93 is equipped with a tank H130 located at the top of the back pack unit H94 and opening upward, a tank rail H131 connected to the bottom of the tank H130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail H132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail H131, and a payout device H133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail H132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor H216 (see FIG. 1842). The tank H130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device H133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator H134 for applying vibration to the tank rail H131 is attached to the tank rail H131, and the vibration of the vibrator H134 prevents balls from clogging the tank rail H131. The vibrator H134 can be attached not only to the tank rail H131, but also to other rail parts (passages). For example, it can be disposed in the ball delivery passage (dish passage forming member H160) that delivers balls to the upper dish H17 or the lower dish H50, or in the ball delivery passage (launch position ball delivery unit H170) that delivers balls from the upper dish H17 to the ball launch unit H112a.

The payout control device H111 is provided with a state return switch H120, the launch control device H112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob H121, and the power supply device H115 is provided with a RAM erase switch H122. The state return switch H120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor H216 (see FIG. 1842). The control knob H121 is operated by the store to adjust the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker (audio output device H226). The RAM erase switch H122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine H10 to its initial state.

The above-mentioned ball launching unit H112a may be separately provided in the tank H130, and the balls may be launched by the ball launching unit H112a to prevent balls sent to the tank H130 from clogging, or balls sent from the tank H130 to the tank rail H131 from clogging.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine H10 will be described with reference to FIG. 1842. FIG. 1842 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine H10.

The main control device H110 is equipped with an MPU (microprocessor) H201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU H201 contains a ROM (semiconductor memory) H202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU H201, a RAM (random access memory) H203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM H202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The main control device H110 uses the MPU H201 to execute the main processes of the pachinko machine H10, such as drawing the jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display devices H37A, H37B and the third pattern display device H81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In order to instruct the sub-controllers, such as the dispensing control unit H111 and the voice lamp control unit H113, to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit H110 to the sub-controllers via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control unit H110 to the sub-controllers.

RAMH203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPUH201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPUH201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAMH203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device H115 even after power to pachinko machine H10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAMH203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAMH203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine H10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAMH203. Writing to RAMH203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAMH203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPUH201 is configured to receive a power outage signal HSG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit H252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal HSG1 is input to the MPUH201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

The MPUH201 of the main control device H110 is connected to an input/output port H205 via a bus line H204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port H205 is connected to the payout control device H111, the audio lamp control device H113, the first pattern display device H37A, H37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids H209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port H65a to the front side around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role device, and the MPUH201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port H205.

The solenoid H209 may be configured to include not only a solenoid for driving the large opening solenoid and the electric device, but also a drive source (drive motor) for the device arranged on the game board H13, a drive motor (not shown) for the ball launching unit H112a, and a drive motor (not shown) for driving the payout device H133 for sending balls to the upper tray H17.

The input/output port H205 is connected to various switches H208, which include a group of sensors such as a switch group (not shown) and a sensor (through gate H67) that detects the passage of a ball through the through gate H67, a winning detection sensor (not shown) that detects the entry of a ball into each winning hole H63, H64, H65a, H640, a vibration detection sensor (not shown) that detects the input of vibration to the pachinko machine H10, and a magnetic force detection sensor that detects the approach of a magnet or the like to the playing area of the game board H13, and a RAM erase switch circuit H253 (described later) provided in the power supply H115.The MPU H201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches H208 and the RAM erase signal HSG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit H253.

The various switches H208 may also be configured to include frame buttons H22 in the voice lamp control device H113 (the button section H181 of the operation unit H180 and the decision button H191, up button H192, down button H193, left button H194, and right button H195 of the function adjustment operation section H190).

The payout control device H111 drives the payout motor H216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPUH211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM H212 that stores the control program executed by the MPUH211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM H213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM H213 of the payout control device H111, like the RAM H203 of the main control device H110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPUH211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPUH211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM H213 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device H115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine H10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM H213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPUH201 of the main control device H110, the NMI terminal of the MPUH211 is configured so that a power outage signal HSG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit H252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal HSG1 is input to the MPUH211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port H215 is connected to the MPU H211 of the payout control device H111 via a bus line H214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port H215 is connected to the main control device H110, the payout motor H216, the launch control device H112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device H111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device H111 but not connected to the main control device H110.

When the main control device H110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device H112 controls the ball launch unit H112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle H51.

The rotating body H112a2 of the ball launching unit H112a is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor H51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle H51, and on condition that the launch stop switch H51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), a driving force is transmitted from the drive motor corresponding to the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operating handle H51, and the rotating body H112a2 is rotated at a speed according to the operation amount of the operating handle H51. As a result, a ball is launched from the ball launching unit H112a between the opposing inner rail H61 and outer rail H62 with a strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle H51.

The audio lamp control device H113 controls the audio output of the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) H226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination section H29 to H33) H227, and the settings of the display mode of the third pattern display device H81 performed by the display control device H114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU H221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM H222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU H221 and fixed value data, and a RAM H223 used as a work memory, etc.

The input/output port H225 is connected to the MPU H221 of the audio lamp control device H113 via a bus line H224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port H225 is connected to the main control device H110, the display control device H114, the audio output device H226, the lamp display device H227, other devices H228, the button section H181, and the like. The other devices H228 include a drive motor G910, a drive motor G840, and a drive means H750.

The other device H228 may include not only the drive source for the accessory device arranged on the game board H13, but also a drive motor (not shown) for the ball launching unit H112a and an electric accessory H640a for the second winning slot H640.

The voice lamp control device H113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device H81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110, and notifies the display control device H114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.).

The sound and lamp control device H113 also monitors input from the button section H181, and when the player operates the button section H181, it instructs the display control device H114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device H81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device H114 so that the third pattern display device H81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device H81. The display control device H114 displays various images on the third pattern display device H81 according to the command sent from this sound and lamp control device H113.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device H113 monitors input from the function adjustment operation unit H190 (decision button H191, up button H192, down button H193, left button H194, right button H195), and when the player operates the function adjustment operation unit H190, it instructs the display control device H114 to change the volume of the speaker (audio output device H226), change the brightness of the third pattern display device H81, or change the brightness of the illumination units H29 to H33. When the volume or brightness is changed, the degree of adjustment of the volume or brightness is temporarily displayed in the form of a number, volume, etc. in front of the main display displayed on the third pattern display device H81.

In FIG. 1842, the button section H181 of the operation unit H180 and the decision button H191, up button H192, down button H193, left button H194, and right button H195 of the function adjustment operation section H190 are collectively illustrated as a frame button H22.

The voice lamp control device H113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device H81 from the display control device H114. Based on the display command received from the display control device H114, the voice lamp control device H113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device H81 from the voice output device H226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device H227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device H114 is connected to the voice lamp control device H113 and the third pattern display device H81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device H81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device H113. The display control device H114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device H113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device H81. The voice lamp control device H113 can match the display of the third pattern display device H81 with the audio output from the audio output device H226 by outputting audio from the audio output device H226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The various switches H208 connected to the input/output port H205 in the main control device H110 may be configured to be connected to the input/output port H225 in the voice lamp control device H113, and the MPU H221 may execute various processes based on signals output from the various switches H208. Also, various switches may be connected to the input/output port H225 in the voice lamp control device H113 separately from the various switches H208 connected to the input/output port H205 in the main control device H110. In this case, it is preferable to configure a group of sensors, such as position detection sensors for the role-playing devices arranged mainly on the game board H13, as the various switches.

The power supply device H115 has a power supply unit H251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine H10, a power failure monitoring circuit H252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit H253 provided with a RAM erase switch H122 (see FIG. 1842). The power supply unit H251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices H110 to H114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit H251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches H208, solenoids such as the solenoid H209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices H110 to H114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit H252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal HSG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPUH201 of the main control device H110 and the MPUH211 of the dispensing control device H111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit H252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit H251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal HSG1 to the main control device H110 and the dispensing control device H111. By outputting the power failure signal HSG1, the main control device H110 and the dispensing control device H111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit H251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit H110 and the dispensing control unit H111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit H253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal HSG2 to the main control device H110 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase switch H122 (see FIG. 1842) is pressed. When the main control device H110 inputs the RAM erase signal HSG2 when the pachinko machine H10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device H111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device H111.

Next, the upper decorative unit H14a will be described with reference to Fig. 1843 to Fig. 1849. Fig. 1843 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper decorative unit H14a, Fig. 1844 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit H14a, Fig. 1845 is an exploded front perspective view of the cosmetic unit H320, and Fig. 1846 is an exploded rear perspective view of the cosmetic unit H320.

First, the upper decorative unit H14a and the base unit H310 of the upper decorative unit H14a will be described with reference to Figures 1843 and 1844. As shown in Figures 1843 and 1844, the upper decorative unit H14a mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see Figure 1840), and a decorative unit H320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The base unit H310 mainly comprises a rectangular base member H311 that is long in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front, speaker assemblies H312 disposed on both the left and right sides of the base member H311, a detection device H313 disposed between the pair of speaker assemblies H312, and a front door mounting bracket H57 disposed on the left end of the base member H311.

The base member H311 is a member that covers the space on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the cosmetic unit H320 described later, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the cosmetic unit H320 when viewed from the front. The base member H311 mainly includes an opening H311a that opens in the front-rear direction at the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a locking portion H311b for locking the wiring connected to the cosmetic unit H320 and the speaker assembly H312, a covering portion H311d that stands toward the rear side along the edge on the upper side (arrow U direction side), an erecting portion H311e that stands toward the front side (arrow F direction side) from a position spaced a predetermined distance below the covering portion H311d, and an engagement recess H311c that is formed in a groove shape toward the rear side at a position between the covering portion H311d and the erecting portion H311e. The base unit H310 is fastened to the rear side of the cosmetic unit H320 by inserting a screw through the rear side of the base member H311 and screwing it into the cosmetic unit H320.

The opening H311a is an opening for passing the wiring connected to the cosmetic unit H320 and the speaker assembly H312, and is formed to a size that allows multiple wirings to be inserted. Note that in this embodiment, the wiring connected to the cosmetic unit H320 and the speaker assembly H312 is inserted from the same opening, but this is not limited to this, and multiple openings may be provided so that each wiring can be inserted from a different opening.

In this embodiment, the opening H311a is formed in one location in the center of the base member H311, thereby ensuring the rigidity of the base member H311 and preventing the base member H311 from being damaged.

The locking portion H311b is for locking the wiring that is inserted through the opening H311a and connected to the speaker assembly H312, and is formed to protrude in a generally L-shape from the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the base member H311. In addition, multiple locking portions H311b are formed along a straight line that runs from the lower side of the opening H311a toward the speaker assembly H312.

The covering portion H311d is a portion that covers the upper end surface of the main body frame H14d when the upper decorative unit H14a is arranged on the main body frame H14d, and the erection dimension toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) is set to be larger than the front-to-rear thickness of the main body frame H14d. This allows the upper end surface of the main body frame H14d to be hidden by the upper decorative unit H14a when the upper decorative unit H14a is arranged on the main body frame H14d.

The erected portion H311e is a portion that supports the upper plate H332 of the cosmetic unit H320 when the cosmetic unit H320 and the base unit H310 are assembled, and is formed at a position lower (arrow D direction side) than the upper end surface of the base member H311 by the thickness of the upper plate H332. That is, the upper plate H332 is arranged with the end on the rear side (arrow B direction side) placed on the erected portion H311e. In addition, the rear side protrusion H332b formed at the end on the rear side of the upper plate H332 is inserted into the engagement recess H311c of the base member H311, which also prevents the upper plate H332 from moving upward (arrow U direction side).

The base member H311 is formed from a non-transparent resin material, which prevents light from leaking out of the base member H311 when light from the cosmetic unit H320 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) is reflected toward the base member H311 side (arrow B direction).

The speaker assembly H312 mainly comprises a speaker (cone-type speaker) H312a, which is an acoustic device that converts electrical signals into audible sound waves and makes them audible, and a fastening member H312b that fastens and fixes the front flange H312a1 of the speaker H312a to the base member H311.

The speaker H312a emits effects sounds (recorded music, sound effects, voice, etc.) related to the game, and is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device H113 by connecting wiring through the opening H311a of the base member H311 (see FIG. 1842). The audio lamp control device H113 transmits electrical vibrations to the speaker H312a, allowing effects sounds related to the game to be emitted (output) from the front side (arrow F direction) and back side of the speaker H312a.

The front part of the speaker H312a is covered with a protective cover made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker H312a to pass through. The speaker H312a covered with this protective cover can reproduce and output high quality sound without muffling the sound emitted (output) on the front side, as the protective cover on the front part comes into direct contact with the outside air via the speaker cover H27 described below. In other words, the speaker H312a is configured to be able to emit sounds in a frequency band that is easy for the player to hear when emitted (output) from the front part.

The speaker H312a is also disposed with its diaphragm (front side) that vibrates (operates) to generate sound facing the player (the lower center side of the game board H13 when viewed from the front) by fastening members H312b. This makes it easier for the player to hear the sound emitted (output) from the front side (arrow F direction) of the speaker H312a.

The fastening member H312b is formed in a shape that covers the rear side (arrow B direction) of the speaker H312a, and is arranged on the base member H311 in a state where it supports the speaker H312a so as to form a predetermined gap between the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member H311 and the speaker H312a. This allows a space (second space H300B) to be formed on the rear side of the speaker H312a when the speaker H312a is arranged in the arrangement space H300F of the decorative unit H330 described below.

The fastening member H312b also has openings H312b1 that are opened in multiple places covering the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B), and sound emitted (output) from the rear side of the speaker H312a can be emitted into the second space H300B through the openings H312b1.

The detection device H313 is formed as an optical sensor equipped with a light-emitting portion that emits light and a light-receiving portion that receives the light that is emitted from the light-emitting portion and reflected by an object, and is formed so as to be able to detect the presence or absence of a player's fingers in front of the transparent glass H16a of the glass unit H16. The detection device H313 (various switches H208 (see FIG. 1842)) that detects the presence or absence of a player's fingers is connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPU H201 can execute various processes (audio output and LCD display) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

The light-emitting portion of the detection device H313 is disposed facing the lower side (arrow D direction) of the upper decorative unit H14a so that it can emit light toward the front side (arrow F direction) of the game board H13 (see FIG. 1839). The detection device H313 is also disposed in the internal space of the decorative unit H320 described below, and is capable of emitting light from the light-emitting portion to the lower side of the upper decorative unit H14a through a detection opening H333a formed in the decorative unit H320. This allows the detection device H313 to be disposed in a recessed position inside the upper decorative unit H14a, preventing the player from directly touching the detection device H313.

Next, the cosmetic unit H320 will be described with reference to Fig. 1845 and Fig. 1846. As shown in Fig. 1845 and Fig. 1846, the cosmetic unit H320 mainly comprises a decorative unit H330 formed in a box shape (see Fig. 1844) with an open rear side (arrow B direction side), a light-emitting unit H340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 arranged inside the decorative unit H330.

The decorative unit H330 comprises a front plate H331 disposed at a predetermined interval (for arranging the upper plate H332, lower plate H333, and left plate H334) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310 (see FIG. 1843), and an upper plate H332 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed in a position that fits along the edge of the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331. It mainly comprises a lower panel H333 formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front panel H331 and arranged in a position adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front panel H331, a left panel H334 arranged along the edge of the left side (arrow L direction) of the front panel H331 and connecting the left side (arrow L direction) ends of the upper panel H332 and the lower panel H333, and a decorative panel H335 arranged on the front side of the center of the front panel H331.

The front plate H331 is a member on which the light emitting unit H340 and sound transmission unit H350 described below are disposed, and is made of a transparent resin material that is transparent to the light of the light emitting unit H340. The front plate H331 also includes a main body portion H331a that is arranged facing the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H311, and an outer edge portion H331b that bends from the outer edge of the main body portion H331a toward the rear side, and is formed into a bowl shape with a concave central portion on the rear side. The front plate H3331 is formed to be large enough to cover the front side of the base unit H310 when viewed from the front.

The main body H331a has an area in which the decorative plate H335 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front, and a slit H331a1 is formed outside of the area to allow sound passing through the speaker cover H27 of the sound transmission unit H350 to be emitted to the outside (front side) of the upper decorative unit H14a.

The slit H331a1 is formed to open on the front side (the direction of the arrow F) of the speaker H312a of the base unit H310. This allows the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a to the front side to be emitted to the front side through the slit H331a1.

The slit H331a1 is formed as a long hole that is long in one direction when viewed from the front, and its width is set to be smaller than the game ball. This prevents fingers or game balls from being inserted inside the cosmetic unit H320, and ensures sound emission from the speaker H312a. In this embodiment, the slit H331a1 is formed as a long hole that is long in the vertical direction (arrows U-D direction) when viewed from the front. This ensures sound emission in the vertical direction for the pachinko machine H10.

The outer edge portion H331b is a portion for accommodating the mounting member H341 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the main body portion H331a inside the front plate H331, and the extension distance of the outer edge portion H331b toward the rear side is set to be greater than the thickness of the mounting member H341 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This causes the outer edge portion H331b of the front plate H331 and the mounting member H341 to be disposed in a state where they overlap in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction).

In this embodiment, the outer edge portion H331b is formed at a position that is spaced apart from the mounting member H341 by a predetermined gap in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), thereby forming a first communication passage H300C (see FIG. 1849(a)) between the outer edge portion H331b and the mounting member H341.

The upper plate H332, the lower plate H333, and the left plate H334 are members for forming (compartmenting) a space for disposing the light emitting unit H340, the sound transmission unit H350, and the pair of speaker assemblies H312 on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front plate H331, and are formed in a shape that follows the outer edge H331b of the front plate H331, and the ends of the upper plate H332 and the lower plate H333 are connected to each other by the left plate H334. In addition, the right decorative unit H14c described later is disposed on the right edge (arrow R direction side) of the front plate H331. As a result, the cosmetic unit H320 is formed in a box shape with only the rear side open, with the right side blocked by the right decorative unit H14c. A detailed explanation of the right decorative unit H14c will be given later.

The cosmetic unit H320 is also provided with a light-emitting unit H340 (described below) on the inside, which is formed into a box shape. The light-emitting unit H340 is formed to have a smaller dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the cosmetic unit H320. Therefore, by providing the light-emitting unit H340 on the cosmetic unit H320, a pair of mounting spaces H300F are formed on the rear side of both the left and right sides (slits H331a1) of the light-emitting unit H340, and a pair of speaker assemblies H312 can be mounted inside the cosmetic unit H320 using the pair of mounting spaces H300F.

The top panel H332, bottom panel H333, and left panel H334 are also formed from a non-transparent resin material and are configured so that the light emitted from the light-emitting unit H340 exits only through the front panel H331 of the upper decorative unit H14a. This limits the light-emitting position of the upper decorative unit H14a, making it easier to focus the player's attention on one part (the decorative panel H335).

The upper plate H332 mainly comprises a front side protrusion H332a that protrudes toward the front side along the edge of the front side (arrow F direction), a rear side protrusion H332b that protrudes toward the rear side along the edge of the rear side (arrow B direction), a fastening portion H332c having a through hole through which a screw can be inserted, and an engaged portion H332g that protrudes from the underside of both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The front side protrusion H332a and the rear side protrusion H332b are parts that engage with the front plate H331 arranged on the front side of the top plate H332 and the base member H311 arranged on the rear side of the top plate H332, respectively, and protrude from a position one step lower than the end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the top plate H332.

The front side protrusion H332a is inserted inward (lower) than the upper outer edge H331b of the front plate H331 to engage with the front plate H331, and the back side protrusion H332b is inserted into the engagement recess H311c of the base member H311 to be able to engage with the base member H311. This prevents the front side end or back side end of the top plate H332 from floating up relative to the front plate H331 or base member H311 when the top plate H332 is arranged on the upper decorative unit H14a. As a result, it prevents unauthorized parts from being inserted from the top plate H332 side when the upper decorative unit H14a is assembled.

The fastening portion H332c is formed to protrude downward (arrow D) from the end of the rear side (arrow B direction) of the upper plate H332. The fastening portion H332c also has a through hole through which a screw can be inserted, and by inserting a screw into the through hole from the rear side and screwing it into the covering member H343, the upper plate H332 can be fastened to the covering member H343 arranged on the front plate H331. That is, the upper plate H332 is fastened to the covering member H343 after the covering member H343 is arranged on the front plate H331.

The engaged portion H332g is formed to protrude downward (in the direction of arrow D) from both ends of the top plate H332 in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows L-R), and includes a first piece H332g1 formed on the outer left-right end of the top plate H332, and a second piece H332g2 formed on the inside of the top plate H332 relative to the first piece H332g1.

The first piece H332g1 and the second piece H332g2 are the parts into which the engaging portion H452b of the bent portion H452 of the right-side decorative unit H14c described later is inserted between (see FIG. 1856), and are arranged with a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the bent portion H452 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The lower panel H333 is a part that constitutes the underside of the upper decorative unit H14a, and is disposed on the front panel H331 in such a manner that it slopes upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the front side (in the direction of the arrow F) to the rear side (in the direction of the arrow B). In other words, the lower panel H333 is disposed in such a manner that it protrudes downward (in the direction of the arrow D) the further it is from the game board H13 (base unit H310) toward the front side.

This makes it possible to prevent the play area of the game board H13 from becoming smaller even if the external dimensions (particularly the vertical size) of the front panel H331 in a front view are increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness (design) of the front panel H331 (increase the area of the front panel H331 that can be decorated) while maintaining the play area of the game board H13.

The lower panel H333 also includes a detection opening H333a that is opened at a position facing the light emitting unit and light receiving unit of the detection device H313 arranged on the base member H311, sound emission openings H333b that are opened at multiple positions along the edge of the front side (arrow F direction), and a partition wall H333c that stands upward (arrow U direction) from a position between the detection openings H333a and sound emission openings H333b.

The detection opening H333a is an opening for passing the detection light of the detection device H313 as described above, and is formed to a size corresponding to the light-emitting section and light-receiving section of the detection device H313. This allows the detection device H313 to detect the presence or absence of a player's fingers in front of the transparent glass H16a of the glass unit H16.

The detection opening H333a also has an erected portion H333a1 that is erected toward the detection device H313, and the detection device H313 is disposed on the erected tip side of the erected portion H333a1. This allows the connection portion between the detection opening H333a and the detection device H313 to be formed inside the upper decorative unit H14a. As a result, the gap between the detection device H313 and the opening end of the detection opening H333a can be set inside the upper decorative unit H14a (making it difficult for the player to see), and it is possible to prevent illegal members from being inserted into the upper decorative unit H14a through the gap between the detection device H313 and the opening end of the detection opening H333a.

In this embodiment, the detection device H313 has been described as detecting the player's fingers using light, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, a vibration detection sensor that detects when vibrations are input to the pachinko machine H10, a magnetic force detection sensor that detects when a magnet or the like is brought close to the playing area of the game board H13, etc. may be provided.

The sound emission opening H333b is an opening for emitting the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a to the front side of the glass unit H16 (below the upper decorative unit H14a) so that the sound of the speaker H312a can be transmitted to the player from the front side, and is formed at a position that connects the speaker H312a and the third pattern display device H81 (see Figure 1839) of the game board H13 when viewed from the front.

The partition wall H333c is erected across the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower panel H333. The erection distance of the partition wall H333c upward (arrow U direction) is set to a length that will allow its tip to abut the underside of the covering member H343 when the upper decorative unit H14a is assembled. Therefore, when the upper decorative unit H14a is assembled, the front side of the partition wall H333c (arrow F direction) and the back side of the partition wall H333c (arrow B direction) are separated by the partition wall H333c.

The decorative plate H335 is a plate member that displays information such as patterns, characters, letters, etc., and is made entirely from a transparent resin material, with information such as patterns, characters, letters, etc. drawn on the surface on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F). This makes it easier for players to identify which pachinko machine H10 it is by looking at the decoration on the decorative plate H335, when there are multiple models of pachinko machine H10.

When changing the model (gaming machine specifications) of the pachinko machine H10, it is possible to switch to the decoration that corresponds to the pachinko machine H10 to which it is being changed by changing only the decorative plate H335 to a decorative plate H335 that depicts the appropriate pattern, character, letter, or other information, without having to change the entire upper decorative unit H14a.

In this embodiment, the upper plate H332, the lower plate H333, and the left plate H334 are formed from a non-transparent resin material, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper plate H332 may be formed from a transparent resin material, and the lower plate H333 and the left plate H334 may be formed from a non-transparent resin material, so that the light emitted from the light-emitting unit H340 can be emitted not only from the front plate H331 side, but also from the upper side where the upper plate H332 is disposed.

The upper panel H332, lower panel H333, and left panel H334 may also be formed from a transparent resin material, in which case the light of the light-emitting unit H340 can be emitted from the entire decorative unit H330.

The light-emitting unit H340 mainly comprises an attachment member H341 that is fastened to the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the front plate H331, a base member H342 that is disposed on the rear side of the attachment member H341 and is configured to be capable of emitting light, and a covering member H343 that covers the rear side of the base member H342.

The mounting member H341 is disposed at a position facing the back surface of the front plate H331 of the decorative unit H330, and mainly comprises a plate-shaped front side plate H341a formed in the same shape as the decorative plate H335 of the decorative unit H330 when viewed from the front, an upper edge H341b standing toward the front side (arrow F direction) along the edge of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front side plate H341a, a lower edge H341c standing toward the front side along the edge of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front side plate H341a, and a partition H341d extending along the lower edge H341c at a predetermined distance from the lower edge H341c, and is fastened to the back surface of the front plate H331 by a screw inserted from the back side (arrow B direction) of the front side plate H341a. The mounting member H341 is made of a non-transparent resin material.

The front side plate portion H341a is a member that divides the light irradiation area of the LEDs (light emitting diodes) H342a of the substrate member H342 described below, and has multiple openings H341a1 that open at positions corresponding to the LEDs H342a of the substrate member H342.

The mounting member H341 is made of a non-transparent resin material, so that the light of the LED H342a of the substrate member H342 is emitted to the front side (the direction of the arrow F) through the opening H341a1, thereby preventing the light irradiation area of the LED H342a of the substrate member H342 from spreading too much. As a result, the light emission colors of the multiple LEDs are prevented from mixing, and the decorative unit H330 (decorative plate H335) can be made to emit light in different colors for each area.

The front side panel portion H341a of the mounting member H341 is disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the decorative plate H335 via the front panel H331, so that the patterns, characters, letters, and other information (letters in this embodiment) drawn on the decorative plate H335 can be partially illuminated in different colors.

The upper edge H341b is a portion that prevents the light emitted from the LED H342a from leaking upward (in the direction of the arrow U) through the opening H341a1 of the front side plate H341a, and is formed to a size that allows the end on the front side (in the direction of the arrow F) to abut against the back surface of the front plate H331.

The upper side surface of the upper edge H341b has an uneven surface H341b1 formed in an uneven shape. The uneven surface H341b1 is formed with the apexes of the protrusions extending in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is formed so that multiple protrusions and recesses appear in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R).

The lower edge H341c is a portion that prevents the light emitted from the LED H342a from leaking downward (in the direction of the arrow D) through the opening H341a1 of the front side plate H341a, and is formed to a size that allows the end on the front side (in the direction of the arrow F) to abut against the back surface of the front plate H331.

The lower side of the lower edge H341c has an uneven surface H341c1 formed in an uneven shape. The uneven surface H341b1 is formed with the apexes of the protrusions extending in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and is formed so that multiple protrusions and recesses appear in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The partitioning section H341d is a section that partitions the light of the LED H342a emitted between the partitioning section H341d and the lower edge section H341c through the opening H341a1 of the front side panel section H341a, and is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance up and down (in the direction of arrows U-D) from the lower edge section H341c, and is formed large enough so that its end on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) abuts against the back surface of the front panel H331. This allows the light emission mode of the upper decorative unit H14a to be changed (partitioned) between the upper and lower areas when viewed from the front.

The partition H341d is also set so that its erection distance toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) is greater than the erection distance toward the front side of the lower edge H341c. This makes it easier for the partition H341d to reflect light emitted between the partition H341d and the lower edge H341c downward. In other words, it makes it easier for light to be irradiated toward the player (downward) from the upper decorative unit H14a arranged on the upper side of the pachinko machine H10. As a result, the light-based presentation can more easily heighten the player's interest.

The board member H342 has a number of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) H342a arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) that emit light. The LEDs H342a are formed so that they can emit light toward the front side of the board member H342. In addition, a connector H342b that connects the wiring connected to the board member H342 is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction) of the board member H342.

The board member H342 is capable of emitting light from the LED H342a by connecting wiring through the opening H311a of the base member H311 to the connector H342b. The board member H342 is also disposed on the back side of the mounting member H341 by engaging with an engagement portion formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front side plate portion H341a of the mounting member H341.

The covering member H343 is a member that covers the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the base member H342, and is formed so that its outer shape in a front view is larger than that of the base member H342. It is fastened to the mounting member H341 by a screw that is inserted from the rear side.

The covering member H343 is formed in a box shape with its center bulging out toward the rear side (arrow B direction) when viewed from the front, and its center opening on the front side (arrow F direction). Furthermore, the covering member H343 is provided with a partition wall H343b erected upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction) when viewed from the front, and the tip of the partition wall H343b abuts against the upper panel H332 when the upper decorative unit H14a is assembled.

The partition wall H343b extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and when the upper decorative unit H14a is assembled, the front side of the partition wall H343b (arrow F direction side) and the back side of the partition wall H343b are separated by the partition wall H343b.

The opening shape of the center of the covering member H343 when viewed from the front is formed to be very similar to the outer shape of the substrate member H342 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the covering member H343 is arranged on the mounting member H341, it is possible to prevent the covering member H343 from abutting against the back surface of the substrate member H342 arranged on the back side of the mounting member H341. This allows heat generated in the substrate member H342 by emitting light from the LED H342a to be released into the internal space of the covering member H343. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the substrate member H342 (LED H342a).

The covering member H343 also has a through hole (not shown) formed at the end that bulges out toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B). Through this through hole, heat generated by the covering member H342 can be released to the outside of the covering member H343, and wiring connected to the connector H342b of the board member H342 can be inserted.

The covering member H343 is formed from a non-transparent resin material. This makes it possible to prevent the light from being emitted to the rear side through the covering member H343, even if the light emitted from the LED H342a of the substrate member H342 is reflected toward the rear side. As a result, it becomes easier to make the light from the LED H342a emit from a specified area, making it easier to improve the presentation effect of the light.

The sound transmission units H350 are disposed at positions corresponding to the pair of speaker assemblies H312 disposed on the base unit H310 when viewed from the front, with one pair disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of each pair of speaker assemblies H312.

In this embodiment, the shapes of the pair of sound transmission units H350 are slightly different between the left and right, but the main configuration is the same between the left and right, so the left and right units are given the same reference numerals and will be described with reference to the sound transmission unit H350 that is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front.

The sound transmission unit H350 mainly comprises a speaker cover H27, which is a thin plate member formed from punched metal, and a first holding member H351 and a second holding member H352 arranged in front of and behind the speaker cover H27 (in the direction of the arrows F-B), and is arranged inside a pair of mounting spaces H300F formed in the decorative unit H330.

The speaker cover H27 is a protective member that allows sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) to pass through and prevents objects from being inserted into the speaker H312a, and is disposed along the diaphragm (the part that produces sound) of the speaker H312a.

In addition, the speaker cover H27 has multiple through holes formed in the area that overlaps with the front side (arrow F direction) of the speaker H312a, and sound emitted (output) from the front side of the speaker H312a through the through holes can be emitted to the outside of the upper decorative unit H14a.

The through hole of the speaker cover H27 is formed with a diameter of about 2 mm, so that it is difficult for a player's fingers or unauthorized objects to be inserted through it. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering with the diaphragm of the speaker H312a and to prevent damage to the speaker H312a.

In addition, in this embodiment, the slits H331a1 of the front plate H331 are arranged at a predetermined interval on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the speaker cover H27. As a result, even if an unauthorized member can be inserted through the slits H331a1 to the speaker H312a side, the unauthorized member can be deflected by the predetermined gap to the speaker cover H27, preventing the unauthorized member from being inserted directly into the through hole of the speaker cover H27. As a result, tampering with the diaphragm of the speaker H312a can be prevented, and damage to the speaker H312a can be prevented.

The first holding member H351 and the second holding member H352 are members that hold the speaker cover H27, are formed with an outer shape larger than the speaker cover H27, and are disposed in front of and behind the speaker cover H27 (in the direction of the arrows F-B).

The first holding member H351 and the second holding member H352 are provided with a first opening H351a and a second opening H352a that open in the center (corresponding to the area where the through hole of the speaker cover H27 is formed) so that the sound emitted through the speaker cover H27 is not blocked, and the sound emitted (output) from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the speaker H312a can be emitted to the outside of the upper decorative unit H14a through the first opening H351a, the second opening H352a and the through hole of the speaker cover H27.

Furthermore, the speaker cover H27 is disposed in a position where it abuts against the front flange H312a1 of the speaker H312a. This allows sound emitted (output) from the front side (arrow F direction) of the speaker H312a to be emitted to the front side of the sound transmission unit H350 through the through hole of the speaker cover H27.

On the other hand, the sound emitted (output) from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the speaker H312a is prevented from flowing around to the front side of the sound transmission unit H350 because the front side (arrow F direction) of the speaker H312a is blocked by the sound transmission unit H350 (the front side and rear side of the speaker H312a are partitioned by the sound transmission unit H350). In other words, the sound emitted (output) from the rear side of the speaker H312a and emitted into the second space H300B through the opening H312b1 is prevented from flowing around to the first space H300A described below.

That is, by arranging the sound transmission unit H350 and the speaker H312a in each of the pair of arrangement spaces H300F of the decorative unit H300, the front side and the rear side of the arrangement space H300F are partitioned, and a first space H300A is formed on the front side of the speaker H312a and a second space H300B is formed on the rear side of the speaker H312a.

The sound transmission unit H350 is configured as a set of units by screwing a screw inserted from the rear side of the second holding member H352 into the first holding member H351 with the speaker cover H27 sandwiched between the first holding member H351 and the second holding member H352. The sound transmission unit H350 configured as a set of units can be fastened to the decorative unit H330 together with the light-emitting unit H340 by screwing a screw inserted from the rear side of the second holding member H352 into the covering member H343.

Next, referring to FIG. 1847, the emission of sound from the sound emission opening H333b will be described. FIG. 1847 is a front view of the upper decorative unit H14a. Note that in FIG. 1847, the decorative unit H330 is shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 1847, the upper decorative unit H14a has a first holding member H351 and a second holding member H352 arranged in a manner that surrounds the periphery of the speaker cover H27 when viewed from the front (i.e., the front side and rear side of the speaker H312a are partitioned by the sound transmission unit H350 and the speaker H312a, forming a first space H300A that partitions the front side of the installation space H300F, and forming a second space H300B that partitions the rear side of the installation space H300F).

This allows sound to be emitted (output) from the speaker H312a toward the front side (arrow F direction), and prevents the sound emitted to the front side of the speaker cover H27 through the through hole in the speaker cover H27 from reaching the rear side (arrow B direction) of the sound transmission unit H350 (first holding member H351 and second holding member H352).

The decorative unit H330 (see FIG. 1845) is disposed so as to surround the front side (arrow F direction) of the sound transmission unit H350 and the light-emitting unit H340, and the light-emitting unit H340 is disposed between a pair of sound transmission units H350 disposed on the left and right (arrow L-R direction). This forms a first space H300A (see FIG. 1847) surrounded by the decorative unit H330, light-emitting unit H340, and sound transmission unit H350 on the front side of each speaker cover H27.

Therefore, sound emitted to the front side (arrow F direction) of the left speaker cover H27 can be transmitted to the left first space H300A through the through hole of the left speaker cover H27, and sound emitted to the front side of the speaker cover H27 can be transmitted to the right first space H300A through the through hole of the right speaker cover H27.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1847, a sound emission opening H333b is formed in the lower panel H333 in the area forming the first space H300A. This allows the sound emitted into the first space H300A through the through hole of the speaker cover H27 to be emitted not only from the slit H331a1 of the front panel H331, but also from the sound emission opening H333b. This allows the sound emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the speaker H312a to be emitted from the front side (slit H331a1 side) and lower side (sound emission opening H333b side) of the upper decorative unit H14a.

That is, in the upper decorative unit H14a in the 111th embodiment, the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a can be emitted from two locations: the slit H331a1 on the front side of the speaker H312a, and the sound emission opening H333b on the lower side of the speaker H312a. This allows the sound to be suitably diffused (spread) outside the pachinko machine H10, improving the manner in which the sound is output. As a result, the presentation effect of the sound can be enhanced.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the slit H331a1 and the sound emission opening H333b are opened in different directions with respect to the first space H300A, so sound can be emitted from the first space H300A in two different directions. This allows the sound to be diffused (spread) three-dimensionally, improving the manner in which the sound is output. As a result, the dramatic effect of the sound can be enhanced.

The sound emission opening H333b is formed closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper decorative unit (pachinko machine H10) than the position where the speaker H312a is arranged. This makes it easier for sound emitted from the lower side of the upper decorative unit H14a via the sound emission opening H333b to be transmitted to the center of the pachinko machine H10 when viewed from the front. As a result, it is easier for players playing the pachinko machine H10 to hear the sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H14a.

In addition, as described above, the sound emission opening H333b is formed at a position that connects the speaker H312a (speaker cover H27) and the third pattern display device H81 (see FIG. 1839) of the game board H13 when viewed from the front. In other words, the sound emission opening H333b is formed at a position between the speaker H312a (speaker cover H27) and the third pattern display device H81 when viewed from the front.

This makes it possible to prevent a difference from occurring between the timing at which the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a (sound emission opening H333b) is heard by the player and the timing at which the effect displayed on the third pattern display device H81 is visually recognized by the player. This makes it easier for the player to associate the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a (sound emission opening H333b) with the effect displayed on the third pattern display device H81.

In the 111th embodiment, the sound output opening H333b is described as being formed between the speaker H312a (speaker cover H27) and the third pattern display device H81, but the sound output opening H333b may be formed between another display device, not the third pattern display device H81. For example, the sound output opening H333b may be formed between the front side (arrow F direction side) of the third pattern display device H81 and the displacement area of the flower rotation unit G400 (see FIG. 1910) which is formed to be displaceable, and sound may be output from the speaker H312a (sound output opening H333b) in accordance with the displacement of the flower rotation unit G400.

Next, referring to Figures 1848 and 1849, the sound transmission path formed inside the upper decorative unit H14a will be described. Figure 1848 is a front view of the upper decorative unit H14a and the right decorative unit H14c, Figure 1849(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H14a taken along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848, and Figure 1849(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H14a taken along line MDCCCXLIXb in Figure 1848. Note that Figures 1848 and 1849 show the state in which the right decorative unit H14c is arranged on the upper decorative unit H14a. Note that in Figures 1848 and 1849, the structure of each component is simplified to facilitate understanding.

As shown in Figures 1848 and 1849(a), the front panel H331 and the mounting member H341 of the upper decorative unit H14a are arranged on the front panel H331 with a predetermined gap (first communication passage H300C (see Figure 1849(a))) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) between the inner surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the outer edge portion H331b and the upper edge portion H341b of the mounting member H341.

The gap formed between the inner surface of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the outer edge H331b and the upper edge H341b of the mounting member H341 is blocked on the front side (arrow F direction) by the main body H331a of the front plate H331 and on the back side (arrow B direction) by the partition wall H343b of the covering member H343, leaving a predetermined gap in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction). This forms a first communication passage H300C of space extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) above the upper decorative unit H14a.

The first communication passage H300C has both ends extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) that communicate with the first space H300A formed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the speaker cover H27. As a result, the first spaces H300A formed on the front side of the pair of speaker covers H27 are connected by the first communication passage H300C.

Therefore, sound is emitted (output) from each speaker H312a toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) and emitted into the first space H300A on the front side of the speaker cover H27 through the through hole of the speaker cover H27, and can be emitted to the outside of the upper decorative unit H14a through the slit H331a1 or sound emission opening H333b of the adjacent first space H300A via the first communication passage H300C.

In other words, the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a arranged on one side (e.g., the left side) can be diverted to the front side of the speaker H312a on the other side (e.g., the right side) and emitted from the upper decorative unit H14a.

Here, if the first communication passage H300C is not provided (i.e., the pair of installation spaces H300F are not connected), the sound emitted (output) from each speaker H312a can only be emitted from the upper decorative unit H14a via the first space H300A on the front side (arrow F direction side) of each speaker H312a. Therefore, if the first communication passage H300C is not provided, if one side of the pair of speakers H312a is damaged, sound will only be emitted from the other side of the upper decorative unit H14a. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, in the 111th embodiment, the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a arranged on one side can be diverted to the front side (the direction of arrow F) of the speaker H312a arranged on the other side and emitted from the upper decorative unit H14a, so that even if one of the pair of speakers H312a is damaged, the sound emitted from the other speaker H312a can be emitted from both sides of the upper decorative unit H14a. As a result, even if one of the pair of speakers H312a is damaged, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the player from stopping playing.

Next, as shown in Figures 1847 and 1848(b), the lower plate H333 is disposed on the covering member H343 with a predetermined gap (second communication passage H300D (see Figure 1849(b))) between the lower plate H333 and the covering member H343 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The gap formed between the lower panel H333 and the covering member H343 in the up-down direction (arrows U-D direction) is blocked on the front side (arrow F direction) by the partition wall H333c of the lower panel H333, and on the back side (arrow B direction) by the base member H311. In other words, there is also a predetermined gap (second communication passage H300D) in the front-to-back direction (arrows F-B direction), and a second communication passage H300D extending in the left-to-right direction (arrows L-R direction) is formed below the upper decorative unit H14a.

The second communication passage H300D has both ends extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) that communicate with the second space H300B formed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the speaker H312a. As a result, the second spaces H300B formed on the rear side of the pair of speakers H312a are connected by the second communication passage H300D.

This allows the sound emitted from each speaker H312a toward the rear side and into the second space H300B through the opening H312b1 to be transmitted into the second communication passage H300D.

A detection opening H333a is formed in the portion of the lower plate H333 that forms the inner wall on the lower side of the second communication passage H300D. As a result, sound transmitted through the second space H300B is emitted from the detection opening H333a and is emitted from the lower side of the upper decorative unit H14a.

This allows the sound emitted (output) from the rear side of the speaker H312a arranged on one side and the sound emitted (output) from the rear side of the speaker H312a arranged on the other side to be combined in the second space H300B and emitted from the detection opening H333a. Therefore, even if either the speaker H312a arranged on one side or the speaker H312a arranged on the other side (for example, one side) is damaged and sound is no longer emitted (output) from the speaker H312a on one side, the sound emitted (output) from the undamaged speaker H312a on the other side can be emitted from the detection opening H333a, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the detection opening H333a in the 111th embodiment can serve to pass the detection light and reflected light of the detection device H313, and to emit sound to the outside of the upper decorative unit H14a. Therefore, the number of openings formed in the lower panel H333 can be reduced. As a result, the rigidity of the lower panel H333 can be prevented from decreasing.

Furthermore, since wiring etc. is connected to the speaker H312a from the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) by a connector, if an illegal member is inserted on the rear side of the speaker H312a, the pachinko machine H10 can be easily tampered with by the illegal member. However, since the structure is such that a detection device H313 is disposed in the part where sound is emitted from the second communication passage H300D formed on the rear side of the speaker H312a, the detection device H313 can detect the insertion of an illegal member inside the upper decorative unit H14a. As a result, it is possible to prevent play from continuing with an illegal member inserted.

The detection device H313 is configured to check for any tampering when it detects whether any tampering has been performed, such as when the power to the pachinko machine H10 is turned on or when a jackpot on the pachinko machine H10 ends, and when the detection device H313 does not detect a person's hand or finger on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the game board H13.

Due to the characteristics of the cone-shaped speaker H312a, the sound emitted from the front side (arrow F direction) and the sound emitted from the rear side (arrow B direction) are in an anti-phase relationship. Therefore, if the sound emitted from the front side and the sound emitted from the rear side are combined (mixed), there is a risk that these sounds will cancel each other out.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sound emitted from the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the speaker H312a and the sound emitted from the rear side of the speaker H312a can be emitted from the upper decorative unit H14a through different paths in the upper decorative unit H14a, thereby preventing the sound emitted from the front side and the sound emitted from the rear side from cancelling each other out.

In particular, in the speaker H312a in the 111th embodiment, a protective cover is provided on the front side, and the sound emitted (output) into the first space H300A on the front side is of higher frequency than the sound emitted (output) into the second space H300B on the rear side, making it easier for the player to hear. As described above, by preventing the sound emitted (output) into the second space H300B on the rear side from leaking into the first space H300A on the front side, it is possible to prevent the easy-to-hear sound emitted (output) into the first space H300A from becoming difficult to hear. As a result, the presentation effect of the sound can be enhanced.

In addition, by transmitting the sound emitted from the rear side of the speaker H312a through a different path (second communication passage H300D) from the sound emitted from the front side of the speaker H312a (the side in the direction of arrow F), the range of the sound emitted from the front side of the speaker H312a and the sound emitted from the rear side of the speaker H312a can be changed. As a result, the range of sounds audible to the player can be increased, increasing the player's interest.

In the 111th embodiment, the slit H331a1 (opening) for emitting sound is not formed in the second space H300B formed on the rear side of the speaker H312a, but is formed in the first space H300A formed on the front side of the speaker H312a (the slit H331a1 (opening) is formed on the front side of the speaker H312a arranged in the arrangement space H300F), and the first spaces H300A on the side where the slit H331a1 is formed are connected by the first communication passage H300C, so that sounds in a frequency band that is easy for the player to hear (high quality sounds) can be guided from the first space H300A through the first communication passage H300C to the first space H300A on the other side.

Therefore, if one of the pair of speakers H312a fails, the sound emitted (output) from the other speaker H312a and emitted from the first space H300A in which the one speaker H312a is disposed via the first communication path H300C can be easily heard by the player. As a result, if one of the pair of speakers H312a fails, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Next, the right side decorative unit H14c will be described with reference to Figures 1850 to 1857. First, the overall configuration of the right side decorative unit H14c will be described with reference to Figures 1850 to 1853.

Figure 1850 (a) is a front view of the right side decorative unit H14c, Figure 1850 (b) is a side view of the right side decorative unit H14c, Figure 1851 (a) is an exploded front oblique view of the right side decorative unit H14c, Figure 1851 (b) is an exploded rear oblique view of the right side decorative unit H14c, Figure 1852 (a) is an exploded front oblique view of the weight plate units H400L, H400R, Figure 1852 (b) is an exploded rear oblique view of the weight plate units H400L, H400R, and Figure 1853 is a front view of the support plate portion H410.

In addition, Figure 1850(b) shows the side of the right decorative unit H14c when viewed from the inside to the outside (arrow R direction) of the pachinko machine H10. Also, in Figure 1853, the outline of the end of the rear side (arrow B direction) of the light-guiding member H440 of the left stacking plate unit H400L is shown by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in Figures 1850 to 1852, the right decorative unit H14c mainly comprises a left stacking board unit H400L and a right stacking board unit H400R that are stacked in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion H410 to which the stacking board units H400L, H400R are fastened and fixed, and which is fastened and fixed to the main frame H14d (see Figure 1840).

The weight plate units H400L, H400R are fastened to the support plate H410 by screws inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the support plate H410 to the front side (arrow F direction). The right side decorative unit H14c is fastened to the main frame H14d by screws inserted from the rear side to the front side of the main frame H14d with the weight plate units H400L, H400R fastened to the support plate H410.

The support plate portion H410 mainly comprises a fixed plate H411 that is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the right side (arrow R direction side) of the main body frame H14d in the assembled state, and a base member H412 that is disposed on the front side of an area extending vertically from the fixed plate H411.

The fixing plate H411 mainly comprises an extension portion H411a formed in a generally L-shape with the top and bottom (arrows U-D direction) and left and right (arrows L-R direction) inverted when viewed from the front (arrow B direction), and an inner edge portion H411c and an outer edge portion H411d that stand up toward the rear side along the outer edge of the rear side (arrow B direction side) facing the main body frame H14d, and the cross section is formed into a generally C-shape by the extension portion H411a, the outer edge portion H411d, and the inner edge portion H411c.

The inner edge portion H411c is formed along the outer edge of the extension portion H411a on the inner side of the pachinko machine H10 when viewed from the front, and the outer edge portion H411d is formed along the outer edge of the extension portion H411a on the outer side of the pachinko machine H10 when viewed from the front.

The distance that the inner edge portion H411c is erected toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) is set to be smaller than the distance that the outer edge portion H411d is erected toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) from the extension portion H411a by the thickness of the glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1837) in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B). This prevents the glass unit H16 from partially protruding toward the rear side relative to the front frame H14 when the glass unit H16 is disposed on the inner edge portion H411c (main body frame H14d).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837), the inner walls (left side wall and lower wall) of the outer edge portion H411d are in contact with the outer surface of the main frame H14d, and the inner wall (right side wall) of the inner edge portion H411c is disposed on the inner surface of the main frame H14d with a predetermined distance between them. That is, the fixing plate H411 is disposed on the main frame H14d with the right side of the main frame H14d sandwiched between the outer edge portion H411d and the inner edge portion H411c.

The fixing plate H411 mainly comprises a plurality of right-side fastening holes H411a1 drilled on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the area where the substrate member H412 is attached, a support hole H411a2 drilled in the fixing plate H411 to the right of the right-side fastening holes H411a1, and a left-side fastening hole H411a3 drilled in the fixing plate H411 on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the area where the substrate member H412 is attached.

The extension portion H411a is formed to a size that overlaps the substrate member H412 when viewed from the front. The extension portion H411a also has a base portion H411b that projects in a platform shape toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) in the area where the substrate member H412 is disposed, and the substrate member H412 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate H411 in a state where it is in face-to-face contact with the front side of the base portion H411b. In this embodiment, the substrate member H412 is fastened and fixed to the base portion H411b by a screw inserted from the front side and screwed into the extension portion H411a.

When the front frame H14 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 1850(a)), the outer side of the base portion H411b in the width direction (arrow L-R direction) can abut against the weight plate units H400L, H400R. This makes it possible to prevent the weight plate units H400L, H400R from tilting left and right (arrow L-R direction). In other words, it becomes easier to maintain the position of the weight plate units H400L, H400R relative to the support plate portion H410.

On the right side (arrow R direction) of the fixed plate H411, the extension portion H411a is formed at a position shifted to the right by the combined thickness of the outer cover member H470, first outer lens member H450, and second outer lens member H460 of the right stacking plate unit H400R described later. This allows the rear side (arrow B direction) ends of the outer cover member H470, first outer lens member H450, and second outer lens member H460 to abut against the support plate portion H410 on the front side (arrow F direction) of the extension portion H411a.

On the other hand, on the left side (arrow L direction) of the fixed plate H411, the side of the base portion H411b and the side of the inner edge portion H411c are formed at approximately the same surface position, and in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), the rear side (arrow B direction) end of the inner cover member H420 of the left stacking plate unit H400L described later can be positioned at the same surface position as the rear side end of the inner edge portion H411c, and in the assembled state, the inner edge portion of the rear side end portion H421b of the inner cover member H420 abuts against part of the inner edge portion H411c of the fixed plate H411.

The substrate member H412 is an electronic board (printed circuit board) on which multiple LEDs (light emitting diodes) H412a are arranged on the front side. The multiple LEDs H412a are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction (arrow L-R direction) and are arranged in a curved row that matches the curved shape of the light guiding member H440 described below (see FIG. 1853). In other words, the multiple LEDs H412a are arranged inside the shape of the light guiding member H440 projected from the front side, and irradiate light from the back side of the light guiding member H440 (arrow B direction) toward the light guiding member H440 with their optical axes parallel to each other.

The width of the end face of the light-guiding member H440 on the LEDH412a side is made longer than the width of the LEDH412a (the left-right width of the light-emitting portion). Therefore, the light emitted from the LEDH412a enters the light-guiding member H440 without leaking outside in the width direction of the light-guiding member H440, and is emitted from one of the faces of the light-guiding member H440.

The LED H412a1, which is disposed at the top end of the row of LEDs H412a, is disposed above the light-guiding member H440 and can irradiate its light onto the partition wall H478 of the outer cover member H470. The light irradiated onto the partition wall H478 will be described later.

The right side fastening hole H411a1 positions the rear fastening portion H476 formed on the outer cover member H470 of the right stacking plate unit H400R described later, the rear fastening portion H456 formed on the first outer lens member H450, and the rear fastening portion H465 formed on the second outer lens member H460, and is a hole through which screws are inserted from the rear side to fasten the rear fastening portions H456, H465, and H476. By screwing the screws into the rear fastening portions H456, H465, and H476, the outer cover member H470, the first outer lens member H450, and the second outer lens member H460 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion H410.

The left side fastening hole H411a3 positions the rear side fastening portion H428 formed on the inner cover member H420 of the left stacking plate unit H400L described later and the rear side fastening portion H431b1 formed on the inner lens member H430, and is a hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side to fasten the rear side fastening portions H428, H431b1. By screwing the screw into the rear side fastening portions H428, H431b1, the inner cover member H420 and the inner lens member H430 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion H410.

The support hole H411a2 is a through hole through which the protrusion H479 of the outer cover member H470 is inserted. The support hole H411a2 is formed in a long rectangular shape in the up-down direction (arrow U-B direction) when viewed from the front, and is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the protrusion H479. This allows the end on the back side (arrow B direction) of the outer cover member H470 to abut against the front side of the extension portion H411a while defining the position of the outer cover member H470 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

Next, the left stacking plate unit H400L will be described with reference to Figures 1852 and 1854. Figure 1854 is an exploded front oblique view of the left stacking plate unit H400L. As shown in Figures 1852 and 1854, the left stacking plate unit H400L mainly comprises an inner cover member H420 that forms the right side of the window portion H14e (see Figure 1833) and has an opening that can transmit light, an inner lens member H430 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member H420 from the right side and is formed from a light-transmitting colorless resin material, and a light-guiding member H440 that is arranged opposite the right stacking plate unit H400R.

The inner cover member H420 includes a main body plate portion H421 formed in a long plate shape in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U and D), an upper opening H422 and a lower opening H423 drilled at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion H421, a plurality of openings H424 opened in the main body plate portion H421, a cylindrical portion inserted into the light guide member H440 and into which a screw is screwed to fix the light guide member H440 to the inner cover member H420, and a cylindrical portion inserted into the inner lens member H430 and into which the inner cover member H420 is fastened. It mainly comprises a plurality of second fastening parts H426 into which screws for fixing to the member H420 are screwed, a plurality of third fastening parts H427 which are cylindrical parts formed longer than the first fastening parts H425 and the second fastening parts H426 and inserted into the inner lens member H430 and the light guide member H440, into which screws for fixing the inner lens member H430 and the light guide member H440 to the inner cover member H420 are screwed, and a plurality of rear fastening parts H428 which protrude from the right side of the main body plate part H421 and into which screws for fixing the support plate part H410 from the rear side are screwed.

When viewed from the side (when viewed from the inside to the outside of the pachinko machine H10), the front end H421a forming the end on the front side (arrow F direction) of the main body plate H421 is shaped like a wave, and is entirely made of a colored, non-transparent resin material. In addition, the back end H421b forming the end on the back side (arrow B direction) of the main body plate H421 extends in a substantially straight line in the vertical direction (arrows U-D direction) when viewed from the side, and when the right side decorative unit H14c is in an assembled state, the back end H421b is positioned at a position substantially identical in the front-to-back direction (arrows F-B direction) to the back end of the inner edge H411c of the fixing plate H411.

The main body plate portion H421 also has an upper cover portion H421a1 that stands upright toward the right weight plate unit H400R at a portion above the front end portion H421a (a portion located above the lower lens portion H432 of the inner lens member H430). The upper cover portion H421a1 is formed to a size that allows the standing tip portion to abut against the right weight plate unit H400R (outer cover member H470) when the right weight plate unit H400R and the left weight plate unit H400L are combined. In other words, the upper front surface of the left weight plate unit H400L is covered by the upper cover portion H421a1.

On the other hand, below the upper cover portion H421a1 of the main body plate portion H421 (in the direction of arrow D), a predetermined gap is formed between the front end portion H421a and the right stacking plate unit H400R (second outer lens member H460), and the inner lens member H430 is interposed in the gap. In other words, the lower side of the right decorative unit H14c is in a state in which the inner lens member H430 and the second outer lens member H460 protrude from between the inner cover member H420 and the outer cover member H470 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F).

The main body plate portion H421 is not limited to being formed to be non-transparent, and may be formed entirely from a resin material that allows light to pass through, or may be formed partially from a resin material that allows light to pass through, or may be formed from a colorless, transparent resin material, or a translucent resin material.

The upper opening H422 and the lower opening H423 are openings through which screws are inserted into the outer cover member H470 (fastening portion H472), and are formed at positions shifted outward in the vertical direction (arrows U-D direction) from the inner lens member H430 and the light guide member H440 arranged on the main body plate portion H421. The screws inserted into the upper opening H422 and the lower opening H423 are screwed into the fastening portion H472 of the outer cover member H470, thereby fixing the inner cover member H420 to the outer cover member H470.

The openings H424 are arranged in three positions, one above the other, and function as viewing windows for the inner lens member H430 in the assembled state. Each opening H424 is formed in a curved, roughly crescent shape in side view, and the area that opens from the lower opening H424 toward the upper opening H424 is enlarged. The edge where the openings H424 of the main body plate portion H421 are formed is curved toward the inner lens member H430 (the side in the direction of arrow R), which prevents gaps from being formed between the inner cover member H420 and the inner lens member H430.

The first fastening portion H425 is formed mainly on the edge of the front side (arrow F direction) of the main body plate portion H421, and when the light guide member H440 and the inner lens member H430 are stacked in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a part of the light guide member H440 protruding from the inner lens member H430 is fastened to the first fastening portion H425. In other words, the light guide member H440 is fastened and fixed to the first fastening portion H425 without going through the inner lens member H430.

The second fastening portion H426 is formed mainly in the central region of the main body plate portion H421 in a side view, and the inner lens member H430 is fastened to it. In other words, only the inner lens member H430 is fastened and fixed to the second fastening portion H426.

The third fastening portion H427 is formed mainly on the edge of the back side (arrow B direction) of the main body plate portion H421, and is formed in the area where the inner lens member H430 and the light guide member H440 overlap when the light guide member H440 and the inner lens member H430 are stacked in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The third fastening portion H427 is formed to a length that allows the inner lens member H430 and the light guide member H440 to be inserted when stacked left-right, and is fastened with the inner lens member H430 and the light guide member H440 inserted.

That is, the inner lens member H430 is fastened to the inner cover member H420 by the second fastening portion H426 and the third fastening portion H427, and the light guide member H440 is fastened to the inner cover member H420 by the first fastening portion H425 and the third fastening portion H427.

The inner lens member H430 is disposed between the inner cover member H420 and the light guide member H440, and transmits the light emitted from the light guide member H440 to emit it from the opening H424 of the inner cover member H420 and the front side (arrow F direction side) of the inner cover member H420. The entire inner lens member H430 is made of a transparent resin material.

The inner lens member H430 mainly comprises an upper lens portion H431 formed at a position covering the three openings H424 of the inner cover member H420, and a lower lens portion H432 disposed below the upper lens portion H431. The upper lens portion H431 and the lower lens portion H432 are fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted from the lower lens portion H432 side into the upper lens portion H431, and the lower lens portion H432 is disposed at a position closer to the light guide member H440 side (right stacking plate unit H400R) than the upper lens portion H431.

The upper lens portion H431 is a portion visible from inside the opening H424, and is formed to a size that covers the three openings H424. The upper lens portion H431 mainly includes a bulging portion H431a that bulges out in a bowl shape toward the inside of the opening H424 at a position corresponding to the opening H424, a rear side erecting portion H431b that erects toward the light guide member H440 along the edge of the rear side (arrow B direction side), a first opening H431c and a second opening H431d that are drilled at a position connected to the rear side erecting portion H431b, and a rear side fastening portion H431b1 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear side from the rear side erecting portion H431b.

The bulge portion H431a is a portion that fits into the openings H424, and is formed with an outer shape that corresponds to each opening H424. In other words, when the right decorative unit H14c is assembled, the bulge portion H431a protrudes from the openings H424 to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c.

In addition, the bulge portion H431a has an uneven surface formed on the side facing the light-guiding member H440, and this uneven surface allows light entering the bulge portion H431a (upper lens portion H431) to be diffused through the opening H424 and emitted to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c.

On the other hand, the bulge portion H431a is formed with a smooth surface with few irregularities on the side that fits into the opening H424 (i.e., the portion that protrudes from the opening H424 to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c). This maintains the light diffusion properties of the bulge portion H431a while preventing foreign matter (dust, dirt, etc.) from accumulating (entering) on the outer surface of the bulge portion H431a, improving the cleanability of the bulge portion H431a.

The rear side erection portion H431b is set at a height that abuts against the side of the light-guiding member H440. This allows the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the light-guiding member H440 to be abutted against the upper lens portion H431 (the inner lens member H430), thereby forming a predetermined space in the center in the front-to-rear direction of the right side decorative unit H14c (between the inner lens member H430 and the light-guiding member H440). This makes it possible to prevent heat from building up inside the right side decorative unit H14c.

The first opening H431c is formed at a position corresponding to the second fastening portion H426 of the inner cover member H420. This allows a screw inserted through the first opening H431c to be screwed into the second fastening portion H426 of the inner cover member H420 to fasten the inner cover member H420 and the inner lens member H430 together.

The second opening H431d is formed at a position corresponding to the third fastening portion H427 of the inner cover member H420 and the second opening H445 of the light guide member H440, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer shape of the third fastening portion H427. As described above, the third fastening portion H427 is formed with a length that allows it to be inserted through the second opening H431d of the inner lens member H430, and when inserted inside the second opening H431d, a screw is inserted through the second opening H445 of the light guide member H440.

The upper lens portion H431 is formed to a size such that its end on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first fastening portion H425 of the inner cover member H420 is located on the rear side (arrow B direction side). Therefore, when the right decorative unit H14c is assembled, a predetermined gap is formed between the front side end of the upper lens portion H431 and the upper cover portion H421a1 of the inner cover member H420, and the first fastening portion H425 of the inner cover member H420 is positioned in the gap. This allows a screw inserted through the first opening H444 of the light-guiding member H440 to be screwed into the first fastening portion H425 of the inner cover member H420 without passing through the upper lens portion H431 (inner lens member H430).

As described above, the lower lens portion H432 is a portion that protrudes to the front side from between the inner cover member H420 and the outer cover member H470 when the right decorative unit H14c is assembled, and the end portion on the front side is formed in a wavy shape.

In addition, an erected portion H432a is formed at the end of the front side (arrow F direction) of the lower lens portion H432, which is erected toward the outer cover member H470 side (arrow R direction). The erected portion H432a is formed to a size such that, when the light-guiding member H440 is arranged on the inner cover member H420, the erected tip is located closer to the right stacking plate unit side (arrow R direction) than the light-guiding member H440. In other words, the light-guiding member H440 is housed inside the erected portion H432a. This makes it possible for light emitted from the light-guiding member H440 to the front side (arrow F direction) to be emitted to the front side of the right decorative unit H14c via the erected portion H432a.

Furthermore, an opening H432b having the same function as the second opening H431d of the upper lens portion H431 is formed in a portion of the front side of the lower lens portion H432. This allows the lower lens portion H432 to be sandwiched between the inner cover member H420 and the light-guiding member H440 when the right decorative unit H14c is in an assembled state. This prevents the lower lens portion H432 from separating from the inner cover member H420, and prevents a gap from being formed between the inner cover member H420 and the lower lens portion H432.

As described above, the light guide member H440 is a member that guides the light emitted from the LED H412a of the substrate member H412, and is formed entirely from a colorless and transparent thermoplastic resin material. The light guide member H440 is also formed slightly smaller than the left stacking plate unit H400L in the state in which the inner cover member H420 and the inner lens member H430 are combined, and is fastened to the inner cover member H420 while being housed inside the inner cover member H420 and the inner lens member H430.

The thermoplastic resin used for the light-guiding member H440 is not particularly limited, but is preferably transparent, and examples of such resins include acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer compounds). By using acrylic resins in particular, it is possible to obtain a light-guiding member H440 with high average luminance and little decrease in luminance distribution.

The light guide member H440 mainly comprises a first uneven surface H441 formed on the side surface with a first unevenness, a second uneven surface H442 formed with a second unevenness different from the first unevenness, a plurality of entrance portions H443 formed protruding from the end portion on the rear side (arrow B direction side), a plurality of first openings H444 formed at positions along the edge portion on the front side, a plurality of second openings H445 formed at positions along the edge portion on the rear side, and a plurality of engagement portions H446 formed protruding from the edge portion on the front side toward the front side.

The first uneven surface H441 is formed primarily at a position corresponding to the bulge H431a of the inner lens member H430 and the lower lens portion H432. That is, the first uneven surface H441 is configured to primarily reflect the light incident from the LED H412a in the direction in which the inner cover member H420 and the outer cover member H470 are disposed (left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the light emitted from the bulge H431a of the upper lens portion H431 and the lower lens portion H432.

In this embodiment, the first uneven surface H441 is formed by pressing (hot pressing) a template having a pattern in which conical portions with an inclination angle of 45° to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at intervals of approximately 3 mm against a thermoplastic resin. Of the light irradiated from the LED H412a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted in a substantially perpendicular direction from the left and right side surfaces of the light-guiding member H440.

The second uneven surface H442 is formed mainly at a position corresponding to the portion connecting the upper lens portion H431 and the lower lens portion H432 of the inner lens member H430. In other words, it is formed at a position that is covered by the inner cover member H420 and is difficult for the player to see.

The second uneven surface H442 is formed to surround the periphery of the first uneven surface H441 on the side formed in a position corresponding to the bulge H431a of the inner lens member H430, and is formed in an uneven shape with the apexes of the convex portions extending up and down. This allows the second uneven surface H442 to reflect light incident from the back side of the light-guiding member H440 toward the front side up and down, diffusing the light toward the first uneven surface H441. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the first uneven surface H441 toward the player can be increased.

The incident portions H443 are formed one by one at positions corresponding to the LEDs H412a of the substrate member H412 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the light-guiding member H440. In addition, the protruding tip of the incident portion H443 is formed in a shape that curves toward the back side in a side view, and this curved shape allows the light incident from the LEDs H412a to be diffused in the vertical direction. As a result, even if the LEDs H412a are spaced apart in the vertical direction, light can be transmitted throughout the entire light-guiding member H440, and the number of LEDs H412a can be reduced.

The first opening H444 is an opening through which a screw is inserted into the first fastening portion H425 of the inner cover member H420, and is formed at a position corresponding to the first fastening portion H425. Therefore, by inserting a screw through the first opening H444 into the first fastening portion H425, the front side of the light guide member H440 can be fastened to the inner cover member H420.

The second opening H445 is an opening through which a screw is inserted to be fastened to the third fastening portion H427 of the inner cover member H420, and is formed at a position corresponding to the third fastening portion H427. Therefore, by screwing the screw inserted through the second opening H445 into the third fastening portion H427, the rear side of the light guide member H440 can be fastened to the inner cover member H420.

The engaging portion H446 is a portion that engages with the engaged portion H457 of the right stacking plate unit H400R described below, and is formed to a size that allows it to be inserted inside the engaged portion H457. The engaging portion H446 engages with the engaged portion H457 when the left stacking plate unit H400L and the right stacking plate unit H400R are assembled, and the engaging portion H446 is inserted into the engaged portion H457 by sliding the left stacking plate unit H400L from the rear side of the right stacking plate unit H400R to the front side. This makes it possible to prevent the front sides of the right stacking plate unit H400R and the left stacking plate unit H400L from displacing left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-R) away from each other.

Next, we will explain how to assemble the left weight plate unit H400L.

First, for the left stacking plate unit H400L, the inner lens member H430 is placed on the inner cover member H420 from the right side (the direction of the arrow R) of the inner cover member H420. In this case, the tip of the third fastening portion H427 of the inner cover member H420 is inserted into the first opening H431c, so that the inner lens member H430 can be placed in a positioned state on the inner cover member H420.

After the inner lens member H430 is disposed on the inner cover member H420, a screw that has passed through the second opening H431d of the inner lens member H430 is screwed into the second fastening portion H426 of the inner cover member H420, thereby fixing the inner lens member H430 to the inner cover member H420.

Next, with the inner lens member H430 fixed to the inner cover member H420, the light guide member H440 is placed on the inner cover member H420 from the right side (the direction of arrow R) of the inner cover member H420, and then a screw inserted through the second opening H445 of the light guide member H440 is screwed into the third fastening portion H427 of the inner cover member H420, and a screw inserted through the first opening H444 of the light guide member H440 is screwed into the first fastening portion H425 of the inner cover member H420, thereby fixing the light guide member H440 to the inner lens member H430. This completes the assembly of the left stacking plate unit H400L.

Next, the right stacking plate unit H400R will be described with reference to Figs. 1852 and 1855. Fig. 1855 is an exploded front perspective view of the right stacking plate unit H400R. As shown in Figs. 1852 and 1855, the right stacking plate unit H400R mainly comprises a first outer lens member H450 and a second outer lens member H460 arranged on the right side of the light guide member H440 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, and an outer cover member H470 arranged on the right side of the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460, which is made of a resin material that is not transparent to light, and to which the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 are fastened and fixed.

The outer cover member H470 is made up of a main body plate portion H471 formed in a vertically long plate shape, two fastening portions H472 formed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion H471, a plurality of openings H473 opened in the main body plate portion H471, a plurality of first fastening portions H474 which are cylindrical portions whose tips are inserted into the first outer lens member H450 and into which screws are screwed to fix the first outer lens member H450 to the outer cover member H470, and a plurality of fastening portions H474 which are formed shorter than the first fastening portions H474. It is a cylindrical portion that is inserted into the outer cover member H470, and is mainly composed of a plurality of second fastening portions H475 into which screws are screwed to fix the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 to the outer cover member H470, a plurality of rear fastening portions H476 that protrude from the left side surface of the main body plate portion H471 and into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion H410 from the rear side, and a protrusion H479 that protrudes from the rear side of the main body plate portion H471 and is inserted into the support hole H411a2 of the support plate portion H410.

When viewed from the side (in the direction of arrow L), the end of the main body plate H471 on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) is formed in a curved arc shape, while the end on the rear side extends linearly in the vertical direction, and the entire body is made of a non-transparent resin material. In addition, the main body plate H471 has an erect portion H477 that erects from the upper end toward the left stacking plate unit H400L, and is formed in a roughly L-shape that is inverted vertically (in the direction of arrows U-D) and horizontally (in the direction of arrows L-R) when viewed from the front.

The extension length of the main body plate portion H471 in the vertical direction (direction of the arrows U-D) is formed to a length that corresponds to the length of the support plate portion H410, and when the right stacking plate unit H400R is disposed on the support plate portion H410, it overlaps with the front side of the fixed plate H411.

The erected portion H477 constitutes the upper right side of the front frame H14 when viewed from the front, and is sized so that its tip, erected toward the upper decorative unit H14a when the front frame H14 is in an assembled state, abuts against the right end of the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a.

The erected portion H477 is also formed with a plurality of insertion portions H477a that are inserted into through holes H452a formed in the first outer lens member H450 described below. By disposing the first outer lens member H450 on the outer cover member H470 with the insertion portions H477a inserted into the through holes H452a, it is possible to prevent the bent portion H452 of the first outer lens member H450 that faces the erected portion H477 from being displaced relative to the erected portion H477.

The fastening portion H472 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to fix the left stacking plate unit H400L to the right stacking plate unit H400R, and is formed at a position corresponding to the upper opening H422 and lower opening H423 formed in the main plate portion H421 of the inner cover member H420. When the left stacking plate unit H400L and the right stacking plate unit H400R are assembled, the left stacking plate unit H400L is fixed to the right stacking plate unit H400R by screwing the screws inserted into the upper opening H422 and lower opening H423 of the inner cover member H420 into the fastening portion H472 of the outer cover member H470.

The multiple openings H473 are formed in positions and shapes corresponding to the multiple bulges H455 of the first outer lens member H450, and function as viewing windows for the first outer lens member H450 in the assembled state. In addition, the main body plate portion H471 has ribs erected on the first outer lens member H450 side along the opening edges of each opening H473, and the bulges H455 are inserted inside the ribs. This prevents gaps from being formed between the outer cover member H470 and the first outer lens member H450.

The rib formed along the edge of the opening H473 (hereinafter referred to as the "upper end opening H473a" (see FIG. 1857(b))) formed at the top of the main body plate portion H421 has a partition wall H478 that stands upright from the rib forming the lower side toward the left stacking plate unit H400L.

The partition wall H478 is formed to a size such that its erect tip is positioned above the light-guiding member H440 of the left stacking plate unit H400L. This makes it possible to prevent the light emitted from the light-guiding member H440, which is emitted from a position opposite the upper end opening H473a, from mixing with the light emitted from other areas. As a result, it becomes easier to distinguish the light emitted from the upper end opening H473a from other light.

The first fastening portion H474 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to fix the first outer lens member H450 to the outer cover member H470, and is formed at a position corresponding to the first insertion hole H453 formed in the first outer lens member H450.

The second fastening portion H475 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to fix the first outer lens member H450 or the second outer lens member H460 to the outer cover member H470, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second insertion hole H454 formed in the first outer lens member H450 or the insertion portion H464 formed in the second outer lens member H460.

The screw inserted into the first insertion hole H453 is screwed into the first fastening portion H474, and the screw inserted into the second insertion hole H454 or the insertion portion H464 is fastened to the second fastening portion H475, thereby fixing the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 to the outer cover member H470.

The rear fastening portion H476 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to fix the outer cover member H470 to the support plate portion H410, and is formed at a position corresponding to the right fastening hole H411a1 formed in the fixing plate H411 of the support plate portion H410. The outer cover member H470 is fixed to the support plate portion H410 by screwing a screw that has passed through the right fastening hole H411a1 into the rear fastening portion H476.

The first outer lens member H450 mainly comprises a main body plate portion H451 formed in a vertically long plate shape, a bent portion H452 that bends from the upper end of the main body plate portion H451 toward the inner cover member H420 side, a plurality of first insertion holes H453 and second insertion holes H454 that are configured as through holes through which screws that are fastened to the outer cover member H470 are inserted, a bulge portion H455 that protrudes to the outer cover member H470 side (right side (arrow R direction side)) in the area surrounded by the first insertion holes H453 and is visible through the outer cover member H470, a rear fastening portion H456 that is drilled on the rear side of the main body plate portion H451 and into which a screw that fixes it to the support plate portion H410 from the rear side is screwed, and a plurality of engaged portions H457 that are formed along the edge portion on the front side.

The first outer lens member H450 is disposed between the light guide member H440 and the outer cover member H470 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, and transmits the light emitted from the light guide member H440 and emits it from the opening H473 of the outer cover member H470 and the front side of the outer cover member H470. The entire first outer lens member H450 is made of a translucent resin material.

The front and rear ends of the main body plate portion H451 are formed to match the front and rear ends of the outer cover member H470, and are formed with a protruding portion H451a that protrudes downward from the lower end.

The protruding portion H451a is a portion that protrudes from the lower side of the outer cover member H470 toward the front side (arrow F direction) beyond the outer cover member H470, and the end on the rear side is formed along the end face on the front side of the outer cover member H470. In other words, the protruding portion H451a is positioned on the lower side of the outer cover member H470, adjacent to the outer cover member H470 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The bent portion H452 is disposed at a predetermined distance from the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470, and together with the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470 constitutes the upper right side of the front frame H14 in a front view, and the erected distance from the right side to the left side in a front view is set to be greater than that of the erected portion H477. In other words, when the first outer lens member H450 is disposed on the outer cover member H470, the bent portion H452 of the first outer lens member H450 is in a state of protruding beyond the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470.

The bent portion H452 mainly comprises a base end H452c connected to the main plate portion H451, a tip end H452d formed to be continuous with the tip side of the base end H452c and formed one step higher than the base end H452c, a through hole H452a opening at the step between the base end H452c and the tip end H452d, and an engagement portion H452b bent upward (toward the direction of the arrow U) from the tip end of the tip end H452d. The tip end H452d of the bent portion H452 protrudes from the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470.

As described above, the through holes H452a are portions through which the insertion portions H477a of the outer cover member H470 are inserted, and are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple insertion portions H477a. This makes it possible to prevent the bent portion H452 of the first outer lens member H450 from shifting in position relative to the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470.

The insertion portion H477a is formed to protrude from the right side (arrow R direction side) toward the left side (arrow L direction side), and the through hole H452a is formed to penetrate in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the insertion portion H477a to be inserted into the through hole H452a when the first outer lens member H450 is disposed on the outer cover member H470 from the left side.

The engaging portion H452b is a portion that engages with the top plate H332 (engaged portion H332g) of the upper decorative unit H14a described above, and by engaging with the top plate H332, it is possible to prevent the bent portion H452 from moving away from the top plate H332, thereby preventing the erect portion H477 from moving away from the top plate H332. A detailed explanation of the method of assembling the upper decorative unit H14a and the right side decorative unit H14c will be given later.

The first insertion hole H453 is a portion through which a screw is inserted into the first fastening portion H474 of the outer cover member H470 as described above, and is formed at a position corresponding to the first fastening portion H474. The first insertion hole H453 is formed in a circular recessed bottom surface from the outer cover member H470 side (arrow R direction side) toward the light guide member H440 side (arrow L direction side), and the tip of the first fastening portion H474 can be inserted into the recessed portion. This allows the first outer lens member H450 to be fixed to the outer cover member H470 while being positioned relative to the outer cover member H470.

As described above, the second insertion hole H454 is a portion through which the screw that is screwed into the second fastening portion H475 of the outer cover member H470 is inserted, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second fastening portion H475. Note that the second insertion hole H454 does not have a recessed portion into which the tip of the second fastening portion H475 can be inserted, as in the first insertion hole H453, and the screw is inserted with the tip of the second fastening portion H475 abutting against the side of the main body plate portion H451.

The bulge H455 is the part that fits into the opening H473, and is formed with an outer shape that corresponds to each opening H473. That is, when the right decorative unit H14c is assembled, the bulge H455 protrudes from the opening H473 to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c. The upper bulge H455 (hereinafter referred to as the "upper bulge H455a") that is inserted into the upper opening H473a is formed with a slight gap between it and the inner edge of the upper opening H473a.

The rear fastening portion H456 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to fix the first outer lens member H450 to the support plate portion H410, and is formed at a position corresponding to the right fastening hole H411a1 formed in the fixing plate H411 of the support plate portion H410. The first outer lens member H450 is fixed to the support plate portion H410 by screwing a screw that has passed through the right fastening hole H411a1 into the rear fastening portion H456.

The engaged portion H457 is a portion that engages with the engaging portion H446 of the light-guiding member H440, and is formed at a position corresponding to the engaging portion H446 when the right decorative unit H14c is assembled. The engaged portion H457 is also formed in a bridge shape at the front end of the main body plate portion H451, and the bridge forms a space that is open in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B).

The second outer lens member H460 is formed entirely from a transparent resin material and is disposed below (in the direction of arrow D) the portion of the first outer lens member H450 excluding the protruding portion H451a. The second outer lens member H460 mainly comprises a clamping portion H461 disposed between the light guide member H440 and the outer cover member H470 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, a protruding portion H462 that protrudes further forward than the clamping portion H461, and a connecting portion H463 that connects the clamping portion H461 and the protruding portion H462.

The clamping portion H461 and the connecting portion H463 are portions for fixing the second outer lens member H460 to the outer cover member H470, and are provided with a plurality of insertion portions H464 that open at positions corresponding to the second fastening portions H475 of the outer cover member H470. By screwing the screws inserted into the insertion portions H464 into the second fastening portions H475 of the outer cover member H470, the second outer lens member H460 can be fixed to the outer cover member H470 together with the first outer lens member H450.

The clamping portion H461 also has a rear fastening portion H465 formed at the rear end. The rear fastening portion H465 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to fix the second outer lens member H460 to the support plate portion H410, and is formed at a position corresponding to the right fastening hole H411a1 formed in the fixing plate H411 of the support plate portion H410. The second outer lens member H460 is fixed to the support plate portion H410 by screwing a screw that has passed through the right fastening hole H411a1 into the rear fastening portion H465.

The outer cover member H470, the first outer lens member H450, and the second outer lens member H460 are fixed to the support plate portion H410 in a state where the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 are fixed to the outer cover member H470 (i.e., in an assembled state of the right weight plate unit H400R). More specifically, this is done in a state where the left weight plate unit H400L and the right weight plate unit H400R are assembled.

The connecting portion H463 is a portion disposed between the light guide member H440 of the left stacking plate unit H400L and the protruding portion H451a of the first outer lens member H450, and is formed to be thinner in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the clamping portion H461 and the protruding portion H462. As a result, when the right stacking plate unit H400R is in an assembled state, the protruding portion H451a of the first outer lens member H450 is sandwiched from the front to the back by the clamping portion H461 and the protruding portion H462 of the second outer lens member H460.

When the right decorative unit H14c is assembled, the protruding portion H462 is a portion that protrudes from between the inner cover member H420 and the outer cover member H470 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) together with the lower lens portion H432 described above, and the end portion on the front side is formed in a wavy shape in the same shape as the lower lens portion H432.

The protruding portion H462 also has a standing portion H462a formed at the front end thereof, which stands toward the inner cover member H420 (the direction of the arrow L). The standing portion H462a is formed to a size that overlaps with the front side of the standing portion H432a of the lower lens portion H432 when the right decorative unit H14c is assembled. In other words, the standing portion H462a of the second outer lens member H460 is arranged to overlap with the front side of the standing portion H432a of the lower lens portion H432 of the right decorative unit H14c in the assembled state.

The erected portion H462a of the second outer lens member H460 has an engaged portion H462a1 formed by penetrating in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the erected portion H432a of the lower lens portion H432 has an engaging portion H432a1 that protrudes toward the engaged portion H462a1. As a result, when the right decorative unit H14c is in an assembled state, the engaging portion H432a1 is inserted into the engaged portion H462a1, and the front side of the left stacking plate unit H400L and the front side of the right stacking plate unit H400R are restricted from being displaced left-right (arrow L-R direction) away from each other.

In this embodiment, the second outer lens member H460 and the lower lens portion H432 are formed from a transparent resin material and are formed to be able to transmit light emitted from the light-guiding member H440. Therefore, by allowing light to pass through the erected portions H462a and H432a, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the engaged portion H462a1 and the engaging portion H432a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Next, a method of assembling the right stacking plate unit H400R will be described. First, the right stacking plate unit H400R is formed by stacking the first outer lens member H450 from the left side of the outer cover member H470. At this time, the insertion portion H477a of the outer cover member H470 is inserted into the through hole H452a of the first outer lens member H450, and the tip portion of the first fastening portion H474 of the first outer lens member H450 is inserted into the recess in which the first insertion hole H453 of the first outer lens member H450 is formed. This allows the first outer lens member H450 to be positioned relative to the outer cover member H470.

Next, with the first outer lens member H450 placed on the outer cover member H470, the second outer lens member H460 is placed on the first outer lens member H450 from the left side of the outer cover member H470. In this case, the protruding portion H451a of the first outer lens member H450 is sandwiched between the clamping portion H461 and the protruding portion H462 of the second outer lens member H460. This allows the second outer lens member H460 to be positioned relative to the first outer lens member H450.

Finally, with the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 disposed on the outer cover member H470, the right weight plate unit H400R can be assembled by screwing screws into the first fastening portion H474 and the second fastening portion H475 of the outer cover member H470.

In this embodiment, the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 are formed from resin materials of different colors, so the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 are constructed from separate members, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 may be constructed as a single member from resin materials of the same color (e.g., colorless and transparent).

Next, the right side decorative unit H14c and the upper decorative unit H14a will be described with reference to Figures 1856 and 1857. Figure 1856(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame H14, Figure 1856(b) is a front perspective view of the front frame H14, Figure 1857(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side decorative unit H14c and the upper decorative unit H14a taken along the line MDCCCLVIIa shown in Figure 1850(b), and Figure 1857(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side decorative unit H14c and the upper decorative unit H14a taken along the line MDCCCLVIIb shown in Figure 1850(b).

Figure 1856 (a) shows the front frame H14 with the upper decorative unit H14a removed from the main frame H14d. Figures 1857 (a) and 1857 (b) show schematic cross-sections of the right decorative unit H14c and a portion of the upper decorative unit H14a (top panel H332) when the front frame H14 is assembled.

As shown in Figures 1856(a) and 1856(b), the right side decorative unit H14c and the upper decorative unit H14a are fixed to the main frame H14d by first fixing the right side decorative unit H14c to the main frame H14d, and then arranging the upper decorative unit H14a on the main frame H14d from the front side and fixing it with screws.

In this case, the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a is disposed in a position adjacent to the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470 of the right decorative unit H14c. Note that the adjacent position described here includes a position in which the top panel H332 and the erected portion H477 are in contact with each other, but have a slight gap due to assembly tolerances and dimensional tolerances of parts.

In this embodiment, the upper decorative unit H14a and the right side decorative unit H14c are not divided in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) when viewed from the front (divided at a position between the upper and lower ends of the main body frame H14d when viewed from the front), but rather in the up-down direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) (divided at a position between the left and right ends of the main body frame H14d when viewed from the front), thereby increasing the decorative area of the right side decorative unit H14c in the up-down direction.

In other words, the area visible through the viewing window (opening H473) of the outer cover member H470 of the right-side decorative unit H14c can be enlarged. As a result, the light emission mode of the right-side decorative unit H14c can be easily seen by people around the pachinko machine H10. In other words, it is possible to easily draw the attention of people who are not playing the pachinko machine H10 to the right-side decorative unit H14c (pachinko machine H10).

In addition, the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c are arranged next to each other in the left-right direction and are divided in the up-down direction (divided at a position between the left and right ends of the main frame H14d when viewed from the front), which makes it easier for heat generated in the board member H412 arranged on the right-side decorative unit H14c and the board member H342 arranged on the upper decorative unit H14a to escape through the gap between the top panel H332 and the standing portion H477.As a result, damage caused by heat to the board member H412 arranged on the right-side decorative unit H14c and the board member H342 arranged on the upper decorative unit H14a can be suppressed.

However, because the upper decorative unit H14a and the right-side decorative unit H14c are arranged next to each other in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), there is a risk that a gap may form at the boundary between the upper decorative unit H14a and the right-side decorative unit H14c due to assembly tolerances or dimensional tolerances of parts, or that a gap may form at the boundary between the upper decorative unit H14a and the right-side decorative unit H14c due to external forces acting on the upper decorative unit H14a or the right-side decorative unit H14c. If a gap is formed, there is a risk that foreign matter (e.g., wire used to commit fraud, dust, dirt, liquids, etc.) may enter through the gap and adversely affect the internal mechanical and electrical configurations. In particular, liquids (e.g., liquids consumed during play) are likely to enter even through very small gaps and are also likely to adversely affect the electrical configuration.

Examples of adverse effects on the mechanical configuration include a foreign object getting caught between sliding displacement members, causing the sliding of the displacement members to stop, a foreign object contaminating the light transmission surface and impairing the light emission pattern, an abnormal noise caused by the intrusion of a foreign object, and a foreign object impairing the detection pattern of a sensor or the like (false detection). Examples of adverse effects on the electrical configuration include a foreign object adhering to a circuit board component and causing a short circuit, a foreign object adhering to an electrical component that serves as the drive source for a drive motor or the like and causing a short circuit, and a foreign object getting into a wiring connector, causing an erroneous signal to be sent to an electrical component.

The upper decorative unit H14a also has a generally flat top surface (top panel H332) that allows players to easily place objects on it. This means that objects placed by players on the top surface of the upper decorative unit H14a tend to accumulate on the top surface of the upper decorative unit H14a. This increases the likelihood of foreign objects entering the upper side of the front frame H14 through the gap between the upper decorative unit H14a and the right side decorative unit H14c.

In contrast, in the right-side decorative unit H14c in the 111th embodiment, as shown in Figures 1857(a) and 1857(b), the bent portion H452 (tip portion H452d) of the first outer lens member H450 arranged below the standing portion H477 is formed to protrude further in the standing direction of the standing portion H477 (i.e., toward the upper decorative unit H14a) than the standing portion H477.

That is, the bent portion H452 (tip H452d) of the first outer lens member H450 is positioned below (in the direction of arrow U) the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c in the direction of gravity. This forms a gap at the boundary between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c, allowing foreign matter entering through the gap to be received by the bent portion H452. This prevents foreign matter entering through the boundary between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

The bent portion H452 has a tip H452d disposed below the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the erected portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c, and a base end H452c that is connected to the tip H452d and extends away from the boundary (connection portion). As a result, if a gap is formed at the boundary (connection portion), the tip H452d can receive foreign matter that has entered through the gap, and the base end H452c can guide the received foreign matter toward a position (inside the right decorative unit H14c in this embodiment) that is less likely to adversely affect the mechanical and electrical configurations. This can prevent foreign matter that has entered through the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the erected portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

The tip end H452d and base end H452c (bend H452) are formed with their upper surfaces inclined downward toward the base end side (main body plate H451 side) of the bent portion H452. In addition, the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470 is disposed at a position that covers the upper side of the tip end H452d and base end H452c at a predetermined distance from the tip end H452d and base end H452c.

That is, a passage space H400A (see Figures 1857 (a) and (b)) is formed between the tip H452d and the base H452c (bent portion H452) and the upright portion H477, extending toward the right side of the right decorative unit H14c. The foreign object received by the tip H452d is guided in a predetermined direction through the passage space H400A, so that the passage direction of the foreign object is determined by the passage space H400A. Therefore, it is possible to easily guide the foreign object toward a position (inside the right decorative unit H14c in this embodiment) that is less likely to adversely affect the mechanical and electrical configurations. This makes it possible to prevent the mechanical and electrical configurations from being adversely affected by foreign objects that have entered through the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the upright portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the bent portion H452 located below the boundary (connecting portion) between the top plate H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c is formed by a part of the first outer lens member H450 that transmits light, so that if the position of the standing portion H477 relative to the top plate H332 is shifted and the gap at the boundary (connecting portion) becomes large, light can leak out from the gap at the boundary (connecting portion). This light can make the manager (clerk) of the pachinko parlor (hall) where the pachinko machine H10 is installed recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine H10 (a gap has formed between the top plate H332 and the standing portion H477). As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine H10 from being left (left in a playable state) with the gap at the boundary (connecting portion) in a large state.

When liquid seeping in from the boundary (connection) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c is received by the tip H452d, the heat generated by the light emitted by the LED H412a of the substrate member H412 causes the liquid to evaporate and be discharged from the boundary (connection) between the top panel H332 and the standing portion H477 to the outside of the pachinko machine H10. This makes it possible to prevent liquid seeping in from the boundary (connection) between the top panel H332 and the standing portion H477 from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations (especially shorting out components due to liquid).

Furthermore, an engaging portion H452b is formed at the tip of the bent portion H452 of the right decorative unit H14c, and this engaging portion H452b is formed to engage with the engaged portion H332g formed on the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a (inserted between the first piece H332g1 and the second piece H332g2). Therefore, when the right decorative unit H14c and the upper decorative unit H14a are arranged on the main frame H14d, the engaging portion H452b is inserted between the opposing first piece H332g1 and second piece H332g2 of the top panel H332, and engages with the engaged portion H332g of the top panel H332.

This prevents the position of the right-side decorative unit H14c from shifting relative to the upper decorative unit H14a after the upper decorative unit H14a and the right-side decorative unit H14c are arranged on the main frame H14d. As a result, the gap at the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c is prevented from becoming larger, preventing foreign objects from easily entering through the gap at the boundary (connecting portion).

The engaged portion H332g is formed at both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the top panel H332, which is the connecting portion with the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c. Therefore, compared to when the engaged portion H332g is formed of a separate member at a position away from both left-right ends of the top panel H332, it is possible to prevent the position of the engaged portion (engaging with the engaging portion H452b) from shifting due to manufacturing tolerances and assembly tolerances of parts. This prevents the gap at the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c from becoming larger, and prevents foreign matter from easily entering through the gap at the boundary (connecting portion). As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a from becoming poor.

In addition, because the engaging portion H452b of the bent portion H452 engages with the upper decorative unit H14a, it is possible to prevent the position of the bent portion H452 from shifting relative to the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c. Therefore, if a foreign object enters through the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right-side decorative unit H14c, the foreign object can be reliably received by the bent portion H452.

The first piece H332g1 and the second piece H332g2 are formed with the end on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the upper decorative unit H14a open (separated by a specified gap). As a result, when arranging the upper decorative unit H14a in the main frame H14d, the engagement portion H452b can be inserted between the first piece H332g1 and the second piece H332g2 by inserting the upper decorative unit H14a from the front side toward the rear side of the main frame H14d, so that the engagement portion H452b can be inserted between the first piece H332g1 and the second piece H332g2. As a result, the upper decorative unit H14a can be arranged in the main frame H14d with the engagement portion H452b sandwiched between the first piece H332g1 and the second piece H332g2.

As shown in FIG. 1857, the bent portion H452 is disposed at a predetermined gap in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) from the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470 (having a passage space H400A), and the upper surface side is formed with an inclination downward (arrow D direction) toward the main body plate portion H451 side (arrow R direction side). This allows the foreign matter received by the bent portion H452 to roll (slide down) the upper surface of the bent portion H452 and move to the main body plate portion H451 side (arrow R direction side). Therefore, the foreign matter can be dropped into the gap between the main body plate portion H471 of the outer cover member H470 and the main body plate portion H451 of the first outer lens member H450. As a result, the foreign matter can be made to flow down to a position unrelated to the decoration of the upper decorative unit H14a, and the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a can be prevented from being impaired by the foreign matter.

In addition, the bent portion H452 has an engagement portion H452b formed at the bent tip from the main plate portion H451, which is formed along the entire area of the bent tip of the bent portion H452. Therefore, even if a foreign object received by the bent portion H452 rolls (slides down) toward the bent tip side of the bent portion H452 (the direction of the arrow L), the foreign object can be prevented from falling downward beyond the bent tip of the bent portion H452. As a result, the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a can be prevented from being impaired.

In addition, in this embodiment, a step is formed in the bent portion H452, and a through hole H452a is formed in the step. As described above, the upper part of the right decorative unit H14c is arranged in a state where it covers the rear side of the speaker H312a of the upper decorative unit H14a. Therefore, the sound emitted from the rear side of the speaker H312a through the through hole H452a can be emitted into the gap between the standing portion H477 and the bent portion H452 via the through hole H452a, and this sound can cause the bent portion H452 to vibrate slightly.

The sound from the speaker H312a causes the bending portion H452 to vibrate slightly, making it easier for foreign objects placed on the upper surface of the bending portion H452 to slide (move) along the upper surface. As a result, foreign objects can be more easily dropped into the gap between the main body plate portion H471 of the outer cover member H470 and the main body plate portion H451 of the first outer lens member H450.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sound emitted through the through hole H452a is emitted (output) from the rear side of the speaker H312a, and therefore tends to be lower-pitched than the sound emitted from the front side of the speaker H312a. This makes it easier for the sound from the speaker H312a to vibrate the bent portion H452. As a result, it is easier for foreign objects to fall into the gap between the main body plate portion H471 of the outer cover member H470 and the main body plate portion H451 of the first outer lens member H450.

Next, the main body plate portion H471 of the outer cover member H470 and the main body plate portion H451 of the first outer lens member H450 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1857, an opening H473 is formed in the main body plate portion H471, and the bulge portion H455 of the main body plate portion H451 is inserted into the opening H473 with a predetermined gap inside. Therefore, the space between the main body plate portion H471 and the main body plate portion H451 (passage space H400A) is connected to the space outside the right decorative unit H14c via the opening H473 (particularly the upper end opening H473a). In other words, the opening H473 is provided to connect the passage space H400A to the outside of the pachinko machine H10.

Therefore, if a foreign object falls into the gap between the main body plate portion H471 of the outer cover member H470 and the main body plate portion H451 of the first outer lens member H450, the foreign object can be discharged to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c through the opening H473 (particularly the upper end opening H473a).

That is, in this embodiment, the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the vertical portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c is provided with a passage (the gap between the main plate portion H471 and the main plate portion H451, and the gap between the vertical portion H477 and the bent portion H452) that connects the opening H473 of the right decorative unit H14c. This prevents a foreign object from falling inside the right decorative unit H14c to the bottom end if the foreign object enters through the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the vertical portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object from entering through the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the vertical portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

In addition, the passage space H400A that connects the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the upright portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c with the opening H473 of the right decorative unit H14c is formed in a member (first outer lens member H450 and outer cover member H470) separate from the light-guiding member H440 that diffuses the light of the LED H412a of the right decorative unit H14c. This prevents the diffusion of light emitted from the LED H412a from deteriorating when foreign matter or liquid flows through the passage. As a result, it prevents the decoration of the right decorative unit H14c, which has a passage for flowing foreign matter, from becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, in the 111th embodiment, a bulge H455 is formed in the first outer lens member H450 on the lower side (downflow direction side) of the passage space H400A, and the bulge H455 is inserted into the opening H473. This allows foreign matter that falls into the gap between the main body plate portion H471 of the outer cover member H470 and the main body plate portion H451 of the first outer lens member H450 (passing through the passage space H400A) to abut against the bulge H455 and fall along the outer surface of the bulge H455. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge foreign matter from the opening H473 to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c. It is possible to prevent foreign matter from remaining inside the right decorative unit H14c.

In other words, the bulge H455 can be used not only to position the first outer lens member H450 relative to the outer cover member H470, but also (combined with) the bulge H455 as a means for receiving foreign objects passing through the passage space H400 and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine H10.

In particular, the upper bulge H455a formed on the upper side of the first outer lens member H450 is formed at a height that is continuous with the base end H452c of the bent portion H452, so that foreign matter passing through the passage space H400A can be guided directly to the upper bulge H455a by passing over the base end H452c. As a result, foreign matter can be easily discharged from the upper end opening H473a to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c.

The base end H452c of the passage space H400A is formed at an incline toward the upper end opening H473a. As a result, the upper end opening H473a in the 111th embodiment is set to be smaller than 1/5 in size in the front-to-rear direction relative to the outer cover member H470, but foreign matter passing through the passage space H400A can be easily discharged to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c through the upper end opening H473a.

This limits the area where the foreign object is discharged to a portion of the outer cover member H470, making it difficult for the player to realize that a foreign object is being discharged. Also, since the area where the foreign object is discharged can be set to a position biased toward the back side of the outer cover member H470, the foreign object can be discharged from a position that is difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, the opening H473 located below the upper end opening H473a is formed in a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the upper end opening H473a in the vertical direction, making it easier for foreign matter that falls without being guided by the upper end opening H473a to be discharged to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c through the other openings H473.

In the above 111th embodiment, the case was described where the front-to-rear size of the upper end opening H473a was set sufficiently small compared to the outer cover member H470, but the front-to-rear size of the upper end opening H473a may be set to be approximately the same as the front-to-rear size of the outer cover member H470. In this case, most foreign matter can be discharged from the upper end opening H473a to the outside of the right decorative unit H14c, making it unnecessary to have another opening H473 below the upper end opening H473a. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

A partition wall H478 is protruded from the upper end opening H473a (see FIG. 1864(b)) formed at the top of the outer cover member H470, and is connected to the lower edge of the upper end opening H473a. An opening H455a1 having a shape corresponding to the partition wall H478 is formed around the upper bulge H455a inserted into the upper end opening H473a, and the partition wall H478 is inserted into the opening H455a1.

That is, a partition wall H478 is formed at the lower end where the passage space H400A and the upper end opening H473a communicate with each other, and the partition wall H478 is inserted into the opening H455a1. Therefore, when assembling the first outer lens member H450 to the outer cover member H470, the outer cover member H470 and the first outer lens member H450 can be positioned by inserting the partition wall H478 into the opening H455a1. This makes it easier to assemble the first outer lens member H450 to the outer cover member H470.

In addition, when the first outer lens member H450 is disposed on the outer cover member H470, the partition wall H478 is positioned below the passage space H400, so that foreign matter passing through the passage space H400 from the upstream side (the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the erect portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c) can be received by the partition wall H478 and the received foreign matter can be guided toward the upper end opening H473a.

Therefore, the partition wall H478 can be used not only to position the first outer lens member H450 relative to the outer cover member H470, but also (combined with) the partition wall H478 as a means for receiving foreign objects passing through the passage space H400 and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine H10.

Next, the upper and lower tray unit H15 will be described with reference to Figs. 1858 to 1877. First, the overall configuration of the upper and lower tray unit H15 will be described with reference to Figs. 1858 to 1860. Fig. 1858 is a front view of the upper and lower tray unit H15, Fig. 1859 is an exploded front oblique view of the upper and lower tray unit H15, and Fig. 1860 is an exploded rear oblique view of the upper and lower tray unit H15.

As shown in Figures 1858 to 1860, the upper and lower tray unit H15 mainly comprises a base member H510 fastened to the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see Figure 1840), an upper tray forming member H520 and an operating handle H51 arranged on the front side of the base member H510, a lower tray forming member H530 arranged on the front side of the base member H510 and the upper tray forming member H520, and an operating unit H180 arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H530.

The base member H510 is a member for arranging the upper and lower tray unit H15 on the front side (arrow F direction) of the main body frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and is formed larger in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) than the main body frame H14d when viewed from the front, and is arranged with its lower edge positioned lower than the main body frame H14d.

The upper tray forming member H520 is a member for forming the upper tray H17, which stores the balls that are shot into the play area, at the top of the upper and lower tray unit, and is disposed on the front side of the base member H510 (the side in the direction of the arrow F) along the upper edge of the base member H510.

The operation unit H180 is disposed between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H530, and is disposed with the button portion H181 operated by the player protruding above the top surface of the upper tray forming member H520.

The lower plate forming member H530 is a member that constitutes the decorative surface of the upper and lower plate unit H15, and is arranged in a position that covers the base member H510 and the upper plate forming member H520 when viewed from the front. The lower plate forming member H530 also includes a lower plate forming unit H550 that forms the storage space of the lower plate H50, and a ball removal unit H560 that removes balls stored in the lower plate forming unit H550.

The base member H510 is attached to the main body frame H14d by arranging the upper tray forming member H520, the lower tray forming member H530, the operation unit H180, and the operation handle H51 on the base member H510, and attaching the upper and lower tray units H15 in an assembled state.

Next, the base member H510 will be described with reference to Fig. 1861 and Fig. 1862. Fig. 1861(a) is a front view of the base member H510 and the upper tray forming member H520, Fig. 1861(b) is a rear view of the base member H510 and the upper tray forming member H520, Fig. 1862(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member H510 taken along line MDCCCLXIIa in Fig. 1861(a), Fig. 1862(b) is a cross-sectional view of the base member H510 taken along line MDCCCLXIIb in Fig. 1861(a), and Fig. 1862(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member H510 taken along line MDCCCLXIIc in Fig. 1861(a).

As shown in FIG. 1861, the base member H510 is formed in a plate shape that covers the lower front side (arrow F direction) of the main body frame H14d, and has sidewalls that bend toward the rear side (arrow B direction) at the left-right (arrow L-R) edges and the lower edge, and is disposed on the main body frame H14d with the main body frame H14d housed inside the sidewalls.

The base member H510 is mainly provided with a plurality of fastening holes H511 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main frame H14d, a plurality of insertion holes H512 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side of the main frame H14d toward the front side (arrow F direction side), an upper tray ball inlet section H513 and a sending ball outlet section H516 that open to the rear side of the storage area of the upper tray H17, a lower tray ball inlet section H514 that opens to the rear side of the storage area of the lower tray H50, a convex section H515 that protrudes convexly toward the front side, and a base side retaining hole H517 in which the cylinder lock H20 is arranged inside, and is formed from a colored (black in the 111th embodiment) non-transparent resin material.

The upper tray ball inlet H513 is an opening for allowing balls sent from the front door side upper tray passage H141 of the passage forming unit H140 (see FIG. 1839) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H510 (upper and lower tray unit H15) to flow into the upper tray H17, and is formed in a position facing the front door side upper tray passage H141 in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows balls sent from the front door side upper tray passage H141 of the passage forming unit H140 to flow into the upper tray H17 when the pachinko machine H10 is in a play state.

The lower tray ball inlet section H514 is an opening for allowing balls sent from the front door side lower tray passage section H142 of the passage forming unit H140 (see FIG. 1839) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H510 (upper and lower tray unit H15) to flow into the lower tray H50, and is formed in a position facing the front door side lower tray passage section H142 in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows balls sent from the front door side lower tray passage section H142 of the passage forming unit H140 to flow into the lower tray H50 when the pachinko machine H10 is in a play state.

The ball outlet H516 is an opening for sending balls stored in the upper tray H17 to the launch position ball sending unit H170 via the passage forming unit H140 (see FIG. 1839) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H510 (upper and lower tray unit H15), and is formed in a position communicating with the front side opening H171 of the launch position ball sending unit H170.

In addition, below the throwing ball outlet H516, a discharge ball outlet H518 is formed, which opens in the front-to-rear direction of the base member H510 in the same manner as the throwing ball outlet H516. The discharge ball outlet H518 is an opening that is opened by operating the ball discharge lever H54, and is connected to the foul ball receiving port H146 (see FIG. 1840) of the passage forming unit H140. This allows the balls stored in the upper tray H17 to be sent to the lower tray H50 via the discharge ball outlet H518 when the player operates the ball discharge lever H54.

The fastening holes H511 are holes for inserting screws to fasten the main body frame H14d (see FIG. 1840) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H510 to the base member H510, and are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes for inserting the screws formed in the main body frame H14d.

In addition, some of the fastening holes H511 are formed so that screws can be inserted through the main frame H14d from the rear side of the passage forming unit H140, which is fastened to the lower rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main frame H14d. That is, the passage forming unit H140 is configured to be fastened to the upper and lower dish units H15. This suppresses the positional deviation of the passage forming unit H140 relative to the upper and lower dish units H15, and stabilizes the communication state of the front door side upper dish passage section H141 relative to the upper dish ball inlet section H513 and the communication state of the front door side lower dish passage section H142 relative to the lower dish ball inlet section H514. As a result, the inflow of balls from the front door side upper dish passage section H141 of the passage forming unit H140 to the upper dish H17, and the inflow of balls from the front door side lower dish passage section H142 to the lower dish H50 can be stabilized. The passage forming unit H140 is installed on the base member H510 after the upper and lower tray units H15 are assembled.

The insertion hole H512 is a hole for inserting a screw for fastening the upper tray forming member H520, the lower tray forming member H530, the operation unit H180, and the operation handle H51 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H510, and is formed at a position corresponding to the screw holes formed in each of the upper tray forming member H520, the lower tray forming member H530, the operation unit H180, and the operation handle H51. This allows the upper tray forming member H520, the lower tray forming member H530, the operation unit H180, and the operation handle H51 to be fastened and fixed to the base member H510.

Next, the upper tray forming member H520 will be described. The upper tray forming member H520 is a member that forms a storage space for the upper tray H17 between itself and the base member H510, and is formed in a bowl shape that curves upward from the base member H510 side (back side (arrow B direction)) to the front side (arrow F direction) (see Figure 1859), and is disposed on the base member H510 with its back side abutting the base member H510. As a result, the upper tray forming member H520 and the base member H510 form a space with an open upper side (storage area for the upper tray H17).

The upper tray forming member H520 is formed in a position where a portion of its front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) overlaps with the front side of the upper tray ball inlet section H513 of the base member H510, and is configured so that balls sent from the upper tray passage section H141 on the front door side of the passage forming unit H140 to the front side of the base member H510 via the upper tray ball inlet section H513 can abut against the upper tray forming member H520 and be stored in the storage space of the upper tray H17.

The upper tray forming member H520 is configured to allow the game balls stored in the upper tray H17 to flow down one ball at a time to the right side (arrow R direction) when viewed from the front, allowing the balls to be sent one ball at a time to the launch position ball sending unit H170 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction) of the base member H510 (upper and lower tray unit H15).

The upper tray forming member H520 also has a function adjustment operation unit H190, a ball lending operation unit H40, and a ball discharge lever H54 on the upper surface on the right side (arrow R direction) when viewed from the front, and the function adjustment operation unit H190, the ball lending operation unit H40, and the ball discharge lever H54 can be operated from the front side (arrow F direction) of the pachinko machine H10.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the function adjustment operation unit H190, the ball loan operation unit H40, and the ball discharge lever H54 operated by the player are configured together in one place on the upper tray forming member H520, which saves the player the trouble of searching for each operation unit. Also, since the function adjustment operation unit H190 and the ball loan operation unit H40 are configured together, the wiring connected to the function adjustment operation unit H190 and the ball loan operation unit H40 can be gathered in one place, which simplifies the wiring work.

Next, the convex portion H515 of the base member H510 will be described with reference to FIG. 1862. The convex portion H515 is inserted into the inserted portion H555e of the lower plate forming member H530 (described later) and is a portion that positions the lower plate forming member H530 relative to the base member H510, and is formed in a position facing the insertion space formed by the inserted portion H555e in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B). The convex portion H515 is also formed from a resin material that is slightly elastically deformable when subjected to a force acting downward.

As shown in FIG. 1862, the convex portion H515 is formed as a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is tapered (tapered) in thickness in the top, bottom, left and right directions when viewed from the front toward the protruding tip, and includes an upper surface inclined portion H515a on the upper surface side, a lower surface inclined portion H515b on the lower surface side, and side surface inclined portions H515c on the left and right side surfaces. The inclinations of the upper surface inclined portion H515a, the lower surface inclined portion H515b on the lower surface side, and the side surface inclined portions H515c on the left and right side surfaces of the convex portion H515 make it easy to insert the convex portion H515 into the lower plate forming member H530.

The lower inclined portion H515b has a groove-shaped recess H515b1 recessed in the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the protruding tip of the convex portion H515 toward the base end, and an engaged portion H515b2 is opened and formed in part of the bottom surface of the recess H515b1.

The engaged portion H515b2 is an opening into which the engaging portion H555b1 of the lower plate forming member H530 described later engages, and is formed at the end of the base end of the recessed portion H515b1 that is formed in a groove shape from the protruding tip of the convex portion H515 toward the base end.

The recess H515b1 is a guide groove that guides the protrusion H555b, on which the engaging portion H555b1 of the lower plate forming member H530 described later is formed, to the engaged portion H515b2, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness dimension of the protrusion H555b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Note that by guiding the protrusion H555b into the recess H515b1, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion H555b1 from shifting in position relative to the engaged portion H515b2, making it easier for the engaging portion H555b1 to engage with the engaged portion H515b2.

When the engaging portion H555b1 is inserted into the engaged portion H515b2 and the engaging portion H555b1 and the engaged portion H515b2 are engaged, the engaging portion H555b1 comes into contact with the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction) of the engaged portion H515b2, restricting the base member H510 from being displaced away from the lower plate forming member H530 (in the direction of widening the gap). This makes it possible to prevent a gap from being forcibly formed between the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 and an unauthorized member from being inserted through the gap (i.e., unauthorized use).

Next, the lower plate forming member H530 will be described with reference to Figs. 1863 to 1865. First, the overall configuration of the lower plate forming member H530 will be described with reference to Figs. 1863 to 1865. Fig. 1863(a) is a front view of the lower plate forming member H530, Fig. 1863(b) is a rear view of the lower plate forming member H530, Fig. 1864 is an exploded front oblique view of the lower plate forming member H530, and Fig. 1865 is an exploded rear oblique view of the lower plate forming member H530.

As shown in Figures 1863 to 1865, the lower tray forming member H530 is mainly comprised of a decorative unit H540 which is formed in a shape covering the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H510 and the upper tray forming member H520 and forms the decorative surface of the front side of the upper and lower tray unit H15, a lower tray constituent unit H550 which constitutes the lower tray H50, and a ball removal unit H560 for discharging balls stored in the lower tray H50.

The decorative unit H540 mainly comprises a first decorative plate H541 fastened to the base member H510, a second decorative plate H542 fastened to the first decorative plate H541 and forming the decorative surface of the upper and lower plate unit H15 together with the first decorative plate H541, and an upper protective plate H570 and a lower protective plate H580 arranged to cover a part of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first decorative plate H541.

The first decorative plate H541 is formed in a plate shape with a convex curved front side (arrow F direction side), with a portion of the upper end formed in a shape that abuts the outer edge of the front side of the upper tray forming member H520, and a lower end formed in a shape that abuts the front side of the base member H510. The first decorative plate H541 also has a first opening H541a and a second opening H541b that open into a portion of the decorative surface on the front side, and is formed entirely from a colored (pink) non-transparent resin material.

The first opening H541a is an opening that allows access to the storage area of the lower tray H50 from the front side (arrow F direction side), and is formed large enough for a player's hand to be inserted. In addition, a lower tray construction unit H550 for constructing the lower tray H50 is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first opening H541a.

The second opening H541b is an opening for disposing a ball removal unit H560 for discharging balls stored in the storage area of the lower tray H50, and is formed below the storage area of the lower tray H50. The second opening H541b is also formed to be large enough to accommodate the ball removal unit H560 inside. The detailed configuration of the ball removal unit H560 will be described later.

The second decorative plate H542 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation unit H180, which is disposed between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H530, and is a member that forms the decorative surface of the front side of the operation unit H180, with its upper end formed in a shape that abuts the operation unit H180 and a part of the upper tray forming member H520, and its lower side fastened and fixed to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first decorative plate H541.

The second decorative plate H542 is formed entirely from a colorless, transparent resin material that is light-transmitting. This allows light emitted from the operation unit H180 on the rear side (arrow B direction side) to be emitted to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upper and lower plate unit H15 via the second decorative plate H542.

Therefore, for example, when the button section H181 of the operation unit H180 needs to be operated, light can be emitted from the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the second decorative plate H542, making it easier for the player to recognize that the button section H181 needs to be operated. In addition, since the player can see the presentation created by the light of the operation unit H180, it is easier to improve the presentation effect created by the light of the operation unit H180.

In the 111th embodiment, the first decorative plate H541 is formed from a non-transparent material, and the second decorative plate H542 is formed from a transparent material. However, it is also possible to form both the first decorative plate H541 and the second decorative plate H542 from a transparent material. In this case, the light-transmitting area of the upper and lower tray unit H15 can be increased, so that the number of light-based presentation modes can be increased. As a result, it is easier to increase the interest given to the player.

The upper protective plate H570 and the lower protective plate H580 are members that protect the first decorative plate H541, and are formed in a position that overlaps the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the first decorative plate H541. Details of the upper protective plate H570 and the lower protective plate H580 will be described later.

The lower tray component unit H550 mainly comprises a bottom plate H551 that forms the bottom surface of the lower tray H50, and a side plate H552 that forms part of the upper surface of the lower tray H50 and abuts against the outer edge of the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom plate H551.

The bottom plate H551 mainly comprises a bottom surface portion H553 that forms the bottom surface, a front side wall H554 that stands upward along the outer edge of the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom surface portion H553, and a connecting portion H555 that is formed on the outside of the bottom surface portion H553 and continues to the front side wall H554.

The bottom portion H553 is a support surface that supports the game balls stored in the lower tray H50, and a bottom opening H553a that opens in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) is formed in part of it. In addition, the bottom portion H553 is formed so that the upper surface slopes downward toward the bottom opening H553a, and when the bottom opening H553a is opened by operating the ball removal lever H52, the balls stored in the lower tray H50 can roll toward the bottom opening H553a.

The front side wall H554 is the part that forms the side of the front side (arrow F direction) of the lower tray H50, and is formed along the back surface of the first decorative plate H541, and is formed in a shape whose upper end fits along the opening edge of the first opening H541a. In addition, the front side wall H554 is erected upward from the bottom surface portion H553, at a height at least higher than the diameter of two game balls. This makes it possible to stack and hold the game balls stored in the storage area of the lower tray H50.

The connecting portion H555 mainly comprises a main body portion H555d, which has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is disposed on the first decorative panel H541 side (front side), and an inserted portion H555e, which is formed in a gate shape with an open lower side when viewed from behind and is connected to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion H555d, and is entirely formed from a non-transparent resin material. The connecting portion H555 is formed so that it can be slightly elastically deformed by a force acting on the downward side.

The inserted portion H555e is formed in a gate shape with an open lower side when viewed from the rear, and is formed in a shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-to-rear direction. Furthermore, the inserted portion H555e is the portion into which the convex portion H515 of the base member H510 is inserted when the lower tray component unit H550 is disposed on the base member H510, and is positioned at a position corresponding to the convex portion H515. A detailed explanation of the inserted portion H555e will be given later.

The side panel H552 mainly comprises an upper plate H556 that covers the upper part of the storage area of the lower tray H50, and a rear side wall H557 that extends downward from the outer edge of the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the upper plate H556.

The upper plate H556 is formed in a curved shape that fits along the upper edge of the first opening H541a of the first decorative plate H541, and the outer edge on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) abuts against the back surface of the first decorative plate H541.

The rear side wall H557 is a member that forms the side surface of the lower tray H50 on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B), and extends from the rear edge of the upper plate H556 downward beyond the bottom surface portion H553, with the front surface of the rear side wall H557 abutting against the rear edge of the bottom surface portion H553.

The rear side wall H557 also has a ball guide opening H53 that opens in the front-rear direction at a position opposite the lower tray ball inlet section H514 of the base member H510. This allows balls sent from the front door side lower tray passage section H142 of the passage forming unit H140 to flow into the lower tray H50 via the lower tray ball inlet section H514 and the ball guide opening H53.

The lower opening edge of the ball guide opening H53 is formed at a position lower than the upper end of the front side wall H554. This prevents the balls flowing in from the ball guide opening H53 from rolling over the top of the balls piled up in the storage area and flowing out of the first opening H514a of the first decorative panel H541 when balls are stored in the storage area of the lower tray H50.

The ball removal unit H560 mainly comprises a storage member H561 formed in a box shape with an opening on the upper side, a slide plate H562 arranged inside the storage member H561, a ball removal lever H52 connected to the slide plate H562 and with at least a portion of its front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) arranged outside the storage member H561, and a coil spring (not shown) that biases the slide plate H562 and the ball removal lever H52 in one direction.

The storage member H561 is formed to a size that can be accommodated inside the second opening H541b of the first decorative panel H541, and is disposed adjacent to the lower side of the lower tray component unit H550 disposed above the second opening H541b. The storage member H561 is also provided with a guide mechanism inside its box-shaped interior that guides the displacement of the slide plate H562, which will be described later, and the guide mechanism defines the displacement direction of the slide plate H562 in one direction.

The slide plate H562 is formed in a plate shape larger than the opening of the bottom mouth H553a of the bottom portion H553, and is formed to be displaceable between a closed position where it closes the lower edge of the bottom mouth H553a, and an open position where it is displaced from the closed position to open the bottom mouth H553a. When the slide plate H562 is placed in the closed position, it is in a state where balls can be stored in the storage area of the lower tray H50, and when the slide plate H562 is placed in the open position, it is in a state where balls in the storage area of the lower tray H50 are discharged from the bottom mouth H553a. In addition, when the slide plate H562 is placed in the open position, the storage member H561 has a discharge port H561a formed in a position corresponding to the bottom mouth H553a for inserting the balls downward.

The ball removal lever H52 is a lever that the player operates when discharging balls stored in the lower tray H50 downward, and is formed connected to the slide plate H562. This ball removal lever H52 is constantly biased to the right (arrow R direction), and by sliding it to the left (arrow L direction) against that bias, the slide plate H562 is displaced from a closed position (position that blocks the discharge port H561a) to an open position (position that opens the discharge port H561a).

Next, referring to FIG. 1866, the inserted portion H555e of the lower tray component unit H550 will be described. FIG. 1866(a) is a top view of the connecting portion H555, FIG. 1866(b) is a bottom view of the connecting portion H555, and FIG. 1866(c) is a cross-sectional view of the connecting portion H555 taken along line MDCCCLXVIc in FIG. 1866(b).

As described above, the connecting portion H555 mainly comprises a main body portion H555d that has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is disposed on the first decorative panel H541 side (front side), and an inserted portion H555e that is formed in a gate shape with an open lower side when viewed from behind and is connected to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion H555d.

As shown in FIG. 1866, the inserted portion H555e mainly comprises an opening H555a that opens in a T-shape on the upper surface, a protruding portion H555b that is located below the opening H555a and protrudes from the main body portion H555d, and a number of guide walls H555c that stand upright from the side surface of the inserted portion H555e toward the inside of the inserted portion H555e.

The opening H555a is an opening for inserting a die for forming the protruding portion H555b described below when forming the inserted portion H555e, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion H555b when viewed from above.

The protruding portion H555b protrudes from the main body portion H555d toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) and includes an engagement portion H555b1 formed in a convex shape on the upper surface of the protruding tip. The protruding portion H555b is also a portion that is guided by the recessed portion H515b1 of the protruding portion H515 when the protruding portion H515 of the base member H510 is inserted into the inserted portion H555e, and is formed at a position corresponding to the groove formed by the recessed portion H515b1.

The engaging portion H555b1 is a portion that engages with the engaged portion H515b2 of the base member H510, and is provided so as to protrude upward from the upper surface of the protruding portion H555b, and has a cross section cut in the front-to-rear direction that is formed in a substantially triangular shape. The inclination of this cross section makes it easier to deflect the protruding portion H555b when the convex portion H515 of the base member H510 is inserted into the inserted portion H555e, or when the convex portion H515 of the base member H510 is pulled out of the inserted portion H555e. As a result, the work of attaching the lower plate forming member H530 to the base member H510 and the work of removing the lower plate forming member H530 from the base member H510 can be simplified.

The guide walls H555c are parts that adjust the position of the convex portion H515 of the base member H510 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when the convex portion H515 is inserted into the inserted portion H555e, and multiple guide walls H555c are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the front-rear direction on both left and right side walls of the inserted portion H555e.

In addition, the guide wall H555c formed on the front side (the insertion direction side of the convex portion H515) protrudes toward the center of the inserted portion H555e in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) compared to the guide wall H555c formed on the back side (the insertion portion side of the convex portion H515) (see FIG. 1866 (b)).

This makes it possible to increase the gap between the convex portion H515 and the guide wall H555c when the convex portion H515 starts to be inserted into the inserted portion H555e, making it easier to insert the convex portion H515 into the inserted portion H555e, and to reduce the gap between the convex portion H515 and the guide wall H555c when the convex portion H515 finishes being inserted into the inserted portion H555e, making it possible to adjust the position of the inserted portion H555e relative to the convex portion H515. As a result, the task of attaching the lower plate forming member H530 to the base member H510 can be simplified.

Next, referring to Figures 1867 to 1869, a method of arranging the lower dish forming member H530 on the base member H510 will be described. Figure 1867 is an exploded perspective view of the upper and lower dish unit H15, Figures 1868(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the upper and lower dish unit H15 with the lower dish forming member H530 removed from the base member H510, which correspond to the cross-section of the upper and lower dish unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXVIII in Figure 1858, Figure 1869(a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower dish unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXVIII in Figure 1858, and Figure 1869(b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower dish unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXIXb in Figure 1869(a).

Figure 1868(a) shows a cross section of the upper and lower plate unit H15 when the lower plate forming member H530 has been completely removed from the base member H510, and Figure 1868(b) shows a cross section of the upper and lower plate unit H15 when the lower plate forming member H530 is in the process of being attached to the base member H510.

As shown in Figures 1867 to 1869, the lower tray forming member H530 is disposed on the base member H510 with the upper tray forming member H520 and the operation unit H180 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member H510. The upper tray forming member H520 and the operation unit H180 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member H510 by screwing screws inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the base member H510 into the upper tray forming member H520 and the operation unit H180, respectively.

When the lower tray forming member H530 is pushed in from the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member H510 with the upper tray forming member H520 and the operation unit H180 arranged, the front end of the convex portion H515 of the base member H510 first overlaps with the rear end of the inserted portion H555e of the lower tray forming member H530, and the convex portion H515 is inserted inside the inserted portion H555e.

That is, the protrusion portion H555b and the engagement portion H555b1 are located inside the inserted portion H555e (closer to the front than the rear end of the inserted portion H555e) and do not protrude further back (in the direction of arrow B) than the inserted portion H555e, so that the front end of the convex portion H515 of the base member H510 can initially abut (guide) against the rear end of the inserted portion H555e of the lower plate forming member H530. This prevents the convex portion H515 from shifting out of position relative to the connecting portion H555 more than a specified amount.

As shown in FIG. 1868(b), when the convex portion H515 is further inserted into the inside of the inserted portion H555e, the protrusion H555b formed on the connecting portion H555 is inserted into the groove of the recess H515b1 of the convex portion H515, and the protrusion H555b moves along the guide groove of the recess H515b1, thereby positioning the left and right arrangement positions of the lower plate forming member H530 relative to the base member H510.

That is, the connecting portion H555 has a positioning means (protruding portion H555b) that positions the convex portion H515, and the convex portion H515 has a positioned means (recessed portion H515b1) that is positioned by the protruding portion H555b, so that when assembling the lower plate forming member H530 to the base member H510, the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 can be positioned by the recessed portion H515b1 and the protruding portion H555b. This allows the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 to be screwed together without aligning the relative positions of the two members, making the assembly work more efficient.

As shown in FIG. 1869, when the lower plate forming member H530 is placed in a predetermined position (assembly position) relative to the base member H510, the engaging portion H555b1 formed on the protruding tip side (back side) of the protruding portion H555b is inserted into the inside of the engaged portion H515b2 formed in the recess H515b1. As a result, after the lower plate forming member H530 is placed in a predetermined position (assembly position) relative to the base member H510, the relative displacement between the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 is restricted.

As a result, when screwing the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 together during the work of assembling the lower plate forming member H530 to the base member H510, the two members can be temporarily fixed together, so that the screws can be fastened without holding down the two members, making the assembly work more efficient.

Therefore, when the lower plate forming member H530 is assembled to the base member H510, the engaging portion H555b1 and the engaged portion H515b2 are formed in the recessed portion H515b1 and the protruding portion H555b, respectively, which enable positioning, so that the engaging portion H555b1 and the engaged portion H515b2 can be engaged with each other while being positioned by the recessed portion H515b1 and the protruding portion H555b. As a result, the engaging portion H555b1 and the engaged portion H515b2 can be easily engaged with each other.

When the lower tray forming member H530 is placed in a predetermined position (assembly position) relative to the base member H510, the guide walls H555c of the inserted portion H555e abut on both the left and right sides (in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the convex portion H515 inserted into the inserted portion H555e (see FIG. 1869(b)), restricting left-right displacement of the convex portion H515 relative to the guide walls H555c.

That is, in addition to the left-right positioning of the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 by the recessed portion H515b1 and the protruding portion H555b, the left-right positioning is also performed by the guide wall H555c and the convex portion H515bb1. This ensures that the relative positions of the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 are aligned when the two members are screwed together.

On the other hand, the upper and lower surfaces of the convex portion H515 inserted into the inserted portion H555e are arranged with a predetermined gap between the upper inner wall of the inserted portion H555e and the upper surface side inclined portion H515a of the protruding portion H555b (see FIG. 1869(a)). In other words, the inserted portion H555e (connecting portion H555) is arranged in a state where it can be displaced in the vertical direction relative to the convex portion H515.

After the lower plate forming member H530 is disposed on the base member H510 (the engaging portion H555b1 is engaged with the engaged portion H515b2), the lower plate forming member H530 is fastened to the base member H510 by screwing the screw inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H510 through the insertion hole H512 of the base member H510 into the rear side of the lower plate forming member H530 (first decorative plate H541). In this case, the screw fastening the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 is fastened to a position that avoids the convex portion H515 and the inserted portion H555e (connecting portion H555). As a result, the base member H510 and the lower plate forming member H530 are fastened and fixed in a state in which the inserted portion H555e (connecting portion H555) can be displaced in the vertical direction relative to the convex portion H515. That is, the inserted portion H555e (connecting portion H555) is supported in a cantilever manner on the back side of the lower tray forming member H530, and the convex portion H515 is supported in a cantilever manner on the base member H510.

The lower surface of the operation unit H180 is disposed in contact with the connecting portion H555 having the insertion portion H555e. Therefore, the operation unit H180 can be supported by the connecting portion H555. This stabilizes the position of the operation unit H180 so that it does not wobble, and stabilizes the operation of the operation unit H180.

As described above, the inserted portion H555e (connecting portion H555) is supported in a cantilevered state on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the lower tray forming member H530. Therefore, if a force that excessively presses the operation unit H180 (button portion H181) acts on the connecting portion H555, the force acting on the operation unit H180 can be released by the connecting portion H555 by displacing the non-support side (arrow F direction side) of the connecting portion H555 in the operation direction (downward) of the operation unit H180.

To explain in more detail, if the operation unit H180 is supported by support members supported on both sides, or if the operation unit H180 is fastened and fixed to the support members, the pressing force cannot be released when the operation unit H180 is pressed excessively, and there is a problem that the support members supporting the operation unit H180 and the operation unit H180 are likely to be damaged.

In contrast, in the 111th embodiment, the operation unit H180 is supported on the connecting part H555 that is cantilevered on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the lower plate forming member H530, so that when a force that excessively presses the operation unit H180 acts on the connecting part H555, the connecting part H555 can be elastically deformed. In this case, since the operation unit H180 and the connecting part H555 are fastened to each other, the abutment position (abutment state) between the operation unit H180 and the connecting part H555 can be changed with the elastic deformation of the connecting part H555. That is, the operation unit H180 can be slid (slid) against the upper surface of the connecting part H555. As a result, when a force acting on the operation unit H180 acts on the connecting part H555, it is possible to suppress damage to the connecting part H555 or the operation unit H180.

That is, in the 111th embodiment, the lower plate forming member H530 and the base member H510 are arranged with an arrangement space for arranging the operation unit H180 in the front and rear, a connecting part H555 protruding from the lower plate forming member H530 and located between the opposing lower plate forming member H530 and the base member H510, and an operation unit H180 arranged between the opposing lower plate forming member H530 and the base member H510 and arranged on the base member H510, and the operation direction side (lower side) of the operation unit H180 can abut against the connecting part H555, so that when the operating force on the operation direction side (lower side) acting on the operation unit in conjunction with the operation is within a predetermined range, the operation unit H180 can be supported by the connecting part H555. This stabilizes the posture of the operation unit H180 so that it does not wobble, and stabilizes the operation of the operation unit H180.

On the other hand, if the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operating unit H180 exceeds a predetermined range, the connecting part H555 can be elastically deformed to release the external force (the operating force can be distributed to the base member H510 and the connecting part H555. This can prevent damage to the operating unit H180, the lower plate forming member H530, and the base member H510.

In this case, the elastically deformed connecting portion H555 is formed on the lower tray forming member H530, which is disposed on the front side of the upper and lower tray units H15 (i.e., the decorative side), so that when the connecting portion H555 is elastically deformed to release the external force, the decorative surface of the lower tray forming member H530 can be prevented from bending. That is, when the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operation unit H180 exceeds a predetermined range, if the operating force is distributed to the base member H510 and the connecting portion H555, the base member H510 on which the operation unit H180 is disposed is also likely to be elastically deformed with the elastic deformation of the connecting portion H555. Therefore, if the base member H510 is made into a decorative surface, there is a risk that the appearance of the decorative surface will deteriorate with the operation of the operation unit H180 (the decorative surface will bend and gaps will be formed between the parts), but by making the lower tray forming member H530 on which the connecting portion H555 is formed into a decorative surface, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

Furthermore, in the 111th embodiment, the connecting portion H555 having the insertion portion H555e has an elastic member H558 disposed on the upper surface side of the main body portion H555d, and the operation unit H180 is disposed in a state in which the lower surface of the operation unit H180 abuts against the elastic member H558. To explain in more detail, the operation unit H180 is disposed in a state in which the lower surface of the operation unit H180 abuts against the upper surface of the main body portion H555d via the elastic member H558.

Therefore, when the connecting part H555 is elastically deformed by the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operation unit H180, the elastic member H558 interposed between the operation unit H180 and the connecting part H555 is elastically deformed, thereby preventing the bottom surface of the operation unit H180 from rubbing against the top surface of the connecting part H555. That is, with the elastic member H558 in contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit H180 and the top surface of the connecting part H555, the operation unit H180 can be slid (slid) against the top surface of the connecting part H555. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom surface of the operation unit H180 and the top surface of the connecting part H555 from rubbing against each other, generating abnormal noise, and preventing their contact surfaces from being damaged (wear).

In the 111th embodiment, the operation unit H180 is operated from the top to the bottom, and the connecting part H555 is arranged on the side of the operation direction, but the operation direction of the operation unit H180 may be either forward, backward, left, or right, as long as the connecting part H555 is arranged on the side of that direction in contact with the operation unit H180.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the lower end of the operation unit H180 operated by the player is arranged in contact with the connecting part H555, but a displacement member (for example, the base unit G600 of the petal operating device G800) that is displaced by the operation of the operation unit H180 may be arranged in contact with the connecting part H555.

In this case, when the petal operating device G800 abuts against the base unit G600 at the displacement base end, the force acting on the base unit G600 can be released by elastically deforming the connecting portion H555. As a result, damage to the petal operating device G800 and the base unit G600 can be suppressed.

Next, we will explain the case where the connecting part H555 is elastically deformed beyond a predetermined range due to the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operating unit H180.

As described above, the convex portion H515 protruding from the base member H510 is inserted into the inserted portion H555e of the connecting portion H555, and the upper surface side inclined portion H515a of the convex portion H515 inserted into the inserted portion H555e is arranged with a predetermined gap between it and the inner wall on the upper side of the inserted portion H555e. Therefore, when the connecting portion H555 is elastically deformed beyond a predetermined range due to the operating force of the operating direction side (downward side) of the operation unit H180, the inner wall on the upper side of the connecting portion H555 can be abutted against the upper surface of the convex portion H515 to suppress the elastic deformation of the connecting portion H555. This makes it possible to suppress damage to the connecting portion H555.

In addition, since the connecting portion H555 (inserted portion H555e) and the convex portion H515 are not fixed, the connecting portion H555 is not restrained and can slide relative to the convex portion H515. This ensures the elastic deformability of the connecting portion H555 and the convex portion H515. This makes it possible to prevent a sudden increase in the reaction force acting between the connecting portion H555 and the convex portion H515 when the connecting portion H555 abuts against the convex portion H515, and thus prevents damage to the connecting portion H555 and the convex portion H515.

In the 111th embodiment, the operation unit H180 does not abut against the engaging portion H555b1 that engages with the convex portion H515, but abuts against the upper surface of the main body portion H555d on which the engaging portion H555b1 is formed, so that the force exerted when operating the operation unit H180 is prevented from acting directly on the engaging portion H555b1 (protruding portion H555b). Therefore, it is possible to prevent only the protruding portion H555b from bending, thereby preventing the engagement between the engaging portion H555b1 and the engaged portion H515b2 from being released.

In addition, an elastic member H558 is disposed on the upper surface side of the main body H555d in the connecting portion H555 where the engagement portion H555b1 is formed, and the lower surface of the operation unit H180 is disposed in a state in which the elastic member H558 is in contact with the elastic member H558 (the elastic member H558 is elastically deformed), so that the elastic member H558 can absorb a pressing force within a predetermined range (to the extent that the connecting portion H555 is not elastically deformed) when the button portion H181 of the operation unit H180 is pressed.

Furthermore, since the operation unit H180 is disposed in a state in which the elastic member H558 is elastically deformed, even if there is an error in the positioning of the operation unit H180 or the lower tray forming member H530, the abutting state between the elastic member H558 and the operation unit H180 can be maintained. This prevents a gap from being formed between the operation unit H180 and the elastic member H558, and prevents the operation unit H180 from moving downward due to the operating force of the operation unit H180, causing the lower surface of the operation unit H180 to abut against the elastic member H558. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an impact when the operation unit H180 is operated.

Next, referring to Fig. 1870 to L15, the lower protective plate H580 arranged on the first decorative plate H541 will be described. Fig. 1870(a) is a bottom view of the upper and lower plate unit H15, Fig. 1870(b) is a front view of the lower protective plate H580, Fig. 1871(a) is a front oblique view of the lower protective plate H580, Fig. 1871(b) is a rear oblique view of the lower protective plate H580, Fig. 1872(a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower plate unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXXIIa in Fig. 1870(a), and Fig. 1872(b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower plate unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXXIIb in Fig. 1870(a).

As shown in Figures 1870 to 1872, the lower protective plate H580 mainly includes a front protective portion H581 that covers the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first decorative plate H541, a bottom protective portion H582 that is bent from the lower edge of the front protective portion H581 toward the rear side (arrow B direction side), a protruding portion H583 that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the bottom protective portion H582, an engagement portion H585 that protrudes from the upper end of one left-right side of the front protective portion H581 (the left side when viewed from the front (arrow L direction side) in the 111th embodiment) toward the rear side, and a fastening portion H584 that protrudes from the rear side of the other left-right side of the front protective portion H581 (the right side when viewed from the front (arrow R direction side) in the 111th embodiment) toward the rear side, and is made of a translucent resin material that transmits light.

The front side protective portion H581 is formed in a position that covers the lower front surface of the first decorative plate H541, and is formed in a shape that fits along the front surface of the first decorative plate H541. The bottom side protective portion H582 is formed in a position that covers the lower surface of the first decorative plate H541, and is formed in a shape that fits along the bottom surface of the first decorative plate H541. These front side protective portion H581 and bottom side protective portion H582 prevent the player's hands or objects from directly contacting the lower portion of the first decorative plate H541, and thus prevent damage to the lower portion of the first decorative plate H541.

As described above, the pachinko machine H10 has a ball removal lever H52 operated by the player located in front of the lower tray H50, and the player's hand operating the ball removal lever H52 is likely to come into contact with the lower part of the first decorative panel H541. Also, a box for storing balls dispensed from the lower tray H50 is located below the lower tray H50, and when replacing the box, the box or the player's hand is likely to come into contact with the lower part of the first decorative panel H541. Therefore, there is a problem in that the lower part of the first decorative panel H541 is more easily damaged than the parts that form the other decorative surfaces (upper decorative unit H15a, left decorative unit H15b, or right decorative unit H15c).

In contrast, in the 111th embodiment, the front side protective portion H581 and the bottom side protective portion H582 can cover the lower portion of the first decorative plate H541, thereby preventing the lower portion of the first decorative plate H541 from being damaged.

In addition, if the lower protective plate H580 is damaged by contact with a player's hand or an object, it is only necessary to replace the lower protective plate H580 arranged on the first decorative plate H541. Therefore, compared to replacing the first decorative plate H541, there is no need to remove other components arranged on the first decorative plate H541 (such as the ball removal unit H560) from the first decorative plate H541. As a result, part replacement work in the event of damage can be easily performed.

Furthermore, the front protection part H581 is disposed with at least a predetermined gap in the front surface of the first decorative plate H541 (see FIG. 1872). Therefore, when a relatively large force is applied from the front side (arrow F direction) of the pachinko machine H10 toward the back side (arrow B direction), the front protection part H581 can be deflected by the gap with the first decorative plate H541. This prevents the force acting from the front side of the pachinko machine H10 from directly acting on the lower part of the first decorative plate H541, thereby preventing damage to the first decorative plate H541.

In the 111th embodiment, the first decorative plate H541 is disposed with a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front protection part H581, but the LED may be disposed with a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front protection part H581.

The bottom protection part H582 is disposed with its entire upper surface in contact with the lower surface of the first decorative plate H541 (see FIG. 1872). The bottom protection part H582 also has two engaged parts H582a formed in the outer edge of the back side (arrow B direction) that penetrate in the up-down direction (arrows U-D direction).

The engaged portion H582a is a portion that engages with the engaging portion H541c that protrudes downward from the underside of the first decorative plate H541, and is opened to a size that allows the engaging portion H541c to be housed therein. The method of engaging the engaged portion H582a with the engaging portion H541c will be described later.

The protrusion H583 is a part that prevents the balls stored in the lower tray H50 from scattering when they are discharged from the discharge outlet H561a into the 1000-ryo box, and is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the discharge outlet H561a of the lower tray H50, and is formed in a position that is biased to the right side of the pachinko machine H10 (arrow R direction side) than the discharge outlet H561a of the lower tray H50.

The lower tray H50 has a ball guide opening H53 for allowing balls to flow into the storage area, which is formed in a position biased toward the left side of the storage area when viewed from the front (the direction of arrow L), and a discharge opening H561a for discharging balls from the lower tray H50 is formed in a position biased toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) and toward the right side of the storage area when viewed from the front (the direction of arrow R). This allows the balls discharged from the storage area of the lower tray H50 to have directional components toward the front and right, allowing them to be discharged in a scattered manner throughout the 1000-ryo box.

However, if the impact of the falling ball on its landing into the box is great, such as when there are no balls stored in the box yet, the ball that falls into the box and bounces up may bounce up to a position above the top of the box. In this case, if a forward directional component is given to the ball, it may fly out from the front side of the box (the side indicated by arrow F) and fall towards the player, which may draw the player's attention to the ball and make it difficult for the player to continue playing.

In contrast to this, in the 111th embodiment, the protrusion H583 is formed on the opposite side (upper right side of the front of the box) of the ball guide opening H53 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) across the discharge outlet H561a when viewed from the front, so that when a ball discharged from the lower tray H50 collides with the box and bounces up, the ball can be made to abut against the protrusion H583. As a result, the ball discharged from the lower tray H50 is prevented from flying out from the top of the box toward the player, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In addition, since the protrusion H583 is formed closer to the front than the outlet H561a through which the balls are discharged from the lower tray H50 (i.e., in a position biased toward the front side of the bottom surface of the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837)), when a ball discharged from the lower tray H50 collides with the box and attempts to bounce up and fly out from the front, the ball can be made to more easily come into contact with the protrusion H583. As a result, the ball discharged from the lower tray H50 is prevented from flying out from the top of the box towards the player, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

Furthermore, the protrusion H583 extends left and right (arrow L-R direction) of the pachinko machine H10 when viewed from the front, and is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) from the left side (arrow L direction) close to the discharge outlet H561a when viewed from the front, toward the right side (arrow R direction) away from the discharge outlet H561a. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flying out the right side of the box when it collides with the box and bounces up, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

The protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment is formed in a shape in which multiple (four) curved walls H583a that are curved convexly toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) are connected in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R), and is formed closer to the front side (i.e., in a position biased toward the front side of the bottom surface of the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837)) than the outlet H561a that discharges balls from the lower tray H50. This makes it possible to disperse (scatter) the directions in which balls bounce when they come into contact with the protrusion H583 after being discharged from the lower tray H50. As a result, it is possible to easily scatter the balls throughout the coin box and discharge them (i.e., it is possible to prevent them from being concentrated in one place).

The engagement portion H585 and the fastening portion H584 are portions that prevent the upper portion of the lower protective plate H580 from falling off the first decorative plate H541 when the lower protective plate H580 is disposed on the first decorative plate H541, and are formed on the upper portion of the front protective portion H581.

The engagement portion H585 protrudes toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) and is formed in an L-shape with its protruding tip bent upward, so that when the lower protective plate H580 is disposed on the first decorative plate H541, it can be positioned in the gap formed between the first decorative plate H541 and the front side wall H554 of the lower dish constituent unit H550. This makes it possible to prevent the upper left side of the lower protective plate H580, where the engagement portion H585 is formed, from moving in the front-to-rear direction.

The shape of the engagement portion H585 may be any shape that engages with the first decorative plate H541 or the lower plate component unit H550, and may be formed, for example, into an L-shape that bends downward.

The fastening portion H584 is a portion into which a screw is inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first decorative plate H541, and this allows the lower protective plate H580, which is engaged with the first decorative plate H541 by the engaging portion H585 and the engaged portion H582a, to be fastened and fixed to the first decorative plate H541.

The lower protective plate H580 can be attached to the first decorative plate H541 by inserting the engagement portion H585 formed on the upper portion of the lower protective plate H580 into the gap between the first decorative plate H541 and the lower dish component unit H550, and then engaging the engaged portion H582a formed on the lower portion of the lower protective plate H580 with the engagement portion H541c of the first decorative plate H541.

In this case, the engaging portion H541c of the first decorative plate H541 is formed with a part of the side surface on the side (front side (arrow F direction side)) opposite the arrangement direction of the lower protective plate H580 inclined toward the front side toward the protruding base end side. This allows the bottom side protective portion H582 of the lower protective plate H580 to deform along the inclined surface of the engaging portion H541c and overcome the engaging portion H541c when engaging the engaged portion H582a of the lower protective plate H580 with the engaging portion H541c of the first decorative plate H541. As a result, it is possible to easily engage the engaged portion H582a of the lower protective plate H580 with the engaging portion H541c of the first decorative plate H541.

Next, referring to FIG. 1873, a case where the front frame H14 is temporarily placed upright on the floor will be described. FIG. 1873(a) and (b) are side views of the front frame H14. Note that in FIG. 1873(a) and (b), the lower part of the front frame H14 is illustrated enlarged, and the floor surface is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Also, FIG. 1873(a) illustrates a state in which the base member H510 and the lower surface of the first decorative panel H541 of the front frame H14 are placed in contact with the floor surface, and FIG. 1873(b) illustrates a state in which the front frame H14 is tilted forward from the state shown in FIG. 1873(a).

The case where the front frame H14 is temporarily placed upright on the floor refers to a case where the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the production line in a factory during the manufacture of the pachinko machine H10, or a case where the front frame H14 is temporarily removed from the pachinko machine H10 and temporarily placed during installation or inspection work at a pachinko parlor (hall).

When temporarily placing the front frame H14, if the bottom surfaces of the base member H510 and the first decorative panel H541 are configured as flat surfaces, there is a problem that if the floor surface is uneven, the front frame H14 will not be able to stabilize its position due to the unevenness, and the front frame H14 will be prone to falling over.

Note that placing the front side (arrow F direction) or back side (arrow B direction) of the front frame H14 on the floor is not possible because it may scratch the decorative surface on the front side of the front frame H14 or the glass unit H16 arranged on the back side of the front frame H14, or the wiring connected from the back side of the front frame H14 may become pinched and disconnected, and it requires a lot of space to place it on. Therefore, during the manufacturing process in factories and during installation and inspection work in pachinko parlors, one longitudinal side (top or bottom) of the front frame H14 is placed on the floor to minimize the space required for placement.

In contrast, in the front frame H14 of the 111th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1873(a), the base member H510 is disposed in a position that protrudes downward from the lower plate forming member H530 disposed on its front side (i.e., the lower plate forming member H530 is disposed above the lower end of the base member H510, and the width in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is made smaller than the width in the front-to-rear direction of the lower plate forming member H530.

As a result, when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed with the underside of the base member H510 abutting the floor surface as shown in FIG. 1873(a), the load of the lower plate forming member H530 tilts the front frame H14 forward, and as shown in FIG. 1873(b), the protruding portion H583 of the lower protective plate H580 arranged on the lower plate forming member H530 can abut the floor surface.

That is, the front frame H14 in the 111th embodiment has a protruding portion H583 protruding from the surface of one side (lower surface) of the front frame H14 in the longitudinal direction, and the protruding portion H583 is formed at a position away from the base member H510 toward the front side (a position biased toward the front side in the front-to-rear direction on the lower surface of the front frame H14), so that the lower end of the base member H510 and the protruding tip of the protruding portion H583 can be abutted against the floor surface to make the front frame H14 self-supporting. This makes it possible to make the front frame H14 less susceptible to the unevenness of the floor surface compared to when the surface of one side (lower surface) of the longitudinal direction of the front frame H14 is formed on a flat surface, and the posture of the front frame H14 when it is self-supporting can be stabilized. As a result, the front frame H14 can be made less likely to fall over.

In addition, the protrusion H583 is formed at a position that is biased toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) from the center in the front-to-back direction of the lower surface of the front frame H14 (from the center of gravity of the front frame H14) in the front-to-back direction (in the direction of arrow F-B) where the lower end of the base member H510 and the protruding tip of the protrusion H583 abut against the floor surface.

As a result, the width of the front frame H14 in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B) of the base member H510 is made smaller than the width of the lower tray forming member H530 in the front-to-rear direction, so the center of gravity tends to be biased toward the front, but since the protrusion H583 is formed further forward than the center of gravity, bias in the center of gravity when the front frame H14 is freestanding can be suppressed. In other words, the center of gravity of the front frame H14 is located outside the front-to-rear direction of the abutment position, which prevents the front frame H14 from easily tipping over toward the front when the front frame H14 is freestanding.

The protruding portion H583 is configured so that the protruding tip is located above (in the direction of arrow U) the lower end of the base member H510. Therefore, when the protruding portion H583 is abutted against the floor surface to temporarily place the front frame H14, the front frame H14 can be held in a tilted state toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). This makes it easier to position the center of gravity of the front frame H14 between the point where the protruding portion H583 is supported on the floor surface and the point where the base member H510 and the first decorative panel H541 are supported on the floor surface, and the front frame H14 can be stably held in an upright state when temporarily placed upright on the floor surface.

The protrusion H583 is also configured so that its protruding tip is positioned lower than the ball removal unit H560, which is disposed at the bottom of the first decorative panel H541. This prevents the ball removal unit H560 from contacting the floor surface when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed with the protrusion H583 in contact with the floor surface. This prevents force from acting on the ball removal unit H560, and prevents damage to the sliding mechanism of the ball removal unit H560 (sliding displacement of the sliding plate H562).

Furthermore, the width of the protrusion H583 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front is set smaller than the left-right width of the base member H510 and the lower tray forming member H530. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the protruding tip of the protrusion H583 and the floor surface when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor. Therefore, when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor, it is less susceptible to the effects of unevenness on the floor surface. As a result, the posture of the front frame H14 when it is standing on its own is stabilized, making it less likely for the front frame H14 to tip over.

In addition, the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment is formed in a shape in which multiple (4) curved walls H583a that are curved convexly toward the front side (arrow F direction) are connected in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), so that when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor, a part of the curved walls H583a abuts the floor surface. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the protruding tip of the protrusion H583 and the floor surface when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor. Therefore, when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor, it is possible to make it less susceptible to the unevenness of the floor surface. As a result, the posture of the front frame H14 when it is freestanding can be stabilized, making it less likely for the front frame H14 to fall over.

Next, we will explain how to lift the front frame H14 that has been temporarily placed on the floor. When lifting the front frame H14, it is often the case that the front frame H14 is attached to the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the pachinko machine H10 in the next process. Therefore, the worker who lifts the front frame H14 inserts his hand under the front frame H14 from the front side of the front frame H14 to lift it.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 1873(b), the protrusion H583 is disposed at a predetermined distance toward the rear side (arrow B side) of the front side (arrow F side) end of the underside of the front frame H14, so that a predetermined gap can be formed between the underside of the front side of the front frame H14 and the floor surface. This allows the worker to insert his or her fingers between the underside of the front side of the front frame H14 and the floor surface and hook the fingers on the part that is more forward than the protrusion H583. As a result, the worker can easily lift the front frame H14.

In addition, by arranging the protrusion H583 at a predetermined distance on the rear side (arrow B side) from the front side (arrow F side) end of the underside of the front frame H14, the downward protrusion distance of the protrusion H583 can be shortened without changing the inclination of the front frame H14 in a freestanding state, compared to when the protrusion H583 is formed at the front side end of the underside of the front frame H14. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the protrusion H583 from getting in the way when it is not being used (for example, during play).

Furthermore, since the protrusion H583 is formed on the rear side compared to when the protrusion H583 is formed on the front end of the underside of the front frame H14, it is possible to prevent the protrusion H583 from being seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion H583 from unnecessarily attracting the player's interest, allowing the player to concentrate on the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1874, a case where the front frame H14 arranged on the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835) is rotated relative to the outer frame H11 will be described. FIG. 1874(a) is a bottom view of the front frame H14, and FIG. 1874(b) is a side view of the front frame H14. Note that in FIG. 1874(a) and (b), the worker's hands are shown by two-dot chain lines, and illustrations of anything other than the front frame H14 (e.g., the outer frame H11) are omitted.

As described above, the front frame H14 is supported so as to be able to open and close toward the front (in the direction of the arrow F) around hinges H18 attached to two locations, one above and one below, on the left side of the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835) when viewed from the front. In addition, the protrusion H583 formed on the upper and lower tray unit H15 is formed in a position that is biased to the right of the center in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) when viewed from the front of the front frame H14, and extends radially outward from the rotation axis of the front frame H14 (one end side is formed on the side closer to the rotation axis, and the other end side is formed in a position away from the rotation axis).

As shown in Figs. 1874(a) and (b), when opening the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11 (see Fig. 1835), the protrusion H583 can be easily gripped by the worker's hand. This makes it easier for the worker to open the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11.

In addition, because the protrusion H583 is shaped to connect multiple curved walls H583a, the player can hook his/her fingers on the curved portion (recessed portion) of one of the curved walls H583a. This prevents the player's fingers from slipping left/right (arrow L-R direction) on the protrusion H583 when opening the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835). As a result, it becomes easier to open the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11.

Furthermore, ribs H583b that connect to the underside of the bottom protection part H582 are formed on the front and rear side surfaces of the multiple curved walls H583a. This ensures the strength of the protrusion H583 and prevents damage to the protrusion H583. It also prevents the protrusion H583 from deforming (falling) relative to the bottom protection part H582 if an operator catches his/her finger on the protrusion H583. As a result, it prevents the player's finger from getting caught on the protrusion H583 when opening the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835).

In addition, since the protrusion H583 is formed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front side protective part H581, the finger of the worker who hooks the protrusion H583 can easily enter the rear side of the upper and lower plate unit H15. Therefore, the area where the worker's finger is placed on the lower part of the upper and lower plate unit H15 can be increased, and when opening the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835), it is easier to apply a force in the direction of lifting the front frame H14. As a result, when opening the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11, the front frame H14 can be opened while lifting the right side of the front frame H14 when viewed from the front. As a result, even if the right side of the front frame H14 away from the rotation axis of the outer frame H11 is tilted due to its own weight and the lower surface is abutting the outer frame H11 (high rotation resistance), it is easy to open the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11.

Next, the upper protective plate H570 will be described with reference to Figs. 1875 to 1877. First, the configuration of the upper protective plate H570 will be described with reference to Figs. 1875 and 1876. Fig. 1875(a) is a front view of the upper protective plate H570, Fig. 1875(b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper protective plate H570 taken along line MDCCCLXXVb in Fig. 1875(a), Fig. 1875(c) is a cross-sectional view of the upper protective plate H570 taken along line MDCCCLXXVc in Fig. 1875(a), Fig. 1876(a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower plate unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXXVIa in Fig. 1858, and Fig. 1876(b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower plate unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXXVIb in Fig. 1858.

Note that the cross-sectional positions in Figure 1876(a) and Figure 1875(b) show cross-sections at the same position, and the cross-sectional positions in Figure 1876(b) and Figure 1875(b) show cross-sections at the same position.

As shown in L21 and FIG. 1876, the upper protective plate H570 mainly comprises a front protective portion H571 shaped to cover the front side (arrow F direction) of the first decorative plate H541, an insertion portion H572 erected from the opposing edge of the front protective portion H571 toward the first decorative plate H541, and a bent portion H573 formed by bending from the lower end of the front protective portion H571 toward the rear side (arrow B direction).

The front side protective portion H571 is formed from a plate-like body shaped to fit the front surface of the first decorative plate H541, and is formed in a position that covers the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first decorative plate H541 between the upper tray H17 and the lower tray H50 when viewed from the front. By positioning the front side protective portion H571 on the front side of the first decorative plate H541, it is possible to prevent the player's hands or objects from directly contacting the first decorative plate H541, thereby preventing damage to the first decorative plate H541.

Here, in order to send balls stored in the lower tray H50 or the 1000-ryo box located below the lower tray H50 to the upper tray H17 of the pachinko machine H10, the player must grasp the balls stored in the lower tray H50 or the 1000-ryo box and send them to the storage area of the upper tray H17. Also, while playing the pachinko machine H10, the player must hold the operating handle H51 with his right hand, and to send a ball to the upper tray H17 while playing, the player must grab the ball with his left hand and send it to the upper tray H17.

Therefore, the area between the upper tray H17 and the lower tray H50 and the left side of the upper tray H17 are likely to be located in the path of movement of the player's left hand, making them more likely to come into contact with the player's hand or an object (for example, a ball held by the player). As a result, there is a problem in that the area between the upper tray H17 and the lower tray H50 and the left side of the upper tray H17 when viewed from the front of the first decorative panel H541 are more likely to be damaged than the parts that form the other decorative surfaces (the upper decorative unit H15a, the left decorative unit H15b, or the right decorative unit H15c).

In contrast, in the 111th embodiment, the front side protective portion H571 is positioned between the upper tray H17 and the lower tray H50 when viewed from the front of the first decorative plate H541, and in a position covering the left side of the upper tray H17, thereby preventing the player's hands or objects from directly contacting the first decorative plate H541 and preventing damage to the first decorative plate H541.

In addition, if the upper protective plate H570 is damaged by contact with a player's hand or an object, it is only necessary to replace the upper protective plate H570 arranged on the first decorative plate H541. Therefore, compared to replacing the first decorative plate H541, there is no need to remove other components arranged on the first decorative plate H541 (such as the ball removal unit H560) from the first decorative plate H541. As a result, part replacement work in the event of damage can be easily performed.

The insertion section H572 extends along the left and right edges of the front protection section H571, which is elongated in the up-down direction (direction of arrows U-D) when viewed from the front and has a small thickness in the left-right direction (direction of arrows L-R), and stands upright toward the rear side.

In addition, the first decorative plate H541 has a recess H541d recessed toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) at the portion where the front side protective portion H571 of the upper protective plate H570 is disposed, and an insertion receiving portion H541d1 into which the insertion portion H572 can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion portion H572 (see FIG. 1876 (b)).

The recess H541d is formed in a shape that is slightly larger than the thickness of the front protection part H571 in the front-to-rear direction and recessed on the rear side (the direction of arrow B). This allows the front of the front protection part H571 to be positioned along the decorative surface of the first decorative plate H541 when the front protection part H571 is disposed on the front side (reducing the step at the joint between the decorative surfaces of the front protection part H571 and the first decorative plate H541). As a result, players who touch the decorative surface of the upper and lower tray unit H15 are less likely to feel uncomfortable.

The inserted portion H541d1 is formed in a groove shape that is slightly larger than the thickness of the insert portion H572, and is formed so that the insert portion H572 can be inserted into the groove. The inserted portion H541d1 is set to a length that allows the end of the insert portion H572 on the rear side (arrow B direction side) to abut against its recessed bottom surface. That is, the gap between the rear surface of the front side protection portion H571 and the front surface of the recess H541d is formed by abutting the insert portion H572 against the recessed bottom surface of the inserted portion H541d1. This makes it easy to form a gap between the rear surface of the front side protection portion H571 and the front surface of the recess H541d, and makes it easy to maintain that gap.

The inserted portion H541d1 is formed by bending the first decorative plate H541 toward the rear side, and the plate thickness of the first decorative plate H541 in the area where the inserted portion H541d1 is formed is approximately the same as the plate thickness of the first decorative plate H541 in the area other than the inserted portion H541d1. This ensures the rigidity of the inserted portion H541d1. As a result, when a predetermined force is applied to the upper protective plate H570 that is inserted and arranged in the inserted portion H541d1, damage to the inserted portion H541d1 can be suppressed.

One of the pair of inserted parts H541d1 has an engaged part (not shown) with a recessed bottom surface at the upper end cut out, and an engaging part H572a protruding downward from the upper end of one of the inserted parts H572 can be inserted into the engaged part. This makes it possible to prevent the upper right part of the upper protective plate H570 from moving toward the rear side (arrow B direction) when the upper protective plate H570 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the first decorative plate H541.

In addition, the front protective portion H571 has a fastening portion H571a (see FIG. 1875(b)) protruding from the rear side (arrow B direction side) opposite the side where the engagement portion H572a is formed in the left-right direction. The fastening portion H571a is a portion into which a screw is inserted from the first decorative plate H541 side to the front side (arrow F direction side), and this allows the upper left part of the upper protective plate H570 to be fastened and fixed to the first decorative plate H541.

That is, in the 111th embodiment, the upper side of the upper protective plate H570 has a right portion engaged with the first decorative plate H541 by the engaging portion H572a, and a left portion fastened to the first decorative plate H541 by the fastening portion H571a. This engagement and fastening prevents the upper portion of the upper protective plate H570 from moving (falling off) toward the front side (arrow F direction) relative to the first decorative plate H541.

In this embodiment, the fastening portion H571a is formed at a position biased to the other side in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the front protection portion H571 when viewed from the front, so that, as described below, when a predetermined force acts on the front protection portion H571, the front protection portion H571 can be deflected toward the rear side (arrow B direction).

In other words, if both the left and right ends of the front protection part H571 are fastened and fixed, the front protection part H571 cannot deform in the left-right direction when a predetermined force acts on the front protection part H571. However, in the 111th embodiment, one side in the left-right direction is engaged by the engaging part H572a, so that the front protection part H571 can deform to one side.

The bent portion H573 is bent toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) along the inner edge of the first opening H541a of the first decorative panel H541, and is formed at a position where at least a part of the bent tip side enters the storage space of the lower tray H50. In addition, by forming the bent portion H573 along the inner edge of the first opening H541a, it is formed with a concave curve toward the upper side (the inside of the front side protective portion H571) when viewed from the front.

The bent portion H573 is formed with an engaged portion H573a that opens in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), and the engaged portion H573a engages with an engaging portion H541e that protrudes downward from the upper inner edge of the first opening H541a of the first decorative plate H541. The method of engaging the engaged portion H573a with the engaging portion H541e will be described later.

Next, the state in which the front protection part H571 is disposed on the front surface of the first decorative board H541 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1876, the front protection part H571 is disposed with a predetermined gap at least partially from the front surface of the first decorative board H541.

When a relatively large force acts from the front side (arrow F direction) of the pachinko machine H10 toward the back side (arrow B direction), the front side protection part H571 can be deflected toward the back side due to a predetermined gap between the first decorative plate H541 and the front side protection part H571. This prevents the force acting from the front side of the pachinko machine H10 from acting directly on the first decorative plate H541, thereby preventing damage to the first decorative plate H541.

However, since the lower side of the upper protective plate H570 only has the engaged portion H573a engaged with the engaging portion H541e that protrudes downward from the first decorative plate H541, when the front protective portion H571 is bent toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) due to a certain gap between the front protective portion H571 and the first decorative plate H541, the bent portion H573 spreads toward the outside of the front protective portion H571 when viewed from the front, and there is a risk that the engagement between the engaged portion H573a and the engaging portion H541e will be released.

In contrast, in the 111th embodiment, the front protection part H571 on which the insertion part H572 is formed is formed in a shape that is curved convexly toward the front side (arrow F direction) from both the left and right ends toward the center, so that when a predetermined force is applied to the front protection part H571 from the front side, the front protection part H571 can be deflected in a direction that spreads outward in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the engagement between the engaged part H573a and the engaging part H541e can be prevented from being released.

In other words, in the 111th embodiment, when a predetermined force acts on the front side (arrow F direction) on the front protection part H571, the amount of elastic deformation in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) can be made larger than the amount of elastic deformation in the direction of gravity (arrow U-D direction), and since the engaged part H573a that engages with the first decorative board H541 (engaging part H541e) is formed on the outer side in the direction of gravity where the amount of elastic deformation is smaller, it is possible to prevent the position of the engaged part H573a from shifting when the front protection part H571 elastically deforms. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaged part H573a and the engaging part H541e from being released.

The upper protective plate H570 has insertion portions H572 formed on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) that are inserted into the inserted portions H541d1 of the first decorative plate H541, so that when the front protective portion H571 is deformed in the left-right direction due to a force acting on the front protective portion H571, the front protective portion H571 can be prevented from contacting the decorative surface of the first decorative plate H541.

In addition, since the insertion portion H572 is inserted into the insertion portion H541d1 of the first decorative plate H541, the position of the front side protection portion H571 can be prevented from shifting when the front side protection portion H571 is deformed in the left-right direction due to a force acting on the front side protection portion H571. As a result, the appearance of the upper and lower plate unit H15 can be prevented from changing.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the bent portion H573 extends in the opposing direction of the pair of insertion portions H572 in a front view, and is formed to be curved concavely upward (toward the inside of the front protection portion H571). Therefore, when the front protection portion H571 elastically deforms in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R), the force with which both the left and right sides of the bent portion H573 are pulled by the flexure of the front protection portion H571 can be easily converted into a force in a direction that tilts the portion where the engaged portion H573a of the bent portion H573 is formed toward the center of the front protection portion H571 in a front view.

In this way, in the 111th embodiment, when a predetermined force acts on the front protection part H571 from the front side (the direction of the arrow F) and the front protection part H571 elastically deforms, the engaged part H573a can be prevented from being displaced in a direction that releases the engagement with the engaging part H541e. As a result, the engagement between the engaged part H573a and the engaging part H541e can be prevented from being released.

The engaging portion H541e is formed on the inside of the first opening H541a. In other words, because it is formed on the inside of the lower tray H50, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the engagement point between the engaged portion H573a and the engaging portion H541e. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from releasing the engagement between the engaged portion H573a and the engaging portion H541e.

In the 111th embodiment, the engaging portion H541e protruding from the first decorative plate H541 is engaged with the engaged portion H573a of the upper protective plate H570. However, the engaging portion H541e and the engaged portion H573a may be formed in the opposite direction, and the engaging portion protruding from the upper protective plate H570 may be engaged with the engaged portion recessed in the first decorative plate H541.

In this case, there is no need to form an opening for the engaged portion H573a in the upper protective plate H570, so when the upper protective plate H570 is arranged on the first decorative plate H541, no opening appears on the decorative surface of the upper and lower tray unit H15, which prevents the player from trying to disengage the upper protective plate H570 from the first decorative plate H541. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion H573a and the engaging portion H541e can be prevented from being released.

Next, referring to FIG. 1877, a method of arranging the upper protective plate H570 on the first decorative plate H541 will be described. FIG. 1877(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the upper and lower plate unit H15 with the upper protective plate H570 disassembled from the first decorative plate H541.

Figures 1877(a) and (b) correspond to the cross section of the upper and lower dish unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXXVIa in Figure 1858. Figure 1877(a) shows a cross section of the upper and lower dish unit H15 with the upper protective plate H570 completely removed from the first decorative plate H541, and Figure 1877(b) shows a cross section of the upper and lower dish unit H15 in the process of attaching the upper protective plate H570 to the first decorative plate H541.

As shown in Figures 1877(a) and (b), when attaching the upper protective plate H570 to the first decorative plate H541, the insertion portion H572 of the upper protective plate H570 is inserted into the insertion portion H541d1 of the first decorative plate H541 while the upper protective plate H570 is pushed toward the first decorative plate H541, so that the bent portion H573 is aligned in a vertical position where it abuts against the inner edge of the first opening H541a of the first decorative plate H541.

In this case, the engaging portion H541e of the first decorative plate H541 is formed with a part of the side surface on the side opposite the arrangement direction of the upper protective plate H570 (the front side (arrow F direction side)) inclined toward the front side toward the protruding base end side. As a result, when the engaged portion H573a of the upper protective plate H570 is engaged with the engaging portion H541e of the first decorative plate H541, the bent portion H573 of the upper protective plate H570 can be deformed along the inclined surface of the engaging portion H541e to overcome the engaging portion H541e. As a result, it is possible to easily engage the engaged portion H573a of the upper protective plate H570 with the engaging portion H541e of the first decorative plate H541.

Next, the operation unit H180 will be described with reference to Fig. 1878 to Fig. 1900. First, the overall configuration of the operation unit H180 will be described with reference to Fig. 1878 to Fig. 1880. Fig. 1878(a) is a front perspective view of the operation unit H180, Fig. 1878(b) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit H180, Fig. 1879 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit H180, and Fig. 1880 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit H180.

As shown in Figures 1878 to 1880, the operation unit H180 comprises a tilting device H710 having a button portion H181 on its upper surface, a lower frame member H720 arranged inside the tilting device H710 so that the tilting device H710 can be swung in the up and down directions (arrows U-D direction), a swinging device H730 arranged inside the lower frame member H720, and a ring member H713 of the tilting device H710 supported from above (arrow U direction side) by a swinging device H730 arranged inside the lower frame member H720. It mainly comprises an upper frame member H740 arranged opposite to the tilting device H720, a drive means H750 arranged below the lower frame member H720 (arrow D direction side) and transmitting a drive force to the tilting device H710 via an arm member H755, and a box-shaped protective cover member H760 arranged below the lower frame member H720 and covering the drive means H750 from three sides, the left and right directions (arrow L-R directions) and the rear (arrow F direction).

The lower frame member H720 is formed in a cup shape that is concave toward the lower side (the direction of the arrow D) and is made of a transparent resin material that can transmit light. This allows the rocking device H730 to be disposed inside the lower frame member H720, and allows the light emitted from the rocking device H730 toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) to be transmitted to the front side.

The lower frame member H720 mainly comprises a front plate H721 formed in a curved shape along the back surface of the second decorative plate H542 of the upper and lower tray unit H15 described above, a back plate H722 formed to be connected to the end of the front plate H721 on the back side (arrow B direction side) and formed in a shape that slopes upward from the edge of the back side of the front plate H721 toward the back side, a pair of protrusions H723 protruding upward (arrow U direction) from the upper end of the back side of the back plate H722, a holding portion forming plate H724 extending from the back plate H722 toward the back side and holding the driving means H750 on the lower side, a left detection sensor H725L and a right detection sensor H725R arranged in a pair on the left and right sides below the holding portion forming plate H724, and a button detection sensor H726 arranged at the lower end of the right side (arrow R direction side) of the back plate H722.

The front panel H721 is a part that is disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the second decorative panel H542 (see FIG. 1859) when the operation unit H180 is disposed on the upper and lower tray unit H15 (base member H510), and is formed in a curved shape that follows the rear side of the second decorative panel H542. The front panel H721 also includes a wall portion H721a that stands toward the front side along the outer edge of the front side, and an opening portion H721b that opens in the front-rear direction at part of the lower end.

The wall portion H721a is set at a standing distance that allows the standing tip on the front side to abut against the back surface of the second decorative plate H542. Therefore, when the operation unit H180 is arranged on the upper and lower tray unit H15 (base member H510), a space can be formed between the front surface of the front plate H721 excluding the wall portion H721a and the back surface of the second decorative plate H542. This space can prevent the impact input to the front surface of the second decorative plate H542 from acting directly on the front plate H721 (operation unit H180). As a result, the drive means H780 and displacement member H790 of the rocking device H730 described later can be prevented from rocking due to the impact input to the second decorative plate H542.

The opening H721b is a space formed at the lower end of the front panel H721 to discharge debris (dust, etc.) or liquid to the outside of the tilting device H710 if it flows inside the lower frame member H720 through a gap with the tilting device H710, which will be described later. Therefore, debris (dust, etc.) or liquid that flows inside the lower frame member H720 can be discharged to the outside of the operation unit H180 via the opening H721b.

This prevents debris (dust, etc.) or liquid from accumulating inside the lower frame member H720, restricting the displacement of the tilt device H710 or the oscillating device H730 of the operation unit H180, or causing a short circuit in the base member H773 of the oscillating device H730.

The back plate H722 is a base plate for mounting the oscillating device H730 described below, and has an insertion hole H722a in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) for inserting a screw to be screwed into the oscillating device H730. The oscillating device H730 is mounted on the back plate H722 which is inclined upward toward the back side (arrow B direction), so that the front side (arrow F direction) is tilted upward (arrow U direction).

The back panel H722 also has a pair of openings H722b that open in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) on both the left and right outer sides, and a screw hole (not shown) into which a screw is inserted to fasten the button detection sensor H726, which is located adjacent to one of the openings H722b (the opening H722b on the right side when viewed from the front), to the lower frame member H720.

The pair of openings H722b are openings for inserting a pair of arm members H755 to connect the driving means H750 arranged on the outside of the lower frame member H720 and the tilting device H710 arranged on the inside of the lower frame member H720, and are opened on the displacement trajectory of each arm member H755 and are formed to a size that does not interfere with the arm members H755 when the arm members H755 are displaced.

The pair of protruding portions H723 protrude upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the upper end of the back plate H722, and are provided with a lower bearing portion H723a at the protruding tip, the upper side of which is open so that the ring member H713 of the tilting device H710 can be inserted from above.

The lower bearing portion H723a is formed by recessing the protruding tip side of each of the pair of protruding portions H723 in a semicircular shape, and is formed with an open shape on the opposing surface side of the pair of protruding portions H723. The lower bearing portion H723a is formed so that the ring member H713 of the tilting device H710 can be placed inside the recessed portion, and is formed in a semicircular shape with a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the ring member H713, which is formed in a cylindrical shape.

The holding portion forming plate H724 is a portion for displaceably holding the drive means H750 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear plate H722, and is formed by extending from the edge on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the rear plate H722 to the rear side. In addition, a drive motor H727 that generates a drive force to drive the drive means H750 is attached to the underside of the center part in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the holding portion forming plate H724 via a mounting bracket H728, and a left detection sensor H725L and a right detection sensor H725R are disposed on the left-right outer sides of the drive motor H727.

The holding portion forming plate H724 also has a pair of holding portions H724a formed at positions spaced apart in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) to hold the front and rear of the transmission shaft rod H753 of the drive means H750. Each holding portion H724a has a pair of protruding portions spaced a predetermined distance apart in the front-rear direction, and is formed so that the transmission shaft rod H753 can be held between the opposing pair of protruding portions.

The left detection sensor H725L is a sensor that detects the rotational position of the left disc cam H754L of the drive means H750 described below, and the right detection sensor H725R is a sensor that detects the rotational position of the right disc cam H754R of the drive means H750. The left detection sensor H725L and the right detection sensor H725R are disposed at positions corresponding to the respective disc cams H754L, H754R. The left detection sensor H725L and the right detection sensor H725R can detect the rotational position of the respective disc cams H754L, H754R because the detection light is not blocked by the detection portions H754gL, H754gR formed by cutting out the disc cams H754L, H754R.

The button detection sensor H726 is formed with a pair of upper and lower sensors, an upper sensor H726a and a lower sensor H726b, and the upper sensor H726a is capable of detecting the tilting device H710 placed in the tilted position, and the lower sensor H726b is capable of detecting the tilting device H710 pushed in from the tilted position. That is, the upper sensor H726a is capable of detecting the detection piece H715 of the tilting device H710 placed in the tilted position, and the lower sensor H726b is capable of detecting the detection piece H715 of the tilting device H710 pushed in from the tilted position.

The various switches H208 (see FIG. 1842) of the sensors (left side detection sensor H725L, right side detection sensor H725R, button detection sensor H726) that detect the operation of the operation unit H180 are connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPU H201 can execute various processes (audio output and LCD display) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

The tilting device H710 mainly comprises a button portion H181 on the top surface, a front side transparent portion H711 extending downward from the outer edge of the front side of the button portion H181, a side side reflective portion H712 extending downward from the outer edges of both the left and right sides of the button portion H181, an axis member H716 (see FIG. 1888) arranged along the outer edge of the back side of the button portion H181, ring members H713 arranged on both ends of the axis member H716, a torsion spring H717 wound around the axis member H716, a bracket H714 arranged along the edge of the lower end of the side side reflective portion H712, and a detection piece H715 arranged at the lower end of the front side of the side side reflective portion H712 and protruding downward. The button portion H181, the front side transparent portion H711, and the side side reflective portion H712 form a box shape with an opening on the lower side.

The tilting device H710 is formed to be rotatable around the ring member H713 as a rotation axis, and can be displaced between the tilted position described above and an upright position obtained by rotating the front side upward from the tilted position. In the tilted position, the rocking device H730 can be arranged inside the button section H181, the front side transparent section H711, and the side side reflective section H712. In the 111th embodiment, the ring member H713 (rotation axis) is arranged on the back side of the tilting device H710, but the ring member H713 (rotation axis) may be arranged on the front side or on either the left or right side, so that the back side of the tilting device H710 rises, or the other side of the left or right side rises.

The button part H181 is a member that is pressed by the player, and is positioned in a position that protrudes upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H530 (see FIG. 1859) when the tilting device H710 is in the tilted position. The button part H181 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, and is capable of transmitting light emitted from the rocking device H730 arranged on the lower side (in the direction of the arrow D) toward the upper side. The button part H181 in the 111th embodiment is formed in a shape that imitates a shell, and is formed in a fan shape that spreads in the left and right directions when viewed from above. In the 111th embodiment, the button part H181 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, but the button part H181 may be formed from a resin material that can transmit colored light, and the color of the button part H181 may be imparted to the light that passes through the button part H181.

The front side transparent portion H711 is a member that covers the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the button portion H181 when the tilting device H710 is in the upright position, and its lower end is positioned between the opposing upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H530 when in the upright position. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of wire, piano wire, or other unauthorized members between the opposing tilting device H710 and the lower tray forming member H530 when the tilting device H710 is in the upright position.

The front side transparent portion H711 (tilting device H710) is made of a colorless and transparent resin material that can transmit light, so when the tilting device H710 is in the upright position, the light emitted from the rocking device H730 located on the lower side (arrow D direction side) can be emitted to the upper front side (i.e., the player side) through the front side transparent portion H711. When the tilting device H710 is in the tilted position, the front side transparent portion H711 is positioned opposite the front plate H721 and is positioned on the front side of the rocking device H730 described below. This allows the light emitted from the rocking device H730 to be emitted to the front side through the front side transparent portion H711 and the front plate H721.

Furthermore, the front side transparent portion H711 is formed to a size such that when the tilting device H710 is pushed downward by the player, the lower end can come into contact with the rocking device H730, which will be described later, and the rocking device H730 can be displaced in response to the pressing operation of the tilting device H710. This allows the direction of the light emitted from the rocking device H730 to be changed in response to the pressing operation of the tilting device H710, so that the state of the light emitted by the rocking device H730 can be changed in response to the pressing operation of the tilting device H710. A detailed explanation of the operation of the rocking device H730 in response to the contact of the tilting device H710 will be given later.

In the 111th embodiment, the front plate H721 of the rocking device H730 is formed from a transparent resin material, and when the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position, the front side transmission part H711 emitted from the substrate member H773 is emitted to the front side through the front plate H721. However, the front plate H721 may be formed from a colored opaque (non-light-transmitting) resin material. In this case, when the tilting device H710 is in the tilted position, the transmission of light emitted from the substrate member H773 to the front side is restricted, and when the tilting device H710 is in the upright position, the restriction on the transmission of light emitted from the substrate member H773 to the front side is released.

In other words, the player can see the light of the substrate member H773 transmitted through the front-side transmission portion H711 only when the tilting device H710 is placed in the upright position. This makes it easier to create a difference in the amount of light emitted toward the player when the tilting device H710 is placed in the upright position compared to when it is placed in the upright position, making it easier to draw the player's attention to the tilting device H710 when it is placed in the upright position.

The side reflecting portion H712 is a member that covers both the left and right sides of the button portion H181 when the tilting device H710 is in the upright position, and its lower end is positioned between the opposing upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H530. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of wire, piano wire, or other unauthorized members between the opposing tilting device H710 and the lower tray forming member H530 when the tilting device H710 is in the upright position.

The side reflector H712 also has an engaged recess H712a recessed upward on both the left and right sides at a position that does not overlap with the bracket H714 disposed at the lower end. The engaged recess H712a is a portion that engages with a rotating claw member H757 (described later) to prevent the tilting device H710 from being displaced to the upright position by the biasing force of the torsion spring H717 from the state in which the tilting device H710 is disposed in the tilted position (to hold the tilting device H710 in the tilted position), and is formed at a position corresponding to the rotating claw member H757.

The side reflection portion H712 is coated with a paint capable of reflecting light toward the internal space of the tilting device H710, and is formed to be capable of reflecting light irradiated onto the side reflection portion H712. Here, when the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position, the side reflection portion H712 is placed on the back side of the rocking device H730 described below. This allows light to be reflected toward the front transmission portion H711 when light is emitted from the rocking device H730 toward the side reflection portion H712. As a result, when the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position, the amount of light emitted toward the front from the front transmission portion H711 of the tilting device H710 is increased, improving the player's interest.

The ring member H713 is the part that serves as the rotation axis of the tilting device H710, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The ring member H713 also has an axis in the left-right direction and is disposed along the edge of the back side of the button part H181. This allows the tilting device H710 to rotate between a tilted position where the front end of the button part H181 is positioned downward, and an upright position where the front end of the button part H181 is positioned upward from the tilted position.

A torsion spring H717 is provided on the shaft member H716 of the tilting device H710, and the torsion spring H717 engages with the lower frame member H720 and the tilting device H710. As a result, the tilting device H710 is disposed on the lower frame member H720 in a state where it is biased in a direction that pushes the front end upward relative to the lower frame member H720 (in a direction that displaces it to the upright position).

The bracket H714 is made by bending a metal material such as aluminum, and is formed in a U-shape (open on the front side) that fits along the lower edge of the side reflector H712 when viewed from below. By disposing the bracket H714 on the underside of the tilting device H710, it is possible to prevent the tilting device H710 from coming into contact with the back plate H722 of the lower frame member H720 and being damaged when the button portion H181 is pressed.

The bracket H714 also has a connecting portion H714a formed by bending downward from the opposing U-shaped plate portions. The connecting portion H714a is a portion to which the arm member H755 of the driving means H750 that transmits driving force to the tilting device H710 is connected, and a through hole is formed through which the connecting rod H755b of the arm member H755 can be inserted. By inserting the connecting rod H755b of the arm member H755 into the connecting portion H714a, the tilting device H710 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the arm member H755.

The detection piece H715 is a member that blocks the detection light of the button detection sensor H726, and the portion that blocks the upper sensor H726a of the button detection sensor H726 and the portion that blocks the lower sensor H726b are formed with different protruding lengths. To explain in more detail, the protruding distance of the portion that blocks the lower sensor H726b, which detects the position to which the tilting device H710 is pushed in from the tilted position, is formed to be shorter than the protruding distance of the portion that blocks the upper sensor H726a, which detects the tilted position of the tilting device H710.

The upper frame member H740 is formed in a semicircular arc shape large enough to hook (overlap in the vertical direction) the engagement piece H712b formed by bending at the lower end of the side reflector H712 of the tilting device H710 when viewed from above. This makes it possible to prevent the tilting device H710 from protruding upward beyond the upright position when the tilting device H710 is displaced from the upright position to the upright position.

The upper frame member H740 is disposed opposite the rear plate H722 of the lower frame member H720 in the vertical direction, is formed in a semicircular shape with an open bottom, and includes an upper bearing portion H741 that supports the ring member H713 of the tilting device H710.

The upper bearing portion H741 is a portion that houses the ring member H713 of the tilting device H710 between the lower bearing portion H723a and holds the ring member H713, and is formed in a semicircular shape with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the ring member H713, which is formed in a cylindrical shape.

The driving means H750 is a part that controls the rotation of the tilting device H710, and is driven by the driving force of a driving motor H727 arranged on the lower frame member H720 to control the rotation of the tilting device H710. A detailed explanation of the driving means H750 will be given later. In addition, the driving motor H727 (other device H228 (see FIG. 1842)) that drives the driving means H750 is connected to the input/output port H225 of the voice lamp control device H113, and is driven based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110.

The protective cover member H760 has a bottom surface portion H761 that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and a side wall portion H762 that extends along the outer edge of the bottom surface portion H761 and stands upright toward the upper side. It is formed in a box shape that is open on the upper side, and is configured so that it can be placed on the lower side of the lower frame member H720 with the driving means H750 housed inside.

The bottom surface portion H761 has an engagement portion H763 that protrudes from the end on the front side and is formed in an L-shape that is bent downward, and a convex portion H764 that protrudes upward and supports the transmission shaft rod H753 of the drive means H750 from below.

The engagement portion H763 is a portion that engages the lower end of the first spring H758 of the driving means H750. The first spring H758 can be biased in a direction that pulls the first engagement portion H757d of the rotating claw member H757 downward by engaging both ends with the first engagement portion H757d of the rotating claw member H757, which is journaled relative to the protective cover member H760, and the engagement portion H763 of the protective cover member H760.

Next, the driving means H750 will be described with reference to Figs. 1881 to 1885. First, the overall configuration of the driving means H750 will be described with reference to Figs. 1881 and 1882. Fig. 1881(a) is a front view of the driving means H750, Fig. 1881(b) is a side view of the driving means H750 taken along line MDCCCLXXXIb in Fig. 1881(a), and Fig. 1882 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving means H750.

1881 and 1882, the driving means H750 includes a main body member H751 that forms a framework by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, an axis member H752 disposed on both the left and right sides of the main body member H751, a transmission axis rod H753 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor H727, a pair of disk cams H754 (left disk cam H754L, right disk cam H754R) fixed non-rotatably to both ends of the transmission axis rod H753, an arm member H755 through which the connecting pin H754e of the disk cam H754 is inserted, and a disk cam H755 that is supported by the axis member H752 and is connected to the axis member H752. It mainly comprises a release member H756 that abuts against the first protrusion H754c1 and second protrusion H754c2 of the cam H754 in the rotational direction, a rotating claw member H757 that is supported coaxially with the release member H756 and moves relative to it as the release member H756 rotates, a first spring H758 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction that tilts the rotating claw member H757 downward, and a second spring H759 that is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force between the release member H756 and the rotating claw member H757 in a direction that moves them away from each other.

The main body member H751 is made of a metal material such as aluminum, and is bent upward from both the left and right ends to form a U-shape when viewed from the front. The main body member H751 mainly comprises a shaft support hole H751b drilled at opposing positions (coaxially) of the plate portions arranged opposite each other, and an insertion hole H751c drilled in the plate portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The drive motor H727 is disposed inside the main body member H751, which is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front.

The shaft support hole H751b is a hole into which one end of the shaft member H752 is press-fitted, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member H752. By press-fitting the shaft member H752 into the shaft support hole H751b, the shaft member H752 is arranged in a protruding state on both the left and right outer sides of the main body member H751, and the release member H756 and the rotating claw member H757 can be arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the main body member H751.

Next, the transmission shaft rod H753 will be described with reference to FIG. 1883. FIG. 1883(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft rod H753, and FIG. 1883(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the transmission shaft rod H753.

As shown in FIG. 1883, the transmission shaft rod H753 mainly comprises a pillar member H753a to which disc cams H754 (see FIG. 1882) are fixed at both ends, a transmission gear H753b that is journalled on the pillar member H753a and engages with the rotating gear of the drive motor H727, a movable clutch H753c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear H753b and the pillar member H753a by moving it in the axial direction, a coil spring H753d that presses the movable clutch H753c against the transmission gear H753b, and an insertion member H753e that is inserted into the shaft portion of the transmission gear H753b.

The pillar member H753a is made of a metallic material and is formed into a pillar shape with a hexagonal cross section. The pillar member H753a also has groove-shaped engagement grooves H753a1 at both ends for engaging the disk cam H754.

The transmission gear H753b mainly comprises a circular insertion hole H753b1 through which the pillar member H753a is inserted, and a clutch part H753b2 in which irregularities are formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position of the shaft center from a surface arranged opposite the movable clutch H753c.

The insertion member H753e is a member that determines the axial position of the transmission gear H753b relative to the pillar member H753a, and is formed in a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the insertion hole H753b1 of the transmission gear H753b. The insertion member H753e also has a hexagonal insertion hole H4753e1 through which the pillar member H753a is inserted, and is disposed in a state in which it cannot rotate (spin freely) relative to the pillar member H753a.

The transmission gear H753b is inserted into the pillar member H753a with the insertion member H753e inserted into the insertion hole H753b1, so that it can rotate (freely rotate) relative to the pillar member H753a (insertion member H753e) even when the pillar member H753a is fixed.

The movable clutch H753c mainly comprises a hexagonal insertion hole H753c1 through which the pillar member H753a is inserted, and a clutch part H753c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch part H753b2 and has projections and recesses along the axial direction at the circumferential position of the shaft center from the surface arranged opposite the transmission gear H753b. In this embodiment, the tops of both clutch parts H753b2 and H753c2 are configured with mountain-shaped projections and recesses with angles of approximately 100°.

By forming the insertion hole H753c1 in a hexagonal shape similar to the outer shape of the pillar member H753a, when the pillar member H753a is inserted into the insertion hole H753b1, the rotation (idling) of the transmission gear H753b relative to the pillar member H753a is restricted.

In addition, by engaging both clutch portions H753b2 and H753c2, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor H727 to the transmission gear H753b is transmitted to the column member H753a via the movable clutch H753c. This makes it possible to rotate the disc cam H754 (see FIG. 1882).

The movable clutch H753c is normally positioned close to the transmission gear H753b by the biasing force of the coil spring H753d, and the engagement relationship between the two clutch parts H753b2 and H753c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch H753c, it is configured to be movable away from the transmission gear H753b along the axial direction of the pillar member H753a.

The arm member H755 is made of a resin material and is formed into a plate shape that is long in one direction. The arm member H755 mainly comprises a guide hole H755a that is drilled in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at one end of the arm member H755 and through which the connecting pin H754e of the disk cam H754 is inserted, and a cylindrical connecting rod H755b that is disposed at the other end of the arm member H755 and that is inserted into the connecting part H714a of the tilting device H710.

The arm member H755 is supported by a connecting rod H755b rotatably on the connecting portion H714a of the tilting device H710. The longitudinal distance of the guide hole H755a is also formed to be greater than the diameter of the rotation path of the connecting pin H754e when the disc cam H754 is rotated. As a result, when the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position and the disc cam H754 rotates one or more revolutions, the connecting pin H754e of the disc cam H754 is displaced and the connecting pin H754e slides along the guide hole H755a and rotates around the shaft portion H711e.

Next, the disc cam H754 will be described with reference to Fig. 1884. Fig. 1884(a) is a side view of the right disc cam H754R as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCCLXXXIVa in Fig. 1882, Fig. 1884(b) is a side view of the right disc cam H754R as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCCLXXXIVb in Fig. 1882, Fig. 1884(c) is a side view of the left disc cam H754L as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCCLXXXIVc in Fig. 1882, and Fig. 1884(d) is a side view of the left disc cam H754L as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCCLXXXIVd in Fig. 1882.

In the following explanation, the opposing sides of the left disc cam H754L and the right disc cam H754R will be referred to as the "inner side in the opposing direction" and the opposite side will be referred to as the "outer side in the opposing direction."

As shown in FIG. 1884(a) and (b), the right disk cam H754R includes a disk portion H754a formed in a substantially disk shape, a central shaft portion H754b drilled in the axial center portion of the disk portion H754a, a first bulge portion H754c that bulges convexly toward the inside of the opposing direction by bending the axial center portion of the disk portion H754a toward the inside of the opposing direction, and a second bulge portion H754c that bulges convexly toward the inside of the opposing direction by bending the radial outer portion of the first bulge portion H754c toward the outside of the opposing direction. It mainly comprises a second bulge H754d that bulges outward in a convex shape, a connecting pin H754e that protrudes cylindrically from the second bulge H754d outward in the opposing direction and is connected to the arm member H755 (see FIG. 1883), an engagement portion H754f that protrudes outward in the opposing direction from the axial center side of the second bulge H754d, and a right detection portion H754gR that is formed by cutting out a portion of the outer circumferential surface of the disc portion H754a toward the axial center side.

The right disc cam H754R differs only in that the right detection portion H754gR is positioned at a 60° angle with the left detection portion H754gL of the left disc cam H754L, and is otherwise configured with a mirror image of the shape of the right disc cam H754R.

The central shaft portion H754b has an inner circumference formed into a hexagonal shape that corresponds to the pillar member H753a. This restricts the rotation (idling) of the right disc cam H754R relative to the pillar member H753a when the pillar member H753a is inserted into the central shaft portion H754b.

The first bulge H754c is formed by bulging out in an annular shape around the axis of the central shaft portion H754b, and includes a first protrusion H754c1 and a second protrusion H754c2 that protrude radially outward from a portion of the outer circumferential surface.

The first protrusion H754c1 and the second protrusion H754c2 are the parts that come into contact with the release member H756, which will be described later, and are formed in the same shape and at positions that protrude the same distance radially outward from the center of the central shaft portion H754b. The first protrusion H754c1 and the second protrusion H754c2 are each formed at positions that are offset by approximately 150° in the revolution direction around the axis of the disc portion H754a, and are configured to be able to come into contact with the release member H756 at different times when the disc cam H754 rotates.

In the first initial state of the driving means H750, the connecting pin H754e is positioned at a position with the greatest separation distance from the shaft portion H711e of the tilting device H710 in the tilted state. In other words, the connecting pin H754e is disposed on the opposite side of the central shaft portion H754b to the shaft portion H511e of the tilting device H710 in the tilted state.

The engagement portions H754f are formed as a pair on either side of the central shaft portion H754b of the disc portion H754a. The protruding tip of the engagement portion H754f is bent into a substantially L-shape, and the tip of the bent portion is inserted into the engagement groove H753a1 of the pillar member H753a. As a result, when the pillar member H753a is inserted into the central shaft portion H754b of the right disc cam H754R, axial displacement of the right disc cam H754R relative to the pillar member H753a is restricted.

Next, the release member H756 and the rotary claw member H757 will be described with reference to FIG. 1885. Note that the release member H756 and the rotary claw member H757 are arranged in a left-right pair and have the same configuration on the left and right, so only one will be described.

Figures 1885(a) and 1885(b) are side views of the release member H756 and the rotating claw member H757 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCCLXXXVa in Figure 1882. Note that Figure 1885(a) illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member H757 has rotated to the end position in the biasing direction of the second spring H759 relative to the release member H756, and Figure 1885(b) illustrates a small angle state in which the rotating claw member H757 has rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring H759 relative to the release member H756.

As shown in Figures 1885(a) and 1885(b), the release member H756 is mainly made of a resin material and includes a main body portion H756b (see Figure 1882) formed in a circular ring shape having a shaft support hole H756a that is supported by the shaft member H752, a protruding pin H756c that protrudes from the main body portion H756b toward the rotating claw member H757 in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole H756a, and an abutment portion H756d that is configured as a portion that protrudes with the maximum diameter from the main body portion H756b.

The release member H756 is rotatably held relative to the main body member H751 by the pivot hole H756a being pivotally supported by the shaft member H752, and when the disc cam H754 is not in contact with the abutment portion H756d, the biasing force of the second spring H759 rotates the shaft member H752 to the maximum position in the clockwise direction relative to the rotating claw member H757 in the state shown in FIG. 1885, thereby setting it to the large angle state.

The protruding pin H756c is a part that contacts the rotating claw member H757 to transmit the driving force to the rotating claw member H757, and is set to a length that allows it to contact the rotating claw member H757. In addition, one end of the second spring H759 is engaged with the protruding pin H756c, thereby transmitting the biasing force of the second spring H759 to the release member H756.

The abutment portion H756d is a portion that is configured to be abuttable by the first protrusion H754c1 and the second protrusion H754c2 of the disc cam H754 in the assembled state. The abutment portion H756d allows the release member H756 to rotate relative to the main body member H751 by the first protrusion H754c1 and the second protrusion H754c2 abutting against it.

The rotating claw member H757 has a main body H575b having an axle support hole H757a that is supported by the axle member H752, a guide elongated hole H757c that is drilled in the main body H757b with a size that allows the protruding pin H756c of the release member H756 to be guided along an arc shape centered on the central axis of the axle support hole H757a (drilled with a size that includes the movement trajectory of the protruding pin H756c on the inside), and a first spring H758 that protrudes from the main body H757b. It mainly comprises a first engagement portion H757d formed by curving the upper end of the first engagement portion H757d to be engageable with the shaft; a hook-shaped portion H757e protruding from the main body portion H757b along the circumferential direction about the shaft support hole H757a from a position protruding radially outward at the maximum diameter from the center axis of the shaft support hole H757a; and a second engagement portion H757f recessed into the main body portion H575b along the circumferential direction about the shaft support hole H757a with which the end of the second spring H759 engages.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 1885(a), the release member H756 is positioned at the end position in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 1885(a)) relative to the rotating claw member H757. Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the downward direction to the abutment portion H756d, the release member H756 and the rotating claw member H757 rotate together in the rearward rotation direction. On the other hand, in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the downward direction to the abutment portion H756d, only the release member H756 rotates, and the position of the rotating claw member H757 can be maintained until the small angle state shown in FIG. 1885(b) is reached.

Next, the operation of the operation unit H180 will be described. First, with reference to Figs. 1886 and 1887, the operation will be described when the player performs a push operation while the tilting device H710 is in the tilted position.

Figures 1886 and 1887 are cross-sectional views of the operation unit H180 taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Figure 1858. Note that Figure 1886 illustrates the state in which the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position, and Figure 1887 illustrates the state in which the player has pushed the tilting device H710 from the state shown in Figure 1886 to the end position. Also, in Figures 1886 and 1887, an example of the player's hand pressing the tilting device H710 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 1886, the tilting device H710 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 1886) from the torsion spring H717, and the engaged recess H712a of the side reflecting portion H712 is hooked onto the hook-shaped portion H757e of the rotating claw member H757. This maintains the tilting device H710 in its tilted position. In other words, when the tilting device H710 is in the tilted position, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 1886) is constantly acting on it.

In the state shown in FIG. 1886, the detection piece H715g of the tilting device H710 is inserted into the detection groove of the upper sensor H726a of the button detection sensor H726, and is positioned in front of the detection groove of the lower sensor H726b of the button detection sensor H726. This allows the pachinko machine H10 to recognize that the tilting device H710 is positioned in the tilted position and that the player is not pressing it.

As shown in FIG. 1887, when the player pushes in the tilting device H710, the tilting device H710 rotates about 3° in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 1886). In this state, the detection piece H715g of the tilting device H710 is inserted into the detection groove of the upper sensor H726a of the button detection sensor H726, and is also inserted into the detection groove of the lower sensor H726b of the button detection sensor H726.

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the upper sensor H726a and the lower sensor H726b of the button detection sensor H726, it is possible to determine that the tilt device H710 has been pushed in from the tilted position by the player.

Next, referring to Fig. 1886, Fig. 1888 and Fig. 1889, the operation when the tilting device H710 is displaced from the tilted position to the upright position at a first speed (the rotational speed of the disc cam H754) will be described. Fig. 1888 and Fig. 1889 are cross-sectional views of the operation unit H180 taken along line MDCCCLXXXVI in Fig. 1858. Fig. 1888 and Fig. 1889 show a state in which the disc cam H754 has rotated a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Fig. 1888) from the state shown in Fig. 1886, causing the rotating claw member H757 to change its posture.

As shown in Figures 1888 and 1889, when the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position and the disc cam H754 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Figure 1886) from the state shown in Figure 1886 in which the driving means H750 is in the first initial state, the first protrusion H754c1 of the disc cam H754 presses down the abutment portion H756d of the release member H756, causing the release member H756 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Figure 1886), and with that rotation, the rotating claw member H757 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the engaged recess H712a of the tilting device H710.

At this time, the connecting pin H754e of the disc cam H754 is positioned at one end position (the end position farther from the side connected to the tilting device H710) of the guide hole H755a of the arm member H755 connected to the tilting device H710. Therefore, the movement of the tilting device H710 in the upward direction (towards the upright position) is restricted by the arm member H755, so that the upward movement of the tilting device H710 is an operating mode that corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam H754.

Then, as shown in FIG. 1889, the connecting pin H754e of the disc cam H754 is rotated onto a straight line connecting the connecting portion H714a of the tilting device H710 (the position where the connecting rod H755b of the arm member H755 is connected) and the rotation axis of the disc cam H754, thereby displacing the tilting device H710 to the upright position.

Then, the contact between the first protrusion H754c1 of the disc cam H754 and the release member H756 is released, and the release member H756 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 1888) from the state shown in FIG. 1888, and with this rotation, the rotating claw member H757 is rotated in the forward rotation direction to a position (the same position as the position shown in FIG. 1886) where it can engage with the engaged recess H712a of the tilting device H710 in the tilted position.

Therefore, when the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed by the player from the upright position shown in FIG. 1889, the arm member H755 connected to the tilting device H710 is displaced in accordance with the connecting pin H754e of the disc cam H754 (by sliding the connecting pin H754e along the guide hole H755a), thereby displacing the tilting device H710 to the tilted position and maintaining the tilting device H710 in the tilted position.

In addition, when the disc cam H754 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 1889) from the upright position shown in FIG. 1889, the connecting pin H754e of the disc cam H754 rotates in the forward rotation direction, pulling the arm member H755 downward and displacing the tilting device H710 toward the tilted position. In other words, the tilting device H710 can be caused to perform a downward movement corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam H754.

Next, referring to Fig. 1890 and Fig. 1891, the operation when the tilting device H710 is displaced from the tilted position to the upright position at the second speed (the biasing force of the torsion spring H717 arranged on the shaft member H716 of the tilting device H710) will be described. Fig. 1890 and Fig. 1891 are cross-sectional views of the operation unit H180 taken along the line MDCCCLXXXVI in Fig. 1858. Fig. 1890 illustrates a state in which the disc cam H754 is rotated from the state shown in Fig. 1885, and the second protrusion H754c2 is abutted against the abutment portion H756d, and Fig. 1891 illustrates a state in which the disc cam H754 is rotated a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Fig. 1890) from the state shown in Fig. 1890, and the posture of the rotating claw member H757 is changed.

As shown in Figures 1890 and 1891, when the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position and the driving means H750 is in the second initial state as shown in Figure 1890, when the disc cam H754 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Figure 1890), the second protrusion H754c2 of the disc cam H754 presses down the abutment portion H756d of the release member H756, causing the release member H756 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Figure 1890), and with this rotation, the rotating claw member H757 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the engaged recess H712a of the tilting device H710.

At this time, the connecting pin H754e of the disc cam H754 is positioned at a position close to the other end position (the end position closer to the side connected to the tilting device H710) of the guide hole H755a of the arm member H755 connected to the tilting device H710 (i.e., positioned at a position spaced apart from one end position). Therefore, the upward movement of the tilting device H710 is not displaced in accordance with the first speed (the rotation speed of the disc cam H754) described above, but is displaced in accordance with the displacement speed due to the biasing force of the torsion spring H717 arranged in the tilting device H710.

In the 111th embodiment, the displacement speed of the tilting device H710 due to the biasing force of the torsion spring H717 is set faster than the first speed (i.e., the biasing force is set sufficiently strong). Therefore, in the 111th embodiment, the operating speed of the tilting device H710 in the upward direction can be changed between the first speed and the second speed, so that the number of presentation modes due to the displacement of the tilting device H710 can be increased. As a result, the presentation effect due to the displacement of the tilting device H710 can be improved.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, when the disc cam H754 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Figs. 1886 to 1891) and the first protrusion H754c1 and the second protrusion H754c2 of the disc cam H754 are abutted against the abutment portion H756d to rotate the release member H756 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Figs. 1886 to 1891), the rotating claw member H757 is not displaced as described above (see Fig. 1885 (b)). This allows the position of the disc cam H754 to be changed in a manner in which the rotating claw member H757 does not release the engagement with the engaged recess H712a of the tilting device. As a result, it becomes possible to continuously displace the tilting device H710 to the upright position at the first speed or the second speed, and the performance effect due to the displacement of the tilting device H710 can be improved.

Next, the rocking device H730 will be described with reference to Fig. 1892 to Fig. 1900. First, the overall configuration of the rocking device H730 will be described with reference to Fig. 1892 to Fig. 1895. Fig. 1892(a) is a top view of the rocking device H730, Fig. 1892(b) is a side view of the rocking device H730 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCCCXCIIb in Fig. 1892(a), Fig. 1893(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rocking device H730 taken along the line MDCCCXCIIIa in Fig. 1892(b), Fig. 1893(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rocking device H730 taken along the line MDCCCXCIIIb in Fig. 1892(a), Fig. 1894 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking device H730, and Fig. 1895 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rocking device H730.

As described above, the rocking device H730 is placed on the lower frame member H720 with the displacement member H790 tilted upward toward the front side with respect to the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1879). In the following description of the rocking device H730, the direction in which the base means H770, the drive means H780, and the displacement member H790 are arranged (the up-down direction in FIG. 1892(a)) is described as the front-rear direction.

As shown in Figures 1892 to 1895, the rocking device H730 mainly comprises a base means H770 disposed on the back plate H722 (see Figure 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a drive means H780 journaled on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base means H770, and a displacement member H790 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the drive means H780 via the base means H770.

The displacement member H790 is disposed so as to be displaceable relative to the base means H770 and the driving means H780, and the state in which it is extended parallel to the front side of the driving means H780 by the first coil spring H793 and the second coil spring H794 (the state shown in FIG. 1892(a)) will be described as the initial position of the displacement member H790 relative to the driving means H780.

The displacement member H790 is formed from a colorless, transparent resin material that is transparent to light, and is configured to transmit light emitted from the base means H770 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) to the front side. The displacement member H790 mainly comprises a transparent portion H791 that is curved in a hemispherical shape toward the front side, and an engagement portion H792 that protrudes toward the rear side from three edges on the rear side of the transparent portion H791.

The transparent portion H791 is a light diffusion portion for diffusing the light incident from the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and emitting it from the front side, and is provided with an uneven portion H791a formed in an uneven shape on the inner side (side on the rear side) formed in a semicircular shape, and is formed from a resin material that can transmit colorless and transparent light.

The uneven portion H791a of the transparent portion H791 may be formed on the outer side (front side) of the transparent portion H791, or on both inner and outer side surfaces of the transparent portion H791. The transparent portion H791 may be formed in a flat plate shape having a flat surface, and the uneven portion H791a may be formed on at least one side of the flat surface. Furthermore, the light may not be diffused by the uneven portion H791a having an uneven shape, but may be diffused by scratches formed inside the transparent portion H791 by laser light or the like.

The engagement portion H792 comprises a pair of upper engagement portions H792a formed at the same height position on the upper side, and a lower engagement portion H792b formed on the lower edge, and the pair of upper engagement portions H792a and lower engagement portions H792b are displaceably connected to the base means H770 or the driving means H780. This allows the displacement member H790 to be displaceable relative to the base means H770 and the driving means H780.

The pair of upper engagement parts H792a mainly comprises a bent part H792a1 that bends from the protruding tip part on the rear side, and a cylindrical part H792a2 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the bent part H792a1 toward the rear side.

The bent portion H792a1 is a portion that engages with the driving means H780, and is disposed inside the driving means H780 in the assembled state. When the displacement member H790 displaces a predetermined distance toward the front side (the direction of arrow F), it abuts against the driving means H780 and can regulate the displacement of the displacement member H790 toward the front side. This can prevent the displacement member H790 from falling off the driving means H780. In the 111th embodiment, the bent portions H792a1 of the pair of upper engagement portions H792a are bent outward in the left-right direction, which are opposite directions.

The cylindrical portion H792a2 is a portion that guides the first coil spring H793 disposed between the upper engagement portion H792a and the driving means H780, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the first coil spring H793 so that it can be inserted into the first coil spring H793. The upper engagement portion H792a is disposed on the driving means H780 in a state where it is biased toward the front side by the biasing force of the first coil spring H793 guided by the cylindrical portion H792a2.

The lower engagement portion H792b has a bent portion H792b1 that engages with the base means H770. In the assembled state, the bent portion H792b1 is inserted into the inside of a groove formed in the base means H770, and when the displacement member H790 is displaced a predetermined distance toward the front side (arrow F direction) or the rear side (arrow B direction), it abuts against the base means H770, making it possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member H790 toward the front side or rear side. This makes it possible to prevent the displacement member H790 from falling off the base means H770.

A second coil spring H794 is disposed between the lower engaging portion H792b and the base means H770, and the lower engaging portion H792b is disposed in a state in which it is biased toward the front side by the biasing force of the second coil spring H794.

The displacement member H790 is biased toward the front side by the first coil spring H793 and the second coil spring H794, and can be displaced to the initial position after being displaced relative to the base means H770 and the driving means H780. That is, when no load is applied to the displacement member H790 (for example, when no driving force is applied from the driving means H780), the displacement member H790 is disposed in the initial position relative to the driving means H780.

Next, the base means H770 will be described with reference to Fig. 1896. Fig. 1896(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the base means H770, and Fig. 1896(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the base means H770.

As shown in Figures 1896(a) and 1896(b), the base means H770 mainly comprises an upper base member H771 fastened to the back plate H722 (see Figure 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a lower base member H772 arranged below the upper base member H771 (arrow D direction side), a substrate member H773 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upper base member H771, and a first diffusion member H774 arranged on the front side of the upper base member H771 in a manner covering the front side of the substrate member H773.

The upper base member H771 is mainly composed of a front portion H771a to which the substrate member H773 is attached on the front side, a top portion H771b extending from the upper edge of the front portion H771a toward the rear side, a first engagement portion H771c protruding toward the rear side from both left and right ends of the lower edge of the front portion H771a, a second engagement portion H771d protruding downward from the lower edge of the front portion H771a, and an insertion hole H771e located on both the left and right sides of the front portion H771a and formed in a ring shape opening in the front-rear direction, and is made of a transparent resin material that can transmit light.

The front portion H771a is formed in a generally U-shape with the upper side open when viewed from the front, and wiring can be connected to the board member H773 arranged on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) via the open portion. In addition, the front portion H771a is formed so that the board member H773 can be arranged in a position that covers the open portion, and heat generated by the light emission of the board member H773 can be dissipated via the open portion. This makes it possible to prevent the board member H773 from being damaged by heat.

The front portion H771a also has a pair of through holes H771e formed on the left and right sides, and a cylindrical fastening portion H771a1 into which a screw that has passed through the first diffusion member H774 can be screwed in. This allows the first diffusion member H774 to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the front portion H771a.

The substrate member H773 has a recess H773a recessed in an arc shape to avoid the fastening portion H771a1 formed in a cylindrical shape on the front portion H771a, and is disposed on the front side of the front portion H771a with the fastening portion H771a1 inserted inside the recess H773a. This restricts the movement of the substrate member H773 in the up-down and left-right directions relative to the upper base member H771, and the first diffusion member H774 is disposed on the front side, restricting the movement of the substrate member H773 in the front-rear direction relative to the upper base member H771.

The upper surface portion H771b is a portion that supports the driving means H780 described below, and includes an upper shaft support portion H771b1 that is circularly penetrated in the vertical direction and through which the shafts H783c and H784b of the driving means H780 are inserted. This allows the driving means H780 to be held in a state in which it can be displaced relative to the base means H770.

The first engagement portion H771c is a portion that engages with the rear plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720, and is formed in a generally L-shape with a bent tip so as to engage with the lower frame member H720. When disposing the rocking device H730 on the lower frame member H720, by engaging the first engagement portion H771c with the lower frame member H720, it becomes easier to fasten the screw inserted through the insertion hole H771e to the lower frame member H720.

The base means H770 is fixed to the lower frame member H720 by fastening a screw inserted through the insertion hole H771e to the lower frame member H720. This prevents the base means H770 from being displaced relative to the lower frame member H720 when the drive means H780 is operated as described below.

The second engagement portion H771d is a portion that engages with the lower base member H772, and is formed in a generally L-shape with a bent tip so as to engage with the lower base member H772. When disposing the lower base member H772 on the upper base member H771, by engaging the second engagement portion H771d with the lower base member H772, it becomes easier to fasten the screw that has passed through the lower base member H772 to the upper base member H771.

The lower base member H772 is disposed below the upper base member H771 (in the direction of arrow D) and mainly comprises a bottom surface portion H772a with which the second engagement portion H771d engages, and a back surface portion H772b that extends upward from the edge of the back surface side (in the direction of arrow D) of the bottom surface portion H772a and covers part of the back surface side of the upper base member H771, and is formed from a resin material that does not transmit light.

The bottom surface portion H772a mainly comprises an engaged portion H772a1 that is recessed into a shape into which the second engaging portion H771d can be inserted and into which the tip of the second engaging portion H771d can be engaged, and an opening H772a2 that is opened in a rectangular shape and into which the bent portion H792b1 of the lower engaging portion H792b of the displacement member H790 can be inserted.

The opening H772a2 is a portion that allows the displacement member H790 to be displaced from its initial position relative to the driving means H780, while restricting the displacement from exceeding a predetermined value, and is formed to a size that provides a predetermined gap with respect to the bent portion H792b1.

The rear surface portion H772b mainly comprises a lower shaft support portion H772b1 that is circularly pierced in the vertical direction and through which the shaft portions H783c and H784b of the driving means H780 are inserted, and an insertion hole H772b2 that is drilled in the front-rear direction and through which a screw that screws into the upper base member H771 can be inserted from the rear surface side.

The lower shaft support H772b1 is formed coaxially with the upper shaft support H771b1 formed on the top surface H771b. As a result, the upper and lower shafts H783c and H784b of the drive means H780 are supported by the base means H770, and the drive means H780 can rotate around the center of the upper shaft support H771b1 and the lower shaft support H772b1.

The substrate member H773 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which multiple light emitting means H773b are arranged on the front side, and is capable of emitting light toward the first diffusion member H774 arranged on the front side. The light emitted to the first diffusion member H774 passes through the first diffusion member H774 and is emitted to the rear side of the displacement member H790, and is emitted from the front side of the operation unit H180 via the displacement member H790.

The first diffusion member H774 is formed to a size that covers the base member H773 when viewed from the front. This prevents an illegal member from being inserted into the operation unit H180 and prevents the illegal member from being inserted into the base member H773. In other words, the base member H773 is positioned in an area that cannot be operated by the player.

The first diffusion member H774 has an area where the light from the light emitting means H773b is irradiated partially toward the front side, and an uneven portion H774a is formed on the front side of the bulging portion. The light emitted from the light emitting means H773b is diffused in the left-right and up-down directions by being emitted to the front side through the uneven portion H774a. This makes it easier for the light from the light emitting means H773b to be irradiated to the displacement member H790 arranged on the front side of the first diffusion member H774.

The first diffusion member H774 also has an insertion hole H774b through which a screw that is screwed into the fastening portion H771a1 of the upper base member H771 can be inserted in the front-rear direction, and is fastened to the upper base member H771 by fastening the screw that is inserted through the insertion hole H774b from the front side to the upper base member H771.

Next, the driving means H780 will be described with reference to Fig. 1897. Fig. 1897(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the driving means H780, and Fig. 1897(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the driving means H780.

As shown in Figures 1897(a) and 1897(b), the driving means H780 mainly comprises a driving motor H781 arranged with the driving shaft H781a protruding toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B), a weight member H782 connected to the driving shaft H781a of the driving motor H781, an upper cover member H783 that covers the upper side of the driving motor H781 and the weight member H782, and a lower cover member H784 that covers the lower side of the driving motor H781 and the weight member H782.

The weight member H782 is a member that is rotated by the rotation of the drive shaft H781a of the drive motor H781, and has an insertion hole H782a into which the drive shaft H781a is inserted. The weight member H782 is formed in a semicircular shape, and the insertion hole H782a is formed at the center position of the circular portion. In other words, the weight member H782 is positioned in a position that is biased to one side relative to the axis of the drive shaft H781a.

Therefore, when the weight member H782 is rotated around the axis of the drive shaft H781a, the center of gravity of the weight member H782 is rotationally displaced around the axis of the drive shaft H781a as the weight member H782 rotates, and the direction in which the centrifugal force of the weight member H782 acts can be changed as the weight member H782 rotates. This change in the direction in which the centrifugal force acts can displace the drive means H780 relative to the base means H770. A detailed explanation of the displacement of the drive means H780 relative to the base means H770 will be given later.

The upper cover member H783 is mainly composed of a cover portion H783a formed in a box shape with an open lower side (arrow D direction side) to cover the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the drive motor H781 and the weight member H782, a protruding portion H783b that protrudes upward from both the left and right sides of the cover portion H783a and has a storage recess H783b1 formed at the upper end portion thereof that is recessed toward the rear side, and an upper shaft portion H783c that protrudes upward from the top surface of the cover portion H783a in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the upper shaft support portion H771b1 of the base means H770, and is formed from a resin material that does not transmit light.

The accommodation recess H783b1 is the portion into which the upper engagement portion H792a of the displacement member H790 (see FIG. 1895) described above is inserted, and protrusions H783b2 that can engage with the bent portion H792a1 of the upper engagement portion H792a protrude inward from the left and right outer side surfaces.

In addition, a portion of the storage recess H783b1 is cut out toward the back side in the portion vertically adjacent to the protrusion H783b2. This allows the protrusion H783b2 to be deformed outwardly to the left and right, and when inserting the upper engagement portion H792a inside the storage recess H783b1, the protrusion H783b2 can be deformed outwardly to the left and right to form an opening large enough to insert the upper engagement portion H792a.

On the other hand, after the upper engagement portion H792a is inserted inside the storage recess H783b1, the convex portion H783b2 can be returned to its original position so that the convex portion H783b2 overlaps with the bent portion H792a1 of the upper engagement portion H792a in the front-rear direction. As a result, the displacement member H790 can be prevented from coming out of the upper cover member H783 (driving means H780).

The opening width in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at the inner part of the storage recess H783b1 is formed to be slightly larger than the left-right thickness of the upper engagement portion H792a excluding the bent portion H792a1. This allows the displacement member H790 to be displaced left-right relative to the drive means H780 when a predetermined driving force acts on the displacement member H790. The displacement of the displacement member H790 relative to the drive means H780 will be described in detail later.

The lower cover member H784 is mainly composed of a cover portion H784a formed in a box shape with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) to cover the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the drive motor H781 and the weight member H782, a lower shaft portion H784b that protrudes cylindrically downward from the underside of the cover portion H784a and is inserted into the lower shaft support portion H772b1 of the base means H770, and an abutment portion H784c that protrudes downward from the edge of the rear side of the lower cover member H784 and has an elastic body H785 disposed on the front side, and is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material.

The abutment portion H784c is a portion that the lower end of the front side transparent portion H711 of the tilting device H710 abuts against via the elastic body H785 when the player presses the button portion H181 and displaces the tilting device H710 to a position where it is pushed downward. As a result, when the player presses the button portion H181, the operating force of the player is applied to the driving means H780. Therefore, the rocking device H730 disposed inside the tilting device H710 can be displaced in response to the operation of the button portion H181. As a result, the interest of the player in operating the button portion H181 can be improved. A detailed explanation of the displacement of the rocking device H730 in response to the pressing operation of the button portion H181 will be given later.

Next, referring to Fig. 1898 to Fig. 1900, the case where the driving means H780 and the displacement member H790 are displaced relative to the base means H770 will be described. First, referring to Fig. 1898 and Fig. 1899, the displacement of the driving means H780 relative to the base means H770 will be described. Fig. 1898(a) is a top view of the base means H770 and the driving means H780, Fig. 1898(b) is a cross-sectional view of the driving means H780 taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in Fig. 1898(a), Fig. 1899(a) is a top view of the base means H770 and the driving means H780, Fig. 1899(b) is a cross-sectional view of the driving means H780 taken along line MDCCCXCIXb in Fig. 1899(a).

1898(a) and 1898(b) show a state where the driving means H780 is rotated clockwise (front side to the left) around the shafts H783c and H784b relative to the base means H770 (hereinafter referred to as the "left-facing state"), and 1899(a) and 1899(b) show a state where the driving means H780 is rotated counterclockwise (front side to the right) around the shafts H783c and H784b relative to the base means H770 (hereinafter referred to as the "right-facing state"). In the following description, the state where the driving means H780 is positioned in an intermediate position between the left-facing state and the right-facing state (the state shown in FIG. 1892) is referred to as the "intermediate position state". In addition, in Figures 1898(b) and 1899(b), the direction of the centrifugal force acting due to the displacement of the weight member H782 is indicated by the arrow H782b.

In addition, the drive motor H781 (other device H228 (see FIG. 1842)) that drives the weight member H782 is connected to the input/output port H225 of the voice lamp control device H113, and is driven based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110.

As shown in FIG. 1898, when the drive motor H781 of the drive means H780 is rotated and the weight member H782 is positioned to the right of the drive shaft H781a, the centrifugal force of the weight member H782 acts in the right direction (see arrow H782b in FIG. 1898(b)). As a result, the back side of the drive means H780 is pulled to the right, and the drive means H780 is rotated counterclockwise (the front side moves to the right) around the shafts H783c and H784b relative to the base means H770.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1899, when the drive motor H781 of the drive means H780 is rotated and the weight member H782 is positioned to the left of the drive shaft H781a, the centrifugal force of the weight member H782 acts in the left direction (see arrow H782b in FIG. 1899(b)). As a result, the back side of the drive means H780 is pulled leftward, and the drive means H780 is rotated clockwise (the front side is leftward) around the shafts H783c and H784b relative to the base means H770.

In this case, as described above, the displacement member H790 is disposed on the driving means H780, so that when the driving means H780 is displaced relative to the base means H770, the displacement member H790 can be displaced relative to the base means H770. Therefore, the attitude of the displacement member H790 relative to the first diffusion member H774 and the substrate member H773 of the base means H770 can be changed, so that the form of light emitted to the player side through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 can be changed. As a result, the presentation effect due to the change in the form of light can be improved.

In other words, some devices obtain a dramatic effect by disposing a transmission means in front of the light-emitting means, making the light emitted from the light-emitting means enter the transmission means, and allowing the player to see the light that passes through the transmission means. In this case, some devices change the manner in which the light is emitted by the light-emitting means (for example, the light emission intensity or the blinking interval, etc.) to change the manner in which the light is seen, but the dramatic effect is insufficient. In other devices, the light-emitting means and the transmission means are integrated (unitized) and the unit composed of the light-emitting means and the transmission means is displaced, allowing the movement of light associated with the displacement of the unit to be seen, but because the relationship between the light-emitting means and the transmission means is constant, the manner in which the light is seen through the transmission means (the manner in which the light is incident from the light-emitting means to the transmission means and passes through the transmission means) is uniform, and the dramatic effect is insufficient.

In contrast, in the operation unit H180 in the 111th embodiment, the displacement member H790, which is disposed on the front side of the substrate member H773 having the light-emitting means H773b and has an uneven portion H791a capable of diffusing light, can be displaced relative to the light-emitting means H773b in a direction intersecting the light emission direction of the light-emitting means H773b, so that the incident position of light relative to the displacement member H790 can be changed. This allows the light presentation visible through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 to be changed by displacing the displacement member H790. As a result, the light presentation by the light-emitting means H773b can be improved.

In other words, the displacement member H790, which is light-transmitting, is disposed so as to be displaceable relative to the light-emitting means H773b, so that it is possible to change the incidence mode (incident angle) of light from the light-emitting means H773b to the displacement member H790 and the mode of light passing through the displacement member H790 (the mode of light perceived by the player). As a result, the mode of light perceived through the displacement member H790 can be changed, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in the operation unit H180 in the 111th embodiment, the substrate member H773 having the light emitting means H773b is fixed to the lower frame member H720, and the displacement member H790 is displaceable relative to the substrate member H773 and the lower frame member H720. In addition to changing the state of the light visible through the displacement member H790, it is also possible to displace the displacement member H790 to visually recognize the displacement of the displacement member H790, regardless of the light emitting state (light emitting, non-light emitting) of the light emitting means H773b.

In addition, since the substrate member H773 having the light emitting means H773b is fixed to the lower frame member H720 and the displacement member H790 is displaceable relative to the substrate member H773 and the lower frame member H720, it is possible to prevent the substrate member H773 from vibrating when changing the state of the light visible through the displacement member H790. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773).

Furthermore, as described above, the displacement member H790 has an uneven portion H791a, which allows the light incident on the displacement member H790 to be diffused, so that the change in the state of the light due to the displacement of the displacement member H790 relative to the light-emitting means H773b (substrate member H773) can be made greater than when the uneven portion H791a is not formed. As a result, the state of the light visually perceived through the displacement member H790 can be changed, improving the presentation effect.

In the 111th embodiment, the displacement member H790 has been described as having an uneven portion H791a, but as long as the angle of incidence of the light emitted from the light emitting means H773b can be changed before and after displacement, the displacement member H790 may be formed on a flat surface without having an uneven portion H791a.

In addition, in the operation unit H180 in the 111th embodiment, the driving means H780 is configured to be displaceable around the shafts H783c and H784b relative to the base means H770, so the displacement member H790, which displaces with the driving means H780, is also rotationally displaced. Therefore, when the displacement member H790 is displaced left and right (arrow L-R direction) relative to the base member H773, the displacement member H790 is also displaced forward and backward (arrow F-B direction). This makes it possible to change the distance until the light emitted from the light emitting means H773b enters the displacement member H790, so that it is easy to change the form of the light emitted to the player side through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 as the displacement of the displacement member H790 occurs. As a result, the light presentation by the light emitting means can be improved.

In the oscillating device H730 in the 111th embodiment, the weight member H782 is rotated by the drive motor H781, thereby changing the direction in which the centrifugal force of the weight member H782 acts, and the position of the drive means H780 can be changed between a left-facing state and a right-facing state relative to the base means H770, and the displacement member H790 disposed on the drive means H780 can be displaced relative to the base means H770. Therefore, by continuing to drive the drive motor H781, the position of the drive means H780 can be repeatedly displaced between a left-facing state and a right-facing state relative to the base means H770.

That is, the displacement member H790, which is connected to the oscillating device H730 (displaced together with the oscillating device H730), is provided with a drive motor H781 and is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor H781. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor H781 can be used to displace the displacement member H790 relative to the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773), so that the displacement member H790 can be displaced relative to the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773) at any timing (timing at which the drive motor H781 is driven).

In addition, since the drive motor H781 is disposed on the rocking device H730, the number of intervening parts required to transmit the drive force to the displacement member H790 can be reduced compared to when the drive motor H781 is disposed on the base member H773 fixed to the lower frame member H720. Therefore, the drive force of the drive motor H781 can be easily used by the rocking device H730 (displacement member H790).

As described above, the rocking device H730 in the 111th embodiment is arranged on the lower frame member H720 with the displacement member H790 tilted upward toward the front side with respect to the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1879). Therefore, when the drive means H780 is displaced to a position where it is in an intermediate position with respect to the base means H770, the weight member H782 is arranged on the lower side with respect to the drive shaft H781a, so that the drive means H780 can be rotated to a position where it is in an intermediate position with respect to the base means H770 by the gravity of the weight member H782. In other words, the stop position of the weight member H782 of the drive means H780 can be changed (the weight member H782 is stopped at a predetermined position) to change the stop position of the drive means H780 with respect to the base means H770.

Furthermore, in the operation unit H180 of the 111th embodiment, when the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed, the lower end of the front side transparent portion H711 of the tilting device H710 abuts against the driving means H780 via the elastic body H785, and this abutment displaces the driving means H780 to a position in an intermediate arrangement state relative to the base means H770.

In addition, when the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed, the displacement member H790 is displaced together with the drive means H780 to a predetermined position (a position where the drive means H780 is in an intermediate position). Therefore, the presentation of the light visible through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 can be changed in conjunction with the player's pressing of the button portion H181.

In other words, in the operation unit H180 in the 111th embodiment, when the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed, the driving means H780 and the displacement member H790 can be displaced, and the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 can be displaced in a direction (toward the front side of the first diffusion member H774) in which at least a part of the displacement member H790 approaches the first diffusion member H774 (substrate member H773). Therefore, since the transparent portion H791 approaches the first diffusion member H774 (substrate member H773), it is possible to easily diffuse the light emitted from the substrate member H773 through the transparent portion H791. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize that the button portion H181 has been operated by the light, which can increase the player's interest.

In addition, when the player presses the button portion H181, at least a part of the displacement member H790 may be configured to be displaced in a direction away from the first diffusion member H774 (substrate member H773) (in a direction of retreating from the front side of the first diffusion member H774). In this way, the transparent portion H791 can be retreated from the front side of the first diffusion member H774, so that the diffusion of light from the substrate member H773 by the transparent portion H791 can be suppressed compared to the case where the transparent portion H791 is displaced to the front side of the first diffusion member H774 described above. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the light emitted from the substrate member H773 to be irradiated onto the player's hand (button portion H181), and by shining the light on the player's hand, the interest in pressing the button portion H181 can be increased.

In addition, a tilting device H710 is provided which is displaceable so that it can come into contact with the driving means H780 (displacement member H790), and the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the tilting device H710 which is in contact with the driving means H780 (displacement member H790), so that the displacement of the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) relative to the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773) can be linked to the displacement of the tilting device H710. This can enhance the presentation effect achieved by the displacement of the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) relative to the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773).

The tilting device H710 is equipped with an operation unit H180 that is operated by the player, and by operating the operation unit H180, the drive means H780 (displacement member H790) can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the tilting device H710, so that the drive means H780 (displacement member H790) can be displaced at a desired timing. This allows the appearance of the light visible through the displacement member H790 to be associated with the player's operation of the button section H181, enhancing the presentation effect.

For example, the light presentation visible through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 can be changed in conjunction with the player's pressing of the button portion H181, so that the change in the light presentation can make the player recognize that the button portion H181 has been pressed to a specified position. This can prevent the player from repeatedly pressing the button portion H181 or continuing to press the button portion H181 longer than necessary. As a result, damage to the button portion H181 due to a player's incorrectly perceived operation can be prevented.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) can be displaced by the driving force of the driving motor H781. In addition to the mode in which the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) is displaced by the driving force of the driving motor H781, a mode in which the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) is displaced (linked) by contact with the tilting device H710 can be created. This increases the variety of modes of displacement of the driving means H780 (displacement member H790).

When the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed and the tilting device H710 comes into contact with the driving means H780 (in a contact state), the displacement of the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) is restricted. In other words, by bringing the tilting device H710 into contact with the driving means H780 (displacement member H790), the displacement of the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) can be restricted, so that the displacement of the driving means H780 (displacement member H790) can be stopped at the desired timing.

In addition, the button section H181 of the tilting device H710 is operated by the player, and the operation of the button section H181 can be used to configure the displacement of the drive means H780 (displacement member H790) in conjunction with the displacement of the tilting device H710. This allows the displacement of the drive means H780 (displacement member H790) to be regulated at the timing desired by the player. This allows the change in the state of the light visible through the drive means H780 (displacement member H790) to be associated with the operation of the button section H181, enhancing the presentation effect.

In the operation unit H180 in the 111th embodiment, when the player is to face left or right, the player can press the button H181 to displace the drive means H780 to a position for the intermediate position, or the drive means H780 can be displaced to a position for the intermediate position before the player operates the button H181, so that the drive means H780 is not displaced when the button H181 is pressed.

In addition, if the player continues to press the button portion H181, the state in which the displacement of the displacement member H790 is restricted can be maintained, so that a presentation mode can be created in which the presentation mode of the light visible through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 does not change. As a result, the presentation modes of the light by the displacement member H790 can be increased (modes in which the presentation mode does not change in addition to modes in which the presentation mode changes), thereby increasing the interest of the player.

Furthermore, when the player continues to press the button portion H181, the drive motor H781 of the drive means H780 is driven, so that the centrifugal force acting on the drive means H780 due to the rotation of the weight member H782 can be applied to the tilting device H710 that abuts against the drive means H780. This makes it possible to change the feel of pressing the button portion H181, thereby increasing the interest of the player who operates the button portion H181.

In the 111th embodiment, the displacement member H790 has been described as swinging left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-R), but the displacement member H790 may be configured to swing up and down, forward and backward, or vertically.

In the 111th embodiment, the case where the displacement member H790 is displaced by operating the button portion H181 of the operation unit H180 has been described, but the displacement member H790 may be displaced by operating each of the buttons H191 to H195 of the function adjustment operation portion H190, rather than being linked to the operation of the operation unit H180. In this case, the state of the light can be changed by displacing the displacement member H790 in accordance with the operation of each of the buttons H191 to H195, making it easier for the player to recognize that each of the buttons H191 to H195 has been operated. In particular, when linked to the decision button H191, the displacement of the displacement member H790 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the state of the light has been changed to the adjusted setting due to the change in state of the light.

Next, referring to FIG. 1900, the displacement of the displacement member H790 relative to the driving means H780 will be described. FIG. 1900(a) and FIG. 1900(b) are cross-sectional views of the oscillating device H730, and correspond to the cross section at the line MDCCCXCIII in FIG. 1892(b). FIG. 1900(a) illustrates the state in which the driving means H780 is displaced to the left-facing state, and FIG. 1900(b) illustrates the state in which the driving means H780 is displaced to the right-facing state. Note that the state in which the driving means H780 is displaced to the left-facing state and the state in which the driving means H780 is displaced to the right-facing state are simply opposite in the displacement direction, so in the following description, only the case in which the driving means H780 is displaced to the left-facing state will be described, and the case in which the driving means H780 is displaced to the right-facing state will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1900(a), when the driving means H780 is displaced to face left, the inertial force generated when the driving means H780 rotates clockwise (leftward from the front side) around the shafts H783c and H784b relative to the base means H770 is transmitted to the displacement member H790, and a force displacing the driving means H780 to the left (arrow L direction) acts on the displacement member H790.

In this case, the upper engagement portion H792a on the right side in front view (arrow R direction side) abuts against the inner wall of the storage recess H783b1, causing the upper engagement portion H792a on the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) to rotate around the abutting portion as an axis and be pushed toward the rear side of the storage recess H783b1. That is, the left side in front view of the displacement member H790 is pushed toward the rear side relative to the drive means H780, and the transparent portion H791 is tilted toward the rear side as it moves toward the left side.

Therefore, in the 111th embodiment, not only can the displacement member H790 be displaced around the axis of the shaft portions H783c and H784b in conjunction with the displacement of the driving means H780 relative to the base means H770, but the displacement member H790 can also be displaced relative to the driving means H780.

Here, in a structure in which a link structure or the like is connected to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and the driving force of the drive means is transmitted to the displacement member via the link structure to displace the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member coincides (is linked) with the drive of the drive means, making it difficult to complicate the displacement mode of the displacement means, and there is a possibility that the dramatic effect due to the displacement of the displacement means will be reduced. In addition, the drive force of the drive means can be changed to complicate the displacement mode of the displacement means, but in this case there is the problem that the control of the drive means becomes complicated.

In contrast, the rocking device H730 in the 111th embodiment includes a drive means H780 that displaces relative to the base means H770, and a displacement member H790 that is disposed so as to be displaceable relative to the drive means H780, and is configured so that the displacement member H790 can be displaced relative to the drive means H780 by the inertial force generated when the drive means H780 is displaced relative to the base means H770. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor H781 of the drive means H780 is constant, the displacement speed of the displacement member H790 can be made to vary. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member H790 can be made complex without complicating the control of the drive motor H781, thereby improving the presentation effect due to the displacement of the displacement member H790.

In addition, the device is equipped with a driving means H780 that is displaceably arranged on the base means H770, and a displacement member H790 that is displaceably arranged on the driving means H780, and light can be emitted through the displacement member H790 that is displaced relative to the driving means H780. This makes it possible to prevent the displacement pattern of the displacement member H790 from becoming uniform, and also makes it possible to increase the change in the pattern of light emitted from the second means (the pattern of light visually recognized by the player).

The displacement member H790 displaced relative to the driving means H780 is configured to be displaced to a predetermined position with respect to the driving means H780 by a first coil spring H793 disposed between the housing recess H783b1 of the driving means H780 and the displacement member H790. This allows the driving means H780 to be oriented leftward with respect to the base means H770, tilting the left side of the displacement member H790 toward the rear side, and then the first coil spring H793 can return the tilt to its original position.

In other words, the displacement member H790 is configured to be displaceable relative to the drive means H780 when a predetermined inertial force or more is applied when the drive means H780 is displaced relative to the base means H770, and is configured to be regulated to a predetermined position relative to the drive means H780 by the first coil spring H793 when no inertial force is applied from the drive means H780 (when the drive means H780 is stopped).

As a result, when the inertial force when the driving means H780 is displaced is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the driving means H780 and the displacement member H790 can be displaced together, whereas when the inertial force acting from the driving means H780 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the displacement member H790 can be displaced relative to the driving means H780. Therefore, the displacement member H790 can be displaced in various manners.

The first coil spring H793, which biases the displacement member H790 to a predetermined position relative to the driving means H780, is made of a spring member whose biasing force increases with elastic deformation. Therefore, depending on the strength of the external force generated when the driving means H780 is rotated relative to the base means H770 (the strength of the inertial force acting on the displacement member H790 when the driving means H780 rotates relative to the base means H770), the displacement member H790 can be switched between a state in which it is displaced relative to the driving means H780 and a state in which it is not displaced (i.e., by changing the rotation speed of the weight member H782 to change the rotation speed of the driving means H780 relative to the base means H770, the amount of displacement of the displacement member H790 relative to the driving means H780 can be changed). This allows the displacement member H790 to be displaced in a variety of ways. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

The return means for returning the position of the displacement member H790 relative to the driving means H780 may be not only the biasing force of the first coil spring H793, but also the elastic force of rubber, the magnetic force of a magnet, or gravity. However, when the position of the displacement member H790 is determined relative to the driving means H780 by magnetic force, it is difficult to determine the direction in which the displacement member H790 is displaced to a specified position relative to the driving means H780 because the magnetic field lines are not straight, and when the position of the displacement member H790 is determined relative to the driving means H780 by gravity, it is difficult to regulate the position of the displacement member H790 relative to the driving means H780 because the force acts in the direction of gravity. Therefore, it is preferable to determine the position of the displacement member H790 relative to the driving means H780 by an elastically deformable spring or rubber, as in the 111th embodiment.

As described above, the rocking device H730 can change the light presentation seen through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 by displacing with respect to the substrate member H773, thereby improving the light presentation effect of the light emitting means H773b. In this case, in the rocking device H730 in the 111th embodiment, not only can the displacement member H790 be displaced around the axis of the shaft portions H783c and H784b in conjunction with the displacement of the driving means H780 with respect to the base means H770, but the displacement member H790 can also be displaced relative to the driving means H780, so that the displacement mode of the displacement member H790 with respect to the substrate member H773 can be easily changed compared to when the displacement member H790 is simply rotated and displaced. Therefore, the light presentation seen through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 can be easily changed. As a result, the light presentation effect of the light emitting means H773b can be improved.

In other words, the direction in which the displacement member H790 can be displaced relative to the drive means H780 is set to a forward/backward direction (forward/backward direction with respect to the drive means H780) that is different from the direction in which the displacement member H790 is rotationally displaced with the displacement of the drive means H780. This allows the displacement member H790 to be displaced in multiple directions, making it easier to change the light presentation mode by the displacement member H790. As a result, the light presentation effect by the light emitting means H773b can be improved.

In addition, in the oscillating device H730 in the 111th embodiment, the displacement member H790 is displaced relative to the drive means H780 by the inertial force generated when the drive means H780 is rotated and displaced, so the displacement mode of the displacement member H790 can be made complex without providing a separate drive means for displacing the displacement member H790. As a result, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Next, the ball launching unit H112a will be described with reference to Figs. 1901 to 1909. First, the inner frame H12 in which the ball launching unit H112a is arranged will be described with reference to Figs. 1901 and 1902. Fig. 1901 is a front view of the inner frame H12, and Fig. 1902 is an exploded front oblique view of the inner frame H12. Note that in Fig. 1901, the rear side opening H172 for sending the game ball from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the ball launching unit H112a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in Figures 1901 and 1902, the frame forming unit H12a which forms the outer shape of the inner frame H12 mainly comprises an upper base unit H12b made of a metal material and shaped like a U which surrounds the upper side (arrow U direction) and the left and right outer sides (arrow L-R direction), a lower base unit H12c which is disposed in the open area below (arrow D direction) the upper base unit H12b which is shaped like a U and forms a frame together with the upper base unit H12b, a ball launching unit H112a which is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the lower base unit H12c, and a hook unit H12d which is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction) of the lower base unit H12c.

The ball launching unit H112a is disposed on the front side of the lower base unit H12c with the drive motor H850 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the ball launching unit H112a housed in a storage recess H12c1 recessed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the lower base unit H12c, and the launch rail H112a1 disposed on the front side is positioned to coincide in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) with the play area of the game board H13 (see Figure 1838) disposed on the frame forming unit H12a (see Figure 1839), so that game balls launched from the launch rail H112a1 can be launched into the play area of the game board H13.

In addition, the launch position ball throwing unit H170, which is disposed on the rear side (arrow B side) of the outer frame H11, is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the ball launching unit H112a, and game balls can be thrown one by one from the upper tray H17 to the ball launching unit H112a via the launch position ball throwing unit H170.

Next, the launch position ball throwing unit H170 and the ball launching unit H112a will be described with reference to Fig. 1903 to Fig. 1905. Fig. 1903 is an exploded front perspective view of the ball launching unit H112a, Fig. 1904 is an exploded perspective view of the launching position ball throwing unit H170, Fig. 1905(a) is a cross-sectional view of the ball launching unit H112a and the launch position ball throwing unit H170 taken along line MCMVa in Fig. 1901, and Fig. 1905(b) is a cross-sectional view of the ball launching unit H112a and the launch position ball throwing unit H170 taken along line MCMVb in Fig. 1901. In Fig. 1904, the front side case H860 and the ball throwing means H880 are shown in a front perspective view, and the rear side case H870 is shown in a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIG. 1903, the ball launching unit H112a mainly comprises a base member H810 formed from a resin material, a launching means H830 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and capable of rotating to launch (shoot) game balls into the game area, a guide means H820 arranged on the front side of the base member H810 to guide the game balls launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and arranged so that the base end of the rotation of the launching means H830 can come into contact with the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 to generate a driving force to rotate the launching means H830.

When the touch sensor H51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit H112a and the resistance of a variable resistor for detecting the change in electrical resistance of the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operating handle H51 are detected, a control signal for driving the driving motor H850 is transmitted to the driving motor H850 via the input/output port H205 to which they are connected. This drives the driving motor H850 with a predetermined driving force (driving force corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operating handle H51).

The base member H810 is formed in a plate shape of a size corresponding to the storage recess H12c1 of the lower base unit H12c, and is disposed on the lower base unit H12c in a state of covering the storage recess H12c1. The base member H810 mainly includes a first bulge H811 that bulges toward the front side (arrow F direction) and serves as a base for arranging the guide means H820 and the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840, a second bulge H812 that bulges toward the front side and serves as a base for arranging the second elastic member H842 of the abutment means H840, and a through hole H813 that is drilled in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and through which the shaft H852 of the drive motor H850 is inserted.

The firing means H830 mainly comprises a rotating body H112a2 formed from a metal material in the shape of a rectangular plate and having an insertion section H112a3 at one end into which the shaft section H852 of the drive motor H850 is inserted, a firing section H831 formed from an elastic material and arranged to surround the other end of the rotating body H112a2, and a fastening member H832 for fastening and fixing the rotating body H112a2 and the shaft section H852 of the drive motor H850.

The rotating body H112a2 is configured such that the shaft portion H852 of the drive motor H850, which is inserted through the through hole H813 of the base member H810 to the front side (the direction of the arrow F), is inserted into the insertion portion H112a3 and fastened to the shaft portion H852 by the fastening member H832, and the driving force of the drive motor H850 causes the shaft portion H852 to rotate around the axis. This allows the firing means H830 to rotate between the retracted position (see FIG. 1906(a)) and the firing position (see FIG. 1906(c)).

The launching section H831 is a section that comes into contact with the game ball that is sent onto the launching rail H112a1 of the ball launching unit H112a, which will be described later, when the rotating body H112a2 rotated by the drive motor H850 is rotated, and is provided with an abutment surface H831a that comes into contact with the ball on the launching rail H112a1 on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, and is made of an elastic material that can be elastically deformed.

The contact surface H831a is configured to be able to contact a game ball on the launch rail H112a1 when the launching means H830 is in an initial position (see FIG. 1906(b)) where the launching means H830 is slightly retracted from the launching position toward the retracted position, and the game ball that contacts the contact surface H831a can be launched by rotating the launching means H830 beyond the initial position to the launching position.

The launching part H831 is formed from an elastically deformable resin material, and can be deformed when a game ball comes into contact with the contact surface H831a. This prevents the impact of the game ball coming into contact with the launching means H830 from being transmitted to the launching means H830, and reduces the sound of the game ball coming into contact with the launching part H831.

The guide means H820 mainly comprises a first guide member H821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H821 and the first bulge H811.

The first guide member H821 mainly comprises a back portion H821a formed along the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member H810, a rolling portion H821b standing from the back portion H821a toward the front side and serving as the rolling surface for the game ball, an arrangement portion H821c formed in connection with the rolling portion H821b and where the second guide member H822 is arranged on the front side, and an upper guide portion H821d standing from above the arrangement portion H821c (arrow U direction) toward the front side of the back portion H821a and guiding the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the second guide member H822 (launch rail H112a1).

The rear portion H821a is the portion that becomes the throwing surface on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and is provided with a recess H821a1 recessed on the rear side along the rolling direction of the ball on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

The recess H821a1 is a guide portion for stabilizing the throw of the game ball by receiving the game ball inside the recess H821a1 when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves wildly in the forward and backward directions), and is formed to a size that can receive part of the game ball. The recess H821a1 is recessed into a curved shape with a radius larger than the radius of the game ball. A detailed explanation of the guidance of the game ball by the recess H821a1 will be given later.

The second guide member H822 guides the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to a position where it abuts against the launching means H830 in the initial position, and has a launch rail H112a1 on its upper surface along which the game ball launched by the launching means H830 rolls.

The launch rail H112a1 is formed with a triangular cross-sectional recess toward the lower side (arrow D direction) at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and the game ball can be guided along the recess. The lower apex H112a4, which is recessed in a triangular cross-sectional shape, is set at approximately the same height as the rolling part H821b when viewed in the direction of launching the game ball (see FIG. 1905(a)), or at a position slightly higher than the rolling part H821b. As a result, when viewed in the direction of launching the ball, the game ball guided along the launch rail H112a1 is guided higher than the game ball guided along the rolling part H821b, and the game ball guided from the launch rail H112a1 to the rolling part H821b can be prevented from getting stuck (contacting the end of the rolling part H821b). As a result, the delivery of the game ball from the launch rail H112a1 to the rolling part H821b can be stabilized.

The upper guide portion H821d is a portion for preventing the game ball thrown from the launch position ball throwing unit H170 from bouncing upwards (in the direction of the arrow U). It is formed in a position adjacent to the rear side opening H172 of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) when viewed from the front, and is formed in a position at least one ball's width away from the second guide member H822 in the up-down direction (see FIG. 1901).

The abutment means H840 includes a first elastic member H841 and a second elastic member H842 formed from an elastic member, the first elastic member H841 being disposed at a position where it can abut against the rotating body H112a2 of the launching means H830 in the initial position, and the second elastic member H872 being disposed at a position where it can abut against the rotating body H112a2 of the launching means H830 in the retracted position. This makes it easier to stop the launching means H830 at the launch position and the retracted position when rotating the launching means H830, and makes it possible to absorb the impact when the launching means H830 is stopped. In addition, after the rotating body H112a2 abuts against the first elastic member H841 in the initial position, the launching means H830 is rotated to the launch position while elastically deforming the first elastic member H841, so that the game ball can be launched.

Next, the launch position ball throwing unit H170 will be described with reference to FIG. 1904. As shown in FIG. 1904, the launch position ball throwing unit H170 mainly comprises a front case H860 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) and having a front opening H171, a rear case H870 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front case H860 and having a rear opening H172, and a ball throwing means H880 arranged between the front case H860 and the rear case H870.

The ball sending means H880 mainly comprises a solenoid H881 and a displacement member H882 that can be displaced between a first position and a second position by driving the solenoid H881. When the displacement member H882 is displaced to the first position, one game ball is caused to flow from the upper tray H17 (front side opening H171) into the inside of the front side case H860 and the rear side case H870 and held therein, and when the displacement member H882 is displaced to the second position, one game ball that has flowed into the inside of the front side case H860 and the rear side case H870 and held therein is discharged from the rear side opening H172 and sent onto the launch rail H112a1. This allows the game balls to be sent onto the launch rail H112a1 one by one.

The displacement member H882 is not limited to being displaced by the solenoid H881, and may be displaced by a driving means such as a motor. The displacement member H882 may not have a driving source such as a driving means, and may be displaced in one direction (first position) by the throw of the ball launched by the ball launching unit H112a, and displaced in the other direction (second position) by its own weight.

The solenoid H881 (other device H228 (see FIG. 1842)) that sends the game balls is connected to the input/output port H225 of the sound lamp control device H113, and is driven based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110. This makes it possible to send the game balls one by one onto the launch rail H112a1.

Next, the arrangement of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 and the ball launching unit H112a will be described with reference to FIG. 1905. As shown in FIG. 1905, the launch position ball throwing unit H170 and the ball launching unit H112a are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), and the rear opening H172 of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 is arranged slightly above the launch rail H112a1 of the ball launching unit H112a. This allows the game ball sent from the launch position ball throwing unit H170 to the launch rail H112a1 to be sent onto the launch rail H112a1 without coming into contact with (being blocked by) the launch rail H112a1 and becoming jammed.

The rear opening H172 of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 is formed at a position where it at least partially overlaps with the recess H821a1 of the ball launching unit H112a in the front-rear direction. This allows the game ball sent from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 to be received in the recess H821a1 and to flow down along the curved surface of the recess H821a1.

Here, if the rear portion H821a of the ball launching unit H112a is formed flat (there is no recess H821a1 formed in the rear portion H821a), when the game ball is sent from the rear opening H172 of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 and abuts against the rear portion H821a, the reaction force of the abutment acts toward the front side. Therefore, the game ball that abuts against the rear portion H821a bounces toward the front side, abuts against the rear side of the launch position ball throwing unit H170, and bounces back toward the rear side. In other words, the game ball sent from the launch position ball throwing unit H170 is guided to the launch rail H112a1 (the position where it abuts against the launch means H830 in the initial position) in a state of moving back and forth.

Therefore, there is a risk that the game ball launched (shot out) by the launching means H830 will be launched in a state of flailing back and forth, in which case the game ball will not be sent straight along the launching rail H112a1 and may collide with the inner surface of the flow path (the inner surface to the side of the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls). When the game ball collides with the inner surface of the flow path in this way, the reaction force it receives from the inner surface causes the game ball to flailing, resulting in a problem that the trajectory of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 will not be stable.

In contrast, the ball launching unit H112a in the 111th embodiment has a recess H821a1 at a position overlapping the rear side of the rear opening H172, and the game ball sent from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 can be abutted against the inner surface of the curved recess H821a1, so that the reaction force acting on the game ball abutting the inner surface of the recess H821a1 can be applied not only to the front side but also in the up and down directions (arrow U-D directions). This makes it possible to prevent the game ball abutting the rear part H821a from bouncing back toward the front side. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball sent to the position where it abuts the launching means H830 in the initial position from becoming unruly. As a result, it is possible to easily stabilize the trajectory of the game ball launched (shot out) by the launching means H830.

In addition, the edge of the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) of the recess H821a1 is positioned lower than the rear opening H172, which makes it easier for the game ball sent from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 to come into contact with the recess H821a1.

In addition, in front of and behind (in the direction of arrows F-B) the launch rail H112a1 and rolling part H821b, which form the rolling surface of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, the back part H821a of the first guide member H821 is disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B), and the back side case H870 is disposed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F). As a result, the game ball launched by the launching means H830 rolls in the space (flow path) surrounded by the back part H821a, the back side case H870, the launch rail H112a1, and the rolling part H821b, and is sent to the game board H13.

The recess H821a1 is formed to a length that extends from the rear side, which overlaps with the game ball (see FIG. 1906(b)) that is sent from the rear opening H172 onto the launch rail H112a1 when viewed from the front, to a portion that exceeds the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

As a result, even if the game ball launched by the launching means H830 immediately starts to move back and forth, the game ball can be received inside the recessed portion H821a1, and even if the game ball rolling on the launching rail H112a1 starts to move back and forth due to the impact of being sent to the rolling portion H821b, the ball can be received inside the recessed portion H821a1. In other words, the recessed portion H821a1 is formed at the transition portion of the rolling surface where the game ball is likely to be subjected to external forces or on the rear side of the launch position. As a result, in the 111th embodiment, it is easier to prevent the launched game ball from moving back and forth.

Next, referring to FIG. 1906, the launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 will be described. FIG. 1906(a) is a front view of the launching means H830 in the retracted position, FIG. 1906(b) is a front view of the launching means H830 in the initial position, and FIG. 1906(c) is a front view of the launching means H830 in the launch position. Note that the launching means H830 is located in the initial position when the driving force of the drive motor H850 is not working (i.e., when the operating handle H51 is not being operated).

As shown in FIG. 1906, when the player operates the operating handle H51, the drive motor H850 is driven and the launching means H830 is displaced from the initial position to the retracted position. At the same time, one game ball is sent onto the launching rail H112a1 from the rear side opening H172 of the launching position ball sending unit H170, and is held in a position where it can come into contact with the launching means H830 in the initial position.

After the launching means H830 is displaced to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1906(a), the launching means H830 is displaced toward the launching position shown in FIG. 1906(c) with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle H51. In this case, in the initial position shown in FIG. 1906(b), the abutment surface H831a of the launching means H830 abuts against the game ball held on the launching rail H112a1, and the launching means H830 is displaced to the launching position, so that the game ball abutted against the abutment surface H831a rolls on the launching rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b with a predetermined launch strength and is sent to the game board H13.

After the game ball is launched (shot) by the launching means H830 to the game board H13, the launching means H830 is displaced again to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1906(a), and then the operation of displacing the launching means H830 to the launch position shown in FIG. 1906(c) is continued. This allows the game balls to be sent to the game board H13 one ball at a time at a predetermined interval.

Next, referring to FIG. 1907, the game ball being sent along the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b will be described. FIG. 1907(a) and FIG. 1907(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the ball launch unit H112a and the launch position ball sending unit H170 in the MCMVII portion of FIG. 1905(b). Note that FIG. 1907(a) and FIG. 1907(b) sequentially illustrate the transitional states of the game ball being launched by the launching means H830.

As shown in FIG. 1907(a), the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the launch rail H112a1 is normally guided along the top H112a4 of the recess in the launch rail H112a1 to the center of the launch rail H112a1 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 1907(b), the game ball that is launched by contact with the contact surface H831a of the launching means H830 rolls along the top H112a4 of the launching rail H112a1 and is guided to the rolling portion H821b of the first guide member H821, and then rolls around the center of the rolling portion H821b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and is sent to the game board H13.

Next, referring to Fig. 1908 and Fig. 1909, a case where the game ball thrown on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b moves wildly in the forward and backward directions will be described. Fig. 1908(a) and Fig. 1908(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the ball launch unit H112a and the launch position ball throwing unit H170 in the MCMVII part of Fig. 1905(b), and Fig. 1909 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ball launch unit H112a and the launch position ball throwing unit H170 in the MCMIX part of Fig. 1905(a). Fig. 1908(a) and Fig. 1908(b) sequentially show the transition states of the game ball launched by the launching means H830. Fig. 1909 also shows the game ball thrown to the position corresponding to Fig. 1908(b).

As shown in FIG. 1908(a), when the contact surface H831a of the launching means H830 contacts the game ball in a state in which the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 to the launch rail H112a1 is positioned in a position biased in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) relative to the top H112a4 of the recess in the launch rail H112a1 (moving back and forth), the contact surface H831a contacts the game ball in a position biased in the front-rear direction (for example, when the contact surface H831a of the launching means H830 contacts the game ball before the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 is guided along the inclined surface toward the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1 to the center in the front-rear direction of the launch rail H112a1, the contact surface H831a contacts the game ball in a position biased toward the front side).

As a result, when the game ball is launched (shot) from the launching means H830 with a force component applied to it in the forward and backward directions (in the direction of the arrows F-B) relative to the launching rail H112a1, there is a risk that the game ball may move back and forth as it rolls along the guiding means H820 and is sent to the game board H13. In this case, as described above, the game ball may not be sent straight along the launching rail H112a1, and may collide with the inner surface of the flow path (the inner surface to the side of the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls). In this way, when the game ball collides with the inner surface of the flow path, the reaction force it receives from the inner surface causes the game ball to move back and forth, and there is a problem in that the trajectory of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 is not stable.

In contrast, the guide means H820 in the 111th embodiment has a recess H821a1 formed in the rear portion H821a which forms the wall on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the launch path of the game ball, and when the game ball moves wildly in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), as shown in Figures 1908 and 1909, a part of the game ball can be received in the recess H821a1 and the game ball can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the recess H821a1.

Here, since the recess H821a1 is formed in a curved shape with a radius larger than the radius of the game ball as described above, a directional component in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) can be imparted to the reaction force acting on the game ball abutting the inner surface of the recess H821a1. In other words, the reaction force abutting the inner surface of the recess H821a1 can be dispersed into a component that bounces back to the front side (arrow F direction) and a component that displaces the ball upward or downward. This makes it possible to weaken the reaction force of the directional component that bounces back to the front side (arrow F direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of being wild in the front-to-back direction, and the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In the 111th embodiment, the recess H821a1 of the guide means H820 has a curved recessed bottom on the rear side that is positioned above the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1, so that when the game ball launched by the launch means H830 moves wildly toward the rear side, the game ball can be brought into contact with a part below the recessed bottom of the recess H821a1. In other words, the game ball can be brought into contact with the area that curves upward toward the rear side.

As a result, a reaction force in an upward direction can be applied to the game ball that contacts the inner surface of the recess H821a1, and a force component in a downward direction can be applied, suppressing an increase in resistance at the rolling portion between the launch rail H112a1 and the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be stably sent to the game area of the game board H13.

In other words, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 abuts against the inner surface (back portion H821a) of the flow path (passage surrounded by the launching rail H112a1, the back portion H821a, and the back side case H870), the reaction force acting on the game ball in the abutment direction (front-to-back direction) can be suppressed by the recess H821a1, so that the game ball can be prevented from going wild due to the reaction force received from the inner surface (back portion H821a). As a result, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized.

In addition, the recessed portion H821a1 formed by recessing can suppress the reaction force acting on the game ball in the contact direction (front-back direction), so an increase in resistance in the rolling (throwing) direction can be suppressed compared to when the reaction force acting on the game ball in the contact direction is suppressed by abutting it against an elastically deformable elastic member. In other words, by abutting the game ball against the recessed portion H821a1, the reaction force acting on the game ball can be dispersed (applied with a reaction force in the up-down direction) and the reaction force in the contact direction can be reduced, so an increase in resistance in the rolling direction can be suppressed. As a result, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the recess H821a1 is formed as a recess, the ball launching unit H112a can be made smaller in the front-to-rear direction compared to when it is formed as a protrusion, and the space in the flow path can be increased, preventing game balls from clogging the flow path.

The rear portion H821a of the guiding means H820 is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) (relative to the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1) toward the launch direction of the game ball by the launching means H830 (arrow L direction), forming a side surface on the front side (arrow F direction). That is, the rear portion H821a is formed with at least a portion of the front side inclined relative to the surface of the game board H13 (see FIG. 1838). On the other hand, the recessed portion H27821a1 has a recessed bottom on the rear side formed parallel to the launch direction of the game ball by the launching means H830 (the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1).

That is, the recess depth on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the recess H821a1 is configured to become shallower along the launch direction of the game ball, and the end of the recess H821a1 in the launch direction is formed to connect with the front of the rear part H821a. This makes it possible to prevent a step from being formed at the end of the recess H821a1 on the launch direction side, and to prevent an increase in resistance in the direction opposite to the launch direction when the game ball abutting the inner surface of the recess H821a1 at the end of the recess H821a1 exits from the end of the recess H821a1 in the launch direction. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the launch position ball throwing unit H170 is positioned such that the ball throwing section H882a (see FIG. 1904), which throws the game ball from the rear opening H172 of the displacement member H882 to the launch rail H112a1, protrudes from the rear opening H172 to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B), and is positioned slightly below the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 when the displacement member H882 is positioned in the second position (the position where the game ball is thrown to the launch rail H112a1).

Therefore, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves wildly toward the front side (arrow F direction), the game ball can be made to abut against the end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the ball throwing section H882a. This allows an upward directional component to be imparted to the reaction force acting on the game ball abutting the ball throwing section H882a. In other words, the reaction force that abuts against the ball throwing section H882a can be dispersed into a component that bounces back toward the back side (arrow B direction) and a component that moves upward. This makes it possible to weaken the reaction force of the directional component that bounces back toward the back side (arrow B direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving wildly in the front-to-back direction, and the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves violently toward the front side (the direction of arrow F), the game ball can be brought into contact with the ball throwing section H882a, so that the game ball moving violently toward the front side can be prevented from flowing (i.e., flowing back) directly into the rear side opening H172. As a result, the ball can be sent from the launch position ball throwing unit H170 to the launch rail H112a1 in a stable manner.

Furthermore, the recess H821a1 is formed to become narrower (smaller in width) toward the terminal end on the launch direction side. This makes it easier to maintain the state in which the game ball abuts against the recess H821a1 when it abuts against the recess H821a1 and is guided. In other words, since the recess H821a1 is configured to become narrower in width toward the launch (throw) direction of the game ball, it is easier to maintain the state in which the game ball is received inside the recess H821a1 (supported by the recess H821a1). This allows the recess H821a1 to continue to act on the game ball while the game ball is rolling (passing) between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, making it easier to suppress the game ball from going wild. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the game board H13.

In the 111th embodiment, the recess H821a1 is narrowed only at its end, but the recess H821a1 may be narrowed in width all along the length of the groove in the direction of launch.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, a case was described in which the width of the recess H821a1 becomes narrower (smaller) toward the end of the firing direction, but the width of the recess H821a1 may be wider (larger) toward the end of the firing direction.

In this case, the recess can be gradually applied to a gaming ball that exhibits relatively large amounts of movement. That is, the overlapping (contactable) area between the gaming ball and the recess H821a1 can be gradually increased. This can prevent the gaming ball from amplifying its movement due to its collision with the recess H821a1. That is, it can prevent the gaming ball from moving wildly in a direction different from the contact direction (for example, bouncing upwards). As a result, it is possible to stabilize the sending of the gaming ball to the gaming board H13.

Next, the operation unit G200 will be described with reference to Figs. 1910 to 1912. Fig. 1910 is a front view of the game board H13, Fig. 1911 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board H13, and Fig. 1912 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit G200.

As shown in Figures 1910 to 1912, the operating unit G200 has a rear case G300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case G300, a performance operating unit G1000 is arranged above and a light-emitting decorative unit G500 is arranged below.

The rear case G300 has a bottom wall G301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and an outer wall G302 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall G301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the walls G301 and G302. The bottom wall G301 has an opening G301a that is rectangular when viewed from the front at its center, and the third pattern display device H81 arranged on the back side of the bottom wall G301 can be seen through the opening G301a.

The performance operation unit G1000 comprises a gate-shaped base unit G600 (base member G610) disposed on the bottom wall portion G301 of the rear case G300, and a petal operation device G800 disposed displaceably on the base unit G600 (base member G610), and can be displaced between a retracted position where the petal operation device G800 is retracted in front of the base unit G600 (base member G610) (above the rear case H300 (in the direction of the arrow U)) and an extended position where it extends to the front side of the opening G301a of the rear case G300 (i.e., the third pattern display device H81) (see FIG. 1918). In other words, the performance operation unit G1000 comprises a petal operation device G800 that is configured to be displaceable.

Also, in FIG. 1910, the state where the petal operating device G800 is arranged in the retracted position is illustrated, and as shown in FIG. 1910, when the petal operating device G800 is arranged in the retracted position, the petal operating device G800 is visible from the upper frame part of the center frame H86. Also, the circular ring forming unit G700 described later is formed to displace in conjunction with the displacement between the retracted position and the extended position of the petal operating device G800, and in the following description, the positions of the circular ring forming unit G700 and the forward and backward operating unit G900 when the petal operating device G800 is arranged in the retracted position are described as the retracted positions of the circular ring forming unit G700 and the forward and backward operating unit G900, and the positions of the circular ring forming unit G700 and the forward and backward operating unit G900 when the petal operating device G800 is arranged in the extended position are described as the extended positions of the circular ring forming unit G700 and the forward and backward operating unit G900.

The circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 are configured to be displaceable, and the petal operating device G800 is configured to be displaceable by the displacement of the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800. The circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 are configured to be vibrated or movable, and the petal operating device G800 is configured to vibrate or operate by the vibration or movement.

The light-emitting decorative unit G500 mainly comprises a base body G510 formed from a resin material and a light-emitting device G520 arranged on the front side of the base body G510, and creates a lighting effect by changing the form of light emitted from multiple LEDs (light-emitting diodes) G521 arranged inside the light-emitting device G520 (for example, the number of LEDs G521 that emit light or the light color of the LEDs G521).

Next, referring to Figures 1913 to 1936, we will explain the performance action unit G1000.

First, the overall configuration of the directing operation unit G1000 will be described with reference to Fig. 1913 to Fig. 1917. Fig. 1913(a) is a front view of the directing operation unit G1000, Fig. 1913(b) is a rear view of the directing operation unit G1000, Fig. 1914 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operation device G800 side of the directing operation unit G1000, Fig. 1915 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operation device G800 side of the directing operation unit G1000, Fig. 1916 is an exploded front perspective view of the ring forming unit G700 side of the directing operation unit G1000, and Fig. 1917 is an exploded rear perspective view of the ring forming unit G700 side of the directing operation unit G1000.

As shown in Figures 1913 to 1917, the performance operation unit G1000 is mainly formed with a base unit G600 formed in a gate shape, an advancing/retreating operation unit G900 arranged on the base unit G600, a petal operation device G800 arranged on the base unit G600 and moved up and down by the driving force of the advancing/retreating operation unit G900, and a circular ring forming unit G700 arranged on the base unit G600 and forming a circular state in conjunction with the up and down movement of the petal operation device G800.

In the 111th embodiment, the performance operation unit G1000 displaces the petal operation device G800 downward from an upper retracted position to an extended position, but the retracted position does not necessarily have to be upward, and the petal operation device G800 may be displaced upward from a lower retracted position to an extended position. In other words, the performance operation unit G1000 may be arranged upside down when viewed from the front. Also, in addition to being arranged upside down, the performance operation unit G1000 may be arranged rotated 90 degrees when viewed from the front, so that the petal operation device G800 is displaced left and right.

The base unit G600 is mainly formed by a base member G610 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion G301 of the rear case G300, and a left holding member G620, a right holding member G630, a left wiring member G640, and a right wiring member G650 arranged on the front side of the base member G610. Note that in this embodiment, the base unit G600 is mainly formed from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light, but it may also be formed by pressing a metal plate material.

The base member G610 mainly comprises a rectangular main body plate portion G611 that is long in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a left extension portion G612 and a right extension portion G613 that extend downward from both the left and right ends of the main body plate portion G611.

The main body plate portion G611 is the portion where the forward/backward motion unit G900 and the petal motion device G800 described below are arranged, and is provided on the front side (arrow F direction side) with pin portions G611a to G611h which support the driven gears G921 to G928 and the arm side driven gear G929 of the forward/backward motion unit G900, a pivot portion G611j which supports the left arm unit G930 of the forward/backward motion unit G900, and a sliding portion G611k which forms part of the sliding surface of the front side base member G810 of the petal motion device G800.

Furthermore, a female screw is formed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the main body plate portion G611 for fastening and fixing the base unit G600 to the rear case G300, and a screw is fastened through a through hole that penetrates the bottom wall portion G301 of the rear case G300 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This makes it possible to arrange the base unit G600 (performance operation unit G1000) in a fixed state on the rear case G300.

In this embodiment, a female screw is formed on the rear side of the main body plate portion G611, and a through hole is formed in the bottom wall portion G301 of the rear case G300 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B), but this is not limited to this. A through hole may be formed in the main body plate portion G611 in the front-rear direction, and a female screw may be formed in the bottom wall portion G301 of the rear case G300. In this case, after arranging the performance operation unit G1000 on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case G300, the performance operation unit G1000 can be screwed to the rear case G300 from the front side where the performance operation unit G1000 was arranged on the rear case G300, without the worker having to move to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case G300. Therefore, the arrangement work of the performance operation unit G1000 on the rear case G300 can be simplified.

As described above, the pin portions G611a to G611h are portions that support the driven gears G921 to G928 of the forward/backward motion unit G900 and the arm-side driven gear G929, and are formed in a circular shape and protrude toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F).

In addition, the pins G611a to G611e, G611h have female threads formed at their protruding tips, and screws are fastened to the protruding tips while supporting the corresponding gears G921 to G925, G928. This prevents the driven gears G921 to G925, G928 from falling off the pins G611a to G611e, G611h.

On the other hand, the pin portions G611f, G611g are protruding in an annular shape having a predetermined inner diameter, and are formed so that the gears G926, G927 can be supported on their outer periphery. Metal rod-shaped members G611m, G611n are fitted into the pin portions G611f, G611g, respectively, at their centers, and the metal rod-shaped members G611m, G611n can support the annular forming unit G700 (left annular member G710 and right annular member G720) described below.

The gears G926, G927, which are journalled on the pins G611f, G611g, are sandwiched between the left and right circular members G710, G720, which are journalled on the metal rod members G611m, G611n, and the main plate G611, thereby preventing them from falling off the rod members G611m, G611n.

A collar G611ia is fastened to the tip of the rod-shaped member G611m, and the collar G611ia has a small diameter portion formed in a circular shape and a large diameter portion that protrudes radially outward from one axial end of the small diameter portion. The collar G611ia is disposed with the small diameter portion inserted inside the arm-side driven gear G929, which is formed in an annular shape. A small gap is also formed between the small diameter portion of the collar G611ia and the inside of the arm-side driven gear G929. This prevents the arm-side driven gear G929 from falling off the pin portion G611i, and allows the arm-side driven gear G929 to rotate relative to the pin portion G661i (collar G611ia).

The rod-shaped members G611m and G611n are parts that pivotally support the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 of the circular ring forming unit G700 described below, and are clamped between the left holding member G620 arranged on the front side of the main plate portion G611. The gears G926 and G927 of the forward and backward movement unit G900, which are pivotally supported by the pin portions G611f and G611g, are restricted from coming out of the pin portions G611f and G611g by the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720, which are pivotally supported by the rod-shaped members G611m and G611n.

The pivot support portion G611j is formed on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the main body plate portion G611 when viewed from the front (when viewed from the direction of arrow B). As described above, the pivot support portion G611j is a portion that pivots the main body member G931 of the advance/retract motion unit G900, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and protrudes toward the front side. This pivot support portion G611j allows the main body member G931 of the advance/retract motion unit G900 to rotate around the pivot support portion G611j as an axis, and the rotation of the main body member G931 around the pivot support portion G611j (rotation axis) allows the petal motion device G800 disposed in the advance/retract motion unit G900 to be displaced in the up and down directions (arrow U-D directions).

The sliding part G611k is formed in a straight line connecting the left ends of the upper and lower ends of the wall part G611p erected on the front side so as to surround the upper and lower ends and the right edge of the right side (arrow R direction) of the main body plate part G611 in a front view, and is set at a shorter erection distance toward the front side than the wall part G611p. As a result, when the right-side holding member G630 described later is disposed on the front side of the area surrounded by the wall part G611p and the sliding part G611k, a groove can be formed between the opposing back sides of the sliding part G611k and the right-side holding member G630, and the front-side base member G810 of the petal operating device G800 described later can be held in a slidable state in the groove.

In addition, when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B), the area surrounded by the wall portion G611p and the sliding portion G611k of the main body plate portion G611 is located closer to the front side than other areas (i.e., a step is formed toward the front side at the portion where the sliding portion G611k is formed), and when the collar G815 of the petal operation device G800 is disposed between the sliding portion G611k and the rear side of the right-side holding member G630, the outer circumferential surface of the large diameter portion of the collar G815 can be prevented from abutting against the front of the main body plate portion G611. This can prevent an increase in resistance when the front side base member G810 of the petal operation device G800 slides along the sliding portion G611k, and the petal operation device G800 can be smoothly displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). A detailed explanation of the operation of the petal operation device G800 will be given later.

The left extension portion G612 is the portion where the annular ring forming unit G700 described later is disposed, and is provided with a left link shaft support portion G612a at the lower end (arrow D direction) and a left retaining portion G612b above the left link shaft support portion G612a (arrow U direction).

The left link shaft support portion G612a is a portion on which one end of the left link member G730 of the ring forming unit G700 is supported, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and is formed standing on the front side. This allows one end of the left link member G730 to be held in a state in which it can rotate around the left link shaft support portion G612a.

The left side holding portion G612b is formed in a position where it can be contacted by the back surface of the left side circular member G710 of the circular ring forming unit G700 arranged in the retracted position, and also at a position where it can be contacted by the side surface of the left side link member G730 connected to the left side circular member G710 of the circular ring forming unit G700. This makes it possible to prevent the left side circular member G710 from swinging and displacing the left side circular member G710 arranged in the retracted position to a position visible to the player (the inner area of the center frame G86 of the game board H13) when external vibration acts on the left side circular member G710 arranged in the retracted position.

The right-side extension G613, like the left-side extension G612, is a portion in which the annular forming unit G700 described later is disposed, and is provided with a right-side link shaft support G613a at the lower end (arrow D direction) and a right-side holding portion G613b above the right-side link shaft support G613a (arrow U direction). Note that the right-side link shaft support G613a differs only in the member (right-side link member G740) that is connected to the above-mentioned left-side link shaft support G612a, and the right-side holding portion G613b differs only in the member (right-side annular member G720 and right-side link member G740) that can abut against the above-mentioned left-side holding portion G612b. The rest of the configuration is the same, so detailed explanations of these will be omitted.

In addition, on the front side of the left extension portion G612 and the right extension portion G613, the left wiring member G640 and the right wiring member G650 are arranged in a state in which a predetermined space is formed between the front of the left extension portion G612 and the front of the right extension portion G613, avoiding the left link shaft support portion G612a, the left holding portion G612b, the right link shaft support portion G613a, and the right holding portion G613b of the left extension portion G612. Electrical wiring connected to the ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 described later is inserted through the space between the left wiring member G640 and the left extension portion G612 and the space between the right wiring member G650 and the right extension portion G613. This prevents the electrical wiring from coming into contact with the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800, which are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position, causing the electrical wiring to break or the insulation of the electrical wiring to peel off.

The left side holding member G620 is formed in a plate shape that extends from the left end of the main body plate portion G611 when viewed from the front along the upper end to a position beyond the center of the main body plate portion G611 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is disposed on the main body plate portion G611 in a state that covers the front side (arrow F direction side) of each of the driven gears G921 to G928 and the arm side driven gear G929 of the forward/backward operation unit G900 described later.

The left-side holding member G620 is mainly provided with a through hole G621 through which the shaft of the drive motor G910 of the forward/backward motion unit G900 described later is inserted, a female thread portion G622 around the through hole G621 for fastening the drive motor G910 to the left-side holding member G620, and a recess G623 for holding the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rod-shaped members G611m and G611n arranged on the main body plate portion G611, and is fastened to the main body plate portion G611.

The through hole G621 is formed in an area that is formed one step lower toward the rear side (arrow B side) of the upper left side (arrow L side) of the left holding member G620 when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor G910 from protruding further forward (arrow F side) than the left holding member G620 when the drive motor G910 is disposed on the left holding member G620. As a result, when the circular ring forming unit G700 described later is displaced to a retracted position and the circular ring forming unit G700 is positioned on the front side of the left holding member G620, it is possible to prevent the circular ring forming unit G700 from abutting against the drive motor G910.

The drive motor G910 is mounted on the left holding member G620 by inserting the shaft into the through hole G621 from the front side (arrow F direction) and then fastening a screw to the female thread portion G622 of the left holding member G620 through a through hole formed in the drive motor G910. The drive motor G910 mounted on the left holding member G620 has a drive gear G911 mounted on the shaft that passes through the through hole G621 from the rear side.

The recess G623 is recessed in a circular shape from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the main body plate G611 toward the front side (arrow F direction), and the recessed inner edge is formed into a shape (inner diameter) corresponding to the rod-shaped members G611m, G611n arranged on the main body plate G611. This allows the tips of the rod-shaped members G611m, G611n to be accommodated and held in the internal space of the recess G623 when the left side holding member G620 is arranged on the main body plate G611.

Here, the axially supported parts G712ba, G722ba of the ring-forming unit G700, which will be described later, are disposed (inserted) into the rod-shaped members G611m, G611n. Thus, with the axially supported parts G712ba, G722ba inserted into the rod-shaped members G611m, G611n, the ring-forming unit G700 is held by the base unit G600 by disposing the left-side holding member G620 on the base member G610 from the front side (arrow F direction side).

As described above, the right-side holding member G630 is a member that covers the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion G611p and the sliding portion G611k formed on the main body plate portion G611, and is fastened with a screw to a female thread formed at the tip of the wall portion G611p that is erected on the front side. This allows a space to be formed between the sliding portion G611k and the back surface of the right-side holding member G630, and the arm portion G812 (collar G815) of the petal operation device G800 described later can be arranged in that space in a slidable state.

Next, the forward/backward motion unit G900 will be described. The forward/backward motion unit G900 mainly comprises a drive motor G910, a drive gear G911 arranged on the shaft of the drive motor G910, a number of driven gears G921-G928 and an arm-side driven gear G929 that transmit the driving force of the drive motor G910 by the rotation of the drive gear G911, a left arm unit G930 that is supported on the support portion G611j of the main body plate portion G611 and is rotated and displaced by the rotation of the arm-side driven gear G929, a slide plate G940 that is connected to the left arm unit G930 and can be displaced by the rotation of the left arm unit G930, and a slide rail G950 that determines the sliding direction of the slide plate G940.

In this embodiment, the driven gears G921-G928, the arm side driven gear G929, the left arm unit G930, and the slide plate G940 are mainly made of a resin material. In addition, the slide plate G940, which is arranged in a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the third pattern display device H81 in the extended position of the forward/backward operation unit G900, is made of a material that can transmit light. This prevents light emitted from the third pattern display device H81 from being reflected by the slide plate G940 of the forward/backward operation unit G900 in the extended position to the third pattern display device H81, making it difficult to recognize the display of the third pattern display device H81 when viewed from a position that does not overlap with the slide plate G940.

As described above, the drive motor G910 is disposed with its shaft passing through the through hole G621 of the left holding member G620 of the base unit G600, and the drive gear G911 is disposed on the shaft from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the left holding member G620. In other words, the drive motor G910 is disposed with the left holding member G620 sandwiched between the main body part and the drive gear G911.

The driven gear G921 is meshed with teeth engraved on the drive gear G911, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear G911. The driven gears G922 to G928, which are meshed in order from the driven gear G921, are rotated in sync from the middle gear G923 to the terminal gear G928 as the driven gear G921 is rotated by the drive gear G911.

Furthermore, the driven gear G925 and the driven gear G928 are configured to be capable of transmitting driving force to the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 of the circular ring forming unit G700 described later, and are mainly formed with protrusions G925a, G928a that protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction side) and collars G925b, G928b that are journaled on the protrusions G925a, G928a.

The protrusions G925a, G928a are formed at positions (positions radially away from the rotation axes) different from the rotation axes of the driven gears G925 and G928. The protrusions G925a, G928a are inserted into sliding grooves G712bb, G722bb of the left and right circular members G710 and G720, which will be described later, and collars G925b, G928b are disposed on the inserted tip side. As a result, when the driven gear G925 and the driven gear G928 are rotated (driving force is transmitted from the drive motor G910), the positions of the protrusions G925a and G928a are displaced in accordance with the rotation of the driven gear G925 and the driven gear G928, and the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 are displaced in accordance with this displacement (i.e., the driving force is transmitted to the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720).

The arm-side driven gear G929 is engaged with the driven gear G921 at a position different from the position where the driven gear G922 is engaged with the driven gear G921, and is configured to rotate via the driven gear G921 when the drive gear G911 is rotated.

The arm-side driven gear G929 mainly comprises a protruding portion G929a that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side, a collar G929b that is journaled at the protruding tip of the protruding portion G929a, a wall portion G929c that protrudes radially outward from the front end of the outer circumferential surface and extends circumferentially, a detectable portion G929d that protrudes radially outward from a part of the wall portion G929c, and a bulge portion G929e that bulges between the outer circumferential surface on which teeth are formed and the wall portion, and is configured to transmit a driving force to the left arm unit G930.

The protruding portion G929a protrudes from a position different from the rotation axis of the arm side driven gear G929, and is inserted into the shaft supported portion G931a of the left arm unit G930 described below. In addition, a collar G929b is disposed on the protruding portion G929a at the tip side that is inserted into the shaft supported portion G931a of the left arm unit G930. As a result, when the arm side driven gear G929 rotates (driving force is transmitted from the drive motor G910), the position of the protruding portion G929a is displaced with the rotation of the arm side driven gear G929, and the left arm unit G930 is displaced with this displacement (i.e., the driving force of the drive motor G910 is transmitted to the left arm unit G930).

The wall portion G929c is a portion that protects the tooth surface of the arm side driven gear G929, and is formed continuous with the side end surface of the tooth surface of the arm side driven gear G929. This improves the rigidity of the teeth of the arm side driven gear G929, and prevents the teeth of the arm side driven gear G929 from being damaged. In addition, the wall portion G929c prevents the driven gear G921 from being displaced axially relative to the tooth surface of the arm side driven gear G929, thereby preventing the driven gear G921 from falling off the pin portion G611a and preventing the meshing state between the arm side driven gear G929 and the driven gear G921 from deteriorating (the meshing position from shifting axially).

The protruding portion G929a protrudes from the wall portion G929c. This allows the wall portion G929c to bend and release the force when a driving force from the drive motor G910 greater than normal operation acts on the protruding portion G929a due to a malfunction or the like. This prevents the meshing position of the arm side driven gear G929 and the gear G922 from shifting when a driving force greater than normal operation acts, and prevents excessive force from acting on the teeth of the arm side driven gear G929 or the gear G922 when the gears are driven with the meshing position shifted. As a result, damage to the teeth of the arm side driven gear G929 and the gear G922 can be prevented.

The detected portion G929d is a protrusion for detecting the rotational position of the arm-side driven gear G929, and is disposed so as to be detectable by the detection device G660 disposed on the base member G610 of the base unit G600. In this embodiment, when the petal operation device G800 is disposed in the retracted position, the detected portion G929d is made detectable by the detection device G660. As a result, when the petal operation device G800 attempts to move from the retracted position to the extended position due to its own weight or vibration input from the outside, it is possible to detect the movement from the retracted position and perform control to return the petal operation device G800 to the retracted position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the petal operation device G800 from erroneously moving to the extended position, which reduces the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the case where the detected part G929d is detected by the detection device G660 when the petal operation device G800 is placed in the retracted position has been described, but this is not limited thereto. A separate detection device may be provided that detects the detected part G929d when the petal operation device is placed in the extended position, or the detection device G660 may be positioned so that the detected part G929d is detected when the petal operation device G800 is placed in the extended position.

In this case, when the petal movement device G800 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, the displacement can be detected by the detection device, and by slowing down the displacement speed of the petal movement device G800 just before it is displaced to the extended position in response to this detection, it is possible to suppress the vibration acting on the petal movement device G800 when it is stopped at the extended position. Therefore, when the petal movement device G800 is extended to the extended position to make it easily visible to the player, the petal movement device G800 can be effectively made visible to the player. As a result, it is easier to increase the player's interest.

The bulge G929e is a member that determines the rotation range of the arm-side driven gear G929, and is capable of contacting the regulating portion G611r that protrudes from the main body plate portion G611 when the petal operating device G800 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. The regulating portion G611r is formed at a position corresponding to the bulge G929e when the petal operating device G800 is disposed in each of the retracted position and the extended position (i.e., formed in two places). This prevents the arm-side driven gear G929 from rotating too much due to poor control, etc., and prevents the connecting portion between the protruding portion G929a and the left arm unit G930 from being damaged.

The left arm unit G930 is a member that transmits the driving force transmitted from the driven gear G921 to the petal operation device G800 via the slide plate G940, and mainly comprises a main body member G931 formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, a base side collar G932 for supporting the main body member G931 on the base unit G600, a spring arrangement member G933 arranged on the back side of the main body member G931 and formed in a ring shape coaxial with the base side collar G932, a torsion spring G934 arranged on the outer periphery of the spring arrangement member G933 and applying a biasing force to the main body member G931, and a slide side collar G935 for connecting the main body member G931 to the slide plate G940.

The main body member G931 is arranged with the upper side of the T-shape tilted upward (arrow U direction) from the left side (arrow L direction) to the right side (arrow R direction) when viewed from the front, and the end on the left side (arrow L direction) is arranged between the main body plate portion G611 and the left side holding member G620. In addition, the lower side of the main body member G931, which is formed into a T shape when viewed from the front, is arranged on the back side of the slide plate G940.

The main body member G931 is mainly composed of a shaft-supported portion G931a formed at the end on the left side (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front, a sliding groove G931b formed in a groove shape along the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the shaft-supported portion G931a, and a protruding portion G931c located on the back side of the slide plate G940 and protruding toward the front side (arrow F direction) of the slide plate G940.

The supported shaft portion G931a is a through hole formed so that the support shaft portion G611j formed in the main body plate portion G611 can be inserted therethrough, and is formed in a circular shape that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support shaft portion G611j. In addition, the small diameter portion of the base side collar G932 is disposed in the supported shaft portion G931a with a slight gap between them. This allows the main body member G931 to be disposed in the main body plate portion G611 (base member G610) in a state in which it can rotate around the axis of the support shaft portion G611j of the main body plate portion G611.

As described above, the sliding groove G931b is the portion through which the protruding portion G929a of the arm-side driven gear G929 is inserted, and is formed to a size that allows the protruding portion G929a to slide inside the sliding groove G931b when the protruding portion G929a rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the arm-side driven gear G929.

The protruding portion G931c is a portion that is connected to the slide plate G940, and is formed to a length that allows it to be inserted into the sliding groove G942 of the slide plate G940, which will be described later. In addition, the protruding portion G931c has a slide side collar G935 disposed at the protruding tip, and the outer peripheral surface of the slide side collar G935 is in contact with the inner edge of the sliding groove G942. This allows the slide plate G940 to be displaced relative to the main body member G931 when the main body member G931 is rotated around the pivoted portion G931a (pivot support portion G611j) as an axis.

The spring arrangement member G933 is arranged between the rear side of the main body member G931 and the front side of the main body plate portion G611 of the base member G610, and the pivot support portion G611j of the main body plate portion G611 is inserted into the inner space formed in a circular ring shape.

The spring arrangement member G933 is formed in a circular ring shape with both axial ends erected radially outward, and a torsion spring G934 is arranged between the opposing ends. This prevents the torsion spring G934 from contacting the back side of the main body member G931 or the front side of the main body plate portion G611 of the base member G610.

The torsion spring G934 is a spring that applies a biasing force to the arm member to bias the main body member G931 toward the retracted position, and is disposed on the outer periphery of the spring mounting member G933 in an elastically deformed state. One end of the torsion spring G934 is engaged with the base member G610, and the other end is engaged with the rear side of the main body member G931.

When the torsion spring G934 is not elastically deformed, the inner diameter of the spring portion formed by multiple turns is larger than the outer diameter of the portion erected at both axial ends of the spring installation member G933. This allows the torsion spring G934 to be easily installed in the spring installation member G933.

When the torsion spring G934 is elastically deformed with one end engaged with the base member G610 and the other end engaged with the back side (arrow B direction) of the main body member G931, the inner diameter of the spring portion is made smaller than the outer diameter of the portion erected at both axial ends of the spring arrangement member G933 due to the elastic deformation. This makes it possible to prevent the torsion spring G934 from falling off the base member G610 or the main body member G931 when both ends of the torsion spring G934 are engaged with the base member G610 and the main body member G931.

In this embodiment, a torsion spring G934 is provided to bias the left arm unit G930 toward the retracted position, but the left arm unit G930 may be biased toward the retracted position by a coil spring, rubber, or a magnet, instead of a torsion spring. Also, instead of biasing the left arm unit G930 toward the retracted position, the left arm unit G930 may be biased toward the extended position or to a position between the retracted position and the extended position, and the left arm unit G930 may be displaced with the biased position as a reference position.

The slide plate G940 is a transmission member for transmitting the driving force transmitted to the left arm unit G930 to the petal operation device G800. The slide plate G940 mainly comprises a first through hole G941 formed through the rear side (arrow B direction side) so that a screw can be inserted therethrough, a sliding groove G942 to which the main body member G931 is connected, and a second through hole G943 formed through the front side (arrow F direction side) so that a screw can be inserted therethrough.

The first through hole G941 is a hole through which a screw is inserted to fasten the slide plate G940 to the petal operation device G800 described later, and is formed at a position corresponding to a screw hole (female thread) in the rear side base member G820 of the petal operation device G800. By fastening the slide plate G940 and the petal operation device G800 via the first through hole G941, the driving force transmitted to the left arm unit G930 via the displacement of the slide plate G940 can be transmitted to the petal operation device G800, and the petal operation device G800 can be displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

The sliding groove G942 is formed as a long groove in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the sliding side collar G935 of the main body member G931 is arranged in the groove in a slidable state. Note that the sliding side collar G935 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding portion G931c of the main body member G931 as described above. Also, the sliding groove G942 extends in a direction different from the arc-shaped displacement locus of the protruding portion G931c of the main body member G931.

Therefore, when the main body member G931 is rotated about the pivotally supported portion G931a (pivot support portion G611j) and the protruding portion G931c is displaced, the slide side collar G935 slides inside the sliding groove G942 and pushes the slide plate G940 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), displacing the slide plate G940 in the vertical direction along the slide rail G950 described below.

The slide rail G950 is an expandable linear guide mechanism that is arranged with its expansion and contraction direction aligned with the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction). The slide rail G950 includes a base side rail G951 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main body plate portion G611 of the base member G610, and a sliding side rail G952 arranged on the front side of the base side rail G951 so as to be slidable in the up-down direction relative to the base side rail G951.

The sliding side rail G952 is also fastened to the back side of the slide plate G940 via a second through hole. This fixes the position of the slide plate G940 relative to the sliding side rail G952, and allows it to slide in the sliding direction of the sliding side rail G952 relative to the base side rail G951. In other words, the displacement direction of the slide plate G940 is limited to the up and down direction (arrow U-D direction). As described above, the petal operation device G800 is fastened to the slide plate G940, so that the petal operation device G800 can be displaced in the up and down direction in conjunction with the up and down displacement of the slide plate G940.

In this embodiment, the base side rail G951 and the sliding side rail G952 of the slide rail G950 are made of aluminum metal material, but this is not limiting, and the slide rail G950 may be made of a resin material.

The ring-forming unit G700 is formed in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly composed of a pair of left and right ring members G710 and G720 that are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction, and a left link member G730 and a right link member G740 that are arranged on one end side of each of the pair of left and right ring members G710 and G720. The left and right ring members G710, G720, G730, and G740 of the ring-forming unit G700 are mainly made of a resin material.

The left circular member G710 and right circular member G720, which form a pair, and the left link member G730 and right link member G740 are formed in line symmetry with respect to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front, so in the following explanation, the left circular member G710 and left link member G730 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) will be explained, and the explanation of the right circular member G720 and right link member G740 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) will be omitted. In addition, with regard to the symbols, the head G71 of the left circular member G710 will be represented as G72 on the right circular member G720, and the head G73 of the left link member G730 will be represented as G74 on the right link member G740.

The front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the left circular ring member G710 is formed as a decorative surface visible to the player, and decorations such as butterflies, waves, flowers, etc. are formed on the front side, with a portion of the front side formed from a resin material that can transmit light. To explain in more detail, the outlines of the butterflies, waves, flowers, etc. on the front side are formed from a resin material that does not transmit light, and the inside and outside of the outlines of the butterflies, waves, flowers, etc. are formed from a resin material that can transmit light. The left circular ring member G710 also has a light-emitting board that has an LED (light-emitting diode) that can emit light inside, and is configured so that the light from the LED can be irradiated toward the player through the portion formed from the material that can transmit light.

The left circular ring member G710 is mainly formed with a protruding portion G711 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear side on the rear surface of one end side (the lower side when viewed from the front (the side in the direction of the arrow D)) that is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and a connecting portion G712 that stands upright toward the rear side on the rear surface of the other end side (the upper side when viewed from the front (the side in the direction of the arrow U)) that is formed in a semicircular ring shape.

The protruding portion G711 is a portion that is connected to the left link member G730 described below, and protrudes toward the rear side of the left link member G730, and a collar G711a is disposed at the protruding tip in a state that allows it to rotate relative to the protruding portion.

The connecting portion G712 mainly comprises an erect portion G712a erected from the back side of the left circular member G710, and a bent portion G712b bent from the erect tip of the erect portion G712a in a direction along the back side of the left circular member G710.

The erected portion G712a is a portion that forms a space between the back surface of the left circular member G710 and the base member G610 for disposing the left arm unit G930 of the forward/backward motion unit G900, and is set to an erected distance toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) that is greater than the thickness of the main body member G931 of the left arm unit G930 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows the left circular member G710 to be disposed closer to the front surface side (arrow F direction side) than the main body member G931, and prevents the decorative surface of the left circular member G710 from being hidden by the main body member G931. Note that the back surface of the left circular member G710 described above refers to the back surface of the left circular member G710 in the portion excluding the protruding portion G711 and the connecting portion G712 from the left circular member G710.

The bent portion G712b is mainly formed with a shaft support portion G712ba formed through the shaft in an annular shape, and a sliding groove G712bb formed in a groove shape long in one direction at a position different from the shaft support portion G712ba.

The supported shaft portion G712ba is a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the left circular member G710 is inserted, and is formed to a size that allows the rod-shaped member G611m of the base member G610 described above to be inserted (the right circular member G720 on the right side is formed to a size that allows the pin portion G612n of the base member G610 to be inserted). As a result, the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 are arranged in a state in which they can rotate around the rod-shaped members G611m and G611n, respectively, by the supported shaft portion G712b1 being supported by the rod-shaped members G611m and G611n.

The sliding groove G712bb is a portion to which the driving force of the drive motor G910 is transmitted from the driven gear G925 of the forward/backward motion unit G900, and is formed to a size that allows the protrusion G925a (collar G925b) of the driven gear G925 to be inserted (the protrusion G928a (collar G928b) of the right circular ring member G720 is inserted into the sliding groove G722bb). Therefore, the left circular ring member G710 and the right circular ring member G720 transmit the driving force of the drive motor G910 by displacing the driven gears G925, G928 (collars G925b, G928b).

The left link member G730 is a member that supports one end of the left circular member G710 and prevents the left circular member G710 from swinging in the forward and backward directions, and is connected to the left extension portion G612 of the base member G610 and the left circular member G710.

The left link member G730 is formed as a rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and mainly comprises a groove portion G731 formed as a groove along the longitudinal direction on one end side when viewed from the front, and a through hole G732 formed in an annular shape on the other end side.

The through hole G732 is a through hole that serves as the pivot support part of the left link member G730 so that the left link member G730 can rotate on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member G610, and is formed through in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the base member G610.

The through hole G732 is also formed so that the left link shaft support G612a, which protrudes from the base member G610 in the front-rear direction, can be inserted therethrough. With the left link shaft support G612a inserted, the left link member G730 can rotate around the left link shaft support G612a.

The inner diameter of the through hole G732 and the outer diameter of the left link shaft support G612a are sized to have a slight gap that allows the left link shaft support G612a to be inserted into the through hole G732. This makes it possible to prevent one end of the left link member G730 from swinging in the front-to-back direction (the direction of arrows F-B) when the left link member G730 rotates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent one end of the left circular member G710, which is connected to one end of the left link member G730, from swinging in the front-to-back direction.

The groove portion G731 is a portion through which the protrusion G711 (collar G711a) of the left circular member G710 is inserted, and is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion G711, and is formed with a groove width that allows the collar G711a to slide. This allows the protrusion G711 to be displaced along the inner edge of the groove portion G731 when the left circular member G710 is rotated around the rod-shaped member G611m, and allows the left link member G730 to rotate around the left link shaft support portion G612a inserted into the through hole G732.

Next, referring to FIG. 1918, the operation of the petal operation device G800 and the ring forming unit G700 relative to the base member G610 will be described. FIGS. 1918(a) and (b) are front views of the performance operation unit G1000. Note that FIG. 1918(a) shows the petal operation device G800 and the ring forming unit G700 positioned in a retracted position, while FIG. 1918(b) shows the petal operation device G800 and the ring forming unit G700 positioned in a protruding position.

In addition, in Figures 1918(a) and 1918(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the annular forming unit G700, the sliding groove G712bb, and the protrusion G711 are shown with dashed lines, and the left side holding member G620 of the base unit G600 is shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 1918, when the drive gear G911 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor G910, the driven gear G921 meshed with the drive gear G911 is rotated. This causes the arm side driven gear G929 meshed with the driven gear G921 to rotate, and as the arm side driven gear G929 rotates, the collar G929b disposed on the protruding portion G929a of the arm side driven gear G929 is displaced around the rotation axis of the arm side driven gear G929.

As described above, the collar G929b is disposed so as to be slidable on the inner edge side of the sliding groove G931b of the main body member G931. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor G910 is transmitted to the main body member G931 by displacing the collar G929b, and the main body member G931 rotates around (at) the axis of the support part G611j (see FIG. 1914) that supports the supported part G931a.

By this rotation of the main body member G931, the petal operating device G800 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the retracted position (position shown in FIG. 1918(a)) to the extended position (position shown in FIG. 1918(b)) via the slide plate G940 (see FIG. 1914) connected to the main body member G931.

The slide plate G940 connected to the rear side of the petal operating device G800 has its displacement direction regulated to the up and down direction (arrows U-D direction) by the slide rail G950 as described above. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the left arm unit G930 can be converted into linear displacement to displace the petal operating device G800 in the up and down direction.

In addition, a collar G815 is disposed at one end (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the front side base member G810 of the petal movement device G800, and the collar G815 is sandwiched between the opposing right side holding member G630 and the sliding portion G611k of the main body plate portion G611 in a state in which it can slide vertically (in the direction of arrows U-D). This makes it possible to prevent the front side base member G810 from swinging in the front-back direction (in the direction of arrows F-B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the petal movement device G800 from swinging in the front-back direction when the petal movement device G800 is displaced vertically.

Next, the displacement of the circular ring forming unit G700 will be described. As with the displacement of the petal operating device G800 described above, when the drive gear G911 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor G910, the driven gear G921 meshed with the drive gear G911 is rotated. Since the driven gears G922 to G928 are meshed with the driven gear G921, the rotation of the driven gear G921 causes the driven gears G922 to G928 to rotate in conjunction with each other.

As described above, the driven gears G925, G928 have protrusions G925a, G928a arranged at positions different from their rotation axes, and as the driven gears G925, G928 rotate, the collars G925b, G928b arranged on the protrusions G925a, G928a are displaced.

The collars G925b, G928b are inserted into the sliding grooves G712bb, G722bb of the annular forming unit G700, so that the collars G925b, G928b slide along the inner edges of the sliding grooves G712bb, G722bb as they are displaced, transmitting the driving force of the drive motor G910 to the left annular member G710 and the right annular member G720 of the annular forming unit G700.

In this way, the driving force of the drive motor G910 is transmitted to the circular ring forming unit G700 via the driven gears G925, G928, causing the left circular ring member G710 and the right circular ring member G720 of the circular ring forming unit G700 to rotate around (at the center of) the rod-shaped members G611m, G611n that support the axially supported portions G712ba, G722ba.

By rotating the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720, the left link member G730 and the right link member G740, to which the protrusions G711, G721 of the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 are connected, rotate around the left link shaft support portion G612a and the right link shaft support portion G613a, which are inserted into the through holes G732, G742.

The left link member G730 and the right link member G740 allow the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 to be connected to the base unit G600 at positions away from the rotation axis of the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720. This makes it possible to prevent the positions away from the rotation axis of the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 from swinging in the direction of the rotation axis (arrow F-B direction) when the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 are rotated. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720.

The left circular member G710 and the right circular member G720 (circular ring forming unit G700) are formed so that they can be displaced by the driving force of the drive motor G910 between a retracted position (position shown in Figure 1918(a)) in which the lower end (arrow D direction) of the decorative surface formed in a semicircular ring is open outward from the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and an extended position (position shown in Figure 1918(b)) in which the lower end of the decorative surface formed in a semicircular ring is moved toward the center in the left-right direction and closed (closer than the retracted position).

As described above, the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 are configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the same drive motor G910 (driving source) and are configured to operate in conjunction with each other. Therefore, when the circular ring forming unit G700 is placed in the retracted position, the above-mentioned petal operating device G800 is placed in the retracted position. This makes it easier for the player to see the third pattern display device H81 arranged on the back side of the performance operating unit G1000.

In addition, when the ring forming unit G700 is positioned in the extended position, the left circular ring member G710 and the right circular ring member G720 are positioned to form one ring when viewed from the front, and the petal operation device G800 is positioned in the extended position, with the petal operation device G800 positioned inside the ring formed by the left circular ring member G710 and the right circular ring member G720. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the combined effects of the ring forming unit G700 and the petal operation device G800. As a result, the performance effect can be improved.

Furthermore, when the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 are arranged in the extended position, the left circular ring member G710, the right circular ring member G720 and the petal operating device G800 are arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the third pattern display device H81 (see FIG. 1838) arranged on the back side of the performance operation unit G1000, and a display matching the left circular ring member G710, the right circular ring member G720 and the petal operating device G800 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device H81. This improves the performance effect provided by the third pattern display device H81, the left circular ring member G710, the right circular ring member G720 and the petal operating device H800.

In this embodiment, the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 are displaced by the driving force of the same drive motor G910 (driving source), but the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 may be configured to have two different driving sources. In other words, the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800 may be configured to be displaced separately. In this case, multiple displacement modes of the circular ring forming unit G700 can be formed, thereby improving the presentation effect provided by the circular ring forming unit G700 and the petal operating device G800.

Next, the overall configuration of the petal operation device G800 will be described with reference to Figures 1919 and 1920. Figure 1919 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operation device G800, and Figure 1920 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operation device G800.

As shown in Figures 1919 and 1920, the petal operating device G800 mainly comprises a front side base member G810 arranged on the front side, a rear side base member G820 arranged in a state covering a portion of the rear side of the front side base member G810, a drive motor G830 arranged on the rear side of the front side base member G810 with its shaft inserted from the rear side of the front side base member G810 to the front side, a gear train G841 to G848 connected to the drive motor G830 and to which the driving force of the drive motor G830 is transmitted, a cover member G850 arranged on the front side base member G810 in a state covering a portion of the front side of the front side base member G810, and a flower rotation unit G400 arranged on the front side of the front side base member G810 and to which the driving force is transmitted from the gear train G841 to G848. In this embodiment, the petal operating device G800, except for the drive motor G830, is mainly molded from a resin material that is not transparent to light.

The front base member G810 mainly comprises an annular portion G811 formed in a generally circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and an arm portion G812 protruding radially outward from the annular portion G811, and the annular portion G811 and the arm portion G812 are formed in a box shape with an open rear side (arrow B direction). The box-shaped annular portion G811 and the arm portion G812 with an open rear side are formed so that driven gears G843 to G848 (described later) can be disposed in the space on the rear side, and the distance in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) from the open bottom surface to the release portion (rear side end) is set to be greater than the thickness of the tooth surfaces of the driven gears G843 to G848.

The annular portion G811 is formed with a notched portion G811a engraved on the front side (arrow F direction) along the inner edge formed in a circular ring shape, a plurality of support portions G811b, G811c protruding in a circular shape from the open bottom surface on the rear side (arrow B direction) toward the rear side, and a plurality of fastening portions G811d to G811f protruding in a circular shape toward the rear side similarly to the support portions G811b, G811c.

A collar G813 is inserted into the annular inner portion G811 from the rear side (arrow B direction side), and a detection sensor G814 that detects the rotational position of a driven gear G847 (described later) is disposed on the open bottom surface.

The arm portion G812 is formed with a first through hole G812a penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), a second through hole G812b penetrating in the vicinity of the first through hole G812a with an inner diameter larger than that of the first through hole G812a, a wall portion G812c erected in an annular shape toward the rear side (arrow B direction) along the edge of the second through hole G812b, a number of support portions G812d, G812e protruding in a circular shape toward the rear side from the open bottom surface on the rear side, and a support portion G812f erected in an approximately annular shape on the side formed in a box shape.

The notched portion G811a is a tooth surface that meshes with the rotating gear G421 (see FIG. 1924) of the flower rotation unit G400 described later, and the tooth base extends radially outward from the center of the annular portion G811, and the tooth surface is formed in a ring shape along the inner edge of the annular portion G811, which is formed in a ring shape.

The shaft support parts G811b, G811c, G812d, and G812e are the parts on which the driven gears G846 and G848, which will be described later, are supported, and are formed in positions corresponding to the shaft parts of the driven gears G844 to G846 and G848. In addition, the shaft support parts G811b, G811c, G812d, and G812e have female threads for screw fastening formed at the protruding tips on the rear side (arrow B direction side), and the driven gears G844 to G846 and G848 can be disposed on the front side base member G810 by fastening a screw from the rear side.

The protruding tips of the pivot supports G811b, G812d, and G812e are positioned further back (in the direction of arrow B) than the pivot support G811c, so that when the rear-side base member G820 is disposed on the front-side base member G810, the protruding tip surfaces of the pivot supports G811b, G812d, and G812e can abut against the front surface of the rear-side base member G820. Then, by fastening a screw inserted through the through hole G822 of the rear-side base member G820 from the rear side to the protruding tips of the pivot supports G811b, G812d, and G812e, the driven gears G844 to G846 can be disposed on the front-side base member G810, and the rear-side base member G820 can be disposed (fastened) to the front-side base member G810.

The fastening portions G811d to G811f are used to fasten screws for mounting the rear base member G820 to the front base member G810, and have female threads formed at the tips on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B). Therefore, by fastening screws inserted through the through holes G822 of the rear base member G820 from the rear side of the rear base member G820 to the fastening portions G811d to G811f, the rear base member G820 can be mounted (fastened) to the front base member G810.

In other words, the rear base member G820 is fastened to the front base member G810 not only by the fastening portions G811d to G811f, but also by the shaft support portions G811b, G812d, and G812e for arranging the driven gears G844 to G846 on the front base member G810. Therefore, the number of fastening portions for fastening the rear base member G820 to the front base member G810 can be reduced.

The first through hole G812a is an insertion hole for inserting the drive shaft of the drive motor G830, and is formed with an inner diameter such that the shaft of the drive motor G830 does not come into contact with the inner circumferential surface when the shaft of the drive motor G830 rotates.

The second through hole G812b is a through hole for inserting the connecting portion G843a of the driven gear G843 to connect the driven gear G82 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front side base member G810 to the driven gear G842 arranged on the rear side of the front side base member, and is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting portion G843a of the driven gear G843.

In addition, a wall portion G812c is erected along the second through hole G812b toward the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front side base member G810. This makes it possible to prevent the connecting portion G843a from wobbling relative to the second through hole G812b. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the meshing state of the drive gear G841 and the driven gear G844 that are meshed with the driven gears G842, G843.

The support portion G812f is formed in a circular ring shape and protrudes rightward from the side surface on the right side (direction of arrow R) of the arm portion G812, and a collar G815 is disposed on the outer periphery. This allows the collar G815 to be supported in a rotatable state relative to the support portion G812f.

As described above, the collar G815 has a small diameter portion disposed between the sliding portion G611k of the base unit G600 and the right-side holding member G630, and a large diameter portion disposed outside the portion between the sliding portion G611k and the right-side holding member G630. This allows the collar G815 to slide vertically (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the sliding portion G611k and the right-side holding member G630.

The rear base member G820 is a member that covers the rear sides of the driven gears G843 to G848 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front base member G810, restricting the movement of the driven gears G843 to G848 to the rear side, and is formed in a size that allows it to cover the rear sides of the driven gears G843 to G848.

The rear-side base member G820 is also formed with a recess G821 recessed toward the rear side (arrow B direction) at a position corresponding to the center of the annular portion G811 of the front-side base member G810 in a front view, and with a number of through holes G822 through which screws for mounting the rear-side base member G820 to the front-side base member G810 can be inserted.

The recess G821 is a recess for inserting the rear side (arrow B direction) end (D-shaped cut portion G451a) of the rod member G451 of the flower rotation unit G400 described later, and is formed with an inner shape that is approximately the same as the D-shaped outer shape of the rear side end of the rod member G451.

The drive motor G830 is the drive source for the flower rotation unit G400, which will be described later. As described above, the drive motor G830 is disposed with the drive shaft protruding from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front base member G810 through the first through hole G812a to the front side (arrow F direction).

The drive motor G830 is disposed on the bottom surface of the front base member G810, which is formed in a box shape with an open rear side (arrow B direction side). This makes it possible to reduce the protruding distance of the drive motor G830 toward the rear side, and to prevent the petal operating device G800 (drive motor G830) from partially protruding toward the rear side.

The drive gear G841 is a gear that is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor G840, and is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor G840 on the front side of the front base member G810. The drive gear G841 is also meshed with the driven gear G842, and the rotation of the drive gear G841 can rotate the driven gear G842.

The driven gear G842 is connected to the driven gear G843 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front side base member G810 via the connecting portion G843a that protrudes from the driven gear G843 toward the front side (arrow F direction side) as described above. This allows the driven gear G843 to rotate as the driven gear G842 rotates. The driven gear G843 is also meshed with the driven gears G844 of the driven gears G844 to G848 that mesh with it in sequence.

Therefore, when the driving gear G841 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor G840, the driving force of the driving motor G840 is transmitted to the terminal driven gear G848 via the driven gears G842 to G847.

The terminal driven gear G848 is a gear for detecting the rotational position of the driven gear G847 connected to the petal side transmission member G430 of the flower rotation unit G400 described later, and is provided with a plate-shaped detection target G848a that protrudes radially outward at the end on the rear side. This detection target G848a blocks the detection light of the detection sensor G814 arranged on the front side base member G810, making it possible to detect the rotational position of the driven gear G847.

In addition, the driven gear G847 has a plurality of through holes G847a through which screws can be inserted to fasten the driven gear G847 to the petal side transmission member G430 of the flower rotation unit G400, thereby fastening the driven gear G847 to the flower rotation unit G400 (petal side transmission member G430). Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor G830 can be transmitted to the flower rotation unit G400 as the driven gear G847 rotates. In addition, since the driven gear G847 and the flower rotation unit G400 are fastened to each other, the rotation position of the driven gear G847 can be detected by the detection part G848a of the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814 as described above. Therefore, the rotation position of the flower rotation unit G400 can be detected by the detection sensor G814. A detailed explanation of the flower rotation unit G400 will be given later.

The cover member G850 is a member for making the drive gear G841 and driven gear G842 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front side base member G810 invisible from the front side, and is made of a light-opaque resin material and arranged on the front side of the front side base member G810 in a state where it covers the front side of the drive gear G841 and driven gear G842 when viewed from the front.

Next, the flower rotation unit G400 will be described with reference to Fig. 1921 to Fig. 1923. Fig. 1921(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400, Fig. 1921(b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit G400 along line MCMXXIb in Fig. 1921(a), Fig. 1922 is an exploded front perspective view of the flower rotation unit G400, and Fig. 1923 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flower rotation unit G400. In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, the central rotation axis (with the rod member G451 as the axis (center)) in the front view of the first rotating base G410, the first decorative unit G420, the petal side transmission member G430, the second rotating base G460, and the second decorative unit G480 is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol of axis GO.

The flower rotation unit G400 is configured so that the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 are displaceable, and the flower rotation unit G400 is displaceable due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480. The first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 are configured so that they can vibrate or move, and the flower rotation unit G400 is configured so that the vibration or movement of the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 can vibrate or move.

As shown in Figures 1921 to 1923, the flower rotation unit G400 includes a first rotating base G410 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), a plurality of first decorative units G420 arranged around the first rotating base G410 in a manner surrounding the periphery of the first rotating base G410 in a front view, a petal side transmission member G430 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first rotating base G410, and a positive electrode of the petal side transmission member G430. It is mainly formed with a first fixing unit G450 arranged on the front side, a substrate member G440 arranged on the back side of the first fixing unit G450 and configured to be able to emit light, a second rotating base G460 arranged on the front side of the first fixing unit G450, a second fixing unit G470 arranged on the front side of the second rotating base G460, and a second decorative unit G480 arranged on the front side of the second fixing unit G470.

In addition, the flower rotation unit G400 in the 111th embodiment is mainly formed from a resin material and is formed from a material that is transparent to light, and is configured to allow the light emitted from the substrate member G440 to pass through to the front side (the direction of the arrow F).

In addition, in the flower rotation unit G400 in the 111th embodiment, five first decorative units G420 are arranged around the first rotating base G410, but the number of first decorative units G420 may be a number other than five. Furthermore, the first decorative units G420 do not have to be arranged at equal intervals around the first rotating base G410, and may be arranged at unequal intervals around the first rotating base G410.

The first fixing unit G450 is mainly formed with a rod-shaped rod member G451 whose tip on the rear side (arrow B direction side) is inserted into the recess G821 of the rear side base member G820 and screwed to the rear side base member G820, and a disk-shaped fixing member G452 disposed at the tip on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rod member G451.

The rod member G451 is made of a metal material and is formed into a cylindrical shape having a predetermined length in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The rod member G451 also has a D-shaped cut portion G451a in which a part of the outer periphery is recessed at both ends in the front-rear direction, and the outer edge shape of the upper end is formed into a D shape. The inner edge shapes of the recess G821 of the rear side base member G820 into which the rear side end is inserted and the through hole G452e of the fixing member G452 into which the front side end is inserted are formed into a D shape corresponding to the outer edge shapes of both ends of the rod member G451. This restricts the rod member G451 from rotating relative to the rear side base member G820 and the fixing member G452, and the relative position of the fixing member G452 to the rear side base member G820 is specified (fixed).

The fixing member G452 is formed in a generally circular plate shape when viewed from the front (when viewed in the direction of arrow B), and is formed to have a larger outer shape when viewed from the front than the substrate member G440 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B). The fixing member G452 is also formed entirely from a transparent resin material that is capable of transmitting light. This allows the light of the LED G441 of the substrate member G440 disposed on the rear side to be transmitted and emitted to the outside.

The fixing member G452 mainly comprises a through hole H452e penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at approximately the center when viewed from the front, an accommodation recess G452a recessed toward the front side on one side of the rear side (arrow B direction), a female screw fastening hole G452b formed in the recessed bottom surface of the accommodation recess G452a, three recesses G452c recessed toward the rear side on one side of the front side, and an opening G452d for inserting wiring (not shown) connected to the board member G440.

The accommodating recess G452a is a recess for accommodating the substrate member G440 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the fixing member G452, and is recessed from the rear side toward the front side (arrow F direction side) in a circular shape corresponding to the outer shape of the substrate member G440. The recess depth on the front side of the accommodating recess G452a is set to be greater than the plate thickness of the substrate member G440. As a result, the substrate member G440 is disposed in a state of being accommodated inside the fixing member G452.

The fastening hole G452b is a female thread for fastening a screw for fixing the substrate member G440 to the rear side of the fixing member G452, and the screw inserted through the substrate member G440 is screwed into the fastening hole G452b. This fixes the substrate member G440 to the rear side of the fixing member G452.

The recessed portion G452c is a recess for accommodating the collar G476a of the second fixing unit G470 described below, and has a through hole in the center for inserting a screw. With the collar G476a accommodated in the recessed portion G452c, the screw inserted into the recessed portion G452c from the back side is screwed into the second fixing unit G470, thereby fastening and fixing the fixing member G452 (first fixing unit G450) and the second fixing unit G470.

The collar G476a is a member for holding the second rotating base G460, which is disposed between the first fixed unit G450 (fixed member G452) and the second fixed unit G470, in a rotatable state, and is disposed at three locations at equal intervals along (in contact with) the inner edge of the through hole of the disk portion G461 of the second rotating base G460, which is formed in a disk shape with a through hole formed in the center. This allows the second rotating base G460 to be disposed in a state in which it can rotate relatively around the axis GO with respect to the first fixed unit G450 and the second fixed unit G470.

The substrate member G440 is a substrate on which LEDs (light emitting diodes) G441, which serve as light emitting means, are arranged, with multiple LEDs G441 (13 in this embodiment) distributed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and multiple LEDs G442 (15 in this embodiment) distributed on the back side (arrow B direction side). LEDs G441 are arranged so that they can irradiate light toward the front side and in a direction away from axis GO, and LEDs G442 are arranged so that they can irradiate light toward the back side and in a direction away from axis GO.

In addition, openings G443 are formed in three locations on the substrate member G440 that correspond to the recessed portions G452c of the fixing member G452. This allows screws to be inserted into the recessed portions G452c from the substrate member G440 side (rear side) when the substrate member G440 is disposed in the first fixing unit G450.

Furthermore, the opening G443 can be used to dissipate heat that accumulates in the substrate member G440 by emitting light from the LEDs G441 and G442 (particularly the light emitted from the LED G441 on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) that is disposed opposite the fixing member G50). As a result, damage to the substrate member G440 can be suppressed.

The petal side transmission member G430 mainly comprises a transmission part G431 formed in a substantially circular plate shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) and a support part G432 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the back side (arrow B direction) of the transmission part G431, and is formed entirely from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light. In addition, an insertion part G433 that opens in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the center between the transmission part G431 and the support part G432.

The transmission part G431 has five sliding grooves G431a formed in a curved opening in front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B) in the circumferential direction, and is formed in a circular ring shape with an opening at the center by the inserted part G433. The outer diameter of the circular ring-shaped transmission part G431 in front view is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the disk part G461 of the second rotating base G460 arranged on the front side of the petal side transmission member G430. In other words, the petal side transmission member G430 is set to a size that overlaps with the back side of the second rotating base G460.

The sliding groove G431a is the portion through which the sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420 described later is inserted, and the groove width is formed to be slightly larger than that of the sliding part G425a. The sliding groove G431a is also formed to have a counterclockwise curved shape from the radially inner inner end G431a1 (see FIG. 1927(a)) toward the radially outer outer end G431a2 (see FIG. 1927(a)). This allows the sliding part G425a inserted into the sliding groove G431a to slide as the transmission part G431 (petal side transmission member G430) rotates, thereby displacing the first decorative unit G420.

The sliding groove G431a can push the sliding part G425a inserted into the sliding groove G431a radially outward from the axis GO by the first sliding surface G431a3 on the inner surface of the inner side of the sliding groove G431a, which is curved when viewed from the front, and can push the sliding part G425a inserted into the sliding groove G431a radially inward toward the axis GO by the second sliding surface G431a4 on the inner surface of the outer side of the sliding groove G431a, which is curved when viewed from the front. A detailed explanation of the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 (sliding part G425a) will be given later.

The shaft support portion G432 is a portion that is fastened to the driven gear G847 (see FIG. 1919) that is disposed between the opposing front side base member G810 and the rear side base member G820, and a fastening hole G432a is formed at the end on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B), into which a screw that has passed through the through hole G847a of the driven gear G847 is screwed. This fastens the driven gear G847 to the shaft support portion G432, and allows the petal side transmission member G430 to rotate in conjunction with the rotation of the driven gear G847.

The outer diameter of the annular support portion G432 is smaller than the inner diameter of the collar G813 (see FIG. 1919) of the front base member G810, and the support portion G432 is disposed in a rotatable state relative to the front base member G810.

The insertion portion G433 is a space for passing wiring (not shown) inserted between the opposing front base member G810 and rear base member G820 (see FIG. 1919) of the above-mentioned petal operating device G800 inside the flower rotation unit G400, and is formed penetrating in the front and rear directions (arrows F-B direction). This allows the wiring to be connected to the substrate member G440 arranged between the first rotation base G410, the petal side transmission member G430, and the first fixed unit G450.

The first rotating base G410 mainly comprises a groove forming portion G411 formed in a disk shape on the front side (arrow F direction side), a shaft forming portion G412 protruding in an annular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the groove forming portion G411, and a shaft supported portion G413 formed by penetrating the center of the groove forming portion G411 and the shaft forming portion G412 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). In this embodiment, the groove forming portion G411 and the shaft forming portion G412 of the first rotating base G410 are formed from two different members, with the groove forming portion G411 formed from a resin material that is transmissible to light and the shaft forming portion G412 formed from a resin material that is not transmissive to light.

The groove forming portion G411 mainly comprises a second sliding groove G411a formed by extending radially outward from the axis GO in a front view, and a screw insertion portion G411b formed at a predetermined interval through the outer peripheral portion on the radially outer side in a front view, and is formed into a circular ring shape with an opening at the center by the shaft support portion G413.

The second sliding groove G411a is the portion through which the sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420 described later is inserted, and is formed with a groove width slightly larger than that of the sliding part G425a. The second sliding groove G411a is also formed in a straight line from the radially inner end to the radially outer end. In other words, it is formed with a groove shape different from that of the sliding groove G431a described above. As a result, when the sliding part G425a slides in conjunction with the displacement of the sliding groove G431a, the sliding part G425a can be displaced along the second sliding groove G411a (the sliding part G425a can be displaced along the sliding groove G431a and the second sliding groove G411a).

The screw insertion portion G411b is a through hole for inserting a screw to fasten the first rotating base G410 and the second rotating base G460. The first rotating base G410 and the second rotating base G460 can be fastened by threading a screw inserted into the screw insertion portion G411b from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first rotating base G410 into the screw fastening portion G465 of the second rotating base G460. In other words, the first rotating base G410 and the second rotating base G460 are configured to be rotatable as a single unit.

The shaft forming portion G412 is formed in a circular ring shape with an open center by the shaft support portion G413. The shaft forming portion G412 also has a decorative side shaft portion G412a that protrudes cylindrically radially outward from the outer peripheral surface formed in a circular ring shape.

The decorative side shaft portion G412a is the part that supports the rotating gear G421 of the first decorative unit G420 described below, and five of them (the number of first decorative units G420) are formed at predetermined intervals around the circumference of the shaft forming portion G412, are formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the first supported portion G421a of the rotating gear G421, and have a female thread formed on the protruding tip side for screwing the rotating gear G421.

The supported portion G413 is the portion into which the support portion G432 of the petal side transmission member G430 is inserted, and is formed in a circular ring shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support portion G432. This allows the petal side transmission member G430 to rotate while maintaining its position relative to the first rotating base G410.

The second rotating base G460 is formed mainly by a disk portion G461 formed in a generally circular ring shape when viewed from the front, a front side standing portion G462 standing along the inner peripheral edge of the disk portion G461 toward the front side (arrow F direction), a plurality of teeth G463 engraved on the inner peripheral surface of the front side standing portion G462, a rear side standing portion G464 standing along the outer peripheral edge of the disk portion G461 toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and a screw fastening portion G465 protruding toward the rear side from a portion of the standing tip of the rear side standing portion G464 at multiple points (five points in this embodiment), and the entire base is formed from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light.

The disk portion G461 is formed in a generally disk-like shape in front view, with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the fixing member G452 of the first fixing unit G450. In addition, the erection distance of the rear side erection portion G464 toward the rear side (arrow B direction) is set to be larger than the thickness of the fixing member G452 of the first fixing unit G450 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows the fixing member G452 of the first fixing unit G450 to be disposed inside the space formed by the disk portion G461 and the rear side erection portion G464 of the second rotating base G460 (see FIG. 1920(b)).

The front side standing portion G462 has engagement recesses G462a (see FIG. 1933(a)) recessed into the outer circumferential surface at a predetermined interval along the circumferential direction. The engagement recesses G462a are portions into which the engagement pieces G477b of the second fixing unit G470 described below engage. The engagement recesses G462a are recessed into the outer circumferential surface of the front side standing portion G462 toward the axis GO side, and the recessed surfaces are formed into different shapes on one side and the other side in the circumferential direction. A detailed explanation of the engagement recesses G462a will be given later.

The teeth G463 are meshed with the teeth of the first driven gear G474a and the resistance gear G475b arranged in the second fixed unit G470 described later, and are formed all around the inner periphery of the disk portion G461. This allows the first driven gear G474a and the resistance gear G475b arranged in the second fixed unit G470 to rotate as the second rotating base G460 rotates.

The teeth G463 are recessed into the inner circumferential surface of the front side erected portion G462, and are not formed on the inner circumferential surface of the disk portion G461. By not forming the teeth G463 on the disk portion G461, the inner circumferential surface of the disk portion G461 can be used as a sliding surface, and by arranging the collar G476a along the inner circumferential surface of the disk portion G461, the second rotating base G460 can be rotated relative to the second fixed unit G470.

The rear side standing portion G464 has a light diffusion portion G464a formed in an uneven shape on the outer circumferential surface. As described above, the fixing member G452 of the first fixing unit G450 is disposed inside the space formed by the disk portion G461 of the second rotating base G460 and the rear side standing portion G464, so that the light emitted from the LED G441 of the substrate member G440 disposed on the fixing member G452 can be easily made to enter the first fixing unit G450 via the fixing member G452. In this case, since the light diffusion portion G464a is formed on the rear side standing portion G464, the light of the LED G441 incident on the second rotating base G460 can be diffused radially outward by the light diffusion portion G464a and emitted.

The screw fastening portion G465 is a portion for fastening the screw inserted through the screw insertion portion G411b of the first rotating base G410 as described above, and has a female thread formed at the end on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B). This fastens the first rotating base G410 and the second rotating base G460 together, allowing the first rotating base G410 and the second rotating base G460 to rotate together around the axis GO.

The second fixing unit G470 is mainly formed with a front light diffusion portion G471 formed in a circular ring shape when viewed from the front, and a side light diffusion portion G472 standing from the outer periphery of the front light diffusion portion G471 toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and is entirely formed from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light.

The front light diffusion section G471 is a light diffusion section for diffusing the light of the LED G441 incident from the rear side to the front side and emitting it, and the front side is formed in an uneven shape. The side light diffusion section G472 is a light diffusion section for diffusing the light incident from the radial inside of the side light diffusion section G472 to the radial outside and emitting it, and the outer peripheral surface is formed in an uneven shape. These front light diffusion section G471 and side light diffusion section G472 can diffuse the light of the substrate member G440 to the front side of the flower rotation unit G400 and the periphery of the flower rotation unit G400 when viewed from the front.

The front-side light diffusion section G471 mainly comprises an opening G473 formed in a circular shape in the center (axis GO side) when viewed from the front (when viewed in the direction of arrow B), a gear holding section G474 protruding cylindrically from the rear side (arrow B direction side), three collar holding sections G476 protruding cylindrically from the rear side, and a recess G475 formed by recessing the rear side.

The opening G473 is an opening into which the collar G476a for rotatably holding the second decorative unit G480 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the small diameter portion of the collar G476a. The connecting portion G481 of the second decorative unit G480 is inserted into the collar G476a with a slight gap between the inner peripheral surface of the collar G476a. The tip of the connecting portion G481 inserted into the collar G476a is fastened and fixed to the side of the second driven gear G473b arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the second fixed unit G470. This holds the second decorative unit G480 in a rotatable state relative to the second fixed unit G470.

The gear holding portion G474 is a portion that supports the first driven gear G474a described below, and is formed with an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first driven gear G474a. The first driven gear G474a is meshed with the teeth G463 of the second rotating base G460. Therefore, when the second rotating base G460 is rotated relative to the second fixed unit G470, the first driven gear G474a is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the second rotating base G460.

The first driven gear G474a is meshed with the second driven gear G473b, which is fastened and fixed to the second decorative unit G480, and the second driven gear G473b can rotate with the rotation of the first driven gear G474a. In other words, when the second rotating base G460 is rotated relative to the second fixed unit G470, the second decorative unit G480 is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the second rotating base G460.

The collar holding portion G476 is a protrusion on which a collar G476a for rotatably holding the second rotating base G460 is disposed, and is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar G476a. In addition, the collar G476a is disposed along the inner circumferential surface of the disk portion G461 of the second rotating base G460 (on the inner edge side of the disk portion G461). This allows the second rotating base G460 to be disposed in a rotatable state relative to the second fixed unit G470.

The large diameter portion on the rear side of the collar G476a is accommodated in the recessed portion G452c of the first fixing unit G450. A screw passing through the recessed portion G452c is fastened to the collar holding portion G476 arranged inside the collar G476a. This fastens and fixes the first fixing unit G450 and the second fixing unit G470 together.

The recess G475 is a recess in which a resistance means G475a is disposed to provide resistance to the rotation of the second rotating base G460 in order to prevent the second rotating base G460 from rotating too much relative to the second fixed unit G470, and is recessed to a size corresponding to the resistance means G475a.

In addition, the resistance gear G475b is supported in a rotatable state on the resistance means G475a, and the teeth of the resistance gear G475b are disposed at a position where they mesh with the teeth G463 of the second rotating base G460. Therefore, when the second rotating base G460 rotates relative to the second fixed unit G470, the resistance gear G475b rotates. Since a certain rotational resistance is applied to the resistance gear G475b from the resistance means G475a, when the second rotating base G460 rotates relative to the second fixed unit G470, a certain rotational resistance is applied to the second rotating base G460 from the resistance means G465a. This makes it possible to prevent the second rotating base G460 from continuing to rotate due to its inertia force even after the driving force of the drive motor G830 is cut off. In other words, the rotation of the second rotating base G460 can be stopped by cutting off the driving force of the drive motor G830.

A reverse rotation restriction unit G477 is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the second fixed unit G470. The reverse rotation restriction unit G477 is mainly formed with a rear cover G477a, an engagement piece G477b supported in a rotatable state by the rear cover G477a, and a torsion spring G477c that biases the engagement piece G477b.

The engagement piece G477b is formed in a generally rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a state in which it can abut against the outer circumferential surface of the front side standing portion G462 of the second rotating base G460. The engagement piece G477b can also be engaged with the outer circumferential surface of the second rotating base G460 at a predetermined position, and this engagement restricts the rotation of the second rotating base G460 in a predetermined direction (arrow GL direction (see FIG. 1933)) relative to the second fixed unit. The engagement between the engagement piece G477b and the front side standing portion G462 will be described in detail later.

The second decorative unit G480 is formed in a generally circular shape when viewed from the front, more specifically in a shape resembling a flower, and is entirely made from a resin material that is transmissive to light. In addition, the front side of the second decorative unit G480 is painted with a transmissive paint. Therefore, the second decorative unit G480 is capable of transmitting light incident from the rear side to the front side.

The second decorative unit G480 also has a connecting portion G481 that protrudes from the center of the back side. As described above, the connecting portion G481 is inserted into the collar G476a of the second fixed unit G470 and is fastened to the second driven gear G473b of the second fixed unit G470, and is formed to a size that has a slight gap with the inner surface of the collar G476a. This allows the second decorative unit G480 to rotate relative to the second fixed unit G470 around the connecting portion G481 (centered on axis GO).

In the 111th embodiment, the second decorative unit G480 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, but may be formed in an angular or irregular shape. Furthermore, the second decorative unit G480 is not formed from a resin material that is transparent to light, but may be formed to be non-transparent to light, with light-reflecting decorations on the front side (arrow F direction) and rear side (arrow B direction).

Next, the first decorative unit G420 will be described with reference to FIG. 1924. FIG. 1924(a) is a side view of the first decorative unit G420 as viewed in the MCMXXIV direction of FIG. 1921(a), and FIG. 1924(b) is an exploded front oblique view of the first decorative unit G420.

In the following explanation, the front side of the page will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the page as the rear (rear) side for the first decorative unit G420 in the state shown in Figure 1924 (a). In addition, the top side of the first decorative unit G420 in the state shown in Figure 1924 (a) will be referred to as the upper (top) side, the bottom side as the lower (bottom) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side.

As shown in FIG. 1924, the first decorative unit G420 is formed mainly by a rotating gear G421 on which gear teeth are formed, a first coupling member G422 connected to the rotating gear G421, a displacement unit G426 disposed on the first coupling member G422, a second coupling member G423 disposed between the first coupling member G422 and the displacement unit G426, a transmission member G424 disposed on the second coupling member G423, and a sliding member G425 disposed on the transmission member G424.

The rotating gear G421 is a gear disposed on the decorative side shaft portion G412a of the first rotating base G410 (see FIG. 1922), and is mainly formed with a first supported portion G421a through which the decorative side shaft portion G412a can be inserted, teeth G421b engraved on the outer peripheral surface, and a pair of connecting portions G421c protruding from the side opposite the side into which the decorative side shaft portion G412a is inserted.

The first supported shaft portion G421a is formed as a through hole with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the decorative side shaft portion G412a. The rotating gear G421 is arranged in a rotatable state with respect to the first rotating base G410 around the decorative side shaft portion G412a by inserting the decorative side shaft portion G412a into the first supported shaft portion G421a from the left side (arrow L direction side) shown in FIG. 1924(a) and fastening a screw having a head with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the first supported shaft portion G421a to the tip of the decorative side shaft portion G412a through which the first supported shaft portion G421a has been inserted.

The teeth G421b are teeth that mesh with the notched portion G811a of the front base member G810 (see FIG. 1919) and are formed in a shape that corresponds to the notched portion G811a. The rotating gear G421 is supported on the first rotating base G410 (see FIG. 1921(b)) and the rod member G451 of the first fixing unit G450 (see FIG. 1921(b)) is inserted and fixed into the rear base member G820 (see FIG. 1919) (the flower rotation unit G400 is disposed on the front base member G810 and the rear base member G820), so that the rotating gear G421 meshes with the notched portion G811a.

The engraved portion G811a is formed at a position that overlaps with the rotation trajectory of the rotating gear G421 when the flower rotation unit G400 rotates relative to the front side base member G810. Therefore, the rotating gear G421 rotates relative to the first rotating base G410 around the decorative side shaft portion G412a as an axis as the flower rotation unit G400 rotates relative to the front side base member G810.

The connecting portion G421c is formed in a plate shape, and one surface of the plate shape is formed in a state where it faces the first supported portion G421a. In addition, the pair of connecting portions G421c has a second supported portion G421c1 that penetrates in the opposing direction, and the connecting rod G421d is inserted into the second supported portion G421c1 in a rotatable state.

The connecting rod G421d is a member for connecting the first joint member G422 to the rotary gear G421, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter that can be inserted into the second supported portion G421c1. The connecting portion G421c also includes a third supported portion G421d1 that penetrates radially through the cylindrical axial center portion, and a retaining ring holder G421d2 that is recessed in a groove shape along the circumferential direction at both ends in the axial direction.

The third supported portion G421d1 is a portion through which the connecting rod G422c of the first joint member G422 described below is inserted, and is formed with an outer diameter larger than that of the connecting rod G422c. The connecting rod G422c is inserted into this third supported portion G421d1, thereby connecting the rotating gear G421 and the first joint member G422. As a result, the first joint member G422 rotates as the rotating gear G421 rotates relative to the first rotating base G410.

The retaining ring holder G421d2 is the portion onto which the retaining ring G421e is fitted. When the connecting rod G421d is inserted into the second supported portion G421c1, the retaining ring G421e is fitted onto both ends of the connecting rod G421d, thereby preventing the connecting rod G421d from slipping out of the second supported portion G421c1.

In addition, the connecting rod G421d and the retaining ring G421e in the 111th embodiment are made of a metal material, which prevents the connecting rod G421d from being damaged when it rotates relative to the connecting portion G421c. In addition, the connecting rod G421d in the 111th embodiment is stopped by the retaining ring G421e, but a screw may be fastened to the end of the connecting rod G421d to prevent it from coming out of the second supported portion G421c1.

The first joint member G422 is mainly formed with a first connecting portion G422a formed in a disk shape and a pair of second connecting portions G422b protruding from one side of the first connecting portion G422a.

The first connecting portion G422a is a portion that connects the first joint member G422 and the displacement unit G426, and has a recess G422a1 in the center, which is formed in a disk shape, into which the shaft portion G427 of the displacement unit G426 is inserted.

The recess G422a1 is recessed in a D-shape, the same shape as the end of the shaft portion G427 of the displacement unit G426. The end of the shaft portion G427 of the displacement unit G426 is press-fitted into the recess G422a1. This connects the first joint member G422 and the displacement unit G426, allowing the displacement unit G426 to rotate in conjunction with the rotation of the first joint member G422.

The second connecting portion G422b is formed in a plate shape, and one surface of the plate shape is formed facing each other with a recess G422a1 in between. In addition, the pair of second connecting portions G422b has a shaft support portion G422b1 that penetrates in the opposing direction, and the connecting rod G422c is inserted into the shaft support portion G422b1 in a rotatable state.

The connecting rod G422c is a member that is connected to the connecting rod G421d of the rotating gear G421, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the third supported portion G421d1 of the connecting rod G421d. The connecting rod G422c is connected to the connecting rod G421d of the rotating gear G421 by being inserted into the third supported portion G421d1 as described above. As a result, the first joint member G422 rotates as the rotating gear G421 rotates relative to the first rotating base G410.

The connecting rod G422c also has a retaining ring holder G422c1 that is recessed in the circumferential direction at both ends in the axial direction. The retaining ring holder G422c1 is a portion onto which a retaining ring G422d is fitted, and when the connecting rod G422c is inserted into the supported shaft portion G422b1, the retaining ring G422d is fitted onto both ends of the connecting rod G422c, thereby preventing the connecting rod G422c from slipping out of the supported shaft portion G422b1.

In addition, the connecting rod G422c and the retaining ring G422d in the 111th embodiment are formed from a metal material, which prevents the connecting rod G422c from being damaged when it rotates relative to the supported shaft portion G422b1. In addition, the connecting rod G422c in the 111th embodiment is stopped by the retaining ring G42d, but a screw may be fastened to the end of the connecting rod G422c to prevent it from coming out of the supported shaft portion G422b1.

The sliding member G425 is a member that is connected to the petal side transmission member G430 (see FIG. 1922), and mainly comprises a sliding part G425a that is inserted into the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430, and a shaft support part G425b that is formed through the opposite side (lower side) of the sliding part G425a.

The sliding part G425a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430, and can be inserted into the sliding groove G431a. When the sliding part G425a is inserted into the sliding groove G431a, a first collar G425a1 (see FIG. 1922) is disposed on the base end side, and a second collar G425a2 (see FIG. 1922) is disposed on the tip side inserted into the sliding groove G431a. That is, the sliding part G425a is inserted into the sliding groove G431a with the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the transmission part G431 of the petal side transmission member G430 sandwiched between the first collar G425a1 and the second collar G425a2. This prevents the petal side transmission member G430 from swinging back and forth relative to the sliding part G425a, and reduces the resistance when the sliding part G425a slides along the inside of the sliding groove G431a.

The supported shaft portion G425b is a portion that connects the slidable member G425 and the transmission member G424, and is formed as a through hole with an inner diameter that allows the first connecting rod G424c disposed on the transmission member G424 to be inserted therethrough.

The transmission member G424 is formed from a pair of plate-shaped members and is arranged with one side facing each other. The transmission member G424 is a member that connects the sliding member G425 and the second joint member G423, and includes a first supported portion G424a for connecting the sliding member G425 and the transmission member G424, and a second supported portion G424b for connecting the second joint member G423 and the transmission member G424.

The first supported portion G424a is a through hole through which the first connecting rod G424c is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter that allows the first connecting rod G424c to be inserted, and is penetrated in the opposing direction of the pair of transmission members G424.

The first connecting rod G424c is inserted through the first supported portion G424a of the transmission member G424 and the supported portion G425b of the sliding member G425 with the sliding member G425 (supported portion G425b) sandwiched between a pair of transmission members G424. This connects the sliding member G425 and the transmission member G424.

The first connecting rod G424c also has a retaining ring holder G424c1 that is recessed in the circumferential direction at both axial ends. The retaining ring holder G424c1 is a portion onto which a retaining ring G424d is fitted, and when the first connecting rod G424c is inserted into the first supported portion G424a and the supported portion G425b, the retaining ring G424d is fitted onto both ends of the first connecting rod G424c, thereby preventing the first connecting rod G424c from slipping out of the first supported portion G424a and the supported portion G425b.

The transmission member G424 and the slidable member G425 are rotatably connected to the first connecting rod G424c. Therefore, the position of the transmission member G424 can be changed relative to the slidable member G425 in response to the displacement of the slidable member G425, which will be described later.

The second supported portion G424b is a through hole through which the second connecting rod G424e is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter that allows the second connecting rod G424e to be inserted, and is penetrated in the opposing direction of the pair of transmission members G424.

The second connecting rod G424e is inserted through the second supported portion G424b of the transmission member G424 and the first through hole G423a of the second joint member G423 with the second joint member G423 (first through hole G423a) sandwiched between a pair of transmission members G424. This connects the transmission member G424 and the second joint member G423.

The second connecting rod G424e, like the first connecting rod G424c, has a retaining ring holder G424e1 recessed in the circumferential direction at both axial ends. The retaining ring holder G424e1 is a portion onto which a retaining ring G424f is fitted, and when the second axially supported portion G424b and the first through hole G423a are inserted, the retaining ring G424f is fitted onto both ends of the second connecting rod G424e, preventing the second connecting rod G424e from slipping out of the second axially supported portion G424b and the first through hole G423a.

The transmission member G424 and the second joint member G423 are rotatably connected to the second connecting rod G424e. Therefore, the position of the second joint member G423 can be changed relative to the transmission member G424 in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member G424 (change in position relative to the sliding member G425).

In addition, in this embodiment, the first connecting rod G424c, the second connecting rod G424e, and the retaining rings G424d and G424f are made of a metal material, which prevents the first connecting rod G424c and the second connecting rod G424e from being damaged when they rotate relative to the first supported portion G424a and the second supported portion G424b.

The second joint member G423 is a member for connecting the transmission member G424 and the displacement unit G426, and is formed of a rectangular cube. The second joint member G423 also has a first through hole G423a and a second through hole G423b that penetrate in different directions. The first through hole G423a and the second through hole G423b are formed at positions offset from each other.

The first through hole G423a is a through hole through which the second connecting rod G424e is inserted as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter that allows the second connecting rod G424e to be inserted. The transmission member G424 and the second joint member G423 are connected by inserting the second connecting rod G424e, which has passed through the second supported portion G424b of the transmission member G424, into the first through hole G423a.

The second through hole G423b is a through hole through which the shaft portion G427 of the displacement unit G426 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter that allows the shaft portion G427 to be inserted. By inserting the shaft portion G427 into the second through hole G423b, the transmission member G424 and the displacement unit G426 are connected via the second joint member G423. As a result, when the transmission member G424 is displaced, the displacement unit G426 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member G424.

The displacement unit G426 is formed in a curved plate shape and mainly comprises a first decorative surface G426a on the inside of the curve (arrow L direction side), a second decorative surface G426b on the side opposite the first decorative surface G426a (arrow R direction side), a first end surface G426c connecting the ends of the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b on the front side (arrow F direction side), and a connecting portion G426d formed on the opposite side of the first end surface G426c (arrow B direction side) and connected to the shaft portion G427.

The displacement unit G426 is decorated with highly reflective materials such as gold or silver on the first decorative surface G426a, the second decorative surface G426b, and the first end surface G426c. This allows the light irradiated to the displacement unit G426 to be reflected. A detailed explanation of the light reflection of the displacement unit G426 will be given later.

In addition, the displacement unit G426 in the 111th embodiment is formed in a plate shape that curves along the petal side transmission member G430 (second decorative unit G480) when viewed from the front, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be formed in a flat plate shape or a rod shape (cylindrical shape).In addition, the displacement unit G426 in the 111th embodiment may be formed from a transparent resin material, and may transmit light incident from the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b and emit it from the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b, allowing the player to visually recognize the effects created by the transmitted light.

The connecting portion G426d is a portion for connecting the shaft portion G427 to the displacement unit G426, and is formed to protrude inward in the curved direction of the curved displacement unit G426 (the direction of the arrow L). This allows the first decorative surface G426a, the second decorative surface G426b, and the first end surface G426c to be positioned off the axis of the shaft portion G427. This allows the first decorative surface G426a, the second decorative surface G426b, and the first end surface G426c to be displaced in the front-to-back direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) when the displacement unit G426 is rotated around the shaft portion G427.

The connecting portion G426d is formed with a recess (not shown) for inserting the upper end (the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the shaft portion G427, and the upper end of the shaft portion G427 is pressed into the recess to connect the displacement unit G426 and the shaft portion G427.

Next, the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 will be described with reference to Figures 1925 and 1926. In the following description, the position of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 shown in Figure 1925(a) will be described as the upright position, and the position of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 shown in Figure 1925(c) will be described as the tilt reference position (the position in which the first decorative unit G420 has fallen from the upright position).

First, the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the standing position to the tilt reference position will be described with reference to FIG. 1925. FIG. 1925(a) to FIG. 1925(c) are side views of the first decorative unit G420, and correspond to the side view in the MCMXXIV direction of FIG. 1921(a). Note that FIG. 1925(a) to FIG. 1925(c) sequentially show the transition state in which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 displaces from the standing position to the tilt reference position. Also, in FIG. 1925(a) to FIG. 1925(c), the positions of the inner end G431a1 and the outer end G431a2 of the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430 (see FIG. 1927(a)) are shown by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 1925(a), when the sliding part G425a is arranged at a position where it abuts against the inner end G431a1 of the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is arranged with the first end face G426c facing the player side (front side (arrow F direction side)).

When the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is positioned in the upright position, the first decorative surface G426a of the displacement unit G426 is positioned toward the axis GO side of the flower rotation unit G400, and the flower rotation unit G400 is in a reduced state when viewed from the front (see Figure 1927).

As shown in Figures 1925(b) and 1925(c), when the sliding part G425a (slidable member G425) is moved from the position where it abuts against the inner end G431a1 of the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430 to the outer end G431a2 side (the side in the direction of arrow R), the sliding part G425a (slidable member G425) is displaced, and the transmission member G424 connected to the slidable member G425 is displaced toward the outer end G431a2 side while changing its posture relative to the slidable member G425 around the first connecting rod G424c as an axis.

Then, as the transmission member G424 is displaced, the second joint member G423 connected to the transmission member G424 is displaced. As described above, the shaft portion G427 of the displacement unit G426 is inserted into the second through hole G423b of the second joint member G423, so that the displacement unit G426 is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second joint member G423.

The displacement unit G426 has a shaft portion G427 connected to the first joint member G422, and the first joint member G422 is arranged to be rotatable around the connecting rod G421d as an axis relative to the rotating gear G421. Therefore, when a driving force is transmitted to the displacement unit G426 in conjunction with the displacement of the sliding member G425, the displacement unit G426 is tilted around the connecting rod G421d as an axis.

The tilt of the displacement unit G426 around the connecting rod G421d is restricted by the contact of the sliding part G425a with the outer end G431a2 of the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430. In this embodiment, the displacement unit G426 is rotated about 60 degrees from the upright position to the tilt reference position around the connecting rod G421d, and in the tilt reference position, the first decorative surface G426a is directed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F).

Next, referring to Fig. 1926(a) to Fig. 1926(d), a case will be described in which the displacement unit G426 arranged at the tilt reference position rotates around the shaft portion G427. Fig. 1926(a) to Fig. 1926(d) are side views of the first decorative unit G420 when the displacement unit G426 is arranged at the tilt reference position, and correspond to the side view in the MCMXXVI direction of Fig. 1921(a).

In addition, in Figures 1926(a) to 1926(d), the transition state when the displacement unit G426 arranged at the tilt reference position is rotated around the axis G427 is illustrated in sequence, and the state in which it is rotated 90 degrees in sequence from the state shown in Figure 1926(a) as the tilt reference position is illustrated. Also, in this embodiment, when the displacement unit G426 is rotated around the axis G427, the displacement unit G426 (first decorative unit G420) rotates around the first fixed unit G450 and the second fixed unit G470 (see Figure 1922), but in the explanation here, the illustration shown in Figure 1926(a) is formally a side view, and Figures 1926(b) to 1926(d) are also similarly explained as side views.

As shown in Fig. 1926(a) to Fig. 1926(d), when the rotating gear G421 rotates from the position where the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the upright position to the tilted reference position (the position shown in Fig. 1926(a)), the first coupling member G422 connected to the rotating gear G421 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating gear G421. Since the shaft portion G427 (see Fig. 1924(b)) of the displacement unit G426 is connected to the recess G422a1 of the first coupling member G422, the rotation of the first coupling member G422 causes the displacement unit G426 to rotate about the shaft portion G427.

This allows the displacement unit G426 to rotate from a position (tilt reference position) in which the first decorative surface G426a faces the front side (the direction of arrow F) to a position in which the second decorative surface G426b faces the front side (referred to as the "tilt half-rotation position" in the following explanation). In other words, the display surface of the displacement unit G426 that is visible to the player can be changed. As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

The first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b are formed at a position offset from the axis of the shaft portion G427. Therefore, when the displacement unit G426 is rotated around the shaft portion G427, the position of the decorative surfaces (the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b) in the front-to-rear direction can be displaced.

To explain in more detail, in the tilted standard position shown in Figure 1926 (a), the first decorative surface G426a is seen by the player as being located behind the extension line of the axis of the shaft portion G427 (in the direction of arrow B), and in the tilted half-rotation position shown in Figure 1926 (c), the second decorative surface G426b is seen by the player as being located ahead of the extension line of the axis of the shaft portion G427 (in the direction of arrow F). This allows the displacement of the displacement unit G426 to be imparted with forward and backward movement, thereby increasing the player's interest.

After the displacement unit G426 rotates approximately 270 degrees from the position shown in FIG. 1926(a) to the position shown in FIG. 1926(d), the rotation of the rotating gear G421 continues, causing the displacement unit G426 to rotate to the rotation reference position shown in FIG. 1926(a). In other words, the rotation of the rotating gear G421 causes the displacement unit G426 to continue to rotate about the shaft portion G427.

Next, with reference to Figures 1927 and 1928, the transmission of the driving force of the driving means when displacing the displacement unit G426 from the upright position to the tilt reference position will be described.

Figure 1927(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400, and Figure 1927(b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit G400 taken along line MCMXXVIIb in Figure 1927(a). Figure 1928(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400, and Figure 1928(b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit G400 taken along line MCMXXVIIIb in Figure 1928(a).

In addition, in Fig. 1927 and Fig. 1928, in order to facilitate understanding, the components arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the substrate member G440 of the flower rotation unit G400 (substrate member G440, first fixing unit G450, second rotating base G460, second fixing unit G470, second decorative unit G480 (see Fig. 1922) are omitted. Also, in Fig. 1927 (a) and Fig. 1928 (a), the second sliding groove G411a on the back side of the petal side transmission member G430 is shown by a dashed line. Furthermore, in Fig. 1927 and Fig. 1928, the clockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis GO is shown with the symbol of the arrow GR, and the counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis GO is shown with the symbol of the arrow GL.

First, as described above, the petal side transmission member G430 has its shaft support G432 (see FIG. 1922) fastened to the driven gear G847 (see FIG. 1919) disposed between the front side base member G810 (see FIG. 1919) and the rear side base member G820 (see FIG. 1919). Therefore, when the driven gear G847 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor G830 via the driven gears G842-G846, the petal side transmission member G430 is rotated.

The sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420 is inserted into the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430, so that when the petal side transmission member G430 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (in the direction of the arrow GR), as shown in Figures 1927(a) and 1928(a), the sliding part G425a is pushed radially outward of the axis GO along the first sliding surface G431a3 of the sliding groove G431a.

In this case, the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the petal side transmission member G430 is inserted into the second sliding groove G411a of the first rotating base G410 in the sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420, so that when the sliding part G425a is pushed out by the first sliding surface G431a3 of the sliding groove G431a, the sliding part G425a is moved radially outward of the axis GO along the second sliding groove G411a. As a result, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 1925(a) to 1925(c), the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is displaced from the upright position to the tilted reference position.

When the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the upright position to the tilt reference position, the sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420 is displaced along the second sliding groove G411a of the first rotating base G410. Therefore, the displacement unit G426 can be displaced to the tilt reference position around the connecting rod G421d as an axis without displacing the first decorative unit G420 in the circumferential direction (arrow GR direction or arrow GL direction) around the axis GO when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

In addition, as shown in Figures 1927 and 1928, in this embodiment, the displacement unit G426 is arranged to be rotatable around the connecting rod G421d of the game board H13 (see Figure 1910) as an axis, and by displacing it between the upright position and the tilted reference position, the posture of the displacement unit G426 when viewed from the front can be changed, so that the outer shape when viewed from the front can be made smaller in the upright position and larger in the tilted position.

This eliminates the need to hide the displacement unit G426 behind another component (e.g., the second decorative unit G480) in order to reduce the external shape of the flower rotation unit G400 when viewed from the front, so the external shape size of the displacement unit G426 can be changed regardless of the external shape size of the component that hides the displacement unit G426 when viewed from the front.

To explain in more detail, in the flower rotation unit G400 (first decorative unit G420 and second decorative unit G480), an enlarged state is formed in which the second decorative unit H480 is extended outside the first decorative unit G420 making both the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 visible, and a reduced state is formed in which the second decorative unit G480 is brought closer to the first decorative unit G420 making the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 invisible, thereby creating an effect that changes the overall visual size of the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480.

However, in this case, if the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is slid toward the back side of the second decorative unit G480 (in the direction of arrow B) to form a reduced state in which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is invisible to the second decorative unit G480, while the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is slid toward the outside of the second decorative unit G480 to form an enlarged state in which a specified area of the first decorative unit G420 is visible, then since the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is positioned on the back side of the second decorative unit G480, the outer shape of the first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) when viewed from the front needs to be smaller than the outer shape of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front (as this depends on the size of the outer shape of the second decorative unit G480), and there is a problem that it is difficult to enlarge the outer shape of the displacement unit G426.

In other words, if the external shape of the second decorative unit G480 is increased when viewed from the front, the space available for arranging other components is reduced accordingly. In other words, as the external shape of the second decorative unit G480 is increased in size, the external shape of the entire flower rotation unit G400 when viewed from the front becomes larger, making it more likely to interfere with other components.

On the other hand, if the size of the first decorative unit G420 is reduced when viewed from the front, the area that can be blocked will be smaller, and the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 will become smaller, so it will not be possible to increase the size of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 when it is viewed together with the second decorative unit G480 (in an enlarged state).

In contrast, in this embodiment, when reducing the external shape of the flower rotation unit G400 when viewed from the front, the posture of the displacement unit G426 can be changed to reduce the external shape of the displacement unit G426 when viewed from the front.

In other words, by displacing the first decorative unit G420, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 can be configured to face outward when viewed from the front of the second decorative unit G480 (when positioned in an upright position), and to face the front side (in the direction of arrow F) (when positioned in a tilted reference position).This allows the size of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 when viewed together with the second decorative unit G480 to be increased while still providing space for arranging other components.

Specifically, the size (external dimensions) of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front can be reduced, which allows more space to be secured for arranging other means (components). In addition, when the other means (components) are displaced relatively, the other components are less likely to interfere with the second decorative unit G480 (first decorative unit G420), improving the freedom of presentation when displacing the other components relatively.

On the other hand, even if the size of the second decorative unit G480 in a front view is reduced, the size of the second decorative unit G480 in a front view does not depend on the size of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420, so the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 can be made larger. Therefore, the size of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 when viewed together with the second decorative unit G480 can be increased.

In other words, the space in which the reels of the pachinko machine H10 are arranged is relatively spacious in the front-to-back direction (the direction connecting the front and back) compared to the up-down and left-right directions, and by utilizing this space in the front-to-back direction to lengthen the second decorative unit G480 in the front-to-back direction, the size of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front can be reduced and the size of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 can be increased. This allows the size of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 when viewed together with the second decorative unit G480 to be increased while still providing space for arranging other means (components). Also, the reduced state can be made small and the enlarged state can be made large, making the visual change in size when viewed from the front between the reduced state and the enlarged state even greater.

In addition, when the displacement unit G426 is in the upright position, the first decorative surface G426a is positioned facing the axis GO (see FIG. 1921(b)), and when in the tilted reference position, the first decorative surface G426a is positioned facing the front side (the direction of the arrow F). As described above, the first decorative surface G426a is decorated with a light-reflecting decoration, so that the light reflection direction can be changed between when the displacement unit G426 is in the upright position and when in the tilted reference position.

To explain in more detail, when the displacement unit G426 is positioned in an upright position and light emitted from the first fixed unit G450, the second rotating base G460, or the substrate member G440 via the second rotating base G460 is irradiated onto the first decorative surface G426a, the first decorative surface G426a is directed toward the second decorative unit G480 (axis GO side) when viewed from the front, so the light is reflected toward the second decorative unit G480. This makes it possible to increase the amount of light emitted toward the front side (arrow F direction) via the second decorative unit G480. As a result, it becomes easier to draw attention to the second decorative unit G480.

On the other hand, when the displacement unit G426 is positioned at the tilt reference position and light emitted from the first fixed unit G450, the second rotating base G460, or the base member G440 via the second rotating base G460 is irradiated onto the first decorative surface G426a, the first decorative surface G426a is directed toward the front side, so the light is reflected toward the player. This makes it easier to draw attention to the first decorative unit G420.

That is, the second decorative means is provided with a substrate member G440 arranged on the rear side of the second decorative unit G480 and configured to be capable of emitting light, and the second decorative means is made of a light-transmitting material, and the first decorative surface G426a of the displacement unit G426 is configured to be capable of reflecting light. Therefore, when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is in a state (enlarged state) facing the front side (arrow F direction side), the light emitted from the substrate member G440 and reflected by the first decorative surface G426a of the displacement unit G426 is Not only can the player see it, but when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is facing outward (axis GO side) when viewed from the front of the second decorative unit G480, the light emitted from the base member G4440 and reflected by the displacement unit G426 is made to enter the second decorative unit G480 from its back side (arrow B direction side), allowing the player to see the light that passes through the second decorative unit G480 (light emitted from the front side of the second decorative unit G480). This changes the way the light is seen, improving the presentation effect.

In addition, in a device in which the first decorative unit G420 is slid and displaced toward the rear side of the second decorative unit G480, even if light is emitted from the substrate member G440 in the reduced state and reflected by the displacement unit G426, the reflected light is blocked by the substrate member G440 and cannot enter the second decorative unit G480. In this embodiment, however, the light reflected by the displacement unit G426 can be made to wrap around the second decorative unit G480 and substrate member G440 from the outside when viewed from the front, and can be made to enter the rear side (arrow B direction) of the second decorative unit G480 without being blocked by the substrate member G440.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 1927 and 1928, the rotation axis (connecting rod G421d) of the displacement unit G426 when displacing from the upright position to the tilted reference position is positioned in a position overlapping the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the petal side transmission member G430. Therefore, the rotation axis (connecting rod G421d) of the first decorative unit G420 can be made difficult to see from the player's side. This allows the player to understand the mechanism of the first decorative unit G420, preventing a decrease in the player's interest when displacing the first decorative unit G420.

Next, with reference to Figures 1929 to 1932, the transmission of the driving force of the driving means when rotating the displacement unit G426 from the tilt reference position around the shaft portion G427 will be described.

Figure 1929(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400, Figure 1929(b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXIXb in Figure 1929(a), and Figure 1929(c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXIXc in Figure 1929(a). Figure 1930(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400, Figure 1930(b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXXb in Figure 1930(a), and Figure 1930(c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXXc in Figure 1930(a). FIG. 1931(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400, FIG. 1931(b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXXIb in FIG. 1931(a), and FIG. 1931(c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXXIc in FIG. 1931(a). FIG. 1932(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400, FIG. 1932(b) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXXIIb in FIG. 1932(a), and FIG. 1932(c) is a side view of the flower rotation unit G400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMXXXIIc in FIG. 1932(a).

Note that Figures 1929 to 1932 sequentially show the state in which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420, which is placed at the tilt reference position, is rotated 90 degrees from the tilt reference position around the axis G427. Also, in order to make it easier to understand, Figures 1929 to 1932 omit the illustration of the components (substrate member G440, first fixing unit G450, second rotating base G460, second fixing unit G470, second decorative unit G480 (see Figure 1922)) that are arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the substrate member G440 of the flower rotation unit G400.

As described above, the displacement unit G426 displaces from the upright position to the tilted reference position, and the driving force of the drive motor G830 is transmitted to rotate the petal side transmission member G430, pushing the sliding part G425a of the slidable member G425 to the first sliding surface G431a3. This displacement displaces the sliding part G425a to a position where it abuts against the outer end G431a2 of the sliding groove G431a.

From this state, as shown in Figures 1929 and 1930, when the driving force of the drive motor G830 is continued to be transmitted and the petal side transmission member G430 is rotated clockwise (arrow GR direction) as viewed from the front around the axis GO, the sliding part G425a abutting the outer end G431a2 is displaced in the rotation direction (arrow GR direction) of the petal side transmission member G430 around the axis GO as the petal side transmission member G430 rotates. In other words, the petal side transmission member G430, the first decorative unit G420, and even the first rotating base G410 are rotated together clockwise as viewed from the front around the axis GO relative to the front side base member G810 and the rear side base member G820.

The teeth G421b of the rotating gear G421 of the first decorative unit G420 are engaged with the notched portion G811a of the front side base member G810, so that when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated around the axis GO relative to the front side base member G810 (front side base member G810), the rotating gear G421 of the first decorative unit G420 rotates around the decorative side shaft portion G412a (see Figure 1928 (b)).

As described above, when the rotating gear G421 of the first decorative unit G420 rotates around the decorative side shaft portion G412a, the first joint member G422 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating gear G421, and the displacement unit G426 connected to the first joint member G422 via the shaft portion G427 rotates around the shaft portion G427. That is, the first decorative unit G420 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front around the axis GO, and the displacement unit G426 is rotated around the shaft portion G427.

This not only displaces the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 from an upright position to a tilted reference position, thereby expanding the visible area of the flower rotation unit G400 when viewed from the front, but also allows the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 to be displaced in a complex manner within the expanded visible area (rotating clockwise when viewed from the front around the axis GO, and rotating the displacement unit G426 around the axis G427).

In this case, simply displacing the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 from the upright position to the tilted reference position and then rotating the first decorative unit G420 around the axis GO (orbiting (revolving) around the second decorative unit G480) would result in a monotonous relative displacement between the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480, and would not be able to produce a sufficient presentation effect.

In contrast, in the flower rotation unit G400 of the 111th embodiment, the first decorative unit G420 can be rotated around the axis GO, and the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 can be rotated around the axis G427. In other words, the first decorative unit G420 is configured to be able to rotate (spin) around the axis G427 when orbiting (revolving) around the second decorative unit G480 (rotating around the axis GO), so that the relative displacement between the two can be prevented from becoming monotonous, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b of the displacement unit G426 are decorated to reflect light, so when the displacement unit G426 is rotated around the shaft portion G427, the direction of the light reflected by the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b can be changed. As a result, it is easier for the player to notice the displacement of the first decorative unit G420, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In other words, the first decorative unit G420 has a first decorative surface G426a and a second decorative surface G426b located on either side of the center of rotation when rotating (spinning) around the shaft portion G427, and the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b are configured in different configurations, so that when the first decorative unit G420 orbits (revolves) around the second decorative unit G480, the different decorative surfaces of the first decorative unit G420 (the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b) can be made to appear alternately. This can, for example, increase the change in the visible outer shape and the mode of reflected light, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, since the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b of the displacement unit G426 are formed in a curved shape, the light reflection pattern of the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b can be made different. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the effects created by the reflected light of the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b in different patterns. As a result, it is possible to easily draw the player's attention to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the 111th embodiment, the case where the displacement unit G426 rotates (spins) around an axis (the axis of the shaft portion G427) extending in a direction away from the axis GO has been described, but the displacement unit G426 may also rotate (spin) around an axis extending parallel to the axis GO. In this case, by limiting the area where light is irradiated to the first decorative surface G426a to a portion, the area where light is irradiated onto the first decorative surface G426a can be changed by rotating (spinning) the displacement unit G426, and the reflection pattern of the reflected light reflected by the first decorative surface G426a can be changed.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the petal side transmission member G430 is set to rotate approximately 18 degrees around the axis GO, causing the first decorative unit G420 to rotate approximately 90 degrees around the axis G427. In other words, the petal side transmission member G430 is set to rotate approximately 72 degrees around the axis GO, causing the first decorative unit G420 to rotate once around the axis G427.

Furthermore, the first decorative units G420 are arranged at equal intervals around the axis GO of the petal side transmission member G430 (first rotating base G410). That is, they are arranged at intervals of approximately 72 degrees from adjacent first decorative units G420. As described above, the first decorative unit G420 is set so that the first decorative unit G420 rotates once when the petal side transmission member G430 rotates approximately 72 degrees around the axis GO, so that the position at which the displacement unit G426 is positioned at the tilt reference position when viewed from the front can be made the same (that is, the position at which the first decorative surface G426a of the displacement unit G426 is visible to the player, and the position at which the second decorative surface G426b of the displacement unit G426 is visible to the player can be made the same).

In this case, the arm portion G812 of the front side base member G810 is disposed at a position overlapping the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the position where the displacement unit G426 is the tilt reference position. In other words, the arm portion G812 is disposed on the rear side of the position where the width in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) is narrowed. This makes it possible to position the arm portion G812 closer to the front side of the flower rotation unit G400 while suppressing interference between the arm portion G812 and the displacement unit G426. As a result, it is possible to suppress the petal operating device G800 from becoming larger in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction).

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the upright position to the tilt reference position and the displacement when the displacement unit G426 rotates from the tilt reference position around the axis G427 are performed by the driving force of the same drive motor G830, so the number of drive means (drive motors G830) can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the size of the petal operating device G800 can be prevented from increasing.

Furthermore, the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the upright position to the tilt reference position and the displacement when the displacement unit G426 rotates from the tilt reference position around the axis G427 are performed at different times (i.e., after the displacement unit G426 displaces from the upright position to the tilt reference position, the displacement unit G426 rotates around the axis G427), so it is possible to prevent the timing of each drive from overlapping, which can cause instability in the transmission of the drive force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from becoming unstable.

In the 111th embodiment, the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the standing position to the tilt reference position and the displacement when the displacement unit G426 rotates from the tilt reference position around the axis G427 are performed by the driving force of the same drive motor G830. However, this is not limited to the above, and the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the standing position to the tilt reference position and the displacement when the displacement unit G426 rotates from the tilt reference position around the axis G427 may be configured to be displaced by the driving force of different drive means.

In this case, it is possible to simultaneously apply the driving force of the driving means to the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the upright position to the tilt reference position, and to the displacement when the displacement unit G426 rotates from the tilt reference position around the axis G427, so that the displacement unit G426 can start to rotate around the axis G427 while being displaced from the upright position to the tilt reference position. As a result, the first decorative unit G420 can be made to undergo complex displacements, improving the presentation effect due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420.

Next, the rotation of the second decorative unit G480 will be described with reference to Figs. 1933 to 1935. Figs. 1933(a) and 1933(b) and Figs. 1934(a) and 1934(b) are front views of the flower rotation unit G400, and Figs. 1935(a) to 1935(d) are rear views of the driven gears G846 to G848 and the detection sensor G814.

In addition, Figures 1933(a) to 1934(b) sequentially show the transitional states in which the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 rotate around the axis GO, Figure 1935(a) shows the state in which the driven gears G846 to G848 have rotated to a position corresponding to Figure 1933(a), Figure 1935(b) shows the state in which the driven gears G846 to G848 have rotated to a position corresponding to Figure 1933(b), Figure 1935(c) shows the state in which the driven gears G846 to G848 have rotated to a position corresponding to Figure 1934(a), and Figure 1935(d) shows the state in which the driven gears G846 to G848 have rotated to a position corresponding to Figure 1934(b).

In addition, in Figures 1933(a) to 1934(b), the entire second decorative unit G480 is shown transparently with only the outline illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the front light diffusion portion G471 and the side light diffusion portion G472 of the second fixing unit G470 are shown transparently. Furthermore, in Figures 1933(a) to 1934(b), a specific location of the second decorative unit G480 is illustrated as a virtual point GA.

As described above, when the first decorative unit G420 rotates from the tilt reference position around the axis GO in a clockwise direction (arrow GR direction) as viewed from the front due to rotation of the petal side transmission member G430, the second rotating base G460 connected to the first rotating base G410 rotates together with the first rotating base G410 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front around the axis GO.

The first driven gear G474a is engaged with the teeth G463 of the second rotating base G460, and the rotation of the second rotating base G460 rotates the first driven gear G474a, which in turn rotates the second driven gear G473b that is engaged with the first driven gear G474a. This causes the second decorative unit G480 that is fastened to the second driven gear G473b to rotate.

In this case, an odd number (one in this embodiment) of first driven gears G474a are arranged between the second driven gear G473b and the teeth G463 of the second rotating base G460, so that when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated from the tilt reference position around the axis GO in a clockwise direction (arrow R direction) as viewed from the front, the second decorative unit G480 is rotated around the axis GO in a counterclockwise direction (arrow L direction) as viewed from the front. In other words, the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 are rotated in opposite directions as viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the first decorative unit G420 rotates (revolves) around the axis GO, the player can visually see the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420 relative to the second decorative unit G480. This makes it seem as if the second decorative unit G480 is rotating at a faster speed than it actually is, thereby improving the presentation effect of the rotation of the first decorative unit G420.

That is, since the speed of rotation of the first decorative unit G420 and the speed of rotation of the second decorative unit G480 are different, the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420 and the rotation (rotation) of the second decorative unit G480 can be associated, enhancing the presentation effect. For example, when the second decorative unit G480 rotates (rotates) in the same direction as the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420, the speed of rotation of the first decorative unit G420 can be made slower than the speed of rotation of the second decorative unit G480, giving the player the illusion that the first decorative unit G420 is rotating in the opposite direction to the first decorative unit G420. Also, for example, when the second decorative unit G480 rotates (spins) in the opposite direction to the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420, the speed of rotation of the first decorative unit G420 can be made faster than the speed of rotation of the second decorative unit G480, making it easier for the player to be misled about the speed of the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420 (making the apparent speed faster), making it easier for the player to focus on the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420.

In this embodiment, the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 are described as rotating in opposite directions when viewed from the front, but the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 may also be rotated in the same direction when viewed from the front. That is, an even number (e.g., two) of first driven gears G474a may be arranged between the second driven gear G473b and the teeth G463 of the second rotating base G460, and the second decorative unit G480 may be rotated clockwise (in the direction of arrow R) when viewed from the front about the axis GO.

In this case, by allowing the player to visually recognize the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 relative to the second decorative unit G480, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative unit G420 is rotating at a slower speed than it actually is. This makes it easier to draw attention to other effects (for example, effects displayed by the third pattern display device H81) rather than the flower rotation unit G400.

In other words, the second decorative unit G480 has a connecting part G481 that is configured to be rotatable in the same direction as the rotation of the first decorative unit G420 or in the opposite direction, and is configured to be rotatable (spinning) around the axis GO, so that the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420 and the rotation (spinning) of the second decorative unit G480 can be linked, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. For example, when the second decorative unit G480 rotates (spins) in the same direction as the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420, the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420 and the rotation (revolution) of the second decorative unit G480 can be seen as one, making it easier for the player to focus on the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420. On the other hand, when the second decorative unit G480 rotates (spins) in the opposite direction to the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420, the player is given the illusion of a faster speed of the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420 (making the apparent speed faster) by the amount of the rotation (revolution) of the second decorative unit G480, making it easier for the player to focus on the rotation (revolution) of the first decorative unit G420.

In addition, the gear ratio of the first driven gear G473a is set to approximately 2 times that of the second driven gear G473b. Therefore, as shown in Figures 1933(a) and 1933(b), when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated approximately 18 degrees clockwise (arrow R direction) as viewed from the front around the axis GO from the tilt reference position, the second decorative unit G480 is rotated approximately 36 degrees counterclockwise (arrow L direction) as viewed from the front around the axis GO (see virtual point GA in Figure 1933).

In other words, the amount of rotation of the second decorative unit G480 around the axis GO is set to be larger than the amount of rotation of the first decorative unit G420 around the axis GO. Therefore, even when the first decorative unit G420 undergoes a complex displacement (rotating clockwise when viewed from the front around the axis GO, and rotating the displacement unit G426 around the axis G427), the player can be made to recognize that the second decorative unit G480 is rotating. As a result, the player can be drawn to the entire first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480, improving the presentation effect due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the amount of rotation of the second decorative unit G480 around the axis GO is set to be larger than the amount of rotation of the first decorative unit G420 around the axis GO, but the amount of rotation of the second decorative unit G480 around the axis GO may also be set to be smaller than the amount of rotation of the first decorative unit G420 around the axis GO.

In other words, the gear ratio of the first driven gear G473a to the second driven gear G473b may be set to half, so that when the first decorative unit G420 rotates approximately 18 degrees around the axis GO, the second decorative unit G480 rotates approximately 9 degrees around the axis GO. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the rotation of the second decorative unit G480, so that it is easier for the player to notice the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 relative to the second decorative unit G480. As a result, it is easier to focus the player's gaze on one part.

Next, with reference to Figures 1933 to 1935, a case will be described in which the first decorative unit G420 is rotated clockwise (in the direction of the arrow GR) when viewed from the front about the axis GO from the tilt reference position (the displacement unit G426 is rotated around the axis G427) and then rotated counterclockwise (in the direction of the arrow GL) when viewed from the front about the axis GO, thereby displacing the displacement unit G426 to the tilt reference position (the position shown in Figure 1933 (a)).

As shown in Figures 1933(a) and 1933(b), when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the tilt reference position around the shaft portion G427, the second rotating base G460 rotates with the engaging piece G477b abutting against the outer peripheral surface of the front side standing portion G462, and the engaging piece G477b comes out from the inside of the engaging recess G462a of the second rotating base G460, and the engaging piece G477b is positioned between the engaging recesses G462a formed at multiple locations at a predetermined interval on the front side standing portion G462.

To return the first decorative unit G420 from the state shown in FIG. 1933(b) to the tilt reference position shown in FIG. 1933(a), the drive direction of the drive motor G830 is reversed to rotate the petal side transmission member G430 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (arrow GL direction). As a result, the sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420 inserted into the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430 is pushed out to the second sliding surface G431a4 of the sliding groove G431a, and the first rotating base G410 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Therefore, the first decorative unit G420 is displaced in accordance with the rotation of the first rotating base G410 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the rotating gear G421 of the first decorative unit G420 is rotated, so that the displacement unit G426 can be rotated around the shaft part G427 in the direction returning it to the tilt reference position.

In this case, when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is rotated to the tilt reference position, the second rotating base G460 also rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front in accordance with the rotation of the first rotating base G410 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (arrow GL direction), and the engagement recess G462a of the front side standing part G462 is displaced to a position corresponding to the engagement piece G477b, and the engagement recess G462a and the engagement piece G477b are engaged. That is, the engagement piece G477b and the engagement recess G462a are formed in a shape that does not engage (does not get caught) when the second rotating base G460 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, and are formed in a shape that engages (gets caught) when the second rotating base G460 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front. This restricts the rotation of the second rotating base G460 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (arrow GL direction) around the axis GO from the tilt reference position. Therefore, the rotation of the first rotating base G410, which is connected to the second rotating base G460, is also restricted.

In addition, if the drive motor G830 continues to drive in the same direction after the first decorative unit G420 has been rotated to the tilt reference position (the petal side transmission member G430 continues to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow GL)), the rotation of the first rotating base G410 is restricted, and the sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420 is pushed out onto the second sliding surface G431a4 of the sliding groove G431a, and is displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position.

To explain in more detail, by restricting the rotation of the first rotating base G410, the petal side transmission member G430 is displaced relative to the first rotating base G410. As a result, the sliding part G425a of the first decorative unit G420 inserted into the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430 is abutted against the second sliding surface G431a4 in conjunction with the displacement of the sliding groove G431a (rotation of the petal side transmission member G430), and the sliding part G425a is slid from the outer end G431a2 to the inner end G431a1. As a result, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position.

That is, the first decorative unit G420 is configured to be displaceable in the direction approaching and moving away from the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480, and the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 in the direction approaching the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 is configured to be performed when the rotation position in the rotation (rotation) about the axis part G427 of the first decorative unit G420 is at a predetermined rotation position (tilt reference position). This allows the first decorative unit G420 to always be brought close to the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 in the same posture, and prevents the first decorative unit G420 from interfering with (contacting) the outer side of the second decorative unit G480. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the outer shape of the first decorative unit G420, and allows the first decorative unit G420 to be brought closer to the outer side of the second decorative unit G480.

In this embodiment, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 can be returned to the upright position by rotating the first decorative unit G420 counterclockwise (arrow GL direction) as viewed from the front to a predetermined position (position where the engagement piece G477b and the engagement recess G462a engage), regardless of the number of rotations of the first decorative unit G420 clockwise (arrow GR direction) around the axis GO. This allows the area of the flower rotation unit G400 in a front view to be expanded to create a performance due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420, and then the area of the flower rotation unit G400 in a front view to be reduced at a timing shorter than the performance time. As a result, the performance effect due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the arrangement interval of the first decorative unit G420 around the axis GO and the formation interval of the engagement recess G462a around the axis GO are set to be approximately the same. This allows the position at which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 begins to displace to the standing position after the first decorative unit G420 is rotated clockwise (in the direction of the arrow GR) when viewed from the front around the axis GO to be set to the same position. Therefore, the external shape of the flower rotation unit G400 when the displacement unit G426 is placed in the standing position can be made the same, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

That is, when the first decorative unit G420 is displaced most in the direction closest to the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480, the rotational position of the first decorative unit G420 in the revolution is configured to be a predetermined rotational position, so that when the first decorative unit G420 is closest to the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480, the rotational position of the first decorative unit G420 can always be the same rotational position. As a result, in a configuration in which the first decorative unit G420 revolves around the second decorative unit G480, the first decorative unit G420 can always be closest to the outer side of the second decorative unit G480 at the same rotational position, and the first decorative unit G420 can always be displaced in a direction away from the outer side of the second decorative unit G480 starting from the same rotational position. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, we will explain the case where the drive direction of the drive motor G830 is reversed and the first decorative unit G420 is returned from the position shown in Figures 1934(a) and 1934(b) to the tilt reference position shown in Figure 1933(a).

When the second rotating base G460 is rotated counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow GL) when viewed from the front from the position shown in Figure 1934 (a) and Figure 1934 (b), the first decorative unit G420 shown in Figure 1934 (a) is in a tilted half-rotated position, and the engagement piece G477b engages with the inside of the engagement recess G462a of the front side standing portion G462. In other words, it is not possible to return the first decorative unit G420 to the tilt reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 1935(c) and 1935(d), when the petal side transmission member G430 is rotated to the position shown in Figs. 1934(a) and 1934(b), the detection sensor G814 is overlapped with the detection portion G848a of the driven gear G848. This detection restricts the input of a driving force from the drive motor G830 that rotates the second rotating base G460 counterclockwise (in the direction of the arrow GL) when viewed from the front from the position shown in Figs. 1934(a) and 1934(b).

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is restricted from rotating from the position shown in Figures 1934 (a) and 1934 (b) to the tilt reference position. Therefore, when the displacement unit G426 is in the upright position, the flower rotation unit G400 can be in the same state. As a result, the presentation effect due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 1935(a), even in the tilt reference position shown in FIG. 1933(a), the detection sensor G848a of the driven gear G848 is configured to overlap with the detection sensor G814. This prevents the displacement unit G426 from being returned to the upright position in the tilted half-rotation position when the engagement position between the engagement recess G462a of the front side standing portion G462 and the engagement piece G477b shifts from the position where the displacement unit G426 is positioned in the tilt reference position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1935(b), when the displacement unit G426 is rotated slightly around the shaft portion G427 from the tilt reference position shown in FIG. 1933(b), the detection sensor G814 is configured not to overlap the detection portion G848a of the driven gear G848. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the upright position to the tilt reference position, the displacement unit G426 is rotated at least around the shaft portion G427 before being displaced to the upright position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1936, we will explain how to displace the first decorative unit G420 from the tilted reference position to the upright position. FIG. 1936(a) to FIG. 1936(c) are schematic diagrams of the flower rotation unit G400 viewed from the front.

In addition, Figure 1936(a) shows a schematic diagram of the first decorative unit G420 positioned at the tilt reference position, Figure 1936(b) shows a schematic diagram of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 in a position midway from the tilt reference position to the standing position, and Figure 1936(c) shows a schematic diagram of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 positioned at the standing position. Also, in Figures 1936(a) to 1936(c), the second decorative unit G480 is shown in a transparent view, and the outer shape of the second decorative unit G480 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 1936(a), in this embodiment, multiple (five) first decorative units G420 are arranged around the base portion of the flower rotation unit G400 (first rotating base G410, petal side transmission member G430, base member G440, first fixed unit G450, second rotating base G460, second fixed unit G470) with the spacing between adjacent displacement units G426 reduced when the displacement unit G426 is placed at the tilt reference position. This makes it possible to enlarge the entire flower rotation unit G400 when viewed from the front, making it easier to draw attention to the presentation of the flower rotation unit G400, when the first decorative unit G420 is placed at the tilt reference position.

However, when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is placed in the upright position, the first decorative unit G420 is rotated around the connecting rod G421d as an axis to change its posture relative to the base portion of the flower rotation unit G400 (i.e., the length (size) of one side of the displacement unit G426 in the circumferential direction relative to the axis GO is not changed, and the first decorative unit G420 is moved closer to the axis GO). Therefore, when the displacement unit G426 is displaced to the upright position, the distance between adjacent displacement units G426 becomes smaller. Therefore, when placed in the upright position, there is a risk that adjacent displacement units G426 will collide with each other, making it impossible to displace the displacement unit G426 to the upright position.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 1936 (b) and 1936 (c), when the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position, the end of the first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) on the arrow GL direction side is displaced toward the axis GO ahead of the end of the first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) on the arrow GR direction side.

In other words, the first decorative unit G420 is configured so that when the first decorative surface G426a of the displacement unit G426 changes from facing the front side (arrow F direction) to facing the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front, one side of the first decorative unit G420 arrives closer to the outer side of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front than the other side.

As a result, when in the upright state as shown in FIG. 1936(c), the end of the first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) on the arrow GL direction side can be arranged overlapping with the end of the adjacent first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) on the arrow GR direction side radially inward from the axis GO. As a result, when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position, it is possible to prevent adjacent displacement units G426 from colliding with each other, making it impossible to displace the displacement unit G426 to the upright position.

In addition, by configuring one side of the first decorative unit G420 to arrive further outward than the other side when viewed from the front of the second decorative unit G480, the first decorative units G420 arranged in multiple on the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front, when the displacement unit G426 faces the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front, one side of one of the adjacent first decorative means overlaps the other side radially outward from the axis GO, so that the space required for arranging the first decorative units G420 in the reduced state can be reduced. In other words, the size of the first decorative unit G420 can be increased. On the other hand, when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 faces the front side (expanded state), the gap between adjacent first decorative units G420 can be reduced.

In addition, when in the upright state as shown in FIG. 1936 (c), the ends of all first decorative units G420 (displacement units G426) in the direction of the arrow GL can be positioned inside the ends of the adjacent first decorative units G420 (displacement units G426) in the direction of the arrow GR, and the radial overlap of the outer ends of the first decorative units G420 (displacement units G426) does not differ for each first decorative unit G420 (displacement units G426), thereby improving the appearance of the flower rotation unit G400 when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, when the first decorative unit G420 is placed in the upright position as shown in FIG. 1936 (c), a portion of the second decorative unit G480 is overlapped on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end of the first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) in the arrow GL direction.

In other words, the second decorative unit G480 is configured to overlap at least a portion of the overlapping portion between one side of one of the adjacent first decorative units G420 and the other side of the other when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 faces the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front. This makes it difficult for the player to see the overlapping portion between the first decorative units G420 in the reduced state. This increases the sense of surprise when transitioning from a state in which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 faces the outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 when viewed from the front (reduced state) to a state in which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 faces the front side (expanded state).

In the 111th embodiment, the second decorative unit G480 is formed from a transparent resin material that can transmit light, so that the first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the second decorative unit G480 can be seen. However, the second decorative unit G480 in the 111th embodiment is formed from a colored (red) transparent resin material, which makes it difficult for the player to see the first decorative unit G420 overlapping the back side of the second decorative unit G480.

In addition, in the 111th embodiment, the second decorative unit G480 is set to a size that overlaps with the front side of the end of the first decorative unit G420 (displacement unit G426) in the upright position in the direction of the arrow GL, but the second decorative unit G480 may be set to a size that overlaps with the entire first decorative unit G420 in the upright position, and further, the second decorative unit G480 may be set to a size that overlaps with the entire first decorative unit G420 in the tilted position (expanded state), allowing the player to visually recognize the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 through the second decorative unit G480.

Next, the flower rotation unit G2400 in the 112th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1937 and 1938. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which multiple first decorative units G420 (displacement units G426) are displaced simultaneously, but in the 112th embodiment, multiple first decorative units G420 (displacement units G426) are displaced at different times. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the petal side transmission member G2430 of the flower rotation unit G2400 will be described with reference to FIG. 1937. FIG. 1937 is a schematic diagram showing the flower rotation unit G2400 in the 112th embodiment as viewed from the front.

The flower rotation unit G2400 in the 112th embodiment includes a first rotating base G410 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), a plurality of first decorative units G420 (six in the 112th embodiment) arranged around the first rotating base G410 in a manner surrounding the periphery of the first rotating base G410 in a front view, a petal side transmission member G2430 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first rotating base G410, and a petal side It is mainly formed with a first fixing unit G450 arranged on the front side of the transmission member G430, a base member G440 arranged on the back side of the first fixing unit G450, a second rotating base G460 arranged on the front side of the first fixing unit G450, a second fixing unit G470 arranged on the front side of the second rotating base G460, and a second decorative unit G480 arranged on the front side of the second fixing unit G470.

In addition, in FIG. 1937, the base member G440, the first fixing unit G450, the second rotating base G460, the second fixing unit G470, and the second decorative unit G480, which are arranged on the front side of the petal side transmission member G2430, are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 1937, the petal side transmission member G2430 in the 112th embodiment mainly comprises a transmission part G2431 formed in a substantially circular plate shape when viewed from the front (when viewed in the direction of arrow B) and a support part G432 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the back side (arrow B direction) of the transmission part G2431, and is formed entirely from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light. In addition, an insertion part G433 that opens in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the center between the transmission part G431 and the support part G432.

The transmission part G2431 has a first sliding groove G2434 and a second sliding groove G2435 that are formed with a curved opening when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B) and are alternately formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction centered on the axis GO.

The outer diameter of the transmission part G2431 in a front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the disk part G461 of the second rotating base G460 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the petal side transmission member G430, as in the 111th embodiment. In other words, the petal side transmission member G430 is set to a size that overlaps with the back side (arrow B direction side) of the second rotating base G460.

The first sliding groove G2434 and the second sliding groove G2435 are the portions through which the sliding member G425 (sliding portion G425a) of the first decorative unit G420 is inserted, and the groove width is formed slightly larger than that of the sliding portion G425a.

When viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B), the first sliding groove G2434 is curved counterclockwise from the inner end G2434a1 on the radial inside of the transmission part G2431 to the outer end G2434a2 on the radial outside.

On the other hand, the second sliding groove G2435, when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B), has a non-displacement portion G2435a extending in the circumferential direction centered on the axis GO, and a displacement portion G2435b formed in a counterclockwise curved shape as it extends radially outward from one end of the non-displacement portion G2435a.

The angle formed about the axis GO from the inner end G2435a1 of the non-displacement portion G2435a on the opposite side to the side to which the displacement portion G2435b of the second sliding groove G2435 is connected to the outer end G2435b2 on the radially outer side of the displacement portion G2435b is set to be approximately the same as the angle formed about the axis GO from the inner end G2434a1 to the outer end G2434a2 of the first sliding groove G2434. That is, the circumferential movement distance about the axis GO of the sliding member G425 (sliding portion G425a) inserted into the first sliding groove G2434 and the circumferential movement distance about the axis GO of the sliding member G425 (sliding portion G425a) inserted into the second sliding groove G2435 are set to be approximately the same.

Furthermore, the inner end G2435a1 of the second sliding groove G2435 and the inner end G2434a1 of the first sliding groove G2434 are set to have the same distance from the axis GO when viewed from the front, and the outer end G2435b2 of the second sliding groove G2435 and the outer end G2434a2 of the first sliding groove G2434 are set to have the same distance from the axis GO when viewed from the front. That is, the radial movement distance of the sliding member G425 (sliding part G425a) inserted into the first sliding groove G2434 and the radial movement distance of the sliding member G425 (sliding part G425a) inserted into the second sliding groove G2435 are set to be approximately the same.

Next, referring to FIG. 1938, the displacement of the displacement unit G426 in the flower rotation unit G2400 in the 112th embodiment from the standing position to the tilt reference position and from the tilt reference position to the standing position will be described.

Figures 1938(a) to 1938(c) are schematic diagrams of the flower rotation unit G2400 viewed from the front. Note that Figures 1938(a) to 18351(c) sequentially illustrate the transition states in which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is displaced from the upright position to the tilted reference position.

First, referring to FIG. 1938, the displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the upright position to the tilt reference position will be described. When the displacement unit G426 is arranged in the upright position, as shown in FIG. 1937(a), the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 on the side connected to the first sliding groove G2434 is arranged overlapping radially outward from the axis GO with respect to the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 on the side connected to the second sliding groove G2435.

The displacement of the displacement unit G426 from the upright position to the tilt reference position is performed in the same manner as in the 111th embodiment, by rotating the petal side transmission member G2430 clockwise (in the direction of the arrow GR) when viewed from the front by the driving force of the drive motor G830 (see FIG. 1919), and displacing (sliding) the slidable member G425 (sliding part G425a radially outward around the axis GO as the first sliding groove G2434 and the second sliding groove G2435 move.

As shown in Figures 1938(a) and 1938(b), when the displacement unit G426 starts to be displaced from the upright position to the tilt reference position, the slidable member G425 (sliding part G425a) inserted into the first sliding groove G2434 is separated from the inner end G2434a1 of the first sliding groove G2434 as the petal side transmission member G2430 rotates, and comes into contact with the first sliding surface G2434a3 on the inner side of the curved first sliding groove G2434, and is pushed outward in the radial direction around the axis GO. As a result, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the first sliding groove G2434 starts to tilt from the upright position toward the tilt reference position.

On the other hand, the sliding member G425 (sliding part G425a) inserted into the second sliding groove G2435 is separated from the inner end G2435a1 of the second sliding groove G2435 as the petal side transmission member G2430 rotates. In this case, since the non-displacement part G2435a of the second sliding groove G2435 is formed in a curved shape centered on the axis GO, the sliding member G425 (sliding part G425a) sliding within the non-displacement part G2435a does not change its relative position with respect to the first rotating base G410. Therefore, the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2435 does not start tilting from the upright position toward the tilting reference position when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the first sliding groove G2434 starts to tilt from the upright position toward the tilting reference position.

The displacement of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2435 from the upright position to the tilted reference position begins when the slidable member G425 (sliding part G425a) is displaced to a position beyond the connection part between the non-displacement part G2435a and the displacement part G2435b of the second sliding groove G2435.

That is, as described above, the displacement portion G2435b is formed into a counterclockwise curved shape as it moves radially outward, so that when the slidable member G425 (sliding portion G425a) is displaced to the displacement portion G2435b, the slidable member G425 (sliding portion G425a) comes into contact with the first sliding surface G2435b3 of the displacement portion G2435b. As a result, the slidable member G425 (sliding portion G425a) is pushed radially outward about the axis GO, and begins to tilt from the upright position toward the tilt reference position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1938(c), a case where the first decorative unit G420 is displaced to the tilt reference position will be described. As described above, the outer end G2435b2 of the second sliding groove G2435 and the outer end G2434a2 of the first sliding groove G2434 are set to have the same distance from the axis GO when viewed from the front, so that when the first decorative unit G420 is displaced to the tilt reference position, the tilt angles of adjacent first decorative units G420 toward the rear side (arrow B direction) can be made the same.

In other words, when the first decorative unit G420 is placed in the tilt reference position, the appearance of each first decorative unit G420 when viewed from the front can be made the same. As a result, the presentation effect due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 can be improved.

Next, the case where the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 in the 112th embodiment is displaced from the tilt reference position to the standing position will be described. Note that when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 in the 112th embodiment is displaced from the tilt reference position to the standing position, this is done by reversing the drive direction of the drive motor G830 and rotating the petal side transmission member G2430 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (in the direction of the arrow GL), as in the 111th embodiment.

In the 112th embodiment, as described above, the formation angle of the second sliding groove G2435 from the inner end G2435a1 to the outer end G2435b2 of the second sliding groove G2435 about the axis GO is set to be the same as the formation angle of the first sliding groove G2434 from the inner end G2434a1 to the outer end G2435b2 of the first sliding groove G2434 about the axis GO, and the inner end G Since the radial distance from the inner end G2435a1 to the outer end G2435b2 about the axis GO is set to be the same as the radial distance from the inner end G2434a1 to the outer end G2434a2 of the first sliding groove G2434 about the axis GO, the curvature of the displacement portion G2435b of the second sliding groove G2435 in a front view is formed to be greater than the curvature of the first sliding groove G2434 in a front view.

As a result, in the 112th embodiment, when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 starts to be displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position, the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2345 can be displaced to the upright position at an earlier timing than the first decorative unit G420 connected to the first sliding groove G2434. In other words, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2435 is displaced to the upright position by displacing the slidable member G425 (sliding part G425a) up to the connection part between the displacement part G2435b and the non-displacement part G2435a of the second sliding groove G2435.

As shown in Figures 1938(b) and 1938(a), the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2435 in which the slidable member G425 (sliding portion G425a) has been displaced up to the connection portion between the displacement portion G2435b and the non-displacement portion G2435a of the second sliding groove G2435 slides inside the non-displacement portion G2435a and is displaced up to the inner end portion G2435a1 of the non-displacement portion G2435a as the petal side transmission member G2430 continues to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (in the direction of the arrow GL).

When the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2435 slides inside the non-displacement portion G2435a and is displaced to the inner end G2435a1 of the non-displacement portion G2435a, the first decorative unit G420 connected to the first sliding groove G2434 is displaced to the inner end G2434a1 of the first sliding groove G2434. As a result, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the first sliding groove G2434 overlaps and abuts on the radially outer side centered on the axis GO of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2435 (the state shown in FIG. 1938(a)).

As described above, in the 112th embodiment, the displacement units G426 of the adjacent first decorative units G420 are displaced to the standing position at different times. That is, when the displacement unit G426 changes from a state in which it faces the front side to a state in which it faces the front-view outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480, the displacement of one of the adjacent first decorative units G420 is started before the displacement of the other, so that it is possible to prevent the adjacent first decorative units G420 from interfering with each other while avoiding displacing the first decorative unit G420 along a complex trajectory. For example, it is not necessary for one side of the first decorative unit G420 to arrive at the front-view outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 before the other side, and it is possible for one side and the other side of the first decorative unit G420 to arrive at the front-view outer side (axis GO side) of the second decorative unit G480 at the same time.

Therefore, in the 112th embodiment, when displacing the displacement unit G426 from the tilt reference position to the standing position, there is no need to advance one circumferential side (arrow GL direction side) of the displacement unit G426 compared to the other side (arrow GR direction side) as in the first decorative unit G420 in the 111th embodiment, so the first decorative surface G426a of the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 in the tilt reference position can be positioned parallel to the front of the game board H13. As a result, in the flower rotation unit G2400 in the 112th embodiment, the presentation effect of the flower rotation unit G2400 can be improved when the first decorative unit G420 is positioned in the tilt reference position.

In addition, in the flower rotation unit G2400 in the 112th embodiment, the sliding groove into which the sliding portion G425a is inserted is of two types, the first sliding groove G2434 and the second sliding groove G2435, which prevents adjacent first decorative units G420 from colliding with each other. This eliminates the need to form sliding grooves of different shapes for the number of first decorative units G420 installed, which prevents the shape of the petal side transmission member G2430 from becoming complicated and the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 from becoming complicated. As a result, the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 can be stably performed.

In the flower rotation unit G2400 in the 112th embodiment, the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the second sliding groove G2435 is displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position in advance of the first decorative unit G420 connected to the first sliding groove G2434, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, in the displacement portion G2435b of the second sliding groove G2435, the curvature of the second sliding surface G2345b4 in a front view may be made larger than the curvature of the first sliding surface G2434a3 of the first sliding groove G2434 in a front view, so that the displacement of the displacement unit G426 pushed by the second sliding surface G2435b4 and displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position is slower than the displacement of the displacement unit G426 pushed by the second sliding surface G2434a4 and displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position.

In this case, the first sliding surface G2435b3 when displacing from the upright position to the tilted reference position can be made to have the same shape as the first sliding surface G2434a3, so when displacing the displacement unit G426 from the upright position to the tilted reference position, the displacement timing of the displacement unit G426 can be made the same for the first sliding groove G2434 and the second sliding groove G2435. As a result, the presentation effect due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G420 can be improved.

In other words, the first decorative unit G420 is configured so that when the displacement unit G426 changes from a state in which it faces outward (axis GO side) when viewed from the front of the second decorative unit G480 (reduced state) to a state in which it faces the front side (expanded state), the displacement of one of the adjacent first decorative units G420 and the displacement of the other are initiated simultaneously, so that the manner in which the first decorative unit G420 is displaced when it changes from an expanded state to a reduced state and when it changes from a reduced state to an expanded state can be made different. This can improve the presentation effect achieved by displacing the first decorative unit G420.

Next, referring to FIG. 1939, the flower rotation unit G3400 in the 113th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated half a turn around the shaft portion G427, the engagement piece G477b is placed in a state in which it can engage with the next engagement recess G462a. However, in the 113th embodiment, when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated once around the shaft portion G427, the engagement piece G477b is placed in a state in which it can engage with the next engagement recess G3462a. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1939, the second rotating base G3460 of the flower rotation unit G3400 in the 113th embodiment will be described. FIG. 1939(a) and FIG. 1939(b) are front views of the flower rotation unit G3400 in the 113th embodiment. Note that FIG. 1939(a) illustrates the state in which the first decorative unit G420 is positioned in the tilted reference position, and FIG. 1939(b) illustrates the state in which the first decorative unit G420 is positioned in the tilted half-rotation position.

The flower rotation unit G3400 in the 113th embodiment is composed of a first rotation base G410 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), a plurality of first decorative units G420 (four in the 113th embodiment) arranged around the first rotation base G410 in a manner surrounding the periphery of the first rotation base G410 in a front view, a petal side transmission member G430 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first rotation base G410, and a petal side transmission member G430 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first rotation base G410. It is mainly formed with a first fixing unit G450 arranged on the front side of the reach member G430, a base member G440 arranged on the back side of the first fixing unit G450, a second rotating base G3460 arranged on the front side of the first fixing unit G450, a second fixing unit G470 arranged on the front side of the second rotating base G3460, and a second decorative unit G480 arranged on the front side of the second fixing unit G470.

In FIG. 1939, the second fixed unit G470 and the second decorative unit G480, which are arranged on the front side of the second rotating base G3460, are omitted from the illustration. Also, in the 113th embodiment, the number of first decorative units G420 arranged is different (fewer) compared to the flower rotating unit G400 in the 111th embodiment, and the number of decorative side shaft parts G412a of the first rotating base G410 to which the first decorative units G420 are connected and the sliding grooves G431a of the petal side transmission member G430 are different (fewer), but since the only difference is the number of these parts formed, in the following explanation, the first decorative units G420 and the petal side transmission members G430 in the 113th embodiment will be described using the same symbols as in the 111th embodiment.

The second rotating base G3460 in the 113th embodiment is formed mainly by a disk portion G461 formed in a generally annular shape when viewed from the front, a front side standing portion G3462 standing along the inner peripheral edge of the disk portion G461 toward the front side (arrow F direction), a plurality of teeth G463 engraved on the inner peripheral surfaces of the front side standing portion G3462 and the disk portion G461, a back side standing portion G464 standing along the outer peripheral edge of the disk portion G461 toward the back side (arrow B direction), and a screw fastening portion G465 protruding toward the back side from a portion of the standing tip of the back side standing portion G464 at a plurality of points, and the entire base is formed from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light.

The front side erected portion G3462 has four engagement recesses G462a recessed into the outer circumferential surface at a predetermined interval (i.e., four locations at 90 degree intervals) along the circumferential direction. The engagement recesses G462a are portions into which the engagement pieces G477b of the second fixing unit G470 engage, and are recessed from the outer circumferential surface side toward the inside in the radial direction, with the recessed surfaces being formed in different shapes on one side and the other side in the circumferential direction.

In addition, in the 113th embodiment, as shown in Figures 1939(a) and 1939(b), when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated approximately 45 degrees clockwise (in the direction of the arrow GR) when viewed from the front around the axis GO from the tilt reference position, the first decorative unit G420 is rotated around the axis portion G427 as an axis and displaced to a tilted half-rotation position (i.e., a position in which the second decorative surface G426b of the displacement unit G426 faces the front side (in the direction of the arrow F)).

The second rotating base G3460 is fastened to the first rotating base G410, similar to the second rotating base G460 in the 111th embodiment, so that when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated around the axis GO, it is rotated around the axis GO in the same manner as the first decorative unit G420 in conjunction with the rotation of the first decorative unit G420.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1939(b), when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated from the tilt reference position to the tilt half-rotation position, the second rotating base G3460 is rotated approximately 45 degrees, so that the engaging piece G477b of the second fixing unit G470 is positioned at the middle position of the engaging recess G462a recessed into the front side standing portion G3462 at intervals of approximately 90 degrees around the axis GO.

As a result, in the 113th embodiment, even if the drive direction of the drive motor G830 is reversed when the first decorative unit G420 is rotated clockwise (in the direction of the arrow GR) around the axis GO to the tilted half-rotation position, the engagement piece G477b will not engage with the engagement recess G462a at the tilted half-rotation position as in the 111th embodiment, so the first decorative unit G420 can be rotated counterclockwise (in the direction of the arrow GL) around the axis GO until it returns to the tilted reference position by rotating the axis G427 around the tilted reference position.

Therefore, in the 113th embodiment, the displacement unit G426 can be prevented from rotating around the connecting rod G421d as an axis in the tilted half-rotation position (i.e., with the second decorative surface G426b of the displacement unit G426 facing the front side (arrow F direction)), and from being displaced toward the upright position.

As a result, in the 113th embodiment, when the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is raised from a tilted state, the raised state can be made the same. That is, as in the flower rotation unit G400 in the 111th embodiment, there is no need to detect the rotational position of the first decorative unit G420 using the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814 to prevent the displacement unit G426 from being displaced to an upright position with the second decorative surface G426b facing the front side, so in the 113th embodiment, the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814 can be dispensed with.

Furthermore, since control based on detection by the detection sensor G814 is not necessary, not only can manufacturing costs be reduced by eliminating the need for the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814, but control of the flower rotation unit G400 can be simplified. As a result, it is easier to stabilize the displacement of the flower rotation unit G400.

Next, referring to FIG. 1940, the flower rotation unit G400 in the 114th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814 are provided was described, but in the 114th embodiment, the case where the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814 are removed will be described. Note that in the 114th embodiment, the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814 are simply removed from the petal operating device G800 in the 111th embodiment, so the same reference numerals as in the 111th embodiment are used and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1940(a) is a front view of the flower rotation unit G400 in the 114th embodiment, and Figure 1940(b) is a cross-sectional view of the flower rotation unit G400 along line MCMXLb in Figure 1940(a). As described above, the driven gear G848 and detection sensor G814 in the 111th embodiment are for detecting the rotational position of the first decorative unit G420 around the shaft portion G427, and this detection prevents the second decorative surface G426b from being displaced to an upright position facing the front side in the 111th embodiment.

In the 114th embodiment, as described above, the driven gear G848 and the detection sensor G814 are removed, so that the displacement unit G426 can be displaced to the upright position with the second decorative surface G426b of the displacement unit G426 facing the front side (the direction of the arrow F) (i.e., the displacement unit G426 is positioned in the tilted half-rotation position) as shown in Figure 1940 (a) and Figure 18353 (b). Note that the drive for displacing the displacement unit G426 from the tilted half-rotation position to the upright position is the same as the drive for displacing the displacement unit G426 from the tilted reference position to the upright position, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 1940 (a) and Figure 18353 (b), when the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the tilted half-rotation position to the upright position, the second decorative surface G426b is positioned in an orientation facing the axis GO.

Here, the displacement unit G426 is formed in a plate shape that curves around the first decorative surface G426a, so that when the second decorative surface G426b is positioned facing the axis GO, both ends of the displacement unit G426 in the circumferential direction around the axis GO are curved in a direction that moves away from the axis GO radially outward.

Therefore, the appearance when viewed from the front can be changed when displaced from the tilted reference position to the upright position. As a result, in the 114th embodiment, multiple arrangement patterns of the first decorative unit G420 in the upright position can be formed, improving the presentation effect of the first decorative unit G420.

In addition, the first decorative surface G426a, the second decorative surface G426b, and the first end surface G426c of the displacement unit G426 are decorated with highly reflective materials such as gold or silver, so that the direction in which light is reflected by the displacement unit G426 can be changed between the state in which the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the tilt reference position to the standing position and the state in which the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the tilt half-rotation position to the standing position.

To explain in more detail, when the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the tilt reference position to the upright position, the first decorative surface G426a of the displacement unit G426 is arranged in a curved manner in the circumferential direction centered on the axis GO, so that the light emitted from the substrate member G440 and irradiated to the displacement unit G426 via the first fixing unit G450 and the second fixing unit G470 can be reflected toward the axis GO side. As a result, the amount of light emitted to the front side via the second decorative unit G480 can be increased, making it easier to draw attention to the flower rotation unit G400 even when the flower rotation unit G400 is in a reduced state (when the displacement unit G426 is arranged in the upright position).

On the other hand, when the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the tilted half-rotation position to the upright position, both circumferential ends of the second decorative surface G426b in the front view are arranged in a curved manner in a direction away from the axis GO in the radial direction, so that the light emitted from the substrate member G440 and irradiated to the displacement unit G426 via the first fixing unit G450 and the second fixing unit G470 can be reflected toward the outside of the flower rotation unit G400. This allows the light emitted from the substrate member G440 of the flower rotation unit G400 to be irradiated to other members arranged outside the flower rotation unit G400. For example, the light emitted from the substrate member G440 of the flower rotation unit G400 can be irradiated to the circular ring forming unit G700 (see FIG. 1913) arranged in a manner surrounding the flower rotation unit G400 at the protruding position. As a result, the performance effect of the flower rotation unit G400 (circular ring forming unit G700) other than the flower rotation unit G400 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 1941, the flower rotation unit G5400 in the 115th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 is displaced from the tilt reference position to the standing position, but in the 115th embodiment, a case will be described in which the displacement unit G5426 of the first decorative unit G5420 can be displaced to the standing position from any position. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1941(a) and 1941(b) are front views of the flower rotation unit G5400 in the 115th embodiment. Note that Figure 1941(a) illustrates the flower rotation unit G5400 in a state in which the displacement unit G5426 is displaced to an upright position, and Figure 1941(b) illustrates the flower rotation unit G5400 in a state in which the displacement unit G5426 is displaced to a tilted position.

As shown in FIG. 1941, the flower rotation unit G5400 in the 115th embodiment is mainly formed with a first rotating base G410 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), a plurality of first decorative units G5420 arranged around the first rotating base G410 in a manner surrounding the periphery of the first rotating base G410 in a front view, a petal side transmission member G430 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first rotating base G410, a first fixing unit G450 arranged on the front side of the petal side transmission member G430, a substrate member G440 arranged on the back side of the first fixing unit G450, a second rotating base G5460 arranged on the front side of the first fixing unit G450, a second fixing unit G470 arranged on the front side of the second rotating base G460, and a second decorative unit G480 arranged on the front side of the second fixing unit G470.

The first decorative unit G5420 is formed mainly by a rotating gear G421 on which gear teeth are formed, a first coupling member G422 connected to the rotating gear G421, a displacement unit G5426 disposed on the first coupling member G422, a second coupling member G423 disposed between the first coupling member G422 and the displacement unit G426, a transmission member G424 disposed on the second coupling member G423, and a sliding member G425 disposed on the transmission member G424.

The displacement unit G5426 is formed into a hexagonal column shape, and the shaft portion G427 is connected to the center of one end of the column shape. In addition, different characters are decorated on each of the six sides of the outer periphery of the displacement unit G5426 formed into a hexagonal column shape. The different characters represent the expectation of a jackpot, for example, "Chance," "Super Hot," "Maybe...," "50% Expectation," etc. In addition to characters, different pictures or colors may be used to decorate each of the six sides.

The second rotating base G5460 is formed mainly by a disk portion G461 formed in a generally annular shape when viewed from the front, a front side standing portion G5462 standing along the inner peripheral edge of the disk portion G461 toward the front side (arrow F direction), a plurality of teeth G463 engraved on the inner peripheral surfaces of the front side standing portion G5462 and the disk portion G461, a rear side standing portion G464 standing along the outer peripheral edge of the disk portion G461 toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and screw fastening portions G465 protruding toward the rear side from a portion of the standing tip of the rear side standing portion G464 at multiple points, and the entire base is formed from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light.

The front side erected portion G5462 has an engagement recess G462a formed continuously along the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential surface. The engagement recess G462a is a portion with which the engagement piece G477b of the second fixing unit G470 engages, and is recessed radially inward from the outer circumferential surface side, with the recessed surface being formed in a different shape on one side and the other side in the circumferential direction.

Next, we will explain the case where the first decorative unit G5420 rotates clockwise (in the direction of the arrow GR) when viewed from the front, around the axis GO. Note that the drive by which the displacement unit G5426 of the first decorative unit G5420 in the 115th embodiment is displaced from the upright position to the tilted position is the same as the drive by which the displacement unit G426 of the first decorative unit G420 in the 111th embodiment is displaced from the upright position to the tilted reference position, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the first decorative unit G5420 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front around the axis GO, similar to the first decorative unit G420 in the 111th embodiment, the rotating gear G421 of the first decorative unit G5420 meshes with the engraved portion G811a of the front side base member G810, causing it to rotate around the axis portion G427. In other words, the decoration on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement unit G5426, which is formed in the shape of a hexagonal column, is displaced while switching.

On the other hand, when the drive direction of the drive motor G830 is switched in the opposite direction to displace the displacement unit G5426 of the first decorative unit G5420 from the tilted position to the upright position, the engagement recess G462a is continuously formed in the front side upright portion G5462, thereby restricting rotation in the left direction as viewed from the front (in the direction of the arrow GL) around the axis GO of the second rotating base G5460. This allows the displacement unit G5426 to be displaced from the tilted position to the upright position at the position where the drive direction of the drive motor G830 is switched in the opposite direction.

Therefore, in the 115th embodiment, the displacement unit G5426 can be displaced to the standing position while the decorations on the outer peripheral surfaces of each of the displacement units G5426 are switched to a specified outer peripheral surface. As a result, multiple patterns can be formed in the standing position, and the presentation effect due to the displacement of the first decorative unit G5420 can be improved.

In the 115th embodiment, when the first decorative unit G5420 is rotated clockwise around the axis GO as viewed from the front, and the decorative surface of the displacement unit G5426 as viewed from the front is switched, the engagement piece G477b is configured to be positioned to engage with the adjacent engagement recess G462a. As a result, when the displacement unit G5426 is displaced to a state where a specific decorative surface faces the front side, the displacement unit G5426 can be displaced from a tilted position to an upright position at that position.

Next, referring to FIG. 1942, the first decorative unit G6420 in the 116th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, when the displacement unit G426 is displaced from the upright position to the tilt reference position, the distance of the displacement unit G426 from its rotation axis is kept constant (unchanged). However, in the 116th embodiment, when the displacement unit G6426 is displaced from the upright position to the tilt reference position, the distance of the displacement unit G5426 from its rotation axis is changed. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1942(a) is a side view of the first decorative unit G6420 in the 116th embodiment, and corresponds to the side view in the MCMXXVI direction of Figure 1921(a), Figure 1942(b) is an exploded front oblique view of the first decorative unit G6420, and Figures 1943(a) and 18356(b) are side views of the first decorative unit G6420.

In addition, Fig. 1943(a) and Fig. 18356(b) sequentially show the transition states when the displacement unit G6426 of the first decorative unit G6420 is displaced to the tilt reference position. Also, in Fig. 1942(a), Fig. 1943(a), and Fig. 1943(b), the positions of the inner end G431a1 and the outer end G431a2 of the sliding groove G431a of the petal side transmission member G430 (see Fig. 1927(a)) are shown by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 1942(a) and FIG. 18355(b), the first decorative unit G6420 in the 116th embodiment is mainly formed with a rotating gear G421 on which gear teeth are formed, a first coupling member G422 connected to the rotating gear G421, a displacement unit G6426 arranged on the first coupling member G422, a second coupling member G6423 arranged in a state in which a portion of the displacement unit G6426 is clamped, a transmission member G424 arranged on the second coupling member G6423, and a sliding member G425 arranged on the transmission member G424.

The second joint member G6423 is a member for connecting the transmission member G424 and the displacement unit G6426, and is formed of a rectangular cube. The second joint member G6423 also has a first through hole G423a and a second through hole G423b that penetrate in different directions, and a recessed portion G6423c formed by recessing the side surface so as to communicate with the second through hole G423b. The first through hole G423a and the second through hole G423b are formed at positions offset from each other.

The recessed portion G6423c is a portion into which the connecting portion G6426d of the displacement unit G6426 described later is inserted, and is formed in a groove shape that is slightly wider than the thickness of the connecting portion G6426d. The recessed portion G6423c is recessed to a position that divides the second through hole G6423b into upper and lower portions.

The displacement unit G6426 is formed in a curved plate shape and mainly comprises a first decorative surface G426a on the inside of the curve (arrow L direction side), a second decorative surface G426b on the side opposite the first decorative surface G426a (arrow R direction side), a first end surface G426c connecting the ends of the first decorative surface G426a and the second decorative surface G426b on the front side (arrow F direction side), and a connecting portion G6426d formed on the opposite side (arrow B direction side) of the first end surface G426c and inserted into the recessed portion G6423c of the second joint member G6423.

The connecting portion G6426d is formed in a generally L-shape in side view, and includes a sliding hole G6426d1 formed in a size that allows the shaft portion G6427 to be inserted into the recessed portion G6423c of the second joint member G6423. When the connecting portion G6426d is inserted into the recessed portion G6423c (sandwiched between the inner surface of the recessed portion G6423c), when the second joint member G6423 slides relative to the shaft portion G6427, the displacement unit G6426 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second joint member G6423.

The shaft portion G6427 is formed from a metal rod member, and a part of its cross section is cut out to form a D-shaped cross section. The shaft portion G6427 is configured so that one end can be connected to the recess G422a1 of the first joint member G422, and is also configured so that it can be inserted into the second through hole G6423b of the second joint member G6423 and the sliding hole G6426d1 of the connecting portion G6426d.

The sliding hole G6426d1 is formed in the same D-shape as the cross-sectional shape of the shaft portion G6427, and is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion G6427. This allows the displacement unit G6426 to slide along the axial direction of the shaft portion G6427, and when the shaft portion G6427 is rotated around its axis, the displacement unit G6426 can rotate in conjunction with the rotation.

On the other hand, the second through hole G423b of the second joint member G6423 is formed as a circular through hole that is larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion G6427. This allows the second joint member G6423 to rotate around the axis of the shaft portion G6427 and to slide along the axial direction of the shaft portion G6427.

Next, referring to FIG. 1943, the displacement of the first decorative unit G6420 to the tilt reference position in the 116th embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1943(a), the displacement unit G6426 in the 116th embodiment is oriented such that the first decorative surface G426a faces the front side (the direction of the arrow F) just before the sliding portion G425a is displaced to the outer end G431a2 of the sliding groove G431a.

As shown in FIG. 1943(b), when the sliding portion G425a is displaced from the position shown in FIG. 1943(a) to the outer end portion G431a2 of the sliding groove G431a, the second joint member G6423 is pushed out in the axial direction of the shaft portion G6427, and the second joint member G423 is displaced along the axial direction of the shaft portion G6427. Since the displacement unit G6426 is accommodated in the recessed portion G6423c of the second joint member G6423, it is displaced along the axial direction of the shaft portion G6427 in conjunction with the displacement of the second joint member G6423.

In other words, the first decorative unit G6420 in the 116th embodiment is configured to be displaceable outward from the front view of the second decorative unit G480 after the displacement unit G6426 is changed from a state (reduced state) in which it faces outward from the front view of the second decorative unit G480 (axis GO side) to a state (expanded state) in which it faces the front side, so that the size of the first decorative unit G420 in front view can be made to appear even larger than in the expanded state. This allows the visual change in size when viewed from the front to be even greater.

Next, referring to Figure 1944 (a), the upper decorative unit H7014a in the 117th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the first communication passage H300C is formed on the upper side of the upper decorative unit H14a was described, but in the upper decorative unit H7014a in the 117th embodiment, the case where the first communication passage H7300C is formed on the lower side of the upper decorative unit H7014a will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same symbols and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1944(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H7014a in the 117th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-section taken along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848. Note that in Figure 1944(a), the structure of each component is illustrated in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1944(a), the upper decorative unit H7014a in the 117th embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H7320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H7320 mainly comprises a decorative unit H330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), a light-emitting unit H7340 arranged inside the decorative unit H330, and a pair of sound transmission units H350.

The light-emitting unit H7340 mainly comprises an attachment member H341 that is fastened to the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the front plate H331, a base member H342 that is disposed on the rear side of the attachment member H341, and a covering member H7343 that covers the rear side of the base member H342.

The covering member H7343 is a member that covers the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the base member H342, and is formed so that its outer shape in a front view is larger than that of the base member H342. It is fastened to the mounting member H341 by a screw that is inserted from the rear side.

The covering member H7343 is formed in a box shape with its center bulging out toward the rear side (arrow B direction) when viewed from the front, and its center opening on the front side (arrow F direction). The covering member H7343 further includes a partition wall H7343b erected downward from the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction) when viewed from the front, and the tip of the partition wall H7343b abuts against the lower panel H333 when the upper decorative unit H7014a is assembled. The partition wall H7343b extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and when the upper decorative unit H7014a is assembled, the front side of the partition wall H7343b and the rear side of the partition wall H7343b are separated by the partition wall H7343b.

The mounting member H341 in the 117th embodiment is disposed above the mounting member H341 in the 111th embodiment (in the direction of the arrow U), and is disposed in a state in which the inner surface above the outer edge H331b of the front plate H331 and the upper edge H341b of the mounting member H341 are in contact with each other. That is, in the 117th embodiment, the first communication passage H300C in the 111th embodiment is not formed.

On the other hand, the lower side of the mounting member H341 is in a state where there is a predetermined gap (first communication passage H7300C) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) between the lower panel H333 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the mounting member H341.

The gap formed between the lower panel H333 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the mounting member H341 is blocked on the front side (arrow F direction) by the main body H331a of the front panel H331 and on the back side (arrow B direction) by the partition wall H7343b of the covering member H7343, so that there is also a predetermined gap (first communication passage H7300C) in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction). In other words, a first communication passage H7300C extending in the left-to-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed on the lower side of the upper decorative unit H7014a.

The first communication passage H7300C has both ends extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) that communicate with the first space H300A (the space surrounded by the decorative unit H330, the light-emitting unit H7340, and the sound transmission unit H350) formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the speaker cover H27. As a result, the first spaces H300A formed on the front side of the pair of speaker covers H27 are each connected by the first communication passage H7300C.

Therefore, sound is emitted (output) from each speaker H312a toward the front side (the direction of arrow F) and emitted into the first space H300A on the front side of the speaker cover H27 through the through hole of the speaker cover H27, and can be emitted to the outside of the upper decorative unit H7014a through the slit H331a1 or sound emission opening H333b of the adjacent first space H300A via the first communication passage H7300C.

In other words, the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a arranged on one side can be diverted to the front side (the direction of arrow F) of the speaker H312a arranged on the other side and emitted from the upper decorative unit H14a, so that even if one of the pair of speakers H312a is damaged, the sound emitted from the other speaker H312a can be emitted from both sides of the upper decorative unit H14a. As a result, even if one of the pair of speakers H312a is damaged, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the player from stopping playing.

In addition, in the 117th embodiment, since the sound emission opening H333b is formed in the first communication passage H7300C, it is possible to easily emit the sound transmitted through the first communication passage H7300C from the sound emission opening H333b. In other words, since the sound emitted from the sound emission opening H333b can be made to be the sound transmitted into the first communication passage H7300C, the sound emitted from the sound emission opening H333b can be made louder than when the sound emission opening H333b is formed in a position different from the first communication passage H300C, as in the 111th embodiment. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player hear the sound from the speaker H312a.

Furthermore, in the 117th embodiment, the first communication passage H7300C and the second communication passage H300D are arranged at a predetermined space between them in the front and rear directions by the partition wall H333c of the lower panel H333 and the partition wall H7343b of the covering member H7343. That is, the first communication passage H7300C and the second communication passage H300D formed along the lower panel H333 of the upper decorative unit H7014a are formed with a predetermined gap between them in the front and rear directions.

This prevents the sound transmitted by the vibration of the partition wall H333c from being transmitted into the first communication passage H7300C, and also prevents the sound transmitted by the vibration of the partition wall H7343b from being transmitted into the second communication passage H300D. As a result, it prevents the sound transmitted through the first communication passage H7300C and the second communication passage H300D from becoming quieter and being emitted outside the upper decorative unit H7014a.

In the 117th embodiment, the first communication passage H7300C and the second communication passage H300D formed along the lower panel H333 of the upper decorative unit H7014a are described as being formed with a predetermined gap in the front-to-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the first communication passage H7300C and the second communication passage H300D may be arranged adjacent to each other.

Next, referring to FIG. 1944(b), the upper decorative unit H8014a in the 118th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which sound transmitted through the second communication passage H300D is formed from a detection opening, but in the upper decorative unit H8014a in the 118th embodiment, a case will be described in which sound transmitted through the second communication passage H300D is emitted through the second sound emission opening H8333d. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1944(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H8014a in the 118th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-section taken along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848. Note that in N10(b), the structure of each component is illustrated in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1944(b), the upper decorative unit H8014a in the 118th embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H8320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H8320 is mainly formed with a decorative unit H8330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), a light-emitting unit H340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1844) arranged inside the decorative unit H8330.

The decorative unit H8330 comprises a front plate H331 disposed at a predetermined interval (for arranging the upper plate H332, lower plate H333, and left plate H334) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310 (see FIG. 1843), and an upper plate H332 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331. It mainly comprises a lower panel H8333 formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front panel H331 and arranged in a position adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front panel H331, a left panel H334 arranged along the edge of the left side (arrow L direction) of the front panel H331 and connecting the left side (arrow L direction) ends of the upper panel H332 and the lower panel H333, and a decorative panel H335 arranged on the front side of the center of the front panel H331.

The lower panel H8333 is a part that constitutes the lower surface of the upper decorative unit H14a, and is disposed on the front panel H331 in a state in which it slopes upward (arrow U direction) from the front side (arrow F direction) to the back side (arrow B direction). In other words, the lower panel H8333 is disposed in a state in which it protrudes downward (arrow D direction) the further it is from the game board H13 (base unit H310) toward the front side. This makes it possible to prevent the play area of the game board H13 from becoming smaller even if the external shape (particularly the vertical size) of the front panel H331 in a front view is increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness (design) of the front panel H331 (increase the area that can be decorated of the front panel H331) while maintaining the play area of the game board H13.

The lower panel H8333 also includes a sound emission opening H333b that is opened at multiple positions along the edge on the front side (arrow F direction), a second sound emission opening H8333d that is opened at multiple positions along the edge on the rear side (arrow B direction), and a partition wall H333c that protrudes upward between the detection opening H333a and the second sound emission opening H8333d and stands upward between the detection opening H333a and the sound emission opening H333b.

The second sound emission opening H8333d is an opening that emits sound from the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the speaker H312a and transmitted through the second communication passage H300D to the front side of the glass unit H16 (below the upper decorative unit H14a) so that the sound of the speaker H312a can be transmitted to the player from the front side, and is formed in the area that forms the second communication passage H300D of the lower panel H8333.

The second sound emission opening H8333d is formed closer to the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the bottom panel H8333 than the sound emission opening H333b. This makes it possible to prevent the sound emitted from the sound emission opening H333b and the sound emitted from the second sound emission opening H8333d from mixing together. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to hear the sound emitted from the second sound emission opening H8333d.

In the 118th embodiment, a case was described in which the detection opening H333a is not formed in the lower plate H8333, but the detection opening H333a may be formed in the lower plate H333. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the detection device H313 in abutment against the erected portion H333a1 of the detection opening H333a so that sound transmitted through the second communication passage H300D does not leak out from the detection opening H333a.

The second sound emission opening H8333d may also be formed in one location in the center of the lower panel H8333. In this case, the sounds emitted from the rear sides of the left and right speakers H312a and transmitted through the second communication passage H300D can be mixed and emitted from the second sound emission opening H8333d to the outside of the upper decorative unit H8014a. As a result, the sounds emitted from the second sound emission opening H8333d can be easily heard by the player at a uniform volume on both the left and right, preventing a decrease in the player's interest.

Next, the upper decorative unit H9014a in the 119th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1945 to 1947. In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the first communication passage H300C is formed as a closed passage was described, but in the upper decorative unit H9014a in the 119th embodiment, the case where the first communication passage H300C is opened from a closed state will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments will be given the same symbols and their description will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the upper decorative unit H9014a in the 119th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1945. FIG. 1945 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit H9014a in the 119th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1945, the upper decorative unit H9014a in the 119th embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H9320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H9320 is mainly formed with a decorative unit H9330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), a light-emitting unit H340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 arranged inside the decorative unit H9330.

The decorative unit H9330 is composed of a front plate H331 arranged at a predetermined interval (the interval for arranging the upper plate H332, the lower plate H333, and the left plate H334) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310, an upper plate H9332 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and arranged adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, a lower plate H333 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front plate H331 and arranged adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and a right It mainly comprises a left panel H9334 that is shaped to fit along the rear end of the left side (arrow L direction) of the panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front panel H331, connecting the left (arrow L direction) ends of the upper panel H9332 and the lower panel H333, a right panel H9336 that is shaped to fit along the rear end of the right side (arrow R direction) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the front panel H331, connecting the right (arrow R direction) ends of the upper panel H9332 and the lower panel H333, and a drive unit H9337 that applies a drive force to displace the upper panel H9332.

The top plate H9332, bottom plate H333, left plate H9334, and right plate H9336 are members for forming (compartmentalizing) a space for disposing the light-emitting unit H340 and the sound transmission unit H350 on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and are formed to fit the edge of the front plate H331, with both ends of the top plate H9332 and bottom plate H333 being connected by the left plate H9334 and right plate H9336, respectively.

The top panel H9332 mainly comprises side panels H9332d extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a mesh member H9332e disposed between the pair of side panels H9332d, and a cylindrical shaft portion H9332f protruding from both outsides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) on the rear side (arrow B direction).

The upper plate H9332 in the 119th embodiment does not have the front side convex portion H332a, the rear side convex portion H332b, and the fastening portion H332c of the upper plate H332 in the 111th embodiment. This makes it possible to rotate the upper plate H9332 relative to the front plate H331 in the 119th embodiment.

The side plate H9332d is a plate-like member that guides the rotation of the top plate H9332 when it is rotated around the shaft portion H9332f (described later) and closes the left and right sides of the top plate H9332 (arrow L-R directions), and extends downward from both the left and right ends of the top plate H9332 along the rotation trajectory around the shaft portion H9332f. This forms a space H9332d2 (see FIG. 1947(b)) between the pair of opposing side plates H9332d.

In addition, a pin portion H9332d1 (see FIG. 1947) to which the driving force of the drive unit H9337 is transmitted is provided on one of the opposing surfaces of the pair of side plates H9332d in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the other side plate H9332d. By connecting the connecting member H9337b of the drive unit H9337 to the pin portion H9332d1, the upper plate H9332 can be rotated around the shaft portion H9332f by the driving force of the drive unit H9337.

The mesh member H9332e is a member that prevents unauthorized members from being inserted into the upper decorative unit H9014a (the space H9332d2 between the opposing side panels H9332d) when the top panel H9332 is rotated, and is arranged along the front edge of the pair of side panels H9332d while connecting the pair of side panels H9332d. The mesh member H9332e is formed from punched metal or a metal material woven into a mesh shape, and sound is allowed to pass through the mesh member H9332e through the openings in the metal material. The mesh member H9332e is fastened and fixed to the side panels H9332d, and can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the top panel H9332.

The shaft portion H9332f is supported by shaft support portions H9334a, H9336a formed on the left panel H9334 and the right panel H9336, which will be described later. As a result, the top panel H9332 is disposed on the left panel H9334 and the right panel H9336 in a state in which it can rotate around the shaft portion H9332f. The rotation of the top panel H9332 will be described in detail later.

As described above, the left panel H9334 is formed in a shape that is connected to the rear side of the front panel H331, and includes a pivotally supported portion H9334a that supports the right-side shaft portion H9332f of the top panel H9332. Similarly, the right panel H9336 is formed in a shape that is connected to the rear side of the front panel H331, and includes a pivotally supported portion H9336a that supports the left-side shaft portion H9332f of the top panel H9332. This allows the top panel H9332 to be arranged on the upper decorative unit H9014a in a rotatable state.

The pair of shaft support parts H9334a, H9336a are formed with a shape that opens on the back side, and the top plate H9332 is arranged by inserting the shaft part H9332f into the shaft support parts H9334a, H9336a after arranging the left plate H9334 and the right plate H9336 on the front plate H331.

The drive unit H9337 mainly comprises a solenoid H9337a that generates a driving force to rotate the upper plate H9332, and a connecting member H9337b that is connected to the solenoid H9337a, and is arranged so that the connecting member H9337b can be displaced in the vertical direction by the driving force of the solenoid H9337a.

The solenoid H9337a (other device H228 (see FIG. 1842)) that drives the upper panel H9332 is connected to the input/output port H225 of the voice lamp control device H113, and is driven based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110.

The connecting member H9337b is formed in a U-shape with a portion of the rear side of the columnar body cut out, and is configured so that the pin portion H9332d1 of the top plate H9332 can be accommodated inside the cutout. Since the connecting member H9337b is cut out on the rear side, when the top plate H9332 is inserted between the opposing left plate H9334 and right plate H9336 from the rear side, the pin portion H9332d1 can be accommodated in the cutout portion of the connecting member H9337b.

Next, the displacement of the upper panel H9332 in the 119th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1946 and 1947. Figs. 1946(a) and (b) are front views of the upper decorative unit H9014a, Fig. 1947(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H9014a taken along line MCMXLVIIa in Fig. 1946(a), and Fig. 1947(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H9014a taken along line MCMXLVIIb in Fig. 1946(b). Note that Figs. 1946(a) and 1947(a) show the upper panel H9332 in a closed state relative to the front panel H331, and Figs. 1946(b) and 1947(b) show the upper panel H9332 in an open state relative to the front panel H331. In addition, in Figures 1946 and 1947, the structure of each component is illustrated in a simplified manner to make it easier to understand.

As shown in Figures 1946(a) and 1947(a), when the shaft of the solenoid H9337a is retracted, the upper surface of the upper plate H9332 is disposed in a position that is approximately flush with the upper surface of the front plate H331. In other words, the upper plate H9332 is disposed in a closed position relative to the front plate H331.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 1946(b) and FIG. 1947(b), when the shaft of the solenoid H9337a is protruding, the pin portion H9332d1 of the top plate H9332 is displaced upward while sliding inside the cutout of the connecting member H9337b as the connecting member H9337b moves. As a result, the top plate H9332 rotates around the shaft portion H9332f, and the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) on which the mesh member H9332e is disposed is displaced upward.

This causes the mesh member H9332e (space H9332d2) to protrude upward above the upper decorative unit H9014a, and the first communication passage H300C formed by the gap between the front plate H331 and the mounting member H341 is opened through the opening of the mesh member H9332e (connected to the external space through space H9332d2). This allows sound to be emitted from the front side (arrow F direction) of the speaker H312a, and the sound transmitted through the first communication passage H300C to be emitted outside the upper decorative unit H9014a through the opening of the mesh member H9332e (space H9332d2).

That is, in the 119th embodiment, the upper side of the first communication passage H300C can be blocked by the top plate H9332 to connect the first spaces H300A (see FIG. 1849) to each other through the first communication passage H300C, and the upper side of the first communication passage H300C can be opened to emit sound transmitted to the first communication passage H300C from the upper side of the upper decorative unit H9014a to the external space of the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). Therefore, when the first communication passage H300C is an open passage and sound is emitted from the upper side of the upper decorative unit H9014a, the sound emission angle can be increased. As a result, multiple sound presentation modes can be created, thereby enhancing the sound presentation effect.

In the 119th embodiment, when the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is blocked by the top plate H9332, side plates H9332d are arranged at both ends of the first communication passage H300C, and sound emitted from the first space H300A (see FIG. 1849) toward the first communication passage H300C is transmitted to the first communication passage H300C through the gap formed between the first communication passage H300C and the side plate H933d.

In addition, when the first communication passage H300C is opened, it is preferable that the upward protruding area (opening area) of the space H9332d2 is at least three times larger than the opening area (smallest gap) caused by the gap between the parts during assembly, because by making the opening area three times larger or more, sound can be suitably released from the first communication passage H300C through the space H9332d2.

Furthermore, the mesh member H9332e is disposed along the front side of the first communication passage H300C when the first communication passage H300C is in a closed state, and is disposed on the front side of the space H9332d2 when the first communication passage H300C is open. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized members from being inserted into the first communication passage H300C while communicating the first communication passage H300C with the external space through the opening of the mesh member H9332e.

In addition, in the 119th embodiment, when the first communication passage H300C is opened by the displacement of the top plate H9332, the opening width of the first communication passage H300C (the upward protruding width of the space H9332d2) changes, so that the type of sound emitted from the space H9332d2 can be displaced according to the displacement of the top plate H9332. In other words, by changing the opening width of the first communication passage H300C, the range and volume of the sound emitted from the space H9332d2 can be changed. As a result, the sound production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the 119th embodiment, when the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage as shown in Figures 1946(a) and 1947(a), the upper plate H9332 is in contact with the partition wall H343b, whereas when the first communication passage H300C is opened as shown in Figures 1946(b) and 1947(b), the upper plate H9332 is separated from the partition wall H343b. As a result, when the first communication passage H300C is opened, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H9014a can be reduced compared to when the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage.

This change in rigidity causes sound to be emitted from the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) arranged inside the upper decorative unit H9014a, and the manner in which the sound is output to the outside of the upper decorative unit H9014a can be changed.

In other words, simply changing the volume of the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) results in little change in the type of sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H9014a, but in the upper decorative unit H9014a of the 119th embodiment, by changing the contact state of the upper panel H9332 against the upper decorative unit H9014a (partition wall H343b), even if the volume of the speaker H312a is kept constant, the type of sound output from the upper decorative unit H9014a can be changed as the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H9014a changes. As a result, the type of sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

Now, the change in the form of the output sound will be explained in detail. When the top panel H9332 is in contact with the partition wall H343b, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H9014a can be increased, making it easier for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H9014a and emitting sound from the openings (slit H331a1 (see Figure 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see Figure 1845), detection opening H333a (see Figure 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330.

On the other hand, when the top panel H9332 is separated from the partition wall H343b, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H9014a is reduced, making it difficult for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H9014a. This reduces the volume of the sound emitted from the openings (slit H331a1 (see FIG. 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see FIG. 1845), detection opening H333a (see FIG. 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330, making it easier for the player to hear the sound emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C. As a result, it is possible to make the sound sound as if it is being emitted from the entire upper decorative unit H9014a.

In addition, since the top panel H9332 is part of the decorative surface (exterior wall) of the upper decorative unit H9014a, when the top panel H9332 is displaced, sound can be emitted by utilizing the space before the top panel H9332 is displaced. This improves the manner in which the sound emitted from the speaker H312a is produced when the top panel H9332 is separated from the partition wall H343b.

Furthermore, when the upper panel H9332 is in contact with the partition wall H343b, it is configured as a wall that blocks the upper side of the first communication passage H300C that communicates with the installation space H300F in which the speaker H312a is arranged, so that the sound of the speaker H312a can be emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C, changing the manner of the sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H9014a. As a result, the manner of the sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the top plate H9332 is disposed between the speakers H312a disposed in two locations, i.e., the state of contact between the top plate H9332 and the partition wall H343b is changed between the two speakers H312a, making it easier to change the manner of sound output from the speakers H312a. In other words, the top plate H9332 is disposed in an area (the position between the two speakers H312a when viewed from the front) where it is easy to change the manner of sound output from the two speakers H312a, making it possible to improve the manner of sound emitted from the speakers H312a.

Furthermore, since the upper panel H9332 is configured as a plate-like body that can rotate around the axis portion H9332f formed on the rear side, the contact area with the upper decorative unit H9014a can be minimized when it is separated from the partition wall H343b. In other words, since areas other than the axis portion H9332f can be made non-contact, it is easier to reduce the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H9014a (the change in rigidity of the upper decorative unit H9014a can be made greater). This makes it easier to change the manner in which the sound is emitted from the upper decorative unit H9014a. As a result, the manner in which the sound is emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

The state in which the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage and the state in which the first communication passage H300C is an open passage are switched in conjunction with the operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833) by the player. That is, the operation (input) of the button section H181 of the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) is detected by various switches H208 (see FIG. 1842), and a signal for displacing the top panel H9332 based on the detection result is output from the voice lamp control device H113 to other devices H228 (solenoid H9337a (see FIG. 1842) for displacing the top panel H9332).

When the button portion H181 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the upper panel H9332 is displaced, so the timing at which the sound emission mode is changed can be related to the operation of the button portion H181. As a result, the presentation effect by operating the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) can be improved, and the player's interest can be increased.

The change in the sound emission mode in the 119th embodiment is not limited to the operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833). For example, when a pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) wins a jackpot in a lottery triggered by winning the first winning slot H64 and the second winning slot H640 (see FIG. 1838), the upper panel H9332 may be displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10.

In this case, when a jackpot is hit, the first communication passage H300C is opened to allow the player to easily hear the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833), making it easier for the player to focus on the game during the jackpot.

On the other hand, when there is no big win (when the lottery is lost or during the lottery), the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage, which prevents the player from paying unnecessary attention to the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) and makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds of the in-store announcements and other pachinko machines H10 (for example, the neighboring pachinko machine H10). In this case, the passage width and passage length of the first communication passage H300C may be set so that the sounds transmitted from the first space H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) to the first communication passage H300C cancel each other out, thereby reducing the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 when the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage.

In addition, when a predetermined reach effect (for example, an effect in which the expectation of a big win is high) occurs instead of a big win, the first communication passage H300C may be opened to make it easier for the player to notice the reach effect.

Furthermore, the change in the sound emission mode in the 119th embodiment may be such that when a predetermined ball is entered (for example, when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640 (see FIG. 1838)) or when the operating handle H51 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the upper panel H9332 is displaced from a state in which the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833).

In this case, when a player starts playing (shooting a game ball into the play area or putting the shot game ball into the designated ball entrance), the first communication passage H300C is opened to make it easier for the player to hear the sounds emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). This makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds being played, while also preventing the player from hearing the sounds of other pachinko machines H10 (e.g., adjacent pachinko machines H10) that the player is not playing (the game ball has not been shot into the play area or the shot game ball has not entered the designated ball entrance). As a result, it is easier for the player to pay attention to the effects of the pachinko machine H10 that he or she is playing.

In addition, in the 119th embodiment, the first communication passage H300C is opened by displacing the top plate H9332, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the passage width of the first communication passage H300C may be changed by displacing the top plate H9332.

For example, in the 119th embodiment, a case was described in which a mesh member H9332e having a through hole is arranged on the upper panel H9332, but a plate member having no through hole may be arranged on the upper panel H9332 (between the opposing side panels H9332d) instead of the mesh member H9332e. In this case, when the upper panel H9332 is displaced upward, the passage width of the first communication passage H300C can be changed (increased) by the amount that the upper panel H9332 is displaced outward from the upper decorative unit H9014a.

In this case, the width of the passage through which the sound is transmitted is changed, so the range of the sound transmitted through the first communication passage H300C can be changed before and after changing the passage width of the first communication passage H300C. As a result, the sound heard by the player can be changed, enhancing the player's enjoyment.

In addition, when a plate member without through holes is arranged on the upper plate H9332 (between the opposing side plates H9332d) instead of the mesh member H9332e in the 119th embodiment, when the upper plate H9332 is displaced in a direction narrowing the passage width of the first communication passage H300C, the upper plate H9332 may be arranged in the internal space of the first communication passage H300C and the upper plate H9332 may be configured to partition the first communication passage H300C (eliminate the passage width of the first communication passage H300C).

This allows the manner in which the sound emitted (output) from the speaker H312a arranged in one installation space H300F is transmitted through the first communication passage H300C to the first space H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) of the other installation space H300F to be changed according to the displacement of the top panel H9332. As a result, the dramatic effect of the sound from the speaker H312a can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the above 119th embodiment, when the first communication passage H300C is configured as a closed passage, the upper plate H9332 is directly abutted against the partition wall H343b. However, an elastic body made of an elastic body may be disposed between the upper plate H9332 and the partition wall H343b. According to this, when the first communication passage H300C is configured as a closed passage, the upper plate H9332 can be closely attached to the partition wall H343b. Therefore, when the first communication passage H300C is configured as a closed passage, it is possible to suppress sound leakage from between the upper plate H9332 and the partition wall H343b. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the manner of sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H9014a when the first communication passage H300C is configured as a closed passage and when the first communication passage H300C is opened. As a result, the manner of sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1948, the right side decorative unit H10014c in the 120th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which foreign objects placed on the upper surface of the bent portion H452 are made to slide easily (move easily) along the upper surface by vibrations caused by sound from the speaker H312a, but in the 120th embodiment, a case is described in which foreign objects placed on the upper surface of the bent portion H452 are made to slide easily along the upper surface by wind pressure caused by the wind from the fan H10480.

First, the right side decorative unit H10014c in the 120th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1948(a). FIG. 1948(a) is an exploded front oblique view of the right side decorative unit H10014c in the 120th embodiment.

As shown in Figure 1948 (a), the upper decorative unit H10014a in the 120th embodiment, the right decorative unit H14c, mainly comprises a left stacking board unit H400L and a right stacking board unit H400R that are stacked in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a vertically long, plate-shaped support plate portion H10410 to which the stacking board units H400L, H400R are fastened and fixed, and which is fastened and fixed to the main frame H14d (see Figure 1840).

The support plate portion H10410 mainly comprises a fixed plate H411 arranged on the front side (arrow F side) of the right side (arrow R side) of the main body frame H14d in the assembled state, a base member H412 arranged on the front side of an area extending in the vertical direction of the fixed plate H411, and a fan H10480 arranged on the front side of an area extending in the horizontal direction from the upper end of the fixed plate H411.

The fan H10480 is a member that rotates blades arranged inside to generate wind, and is arranged on the base member H412 so as to blow wind in an upward direction. The fan H10480 is also arranged below the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470 and the bent portion H452 of the first outer lens member H450 (see FIG. 1948(b)), and is arranged so as to mainly blow wind to the through hole H452a formed in the step portion of the bent portion H452.

As a result, in the 120th embodiment, the wind sent from the fan H10480 can be sent through the through hole H452a of the bent portion H452 to the opposing space between the bent portion H452 and the standing portion H477.

Next, referring to Figure 1948(b), the wind sent between the opposing bent portion H452 and the standing portion H477 will be described. Figure 1948(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right-side decorative unit H10014c and the upper decorative unit H14a. Note that Figure 1948(b) corresponds to the cross-section in Figure 1857(b) of the 111th embodiment. Also, in Figure 1948(b), the wind sent from the fan H10480 is diagrammatically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 1948(b), the wind sent from the fan H10480 is mainly distributed into wind sent through the through hole H452a to the opposing space between the bent portion H452 and the standing portion H477, and wind that is not blown into the through hole H452a but is blown toward the upper decorative unit H14a or the right decorative unit H14c.

The wind that passes through the through hole H452a passes through the foreign object passages formed between the bent portion H452 and the erected portion H477, and between the main body plate portion H451 and the main body plate portion H471, and is configured to be blown mainly from the upper end opening H473a to the outside of the right-side decorative unit H10014c. This wind makes it easier for foreign objects that rest on the upper surface of the bent portion H452 to slide along the upper surface, making it easier to expel the foreign objects from the upper end opening H473a. As a result, it is easier to prevent foreign objects from accumulating inside the right-side decorative unit H10014c.

That is, in the 120th embodiment, a fan H10480 is provided to move air, and the fan H10480 can move the air in the passage space H400A in a direction away from the gap between the main body plate portion H471 of the outer cover member H470 and the main body plate portion H451 of the first outer lens member H450. This makes it easier to discharge foreign matter flowing down the base end portion H452c from the opening H473 to the outside of the pachinko machine H10. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter entering from the boundary between the top plate H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the standing portion H477 of the right decorative unit H14c from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

In addition, some of the air passing through the through hole H452a passes between the bent portion H452 and the standing portion H477, and is blown to the outside of the front frame H14 through the gap at the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 and the standing portion H477. This air can blow away any foreign matter attempting to enter the gap at the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 and the standing portion H477 to the outside of the front frame H14. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the interior of the upper decorative unit H14a through the gap at the boundary (connecting portion) between the top panel H332 and the standing portion H477.

In addition, in the 120th embodiment, the air that is not blown into the through hole H452a but is blown toward the right decorative unit H14c is configured to pass around the light-guiding member H440 of the right decorative unit H10014c.

As described above, the light-guiding member H440 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the LED H412a of the substrate member H412. Therefore, the wind passing around the light-guiding member H440 can be directed at the substrate member H412. This can cool the heat stored in the substrate member H412 due to the light emission of the LED H412a. As a result, damage to the substrate member H412 can be suppressed.

In the 120th embodiment, the fan H10480 rotates (blows air) when the pachinko machine H10 is turned on or when the touch sensor H51a of the operating handle H51 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. That is, in the 120th embodiment, when the player is not playing the pachinko machine H10, the fan H10480 blows air. This makes it possible to prevent foreign objects that fly out of the upper end opening H473a from hitting the player or the foreign objects.

The fan H10480 may be configured to rotate (blow air) not only when the player is not playing the pachinko machine H10, but also at all times (during play). This allows the player to feel the wind being blown to the outside of the front frame H14 from the gap at the boundary (connection) between the top panel H332 and the standing portion H477, and discourages the player from placing objects on the top of the pachinko machine H10 (the top surface of the upper decorative unit H14a). As a result, the number of foreign objects that try to get in between the bent portion H452 and the standing portion H477 is reduced, and the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a is prevented from becoming poor.

Next, referring to FIG. 1949(a), the right side decorative unit H11014c in the 121st embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which foreign matter received at the bent portion H452 is discharged to the outside of the right side decorative unit H14c (front frame H14) through a passage formed inside the right side decorative unit H14c, but in the 121st embodiment, a case is described in which foreign matter is discharged to the outside of the front frame H14 without passing through the inside of the right side decorative unit H11014c.

First, with reference to Figure 1949 (a), the right side decorative unit H11014c in the 121st embodiment will be described. Figure 1949 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side decorative unit H11014c and the upper decorative unit H14a in the 121st embodiment. Note that Figure 1949 (a) corresponds to the cross section of Figure 1857 (b) in the 111th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1949(a), the right side decorative unit H11014c in the 121st embodiment mainly comprises a left stacking board unit H400L and a right stacking board unit H11400R that are stacked in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion H410 to which the stacking board units H400L, H11400R are fastened and fixed, and which is fastened and fixed to the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840).

The weight plate units H400L and H11400R are fastened to the support plate H410 by screws inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the support plate H410 to the front side (arrow F direction). The right side decorative unit H11014c is fastened to the main frame H14d by screws inserted from the rear side to the front side of the main frame H14d with the weight plate units H400L and H11400R fastened to the support plate H410.

The right stacking plate unit H11400R mainly comprises a first outer lens member H450 and a second outer lens member H460 arranged to the right of the light guide member H440 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, and an outer cover member H11470 arranged to the right of the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460, which is made of a resin material that is not transparent to light, and to which the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 are fastened and fixed.

The outer cover member H11470 mainly comprises a main body plate portion H11471 formed in a vertically long plate shape, two fastening portions H472 formed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion H11471, a plurality of openings H473 opened in the main body plate portion H11471, a plurality of first fastening portions H474 which are cylindrical portions into which the tip is inserted into the first outer lens member H450 and into which screws are screwed to fix the first outer lens member H450 to the outer cover member H470, a plurality of second fastening portions H475 which are cylindrical portions formed shorter than the first fastening portion H474 and into which screws are screwed to fix the first outer lens member H450 and the second outer lens member H460 to the outer cover member H11470, and a plurality of rear fastening portions H476 which protrude from the left side surface of the main body plate portion H471 and into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion H410 from the rear side.

When viewed from the side (in the direction of arrow L), the end of the main body plate H11471 on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) is formed in a curved arc shape, while the end on the rear side extends linearly in the vertical direction, and the entire body is made of a non-transparent resin material. In addition, the main body plate H11471 is provided with an erect portion H11477 that erects from the upper end toward the left stacking plate unit H400L, and is formed in a roughly L-shape that is inverted vertically (in the direction of arrows U-D) and horizontally (in the direction of arrows L-R) when viewed from the front.

The extension length of the main body plate portion H11471 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed to a length that corresponds to the length of the support plate portion H410, and when the right stacking plate unit H11400R is disposed on the support plate portion H410, it overlaps with the front side (arrow F direction) of the fixed plate H411.

The erected portion H11477 constitutes the upper right side of the front frame H14 when viewed from the front, and is sized so that its tip, erected toward the upper decorative unit H14a when the front frame H14 is in an assembled state, abuts against the right end of the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a.

The erected portion H11477 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions H477a that are inserted into the through holes H452a formed in the first outer lens member H450. By disposing the first outer lens member H450 on the outer cover member H470 with the insertion portions H477a inserted into H452a, it is possible to prevent the bent portion H452 of the first outer lens member H450 that faces the erected portion H11477 from being displaced relative to the erected portion H11477.

Furthermore, the erected portion H11477 is formed with an engagement portion H11477b that is formed to protrude downward from the erected tip side (the side in the direction of the arrow L). Note that the engagement portion H11477b in the 121st embodiment is a portion that engages with the engaged portion H332g of the upper plate H332, similar to the engagement portion H452b in the 111th embodiment, and is configured so that the tip side is inserted between the first piece H332g1 and the second piece H332g2 of the engaged portion H332g.

In the 121st embodiment, the portion that engages with the engaged portion H332g is formed on the erected portion H11477, so that the formation of the engaging portion H452b of the bent portion H452 is omitted.

The engaging portion H11477b is formed at a position pulled back (closer) toward the main body plate portion H11471 than the upright tip of the upright portion H11477, and the area connecting the base end side connected to the upright portion H11477 to the tip side engaging with the engaged portion H332g is positioned below the boundary (connection portion) between the upright portion H11477 of the right decorative unit H11014c and the top plate H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a.

As a result, if a foreign object enters the inside of the front frame H14 through the gap at the boundary (connection portion) between the upright portion H11477 of the right-side decorative unit H11014c and the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a, the foreign object can be received by the engagement portion H11477b. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects from entering the inside of the upper decorative unit H14a and impairing the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a.

In the 121st embodiment, the passage space H11400A (see FIG. 1949a) formed by the erected portion H11477, the upper panel H332, and the engagement portion H11477b at the connecting portion is opened to the front side of the front frame H14. As a result, in the 121st embodiment, foreign matter that enters the front frame H14 from the boundary (connection portion) between the erected portion H11477 of the right decorative unit H11014c and the upper panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a can be discharged to the outside of the front frame H14 without passing through the inside of the right decorative unit H11014c. As a result, it is no longer necessary to form a passage in the right decorative unit H11014c for foreign matter to pass through, making it easier to make the right decorative unit H11014c smaller (thinner).

Next, the right side decorative unit H12014c in the 122nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1949(b). In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which a foreign object enters the inside of the front frame H14 through the gap between the standing portion H477 and the top panel H332, but in the 122nd embodiment, the intrusion of a foreign object through the gap between the standing portion H477 and the top panel H332 is restricted.

First, with reference to Figure 1949 (b), the right side decorative unit H12014c in the 122nd embodiment will be described. Figure 1949 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side decorative unit H12014c and the upper decorative unit H14a in the 122nd embodiment. Note that Figure 1949 (b) corresponds to the cross section of Figure 1857 (b) in the 111th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1949(b), the right side decorative unit H12014c in the 122nd embodiment mainly comprises a left stacking board unit H400L and a right stacking board unit H12400R that are stacked in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion H410 to which the stacking board units H400L, H12400R are fastened and fixed, and which is fastened and fixed to the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840).

The weight plate units H400L and H12400R are fastened to the support plate H410 by screws inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the support plate H410 to the front side (arrow F direction). The right side decorative unit H12014c is fastened to the main frame H14d by screws inserted from the rear side to the front side of the main frame H14d with the weight plate units H400L and H12400R fastened to the support plate H410.

The right stacking plate unit H12400R mainly comprises a first outer lens member H12450 and a second outer lens member H460 arranged to the right of the light guide member H440 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, and an outer cover member H470 arranged to the right of the first outer lens member H12450 and the second outer lens member H460, which is made of a resin material that is not transparent to light, and to which the first outer lens member H12450 and the second outer lens member H460 are fastened and fixed.

The first outer lens member H12450 mainly comprises a main body plate portion H451 formed in a vertically long plate shape, a bent portion H12452 that bends from the upper end of the main body plate portion H451 toward the inner cover member H420 side, a plurality of first insertion holes H453 and second insertion holes H454 that are configured as through holes through which screws that are fastened to the outer cover member H470 are inserted, a bulge portion H455 that protrudes to the outer cover member H470 side (right side (arrow R direction side)) in the area surrounded by the first insertion holes H453 and second insertion holes and is visible through the outer cover member H470, a rear fastening portion H456 that is drilled on the rear side of the main body plate portion H451 and into which a screw that is fixed to the support plate portion H410 from the rear side is screwed, and a plurality of engaged portions H457 that are formed along the edge portion on the front side.

The first outer lens member H12450 is disposed between the light guide member H440 and the outer cover member H470 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, and transmits the light emitted from the light guide member H440 to emit it from the opening H473 of the outer cover member H470 and the front side of the outer cover member H470. The entire first outer lens member H12450 is made of a translucent resin material.

The bent portion H12452 in the 122nd embodiment is disposed with the bent tip side (tip H12452d) in contact with the underside of the erected portion H477 of the outer cover member H470, and the tip is set to a length that exceeds the erected portion H477.

In the 122nd embodiment, the engaged portion H332g formed on the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a is formed at a position spaced a distance inside in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the top panel H332, and a storage portion H12452e capable of storing the first piece H332g1 of the engaged portion H332g is formed in the bent portion H12452.

In the assembled state of the front frame H14 in the 122nd embodiment, the first piece H332g1 is accommodated in the accommodation portion H12452e, thereby allowing the upper decorative unit H14a and the right decorative unit H12014c to engage with each other. This prevents the position of the right decorative unit H12014c from shifting relative to the upper decorative unit H14a. This prevents the gap at the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the outer cover member H470 of the right decorative unit H12014c from becoming large. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering between the upper decorative unit H14a and the right decorative unit H12014c, and to prevent the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a from becoming poor.

In addition, in the 122nd embodiment, the bent portion H12452 is arranged in contact with the underside of the outer cover member H470, so that when the upper decorative unit H14a and the right side decorative unit H12014c are arranged on the main frame H14d, the upper surface of the bent portion H12452 can be positioned below the boundary (connection portion) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the outer cover member H470 of the right side decorative unit H12014c.

As a result, even if a foreign object enters the boundary (connection) between the top panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the outer cover member H470 of the right-side decorative unit H12014c, the upper surface of the bent portion H12452 can prevent the foreign object from entering the interior of the upper decorative unit H14a or the right-side decorative unit H12014c through the boundary (connection). As a result, the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a and the right-side decorative unit H12014c can be prevented from being impaired.

In the 122nd embodiment, the bent portion H12452 is simply arranged in contact with the underside of the outer cover member H470, but the bent portion H12452 may be arranged in a state where it is biased toward the outer cover member H470. In this case, it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed below the boundary (connection portion) between the upper panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the outer cover member H470 of the right decorative unit H12014c. Therefore, even if a foreign object enters the boundary (connection portion), the foreign object can be reliably received by the bent portion H12452, and the foreign object can be prevented from entering the interior of the upper decorative unit H14a or the right decorative unit H12014c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the upper decorative unit H14a and the right decorative unit H12014c from being deteriorated.

Next, the right side decorative unit H13014c in the 123rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1950. In the above 111th embodiment, the bulge H455 is integrally formed with the main body plate H451, but in the 123rd embodiment, the bulge H13455 is formed so as to be removable from the main body plate H13451.

First, the right decorative unit H13014c in the 123rd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1950(a) and 1950(b). Figures 1950(a) and 1950(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the right decorative unit H13014c and the upper decorative unit H14a in the 123rd embodiment. Note that Figures 1950(a) and 1950(b) correspond to the cross-section of Figure 1857(b) in the 111th embodiment. Also, Figure 1950(a) shows the bulge H13455 attached to the main body plate H13451, and Figure 1950(b) shows the bulge H13455 removed from the main body plate H13451.

As shown in Figures 1950(a) and 1950(b), the right decorative unit H13014c in the 123rd embodiment mainly comprises a left stacking board unit H400L and a right stacking board unit H13400R that are stacked in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion H410 to which the stacking board units H400L and H13400R are fastened and fixed, and which is fastened and fixed to the main frame H14d (see Figure 1840).

The weight plate units H400L and H13400R are fastened to the support plate H410 by screws inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the support plate H410 to the front side (arrow F direction). The right side decorative unit H13014c is fastened to the main frame H14d by screws inserted from the rear side to the front side of the main frame H14d with the weight plate units H400L and H13400R fastened to the support plate H410.

The right stacking plate unit H13400R mainly comprises a first outer lens member H13450 and a second outer lens member H460 arranged to the right of the light guide member H440 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, and an outer cover member H470 arranged to the right of the first outer lens member H13450 and the second outer lens member H460, which is made of a resin material that is not transparent to light, and to which the first outer lens member H13450 and the second outer lens member H460 are fastened and fixed.

The first outer lens member H13450 mainly comprises a main body plate portion H13451 formed in a vertically long plate shape, a bent portion H452 that bends from the upper end of the main body plate portion H13451 toward the inner cover member H420 side, a plurality of first insertion holes H453 and second insertion holes H454 that are configured as through holes through which screws that are fastened to the outer cover member H470 are inserted, bulging portions H455, H13455 that protrude toward the outer cover member H470 side (right side (arrow R direction side)) in the area surrounded by the first insertion holes H453 and are visible through the outer cover member H470, a rear fastening portion H456 that is drilled on the rear side of the main body plate portion H451 and into which a screw that is fixed to the support plate portion H410 from the rear side is screwed, and a plurality of engaged portions H457 that are formed along the edge portion on the front side.

The first outer lens member H13450 is disposed between the light guide member H440 and the outer cover member H470 of the left stacking plate unit H400L, and transmits the light emitted from the light guide member H440 to emit it from the opening H473 of the outer cover member H470 and the front side of the outer cover member H470. The entire first outer lens member H13450 is made of a translucent resin material.

In the first outer lens member H13450 of the 123rd embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1950, a bulge H13455 is formed on the upper end of the main body plate H13451 in a removable manner, and an opening H13451b is drilled in the main body plate H13451 at a position corresponding to the bulge H13455.

The opening H13451b is formed with an inner diameter that corresponds to the outer diameter of the bulge H13455, and an engagement piece H13451b1 is formed that protrudes from a portion of its inner edge toward the inside of the opening H13451b.

The bulge H13455 is formed in a cylindrical shape with one end (the side in the direction of the arrow R) closed. The bulge H13455 also includes a first groove H13455a recessed in an L-shape that connects to the end on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L), and a second groove H13455b recessed in a cross shape in the end face on one side.

The first groove H13455a is a portion that receives the engagement piece H13451b1 of the opening H13451b, and is formed with a groove width wider than the engagement piece H13451b1. The engagement piece H13451b1 is inserted into the first groove H13455a by pushing the bulge H13455 toward the main body plate H13451 while aligning the other end of the first groove H13455a with the engagement piece H13451b1.

In this inserted state, by rotating the bulge portion H13455 around its axis relative to the main body plate portion H13451, the engagement piece H13451b1 is inserted up to the recessed tip side of the first groove portion H13455a, which is formed in an L-shape. This makes it possible to prevent the bulge portion H13455 from being removed from the main body plate portion H13451 when the bulge portion H13455 is pulled out in a direction away from the main body plate portion H13451.

The bulge portion H13455 can be easily rotated around its axis relative to the main body plate portion H13451 by inserting a dedicated tool (a flathead screwdriver in the 123rd embodiment) into the second groove portion H13455b formed on one end face of the bulge portion H13455. In other words, the second groove portion H13455b is formed as a portion for hooking a tool for removing the bulge portion H13455 (a portion for attachment and detachment).

According to the right decorative unit H13014c configured as described above, the bulge H13455 can be removed from the main plate H13451, so that if a foreign object that has entered through the gap at the boundary (connection) between the top plate H332 of the upper decorative unit H14a and the outer cover member H470 of the right decorative unit H13014c falls to the opening H473 of the outer cover member H470 and is not discharged from the opening H473 to the outside of the right decorative unit H13014c (it remains on the upper surface of the partition wall H478), it is possible to remove the bulge H13455 and discharge the foreign object to the outside of the right decorative unit H13014c. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects from continuing to accumulate inside the right decorative unit H13014c.

Next, the upper and lower tray unit H14015 in the 124th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1951 to 1953. In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the protrusion H583 is fixed is described, but in the 124th embodiment, the case where the protrusion H14563b is displaced and protrudes is described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the upper and lower tray unit H14015 in the 124th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1951. FIG. 1951 is an exploded front oblique view of the upper and lower tray unit H14015 in the 124th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1951, the upper and lower tray unit H14015 in the 124th embodiment mainly comprises a base member H510 (see FIG. 1952) fastened to the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), an upper tray forming member H520 (see FIG. 1952) and an operating handle H51 (see FIG. 1952) arranged on the front side of the base member H510, a lower tray forming member H14530 arranged on the front side of the base member H510 and the upper tray forming member H520, and an operating unit H180 (see FIG. 1952) arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H530.

The lower tray forming member H14530 is mainly comprised of a decorative unit H540 which is formed in a shape covering the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H510 (see Figure 1952) and the upper tray forming member H520 and forms the decorative surface of the front side of the upper and lower tray unit H14015, a lower tray constituent unit H550 which constitutes the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), and a ball removal unit H14560 for removing balls stored in the lower tray H50.

The ball removal unit H14560 mainly comprises a storage member H561 formed in a box shape with an opening on the upper side, a slide plate H14562 arranged inside the storage member H561, a ball removal lever H52 connected to the slide plate H14562 and with at least a portion of its front side (arrow F direction side) arranged outside the storage member H561, a coil spring (not shown) that biases the slide plate H14562 and the ball removal lever H52 in one direction, and a second slide plate H14563 arranged in a position overlapping at least a portion below the slide plate H14562.

The storage member H561 is formed to a size that can be accommodated inside the second opening H541b of the first decorative panel H541, and is disposed adjacent to the lower side of the lower tray component unit H550 disposed above the second opening H541b. The storage member H561 is also provided with a guide mechanism inside its box-shaped interior that guides the displacement of the slide plate H14562 (described later), and the guide mechanism defines the displacement direction of the slide plate H14562 in one direction.

The slide plate H14562 is formed in a plate shape larger than the opening of the bottom mouth H553a of the bottom portion H553, and is formed to be displaceable between a closed position in which the lower edge of the bottom mouth H553a is blocked, and an open position in which the slide plate H14562 is displaced from the closed position to open the bottom mouth H553a. When the slide plate H14562 is placed in the closed position, the balls are stored in the storage area of the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858), and when the slide plate H14562 is placed in the open position, the balls in the storage area of the lower tray H50 are discharged from the bottom mouth H553a. In addition, when the slide plate H14562 is placed in the open position, the storage member H561 has a discharge port H561a formed at a position corresponding to the bottom mouth H553a for inserting the balls downward.

In addition, the slide plate H14562 in the 124th embodiment is formed with a pressing piece H14562a that protrudes from the storage member H561 in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the slide plate H14562 from the closed position (position that blocks the discharge port H561a) to the open position (position that opens the discharge port H561a), and a second slide plate H14563 is disposed below the pressing piece H14562a.

The second slide plate H14563 is formed in a plate shape that follows the bottom surface of the first decorative plate H541 and is disposed on the right side of the housing member H561. The second slide plate H14563 mainly comprises a bulging portion H14563a that bulges upward from the top surface side, a protruding portion H14563b (see L33) that protrudes downward from the bottom surface side, and a coil spring H14564 (see FIG. 1953) that is disposed in a position that abuts against the bottom surface of the second slide plate H14563 and biases the second slide plate H14563 upward relative to the first decorative plate H541, and is disposed in a position that overlaps above the bottom surface side of the first decorative plate H541.

The bulge H14563a is the portion that the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 abuts against when the slide plate H14562 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and is formed at a position that does not overlap in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) with the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 in the closed position, and is formed at a position that at least partially overlaps in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) with the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 in the closed position.

As a result, when the slide plate H14562 is slid from the closed position to the open position, the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 can be brought into contact with the bulging portion H14563a of the second slide plate H14563. This contact causes the second slide plate H14563 to be displaced downward, and a detailed explanation of this displacement will be given later.

The protrusion H14563b is a portion that protrudes downward from the bottom surfaces of the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580 in accordance with the vertical displacement of the second slide plate H14563 described below, and is set to a length such that the protruding tip (lower end) of the protrusion H14563b does not protrude from the bottom surfaces of the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580 when the second slide plate H14563 is in an upward position (as shown in FIG. 1953(a)).

In addition, an opening having a shape corresponding to the protrusion H14563b is formed at the position where the protrusion H14563b is formed in the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580. The protrusion H14563b is displaced by protruding through the opening in the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580.

The protrusion H14563b is formed in a shape in which multiple (four) curved walls H583a that are curved convexly toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) are connected in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) in the same manner as the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment, and the function and action of the curved shape are the same as those of the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion H14563b will be described with reference to Figs. 1952 and 1953. Figs. 1952(a) and (b) are side views of the upper and lower plate unit H14015, Fig. 1953(a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower plate unit H14015 at line MCMLIIIa in Fig. 1952(a), and Fig. 1953(b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower plate unit H14015 at line MCMLIIIb in Fig. 1952(b).

Note that Figures 1952(a) and 1953(a) show the protrusion H14563b in an upwardly retracted state (hereinafter referred to as the "retracted state"), and Figure 1952(b) shows the protrusion H14563b in a downwardly extending state (hereinafter referred to as the "extending state").

As shown in Figures 1952(a) and 1953(a), when the slide plate H14562 is positioned in the closed position, the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 is located to the right of the bulging portion H14563a of the second slide plate H14563, and the pressing piece H14562a and the bulging portion H14563a are positioned so that they do not overlap in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The second slide plate H14563 is thus biased upward by the coil spring H14564 disposed between the second slide plate H14563 and the first decorative plate H541, and the upper surface of the second slide plate H14563, excluding the portion where the bulge H14563a is formed, is positioned in contact with the pressing piece H14562a. As a result, the protrusion H14563b formed on the lower surface of the second slide plate H14563 is positioned inside the opening formed in the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580 (i.e., it is in a retracted state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1953(b) and FIG. 1953(b), when the slide plate H14562 is positioned in the open position, the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 is positioned so as to overlap the bulging portion H14563a of the second slide plate H14563 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The second slide plate H14563 is pushed downward by the contact between the lower surface of the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 and the bulging portion H14563a. As a result, the protruding portion H14563b formed on the lower surface of the second slide plate H14563 protrudes downward from the openings formed in the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580 (i.e., it is in a protruding state).

That is, in the 124th embodiment, the amount of projection of the protruding portion H14563b projecting from the underside of the front frame H14 (upper and lower plate unit H14015) is changeable. This allows the protruding portion H14563b to be retracted to the inside of the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580 when the projection of the protruding portion H14563b is not required, thereby lowering the protruding height of the protruding portion H14563b. This prevents the protruding portion H14563b from interfering with play and from deteriorating the appearance of the pachinko machine H10 (upper and lower plate unit H14015).

In particular, in the 124th embodiment, when the player operates the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) to displace the slide plate H14562 to the open position and discharge the balls stored in the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858) into the 1000-ryo box, the protrusion H14563b can be caused to protrude from the bottom surface of the upper and lower tray unit H14015, and the protrusion H14563b can be retracted to the inside of the upper and lower tray unit H14015 while the balls stored in the lower tray H50 are not being discharged (when the slide plate H14562 is in the closed position (position blocking the discharge port H561a)). In other words, the protrusion H14563b can be slid and displaced by the player's operation of the ball removal lever H52, and the protruding height of the protrusion H14563b can be changed at the player's discretion (ball removal timing).

Therefore, in the 124th embodiment, the protrusion H14563b can be retracted while no balls are being dispensed, preventing the protrusion H14563b from getting in the way. Therefore, for example, when the box is filled with balls to be dispensed and is replaced, the box before and after the replacement can be prevented from getting caught on the protrusion H14563b. As a result, the workability around the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858) can be improved.

In the 124th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1952(a), when the protruding portion H14563b is retracted to the inside of the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580, the tip of the protruding portion H14563b does not protrude from the front frame H14 (upper and lower plate unit H14015) (i.e., the protruding tip is positioned inside the front frame H14 (upper and lower plate unit H14015)). This reliably prevents the protruding tip of the protruding portion H14563b from interfering with play and from becoming visible, thereby deteriorating the appearance of the pachinko machine H10.

In addition, when balls are discharged from the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858), the protrusion H14563b is in an extended state, so that, like the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment, the balls that fall into the box and bounce back can come into contact with it, preventing the balls discharged from the lower tray H50 from flying out from the front of the box.

When the protrusion H14563b in the 124th embodiment is to be used as a handle for opening the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837) like the protrusion H583 in the first embodiment, the operator can operate the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) to displace the slide plate H14562 to the open position, allowing the protrusion H14563b to be used as a handle like the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment.

In addition, when the protrusion H14563b in the 124th embodiment is used as a support for the floor when temporarily placing the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837) like the protrusion H583 in the above 111th embodiment, the worker can operate the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) to displace the slide plate H14562 to the open position, and the protrusion H14563b can be used as a support for the floor when temporarily placing the front frame H14 like the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment.

In this case, in the 124th embodiment, the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 is disposed on the upper part of the protruding portion H14563b (second slide plate H14563). Therefore, when the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837) is temporarily placed with the protruding portion H14563b in contact with the floor surface, the slide plate H14562 (pressing piece H14562a) can prevent the protruding portion H14563b from being deformed or damaged.

In other words, the protrusion H14563b is formed relatively small with respect to the upper and lower plate units H14015 so as not to interfere with the placement of other components. Therefore, if force is concentrated on the protrusion H14563b, there is a risk that the protrusion H14563b will be deformed or damaged.

In contrast, in the 124th embodiment, the protrusion H14563b can be supported by the slide plate H14562, which prevents excessive concentration of force on the protrusion H14563b and prevents the protrusion H14563a from being deformed or damaged. In other words, the slide plate H14562 can be used as a support (reinforcement) for the protrusion H14563b.

In the 124th embodiment, the slide plate H14562 only overlaps the upper part of the protrusion H14563b (the second slide plate H14563), but the slide plate H14562 may be formed to a size that overlaps the front and rear of the protrusion H14563b (i.e., the front-to-rear width of the pressing piece H14562a may be formed larger than the front-to-rear width of the second slide plate H14563, forming an area on the pressing piece H14562a that overlaps the second slide plate H14563 in the front-to-rear direction). In this case, even if a force acts on the protrusion H14563b in the front-to-rear direction, the protrusion H14563b can be supported by the slide plate H14562. As a result, the protrusion H14563a can be prevented from being deformed or damaged.

In addition, in the 124th embodiment, the second slide plate H14563 is slid up and down by the displacement of the slide plate H14562 accompanying the operation of the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951). However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a slide plate that slides when the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837) is released (removed) from the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835) may be provided, and the second slide plate H14563 may be displaced downward by the displacement of the slide plate.

In this case, when the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837) is removed from the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835), the protrusion H14563b can be protruded, so that the protrusion H14563b can be used as a support when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor, like the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment above.

In addition, in the 124th embodiment, the case where the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment is not formed has been described, but the protrusion H583 may be provided. In this case, it is preferable that the protrusion H14563b of the second slide plate H14563 is formed so as to be able to protrude along the front side of the protrusion H583 (at a position adjacent to the front side). With this, when the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837) is opened relative to the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835), if the protrusion H583 is pulled in the opening direction of the front frame H14, the protrusion H14563b can suppress the deformation or damage of the protrusion H583 due to the force. In other words, the protrusion H14563b can be used as a support (reinforcement) for the protrusion H583.

Next, referring to FIG. 1954, the upper and lower tray unit H35015 in the 125th embodiment will be described. In the above 124th embodiment, a case was described in which the second slide plate H14563 is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the slide plate H14562 (ball removal lever H52). However, in the 125th embodiment, a case is created in which the second slide plate H14563 is not displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the slide plate H14562 (ball removal lever H52). Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1954(a) to (d) are cross-sectional views of the upper and lower plate unit H15015 in the 125th embodiment, and correspond to the cross section at line MCMLIIIa in Figure 1952(a). Also, Figures 1954(a) to (d) sequentially show the transition states when the second slide plate H14563 or the engagement piece H15543 is displaced. Furthermore, Figures 1954(a) and (d) show a retracted state in which the protrusion H14563b is retracted to the inside of the upper and lower plate unit H15015, and Figures 1954(b) and (c) show a protruding state in which the protrusion H14563b protrudes from the bottom of the upper and lower plate unit H15015.

As shown in FIG. 1954, the upper and lower plate unit H15015 in the 125th embodiment has an engagement piece H15543 arranged on the bottom side of the first decorative plate H541 of the upper and lower plate unit H14015 in the 124th embodiment described above.

The engagement piece H15543 is a member that engages with the upper surface of the second slide plate H14563 in a protruding position (displaced to a position in which it is in a protruding state) through the openings in the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580, and has an engagement portion H15543a formed in a hook shape on one end side (upper side).

The engagement piece H15543 is supported by a bearing portion H15541f formed on the first decorative plate H541 and is arranged in a rotatable state relative to the first decorative plate H541, and the other end side opposite the side on which the engagement portion H15543a is formed protrudes to the lower side of the upper and lower plate unit H15015 through an opening (not shown) formed in the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580. In other words, the engagement piece H15543 can be operated by the portion protruding from the lower side of the upper and lower plate unit H15015.

Furthermore, the engaging piece H15543 is biased in a direction such that the engaging portion H15543a approaches the second slide plate H14563 by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed between the engaging piece H15543 and the bearing portion H15541f of the first decorative plate H541.

When the protrusion H14563b is retracted inside the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580 (retracted state), the engagement portion H15543a is positioned to abut against the lower end of the second slide plate H14563 at the non-forming portion of the protrusion H14563b. In addition, the abutment surface of the engagement portion H15543a with which the lower end of the second slide plate H14563 abuts is formed at an incline. As a result, when the second slide plate H14563 is displaced from the retracted state to the protruding state, the lower end of the second slide plate H14563 pushes the abutment surface of the engagement portion H15543a outward, causing the engagement piece H15543 to rotate.

According to the upper and lower tray unit H15015 in the 125th embodiment configured as described above, as shown in Figures 1954(a) and 1954(b), when the player operates the ball removal lever H52 (see Figure 1951) to slide the second slide plate H14563 to the extended position, the engagement portion H15543a of the engagement piece H15543 rotates in a direction away from the second slide plate H14563 as the second slide plate H14563 extends, and then the second slide plate H14563 at the non-formed portion of the protrusion H14563b is displaced downward beyond the engagement portion H15543a, and the engagement portion H15543a is again rotated in a direction approaching the second slide plate H14563 by the force of the torsion spring.

In this case, the second slide plate H14563 at the non-formed portion of the protrusion H14563b is positioned below the engaging portion H15543a, so that the engaging portion H15543a engages with the upper surface of the second slide plate H14563, restricting the upward displacement of the second slide plate H14563 (hereinafter referred to as the "restricted state").

In this restricted state, as shown in FIG. 1954(c), even if the player operates the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) to displace the slide plate H14562 to the closed position (a position blocking the discharge port H561a (see FIG. 1953)), the engagement portion H1553a gets caught on the second slide plate H14563, thereby restricting the displacement of the second slide plate H14563 in the retracting direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1954(d), in the 125th embodiment, the upper and lower tray unit H15015 disengages the engagement portion H15543a from the second slide plate H14563 when the player operates the engagement piece H15543 protruding from the lower side of the upper and lower tray unit H15015. This displaces the second slide plate H14563 in the retracting direction, and the protruding portion H14563b is retracted to the inside of the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580 (i.e., the state shown in FIG. 1954(a)).

In other words, in the 125th embodiment, the player can cause the protrusion H14563b to protrude (put into an extended state) from the lower side of the upper and lower tray unit H15015 by operating the ball removal lever H52 (see Figure 1951)), and the protrusion H14563b can be maintained in a protruding state (extended state) from the lower side of the upper and lower tray unit H15015 even after the ball removal operation is completed (after the ball removal lever H52 is returned to its original position).

In addition, when the protrusion H14563b is extended from the lower side of the upper and lower tray unit H15015, the player can retract the protrusion H14563b to the inside of the lower protective plate H580 at any time.

Furthermore, when the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) is operated (when the slide plate H14562 is displaced to the open position and game balls can be dispensed from the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858)), the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 is positioned above the bulging part H14563a of the second slide plate H14563 as shown in FIG. 1954 (b). Therefore, even if the player operates the engagement piece H15543, the protruding part H14563b can be prevented from being retracted to the inside of the lower protective plate H580. Therefore, when game balls can be dispensed from the lower tray H50, the protruding part H14563b can be prevented from being inadvertently displaced in the retracting direction. As a result, the balls that fall into the box and bounce back can be made to abut against the protruding part H14563b, and the balls discharged from the lower tray H50 can be prevented from flying out from the front of the box.

In addition, when the engagement portion H15543a is engaged with the protrusion H14563b to maintain the state, and the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) is returned to its initial position (the slide plate H14562 is displaced to the closed position (the position that blocks the discharge port H561a (see FIG. 1953))), and then the ball removal lever H52 is operated again to displace the slide plate H14562 to the open position (the position that opens the discharge port H561a), there is no longer a need to displace the second slide plate H14563 downward, so that the contact resistance between the slide plate H14562 and the second slide plate H14563 can be reduced. In other words, since the second slide plate H14563 can be maintained in a downward position, it is no longer necessary to abut the slide plate H14562 against the second slide plate H14563 in order to displace the second slide plate H14563 downward, and the operating resistance of the slide plate H14562 can be reduced accordingly.

Therefore, when not removing balls from the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858) (when the slide plate H14562 is in the closed position (where it blocks the discharge port H561a (see FIG. 1953))), for a player who does not need to displace the protrusion H14563b to a retracted position (where the protrusion H14563b can be in an extended state), the operating resistance of the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) can be reduced, making it easier to operate the ball removal lever H52. In other words, the player can choose whether or not to place the protrusion H14563b in an extended state, depending on the player's preference.

Furthermore, in the 125th embodiment, when the protrusion H14563b is used as a support for the floor when the front frame H14 (see FIG. 1837) is temporarily placed, like the protrusion H583 in the 111th embodiment, the ball removal lever H52 (see FIG. 1951) can be returned to its initial position and the slide plate H14562 can be placed in a closed position that blocks the discharge port H561a (see FIG. 1953). Therefore, even if balls are dispensed into the storage area of the lower tray H50 when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed, the balls can be prevented from being dispensed from the lower tray H50. This prevents the balls from scattering on the floor.

Next, the upper and lower tray units H16015 and the upper decorative unit H16014a in the 126th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1955 and 1956. In the above 124th embodiment, the case where the second slide plate H14563 protrudes from the lower side of the upper and lower tray units H14015 was described, but in the 126th embodiment, the case where the second slide plate H16562 protrudes from the upper decorative unit H16014a will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

1955(a) and (b) are schematic front views of the front frame H16014 in the 126th embodiment, FIG. 1956(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H16014a taken along the MCMLVIa line in FIG. 1955(a), and FIG. 1956(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H16014a taken along the MCMLVIb line in FIG. 1955(b). In addition, FIG. 1955(a) and FIG. 1956(a) show a retracted state in which the board unit H16344 is retracted to the inside of the upper decorative unit H16014a, and FIG. 1955(b) and FIG. 1956(b) show a protruding state in which the board unit H16344 protrudes from the upper decorative unit H16014a. In addition, in Figures 1955 and 1956, the structure of each component is illustrated in a simplified manner to make it easier to understand.

As shown in Figures 1955 and 1956, the front frame H16014 in the 126th embodiment includes a main frame H14d (see Figure 1840) formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape using a metal plate, an upper decorative unit H16014a arranged on the main frame H14d and arranged on the front of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the main frame H14d, and a left decorative unit H16014b extending downward (arrow D direction side) from both the left and right sides (arrow L-R directions) of the upper decorative unit H16014a. It is mainly comprised of 4b and a right side decorative unit H14c, an upper and lower tray unit H16015 that covers the front of the lower side of the main frame H14d, a passage forming unit H140 (see FIG. 1840) that is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the upper and lower tray unit H16015 via the main frame H14d, and a launch position ball throwing unit H170 (see FIG. 1840) that is arranged on the back side of the passage forming unit H140, and is rotatably attached to the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1839).

The upper and lower tray unit H16015 mainly comprises a base member H510 (see FIG. 1859) fastened to the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), an upper tray forming member H520 and an operating handle H51 arranged on the front side of the base member H510, a lower tray forming member H16530 arranged on the front side of the base member H510, and an operating unit H180 (see FIG. 1859) arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H16530.

The lower plate forming member H16530 is a member that constitutes the decorative surface of the upper and lower plate unit H16015, and is arranged in a position that covers the base member H510 when viewed from the front. The lower plate forming member H16530 also includes a lower plate forming unit H550 (see FIG. 1864) that forms the storage space of the lower plate H50 (see FIG. 1858), and a ball removal unit H16560 (see FIG. 1864) that removes balls stored in the lower plate forming unit H550.

The ball removal unit H16560 mainly comprises a storage member H561 (see FIG. 1864) formed in a box shape with an opening on the upper side, a slide plate H562 (see FIG. 1864) arranged inside the storage member H561, a ball removal lever H16052 connected to the slide plate H562 and at least a portion of its front side (arrow F direction side) arranged outside the storage member H561, and a coil spring (not shown) that biases the slide plate H562 and the ball removal lever H16052 in one direction.

The ball removal lever H16052 is a lever that the player operates when ejecting balls stored in the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858) downward. It is connected to the slide plate H562 (see FIG. 1864) and is constantly biased to the right (arrow R direction). By sliding the slide plate H562 to the left (arrow L direction) against this bias, the slide plate H562 is displaced from a closed position (position that blocks the ejection port H561a) to an open position (position that opens the ejection port H561a). In addition, a connecting member H16501 is connected to the ball removal lever H16052 at a position on the rear side of the decorative surface of the upper and lower tray unit H16015.

The connecting member H16501 is formed by bending a metal rod member, and is configured to be able to slide left and right (arrow L-R direction) on the rear side of the upper and lower plate unit H16015, the right side decorative unit H14c, and the upper side decorative unit H16014a, and can be slid left and right in response to the operation of the ball removal lever H16052.

The connecting member H16501 has a slide plate H16502 connected to the end opposite the end connected to the ball removal lever H16052, and is slid left and right by operating the ball removal lever H16052, which allows the slide plate H16502 to be slid left and right.

Next, the upper decorative unit H16014a will be described. The upper decorative unit H16014a mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see Figure 1840), and a decorative unit H16320 that is disposed on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H16320 mainly comprises a decorative unit H330 formed in a box shape with an open rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B), and a light-emitting unit H16340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1845) arranged inside the decorative unit H330.

The light-emitting unit H16340 mainly comprises an attachment member H341 that is fastened to the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the front plate H331, a board unit H16344 that is arranged on the rear side of the attachment member H341 in a state in which it can be displaced in the vertical direction and is configured to be able to emit light, and a covering member H343 that covers the rear side of the board unit H16344 and the attachment member H341.

The board unit H16344 mainly comprises a board member H342 on which a plurality of light-emitting LEDs (light-emitting diodes) H342a that emit light are arranged on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F), a front cover H16345 that covers the front side of the board member H342, a rear cover H16346 that covers the rear side of the board member H342, and a transmission member H16347 that is connected to the rear side of the rear cover H16346.

The front cover H16345 is formed from a transparent resin material that can transmit light, and allows light emitted from the LED H342a of the substrate member H342 arranged on the rear side to pass through toward the front side. This allows the light emitted from the LED H342a to be emitted to the decorative plate H335 through the opening H341a1 (see FIG. 1847) of the mounting member H341, and the decorative plate H335 to be illuminated by the light from the LED H342a.

The transmission member H16347 is a member that transmits driving force to the base unit H16344, and is formed in a position where it can abut against the slide plate H16502 of the connecting member H16501 that is connected to the ball removal lever H16052 of the upper and lower tray unit H16015. In addition, a portion of the lower side of the transmission member H16347 is supported by the inclined surface of the slide plate H16502, and can be displaced upward along the inclined surface as the slide plate H16502 is displaced. Displacement of this transmission member H16347 allows the base unit H16344 to be displaced in the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D).

In the 126th embodiment, when the transmission member H16347 is positioned downward (in a retracted state) (when placed in the position shown in FIG. 1955(a)), the upper end surface of the board unit H16344 is set at a height that is approximately the same as the upper surface of the decorative unit H330, and when the transmission member H16347 is positioned upward (in a protruding state) (when placed in the position shown in FIG. 1955(b)), the upper end surface of the board unit H16344 is set to protrude upward from the decorative unit H330.

According to the front frame H16014 in the 126th embodiment configured as described above, the board unit H16344 can be extended from the upper side of the front frame H16014 in response to the operation of the ball removal lever H16052. This allows the player or a player about to start playing to recognize that the discharge port H561a is open. As a result, if the player forgets that the discharge port H561a has been opened and attempts to store game balls in the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858) (for example, when the storage in the upper tray H17 becomes full and the game balls to be paid out are diverted to the storage area of the lower tray H50), it is possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out from the lower tray H50.

Also, since the LED H342a is disposed on the board unit H16344 that protrudes from the upper side of the front frame H16014, light can be emitted from the outside of the front frame H16014. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the board unit H16344 is protruding (i.e., makes it easier for the player to recognize that the discharge port H561a is open).

Furthermore, when the game state of the pachinko machine H10 reaches a jackpot, game balls are dispensed from the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858), and the player operates the ball removal lever H16052, the LED H342 that emits light can be made to protrude from the front frame H16014, so that the presentation area of the pachinko machine H10 can be increased when a jackpot occurs. As a result, the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, in the 126th embodiment, the upward projection distance when the board unit H16344 is projected from the front frame H16014 is set to a distance that causes the tip to project outward beyond the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835), which is formed slightly larger than the front frame H16014 when viewed from the front. This allows the board unit H16344 and a part of the upper surface of the outer frame H11 to be in contact with the floor surface when the assembled pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) is temporarily placed on the floor. As a result, it can be temporarily placed without being affected by the floor surface, and the pachinko machine H10 can be prevented from falling over.

In the 126th embodiment, when the board unit H16344 is in the extended state (the state shown in FIG. 1955), the slide plate H16502 is disposed below the transmission member H16347. That is, the lower side of the board unit H16344 is supported (reinforced) by the slide plate H16502. This makes it possible to prevent the board unit H16344 from being deformed or damaged when the pachinko machine H10 is temporarily placed on the floor surface with the board unit H16344 in the extended state.

Furthermore, since the tip of the board unit H16344 protrudes outward beyond the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835), the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) can be temporarily placed in a tilted state toward the rear. This allows the weight acting on the outer frame H11 to be greater than the weight acting on the board unit H16344. As a result, damage to the upper decorative unit H16014a, which serves as the decorative surface, can be suppressed. Furthermore, if the temporarily placed pachinko machine H10 falls over, it is more likely to fall toward the rear side than the front side, so if the pachinko machine H10 falls over, it is prevented from falling toward the front side, which serves as the decorative surface, and damage to the decorative surface (cracks and scratches) can be suppressed.

In addition, by increasing the amount of projection of the board unit H16344 from the front frame H16014, it is possible to make it difficult for players to see the data display (data display showing the number of jackpots and number of games played) located above the pachinko machine H10 in the pachinko parlor during or immediately before playing. This makes it easier for players to recognize that the board unit H16344 is projecting (i.e., makes it easier for players to recognize that the ejection port H561a is open).

In the above 126th embodiment, the case where the board member H342 is arranged only on the displacing board unit H16344 has been described, but a fixed board member H342 may be separately arranged in addition to the board member H344 of the board unit H16344, so that the decorative plate H345 is always illuminated by the fixed board member H342 regardless of the displacement of the board unit H16344, thereby increasing the illuminated area when viewed from the front when the board unit H16344 is in the extended state.

In the above 126th embodiment, a case was described in which a board member H342 equipped with an LED H342a capable of emitting light was placed on a displaceable board unit H16344, but the board unit H16344 may not be equipped with a board member H342. For example, the board unit H16344 may be composed of only a rear cover H16346.

Furthermore, in the above 126th embodiment, when the board unit H16344 does not protrude from the upper decorative unit H16014a (as shown in FIG. 1955(a)), the light emitted from the LED H342a is emitted to the decorative plate H335 through the opening H341a1 (see FIG. 1847) of the mounting member H341, and the decorative plate H335 is illuminated with the light from the LED H342a. However, when the board unit H16344 does not protrude from the upper decorative unit H16014a, the light may be reflected by the decorative plate H335 or the mounting member H341, and the light may be emitted from the lower side (lower panel H333) of the upper decorative unit H16014a.

Next, the upper and lower tray unit H17015 in the 127th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1957(a). In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the lower surface of the operation unit H180 abuts against the inserted portion H555e was described, but in the upper and lower tray unit H17015 in the 127th embodiment, the case where the lower surface of the operation unit H180 abuts against the convex portion H17515 will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1957 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H17015 in the 127th embodiment. Note that Figure 1957 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXVIIIa in Figure 1858.

As shown in FIG. 1957(a), the upper and lower tray unit H17015 in the 127th embodiment mainly comprises a base member H17510 fastened to the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), an upper tray forming member H520 and an operating handle H51 arranged on the front side of the base member H17510, a lower tray forming member H17530 arranged on the front side of the base member H17510 and the upper tray forming member H520, and an operating unit H180 arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H17530.

The base member H17510 is formed in a plate shape that covers the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and has sidewalls that bend toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) on the left-right (arrow L-R) edges and the lower edge, and is disposed on the main frame H14d with the main frame H14d housed inside the sidewalls.

The base member H17510 is mainly provided with a plurality of fastening holes H511 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main frame H14d, a plurality of insertion holes H512 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side of the main frame H14d toward the front side (arrow F direction side), an upper tray ball inlet portion H513 and a sending ball outlet portion H516 that open to the rear side of the storage area of the upper tray H17, a lower tray ball inlet portion H514 that opens to the rear side of the storage area of the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), a convex portion H17515 that protrudes convexly toward the front side, and a base side retaining hole H517 in which the cylinder lock H20 is arranged inside, and is formed from a colored (black in the 111th embodiment) non-transparent resin material.

The convex portion H17515 is inserted into a pair of side walls H17555f of the lower plate forming member H17530 (described later) and is a portion that positions the lower plate forming member H530 relative to the base member H510, and is formed in a position facing the insertion space formed by the pair of side walls H17555f in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The convex portion H17515 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and mainly comprises an upper surface portion H17515d forming the upper surface, a lower surface side inclined portion H515b forming the lower surface, and a side surface side inclined portion H515c forming the left and right side surfaces. The convex portion H515 is formed from a resin material that is slightly elastically deformable by a force acting downward.

The upper surface portion H17515d extends in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface inclined portion H515b is formed to be inclined upward toward the front side (the direction of arrow F). In addition, the pair of side surface inclined portions H515c are formed to be inclined in a direction approaching the front side. The upper surface portion H17515d, the lower surface inclined portion H515b, and the side surface inclined portion H515c form the convex portion H17515 so that its thickness in the top, bottom, left, and right directions in a front view becomes thinner (tapered shape) toward the protruding tip side.

In addition, an elastically deformable elastic member H17515e is arranged on the upper part of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upper surface portion H17515d, and the lower surface of the operation unit H180 arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H17530 is arranged in contact with the elastic member H17515e.

A groove-shaped recess H515b1 is formed in the center of the lower inclined portion H515b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) from the protruding tip of the convex portion H515 toward the base end, and an engaged portion H515b2 is formed in part of the bottom surface of the recess H515b1.

The engaged portion H515b2 is an opening into which the engaging portion H555b1 of the lower plate forming member H17530 described later engages, and is formed at the end of the base end of the recessed portion H515b1 that is formed in a groove shape from the protruding tip of the convex portion H515 toward the base end.

The lower tray forming member H17530 is mainly comprised of a decorative unit H540 which is formed in a shape that covers the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H17510 and the upper tray forming member H520 and forms the decorative surface of the front side of the upper and lower tray unit H17015, a lower tray constituent unit H17550 which constitutes the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), and a ball removal unit H560 for removing balls stored in the lower tray H50.

The lower tray component unit H17550 mainly comprises a bottom plate H17551 that forms the bottom surface of the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858), and a side plate H552 that forms part of the upper surface of the lower tray H50 and abuts against the outer edge of the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom plate H17551.

The bottom plate H17551 mainly comprises a bottom surface portion H553, a front side wall H554 erected upward along the outer edge of the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the bottom surface portion H553, and a connecting portion H17555 formed on the outside of the bottom surface portion H553 and connected to the front side wall H554.

The connecting portion H17555 mainly comprises a main body portion H17555d having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and disposed on the first decorative panel H541 side (front side), a pair of side walls H17555f protruding toward the rear side along both left and right edges of the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion H17555d, and a protruding portion H555b protruding toward the rear side from the lower edge of the rear side of the main body portion H17555d, and is entirely formed from a non-transparent resin material. The connecting portion H17555 is formed to be slightly elastically deformable by a force acting downward.

The pair of side walls H17555f are formed so that the width between them can insert the convex portion H17515, and a plurality of guide walls H555c are arranged side by side on the opposing surfaces. When the lower plate forming member H17530 is disposed on the base member H17510, the convex portion H17515 can be inserted between the pair of opposing side walls H17555f.

The guide walls H555c are members that adjust the position of the convex portion H515 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when the convex portion H17515 of the base member H17510 is inserted into the inserted portion H555e, and multiple guide walls H555c are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side walls of the inserted portion H555e.

The protruding portion H555b protrudes toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B) and includes an engagement portion H555b1 formed in a convex shape on the upper surface of the protruding tip. The protruding portion H555b is a portion that is guided by the recessed portion H515b1 of the protruding portion H17515 when the protruding portion H17515 of the base member H17510 is inserted between the pair of opposing side walls H17555f, and is formed at a position corresponding to the groove formed by the recessed portion H515b1.

The engaging portion H555b1 is a portion that engages with the engaged portion H515b2 of the base member H17510, and is provided to protrude upward from the upper surface of the protruding portion H555b, and the cross section cut in the front-rear direction is formed to be approximately triangular. The inclination of this cross section makes it easier to bend the protruding portion H555b when the convex portion H17515 of the base member H17510 is inserted between the pair of opposing side walls H17555f, or when the convex portion H17515 of the base member H17510 is pulled out from between the pair of opposing side walls H17555f. As a result, the work of attaching the lower plate forming member H17530 to the base member H17510 and the work of removing the lower plate forming member H17530 from the base member H17510 can be simplified.

With the upper and lower tray unit H17015 configured as described above, the operation unit H180 is placed on the upper side (upper surface portion H17515d) of the convex portion H17515, on whose lower side (lower surface inclined portion H515b) the engaged portion H515b2 is formed, and the engaging portion H555b1 engages with the engaged portion H515b2 from below the convex portion H17515. This prevents the engaged portion H515b2 from being disengaged from the engaging portion H555b1 when the operation unit H180 is operated by a player or when the operation unit H180 is driven.

To explain in more detail, when the operation unit H180 is operated by a player or when the operation unit H180 is driven, a force is likely to be input in a direction toward the lower side of the operation unit H180, and the convex portion H17515 on which the operation unit H180 is placed is likely to deform toward the lower side.

In the 127th embodiment, the engaging portion H555b1 is inserted from the direction in which the convex portion H17515 is easily displaced by the operation unit H180, so that when the convex portion H17515 is displaced downward by the operation unit H180, the engaged portion H515b2 can be displaced in the direction in which the engaging portion H555b1 is inserted into the inside of the engaged portion H515b2. As a result, the engagement between the engaging portion H555b1 and the engaged portion H515b2 can be prevented from being released.

Next, the upper and lower tray unit H18015 in the 128th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1957(b). In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the engaging portion H555b1 engages with the engaged portion H515b2 from below is described, but in the 128th embodiment, the case where the engaging portion H18555b1 engages with the engaged portion H18515a2 from above is described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1957 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H18015 in the 128th embodiment. Note that Figure 1957 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXVIII in Figure 1858.

As shown in FIG. 1957(b), the upper and lower tray unit H18015 in the 128th embodiment mainly comprises a base member H18510 fastened to the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), an upper tray forming member H520 and an operating handle H51 arranged on the front side of the base member H18510, a lower tray forming member H18530 arranged on the front side of the base member H18510 and the upper tray forming member H520, and an operating unit H180 arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H18530.

The base member H18510 is formed in a plate shape that covers the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see Figure 1840), and has sidewalls that bend toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) on the left-right (arrow L-R) edges and the lower edge, and is disposed on the main frame H14d with the main frame H14d housed inside the sidewalls.

The base member H18510 is mainly provided with a plurality of fastening holes H511 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main frame H14d, a plurality of insertion holes H512 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side of the main frame H14d toward the front side (arrow F direction side), an upper tray ball inlet section H513 and a sending ball outlet section H516 that open to the rear side of the storage area of the upper tray H17, a lower tray ball inlet section H514 that opens to the rear side of the storage area of the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), a convex section H18515 that protrudes convexly toward the front side, and a base side retaining hole H517 in which the cylinder lock H20 is arranged inside, and is formed from a colored (black in the 111th embodiment) non-transparent resin material.

The convex portion H18515 is inserted between a pair of opposing side walls H17555f of the lower plate forming member H18530 (described later) and serves to position the lower plate forming member H530 relative to the base member H510, and is formed in a position facing the insertion space formed by the inserted portion H18555e in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The convex portion H18515 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and mainly comprises an upper surface side inclined portion H18515a forming the upper surface, a lower surface side inclined portion H18515b forming the lower surface, and a side surface side inclined portion H515c forming the left and right side surfaces. The convex portion H18515 is formed from a resin material that is slightly elastically deformable by a force acting downward.

The upper inclined portion H18515a is formed with a downward inclination toward the front side (the direction of arrow F), and the lower inclined portion H18515b is formed with an upward inclination toward the front side. In addition, a pair of side inclined portions H515c are formed with an inclination approaching the front side. Due to these upper inclined portion H18515a, lower inclined portion H18515b, and side inclined portion H515c, the convex portion H18515 is formed so that its thickness in the vertical, horizontal, and vertical directions in a front view becomes thinner (tapered shape) toward the protruding tip side.

The upper inclined portion H18515a is provided with a groove-shaped recess H18515a1 extending from the protruding tip of the convex portion H18515 toward the base end in the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and an engaged portion H18515a2 is formed as an opening in part of the bottom surface of the recess H515b1.

The engaged portion H18515a2 is an opening into which the engaging portion H18555b1 of the lower plate forming member H18530 described later engages, and is formed at the end of the base end of the recess H515b1 that is formed in a groove shape from the protruding tip of the convex portion H18515 toward the base end.

The recess H18515a1 is a guide groove that guides the protrusion H18555b, on which the engaging portion H18555b1 of the lower plate forming member H18530 described later is formed, to the engaged portion H18515a2, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness dimension of the protrusion H18555b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). By guiding the protrusion H18555b to the recess H18515a1, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion H18555b1 from shifting in position relative to the engaged portion H18515a2, making it easier for the engaging portion H18555b1 to engage with the engaged portion H18515a2.

The lower tray forming member H18530 is mainly comprised of a decorative unit H540 which is formed in a shape that covers the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H18510 and the upper tray forming member H520 and forms the decorative surface of the front side of the upper and lower tray unit H18015, a lower tray constituent unit H18550 which constitutes the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), and a ball removal unit H560 for removing balls stored in the lower tray H50.

The lower tray component unit H18550 mainly comprises a bottom plate H18551 that forms the bottom surface of the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858), and a side plate H552 that forms part of the upper surface of the lower tray H50 and abuts against the outer edge of the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom plate H18551.

The bottom plate H18551 mainly comprises a bottom surface portion H553, a front side wall H554 erected upward along the outer edge of the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the bottom surface portion H553, and a connecting portion H18555 formed on the outside of the bottom surface portion H553 and connected to the front side wall H554.

The connecting portion H18555 mainly comprises a main body portion H18555d having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and disposed on the first decorative panel H541 side (front side), an inserted portion H18555e formed in a gate shape with an open upper side when viewed from the rear and connected to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion H18555d, and a protruding portion H18555b protruding from the upper edge of the main body portion H18555d toward the rear side, and is formed entirely from a non-transparent resin material. The connecting portion H18555 is formed so that it can be slightly elastically deformed by a force acting on the downward side.

The inserted portion H18555e is formed in a gate shape with an open upper side when viewed from the rear, and is formed in a shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The inserted portion H18555e is the portion into which the convex portion H18515 of the base member H18510 is inserted when the lower tray component unit H18550 is disposed on the base member H18510, and is disposed at a position corresponding to the convex portion H18515.

The inserted portion H18555e also has a number of guide walls H555c erected from opposing side surfaces toward the inside of the inserted portion H18555e, and the guide walls H555c are formed so that the position of the convex portion H18515 can be determined to the left or right.

The protrusion H18555b protrudes upward from the rear end of the main body H18555d and is formed in a generally L-shaped cross section that is bent toward the rear side (arrow B direction), and includes an engagement portion H18555b1 formed in a convex shape on the underside of the protruding tip on the rear side. In addition, the protrusion H18555b is a portion that is guided by the recess H18515a1 of the protruding portion H18515 when the protruding portion H18515 of the base member H18510 is inserted into the inserted portion H18555e, and is formed at a position corresponding to the groove formed by the recess H18515a1.

The engaging portion H18555b1 is a portion that engages with the engaged portion H18515a2 of the base member H18510, and is provided to protrude downward from the underside of the protruding portion H18555b, and the cross section cut in the front-to-rear direction is formed to be approximately triangular. The inclination of this cross section makes it easier to bend the protruding portion H18555b when the convex portion H18515 of the base member H18510 is inserted into the inserted portion H18555e, or when the convex portion H18515 of the base member H18510 is pulled out from the inserted portion H18555e. As a result, the work of attaching the lower plate forming member H18530 to the base member H18510 and the work of removing the lower plate forming member H18530 from the base member H18510 can be simplified.

The upper and lower plate unit H18015 configured as described above is formed so that the engaging portion H18555b1 can be inserted into the engaged portion H18515a2 from above, and the operation unit H180 is placed on the upper side of the protruding portion H18555b where the engaging portion H18555b1 is formed, so that the operation unit H180 can be supported by the connecting portion H18555. This stabilizes the position of the operation unit H180 so that it does not wobble, and stabilizes the operation of the operation unit H180.

The inserted portion H18555e (connecting portion H18555) is supported in a cantilevered state on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the lower tray forming member H18530. Therefore, if excessive pressure on the operation unit H180 (button portion H181) acts on the connecting portion H18555, the force acting on the operation unit H180 can be released by the connecting portion H18555 by displacing the non-support side (arrow F direction side) of the connecting portion H18555 in the operation direction (downward) of the operation unit H180.

That is, since the operation unit H180 is supported on the connecting part H18555 that is cantilevered on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the lower plate forming member H18530, when a force that presses the operation unit H180 excessively acts on the connecting part H18555, the connecting part H18555 can be elastically deformed. In this case, since the operation unit H180 and the connecting part H18555 are fastened to each other, the contact position (contact state) between the operation unit H180 and the connecting part H18555 can be changed with the elastic deformation of the connecting part H18555. That is, the operation unit H180 can be slid (slid) against the upper surface of the connecting part H18555. As a result, when a force acting on the operation unit H180 acts on the connecting part H18555, it is possible to suppress the connecting part H18555 from being damaged or the operation unit H180 from being damaged.

Therefore, when the operating force acting on the operation unit in the operating direction (downward) is within a predetermined range, the operation unit H180 can be supported by the connecting portion H18555. This stabilizes the position of the operation unit H180 so that it does not wobble, and stabilizes the operation of the operation unit H180.

On the other hand, if the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operating unit H180 exceeds a predetermined range, the connecting part H18555 can be elastically deformed to release the external force (the operating force can be distributed to the base member H18510 and the connecting part H18555. This can prevent damage to the operating unit H180, the lower plate forming member H18530, and the base member H18510.

In addition, in this case, since the elastically deformed connecting portion H18555 is formed on the lower plate forming member H18530 that is arranged on the front side of the upper and lower plate units H15 (i.e., the decorative side), when the connecting portion H18555 is elastically deformed to release an external force, it is possible to prevent the decorative surface of the lower plate forming member H18530 from bending. In other words, when the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operation unit H180 exceeds a predetermined range, if the operating force is distributed to the base member H18510 and the connecting portion H18555, the base member H18510 on which the operation unit H180 is arranged is also likely to be elastically deformed in accordance with the elastic deformation of the connecting portion H18555. Therefore, if the base member H18510 were made into a decorative surface, there would be a risk that the appearance of the decorative surface would deteriorate as the operation unit H180 is operated (the decorative surface would bend and gaps would form between the parts), but by making the lower tray forming member H18530, on which the connecting portion H18555 is formed, into a decorative surface, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

Furthermore, in the 128th embodiment, the connecting portion H18555 having the inserted portion H18555e has an elastic member H558 disposed on the upper surface side of the main body portion H18555d, and the operation unit H180 is disposed in a state in which the lower surface of the operation unit H180 abuts against the elastic member H558. To explain in more detail, the operation unit H180 is disposed in a state in which the lower surface of the operation unit H180 abuts against the upper surface of the main body portion H18555d via the elastic member H558.

Therefore, when the connecting part H18555 is elastically deformed by the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operation unit H180, the elastic member H558 interposed between the operation unit H180 and the connecting part H18555 is elastically deformed, thereby preventing the lower surface of the operation unit H180 from rubbing against the upper surface of the connecting part H18555. That is, with the elastic member H558 in contact with the lower surface of the operation unit H180 and the upper surface of the connecting part H18555, the operation unit H180 can be slid (slid) against the upper surface of the connecting part H18555. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower surface of the operation unit H180 and the upper surface of the connecting part H18555 from rubbing against each other, generating abnormal noise, and preventing their contact surfaces from being damaged (wear).

Next, we will explain the case where the connecting part H18555 is elastically deformed beyond a predetermined range due to the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operating unit H180.

As described above, the protruding portion H18555b of the connecting portion H18555 is disposed on the upper side of the convex portion H18515 and is inserted along the concave portion H18515a1 of the convex portion H18515. In this case, the protruding portion H18555b is disposed with a predetermined gap between the lower surface side and the inner surface of the concave portion H18515a1. Therefore, when the connecting portion H18555 is elastically deformed beyond a predetermined range by the operating force of the operating direction side (downward side) of the operation unit H180, the lower surface of the protruding portion H18555b can be abutted against the inner surface of the concave portion H18515a1 to suppress the elastic deformation of the connecting portion H18555. This can suppress damage to the connecting portion H18555.

In addition, in the 128th embodiment, the engaging portion H18555b1 formed on the protruding portion H18555b is formed to protrude downward, and the engaged portion H18515a2 with which the engaging portion H18555b1 engages is formed on the upper side of the convex portion H18515, so that the engaging portion H18555b1 can be engaged with the engaged portion H18515a2 from above.

As a result, when the connecting portion H18555 is elastically deformed beyond a predetermined range due to the operating force on the operating direction side (downward side) of the operating unit H180, the engaging portion H18555b1 is displaced in a direction in which it is inserted into the engaged portion H18515a2.

That is, in the 128th embodiment, the engaged portion H18515a2 is formed on the operation direction side of the operation unit H180 relative to the engaging portion H18555b1, so that when the connecting portion H18555 is elastically deformed beyond a predetermined range by the operating force on the operation direction side (downward side) of the operation unit H180, the engaging portion H18555b1 is displaced in the direction of engaging with the engaged portion H18515a2. This makes it easier to maintain the engaged state between the engaging portion H18555b1 and the engaged portion H18515a2. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging portion H18555b1 and the engaged portion H18515a2 by pressing the operation unit H180.

Furthermore, in the 128th embodiment, the main body H18555d of the connecting part H18555 is disposed below the engaging part H18555b1. As a result, when the pressing force of the operation unit H180 acts on the connecting part H18555 and the connecting part H18555 bends downward starting from the base side (the main body H18555d side), the engaging part H18555b1 can be displaced downward and toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B).

This allows the displacement direction of the engaging portion H18555b1 when the connecting portion H18555 is elastically deformed by displacement in the operation direction of the operation unit H180 to be a direction in which the gap with the engaged portion H18515a2 becomes larger. That is, the engaging portion H18555b1 abuts against the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaged portion H18515a2, thereby preventing the engaging portion H18555b1 from displacing toward the front side, and the elastic deformation of the connecting portion H18555 allows the engaging portion H18555b1 to be separated from the inner surface of the front side of the engaging portion H18555b1.

Therefore, by reducing the distance between the engaging portion H18555b1 and the engaged portion H18515a2 before the connecting portion H18555 is elastically deformed (i.e., when the operating force on the operating direction side (downward) of the operation unit H180 is within a predetermined range), it is possible to suppress the incorrect displacement in the direction of increasing the opposing distance between the lower plate forming member H18530 and the base member H18510, while when the connecting portion H18555 is elastically deformed (i.e., when the operating force on the operating direction side (downward) of the operation unit H180 is outside the predetermined range), it is possible to suppress the engaging portion H18555b1 and the engaged portion H18515a2 from interfering with each other, thereby suppressing the restriction of the relative displacement of the connecting portion H18555 with respect to the convex portion H18515.

Next, referring to FIG. 18359(a), the upper and lower tray unit H19015 in the 129th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which the operation unit H180 and the connecting portion H555 are not fastened to each other, but in the 129th embodiment, a case in which the operation unit H180 and the connecting portion H19555 are fastened to each other will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1958 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H19015 in the 129th embodiment. Note that Figure 1958 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXVIII in Figure 1858.

As shown in FIG. 1958(a), the upper and lower tray unit H19015 in the 129th embodiment mainly comprises a base member H510 fastened to the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), an upper tray forming member H520 and an operating handle H51 arranged on the front side of the base member H510, a lower tray forming member H19530 arranged on the front side of the base member H510, and an operating unit H180 arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H19530.

The lower tray forming member H19530 is mainly comprised of a decorative unit H540 which is formed in a shape that covers the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the base member H510 and forms the decorative surface of the front side of the upper and lower tray unit H19015, a lower tray constituent unit H19550 which constitutes the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), and a ball removal unit H560 for removing balls stored in the lower tray H50.

The lower tray component unit H19550 mainly comprises a bottom plate H19551 that forms the bottom surface of the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858) and a side plate H552 that forms part of the upper surface of the lower tray H50 and abuts against the outer edge of the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom plate H19551.

The bottom plate H19551 mainly comprises a bottom portion H553, a front side wall H554 that stands upward along the outer edge of the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the bottom portion H553, and a connecting portion H19555 that is formed on the outside of the bottom portion H553 and continues to the front side wall H554.

The connecting portion H19555 mainly comprises a main body portion H19555d that has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is disposed on the first decorative panel H541 side (front side), and an inserted portion H555e that is formed in a gate shape with an open lower side when viewed from behind and is connected to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion H555d.

The main body H19555d has an insertion hole H19555d1 that opens in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) and through which a screw can be inserted from below. The screw that passes through the insertion hole H19555d1 is screwed into the lower part of the operation unit H180. This fastens and fixes the connection part H19555 and the operation unit H180.

Therefore, in the upper and lower plate unit H19015 in the 129th embodiment, the connecting portion H19555 and the operation unit H180 are fastened together, so that the operation unit H180 and the connecting portion H19555 can be integrated. Therefore, when a force is applied to push the operation unit H180 upward by the connecting portion H19555 after the operation unit H180 is pushed in, only the operation unit H180 is displaced upward, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the operation unit H180 and the connecting portion H19555. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent deformation of the operation unit H180 due to operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 1958(b), the upper and lower plate unit H20015 in the 130th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the connecting portion H555 and the convex portion H515 are engaged with each other is described, but in the 130th embodiment, the case where the connecting portion H20555 and the convex portion H20515 are fastened and fixed will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1958 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H20015 in the 130th embodiment. Note that Figure 1958 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the upper and lower tray unit H15 taken along line MDCCCLXVIII in Figure 1858.

As shown in FIG. 1958(b), the upper and lower tray unit H20015 in the 130th embodiment mainly comprises a base member H20510 fastened to the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), an upper tray forming member H520 and an operating handle H51 arranged on the front side of the base member H20510, a lower tray forming member H20530 arranged on the front side of the base member H20510 and the upper tray forming member H520, and an operating unit H180 arranged between the upper tray forming member H520 and the lower tray forming member H20530.

The base member H20510 is formed in a plate shape that covers the lower front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and has sidewalls that bend toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) on the left-right (arrow L-R) edges and the lower edge, and is disposed on the main frame H14d with the main frame H14d housed inside the sidewalls.

The base member H20510 is mainly provided with a plurality of fastening holes H511 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main frame H14d, a plurality of insertion holes H512 drilled to allow screws to be inserted from the rear side of the main frame H14d toward the front side (arrow F direction side), an upper tray ball inlet portion H513 and a sending ball outlet portion H516 that open to the rear side of the storage area of the upper tray H17, a lower tray ball inlet portion H514 that opens to the rear side of the storage area of the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), a convex portion H20515 that protrudes convexly toward the front side, and a base side retaining hole H517 in which the cylinder lock H20 is arranged inside, and is formed from a colored (black in the 111th embodiment) non-transparent resin material.

The convex portion H20515 is disposed opposite the connecting portion H20555 of the lower plate forming member H20530 described later in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B), and is the portion that is fastened to the connecting portion H20555. It has an insertion hole H20515f that opens in the front-rear direction in the center when viewed from the front and through which a screw can be inserted.

The lower tray forming member H20530 is mainly comprised of a decorative unit H540 which is formed in a shape that covers the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H20510 and the upper tray forming member H520 and forms the decorative surface of the front side of the upper and lower tray unit H20015, a lower tray constituent unit H20550 which constitutes the lower tray H50 (see Figure 1858), and a ball removal unit H560 for removing balls stored in the lower tray H50.

The lower tray component unit H20550 mainly comprises a bottom plate H20551 that forms the bottom surface of the lower tray H50 (see FIG. 1858) and a side plate H552 that forms part of the upper surface of the lower tray H50 and abuts against the outer edge of the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom plate H20551.

The bottom plate H20551 mainly comprises a bottom surface portion H553, a front side wall H554 that stands upward along the outer edge of the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the bottom surface portion H553, and a connecting portion H20555 that is formed on the outside of the bottom surface portion H553 and continues to the front side wall H554.

The connecting portion H20555 is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and has a fastening hole H20555g on the rear side (arrow B direction side) into which a screw can be screwed. In addition, the connecting portion H20555 is sized so that the operation unit H180 can abut against the upper surface, and the rear side can abut against the protruding tip surface of the convex portion H20515 of the base member H20510.

The fastening hole H20555g is a portion into which a screw is inserted from the rear side of the base member H20510 through the insertion hole H20515f formed in the convex portion H515, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole H20515f. The connecting portion H20555 and the convex portion H20515 are fastened and fixed together by screwing into the fastening hole H20555g through the insertion hole H20515f.

According to the upper and lower plate unit H20015 in the 130th embodiment, the connecting portion H20555 and the convex portion H20515 are fastened and fixed, so that both the front and rear sides of the connecting portion H20555 and the convex portion H2015 are held. Therefore, when the operation unit H180 is pushed downward, the operation unit H180 is supported by the connecting portion H20555 and the convex portion H20515, and the force pushing the operation unit H180 can be prevented from displacing the operation unit H180 downward.

Next, the rocking device H21730 in the 131st embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1959 and 1960. In the above 111th embodiment, the driving means H780 is rotated relative to the base means H770 by the centrifugal force of the weight member H782 of the driving means H780. In the 131st embodiment, however, the driving means H21780 is rotated relative to the base means H770 by the impact of the abutment means H21786 of the driving means H21780 abutting against the upper cover member H21783 and the lower cover member H21784. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1959(a) is a cross-sectional view of the oscillating device H21730 in the 131st embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in Figure 1898(a), Figure 1959(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the drive motor H781 and the contact means H21786, and Figures 1960(a) to 18351(d) are cross-sectional views of the oscillating device H21730, which correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in Figure 1898(a).

In addition, Fig. 1960(a) to Fig. 18351(d) sequentially show the transition states of the abutment means H21786, with Fig. 1960(a) showing the state in which the abutment means H21786 abuts against the upper cover member H21783, and Fig. 1960(c) showing the state in which the abutment means H21786 abuts against the lower cover member H21784. Also, in Fig. 1960(a) and Fig. 1960(c), the direction in which the impact from the abutment means H21786 acts is shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 1960, the rocking device H21730 in the 131st embodiment mainly comprises a base means H770 disposed on the back plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a drive means H21780 journaled on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base means H770, and a displacement member H790 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the drive means H21780 via the base means H770.

The driving means H21780 mainly comprises a driving motor H781 arranged with the driving shaft H781a protruding toward the rear side (arrow B direction), abutment means H21786 connected to the driving shaft H781a of the driving motor H781, an upper cover member H21783 covering the upper side of the driving motor H781 and the abutment means H21786, and a lower cover member H21784 covering the lower side of the driving motor H781 and the abutment means H21785.

The abutment means H21786 mainly comprises a first member H21786a having an insertion hole H21786a1 through which the drive shaft H781a of the drive motor H781 is inserted, a second member H21786b connected to the end of the first member H21786a opposite the side where the insertion hole H21786a1 is formed in a state in which it can be displaced relative to the first member H21786a, an axis member H21786c that supports the first member H21786a and the second member H21786b in a state in which they can be displaced relative to each other, and a spring member H21786d that biases the second member H21786b in a direction to return it to a predetermined position relative to the first member H21786a.

The first member H21786a is connected to the drive shaft H781a of the drive motor H781 and is rotatable around the rotation axis of the drive shaft H781a as the drive shaft H781a rotates.

The second member H21786b is disposed at the end opposite the side where the insertion hole H21786a1 of the first member H21786a is formed, in a state where it can rotate relative to the first member H21786a by the shaft member H21786c, and when no external force is acting on the second member H21786b, it is disposed in a straight line radially outward from the center of the insertion hole H21786a1 of the first member H21786a by the spring member H21786d.

The upper cover member H21783 is mainly composed of a cover portion H21783a formed in a box shape with an open lower side (arrow D direction side) to cover the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the drive motor H781 and the abutment means H21786, a protruding portion H783b protruding upward from both the left and right sides of the cover portion H21783a and having a storage recess H783b1 formed at the upper end of the upper side recessed toward the back side, an upper shaft portion H783c protruding upward from the upper surface of the cover portion H21783a in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the upper shaft support portion H771b1 of the base means H770, and an upper protruding portion H21783a1 protruding downward from the lower surface of the cover portion H21783a and having a tip disposed on the displacement trajectory of the second member H21786b, and is formed from a light-impermeable resin material.

The lower cover member H21784 is mainly composed of a cover portion H21784a formed in a box shape with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) to cover the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the drive motor H781 and the abutment means H21786, a lower shaft portion H784b that protrudes cylindrically downward from the lower surface of the cover portion H21784a and is inserted into the lower shaft support portion H772b1 of the base means H770, an abutted portion H784c that protrudes downward from the edge of the rear side of the lower cover member H784 and has an elastic body H785 disposed on the front side, and a lower protruding portion H21784a1 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the cover portion H21784a and has a tip disposed on the displacement trajectory of the second member H21786b, and is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material.

Next, the operation of the rocking device H21730 in the 131st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1960.

As shown in Fig. 1960(a) to Fig. 1960(d), in the rocking device H21730 in the 131st embodiment, when the abutment means H21786 is rotated by the drive motor H781, the second member H21786b of the abutment means H21786 is displaced while abutting against the upper protrusion H21783a1 of the upper cover member H21783 and the lower protrusion H21784a1 of the lower cover member H21784 (see Fig. 1960(a) and Fig. 1960(c)).

In this case, the impact of the second member H21786b abutting against the upper protrusion H21783a1 and the lower protrusion H21784a1 displaces the rear side of the driving means H21780 in the abutment direction of the second member H21786b.

To explain in more detail, as shown in FIG. 1960(a), when the second member H21786b abuts against the upper protrusion H21783a1 from the left side (arrow L direction) toward the right side (arrow R direction) in front view, the back side of the driving means H21780 is displaced to the right. As a result, the driving means H21780 is rotated counterclockwise in top view (front side to the left) with respect to the base means H770 around the shafts H783c and H784b, and the driving means H21780 is brought into a left-facing state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1960(c), when the second member H21786b abuts against the upper protrusion H21783a1 from the right side (arrow R direction) toward the left side (arrow L direction) in front view, the back side of the driving means H21780 is displaced to the left. As a result, the driving means H21780 is rotated clockwise in top view (the front side is to the right) with the shafts H783c, H784b as axes relative to the base means H770, and the driving means H21780 is in a right-facing state.

After the second member H21786b abuts against the upper protrusion H21783a1 and the lower protrusion H21784a1, it is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the first member H21786a to a position where it overcomes the upper protrusion H21783a1 and the lower protrusion H21784a1, and is then positioned radially outward from the center of the insertion hole H21786a1 of the first member H21786a in a straight line by the biasing force of the spring member H21786d, as shown in Figures 1960(b) and 1960(d), and is again positioned so that it can abut against the upper protrusion H21783a1 and the lower protrusion H21784a1.

Therefore, in the oscillating device H21730 of the 131st embodiment, by continuing to drive the drive motor H781 and rotating the first member H21786a in one direction, the second member H21786b can be repeatedly abutted against the upper protrusion H21783a1 and the lower protrusion H21784a1, and the position of the drive means H21780 relative to the base means H770 can be repeatedly changed between a rightward facing state and a leftward facing state.

Next, the oscillating device H22730 in the 132nd embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1961 and 1962. In the above 111th embodiment, the position of the weight member H782 does not change relative to the drive shaft H781a. In the 132nd embodiment, the position of the weight member H22787b changes relative to the drive shaft H781a. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1961 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the oscillating device H22730 in the 132nd embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in Figure 1898 (a), Figure 1961 (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the drive motor H781 and the displacement means H22787, and Figures 1962 (a) to 18351 (c) are cross-sectional views of the oscillating device H22730, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCCCXCVIIIb in Figure 1898 (a). Note that Figures 1962 (a) to 18353 (c) sequentially show the transition states of the displacement means H22787.

As shown in FIG. 1961, the rocking device H22730 in the 132nd embodiment mainly comprises a base means H770 disposed on the back plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a drive means H22780 journaled on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base means H770, and a displacement member H790 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the drive means H21780 via the base means H770.

The driving means H22780 mainly comprises a driving motor H781 arranged with the driving shaft H781a protruding toward the rear side (arrow B direction), a displacement means H22787 connected to the driving shaft H781a of the driving motor H781, an upper cover member H783 covering the upper side of the driving motor H781 and the displacement means H22787, and a lower cover member H784 covering the lower side of the driving motor H781 and the abutment means H21785.

The displacement means H22787 mainly comprises a cylindrical rotating base H22787a having an insertion hole H22787a1 at its center through which the drive shaft H781a of the drive motor H781 is inserted, a weight member H22787b disposed on the outside of the rotating base H22787a, a rod-shaped guide member H22787d connected to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating base H22787a, and a coil spring H22787c through which the guide member H22787d is inserted.

The guide member H22787d has one end connected to the outer circumferential surface of the rotating base H22787a and an engagement portion H22787d1 formed with an expanded diameter at the end of the other end. The engagement portion H22787d1 is a member for preventing the coil spring H22787c from slipping out of the guide member H22787d, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring H22787c.

The weight member H22787b is a member that applies centrifugal force to rotate the driving means H22780, and is made of a relatively heavy metal material such as lead. The weight member H22787b also has an insertion hole H22787b1 through which the guide member H22787d is inserted, and is disposed in a state in which it can slide along the guide member H22787d. The weight member H22787b is also biased by the coil spring H22787c in a direction approaching the rotating base H22787a, and is disposed in a state in which it abuts against the outer circumferential surface of the rotating base H22787a when no centrifugal force is acting on the weight member H22787b.

Next, the operation of the rocking device H22730 in the 132nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1962.

As shown in FIG. 1962(a) to FIG. 1962(c), in the oscillating device H21730 in the 132nd embodiment, the weight member H22787b is rotated by rotating the rotation base H22787a through the drive of the drive motor H781.

In this case, as the weight member H22787b rotates, centrifugal force acts on the weight member H22787b, displacing it in a direction away from the rotation axis against the biasing force of the coil spring H22787c. This displacement of the weight member H22787b increases the centrifugal force acting on the driving means H22780 when the weight member H22787b is rotated.

In addition, in the 132nd embodiment, the rotation speed of the weight member H22787b is slowed down to reduce the centrifugal force acting on the weight member H22787b, making it difficult for the weight member H22787b to separate from the rotation axis, thereby reducing the centrifugal force acting from the weight member H22787b to the driving means H22780 when the weight member H22787b is rotated.

This allows the range of adjustment to be increased, for example, by slowing down the rotation speed of the displacement means H22787 and reducing the centrifugal force of the weight member H787b acting on the drive means H22780 to slow down the displacement speed of the drive means H22780 relative to the base means H770, or conversely, by increasing the rotation speed of the displacement means H22787 and increasing the centrifugal force of the weight member H787b acting on the drive means H22780 to speed up the displacement speed of the drive means H22780 relative to the base means H770.

Next, referring to FIG. 1963, the launch position ball sending unit H23170 in the 133rd embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which a recess H821a1 is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the launch path of the game ball by the launching means H830, but in the 133rd embodiment, a case is described in which a second recess H23871 is also formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the launch path of the game ball by the launching means H830. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1963(a) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position ball throwing unit H23170 and ball launching unit H112a in the 133rd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCMVa in Figure 1901, and Figure 1963(b) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position ball throwing unit H23170 and ball launching unit H112a, which corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCMVb in Figure 1901.

As shown in Figures 1963(a) and 1963(b), the launch position ball throwing unit H23170 in the 133rd embodiment mainly comprises a front case H860 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) and having a front opening H171, a rear case H23870 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front case H860 and having a rear opening H172, and a ball throwing means H880 arranged between the front case H860 and the rear case H23870.

The rear case H23870 in the 133rd embodiment faces the rear portion H821a of the ball launching unit H112a, and the surface that forms the front side (arrow F direction) of the launch path by the launching means H830 is formed to be inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) as it approaches the launch direction side (arrow L direction) of the game ball by the launching means H830, and is provided with a second recess H23871 recessed in a groove shape on the front side along the launch direction of the game ball.

The second recess H23871 is recessed on the rear side of the rear case H23870 toward the front side with a radius larger than the radius of the game ball, and is formed parallel to the direction in which the game ball is launched by the launching means H830 (the direction of the arrow L). In addition, it is formed at a position where it partially overlaps in the front-rear direction with the recess H821a1 formed in the rear part H821a of the ball launching unit H112a.

With the launch position ball sending unit H23170 and ball launching unit H112a formed as described above, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 abuts against the inner surface (back portion H821a or back portion H23870) of the flow path (passage surrounded by the launch rail H112a1, back portion H821a, and back portion case H23870), the reaction force acting on the game ball in the abutment direction (front-to-back direction) can be suppressed by the recess H821a1 or the second recess H23871. The game ball can be prevented from going wild due to the reaction force received from the inner surface (back portion H821a or back portion case H23870). As a result, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized.

In other words, because it is formed on both sides (the rear portion H821a and the rear case H23870) of the inner surface of the flow path (the passage surrounded by the launch rail H112a1, the rear portion H821a, and the rear case H23870), the game ball can be prevented from moving wildly in either the forward or backward direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), and the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized.

In addition, if the reaction force of the game ball that hits the inside of the recess H821a1 of the ball launching unit H112a and bounces back to the front side is still large and bounces back to the position where it hits the launch position throwing unit H23170, the game ball can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the second recess H23871, and a directional component in the up and down directions (in the direction of the arrows U-D) can be given to the reaction force acting on the game ball, just like the recess H871.

In other words, the reaction force that abuts against the inner surface of the second recess H23871 can be dispersed into a component that bounces back to the rear side (arrow B direction) and a component that displaces the ball upward or downward. This makes it possible to weaken the reaction force of the force direction component that bounces back to the rear side (arrow B direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of wild movement in the front-to-back direction, and the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In the 133rd embodiment, the second recess H23871 is formed at a position that does not overlap in the front-rear direction with the recess H821a1 formed in the rear portion H821a of the ball launching unit H112a. This allows the rear opening H172 to be formed by utilizing the area where the recess H821a1 and the second recess H23871 do not overlap.

Next, referring to FIG. 1964(a), the ball launching unit H24112a in the 134th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a concave portion H821a1 is recessed into the rear portion H821a, but in the ball launching unit H24112a in the 134th embodiment, a convex portion H24821a2 is protruded into the rear portion H24821a. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1964 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 and ball launch unit H24112a in the 134th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view of line MCMVa in Figure 1901.

As shown in FIG. 1964(a), the ball launching unit H24112a in the 134th embodiment is mainly formed with a base member H810 made of a resin material, a launching means H830 that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and can rotate to launch a game ball into a game area, a guide means H24820 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and guides the game ball launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and is arranged so that it can contact the launching means H830 at the rotation base end of the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 that is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 and generates a driving force to rotate the launching means H830.

The guide means H24820 mainly comprises a first guide member H24821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H24821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H24821 and the first bulge H811.

The first guide member H24821 mainly comprises a back portion H24821a formed along the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member H810, a rolling portion H821b standing from the back portion H24821a toward the front side and serving as the rolling surface for the game ball, an arrangement portion H821c connected to the rolling portion H821b and in which the second guide member H822 is arranged, and an upper guide portion H821d standing from above the arrangement portion H821c (arrow U direction) toward the front side of the back portion H821a and guiding the game ball sent to the second guide member H822.

The rear portion H24821a is the part that becomes the throwing surface on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and is equipped with a protruding portion H24821a2 that protrudes toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along the rolling direction of the game ball on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

The protruding portion H24821a2 is a portion that prevents the game ball from moving back and forth by contacting it when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves back and forth), and protrudes in a curved shape toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F).

The tip of the protrusion H24821a2 protruding toward the front side is formed at a position slightly higher than the center of the game ball rolling on the ball throwing section H882a for throwing the game ball from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1.

As a result, when a game ball sent from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 abuts against the convex portion H24821a2, the game ball can be made to abut against an area that curves downward toward the rear. Therefore, the reaction force acting on the abutting game ball can be made to act not only in a direction that bounces back toward the front, but also in a direction that faces downward. Therefore, the game ball that abuts against the rear portion H24821a can be prevented from bouncing back toward the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to a position where it abuts against the launch means H830 in the initial position from becoming unruly, and it is possible to easily stabilize the game ball launched (shot out) by the launch means H830.

In addition, the tip of the protruding portion H24821a2 toward the front side is formed at a position slightly higher than the center of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 and rolling on the launching rail H112a1, so that when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves wildly in the front-back direction and hits the protruding portion H24821a2, a downward directional component can be imparted to the reaction force acting on the game ball hitting the protruding portion H24821a2. That is, the reaction force hitting the protruding portion H24821a2 can be dispersed into a component bouncing back to the back side (arrow B direction side) and a component toward the downward side. Therefore, the reaction force of the directional component bouncing back to the front side can be weakened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving wildly in the front-back direction, and the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, in the 134th embodiment, the distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion H24821a2 to the back surface of the launch position ball sending unit H170 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from being displaced above the protruding tip of the convex portion H24821a2 when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves up and down, and to stably send the game ball to the game area of the game board H13.

Next, referring to FIG. 1964(b), the ball launching unit H25112a in the 135th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, the recess H821a1 is recessed in an arc shape, but in the ball launching unit H25112a in the 135th embodiment, the recess H25821a1 is recessed in an angular shape. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Note that Figure 1964 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 and ball launch unit H25112a in the 135th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view of line MCMVa in Figure 1901.

As shown in FIG. 1964(b), the ball launching unit H25112a in the 135th embodiment is mainly formed with a base member H810 formed from a resin material, a launching means H830 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and capable of rotating to launch a game ball into a game area, a guide means H25820 arranged on the front side of the base member H810 to guide the game ball launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and arranged so that the base end of the launching means H830 can contact the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 to generate a driving force to rotate the launching means H830.

The guide means H25820 mainly comprises a first guide member H25821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H25821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H25821 and the first bulge H811.

The first guide member H25821 mainly comprises a back portion H25821a formed along the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, a rolling portion H821b standing from the back portion H25821a toward the front side and serving as the rolling surface for the game ball, an arrangement portion H821c connected to the rolling portion H821b and in which the second guide member H822 is arranged, and an upper guide portion H821d standing from above the arrangement portion H821c (arrow U direction side) toward the front side of the back portion H821a and guiding the game ball sent to the second guide member H822.

The rear portion H25821a is the part that becomes the throwing surface on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and is equipped with a recess H25821a1 recessed on the rear side along the rolling direction of the game ball on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

The recess H25821a1 is a guide section for stabilizing the throw of the game ball by guiding the game ball along the inside of the recess H821a1 when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves wildly back and forth), and is formed in a groove shape with a groove width larger than the radius of the game ball.

In the 135th embodiment, the recess H25821a1 is formed with a sufficiently deep recess depth relative to the groove width, and is formed in a shape that allows the upper and lower ends to come into contact with the game ball when the game ball is received in the recess H25821a1. Furthermore, the recess H25821a1 is set at a position where the game ball first comes into contact with the lower end (step portion) of the recess H25821a1 when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 and rolling on the launching rail H112a1 is received inside the recess H25821a1.

As a result, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves wildly in the front-to-back direction, the game ball can be made to abut against the lower end (step portion) of the recessed portion H25821a1, so that the reaction force acting on the game ball can act not only in the direction of bouncing back to the front side (arrow F direction) but also in the direction of lifting upward. In other words, the reaction force that abuts against the lower end of the recessed portion H25821a1 can be dispersed into a component that bounces back to the front side and a component that moves upward. This makes it possible to weaken the reaction force of the directional component that bounces back to the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving wildly in the front-to-back direction, and the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, if the force toward the rear side is large (the force moving wildly in the front-to-rear direction is large) and the game ball is lifted by the upward force when it is brought into contact with the lower end (step portion) of the recess H25821a1, the game ball can also be brought into contact with the upper end (step portion) of the recess H25821a1. In other words, a part of the rear side of the game ball can be sandwiched between the upper and lower ends of the recess H25821a1. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing back and forth. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a wild state in the front-to-rear direction, and the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

Next, the ball launching unit H26112a in the 136th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1965 and 1966. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which a game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves back and forth and is received in the recess H821a1. In the 136th embodiment, a case in which a game ball is received in the recess H821a1 by a path changing member H26890 will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1965 is a front view of the inner frame H12 in the 136th embodiment, Figure 1966(a) is a rear view of the path changing member H26890, Figure 1966(b) is a side view of the path changing member H26890 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCMLXVIb in Figure 1966(a), Figure 1966(c) is a cross-sectional view of the path changing member H26890 along the MCMLXVIc line in Figure 1966(b), and Figure 1966(d) is a cross-sectional view of the path changing member H26890 along the MCMLXVId line in Figure 1966(a).

As shown in Figures 1965 and 1966, the ball launching unit H26112a in the 136th embodiment is mainly formed by a base member H810 made of a resin material, a launching means H830 that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and can rotate to launch a game ball into the game area, a guide means H820 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and guides the game ball launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and arranged so that it can contact the launching means H830 at the rotation base end of the launching means H830, a drive motor H850 (see Figure 1903) that is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 and generates a driving force that rotates the launching means H830, and a path change member H26890 that is rotatably arranged on the launch path of the game ball of the guide means H820.

As shown in FIG. 1966, the path change member H26890 mainly comprises a first part H26891 formed in a disk shape and arranged on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F), three partition walls H26892 extending radially from three equally spaced locations around the axis of the first part H26891, and a fan-shaped second part H26893 arranged opposite the first part H26891 across the partition wall H26892.

The second part H26893 is formed in a sector shape with a recessed portion H26893a formed by cutting out a part of a plate formed in a disk shape, and is formed to cover the rear side (arrow B direction side) of two of the partition areas divided by three partition walls H26892, and is arranged in a state where the rear side of one of the partition areas is open. Furthermore, the first part H26891 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) in the area where the recessed portion H26893a is formed is formed to be thicker than the plate thickness in other parts.

According to the ball launching unit H26112a formed as described above, when a game ball launched by the ball launching unit H112a and rolling on the launching rail H112a1 passes between the first part H2681 and the second part H26893 (parts other than the recessed part H26893a), the game ball can be sent to the game area along the launching rail H112a1 (i.e., without being received in the recessed part H821a1). In other words, since it can be guided in a direction where it cannot come into contact with the recessed part H821a1, it is possible to form a mode in which the game ball is sent without using the recessed part H821a1. Therefore, the game ball can be sent in a mode in which the game ball becomes violent and the trajectory of the game ball becomes unstable. This can increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when a game ball launched by the ball launching unit H112a and rolling on the launch rail H112a1 passes between the first part H2681 and the recessed part H26893a of the second part H26893, the game ball can be received in the recess H821a1 and sent to the game area. In other words, a mode can be created in which the game ball is guided in a direction in which it can come into contact with the recess H821a1. Therefore, the game ball can be sent in a mode in which the game ball's trajectory is stabilized by suppressing the game ball from moving wildly as it is sent.

Therefore, in the 136th embodiment, the path changing member H26890 can be used to send the game ball without using the recess H821a1, and to send the game ball using the recess H821a1. This allows the player to pay attention to which of the recesses the game ball being sent to the game board H13 is being guided by. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 1967(a), the ball launching unit H27112a in the 137th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, the ball launching unit H112a is disposed on the lower base unit H12c of the frame forming unit H12a, but in the 137th embodiment, the ball launching unit H27112a is disposed on the game board H27013. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1967(a) is a front view of the inner frame H27012 in the 137th embodiment. Note that in Figure 1967(a), the area in which the ball launching unit H27112a is disposed is partially enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 1967(a), the inner frame H27012 in the 137th embodiment is formed mainly with a frame forming unit H12a (see FIG. 1839) formed in a rectangular shape having an outline substantially identical to that of the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1839), and a back pack unit H94 (see FIG. 1834) rotatably supported on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the frame forming unit H12a, and the back pack unit H94 is rotatable rearward with the left side (arrow L direction side) as viewed from the front as the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side (arrow R direction side) as the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip end side) (see FIG. 1836).

The frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H27012 is provided with a left end support part H12a1 (see FIG. 1839) for supporting the left end of the game board H27013 at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface on the left side (arrow L direction side), and a board surface support device H12a2 (see FIG. 1839) for supporting the right end of the game board H27013 at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface on the right side (arrow R direction side). The game board H27013 is fixed to the inside of the inner frame H27012 by inserting the left end of the base plate H27060 into the left end support part H12a1 and pushing it into the back side (arrow B direction side) of the inner frame H27012 by operating the board surface support device H12a2 to engage with the front of the base plate H27060 (supporting the front of the base plate H27060).

The game board H27013 in the 137th embodiment is formed in a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and is configured by assembling a base plate H27060 having a protruding portion H27060a protruding downward from a portion of the lower edge, as well as a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding balls, as well as rails H61, H62, a general winning hole H63, a first winning hole H64, a second winning hole H640, a variable winning device H65, a through gate H67, a variable display unit H80, etc. (see FIG. 1838).

The protrusion H27060a is the area in which the ball launching unit H27112a is disposed, and is formed on the extension of the outer rail H62 on the side that receives the ball thrown from the ball launching unit H27112a.

In addition, on the rear side of the area where the protrusion H27060a is formed, a recess H27012c2 is formed in the lower base unit H27012c of the inner frame H27012, and the protrusion H27060a is disposed inside the recess H27012c2.

The ball launching unit H27112a is mainly comprised of a base member H810 made of a resin material, a launching means H830 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 (arrow F direction side) and rotates to launch (shoot) game balls into the game area, a guide means H27820 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and guides the game balls launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and is arranged so that it can contact the launching means H830 at the rotation base end of the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 (see Figure 1903) that is arranged on the back side of the base member H810 (arrow B direction side) and generates a driving force that rotates the launching means H830.

The guide means H27820 mainly comprises a first guide member H27821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H27821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H27821 and the first bulge H811.

The first guide member H27821 mainly comprises a back portion H27821a formed along the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member H810, a rolling portion H821b standing from the back portion H27821a toward the front side and serving as the rolling surface for the game ball, an arrangement portion H821c (see FIG. 1903) formed continuous with the rolling portion H821b and where the second guide member H822 is arranged on the front side, and an upper guide portion H27821d standing from above the arrangement portion H821c (arrow U direction) toward the front side of the back portion H27821a.

The rear part H27821a is a part that becomes the ball throwing surface on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and has two recesses H27821a1 recessed on the rear side along the rolling direction of the ball on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b. In the 137th embodiment, the recesses H27821a1 are formed in two places that are easily affected by the rolling surface, but the recesses H27821a1 may be formed in one place or three or more places. In the 137th embodiment, the multiple recesses H27821a1 are formed in the same straight line when viewed from the front, but each recess H27821a1 may be formed at a different height from the rolling surface. Furthermore, each recess H27821a1 may be extended non-parallel when viewed from the front.

The rear portion H27821a is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) (relative to the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1 (see FIG. 1905(a))) toward the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 (arrow L direction) to form a side surface on the front side (arrow F direction). That is, the rear portion H27821a is formed with at least a portion of the front side inclined relative to the surface of the game board H27013. On the other hand, the recessed portion H27821a1 has a recessed bottom on the rear side formed parallel to the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 (the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1).

That is, the recess depth on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the recess H27821a1 is configured to be shallow along the launch direction of the game ball, and the end of the recess H27821a1 in the launch direction is formed to be connected to the front of the rear part H27821a. This makes it possible to prevent a step from being formed at the end of the recess H27821a1 on the launch direction side, and to prevent an increase in resistance in the opposite direction to the launch direction when the game ball abutting the inner surface of the recess H27821a1 at the end of the recess H27821a1 exits from the end of the recess H27821a1 in the launch direction. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H27013.

The recessed portion H27821a1 is a guide portion for stabilizing the throw of the game ball by receiving the game ball inside the recessed portion H27821a1 when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball becomes unruly), and is formed in a portion where the game ball is likely to become unruly.

In other words, the recess H27821a1 is formed above the connection between the rolling part H821b and the launch rail H112a1, and when the ball bounces (moves wildly) due to a gap (step) formed by the connection between the rolling part H821b and the launch rail H112a1, the ball can be received in the recess to stabilize the throw of the game ball.

The launch rail H112a1 has a generally V-shaped concave rolling surface because the game ball tends to move wildly when first launched, while the rolling part H821b has a concave rolling surface like the launch rail H112a1, which increases the contact area between the game ball and the rolling surface as the game ball rolls (two-point support), so the rolling surface of the game ball does not have a concave surface (i.e., it is formed into a flat shape). For this reason, the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b are each formed from different members.

In addition, at the position that overlaps with the rear opening H172 of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 in a front view, the recess H27821a1 is not formed, and an upper guide portion H27821d is formed on the upper side. As a result, the game ball sent from the rear opening H172 onto the launch rail H112a1 is guided between the opposing upper guide portion H27821d and the launch rail H112a1.

The launch direction of the game ball sent from the rear opening H172 onto the launch rail H112a1 depends on the contact state between the game ball and the launching means H830 (launching section H831), so the game ball is prone to movement and become unstable immediately after launch. In the 137th embodiment, the recess H27821a1 is not formed in the rear section H27821a at the position immediately after launch (the position that overlaps with the rear opening H172 in a front view), thereby narrowing the front-to-back space and preventing the game ball from moving back and forth immediately after launch.

In particular, in the 137th embodiment, a protrusion H27060a is formed on the lower side of the base plate H27060 in order to arrange the ball launching unit H27112a on the game board H27013. In other words, the base plate H27060 is formed longer in the vertical direction than the base plate H60 in the 111th embodiment. Therefore, when the ball launching unit H27112a is arranged on the base plate H27060, the base plate H27060 is likely to bend in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction), and in that case, there is a problem that the arrangement of the ball launching unit H27112a is also likely to shift forward and backward.

In this case, the launch position ball throwing unit H170 is disposed on the front side of the ball launching unit H27112a, so if the base plate H27060 bends toward the front, the distance in the front-to-back direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) immediately after launch is unlikely to change. However, if the base plate H27060 bends toward the rear, only the base plate H27060 is displaced toward the rear, and the front-to-back distance between the launch position ball throwing unit H170 and the ball launching unit H27112a increases, increasing the likelihood that the game ball will move back and forth immediately after launch.

In contrast, in the 137th embodiment, as described above, the recess H27821a1 is not formed in the rear portion H27821a immediately after launch (the throwing position of the game ball from the launch position ball throwing unit H170), thereby narrowing the front and rear space and preventing the game ball from moving back and forth immediately after launch.

In addition, the recess H27821a1 is not formed in the rear part H27821a at the throwing position of the game ball from the launch position throwing unit H170. In other words, the ball is thrown from the rear opening H172 by the ball throwing part H882a of the launch position throwing unit H170, and the recess H27821a1 is formed on the launch direction side of the area where the backflow of the game ball to the launch position throwing unit H170 is restricted by the ball throwing part H882a (see FIG. 1904) that protrudes partially from the rear opening H172, so the ball throwing part H882a protruding from the rear opening H172 makes it easier to narrow the front and rear space. As a result, it is easier to prevent the game ball from moving back and forth immediately after launch.

In addition, a step portion H27821d1 is formed on the upper guide portion H27821d on the surface facing the launch rail H112a1, and the distance from the launch rail H112a1 just before the recess H27821a1 is formed is smaller than the distance (vertical width) from the launch rail H112a1 on the launch position side. Due to the step of this step portion H27821d1, even if the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves upward, it can be settled on the downward side just before the connection between the rolling portion H821b and the launch rail H112a1.

That is, by forming a step portion H27821d1 on the upper guide portion H27821d, which is disposed at a position opposite the launch rail H112a1 that serves as the rolling surface of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent in a wild upward state. Furthermore, by increasing the gap with the rolling surface on the launch position side by the step portion H27821d1, it is possible to prevent the ball launched by the launching means H830 from getting stuck at the launch position.

Furthermore, the portion where the distance from the launch rail H112a1 is reduced by the step portion H27821d1 is extended to a position facing the connection portion of the rolling portion H821b and the launch rail H112a1. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from moving wildly upwards (bouncing upwards) at the connection portion between the rolling portion H821b and the launch rail H112a1 and becoming unable to be received in the recess H27821a1. As a result, it becomes easier to prevent the game ball from moving wildly at the connection portion between the rolling portion H821b and the launch rail H112a1.

In the 137th embodiment, a recess H27821a1 is also formed above the terminal end side (the side away from the launch position) of the rolling part H821b. This second recess H27821a1 is formed from the front to the rear of the terminal end of the rolling part H821b, and its end in the launch direction is formed up to the outer edge of the base member H810 in a front view.

This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from moving back and forth as it rolls on the rolling part H821b and is sent from the end of the rolling part H821b toward the gap between the opposing rails H61, H62 (the top of the outer rail H62). Therefore, if the front of the game board H27013 (base plate H27060) and the front of the base member H810 are misaligned in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction), or if the game board H27013 (base plate H27060) and the base member H810 are misaligned in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), the game ball will be caught (contacted) by the step formed at the boundary between the game board H27013 (base plate H27060) and the base member H810, and the game ball will be prevented from being sent to a position outside the gap between the opposing rails H61, H62.

In the 137th embodiment, the second recess H27821a1 is formed up to the outer edge of the base member H810 in front view. However, the end of the second recess H27821a1 on the launch direction side may be set inside the outer edge of the base member H810 in front view. Furthermore, the second recess H27821a1 does not have to be connected to the front of the back part H27821a at the outer edge of the base member H810, but two recesses H27821a1 are recessed on the back side of the back part H27821a at the outer edge of the base member H810, and the second recess H27821a1 may be connected to a recess recessed in the game board H27013 or a recess of another base member H810 arranged on the game board H27013.

In addition, in the 137th embodiment, the ball launching unit H27112a is disposed on the game board H27013, so that the deviation of the position of the ball launching unit H27112a relative to the game board H27013 can be suppressed compared to the ball launching unit H112a in the 111th embodiment, which is disposed as a separate member from the game board H13. Therefore, the formation of a step between the game board H27013 and the ball launching unit H27112a (on the ball throwing path of the game ball launched from the ball launching unit H27112a) can be suppressed. As a result, the throwing of the game ball from the ball launching unit H27112a to the game board H27013 can be stabilized.

Next, referring to FIG. 1967(b), the ball launching unit H28112a in the 138th embodiment will be described. In the above 27th embodiment, the case where the entire ball launching unit H27112a is arranged on the game board H27013 is described, but in the 138th embodiment, the case where the game ball throwing portion of the ball launching unit H28112a is arranged on the game board H28013 is described. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1967(b) is a front view of the inner frame H28012 in the 138th embodiment. Note that in Figure 1967(b), the area in which the ball launching unit H28112a is disposed is partially enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 1967(a), the inner frame H28012 in the 138th embodiment is formed mainly with a frame forming unit H12a (see FIG. 1839) formed in a rectangular shape having an outline substantially identical to that of the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1839), and a back pack unit H94 (see FIG. 1834) rotatably supported on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the frame forming unit H12a, and the back pack unit H94 is rotatable rearward with the left side (arrow L direction side) as viewed from the front as the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side (arrow R direction side) as the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip end side) (see FIG. 1836).

The frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H28012 is provided with a left end support part H12a1 (see FIG. 1839) for supporting the left end of the game board H28013 at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface on the left side (arrow L direction side), and a board surface support device H12a2 (see FIG. 1839) for supporting the right end of the game board H28013 at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface on the right side (arrow R direction side). The game board H28013 is fixed to the inside of the inner frame H28012 by inserting the left end of the base plate H28060 into the left end support part H12a1 and pushing it into the back side (arrow B direction side) of the inner frame H28012 by operating the board surface support device H12a2 to engage with the front of the base plate H28060 (supporting the front of the base plate H27060).

The game board H28013 in the 138th embodiment is formed in a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and is configured by assembling a base plate H28060 having a protruding portion H28060a protruding downward from a portion of the lower edge, as well as a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding balls, as well as rails H61, H62, a general winning hole H63, a first winning hole H64, a second winning hole H640, a variable winning device H65, a through gate H67, a variable display unit H80, etc. (see FIG. 1838).

The protrusion H28060a is the area where the guide means H28820 side of the ball launching unit H28112a is arranged, and is formed on the extension line of the outer rail H62 on the side that receives the ball sent from the ball launching unit H28112a.

In addition, on the rear side of the area where the protrusion H28060a is formed, a recess H28012c2 is formed in the lower base unit H28012c of the inner frame H28012, and the protrusion H28060a is disposed inside the recess H28012c2.

The ball launching unit H28112a is mainly composed of a base member H28810 made of a resin material, a launching means H830 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H28810 (arrow F direction side) and can rotate to launch (shoot) game balls into the game area, a guide means H27820 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H28810 and guides the game balls launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H28810 and is arranged so that it can contact the launching means H830 at the rotation base end of the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 (see Figure 1903) that is arranged on the back side of the base member H28810 (arrow B direction side) and generates a driving force that rotates the launching means H830.

The base member H28810 mainly comprises a first base member H28814 disposed on the front side of the protruding portion H28060a of the base plate H28060, and a second base member H28815 disposed adjacent to the lower side of the first base member H28814 and disposed in the storage recess H28012c1 of the lower base unit H28012c.

The first base member H28814 is formed in a plate shape with a size corresponding to the protrusion H28060a when viewed from the front. The first base member H28814 also has a first bulging portion H811 (see FIG. 1903) that bulges toward the front side and serves as a base for arranging the guide means H27820 and the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840, and the guide means H27820 and the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 are arranged on the front side.

The second base member H28115 is formed in a plate shape with a size corresponding to the storage recess H28012c1 when viewed from the front. The second base member H28815 mainly comprises a second bulging portion H812 (see FIG. 1903) that bulges toward the front side and serves as a base for disposing the second elastic member H842 of the abutment means H840, and a through hole H813 (see FIG. 1903) that is drilled in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and through which the shaft portion H852 of the drive motor H850 (see FIG. 1903) is inserted, and the launching means H830 and the second elastic member H842 of the abutment means H840 are disposed on the front side, and the drive motor H850 is disposed on the rear side.

That is, in the base member H28810 in the 138th embodiment, the guide means H27820 for guiding the game ball and the launch means H830 for launching the game ball are disposed on different members (first base member H28814, second base member H28815) compared to the base member H810 in the 137th embodiment.

As a result, the base plate H28060 of the game board H28013 in the 138th embodiment can be made shorter in length in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) than the base plate H27060 of the game board H27013 in the 137th embodiment. This prevents the base plate H28060 from bending in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction), and prevents the position of the ball launching unit H27112a from shifting forward or backward. As a result, it becomes easier to prevent the game ball from moving back and forth wildly immediately after launch.

Note that the sending of the game ball by the guiding means H27820 is similar to that of the guiding means H27820 in the 137th embodiment, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

In the 138th embodiment, the recess H27821a1 is not formed at a position overlapping with the rear opening H172 of the launch position ball throwing unit H170 in a front view. However, the area where the recess H27821a1 is not formed may be cut out and the front of the game board H28013 (base plate H28060) may be positioned opposite the rear opening H172 of the launch position ball throwing unit H170. In other words, at the beginning of the launch of the game ball, the game ball may be thrown along the surface of the game board H28013, and then the game ball may be thrown to the guide means H27820 arranged on the game board H28013.

When the area where the recess H27821a1 is not formed is cut out, the top H112a4 (see FIG. 1905(a)) of the launch rail H112a1, which is recessed in a V-shape, may be formed closer to the game board H28013, so that the game ball sent through the area where the recess H27821a1 is not formed abuts against the game board H28013. In this case, the game ball abutting against the game board H28013 makes it easier to suppress the game ball from going wild.

In addition, when the area where the recess H27821a1 is not formed is cut out, the end of the back part H28821a at the position adjacent to the cut out area may be formed at an angle toward the game board H28013. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from getting caught on the step in the front-to-rear direction formed at the boundary between the back part H28821a and the game board H28013 when it is thrown from the game board H28013 to the front side of the back part H28821a. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throw of the game ball from the game board H28013.

In order to prevent the board H13 from getting caught on the step in the front-to-rear direction formed at the boundary between the rear portion H28821a and the game board H28013, the board H13 may be recessed by the thickness of the rear portion H28821a1, and the rear portion H28821a1 may be disposed in the recess formed in the game board, thereby preventing the step in the front-to-rear direction from being formed at the boundary between the rear portion H28821a and the game board H28013.

Next, referring to FIG. 1968(a), the ball launching unit H29112a in the 139th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which the recess H821a1 is formed parallel to the launch direction of the game ball (launching rail H112a1 and rolling portion H821b) when viewed from the front, but in the 139th embodiment, a case is described in which the recess H29821a1 is formed non-parallel to the launch direction of the game ball when viewed from the front. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1968 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit H29112a in the 139th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1968(a), the ball launching unit H29112a in the 139th embodiment mainly comprises a base member H810 made of a resin material, a launching means H830 that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and rotates to launch (shoot) a game ball into the game area, a guide means H29820 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and guides the game ball launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and is arranged so that it can contact the launching means H830 at the rotation base end of the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 (see FIG. 1903) that is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 and generates a driving force that rotates the launching means H830.

The guide means H29820 mainly comprises a first guide member H29821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H29821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H29821 and the first bulge H811.

The first guide member H29821 mainly comprises a back portion H29821a formed along the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, a rolling portion H821b standing from the back portion H29821a toward the front side and serving as the rolling surface for the game ball, an arrangement portion H821c (see FIG. 1903) formed in connection with the rolling portion H821b and where the second guide member H822 is arranged on the front side, and an upper guide portion H821d standing from above the arrangement portion H821c (arrow U direction side) toward the front side of the back portion H821a and guiding the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 (see FIG. 1904) to the second guide member H822 (launch rail H112a1).

The rear portion H29821a is a guide portion for stabilizing the throw of the game ball by receiving the game ball inside the recessed portion H29821a1 when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves wildly in the forward and backward directions), and is formed to a size that can receive part of the game ball. In addition, the recessed portion H29821a1 is recessed into a curved shape with a radius larger than the radius of the game ball.

The rear portion H29821a is the part that becomes the throwing surface on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and is provided with one recess H29821a1 recessed on the rear side along the rolling direction of the ball on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

In the 139th embodiment, the recess H29821a1 is formed in one location, but the recess H29821a1 may be formed in two or more locations. In the 139th embodiment, the recesses H29821a1 may be formed at different heights relative to the rolling surface when viewed from the front.

The rear portion H29821a is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) (relative to the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1 (see FIG. 1905(a))) toward the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 (arrow L direction), forming a side surface on the front side (arrow F direction). That is, the rear portion H29821a is formed with at least a portion of the front side inclined relative to the surface of the game board H13 (see FIG. 1838). On the other hand, the recessed portion H27821a1 has a recessed bottom on the rear side formed parallel to the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 (the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1).

That is, the recess depth on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the recess H29821a1 is configured to become shallower along the launch direction of the game ball, and the end of the recess H29821a1 in the launch direction is formed to connect with the front of the rear part H29821a. This makes it possible to prevent a step from being formed at the end of the recess H29821a1 on the launch direction side, and to prevent an increase in resistance in the direction opposite to the launch direction when the game ball abutting the inner surface of the recess H29821a1 at the end of the recess H29821a1 exits from the end of the recess H29821a1 in the launch direction. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

The recess H29821a1 is formed on the upper side of the launch rail H112a1 and rolling part H821b, which form the rolling surface of the game ball, and extends from the end of the back part H29821a on the side opposite the launch direction of the game ball (the end on the side of the initial position of the game ball) to just before the end of the back part H29821a on the launch direction side.

In addition, the recess H29821a1 is inclined upward from the launch initial position relative to the launch rail H112a1 as it approaches the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b in a front view. On the other hand, the recess H29821a1 is inclined downward relative to the rolling part H821b as it approaches the launch terminal position from the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b in a front view.

That is, above the launch rail H112a1, the recess H29821a1 is inclined upward relative to the launch rail H112a1 (the rolling surface of the game ball), while above the rolling portion H821b, the recess H29821a1 is inclined downward relative to the rolling portion H821b (the rolling surface of the game ball).

The height of the recess H29821a1 at the position corresponding to the initial position of the launched game ball (the end opposite the launch direction of the game ball) from the launch rail H112a1 is configured so that when the game ball is received in the recess H29821a1, the game ball that has left the launch rail H112a1 abuts on the lower side of the recessed bottom on the back side of the recess H29821a1. In other words, the recessed bottom on the back side of the recess H29821a1 is set at a position higher than the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface of the launch rail H112a1.

This allows a directional component in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) to be imparted to the reaction force acting on the game ball abutting against the inner surface of the recess H29821a1. In other words, the reaction force that abuts against the inner surface of the recess H29821a1 can be dispersed into a component that bounces back to the front side (arrow F direction) and a component that displaces the ball upward. This makes it possible to weaken the reaction force of the directional component that bounces back to the front side (arrow F direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of wild movement in the front-to-back direction.

In other words, in the 139th embodiment, the recess H29821a1 is formed non-parallel to the throwing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can be prevented from going wild by abutting the game ball against the non-parallel recess H29821a1. As a result, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized, and the throwing of the game ball can be improved.

In addition, in the 139th embodiment, a reaction force can be applied to the game ball that abuts against the inner surface of the recess H29821a1 in an upward direction away from the rolling surface, and the recess H29821a1 is inclined upward with respect to the launch rail H112a1 (the rolling surface of the game ball), so that when a game ball is received in the recess H29821a1 on the launch rail H112a1, the game ball can be lifted upward along the upward inclination of the recess H29821a1. This makes it easier to float the game ball at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

As described above, the launch rail H112a1 has a rolling surface that is concave in a roughly V-shape because the game ball is prone to going wild when launched, while the rolling part H821b has a concave rolling surface like the launch rail H112a1, which increases the contact area between the game ball and the rolling surface when the game ball rolls (two-point support), so the rolling surface of the game ball does not have a concave surface (i.e., is formed in a flat shape). For this reason, the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b are each formed from different members. As a result, a step is likely to form at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, which may cause the game ball to go wild.

In contrast, in the 139th embodiment, the upward inclination of the recess H29821a1 relative to the launch rail H112a1 (the rolling surface of the game ball) makes it easier to float the game ball at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, so that the game ball that goes beyond the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b is prevented from getting caught on a step and going wild. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, the recess H29821a1 at a position beyond the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b (above the rolling part H821b) is inclined downward with respect to the rolling part H821b (the rolling surface of the game ball), so that the game ball that has left the rolling surface due to the upward inclination of the recess H29821a1 can be directed toward the rolling surface due to the downward inclination of the recess H29821a1. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state where it is moving up and down due to the upward inclination of the recess H29821a1.

The end of the recess H29821a1 on the launch direction side is set before the end of the rolling part H821b. That is, the game ball sent from the end of the rolling part H821b to the game board H13 is sent along the rolling surface of the rolling part H821b. This prevents the game ball sent from the end of the rolling part H821b from being affected by the downward slope of the recess H29821a1, and prevents the game ball from being sent to the game board H13 from becoming unstable.

Furthermore, the recess H29821a1 is formed to be narrower (smaller in width) toward the terminal end on the launch direction side. This makes it easier to maintain the state in which the game ball abuts against the recess H29821a1 when it abuts against the recess H29821a1 and is guided. That is, the recess H29821a1 is configured to be narrower in width toward the launch (throw) direction of the game ball, so that it is easier to maintain the state in which the game ball is received inside the recess H29821a1 (supported by the recess H821a1). This allows the action of the recess H29821a1 to continue on the game ball while the game ball is rolling (passing) between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, making it easier to suppress the game ball from going wild. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the game board H13. In the 139th embodiment, the recess H29821a1 is narrowed only at its end, but the recess H821a1 may be narrowed in width all along the length of the groove in the direction of launch.

In addition, a foul ball receiving portion H146 (see Fig. 1969, Fig. 1837) is disposed below between the rolling portion H821b and the rails H61, H62 of the game board H13 when viewed from the front, and receives as foul balls balls that have been launched from the ball launching unit H112a but have not reached the game area. In other words, a path is formed that branches off from the ball sending path of the game ball launched from the ball launching unit H112a until it reaches the game board H13.

In the 139th embodiment, the recess H29821a1 at a position beyond the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b (above the rolling part H821b) is inclined downward with respect to the rolling part H821b (the rolling surface of the game ball), and the game ball that has passed the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b can be sent to the rolling surface side, so that if the game ball moves wildly in the forward and backward directions and its rolling speed becomes too slow, the game ball can be received by the foul ball receiving portion H146. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball that rolls too slowly from reaching the play area and becoming a foul ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent a temporary halt in play.

In the above 139th embodiment, the recess H29821a1 at a position beyond the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b (above the rolling part H821b) is inclined downward with respect to the rolling part H821b (the rolling surface of the game ball). However, at a position beyond the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b (above the rolling part H821b), the recess H29821a1 may be formed parallel to the launch direction of the game ball (parallel to the rolling surface of the game ball) (i.e., the recess H821a1 in the 111th embodiment may be combined with the recess H29821a1 in the 139th embodiment).

In this case, the game ball can be guided along the launch (throw) direction by the recess H821a1 formed parallel to the launch direction of the game ball at a position beyond the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b (above the rolling part H821b), where there are relatively few factors that cause the game ball to move uncontrollably. This makes it possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball.

In the above explanation, the recess H29821a1 at a position beyond the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b (above the rolling part H821b) is formed parallel to the launch direction of the game ball (parallel to the rolling surface of the game ball), but the front side of the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b may be formed parallel to the launch direction of the game ball (parallel to the rolling surface of the game ball).

In this case, if the game ball goes wild due to the step formed at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, the recess H29821a1 formed at an angle to the launch direction can help to suppress the game ball's wildness, and the recess H821a1 formed parallel to the launch direction can help to suppress the game ball's wildness immediately after launch.

In addition, in the 139th embodiment, the recess H29821a1 is formed so that its width becomes narrower (smaller) toward the end of the firing direction, but the recess H29821a1 may be formed so that its width becomes wider (larger) toward the end of the firing direction.

In this case, the recess can be gradually applied to a gaming ball that exhibits relatively large amounts of movement. That is, the overlapping (contactable) area between the gaming ball and the recess H29821a1 can be gradually increased. This can prevent the gaming ball from amplifying its movement due to its collision with the recess H29821a1. That is, it can prevent the gaming ball from moving wildly in a direction different from the contact direction (for example, bouncing upwards). As a result, it is possible to stabilize the sending of the gaming ball to the gaming board H13.

Next, referring to FIG. 1968(b), the ball launching unit H30112a in the 140th embodiment will be described. In the above 139th embodiment, the recess H29821a1 is formed with an upward and downward inclination relative to the rolling surface. In the 140th embodiment, however, the recess H30821a1 is formed with a downward inclination relative to the rolling surface. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1968 (b) is a front view of the ball launching unit H30112a in the 140th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1968(b), the ball launching unit H30112a in the 140th embodiment mainly comprises a base member H810 formed from a resin material, a launching means H830 that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and rotates to launch (shoot) a game ball into the game area, a guide means H30820 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and guides the game ball launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and is arranged so that it can contact the launching means H830 at the rotation base end of the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 (see FIG. 1903) that is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 and generates a driving force that rotates the launching means H830.

The guide means H30820 mainly comprises a first guide member H30821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H30821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H30821 and the first bulge H811.

The first guide member H30821 mainly comprises a back portion H30821a formed along the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, a rolling portion H821b standing from the back portion H30821a toward the front side and serving as the rolling surface for the game ball, an arrangement portion H821c (see FIG. 1903) formed in connection with the rolling portion H821b and where the second guide member H822 is arranged on the front side, and an upper guide portion H821d standing from above the arrangement portion H821c (arrow U direction side) toward the front side of the back portion H821a and guiding the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 (see FIG. 1904) to the second guide member H822 (launch rail H112a1).

The rear portion H30821a is a guide portion for stabilizing the throw of the game ball by receiving the game ball inside the recessed portion H30821a1 when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves wildly in the forward and backward directions), and is formed to a size that can receive part of the game ball. In addition, the recessed portion H30821a1 is recessed into a curved shape with a radius larger than the radius of the game ball.

The rear portion H30821a is the part that becomes the throwing surface on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and is provided with two recesses H30821a1 recessed on the rear side along the rolling direction of the ball on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

The rear portion H30821a is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) (relative to the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1 (see FIG. 1905(a))) toward the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 (arrow L direction), forming a side surface on the front side (arrow F direction). That is, the rear portion H30821a is formed with at least a portion of the front side inclined relative to the surface of the game board H13 (see FIG. 1838). On the other hand, the recessed portion H27821a1 has a recessed bottom on the rear side formed parallel to the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 (the top H112a4 of the launch rail H112a1).

That is, the recess depth on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the recess H30821a1 is configured to become shallower along the launch direction of the game ball, and the end of the recess H30821a1 in the launch direction is formed to connect with the front of the rear part H30821a. This prevents a step from being formed at the end of the recess H30821a1 on the launch direction side, and prevents an increase in resistance in the opposite direction to the launch direction when the game ball abutting the inner surface of the recess H30821a1 at the end of the recess H30821a1 exits from the end of the recess H30821a1 in the launch direction. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

The recess H30821a1 is formed above the launch rail H112a1 and rolling part H821b, which form the rolling surface of the game ball, and is formed above the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b. In addition, the recess H30821a1 is formed with a downward incline from the launch rail H112a1 side toward the rolling part H821b side (in the direction of launch of the game ball) relative to the rolling surface of the game ball when viewed from the front.

The height of the end of the recess H30821a1 on the launch rail H112a1 side (the end opposite the launch direction of the game ball) from the launch rail H112a1 is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1, and is set at a position that will receive the game ball that has bounced a predetermined distance upward from the rolling surface of the launch rail H112a1.

In addition, the recess H30821a1 at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b is set at a position such that the position of the recessed bottom on the back side approximately coincides with the center of the game ball rolling on the rolling part H821b.

As a result, when a game ball that crosses the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b gets caught on a step formed at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b and goes wild, the game ball can be received in the recess H30821a1 and can be made to abut against the inner surface at a position higher than the recessed bottom on the back side of the recess H30821a1.

Therefore, a directional component in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) can be imparted to the reaction force acting on the game ball abutting against the inner surface of the recess H30821a1. In other words, the reaction force that abuts against the inner surface of the recess H30821a1 can be dispersed into a component that bounces back to the front side (arrow F direction) and a component that displaces the ball downward. Thus, the reaction force of the directional component that bounces back to the front side (arrow F direction) can be weakened and directed toward the rolling surface. As a result, the game ball launched by the launching means H830 can be prevented from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of wild movement in the front-to-back direction, while also being prevented from wild movement in the up-down direction. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In other words, in the 140th embodiment, the recess H30821a1 is formed non-parallel to the throwing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can be prevented from going wild by abutting the game ball against the non-parallel recess H30821a1. As a result, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized, and the throwing of the game ball can be improved.

In addition, the recess H30821a1 is formed to become narrower (smaller in width) toward the terminal end on the launch direction side. This makes it easier to maintain the state in which the game ball abuts against the recess H30821a1 when it abuts against the recess H30821a1 and is guided. In other words, the recess H30821a1 is configured to become narrower in width toward the launch (throw) direction of the game ball, making it easier to maintain the state in which the game ball is received inside the recess H29821a1 (supported by the recess H821a1). This allows the recess H29821a1 to continue to act on the game ball while the game ball is rolling (passing) between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, making it easier to suppress the game ball from going wild. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the game board H13.

Furthermore, a foul ball receiving section H146 is disposed below between the rolling section H821b and the rails H61, H62 of the game board H13 when viewed from the front, and receives as foul balls balls that have been launched from the ball launching unit H112a but have not reached the game area. In other words, a path is formed that branches off from the ball sending path of the game ball launched from the ball launching unit H112a until it reaches the game board H13.

In the 140th embodiment, a recess H30821a1 is formed above the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b with a downward incline, and a game ball that has passed the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b can be sent to the rolling surface side. Therefore, if the game ball moves wildly in the forward and backward directions and its rolling speed becomes too slow, the game ball can be received in the foul ball receiving portion H146. As a result, a game ball that rolls too slowly can be prevented from reaching the play area and becoming a foul ball. As a result, a temporary halt in play can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1968(c), the ball launching unit H31112a in the 141st embodiment will be described. In the above 140th embodiment, the concave portion H30821a1 is recessed and inclined downward relative to the rolling surface, but in the 141st embodiment, the convex portion H31821a2 is protruded in a direction perpendicular to the rolling surface. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1968 (c) is a front view of the ball launching unit H31112a in the 141st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1968(c), the ball launching unit H31112a in the 141st embodiment mainly comprises a base member H810 made of a resin material, a launching means H830 that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and can rotate to launch (shoot) a game ball into the game area, a guide means H31820 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and guides the game ball launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 that is arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and is arranged so that the rotation base end of the launching means H830 can contact the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 (see FIG. 1903) that is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 and generates a driving force that rotates the launching means H830.

The guide means H31820 mainly comprises a first guide member H31821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H31821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H31821 and the first bulge H811.

The first guide member H31821 mainly comprises a back portion H31821a formed along the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, a rolling portion H821b standing from the back portion H31821a toward the front side and serving as the rolling surface for the game ball, an arrangement portion H821c (see FIG. 1903) formed in connection with the rolling portion H821b and where the second guide member H822 is arranged on the front side, and an upper guide portion H821d standing from above the arrangement portion H821c (arrow U direction side) toward the front side of the back portion H821a and guiding the game ball sent from the launch position ball sending unit H170 (see FIG. 1904) to the second guide member H822 (launch rail H112a1).

The rear portion H31821a is the part that becomes the throwing surface on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and is provided with a protruding portion H31821a2 that extends in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b when viewed from the front and protrudes toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The convex portion H31821a2 is a portion that prevents the game ball from moving back and forth by contacting it when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves back and forth), and is formed above the connection portion between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b. In addition, the convex portion H31821a2 protrudes in a curved shape toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and the curved shape extends in a direction perpendicular to the launch direction of the game ball when viewed from the front. In other words, the cross section of the convex portion H31821a2 cut along the launch direction by a plane parallel to the front and back directions is formed in a semicircular shape. Note that the cross section of the convex portion H31821a2 is not limited to a semicircular shape, and may be formed in a triangular or rectangular shape.

More specifically, the convex portion H31821a2 is formed on the launch direction side (i.e., above the end of the rolling portion H821b on the side opposite the launch direction of the game ball) starting from above the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b. Furthermore, the convex portion H31821a2 is formed at a position slightly higher than the center of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion H821b, and is formed at a position where the rolling game ball does not come into contact with the upper portion of the rolling portion H821b.

The convex portion H31821a2 formed as described above allows the game ball to come into contact with the convex portion H31821a2 when it passes over the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b and gets caught on the step formed at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b and bounces upward.

This allows a directional component in the opposite direction to the launch direction to be imparted to the reaction force acting on the game ball contacting the convex portion H31821a2. This reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion H821b, allowing the game ball contacting the convex portion H31821a2 (i.e., the game ball that bounces upward) to settle down. This prevents the game ball that is sent over the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving wildly in the up and down directions. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

Next, referring to Fig. 1969(a) and (b), the ball launching unit H32112a and the launch position ball throwing unit H32170 in the 142nd embodiment will be described. In the above 133rd embodiment, a recess H821a1 is formed in the rear part H821a and a second recess H23821 is formed in the rear side case H23870. In the 142nd embodiment, a convex part H32821a2 and a second convex part H32872 are formed in the rear part H32821a and the rear side case H32870. The same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1969(a) is a cross-sectional view of the ball launching unit H32112a and launch position ball throwing unit H32170 in the 142nd embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view along line MCMVb in Figure 1901, and Figure 1969(b) is a front view of the ball launching unit H32112a as viewed in the MCMLXIXb direction in Figure 1969(a).

As shown in Figures 1969(a) and 1969(b), the ball launching unit H32112a in the 142nd embodiment mainly comprises a base member H810 made of a resin material, a launching means H830 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810 and capable of rotating to launch (shoot) a game ball into the game area, a guide means H32820 arranged on the front side of the base member H810 to guide the game ball launched by the launching means H830, a contact means H840 arranged on the front side of the base member H810 and arranged so that the base end of the launching means H830 can contact the launching means H830, and a drive motor H850 (see Figure 1903) arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member H810 to generate a driving force to rotate the launching means H830.

The guide means H32820 mainly comprises a first guide member H32821 formed from a resin material and disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member H810, and a second guide member H822 formed from a metal material and disposed on the front side of the first guide member H32821, and is disposed on the base member H810 with the first elastic member H841 of the abutment means H840 sandwiched between the first guide member H32821 and the first bulge H811.

The rear portion H32821a is the part that becomes the throwing surface on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the game ball launched by the launching means H830, and has multiple protrusions H32821a2 (five in the 142nd embodiment) that protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along the launch direction of the game ball.

The protrusion H32821a2 is a part that prevents the game ball from moving back and forth by contacting it when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves back and forth), and is formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with the front end surface inclined toward the front along the launch direction of the game ball.

The launch position ball throwing unit H32170 mainly comprises a front case H860 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) and having a front opening H171, a rear case H32870 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front case H860 and having a rear opening H172, and a ball throwing means H880 arranged between the front case H860 and the rear case H32870.

The rear case H32870 faces the rear portion H32821a of the ball launching unit H32112a, and the surface that forms the front side (arrow F direction side) of the launch path by the launching means H830 is formed parallel to the launch direction side (arrow L direction side) of the game ball by the launching means H830, and is provided with multiple second convex portions H32872 (four in the 142nd embodiment) that protrude toward the rear side along the launch direction of the game ball.

The second convex portion H32872 is a portion that prevents the game ball from moving wildly in the front-back direction by contacting it when the throw of the game ball launched by the launching means H830 becomes unstable (the game ball moves wildly in the front-back direction), and the end face on the rear side is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear side along the launch direction of the game ball. In addition, the second convex portion H32872 is formed at a position that does not overlap in the front-back direction with the multiple convex portions H32821a2 formed on the rear portion H32821a facing the rear side case H32870, and is formed between the convex portions H32821a2 in the launch direction of the game ball.

The convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 are formed at a distance equal to the radius of the game ball along the launch direction of the game ball, and the inclined surface on the front or back side is formed at an angle of approximately 20 degrees. The convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 are formed to be located at a height equal to the radius of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b, so that the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b can come into contact with them.

According to the ball launching unit H32112a and the launching position ball sending unit H32170 configured as above, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 and rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b moves back and forth, the game ball can be abutted against the convex part H32821a2 or the second convex part H32872. As described above, the convex part H32821a2 and the second convex part H32872 are formed inclined toward the inside of the ball sending path along the launching direction. Therefore, the game ball abutting against the convex part H32821a2 or the second convex part H32872 is moved to the center in the front-rear direction of the rolling surface along the inclined surface of the convex part H32821a2 or the second convex part H32872. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving back and forth. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, in the 142nd embodiment, the side of the convex portion H32821a2 on the launch direction side and the side of the second convex portion H32872 are extended in a direction perpendicular to the launch direction (front-to-back direction). This allows the game ball to come into contact with the side of the convex portion H32821a2 on the launch direction side or the side of the second convex portion H32872 on the launch direction side, slowing down the flow speed of the game ball.

Therefore, when a game ball sent to the rails H61, H62 of the game board H13 is not sent to the game area (does not pass through the return ball prevention member H68) and flows back (down) along the outer rail H62 to the ball launching unit H32112a side, the flow speed of the game ball can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the impact when the game ball flows down to the initial launch position and hits the second game ball (the game ball to be launched next) sent from the launch position ball sending unit H32170 onto the launch rail H112a1 or the launching means H830.

As a result, the impact sound can be reduced, preventing the player from hearing the sound of a malfunction. In addition, by reducing the impact when the second game ball (the game ball to be launched next) comes into contact, the second game ball can be prevented from bouncing to a position that is shifted from the initial launch position, preventing the second game ball from being thrown unstably.

In addition, in the 142nd embodiment, the convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 are arranged at a position beyond the rolling portion H821b in the launch direction. This makes it possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball before it flows down to the rolling portion H821b.

Here, below between the rolling part H821b and the rails H61, H62 of the game board H13 when viewed from the front, a foul ball receiving portion H146 is arranged to receive, as foul balls, balls that have been launched from the ball launching unit H112a but have not reached the playing area.

Therefore, by slowing down the flowing speed of the game ball before it flows down to the rolling portion H821b, the game ball that flows back can be guided to the foul ball receiving portion H146. This prevents the game ball that flows back from flowing down to the initial launch position (the ball throwing path from which the game ball is launched) and coming into contact with the second game ball (the ball to be launched next). As a result, even if the game ball launched from the ball launching unit H112a does not reach the game area, the throwing of the second ball can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball throwing from becoming unstable and the game from temporarily stopping.

In order to guide the game ball that flows back to the foul ball receiving portion H146, the side of the projection H32821a2 facing the launch direction may be formed as an inclined surface facing the foul ball receiving portion H146 (facing the direction opposite the foul ball receiving portion H146), or the entire projection H32821a2 may be extended in a direction inclined relative to the launch (throw) direction of the game ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 1969(c), the convex portion H33821a2 in the 143rd embodiment will be described. In the above 142nd embodiment, the case where the convex portion H32821a2 is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front is described, but in the 143rd embodiment, the case where the convex portion H33821a2 is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front is described. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 1969 (c) is a front view of the ball launching unit H33112a in the 143rd embodiment, and corresponds to the front view in the MCMLXIXb direction of Figure 1969 (a). Note that in the 143rd embodiment, only the shape of the convex portion H32821a2 of the ball launching unit H32112a in the 142nd embodiment is different, so other detailed explanations will be omitted.

The convex portion H33821a2 in the 143rd embodiment is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, with the first side H33821a3 formed parallel to the rolling surface, the second side H33821a4 extending from the end of the first side H33821a3 on the launch direction side toward the rolling surface (rolling portion H821b) in a direction perpendicular to the launch direction, and the remaining third side H33821a5 extending in a direction connecting the ends of these two sides, and is shaped to slope downward along the launch direction.

The first edge H33821a3 is formed at a position farther away from the rolling surface than the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, and the lower end (the end on the rolling part H821b side) of the second edge H33821a4 is formed at a position closer to the rolling surface than the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b. Furthermore, the convex part H33821a2 is formed so that the end face on the front side is inclined toward the front side along the launch direction of the game ball.

With the convex portion H33821a2 formed as described above, when the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b moves back and forth and comes into contact with the convex portion H33821a2, the game ball is brought to the center in the front-to-rear direction of the rolling surface by the inclined surface on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving back and forth. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, according to the convex portion H33821a2 in the 143rd embodiment, the first edge H33821a3 is formed at a position farther from the rolling surface than the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b, and the lower end (the end on the rolling portion H821b side) of the second edge H33821a4 is formed at a position closer to the rolling surface than the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b, so that when the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b moves up and down (jumps up) and hits the convex portion H33821a2, the game ball can be sent downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving up and down. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, in the case where the game ball sent to the rails H61, H62 of the game board H13 is not sent to the game area (does not pass through the return ball prevention member H68) and flows back (down) along the outer rail H62 to the ball launching unit H33112a side, this is similar to the convex portion H33821a2 in the 142nd embodiment, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

In addition, in the 143rd embodiment, the second convex portion H32872 of the launch position ball throwing unit H32170, which is disposed on the front side of the ball launching unit H33112a, is formed in a shape that is the inverse of the convex portion H33821a2 in the front-to-rear direction, and similarly to the convex portion H33821a2, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state where it moves wildly in the front-to-rear and up-to-down directions. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

Furthermore, in the 143rd embodiment, the protrusion H33821a2 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, but the protrusion H33821a2 may be formed in a square shape when viewed from the front, with one side of the square being formed in a direction inclined relative to the rolling surface. In this case as well, the game ball that contacts the protrusion H33821a2 can be brought closer to the center of the rolling surface.

Next, the convex portion H34821a2 in the 144th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1969(d). In the above 142nd embodiment, the convex portion H32821a2 is formed away from the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b, but in the 144th embodiment, the convex portion H34821a2 is formed continuously with the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b.

Figure 1969(d) is a front view of the ball launching unit H34112a in the 144th embodiment, and corresponds to the front view in the MCMLXIXb direction of Figure 1969(a). Note that in the 144th embodiment, only the shape of the convex portion H32821a2 of the ball launching unit H32112a in the 142nd embodiment is different, so other detailed explanations will be omitted.

The protrusion H34821a2 in the 144th embodiment extends in a direction perpendicular to the launch direction from a position adjacent to the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b in a front view, and the upper side is set at a position higher than the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b (i.e., it extends over the entire vertical area of the ball sending path). In addition, the cross section of the protrusion H34821a2 is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the end face on the front side is formed to be inclined toward the front side along the launch direction of the game ball.

With the convex portion H34821a2 formed as described above, when the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b moves back and forth and comes into contact with the convex portion H33821a2, the game ball is brought to the center in the front-to-back direction of the rolling surface by the inclined surface on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state where it moves back and forth. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, according to the convex portion H34821a2 in the 144th embodiment, since it is extended over the entire vertical area of the ball throwing path, even if the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling portion H821b moves up and down (bounces upward), it can be made to abut against the convex portion H34821a2. In other words, it is possible to prevent a game ball that moves back and forth from being thrown without abutting against the convex portion H34821a2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being thrown into the game area of the game board H13 in a state of moving up and down. As a result, the game ball can be stably thrown into the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, in the case where the game ball sent to the rails H61, H62 of the game board H13 is not sent to the game area (does not pass through the return ball prevention member H68) and flows back (down) along the outer rail H62 to the ball launching unit H34112a side, this is similar to the convex portion H33821a2 in the 142nd embodiment, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

In addition, in the 144th embodiment, the second convex portion H32872 of the launch position ball throwing unit H32170, which is disposed on the front side of the ball launching unit H34112a, is formed in a shape that is the inverse of the convex portion H33821a2 in the front-to-rear direction, and similarly to the convex portion H34821a2, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being sent to the game area of the game board H13 in a state where it moves wildly in the front-to-rear and up-to-down directions. As a result, the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In addition, in the above 144th embodiment, the cross section of the convex portion H34821a2 is formed in a substantially triangular shape, but the cross section of the convex portion H34821a2 may be formed in a semicircular shape. In this case as well, the game ball that contacts the convex portion H34821a2 can be brought closer to the center of the rolling surface.

Next, referring to Figure 1970, the upper decorative unit H35014a in the 145th embodiment will be described. In the above 126th embodiment, the case where the board unit H16344 protrudes from the upper decorative unit H16014a when the ball removal lever H16052 is operated is described, but in the 145th embodiment, the case where the board unit H16344 protrudes from the upper decorative unit H16014a by unlocking the cylinder lock H20 is described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1970(a) and (b) are schematic front views of the front frame H35014 in the 145th embodiment. Note that Figure 1970(a) illustrates a retracted state in which the board unit H16344 is retracted inside the upper decorative unit H35014a, while Figure 1970(b) illustrates a protruding state in which the board unit H16344 protrudes from the upper decorative unit H35014a. Note that in Figures 1970(a) and (b), the structure of each component is illustrated in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1970, the front frame H35014 in the 145th embodiment includes a main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840) formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape using a metal plate, an upper decorative unit H35014a arranged on the main frame H14d and arranged on the front of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the main frame H14d, and a left decorative unit H15014b extending downward (arrow D direction side) from both the left and right sides (arrow L-R directions) of the upper decorative unit H35014a. It is mainly composed of 4b and a right side decorative unit H14c, an upper and lower tray unit H15 that covers the front of the lower side of the main frame H14d, a passage forming unit H140 (see Figure 1840) that is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the upper and lower tray unit H15 via the main frame H14d, and a launch position ball throwing unit H170 (see Figure 1840) that is arranged on the back side of the passage forming unit H140, and is rotatably attached to the inner frame H12 (see Figure 1839).

The front frame H35014 has an opening (not shown) formed in the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840) into which the engagement piece H12f (see FIG. 1837) of the inner frame H12 can engage when the front frame H35014 is placed in the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1837). The engagement piece H12f of the front frame H35014 and the inner frame H12 is engaged, restricting the opening of the front frame H35014 from the inner frame H12. The engagement of the engagement piece H12f can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole H21 of the cylinder lock H20, performing a specified operation, and lifting the engagement piece H12f.

The upper decorative unit H35014a in the 145th embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 (see FIG. 1843) that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H16320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H16320 mainly comprises a decorative unit H330 formed in a box shape with an open rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B), a light-emitting unit H16340 (see FIG. 1956) and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1845) arranged inside the decorative unit H330.

The light-emitting unit H16340 mainly comprises an attachment member H341 that is fastened to the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the front plate H331, a board unit H16344 that is disposed on the rear side of the attachment member H341 in a state in which it can be displaced in the vertical direction, and a covering member H343 that covers the rear sides of the board unit H16344 and the attachment member H341.

The board unit H16344 mainly comprises a board member H342 on which a plurality of light-emitting LEDs (light-emitting diodes) H342a that emit light are arranged on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F), a front cover H16345 that covers the front side of the board member H342, a rear cover H16346 that covers the rear side of the board member H342, and a transmission member H16347 that is connected to the rear side of the rear cover H16346.

In addition, a metallic connecting member H35347 is connected to the transmission member H16347 in the 145th embodiment, and the opposite end is disposed in a state in which it abuts the upper part of the engagement piece H12f. Therefore, the transmission member H16347 can be displaced upward as the engagement piece H12f is displaced upward (i.e., the cylinder lock H20 is unlocked).

The upper panel H332 of the upper decorative unit H35014a is provided with an engagement piece H35331c that can engage with the underside of the transmission member H16347 and support the transmission member H16347 when the transmission member H16347 is displaced upward. This allows the transmission member H16347 to be displaced upward, and the board unit H16344 to be maintained in its protruding position with the board unit H16344 protruding upward. The operating mode of the engagement piece H35331c is the same as that of the engagement piece H15543 in the 125th embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

According to the front frame H35014 in the 145th embodiment configured as described above, the substrate unit H16344 can be protruded from above when the front frame H35014 is released from the inner frame H12. Therefore, if there is an object placed on the top of the front frame H35014 (upper decorative unit H35014a), the object placed on the top of the front frame H35014 (upper decorative unit H35014a) can be moved (dropped) before the front frame H35014 is released from the inner frame H12.

This allows workers in a pachinko parlor to recognize that an object is placed on top of the front frame H35014 (upper decorative unit H35014a) when the front frame H35014 is released from the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1837). Therefore, when the front frame H35014 is released from the inner frame H12, it is possible to prevent objects from falling into the play area, and to prevent damage to the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) caused by objects falling into the play area (especially liquids such as beverages flowing in and causing malfunctions in the electrical control board).

In addition, when the front frame H35014 is released from the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1837), the board unit H16344 is protruded, and the protruding state can be maintained by the engagement piece H35331c, so when the front frame H35014 is removed from the inner frame H12 and temporarily placed on the floor at a pachinko parlor, the board unit H16344 can be easily placed in a protruding state when the front frame H35014 is removed from the inner frame H12. This makes it unnecessary to protrude the board unit H16344 from the upper decorative unit H35014a after removing the front frame H35014 from the inner frame H12. As a result, when the front frame H35014 is removed from the inner frame H12, the front frame H35014 can be temporarily placed immediately, and the work of removing the front frame H35014 from the inner frame H12 can be simplified.

In the above 145th embodiment, a case was described in which the engagement piece H35331c is configured to be operable from outside the front frame H35014, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The operating portion of the engagement piece H35331c may be located inside the upper decorative unit H35014a, making it impossible for players to operate it and only operable by workers (staff) at the pachinko parlor.

In this case, if the front frame H35014 is fraudulently opened relative to the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1837), the board unit H16344 can be protruded from the upper decorative unit H35014a, making it easier for pachinko parlor workers (staff) to recognize that the front frame H35014 has been fraudulently opened and cheating may have occurred. As a result, it becomes easier to prevent players from cheating.

Next, the inner frame H36012 in the 146th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1971. In the above 125th embodiment, a case was described in which the base unit H16344 protrudes from the upper decorative unit H16014a when the ball removal lever H16052 is operated, but in the 146th embodiment, a case is described in which the protruding member H36130a protrudes from the inside of the tank H36130 when the throwing of the game ball on the case rail H132 is stopped. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1971(a) and (b) are schematic rear views of the inner frame H12 in the 146th embodiment. Note that Figure 1971(a) illustrates a retracted state in which the protruding member H36130a is retracted inside the tank H36130, and Figure 1971(b) illustrates a state in which the protruding member H36130a protrudes from the inside of the tank H36130. Note that in Figures 1971(a) and (b), the structure of each member is illustrated in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1971, the inner frame H36012 in the 146th embodiment is formed mainly with a frame forming unit H12a formed in a rectangular shape having an outline substantially identical to that of the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835), and a back pack unit H94 rotatably supported on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the frame forming unit H12a (see FIG. 1834), and the back pack unit H94 is rotatable rearward with the left side (arrow L direction side) as viewed from the front as the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side (arrow R direction side) as the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip end side) (see FIG. 1836).

The rear side of the inner frame H36012 is equipped with a tank H36130 located at the top of the rear pack unit H94 and opening upward, a tank rail H131 connected to the bottom of the tank H36130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail H132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail H131, and a payout device H133 (see FIG. 1839) provided at the most downstream part of the case rail H132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor H216 (see FIG. 1842).

The tank H36130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is dispensed appropriately by the dispensing device H133. In addition, the tank H36130 is arranged so that a roughly frame-shaped protruding member H36130a formed along its inner edge can be displaced in the vertical direction along the inner edge of the tank H36130.

The protruding member H36130a is connected to a transmission part H36130a1 to which the driving force is transmitted, and the transmission part H36130a1 protrudes downward from the tank H36130 through an opening (not shown) formed in a part of the underside of the tank H36130.

The transmission part H36130a1 is supported by the slide plate H36132c, with its lower surface abutting against the inclined surface of the slide plate H36132c, which is connected to one end of the connecting member H36132b described later. When the slide plate H36132c is slidably displaced, the transmission part H36130a1 can be slid upward by the inclined surface.

The case rail H132 is equipped with a ball throwing stop lever H132a that stops the throwing of the ball during maintenance of the pachinko machine H10, and is configured to be able to temporarily stop the throwing of the game ball by displacing the ball throwing stop lever H132a, which is configured to be displaceable, into the ball throwing path of the case rail H132.

In the 146th embodiment, the throwing stop lever H132a is connected to a connecting member H36132b having a sliding plate H36132c disposed on the opposite side. Therefore, when the throwing stop lever H132a is operated to stop the throwing of the ball, the sliding plate H36132c can be slid and displaced.

In this case, as described above, the transmission part H36130a1 of the protruding member H36130a can be displaced upward by the sliding displacement of the slide plate H36132c. Therefore, in the 146th embodiment, when the throw of the game ball on the case rail H132 is stopped by the throw stop lever H132a, the protruding member H36130a can be caused to protrude from the tank H36130.

The storage space of the tank H36130 can be enlarged by the protruding displacement of the protruding member H36130a from the tank H36130. Therefore, even if game balls continue to be supplied to the tank H36130 from the island equipment of the game hall after the ball sending to the case rail H132 is stopped, the game balls in the tank H36130 can be prevented from overflowing.

In addition, the tank H36130 can be made taller by the protruding member H36130a, so that when game balls are supplied to the tank H36130 from the island equipment of the game hall, the protruding member H36130a can prevent the game balls from flying out of the tank H36130.

When game balls stored in the tank H36130 are permitted to be sent from the case rail H132, the game balls stored in the tank H36130 can be sent along with the balls. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the tank H36130 when the protruding member H36130a is retracted to the inside of the tank H36130 from a state in which game balls are stored in the tank H36130.

In the 146th embodiment, the upward projection distance of the projection member H36130a is such that the tip of the projection member H36130a projects outward beyond the outer shape of the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835) on which the inner frame H36012 is disposed. This prevents the inner frame H36012 from being closed due to forgetting to return the ball stop lever H132a when the inner frame H36012 is opened relative to the outer frame H11 and the ball throw on the case rail H132 is stopped for maintenance by the ball throw stop lever H132a.

In other words, when the ball throwing stop lever H132a has stopped the throwing of the case rail H132, the closure of the inner frame H12 relative to the outer frame H11 is restricted by the protruding member H36130a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner frame H12 from being closed relative to the outer frame H11 and left in a playable state (a state in which the player can start playing) when play is not possible (no game balls are being thrown).

Next, referring to FIG. 1972, the upper decorative unit H37014a in the 147th embodiment will be described. In the above 119th embodiment, the first communication passage H300C is opened through an opening in a mesh member H9332e arranged along the front edge of the upper panel H9332 (the first communication passage H300C is connected to the outside space through an opening in the mesh member H9332e), but in the 120th embodiment, a case will be described in which the upper panel H9333 is provided with a plate member H37332h without an opening. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1972(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H37014a in the 147th embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946(a), and Figure 1972(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H37014a, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIb in Figure 1946(b). Note that Figure 1972(a) illustrates the state in which the first communication passage H300C is closed by the upper plate H37332, and N14(b) illustrates the state in which the first communication passage H300C is opened by the upper plate H37332. Also, in Figure 1972, the structure of each component is simplified to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1972, the upper decorative unit H37014a in the 147th embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H37320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H37320 is mainly formed with a decorative unit H37330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), and a light-emitting unit H340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1844) arranged inside the decorative unit H37330.

The decorative unit H37330 is composed of a front plate H331 arranged at a predetermined interval (the interval for arranging the upper plate H37332, the lower plate H333, the left plate H9334 (see FIG. 1946), and the right plate H9336 (see FIG. 1946)) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310, an upper plate H37332 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and arranged adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and a lower plate H33 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front plate H331 and arranged adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331. 3, a left panel H9334 (see FIG. 1946) that is formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the left side (arrow L direction) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front panel H331, connecting the left (arrow L direction) ends of the upper panel H37332 and the lower panel H333, a right panel H9336 (see FIG. 1946) that is formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the right side (arrow R direction) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the front panel H331, connecting the right (arrow R direction) ends of the upper panel H37332 and the lower panel H333, and a drive unit H9337 that applies a drive force to displace the upper panel H37332.

The top plate H37332, bottom plate H333, left plate H9334, and right plate H9336 are members for forming (compartmentalizing) a space for disposing the light emitting unit H340 and the sound transmission unit H350 (see FIG. 1844) on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and are formed to a shape that follows the edge of the front plate H331, with both ends of the top plate H37332 and bottom plate H333 being connected by the left plate H9334 and right plate H9336 (see FIG. 1946), respectively.

The top panel H37332 mainly comprises side panels H9332d extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate member H37332h disposed between the pair of side panels H9332d, and a cylindrical shaft portion H9332f protruding from both outsides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) on the rear side (arrow B direction).

The upper plate H37332 in the 147th embodiment does not have the front side convex portion H332a, the rear side convex portion H332b, and the fastening portion H332c of the upper plate H332 in the 111th embodiment. This makes it possible to rotate the upper plate H37332 relative to the front plate H331 in the 147th embodiment.

The plate member H37332h is a member that prevents unauthorized parts from being inserted into the upper decorative unit H37014a (the space H9332d2 between the opposing side panels H9332d) when the top panel H37332 is rotated, and is formed in a position along the inner wall (inner surface) on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first communication passage H300C. In addition, the plate member H37332h is formed by connecting the front end portions of a pair of side panels H9332d.

In the 147th embodiment, the plate member H37332h protrudes from the lower surface of the upper plate H37332 and is formed of a resin material that is integral with the upper plate H37332, but the plate member H37332h may be formed of a resin material that is separate from the upper plate H37332. In this case, it is preferable to allow some adjustment range for the mounting position of the plate member H37332h relative to the upper plate H37332. This makes it possible to adjust the mounting position of the upper plate H37332 even if the formation position of the first communication passage H300C is shifted due to manufacturing errors, etc., and prevents gaps from being created in the space H9332d2 between the opposing side plates H9332d.

Next, the displacement of the top plate H37332 in the 147th embodiment will be described. Note that the displacement of the top plate H37332 rotating about the shaft portion H9332f due to the drive of the solenoid H9337a is the same as that of the top plate H9332 in the 119th embodiment, so a detailed description of this displacement will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1972(a), an upper plate H37332 is disposed along the upper portion of the first communication passage H300C, and when the lower surface of the upper plate H37332 blocks the first communication passage H300C, a plate member H37332h is disposed along the inner surface on the rear side of the first communication passage H300C.

As shown in FIG. 1972(b), when the upper plate H37332 is rotated upward around the shaft portion H9332f from this state, a space is formed between the upper side of the first communication passage H300C and the upper plate H37332. This allows the first communication passage H300C to be opened (connecting the first communication passage H300C to the outside space).

On the other hand, the plate member H37332h of the upper panel H37332 is positioned so that the upper end of the partition wall H343b and the lower end of the plate member H37332h are adjacent to each other in the fore-and-aft direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), and the space H9332d2 formed between the pair of opposing side panels H9332d is not connected to the outside space. This prevents unauthorized parts from being inserted into the upper decorative unit H37014a (the space H9332d2 between the opposing side panels H9332d) when the upper panel H37332 is rotated.

In addition, the plate member H37332h is located adjacent to the side surface on the rear side of the first communication passage H300C (the space H9332d2 formed between the pair of opposing side plates H9332d is not connected to the external space by the plate member H37332h), so sound emitted into the first communication passage H300C can be prevented from leaking into the space H9332d2. This makes it possible to more efficiently emit sound from the first communication passage H300C to the external space than with the top plate H9332 in the 111th embodiment. As a result, the sound-based presentation effect can be enhanced.

The timing of displacement of the upper plate H37332 in the 147th embodiment is the same as in the 119th embodiment, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, referring to Figure 1973, the upper decorative unit H38014a in the 148th embodiment will be described. In the above 147th embodiment, a top panel H37332 formed from a resin plate member is arranged on the upper part of the upper decorative unit H37014a. However, in the 148th embodiment, a light irradiation unit H38336 having a light emitting means is arranged on the upper part of the upper decorative unit H38014a. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1973(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H38014a in the 148th embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946(a), and Figure 1973(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H38014a, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIb in Figure 1946(b). Note that Figure 1973(a) illustrates the state in which the first communication passage H300C is closed by the light-emitting unit H37336, and N16(b) illustrates the state in which the first communication passage H300C is opened by the displacement of the light-irradiation unit H38336. Also, in Figure 1973, the structure of each component is simplified to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1973, the upper decorative unit H38014a in the 148th embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H38320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H38320 is mainly formed with a decorative unit H38330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), a light-emitting unit H38340 arranged inside the decorative unit H38330, and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1844).

The decorative unit H38330 comprises a front plate H331 disposed at a predetermined interval (the interval for disposing the light irradiation unit H38336, the lower plate H333, the left plate H9334 (see FIG. 1946), and the right plate H9336 (see FIG. 1946)) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310, a light irradiation unit H38336 formed in a shape that follows the rear end portion on the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and a lower plate H333 formed in a shape that follows the rear end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331. The left panel H9334 (see FIG. 1946) is formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the left side (arrow L direction) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front panel H331, and connects the left end (arrow L direction) of the light irradiation unit H38336 and the lower panel H333, the right panel H9336 (see FIG. 1946) is formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the right side (arrow R direction) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the front panel H331, and connects the right end (arrow R direction) of the light irradiation unit H38336 and the lower panel H333, and a drive unit H9337 that applies a drive force to displace the light irradiation unit H38336.

The light irradiation unit H38336, the left panel H9334, and the right panel H9336 are members for forming (compartmentalizing) a space for disposing the light emitting unit H340 and the sound transmission unit H350 on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front panel H331, and are formed in a shape that follows the edge of the front panel H331, with both ends of the light irradiation unit H38336 and the lower panel H333 being connected by the left panel H9334 and the right panel H9336, respectively.

The light irradiation unit H38336 mainly comprises a substrate member H38336a having an LED (light emitting diode) H38336a1 and configured to be capable of emitting light, a first case member H38336b disposed on the light emitting side of the substrate member H38336a, and a second case member H38336c disposed in such a manner that the substrate member H38336a is sandwiched between the first case member H38336b.

The first case member H38336b is formed from a resin material that is transparent to light emitted from the LED H38336a1 of the substrate member H38336a arranged on the substrate member H38336a. This allows the light emitted from the substrate member H38336a to be emitted from the first case member H38336b side.

The light irradiation direction of the LED H38336a1 is set to a direction perpendicular to the arrangement surface of the substrate member H38336a. In the 148th embodiment, when the light irradiation unit H38356 covers the top of the first communication passage H300C (as shown in FIG. 1973(a)), the light irradiation direction is set to face downward (arrow D direction). When the light irradiation unit H38356 opens the first communication passage H300C (as shown in FIG. 1973(b)), the light irradiation direction is set to face slightly forward (arrow F direction) from the downward side.

The second case member H38336c is a plate member that covers the upper decorative unit H38014a from above, and is formed to have a larger outer shape in a top view than the first case member H38336b and the base member H38336a. The second case member H38336c mainly comprises side panels H9332d extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate member H37332h disposed between the pair of opposing side panels H9332d, and a shaft portion H9332f that protrudes cylindrically from both outsides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) on the rear side (arrow B direction).

The second case member H38336c in the 148th embodiment does not have the front side convex portion H332a, the back side convex portion H332b, and the fastening portion H332c of the top plate H332 in the 111th embodiment. This makes it possible to rotate the light irradiation unit H38336 relative to the front plate H331 in the 38th embodiment.

The second case member H38336c has a plate member H37332h protruding from the underside thereof, and the plate member H37332h is formed from a resin material that is integral with the second case member H38336c. The second case member H38336c and the plate member H37332h may be formed from separate resin materials.

The light-emitting unit H38340 mainly comprises an attachment member H341 that is fastened to the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the front plate H331, and a covering member H38343 that covers the rear side of the attachment member H341.

The covering member H38343 is formed in substantially the same shape as the mounting member H341 when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the mounting member H341 by a screw inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side). The covering member H38343 is also formed in a box shape with the center part bulging toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) when viewed from the front, and the center part on the front side (arrow F direction side) is open.

The covering member H38343 is formed from a white resin material that is non-transparent to light and has a high light reflectance, and the inner surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) is formed so that it is inclined upward (arrow U direction side) toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). This allows the light emitted from the LED H38336a1 to be reflected and irradiated toward the front plate H331 side.

The covering member H38343 further includes a partition wall H343b that stands upward from the side surface on the upper side (the side in the direction of the arrow U) when viewed from the front, and an upper opening H38343c and a lower opening H38343d that are opened at a position opposite the LED H38336a1 when the light irradiation unit H38336 is closed. When the upper decorative unit H38014a is assembled (when the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is blocked (covered) by the light irradiation unit H38336), the tip of the partition wall H343b abuts against the second case member H38336c of the light irradiation unit H38336.

The upper opening H38343c is formed in a position facing the LED H38336a1 of the light irradiation unit H38336 when the first communication passage H300C is mainly covered, so that the light emitted from the LED H38336a1 can be irradiated into the interior of the covering member H38343.

Like the upper opening H38343c, the lower opening H38343d is formed in a position facing the LED H38336a1 of the light irradiation unit H38336 when the first communication passage H300C is covered, so that the light emitted from the LED H38336a1 can be irradiated onto the lower panel H333.

Therefore, when the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is covered by the light irradiation unit H38336, the light irradiated from the LED H38336a1 can be irradiated to the lower plate H333 through the upper opening H38343c and the lower opening H38343d. In the 148th embodiment, the lower plate H333 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material. As a result, when the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is covered by the light irradiation unit H38336, the light can be emitted from a part of the lower plate H333 (a position corresponding to the upper opening H38343c and the lower opening H38343d).

The upper opening H38343c is formed as a long hole that is longer toward the front side than the lower opening H38343d. This allows the light emitted from the LED H38336a1 to be irradiated into the interior of the covering member H38343 when the first communication passage H300C is opened by the light irradiation unit H38336 (the light irradiation unit H38336 is raised to open the upper side of the first communication passage H300C). Furthermore, the lower opening H38343d is formed in a position that does not face the LED H38336a1 when the first communication passage H300C is opened by the light irradiation unit H38336.

Therefore, when the first communication passage H300C is opened by the light irradiation unit H38336, the light irradiated from the upper opening H38343c to the inside of the covering member H38343 is reflected by the inner surface of the lower side of the covering member H38343 and irradiated toward the front plate H331.

In other words, in the 148th embodiment, by displacing the light irradiation unit H38336, it is possible not only to switch the open state of the first communication passage H300C (changing the sound emission state), but also to change the light presentation surface (changing whether the light is irradiated onto the front panel H331 or the bottom panel H333). As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

In the 148th embodiment, when the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is covered by the light irradiation unit H38336, the light of the LED H38336a1 is irradiated onto the lower plate H333, and when the first communication passage H300C is opened by the light irradiation unit H38336, the light of the LED H38336a2 is irradiated onto the front plate H331. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the target of light irradiation may be reversed or changed. Also, the opening position of the upper opening H38343c or lower opening H38343d of the covering member H38343 that allows light to pass through may be changed.

For example, when the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is covered by the light irradiation unit H38336, an upper opening H38343c and a lower opening H38343d may be formed at a position where the light of the LED H38336a1 can be irradiated (reflected) onto the front plate H331, and when the first communication passage H300C is opened by the light irradiation unit H38336, an upper opening H38343c and a lower opening H38343d may be formed at a position where the light of the LED H38336a2 can be irradiated onto the lower plate H333.

In this case, in the normal game mode (when the upper part of the first communication passage H300C is closed by the light irradiation unit H38336), the decoration on the front panel H331 can be seen by the player, which prevents the player from unnecessarily hoping for a jackpot.

In addition, when the first communication passage H300C is opened by the light irradiation unit H38336, the lower opening H38343d may be formed at a position where the light emitted from the upper opening H38343c to the inside of the covering member H38343 can be emitted from the underside of the front plate H331 via the lower opening H38343d without being irradiated onto the inner surface of the covering member H38343.

In the 148th embodiment, the first communication passage H300C is switched between a closed passage and an open passage in response to the player's operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833). That is, the operation (input) of the button section H181 of the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) is detected by various switches H208 (see FIG. 1842), and a signal for displacing the light irradiation unit H38336 is output from the sound lamp control device H113 to other devices H228 (solenoid H9337a for displacing the light irradiation unit H38336 (see FIG. 1842)) based on the detection result.

Therefore, when the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the light irradiation unit H38336 is displaced, so the timing at which the sound emission mode is changed can be related to the operation of the button section H181. As a result, the presentation effect by operating the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) can be improved, and the player's interest can be increased.

Furthermore, in the 148th embodiment, when the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage as shown in N16(a), the light irradiation unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is in abutment against the partition wall H343b, whereas when the first communication passage H300C is opened as shown in FIG. 1973(b), the light irradiation unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is separated from the partition wall H343b. As a result, when the first communication passage H300C is opened, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H38014a can be reduced compared to when the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage.

This change in rigidity causes sound to be emitted from the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) arranged inside the upper decorative unit H38014a, and the manner in which the sound is output to the outside of the upper decorative unit H38014a can be changed.

In other words, simply changing the volume of the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) results in little change in the type of sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H38014a, but in the upper decorative unit H38014a in the 148th embodiment, by changing the contact state of the light-emitting unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) against the upper decorative unit H38014a (partition wall H343b), even if the volume of the speaker H312a is kept constant, the type of sound output from the upper decorative unit H38014a can be changed in accordance with changes in the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H38014a. As a result, the type of sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

Now, the change in the manner of the output sound will be explained in detail. When the light-emitting unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is in contact with the partition wall H343b, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H38014a can be increased, making it easier for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H38014a and emitting sound from the openings (slit H331a1 (see Figure 1843), sound-emitting opening H333b (see Figure 1845), detection opening H333a (see Figure 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330.

On the other hand, when the light-illuminating unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is separated from the partition wall H343b, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H38014a decreases, making it difficult for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H38014a. This reduces the volume of the sound emitted from the openings (slit H331a1 (see FIG. 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see FIG. 1845), detection opening H333a (see FIG. 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330, making it easier for the player to hear the sound emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C. As a result, it is possible to make the sound sound as if it is being emitted from the entire upper decorative unit H38014a.

In addition, since the light-illuminating unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is part of the decorative surface (exterior wall) of the upper decorative unit H38014a, when the light-illuminating unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is displaced, sound can be emitted by utilizing the space before the light-illuminating unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is displaced. This improves the manner in which the sound emitted from the speaker H312a is produced when the light-illuminating unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is separated from the partition wall H343b.

Furthermore, when the light-illuminating unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is in contact with the partition wall H343b, it is configured as a wall that blocks the upper side of the first communication passage H300C that communicates with the installation space H300F in which the speaker H312a is arranged, so that the sound of the speaker H312a can be emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C, changing the manner of the sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H38014a. As a result, the manner of the sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light irradiation unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is disposed between the speakers H312a disposed in two locations; that is, the contact state between the light irradiation unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) and the partition wall H343b is changed between the two speakers H312a, making it easier to change the manner of sound output from the speaker H312a. In other words, the light irradiation unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is disposed in an area (a position between the speakers H312a when viewed from the front) where it is easy to change the sound output manner of the two speakers H312a, so the manner of sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

Furthermore, since the light irradiation unit H38336 (second case member H38336c) is configured as a plate-like body that can rotate around the axis portion H9332f formed on the rear side, the contact area with the upper decorative unit H38014a can be minimized when it is separated from the partition wall H343b. In other words, since areas other than the axis portion H9332f can be made non-contact, it is easier to reduce the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H38014a (the change in rigidity of the upper decorative unit H38014a can be made greater). This makes it easier to change the manner in which the sound is emitted from the upper decorative unit H38014a. As a result, the manner in which the sound is emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In addition, since the light-illuminating unit H38336 in the 148th embodiment is configured to be able to emit light, it is easily visible to the player when it is protruded above the upper decorative unit H38014a to open the first communication passage H300C. Therefore, the player can recognize that the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H38014a is changing by visually recognizing the change in the light-illuminating unit H38336.

The change in the sound emission mode in the 148th embodiment is not limited to the operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833). For example, when a pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) wins a jackpot in a lottery triggered by winning the first winning slot H64 and the second winning slot H640 (see FIG. 1842), the light irradiation unit H38336 may be displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10.

In this case, when a jackpot is hit, the first communication passage H300C can be opened to allow the player to easily hear the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833), making it easier for the player to focus on the game during the jackpot. Also, in the 148th embodiment, the light from the light irradiation unit H38336 can be irradiated toward the player from the rear side of the space where the first communication passage H300C is opened, making it possible for the player to recognize the sound effects and the light effects, making it easier for the player to focus on the game during the jackpot.

On the other hand, when there is no big win (when the lottery is lost or during the lottery), the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage, which prevents the player from paying unnecessary attention to the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). This makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds of the in-store announcements and the sounds of other pachinko machines H10 (for example, the neighboring pachinko machine H10). In this case, the passage width and passage length of the first communication passage H300C may be set so that the sounds transmitted from the first space H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) to the first communication passage H300C cancel each other out, thereby reducing the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 when the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage.

In addition, when a predetermined reach effect (for example, an effect in which the expectation of a big win is high) occurs instead of a big win, the first communication passage H300C may be opened to make it easier for the player to notice the reach effect.

Furthermore, the change in the sound emission mode in the 148th embodiment may be such that when a predetermined ball is entered (for example, when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640 (see FIG. 1838)) or when the operating handle H51 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the light irradiation unit H38336 is displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833).

In this case, when a player starts playing (by shooting a game ball into the playing area or by placing the shot game ball into the designated ball entrance), the first communication passage H300C is opened, making it easier for the player to hear the sounds emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). This makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds being played, while also preventing the player from hearing the sounds of other pachinko machines H10 (for example, adjacent pachinko machines H10) that the player is not playing (the game ball has not been shot into the playing area, or the game ball shot into the playing area has not entered the designated ball entrance). As a result, it is easier for the player to pay attention to the effects of the pachinko machine H10 that he or she is playing.

Next, referring to FIG. 1974, the upper decorative unit H39014a in the 149th embodiment will be described. In the above 147th embodiment, the case where the upper panel H37332 rotates by the shaft portion H9332f was described, but in the 149th embodiment, the case where the upper panel H39332 rotates by a second shaft portion H39332n in addition to the shaft portion H9332f will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1974(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H39014a in the 149th embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIa in Figure 1946(a), and Figure 1974(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H39014a, corresponding to the cross-section along line MCMXLVIIb in Figure 1946(b). Note that Figure 1974(a) illustrates the state in which the first communication passage H300C is closed by the upper plate H39332, and N17(b) illustrates the state in which the first communication passage H300C is opened by the upper plate H39332. Also, in Figure 1974, the structure of each component is simplified to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1974, the upper decorative unit H39014a in the 149th embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H39320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H39320 is mainly formed with a decorative unit H39330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), and a light-emitting unit H340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1844) arranged inside the decorative unit H39330.

The decorative unit H39330 is composed of a front plate H331 arranged at a predetermined interval (the interval for arranging the upper plate H39332, the lower plate H333, the left plate H9334 (see FIG. 1946), and the right plate H9336 (see FIG. 1946)) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310, an upper plate H39332 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and arranged adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and a lower plate H33 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front plate H331 and arranged adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331. 3, a left panel H9334 (see FIG. 1946) that is formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the left side (arrow L direction) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front panel H331, connecting the left (arrow L direction) ends of the upper panel H39332 and the lower panel H333, a right panel H9336 (see FIG. 1946) that is formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the right side (arrow R direction) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the front panel H331, connecting the right (arrow R direction) ends of the upper panel H39332 and the lower panel H333, and a drive unit H9337 that applies a drive force to displace the upper panel H39332.

The top plate H39332, bottom plate H333, left plate H9334, and right plate H9336 are members for forming (compartmentalizing) a space for disposing the light-emitting unit H340 and the sound transmission unit H350 on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and are formed to fit the edge of the front plate H331, with both ends of the top plate H39332 and bottom plate H333 being connected by the left plate H9334 and right plate H9336, respectively.

The upper panel H39332 mainly comprises a first member H39332k formed in a plate shape and a second plate-shaped member H39332m rotatably arranged on the first member H39332k. When the upper panel H39332 blocks the top of the first communication passage H300C, the second member H39332m is arranged on the front side of the first member H39332k, and their upper surfaces are arranged at approximately the same height (parallel).

The first member H39332k and the second member H39332m are always biased by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed between the first member H39332a and the second member H39332m so that the top surface of the first member H39332k and the top surface of the second member H39332m are parallel to each other. This allows the first member H39332k and the second member H39332m to rotate with the top surface of the first member H39332k and the top surface of the second member H39332m parallel to each other when a driving force is transmitted from the solenoid H9337a of the drive unit H9337 to the second member H39332m.

In addition, when a force acts on the first member H39332k in a direction (downward) opposite to the driving direction (upward) by the solenoid H9337a, causing the torsion spring to elastically deform, the second member H39332m can be rotated relative to the first member H39332k.

The first member H39332k mainly comprises a side plate H9332d extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and a shaft portion H9332f protruding cylindrically from both outsides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) on the rear side (arrow B direction).

The second member H39332m mainly comprises side plates H39332d extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate member H37332h disposed between the pair of opposing side plates H39332d, a pin portion H9332d1 disposed on one of the side plates H39332d to which the driving force of the drive unit H9337 is transmitted, and a second shaft portion H39332n connected to the first member H39332k.

When the top surfaces of the first member H39332k and the second member H39332m are arranged in parallel, the side panel H9332d of the first member H39332k and the side panel H39332d of the second member H39332m are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B).

Next, the displacement of the top plate H39332 in the 148th embodiment will be described. When no external force is acting on the upper side of the top plate H39332 in the 148th embodiment, the solenoid H9337a is driven to lift the second member H39332m upward, causing the first member H39332k and the second member H39332m to rotate about the shaft H9332f of the first member H39332k with their top surfaces parallel to each other.

On the other hand, when an external force acts on the upper side of the top plate H39332 (for example, when a player's personal belongings (wallet, cell phone, or drink) are placed on the top surface of the top plate H39332), the second member H39332m is lifted upward by the drive of the solenoid H9337a, causing it to rotate around the second shaft portion H39332n of the second member H39332m, thereby regulating the displacement of the first member H39332k.

To explain in more detail, when the driving force of the solenoid H9337a begins to act, the first member H39332k and the second member H39332m are rotated around the shaft H9332f of the first member H39332k with their top surfaces parallel, and the top surfaces of the first member H39332k and the second member H39332m are tilted upward from the rear side to the front side. This tilt allows the player's personal belongings placed on the top surface of the top plate H39332 to slide to the rear side (the first member H39332k side), creating a state in which the player's personal belongings are not placed on the second member H39332m on the front side.

By setting up a state in which an external force does not act on the upper side of the second member H39332m, but acts on the upper side of the first member H39332k, the second member H39332m can be rotated upward relative to the first member H39332k about the second shaft portion H39332n. As a result, in the 148th embodiment, even if an external force acts on the upper side of the upper plate H39332, the first communication passage H300C can be opened by the driving force of the solenoid H9337a.

That is, in the 149th embodiment, the position of the rotation axis (center of rotation) when the upper panel H39332 is rotated to open the first communication passage H300C can be changed, so that it is easy to form a horizontal surface (upper surface of the first member H39332k) on the upper side of the upper panel H39332. This makes it possible to form an area above the upper decorative unit H39014a where the player's personal belongings can be placed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's personal belongings placed on the upper side of the upper decorative unit H39014a from falling due to the rotation of the upper panel H39332, or the upper panel H39332 from being unable to rotate due to the player's personal belongings. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the performance due to the change in sound when the upper panel H39332 is rotated to open the first communication passage H300C.

In addition, when an area is formed above the upper decorative unit H39014a where the player's personal belongings can be placed (i.e., when only the second member H39332m is displaced), the first member H39332k can be maintained on the outer surface side of the upper decorative unit H39014a, so that the sound emitted from the first communication passage H300C can be prevented from escaping to the lower side of the first member H39332k, compared to when both the first member H39332k and the second member H39332m are displaced. This makes it easier for the player to hear the sound emitted from the first communication passage H300C. Therefore, it is easier to draw the player's attention to the upper decorative unit H39014a. As a result, the player can be prompted to remove the player's personal belongings placed above the upper decorative unit H39014a (the player can be made aware that personal belongings are placed above the upper decorative unit H39014a).

Furthermore, in the 149th embodiment, when the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage as shown in FIG. 1974(a), the upper plate H39332 (second member H39332m) is in contact with the partition wall H343b, whereas when the first communication passage H300C is opened as shown in FIG. 1974(b), the upper plate H39332 (second member H39332m) is separated from the partition wall H343b. As a result, when the first communication passage H300C is opened, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H39014a can be reduced compared to when the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage.

This change in rigidity causes sound to be emitted from the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) arranged inside the upper decorative unit H39014a, and the manner in which the sound is output to the outside of the upper decorative unit H39014a can be changed.

In other words, simply changing the volume of the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) results in little change in the type of sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H39014a, but in the upper decorative unit H39014a of the 149th embodiment, by changing the contact state of the upper panel H39332 (second member H39332m) against the upper decorative unit H39014a (partition wall H343b), even if the volume of the speaker H312a is kept constant, the type of sound output from the upper decorative unit H39014a can be changed in accordance with changes in the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H39014a. As a result, the type of sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

Now, the change in the form of the output sound will be explained in detail. When the top panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is in contact with the partition wall H343b, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H39014a can be increased, making it easier for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H39014a and emitting sound from the openings (slit H331a1 (see Figure 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see Figure 1845), detection opening H333a (see Figure 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330.

On the other hand, when the top panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is separated from the partition wall H343b, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H39014a is reduced, making it difficult for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H39014a. This reduces the volume of the sound emitted from the openings (slit H331a1 (see FIG. 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see FIG. 1845), detection opening H333a (see FIG. 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330, making it easier for the player to hear the sound emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C. As a result, it is possible to make the sound sound as if it is being emitted from the entire upper decorative unit H39014a.

In addition, since the top panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is part of the decorative surface (exterior wall) of the upper decorative unit H39014a, when the top panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is displaced, sound can be emitted by utilizing the space before the top panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is displaced. This improves the manner in which the sound emitted from the speaker H312a is produced when the top panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is separated from the partition wall H343b.

Furthermore, when the upper panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is in contact with the partition wall H343b, it is configured as a wall portion that blocks the upper side of the first communication passage H300C that communicates with the installation space H300F in which the speaker H312a is arranged, so that the sound of the speaker H312a can be emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C, changing the manner of the sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H39014a. As a result, the manner of the sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the top plate H39332 (second member H39332m) is disposed between the speakers H312a disposed in two locations; that is, the state of contact between the top plate H39332 (second member H39332m) and the partition wall H343b is changed between the two speakers H312a, making it easier to change the manner of sound output from the speakers H312a. In other words, the top plate H39332 (second member H39332m) is disposed in an area (the position between the two speakers H312a when viewed from the front) where it is easy to change the manner of sound output from the two speakers H312a, making it possible to improve the manner of sound emitted from the speakers H312a.

Furthermore, since the upper panel H39332 (second member H39332m) is configured as a plate-like body that can rotate around the axis portion H9332f formed on the rear side, the contact area with the upper decorative unit H39014a can be minimized when it is separated from the partition wall H343b. In other words, since areas other than the axis portion H9332f can be made non-contact, it is easier to reduce the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H39014a (the change in rigidity of the upper decorative unit H39014a can be made greater). This makes it easier to change the manner in which the sound is emitted from the upper decorative unit H39014a. As a result, the manner in which the sound is emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In addition, in the 149th embodiment, the position of the rotation axis (center of rotation) when the upper panel H39332 is rotated to open the first communication passage H300C is changeable (the first member H39332k can be placed on the outer surface of the upper decorative unit H39014a), so that the contact area between the upper decorative unit H39014a and the upper panel H39332 can be changed when the first communication passage H300C is in an open state. This allows multiple changes in the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H39014a to be formed (i.e., a state of intermediate rigidity can be formed). Therefore, it is possible to easily change the manner of sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H39014a. As a result, the manner of sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In the 149th embodiment, the state in which the first communication passage H300C is a closed passage and the state in which the first communication passage H300C is an open passage are switched in conjunction with the operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833) by the player. That is, the operation (input) of the button section H181 of the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) is detected by various switches H208 (see FIG. 1842), and a signal for displacing the top panel H39332 based on the detection result is output from the voice lamp control device H113 to other devices H228 (solenoid H9337a (see FIG. 1842) for displacing the top panel H39332).

When the button portion H181 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the upper panel H39332 is displaced, so the timing at which the sound emission mode is changed can be related to the operation of the button portion H181. As a result, the presentation effect by operating the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) can be improved, and the player's interest can be increased.

The change in the sound emission mode in the 149th embodiment is not limited to the operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833). For example, when a pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) wins a jackpot in a lottery triggered by winning the first winning slot H64 and the second winning slot H640 (see FIG. 1842), the top panel H39332 may be displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10.

In this case, when a jackpot is hit, the first communication passage H300C is opened to allow the player to easily hear the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833), making it easier for the player to focus on the game during the jackpot.

On the other hand, when there is no big win (when the lottery is lost or during the lottery), the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage, which prevents the player from paying unnecessary attention to the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). This makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds of the in-store announcements and the sounds of other pachinko machines H10 (for example, the neighboring pachinko machine H10). In this case, the passage width and passage length of the first communication passage H300C may be set so that the sounds transmitted from the first space H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) to the first communication passage H300C cancel each other out, thereby reducing the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 when the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage.

In addition, when a predetermined reach effect (for example, an effect in which the expectation of a big win is high) occurs instead of a big win, the first communication passage H300C may be opened to make it easier for the player to notice the reach effect.

Furthermore, in the 149th embodiment, the change in the sound emission mode may be such that when a predetermined ball is entered (for example, when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640 (see FIG. 1838)) or when the operating handle H51 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the upper panel H39332 is displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833).

In this case, when a player starts playing (by shooting a game ball into the playing area or by placing the shot game ball into the designated ball entrance), the first communication passage H300C is opened, making it easier for the player to hear the sounds emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). This makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds being played, while also preventing the player from hearing the sounds of other pachinko machines H10 (for example, adjacent pachinko machines H10) that the player is not playing (the game ball has not been shot into the playing area, or the game ball shot into the playing area has not entered the designated ball entrance). As a result, it is easier for the player to pay attention to the effects of the pachinko machine H10 that he or she is playing.

In the 149th embodiment, the case where the upper panel H39332 has two rotation axes (axis portion H9332f and second axis portion H39332n) has been described, but one rotation axis may be slid back and forth to form an area above the upper decorative unit H39014a where the player's personal belongings can be placed. Also, the upper panel H39332 may be formed with three or more rotation axes.

Next, the upper decorative unit H40014a in the 150th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1975. In the above 147th embodiment, the case where the first spaces H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) communicate with each other via the first communication passage H300C when the top plate H37332 closes the top of the first communication passage H300C is described, but in the 150th embodiment, a case where communication between the first spaces H300A via the first communication passage H300C is restricted when the top plate H40332 closes the top of the first communication passage H300C is described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

1975(a) to 1975(c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the upper decorative unit H40014a in the 150th embodiment, and correspond to the cross section at the line MCMXLVIIa in FIG. 1946(a). In addition, in FIG. 1975(a) to FIG. 1975(c), the transition state of the upper plate H40332 is illustrated in order, and in FIG. 1975(a), the state in which the first communication passage H300C is closed is illustrated, in FIG. 1975(b), the state in which the first communication passage H300C is connected to the first space H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) is illustrated, and in FIG. 1975(c), the state in which the first communication passage H300C is opened is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 1975, the structure of each component is simplified to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1975, the upper decorative unit H40014a in the 151st embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H40320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H40320 is mainly formed with a decorative unit H40330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), and a light-emitting unit H340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1844) arranged inside the decorative unit H40330.

The decorative unit H40330 comprises a front plate H331 disposed at a predetermined interval (the interval for disposing the upper plate H40332, the lower plate H333, the left plate H9334 (see FIG. 1946), and the right plate H9336 (see FIG. 1946)) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310, an upper plate H40332 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end portion on the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, a lower plate H333 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and a rear end portion on the left side (arrow L direction) of the front plate H331. The left panel H9334 (see FIG. 1946) is formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the front panel H331 (arrow B direction side) and is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the front panel H331, connecting the left (arrow L direction) ends of the upper panel H40332 and the lower panel H333; the right panel H9336 (see FIG. 1946) is formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the right (arrow R direction side) of the front panel H331 and is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the front panel H331, connecting the right (arrow R direction) ends of the upper panel H40332 and the lower panel H333; a drive unit H9337 that applies a drive force to displace the upper panel H40332; and a second displacement member H40337 that is connected to the lower side of the upper panel H40332 and can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the upper panel H40332.

The top plate H40332, bottom plate H333, left plate H9334, and right plate H9336 are members for forming (compartmentalizing) a space for disposing the light-emitting unit H340 and sound transmission unit H350 on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and are formed to fit the edge of the front plate H331, with both ends of the top plate H40332 and bottom plate H333 being connected by the left plate H9334 and right plate H9336, respectively.

The top panel H40332 mainly comprises side panels H9332d extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), a closing portion H40332p disposed between the pair of side panels H9332d, a cylindrical shaft portion H9332f protruding from both outsides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) on the rear side (arrow B direction), and a link member H40332q one end of which is connected to the underside of the top panel H40332 and the other end of which is connected to the upper surface of the second displacement member H40337.

The closing portion H40332p is a member that closes the first communication passage H300C when the top plate H40332 is positioned above the first communication passage H300C, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the internal space of the first communication passage H300C. When the top plate H40332 is positioned above the first communication passage H300C, the closing portion H40332p blocks the interior of the first communication passage H300C, thereby releasing communication between the first spaces H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) through the first communication passage H300C.

The link member H40332q is a link member connected to the second displacement member H40337, and is arranged in a state in which it can rotate with respect to the upper plate H40332. In addition, the connection side of the link member H40332q with the second displacement member H40337 is in a state in which it can rotate with respect to the second displacement member H40337, and is connected so as to be slidably displaced with respect to the second displacement member H40337. As a result, when the upper plate H40332 is rotated and displaced, one end and the other end of the link member H40332q are rotated with respect to the upper plate H40332 and the second displacement member H40337, and the attitude of the link member H40332q with respect to the upper plate H40332 and the second displacement member H40337 can be changed, and the other end of the link member H40332q can be slidably displaced with respect to the second displacement member H40337 in the vertical direction.

Next, the displacement of the top plate H40332 in the 150th embodiment will be described. Note that the displacement of the top plate H40332 rotating around the shaft portion H9332f due to the drive of the solenoid H9337a is the same as that of the top plate H9332 in the 119th embodiment, so a detailed description of this displacement will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1975(b), when the upper plate H40332 is displaced to a position immediately before the closing portion H40332p comes out of the first communication passage H300C, the lower surface of the closing portion H40332p is separated from the lower surface of the first communication passage H300C and is positioned to block the upper side of the first communication passage H300C. This forms a first communication passage H300C whose upper side is closed by the closing portion H40332p, and the first spaces H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) communicate with each other via the first communication passage H300C.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1975(c), when the upper panel H40332 is displaced to a position where the closing portion H40332p comes out of the first communication passage H300C, the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is opened and the first communication passage H300C is connected to the external space. This allows the sound emitted into the first communication passage H300C to be emitted into the external space via the first communication passage H300C. As a result, the sound production effect can be enhanced.

That is, in the 150th embodiment, the upper plate H40332 can form a state in which the space of the first communication passage H300C is not formed (the first communication passage H300C is closed by the closing portion H40332p), a state in which the first communication passage H300C is formed (the top of the first communication passage H300C is blocked by the closing portion H40332p), and a state in which the first communication passage H300C is open. As a result, multiple sound presentation patterns can be formed, and the sound presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1975(c), the upper plate H40332 is displaced to a position where the closing portion H40332p comes out of the first communication passage H300C, so that when it is open, the internal space of the first communication passage H300C can be easily accessed. As a result, the maintainability (cleanability) of the first communication passage H300C can be improved.

In the 150th embodiment, when the upper plate H40332 is displaced to a position where the closing portion H40332p exits the first communication passage H300C as shown in FIG. 1975(c), the second displacement member H40337 is displaced upward by the link member H40332q in conjunction with the displacement of the upper plate H40332, and the second displacement member H40337 is displaced to a position overlapping with the position where the upper plate H40332 was positioned before driving (the position shown in FIG. 1975(a)). This makes it possible to prevent gaps from being formed in the upper decorative unit H40014a due to the displacement of the upper plate H40332 (opening the first communication passage H300C).

That is, in the 150th embodiment, the gap caused by displacing the top plate H40332 can be filled by the second displacement member H40337. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from being inserted through the gap formed after the top plate H40332 is displaced.

The inner surface of the front side and the inner surface of the rear side of the first communication passage H300C may be formed parallel to the side surface of the front side and the side surface of the rear side of the closing part H40332p when the space of the first communication passage H300C is not formed (the first communication passage H300C is closed by the closing part H40332p), and when the space of the first communication passage H300C is not formed, the inner surface of the front side and the inner surface of the rear side of the first communication passage H300C may be in contact with the side surface of the front side and the side surface of the rear side of the closing part H40332p. In this way, when the space of the first communication passage H300C is not formed, sound can be prevented from passing between the inner surface of the first communication passage H300C and the side surface of the front side or the side surface of the rear side of the closing part H40332p.

Furthermore, in the 150th embodiment, when the space of the first communication passage H300C is not formed as shown in FIG. 1975(a), the closing portion H40332p of the upper plate H40332 is in contact with the inner surface of the first communication passage H300C, and when the first communication passage H300C is in a closed passage as shown in FIG. 1975(b), the closing portion H40332p of the upper plate H40332 is in contact with a part of the inner surface of the first communication passage H300C, and when the first communication passage H300C is opened as shown in FIG. 1975(c), the closing portion H40332p of the upper plate H40332 can be separated from the first communication passage H300C. This allows the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a to decrease in accordance with the change in the upper panel H40332 when the upper panel H40332 is displaced upward.

This change in rigidity causes sound to be emitted from the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) arranged inside the upper decorative unit H40014a, and the manner in which the sound is output to the outside of the upper decorative unit H40014a can be changed.

In other words, simply changing the volume of the speaker H312a (see FIG. 1843) results in little change in the type of sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H40014a, but in the upper decorative unit H40014a of the 150th embodiment, by changing the contact state of the top panel H40332 against the upper decorative unit H40014a (partition wall H343b), even if the volume of the speaker H312a is kept constant, the type of sound output from the upper decorative unit H40014a can be changed as the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a changes. As a result, the type of sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

Here we'll explain in detail how the sound output changes.

When the space of the first communication passage H300C is not formed, not only can the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a be increased, but sound transmitted to the first communication passage H300C can be eliminated, making it easier for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H40014a and emitting sound from the openings (slit H331a1 (see Figure 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see Figure 1845), detection opening H333a (see Figure 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330.

When the first communication passage H300C is in a closed passage state, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a is reduced compared to when the space of the first communication passage H300C is not formed, making it difficult for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H40014a. This makes it possible to reduce the volume of sound emitted from the openings (slit H331a1 (see Figure 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see Figure 1845), detection opening H333a (see Figure 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330.

On the other hand, when the first communication passage H300C is opened, the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a is reduced compared to when the first communication passage H300C is closed, making it difficult for sound to travel inside the upper decorative unit H40014a. This reduces the volume of the sound emitted from the openings (slit H331a1 (see FIG. 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see FIG. 1845), detection opening H333a (see FIG. 1846)) formed in the decorative unit H330, making it easier for the player to hear the sound emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C. As a result, it is possible to make the sound sound as if it is being emitted from the entire upper decorative unit H40014a.

In addition, since the top panel H40332 is part of the decorative surface (exterior wall) of the upper decorative unit H40014a, when the top panel H40332 is displaced, sound can be emitted by utilizing the space before the top panel H40332 is displaced. This improves the manner in which the sound emitted from the speaker H312a is produced when the top panel H40332 is separated from the partition wall H343b.

Furthermore, when the first communication passage H300C is in a closed passage state, the closing portion H40332p of the upper panel H40332 is configured as a wall portion that blocks the upper side of the first communication passage H300C that communicates with the installation space H300F in which the speaker H312a is arranged, so that the sound of the speaker H312a can be emitted from the upper side of the first communication passage H300C, changing the manner of the sound emitted from the upper decorative unit H40014a. As a result, the manner of the sound emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the top plate H40332 is disposed between the speakers H312a disposed in two locations, i.e., the state of contact between the top plate H40332 and the partition wall H343b is changed between the two speakers H312a, making it easier to change the manner of sound output from the speakers H312a. In other words, the top plate H40332 is disposed in an area (the position between the two speakers H312a when viewed from the front) where it is easy to change the manner of sound output from the two speakers H312a, making it possible to improve the manner of sound emitted from the speakers H312a.

Furthermore, since the upper panel H40332 is configured as a plate-like body that can rotate around the axis portion H9332f formed on the rear side, the contact area with the upper decorative unit H40014a can be minimized when it is separated from the partition wall H343b. In other words, since areas other than the axis portion H9332f can be made non-contact, it is easier to reduce the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a (the change in rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a can be made greater). This makes it easier to change the manner in which the sound is emitted from the upper decorative unit H40014a. As a result, the manner in which the sound is emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In addition, as described above, in the 150th embodiment, the contact area between the closing portion H40332p of the upper panel H40332 and the inner surface of the first communication passage H300C can be changed in accordance with the displacement of the upper panel H40332, so the rigidity of the upper decorative unit H40014a can be changed in accordance with the displacement of the upper panel H40332. This makes it easier to change the manner in which the sound is emitted from the upper decorative unit H40014a. As a result, the manner in which the sound is emitted from the speaker H312a can be improved.

In the 150th embodiment, the first communication passage H300C is switched between a closed passage and an open passage in response to the player's operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833). That is, the operation (input) of the button section H181 of the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) is detected by various switches H208 (see FIG. 1842), and a signal for displacing the top panel H40332 based on the detection result is output from the voice lamp control device H113 to other devices H228 (solenoid H9337a (see FIG. 1842) for displacing the top panel H40332).

When the button portion H181 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the upper panel H40332 is displaced, so the timing at which the sound emission mode is changed can be related to the operation of the button portion H181. As a result, the presentation effect by operating the operation unit H180 (see FIG. 1833) can be improved, and the player's interest can be increased.

The change in the sound emission mode in the 149th embodiment is not limited to the operation of the button section H181 (see FIG. 1833). For example, when a pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833) wins a jackpot in a lottery triggered by winning the first winning slot H64 and the second winning slot H640 (see FIG. 1842), the top panel H40332 may be displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10.

In this case, when a jackpot is hit, the first communication passage H300C is opened to allow the player to easily hear the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833), making it easier for the player to focus on the game during the jackpot.

On the other hand, when there is no big win (when the lottery is lost or during the lottery), the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage, which prevents the player from paying unnecessary attention to the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). This makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds of the in-store announcements and the sounds of other pachinko machines H10 (for example, the neighboring pachinko machine H10). In this case, the passage width and passage length of the first communication passage H300C may be set so that the sounds transmitted from the first space H300A (see FIG. 1849(a)) to the first communication passage H300C cancel each other out, thereby reducing the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 when the first communication passage H300C is made a closed passage.

In addition, when a predetermined reach effect (for example, an effect in which the expectation of a big win is high) occurs instead of a big win, the first communication passage H300C may be opened to make it easier for the player to notice the reach effect.

Furthermore, the change in the sound emission mode in the 149th embodiment may be such that when a predetermined ball is entered (for example, when a ball enters the first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640 (see FIG. 1838)) or when the operating handle H51 (see FIG. 1833) is operated, the upper panel H40332 is displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, making it easier to emit sound from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833).

In this case, when a player starts playing (by shooting a game ball into the playing area or by placing the shot game ball into the designated ball entrance), the first communication passage H300C is opened, making it easier for the player to hear the sounds emitted from the pachinko machine H10 (see FIG. 1833). This makes it easier for the player to hear the sounds being played, while also preventing the player from hearing the sounds of other pachinko machines H10 (for example, adjacent pachinko machines H10) that the player is not playing (the game ball has not been shot into the playing area, or the game ball shot into the playing area has not entered the designated ball entrance). As a result, it is easier for the player to pay attention to the effects of the pachinko machine H10 that he or she is playing.

Next, referring to FIG. 1976, the upper decorative unit H41014a in the 151st embodiment will be described. In the above 147th embodiment, the case where the insertion of unauthorized parts into the space H9332d2 is restricted by the plate member H37332h is described, but in the 151st embodiment, the case where the insertion of unauthorized parts into the space H9332d2 is restricted by a detection device (detection light emitting device H41361 and detection light detection device H41362) provided at the communicating portion of the first space H300A with the first communicating passage H300C is described. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1976(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper decorative unit H41014a in the 151st embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section along line MDCCCXLIXa in Figure 1848, and Figure 1976(b) is a schematic top view of the upper decorative unit H41014a as viewed in the direction of arrow MCMLXXVIb in Figure 1976(a). Note that Figure 1976(b) shows the upper panel H37332 in a transparent state. Also, Figure 1976 shows the structure of each component in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1976, the upper decorative unit H41014a in the 151st embodiment mainly comprises a base unit H310 that is fastened to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main frame H14d (see FIG. 1840), and a decorative unit H41320 that is arranged on the front side of the base unit H310.

The cosmetic unit H41320 is mainly formed with a decorative unit H41330 formed in a box shape with an open back side (arrow B direction side) like the decorative unit H330 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 1844), and a light-emitting unit H340 and a pair of sound transmission units H350 (see FIG. 1844) arranged inside the decorative unit H41330.

The decorative unit H41330 comprises a front plate H331 disposed at a predetermined interval (the interval for disposing the upper plate H37332, the lower plate H333, the left plate H9334, and the right plate H9336) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base unit H310, an upper plate H37332 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the upper side (arrow U direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, a lower plate H333 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front plate H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front plate H331, and a front It mainly comprises a left panel H9334 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the left side (arrow L direction) of the panel H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the front panel H331, connecting the left (arrow L direction) ends of the upper panel H37332 and the lower panel H333, a right panel H9336 formed in a shape that fits along the rear end of the right side (arrow R direction) of the front panel H331 and disposed adjacent to the rear side of the front panel H331, connecting the right (arrow R direction) ends of the upper panel H37332 and the lower panel H333, and a drive unit H9337 (see FIG. 1972) that applies a drive force to displace the upper panel H37332.

In addition, in the first space H300A formed in the upper decorative unit H41014a in the 151st embodiment, a detection light emitting device H41361 is arranged on one side of the communicating portion with the first communicating passage H300C, and a detection light detecting device H41362 is arranged on the other side of the communicating portion with the first communicating passage H300C, so that the light emitted from the detection light emitting device H41361 can be detected by the detection light detecting device H41362 via the first communicating passage H300C.

In the 151st embodiment, the first communication passage H300C formed in the upper decorative unit H41014a extends in an approximately straight line in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and light from the detection light emitting device H41361 can be detected by the detection light detecting device H41362 through the straight portion, and the presence or absence of an object in the internal space of the first communication passage H300C can be detected by the detection light emitting device H41361 and the detection light detecting device H41362.

In this way, in the 151st embodiment, by detecting the internal space of the first communication passage H300C using the detection light emitting device H41361 and the detection light detecting device H41362, when the upper plate H37332 is disposed in a position that closes the upper side of the first communication passage H300C, it is possible to detect that the upper plate H37332 is disposed in a specified position (not forcibly opened) by disposing the plate member H37332h of the upper plate H37332 inside the first communication passage H300C.

On the other hand, when the upper plate H37332 opens the first communication passage H300C, the plate member H37332h protrudes from the first communication passage H300C, making it unnecessary to detect the upper plate H37332 by the detection light emitting device H41361 and the detection light detecting device H41362. Therefore, it is possible for the detection light emitting device H41361 and the detection light detecting device H41362 to detect an unauthorized member inserted inside the first communication passage H300C.

Therefore, in the 151st embodiment, when the first communication and H300C are opened, it is possible to prevent the insertion of illegal materials into the internal space of the space H9332d2 (see FIG. 1972) via the first communication passage H300C, and to prevent the insertion of illegal materials into the first space H300A via both ends of the first communication passage H300C. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from committing illegal acts.

The detection light detector H41362 (various switches H208 (see FIG. 1842)) that detects the light of the detection light emitter H41361 is connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPUH201 can perform various processes (audio output and LCD display) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

Next, the rocking device H42730 in the 152nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1977. In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which light emitted from the substrate member H773 is emitted toward the player via the displacement member H790. In the 152nd embodiment, a case in which the light emitted from the substrate member H773 is blocked by the displacement member H40773 will be described. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

1977(a) and 1977(c) are schematic front views of the oscillating device H42730 in the 152nd embodiment, 1977(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device H42730 taken along line MCMLXXVIIb in 1977(a), and 1977(d) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device H42730 taken along line MCMLXXVIId in 1977(c). 1977(a) and (b) show the state of the displacement member H42790 before displacement, and 1977(c) and (d) show the state of the displacement member H42790 after displacement. 1977 shows the structure of each member in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1977, the rocking device H42730 in the 152nd embodiment mainly comprises a base means H770 disposed on the back plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a drive means H780 journaled on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base means H770, and a displacement member H42790 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the drive means H780 via the base means H770.

The displacement member H42790 in the 152nd embodiment is disposed so as to be displaceable relative to the base means H770 and the driving means H780, similar to the displacement member H790 in the 111th embodiment (see FIG. 18341-2). However, in FIG. 1977, the displacement member H42790 is shown fixed to the driving means H780 for ease of understanding.

The displacement member H42790 is formed from a colored material (white) that is not transparent to light, and is capable of blocking light emitted from the base means H770 (substrate member H773) disposed on the rear side. In addition, the displacement member H42790 is formed so that its dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is smaller than that of the base means H770, and when it is placed overlapping the front side of the base means H770 (for example, when it is placed in the position shown in Figures 1977(a) and (b)), it is possible to hide part of the base means H770.

The displacement member H42790 is not limited to being entirely made of a colored material that is opaque to light, but may be partially made of a transparent material that is transmissive to light, and may have opaque and transmissive regions. For example, a transmissive region may be formed around the opaque region when viewed from the front, and the emission angle of the light emitted from around the opaque region may be changed. This allows the state of the light around the opaque region to be changed, so that the player's gaze can be drawn to the decorative surface of the opaque region.

Also, a non-transparent area may be formed around the light-transmittable area when viewed from the front, and the angle of light emitted from the center of the non-transparent area may be changed. In this case, the form of light in the center of the non-transparent area can be changed, so that the player's gaze can be directed to the light emitted from the light-transmittable area.

Furthermore, the displacement member H42790 may be formed with a larger dimension in the left-right direction than the base means H770, or multiple displacement members H42790 may be arranged side-by-side in the left-right direction so that the entire base means H770 is hidden by the displacement member H42790 when viewed from the front. In this case, by displacing the displacement member H42790, a state in which the light emitted from the substrate member H773 is visible and a state in which the light emitted from the substrate member H773 is not visible can be created, and by making the light of the substrate member H773 not visible, it is possible to easily draw the player's attention to the light of the substrate member H773 when a state in which the light of the substrate member H773 is visible is created.

The light emitting means H773b arranged on the substrate member H773 are aligned vertically and horizontally when viewed from the front, and when the displacement member H42790 is arranged overlapping the front side of the base means H770, the light emitting means H773b in the same row are hidden by the displacement member H42790.

The light emitting means H773b may be arranged in a staggered pattern when viewed from the front, or may be arranged in a group when viewed from the front. For example, the number of light emitting means H773b on both the left and right outer sides when viewed from the front may be greater than the number of light emitting means H773b in the center in the left and right direction, thereby increasing the amount of light emitted on both the left and right outer sides. In addition, the shape of the displacement member H42790 when viewed from the front may be formed into an irregular shape to hide some of the light emitting means H773b in the same row.

In the 152nd embodiment, as shown in Figs. 1977(c) and S40(d), when the displacement member H42790 is rotated around the upper support portion H771b1 and the lower support portion H772b1 by the driving force (inertia force) of the driving means H780, the displacement member H42790 is set to be rotatable to a position where it does not overlap with the base means H770 in a front view.

That is, in the 152nd embodiment, it is possible to form a state in which the displacement member H42790 is positioned overlapping the front side of the base means H770 (substrate member H773), and a state in which the displacement member H42790 is retracted to a position where it does not overlap with the base means H770.

As a result, in the 152nd embodiment, it is possible to create a state in which the displacement of the displacement member H42790 and the light emitted by the substrate member H773 are both visible, and a state in which the displacement member H42790 is retracted from the front side of the substrate member H773, so that only the light emitted by the substrate member H773 is visible. This allows multiple forms of presentation to be created, increasing the entertainment value of the game.

In the 152nd embodiment, the displacement member H42790 is supported so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, centered on the upper support portion H771b1 and the lower support portion H772b1 of the base means H770, but it may be rotated in the up-down direction centered on an axis extending in the left-right direction.

In addition, the displacement position of the displacement member H42790 may be detected by a detection device to change the light emission mode of the substrate member H773. That is, the light irradiation of the light emitting means H773b arranged in the area hidden by the displacement member H42790 may be turned off or the amount of irradiation may be reduced. In this case, the amount of light irradiated to the back side of the displacement member H42790 can be reduced, so that light reflected on the back side of the displacement member H42790 and entering other areas can be suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress the mixing of reflected light when the emission color is separated for each row of the light emitting means H773b, improving the light-based presentation effect.

Furthermore, when the displacement position of the displacement member H42790 is detected by a detection device, in order to draw more attention to the displacement member H42790 to the light emitting means H773b, the amount of light emitted by the light emitting means H773b at a position adjacent to the displacement member H42790 in a front view (a position close to the displacement member H42790 in a front view) may be increased, while the amount of light emitted by the light emitting means at a position away from the displacement member H42790 in a front view may be turned off or reduced. This increases the amount of light emitted around the displacement member H42790 in a front view, making it easier to draw attention to the displacement member H42790.

The detection device (each switch H208 (see FIG. 1842)) that detects the displacement position of the displacement member H42790 is connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPUH201 can execute various processes (adjusting the amount of light irradiation of the light emitting means H773b) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

In addition, in the 152nd embodiment, a light-non-transmitting area is formed in the tilting device H710 (see FIG. 1879), which is arranged to cover the front side of the oscillating device H42730, and the non-transmitting area is formed on both the left and right outer sides of the substrate member H773 in a front view. As a result, when the displacement member H42790 is displaced to an area that does not overlap with the base means H770 (substrate member H773) in a front view, the displacement member H42790 can be hidden by the non-transmitting area of the tilting device H710.

In other words, when the entire area of the base member H773 is to be viewed, a separate member disposed on the front side of the oscillating device H42730 can make the displacement member H42790 less visible to the player. This draws attention to the light emitted by the light emitting means H773b, improving the presentation effect of the light emitting means H773b.

Furthermore, in the operation unit H180 of the 111th embodiment, when the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed, the lower end of the front side transparent portion H711 of the tilting device H710 abuts against the driving means H780 via the elastic body H785, and this abutment displaces the driving means H780 to a position in an intermediate arrangement state relative to the base means H770.

In addition, when the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed, the displacement member H790 is displaced together with the drive means H780 to a predetermined position (a position where the drive means H780 is in an intermediate position). Therefore, the presentation of the light visible through the transparent portion H791 of the displacement member H790 can be changed in conjunction with the player's pressing of the button portion H181.

In the 152nd embodiment, the displacement member H42790 is formed from a resin material that does not transmit light. However, the displacement member H42790 may be formed from a transparent resin material that transmits light, and the displacement member H42790 may be formed with irregularities so that the light seen through the displacement member H42790 is seen by the player in a different manner from the light in other areas (areas seen without passing through the displacement member H42790).

In addition, the displacement member H42790 may be formed from a non-light-transmitting black resin material instead of a non-light-transmitting white material, and the front side may be decorated. That is, the side (back side) of the displacement member H42790 at a position where the light of the light-emitting means can be irradiated may be formed in black. In this case, even if the light of the light-emitting means H773b is irradiated to the back side of the displacement member H42790, the light can be easily absorbed by the displacement member H42790. That is, the displacement member H42790 may be formed in a color that easily absorbs light. This can prevent the light reflected from the back side of the displacement member H42790 from interfering with the light in other areas.

Furthermore, the displacement member H42790 may be configured with light-adjusting glass or the like that can change the amount of light transmission electrically (by changing the applied voltage) to change the amount of light transmission during a specified effect. For example, when it is necessary to press the button section H181, the amount of light transmission may be increased to make it easier for the player to recognize that the button section H181 needs to be operated, whereas when it is not necessary to operate the button section H181, the amount of light transmission of some of the light emitted from the substrate member H773 may be changed (or blocked) to allow the player to view an effect that changes the color of the light seen.

In this case, multiple light-controlling glasses that cannot be displaced may be arranged side by side, and the amount of light transmitted through each may be changed (for example, the amount of light transmitted through multiple light-controlling glasses arranged in the left-right direction may be decreased from the left, increasing the amount of light emitted on the left side), thereby changing the state of light as viewed by the player.

The oscillating device H42730 in the 152nd embodiment is configured to be displaceable by the lower end of the tilting device H710 coming into contact with the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 when the tilting device H42730 is pressed, similar to the oscillating device H730 in the 111th embodiment. In the 152nd embodiment, the tilting device H710 is configured to be displaced in a direction approaching the first diffusion member H774 (substrate member H773) by the lower end of the tilting device H710 coming into contact with the button portion H181.

This allows the displacement member H42790 to be brought closer to the first diffusion member H774 (substrate member H773), making it easier for the displacement member H42790 arranged on the front side to block the light emitted from the light emitting means H773b. In other words, the irradiation range of the light emitting means H773b can be easily narrowed by the displacement member H42790. In the 152nd embodiment, it is easier to partition the irradiation range of the substrate member H.

Next, the oscillating device H43730 in the 153rd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1978 and 1979. In the above 152nd embodiment, the case where the light of the substrate member H773 is blocked by the non-light-transmitting displacement member H42790 was described, but in the oscillating device H43730 in the 154th embodiment, the case where the light of the substrate member H773 is blocked by the second displacement member H43795 arranged on the back side of the displacement member H42790 will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the oscillating device H43730 in the 153rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1978. FIG. 1978(a) is a schematic front view of the oscillating device H43730 in the 153rd embodiment, and FIG. 1978(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device H43730 taken along line MCMLXXVIIIb in FIG. 1978(a). Note that in FIG. 1978, the structure of each component is illustrated in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1978, the rocking device H43730 in the 153rd embodiment mainly comprises a base means H43770 arranged on the back plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a drive means H780 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base means H43770 and pivoted to the base means H43770, a displacement member H42790 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the drive means H780 via the base means H43770, and a second displacement member H43795 arranged on the front side of the drive means H780 in a state capable of displacing the internal space of the base means H770 (between the opposing first diffusion member H43774 and the substrate member H773).

The displacement member H42790 in the 153rd embodiment is disposed so as to be displaceable relative to the base means H770 and the driving means H780, similar to the displacement member H790 in the 111th embodiment, but in Figs. 1978 and 1979, the displacement member H42790 is shown in a fixed state relative to the driving means H780 for ease of understanding. In the following explanation, the portion where the displacement member H42790 is disposed so as to be displaceable relative to the driving means H780 is referred to as the "connecting portion."

The second displacement member H43795 is formed from a resin material that is not transparent to light, and is disposed on the connection side of the displacement member H42790 with the drive means H780 (i.e., the upper engagement portion H792a (see FIG. 1895)). In other words, it is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the displacement member H42790. Therefore, the second displacement member H43795 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member H42790. Note that, in the 152nd embodiment, only one end side on the upper side of the second displacement member H42795 is connected (disposed) to the displacement member H42790, and is displaceable in the internal space of the base means H770 (between the opposing first diffusion member H43774 and the substrate member H773).

The base means H43770 mainly comprises an upper base member H771 fastened to the back plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a lower base member H772 arranged below the upper base member H771 (arrow D direction side), a substrate member H773 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upper base member H771, and a first diffusion member H43774 arranged on the front side of the upper base member H771 in a manner covering the front side of the substrate member H773.

The first diffusion member H43774 has a film arranged (attached) on the front surface, which is divided into three parts in the left-right direction and each part is given a different color. In Fig. 1979 and Fig. 1980, each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e) attached to the first diffusion member H43774 is shown attached in a different position and with a predetermined pattern. Examples of colors that can be used to decorate each film include a traffic light color scheme of "red, yellow, and green" to give each color meaning such as danger, caution, normal, etc., or a color scheme of the three primary colors of light of "red, yellow, and green" to mix the colors to form other colors.

Each film attached to the first diffusion member H43774 may be disposed (attached) on the back side of the first diffusion member H43774, and may be divided into two, four or more parts, not limited to three parts. Furthermore, each film attached to the first diffusion member H43774 may be divided in the vertical direction on one surface on the front side.

The first diffusion member H43774 is disposed at a predetermined gap (a gap through which the second displacement member H43795 can be displaced) from the front surface of the base member H773, and has openings H43774f on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) through which the second displacement member H43795 can be inserted.

The opening H43774f extends downward from the upper edge of the first diffusion member H43774, allowing the second displacement member H43795, the upper side of which is connected, to be displaced and protrude from the inside of the first diffusion member H43774 via the opening H43774f.

In addition, when the displacement member H42790 is not rotated relative to the base means H43770 (i.e., when it is placed in the position shown in FIG. 1978), the second displacement member H43795 is arranged overlapping the rear side of the displacement member H42790, and the dimension of the displacement member H42790 in the left-right direction (arrow F-B direction) is slightly smaller than that of the displacement member H42790.

In addition, when the displacement member H4290 is not rotated relative to the base means H43770 (i.e., when it is placed in the position shown in FIG. 1978), the displacement member H42790 is disposed on the front side of the central film H3774c, and the second displacement member H43795 is disposed on the back side of the central film H43774c.

This allows the second displacement member H43795 to block the light irradiated from the light emitting means H773b to the back side of the central film H43774c. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to see the light from the light emitting means H773b passing through the first film H43774d and the second film H43774e.

In other words, if the second displacement member H43795 does not block the light from the light emitting means H773b, and the displacement member H42790 blocks the light emitted through the central film H43774c, the light irradiated to the back surface of the displacement member H42790 will be reflected by the back surface of the displacement member H42790 and will mix with the light emitted through the first film H43774d or the second film H43774e, and the light passing through the first film H43774d and the second film H43774e may not be correctly recognized by the player.

It is also possible to detect the displacement of the displacement member H42790 using a detection sensor or the like and dim or turn off the light emitted by the light emitting means H773b located on the back side of the displacement member H42790 in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member H42790. However, in this case, it is necessary to constantly monitor the displacement of the displacement member H42790, which complicates the control and makes it difficult to dim the light of the light emitting means H773b in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member H42790.

In contrast to this, in the 153rd embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means H773b can be blocked by the second displacement member H43795 on the back side of the central film H43774c, first film H43774d, and second film H43774e, which are different colors, so that light is prevented from being emitted through the central film H43774c, and the light that passes through the central film H43774c can be prevented from mixing with light from other areas. As a result, the player can correctly see the light from the light emitting means H773b that passes through the first film H43774d and the second film H43774e.

That is, in the 153rd embodiment, by blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means H773b on the back side of the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, and the second film H43774e with the second displacement member H43795, even if the same light is emitted from the light emitting means H773b (that is, the amount of light emitted from the multiple light emitting means H773b is not changed by control (all light emitting means H773b emit light in the same way)), the state of the light viewed through the first diffusion member H43774 (each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e)) can be changed. As a result, the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, in the 153rd embodiment, the displacement member H42790 makes it difficult for the player to see the central film H43774c in the area where the emission of light is blocked by the second displacement member H43795 (i.e., the displacement member H42790 is positioned in front of the area where light is not emitted), so the player is prevented from paying attention to the central film H43774c. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the light of the light emitting means H773b passing through the first film H43774d and the second film H43774e.

In the 153rd embodiment, the second displacement member H43795 is formed from a resin material that is not transparent to light. However, the second displacement member H43795 may be any member that changes the amount of transmission of light emitted from the light emitting means H773b.

That is, the second displacement member H43795 may be formed from a translucent resin material, and a portion of the light of the substrate member H773 irradiated to the second displacement member H43795 may be transmitted through the second displacement member H43795 and emitted toward each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e) of the first diffusion member H43774. In this case, the amount of light emitted from a portion of each film can be reduced. This allows the color of the light viewed through each film to be changed in a complex manner.

The second displacement member H43795 may also be configured with light-adjusting glass or the like that can electrically change the amount of light transmission, and configured to change the amount of light transmission during a specified effect. For example, when the button section H181 needs to be pressed, the amount of light transmission may be increased to make it easier for the player to recognize that the button section H181 needs to be operated, while when the button section H181 does not need to be operated, the amount of light transmission of a portion of the light emitted from the base member H773 may be changed (or blocked) to allow the player to view an effect that changes the color of the light viewed through each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e).

In this case, the manner in which light is perceived by the player may be changed by arranging multiple non-displaceable light control glasses side by side and changing the amount of light transmission through each piece of light control glass (for example, decreasing the amount of light transmission through multiple pieces of light control glass arranged in the left-right direction from the left, increasing the amount of light transmitted through the first film H43374d on the left side).

Next, referring to FIG. 1979, the displacement of the oscillating device H43730 in the 153rd embodiment will be described. FIG. 1979(a) and FIG. 1979(c) are schematic front views of the oscillating device H43730 in the 153rd embodiment, FIG. 1979(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device H43730 taken along line MCMLXXIXb in FIG. 1979(a), and FIG. 1979(d) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the oscillating device H43730 taken along line MCMLXXIXd in FIG. 1979(c). Note that in FIG. 1979, the structure of each component is illustrated in a simplified manner to facilitate understanding.

As shown in Figures 1979(a) and (b), the second displacement member H43795 is displaced in the displacement direction of the displacement member H42790 by the displacement of the displacement member H42790 driven by the driving means H780, and when the second displacement member H43795 is positioned on the back side of the first film H43774d, the second displacement member H43795 is positioned at a position where it overlaps with approximately half of the central film H43774c on the first film H43774d side.

This allows light passing through the central film H43774c to be emitted to the front side from approximately half of the second film H43774e on the central film H43774c side, and allows light passing through the second film H43774e to be emitted to the front side.

The width of the central film H43774c in the left-right direction is set to approximately twice that of the first film H43774d and the second film H43774e, so that when the player is allowed to view the light passing through the central film H43774c and the light passing through either the first film H43774d or the second film H43774e, the area of light passing through the central film H43774c can be made approximately identical to the area of light passing through the first film H43774d or the second film H43774e.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 1979 (c) and (d), when the second displacement member H43795 protrudes from the opening H43774f of the first diffusion member H43774 to the outside of the first diffusion member H43774, the second displacement member H43795 is not overlapped with the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, or the second film H43774e, and the displacement member H42790 is positioned so as not to overlap with the first diffusion member H43774 when viewed from the front.

This allows the player to see the light emitted to the front side through the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, and the second film H43774e.

Therefore, in the 153rd embodiment, the second displacement member H43795 arranged on the back side of the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, and the second film H43774e can form the form of light emitted through two of the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, and the second film H43774e, or the form of light emitted through all of the films. This allows, for example, two or three colors to be mixed at the boundaries between the films or throughout the entire films before being viewed by the player, allowing the player to view multiple colors. As a result, the presentation effect by the light of the board member H77 can be improved.

In the above 153rd embodiment, a case was described in which three films were arranged on the front side of the first diffusion member H43774, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be composed of four or more films, or two films may be used to change the color of the light emitted from the substrate member H773. For example, when two films are used to change the color of the light emitted from the substrate member H773, the player may be able to view the light of that color as it passes through the films.

In addition, in the above 153rd embodiment, the case where the second displacement member H43795 is linked to the displacement of the displacement member H43790 has been described, but a drive means for displacing the second displacement member H43795 may be provided separately.

In addition, in the above 153rd embodiment, the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, and the second film H43774e are arranged adjacent to each other, but a partitioning member (e.g., a black sticker, etc.) for partitioning the emitted colors may be arranged between the films. In this case, the partitioning member can partition the light emitted from the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, and the second film H43774e, so that the colors visible through each film can be partitioned and adjacent colors can be prevented from mixing with each other.

In addition, as in this embodiment, if no partition member is provided and the central film H43774c, the first film H43774d, and the second film H43774e are arranged adjacent to each other, the light emitted through these adjacent areas can be mixed. This makes it possible to form multiple luminous colors, improving the lighting effects.

In addition, the rocking device H43730 in the 153rd embodiment is configured such that when the button portion H181 of the tilting device H710 is pressed, the lower end of the tilting device H710 comes into contact with the tilting device H710, and the displacement member H43790 is displaced in a direction away from the first diffusion member H774 (substrate member H773).

According to this, the second displacement member H43795 arranged on the displacement member H43790 can be displaced in a direction away from the substrate member H773, so that the second displacement member H43795 arranged to be displaceable between the first diffusion member H774 and the substrate member H773 can be brought closer to the first diffusion member H774 (moved away from the substrate member H773). That is, the second displacement member H43795 can be brought closer to each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e) attached to the first diffusion member H774. Therefore, the distance between the second displacement member H43795 and each film can be narrowed, and it is easy to suppress light from entering between the opposing portions. As a result, it is easy to partition the light irradiation area of each film.

Next, the oscillating device H44740 in the 154th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1980. In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the base means H770 of the oscillating device H730 is fixed to the lower frame member H720 was described, but in the 154th embodiment, the case where the displacement member H44790 of the oscillating device H44740 is disposed on the lower frame member H720 will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 1980(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit H44180 in the 154th embodiment, and Figure 1980(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit H44180 taken along line MCMLXXXb in Figure 1980(a). Note that Figure 1980(a) shows a schematic cross-section of the operation unit H44180 cut at approximately the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Also, Figure 1980 shows a simplified structure of each component for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1980, the rocking device H44740 in the 154th embodiment mainly comprises a displacement member H44790 disposed on the rear plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720, a base means H44770 pivotally supported on the rear side of the displacement member H44790, and a drive means H780 disposed on the rear side of the base means H44770.

The displacement member H44790 is formed from a colorless, transparent resin material that is transparent to light, and is configured to transmit light emitted from the base means H44770 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) to the front side. The displacement member H44790 mainly comprises a transparent portion H791 formed by curving in a hemisphere toward the front side, and an engagement portion H44792 that protrudes toward the rear side from three edges on the rear side of the transparent portion H791.

The engaging portion H44792 is engaged with the rear plate H722 (see FIG. 1879) of the lower frame member H720 and then fastened to the rear plate H722 with a screw. The tip on the rear side is set to a length that exceeds the rear plate H722, and the tip is formed into a hook shape that can engage with the rear plate H722.

The base means H44770 mainly comprises an upper base member H44771 having an upper pivot portion H771b1, a lower base member H44772 having a lower pivot portion H772b1, a substrate member H773 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upper base member H44771, and a first diffusion member H774 disposed on the front side of the upper base member H44771 in a manner covering the front side of the substrate member H773, and is configured to be rotatable relative to the displacement member H44790 by the upper pivot portion H771b1 and the lower pivot portion H772b1 being pivotally supported by the engagement portion H44792 of the displacement member H44790.

The driving means H780 is disposed on the rear side of the upper base member H44771 and the lower base member H44772 of the base means H44770. Therefore, the base means H44770 is rotated relative to the displacement member H44790 by the driving force of the driving means H780.

According to the oscillating device H44740 in the 154th embodiment, the base means H44770 having the substrate member H773 that emits light is displaced relative to the displacement member H44790 (transmitting portion H791) that transmits light, so it is easier to increase the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the substrate member H773 compared to when the displacement member H790 is displaced as in the displacement member H790 in the 111th embodiment.

In other words, in the 111th embodiment, the emission direction of the light emitted from the substrate member H773 could not be changed by passing it through the displacement member H790, whereas in the 154th embodiment, the emission direction of the light source can be changed, making it easier to change the emission angle of the light. As a result, the irradiation angle of the light from the substrate member H773 can be widened, and the performance area created by the light from the substrate member H773 can be enlarged.

In the 154th embodiment, the case where the oscillating device H44740 is displaced has been described, but the displacement member H44790 in the 154th embodiment may be replaced with the displacement member H790 in the 111th embodiment (i.e., as a displaceable displacement member H790), and both the oscillating device H44740 and the displacement member H790 may be displaced. In this case, it is preferable to configure the oscillating device H44740 and the displacement member H790 to be independently displaceable. This is because the position of the displacement member H790 relative to the substrate member H773 from which light is emitted can be displaced to easily change the state of the light viewed through the displacement member H790.

Next, referring to FIG. 1981, the operation unit H45180 in the 155th embodiment will be described. In the above 111th embodiment, the case where light emitted from the substrate member H773 of the rocking device H730 is emitted through the button portion H181 is described, but in the 155th embodiment, the case where light from the second substrate member H45718 arranged on the button portion H181 is emitted through the button portion H181 will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1981(a) and 1981(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the operation unit H45180 in the 155th embodiment. Note that Figures 1981(a) and 1981(b) are schematic cross-sectional views taken at approximately the center of the operation unit H45180 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Also, Figure 1981(a) illustrates the state in which the tilting device H45710 is placed in a tilted position, and Figure 1981(b) illustrates the state in which the tilting device H45710 is placed in an upright position. Note that in Figure 1981, the structure of each component is simplified for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1981, the operation unit H45180 in the 155th embodiment includes a tilting device H45710 having a button portion H181 on its upper surface, a lower frame member H720 arranged inside the tilting device H45710 so that the tilting device H45710 can be swung in the up and down directions (arrow U-D directions), a swinging device H730 arranged inside the lower frame member H720, and a ring member H713 (see FIG. 1879) of the tilting device H45710 supported from above (arrow U direction side) by a swinging device H730. It mainly comprises an upper frame member H740 arranged opposite the member H720, a driving means H750 (see FIG. 1879) arranged below the lower frame member H720 (arrow D direction side) and transmitting a driving force to the tilting device H710 via an arm member H755 (see FIG. 1879), and a protective cover member H760 arranged below the lower frame member H720 and formed in a box shape to cover the driving means H750 from three sides, the left and right directions (arrow L-R directions) and the rear (arrow F direction).

The tilting device H45710 includes a button portion H181 on the top surface, a front side transparent portion H711 extending downward from the outer edge of the front side of the button portion H181, a side side reflective portion H712 extending downward from the outer edges of both the left and right sides of the button portion H181, an axis member H716 (see FIG. 1888) arranged along the outer edge of the back side of the button portion H181, ring members H713 (see FIG. 1880) arranged on both ends of the axis member H716, and a torsion spring H716 wound around the axis member H716. 717 (see FIG. 1880), a bracket H714 (see FIG. 1880) arranged along the edge of the lower end of the side reflector H712, a detection piece H715 (see FIG. 1880) arranged at the lower end of the front side of the side reflector H712 and protruding downward, and a second board member H45718 arranged on the rear side of the button portion H181 and on the front side of the shaft member H716, and is formed into a box shape that is open on the lower side by the button portion H181, the front side transparent portion H711, and the side reflector H712.

The tilting device H45710 is formed to be rotatable around the ring member H713 (see FIG. 1880) as a rotation axis, and is displaceable between the tilted position described above (position shown in FIG. 1981(a)) and an upright position (position shown in FIG. 1981(b)) in which the front side is rotated upward from the tilted position, and in the tilted position, the rocking device H730 can be positioned inside the button portion H181, the front side transparent portion H711, and the side side reflective portion H712.

The second substrate member H45718 is provided with a light-emitting means H45718a capable of emitting light, and is formed so that the light emitted from the light-emitting means H45718a can be emitted onto the upper surface of the button portion H181. The second substrate member H45718 is formed so that the light of the light-emitting means H45718a can be emitted at an acute intersection angle with the upper surface of the button portion H181.

As described above, the button portion H181 is formed in a shape that resembles a shell, and as shown in FIG. 1981, the upper surface is formed with unevenness that matches the shell decoration. Therefore, in the 155th embodiment, the decoration of the button portion H181 can be made to stand out by irradiating the decorative surface (unevenness of the upper surface) of the button portion H181 with light from a direction that forms an acute angle with the upper surface (i.e., a direction different from the direction of light irradiation of the substrate member H773 of the rocking device H730).

In other words, in the 155th embodiment, by providing a substrate member H773 that allows light to be incident from a direction close to a perpendicular direction to the top surface of the button portion H181 (at an obtuse intersection angle), and a second substrate member H45718 that allows light to be incident at an acute intersection angle to the top surface of the button portion H181, it is possible to change the state of the light that is visible through the unevenness of the button portion H181. As a result, the dramatic effect of the light can be improved.

In addition, in the 155th embodiment, the second board member H45718 is disposed on the tilting device H45710, so that when the tilting device H45710 is disposed in the tilted position as shown in FIG. 1981(b), the second board member H45718 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the button portion H181. Therefore, the arrangement of the tilting device H45710 can make it difficult for the light emitted from the board member H773 to enter the button portion H181, and can make the amount of light emitted from the second board member H45718 incident on the button portion H181 approximately constant. As a result, multiple light emission modes of the button portion H181 can be formed, improving the light-based presentation effect.

The second substrate member H45718 may be arranged, for example, on the lower frame member H720 instead of on the tilting device H45710, and may be configured to be able to irradiate light onto the button portion H181 of the tilting device H45710 in either the tilted position or the upright position.

In addition, in the 155th embodiment, the button portion H181 is configured to be light-transmitting, but a reflective member capable of reflecting light may be provided on the button portion H181, and when the tilting device H710 is placed in the tilted position, the reflective member of the button portion H181 makes the rocking device H730 invisible to the player through the tilting device H710, while the reflective member provided on the button portion H181 allows the light emitted from the substrate member H773 to exit from the front side transparent portion H711 side. Note that when the tilting device H710 is placed in the upright position, the rocking device H730 can be made visible to the player through the front side transparent portion H711.

Next, the operation unit H46180 in the 156th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1982. In the above 155th embodiment, the case where the second board member H45718 is arranged on the tilting device H45710 is described, but in the 156th embodiment, the case where the second board member H46742 is arranged on the upper frame member H46740 is described. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 1982(a) and 1982(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the operation unit H46180 in the 156th embodiment. Note that Figures 1982(a) and 1982(b) are schematic cross-sectional views taken at approximately the center of the operation unit H46180 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Also, Figure 1982(a) illustrates the state in which the tilting device H46710 is placed in a tilted position, and Figure 1982(b) illustrates the state in which the tilting device H46710 is placed in an upright position. Furthermore, in Figure 1982, the structure of each component is simplified for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIG. 1982, the operation unit H46180 in the 156th embodiment includes a tilting device H46710 having a button portion H181 on its upper surface, a lower frame member H720 arranged inside the tilting device H46710 so that the tilting device H46710 can be swung in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), a swinging device H730 arranged inside the lower frame member H720, and a ring member H713 of the tilting device H46710 that supports the ring member H713 from the upper side (arrow U direction side) and faces the lower frame member H720. It mainly comprises an upper frame member H46740 that is arranged by fitting together, a drive means H750 (see FIG. 1880) that is disposed below the lower frame member H720 (arrow D direction side) and transmits a drive force to the tilting device H46710 via an arm member H755 (see FIG. 1880), and a protective cover member H760 that is disposed below the lower frame member H720 and formed in a box shape that covers the drive means H750 from three sides, the left and right directions (arrow L-R directions) and the rear (arrow F direction).

The tilting device H46710 comprises a button portion H181 on the top surface, a front side transparent portion H711 extending downward from the outer edge of the front side of the button portion H181, a side side reflective portion H712 extending downward from the outer edges of both the left and right sides of the button portion H181, an axis member H716 (see FIG. 1888) disposed along the outer edge of the back side of the button portion H181, ring members H713 (see FIG. 1880) disposed on both ends of the axis member H716, and a screw wound around the axis member H716. It mainly comprises a spring H717 (see FIG. 1880), a bracket H714 (see FIG. 1880) arranged along the edge of the lower end of the side reflector H712, a detection piece H715 (see FIG. 1880) arranged at the lower end of the front side of the side reflector H712 and protruding downward, and a displacement member H46182 arranged to be slidably displaceable on the underside of the button part H181, and is formed into a box shape with an opening on the lower side by the button part H181, the front transmissive part H711, and the side reflector H712.

The tilting device H46710 is formed to be rotatable around the ring member H713 (see FIG. 1880) as a rotation axis, and is displaceable between the tilted position described above and an upright position obtained by rotating the front side upward from the tilted position. In the tilted position, the rocking device H730 can be positioned inside the button portion H181, the front side transparent portion H711, and the side side reflective portion H712.

The displacement member H46182 is made of a transparent resin material that allows light to pass through, is formed in a plate shape that fits along the bottom surface of the button portion H181, and is disposed on the button portion H181 in a state in which it can slide and be displaced. In addition, one end of a link member H46182a, the other end of which is pivotally supported on the back plate H722 of the lower frame member H720, is connected to the displacement member H46182.

The link member H46182a pulls the displacement member H46182 against the button part H181 with the driving force that displaces the tilting device H46710 from the tilted position to the upright position. That is, the link member H46182a restricts the displacement member H46182 from displacing in response to the button part H181, and the displacement member H46182 can be displaced against the button part H181. As a result, when the tilting device H46710 is displaced from the tilted position to the upright position, the displacement member H46182 is displaced against the button part H181. In the 156th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1982(b), when the displacement member H46182 is displaced against the button part H181, the displacement member H46182 is displaced outward from the button part H181 through an opening formed on the back side (the shaft member H716 side) of the button part H181.

The displacement member H46182 also includes a bent portion H46182b that is bent into an L-shape from the end portion that protrudes toward the button portion H181, and a reflective portion H46182c that is machined to have projections and recesses on the inside of the displacement member by laser machining or the like.

The bent portion H46182b is a portion that prevents the displacement member H46182 from penetrating too far inward into the button portion H181, and is set to be thicker than the opening width of the opening formed on the back side (shaft member H716 side) of the button portion H181. In addition, the bent tip surface of the bent portion H46182b is formed into a flat surface with few irregularities, and is formed so that light from the second substrate member H46742 described later can be guided to the inside.

The upper frame member H46740 is formed in a semicircular arc shape large enough to hook (overlap in the vertical direction) the engagement piece H712b (see FIG. 1879) formed by bending at the lower end of the side reflector H712 of the tilting device H46710 when viewed from above. This makes it possible to prevent the tilting device H46710 from protruding upward beyond the upright position when the tilting device H46710 is displaced from the upright position.

A second substrate member H46742 having light emitting means H46742a is disposed inside the upper frame member H46740. The second substrate member H46742 is disposed in a state in which light emitted from the second substrate member H46742 is directed toward the button portion H181 when the tilting device H46710 is disposed in the tilted position. The second substrate member H46742 is formed so that light from the light emitting means H46742a can be emitted at an acute intersection angle with the top surface of the button portion H181.

As described above, the button portion H181 is formed in a shape that resembles a shell, and as shown in FIG. 1982, the upper surface is formed with unevenness that matches the shell decoration. Therefore, in the 156th embodiment, the decoration of the button portion H181 can be made to stand out by irradiating the decorative surface (unevenness of the upper surface) of the button portion H181 with light from a direction that forms an acute angle with the upper surface (i.e., a direction different from the direction of light irradiation of the substrate member H773 of the rocking device H730).

In other words, in the 156th embodiment, by providing a substrate member H773 that allows light to enter from a direction close to a perpendicular direction to the top surface of the button portion H181 (at an obtuse intersection angle), and a second substrate member H46742 that allows light to enter at an acute intersection angle to the top surface of the button portion H181, it is possible to change the state of the light that is visible through the unevenness of the button portion H181. As a result, the dramatic effect of the light can be improved.

Furthermore, in the 156th embodiment, when the tilting device H46710 is placed in the upright position, as shown in FIG. 1982, the bent portion H46182b of the displacement member H46182 is disposed on the front side of the second substrate member H46742. This allows the light emitted from the second substrate member H46742 to pass through the inside of the displacement member H46182, and a predetermined pattern can be displayed by the reflecting portion formed inside.

In this case, the pattern displayed on the displacement member H46182 can be seen by the player through the front side transparent portion H711. Therefore, the light emitted from the rocking device H730 can be seen by the player through the front side transparent portion H711, and the pattern displayed on the displacement member H46182 can be seen by the player through the front side transparent portion H711. As a result, the presentation effect by light can be improved.

The predetermined patterns may be characters (e.g., "Push") that are displayed to prompt the player to operate the tilting device H46710, or a display showing the game status of the pachinko machine H10 (e.g., "Chance" or a character, etc.).

Furthermore, when the tilting device H46710 is placed in the upright position, a portion of the light emitted from the substrate member H773 of the rocking device H730 can be made to enter from the lower end side of the front side transparent portion H711 of the tilting device H710 and be transmitted through the inside of the button portion H181. This allows the decorative portion (the unevenness resembling a shell) formed on the upper surface of the button portion H181 to emit light.

In other words, in the 156th embodiment, when the tilting device H46710 is placed in the upright position, different areas of the tilting device H46710 can be illuminated with light from the base member H773 and light from the second base member H46742. As a result, the lighting effects can be improved.

In the 156th embodiment, the reflecting portion H46182c formed inside the displacement member H46182 is formed in a shape that is less reflective (easier to transmit) the light emitted from the second substrate member H46742 when the tilting device H46710 is placed in the tilted position. This makes it difficult for the displacement member H46182 to emit light (harder to form a pattern) when the tilting device H46710 is placed in the tilted position, and the displacement member H46182 can create a light effect only when the displacement member H46182 is displaced as specified.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment. The same applies to the modified examples (other embodiments) shown below, where part or all of the configuration in one modified example may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another modified example to form another modified example. Any embodiment may be applied to the modified examples shown below, and any modified example (combination or replacement of modified examples) may be applied to any embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above tenth embodiment, the case where the rotational motion unit A400b is configured in an operational mode that combines tilting and enlarging has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a door-shaped door member that slides left and right may be moved by utilizing the movement of the base plate member A430 and the movement of the moving member A440.

In this case, the cylindrical portion protruding forward from the rotating tip of the base plate member A430 is supported by a first support portion having a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction and formed in the first door member arranged on the front side of the base plate member A430, and the cylindrical portion protruding forward from the rotating tip of the moving member A440 is supported by a second support portion having a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction and formed in the second door member arranged on the front side of the moving member A440. This allows the first door member and the second door member to slide left and right in conjunction with the tilting operation of the rotation operation unit A400b.

The first door member is positioned further outward from the display area of the third pattern display device 81 than the second door member, and during the sliding movement of the first and second door members, the rotating tip of the base plate member A430 is guided in the vertical direction by the first support portion, and the rotating tip of the moving member A440 is guided in the vertical direction by the second support portion.

In this case, the left-right positions and movement speeds of the first and second door members correspond to the left-right positions and movement speeds of the rotation tips of the base plate member A430 and the movable member A440. Therefore, compared to the first door member, which moves based on the left-right component of the rotational displacement around the rotary shaft rod AJ1, the movement amount is larger by the left-right component of the rotational displacement around the rotary shaft rod AJ1 plus the longitudinal extension of the movable member A440, so the movement speed of the second door member can be configured to be larger than that of the first door member.

As the base plate member A430 moves from the performance standby state to the extended state, the left-right component of the rotational displacement around the rotation axis rod AJ1 gradually decreases, so the left-right movement speed of the first door member from the position where it retreats to the outside left and right also gradually decreases (when the drive speed of the drive motor MT1 is constant, the left-right movement speed of the first door member gradually decreases).

On the other hand, the left-right component of the rotational displacement of the movable member A440 about the rotation axis rod AJ1 also basically becomes gradually smaller as it approaches the extended state, but the amount of longitudinal extension of the movable member A440 increases as it approaches the tilt end. Therefore, the left-right movement speed of the second door member from the position where it retreats to the outside left and right increases at the tilt end where the extension of the movable member A440 occurs (when the drive speed of the drive motor MT1 is constant, the left-right movement speed of the second door member increases toward the drive motor MT1).

As a result, the movement speed of the first door element and the movement speed of the second door element at the same point can be made significantly different, particularly at the tilt end side of the rotational motion unit A400b, improving the presentation effect of the presentation using the door elements.

In this embodiment, the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 are configured as a pair on the left and right, so each operating unit A400, A500 can be configured to move a door member, and a performance device can be configured that can perform a performance in which the door is closed on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (so that there is no gap between the edges of the left and right door members in the moving direction when viewed from the front).

The third pattern display device 81 may also be configured so that a majority (or the entirety) of its display area can be hidden by a door member that is moved left and right by the first operating unit A400. In this case, the third pattern display device 81 may also be configured so that a majority (or the entirety) of its display area can be hidden by a door member that is moved left and right by the second operating unit A500.

In this embodiment, since the first operating unit A400 is positioned in front of the second operating unit A500, for example, it is possible to configure the second operating unit A500 so that the position of the second operating unit A500 is not obvious to the player (is hidden) when the entire display area of the third pattern display device 81 is hidden by the door member moved by the first operating unit A400. As a result, even if the door member moved by the first operating unit A400 moves to move away from the front side of the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern display device 81 is hidden by the door member moved by the second operating unit A500, so it is possible to configure a state in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is still not visible. This can improve the player's ability to focus on the door member.

In the tenth embodiment, the change in the external shape of the rotational motion unit A400b from the performance standby state occurs first in the longitudinal direction of the moving member A440 due to the shape of the functional long hole A444, and then in the direction switching member A450 in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the moving member A440, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the functional long hole A444 may be such that the first parallel portion A444a is omitted, the formation position of the inclined portion A444b is moved in parallel to the rotation tip side of the moving member A440 by the length of the first parallel portion A444a, and the second parallel portion A444c is also extended so as to be connected to the end of the inclined portion A444b. With this shape, the change in the external shape of the rotational motion unit A400b from the performance standby state starts with a state in which the displacement of the moving member A440 and the displacement of the direction switching member A450 occur simultaneously, and then a displacement can be generated that transitions to a state in which only the displacement of the moving member A440 occurs.

Also, an inverse inclined portion may be formed by a long hole that inclines from the end of the inclined portion A444b on the rotation shaft rod AJ1 side toward the center of the moving member A440 in the short direction as it approaches the rotation shaft rod AJ1. With this shape, a change in the external shape of the rotational motion unit A400b from the performance standby state can be started from a state in which the moving member A440 is displaced in the direction extending in the longitudinal direction and the direction switching member A450 is displaced in the direction expanding in the short direction simultaneously, and then a displacement can be generated in which the moving member A440 is displaced in the direction extending in the longitudinal direction and the direction switching member A450 is displaced in the direction approaching the short direction (towards the center) simultaneously.

In the above tenth embodiment, a pair of functional long holes A444 are configured with symmetrical shapes, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the pair may be configured asymmetrical. In this case, a performance item can be configured in which the timing and amount of displacement at which the left direction switching member A450 begins to displace differs from the timing and amount of displacement at which the right direction switching member A450 begins to displace, making it possible to configure a displacement pattern that matches the surrounding conditions (different displacements can be generated on the left and right sides, taking into account the amount and timing of displacement so as not to hit obstacles).

In the above tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the moving member A440 moves in a linear direction relative to the base plate member A430 when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the rotational motion unit A400b rotates, another rotating member disposed in the rotational motion unit A400b rotates. In this case, a change in the visual appearance different from a change in the external shape of the rotational motion unit A400b can be produced.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case was described in which the external shape of the rotational motion unit A400b does not change when tilting begins, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by designing the shape of the guide elongated hole A414 so that the external shape of the rotational motion unit A400b changes when tilting begins, the operating resistance of the rotational motion unit A400b when tilting begins can be increased, making it easier to maintain the position of the rotational motion unit A400b in the position at the start of tilting.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which both the tilting and rising directions of the rotational motion unit A400b are operated by a driving force, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to perform a movement mode that does not depend on a driving force, such as releasing the generation of the driving force from an intermediate position and allowing tilting to be performed by its own weight. In this case, the operation mode of the rotational motion unit A400b can be made different between when it is operated by a driving force and when it is operated without a driving force, thereby increasing the variation in operation. Furthermore, since the driving duration can be shortened, the useful life of the drive motor AMT1 can be extended.

In the above tenth embodiment, the movable member A440 is arranged so as to partially overlap the front side of the base plate member A430, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a metal bar extending toward the rotating tip direction is arranged on the base plate member A430, and the movable member A440 is arranged on the rotating tip side of the metal bar so as to be guided so as to be able to slide and displace in the direction in which the metal bar extends, so that the base plate member A430 and the movable member A440 do not overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the front side of the base plate member A430 is not hidden by the movable member A440, so the front side portion of the base plate member A430 can be used for presentation.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case was described in which the change in the external shape of the rotational motion unit A400b occurs in response to the attitude of the rotational motion unit A400b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a separate drive device may be provided to switch between the presence and absence of a change in the external shape. This drive device can be used to switch the shape of the guide elongated hole A414 or the shape of the functional elongated hole A444, thereby providing multiple types of external shape patterns of the rotational motion unit A400b that correspond to the attitude of the rotational motion unit A400b.

Also, by configuring the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 to be driven and displaced by a separate drive device, the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 may be configured to be displaced simultaneously when there is no change in the posture of the rotational motion unit A400b. For example, by configuring the rotational motion unit A400b to reach the tilt end without a change in its external shape, and to be able to drive and displace the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 simultaneously at the tilt end by a separate drive device, the performance effect of the rotational motion unit A400b can be improved.

In the above tenth embodiment, the operating speed of the drive motor AMT1 is constant, and the angular velocity of the rotational operation of the rotational operation unit A400b is gradually decreased. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by taking into account the amount of decrease in angular velocity, the drive speed of the drive motor AMT1 may be gradually increased, so that the rotational operation of the rotational operation unit A400b can be executed even in a control mode in which the angular velocity of the rotational operation of the rotational operation unit A400b is constant.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case was described in which the operating resistance of the rotating plate member A662 changes due to a change in the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the frictional resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 (e.g., contact resistance due to a plate member abutting from a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement) may be changed, or the viscous resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 (e.g., resistance due to a damper member, etc.) may be changed.

In the above tenth embodiment, light irradiation from the light emitting substrate A720 sandwiched between the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting substrate may be arranged so that the irradiation surface side faces the end faces of the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740.

In this case, the front plate member A730 (or the rear plate member A740) is irradiated with light from the light emitting substrate A720 (irradiation in the direction along the extension direction of the plate), while the rear plate member A740 (or the front plate member A730) may be irradiated with light from another light emitting substrate (a light emitting substrate with an orientation different by 90 degrees from the light emitting substrate A720) whose light irradiation unit arrangement surface is arranged opposite the light incident end surface of the rear plate member A740 (or the front plate member A730). This makes it easier to make light incident at the appropriate position even when the thickness of the front plate member A730 or the rear plate member A740 is large, which is considered difficult to handle depending on the light emitting substrate A720.

In the above tenth embodiment, the protruding portion A751a of the front cover member A750 and the light-emitting substrate A720 are arranged with a gap therebetween, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion A751a may be designed with a dimensional relationship that allows it to apply a pressing force to the light-emitting substrate A720. In this case, the pressing force applied to the light-emitting substrate A720 can be divided by the number of protruding portions A751a, so the arrangement of the light-emitting substrate A720 can be stabilized.

The protrusions A751a of the front cover member A750 are formed in the same shape with the purpose of diffusing light, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curvature of the protrusions A751a on the right side of the front light emitting portion A724 (the position on the side of the irradiation direction, the inner side of the front plate member A730) may be greater than the curvature of the protrusions A751a on the left side of the front light emitting portion A724 (the position on the opposite side of the irradiation direction, the outer side of the front plate member A730). In this case, the diffusion angle of the protrusions A751a on the side closer to the front plate member A730 can be reduced, so that it is possible to avoid diffused light illuminating a wide area of the front plate member A730 and reducing the visibility of the line-shaped light by the linear groove portion A732.

In the above tenth embodiment, it has been described that the light emitting substrate A720 is provided with light emitting units A724, A725 that irradiate light to the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light emitting unit that irradiates light from the light emitting substrate A720 to the front cover member A750 may be provided. In this case, since the light emitting units A724, A725 are provided near the end of the light emitting substrate A720, it is easy to provide a light emitting unit that irradiates light to the front cover member A750 at a position that does not interfere with the light irradiated from the light emitting units A724, A725, and interference of light can be avoided.

In the above tenth embodiment, the linear groove A732 of the front side plate member A730 is formed to match the shape of an illustration including a specific character or logo formed on the thin resin plate A743, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear groove A732 may be formed in the shape of a figure or illustration different from the illustration formed on the thin resin plate A743. In this case, the difference in appearance between when the linear groove A732 is illuminated (when the shape of the linear groove A732 is illuminated) and when the linear groove A732 is not illuminated (when the illustration formed on the thin resin plate A743 is visible) can be made greater.

In addition, the linear grooves A732 may be formed not only in the front plate member A730 but also in the thin resin plate A743 (or the front plate member A730 may be disposed in front of and behind the light emitting substrate A720). In this case, if a highly directional LED is also used for the rear light emitting portion A725, a light effect can be realized in which linear light is visible even in the thin resin plate A743.

In addition, illustrations including specific characters or logos may be formed not only on the thin resin plate A743 but also on the front plate member A730 (or the rear plate member A740 may be disposed in front of or behind the light-emitting substrate A720), and the front-to-rear arrangement of the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 may be reversed.

In each of these cases, the directivity of the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725 can be selected according to the purpose (higher directivity makes it easier to achieve total reflection, while lower directivity makes it easier to illuminate a wide area of the side of the plate member since total reflection is less likely to occur). In addition, the shapes of illustrations including specific characters, logos, etc. formed on the members arranged in front of and behind the light emitting substrate A720 may be the same or different.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case was described in which the front plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear plate member A740 are positioned by the parts protruding from the front cover member A750, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front cover member A750, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear plate member A740 may be positioned by the parts protruding forward and backward from the front plate member A730. In this case, the protruding length of the parts protruding from the front plate member A730 can be shortened, thereby reducing the possibility of accidentally damaging the protruding parts by dropping the front plate member A730 during assembly, for example.

The front plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720 and the front cover member A750 may be positioned by the parts protruding from the rear plate member A740. Since the rear plate member A740 is different from the member in which the linear groove portion is formed, the position of the protruding parts is not restricted by the linear groove portion. This improves the degree of freedom in arranging the protruding parts.

Also, it is possible to position only the light-emitting substrate A720, the front plate member A730, and the rear plate member A740, without positioning them with the front cover member A750. In this case, the front cover member A750 can be removed while keeping the light-emitting substrate A720, the front plate member A730, and the rear plate member A740 aligned. This makes it easy to replace the front cover member A750 as a decorative part (when it becomes dirty, when there is a change in specifications, etc.).

The position of the protruding portion for positioning can be exemplified in various ways. For example, if positioning with the front cover member A750 is envisaged, it is better to form it at a rear position of the front cover member A750. On the other hand, if positioning with the front cover member A750 is not envisaged, it may be formed at a position other than the rear position of the front cover member A750, as is the case with the fastening portion A733.

In the above tenth embodiment, the visibility of the ball flowing down the rear flow path of the downstream guide member A803 is changed by the difference in the inclination angle of the line of sight in the left-right direction using the visibility changing sheet A806, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. When visibility is changed by the difference in the inclination angle of the line of sight in the left-right direction, there is an effect of reducing the possibility of a player playing next to the player peeking at the ball flowing down. However, for example, when the visibility changing sheet A806 is configured so that the visibility of the ball flowing down the rear flow path of the downstream guide member A803 changes by the difference in the inclination angle of the line of sight in the up-down direction, there is an effect of reducing the possibility of a person standing behind the player peeking at the ball.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the visual appearance changing sheet A806 is attached to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A803a of the front member A803z, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the visual appearance changing sheet A806 may be attached to the left and right outer surfaces of the extension plate A803b. In this case, when the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are viewed from the left and right directions, it is possible to create a direction in which the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are easily visible and a direction in which the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are difficult to view.

In the above tenth embodiment, the visibility of the ball is reduced by the viewing mode changing sheet A806 when a player with his head positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81 looks sideways at the downstream guide member A803, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sheet that has the same function as the viewing mode changing sheet A806 may be attached to the entire display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that a player with his head positioned in front of the downstream guide member A803 has difficulty viewing the display of the third pattern display device 81 sideways (the display is blocked by the viewing mode changing sheet A806). In this case, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is not visible when the player is paying attention to the ball flowing behind the downstream guide member A803, so that the player's attention is not distracted, and further, the light irradiated from the third pattern display device 81 is not allowed to reach the player, so that the player can avoid a situation where the player's eyes are exposed to dazzling light and can rest his eyes.

In the above tenth embodiment, the visual appearance changing sheet A806 is used to create a case where the left flow path ATL1 is difficult to see, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the case where it is difficult to see may be created by the right flow path ATL2, or the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2, and the selection is arbitrary. The right flow path ATL2 is a flow path that guides balls to the second winning opening 640, and by changing the shape of the left flow path ATL1 to guide the ball that flows down the left flow path ATL1 to the specific winning opening 65a, depending on the design of the visual appearance changing sheet A806, it is possible to make it easier to see only the balls guided to the second winning opening 640, or to make it easier to see only the balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

For example, assuming that the visual appearance changing sheet A806 is arranged to cover the front sides of the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2, the visual appearance changing sheet A806 covering the front side of the left flow path ATL1 is designed to have high permeability when viewed from the front and from a left diagonal direction, but low permeability when viewed from a right diagonal direction, and the visual appearance changing sheet A806 covering the front side of the right flow path ATL2 is designed to have high permeability when viewed from the front and from a right diagonal direction, but low permeability when viewed from the left diagonal direction. In this case, the permeability of the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 can be made high when viewed from the front, the permeability of the left flow path ATL1 can be made high when viewed from the left diagonal direction, but low permeability of the right flow path ATL2 can be made low when viewed from the right diagonal direction, and the permeability of the left flow path ATL1 can be made low when viewed from the right diagonal direction, but high permeability of the right flow path ATL2 can be made high.

In this case, the transparency of the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 may be reduced when viewed from the front. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are visible at the same time, so that a player who wants to see both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 at the same time can be encouraged to play by peering into the downstream guide member A803 from above.

The surface of the visual appearance changing sheet A806 may be decorated with illustrations, including specific characters and logos.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case was described in which the visibility of the flowing balls was changed by the visibility changing sheet A806, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a non-light-transmitting louver plate section could be placed between a pair of front and rear light-transmitting plates, and the louvers could swivel or bend to switch between blocking the player's line of sight and allowing light to pass through.

In addition, when openings are formed in a pair of front and rear non-transparent plate members, and the front plate member is configured to be able to move parallel to the rear plate member, for example, the positions of the openings formed in each plate member may be shifted when viewed from the front, so that the rear side can be seen when looking in a direction passing through the inside of the front and rear openings, but when looking in a direction away from either the front or rear opening, the line of sight is blocked by the plate members, making it impossible to see the rear side.

In the above tenth embodiment, a case was described in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball is detected by the detection sensor SE1, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, prize balls do not have to be paid out. As an application in which prize balls are not paid out, for example, use in a gaming machine that allows the player to select the type of jackpot game (number of rounds, etc.) based on the detection of a ball by the detection sensor SE1 is envisioned. In such a gaming machine, attention to the detection sensor SE1 is likely to be extremely low except when the type of jackpot game is selected, so it is meaningful to place the visual appearance changing sheet A806 in front of it to hide the detection sensor SE1.

As another use when prize balls are not paid out, for example, detection sensor SE1 is placed downstream of specific winning port 65a, and is used in a gaming machine used as a "V winning port (specific area)" in which the game state after the end of the jackpot is controlled to transition to a predetermined advantageous state when the passage of a ball that entered specific winning port 65a during a jackpot game is detected. In such a gaming machine, balls are not guided to detection sensor SE1 except during a jackpot game, so it is thought that attention to detection sensor SE1 will be extremely reduced except during a jackpot game, and therefore it makes sense to place visibility changing sheet A806 in front of it to hide detection sensor SE1.

If the player moves his/her head to a position directly in front of the visual appearance changing sheet A806 during a jackpot, he/she can see through the visual appearance changing sheet A806 and visually confirm the detection sensor SE1 on the rear side of it, thus eliminating the complaint that it is difficult to see the detection sensor SE1 during a jackpot game.

For example, when prize balls are paid out, the third pattern display device 81 may display a number corresponding to the number of balls paid out (such as "+1" or "+3") in response to the detection of the balls. In this case, even if the player cannot see the balls flowing behind the downstream guide member A803, the player can understand from the display on the third pattern display device 81 that prize balls have been paid out, which can increase the player's interest.

In the above tenth embodiment, the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 has a front plate member A840 with linear grooves A842 that enable a light effect in which the contours of the light are visible, while the rear plate member A850 does not have linear grooves A842, and a light effect is achieved with uniform surface emission, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, linear grooves A842 may be formed not only on the front plate member A840 but also on the rear plate member A850. In this case, if highly directional LEDs are used for the edge light-emitting portions A833 and A837, a light effect can be realized in which linear light is visible on the rear plate member A850 as well.

In addition, illustrations including specific characters, logos, etc. may be formed not only on the rear panel member A850 but also on the front panel member A840, and the front-to-rear arrangement of the front panel member A840 and the rear panel member A850 may be reversed.

In each of these cases, the directivity of the edge light emitting parts A823, A827, A833, A837 can be selected according to the purpose (higher directivity makes it easier to achieve total reflection, while lower directivity makes it easier to illuminate a wide area of the side of the plate member since total reflection is less likely to occur). In addition, the shapes of the illustrations formed on the front plate member A840 and the rear plate member A850, including specific characters and logos, may be the same or different.

In the above tenth embodiment, the front light emitting unit A724 and the rear light emitting unit A725 are configured so that the optical axes of the multiple LEDs are parallel to each other, and the edge light emitting units A823, A827 and the edge light emitting units A833, A837 are configured so that the optical axes of the multiple LEDs are radial to each other (set in such a way that the distance between adjacent optical axes increases toward the tip in the direction of travel), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the relationship of these optical axes may be reversed.

In the above eleventh embodiment, the linear portion of the guide slot A2414 extends in an inclined direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may extend horizontally. In this case, the difference in operating resistance between the forward and return paths can be reduced.

In the above thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which a solenoid A4940 for driving the light-guiding displacement member A4920 is prepared separately, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device for the electric role 640a may also be used. In this case, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation timing of the electric role 640a and the operation timing of the light-guiding displacement member A4920.

In addition, instead of the light-guiding displacement member A4920, a movable part (e.g., the first operating unit A400), which mainly performs the action of extending toward the front side of the third pattern display device 81, may be configured to be able to extend toward the front side of the base plate A60 through the internal area of the center frame A86, and configured to be able to move to a position that blocks the line of sight to the ball's flow path, so that the movable part can be used to block the line of sight to the ball's flow path. In this case, the solenoid A4940 can be eliminated because a separate drive device for the movable part can be used as a drive device for blocking the line of sight to the ball's flow path.

In the above thirteenth embodiment, if an illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. is formed on the front guide plate portion A4931 of the covering member A4930, the illustration can make the linear groove portion A4921a less visible. This can improve the appearance of the ball guide unit A4900 when the light emitting means A4933a is not lit. In addition, by forming the linear groove portion A4921a in a shape corresponding to the illustration formed on the front guide plate portion A4931, the presentation effect can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the visibility changing sheet A806 may be attached to the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guiding displacement member A4920. In this case, even if the player's line of sight does not change, the relative positional relationship between the player's line of sight and the visibility changing sheet A806 changes as the light guiding displacement member A4920 is displaced, so that it is possible to create a case where the visibility of the ball flowing down behind the light guiding displacement member A4920 changes even if the player does not change his or her line of sight.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the incidence of light on the guided plate portion A4921 of the light-guiding displacement member A4920, the number and arrangement of the light-emitting means, the selection of the light-emitting means to be turned on, and the design of the structure may all or entirely use the structure of the auxiliary light-guiding plate unit A700b and the auxiliary light-guiding plate unit A810 described in the tenth embodiment.

In the above fourteenth embodiment, the case where the columnar protrusion member A5448 is pushed forward by the extension guide portion A5438 to cause relative displacement with respect to the moving member A5440 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the columnar protrusion member A5448 may be displaced in response to the tilt angle of the rotational motion unit A5400b by configuring the gear and rack that mesh and rotate based on the tilt angle of the rotational motion unit A5400b to be interlocked with the columnar protrusion member A5448, or a drive device for driving the columnar protrusion member A5448 may be disposed in the rotational motion unit A5400b, and the columnar protrusion member A5448 may be driven and displaced by driving control of the drive device.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, one engaging portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a is connected (disposed) to the rear wall portion W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510, and a pair (two) engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a is connected (disposed) to the front wall portion W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520. Although the case where W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a or W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b are connected (arranged) has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the engaging parts W530a, W2530a, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b may be omitted.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, the recesses W224a, W224b may be recessed into the front of the flat portions W320, W4320, We320, Wj320, Wm320, Ws320 on the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b side, and the connecting pieces W531a, W531b of the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b may be disposed in positions overlapping the recesses W224a, W224b when viewed from the front.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, A standing portion W222 may be provided on the surface of the rear wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 of Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 facing the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520. The upright portion W222 is disposed on the tip side (opposite side to the left wall portion W502) of the rear wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, and Wq510, so that the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, When removing We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500, the erected portion W222 makes it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, the sealing seal WSL may be cut using the upright portions W540, Wc540, Wd540, or the sealing seal WSL may be cut using the inclined portions W532 (protruding tip portions) of the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b. This allows the inclined portion W532 to function both to facilitate elastic deformation of the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b, and to cut the sealing seal WSL, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, the erected portions W540, Wc540, and Wd540 are not molded, and the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500 It may also be possible for the cover side engaged portion W210 of the box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 and the base side engaged portion W310 of the box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 when the cover side engaged portion W210 of the box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv2 ... and the base side engaged portion W310 of the box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We This allows a fraudulent person to mistakenly use protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo50 With the box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, and Wv200 facing in the reversed position, An attempt is made to engage the joint W210 with the base side engaged portion W310 of the box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, and Wu300, and engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, and We530a , Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b can be brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL, providing an opportunity to damage the sealing seal WSL.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, a case has been described in which one engagement portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a is arranged, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more (multiple) engagement portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a may be arranged. When a plurality of engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a are arranged, at least one of the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a may be configured to engage with the protrusion Wr214b of the cover portion Wr214 in the 42nd embodiment. That is, the directions of elastic deformation can be opposite in the plurality of engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a. Therefore, for example, in order to release the engagement with the protrusion W221 in the sixteenth embodiment, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a that are engaged with the protrusion W221 are elastically deformed (displaced). As a result, the engagement portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a that engage with the protrusion Wr214b in the 42nd embodiment can be displaced in a direction that maintains engagement with the protrusion Wr214b. As a result, the box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, and Wv200 and the box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, and Wu300 to the protective cover W50 0, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500 can be prevented from being illegally removed.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, a pair (two) of engaging parts W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b are arranged, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and one engaging part W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b may be arranged, or three or more engaging parts may be arranged. When three or more engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b are provided, at least one of the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b may be configured to be engaged with the protrusion Ws328 of the planar portion Ws320 in the 43rd embodiment. That is, the directions of elastic deformation can be opposite in the multiple engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b. Therefore, for example, by elastically deforming (displacing) the engagement portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b that engage with the protrusion W312c in the 16th embodiment to release the engagement with the protrusion W312c, the engagement portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b that engage with the protrusion Ws328 in the 43rd embodiment can be displaced in a direction that maintains the engagement with the protrusion Ws328. As a result, the box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, and Wv200 and the box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, and Wu300 to the protective cover W50 0, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500 can be prevented from being illegally removed.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp On the rear wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, and Wq510 sides of the rear walls W500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500, there are provided engagement portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, and Wp530a. , Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a are provided, and a pair (two) of engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b are provided on the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 side. Although a case has been described in which a different number of engaging portions are arranged on the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 side, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the same number of engaging portions may be arranged on the rear wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 side and the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 side. For example, two engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a may be arranged on the rear wall portion W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, and Wq510 side, and two engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b may be arranged on the front wall portion W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, and Wq520 side.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, when engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a are arranged between pairs of engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), However, this is not necessarily limited to the above, and when viewed from behind, engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a may be arranged at a position overlapping one of a pair of engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b. That is, the engagement parts W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a may be arranged biased to one side in the vertical direction.

In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, the inclined surface formed by the cutouts W226, We226, W325, and We325 may be formed in a straight line, or may be formed in a curved shape that is concave toward the opposite side to the affixing surface of the sealing seal WSL.

In the above 19th embodiment, the protrusion W4534 is formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape protruding from the engagement portions W4530a, W4530b toward the opposing sides of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape, a cone shape, a polygonal prism shape such as a quadrangular prism or a triangular prism, or a cylinder shape. When formed in a polygonal prism or cylinder shape, the fracture surface of the sealing seal WSL can be shaped like a torn piece, and when the broken (damaged) sealing seal WSL is reused, the traces of the fracture (damage) can be easily recognized by the worker.

In the above 19th to 21st, 41st and 46th embodiments, when attaching the protective covers W4500, W5500, Wq500 and Wv500 to the box covers W200, W4200, Wq200 and Wv200 and the box bases W300, W5300 and W6300, the sealing seals WSL may be damaged by the protrusions W4534, W5534, Wq534 and Wv534.

In the twentieth and twenty-first embodiments, a portion of the pair of end wall portions W223, W321 may be omitted. For example, when a portion of the pair of end wall portions W223, W321 on the side opposite the sealing unit W400 (the side indicated by the arrow L) is omitted, the protective cover W5500 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction indicated by the arrow F-B) before the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W5530b and the protrusion W312c are engaged when the protective cover W5500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, W6300, or after the engagement hole W533 and the protrusion W312c are released when the protective cover W5500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, W6300. This allows the protrusion W5534 to come into contact with the sealing seal WSL, damaging the sealing seal WSL.

In the twentieth and twenty-first embodiments, the sealing seal WSL may be cut using the protrusion W5534 of the engagement portion W5530b cut off from the protective cover W5500. This eliminates the need to carry a cutting tool (not shown) and makes it easier to open the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

In the above twenty-first embodiment, the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in the restricted state, but this is not necessarily limited thereto, and the recess W6326 may be formed extending further away from the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction) than the protrusion W5534. For example, the recess W6326 may be formed extending halfway to the protrusion W312c side (arrow R direction) of the range in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced to release the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533 (the first half of the range in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced for unauthorized removal), thereby making it possible to both form a trace (damage) on the sealing seal WSL and prevent the protective cover W5500 from being removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300.

That is, when the engagement portion 5530b is elastically deformed to release the engagement between the projection W312c and the engagement hole W533 without cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b, the projection W5534 is received in the recess W6326, and the engagement portion 5530b is displaced toward the opposite side of the projection W312c (the direction of the arrow L), forming a mark (damage) on the sealing seal WSL. On the other hand, the projection W5534 abuts against the inner wall of the recess W6326 opposite the projection W312c, restricting the displacement of the engagement portion 5530b toward the opposite side of the projection W312c (the direction of the arrow L), and preventing the protective cover W5500 from being removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300.

In the above twenty-first embodiment, the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in the restricted state, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the recess W6326 may be formed extending toward the protrusion W312c side (arrow R direction) on the opposite side (arrow L direction) of the protrusion W5534 from the protrusion W312c. For example, the recess W6326 may be formed extending to half of the range of the protective cover W5500 that is displaced on the opposite side (arrow L direction) of the protrusion W312c (the latter half of the range that can be displaced for unauthorized removal) of the protective cover W5500 that is displaced to release the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533.

In the above 21st embodiment, the recess W6326 is formed at a position that overlaps with the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in the restricted state, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the recess W6326 may be formed at a position on the opposite side of the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction) from the protrusion W5534. The recess W6326 may be formed midway through the range in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced to release the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533.

In the above 23rd embodiment, the surface of the connecting piece W8531b facing the sealing seal WSL or the surface opposite to the side facing the sealing seal WSL may be formed non-parallel to the sealing seal WSL.

In the 23rd embodiment, at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b may be formed into a curved surface that is convex toward the opposite side from the opposing side. This makes it easier to rotate the cutting tool along the curved surface formed on at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b, making it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool.

In the 23rd embodiment, at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b may be formed into a curved surface that is concave toward the opposing side.

In the above 23rd embodiment, a pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b are formed at an incline with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220), but this is not necessarily limited to this. One of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b may be formed at an incline with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220), and the other of the pair of side surfaces may be formed perpendicular to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220).

In the 24th embodiment, the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 of the connecting piece W9531b may be formed into a substantially elliptical shape in a cross-sectional view. This makes it easier to rotate the cutting tool along the curved surface, and makes it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool.

In the above 24th embodiment, a step is formed at the boundary between the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 of the connecting piece W9531b (the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 are directly connected), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a connecting part that smoothly connects the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 may be interposed. That is, the interposed part is formed as a part whose cross-sectional shape gradually changes from the cross-sectional shape of the first part W9531b1 to the cross-sectional shape of the second part W9531b2 as it moves from the first part W9531b1 to the second part W9531b2. This makes it possible to suppress stress concentration at the connecting part between the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2, and ensure the strength of the connecting piece WV9531b. Additionally, the interposed portion makes it easier to displace the cutting tool from the second portion W9531b2 toward the first portion W9531b1.

In the above 24th embodiment, if the engagement portion W530a is elastically deformed improperly, the sealing seal WSL may be damaged by the first portion W9531b1.

In the above 25th embodiment, the cutting portion Wa550 is disposed in a position offset toward the front wall portion W520 (arrow F direction) from approximately the center of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and when the protective cover Wa500 is attached to the box cover W200 and box base W300 with the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 in the opposite position (the rear wall portion W510 facing the front side of the front wall portion W520), the cutting portion Wa550 may be disposed in a position facing the notches W226, W325. This makes it possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL from being cut even when the engagement portions W530a, W530b are cut and the protective cover Wa500 is displaced toward the sealing unit W400 (arrow R direction). On the other hand, by removing the protective cover Wa500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 and attaching the protective cover Wa500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 with the front wall W520 and the back wall W510 in the opposite position, the cutting portion Wa550 can be positioned opposite the notches W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL can be cut using the cutting portion Wa550. As a result, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to use the cutting portion Wa550.

In the above 25th embodiment, the cutting portion Wa550 is formed in a sawtooth shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be formed in a straight line, and the protruding tip of the cutting portion Wa550 may be formed in a shape formed by connecting sine waves from 0 degrees to 180 degrees. When the cutting portion Wa550 is formed in a straight line, it may be formed parallel to the sealing seal WSL, or at least a part of it may be formed at an incline. By forming the cutting portion Wa550 parallel to the sealing seal WSL, when the sealing seal WSL is cut, the fracture surface of the sealing seal WSL can be formed in a torn state. This makes it difficult for a fraudulent person to join the fracture surfaces of the sealing seal WSL together without any gaps, making it difficult to reuse the sealing seal WSL.

In the above 25th embodiment, the sawtooth shape formed in the cutting portion Wa550 is received in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL is separated into the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the sealing seal WSL on the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side may be partially connected (at least a portion may be cut). In other words, the cutting portion Wa550 may form a perforation in the sealing seal WSL (a shape in which a cutting portion and a connecting portion are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction). This makes it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL (separate it into the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side). On the other hand, when cutting (breaking) the connection portion formed in the sealing seal WSL, the broken surface can be shaped like a torn piece, so that if the cut (broken) sealing seal WSL is reused, the traces of the cut can be easily recognized by the worker. Also, by displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the side wall portion W212 (the direction of the arrow R), it is easy to form perforations in the sealing seal WSL.

In the above 26th embodiment, the blade Wb552 has a tip formed in a cone shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tip of the blade Wb552 may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the cross-sectional shape of the tip of the blade Wb552 may be constant in the protruding direction (arrow L-R direction). In other words, the tip of the blade Wb552 does not have to be formed sharp. As a result, when the sealing seal WSL is cut using the blade Wb552, the fracture surface of the sealing seal WSL can be formed in a torn state. As a result, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to join the fracture surfaces of the sealing seal WSL together without any gaps and reuse the sealing seal WSL. In addition, the tip of the blade Wb552 may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid or a square pyramid, and the tip of the blade Wb552 may be formed in a polygonal prism shape such as a triangular prism or a square prism.

In the above 26th to 29th, 33rd and 49th embodiments, unevenness may be formed on the surface to which the sealing seal WSL is affixed on the planar portion W220, We220 of the box cover W200, Wb200, We200 or the planar portion W320, We320 of the box base W300, We300 (the surface to which the guide portion Wb560, Wd560, the lower wall portion W501 or the connecting piece We531a is aligned). As a result, when the guide portion Wb560, Wd560, the lower wall portion W501, or the connecting piece We531a is displaced from one end of the pair of end wall portions W223 to the other along the flat portion W220, We220 of the box cover W200, Wb200, We200 or the flat portion W320, We320 of the box base W300, We300, the position of the fracture surface formed in the sealing seal WSL between one end and the other end of the sealing seal WSL in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) can be changed in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction). As a result, it is possible for a fraudulent person to join the fracture surfaces of the sealing seal WSL together without any gaps, making it difficult to reuse the sealing seal WSL.

In the above 28th embodiment, in addition to the fitting (engagement) between the erected portion Wd540 and the engagement hole W533, the protective cover Wd500 may be provided with an engagement portion for engaging the engagement portion Wd530a. For example, an engagement portion may be formed on the rear wall portion W510 of the protective cover Wd500, and the end of the engagement portion Wd530a on the opposite side to the connecting piece W531a (the inclined portion W532 side) may be engaged with the engagement portion formed on the rear wall portion W510. This allows the engagement portion Wd530a to be engaged at two different points on the protective cover Wd500, making it possible to firmly attach the engagement portion Wd530a to the protective cover Wd500. In addition, the posture of the engagement portion Wd530a can be easily maintained. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut using the engagement portion Wd530a.

In the above thirty-fourth embodiment, the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 (first restricting portion Wj240 and second restricting portion Wj250) is formed on the planar portion Wj220. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 may be formed on the rear surface (arrow B direction side) of the planar portion Wj320, and the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 may be combined so that, in the restricted state, the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 is disposed at a position inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wj530a. The box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 are combined so that the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 and the engagement portion Wj530a are engaged with each other. The box cover Wj200 includes a cover portion Wj214 and an elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, which makes the resin molding die for the box cover Wj200 complex. However, by forming the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 on the box base Wj300, the resin molding die for the box cover Wj200 can be simplified. As a result, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In the above-described 35th embodiment, the tip of the engaging portion W530b2 may not abut against the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f (the engaging portion W530b2 may not be elastically deformed). This makes it possible to prevent one of the pair of engaging portions W530b from being elastically deformed in different directions. As a result, the amount of elastic deformation of one (the other) of the pair of engaging portions W530b can be reduced, making it difficult for one (the other) of the pair of engaging portions W530b to be damaged.

In the above 35th embodiment, the locking portion Wk312f of the cover portion Wk312 is formed on the box base Wk300, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. The locking portion Wk312f may be formed on the front surface (arrow F direction side) of the side wall portion W212, and may be disposed in a position where the locking portion Wk312f abuts on the tip of the engagement portion W530b2 in the restricted state by combining the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300. By combining the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the tip of the engagement portion W530b2 abuts on the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f. Because the box base Wk300 has a cover portion Wk312, the resin molding die for the box base Wk300 becomes complicated. However, by forming the locking portion Wk312f on the box cover W200, the resin molding die for the box base Wk300 can be simplified. As a result, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In the above-mentioned 35th embodiment, the engaging portion W530b1 or the engaging portion W530b2 may be formed in two or more places on the protective cover W500, and the protrusion W312c or the protrusion Wk312c may be formed in two or more places on the box base Wk300. For example, if a pair of engaging portions W530b2 are formed on both ends of the protective cover W500 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) and an engaging portion W530b1 is formed between the pair of engaging portions W530b2, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b1 toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction) can be easily suppressed at both ends of the engaging portion W530b1, and the engaging portion W530b1 can be prevented from being improperly elastically deformed, making it difficult to improperly remove the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300. Also, for example, if a pair of engaging portions W530b1 are formed on both ends of the protective cover W500 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), and an engaging portion W530b2 is formed between the pair of engaging portions W530b1, the engaging portion W530b2 can be disposed in a position overlapping the engaging portion W530a in rear view. This makes it difficult to illegally elastically deform the engaging portion W530a and illegally remove the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and box base Wk300.

In the 36th embodiment, a notch may be formed in the connecting portion Wl535. This makes it easier to rotate (twist) the connecting portion Wl535.

In the above 37th embodiment, the restricting protrusion Wm228 is disposed at a position overlapping approximately the center of the extension portion Wm332 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be disposed below the restricting portion Wm334. This makes it difficult for the engaging portion Wm530b to be elastically deformed improperly.

In the above 43rd embodiment, a case where a pair of protrusions Ws328 are provided has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Only one (the other) of the pair of protrusions Ws328 may be formed, and the protrusion W312c in the 16th embodiment may be formed at a position corresponding to the other (the other) of the pair of protrusions Ws328. In other words, the protrusion Ws328 may be formed on one (the other) in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), and the protrusion W312c may be formed on the other (the other). This allows the directions in which one and the other of the pair of engaging portions W530b of the protective cover W500 are elastically deformed in opposite directions. Therefore, by elastically deforming (displacing) one (the other) engaging portion W530b in order to release the engagement between one (the other) engaging portion W530b and the protrusion Ws328 (protrusion W312c), the other (the other) engaging portion W530b can be displaced in a direction that maintains the engagement between the other (the other) engaging portion W530b and the protrusion W312c (protrusion Ws328). As a result, unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300 can be prevented.

In the above 44th embodiment, a pair of notches Wt224b1 formed in the protrusions Wt224b may be formed with connecting portions that connect the protrusions Wt224b to each other. This ensures the strength of the protrusions Wt224b.

In the above 44th embodiment, the protrusion Wt224b is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross section, but this is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion Wt224b may be formed in a curved shape that is convex toward the opposite side to the flat portion Wt220 in cross section. This makes it easier to attach the sealing seal WSL to the protrusion Wt224b (makes it difficult for the sealing seal WSL to peel off from the protrusion Wt224b).

In the above 44th embodiment, the dimensions of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) are described as being approximately the same as the dimensions of the connecting piece W531b of the engagement portion W530a, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the dimensions of the protrusion Wt224b may be smaller or larger than the dimensions of the connecting piece W531b.

If the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed smaller than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b, the sealing seal WSL affixed to the protrusion Wt224b is shielded by the connecting piece W531b and cannot be seen by a tamperer. This makes it easier for a tamperer to damage the sealing seal WSL with a cutting tool.

If the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool can be opposed to a pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W531b, so that the cutting tool can be brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL without performing an operation to cut the connecting piece W531b, thereby damaging the sealing seal WSL.

In the 46th embodiment, the recess Wv229 may be formed to extend in the opposite direction (arrow D direction) from the pair of protrusions Wv534. As a result, when the engagement portion Wv530a separated from the protective cover Wv500 is removed from the box cover Wv200, the protrusion Wv534 is rotated toward the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction) with the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as the rotation axis, and the engagement portion Wv530a can be displaced in the extending direction of the recess Wv229 (arrow D direction) while maintaining the protrusion Wv534 in contact with the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the mark (damage) formed on the sealing seal WSL can be made larger.

In the above 48th embodiment, the first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the second connecting piece Wx531b2 may be molded by two-color molding using different resin materials. For example, when the first connecting piece Wx531b1 is molded using a resin material having higher rigidity than the second connecting piece Wx531b2, in addition to the shape of the first connecting piece Wx531b1 (a shape in which the dimension in the direction from the front wall portion W520 to the rear wall portion W510 is formed larger than that of the second connecting piece Wx531b2), the second connecting piece Wx531b2 can be easily cut from the first connecting piece Wx531b1, making it easier to rotate the blade of the cutting tool. This makes it easier to damage the sealing seal WSL with the tip of the cutting tool.

In the above 48th embodiment, the connecting piece Wx531b is formed in a generally L-shape in cross section, but this is not necessarily limited to this. It may be formed in a generally U-shape in cross section, with the open side facing the sealing seal WSL. This allows the cutting resistance of the connecting piece Wx531b in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) to be changed during cutting, making it easier to rotate the cutting tool (not shown).

In the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 is guided to the second winning opening 640 by the movable electric device 640a or the feather member 945, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a nail may be arranged in the path of the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 to increase the randomness of the ball's downward flow, and the ball may be guided to the second winning opening 640 with a certain probability due to collision with the nail.

In the above embodiments, the operation of the electric role 640a or the feather member 945 is determined by a lottery for a normal symbol, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to operate in a certain pattern from the time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In this case, attention to the electric role 640a or the feather member 945 can be improved.

In addition, when the electric role 640a or the feather member 945 operates at a constant rate, the through gate 765 and the detection devices SE4 and SE5 may still be placed. For example, when the passage of the ball is detected, the third pattern display device 81, a sound device, an LED, or the like may be controlled to notify the player that the ball has passed. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that it is time for the ball to flow down near the electric role 640a or the feather member 945.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the drawing of the normal symbol can be suspended, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the drawing of the normal symbol is not suspended and a ball passing through the normal winning port 66 or the like is detected while the normal symbol is changing, the drawing of the normal symbol may not be performed.

In the above embodiments, a seesaw member 762 or a distributor 983 is disposed at the branching point of the ball's flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail may be disposed at the branching point, or a protruding part formed from a resin material may be disposed at the branching point. The ball's flow path can be branched by colliding with these. In this case, not only can the balls flow alternately, but it is also possible to create a situation where the balls flow continuously down one side (timing).

In each of the above embodiments, the operating time of the electric role 640a or the wing member 945 is set to a short time of about 0.5 to 3 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set to operate in a long-open operation pattern in which the electric role 640a is maintained in an advanced state or the wing member 945 is maintained in an open state for a time longer than 3 seconds (for example, 5 seconds) with a probability of about 10% in the lottery of normal symbols in the normal state.

When operating in the long-open operation pattern, the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 can be easily guided to the second winning opening 640 by the electric device 640a or the blade member 945. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where, among the balls shot when operating in the long-open operation pattern (a limited number of balls given the maximum shooting interval of 100 balls per minute), the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is not guided to the second winning opening 640.

When the electric role 640a or the feather member 945 is operating in the long opening operation pattern, it is advantageous for the player to shoot a ball at the electric role 640a or the feather member 945, as this makes it easier to win the lottery for special pattern 2. Therefore, before the electric role 640a or the feather member 945 starts to operate in the long opening operation pattern, the third pattern display device 81, a sound device, an LED, or other means may be used to notify the player in advance to shoot a ball at the electric role 640a or the feather member 945.

The notification can be changed depending on the arrangement of the electric device 640a or the feather member 945, but in the 50th embodiment, it is preferable to notify the player of a right-handed hit, as this makes it easier for the ball to reach the electric device 640.

On the other hand, in the 51st embodiment, there is no difference in the ease with which the ball reaches the feather member 945 whether it is shot from the left or the right, but it is preferable to notify the player of a left shot in order to continue the previous shot state. Note that for players who play with a right shot from the normal state, a notification may be given to encourage them to continue shooting.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which a draw for special pattern 1 can be won when the sensor SE detects passage, and a draw for special pattern 2 can be won when the ball passes through the second winning opening 640 and is detected by the switch downstream, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a draw for special pattern 1 can be won when passage is detected by the left sensor SE and when the ball is detected by the switch downstream of the second winning opening 640, and a draw for special pattern 2 can be won when passage is detected by the right sensor SE.

In this case, if the ball is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762, the player's profits will be greater if the ball passes through the first ball sending path KR1 while the electric device 640a is in the retracted state.

In the above 50th embodiment, the rotational movement (left/right tilting movement) of the seesaw member 762 is completed in less than 0.5 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating resistance may be increased by reducing the clearance of the rotating shaft, and the time required for the rotational movement of the seesaw member 762 may be set to 1.0 second or more. In this case, even if consecutive balls enter the first winning hole 64, the gameplay can be configured such that the next ball is swept to the left by the seesaw member 762 after the variable display due to the detection of the ball at the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 has ended.

In the above 50th embodiment, the guide portion 742 is arranged in the left-right center of the flow path formed inside the upper protrusion 741, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide portions 742 may be arranged in parallel on the left and right. In this case, the protrusion tip surfaces are formed to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the opposing surfaces, thereby effectively preventing the ball that comes into contact with the two guide portions 742 and is guided (folded back toward the back side) from being misaligned in the left-right direction.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the bending member 740 were connected by a resin path, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a path that guides the ball with nails may be constructed. In this case, the flow speed of the ball can be varied.

In the above 50th embodiment, the first inclined groove 755 and the second inclined groove 757 are formed as parallel linear grooves, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first inclined groove 755 and the second inclined groove 757 may be non-parallel. They may also be formed along a curved path. In the case of a curved path, the guide surface below the sphere may be curved like a metal rail, or may be curved in a manner that meanders back and forth.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case has been described in which the left guide portion 645 is disposed on the front side of the covering plate portion 711 when the moving plate member 641 is in the advanced state, and the ball can roll on its upper surface. In this case, a protrusion extending in a direction intersecting the ball's rolling path may be provided on the front side of the covering plate portion 711. This allows the ball rolling on the upper surface of the left guide portion 645 to collide with the protrusion, thereby slowing the ball down.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which the balls sent to the right by the right guide portion 643 are received by the second ball throwing portion 736 without leakage, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the right guide portion 643 may be formed to extend to a position above the second ball throwing portion 736, and the general winning opening 63 may be disposed to the right of the second ball throwing portion 736.

In this case, if the moving plate member 641 changes to a retracted state when the ball is placed vertically above the second ball throwing section 736, the ball will be received by the second ball throwing section 736, but if the moving plate member 641 is still maintained in the entered state when the ball is placed vertically above the second ball throwing section 736, the ball will pass through the second ball throwing section 736 to the right and be received by the general winning opening 63.

In other words, when the ball is swept to the right by the right-side guide section 643, it is not possible to tell whether the ball is being guided to the second ball throwing section 736 or to the general winning opening 63, which can improve attention to the ball.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which the electric device 640a is controlled with one operation pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple operation patterns corresponding to the type of jackpot may be preset, and when the passage of a ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is detected, which operation pattern is to be used for control may be selected at random, and the operation of the electric device 640a may be performed with the selected operation pattern.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a in a high probability state is set to the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may also include a case in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a in a high probability state is the fourth operation pattern. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that entered the first winning opening 64 flows downstream via the seesaw member 762, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the seesaw member 762 and the left-side flow path may be omitted. In other words, the flow path may be formed from only the first winning opening 64 and the right-side path.

In this case, it becomes difficult to eliminate the case where consecutive balls enter the first winning opening 64, but for example, by arranging a rotor that rotates at a constant speed on a longitudinal axis on the flow path from the center frame 86 to the first winning opening 64 and that has a recessed portion capable of accommodating a ball at a predetermined position on the outer circumference, the first winning opening 64 can be configured so that the ball is accepted by the first winning opening 64 only when the ball accommodated in the recessed portion reaches above the first winning opening 64 due to the rotation of the rotor, thereby preventing consecutive balls from entering the first winning opening 64.

In other words, the rotating body can prevent balls from entering the first winning hole 64 at any time, so the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be determined by the rotational speed of the rotating body.

In the above 50th embodiment, the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is placed on the right guide section 643 and flows down the opposite side to the left guide section 645, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the right guide section 643 may be configured to slope downward toward the left guide section 645, and the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 may flow from the right guide section 643 to the left guide section 645 and be guided to the first ball sending section 734.

In this case, if the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the approaching state for a sufficiently long time, the ball placed on the first ball throwing path KR1 can be guided to the first ball throwing section 734, and the special pattern 2 can be drawn.

On the other hand, if the moving plate member 641 is inserted too far, the ball will fall between the first ball sending section 734 and the bending member 740, but an receiving opening may be placed at this position to receive the ball and give the player a certain benefit.

When a ball enters the receiving opening, the benefit may be the payout of a prize ball, a lottery for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, a lottery for a normal symbol, a fall lottery (a lottery that changes the game state from a high probability state to a low probability state), or some other benefit. In any case, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball rolling on the top surface of the moving plate member 641.

The plate may be extended so as to slope upward from the right end of the right guide portion 643 to the right, allowing the ball that falls to the right of the bending member 740 to be received. In this case, if the ball rolling on the upper surface of the moving plate member 641 from the right side of the bending member 740 reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, the moving plate member 641 may operate to a retracted state while the ball is positioned on the first ball throwing path KR1, causing the ball to fall on the first ball throwing path KR1 and be detected by the sensor SE, making it possible to win the lottery for special pattern 1.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 was arranged on the left side of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 arranged on the left side may be omitted. In this case, the winning of the lottery for the normal pattern by hitting from the left is limited to the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, and the winning of the lottery for the normal pattern by hitting from the right is limited to the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, 765.

In other words, by shooting the ball with a left hit, the operation of the electric device 640a can be limited to operation based on the lottery of normal symbols at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, so that when the electric device 640a operates in the first or second operating pattern, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is not guided by the right guide section 643 and is detected by the sensor SE.

On the other hand, firing the ball with a right hit makes it easier to win a lottery with a normal pattern, which makes it easier to increase game efficiency. In other words, the player can choose whether to play in a way that reduces game efficiency but makes it easier to avoid the ball being detected by the sensor SE, or to play in a way that increases game efficiency but slightly increases the chances of the ball being detected by the sensor SE.

In the above 50th embodiment, the moving plate member 641 extends outward from the bending member 740, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the left guide portion 645 may be omitted. In this case, the second ball sending portion 736 may function as the second winning opening 640.

In the above 50th embodiment, the ball is guided to the right guide portion 643 from the path formed by the distribution member 760, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the ball may be guided to the right guide portion 643 from the front side of the base plate 60. In this case, a plate portion is extended to the left from the left end of the right guide portion 643 at the same inclination, and an opening is formed on the left side of the bending member 740 so that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate portion can enter the inside of the bending member 740.

In the above 50th embodiment, a case was described in which the paths of the balls that roll in different directions on the left and right sides of the upper surface of the moving plate member 641 merge downstream, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a detection device that detects the passage of the ball may be disposed at the lower end side of the first inclined groove 755, and the ball may be detected by the detection device, making it possible to win a lottery for special pattern 2, or a detection device that detects the passage of the ball may be disposed behind the second ball sending section 736, and the ball may be detected by the detection device, making it possible to win a lottery for special pattern 2.

In other words, it is possible to omit the formation of the second inclined groove 757, and provide separate positions for detecting a ball rolling on the top surface of the left guide portion 645 and for detecting a ball rolling on the top surface of the right guide portion 643.

In the above 51st embodiment, a case was described in which the paths of the balls that rolled in different positions on the upper surface of the feather member 945 merged downstream, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball passage hole may be formed behind the third branch passage BK3, and a detection device may be disposed downstream of the hole, and the passage of the ball may be detected by the detection device, making it possible to win a lottery for special pattern 2, similar to detection device SE6.

In other words, it is possible to omit the formation of the ball throwing hole 941k and the ball throwing opening 982k, and provide separate positions for detecting a ball rolling on the top surface of the feather-shaped main body 945m and for detecting a ball rolling on the top surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e.

In the above 51st embodiment, the plate-shaped portion 945e is connected and fixed to the feather-shaped main body 945m at the rotation tip side of the feather member 945, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extension portion 945d may be formed at the rotation base end side of the feather member 945, or may be formed at a middle position in the rotation diameter direction. In particular, when the extension portion 945d is formed at the rotation base end side, the formation width of the fourth through hole 941j and the rotation allowance opening 982m can be reduced, and the reduction in strength of the back base 941 and the bulge portion 982 caused by the formation of the holes can be minimized.

When a ball rests on the plate-shaped portion 945e, the plate-shaped portion 945e may bend starting from the extension portion 945d. However, if the extension portion 945d is formed on the rotating tip side of the blade member 945, the elastic force generated when the plate-shaped portion 945e elastically recovers from the bending deformation is generated in a direction that pushes the ball into the third branch passage BK3. This allows the ball that reaches the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e to be stably guided toward the third branch passage BK3.

In the above 51st embodiment, the case where the extension portion 945d and the plate-shaped portion 945e are formed on both of the pair of wing members 945 is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extension portion 945d and the plate-shaped portion 945e may be formed on only one of the wing members 945.

In the above fifty-first embodiment, the case was described in which the rolling surface of the feather-shaped body 945m and the rolling surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e are formed with the same inclined surface when the feather member 945 is in the open state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the plate-shaped portion 945e may be shallower (the angle with respect to the horizontal is smaller) than the inclination angle of the feather-shaped body 945m.

In this case, the speed of the ball rolling on the feather-shaped main body 945m can be made faster than the speed of the ball rolling on the plate-shaped portion 945e. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the balls arranged in front and behind each other remain overlapped when viewed from the front.

In addition, compared to when one ball is placed on the feather-shaped main body 945m, when one ball is placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, the motion resistance applied from the ball to the feather member 945 can be made larger, and the motion speed of the feather member 945 can be reduced.

In addition, when the feather member 945 is configured to appear and disappear by sliding back and forth, the inclination angle of the feather-shaped body 945m and the inclination angle of the plate-shaped portion 945e may be made different. In this case, even if a ball is placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e and the feather-shaped body 945m at the same time, depending on the operating length of the feather member 945, it is possible to create a state in which the ball rolling on either the plate-shaped portion 945e or the feather-shaped body 945m reaches the rolling plate portion 941l, while the ball rolling on the other of the plate-shaped portion 945e or the feather-shaped body 945m falls before reaching the rolling plate portion 941l.

In the above fifty-first embodiment, the extension portion 945d is extended from near the top surface of the feather-shaped main body 945m when the feather member 945 is in an open state, so that the top surface of the feather-shaped main body 945m and the top surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e appear to overlap from front to back. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the top surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e and the top surface of the feather-shaped main body 945m may be formed to be vertically offset. In this case, even if a ball is placed on the feather-shaped main body 945m while a ball is placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, the vertical offset makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the front ball completely hides the rear ball.

In the above 51st embodiment, the plate-shaped portion 945e is formed in a symmetrical position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the feather-shaped body 945m may be configured to have a symmetrical shape, with the right plate-shaped portion 945e positioned higher than the left plate-shaped portion 945e (asymmetrically positioned). In this case, the appearance of the feather-shaped body 945m, which is easy to see from the front, remains symmetrical, while the flow path of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e arranged on the back side of the feather-shaped body 945m can be made asymmetrical. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load in the left and right directions is balanced when a ball reaches the symmetrical line, and ball clogging occurs.

In the above 51st embodiment, the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are used to design the operating resistance of the distribution section 983, and the shortest side of the ball flow interval is determined, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotor that rotates at a constant speed on a rotation axis in the forward and backward directions and has a recessed portion that can accommodate a ball at a predetermined position on the outer circumference may be arranged on the flow path from the center frame 86 to the first winning opening 64. In this case, by configuring the ball to be accepted by the first winning opening 64 only when the ball accommodated in the recessed portion reaches above the first winning opening 64 due to the rotation of the rotor, it is possible to prevent consecutive balls from entering the first winning opening 64.

In other words, the rotating body can prevent balls from entering the first winning hole 64 at any time, so the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be determined by the rotational speed of the rotating body.

In the above 53rd embodiment, the inclined surface 4645a of the upstream guide portion 4645 and the inclined surface 643a of the right guide portion 643 have the same inclination, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 4645a may be greater than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, the acceleration of the ball rolling on the inclined surface 4645a to the right can be increased, so that even if the electric device 4640a is in a retracted state while the ball is placed on the first ball throwing path KR1, the ball can flow toward the second ball throwing section 736 due to its momentum. In other words, by increasing the acceleration to the right, it is easier to prevent the ball from flowing down into the recovery hole 752. In this sense, it is easier for a ball rolling down the inclined surface 4645a to enter the second ball throwing section 736 than for a ball that enters the first winning hole 64.

Also, for example, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 4645a may be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, the time that the ball stays on the inclined surface 643a can be increased, so that when the ball is placed on the first ball sending path KR1, the electric device 4640a changes to a retracted state, and the ball is more likely to flow down into the recovery hole 752.

In the above 54th embodiment, by controlling the operation of the winning unit B400 in multiple ways, it is possible to switch between a state in which a ball passing through the inside of the winning unit B400 is guided almost entirely to the second winning port B640 and a state in which it is guided almost entirely to the third winning port B64b. This is used to explain the case in which it is possible to configure a special probability variable state in which small winning games occur frequently (occurring with almost every change in the special pattern) as the game state after a big winning game, in which a large number of prize balls can be paid out before the transition to a big winning game by causing a ball to enter a specific winning port B65a that is opened during a small winning game, and a probability variable state in which small winning games do not occur frequently, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the setting may not be such that small wins occur frequently (a specific winning port B65a is not necessarily required), and the winning unit B400 may be used to switch between a state in which it is easier to guide the ball to the winning port for the drawing of special pattern 1 (corresponding to the third winning port B64b), and a state in which it is easier to guide the ball to the winning port for the drawing of special pattern 2 (corresponding to the second winning port B640).

In this case, a pachinko machine can be configured in which, in the game state transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game, the game has the common game mode of firing a ball toward the winning unit B400, but the allocation of the jackpot type expected when a jackpot is obtained can be changed.

In the above 54th embodiment, the winning unit B400 is configured to operate the electric device B640a in a first operating pattern that makes it difficult to guide the ball to either the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b, a second operating pattern that makes it easy to guide the ball to the third winning port B64b, or a third operating pattern that makes it easy to guide the ball to the second winning port B640, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric device B640a may be configured to operate in an operating pattern that makes it easy to guide the ball to both the second winning port B640 and the third winning port B64b.

As a means for achieving this, for example, the operating time Bt3b of the standard operating pattern BRP3 in the third operating pattern can be set to 1.0 second, and the sliding member B450 can be maintained in a non-excited state for the remaining 1.0 second, so that the ball picked up by the tip B451 during the waiting time Bt3a can be guided to the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b.

In the above 54th embodiment, in the winning unit B400, when the solenoid BSOL41 is driven with a ball resting on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 arranged in the forward position, the ball resting on the tip B451 is pushed onto the upper surface of the tip B451, forming the ball passing opening B414 so as to be able to pass through, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, when the slide member B450 is arranged in the retracted position, the dimension between the upper surface of the tip B451 and the upper edge of the ball passing opening B414 may be designed to be less than the diameter of the ball.

In other words, the upper surface of the tip B451 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward as it approaches the front, and since the displacement direction of the slide member B450 is the front-to-rear direction, the dimension between the upper surface of the tip B451 and the upper edge of the sphere passage opening B414 is shorter when the slide member B450 is in the retracted position than when the slide member B450 is in the advanced position.

By utilizing this, when the slide member B450 is positioned in the forward position, the ball is allowed to pass through the ball passage opening B414, but for a ball resting on the tip portion B451 when the slide member B450 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position, the dimensions are designed so that the ball gets caught on the upper edge of the ball passage opening B414, thereby preventing the ball resting on the tip portion B451 from passing through the ball passage opening B414 when the slide member B450 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position. This reduces the probability of a ball entering the ball passage opening B414.

In the above 54th embodiment, in the winning unit B400, the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 are formed at a height sufficient to block the passage of the ball in the left-right direction, and the introduction of the ball from the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 to the central flow path B431 side is limited to passing through the left opening BLT or the right opening BRT located on the rear side of the left wall portion B432 or the right wall portion B433, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical height of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 may be designed to be low, allowing the ball to pass above the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433.

Also, for example, by utilizing the fact that the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member B450 is different when the slide member B450 is in the forward position and when it is in the retracted position, the height of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 may be designed to be sufficient to block the ball from passing above the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 when the slide member B450 is in the forward position (when the vertical position of the upper surface is low) (for example, the height may be designed so that the vertical positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 are higher than the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member B450), while allowing the ball to pass above the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 when the slide member B450 is in the retracted position (when the vertical dimension of the upper surface is high) (allowing the ball to pass, for example, designed so that the vertical positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 are lower than the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member B450).

In this case, as a variation of the flow path of the balls rolling on the upper surface of the slide member B450 and flowing down to the central flow path B431, in addition to the flow path passing through the left opening BLT or right opening BRT located on the rear side of the left wall portion B432 or the right wall portion B433, a flow path passing through the upper side of the left wall portion B432 or the right wall portion B433 when the slide member B450 is positioned in the retracted position can be configured.

The relationship between the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member B450 and the vertical positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 may be made different on the left and right. For example, the ball may be allowed to pass above the left wall portion B432 but restricted from passing above the right wall portion B433, or the ball may be allowed to pass above the right wall portion B433 but restricted from passing above the right wall portion B432.

In this case, the flow path of the ball guided by the slide member B450 can be made to differ significantly depending on whether the ball flows down the left side or the right side.

In the above 54th embodiment, the structure for picking up a ball is provided with a tip B451 of the slide member B450 and a plate-shaped portion B471 of the tilt member B470, and the tip B451 is disposed on the left and right outer sides and above the plate-shaped portion B471 when viewed from the front. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bifurcated structure of the slide member B450 may be eliminated, and the part corresponding to the tip B451 may be disposed directly above the plate-shaped portion B471.

In this case, by providing a fixed restricting plate that restricts the passage of balls at a position between the tip portion B451 and the plate-shaped portion B471 in the area between the base plate B60 and the glass unit B16, it is possible to avoid a winning situation in which a ball that has not been picked up by the tip portion B451 is picked up by the plate-shaped portion B471.

This allows the left-right dimension of the winning unit B400 to be reduced. Also, by having only one tip B451, it is possible to prevent balls from merging in the paths inside the winning unit B400, improving the design freedom of the winning unit B400 (simplifying the design).

In the above 54th embodiment, the ceiling surface B447 arranged above the slide member B450 is formed to extend horizontally, and the inclined surface portion B444a of the ceiling component B444 arranged above the central flow path B431 is inclined upward toward the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to the above case.

For example, the ceiling surface B447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member B450 may be configured as a surface that slopes downward toward the rear. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from flapping about as it flows down the upper surface of the slide member B450 due to the ball's flow area (area through which the ball can pass) becoming too large downstream of the flow path of the ball.

For example, the ceiling surface B447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member B450 may be configured as a surface that slopes upward toward the rear. In this case, a large ball flow area (area through which balls can pass) can be secured downstream of the flow path of the balls flowing down the upper surface of the slide member B450. Therefore, even if the balls on the upper surface of the slide member B450 are pushed backwards when the slide member B450 is displaced rearward and the density of balls at the rear position of the slide member B450 increases, the possibility of balls becoming clogged on the upper side of the slide member B450 can be reduced.

For example, the ceiling component B444 located above the central flow path B431 may be configured to slope downward toward the front side, or to extend horizontally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball's flow area (the area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the central flow path B431 from becoming too large, which would cause the ball to flutter while flowing down.

In the above 54th embodiment, the left and right widths of the ball passage opening B414 through which the ball picked up by the slide member B450 passes and the central opening B413 through which the ball picked up by the tilt member B470 passes are described as being slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right widths of the ball passage opening B414 and the central opening B413 may be designed to be slightly longer than several times (for example, twice) the diameter of the ball, and the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 of the slide member B450, the central flow path B431, and the tilt member B470 may also be designed to be similar left and right widths. In this case, the number of balls that can be picked up at one time by the slide member B450 and the tilt member B470 can be increased, thereby improving the efficiency of winning.

In the above 54th embodiment, the left and right widths of the sphere passing opening B414 and the central opening B413 are aligned, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the left and right widths of the sphere passing opening B414 may be designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the left and right widths of the central opening B413 may be designed to be slightly longer than multiple times the diameter of the sphere, and the left and right widths of the central flow passage B431 and the tilting member B470 may also be designed with the same concept as the left and right widths of the central opening B413.

In this case, the balls can flow side by side in the area downstream from the central flow path B431, so even if the balls pass through a pair of left and right ball passage openings B414 at the same time, it is easier to avoid the balls joining together in the central flow path B431 and increasing flow resistance.

In addition, for example, the left and right width of the ball passage opening B414 may be designed to be slightly longer than multiple times the diameter of the ball, and the left and right width of the central opening B413 may be designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, and the left and right widths of the tip portion B451, left guide plate portion B452 and right guide plate portion B453 of the slide member B450 may be designed with the same idea as the left and right width of the ball passage opening B414.

In this case, under the condition that the sliding member B450 and the tilting member B470 are linked, it is possible to improve the first ball entry efficiency (the efficiency with which the ball is picked up by the sliding member B450) at the most upstream side (entrance side) of the internal path of the winning unit B400, while reducing the second ball entry efficiency (the efficiency with which the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470) at the most downstream side (exit side) of the internal path of the winning unit B400 below the first ball entry efficiency.

This allows the player to see that the apparent ball entry efficiency (first ball entry efficiency) of balls entering the entrance of the winning unit B400 is high, while the probability that the ball is actually picked up by the tilting member B470 (second ball entry efficiency) is reduced. This can improve the player's impression of the ball entry efficiency of the winning unit B400, encouraging the player to continue playing.

In the above 54th embodiment, the case was described in which the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 of the slide member B450 is the same as the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion B453, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion B453 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452, or the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion B453.

In particular, in the latter case, the difference in the time it takes for the ball to flow down due to the difference in the front-to-back lengths of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 can be compensated for by the speed at which the ball flows down, so that when the left and right tip portions B451 receive balls simultaneously, it becomes easier to synchronize the timing at which the balls reach the central flow path B431.

In the former case, on the other hand, the difference in the time it takes for the ball to flow down due to the difference in the front-to-back lengths of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 is amplified by the speed at which the ball flows down, so that when the left and right tip portions B451 receive balls simultaneously, it is easier to differentiate the timing at which the balls reach the central flow path B431.

In the above 54th embodiment, the sliding member B450 rolls the ball not only at the tip B451 that receives the ball from the play area, but also in the flow path behind it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may come into contact with only the tip B451, and the ball that flows downstream of the tip B451 may roll on the upper surface of a fixed plate portion (a portion that does not displace) that covers the left guide plate portion B452, the right guide plate portion B453, etc. from above. In this case, the range in which the ball is accelerated or decelerated by the displacement of the sliding member B450 can be narrowed.

In this case, the configuration and operation mode of the tip portion B451 may be changed to an operation mode in which it tilts forward (an operation mode exemplified by the tilting member B470). That is, in the non-excited state, it may be configured to be in the open position described for the tilting member B470, and in the excited state, it may be configured to be in the closed position described for the tilting member B470.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the ball picked up by the tip B451 of the winning unit B400 rolls on the fixed bottom surface B431a on the path until it reaches the tilting member B470, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface B431a may be configured to move in conjunction with the operation of the sliding member B450. In this case, even if the internal flow path of the winning unit B400 is clogged with balls, the entire internal flow path will move, so the balls can be loosened and the ball clog can be resolved. Note that the operation of the bottom surface B431a may be in the opposite direction to the sliding member B450, or may be configured as one unit with the sliding member B450 and move in the same direction.

In the above 54th embodiment, the fixed bottom surface portion B431a is formed as an inclined surface that causes the ball to roll linearly, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface portion B431a may be curved to curve the flow direction of the ball so that the change in the flow speed of the ball becomes more pronounced, or the flow path may be configured to have a range in which the ball falls while flowing, causing the ball to bounce and causing the flow pattern to vary, or the flow path may be repeatedly bent so that the ball flows down in a meandering manner, thereby lengthening the time it takes for the ball to pass through.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the ball passage opening B414 in the winning unit B400 is simply an opening, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a detection sensor for detecting ball passage may be provided in the ball passage opening B414, so that a ball entering the ball passage opening B414 can be detected. In this case, when a ball entering the ball passage opening B414 is detected, the third pattern display device B81 or the like may notify the player, thereby making the player aware that a ball has passed through the ball passage opening B414, and thus improving the attention-grabbing power of the winning unit B400.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the ball picked up by the tip B451 of the winning unit B400 is always guided to the tilting member B470, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge opening may be formed in the internal flow path, and some of the balls may be discharged through the discharge opening, so that only some of the balls picked up by the tip B451 are guided to the tilting member B470. In this case, the sliding member B450 may also be configured to function as a member that opens and closes the discharge opening.

In the above 54th embodiment, the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 of the slide member B450 are formed in a plate shape with the same inclination in the front-to-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination may change midway, or the upper surface may be formed in a stepped shape. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the balls on the slide member B450, the magnitude of the load that the balls receive when the slide member B450 is displaced rearward can be changed (for example, when formed in a stepped shape, the load can be made different depending on whether the balls are arranged close to the steps and receive the load from the side of the steps, or whether the balls are arranged away from the steps and receive the load by sliding against the top surface of the steps).

For example, if the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the downstream side (rear side) relative to the horizontal plane is made smaller than the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the upstream side (front side) relative to the horizontal plane, the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the upstream side can be made greater than the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the downstream side. This makes it possible to narrow (reduce, make closer) the spacing between multiple balls arranged on the upstream and downstream sides of the slide member B450 by displacing the slide member B450.

In addition, for example, if the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the downstream side (rear side) with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger compared to the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the upstream side (front side) with respect to the horizontal plane, the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the upstream side can be made smaller than the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the downstream side. This makes it possible to widen (enlarge, make sparse) the spacing between multiple balls arranged on the upstream and downstream sides of the slide member B450 by displacing the slide member B450.

For example, the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 may be configured to change in inclination with respect to the horizontal plane multiple times along the flow path. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the balls, it is possible to generate both cases in which the distance between the balls decreases and cases in which the distance between the balls increases due to the displacement of the slide member B450.

Also, for example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 and the inclination angle of the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 452 may be made different. That is, the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 may be formed in a plate shape with the same inclination with respect to the horizontal plane in the front-to-rear direction, while the upper surface of the right guide plate portion B453 may be formed so that the inclination with respect to the horizontal plane changes midway. In this case, the manner in which the load received by the ball due to the displacement of the slide member B450 can be made different depending on whether the ball is placed on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion 452.

In the above 54th embodiment, the slide member B450 and the tilt member B470 are linked by the transmission member B480 interposed therebetween, and a case was described in which if a malfunction such as ball jamming occurs in either the slide member B450 or the tilt member B470, it also affects the operation of the other member, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a coil spring that can expand and contract in the front-rear direction is interposed at a position (position between) where the front side of the pivot tip of the second member B485 of the transmission member B480, which is arranged to face the slide member B450, faces the central fixed part B454 of the slide member B450. Normally, the slide member B450 is pressed against the second member B485 side by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the second member B485 and the slide member B450 are configured to work together, but when a ball is pinched between the front end of the slide member B450 and the front design member B420 (ball bite), the coil spring is configured to contract to cover the amount that the forward displacement of the slide member B450 is hindered, so that the second member B485 can be tilted forward even if the slide member B450 is not arranged in the forward position.

This makes it possible to prevent the operation of the first member B481 from being hindered by the second member B485, making it easier to prevent the operation of the tilting member B470 from being stopped midway due to ball bite occurring on the sliding member B450 side.

In this way, even when multiple transmission paths for the driving force are provided using the transmission member B480, by interposing a member such as a coil spring (which may be a cushioning material, etc.) in one transmission path, it is possible to prevent a malfunction that occurs in one transmission path from being transmitted to other transmission paths.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the locking protrusion B487 is pushed down on the lower plate B482b when the electric role B640a is switched from an excited state to a non-excited state, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the formation of the locking protrusion B487 may be omitted. When the electric device B640a is in an excited state, the lower plate B482b abuts against the eccentric protrusion B486 of the second member B485, while a gap is maintained between the upper plate B482a and the eccentric protrusion B486.

The load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the second member B485 is less than the static friction between the slide member B450, which abuts against the second member B485 at its outer end in the rotational radial direction, and the middle member B430, so that the second member B485 is prevented from being displaced in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight. In other words, even if the abutment between the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486 is released, the position of the second member B485 is maintained.

Therefore, when the electric role B640a is switched from an excited state to a non-excited state, the slide member B450 is maintained in the retracted position until the eccentric protrusion B486 is pressed down by the upper plate portion B482a, and only the tilt member B470 rises up. In other words, the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilt member B470. In this case, the timing at which the slide member B450 starts to operate and the timing at which the tilt member B470 starts to operate are not aligned.

That is, only the tilting member B470 moves from the start of the operation to the intermediate position, and from the intermediate position, the tilting member B470 and the slide member B450 move. In the process of the first member B481 descending, after the upper plate portion B482a and the eccentric protrusion B486 come into contact, the second member B485 rotates in the forward direction around the rotation shaft portion B485a with the eccentric protrusion B486 being pushed down by the upper plate portion B482a. The operation ends at approximately the same time for the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470.

In this case, even if a ball gets caught between the slide member B450 and the front design member B420 during the switching operation from the excited state to the de-excited state, and the displacement of the slide member B450 is inhibited, the rising action of the tilting member B470 starts prior to the displacement of the slide member B450, so that the rising action of the tilting member B470 can be prevented from being inhibited.

This, in conjunction with suppressing the displacement of the slide member B450, delays the rising action of the tilt member B470, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball is picked up by the tilt member B470 at an unexpected time.

Note that the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the second member B485 is below the static friction between the slide member B450, which abuts against the second member B485 at its outer end in the rotational radial direction, and the middle member B430, and a case has been given in which the second member B485 is prevented from displacing in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity of the second member B485 may be designed to be closer to the tilted tip, so that the second member B485 can be displaced in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight.

In the above 54th embodiment, the slide member B450 and the tilt member B470 are linked by the driving force of a single solenoid BSOL41, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device that drives the slide member B450 and the drive device that drives the tilt member B470 may be configured separately and configured to operate independently.

In this case, for example, an operation pattern may be added in which the tilting member B470 is displaced to the open position approximately three seconds after the sliding member B450 is placed in the retracted position (enough time has passed for the balls that have flowed into the inside of the winning unit B400 to pass through), and then the tilting member B470 is placed in the closed position when the sliding member B450 is placed in the advanced position. In this case, it is easier to prevent balls from being picked up by the tilting member B470.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the tip B451 is configured to make it difficult to pick up the ball even if the ball is pinched when the tilting member B470 is closed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the solenoid BSOL41 may be set to be driven so that the closing operation of the tilting member B470 does not occur at the timing when the ball may reach the tilting member B470. In this case, the closing of the tilting member B470 can be executed smoothly.

Also, at the timing when the ball may reach the tilting member B470, the solenoid BSOL41 may be set to be driven so that only the opening operation of the tilting member B470 occurs. In this case, the weight of the ball acts in a direction that opens the tilting member B470, which can assist in the opening of the tilting member B470, and the load is transmitted from the tilting member B470 to the slide member B450 via the first member B481 and the second member B485, allowing the slide member B450 to move smoothly toward the retracted position.

In the above 54th embodiment, the case was described where the flow path of the ball flowing down the winning unit B400 is switched by repeatedly executing the operation patterns BRP1 to BRP3 set from the waiting times Bt1a to Bt3a and the operation times Bt1b to Bt3b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the operation time may be set as the standard operation pattern, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set instead of the waiting time.

For example, if the operation time is set to 3.9 seconds as the standard operation pattern and the time it takes to change and display the second pattern is set to 0.1 seconds, the 0.1 seconds will be the time the de-energized state is maintained, resulting in an operation mode similar to that achieved by the first operation pattern.

For example, if the operation time is set to 0.2 seconds as the standard operation pattern and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to 1.8 seconds, the 1.8 seconds will be the time that the de-energized state is maintained, and as a result, an operation mode similar to that of the second operation pattern can be achieved.

For example, if the operation time is set to 2.0 seconds as the standard operation pattern and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to 2.0 seconds, the 2.0 seconds will be the time during which the de-energized state is maintained, and as a result, an operation mode similar to that of the third operation pattern can be achieved.

In the above 54th embodiment, a nail BKG1 is arranged between the winning unit B400 and the third winning port B64b, and depending on the state of the nail BKG1, the probability of a ball flowing downward from the internal flow path of the winning unit B400 entering the third winning port B64b is changed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the switching device B5770 described in the 58th embodiment may be disposed between the winning unit B400 and the third winning hole B64b, and depending on the timing of the ball's entry relative to the operation of the switching device B5770, it may be determined whether or not the ball will enter the third winning hole B64b. In this case, the ball can enter the third winning hole B64b regardless of the state of the nail BKG1.

Also, for example, a distribution device (e.g., a seesaw mechanism) may be provided between the winning unit B400 and the third winning port B64b, which introduces one ball in every two (or N) into the third winning port B64b. In this case, the distribution device can cause one ball in every two (or N) to enter the third winning port B64b regardless of the state of the nail BKG1, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the ball flowing down the upper side of the through gates B66, B67 is guided to the through gates B66, B67 by the nail BKG1, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a structure made of a resin material may be used to guide the ball to the through gates B66, B67 in place of the nail BKG1 or in combination with the nail BKG1. In this case, the structure made of a resin material is less susceptible to changes in state than the nail BKG1, so the guidance of the ball to the through gates B66, B67 can be stabilized.

Also, for example, by reducing the number of nails BKG1 or changing their positions, it is possible to configure the system so that not all balls flowing down above the through gates B66, B67 pass through the through gates B66, B67, but some balls flow down by deviating from the through gates B66, B67.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which a ball picked up by the tilting member B470 is detected, making it possible to win a lottery for special pattern 2, and a ball not picked up by the tilting member B470 enters the third winning hole B64b, making it possible to win a lottery for special pattern 1, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the allocation of the special symbols that can be used to win a lottery may be reversed (a ball picked up by the tilting member B470 is detected, so that a lottery for special symbol 1 can be won, and a ball not picked up by the tilting member B470 enters the third winning hole B64b, so that a lottery for special symbol 2 can be won). In this case, if the operation pattern of the electric device B640a after the big win ends is the second operation pattern in the case of big wins A and a, and the third operation pattern in the case of big wins B, C, b, and c, the same playability as that described in the 54th embodiment can be maintained. Furthermore, unlike the case described in the 54th embodiment, a small win game is likely to occur in a state in which a ball is likely to enter the third winning hole B64b, and since it is configured so that a ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole B65a, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a ball that has fallen from the third winning hole B64b is picked up by the specific winning hole B65a.

In addition, for example, under conditions where a ball picked up by the tilting member B470 is detected and a lottery for special pattern 2 can be won, the ball may also enter the third winning hole B64b and win the lottery for special pattern 2. In this case, the specific winning hole B65a may be disposed with dimensions and in a position that do not protrude outward in the left-right direction beyond the left-right outer ends of the winning unit B400.

When the electric device B640a is driven in the second operating pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip B451 and flowing down inside the winning unit B400 are discharged from the winning unit B400 and flow down to the third winning port B64b side. On the other hand, when the electric device B640a is driven in the third operating pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip B451 and flowing down inside the winning unit B400 are picked up by the tilting member B470 and do not flow out to the third winning port B64b side. And, the specific winning port B65a is arranged to receive the balls that spill out of the third winning port B64b among the balls that are discharged from the winning unit B400 and flow down to the third winning port B64b side, thereby providing a new gameplay.

In other words, regardless of whether the electric role B640a is driven in the second operating pattern or the third operating pattern, it is possible to win the lottery for special pattern 2. Therefore, the specific winning hole B65a may be frequently opened and closed as a small prize game.

Here, when the electric device B640a is driven in the second operating pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip B451 and flowing down inside the winning unit B400 flow down to the third winning port B64b, and some of these balls spill out of the third winning port B64b and enter the specific winning port B65a, allowing the player to receive a large number of prize balls.

On the other hand, when the electric device B640a is driven in the third operating pattern, most of the balls do not head toward the specific winning hole B65a (they are picked up by the tilting member B470), making it difficult for the balls to enter the specific winning hole B65a, and the player is unable to receive a large number of prize balls.

In this way, regardless of whether the electric role B640a is driven by the second or third operating pattern, the player can win the lottery for special pattern 2, so the specific winning opening B65a is frequently opened and closed, but the probability of a ball being guided to the specific winning opening B65a changes depending on the operating pattern of the electric role B640a, so that a game can be created in which a ball can enter the specific winning opening B65a when it is opened (when a small win game occurs) and a large number of winning balls can be obtained, and in other cases this is not the case.

In the above 54th embodiment, the profit that the player can obtain from the ball that flows into the winning unit B400 is set so that when the ball passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, no special symbol is drawn and only prize balls are paid out, whereas when the ball passes through the third winning port B64b, special symbol 1 is drawn and prize balls are also paid out. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the ball passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, special symbol 1 is drawn and prize balls are also paid out, whereas when the ball passes through the third winning port B64b, no special symbol is drawn and only prize balls are paid out.

In this case, in the first operating pattern, the ball rarely passes through opening B435a, and the frequency of drawing special pattern 1 increases in addition to the number of balls entering the first winning port B64 by passing through opening B435a.

In the second operating pattern, the balls are picked up by the tip B451 and pass through the front side of the tilting member B470 when the electric device B640a is in an excited state, making it easier for them to enter the third winning port B64b, so the frequency of drawing special symbols is not increased by balls that flow into the winning unit B400, and more prize balls are paid out. Even when the winning unit B400 is open so that balls can pass through the opening B435a, the rate at which balls pass through the opening B435a is set to 1 in 10, so when the opening B435a is open during the operating time Bt2b, almost no balls flow into the opening B435a. Therefore, in the second operating pattern, there is almost no increase in the frequency of drawing special symbol 1.

In the third operating pattern, a ball picked up by the tip B451 during the standby time Bt3a is likely to be picked up by the tilting member B470 during the operating time Bt3b, so the frequency of drawing special symbol 2 increases. Also, during the operating time Bt3b, a ball can pass through the front side of the tip B451 and through the opening B435a, so the frequency of drawing special symbol 1 also increases.

Also, the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435a may be used as an outlet (an opening through which balls are discharged from the play area without the payout of prize balls or the selection of patterns) and simply as a sensor for counting the passage of balls. In this case, the opening B435a can be used to measure the frequency with which balls pass through the opening B435a.

The functions of the second winning port B640 and the third winning port B64b may also be set in reverse. In this case, the operation pattern for the special high probability state may be set as the second operation pattern, and the operation pattern for the high probability state may be set as the third operation pattern, and a pachinko machine may be constructed in which a small win is generated by a lottery in which a ball enters the third winning port B64b, and a ball that deviates from the third winning port B64b may enter the specific winning port B65a.

As a result, if the state of the nail BKG1 placed directly above the third winning hole B64b is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning hole B64b, small wins are likely to occur, but few balls will miss the third winning hole B64b, so the number of winnings at the specific winning hole B65a can be prevented from becoming excessive. On the other hand, if the state of the nail BKG1 placed directly above the third winning hole B64b is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning hole B64b, small wins are unlikely to occur, but many balls will miss the third winning hole B64b, so once the specific winning hole B65a is opened, a large number of balls can enter the specific winning hole B65a. In other words, a pachinko machine can be constructed that balances whether it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning hole B64b (advantage/disadvantage) and whether it is easy for the ball to enter the specific winning hole B65a (disadvantage/advantage).

In the above 54th embodiment, the upper variable winning device B700 is described as being capable of storing up to four balls between the storage plate sections B715, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage plate sections B715 may be formed in a shape that allows only one ball to be placed between them. In this case, the balls that are stopped between the storage plate sections B715 are on the moving floor member B740, and balls that collide with them can be made to flow into the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. In this case, it is easy to know whether the balls are in a state where they can easily pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 by checking the presence or absence of balls between the storage plate sections B715, so the burden on the player can be reduced compared to the case where it is necessary to count the number of balls between the storage plate sections B715.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which multiple detection sensors B750 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the storage plate section B715 in the upper variable winning device B700, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of detection sensors B750 arranged may be one. Also, when one detection sensor is arranged, one may be left on the left or right side of the storage plate section B715 and the other may be excluded, or the detection sensor B750 may be arranged in a shifted position in front of or behind the storage plate section B715.

When the detection sensor B750 is placed on the front side of the storage plate B715, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the balls passing through the opening B751. On the other hand, when the detection sensor B750 is placed on the back side of the storage plate B715, it is possible to add an effect that the balls passing through the opening B751 are hidden by the balls stored in the storage plate B715, thereby improving the player's ability to focus on the opening B751.

In the above 54th embodiment, the relationship between the specified number in round play and the number of balls that can be stored between the storage plate section B715 in the upper variable winning device B700 is described as 10 to 4, but the relationship of the numbers can be determined arbitrarily and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case of 10 to 10, a pachinko machine can be configured in which balls pass through the opening B751 when a number of balls exceeding the specified number wins in the upper variable winning device B700 (11 or more wins, over-wins). In this case, the player can simultaneously be given the joy of an increase in the number of prize balls obtained in round play compared to when the specified number of balls remain in play, and the joy of being transferred to a more advantageous play state after the big win game ends.

In the above 54th embodiment, the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are linked together, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive device for driving the movable floor member B740 may be provided separately from the drive device for driving the movable top cover member B730.

In this case, in addition to the operation pattern described in the 54th embodiment above, a wide variety of operation patterns can be configured. For example, when the movable top cover member B730 is placed in the retracted position, the movable floor member B740 can also be placed in the retracted position. In this case, it is possible to prevent balls that pass through the front side of the movable top cover member B730 from being stored in the position between the storage plate portions B715, thereby reducing the possibility of the ball entering the opening B751.

Also, for example, when the movable top cover member B730 is placed in the retracted position, the movable floor member B740 may be moved back and forth (repeatedly) on its own. In this case, if the period during which the movable floor member B740 is maintained in the retracted position is longer than 0.2 seconds, the balls can be discharged from the position between the storage plate portions B715, whereas if the period during which the movable floor member B740 is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than 0.2 seconds, the balls can be retained in the position between the storage plate portions B715.

For example, when the movable top cover member B730 is placed in the forward position, the movable floor member B740 can also be placed in the forward position. In this case, even if the movable top cover member B730 is driven to repeatedly open and close during a round of play, the balls can be maintained in a state of being stored in the position between the storage plate portion B715. Furthermore, by creating a time lag of several seconds between when the movable top cover member B730 is placed in the forward position and when the movable floor member B740 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position, in the case where a large number of balls enter the game together just before the movable top cover member B730 is placed in the forward position, the balls can be prevented from being discharged from the position between the storage plate portion B715 until the balls reach the opening B751 side and can pass through the opening B751.

In the above 54th embodiment, the upper variable winning device B700 is described as being opened and closed during a big win game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper variable winning device B700 may be configured to be opened and closed during a small win game, and the detection sensor B750 may be configured as a detection sensor that enables a big win game to be executed by a ball passing through the opening B751.

Here, in the case where the total open time of the upper variable winning device B700 in a small win game is set to 1.8 seconds, the movable upper cover member B730 can be placed in the retracted position up to 15 times (0.12 x 15 = 1.8) in a state where the movable upper cover member B730 is repeatedly displaced back and forth according to the rule that once it is placed in the retracted position, it is placed in the forward position every 0.12 seconds.

When the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the forward position and the movable floor member B740 is driven so that balls positioned between the storage plate sections B715 are not discharged, balls that flow down the front side of the movable top cover member B730 when the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the backward position can be stored in the position between the storage plate sections B715, making it easier to insert the balls into the opening B751. When the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are linked, this corresponds to a drive mode in which the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, when the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the forward position and the movable floor member B740 is driven so that balls positioned between the storage plates B715 can be discharged, the balls that flow down the front side of the movable top cover member B730 when the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the backward position are discharged one after another from the positions between the storage plates B715, making it difficult to get the balls to enter the opening B751. When the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are linked, this corresponds to a drive mode in which the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more.

In a small win game, the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are opened and closed in a predetermined drive pattern. When the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are linked, it is preferable to have a large number of balls enter the upper variable winning device B700 during the period in which the movable top cover member B730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, but it is difficult to tell the difference between 0.1 seconds and 0.3 seconds, for example.

Therefore, as a drive pattern for small win games, a notification may be issued to encourage the player to shoot a ball towards the upper variable winning device B700 at a timing that is earlier than the period during which the movable upper cover member B730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, by the time it takes for the shot ball to reach the target. If the ball is shot in accordance with this notification, the ball can be stored in a position between the storage plate sections B715, making it easier for the ball to enter the opening B751. In this way, by notifying the player of the appropriate timing for shooting the ball, it is easier to avoid ball losses caused by shooting the ball at a timing other than that indicated by the notification.

As a drive pattern for a small winning game, two periods are provided during which the movable upper cover member B730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, during which a period during which the movable upper cover member B730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more is provided. In this case, if the ball does not enter the opening B751 during the first period during which the movable upper cover member B730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, a notification may be issued to encourage the player to shoot the ball toward the upper variable winning device B700 before the second period during which the movable upper cover member B730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds.

In this case, even if the ball cannot be launched due to a blockage in the ball launcher, if the period during which the movable upper cover member B730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more is set to a long period (for example, 15 seconds), the possibility of repairing the blockage in the ball launcher during that period can be increased.

The timing of the advance by the time it takes for the launched ball to reach the target can be changed depending on the placement of the upper variable winning device B700. If placed near the top end of the play area as in the 54th embodiment above, it will be 1 to 2 seconds, but if placed at the bottom right corner of the play area, for example, it will be longer, and depending on the length of the ball path upstream (the path formed by the nail BKG1 or the path formed by the flow path formed by the resin member), the range can be as long as 5 to 10 seconds.

In addition, although an example has been given of the case where the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are linked, in cases where the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are configured to drive independently, the above-mentioned notification may be given during a period in which the movable floor member B740 is repeatedly operated in a drive mode in which the period during which it is positioned in the retracted position is less than 0.2 seconds.

In this case, the operating mode of the movable floor member B740 does not correspond to the operating mode of the movable top cover member B730, so it is difficult to correlate the length of time that the movable top cover member B730 is positioned in the forward position with the operation of the movable floor member B740. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the above-mentioned notification.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the ball can be easily caused to enter the opening B751 while it is stored between a pair of storage plates B715, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state change means may be provided that changes the state between an induction state in which the ball is guided to the opening B751 and a non-induction state in which the ball is not guided, and the operation of the state change means may be performed by the kinetic energy of the ball discharged from the pair of storage plates B715. In this case, a gaming machine can be configured that makes it easy for the ball to enter the opening B751 after it has been discharged from between the pair of storage plates B715.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which a ball is used to prevent the ball from entering the pair of storage plates B715, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening/closing means may be provided that switches whether or not the ball is allowed to enter the area between the pair of storage plates B715. In this case, even before the area between the pair of storage plates B715 is filled with balls, the opening/closing means can be used to create a state in which the ball cannot enter between the pair of storage plates B715, and a situation can be created in which the ball passes through the opening B751.

In this case, various sizes of the opening and closing means can be exemplified, but by making the size of the opening and closing means smaller than the size of the ball when viewed from the front, the opening and closing means can be made less noticeable, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the ball will flow into the opening B751.

In addition, by making the size of the opening/closing means larger than the size of the ball when viewed from the front, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the state of the opening/closing means and to easily determine whether the ball will flow into opening B751.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that passes through the second specific winning opening B700a is guided to the area between a pair of storage plates B715 with a high probability, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail BKG1 may be arranged between the storage plate B715 and the second specific winning opening B700a in such a position that it can come into contact with the ball.

This makes it easier to induce an irregular winning event, where a ball that collides with the nail BKG1 passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 before the area between the pair of storage plate sections B715 becomes full. In particular, irregular winning events are more likely to occur when multiple balls pass through the second specific winning port B700a in succession, causing the balls to come into contact with each other and disrupt the flow of the balls.

On the other hand, the nail BKG1 is positioned so that it is not in contact with the balls stored in the pair of storage plate sections B715. This allows the balls stored in the pair of storage plate sections B715 to be discharged smoothly.

Note that it is not necessary for a nail to be arranged in such a way that it can come into contact with the ball. For example, a protrusion may be configured that protrudes forward from the base plate member B710, and the ball may collide with this protrusion. In this case, compared to the case of the nail BKG1, the design freedom of the shape of the protrusion can be improved. For example, by forming it into a protrusion shape that is long in the left-right direction and slopes downward as it approaches the opening B751, the possibility of the ball being guided into the opening B751 can be increased.

For example, a movable member may be disposed on the front side of the base plate member B710, and the ball that collides with the movable member may be given momentum by the movable member, so that the ball may be guided to the opening B751. The movement of the movable member may be a rotational movement, a sliding movement in a linear direction, or a combination of these movements.

In addition, for example, the second specific winning opening B700a may move back and forth in the left-right direction, or the detection sensor B750 and the storage plate portion B715 may move back and forth in the left-right direction, so that, depending on the timing, a ball that passes through the second specific winning opening B700a may flow to the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 rather than to the pair of storage plate portions B715.

In the above 54th embodiment, the case where the balls are stored directly below the second specific winning port B700a was described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a ball passage extending diagonally downward is formed downstream of the second specific winning port B700a, an opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage, a ball storage section extends downward at a midpoint of the ball passage, and a movable floor member B740 is disposed at the lower end of the ball storage section, when the ball storage section becomes full, a trailing ball rolls over the top ball in the ball storage section and flows downstream through the ball passage, and the ball passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750.

In addition, the opening direction of the second specific winning opening B700a may be in an oblique direction, and the member that opens and closes the second specific winning opening B700a does not have to be a sliding displacement member, but may be a rotating displacement member (for example, a tulip-type member that is one of a pair of opening and closing members).

The direction of the ball passage that extends diagonally downward downstream of the second specific winning port B700a is not limited in any way. For example, it may be diagonally downward when viewed from the front (diagonally downward as it moves to the left and right), or diagonally downward when viewed in the left-right direction (diagonally downward as it moves to the front and back).

In particular, when the angle is downward toward the rear, the opening B751 can be positioned closer to the player than the ball storage section. This makes the balls passing through the opening B751 more noticeable than the balls stored in the ball storage section, making it easier for the player to see the balls passing through the opening B751.

In the above 54th embodiment, the number of balls that need to be placed between the pair of storage plate parts B715 in order for the balls to be placed at the upper ends of the pair of storage plate parts B715 is constant, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical position of the upper surface of the movable floor member B740 may change in the vertical direction over time, or the movable floor member B740 may be a plurality of plate members on which the balls at the lower ends of the storage plate parts B715 are placed, arranged in a vertical direction, and operated to be opened in order from the top. By changing the vertical position of the ball placed at the bottom end of the plurality of balls placed between the pair of storage plate parts B715, the number of balls that need to be placed between the pair of storage plate parts B715 in order for the balls to be placed at the upper ends of the pair of storage plate parts B715 may be changed.

The storage plate portion B715 may be configured to be displaceable so that the left-right distance between the pair of storage plate portions B715 can be changed. In this case, if the left-right distance is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, four balls will be enough to fill the tank, but if the left-right distance is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the ball, eight balls will be enough to fill the tank, so the difficulty of passing balls through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 can be changed.

In addition, even if the storage plate portion B715 is configured to be full with four balls, the vertical length of the storage plate portion B715 can be halved when the horizontal spacing between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the ball, compared to when the horizontal spacing between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, thereby shortening the height dimension for storing balls. This improves the design freedom of the storage plate portion B715.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the balls placed in the position between the pair of storage plates B715 were configured to be always visible, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to reduce the visibility of the balls in the position between the storage plates B715 (for example, by configuring it to be concealed by a movable member, or by configuring it to be difficult to see by adjusting the amount of light). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the position between the pair of storage plates B715 will be filled with balls.

Although the number of balls stored in the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is described as four, this is not necessarily limited to this. It may be zero, one, three, or five or more. For example, by setting it to eight (a number close to the specified number), the possibility of a ball passing through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 in the third special operation pattern can be greatly reduced.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the balls are stored in a position between a pair of storage plate sections B715, and are discharged from the play area through the ball removal opening B782 when the movable floor member B740 is placed in the retracted position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls that flow down when the movable floor member B740 is placed in the retracted position may be discharged into a crane with multiple holes.

This Kruun has one of the multiple holes designated as a specific hole that has the same function as the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. Even if the movable floor member B740 is placed in the retracted position during a round of play without being able to confirm that the ball has passed through the opening B751, and the ball is released from a position between a pair of storage plate sections B715, the player may still be able to gain an advantage by having the ball enter the specific hole of the Kruun, thereby improving the player's ability to pay attention to the ball that is released from a position between the pair of storage plate sections B715.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which, instead of the ball stored in the position between the pair of storage plates B715, a ball following the stored ball can pass through the opening B751, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the middle part of the storage plate B715 can be configured to be openable and closable, and a detection sensor B750 is also arranged downstream of the opening and closing part, and by opening the middle part of the storage plate B715, any of the balls stored between the pair of storage plates B715 can be caused to flow and pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750.

In the above 54th embodiment, the driving device of the movable top cover member B730 and the driving device of the movable floor member B740 are both solenoids B763, and the operation of the movable top cover member B730 and the operation of the movable floor member B740 are linked, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device other than the solenoid B763 may be provided for driving the movable floor member B740, and they may be operated independently of each other. In this case, in addition to the operating mode described in the above 54th embodiment, it is possible to configure a case in which both the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are positioned in the forward position, or a case in which both the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are positioned in the backward position.

In the above 54th embodiment, the movable top cover member B730 is formed in a plate shape that slopes downward on both the left and right sides, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable top cover member B730 may be formed in a flat plate shape that slopes in one direction. Even in this case, the order of operations in which the movable floor member B740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable top cover member B730 begins to displace toward the retreated position functions appropriately, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball that flows along the front side of the movable top cover member B730 at the same time as the movable top cover member B730 is displaced to the retreated position passes the front side of the movable floor member B740 before the movable floor member B740 is positioned in the forward position.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the movable floor member B740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable top cover member B730 starts to displace toward the retreated position, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the movable top cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 may be displaced at the same time, or the operating order may be reversed.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the movable upper cover member B730 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable floor member B740 starts to displace toward the retreated position, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 may be displaced at the same time, or the operating order may be reversed.

In the above 54th embodiment, the front surface of the base plate member B710 arranged on the back side of the ball rolling on the top surface of the movable top cover member B730 arranged in the forward position is a smooth surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple deceleration protrusions protruding from the front surface of the base plate member B710 to the front side in a long protrusion shape in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the ball rolling on the top surface of the movable top cover member B730 (for example, the up-down direction) may be arranged along the flow direction of the ball. Alternatively, or in addition, the top surface of the movable top cover member B730 may be formed in a stepped shape to slow down the flow speed of the ball.

This allows the speed at which the balls roll down the top surface of the movable top cover member B730 can be reduced, so that a single opening of the movable top cover member B730 (displacing it from the forward position to the retracted position) can increase the number of balls passing through the front side of the movable top cover member B730. Therefore, even if the movable top cover member B730 is configured to allow balls to slip out between the pair of storage plate portions B715 when the movable top cover member B730 is closed (positioned in the forward position), the balls can be more easily stored between the pair of storage plate portions B715, and the likelihood of the balls passing through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 can be increased.

In the above 54th embodiment, a pair of storage plate sections B715, a movable floor member B740, and a detection sensor B750 are arranged downstream of the movable upper cover member B730, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the configuration of the movable upper cover member B730 may be omitted, and the balls may always be allowed to flow down to the pair of storage plate sections B715, the movable floor member B740, and the detection sensor B750.

In the above 54th embodiment, in the first round of a big win game, the movable top cover member B730 is operated to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning port B700a, and in the second and subsequent rounds of round play, the specific winning port B65a is opened to allow the ball to enter the specific winning port B65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. It can be arbitrarily set which specific winning port B65a, B700a is controlled to allow the ball to enter in which round of play.

For example, the movable top cover member B730 may be operated in round play from the second round onwards, and controlled to allow balls to enter the second specific winning port B700a. In this case, it can be configured so that balls enter the specific winning port B65a only in small win games (corresponding to the case where the movable top cover member B730 is operated in all round play and controlled to allow balls to enter the second specific winning port B700a), so it is possible to avoid the setting of the number of prize balls paid out for balls entering the specific winning port B65a affecting the number of prize balls in big win games.

Therefore, for example, by setting the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the specific winning port B65a to be greater than the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the second specific winning port B700a, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that limits the number of prize balls awarded for a big win game while increasing the number of prize balls awarded for a small win game.

In addition, for example, by setting the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the specific winning port B65a to be less than the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the second specific winning port B700a, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that limits the number of prize balls awarded for small win games (for example, to a level that maintains the same number of prize balls as the number of fired balls) while increasing the number of prize balls awarded for big win games.

In addition, when the movable top cover member B730 is operated in multiple rounds of play and controlled to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning port B700a, in the event that the game state after a big win game changes depending on whether the game ball passes through the opening B751, if the game ball passes through the opening B751 in at least one round of play controlled to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning port B700a, the game ball is deemed to have passed through the opening B751.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the drawing of special pattern 1 does not result in a small win, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 can be determined to be a small win, or it may be configured so that special pattern 1 can be determined to be a small win, but special pattern 2 cannot be determined to be a small win.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation pattern of the electric role B640a during normal operation is the first operation pattern, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation pattern of the electric role B640a during normal operation may be configured to be the third operation pattern.

In this case, it is possible for the ball to enter the second winning slot B640 during normal play (low probability state for special symbols), but the time for which special symbol 2 fluctuates during the low probability state for special symbols is set to a long period (10 minutes in this embodiment) except in the case of a jackpot, so it is rare for a jackpot to be won by drawing special symbol 2, and so a gameplay that basically aims for a jackpot by drawing special symbol 1 by the ball entering the first winning slot B64 can be created.

In this case, for example, if the game state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is executed is set to a high probability state until the next jackpot is won, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role B640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until 100 special symbol lotteries are completed, the electric role B640a will be operated in the third operation pattern after the 101st special symbol lottery, which is the same as the game state after the jackpot game of jackpot A is executed. In other words, it is possible to configure a case in which the game transitions to a special probability state after the end of the jackpot game and after a specified number of special symbol lotteries (100 in the above 54th embodiment).

In the case of a big win C, the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device B640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until 100 special symbol drawings are completed, and after the 101st special symbol drawing, the electric device B640a is controlled to operate in the third operation pattern, but since the special symbol is in a low probability state, it simply transitions to the normal state.

In the above 54th embodiment, the case where the allocation of the jackpot type is different between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the allocation of the jackpot type may be set to be the same for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. In this case, since there is no difference regardless of which special symbol is used to win the jackpot, the lottery for the jackpot of special symbol 1 and the lottery for the jackpot of special symbol 2 can be regarded as the same. In this case, for example, by excluding the case where the lottery for special symbol 2 is executed with a long-term fluctuation (for example, a 10-minute fluctuation) and setting the fluctuation time to the same as the fluctuation time selected in the lottery for special symbol 1, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is 8 (the total of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, which is 4, and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, which is 4).

In addition, for example, the ratio between the jackpot type in which the game state after the end of the jackpot play is a high probability state and the jackpot type in which the game state after the end of the jackpot play is a low probability state (1:1 in the above 54th embodiment) among the jackpots of special pattern 1 may be configured to be different from the ratio between the jackpot type in which the game state after the end of the jackpot play is a high probability state and the jackpot type in which the game state after the end of the jackpot play is a low probability state (1:1 in the above 54th embodiment) among the jackpots of special pattern 2.

In this case, by configuring the jackpot type with special pattern 2 to have a higher proportion of high probability game states after the jackpot game ends compared to the jackpot with special pattern 1, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that can transition to a state where jackpots with special pattern 2 are likely to occur consecutively.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the directional control unit display B816 can be displayed at the same time as the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect are displayed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, an adjustment period in which the directional control unit display B816 can be displayed and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted may be provided. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 indicates the end of the adjustment period and also indicates the start of the variable effect after the end of the jackpot game, so as long as the player keeps an eye on the time display B811, the player can smoothly perform actions at the appropriate timing from adjusting the volume and light intensity during the adjustment period to launching the ball after the start of the variable effect.

The duration of the ending performance is determined by the type of jackpot, but the internal structure of the ending performance can be changed even if the type of jackpot is the same. When an adjustment period is set, the period during which the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance are executed is narrower than when an adjustment period is not set, but by shortening the duration of any of the performances or executing multiple performances simultaneously, the ending performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Whether or not to provide an adjustment period can be set at will, but for example, if the presentation executed during a jackpot game is one that is particularly likely to produce strong light (highest light) or loudest sound (highest volume) among multiple variations, an adjustment period may be provided for the ending presentation. This can reduce the burden on the player.

Regardless of whether an adjustment period is provided, the length of the ending display effect, company name display effect, and card forgetting prevention display effect can be changed. For example, during a series of jackpots, the length of the company name display effect and card forgetting prevention display effect, which do not increase the amount of information even if viewed multiple times in a short period of time, can be shortened or displayed simultaneously, thereby lengthening the ending display effect accordingly. The ending display effect displays information that is highly important to the player, such as the number of prize balls actually won (this can be only for the jackpot game currently being played, or the accumulated number during the jackpot game) and the game status after the jackpot game ends, so by lengthening the display period, the possibility that the player will miss that information can be reduced.

For example, if the game state after the end of a jackpot game is a low probability state, there is a high possibility that the winning streak will come to an end, and therefore the player is likely to finish playing and leave the seat. Therefore, by lengthening the length of the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will forget to take their cards home.

For example, when the game state after a jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a special probability change state, this is the timing when the player's expectations for the balls to be dispensed are at their highest, so by making the company name display visible at this timing, it is possible to improve the impression of the pachinko machine and the manufacturer that is currently being played on. Also, since the player's expectations will increase further if consecutive jackpots are hit, the impression can be made even better by setting the company name display effect to be longer the longer the consecutive jackpots are.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which volume and light intensity adjustments are possible in the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether volume and light intensity adjustments have been performed in the ending performance, and the result of this determination may affect the decision on the variable performance after the ending performance has ended.

For example, if a special effect (such as a one-shot announcement effect) that tends to have a higher light intensity or sound volume than the normal notification of the main symbol stopping is prepared as a variable effect, and an adjustment to reduce the light intensity has been made during the immediately preceding ending effect, executing the special effect may cause further fatigue to the player, whose eyes are likely already tired from the light, and may cause the player to stop playing midway. Therefore, by controlling the game so that the special effect is not executed when an adjustment to reduce the light intensity has been made during the immediately preceding ending effect, the player can continue playing while waiting for their fatigue to recover.

In addition, if during a jackpot game, the player performs an operation to change the music that will be played in the game state after the jackpot game ends, the player will likely want to hear that music, so a period of time may be set aside to display the directional operation unit display B816 during the ending performance of the currently active jackpot game.

In the above 54th embodiment, the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 at the end of the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the normal symbol variation display is still ongoing at the end of the ending performance and there is a time difference between the end of the ending performance and the start of the next variation of the normal symbol, the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 may be shifted (delayed) from the end of the ending performance by the amount of the time difference. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which a ball enters the winning unit B400 in a state in which the electric role B640a is operating in the operation pattern (operation pattern in the normal state, first operation pattern) that is continuing from the jackpot game, even though the ball is shot after the ending performance.

In other words, the ball shot after the ending performance can be made to enter the winning unit B400 in a state where the electric device B640a is operating in the operation pattern (the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern) after the transition from the end of the jackpot game.

Even in this case, once the ending performance has ended, if there are any reserved balls with special symbols, the special symbols will start to change after the ending performance has ended. On the other hand, since it is desired to continue displaying the time display B811, for example, it is possible to configure the display to continue for the ending performance in the main display area BDm, display the change in the special symbols in the small area BDs3 of the sub-display area BDs, and as soon as the timing for the next change in the normal symbols to start arrives, to move while expanding the display in the small area BDs3 to the main display area BDm3.

Because the special symbols will be moved on the screen, it is preferable to move them before they enter slow-changing mode (reach, etc.). Therefore, the display mode described above (movement of the special symbols) may be performed only when a specific condition is met, that is, the time difference between the end of the ending performance and the start of the next normal symbol change is shorter than the time it takes for the special symbols to transition to slow-changing mode.

However, the decision on the variation effect is made at the start of the variation, which is after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, whether or not the above-mentioned display mode can be performed is unknown during the ending effect, so if the voice lamp control device B113 determines that the above-mentioned specific conditions are met after the ending effect ends, the terminal position B812 may be moved to the right or a number such as "+2 seconds" may be displayed to notify the player that the ball launch timing has been delayed. In this case, the player is expected to start firing the ball when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, but if the player is notified immediately thereafter that the ball launch timing has been delayed, the player can stop firing the ball. This can minimize ball losses.

In the above 54th embodiment, the specific display B810, the frame button display B813, etc. are displayed on a portion of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen (full screen display), or they may be displayed on different portions of the display screen.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the time display B811 was displayed from the beginning of the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displayed midway through the ending performance, or may be displayed by operating the frame button B22. Also, each time the frame button B22 is operated, the time display B811 may be displayed or the display of the time display B811 may be erased.

In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, a case was described in which the time display B811 was displayed as a bar, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, any number may be displayed on the display screen, and the number may be counted down to a target value (e.g., 0 (zero)), or counted up to a target value (e.g., 600). In this case, it is possible for the player to easily gauge the timing at which the display will reach the target value (corresponding to the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812).

In addition, this display is not limited to being displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81. For example, a second display device or a seven-segment display device separate from the third pattern display device B81 may be prepared, and a countdown or countup display may be performed on the second display device or the seven-segment display.

The time display B811 may be represented both as a bar and as a countdown (count up). For example, in addition to displaying the time display B811 as a bar, a number (e.g., 3) may be displayed on the display screen a few seconds (e.g., 3 seconds) before the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, and the number may be counted down. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine when the display will reach 0 (zero) (corresponding to the timing when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812).

In the above 54th embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the display screen, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to configure a state in which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid even when the frame button display B813 is not displayed.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which operation of the frame button B22 is valid when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the display screen, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light emitting means may be provided inside the frame button B22, and the light emitting means may be controlled to emit light at a timing when the frame button B22 can be operated. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the position of the operation target (frame button B22).

In the above 54th embodiment, in the ending performance, the company name display performance is executed when the game state entered after the end of the jackpot game is the most advantageous state for the player, and the card forgetting prevention display performance is executed when the number of payouts in the jackpot game is equal to or more than the number of balls for 8 rounds (a predetermined number or more). However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the conditions for executing the company name display performance and the conditions for executing the card forgetting prevention display performance may be interchanged.

In addition, at least one of the company name display effect and the card forget prevention display effect may be set to always be executed every time a jackpot is played, regardless of the type of jackpot, or may be set to be executed at a specified number of jackpots (for example, an odd-numbered jackpot during a winning streak, or a jackpot that is a multiple of three, etc.).

The content of the ending performance is not limited to the company name display performance or the card forgetting prevention display performance, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it is possible to display a string of text to calm the player, such as "Pachinko is a game. Be careful not to get addicted to it," to display a video explaining the store attendant call button to inexperienced players, or to display an action explaining the button operation to return the movable role object to the standby position. While any of these displays are being executed, it is possible to display the frame button display B813 to encourage the operation of the frame button B22, or to display the time display B811 to notify the timing of the transition to the next performance.

In the above 54th embodiment, the most advantageous state for the player is the special high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the state after the end of a big win game is either the high probability state or the time-saving state (normal state) (if there is no transition to the special high probability state), the most advantageous state for the player is the high probability state.

In addition, if the state after the end of a jackpot game is only the time-saving state and there is a difference in the number of lotteries that will continue the time-saving state, the state that will continue the time-saving state for the greatest number of lotteries will be considered the most advantageous state for the player.

In addition, if the state after the end of a jackpot game is only the high probability state, and one jackpot type continues in the high probability state until the next jackpot, while the other jackpot type transitions to a special high probability state after a specified number of draws (such as when the operation pattern of the electric role B640a in the normal state is set to the third operation pattern), the other jackpot type has an advantage in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a small jackpot game in the special high probability state, so the state after the end of the jackpot of the other jackpot type is considered to be the most enjoyable state for the player.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the ending display effect is always executed in the ending effect, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be configured in which the ending display effect is not executed. In particular, in the case of a jackpot type in which the number of prize balls paid out is extremely small compared to other jackpot types (for example, a sudden special jackpot, a sudden normal jackpot, etc.), omitting the ending display effect can prevent the player from being aware of the extremely small number of prize balls paid out, and can also start the pattern change sooner after the jackpot game ends.

In particular, when creating a presentation that allows the player to play without making the boundary between the special probability variable state and the jackpot game less noticeable (for example, a presentation that displays the total number of winning balls in the small win game and the jackpot game), the ending display presentation can be omitted during the consecutive wins and executed at the end of the consecutive wins, so that the special probability variable state and the jackpot game can be viewed as one advantageous state for the player.

The above content is not limited to the ending display effects. For example, company name display effects and card forgetting prevention display effects may be displayed in the ending display of the first big win that starts a consecutive win, but may not be displayed during the consecutive win, regardless of the type of big win.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the prize ball display B801 and the identification display B802 are displayed on the screen at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the prize ball display B801 may be displayed on the screen, and then the identification display B802 may be displayed after the display is switched. In this case, the player can be made to understand separately the profits acquired in the jackpot game and the profits that can be acquired after the transition from the jackpot game, thereby reducing the burden on the player when playing.

In the 54th embodiment, the duration of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are all set to the same length (5 seconds), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the duration of each effect can be set arbitrarily for each type of jackpot. For example, the execution period of the card forgetting prevention display effect may be set longer than the other effects (e.g., 10 seconds, etc.), or the card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be executed repeatedly.

When repeated execution is performed, it may be repeated continuously or with other effects in between. For example, it may be configured to display the ending display effect (for the second time) after the card forgetting prevention display effect has ended. In this case, the first ending display effect may display the prize ball display B801 but not the identification display B802 or the reliability display B803, and the second ending display effect may display the identification display B802 and the reliability display B803 but not the prize ball display.

This allows the timing of notifying the player of the profit (number of winning balls) that the player achieved in the jackpot game to be separated from the timing of notifying the player of the game status after the jackpot game ends, thereby reducing the burden on the player. Also, by displaying content that is of high interest to the player (identification display B802 in the above example) towards the end of the ending performance, the player's attention to the ending performance can be maintained at a high level.

In addition, if content that is of great interest to the player (in the above example, the identification display B802) can be displayed at a specific timing in the ending presentation, the frame button B22 may be operated before the timing to switch to that display. In other words, by displaying the frame button B813, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the third pattern display device B81, and by operating the frame button B22, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he or she is participating in the game, and by displaying the identification display B802 immediately after operating the frame button B22, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player misses the identification display B802.

The length of the ending performance is not limited to a few seconds, but can be set arbitrarily (for example, depending on the type of big win). In other words, in addition to ending performances that end in a few seconds, ending performances that take several minutes may be prepared.

In the above 54th embodiment, the duration of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are all set to the same length (5 seconds), and the execution period of the ending effect changes depending on the combination of effects executed. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the execution period of the ending effect is fixed and the company name display effect is set to be short, the card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be longer instead.

In this case, a player who understands that the company name display effect has ended in a short period of time can know at that point that the card forgetting prevention display effect will be longer, and can therefore understand that the time available to change the volume and light settings will be longer, thereby increasing the player's motivation to operate frame button B22.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the company name display performance is executed after the ending display performance, and the card forgetting prevention display performance is executed after the company name display performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display order of the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance can be set arbitrarily, and the card forgetting prevention display performance may be executed before the company name display performance.

It may also be configured so that any two of the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance are executed simultaneously (executed in parallel). In this case, to avoid overlapping displays, it is advisable to separate the display positions on the third pattern display device B81. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the ending performance by the amount that the performances are executed simultaneously, compared to when the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance are executed in sequence (executed in series).

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed when the company name display effect is executed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be prepared in which the ending display effect and the company name display effect are executed, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is omitted.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the frame button display B813 and the directional operation section display B816 are displayed after the ending display performance, and the settings can be changed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ending display performance may be executed after a period during which the frame button display B813 and the directional operation section display B816 are displayed and the settings can be changed has elapsed.

In this case, the period during which the frame button display B813 and the direction operation section display B816 are displayed may start after the ending performance has begun (after the final round of play has ended), or may start during the final round of play in the jackpot game. In either case, the transition from the ending display performance to the variable performance can be made smooth.

The timing when the directional operation unit display B816 is displayed and the directional operation unit B45 becomes operable is not limited to after the frame button B22 is operated. For example, there may be cases where the frame button display B813 is not displayed, and the directional operation unit display B816 is displayed and the directional operation unit B45 becomes operable without operating the frame button B22.

In the above 54th embodiment, the directional control display B816 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the specific display B810 is moved to the edge of the display screen and visible even while the volume or light intensity is being adjusted, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is continued. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the card forgetting prevention display effect disappears when the volume or light intensity is adjusted, based on the determination that a player who is about to leave his/her seat is unlikely to adjust the volume or light intensity again.

In the above 54th embodiment, it was explained that operating the frame button B22 while the frame button display B813 is displayed transitions to the adjustment screen, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may transition to the adjustment screen while the frame button B22 is pressed, and return to the screen before operation when the frame button B22 is released. This makes it possible for the player to understand that using both hands is optimal for changing the settings of the volume and light intensity, and allows the player to take their hands off the handle B51, thereby suppressing the launch of balls during the ending performance.

In addition, before the player operates the frame button B22, the message "Light intensity and volume settings can be changed by pressing the frame button" may be displayed. This allows the player to immediately understand that two-handed operation is required. By requiring two-handed operation during the ending performance, balls can be prevented from being released at a timing when the player would be less profitable if they were to be released. In other words, the notification may be given in a manner that allows multiple operating means to be operated simultaneously at a timing when the player would be more profitable if they refrained from releasing game balls.

In addition, for example, each time the frame button B22 is operated, it may be possible to switch between a state (display mode) in which the volume setting can be changed and a state (display mode) in which the light intensity setting can be changed.

For example, during the ending performance, the screen may be controlled to transition to an adjustment screen while the frame button B22 is pressed, and to return to the screen before operation when the frame button B22 is released, but once the ending performance ends and transitions to the variable performance display screen, adjustments of the volume and light intensity may be performed even if the frame button B22 is not pressed. This prevents the player from being forced to use both hands even after the ending performance has ended, and allows the player to change the volume and light intensity settings while operating the handle B51.

In the above 54th embodiment, the specific display B810 moves to the edge of the screen when the frame button B22 is operated according to the frame button display B813 during the execution of the card forget prevention display performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the player operates the frame button B22 according to the frame button display B813 during the execution of the company name display performance, the name of the manufacturer (Company A) as the specific display B810 may be moved to the upper left corner (edge) of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and then a card forget prevention display may be displayed on the specific display B810. During the execution of the company name display performance, the direction operation unit display B816 may be displayed in the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81 to inform the player that the volume and light intensity settings can be changed.

In addition, even if the specific display B810 is displayed at the edge of the display screen, if the volume or light setting is not changed within a specified time (e.g., within 2 seconds), the specific display B810 may be set to return to the center of the screen (the position before it was moved).

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the settings of the volume and light intensity can be changed during the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when variations (first mode, second mode) are provided in the pattern of the special symbol variation performance during the special probability change to which the ending performance transitions, the probability change, or the time reduction, it may be possible to change the setting to select which one of them. Here, the combination of the first mode and the second mode can be set arbitrarily, and examples include a combination of a black and white display mode and a color display mode, a combination of a cartoon-like display mode and an anime-like display mode, and a combination of a display mode that requires repeated tapping of the frame button B22 and a display mode that requires a long press of the frame button B22.

For example, if the setting of the music (theme song, etc.) played during a jackpot performance or during a variable performance can be changed, it may be possible to change the music setting during the ending performance. Instead of during the ending performance, it may be during a fanfare performance, during a round of play, during the interval between rounds, or during a period spanning all of these.

In the above 54th embodiment, it was explained that during the ending performance, the end timing of the ending performance is notified by the time display B811 and the end position B812, and the displayed performance changes in response to the operation of the frame button B22, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, notification of the end timing or start timing of the performance, or a change in the displayed performance in response to the operation of the frame button B22 may be performed while the patterns are changing or during a reach, or may be performed during a performance during a jackpot game other than the ending performance.

For example, when this is done during the changing of the patterns or during a reach, the timing at which the end of the presentation is notified may be when the changing of the special patterns stops, or when the pseudo-continuous change as a presentation starts. In the former case, the number of reserved balls for the special pattern is reduced by one, making it possible to win a lottery for a new special pattern, so this is an appropriate timing to encourage the player to fire the ball. In the latter case, if the change in the special pattern itself takes several minutes, the player's concentration can be maintained by dividing it into short intervals along the way.

When the frame button B22 is operated in conjunction with the frame button display B813 at the end of a reach, if it is a jackpot, the display screen will switch to a jackpot display screen, and if it is a miss, the display screen will switch to a miss display screen, making it easier for a player looking at the frame button display B813 to understand the results of the special pattern changes.

For example, it may be performed during a performance during a jackpot game, excluding the ending performance. The operation of the frame button display B813 and the frame button B22 during a round can be used, for example, for promotion performance (for example, a performance in which a fanfare performance indicates that a 4-round jackpot is actually a 15-round jackpot, or a performance in which a fanfare performance indicates that a jackpot is being won that will give the player a higher profit than the profit expected to be obtained by the player).

In particular, in the case of the 54th embodiment described above, where the game state after the end of a jackpot game changes depending on whether or not the ball passes through the opening B751 during a round of play, by displaying the frame button display B813 during that round of play and encouraging the player to operate the frame button B22, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the opening B751, causing the player to fail to check whether or not the ball has passed through the opening B751.

When the pachinko machine B10 is equipped with a movable part that juts out in front of the display screen, if the frame button B22 is operated in accordance with the frame button display B813 during a round and the movable part is controlled to jut out in front of the display screen when a promotion performance is executed, the player can easily tell from the movement of the movable part that the promotion performance has been successful. Even if the frame button B22 is operated in accordance with the frame button display B813 during a round, when a promotion performance is not executed (when the notification in the fanfare performance and the actual notification are the same), the movable part is controlled not to jut out in front of the display screen, making it easy for the player to know that the promotion performance has failed.

For example, notification of the end of the effect or changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of frame button B22 may be performed during the game instruction display effect (demo screen) that is executed when the first symbol is not drawn for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the notification can let the player know that the game instruction display effect has been completed.

In addition, for example, notification of the end timing of the effect or a change in the effect displayed in response to the operation of frame button B22 may be performed when the ball has not yet passed through the specified detection port within a specified time in an effect related to a game in which the ball must pass through a specified detection port within a specified time. In this case, the notification can make the player aware that the ball has not passed through the detection port.

Also, for example, notification of the end of the effect or changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button B22 may be performed during the fanfare effect in a big win game or during the interval between rounds. In this case, the specific winning hole B65a or the second specific winning hole B700a will be opened at the end of the effect, so the player can easily know the appropriate timing to shoot the ball.

In addition, for example, notification of the end of the effect and changes in the effect displayed in response to operation of the frame button B22 may be performed during a period that includes multiple rounds of play and multiple intervals between rounds in a jackpot game. This makes it possible to create an effect that lasts longer than the time set for a single round of play or the interval between rounds, and by making it possible to notify the player of the end of the long-lasting effect and change the effect displayed in response to operation of the frame button B22, the player can be kept focused on the game without getting bored.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the card forgetting prevention display effect was executed in the ending effect, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the number of reserved balls for the first pattern becomes 0. In this case, the card forgetting prevention display effect can be made visible to the player even before winning the jackpot.

It may also be executed when the first symbol starts to change for a long period of time (for example, 60 seconds or more). In this case, a player who is thinking of buying a drink or the like during his free time can be notified that the first symbol will start to change for a long period of time, and can be reminded not to forget his card when leaving his seat.

In the above 54th embodiment, the period during which the directional operation unit display B816 is displayed and the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable is described as being until the end of the ending performance, or during the first fluctuation after the ending performance is completed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set during the high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol while the first symbol is fluctuating, or during the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. In this case, the player can grasp the timing of the transition from the high-speed fluctuation display to the medium-speed fluctuation display, or the timing of the transition from the medium-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (during the reach display, etc.) from the timing at which the period during which the directional operation unit display B816 is displayed and the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable ends.

It may also be possible to configure a period during which the directional control display B816 is displayed and the light intensity and volume are adjustable while the special pattern is changing (including during the slow-changing display). In this case, the directional control display B816 may be displayed in the small area BDs3, or the display may be switched between the small area BDs3 and the main display area BDm.

In this case, while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state, a notification is made suggesting that an adjustable period is available, and then a notification of that period is made, the frame button display B813 etc. is displayed, the directional control display B816 can be displayed, and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted. In this case, the player's interest can be shifted in stages, even while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the player does not realize that an adjustable period is available.

In addition to this, the adjustment of the volume and light intensity may be controlled so that it remains effective from the next change onwards, and if the special symbol that changed when the volume and light intensity adjustment was made becomes a jackpot, the player may be controlled so that the jackpot game can be played while maintaining the volume and light intensity adjustment.

In addition, for example, the period during which the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable may be configured to continue until multiple fluctuations are completed, rather than being limited to the first fluctuation, or the period during which the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable may be configured to continue until the fluctuation of the first pattern reaches a predetermined state (for example, a long-term fluctuation, a fluctuation that results in a jackpot, etc.).

In addition, in the latter half of the variable performance resulting from a jackpot, or in a fanfare performance, a period may be provided during which the directional control display B816 is displayed and the light intensity and volume can be adjusted. In this case, the volume can be set during the jackpot, and the player can know the start timing of the jackpot game from the end timing of the period.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case has been described in which the terminal position B812 is fixed and the time display B811 moves over time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movement speed of the time display B811 may be a constant speed, or the movement speed of the time display B811 may be configured to be changeable midway. Also, for example, the right end of the time display B811 may be configured to move in the opposite direction (left side) in some cases.

In addition, for example, the terminal position B812 may be configured to be movable. In other words, by moving the terminal position B812 while the time display B811 is moving, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the time it will take for the time display B811 to reach the terminal position B812.

The movement of the terminal position B812 may be configured to wait for the time display B811 to reach and then move immediately after the time display B811 has reached the terminal position, or may be configured to move before the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812.

In addition, the direction of movement of the terminal position B812 as the destination of the time display B811 is not limited to the left-right direction. For example, it may move in the up-down direction or in a spiral motion. This makes it difficult to predict the time it will take for the time display B811 to reach the terminal position B812.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the direction operation unit 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen and the specific display B810 moves to a corner of the display screen by operating the frame button B22 in the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific display B810 may be positioned in the corner of the display screen before the frame button B22 is operated. Also, for example, the movable prop may be extended to near the center of the display screen by operating the frame button B22, and the display position of the specific display B810 may change to a position where it is not hidden by the movable prop.

In addition, for example, the specific display B810 may be set to disappear by operating the frame button B22 during the ending performance, or the time display B811 and the end position B812 may be displayed only when the frame button B22 is operated during the ending performance, or a combination of these may be used.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the display state of the horizontal scale display B818 on the display screen changes when the volume is changed during the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to this, or instead of this, a predetermined line may be output when the volume is changed.

For example, if the message "Please be careful not to forget to take your card" is output, the player can be reminded to be careful not to forget their card every time they change the volume.

The content, volume or voice (tone of voice) of the dialogue may also be changed in response to the changed volume. In particular, when the content of the dialogue (e.g., "Don't forget to take your card" or "Make sure you take your card home with you") or the tone of voice changes (e.g., the tone of voice of a different character), this makes it easy for the player to set the volume to their liking.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which the comment displayed in the warning comment display B815 or the second warning comment display B819 in the ending performance matches the target that the player can change the settings for, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a comment that does not match the target that the player can change the settings for may be displayed.

In this case, if one of the pending starting winnings will result in a jackpot, the warning comment display B815 or the second warning comment display B819 will display an expectation message such as "Jackpot?!" or "Big chance occurring" (a comment display that gives the player hope that a jackpot may be attained), allowing the player to look forward to winning the next jackpot during the ending performance, thereby improving the player's ability to focus on the ending performance and increasing the player's motivation to operate the frame button B22.

When an expectation display is displayed on the warning comment display B815 or the second warning comment display B819 and a jackpot is already expected, it is normal to refrain from firing the ball until the jackpot game starts in order to avoid wasting the ball. Therefore, even if the time display B811 is made to reach the terminal position B812 in time with the end of the ending performance, it is highly likely that it will not be possible to increase the player's attention.

Therefore, the time display B811 may be configured to reach the terminal position B812 at the timing when the variable presentation of the lottery that results in a big win ends, rather than reaching the terminal position B812 at the end of the ending presentation. In this case, the player's attention to the time display B811 and the terminal position B812 can be improved.

In this case, the time display B811 and the end position B812 may be displayed starting from the ending performance and continue to be displayed until the timing when the variable performance of the lottery that results in a big win ends, or may not be displayed during the ending performance and may be displayed after the transition to the subsequent variable performance.

In the former case, the player realizes that he or she has already won the jackpot while watching the ending performance, and therefore understands that there is no need to shoot the ball immediately after the jackpot game ends. This allows the player to refrain from shooting the ball.

In the latter case, when the ending performance is switched to the variable performance, the time display B811 and the end position B812 may be displayed without waiting for the variable performance of the lottery that will result in a jackpot, or they may be displayed after the variable performance of the lottery that will result in a jackpot has started or at the same time as the variable performance starts. In either case, the player can understand that a jackpot will occur before the variable performance ends, so that even if the variable performance is long (for example, one change takes 10 minutes), the player can refrain from shooting the ball, and it is easier to avoid a situation where the player leaves the gaming machine without realizing that the pending starting winnings include a jackpot.

If one of the pending starting winnings is a jackpot, the expectation display is not displayed in the ending performance, but the time display B811 and the terminal position B812 are displayed during the variable performance, and the terminal position B812 may be reached at the timing when the variable performance of the lottery that will result in a jackpot ends.

In addition, if any of the reserved start winnings will result in a jackpot, the display mode may be changed according to the number of start winnings that will result in a jackpot. For example, if there are two start winnings that will result in a jackpot, the expectation display "2x jackpot?!" may be displayed in the warning comment display B815 or the second warning comment display B819, or the expectation display may read "Multiple jackpots?!", indicating that there will be multiple jackpots, but it is unclear how many start winnings will result in a jackpot. This can increase the player's interest.

In this case, if the time display B811 is configured to reach the end position B812 at the timing when the variable presentation of the lottery that will result in a jackpot ends, the timing is set to the end of the variable presentation of the lottery that will result in the first jackpot after the end of the ending presentation, allowing the player's attention to smoothly transition to the jackpot game.

In addition, the display position of comments that do not match the settings that the player can change may be set in small area BDs3, and the comment may be configured to become visible when the frame button display B813 disappears as a result of the frame button B22 being operated while the frame button display B813 is displayed, or the display of the comment may be set to cover the entire display screen (full-screen display). In this case, the player's motivation to operate the frame button B22 may be increased.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case where the display effect transitions from the card forget prevention display effect to the next variable effect is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a single image (still image) may be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 between the card forget prevention display effect and the next variable display screen. In this case, if the pattern variation starts at the start of the display of the single image, the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 should be set to coincide with the time at which the single image starts to be displayed.

Also, the pattern change may start a while after the screen changes to the change display screen after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 may be set to the timing after the screen changes to the change display screen after the end of the jackpot game.

In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the timing when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 is configured as the timing suitable for the player to start firing the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time display B811 may be displayed during a period in which the player can obtain a predetermined benefit by firing the ball, and the timing when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 may be configured as the timing suitable for the player to stop firing the ball. In this case, the player can be prompted to fire the ball while the time display B811 is moving to the right, and the player can be prompted to stop firing the ball at the appropriate timing.

In this case, if the specified conditions are met before the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, a character string such as "Ready" may be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, or the display on the display screen may be switched, to notify the player that the specified conditions have been met. In this case, the display of the time display B811 may be maintained even after the specified conditions are met, or the display of the time display B811 may be turned off when the specified conditions are met.

For example, if the gaming machine is controlled so that a character string is displayed on the display screen when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 (special symbol 2, or both) reaches four (full), the player can see the character string and understand that shooting any more balls will not win the lottery for special symbol 1 (special symbol 2, or both). This makes it possible to urge the player to stop shooting balls at the appropriate time, without having to suddenly change the speed at which the time display B811 moves.

In the above 54th embodiment, a case was described in which a warning comment display B815 is displayed before pressing the frame button B22, and a second warning comment display B819 is displayed after pressing the frame button B22, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the system may be controlled so that after pressing the frame button B22, only the warning comment display B815 is displayed, the direction operation section 816 and the vertical scale display B817 are displayed, but the horizontal scale display B818 is not displayed. In this case, the content of the warning comment 815 that was displayed before pressing the frame button B22 matches the target (light intensity) whose settings can be changed by operating the frame button B22, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction with operating the frame button B22.

For example, if the caution comment display B815 has disappeared and only the second caution comment display B819 is displayed before pressing the frame button B22, the second caution comment display B819 is displayed after pressing the frame button B22 without displaying the caution comment display B815, and the direction operation unit 816 and horizontal scale display B818 are displayed, but the vertical scale display B817 is not displayed. In this case, the content of the second caution comment 819 that was displayed before pressing the frame button B22 matches the target (volume) whose settings can be changed by operating the frame button B22, so the player's satisfaction with operating the frame button B22 can be increased.

This allows the player to check in advance whether the setting of the object (volume or light intensity) for which he or she wishes to change the setting can be changed, and then select whether or not to operate frame button B22, thereby reducing the burden of operating frame button B22.

Although the case has been described where the frame button display B813 and the operation target when the frame button B22 is operated are displayed in separate locations, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the triangular mark on the frame button display B813 is a musical note, the volume can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22, whereas when the triangular mark on the frame button display B813 is a light bulb mark, the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22. In other words, the display mode of the frame button display B813 itself can be changed to notify the target that can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22.

In addition, if there are multiple operating means corresponding to the frame button B22, each of which has a different shape, the frame button display B813 can be configured to display the different shapes, so that the frame button display B813 can inform the player which operating means to operate. In this case, the adjustable target may be configured to change depending on the operating means operated.

In the above 55th embodiment, the slide member B2450 is molded integrally with the front protrusion B2457, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front protrusion B2457 and the slide member B2450 may be molded separately, and the front protrusion B2457 may be displaced in the vertical direction due to load transmission accompanying the forward and backward sliding movement of the slide member B2450, thereby switching between a case in which the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b protrude from the upper surface of the bottom portion B431a and a case in which they do not protrude from the upper surface of the bottom portion B431a.

In this case, compared to when the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b are displaced in the forward/rearward direction, the component of the load applied to the ball from the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b along the flow direction of the ball in the central flow path B2431 can be made smaller, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball is erroneously accelerated when the ball interference protrusions B2458a, B2458b are displaced forward.

In the above 57th embodiment, the rolling plate portion B4421 and the obstruction rod portion B4425 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the obstruction rod portion B4425 to be attachable to the rolling plate portion B4421, the rolling plate portion B4421 can be used both when the obstruction rod portion B4425 is not attached and when the obstruction rod portion B4425 is attached to the rolling plate portion B4421, and costs can be reduced by making the rolling plate portion B4421 a common part.

For example, the rolling plate portion B4421 and the obstruction rod portion B4425 may be formed separately, and the obstruction rod portion B4425 may be configured to move in conjunction with the rolling plate portion B4421 when the rolling plate portion B4421 operates. This improves the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rolling plate portion B4421 and the obstruction rod portion B4425. In this case, the drive device that drives the rolling plate portion B4421 may also be used as the drive device that drives the obstruction rod portion B4425, or a separate drive device may be provided.

In the above 57th embodiment, the downstream end of the rolling plate B4421 is located to the right of the right end of the guide B4413, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the downstream end of the rolling plate B4421 may be extended to the left and formed to cover the upper surface of the guide B4413. In this case, the ball rolling down the upper surface of the rolling plate B4421 can be smoothly placed on the guide B4413. In other words, it is possible to prevent the height position of the rolling plate B4421 from lowering (sinking) due to the weight of the ball, and the upper surface of the rolling plate B4421 from being located at a lower position than the upper surface of the guide B4413, and the ball that has reached the downstream side of the rolling plate B4421 from increasing the flow resistance when moving to the guide B4413 side. The same can be said for the upstream end of the rolling plate B4421 and both ends of the opening and closing member of the variable winning device B65.

In the above 57th embodiment, the case where the electric device B4420 slides in the forward and backward directions has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to rotate. For example, the rotation axis of the rotation may be arranged to extend in a direction along the opening (the horizontally elongated opening formed on the back side of the flow path component B4410) through which the rolling plate portion B4421 appears and disappears in the above 57th embodiment.

A horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate is formed so as to hang down from the rotation axis. The hanging state of the opening/closing plate corresponds to the non-guiding state, and in this state, an obstructing portion capable of obstructing the passage of the ball is formed at the downstream end of the opening/closing plate so as to correspond to the obstructing rod portion B4425. By rotating the opening/closing plate 90 degrees in the direction in which it stands up (rearward rotation direction) from the non-guiding state, the opening/closing plate is placed in a state in which it can guide the ball towards the guide portion B4413, which corresponds to the guiding state. In this state, the obstructing portion is retracted to the rear side of the flow path configuration portion B4410.

By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flows toward the plate-shaped portion B4412 from the rotation axis in the non-guiding state, the ball can be rescued above the rotation axis depending on the position of the ball when the opening/closing plate is displaced in the rearward rotation direction.

In addition, the rotation axis of the pivotal displacement may be arranged to extend in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the opening from which the rolling plate portion B4421 appears and disappears in the 57th embodiment. The state in which the opening and closing plate extends from the rotation axis in the same direction as the guiding state in the 57th embodiment is configured as the guiding state. The vertical arrangement of the ball entrance B4411 and the ceiling portion B4414 is pulled upward so that the opening and closing plate can be pivotally displaced from the guiding state to a state in which it rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation axis (corresponding to the non-guiding state). In other words, according to this configuration, the state in which the opening and closing plate is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the guiding state is configured as the non-guiding state, and the rolling plate portion B4421 and the obstruction rod portion B4425 in the 57th embodiment are configured from the same part.

By configuring it in this way, when the opening and closing plate is rotated from the guiding state to the non-guiding state, all of the balls resting on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate in the guiding state can be guided to the guiding section B4413 side. As a result, when the electric device B4420 is slid from the guiding state to the non-guiding state in the 57th embodiment, most of the balls resting on the upper surface of the rolling plate section B4421 in the guiding state flow down to the plate-shaped section B4412 side, and compared to this, the balls can be easily guided to the guiding section B4413 side.

In the above 58th embodiment, a case was described in which a ball receiving rotating member B5771 that can be rotated and displaced is disposed between the second specific winning port B700a and the opening B751, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a rotating part that can be swiveled left and right, and may be operable to distribute the ball's flow path to either the left or right.

For example, a sliding opening/closing plate may be provided. In this case, the opening/closing plate may be used to open and close the flow path or opening B751 to the area between the pair of storage plate sections B715.

The opening/closing plate may be configured to be positioned on the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plate sections B715 or on the opening B751, thereby switching the flow path of the balls. That is, the opening/closing plate may be configured to be able to switch between a state in which the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plate sections B715 is open while the opening B751 is closed, and a state in which the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plate sections B715 is closed while the opening B751 is open.

In the above 58th embodiment, the ball receiving recess B5772 receives one ball at a time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to receive a predetermined number greater than one (e.g., two at a time). In this case, when the ball receiving rotation member B5771 rotates at a constant speed, multiple balls (a predetermined number) can be inserted together into the position between the pair of storage plate sections B715.

In the above 58th embodiment, the ball receiving rotation member B5771 is always rotating in a clockwise direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the ball is always rotating, it may be timed to rotate counterclockwise at a predetermined interval. In this case, even if a ball becomes trapped between the ball receiving recess B5772 and the flow-down restriction member B5778, the ball can be eliminated by reversing the direction of rotation.

In addition, in the case of a specified jackpot type, the ball receiving rotation member B5771 may be stopped for the first 10 seconds of a round of play, and then rotated after the 10 seconds have elapsed. In this case, it is possible to prevent balls from flowing down to the pair of storage plate sections B715 (opening B751 side) during the first 10 seconds, so a state in which the nails BKG1 are in such a way that there are more balls that deviate than those that are guided to the movable upper cover member B730 reduces the number of balls that enter the second specific winning port B700a during the first 10 seconds, thereby increasing the possibility that balls will pass through the opening B751.

In addition, the rotation direction and rotation speed (including whether it is constant or variable) of the ball-receiving rotating member B5771, and whether or not the rotation direction is reversed, may be set for each type of jackpot. In this case, attention to the ball-receiving rotating member B5771 can be increased.

In the above 58th embodiment, the distance between the second specific winning opening B700a and the ball receiving rotation member B5771 is narrow enough that the ball does not spill sideways when it flows from the second specific winning opening B700a to the ball receiving recess B5772, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the second specific winning opening B700a and the ball receiving rotation member B5771 may be longer than the diameter of the ball, and when the ball receiving recess B5772 is filled with balls, the ball that passes through the second specific winning opening B700a may spill sideways and flow to the inclined plate portion B5718b.

In this case, even if the rotation of the ball receiving rotation member B5771 is stopped, the ball entering the second specific winning port B700a is not impeded, so the ball receiving rotation member B5771 can be controlled to stop at a predetermined timing.

When the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is stopped during a round of play, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing into the position between the pair of storage plate sections B715 until the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is next started to operate, so that it is possible to delay the timing at which the ball is introduced into the position between the pair of storage plate sections B715 and the timing at which the ball passes through the opening B751.

In the above fifty-ninth embodiment, the predetermined length of time that elapses from the timing when the right tip of the launch time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812 to the timing when the right tip of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 was described as being designed to be slightly longer than the average length that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates B66, B67 (the position indicated by the target suggestion display B6822), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned predetermined length of time may be designed to be longer by taking into account the probability of the ball entering the through gates B66, B67, using the average length that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates B66, B67 as a comparison target.

In the above 59th embodiment, the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 is configured to display the target suggestion display B6822 to encourage the player to aim at the through gates B66 and B67, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game, a time-saving state, a probability change state, or a special probability change state is played by hitting the right, the display screen may display "Right Hit" instead of the target suggestion display B6822. Also, when the target suggestion display B6822 is enlarged, the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be enlarged as a whole. Alternatively, the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 throughout the ending performance, or the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 from the middle of the ending performance.

For example, if the target suggestion display B6822 is displayed with a fanfare effect, the target suggestion display B6822 may be designed to suggest aiming for the second specific winning port B700a or the opening B751 of the upper variable winning device B700. In this case, if the target suggestion display B6822 is set to remain on the display screen during the first round of play until the passage of the ball is detected at the opening B751, the player can understand that the ball has passed through the opening B751 when the target suggestion display B6822 disappears, thereby improving attention to the target suggestion display B6822.

In addition to the method of encouraging the player to aim at the through gates B66, B67 on the display screen, such as the target suggestion display B6822, it is also possible to provide a light emitting means for illuminating the area around the through gates B66, B67 on the game board B13, and to have the light emitting means illuminate at the same time as the target suggestion display B6822 is displayed. This allows the player to rely on the light to know where to aim the ball.

Although the above description is directed to a case where the goal suggestion display B6822 is displayed in an ending performance, this is not limiting. For example, when transitioning from an ending performance to a variable performance, the display of the goal suggestion display B6822 may be configured to continue for a predetermined period of time even in the variable performance. The display period of the goal suggestion display B6822 may be set to a predetermined time width, or may continue until balls are detected entering the targeted ball entry hole (a predetermined number, for example, the number of balls allowed as reserved balls for the first pattern, four in this embodiment).

In the above fifty-ninth embodiment, the case where the game stop suggestion display B6831 is used to encourage the player to stop shooting the ball has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game stop suggestion display B6831 may be used to encourage the player to stop operating the frame button B22. This allows a player who operates the frame button B22 without knowing that this is an inappropriate timing for operating the frame button B22 to know that he or she is operating the frame button B22 at an inappropriate timing, thereby reducing the burden on the player when playing the game.

The game stop suggestion display B6831 may also be configured with a message that prompts the player to stop executing the "right hit" but not to stop the "left hit" (for example, a comment saying "Please return to left hit").

In addition, instead of the game stop suggestion display B6831, the illumination elements B29 to B33 and the display lamp B34 may be made to emit a strong light or an abnormal color (for example, deep red), or a comment such as "Please stop shooting balls" or "Please return to left-handed play" may be output at a loud volume from a speaker.

In the above 59th embodiment, it was explained that the game stop suggestion display B6831 is displayed when the passage of the ball through the through gates B66, B67 is detected before the end of the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. In other words, it may be displayed when a ball is detected entering a specified ball entry port even during a period when no balls are scheduled to enter the specified ball entry port.

The specified ball entry openings are not limited to the through gates B66 and B67, but include various ball entry openings (general winning opening B63, first winning opening B64, second winning opening B640, through gate B67, specific winning opening B65a, second specific winning opening B700a, opening B751, etc.).

For example, examples of periods when the ball is not expected to enter the machine include periods during which the ending presentation is being performed, as well as periods other than the specified period in a right-hand play machine (a gaming machine in which the player plays by hitting the right hand during a specified period such as during a time-saving state). In other words, by setting the game stop suggestion display B6831 to be displayed when a ball is detected entering the ball entry port located on the right side of the play area during periods other than the specified period, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand at an inappropriate time.

In addition, for example, examples of periods when a ball is not expected to enter the jackpot include the fanfare effect during a jackpot game and the first interval time BInt1 between rounds. In other words, by setting the game stop indication B6831 to be displayed when a ball is detected entering the ball entry port during the fanfare effect or the first interval time BInt1 between rounds, it is possible to suppress the release of balls at times when the flow path to the specific winning port B65a or the second specific winning port B700a is not open (closed), and the occurrence of wasted balls can be minimized.

In the above 59th embodiment, the case where the game stop suggestion display B6831 prompts the player to immediately stop shooting the balls has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display may be changed according to the number of balls reserved for the lottery following the entry of a ball into a specified starting port (e.g., the second winning port B640).

In other words, for example, the ball is controlled so that it is expected to land in a specified starting hole when it is released, and if there is still room before the number of reserved balls becomes full (4 balls) (for example, when the number of reserved balls is 2 balls), a comment that the player can understand as the remaining amount is displayed as a game stop suggestion display B6831 (for example, "2 more balls"), or the game stop suggestion display B6831 is not displayed but the game preparation suggestion display B6841 is displayed, and when the number of reserved balls becomes full, it may be configured to suggest that it is not necessary to release the balls by displaying the game stop suggestion display B6831 as described in the 59th embodiment above or a comment such as "ready".

In the above 59th embodiment, a case was described in which the game stop suggestion display B6831 is displayed when the launch of the ball is detected, encouraging the player to stop shooting the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the game stop suggestion display B6831, or in conjunction with the game stop suggestion display B6831, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed (announced). This can reduce the player's sense of disappointment compared to when the player is only given the disappointment of having wasted a ball. Moreover, in some cases, it can encourage the player to shoot the ball with pleasure in the ending performance.

In this case, examples of information that is beneficial to the player include information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a low probability state for the first symbol or a high probability state for the first symbol, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a normal state, a time-saving state, a high probability state, or a special high probability state, information on whether the operating pattern of the electric device B640a will change or not after a predetermined number of lottery draws have passed after the jackpot game ends, information on whether there is a jackpot among the reserved balls in the lottery for the first symbol that is currently reserved, and information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting when the gaming machine is configured to be able to change the setting of the jackpot probability for the first symbol (for example, the jackpot probability for the low probability state can be changed to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability for the high probability state can be changed to 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2)).

In the 60th embodiment, a case was described in which the setting change is canceled (initialized) when a specified time has passed since the light intensity or volume setting change was performed, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and various conditions for canceling the setting change are exemplified. For example, the condition for canceling the setting change may be a transition to a game explanation display (a so-called demo screen) that is executed on the display screen before the game starts, or the condition for canceling the setting change may be a specified time that is determined by controlling the time, or a specified number of jackpots on the same day or over multiple days.

The condition for canceling the setting change may also be that the frame button B22 is operated at a specific timing (for example, when the frame button display B813 is displayed in the game explanation display before the start of the game, or when the frame button display B813 is not displayed during the game), or that a ball is detected passing through a specific winning hole or through gate B66, B67 during the ending performance, or that a jackpot of a specific jackpot type is won, or that a ball removal notification is executed when the amount of balls stored in the upper tray B17 exceeds the allowable amount.

Also, the condition for canceling the setting change may be the execution of an alert that is set to be issued when it is determined that the ball is flowing down the right-side play area B303, such as when the ball is detected passing through the through gate B67 at a time when right-hand play should not be used, and that encourages the player to play with left-hand play (for example, an alert that outputs a voice such as "Please return to left-hand play" or an alert that displays a left-facing arrow and the comment "Please return to left-hand play" on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81).

In the 60th embodiment, a case was described in which both the volume and the light intensity can be changed in the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be switchable between a state in which only the volume can be changed, a state in which only the light intensity can be changed, and a state in which both the volume and the light intensity can be changed. This switching may be performed by operating the frame button B22, or may be performed by the audio lamp control device B113 in response to the performance being executed.

In the 60th embodiment described above, a case was described in which the player can grasp the volume and light intensity settings immediately before the volume and light intensity setting changes are canceled from the past light intensity display B7817 and past volume display B7818, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a numerical value indicating the difference between the current state and the immediately previous setting value may be displayed or sounded as "+1" or "-2", etc. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the operations required to return to the settings before cancellation.

In the 60th embodiment, the case where the settings before the volume or light intensity settings were cancelled is suggested is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a player is changing the volume or light intensity settings, the settings before the change may be suggested. In this case, even if the player intentionally makes a change, if he or she does not like the change after actually making it, the player can easily revert to the original settings. This lowers the hurdle for changing the volume or light intensity settings.

In the 61st embodiment, the scattered frame button displays B8813 are materialized when they are combined, and the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled. However, this is not necessarily limited to the display mode. For example, the semi-transparent frame button display B8813 may be configured to materialize at a predetermined timing, not as a display to encourage the operation of the frame button B22 (regardless of whether it is a display related to operation), but as a display that indicates the elapsed time of the ending performance.

In addition, for example, a single translucent frame button display B8813 may be displayed moving or stationary, and switched between a translucent state and a materialized state at a predetermined timing. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the frame button display B8813 will be materialized, thereby increasing the attention paid to the frame button display B8813.

In the 61st embodiment, the timing at which the frame button display B8813 materializes is displayed as the timing for operating the frame button B22, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mark or comment (such as "PUSH") suggesting the timing for operating the frame button B22 may be displayed in the horizontally elongated frame in which the time display B811 moves. In this case, the time display B811 can be used both to suggest the timing for the end of the ending performance and to suggest the timing for operating the frame button B22.

In the 61st embodiment, the case was described where the scattered frame button displays B8813 move and merge, and then move further apart, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the frame button displays B8813 merge and materialize, once the period during which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid has passed, the frame button displays B8813 may be controlled to disappear.

In the 61st embodiment described above, a case was described in which whether the frame button display B8813 is semi-transparent or materialized corresponds to whether the operation of the frame button B22 is valid or invalid, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, during the period in which the frame button display B8813 is materialized, a state in which the operation of the frame button B22 is invalid and a state in which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid may be configured.

For example, the timing of switching between valid and invalid operation of the frame button B22 may be set to the same as that described in the 61st embodiment above, and the frame button display B8813 may be configured to be materialized and displayed in the center of the display screen immediately after the card forget prevention display performance is started.

In the 61st embodiment, the case was described where each period BT81, BT82, BT83 is set as a dividing line between a period in which operation of the frame button B22 is invalid and a period in which operation is valid, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, operation of the frame button B22 is valid during each period BT81, BT82, BT83, and the difference between each period BT81, BT82, BT83 may be set as a difference in the performance mode to which the operation of the frame button B22 is transitioned.

That is, when the frame button B22 is operated in the first period BT81, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where the volume setting can be changed but the light intensity setting cannot be changed, when the frame button B22 is operated in the second period BT82, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where both the volume setting and the light intensity setting can be changed, and when the frame button B22 is operated in the third period BT83, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where the volume setting cannot be changed but the light intensity setting can be changed. Separately from this, the difference between each period BT81, BT82, and BT83 may be set as a difference in the performance display (moving image to be displayed) transitioned to by operating the frame button B22.

In the above 61st embodiment, a case has been described in which each of the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 is set to the same length, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The length of each of the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 can be set arbitrarily, and the setting contents can be adapted to various conditions.

For example, the length of each period BT81, BT82, and BT83 may be set differently for each type of jackpot, or the second period BT82 may be set to be shorter during a streak in which the probability of winning continues multiple times, since it is unlikely that the settings will be changed at this point.

In addition, for jackpot types where the volume or light intensity is particularly high (such as a jackpot of the largest round or a jackpot with particularly intense (long) effects), the second period BT82 may be set to be longer to make it easier to change the settings. In this case, if the first period BT81 is set to be shorter, a longer period can be secured to change the volume or light intensity settings during the ending effects, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

In the 61st embodiment, a case was described in which the light intensity and volume settings can be changed by operating the frame button B22 in accordance with the display mode of the frame button display B8813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed by operating the frame button B22.

In this case, examples of information that is beneficial to the player include, as described above, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a low probability state for the first symbol or a high probability state for the first symbol, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a normal state, a time-saving state, a probability variable state, or a special probability variable state, information on whether the operating pattern of the electric device B640a will change or not after a predetermined number of lottery draws have passed after the jackpot game ends, information on whether there is a jackpot among the reserved balls in the lottery for the first symbol that is currently reserved, and information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting when the gaming machine is configured to be able to change the setting of the jackpot probability for the first symbol (for example, the jackpot probability for the low probability state can be changed to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability for the high probability state can be changed to 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2)).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the balls roll in series on the bottom surface C142, C2142 of the first intermediate member C140, C2140, and only one ball flows into the distribution member C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portion C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portion C173, C2173, C3173) at a time. However, the bottom surface C142, C2142 of the first intermediate member C140, C2140 may be configured so that two or more balls can roll in parallel on the bottom surface C142, C2142, and two or more balls can flow into the distribution member C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portion C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portion C173, C2173, C3173) at a time.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case was described in which a ball flowing down the area of the play area on the left side when viewed from the front (left side of Fig. 1565) (the area between center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and rail 61) flows into (enters) lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b. However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration in which a ball flowing down the area of the play area on the right side when viewed from the front (right side of Fig. 1565) flows into (enters) lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b may also be used.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a single upper frame passage CRt0 is connected to the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in. However, multiple upper frame passages CRt0 may be formed in the upper frame C86b and connected to the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position by their own weight has been described, but a biasing means may be provided, and the biasing force of the biasing means may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position. Alternatively, the biasing force may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are displaced to the second position. Examples of the biasing means include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170, C2170 are directly supported on the shafts C192, C2174 has been described, but the distribution members C170, C2170 may be displaceable by a link mechanism. In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the passage (fourth passage CRt2004) through which the balls that roll on the rolling portion C2173 of the sorting member C2170 pass is formed by the magnetic portion C2400. However, like other passages, the fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage through which the balls roll along the rolling surface and pass (flow down).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line, but it may be formed in a curved shape. It may also be a shape that combines a straight line and a curve.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is described as being formed with a uniform arc shape (same curvature) in top view, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and arc shapes having different radii may be combined. For example, the curvature of the arc at one end side and the other end side of the arc portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) may be made larger than the curvature of the arc in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a), i.e., the curvature of the arc in the region including the outflow surface C122a may be made smaller. In this case, in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity), it is easier to reciprocate the balls and to make it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball, while in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls is low (the balls do not reach the one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity, and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a), it is easier to maintain the leading ball and the trailing ball in a connected state. As a result, it is easier to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the two balls in a connected state.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed substantially horizontally in the arc portion C4122b, i.e., the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the upper surface (rolling surface) may be formed as a curved arc that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). Alternatively, the upper surface may be formed as a downwardly sloping plane similar to the pair of straight portions C4122a, or as a downwardly sloping plane different from the pair of straight portions C4122a. As a result, in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity), it is easier to reciprocate the balls and make it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball, while at the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls slows (the stage where the balls do not reach one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a), it is easier to maintain the leading ball and the trailing ball in a connected state. As a result, it is easier to flow (flow down) the balls into the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) while maintaining the two balls in a connected state.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (straight line portion C4122a and arc portion C4122b) may be formed to slope downward in a direction away from the cutout portion C124a (arrow L direction). This allows the ball to roll (reciprocate) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while being pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a protruding vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This makes it possible to prevent the balls from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends in the extension direction of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C2122, and C4122, making it easier for the balls to flow out (down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is described as being formed linearly in the width direction (arrow F-B direction), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 may be formed as a curved arc. If the arc shape has a radius approximately equal to the radius of the ball and is convex toward the vertical upward direction (arrow U direction), the contact area between the ball and the magnetic part C5400 can be increased, and the ball can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C5400. On the other hand, if the arc shape is convex toward the vertical downward direction (arrow D direction), it is possible to form a form in which the ball sways as it flows down, and the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. As a result, the player can be drawn to the behavior of the ball, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (i.e., a surface that approaches the back member C2130 as it moves vertically upward), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion may be formed as an inclined surface facing the opposite side to the back member C2130 (i.e., a surface that moves away from the back member C2130 as it moves vertically upward). This allows the ball attracted to the magnetic part C6400 to be disposed at a position where it is separated from the back member C2130, and prevents the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 from coming into contact with the back member C2130.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the main body C2131 of the back member C2130 may be formed as an inclined surface that approaches the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 (arrow F) as it moves vertically downward (arrow D direction) (i.e., a surface that approaches the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 as it moves vertically downward). This allows the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 and the back member C2130 to sandwich the ball flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C6400, and prevents the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C6400.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, in addition to the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130, an additional magnet C2300 may be disposed vertically below (in the direction of the arrow D). When the added magnet C2300 is disposed vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the direction of the magnetic force acting on the ball by the added magnet C2300 is vertically upward, so that the ball can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, if the added magnet C2300 is positioned vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the direction of the magnetic force acting on the ball by the added magnet C2300 will be vertically downward, increasing the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 (the possibility that it will not be able to reach the fifth passage CRt2005).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130 may be formed to extend vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D). This allows the ball to be attracted by the effect of the magnetic force directly applied from the magnet C2300 in addition to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, and prevents the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the magnetic forces of the multiple magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be differentiated. For example, if the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 arranged upstream is stronger than that of the other magnets C2300, the ball that rolled on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part C2173 can be easily attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, that is, it can be easily guided to the fourth passage CRt2004. Also, for example, if the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of the multiple magnets C2300 is weaker than that of the other magnets C2300, the possibility that the ball passing through that one magnet C2300 will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. This can increase the excitement of the game.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the arrangement direction of the multiple magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be changed. For example, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged downstream is inclined vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D) relative to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged upstream. In other words, when the magnets C2300 are arranged in a convex shape, it is possible to easily direct the balls flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 toward the magnets C2300 arranged downstream, and to prevent the balls from falling from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, when the magnets C2300 arranged downstream are arranged in a manner in which the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged upstream is inclined vertically upward (arrow U direction), in other words, when the magnets C2300 are arranged in a concave shape, the possibility that the balls will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 at the boundary between the upstream and downstream sides of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that they will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. In addition, the arrangement shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed in a straight line or in an arc. In addition, instead of the magnets C2300, the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above shape (convex or concave, and linear or arc).

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, adjacent magnets C2300 of the multiple magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be spaced apart. In this case, a section in which no magnetic force acts on the ball can be created in the extension direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, and the possibility of the ball falling from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 in this section (the possibility of it not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the displacement member D180 may be formed to be displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged in the initial position (first position), the displacement member D180 may be arranged to be arranged in the open position, and when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged in the second position, the displacement member D180 may be arranged to be arranged in the closed position. In this case, when a ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the side where it becomes more difficult for the ball to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for a second ball to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 during the time between when a first ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and when the first ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 than when the first ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, which increases the interest of the game.

When the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are configured so that the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to them, the structure in which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 from their initial positions (first positions) to their second positions is transmitted to the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 can be reversed from the case described above (the cases of the 68th to 75th embodiments). That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the positional relationship between the transmitting parts D173 and D3173 and the receiving parts D193 and D3193 can be set so that the transmitting members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 rotate in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case.

Specifically, the transmitted part D193 is extended in a direction away from the rolling member D170 (to the right in FIG. 1612(a), in the direction of arrow R), and the transmitting part D173 is extended up to above the transmitted part D193, so that when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting part D173 pushes the transmitted part D193 downward (in the direction of arrow D) (i.e., rotates the transmitting member D190 in the opposite direction to the 68th embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 1612(a)).

In addition, the transmitted part D3193 may be extended toward the rolling member D170 (left side of FIG. 1617(a), in the direction of arrow L), and the transmitting part D3173 may be extended below the transmitted part D3193, so that when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting part D3173 pushes the transmitted part D3193 upward (in the direction of arrow U) (i.e., rotates the transmitting member D3190 in the opposite direction to the 70th embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 1617(a)).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 (the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is transmitted to the pair of displacement members D180 by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190), but a configuration may be used in which two transmission members are provided and one of the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced by the first transmission member and the other by the second transmission member (the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170 or the second rolling member D4220 is transmitted to one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 by the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively).

In this case, for example, the displacement of the rolling member D170 may be transmitted by a first transmission member, and the displacement of the second rolling member D4220 may be transmitted by a second transmission member. This allows for diversifying the displacement mode of the displacement member D180, improving the entertainment value of the game.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the opposing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between the front of the main body D131 of the rear member D130, D4130, D8130 and the rear of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140, D6140 in the sixth passage DRt6 is constant along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and the opposing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between the imaginary surface (plane) connecting the tips of the multiple protrusions D131f and the imaginary surface (plane) connecting the tips of the multiple protrusions D141g is constant along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D). However, at least one of these opposing distances may be changed along the vertical direction.

For example, the opposing distance may be narrowed upward (in the direction of arrow U, in the direction moving away from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body parts D172, D3172)). This allows balls that bounce up from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body parts D172, D3172) to quickly descend, making it easier for the weight of the ball to act. This technical concept also applies to the opposing distance in the eighth passage DRt8.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, protrusions D131f, D141g are provided on the front surface of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and on the back surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. However, recesses may be provided on the front surface of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and on the back surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. The recesses can also delay the passage (rolling) of the balls.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions D131f and D141g are exemplified as an example of a delay means for delaying the passage of the ball, but other means may be adopted. Examples of other means include means (e.g., a windmill, a metal elastic spring (leaf spring or coil spring), a resin elastic piece, a rubber sheet, etc.) that is disposed at a position where the ball passing (rolling) on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172, D3172, D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 can abut, and is displaced or deformed by the abutment. In other words, examples of means that delay the passage of the ball by utilizing energy (kinetic energy or viscous resistance) generated by abutment with the ball are exemplified.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, D3172, D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is described as being flat, but the upper surface (rolling surface) may be provided with irregularities or steps. This provides resistance to the ball, slowing its passage (rolling).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the ball is more likely to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing pair of displacement members D180). However, the opposite configuration may be used. That is, the initial position of the displacement member D180 may be set to the open position, and when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the displacement member D180 may be placed in the closed position, so that the ball is less likely to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing pair of displacement members D180). In this case, the game state may be such that the ball is more likely to flow (enter) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 than into the sixth passage DRt6.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 are provided to transmit the displacement of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180 has been described, but the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 may be omitted. In other words, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 may be directly connected to the displacement member D180 (displacement member D180 unit), and the displacement of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 may be directly transmitted to the displacement member D180.

For example, grooves D194L, D194R of the transmission member D190 (main body D194) are provided in the rolling members D170, D3170, 8170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is connected (inserted) into the grooves D194L, D194R. This allows the number of parts to be reduced by the amount that the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190 are omitted, thereby reducing product costs.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a gap is formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting members D190 and D2190 and the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170 in the initial position (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position), while no gap is formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 and the transmitting part D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight part D195 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220. However, this may be reversed.

In other words, in the initial position (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position), no gap is formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmission members D190 and D2190 and the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170, and a gap may be formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D3193 of the transmission member D3190 and the transmission part D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 and the transmission part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the pair of displacement members D180 are rotatable, but at least one (or both) of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to be slidably displaced. Even in a slidably displaced configuration, the ease with which the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 can be changed, improving the excitement of the game. Examples of the manner of slidable displacement include a manner in which the ball is displaced along a straight line, a manner in which the ball is displaced along a curved line, and a manner in which the ball is displaced along a shape that combines a straight line and a curved line.

This displacement mode also applies to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and at least one of these (or all of them) may be configured to be slidably displaceable.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 are configured to be able to return to their initial positions by their own weight, but a biasing means may be provided that applies a biasing force in the direction of returning them to their initial positions. If these can be quickly returned to their initial positions, the displacement member D180 can be quickly placed in the closed position, improving the enjoyment of the game. Examples of the biasing means include a coil spring, a leaf spring, a torsion spring, and a rubber-like elastic body.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a pair of displacement members D180 are described, but the number of displacement members D180 may be one or three or more. In other words, it is sufficient that the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by changing the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 has been described, but the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 may not be changed. For example, the direction of displacement (rotation) of one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 may be the same (the distance between the displacement members is constant, and the position of the open portion at the tip of the displacement member D180 is displaced left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-D)). In other words, it is sufficient that the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, one of the pair of displacement members D180 is always linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190, and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 is not linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period of time. However, both of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to always be linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190, or both of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to not be linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period of time.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions D131f, D141g are formed continuously along the extension direction (vertical direction), but the protrusions D131f, D141g may be formed discontinuously (intermittently) along the extension direction (vertical direction). This makes it easier to provide resistance to the ball bouncing upwards. In this case, the protrusions D131f, D141g may be arranged in a staggered pattern along the extension direction (vertical direction). This makes it easier to provide resistance to the ball bouncing upwards.

Although not described in the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a restricting means may be provided to restrict the movement of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing pair of displacement members D180) and fallen onto the upper surface of the main body portion D172, D3172 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 in the direction opposite to the rolling direction in the main body portion D172, D3172 (the direction of arrow R). The restricting means may be provided in any of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member D140, D6140. In addition, examples of the restricting means include a portion that is erected from either the rolling member D170, D3170, or D8170, the back member D130, D4130, or D8130, or the intermediate member D140 or D6140 and is shaped so that it can come into contact with a ball.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) falls onto the upper surface of the main body parts D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. However, a configuration in which a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) falls onto the upper surface of a portion (receiving portion) formed in the back member D130, D4130, D8130 or the intermediate member D140, D6140, and flows (rolls) from the receiving portion into the main body parts D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 may also be used. Once the impact of the fall has subsided (become smaller), the main body parts D172 and D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170 and D8170 can receive the ball, suppressing flapping (vibration) of the displacement member D180 in the initial stage when the weight of the ball acts.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged in parallel (side by side) in a top view (viewed in the direction of arrow D) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction)). In this case, the vertical dimension (arrow U-D direction) of the lower frames D86b to D8086b can be reduced. However, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) may be arranged in parallel (side by side) in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction)). In this case, it is preferable that the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) overlap in a top view (viewed in the direction of arrow D). This allows the dimensions of the lower frames D86b-D8086b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from above (when viewed in the direction of arrow D), but the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 may be arranged in series (linearly arranged along the longitudinal direction) when viewed from above (when viewed in the direction of arrow D).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the display unit D7197 is disposed on the main body unit D194 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited thereto, and the display unit D7197 may be disposed on the weight unit D195. That is, the display unit D7197 may be disposed on the outer edge of the weight unit D195 and extended from the outer edge of the weight unit D195 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft D191.

In this case, the positioning of the display unit D9197 can be reversed from that described above (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, the display unit D7197 is not visible to the player, and when the displacement member D180 is in the open position, the protrusion of the display unit D7197 is maximized). In addition, the weight of the display unit D7197 can be used to reduce (or omit) the amount of metal weight embedded in the weight unit D195, thereby reducing the number of parts and material costs.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the second protrusion D131fa is formed on only some (two in this embodiment) of the multiple (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of the second protrusions D131fa formed is arbitrary, and may be one, or may be three or more. The second protrusion D131fa may be formed on all of the multiple protrusions D131f. In addition, the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusions D131f that overlap the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view, or the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusions D131f that do not overlap the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the rolling member D8170 is arranged in the first position, the dimension by which the upper surface of the second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is larger for the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (farther from the axis D171), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and each second protrusion D131fa may have the same dimension. Alternatively, the dimension may be larger for the second protrusion D131fa located on the downstream side (closer to the axis D171).

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, an inclined surface may be formed by sloping the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) at a position corresponding to between the curved portion E134a and the flow path adjustment block E170 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140. This creates the possibility of sending a ball reciprocating on the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5). A ball sent to the fifth passage ERt5 may be guided to the seventh passage ERt7, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the rear wall E161a is formed on the erected passage E161 of the central passage E160 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. In addition to the rear wall E161a, a front wall may be formed that stands vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the edge of the front end side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the erected passage E161. This makes it possible to prevent the ball guided to the erected passage E161 from passing through the edge of the front end side of the erected passage E161 and flowing down (falling) to the second inclined surface portion E135. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball guided to the erected passage E161 to pass through the upper hole E162, that is, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to flow down the fourth passage ERt4 and enter the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is increased).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which the protruding portion E111b is provided to protrude from the front plate E111, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protruding portion E111b does not have to be provided to protrude. This creates the possibility that a ball rolling on the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140 will be sent to the first winning opening 64. In other words, it is possible to increase the probability that a ball rolling on the rolling portion E141 will enter the first winning opening 64.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150, and the third sorting path E5150, E17150 are displaced (reciprocated) by the drive motor E191, and in the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sorting path E2150 is moved by the elastic spring E2190. , E3150, E11150 are displaced (rotated), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the first distribution path E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution path E4150, E16150 and the third distribution path E5150, E17150 may also be displaced by the vibrator. This allows the sorting paths E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150 and the third sorting path E5150, E17150 to be displaced (reciprocated) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), as well as being displaced (reciprocated) in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction). As a result, it is possible to easily change (alter) the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the sorting passages E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, E16150, and the third sorting passage E5150, E17150. In addition, in the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, it is possible to prevent the balls from being pinched between the back plate E137 and the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second distribution paths E4150, E16150 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) between a pair of opposing curved portions E131. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second distribution paths E4150, E16150 may be arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) between a pair of opposing curved portions E131.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which one pinion gear E196 is arranged between the first rack portion E194d of the first transmission member E194 and the second rack portion E195b of the second transmission member E195, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and multiple pinion gears may be arranged. In this case, by making the number of teeth of each pinion gear different, that is, by making them act as a reducer, the displacement speed of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the first transmission member E194 can be made different from the displacement speed of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the second transmission member E195. In addition, by arranging an even number of pinion gears, the displacement direction of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the first transmission member E194 can be made the same as that of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the second transmission member E195.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the grooves E133c, E9133c, and E10133c formed on both sides of the insertion hole E133a, E9133a, and E10133a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) have been described as having the same shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this and they may be formed in non-identical shapes. This allows the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 to reciprocate in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and to be displaced in a manner that rotates around the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) as viewed from above. In detail, the engaged portion E153 (engagement recess E153a) can be used as a rotation axis to displace the curved portion E131 side and the central passage E160 side of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 in different directions in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B).

In the above-mentioned 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 are described as being protruded from the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, E16150, and the third sorting passage E5150, E17150, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions may be formed in recesses recessed into the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, E16150, and the third sorting passage E5150, E17150. In addition, the outer edge of the recess may be discontinuous, and the space formed between the protruding protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be the recess.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions E151, E15151 are formed in an approximately hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150. In the 87th embodiment, the protrusions E12151 are formed in a spherical shape. In the 88th embodiment, the protrusions E13151 are formed in an approximately rhombus (square) shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E13150. In the 89th embodiment, the protrusions E14151 are formed in a circular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E14150. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions E14151 may be formed in an approximately polygonal shape such as an approximately pentagonal shape or an approximately heptagonal shape, or in a polygonal pyramid shape. They may also be formed in a cylindrical shape. They may also be formed in a shape that combines straight lines and curves. In addition, although the inclination angles of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 relative to the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150 and the third sorting path E5150 are described as being formed to be the same, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the inclination angles of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be different for each side surface. For example, by making the inclination angle of the side formed on the downward side of the inclination direction with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 approximately perpendicular, it is possible to suppress the balls from displacing (backflow, rolling) to the upward side of the inclination direction. Also, for example, by making the inclination angle of the side formed on the downward side of the inclination direction with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 smaller than the inclination angle of the side formed on the upward side of the inclination direction, it is possible to easily displace (backflow, roll) the balls to the upward side of the inclination direction. As a result, it becomes easier for players to visually see how the direction of the ball's movement (flowing down, falling) changes (is altered), which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which multiple protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 are arranged in the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it is sufficient that at least one protrusion E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 is arranged in each.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the cases where the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) have been described. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be provided on a portion of the upper surface of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 (third passage ERt3).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the arrangement intervals of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 are constant. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the arrangement intervals of each protrusion E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 may be different from each other. For example, by increasing the spacing between the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 arranged at the center of the forward/backward direction (direction of arrows F-B) of the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution path E4150 and the third distribution path E5150, the number of times the ball comes into contact with the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 can be reduced compared to when the ball is thrown to both ends in the forward/backward direction. This makes it easier for the balls to flow down along the inclined direction at the center of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150. In other words, the flow direction of the balls is less likely to change (change). As a result, it is easier to guide the balls sent to the center of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4). In addition, the distance between the protrusions E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 (disposition interval) may be greater than approximately one-fourth the diameter of the ball, or may be less than approximately one-fourth the diameter of the ball. By increasing the distance between the protrusions E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, the balls can be brought into contact with the protrusions E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 while increasing the flow speed of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150, making it easier for the player to visually confirm the manner in which the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) is changed.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150 and the third sorting path E5150, E17150 are continuously displaced, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150 and the third sorting path E5150, E17150 may be intermittently displaced by intermittently driving the drive motor E191. This allows the balls flowing down the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution path E4150, E16150, and the third distribution path E5150, E17150 to be given an inertial force, and the impact force when the balls come into contact with the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 can be changed (varied), and the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be varied (changed).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution path E4150, E16150, and the third distribution path E5150, E17150 are driven by the drive motor E191, but this is not necessarily limited to this and they may be driven by a solenoid or an elastic spring.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a driving force transmission member E193 is fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191, and rotation of the drive motor E191 in one direction causes the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting paths E4150, E16150, and the third sorting paths E5150, E1715 Although the case where the first sorting path E150 is reciprocated has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150, and the third sorting path E5150, E17150 may be reciprocated by switching the drive direction of the drive motor E191.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged in the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 to allow the balls to flow down. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may suppress the flow down of the balls. This allows the trailing ball to abut against the leading ball whose flow down is suppressed, and the flow direction of the trailing ball can be changed (changed). That is, the leading ball whose flow is suppressed can have the same effect on the trailing ball as the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, and can change (change) the movement (flow, roll) direction of the balls flowing down the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150. Also, the flow direction of the balls can be changed (changed) irregularly. In addition, when a trailing ball that flows down abuts on a leading ball whose flow is suppressed, the leading ball can resume flowing down.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 are formed at an inclination of approximately 45 degrees relative to the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, and the protruding height of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 is approximately half the radius of the sphere, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be inclined at an angle greater than 45 degrees relative to the upper surfaces of the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting path E4150, and the third sorting path E5150. The protrusion height of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed to be higher than approximately half the radius of the sphere, or may be formed to be lower than approximately half the radius of the sphere. By increasing the inclination angle of the side of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 relative to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, or by increasing the protrusion height, the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 can be lengthened. On the other hand, by reducing the inclination angle of the side of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 relative to the upper surface of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, or by lowering the protrusion height, the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 can be lengthened. In addition, the balls can easily move (flow down, roll) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 by climbing over the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151 and E15151, and the direction in which the balls move (flow down, roll) can be diversified.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the restricting piece E153b is formed in the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the restricting piece E153b does not have to be formed. This allows the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passages E4150, E16150 to be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the inclined surface. In detail, the weight of the balls flowing down (falling) into the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150 acts on the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150, and the weight of the balls flowing down (falling) into the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150 can rotate around the engagement portion E194c, which engages with the first transmission member E194, E4194, E5194, the second transmission member E195, E4195, E5195, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199. As a result, the inclination angles of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 can be changed (changed), and the movement (flowing, rolling) time of the balls flowing down the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) can be extended (changed).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the cutouts E150a are formed in the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the cutouts E150a do not have to be formed. This allows the number of protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 formed on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 to be increased. In addition, it is easier to send balls from the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), meaning it is easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 (increasing the probability of winning the first winning hole 64).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which one and the other of a pair of sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second sorting passages E4150, E16150 are formed in the same manner, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the number or spacing of the protrusions E151 arranged in the pair of sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second sorting passages E4150, E16150 may be different. This allows the balls to flow for different times and in different directions through one of the pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution path E4150, E16150, increasing the interest of the game.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 are each described as being displaced linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in Figure 1628) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 1628) of the game board E13, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 may be displaced asymmetrically. This allows the balls to flow for different times and in different directions on one side of the pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution path E4150, E16150 (third path ERt3), making the game more interesting.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. This allows for more variety in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 (third passage ERt3).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 are displaced by the elastic spring E2190, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. In addition to the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150, the curved portion E131 and the wall plate E132 may also be displaced by the elastic spring E2190. This makes it possible to change (alter) the displacement speed in the forward and backward directions (arrow F-B directions) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2), and to diversify the change in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 (third passage ERt3).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the lower surface of the curved portion E131 abuts against the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to the case, and the lower surface of the curved portion E131 does not have to abut against the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. In this case, by making the opposing distance between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 smaller than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from leaking out from between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed between the flat portion E2133 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic spring E2190 may be disposed between the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. In this case, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed in a stretched state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190 is used to maintain the abutment state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150, or the opposing distance between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 is maintained in a state smaller than the diameter of a sphere.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the cases where the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 are displaced by the elastic spring E2190 have been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and they may be displaced by a drive motor or a solenoid.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the planar portion E2133 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150 are engaged by the support shaft E20j, the elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, and the sorting passages E2150, E3150 are displaced (rotated) vertically upward (toward the direction of the arrow U) by the elastic spring E2190. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic spring E2190 may be configured as a torsion spring. In this case, it is sufficient to engage the torsion spring with the support shaft E20j, which makes it possible to suppress the arrangement of the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a for engaging the elastic spring E2190. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the distribution paths E2150 and E3150 are rotated around the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as a rotation axis, and in the 86th embodiment, the distribution path E11150 is rotated around the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) as a rotation axis. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the distribution paths E2150, E3150, and E11150 may be rotated around the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it easier for the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution paths E2150, E3150, and E11150 to move in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be diversified. As a result, the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the support protrusions E2133a of the planar portion E2133 are formed on both longitudinal ends, and the support portion E2133b is formed closer to the central passage E160 than the support protrusions E2133a. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the support portion E2133b may be formed on both longitudinal ends, and the support protrusion E2133a may be formed closer to the central passage E160 than the support portion E2133b. Also, the support protrusions E2133a may be formed on both longitudinal ends and closer to the longitudinal center than the support protrusions E2133a, and the support portion E2133b may be formed between the support protrusions E2133a in the longitudinal direction.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions E151 are provided on the second distribution path E4150 and the third distribution path E5150 (third path ERt3), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions E151 do not have to be provided. That is, the upper surfaces of the second distribution path E4150 and the third distribution path E5150 (third path ERt3) may be formed flat. This makes it easier for the player to predict the displacement of the balls flowing down (falling) from the distribution path E150. In addition, the protrusions E151 may be provided on a part of the second distribution path E4150 and the third distribution path E5150 (third path ERt3), and the protrusions E151 may not be provided on the remaining parts.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the second distribution passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the inclination direction than the distribution passage E150, but otherwise is the same. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the length of the second distribution passage E4150 in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) may be longer than the length of the distribution passage E150 in the front-to-back direction. This makes it easier to guide (send) balls that have moved (flowed down, rolled) to the second distribution passage E4150 to the interposed member E140.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which when the sorting passage E150 is arranged in the first position, the end portion on the downward inclination direction of the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 is positioned closer to the wall panel E132 than the end portion on the downward inclination direction of the sorting passage E150. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the end portion on the downward inclination direction of the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 may be positioned closer to the upper hole E162 (central passage E160) than the end portion on the downward inclination direction of the sorting passage E150. This makes it easier for balls that flow (fall) down the distribution passage E150 to be sent to the second distribution passages E4150 and E16150, and makes it easier for balls that are distributed to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) to enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 1628) (increasing the probability of winning the first winning hole 64).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 is disposed in the fourth position, at least a portion of the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 is disposed in a position that overlaps with the central passage E160 in a top view. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 may be disposed in a position where the entirety in the short direction (arrow F-B direction) overlaps with the central passage E160 in a top view. This makes it difficult to guide the ball sent from the distribution passage E150 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 is disposed in the fourth position, at least a part of the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed in a position overlapping the central passage E160 in a top view. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 may be disposed closer to the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side) than the central passage E160 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows the player to expect that the balls guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) will be distributed to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) as in the case where the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed in the third position, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the inclined surface portion E7154 is formed in a straight line, and in the 83rd embodiment, the curved guide portion E8133d is formed in an arc-like curve. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the inclined surface portion E7154 may be formed in an arc-like curve, and the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed in a straight line. In addition, the inclined surface portion E7154 or the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed in a shape that combines a straight line and an arc.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the lower frame E9086b is formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1628) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1628) of the game board E13, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the lower frame E9086b may be formed asymmetrically. For example, the groove E9133c formed on one side of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130 may be formed to be inclined toward the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction) as it moves from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, and the groove E9133c formed on the other side of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130 may be formed to be inclined toward the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction) as it moves from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side. For example, the grooves E9133c may be formed identically on one side and the other side of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130 when viewed from above, and the manner in which the sorting passage E150 is displaced may be the same.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the groove portion E10133c is described as being formed into a shape that combines curves when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first inclined surface portion E10133, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be formed from a single curve, or may be formed into a shape that combines straight lines and curves.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the guide portions E16154, E17154 are provided on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150, excluding the guide cutout portions E16154a, E17154a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and it is sufficient that they are formed on at least a part of the outer edges. This makes it easier to win the first winning opening 64 (increases the probability of winning the first winning opening 64) compared to when the guide portions E16154, E17154 are not formed on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150, and increases the interest of the game.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a protrusion may be formed on the back surface of the wall portion F132 of the displacement member F130 or on the upper surface of the rolling surface F131b. This makes it possible to delay the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F131b (third passage FRt3) from being sorted (guided) to the recess F131c.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the weight of the ball is used to move the lower frames F86b, F2086b, F3086b, and F4086b from a closed state to an open state, or from an open state to a closed state. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the lower frames F86b, F2086b, F3086b, and F4086b (the blocking portions F143a of the confirmed passages F140, F2140, and F3140) may be displaced (rotated) by the driving device. For example, a detection means may be provided on the displacement member F130, and the driving device may be driven when the detection means detects that the ball has been guided to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 or that the displacement member F130 has been displaced (rotated).

Examples of the detection means include a camera, a weight sensor, a displacement sensor, and a torque sensor. For example, a solenoid pushes the slide body portion F144a of the slide member F144 toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), or a drive motor rotates the opening/closing member F143, displacing (rotating) the cutoff portion F143a.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 disposed on one side may displace the blocking portion F143a of the determined passages F140, F2140, F3140 disposed on the other side, or a pair of blocking portions F143a may be displaced. For example, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) may displace the blocking portion F143a of the determined passages F140, F2140, F3140 disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side), or a pair of blocking portions F143a may be displaced.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the eccentric shaft F183c of the transmission shaft F183 is disposed eccentrically to the axis (shaft F183a) of the transmission part F183b, and is displaced in a circle centered on the axis of the transmission part F183b, thereby operating (moving back and forth in the vertical direction). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the movable member F122 may be operated by the drive means F180 being composed of a rack and pinion mechanism (rack member and pinion member).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a pair of blocking sections F143a are provided for the defined passages F140, F2140, and F3140, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and one blocking section F143a may be provided. For example, the blocking section F143a may be displaced toward one side by the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 provided on one side, and the blocking section F143a may be displaced toward the other side by the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 provided on the other side, thereby increasing the number of ways in which the blocking section F143a may be displaced.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, balls that flow into (enter) the upper frame passages FRt0 and FRt50 may be sent to the upper passages F114 and F5114 or the lower passages F112 and F5112. This makes it easier for balls to be distributed to the lower passages F112 and F5112, and allows the player to have even more hope that the lower frames F86b, F2086b, F3086b, F4086b and F5086b will be operated to the open state.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the upper frame passages FRt0, FRt50 are arranged in linear (planar) symmetry with respect to the center in the width direction of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013, i.e., they may be arranged on the right side of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013, or they may be arranged in linear (planar) symmetry with respect to the center in the width direction of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013, respectively. Therefore, the ball that flows into the upper frame passage FRt0, FRt50 from the game area flows from the upper frame passage FRt0, FRt50 arranged on the right side of the game board F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013 to the first passage FRt1, FRt51 arranged on the right side of the game board F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013. The ball may enter (score) the hole, or may flow (score) from one of the upper frame passages FRt0, FRt50 arranged on the left or right side of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013 to one of the first passages FRt1, FRt51 arranged on the left or right side of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the opening/closing member F2143 is operated (displaced (rotated) in the opening direction) improperly, the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143 is suppressed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the opening/closing member F2143 is operated (displaced (rotated) in the opening direction) improperly, the opening/closing member F2143 is displaced (slid or rotated) in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143, and when the displacement member F130 is displaced by the weight of the ball, a predetermined member that is not displaced and is not linked to the opening/closing member F2143 may be provided upstream of the inflow port FOPf1, and when the opening/closing member F2143 is operated (displaced (rotated) in the opening direction) improperly, the predetermined member is displaced (slid or rotated), and the predetermined member makes it difficult for the ball to flow into the inflow port FOPf1.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the weight of the ball is used to move the lower frame F5086b from a closed state to an open state, or from an open state to a closed state, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150 may be displaced (rotated) by the drive device. For example, a detection means may be provided on the displacement member F5155, and the drive device may be driven when the detection means detects that the ball has been guided to the main body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155, or that the displacement member F5155 has been displaced (rotated).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the engaged portion F5157d of the right slide member F5157R and the magnetic body F5164 of the retaining means F5160 are magnetized to restrict the movement (rotation, displacement) of the right slide member F5157R (right opening/closing member F5158R), but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the displacement of the slide member F5157 may be restricted by protruding a solenoid between the opposing portions of the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 and the slide main body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157, or a magnetic body may be disposed in the slide main body portion F5157a, and the magnetic body may be magnetized by an electromagnet disposed in the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 to restrict the movement (rotation, displacement) of the right slide member F5157R (right opening/closing member F5158R).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball CB51 is resumed (the holding by the holding part F5155e is released) by utilizing the inertial force acting on the ball CB51 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnetic body may be disposed at a position below (above) the holding part F5155e when the lower frame F5086b is in an open state, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball CB51 may be resumed by the repulsive force acting between the magnetic body and the ball CB51. Also, a drive device (for example, a solenoid or a drive motor) may be disposed on the lower frame F5086b, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball CB51 may be resumed by displacing the ball CB51 by driving the drive device.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the left-side displacement member F5155L and the right-side displacement member F5155R of the displacement member F5155 are configured to be able to simultaneously receive balls (balls can flow in from the second passage FRt52), but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the left-side displacement member F5155L and the right-side displacement member F5155R may be configured to work together, and when either the left-side displacement member F5155L or the right-side displacement member F5155R is positioned in a position (initial position) where it can receive a ball, the other may be positioned in a position where it cannot receive a ball (the end of the range where it can be displaced when the weight of the ball acts on it). That is, when either the left-side displacement member F5155L or the right-side displacement member F5155R receives a ball, the weight of the ball displaces one of them toward the end of the range where it can be displaced, and the other is displaced toward the position where it can be received (initial position), and when the other, which is positioned in the position where it can be received (initial position), receives a ball, the weight of the ball displaces the other toward the end of the range where it can be displaced, and the one is displaced toward the position where it can be received (initial position).

In this case, the opening/closing member F5158 (either the left opening/closing member F5158L or the right opening/closing member F5158R) corresponding to the displacement member F5155 (either the left displacement member F5155L or the right displacement member F5155R) arranged in a position (initial position) capable of receiving a ball is arranged in a position that makes it difficult for the ball to flow into the inlet FOPf51, and the opening/closing member F5158 (the other of the left opening/closing member F5158L or the right opening/closing member F5158R) corresponding to the displacement member F5155 (the other of the left displacement member F5155L or the right displacement member F5155R) arranged at the end of the above-mentioned displaceable range is arranged in a position that makes it easy for the ball to flow into the inlet FOPf51. However, the opposite arrangement may also be used.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) are arranged side by side in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), but this is not necessarily limited to this. They may be arranged side by side in the left-to-right direction (arrow L-R direction), for example, with the insertion hole F6162a1 arranged side by side on both ends in the left-to-right direction with respect to the insertion hole F6162a2. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball is flowing into the insertion hole F6162a1 or the insertion hole F6162a2.

In this case, the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is tilted downward toward the front side (back side). As a result, the ball that flows into the through hole F6162a1 on one side is displaced toward the front side (back side) more than the ball that flows into the through hole F6162a2 on one side, and is guided (thrown) through the front side (arrow F direction) of the vertical wall portion F6113 to the upper passage F6114 on the other side, and the ball that flows into the through hole F6162a2 is guided (thrown) to the upper passage F6114 on one side without passing through the front side (arrow F direction) of the vertical wall portion F6113.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the abutment portion F6173b may be disposed at a position where the ball can reciprocate between the first inclined portion F6114c and the second inclined portion F6114d of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63). This allows the ball to reach the position where it can abut against the abutment portion F6173b multiple times, making it easier for the ball to flow into the inlet FOPf61.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which, in the post-operation state of the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b, the ball CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c (moving toward the center in the left-right direction) abuts against the curved surface F6173b1 of the abutment portion F6173b, thereby distributing the ball CB61 from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65); however, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first inclined portion F6114c of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) may be inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction), an electromagnet may be disposed on the back plate F6151 of the back member F6150, or a blower that blows air toward the front side may be disposed on the back plate F6151, thereby distributing the ball CB61 from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a protrusion may be formed on the upper surface of the passage portion F6174a of the displacement passage member F6174 or the rolling surface F7181a1 of the second displacement passage F7180. This makes it possible to delay the outflow (flowing down, discharge) of the balls from the passage portion F6174a or the rolling surface F7181a1.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which the weight of the ball is used to move the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, F11086b from a pre-operation state to a post-operation state, or from a post-operation state to a pre-operation state, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, F11086b may be operated by a driving device (the displacement members F6173, F10173 of the sorting means F6170 may be displaced). For example, a detection means may be provided in the displacement passage member F6174 or the second displacement passage F7180, and the drive device may be driven when the detection means detects that a ball has been guided to the passage portion F6174a of the displacement passage member F6174 or the rolling surface F7181a1 of the second displacement passage F7180, or that the displacement passage member F6174 or the second displacement passage F7180 has been displaced (rotated).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a maintaining means for maintaining the state of the sorting means F6170 in the post-operation state (regulating displacement) may be formed in the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b. As a result, when a ball flows out (flows down, is discharged) from the displacement passage member F6174, in other words, even when the weight of the ball is not acting on the displacement passage member F6174, the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b can be maintained in the post-operation state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. For example, a magnetic body is disposed on the bottom surface of the displacement passage member F6174, and an electromagnet is disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F6143, and the magnetic body and electromagnet are magnetized to regulate the displacement of the sorting means F6170.

When such a maintaining means is formed in the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b, a releasing means may be formed in the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, and F10086b, which releases the restriction on the displacement of the distribution means F6170 by the maintaining means when at least one ball flows into the inlet FOPf61. This ensures that balls flow into the inlet FOPf61. In other words, the player is given a sense of security until at least one ball flows into the inlet FOPf61, which can increase interest.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case has been described in which the displacement direction of the abutment portions F6173b, F10173b during the movement from the post-movement state to the pre-movement state of the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, F11086b includes a movement direction component of the ball CB61 moving the first inclined portion F6114c toward the abutment portions F6173b, F10173b, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the displacement direction of the abutment portions F6173b, F10173b during the movement from the pre-movement state to the post-movement state may include a movement direction component of the ball CB61 moving the first inclined portion F6114c toward the abutment portions F6173b, F10173b. This prevents the contact portions F6173b, F10173b from being displaced to their positions in the pre-operation state due to contact between the ball CB61 and the contact portions F6173b, F10173b, and ensures that the ball CB61 is reliably distributed from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, when the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, F11086b move from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, the displacement members F6173, F10173 are displaced along the first axis F6172 toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the displacement members F6173, F10173 may be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This eliminates the need for space to displace the displacement members F6173, F10173 in the left-right direction, improving the freedom of design.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, when the passage of a ball is detected by the sensor F11001 (or when the passage of a ball is detected and a predetermined condition is satisfied), the displacement member F6173 is displaced by the driving force of the solenoid F11002, thereby changing the ease with which the ball can flow into the inlet FOPf61. However, such a configuration may be applied to other embodiments.

For example, a sensor F11001 may be disposed at a predetermined position (for example, upstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (the playing area on the game board F13 (area where the ball can flow down)) or downstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (the playing area of the lower frame F86b (area where the ball can flow down)), and when the sensor F11001 detects the passage of a ball (or when the passage of a ball is detected and a predetermined condition is satisfied), the opening/closing member F143 may be displaced (opened or closed) by the driving force of the solenoid F11002, thereby changing the ease with which the ball can flow into the inlet FOPf1 (making it easier or harder to flow in).

In addition, for example, a sensor F11001 may be disposed at a predetermined position (for example, upstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (the playing area on the game board F13 (area where the ball can flow down)) or downstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (the playing area of the lower frame F86b (area where the ball can flow down)), and when the sensor F11001 detects the passage of a ball (or when the passage of a ball is detected and a predetermined condition is satisfied), the suppression section F4134 (displacement member F4130) may be displaced (opened or closed) by the driving force of the solenoid F11002, thereby changing the ease with which the ball flows into the second distribution hole F161b (first distribution hole F161a, i.e., the inlet FOPf1) (making it easier or harder to flow in).

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sensor F11001 is disposed in the insertion hole F6162a2, but the position of the sensor can be set arbitrarily. For example, the sensor may be disposed in the insertion hole F6162a1.

In the above 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a case was described in which the weight of the ball is used to displace a specific member, and the displacement of the specific member makes it easier for other balls to enter the first inlet, and as a result, the other balls become easier to enter the second inlet, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a configuration may be used in which the weight of the ball is used to displace a specific member, and the displacement of the specific member makes it "harder" for other balls to enter the first inlet, and as a result, the other balls become easier to enter the second inlet.

For example, when the first winning opening 64 is disposed vertically below the outflow surface F112b of the fifth passage FRt5 and the weight of the ball acts on the displacement member F130, the opening/closing member F143 (blocking portion F143a) is displaced in a direction that closes the inflow opening FOPf1 (making it difficult for the ball to flow in). According to this configuration, the probability that a ball that does not flow into the inflow opening FOPf1 and flows out from the outflow surface F112b will enter the first winning opening 64 is higher than that of a ball that flows into the inflow opening FOPf1. In other words, the weight of the ball is used to displace the displacement member F130, and the displacement of the displacement member F130 (closing of the inflow opening FOPf1 by the opening/closing member F143) makes it difficult for other balls to enter the inflow opening FOPf1, and as a result, the other balls are made to enter the first winning opening 64 easily by using the outflow surface F112b.

In addition, for example, the first winning opening 64 is disposed vertically below the outflow surface F5112b of the fourth passage FRt54, and when the weight of the ball acts on the displacement member F5130, the opening/closing member F5158 is displaced in a direction that closes the inflow opening FOPf51 (making it difficult for the ball to flow in). According to this configuration, a ball that does not flow into the inflow opening FOPf51 and flows out from the outflow surface F5112b has a higher probability of entering the first winning opening 64 than a ball that flows into the inflow opening FOPf51. That is, the weight of the ball is used to displace the displacement member F5130, and this displacement of the displacement member F5130 (closing the inflow opening FOPf51 by the opening/closing member F5158) makes it "difficult for other balls to enter" the inflow opening FOPf51, and as a result, these other balls are made easier to enter the first winning opening 64 by using the outflow surface F5112b.

In addition, for example, a configuration is exemplified in which the first winning port 64 is positioned vertically below the outlet FOPout62, and when the weight of a ball acts on the displacement passage member F6174, the displacement member F6173 is displaced in a direction toward a position where it cannot act (contact) on the ball (when the weight of the ball is not acting on the displacement passage member F6174, the displacement member F6173 is positioned in a position where it can act (contact) on the ball (protruding from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114). According to such a configuration, the ball that flows into the inlet FOPf61 is displaced in a direction vertical to a position where it cannot act (contact) on the ball (when the weight of the ball is not acting on the displacement passage member F6174, the displacement member F6173 is positioned in a position where it can act (contact) on the ball (protruding from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114). Furthermore, a ball that does not flow into the inlet FOPf61 and flows out from the outlet FOPout62 has a higher probability of entering the first winning hole 64. In other words, the weight of the ball is used to displace the displacement passage member F6174, and this displacement of the displacement passage member F6174 (avoiding the direction of travel of other balls that come into contact with the displacement member F6173 from being changed) makes it "harder for the other balls to enter" the inlet FOPf61, and as a result, it becomes easier for such other balls to enter the first winning hole 64 from the outlet FOPout62.

In each of the above embodiments, the appearance of the winning unit K200 changes depending on the state of the first electric device K240 and the second electric device K250 of the winning unit K200, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the appearance of the winning unit K200 may be changed by controlling the color or intensity of the light emitted from the light-emitting unit K228 of the winning unit K200.

At this time, the color and intensity of the light emitted from the light-emitting unit K228 of the winning unit K200 may be controlled to change in response to the state of the first electric role K240 and the second electric role K250 of the winning unit K200, or the color and intensity of the light emitted from the light-emitting unit K228 may be controlled to change regardless of the state of the first electric role K240 and the second electric role K250.

For example, the light may be strengthened when the electric device K640a of the first electric device K240 is in the open state, or the light may be strengthened when the movable plate K251 of the second electric device K250 is in the open state, or conversely, the light may be weakened.

The color and intensity of the light emitted from the light-emitting element K228 of the winning unit K200 may be controlled to change when the ball enters the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a. In this case, the difference in the appearance of the winning unit K200 allows the player to know that a prize has been won in the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a diffusion shape is formed on the back side of the plate-shaped body K202 of the winning unit K200 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the back side or the front and back sides of the plate-shaped body K202 may be formed smoothly. In this case, the transparency of the plate-shaped body K202 can be improved, so that the visibility of the balls flowing down inside the winning unit K200, the electric device K640a of the first electric device K240, the movable plate K251 of the second electric device K250, etc. can be improved.

In the above embodiments, the light from the light-emitting unit K228 is described as not being blocked by the ball rolling on the electric prop K640a, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the light-emitting unit K228 may be positioned behind the path of the ball rolling on the electric prop K640a or behind the path of the ball rolling on the movable plate K251. In this case, the light from the light-emitting unit K228 may be blocked by the ball rolling on the electric prop K640a or the ball rolling on the movable plate K251.

As a result, when the light emitting unit K228 is controlled to be lit, the light can be visually perceived as blinking, and the appearance of the light from the light emitting unit K228 can be changed. At this time, the blinking of the light caused by the ball rolling on the electric device K640a can suggest that the ball will enter the second winning hole K640, while the blinking of the light caused by the ball rolling on the movable plate K251 can suggest that the ball may pass to the left on the movable plate K251 without entering the second specific winning hole K650a.

In the above embodiments, the electric role K640a and the movable plate K251 are described as being colored and opaque, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the electric role K640a or the movable plate K251 may be formed from a colored transparent resin material. In this case, the effect when viewed overlapping the decorative cover K220 is maintained, while the light passing through the electric role K640a or the movable plate K251 can easily change the visual appearance of the winning unit K200. In addition, at least one of the electric role K640a or the movable plate K251 may be formed from a colorless transparent resin material. Even in this case, the visual appearance of the winning unit K200 can easily be changed by the light passing through the electric role K640a or the movable plate K251.

In each of the above embodiments, the light reflected from the movable plate K251 is configured to be visible through the upper edge portion K207a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a reflecting portion may be provided separately from the upper edge portion K207a to reflect the light reflected from the electric role K640a at a position different from the electric role K640a so that the player can see it and understand the state of the electric role K640a.

The reflecting portion may be located inside the winning unit K200, or outside the winning unit K200. In this case, a position different from the winning unit K200 can be visually recognized to understand the state of the electric gimmick K640a. The portion that performs the function of the upper edge portion K207a is also not limited to being located inside the winning unit K200, and may be located outside the winning unit K200.

In the above embodiments, the electric device K640a and the movable plate K251 slide in the front-rear direction and the surface shown to the player does not change, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, they may be configured to rotate in the front-rear direction on a rotation axis along the left-right direction. In this case, the surface shown to the player in the closed state (front surface) is different from the surface shown to the player in the open state (rear surface in the closed state, top surface in the open state), so by making the appearance of the front and back surfaces different (for example, changing the color), the background color of the decorative cover K220 (small design K221b, etc.) can be changed depending on whether the state is open or closed.

In the above embodiments, the electric prop K640a and the movable plate K251 are described as being formed in red, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the electric prop K640a and the movable plate K251 may be formed in different colors, and any color other than red, such as blue or yellow, may be used. The color of the small design K221b is not limited to white, and any color, such as gold or yellow, may be used. Regardless of which color is used, it is possible to configure cases in which the color becomes the background color of the small design K221b and cases in which it does not, and the appearance of the small design K221b can be changed. In this case, the presentation effect can be improved by selecting a color that is relatively easy to distinguish.

In each of the above embodiments, the vertical displacement of the lifting device K500 is configured to be increased relative to the displacement of the rotating member K430, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement amount of the lifting device K500 may be the same as the displacement amount of the rotating member K430. In this case, the operation of the lifting device K500 can be made more stable.

In the above embodiments, the switching device K460 is used to limit the descent of the right component of the lifting device K500, so that the lifting device K500 can be configured to have a one-sided falling state in a tilted position with the right side downward, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lifting device K500 may be configured to have a second tilted position with the left side downward by displacing the left component from a tilted position with the right side downward to a falling position state. In this case, the lifting device K500 may be controlled to change from a performance standby state to the second tilted position, or may be controlled to change to the second tilted position via a one-sided falling state. The former can make the state change caused by the lifting device K500 more noticeable, while the latter can make it easier to stabilize the attitude of the lifting device K500 after the state change.

In each of the above embodiments, the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K578 is kept constant regardless of the direction, and the sliding speed of the moving device K560 in the left-right direction is controlled to change, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is sufficient if at least one of the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K578 or the sliding speed of the moving device K560 in the left-right direction can be controlled to change in accordance with the direction.

In the above embodiments, the operation control when the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K578 is within a predetermined design value has been described, but the operation control of the rotating decorative member K578 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of issuing an error signal to prevent the performance piece from operating when the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K578 is not within a predetermined design value, a new rotation speed of the drive motor KMT51 may be calculated from the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K578, and the moving device K560 may be slid left and right at the newly calculated rotation speed. This makes it easier to associate the stop position after rotation of the rotating decorative member K578 with the stop position after movement of the moving device K560, and allows the linkage to be properly executed in the same way as when the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K578 is within a predetermined design value.

In addition, instead of recalculating the speed, the timing at which the rotating decorative member K578 stops may be controlled to be shifted from the timing at which the sliding movement of the moving device K560 stops.

In each of the above embodiments, the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting device K500 and the operation of the state change device K470 are based on the operation of a common rotating member K430, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting device K500 and the operation of the state change device K470 may be controlled to be operated by driving forces from different driving devices.

In each of the above embodiments, the arm member K735 of the second movable device K701 is described as rotating, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable rack that slides in the vertical direction may be configured, and the amount of lift of this movable rack may be transmitted to the main decorative member K760. In this case, the movable rack can be configured to reduce the left-right width.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the second movable device K701 suppresses the rotation of the arm member K735 by abutting the arc-shaped portions K732 and K734 at their surfaces, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable stopper member that can be positioned to stop the arm member K735 at an intermediate position may be provided. In this case, depending on the positioning of the stopper member, it is possible to configure a case in which the arm member K735 is easily stopped at an intermediate position and a case in which it is not stopped at an intermediate position.

In each of the above embodiments, in the third movable device K801, the start of rotation of the extended rotation member K874 has been described as occurring from a position in which the longitudinal direction of the extended rotation member K874 is aligned along the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extended rotation member K874 may also start from a position in which the longitudinal direction of the extended rotation member K874 faces upward. In this case, the rotation angle until the longitudinal direction of the extended rotation member K874 faces downward can be increased.

In the above embodiments, the third movable device K801 is configured to prevent the return movement of the plate-shaped parts K811, K821, and K831 by suppressing excessive rotation of the extended rotating member K874, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the short-side width of the long hole K884 may be sufficiently secured to secure a gap between the cylindrical protrusion K876a, a gap between the long hole K884 may be secured by shaving off the flesh of the cylindrical protrusion K876a on the rotating shaft side, or an arc-shaped part may be provided at the tip of the long hole K884 along the movement trajectory of the cylindrical protrusion K876a to avoid interference between the cylindrical protrusion K876a and the long hole K884.

In each of the above embodiments, the extended rotating member K874 of the third movable device K801 is described as coming into contact with a surface at the end of its rotation and stopping, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical protrusion K876a may be configured to stop at the end of its rotation by being received in a recess.

In each of the above embodiments, examples of the inclination angles of the external inclined portion K2060e of the base plate K2060, the inclined opening K2060w, the inclined surface K2121 of the light irradiation device K2100, the inclined surface K3122 of the light irradiation device K3100, etc. are described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it is sufficient that the shape is such that the light can be refracted or reflected so that the light can reach the object to be illuminated.

In each of the above embodiments, the light emitting means K2111, K3111 are arranged along a curved line, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be arranged along a straight line extending in a specific direction, such as left and right or up and down.

In each of the above embodiments, the light from the light emitting means K2111, K3111 travels toward the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be formed to travel toward the inside of the play area. In this case, the play area can be illuminated even by light from an area that is hidden when viewed from the front (an area outside the play area), making the play area brighter.

In each of the above embodiments, the light is reflected or refracted at the inclined opening K2060w before passing through the opening of the base plate K2060 and travels to the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the light may be caused to travel to the front side by reflection or refraction at the edge of the inclined opening K2060w after passing through the opening of the base plate K2060. Also, an object capable of reflecting or refracting light may be placed in the opening of the base plate K2060, and the object may change the direction of travel of the light within the opening of the base plate K2060 to cause the light to travel to the front side. In this case, light can be delivered to the player from places other than the edge of the opening of the base plate K2060.

In the above embodiments, the driving force transmission mechanism has been described for each of the first movable device K401, K4401, the second movable device K701, K4701, and the rear layer movable device K800, K4800, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is possible to use the transmission mechanism of one device as the transmission mechanism of another device. In this case, it is of course possible to use it by changing the left-right direction to the up-down direction, and it is also possible to use only one of a pair of left-right devices, or vice versa.

In each of the above embodiments, the first visual object K4580x and the second visual object K4580y have different shapes, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be visually recognized as objects of the same shape.

In the above embodiments, the outer shape of the rotating decorative member K4578 is described as being quadrangular, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be hexagonal or octagonal. In this case, by making it a polygon with a identifiable center, it is possible to make it more aesthetically pleasing to view when rotated. Also, as long as the shape has a identifiable center, it does not have to be polygonal, and it may be a shape with a curved outer shape.

In addition, the object to be viewed is not limited to the object to be displayed. For example, an object may be stored inside the moving device K4560, or may be supplied to the moving device K4560 from the outside (e.g., via a route via the long device K540) and configured to be moved at an appropriate time to a position visible through the viewing window portion K4578a (a position behind the rotating decorative member K4578).

In each of the above embodiments, a viewing window portion K4578a is formed in the rotating decorative member K4578, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a viewing portion through which the first viewing object K4580x and the second viewing object K4580y can be viewed may be displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 inside the inner circumference of the rotating decorative member K4578.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the viewing window portion K4578a is formed as an opening has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate thickness of the area formed as the viewing window portion K4578a may be made thinner than the plate thickness of other parts to increase transparency and make the rear side visible.

In the above embodiments, in the first and second performance control examples in which the viewing window portion K4578a is rotated, the rotation angle in one direction is 90 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the angle may be greater than 90 degrees (e.g., 120 degrees) or less than 90 degrees. In this case, the rotation angle may be changed in response to the speed of the ball flowing down.

In each of the above embodiments, the first visual object K4580x is arranged to the right of the rotation axis of the rotating decorative member K4578, and the second visual object K4580y is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the rotating decorative member K4578, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right may be reversed, or the objects may be arranged above and below the rotation axis. In any case, the different visual objects K4580x and K4580y can be viewed in different positions that are diametrically opposed to the rotation axis of the rotating decorative member K4578, making it easier to avoid mistakes by the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the third presentation control example, in which an arrow shape pointing to the right is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580, and the first presentation use example have been described separately, but these may be executed simultaneously or independently. If executed simultaneously, during a round of play, the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated each time a ball is detected, and an arrow shape may be lit up and displayed near the center of the display device K4580, and when the round of play ends, control in the first presentation use example may be executed. This makes it possible to complicate the viewing pattern inside the rotating decorative member K4578.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first visual object K4580x or the second visual object K4580y is displayed via the display device K4580 and the case where an arrow shape is displayed have been described, but the display mode is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an arrow shape may be displayed instead of the display of the first visual object K4580x or the second visual object K4580y, or the first visual object K4580x or the second visual object K4580y may be displayed instead of the display of the arrow shape. This can increase the variety of visual modes.

In the above embodiments, the first visual object K4580x or the second visual object K4580y is displayed through the display device K4580, and an arrow shape is displayed. However, the visual appearance is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inside of the moving device K4560 may be formed as a cavity, and an object having a shape similar to the first visual object K4580x or the second visual object K4580y may be arranged inside the cavity at a position visible through the rotating decorative member K4578 (or the transparent plate when a transparent plate is formed that blocks the inner periphery of the rotating decorative member K4578). In this case, the visual appearance changes due to the collision between the objects, improving the presentation effect.

In each of the above embodiments, the long device K540 tilts its posture around a rotation axis in the front-to-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that its posture can be tilted around a rotation axis in the left-right direction or a rotation axis in the up-down direction. In this case, the visibility (viewing angle) of the front side of the moving devices K560 and K4560 can be changed, improving the presentation effect.

In addition, for example, when configuring the posture to tilt around a vertical rotation axis, it may be possible to configure the posture so that the plane KS49 of the transparent film K4891 and the longitudinal direction of the long device K540 are parallel.

In each of the above embodiments, the upper rotating member K476 supports the curved receiving portion K537 of the upper member K530 from below to maintain the long device K540 in a position in a standby state for performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a member that supports the upper member K530 by sandwiching it from above may be configured separately from the upper rotating member K476. By applying a biasing force to this member toward the upper rotating member K476, a resistance force against the upward displacement of the upper member K530 can be generated. This makes it possible to prevent the position of the long device K540 from changing during transport.

In the above embodiments, the entire upper rotating member K476 is made of a resin material, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating tip K476b that contacts the upper member K530 may be made of a resin material, and the area near the support hole K476a that does not contact the upper member K530 may be made of a metal material. This allows the durability to be improved by the metal material, and wear on the upper member K530 that contacts the rotating tip K476b to be minimized.

In each of the above embodiments, the rotating decorative member K4578 has been described as having an opening formed on the central side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating decorative member K4578 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material in a shape that closes the inner opening, and configured to cover the display area of the display device K4580 from the front. In this case, the change in visibility due to the reflection of light caused by the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be applied to the entire display area of the display device K4580, improving the presentation.

In each of the above embodiments, an arrow shape is displayed on the display device K4580 in response to a winning game ball, but the content displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspects. For example, the display area of the display device K4580 may display a flowing spherical object.

The spherical object may be displayed flowing straight down the center of the display area of the display device K4580, or may be displayed flowing down a position offset to the left or right of the center of the display area. Flowing down a position offset to the left or right can notify the player of a visual pattern that suggests a direction. The flowing down of the spherical object also includes the spherical object rolling on a rolling surface.

In this case, the speed of the spheres flowing down either the left or right side may be different from the speed of the spheres flowing down the other side immediately afterwards. For example, the spheres flowing down the left side immediately afterwards may be displayed as flowing slower than the spheres flowing down the right side.

The flow direction of the spheres displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 may be directly downward, or may be a direction with left and right components. For example, if spheres flowing down the right side are displayed to flow in a downward right direction, and spheres flowing down the left side are displayed to flow in a downward left direction, the difference in the visual appearance of the display area can be made greater between when the spheres flow down the right side of the display area and when they flow down the left side of the display area.

The rotation drive control of the rotating decorative member K4578 may also be set to correspond to the position at which the spherical object displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 flows down and the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578.

For example, when a spherical body flows down to the right of the center of the display area of the display device K4580, the rotating decorative member K4578 may rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, and when a spherical body flows down to the left of the center of the display area of the display device K4580, the rotating decorative member K4578 may rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the relationship between the flow direction of the spherical body and the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be set to the opposite of that described above.

In this case, without visually checking the display area of the display device K4580, it is possible to predict from the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 where the spherical bodies are flowing down the display area of the display device K4580. This eliminates the need to unnecessarily enlarge the display area of the display device K4580, allowing the display device K4580 to be implemented at low cost and ensuring a large viewing area for the third pattern display device K81, which is placed on the back side of the display device K4580.

In this case, the speed at which the spherical bodies flow down may be made to correspond to the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578. For example, the rotating decorative member K4578 may be configured to rotate slowly when the spherical bodies flow down slowly, and to rotate quickly when the spherical bodies flow down quickly. This allows the player to visually recognize a unified operating mode between the display area of the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

The display mode of the display area of the display device K4580 may be different when the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotating and when it is stopped. For example, as described above, when the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotating, a spherical body flowing down the display area of the display device K4580 is displayed, while when the rotating decorative member K4578 is stopped, a logo, character, or decorative shape having a different shape from the spherical body flowing down the display area of the display device K4580 may be displayed as a still image. Alternatively, it may be configured to display a moving image instead of a still image.

In this case, the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 can create a viewing pattern in which spherical bodies flow down the display area of the display device K4580, and a viewing pattern in which spherical bodies do not flow down the display area of the display device K4580, thereby improving the presentation effect of the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In addition, the flowing position, flow speed, and flow direction of the spherical body displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 may be made to correspond to the position of the game area through which the game ball actually passed, the actual flow speed, and the actual flow direction.

For example, during a right-handed play period, the long device K540 may be controlled to assume a second right-side tilted attitude, and a spherical body may be controlled to be displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the first specific winning hole K65a, the second specific winning hole K640, and the second specific winning hole K650a, which are located on the path along which the right-handed game ball flows down.

In this case, by displaying the spheres in accordance with the actual layout of the winning holes and the actual direction in which the gaming balls that entered the winning holes flow, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the actual position to which the gaming balls flowed.

In other words, each time a game ball is detected at the first specific winning port K65a, a spherical object is displayed in the right range of the display area of the display device K4580, flowing vertically downward and then diagonally downward to the right, and at the same time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is driven to rotate clockwise.

In addition, each time a game ball is detected at the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a, a spherical object is displayed in the left range of the display area of the display device K4580, flowing vertically downward and then diagonally downward to the left, and at the same time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is driven to rotate counterclockwise.

As a result, the player can see where the game ball has flowed and which winning hole K65a, K640, K650a it has passed through by visually checking the display mode of the display device K4580 and the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 without having to stare at the winning holes K65a, K640, K650a, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

When the flow speed of the game ball is considered based on mechanical energy from the placement height of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a, the absolute value of the flow speed of the game ball when passing through the winning openings K65a and K640, which are placed at the same placement height, is considered to be roughly the same. The absolute value of the flow speed of the game ball when passing through the second specific winning opening K650a, which is placed at a lower height, is considered to be greater than the absolute value of the flow speed of the game ball when passing through the winning openings K65a and K640, to the extent that potential energy is converted into kinetic energy.

Therefore, when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the first specific winning port K65a or the second winning port K640, the absolute value of the flow-down speed of the spherical body displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 and the absolute value of the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 are controlled to be larger (faster) when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the second specific winning port K650a, compared to the absolute value of the flow-down speed of the spherical body displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 and the absolute value of the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the second specific winning port K650a.

As a result, even if the display position of the spherical body in the display area of the display device K4580 and the rotation direction of the rotating decorative member K4578 are the same when the gaming ball passes through the second winning port K640 and when the gaming ball passes through the second specific winning port K650a, the player can determine whether the gaming ball passed through the second winning port K640 or the second specific winning port K650a by allowing the player to understand the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578.

Therefore, the player can see where the game ball has flowed and which winning hole K65a, K640, K650a it has passed through by visually checking the display mode of the display device K4580 and the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 without having to stare at the winning holes K65a, K640, K650a, thereby reducing the burden on the player during the game.

In each of the above embodiments, as a third example of performance control, an arrow shape is displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise each time a ball is detected entering the first specific winning port K65a, and the display mode and rotation mode are controlled so that they are not constant but can change, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

That is, in the third example of performance control, the speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous game ball entering the display device K4580 are controlled to be the same as or faster than the speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous game ball entering the display device K4580.

This allows for a situation in which the greater the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening K65a, the greater the flow rate of the spheres displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation rate of the rotating decorative member K4578. Furthermore, the greater the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening K65a, the greater the number of numbers displayed on the third pattern display device K81, such as "+15," which evoke the payout of winning balls, and the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 and the display (number) of the numbers can be viewed in series.

Therefore, the player can associate the number of balls entering the first specific winning port K65a with the flow speed of the spherical bodies and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580, and understand them. In this case, it is easy to predict the number of prize balls that will be paid out from the flow speed of the spherical bodies and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580, so that attention to the display of the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 can be improved.

In the third example of performance control, the change (speed increase) in the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous game ball entering the display device K4580 relative to the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580 based on the subsequent game ball entering the display device K4580 may be the same each time or may be different.

For example, if the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be set to five different speeds from the first stage (slow) to the fifth stage (fast), when the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 based on the previous game ball entering the game are set to the first stage, it is possible to implement not only a pattern in which the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 based on the subsequent game ball entering the game change to the second stage, but also a pattern in which the flow speed changes to the third to fifth stages.

In this case, for example, if the next ball enters the display device K4580 before the displayed spherical body has completely flowed below (two balls enter in succession in a short time), the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be increased by one step, and if the next ball enters the display device K4580 before the spherical body displayed based on the next ball has completely flowed below (three balls enter in succession in a short time), the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be increased by two steps. In this case, the change in the flow speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 can allow the player to understand that balls are entering the display device K4580 frequently.

In the third example of performance control described above, the display of the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the ball entering the first specific winning port K65a, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, if a ball does not enter the first specific winning port K65a and does not enter the second specific winning port K650a either by flowing leftward over the top surface of the movable plate K251 of the second electric role device K250, the display of the display device K4580 may be switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated when the ball enters the left ball guide section K210.

While the right-side ball guide section K210 has the same function as the outlet K71, the left-side ball guide section K210 has the same function as the general winning port K63, and prize balls are paid out based on the ball's entry. That is, just like a ball entering the left-side ball guide section K210, when a ball enters the general winning port K63, the display on the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated.

In this case, the display on the display device K4580 and the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 can alert the player to the presence of a ball that has flowed downstream without entering the first specific winning port K65a, and can prompt the player to reconsider the operation of the operating handle H51, such as whether the ball is being shot when the opening and closing plate K65b is in the closed state, and whether the strength of the ball shot is appropriate.

In other words, when all of the shot balls land in the first specific winning port K65a, the display of the display device K4580 does not change and the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate, whereas when some of the shot balls do not land in the first specific winning port K65a, the display of the display device K4580 changes and the rotating decorative member K4578 also rotates.

This allows the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 to be used as a barometer to inform the player whether the ball has been properly placed in the first specific winning port K65a, thereby increasing the player's attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In the above third example of performance control, the display of the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the ball entering the first specific winning port K65a, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a ball entering the left ball guide section K210 may not cause the display of the display device K4580 to be switched or the rotating decorative member K4578 to be rotated, but may be configured so that the display of the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the ball entering the general winning port K63.

In this case, the display on the display device K4580 and the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 can alert the player to the presence of the ball that has been guided to the left side of the rotating decorative member K4578 instead of being guided to the right on the side of the first specific winning port K65a, i.e., the top side of the rotating decorative member K4578, and can prompt the player to reconsider the operation of the operating handle H51, such as whether the ball's launch strength has weakened.

In other words, when the situation in which the game ball continues to flow down to the right in the position upstream of the rotating decorative member K4578 is maintained, the display of the display device K4580 will not be switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 will not rotate, but when even one game ball flows down to the left in the position upstream of the rotating decorative member K4578, the display of the display device K4580 will be switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 will not rotate.

Therefore, when the display of the display device K4580 is switched or the rotating operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 is performed, the launch strength is weakened to the extent that the game ball flows to the left at a position upstream of the rotating decorative member K4578, so a player who sees the display of the display device K4580 or the rotating operation of the rotating decorative member K4578 can be prompted to reconsider the operating strength of the operating handle H51.

This allows the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 to be used as a barometer to inform the player whether the ball has been properly placed in the first specific winning port K65a, thereby increasing the player's attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In the above third example of performance control, the display of the display device K4580 and the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 are based on the game ball entering the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the display of the display device K4580 or the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 may occur regardless of the game ball entering the ball.

In this case, the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be configured to be increaseable based on the operation of the operation button member H181 (pushing, tapping repeatedly, pressing and holding, etc.). For example, if the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 is configured to be able to be set to five different speeds from the first stage (slow) to the fifth stage (fast), the stage to which the speed can be increased by operating the operation button H181 (maximum increase) can be associated with the expected profit the player can obtain (the number of prize balls paid out in a jackpot game (the number of jackpot rounds won), the expected jackpot probability in a special drawing, etc.), thereby increasing the motivation to operate the operation button member H181.

The above-mentioned upper limit increase setting may also be applied to the upper limit increase in the flow speed of the spheres and the rotation speed of the rotating decorative member K4578 when the display of the display device K4580 or the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 occurs based on a ball entering the first specific winning port K65a. This can increase the attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.

In each of the above embodiments, a spherical body is described as being displayed near the center of the display device K4580, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spherical body may be made visible through the viewing window portion K4578a of the rotating decorative member K4578. In this case, for example, the spherical body may be configured to rotate and move together with the rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578. This allows the movement of the spherical body to be configured as a large arc.

For example, the spherical body may move in an up-down direction, and then diagonally left-right direction, while the rotating decorative member K4578 may stop rotating so that the viewing window K4578a is positioned in the path of the ball as it flows diagonally left-right. This allows the spherical body as a display and the rotating decorative member K4578 to be visually perceived as moving as one unit.

In the above embodiments, the visibility of the small design K221b is improved due to the difference in background color when the electric role K640a is in the open state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the visibility of the small design K221b may be improved when the electric role K640a is in the closed state. For example, the downstream light-emitting unit K212c is an LED that emits light visible to a player viewing with the direction view KDR21, and since the color of the light emitted from the downstream light-emitting unit K212c is red, the background color of the small design K221b can be made red (the color of light) as in the open state of the electric role K640a, thereby improving the visibility of the small design K221b.

In the above description, the light from the downstream light-emitting unit K212c passes through the electric device K640a and reaches the player's eyes when the electric device K640a is in an open state, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the light from the downstream light-emitting unit K212c may be blocked by the electric device K640a.

In this case, each time the state of the electric prop K640a is switched, the background color seen is switched between that seen by the electric prop K640a and that seen by the light from the downstream light-emitting unit K212c, so it is possible to perform a performance that utilizes the change in the visible state caused by the difference in the background colors. This makes it possible to produce a change (variation) in the visible state that corresponds to the state of the electric prop K640a being switched.

Although the above describes a case where the visibility of the small design K221b is improved by the light from the downstream light-emitting element K212c, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the color of the light from the downstream light-emitting element K212c is white, the difference between the color of the small design K221b and the background color (color of the light) is reduced, thereby reducing the distinctiveness of the small design K221b.

The light emission mode of the light emitting unit K212 is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be constantly lit (or turned off) regardless of the open/closed state of the winning unit K200, or it may be controlled to change its mode (color change, light intensity change) when a ball is detected, or it may be controlled to change its mode (color change, light intensity change) in conjunction with the display performance of the third pattern display device K81.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the visible state of the light changes depending on how the light is blocked by the ball that entered the winning unit K200 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple detection sensors may be provided in the flow path, and the illumination state of the light may be controlled to change based on the ball passing through the detection sensors. In this case, the visible state of the light can be changed even in parts other than the flow path of the ball.

In the above embodiments, the movable plate K251 and the electric prop K640a are formed from a colored resin material, which allows for the use of the unique stickiness and strength of colored resin, thereby improving the design freedom of thickness and shape while improving durability, thereby suppressing damage caused by impacts from balls. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. In this case, even if the movable plate K251 or the electric prop K640a overlaps with the ball, the ball will not become invisible, and the visibility of the ball flowing down can be improved.

In the above embodiments, the small design K221b is placed in front of the position where the ball flows down at an incline in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be placed in front of the position where the ball flows down at an incline in the front-back direction, as in the guide opening K203. In this case, the change in the up-down position of the ball is slower than when it falls vertically, and the left-right position of the ball does not change, so the period during which the small design K221b and the ball overlap when viewed from the front can be made longer, and the change in the appearance of the pattern due to the small design K221b can be produced for a longer period.

In each of the above embodiments, the inclination forming part K867 of the rear layer side movable device K800 is configured as a fixed piece, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be movable several degrees in the rotation direction of the extended rotation member K874, and the phase when the extended rotation member K874 is stopped may be changed. In this case, it is possible to switch between a state in which the return of the extended rotation member K874 is prevented (a state in which the inclination forming part K867 is arranged above the rotation axis of the extended rotation member K874) and a state in which the return of the extended rotation member K874 is not prevented (a state in which the inclination forming part K867 is arranged below the rotation axis of the extended rotation member K874).

In each of the above embodiments, the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are configured to be able to extend the same distance from the left and right, and when closed, the opposing edges of the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are positioned near the left-right center position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure a state in which the boundary position of the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 is shifted to either the left or right from the left-right center.

In this case, if the boundary position is to the left of the left-right center, the second movable device K4701 is positioned below the range opened and closed by the right-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, and if the boundary position is to the right of the left-right center, the second movable device K4701 is positioned below the range opened and closed by the left-side plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831. This improves the design freedom of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 and the second movable device K4701.

In the above embodiments, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are configured to be able to transmit light from the back, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board may be arranged on the back side of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, and the visibility (color and pattern) of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be configured to be changeable depending on the light emission mode of the LEDs arranged on the illumination board. In this case, it is possible to easily create the effect of forming a screen for the third pattern display device K81 by opening and closing.

In the above embodiments, ribs are formed on the rear side of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 to make the transparency different, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the rear side of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be configured with a curved surface to make the thickness non-uniform. In this case, the shape of the rear side (e.g., lens shape) can make the way light is refracted differently for each part, improving the presentation effect.

In addition, in the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, the case where ribs are formed along the contour KOL481 etc. (ribs are formed on the inner part) has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, ribs may be formed along the outer shape of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831. In this case, ribs are not necessarily formed along the entire outer shape, but may be formed on two parallel sides, and by increasing the rigidity of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, the movement resistance of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be reduced.

In the above embodiments, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are formed from a light-transmitting resin material, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, an openable/closable member having multiple louvers in a rectangular frame may be arranged. In this case, if the louvers are formed from a non-transmitting material, depending on the state of the louvers, it is possible to switch between a state in which the pattern on the plate surface of the louvers is visible and a state in which the display of the third pattern display device K81, which is positioned between the plates of the louvers and on the rear side, is visible.

In addition, if the louvers are made from a transparent material, depending on the state of the louvers, it is possible to switch between a state in which the pattern on the surface of the louvers is illuminated by light from the third pattern display device K81 and a state in which the display of the third pattern display device K81, which is positioned between the plates of the louvers and on the rear side, is visible.

In each of the above embodiments, the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 that slide left and right are described as being made up of multiple plate-shaped members that are linked together in a series, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there may be only one plate-shaped member that slides left and right. In this case, the possibility of failure can be reduced compared to a linked configuration.

The sliding direction of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 is not limited to the left-right direction, but may be the up-down direction, a diagonal direction, or a direction having a front-back component. In other words, it may be a straight line or a curved direction centered on a specified axis.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the right end of the long device K540 falls based on the displacement of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 from the closed state when the moving device K4560 is sliding diagonally, and the moving direction of the moving device K4560 changes. In this case, the moving speed of the moving device K4560 may be the same before and after the change in the moving direction, or may change. For example, if the moving speed of the moving device K4560 is slower before the change in the moving direction, the period until the moving device K4560 moves to the left end can be lengthened while making the displacement of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 desirable, thereby improving the attention to the moving device K4560.

In each of the above embodiments, the movement direction of the pair of left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, K4831 is symmetrical, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be in the vertical direction. In this case, it may be symmetrical up and down, or it may be configured so that they move upward (or downward) together while keeping their left and right positions. Also, the movement direction may have a component in the front-back direction.

The size of the moving device K4560 in each of the above embodiments is not limited in any way. It can be set to any size, from a diameter of about 10 mm to a size larger than the center frame K86.

Furthermore, the display by the display device K4580 is not limited in any way. It may be displayed in the same color on the entire surface, or may be formed in a form that reflects light toward the player (such as a mirror shape). In this case, the player can see his/her own facial expression through the display area of the display device K4580, improving the presentation effect.

In each of the above embodiments, the moving device K4560 slides by itself, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, multiple moving devices K4560 may be arranged in a front-to-back configuration, and the multiple moving devices K4560 may slide in sequence along the front sides of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. In this case, the variety of displacement patterns of the multiple moving devices K4560 associated with the displacement of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be increased, and the variety of visual patterns of the moving devices K4560 can be increased.

In each of the above embodiments, the third pattern display device K81 is described as being positioned inside the center frame K86 when viewed from the front, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least a portion of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 may be positioned outside the center frame K86. In this case, the flowing game balls can be illuminated by light from the third pattern display device K81 to improve the presentation effect.

In each of the above embodiments, a mode in which symbols having a specific meaning, such as "SFME," are visually recognized in sequence, has been described as an example of a mode in which symbols are visually recognized in sequence, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is not necessary for the number of characters to be four, and any character string, such as "SF," "SME," or "FE," may be drawn to attention and visually recognized in sequence. The symbol "F" formed on the upper decorative member K330 can also be used as the arbitrary character string. By illuminating the part to be focused on and not illuminating the other parts, it is possible to easily draw attention to the arbitrary character string and prevent the player from misreading it.

Also, among the symbols, two or more directional symbols (for example, arrows) may be connected and visually recognized. Also, instead of a connection between symbols, a connection between movable props may be visually recognized as they move toward or away from each other. In this case, it does not matter if one of them is stopped.

For example, the second rear display K81b has been described as a display parallel to the inclination of the long-length device K540, but when the long-length device K540 is in a performance standby state (horizontal position), it may be displayed as an arrow pointing to the right without being tilted, and may be switched to a display in the tilting direction in conjunction with the operation of the long-length device K540. This makes it possible to produce the effect of displaying the second rear display K81b before the operation of the long-length device K540.

Furthermore, for example, the manner in which objects are viewed in a series can include a viewing manner in which objects of the same type are viewed together, and a viewing manner in which related viewing modes are viewed as a partition that separates different areas. For example, if the long device K540 is placed on the front side of the third pattern display device K81, and the displays in each area on either side of the long device K540 are related to each other, they are viewed in a series of viewing modes.

Note that examples of related displays include pairs of displays that are viewed in a series of viewing patterns (e.g., a group of symbols, adults, allies, etc.) and pairs of displays that are in a relative relationship (e.g., male and female, friend and foe, win or lose, etc.).

In the above embodiments, the case where the pattern is formed on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pattern may be formed on the front side of the long-length device K540. In this case, the pattern formed on the front side of the long-length device K540 and the pattern formed on the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be configured to be visible in a continuous visual manner.

The visible range of the long-length device K540 may vary depending on the position and posture of the long-length device K540 itself, as well as the range hidden by the moving device K4560. A series of visible modes may be configured to be switchable in response to the position of the moving device K4560.

Depending on the positioning of the long-length device K540, the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be visible only on the upper or lower side of the long-length device K540, or the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be visible on both the upper and lower sides of the long-length device K540. In at least one of these cases, the pattern formed on the front side of the long-length device K540 and the pattern formed on the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be configured to be visible in a continuous viewing manner.

In each of the above embodiments, the performance displays KER471, KER472 are formed in a shadow shape that is displayed in a range that surrounds a portion of the periphery of the second movable device K4701, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a video of the visual appearance of the second movable device K4701 when viewed from the front may be displayed. In this case, even if the second movable device K4701 becomes unable to operate due to a malfunction of the second movable device K4701, the operating appearance of the second movable device K4701 can be visually confirmed by the display of the third pattern display device K81. Also, unlike when the second movable device K4701 is operated, there is an advantage that no drive noise or vibration is generated.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the operating unit arranged in the operating unit K4300 and the pattern formed on the winning unit K200 can be viewed in a series of viewing modes, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pattern that can be viewed in a series of viewing modes together with the pattern formed on the operating unit arranged in the operating unit K4300 may be formed on the front side of the left side decorative device K350, or a configuration may be made in which the pattern formed on the operating unit arranged in the operating unit K4300, the pattern formed on the winning unit K200, and the pattern formed on the second winning unit K5270 can be viewed in a series of viewing modes. This makes it possible to expand the area that can be viewed in a series of viewing modes.

In each of the above embodiments, the plate-shaped parts K4811, 4821, and 4831 are formed to a length that spans the top and bottom of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the long-length device K540 operates in conjunction with the operation of the plate-shaped parts K4811, 4821, and 4831, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, 4821, and 4831 may be formed to cover the upper or lower area of the long-length device K540 in a specific tilted position (i.e., configured with a shape that, when closed, forms a triangle formed on the underside of the long-length device K540 in a tilted position).

In this case, by displaying an animation in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 on the side of the long device K540 where the left and right plate-shaped portions K4811, 4821, and 4831 are not arranged, it is possible to execute an animation display corresponding to the sliding movement of the moving device K4560.

In this case, the length of the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, 4821, 4831 formed in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the elongated device K540 may be shortened so that the display of the third pattern display device K81 is visible on the opposite side of the elongated device K540 across the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, 4821, 4831. This allows a video display corresponding to the sliding movement of the moving device K4560 to be executed even in the area on the opposite side of the elongated device K540 across the left and right plate-shaped parts K4811, 4821, 4831.

In each of the above embodiments, the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated in response to the detection position of the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the clockwise rotation of the rotating decorative member K4578 may be the first performance control example described in the first performance use example, and the counterclockwise rotation may be the second performance control example described in the first performance use example. This allows the rotating decorative member K4578 to rotate in small increments even if the game balls frequently flow down. Note that at the reversal position of the operation in the first and second performance control examples, the display is controlled so that the first visual object K4580 is visually recognized through the viewing window K4578a.

In each of the above embodiments, the light refraction section K5151 that refracts the light incident on the light-guiding member K5150 toward the front side has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light refraction section may be formed on the back side of the base plate K5060, and the refraction section may be used to refract the light incident on the base plate K5060 toward the front side. In this case, the position at which the refracted light is visible can be positioned forward of the light-guiding member K5150, making it easier for the player to see.

In addition, since the light refraction section is arranged on the base plate K5060 itself, the front gutter member K91 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the base plate K5060, so that a dramatic effect due to light refraction can be produced even in areas where the light guide member K5150 cannot be arranged.

The light refraction section may be arranged not only to allow the light to be viewed in a series of viewing patterns, but also to draw attention to a specific position. For example, the light refraction section K5151 may be arranged so that the light viewed through the light refraction section K5151 illuminates the vicinity of the first winning opening K64, the first specific winning opening K65a, or the like, the through gate K67, the winning unit K200, or the like.

In the above embodiments, the decorative cover K5280 is configured to display symbols in Roman letters, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to display symbols in numbers. In this case, if a number related to the gameplay (e.g., the specifications display), such as "80%", is displayed, the gameplay can be notified to the player through the glass unit H16 before the player starts playing.

In addition, by configuring the decorative cover K5280 so that a shadow is cast as the game ball flows down the back of the cover, changing the appearance of the numerical symbols (for example, the left corner of the top and bottom center appears dark and the appearance changes to "30%"), it is possible to provide numerical notifications that can only be grasped once play has begun.

For example, the "80%" that is first seen indicates the probability of a jackpot of the first special symbol, which starts the lottery at the first winning slot K64 that can be entered when playing with a left-handed play that does not allow the ball to flow down the decorative cover K5280 side, and the "30%" that is seen when the ball flows down the back side of the decorative cover K5280 during right-handed play indicates the percentage of the highest round jackpot among the jackpots of the second special symbol, which starts the lottery at the second winning slot K640 that can be entered during right-handed play, making it possible to effectively use the change in the visible numbers to provide the player with a meaningful notification.

In addition, by forming the "%" in a position that does not overlap with the ball's flow path in a front view, similar to the third contour portion K5285 and the third formation portion K5286, it can be viewed in the same manner regardless of whether the game ball is flowing down or not.

In addition, the above-mentioned "80%" may be displayed in small white letters in the area surrounded by an outline, and the white letters may be made difficult to see by shining a white light on them while the game ball is not flowing down the back of the decorative cover K5280, and the white letters may be made visible by the shadow of the ball when it flows down the back of the decorative cover K5280. The content of the notification is "You can select setting 6 or a different setting, but when setting 6, it is 80%, and no mention is made of other settings." In this case, the content of the notification from the beginning is the same, "80% when setting 6," but by making the "when setting 6" part difficult to see before the ball is fired with a right hit, the gaming machine can be attractively displayed regardless of whether the setting has been determined or not.

In each of the above embodiments, a decorative cover K5280 is disposed in front of where a curved path is formed by the flow path component K5271, and a pattern is formed at a position that overlaps with the flowing ball, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a flow path may not be formed, and the decorative cover K5280 may be disposed in front of the range in which the game ball can fall freely. In this case, the period during which the flowing ball and the pattern on the decorative cover K5280 overlap can be shortened, making it easier to maintain the visibility of the pattern.

The flow path formed by the flow path component K5271 is configured as a curved path that combines multiple straight paths that are inclined in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the path may include curved sections, or the flow path may be configured only with curves.

The flow path may also have a portion that extends in the front-to-rear direction (inclined in the front-to-rear direction). In this case, the displacement of the game ball flowing down when viewed from the front can be slowed down, so the period during which the game ball overlaps with the pattern of the decorative cover K5280 can be lengthened.

In each of the above embodiments, the non-transparent forming portion K5282a is formed in a rectangular shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in an arrow shape, or any other symbol. This makes it possible to inform the player of the meaning of the symbol, and reduces the burden on the player while playing.

Although the non-transparent forming portion K5282a has been described as being opaque to light, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be less transparent than the forming portion K5282, but may be light-transmitting rather than opaque. This makes it possible to perform light effects using the non-transparent forming portion K5282a.

In each of the above embodiments, the decorative cover K5280 is fixed to the front side of the flow path component K5271, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative cover K5280 may be configured to be rotatable clockwise around an axis near the lower left end of the first contour portion K5281, making it possible to configure a state in which the pattern is positioned in front of the ball flow path and a state in which the pattern is retracted from the front of the ball flow path. This makes it possible to switch the visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path component K5271.

In this case, the entire pattern may be rotated, or only a part of the pattern may be rotated. For example, only the changed areas K5282b, K5284b below the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c may be rotated, and the positions of the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c and the changed areas K5282b, K5284b above the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c may be maintained. In this case, the position of the pattern in the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c can be kept unchanged regardless of the rotation, and notifications by the non-changed areas K5282c, K5284c can be constantly executed.

In the above embodiments, the decorative cover K5280 is placed in front of a ball flow path that does not have any branches, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may branch at the downstream end of the second inclined portion K5274. In this case, the non-transparent forming portion K5282a may be placed in front of all of the branched flow paths, or the non-transparent forming portion K5282a may be placed in front of one branched flow path and the non-transparent forming portion K5282a may not be placed in front of the other branched flow path. In the latter case, by visually confirming that the non-transparent forming portion K5282a and the shadow of the ball overlap, the player can easily understand which branched flow path the ball has flowed down.

In the above embodiments, various specifications were made to maintain the visibility of the game ball passing behind the first contour portion K5281 as a representative example, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, similar specifications may be made for the large design K221a and the small design K221b. In this case, when a ball flows down the winning unit K200, the same effect as described for the first contour portion K5281 can be produced.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

In the above 111th embodiment, a pair of speaker assemblies H312 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the base member H311, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of speaker assemblies H312 may be separately arranged in the right decorative unit H14c, and a communication passage may be formed in the right decorative unit H14c to connect the spaces in which the pair of speaker assemblies H312 are arranged.

In the above 111th embodiment, a pair of mounting spaces H300F in which the speaker assemblies H312 are arranged is formed in the cosmetic unit H320, but three or more mounting spaces H300F may be formed and communicated with each other through a communication passage.

In the above 111th embodiment, the first communication passage H300C and the second communication passage H300D are formed by combining multiple members (arranged with a gap), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a hollow rod member may be arranged so that both ends are located in a pair of arrangement spaces H300F (the first space H300A or the second space H300B), and sound may be transmitted using the internal space of the rod member.

In addition, the covering member H343, which is formed in a bowl shape with an open front side, may be partially cut out on both left and right sides (in the direction of the arrows L-R) to allow sound to be transmitted through the internal space of the covering member H343. In this case, a communication passage (first communication passage H300C or second communication passage H300D) that connects a pair of installation spaces H300F (first space H300A or second space H300B) is formed in the center of the decorative unit H330, and the outside of the communication passage can be surrounded by the cosmetic unit H320, so that even if sound passing through the communication passage is transmitted along the inner wall of the communication passage and emitted outside the communication passage, the sound can be prevented from transmitting to the outside of the decorative unit H330. As a result, sound can be prevented from being emitted from any openings other than those formed in the decorative unit H330 (slit H331a1 (see FIG. 1843), sound emission opening H333b (see FIG. 1845), and detection opening H333a (see FIG. 1846)).

In the above 111th embodiment, 117th embodiment to 119th embodiment, and 147th embodiment to 151st embodiment, the case where the sound emitted (output) from one speaker H312a is emitted through the first communication passage H300C, H7300C, and the second communication passage H300D to the arrangement space H300F (first space H300A, second space H300B) in which the other speaker H312a is arranged is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive sound or collision sound when the displacement member is displaced may be transmitted through the first communication passage H300C, H7300C, and the second communication passage H300D to the arrangement space H300F (first space H300A, second space H300B) in which the other speaker H312a is arranged, making it difficult for the drive sound or collision sound to leak outside the pachinko machine H10.

In the above 119th embodiment and 147th to 151st embodiments, a case was described in which the first communication passage H300C formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the upper decorative unit H9014a is opened by displacing the upper panel H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second communication passage H300D formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the upper decorative unit H9014a may be configured to be opened by displacing the lower panel H333.

Furthermore, in the 119th embodiment, the case where the upper panel H9332 is rotated has been described, but the upper panel H9332 may be configured to slide and displace to open the first communication passage H300C, and if the upper panel H9332 can be displaced to a position that opens the first communication passage H300C, for example, the upper panel H9332 may be displaced toward the inside of the upper decorative unit H9014a to open the first communication passage H300C.

In the above 119th embodiment and 147th to 151st embodiments, the case where the upper panel H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336 is displaced in conjunction with the operation of the operation unit H180 has been described, but the upper panel H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336 may be displaced by operating the function adjustment operation unit H190 instead of the operation of the operation unit H180. In this case, the player can always change the state of the upper panel H9332 by operating the function adjustment operation unit H190. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the sound emission mode to suit the player's preferences, which can increase the player's interest.

In the above-mentioned 119th embodiment and 147th to 151st embodiments, the upper panel H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336 is displaced in conjunction with the operation of the operation unit H180. However, the upper panel H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336 may be displaced in conjunction with the operation of the operation handle H51 that controls the launch of the game ball (launching the game ball into the game area) or the passage of a specified sensor (through gate) in the game area.

In addition, various switches H208 that detect the operation of the operating handle H51 that controls the launch of the game ball, the passage of a predetermined sensor in the game area, and the operation of the operating unit H180 are connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPU H201 can execute various processes (extending the protruding member H36130a) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

In the above 119th embodiment and 147th to 151st embodiments, the upper plate H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336 is displaced to open the first communication passage H300C (changing the passage width of the first communication passage H300C), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the second communication passage H300D may be opened by displacing the lower plate H333.

In the 147th and 148th embodiments, a case has been described in which the plate member H37332h restricts communication of the space H9332d2 with the external space when the first communication passage H300C is opened, but this is not necessarily limited to this. When the first communication passage H300C is opened, the tip of the plate member H37332h may be positioned above the first communication passage H300C, and the space H9332d2 may be connected to the external space.

In this case, the direction of the light from the LED H38336a1 arranged in the light irradiation unit H38336 as in the 148th embodiment may be adjusted so that the player can see the light from the LED H38336a1 through the opening that connects the space H9332d2 to the outside space. This allows the player to directly see the light from the LED H383336a1, making it easier for the player to recognize that the sound emission state of the first communication passage H300C has been changed by the light.

Furthermore, the direction of the light from the LED H38336a1 arranged in the light irradiation unit H38336 may be adjusted so that the light from the LED H38336a1 is visible to the player through the first communication passage H300C that is connected to the outside space. In this case as well, the light can easily make the player aware that the sound emission state of the first communication passage H300C has changed.

In the above 119th, 147th, 149th, 150th, and 151st embodiments, the upper panels H9332, H37332, H39332, and H40332 are described as being formed from plate members, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and they may be formed from a light irradiation unit H38336 having a substrate member H38336a capable of irradiating light, as in the 148th embodiment.

In the above 119th embodiment and 147th to 150th embodiments, the first communication passage H300C is opened when drawing attention to the performance of the pachinko machine H10, but this is not limited to the above. The first communication passage H300C may be a closed passage when drawing attention to the performance of the pachinko machine H10, and the sound emitted from the pachinko machine H10 may be reduced so that the player can concentrate on the sound of the pachinko machine H10.

In the 150th embodiment, when the upper plate H40332 is displaced to open the first communication passage H300C, the upper plate H40332 is positioned in a state of being inclined upward toward the front side. However, the upper plate H40332 may be rotated (about 90 degrees) to a vertical position. In this case, it is preferable to configure the light irradiation unit H38336 having a substrate member H38336a capable of emitting light as in the 148th embodiment. In this way, when the first communication passage H300C is opened, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit H38336 can be directly viewed by the player without passing through the inside of the upper decorative unit H40014a, and multiple light-based presentation patterns can be created.

The rotation angle of the upper plate H40332 is not limited to that of the 150th embodiment, but is the same for the upper plates H37332, H39332, or the light irradiation unit H38336 in the 147th to 150th embodiments. That is, the upper plates H37332, H39332, or the light irradiation unit H38336 in the 147th to 150th embodiments may be configured to be rotatable (approximately 90 degrees) to a vertical position.

In the above 150th embodiment, the closing portion H40332p of the upper plate H40332 is disposed throughout the entire internal space of the first communication passage H300C, and the communication between the first spaces H300A through the first communication passage H300C is restricted. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a closing portion H40332p formed from a plate member having the same shape as the inner surface of the first communication passage H300C may be disposed inside the first communication passage H300C so as to block a portion of the first communication passage H300C, thereby restricting communication between the first spaces H300A.

In this case, the installation space of the closing portion H40332p arranged inside the first communication passage H300C can be reduced (i.e., the outer shape of the closing portion H40332p can be reduced), so when a light-emitting substrate member H38336a is arranged on the upper panel H40332, the light is prevented from being blocked by the closing portion H40332p. As a result, the performance effect of the light is prevented from being reduced.

In addition, the closing portion H40332p may not be disposed on the upper plate H40332, but may be disposed at a position unrelated to the upper plate H40332. For example, the closing portion H40332p may be disposed at a position that can be operated by a player or a worker (clerk) at the pachinko parlor, and the closing portion H40332p may be displaced inside the first communication passage H300C by operation by the player or the worker (clerk) at the pachinko parlor.

For example, the closing portion H40332p may be configured to be operable only by the pachinko parlor worker (staff member), and the closing portion H40332p may be displaced into the first communication passage H300C only when the speaker H312a of the pachinko machine H10 is damaged (broken down), so that sound is transmitted from the speaker H312a on one side to the speaker H312a on the other side when the speaker H312a is damaged.

In addition, for example, the performance of the pachinko machine H10 may displace the closing portion H40332p inside the first communication passage H300C, or displace the closing portion H40332p outside the first communication passage H300C. In other words, the communication state of the first communication passage H40332b may be changed (controlled) in conjunction with the performance of the pachinko machine H10. This allows the sound characteristics to be changed in accordance with the performance of the pachinko machine H10, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above 150th embodiment, the case where the closing portion H40332p is formed in a shape that fills the internal space of the first communication passage H300C has been described, but the closing portion H40332p may be formed in a shape that opens up a portion of the first communication passage H300C (leaving a space that can communicate).

In the 147th, 149th, and 151st embodiments, the upper plates H37332 and H39332 are formed in a plate shape, but the decorative part may be formed by protruding from the lower surface side of the upper plates H37332 and H39332 that close the upper side of the first communication passage H300C. In this case, when the first communication passage H300C is opened, the decorative part can be visually recognized by the player, and the area in which the decoration is formed in the front view can be increased. Note that the decorative part is preferably formed smaller than the passage width of the first communication passage H300C, and thus, when the upper side of the first communication passage H300C is closed by the upper plates H37332 and H39332, the decorative part can be accommodated inside the first communication passage H300C. As a result, there is no need to enlarge the upper decorative units H37014a, H39014a, and H41014a in the vertical direction due to the formation of the decorative parts, and the decorative area can be increased without increasing the size of the upper decorative units H37014a, H39014a, and H41014a.

In the above 150th embodiment, the case where the second displacement member H40337 is displaced in the up-down direction has been described, but the second displacement member H40337 may be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction or rotated. For example, when the second displacement member H40337 is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction along the upper panel H40332 that closes the first communication passage H300C, the displacement area of the second displacement member H40337 in the internal space of the upper decorative unit H40014a can be minimized. This makes it possible to secure space for arranging the second displacement member H40337.

In the above 119th embodiment, 147th embodiment to 151st embodiment, the upper plate H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336 has been described as an example, but in addition to the upper plate H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336, or instead of the upper plate H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336, other means may be adopted. As the other means, any means that is configured to be displaceable can be adopted. If the means is configured to be displaceable, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment (upper plate H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 or the light irradiation unit H38336) can be obtained.

In the above 119th embodiment and 147th to 151st embodiments, the speaker H312a has been described as an example, but other means may be used in addition to the speaker H312a or instead of the speaker H312a. Any means capable of vibration or movement may be used as the other means. As long as the means is capable of vibration or movement, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment (speaker H312a) can be obtained.

In the above 120th embodiment, a case was described in which the fan H10480 rotates (blows air) when the player is not playing the pachinko machine H10, but the configuration may be such that the player can select whether or not to generate air.

In this case, it is preferable to open the upper end opening H473a towards the player playing the pachinko machine H10 (i.e., to form an opening on the inner cover member H420 side of the right decorative unit H10014c), so that the wind from the fan H10480 can be directed towards the player playing the pachinko machine H10. Therefore, if a player feels that the room temperature in the store is high, the player can turn on the fan H10480 so that the wind from the fan H10480 can be directed towards the player, allowing the player to play comfortably.

In addition, instead of the player having to select whether or not to generate wind, the fan H10480 may be configured to rotate in accordance with the effects of the pachinko machine H10. For example, when performing an effect that creates high expectations for a "big win," rotating the fan H10480 can increase the player's anticipation of a "big win" as they feel the wind from the fan H10480.

In the above 120th embodiment, the case where wind is blown by the fan H10480 has been described, but any mechanism capable of blowing wind may be used, for example, a mechanism that slides and displaces may be used to push out air and blow wind. In addition, the wind generated by the vibration of the speaker H312a when sound is emitted (output) from the speaker H312a may be used to move the air in the passage space H400A and expel foreign matter from the opening H473.

In the above 121st embodiment, the passage space H11400A (see FIG. 1949(a)) formed by the erected portion H11477, the upper panel H332, and the engaging portion H11477b is opened to the front side of the front frame H14, but the passage space H11400A may be opened to the back side of the front frame H14.

In this case, foreign objects entering through the gap between the standing portion H11477 and the top panel H332 can be guided to the rear side of the front frame H14. In other words, the foreign objects can be expelled to a position that is not visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In the above 111th embodiment, the bent portion H452, which serves as a guide surface for passing foreign matter through the passage space H400A, is formed from the first outer lens member H450 that is capable of transmitting light. However, the bent portion H452 may be formed from a separate member from the first outer lens member H450. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first outer lens member H450 from becoming dirty due to foreign matter, and it is possible to stabilize the amount of light irradiated through the first outer lens member H450.

In the 111th embodiment, the base member H510 is set below the lower tray forming member H530, but the lower tray forming member H530 may be arranged below the base member H510, a protruding portion may be formed that protrudes from the underside of the base member H510, and the lower end of the lower tray forming member H530 and the protruding tip of the protruding portion of the base member may be abutted against the floor surface to make the front frame H14 stand on its own. In this case, the area that is visible to the player can be increased by the amount that the front frame H14 can be arranged below the base member H510. As a result, the playing area and the decorative surface can be increased, making it easier to increase the interest of the player.

In the above 111th embodiment, the case where the lower side of the front frame H14 is abutted against the floor surface to make the front frame H14 stand on its own was described, but the upper side of the front frame H14 may also be abutted against the floor surface to make the front frame H14 stand on its own. In this case, it is preferable to form a protrusion H583 on the upper surface of the decorative unit H320 (upper panel H332) of the upper decorative unit H14a and to position the decorative unit H320 below the upper end of the base unit H310. In this way, when the upper side of the front frame H14 is abutted against the floor surface, the upper end of the base unit H310 and the protruding tip of the protrusion H583 formed on the decorative unit H320 can be abutted against the floor surface to make the front frame H14 stand on its own.

In the above 124th embodiment, the second slide plate H14563 (protrusion H14563b) is brought into an extended state by displacing the slide plate H14562 in response to the operation of the ball removal lever H52. However, the configuration may be such that the second slide plate H14563 is not provided and the protrusion H583 is provided.

In this case, by arranging the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 above the protruding part H583 (on the opposite side of the protruding part H583 across the first decorative plate H541) in conjunction with the operation of the ball removal lever H52, the protruding part H583 can be supported (reinforced) by the pressing piece H14562a of the slide plate H14562 when a force acts on the protruding part H583. This prevents the protruding part H583 from being deformed or damaged when a ball abuts against the protruding part H583 when ejecting the ball from the lower tray H50, when the protruding part H583 is grasped when opening the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11, or when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor.

In the above 111th, 124th and 125th embodiments, the protrusions H583, H14563b are formed to the right of the bottom opening H553a through which the balls are dispensed from the lower tray H50, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a pair may be formed on both the left and right sides of the bottom opening H553a.

In the above 111th, 124th and 125th embodiments, the protrusions H583, H14563b are described as being curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusions H583, H14563b may be formed in a straight line from one end to the other end, or the protrusions H583, H14563b may be formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape.

In the above 111th, 124th and 125th embodiments, the protrusions H583, H14563b are used to prevent the balls from scattering when the balls are removed. However, the protrusions H583, H14563b may be used not only as a contact surface for the balls when the balls are removed, but also as a part of the presentation. For example, the protrusions H583, H14563b may be provided with a light-emitting means capable of emitting light, so that light is emitted from the protrusions H583, H14563b when the player performs a specified operation such as a ball removal operation. This allows the player to recognize through the light that the specified operation has been performed correctly. Furthermore, the light presentation can give the player a sense of exhilaration as the balls are removed.

In the above 124th and 125th embodiments, a case was described in which the tip of the protrusion H14563b does not protrude from the front frame H14 (upper and lower plate unit H14015) when the protrusion H14563b is retracted to the inside of the first decorative plate H541 and the lower protective plate H580. However, when the protrusion H14653b is retracted, the tip of the protrusion H14563b may protrude from the front frame H14 (upper and lower plate unit H14015).

In other words, the protruding portion H14563b may be displaced between a first protruding state in which the protruding portion H14563b protrudes to the maximum extent from the upper and lower plate unit H14015, and a second protruding state in which the protruding distance of the upper and lower plate unit H14015 is less than that of the first protruding state. In this case, the protruding height of the protruding portion H14563b in the first protruding state or the second protruding state can be set to an appropriate protruding height, such as a height suitable for making the front frame H14 self-supporting (a height that allows the center of gravity to be positioned in an appropriate position), a height that prevents the balls discharged from the discharge port H561a from flying out of the box, or a height that makes it easy to insert and remove the box.

In the above 124th and 125th embodiments, the sliding plate H14562, which is displaced by the operation of the ball removal lever H52, comes into contact with the second sliding plate H14563 having the protrusion H14563b, thereby displacing the protrusion H14563b. However, the configuration may also be such that the player's operation (for example, operation of the operation unit H180) is detected by a sensor, and the second sliding plate H14563 is displaced by a separately arranged driving means to change the protruding height of the protrusion H14563b. In this case, no resistance acts on the operating member operated by the player when displacing the second sliding plate H14563, making it easier for the player to operate the operating member.

The various switches H208 that detect the operation of the operation unit H180 are connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPU H201 can execute various processes (displace the protrusion H14563b) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

In the above 124th and 125th embodiments, the protrusion H14563b is displaced in the vertical direction to protrude from the underside of the upper and lower plate unit H14015, but this is not limited to vertical displacement, and it may be rotated to protrude from the underside of the upper and lower plate unit H14015. In this case, it is preferable that the protrusion H14563b is formed in a straight line, which makes it easier to arrange the protrusion H14563b along the underside of the upper and lower plate unit H14015 when it is not protruding.

In the above 124th embodiment, the second slide plate H14563 having the protrusion H14563b is described as being arranged on the upper and lower tray unit H14015, but this is not necessarily limited to this; for example, it may be arranged on the right decorative unit H14c or the upper decorative unit H14a.

When installing on the right decorative unit H14c or upper decorative unit H14a, the second slide plate H14563 can be displaced by operating the function adjustment operation unit H190, which is installed on the front frame H14 in place of the ball removal lever H52, to cause the protrusion H14563b to protrude from the right side when viewed from the front, and the right side surface of the right decorative unit H14c can be used as an installation surface when the front frame H14 is temporarily placed on the floor.

In the above 111th embodiment, the rib H583b is formed in front of and behind the curved surface of the curved wall H583a, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and for example, the rib H583b may be formed at the connection of each curved wall H583a. For example, if the rib H583b is formed at the connection of each curved wall H583a on the concave side of the curved wall H583a, the rib H583b can prevent the player's fingers from slipping against the protruding portion H583 when opening the front frame H14 against the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835). As a result, it is easier to open the front frame H14 against the outer frame H11.

The rib H583b may be formed on only one side of the front side of the curved wall H583a. This prevents the player's fingers from being easily caught by the rib H583b on the curved wall H583a when opening the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11 (see FIG. 1835). As a result, it becomes easier to open the front frame H14 relative to the outer frame H11.

In the above 111th, 127th, and 128th embodiments, the case where the operation unit H180 is placed on the connecting portion H555, H18555, or the convex portion H17515 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the function adjustment operation unit H190 may be placed on the connecting portion H555, H18555, or the convex portion H17515.

In the above 126th and 145th embodiments, the case where the substrate unit H16344 is displaced in the vertical direction and protrudes from the underside of the upper decorative units H16014a, H35014a was described, but this is not limited to sliding in the vertical direction, and it may also be rotated. In other words, it may be rotated to protrude from the underside of the upper decorative units H16014a, H35014a.

In the above 126th, 145th and 146th embodiments, the case where the board unit H16344 or the protruding member H36160a is protruded by a predetermined operation of the player or worker has been described, but the protruding height of the board unit H16344 or the protruding member H36160a may be changed by detecting the player's operation (for example, operation of the operation unit H180) with a sensor and displacing the board unit H16344 or the protruding member H36160a with a separately arranged driving means. In this case, the operation resistance of the board unit H16344 or the protruding member H36160a does not act on the operation member operated by the player, making it easier for the player to operate the operation member.

The sensors (each switch H208 (see FIG. 1842)) that detect the player's operations are connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPU H201 can execute various processes based on the signals output from the various switches H208 (for example, displacing the board unit H16344 or the protruding member H36160a).

In the above 125th and 145th embodiments, the engaging pieces H15443, H35331c are described as being formed so as to be operable by a player or an operator (store clerk), but the engaging pieces H15443, H35331c may also be driven by a separately provided drive motor. In this case, the protrusion H14563b or the board unit H16344 can be retracted at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined game state is reached, or the timing when a predetermined operation is performed.

For example, in the 125th embodiment, if the protrusion H14563b is configured to be retracted at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, the protrusion H14563b can be retracted at a predetermined time after the ball removal lever H52 is operated, so that the protrusion H14563b can be prevented from being left in an extended state (non-play state). As a result, the ball removal hole can be prevented from being in an open state when the next player starts playing, and the game balls sent to the lower tray H50 during the game ball lending operation can be prevented from being paid out directly into the 1000-ryo box, which increases the player's effort (picking up the game balls in the 1000-ryo box).

The drive motor (other device H228 (see FIG. 1842)) that drives the engagement pieces H15443 and H35331c is connected to the input/output port H225 of the voice lamp control device H113, and is driven based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110.

In the 125th embodiment, when the protrusion H14563b is configured to be retracted at the timing when a predetermined game state is reached, for example, the protrusion H14563b is configured to be retracted when the jackpot ends and the game state returns to the normal game state. In this case, the protrusion H14563b can be retracted at the timing when the jackpot ends and game balls are no longer paid out to the lower tray H50. Therefore, the player does not need to operate the protrusion H14563b. In this case, the ball removal lever H52 is driven by a separate drive motor to displace the ball removal lever H52 with the start of a jackpot, making it unnecessary to operate the ball removal lever H52 at the time of a jackpot. As a result, the player can concentrate on the presentation of the pachinko machine H10.

In this case, the drive motor (other device H228 (see FIG. 1842)) that drives the ball removal lever H52 is connected to the input/output port H225 of the voice lamp control device H113, and is driven based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110.

Furthermore, in the 125th embodiment, when the protrusion H14563b is configured to be retracted when a specific operation is performed, for example, the protrusion H14563b is configured to be retracted when the state return switch H120 (see FIG. 1834) is operated. In this case, if the protrusion H14563b does not return during play, the protrusion H14563b can be returned to the retracted position by operating the state return switch H120.

In the 146th embodiment, when the board unit H16344 is configured to be retracted at the timing when a specified operation is performed, for example, the board unit H16344 is configured to be retracted when the front frame H35014 is arranged in a closed position relative to the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1835). In this case, since there is no need to operate to displace the board unit H16344 to the retracted position after the front frame H35014 is disposed in the inner frame H12, the work of assembling the front frame H35014 to the inner frame H12 can be simplified.

In the above 124th and 125th embodiments, the protrusion H14563b is caused to protrude from the underside of the upper and lower tray units H14015, H15015 in conjunction with the operation of the ball removal lever H52, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion H14563b may be caused to protrude from the underside of the upper and lower tray units H14015, H15015 in conjunction with the operation of the ball ejection lever H54.

In this case, when the player stops playing, the protrusion H14563b can be extended in response to the operation of the ball discharge lever H54 that dispenses balls from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50. By extending the protrusion H14563b when the player stops playing, the game balls dispensed from the lower tray H50 to the coin box can be prevented from scattering.

In addition, in the above 126th embodiment, a case was described in which the board unit H16344 extends from the upper decorative unit H16014a in conjunction with the operation of the ball removal lever H16052, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board unit H16344a may extend from the upper decorative unit H16014a in conjunction with the operation of the ball discharge lever H54.

In this case, if the ball discharge lever H54 is left in a pressed state, the next player to play can be made aware that the ball discharge lever H54 remains pressed, and can return the ball discharge lever H54 to a specified position. This prevents the game ball from being dispensed from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50 instead of being stored in the upper tray H17 when the next player performs a ball lending operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the player's effort (returning the game ball dispensed to the lower tray H50 to the upper tray H17).

In the 124th, 125th, 126th and 145th embodiments, the protrusion H14563b or the board unit H16344 is extended by operating the ball release lever H52, H16052 or the cylinder lock H20. However, for example, the protrusion H14563b or the board unit H16344 may be extended by operating the operation handle H51 that controls the launch of the game ball (launching the game ball into the game area), passing through a predetermined sensor (through gate) in the game area, or operating the operation unit H180. In this case, the protrusion H14563b or the board unit H16344 can be extended depending on the game state, so that the extension of the protrusion H14563b or the board unit H16344 can be used as part of the presentation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, various switches H208 that detect the operation of the operating handle H51 that controls the launch of the game ball, the passage of a predetermined sensor in the game area, and the operation of the operating unit H180 are connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPU H201 can execute various processes (extending the protrusion H14563b or the board unit H16344) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

In addition, in the 124th and 125th embodiments, when the game is in play, the protruding portion H14563b can be extended, so that the protruding portion H14563b can be reliably extended when game balls are dispensed from the lower tray H50. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls dispensed into the coin box from scattering.

In the above 146th embodiment, the protruding member H36130a is extended by operating the ball throwing stop lever H132a. However, for example, the protruding member H36130a may be extended in response to the operation of the operating handle H51 that controls the launch of the game ball (launching the game ball into the game area), the passing of a specified sensor (through gate) in the game area, or the operation of the operation unit H180.

In addition, various switches H208 that detect the operation of the operating handle H51 that controls the launch of the game ball, the passage of a predetermined sensor in the game area, and the operation of the operating unit H180 are connected to the input/output port H205 (see FIG. 1842), and the MPU H201 can execute various processes (extending the protruding member H36130a) based on the signals output from the various switches H208.

In the above 124th to 126th embodiments, 145th embodiment, and 146th embodiment, the second slide plate H14563, the board unit H16344, and the overhang member H36130a have been described as examples, but in addition to the second slide plate H14563, the board unit H16344, and the overhang member H36130a, or instead of the second slide plate H14563, the board unit H16344, and the overhang member H36130a, other means may be used. As the other means, any means that is configured to be displaceable can be used. If the means is configured to be displaceable, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment (the second slide plate H14563, the board unit H16344, and the overhang member H36130a) can be obtained.

In the above 124th to 126th embodiments, 145th embodiment, and 146th embodiment, the ball removal lever H52, cylinder lock H20, and ball stop lever H132a have been described, but in addition to the ball removal lever H52, cylinder lock H20, and ball stop lever H132a, or instead of the ball removal lever H52, cylinder lock H20, and ball stop lever H132a, other means may be used. As other means, any means that is configured to be displaceable can be used. If the means is configured to be displaceable, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiments (ball removal lever H52, cylinder lock H20, and ball stop lever H132a) can be obtained.

In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which the displacement member H790 was displaced relative to the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773) fixed to the lower frame member H720, but the displacement member H790 may be fixed to the lower frame member H720 and the light emitting means H773b may be displaced relative to the displacement member H790. In this case, the position of the light source of the light emitting means H773b can be changed, so that the player can notice (visually recognize) the movement of the light source accompanying the displacement of the light emitting means H773b, making it easier for the player to see the change in the state of the light accompanying the movement of the light source. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, neither the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773) nor the displacement member H790 may be fixed to the lower frame member H720, and the light emitting means H773b (substrate member H773) and the displacement member H790 may be displaced independently relative to the lower frame member H720.

In the above 111th embodiment and 153rd to 156th embodiments, the case where the driving means H780 is rotationally displaced relative to the base means H770 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rail member may be provided on the base means H770, and the driving means H780 may be linearly displaced in the left-right direction along the rail member.

In the above 111th embodiment and 153rd to 156th embodiments, the displacement member H790 is displaced relative to the drive means H780 by the inertial force generated when the drive means H780 is displaced. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a solenoid may be separately provided in the drive means H780, and the displacement member H790 provided in the drive means H780 may be displaced by driving the solenoid.

In this case, the solenoid (other device H228 (see FIG. 1842)) that drives the driving means H780 is connected to the input/output port H225 of the voice lamp control device H113, and is driven based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110.

In the above 111th embodiment, the displacement member H790 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction relative to the driving means H780. However, the displacement member H790 may be disposed so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction relative to the driving means H780. In this case, the displacement member H790 can be slid and displaced in the rotation direction of the driving means H780 by the inertial force of the rotation of the driving means H780. Therefore, the displacement amount of the displacement member H790 disposed at the tip of the driving means H780 can be increased while narrowing the rotation range of the driving means H780. As a result, the amount of displacement of the displacement member H790 can be secured while reducing the arrangement space of the driving means H780, thereby enhancing the presentation effect due to the displacement of the displacement member H790.

In the above 111th, 152nd and 153rd embodiments, the case where the driving means H780 (displacement members H790, H42790, H43790) rotates relative to the base means H770 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited thereto, and the driving means H780 (displacement members H790, H42790, H43790) may be configured to slide and displace relative to the base means H770. In this case, it is preferable to configure the driving means H780 (displacement members H790, H42790, H43790) to rotate or linearly displace on a plane perpendicular to the light irradiation direction of the substrate member H773 of the base means H770. This is because the state of the light can be easily changed by the displacement of the displacement members H790, H42790, H43790.

In the above 111th embodiment, the case was described where the displacement member H790 is configured to be displaceable in the range where it overlaps with the substrate member H773 in a front view, but the displacement area of the displacement member H790 (driving means H780) may be set to an area that includes a range that does not overlap with the light emitting means H773b in a front view. In other words, the displacement range of the displacement member H790 (driving means H780) may be enlarged in the left-right direction to form a state where it does not overlap with the light emitting means H773b in a front view and a state where it overlaps with the light emitting means H773b in a front view. In this case, the visibility of the light emitting means H773b can be increased, thereby improving the presentation effect due to the displacement of the displacement member H790.

In the above 111th, 152nd and 153rd embodiments, the displacement members H790, H42790 are connected to the upper base member H771 and the lower base member H772, and the substrate member H773 is disposed on the upper base member H771 and the lower base member H772. However, the displacement members H790, H42790 may be connected to the lower frame member H720, and the substrate member H773 may be disposed on the lower frame member H720 (i.e., the displacement members H790, H42790 and the substrate member H773 may be disposed on the lower frame member H720).

In the above 152nd and 153rd embodiments, a single oscillating device H42730, H43730 is provided, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and multiple oscillating devices H42730, H43730 may be arranged in a line. This allows multiple colors to be displayed simultaneously, and multiple light effects can be created using the oscillating devices H42730, H43730, improving the light effect.

In this case, the number of displacement members H42790 arranged on each of the oscillating devices H42730, H43730 may be different (e.g., one) from the number of substrate members H773 (first diffusion members H43774) of each of the oscillating devices H42730, H43730.

Accordingly, for one displacement member H42790, the light emitted from each substrate member H773 and color-coded by each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e) of the first diffusion member H43774 can be visually recognized by the player from around the displacement member H42790. This improves the presentation effect due to the displacement of the displacement member H42790 and the light of the substrate member H773. Note that the number of displacement members H42790 is not limited to one, and it is sufficient that there are a small number of displacement members H42790 compared to the number of first diffusion members H43774 (i.e., it is sufficient that it is possible to visually recognize multiple colors of light emitted from one displacement member H42790).

In addition, when two or more displacement members H42790 are arranged, each displacement member H42790 may be arranged adjacent to each other (combined) on the front side of the base member H773, so that the player can visually recognize that one displacement member H42790 is arranged on the front side of the base member H773.

In this case, the leakage of light from between the displacement members H42790 can be suppressed by turning off the light emission of the light emitting means H773b in a position where light can be emitted between the displacement members H42790, or by blocking the light emitted between the displacement members H42790 with the second displacement member H43795. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the adjacent (combined) displacement members H42790 as a single displacement member H42790.

In the above 152nd and 153rd embodiments, the displacement members H42790, H43790 are formed from a resin material that does not transmit light, but a part of the displacement members H42790, H43790 may be formed from a resin material that can transmit light. In this case, the first diffusion members H774, H43774 on the rear side can be made difficult to see in the non-light-transmitting area, while the light irradiated through the first diffusion members H774, H43774 can be made visible to the player in the light-transmitting area.

In the above 153rd embodiment, the second displacement member H43795 is formed from a resin material that does not transmit light. However, it may be formed from a transparent resin material that transmits light, and a lens member capable of concentrating light or a diffusion member capable of diffusing light may be disposed at both ends of the second displacement member H43795 to change the appearance of the light visually recognized through the edges (both ends) of the displacement member H790. This makes it possible to make the light emitted from the periphery of the displacement member H790 stand out.

In the above 152nd and 153rd embodiments, the case where the left and right width of the displacement member H42790 is formed smaller than the left and right width of the first diffusion members H774, H43774 in a front view has been described, but the left and right width of the displacement member H42790 may be formed larger than the left and right width of the first diffusion members H774, H43774.

In the above 152nd and 153rd embodiments, the displacement member H42790 and the second displacement member H43795 are described as being rotationally displaced, but the displacement member H42790 and the second displacement member H43795 may be slidably displaced. This allows the position of the displacement member H42790 and the second displacement member H43795 relative to the first diffusion member H774, H43774 (substrate member H773) to be maintained, thereby preventing problems caused by light blocked and reflected by the displacement member H42790 and the second displacement member H43795 entering other light-emitting areas.

In the above-mentioned 152nd and 153rd embodiments, since the displacement member H42790 and the second displacement member H43795 are rotationally displaced, the displacement area in the left-right direction when the displacement member H42790 and the second displacement member H43795 are displaced can be reduced. This makes it easier to arrange the rocking devices H42730 and H43730 inside the tilting device H710.

In the above 153rd embodiment, the case where the second displacement member H43795 is displaced to change the area where the light of the light emitting means H773b is irradiated onto the first diffusion member H43774 is described, but it is also possible to displace the first diffusion member H43774 relative to the substrate member H773 without providing a second displacement member, thereby displacing the area where the light of the light emitting means H773b is irradiated onto each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e) of the first diffusion member H43774.

In other words, by displacing the first diffusion member H43774 relative to the substrate member H773, the film in the light-non-transmitting area of the first diffusion member H43774 may be moved away from the front side of the substrate member H773.

In the above 156th embodiment, when the displacement member H46182 protrudes from the button portion H181 (when the tilting device H46710 is placed in the tilted position), the displacement member H46182 is configured to allow light emitted from the second substrate member H46742 to enter the bent portion H46182b of the displacement member H46182, but when the displacement member H41682 is housed inside the button portion H181, the arrangement of the second substrate member H46742 may be changed so that light from the second substrate member H46742 is allowed to enter the inside of the displacement member H46182 from the bent portion H46812b of the displacement member H46182.

In the above 152nd to 156th embodiments, the case where the oscillating devices H42730, H43730, H44730, H45700, and H46700 are arranged in one location has been described, but multiple oscillating devices H42730, H43730, H44730, H45700, and H46700 may be arranged side by side to allow the player to visually recognize the effects produced by multiple oscillating devices H42730, H43730, H44730, H45700, and H46700.

In the above 111th, 131st and 132nd embodiments, the driving means H780, H21780 and H22780 are displaced by the inertial force generated when the weight members H787b and H22787b are rotated or the inertial force generated when the abutting means H21786 is abutted against the weight members H787b and H22787b. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving means H780, H21780 and H22780 may be displaced by a crank connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor H781. In this case, the displacement caused by the drive of the drive motor H781 can be caused to the driving means H780, H21780 and H22780, so that the position of the driving means H780, H21780 and H22780 can be controlled more easily than when the displacement is caused by the inertial force.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 111th, 131st and 132nd embodiments, the driving means H780, H21780 and H22780 are described as being rotationally displaced relative to the base means H770, but the driving means H780, H21780 and H22780 may be slidably connected to the base means H770 by a slide rail.

In the above 153rd embodiment, the case where the displacement member H43790 is displaced by operating the button part H181 of the operation unit H180 has been described, but the displacement member H43790 may be displaced by operating each of the buttons H191 to H195 of the function adjustment operation part H190, rather than being linked to the operation of the operation unit H180. That is, the second displacement member H43795 may be configured to approach each of the films (center film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e) attached to the first diffusion member H774 by operating each of the buttons H191 to H195 of the function adjustment operation part H190. In this case, the distance between the second displacement member H43795 and each of the films can be adjusted by operating the function adjustment operation part H190. Therefore, the player can control the amount of light entering the gap between the second displacement member H43795 and each film, allowing the player to see the light emission according to their preference.

Although illustrations and explanations are omitted in the above 111th embodiment and 152nd to 156th embodiments, a light guide plate may be disposed between the operation unit H180, H45180, H46180 and the glass unit H16. The light guide plate has a reflecting portion that can reflect only light from a predetermined direction in a predetermined direction, and is configured to be light-transmitting. The light guide plate may also be configured to be displaceable.

In the above 111th embodiment and 152nd to 156th embodiments, the displacement members H790, H42790, and H43790 have been described as examples, but other means may be used in addition to the displacement members H790, H42790, and H43790, or instead of the displacement members H790, H42790, and H43790. Any other means may be used as long as it is configured to be displaceable. If it is configured to be displaceable, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment (displacement members H790, H42790, and H43790) can be obtained (in the 152nd and 153rd embodiments, a part of the displacement member H42790 is configured to be light-transmitting).

In the above 111th embodiment and 152nd to 156th embodiments, the substrate member H773 has been described as an example, but other means may be used in addition to the substrate member H773 or in place of the substrate member H773. Any other means may be used as long as it is configured to be able to emit light. As long as it is configured to be able to emit light, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment (substrate member H773) can be obtained.

In the above 111th embodiment and 152nd to 156th embodiments, the light emitting means H773b and the second displacement member H43795 have been described as examples, but other means may be used in addition to the light emitting means H773b and the second displacement member H43795, or instead of the light emitting means H773b and the second displacement member H43795. As the other means, any means configured to be able to change the amount of light can be used. If the means is configured to be able to change the amount of light, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiments can be obtained.

In the above 153rd embodiment, each film (central film H43774c, first film H43774d, second film H43774e) was described as an example, but other means may be used in addition to or instead of each film. As other means, any means configured to be able to change the color of the emitted light may be used. As long as the means is configured to be able to change the color of the emitted light, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment can be obtained.

In the above 154th to 156th embodiments, the tilting devices H710 and H46710 have been described as examples, but other means may be used in place of the tilting devices H710 and H46710. As the other means, any means configured to be able to transmit light may be used. As long as the means is configured to be able to transmit light, the same effects as in the above-mentioned embodiments can be obtained.

In the above 155th and 156th embodiments, the second substrate member H45718 has been described as an example, but other means may be used instead of the second substrate member H45718. As the other means, any means configured to be capable of emitting light may be used. As long as the means is configured to be capable of emitting light, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiments can be obtained.

In the above 111th embodiment and 152nd to 156th embodiments, the tilting devices H710 and H46710 have been described as examples, but other means may be used in place of the tilting devices H710 and H46710. As other means, any means configured to be able to displace the displacement members H790, H42790 and H43790 may be used. As long as the means is configured to be able to displace the displacement members H790, H42790 and H43790, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiments can be obtained.

In the above 111th embodiment, 133rd embodiment, and 25th to 140th embodiments, the recesses H821a1, H24821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1, and the second recess H23871 are formed as recessed grooves, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recess H821a1 may be formed as an opening that penetrates from front to back. In this case, the groove width of the recess H821a1 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball that moves back and forth is configured to abut against the opening edge of the recess H821a1.

In the above-mentioned 111th embodiment and 133rd to 140th embodiments, the recesses H821a1, H24821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1, the second recess H23871, and the protrusion H24821a2 are used to reduce the reaction force in the front-rear direction that the game ball receiving from the inner surface of the flow path when it comes into contact with the inner surface of the flow path. However, an elastic member may be disposed on the inner surface of the flow path to reduce the reaction force in the front-rear direction that the game ball receives from the inner surface of the flow path.

In the above-mentioned 111th embodiment and 133rd to 144th embodiments, the launching part H831 disposed on the other end side of the rotating body H112a2 is described as being made of an elastic material that can be elastically deformed, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and as long as it can absorb the impact when it comes into contact with the game ball on the launching rail H112a1, it may be made of, for example, a metal coil spring, and may absorb the impact when it comes into contact with the game ball with the spring part.

In the above-mentioned 111th, 133rd and 136th embodiments, the case where the curved recessed bottom portion on the rear side of the recess H821a1 of the guiding means H820 is positioned above the center of the game ball rolling on the launching rail H112a1 has been described, but the curved recessed bottom portion on the rear side of the recess H821a1 of the guiding means H820 may be positioned below the center of the game ball rolling on the launching rail H112a1.

In this case, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves wildly toward the rear side, the game ball can be made to abut above the recessed bottom of the recess H821a1. In other words, the game ball can be made to abut against an area that curves downward toward the rear side. Therefore, a reaction force in a downward direction can be applied to the game ball abutting the inner surface of the recess H821a1, and the game ball can be prevented from moving upwardly away from the rolling surface of the launching rail H112a1. As a result, the game ball launched by the launching means H830 can be prevented from moving wildly in the vertical direction.

In the above 111th embodiment, a case was described in which the ball throwing portion H882a (see FIG. 1904) is positioned slightly lower than the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 when the displacement member H882 is positioned at the second position (the position at which the game ball is thrown to the launch rail H112a1), but the ball throwing portion H882a (see FIG. 1904) may be positioned slightly higher than the center of the game ball rolling on the launch rail H112a1 when the displacement member H882 is positioned at the second position (the position at which the game ball is thrown to the launch rail H112a1).

In this case, the game ball moving wildly toward the front side (arrow F direction) can be made to abut against the end of the ball throwing section H882a on the lower side (arrow D direction). This allows a downward directional component to be imparted to the reaction force acting on the game ball abutting against the ball throwing section H882a. In other words, the reaction force that abuts against the ball throwing section H882a can be dispersed into a component that bounces back toward the rear side (arrow B direction) and a component that moves downward. This makes it possible to weaken the reaction force of the directional component that bounces back toward the rear side (arrow B direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by the launching means H830 from being launched into the game area of the game board H13 in a wild state in the front-to-rear direction, and the game ball can be stably launched into the game area of the game board H13.

Furthermore, when the game ball launched by the launching means H830 moves wildly toward the front side (the direction of arrow F), the game ball abuts against the lower end of the ball throwing section H882a, so that the game ball can be prevented from riding on the upper side of the rear side opening H172 and flowing back into the rear side opening H172. As a result, the ball can be sent from the launch position ball throwing unit H170 to the launch rail H112a1 in a stable manner.

In the above 111th embodiment and 136th to 140th embodiments, the rear portions H821a, H24821a, H25821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a of the guiding means H820, H24820, H25820, H27820, H29820, H30820 are formed inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) toward the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830 (arrow L direction) (relative to the top H112a4 of the launching rail H112a1 (see Figure 1905 (a))), but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the back surface H821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a of the guide means H820, H27820, H29820, H30820 may be formed parallel to the launch direction side (arrow L direction side) of the game ball by the launch means H830, and the recess depth of the recess H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 may be formed shallow along the launch direction of the game ball. In other words, the recess bottom of the recess H821a1 may be inclined toward the front side along the launch direction of the game ball.

In this case, the inclination of the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 makes it easier to apply resistance in the direction opposite to the launch direction to the game ball received in the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1. This makes it easier to slow down the speed of the game ball in the launch direction, making it easier to return the game ball to the launch rail H112a1 (the center of the rolling surface in the front-to-back direction). As a result, it becomes easier to stably send the game ball to the game area of the game board H13.

In the above 111th embodiment, the edge on the lower side (arrow D direction) of the recess H821a1 is positioned lower than the rear opening H172, and a game ball sent from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 is easily brought into contact with the recess H821a1. However, the edge on the upper side (arrow U direction) of the recess H821a1 may be positioned higher than the rear opening H172 to ensure that the game ball reliably contacts the recess H821a1 even when the game ball is sent from the rear opening H172 to the launch rail H112a1 with great force.

In the above 111th embodiment, 136th to 139th embodiments, and 30th embodiment, the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 are formed in the rear portions H821a, H27821a, H29821a, and H30821a, but the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 may be formed in the end portion of the base plate H60 (the boundary portion with the ball launching units H112a, H26112a, H27112a, H28112a, H29112a, and H30112a).

In this case, even if the position of the game board H13 relative to the inner frame H12 is shifted forward or backward, the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 formed in the base plate H60 can prevent a step in the forward or backward direction from being formed at the boundary between the base plate H60 and the ball launching units H112a, H26112a, H27112a, H28112a, H29112a, and H30112a. As a result, the sending of game balls from the ball launching units H112a, H26112a, H27112a, H28112a, H29112a, and H30112a to the game board H13 can be stabilized.

In addition, the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 do not have to be directly recessed into the base plate H60, but may be formed in a base member that is separately arranged on the base plate H60.

In the above 133rd embodiment, the recess H821a1 and the second recess H23871 are formed so that they partially overlap in the front-to-rear direction. However, the recess H821a1 and the second recess H23871 may be formed alternately in the launch direction of the game ball. In this case, when the recess H821a1 cannot suppress the force that moves back and forth, the second recess H23871 can continue to suppress the force that moves back and forth. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being sent from the guiding means H820 to the game board H13 in a state where it moves back and forth, and the game ball can be sent stably to the game area of the game board H13.

In the above 134th embodiment, the protrusion H24821a2 is curved and protrudes toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cross section of the protrusion H2481a2 in a direction perpendicular to the launch direction may be formed into an approximately triangular shape as long as it can impart an upward and downward force component to the reaction force acting on the game ball that contacts the protrusion H24821a2.

In the above 111th embodiment and 136th to 140th embodiments, the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 are recessed into a curved shape with a radius larger than the radius of the game ball. However, the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 may be formed into a curved shape with a radius smaller than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is received inside the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1, the game ball may come into contact with the lower or upper end of the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 111th embodiment and 136th to 140th embodiments, the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 are recessed to a size that can receive a portion of the game ball, but they may be recessed to a size that can receive the entire game ball.

In the above 111th embodiment and 134th to 144th embodiments, the launch rail H112a1, which serves as the rolling surface of the game ball, is formed in a V-shape. However, the rolling surface of the launch rail H112a1 may be formed with the recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 or the protrusions H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, and H34821a2 in the 111th, 134th to 144th embodiments, so that the game ball is sent along a predetermined trajectory by the recesses or protrusions formed on the rolling surface.

In the above 111th embodiment and 134th to 144th embodiments, the respective ball launching units H112a, H24112a, H25112a, H26112a, H27112a, H28112a, H29112a, H30112a, H31112a, H32112a, H33112a, and H34112a may be configured to be interchangeable depending on the arrangement of the game board H13 relative to the inner frame H12. According to this, the ball launching units H112a, H24112a, H25112a, H26112a, H27112a, H28112a, H29112a, H30112a, H31112a, H32112a, H33112a, and H34112a are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the game board H13 of each pachinko machine H10, thereby reducing the variation in the launch of game balls for each pachinko machine H10.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 111th embodiment and 134th to 144th embodiments, the arrangement of the first guide members H821, H24821, H25821, H26821, H27821, H28821, H29821, H30821, H31821, H32821, and H33821 relative to the base member H810 may be adjustable. For example, the screw fastening portions of the first guide members H821, H24821, H25821, H26821, H27821, H28821, H29821, H30821, H31821, H32821, and H33821 may be formed as elongated holes, so that the arrangement positions relative to the base member H810 may be adjustable. This allows the positioning of the first guide members H821, H24821, H25821, H26821, H27821, H28821, H29821, H30821, H31821, H32821, and H33821 to be changed depending on the state of the game ball being sent to the game board H13, thereby adjusting the strength of the game ball being launched to the game board H13.

In the above 135th embodiment, the recess depth of the recess H25821a1 is formed sufficiently deep relative to the groove width of the recess H25821a1, and when a game ball is received in the recess H25821a1, two points at the upper end and the lower end are formed so that the game ball can abut against the recess. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the groove width and recess depth of the recess H25821a1 may be set so that when a game ball is received in the recess H25821a1, two points at the lower end of the recess H25821a1 and the recess bottom surface abut against each other.

In the above 111th embodiment and 24th to 141st embodiments, the recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29 ... Although the case where 30821a1 is formed has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 may be formed in the game board H13 after rolling on the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b. The same is true for the protrusions H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, and H34821a2 in the 134th embodiment and the 141st to 144th embodiments.

For example, recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 may be recessed in the ball throwing area between the inner rail H61 and outer rail H62 that guide the game ball to be thrown into the game area of the game board H13, to suppress the game ball from moving wildly in the front and rear directions before it enters the game area. In other words, recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 may be recessed at a position just before the ball is thrown into a specified area, to stabilize the throwing of the game ball in the specified area.

In the above 139th embodiment, a case was described in which the recess H29821a1 on the launch direction side is formed with a downward inclination with respect to the launch direction when viewed from the front, and the recess H29821a1 on the opposite side to the launch direction is formed with an upward inclination with respect to the launch direction when viewed from the front, with the boundary being the connection part between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b. However, the recess H29821a1 on the launch direction side may be formed with an upward inclination with respect to the launch direction when viewed from the front, and the recess H29821a1 on the opposite side to the launch direction may be formed with a downward inclination with respect to the launch direction when viewed from the front.

In the above 140th embodiment, the recess H30821a1 is formed with a downward incline relative to the launch direction, but it may be formed with an upward incline. In this case, the game ball received in the recess H30821a1 can be sent in a direction that moves it upward away from the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, so that the step at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b can prevent the game ball from moving wildly in the vertical direction.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 139th and 140th embodiments, the recesses H29821a1, H30821a1 are formed on the upper side of the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The recesses H29821a1, H30821a1 may be formed at other connection parts or branching points of the ball sending path, and the game ball may be received in the recesses H29821a1, H30821a1 to make it easier for the game ball to flow down in a predetermined direction.

In the above-mentioned 142nd to 144th embodiments, the protrusions H32821a2, H33821a2, and H34821a2 are respectively formed in a generally rectangular shape and a generally triangular shape in a front view, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed in a generally circular or semicircular shape in a front view.

In the above-mentioned 142nd to 144th embodiments, the convex parts H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2 on the rear side and the second convex part H32871 on the front side are formed at different positions (alternately) in the direction of launch of the game ball by the launching means H830, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the convex parts H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2 on the rear side may be positioned so as to overlap with the second convex part H32871 on the front side in a front view. In this case, the space between the convex parts H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2 on the rear side and the second convex part H32871 on the front side is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 142nd to 144th embodiments, the convex portions H32821a2, H33821a2, and H34821a2 on the rear side and the second convex portion H32871 on the front side are described as protruding toward the inside of the ball throwing path, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and they may be formed as a recess like the recess H821a1 in the 111th embodiment.

In the above 137th and 138th embodiments, the guide means H27820, H28820 of the ball launching units H27112a, H28112a are arranged on the game boards H27013, H28013, and the guide means H27820, H28820 guide the ball launched by the launching means H830. However, the guide means H27820 may be formed at a position away from the launching means H830.

For example, a guide means H27820, H28820 other than the guide means H27820, H28820 arranged on the ball launching unit H27112a, H28112a may be arranged in a part of the area where the game ball is launched from the ball launching unit H27112a, H28112a and launched from the end of the rolling part H8221b to the outer rail H62. In this case, the guide means H27820 can correct the posture (throwing direction) of the game ball that flies from the end of the rolling part H821b to the outer rail H62 and is sent. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flying to the outer rail H62, dropping between the rolling part H821b and the outer rail H62, and being collected by the foul ball receiving part H146.

In the above-mentioned 137th to 141st embodiments, the recesses H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 and the protrusions H31821a2 are formed above the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the recesses H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 and the protrusions H31821a2 may be formed at a position shifted in the throwing direction of the game ball from the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b.

With this, when the game ball goes wild due to a step formed at the connection between the launch rail H112a1 and the rolling part H821b, the game ball can be received in the recessed part H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 or abutted against the protruding part H31821a2 at a position where the game ball goes wild to the maximum extent while being sent in the launch direction.

As a result, a game ball that is thrown with an amount of bouncing that does not affect the throw (the ball is thrown stably to the play area) can be thrown without being received by the recesses H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1, or without coming into contact with the convex portion H31821a2, while a game ball that is thrown in a state of great bouncing that affects the throw (the throw to the play area becomes unstable) can be thrown by being received by the recesses H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1, or by coming into contact with the convex portion H31821a2, thereby stabilizing the throw to the play area. Therefore, game balls that can be sent stably to the play area can be received by the recesses H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1, or can be abutted against the protrusions H31821a2, preventing the game ball from changing the position it reaches in the play area.

In the above 142nd embodiment, the convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 are formed at a distance equal to the radius of the game ball along the launch direction of the game ball, but the convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 may be formed at a distance equal to the diameter of the game ball along the launch direction of the game ball. In addition, the distance between the convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 in the launch direction may be set to be short or long along the launch direction of the game ball.

For example, if the distance between the convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 in the launch direction is set long, it is possible to easily suppress the wild movement of the game ball at the beginning of the launch, and to suppress the slowing of the ball's throwing speed by reducing the number of times the game ball comes into contact with the convex portion H32821a2 and the second convex portion H32872 at the position where the rolling portion H821b is thrown. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the game board H13 (see FIG. 1838).

In the above 142nd to 144th embodiments, the convex portions H32821a2, H33821a2, and H34821a2 are formed to protrude, but they may be recessed. For example, the recesses H821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 in the 111th embodiment and the 137th to 142nd embodiments may be used.

In addition, the recesses H29821a1 and H30821a1 in the 139th and 140th embodiments may be formed non-parallel to the direction in which the game ball is launched (thrown).

In the above 111th embodiment and 133rd to 142nd embodiments, the recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, and H30821a1 and the protrusions H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, and H34821a2 are formed in different shapes, but they may be formed by combining recesses or protrusions. For example, a recess may be formed by combining a recess H821a1 formed parallel to the launch (throw) direction of the game ball and a recess H29821a1 formed parallel to the launch (throw) direction of the game ball.

In the above 111th embodiment and 133rd to 142nd embodiments, the recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 and the protrusions H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2 have been described as examples, but in addition to or instead of the recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 and the protrusions H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2, other means may be used. As other means, for example, any means configured to be able to apply a reaction force in a different direction when the game ball comes into contact with it may be used. If the means is configured to apply a reaction force in a different direction when the game ball comes into contact with it, the same effect can be obtained as in the above-mentioned embodiments (recesses H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 and protrusions H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2).

In the above 111th embodiment and 133rd to 142nd embodiments, the back portions H821a, H24821a, H25821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a, H31821a, H32821a, H33821a, and H34821a have been described as examples, but in addition to or instead of the back portions H821a, H24821a, H25821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a, H31821a, H32821a, H33821a, and H34821a, other means may be used. As other means, for example, any means may be used as long as it is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. If the means is configured to allow game balls to pass through, the same effect can be obtained as in the above-mentioned embodiments (back portion H821a, H24821a, H25821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a, H31821a, H32821a, H33821a, H34821a).

In the above 111th embodiment and 133rd to 142nd embodiments, the launching means H830 has been described as an example, but other means may be used in addition to the launching means H830 or in place of the launching means H830. As the other means, for example, any means configured to be able to throw a game ball may be used. As long as the means is configured to be able to throw a game ball, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment (launching means H830) can be obtained.

In the above embodiments 111 to 116, the axis GO that serves as the rotation axis of the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 is described as being arranged facing in the front-to-rear direction, but the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 may also be arranged with the axis GO facing in the left-right or up-down direction.

In the above embodiments 111 to 116, the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 are described as being positioned inside the center frame H86 when viewed from the front, but the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 may be positioned in a position that is visible through the center frame H86, or outside the center frame H86 when viewed from the front, so that the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 are positioned in a part of the play area.

In the above 111th to 116th embodiments, the case where the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 rotate is described, but the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 may be configured to be able to abut against the ring-forming unit G700, and the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 may be configured to abut against the ring-forming unit G700 to displace the ring-forming unit G700. In other words, the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 may be configured to abut against another member to displace the other member.

In the above embodiments 111 to 116, a case was described in which the first decorative unit G420, G5420, G6420 rotates to the right around the axis GO while the second decorative unit G480 rotates to the left around the axis GO, but the rotation direction of the first decorative unit G420, G5420, G6420 and the second decorative unit G480 around the axis GO may be either left or right.

In the above embodiments 111 to 116, the displacement units G426, G5426 of the first decorative units G420, G5420, G6420 are described as being decorated to be non-transparent to light, but the displacement units G426, G5426 may be formed from a resin material that is transmissive to light, allowing the incident light to pass through, so that the display of an LCD or the like arranged on the rear side can be viewed through the displacement units G426, G5426.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Displacement means that changes its shape during rotation>
A gaming machine A1 is provided with a presentation means having a displacement means configured to be tiltable around a predetermined rotation axis, and the presentation means is configured to make it possible to visually recognize a change in external shape that extends at least in a direction away from the rotation axis while the displacement means is tilted.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a displacement means configured to be rotatable about a first axis and a drive means for operating the displacement means, and is configured so that the displacement means is braked by receiving a biasing force at the terminal position (see, for example, JP 2014-144283 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, even if the displacement means is presented as tilting vigorously, the external shape of the displacement means does not change when tilted, so the effect lacks impact and there is room for improvement in terms of presentation effects.

In contrast, according to gaming machine A1, the presentation means is configured to be able to change the external shape while the displacement means is tilting, so it is possible to execute a powerful presentation in which the external shape of the displacement means changes while it is being tilted vigorously, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1, while the displacement means is tilted, the gaming machine A2 is configured to be able to transition from a first state in which the outer shape of the displacement means is maintained while the displacement means is tilted to a second state in which the outer shape of the displacement means is changed while the displacement means is tilted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 transitions from a first state in which the external shape is maintained to a second state in which the external shape changes as the tilting operation of the displacement means progresses, so that the force required at the start of tilting can be reduced, making it easier to start the tilting operation smoothly.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in gaming machine A2, the displacement means is configured to be in the first state at the displacement end position on the side where tilting begins.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 does not require the force required to change the external shape when tilting begins, so the force required when tilting begins can be reduced to only the force required for tilting, thereby reducing the amount of force required.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, a section is provided in which the degree of change in the external shape relative to the tilt angle of the displacement means increases during the process in which the displacement means tilts in the direction of transition from the first state to the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A2 and A3, gaming machine A4 has the advantage that the change in the external shape of the displacement means while it is tilted in the second state becomes greater the further it is from the side where it was placed in the first state (the more it is tilted), so that the degree of tilt of the displacement means can be associated with the degree of change in the external shape of the displacement means.

A gaming machine A5, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, is characterized in that the displacement means comprises an axis side means supported so as to be tiltable about the predetermined rotation axis, and a component means configured to be displaceable relative to the axis side means, and is configured to assume a second position by being tilted from a first position, and the distance between the component means and the predetermined rotation axis is longer in the second position than in the first position.

In game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of game machines A1 to A4, the direction of change in the distance between the component means and a predetermined rotation axis is set to one direction in response to the tilt direction, so that the greater the tilt angle, the greater the degree of the effect.

In other words, the more the displacement means is tilted, the further the component means is separated from the specified rotation axis, so the center of gravity of the displacement means can be moved toward the tip of the tilt, and the momentum of the tilt can be assisted by the displacement means' own weight, resulting in a powerful tilting motion, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, the more the displacement means is displaced in the opposite direction to the tilt (the rising direction), the closer the component means is to the specified rotation axis, so the center of gravity of the displacement means can be moved toward the rotation axis, reducing the force required for the rising motion.

A gaming machine A5 is characterized in that it is provided with a degree change means for making the degree of change in the distance between the component means and the predetermined rotation axis when tilted to the predetermined angle with the second attitude as the terminal attitude larger than the degree of change in the distance between the component means and the predetermined rotation axis when tilted to the predetermined angle with the first attitude as the terminal attitude.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 can greatly change the distance between the component means and the specified rotation axis even at a small tilt angle near the second attitude, making it possible to produce an effect in which the external shape of the displacement means is greatly changed without significantly changing the position of the displacement means relative to the specified rotation axis.

Furthermore, when the displacement means is caused to undergo a displacement that causes it to rise from the second position to the first position (displacement in the opposite direction to tilting), the distance between the component means and the specified rotation axis can be significantly changed (shortened) after the start of the displacement, so that the center of gravity of the displacement means can be brought closer to the specified rotation axis at an early stage, and the force required for the displacement to rise can be reduced.

Gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the configuration means in gaming machine A5 or A6 includes a first configuration means that can be displaced in a radial direction of a circle centered on the predetermined rotation axis, and a second configuration means that can be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the radial direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A5 and A6, gaming machine A7 can further differentiate the external shape of the displacement means between the first and second positions.

A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A7, while the displacement means is tilting, the displacement of the second component means starts with a delay from the start of the displacement of the first component means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, gaming machine A8 can reduce the force required compared to when the displacement of the first component means and the displacement of the second component means are started simultaneously.

Gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the second component means in gaming machine A7 or A8 is disposed on the axis side means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A7 or A8, gaming machine A9 has an external shape with a bulge on the side of a specific rotation axis, allowing the displacement means to be visually confirmed.

Gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the second component means is disposed in the component means in gaming machine A7 or A8.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A7 and A8, gaming machine A10 allows the displacement means to be visually recognized due to the wide external shape of the component means.

<Driving force transmission at a position away from the rotating shaft>
A gaming machine B1 is provided with a displacement means configured to be tiltable around a predetermined rotation axis, and a drive means for displacing the displacement means, and is configured so that the drive force of the drive means is transmitted to the displacement means via an arrangement portion that is positioned closer to the tilting tip of the displacement means than the predetermined rotation axis.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a displacement means configured to be rotatable about a first axis and a drive means for operating the displacement means, and is configured so that the displacement means is braked by receiving a biasing force at the terminal position (see, for example, JP 2014-144283 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the structure of the displacement means on the side of the first axis tends to become large, making it difficult to position the displacement means so that the first axis is close to a corner of the placement space. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in the placement of the displacement means.

In contrast, with gaming machine B1, the driving force of the drive means is transmitted via a placement section that is located on the tilted tip side of the displacement means, which simplifies the structure of the displacement means on the first axis side and makes it easy to position the displacement means with the first axis close to a corner of the placement space. This allows for improved placement of the displacement means.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B1, the direction of the displacement of the arrangement part can be changed while the direction of the driving force of the driving means is maintained in a predetermined direction while the displacement means is tilted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 is configured to be able to change the direction of displacement of the placement section while maintaining the direction of the driving force of the driving means, so that even if the operation of the driving means is monotonous, the displacement of the placement section can be made complex.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in gaming machines B1 or B2, the direction of the driving force applied to the placement unit approaches a linear direction passing through the predetermined rotation axis and the placement unit as the displacement means approaches the displacement end position on the tilt side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 changes the direction of the driving force applied to the arrangement during tilting, making it possible to prevent the load generated in the tilting direction from becoming excessive when the displacement means approaches the displacement end position on the tilting side.

As a result, even if the displacement means tilts at high speed, it is possible to easily cushion the impact when the displacement means reaches the displacement end position on the tilt side, thereby improving the durability of the displacement means. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need for shock-absorbing cushioning materials.

Gaming machine B4 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, characterized in that the direction of the driving force of the driving means is configured to generate a load on the displacement means in a predetermined linear direction.

Gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B3, makes it easier to stabilize the driving force. Also, the ratio of the driving force component that faces the tilt direction of the displacement means to the component that faces a direction perpendicular to the tilt direction of the displacement means is determined according to the position (posture) of the displacement means, so the magnitude of the load in the tilt direction of the displacement means can be made to correspond to the position (posture) of the displacement means.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B4, the greater the angle between the predetermined linear direction and the rotational direction component centered on the predetermined rotational axis of the movement direction of the contact part of the displacement means that contacts the placement part, the longer the distance between the placement part and the predetermined rotational axis.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B4, gaming machine B5 makes it easier to avoid a shortage of driving force for tilting the displacement means by increasing the distance between the positioning section to which the driving force is transmitted and the specified rotation axis, even in a situation in which it is difficult to transmit a load in the tilting direction, such as when the angle between the direction of the driving force and the displacement direction of the tilting displacement means is large.

In other words, by preventing the driving force required for tilting from increasing or decreasing locally within the tilt range of the displacement means, the range of change in the required driving force can be kept small, making it easier to select the driving means.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B4 or B5, the displacement means is displaceable between a position in front of the display device and a position outside the display device, and the angle between the direction of movement of the arrangement unit about the predetermined rotation axis at the front position and the predetermined linear direction is greater than the angle between the direction of movement of the arrangement unit about the predetermined rotation axis at the outer position and the predetermined linear direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B4 and B5, gaming machine B6 can reduce the momentum of the rotational direction at the forward position, making it easier to stop the rotational motion at the desired position. Therefore, it is easy to perform the operation of rotating at high speed during the rotation, while smoothly stopping the rotation at the forward position.

A gaming machine B7, in which the angle between the direction of movement of the placement part around the predetermined rotation axis and the predetermined linear direction increases as the movement moves from the outer position to the forward position in the gaming machine B6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B6, gaming machine B7 can gradually slow down the rotational motion.

Gaming machine B8 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B7, characterized in that the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is connected from the side of the specified rotation axis.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, gaming machine B8 can effectively utilize the space freed up by shifting the position of the drive means toward the tip of the tilt as space for arranging electrical wiring.

Gaming machine B9 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B8, characterized in that the placement section is configured so that the distance from the predetermined rotation axis can be changed by moving the placement section in a second predetermined linear direction, and the second predetermined linear direction passing through the placement section is configured so as not to pass through the predetermined rotation axis.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machine B9 can also utilize the force for moving the placement section in a second predetermined linear direction to rotate the displacement means about a predetermined rotation axis.

A gaming machine B10 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, characterized in that it is equipped with an endless belt capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means.

Gaming machine B10 has the same effects as any of gaming machines B1 to B9, and also makes it easier to ensure a large displacement range for the displacement means.

<Vary the resistance depending on the range>
A gaming machine C1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a displaceable displacement means and a drive means for displacing the displacement means, and further equipped with a mode change means for changing the mode of force received by the displacement means during displacement in accordance with the position of the displacement means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a displacement means configured to be rotatable about a first axis and a drive means for operating the displacement means, and is configured so that the displacement means is braked by receiving a biasing force at the terminal position (see, for example, JP 2014-144283 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, no consideration is given to the forces that the displacement means receives during displacement, and there is a possibility that the load applied to the drive means may change suddenly during displacement, leaving room for improvement. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the displacement of the displacement means.

In response to this, gaming machine C1 uses a mode changing means to change the mode of force received by the displacement means during displacement in accordance with the position of the displacement means, making it possible to appropriately adjust the force applied to the displacement means during displacement and to prevent abrupt changes in the load applied to the drive means. This makes it possible to improve the displacement of the displacement means.

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1, the displacement means is capable of displacing between a first range and a second range different from the first range, and the force that the displacement means receives from the state change means is greater when the displacement means is positioned in the second range than when the displacement means is positioned in the first range.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can change the manner in which the force received by the displacement means for each range.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C2, the first range or the second range is a range that includes at least one of the displacement ends of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C2, gaming machine C3 can prevent the force received by the displacement means from changing at the end of the displacement.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that in gaming machine C3, the first range includes the displacement end of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C3, gaming machine C4 can reduce the driving force required to displace the displacement means from the displacement end.

In gaming machine C4, the mode change means includes relative displacement means that can be displaced relative to the displacement means, and the number of the relative displacement means that are displaced relative to the second range is greater than the number of the relative displacement means that are displaced relative to the first range. Gaming machine C5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C4, gaming machine C5 can increase or decrease the force generated by the form change means while enhancing the presentation effect by changing the number of relative displacement means that are displaced relative to each other.

In gaming machine C5, the relative displacement means includes a first relative displacement means that performs relative displacement in a first manner, and a second relative displacement means that performs relative displacement in a second manner, and is characterized in that when the displacement means starts to displace from one of the displacement terminals, a relative displacement of the first relative displacement means occurs. Gaming machine C6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C5, gaming machine C6 stabilizes the displacement of the displacement means by shifting the timing of the relative displacement, rather than the relative displacement means performing relative displacement in multiple ways starting the relative displacement at the same time.

Gaming machine C7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C6, the displacement occurs due to the relative displacement of the second relative displacement means when the displacement means starts to displace from the other displacement end.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C6, gaming machine C7 can improve the presentation effect by changing the relative displacement means that undergoes relative displacement first for each end where the displacement means begins to displace.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C3, the first range includes at least one of the displacement ends of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C3, gaming machine C8 makes it easier to decelerate the displacement means at at least one of the displacement ends.

Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the force received by the displacement means in gaming machine C8 is a predetermined resistance force.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C8, gaming machine C9 can speed up the displacement of the displacement means by configuring the predetermined resistance force that the displacement means receives to be large at the end of the displacement and small midway through the displacement.

Gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the first range includes both displacement ends of the displacement means in gaming machine C8 or C9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C8 and C9, gaming machine C10 makes it easier to decelerate the displacement means at both displacement ends, thereby accelerating the displacement of the displacement means in both displacement directions.

In the gaming machine C10, the displacement means is configured as a pair, and the load transmitted from the pair of displacement means to the drive means is the same at both displacement ends. A gaming machine C11.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C10, gaming machine C11 can make the driving force required to start displacement from both displacement ends the same.

<Irradiating parallel light onto a light guide plate aligned with a substrate>
A gaming machine D1 comprising a first means composed of a plate-like member, a first light-emitting means arranged on a predetermined surface side of the first means, and a plate-like first light-receiving means capable of receiving light from the first light-emitting means, wherein the side of the first light-receiving means that faces the predetermined surface abuts against the predetermined surface of the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a plate-shaped member on which a light-emitting means is arranged, and a light-receiving means having a plate-shaped portion that is arranged opposite the light-emitting means of the plate-shaped member and is configured so that light from the light-emitting means is incident thereon (see, for example, JP 2015-198675 A).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above required additional components to align the light receiving means, which made the structure more complicated. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the placement of the light receiving means.

In contrast, with gaming machine D1, the first light receiving means can be aligned with the first light receiving means by abutting the first means with the first light receiving means, so the structure for aligning the first light receiving means can be simplified. In other words, improvements can be made with regard to the placement of the light receiving means.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it comprises a second light emitting means disposed on the opposite side of the first means opposite to the predetermined side, and a plate-shaped second light receiving means capable of receiving light from the second light emitting means, and the second light receiving means has a side surface disposed opposite the opposite side that abuts against the opposite side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can align the second light receiving means with the first means by abutting the second light receiving means with the first means, simplifying the structure for aligning the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means. In other words, it is possible to further improve the arrangement of the light receiving means.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that in gaming machine D2, the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means can be fixed to the first means by pressing from a predetermined pressing means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D2, gaming machine D3 can fix three components by pressing from a pressing means, which reduces the number of fixing points for fixing multiple components and reduces manufacturing man-hours.

Gaming machine D4 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, and is provided with a support means configured to support the first means and the first light receiving means, the support means having a first protruding portion that can be fitted into the first means, and a second protruding portion that can be fitted into the first light receiving means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machine D4 supports the first means and the first light receiving means with a support means, thereby preventing misalignment between the first means and the first light receiving means in a direction parallel to the plate surface of the first means.

When a second light receiving means is provided, the second protrusion may be configured to be able to engage with the second light receiving means as well. In this case, it is possible to prevent misalignment between the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means in a direction parallel to the plate surface of the first means.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D3 or D4, it comprises a second light emitting means disposed on the opposite side of the first means opposite to the predetermined side, and a plate-shaped second light receiving means capable of receiving light from the second light emitting means, the second light receiving means has a side surface disposed opposite to the opposite surface in contact with the opposite surface, the first means is disposed outside the second protruding portion, and the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means can be pressed and fixed by a predetermined pressing means at the second protruding portion.

Gaming machine D5 has the same effect as gaming machines D3 and D4, but can also apply a pressing force from the means to the end of the first means. This allows the end of the first means to be damaged even if the pressing force becomes excessive, making it easier to avoid damage to the center where the light-emitting means is located.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that in gaming machine D5, the first light receiving means or the second light receiving means is configured so that the shape of the contact portion that contacts the first means corresponds to that of the first light receiving means.

Gaming machine D6 has the same effect as gaming machine D5, and in addition, it is possible to match the portion where force is applied to the first means through the first light receiving means by pressing from a predetermined pressing means with the portion where force is applied to the first means through the second light receiving means, making it easier to apply force perpendicular to the surface of the first means, improving the balance of the forces applied to the front and back. This makes it possible to prevent cracking of the first means caused by force being applied in a direction inclined to the surface of the first means.

A gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D3 to D6, it is provided with a second light emitting means disposed on the opposite side of the first means opposite to the predetermined side, and a plate-shaped second light receiving means capable of receiving light from the second light emitting means, the second light receiving means has a side surface disposed opposite to the opposite surface in contact with the opposite surface, the first light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to the second light emitting means, and is configured to emit light in a direction parallel to the irradiation direction of the second light emitting means.

Gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D3 to D6, can match the position where light is irradiated from the first light emitting means to the first light receiving means with the position where light is irradiated from the second light emitting means to the second light receiving means. This allows the positions illuminated by different light emitting units to be aligned, resulting in a good light emission effect when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means.

Gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the first light-emitting means in gaming machine D7 has a plurality of light-emitting elements, and the optical axis directions of the light from the plurality of light-emitting elements are parallel to each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D7, gaming machine D8 can illuminate the first means uniformly over a wide area using the light from the first light-emitting means.

A gaming machine D9 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D8, and is provided with a support means configured to be able to support the first means and the first light emitting means, and the first light receiving means is configured so that the supported surface on the side opposite to the side on which the first means is arranged is supported by the support surface of the support means, and the supported surface or the support surface has a plurality of protrusions, and the plurality of protrusions are configured to be able to receive light from a specified light emitting means to produce an effect.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, gaming machine D9 can utilize multiple protrusions as both a presentation surface that receives light and a structural surface that can divide the pressure force.

Gaming machine D10 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D9, the specified light-emitting means is disposed on the opposite side of the first light-receiving means from the first light-emitting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D9, gaming machine D10 can avoid interference between light from a specified light-emitting means and light from a first light-emitting means.

Gaming machine D11 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D10, characterized in that the first means comprises a plurality of plate-shaped members.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, gaming machine D11 can increase the number of locations where the first light emitting means that irradiates light to the first light receiving means is arranged, thereby improving the design freedom of the size of the first light receiving means.

Gaming machine D12 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D11, characterized in that the light receiving end of the first light receiving means is positioned closer to the light emitting means than the end of the first means on the irradiation direction side of the first light emitting means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D11, gaming machine D12 uses the first means as a shielding member, making it possible to prevent light from leaking before it is received by the first light receiving means.

<Means for restricting the direction of light transmission>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a flow-down means for forming an area on the front side through which game balls can flow down, and a front side means that is provided further forward than the flow-down means and through which game balls may flow down the area located on the rear side, the front side means being configured to be visible from a first direction and from a second direction in which it is easier to view game balls flowing down the area than from the first direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a transparent plate with decorative letters and figures drawn on it in front of the path through which the gaming balls flow (see, for example, JP 2017-23543 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the gaming balls flowing through the path are visible through the decorative letters and figures, and if one of them is made easier to see (for example, if the decorative letters or figures are made darker), the visibility of the other may become poor (for example, the gaming balls become difficult to see), which is an issue that there is room for improvement in the visibility of the gaming balls during play.

In contrast, with gaming machine E1, the front side means can be configured to make it easy to see the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down means or difficult to see it, depending on the viewing direction. That is, by making the front side of the front side means visible when viewed in a first direction, while making the gaming ball visible through the front side means when viewed in a second direction, it is possible to improve the visibility of the gaming ball during play while still employing the front side means.

In the gaming machine E1, the front side means is formed from a light-transmitting resin material and is equipped with a direction selection means that blocks light in the first direction toward the area and allows light in the second direction to reach the area. Gaming machine E2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 uses a direction selection means to limit the directions through which light can pass, making it possible to more clearly show the difference in the degree of visibility due to different directions.

A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E2, it is provided with a front side forming means that is arranged on the front side of the flow-down means and forms the front side of the area where the gaming balls flow down, and the direction selection means is arranged in the area between the front side means and the front side forming means and is configured to have a predetermined thickness.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 can achieve changes in visibility due to differences in viewing direction by using the direction selection means located in the thin area between the front side means and the front side configuration means, making it less susceptible to the effects of light attenuation caused by the direction selection means itself, and making the difference in appearance between viewing in the first direction and viewing in the second direction more noticeable.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, a first flow path in which the visibility of the gaming ball changes depending on the direction viewed by the direction selection means and a second flow path in which the visibility of the gaming ball does not change depending on the direction viewed are provided adjacent to each other.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machine E4 can create a state in which the player is likely to pay attention to the second flow path, and a state in which the player is likely to pay attention to both the first flow path and the second flow path to the same degree, depending on the direction of the player's line of sight as he or she views the specified range.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E4, it is equipped with a detection means capable of detecting gaming balls flowing down the first flow path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E4, gaming machine E5 can be controlled so that even if the direction selection means makes it impossible to visually confirm that the gaming ball has flowed down the first flow path, if the detection means detects that the gaming ball has flowed down the first flow path, the player can be notified, making it easier for the player to know whether the gaming ball has flowed down the first flow path.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E4 or E5, gaming balls that flow into the first flow path are discharged from the gaming area via the first flow path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E4 and E5, gaming machine E6 can draw more attention to gaming balls flowing down the second flow path that may continue to flow down the gaming area after flowing down, compared to gaming balls flowing down the first flow path that is scheduled to be discharged from the gaming area.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E6, the front side means includes a direction selection means that blocks light in the first direction toward the area and allows light in the second direction to reach the area, the direction selection means is covered with a light-transmitting resin member arranged to cover the front side, and decorative figures are formed on the surface of the resin member.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, gaming machine E7 allows a player who looks toward the area from the first direction to see the decorative figures on the surface of the resin member, improving the presentation effect of the front side means.

Gaming machine E8 is characterized in that in gaming machine E7, the direction selection means is formed from a plate-like means having a plurality of plate-like parts arranged in a stack.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E7, gaming machine E8 makes it easier to fill gaps in the front-to-rear direction using the direction selection means when the gap dimensions are large.

A gaming machine E9 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E8, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a light irradiation means, and the visibility of the front side means is changed by the light from the light irradiation means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, gaming machine E9 can change the visibility of the front side means when the light of the light irradiation means is turned on and off, so that the visibility of the gaming ball flowing down the area can be switched in accordance with the presentation.

A gaming machine E10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E9, the range in which the visibility of the front side means is changed by the light of the light irradiation means is switchable.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E9, gaming machine E10 can change the visibility of each range of the front side means by switching the illumination mode of the light illumination means. This allows the direction in which the area where the gaming ball flows down can be seen with good visibility to be switched by the light illumination means.

Gaming machine E11 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E10, characterized in that the front side means is configured to be displaceable.

According to gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines E1 to E10, it is possible to cause the angle between the player's line of sight and the front side means to change by displacing the front side means even without the player moving his or her line of sight, thereby changing the visibility of the area.
<Concept of the invention using board boxes W100 to W3100, W700 to W9100 as examples>
The gaming machine WA1-0 comprises a first member and a second member, an engagement member formed to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, and in which the engagement member is removed and the arrangement member is removed, the gaming machine being characterized in that, when the engagement member is removed, a situation equivalent to that in which the arrangement member is removed can be created.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, an engagement member that is formed so as to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

Here, the removed installation member may be reinstalled. In this case, it is preferable to be able to check the state of the installation member, but the gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in terms of making it possible to check the state of the installation member.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that makes it possible to check the state of the installed components.

In the gaming machine WA1-0, the main body and the engagement part are connected by a connecting part, so the engagement part can be separated from the engagement member (main body) by cutting the connecting part. This allows the engagement member (main body) to be removed from the first member and the second member.

In this case, when the engaging member is removed, a situation equivalent to that in which the installation member is removed can be created. This makes it possible to check the condition of the installation member (whether the installation member is new, reused, or has been the subject of unauthorized operation) based on that situation.

In the gaming machine WA1-0, the engaging member includes a main body, an engaging portion that engages with the first member, and a connecting portion that connects the main body and the engaging portion, and the gaming machine WA1-1 is characterized in that a recess is formed in the portion of the first member where the mounting member is disposed, at a position corresponding to the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine WA1-1, a recess is formed in the portion of the first member where the placement member is placed, so that a space can be formed between the placement member and the first member, and since the recess is formed in a position corresponding to the connecting portion, when the connecting portion is cut, the recess (space) can be used (the tip of the tool for cutting the connecting portion can be received in the recess) to make it easier to damage the placement member. In other words, when the cutting portion is cut, a trace can be formed on the placement member. This makes it possible to check the condition of the placement member (whether the placement member is new, reused, or has been the subject of fraudulent operation) based on the presence or absence of the trace on the placement member.

In addition, the formation of traces on the mounting members can prevent the mounting members from being reused.

If there are no traces on the mounting member, it can be determined that the mounting member is highly likely to be new. If there are traces on the mounting member, it can be determined that the traces were formed on the mounting member when the engaging member was removed from the first and second members, and that the mounting member was removed from the first and second members and re-installed (reused) on the same or different first and second members, or that the mounting member is a mounting part seat where only the engaging member was removed from the first and second members in order to perform unauthorized operations on the first and second members or stored items, and where the traces were formed when the engaging member was removed.

A gaming machine WA1-2 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are connected by fastening a screw in the gaming machine WA1-1, and the head of the screw is located in the recess.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine WA1-1, the gaming machine WA1-2 has the following advantages: the first member and the second member are connected by fastening a screw, and the head of the screw is located in a recess; therefore, the trace of the mounting member that is formed when the connecting portion is cut can be formed in a position corresponding to the head of the screw. Therefore, even if the head of the screw is hidden by the mounting member, the position of the screw can be ascertained based on the trace of the mounting member. As a result, the workability of releasing the fastening of the screw can be improved.

A gaming machine WA1-3 is characterized in that the engagement member is configured such that the opposing distance between the connecting portion and the arrangement member is smaller than the opposing distance between the main body portion and the arrangement member in the gaming machine WA1-1 or WA1-2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines WA1-1 and WA1-2, gaming machine WA1-3 has an engaging member with a smaller opposing distance between the connecting portion and the installation member than between the main body and the installation member, so that the tip of a tool for cutting the connecting portion can be brought closer to the installation member, making it easier to damage the installation member when the connecting portion is cut.

A gaming machine WA1-4 is any one of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-3, characterized in that the connecting portion is formed with at least one side inclined.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-3, the gaming machine WA1-4 has a connecting piece with at least one side formed with an inclination, so that when the connecting piece is cut, the tool can be moved along the inclination of the side. This makes it easier to bring the tip of the tool into contact with the mounting member and damage the mounting member.

For example, when using a tool to cut a connecting piece by clamping the connecting piece between a pair of blades (with the pair of blades abutting both sides), the tool can be rotated along the slope of the side as the connecting piece is cut, and as the tool rotates, the tip of the tool can be easily brought into contact with the mounting member.

A gaming machine WA1-5 is any one of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-4, characterized in that the connecting portion includes a first portion and a second portion in which the distance between both sides is smaller than that of the first portion, and the opposing distance between the second portion and the arrangement member is smaller than the opposing distance between the first portion and the arrangement member.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-4, the gaming machine WA1-5 has a smaller distance between the two sides of the second part than the first part, so that the connecting part can be easily cut by cutting the second part.

In this case, the opposing distance between the second part and the arrangement member is smaller than the opposing distance between the first part and the arrangement member, so the tip of the tool for cutting the second part can be brought closer to the arrangement member, making it easier to damage the arrangement member when the second part is cut.

In addition, by making the opposing distance between the second portion and the installation member smaller than the opposing distance between the first portion and the installation member (i.e., by extending the second portion toward the installation member), the difference in cross-sectional area between the first portion and the second portion can be suppressed accordingly. Therefore, when the engaging member is made of a resin material, its moldability can be ensured.
<Concept of the invention using board boxes W4100 to W6100 as examples>
A gaming machine WA2-1 is provided with a first member and a second member, an engagement member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, wherein the engagement member has a main body portion, an engagement portion that engages with the first member, and a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engagement portion, and the engagement portion of the engagement member has a protrusion that protrudes toward the arrangement member.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, an engagement member that is formed so as to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

Here, the removed installation member may be reinstalled. In this case, it is preferable to be able to check the state of the installation member, but the gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in terms of making it possible to check the state of the installation member.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that makes it possible to check the state of the installed components.

In the gaming machine WA2-1, the main body and the engagement part are connected by a connecting part, so the engagement part can be separated from the engagement member (main body) by cutting the connecting part. This allows the engagement member (main body) to be removed from the first member and the second member.

In this case, since the engaging member has a protrusion that protrudes toward the arrangement member, when an attempt is made to release the engagement with the first member by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the protrusion can damage the arrangement member. In other words, regardless of whether the engagement is released or not, if the engaging portion is operated improperly, a trace can be left on the arrangement member. This makes it possible to confirm the condition of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new, reused, or has been the subject of improper operation) based on the presence or absence of the trace on the arrangement member.

In addition, the formation of traces on the mounting members can prevent the mounting members from being reused.

If there are no traces on the mounting member, it can be determined that the mounting member is highly likely to be new. If there are traces on the mounting member, it can be determined that the traces were formed on the mounting member when the engaging member was removed from the first and second members, and that the mounting member was removed from the first and second members and re-installed (reused) on the same or different first and second members, or that the mounting member is a mounting part seat where only the engaging member was removed from the first and second members in order to perform unauthorized operations on the first and second members or stored items, and where the traces were formed when the engaging member was removed.

A gaming machine WA2-2 is characterized in that the protrusion is positioned on the outer edge side of the engagement portion in the gaming machine WA2-1.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine WA2-1, the gaming machine WA2-2 has a protrusion positioned on the outer edge of the engagement portion, which makes it easier to visually confirm the traces of the installation member even when the engagement member is engaged with the first member. In other words, it makes it easier to check the condition of the installation member (whether the installation member is new, reused, or has been the subject of fraudulent operation).

A gaming machine WA2-3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine WA2-1 or WA2-2, a recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion in the portion of the first member where the mounting member is disposed.

According to gaming machine WA2-3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines WA2-1 and WA2-2, a recess is formed in the portion of the first member where the mounting member is mounted, so that a space can be formed between the mounting member and the first member, and since the recess is formed in a position corresponding to the protrusion, when the engagement with the first member is released by operating the engaging portion (elastic deformation) without cutting the connecting portion, the recess (space) can be utilized (allowing the tip of the protrusion to be received in the recess) to easily damage the mounting member with the protrusion. In other words, if the engaging portion is operated improperly, it is easy to leave a mark on the mounting member.

A gaming machine WA2-3, characterized in that the engaging member is removable from the first member by displacing a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the placement member, and the recess is formed at least in a range that corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced the predetermined distance in the predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the placement member.

In the gaming machine WA2-4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine WA2-3, the engaging member can be removed from the first member by displacing a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the arrangement member, and the recess is formed at least in the range that corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the arrangement member, so that the damage range of the arrangement member can be secured.

In other words, when the engagement between the first member and the engaging member is released by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the engaging member is displaced in a predetermined direction with the tip of the protrusion received in the recess, so that the tip of the protrusion received in the recess can continue to damage the mounting member while the engaging member is displaced a predetermined distance in the predetermined direction. This ensures that the mounting member can be damaged within a certain range.

A gaming machine WA2-3, characterized in that the engaging member is removable from the first member by displacing a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the placement member, and the recess is formed only in the front half of the range that corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced the predetermined distance in the predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the placement member.

According to the gaming machine WA2-5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine WA2-3, the engaging member can be removed from the first member by displacing a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the arrangement member, and the recess is formed only in the front half of the range that corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction with the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the arrangement member, so that it is possible to ensure the damage range of the arrangement member and to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member.

In other words, when the engagement between the first member and the engaging member is released by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the engaging member is displaced in a predetermined direction with the tip of the protrusion received in the recess, so that while the first half of the engaging member is displaced a predetermined distance in the predetermined direction, the tip of the protrusion received in the recess can continue to damage the mounting member. This ensures a certain range of damage to the mounting member.

On the other hand, after the engagement member has been displaced a predetermined distance in the predetermined direction, the tip of the protrusion received in the recess can be engaged with the end of the recess, thereby restricting the displacement of the engagement member in the predetermined direction and preventing the engagement member from being illegally removed from the first member.
<Concept of the invention using board boxes Wa100 to Wc100, Wi100 as examples>
Gaming machine WB1-1 is characterized in that in a gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engagement member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, the engagement member comprises a main body portion and an engagement portion formed to be separable from the main body portion and engaged with the first member, and the arrangement state of the arrangement member is changeable using the main body portion from which the engagement portion is separated.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, an engagement member that is formed so as to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in terms of changing the arrangement of the arrangement members.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that allows the arrangement state of the arrangement members to be suitably changed.

According to the gaming machine WB1-1, the engagement member comprises a main body and an engagement portion formed separable from the main body and engaged with the first member, and the main body from which the engagement portion is separated is used to form the arrangement state of the arrangement portion so that it is possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member, eliminating the need to carry a tool (e.g., a utility knife) for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. In addition, the main body of the engagement member is relatively large and easy to grip, making it easy to perform the task of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. This allows the arrangement state of the arrangement member to be conveniently changed.

Gaming machine WB1-2 is characterized in that in gaming machine WB1-1, the engagement member includes a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engagement portion, the main body portion includes a change means that is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined area of the arrangement member, and when the connecting portion is cut off, the main body portion is displaceable relative to the first member and the second member up to a position where the change means at least abuts against the predetermined area of the arrangement member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB1-1, gaming machine WB1-2 has the following advantages: the main body and the engaging part are connected by a connecting part, and the engaging part can be separated from the engaging member (main body) by cutting the connecting part. This allows the engaging member (main body) to be removed from the first member and the second member.

In this case, the main body includes a change means disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined region of the arrangement member, and when the connecting portion is cut, the main body is displaceable relative to the first and second members to a position where the change means at least abuts against the predetermined region of the arrangement member. Therefore, after the connecting portion is cut and before the main body is removed from the first and second members, the main body can be displaced to at least abut the change means against the predetermined region of the arrangement member (changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member). In other words, there is no need to separately perform the work of cutting the connecting portion and removing the main body from the first and second members and the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the removed main body (change means), and these tasks can be efficiently performed as a series of tasks, so that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be easily changed.

In addition, because the change means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined region of the arrangement member, it is possible to prevent the worker's hands from touching the change means. This prevents the worker from being injured by the change means during the manufacture or transportation of the engagement member, during the attachment (detachment) of the engagement member to the first member and the second member, or during disposal of the main body portion from which the engagement portion has been separated by cutting the connecting member.

In addition, since the modification means is formed in the main body, the rigidity of the main body can be increased.

Gaming machine WB1-3 is characterized in that the modification means of the main body of the gaming machine WB1-2 is formed at least partially inclined with respect to the specified area of the mounting member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB1-2, gaming machine WB1-3 has a change means for the main body that is formed with at least a portion inclined relative to the specified area of the arrangement member, making it easier to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member when the main body is displaced and the change means is at least abutted against the specified area of the arrangement member.

Gaming machine WB1-4 is characterized in that in gaming machine WB1-1, the engagement member has a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engagement portion, and the main body portion has a change means that is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and is arranged at a position opposite the engagement portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB1-1, gaming machine WB1-4 has the following advantages: the main body and the engaging part are connected by a connecting part, and the engaging part can be separated from the engaging member (main body) by cutting the connecting part. This allows the engaging member (main body) to be removed from the first member and the second member.

The main body portion is provided with a change means that is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and is disposed at a position opposite the engagement portion, so that when the engagement portion is separated from the engagement member (main body portion), it becomes possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the change means.

In this case, the change means is disposed at a position opposite the engagement portion, and the change means becomes usable when the engagement portion is separated from the engagement member (main body portion). Therefore, before the engagement portion is separated from the engagement member (main body portion), the worker's hands can be prevented from touching the change means. This can prevent the worker from being injured by the change means during the manufacture and transportation of the engagement member, and during the installation of the engagement member to the first and second members.

In addition, since the modification means is formed in the main body, the rigidity of the main body can be increased.

In the gaming machine WB1-4, at least one of the first member and the second member has an abutment portion, the main body has an abutment portion formed so as to be able to abut against the abutment portion, and when the abutment portion abuts against the abutment portion, the change means at least abuts against a predetermined area of the arrangement member. Gaming machine WB1-5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB1-4, gaming machine WB1-5 has the following advantages: when the abutting portion abuts against the abutted portion, the change means at least abuts against a predetermined area of the arrangement member; therefore, when using the change means to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member (at least abutting the change means against the predetermined area of the arrangement member), the effort required to find the location of the predetermined area of the arrangement member can be reduced.

Gaming machine WB1-6 is characterized in that the contacted portion in the gaming machine WB1-5 is formed so that the contacted portion that is in contact with the contacted portion can be displaced along the contacted portion, and when the contacted portion is displaced along the contacted portion, the change means is displaced along a predetermined area of the arrangement member.

According to gaming machine WB1-6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine WB1-5, when the abutment portion is displaced along the abutted portion, the change means is displaced along a specified area of the arrangement member, making it easier to use the abutted portion as a guide to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member (cutting a specified area of the arrangement member with the change means).
<Concept of the invention using board boxes We100 to Wg100 as an example>
Gaming machine WB2-1 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engagement member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, the engagement member comprises a main body portion and an engagement portion formed to be separable from the main body portion and engageable with the first member, and the arrangement state of the arrangement member is changeable using the engagement portion separated from the main body portion.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, an engagement member that is formed so as to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in terms of changing the arrangement of the arrangement members.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that allows the arrangement state of the arrangement members to be suitably changed.

According to the gaming machine WB2-1, the engagement member includes a main body and an engagement portion that is formed so as to be separable from the main body and engages with the first member, and the engagement portion that is separated from the main body is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement portion, which eliminates the need to carry a tool (e.g., a utility knife) for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. In addition, the engagement portion of the engagement member is relatively small and interference with the surroundings of the arrangement member (the first member or the second member) can be suppressed, which makes it easy to perform the task of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. This makes it possible to conveniently change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

Gaming machine WB2-2 is characterized in that in gaming machine WB2-1, the engagement member has a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engagement portion, and the engagement portion has a change means that is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and is arranged at a position opposite the main body portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB2-1, gaming machine WB2-2 has the following advantages: the main body and the engaging part are connected by a connecting part, and the engaging part can be separated from the engaging member (main body) by cutting the connecting part. This allows the engaging member (main body) to be removed from the first member and the second member.

The engagement portion is provided with a change means that is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and is disposed at a position opposite the main body portion, so that by separating the engagement portion from the engagement member (main body portion), it becomes possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the change means.

In this case, the change means is disposed at a position opposite the main body, and the change means becomes usable when the engagement portion is separated from the engagement member (main body), so that the worker's hands can be prevented from touching the change means before the engagement portion is separated from the engagement member (main body). This can prevent the worker from being injured by the change means during the manufacture and transportation of the engagement member, and during the installation of the engagement member to the first and second members.

Gaming machine WB2-3 is characterized in that in gaming machine WB2-1, the engagement member has a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engagement portion, and the engagement portion has a change means that is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and is protruded toward the arrangement member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB2-1, gaming machine WB2-3 has the following advantages: the main body and the engaging part are connected by a connecting part, and the engaging part can be separated from the engaging member (main body) by cutting the connecting part. This allows the engaging member (main body) to be removed from the first member and the second member.

The engagement portion is provided with a change means that is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and that protrudes toward the arrangement member, so that by separating the engagement portion from the engagement member (main body portion), it becomes possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the change means.

In this case, the change means protrudes toward the installation member (i.e., is disposed at a position facing the installation member), and the change means becomes usable when the engagement portion is separated from the engagement member (main body portion). Therefore, the change means can be prevented from being touched by the hands of an operator before the engagement portion is separated from the engagement member (main body portion). This can prevent an operator from being injured by the change means during the manufacture or transportation of the engagement member, and during the installation of the engagement member to the first and second members.

In addition, since the engaging means protrudes from the engaging portion toward the arrangement member, when an attempt is made to release the engagement with the first member by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the engaging means can damage the arrangement member. In other words, regardless of whether the engagement is released or not, if the engaging portion is operated improperly, a trace can be left on the arrangement member. This makes it possible to confirm the condition of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new, reused, or has been the subject of improper operation) based on the presence or absence of the trace on the arrangement member.

In addition, the formation of traces on the mounting members can prevent the mounting members from being reused.

In gaming machine WB2-2 or WB2-3, at least one of the first member or the second member has an abutment portion, the engagement portion has an abutment portion formed so as to be able to abut against the abutment portion, and when the abutment portion abuts against the abutment portion, the change means at least abuts against a predetermined area of the arrangement member. Gaming machine WB2-4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB2-2 or WB2-3, gaming machine WB2-4 has the following advantages: when the abutting portion abuts against the abutted portion, the change means at least abuts against the specified area of the arrangement member; therefore, when using the change means to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member (at least abutting the change means against the specified area of the arrangement member), the effort required to find the location of the specified area of the arrangement member can be reduced.

In the gaming machine WB2-4, the contact portion is formed so that the contact portion that contacts the contact portion can be displaced along the contact portion, and when the contact portion is displaced along the contact portion, the change means is displaced along a predetermined area of the arrangement member. In the gaming machine WB2-5,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB2-4, gaming machine WB2-5 displaces the change means along a specified area of the arrangement member when the contact portion is displaced along the contacted portion, making it easier to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member (cutting a specified area of the arrangement member with the change means) by using the contacted portion as a guide.

Gaming machine WB2-6 is characterized in that in gaming machine WB2-1, the engaging member has a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, the engaging portion has a change means that is formed so that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed, and the change means is formed by the connecting portion being cut.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB2-1, gaming machine WB2-6 has the following advantages: the main body and the engaging part are connected by a connecting part, and the engaging part can be separated from the engaging member (main body) by cutting the connecting part. This allows the engaging member (main body) to be removed from the first member and the second member.

The engaging portion is provided with a change means that is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member, and the change means is formed by a cut connecting portion, so that by separating the engaging portion from the engaging member (main body portion), it becomes possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the change means.

In this case, the engaging portion of the engaging member is relatively small, and the connecting portion is even smaller than the engaging portion, so interference with the surroundings of the arrangement member (the first member or the second member) can be suppressed, and it is easy to form a shape (e.g., a sharp shape) suitable for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. This makes it easier to perform the task of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

In addition, because the modification means becomes usable when the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion) (i.e., the severed connecting portion becomes the modification means), the operator's hands can be prevented from touching the modification means before the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). This prevents the operator from being injured by the modification means during the manufacture and transportation of the engaging member, and during the installation of the engaging member to the first and second members.

Gaming machine WB2-7 is characterized in that the connecting portion in the gaming machine WB2-6 includes a one-side connecting portion that connects one end of one side of the engagement portion to the main body portion, and an other-side connecting portion that connects the other end of the one side of the engagement portion opposite to the one side to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine WB2-7, the connecting portion includes a one-side connecting portion that connects an end of one side of the engaging portion to the main body portion, and an other-side connecting portion that connects an end of the other side of the engaging portion opposite to the one side to the main body portion. Therefore, the one-side connecting portion is used on one side of the predetermined region of the arrangement member to displace the engaging portion to one side, and the other-side connecting portion is used on the other side of the predetermined region of the arrangement member to displace the engaging portion to the other side, thereby changing the arrangement state of the predetermined region. In other words, even without changing the orientation of the engaging portion by changing its grip, the arrangement state can be changed (cut) from the end on one side of the predetermined region to the end on the other side while suppressing interference with surrounding members (first member or second member). Therefore, the arrangement state of the arrangement member in the predetermined region can be changed efficiently.

Gaming machine WB2-8 is characterized in that the connecting portion of the gaming machine WB2-6 or WB2-7 has a portion with a reduced cross-sectional area between the side connected to the main body portion and the side connected to the engagement portion.

According to the gaming machine WB2-8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines WB2-6 and WB2-7, the connecting portion has a predetermined portion where the cross-sectional area is reduced between the side connected to the main body portion and the side connected to the engagement portion, so that the connecting portion can be easily cut by cutting the predetermined portion. Also, it is easy to form a shape (for example, a sharp shape) suitable for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member in the cut connecting portion (predetermined portion).
<Concept of the invention using the board box Wd100 as an example>
Gaming machine WB3-1 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engagement member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, the engagement member comprises a main body portion and an engagement portion formed to be separable from the main body portion and engaged with the first member, the main body portion and the engagement portion separated from the main body portion are formed to be connectable, and the arrangement state of the arrangement member is changeable using the engagement portion connected to the main body portion.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, an engagement member that is formed so as to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in terms of changing the arrangement of the arrangement members.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that allows the arrangement state of the arrangement members to be suitably changed.

According to the gaming machine WB3-1, the engagement member includes a main body and an engagement portion that is formed so as to be separable from the main body and engages with the first member, the main body and the engagement portion separated from the main body are formed so as to be connectable, and the engagement portion connected to the main body is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement portion, so that it is not necessary to carry a tool (e.g., a utility knife) for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. In addition, the main body of the engagement member is relatively large and easy to grip, while the engagement portion of the engagement member is relatively small and is able to suppress interference with the periphery of the arrangement member (the first member or the second member), making it easy to perform the task of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Therefore, the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed in an advantageous manner.

Gaming machine WB3-2 is characterized in that the engaging portion of the gaming machine WB3-1 is connected to the main body portion at a portion that engages with the first member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WB3-1, gaming machine WB3-2 has the following advantages: The engaging portion is connected to the main body at the portion that engages with the first member, so there is no need to provide a separate portion for connecting to the main body. In other words, the portion that engages with the first member can also be used as the portion that connects to the main body. This simplifies the shape of the engaging portion.

In gaming machine WB3-1 or WB3-2, the engaging member has a regulation portion formed on the main body portion so that the posture of engaging with the first member can be regulated, and the main body portion is characterized in that the regulation portion is connected to the engaging portion.

According to gaming machine WB3-3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines WB3-1 and WB3-2, the engaging member has a regulation portion formed on the main body portion so as to be able to regulate the posture of engaging with the first member, and the regulating portion of the main body portion is connected to the engaging portion, so there is no need to provide a separate portion on the main body portion for coupling with the engaging portion. In other words, the portion (regulating portion) that regulates the posture of the engaging member can also be used as the portion that is coupled to the engaging portion. Therefore, the shape of the engaging portion can be simplified.
<Concept of the invention using the board box Wj100 as an example>
Gaming machine WC1-1 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engagement member formed to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, the engagement member comprises a main body portion and an engagement portion formed to be separable from the main body portion and engaged with the first member, the engagement portion is formed to be displaceable in a predetermined direction when engaged with the first member, and the first member or the second member comprises a suppression means formed to be able to suppress displacement of the engagement portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released in response to the engagement member displaced in the predetermined direction.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, an engagement member that is formed so as to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in preventing the engagement members from being illegally removed.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can prevent the engagement member from being illegally removed.

According to the gaming machine WC1-1, by separating (cutting) the engagement portion from the main body portion, the engagement member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member even when the engagement portion is engaged with the first member.

Here, there is a risk that unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first and second members may be performed by displacing (elastically deforming) the engaging portion in a direction that disengages it from the first member, thereby disengaging the first member from the engaging portion. However, the engaging member is formed so that it can be displaced in a predetermined direction when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member, and the first or second member is provided with a suppression means formed so that it can suppress displacement of the engaging portion in a direction that disengages it from the first member when the engaging member is displaced in the predetermined direction, thereby preventing unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first and second members.

A gaming machine WC1-2, in which the first member or the second member in the gaming machine WC1-1 is provided with a restricting means for restricting the displacement of the engaging member in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction from a position where the restricting means can restrict the displacement of the engaging portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WC1-1, gaming machine WC1-2 has a restricting means for restricting displacement of the engaging member in a direction opposite to a predetermined direction from a position where displacement of the engaging portion can be restricted by the restricting means, so that unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging portion and the first member can be restricted. As a result, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be restricted.

Gaming machine WC1-3 is characterized in that in gaming machine WC1-2, the restricting means is formed to be able to engage with the engaging portion of the engaging member displaced in the predetermined direction, and by engaging with the engaging portion, the restricting means is able to restrict the engaging member from being displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to gaming machine WC1-3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine WC1-2, the restricting means is formed to be able to engage with the engaging portion of the engaging member displaced in a predetermined direction, and by engaging with the engaging portion, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the engaging member in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Therefore, simply by displacing the engaging member in the predetermined direction, a state can be created in which the displacement of the engaging member is restricted by the restricting means, improving the workability of the work of assembling the engaging member.

Gaming machine WC1-4 is characterized in that the first member or the second member in gaming machine WC1-3 is provided with a shielding means for shielding the regulating means.

According to the gaming machine WC1-4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine WC1-3, the first member or the second member has a shielding means for shielding the restricting means, so that the engagement between the engaging portion and the restricting means can be prevented from being illegally released. As a result, the engaging member can be prevented from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.
<Concept of the invention using board boxes Wk100, Wl100, and Wr100 as examples>
Gaming machine WC2-1 is characterized in that in the gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engagement member formed to be able to engage with at least one of the first member or the second member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, at least one of the first member or the second member and the engagement member are engaged with each other at multiple points, and the interaction of the engagement at the multiple points makes it difficult to release the engagement.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, an engagement member that is formed so as to be able to engage with at least the first member, and an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in preventing the engagement members from being illegally removed.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can prevent the engagement member from being illegally removed.

In the gaming machine WC2-1, at least one of the first member or the second member and the engaging member are engaged at multiple points, and the interaction between the multiple engagement points makes the engagement difficult to release, so that unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be prevented.

In the gaming machine WC2-1, the engaging member comprises a main body, and a first engaging portion and a second engaging portion that are formed so as to be separable from the main body and engage with the first member, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are formed so that the second engaging portion can engage with the first member after the first engaging member engages with the first member as the engaging member is displaced, and the first member comprises a restricting means for restricting the displacement of the first engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released.

With the gaming machine WC2-2, by separating (cutting) the first and second engagement parts from the main body, the engagement members (main body) can be removed from the first and second members even when the first and second engagement parts are engaged with the first member.

Here, there is a risk that fraudulent removal of the engaging member from the first and second members may be performed by displacing (elastically deforming) the first and second engaging portions in a direction that disengages them from the first member, thereby disengaging the first and second engaging portions. However, according to gaming machine WC2-2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine WC2-1, the first and second engaging portions are formed so that the second engaging portion can engage with the first member after the first engaging member engages with the first member as the engaging member is displaced, and the first member is provided with a restricting means for restricting the displacement of the first engaging portion in a direction that disengages it from the first member, thereby preventing the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first and second members.

In other words, the displacement of the first engaging part in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released can be restricted by the restricting means, and the displacement of the engaging member in a direction in which the restriction of the displacement of the first engaging part by the restricting means is released can be restricted by the engagement between the first member and the second engaging part. As a result, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be prevented.

A gaming machine WC2-2, characterized in that the direction of displacement of the engagement member when the first engagement portion engages with the first member and the direction of displacement of the engagement member when the second engagement portion engages with the first member are substantially the same. A gaming machine WC2-3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WC2-2, gaming machine WC2-3 has the following advantages: the direction of displacement of the engaging member when the first engaging portion engages with the first member is substantially the same as the direction of displacement of the engaging member when the second engaging portion engages with the first member; therefore, for example, there is no need to perform a two-step operation of displacing the engaging member in the first direction to engage the first engaging portion, and then displacing the engaging member in the second direction to engage the second engaging portion; instead, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be engaged by only operating in one direction when attaching the engaging member to the first and second members. This simplifies the operation of attaching the engaging member, and improves work efficiency.

Furthermore, in a configuration that requires two-stage operation, if the operator forgets to operate in the second direction, the second engagement portion will not be engaged, and there is a risk that the engagement member will be improperly removed from the first and second members. However, by being able to engage the first and second engagement portions with only one-way operation when attaching the engagement member to the first and second members, it is possible to prevent the operator from forgetting to perform the necessary operation and ensure that the second engagement portion is engaged.

In the gaming machine WC2-1, the engaging member comprises a main body, a first engaging portion formed separably from the main body and engaged with the first member, and a second engaging portion formed separably from the main body and engaged with the second member, and the direction of displacement of the first engaging portion that disengages the first engaging portion from the first member is opposite to the direction of displacement of the second engaging portion that disengages the second engaging portion from the second member. In the gaming machine WC2-4,

According to the gaming machine WC2-4, by separating (cutting) the first and second engagement parts from the main body, the engagement member (main body) can be removed from the first and second members even when the first and second engagement parts are engaged with the first member.

Here, by displacing (elastically deforming) the first and second engaging parts in a direction in which the engagement between the first and second members is released, there is a risk of fraudulently removing the engaging members from the first and second members by releasing the engagement between the first and second members and the first and second engaging parts. However, according to the gaming machine WC2-4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine WC2-1, the direction of displacement of the first engaging part in which the engagement between the first engaging part and the first member is released is opposite to the direction of displacement of the second engaging part in which the engagement between the second engaging part and the second member is released. Therefore, when one of the first engaging part or the second engaging part is displaced in a direction in which the engagement is released, the displacement of the engaging member accompanying the displacement of the one part displaces the other of the first engaging part or the second engaging part in a direction in which the engagement is maintained. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent removal of the engaging members from the first and second members.

In the gaming machine WC2-1, the engaging member includes a main body and an engaging portion that is formed separable from the main body and engages with the first member, and the engaging portion is engaged with the first member at two points, a first portion and a second portion, and when the engaging portion is displaced in a direction that releases the engagement between the first member and one of the first portion or the second portion, the engaging portion is displaced in a direction that maintains the engagement between the first member and the other of the first portion or the second portion. In the gaming machine WC2-5,

With the gaming machine WC2-5, the engaging portion can be separated (cut off) from the main body portion, allowing the engaging portion (main body portion) to be removed from the first member and the second member even when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member.

Here, by displacing (elastically deforming) the engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement between the first and second portions and the first member is released, the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion (the first and second portions) is released, and there is a risk of fraudulently removing the engaging member from the first and second members. However, according to the gaming machine WC2-5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WC2-1, when the engaging portion is displaced in a direction in which the engagement between one of the first and second portions and the first member is released, the engaging portion is displaced in a direction in which the engagement between the other of the first and second portions and the first member is maintained, making it difficult to release the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent removal of the engaging member from the first and second members.
<Concept of the invention using board boxes Wo100 to Wq100 as an example>
Gaming machine WD1-1 is characterized in that it includes a first member, a second member, and an engagement member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and further includes an attachment member, the engagement member having a main body portion and an engagement portion formed to be separable from the main body portion and engageable with the first member, the attachment member is formed to be attachable to the engagement portion, and the attachment member is formed so that displacement of the engagement portion in a direction to release the engagement between the first member and the engagement portion can be suppressed by the attachment member.

A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, and an engagement member that is formed to be able to engage with at least the first member (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-244900).

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in preventing the engagement members from being illegally removed.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can prevent the engagement member from being illegally removed.

With the gaming machine WD1-1, the engaging portion can be separated (cut off) from the main body portion, allowing the engaging portion (main body portion) to be removed from the first member and the second member even when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member.

Here, there is a risk that unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first and second members may be performed by displacing (elastically deforming) the engaging portion in a direction that disengages it from the first member, thereby disengaging the first member from the engaging portion. However, the mounting member is formed so that it can be attached to the engaging portion, and is formed so that the mounting member can suppress displacement of the engaging portion in a direction that disengages the first member from the engaging portion, thereby preventing unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first and second members.

On the other hand, even if an attachment member is attached to the engagement portion, it is possible to separate (cut) the engagement portion from the main body portion, so in normal operations, the engagement member (main body portion) can be easily removed from the first and second members by separating (cutting) the engagement portion.

A gaming machine WD1-2 is characterized in that, when the engaging portion is displaced in a direction to release the engagement with the first member in the gaming machine WD1-1, the first surface side of the engaging portion is brought close to the first member, and when the mounting member is attached to the engaging portion, a part of the mounting member is disposed between the first surface of the engaging portion and the first member.

According to the gaming machine WD1-2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine WD1-1, when the engaging portion is displaced in a direction to release the engagement with the first member, the first surface side of the engaging portion is brought closer to the first member, and when the attachment member is attached to the engaging portion, a part of the attachment member is disposed between the first surface of the engaging portion and the first member, so that the distance over which the engaging portion can be displaced in a direction to release the engagement with the first member can be shortened by the amount of the part of the attachment member that is disposed. As a result, it is difficult to release the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion, and therefore it is possible to inhibit the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

Gaming machine WD1-3 is characterized in that the attachment member is formed so as to be attachable to the engagement portion engaged with the first member in gaming machine WD1-2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine WD1-2, gaming machine WD1-3 has an attachment member that is formed so that it can be attached to the engagement portion that is engaged with the first member. Therefore, when engaging the engagement portion with the first member, the displacement of the engagement portion is not hindered by a part of the attachment member. Therefore, the engagement portion can be smoothly engaged with the first member (i.e., the engagement member is attached to the first member and the second member). Also, the engagement allowance between the first member and the engagement portion can be increased, making it easier to prevent the engagement between the first member and the engagement portion from being released.

A gaming machine WD1-4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine WD1-2 or WD1-3, it includes an attachment member that is attached to the first member and the second member, and a part of the attachment member to which the engagement portion is attached is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the first surface, and the protrusion protrudes toward the attachment member that is attached to the first member.

According to the gaming machine WD1-4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine WD1-2 or WD1-3, it has an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, and a part of the mounting member to which the engagement part is attached is formed as a protrusion protruding from the first surface, and the protrusion protrudes toward the arrangement member arranged on the first member. Therefore, when an attempt is made to release the engagement between the first member and the engagement part without separating (cutting) the engagement part from the main body part (i.e., when an attempt is made to displace the engagement part in a direction that releases the engagement with the first member), the arrangement member can be damaged by the protrusion. In other words, a trace can be formed on the arrangement member. This makes it possible to confirm the condition of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new, reused, or has been the subject of fraudulent operation) based on the presence or absence of the trace on the arrangement member.

In addition, the formation of traces on the mounting members can prevent the mounting members from being reused.

A gaming machine WD1-5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine WD1-4, a recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion in the portion of the first member where the mounting member is mounted.

According to gaming machine WD1-5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine WD1-4, a recess is formed in the portion of the first member where the arrangement member is arranged, so that a space can be formed between the arrangement member and the first member, and since the recess is formed in a position corresponding to the protrusion, when attempting to release the engagement between the first member and the engagement member without separating (cutting) the engagement member from the main body (i.e., when attempting to displace the engagement member in a direction that releases the engagement with the first member), the recess (space) can be utilized (making it possible for the tip of the protrusion to be received in the recess) to make it easier to damage the arrangement member with the protrusion. In other words, when the engagement portion is operated improperly, it is easier to make a mark on the arrangement member.

<Configuration to reduce wasted balls>
A gaming machine YA1 is provided with a gaming ball launching device that launches gaming balls, a gaming area forming means that forms a gaming area into which the gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching device flow, a detection means that is disposed in the gaming area and detects the passage of the gaming balls, and an operation means that is controlled in operation in a predetermined pattern based on the detection of the passage of the gaming balls by the detection means, and is characterized in that the gaming machine YA1 is provided with a guide means that guides the gaming balls that have passed through the detection means along a predetermined path to the operation means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with movable parts that open and close after a specified time has elapsed since the passage of a gaming ball through the detection area is detected (see, for example, JP 2017-000562 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow path of the gaming ball that passed through the detection area flows down in multiple flow patterns, so depending on the flow pattern of the gaming ball, the gaming ball that passed through the detection area will either be picked up by the movable part or will fall off the movable part randomly. Therefore, if there are many gaming balls that fall off the movable part, the player may easily misunderstand that the gaming machine store is making adjustments that are disadvantageous to the player, and may become dissatisfied that they are not able to play in an equal environment.

In contrast, with the gaming machine YA1, the flow of the gaming ball after passing through the detection means is not random, but the gaming ball is guided to the operating means by the guiding means, so the player can understand that the difference between whether the gaming ball that passed the detection means is picked up by the operating means or drops out of the operating means is due to operation control (control based on the result of a lottery drawn in advance at the time of winning). In other words, the pattern of operation control of the operating means is set based on the flow time determined by the configuration of the guiding means, and it can be understood that this is not due to adjustments by the gaming machine store, making the player feel that they are playing in a fair environment.

The game area refers to the area where the game ball flows down until the profit given to the player by the game ball that flows down is determined, and is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board. For example, the game area includes a flow path formed upstream of a detection device that detects the passage of the game ball to draw the first symbol, and a flow path disposed inside the game board or on the back side of the game board.

In the gaming machine YA1, the guide means is arranged so as to pass through the rear side of the gaming area.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YA1, the gaming machine YA2 can hide the gaming ball guided by the guide means by the gaming ball flowing down in the gaming area, thereby improving the attention to the area from the guide means to the operating means.

In the gaming machine YA2, the gaming balls guided by the guiding means flow down toward the front side of the gaming board that constitutes the gaming area within a predetermined range.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YA2, the gaming machine YA3 allows the player to see the gaming ball approaching because the gaming ball guided by the guide means flows down to the front side of the gaming board. Therefore, the gaming ball guided by the guide means can be made to stand out in comparison with the usual gaming balls that simply flow down.

A gaming machine YA4 is one of the gaming machines YA1 to YA3, characterized in that the guiding means is configured to be able to manage the time it takes for a gaming ball to flow down from the detection means to the operation means.

The gaming machine YA4 can easily set the effect of any of the gaming machines YA1 to YA3, as well as the operation control of a pattern in which the gaming balls are picked up by the operating means and the operation control of a pattern in which the gaming balls are spilled.

In any of the gaming machines YA1 to YA4, the operating means is configured to guide the game ball in a manner that causes the game ball to roll in a closed or open state, and is equipped with a first operating section whose width dimension in the direction in which the game ball flows down is set to less than twice the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball guided by the guiding means is guided to the first operating section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YA1 to YA4, the gaming machine YA5 can shorten the time it takes for the gaming ball to be guided to the operating means by the first operating unit, and can guide the gaming balls one by one with the operating means. The width of the operating means can be shortened.

In the gaming machine YA5, the operating means is provided with a second operating section that is longer than the first operating section, and the period required for the gaming ball to roll on the second operating section is longer than the period required for the gaming ball to roll on the first operating section. The gaming machine YA6 is characterized by this configuration.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YA5, the gaming machine YA6 also provides a guidance mode for a gaming ball that has reached the operating means, and when the operating means is operating in a similar operating pattern, the way in which the gaming ball flows downstream can be changed depending on whether the gaming ball reaches the first operating section or the second operating section.

A gaming machine YA7 is characterized in that in the gaming machine YA6, the gaming ball guided to the first operating section and the gaming ball guided to the second operating section are guided to different flow-down areas.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YA6, the gaming machine YA7 can use a single operating means to configure the ball guidance direction in multiple directions, so that the appearance of the gaming ball being guided by the operating means can be realized in multiple ways.

A gaming machine YA7 is configured so that gaming balls that pass through the detection means can be guided to the first operating unit, and gaming balls that flow down without passing through the detection means can be guided to the second operating unit. A gaming machine YA8 is characterized in that:

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YA7, the gaming machine YA8 can prevent a problem in which a gaming ball that has passed through the detection means is bounced off by other gaming balls, resulting in poor guidance.

A gaming machine YA9 is one of the gaming machines YA6 to YA8, characterized in that the gaming ball guided to the first operating section and the gaming ball guided to the second operating section are prevented from colliding on the operating means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YA6 to YA8, the gaming machine YA9 makes it easier to avoid collisions between gaming balls rolling on the operating means, which can cause unevenness in the flow pattern.

The game balls placed on the first operating section and the game balls placed on the second operating section may be separated by placing a wall between them, or even if there is no wall, the balls may be managed so that they do not collide.

A gaming machine YA10 is characterized in that in the gaming machine YA9, the gaming ball guided to the first operating section flows down in the opposite direction to the gaming ball guided to the second operating section.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YA9, the gaming machine YA10 can avoid collisions between the gaming balls regardless of the flow speed of the gaming balls, unlike when the gaming balls guided to the first operating section and the gaming balls guided to the second operating section flow in the same direction.

The direction in which the game ball flows down may be reversed left to right, or front to back. It may also be reversed along a predetermined trajectory (e.g., a circular trajectory).

A gaming machine YA11 is one of the gaming machines YA1 to YA10, characterized in that the guidance means has multiple paths as the predetermined path.

The gaming machine YA11 has the same effects as any of the gaming machines YA1 to YA10, and can increase the number of patterns in which the gaming balls can flow down while reducing the number of different operation patterns of the operating means.

<Sensors are placed along the path of the eight chances to pull the ball from the disadvantageous side to the advantageous side>
A gaming machine YB1 is provided with a gaming ball launching device which launches gaming balls, a gaming area forming means which forms a gaming area into which the gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching device flow down, a forming means which forms a flow path for the gaming balls, a first path which is arranged downstream of the forming means and through which the gaming balls are guided to a first ball inlet, and a second path which is arranged downstream of the forming means and through which the gaming balls are guided to a second ball inlet, the gaming machine being characterized in that it is provided with a moving means which moves the gaming balls flowing down the first path towards the second path.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the path that the gaming balls take periodically changes depending on the order in which the gaming balls pass through the ball entrance (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the advantage or disadvantage of a ball entering the ball entrance changes only with the cycle in which the gaming balls enter, and there is a problem in that it is difficult to create a generally advantageous or generally disadvantageous state. In other words, there is a problem in that the range of change in the degree of advantage for the player is limited.

In contrast, with the gaming machine YB1, the moving means can randomly cause the gaming ball that has flowed down the path configured by the configuration means to enter either the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port, thereby expanding the range of variation in the degree of advantage of the player compared to when the entry port through which the gaming ball enters changes periodically.

Gaming machine YB2 is characterized in that in gaming machine YB1, the path configured by the configuration means is a branch path.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YB1, the gaming machine YB2 not only changes the way the gaming ball flows down due to the action of the moving means, but also changes the way the gaming ball flows down due to the branching of the path, so that attention to the gaming ball that has entered the component means can be improved.

Gaming machine YB3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a detection means configured to be capable of detecting the passage of a gaming ball flowing down the path in gaming machine YB1 or YB2, the movement means is equipped with an operation means configured to be operable in a manner that affects the flow of the gaming ball down the path, the operation means is configured to send the gaming ball toward the first ball entrance in the first state and to send the gaming ball toward the second ball entrance in the second state, and is configured to be operable and controlled based on the passage of the gaming ball being detected by the detection means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines YB1 and YB2, gaming machine YB3 can switch between whether a gaming ball that enters the component means enters the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port depending on the operating pattern of the operating means, making it easier to lower the periodicity of the entry port through which the gaming ball enters. This makes it possible to increase the range of change in the degree of advantage of the player compared to when the entry port through which the gaming ball enters changes periodically.

Gaming machine YB4 is characterized in that the operating means in gaming machine YB3 is configured to be capable of guiding gaming balls that flow down the outside of the component means.

In the gaming machine YB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine YB3, the operating means can serve both as a means for guiding gaming balls flowing down the flow path configured in the configuration means and as a means for guiding gaming balls flowing down outside the flow path configured in the configuration means.

The gaming machine YB5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine YB3 or YB4, it is provided with a second detection means arranged outside the path of the component means, and the manner in which the gaming ball that has passed through the detection means is guided to the operating means is different from the manner in which the gaming ball that has passed through the second detection means is guided to the operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine YB3 or YB4, gaming machine YB5 can provide multiple types of guidance to the operating means.

The difference in guidance manner is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a difference in the path of the game ball, or a difference in the flow speed of the game ball.

Among any of the gaming machines YB3 to YB5, the operating means changes the flow direction of the gaming ball between the up-down direction and the left-right direction by switching between the first state and the second state. Among the gaming machines YB6,

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YB3 to YB5, gaming machine YB6 makes it easier for players to understand changes in the direction in which the gaming ball flows.

Gaming machine YB7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines YB3 to YB6, the detection means is controlled so that a predetermined pattern changes for a predetermined period of time based on the passage of the gaming ball, and the predetermined period is set to be shorter than the period required for the gaming ball to pass through the detection means after entering the path.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YB3 to YB6, gaming machine YB7 maintains a state in which there is one or less gaming ball between the entrance of the path of the component means and the detection means, making it possible to avoid a situation in which the pattern is changing when the gaming ball passes through the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to start changing the predetermined pattern immediately after the gaming ball passes through the detection means.

Therefore, it is possible to synchronize the timing at which the game ball passes through the detection means with the timing at which the operation control of the operation means starts based on the game ball passing through the detection means.

Gaming machine YB8 is characterized in that the operating means in gaming machine YB7 can switch between a first control mode in which the gaming ball detected by the detection means is not guided, and a second control mode in which the gaming ball detected by the detection means is guided.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine YB7, gaming machine YB8 can improve the player's ability to focus on the operation of the operating means, since even if the operation of the operating means is executed, the gaming ball can be guided to the operating means in some cases and not in other cases depending on the control mode.

In the gaming machine YB8, the switching of the control mode is configured to be executable each time the detection means detects, and the type of the switchable control mode is configured to be changeable each time a jackpot is played. The gaming machine YB9 is characterized by this.

Among any of the gaming machines YB3 to YB9, gaming machine YB10 is characterized in that the profit that the player obtains when the gaming ball enters the first ball entrance is different from the profit that the player obtains when the gaming ball enters the second ball entrance.

The gaming machine YB10 can increase attention to the operating means in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YB3 to YB9.

<Configuration for flowing down to operating means at multiple positions>
Gaming machine YC1 is characterized in that it comprises a game ball launching device that launches game balls, a game area forming means that forms a game area into which the game balls launched by the game ball launching device flow down, a detection means that is disposed in the game area and detects the passage of the game balls, and an operation means that is controlled in operation based on the detection of the passage of the game balls by the detection means, the operation means comprises a first flow-down position where the game balls can flow down and a second flow-down position different from the first flow-down position, and the flow-down pattern of the game balls flowing down the first flow-down position is different from the flow-down pattern of the game balls flowing down the second flow-down position.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a movable accessory is opened when a gaming ball is detected by a detection means, and the movable accessory guides the gaming ball to a winning opening (see, for example, JP 2015-181572 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the manner in which the gaming ball is guided to the movable accessory is monotonous, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention-grabbing power of the movable accessory.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine YC1, the operating means is provided with multiple flow-down positions to which the gaming ball flows down, and the flow pattern differs depending on which flow-down position the gaming ball flows down to, so that it is possible to provide variation in the manner in which the gaming ball is guided to the movable device, thereby improving the attention-grabbing power of the movable device.

In the gaming machine YC1, the flow-down mode is the flow-down speed, flow-down direction, or flow-down interval of the gaming balls.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YC1, the gaming machine YC2 can disperse the flow of the gaming balls flowing down along the operating means, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming balls.

Gaming machine YC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine YC1 or YC2, the first flow-down position is set as a position where a gaming ball that has passed through the detection means can flow down.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine YC1 or YC2, gaming machine YC3 makes it possible to know that the gaming ball has passed the detection means by confirming that the gaming ball has reached the first flow-down position, eliminating the need to visually check the detection means.

In addition, by making game balls that have passed through the detection means and game balls that have not passed through the detection means flow down at different positions on the operating means, the number of game balls that can be placed on the operating means at the same time can be changed by changing the launch mode to aim for all balls to pass through the detection means or to aim for some game balls to miss the detection means.

In the gaming machine YC3, the flow path of the gaming ball that has passed through the detection means is configured as a path that does not branch out.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YC3, the gaming machine YC4 can detect that the gaming ball has passed through the detection means by confirming that the gaming ball has reached the first flow-down position.

A gaming machine YC5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines YC1 to YC4, the flow path of the gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow position and the flow path of the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow position merge at a predetermined merging position downstream of the operating means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YC1 to YC4, the gaming machine YC5 can make the profits that can be obtained by the gaming balls caused to flow down by the operating means the same regardless of the flow position of the gaming balls.

Gaming machine YC6 is characterized in that the merging position in gaming machine YC5 is located at a position away from the operating means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YC5, the gaming machine YC6 can reduce the impact of the load generated by the gaming balls when they merge on the operation of the operating means. This allows the operation of the operating means to be performed smoothly.

Gaming machine YC7 is characterized in that the merging position in gaming machine YC5 is located close to the operating means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YC5, the gaming machine YC7 can provide a detection device that detects the passage of the gaming ball flowing down along the operating means, which can be positioned further upstream, making it possible to generate profits earlier. This can therefore shorten the waiting time from when the gaming ball flows down along the operating means until the profit is generated.

Game machine YC8 is one of the game machines YC5 to YC7, characterized in that the game ball is configured to fall downward at the joining position.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YC5 to YC7, the gaming machine YC8 can prevent balls from flowing back after merging or from becoming jammed.

Among any of the gaming machines YC1 to YC8, gaming machine YC9 is characterized in that the flow direction of the gaming ball flowing down the first flow position and the flow direction of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow position are configured to be the same.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YC1 to YC8, the gaming machine YC9 can unify the side on which attention is paid to the gaming ball that has reached the operating means, allowing the player to easily grasp the area on which attention should be paid.

Among any of the gaming machines YC1 to YC8, gaming machine YC10 is characterized in that it is configured so that the gaming balls flowing down the first flow position and the gaming balls flowing down the second flow position flow in different directions.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YC1 to YC8, the gaming machine YC10 allows the player to visually determine whether the gaming ball has flowed down the first flow position or the second flow position by visually checking the direction in which the gaming ball flows down. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the gaming balls placed close to the operating means overlap one another and are difficult to see, the direction in which the gaming ball flows down the downstream side of the operating means can be grasped.

A gaming machine YC11 is characterized in that it is equipped with a first ball entrance configured to be able to give a first benefit to a player when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance, and a second ball entrance configured to be able to give a second benefit greater than the first benefit to a player when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance, the first flow-down position is disposed on the flow-down path of a gaming ball that has entered the first ball entrance, and the operating means is configured to be able to guide a gaming ball flowing down the first flow-down position toward the second ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YC1 to YC10, the gaming machine YC11 can use the operating means to pull out a gaming ball that has entered the first ball entrance toward the second ball entrance before a profit is awarded by the gaming ball.

As a result, even in a gaming machine with a left-right symmetrical board (a gaming machine with a board configuration in which the winning holes for the lottery of special symbols and the winning holes that open and close during special games are arranged vertically in the center left and right, and the ball can be scored into these winning holes by either hitting from the left or right), the frequency with which a profit is generated by a ball scoring into the first ball scoring hole can be reduced by the operation of the operating means.

This reduces the need to configure a right-hand hitting path that does not guide game balls to the first ball inlet in order to reduce the frequency of balls entering the first ball inlet, thereby improving the design freedom of the game area.

<Advantages and disadvantages of the first flow path and the second flow path branched by the branching means can be changed>
The gaming machine YD1 comprises a gaming ball launching device which launches gaming balls, a gaming area forming means which forms a gaming area into which the gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching device flow, and a forming means which forms a first flow path and a second flow path downstream of a predetermined ball entry area, and is characterized by having a changing means which is configured to be able to change the magnitude relationship between a first profit which a player can obtain when the gaming ball flows down the first flow path and a second profit which a player can obtain when the gaming ball flows down the second flow path.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the profit a player can expect to obtain differs depending on whether the gaming ball that has flowed down a specified ball entry area flows to the left or the right (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the advantageous direction when the gaming ball flows down is fixed, so if the player can simply confirm the direction in which the gaming ball flows down at the branching position, the profit to be obtained thereafter can be predicted, and the player's concentration peaks before the gaming ball reaches the fixed area where the profit is actually determined, which reduces the player's attention to the path from the branching position to the fixed area, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of using the gaming area as a performance area.

In contrast, with the gaming machine YD1, the magnitude relationship between the first profit and the second profit can be switched by the changing means, so the peak of the player's concentration can be brought to the point where the gaming ball actually enters the determined area where the profit is determined, rather than the point where the gaming ball enters the first or second flow path, and therefore high attention can be maintained on the path from the branching area to the determined area. This makes it possible to effectively use the gaming boundary area as a presentation area.

The time when the profit is determined is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be the time when the game ball passes through a detection port (detection area, specific area, etc.), or it may be the time when the profit determined by the game ball passing through the detection port is notified to the player (the time when the player can recognize the profit).

The gaming machine YD2 is characterized in that it is provided with a flow-down area that causes gaming balls to flow down to the front side when the larger of the first and second benefits is awarded to the player in the gaming machine YD1.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine YD1, the gaming machine YD2 awards the player with a big win when the gaming balls flow differently from the normal flow pattern (flowing downwards), and by making the gaming balls visible, it is possible to make the player easily understand that a big win has been awarded.

The gaming machine YD3 is characterized in that the first flow path and the second flow path are configured to be able to merge in the gaming machine YD1 or YD2, and there is a vertical position difference in the entry position to the merging position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YD1 or YD2, the gaming machine YD3 makes it easier to prevent the gaming ball from flowing backwards, since the load generated at the time of collision is in the vertical direction (the direction intersecting the first flow path and the second flow path) even if the gaming ball enters the joining position from the first flow path and the second flow path at the same time.

Amusement machine YD4 is characterized in that the entry position of the gaming machine YD3 is arranged so that the side where gaming balls pass through more frequently is located at the bottom.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YD3, the gaming machine YD4 makes it easier to prevent gaming balls that pass through a specified entry position with high frequency from accidentally entering another entry position.

In any of the gaming machines YD1 to YD4, the first flow path and the second flow path are provided with a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball, and an operation means that is controlled in a predetermined pattern based on the detection of the passage of a gaming ball by the detection means, and the gaming machine YD5 is characterized in that the distance between the detection means and the operation means in the first flow path is different from the distance between the detection means and the operation means in the second flow path.

In the gaming machine YD5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines YD1 to YD4, while the operation control of the operating means is the same, it is possible to make a difference between whether the operating means acts on the gaming ball when the gaming ball flows down the first flow path and when the gaming ball flows down the second flow path.

<Switching between 3 states>
A gaming machine YE1 is equipped with a gaming ball launching device that launches gaming balls, a gaming area forming means that forms a gaming area into which gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching device flow, a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port that are configured to allow gaming balls that flow down the gaming area to enter, a detection means that is disposed in the gaming area and detects the passage of the gaming ball, and an operation means that operates based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the detection means, characterized in that the gaming machine YE1 is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter the first ball entry port, a second state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port, and a third state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port in response to the operating mode of the operation means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a first start hole and a second start hole (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although it is possible to switch between a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the first start hole and the second start hole (first second start hole) and a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter only the second start hole (second second start hole), it is not possible to switch to a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter only the first start hole, which limits the degree of freedom in the way the game ball enters the hole.

In response to this, the gaming machine YE1 can switch between not only the third state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the first and second ball entrances, and the second state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance, but also the first state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance, depending on the operating mode of the operating means, thereby improving the degree of freedom in the way the gaming ball enters the ball.

In the gaming machine YE1, in the third state, the gaming ball that flows down alternates between entering the first ball entrance and entering the second ball entrance. The gaming machine YE2 is characterized by this.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine YE1, the gaming machine YE2 can equalize the number of balls entering the first ball entrance and the number of balls entering the second ball entrance in the third state.

The gaming machine YE3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine YE1 or YE2, it has a predetermined flow path formed so that the gaming balls that flow down can enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines YE1 and YE2, gaming machine YE3 has the advantage that, when a gaming ball is flowing down a designated flow path, the gaming ball can still enter either the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, which can increase the attention to the gaming ball flowing down the designated flow path.

＜Earn both Special 1 and Special 2 with support＞
Gaming machine YF1 is equipped with a game ball launching device that launches game balls, a game area forming means that forms a game area into which game balls launched by the game ball launching device flow, a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet that are configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the game area to enter, a detection means that is disposed in the game area and detects the passage of the game ball, and an operation means that is controlled in operation based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means, wherein the operation means is configured to be able to branch the flow path of the game ball that has flowed down to the position where the operation means is located into a first path toward the first ball inlet, a second path toward the second ball inlet, and other paths.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a first start hole and a second start hole (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, while it is possible to create a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second start hole (second second start hole) when the movable piece is in an open state, it is not possible to create a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the first start hole, and there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in the way the movable piece guides the gaming ball.

In contrast, with the gaming machine YF1, a first path and a second path are formed as flow paths downstream from the operating means, so that the gaming ball can be guided to either the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet, improving the way the gaming ball is guided by the operating means.

Gaming machine YF2 is characterized in that in gaming machine YF1, the profit that can be given to the player when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance is set to be greater than the profit that can be given to the player when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance, the first ball entrance is located below the center side of the operating means, and the second ball entrance is located below the end side of the operating means.

In addition to the effects of game machine YF1, game machine YF2 makes it possible for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance if it flows all the way to the end of the operating means, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance compared to a situation in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance by dropping midway (the operating means operates at the right time).

Game machine YF3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a spill prevention means for preventing game balls from spilling from the end of the operating means in game machine YF1 or YF2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines YF1 and YF2, gaming machine YF3 has a spill prevention means that prevents the gaming ball from spilling out of the operating means due to excessive force, which increases the player's sense of security when the gaming ball reaches the operating means.

In addition, by using the spill prevention means to make the game ball bounce back with high resilience, the rolling speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the operating means can be increased, making it easier for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the operating means in a short period of time.

<Different configurations on left and right>
Gaming machine YG1 is equipped with a game ball launching device that launches game balls, a game area forming means that forms a game area into which the game balls launched by the game ball launching device flow, a plurality of detection means that are arranged in the game area and detect the passage of the game balls, an operation means that operates based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means, and a guided ball entry port that is configured to allow the game balls guided to the operation means to enter, wherein the plurality of detection means include a first detection means that is arranged upstream of the operation means, and a second detection means that is arranged at a position different from the first detection means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a normal starting port (see, for example, JP 2016-54970 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the path that is guided to the normal starting port and the path that is guided to the opening and closing member side are separate paths, and the game ball flows down each path alternately. Therefore, if a game ball collides with a nail located directly above the normal starting port and deviates from the normal starting port, a period of time will pass before the game ball is next guided to the normal starting port, and the game ball will flow down to the opening and closing member side when the opening and closing member is closed, creating a situation where there is little hope. In this case, there is a problem that the game becomes drawn out and the player's interest may be reduced.

In contrast, gaming machine YG1 is equipped with a first detection means disposed upstream of the operating means and a second detection means disposed at a different location from the upstream side of the operating means, so that it is possible to frequently create a situation in which the gaming ball is detected by the detection means. This increases the frequency of operation of the operating means, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

A gaming machine YG2 is characterized in that a predetermined flow path is formed between the first detection means and the operating means in the gaming machine YG1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine YG1, gaming machine YG2 can streamline the flow of gaming balls from the first detection means to the operation means.

Gaming machine YG3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine YG1 or YG2, the operating means is formed so as to extend toward the flow path of the gaming ball passing through the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines YG1 and YG2, gaming machine YG3 can prevent the attention level on the second detection means side from becoming too low compared to the attention level on the first detection means side.

<The means for guiding the game ball is long>
a first detection means arranged downstream of the guiding means for detecting the passage of the game ball; and a second detection means arranged downstream of the guiding means for detecting the passage of the game ball and for providing the player with a benefit different from the benefit that can be provided to the player based on the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, wherein the guiding means comprises a designated portion for receiving the game ball that has flowed down from the ball entry area, and a downstream portion arranged downstream of the designated portion and displaced in response to the displacement of the designated portion, and is configured to be able to change between a first state in which the game ball is easily guided to the first detection means and a second state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second detection means, depending on at least the position of the downstream portion.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the passage of a gaming ball is detected in a specified detection area (second start winning port 27), a movable device (second variable winning device 31) is arranged to open with a certain probability and guide the gaming ball to a prize ball port located at the back, and there are gaming machines in which the gaming state in which the movable device is opened frequently to cause balls to enter the prize ball port frequently and allow the player to win a large number of prize balls is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, see JP 2017-169630 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a movable member (opening/closing member 28b) is provided in another detection area (variable start winning port 28a), so no movable member is provided to open or close the specified detection area, and the game ball is always allowed to pass through the specified detection area. Under normal conditions, a recommended playing method is to make the game ball flow down the left side of the play area, but beginner players, in particular, may mistakenly shoot the game ball so that it flows down the right side of the play area.

When the passage of a gaming ball is detected in a specified detection area, a lottery is held for the opening action of the movable device (lottery for a small win), as well as a lottery for a special symbol (lottery for a big win). If a big win occurs as a result of the lottery for a special symbol, a penalty is imposed as the gaming state after the big win ends, and the player is forced to play in a less favorable state than under normal circumstances. Beginners may suspect that they have been penalized without knowing why, which may cause them to lose interest in the gaming machine and result in a situation where new players are not attracted to the machine. In other words, there was a problem that the system was not friendly to beginners and lacked fairness.

In response to this, with the gaming machine BA1, the guiding means is maintained in the first state, thereby creating a state in which the gaming ball is easily guided to the first detection means, and in this state, guiding of the gaming ball to the second detection means (predetermined detection area) can be suppressed. As a result, by utilizing the guiding means, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the second detection means, thereby improving the fairness of the game.

The guide means may be configured so that the specified portion and the downstream portion are integrally formed, or so that the specified portion and the downstream portion are formed separately.

A gaming machine BA1, characterized in that the downstream portion is configured to prevent the gaming ball from being guided to the second detection means in the first state, and to prevent the gaming ball from being guided to the first detection means in the second state. A gaming machine BA2.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1, the gaming machine BA2 can switch the detection means through which the gaming ball flows down through the guide means by using the downstream side.

In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the guide means is characterized by having an intermediate portion that causes the gaming ball received by the specified portion to flow down toward the downstream portion.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines BA1 and BA2, the gaming machine BA3 has an intermediate section that can prolong the period in which it is unclear whether the gaming ball flowing down through the guiding means will be guided to the first detection means or the second detection means.

The middle section may be configured to be displaceable in response to the displacement of the downstream section, or may be configured not to displace regardless of the displacement of the downstream section.

In the gaming machine BA3, the intermediate section is configured so that the flow direction of the gaming ball does not change whether in the first state or the second state, and the gaming ball is guided to the first detection means or the second detection means on the downstream side. In the gaming machine BA4,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BA3, gaming machine BA4 has the following features: even if the guiding means switches between the first and second states when the gaming ball is being guided through the middle section after entering the ball entry area, the flow direction of the gaming ball in the middle section is not affected, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which a change in the state of the guiding means is detected from a change in the flow pattern of the gaming ball being guided through the middle section.

A gaming machine BA5, which is any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA4, is characterized in that in the first state, the predetermined part is positioned to restrict the ball from entering the guiding means from the ball entry area, and in the second state, the predetermined part is positioned to allow the ball to enter the guiding means from the ball entry area.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA4, it is possible to switch whether or not a new gaming ball can enter the guidance means by switching the state of the guidance means.

In addition, it is possible to draw attention to both the passage of the game ball through the specified portion and the passage of the game ball through the downstream portion. In other words, it is possible to attract the player's gaze to multiple positions, and it is possible to increase the number of points of interest for the guiding means.

A gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that in the gaming machine BA5, the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined portion and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream portion are performed simultaneously.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BA5, gaming machine BA6 allows simultaneous switching at different positions, giving the player the gameplay of being able to select and visually confirm either the switching at a specific portion or the switching at the downstream portion.

A gaming machine BA7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BA5, the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined portion and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream portion are performed at different times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BA5, gaming machine BA7 executes switching at different positions at different times, which allows the player to visually recognize switching at a specific portion and switching at a downstream portion by shifting his or her line of sight. In addition, it is possible to guide the movement of the player's line of sight.

A gaming machine BA8 is one of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA7, characterized in that the predetermined portion slides and displaces in the forward and backward directions.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA7, gaming machine BA8 can prevent the movement of a specific part from being noticeable when viewed from the front. The specific part is a part that switches whether the ball can enter the guiding means, and is not a part that determines whether the ball is guided to the first detection means or the second detection means. Therefore, by preventing it from being noticeable, the movement of the downstream part can be made to stand out relatively.

A gaming machine BA9 is one of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA8, characterized in that the downstream portion is displaced in a rotating manner.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA8, gaming machine BA9 can emphasize the movement of the downstream portion, which is the area that determines whether the ball is guided to the first detection means or the second detection means.

A gaming machine BA10, which is any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA9, is characterized in that the guide means is configured so that the flow distance of the gaming ball flowing from the specified portion to the downstream portion is longer than the distance between the specified portion and the downstream portion when viewed from the front.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA9, the gaming machine BA10 makes it easier for the player to move their gaze from the designated area to the downstream area before the gaming ball that has flowed from the designated area reaches the downstream area.

A gaming machine BA11 is one of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA10, characterized in that the guide means includes a prevention means for preventing gaming balls that do not pass through the specified portion from reaching the downstream portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA10, the gaming machine BA11 uses a prevention means to restrict the flow path of the gaming ball reaching the downstream side, thereby preventing the gaming ball from reaching the downstream side through an unintended path and entering the wrong detection means.

A gaming machine BA12, which is one of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA11, is characterized in that the guide means is configured to be able to shorten a second period during which the multiple gaming balls received by the specified part during a first period pass through the downstream part, compared to a first period during which the specified part receives multiple gaming balls from the ball entry area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA11, the gaming machine BA12 uses a guide means to reduce the deviation in the timing of the game ball passing through the downstream section compared to the deviation in the timing of the game ball being received by the designated section. This makes it possible to increase the tolerance for the deviation in the timing of the game ball being received at the designated section while maintaining the accuracy of the change in the flow direction of the game ball at the downstream section, making it easier to provide a comfortable game experience.

Gaming machine BA13 is characterized in that the predetermined portion in gaming machine BA12 is configured with a shape that applies a load to the gaming ball in a direction that accelerates the gaming ball when displaced.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BA12, gaming machine BA13 generates a load in a direction that accelerates the gaming ball when the specified part is displaced, and thus accelerates the gaming ball placed on the specified part when the specified part is displaced toward the gaming ball that passed through the specified part before the specified part was displaced, thereby creating a situation in which the distance between the gaming balls is reduced.

<Extending the flow path>
Gaming machine BB1 is provided with a ball entry area, a flow-down means for causing a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball flowing down the downstream area, wherein the flow-down means comprises a first movable part for causing the gaming ball to flow down, a second movable part that is located downstream of the first movable part and causes the gaming ball to flow down, and a specified part that is located between the first movable part and the second movable part and causes the gaming ball to flow down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a detection sensor into which a gaming ball can enter and a movable member that guides the gaming ball to the detection sensor (see, for example, JP 2015-181572 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the path along which the game balls flow toward the detection sensor is limited to the length of the movable member, so the flow of the game balls can easily become monotonous and players can easily become bored, leaving room for improvement in the way the game balls flow down.

In contrast, with gaming machine BB1, the flow-down means arranged upstream of the detection means has multiple movable parts that sandwich a specific part, making it easier to vary the length and shape of the movable parts, and improving the way the gaming balls flow down.

Gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BB1, the first movable part has an overlapping part that overlaps with the specified part in the vertical direction at least at the downstream end.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BB1, gaming machine BB2 can also direct gaming balls to a specific part through the overlapping part, making it easier to prevent gaming balls from falling out between the first movable part and the specific part.

Gaming machine BB3 is characterized in that the first movable part in the gaming machine BB1 or BB2 has an inclined part at least at the downstream end for directing the flow direction of the gaming ball toward the predetermined part.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BB1 and BB2, gaming machine BB3 has an inclined portion that allows the gaming ball to flow downward toward the designated portion, making it easier to prevent the gaming ball from falling out between the first movable portion and the designated portion even if the flow of the gaming ball is disturbed.

<Collecting balls densely on the downstream side>
Gaming machine BBZ1 is equipped with a ball entry area, a flow-down means for causing a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball flowing down the downstream area, wherein the flow-down means includes a predetermined means for making the interval at which a plurality of gaming balls that have entered the ball entry area at a predetermined interval flow down the downstream area shorter than the predetermined interval.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple movable parts that can configure two types of open states in which the load applied by a gaming ball when the gaming ball flows down from a predetermined ball entry area can guide the gaming ball to the first detection means or the second detection means, and the movable parts are configured to close from the open state by the transmission of a mechanical load when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter each prize ball port (for example, see JP 2016-202338 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the gaming ball is normally maintained in a state where it is not guided to either the first or second detection means, and so can be switched between a total of three states: a first state where the gaming ball is guided to the first detection means, and a second state where the gaming ball is guided to the second detection means. In either state, the path along which the gaming ball flows after entering the ball entry area is a single path, and the timing (interval) at which the ball enters the ball entry area and the timing (interval) at which the prize ball is paid out following that ball entry are almost the same. This means that the timing at which the player receives a benefit is limited to the interval (fixed interval) between the launch of the gaming balls, making it difficult to vary the pace of the game and to increase the player's interest.

In response to this, with the gaming machine BBZ1, a predetermined means of the flow-down means can be used to create cases where the interval at which the gaming ball flows down the downstream area is shorter than the interval at which the gaming ball enters the ball entry area, making it possible to create cases where the gaming ball flows down the downstream area at intervals shorter than the interval at which the gaming ball is launched. This makes it easier to avoid a fixed interval at which the benefit given to the player when the gaming ball enters the ball entry area is generated, and by adding variance to the game, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine BBZ1, the predetermined means is configured to make the flow speed of the gaming ball in the ball entry area faster than the flow speed of the gaming ball in the downstream area. Gaming machine BBZ2.

In addition to the effects of the BBZ1 gaming machine, the BBZ2 gaming machine can use a specified means to create a state in which a gaming ball flowing down the downstream area can be caught up with a gaming ball in the ball entry area.

In the gaming machine BBZ1 or BBZ2, the flow-down means is configured to be displaceable in one direction or the other direction, and is configured to apply a predetermined load toward the downstream area to a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry area by displacement in the one direction or the other direction. In the gaming machine BBZ3.

In the BBZ3 gaming machine, in addition to the effects of the BBZ1 or BBZ2 gaming machine, the flow-down means is configured to be capable of reciprocating displacement, and the gaming means can change the flow-down pattern by either flowing down the flow-down means when the flow-down means is displaced in one direction, or flowing down the flow-down means when the flow-down means is displaced in the other direction.

In the gaming machine BBZ3, the gaming ball flowing down the flow means is positioned at either a non-branching position where no branching occurs in the flow direction of the gaming ball, or a branching position where branching may occur in the flow direction of the gaming ball. The gaming machine BBZ4 is characterized by the fact that in the gaming machine BBZ3, the gaming ball flowing down the flow means is positioned at either a non-branching position where no branching occurs in the flow direction of the gaming ball, or a branching position where branching may occur in the flow direction of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of the BBZ3 gaming machine, the BBZ4 gaming machine can reduce the fatigue of the player who watches the game ball while it is flowing down the flow means, compared to when the game ball is located at the branching position.

Gaming machine BBZ5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BBZ4, the branching position is located on the side where visibility is higher than that of the non-branching position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine BBZ4, the gaming machine BBZ5 can reduce the fatigue of players who watch the gaming ball.

The side with higher visibility can be exemplified in various ways. For example, it may be the side closer to the player (the front side), it may be a side that is less likely to be hidden by game balls flowing down the game area, or it may be a side that is not dazzling when light is emitted by LEDs or other light-emitting effects.

Gaming machine BBZ6 is characterized in that in gaming machine BBZ4 or BBZ5, the branching positions are located at a first position on the ball entry area side and a second position downstream of the first position, and the non-branching position is located between the first position and the second position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BBZ4 and BBZ5, gaming machine BBZ6 has the advantage that when gaming balls flow down the flow means, they are placed at the branching position twice with an interval between them, so that when one gaming ball is guided to the flow means, the player's attention can be increased twice. This makes it possible to efficiently increase the player's attention to the gaming ball.

Among the gaming machines BBZ1 to BBZ6, the flow-down means is characterized in that the inclination angle of the ball entry area side relative to the horizontal plane is greater than the inclination angle of the ball downstream area side relative to the horizontal plane.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BBZ1 to BBZ6, the gaming machine BBZ7 accelerates the gaming ball flowing down the flow means more on the ball entry area side, shortening the distance between the gaming ball and the downstream area side.

A gaming machine BBZ8 is any one of the gaming machines BBZ1 to BBZ7, characterized in that the ball entry area is larger than the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BBZ1 to BBZ7, the BBZ8 gaming machine makes it easier for multiple gaming balls to enter the ball entry area at the same time, and makes it easier for those gaming balls to become crowded (connected) in the downstream area.

Amusement machine BBZ9 is characterized in that the ball entry area of amusement machine BBZ8 is configured so that it can be divided and arranged in multiple locations.

In addition to the effects of the BBZ8 gaming machine, the BBZ9 gaming machine has multiple points where game balls can enter the flow-down means, which increases the frequency with which game balls enter the flow-down means.

A gaming machine BBZ10 is characterized in that the flow path of the gaming ball flowing down the flow means is different in accordance with the difference in the ball entry area into which the gaming ball enters, as in the gaming machine BBZ9.

In addition to the effects of the BBZ9 gaming machine, the BBZ10 gaming machine can change the time it takes for the gaming ball to pass through the flow-down means and the position of the gaming ball on the flow-down means depending on which entry area the gaming ball will enter, which increases the player's interest in which entry area the gaming ball entered the flow-down means from, and can increase the player's attention to the entry area.

A gaming machine BBZ11 is any one of the gaming machines BBZ1 to BBZ10, and is characterized by having a flow path restriction means for preventing gaming balls flowing down the flow means from straying from the flow path toward the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BBZ1 to BBZ10, the BBZ11 gaming machine can be configured to ensure that gaming balls that enter the ball entry area reach the downstream area by using a flow path restriction means.

<Technical concept of catching the ball away from the ball entry area>
A gaming machine BC1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a switching means that can switch between a first state in which a gaming ball can be guided to a ball entry area and a second state in which the entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry area is restricted, and a flow-down area in which the gaming ball can flow down toward the switching means, the flow-down area being positioned on the side away from the ball entry area in front of the switching means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple landing positions for game balls on a movable component that can be switched between a state in which game balls can be guided to a prize ball opening and a state in which game balls are restricted from entering the prize ball opening, including a downstream position near the prize ball opening and an upstream position upstream of the downstream position, and the game ball can pass through the prize ball opening regardless of whether it lands at the downstream position or the upstream position (see, for example, JP 2017-029531 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, when a gaming ball that has landed at an upstream position approaches the prize ball opening at the same time that another gaming ball lands at a downstream position, and multiple gaming balls attempt to pass through the prize ball opening as a group, there is a possibility that the balls may become clogged or that the resistance to the flow of the gaming balls may increase. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the way the gaming balls flow down.

In contrast, the gaming machine BC1 is configured so that the gaming ball flows down to the switching means on the side away from the ball entry area (since the landing position of the gaming ball on the switching means is limited), so the gaming ball can be aligned while flowing down the switching means, and it is possible to avoid ball clogging or increased resistance to the flow of the gaming ball when passing through the ball entry area, thereby making it possible to improve the way the gaming ball flows down.

A gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC1, it is provided with a prevention means for preventing the ball from flowing down to the switching means outside the flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BC1, gaming machine BC2 can prevent the gaming ball from passing outside the flow-down area and reaching the switching means by using a prevention means.

Gaming machine BC3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BC2, at least a portion of the switching means is disposed behind the front surface of the gaming board that constitutes the gaming area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BC2, gaming machine BC3 makes it possible to narrow the length of the gaming area that the switching means invades while ensuring that the length of the ball flowing down the switching means is behind the front of the gaming board by positioning the gaming ball on the switching means at least on the gaming area side (front of the gaming board) and arranging at least a portion of the rest behind the front of the gaming board. This makes it possible to ensure a wide area for arranging other components and improves the design freedom of the gaming area.

In any one of gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the switching means has a first section in which the gaming ball can roll and a second section that is located downstream of the first section, and gaming balls that land on the switching means from the flow-down area are configured to easily land on the first section. Gaming machine BC4.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the gaming machine BC4 can roll the gaming ball over a long distance on the switching means, suppressing the bouncing of the gaming ball and calming its flow, while also ensuring the length of the flow to the ball entry area, thereby improving attention to the gaming ball.

Gaming machine BC5 is characterized in that in gaming machine BC4, the switching means is provided with a guide path between the first section and the second section that can bridge the gaming ball in the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BC4, gaming machine BC5 provides a guide path that keeps the gaming ball rolling after it lands on the first part of the switching means, regardless of the state of the switching means. This increases the variety of how the gaming ball flows down compared to when there is a one-to-one correspondence between the state of the switching means and the change in the way the gaming ball flows down.

A gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC5, the flow length of the gaming ball in the guide path is configured in a plurality of types.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BC5, gaming machine BC6 can increase the variety of game balls flowing down the screen.

There are various examples of factors that can cause the length of the game ball flowing down the guidance path to change. For example, it may be configured to change depending on the position where the ball enters the switching means, or it may be configured to change depending on the relative relationship between the timing of the ball entering the switching means and the timing at which the state of the switching means is switched.

In the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, the switching means is characterized in that the gaming machine BC7 includes an approaching means for moving the gaming ball so as to approach the guide path over a predetermined range upstream of the guide path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BC5 and BC6, gaming machine BC7 uses an approaching means to move the gaming ball closer to the guidance path before the gaming ball gets on the guidance path, making it possible to prevent the gaming ball from getting stuck in the bridge to the guidance path.

Gaming machine BC8 is characterized in that in gaming machine BC7, the approach means is an inclined surface that moves the gaming ball in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the gaming ball in the first part of the switching means or the guide path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BC7, gaming machine BC8 has the following advantages: the flow direction of the gaming ball in the first part or guide section of the switching means is perpendicular to the inclination direction of the inclined surface, so that the load applied to the gaming ball by the inclined surface does not accelerate or decelerate the flow speed of the gaming ball in the first part or guide section of the switching means, and the impact can be minimized.

Gaming machine BC9 is any one of gaming machines BC4 to BC8, characterized in that the second section is configured to limit the simultaneous acceptance of multiple gaming balls.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC8, gaming machine BC9 makes it easier to avoid situations where more gaming balls than expected enter the second section.

In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC9, the switching means is characterized by having a ball entry restriction means that restricts the gaming ball from entering the guide path side when the state is switched between when the gaming ball lands in a specified section on the end side of the flow-down area and when the gaming ball passes through the specified section.

According to gaming machine BC10, when the switching means executes state switching in a short period of time in any of gaming machines BC1 to BC9, it becomes easier to prevent the gaming ball from erroneously entering the guide path side.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC10, the switching means is equipped with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball in the downstream portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC10, the gaming machine BC11 can stabilize (rectify) the flow of the gaming balls downstream of the switching means.

<Multiple incoming balls are likely to pass through the detection means due to the influence of previous incoming balls>
a first flow-down area into which game balls can flow that have passed through the downstream area, and a second flow-down area into which game balls that have passed through the downstream area but do not flow down through the first flow-down area can flow; a predetermined benefit can be awarded to a player when a game ball flows down through the second flow-down area; and the game machine BD1 is configured so that game balls are more likely to flow down through the second flow-down area in a second case in which a game ball flows down from the flow-down area to the downstream area while a game ball is located in the downstream area, than in a first case in which a game ball flows down from the flow-down area to the downstream area while no game ball is located in the downstream area.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a ball entry port and a special ball entry port are located behind an opening/closing means, and the special ball entry port is configured to be switched between a state in which it is blocked by a sliding plate member and a state in which the plate member is retracted to allow game balls to enter. When the plate member is in a state in which game balls are allowed to enter, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means are configured to enter the special ball entry port, and there are gaming machines in which the subsequent game state is set to a game state that is advantageous to the player when a ball enters the special ball entry port (for example, see paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of JP 2015-150122 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, when one gaming ball is received by the opening and closing means, it is assumed that the ball will enter the specific ball entry port, so the player feels reassured and it is difficult to draw attention to the second and subsequent balls entering the opening and closing means. In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the gaming balls being received by the opening and closing means.

In contrast, the gaming machine BD1 is configured so that among the gaming balls received in the downstream area, the gaming ball that is received multiple times is more likely to be received in the second flow-down area than the gaming ball that is received first, so that attention can be sustained on the gaming balls that have flowed down to the downstream area.

A gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BD1, it is configured so that gaming balls that enter the downstream area second or later are more likely to enter the second flow-down area than gaming balls that enter the downstream area as the first ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BD1, gaming machine BD2 can maintain the player's attention for a long period of time on the gaming balls that have flowed down into the flow area.

Gaming machine BD3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BD1 or BD2, it is configured so that gaming balls are more likely to flow down the second flow-down area when multiple gaming balls are placed in the downstream area at the same time.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BD1 and BD2, gaming machine BD3 can maintain the player's attention to the gaming ball that has flowed down into the flow-down area while the gaming ball is located in the downstream area. It can also make the player aware of the launch mode of the gaming ball.

A gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, multiple gaming balls are retained in the downstream area, making it easier for gaming balls to be received in the second flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, gaming machine BD4 can draw attention to the placement of gaming balls in the downstream area.

A gaming machine BD5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, it is provided with an opening/closing means that can be switched between a first state that opens the flow path of gaming balls from the flow-down area and a second state that narrows the path more than the first state, and the downstream area is configured so that gaming balls are unlikely to be guided to the second flow-down area immediately after the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, gaming machine BD5 can lengthen the period during which the player's attention is maintained on the downstream area after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state.

A gaming machine BD5 is configured so that gaming balls that enter the downstream area after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time the opening/closing means is switched to the first state are more likely to flow down the second flow-down area than gaming balls that enter the downstream area within the predetermined period of time. A gaming machine BD6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BD5, gaming machine BD6 can maintain attention to the downstream area for a long time after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state.

A gaming machine BD6, characterized in that after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the opening/closing means was switched to the first state, the change in the period until the gaming ball that has flowed down the flow area flows down the second flow area can be suppressed. A gaming machine BD7.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BD6, gaming machine BD7 makes it possible to reduce attention in the downstream area and relax the player by making the flow-down pattern (flow-down period) of the gaming ball constant after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state and a predetermined period has elapsed.

A gaming machine BD8 is any one of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a guide ball selection means configured not to guide the first gaming ball that enters the flow-down area after the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state, into the second flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, gaming machine BD8 requires multiple gaming balls to enter the second flow area in the first state of the opening/closing means in order to receive gaming balls, which can increase attention to the opening/closing means and the number of gaming balls passing through the opening/closing means.

A gaming machine BD9 is one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD8, which is configured to make the number of gaming balls that can be received in the second flow area equal to the number of gaming balls that cannot be received in the second flow area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD8, gaming machine BD9 can avoid players having excessive expectations due to the occurrence of cases where an excessively large number of gaming balls are received, such as when all balls enter the second flow area.

A gaming machine BD10 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD9, a maximum number of gaming balls that can be received by the downstream area is set, and gaming balls exceeding that maximum number are configured to be received by the second flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD9, gaming machine BD10 can increase attention to the downstream area and the second downstream area.

A gaming machine BD11 is one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD10, characterized in that the flow-down area can be positioned at a position where passing gaming balls are likely to flow into the first flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD10, the gaming machine BD11 makes it easier to create a state in which gaming balls placed in the downstream area tend to flow into the first flow-down area.

A gaming machine BD12 is any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD11, and is characterized by having a retention means for retaining gaming balls placed in the downstream area in the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD11, the gaming machine BD12 can restrict gaming balls placed in the first flow area from flowing toward the second flow area by using a retention means.

Gaming machine BD13 is any one of gaming machines BD1 to BD12, characterized in that the second flow-down area is located above the first flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD12, the gaming machine BD13 can prevent gaming balls placed in the first flow area from flowing into the second flow area by using the height difference of the placement.

<Switching between contact and non-contact with the game ball>
a downstream area through which game balls can flow, an opening/closing means switchable between a first state which opens the path of game balls passing through the flow-down area and a second state which narrows the path more than the first state, a downstream area disposed downstream of the flow-down area, a first flow-down area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area to flow down, a second flow-down area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area but do not flow down the first flow-down area to flow down, and abutment enabling means switchable between a contact state in which the game balls that have passed through the downstream area can come into contact with the game balls and a non-contact state in which they do not come into contact with the game balls, and a predetermined benefit can be awarded to a player when a game ball flows down the second flow-down area, and the opening/closing means is switchable from the first state to the second state when the game ball is in contact with the contact enabling means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple movable parts in the flow path of gaming balls that enter a ball entrance that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member, and the flow path of the gaming balls can change due to the load from the movable parts (see, for example, JP 2017-000562 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the movable member is designed to always come into contact with the gaming ball that flows down, so the way the gaming ball that enters the ball entrance flows down does not change, which is likely to bore players, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of players.

In contrast, with gaming machine BE1, the contact means can be switched between a contact state where it can contact a gaming ball that has passed through the downstream region, and a non-contact state where it does not contact the contact means, so the way the gaming ball flows down can be significantly different between when the gaming ball contacts the contact means and when it does not contact the contact means. This allows for a greater variety in the way the gaming ball flows down, making it possible to improve the game from the perspective of increasing the interest of players.

A gaming machine BE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BE1, a gaming ball that receives a load through the gaming ball contacting the contactable means is configured to flow down the second flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BE1, gaming machine BE2 can increase attention to the flow pattern of gaming balls in the downstream area.

In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, when the opening and closing means is switched from the second state to the first state while a gaming ball is in contact with the contactable means, the gaming machine BE3 is configured so that the gaming ball that has flowed down from the flow-down area to the downstream area can flow down the second flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BE1 and BE2, gaming machine BE3 attracts more attention to the contactable means because, if a gaming ball is in contact with the contactable means at the time the opening/closing means is opened, the gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing means after the opening/closing means is opened is more likely to flow down the second flow area.

<The game ball is received in the second game area after passing through a state in which the passage of the game ball is stopped>
a downstream area through which game balls can flow; an opening/closing means switchable between a first state which opens the path of game balls passing through the flow-down area and a second state which narrows the path more than the first state; a downstream area disposed downstream of the flow-down area; a first flow-down area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area to flow down; and a second flow-down area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area but do not flow down through the first flow-down area to flow down; a gaming machine BEZ1 that is capable of granting a player a predetermined benefit when a game ball flows down through the second flow-down area, and that transitions from a state in which game balls are prevented from passing through a predetermined part of the downstream area to a state in which game balls can flow down into the second flow-down area.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a ball entry port and a special ball entry port are located behind an opening/closing means, and the special ball entry port is configured to be switched between a state in which it is blocked by a sliding plate member and a state in which the plate member is retracted to allow game balls to enter. When the plate member is in a state in which balls are allowed to enter, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means are configured to enter the special ball entry port, and there are gaming machines in which balls entering the special ball entry port set the game state to one advantageous to the player (see, for example, paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of JP 2015-150122 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the positions of the ball entrance and the specific ball entrance are almost the same except for the difference between the left and right, so it is difficult to tell at a glance through the opening and closing means whether the game ball has entered the specific ball entrance. When a notification is issued on the liquid crystal device due to a game ball entering the specific ball entrance, there is a problem in that the display on the liquid crystal device is easier to understand, and so the player's attention is concentrated on the liquid crystal device. In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention on the game ball that has been accepted by the opening and closing means.

In response to this, the gaming machine BEZ1 is configured so that the gaming ball flows down into the second flow area after passing through a state in which the passage of the gaming ball is prevented at a specific part of the downstream area, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the gaming ball stopped in the downstream area in preparation for entering the second flow area, and attention can be maintained on the gaming ball that has been received by the opening and closing means.

A gaming machine BEZ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BEZ1, the predetermined portion is located in the first flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BEZ1, gaming machine BEZ2 can increase attention to balls entering the first flow area, which is an area that does not affect the awarding of a specified profit.

In the gaming machine BEZ1 or BEZ2, the predetermined portion is characterized in that a predetermined gaming ball prevents the passage of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BEZ1 and BEZ2, gaming machine BEZ3 can maintain high attention to a gaming ball even if the gaming ball deviates from the second flow area and flows down, due to the expectation that the gaming ball may block a specific area.

In the gaming machine BEZ1 or BEZ2, the predetermined portion is prevented from passing through by a predetermined member different from the gaming ball, and the size of the predetermined member in a front view is set to be smaller than the size of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BEZ1 or BEZ2, gaming machine BEZ4 can make the specified member that prevents the passage of the gaming ball less noticeable than the gaming ball, thereby increasing attention to the gaming ball.

Among any of the gaming machines BEZ1 to BEZ4, gaming machine BEZ5 is characterized in that it is configured so that after the first flow area is filled with gaming balls, the following arriving gaming balls are received in the second flow area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BEZ1 to BEZ4, the gaming machine BEZ5 can shift the player's gaze from the first flow area to the second flow area, so the period during which the second flow area is visible can be extended compared to when attention is focused on the second flow area from the beginning.

Furthermore, when a ball enters the second flow area, the first flow area is filled with game balls, so even if you lose sight of the game ball that has entered the second flow area, you can see at a glance that the ball is ready to enter the second flow area.

A gaming machine BEZ6 is characterized in that it is provided with a state switching means that can switch between a retention state in which gaming balls are retained in the first flow-down area and a discharge state in which gaming balls are discharged from the first flow-down area, and the state of the state switching means is switched in response to the switching of the state of the opening/closing means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BEZ5, gaming machine BEZ6 can associate the switching of the state of the opening/closing means and the state switching means, so that by visually checking one of them, it is easier to predict the state of the other.

A gaming machine BEZ7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BEZ5 or BEZ6, an upper limit is set on the number of gaming balls that can be received in the first flow area.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine BEZ5 or BEZ6, the gaming machine BEZ7 makes it easier to predict how many more gaming balls need to pass through the flow area before the second flow area can receive the gaming balls by checking the number of gaming balls placed in the first flow area.

A gaming machine BEZ8 is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable in any one of gaming machines BEZ1 to BEZ7, and the displacement means is characterized in that it displaces so as to switch between a dischargeable state in which the received gaming ball can be discharged to the downstream region, and a non-dischargeable state in which the received gaming ball cannot be discharged to the downstream region.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BEZ1 to BEZ7, the gaming machine BEZ8 is configured so that whether or not the gaming ball is discharged to the downstream area, where the player's attention is high, changes depending on the state of the displacement means, as a prerequisite for the gaming ball to be received in the second flow-down area, thereby improving attention to the downstream area and the displacement means.

In other words, if a gaming ball that passes through the flow-down area reliably flows down to the downstream area, it is possible to empirically predict the timing at which the gaming ball will flow down to the second flow-down area by knowing the number of gaming balls that pass through the flow-down area, so there is a possibility that there will be no significant disadvantage to playing the game without looking down to the downstream area.

In contrast, in a situation where the flow of game balls into the downstream area can be switched depending on the state of the displacement means, a discrepancy occurs between the number of game balls passing through the flow area and the number of game balls flowing into the downstream area, so it is necessary to turn one's gaze to the downstream area as well. This can increase the attention to the downstream area.

In the gaming machine BEZ8, the displacement means is configured to be able to slow down the flow speed of the received gaming ball compared to the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the flow area. The gaming machine BEZ9.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine BEZ8, the gaming machine BEZ9 can slow down the flow speed of the gaming ball received by the displacement means, making it easier to avoid the player losing sight of the gaming ball received by the displacement means.

In the gaming machine BEZ8 or BEZ9, the displacement means is provided with a ball receiving section capable of receiving up to a predetermined number of gaming balls, and the gaming balls received in the ball receiving section are displaced by the displacement of the displacement means. Gaming machine BEZ10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BEZ8 or BEZ9, gaming machine BEZ10 can limit the number of gaming balls displaced by the displacement of the displacement means to a predetermined number relative to the ball receiving section, so by setting the displacement speed of the displacement means to a predetermined range, the number of gaming balls that can be discharged from the displacement means to the downstream area in a predetermined period of time can be kept within a predetermined range.

<Means for notifying the end of the ending>
The gaming machine BG1 is characterized by comprising: an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game; and a notification means for notifying a player of the end of the duration of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp the end of the duration.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a state where special symbol variable play is possible when the jackpot play ends (see, for example, JP 2015-019743 A). However, with the conventional gaming machines described above, it is difficult to know when the jackpot play ends, which is a source of dissatisfaction for players who want the lottery for special symbols to start immediately after switching to a state where special symbol variable play is possible.

For example, in a typical game progression, there is a gaming machine that has an allocation where after a jackpot is won by drawing special symbol 1, the machine transitions to a state where it is easier to win the drawing of special symbol 2, which is more advantageous than special symbol 1, after the jackpot play ends. However, with such a gaming machine, the drawing of special symbol 2 starts immediately after the jackpot play ends in a state where it has not yet been won. Therefore, if the drawing of special symbol 1 is on hold, the drawing of special symbol 1 will be held after the jackpot play ends, and if the jackpot is won in that drawing, the player may be disadvantaged.

To avoid this situation, it is preferable to win the lottery for special symbol 2 as soon as possible after the jackpot ends, before winning the jackpot by drawing special symbol 1 after the jackpot ends, so it is desirable to start firing the game balls as soon as it becomes possible to win the lottery for special symbol 2.

On the other hand, the ball entrance is generally opened and closed by an electric device to win the lottery for special symbol 2, but the electric device is kept closed during the jackpot game and can be opened after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, even if game balls are shot before the electric device is opened, many of them will likely be wasted.

For these reasons, players would like to avoid firing game balls toward the electric device during a jackpot game because the electric device will remain closed and they will not be able to win the lottery for special symbol 2. However, more than that, players would probably want to shoot game balls into the ball entrance on the downstream side of the electric device that opens as soon as the jackpot game ends in order to win the lottery for special symbol 2 before winning the jackpot by drawing special symbol 1.

In contrast, with conventional gaming machines, it was difficult to know when the big win game would end, making it difficult to time the release of the gaming ball.

In response to this, gaming machine BG1 is equipped with a notification means that notifies the player so that the player can grasp the end point of a specified performance, making it easier to determine the timing for launching the gaming ball by using the notification from the notification means as a guide.

In a gaming machine BG1, the predetermined effect is at least one of a first effect or a second effect having a different notification from the first effect, and the duration can be changed by a combination of notifications, and the notification means is configured to be able to communicate the difference in the duration of the predetermined effects to a player, and the gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an end means for indicating the end of the predetermined effect and a time notification means for indicating the time elapsed from the current time to the end time.

In addition to the effects provided by game machine BG1, game machine BG2 allows the player to know the duration and end time of the currently ongoing specified effect, even when multiple durations of the specified effect are available.

Gaming machine BG3 is characterized in that the time notification means in gaming machine BG2 is equipped with a pseudo-time notification means that indicates the time that has elapsed from the current time until the end of the specified performance and a pseudo-time with a specified time difference.

In addition to the effects of game machine BG2, game machine BG3 can notify the player of a favorable timing before the end of a specified presentation by the pseudo-time notification means. This allows, for example, the time that may pass between the time the game ball is launched and the time it reaches the specified ball entrance to be consumed during the execution of the specified presentation, making it easier to realize a game in which the game ball flows into the specified ball entrance immediately after the end of the specified presentation.

In any of gaming machines BG1 to BG3, the specified presentation can be executed at least immediately before the end of a specified bonus game, and the manner of execution changes depending on the type of bonus game. Gaming machine BG4.

According to gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines BG1 to BG3, the type of bonus game can be associated with a specified presentation.

Gaming machine BG5 is one of gaming machines BG1 to BG4, characterized in that the notification means notifies a time a predetermined period before the end of the predetermined performance period.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, gaming machine BG5 allows the player to know in advance when the specified presentation period will end by using the notification means.

The timing of the specified performance period is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be during a specified specific game, during a pattern change, or while waiting for a pattern change.

Gaming machine BG6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a specified still image or video is displayed in the display area of the display means at the end of the specified performance to calm the player down.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, gaming machine BG6 can effectively prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

Gaming machine BG7 is one of gaming machines BG1 to BG6, characterized in that the display on the display means is switched after the specified performance ends.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG6, gaming machine BG7 can also switch the display, making it easier for the player to understand that the end of a specific presentation has passed.

Gaming machine BG8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BG7, after the end of the predetermined performance, a specific performance can be executed continuing from the predetermined performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BG7, gaming machine BG8 can execute a specific effect while a specific effect is in progress, so that a longer performance time can be secured, compared to when a new effect is executed after the end of a specific effect.

Gaming machine BG9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines BG1 to BG8, the predetermined performance is executed in a manner that is visible in at least a portion of the display area of the display means.

With gaming machine BG9, in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines BG1 to BG8, a specified effect can be confirmed by visually checking the display area of the display means, so the burden on the player can be reduced compared to when the specified effect is executed outside the display area of the display means (e.g., outside the game area, etc.).

Gaming machine BG10 is characterized in that it is possible to configure cases in which the display state in the display area of the display means at a specified timing is different from that of gaming machine BG8 or BG9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BG8 and BG9, gaming machine BG10 can improve attention to aspects at specific times.

The different aspects at a given timing are not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, there are different cases where an operation starts at a given timing and where it is stopped and maintained at a given timing, and different cases where an operation becomes operable at a given timing and where it is inoperable at a given timing.

Gaming machine BG11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BG8 or BG9, an illusion effect is executed before the end of the specified effect, creating the illusion that the effect has ended.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BG8 and BG9, gaming machine BG11 can increase the player's concentration with each illusion performance.

Gaming machine BG12 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines BG8 to BG11, from the end of the specified performance, a suggestion is displayed in the display area of the display means, suggesting that a specified profit can be obtained by shooting a gaming ball, until a specified condition is met.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines BG8 to BG11, gaming machine BG12 can inform a player viewing the display area of the appropriate timing for firing the gaming ball through suggestive displays, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

The form of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be the passage of a predetermined period of time, or the passing of a predetermined number of game balls through a predetermined ball entrance or the detection of such passing.

In the gaming machine BG12, the suggestion display is a display suggesting that the player should aim for a specific ball entrance or an opening/closing lottery ball entrance that executes a lottery for opening or closing a motorized device that opens and closes the specific ball entrance. Gaming machine BG13.

In addition to the effects of game machine BG12, game machine BG13 makes it possible to clarify the aim of the released game ball through suggestive displays, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

Gaming machine BG14 is characterized in that in the predetermined performance of gaming machine BG12 or BG13, a display is configured that continues until a predetermined launch timing, and if the launch is not performed even after the predetermined launch timing has passed or if the gaming ball is not detected at a predetermined detection port, a predetermined notification continues until either of these occurs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BG12 or BG13, gaming machine BG14 allows the player to know that, by confirming that a specified notification is continuing, either the gaming ball has not been released or the gaming ball has not been detected at a specified detection port after the specified release timing has passed.

Gaming machine BG15 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines BG12 to BG14, a predetermined notification is made when a predetermined number of balls are detected or more than the predetermined number of balls are detected during the predetermined performance.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BG12 to BG14, gaming machine BG15 can notify the player by a predetermined notification that a predetermined number of balls or more have entered the game during a predetermined performance, allowing the player to use this information to adjust the strength of the game balls, etc., thereby reducing the burden of playing the game.

The form of the specified notification is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, a specified four-character idiom may be displayed, a display may be displayed to discourage the player from releasing the game ball, a specified light-emitting means may be illuminated, or a specified sound may be output.

Gaming machine BG16 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines BG1 to BG15, the predetermined performance is executed at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting performed by the player, or is executed with a predetermined light emission intensity or a predetermined light emission color regardless of the light emission intensity setting performed by the player.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG15, gaming machine BG16 can prevent situations in which the player does not notice the sound or light by adjusting the player's settings.

<Set the period during which the volume and brightness are changed at the ending>
The gaming machine BH1 is characterized by comprising: an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game; and a change means capable of configuring a changeable state in which a predetermined setting related to the game can be changed during the execution of the predetermined effect.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a state where special chart variable play is possible after the jackpot play ends (see, for example, JP 2015-019743 A). However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, players are likely to hold the handle as they become bored between the end of the round play in the jackpot play and the transition to a state where special chart variable play is possible, which creates a problem in that players are likely to accidentally fire the game balls. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making effective use of the game balls.

In contrast, with the gaming machine BH1, a changeable state can be configured during a specified presentation, so idle time during the specified presentation can be used to change the specified settings. This makes it easier for players to take their hands off the handle, making it easier to prevent the erroneous release of gaming balls. In other words, it can be improved from the perspective of making effective use of gaming balls.

Gaming machine BH2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BH1, it is provided with a notification means for notifying the player in a manner that allows the player to grasp the end of the duration of the specified effect, and in the changeable state, the effect is continued by the notification means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH1, gaming machine BH2 can inform the player of the best time to grip the handle again after changing a certain setting. This makes it easier for the player to avoid suffering disadvantages due to not releasing the gaming ball at the appropriate time.

Gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, in the changeable state, the changeable predetermined setting can be configured to be switchable.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BH1 and BH2, gaming machine BH3 has multiple changeable settings, making it easier to avoid players becoming bored even when they have long periods of free time.

A gaming machine BH4 is characterized in that, in the changeable state of the gaming machine BH3, the changeable predetermined setting or the predetermined setting being changed is displayed by a display means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH3, the gaming machine BH4 can clearly display the targets of changes among the predetermined settings related to the game. This can reduce the burden on the player.

A gaming machine BH5 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines BH1 to BH4, a predetermined operation performed in the changeable state changes the visible area of a predetermined display on the display means.

According to gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines BH1 to BH4, a display that is thought to interest the player can be placed in front of the player's line of sight by changing the visible area of a specific display on the display means through a specific operation performed by the player. This allows the player to concentrate on the game without the hassle of having to move his or her eyes.

Gaming machine BH6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BH5, a state can be configured in which a part of the display area of the display means is made invisible by a specified operation executed in the changeable state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH5, gaming machine BH6 makes part of the display area of the display means invisible through a specified operation, which allows a player who wishes to keep a display that may become invisible visible to think about whether or not to perform the specified operation. This makes it easier for players to avoid situations where they perform the specified operation without thinking.

Gaming machine BH7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines BH1 to BH6, when the specified setting is changed in the changeable state, the change is reverted under a specified condition, or the change is invalidated under a specified condition.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BH1 to BH6, gaming machine BH7 resets or invalidates a specified setting when a specified condition is met, allowing the player to understand that the specified condition has been met from a sense of incongruity.

The predetermined condition is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be the start of a jackpot game, the continuation of a jackpot game a predetermined number of times, the detection of a predetermined number of game balls or more in a predetermined period of time by a predetermined detection means, or the operation of a predetermined operation means at a predetermined timing.

Gaming machine BH8 is characterized in that in gaming machine BH7, the predetermined condition is achieved by operating a predetermined operating means operated to execute the change of the predetermined setting.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH7, gaming machine BH8 allows the user to reverse or nullify changes to specified settings by operating a specified operating means, making it easy to intentionally reverse or nullify changes to specified settings.

Gaming machine BH9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BH7, the predetermined condition is achieved at a predetermined timing, regardless of the timing at which the predetermined setting change is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH7, gaming machine BH9 achieves a specified condition at a specified timing, making it possible to avoid a situation in which the specified condition is never achieved.

The predetermined timing is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be when a special chart change is performed a predetermined number of times, when a predetermined notification is made, or it may be a predetermined time such as noon.

Gaming machine BH10 is characterized in that the predetermined condition in gaming machine BH7 is achieved when a predetermined state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BH7, gaming machine BH10 allows the player to know that a certain time has passed since a certain state was maintained by reverting or nullifying a certain setting change.

The specified state is not limited in any way. For example, when consecutive jackpot games are played, the jackpot type obtained may be repeated (or more or less than a specified number of rounds), the operation means may not be operated, or special chart changes may not be executed.

A gaming machine BH11 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines BH1 to BH10, a predetermined target amount can be set in advance for the predetermined setting, and that, in the changeable state, the difference between the predetermined setting and the target amount can be grasped.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BH1 to BH10, with the gaming machine BH11, even if a change in a specified setting is reverted or invalidated, if the player playing is the same, the player can easily return to the state before the specified setting was reverted or invalidated by changing the specified setting while grasping the difference from the target amount using the difference notification means.

As a result, even if the gaming machine is controlled so that the changes to the specified settings are reverted or nullified in consideration of the burden on the subsequent player when the player is replaced, by maintaining the specified settings as the previous player's settings, the specified settings can be easily reverted to their previous state. Therefore, even if the specified settings are unintentionally reverted or nullified even though the player playing has not been replaced, the specified settings can be easily reverted to their previous state, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

<Change the display format of the same display depending on the situation>
The gaming machine BI1 is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined display effect related to a game, and is configured so that the display position or the displayed size of the predetermined display effect can be changed during the execution of the predetermined display effect.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, can combine a movable gadget placed in front of the display device with the display on the display device to create a visually integrated shape (see, for example, JP 2015-019743 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the position, size and shape of the display must be determined according to the position, size and shape of the movable gadget, which leaves room for improvement in terms of effectively utilizing the display area of the display device.

In response to this, gaming machine BI1 is configured so that the display position or displayed size of a specified display effect can be changed while the specified display effect is being executed, making it possible to improve the game in terms of effectively utilizing the display area of the display device without being affected by the shape of the movable props.

Gaming machine BI2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BI1, the predetermined display effect is configured so that it is less noticeable when it is displayed on the edge of the display area than when it is displayed in the center of the display area.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BI1, gaming machine BI2 can adjust the attention to a given display effect depending on where it is displayed in the display area.

The manner in which the distinctiveness is reduced is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the display may be made semi-transparent, or the display size may be reduced.

Gaming machine BI3 is characterized in that in gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the change is performed by operating a specified operating means.

Gaming machine BI3 allows the player to select whether or not to change the display mode of a specified display presentation in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BI1 or BI2. This can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game.

<Button operation>
The gaming machine BIZ1 is characterized by comprising: an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game; and an effect switching means configured to be able to switch the predetermined effect from a first state to a second state by operating a predetermined operating means during the execution of the predetermined effect.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a state where special chart variable play is possible after the jackpot play ends (see, for example, JP 2015-019743 A). However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, players tend to hold the handles while they are bored between the end of the round play in the jackpot play and the transition to a state where special chart variable play is possible, which creates the problem that players are likely to accidentally fire the game ball.

In contrast, with the gaming machine BIZ1, the effects executed during a predetermined effect can be switched by operating a predetermined operating means, so that idle time during the predetermined effect can be used to operate the predetermined operating means. Because the effects can be switched by operating the operating means, it is possible to effectively increase the player's motivation to operate the operating means. This makes it easier to encourage the player to take their hands off the handle, making it easier to prevent the erroneous launch of game balls.

A gaming machine BIZ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BIZ1, it is provided with an operation notification means capable of notifying that the predetermined operation means can be operated, and the mode of the predetermined presentation can be switched by operating the predetermined operation means in accordance with the notification of the operation notification means.

In addition to the effects of the BIZ1 gaming machine, the BIZ2 gaming machine provides assistance with the operation of the specified operation means by the operation notification means, so that even an inexperienced player can operate the specified operation means without hesitation.

Gaming machine BIZ3 is characterized in that in gaming machine BIZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is executed during a portion of the duration of the specified performance.

In addition to the effects of the BIZ2 gaming machine, the BIZ3 gaming machine provides notifications from the operation notification means for a portion of the duration of the specified effect, allowing the player to view the specified effect for the rest of the time.

The timing of the notification from the operation notification means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed from the middle of a specified performance, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed until the middle of a specified performance, or the notification from the operation notification means may be executed throughout the execution of the specified performance. Furthermore, when a notification from the operation notification means is executed throughout the execution of a specified performance, the operation may be valid throughout the execution of the notification, or may include a time during which the operation is invalid.

BIZ4 is a gaming machine that is configured in any one of BIZ1 to BIZ3 such that the presentation cannot be switched by operating the specified operating means during a specified period in the latter half of the specified presentation.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BIZ1 to BIZ3, the BIZ4 gaming machine can draw attention to a specific performance during a specific period in the latter half of the performance by disabling the operation of a specific operation means during the specific period in the latter half of the performance.

Gaming machine BIZ5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BIZ4, the display of the operation notification means in the display area of the display means is hidden during the specified period in the latter half of the specified performance.

In addition to the effect of the BIZ4 gaming machine, the BIZ5 gaming machine allows the player to know that a period in which operation of a specified operating means is invalid has begun by visually checking the display area of the display means.

When multiple types of effects are available that can be switched by operating the specified operating means in any of the gaming machines BIZ1 to BIZ5, the gaming machine BIZ6 is characterized by having an additional notification means for predicting the effect that will be executed by operating the specified operating means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BIZ1 to BIZ5, the BIZ6 gaming machine can predict the effect that will be executed by operating a specified operating means using the attached notification means, reducing the disappointment and sense of futility caused by switching to an unexpected effect despite operating the specified operating means, and the player only needs to operate the specified operating means when switching to a preferred effect, eliminating the hassle of repeatedly operating the specified operating means.

BIZ7 is a gaming machine that is any one of the gaming machines BIZ1 to BIZ6, and is characterized in that the operation of the specified operation means becomes possible halfway through the specified performance.

The BIZ7 gaming machine can draw the player's attention to a specific presentation until the player is able to operate a specific operation means, in addition to the effects provided by any of the BIZ1 to BIZ6 gaming machines.

Gaming machine BIZ8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BIZ6 or BIZ7, the additional notification means is provided with a display for suggesting a specific operation timing, and the specific operation timing is set as a timing that allows a specific adjustment period to be secured by the end of the specific performance.

In addition to the effects of the BIZ6 or BIZ7 gaming machine, the BIZ8 gaming machine allows the timing of a specific operation to change depending on the length of the adjustment period, so that the development of the performance after operating a specific operating means can be predicted from the timing of the specific operation.

The BIZ9 gaming machine is characterized in that, in any of the BIZ1 to BIZ8 gaming machines, the presentation mode that is switched by operating the specified operating means is returned to the previous mode under specified conditions.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BIZ1 to BIZ8, the BIZ9 gaming machine can return to the state before the presentation mode was switched under a specified condition, allowing the player to operate the specified operation means again. This allows the player to operate the specified operation means a greater number of times, enhancing the atmosphere of the player participating in the game.

A gaming machine BIZ10 is any one of the gaming machines BIZ2 to BIZ9, characterized in that the notification from the operation notification means is provided in multiple types in which the number of the predetermined operation means operated simultaneously is different.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BIZ2 to BIZ9, the BIZ10 gaming machine can have one or more predetermined operating means operated simultaneously, so that by deliberately having the player operate two predetermined operating means, the player can immerse himself in the game and kill time when there is no need to launch game balls. In this case, the player's hands can be removed from the ball launching handle, which reduces the risk of erroneous launching of game balls and avoids unnecessary disadvantages caused by wasting launched game balls.

A gaming machine BIZ11, which is any one of the gaming machines BIZ2 to BIZ10, is characterized in that the notification from the operation notification means includes a notification that is executed when a predetermined profit that can be obtained when a ball enters a predetermined ball entrance reaches an upper limit.

According to the gaming machine BIZ11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BIZ2 to BIZ10, a notification from an operation notification means is visually notified to the player, so that the player can understand that the predetermined profit that can be obtained when the ball enters a predetermined ball entrance has reached its upper limit.
<Concept of the invention using sorting members C170 to C3170 as examples>
A gaming machine CA1 equipped with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is arranged in a ball passage path and formed so as to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, characterized in that when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and the first ball is guided to a first passage, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball is guided to a second passage, and when the weight of the ball is not acting on the displacement member, the displacement member is positioned at the predetermined position.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the gaming balls and distributes the gaming balls to a first passage and a second passage is known (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148189). However, in the conventional technology described above, the gaming balls are simply distributed alternately to the first passage and the second passage in the order in which they arrive, regardless of the state of the game balls that arrive, so the player cannot focus on this distribution operation, resulting in a problem of insufficient interest in the game.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine CA1, when a first ball passing through a passageway reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and the first ball is guided to the first passage. When the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first ball, the second ball following the first ball is guided to the second passage. When the weight of the balls is not acting on the displacement member, the displacement member is positioned at a predetermined position. Therefore, when the first ball is followed by a second ball with a distance of less than a predetermined amount, the first ball is guided to the first passage, and the second ball can be guided to the second passage by the displacement member displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. On the other hand, when the first ball is followed by a second ball with a distance exceeding a predetermined amount, the first ball is guided to the first passage, and the displacement member is positioned at a predetermined position before the second ball arrives, so that the second ball can also be guided to the first passage. In this way, the path that is guided can be changed depending on the state of the ball train (the distance between the leading ball and the following ball), which allows the player to focus on the state of the balls and increase the excitement of the game.

The second ball following the first ball means a ball following the first ball at a distance smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second ball may roll or flow down while in contact with the first ball.

A gaming machine CA2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA1, gaming machine CA2 has the advantage that the displacement member is displaced to the predetermined position by the weight of the displacement member, making it possible to simplify the structure compared to when a biasing spring is used. Also, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement of the displacement member can be slowed down, making it possible to prevent the displacement member from being placed in the predetermined position before the second ball is guided to the second passage. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility of guiding the third ball, which follows the second ball, to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA2, the displacement member includes a main body portion that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight portion that is connected to the main body portion and functions as a weight that displaces the main body portion to the predetermined position, and at least a portion of the weight portion is visible to the player.

Gaming machine CA3 has the same effects as gaming machine CA2, but also includes a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and functions as a weight that displaces the main body to a predetermined position, and at least a portion of the weight is visible to the player, so that the player can recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight. Also, the weight can serve both as a weight for displacing the main body and as a part that allows the player to recognize the direction in which the ball is guided, which reduces production costs.

Among the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, gaming machine CA4 is characterized in that the displacement member has a first surface along which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.

According to gaming machine CA4, in any of gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member has a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, so that the weight of the first ball can be applied to the displacement member while the first ball is rolling on the first surface. This makes it easier to maintain the state in which the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (i.e., a state in which the second ball can be guided to the second passage).

A gaming machine CA5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA4, it comprises a base member and an axis that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is disposed at a position that overlaps with the axis in the vertical direction.

According to gaming machine CA5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4, the displacement member has a second surface along which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is disposed at a position that overlaps with the axis in the vertical direction, so that the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. This allows the second ball to roll stably. It also ensures the possibility of guiding the third ball following the second ball to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the gaming machine CA6 is characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface.

According to gaming machine CA6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is easy to create a state in which the first ball rolls on the first surface at the same time. In other words, by having the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. It is also possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage.

A gaming machine CA7 is any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member and an axis that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface extends in a direction away from the axis.

According to gaming machine CA7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface extends in a direction away from the axis, so that as the first ball rolls toward the first passage, the weight of the first ball can be effectively applied to the displacement member. This makes it possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. This makes it possible to stably roll the second ball. It also ensures the possibility of guiding the third ball following the second ball to the second passage.

A gaming machine CA8 is any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed on either side of the shaft.

Gaming machine CA8 has the same effects as any of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second surface on which a second ball that is guided to a second passageway rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially positioned with the axis in between, which increases the degree of freedom in positioning the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA9 is any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member and an axis that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and at least a portion of the first surface and the second surface are arranged on the same side of the axis.

Gaming machine CA9 has the same effects as any of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second surface on which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and at least a portion of the first surface and the second surface are arranged on the same side of the axis, so that even if the first ball is discharged from the first surface, the weight of the second ball can be used to set the displacement member to a position for guiding the second ball to the second passage. As a result, the length of the first surface can be shortened, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA10 is any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA9, and is characterized in that it has an upstream surface along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball that has been rolled from the upstream surface.

According to the gaming machine CA10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, the gaming machine CA10 is provided with an upstream surface on which the first ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, so that the time required for the first ball to stay on the first surface can be secured for the time required for the reversal. Therefore, by making the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second passage. Furthermore, the length of the first surface can be shortened, which increases the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA11 is any one of gaming machines CA1 to CA10, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member along which the ball rolls toward the first surface, and the shaft is disposed in a position perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the gaming machine CA11 has an axis that is arranged perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction, making it possible to miniaturize the unit in which the displacement member is arranged on the base member. In particular, by arranging the base member so that the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface is aligned with the width direction of the gaming machine, the width direction of the gaming machine can be effectively utilized, making it easier to secure space for arranging the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA12 is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, characterized in that it has a base member and the displacement member is arranged on the base member so that it can be slidably displaced.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the gaming machine CA12 has a displacement member arranged on the base member so that it can slide and be displaced. This allows the displacement member to be made smaller than when, for example, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the base member, and therefore more space can be secured for arranging other members on the base member.

A gaming machine CA13, which is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, includes a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member and along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, the displacement member includes a second surface along which the second ball rolls, the second ball being guided to the second passage in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface.

Here, when the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, the impact of the displacement may cause the displacement member to bounce up, and if the upstream end of the second surface is positioned higher than the downstream end of the upstream surface due to the displacement member bouncing up, there is a risk that the second ball will not be able to roll from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the bouncing up displacement member (the upstream end of the second surface), the impact will cause the displacement member to bounce up further (the second ball will push up the displacement member), and there is a risk that the second ball will flow into the passage (first surface) in which the first ball should roll.

In contrast, with gaming machine CA13, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines CA1 to CA12, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Therefore, when the displacement member rebounds due to the impact of being displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is prevented from being positioned higher than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Therefore, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

A gaming machine CA14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface.

According to gaming machine CA14, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface, so that when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, it bounces back (jumps up) due to the impact, and when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the jumped-up displacement member (the upstream end of the second surface), the force acting from the second ball on the displacement member can be made to act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second ball can be made to roll smoothly from the upstream surface to the second surface.

A gaming machine CA15, which is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, has an upstream surface along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, the displacement member has a first surface along which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement trajectory of the upstream surface side of the displacement member is located at a position farther away from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory of the upstream surface side of the first ball at the reversing position of the first surface.

According to the gaming machine CA15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface of the displacement member is set to a position that is further away from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface of the first ball at the inverted position of the first surface, so that it is possible to prevent the second ball from erroneously flowing into (being accepted by) the first surface. In other words, the second ball is abutted against the first ball to keep it away from the first surface, and the end of the upstream surface of the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball can push the second ball away in a direction away from the first surface.

A gaming machine CA15, characterized in that the displacement member holds the first ball in a position that reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the weight of the first ball displaces the first ball from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine CA16.

According to gaming machine CA16, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA15, the displacement member holds the first ball in a position that reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the weight of the first ball displaces it from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second ball from erroneously flowing into (being accepted by) the first surface. In other words, the second ball is abutted against the first ball to keep it away from the first surface, and the upstream end of the displacement member, which is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, can more reliably push the second ball away in a direction away from the first surface.

A gaming machine CA17 is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, and is characterized in that it has an inflow section, a reciprocating surface along which the balls flowed in from the inflow section roll so as to be displaced back and forth, and an outflow section through which the balls flow out from the reciprocating surface, and the outflow section is located upstream of the displacement member on the passage path.

According to the gaming machine CA17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, it is equipped with an inflow section, a reciprocating surface along which the balls flowing in from the inflow section roll so as to be displaced back and forth, and an outflow section through which the balls flow out from the reciprocating surface, and since the outflow section is located upstream of the displacement member in the passageway, the first ball and the second ball are connected with a distance of less than a predetermined amount, and it is easy for these first balls and second balls to reach the displacement member in a connected state with a distance of less than a predetermined amount. In other words, even if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when they flow in from the inflow section is greater than a predetermined amount, the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced (the distance is less than a predetermined amount) by displacing them back and forth on the reciprocating surface.

A gaming machine CA18 is characterized in that the width dimension of the reciprocating surface in the gaming machine CA17 is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through.

According to gaming machine CA18, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through, so that the first ball and the second ball that flow into the reciprocating surface from the inflow section and are displaced back and forth on the reciprocating surface can be prevented from passing each other. Therefore, when the first ball and the second ball are displaced back and forth on the reciprocating surface, it is easier to close the gap between the first ball and the second ball (to make the gap smaller than a predetermined amount).

A gaming machine CA19 is characterized in that the reciprocating surface of the gaming machine CA18 is inclined upward as it approaches one side and the other side, and the outlet portion is located at the bottom of the reciprocating surface.

According to gaming machine CA19, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward as it moves toward one side and the other, and the outflow section is located at the bottom of the reciprocating surface, so that the first ball and the second ball can be discharged from the outflow section in a state where the inertia of the reciprocating displacement on the reciprocating surface is weakened. In other words, the first ball and the second ball can be easily discharged while maintaining a state in which they are connected together with a gap of less than a predetermined amount.

A gaming machine CA20 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA19, gaming machine CA20 has a reciprocating surface that is linear when viewed from above, making it easier to close the gap between the first ball and the second ball (to make the gap smaller than a predetermined amount) when the first ball and the second ball are displaced back and forth on the reciprocating surface.

A gaming machine CA21 is one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, characterized by having an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on a ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface inclined downward.

According to the gaming machine CA21, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, the machine is provided with an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on the ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface tilted downward, so that such an attraction member can form a passageway for the ball, improving the interest of the game. That is, when a ball is attracted to the downwardly tilted lower surface of the attraction member, the ball can slide by its own weight and be displaced along the lower surface of the attraction member. In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the relationship between the inertial force acting on the ball and the attraction force), an unstable state can be created in which there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the lower surface of the attraction member (i.e., the ball may not reach the end of the passageway (the lower surface of the attraction member)). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member is characterized by having a bottom surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material, and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the bottom surface forming member.

According to gaming machine CA22, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA21, the attraction member is equipped with a bottom surface forming member formed into a plate shape from a magnetic material and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the bottom surface forming member. Therefore, by forming the surface on which the ball slides by the bottom surface of the bottom surface forming member, it is easy to adjust the attraction force and optimize the friction force, and the passage path for the ball can be reliably formed with a simple structure.

Gaming machine CA23 is characterized in that, in gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA21 or CA22, gaming machine CA23 enhances the excitement of the game because the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage. That is, the second ball can be guided by the displacement member to reach the second passage only if the second ball reaches the displacement member while connected to the first ball with a gap of less than a predetermined amount, and this possibility is relatively low. By displacing the second ball, which has arrived through such a low possibility, in an unstable state where there is a possibility that it may fall (it may not reach the end of the bottom surface of the suction member), the player is made to hope that it will pass through safely, enhancing the excitement of the game.

A gaming machine CA24 is characterized in that it comprises a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member in a gaming machine CA23, the displacement member comprises a first surface along which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, and a second surface along which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed on either side of the shaft.

Gaming machine CA24 has the same effects as gaming machine CA23, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member. The displacement member has a first surface along which a first ball guided to the first passage rolls, and a second surface along which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls. The first and second surfaces are at least partially disposed with the axis in between, so that the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), thereby displacing the position of the second surface upward. This makes it easier for the second ball rolling on the second surface to be attracted to the underside of the attraction member.

Gaming machine CA25 is characterized in that in gaming machine CA24, the second surface is arranged in a position that overlaps with the axis in the vertical direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA24, gaming machine CA25 has the advantage that the second surface is arranged at a position that overlaps the axis in the vertical direction, which makes it possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface being displaced downward) due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. This makes it easier for the second ball rolling on the second surface to be attracted to the underside of the attraction member.

Gaming machine CA26 is characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface in gaming machine CA24 or CA25.

According to the gaming machine CA26, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines CA24 and CA25, the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the first ball can easily roll on the first surface at the same time. That is, while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the weight of the first ball is made to act on the displacement member, so that the displacement member is prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward) by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attraction member.
<Concept of the invention using plate members C120, C2120, and C4120 as examples>
A gaming machine CB1 is characterized in that the gaming machine has a ball passage, the passage comprising a first passage that allows the ball to move back and forth in the forward and backward directions, and a second passage that is connected to the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left and right directions.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a passage member (stage) that allows the ball to move back and forth is known (JP Patent Publication 2016-198607). However, the above gaming machine has a problem in that the game is not sufficiently interesting.

In contrast, the gaming machine CB1 has a passage that includes a first passage that allows the ball to move back and forth in the forward and backward directions, and a second passage that is connected to the first passage and allows the ball to pass in the left and right directions, which can increase the excitement of the game.

A gaming machine CB2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball following the first ball pass through the second passage, the passage to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed according to the distance between the first ball and the second ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CB1, gaming machine CB2 has the advantage that when a first ball and a second ball following the first ball pass through a second passage, the passage to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed according to the distance between the first ball and the second ball, so that the player can expect the ball to be guided to a specific passage (i.e., the distance between the first ball and the second ball will be a specific distance), which can increase the interest of the game.

In this case, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first passage, and the first ball and the second ball flow down from the first passage to the second passage that passes the balls in the left-right direction, making it easier for the player to visually confirm the distance between the first ball and the second ball. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine CB2, characterized in that when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, at least the second ball is guided to a passage that is more advantageous than the passage that is guided when the distance exceeds the predetermined amount, and the first passage is formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first ball and the second ball.

According to gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, at least the second ball is guided to a passage that is more advantageous than the passage that is guided when the distance exceeds the predetermined amount, and since the first passage is formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first ball and the second ball, it is easy to make the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage equal to or less than the predetermined amount. As a result, the player can expect to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine CB4 is any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, which is characterized in that it has a gaming board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is disposed in the opening of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine CB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, the gaming machine CB4 has a game board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is disposed in the opening of the game board, so that the space in the front-rear direction can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the total length of the second passage can be easily secured.
<Concept of the invention using magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 (passage part CRt2004) as examples>
A gaming machine CC1 is provided with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is arranged in a ball passage path and formed so as to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, characterized in that when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball passes through a part of the displacement member that is lifted upward and is guided to a passage different from that of the first ball.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the gaming balls and distributes the gaming balls to a first passage and a second passage is known (JP Patent Publication 2017-148189). However, with the above-mentioned conventional technology, the balls only flow downward in the weight direction, which causes a problem in that the game is not very entertaining.

In contrast, with gaming machine CC1, when a first ball passing through the passageway reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball passes through the part of the displacement member that is lifted upward and is guided to a different path from the first ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine CC2 in which the passage through which the second ball is guided as it passes through the part of the displacement member that is lifted upward is formed by a magnetic part that can attract the ball by magnetic force.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CC1, gaming machine CC2 has the advantage that the passage through which the second ball is guided as it passes through the portion of the displacement member that is lifted upward is formed by a magnetic portion that can magnetically attract the ball, so that the ball can be caused to drop midway through the passage. This increases the interest of the game.

A gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CC2, the magnetic part is located above the part of the displacement member that is lifted upward.

In gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CC2, the magnetic part is located above the part of the displacement member that is lifted upward. Therefore, if the displacement member is not displaced from the specified position by the weight of the first ball, even if the second ball passes through the part that should be lifted upward, it is possible to reliably create a mode in which the second ball is not attracted to the magnetic part.

In the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported on a shaft, and the part on which the weight of the first ball acts and the part that is lifted upward are located on either side of the shaft of the displacement member, which is the gaming machine CC4.

According to gaming machine CC4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported on a shaft, and the part on which the weight of the first ball acts and the part that is lifted upward are located on either side of the rotation shaft, so that when the second ball passes through the part that is lifted upward, the weight of the first ball can be used to make it easier to maintain the part through which the second ball passes in an upwardly lifted state.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
The gaming machine DA1 is provided with a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway, the displacement member being displaced when a ball enters the passageway, thereby changing the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, with the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced when a ball enters the passage, changing the ease with which the ball can enter the passage. Therefore, when a first ball enters the passage and it is expected that a second ball will also enter the passage, or conversely, when it is expected that the second ball will not enter the passage when the first ball has entered the passage, it is possible to focus on whether or not the second ball will enter the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DA2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage when the ball enters the passage.

According to the gaming machine DA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage, so that the balls following the ball that entered the passage (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) can be more likely to enter the passage. In other words, when one ball enters the passage, a state in which subsequent balls are more likely to enter the passage in succession can be created, and when a subsequent ball enters the passage, a state in which the subsequent ball is more likely to enter the passage due to the subsequent ball entering the passage can be created. Therefore, when a ball enters the passage, the player can expect a chain reaction of balls entering the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DA3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the passage when the ball enters the passage.

According to the gaming machine DA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the passage. Therefore, when a first ball has entered the passage and it is expected that a second ball will not enter the passage, it is possible to make it more difficult for the second ball to enter the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DA4, which is one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, the gaming machine DA4 uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to displace the displacement member to the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage, making it unnecessary to use an actuator for driving the displacement member or a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

A gaming machine DA5, which is a gaming machine DA2 or DA3, is provided with a rolling member that allows a ball that has entered the passage to roll and is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and a transmission means that transmits the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage by displacing the rolling member by the weight of the rolling ball and transmitting the displacement of the rolling member by the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DA2 and DA3, a ball that has entered the passage can roll, and the machine is equipped with a rolling member that is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and a transmission means that transmits the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member. The rolling member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means, so that the displacement member is displaced to the side where it is easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage, and while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, the displacement member can be displaced to the side where it is easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage. In other words, the state where it is easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage can be easily (longer) maintained.

A gaming machine DA6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a plurality of the rolling members in the gaming machine DA5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA5, gaming machine DA6 is equipped with multiple rolling members, which ensures a section in which the ball can roll (rolling distance), and lengthens the period during which the displacement member is displaced to the side that makes it easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage. In other words, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage.

In the gaming machine DA5 or DA6, the ball that enters the passage is rolled on the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling. In the gaming machine DA7,

According to the gaming machine DA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DA5 and DA6, a ball that has entered the passage is made to roll on the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is made smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling, so that it is possible to suppress the imparting of momentum to the ball rolling on the rolling member. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

A gaming machine DA8 is one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, characterized in that the rolling member returns by its own weight to the state before it was displaced by the weight of the ball.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, the gaming machine DA8 allows the rolling members to return by their own weight to the state they were in before they were displaced by the weight of the ball, eliminating the need for an actuator to drive the rolling members or a sensor to control that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

A gaming machine DA9 is any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA8, characterized in that it is provided with an action means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member.

Gaming machine DA9 has the same effects as any of gaming machines DA5 to DA8, but is also equipped with an action means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member, so it can affect the rolling of the ball. That is, the action of the action means can impart resistance to the rolling of the ball, slowing down the speed of the rolling. This can lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage, or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

In the gaming machine DA9, the action means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends in the vertical direction, and a plurality of such action means are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface. In the gaming machine DA10,

According to gaming machine DA10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DA9, the action means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends vertically, and multiple protrusions are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface, so that when the ball rolls on the rolling surface, the protrusions (action means) come into contact with it, providing resistance to the rolling of the ball and slowing down the rolling speed. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

On the other hand, since the protrusion (acting means) extends in the vertical direction, it is difficult for resistance to be applied to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the ball bounces upward from the rolling surface of the rolling member, the ball can be made to fall quickly downward (to the rolling surface). Therefore, even if the rolling member is displaced upward as the ball bounces upward, the rolling member can be made to quickly return to the state displaced by the weight of the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in which the displaced member that has been displaced by the weight of the ball to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage is returned to its initial position (the position before the ball entered the passage) by the ball bouncing off the rolling surface.

In the gaming machine DA10, the rolling member is characterized in that the rolling surface on which the ball rolls is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA10, gaming machine DA11 has a rolling member in which the rolling surface on which the ball rolls is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, so that the ball rolling on the rolling surface can be prevented from bouncing upward (vertically). This prevents the occurrence of a malfunction in which the displacement member that has been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway is returned to its initial position (the position before the ball entered the passageway) by the ball bouncing up from the rolling surface.

The rolling surface does not need to be flat, but may be undulating (a surface whose cross-sectional shape is formed by smoothly connecting arcs). In other words, the rolling surface does not need to have any steps with a height of at least 1/10 of the diameter of the ball.

A gaming machine DA12, which is a gaming machine DA10 or DA11, is characterized in that the protrusions are formed on the inner surface of the passage on both sides of the rolling surface, and the protrusions on one inner surface and the protrusions on the other inner surface are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling surface of the rolling member.

According to gaming machine DA12, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DA10 or DA11, protrusions are formed on both sides of the rolling surface on the inner side of the passage, and the protrusions on one inner side and the protrusions on the other inner side are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling surface of the rolling member, making it easier for the ball to come into contact with the protrusions as it rolls on the rolling surface. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain (for longer) a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

A gaming machine DA13 is any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, characterized in that the rolling member is rotatably supported on a shaft, and a ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member toward the supported portion.

According to the gaming machine DA13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member toward the supported part, so that the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the rolling member. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage can be performed quickly when the ball enters the passage and reaches the rolling member. Therefore, when the distance between the ball that entered the passage and the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, when both balls flow down in a row), it is possible to make it easier or more difficult for the subsequent ball to enter the passage.

In addition, as the ball continues to roll, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually reduced. In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member that was on the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage can be gradually displaced toward its initial position (the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage). This changes expectations that the ball will enter the passage, making the game more interesting.

Furthermore, when a ball that has entered the passageway falls onto the rolling member, the fallen ball can be received at a position where the displacement of the rolling member is large (a position away from the pivoted portion). Thus, the kinetic energy of the fallen ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, preventing the ball from bouncing upward. As a result, the weight of the ball can be stably applied to the rolling member, stabilizing the state of the displacement member (for example, preventing the displacement member from being temporarily displaced to a side that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway or to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passageway).

A gaming machine DA14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA13, a ball that enters the passage falls onto the rolling member.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA13, the gaming machine DA14 allows the ball that has entered the passage to fall onto the rolling member, and the rolling member can be displaced quickly by utilizing the kinetic energy of the fallen ball. As a result, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is easier to enter the passage or the side where the ball is harder to enter the passage. Therefore, even when the distance between the ball that has entered the passage and the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, when both balls flow down in a row), the following ball can be made easier or harder to enter the passage.

In addition, if a ball that enters a passageway member is dropped onto a member other than the rolling member (a fixed, non-displaceable member), this can easily cause damage to the other member. However, according to the present invention, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by displacing the rolling member, preventing damage. Therefore, the freedom of passageway design can be increased to the extent that the ball can be allowed to fall.

A gaming machine DA14 is characterized in that the ball rolling on the rolling member in the gaming machine DA13 is rolled at least to the pivoted portion of the rolling member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA13, gaming machine DA14 allows the ball rolling on the rolling member to roll at least to the part (rotation axis) where the rolling member is supported, so compared to when the ball is thrown before it reaches the part (rotation axis) where the rolling member is supported, the effect of the inertial force associated with the ball being thrown (the effect of the weight of the ball no longer being acted on) is suppressed, and the rolling member is prevented from flapping in the direction of rotation. This makes it possible to stabilize the state of the displacement member (for example, to suppress the displacement member from being temporarily displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage).

A gaming machine DA16 is any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, characterized in that the rolling member is rotatably supported, and a ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member in a direction away from the supported portion.

According to the gaming machine DA16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that has entered the passage rolls on the rolling member in a direction away from the supported part. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized at a later stage (when the ball has rolled beyond a predetermined amount). In other words, the timing at which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is easier to enter the passage or the side where the ball is more difficult to enter the passage can be delayed. Therefore, when the distance between the ball that has entered the passage and the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) is relatively large, the following ball can be made easier or more difficult to enter the passage.

In addition, as the ball continues to roll, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually increased. In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member can be gradually displaced toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passageway, or toward the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passageway. This changes expectations for the ball to enter the passageway, making the game more interesting.

A gaming machine DA17, which is one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA16, is characterized in that when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement member is restricted from displacing to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DA5 to DA16, gaming machine DA17 restricts the displacement of the displacement member to the side that makes it easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, thereby preventing fraudulent acts of forcibly displacing the displacement member to the side that makes it easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage.

In the gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is restricted by the rolling member, thereby restricting the displacement of the displacement member to the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage. A gaming machine DA18.

According to gaming machine DA18, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is restricted by the rolling member, restricting the displacement of the displacement member to the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage, so there is no need to provide a separate part to restrict the forced displacement of the displacement member, and the transmission means can be reused. In other words, the structure for suppressing fraudulent acts that forcibly displace the displacement member can be simplified.

A gaming machine DA19 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball fills the gap and then comes into contact with the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA19, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball abuts against the transmission means after filling the gap, so that when the displacement of the rolling member is relatively small, the displacement of the rolling member cannot be transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means. In other words, in order to displace the displacement member to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage, it is necessary to form a displacement in the rolling member that exceeds the gap, and therefore it is difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts such as hitting the gaming machine to displace the rolling member or displacing the rolling member with a foreign object such as a wire.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
This gaming machine DB1 is provided with a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member which is formed so as to be displaceable and which changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway, and is characterized in that the displacement speed of the displacement member is formed so as to be changeable.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, with the DB1 gaming machine, the displacement speed of the displacement member is made variable, so the rate at which the ball's likelihood of entering the passage changes can be changed. As a result, the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine DB2 is characterized in that the displacement member in DB1 is displaced faster toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than toward the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage.

According to gaming machine DB2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is faster in displacement to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than in displacement to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, so that a state where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is quickly created, and a well-paced presentation can be provided for players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. Also, by relatively slowing down the displacement speed to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, a period of time where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is secured, and players hoping for the ball to enter the passage can focus on whether or not the ball will enter the passage in time. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

Gaming machine DB3 is characterized in that the displacement member in DB1 is displaced at a slower speed toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than toward the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage.

According to gaming machine DB3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is slower in displacement speed to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, so that it gradually increases the ease with which the ball can enter the passage, and it is possible to gradually raise the expectations of players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. Also, by quickly creating a state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, it is possible to provide a well-paced presentation for players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage. DB4 is characterized by this.

According to gaming machine DB4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member is displaced by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to either the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, thereby eliminating the need for an actuator for driving the displacement member or a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine DC1 is provided with a passage through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passage, and is characterized in that the gaming machine DC1 is provided with a plurality of displacement members, and one of the plurality of displacement members has a displacement mode different from the other displacement members.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, the gaming machine DC1 is equipped with multiple displacement members, one of which has a different displacement pattern from the other displacement members in the passage, so that the combination of the displacement patterns of the multiple displacement members can greatly change the ease with which a ball can enter the passage. As a result, the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

Examples of the displacement mode include the timing at which the displacement begins, the displacement direction, the displacement speed, and combinations of these.

A gaming machine DC2 in which the displacement of the one displacement member in the gaming machine DC1 begins after the displacement of the other displacement member has begun and a predetermined time has elapsed.

In addition to the effects of the game machine DC1, the game machine DC2 has the advantage that the start of the displacement of one displacement member occurs after the start of the displacement of the other displacement member and a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the position at which the ease of the ball entering the passage is changed can be varied, as well as the timing. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, it has an upstream passage that allows the balls to flow down the passage, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is approximately parallel to the rolling direction of the balls in the upstream passage.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DC1 or DC2, gaming machine DC3 is equipped with an upstream passage that allows the ball to flow down the passage, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is approximately parallel to the rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passage, so that the rolling direction and rolling position of the ball rolling in the upstream passage and the displacement direction and displacement position of the displacement member can be related to the ease of the ball entering the passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DC4, which is any one of the gaming machines DC1 to DC3, is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage.

According to gaming machine DC4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member is displaced by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to either the side making it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side making it harder for the ball to enter the passage, thereby eliminating the need for an actuator for driving the displacement member or a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
Gaming machine DD1 is provided with a passage through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is capable of being displaced and that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passage, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a rolling member that is capable of rolling a ball that has entered the passage, the displacement member being displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, and the rolling member is configured so that the ball can fall midway along its rolling path.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, gaming machine DD1 is equipped with a rolling member that is formed so that a ball that has entered the passage can roll, and the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, and since the rolling member is formed so that the ball can fall midway along its rolling path, the period during which the weight of the ball can be utilized can be changed depending on the distance the ball rolls along its rolling path. In other words, the ease with which the ball can enter the passage can be changed depending on the state of the ball rolling on the rolling member. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DA2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DD1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to gaming machine DD2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DD1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, so while the ball that has entered the passage is rolling on the rolling member, it is easier for the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) to enter the passage.

That is, when a ball enters the passage and rolls on the rolling member, a state is created in which subsequent balls can easily enter the passage, and when the subsequent ball enters the passage and rolls on the rolling member, a state is created in which the next subsequent ball can easily enter the passage. Thus, when a ball enters the passage, the player can expect a chain reaction of balls entering the passage. On the other hand, if a ball that has entered the passage falls midway along the rolling path of the rolling member, the weight of the ball cannot be utilized, and a state in which subsequent balls can easily enter the passage cannot be created. This allows the player to pay attention to the rolling state of the ball (whether or not it can reach the end of the rolling path). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DD1, it is provided with a dropping means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to drop from the rolling member when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DD1, gaming machine DD3 is equipped with a drop means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to drop from the rolling member when a predetermined number of balls or more are rolling on the rolling member, so that while a ball is rolling on the rolling member, the player can focus on whether another ball will flow down the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The displacement member in gaming machine DD3 may be displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passageway, using the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, or may be displaced to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. In the former case, when a ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a high possibility that another ball will flow further down the passageway, making it easier for the player to pay attention to the direction of the other ball whether it will flow down the passageway or not. In the latter case, when a ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a low possibility that another ball will flow further down the passageway, giving the player a sense of security.

Gaming machine DD4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DD2 or DD3, a drop passage through which balls that fall midway along the rolling path of the rolling member pass, and balls that pass through the drop passage are given more favorable game conditions than balls that pass through the passage.

According to the gaming machine DD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DD2 and DD3, a falling passage through which the ball that falls on the way of the rolling path of the rolling member passes is provided, and the ball that passes through the falling passage is given more favorable game conditions than the ball that passes through the passage, so that the player can pay more attention to whether the ball falls on the way of the rolling path of the rolling member. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: A downwardly inclined thorny stage is driven to move back and forth, and the thorns give randomness to the destination of the ball as it flows down the stage along the downward incline. The reciprocating drive suppresses the ball from being held by the thorns.>
A gaming machine EA1 is provided with a passage member formed so that a ball can move, the gaming machine being characterized by comprising a displacement means formed so as to be able to displace at least a portion of the passage member and to impart a change in the direction of movement of the ball.

A gaming machine equipped with a passageway member through which a ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passageway member). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the change in the direction of the ball's movement is monotonous, making the game less interesting.

In response to this, the gaming machine EA1 is equipped with a displacement means that is configured to displace at least a portion of the passage member to change the direction of movement of the ball, and by displacing the passage member with the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the change in the direction of movement of the ball moving through the passage member. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the direction of movement of the ball from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EA2, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine EA1, a means for imparting a change in the direction of movement of the ball is provided in the passage member, the passage member has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the means for imparting a change in the direction of movement of the ball is provided with a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion.

According to the gaming machine EA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA1, it is provided with an imparting means arranged on the passage member for imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball, the passage member has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the imparting means has a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion, so that the change in the moving direction of the ball when rolling on the passage member (rolling portion) can be diversified, and the change in the moving direction of the ball can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

It also makes it easier for players to visually see how the direction of the ball's movement is changed. That is, the ball rolls on the rolling part at a relatively slow speed, and it takes a relatively long time for the rolling part to move, but the action of the protrusion or recess can further increase the time it takes for the ball to move. As a result, it makes it easier for players to visually see how the direction of the ball's movement is changed, which increases the fun of the game.

A gaming machine EA3, in which the displacement means in the gaming machine EA2 displaces the passage member in a displacement direction that has at least a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling portion of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine EA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA2, the displacement means displaces the passage member in a displacement direction that has at least a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling portion of the passage member, so that a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball can be formed in the protrusion. As a result, it is easy to impart a change in the moving direction of the ball. Also, the change in the moving direction of the ball can be diversified.

A gaming machine EA4 is characterized in that the protrusions in the gaming machine EA2 or EA3 are arranged with at least a gap between the protrusions that allows a ball to move between them.

According to the gaming machine EA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines EA2 and EA3, the protrusions are arranged with at least a gap between them that allows the ball to move, so that the ball can be prevented from staying in the passage member (rolling portion). Therefore, in order to prevent the ball from staying in the passage member (rolling portion), it is possible to prevent the passage member (rolling portion) from being displaced along a complex trajectory or with a large displacement amount or displacement speed. As a result, the displacement means can be simplified.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: A given value is given when a stage is passed>
The gaming machine EB1 is provided with a passage member through which a ball can move, and is characterized in that it is provided with a change means for changing the ease with which a ball can pass through the passage member, and is formed so that a predetermined value can be imparted to a ball that has passed through the passage member.

A gaming machine equipped with a passage member formed so that a ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passage member). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine does not provide the player with the gameplay of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through (whether or not it can cross the stage and reach the end), and there is a problem in that the interest of the game is insufficient.

In response to this, gaming machine EB1 is equipped with a change means for changing the ease with which a ball can pass through the passage member, and is configured so that a predetermined value can be imparted to a ball that has passed through the passage member, so that the player can enjoy the game of whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not there is a possibility of the ball passing through the passage member and being awarded the predetermined value). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine EB2 is characterized in that the change means in the gaming machine EB1 includes a displacement means for displacing at least a portion of the passage member.

According to gaming machine EB2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine EB1, the change means includes a displacement means for displacing at least a portion of the passage member, so that when the ball moves through the passage member, the passage member is displaced by the displacement means, thereby imparting randomness to the direction of movement of the ball. In other words, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) can be made to function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member (crossing the passage member to obtain the possibility of being awarded a predetermined value), thereby enhancing the playability of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (crossing the passage member to obtain the possibility of being awarded a predetermined value). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine EB3, in which the passage member in the gaming machine EB2 has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the changing means has a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion.

According to gaming machine EB3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine EB2, the passage member has a rolling section formed so that the ball can roll, and the change means has a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling section of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling section, so that it is possible to impart randomness to the rolling direction (movement direction) of the ball rolling on the rolling section. In other words, the protrusions and recesses can function as means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member (crossing the passage member to obtain the possibility of being awarded a predetermined value), so that it is possible to enhance the playability of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (crossing the passage member to obtain the possibility of being awarded a predetermined value). As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EB4 is characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines EB1 to EB3, the passage member comprises a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that the ball passing through the first passage member can move, the predetermined value is formed so that it can be imparted to the ball passing through the second passage member, and the changing means is formed so that it can differentiate between the manner in which the ease of passage of the ball is changed in the first passage member and the manner in which the ease of passage of the ball is changed in the second passage member.

According to gaming machine EB4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines EB1 to EB3, the passage member includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball passing through the first passage member can move, a predetermined value is formed so that it can be imparted to a ball passing through the second passage member, and the change means is formed so that the manner in which the ease of passage of the ball is changed in the first passage member can be different from the manner in which the ease of passage of the ball is changed in the second passage member. Therefore, the gameplay of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not the player can get the possibility of passing through the passage member and being imparted the predetermined value) can be imparted to the player in different manners in the first passage member and the second passage member. As a result, such gameplay can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

Examples of means for changing the ease of ball passage include the shape and attitude (tilt), the displacement mode of the passage member (type of displacement (rotation, linear displacement, curvilinear displacement, combinations of these), displacement direction, displacement speed, mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude), etc.), and the mode of the surface (rolling surface) of the passage member along which the ball moves (presence or absence of protrusions or recesses, mode of the protrusions and recesses (size, shape, arrangement, etc.)). In other words, when the mode for changing the ease of ball passage in the first passage member is different from the mode for changing the ease of ball passage in the second passage member, it means that at least some or all of the above-mentioned means are different between the first passage member and the second passage member.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: Retention means for retaining balls>
Gaming machine EC1 is provided with a passage member formed to allow a ball to move, the machine comprising: a ball entry means formed to allow a predetermined value to be assigned to an entered ball; and a second passage member formed to allow the ball to move after passing through the passage member, the passage member and the second passage member being formed to allow the ball to fall midway along the ball's movement path, and the ball that has passed through the second passage member is more likely to be entered into the ball entry means than a ball that has passed through the passage member.

A gaming machine equipped with a passage member formed so that the ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passage member). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the ball that flows down from a predetermined position on the stage goes directly into a winning hole (ball entry hole), which causes a problem that the excitement of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, the gaming machine EC1 is equipped with a ball entry means that is formed so that a predetermined value can be assigned to a entered ball, and a second passage member that is formed so that the ball that has passed through the passage member can move. As the ball that has passed through the passage member moves through the second passage member, the time required for the ball to enter the ball entry means can be increased accordingly. In other words, the period during which the ball can be expected to enter the ball entry means can be extended, and the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened. In particular, since balls that have passed through the second passage member are more likely to enter the ball entry means than balls that have passed through the passage member, the player can feel the excitement of the ball entering the ball entry means and follow its trajectory. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine EC1, the second passage member is characterized by having a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion. In the gaming machine EC2,

According to gaming machine EC2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine EC1, the second passage member has a rolling section formed so that the ball can roll, and a number of protrusions protruding from the rolling section or a number of recesses recessed into the rolling section, so that the direction of movement of the ball when it rolls on the second passage member (rolling section) can be changed, and the player can enjoy whether or not the ball can pass through the second passage member (whether or not there is a possibility of the ball passing through the second passage member and entering the ball entry means). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

It also makes it easier for players to see the movement of the ball. That is, while the ball rolls on the rolling part at a relatively slow speed and it takes a relatively long time for the rolling part to move, the action of the protrusions and recesses can further increase the time it takes for the ball to move. As a result, it is easier for players to follow the direction of the ball, and the period during which the ball can be expected to enter the ball entry means is extended, building up the player's sense of anticipation.

Amusement machine EC3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a displacement means that is configured to displace the passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball in the gaming machine EC1 or EC2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EC1 and EC2, gaming machine EC3 is equipped with a displacement means that is capable of displacing the passage member and imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball, so that it is possible to impart randomness to the moving direction of the ball. In other words, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member and reaching the second passage member. This creates a gameplay that allows the player to enjoy whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not the ball can reach the second passage member, and ultimately whether or not the ball can enter the ball entry means). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

Amusement machine EC4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second displacement means that is configured to displace the second passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball in the gaming machine EC3.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC3, the gaming machine EC4 is provided with a second displacement means that is formed to be able to displace the second passage member and change the moving direction of the ball, so that it is possible to impart randomness to the moving direction of the ball. In other words, the second displacement means (displacement of the second passage member) can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member to reach the second passage member, and the ball from passing through the second passage member to enter the ball entry means. This can create a gameplay that allows the player to enjoy whether or not the ball that has passed through the passage member can reach the second passage member, and whether or not the ball that has reached the passage member can pass through the second passage member (whether or not the ball can enter the ball entry means). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine EC5, in which the displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means is different from the displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC4, the gaming machine EC5 has a different displacement pattern of the passage member caused by the displacement means and a different displacement pattern of the second passage member caused by the second displacement means, so that the displacement pattern of the ball can be diversified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means and the displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means being different means that, for example, at least some or all of the type of displacement (rotation, linear displacement, curvilinear displacement, or a combination thereof), displacement direction, displacement speed, and mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude) are different between the first passage member and the second passage member.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames F86b to F5086b as an example>
A gaming machine FA1 has an inlet portion through which balls can flow, comprising a first means formed to be capable of receiving a ball, and a second means displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means, the second means being formed to be displaceable in a direction that changes the size of the inlet portion.

A gaming machine equipped with a passage member formed so that the ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication No. 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passage member). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the change in the direction of the ball's movement is monotonous, making the game less entertaining. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine FA1, when a specific ball is heading toward the flow-in portion, when the first means receives a ball (a ball preceding or following the specific ball), the second means is displaced in a direction that changes the size of the flow-in portion, making it easier or more difficult for the specific ball to flow into the flow-in portion. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of whether or not the first means is accepting the ball, which increases the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FA2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a maintaining means for maintaining the state in which the second means is displaced in a direction that changes the size of the flow-in portion in the gaming machine FA1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA1, gaming machine FA2 can maintain a state in which it is easy or difficult for a specific ball to flow into the flow-in portion even when the weight of the ball no longer acts on the first means. This makes it possible to ensure a period in which it is possible or difficult to expect the ball to flow in, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FA2 further includes a release means for releasing the hold by the hold means, the hold means maintains the state in which the second means is displaced in a direction that increases the size of the flow-in portion due to the weight of the ball received by the first means, and the release by the release means is performed when at least one ball flows into the flow-in portion. A gaming machine FA3 characterized in that:

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA2, gaming machine FA3 maintains the state in which the second means is displaced in the direction in which the size of the flow-in portion is increased until at least one ball has flowed into the flow-in portion, ensuring that the ball flows into the flow-in portion. This provides the player with a sense of security. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine FA4, which is characterized in that in the state maintained by the maintaining means in the gaming machine FA3, the first means is maintained in a position displaced by receiving a ball.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine FA3, gaming machine FA4 makes it easier for the player to understand from the displacement position of the first means that the state is maintained by the maintenance means (the second means is displaced in the direction in which the size of the flow-in portion is increased). As a result, interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine FA5 is any one of gaming machines FA1 to FA4, and is characterized by having a delay means for delaying the flow of balls from the first means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FA1 to FA4, gaming machine FA5 can lengthen the period during which the weight of the ball acts on the first means (the period during which the first means is displaced from a predetermined position (the position before the ball is received, the initial position)). This makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the size of the flow-in portion is increased.

In the gaming machine FA5, the delay means includes an opening formed in the first means and a first rolling section formed in the first means that allows the ball to roll along the periphery of the opening, and the ball flows down from the first means by rolling on the first rolling section and flowing into the opening. In the gaming machine FA6,

According to gaming machine FA6, in addition to the effect of gaming machine FA5, by rolling the first rolling part along the periphery of the opening, the speed of the ball can be reduced, and the flow of the ball from the first means can be delayed accordingly. In other words, the period during which the weight of the ball acts on the first means (the period during which the first means is displaced from a predetermined position (the position before the ball is received, the initial position)) can be lengthened. Therefore, the period during which the size of the flow-in portion is increased can be lengthened.

A gaming machine FA6, characterized in that the first rolling portion is formed continuously along the periphery of the opening, and the delay means includes a second rolling portion formed on the first means that allows the ball to roll toward a position eccentric from the opening in the first rolling portion. A gaming machine FA7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA6, gaming machine FA7 has the first rolling portion formed continuously around the periphery of the opening, so that the ball can be made to rotate in the first rolling portion. Also, the second rolling portion allows the ball to roll toward a position eccentric to the opening in the first rolling portion, so that the ball can be made to rotate in the first rolling portion more easily. As a result, the period during which the weight of the ball acts on the first means (the period during which the first means is displaced from a predetermined position (the position before the ball is received, the initial position)) can be lengthened. Therefore, the period during which the size of the flow-in portion is increased can be lengthened.

A gaming machine FA8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FA7, when a ball rolls on the first rolling part, the vertical height of the first rolling part is set to be approximately the same along the periphery of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FA7, gaming machine FA8 can suppress the formation of height differences, making it easier for the ball to rotate in the first rolling section.

A gaming machine FA9, which is any one of gaming machines FA5 to FA8, is characterized in that the delay means includes a rolling section formed in the first means that allows the ball to roll, and a holding means that holds the ball in the rolling section, and the ball held in the holding means is able to roll over the holding means by displacing the first means by a predetermined amount due to the weight of the ball.

Gaming machine FA9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines FA5 to FA8, can temporarily stop the rolling of the ball. This makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the first means is displaced from a predetermined position (the position before the ball is received, the initial position) due to the weight of the ball. This in turn makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the flow-in portion is enlarged. Also, since the holding means releases its hold (the ball resumes rolling) by utilizing the change in position of the first means, it is not necessary to provide a releasing means.

In the gaming machine FA9, the delay means is provided with an action means that acts on the ball held by the holding means when the first means is displaced by a predetermined amount due to the weight of the ball. In the gaming machine FA10,

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FA9, the gaming machine FA10 can ensure that the holding means releases the ball from its hold by the action of the action means (making it easier for the ball to overcome the holding means).

The gaming machine FA11 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FA9 or FA10, it has a flow section formed so that balls can flow down to the first means, and the direction in which the first means is displaced by the weight of the ball is at least the direction in which the rolling section is moved away from the flow section.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FA9 or FA10, the gaming machine FA11 can prevent the holding means from releasing the ball held by the ball due to a collision with a trailing ball flowing down from the flow section.

A gaming machine FA12 is any one of gaming machines FA1 to FA11, characterized in that it is equipped with a transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the first means to the second means.

According to the gaming machine FA12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FA1 to FA11, the displacement of the first means (i.e., the weight of the ball) can be used to displace the second means. Therefore, a drive source for displacing the second means is not required.

A gaming machine FA13 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FA12, when the weight of the ball is not acting on the first means, the weight of the first means and the second means displaces the first means and the second means to their initial positions.

According to the gaming machine FA13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FA12, the means for restoring the first means and the second means is not required, thereby reducing the production cost.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames F6086b to F11086b as an example>
A gaming machine FB1 is provided with an inlet portion through which a ball can flow and a path formed so that the ball can move toward the inlet portion, characterized in that the gaming machine FB1 is provided with a first means formed so that it can receive a ball, and a second means formed so that it can act on the ball as it is displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means and moves along the path.

A gaming machine equipped with a passage member formed so that the ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication No. 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passage member). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the change in the direction of the ball's movement is monotonous, making the game less interesting. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine FB1, when a predetermined ball moves along a path, when the first means receives a ball (a ball preceding or following the predetermined ball), the second means can act on the predetermined ball moving along the path. Thus, the possibility of the predetermined ball moving along the path flowing into the flow-in portion can be changed by the action of the second means. As a result, the player can be made aware of whether or not the first means will accept the ball, which can increase the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FB2, characterized in that in the gaming machine FB1, the direction of displacement of the second means from the position displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means to the position before the displacement includes a component of the movement direction of the ball moving along the path toward the second means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FB1, gaming machine FB2 can absorb impact by displacing the second means in the direction of the ball's movement (moving back toward its initial position) when the ball moves along a path toward the second means and hits the second means. This can prevent damage to the second means.

A gaming machine FB3, in which the second displacement means displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means acts on the ball moving along the path to make it easier for it to flow into the flow-in portion, is characterized by the above.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FB2, gaming machine FB3 makes it easier for balls to flow into the receiving section, making the player aware of whether or not the first means is accepting the ball. This increases the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine FB2 or FB3, the path has an inclined section formed at an angle, and the second means is displaceable to a position where it can act on a ball ascending the inclined section. Gaming machine FB4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FB2 and FB3, gaming machine FB4 allows the ball to gradually slow down as it ascends the inclined section, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the movement of the ball and the action of the second means on the ball. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine FB4, the inclined portion includes a first inclined portion formed with an incline and a second inclined portion formed with an incline in the opposite direction to the first inclined portion, the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are formed so that a ball can move back and forth, and the second means is formed so that it can be displaced to a position where it can act on a ball ascending the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion. Gaming machine FB5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FB4, gaming machine FB5 allows the ball to reach a position where it can be acted upon by the second means multiple times by the ball's reciprocating movement on the inclined portions (first inclined portion and second inclined portion). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine FB4 or FB5, the position at which the second means can act on the ball ascending the inclined portion is a position lower than the maximum reachable position of the ball ascending the inclined portion. Gaming machine FB6.

Here, at the maximum reach position, the ball's speed is low (or the speed is zero) and the momentum of the ball is weak, so that even if the second means is displaced to a position where it can act on the ball ascending the inclined portion and the ball abuts against the second means, there is a risk that the ball may not be guided in a direction that makes it easier for it to flow into the flow-receiving portion. In contrast, according to gaming machine FB6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine FB4 or gaming machine FB5, the second means is able to act on the ball ascending the inclined portion at a position below the maximum reach position, so that the ball can be made to abut against the second means while the ball's speed is secured. Therefore, by utilizing the momentum of the ball, it is easier to guide it in a direction that makes it easier for it to flow into the flow-receiving portion.

In addition, in a configuration in which the ball moves back and forth between the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach a position where it can be acted upon by the second means multiple times.

In the gaming machine FB6, the second means is configured to be able to act on a ball moving up the inclined section when displaced to a position where it can act on a ball moving up the inclined section. In the gaming machine FB7, the second means is configured to be able to act on a ball moving down the inclined section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FB6, gaming machine FB7 can create the possibility of acting on a ball that has reached the top of the inclined portion and is descending, even if the second means is displaced to a position where it can act on the ball after the ball has passed through the inclined portion.

In any one of gaming machines FB4 to FB7, the second means includes a guide portion formed to be able to guide the ball along an arc-shaped curve, and the ball ascending the inclined portion is guided along the guide portion in a direction that makes it easier for the ball to flow into the flow-in portion. Gaming machine FB8.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines FB4 to FB7, the gaming machine FB8 can gradually guide (change the direction of movement) the ball ascending the inclined portion along the curve. In other words, it can reliably guide the ball in a direction that makes it easier for it to flow into the flow-in portion.

A gaming machine FB8, characterized in that the second means is formed so as to be able to protrude from the inclined portion, and when the second means is not protruding from the inclined portion, the second means becomes part of the inclined portion. A gaming machine FB9.

Here, in a configuration in which the second means (guide portion) protrudes from the side of the inclined portion along the width direction of the inclined portion (a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rises along the inclined portion), it is necessary to secure a space equivalent to the width of the inclined portion on the side of the inclined portion as space to store the second means (guide portion), which results in a larger size. In contrast, with gaming machine FB9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine FB8, there is no need to secure the space required to store the second means (guide portion) on the side of the inclined portion, and the dead space in the thickness direction of the inclined portion can be effectively utilized, which allows for a smaller size.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the second means (guide portion) protrudes from the side of the inclined portion along the width direction of the inclined portion (a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rises up the inclined portion), the amount of displacement required for the second means (guide portion) is large, and therefore the time required to displace the second means increases. In contrast, according to gaming machine FB8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine FB7, the amount of displacement required for the second means (guide portion) can be reduced, thereby shortening the time required to displace the second means, and therefore the second means can be quickly positioned in a position to act on the ball rising up the inclined portion.

A gaming machine FB10 is any one of gaming machines FB1 to FB9, and is characterized by having a maintaining means for maintaining the second means displaced to a position where it can act on a ball moving along the path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines FB1 to FB9, gaming machine FB10 can maintain a state in which a specific ball can easily flow into the flow-in portion even when the weight of the ball no longer acts on the first means. This makes it easier to expect the ball to flow in, and increases the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FB11 is characterized in that it is provided with a release means for releasing the maintenance by the maintenance means in the gaming machine FB10, and the release by the release means is performed when at least one ball is flowed into the flow-in portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FB10, gaming machine FB11 can ensure that balls flow into the flow-in portion. In other words, if the second means is displaced in a direction that increases the size of the flow-in portion, a sense of security can be provided until at least one ball flows in. This can increase the interest in the game.

A gaming machine FB12 is any one of gaming machines FB1 to FB11, characterized in that it is equipped with a transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the first means to the second means.

According to gaming machine FB12, in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines FB1 to FB11, the displacement of the first means (i.e., the weight of the ball) can be used to displace the second means. Therefore, a drive source for displacing the second means is not required.

A gaming machine FB13, characterized in that in a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the first means in the gaming machine FB12, the first means is configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position by the weights of the first means and the second means, and the second means is configured to be displaceable to the initial position.

According to the gaming machine FB13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB12, the means for restoring the first means and the second means is unnecessary, and therefore costs can be reduced.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames F86b to F11086b as an example>
A gaming machine FC1 is provided with an inlet portion through which a ball can flow, characterized in that it comprises: a first means formed to be able to receive a ball and for changing the ease with which the ball flows into the inlet portion depending on the weight of the received ball; and a suppression means for suppressing the first means from being affected by balls other than the received ball when the weight of the received ball acts on the first means.

A gaming machine equipped with a passage member formed so that the ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication No. 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passage member). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the change in the direction of the ball's movement is monotonous, making the game less interesting. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine FC1, when a specific ball is heading toward the flow-in portion, when the first means receives a ball (a ball preceding or following the specific ball), it is possible to change the ease with which the specific ball flows into the flow-in portion. This makes it possible to make the player aware of whether or not the first means is accepting the ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, the suppression means can suppress the first means from being affected by another ball (for example, another ball colliding with the first means and the ball that was exerting its weight on the first means falling out of the first means). This makes it possible to suppress the change in the ease with which the ball flows into the flow-in portion from being interrupted midway, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FC2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FC1, a path is formed so that the ball can move toward the first means, and the suppression means includes a first restriction means that makes it difficult for the ball moving along the path to move toward the first means when the weight of the received ball is acting on the first means.

According to gaming machine FC2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine FC1, when the weight of the received ball is acting on the first means, the first restricting means can make it difficult for the ball moving along the path to move towards the first means, thereby preventing the first means from being affected by another ball (for example, another ball colliding with the first means, causing the ball that was exerting its weight on the first means to fall out of the first means). This prevents the change in the ease with which the ball can flow into the flow-in portion from being interrupted midway, making the game more interesting.

A gaming machine FC3, which is characterized in that it is formed so that it can receive a ball and has a second means for changing the ease with which the ball flows into the flow-in portion depending on the weight of the received ball, the path is formed so that the ball can move toward the first means and the second means, and the first regulating means makes it easier for the ball moving along the path to move toward the second means than to the first means when the weight of the received ball is acting on the first means.

According to the gaming machine FC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FC2, when the weight of the received ball is acting on the first means, the first regulating means can make it easier for the ball moving along the path to move toward the second means, making it easier to continue the change in the ease with which the specified ball flows into the flow-receiving portion. In other words, when the weight of the ball is acting on the first means, the state is prevented from being interrupted (for example, the ball moving along the path collides with the first means, and the ball that was acting on the first means falls off the first means), while the ball moving along the path is received by the second means, and a state is created in which the weight of the received ball is acting on the second means, so that the second means can also create a state in which the ease with which the specified ball flows into the flow-receiving portion is changed. This can increase the interest in the game.

A gaming machine FC4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FC3, the first means or the second means is provided with a third means that is displaced by the weight of the ball received, and the third means is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction that changes the size of the flow-in portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines FC2 and FC3, gaming machine FC4 can make it easier or harder for the ball to flow into the receiving section by displacing the third means. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of whether the ball is being accepted by the first and second means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FC5 is one of the gaming machines FC1 to FC4, characterized in that the suppression means includes a second restriction means that makes it difficult for the other ball to come into contact with at least the side of the first means when the weight of the received ball is acting on it.

According to gaming machine FC5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines FC1 to FC3, when the weight of a received ball is acting on the first means, the second restricting means makes it difficult for the ball to come into contact with at least the side of the first means, thereby preventing the first means from being affected by another ball (for example, another ball colliding with the side of the first means, causing the ball that was acting on the first means with its weight to fall out of the first means). This prevents the change in the ease with which the ball flows into the flow-in portion from being interrupted midway, making the game more interesting.

When another ball comes into contact with the ball that was exerting its weight on the first means, even if the ball that was exerting its weight falls off the first means, the other ball may be able to exert its weight on the first means in place of the ball that was exerting its weight. Also, when another ball comes into contact with the top surface of the first means (the part where the ball exerting its weight is held or rolled), the other ball may also be able to exert its weight on the first means in addition to the ball that was exerting its weight. Therefore, it would be effective if it were possible to make it difficult for the other ball to come into contact with at least the side surface of the first means.

A gaming machine FC6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FC2, it is provided with a transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the first means to the first regulating means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine FC2, gaming machine FC6 can displace the first restricting means by utilizing the displacement of the first means (i.e., the weight of the ball). This eliminates the need for a drive source to displace the first restricting means.

A gaming machine FC7 is characterized in that, in a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the first means, the first means and the first regulating means are configured to be displaceable to their initial positions by the weight of the first means and the first regulating means in the gaming machine FC6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FC6, gaming machine FC7 eliminates the need for means for resetting the first means and the first restricting means, thereby reducing product costs.

A gaming machine FC8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FC5, a flow section is provided that allows balls to flow down to the first means, and the direction in which the first means is displaced by the weight of the ball is at least the direction in which the first means is moved away from the flow section.

According to gaming machine FC8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine FC5, it is possible to prevent the trailing balls flowing down from the flow section from hitting the side of the first means.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frame F11086b as an example>
A gaming machine FD1 is provided with an inlet portion into which a ball can flow, the gaming machine comprising: a path formed to allow a ball to move to the inlet portion; and a change means for changing the ease with which a ball flows into the inlet portion, wherein a ball that flows into the path from a first position and moves along the path is made to flow into the inlet portion more easily than a ball that flows into the path from a second position and moves along the path.

A gaming machine equipped with a passage member formed so that the ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication No. 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passage member). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the change in the direction of the ball's movement is monotonous, making the game less entertaining. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

With the gaming machine FD1, the ease with which the ball can flow into the flow-in section can be changed by the change means, making the player aware of the effect of the change means on the ball moving along the path and increasing the interest of the game.

In this case, a ball that flows into the path from the first position and moves along the path is more likely to flow into the flow-in portion than a ball that flows into the path from the second position and moves along the path, making the player more aware of the position (first position or second position) from which the ball flows into the path and increasing the interest of the game.

An example of a configuration that makes it easier for the ball to enter from the first position is the abutment portion F6154.

A gaming machine FD2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FD1, a detection means is provided that is capable of detecting a ball flowing into the path from the first position, and the change means makes a change so that the ball can easily flow into the flow-in portion, provided that at least the ball is detected by the detection means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FD1, gaming machine FD2 can create a sense of expectation in the player, increasing the interest of the game. That is, a ball that flows into a path from a first position and moves along the path is made more likely to flow into the flow-received section than a ball that flows into a path from a second position and moves along the path, and further, a change is made by the change means so that the ball is more likely to flow into the flow-received section, so that the player can have the expectation of flowing into the flow-received section. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

The conditions for the change by the changing means (the action of making it easier for the ball to flow into the flow-receiving portion) may be the passage of a predetermined time, winning a lottery, or a combination of these, in addition to the detection of a ball by the detection means. The period during which the change by the changing means is performed may be divided into a predetermined time period or may be divided into a number of operations.

A gaming machine FD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FD2, a forming means is provided for forming the first position and the second position, and the forming means is formed so that a ball can move between the first position and the second position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FD2, gaming machine FD3 allows the ball to move between the first and second positions, so the player can pay close attention to the movement of the ball in the formation means and see whether the ball will flow down the path from the first position or the second position. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine FD2 or FD3, the path includes a first path formed to allow the ball flowing down from the first position to move, and a second path formed to allow the ball flowing down from the second position to move, and the gaming machine FD4 is characterized in that the path is formed to allow the ball to move between the first path and the second path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine FD2 or gaming machine FD3, gaming machine FD4 allows the ball to move between the first path and the second path, so that a greater number of paths through which the ball can move can be formed within a certain space, compared to a case in which a ball flowing in from the first position (second position) is allowed to move only along the first path (second path). As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine FD4, characterized in that it is provided with one or more abutment means that protrude from the first path or the second path and are formed so that a ball can abut against them. A gaming machine FD5.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FD4, the gaming machine FD5 makes it easier to move the ball between the first and second paths by causing the ball to abut against the abutment means, thereby changing the direction of the ball's movement. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Structure for activating multiple means at different times>
A gaming machine KA1 comprising: a displacement means capable of displacing between a first position and a second position; a first means capable of displacing the displacement means; a second means capable of changing a state between a first state in which displacement of the displacement means can be prevented and a second state in which displacement of the displacement means cannot be prevented; and a change means configured to change the state of the second means between the first state and the second state based on the operation of the first means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have a performance element that displaces a displacement means from a predetermined position, and that are equipped with a holding means that holds the displacement means in the predetermined position and a transmission means that transmits a driving force to displace the displacement means to the predetermined position (see, for example, JP 2015-231434 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, because the drive devices are separate for the holding means and the transmission means, if, for example, the drive device for the transmission means breaks down and the drive device for the holding means is moved and the displacement means is moved (dropped) from its designated position, the displacement means cannot be returned to its designated position, which can reduce the presentation effect of the displacement means. In other words, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of the presentation effect of the displacement means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine KA1, the change means causes the state of the second means to change based on the operation of the first means, and therefore it is possible to prevent the second means from changing from the first state to the second state when the first means cannot operate. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the second means is changed from the first state to the second state even though the displacement means cannot return to the specified position, causing the displacement means to be displaced from the specified position, thereby improving the presentation effect of the displacement means.

A gaming machine KA2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine KA1, the first position is located above the second position, and the second means is changed to the first state by the displacement means being positioned closer to the first position than the predetermined position and entering the second position closer to the predetermined position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KA1, the gaming machine KA2 can prevent the generation of frictional forces by creating a gap between the displacement means and the second means when the second means is brought into the first state, thereby preventing malfunctions.

Furthermore, because the displacement means and the second means are linked by the first means, it is easy to avoid deviations in operation timing, and it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection sensor that detects when the displacement means is positioned closer to the first position than the predetermined position, which is necessary when the second means is operated by a separate drive mechanism.

A gaming machine KA3, in which the second means is configured to be rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis in the gaming machine KA1 or KA2, and is configured in a shape that directs the load from the displacement means toward the rotation axis in the first state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines KA1 and KA2, the gaming machine KA3 makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the state of the second means is changed by the load from the displacement means.

A gaming machine KA4, which is any one of the gaming machines KA1 to KA3, is characterized in that the first means is capable of forming a first interlocking state in which a gap is created between the displacement means and the second means when the state of the second means changes from the first state to the second state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KA1 to KA3, the gaming machine KA4 can reduce the operating resistance between the displacement means and the second means when changing the second means from the first state to the second state.

A gaming machine KA5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines KA1 to KA4, the first means is capable of configuring a second interlocking state in which the second means rubs against the displacement means when the state of the second means changes from the first state to the second state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KA1 to KA4, the gaming machine KA5 can determine the position of the displacement means based on the position of the second means, thereby stabilizing the displacement start position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine KA6 is a gaming machine KA4 or KA5, characterized in that the direction of operation of the first means is reversed between the first and second interlocking states.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KA4 or gaming machine KA5, gaming machine KA6 makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the first interlocking state or the second interlocking state will occur from the stopped state of the first means.

A gaming machine KA7, which is any of the gaming machines KA1 to KA6, is characterized in that when the second means is changed from the first state to the second state while the displacement means is disposed at the first position, the displacement means is configured to be able to perform an unsupported displacement in a state where it is not supported by the first means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KA1 to KA6, the gaming machine KA7 can operate the displacement means in an operating mode that is not linked to the second means because it is not supported by the change means.

A gaming machine KA8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KA7, a contact prevention part is provided that is arranged to separate the displacement means and the first means when the displacement means is caused to perform the unsupported displacement.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KA7, gaming machine KA8 can prevent the first means and the displacement means from accidentally coming into contact with each other and causing damage during unsupported displacement.

A gaming machine KA9, which is any one of the gaming machines KA1 to KA8, is characterized in that when the second means is changed from the first state to the second state, the change means is displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KA1 to KA8, the gaming machine KA9 can use gravity to assist the force required to displace the change means when the second means changes from the first state to the second state.

A gaming machine KA10 is any one of the gaming machines KA1 to KA9, and is characterized by comprising a first displacement amount changing means for changing the displacement amount of the displacement means at a first ratio to the displacement amount of the first means, and a second displacement amount changing means for changing the displacement amount of the second means at a second ratio to the displacement amount of the first means.

According to the gaming machine KA10, in any of the gaming machines KA1 to KA9, the amount of displacement of the displacement means associated with the displacement of the first means can be made different from the amount of displacement of the second means, thereby improving the design freedom of the linkage.

<Configuration with multiple stop positions for movement caused by biasing force>
Gaming machine KB1 comprises a movable first moving means, a second moving means capable of moving from a first position to a second position in conjunction with the movement of the first moving means, and a biasing means for biasing the second moving means from the first position to the second position, characterized in that it also comprises a prevention means capable of preventing movement of the first moving means when the second moving means is positioned at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a moving means that extends forward of the liquid crystal display device due to a biasing force (see, for example, JP 2009-240386 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the positioning of the moving means is limited to two positions: either in front of the liquid crystal display device or in a position other than in front of the liquid crystal display device. This means that there is a small variety of possible positions, which can bore players, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the presentation effects that utilize the moving means.

In contrast, according to gaming machine KB1, the prevention means prevents the first moving means from moving, and the second moving means can be stopped at a predetermined position between the first and second positions, so that the second moving means can stop at not only the first position or the second position, but also a predetermined position. This increases the variety of states that the second moving means can take, and improves the presentation effect of the second moving means.

Gaming machine KB2 is characterized in that it comprises a driving means and a transmission means capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first moving means in the gaming machine KB1, and the transmission means is configured to be operable within a predetermined range while maintaining the second moving means in a state in which it is disposed at the predetermined position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KB1, gaming machine KB2 can maintain the second moving means in a predetermined position within a predetermined range even if the position of the transmission means is not fixed, simplifying the control of the drive means.

Gaming machine KB3 is characterized in that in gaming machine KB2, the transmission means is configured to maintain the second moving means in the predetermined position when an action occurs within the predetermined range, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KB2, gaming machine KB3 makes it easier to maintain the second moving means in a predetermined position, regardless of whether the movement is in a direction along the biasing force of the biasing means or in a direction against the biasing force. This makes it possible to realize an operating mode in which the second moving means is moved at high speed and then suddenly stopped at a predetermined position with simple control, regardless of the direction of movement.

In gaming machine KB2 or KB3, the transmission means comprises a first transmission means disposed on the side of the first moving means and a second transmission means disposed on the side of the drive means, the second transmission means comprises an operation stopping means that stops the operation of the first transmission means when the second transmission means enters the recessed portion of the first transmission means, and the gaming machine comprises a detection means that detects the position of the operation stopping means. Gaming machine KB4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KB2 and KB3, gaming machine KB4 allows the operation stopping means to serve multiple functions, and the shape of the operation stopping means can be simplified.

Gaming machine KB5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine KB4, the output of the detection means is switched depending on whether the second moving means is placed at a predetermined position.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine KB4, gaming machine KB5 can determine whether the second moving means is located at a predetermined position from the output of the detection means.

A gaming machine KB6 is any one of the gaming machines KB1 to KB5, characterized in that when the second moving means is placed in the first position, the direction in which the first moving means can move and the direction in which the second moving means can move are perpendicular to each other.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KB1 to KB5, gaming machine KB6 can prevent the first moving means from moving due to a force from the second moving means when the second moving means is placed in the first position. This makes it possible to stop the second moving means at the first position.

A gaming machine KB7 is any one of the gaming machines KB1 to KB6, characterized in that when the second moving means is placed in the second position, the direction in which the first moving means can move and the direction in which the second moving means can move are perpendicular to each other.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KB1 to KB6, gaming machine KB7 can prevent the first moving means from moving due to the force from the second moving means when the second moving means is located at the second position. This makes it possible to stop the second moving means at the second position.

Gaming machine KB8 is any one of gaming machines KB1 to KB7, characterized in that when the second moving means is placed at the predetermined position, the direction in which the first moving means can move and the direction in which the second moving means can move are parallel.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KB1 to KB7, gaming machine KB8 can improve the efficiency of force transmission to a second moving means arranged at a predetermined position.

<Configuring the run-up range until the sliding component starts sliding>
A gaming machine KC1 comprising a first means supported so as to be rotatable about a predetermined axis, and a second means movable from a first position to a second position in conjunction with the rotational movement of the first means, wherein when the second means is caused to start moving from the first position to the second position, the direction of movement of the first means, which has already started moving, is configured to be a direction along the direction of movement of the second means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have a first means for rotational movement and a second means for movement, and the second means is moved by transmitting the circumferential force of the first means to the second means (see, for example, JP 2007-098027 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the pinion as the first means for transmitting force to the door member as the second means applies a load regardless of the position of the second means, and since a large driving force is required to rotate the door member and the door member itself, overcoming their inertia, there is a problem in that the time lag between when the drive unit is excited and when the pinion starts to rotate tends to be long. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in the operation of the second means.

Therefore, even if the drive device is excited at a timing that matches the effects of the gaming machine, the timing of the operation of the pinion and door member will be delayed, and the pinion and door member will operate at a timing that does not match the effects of the effects, which may reduce the effects of the effects. In other words, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines had a problem in that there was room for improvement in the effects of the second means.

In contrast, with gaming machine KC1, when the second means is moved from the first position to the second position, the direction of movement of the first means is aligned with the direction of movement of the second means, so the momentum of rotation of the first means can be used to easily overcome the inertia of the second means, and the time delay in the timing of the movement of the second means can be shortened, improving the operation of the second means and improving the presentation effect of the second means.

A gaming machine KC2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KC1, when the moving direction of the first means is aligned with the moving direction of the second means, the rotation tip of the first means is configured to be located below the predetermined axis.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KC1, gaming machine KC2 makes it easier to stabilize the first means in a position where the direction of movement of the first means is aligned with the direction of movement of the second means.

A gaming machine KC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KC1 or KC2, it is provided with an abutment means capable of abutting against the first means in a predetermined direction, and the second means can be maintained in the second position based on the first means abutting against the abutment means and being stopped.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KC1 or KC2, gaming machine KC3 eliminates the need to lock the second means because the second means is positioned at the second position based on the first means abutting against the abutment means and stopping. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which a large load is applied to the second means to stop it at the second position, and prevents damage to the second means.

Gaming machine KC4 is characterized in that the contact means in gaming machine KC3 is a surface that contacts the first means from the rotational direction and is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to the movement direction of the second means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KC3, gaming machine KC4 can distribute the load to the direction toward the specified axis and the direction of rotation of the first means when a load is applied to the first means in the direction of movement of the second means while the first means is in contact with an inclined surface. This can reduce the load received by the specified axis.

A gaming machine KC5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines KC1 to KC4, the second means is configured so that the second means is not moved by the continued rotational movement of the first means after the first means is rotated in a predetermined direction and the second means is moved from the first position to the second position.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KC1 to KC4, gaming machine KC5 makes it easier to avoid misalignment of the second means due to over-spinning of the first means.

Gaming machine KC6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines KC1 to KC5, when the second means starts to move from the second position to the first position, the direction of movement of the first means, which has already started to move, is configured to be a direction along the direction of movement of the second means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KC1 to KC5, gaming machine KC6 can shorten the time delay in the movement timing of the second means regardless of the movement direction of the first movement means, thereby improving the presentation effect of the second means.

A gaming machine KC7 is any one of the gaming machines KC1 to KC6, characterized by having a third means that can move in the direction of movement of the second means in proportion to the amount of rotation of the first means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KC1 to KC6, the gaming machine KC7 can move the third means while the first means is rotating before starting the movement of the second means, thereby improving the presentation effect of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine KC8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines KC3 to KC7, a limit value is set for the amount of rotation of the first means such that the third means does not move, and the amount of rotation from when the second means reaches the second position until the first means abuts against the abutment means is set to be equal to or less than the limit value.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KC3 to KC7, gaming machine KC8 can prevent the third means from being out of position due to over-rotation of the first means.

Amusement machine KC9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KC7 or KC8, it is configured to enable the first means to move back and forth within a range that does not move the second means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KC7 and KC8, gaming machine KC9 allows the third means to move with less resistance than when the second means moves.

A gaming machine KC10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KC9, the transmission of driving force to the first means is controlled so as to be stopped without waiting for the first means to move a predetermined amount.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KC9, gaming machine KC10 allows the first means, which moves due to the momentum of the driving force, to be stopped by the inertial resistance (static friction) of the second means, making it easier to avoid malfunction of the second means compared to when the driving force transmission continues to occur during the specified amount of movement of the first means.

<Place the light emitting means so that the way the light appears on the sphere is utilized for the production>
A gaming machine KD1 is provided with an entry area where a gaming ball can enter, a forming means capable of forming a state in which the gaming ball is directed toward the entry area, and a light irradiation means capable of irradiating light onto a predetermined irradiation range, and is configured to make the gaming ball flow down in a first flow-down pattern toward the entry area or a second flow-down pattern not toward the entry area, and is configured to make the visible state in the predetermined irradiation range when the gaming ball is flowing down in the first flow-down pattern different from the visible state in the predetermined irradiation range when the gaming ball is flowing down in the second flow-down pattern.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a light irradiation means located in a lower area upstream of a movable body that switches between a state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the ball entry area and a state in which it cannot be guided, to create a light-emitting effect (see, for example, JP 2016-120220 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the gaming ball flows down a slope formed above the light irradiation means, and the area illuminated by the light irradiation means is configured so that the gaming ball does not enter the area. Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down, the appearance of the light does not change and the gaming ball appears bright near the light irradiation means. However, since there is a slight distance between the movable body and the light irradiation means, it is difficult for the light to reach the movable body, and the area near the movable body appears dark. Therefore, when playing with normal attention, it is difficult to tell whether the gaming ball has entered the ball entry area.

This forces the player to look into the area around the moving object, which places a heavy burden on the player and may prevent the player from enjoying the game. In other words, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of increasing the player's interest.

In response to this, with the gaming machine KD1, the appearance of the light from the light application means can be made different depending on whether the gaming ball is flowing in a first flow manner toward the ball entry area, or in a second flow manner toward the ball entry area, so that by visually checking the light from the light application means, the player can know whether the gaming ball is heading toward the ball entry area. This can reduce the burden on the player while playing the game, and increase the player's interest.

A gaming machine KD2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KD1, the light irradiation means is disposed in a position where the light is not blocked by the gaming balls flowing down in the first flow down manner.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KD1, the gaming machine KD2 can maintain the presentation effect of the light from the light irradiation means even when the gaming ball continues to enter the ball entry area.

Gaming machine KD3 is characterized in that in gaming machine KD1 or KD2, the light irradiation means is positioned in a position where it illuminates the forming means with light.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KD1 and KD2, gaming machine KD3 makes it easier to avoid a decrease in visibility of the formation means.

A gaming machine KD4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KD3, a covering means is provided which is disposed in front of the forming means and covers the flow path of the gaming balls, and the shape drawn on the front side of the covering means is a shape that follows the shape of the forming means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KD1 to KD3, the gaming machine KD4 can improve the visibility of the concealing means by improving the visibility of the forming means. In other words, the shape drawn on the front side of the concealing means can be brightly illuminated by the light visible through the forming means, improving the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine KD4, the shape drawn on the concealing means is formed from a first visible portion that makes it easy to see the rear and a second visible portion that is less visible than the easily visible portion, the first visible portion is formed at least in front of the flow path of the gaming ball in the first flow-down mode, and the light traveling through the forming means passes through the first visible portion. In the gaming machine KD5,

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KD4, the gaming machine KD5 can improve attention to the gaming ball flowing down in the first flow-down manner, and improve rear visibility by brightening the first visual area.

A gaming machine KD6 is any one of the gaming machines KD1 to KD5, and is characterized in that it has a support means for supporting the forming means, and the support means has a reflecting portion formed so that the light reflected from the forming means can be reflected toward the front side.

Gaming machine KD6 can be configured to have the same effect as any of gaming machines KD1 to KD5, and also to allow the color of the forming means to be visible through the reflecting portion.

In the gaming machine KD6, the reflecting section is capable of reflecting the light reflected from the forming means toward the front side when the forming means is in a state where the gaming ball is directed toward the ball entry area, and is not capable of reflecting the light reflected from the forming means toward the front side when the forming means is not in a state where the gaming ball is directed toward the ball entry area. The gaming machine KD7 is characterized in that.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine KD6, the gaming machine KD7 associates the visual appearance of the reflecting portion with the state of the forming means. This allows the player to grasp the state of the forming means by visually checking the reflecting portion even when the change in the state of the forming means is difficult to discern, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

Gaming machine KD8 is characterized in that the reflecting portion is formed above the flow path of the gaming balls in gaming machine KD6 or KD7.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines KD6 and KD7, the gaming machine KD8 makes it easier to avoid situations where the reflecting part is hidden by the gaming machine flowing down the flow path.

Among the gaming machines KD3 to KD8, the concealing means is characterized by having a shape smaller than the forming means in a position that is visible against the background of the forming means. Gaming machine KD9.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KD3 to KD8, gaming machine KD9 can change the appearance of the fixed covering means by differentiating the visual appearance of the shape part with the forming means as the background from the visual appearance of the shape part without the forming means as the background.

Gaming machine KD10 is characterized in that the shaping portion is positioned upstream of the forming means in gaming machine KD9.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KD9, the gaming machine KD10 makes it possible to secure a longer time for a gaming ball seen by a player near the shaped portion to enter the ball entry area by positioning the part of the shape upstream of the forming means. This allows the player ample time to confirm that the ball has entered the ball entry area.

<The appearance of the displacement means behind the decorative panel varies depending on the placement>
The gaming machine KE1 comprises an entry area where a gaming ball can enter, a displacement means capable of displacing the gaming ball between a first position where the gaming ball is directed toward the entry area and a second position where the gaming ball is not directed toward the entry area, and a transmission means formed from a light-transmitting material and arranged to overlap at least a portion of the displacement means when viewed in a predetermined direction, wherein the transmission means is decorated with a predetermined decoration, and the overlapping area between the displacement means and the transmission means when viewed in the predetermined direction can change depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the decorative member covering the front side of the ball entry area is movable, and the appearance of the area around the ball entry area can be changed by moving the decorative member (see, for example, JP 2015-107293 A).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above require separate drive means and transmission mechanisms to operate the decorative components, which means that the area near the ball entry area is easily compressed by the drive means and transmission mechanisms, reducing the design freedom around the ball entry area.

In contrast, the gaming machine KE1 has a structure in which the displacement means is visible through the transparent means, and changing the position of the displacement means changes the area where the transparent means and the displacement means overlap, so that the specified decoration of the transparent means can be viewed in different forms even without operating the transparent means. This frees up space for the arrangement of the drive means and transmission mechanism, improving the design freedom around the ball entry area.

A gaming machine KE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KE1, when the displacement means is arranged at the first position, the displacement means is made the background of the specified decoration, making it easier to distinguish the specified decoration compared to when the displacement means is arranged at the second position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KE1, the gaming machine KE2 makes it easier to distinguish the specified decoration when the displacement means is placed in the first position, so that the state of the displacement means can be easily understood by focusing on the specified decoration. Furthermore, in an easily distinguishable state, the displacement means directs the gaming ball toward the ball entry area, further increasing the attention to the area near the ball entry area.

A gaming machine KE3, which is a gaming machine KE1 or KE2, is characterized in that the specified decoration has a shape related to the ball entry area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KE1 and KE2, gaming machine KE3 can easily guide attention from a specific decoration to the ball entry area.

A gaming machine KE4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines KE1 to KE3, the ball entry area is positioned in a position that is visible in a direction different from the specified direction, and in which the specified decoration does not overlap with the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KE1 to KE3, the gaming machine KE4 can reduce the gaming burden for players who find the changes in the visual appearance of certain decorations annoying.

The gaming machine KE5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KE1, when the displacement means is arranged in the first position, the displacement means is retracted from behind the specified decoration, making it easier to distinguish the specified decoration compared to when the displacement means is arranged in the second position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KE1, the gaming machine KE5 makes it easier to distinguish the specified decoration when the displacement means is placed in the first position, so that by focusing on the specified decoration, the state of the displacement means can be easily understood. Furthermore, by having the displacement means direct the gaming ball toward the ball entry area in an easily distinguishable state, it is possible to further increase attention to the area near the ball entry area.

A gaming machine KE6 is any one of the gaming machines KE1 to KE5, characterized in that it has multiple ball entry areas and multiple of the specified decorations are provided corresponding to each ball entry area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KE1 to KE5, the gaming machine KE6 visually displays a specific decoration, making it easier to understand where the gaming ball will be guided among multiple ball entry areas.

In the gaming machine KE6, the multiple predetermined decorations are formed in different sizes in the gaming machine KE7.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine KE6, the gaming machine KE7 can make it easier to determine the destination of the gaming ball by using a specified decoration. Also, the size relationship of the specified decorations is set according to the profit difference between multiple ball-entering areas, allowing the player to intuitively understand the profit that can be obtained.

In the gaming machine KE6 or KE7, the multiple predetermined decorations are arranged in such a way that one is placed inside the other. The gaming machine KE8.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines KE6 and KE7, the gaming machine KE8 can eliminate the need for the player to change his or her line of sight when drawing attention to multiple predetermined decorations. This can reduce the burden on the player while playing the game.

A gaming machine KE9 is one of the gaming machines KE1 to KE8, characterized in that the transmission means includes an alignment unit that aligns the position of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KE1 to KE8, the gaming machine KE9 can suppress misalignment between the displacement means and a specified decoration when the displacement means is in the first state by using the positioning unit.

A gaming machine KE10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KE9, the alignment section is disposed in a position different from the predetermined decoration.

The gaming machine KE10 can ensure the visibility of the specified decoration in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine KE9.

<A structure that combines multiple layers to create a series of decorations>
A gaming machine KF1 in which a first means can be arranged on a first layer and a second means can be arranged on a second layer that overlaps the first layer when viewed in a specified direction, wherein the second means and the first means can be displaced independently, and the first means and the second means, which are arranged in a specified area when viewed in the specified direction, can be viewed in a series of viewing patterns.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have first and second means formed in a shape that resembles the blades of scissors, and that are visually recognized in a series of visual patterns by the first and second means (see, for example, JP 2011-110255 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, because the first means and the second means are linked to each other, the operating speed is slow, and it takes a long time for the first means and the second means to change from a state in which they are arranged outside the liquid crystal display device to a state in which the first means and the second means are arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device and are viewed in a series of viewing modes, which can reduce the freedom of presentation. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in the presentation effects of the first means and the second means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine KF1, the first means is configured to be displaceable independently of the second means, so that the operating speed of the first means is not limited by the weight of the second means, the operation of the first means and the second means can be made faster, and the presentation effects of the first means and the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine KF2 is characterized in that the first means is configured to be able to switch between a movable state and a non-movable state having different visual patterns in the gaming machine KF1, and is visually recognized in the series of visual patterns in the non-movable state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KF1, the gaming machine KF2 can switch between a state in which the first means dynamically produces effects and a state in which the first means is stationary and focuses attention on a series of shapes.

In the gaming machine KF1 or KF2, the first means comprises an operating means and an operated means, and is configured so that the displacement of the operating means occurs in response to the state of the operated means. Gaming machine KF3.

In addition to the effects of either gaming machine KF1 or KF2, gaming machine KF3 can prevent the operating means and the operated means from colliding with each other as would occur if they operated independently.

A gaming machine KF4 is any one of the gaming machines KF1 to KF3, characterized in that the second means is made movable when the first means is made non-movable.

In the gaming machine KF4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines KF1 to KF3, the second means can also be changed independently of the first means, which increases the variety of action presentations.

A gaming machine KF5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines KF1 to KF4, the first means and the second means move from a state in which they are not visible in a series of visible modes to a state in which the first means and the second means move closer to each other and are visible in a series of visible modes.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KF1 to KF4, gaming machine KF5 can narrow the range that is visible in a series of viewing modes, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

A gaming machine KF6 is any of the gaming machines KF1 to KF5, characterized in that the first means or the second means can stop operating in the specified area and continue operating in areas other than the specified area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KF1 to KF5, the gaming machine KF6 can change the visual appearance of the first means or the second means by a continuous operation when not viewed in a series of visual appearances in a specified area, thereby improving attention to the appearance viewed in a series of visual appearances.

A gaming machine KF7 is any one of the gaming machines KF1 to KF6, characterized in that the second means is disposed in an area surrounded by the first means, and the light emission mode of the first means is changed in response to the light emission mode of the second means.

In addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines KF1 to KF6, the gaming machine KF7 can improve the presentation effect provided by the first and second means by matching the light emission mode.

A gaming machine KF8 is any one of the gaming machines KF1 to KF7, and is provided with a display device having a display area at a position that can overlap with the first means or the second means when viewed in the specified direction, and light from the display area is illuminated in an area corresponding to the first means or the second means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KF1 to KF7, the gaming machine KF8 can brightly illuminate the first means or the second means with light from the display area of the display device, improving the presentation effect.

A gaming machine KF9 is characterized in that in the gaming machine KF8, the state of the light from the display area can be changed when the first means or the second means is displacing and when the first means or the second means is not displacing.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine KF8, gaming machine KF9 can display the first means or the second means differently during displacement and non-displacement, so that it is possible to provide variation in the way the first means or the second means is displayed between a state in which it is displayed in a series of viewing patterns and other states.

A gaming machine KF10, which is a gaming machine KF8 or KF9, is characterized in that a display corresponding to the visual mode of the first means or the second means is displayed in the display area.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines KF8 and KF9, the gaming machine KF10 can be viewed in a manner that combines the display in the display area with the decoration of the first or second means itself when the first or second means is made of a transparent material.

In addition, even if a malfunction occurs in the first or second means, the display in the display area can be replaced by the first or second means, minimizing the deterioration of the presentation effect.

A gaming machine KF11 is any one of the gaming machines KF8 to KF10, characterized in that the display by the display device is linked to the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine KF11, the entire display area of the display device on the layer where the first means or the second means is not arranged can be used to allow the player to view the target linked to the first means or the second means. This makes it possible to expand the area on which the player focuses their attention.

A gaming machine KF12 is any one of the gaming machines KF8 to KF11, and is provided with a first visible range in which the display by the display device is visible, and a second visible range in which the display is visible in a manner different from the first visible range, and is characterized in that the second visible range is formed in a layer in front of the first visible range.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KF8 to KF11, the gaming machine KF12 can display the first visible range and the second visible range in a viewing manner that relates to the front-to-back arrangement, thereby realizing a three-dimensional or layered effect.

Gaming machine KF13 is characterized in that it is equipped with a gap prevention means for narrowing the gap between the first visible range and the second visible range in the gaming machine KF12.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KF12, gaming machine KF13 makes it easier to view the viewing pattern in the first viewing range and the viewing pattern in the second viewing range in a series of viewing patterns.

A gaming machine KF14 is any one of the gaming machines KF8 to KF13, and is characterized by having a light-emitting means that is displaced in response to the displacement of the first means or the second means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KF8 to KF13, gaming machine KF14 makes it easier to avoid time delays in the light effects due to displacement of the first or second means.

A gaming machine KF15 is one of the gaming machines KF8 to KF14, characterized in that the visual appearance in the first layer can change in response to the state in the second layer based on voltage control.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines KF8 to KF14, the gaming machine KF15 can change the visual appearance of the first means in response to the state of the second means in the second layer.

A gaming machine KF16 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KF15, it is possible to configure a blocking range that blocks a specified light and a non-blocking range that does not block the specified light in accordance with the state of the second layer.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KF15, the gaming machine KF16 can change the visibility of the overlapping second layer and first layer by changing the light transmission pattern from the back depending on the state of the second layer.

<Placing the circuit board behind the base plate>
A gaming machine KG1 is provided with a gaming board having a gaming area formed on the front side, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light onto the gaming board, the light irradiation means being positioned in a position where light can enter the gaming board in a direction intersecting the thickness direction of the gaming board.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a light-emitting board is provided on the rear side of the gaming board, and light is emitted from light-emitting means, such as LEDs, provided on the light-emitting board toward the front side, brightly illuminating the gaming board and light-transmitting members attached to the gaming board (see, for example, JP 2006-333887 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, in order to brightly illuminate a wide area of the game board and the light-transmitting members attached to the game board with a limited light-emitting means, the light-emitting board needs to be placed at a certain distance from the game board, and therefore it is necessary to secure space for this on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, if a movable device for performance purposes is placed between the light-emitting board and the game board, the shadow of the movable device will be cast on the game board or the light-transmitting members attached to the game board, making it dark. From this perspective, there are conflicting issues: it is desirable to move the light-emitting means closer to the game board to create space for the movable device. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the placement of the light-emitting means.

In contrast, with gaming machine KG1, the light from the light irradiation means is positioned so that it can enter the gaming board in a direction that intersects with the thickness direction of the gaming board, and the light irradiation range can be expanded inside the thickness width of the gaming board, and the area illuminated by the light can be increased, making the gaming board brightly visible, and since there is no need to position the light irradiation means far away from the rear of the gaming board, sufficient space can be secured on the rear side of the gaming board for arranging movable parts. In other words, the positioning of the light irradiation means can be improved.

Gaming machine KG2 is characterized in that the light irradiation means is disposed behind the gaming board in gaming machine KG1.

In addition to the effects of game machine KG1, game machine KG2 can arrange the light irradiation means so that it is hidden by the game board, improving its appearance.

Gaming machine KG3 is characterized in that the gaming board of gaming machine KG1 or KG2 has a recessed portion recessed on the back side outside the range where the playing area is formed, and the light irradiation means is disposed in the space formed by the recessed portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KG1 and KG2, gaming machine KG3 can fit the light irradiation means within the thickness dimension of the gaming board, making it easier to secure space on the back side of the gaming board.

Gaming machine KG4 is one of the gaming machines KG1 to KG3, characterized in that the gaming board has a changeable portion on the rear side for directing the light from the light irradiation means to the front side.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KG1 to KG3, gaming machine KG4 makes it easy to design how the light appears when viewed from the front by arranging the changeable parts.

Gaming machine KG5 is characterized in that the gaming board in the gaming machine KG4 has a embossed finish formed on the change portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KG4, gaming machine KG5 can diffuse light in the change area, reducing the number of light emitting units such as LEDs that are used to brighten and visually recognize the change area.

Gaming machine KG6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine KG4 or KG5, the change portion is formed at multiple positions where the light emitted from the light irradiation means along a predetermined optical axis can reach.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KG4 and KG5, gaming machine KG6 can expand the range in which the changed part is brightly visible by the light emitted from a specific optical axis.

Amusement machine KG7 is any of the amusement machines KG4 to KG6, characterized in that the change portion is formed circumferentially around the edge of the opening on the inside of the gaming board.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KG4 to KG6, gaming machine KG7 can illuminate the edge of the opening on the inside of the gaming board in a roughly circular pattern. This makes it easier to guide the viewer's gaze to the display device located inside the opening.

Gaming machine KG8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine KG7, the change portion is configured so that the opening is larger at the rear end of the edge than at the front end of the edge of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KG7, gaming machine KG8 allows a center frame to be positioned on the gaming board based on the front edge of the opening, and the center frame can be brightly illuminated by light passing through the change portion.

Among any of the gaming machines KG1 to KG8, gaming machine KG9 is characterized in that the light that enters the gaming board from the light irradiating means travels within the thickness dimension of the gaming board until the light is directed toward the front side.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KG1 to KG8, gaming machine KG9 can avoid the light being blocked by the balls flowing down the playing area, unlike the case where the light travels through the playing area before being directed toward the front.

Gaming machine KG10 is characterized in that the light entering the gaming board from the light irradiation means is configured to be able to pass through the path of a gaming ball that has entered a ball entry area disposed in the gaming area.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine KG9, gaming machine KG10 can associate the blocking of light entering from the light irradiation means with the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry area, thereby improving attention to the light irradiated from the light irradiation means.

<Rotational operation means capable of changing the visual recognition state of the visual recognition part>
A gaming machine KKH1 is characterized in that it is provided with an operating means having a predetermined visual portion whose visual appearance can be changed, and the predetermined visual portion can be rotated and moved.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with operating means that can produce movements that enhance the presentation effect (see, for example, JP 2007-98027 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the operating means that is linked to the fluctuation of the symbols only opens and closes in front of the display device fixed to the center of the gaming machine. In this case, while the display device attracts more attention, it is difficult to get the player to follow the operating means with their eyes. In other words, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of the operating means.

In contrast, with the gaming machine KKH1, the specified visual part can rotate, so when the rotational movement of the operating means continues around a specified point, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved in order to confirm the change in the visual appearance of the specified visual part. In that case, it is only necessary to keep a certain range from the rotation center in the field of view, so the gaming burden on the player trying to confirm the change in the visual appearance of the specified visual part can be reduced.

Gaming machine KKH2 is characterized in that in gaming machine KKH1, the operating means changes the viewing pattern through the specified viewing portion as it rotates.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KKH1, the gaming machine KKH2 can limit the timing for drawing attention to the change in the visual appearance of the specified visual area to the time when the operating means is rotating, thereby reducing the burden on the player compared to a case where it is not known when the change in the visual appearance of the specified visual area will occur.

Gaming machine KKH3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine KKH1 or KKH2, the visual appearance of the predetermined visual portion can be changed at least between a first position and a second position located on either side of the rotation axis of the operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KKH1 and KKH2, gaming machine KKH3 can increase the difficulty of checking the change in the visual appearance of the specified visual area compared to when the visual appearance of the specified visual area changes in only one location, thereby further improving the player's ability to focus on the operating means.

Gaming machine KKH4 is characterized in that in gaming machine KKH3, the profit that the player can obtain can change when a change occurs in the viewing pattern of the specified viewing part at the first position and when a change occurs in the viewing pattern of the specified viewing part at the second position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KKH3, gaming machine KKH4 can increase the player's interest in changes in the visual appearance of a specific visual area, and can increase the player's attention to the operating means.

A gaming machine KKH5 is any one of the gaming machines KKH1 to KKH4, characterized in that the visual state of the predetermined visual portion may change in a first visual state or in a second visual state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KKH1 to KKH4, the gaming machine KKH5 can increase the player's interest in how a specific visual pattern changes, and can increase the player's ability to focus on the operating means.

<Performance that links the ball flow and rotational motion means>
In any one of the gaming machines KKH1 to KKH5, the gaming machine KH1 is configured to be visible to a player and is provided with an operating means that can be moved in response to the flow of a gaming ball.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with operating means that can produce movements that enhance the presentation effect (see, for example, JP 2007-98027 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the operation of the operating means is merely performed in response to the fluctuation of the symbols, and it is difficult to obtain information about the actual flow of the gaming ball from the operating mode. Therefore, when the player's eyes are focused on the operating means, it is not possible to grasp the flow of the gaming ball, making it difficult to adjust the launch strength of the gaming ball in real time while watching the feeling of the flow of the gaming ball.

In this case, it is difficult to continue firing game balls while visually checking the long reach on the liquid crystal display device, which is likely to increase the burden on players who want to play with the reserved special symbols fully filled, and may reduce interest. Thus, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is room for improvement in the operating means.

In response to this, with the gaming machine KH1, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines KKH1 to KKH5, the player can visually recognize the movement of the operating means, thereby allowing the player to understand the flow of the gaming ball. This allows the operating means to be improved.

A gaming machine KH2 is characterized in that the operating means is operated when a predetermined condition based on the flow of a gaming ball is satisfied in the gaming machine KH1.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KH1, the gaming machine KH2 makes it easier for the player to predict the flow pattern of the gaming ball from the movement of the operating means, compared to a case where the operating means moves as long as the gaming ball flows down into the game area.

A gaming machine KH3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a support means in which the operating means is supported in a movable state and configured to be displaceable around one side end as a fulcrum, and a restricting means capable of configuring an allowable state that allows the displacement of the support means and a restricting state that restricts the displacement of the support means, in the gaming machine KH1 or KH2.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines KH1 and KH2, the gaming machine KH3 can vary the arrangement of the operating means in accordance with the arrangement of the support means, making it easier to grasp the state of the flow pattern.

Gaming machine KH4 is characterized in that the predetermined condition can be met when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes through a predetermined portion in gaming machine KH2 or KH3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KH2 or KH3, gaming machine KH4 allows the player to visually confirm the movement of the operating means and thus understand that the gaming ball has passed through a specified area.

The predetermined portion may take various forms. For example, it may be a prize ball opening that detects the flow of a game ball and pays out a predetermined prize ball, it may be an opening where no prize balls are paid out but some kind of lottery is held, it may be a detection sensor that simply detects the flow of a game ball without paying out any prize balls or holding any kind of lottery, or it may be a collision target of an operating member that is operated by the transmission of energy from a game ball.

A gaming machine KH4 is characterized in that when a gaming ball passes a first predetermined portion above the operating means to the right, the operating means is not moved, whereas when a gaming ball flows down to the left of the first predetermined portion, the operating means can be moved. A gaming machine KH5.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KH4, the gaming machine KH5 allows the player to visually confirm the operating means and to grasp whether the gaming ball is flowing down the left or right side based on the operating means. This makes it easier for a player who thinks he is playing a right-handed game to notice that the gaming ball is flowing down the left side, for example.

A gaming machine KH4 is characterized in that when a gaming ball passes to the right of a second predetermined portion above the operating means, the operating means is moved to the right, and when a gaming ball flows down to the left of the second predetermined portion, the operating means is moved to the left. A gaming machine KH6.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine KH4, gaming machine KH6 makes it easier for players who see the operating means to intuitively understand the flow of the gaming balls, since the direction of movement of the operating means corresponds to the direction in which the gaming balls flow down.

Gaming machine KH7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine KH6, when the gaming ball passes to the right through a third predetermined portion located above the second predetermined portion, the operating means is not moved.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine KH6, gaming machine KH7 makes it easier for a player who sees that the operating means is not moving to understand that the gaming ball is flowing away from the operating means, since the distance from the operating means corresponds to the presence or absence of the operating means.

Gaming machine KH8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines KH4 to KH7, when the gaming ball passes through the specified part while the operating means is moving based on the gaming ball passing through the specified part, the speed at which the operating means moves is changed.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KH4 to KH7, gaming machine KH8 can have the movement of the operating means reflect the flow of the gaming ball, which has randomness in frequency and direction, so that the operating means can execute highly random effects. Furthermore, a player who visually recognizes a change in the speed at which the operating means moves can be made to understand that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area again, making it easier for the player to understand the flow pattern of the gaming ball (the degree of variation in the flow pattern).

Among the gaming machines KH3 to KH8, the support means supports the operating means in a state in which it can move, regardless of whether the restricting means is in the permissive state or the restricted state. Among the gaming machines KH9, the support means supports the operating means in a state in which it can move, regardless of whether the restricting means is in the permissive state or the restricted state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KH3 to KH8, gaming machine KH9 can increase the number of states in which the operating means can produce the effect of improving appearance, compared to when the operating means can only move in either a state in which the support means is displaced or a state in which the displacement of the support means is restricted.

Among the gaming machines KH3 to KH9, the gaming machine KH10 is characterized in that the change of the regulating means from the permissive state to the regulated state occurs in conjunction with the displacement of the support means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KH3 to KH9, the gaming machine KH10 makes it easier to avoid malfunctions (e.g., interference due to mismatched operation timing) compared to when the regulating means and the supporting means each operate on their own independent basis, since the state of the regulating means changes in conjunction with the displacement of the supporting means.

Among any of the gaming machines KH3 to KH9, gaming machine KH11 is characterized in that when the regulating means is in the permissible state, the supporting means is configured to be able to be maintained in the up or down position where the supporting means is located in the regulating state of the regulating means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KH3 to KH9, gaming machine KH11 can start the displacement of the support means from the permissible state of the regulating means and the displacement of the support means from the regulating state of the regulating means from the same vertical position, so that the height position that draws the player's attention can be unified, and the burden on the player during play can be reduced.

Gaming machine KH12 is any one of gaming machines KH3 to KH11, characterized in that the operating means is displaced based on the displacement of the support means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KH3 to KH11, the gaming machine KH12 can generate a movement due to a displacement based on the displacement of the support means in addition to a movement corresponding to the flow of the gaming ball, thereby increasing the variety of visual patterns of the operating means.

Among any of the gaming machines KH3 to KH12, the gaming machine KH13 is characterized in that the displacement with the one side end of the support means as a fulcrum occurs when the operating means is positioned closer to the one side end than the center position of the support means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KH3 to KH12, the gaming machine KH13 has an operating means disposed on the side of the support means where the displacement is smaller, so that the impact (load) received by the operating means can be reduced when an impact occurs, such as when the support means is suddenly stopped.

<Points for forming decorations on the front side of the ball flow area>
A gaming machine KI1 is provided with a light-transmitting section having a predetermined thickness and arranged on the front side of a predetermined flow-down area through which gaming balls flow, the light-transmitting section comprising a first transmittance section having a first light transmittance and a second transmittance section that transmits light at a higher transmittance than the first transmittance section, and a portion of a gaming ball that overlaps with the first transmittance section when viewed from the front is configured to overlap with the second transmittance section.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, form patterns on the gaming board (see, for example, JP 2011-83381 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the pattern may be hidden by the game balls flowing down, hindering the presentation effect. However, simply forming a pattern on the front side of the play area may result in the game balls being hidden by the pattern, causing the game balls to be lost. This poses the problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the presentation effect without causing the game balls to be lost.

In response to this, the gaming machine KI1 is configured so that when the gaming ball overlaps with the first transmittance section, it also overlaps with the second transmittance section. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the gaming ball by avoiding a situation where the gaming ball is completely covered by the first transmittance section, while improving the presentation effect by changing the visibility state depending on whether the gaming ball flows down the back side of the light transmitting section or not.

Gaming machine KI2 is characterized in that in gaming machine KI1, the first transmittance section constitutes at least a part of a specified symbol.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KI1, the gaming machine KI2 can make the player recognize some meaning based on a specific symbol regardless of whether the gaming ball flows down in the flow area, thereby improving the presentation.

Gaming machine KI3 is characterized in that in gaming machine KI2, the first transmittance section forms at least a part of the outline of the specified symbol.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KI2, the gaming machine KI3 can make it easier to identify specific symbols.

In any one of the gaming machines KI1 to KI3, the gaming machine KI4 is characterized in that at least one of the dimensions of the first transmittance section in the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward or the dimension in the direction intersecting the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward is shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KI1 to KI3, the gaming machine KI4 can improve the design freedom of the first transmittance section, and can improve the presentation effect by increasing the variety of patterns that can be configured.

In the gaming machine KI4, when the first transmittance portion forms at least a part of the outline of the specified symbol, the width of the outline is less than the radius of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine KI4, the gaming machine KI5 can prevent the gaming ball from being completely hidden by the outlines even when the outlines of multiple predetermined symbols are close to each other.

In other words, if multiple contours are arranged without gaps, the game ball can be seen outside the multiple contours, but if a gap occurs between the multiple contours, the game ball can be seen through the gap.

A gaming machine KI6 is any of the gaming machines KI1 to KI5, characterized in that the flow direction of the gaming ball in the specified flow area has a horizontal component.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KI1 to KI5, the gaming machine KI6 can slow down the flow speed of the gaming ball in a specified flow area compared to a free-falling gaming ball, so that the period during which the gaming ball is visible through the light-transmitting portion can be extended. This makes it easier to maintain the state in which the appearance of the pattern formed by the first transmittance portion and the second transmittance portion changes for a long period of time.

Among any of the gaming machines KI1 to KI6, the predetermined flow area is characterized in that the gaming machine KI7 has a first flow area and a second flow area that causes the gaming balls to flow down in a direction different from that of the first flow area.

According to the gaming machine KI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines KI1 to KI6, the direction in which the gaming ball overlaps with the light-transmitting portion is displaced when the gaming ball is flowing down the first flow-down area is different from the direction in which the gaming ball overlaps with the light-transmitting portion is displaced when the gaming ball is flowing down the second flow-down area. This makes it possible to generate multiple types of displacement directions of the influence of the gaming ball on the pattern visible on the light-transmitting portion (multiple types of visible modes of the light-transmitting portion can be configured when the pattern is dynamically changing), thereby improving the presentation effect of the light-transmitting portion.

A gaming machine KI8 is any one of the gaming machines KI1 to KI7, characterized in that it has a component part inside the outline formed by the first transmittance part, the component part being formed with a transmittance lower than that of the first transmittance part.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KI1 to KI7, the gaming machine KI8 has components that are arranged to relatively improve the visibility of the light seen through the first transmittance section, thereby improving the distinguishability of the components.

A gaming machine KI9 is any one of the gaming machines KI1 to KI8, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a light irradiation device that irradiates light toward the front of the light-transmitting section, and is configured to be able to change the pattern that is visible due to the light irradiated from the light irradiation device that has passed through the light-transmitting section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KI1 to KI8, the gaming machine KI9 is configured to change the pattern that is visible due to the light emitted from the light irradiation device that passes through the light-transmitting section, thereby improving the presentation effect of the light-transmitting section.

A gaming machine KI10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine KI9, a gaming ball may flow down while casting a shadow on the second transmittance section due to the light emitted from the light irradiation device.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine KI9, the gaming machine KI10 can deepen the shadow of the gaming ball projected on the second transmittance section by irradiating light from the light irradiation device, making it easier for the player to avoid losing sight of the gaming ball.

A gaming machine KI11 is any one of the gaming machines KI1 to KI10, and is provided with an auxiliary section disposed in a predetermined range that does not overlap with the predetermined flow-down area when viewed from the front, and the pattern formed by the auxiliary section can be viewed in a continuous visual manner with the pattern formed by the first transmittance section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KI1 to KI10, the gaming machine KI11 can improve the presentation effect by using the first transmittance section and the auxiliary section that can be seen in a series of viewing modes, and can maintain high visibility of the auxiliary section regardless of the flow of the gaming ball.

<Points of providing an irradiation means for irradiating light to the displacement means>
A gaming machine KJ1 characterized by comprising an opening/closing member capable of opening and closing a specified area, an illumination means capable of irradiating light that can illuminate an area on a specified surface side of the opening/closing member, and a displacement means capable of displacing the specified surface side.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with an opening and closing member (see, for example, JP 2007-98027 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the visible state of the opening and closing member can change when light is irradiated from a display device on the rear side onto the opening and closing member in the closed state, but there is no other member that displaces the front side of the opening and closing member, and there is little variation in the visible state of the opening and closing member, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the visible state of the opening and closing member.

In response to this, gaming machine KJ1 is provided with a displacement means that can be displaced on a specific surface side of a specific opening/closing member onto which light is irradiated from the irradiation means. This allows for configuration of a state in which the displacement means is visible overlapping the opening/closing member and a state in which the displacement means is visible without overlapping the opening/closing member, thereby increasing the variety of visible patterns of the opening/closing member and improving the visible patterns of the opening/closing member.

Gaming machine KJ2 is characterized in that in gaming machine KJ1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in a direction along a predetermined straight line.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KJ1, gaming machine KJ2 makes it easier to predict the displacement of the displacement means, thereby reducing the burden on the player who sees the displacement means.

Amusement machine KJ3 is characterized in that the displacement means and the opening and closing member can be linked in amusement machine KJ1 or KJ2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines KJ1 and KJ2, gaming machine KJ3 allows the player to visually recognize the displacement of the opening/closing member and the displacement of the displacement means as being related to each other rather than being independent, thereby improving the visibility of the opening/closing member.

A gaming machine KJ4 is any one of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ3, characterized in that the visual appearance of the light irradiated from the irradiation means is changed based on the opening and closing movement of the opening and closing member.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ3, gaming machine KJ4 can create a state in which the player can easily notice the opening and closing movement of the opening and closing member by associating the opening and closing movement of the opening and closing member with a change in the visual appearance of the light emitted from the illumination means.

A gaming machine KJ5 is any one of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ4, characterized in that the visual appearance of the light emitted from the illumination means is changed based on the change in the direction of displacement of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ4, gaming machine KJ5 can create a state in which the player can easily notice the change in the direction of the displacement of the displacement means by associating the change in the visibility of the light emitted from the illumination means with the change in the direction of the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine KJ6 is any one of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ5, and is characterized by having a resistance generating means that generates resistance against a load in a direction that changes the opening/closing member from a closed state to an open state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ5, gaming machine KJ6 makes it easier to maintain the opening/closing member in a closed state even if an unexpected load is applied to the opening/closing member, making it easier to avoid unexpected changes in the visibility of the opening/closing member.

A gaming machine KJ7 is characterized in that it is provided with a switching means capable of configuring a first state in which the displacement means can pass through a predetermined position in a predetermined direction, and a second state in which the displacement means cannot pass through the predetermined position in the predetermined direction, in any of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ6.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ6, gaming machine KJ7 allows the player to predict the displacement of the displacement means by visually checking the state of the switching means. This can increase the player's ability to focus on the switching means.

A gaming machine KJ8 is characterized in that in the gaming machine KJ7, the state change of the switching means occurs before the displacement means passing in the specified direction arrives.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KJ7, gaming machine KJ8 allows the player to grasp the change in state of the switching means before the displacement means reaches a predetermined position, thereby increasing the attention to the switching means for a long period of time.

A gaming machine KJ9 is any one of the gaming machines KJ1 to KJ8, and is characterized by having a direction change means for changing the direction of displacement of the displacement means from a first direction to a second direction intersecting the first direction.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines KJ1 to KJ8, gaming machine KJ9 can shift the direction of displacement of the displacement means using a direction changing means, thereby increasing the variety of visual patterns of the displacement means compared to when the direction of displacement of the displacement means is constant.

Gaming machine KJ10 is characterized in that in gaming machine KJ9, the direction change means is arranged on both sides of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KJ9, gaming machine KJ10 allows the direction change means to act on the displacement means from both sides, thereby allowing the direction of displacement of the displacement means to be changed in multiple ways by the direction change means.

Gaming machine KJ11 is characterized in that the direction change means arranged on both sides of the gaming machine KJ10 act alternately on the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine KJ10, gaming machine KJ11 shifts the timing at which the direction change means acts on the displacement means, making it possible for the direction change of the displacement of the displacement means by the direction change means to occur with high frequency.

<Concept of the invention using the first communication passage H300C of the upper decorative unit H14a as an example>
Gaming machine XA1 is provided with a first sound output means and a second sound output means configured to be able to output sound, a first arrangement space in which the first sound output means is arranged, and a second arrangement space in which the second sound output means is arranged, and is characterized in that it has a communication space formed to enable communication between the first arrangement space and the second arrangement space.

Gaming machines equipped with multiple sound output means capable of outputting sounds are known (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine left room for improvement in terms of how the audio was output.

In other words, in a gaming machine equipped with a first sound output means and a second sound output means that are arranged at a specified distance to the left and right of the player, if either the first sound output means or the second sound output means breaks down, sound will only be output from one of them and not from the other, which may give the player a strange feeling.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can improve the sound output.

The gaming machine XA1 can improve the sound output.

In other words, since a communication space is provided that allows communication between the first and second installation spaces, the sound output from the first sound output means (second sound output means) can be guided to the second installation space (first installation space) via the communication space. Therefore, for example, in the event of a malfunction of the second sound output means, sound can be output from the second installation space in addition to the first installation space. As a result, the sense of discomfort felt by the player can be reduced.

In the gaming machine XA1, the first installation space and the second installation space each include one or more first openings formed on a front side of the gaming machine,
The communication space is formed to be capable of communicating between the first arrangement space and the second arrangement space at a position closer to the first opening than the first sound output means and the second sound output means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA1, gaming machine XA2 can improve the manner in which sound is output.

In other words, the communication space is formed to be able to communicate between the first and second installation spaces at a position closer to the openings of the first and second installation spaces than the first and second sound output means, so that sound (frequency band) that is easy for the player to hear can be easily guided from the first or second installation space to the second or first installation space via the communication space. Therefore, for example, in the event of a malfunction of the second sound output means, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced.

Gaming machine XA3 is characterized in that the communication space in gaming machine XA2 has one or more second openings.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA2, gaming machine XA3 can improve the manner in which audio is output.

That is, since the communication space has one or more second openings, sound can also be output from the second openings. As a result, the dramatic effect of sound can be enhanced.

Gaming machine XA4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a liquid crystal display means in the gaming machine XA3, and the second opening is formed at least one of a position between the first sound output means and the liquid crystal display means, or a position between the second sound output means and the liquid crystal display means, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA3, gaming machine XA4 can improve the sound output.

In other words, the second opening is formed at least in one of a position between the first sound output means and the liquid crystal display means, or a position between the second sound output means and the liquid crystal display means, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to associate the sound output from the second opening with the presentation provided by the display on the liquid crystal display device. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine XA5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines XA1 to XA4, it is provided with a partitioning means for partitioning each of the first arrangement space and the second arrangement space into a front side arrangement space that is closer to the first opening than the first sound output means and the second sound output means, and a rear side arrangement space that is closer to the first opening than the first sound output means and the second sound output means.

The gaming machine XA5 can improve the sound output in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines XA1 to XA4.

In other words, the first and second installation spaces are each provided with a partitioning means for partitioning the first and second installation spaces into a front installation space that is closer to the first opening than the first and second audio output means, and a rear installation space that is closer to the opposite side of the first opening than the first and second audio output means, thereby preventing the relatively high-frequency sound in the front installation space and the relatively low-frequency sound in the rear installation space from overlapping and cancelling out the latter sound.

Gaming machine XA6 is any one of gaming machines XA1 to XA5, and is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and the displacement means is configured to be capable of partitioning at least a portion of the communication space.

The gaming machine XA6 can improve the sound output in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines XA1 to XA5.

That is, since the device is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable and the displacement means is configured to be able to partition at least a portion of the communication space, the shape of the communication space can be changed by the displacement of the displacement means. This makes it possible to change the manner in which the sound output from the first sound output means (second sound output means) is guided to the second arrangement space (first arrangement space) through the communication space according to the displacement of the displacement means. In other words, the manner in which the sound is output from the second arrangement space (first arrangement space) can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement means. As a result, the presentation effect by the sound can be enhanced.

Gaming machine XA7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XA6, the communication space has one or more second openings, and the size of one or more of the second openings is configured to be changeable by the displacement of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA6, gaming machine XA7 can improve the sound output.

In other words, the communication space has one or more second openings, and the size of the one or more second openings is configured to be changeable by the displacement of the displacement means, so that the size of the second opening can be changed by the displacement of the displacement means. This makes it possible to change the form of the sound output from the second opening according to the displacement of the displacement means. As a result, the dramatic effect of the sound can be enhanced.

Gaming machine XA8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XA7, when the displacement means is displaced to a predetermined position, the communication space is opened.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA7, gaming machine XA8 can improve the sound output.

In other words, when the displacement means is displaced to a predetermined position, the communication space is opened, so the output direction of the sound guided from the first arrangement space or the second arrangement space to the communication space can be widened. In other words, the directivity (sound emission angle) can be reduced. As a result, the sound production effect can be improved.

Note that opening the communication space means that the size (opening area) of the second opening is at least three times the minimum size (minimum opening area).

Gaming machine XA9 is any one of gaming machines XA6 to XA8, and is characterized in that it has an operating means configured to be operable by a player, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable when the operating means is operated.

The gaming machine XA9 can improve the sound output in addition to providing the effects of any of the gaming machines XA6 to XA8.

In other words, because the displacement means is configured to be displaceable when the operating means is operated, the timing at which the form of the output sound is changed can be correlated with the operation of the operating means. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

<Concept of the invention using the protrusion H583 of the upper and lower tray unit H15 as an example>
Gaming machine XB1 is provided with a front door means formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is characterized in that it is provided with a protrusion means formed so as to be able to protrude from a face on one longitudinal side of the front door means, and the protrusion position of the protrusion means is located on the front side or rear side of the front door means rather than the center of the short side of the face on one longitudinal side of the front door means.

Amusement machines equipped with a front door means that is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front are known (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, there was room for improvement regarding the front door means in the gaming machine described above.

In other words, during the manufacturing process in a factory or during installation and inspection work in a hall, one longitudinal side (upper or lower) of the front door means is placed on the floor to temporarily allow it to stand on its own (temporarily placed); however, in a configuration in which the entire longitudinal side of the front door means is a flat surface, if the floor surface is uneven, the unevenness can affect the posture of the front door means and cause it to fall over.

In addition, placing the front (player side) or back of the front door means on the floor is not only prohibited because it may damage or scratch the glass or decorative means (components) on the front side or the electrical components on the back side, but also requires a lot of space to place it on. Therefore, during the manufacturing process at the factory and during installation and inspection work in the hall, one longitudinal side (upper or lower) of the front door means is placed on the floor to minimize the space required for placement.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine with an improved front door means.

The gaming machine XB1 allows for an improved front door means.

That is, a protruding means is provided that is formed so as to be protruding from one longitudinal surface of the front door means, and the protruding position of the protruding means is on the front or back side of the front door means rather than the center in the short direction of the longitudinal surface of the front door means, so that the outer edge of the back or front side of the longitudinal surface of the front door means and the protruding means come into contact with the floor surface, allowing the front door means to stand on its own. This makes it less susceptible to the effects of unevenness on the floor surface compared to a configuration in which the entire longitudinal surface of the front door means is a flat surface, and the posture of the front door means when standing on its own can be stabilized. This makes it less likely for the front door means to tip over.

A gaming machine XB2 is characterized in that the protruding position of the protruding means in the gaming machine XB1 is located on the front side of the front door means rather than the center of the short side of the surface on one side of the longitudinal direction of the front door means.

Gaming machine XB2 provides the same effects as gaming machine XB1, and also improves the front door means.

In other words, the center of gravity of the front door means is biased toward the front side, and the protruding position of the protruding means is closer to the front side of the front door means than the center of the short side of the face on one side of the longitudinal direction of the front door means, so that the bias of the center of gravity when the front door means is freestanding can be suppressed. This stabilizes the posture of the front door means when it is freestanding, making it difficult for the front door means to tip over.

Gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that the protruding position of the protruding means in gaming machine XB2 is a position spaced apart from the outer edge of the front side of the front door means on one longitudinal side surface of the front door means.

Gaming machine XB3 provides the same effects as gaming machine XB2, but also improves the front door means.

In other words, the protruding position of the protruding means is a position spaced apart from the outer edge of the front side of the front door means on one longitudinal surface of the front door means, so that when an operator lifts the front door means when it is standing on its own, the operator can insert a finger between the longitudinal surface of the front door means and the floor surface and hook the finger on the part of the front door means that is closer to the front side than the protruding means. Also, compared to when the protruding position of the protruding means is a position that contacts the outer edge of the front side of the front door means on one longitudinal surface of the front door means (i.e., a position that is not spaced apart from the outer edge), the protruding height of the protruding means can be made lower and the protruding position of the protruding means can be made less visible to players.

A gaming machine XB2 is characterized in that, in a front view of the front door means, the width dimension of the protruding means is smaller than the width dimension of the front door means in the gaming machine XB1.

Gaming machine XB2 provides the same effects as gaming machine XB1, and also improves the front door means.

In other words, when viewed from the front of the front door means, the width of the protruding means is smaller than the width of the front door means, so the area of the protruding means that comes into contact with the floor surface is reduced, making it less susceptible to unevenness on the floor surface. This stabilizes the posture of the front door means when it is standing on its own, making it less likely to tip over.

A gaming machine XB5 is any one of gaming machines XB1 to XB4, and is provided with a storage means capable of storing gaming balls, an inlet means for allowing the gaming balls to flow into the storage means, and an outlet means for allowing the gaming balls stored in the storage means to flow out from one longitudinal side surface of the front door means, and is characterized in that at least a portion of the protruding means is positioned on the opposite side of the inlet means with respect to the outlet means when viewed from the front of the front door means.

Gaming machine XB5 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines XB1 to XB4, and also improves the front door means.

In other words, at least a portion of the protruding means is positioned on the opposite side of the inlet means with respect to the outlet means when viewed from the front of the front door means, so that the game balls in the storage means can come into contact with the protruding means when they are discharged from the outlet means. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from scattering.

In the gaming machine XB5, the protruding position of the protruding means is on the front side of the front door means rather than the center of the short side of the longitudinal side of the face of one side of the front door means, and the protruding means is formed in a shape formed by connecting multiple curved parts having a curved shape with a concave back side of the front door means when viewed from the front of the longitudinal side of the face of one side of the front door means. In the gaming machine XB6, the protruding means is formed in a shape formed by connecting multiple curved parts having a concave back side of the front door means when viewed from the front of the longitudinal side of the face of one side of the front door means.

Gaming machine XB6 provides the same effects as gaming machine XB5, and also improves the front door means.

In other words, the protruding means is formed in a shape that connects multiple curved sections with a concave back side of the front door means when viewed from the front on one longitudinal side of the front door means, making it easy to place fingers on the protruding means (concave curved sections). Also, the rebound direction of game balls that flow out from the outlet means and abut against the protruding means can be dispersed. This makes it possible to prevent game balls that flow out from the outlet means into the box from concentrating in one place (predetermined place) in the box.

Amusement machine XB7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XB6, it is provided with a rib that connects one longitudinal side surface of the front door means to the side surface of the protruding means.

Gaming machine XB7 provides the same effects as gaming machine XB6, and also improves the front door means.

In other words, a rib is provided that connects one longitudinal surface of the front door means to the side surface of the protruding means, ensuring the strength of the protruding means and preventing damage to the protruding means.

Gaming machine XB8 is characterized in that the rib is located on the concave side of the curved portions in the gaming machine XB7, at the portion where the curved portions are connected to each other.

Gaming machine XB8 provides the same benefits as gaming machine XB7, plus an improved front door means.

In other words, the rib is located on the concave side of the curved portion, at the location where the curved portions are connected, and the rib prevents fingers from slipping when placed on the protruding means (concave portion of the curved portion).

Among any of the gaming machines XB1 to XB8, gaming machine XB9 is characterized in that the protruding height of the protruding means from the longitudinal side surface of the front door means is configured to be changeable.

Gaming machine XB9 provides the same effects as any of gaming machines XB1 to XB8, plus an improved front door means.

In other words, the protruding height of the protruding means from one longitudinal side surface of the front door means is configured to be changeable, so that when protruding of the protruding means is not required, the protruding height of the protruding means can be lowered. This prevents the protruding means from interfering with play or deteriorating the appearance of the gaming machine.

The configuration for changing the protruding height of the protruding means may be a configuration in which the change is performed by operation by a player or an operator, or a structure in which the change is performed by the driving force of a driving means (actuator such as a motor). The configuration in which the change is performed by operation by a player, etc. may be a configuration in which the player, etc. directly operates the protruding means, or a configuration in which when the player, etc. operates an operating means other than the protruding means, the operation (displacement) of the operating means is directly or indirectly transmitted to the protruding means, changing the protruding height of the protruding means.

The timing at which the protruding height of the protruding means is changed may be arbitrary, and the configuration may be such that when a specified game state occurs, the protruding height of the protruding means can be changed automatically (i.e., regardless of the player's operation) by control.

A gaming machine XB10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XB9, it is configured to be able to create a state in which the protruding means does not protrude from one longitudinal side surface of the front door means.

Gaming machine XB10 provides the same effects as gaming machine XB9, but also improves the front door means.

In other words, the protruding means is configured to be able to form a state in which it does not protrude from one longitudinal side surface of the front door means, which more reliably prevents the protruding means from interfering with play or marring the appearance of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine XB11 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means configured to be operable by a player in the gaming machine XB9 or XB10, and is configured such that the protruding height of the protruding means can be changed when the operating means is operated.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XB9 and XB10, gaming machine XB11 can improve the front door means.

In other words, the protruding height of the protruding means is configured to be changeable when the operating means is operated, so the protruding height of the protruding means can be changed at any time.

For example, if the protruding height of the protruding means can be changed in conjunction with the operation of the operating means (ball removal lever) for opening and closing the outlet means (ball removal hole), the protruding height of the protruding means may be set to a first height when the operating means (ball removal lever) is not operated and the outlet means (ball removal hole) is closed, and the protruding height of the protruding means may be changed to a second height different from the first height when the operating means (ball removal lever) is operated and the outlet means (ball removal hole) is open. This allows the appropriate setting of a height suitable for allowing the front door means to stand on its own (a height at which the center of gravity can be positioned in an appropriate position) and a height suitable for allowing game balls to flow out of the outlet means (a height at which game balls can be easily bounced back, a height at which the coin box can be easily inserted and removed). Either the first height or the second height may be the larger dimension.

In addition, a detection means (sensor) that detects the operation of the operating means, a drive means (actuator) that generates a drive force, and a transmission means (gears, links, etc.) that transmits the drive force of the drive means to the protruding means may be provided, and when the operation of the operating means is detected by the detection means, the drive means is driven and the drive force is transmitted to the protruding means by the transmission means, thereby changing the protruding height of the protruding means.

<Concept of the invention using the connecting part H555 of the upper and lower tray unit H15 as an example>
Gaming machine XC1 is provided with an operating means operable by a player, the gaming machine comprising: a first means, a second means positioned at a distance between the first means, and a protruding means protruding from the second means and positioned between the first means and the second means, wherein at least a part of the operating means is positioned between the first means and the second means, the operating means is disposed on the first means, the operating means can be operated by the player in at least a first direction, and the protruding means is configured to be able to come into contact with a portion of the operating means on the first direction side.

Gaming machines equipped with operating means that can be operated by a player are known (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine left room for improvement in terms of the structure that supports the operating means.

In other words, the operating means operated by the player is subject to external forces during operation, which creates the problem that the operating means or the means supporting the operating means are prone to damage.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can improve the structure that supports the operating means.

The gaming machine XC1 allows for an improved structure for supporting the operating means.

That is, the game includes a first means, a second means positioned at a distance from the first means, and a protruding means protruding from the second means and positioned between the first means and the second means, at least a part of the operating means is positioned between the first means and the second means, the operating means is disposed on the first means, the player can operate the operating means at least in the first direction, and the protruding means is configured to be able to abut against a portion of the operating means on the first direction side, so that when an external force in the first direction acting in conjunction with the operation of the operating means is within a predetermined range, the operating means can be supported by the protruding means. This stabilizes the position of the operating means so that it does not wobble, and improves the feel of the operating means. On the other hand, when the external force in the first direction exceeds the predetermined range, the protruding means can be elastically deformed to release the external force (distributing the external force to the first means and the second means). This can prevent damage to the operating means and the means supporting the operating means (the first means and the second means, the protruding means).

The protruding means is configured to be able to come into contact with a portion of the operating means on the first direction side, and since the protruding means and the operating means are not fixed (they are capable of relative displacement), the protruding means is not constrained and can slide relative to the operating means. This ensures the elastic deformation of the protruding means, making it easier to release external forces in the first direction.

Gaming machine XC2 is characterized in that the second means is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine XC1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XC1, gaming machine XC2 can improve the structure that supports the operating means.

In other words, when the external force in the first direction exceeds a predetermined range, on the second means side, mainly the protruding means undergoes elastic deformation, whereas on the first means side, the first means is also likely to undergo elastic deformation due to the displacement of the operating means in the first direction accompanying the elastic deformation of the protruding means. In this way, the elastic deformation of the second means is suppressed more than the elastic deformation of the first means, so by arranging the second means on the front side of the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance of the gaming machine when the operating means is operated (for example, the second means is displaced and a gap is formed at the boundary between the second means and other means (members)).

Gaming machine XC3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XC1 or XC2, it is provided with a second protruding means that protrudes from the first means and is positioned at a predetermined distance from the portion of the protruding means on the first direction side, and the portion of the protruding means on the first direction side is configured to be able to abut against the second protruding means.

The gaming machine XC3 can improve the structure supporting the operating means in addition to providing the same effects as the gaming machines XC1 and XC2.

That is, the device is provided with a second protruding means that protrudes from the first means and is positioned at a predetermined distance from the portion of the protruding means on the first direction side, and the portion of the protruding means on the first direction side is configured to be able to abut against the second protruding means. Therefore, when an external force in the first direction exceeds a predetermined range and elastically deforms the protruding means, in the initial stage (while a distance is formed between the portion of the protruding means on the first direction side and the second protruding means), the second protruding means does not hinder the elastic deformation of the protruding means, and the elastic deformability of the protruding means can be ensured. On the other hand, when a larger external force is input in the first direction, the portion of the protruding means on the first direction side can be brought into abutment with the second protruding means to suppress the elastic deformation of the protruding means. This makes it possible to suppress damage to not only the operating means and the means supporting the operating means (the first means and the second means, the protruding means), but also the protruding means.

The second protruding means is configured to be able to come into contact with a portion of the protruding means on the first direction side, and since the protruding means and the second protruding means are not fixed (relatively displaceable), the protruding means is not constrained and can slide relative to the second protruding means. This ensures elastic deformation of the protruding means and the second protruding means. This makes it possible to prevent a sudden increase in the reaction force acting between the protruding means and the second protruding means when the protruding means comes into contact with the second protruding means, and thus prevents damage to the protruding means and the second protruding means.

Gaming machine XC4 is characterized in that in gaming machine XC3, the protruding means includes a positioning means, and the second protruding means includes a positioned means that is positioned at a predetermined position by the positioning means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XC3, gaming machine XC4 can improve the structure that supports the operating means.

In other words, the protruding means includes a positioning means, and the second protruding means includes a positioned means that is positioned at a predetermined position by the positioning means, so that in the operation of assembling one of the first means and the second means to the other, the first means and the second means can be positioned by the positioning means and the positioned means. This makes it easier to perform fastening operations using screws, for example, and makes the assembly operation more efficient.

Gaming machine XC5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XC3 or XC4, the protruding means includes an engaging means, the second protruding means includes an engaged means configured to be able to engage with the engaging means, and when the engaging means and the engaged means are engaged, the protruding means and the second protruding means are configured to be able to displace relative to each other.

The gaming machine XC5 achieves the same effects as the gaming machines XC3 and XC4, and also improves the structure that supports the operating means.

In other words, the protruding means includes an engaging means, and the second protruding means includes an engaged means configured to be engaged with the engaging means, so that in assembling one of the first means and the second means to the other, the first means and the second means can be temporarily fixed by the engagement between the engaging means and the engaged means. This makes it easier to perform fastening work using screws, for example, and makes the assembly work more efficient.

In this case, when the engaging means and the engaged means are engaged, the protruding means and the second protruding means are configured to be relatively displaceable, so that the protruding means and the second protruding means are not constrained and the elastic deformation of the protruding means and the second protruding means can be ensured. This makes it easier to release the external force in the first direction, and also suppresses a sudden increase in the reaction force acting between the protruding means and the second protruding means, thereby suppressing damage to the protruding means and the second protruding means.

Gaming machine XC6 is characterized in that in gaming machine XC5, the engaging means and the engaged means are configured to be engageable so as to restrict the first means or the second means from being displaced in a direction in which the opposing distance between the first means and the second means increases.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XC5, gaming machine XC6 can improve the structure that supports the operating means.

In other words, the engaging means and the engaged means are configured to be engageable so as to restrict the first means or the second means from being displaced in a direction that increases the distance between the first means and the second means, thereby preventing fraudulent displacement of the first means or the second means in a direction that increases the distance between them (for example, fraudulent displacement of the first means or the second means in the above direction to form a gap and insert a foreign object through the gap).

In addition, since the protruding means protrudes from the second means and the operating means is disposed on the first means, i.e., the protruding means and the first means are not fixed, and the operating means and the second means are not fixed, the first means or the second means is easily displaced in a direction that increases the distance between them. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine XC6 is particularly effective.

Gaming machine XC7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XC5 or XC6, the protruding means includes a positioning means, the second protruding means includes a positioned means that is positioned at a predetermined position by the positioning means, and the engaging means and the engaged means are configured to be engageable with each other when the positioned part is positioned by the positioning part.

The gaming machine XC7 provides the same effects as the gaming machines XC5 and XC6, and also improves the structure that supports the operating means.

In other words, the engaging means and the engaged means are configured to be engageable with the positioned portion positioned by the positioning portion, so that the engaging means and the engaged means can be easily engaged.

Gaming machine XC8 is any one of gaming machines XC5 to XC6, characterized in that the engaged means is located on the first direction side of the engaging means.

The gaming machine XC8 achieves the same effects as any of the gaming machines XC5 to XC6, and also improves the structure that supports the operating means.

In other words, since the engaged means is located on the first direction side of the engaging means, it is easy to maintain the engagement between the engaging means and the engaged means when the protruding means is elastically deformed in the first direction due to an external force in the first direction acting in conjunction with the operation of the operating means. Therefore, by displacing the operating means in the first direction and elastically deforming the protruding means, it is possible to prevent fraudulent disengagement of the engaging means and the engaged means.

The protruding means is configured to be able to come into contact with a portion of the operating means on the first direction side, and is not fixed to the operating means. Therefore, even if the operating means is displaced in the direction opposite to the first direction, the protruding means is not displaced (elastically deformed). Therefore, even if the operating means is displaced in the direction opposite to the first direction, the engagement between the engaging means and the engaged means is not affected, and such engagement is maintained.

Gaming machine XC9 is characterized in that in gaming machine XC8, the base end of the protruding means on the second means side is located on the first direction side of the engaging means and the engaged means.

Gaming machine XC9 achieves the same effects as gaming machine XC8, and also improves the structure that supports the operating means.

That is, since the base end of the protruding means on the second means side is located on the first direction side of the engaging means and the engaged means, the direction of displacement of the engaging means when the protruding means is elastically deformed by an external force in the first direction can be set to a direction in which the distance between the engaged means and the engaged means increases. This makes it possible to reduce the distance between the engaging means and the engaged means in the initial stage (before the protruding means is elastically deformed), thereby preventing the first means or the second means from being displaced in a direction that increases the opposing distance between them (for example, a gap is formed by the displacement of the first means or the second means in the above direction, and a foreign object is inserted through the gap), while preventing the engaging means and the engaged means from interfering with each other (engaging) when the protruding means is elastically deformed by an external force in the first direction, thereby preventing the relative displacement of the protruding means with respect to the second protruding means (elastic deformation of the protruding means) from being restricted (hindered).

<Concept of the invention using the bent portion H452 of the right side decorative unit H14c as an example>
A gaming machine XD1 has a first means and a second means arranged adjacent to the first means, characterized in that the gaming machine XD1 further comprises an arrangement means located below the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means in the direction of gravity and arranged on the first means.

There is known a gaming machine that includes a first means and a second means that is disposed adjacent to the first means (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there was room for improvement in the structure in which the first means and the second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, in a structure in which the first means and the second means are disposed adjacent to each other, there is a risk that a gap will be formed at the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the first means and the second means. There is also a risk that a gap will be formed due to an external force acting on one or both of the first means and the second means. When a gap is formed, there is a risk that foreign matter (e.g., wires used to commit fraud, dust, dirt, liquids, etc.) will enter through the gap and adversely affect the internal mechanical and electrical configurations. In particular, liquids (e.g., liquids that players drink while playing) are likely to enter through even the smallest of gaps and adversely affect electrical equipment.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can improve the structure in which the first means and the second means are arranged next to each other.

The gaming machine XD1 can improve the structure in which the first means and the second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, since the device is provided with a mounting means disposed on the first means, located below the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means in the direction of gravity, if a gap is formed at the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means, foreign matter that enters through the gap can be received by the mounting means. This makes it possible to prevent adverse effects on the mechanical and electrical configurations caused by foreign matter that enters through the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means.

In the gaming machine XD1, the placement means comprises a lower means located below the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means in the direction of gravity, and an extension means connected to the lower means and extending in a direction away from the boundary. The gaming machine XD2 is characterized by the above.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XD1, gaming machine XD2 can improve the structure in which the first means and second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, the arrangement means includes a lower means located below the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means in the direction of gravity, and an extension means connected to the lower means and extending in a direction away from the boundary, so that if a gap is formed at the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means, any foreign matter that enters through the gap can be received by the lower means of the arrangement means, and the received foreign matter can be guided by the extension means to a position where it is less likely to have an adverse effect on the mechanical or electrical configuration. This makes it possible to prevent foreign matter that enters through the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means from adversely affecting the mechanical or electrical configuration.

Gaming machine XD3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XD2, a passage means is formed between the extension portion of the arrangement means and the first means, allowing passage in a direction away from the boundary.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XD2, gaming machine XD3 can improve the structure in which the first means and second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, a passage means is formed between the extension portion of the arrangement means and the first means, allowing passage in a direction away from the boundary, so that when a foreign object is guided by the extension means, the passage means can determine the direction of passage, making it easier for the foreign object to reach the desired position. This makes it possible to prevent foreign objects that have entered through the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

Gaming machine XD4 is characterized in that the first means in gaming machine XD3 is provided with a communication means formed to enable communication between the passage means and the outside.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XD3, gaming machine XD4 can improve the structure in which the first means and second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, the first means is formed with a communication means that is formed to allow communication between the passage means and the outside, so that foreign matter guided by the extension means can be discharged from the communication means to the outside of the first means. This makes it possible to prevent foreign matter that has entered through the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

A gaming machine XD5 is characterized in that it is provided with a light-emitting means formed to be capable of emitting light in any one of the gaming machines XD1 to XD4, and the arrangement means is made of a light-guiding material and is positioned so as to be able to receive the light emitted from the light-emitting means.

The gaming machine XD5 can improve the structure in which the first means and the second means are arranged next to each other in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines XD1 to XD4.

That is, since the device is provided with a light-emitting means that is formed to be able to emit light, and the arrangement means is made of a light-guiding material and is positioned so that it can receive the light emitted from the light-emitting means, when a gap is formed at the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means, the gap can be illuminated with light that is emitted from the light-emitting means and guided (transmitted) through the arrangement means. As a result, when a gap is formed at the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means, light leaks out from the gap, making it easier for the hall staff to recognize that a gap has been formed.

In addition, the heat generated by the light emitted by the light emitting means and the disposing means evaporates the liquid received by the light emitting means (lower means) and allows it to be discharged to the outside through the gap at the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means. This makes it possible to prevent foreign matter that has entered through the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

Gaming machine XD6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XD4, it is provided with flow means formed to be able to flow air, and the flow means is formed to be able to flow the air in the passage means in a direction away from the boundary.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XD4, gaming machine XD6 can improve the structure in which the first means and second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, the device is provided with flow means that is capable of moving air, and the flow means is configured to move the air in the passage means in a direction away from the boundary, making it easier to expel foreign matter guided by the extension means from the communication means to the outside of the first means. This makes it possible to prevent foreign matter that has entered through the boundary between the edge of the first means and the edge of the second means from adversely affecting the mechanical and electrical configurations.

The gaming machine XD7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XD4, it is provided with a protruding means that protrudes from the first means or the extending means, and an inserting means formed on the extending means or the first means into which the protruding means can be inserted, and when the protruding means is inserted into the inserting means, the protruding means is located below the communication means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XD4, gaming machine XD7 can improve the structure in which the first means and second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, since the device is provided with a protruding means that protrudes from the first means or the extending means, and an inserted means that is formed on the extending means or the first means so that the protruding means can be inserted therein, when the disposing means is disposed (assembled) on the first means, the two can be positioned by inserting the protruding means into the inserted means. This facilitates the disposing (assembling) work of the disposing means on the first means.

In this case, when the protruding means is inserted into the receiving means, the protruding means is positioned below the communicating means, so that the foreign object guided by the extending means can be received by the protruding means and the received foreign object can be guided by the protruding means toward the communicating means. In other words, the protruding means can be used not only as a means for positioning, but also as a means for discharging the foreign object to the outside of the first means.

Gaming machine XD8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XD7, the protruding means protrudes from the extending means, and the inserted means is formed in the first means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XD7, gaming machine XD8 can improve the structure in which the first means and second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, since the protruding means protrudes from the extending means and the inserted means is formed on the first means, foreign matter received by the protruding means can be reliably discharged to the outside of the first means. In other words, when the inserted means is formed on the extending means, if a gap is formed between the inserted means and the protruding means, there is a risk that the foreign matter received by the protruding means will pass through the gap between the inserted means and the protruding means and remain inside the first means. In contrast, by forming the inserted means on the first means, even if the foreign matter received by the protruding means passes through the gap between the inserted means and the protruding means, such foreign matter can be discharged to the outside of the first means.

Gaming machine XD9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XD8, a part of the communication means is the insertion means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XD8, gaming machine XD9 can improve the structure in which the first means and second means are arranged next to each other.

In other words, since a part of the communication means is the insertion means, the communication means can be used not only as a means for discharging foreign matter to the outside of the first means, but also as a means for positioning.

<Concept of the invention using the recess H821a1 of the ball launching unit H112a as an example>
The gaming machine XE1 is provided with a ball throwing means configured to be capable of throwing a gaming ball, and a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball throwing means, and is characterized in that it is provided with a suppression means configured to be able to suppress a reaction force in the contact direction acting on a gaming ball that has come into contact with the inner surface of the flow path means.

There is a known gaming machine equipped with a ball-throwing means configured to be able to throw a gaming ball, and a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball-throwing means (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine left room for improvement in terms of throwing the gaming ball.

In other words, when a game ball is thrown by the ball throwing means, there is variation in the initial position of the game ball (relative position to the ball throwing means), so the game ball is not thrown straight along the flow path means and may collide (contact) with the inner surface of the flow path means (the inner surface to the side of the rolling surface along which the game ball rolls). In this way, when the game ball collides (contacts) with the inner surface of the flow path means, the reaction force received from the inner surface causes the game ball to go wild, and its trajectory is unstable, which is a problem.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the throwing of gaming balls.

The XE1 gaming machine can improve the throwing of gaming balls.

In other words, since the device is equipped with a suppression means configured to suppress the reaction force acting in the direction of contact on the game ball that has come into contact with the inner surface of the flow path means, when the game ball collides (comes into contact with) the inner surface of the flow path means (the inner surface to the side of the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls), the game ball can be prevented from going wild due to the reaction force received from the inner surface, and the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine XE1, the suppression means is configured as a recess recessed into at least a portion of the inner surface of the flow passage means. The gaming machine XE2.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE1, the gaming machine XE2 can improve the throwing of the gaming ball.

In other words, since the suppression means is configured as a recess that is recessed into at least a portion of the inner surface of the flow path means, when the game ball collides (contacts) the recess, the reaction force received from the inner surface can be formed as a component in the direction in which the game ball contacts and a component in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball contacts (a direction in which the game ball is pressed against the rolling surface or a direction in which the game ball is lifted up from the rolling surface). This makes it possible to reduce the component in the direction in which the game ball contacts by the component in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball contacts, so that it is possible to suppress the game ball from becoming uncontrollable due to the reaction force received from the inner surface, and to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball.

In addition, compared to when the suppression means is configured as a protrusion protruding from at least a portion of the inner surface of the flow path means, the unit including the flow path means can be made smaller.

In the gaming machine XE2, the recess is recessed in at least a portion of the inner surface on one side of the flow path means and in at least a portion of the inner surface on the other side of the flow path means. The gaming machine XE3.

The XE3 gaming machine can improve ball throwing in addition to the effects of the XE2 gaming machine.

In other words, the recesses are recessed into at least a portion of the inner surface on one side of the flow path means and at least a portion of the inner surface on the other side of the flow path means, so that even if the game ball collides (comes into contact with) one side or the other of the inner surfaces of the flow path means (the inner surface to the side of the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls), the reaction force received from the inner surface can be prevented from causing the game ball to go wild, and the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine XE3, the recess on the inner surface on one side of the flow passage means and the recess on the inner surface on the other side of the flow passage means are positioned differently in the direction in which the gaming ball is sent.

The gaming machine XE4 can improve the throwing of gaming balls in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE3.

In other words, the recess on the inner surface of one side of the flow passage means and the recess on the inner surface of the other side of the flow passage means are positioned differently in the direction in which the game ball is thrown, which increases the degree of freedom in design. For example, by changing the position of the recess on the other side, other means (e.g., inflow means) can be placed in the space freed up.

Among the gaming machines XE2 to XE4, gaming machine XE5 is characterized in that it is provided with a passage means configured to allow gaming balls heading toward the flow path means to pass through, and that the gaming balls that pass through the passage means and flow into the flow path means are configured to be able to abut against the recess.

The XE5 gaming machine provides the same effects as the XE2 to XE4 gaming machines, but also improves ball throwing.

In other words, the device is provided with a passage opening means through which the game ball heading toward the flow path means can pass, and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening means and flowed into the flow path means can abut against the recess, so that the movement of the game ball on the flow path means can be converged early by utilizing the recess. This suppresses variation in the game ball's posture, allowing the ball to be sent stably by the ball sending means. As a result, the game ball's wildness can be suppressed, and the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized.

Gaming machine XE6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XE5, at least the lower edge of the recess is located below the passage opening means.

The XE6 gaming machine can improve ball throwing in addition to the effects of the XE5 gaming machine.

In other words, at least the lower edge of the recess is located below the passage opening means, so that the game ball that passes through the passage opening means and flows into the flow path means can be reliably brought into contact with the recess.

Gaming machine XE7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XE5, at least the upper edge of the recess is located above the passage opening means.

The XE7 gaming machine can improve ball throwing in addition to the effects of the XE5 gaming machine.

In other words, at least the upper edge of the recess is located above the passage opening means, so even if the game ball that has passed through the passage opening means and flowed into the flow path means has momentum and moves violently in the flow path means, the game ball can be reliably brought into contact with the recess.

Among the gaming machines XE2 to XE7, gaming machine XE8 is characterized by having a guide means configured to guide the gaming ball sent by the ball sending means in a direction in which it cannot come into contact with the recess.

The gaming machine XE8 can improve the throwing of the gaming ball in addition to providing the same effects as any of the gaming machines XE2 to XE7.

In other words, since the game ball is provided with a guide means configured to guide the game ball sent by the ball sending means in a direction in which it cannot come into contact with the recess, it is possible to create a mode in which the game ball is sent by the ball sending means without using the recess. In other words, the game ball can be sent in a mode in which it moves wildly and its trajectory becomes unstable. This can increase the excitement of the game.

In the gaming machine XE8, the guide means can be configured to guide the gaming ball sent by the ball sending means in a direction in which it cannot come into contact with the recess, and to guide the gaming ball sent by the ball sending means in a direction in which it can come into contact with the recess. The gaming machine XE9 is characterized in that it can be configured to guide the gaming ball sent by the ball sending means in a direction in which it can come into contact with the recess.

The XE9 gaming machine can improve ball throwing in addition to the effects of the XE8 gaming machine.

In other words, the guide means can be configured to guide the game ball thrown by the throwing means in a direction where it cannot come into contact with the recess, and to guide the game ball thrown by the throwing means in a direction where it can come into contact with the recess, so it is possible to create a mode in which the game ball is thrown by the throwing means without using the recess, and a mode in which the game ball is thrown by the throwing means using the recess.In other words, it is possible to create a mode in which the game ball is thrown wildly and its trajectory is unstable, and a mode in which the game ball's wildness is suppressed and its trajectory is stabilized.This can increase the interest of the game.

<Concept of the invention using the rocking device H730 of the operation unit H180 as an example>
A gaming machine XF1 is provided with a light emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light and a transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting incident light, characterized in that the transmission means is configured to be displaceable relative to the light emitting means.

There is a known gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting means configured to emit light and a transmission means configured to transmit the incident light (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, the gaming machine described above had room for improvement in terms of how the light was perceived.

In other words, some devices obtain a dramatic effect by disposing a transmission means in front of the light-emitting means, making the light emitted from the light-emitting means enter the transmission means, and allowing the player to see the light that passes through the transmission means. In this case, some devices change the manner in which the light is emitted by the light-emitting means (for example, the light emission intensity or the blinking interval, etc.) to change the manner in which the light is seen, but the dramatic effect is insufficient. Some devices integrate the light-emitting means and the transmission means (unitize them) and displace the unit composed of the light-emitting means and the transmission means, allowing the movement of light that accompanies the displacement of the unit to be seen, but because the relationship between the light-emitting means and the transmission means is constant, the manner in which the light is seen through the transmission means (the manner in which the light is incident from the light-emitting means to the transmission means and passes through the transmission means) is itself uniform, and the dramatic effect is insufficient.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can improve the appearance of the visible light.

The gaming machine XF1 can improve the appearance of the visible light.

In other words, because the transmitting means is configured to be displaceable relative to the light emitting means, the relationship between the light emitting means and the transmitting means can be changed. This makes it possible to change the manner in which light is incident on the transmitting means from the light emitting means, and the manner in which light passes through the transmitting means (the manner in which light is perceived by the player). As a result, the manner in which light is perceived through the transmitting means can be changed, enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine XF2 is characterized in that it includes a base means in the gaming machine XF1, the light emitting means is fixed to the base means, and the transmission means is displaceably disposed on the base means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XF1, gaming machine XF2 can improve the appearance of the visible light.

In other words, since the device is provided with a base means, the light emitting means is fixed to the base means, and the transparent means is disposed on the base means so as to be displaceable, it is possible to change the manner in which light is incident from the light emitting means to the transparent means and the manner in which light is transmitted through the transparent means, thereby changing the manner in which light is viewed through the transparent means. It is also possible to displace the transparent means and visually view the displacement of the transparent means, regardless of the state of the light emitting means (light emitting state, non-light emitting state).

In addition, since the light emitting means is fixed to the base means, damage (e.g., breakage) of the light emitting means due to displacement (vibration) can be suppressed.

Gaming machine XF3 is characterized in that the transmission means in gaming machine XF1 or FX2 is configured to be able to diffuse light.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XF1 and XF2, gaming machine XF3 can improve the appearance of the visible light.

In other words, since the transmitting means is configured to be able to diffuse light, the relative displacement of the transmitting means with respect to the light emitting means can be utilized to increase the change in the state of the light passing through the transmitting means (the state of the light as viewed by the player). As a result, the state of the light as viewed through the transmitting means can be changed, enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine XF4 is characterized in that it is provided with a driving means arranged in the transmission means and configured to generate a driving force in the gaming machine XF2 or XF3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XF2 and XF3, gaming machine XF4 can improve the visual appearance of the light.

In other words, since the driving means is disposed on the transmission means and is configured to be capable of generating a driving force, the driving force of the driving means can be used to easily generate a displacement of the transmission means (a relative displacement of the transmission means with respect to the light-emitting means), and the displacement of the transmission means (a relative displacement of the transmission means with respect to the light-emitting means) can be started or stopped at a desired timing by switching the driving state of the driving means.

In addition, by disposing the driving means on the transmitting means, the driving force of the driving means can be easily transmitted to the transmitting means, and the displacement of the transmitting means (relative displacement of the transmitting means with respect to the light emitting means) can be easily formed. Note that the driving means may be disposed on the light emitting means so that the driving force of the driving means is indirectly transmitted to the transmitting means. Even in this case, the driving force of the driving means can be used to form the displacement of the transmitting means (relative displacement of the transmitting means with respect to the light emitting means).

A gaming machine XF5 is any one of the gaming machines XF2 to XF4, and is characterized in that it has a contact means that is displaceable and configured to be able to contact the transmission means, and the transmission means is displaceable in accordance with the displacement of the contact means that is in contact with the transmission means.

Gaming machine XF5 can improve the visual appearance of the light in addition to providing the effects of any of gaming machines XF2 to XF4.

In other words, since the transmitting means can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the contact means that is in contact with the transmitting means, the displacement of the transmitting means (relative displacement of the transmitting means with respect to the light emitting means) can be linked to the displacement of the contact means, enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, when a driving means is provided, the displacement of the transmitting means (relative displacement of the transmitting means with respect to the light emitting means) can be formed in a manner of displacement in conjunction with the contact means in addition to the manner of displacement due to the driving force of the driving means, thereby increasing the variety of the displacement manner.

Among the gaming machines XF2 to XF5, gaming machine XF6 is characterized in that it is provided with a contact means that is displaceable and configured to be able to contact the transparent means, and the displacement of the transparent means can be regulated by the contact of the contact means with the transparent means.

Gaming machine XF6 can improve the visual appearance of the light in addition to providing the effects of any of gaming machines XF2 to XF5.

In other words, the displacement of the transmission means can be regulated by the contact of the contact means with the transmission means, so that the displacement of the transmission means (the relative displacement of the transmission means with respect to the light emitting means) can be stopped at the desired timing by contacting the contact means with the transmission means.

The gaming machine XF7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XF5, it is provided with an operating means configured to be operable by a player, and the displacement of the transmission means in conjunction with the displacement of the abutment means can be configured by operating the operating means.

Gaming machine XF7 can improve the visual appearance of the light in addition to the effects of gaming machine XF5.

In other words, because the displacement of the transmitting means in accordance with the displacement of the abutting means can be configured by operating the operating means, the displacement of the transmitting means (relative displacement of the transmitting means with respect to the light emitting means) can be formed in the manner desired by the player (for example, the timing of the displacement, the displacement speed, etc.). In other words, by linking the manner of the light that is perceived (displacement of the transmitting means) with the operation of the player, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine XF7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XF5, it is provided with an operating means configured to be operable by a player, and the operation of the operating means makes it possible to regulate the displacement of the transmission means caused by the abutment of the abutment means.

Gaming machine XF7 can improve the visual appearance of the light in addition to the effects of gaming machine XF5.

In other words, because the restriction of the displacement of the transmitting means due to the contact of the contact means can be configured by operating the operating means, the restriction (stop) of the displacement of the transmitting means (relative displacement of the transmitting means with respect to the light-emitting means) can be formed at a timing desired by the player. In other words, by linking the restriction (stop) of the displacement of the transmitting means with the player's operation, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines XF2 to XF8, the transmission means comprises a first means displaceably disposed on the base means, and a second means displaceably disposed on the first means, and at least the second means is configured to transmit incident light. Gaming machine XF9.

Gaming machine XF9 can improve the visual appearance of the light in addition to providing the effects of any of gaming machines XF2 to XF8.

In other words, the transmission means comprises a first means displaceably disposed on the base means, and a second means displaceably disposed on the second means, and at least the second means is configured to transmit incident light, so that the manner of displacement of the second means (relative displacement of the second means with respect to the light emitting means) can be prevented from becoming uniform, and the change in the manner of light transmitted through the second means (the manner of light visually perceived by the player) can be made greater. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine XF9, the transmission means is configured so that the displacement of the first means relative to the base means and the displacement of the second means relative to the first means can be displaced in different ways. Gaming machine XF10.

Gaming machine XF10 can improve the visual appearance of the light in addition to the effects of gaming machine XF9.

In other words, the transmission means is configured so that the first means can be displaced relative to the base means and the second means can be displaced relative to the first means in different ways, so that the different displacement modes of the first means and second means can be combined to displace the second means in a variety of ways. As a result, the changes in the mode of light passing through the second means (the mode of light visually perceived by the player) can be varied, enhancing the presentation effect.

The gaming machine XF10 is characterized in that it is equipped with a regulating means configured to allow relative displacement of the second means with respect to the first means when an external force of a predetermined magnitude or more is applied, and to regulate the relative position of the second means with respect to the first means to a predetermined position at least when no external force is applied.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XF10, gaming machine XF11 can improve the appearance of the visible light.

In other words, since the device is provided with a regulating means configured to allow relative displacement of the second means with respect to the first means when an external force of a predetermined level or greater is applied, the first and second means are displaced together when an external force of a predetermined level or less is applied, while the second means can be displaced relative to the first means when an external force of a predetermined level or greater is applied, and the second means can be displaced in a variety of ways.

In this case, the regulating means is configured to be able to regulating the relative position of the second means with respect to the first means to a predetermined position at least when no external force is acting, so that when the action of the external force ends and the relative position of the second means with respect to the first means is a position different from the predetermined position, the relative position of the second means can be regulated to the predetermined position by the regulating means (the second means can be displaced to the predetermined position). In other words, even after the action of the external force ends, at least the second means can be displaced. This allows the second means to be displaced in a variety of ways, and the change in the mode of light passing through the second means (the mode of light visually perceived by the player) can be varied. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Gaming machine XF12 is characterized in that the regulating means in gaming machine XF11 is made of an elastic material and is elastically deformable.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XF11, gaming machine XF12 can improve the appearance of the visible light.

In other words, since the regulating means is made of an elastic material and is elastically deformable, elastic deformation of a magnitude corresponding to (proportional to) the magnitude of the external force is induced in the regulating means, and this elastic deformation can be used to form a relative displacement of the second means with respect to the first means with a magnitude corresponding to (proportional to) the magnitude of the external force. For example, compared to the case where gravity or magnetic force is used, it is possible to suppress abrupt relative displacement of the second means with respect to the first means.

<Concept of the invention using the first decorative unit G420 and the second decorative unit G480 as examples>
Gaming machine XG1 is provided with a first means and a second means, and at least the second means is configured to be displaceable, characterized in that the second means is configured to be displaceable so that a state in which a predetermined area of the second means faces outward when viewed from the front of the first means and a state in which the predetermined area of the second means faces the front side can be formed.

A gaming machine is known that has a first means and a second means, and at least the second means is configured to be displaceable (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, there was room for improvement in the first and second means of the gaming machine described above.

In other words, by displacing the second means, a state is created in which a specific area of the second means is visible together with the first means when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as the "enlarged state"), and a state in which a specific area of the second means is not visible (hereinafter referred to as the "reduced state"), thereby changing the overall visual size of the first means and second means.

Specifically, by sliding the second means to the rear side of the first means (a position where they overlap when viewed from the front), a predetermined area of the second means is shielded by the first means when viewed from the front, making the predetermined area of the second means invisible (forming a reduced state). Also, by sliding the second means outward from the rear side of the first means (a position where they do not overlap when viewed from the front), the predetermined area of the second means becomes visible together with the first means (forming an enlarged state).

However, in such a conventional configuration, the size of the specified area of the second means depends on the size (external shape) of the first means when viewed from the front, so it was not possible to make the size of the specified area of the second means sufficiently large.

In other words, if the size (external shape) of the first means in a front view is increased, the space available for arranging the other means (components) is correspondingly reduced. Furthermore, when the other means (components) are displaced relatively, they are more likely to interfere with the first means, restricting the freedom of presentation when displacing the other components relatively.

On the other hand, if the size of the first means in a front view is reduced, the area that can be blocked is correspondingly smaller, so the specified area of the second means is smaller, and it is not possible to increase the size of the specified area of the second means when viewed together with the first means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the first and second means.

The gaming machine XG1 can improve the first and second means.

In other words, the second means is configured to be displaceable so that a specified area of the second means can be formed to face outward from the first means when viewed from the front, and a specified area of the second means can be formed to face the front side, so that the size of the specified area of the second means when viewed together with the first means can be increased while still providing space for arranging other means (components).

Specifically, the size (external dimensions) of the first means in a front view can be reduced, which makes it possible to secure space for arranging other means (components). In addition, when the other means (components) are displaced relatively, they are less likely to interfere with the first means (second means), improving the degree of freedom in the presentation of relatively displacing the other components. On the other hand, even if the size of the first means in a front view is reduced, the size of the first means in a front view does not depend on the size of the specified area of the second means, so the specified area of the second means can be increased. Therefore, the size of the specified area of the second means when viewed together with the first means can be increased.

In other words, the space in which the game machine's gimmicks are arranged is relatively spacious in the front-to-back direction (the direction connecting the front and back), and with the game machine XG1, by focusing on the space in the front-to-back direction and lengthening the first means in the front-to-back direction, the size of the first means when viewed from the front can be reduced and the size of the specified area of the second means can be increased. This allows the size of the specified area of the second means when viewed together with the first means to be increased while still ensuring space for arranging other means (components). Also, the reduced state can be made small and the enlarged state can be made large, making it possible to increase the visual change in size when viewed from the front between the reduced state and the enlarged state.

A gaming machine XG2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XG1, a light-emitting means is provided on the rear side of the first means and configured to be capable of emitting light, the first means is at least partially made of a light-transmitting material, and the predetermined area is at least partially configured to be capable of reflecting light.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XG1, gaming machine XG2 can improve the first and second means.

That is, the device is provided with a light-emitting means disposed on the rear side of the first means and configured to be capable of emitting light, the first means being at least partially configured from a light-transmitting material, and the predetermined area being at least partially configured to be capable of reflecting light. Therefore, when the predetermined area of the second means is configured to face the front side (expanded state), not only can the player see the light emitted from the light-emitting means and reflected at the predetermined area, but when the predetermined area of the second means is configured to face the outside of the first means as viewed from the front (reduced state), the light emitted from the light-emitting means and reflected at the predetermined area is made to enter the first means from its rear side, and the light that has passed through the first means (light emitted from the front side of the first means) can be seen by the player. This changes the way the light is seen, improving the presentation effect.

In the conventional configuration described above, in which the second means is slid to the rear side of the first means (a position where they overlap when viewed from the front), in the reduced state, even if light is emitted from the light-emitting means and reflected in a predetermined area, the reflected light is blocked by the light-emitting means (the substrate of the light-emitting means) and cannot be incident on the first means. In contrast, with the gaming machine XG2, the light reflected in the predetermined area can be made to wrap around from the outer side of the first means and the light-emitting means when viewed from the front, and can be incident on the rear side of the first means without being blocked by the light-emitting means (the substrate of the light-emitting means).

Gaming machine XG3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XG1 or XG2, the second means are arranged in a plurality on the outer side of the first means as viewed from the front, and when the predetermined area of the second means faces the outer side of the first means as viewed from the front, one side of one of the adjacent second means overlaps the other side of the other.

Gaming machine XG3 can improve the first and second means in addition to the effects of gaming machines XG1 and XG2.

In other words, when a specified area of the second means faces outward from the first means when viewed from the front (reduced state), one side of one of the adjacent second means overlaps the other side of the other, so the space required to arrange the second means in the reduced state can be reduced. In other words, the size of the second means can be increased. On the other hand, when a specified area of the second means faces the front side (expanded state), the gap between adjacent second means can be reduced.

A gaming machine XG3, characterized in that the first means is configured to overlap, in a front view, at least a portion of the overlapping portion between one side of one of the adjacent second means and the other side of the other of the adjacent second means when the predetermined area of the second means faces outward in a front view of the first means.

Gaming machine XG4 can improve the first and second means in addition to the effects of gaming machine XG3.

In other words, the first means is configured to overlap, in a front view, at least a part of the overlapping portion between one side of one adjacent second means and the other side of the other adjacent second means when the specified area of the second means faces outward in a front view of the first means (reduced state), making it difficult for the player to see the overlapping portion between the second means in the reduced state. This increases the element of surprise when transitioning from a state in which the specified area of the second means faces outward in a front view of the first means (reduced state) to a state in which the specified area of the second means faces the front side (enlarged state).

The gaming machine XG4 is characterized in that the second means is configured such that, when the specified area of the second means changes from a state in which it faces the front side to a state in which it faces the outer side of the first means as viewed from the front, one side of the second means arrives at the outer side of the first means as viewed from the front before the other side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XG4, gaming machine XG5 can improve the first and second means.

In other words, the second means is configured so that when the specified area of the second means changes from a state in which it faces the front side (expanded state) to a state in which it faces the outer side of the first means as viewed from the front (reduced state), one side of the second means arrives at the outer side as viewed from the front of the first means before the other side, so that the displacement of one and the other of the adjacent second means is made to be the same, while interference between these adjacent second means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine XG4, the second means is configured such that when the specified area of the second means changes from a state in which it faces the front side to a state in which it faces the outer side of the first means as viewed from the front, the displacement of one of the adjacent second means starts before the displacement of the other second means starts. The gaming machine XG6 is characterized in that the second means is configured such that when the specified area of the second means changes from a state in which it faces the front side to a state in which it faces the outer side of the first means as viewed from the front, the displacement of one of the adjacent second means starts before the displacement of the other second means starts.

Gaming machine XG6 can improve the first and second means in addition to the effects of gaming machine XG4.

In other words, the second means is configured such that when a predetermined area of the second means changes from a state in which it faces the front side (enlarged state) to a state in which it faces the outer side of the first means in a front view (reduced state), the displacement of one of the adjacent second means is started before the displacement of the other, so that it is possible to prevent the adjacent second means from interfering with each other while avoiding displacing the second means along a complex trajectory. For example, it is not necessary for one side of the second means to arrive at the outer side of the first means in a front view before the other side, and it is possible for one side and the other side of the second means to arrive at the outer side of the first means in a front view at the same time.

In the gaming machine XG6, the second means is configured so that when the predetermined area of the second means changes from a state in which the area faces the outside of the first means as viewed from the front to a state in which the predetermined area of the second means faces the front side, the adjacent second means start to displace one and the other at the same time. The gaming machine XG7 is characterized by the above.

Gaming machine XG7 can improve the first and second means in addition to the effects of gaming machine XG6.

In other words, the second means is configured so that when a predetermined area of the second means changes from a state in which it faces outward when viewed from the front of the first means (reduced state) to a state in which it faces the front side (enlarged state), the displacement of one of the adjacent second means and the displacement of the other second means start simultaneously, so that the manner of displacement of the second means when changing from an enlarged state to a reduced state and when changing from a reduced state to an enlarged state can be made different. This can improve the presentation effect achieved by displacing the second means.

Gaming machine XG8 is characterized in that, in gaming machines XG1 to XG7, the second means is configured to be displaceable outward in a front view of the first means after the specified area of the second means is changed from a state in which the specified area of the second means faces outward in a front view of the first means to a state in which the specified area of the second means faces the front side.

The gaming machine XG8 can improve the first and second means in addition to achieving the effects of any of the gaming machines XG1 to XG7.

In other words, the second means is configured to be displaceable outward from the first means when viewed from the front after a predetermined area of the second means faces the front side (enlarged state) from a state in which the predetermined area of the second means faces the front side of the first means when viewed from the front (reduced state), so that the size of the second means when viewed from the front can be made to appear even larger than in the enlarged state. This allows for a greater change in the visual size when viewed from the front.

<Concept of the invention using the first decoration unit G420 of the flower rotation unit G400 as an example>
A gaming machine XH1 comprising a first means and a second means configured to be able to revolve around the first means, the second means being configured to be able to rotate when revolving around the first means.

A gaming machine is known that has a first means and a second means that is configured to revolve around the first means (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, there was room for improvement in the first and second means of the gaming machine described above.

In other words, in a presentation in which the second means revolves around the first means, the relative displacement between the two is monotonous, and a sufficient presentation effect cannot be obtained.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the first and second means.

The gaming machine XH1 can improve the first and second means.

In other words, the second means is configured to be rotatable (spin on its axis) as it orbits (revolves) around the first means, which prevents the relative displacement between the two from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine XH1, the second means has one side region and the other side region located on either side of the center of rotation during the rotation, and the one side region and the other side region are configured in different ways. Gaming machine XH2.

Gaming machine XH2 can improve the first and second means in addition to the effects of gaming machine XH1.

In other words, the second means has one side region and the other side region located on either side of the center of rotation when rotating, and the one side region and the other side region are configured in different configurations, so that when the second means orbits around the first means, different configurations of the second means (one side region, other side region) can be made to appear alternately. This can increase the change in the visible outer shape and the mode of reflected light, for example, and enhance the presentation effect.

Note that different aspects include, for example, different visible shapes (external shapes), different outer surface roughness or color (i.e., different light reflection patterns), different materials, and combinations of these.

Gaming machine XH3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XH1 or XH2, the second means is configured to be displaceable in a direction approaching the outside of the first means and in a direction moving away from the first means, and the second means is displaced in a direction approaching the outside of the first means when the rotational position of the second means in the rotation is a predetermined rotational position.

Gaming machine XH3 can improve the first and second means in addition to the effects of gaming machine XH1 or XH2.

In other words, the second means is displaced in a direction approaching the outward side of the first means when the rotational position of the second means (rotation) is at a predetermined rotational position, so the second means can always be brought close to the outward side of the first means in the same posture, and interference (contact) of the second means with the outward side of the first means can be prevented. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the external shape of the second means, and allows the second means to be brought closer to the outward side of the first means.

Among any of the gaming machines XH1 to XH3, the second means is configured to be displaceable in a direction approaching the outside of the first means and in a direction moving away from the first means, and is configured such that when the second means is displaced most in a direction approaching the outside of the first means, the rotational position of the second means in the revolution becomes a predetermined rotational position. Gaming machine XH4.

Gaming machine XH4 can improve the first and second means in addition to achieving the effects of any of gaming machines XH1 to XH3.

In other words, since the second means is configured to have a predetermined orbital position when it is most displaced in a direction approaching the outer side of the first means, the orbital position of the second means can always be the same orbital position when it is closest to the outer side of the first means. This allows the second means to always be closest to the outer side of the first means at the same orbital position in a configuration in which the second means orbits (revolves) around the first means, and the second means can always be displaced in a direction away from the outer side of the first means, always starting from the same orbital position. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Gaming machine XH5 is any one of gaming machines XH1 to XH4, characterized in that the first means is equipped with a rotation means configured to be able to rotate in the same direction as the rotation of the second means or in the opposite direction.

The gaming machine XH5 can improve the first and second means in addition to achieving the effects of any of the gaming machines XH1 to XH4.

That is, since the first means is provided with a rotating means configured to be rotatable in the same direction as the revolution of the second means or in the opposite direction, the revolution of the second means and the rotation of the rotating means can be associated, enhancing the presentation effect. For example, when the rotating means rotates (rotates) in the same direction as the revolution of the second means, the revolution of the second means and the rotation of the rotating means can be visually recognized as one, making it easier for the player to focus on the rotation of the second means. On the other hand, when the rotating means rotates (rotates) in the opposite direction to the revolution of the second means, the player is given the illusion of a higher speed of the revolution of the second means (the apparent speed is increased) by the amount of the rotation of the rotating means, making it easier for the player to focus on the revolution of the second means.

Gaming machine XH6 is characterized in that the rotation speed of the second means is different from the rotation speed of the rotation means in gaming machine XH5.

Gaming machine XH6 can improve the first and second means in addition to the effects of gaming machine XH5.

In other words, since the speed of rotation of the second means and the speed of rotation of the rotating means are different, the rotation (revolution) of the second means and the rotation (rotation) of the rotating means can be associated, enhancing the presentation effect. For example, when the rotating means rotates (spins) in the same direction as the rotation (revolution) of the second means, the speed of rotation of the second means can be made slower than the speed of rotation of the rotating means, giving the player the illusion that the second means is rotating in the opposite direction to the second means. Also, for example, when the rotating means rotates (spins) in the opposite direction to the rotation (revolution) of the second means, the speed of rotation of the second means can be made faster than the speed of rotation of the rotating means, making it easier for the player to be illusioned about the speed of the rotation (revolution) of the second means (making the apparent speed faster), and making it easier for the player to focus on the rotation (revolution) of the second means.

<Concept of the invention using the first communication passage H300C of the upper decorative unit H14a as an example>
A gaming machine XI1 is provided with an operating means configured to be operable and a mounting means in which the operating means is mounted, the gaming machine being characterized in that it is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable and capable of changing the contact state with the mounting means.

A gaming machine is known that includes an operating means configured to be operable and an arrangement means in which the operating means is arranged (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, the gaming machine described above had room for improvement in terms of output associated with operations.

In other words, when sound is output in response to the operation of the operating means, the manner in which the sound is output can be changed by changing the operating mode of the operating means (for example, the frequency or waveform of the operation (vibration)). However, there was a problem in that simply changing the operating mode of the operating means did not sufficiently change the manner in which the sound was output.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can improve the output associated with operations.

Amusement machine XI1 can improve the output associated with operations.

In other words, since the device is provided with a displacement means that is configured to be displaceable and change the state of contact with the arrangement means, the rigidity of the arrangement means can be changed by changing the state of contact of the displacement means with the arrangement means. This makes it possible to change the form of the sound output in accordance with changes in the rigidity of the arrangement means, even if the operating mode of the operating means is kept constant. As a result, the output associated with the operation can be improved.

Gaming machine XI2 is characterized in that the operating means in gaming machine XI1 includes a first operating means and a second operating means arranged in the arrangement means at a predetermined distance, and the first operating means is positioned on one side of the displacement member and the second operating means is positioned on the other side of the displacement member when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Amusement machine XI2 can improve the output associated with operations.

That is, the operating means comprises a first operating means and a second operating means disposed on the disposition means at a predetermined distance, and since the first operating means is positioned on one side of the displacement member and the second operating means is positioned on the other side of the displacement member when viewed in the predetermined direction, the contact state of the displacement means with the disposition means can be changed in an area including an area between the first operating means and the second operating means when viewed in the predetermined direction. That is, the contact state of the displacement means with the disposition means (rigidity of the disposition means) can be changed in an area that is likely to cause a change in the form of the sound to be output. This makes it possible to efficiently change the form of the sound to be output when the rigidity of the disposition means is changed. As a result, the output associated with the operation can be improved.

Gaming machine XI3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XI1 or XI2, the displacement means forms part of the outer wall of the arrangement means.

Gaming machine XI3 can improve the output associated with operation in addition to the effects of gaming machines XI1 and XI2.

In other words, since the displacement means constitutes part of the outer wall of the arrangement means, it is possible to change the state of contact of the displacement means with the arrangement means (the rigidity of the arrangement means) in areas that are likely to cause changes in the form of the output sound. This makes it possible to efficiently change the form of the output sound when the rigidity of the arrangement means is changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the output associated with the operation.

It is preferable that the wall portion (part of the wall portion on the outside of the placement means) formed by the displacement means is configured to be visible to the player. By allowing the player to visually recognize the displacement of the displacement means, the player can recognize not only audibly but also visually that the rigidity of the placement means has changed (i.e., that the form of the sound output has changed).

In the gaming machine XI2, the arrangement means includes a first arrangement space in which the first operating means is arranged, a second arrangement space in which the second operating means is arranged, and a communication space formed to allow communication between the first arrangement space and the second arrangement space, and the displacement means forms part of a wall that divides the communication space. Gaming machine XI4.

Gaming machine XI4 can improve the output associated with operation in addition to the effects of gaming machine XI2.

In other words, since a communication space is provided that is formed to allow communication between the first arrangement space and the second arrangement space, and the displacement means constitutes part of the wall that divides the communication space, not only can the form of the sound to be output be changed by changing the rigidity of the arrangement means by changing the state of contact between the displacement means and the arrangement means, but the form of the sound to be output can also be changed by changing the amount of opening (including blocking) of the communication space to the outside in accordance with the displacement of the displacement means. In particular, since the rigidity and the amount of opening can be changed simultaneously, the change in the form of the sound to be output can be made even greater.

Gaming machine XI5 is any one of gaming machines XI1 to XI4, characterized in that the displacement means is configured as a plate-like body with one side rotatably supported by the placement means.

Gaming machine XI5 can improve the output associated with operation in addition to providing the effects of any of gaming machines XI1 to XI4.

In other words, since the displacement means is configured as a plate-like body with one side rotatably supported by the mounting means, the area in which the displacement means abuts against the mounting means can be minimized by displacing (rotating) the displacement means in a direction away from the mounting means. In other words, the area other than the supported portion can be made non-abutting. This allows for greater changes in the rigidity of the mounting means, making it easier to change the form of the sound to be output. As a result, the output associated with the operation can be improved.

Gaming machine XI6 is any one of gaming machines XI1 to XI5, characterized in that an elastic body made of an elastic material is interposed at the contact portion between the displacement means and the arrangement means.

Gaming machine XI6 can improve the output associated with operation in addition to providing the effects of any of gaming machines XI1 to XI5.

In other words, an elastic body made of an elastic material is interposed at the contact portion between the displacement means and the arrangement means, so that the displacement means is tightly attached to the arrangement means, and slippage between the two can be suppressed. This makes it easier to change the rigidity of the arrangement means, and allows for greater changes in the form of the output sound. As a result, the output associated with the operation can be improved.

Gaming machine XI7 is any one of gaming machines XI1 to XI6, and is characterized in that it has an operating means configured to be operable by a player, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable when the operating means is operated.

Gaming machine XI7 can improve the output associated with operation in addition to providing the effects of any of gaming machines XI1 to XI6.

In other words, since the displacement means is configured to be displaceable when the operating means is operated, the timing at which the rigidity of the placement means is changed (i.e., the timing at which the form of the output sound is changed) can be correlated with the operation of the operating means. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

<Concept of the invention using the recess H29821a1 of the ball launching unit H29112a as an example>
The gaming machine XJ1 is provided with a ball throwing means configured to be able to throw a game ball, and a flow path means which serves as a flow path for the game ball thrown by the ball throwing means, and is characterized in that the gaming machine XJ1 is provided with a concave or convex portion configured to be able to act on the game ball passing through the flow path means, and the concave or convex portion has a non-parallel portion configured non-parallel to the throwing direction by the ball throwing means.

There is a known gaming machine equipped with a ball-throwing means configured to be able to throw a gaming ball, and a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball-throwing means (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine left room for improvement in terms of throwing the gaming ball.

In other words, when a game ball is thrown by the ball throwing means, there is variation in the initial position of the game ball (relative position to the ball throwing means), so the game ball is not thrown straight along the flow path means and may collide (contact) with the inner surface of the flow path means (the inner surface to the side of the rolling surface along which the game ball rolls). In this way, when the game ball collides (contacts) with the inner surface of the flow path means, the reaction force received from the inner surface causes the game ball to go wild, and its trajectory is unstable, which is a problem.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the throwing of gaming balls.

The XJ1 gaming machine can improve the throwing of gaming balls.

In other words, the device is provided with a concave or convex portion configured to be able to act on the game ball passing through the flow path means, and the concave or convex portion has a non-parallel portion configured non-parallel to the throwing direction by the ball throwing means, so that the game ball can be made to collide (contact) with the non-parallel portion, preventing the game ball from going wild. This makes it possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and improve the throwing of the game ball.

A gaming machine XJ2 is characterized in that the concave or convex portion in the gaming machine XJ1 has a parallel portion that is configured approximately parallel to the ball throwing direction by the ball throwing means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XJ1, gaming machine XJ2 can improve the throwing of gaming balls.

In other words, the concave or convex portion has a parallel portion that is configured approximately parallel to the throwing direction of the ball throwing means, so that the game ball, which has relatively little turbulence, can be guided along the throwing direction. This makes it possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and improve the throwing of the game ball.

Gaming machine XJ3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XJ1 or XJ2, at least a portion of the recess or protrusion is configured so that its width increases in the direction of the ball being thrown by the ball throwing means.

The gaming machine XJ3 can improve the throwing of gaming balls in addition to the effects of the gaming machines XJ1 and XJ2.

In other words, at least a portion of the recess or protrusion is configured to increase in width in the direction of the ball being thrown by the ball throwing means, so that the recess or protrusion can be made to gradually act on a gaming ball that is relatively violent. In other words, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball's violent movements from being amplified by the collision (contact) of the gaming ball with the recess or protrusion. This makes it possible to stabilize the trajectory of the gaming ball and improve the throwing of the gaming ball.

Among any of the gaming machines XJ1 to XJ3, the gaming machine XJ4 is characterized in that at least a portion of the recess or protrusion is configured so that its width decreases in the direction of the ball being thrown by the ball throwing means.

The gaming machine XJ4 can improve the throwing of the gaming ball in addition to providing the effects of any of the gaming machines XJ1 to XJ3.

In other words, at least a portion of the recess or protrusion is configured to become narrower in width in the direction of the ball being thrown by the ball throwing means, so that the action of the recess or protrusion on the ball can continue while the ball is passing, making it easier to stop the ball from swinging wildly. This makes it possible to stabilize the trajectory of the ball and improve the throwing of the ball.

Gaming machine XJ5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines XJ1 to XJ4, the concave or convex portion is configured to be able to impart different effects to gaming balls passing in the throwing direction of the ball throwing means and gaming balls passing in the opposite direction to the throwing direction of the ball throwing means.

The gaming machine XJ5 can improve the throwing of the gaming ball in addition to providing the effects of any of the gaming machines XJ1 to XJ4.

In other words, the concave or convex portion is configured to be able to impart different effects to game balls passing in the throwing direction of the ball throwing means and game balls passing in the opposite direction to the throwing direction of the ball throwing means, so that the trajectory of a game ball passing in the throwing direction of the ball throwing means can be stabilized, while the passing direction of a game ball passing in the opposite direction to the throwing direction of the ball throwing means (for example, a game ball with a weak launch strength that returns to the launching means) can be changed (for example, the game ball can be guided to a recovery port and prevented from returning to the launching device). As a result, the throwing of the game ball can be improved.

Gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D12, E1 to E11, WA1-0 to WA1-5, WA2-1 to WA2-5, WB1-1 to WB1-6, WB2-1 to WB2-8, WB3-1 to WB3-3, WC1-1 to WC1-4, WC2-1 to WC2-5 and WD1-1 to WD1-5, gaming machines YA1 to YA11, YB1 to YB10, YC1 to YC1 1, YD1 to YD5, YE1 to YE3, YF1 to YF3 and YG1 to YG3, gaming machines BA1 to BA13, BB1 to BB3, BBZ1 to BBZ11, BC1 to BC11, BD1 to BD13, BE1 to BE3, BEZ1 to BEZ10, BG1 to BG16, BH1 to BH11, BI1 to BI3 and BIZ1 to BIZ11, gaming machines CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, C C1 to CC4, DA1 to DA19, DB1 to DB4, DC1 to DC4, DD1 to DD4, EA1 to EA4, EB1 to EB4 and EC1 to EC5, gaming machines FA1 to FA13, FB1 to FB12, FC1 to FC8 or FD1 to FD5, gaming machines KA1 to KA10, KB1 to KB8, KC1 to KC10, KD1 to KD10, KE1 to KE10, KF1 to KF16, KG Gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines Z1 to KG10, KKH1 to KKH5, KH1 to KH13, KI1 to KI11, KJ1 to KJ11, XA1 to XA9, XB to XB11, XC1 to XC9, XD1 to XD9, XE1 to XE9, XF1 to XF12, XG1 to XG8, XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI7, and XJ1 to XJ5. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) and stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and requiring that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping be a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D12, E1 to E11, WA1-0 to WA1-5, WA2-1 to WA2-5, WB1-1 to WB1-6, WB2-1 to WB2-8, WB3-1 to WB3-3, WC1-1 to WC1-4, WC2-1 to WC2-5 and WD1-1 to WD1-5, gaming machines YA1 to YA11, YB1 to YB10, YC1 to YC1 1, YD1 to YD5, YE1 to YE3, YF1 to YF3 and YG1 to YG3, gaming machines BA1 to BA13, BB1 to BB3, BBZ1 to BBZ11, BC1 to BC11, BD1 to BD13, BE1 to BE3, BEZ1 to BEZ10, BG1 to BG16, BH1 to BH11, BI1 to BI3 and BIZ1 to BIZ11, gaming machines CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, C C1 to CC4, DA1 to DA19, DB1 to DB4, DC1 to DC4, DD1 to DD4, EA1 to EA4, EB1 to EB4 and EC1 to EC5, gaming machines FA1 to FA13, FB1 to FB12, FC1 to FC8 or FD1 to FD5, gaming machines KA1 to KA10, KB1 to KB8, KC1 to KC10, KD1 to KD10, KE1 to KE10, KF1 to KF16, KG 1 to KG10, KKH1 to KKH5, KH1 to KH13, KI1 to KI11 and KJ1 to KJ11, XA1 to XA9, XB to XB11, XC1 to XC9, XD1 to XD9, XE1 to XE9, XF1 to XF12, XG1 to XG8, XH1 to XH6XI1 to XI7, XJ1 to XJ5, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined play area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, under the necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) located at a specific position within the game area opens in a specific manner, allowing balls to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D12, E1 to E11, WA1-0 to WA1-5, WA2-1 to WA2-5, WB1-1 to WB1-6, WB2-1 to WB2-8, WB3-1 to WB3-3, WC1-1 to WC1-4, WC2-1 to WC2-5 and WD1-1 to WD1-5, gaming machines YA1 to YA11, YB1 to YB10, YC1 to YC11, YD 1 to YD5, YE1 to YE3, YF1 to YF3 and YG1 to YG3, gaming machines BA1 to BA13, BB1 to BB3, BBZ1 to BBZ11, BC1 to BC11, BD1 to BD13, BE1 to BE3, BEZ1 to BEZ10, BG1 to BG16, BH1 to BH11, BI1 to BI3 and BIZ1 to BIZ11, gaming machines CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DA19, DB1 to DB4, DC1 to DC4, DD1 to DD4, EA1 to EA4, EB1 to EB4 and EC1 to EC5, gaming machines FA1 to FA13, FB1 to FB12, FC1 to FC8 or FD1 to FD5, gaming machines KA1 to KA10, KB1 to KB8, KC1 to KC10, KD1 to KD10, KE1 to KE10, KF1 to KF16, KG1 to KG10, KKH1 Gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines listed in the above items KKH5, KH1 to KH13, KI1 to KI11, KJ1 to KJ11, XA1 to XA9, XB to XB11, XC1 to XC9, XD1 to XD9, XE1 to XE9, XF1 to XF12, XG1 to XG8, XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI7, and XJ1 to XJ5. In particular, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is as follows: "A gaming machine equipped with variable display means which dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, variation of the identification information is started due to operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and which generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information, which uses balls as gaming media, requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured so that a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
<Code>
10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
16 Glass unit (front side surface forming means)
81 Third pattern display device (display device)
A60 Base plate (flow means)
A400 First operation unit (performance means)
A400b Rotational motion unit (displacement means)
A414 Guide slot (part of degree change means, form change means)
A423a Belt (endless belt)
A427 Connection mechanism (contact part)
A430 Base plate member (shaft side means, displacement means)
A440 Moving member (part of the component means, first component means, part of the relative displacement means)
A444 Functional slot (part of shape changing means)
A448 Columnar protrusion (placement part)
A449 Wiring (electrical wiring)
A450 Direction switching member (part of the configuration means, second configuration means, part of the relative displacement means)
A460 Decorative member (part of component means, second component means, part of relative displacement means)
A500 Second operation unit (performance means)
A500b Rotational motion unit (displacement means)
A514 Guide slot (part of degree change means, form change means)
A523a Belt (endless belt)
A527 Connection mechanism (placement part)
A530 Foundation member (shaft side means, displacement means)
A533 Functional slot (part of shape changing means)
A540 Moving member (part of the component means, first component means, part of the relative displacement means)
A546 Column-shaped protruding part (contact part)
A550 Direction switching means (part of the configuration means, second configuration means, part of the relative displacement means)
A560 Variable member (part of the constituent means, second constituent means, part of the relative displacement means)
A662 Rotating plate member (displacement means)
A674 Arc-shaped through hole (part of shape changing means)
A710 Frame-shaped member (part of pressing means)
A720 Light-emitting substrate (first means)
A724 Front light emitting unit (first light emitting means, multiple light emitting units)
A725 Rear light emitting unit (second light emitting means, multiple light emitting units)
A730 Front side plate member (first light receiving means)
A740 Rear side plate member (second light receiving means)
A750 Front cover member (part of pressing means, supporting means)
A753 Fastening part (first protruding part)
A754 Cylindrical fastening part (second protruding part)
A803z Front side member (front side means)
A806 Visibility changeable sheet (direction selection means)
A820 Front light emitting substrate (part of the first means, plate-like member)
A830 Rear light emitting substrate (part of the first means, plate-like member)
A4920 Light guide displacement member (part of direction selection means, plate-like means)
A4930 Covering member (part of direction selection means, plate-like means)
A4933a Light emitting means (light irradiating means)
AJ1 Rotating shaft rod (rotating shaft)
AJ2 Rotating shaft rod (rotating shaft)
AMT1 Drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 Drive motor (drive means)
AMT4 Drive motor (drive means)
ASE1 detection sensor (detection means)
ATL1 Left channel (first channel)
ATL2 Right channel (second channel)
W10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 Box cover (first member, second member)
Wj214a Rear wall (shielding means)
Wj214b Restriction wall portion (restraint means)
W220 Flat surface (contact part)
W223 Both end walls (contact parts)
W224a, W224b Recess Wj250 Second restriction portion (restriction means)
W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 Box base (first member, second member)
Wk312f Locking portion (restriction means)
W320, We320 Flat surface portion (contact portion)
W321 Both end walls (contact parts)
W5326, W6326 Recess W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 Protective cover (engagement member)
W501 Lower wall (contact part)
W502 Left wall (main body)
W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 Rear wall (main body)
W510 Rear wall (contact part)
W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 Front wall (main body)
W520 Front wall (contact part)
W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a Engagement portion W530a Engagement portion (first engagement portion, second engagement portion)
W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b Engagement portion (first portion, second portion)
W530b Engagement portion (first engagement portion, second engagement portion)
W530b1 Engagement portion (second engagement portion)
W530b2 Engagement portion (first engagement portion)
W531a, We531a, Wf531a Connecting piece (connecting part)
We531a Connecting piece (modification means, abutment portion, connecting portion, one-side connecting portion, other-side connecting portion)
W531b, W2531b, W3531b, W8531b, W9531b, Ww531b, Wx531b Connecting piece (connecting part)
W9531b1 Part 1 (Part 2)
W9531b2 Part 2 (Part 1)
W4534, W5534, Wq534, Wu534, Wv534 Protrusions (protrusions)
Wd540 Standing part (regulating part)
Wa550, Wb550, Wy550 Cutting section (changing means)
Wb560, Wd560 Guide part (contact part)
Wo580 Anti-slip pin (mounting part)
Wo583 Locking part (projection)
WSL Seal (Installation material)
10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base plate (part of the play area forming means)
67 Regular winning port (detection means, second detection means)
112a ball launching unit (game ball launching device)
640 2nd prize entry gate (2nd ball entry gate)
640a Electric device (operating means)
643 Right guide portion (first operating portion, first flow-down position)
645 Left side guide portion (second operating portion, second flow-down position)
700 Route configuration device (part of game area configuration means)
734 First ball throwing section (spill prevention means)
736a Ball passage hole (guided ball entrance hole)
740 Bending member (part of guide means)
750 Intervening member (part of guide means)
760 Distribution member (part of guide means)
765 Regular winning port (detection means, first detection means)
930 Winning port unit (part of the game area configuration means)
945 Feather member (movement means, operation means)
945e Plate-shaped portion (part of the operating means, first flow-down position)
945m Wing-shaped main body (part of the operating means, second flow-down position)
980 Allocation unit (part of game area configuration means, part of configuration means)
3765 Regular winning port (detection means, second detection means)
BK3 Third branch passage (part of the second route)
SE3 Detection device (first entrance)
SE4, SE5 Detection device (detection means)
SE6 Detection device (second entrance)
TR1 1st Passage (Part of the 1st Route)
TR2 2nd Passage (Part of the 1st Route)
B10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
B13 Game board (game board)
B22 Frame button (part of the operating means)
B64b Third winning port (detection means, second detection means, first detection means)
B66, B67 Through Gate (Open and close lottery entry gate)
B81 Third pattern display device (part of the performance execution means, part of the notification means, part of the change means, part of the performance switching means, part of the operation notification means, display means)
B113 Audio and lamp control device (part of the performance execution means, part of the notification means, part of the change means, part of the performance switching means, part of the operation notification means)
B410 Plate member (part of ball entry restriction means)
B413 Central opening (located behind part of the entrance area, part of the downstream area, and part of the branch position (second position))
B414 Ball passage opening (part of ball entry area)
B420 Design elements (part of preventive measures)
B422 Joint (part of guide means, prevention means)
B423 Partition plate (part of guide means, prevention means)
B428 Ball guide ridge (part of downstream region)
B430 Middle stage member (part of flow path restricting means)
B431 Central flow path (part of guide means, middle part, part of flow down means, part of non-branch position, part of guide path, specified part)
B440 Upper member (part of flow path restricting means)
B450 Slide member (part of guide means, part of flow-down means, part of switching means, first movable part)
B451 Tip portion (predetermined portion, first portion)
B452 Left guide plate portion (part of the predetermined means, part of the non-branching position)
B452a Inclined surface portion (access means, overlapping portion, inclined portion)
B453 Right guide plate portion (part of the predetermined means, part of the non-branching position)
B453a Inclined surface portion (access means, overlapping portion, inclined portion)
B470 tilting member (part of the guide means, downstream side part, arranged at part of the branching position (second position), second part, second movable part)
B640 Second winning port (detection means, first detection means, second detection means)
B640a Electric device (part of guide means, part of switching means)
B700a Second specific winning port (flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
B715 Retention plate portion (part of the downstream region, part of the first flow-down region, part of the guide ball selection means, part of the retention means)
B730 Movable top cover member (opening/closing means)
B740 Moving floor member (part of retention means, state switching means, contactable means)
B751 Opening (second flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
B782 Ball removal opening (part of the first flow area)
B810 Specific display (part of a specified display performance)
B811 Time display (part of the notification means, time notification means)
B812 End position (part of the notification means, end means)
B813 Frame button display (part of operation notification means)
B815 Caution comment display (part of auxiliary notification means)
B819 Second caution comment display (part of auxiliary notification means)
BB3 Ball placement (part of branch position, first position)
BDR1 pathway (part of the downstream area)
B2458a Ball interference protrusion (speed reducing means)
B2458b Ball interference protrusion (speed reducing means)
B5770 Switching device (displacement means)
B5772 Ball receiving recess (ball receiving part)
B6811 Launch time display (pseudo time notification means)
B6822 Target suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
B6841 Game preparation suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
B7817 Past light quantity display (difference notification means)
B7818 Past volume display (difference notification means)
C13 Game board C60 Base board (game board)
C60a Openings C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom surface portion (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow section)
C123a, C4123a Cutout section (inlet section)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 Bottom surface (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 Passage section (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 Receiving section (first surface)
C172b, C2172b Bottom surface (first surface)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 Axis C190 Decorative member (weight part)
C192 Shaft C2300 Magnet (attraction member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (attraction member, lower surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Receiving port (inlet)
CRt2 Second passage (first passage)
CRt3 Third passage (second passage)
CRt4 Fourth passage (first passage)
CRt5 Fifth passage (second passage)
CRt2001 1st passage (1st passage)
CRt2002 Second Passage (Second Passage)
CRt2003 3rd passage (1st passage)
CRt2004 4th passage (2nd passage)
CRt2005 5th passage (2nd passage)
CB1 ball (first ball)
CB2 ball (second ball)
D13 Game board (game machine)
D131f Protrusion (acting means, protrusion)
D131fa Second protrusion (dropping means)
D141g Protrusion (acting means, protrusion)
D170, D3170, D8170 Rolling member D180 Displacement member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 Transmission member (transmission means)
D4220 Second rolling member (rolling member)
DRt3 Third passage (upstream passage)
DRt6 6th Passage (Passage)
DRt9 9th Passage (Fall Passage)
E135b Central passage (ball entry means)
E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E133150, E14150, E15150 Distribution passage (passage member, first passage member)
E2150, E3150, E11150 Distribution passage (passage member)
E4150, E16150 Second distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E5150, E17150 Third distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 Protrusions (imparting means, protrusions, changing means, displacement means)
E2151, E3151 Rolling surface (rolling part)
E160 Central passage (ball entry means)
E190, E4190, E5190 Driving means (changing means, displacing means, second displacing means)
E2190 Elastic spring (displacement means)
E196, E196a Pinion gear (displacement means)
E196b, E196c Pinion gear (second displacement means)
E5196 Second pinion gear (second displacement means)
F130 Displacement member (first displacement means)
F131b Rolling surface (second rolling part)
F131c Recess (delay means, first rolling portion)
F131d Third passage through hole (opening)
F143 Opening and closing member (second displacement means)
F143L Left side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F143R Right side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F144 Slide member (transmission means)
F145 Connecting member (transmission means)
F5121 Second passage section (flow section)
F5123 Second passage wall portion (second restriction means)
F5125 Third passage wall portion (second restriction means)
F5154 Distributing member (restraining means)
F5154c Distribution unit (suppression means, first regulation means)
F5155 Displacement member (first displacement means, first means)
F5155L Left side displacement member (first displacement means, first means)
F5155R Right-side displacement member (first displacement means, second displacement means)
F5155d1 Recess (delay means, first rolling part)
F5155d2 Through hole (opening)
F5155e Holding part (second rolling part, rolling part, holding means)
F5157 Slide member (transmission means)
F5158 Opening and closing member (second displacement means)
F5158a Cut-off section (third means)
F5158L Left side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F5158R Right side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F5162 Passage member (release means)
F5163 Engagement member (maintenance means)
F6112 Lower passage (route)
F6114 Upper passage (route)
F6114 Upper passage (path, inclined section)
F6114c First inclined portion (inclined portion)
F6114d Second inclined portion (inclined portion)
F6160 First passage member (forming means)
F6162 Recess (forming means)
F6174 Displacement passage member (first displacement means)
F6173 Displacement member (second displacement means, change means)
F6173b1 Curved surface (guide part)
F6175 Connecting member (transmission means)
F7181 Second displacement passage member (first displacement means)
F11001 Sensor (changing means)
F11002 Solenoid (changing means)
F11003a First area (first position)
F11003b Second area (second position)
FOPf1, FOPf51, FOPf61 Inlet (inlet portion)
FRt3 Third passage (first rolling portion, second rolling portion)
FRt52 2nd passage (flow section, route)
FRt63 3rd passage (path, inclined section)
K10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
K13 Game board K60 Base board (game board)
K60a First recess (part of recess)
K60b Second recess (part of recess)
K60c Third recess (part of recess)
K60d Fourth recess (part of recess)
K63 General entry gate (part of the entry area)
K65a First specific winning gate (part of the winning area)
K81 third pattern display device (display device, illumination means)
K201 Base member (support means)
K207a Upper edge (reflection part)
K212 Light emitting unit (light irradiation means)
K220 Decorative cover (covering means, transparent means)
K221a Large design (part of a specified decoration)
K221b Small design (part of a specified decoration)
K224 Incline formation part (alignment part)
K251 Movable plate (part of forming means, part of displacement means)
K400 Front layer side movable device (part of the first means)
K405 Illumination board (light irradiation device)
K430 Rotating member (first means, direction changing means)
K444 Protruding part (contact prevention part)
K470 State change device (change means)
K476 Upper rotating member (second means, restricting means)
K500 Lifting device (displacement means, operation means)
K540 Long device (support means)
K640a Electric accessory (part of the forming means, part of the displacement means)
K640 2nd prize entry gate (part of the ball entry area)
K701 Second movable means (operated means)
K716 Detection sensor (detection means)
K730 Transmission device (transmission means)
K731 Drive side double gear (second transmission means)
K732 Arc-shaped portion (prevention means, operation stopping means)
K733 Transmission side double gear (first transmission means)
K735 Arm member (first moving means)
K760 Main decorative member (second moving means)
K800 Rear layer side movable device (second means)
K820 Inner opening and closing member (third means)
K830 Front opening/closing member (second means)
K867 Incline forming part (contact means, resistance generating means)
K874 Extended rotating member (first means)
K900 Indicator lamp (part of the first means)
K2060 Base plate (game board)
K2060e External slope (change)
K2060w Inclined opening (changed part)
K2100 Light irradiation device (light irradiation means)
K3100 Light irradiation device (light irradiation means)
K4560 Moving device (displacement means)
K4578 Rotating decorative member (operating means)
K4578a Viewing window (part of the viewing area)
K4701 Second movable device (switching means)
K4811 Plate-shaped part (part of opening and closing member)
K4821 Plate-shaped part (part of opening and closing member)
K4831 Plate-shaped part (part of opening and closing member)
K4891 Transparent film (part of gap prevention means)
K5086e Right side detection sensor (second specified part)
K5086k Detection sensor (first predetermined portion)
K5272 First inclined portion (part of the first flow area)
K5273 Vertical component (part of the second flow area)
K5280 Decorative cover (light transmitting part)
K5281 First contour section (first transmittance section)
K5282 First forming part (second transmittance part)
K5282a Non-transparent forming part (component)
K5282c Non-changing area (auxiliary part)
KOL481 Contour (part of the partition between blocked and unblocked areas)
KOL482a Inner contour (part of the partition between the blocked and non-blocked areas)
KOL482b Outer contour (part of the partition between the blocked and unblocked areas)
KOL483 Contour (part of the partition between blocked and unblocked areas)
KOL484 Contour (part of the partition between blocked and unblocked areas)
KMT71 Drive motor (drive means)
KSP74 Coil spring (biasing means)
H10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
H14, H16014, H35014 Front frame (front door means)
H14a, 7014a, 8014a, 9014a, 37014a, 38014a, 39014a, 40014a, 41014a Upper decorative unit (second means, installation means)
H14c, 10014c, 11014c, 12014c, 13014c Right side decorative unit (first means)
H81 Third pattern display device (liquid crystal display means)
H20 Cylinder lock (operation means)
H50 Lower tray (storage means)
H52 Ball removal lever (operation means)
H53 Ball guide opening (inlet means)
H112a1 Launch rail (part of flow path means)
H36130a Projection member (projection means)
H132a Throwing stop lever (operating means)
H172 Rear side opening (passage means)
H180, H44180, H45180, H46180 Operation unit (operation means)
H300A First space (front side installation space)
H300B Second space (rear side installation space)
H300C, H7300C First communication passage (communication space)
H300F Installation space (first installation space, second installation space)
H300D Second communication passage (communication space)
H312 Speaker assembly (operating means, first sound output means, second sound output means)
H312a Speaker (operation means, first sound output means, second sound output means, flow means)
H331a1 Slit (first opening)
H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 Upper plate (displacement means)
H333a Detection opening (second opening)
H333b Sound emission opening (second opening)
H9332d2 Opening (second opening)
H38336 Light irradiation unit (displacement means)
H16344 Board unit (projection means)
H350 Sound transmission unit (compartment means)
H400A, 11400A Passage space (passage means)
H452 Bend (installation means)
H452d Tip (lower means)
H452c Base end (extension means)
H455 Bulging portion (projecting means)
H455a1 Opening (inserted means)
H473 Opening (insertion means, communication means)
H478 Partition wall (projection means)
H10480 Fan (flow means)
H510, H17510, H18510 Base member (first means)
H515, H17515 Convex portion (projection means, second projection means)
H18515a1 Concave portion (positioning means)
H18515a2 Engaged portion (engaged means)
H515b1 Recess (positioning means)
H515b2 Engaged portion (engaged means)
H530, H17530, H18530 Lower plate forming member (second means)
H555, H18555 Connecting member (projecting means)
H555b, H18555b Protrusion (positioning means)
H555b1, H18555b1 Engagement portion (engagement means)
H17555 Connection part (second protruding means)
H561a Outlet (Outlet Means)
H14563 Second slide plate (projection means)
H583 Projection (projection means)
H583a Curved wall (curved section)
H583b Ribs H710, H45710, H46710 Tilt device (contact means)
H720 Lower frame member (base means)
H770, H44770 Base means H773 Substrate member (light emitting means)
H780, 21780, 22780 Driving means H780, 21780, 22780 Driving means (first means)
H790, H42790, H4379 Displacement means (second means)
H790, H42790, H43790 Displacement member (transmitting means)
H793 First coil spring (regulating means)
H794 Second coil spring (regulating means)
H821a, H24821a, H25821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a, H31821a, H32821a, H33821a, H34821a Back part (part of flow path means)
H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 Concave portion (restraint means, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2 Convex portion (suppression means, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H830 Launching means (throwing means)
H870, H23870, H32870 Rear case (part of flow path means)
H23871 Second recess (restraint means, recess, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H32872 Second convex portion (suppression means, convex portion, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H26893 Route change member (guiding means)
G420, G5420, G6420 First decoration unit (second means)
G426, G5426, G6426 Displacement unit (predetermined area)
G426a First decorative surface (one side area)
G426b Second decorative surface (other side area)
G440 Substrate member (light emitting means)
G480 Second decoration unit (first means)

H10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
H112a1 Launch rail (part of flow path means)
H821a, H24821a, H25821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a, H31821a, H32821a, H33821a, H34821a Back part (part of flow path means)
H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 Concave portion (suppression means)
H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2 Convex portion (suppression means)
H830 Launching means (throwing means)
H870, H23870, H32870 Rear case (part of flow path means)
H23871 Second recess (restraint means, recess)
H32872 Second convex portion (suppression means)

Gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D12, E1 to E11, WA1-0 to WA1-5, WA2-1 to WA2-5, WB1-1 to WB1-6, WB2-1 to WB2-8, WB3-1 to WB3-3, WC1-1 to WC1-4, WC2-1 to WC2-5 and WD1-1 to WD1-5, gaming machines YA1 to YA11, YB1 to YB10, YC1 to YC11, YD 1 to YD5, YE1 to YE3, YF1 to YF3 and YG1 to YG3, gaming machines BA1 to BA13, BB1 to BB3, BBZ1 to BBZ11, BC1 to BC11, BD1 to BD13, BE1 to BE3, BEZ1 to BEZ10, BG1 to BG16, BH1 to BH11, BI1 to BI3 and BIZ1 to BIZ11, gaming machines CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DA19, DB1 to DB4, DC1 to DC4, DD1 to DD4, EA1 to EA4, EB1 to EB4 and EC1 to EC5, gaming machines FA1 to FA13, FB1 to FB12, FC1 to FC8 or FD1 to FD5, gaming machines KA1 to KA10, KB1 to KB8, KC1 to KC10, KD1 to KD10, KE1 to KE10, KF1 to KF16, KG1 to KG10, KKH1 Gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines listed in the above items KKH5, KH1 to KH13, KI1 to KI11, KJ1 to KJ11, XA1 to XA9, XB to XB11, XC1 to XC9, XD1 to XD9, XE1 to XE9, XF1 to XF12, XG1 to XG8, XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI7, and XJ1 to XJ5. In particular, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is as follows: "A gaming machine equipped with variable display means which dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, variation of the identification information is started due to operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and which is equipped with special game state generating means which generates a special game state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information, which uses balls as gaming media, requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured so that a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state is generated."
＜Other＞
A gaming machine is known that includes a ball throwing means configured to be able to throw a gaming ball and a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball throwing means (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2017-221847 A).
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has room for improvement in terms of throwing the gaming ball.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the throwing of gaming balls.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 is equipped with a ball throwing means configured to be able to throw a gaming ball, and a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball throwing means, and is equipped with a suppression means configured to be able to suppress the reaction force in the contact direction acting on a gaming ball that has come into contact with the inner surface of the flow path means.
A gaming machine according to a second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the suppression means is configured as a recess provided in at least a part of the inner surface of the flow passage means.
A gaming machine according to a third technical concept is the gaming machine according to the second technical concept, wherein the recesses are recessed in at least a part of the inner surface on one side of the flow passage means and in at least a part of the inner surface on the other side of the flow passage means.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, the throwing of the gaming ball can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, the throwing of the gaming ball can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2, the throwing of the gaming ball can be improved.
<Code>
10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
16 Glass unit (front side surface forming means)
81 Third pattern display device (display device)
A60 Base plate (flow means)
A400 First operation unit (performance means)
A400b Rotational motion unit (displacement means)
A414 Guide slot (part of degree change means, form change means)
A423a Belt (endless belt)
A427 Connection mechanism (contact part)
A430 Base plate member (shaft side means, displacement means)
A440 Moving member (part of the component means, first component means, part of the relative displacement means)
A444 Functional slot (part of shape changing means)
A448 Columnar protrusion (placement part)
A449 Wiring (electrical wiring)
A450 Direction switching member (part of the configuration means, second configuration means, part of the relative displacement means)
A460 Decorative member (part of component means, second component means, part of relative displacement means)
A500 Second operation unit (performance means)
A500b Rotational motion unit (displacement means)
A514 Guide slot (part of degree change means, form change means)
A523a Belt (endless belt)
A527 Connection mechanism (placement part)
A530 Foundation member (shaft side means, displacement means)
A533 Functional slot (part of shape changing means)
A540 Moving member (part of the component means, first component means, part of the relative displacement means)
A546 Column-shaped protruding part (contact part)
A550 Direction switching means (part of the configuration means, second configuration means, part of the relative displacement means)
A560 Variable member (part of the constituent means, second constituent means, part of the relative displacement means)
A662 Rotating plate member (displacement means)
A674 Arc-shaped through hole (part of shape changing means)
A710 Frame-shaped member (part of pressing means)
A720 Light-emitting substrate (first means)
A724 Front light emitting unit (first light emitting means, multiple light emitting units)
A725 Rear light emitting unit (second light emitting means, multiple light emitting units)
A730 Front side plate member (first light receiving means)
A740 Rear side plate member (second light receiving means)
A750 Front cover member (part of pressing means, supporting means)
A753 Fastening part (first protruding part)
A754 Cylindrical fastening part (second protruding part)
A803z Front side member (front side means)
A806 Visibility changeable sheet (direction selection means)
A820 Front light emitting substrate (part of the first means, plate-like member)
A830 Rear light emitting substrate (part of the first means, plate-like member)
A4920 Light guide displacement member (part of direction selection means, plate-like means)
A4930 Covering member (part of direction selection means, plate-like means)
A4933a Light emitting means (light irradiating means)
AJ1 Rotating shaft rod (rotating shaft)
AJ2 Rotating shaft rod (rotating shaft)
AMT1 Drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 Drive motor (drive means)
AMT4 Drive motor (drive means)
ASE1 detection sensor (detection means)
ATL1 Left channel (first channel)
ATL2 Right channel (second channel)
W10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 Box cover (first member, second member)
Wj214a Rear wall (shielding means)
Wj214b Restriction wall portion (restraint means)
W220 Flat surface (contact part)
W223 Both end walls (contact parts)
W224a, W224b Recess Wj250 Second restriction portion (restriction means)
W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 Box base (first member, second member)
Wk312f Locking portion (restriction means)
W320, We320 Flat surface portion (contact portion)
W321 Both end walls (contact parts)
W5326, W6326 Recess W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 Protective cover (engagement member)
W501 Lower wall (contact part)
W502 Left wall (main body)
W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 Rear wall (main body)
W510 Rear wall (contact part)
W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 Front wall (main body)
W520 Front wall (contact part)
W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a Engagement portion W530a Engagement portion (first engagement portion, second engagement portion)
W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b Engagement portion (first portion, second portion)
W530b Engagement portion (first engagement portion, second engagement portion)
W530b1 Engagement portion (second engagement portion)
W530b2 Engagement portion (first engagement portion)
W531a, We531a, Wf531a Connecting piece (connecting part)
We531a Connecting piece (modification means, abutment portion, connecting portion, one-side connecting portion, other-side connecting portion)
W531b, W2531b, W3531b, W8531b, W9531b, Ww531b, Wx531b Connecting piece (connecting part)
W9531b1 Part 1 (Part 2)
W9531b2 Part 2 (Part 1)
W4534, W5534, Wq534, Wu534, Wv534 Protrusions (protrusions)
Wd540 Standing part (regulating part)
Wa550, Wb550, Wy550 Cutting section (changing means)
Wb560, Wd560 Guide part (contact part)
Wo580 Anti-slip pin (mounting part)
Wo583 Locking part (projection)
WSL Seal (Installation material)
10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base plate (part of the play area forming means)
67 Regular winning port (detection means, second detection means)
112a ball launching unit (game ball launching device)
640 2nd prize entry gate (2nd ball entry gate)
640a Electric device (operating means)
643 Right guide portion (first operating portion, first flow-down position)
645 Left side guide portion (second operating portion, second flow-down position)
700 Route configuration device (part of game area configuration means)
734 First ball throwing section (spill prevention means)
736a Ball passage hole (guided ball entrance hole)
740 Bending member (part of guide means)
750 Intervening member (part of guide means)
760 Distribution member (part of guide means)
765 Regular winning port (detection means, first detection means)
930 Winning port unit (part of the game area configuration means)
945 Feather member (movement means, operation means)
945e Plate-shaped portion (part of the operating means, first flow-down position)
945m Wing-shaped main body (part of the operating means, second flow-down position)
980 Allocation unit (part of game area configuration means, part of configuration means)
3765 Regular winning port (detection means, second detection means)
BK3 Third branch passage (part of the second route)
SE3 Detection device (first entrance)
SE4, SE5 Detection device (detection means)
SE6 Detection device (second entrance)
TR1 1st Passage (Part of the 1st Route)
TR2 2nd Passage (Part of the 1st Route)
B10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
B13 Game board (game board)
B22 Frame button (part of the operating means)
B64b Third winning port (detection means, second detection means, first detection means)
B66, B67 Through Gate (Open and close lottery entry gate)
B81 Third pattern display device (part of the performance execution means, part of the notification means, part of the change means, part of the performance switching means, part of the operation notification means, display means)
B113 Audio and lamp control device (part of the performance execution means, part of the notification means, part of the change means, part of the performance switching means, part of the operation notification means)
B410 Plate member (part of ball entry restriction means)
B413 Central opening (located behind part of the entrance area, part of the downstream area, and part of the branch position (second position))
B414 Ball passage opening (part of ball entry area)
B420 Design elements (part of preventive measures)
B422 Joint (part of guide means, prevention means)
B423 Partition plate (part of guide means, prevention means)
B428 Ball guide ridge (part of downstream region)
B430 Middle stage member (part of flow path restricting means)
B431 Central flow path (part of guide means, middle part, part of flow down means, part of non-branch position, part of guide path, specified part)
B440 Upper member (part of flow path restricting means)
B450 Slide member (part of guide means, part of flow-down means, part of switching means, first movable part)
B451 Tip portion (predetermined portion, first portion)
B452 Left guide plate portion (part of the predetermined means, part of the non-branching position)
B452a Inclined surface portion (access means, overlapping portion, inclined portion)
B453 Right guide plate portion (part of the predetermined means, part of the non-branching position)
B453a Inclined surface portion (access means, overlapping portion, inclined portion)
B470 tilting member (part of the guide means, downstream side part, arranged at part of the branching position (second position), second part, second movable part)
B640 Second winning port (detection means, first detection means, second detection means)
B640a Electric device (part of guide means, part of switching means)
B700a Second specific winning port (flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
B715 Retention plate portion (part of the downstream region, part of the first flow-down region, part of the guide ball selection means, part of the retention means)
B730 Movable top cover member (opening/closing means)
B740 Moving floor member (part of retention means, state switching means, contactable means)
B751 Opening (second flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
B782 Ball removal opening (part of the first flow area)
B810 Specific display (part of a specified display performance)
B811 Time display (part of the notification means, time notification means)
B812 End position (part of the notification means, end means)
B813 Frame button display (part of operation notification means)
B815 Caution comment display (part of auxiliary notification means)
B819 Second caution comment display (part of auxiliary notification means)
BB3 Ball placement (part of branch position, first position)
BDR1 pathway (part of the downstream area)
B2458a Ball interference protrusion (speed reducing means)
B2458b Ball interference protrusion (speed reducing means)
B5770 Switching device (displacement means)
B5772 Ball receiving recess (ball receiving part)
B6811 Launch time display (pseudo time notification means)
B6822 Target suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
B6841 Game preparation suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
B7817 Past light quantity display (difference notification means)
B7818 Past volume display (difference notification means)
C13 Game board C60 Base board (game board)
C60a Openings C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom surface portion (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow section)
C123a, C4123a Cutout section (inlet section)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 Bottom surface (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 Passage section (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 Receiving section (first surface)
C172b, C2172b Bottom surface (first surface)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 Axis C190 Decorative member (weight part)
C192 Shaft C2300 Magnet (attraction member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (attraction member, lower surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Receiving port (inlet)
CRt2 Second passage (first passage)
CRt3 Third passage (second passage)
CRt4 Fourth passage (first passage)
CRt5 Fifth passage (second passage)
CRt2001 1st passage (1st passage)
CRt2002 Second Passage (Second Passage)
CRt2003 3rd passage (1st passage)
CRt2004 4th passage (2nd passage)
CRt2005 5th passage (2nd passage)
CB1 ball (first ball)
CB2 ball (second ball)
D13 Game board (game machine)
D131f protrusion (acting means, protrusion)
D131fa Second protrusion (dropping means)
D141g Protrusion (acting means, protrusion)
D170, D3170, D8170 Rolling member D180 Displacement member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 Transmission member (transmission means)
D4220 Second rolling member (rolling member)
DRt3 Third passage (upstream passage)
DRt6 6th Passage (Passage)
DRt9 9th Passage (Fall Passage)
E135b Central passage (ball entry means)
E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E133150, E14150, E15150 Distribution passage (passage member, first passage member)
E2150, E3150, E11150 Distribution passage (passage member)
E4150, E16150 Second distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E5150, E17150 Third distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 Protrusions (imparting means, protrusions, changing means, displacement means)
E2151, E3151 Rolling surface (rolling part)
E160 Central passage (ball entry means)
E190, E4190, E5190 Driving means (changing means, displacing means, second displacing means)
E2190 Elastic spring (displacement means)
E196, E196a Pinion gear (displacement means)
E196b, E196c Pinion gear (second displacement means)
E5196 Second pinion gear (second displacement means)
F130 Displacement member (first displacement means)
F131b Rolling surface (second rolling part)
F131c Recess (delay means, first rolling portion)
F131d Third passage through hole (opening)
F143 Opening and closing member (second displacement means)
F143L Left side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F143R Right side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F144 Slide member (transmission means)
F145 Connecting member (transmission means)
F5121 Second passage section (flow section)
F5123 Second passage wall portion (second restriction means)
F5125 Third passage wall portion (second restriction means)
F5154 Distributing member (restraining means)
F5154c Distribution unit (suppression means, first regulation means)
F5155 Displacement member (first displacement means, first means)
F5155L Left side displacement member (first displacement means, first means)
F5155R Right-side displacement member (first displacement means, second displacement means)
F5155d1 Recess (delay means, first rolling part)
F5155d2 Through hole (opening)
F5155e Holding part (second rolling part, rolling part, holding means)
F5157 Slide member (transmission means)
F5158 Opening and closing member (second displacement means)
F5158a Cut-off section (third means)
F5158L Left side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F5158R Right side opening/closing member (second displacement means)
F5162 Passage member (release means)
F5163 Engagement member (maintenance means)
F6112 Lower passage (route)
F6114 Upper passage (route)
F6114 Upper passage (path, inclined section)
F6114c First inclined portion (inclined portion)
F6114d Second inclined portion (inclined portion)
F6160 First passage member (forming means)
F6162 Recess (forming means)
F6174 Displacement passage member (first displacement means)
F6173 Displacement member (second displacement means, change means)
F6173b1 Curved surface (guide part)
F6175 Connecting member (transmission means)
F7181 Second displacement passage member (first displacement means)
F11001 Sensor (changing means)
F11002 Solenoid (changing means)
F11003a First area (first position)
F11003b Second area (second position)
FOPf1, FOPf51, FOPf61 Inlet (inlet portion)
FRt3 Third passage (first rolling portion, second rolling portion)
FRt52 2nd passage (flow section, route)
FRt63 3rd passage (path, inclined section)
K10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
K13 Game board K60 Base board (game board)
K60a First recess (part of recess)
K60b Second recess (part of recess)
K60c Third recess (part of recess)
K60d Fourth recess (part of recess)
K63 General entry gate (part of the entry area)
K65a First specific winning gate (part of the winning area)
K81 third pattern display device (display device, illumination means)
K201 Base member (support means)
K207a Upper edge (reflection part)
K212 Light emitting unit (light irradiation means)
K220 Decorative cover (covering means, transparent means)
K221a Large design (part of a specified decoration)
K221b Small design (part of a specified decoration)
K224 Incline formation part (alignment part)
K251 Movable plate (part of forming means, part of displacement means)
K400 Front layer side movable device (part of the first means)
K405 Illumination board (light irradiation device)
K430 Rotating member (first means, direction changing means)
K444 Protruding part (contact prevention part)
K470 State change device (change means)
K476 Upper rotating member (second means, restricting means)
K500 Lifting device (displacement means, operation means)
K540 Long device (support means)
K640a Electric accessory (part of the forming means, part of the displacement means)
K640 2nd prize entry gate (part of the ball entry area)
K701 Second movable means (operated means)
K716 Detection sensor (detection means)
K730 Transmission device (transmission means)
K731 Drive side double gear (second transmission means)
K732 Arc-shaped portion (prevention means, operation stopping means)
K733 Transmission side double gear (first transmission means)
K735 Arm member (first moving means)
K760 Main decorative member (second moving means)
K800 Rear layer side movable device (second means)
K820 Inner opening and closing member (third means)
K830 Front opening/closing member (second means)
K867 Incline forming part (contact means, resistance generating means)
K874 Extended rotating member (first means)
K900 Indicator lamp (part of the first means)
K2060 Base plate (game board)
K2060e External slope (change)
K2060w Inclined opening (changed part)
K2100 Light irradiation device (light irradiation means)
K3100 Light irradiation device (light irradiation means)
K4560 Moving device (displacement means)
K4578 Rotating decorative member (operating means)
K4578a Viewing window (part of the viewing area)
K4701 Second movable device (switching means)
K4811 Plate-shaped part (part of opening and closing member)
K4821 Plate-shaped part (part of opening and closing member)
K4831 Plate-shaped part (part of opening and closing member)
K4891 Transparent film (part of gap prevention means)
K5086e Right side detection sensor (second specified part)
K5086k Detection sensor (first predetermined portion)
K5272 First inclined portion (part of the first flow area)
K5273 Vertical component (part of the second flow area)
K5280 Decorative cover (light transmitting part)
K5281 First contour section (first transmittance section)
K5282 First forming part (second transmittance part)
K5282a Non-transparent forming part (component)
K5282c Non-changing area (auxiliary part)
KOL481 Contour (part of the partition between blocked and unblocked areas)
KOL482a Inner contour (part of the partition between the blocked and non-blocked areas)
KOL482b Outer contour (part of the partition between the blocked and unblocked areas)
KOL483 Contour (part of the partition between blocked and unblocked areas)
KOL484 Contour (part of the partition between blocked and unblocked areas)
KMT71 Drive motor (drive means)
KSP74 Coil spring (biasing means)
H10 Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
H14, H16014, H35014 Front frame (front door means)
H14a, 7014a, 8014a, 9014a, 37014a, 38014a, 39014a, 40014a, 41014a Upper decorative unit (second means, installation means)
H14c, 10014c, 11014c, 12014c, 13014c Right side decorative unit (first means)
H81 Third pattern display device (liquid crystal display means)
H20 Cylinder lock (operation means)
H50 Lower tray (storage means)
H52 Ball removal lever (operation means)
H53 Ball guide opening (inlet means)
H112a1 Launch rail (part of flow path means)
H36130a Projection member (projection means)
H132a Throwing stop lever (operating means)
H172 Rear side opening (passage means)
H180, H44180, H45180, H46180 Operation unit (operation means)
H300A First space (front side installation space)
H300B Second space (rear side installation space)
H300C, H7300C First communication passage (communication space)
H300F Installation space (first installation space, second installation space)
H300D Second communication passage (communication space)
H312 Speaker assembly (operating means, first sound output means, second sound output means)
H312a Speaker (operation means, first sound output means, second sound output means, flow means)
H331a1 Slit (first opening)
H9332, H37332, H39332, H40332 Upper plate (displacement means)
H333a Detection opening (second opening)
H333b Sound emission opening (second opening)
H9332d2 Opening (second opening)
H38336 Light irradiation unit (displacement means)
H16344 Board unit (projection means)
H350 Sound transmission unit (compartment means)
H400A, 11400A Passage space (passage means)
H452 Bend (installation means)
H452d Tip (lower means)
H452c Base end (extension means)
H455 Bulging portion (projecting means)
H455a1 Opening (inserted means)
H473 Opening (insertion means, communication means)
H478 Partition wall (projection means)
H10480 Fan (flow means)
H510, H17510, H18510 Base member (first means)
H515, H17515 Convex portion (projection means, second projection means)
H18515a1 Concave portion (positioning means)
H18515a2 Engaged portion (engaged means)
H515b1 Recess (positioning means)
H515b2 Engaged portion (engaged means)
H530, H17530, H18530 Lower plate forming member (second means)
H555, H18555 Connecting member (projecting means)
H555b, H18555b Protrusion (positioning means)
H555b1, H18555b1 Engagement portion (engagement means)
H17555 Connection part (second protruding means)
H561a Outlet (Outlet Means)
H14563 Second slide plate (projection means)
H583 Projection (projection means)
H583a Curved wall (curved section)
H583b Ribs H710, H45710, H46710 Tilt device (contact means)
H720 Lower frame member (base means)
H770, H44770 Base means H773 Substrate member (light emitting means)
H780, 21780, 22780 Driving means H780, 21780, 22780 Driving means (first means)
H790, H42790, H4379 Displacement means (second means)
H790, H42790, H43790 Displacement member (transmitting means)
H793 First coil spring (regulating means)
H794 Second coil spring (regulating means)
H821a, H24821a, H25821a, H27821a, H29821a, H30821a, H31821a, H32821a, H33821a, H34821a Back part (part of flow path means)
H821a1, H25821a1, H27821a1, H29821a1, H30821a1 Concave portion (restraint means, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H24821a2, H31821a2, H32821a2, H33821a2, H34821a2 Convex portion (suppression means, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H830 Launching means (throwing means)
H870, H23870, H32870 Rear case (part of flow path means)
H23871 Second recess (restraint means, recess, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H32872 Second convex portion (suppression means, convex portion, non-parallel portion, parallel portion)
H26893 Route change member (guiding means)
G420, G5420, G6420 First decoration unit (second means)
G426, G5426, G6426 Displacement unit (predetermined area)
G426a First decorative surface (one side area)
G426b Second decorative surface (other side area)
G440 Substrate member (light emitting means)
G480 Second decoration unit (first means)

Claims (3)

A gaming machine including a ball throwing means configured to be able to throw a gaming ball and a flow path means that serves as a flow path for the gaming ball thrown by the ball throwing means,
A gaming machine comprising a suppression means configured to suppress a reaction force in a contact direction acting on a gaming ball that has come into contact with the inner surface of the flow path means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the suppression means is configured as a recess recessed into at least a portion of the inner surface of the flow passage means. The gaming machine according to claim 2, characterized in that the recess is recessed in at least a portion of the inner surface on one side of the flow passage means and in at least a portion of the inner surface on the other side of the flow passage means.

Images